From ea318d1431c89e647598c510c4245c6571aa5f46 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Timothy Pearson Date: Thu, 26 Jan 2012 23:32:43 -0600 Subject: Update to latest tqt3 automated conversion --- doc/html/aboutntqt.html | 81 + doc/html/aboutqt.html | 81 - doc/html/abstractwidgets.html | 16 +- doc/html/accelerators.html | 4 +- doc/html/aclock-example.html | 142 +- doc/html/activentqt.html | 86 + doc/html/activeqt-dotnet.html | 32 +- doc/html/activeqt-tools-idc.html | 2 +- doc/html/activeqt-tools-testcon.html | 2 +- doc/html/activeqt-tools.html | 2 +- doc/html/activeqt.html | 86 - doc/html/addressbook-example.html | 414 +- doc/html/advanced.html | 26 +- doc/html/annotated.html | 446 +- doc/html/appearance.html | 48 +- doc/html/appicon.html | 4 +- doc/html/application.html | 26 +- doc/html/archivesearch-example.html | 46 +- doc/html/basic.html | 34 +- doc/html/biff-example.html | 84 +- doc/html/bigtable-example.html | 46 +- doc/html/buttongroups-example.html | 122 +- doc/html/canvas-chart-example.html | 450 +- doc/html/canvas-example.html | 392 +- doc/html/canvas.html | 10 +- doc/html/chart-canvastext-h.html | 6 +- doc/html/chart-canvasview-cpp.html | 28 +- doc/html/chart-canvasview-h.html | 8 +- doc/html/chart-chartform-cpp.html | 354 +- doc/html/chart-chartform-h.html | 36 +- doc/html/chart-chartform_canvas-cpp.html | 38 +- doc/html/chart-chartform_files-cpp.html | 68 +- doc/html/chart-element-cpp.html | 42 +- doc/html/chart-element-h.html | 40 +- doc/html/chart-main-cpp.html | 18 +- doc/html/chart-optionsform-cpp.html | 106 +- doc/html/chart-optionsform-h.html | 38 +- doc/html/chart-setdataform-cpp.html | 156 +- doc/html/chart-setdataform-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/checklists-example.html | 102 +- doc/html/classchart.html | 408 +- doc/html/classes.html | 446 +- doc/html/clientserver-example.html | 166 +- doc/html/collection.html | 106 +- doc/html/commercialeditions.html | 4 +- doc/html/commonproblems.html | 2 +- doc/html/coordsys.html | 114 +- doc/html/cursor-example.html | 66 +- doc/html/customlayout-example.html | 330 +- doc/html/customlayout.html | 70 +- doc/html/customstyles.html | 74 +- doc/html/database.html | 36 +- doc/html/datastreamformat.html | 24 +- doc/html/dclock-example.html | 50 +- doc/html/debug.html | 28 +- doc/html/designer-manual-1.html | 6 +- doc/html/designer-manual-16.html | 24 +- doc/html/designer-manual-2.html | 8 +- doc/html/designer-manual-3.html | 234 +- doc/html/designer-manual-4.html | 154 +- doc/html/designer-manual-5.html | 2 +- doc/html/designer-manual-6.html | 92 +- doc/html/designer-manual-7.html | 150 +- doc/html/designer-manual-8.html | 200 +- doc/html/designer-manual-9.html | 16 +- doc/html/desktop-example.html | 204 +- doc/html/dialogs.html | 20 +- doc/html/dirview-example.html | 260 +- doc/html/distributingntqt.html | 124 + doc/html/distributingqt.html | 124 - doc/html/distributor-example.html | 152 +- doc/html/dnd.html | 76 +- doc/html/draganddrop.html | 2 +- doc/html/drawdemo-example.html | 168 +- doc/html/drawlines-example.html | 56 +- doc/html/editions.html | 4 +- doc/html/emb-accel.html | 4 +- doc/html/emb-charinput.html | 8 +- doc/html/emb-classes.html | 2 +- doc/html/emb-features.html | 76 +- doc/html/emb-install.html | 2 +- doc/html/emb-performance.html | 6 +- doc/html/emb-porting.html | 2 +- doc/html/emb-qvfb.html | 2 +- doc/html/emb-running.html | 2 +- doc/html/environment.html | 24 +- doc/html/events.html | 6 +- doc/html/eventsandfilters.html | 40 +- doc/html/extension-dialog-example.html | 22 +- doc/html/faq.html | 2 +- doc/html/fileiconview-example.html | 564 +- doc/html/focus.html | 24 +- doc/html/forever-example.html | 66 +- doc/html/ftpclient-example.html | 180 +- doc/html/functions.html | 5600 ++++----- doc/html/geomanagement.html | 22 +- doc/html/geometry.html | 6 +- doc/html/grapher-nsplugin-example.html | 234 +- doc/html/graphics.html | 60 +- doc/html/groups.html | 4 +- doc/html/headerfilesynonyms | 332 +- doc/html/headers.html | 472 +- doc/html/hello-example.html | 86 +- doc/html/helpsystem-example.html | 284 +- doc/html/helpsystem.html | 10 +- doc/html/helpviewer-example.html | 372 +- doc/html/hierarchy.html | 466 +- doc/html/how-to-learn-ntqt.html | 91 + doc/html/how-to-learn-qt.html | 91 - doc/html/httpd-example.html | 84 +- doc/html/i18n-example.html | 202 +- doc/html/i18n.html | 154 +- doc/html/iconview-example.html | 48 +- doc/html/iconview-simple_dd-main-cpp.html | 54 +- doc/html/iconview-simple_dd-main-h.html | 32 +- doc/html/iconview.html | 8 +- doc/html/images.html | 48 +- doc/html/index | 11706 +++++++++--------- doc/html/index.html | 6 +- doc/html/io.html | 50 +- doc/html/keyfeatures30.html | 40 +- doc/html/layout-example.html | 92 +- doc/html/layout.html | 86 +- doc/html/licenses.html | 26 +- doc/html/life-example.html | 70 +- doc/html/lineedits-example.html | 178 +- doc/html/linguist-manual-2.html | 4 +- doc/html/linguist-manual-4.html | 142 +- doc/html/listbox-example.html | 164 +- doc/html/listboxcombo-example.html | 156 +- doc/html/listviews-example.html | 228 +- doc/html/mac-differences.html | 12 +- doc/html/mail-example.html | 110 +- doc/html/mainclasses.html | 190 +- doc/html/mdi-example.html | 384 +- doc/html/menu-example.html | 280 +- doc/html/metaobjects.html | 20 +- doc/html/misc.html | 36 +- doc/html/moc.html | 42 +- doc/html/modules.html | 2 +- doc/html/motif-customwidget-example.html | 36 +- doc/html/motif-dialog-example.html | 22 +- doc/html/motif-extension.html | 16 +- doc/html/motif-walkthrough-1.html | 4 +- doc/html/motif-walkthrough-10.html | 10 +- doc/html/motif-walkthrough-2.html | 10 +- doc/html/motif-walkthrough-3.html | 22 +- doc/html/motif-walkthrough-4.html | 8 +- doc/html/motif-walkthrough-5.html | 6 +- doc/html/motif-walkthrough-6.html | 10 +- doc/html/motif-walkthrough-7.html | 4 +- doc/html/motif-walkthrough-8.html | 24 +- doc/html/motif-walkthrough-9.html | 12 +- doc/html/motif-walkthrough.html | 2 +- doc/html/movies-example.html | 168 +- doc/html/multimedia.html | 4 +- doc/html/netscape-plugin.html | 2 +- doc/html/network.html | 150 +- doc/html/networkprotocol-example.html | 164 +- doc/html/ntqaccel.html | 337 + doc/html/ntqaccessible.html | 291 + doc/html/ntqaction.html | 520 + doc/html/ntqapplication.html | 2046 ++++ doc/html/ntqarray.html | 47 + doc/html/ntqasciicache.html | 252 + doc/html/ntqasciidict.html | 325 + doc/html/ntqassistantclient.html | 179 + doc/html/ntqasyncio.html | 83 + doc/html/ntqbig5codec.html | 101 + doc/html/ntqbitarray.html | 350 + doc/html/ntqbitmap.html | 186 + doc/html/ntqbrush.html | 239 + doc/html/ntqbuffer.html | 148 + doc/html/ntqbutton.html | 477 + doc/html/ntqbuttongroup.html | 264 + doc/html/ntqcache.html | 279 + doc/html/ntqcanvas.html | 588 + doc/html/ntqcdestyle.html | 83 + doc/html/ntqcheckbox.html | 302 + doc/html/ntqclipboard.html | 447 + doc/html/ntqcollection.html | 47 + doc/html/ntqcolor.html | 618 + doc/html/ntqcolordialog.html | 118 + doc/html/ntqcombobox.html | 602 + doc/html/ntqcommonstyle.html | 70 + doc/html/ntqcstring.html | 1105 ++ doc/html/ntqcursor.html | 287 + doc/html/ntqdatabrowser.html | 715 ++ doc/html/ntqdatastream.html | 570 + doc/html/ntqdatatable.html | 809 ++ doc/html/ntqdataview.html | 151 + doc/html/ntqdatetime.html | 393 + doc/html/ntqdatetimeedit.html | 169 + doc/html/ntqdeepcopy.html | 168 + doc/html/ntqdesktopwidget.html | 202 + doc/html/ntqdial.html | 352 + doc/html/ntqdialog.html | 355 + doc/html/ntqdict.html | 399 + doc/html/ntqdir.html | 818 ++ doc/html/ntqdns.html | 334 + doc/html/ntqdockarea.html | 278 + doc/html/ntqdockwindow.html | 509 + doc/html/ntqdragobject.html | 220 + doc/html/ntqdropsite.html | 75 + doc/html/ntqeditorfactory.html | 104 + doc/html/ntqerrormessage.html | 105 + doc/html/ntqeucjpcodec.html | 116 + doc/html/ntqeuckrcodec.html | 95 + doc/html/ntqevent.html | 193 + doc/html/ntqeventloop.html | 280 + doc/html/ntqfile.html | 503 + doc/html/ntqfiledialog.html | 907 ++ doc/html/ntqfileinfo.html | 503 + doc/html/ntqfocusdata.html | 123 + doc/html/ntqfont.html | 922 ++ doc/html/ntqfontdatabase.html | 322 + doc/html/ntqfontdialog.html | 143 + doc/html/ntqfontinfo.html | 191 + doc/html/ntqfontmetrics.html | 419 + doc/html/ntqframe.html | 370 + doc/html/ntqftp.html | 693 ++ doc/html/ntqgb18030codec.html | 119 + doc/html/ntqgbkcodec.html | 67 + doc/html/ntqgl.html | 98 + doc/html/ntqglcolormap.html | 179 + doc/html/ntqgrid.html | 89 + doc/html/ntqgridview.html | 261 + doc/html/ntqgroupbox.html | 330 + doc/html/ntqguardedptr.html | 194 + doc/html/ntqhbox.html | 105 + doc/html/ntqhbuttongroup.html | 89 + doc/html/ntqheader.html | 607 + doc/html/ntqhgroupbox.html | 87 + doc/html/ntqhostaddress.html | 200 + doc/html/ntqhttp.html | 593 + doc/html/ntqiconset.html | 328 + doc/html/ntqiconview.html | 1009 ++ doc/html/ntqimage.html | 1117 ++ doc/html/ntqimageformatplugin.html | 94 + doc/html/ntqinputdialog.html | 196 + doc/html/ntqintcache.html | 242 + doc/html/ntqintdict.html | 313 + doc/html/ntqiodevice.html | 553 + doc/html/ntqjiscodec.html | 132 + doc/html/ntqkeysequence.html | 206 + doc/html/ntqlabel.html | 420 + doc/html/ntqlayout.html | 414 + doc/html/ntqlcdnumber.html | 332 + doc/html/ntqlibrary.html | 290 + doc/html/ntqlineedit.html | 773 ++ doc/html/ntqlist.html | 47 + doc/html/ntqlistbox.html | 1163 ++ doc/html/ntqlistview.html | 1231 ++ doc/html/ntqlocale.html | 852 ++ doc/html/ntqlocalfs.html | 82 + doc/html/ntqmainwindow.html | 956 ++ doc/html/ntqmap.html | 574 + doc/html/ntqmemarray.html | 561 + doc/html/ntqmenubar.html | 593 + doc/html/ntqmenudata.html | 706 ++ doc/html/ntqmessagebox.html | 751 ++ doc/html/ntqmetaobject.html | 187 + doc/html/ntqmotifplusstyle.html | 71 + doc/html/ntqmotifstyle.html | 93 + doc/html/ntqmovie.html | 388 + doc/html/ntqmultilineedit.html | 343 + doc/html/ntqmutex.html | 195 + doc/html/ntqnetworkprotocol.html | 532 + doc/html/ntqobject.html | 958 ++ doc/html/ntqobjectcleanuphandler.html | 139 + doc/html/ntqobjectlist.html | 96 + doc/html/ntqpaintdevice.html | 464 + doc/html/ntqpaintdevicemetrics.html | 150 + doc/html/ntqpainter.html | 1626 +++ doc/html/ntqpair.html | 126 + doc/html/ntqpalette.html | 308 + doc/html/ntqpen.html | 287 + doc/html/ntqpicture.html | 270 + doc/html/ntqpixmap.html | 825 ++ doc/html/ntqpixmapcache.html | 191 + doc/html/ntqplatinumstyle.html | 84 + doc/html/ntqpoint.html | 378 + doc/html/ntqpointarray.html | 285 + doc/html/ntqpopupmenu.html | 830 ++ doc/html/ntqprinter.html | 758 ++ doc/html/ntqprocess.html | 633 + doc/html/ntqprogressbar.html | 224 + doc/html/ntqprogressdialog.html | 409 + doc/html/ntqptrcollection.html | 177 + doc/html/ntqptrdict.html | 316 + doc/html/ntqptrlist.html | 741 ++ doc/html/ntqptrqueue.html | 216 + doc/html/ntqptrstack.html | 201 + doc/html/ntqptrvector.html | 393 + doc/html/ntqpushbutton.html | 470 + doc/html/ntqqueue.html | 47 + doc/html/ntqradiobutton.html | 278 + doc/html/ntqrangecontrol.html | 336 + doc/html/ntqrect.html | 645 + doc/html/ntqregexp.html | 1037 ++ doc/html/ntqregion.html | 364 + doc/html/ntqscrollbar.html | 382 + doc/html/ntqscrollview.html | 930 ++ doc/html/ntqsemaphore.html | 149 + doc/html/ntqserversocket.html | 173 + doc/html/ntqsessionmanager.html | 346 + doc/html/ntqsettings.html | 626 + doc/html/ntqsgistyle.html | 77 + doc/html/ntqsignal.html | 182 + doc/html/ntqsignalmapper.html | 124 + doc/html/ntqsimplerichtext.html | 223 + doc/html/ntqsize.html | 378 + doc/html/ntqsizegrip.html | 112 + doc/html/ntqsizepolicy.html | 291 + doc/html/ntqsjiscodec.html | 113 + doc/html/ntqslider.html | 368 + doc/html/ntqsocket.html | 500 + doc/html/ntqsocketdevice.html | 419 + doc/html/ntqsocketnotifier.html | 183 + doc/html/ntqsortedlist.html | 95 + doc/html/ntqsound.html | 180 + doc/html/ntqspinbox.html | 561 + doc/html/ntqsplashscreen.html | 193 + doc/html/ntqsplitter.html | 337 + doc/html/ntqsql.html | 121 + doc/html/ntqsqlcursor.html | 761 ++ doc/html/ntqsqldatabase.html | 668 ++ doc/html/ntqsqldriver.html | 295 + doc/html/ntqsqldriverplugin.html | 100 + doc/html/ntqsqleditorfactory.html | 111 + doc/html/ntqsqlerror.html | 157 + doc/html/ntqsqlfield.html | 216 + doc/html/ntqsqlform.html | 237 + doc/html/ntqsqlindex.html | 155 + doc/html/ntqsqlpropertymap.html | 199 + doc/html/ntqsqlquery.html | 595 + doc/html/ntqsqlrecord.html | 294 + doc/html/ntqsqlresult.html | 260 + doc/html/ntqsqlselectcursor.html | 93 + doc/html/ntqstack.html | 47 + doc/html/ntqstatusbar.html | 217 + doc/html/ntqstring.html | 2440 ++++ doc/html/ntqstringlist.html | 309 + doc/html/ntqstrlist.html | 120 + doc/html/ntqstyle.html | 1220 ++ doc/html/ntqstylefactory.html | 80 + doc/html/ntqstyleplugin.html | 97 + doc/html/ntqstylesheet.html | 383 + doc/html/ntqsyntaxhighlighter.html | 158 + doc/html/ntqt.html | 1026 ++ doc/html/ntqtabbar.html | 345 + doc/html/ntqtabdialog.html | 506 + doc/html/ntqtable.html | 1477 +++ doc/html/ntqtabwidget.html | 440 + doc/html/ntqtextbrowser.html | 265 + doc/html/ntqtextcodec.html | 611 + doc/html/ntqtextcodecplugin.html | 114 + doc/html/ntqtextedit.html | 1626 +++ doc/html/ntqtextstream.html | 667 ++ doc/html/ntqtextview.html | 81 + doc/html/ntqthread.html | 252 + doc/html/ntqthreadstorage.html | 189 + doc/html/ntqtimer.html | 199 + doc/html/ntqtl.html | 57 + doc/html/ntqtoolbar.html | 197 + doc/html/ntqtoolbox.html | 248 + doc/html/ntqtoolbutton.html | 392 + doc/html/ntqtooltip.html | 376 + doc/html/ntqtranslator.html | 326 + doc/html/ntqtsciicodec.html | 94 + doc/html/ntqurl.html | 478 + doc/html/ntqurlinfo.html | 367 + doc/html/ntqurloperator.html | 513 + doc/html/ntquuid.html | 236 + doc/html/ntqvalidator.html | 153 + doc/html/ntqvaluelist.html | 785 ++ doc/html/ntqvaluestack.html | 158 + doc/html/ntqvaluevector.html | 666 ++ doc/html/ntqvariant.html | 1149 ++ doc/html/ntqvbox.html | 73 + doc/html/ntqvbuttongroup.html | 87 + doc/html/ntqvector.html | 47 + doc/html/ntqvgroupbox.html | 86 + doc/html/ntqwaitcondition.html | 197 + doc/html/ntqwhatsthis.html | 239 + doc/html/ntqwidget.html | 3256 +++++ doc/html/ntqwidgetfactory.html | 168 + doc/html/ntqwidgetplugin.html | 146 + doc/html/ntqwidgetstack.html | 193 + doc/html/ntqwindowsstyle.html | 67 + doc/html/ntqwizard.html | 337 + doc/html/ntqwmatrix.html | 449 + doc/html/ntqworkspace.html | 223 + doc/html/object.html | 4 +- doc/html/objectmodel.html | 10 +- doc/html/objecttrees.html | 18 +- doc/html/opengl-overlay-x11-example.html | 4 +- doc/html/opengl-pixmap-example.html | 2 +- doc/html/opengl-x11-overlays.html | 6 +- doc/html/opengl.html | 4 +- doc/html/organizers.html | 26 +- doc/html/outliner-example.html | 58 +- doc/html/overviews-list.html | 4 +- doc/html/picture-example.html | 112 +- doc/html/pictures.html | 52 +- doc/html/plugins-howto.html | 38 +- doc/html/plugins.html | 14 +- doc/html/popup-example.html | 130 +- doc/html/porting.html | 430 +- doc/html/porting2.html | 200 +- doc/html/process-example.html | 68 +- doc/html/progress-example.html | 206 +- doc/html/progressbar-example.html | 118 +- doc/html/properties.html | 52 +- doc/html/propertydocs | 2860 ++--- doc/html/propertyindex | 810 +- doc/html/qaccel-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qaccel-members.html | 132 +- doc/html/qaccel.html | 337 - doc/html/qaccessible-h.html | 20 +- doc/html/qaccessible-members.html | 10 +- doc/html/qaccessible.html | 291 - doc/html/qaccessibleinterface-members.html | 8 +- doc/html/qaccessibleinterface.html | 18 +- doc/html/qaccessibleobject-members.html | 92 +- doc/html/qaccessibleobject.html | 10 +- doc/html/qaction-application-example.html | 282 +- doc/html/qaction-examples.html | 2 +- doc/html/qaction-h.html | 18 +- doc/html/qaction-members.html | 152 +- doc/html/qaction.html | 520 - doc/html/qactiongroup-members.html | 144 +- doc/html/qactiongroup.html | 48 +- doc/html/qapplication-h.html | 22 +- doc/html/qapplication-members.html | 304 +- doc/html/qapplication.html | 2046 ---- doc/html/qarray.html | 47 - doc/html/qasciicache-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qasciicache-members.html | 40 +- doc/html/qasciicache.html | 252 - doc/html/qasciicacheiterator-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qasciicacheiterator.html | 8 +- doc/html/qasciidict-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qasciidict-members.html | 46 +- doc/html/qasciidict.html | 325 - doc/html/qasciidictiterator-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qasciidictiterator.html | 18 +- doc/html/qassistantclient-h.html | 10 +- doc/html/qassistantclient-members.html | 108 +- doc/html/qassistantclient.html | 179 - doc/html/qasyncimageio-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qasyncio-h.html | 16 +- doc/html/qasyncio-members.html | 10 +- doc/html/qasyncio.html | 83 - doc/html/qaxaggregated.html | 22 +- doc/html/qaxbase-h.html | 4 +- doc/html/qaxbase.html | 86 +- doc/html/qaxbindable-h.html | 2 +- doc/html/qaxbindable.html | 12 +- doc/html/qaxcontainer-example-qutlook.html | 78 +- doc/html/qaxcontainer-example-webbrowser.html | 22 +- doc/html/qaxcontainer.html | 10 +- doc/html/qaxfactory-h.html | 6 +- doc/html/qaxfactory.html | 78 +- doc/html/qaxobject-h.html | 2 +- doc/html/qaxobject-members.html | 84 +- doc/html/qaxobject.html | 40 +- doc/html/qaxscript-members.html | 84 +- doc/html/qaxscript.html | 28 +- doc/html/qaxscriptengine-members.html | 84 +- doc/html/qaxscriptengine.html | 10 +- doc/html/qaxscriptmanager-members.html | 84 +- doc/html/qaxscriptmanager.html | 40 +- doc/html/qaxserver-demo-multiple.html | 2 +- doc/html/qaxserver-example-hierarchy.html | 82 +- doc/html/qaxserver-example-menus.html | 4 +- doc/html/qaxserver-example-multiple.html | 48 +- doc/html/qaxserver-example-opengl.html | 22 +- doc/html/qaxserver-example-simple.html | 54 +- doc/html/qaxserver-example-tetrax.html | 16 +- doc/html/qaxserver-example-wrapper.html | 32 +- doc/html/qaxserver.html | 68 +- doc/html/qaxwidget-h.html | 2 +- doc/html/qaxwidget-members.html | 580 +- doc/html/qaxwidget.html | 44 +- doc/html/qbig5codec-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qbig5codec-members.html | 54 +- doc/html/qbig5codec.html | 101 - doc/html/qbig5hkscscodec-members.html | 52 +- doc/html/qbig5hkscscodec.html | 6 +- doc/html/qbitarray-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qbitarray-members.html | 76 +- doc/html/qbitarray.html | 350 - doc/html/qbitmap-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qbitmap-members.html | 126 +- doc/html/qbitmap.html | 186 - doc/html/qbitval-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qbitval.html | 8 +- doc/html/qboxlayout-members.html | 136 +- doc/html/qboxlayout.html | 88 +- doc/html/qbrush-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qbrush-members.html | 26 +- doc/html/qbrush.html | 239 - doc/html/qbuffer-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qbuffer-members.html | 86 +- doc/html/qbuffer.html | 148 - doc/html/qbutton-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qbutton-members.html | 652 +- doc/html/qbutton.html | 477 - doc/html/qbuttongroup-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qbuttongroup-members.html | 696 +- doc/html/qbuttongroup.html | 264 - doc/html/qbytearray-members.html | 56 +- doc/html/qbytearray.html | 8 +- doc/html/qcache-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qcache-members.html | 40 +- doc/html/qcache.html | 279 - doc/html/qcacheiterator-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qcacheiterator.html | 10 +- doc/html/qcanvas-h.html | 26 +- doc/html/qcanvas-members.html | 160 +- doc/html/qcanvas.html | 588 - doc/html/qcanvasellipse-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qcanvasellipse.html | 14 +- doc/html/qcanvasitem-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qcanvasitem.html | 46 +- doc/html/qcanvasitemlist-members.html | 68 +- doc/html/qcanvasitemlist.html | 10 +- doc/html/qcanvasline-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qcanvasline.html | 10 +- doc/html/qcanvaspixmap-members.html | 122 +- doc/html/qcanvaspixmap.html | 20 +- doc/html/qcanvaspixmaparray-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qcanvaspixmaparray.html | 14 +- doc/html/qcanvaspolygon-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qcanvaspolygon.html | 16 +- doc/html/qcanvaspolygonalitem-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qcanvaspolygonalitem.html | 38 +- doc/html/qcanvasrectangle-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qcanvasrectangle.html | 20 +- doc/html/qcanvasspline-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qcanvasspline.html | 10 +- doc/html/qcanvassprite-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qcanvassprite.html | 10 +- doc/html/qcanvastext-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qcanvastext.html | 32 +- doc/html/qcanvasview-members.html | 750 +- doc/html/qcanvasview.html | 64 +- doc/html/qcdestyle-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qcdestyle-members.html | 138 +- doc/html/qcdestyle.html | 83 - doc/html/qchar-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qchar.html | 12 +- doc/html/qcharref-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qcharref.html | 6 +- doc/html/qcheckbox-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qcheckbox-members.html | 660 +- doc/html/qcheckbox.html | 302 - doc/html/qchecklistitem-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qchecklistitem.html | 28 +- doc/html/qchecktableitem-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qchecktableitem.html | 10 +- doc/html/qchildevent-members.html | 6 +- doc/html/qchildevent.html | 20 +- doc/html/qclipboard-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qclipboard-members.html | 120 +- doc/html/qclipboard.html | 447 - doc/html/qcloseevent-members.html | 6 +- doc/html/qcloseevent.html | 28 +- doc/html/qcollection.html | 47 - doc/html/qcolor-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qcolor-members.html | 62 +- doc/html/qcolor.html | 618 - doc/html/qcolordialog-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qcolordialog-members.html | 624 +- doc/html/qcolordialog.html | 118 - doc/html/qcolordrag-members.html | 104 +- doc/html/qcolordrag.html | 14 +- doc/html/qcolorgroup-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qcolorgroup.html | 58 +- doc/html/qcombobox-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qcombobox-members.html | 668 +- doc/html/qcombobox.html | 602 - doc/html/qcombotableitem-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qcombotableitem.html | 24 +- doc/html/qcommonstyle-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qcommonstyle-members.html | 132 +- doc/html/qcommonstyle.html | 70 - doc/html/qconststring-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qconststring.html | 6 +- doc/html/qcontextmenuevent-members.html | 6 +- doc/html/qcontextmenuevent.html | 24 +- doc/html/qcopchannel-members.html | 84 +- doc/html/qcopchannel.html | 32 +- doc/html/qcopchannel_qws-h.html | 2 +- doc/html/qcstring-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qcstring-members.html | 116 +- doc/html/qcstring.html | 1105 -- doc/html/qcursor-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qcursor-members.html | 30 +- doc/html/qcursor.html | 287 - doc/html/qcustomevent-members.html | 6 +- doc/html/qcustomevent.html | 26 +- doc/html/qcustommenuitem-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qcustommenuitem.html | 14 +- doc/html/qdatabrowser-h.html | 22 +- doc/html/qdatabrowser-members.html | 700 +- doc/html/qdatabrowser.html | 715 -- doc/html/qdatapump-members.html | 86 +- doc/html/qdatapump.html | 4 +- doc/html/qdatasink-members.html | 6 +- doc/html/qdatasink.html | 8 +- doc/html/qdatasource-members.html | 6 +- doc/html/qdatasource.html | 10 +- doc/html/qdatastream-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qdatastream-members.html | 42 +- doc/html/qdatastream.html | 570 - doc/html/qdatatable-h.html | 24 +- doc/html/qdatatable-members.html | 1120 +- doc/html/qdatatable.html | 809 -- doc/html/qdataview-h.html | 10 +- doc/html/qdataview-members.html | 604 +- doc/html/qdataview.html | 151 - doc/html/qdate-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qdate.html | 48 +- doc/html/qdateedit-members.html | 582 +- doc/html/qdateedit.html | 14 +- doc/html/qdatetime-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qdatetime-members.html | 52 +- doc/html/qdatetime.html | 393 - doc/html/qdatetimeedit-h.html | 16 +- doc/html/qdatetimeedit-members.html | 602 +- doc/html/qdatetimeedit.html | 169 - doc/html/qdatetimeeditbase-members.html | 582 +- doc/html/qdatetimeeditbase.html | 4 +- doc/html/qdeepcopy-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qdeepcopy-members.html | 10 +- doc/html/qdeepcopy.html | 168 - doc/html/qdesktopwidget-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qdesktopwidget-members.html | 604 +- doc/html/qdesktopwidget.html | 202 - doc/html/qdial-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qdial-members.html | 664 +- doc/html/qdial.html | 352 - doc/html/qdialog-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qdialog-members.html | 616 +- doc/html/qdialog.html | 355 - doc/html/qdict-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qdict-members.html | 46 +- doc/html/qdict.html | 399 - doc/html/qdictiterator-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qdictiterator.html | 18 +- doc/html/qdir-example.html | 262 +- doc/html/qdir-h.html | 16 +- doc/html/qdir-members.html | 104 +- doc/html/qdir.html | 818 -- doc/html/qdirectpainter-members.html | 158 +- doc/html/qdirectpainter.html | 16 +- doc/html/qdirectpainter_qws-h.html | 2 +- doc/html/qdns-h.html | 18 +- doc/html/qdns-members.html | 118 +- doc/html/qdns.html | 334 - doc/html/qdockarea-h.html | 26 +- doc/html/qdockarea-members.html | 610 +- doc/html/qdockarea.html | 278 - doc/html/qdockwindow-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qdockwindow-members.html | 698 +- doc/html/qdockwindow.html | 509 - doc/html/qdom-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qdomattr-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qdomattr.html | 10 +- doc/html/qdomcdatasection-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qdomcdatasection.html | 2 +- doc/html/qdomcharacterdata-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qdomcharacterdata.html | 16 +- doc/html/qdomcomment-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qdomcomment.html | 2 +- doc/html/qdomdocument-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qdomdocument.html | 70 +- doc/html/qdomdocumentfragment-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qdomdocumentfragment.html | 2 +- doc/html/qdomdocumenttype-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qdomdocumenttype.html | 16 +- doc/html/qdomelement-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qdomelement.html | 58 +- doc/html/qdomentity-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qdomentity.html | 14 +- doc/html/qdomentityreference-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qdomentityreference.html | 2 +- doc/html/qdomimplementation-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qdomimplementation.html | 10 +- doc/html/qdomnamednodemap-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qdomnamednodemap.html | 12 +- doc/html/qdomnode-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qdomnode.html | 32 +- doc/html/qdomnodelist-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qdomnodelist.html | 2 +- doc/html/qdomnotation-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qdomnotation.html | 6 +- doc/html/qdomprocessinginstruction-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qdomprocessinginstruction.html | 8 +- doc/html/qdomtext-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qdomtext.html | 2 +- doc/html/qdoublevalidator-members.html | 88 +- doc/html/qdoublevalidator.html | 20 +- doc/html/qdragenterevent-members.html | 6 +- doc/html/qdragenterevent.html | 4 +- doc/html/qdragleaveevent-members.html | 6 +- doc/html/qdragleaveevent.html | 4 +- doc/html/qdragmoveevent-members.html | 6 +- doc/html/qdragmoveevent.html | 16 +- doc/html/qdragobject-h.html | 18 +- doc/html/qdragobject-members.html | 110 +- doc/html/qdragobject.html | 220 - doc/html/qdrawutil-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qdropevent-members.html | 6 +- doc/html/qdropevent.html | 20 +- doc/html/qdropsite-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qdropsite-members.html | 8 +- doc/html/qdropsite.html | 75 - doc/html/qeditorfactory-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qeditorfactory-members.html | 98 +- doc/html/qeditorfactory.html | 104 - doc/html/qembed.html | 2 +- doc/html/qerrormessage-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qerrormessage-members.html | 620 +- doc/html/qerrormessage.html | 105 - doc/html/qeucjpcodec-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qeucjpcodec-members.html | 58 +- doc/html/qeucjpcodec.html | 116 - doc/html/qeuckrcodec-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qeuckrcodec-members.html | 54 +- doc/html/qeuckrcodec.html | 95 - doc/html/qevent-h.html | 20 +- doc/html/qevent-members.html | 12 +- doc/html/qevent.html | 193 - doc/html/qeventloop-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qeventloop-members.html | 124 +- doc/html/qeventloop.html | 280 - doc/html/qfd-example.html | 204 +- doc/html/qfile-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qfile-members.html | 104 +- doc/html/qfile.html | 503 - doc/html/qfiledialog-h.html | 18 +- doc/html/qfiledialog-members.html | 706 +- doc/html/qfiledialog.html | 907 -- doc/html/qfileiconprovider-members.html | 86 +- doc/html/qfileiconprovider.html | 16 +- doc/html/qfileinfo-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qfileinfo-members.html | 72 +- doc/html/qfileinfo.html | 503 - doc/html/qfilepreview-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qfilepreview.html | 16 +- doc/html/qfocusdata-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qfocusdata-members.html | 18 +- doc/html/qfocusdata.html | 123 - doc/html/qfocusevent-members.html | 6 +- doc/html/qfocusevent.html | 14 +- doc/html/qfont-examples.html | 2 +- doc/html/qfont-h.html | 16 +- doc/html/qfont-members.html | 122 +- doc/html/qfont.html | 922 -- doc/html/qfontdatabase-h.html | 20 +- doc/html/qfontdatabase-members.html | 38 +- doc/html/qfontdatabase.html | 322 - doc/html/qfontdialog-h.html | 16 +- doc/html/qfontdialog-members.html | 614 +- doc/html/qfontdialog.html | 143 - doc/html/qfontinfo-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qfontinfo-members.html | 30 +- doc/html/qfontinfo.html | 191 - doc/html/qfontmanager_qws-h.html | 4 +- doc/html/qfontmetrics-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qfontmetrics-members.html | 48 +- doc/html/qfontmetrics.html | 419 - doc/html/qframe-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qframe-members.html | 624 +- doc/html/qframe.html | 370 - doc/html/qftp-h.html | 16 +- doc/html/qftp-members.html | 212 +- doc/html/qftp.html | 693 -- doc/html/qgb18030codec-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qgb18030codec-members.html | 54 +- doc/html/qgb18030codec.html | 119 - doc/html/qgb2312codec-members.html | 52 +- doc/html/qgb2312codec.html | 4 +- doc/html/qgbkcodec-members.html | 54 +- doc/html/qgbkcodec.html | 67 - doc/html/qgfx_qws-h.html | 8 +- doc/html/qgfxdriverfactory.html | 4 +- doc/html/qgfxdriverfactory_qws-h.html | 2 +- doc/html/qgfxdriverplugin.html | 4 +- doc/html/qgfxdriverplugin_qws-h.html | 4 +- doc/html/qgl-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qgl-members.html | 4 +- doc/html/qgl.html | 98 - doc/html/qglayoutiterator-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qglayoutiterator.html | 6 +- doc/html/qglcolormap-h.html | 16 +- doc/html/qglcolormap-members.html | 28 +- doc/html/qglcolormap.html | 179 - doc/html/qglcontext-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qglcontext.html | 22 +- doc/html/qglformat-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qglformat.html | 32 +- doc/html/qglobal-h.html | 18 +- doc/html/qglwidget-members.html | 578 +- doc/html/qglwidget.html | 66 +- doc/html/qgrid-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qgrid-members.html | 626 +- doc/html/qgrid.html | 89 - doc/html/qgridlayout-members.html | 134 +- doc/html/qgridlayout.html | 74 +- doc/html/qgridview-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qgridview-members.html | 798 +- doc/html/qgridview.html | 261 - doc/html/qgroupbox-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qgroupbox-members.html | 668 +- doc/html/qgroupbox.html | 330 - doc/html/qguardedptr-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qguardedptr-members.html | 22 +- doc/html/qguardedptr.html | 194 - doc/html/qhbox-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qhbox-members.html | 628 +- doc/html/qhbox.html | 105 - doc/html/qhboxlayout-members.html | 136 +- doc/html/qhboxlayout.html | 12 +- doc/html/qhbuttongroup-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qhbuttongroup-members.html | 698 +- doc/html/qhbuttongroup.html | 89 - doc/html/qheader-h.html | 16 +- doc/html/qheader-members.html | 690 +- doc/html/qheader.html | 607 - doc/html/qhebrewcodec-members.html | 48 +- doc/html/qhebrewcodec.html | 12 +- doc/html/qhgroupbox-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qhgroupbox-members.html | 668 +- doc/html/qhgroupbox.html | 87 - doc/html/qhideevent-members.html | 6 +- doc/html/qhideevent.html | 10 +- doc/html/qhostaddress-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qhostaddress-members.html | 30 +- doc/html/qhostaddress.html | 200 - doc/html/qhttp-h.html | 18 +- doc/html/qhttp-members.html | 204 +- doc/html/qhttp.html | 593 - doc/html/qhttpheader-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qhttpheader.html | 24 +- doc/html/qhttprequestheader-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qhttprequestheader.html | 20 +- doc/html/qhttpresponseheader-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qhttpresponseheader.html | 8 +- doc/html/qicondrag-members.html | 104 +- doc/html/qicondrag.html | 12 +- doc/html/qicondragevent-members.html | 6 +- doc/html/qicondragevent.html | 6 +- doc/html/qicondragitem-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qicondragitem.html | 4 +- doc/html/qiconfactory-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qiconfactory.html | 12 +- doc/html/qiconset-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qiconset-members.html | 30 +- doc/html/qiconset.html | 328 - doc/html/qiconview-h.html | 28 +- doc/html/qiconview-members.html | 918 +- doc/html/qiconview.html | 1009 -- doc/html/qiconviewitem-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qiconviewitem.html | 104 +- doc/html/qimage-h.html | 16 +- doc/html/qimage-members.html | 144 +- doc/html/qimage.html | 1117 -- doc/html/qimageconsumer-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qimageconsumer.html | 10 +- doc/html/qimagedecoder-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qimagedecoder.html | 10 +- doc/html/qimagedrag-members.html | 104 +- doc/html/qimagedrag.html | 22 +- doc/html/qimageformat-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qimageformat.html | 8 +- doc/html/qimageformatplugin-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qimageformatplugin-members.html | 12 +- doc/html/qimageformatplugin.html | 94 - doc/html/qimageformattype-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qimageformattype.html | 2 +- doc/html/qimageio-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qimageio.html | 62 +- doc/html/qimevent-members.html | 6 +- doc/html/qimevent.html | 14 +- doc/html/qinputdialog-h.html | 16 +- doc/html/qinputdialog-members.html | 620 +- doc/html/qinputdialog.html | 196 - doc/html/qintcache-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qintcache-members.html | 40 +- doc/html/qintcache.html | 242 - doc/html/qintcacheiterator-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qintcacheiterator.html | 8 +- doc/html/qintdict-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qintdict-members.html | 46 +- doc/html/qintdict.html | 313 - doc/html/qintdictiterator-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qintdictiterator.html | 14 +- doc/html/qintvalidator-members.html | 88 +- doc/html/qintvalidator.html | 26 +- doc/html/qiodevice-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qiodevice-members.html | 82 +- doc/html/qiodevice.html | 553 - doc/html/qiodevicesource-members.html | 6 +- doc/html/qiodevicesource.html | 14 +- doc/html/qjiscodec-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qjiscodec-members.html | 54 +- doc/html/qjiscodec.html | 132 - doc/html/qkbddriverfactory.html | 4 +- doc/html/qkbddriverfactory_qws-h.html | 2 +- doc/html/qkbddriverplugin.html | 4 +- doc/html/qkbddriverplugin_qws-h.html | 4 +- doc/html/qkeyboard_qws-h.html | 2 +- doc/html/qkeyevent-members.html | 6 +- doc/html/qkeyevent.html | 32 +- doc/html/qkeysequence-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qkeysequence-members.html | 26 +- doc/html/qkeysequence.html | 206 - doc/html/qlabel-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qlabel-members.html | 670 +- doc/html/qlabel.html | 420 - doc/html/qlayout-h.html | 16 +- doc/html/qlayout-members.html | 152 +- doc/html/qlayout.html | 414 - doc/html/qlayoutitem-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qlayoutitem.html | 50 +- doc/html/qlayoutiterator-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qlayoutiterator.html | 8 +- doc/html/qlcdnumber-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qlcdnumber-members.html | 660 +- doc/html/qlcdnumber.html | 332 - doc/html/qlibrary-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qlibrary-members.html | 22 +- doc/html/qlibrary.html | 290 - doc/html/qlineedit-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qlineedit-members.html | 752 +- doc/html/qlineedit.html | 773 -- doc/html/qlist.html | 47 - doc/html/qlistbox-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qlistbox-members.html | 930 +- doc/html/qlistbox.html | 1163 -- doc/html/qlistboxitem-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qlistboxitem.html | 32 +- doc/html/qlistboxpixmap-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qlistboxpixmap.html | 24 +- doc/html/qlistboxtext-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qlistboxtext.html | 16 +- doc/html/qlistiterator.html | 2 +- doc/html/qlistview-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qlistview-members.html | 936 +- doc/html/qlistview.html | 1231 -- doc/html/qlistviewitem-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qlistviewitem.html | 114 +- doc/html/qlistviewitemiterator-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qlistviewitemiterator.html | 34 +- doc/html/qlocale-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qlocale-members.html | 46 +- doc/html/qlocale.html | 852 -- doc/html/qlocalfs-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qlocalfs-members.html | 148 +- doc/html/qlocalfs.html | 82 - doc/html/qmacmime-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qmacmime.html | 10 +- doc/html/qmacstyle-members.html | 126 +- doc/html/qmacstyle.html | 26 +- doc/html/qmacstyle_mac-h.html | 2 +- doc/html/qmag-example.html | 296 +- doc/html/qmainwindow-h.html | 18 +- doc/html/qmainwindow-members.html | 688 +- doc/html/qmainwindow.html | 956 -- doc/html/qmake-manual-7.html | 34 +- doc/html/qmap-h.html | 22 +- doc/html/qmap-members.html | 48 +- doc/html/qmap.html | 574 - doc/html/qmapconstiterator-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qmapconstiterator.html | 8 +- doc/html/qmapiterator-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qmapiterator.html | 10 +- doc/html/qmemarray-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qmemarray-members.html | 62 +- doc/html/qmemarray.html | 561 - doc/html/qmenubar-h.html | 16 +- doc/html/qmenubar-members.html | 708 +- doc/html/qmenubar.html | 593 - doc/html/qmenudata-h.html | 24 +- doc/html/qmenudata-members.html | 78 +- doc/html/qmenudata.html | 706 -- doc/html/qmessagebox-h.html | 16 +- doc/html/qmessagebox-members.html | 650 +- doc/html/qmessagebox.html | 751 -- doc/html/qmetaobject-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qmetaobject-members.html | 32 +- doc/html/qmetaobject.html | 187 - doc/html/qmetaproperty-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qmetaproperty.html | 24 +- doc/html/qmime-h.html | 18 +- doc/html/qmimesource-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qmimesource.html | 6 +- doc/html/qmimesourcefactory-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qmimesourcefactory.html | 44 +- doc/html/qmotif-h.html | 2 +- doc/html/qmotif-members.html | 116 +- doc/html/qmotif.html | 10 +- doc/html/qmotifdialog-h.html | 2 +- doc/html/qmotifdialog-members.html | 608 +- doc/html/qmotifdialog.html | 26 +- doc/html/qmotifplusstyle-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qmotifplusstyle-members.html | 136 +- doc/html/qmotifplusstyle.html | 71 - doc/html/qmotifstyle-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qmotifstyle-members.html | 136 +- doc/html/qmotifstyle.html | 93 - doc/html/qmotifwidget-h.html | 2 +- doc/html/qmotifwidget-members.html | 580 +- doc/html/qmotifwidget.html | 12 +- doc/html/qmouse_qws-h.html | 4 +- doc/html/qmousedriverfactory.html | 4 +- doc/html/qmousedriverfactory_qws-h.html | 2 +- doc/html/qmousedriverplugin.html | 4 +- doc/html/qmousedriverplugin_qws-h.html | 4 +- doc/html/qmouseevent-members.html | 6 +- doc/html/qmouseevent.html | 70 +- doc/html/qmoveevent-members.html | 6 +- doc/html/qmoveevent.html | 14 +- doc/html/qmovie-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qmovie-members.html | 60 +- doc/html/qmovie.html | 388 - doc/html/qmultilineedit-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qmultilineedit-members.html | 1068 +- doc/html/qmultilineedit.html | 343 - doc/html/qmutex-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qmutex-members.html | 16 +- doc/html/qmutex.html | 195 - doc/html/qmutexlocker-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qmutexlocker.html | 18 +- doc/html/qnamespace-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qnetwork-h.html | 4 +- doc/html/qnetworkoperation-members.html | 86 +- doc/html/qnetworkoperation.html | 36 +- doc/html/qnetworkprotocol-h.html | 18 +- doc/html/qnetworkprotocol-members.html | 150 +- doc/html/qnetworkprotocol.html | 532 - doc/html/qnp-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qnpinstance-members.html | 86 +- doc/html/qnpinstance.html | 18 +- doc/html/qnplugin-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qnplugin.html | 8 +- doc/html/qnpstream-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qnpstream.html | 4 +- doc/html/qnpwidget-members.html | 582 +- doc/html/qnpwidget.html | 16 +- doc/html/qobject-h.html | 22 +- doc/html/qobject-members.html | 92 +- doc/html/qobject.html | 958 -- doc/html/qobjectcleanuphandler-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qobjectcleanuphandler-members.html | 100 +- doc/html/qobjectcleanuphandler.html | 139 - doc/html/qobjectlist-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qobjectlist-members.html | 92 +- doc/html/qobjectlist.html | 96 - doc/html/qobjectlistiterator-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qobjectlistiterator.html | 8 +- doc/html/qpaintdevice-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qpaintdevice-members.html | 58 +- doc/html/qpaintdevice.html | 464 - doc/html/qpaintdevicemetrics-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qpaintdevicemetrics-members.html | 22 +- doc/html/qpaintdevicemetrics.html | 150 - doc/html/qpainter-h.html | 26 +- doc/html/qpainter-members.html | 166 +- doc/html/qpainter.html | 1626 --- doc/html/qpaintevent-members.html | 6 +- doc/html/qpaintevent.html | 22 +- doc/html/qpair-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qpair-members.html | 6 +- doc/html/qpair.html | 126 - doc/html/qpalette-h.html | 18 +- doc/html/qpalette-members.html | 44 +- doc/html/qpalette.html | 308 - doc/html/qpen-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qpen-members.html | 34 +- doc/html/qpen.html | 287 - doc/html/qpicture-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qpicture-members.html | 84 +- doc/html/qpicture.html | 270 - doc/html/qpixmap-h.html | 18 +- doc/html/qpixmap-members.html | 128 +- doc/html/qpixmap.html | 825 -- doc/html/qpixmapcache-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qpixmapcache-members.html | 16 +- doc/html/qpixmapcache.html | 191 - doc/html/qplatinumstyle-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qplatinumstyle-members.html | 136 +- doc/html/qplatinumstyle.html | 84 - doc/html/qpngimagepacker-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qpngimagepacker.html | 8 +- doc/html/qpngio-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qpoint-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qpoint-members.html | 30 +- doc/html/qpoint.html | 378 - doc/html/qpointarray-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qpointarray-members.html | 78 +- doc/html/qpointarray.html | 285 - doc/html/qpopupmenu-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qpopupmenu-members.html | 722 +- doc/html/qpopupmenu.html | 830 -- doc/html/qprinter-h.html | 16 +- doc/html/qprinter-members.html | 154 +- doc/html/qprinter.html | 758 -- doc/html/qprocess-examples.html | 2 +- doc/html/qprocess-h.html | 16 +- doc/html/qprocess-members.html | 150 +- doc/html/qprocess.html | 633 - doc/html/qprogressbar-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qprogressbar-members.html | 650 +- doc/html/qprogressbar.html | 224 - doc/html/qprogressdialog-h.html | 16 +- doc/html/qprogressdialog-members.html | 662 +- doc/html/qprogressdialog.html | 409 - doc/html/qptrcollection-h.html | 10 +- doc/html/qptrcollection-members.html | 20 +- doc/html/qptrcollection.html | 177 - doc/html/qptrdict-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qptrdict-members.html | 46 +- doc/html/qptrdict.html | 316 - doc/html/qptrdictiterator-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qptrdictiterator.html | 34 +- doc/html/qptrlist-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qptrlist-members.html | 92 +- doc/html/qptrlist.html | 741 -- doc/html/qptrlistiterator-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qptrlistiterator.html | 22 +- doc/html/qptrqueue-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qptrqueue-members.html | 36 +- doc/html/qptrqueue.html | 216 - doc/html/qptrstack-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qptrstack-members.html | 36 +- doc/html/qptrstack.html | 201 - doc/html/qptrvector-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qptrvector-members.html | 64 +- doc/html/qptrvector.html | 393 - doc/html/qpushbutton-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qpushbutton-members.html | 676 +- doc/html/qpushbutton.html | 470 - doc/html/qqueue.html | 47 - doc/html/qradiobutton-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qradiobutton-members.html | 654 +- doc/html/qradiobutton.html | 278 - doc/html/qrangecontrol-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qrangecontrol-members.html | 52 +- doc/html/qrangecontrol.html | 336 - doc/html/qrect-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qrect-members.html | 122 +- doc/html/qrect.html | 645 - doc/html/qregexp-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qregexp-members.html | 56 +- doc/html/qregexp.html | 1037 -- doc/html/qregexpvalidator-members.html | 88 +- doc/html/qregexpvalidator.html | 60 +- doc/html/qregion-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qregion-members.html | 56 +- doc/html/qregion.html | 364 - doc/html/qresizeevent-members.html | 6 +- doc/html/qresizeevent.html | 16 +- doc/html/qrtlcodec-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qscreen.html | 24 +- doc/html/qscrollbar-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qscrollbar-members.html | 666 +- doc/html/qscrollbar.html | 382 - doc/html/qscrollview-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qscrollview-members.html | 760 +- doc/html/qscrollview.html | 930 -- doc/html/qsemaphore-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qsemaphore-members.html | 22 +- doc/html/qsemaphore.html | 149 - doc/html/qserversocket-h.html | 16 +- doc/html/qserversocket-members.html | 106 +- doc/html/qserversocket.html | 173 - doc/html/qsessionmanager-h.html | 18 +- doc/html/qsessionmanager-members.html | 120 +- doc/html/qsessionmanager.html | 346 - doc/html/qsettings-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qsettings-members.html | 40 +- doc/html/qsettings.html | 626 - doc/html/qsgistyle-h.html | 16 +- doc/html/qsgistyle-members.html | 138 +- doc/html/qsgistyle.html | 77 - doc/html/qshowevent-members.html | 6 +- doc/html/qshowevent.html | 4 +- doc/html/qsignal-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qsignal-members.html | 106 +- doc/html/qsignal.html | 182 - doc/html/qsignalmapper-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qsignalmapper-members.html | 100 +- doc/html/qsignalmapper.html | 124 - doc/html/qsimplerichtext-h.html | 16 +- doc/html/qsimplerichtext-members.html | 28 +- doc/html/qsimplerichtext.html | 223 - doc/html/qsize-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qsize-members.html | 40 +- doc/html/qsize.html | 378 - doc/html/qsizegrip-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qsizegrip-members.html | 588 +- doc/html/qsizegrip.html | 112 - doc/html/qsizepolicy-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qsizepolicy-members.html | 42 +- doc/html/qsizepolicy.html | 291 - doc/html/qsjiscodec-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qsjiscodec-members.html | 58 +- doc/html/qsjiscodec.html | 113 - doc/html/qslider-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qslider-members.html | 668 +- doc/html/qslider.html | 368 - doc/html/qsocket-h.html | 16 +- doc/html/qsocket-members.html | 214 +- doc/html/qsocket.html | 500 - doc/html/qsocketdevice-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qsocketdevice-members.html | 132 +- doc/html/qsocketdevice.html | 419 - doc/html/qsocketnotifier-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qsocketnotifier-members.html | 102 +- doc/html/qsocketnotifier.html | 183 - doc/html/qsortedlist-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qsortedlist-members.html | 92 +- doc/html/qsortedlist.html | 95 - doc/html/qsound-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qsound-members.html | 110 +- doc/html/qsound.html | 180 - doc/html/qspaceritem-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qspaceritem.html | 20 +- doc/html/qspinbox-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qspinbox-members.html | 688 +- doc/html/qspinbox.html | 561 - doc/html/qsplashscreen-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qsplashscreen-members.html | 602 +- doc/html/qsplashscreen.html | 193 - doc/html/qsplitter-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qsplitter-members.html | 668 +- doc/html/qsplitter.html | 337 - doc/html/qsql-h.html | 10 +- doc/html/qsql-members.html | 6 +- doc/html/qsql.html | 121 - doc/html/qsqlcursor-h.html | 16 +- doc/html/qsqlcursor-members.html | 154 +- doc/html/qsqlcursor.html | 761 -- doc/html/qsqldatabase-h.html | 16 +- doc/html/qsqldatabase-members.html | 160 +- doc/html/qsqldatabase.html | 668 -- doc/html/qsqldriver-h.html | 26 +- doc/html/qsqldriver-members.html | 130 +- doc/html/qsqldriver.html | 295 - doc/html/qsqldriverplugin-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qsqldriverplugin-members.html | 12 +- doc/html/qsqldriverplugin.html | 100 - doc/html/qsqleditorfactory-h.html | 10 +- doc/html/qsqleditorfactory-members.html | 98 +- doc/html/qsqleditorfactory.html | 111 - doc/html/qsqlerror-h.html | 10 +- doc/html/qsqlerror-members.html | 30 +- doc/html/qsqlerror.html | 157 - doc/html/qsqlfield-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qsqlfield-members.html | 32 +- doc/html/qsqlfield.html | 216 - doc/html/qsqlfieldinfo-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qsqlfieldinfo.html | 36 +- doc/html/qsqlform-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qsqlform-members.html | 120 +- doc/html/qsqlform.html | 237 - doc/html/qsqlindex-h.html | 18 +- doc/html/qsqlindex-members.html | 62 +- doc/html/qsqlindex.html | 155 - doc/html/qsqlpropertymap-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qsqlpropertymap-members.html | 20 +- doc/html/qsqlpropertymap.html | 199 - doc/html/qsqlquery-h.html | 22 +- doc/html/qsqlquery-members.html | 66 +- doc/html/qsqlquery.html | 595 - doc/html/qsqlrecord-h.html | 16 +- doc/html/qsqlrecord-members.html | 48 +- doc/html/qsqlrecord.html | 294 - doc/html/qsqlrecordinfo-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qsqlrecordinfo.html | 18 +- doc/html/qsqlresult-h.html | 18 +- doc/html/qsqlresult-members.html | 56 +- doc/html/qsqlresult.html | 260 - doc/html/qsqlselectcursor-h.html | 10 +- doc/html/qsqlselectcursor-members.html | 154 +- doc/html/qsqlselectcursor.html | 93 - doc/html/qstack.html | 47 - doc/html/qstatusbar-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qstatusbar-members.html | 606 +- doc/html/qstatusbar.html | 217 - doc/html/qstoreddrag-members.html | 104 +- doc/html/qstoreddrag.html | 10 +- doc/html/qstrilist-members.html | 86 +- doc/html/qstrilist.html | 16 +- doc/html/qstring-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qstring-members.html | 154 +- doc/html/qstring.html | 2440 ---- doc/html/qstringlist-h.html | 16 +- doc/html/qstringlist-members.html | 86 +- doc/html/qstringlist.html | 309 - doc/html/qstrlist-h.html | 16 +- doc/html/qstrlist-members.html | 92 +- doc/html/qstrlist.html | 120 - doc/html/qstrlistiterator-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qstrlistiterator.html | 4 +- doc/html/qstyle-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qstyle-members.html | 134 +- doc/html/qstyle.html | 1220 -- doc/html/qstylefactory-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qstylefactory-members.html | 8 +- doc/html/qstylefactory.html | 80 - doc/html/qstyleoption-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qstyleoption.html | 34 +- doc/html/qstyleplugin-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qstyleplugin-members.html | 12 +- doc/html/qstyleplugin.html | 97 - doc/html/qstylesheet-h.html | 20 +- doc/html/qstylesheet-members.html | 110 +- doc/html/qstylesheet.html | 383 - doc/html/qstylesheetitem-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qstylesheetitem.html | 64 +- doc/html/qsyntaxhighlighter-h.html | 16 +- doc/html/qsyntaxhighlighter-members.html | 18 +- doc/html/qsyntaxhighlighter.html | 158 - doc/html/qt-members.html | 4 +- doc/html/qt-template-lib.html | 92 +- doc/html/qt.dcf | 11960 +++++++++---------- doc/html/qt.html | 1026 -- doc/html/qtab-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qtab.html | 32 +- doc/html/qtabbar-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qtabbar-members.html | 636 +- doc/html/qtabbar.html | 345 - doc/html/qtabdialog-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qtabdialog-members.html | 672 +- doc/html/qtabdialog.html | 506 - doc/html/qtable-h.html | 34 +- doc/html/qtable-members.html | 1008 +- doc/html/qtable.html | 1477 --- doc/html/qtableitem-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qtableitem.html | 124 +- doc/html/qtableselection-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qtableselection.html | 6 +- doc/html/qtabletevent-members.html | 6 +- doc/html/qtabletevent.html | 20 +- doc/html/qtabwidget-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qtabwidget-members.html | 650 +- doc/html/qtabwidget.html | 440 - doc/html/qtextbrowser-h.html | 18 +- doc/html/qtextbrowser-members.html | 1024 +- doc/html/qtextbrowser.html | 265 - doc/html/qtextcodec-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qtextcodec-members.html | 58 +- doc/html/qtextcodec.html | 611 - doc/html/qtextcodecplugin-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qtextcodecplugin-members.html | 16 +- doc/html/qtextcodecplugin.html | 114 - doc/html/qtextdecoder-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qtextdecoder.html | 6 +- doc/html/qtextdrag-members.html | 104 +- doc/html/qtextdrag.html | 22 +- doc/html/qtextedit-h.html | 20 +- doc/html/qtextedit-members.html | 1000 +- doc/html/qtextedit.html | 1626 --- doc/html/qtextencoder-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qtextencoder.html | 8 +- doc/html/qtextistream-members.html | 46 +- doc/html/qtextistream.html | 10 +- doc/html/qtextostream-members.html | 46 +- doc/html/qtextostream.html | 10 +- doc/html/qtextstream-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qtextstream-members.html | 52 +- doc/html/qtextstream.html | 667 -- doc/html/qtextview-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qtextview-members.html | 998 +- doc/html/qtextview.html | 81 - doc/html/qthread-h.html | 18 +- doc/html/qthread-members.html | 32 +- doc/html/qthread.html | 252 - doc/html/qthreadstorage-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qthreadstorage-members.html | 14 +- doc/html/qthreadstorage.html | 189 - doc/html/qtime-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qtime.html | 36 +- doc/html/qtimeedit-members.html | 582 +- doc/html/qtimeedit.html | 14 +- doc/html/qtimer-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qtimer-members.html | 106 +- doc/html/qtimer.html | 199 - doc/html/qtimerevent-members.html | 6 +- doc/html/qtimerevent.html | 14 +- doc/html/qtl-qvaluelist-example.html | 12 +- doc/html/qtl.html | 57 - doc/html/qtmac-as-native.html | 4 +- doc/html/qtoolbar-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qtoolbar-members.html | 710 +- doc/html/qtoolbar.html | 197 - doc/html/qtoolbox-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qtoolbox-members.html | 666 +- doc/html/qtoolbox.html | 248 - doc/html/qtoolbutton-h.html | 18 +- doc/html/qtoolbutton-members.html | 696 +- doc/html/qtoolbutton.html | 392 - doc/html/qtooltip-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qtooltip-members.html | 42 +- doc/html/qtooltip.html | 376 - doc/html/qtooltipgroup-members.html | 86 +- doc/html/qtooltipgroup.html | 22 +- doc/html/qtranslator-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qtranslator-members.html | 116 +- doc/html/qtranslator.html | 326 - doc/html/qtranslatormessage-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qtranslatormessage.html | 26 +- doc/html/qtsciicodec-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qtsciicodec-members.html | 54 +- doc/html/qtsciicodec.html | 94 - doc/html/quridrag-members.html | 104 +- doc/html/quridrag.html | 30 +- doc/html/qurl-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qurl-members.html | 88 +- doc/html/qurl.html | 478 - doc/html/qurlinfo-h.html | 16 +- doc/html/qurlinfo-members.html | 68 +- doc/html/qurlinfo.html | 367 - doc/html/qurloperator-h.html | 20 +- doc/html/qurloperator-members.html | 222 +- doc/html/qurloperator.html | 513 - doc/html/quuid-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/quuid-members.html | 28 +- doc/html/quuid.html | 236 - doc/html/qvalidator-h.html | 16 +- doc/html/qvalidator-members.html | 96 +- doc/html/qvalidator.html | 153 - doc/html/qvaluelist-h.html | 18 +- doc/html/qvaluelist-members.html | 76 +- doc/html/qvaluelist.html | 785 -- doc/html/qvaluelistconstiterator-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qvaluelistconstiterator.html | 6 +- doc/html/qvaluelistiterator-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qvaluelistiterator.html | 10 +- doc/html/qvaluestack-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qvaluestack-members.html | 82 +- doc/html/qvaluestack.html | 158 - doc/html/qvaluevector-h.html | 18 +- doc/html/qvaluevector-members.html | 58 +- doc/html/qvaluevector.html | 666 -- doc/html/qvariant-h.html | 18 +- doc/html/qvariant-members.html | 182 +- doc/html/qvariant.html | 1149 -- doc/html/qvbox-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qvbox-members.html | 628 +- doc/html/qvbox.html | 73 - doc/html/qvboxlayout-members.html | 136 +- doc/html/qvboxlayout.html | 10 +- doc/html/qvbuttongroup-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qvbuttongroup-members.html | 698 +- doc/html/qvbuttongroup.html | 87 - doc/html/qvector.html | 47 - doc/html/qvgroupbox-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qvgroupbox-members.html | 668 +- doc/html/qvgroupbox.html | 86 - doc/html/qwaitcondition-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qwaitcondition-members.html | 14 +- doc/html/qwaitcondition.html | 197 - doc/html/qwerty-example.html | 322 +- doc/html/qwhatsthis-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qwhatsthis-members.html | 30 +- doc/html/qwhatsthis.html | 239 - doc/html/qwheelevent-members.html | 6 +- doc/html/qwheelevent.html | 26 +- doc/html/qwidget-h.html | 28 +- doc/html/qwidget-members.html | 588 +- doc/html/qwidget.html | 3256 ----- doc/html/qwidgetfactory-h.html | 22 +- doc/html/qwidgetfactory-members.html | 20 +- doc/html/qwidgetfactory.html | 168 - doc/html/qwidgetitem-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qwidgetitem.html | 18 +- doc/html/qwidgetplugin-h.html | 16 +- doc/html/qwidgetplugin-members.html | 24 +- doc/html/qwidgetplugin.html | 146 - doc/html/qwidgetstack-h.html | 16 +- doc/html/qwidgetstack-members.html | 642 +- doc/html/qwidgetstack.html | 193 - doc/html/qwindowdefs-h.html | 18 +- doc/html/qwindowsmime-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qwindowsmime.html | 6 +- doc/html/qwindowsstyle-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qwindowsstyle-members.html | 132 +- doc/html/qwindowsstyle.html | 67 - doc/html/qwindowsystem_qws-h.html | 8 +- doc/html/qwizard-h.html | 12 +- doc/html/qwizard-members.html | 678 +- doc/html/qwizard.html | 337 - doc/html/qwmatrix-h.html | 18 +- doc/html/qwmatrix-members.html | 56 +- doc/html/qwmatrix.html | 449 - doc/html/qworkspace-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/qworkspace-members.html | 610 +- doc/html/qworkspace.html | 223 - doc/html/qwsdecoration.html | 18 +- doc/html/qwsdecoration_qws-h.html | 2 +- doc/html/qwsinputmethod.html | 4 +- doc/html/qwskeyboardhandler-members.html | 84 +- doc/html/qwskeyboardhandler.html | 8 +- doc/html/qwsmousehandler.html | 10 +- doc/html/qwsserver.html | 32 +- doc/html/qwswindow.html | 8 +- doc/html/qxml-h.html | 20 +- doc/html/qxmlattributes-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qxmlattributes.html | 34 +- doc/html/qxmlcontenthandler-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qxmlcontenthandler.html | 22 +- doc/html/qxmldeclhandler-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qxmldeclhandler.html | 14 +- doc/html/qxmldefaulthandler-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qxmldefaulthandler.html | 2 +- doc/html/qxmldtdhandler-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qxmldtdhandler.html | 8 +- doc/html/qxmlentityresolver-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qxmlentityresolver.html | 6 +- doc/html/qxmlerrorhandler-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qxmlerrorhandler.html | 4 +- doc/html/qxmlinputsource-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qxmlinputsource.html | 22 +- doc/html/qxmllexicalhandler-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qxmllexicalhandler.html | 14 +- doc/html/qxmllocator-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qxmllocator.html | 2 +- doc/html/qxmlnamespacesupport-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qxmlnamespacesupport.html | 30 +- doc/html/qxmlparseexception-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qxmlparseexception.html | 10 +- doc/html/qxmlreader-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qxmlreader.html | 14 +- doc/html/qxmlsimplereader-members.html | 2 +- doc/html/qxmlsimplereader.html | 6 +- doc/html/qxtwidget-h.html | 2 +- doc/html/qxtwidget-members.html | 574 +- doc/html/qxtwidget.html | 20 +- doc/html/rangecontrols-example.html | 130 +- doc/html/regexptester-example.html | 244 +- doc/html/removed20.html | 430 +- doc/html/richtext-example.html | 92 +- doc/html/rot-example.html | 62 +- doc/html/scribble-example.html | 238 +- doc/html/scrollview-example.html | 344 +- doc/html/session.html | 22 +- doc/html/shared.html | 48 +- doc/html/shclass.html | 84 +- doc/html/showimg-example.html | 432 +- doc/html/signalsandslots.html | 34 +- doc/html/simple-application-example.html | 246 +- doc/html/simple-application.html | 254 +- doc/html/simple-font-demo-example.html | 158 +- doc/html/simple_dd-example.html | 86 +- doc/html/small-table-example-example.html | 46 +- doc/html/sound-example.html | 60 +- doc/html/splitter-example.html | 82 +- doc/html/sql-driver.html | 54 +- doc/html/sql-overview-basicbrowsing-main-cpp.html | 24 +- doc/html/sql-overview-basicbrowsing2-main-cpp.html | 28 +- doc/html/sql-overview-basicdatamanip-main-cpp.html | 20 +- doc/html/sql-overview-connect1-main-cpp.html | 18 +- .../sql-overview-create_connections-main-cpp.html | 8 +- doc/html/sql-overview-custom1-main-cpp.html | 82 +- doc/html/sql-overview-custom1-main-h.html | 42 +- doc/html/sql-overview-delete-main-cpp.html | 18 +- doc/html/sql-overview-extract-main-cpp.html | 34 +- doc/html/sql-overview-form1-main-cpp.html | 58 +- doc/html/sql-overview-form2-main-h.html | 26 +- doc/html/sql-overview-insert-main-cpp.html | 26 +- doc/html/sql-overview-navigating-main-cpp.html | 26 +- doc/html/sql-overview-order1-main-cpp.html | 24 +- doc/html/sql-overview-order2-main-cpp.html | 28 +- doc/html/sql-overview-retrieve1-main-cpp.html | 18 +- doc/html/sql-overview-retrieve2-main-cpp.html | 20 +- doc/html/sql-overview-subclass1-main-cpp.html | 28 +- doc/html/sql-overview-subclass2-main-cpp.html | 22 +- doc/html/sql-overview-subclass2-main-h.html | 8 +- doc/html/sql-overview-subclass3-main-cpp.html | 36 +- doc/html/sql-overview-subclass3-main-h.html | 10 +- doc/html/sql-overview-subclass4-main-cpp.html | 66 +- doc/html/sql-overview-subclass4-main-h.html | 10 +- doc/html/sql-overview-subclass5-main-cpp.html | 80 +- doc/html/sql-overview-subclass5-main-h.html | 14 +- doc/html/sql-overview-table1-main-cpp.html | 22 +- doc/html/sql-overview-table2-main-cpp.html | 32 +- doc/html/sql-overview-table3-main-cpp.html | 58 +- doc/html/sql-overview-table3-main-h.html | 24 +- doc/html/sql-overview-table4-main-cpp.html | 74 +- doc/html/sql-overview-table4-main-h.html | 38 +- doc/html/sql-overview-update-main-cpp.html | 22 +- doc/html/sql.html | 894 +- doc/html/sqltable-example.html | 62 +- doc/html/statistics-example.html | 100 +- doc/html/t10-cannon-cpp.html | 50 +- doc/html/t10-cannon-h.html | 10 +- doc/html/t10-lcdrange-cpp.html | 32 +- doc/html/t10-lcdrange-h.html | 8 +- doc/html/t10-main-cpp.html | 46 +- doc/html/t11-cannon-cpp.html | 96 +- doc/html/t11-cannon-h.html | 18 +- doc/html/t11-lcdrange-cpp.html | 32 +- doc/html/t11-lcdrange-h.html | 8 +- doc/html/t11-main-cpp.html | 52 +- doc/html/t12-cannon-cpp.html | 120 +- doc/html/t12-cannon-h.html | 24 +- doc/html/t12-lcdrange-cpp.html | 44 +- doc/html/t12-lcdrange-h.html | 10 +- doc/html/t12-main-cpp.html | 52 +- doc/html/t13-cannon-cpp.html | 132 +- doc/html/t13-cannon-h.html | 24 +- doc/html/t13-gamebrd-cpp.html | 70 +- doc/html/t13-gamebrd-h.html | 10 +- doc/html/t13-lcdrange-cpp.html | 46 +- doc/html/t13-lcdrange-h.html | 10 +- doc/html/t13-main-cpp.html | 14 +- doc/html/t14-cannon-cpp.html | 176 +- doc/html/t14-cannon-h.html | 32 +- doc/html/t14-gamebrd-cpp.html | 88 +- doc/html/t14-gamebrd-h.html | 10 +- doc/html/t14-lcdrange-cpp.html | 46 +- doc/html/t14-lcdrange-h.html | 10 +- doc/html/t14-main-cpp.html | 14 +- doc/html/t7-lcdrange-cpp.html | 26 +- doc/html/t7-lcdrange-h.html | 8 +- doc/html/t7-main-cpp.html | 38 +- doc/html/t8-cannon-cpp.html | 20 +- doc/html/t8-cannon-h.html | 8 +- doc/html/t8-lcdrange-cpp.html | 32 +- doc/html/t8-lcdrange-h.html | 8 +- doc/html/t8-main-cpp.html | 40 +- doc/html/t9-cannon-cpp.html | 28 +- doc/html/t9-cannon-h.html | 8 +- doc/html/t9-lcdrange-cpp.html | 32 +- doc/html/t9-lcdrange-h.html | 8 +- doc/html/t9-main-cpp.html | 42 +- doc/html/tabdialog-example.html | 144 +- doc/html/table-bigtable-main-cpp.html | 44 +- doc/html/table-small-table-demo-main-cpp.html | 44 +- doc/html/table-statistics-statistics-cpp.html | 68 +- doc/html/table.html | 10 +- doc/html/tagreader-example.html | 24 +- doc/html/tagreader-with-features-example.html | 72 +- doc/html/tetrix-example.html | 14 +- doc/html/text.html | 24 +- doc/html/themes-example.html | 1220 +- doc/html/thread.html | 10 +- doc/html/threads.html | 76 +- doc/html/tictac-example.html | 116 +- doc/html/time.html | 6 +- doc/html/timers.html | 40 +- doc/html/titleindex | 950 +- doc/html/toggleaction-example.html | 40 +- doc/html/tools.html | 54 +- doc/html/tooltip-example.html | 84 +- doc/html/toplevel-example.html | 46 +- doc/html/trivial-nsplugin-example.html | 18 +- doc/html/troll.html | 2 +- doc/html/tutorial.html | 2 +- doc/html/tutorial1-01.html | 46 +- doc/html/tutorial1-02.html | 46 +- doc/html/tutorial1-03.html | 48 +- doc/html/tutorial1-04.html | 76 +- doc/html/tutorial1-05.html | 88 +- doc/html/tutorial1-06.html | 96 +- doc/html/tutorial1-07.html | 30 +- doc/html/tutorial1-08.html | 58 +- doc/html/tutorial1-09.html | 34 +- doc/html/tutorial1-10.html | 60 +- doc/html/tutorial1-11.html | 84 +- doc/html/tutorial1-12.html | 94 +- doc/html/tutorial1-13.html | 90 +- doc/html/tutorial1-14.html | 90 +- doc/html/tutorial2-02.html | 2 +- doc/html/tutorial2-03.html | 76 +- doc/html/tutorial2-04.html | 22 +- doc/html/tutorial2-05.html | 194 +- doc/html/tutorial2-06.html | 44 +- doc/html/tutorial2-07.html | 30 +- doc/html/tutorial2-08.html | 174 +- doc/html/tutorial2-09.html | 118 +- doc/html/tutorial2-11.html | 2 +- doc/html/tutorial2.html | 2 +- doc/html/unicode.html | 20 +- doc/html/winsystem.html | 2 +- doc/html/wizard-example.html | 328 +- doc/html/wizard-wizard-cpp.html | 304 +- doc/html/wizard-wizard-h.html | 16 +- doc/html/workspace.html | 4 +- doc/html/xform-example.html | 458 +- doc/html/xml-sax-features-walkthrough.html | 80 +- doc/html/xml-sax-walkthrough.html | 24 +- doc/html/y2k.html | 12 +- 1700 files changed, 162077 insertions(+), 162077 deletions(-) create mode 100644 doc/html/aboutntqt.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/aboutqt.html create mode 100644 doc/html/activentqt.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/activeqt.html create mode 100644 doc/html/distributingntqt.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/distributingqt.html create mode 100644 doc/html/how-to-learn-ntqt.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/how-to-learn-qt.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqaccel.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqaccessible.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqaction.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqapplication.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqarray.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqasciicache.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqasciidict.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqassistantclient.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqasyncio.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqbig5codec.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqbitarray.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqbitmap.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqbrush.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqbuffer.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqbutton.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqbuttongroup.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqcache.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqcanvas.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqcdestyle.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqcheckbox.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqclipboard.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqcollection.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqcolor.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqcolordialog.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqcombobox.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqcommonstyle.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqcstring.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqcursor.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqdatabrowser.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqdatastream.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqdatatable.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqdataview.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqdatetime.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqdatetimeedit.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqdeepcopy.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqdesktopwidget.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqdial.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqdialog.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqdict.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqdir.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqdns.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqdockarea.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqdockwindow.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqdragobject.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqdropsite.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqeditorfactory.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqerrormessage.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqeucjpcodec.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqeuckrcodec.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqevent.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqeventloop.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqfile.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqfiledialog.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqfileinfo.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqfocusdata.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqfont.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqfontdatabase.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqfontdialog.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqfontinfo.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqfontmetrics.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqframe.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqftp.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqgb18030codec.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqgbkcodec.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqgl.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqglcolormap.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqgrid.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqgridview.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqgroupbox.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqguardedptr.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqhbox.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqhbuttongroup.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqheader.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqhgroupbox.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqhostaddress.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqhttp.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqiconset.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqiconview.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqimage.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqimageformatplugin.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqinputdialog.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqintcache.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqintdict.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqiodevice.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqjiscodec.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqkeysequence.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqlabel.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqlayout.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqlcdnumber.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqlibrary.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqlineedit.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqlist.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqlistbox.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqlistview.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqlocale.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqlocalfs.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqmainwindow.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqmap.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqmemarray.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqmenubar.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqmenudata.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqmessagebox.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqmetaobject.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqmotifplusstyle.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqmotifstyle.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqmovie.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqmultilineedit.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqmutex.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqnetworkprotocol.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqobject.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqobjectcleanuphandler.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqobjectlist.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqpaintdevice.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqpaintdevicemetrics.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqpainter.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqpair.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqpalette.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqpen.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqpicture.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqpixmap.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqpixmapcache.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqplatinumstyle.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqpoint.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqpointarray.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqpopupmenu.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqprinter.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqprocess.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqprogressbar.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqprogressdialog.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqptrcollection.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqptrdict.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqptrlist.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqptrqueue.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqptrstack.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqptrvector.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqpushbutton.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqqueue.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqradiobutton.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqrangecontrol.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqrect.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqregexp.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqregion.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqscrollbar.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqscrollview.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsemaphore.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqserversocket.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsessionmanager.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsettings.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsgistyle.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsignal.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsignalmapper.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsimplerichtext.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsize.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsizegrip.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsizepolicy.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsjiscodec.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqslider.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsocket.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsocketdevice.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsocketnotifier.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsortedlist.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsound.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqspinbox.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsplashscreen.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsplitter.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsql.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsqlcursor.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsqldatabase.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsqldriver.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsqldriverplugin.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsqleditorfactory.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsqlerror.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsqlfield.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsqlform.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsqlindex.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsqlpropertymap.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsqlquery.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsqlrecord.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsqlresult.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsqlselectcursor.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqstack.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqstatusbar.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqstring.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqstringlist.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqstrlist.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqstyle.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqstylefactory.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqstyleplugin.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqstylesheet.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqsyntaxhighlighter.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqt.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqtabbar.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqtabdialog.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqtable.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqtabwidget.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqtextbrowser.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqtextcodec.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqtextcodecplugin.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqtextedit.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqtextstream.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqtextview.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqthread.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqthreadstorage.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqtimer.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqtl.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqtoolbar.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqtoolbox.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqtoolbutton.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqtooltip.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqtranslator.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqtsciicodec.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqurl.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqurlinfo.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqurloperator.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntquuid.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqvalidator.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqvaluelist.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqvaluestack.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqvaluevector.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqvariant.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqvbox.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqvbuttongroup.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqvector.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqvgroupbox.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqwaitcondition.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqwhatsthis.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqwidget.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqwidgetfactory.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqwidgetplugin.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqwidgetstack.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqwindowsstyle.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqwizard.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqwmatrix.html create mode 100644 doc/html/ntqworkspace.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qaccel.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qaccessible.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qaction.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qapplication.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qarray.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qasciicache.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qasciidict.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qassistantclient.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qasyncio.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qbig5codec.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qbitarray.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qbitmap.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qbrush.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qbuffer.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qbutton.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qbuttongroup.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qcache.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qcanvas.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qcdestyle.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qcheckbox.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qclipboard.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qcollection.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qcolor.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qcolordialog.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qcombobox.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qcommonstyle.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qcstring.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qcursor.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qdatabrowser.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qdatastream.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qdatatable.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qdataview.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qdatetime.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qdatetimeedit.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qdeepcopy.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qdesktopwidget.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qdial.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qdialog.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qdict.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qdir.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qdns.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qdockarea.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qdockwindow.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qdragobject.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qdropsite.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qeditorfactory.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qerrormessage.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qeucjpcodec.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qeuckrcodec.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qevent.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qeventloop.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qfile.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qfiledialog.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qfileinfo.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qfocusdata.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qfont.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qfontdatabase.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qfontdialog.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qfontinfo.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qfontmetrics.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qframe.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qftp.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qgb18030codec.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qgbkcodec.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qgl.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qglcolormap.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qgrid.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qgridview.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qgroupbox.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qguardedptr.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qhbox.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qhbuttongroup.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qheader.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qhgroupbox.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qhostaddress.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qhttp.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qiconset.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qiconview.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qimage.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qimageformatplugin.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qinputdialog.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qintcache.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qintdict.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qiodevice.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qjiscodec.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qkeysequence.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qlabel.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qlayout.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qlcdnumber.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qlibrary.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qlineedit.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qlist.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qlistbox.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qlistview.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qlocale.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qlocalfs.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qmainwindow.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qmap.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qmemarray.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qmenubar.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qmenudata.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qmessagebox.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qmetaobject.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qmotifplusstyle.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qmotifstyle.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qmovie.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qmultilineedit.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qmutex.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qnetworkprotocol.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qobject.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qobjectcleanuphandler.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qobjectlist.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qpaintdevice.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qpaintdevicemetrics.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qpainter.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qpair.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qpalette.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qpen.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qpicture.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qpixmap.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qpixmapcache.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qplatinumstyle.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qpoint.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qpointarray.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qpopupmenu.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qprinter.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qprocess.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qprogressbar.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qprogressdialog.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qptrcollection.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qptrdict.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qptrlist.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qptrqueue.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qptrstack.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qptrvector.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qpushbutton.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qqueue.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qradiobutton.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qrangecontrol.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qrect.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qregexp.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qregion.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qscrollbar.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qscrollview.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsemaphore.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qserversocket.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsessionmanager.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsettings.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsgistyle.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsignal.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsignalmapper.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsimplerichtext.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsize.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsizegrip.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsizepolicy.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsjiscodec.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qslider.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsocket.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsocketdevice.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsocketnotifier.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsortedlist.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsound.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qspinbox.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsplashscreen.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsplitter.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsql.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsqlcursor.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsqldatabase.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsqldriver.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsqldriverplugin.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsqleditorfactory.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsqlerror.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsqlfield.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsqlform.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsqlindex.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsqlpropertymap.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsqlquery.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsqlrecord.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsqlresult.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsqlselectcursor.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qstack.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qstatusbar.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qstring.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qstringlist.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qstrlist.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qstyle.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qstylefactory.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qstyleplugin.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qstylesheet.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qsyntaxhighlighter.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qt.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qtabbar.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qtabdialog.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qtable.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qtabwidget.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qtextbrowser.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qtextcodec.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qtextcodecplugin.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qtextedit.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qtextstream.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qtextview.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qthread.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qthreadstorage.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qtimer.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qtl.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qtoolbar.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qtoolbox.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qtoolbutton.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qtooltip.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qtranslator.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qtsciicodec.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qurl.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qurlinfo.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qurloperator.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/quuid.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qvalidator.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qvaluelist.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qvaluestack.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qvaluevector.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qvariant.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qvbox.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qvbuttongroup.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qvector.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qvgroupbox.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qwaitcondition.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qwhatsthis.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qwidget.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qwidgetfactory.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qwidgetplugin.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qwidgetstack.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qwindowsstyle.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qwizard.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qwmatrix.html delete mode 100644 doc/html/qworkspace.html (limited to 'doc/html') diff --git a/doc/html/aboutntqt.html b/doc/html/aboutntqt.html new file mode 100644 index 000000000..be2173f90 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/html/aboutntqt.html @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + +About TQt + + + + + + + +
+ +Home + | +All Classes + | +Main Classes + | +Annotated + | +Grouped Classes + | +Functions +

About TQt

+ + + +

TQt is a multiplatform C++ GUI toolkit created and maintained byTrolltech. It provides application developers with +all the functionality needed to build applications with +state-of-the-art graphical user interfaces. TQt is fully +object-oriented, easily extensible, and allows true component +programming. Read the Whitepaper for a comprehensive technical overview. +

Since its commercial introduction in early 1996, TQt has formed the +basis of many thousands of successful applications worldwide. TQt is +also the basis of the popular KDE +Linux desktop environment, a standard component of all major Linux +distributions. See our Customer Success Stories for some examples of commercial TQt +development. +

TQt is supported on the following platforms: +

+

TQt is released in different editions: +

+

+

+ +

+ +
Copyright © 2007 +TrolltechTrademarks +
TQt 3.3.8
+
+ diff --git a/doc/html/aboutqt.html b/doc/html/aboutqt.html deleted file mode 100644 index be2173f90..000000000 --- a/doc/html/aboutqt.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,81 +0,0 @@ - - - - - -About TQt - - - - - - - -
- -Home - | -All Classes - | -Main Classes - | -Annotated - | -Grouped Classes - | -Functions -

About TQt

- - - -

TQt is a multiplatform C++ GUI toolkit created and maintained byTrolltech. It provides application developers with -all the functionality needed to build applications with -state-of-the-art graphical user interfaces. TQt is fully -object-oriented, easily extensible, and allows true component -programming. Read the Whitepaper for a comprehensive technical overview. -

Since its commercial introduction in early 1996, TQt has formed the -basis of many thousands of successful applications worldwide. TQt is -also the basis of the popular KDE -Linux desktop environment, a standard component of all major Linux -distributions. See our Customer Success Stories for some examples of commercial TQt -development. -

TQt is supported on the following platforms: -

-

TQt is released in different editions: -

-

-

- -

- -
Copyright © 2007 -TrolltechTrademarks -
TQt 3.3.8
-
- diff --git a/doc/html/abstractwidgets.html b/doc/html/abstractwidgets.html index 1b426c927..b925e573e 100644 --- a/doc/html/abstractwidgets.html +++ b/doc/html/abstractwidgets.html @@ -37,14 +37,14 @@ themselves, but provide functionality that can be used by inheriting these classes.

-
TQButtonThe abstract base class of button widgets, providing functionality common to buttons -
TQCanvas2D area that can contain TQCanvasItem objects -
TQDialogThe base class of dialog windows -
TQFrameThe base class of widgets that can have a frame -
TQGridViewAbstract base for fixed-size grids -
TQScrollViewScrolling area with on-demand scroll bars -
TQWidgetThe base class of all user interface objects -
TQWizardFramework for wizard dialogs +
TQButtonThe abstract base class of button widgets, providing functionality common to buttons +
TQCanvas2D area that can contain TQCanvasItem objects +
TQDialogThe base class of dialog windows +
TQFrameThe base class of widgets that can have a frame +
TQGridViewAbstract base for fixed-size grids +
TQScrollViewScrolling area with on-demand scroll bars +
TQWidgetThe base class of all user interface objects +
TQWizardFramework for wizard dialogs

diff --git a/doc/html/accelerators.html b/doc/html/accelerators.html index 7bdff46a3..4fadf2648 100644 --- a/doc/html/accelerators.html +++ b/doc/html/accelerators.html @@ -34,14 +34,14 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }

Applications invariably need to define accelerator keys for actions. -TQt fully supports accelerators, for example with TQAccel::shortcutKey(). +TQt fully supports accelerators, for example with TQAccel::shortcutKey().

Here are Microsoft's recommendations for accelerator keys, with comments about the Open Group's recommendations where they exist and differ. For most commands, the Open Group either has no advice or agrees with Microsoft.

The emboldened letter plus Alt is Microsoft's recommended choice, and we recommend supporting it. For an Apply button, for example, we -recommend TQButton::setText( tr("&Apply") ); +recommend TQButton::setText( tr("&Apply") );

If you have conflicting commands (e.g. About and Apply buttons in the same dialog), you must decide for yourself.

The value-based collections plus algorithms operating on them are grouped together in the TQt Template -Library; see also the TQt Template +Library; see also the TQt Template Library Classes.

The rest of this page dicusses the pointer-based containers.

Architecture of the pointer-based containers @@ -92,13 +92,13 @@ collections by casting item pointers to and from void pointers.

This strategy allows TQt's templates to be very economical on space (instantiating one of these templates adds only inlinable calls to the base classes), without hurting performance. -

A TQPtrList Example +

A TQPtrList Example

This example shows how to store Employee items in a list and prints them out in reverse order: 

-    #include <qptrlist.h>
-    #include <qstring.h>
+    #include <ntqptrlist.h>
+    #include <ntqstring.h>
     #include <stdio.h>
 
     class Employee
@@ -108,18 +108,18 @@ them out in reverse order:
         const char *name()   const               { return n; }
         int         salary() const               { return s; }
     private:
-        TQString     n;
+        TQString     n;
         int         s;
     };
 
     int main()
     {
-        TQPtrList<Employee> list;        // list of pointers to Employee
-        list.setAutoDelete( TRUE );     // delete items when they are removed
+        TQPtrList<Employee> list;        // list of pointers to Employee
+        list.setAutoDelete( TRUE );     // delete items when they are removed
 
-        list.append( new Employee("Bill", 50000) );
-        list.append( new Employee("Steve",80000) );
-        list.append( new Employee("Ron",  60000) );
+        list.append( new Employee("Bill", 50000) );
+        list.append( new Employee("Steve",80000) );
+        list.append( new Employee("Ron",  60000) );
 
         TQPtrListIterator<Employee> it(list); // iterator for employee list
         for ( it.toLast(); it.current(); --it) ) {
@@ -140,11 +140,11 @@ them out in reverse order:
  
 
 
 Managing Collection Items
 

-
 All pointer-based collections inherit the TQPtrCollection base class.
+
 All pointer-based collections inherit the TQPtrCollection base class.
 This class only knows about the number of items in the collection and
 the deletion strategy.
 
 By default, items in a collection are not deleted when they are
-removed from the collection. The TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete()
+removed from the collection. The TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete()
 function specifies the deletion strategy. In the list example, we
 enable auto-deletion to make the list delete the items when they are
 removed from the list.
@@ -152,23 +152,23 @@ removed from the list.
 not the item itself. This is called a shallow copy. It is possible to
 make the collection copy all of the item's data (known as a deep copy)
 when an item is inserted. All collection functions that insert an
-item call the virtual function TQPtrCollection::newItem() for the item
+item call the virtual function TQPtrCollection::newItem() for the item
 to be inserted. Inherit a collection and reimplement it if you want
 to have deep copies in your collection.
 
 When removing an item from a list, the virtual function
-TQPtrCollection::deleteItem() is called. The default implementation
+TQPtrCollection::deleteItem() is called. The default implementation
 in all collection classes deletes the item if auto-deletion is
 enabled.
 
 
 Usage
 

-
 A pointer-based collection class, such as TQPtrList<type>, defines a
+
 A pointer-based collection class, such as TQPtrList<type>, defines a
 collection of pointers to type objects. The pointer (*) is
 implicit.
-
 We discuss TQPtrList here, but the same techniques apply to all
+
 We discuss TQPtrList here, but the same techniques apply to all
 pointer-based collection classes and all collection class iterators.
 
 Template instantiation:
 
-    TQPtrList<Employee> list;            // wherever the list is used
+    TQPtrList<Employee> list;            // wherever the list is used
 

  
 
 The item's class or type, Employee in our example, must be defined prior
@@ -176,69 +176,69 @@ to the list definition.
 
 
     // Does not work: Employee is not defined
     class Employee;
-    TQPtrList<Employee> list;
+    TQPtrList<Employee> list;
 
     // This works: Employee is defined before it is used
     class Employee {
         ...
     };
-    TQPtrList<Employee> list;
+    TQPtrList<Employee> list;
 

  
 
 
 Iterators
 

-
 Although TQPtrList has member functions to traverse the list, it can
+
 Although TQPtrList has member functions to traverse the list, it can
 often be better to make use of an iterator. TQPtrListIterator is very
 safe and can traverse lists that are being modified at the same time.
 Multiple iterators can work independently on the same collection.
-
 A TQPtrList has an internal list of all the iterators that are
+
 A TQPtrList has an internal list of all the iterators that are
 currently operating on it. When a list entry is removed, the list
 updates all iterators accordingly.
-
 The TQDict and TQCache collections have no traversal functions. To
+
 The TQDict and TQCache collections have no traversal functions. To
 traverse these collections, you must use TQDictIterator or TQCacheIterator.
 
 
 Predefined Collections
 

 
 TQt has the following predefined collection classes:
 

-
 In almost all cases you would choose TQStringList, a value
-list of implicitly shared TQString Unicode strings. TQPtrStrList and
+
 In almost all cases you would choose TQStringList, a value
+list of implicitly shared TQString Unicode strings. TQPtrStrList and
 TQPtrStrIList store only char pointers, not the strings themselves.
 
 
 List of Pointer-based Collection Classes and Related
 Iterator Classes
 

 
 
 

-
TQAsciiCacheTemplate class that provides a cache based on char* keys
+
TQAsciiCacheTemplate class that provides a cache based on char* keys
 
TQAsciiCacheIteratorIterator for TQAsciiCache collections
-
TQAsciiDictTemplate class that provides a dictionary based on char* keys
+
TQAsciiDictTemplate class that provides a dictionary based on char* keys
 
TQAsciiDictIteratorIterator for TQAsciiDict collections
-
TQBitArrayArray of bits
+
TQBitArrayArray of bits
 
TQBitValInternal class, used with TQBitArray
-
TQBufferI/O device that operates on a TQByteArray
+
TQBufferI/O device that operates on a TQByteArray
 
TQByteArrayArray of bytes
-
TQCacheTemplate class that provides a cache based on TQString keys
+
TQCacheTemplate class that provides a cache based on TQString keys
 
TQCacheIteratorIterator for TQCache collections
-
TQCStringAbstraction of the classic C zero-terminated char array (char *)
-
TQDictTemplate class that provides a dictionary based on TQString keys
+
TQCStringAbstraction of the classic C zero-terminated char array (char *)
+
TQDictTemplate class that provides a dictionary based on TQString keys
 
TQDictIteratorIterator for TQDict collections
-
TQIntCacheTemplate class that provides a cache based on long keys
+
TQIntCacheTemplate class that provides a cache based on long keys
 
TQIntCacheIteratorIterator for TQIntCache collections
-
TQIntDictTemplate class that provides a dictionary based on long keys
+
TQIntDictTemplate class that provides a dictionary based on long keys
 
TQIntDictIteratorIterator for TQIntDict collections
-
TQObjectListTQPtrList of TQObjects
+
TQObjectListTQPtrList of TQObjects
 
TQObjectListIteratorIterator for TQObjectLists
-
TQPtrCollectionThe base class of most pointer-based TQt collections
-
TQPtrDictTemplate class that provides a dictionary based on void* keys
+
TQPtrCollectionThe base class of most pointer-based TQt collections
+
TQPtrDictTemplate class that provides a dictionary based on void* keys
 
TQPtrDictIteratorIterator for TQPtrDict collections
-
TQPtrListTemplate class that provides a list
+
TQPtrListTemplate class that provides a list
 
TQPtrListIteratorIterator for TQPtrList collections
-
TQPtrQueueTemplate class that provides a queue
+
TQPtrQueueTemplate class that provides a queue
 
TQStrIListDoubly-linked list of char* with case-insensitive comparison
-
TQStrListDoubly-linked list of char*
+
TQStrListDoubly-linked list of char*
 

 
 

diff --git a/doc/html/commercialeditions.html b/doc/html/commercialeditions.html
index 8e78400fb..8b4b858c7 100644
--- a/doc/html/commercialeditions.html
+++ b/doc/html/commercialeditions.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
  
 
 The TQt Professional and Enterprise Editions are the commercial
-versions of TQt.
+versions of TQt.
 
 You may only write commercial, proprietary and non-free software if
 you have purchased the Professional Edition or the Enterprise
 Edition.
@@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Well-formed XML parser with SAX interface and DOM Level 1.
 X
 
 
-ActiveTQt extension

+ActiveTQt extension

 Support for building and hosting ActiveX controls on Windows.
 

 
diff --git a/doc/html/commonproblems.html b/doc/html/commonproblems.html
index 9670d1cfb..8074f0f86 100644
--- a/doc/html/commonproblems.html
+++ b/doc/html/commonproblems.html
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ machine
 
  •  Developers building for two versions of TQt on Unix - TQt sources
 
 
  •  Using TQt on X11 without a window manager
-
  •  Distributing TQt Applications
+
  •  Distributing TQt Applications
 
 
     
 
     Link error, complaining about a lack of vtbl, _vtbl, __vtbl or similar
diff --git a/doc/html/coordsys.html b/doc/html/coordsys.html
index ff9e4ce8c..1b497fa98 100644
--- a/doc/html/coordsys.html
+++ b/doc/html/coordsys.html
@@ -33,9 +33,9 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
 
-
     A paint device in TQt is a drawable 2D
-surface. TQWidget, TQPixmap, TQPicture and TQPrinter are all
-paint devices. A TQPainter is an object which can draw on such
+
     A paint device in TQt is a drawable 2D
+surface. TQWidget, TQPixmap, TQPicture and TQPrinter are all
+paint devices. A TQPainter is an object which can draw on such
 devices.
 
     The default coordinate system of a paint device has its origin at the
 top left corner. X increases to the right and Y increases downwards.
@@ -51,83 +51,83 @@ added and colors touched up in the illustration):
 
     
         void MyWidget::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
     {
-        TQPainter p( this );
-        p.setPen( darkGray );
-        p.drawRect( 1,2, 5,4 );
-        p.setPen( lightGray );
-        p.drawLine( 9,2, 7,7 );
+        TQPainter p( this );
+        p.setPen( darkGray );
+        p.drawRect( 1,2, 5,4 );
+        p.setPen( lightGray );
+        p.drawLine( 9,2, 7,7 );
     }
 
    
  
 
     Note that all of the pixels drawn by drawRect() are inside the size
 specified (5*4 pixels). This is different from some toolkits; in TQt
 the size you specify exactly encompasses the pixels drawn. This
-applies to all the relevant functions in TQPainter.
+applies to all the relevant functions in TQPainter.
 
     Similarly, the drawLine() call draws both endpoints of the line, not
 just one.
 
     Here are the classes that relate most closely to the coordinate
 system:
 
     
    
-
     TQPoint
+
     TQPoint
 A single 2D point in the coordinate system. Most functions in
-TQt that deal with points can accept either a TQPoint argument
-or two ints, for example TQPainter::drawPoint().
-
     TQSize
-A single 2D vector. Internally, TQPoint and TQSize are the same,
+TQt that deal with points can accept either a TQPoint argument
+or two ints, for example TQPainter::drawPoint().
+
     TQSize
+A single 2D vector. Internally, TQPoint and TQSize are the same,
 but a point is not the same as a size, so both classes exist.
 Again, most functions accept either a TQSize or two ints, for
-example TQWidget::resize().
-
     TQRect
-A 2D rectangle. Most functions accept either a TQRect or four
-ints, for example TQWidget::setGeometry().
-
     TQRegion
+example TQWidget::resize().
+
     TQRect
+A 2D rectangle. Most functions accept either a TQRect or four
+ints, for example TQWidget::setGeometry().
+
     TQRegion
 An arbitrary set of points, including all the normal set
-operations, e.g. TQRegion::intersect(), and also a less
+operations, e.g. TQRegion::intersect(), and also a less
 usual function to return a list of rectangles whose union is
-equal to the region. TQRegion is used e.g. by TQPainter::setClipRegion(), TQWidget::repaint() and TQPaintEvent::region().
-
     TQPainter
+equal to the region. TQRegion is used e.g. by TQPainter::setClipRegion(), TQWidget::repaint() and TQPaintEvent::region().
+
     TQPainter
 The class that paints. It can paint on any device with the
-same code. There are differences between devices, TQPrinter::newPage() is a good example, but TQPainter works the
+same code. There are differences between devices, TQPrinter::newPage() is a good example, but TQPainter works the
 same way on all devices.
-
     TQPaintDevice
+
     TQPaintDevice
 A device on which TQPainter can paint. There are two internal
-devices, both pixel-based, and two external devices, TQPrinter and TQPicture (which records TQPainter commands to a
-file or other TQIODevice, and plays them back). Other
+devices, both pixel-based, and two external devices, TQPrinter and TQPicture (which records TQPainter commands to a
+file or other TQIODevice, and plays them back). Other
 devices can be defined.
 
    
 
     
     Transformations
 
    
-
     Although TQt's default coordinate system works as described above, TQPainter also supports arbitrary transformations.
+
     Although TQt's default coordinate system works as described above, TQPainter also supports arbitrary transformations.
 
     This transformation engine is a three-step pipeline, closely following
 the model outlined in books such as
 Foley & Van Dam and the
 OpenGL Programming Guide. Refer to those for in-depth
 coverage; here we give just a brief overview and an example.
-
     The first step uses the world transformation matrix. Use this matrix
+
     The first step uses the world transformation matrix. Use this matrix
 to orient and position your objects in your model. TQt provides
-methods such as TQPainter::rotate(), TQPainter::scale(), TQPainter::translate() and so on to operate on this matrix.
-
     TQPainter::save() and TQPainter::restore() save and restore this
-matrix. You can also use TQWMatrix objects, TQPainter::worldMatrix() and TQPainter::setWorldMatrix() to store and
+methods such as TQPainter::rotate(), TQPainter::scale(), TQPainter::translate() and so on to operate on this matrix.
+
     TQPainter::save() and TQPainter::restore() save and restore this
+matrix. You can also use TQWMatrix objects, TQPainter::worldMatrix() and TQPainter::setWorldMatrix() to store and
 use named matrices.
 
     The second step uses the window. The window describes the view
 boundaries in model coordinates. The matrix positions the objects
-and TQPainter::setWindow() positions the window, deciding what
+and TQPainter::setWindow() positions the window, deciding what
 coordinates will be visible. (If you have 3D experience, the window
 is what's usually called projection in 3D.)
 
     The third step uses the viewport. The viewport too, describes the view
 boundaries, but in device coordinates. The viewport and the windows
 describe the same rectangle, but in different coordinate systems.
-
     On-screen, the default is the entire TQWidget or TQPixmap where
+
     On-screen, the default is the entire TQWidget or TQPixmap where
 you are drawing, which is usually appropriate. For printing this
 function is vital, since very few printers can print over the entire
 physical page.
 
     So each object to be drawn is transformed into model
-coordinates using TQPainter::worldMatrix(), then positioned
-on the drawing device using TQPainter::window() and
-TQPainter::viewport().
+coordinates using TQPainter::worldMatrix(), then positioned
+on the drawing device using TQPainter::window() and
+TQPainter::viewport().
 
     It is perfectly possible to do without one or two of the stages. If,
-for example, your goal is to draw something scaled, then just using TQPainter::scale() makes perfect sense. If your goal is to use a
-fixed-size coordinate system, TQPainter::setWindow() is
+for example, your goal is to draw something scaled, then just using TQPainter::scale() makes perfect sense. If your goal is to use a
+fixed-size coordinate system, TQPainter::setWindow() is
 ideal. And so on.
 
     Here is a short example that uses all three mechanisms: the function
 that draws the clock face in the aclock/aclock.cpp example. We
@@ -135,71 +135,71 @@ recommend compiling and running the example before you read any
 further. In particular, try resizing the window to different sizes.
 
     
 
-
        void AnalogClock::drawClock( TQPainter *paint )
+
        void AnalogClock::drawClock( TQPainter *paint )
     {
-        paint->save();
+        paint->save();
 
    
 
     Firstly, we save the painter's state, so that the calling function
 is guaranteed not to be disturbed by the transformations we're going
 to use.
-
     
            paint->setWindow( -500,-500, 1000,1000 );
+
     
            paint->setWindow( -500,-500, 1000,1000 );
 
    
 
     We set the model coordinate system we want a 1000*1000 window where
 0,0 is in the middle.
-
     
            TQRect v = paint->viewport();
-        int d = TQMIN( v.width(), v.height() );
+
     
            TQRect v = paint->viewport();
+        int d = TQMIN( v.width(), v.height() );
 
    
 
     The device may not be square and we want the clock to be, so we find
 its current viewport and compute its shortest side.
-
     
            paint->setViewport( v.left() + (v.width()-d)/2,
-                            v.top() + (v.height()-d)/2, d, d );
+
     
            paint->setViewport( v.left() + (v.width()-d)/2,
+                            v.top() + (v.height()-d)/2, d, d );
 
    
 
     Then we set a new square viewport, centered in the old one.
 
     We're now done with our view. From this point on, when we draw in a
 1000*1000 area around 0,0, what we draw will show up in the largest
 possible square that'll fit in the output device.
 
     Time to start drawing.
-
     
            TQPointArray pts;
+
     
            TQPointArray pts;
 
    
 
     pts is just a temporary variable to hold some points.
 
     Next come three drawing blocks, one for the hour hand, one for the
 minute hand and finally one for the clock face itself. First we draw
 the hour hand:
-
     
            paint->save();
-        paint->rotate( 30*(time.hour()%12-3) + time.minute()/2 );
+
     
            paint->save();
+        paint->rotate( 30*(time.hour()%12-3) + time.minute()/2 );
 
    
 
     We save the painter and then rotate it so that one axis points along
 the hour hand.
 
     
            pts.setPoints( 4, -20,0,  0,-20, 300,0, 0,20 );
-        paint->drawConvexPolygon( pts );
+        paint->drawConvexPolygon( pts );
 
    
 
     We set pts to a four-point polygon that looks like the hour hand at
 three o'clock, and draw it. Because of the rotation, it's drawn
 pointed in the right direction.
-
     
            paint->restore();
+
     
            paint->restore();
 
    
 
     We restore the saved painter, undoing the rotation. We could also
 call rotate( -30 ) but that might introduce rounding errors, so it's
 better to use save() and restore(). Next, the minute hand, drawn
 almost the same way:
-
     
            paint->save();
-        paint->rotate( (time.minute()-15)*6 );
+
     
            paint->save();
+        paint->rotate( (time.minute()-15)*6 );
         pts.setPoints( 4, -10,0, 0,-10, 400,0, 0,10 );
-        paint->drawConvexPolygon( pts );
-        paint->restore();
+        paint->drawConvexPolygon( pts );
+        paint->restore();
 
    
 
     The only differences are how the rotation angle is computed and the
 shape of the polygon.
 
     The last part to be drawn is the clock face itself.
 
     
            for ( int i=0; i<12; i++ ) {
-            paint->drawLine( 440,0, 460,0 );
-            paint->rotate( 30 );
+            paint->drawLine( 440,0, 460,0 );
+            paint->rotate( 30 );
         }
 
    
 
     Twelve short hour lines at thirty-degree intervals. At the end of
 that, the painter is rotated in a way which isn't very useful, but
 we're done with painting so that doesn't matter.
-
     
            paint->restore();
+
     
            paint->restore();
     }
 
    
 
     The final line of the function restores the painter, so that the
diff --git a/doc/html/cursor-example.html b/doc/html/cursor-example.html
index fe12aac7f..2403c27f3 100644
--- a/doc/html/cursor-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/cursor-example.html
@@ -46,11 +46,11 @@ This example shows how to set a mouse cursor for a widget.
 **
 *****************************************************************************/
 
-#include <qlabel.h>
-#include <qbitmap.h>
-#include <qapplication.h>
-#include <qlayout.h>
-#include <qcursor.h>
+#include <ntqlabel.h>
+#include <ntqbitmap.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
+#include <ntqlayout.h>
+#include <ntqcursor.h>
 
 // cb_bits and cm_bits were generated by X bitmap program.
 
@@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ static unsigned char cm_bits[] = {              // cursor bitmap mask
 // The CursorView contains many labels with different cursors.
 //
 
-class CursorView : public TQWidget               // cursor view
+class CursorView : public TQWidget               // cursor view
 {
 public:
     CursorView();
@@ -130,43 +130,43 @@ CursorView::CursorView()                        // construct view
     setCaption( "CursorView" );                 // set window caption
 
     TQGridLayout* grid = new TQGridLayout( this, 5, 4, 20 );
-    TQLabel *label;
+    TQLabel *label;
 
     int i=0;
     for ( int y=0; y<4; y++ ) {                 // create the small labels
         for ( int x=0; x<4; x++ ) {
-            label = new TQLabel( this );
-            label->setCursor( TQCursor( list[i].shape ) );
-            label->setText( list[i].name );
-            label->setAlignment( AlignCenter );
-            label->setMargin( 10 );
-            label->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Box | TQFrame::Raised );
+            label = new TQLabel( this );
+            label->setCursor( TQCursor( list[i].shape ) );
+            label->setText( list[i].name );
+            label->setAlignment( AlignCenter );
+            label->setMargin( 10 );
+            label->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Box | TQFrame::Raised );
             grid->addWidget( label, x, y );
             i++;
         }
     }
 
 
-    label = new TQLabel( this );
-    label->setCursor( TQCursor( list[i].shape ) );
-    label->setText( list[i].name );
-    label->setAlignment( AlignCenter );
-    label->setMargin( 10 );
-    label->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Box | TQFrame::Raised );
+    label = new TQLabel( this );
+    label->setCursor( TQCursor( list[i].shape ) );
+    label->setText( list[i].name );
+    label->setAlignment( AlignCenter );
+    label->setMargin( 10 );
+    label->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Box | TQFrame::Raised );
     grid->addWidget( label, 4, 0 );
 
 
 
-    TQBitmap cb( cb_width, cb_height, cb_bits, TRUE );
-    TQBitmap cm( cm_width, cm_height, cm_bits, TRUE );
-    TQCursor custom( cb, cm );                   // create bitmap cursor
+    TQBitmap cb( cb_width, cb_height, cb_bits, TRUE );
+    TQBitmap cm( cm_width, cm_height, cm_bits, TRUE );
+    TQCursor custom( cb, cm );                   // create bitmap cursor
 
-    label = new TQLabel( this );                 // create the big label
-    label->setCursor( custom );
-    label->setText( "Custom bitmap cursor" );
-    label->setAlignment( AlignCenter );
-    label->setMargin( 10 );
-    label->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Box | TQFrame::Sunken );
+    label = new TQLabel( this );                 // create the big label
+    label->setCursor( custom );
+    label->setText( "Custom bitmap cursor" );
+    label->setAlignment( AlignCenter );
+    label->setMargin( 10 );
+    label->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Box | TQFrame::Sunken );
     grid->addMultiCellWidget( label, 4, 4, 1, 3 );
 
 }
@@ -178,12 +178,12 @@ CursorView::CursorView()                        // construct view
 
 int main( int argc, char **argv )
 {
-    TQApplication a( argc, argv );               // application object
+    TQApplication a( argc, argv );               // application object
     CursorView   v;                             // cursor view
-    a.setMainWidget( &v );
-    v.setCaption("TQt Example - Cursors");
-    v.show();
-    return a.exec();
+    a.setMainWidget( &v );
+    v.setCaption("TQt Example - Cursors");
+    v.show();
+    return a.exec();
 }
 
    
 
diff --git a/doc/html/customlayout-example.html b/doc/html/customlayout-example.html
index 30fb9f1ff..09ec8dacd 100644
--- a/doc/html/customlayout-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/customlayout-example.html
@@ -55,21 +55,21 @@ like card layouts, border layout and flow layouts.
 #ifndef FLOW_H
 #define FLOW_H
 
-#include <qlayout.h>
-#include <qptrlist.h>
+#include <ntqlayout.h>
+#include <ntqptrlist.h>
 
-class SimpleFlow : public TQLayout
+class SimpleFlow : public TQLayout
 {
 public:
-    SimpleFlow( TQWidget *parent, int border=0, int space=-1,
+    SimpleFlow( TQWidget *parent, int border=0, int space=-1,
                 const char *name=0 )
-        : TQLayout( parent, border, space, name ),
+        : TQLayout( parent, border, space, name ),
         cached_width(0) {}
-    SimpleFlow( TQLayout* parent, int space=-1, const char *name=0 )
-        : TQLayout( parent, space, name ),
+    SimpleFlow( TQLayout* parent, int space=-1, const char *name=0 )
+        : TQLayout( parent, space, name ),
         cached_width(0) {}
     SimpleFlow( int space=-1, const char *name=0 )
-        : TQLayout( space, name ),
+        : TQLayout( space, name ),
         cached_width(0) {}
 
     ~SimpleFlow();
@@ -77,17 +77,17 @@ public:
     void addItem( TQLayoutItem *item);
     bool hasHeightForWidth() const;
     int heightForWidth( int ) const;
-    TQSize sizeHint() const;
-    TQSize minimumSize() const;
+    TQSize sizeHint() const;
+    TQSize minimumSize() const;
     TQLayoutIterator iterator();
     TQSizePolicy::ExpandData expanding() const;
 
 protected:
-    void setGeometry( const TQRect& );
+    void setGeometry( const TQRect& );
 
 private:
-    int doLayout( const TQRect&, bool testonly = FALSE );
-    TQPtrList<TQLayoutItem> list;
+    int doLayout( const TQRect&, bool testonly = FALSE );
+    TQPtrList<TQLayoutItem> list;
     int cached_width;
     int cached_hfw;
 
@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ private:
 class SimpleFlowIterator :public TQGLayoutIterator
 {
 public:
-    SimpleFlowIterator( TQPtrList<TQLayoutItem> *l ) :idx(0), list(l)  {}
+    SimpleFlowIterator( TQPtrList<TQLayoutItem> *l ) :idx(0), list(l)  {}
     uint count() const;
     TQLayoutItem *current();
     TQLayoutItem *next();
@@ -123,18 +123,18 @@ public:
 
 private:
     int idx;
-    TQPtrList<TQLayoutItem> *list;
+    TQPtrList<TQLayoutItem> *list;
 
 };
 
 uint SimpleFlowIterator::count() const
 {
-    return list->count();
+    return list->count();
 }
 
 TQLayoutItem *SimpleFlowIterator::current()
 {
-    return idx < int(count()) ? list->at(idx) : 0;
+    return idx < int(count()) ? list->at(idx) : 0;
 }
 
 TQLayoutItem *SimpleFlowIterator::next()
@@ -144,12 +144,12 @@ uint SimpleFlowIterator::count() const
 
 TQLayoutItem *SimpleFlowIterator::takeCurrent()
 {
-    return idx < int(count()) ? list->take( idx ) : 0;
+    return idx < int(count()) ? list->take( idx ) : 0;
 }
 
 SimpleFlow::~SimpleFlow()
 {
-    deleteAllItems();
+    deleteAllItems();
 }
 
 
@@ -166,9 +166,9 @@ SimpleFlow::~SimpleFlow()
     return cached_hfw;
 }
 
-void SimpleFlow::addItem( TQLayoutItem *item)
+void SimpleFlow::addItem( TQLayoutItem *item)
 {
-    list.append( item );
+    list.append( item );
 }
 
 bool SimpleFlow::hasHeightForWidth() const
@@ -181,34 +181,34 @@ SimpleFlow::~SimpleFlow()
     return minimumSize();
 }
 
-TQSizePolicy::ExpandData SimpleFlow::expanding() const
+TQSizePolicy::ExpandData SimpleFlow::expanding() const
 {
     return TQSizePolicy::NoDirection;
 }
 
-TQLayoutIterator SimpleFlow::iterator()
+TQLayoutIterator SimpleFlow::iterator()
 {
     return TQLayoutIterator( new SimpleFlowIterator( &list ) );
 }
 
-void SimpleFlow::setGeometry( const TQRect &r )
+void SimpleFlow::setGeometry( const TQRect &r )
 {
-    TQLayout::setGeometry( r );
+    TQLayout::setGeometry( r );
     doLayout( r );
 }
 
-int SimpleFlow::doLayout( const TQRect &r, bool testonly )
+int SimpleFlow::doLayout( const TQRect &r, bool testonly )
 {
-    int x = r.x();
-    int y = r.y();
+    int x = r.x();
+    int y = r.y();
     int h = 0;          //height of this line so far.
     TQPtrListIterator<TQLayoutItem> it(list);
     TQLayoutItem *o;
     while ( (o=it.current()) != 0 ) {
         ++it;
         int nextX = x + o->sizeHint().width() + spacing();
-        if ( nextX - spacing() > r.right() && h > 0 ) {
-            x = r.x();
+        if ( nextX - spacing() > r.right() && h > 0 ) {
+            x = r.x();
             y = y + h + spacing();
             nextX = x + o->sizeHint().width() + spacing();
             h = 0;
@@ -218,17 +218,17 @@ int SimpleFlow::doLayout( const TQRectsizeHint().height() );
     }
-    return y + h - r.y();
+    return y + h - r.y();
 }
 
-TQSize SimpleFlow::minimumSize() const
+TQSize SimpleFlow::minimumSize() const
 {
-    TQSize s(0,0);
+    TQSize s(0,0);
     TQPtrListIterator<TQLayoutItem> it(list);
     TQLayoutItem *o;
     while ( (o=it.current()) != 0 ) {
         ++it;
-        s = s.expandedTo( o->minimumSize() );
+        s = s.expandedTo( o->minimumSize() );
     }
     return s;
 }
@@ -253,22 +253,22 @@ int SimpleFlow::doLayout( const TQRectqlayout.h>
-#include <qptrlist.h>
+#include <ntqlayout.h>
+#include <ntqptrlist.h>
 
 class BorderWidgetItem : public TQWidgetItem
 {
 public:
-    BorderWidgetItem( TQWidget *w )
+    BorderWidgetItem( TQWidget *w )
         : TQWidgetItem( w )
     {}
 
-    void setGeometry( const TQRect &r )
+    void setGeometry( const TQRect &r )
     { widget()->setGeometry( r ); }
 
 };
 
-class BorderLayout : public TQLayout
+class BorderLayout : public TQLayout
 {
 public:
     enum Position {
@@ -295,19 +295,19 @@ public:
         SizeHint
     };
 
-    BorderLayout( TQWidget *parent, int border = 0, int autoBorder = -1,
+    BorderLayout( TQWidget *parent, int border = 0, int autoBorder = -1,
                   const char *name = 0 )
-        : TQLayout( parent, border, autoBorder, name ), cached( 0, 0 ), mcached( 0, 0 ),
+        : TQLayout( parent, border, autoBorder, name ), cached( 0, 0 ), mcached( 0, 0 ),
           sizeDirty( TRUE ), msizeDirty( TRUE )
     {}
 
-    BorderLayout( TQLayout* parent, int autoBorder = -1, const char *name = 0 )
-        : TQLayout( parent, autoBorder, name  ), cached( 0, 0 ), mcached( 0, 0 ),
+    BorderLayout( TQLayout* parent, int autoBorder = -1, const char *name = 0 )
+        : TQLayout( parent, autoBorder, name  ), cached( 0, 0 ), mcached( 0, 0 ),
           sizeDirty( TRUE ), msizeDirty( TRUE )
     {}
 
     BorderLayout( int autoBorder = -1, const char *name = 0 )
-        : TQLayout( autoBorder, name ), cached( 0, 0 ), mcached( 0, 0 ),
+        : TQLayout( autoBorder, name ), cached( 0, 0 ), mcached( 0, 0 ),
           sizeDirty( TRUE ), msizeDirty( TRUE )
     {}
 
@@ -315,27 +315,27 @@ public:
 
     void addItem( TQLayoutItem *item );
 
-    void addWidget( TQWidget *widget, Position pos );
+    void addWidget( TQWidget *widget, Position pos );
     void add( TQLayoutItem *item, Position pos );
 
     bool hasHeightForWidth() const;
 
-    TQSize sizeHint() const;
-    TQSize minimumSize() const;
+    TQSize sizeHint() const;
+    TQSize minimumSize() const;
 
     TQLayoutIterator iterator();
 
     TQSizePolicy::ExpandData expanding() const;
 
 protected:
-    void setGeometry( const TQRect &rect );
+    void setGeometry( const TQRect &rect );
 
 private:
-    void doLayout( const TQRect &rect, bool testonly = FALSE );
+    void doLayout( const TQRect &rect, bool testonly = FALSE );
     void calcSize( SizeType st );
 
-    TQPtrList<BorderLayoutStruct> list;
-    TQSize cached, mcached;
+    TQPtrList<BorderLayoutStruct> list;
+    TQSize cached, mcached;
     bool sizeDirty, msizeDirty;
 
 };
@@ -362,7 +362,7 @@ private:
 class BorderLayoutIterator : public TQGLayoutIterator
 {
 public:
-    BorderLayoutIterator( const TQPtrList<BorderLayout::BorderLayoutStruct> *l )
+    BorderLayoutIterator( const TQPtrList<BorderLayout::BorderLayoutStruct> *l )
         : idx( 0 ) , list( (TQPtrList<BorderLayout::BorderLayoutStruct>*)l )
     {}
 
@@ -376,23 +376,23 @@ public:
 
 private:
     int idx;
-    TQPtrList<BorderLayout::BorderLayoutStruct> *list;
+    TQPtrList<BorderLayout::BorderLayoutStruct> *list;
 
 };
 
 uint BorderLayoutIterator::count() const
 {
-    return list->count();
+    return list->count();
 }
 
 TQLayoutItem *BorderLayoutIterator::current()
 {
-    return idx < (int)count() ? list->at( idx )->item : 0;
+    return idx < (int)count() ? list->at( idx )->item : 0;
 }
 
 BorderLayout::BorderLayoutStruct *BorderLayoutIterator::currentStruct()
 {
-    return idx < (int)count() ? list->at( idx ) : 0;
+    return idx < (int)count() ? list->at( idx ) : 0;
 }
 
 void BorderLayoutIterator::toFirst()
@@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ void BorderLayoutIterator::toFirst()
 TQLayoutItem *BorderLayoutIterator::takeCurrent()
 {
     BorderLayout::BorderLayoutStruct *b
-        = idx < int( list->count() ) ? list->take(  idx  ) : 0;
+        = idx < int( list->count() ) ? list->take(  idx  ) : 0;
     TQLayoutItem *item =  b ? b->item : 0;
     delete b;
     return item;
@@ -423,23 +423,23 @@ BorderLayoutIterator &BorderLayoutIterator::operator++()
 
 BorderLayout::~BorderLayout()
 {
-    deleteAllItems();
+    deleteAllItems();
 }
 
 
-void BorderLayout::addItem( TQLayoutItem *item )
+void BorderLayout::addItem( TQLayoutItem *item )
 {
-    add( item, West );
+    add( item, West );
 }
 
-void BorderLayout::addWidget( TQWidget *widget, Position pos )
+void BorderLayout::addWidget( TQWidget *widget, Position pos )
 {
-    add( new BorderWidgetItem( widget ), pos );
+    add( new BorderWidgetItem( widget ), pos );
 }
 
-void BorderLayout::add( TQLayoutItem *item, Position pos )
+void BorderLayout::add( TQLayoutItem *item, Position pos )
 {
-    list.append( new BorderLayoutStruct( item, pos ) );
+    list.append( new BorderLayoutStruct( item, pos ) );
     sizeDirty = TRUE; msizeDirty = TRUE;
     calcSize( SizeHint ); calcSize( Minimum );
 }
@@ -454,29 +454,29 @@ void BorderLayout::addWidget( TQWidget
     return cached;
 }
 
-TQSize BorderLayout::minimumSize() const
+TQSize BorderLayout::minimumSize() const
 {
     return cached;
 }
 
-TQSizePolicy::ExpandData BorderLayout::expanding() const
+TQSizePolicy::ExpandData BorderLayout::expanding() const
 
 {
     return TQSizePolicy::BothDirections;
 }
 
-TQLayoutIterator BorderLayout::iterator()
+TQLayoutIterator BorderLayout::iterator()
 {
     return TQLayoutIterator( new BorderLayoutIterator( &list ) );
 }
 
-void BorderLayout::setGeometry( const TQRect &rct )
+void BorderLayout::setGeometry( const TQRect &rct )
 {
-    TQLayout::setGeometry( rct );
+    TQLayout::setGeometry( rct );
     doLayout( rct );
 }
 
-void BorderLayout::doLayout( const TQRect &rct, bool /*testonly*/ )
+void BorderLayout::doLayout( const TQRect &rct, bool /*testonly*/ )
 {
     int ew = 0, ww = 0, nh = 0, sh = 0;
     int h = 0;
@@ -488,41 +488,41 @@ void BorderLayout::doLayout( const TQRec
         ++it;
 
         if ( o->pos == North ) {
-            o->item->setGeometry( TQRect( rct.x(), nh, rct.width(), o->item->sizeHint().height() ) );
+            o->item->setGeometry( TQRect( rct.x(), nh, rct.width(), o->item->sizeHint().height() ) );
             nh += o->item->geometry().height() + spacing();
         }
         if ( o->pos == South ) {
             o->item->setGeometry( TQRect( o->item->geometry().x(), o->item->geometry().y(),
-                                         rct.width(), o->item->sizeHint().height() ) );
+                                         rct.width(), o->item->sizeHint().height() ) );
             sh += o->item->geometry().height() + spacing();
-            o->item->setGeometry( TQRect( rct.x(), rct.y() + rct.height() - sh + spacing(),
+            o->item->setGeometry( TQRect( rct.x(), rct.y() + rct.height() - sh + spacing(),
                                          o->item->geometry().width(), o->item->geometry().height() ) );
         }
         if ( o->pos == Center )
             center = o;
     }
 
-    h = rct.height() - nh - sh;
+    h = rct.height() - nh - sh;
 
     it.toFirst();
     while ( ( o = it.currentStruct() ) != 0 ) {
         ++it;
 
         if ( o->pos == West ) {
-            o->item->setGeometry( TQRect( rct.x() + ww, nh, o->item->sizeHint().width(), h ) );
+            o->item->setGeometry( TQRect( rct.x() + ww, nh, o->item->sizeHint().width(), h ) );
             ww += o->item->geometry().width() + spacing();
         }
         if ( o->pos == East ) {
             o->item->setGeometry( TQRect( o->item->geometry().x(), o->item->geometry().y(),
                                          o->item->sizeHint().width(), h ) );
             ew += o->item->geometry().width() + spacing();
-            o->item->setGeometry( TQRect( rct.x() + rct.width() - ew + spacing(), nh,
+            o->item->setGeometry( TQRect( rct.x() + rct.width() - ew + spacing(), nh,
                                          o->item->geometry().width(), o->item->geometry().height() ) );
         }
     }
 
     if ( center )
-        center->item->setGeometry( TQRect( ww, nh, rct.width() - ew - ww, h ) );
+        center->item->setGeometry( TQRect( ww, nh, rct.width() - ew - ww, h ) );
 }
 
 void BorderLayout::calcSize( SizeType st )
@@ -593,28 +593,28 @@ void BorderLayout::calcSize( SizeType st )
 #ifndef CARD_H
 #define CARD_H
 
-#include <qlayout.h>
-#include <qptrlist.h>
+#include <ntqlayout.h>
+#include <ntqptrlist.h>
 
-class CardLayout : public TQLayout
+class CardLayout : public TQLayout
 {
 public:
-    CardLayout( TQWidget *parent, int dist )
-        : TQLayout( parent, 0, dist ) {}
-    CardLayout( TQLayout* parent, int dist)
-        : TQLayout( parent, dist ) {}
+    CardLayout( TQWidget *parent, int dist )
+        : TQLayout( parent, 0, dist ) {}
+    CardLayout( TQLayout* parent, int dist)
+        : TQLayout( parent, dist ) {}
     CardLayout( int dist )
-        : TQLayout( dist ) {}
+        : TQLayout( dist ) {}
     ~CardLayout();
 
     void addItem( TQLayoutItem *item );
-    TQSize sizeHint() const;
-    TQSize minimumSize() const;
+    TQSize sizeHint() const;
+    TQSize minimumSize() const;
     TQLayoutIterator iterator();
-    void setGeometry( const TQRect &rect );
+    void setGeometry( const TQRect &rect );
 
 private:
-    TQPtrList<TQLayoutItem> list;
+    TQPtrList<TQLayoutItem> list;
 
 };
 
@@ -640,7 +640,7 @@ private:
 class CardLayoutIterator :public TQGLayoutIterator
 {
 public:
-    CardLayoutIterator( TQPtrList<TQLayoutItem> *l )
+    CardLayoutIterator( TQPtrList<TQLayoutItem> *l )
         : idx( 0 ), list( l )  {}
 
     TQLayoutItem *current();
@@ -649,12 +649,12 @@ public:
 
 private:
     int idx;
-    TQPtrList<TQLayoutItem> *list;
+    TQPtrList<TQLayoutItem> *list;
 };
 
 TQLayoutItem *CardLayoutIterator::current()
 {
-    return idx < int( list->count() ) ? list->at( idx ) : 0;
+    return idx < int( list->count() ) ? list->at( idx ) : 0;
 }
 
 TQLayoutItem *CardLayoutIterator::next()
@@ -664,29 +664,29 @@ private:
 
 TQLayoutItem *CardLayoutIterator::takeCurrent()
 {
-    return idx < int( list->count() ) ?list->take( idx ) : 0;
+    return idx < int( list->count() ) ?list->take( idx ) : 0;
 }
 
 
 
-TQLayoutIterator CardLayout::iterator()
+TQLayoutIterator CardLayout::iterator()
 {
     return TQLayoutIterator(  new CardLayoutIterator( &list )  );
 }
 
 CardLayout::~CardLayout()
 {
-    deleteAllItems();
+    deleteAllItems();
 }
 
-void CardLayout::addItem(  TQLayoutItem *item  )
+void CardLayout::addItem(  TQLayoutItem *item  )
 {
-    list.append( item );
+    list.append( item );
 }
 
-void CardLayout::setGeometry( const TQRect &rct )
+void CardLayout::setGeometry( const TQRect &rct )
 {
-    TQLayout::setGeometry( rct );
+    TQLayout::setGeometry( rct );
 
     TQPtrListIterator<TQLayoutItem> it( list );
     if ( it.count() == 0 )
@@ -696,12 +696,12 @@ CardLayout::~CardLayout()
 
     int i = 0;
 
-    int w = rct.width() - ( list.count() - 1 ) * spacing();
-    int h = rct.height() - ( list.count() - 1 ) * spacing();
+    int w = rct.width() - ( list.count() - 1 ) * spacing();
+    int h = rct.height() - ( list.count() - 1 ) * spacing();
 
     while ( ( o=it.current() ) != 0 ) {
         ++it;
-        TQRect geom( rct.x() + i * spacing(), rct.y() + i * spacing(),
+        TQRect geom( rct.x() + i * spacing(), rct.y() + i * spacing(),
                     w, h  );
         o->setGeometry(  geom  );
         ++i;
@@ -710,30 +710,30 @@ CardLayout::~CardLayout()
 
 TQSize CardLayout::sizeHint() const
 {
-    TQSize s(0,0);
-    int n = list.count();
+    TQSize s(0,0);
+    int n = list.count();
     if ( n > 0 )
         s = TQSize(100,70); //start with a nice default size
     TQPtrListIterator<TQLayoutItem> it(list);
     TQLayoutItem *o;
     while ( (o=it.current()) != 0 ) {
         ++it;
-        s = s.expandedTo( o->minimumSize() );
+        s = s.expandedTo( o->minimumSize() );
     }
-    return s + n*TQSize(spacing(),spacing());
+    return s + n*TQSize(spacing(),spacing());
 }
 
-TQSize CardLayout::minimumSize() const
+TQSize CardLayout::minimumSize() const
 {
-    TQSize s(0,0);
-    int n = list.count();
+    TQSize s(0,0);
+    int n = list.count();
     TQPtrListIterator<TQLayoutItem> it(list);
     TQLayoutItem *o;
     while ( (o=it.current()) != 0 ) {
         ++it;
-        s = s.expandedTo( o->minimumSize() );
+        s = s.expandedTo( o->minimumSize() );
     }
-    return s + n*TQSize(spacing(),spacing());
+    return s + n*TQSize(spacing(),spacing());
 }
 
    
 
@@ -755,85 +755,85 @@ CardLayout::~CardLayout()
 #include "border.h"
 #include "card.h"
 
-#include <qapplication.h>
-#include <qlabel.h>
-#include <qcolor.h>
-#include <qgroupbox.h>
-#include <qpushbutton.h>
-#include <qmultilineedit.h>
-#include <qcolor.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
+#include <ntqlabel.h>
+#include <ntqcolor.h>
+#include <ntqgroupbox.h>
+#include <ntqpushbutton.h>
+#include <ntqmultilineedit.h>
+#include <ntqcolor.h>
 
 int main( int argc, char **argv )
 {
-    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
+    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
 
-    TQWidget *f = new TQWidget;
+    TQWidget *f = new TQWidget;
     TQBoxLayout *gm = new TQVBoxLayout( f, 5 );
 
     SimpleFlow *b1 = new SimpleFlow( gm );
 
-    b1->add( new TQPushButton( "Short", f ) );
-    b1->add( new TQPushButton( "Longer", f ) );
-    b1->add( new TQPushButton( "Different text", f ) );
-    b1->add( new TQPushButton( "More text", f ) );
-    b1->add( new TQPushButton( "Even longer button text", f ) );
-    TQPushButton* qb = new TQPushButton( "Quit", f );
-    a.connect( qb, SIGNAL( clicked() ), SLOT( quit() ) );
-    b1->add( qb );
+    b1->add( new TQPushButton( "Short", f ) );
+    b1->add( new TQPushButton( "Longer", f ) );
+    b1->add( new TQPushButton( "Different text", f ) );
+    b1->add( new TQPushButton( "More text", f ) );
+    b1->add( new TQPushButton( "Even longer button text", f ) );
+    TQPushButton* qb = new TQPushButton( "Quit", f );
+    a.connect( qb, SIGNAL( clicked() ), SLOT( quit() ) );
+    b1->add( qb );
 
-    TQWidget *wid = new TQWidget( f );
+    TQWidget *wid = new TQWidget( f );
 
     BorderLayout *large = new BorderLayout( wid );
-    large->setSpacing( 5 );
-    large->addWidget( new TQPushButton( "North", wid ), BorderLayout::North );
-    large->addWidget( new TQPushButton( "West", wid ), BorderLayout::West );
-    TQMultiLineEdit* m = new TQMultiLineEdit( wid );
-    m->setText( "Central\nWidget" );
+    large->setSpacing( 5 );
+    large->addWidget( new TQPushButton( "North", wid ), BorderLayout::North );
+    large->addWidget( new TQPushButton( "West", wid ), BorderLayout::West );
+    TQMultiLineEdit* m = new TQMultiLineEdit( wid );
+    m->setText( "Central\nWidget" );
     large->addWidget( m, BorderLayout::Center );
-    TQWidget *east1 = new TQPushButton( "East", wid );
+    TQWidget *east1 = new TQPushButton( "East", wid );
     large->addWidget( east1, BorderLayout::East );
-    TQWidget *east2 = new TQPushButton( "East 2", wid );
+    TQWidget *east2 = new TQPushButton( "East 2", wid );
     large->addWidget( east2 , BorderLayout::East );
-    large->addWidget( new TQPushButton( "South", wid ), BorderLayout::South );
+    large->addWidget( new TQPushButton( "South", wid ), BorderLayout::South );
     //Left-to-right tab order looks better:
-    TQWidget::setTabOrder( east2, east1 );
+    TQWidget::setTabOrder( east2, east1 );
     gm->addWidget( wid );
 
 
-    wid = new TQWidget( f );
+    wid = new TQWidget( f );
     CardLayout *card = new CardLayout( wid, 10 );
 
-    TQWidget *crd = new TQWidget( wid );
-    crd->setBackgroundColor( TQt::red );
-    card->add( crd );
-    crd = new TQWidget( wid );
-    crd->setBackgroundColor( TQt::green );
-    card->add( crd );
-    crd = new TQWidget( wid );
-    crd->setBackgroundColor( TQt::blue );
-    card->add( crd );
-    crd = new TQWidget( wid );
-    crd->setBackgroundColor( TQt::white );
-    card->add( crd );
-    crd = new TQWidget( wid );
-    crd->setBackgroundColor( TQt::black );
-    card->add( crd );
-    crd = new TQWidget( wid );
-    crd->setBackgroundColor( TQt::yellow );
-    card->add( crd );
+    TQWidget *crd = new TQWidget( wid );
+    crd->setBackgroundColor( TQt::red );
+    card->add( crd );
+    crd = new TQWidget( wid );
+    crd->setBackgroundColor( TQt::green );
+    card->add( crd );
+    crd = new TQWidget( wid );
+    crd->setBackgroundColor( TQt::blue );
+    card->add( crd );
+    crd = new TQWidget( wid );
+    crd->setBackgroundColor( TQt::white );
+    card->add( crd );
+    crd = new TQWidget( wid );
+    crd->setBackgroundColor( TQt::black );
+    card->add( crd );
+    crd = new TQWidget( wid );
+    crd->setBackgroundColor( TQt::yellow );
+    card->add( crd );
 
     gm->addWidget( wid );
 
-    TQLabel* s = new TQLabel( f );
-    s->setText( "outermost box" );
-    s->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Panel | TQFrame::Sunken );
-    s->setAlignment( TQt::AlignVCenter | TQt::AlignHCenter );
+    TQLabel* s = new TQLabel( f );
+    s->setText( "outermost box" );
+    s->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Panel | TQFrame::Sunken );
+    s->setAlignment( TQt::AlignVCenter | TQt::AlignHCenter );
     gm->addWidget( s );
-    a.setMainWidget( f );
-    f->setCaption("TQt Example - Custom Layout");
-    f->show();
+    a.setMainWidget( f );
+    f->setCaption("TQt Example - Custom Layout");
+    f->show();
 
-    int result = a.exec();
+    int result = a.exec();
     delete f;
     return result;
 }
diff --git a/doc/html/customlayout.html b/doc/html/customlayout.html
index 188b7f2b8..5b9c77732 100644
--- a/doc/html/customlayout.html
+++ b/doc/html/customlayout.html
@@ -35,50 +35,50 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
     Here we present an example in detail. The class CardLayout is inspired
 by the Java layout manager of the same name. It lays out the items
 (widgets or nested layouts) on top of each other, each item offset by
-TQLayout::spacing().
+TQLayout::spacing().
 
     To write your own layout class, you must define the following:
 
    
-
     In most cases, you will also implement minimumSize().
+
     In most cases, you will also implement minimumSize().
 
     
     card.h
 
    
 
     
     #ifndef CARD_H
 #define CARD_H
 
-#include <qlayout.h>
-#include <qptrlist.h>
+#include <ntqlayout.h>
+#include <ntqptrlist.h>
 
-class CardLayout : public TQLayout
+class CardLayout : public TQLayout
 {
 public:
-    CardLayout( TQWidget *parent, int dist )
-        : TQLayout( parent, 0, dist ) {}
-    CardLayout( TQLayout* parent, int dist)
-        : TQLayout( parent, dist ) { }
+    CardLayout( TQWidget *parent, int dist )
+        : TQLayout( parent, 0, dist ) {}
+    CardLayout( TQLayout* parent, int dist)
+        : TQLayout( parent, dist ) { }
     CardLayout( int dist )
-        : TQLayout( dist ) {}
+        : TQLayout( dist ) {}
     ~CardLayout();
 
     void addItem(TQLayoutItem *item);
-    TQSize sizeHint() const;
-    TQSize minimumSize() const;
+    TQSize sizeHint() const;
+    TQSize minimumSize() const;
     TQLayoutIterator iterator();
-    void setGeometry(const TQRect &rect);
+    void setGeometry(const TQRect &rect);
 
 private:
-    TQPtrList<TQLayoutItem> list;
+    TQPtrList<TQLayoutItem> list;
 };
 
 #endif
@@ -105,21 +105,21 @@ constructor. In our example we do not need a destructor.
 class CardLayoutIterator : public TQGLayoutIterator
 {
 public:
-    CardLayoutIterator( TQPtrList<TQLayoutItem> *l )
+    CardLayoutIterator( TQPtrList<TQLayoutItem> *l )
         : idx( 0 ), list( l ) {}
 
     TQLayoutItem *current()
-    { return idx < int(list->count()) ? list->at(idx) : 0;  }
+    { return idx < int(list->count()) ? list->at(idx) : 0;  }
 
     TQLayoutItem *next()
     { idx++; return current(); }
 
     TQLayoutItem *takeCurrent()
-    { return list->take( idx ); }
+    { return list->take( idx ); }
 
 private:
     int idx;
-    TQPtrList<TQLayoutItem> *list;
+    TQPtrList<TQLayoutItem> *list;
 };
 
    
  
@@ -133,9 +133,9 @@ TQLayoutIterator CardLayout::iterator()
 
    
  
 
     addItem() implements the default placement strategy for layout items.
-It must be implemented. It is used by TQLayout::add(), by the TQLayout
+It must be implemented. It is used by TQLayout::add(), by the TQLayout
 constructor that takes a layout as parent, and it is used to implement
-the auto-add feature. If your layout
+the auto-add feature. If your layout
 has advanced placement options that require parameters, you must
 provide extra access functions such as TQGridLayout::addMultiCell().
 
     
    @@ -146,8 +146,8 @@ void CardLayout::addItem( TQLayoutItem *item )
 
    
  
 
     The layout takes over responsibility of the items added. Since
-TQLayoutItem does not inherit TQObject, we must delete the items
-manually. The function TQLayout::deleteAllItems() uses the iterator we
+TQLayoutItem does not inherit TQObject, we must delete the items
+manually. The function TQLayout::deleteAllItems() uses the iterator we
 defined above to delete all the items in the layout.
 
     
     CardLayout::~CardLayout()
@@ -160,9 +160,9 @@ CardLayout::~CardLayout()
 supplied as an argument does not include margin(). If relevant, use
 spacing() as the distance between items.
 
     
    -void CardLayout::setGeometry( const TQRect &rect )
+void CardLayout::setGeometry( const TQRect &rect )
 {
-    TQLayout::setGeometry( rect );
+    TQLayout::setGeometry( rect );
 
     TQPtrListIterator<TQLayoutItem> it( list );
     if (it.count() == 0)
@@ -172,12 +172,12 @@ void CardLayout::setGeometry( const TQRect &rect )
 
     int i = 0;
 
-    int w = rect.width() - ( list.count() - 1 ) * spacing();
-    int h = rect.height() - ( list.count() - 1 ) * spacing();
+    int w = rect.width() - ( list.count() - 1 ) * spacing();
+    int h = rect.height() - ( list.count() - 1 ) * spacing();
 
     while ( (item = it.current()) != 0 ) {
         ++it;
-        TQRect geom( rect.x() + i * spacing(), rect.y() + i * spacing(),
+        TQRect geom( rect.x() + i * spacing(), rect.y() + i * spacing(),
                     w, h );
         item->setGeometry( geom );
         ++i;
@@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ spacing(), but not margin().
 
     
     TQSize CardLayout::sizeHint() const
 {
-    TQSize s( 0, 0 );
+    TQSize s( 0, 0 );
     int n = list.count();
     if ( n > 0 )
         s = TQSize( 100, 70 ); // start with a nice default size
@@ -199,20 +199,20 @@ TQSize CardLayout::sizeHint() const
     TQLayoutItem *item;
     while ( (item = it.current()) != 0 ) {
         ++it;
-        s = s.expandedTo( item->minimumSize() );
+        s = s.expandedTo( item->minimumSize() );
     }
     return s + n * TQSize( spacing(), spacing() );
 }
 
 TQSize CardLayout::minimumSize() const
 {
-    TQSize s( 0, 0 );
+    TQSize s( 0, 0 );
     int n = list.count();
     TQPtrListIterator<TQLayoutItem> it( list );
     TQLayoutItem *item;
     while ( (item = it.current()) != 0 ) {
         ++it;
-        s = s.expandedTo( item->minimumSize() );
+        s = s.expandedTo( item->minimumSize() );
     }
     return s + n * TQSize( spacing(), spacing() );
 }
diff --git a/doc/html/customstyles.html b/doc/html/customstyles.html
index 47e6afc4b..541b5ee39 100644
--- a/doc/html/customstyles.html
+++ b/doc/html/customstyles.html
@@ -54,16 +54,16 @@ applications.
 
     The first step is to pick one of the base styles provided with TQt to
 build your custom style from. The choice will depend on what look and
 feel you are trying to achieve. We recommend that you choose from the
-TQWindowsStyle derived classes or the TQMotifStyle derived classes.
+TQWindowsStyle derived classes or the TQMotifStyle derived classes.
 These are the two base look and feel classes in the TQt style engine.
-Inheriting directly from TQCommonStyle is also an option if you want to
+Inheriting directly from TQCommonStyle is also an option if you want to
 start almost from scratch when implementing your style. In this simple
 example we will inherit from TQWindowsStyle.
 
     
     2. Re-implement the necessary functions in your derived class.
 
    
 
     Depending on which parts of the base style you want to change, you
 must re-implement the functions that are used to draw those parts
-of the interface. If you take a look at the TQStyle documentation,
+of the interface. If you take a look at the TQStyle documentation,
 you will find a list of the different primitives, controls and complex
 controls. In this example we will first change the look of the
 standard arrows that are used in the TQWindowsStyle. The arrows are
@@ -71,17 +71,17 @@ PrimitiveElements that are drawn by the drawPrimitive() function,
 so we need to re-implement that function. We need the following class
 declaration:
 
     
    -#include <qwindowsstyle.h>
+#include <ntqwindowsstyle.h>
 
-class CustomStyle : public TQWindowsStyle {
+class CustomStyle : public TQWindowsStyle {
     Q_OBJECT
 public:
     CustomStyle();
     ~CustomStyle();
 
     void drawPrimitive( PrimitiveElement pe,
-                        TQPainter *p,
-                        const TQRect & r,
+                        TQPainter *p,
+                        const TQRect & r,
                         const TQColorGroup & cg,
                         SFlags flags = Style_Default,
                         const TQStyleOption & = TQStyleOption::Default ) const;
@@ -94,10 +94,10 @@ private:
 
    
  
 
     Note that we disable the copy constructor and the '=' operator for our
-style. TQObject is the base class for all style classes in TQt, and a
+style. TQObject is the base class for all style classes in TQt, and a
 TQObject inherently cannot be copied since there are some aspects of it
 that are not copyable.
-
     From the TQStyle docs we see that PE_ArrowUp, PE_ArrowDown, PE_ArrowLeft and PE_ArrowRight are the primitives we need to do
+
     From the TQStyle docs we see that PE_ArrowUp, PE_ArrowDown, PE_ArrowLeft and PE_ArrowRight are the primitives we need to do
 something with. We get the following in our drawPrimitive() function:
 
     
     CustomStyle::CustomStyle()
@@ -109,44 +109,44 @@ CustomStyle::~CustomStyle()
 }
 
 void CustomStyle::drawPrimitive( PrimitiveElement pe,
-                                 TQPainter * p,
-                                 const TQRect & r,
+                                 TQPainter * p,
+                                 const TQRect & r,
                                  const TQColorGroup & cg,
                                  SFlags flags,
                                  const TQStyleOption & opt ) const
 {
     // we are only interested in the arrows
     if (pe >= PE_ArrowUp && pe <= PE_ArrowLeft) {
-        TQPointArray pa( 3 );
+        TQPointArray pa( 3 );
         // make the arrow cover half the area it is supposed to be 
         // painted on
-        int x = r.x();
-        int y = r.y();
-        int w = r.width() / 2;
-        int h = r.height() / 2;
-        x += (r.width() - w) / 2;
-        y += (r.height() - h) /2;
+        int x = r.x();
+        int y = r.y();
+        int w = r.width() / 2;
+        int h = r.height() / 2;
+        x += (r.width() - w) / 2;
+        y += (r.height() - h) /2;
 
         switch( pe ) {
         case PE_ArrowDown:
-            pa.setPoint( 0, x, y );
-            pa.setPoint( 1, x + w, y );
-            pa.setPoint( 2, x + w / 2, y + h );
+            pa.setPoint( 0, x, y );
+            pa.setPoint( 1, x + w, y );
+            pa.setPoint( 2, x + w / 2, y + h );
             break;
         case PE_ArrowUp:
-            pa.setPoint( 0, x, y + h );
-            pa.setPoint( 1, x + w, y + h );
-            pa.setPoint( 2, x + w / 2, y );
+            pa.setPoint( 0, x, y + h );
+            pa.setPoint( 1, x + w, y + h );
+            pa.setPoint( 2, x + w / 2, y );
             break;
         case PE_ArrowLeft:
-            pa.setPoint( 0, x + w, y );
-            pa.setPoint( 1, x + w, y + h );
-            pa.setPoint( 2, x, y + h / 2 );
+            pa.setPoint( 0, x + w, y );
+            pa.setPoint( 1, x + w, y + h );
+            pa.setPoint( 2, x, y + h / 2 );
             break;
         case PE_ArrowRight:
-            pa.setPoint( 0, x, y );
-            pa.setPoint( 1, x, y + h );
-            pa.setPoint( 2, x + w, y + h / 2 );
+            pa.setPoint( 0, x, y );
+            pa.setPoint( 1, x, y + h );
+            pa.setPoint( 2, x + w, y + h / 2 );
             break;
         default: break;
             
@@ -155,16 +155,16 @@ void CustomStyle::drawPrimitive( PrimitiveElement pe,
         // use different colors to indicate that the arrow is 
         // enabled/disabled
         if ( flags & Style_Enabled ) {
-            p->setPen( cg.mid() );
-            p->setBrush( cg.brush( TQColorGroup::ButtonText ) );
+            p->setPen( cg.mid() );
+            p->setBrush( cg.brush( TQColorGroup::ButtonText ) );
         } else {
-            p->setPen( cg.buttonText() );
-            p->setBrush( cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Mid ) );
+            p->setPen( cg.buttonText() );
+            p->setBrush( cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Mid ) );
         }
-        p->drawPolygon( pa );
+        p->drawPolygon( pa );
     } else {
         // let the base style handle the other primitives
-        TQWindowsStyle::drawPrimitive( pe, p, r, cg, flags, data );
+        TQWindowsStyle::drawPrimitive( pe, p, r, cg, flags, data );
     }
 }
 
    
@@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ application's main() function:
 
 int main( int argc, char ** argv )
 {
-    TQApplication::setStyle( new CustomStyle() );
+    TQApplication::setStyle( new CustomStyle() );
     // do the usual routine on creating your TQApplication object etc.
 }
 
    
diff --git a/doc/html/database.html b/doc/html/database.html
index c50e37416..68e6833e3 100644
--- a/doc/html/database.html
+++ b/doc/html/database.html
@@ -35,26 +35,26 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
     These classes provide access to SQL databases.
 
 
    
-
    TQDataBrowserData manipulation and navigation for data entry forms
-
    TQDataTableFlexible SQL table widget that supports browsing and editing
-
    TQDataViewRead-only SQL forms
-
    TQEditorFactoryUsed to create editor widgets for TQVariant data types
-
    TQSqlNamespace for TQt SQL identifiers that need to be global-like
-
    TQSqlCursorBrowsing and editing of SQL tables and views
-
    TQSqlDatabaseUsed to create SQL database connections and to provide transaction handling
-
    TQSqlDriverAbstract base class for accessing SQL databases
-
    TQSqlEditorFactoryUsed to create the editors used by TQDataTable and TQSqlForm
-
    TQSqlErrorSQL database error information
-
    TQSqlFieldManipulates the fields in SQL database tables and views
+
    TQDataBrowserData manipulation and navigation for data entry forms
+
    TQDataTableFlexible SQL table widget that supports browsing and editing
+
    TQDataViewRead-only SQL forms
+
    TQEditorFactoryUsed to create editor widgets for TQVariant data types
+
    TQSqlNamespace for TQt SQL identifiers that need to be global-like
+
    TQSqlCursorBrowsing and editing of SQL tables and views
+
    TQSqlDatabaseUsed to create SQL database connections and to provide transaction handling
+
    TQSqlDriverAbstract base class for accessing SQL databases
+
    TQSqlEditorFactoryUsed to create the editors used by TQDataTable and TQSqlForm
+
    TQSqlErrorSQL database error information
+
    TQSqlFieldManipulates the fields in SQL database tables and views
 
    TQSqlFieldInfoStores meta data associated with a SQL field
-
    TQSqlFormCreates and manages data entry forms tied to SQL databases
-
    TQSqlIndexFunctions to manipulate and describe TQSqlCursor and TQSqlDatabase indexes
-
    TQSqlPropertyMapUsed to map widgets to SQL fields
-
    TQSqlQueryMeans of executing and manipulating SQL statements
-
    TQSqlRecordEncapsulates a database record, i.e. a set of database fields
+
    TQSqlFormCreates and manages data entry forms tied to SQL databases
+
    TQSqlIndexFunctions to manipulate and describe TQSqlCursor and TQSqlDatabase indexes
+
    TQSqlPropertyMapUsed to map widgets to SQL fields
+
    TQSqlQueryMeans of executing and manipulating SQL statements
+
    TQSqlRecordEncapsulates a database record, i.e. a set of database fields
 
    TQSqlRecordInfoEncapsulates a set of database field meta data
-
    TQSqlResultAbstract interface for accessing data from SQL databases
-
    TQSqlSelectCursorBrowsing of general SQL SELECT statements
+
    TQSqlResultAbstract interface for accessing data from SQL databases
+
    TQSqlSelectCursorBrowsing of general SQL SELECT statements
 
    
 
 
    
diff --git a/doc/html/datastreamformat.html b/doc/html/datastreamformat.html
index 9e92286d2..577fcc54c 100644
--- a/doc/html/datastreamformat.html
+++ b/doc/html/datastreamformat.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
 
-
     The TQDataStream allows you to serialize some of the TQt data types.
-The table below lists the data types that TQDataStream can serialize
+
     The TQDataStream allows you to serialize some of the TQt data types.
+The table below lists the data types that TQDataStream can serialize
 and how they are represented.
 
     It is best to always cast integers to a TQt integer type when writing,
 and to read back into the same TQt integer type when reading.
@@ -85,8 +85,8 @@ The null string is represented as (Q_UINT32) 0.
  TQBrush
 
      
 
    •  The brush style (Q_UINT8)
-
    •  The brush color (TQColor)
-
    •  If style is CustomPattern, the brush pixmap (TQPixmap)
+
    •  The brush color (TQColor)
+
    •  If style is CustomPattern, the brush pixmap (TQPixmap)
 
    
  TQByteArray
 
      
@@ -99,11 +99,11 @@ The null string is represented as (Q_UINT32) 0.
 
    •  The string bytes including the terminating 0
 
    
 The null string is represented as (Q_UINT32) 0.
- TQColor
+ TQColor
 
    •  RGB value serialized as a Q_UINT32 
    
  TQColorGroup
 
      
-
    •  foreground (TQBrush)
+
    •  foreground (TQBrush)
 
    •  button (TQBrush)
 
    •  light (TQBrush)
 
    •  midLight (TQBrush)
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ The null string is represented as (Q_UINT32) 0.
  TQCursor
 
        
 
      •  Shape id (Q_INT16)
-
      •  If shape is BitmapCursor: The bitmap (TQPixmap), mask (TQPixmap) and hot spot (TQPoint)
+
      •  If shape is BitmapCursor: The bitmap (TQPixmap), mask (TQPixmap) and hot spot (TQPoint)
 
      
  TQDate
 
        
@@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ The null string is represented as (Q_UINT32) 0.
 
      
  TQFont
 
        
-
      •  The family (TQCString)
+
      •  The family (TQCString)
 
      •  The point size (Q_INT16)
 
      •  The style hint (Q_UINT8)
 
      •  The char set (Q_UINT8)
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ The null string is represented as (Q_UINT32) 0.
 
      •  If the image is null a "null image" marker is saved;
 otherwise the image is saved in PNG or BMP format (depending
 on the stream version). If you want control of the format,
-stream the image into a TQBuffer (using TQImageIO) and stream
+stream the image into a TQBuffer (using TQImageIO) and stream
 that.
 
      
  TQMap
@@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ that.
 
        
 
      •  The pen styles (Q_UINT8)
 
      •  The pen width (Q_UINT8)
-
      •  The pen color (TQColor)
+
      •  The pen color (TQColor)
 
      
  TQPicture
 
        
@@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ that.
  TQPointArray
 
          
 
        •  The array size (Q_UINT32)
-
        •  The array points (TQPoint)
+
        •  The array points (TQPoint)
 
        
  TQRect
 
          
@@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ that.
 
        •  The size of the data, i.e. 8 + 16 * (number of rectangles) (Q_UINT32)
 
        •  TQRGN_RECTS (Q_INT32)
 
        •  The number of rectangles (Q_UINT32)
-
        •  The rectangles in sequential order (TQRect)
+
        •  The rectangles in sequential order (TQRect)
 
        
  TQSize
 
          
diff --git a/doc/html/dclock-example.html b/doc/html/dclock-example.html
index 332a7e767..48bdaeb4e 100644
--- a/doc/html/dclock-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/dclock-example.html
@@ -50,14 +50,14 @@ and date.
 #ifndef DCLOCK_H
 #define DCLOCK_H
 
-#include <qlcdnumber.h>
+#include <ntqlcdnumber.h>
 
 
-class DigitalClock : public TQLCDNumber          // digital clock widget
+class DigitalClock : public TQLCDNumber          // digital clock widget
 {
     Q_OBJECT
 public:
-    DigitalClock( TQWidget *parent=0, const char *name=0 );
+    DigitalClock( TQWidget *parent=0, const char *name=0 );
 
 protected:                                      // event handlers
     void        timerEvent( TQTimerEvent * );
@@ -92,21 +92,21 @@ private:                                        // internal data
 *****************************************************************************/
 
 #include "dclock.h"
-#include <qdatetime.h>
+#include <ntqdatetime.h>
 
 
 //
 // Constructs a DigitalClock widget with a parent and a name.
 //
 
-DigitalClock::DigitalClock( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQLCDNumber( parent, name )
+DigitalClock::DigitalClock( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+    : TQLCDNumber( parent, name )
 {
     showingColon = FALSE;
-    setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Panel | TQFrame::Raised );
-    setLineWidth( 2 );                          // set frame line width
+    setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Panel | TQFrame::Raised );
+    setLineWidth( 2 );                          // set frame line width
     showTime();                                 // display the current time
-    normalTimer = startTimer( 500 );            // 1/2 second timer events
+    normalTimer = startTimer( 500 );            // 1/2 second timer events
     showDateTimer = -1;                         // not showing date
 }
 
@@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ private:                                        // internal data
 // and another one for switching back from date mode to time mode.
 //
 
-void DigitalClock::timerEvent( TQTimerEvent *e )
+void DigitalClock::timerEvent( TQTimerEvent *e )
 {
     if ( e->timerId() == showDateTimer )        // stop showing date
         stopDate();
@@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ private:                                        // internal data
 // Enters date mode when the left mouse button is pressed.
 //
 
-void DigitalClock::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
+void DigitalClock::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
 {
     if ( e->button() == TQMouseEvent::LeftButton )               // left button pressed
         showDate();
@@ -148,10 +148,10 @@ void DigitalClock::showDate()
     if ( showDateTimer != -1 )                  // already showing date
         return;
     TQDate date = TQDate::currentDate();
-    TQString s;
-    s.sprintf( "%2d %2d", date.month(), date.day() );
-    display( s );                               // sets the LCD number/text
-    showDateTimer = startTimer( 2000 );         // keep this state for 2 secs
+    TQString s;
+    s.sprintf( "%2d %2d", date.month(), date.day() );
+    display( s );                               // sets the LCD number/text
+    showDateTimer = startTimer( 2000 );         // keep this state for 2 secs
 }
 
 //
@@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ void DigitalClock::showDate()
 
 void DigitalClock::stopDate()
 {
-    killTimer( showDateTimer );
+    killTimer( showDateTimer );
     showDateTimer = -1;
     showTime();
 }
@@ -172,12 +172,12 @@ void DigitalClock::stopDate()
 void DigitalClock::showTime()
 {
     showingColon = !showingColon;               // toggle/blink colon
-    TQString s = TQTime::currentTime().toString().left(5);
+    TQString s = TQTime::currentTime().toString().left(5);
     if ( !showingColon )
         s[2] = ' ';
     if ( s[0] == '0' )
         s[0] = ' ';
-    display( s );                               // set LCD number/text
+    display( s );                               // set LCD number/text
 }
 
    
 
@@ -194,18 +194,18 @@ void DigitalClock::showTime()
 *****************************************************************************/
 
 #include "dclock.h"
-#include <qapplication.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
 
 
 int main( int argc, char **argv )
 {
-    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
+    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
     DigitalClock *clock = new DigitalClock;
-    clock->resize( 170, 80 );
-    a.setMainWidget( clock );
-    clock->setCaption("TQt Example - Digital Clock");
-    clock->show();
-    return a.exec();
+    clock->resize( 170, 80 );
+    a.setMainWidget( clock );
+    clock->setCaption("TQt Example - Digital Clock");
+    clock->show();
+    return a.exec();
 }
 
    
 
diff --git a/doc/html/debug.html b/doc/html/debug.html
index f3bb5cd1b..c48aa6e0c 100644
--- a/doc/html/debug.html
+++ b/doc/html/debug.html
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ that can help with debugging.
 
     
    
 
     Option Result
 
     -nograb
-The application should never grab the mouse or the
+The application should never grab the mouse or the
 	keyboard. This option is set by default when the
 program is running in the gdb debugger under Linux.
 
     -dograb
@@ -59,29 +59,29 @@ option is only valid for the X11 version of TQt.
 
     TQt includes three global functions for writing out warning and debug
 text.
 
      
-
    •  qDebug() for writing debug output for testing etc.
-
    •  qWarning() for writing warning output when program
+
    •  qDebug() for writing debug output for testing etc.
+
    •  qWarning() for writing warning output when program
 errors occur.
-
    •  qFatal() for writing fatal error messages
+
    •  qFatal() for writing fatal error messages
 and exiting.
 
    
 
     The TQt implementation of these functions prints the text to the stderr
 output under Unix/X11 and to the debugger under Windows. You can
 take over these functions by installing a message handler;
-qInstallMsgHandler().
-
     The debugging functions TQObject::dumpObjectTree() and TQObject::dumpObjectInfo() are often useful when an application looks
+qInstallMsgHandler().
+
     The debugging functions TQObject::dumpObjectTree() and TQObject::dumpObjectInfo() are often useful when an application looks
 or acts strangely. More useful if you use object names than not, but
 often useful even without names.
 
     
     Debugging Macros
 
    
-
     The header file qglobal.h contains many debugging macros and
+
     The header file ntqglobal.h contains many debugging macros and
 #defines.
 
     Two important macros are:
 
      
-
    •  Q_ASSERT(b) where b is a boolean
+
    •  Q_ASSERT(b) where b is a boolean
 expression, writes the warning: "ASSERT: 'b' in file file.cpp (234)"
 if b is FALSE.
-
    •  Q_CHECK_PTR(p) where p is a pointer.
+
    •  Q_CHECK_PTR(p) where p is a pointer.
 Writes the warning "In file file.cpp, line 234: Out of memory" if p is
 0.
 
    
@@ -89,9 +89,9 @@ Writes the warning "In file file.cpp, line 234: Out of memory" if p is
 
       char *alloc( int size )
   {
-      Q_ASSERT( size > 0 );
+      Q_ASSERT( size > 0 );
       char *p = new char[size];
-      Q_CHECK_PTR( p );
+      Q_CHECK_PTR( p );
       return p;
   }
 
    
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Q_CHECK_PTR:
   char *alloc( int size )
   {
       char *p;
-      Q_CHECK_PTR( p = new char[size] ); // WRONG!
+      Q_CHECK_PTR( p = new char[size] ); // WRONG!
       return p;
   }
 
@@ -141,12 +141,12 @@ define QT_NO_CHECK.
   {
   #if defined(QT_CHECK_NULL)
       if ( p == 0 )
-          qWarning( "f: Null pointer not allowed" );
+          qWarning( "f: Null pointer not allowed" );
   #endif
 
   #if defined(QT_CHECK_RANGE)
       if ( i < 0 )
-          qWarning( "f: The index cannot be negative" );
+          qWarning( "f: The index cannot be negative" );
   #endif
   }
 
diff --git a/doc/html/designer-manual-1.html b/doc/html/designer-manual-1.html
index c61538543..4de8d8c61 100644
--- a/doc/html/designer-manual-1.html
+++ b/doc/html/designer-manual-1.html
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
  • Chapter two, Creating a Main Window Application, introduces TQt Designer and takes you step by step through the creation of a small but fully functional application. Along the way you will learn how to create a main window with menus, toolbars and a status bar. Most of the application's implementation will be covered, but the custom dialogs are deferred until chapter three. In the course of this chapter you will use the form and property editors to customize the application. You'll also learn how to use TQt's signals and slots mechanism and TQt Designer's built-in code editor to make the application functional. We will also explain how to use qmake to generate a Makefile so that you can compile and run the application.
    
 
  • In chapter three, Creating Dialogs, we will create the custom dialogs required by the main window application created in chapter two. In addition to demonstrating various ways of creating dialogs, you will also learn how to lay out forms using the layout tools.
    
 
  • Chapter four, The Designer Approach, provides information on the TQt Designer approach to developing applications, and explains some of the rationale behind TQt Designer.
    
-
  • Chapter five, Subclassing and Dynamic Dialogs, will show you how to subclass a form; this allows you to clearly separate the user interface from the underlying code that implements its functionality. Additional information on qmake and uic is included in this chapter. This chapter will also explain how you can dynamically load dialogs from .ui files into your application using TQWidgetFactory and how to access the widgets and sub-widgets of these dialogs.
    
+
  • Chapter five, Subclassing and Dynamic Dialogs, will show you how to subclass a form; this allows you to clearly separate the user interface from the underlying code that implements its functionality. Additional information on qmake and uic is included in this chapter. This chapter will also explain how you can dynamically load dialogs from .ui files into your application using TQWidgetFactory and how to access the widgets and sub-widgets of these dialogs.
    
 
  • Chapter six, Creating Custom Widgets, explains how you can create your own custom widgets. Both the simple method, that was introduced with the first version of TQt Designer, and the new more powerful method using plugins, are explained.
    
 
  • Chapter seven, Creating Database Applications introduces TQt's SQL classes and takes you through an example that demonstrates how to execute SQL queries and how to set up master-detail relationships, perform drilldown and handle foreign keys.
    
 
  • Chapter eight, Customizing and Integrating TQt Designer, focuses on TQt Designer itself, showing you how to customize Designer, how to integrate Designer with Visual Studio and how to create Makefiles.
    
@@ -55,11 +55,11 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
    • TQt Designer now features a start-up dialog for fast access to recently used files, etc. (It can be switched off if you don't want it.)
      
 
    • The signals and slots dialog has changed significantly. It is far easier to use and much faster for creating lots of connections in one go. You can still click and drag to create connections, but the new dialog is much tquicker.
      
 
    • Widgets are now accessible using the Toolbox. (All the original toolbars are still available.) This provides the same easy access as toolbar buttons, and also shows the names of the widgets and takes up less space.
      
-
    • TQWidgetStack is now available as a container widget. The new example demonstrates its use.
      
+
    • TQWidgetStack is now available as a container widget. The new example demonstrates its use.
      
 
    • .ui.h files may now contain arbitrary C++, including const definitions, #includes, plain functions, etc.
      
 
    • When you select multiple-widgets their common properties are shown in the property editor and can be changed collectively.
      
 
    What's New in TQt Designer for TQt 3.2?
    
-
    • The tool box widget used by TQt Designer since TQt 3.1 is now available as a TQt widget for use in your own programs. The widget is called TQToolBox.
      
+
      • The tool box widget used by TQt Designer since TQt 3.1 is now available as a TQt widget for use in your own programs. The widget is called TQToolBox.
        
 
      • The menu editor in TQt Designer has been redesigned to make it easier to visually design application main windows.
        
 
      • Numerous small improvements to usability have also been incorporated in this version.
        
 
      
diff --git a/doc/html/designer-manual-16.html b/doc/html/designer-manual-16.html
index df37d5e9e..be3536c75 100644
--- a/doc/html/designer-manual-16.html
+++ b/doc/html/designer-manual-16.html
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
    • [Prev: Reference: Windows] [Home]
    
 
    Reference: The .ui File Format
    
 
    TQt Designer stores forms in .ui files. These files use an XML format to represent form elements and their characteristics. This document provides an overview of the XML format used, and should provide enough information for developers to write their own .ui parsers so that they can read and modify .ui files programatically.
    
-
    One way to parse a .ui file is to use TQt and the TQDomDocument class; this is how TQt Designer does it: see the uilib/qwidgetfactory.h and uilib/qwidgetfactory.cpp source files. For information on dynamically loading and running .ui files see Loading and Executing a Dynamic Dialog.
    
+
    One way to parse a .ui file is to use TQt and the TQDomDocument class; this is how TQt Designer does it: see the uilib/ntqwidgetfactory.h and uilib/qwidgetfactory.cpp source files. For information on dynamically loading and running .ui files see Loading and Executing a Dynamic Dialog.
    
 
    The doctype of a .ui file is simply "UI", so the doctype tag is:
    
 
     <!DOCTYPE UI>
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 </UI>
 
    
 
    Within the UI entity, there may one or zero of the following element types:
    
-
    • actions - actions, for TQMainWindow forms
      
+
      The ordering of elements is arbitrary, although it is common for the class element to be first.
      
 
      UI Elements
      
 
      actions
      
-
      This element is used to store the form's actions. It only occurs in TQMainWindow forms.
      
+
      This element is used to store the form's actions. It only occurs in TQMainWindow forms.
      
 
      The actions element contains one or more action elements. Each action element contains one or more properties. Each property has a name attribute, and a single value which is contained within a datatype element.
      
 
       <actions>
@@ -230,9 +230,9 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
     <include location="local" impldecl="in implementation">pixmapcollection.h</include>
     <include location="local" impldecl="in implementation">pixmapchooser.h</include>
     <include location="local" impldecl="in implementation">project.h</include>
-    <include location="global" impldecl="in implementation">qfileinfo.h</include>
-    <include location="global" impldecl="in implementation">qimage.h</include>
-    <include location="global" impldecl="in declaration">qpixmap.h</include>
+    <include location="global" impldecl="in implementation">ntqfileinfo.h</include>
+    <include location="global" impldecl="in implementation">ntqimage.h</include>
+    <include location="global" impldecl="in declaration">ntqpixmap.h</include>
     <include location="local" impldecl="in implementation">pixmapcollectioneditor.ui.h</include>
 </includes>
 
      
@@ -252,7 +252,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
    • If no integer value is specified and a layout function is specified then the function is used.
      
 
    • If no integer value or function is specified then the default value from layoutdefaults is used.
      
 
      menubar
      
-
      Applications that use TQMainWindow often have a menubar. The menubar has a name property and one or more popup menu items. Each menu item has one or more actions and optionally separators.
      
+
      Applications that use TQMainWindow often have a menubar. The menubar has a name property and one or more popup menu items. Each menu item has one or more actions and optionally separators.
      
 
       <menubar>
     <property name="name">
@@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 </tabstops>
 
      
 
      toolbars
      
-
      Forms that have toolbars (dock windows) use the <toolbars> tag to hold the details. These forms are normally TQMainWindows (or subclasses). Each toolbar has a dock attribute which identifies which dock window the toolbar initially belongs to. They also have both name and label properties. Each toolbar button is represented by an action. Toolbars can also hold other widgets, in which case the <toolbar> tag includes appropriate <widget> tags which give the class, name and any non-default property values for the relevant widget.
      
+
      Forms that have toolbars (dock windows) use the <toolbars> tag to hold the details. These forms are normally TQMainWindows (or subclasses). Each toolbar has a dock attribute which identifies which dock window the toolbar initially belongs to. They also have both name and label properties. Each toolbar button is represented by an action. Toolbars can also hold other widgets, in which case the <toolbar> tag includes appropriate <widget> tags which give the class, name and any non-default property values for the relevant widget.
      
 
       <toolbars>
     <toolbar dock="2">
@@ -374,7 +374,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
      
 
      widget
      
 
      Widgets are used at multiple levels within a .ui file. The whole form itself is a widget, and it contains other widgets, usually within the context of layouts such as hboxes, vboxes and grids.
      
-
      Below is an example of a complete .ui file. The form itself is a TQWidget with various non-default properties set. This widget contains a single hbox, which also has some non-default properties, and which contains a single TQTextBrowser widget.
      
+
      Below is an example of a complete .ui file. The form itself is a TQWidget with various non-default properties set. This widget contains a single hbox, which also has some non-default properties, and which contains a single TQTextBrowser widget.
      
 
       <!DOCTYPE UI><UI version="3.1" stdsetdef="1">
 <class>WinIntroPage</class>
@@ -456,7 +456,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
      
 
    • iconset - an iconset (see pixmap), e.g. <iconset>filenew</iconset>
      
 
    • number - an integer with an optional sign, e.g. <number>947</number>
      
-
    • palette - a palette
      
+
    • palette - a palette
      
 
    • pixmap - a pixmap, normally the name or "key" of the pixmap; the name is used if pixmaps are stored in the project, the key is used if a user defined function is used to access the pixmap. It is also possible for pixmaps to be included inline. Example: <pixmap>chair</pixmap>
      
 
    • point - a point, e.g. <point><x>15</x><y>95</y></point>
      
 
    • rect - a rectangle, e.g.
      
diff --git a/doc/html/designer-manual-2.html b/doc/html/designer-manual-2.html
index 1e9c4869f..22d3e804c 100644
--- a/doc/html/designer-manual-2.html
+++ b/doc/html/designer-manual-2.html
@@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
    
 
    
 
    Now we need to relate each of the text labels to the corresponding widget. We do this by creating "buddies".
    
-
    A widget that does not accept focus itself, e.g. a TQLabel, can have an accelerator that will pass the focus to its "buddy", e.g. a TQLineEdit. In TQt Designer, we enable this by setting the first widget's buddy property to the name of the buddy widget.
    
+
    A widget that does not accept focus itself, e.g. a TQLabel, can have an accelerator that will pass the focus to its "buddy", e.g. a TQLineEdit. In TQt Designer, we enable this by setting the first widget's buddy property to the name of the buddy widget.
    
 
    • Click the Set Buddy toolbar button (or press F12). Click the Enter Number label, drag the line to the numberLineEdit, then release.
      
 
    • Click the Set Buddy toolbar button. Click the Convert From label, drag the line to the fromComboBox, then release.
      
 
    • Click the Set Buddy toolbar button. Click the Convert To label, drag the line to the toComboBox, then release.
      
@@ -256,8 +256,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
         // set the result
         int decimals = decimalsSpinBox->value();
-        resultLineEdit->setText( TQString::number( result, 'f', decimals ) );
-        numberLineEdit->setText( TQString::number( input, 'f', decimals ) );
+        resultLineEdit->setText( TQString::number( result, 'f', decimals ) );
+        numberLineEdit->setText( TQString::number( input, 'f', decimals ) );
     }
 
    
  
    First, we define some enums for the input and output units. Then we retrieve the input from the numberLineEdit. We convert the input to millimeters because this is the most precise metric unit we support. Then we convert it to inches which is the most precise output unit we support. We then scale it to the selected output unit. Finally, we put the result in the resultLineEdit.
    
@@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
         numberLineEdit->selectAll();
     }
 
    
- 
    For this function, we set a validator on the numberLineEdit so that the user can only input numbers. To be able to do this, we also need to add #include <qvalidator.h> at the top of the "conversionform.ui.h" file, before the init() function. Lastly, we set the initial input.
    
+ 
    For this function, we set a validator on the numberLineEdit so that the user can only input numbers. To be able to do this, we also need to add #include <ntqvalidator.h> at the top of the "conversionform.ui.h" file, before the init() function. Lastly, we set the initial input.
    
 
    We are almost ready to run the application. Before we compile the application, we need a main.cpp file.
    
 
    • Click File|New to open the New File dialog.
      
 
    • Click C++ Main File (main.cpp) then click OK.
      
diff --git a/doc/html/designer-manual-3.html b/doc/html/designer-manual-3.html
index c46a8a8cb..4570aee86 100644
--- a/doc/html/designer-manual-3.html
+++ b/doc/html/designer-manual-3.html
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
      The Color Tool application
 
      
 
      The colortool application is a multiplatform application that allows users to create, edit and save lists of colors. Each color has a user defined name and an RGB (Red, Green, Blue) value.
      
-
      This application presents the user with a view of a set of colors and their names. We will provide two views (using a TQWidgetStack) which the user can switch between. The tabular view will show each color as a small square followed by its name and hex value. It will also provide the option of an indicator to show whether or not the color is one of the 216 standard web colors. The iconic view will show each color as a circular color swatch with the name of the color beneath.
      
+
      This application presents the user with a view of a set of colors and their names. We will provide two views (using a TQWidgetStack) which the user can switch between. The tabular view will show each color as a small square followed by its name and hex value. It will also provide the option of an indicator to show whether or not the color is one of the 216 standard web colors. The iconic view will show each color as a circular color swatch with the name of the color beneath.
      
 
      The application will read and write files in the format used by the X Consortium for the rgb.txt file. This will allow users to create their own color files and to load, edit and save rgb.txt format files.
      
 
      We will provide a simple search option so that users can tquickly locate a color; this is particularly useful when hundreds or thousands of colors are shown. The search will be provided in a modeless dialog so that the user can conduct a search but still interact with the main form. We will also enable the user to add and delete colors, and to set some user options. To provide these facilities, we must create some modal dialogs.
      
 
      Finally, we must ensure that the application loads user options at start up and saves user options at termination. We will also include the view and the size and position of the main window with these options, so that the application will always start with the size, position and view it had when the user last used it.
      
@@ -69,18 +69,18 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
      
 
      
 
      The New File dialog is used to create all the files that can be used in a TQt Designer project. This includes C++ source files, an automatically generated main.cpp file (if you are in a project), and a variety of forms based on pre-defined templates. (You can create your own templates too.)
      
-
      For the colortool application we want to start with a main window form. When we create this form, TQt Designer will present a wizard which we can use to automatically create menu and toolbar options and automatically create the relevant signal/slot connections. For every menu option or toolbar button, TQt Designer will create a single TQAction (see the Actions and Action Groups sidebar).
      
+
      For the colortool application we want to start with a main window form. When we create this form, TQt Designer will present a wizard which we can use to automatically create menu and toolbar options and automatically create the relevant signal/slot connections. For every menu option or toolbar button, TQt Designer will create a single TQAction (see the Actions and Action Groups sidebar).
      
 
      
 
       Actions and Action Groups
      
 
      An action is an operation that the user initiates through the user interface, for example, saving a file or changing some text's font weight to bold.
      
-
      We often want the user to be able to perform an action using a variety of means. For example, to save a file we might want the user to be able to press Ctrl+S, or to click the Save toolbar button or to click the File|Save menu option. Although the means of invoking the action are all different, the underlying operation is the same and we don't want to duplicate the code that performs the operation. In TQt we can create an action (a TQAction object) which will call the appropriate function when the action is invoked. We can assign an accelerator, (e.g. Ctrl+S), to an action. We can also add an action to a menu and to a toolbar.
      
+
      We often want the user to be able to perform an action using a variety of means. For example, to save a file we might want the user to be able to press Ctrl+S, or to click the Save toolbar button or to click the File|Save menu option. Although the means of invoking the action are all different, the underlying operation is the same and we don't want to duplicate the code that performs the operation. In TQt we can create an action (a TQAction object) which will call the appropriate function when the action is invoked. We can assign an accelerator, (e.g. Ctrl+S), to an action. We can also add an action to a menu and to a toolbar.
      
 
      If the action has an on/off state, e.g. bold is on or off, when the user changes the state, for example by clicking a toolbar button, the state of everything associated with the action, e.g. menu items and toolbar buttons, is updated.
      
 
      Some actions should operate together like radio buttons. For example, if we have left align, center align and right align actions, only one should be 'on' at any one time. An action group (a TQActionGroup object) is used to group a set of actions together. If the action group's exclusive property is TRUE then only one of the actions in the group can be on at any one time. If the user changes the state of an action in an action group where exclusive is TRUE, everything associated with the actions in the action group, e.g. menu items and toolbar buttons, is updated.
      
 
      TQt Designer can create actions and action groups visually, assign accelerators to them, and associate them with menu items and toolbar buttons.
      
 
      
 
      Creating the Main Window
      
 
      We will use the Main Window Wizard to build a main window. The wizard allows us to create actions as well as a menu bar and a toolbar through which the user can invoke the actions. We will also create our own actions, menus and toolbar buttons, and add a main widget to the main window.
      
-
      Click File|New to invoke the New File dialog, click "Main Window" to create a main window form, then click OK. A new TQMainWindow form will be created and the Main Window Wizard will pop up.
      
+
      Click File|New to invoke the New File dialog, click "Main Window" to create a main window form, then click OK. A new TQMainWindow form will be created and the Main Window Wizard will pop up.
      
 
      Using the Main Window Wizard
      
 
      1. The Choose available menus and toolbars page appears first. It presents three categories of default actions, File Actions, Edit Actions and Help Actions. For each category you can choose to have TQt Designer create menu items, toolbar buttons, and signal/slots connections for the relevant actions. You can always add or delete actions, menu items, toolbar buttons, and connections later.
        
 
        We will accept the defaults for File Actions and for the Edit Actions, i.e. have menu items, toolbar buttons and the relevant connections created. In fact we'll be changing the Edit actions considerably later on, but it is still convenient to create them now. We won't have any Help Actions on the toolbar so uncheck the Help Action's Toolbar checkbox. Click Next to move on to the next wizard page.
        
@@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
        All the actions in an action group are added to a toolbar in one go, simply by dragging the action group from the Action Editor and dropping it on the toolbar.
        
 
        Since toolbar buttons normally only show an image, all actions that are to be used in toolbars should have their iconSet property set to a suitable image.
        
 
        Toolbar buttons and separators (usually represented as indented vertical gray lines), can be dragged and dropped into new positions in the toolbar at any time. Separators can be inserted by right clicking a toolbar button and clicking Insert Separator. Toolbar buttons and separators can be deleted by right clicking them and then clicking Delete Item. Toolbars can be deleted by right clicking their toolbar handle and then clicking Delete Toolbar.
        
-
        If you preview an application you'll find that all the toolbars can be dragged to different docking points (top, left, right and bottom of a TQMainWindow or subclass), or dragged out of the application as independent tool windows.
        
+
        If you preview an application you'll find that all the toolbars can be dragged to different docking points (top, left, right and bottom of a TQMainWindow or subclass), or dragged out of the application as independent tool windows.
        
 
 
        
 
         Adding Widgets to the Toolbar
        
@@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
        Click the viewActionGroup action group in the Action Editor, and drag it to the View menu; drop it on this menu (when the horizontal red line appears beneath the View menu). Because we dragged the action group, all its actions (in our case the viewTableAction and viewIconsAction) are added to the relevant menu. We'll also make the view actions available on the toolbar. Click the viewActionGroup once again, and drag it to the toolbar; drop it the right of the separator at the far right of the toolbar, and drop it on the toolbar's edge. (Again, a vertical red line will indicate the position.)
        
 
        Don't forget that you can preview to see things in action with Ctrl+T, and to click File|Save (or press Ctrl+S) regularly! If you preview now you will find that if you click the view toolbar buttons and menu options that both the toolbar buttons and the menu items automatically stay in sync.
        
 
        Creating the Main Widget
        
-
        Most main-window style applications consist of a menu bar, a toolbar, a status bar and a central widget. We've already created a menu bar and toolbar, and since we've created a TQMainWindow (via the main window wizard), we also have a status bar. Widgets commonly used as an application's main widget are TQListView (which provides a tree view), TQTable and TQTextEdit. Since we want to provide our users with two different views of the same data, we'll use a TQWidgetStack as our main widget. The TQWidgetStack has no visual representation of its own; you place one or more widgets on each TQWidgetStack "page", as if each page was a form in its own right, and then provide the user with some mechanism for switching between pages. (This is similar in principle to using a TQTabWidget.) We want to provide our users with two views: a tabular view that lists colors and their names, and an icon-based view that shows color swatches. In our example we only place a single widget on each TQWidgetStack page; but this merely reflects the application's design -- we could have placed any number of widgets on each page.
        
+
        Most main-window style applications consist of a menu bar, a toolbar, a status bar and a central widget. We've already created a menu bar and toolbar, and since we've created a TQMainWindow (via the main window wizard), we also have a status bar. Widgets commonly used as an application's main widget are TQListView (which provides a tree view), TQTable and TQTextEdit. Since we want to provide our users with two different views of the same data, we'll use a TQWidgetStack as our main widget. The TQWidgetStack has no visual representation of its own; you place one or more widgets on each TQWidgetStack "page", as if each page was a form in its own right, and then provide the user with some mechanism for switching between pages. (This is similar in principle to using a TQTabWidget.) We want to provide our users with two views: a tabular view that lists colors and their names, and an icon-based view that shows color swatches. In our example we only place a single widget on each TQWidgetStack page; but this merely reflects the application's design -- we could have placed any number of widgets on each page.
        
 
        Click the Toolbox's Containers button, then click WidgetStack. Click approximately in the middle of the form to place the widget stack. Change the widget stack's name property to "colorWidgetStack".
        
 
        
 
        
@@ -263,16 +263,16 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
        • class TQString;
          
 
        • class TQColor;
          
 
        Adding Includes
        
-
        Our form will also need some included files. Includes may be added in the declaration, or (for preference) in the implementation. Right click "Includes (in Implementation)", then click Edit. Use the dialog that pops up to enter "qcolor.h" and "qstring.h". Since we're going to use the clipboard we'll need access to the global clipboard object via TQApplication, so also add "qapplication.h" and "qclipboard.h". We'll also be doing some drawing (e.g. the color swatches), so add "qpainter.h" too, then close the dialog.
        
+
        Our form will also need some included files. Includes may be added in the declaration, or (for preference) in the implementation. Right click "Includes (in Implementation)", then click Edit. Use the dialog that pops up to enter "ntqcolor.h" and "ntqstring.h". Since we're going to use the clipboard we'll need access to the global clipboard object via TQApplication, so also add "ntqapplication.h" and "ntqclipboard.h". We'll also be doing some drawing (e.g. the color swatches), so add "ntqpainter.h" too, then close the dialog.
        
 
        
 
        
 
        When entering include files you can include double quotes or angle brackets if you wish; if you don't use either TQt Designer will put in double quotes automatically.
        
 
        You should now have added the following includes (in implementation):
        
-
        • "qcolor.h"
          
-
        • "qstring.h"
          
-
        • "qapplication.h"
          
-
        • "qclipboard.h"
          
-
        • "qpainter.h"
          
+
          • "ntqcolor.h"
            
+
          • "ntqstring.h"
            
+
          • "ntqapplication.h"
            
+
          • "ntqclipboard.h"
            
+
          • "ntqpainter.h"
            
 
          Signals and Slots Connections
          
 
          Most of the signals and slots connections were created automatically by the main window wizard when we created the main form. We have added some new actions since then, and we need to ensure that they are connected to slots so that we can code their behavior.
          
 
          
@@ -315,15 +315,15 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
     const int COL_NAME = 0;
     const int COL_HEX = 1;
     const int COL_WEB = 2;
-    const TQString WINDOWS_REGISTRY = "/TQtExamples";
-    const TQString APP_KEY = "/ColorTool/";
+    const TQString WINDOWS_REGISTRY = "/TQtExamples";
+    const TQString APP_KEY = "/ColorTool/";
 
    
- 
    We define some useful constants for our form since it's easier to remember "CLIP_AS_RGB" than "2". The two TQStrings are used by TQSettings when we come to load and save user preferences; they're explained when we cover loadOptions() and saveOptions(). Note that we can insert any valid C++ into a .ui.h file including constant declarations as we've done here and #includes, etc.
    
+ 
    We define some useful constants for our form since it's easier to remember "CLIP_AS_RGB" than "2". The two TQStrings are used by TQSettings when we come to load and save user preferences; they're explained when we cover loadOptions() and saveOptions(). Note that we can insert any valid C++ into a .ui.h file including constant declarations as we've done here and #includes, etc.
    
 
    Since we're not subclassing if we want to have code executed during construction we must create an init() function; this will be called at the end of the form's constructor.
    
 
    init()
    
 
        void MainForm::init()
     {
-        clipboard = TQApplication::clipboard();
+        clipboard = TQApplication::clipboard();
         if ( clipboard->supportsSelection() )
             clipboard->setSelectionMode( TRUE );
 
@@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
    clearData()
    
 
        void MainForm::clearData( bool fillWithDefaults )
     {
-        setCaption( "Color Tool" );
+        setCaption( "Color Tool" );
 
         m_colors.clear();
         m_comments.clear();
@@ -381,15 +381,15 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
             colorTable->setNumRows( m_colors.count() );
             if ( ! m_colors.isEmpty() ) {
-                TQPixmap pixmap( 22, 22 );
+                TQPixmap pixmap( 22, 22 );
                 int row = 0;
                 TQMap<TQString,TQColor>::ConstIterator it;
                 for ( it = m_colors.constBegin(); it != m_colors.constEnd(); ++it ) {
-                    TQColor color = it.data();
-                    pixmap.fill( color );
+                    TQColor color = it.data();
+                    pixmap.fill( color );
                     colorTable->setText( row, COL_NAME, it.key() );
                     colorTable->setPixmap( row, COL_NAME, pixmap );
-                    colorTable->setText( row, COL_HEX, color.name().upper() );
+                    colorTable->setText( row, COL_HEX, color.name().upper() );
                     if ( m_show_web ) {
                         TQCheckTableItem *item = new TQCheckTableItem( colorTable, "" );
                         item->setChecked( isWebColor( color ) );
@@ -422,17 +422,17 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
     }
 
    
  
    This function is at the heart of the application. It visually presents the data to the user. If the table is "dirty" (e.g. if the user has added or deleted colors in the icon view, or has opened a color file) we will populate the table. We start by deleting the contents of every cell. Next we change the number of rows to equal the number of colors in the colors map. For each color we want to display a little square that shows the color, so we create a pixmap of the required size.
    
-
    We now create an iterator for our colors map, and iterate over every color. The colors map has the user's color names as its keys, and TQColor instances as values. We retrieve the color and fill our pixmap with that color. We then set the "Name" column (column COL_NAME), to have the color's name (it.key()) and the pixmap we've just filled with that color. TQColor's name() function returns a string that is the hex representation of a color, e.g. "#12AB2F"; we retrieve this and set the second ("Hex") column to this value.
    
+
    We now create an iterator for our colors map, and iterate over every color. The colors map has the user's color names as its keys, and TQColor instances as values. We retrieve the color and fill our pixmap with that color. We then set the "Name" column (column COL_NAME), to have the color's name (it.key()) and the pixmap we've just filled with that color. TQColor's name() function returns a string that is the hex representation of a color, e.g. "#12AB2F"; we retrieve this and set the second ("Hex") column to this value.
    
 
    If the user wants to see if which colors are web colors we create a TQCheckTableItem, and check it if it is a web color. (We'll cover isWebColor() shortly.) We then insert this TQCheckTableItem into the "Web" column.
    
 
    Having populated the table we call adjustColumn() to ensure that each column is just wide enough to show its widest entry, and show or hide the "Web" column depending on the user's preference.
    
 
    Finally we set m_table_dirty to FALSE, since it is now up-to-date.
    
 
    If the icon view is "dirty" we clear() it of any existing data. We then iterate over each color in our colors map. For each color we create a new TQIconViewItem; we label the item with the user's color name and provide a pixmap (generated by colorSwatch(), covered shortly) in the relevant color. Finally we set m_icons_dirty to "FALSE", since it is now up-to-date.
    
 
    isWebColor()
    
-
        bool MainForm::isWebColor( TQColor color )
+
        bool MainForm::isWebColor( TQColor color )
     {
-        int r = color.red();
-        int g = color.green();
-        int b = color.blue();
+        int r = color.red();
+        int g = color.green();
+        int b = color.blue();
 
         return ( ( r ==   0 || r ==  51 || r == 102 ||
                    r == 153 || r == 204 || r == 255 ) &&
@@ -444,32 +444,32 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
    
  
    The 216 web colors are those colors whose RGB (Red, Green, Blue) values are all in the set (0, 51, 102, 153, 204, 255).
    
 
    colorSwatch()
    
-
        TQPixmap MainForm::colorSwatch( const TQColor color )
+
        TQPixmap MainForm::colorSwatch( const TQColor color )
     {
-        TQPixmap pixmap( 80, 80 );
-        pixmap.fill( white );
-        TQPainter painter;
-        painter.begin( &pixmap );
-        painter.setPen( NoPen );
-        painter.setBrush( color );
-        painter.drawEllipse( 0, 0, 80, 80 );
-        painter.end();
+        TQPixmap pixmap( 80, 80 );
+        pixmap.fill( white );
+        TQPainter painter;
+        painter.begin( &pixmap );
+        painter.setPen( NoPen );
+        painter.setBrush( color );
+        painter.drawEllipse( 0, 0, 80, 80 );
+        painter.end();
         return pixmap;
     }
 
    
- 
    We create a pixmap of a suitable size and fill it with white. We then create a TQPainter which we'll use to paint on the pixmap. We don't want a pen because we don't want an outline around the shape we draw. We draw an ellipse (which will be circular since we draw in an 80 x 80 pixel square). We return the resultant pixmap.
    
+ 
    We create a pixmap of a suitable size and fill it with white. We then create a TQPainter which we'll use to paint on the pixmap. We don't want a pen because we don't want an outline around the shape we draw. We draw an ellipse (which will be circular since we draw in an 80 x 80 pixel square). We return the resultant pixmap.
    
 
    Creating main.cpp
    
 
    Now that we've entered some of the code it would be nice to build and run the application to get a feel for the progress we've made. To do this we need to create a main() function. In TQt we typically create a small main.cpp file for the main() function. We can ask TQt Designer to create this file for us.
    
 
    Click File|New to invoke the New File dialog. Click "C++ Main-File", then click OK. The Configure Main-File dialog appears, listing the all the forms in the project. We've only got one form, "MainForm", so it is already highlighted. Click OK to create a main.cpp file that loads our MainForm.
    
-
        #include <qapplication.h>
+
        #include <ntqapplication.h>
     #include "mainform.h"
 
     int main( int argc, char ** argv )
     {
-        TQApplication a( argc, argv );
+        TQApplication a( argc, argv );
         MainForm *w = new MainForm;
         w->show();
-        return a.exec();
+        return a.exec();
     }
 
    
  
    When TQt Designer generates a main.cpp file it includes this line:
    
@@ -487,7 +487,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
  
    Now, whatever the user clicks to close the application, our fileExit() slot will be called. We'll code the fileExit() slot right now:
    
 
        void MainForm::fileExit()
     {
-            TQApplication::exit( 0 );
+            TQApplication::exit( 0 );
     }
 
    
  
    This ensures that our application will cleanly terminate. Later we'll revise this function to give the user the opportunity to save any unsaved data.
    
@@ -525,15 +525,15 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
    changedColor()
    
 
    This is a function that we need to write from scratch. Simply enter its code into TQt Designer's code editor and it will automatically appear in Object Explorer's Members tab (under Functions, public).
    
 
    By default any function that it typed directly into the code editor becomes a public function. To change this, right click the function's name in Object Explorer's Members list, and click Properties to invoke the Edit Functions dialog. This dialog can be used to change various attributes of the function, including changing it into a slot.
    
-
        void MainForm::changedColor( const TQString& name )
+
        void MainForm::changedColor( const TQString& name )
     {
-        TQColor color = m_colors[name];
-        int r = color.red();
-        int g = color.green();
-        int b = color.blue();
+        TQColor color = m_colors[name];
+        int r = color.red();
+        int g = color.green();
+        int b = color.blue();
         statusBar()->message( TQString( "%1 \"%2\" (%3,%4,%5)%6 {%7 %8 %9}" ).
-                              arg( name ).
-                              arg( color.name().upper() ).
+                              arg( name ).
+                              arg( color.name().upper() ).
                               arg( r ).arg( g ).arg( b ).
                               arg( isWebColor( color ) ? " web" : "" ).
                               arg( r / 255.0, 1, 'f', 3 ).
@@ -543,9 +543,9 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
     }
 
    
  
    This function looks up the color name in the colors map and retrieves the color the name refers to. It then displays the name, hex value and whether the color is a web color in the status bar.
    
-
    Note that TQMainWindow only creates a status bar if you actually use one. Since we haven't used one up until now we've had no problem, but if we were to try compiling we'd get an error because we're now using a status bar but haven't declared the relevant header. Click Object Explorer's Members tab and add a "qstatusbar.h" to the "Includes (In Implementation)" section. (Right click "Includes (In Implementation)", click New, enter "qstatusbar.h" then press Enter.)
    
+
    Note that TQMainWindow only creates a status bar if you actually use one. Since we haven't used one up until now we've had no problem, but if we were to try compiling we'd get an error because we're now using a status bar but haven't declared the relevant header. Click Object Explorer's Members tab and add a "ntqstatusbar.h" to the "Includes (In Implementation)" section. (Right click "Includes (In Implementation)", click New, enter "ntqstatusbar.h" then press Enter.)
    
 
    You should now have added the following declaration to your includes (in implementation):
    
-
    • "qstatusbar.h"
      
+
      • "ntqstatusbar.h"
        
 
      Try saving (press Ctrl+S), making and running the application. Move to different colors and see the status bar indicating the color you are on. (If it doesn't build see the Troubleshooting section.)
      
 
      Changing Views
      
 
      Up to now we have not yet been able to see the icon view in action because there's been no code in place to switch views. We'll address this issue now.
      
@@ -558,7 +558,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
             colorWidgetStack->raiseWidget( iconsPage );
     }
 
    
- 
    (If you're cutting and pasting the code don't forget to name the TQAction parameter "action".)
    
+ 
    (If you're cutting and pasting the code don't forget to name the TQAction parameter "action".)
    
 
    Editing the Code: File Handling
    
 
    Since the X Consortium has already defined a file format for relating colors to color names we will use their format rather than creating one specially for the application. This has the advantage that we will be able to read and write rgb.txt, and that our format will be familiar to many users.
    
 
    fileNew()
    
@@ -579,13 +579,13 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
        bool MainForm::okToClear()
     {
         if ( m_changed ) {
-            TQString msg;
+            TQString msg;
             if ( m_filename.isEmpty() )
                 msg = "Unnamed colors ";
             else
                 msg = TQString( "Colors '%1'\n" ).arg( m_filename );
             msg += TQString( "has been changed." );
-            int ans = TQMessageBox::information(
+            int ans = TQMessageBox::information(
                             this,
                             "Color Tool -- Unsaved Changes",
                             msg, "&Save", "Cancel", "&Abandon",
@@ -600,57 +600,57 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
     }
 
    
  
    If the data has changed (m_changed is TRUE), we present the user with a message box offering the option of saving their data, or cancelling the current operation (e.g. not loading a new file, or not creating a new set of colors), or abandoning their changes and continuing. We make the Save button the default button (pressed by Enter) and the Cancel button the escape button (pressed by Esc).
    
-
    Since we're using a TQMessageBox we need to include the relevant header. (Right click "Includes (in Implementation)", then click New. Type "qmessagebox.h" and press Enter.)
    
+
    Since we're using a TQMessageBox we need to include the relevant header. (Right click "Includes (in Implementation)", then click New. Type "ntqmessagebox.h" and press Enter.)
    
 
    You should now have added the following declaration to your includes (in implementation):
    
-
    • "qmessagebox.h"
      
+
      • "ntqmessagebox.h"
        
 
      fileOpen()
      
 
          void MainForm::fileOpen()
     {
         if ( ! okToClear() )
             return;
 
-        TQString filename = TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName(
+        TQString filename = TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName(
                                 TQString::null, "Colors (*.txt)", this,
                                 "file open", "Color Tool -- File Open" );
-        if ( ! filename.isEmpty() )
+        if ( ! filename.isEmpty() )
             load( filename );
         else
             statusBar()->message( "File Open abandoned", 2000 );
     }
 
      
- 
      If it isn't okay to clear the data (i.e. the user has unsaved changes and clicked Cancel in the message box popped up by okToClear()), we simply return. Otherwise we ask the user for a filename using one of TQFileDialog's static functions, and if we got the filename we attempt to load the file.
      
-
      Since we're using a TQFileDialog we need to include the relevant header. (Right click "Includes (in Implementation)", then click New. Type "qfiledialog.h" and press Enter.)
      
+ 
      If it isn't okay to clear the data (i.e. the user has unsaved changes and clicked Cancel in the message box popped up by okToClear()), we simply return. Otherwise we ask the user for a filename using one of TQFileDialog's static functions, and if we got the filename we attempt to load the file.
      
+
      Since we're using a TQFileDialog we need to include the relevant header. (Right click "Includes (in Implementation)", then click New. Type "ntqfiledialog.h" and press Enter.)
      
 
      You should now have added the following declaration to your includes (in implementation):
      
-
      • "qfiledialog.h"
        
+
        • "ntqfiledialog.h"
          
 
        load()
        
-
            void MainForm::load( const TQString& filename )
+
            void MainForm::load( const TQString& filename )
     {
         clearData( FALSE );
         m_filename = filename;
-        TQRegExp regex( "^\\s*(\\d+)\\s+(\\d+)\\s+(\\d+)\\s+(\\S+.*)$" );
-        TQFile file( filename );
-        if ( file.open( IO_ReadOnly ) ) {
+        TQRegExp regex( "^\\s*(\\d+)\\s+(\\d+)\\s+(\\d+)\\s+(\\S+.*)$" );
+        TQFile file( filename );
+        if ( file.open( IO_ReadOnly ) ) {
             statusBar()->message( TQString( "Loading '%1'..." ).
                                   arg( filename ) );
-            TQTextStream stream( &file );
-            TQString line;
-            while ( ! stream.eof() ) {
-                line = stream.readLine();
-                if ( regex.search( line ) == -1 )
+            TQTextStream stream( &file );
+            TQString line;
+            while ( ! stream.eof() ) {
+                line = stream.readLine();
+                if ( regex.search( line ) == -1 )
                     m_comments += line;
                 else
-                    m_colors[regex.cap( 4 )] = TQColor(
-                                                regex.cap( 1 ).toInt(),
-                                                regex.cap( 2 ).toInt(),
-                                                regex.cap( 3 ).toInt() );
+                    m_colors[regex.cap( 4 )] = TQColor(
+                                                regex.cap( 1 ).toInt(),
+                                                regex.cap( 2 ).toInt(),
+                                                regex.cap( 3 ).toInt() );
             }
-            file.close();
+            file.close();
             m_filename = filename;
-            setCaption( TQString( "Color Tool -- %1" ).arg( m_filename ) );
+            setCaption( TQString( "Color Tool -- %1" ).arg( m_filename ) );
             statusBar()->message( TQString( "Loaded '%1'" ).
                                     arg( m_filename ), 3000 );
-            TQWidget *visible = colorWidgetStack->visibleWidget();
-            m_icons_dirty = ! ( m_table_dirty = ( visible == tablePage ) );
+            TQWidget *visible = colorWidgetStack->visibleWidget();
+            m_icons_dirty = ! ( m_table_dirty = ( visible == tablePage ) );
             populate();
             m_icons_dirty = ! ( m_table_dirty = ( visible != tablePage ) );
             m_changed = FALSE;
@@ -672,12 +672,12 @@ RED WHITESPACE GREEN WHITESPACE BLUE WHITESPACE NAME
 
        
 
        The file may also include comment lines; these begin with '!' for example.
        
 
        There are numerous approaches we could have taken to parsing these files, but we've opted for a simple regular expression (regex). The regex is more "liberal" regarding the whitespace in the input than the format demands.
        
-
        If a line matches the regex we create a new entry in the m_colors TQMap, setting its text to be the name of the color (regex.cap( 4 )), and its value to be a new TQColor created from the red, green and blue values. Lines that don't match the regex are treated as comments and are stored in the m_comments string list. (When we save the file we write all the comments out first even if they appeared in the middle of the file.)
        
+
        If a line matches the regex we create a new entry in the m_colors TQMap, setting its text to be the name of the color (regex.cap( 4 )), and its value to be a new TQColor created from the red, green and blue values. Lines that don't match the regex are treated as comments and are stored in the m_comments string list. (When we save the file we write all the comments out first even if they appeared in the middle of the file.)
        
 
        Once we've populated the m_colors map we mark the visible view as "dirty" and call populate() to update it. We then mark the visible view as not dirty and the non-visible view as dirty. This ensures that when user changes the view, the view they switch to will be updated. We could have simply marked both views as dirty and updated them both, but it is more efficient to update "lazily", after all the user may only ever use one view, so why waste their time updating the other one.
        
-
        Since we're using TQFile and TQRegExp we need to include the relevant headers. (Right click "Includes (in Implementation)", then click New. Type "qfile.h" and press Enter. Repeat this process to add "qregexp.h".)
        
+
        Since we're using TQFile and TQRegExp we need to include the relevant headers. (Right click "Includes (in Implementation)", then click New. Type "ntqfile.h" and press Enter. Repeat this process to add "ntqregexp.h".)
        
 
        You should now have added the following declarations to your includes (in implementation):
        
-
        • "qfile.h"
          
-
        • "qregexp.h"
          
+
          • "ntqfile.h"
            
+
          • "ntqregexp.h"
            
 
          
 
           The Regular Expression
          
 
          The regex we've used can be broken up into the following pieces:
          
@@ -688,18 +688,18 @@ Captures:        cap(1)      cap(2)      cap(3)      cap(4)
 
        
 
        Piece A says the regex must match from the beginning of the string, and piece F says the regex must match to the end of the string: so the regex must match the whole string or not match at all. The 'B' piece matches zero or more whitespaces (i.e. any leading whitespace), and the D pieces match one or more whitespaces (i.e. the gaps between each number). The 'C' pieces match one or more digits, i.e. the numbers. Piece E matches one or more non-whitespace followed by anything else, i.e. the name of the color.
        
 
        The parentheses are used to capture the parts of the match that they enclose. The captured parts are numbered from 1.
        
-
        For more information on regexes see the TQRegExp documentation.
        
+
        For more information on regexes see the TQRegExp documentation.
        
 
 
        fileSaveAs()
        
 
            void MainForm::fileSaveAs()
     {
-        TQString filename = TQFileDialog::getSaveFileName(
+        TQString filename = TQFileDialog::getSaveFileName(
                                 TQString::null, "Colors (*.txt)", this,
                                 "file save as", "Color Tool -- File Save As" );
-        if ( ! filename.isEmpty() ) {
+        if ( ! filename.isEmpty() ) {
             int ans = 0;
-            if ( TQFile::exists( filename ) )
-                ans = TQMessageBox::warning(
+            if ( TQFile::exists( filename ) )
+                ans = TQMessageBox::warning(
                                 this, "Color Tool -- Overwrite File",
                                 TQString( "Overwrite\n'%1'?" ).
                                     arg( filename ),
@@ -722,22 +722,22 @@ Captures:        cap(1)      cap(2)      cap(3)      cap(4)
             return;
         }
 
-        TQFile file( m_filename );
-        if ( file.open( IO_WriteOnly ) ) {
-            TQTextStream stream( &file );
+        TQFile file( m_filename );
+        if ( file.open( IO_WriteOnly ) ) {
+            TQTextStream stream( &file );
             if ( ! m_comments.isEmpty() )
                 stream << m_comments.join( "\n" ) << "\n";
             TQMap<TQString,TQColor>::ConstIterator it;
             for ( it = m_colors.constBegin(); it != m_colors.constEnd(); ++it ) {
-                TQColor color = it.data();
+                TQColor color = it.data();
                 stream << TQString( "%1 %2 %3\t\t%4" ).
-                            arg( color.red(), 3 ).
-                            arg( color.green(), 3 ).
-                            arg( color.blue(), 3 ).
+                            arg( color.red(), 3 ).
+                            arg( color.green(), 3 ).
+                            arg( color.blue(), 3 ).
                             arg( it.key() ) << "\n";
             }
-            file.close();
-            setCaption( TQString( "Color Tool -- %1" ).arg( m_filename ) );
+            file.close();
+            setCaption( TQString( "Color Tool -- %1" ).arg( m_filename ) );
             statusBar()->message( TQString( "Saved %1 colors to '%2'" ).
                                     arg( m_colors.count() ).
                                     arg( m_filename ), 3000 );
@@ -755,7 +755,7 @@ Captures:        cap(1)      cap(2)      cap(3)      cap(4)
 
            void MainForm::fileExit()
     {
         if ( okToClear() ) {
-            TQApplication::exit( 0 );
+            TQApplication::exit( 0 );
         }
     }
 
        
@@ -766,13 +766,13 @@ Captures:        cap(1)      cap(2)      cap(3)      cap(4)
 
        editCut()
        
 
            void MainForm::editCut()
     {
-        TQString name;
-        TQWidget *visible = colorWidgetStack->visibleWidget();
-        statusBar()->message( TQString( "Deleting '%1'" ).arg( name ) );
+        TQString name;
+        TQWidget *visible = colorWidgetStack->visibleWidget();
+        statusBar()->message( TQString( "Deleting '%1'" ).arg( name ) );
 
-        if ( visible == tablePage && colorTable->numRows() ) {
+        if ( visible == tablePage && colorTable->numRows() ) {
             int row = colorTable->currentRow();
-            name = colorTable->text( row, 0 );
+            name = colorTable->text( row, 0 );
             colorTable->removeRow( colorTable->currentRow() );
             if ( row < colorTable->numRows() )
                 colorTable->setCurrentCell( row, 0 );
@@ -780,9 +780,9 @@ Captures:        cap(1)      cap(2)      cap(3)      cap(4)
                 colorTable->setCurrentCell( colorTable->numRows() - 1, 0 );
             m_icons_dirty = TRUE;
         }
-        else if ( visible == iconsPage && colorIconView->currentItem() ) {
+        else if ( visible == iconsPage && colorIconView->currentItem() ) {
             TQIconViewItem *item = colorIconView->currentItem();
-            name = item->text();
+            name = item->text();
             if ( colorIconView->count() == 1 )
                 colorIconView->clear();
             else {
@@ -797,40 +797,40 @@ Captures:        cap(1)      cap(2)      cap(3)      cap(4)
             m_table_dirty = TRUE;
         }
 
-        if ( ! name.isNull() ) {
-            m_colors.remove( name );
+        if ( ! name.isNull() ) {
+            m_colors.remove( name );
             m_changed = TRUE;
-            statusBar()->message( TQString( "Deleted '%1'" ).arg( name ), 5000 );
+            statusBar()->message( TQString( "Deleted '%1'" ).arg( name ), 5000 );
         }
         else
-            statusBar()->message( TQString( "Failed to delete '%1'" ).arg( name ), 5000 );
+            statusBar()->message( TQString( "Failed to delete '%1'" ).arg( name ), 5000 );
     }
 
        
  
        If the user is viewing the table view we delete the current row. We set the new current cell to be the one following the deleted row, or if the one we deleted was last, its predecessor. We mark the other view (the icon view) as dirty, to make sure that it is updated if the user switches views. Similarly, if the user is viewing the icon view, we make the next (or previous if there is no next) item current and delete the one they were on. We then mark the table view as dirty. If we deleted a color (i.e. there was a current color in one of the views), we remove it from the m_colors map and mark the data as changed.
        
 
        editCopy()
        
 
            void MainForm::editCopy()
     {
-        TQString text;
-        TQWidget *visible = colorWidgetStack->visibleWidget();
+        TQString text;
+        TQWidget *visible = colorWidgetStack->visibleWidget();
 
-        if ( visible == tablePage && colorTable->numRows() ) {
+        if ( visible == tablePage && colorTable->numRows() ) {
             int row = colorTable->currentRow();
             text = colorTable->text( row, 0 );
         }
-        else if ( visible == iconsPage && colorIconView->currentItem() ) {
+        else if ( visible == iconsPage && colorIconView->currentItem() ) {
             TQIconViewItem *item = colorIconView->currentItem();
             text = item->text();
         }
-        if ( ! text.isNull() ) {
-            TQColor color = m_colors[text];
+        if ( ! text.isNull() ) {
+            TQColor color = m_colors[text];
             switch ( m_clip_as ) {
-                case CLIP_AS_HEX: text = color.name(); break;
+                case CLIP_AS_HEX: text = color.name(); break;
                 case CLIP_AS_NAME: break;
                 case CLIP_AS_RGB:
                         text = TQString( "%1,%2,%3" ).
-                            arg( color.red() ).
-                            arg( color.green() ).
-                            arg( color.blue() );
+                            arg( color.red() ).
+                            arg( color.green() ).
+                            arg( color.blue() );
                         break;
             }
             clipboard->setText( text );
@@ -838,7 +838,7 @@ Captures:        cap(1)      cap(2)      cap(3)      cap(4)
         }
     }
 
        
- 
        In this function we retrieve the name of the color from the current table row (or current icon, depending on the view). We then set a TQString to the text we want to copy into the clipboard and copy it.
        
+ 
        In this function we retrieve the name of the color from the current table row (or current icon, depending on the view). We then set a TQString to the text we want to copy into the clipboard and copy it.
        
 
        Summary
        
 
        In this chapter we have created a standard main-window style application. We have implemented menus, a toolbar and a main widget (a TQWidgetStack). We've also created signal and slot connections and implemented many custom slots. In the following chapter we will complete the application by implementing custom dialogs, and by making use of common dialogs where appropriate.
        
 
diff --git a/doc/html/designer-manual-4.html b/doc/html/designer-manual-4.html
index 4f1f7102c..d378ec9dd 100644
--- a/doc/html/designer-manual-4.html
+++ b/doc/html/designer-manual-4.html
@@ -58,8 +58,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
        We can use one of TQt's static dialogs to get the user to choose a color, but we need our own dialog to get them to give it a name. We'll create that dialog now.
        
 
        Click File|New to invoke the New File dialog, then click "Dialog", then click OK. Drag a corner of the new form to make it a lot smaller. Change the form's name (in the Property Editor) to "ColorNameForm", and change its caption to "Color Tool -- Color Name". Click File|Save, then click Save to save it.
        
 
        We'll now add some widgets to the dialog. Don't worry about precise positioning or sizing; we'll get TQt Designer to lay the form out perfectly for us shortly.
        
-
        We need to create a TQLabel that will show the color the user has chosen. Click the TextLabel tool in the Toolbox, then click on the left hand side of the form. Change the label's name property to "colorLabel", and delete the text in the text property. Click the pixmap property's ellipsis button and choose the "editraise.png" image. Change the minimumSize property's width sub-property to 80, and set the scaledContents property to True.
        
-
        Click the TextLabel tool again, then click to the right of the colorLabel, towards the top of the form. Change the text property to "&Name". Note that the ampersand is displayed; this is because a TQLabel cannot accept focus and we haven't specified a focus widget ("buddy") yet.
        
+
        We need to create a TQLabel that will show the color the user has chosen. Click the TextLabel tool in the Toolbox, then click on the left hand side of the form. Change the label's name property to "colorLabel", and delete the text in the text property. Click the pixmap property's ellipsis button and choose the "editraise.png" image. Change the minimumSize property's width sub-property to 80, and set the scaledContents property to True.
        
+
        Click the TextLabel tool again, then click to the right of the colorLabel, towards the top of the form. Change the text property to "&Name". Note that the ampersand is displayed; this is because a TQLabel cannot accept focus and we haven't specified a focus widget ("buddy") yet.
        
 
        Click the LineEdit tool, then click to the right of the "Name" label, again towards the top of the form. Change the name property to "colorLineEdit".
        
 
        Click on the "Name" label and change its buddy property to "colorLineEdit". The ampersand has now disappeared and Alt+N will set the focus in the colorLineEdit.
        
 
        Click the PushButton tool, then click below the "colorLabel". Change the button's name property to "okPushButton", its text property to "OK", and its default property to True.
        
@@ -120,9 +120,9 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
        The situation is different for variables. If you add these to Members, Class Variables, they will be included as private variables in the class definition. If you type them at the top of the .ui.h file they will be form-global variables.
        
 
 
        We'll start by adding some includes.
        
-
            #include <qcolor.h>
-    #include <qmap.h>
-    #include <qstring.h>
+
            #include <ntqcolor.h>
+    #include <ntqmap.h>
+    #include <ntqstring.h>
 
        
  
        Enter these above the validate() function.
        
 
        We also need a variable to hold the list of colors.
        
@@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
        
  
        Add this line; we'll store the colors in a local m_colors map.
        
 
        We also need a function that the caller can call to populate the m_colors map with the current colors.
        
-
            void ColorNameForm::setColors( const TQMap<TQString,TQColor>& colors )
+
            void ColorNameForm::setColors( const TQMap<TQString,TQColor>& colors )
     {
         m_colors = colors;
     }
@@ -138,9 +138,9 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
  
        Now that we've got a means of obtaining the list of color names we are ready to write the validate() function.
        
 
            void ColorNameForm::validate()
     {
-        TQString name = colorLineEdit->text();
-        if ( ! name.isEmpty() &&
-             ( m_colors.isEmpty() || ! m_colors.contains( name ) ) )
+        TQString name = colorLineEdit->text();
+        if ( ! name.isEmpty() &&
+             ( m_colors.isEmpty() || ! m_colors.contains( name ) ) )
             accept();
         else
             colorLineEdit->selectAll();
@@ -151,42 +151,42 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
        Using the Dialog
        
 
        The ColorNameForm dialog will be called from the main form. The caller will firstly call one of TQt's static "choose a color" dialogs, and if the user chooses a color, will then invoke our custom dialog. Since we're going to use a "choose a color" dialog we will need the appropriate header file. We'll also be accessing the dialog's colorLabel (to set it to the chosen color), and the dialog's line edit (to retrieve the color name), so we'll need appropriate headers for these too.
        
 
        Click "MainForm" in the Project Overview window so that Object Explorer shows the main form's objects.
        
-
        Click Object Explorer's Members tab. Right click "Includes (in Implementation)", then click Edit to invoke the Edit Includes (in Implementation) dialog. Click Add then enter "qcolordialog.h". Click Add again, and enter "qlabel.h". Similarly add "qlineedit.h". We also need to include the header for the form we've just created, so add "colornameform.h", and since it is our last entry press Enter, then click Close.
        
+
        Click Object Explorer's Members tab. Right click "Includes (in Implementation)", then click Edit to invoke the Edit Includes (in Implementation) dialog. Click Add then enter "ntqcolordialog.h". Click Add again, and enter "ntqlabel.h". Similarly add "ntqlineedit.h". We also need to include the header for the form we've just created, so add "colornameform.h", and since it is our last entry press Enter, then click Close.
        
 
        You should now have added the following declarations to your includes (in implementation):
        
-
        • "qcolordialog.h"
          
-
        • "qlabel.h"
          
-
        • "qlineedit.h"
          
+
          • "ntqcolordialog.h"
            
+
          • "ntqlabel.h"
            
+
          • "ntqlineedit.h"
            
 
          • "colornameform.h"
            
 
          Now we're ready to enter the editAdd() slot's code. Click "mainform.ui.h" in the Project Overview to invoke the code editor.
          
 
          editAdd()
          
 
              void MainForm::editAdd()
     {
-        TQColor color = white;
+        TQColor color = white;
         if ( ! m_colors.isEmpty() ) {
-            TQWidget *visible = colorWidgetStack->visibleWidget();
-            if ( visible == tablePage )
+            TQWidget *visible = colorWidgetStack->visibleWidget();
+            if ( visible == tablePage )
                 color = colorTable->text( colorTable->currentRow(),
                                           colorTable->currentColumn() );
             else
                 color = colorIconView->currentItem()->text();
         }
-        color = TQColorDialog::getColor( color, this );
-        if ( color.isValid() ) {
-            TQPixmap pixmap( 80, 10 );
-            pixmap.fill( color );
+        color = TQColorDialog::getColor( color, this );
+        if ( color.isValid() ) {
+            TQPixmap pixmap( 80, 10 );
+            pixmap.fill( color );
             ColorNameForm *colorForm = new ColorNameForm( this, "color", TRUE );
             colorForm->setColors( m_colors );
             colorForm->colorLabel->setPixmap( pixmap );
             if ( colorForm->exec() ) {
-                TQString name = colorForm->colorLineEdit->text();
+                TQString name = colorForm->colorLineEdit->text();
                 m_colors[name] = color;
-                TQPixmap pixmap( 22, 22 );
-                pixmap.fill( color );
+                TQPixmap pixmap( 22, 22 );
+                pixmap.fill( color );
                 int row = colorTable->currentRow();
                 colorTable->insertRows( row, 1 );
                 colorTable->setText( row, COL_NAME, name );
                 colorTable->setPixmap( row, COL_NAME, pixmap );
-                colorTable->setText( row, COL_HEX, color.name().upper() );
+                colorTable->setText( row, COL_HEX, color.name().upper() );
                 if ( m_show_web ) {
                     TQCheckTableItem *item = new TQCheckTableItem( colorTable, "" );
                     item->setChecked( isWebColor( color ) );
@@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
         }
     }
 
          
- 
          The code for this function is quite long, but it isn't difficult. We start by setting a default color to white. If there are any colors in the m_colors map we set the default color to be the current color showing in the current view. We then invoke TQt's static getColor() dialog, passing it the default color. (If the user cancels an invalid color is returned.)
          
+ 
          The code for this function is quite long, but it isn't difficult. We start by setting a default color to white. If there are any colors in the m_colors map we set the default color to be the current color showing in the current view. We then invoke TQt's static getColor() dialog, passing it the default color. (If the user cancels an invalid color is returned.)
          
 
          If the user chose a color we want to show their chosen color in our custom dialog, so we create a pixmap and fill it with their chosen color. We create an instance of our ColorNameForm as a modal dialog (third argument is TRUE). We then call its setColors() function to set the colors in the m_colors map (so that the validate() function will work correctly). We set its colorLabel's pixmap to the pixmap we've just created, i.e. to a rectangle in the user's chosen color.
          
 
          We execute (exec()) the dialog. If the user clicks OK (and the color name they've entered is valid), the call will return a true value. In this case we retrieve the name they've entered from the line edit and create a new entry in the m_colors map using the name the user has given and the color they chose.
          
 
          At this point we could simply mark the views "dirty" and call repopulate. Instead we'll add the new color to each view directly and save the overhead of a full update (which might be considerable if we have thousands of colors).
          
@@ -271,23 +271,23 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
     {
         if ( ! findForm ) {
             findForm = new FindForm( this );
-            connect( findForm, SIGNAL( lookfor(const TQString&) ),
-                     this, SLOT( lookfor(const TQString&) ) );
+            connect( findForm, SIGNAL( lookfor(const TQString&) ),
+                     this, SLOT( lookfor(const TQString&) ) );
         }
         findForm->show();
     }
 
        
  
        If we haven't created the FindForm, we create it and connect its lookfor() signal to a corresponding lookfor() slot that we'll create in the main form. We then show the FindForm so that the user can enter their search text and click find.
        
 
        lookfor()
        
-
            void MainForm::lookfor( const TQString& text )
+
            void MainForm::lookfor( const TQString& text )
     {
-        if ( text.isEmpty() )
+        if ( text.isEmpty() )
             return;
-        TQString ltext = text.lower();
-        TQWidget *visible = colorWidgetStack->visibleWidget();
+        TQString ltext = text.lower();
+        TQWidget *visible = colorWidgetStack->visibleWidget();
         bool found = FALSE;
 
-        if ( visible == tablePage && colorTable->numRows() ) {
+        if ( visible == tablePage && colorTable->numRows() ) {
             int row = colorTable->currentRow();
             for ( int i = row + 1; i < colorTable->numRows(); ++i )
                 if ( colorTable->text( i, 0 ).lower().contains( ltext ) ) {
@@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
                 colorTable->setCurrentCell( row, 0 );
 
         }
-        else if ( visible == iconsPage ) {
+        else if ( visible == iconsPage ) {
             TQIconViewItem *start = colorIconView->currentItem();
             for ( TQIconViewItem *item = start->nextItem(); item; item = item->nextItem() )
                 if ( item->text().lower().contains( ltext ) ) {
@@ -397,29 +397,29 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
     }
 
        
  
        We create a new options form, passing it TRUE to make it modal. We set the radio buttons depending on the current setting of the m_clip_as variable. We set the check box to correspond with the m_show_web variable. We execute the form, and if the user clicks OK, we reflect their choices back into the relevant main form variables. If the user changed the m_show_web variable (by clicking the webCheckBox), we mark the table as "dirty" since it will need updating. We then call populate() which will update the table view if required.
        
-
        Because we use our OptionsForm and access its radio buttons and checkbox we must add "optionsform.h", "qradiobutton.h" and "qcheckbox.h" to our includes in implementation. (Click Object Explorer's Members tab, right click "Includes (in Implementation)", then click Edit. Click Add and enter "optionsform.h"; click Add again and enter "qradiobutton.h"; click Add again and enter "qcheckbox.h". Press Enter, then click Close.)
        
+
        Because we use our OptionsForm and access its radio buttons and checkbox we must add "optionsform.h", "ntqradiobutton.h" and "ntqcheckbox.h" to our includes in implementation. (Click Object Explorer's Members tab, right click "Includes (in Implementation)", then click Edit. Click Add and enter "optionsform.h"; click Add again and enter "ntqradiobutton.h"; click Add again and enter "ntqcheckbox.h". Press Enter, then click Close.)
        
 
        You should now have added the following declarations to your includes (in implementation):
        
 
        • "optionsform.h"
          
-
        • "qcheckbox.h"
          
-
        • "qradiobutton.h"
          
+
        • "ntqcheckbox.h"
          
+
        • "ntqradiobutton.h"
          
 
        Now the user can change options to suit their own preferences. But these option settings will be lost when they exit the application. We'll finish off by adding functions to load and save the user's settings.
        
 
        Saving and Loading Settings
        
 
        Logically we think of loading settings first, e.g. at application start up, and of saving settings last, e.g. at application termination. But we will code saving settings first, since then we'll know what it is that we must load.
        
-
        TQt 3.0 introduced a new class TQSettings, that handles user settings in a platform independent way (e.g. it uses the registry on windows and rc files on Unix). Add the "qsettings.h" header to the includes in implementation. (Click Object Explorer's Members tab, right click "Includes (in Implementation)", click New, enter "qsettings.h", then press Enter.)
        
+
        TQt 3.0 introduced a new class TQSettings, that handles user settings in a platform independent way (e.g. it uses the registry on windows and rc files on Unix). Add the "ntqsettings.h" header to the includes in implementation. (Click Object Explorer's Members tab, right click "Includes (in Implementation)", click New, enter "ntqsettings.h", then press Enter.)
        
 
        You should now have added the following declaration to your includes (in implementation):
        
-
        • "qsettings.h"
          
+
          • "ntqsettings.h"
            
 
          saveSettings()
          
 
              void MainForm::saveSettings()
     {
-        TQSettings settings;
-        settings.insertSearchPath( TQSettings::Windows, WINDOWS_REGISTRY );
-        settings.writeEntry( APP_KEY + "WindowWidth", width() );
-        settings.writeEntry( APP_KEY + "WindowHeight", height() );
-        settings.writeEntry( APP_KEY + "WindowX", x() );
-        settings.writeEntry( APP_KEY + "WindowY", y() );
-        settings.writeEntry( APP_KEY + "ClipAs", m_clip_as );
-        settings.writeEntry( APP_KEY + "ShowWeb", m_show_web );
-        settings.writeEntry( APP_KEY + "View",
+        TQSettings settings;
+        settings.insertSearchPath( TQSettings::Windows, WINDOWS_REGISTRY );
+        settings.writeEntry( APP_KEY + "WindowWidth", width() );
+        settings.writeEntry( APP_KEY + "WindowHeight", height() );
+        settings.writeEntry( APP_KEY + "WindowX", x() );
+        settings.writeEntry( APP_KEY + "WindowY", y() );
+        settings.writeEntry( APP_KEY + "ClipAs", m_clip_as );
+        settings.writeEntry( APP_KEY + "ShowWeb", m_show_web );
+        settings.writeEntry( APP_KEY + "View",
                 colorWidgetStack->visibleWidget() == tablePage );
     }
 
          
@@ -429,7 +429,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
     {
         if ( okToClear() ) {
             saveSettings();
-            TQApplication::exit( 0 );
+            TQApplication::exit( 0 );
         }
     }
 
        
@@ -437,15 +437,15 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
        loadSettings()
        
 
            void MainForm::loadSettings()
     {
-        TQSettings settings;
-        settings.insertSearchPath( TQSettings::Windows, WINDOWS_REGISTRY );
-        int windowWidth = settings.readNumEntry( APP_KEY + "WindowWidth", 550 );
-        int windowHeight = settings.readNumEntry( APP_KEY + "WindowHeight", 500 );
-        int windowX = settings.readNumEntry( APP_KEY + "WindowX", 0 );
-        int windowY = settings.readNumEntry( APP_KEY + "WindowY", 0 );
-        m_clip_as = settings.readNumEntry( APP_KEY + "ClipAs", CLIP_AS_HEX );
-        m_show_web = settings.readBoolEntry( APP_KEY + "ShowWeb", TRUE );
-        if ( ! settings.readBoolEntry( APP_KEY + "View", TRUE ) ) {
+        TQSettings settings;
+        settings.insertSearchPath( TQSettings::Windows, WINDOWS_REGISTRY );
+        int windowWidth = settings.readNumEntry( APP_KEY + "WindowWidth", 550 );
+        int windowHeight = settings.readNumEntry( APP_KEY + "WindowHeight", 500 );
+        int windowX = settings.readNumEntry( APP_KEY + "WindowX", 0 );
+        int windowY = settings.readNumEntry( APP_KEY + "WindowY", 0 );
+        m_clip_as = settings.readNumEntry( APP_KEY + "ClipAs", CLIP_AS_HEX );
+        m_show_web = settings.readBoolEntry( APP_KEY + "ShowWeb", TRUE );
+        if ( ! settings.readBoolEntry( APP_KEY + "View", TRUE ) ) {
             colorWidgetStack->raiseWidget( iconsPage );
             viewIconsAction->setOn( TRUE );
         }
@@ -482,28 +482,28 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
        • "findform.h"
          
 
        Includes (in Implementation):
        
 
        • "optionsform.h"
          
-
        • "qlineedit.h"
          
-
        • "qlabel.h"
          
-
        • "qclipboard.h"
          
-
        • "qmessagebox.h"
          
-
        • "qstatusbar.h"
          
-
        • "qpainter.h"
          
-
        • "qstring.h"
          
-
        • "qcolor.h"
          
-
        • "qapplication.h"
          
-
        • "qfiledialog.h"
          
-
        • "qfile.h"
          
-
        • "qregexp.h"
          
-
        • "qcolordialog.h"
          
+
        • "ntqlineedit.h"
          
+
        • "ntqlabel.h"
          
+
        • "ntqclipboard.h"
          
+
        • "ntqmessagebox.h"
          
+
        • "ntqstatusbar.h"
          
+
        • "ntqpainter.h"
          
+
        • "ntqstring.h"
          
+
        • "ntqcolor.h"
          
+
        • "ntqapplication.h"
          
+
        • "ntqfiledialog.h"
          
+
        • "ntqfile.h"
          
+
        • "ntqregexp.h"
          
+
        • "ntqcolordialog.h"
          
 
        • "colornameform.h"
          
-
        • "qcheckbox.h"
          
-
        • "qradiobutton.h"
          
-
        • "qsettings.h"
          
+
        • "ntqcheckbox.h"
          
+
        • "ntqradiobutton.h"
          
+
        • "ntqsettings.h"
          
 
        ColorNameForm Members
        
 
        We put all the ColorNameForm declarations in the source code file. The file colornameform.ui.h should begin with the following declarations:
        
-
            #include <qcolor.h>
-    #include <qmap.h>
-    #include <qstring.h>
+
            #include <ntqcolor.h>
+    #include <ntqmap.h>
+    #include <ntqstring.h>
 
     TQMap<TQString,TQColor> m_colors;
 
        
@@ -514,7 +514,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
        The OptionsForm has no members.
        
 
        main.cpp Members
        
 
        This file should begin with the following declarations:
        
-
            #include <qapplication.h>
+
            #include <ntqapplication.h>
     #include "mainform.h"
 
        
 
diff --git a/doc/html/designer-manual-5.html b/doc/html/designer-manual-5.html
index 963375215..d2f605fce 100644
--- a/doc/html/designer-manual-5.html
+++ b/doc/html/designer-manual-5.html
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
        The ui.h extension approach has one disadvantage compared to subclassing. The ui.h file only contains custom slot implementations, but the objects are still entirely constructed and destructed inside the generated form.cpp code. This leaves the user without the possibility of doing further form initializations or cleanups that you normally would do within the constructor and destructor functions of a C++ class.
        
 
        To work around this limitation, we created the init/destroy convention. If you add a slot Form::init() to your form, this slot will be called automatically at the end of the generated form constructor. Similarly, if you add a slot Form::destroy() to your form, the slot will automatically be invoked by the destructor before any form controls get deleted. (These slots should return void.) If you prefer to use your own editor you must still create these functions in TQt Designer; once created you can then write your implementation code either using TQt Designer's C++ editor plugin or using your own editor.
        
 
        Loading forms dynamically
        
-
        We extracted the part of TQt Designer that is responsible for loading and previewing a form into a library of its own, libtqui. A new class TQWidgetFactory makes it possible to load .ui files at runtime and instantiate forms from them.
        
+
        We extracted the part of TQt Designer that is responsible for loading and previewing a form into a library of its own, libtqui. A new class TQWidgetFactory makes it possible to load .ui files at runtime and instantiate forms from them.
        
 
        This dynamic approach keeps the GUI design and the code separate and is useful in environments where the GUI may have to change more often than the underlying application logic. Ultimately, you can provide users of your application the ability to modify the graphical user interface without the need for a complete C++ development environment.
        
 
        Since the .ui file is not compiled it cannot include any C++ code, (e.g. custom slot implementations). We provide a way of adding those implementations via a controlling TQObject subclass that you pass as receiver to the widget factory.
        
 
        This concept and its usage is explained in detail in the Subclassing and Dynamic Dialogs chapter.
        
diff --git a/doc/html/designer-manual-6.html b/doc/html/designer-manual-6.html
index e6825b8ef..b07ac78a0 100644
--- a/doc/html/designer-manual-6.html
+++ b/doc/html/designer-manual-6.html
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ FORMS = settingsformbase.ui
 
        Creating the Test Harness
        
 
        Although we intend our dialog to be used within an application it is useful to create a test harness so that we can develop and test it stand-alone. Click File|New to invoke the 'New File' dialog, then click 'C++ Source', then click OK. In the editor window that pops up, enter the following code:
        
 
        -#include <qapplication.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
 #include "creditformbase.h"
 
 int main( int argc, char *argv[] ) 
@@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ int main( int argc, char *argv[] )
     {
         Q_OBJECT
     public:
-        CreditForm( TQWidget* parent = 0, const char* name = 0,
+        CreditForm( TQWidget* parent = 0, const char* name = 0,
                     bool modal = FALSE, WFlags fl = 0 );
         ~CreditForm();
     public slots:
@@ -113,11 +113,11 @@ int main( int argc, char *argv[] )
 
        
  
        We've declared the slot, setAmount(), that we created in TQt Designer. The Q_OBJECT macro is included because it is essential for classes that use signals and slots.
        
 
        The implementation in qt/tools/designer/examples/credit/creditform.cpp is simple:
        
-
            #include <qradiobutton.h>
-    #include <qspinbox.h>
+
            #include <ntqradiobutton.h>
+    #include <ntqspinbox.h>
     #include "creditform.h"
 
-    CreditForm::CreditForm( TQWidget* parent, const char* name,
+    CreditForm::CreditForm( TQWidget* parent, const char* name,
                             bool modal, WFlags fl )
         : CreditFormBase( parent, name, modal, fl )
     {
@@ -136,18 +136,18 @@ int main( int argc, char *argv[] )
 
        
  
        We call setAmount() in the constructor to ensure that the correct amount is shown when the form starts based on whichever radio button we checked in TQt Designer. In setAmount() we set the amount if the standard or none radio button is checked. If the user has checked the special radio button they are free to change the amount themselves.
        
 
        To be able to test our subclass we change main.cpp to include creditform.h rather than creditformbase.h and change the instantiation of the creditForm object:
        
-
            #include <qapplication.h>
+
            #include <ntqapplication.h>
     #include "creditform.h"
 
     int main( int argc, char *argv[] )
     {
-        TQApplication app( argc, argv );
+        TQApplication app( argc, argv );
 
         CreditForm creditForm;
-        app.setMainWidget( &creditForm );
+        app.setMainWidget( &creditForm );
         creditForm.show();
 
-        return app.exec();
+        return app.exec();
     }
 
        
  
        If you created the creditform.h and creditform.cpp files in TQt Designer, they are already in the project file, but if you created them manually you must also update the project file by adding these two new lines at the end:
        
@@ -177,18 +177,18 @@ INCLUDEPATH += $(QTDIR)/tools/designer/uilib
 
        We do not include the creditformbase.ui file since this file will be read at runtime, as we'll see shortly. We must include the tqui library since the functionality we require is not part of the standard TQt library.
        
 
        Creating main.cpp
        
 
        The main.cpp is quite standard. It will invoke the form we're going to create in TQt Designer as its main form. This form will then load and execute the dynamic dialog.
        
-
            #include <qapplication.h>
+
            #include <ntqapplication.h>
     #include "mainform.h"
 
     int main( int argc, char *argv[] )
     {
-        TQApplication app( argc, argv );
+        TQApplication app( argc, argv );
 
         MainForm *mainForm = new MainForm;
-        app.setMainWidget( mainForm );
+        app.setMainWidget( mainForm );
         mainForm->show();
 
-        return app.exec();
+        return app.exec();
     }
 
        
  
        We create a new instance of our MainForm class, set it to be the main widget, show it and enter the event loop in the app.exec() call.
        
@@ -200,73 +200,73 @@ INCLUDEPATH += $(QTDIR)/tools/designer/uilib
 
      • We'll now handle the signals and slots connections. Invoke the View and Edit Connections dialog and connect the credit dialog button's clicked() signal to a new creditDialog() custom slot (which is created by clicking the Edit Slots... button). Now connect the Quit button's clicked() signal to the dialog's accept() function.
        
 
        Save the form and call it mainform.ui. (Press Ctrl+S and enter the filename.) In the next section we'll write the code for loading and launching the dynamic dialog directly in TQt Designer.
        
 
        Loading and Executing a Dynamic Dialog
        
-
        We'll now add the code to invoke the credit dialog. Before we can do this we need to add the widget factory's header file to the form. Click the Source tab in the Object Hierarchy. Right click Includes (in Implementation), then click New. Type in '<qwidgetfactory.h>', then press Enter. Because we will need to access the spin box in the dynamic dialog we must add its header file. Right click Includes (in Implmentation), then click New. Type in '<qspinbox.h>', then press Enter.
        
+
        We'll now add the code to invoke the credit dialog. Before we can do this we need to add the widget factory's header file to the form. Click the Source tab in the Object Hierarchy. Right click Includes (in Implementation), then click New. Type in '<ntqwidgetfactory.h>', then press Enter. Because we will need to access the spin box in the dynamic dialog we must add its header file. Right click Includes (in Implmentation), then click New. Type in '<ntqspinbox.h>', then press Enter.
        
 
        In our main form we created a slot called creditDialog(). We will implement this slot directly in TQt Designer and use it to load and execute the dynamic dialog. The code is taken from qt/tools/designer/examples/receiver1/mainform.ui.h which contains the C++ implementation of mainform.ui's slots.
        
 
            void MainForm::creditDialog()
     {
-        TQDialog *creditForm = (TQDialog *)
-            TQWidgetFactory::create( "../credit/creditformbase.ui" );
+        TQDialog *creditForm = (TQDialog *)
+            TQWidgetFactory::create( "../credit/creditformbase.ui" );
         // Set up the dynamic dialog here
 
-        if ( creditForm->exec() ) {
+        if ( creditForm->exec() ) {
             // The user accepted, act accordingly
-            TQSpinBox *amount = (TQSpinBox *) creditForm->child( "amountSpinBox", "TQSpinBox" );
+            TQSpinBox *amount = (TQSpinBox *) creditForm->child( "amountSpinBox", "TQSpinBox" );
             if ( amount )
-                ratingTextLabel->setText( amount->text() );
+                ratingTextLabel->setText( amount->text() );
         }
         delete creditForm;
     }
 
        
- 
        The create() function is a static TQWidgetFactory function. It loads the specified .ui file and returns a pointer to the toplevel TQWidget created from the .ui file. We have cast the pointer to TQDialog since we know that the creditformbase.ui file defines a TQDialog. After creating the dialog we exec() it. If the user clicked OK the dialog returns Accepted and we enter the body of the if statement. We want to know the amount of credit that the user selected. We call the child() function on the dialog passing it the name of the widget we're interested in. The child() function returns a pointer to the widget with the name we passed, or returns 0 if no widget of that name was found. In the example we call child() to get a pointer to the 'amountSpinBox'. If the pointer we get back is not 0 we set the rating text to the amount in the dialog's spin box. At the end we delete the dynamic dialog. Deleting the dialog ensures that we free up its resources as soon as it is no longer required.
        
-
        We used the child() to gain access to a widget within the dynamic dialog, passing it the name of the widget we were interested in. In some situations we might not know what a widget is called. We can access the first widget of a specified class by calling child() with a null widget name and a classname, e.g. child(0,"TQPushButton"). This will return a pointer to the first TQPushButton it finds (or 0 if there isn't one). If you want pointers to all the widgets of a given class you can call the TQObject::queryList() function, passing it the name of the class. It returns a TQObjectList pointer which points to every object in the dialog that is derived from the given class. See the online TQObject documentation for further details.
        
+ 
        The create() function is a static TQWidgetFactory function. It loads the specified .ui file and returns a pointer to the toplevel TQWidget created from the .ui file. We have cast the pointer to TQDialog since we know that the creditformbase.ui file defines a TQDialog. After creating the dialog we exec() it. If the user clicked OK the dialog returns Accepted and we enter the body of the if statement. We want to know the amount of credit that the user selected. We call the child() function on the dialog passing it the name of the widget we're interested in. The child() function returns a pointer to the widget with the name we passed, or returns 0 if no widget of that name was found. In the example we call child() to get a pointer to the 'amountSpinBox'. If the pointer we get back is not 0 we set the rating text to the amount in the dialog's spin box. At the end we delete the dynamic dialog. Deleting the dialog ensures that we free up its resources as soon as it is no longer required.
        
+
        We used the child() to gain access to a widget within the dynamic dialog, passing it the name of the widget we were interested in. In some situations we might not know what a widget is called. We can access the first widget of a specified class by calling child() with a null widget name and a classname, e.g. child(0,"TQPushButton"). This will return a pointer to the first TQPushButton it finds (or 0 if there isn't one). If you want pointers to all the widgets of a given class you can call the TQObject::queryList() function, passing it the name of the class. It returns a TQObjectList pointer which points to every object in the dialog that is derived from the given class. See the online TQObject documentation for further details.
        
 
        Implementing Slots for Dynamic Dialogs
        
-
        There is one outstanding issue that we haven't addressed: the dynamic dialog does not have the behaviour of the original credit dialog because we have not implemented the setAmount() slot. We can implement slots for dynamic dialogs by creating a TQObject subclass. We then create an instance of this subclass and pass a pointer to it to the TQWidgetFactory::create() function which will connect the dynamic dialog's signals to the slots implemented in our subclass.
        
-
        We need to create a TQObject subclass and change our creditDialog() to create an instance of our subclass that can be passed to the TQWidgetFactory::create() function. Here is the modified creditDialog() function from the qt/tools/designer/examples/receiver2/mainform.ui.h file that contains the code for mainform.ui's slots:
        
+
        There is one outstanding issue that we haven't addressed: the dynamic dialog does not have the behaviour of the original credit dialog because we have not implemented the setAmount() slot. We can implement slots for dynamic dialogs by creating a TQObject subclass. We then create an instance of this subclass and pass a pointer to it to the TQWidgetFactory::create() function which will connect the dynamic dialog's signals to the slots implemented in our subclass.
        
+
        We need to create a TQObject subclass and change our creditDialog() to create an instance of our subclass that can be passed to the TQWidgetFactory::create() function. Here is the modified creditDialog() function from the qt/tools/designer/examples/receiver2/mainform.ui.h file that contains the code for mainform.ui's slots:
        
 
            void MainForm::creditDialog()
     {
         Receiver *receiver = new Receiver;
-        TQDialog *creditForm = (TQDialog *)
-        TQWidgetFactory::create( "../credit/creditformbase.ui", receiver );
+        TQDialog *creditForm = (TQDialog *)
+        TQWidgetFactory::create( "../credit/creditformbase.ui", receiver );
         receiver->setParent( creditForm );
 
         // Set up the dynamic dialog here
 
-        if ( creditForm->exec() ) {
+        if ( creditForm->exec() ) {
             // The user accepted, act accordingly
-            TQSpinBox *amount = (TQSpinBox *) creditForm->child( "amountSpinBox", "TQSpinBox" );
+            TQSpinBox *amount = (TQSpinBox *) creditForm->child( "amountSpinBox", "TQSpinBox" );
             if ( amount )
-                ratingTextLabel->setText( amount->text() );
+                ratingTextLabel->setText( amount->text() );
         }
 
         delete receiver;
         delete creditForm;
     }
 
        
- 
        We create a new instance of our 'Receiver' subclass. (We'll write the code for this class shortly.) We then create the TQDialog using TQWidgetFactory::create(). This call differs from our previous example because we pass in the subclass object so that the create() function can set up the signals/slots connections automatically for us. Since our slot must access the widgets in the dynamic form we pass a pointer to the form to the receiver object through our setParent() function. The remainder of the function is the same as before except that we delete our receiver object.
        
+ 
        We create a new instance of our 'Receiver' subclass. (We'll write the code for this class shortly.) We then create the TQDialog using TQWidgetFactory::create(). This call differs from our previous example because we pass in the subclass object so that the create() function can set up the signals/slots connections automatically for us. Since our slot must access the widgets in the dynamic form we pass a pointer to the form to the receiver object through our setParent() function. The remainder of the function is the same as before except that we delete our receiver object.
        
 
        Since we are using the 'Receiver' subclass in our main form we must include its header file. In Object Explorer's Members tab, right click Includes (in Implmentation), then click New. Type in 'receiver.h', then press Enter.
        
 
        We'll now look at the implementation of our 'Receiver' subclass. The code is taken from qt/tools/designer/examples/receiver2/receiver.h and the corresponding receiver.cpp file. We'll start with the header file.
        
-
        #include <qobject.h>
-#include <qdialog.h>
+
        #include <ntqobject.h>
+#include <ntqdialog.h>
 
-class Receiver : public TQObject
+class Receiver : public TQObject
 {
     Q_OBJECT
 public:
-    void setParent( TQDialog *parent );
+    void setParent( TQDialog *parent );
 public slots:
     void setAmount();
 private:
-    TQDialog *p;
+    TQDialog *p;
 };
 
        
-
        Our class must be a TQObject subclass and because we're using signals and slots it must include the Q_OBJECT macro. We declare a function and the setAmount() slot that we wish to implement as well as a private TQDialog pointer.
        
+
        Our class must be a TQObject subclass and because we're using signals and slots it must include the Q_OBJECT macro. We declare a function and the setAmount() slot that we wish to implement as well as a private TQDialog pointer.
        
 
        The implementation requires the header files of the classes it uses:
        
-
            #include <qradiobutton.h>
-    #include <qspinbox.h>
+
            #include <ntqradiobutton.h>
+    #include <ntqspinbox.h>
     #include "receiver.h"
 
        
  
        We'll discuss the implementation of each function in receiver.cpp separately.
        
-
            void Receiver::setParent( TQDialog *parent )
+
            void Receiver::setParent( TQDialog *parent )
     {
         p = parent;
         setAmount();
@@ -275,30 +275,30 @@ private:
  
        The setParent() function assigns a pointer to the dynamic dialog to our private pointer. We could not do this in a constructor call because we have to construct our Receiver object before we call TQWidgetFactory::create(), since we must pass the Receiver object to the create() function. Once we've called create() we then have a pointer to the dynamic dialog which we can then pass via setParent() to our Receiver class. In the subclass version of this example we called setAmount() in the constructor; but we cannot do that here because the implementation of setAmount() depends on knowledge of the dynamic dialog which is not available at construction time. Because of this we call setAmount() in the setParent() function.
        
 
            void Receiver::setAmount()
     {
-        TQSpinBox *amount =
+        TQSpinBox *amount =
             (TQSpinBox *) p->child( "amountSpinBox", "TQSpinBox" );
 
-        TQRadioButton *radio =
+        TQRadioButton *radio =
             (TQRadioButton *) p->child( "stdRadioButton", "TQRadioButton" );
-        if ( radio && radio->isChecked() ) {
+        if ( radio && radio->isChecked() ) {
             if ( amount )
-                amount->setValue( amount->maxValue() / 2 );
+                amount->setValue( amount->maxValue() / 2 );
             return;
         }
 
         radio =
             (TQRadioButton *) p->child( "noneRadioButton", "TQRadioButton" );
-        if ( radio && radio->isChecked() )
+        if ( radio && radio->isChecked() )
             if ( amount )
-                amount->setValue( amount->minValue() );
+                amount->setValue( amount->minValue() );
     }
 
        
  
        Since we may be updating the amount spin box we need to get a pointer to it. We call child() on the pointer p which points to the dynamic dialog assigned in the setParent() call. We cast the resulting pointer to the correct type so that we can call any functions relevant to that type. In the example we call child() to get a pointer to the amount spin box, and then call child() again to get a pointer to the 'stdRadioButton'. If we get a pointer to the radio button and the button is checked we set the amount providing we have a pointer to the amount spin box. If this radio button was checked we're finished so we return. If the 'stdRadioButton' isn't checked we get a pointer to the 'noneRadioButton' and set the amount if this button is checked. We do nothing if the 'specialRadioButton' is checked because the user is free to enter a value of their choice.
        
 
        
 
         Compiling vs Dynamically Loading Dialogs
        
 
        The differences between using a 'compiled in' .ui file and a dynamically loaded .ui file are these:
        
-
        • Dynamic dialogs cannot have any C++ code in the .ui file; any custom slots must be implemented via a TQObject subclass. Compiled dialogs can contain code either in the .ui file or in a subclass.
          
-
        • Dynamic dialogs will load slower because the .ui file must be read and a TQWidget instance instantiated based on the .ui file's parse tree. Compiled code will load much faster because no file reading or parsing is necessary. Note that the user may not notice any difference in speed since the difference may be mere fractions of a second.
          
+
          • Dynamic dialogs cannot have any C++ code in the .ui file; any custom slots must be implemented via a TQObject subclass. Compiled dialogs can contain code either in the .ui file or in a subclass.
            
+
          • Dynamic dialogs will load slower because the .ui file must be read and a TQWidget instance instantiated based on the .ui file's parse tree. Compiled code will load much faster because no file reading or parsing is necessary. Note that the user may not notice any difference in speed since the difference may be mere fractions of a second.
            
 
          • Dynamic dialogs allow you to change the .ui file independently of the code so long as none of the changes impact the code. This means that you can change the appearance of the form, e.g. move widgets and lay them out differently. If you want to change a compiled dialog you must change the .ui file and recompile. If you are building an application and want your customers to be able to customize aspects of the user interface you can give them a copy of TQt Designer (if your license permits this) and use dynamic dialogs.
            
 
        
 
diff --git a/doc/html/designer-manual-7.html b/doc/html/designer-manual-7.html
index 5f28e2d8d..50d7f36b4 100644
--- a/doc/html/designer-manual-7.html
+++ b/doc/html/designer-manual-7.html
@@ -39,15 +39,15 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
        There are two stages to creating a custom widget. Firstly we must create a class that defines the widget, and secondly we must incorporate the widget into TQt Designer. Creating the widget has to be done whether we are creating a simple custom widget or a plugin, but for simple custom widgets the incorporation into TQt Designer is very easy.
        
 
        We will create a VCR style widget comprising four buttons, rewind, play, next and stop. The widget will emit signals according to which button is clicked.
        
 
        Coding the Custom Widget
        
-
        A custom widget may consist of one or more standard widgets placed together in a particular combination, or may be written from scratch. We will combine some TQPushButton widgets to form the basis of our custom widget.
        
+
        A custom widget may consist of one or more standard widgets placed together in a particular combination, or may be written from scratch. We will combine some TQPushButton widgets to form the basis of our custom widget.
        
 
        We'll look at the header file, qt/tools/designer/examples/vcr/vcr.h first.
        
-
            #include <qwidget.h>
+
            #include <ntqwidget.h>
 
-    class Vcr : public TQWidget
+    class Vcr : public TQWidget
     {
         Q_OBJECT
     public:
-        Vcr( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
+        Vcr( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
         ~Vcr() {}
     signals:
         void rewind();
@@ -56,19 +56,19 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
         void stop();
     };
 
        
- 
        We include qwidget.h since we'll be deriving our custom widget from TQWidget. We declare a constructor where the widget will be created and the four signals we want our widget to emit.
        
+ 
        We include ntqwidget.h since we'll be deriving our custom widget from TQWidget. We declare a constructor where the widget will be created and the four signals we want our widget to emit.
        
 
        Note: Since we're using signals we must also include the Q_OBJECT macro. This macro also ensures that information about the class is available via the Meta Object System and ensures that TQt Designer will display the correct information about the widget.
        
 
        The implementation is straightforward. The only function we implement is the constructor. The rest of the file consists of include statements and embedded .xpm images.
        
-
            Vcr::Vcr( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-        : TQWidget( parent, name )
+
            Vcr::Vcr( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+        : TQWidget( parent, name )
     {
         TQHBoxLayout *layout = new TQHBoxLayout( this );
-        layout->setMargin( 0 );
+        layout->setMargin( 0 );
 
-        TQPushButton *rewind = new TQPushButton( TQPixmap( rewind_xpm ), 0, this, "vcr_rewind" );
+        TQPushButton *rewind = new TQPushButton( TQPixmap( rewind_xpm ), 0, this, "vcr_rewind" );
         layout->addWidget( rewind );
 
        
- 
        We create a TQHBoxLayout in which we'll place the buttons. We've only shown the rewind button in the code above since all the others are identical except for the names of the buttons, pixmaps and signals. For each of the buttons we require we call the TQPushButton constructor passing it the appropriate embedded pixmap. We then add it to the layout. Finally we connect the button's clicked() signal to the appropriate signal. Since the clicked() signals aren't specific to our widget we want to emit signals that reflect the widget's use. The rewind(), play(), etc. signals are meaningful in the context of our widget so we propagate each button's clicked() signal to the appropriate widget-specific signal.
        
+ 
        We create a TQHBoxLayout in which we'll place the buttons. We've only shown the rewind button in the code above since all the others are identical except for the names of the buttons, pixmaps and signals. For each of the buttons we require we call the TQPushButton constructor passing it the appropriate embedded pixmap. We then add it to the layout. Finally we connect the button's clicked() signal to the appropriate signal. Since the clicked() signals aren't specific to our widget we want to emit signals that reflect the widget's use. The rewind(), play(), etc. signals are meaningful in the context of our widget so we propagate each button's clicked() signal to the appropriate widget-specific signal.
        
 
        The implementation is complete, but to make sure that our widget compiles and runs we'll create a tiny test harness. The test harness will require two files, a .pro project file and a main.cpp. The qt/tools/designer/examples/vcr/vcr.pro project file:
        
 
        TEMPLATE = app
 LANGUAGE = C++
@@ -80,15 +80,15 @@ HEADERS += vcr.h
 DBFILE   = vcr.db
 
        
 
        The qt/tools/designer/examples/vcr/main.cpp file is also brief:
        
-
            #include <qapplication.h>
+
            #include <ntqapplication.h>
     #include "vcr.h"
 
     int main( int argc, char ** argv )
     {
-        TQApplication app( argc, argv );
+        TQApplication app( argc, argv );
         Vcr *vcr = new Vcr;
-        vcr->show();
-        return app.exec();
+        vcr->show();
+        return app.exec();
     }
 
        
  
        Once we're satisfied that the custom widget compiles and runs we are ready to incorporate it into TQt Designer.
        
@@ -113,23 +113,23 @@ DBFILE   = vcr.db
 
        We have two recommendations that you should consider when creating a custom widget for a plugin:
        
 
        1. Using TQt's property system will provide TQt Designer users with a direct means of configuring the widget through the property editor. (See the TQt Properties documentation.)
          
 
        2. Consider making your widget's public 'set' functions into public slots so that you can perform signal-slot connections with the widget in TQt Designer.
          
-
        In the course of this chapter we will create a simple but useful widget, 'FileChooser', which we'll later make available in TQt Designer as a plugin. In practice most custom widgets are created to add functionality rather than to compose widgets, so we will create our widget in code rather than using TQt Designer to reflect this approach. FileChooser consists of a TQLineEdit and a TQPushButton. The TQLineEdit is used to hold a file or directory name, the TQPushButton is used to launch a file dialog through which the user can choose a file or directory.
        
+
        In the course of this chapter we will create a simple but useful widget, 'FileChooser', which we'll later make available in TQt Designer as a plugin. In practice most custom widgets are created to add functionality rather than to compose widgets, so we will create our widget in code rather than using TQt Designer to reflect this approach. FileChooser consists of a TQLineEdit and a TQPushButton. The TQLineEdit is used to hold a file or directory name, the TQPushButton is used to launch a file dialog through which the user can choose a file or directory.
        
 
        
 
        
 
        The FileChooser Custom Widget
        
 
        If you've followed the manual up to this point you may well be able to create this custom widget yourself. If you're confident that you can make your own version of the widget, or have another widget that you want to turn into a plugin, skip ahead to Creating a Plugin. If you prefer to read how we created the widget then read on.
        
 
        Coding the Widget's Interface
        
 
        We will work step-by-step through the widget's header file, qt/tools/designer/examples/filechooser/widget/filechooser.h.
        
-
            #include <qwidget.h>
-    #include <qwidgetplugin.h>
+
            #include <ntqwidget.h>
+    #include <ntqwidgetplugin.h>
 
     class TQLineEdit;
     class TQPushButton;
 
        
- 
        Our widget will be derived from TQWidget so we include the qwidget.h header file. We also forward declare the two classes that our widget will be built from.
        
+ 
        Our widget will be derived from TQWidget so we include the ntqwidget.h header file. We also forward declare the two classes that our widget will be built from.
        
 
        
  
        We include the Q_OBJECT macro since this is required for classes that declare signals or slots. The Q_ENUMS declaration is used to register the Mode enumeration. Our widget has two properties, mode, to store whether the user should select a File or a Directory and fileName which stores the file or directory they chose.
        
-
            class QT_WIDGET_PLUGIN_EXPORT FileChooser : public TQWidget
+
            class QT_WIDGET_PLUGIN_EXPORT FileChooser : public TQWidget
     {
         Q_OBJECT
 
@@ -138,100 +138,100 @@ DBFILE   = vcr.db
         Q_PROPERTY( TQString fileName READ fileName WRITE setFileName )
 
     public:
-        FileChooser( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0);
+        FileChooser( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0);
 
         enum Mode { File, Directory };
 
-        TQString fileName() const;
+        TQString fileName() const;
         Mode mode() const;
 
        
  
        The constructor is declared in the standard way for widgets. We declare two public functions, fileName() to return the filename, and mode() to return the mode.
        
 
            public slots:
-        void setFileName( const TQString &fn );
+        void setFileName( const TQString &fn );
         void setMode( Mode m );
 
     signals:
-        void fileNameChanged( const TQString & );
+        void fileNameChanged( const TQString & );
 
     private slots:
         void chooseFile();
 
        
  
        The two 'set' functions are declared as public slots. setFileName() and setMode() set the filename and mode respectively. We declare a single signal, fileNameChanged(). The private slot, chooseFile() is called by the widget itself when its button is clicked.
        
 
            private:
-        TQLineEdit *lineEdit;
-        TQPushButton *button;
+        TQLineEdit *lineEdit;
+        TQPushButton *button;
         Mode md;
 
     };
 
        
- 
        A pointer to TQLineEdit and TQPushButton, as well as a Mode variable are held as private data.
        
+ 
        A pointer to TQLineEdit and TQPushButton, as well as a Mode variable are held as private data.
        
 
        Coding the Implementation
        
 
        We will work step-by-step through the implementation which is in qt/tools/designer/examples/filechooser/widget/filechooser.cpp.
        
-
            FileChooser::FileChooser( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-        : TQWidget( parent, name ), md( File )
+
            FileChooser::FileChooser( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+        : TQWidget( parent, name ), md( File )
     {
 
        
- 
        The constructor passes the parent and name to its superclass, TQWidget, and also initializes the private mode data, md, to File mode.
        
+ 
        The constructor passes the parent and name to its superclass, TQWidget, and also initializes the private mode data, md, to File mode.
        
 
                TQHBoxLayout *layout = new TQHBoxLayout( this );
-        layout->setMargin( 0 );
+        layout->setMargin( 0 );
 
-        lineEdit = new TQLineEdit( this, "filechooser_lineedit" );
+        lineEdit = new TQLineEdit( this, "filechooser_lineedit" );
         layout->addWidget( lineEdit );
 
        
- 
        We begin by creating a horizontal box layout (TQHBoxLayout) and add a TQLineEdit and a TQPushButton to it.
        
-
                connect( lineEdit, SIGNAL( textChanged( const TQString & ) ),
-                 this, SIGNAL( fileNameChanged( const TQString & ) ) );
+ 
        We begin by creating a horizontal box layout (TQHBoxLayout) and add a TQLineEdit and a TQPushButton to it.
        
+
                connect( lineEdit, SIGNAL( textChanged( const TQString & ) ),
+                 this, SIGNAL( fileNameChanged( const TQString & ) ) );
 
-        button = new TQPushButton( "...", this, "filechooser_button" );
-        button->setFixedWidth( button->fontMetrics().width( " ... " ) );
+        button = new TQPushButton( "...", this, "filechooser_button" );
+        button->setFixedWidth( button->fontMetrics().width( " ... " ) );
         layout->addWidget( button );
 
-        connect( button, SIGNAL( clicked() ),
+        connect( button, SIGNAL( clicked() ),
                  this, SLOT( chooseFile() ) );
 
        
- 
        We connect the lineEdit's textChanged() signal to the custom widget's fileNameChanged() signal. This ensures that if the user changes the text in the TQLineEdit this fact will be propagated via the custom widget's own signal. The button's clicked() signal is connected to the custom widget's chooseFile() slot which invokes the appropriate dialog for the user to choose their file or directory.
        
-
                setFocusProxy( lineEdit );
+ 
        We connect the lineEdit's textChanged() signal to the custom widget's fileNameChanged() signal. This ensures that if the user changes the text in the TQLineEdit this fact will be propagated via the custom widget's own signal. The button's clicked() signal is connected to the custom widget's chooseFile() slot which invokes the appropriate dialog for the user to choose their file or directory.
        
+
                setFocusProxy( lineEdit );
     }
 
        
  
        We set the lineEdit as the focus proxy for our custom widget. This means that when the widget is given focus the focus actually goes to the lineEdit.
        
-
            void FileChooser::setFileName( const TQString &fn )
+
            void FileChooser::setFileName( const TQString &fn )
     {
-        lineEdit->setText( fn );
+        lineEdit->setText( fn );
     }
 
     TQString FileChooser::fileName() const
     {
-        return lineEdit->text();
+        return lineEdit->text();
     }
 
        
- 
        The setFileName() function sets the filename in the TQLineEdit, and the fileName() function returns the filename from the TQLineEdit. The setMode() and mode() functions (not shown) are similarly set and return the given mode.
        
+ 
        The setFileName() function sets the filename in the TQLineEdit, and the fileName() function returns the filename from the TQLineEdit. The setMode() and mode() functions (not shown) are similarly set and return the given mode.
        
 
            void FileChooser::chooseFile()
     {
-        TQString fn;
+        TQString fn;
         if ( mode() == File )
-            fn = TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName( lineEdit->text(), TQString::null, this );
+            fn = TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName( lineEdit->text(), TQString::null, this );
         else
-            fn = TQFileDialog::getExistingDirectory( lineEdit->text(),this );
+            fn = TQFileDialog::getExistingDirectory( lineEdit->text(),this );
 
-        if ( !fn.isEmpty() ) {
-            lineEdit->setText( fn );
+        if ( !fn.isEmpty() ) {
+            lineEdit->setText( fn );
             emit fileNameChanged( fn );
         }
     }
 
        
- 
        When chooseFile() is called it presents the user with a file or directory dialog depending on the mode. If the user chooses a file or directory the TQLineEdit is updated with the chosen file or directory and the fileNameChanged() signal is emitted.
        
+ 
        When chooseFile() is called it presents the user with a file or directory dialog depending on the mode. If the user chooses a file or directory the TQLineEdit is updated with the chosen file or directory and the fileNameChanged() signal is emitted.
        
 
        Although these two files complete the implementation of the FileChooser widget it is good practice to write a test harness to check that the widget behaves as expected before attempting to put it into a plugin.
        
 
        Testing the Implementation
        
 
        We present a rudimentary test harness which will allow us to run our custom widget. The test harness requires two files, a main.cpp to contain the FileChooser, and a .pro file to create the Makefile from. Here is qt/tools/designer/examples/filechooser/widget/main.cpp:
        
-
            #include <qapplication.h>
+
            #include <ntqapplication.h>
     #include "filechooser.h"
 
     int main( int argc, char ** argv )
     {
-        TQApplication a( argc, argv );
+        TQApplication a( argc, argv );
         FileChooser *fc = new FileChooser;
-        fc->show();
-        return a.exec();
+        fc->show();
+        return a.exec();
     }
 
        
  
        And here is qt/tools/designer/examples/filechooser/widget/filechooser.pro
        
@@ -248,25 +248,25 @@ DEFINES += FILECHOOSER_IS_WIDGET
 
        We can create the makefile using qmake: qmake -o Makefile filechooser.pro, then we can make and run the harness to test our new widget. Once we're satisfied that the custom widget is robust and has the behaviour we require we can embed it into a plugin.
        
 
        Creating a Plugin
        
 
        TQt Plugins can be used to provide self-contained software components for TQt applications. TQt currently supports the creation of five kinds of plugins: codecs, image formats, database drivers, styles and custom widgets. In this section we will explain how to convert our filechooser custom widget into a TQt Designer custom widget plugin.
        
-
        A TQt Designer custom widget plugin is always derived from TQWidgetPlugin. The amout of code that needs to be written is minimal.
        
+
        A TQt Designer custom widget plugin is always derived from TQWidgetPlugin. The amout of code that needs to be written is minimal.
        
 
        To make your own plugin it is probably easiest to start by copying our example plugin.h and plugin.cpp files and changing 'CustomWidgetPlugin' to the name you wish to use for your widget plugin implementation class. Below we provide an introduction to the header file although it needs no changes beyond class renaming. The implementation file requires simple changes, mostly more class renaming; we will review each function in turn and explain what you need to do.
        
 
        The CustomWidgetPlugin Implementation
        
 
        We have called our header file plugin.h and we've called our plugin class CustomWidgetPlugin since we will be using our plugin class to wrap our custom widgets. We present the entire header file to give you an impression of the scope of the implementation required. Most of the functions require just a few lines of code.
        
-
            #include <qwidgetplugin.h>
+
            #include <ntqwidgetplugin.h>
 
-    class CustomWidgetPlugin : public TQWidgetPlugin
+    class CustomWidgetPlugin : public TQWidgetPlugin
     {
     public:
         CustomWidgetPlugin();
 
-        TQStringList keys() const;
-        TQWidget* create( const TQString &classname, TQWidget* parent = 0, const char* name = 0 );
-        TQString group( const TQString& ) const;
-        TQIconSet iconSet( const TQString& ) const;
-        TQString includeFile( const TQString& ) const;
-        TQString toolTip( const TQString& ) const;
-        TQString whatsThis( const TQString& ) const;
-        bool isContainer( const TQString& ) const;
+        TQStringList keys() const;
+        TQWidget* create( const TQString &classname, TQWidget* parent = 0, const char* name = 0 );
+        TQString group( const TQString& ) const;
+        TQIconSet iconSet( const TQString& ) const;
+        TQString includeFile( const TQString& ) const;
+        TQString toolTip( const TQString& ) const;
+        TQString whatsThis( const TQString& ) const;
+        bool isContainer( const TQString& ) const;
     };
 
        
 
        From qt/tools/designer/examples/filechooser/plugin/plugin.h
        
@@ -280,16 +280,16 @@ DEFINES += FILECHOOSER_IS_WIDGET
  
        The constructor does not have to do anything. Simply copy ours with the class name you wish to use for your widget plugin implementation.
        
 
        No destructor is necessary.
        
 
        The keys function.
        
-
            TQStringList CustomWidgetPlugin::keys() const
+
            TQStringList CustomWidgetPlugin::keys() const
     {
-        TQStringList list;
+        TQStringList list;
         list << "FileChooser";
         return list;
     }
 
        
  
        For each widget class that you want to wrap in the plugin implementation you should supply a key by which the class can be identified. This key must be your class's name, so in our example we add a single key, 'FileChooser'.
        
 
        The create() function.
        
-
            TQWidget* CustomWidgetPlugin::create( const TQString &key, TQWidget* parent, const char* name )
+
            TQWidget* CustomWidgetPlugin::create( const TQString &key, TQWidget* parent, const char* name )
     {
         if ( key == "FileChooser" )
             return new FileChooser( parent, name );
@@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ DEFINES += FILECHOOSER_IS_WIDGET
 
        
  
        In this function we create an instance of the requested class and return a TQWidget pointer to the newly created widget. Copy this function changing the class name and the feature name and create an instance of your widget just as we've done here. (See the TQt Plugin documentation for more information.)
        
 
        The includeFile() function.
        
-
            TQString CustomWidgetPlugin::includeFile( const TQString& feature ) const
+
            TQString CustomWidgetPlugin::includeFile( const TQString& feature ) const
     {
         if ( feature == "FileChooser" )
             return "filechooser.h";
@@ -307,33 +307,33 @@ DEFINES += FILECHOOSER_IS_WIDGET
 
        
  
        This function returns the name of the include file for the custom widget. Copy this function changing the class name, key and include filename to suit your own custom widget.
        
 
        The group(), iconSet(), toolTip() and whatsThis() functions.
        
-
            TQString CustomWidgetPlugin::group( const TQString& feature ) const
+
            TQString CustomWidgetPlugin::group( const TQString& feature ) const
     {
         if ( feature == "FileChooser" )
             return "Input";
         return TQString::null;
     }
 
-    TQIconSet CustomWidgetPlugin::iconSet( const TQString& ) const
+    TQIconSet CustomWidgetPlugin::iconSet( const TQString& ) const
     {
         return TQIconSet( TQPixmap( filechooser_pixmap ) );
     }
 
-    TQString CustomWidgetPlugin::includeFile( const TQString& feature ) const
+    TQString CustomWidgetPlugin::includeFile( const TQString& feature ) const
     {
         if ( feature == "FileChooser" )
             return "filechooser.h";
         return TQString::null;
     }
 
-    TQString CustomWidgetPlugin::toolTip( const TQString& feature ) const
+    TQString CustomWidgetPlugin::toolTip( const TQString& feature ) const
     {
         if ( feature == "FileChooser" )
             return "File Chooser Widget";
         return TQString::null;
     }
 
-    TQString CustomWidgetPlugin::whatsThis( const TQString& feature ) const
+    TQString CustomWidgetPlugin::whatsThis( const TQString& feature ) const
     {
         if ( feature == "FileChooser" )
             return "A widget to choose a file or directory";
@@ -343,12 +343,12 @@ DEFINES += FILECHOOSER_IS_WIDGET
  
        We use the group() function to identify which TQt Designer toolbar group this custom widget should be part of. If we use a name that is not in use TQt Designer will create a new toolbar group with the given name. Copy this function, changing the class name, key and group name to suit your own widget plugin implementation.
        
 
        The iconSet() function returns the pixmap to use in the toolbar to represent the custom widget. The toolTip() function returns the tooltip text and the whatsThis() function returns the Whats This text. Copy each of these functions changing the class name, key and the string you return to suit your own widget plugin implementation.
        
 
        The isContainer() function.
        
-
            bool CustomWidgetPlugin::isContainer( const TQString& ) const
+
            bool CustomWidgetPlugin::isContainer( const TQString& ) const
     {
         return FALSE;
     }
 
        
- 
        Copy this function changing the class name to suit your widget plugin implementation. It should return TRUE if your custom widget can contain other widgets, e.g. like TQFrame, or FALSE if it must not contain other widgets, e.g. like TQPushButton.
        
+ 
        Copy this function changing the class name to suit your widget plugin implementation. It should return TRUE if your custom widget can contain other widgets, e.g. like TQFrame, or FALSE if it must not contain other widgets, e.g. like TQPushButton.
        
 
        The Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN macro.
        
 
            Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN( CustomWidgetPlugin )
 
        
diff --git a/doc/html/designer-manual-8.html b/doc/html/designer-manual-8.html
index 5f2cd5537..74cde6610 100644
--- a/doc/html/designer-manual-8.html
+++ b/doc/html/designer-manual-8.html
@@ -31,10 +31,10 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
        [Prev: Creating Custom Widgets] [Home] [Next: Customizing and Integrating TQt Designer]
        
 
        Creating Database Applications
        
-
        This chapter shows you how to use TQt's data-aware widgets from within TQt Designer. It demonstrates INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE in both TQDataTables (tables) and TQDataBrowsers (forms). It also shows how to code Master-Detail relationships and Drilldown. A simple approach to foreign key handling is presented here; a more sophisticated approach is shown in the online SQL module documentation.
        
+
        This chapter shows you how to use TQt's data-aware widgets from within TQt Designer. It demonstrates INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE in both TQDataTables (tables) and TQDataBrowsers (forms). It also shows how to code Master-Detail relationships and Drilldown. A simple approach to foreign key handling is presented here; a more sophisticated approach is shown in the online SQL module documentation.
        
 
        If you wish to run the examples or create your own applications using these widgets you need access to an SQL database and a TQt database driver that can connect to the database. At the time of writing the drivers that TQt supports are TQODBC3 (Open Database Connectivity), TQOCI8 (Oracle), TQPSQL7 (PostgreSQL 6 and 7) and TQMYSQL3 (MySQL).
        
 
        Although you can use the TQt data-aware widgets to browse and edit data in SQL databases without having to write any SQL, a basic understanding of SQL is highly recommended. We assume that you have some familiarity with SELECT, INSERT, UPDATE, and DELETE statements. We also assume a basic understanding of the concepts of normalization and of primary and foreign keys. A standard text covering SQL databases is An Introduction to Database Systems (7th ed.) by C. J. Date, ISBN 0201385902.
        
-
        In the following text we describe the creation of a 'book' database application. The application demonstrates how to use TQDataTables including in-place record editing and how to set up master-detail relationships between TQDataTables. It also explains how to drill down from a TQDataTable to another widget, for example, to a TQDataBrowser or a TQDataView and how to perform record editing in a TQDataBrowser. A great deal of functionality is available from the classes directly in TQt Designer although subclassing is always available for finer control. If you want to build the 'book' examples you will need to create the example schema on your database.
        
+
        In the following text we describe the creation of a 'book' database application. The application demonstrates how to use TQDataTables including in-place record editing and how to set up master-detail relationships between TQDataTables. It also explains how to drill down from a TQDataTable to another widget, for example, to a TQDataBrowser or a TQDataView and how to perform record editing in a TQDataBrowser. A great deal of functionality is available from the classes directly in TQt Designer although subclassing is always available for finer control. If you want to build the 'book' examples you will need to create the example schema on your database.
        
 
        
 
        
 
        The Book Application
        
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
        Edit Database Connections Dialog
        
 
        Choose Project|Database Connections from the menu bar. The Edit Database Connections dialog will appear. Click New Connection. For applications that use a single database it will probably be most convenient to use the default connection name of '(default)'. If you use more than one database then each one must be given a unique name. A driver must be chosen from the Driver combo box. The database name may be available in the Database Name combo box or may have to be typed in. The database name, username, password, hostname and port should be provided by your database system administrator. When the Connection information has been completed click Connect. If the connection is made the connection name will appear in the list box on the left hand side of the dialog. You can now close the dialog; the connection settings will remain in effect until you change or delete them or exit from TQt Designer.
        
 
        Warning: If you are using an existing SQLite database, ensure that the name you specify in the "Database Name" field is not the same as the existing database file. TQt Designer will create a configuration file using the name given for the database and will overwrite any existing files with the same name.
        
-
        TQt Designer can remember database connection settings in qmake project files. Create a new project, e.g. click File|New, then click the 'C++ Project' icon to invoke the Project Settings dialog. Click the ellipsis button to invoke the Save As dialog; navigate to the project's directory (creating it if necessary). Make sure you're in the project's directory, then enter a project name of 'book.pro'. Click the Save button to return to the Project Settings dialog, then click OK. Next time you start TQt Designer instead of opening individual .ui files open the .pro project file instead and TQt Designer will automatically reload the project's connection settings. To activate the connection click Project|Database Connections. The connections previously saved with the project will be listed in the left hand list box. Click the connection you wish to use and then click Connect. This connection will be used from now on, e.g. for previewing TQDataTables. Opening a project file also causes TQt Designer to load in the list of forms associated with the project into the Project Overview window. In most of the explanation that follows we will assume that you use project files and have clicked Connect so that there is always a connection available when you work in TQt Designer.
        
+
        TQt Designer can remember database connection settings in qmake project files. Create a new project, e.g. click File|New, then click the 'C++ Project' icon to invoke the Project Settings dialog. Click the ellipsis button to invoke the Save As dialog; navigate to the project's directory (creating it if necessary). Make sure you're in the project's directory, then enter a project name of 'book.pro'. Click the Save button to return to the Project Settings dialog, then click OK. Next time you start TQt Designer instead of opening individual .ui files open the .pro project file instead and TQt Designer will automatically reload the project's connection settings. To activate the connection click Project|Database Connections. The connections previously saved with the project will be listed in the left hand list box. Click the connection you wish to use and then click Connect. This connection will be used from now on, e.g. for previewing TQDataTables. Opening a project file also causes TQt Designer to load in the list of forms associated with the project into the Project Overview window. In most of the explanation that follows we will assume that you use project files and have clicked Connect so that there is always a connection available when you work in TQt Designer.
        
 
        Setting Up Connections for Applications
        
 
        The applications you create must make their own connections to the SQL database. We provide an example function, createConnections(), that you can use as a basis for your own code.
        
 
        @@ -97,74 +97,74 @@ bool createConnections()
 
        We call addDatabase() passing it the name of the driver we wish to use. We then set the connection information by calling the set... functions. Finally we attempt to open the connection. If we succeed we return TRUE, otherwise we output some error information and return FALSE. From qt/tools/designer/examples/book/book1/main.cpp
        
 
            int main( int argc, char *argv[] )
     {
-        TQApplication app( argc, argv );
+        TQApplication app( argc, argv );
 
         if ( ! createConnections() )
             return 1;
 
         BookForm bookForm;
-        app.setMainWidget( &bookForm );
+        app.setMainWidget( &bookForm );
         bookForm.show();
 
-        return app.exec();
+        return app.exec();
     }
 
        
- 
        All the examples presented in this chapter call createConnections() after creating the TQApplication object in their main.cpp file and make use of the default connection. If you need to connect to multiple databases use the two-argument form of addDatabase(), passing it both the name of the driver and a unique identifier. This is explained further in the TQt SQL Module documentation.
        
+ 
        All the examples presented in this chapter call createConnections() after creating the TQApplication object in their main.cpp file and make use of the default connection. If you need to connect to multiple databases use the two-argument form of addDatabase(), passing it both the name of the driver and a unique identifier. This is explained further in the TQt SQL Module documentation.
        
 
        You do not need to keep a reference to database connections. If you use a single database connection, this becomes the default connection and database functions will use this connection automatically. We can always get a pointer to any of our connections by calling TQSqlDatabase::database().
        
 
        If you create a main.cpp file using TQt Designer, this file will not include createConnections(). We do not include this function because it needs the username and password for the database connection, and you may prefer to handle these differently from our simple example function. As a result, applications that preview correctly in TQt Designer will not run unless you implement your own database connections function.
        
-
        Using TQDataTable
        
-
        TQDataTables may be placed on any form to provide browsing of database tables and views. TQDataTables can also be used to update or delete records in-place, i.e. inside the cells themselves. Inserting records via a TQDataTable usually requires connecting to the primeInsert() signal, so that we can generate primary keys for example, or provide default values. If we wish to present records using a form view (perhaps combining data from several tables and views) we might use several TQDataBrowsers and TQDataViews.
        
+
        Using TQDataTable
        
+
        TQDataTables may be placed on any form to provide browsing of database tables and views. TQDataTables can also be used to update or delete records in-place, i.e. inside the cells themselves. Inserting records via a TQDataTable usually requires connecting to the primeInsert() signal, so that we can generate primary keys for example, or provide default values. If we wish to present records using a form view (perhaps combining data from several tables and views) we might use several TQDataBrowsers and TQDataViews.
        
 
        Quickly Viewing a Database Table
        
 
        This example, along with all the other examples in this chapter, has the project name 'book' and uses the database created by the book.sql script. As we work through the chapter we will build the 'book' application step by step. Create or copy the qt/tools/designer/examples/book/book1/main.cpp file shown earlier. The project file for this first example is qt/tools/designer/examples/book/book1/book.pro. Start a new project by clicking File|New, then click the 'C++ Project' icon to invoke the Project Settings dialog. Click the ellipsis button to invoke the Save As dialog; navigate to the project's directory (creating it if necessary). Make sure you're in the project's directory, then enter a project name of 'book.pro'. Click the Save button to return to the Project Settings dialog, then click OK. Now click Project|Database Connections. Fill in the connection information appropriate to your database then press Connect. The connection name should now appear in the left hand list box. (If this doesn't happen you'll need to contact your database systems administrator for help.) Close the dialog.
        
-
        We will now create a new form with a TQDataTable that's connected to one of our database tables.
        
+
        We will now create a new form with a TQDataTable that's connected to one of our database tables.
        
 
        Click File|New. The New File dialog presents us with a number of form templates to choose from. Choose the 'Dialog' form and click OK. Now click File|Save. You will be prompted for a filename, call it book.ui.
        
-
        Setting up a TQDataTable
        
-
        To place a TQDataTable widget on the form either click Tools|Views|DataTable or click the DataTable toolbar button. Click on the form and the Data Table Wizard will appear.
        
-
        1. The Database Connection and Table wizard page is used to set up a connection if one doesn't exist and to choose the table or view for the TQDataTable. (See Setting Up TQt Designer's Connections.)
          
+
          Setting up a TQDataTable
          
+
          To place a TQDataTable widget on the form either click Tools|Views|DataTable or click the DataTable toolbar button. Click on the form and the Data Table Wizard will appear.
          
+
          1. The Database Connection and Table wizard page is used to set up a connection if one doesn't exist and to choose the table or view for the TQDataTable. (See Setting Up TQt Designer's Connections.)
            
 
            Click the connection you wish to use, listed in the left hand Database Connection list box, e.g. "(default)". The available tables and views will appear in the right hand Table list box. Click the 'author' table and then click the Next button.
            
-
          2. The Displayed Fields wizard page provides a means of selecting which fields should be displayed in the TQDataTable and in what order. By default all fields except the primary key (if there is one) are in the Displayed Fields list box. The left- and right-pointing blue arrow buttons can be used to move fields between the Displayed Fields and the Available Fields list boxes. The blue up and down pointing arrow buttons are used to select the display order of the displayed fields.
            
+
          3. The Displayed Fields wizard page provides a means of selecting which fields should be displayed in the TQDataTable and in what order. By default all fields except the primary key (if there is one) are in the Displayed Fields list box. The left- and right-pointing blue arrow buttons can be used to move fields between the Displayed Fields and the Available Fields list boxes. The blue up and down pointing arrow buttons are used to select the display order of the displayed fields.
            
 
            The default settings are the ones we want so simply click Next.
            
-
          4. The Table Properties wizard page provides convenient access to some of the database-related properties of the TQDataTable.
            
+
          5. The Table Properties wizard page provides convenient access to some of the database-related properties of the TQDataTable.
            
 
            Make sure the Confirm Deletes checkbox is checked, then click Next.
            
-
          6. The SQL wizard page is used to set the TQDataTable's Filter and Sort properties. The Filter is an SQL WHERE clause (without the word 'WHERE'). For example, to only list authors whose surnames begin with 'P', we would enter title LIKE 'P%'. We'll leave the filter empty. The Available Fields list box lists all the fields. The Sort By list box lists the fields that the TQDataTable is to sort by and the direction of their sorting (ASCending or DESCending). The left and right blue arrows are used to move fields between the two list boxes. The up and down blue arrows move fields up and down within the Sort By list box. The ASC or DESC setting is changed with the 'sort order' toolbar button.
            
+
          7. The SQL wizard page is used to set the TQDataTable's Filter and Sort properties. The Filter is an SQL WHERE clause (without the word 'WHERE'). For example, to only list authors whose surnames begin with 'P', we would enter title LIKE 'P%'. We'll leave the filter empty. The Available Fields list box lists all the fields. The Sort By list box lists the fields that the TQDataTable is to sort by and the direction of their sorting (ASCending or DESCending). The left and right blue arrows are used to move fields between the two list boxes. The up and down blue arrows move fields up and down within the Sort By list box. The ASC or DESC setting is changed with the 'sort order' toolbar button.
            
 
            Move the surname and forename fields into the Sort By list box and click Next.
            
-
          8. The Finish wizard page gives us the opportunity to go back and change any of our settings. We will be able to change them later through the TQDataTable's properties so we can finish with the wizard.
            
+
          9. The Finish wizard page gives us the opportunity to go back and change any of our settings. We will be able to change them later through the TQDataTable's properties so we can finish with the wizard.
            
 
            Click Finish.
            
-
          The table will appear on the form with each column labelled with a default column name. If you wish to change the settings then most of them are available in the property window. The display names, the fields they are based upon, and the order of appearance of the columns can be changed using the Edit Table dialog (explained later) by right clicking the TQDataTable and left clicking Edit.
          
+
        The table will appear on the form with each column labelled with a default column name. If you wish to change the settings then most of them are available in the property window. The display names, the fields they are based upon, and the order of appearance of the columns can be changed using the Edit Table dialog (explained later) by right clicking the TQDataTable and left clicking Edit.
        
 
        Laying out the Form
        
 
        Click on the form and click the Lay Out Vertically toolbar button. Now click Preview|Preview Form; the form will run and the table will automatically display all the records.
        
 
        To turn the form we've created into an executable application we must add the main.cpp file to the project file and make the project. We should also do some renaming to make things easier to understand.
        
-
        1. Click on the form and change its name to 'BookForm' and its caption to 'Book'. Click on the TQDataTable and change its name to 'AuthorDataTable'.
          
+
          1. Click on the form and change its name to 'BookForm' and its caption to 'Book'. Click on the TQDataTable and change its name to 'AuthorDataTable'.
            
 
          2. Click File|Save All.
            
 
          3. Open the project file, e.g. book.pro, in a plain text editor and add the line: SOURCES += main.cpp at the end of the file.
            
 
          4. Run qmake to generate the make file, e.g. qmake -o Makefile book.pro, then make and run the book program.
            
-
          This example shows how easy it is to use TQDataTable to show the contents of a database table or view. You can use the application we've just built to update and delete author records. In the examples that follow we will cover insertions, setting up master-detail relationships, drilldown and foreign key lookups.
          
+
        This example shows how easy it is to use TQDataTable to show the contents of a database table or view. You can use the application we've just built to update and delete author records. In the examples that follow we will cover insertions, setting up master-detail relationships, drilldown and foreign key lookups.
        
 
        
 
         A Note on Foreign Keys
        
 
        In most relational databases tables contain fields which are foreign keys into other tables. In our 'book' database example the authorid in the book table is a foreign key into the author table. When we present a form to the end user we do not usually want the foreign key itself to be visible but rather the text associated with it. Thus, we would want the author's name to appear rather than the author id when we show book information. In many databases, this can be achieved by using a view. See your database's documentation for details.
        
 
        
-
        Inserting Records in TQDataTables
        
-
        Record insertion into a relational database usually requires the generation of a primary key value which uniquely identifies the record in the table. Also we often want to create default values for some fields to minimize the user's work. We will create a slot to capture the TQDataTables primeInsert() signal and populate the TQSqlRecord insertion buffer with a unique primary key.
        
+
        Inserting Records in TQDataTables
        
+
        Record insertion into a relational database usually requires the generation of a primary key value which uniquely identifies the record in the table. Also we often want to create default values for some fields to minimize the user's work. We will create a slot to capture the TQDataTables primeInsert() signal and populate the TQSqlRecord insertion buffer with a unique primary key.
        
 
        1. Click Edit|Slots to invoke the Edit Functions dialog. Click New Function, then enter the slot name primeInsertAuthor(TQSqlRecord*) into the Function Properties' Function line edit box. Click OK.
          
 
        2. Click the Connect Signals/Slots toolbar button, then click the AuthorDataTable, drag to the form and release the mouse. The Edit Connections dialog will now appear. Click the primeInsert() signal and then the primeInsertAuthor() slot to make the connection. Now click OK.
          
 
        3. Click the Members tab of the Object Explorer window (click Window|Views|Object Explorer to make the window visible if necessary). Click the primeInsertAuthor() slot and an editor window will appear.
          
 
        4. We must change the BookForm::primeInsertAuthor() slot to specify the parameter name and perform the necessary action:
          
-
              void BookForm::primeInsertAuthor( TQSqlRecord * buffer )
+
              void BookForm::primeInsertAuthor( TQSqlRecord * buffer )
     {
-        TQSqlQuery query;
-        query.exec( "UPDATE sequence SET sequence = sequence + 1 WHERE tablename='author';" );
-        query.exec( "SELECT sequence FROM sequence WHERE tablename='author';" );
-        if ( query.next() ) {
-            buffer->setValue( "id", query.value( 0 ) );
+        TQSqlQuery query;
+        query.exec( "UPDATE sequence SET sequence = sequence + 1 WHERE tablename='author';" );
+        query.exec( "SELECT sequence FROM sequence WHERE tablename='author';" );
+        if ( query.next() ) {
+            buffer->setValue( "id", query.value( 0 ) );
         }
     }
 
          
- 
          A TQSqlQuery object is used to increment and retrieve a unique 'sequence' number for the author table. The signal passed us a pointer to the insertion buffer and we then put the value we've retrieved, i.e. the next sequence number, into the buffer's id field. (Again, note that SQL databases often support a native 'sequence' function. The method used here is inappropriate for production systems, and is for example purposes only. See your database's documentation for details on how to generate unique keys in code. In many cases, the database can generate them automatically, or the database may provide a special syntax for dealing with sequences.)
          
+ 
          A TQSqlQuery object is used to increment and retrieve a unique 'sequence' number for the author table. The signal passed us a pointer to the insertion buffer and we then put the value we've retrieved, i.e. the next sequence number, into the buffer's id field. (Again, note that SQL databases often support a native 'sequence' function. The method used here is inappropriate for production systems, and is for example purposes only. See your database's documentation for details on how to generate unique keys in code. In many cases, the database can generate them automatically, or the database may provide a special syntax for dealing with sequences.)
          
 
        If we rebuild the application it will now support INSERT as well as UPDATE and DELETE. We could easily have added additional code to insert default values, e.g. today's date into a date field, if necessary.
        
-
        Browsing is supported by clicking records and by using the arrow keys. Once a record is active (highlighted) we can edit the it. Press the Insert key to INSERT a new record; press F2 to UPDATE the current record; press the Del key to DELETE the current record. All these operations take place immediately. Users can be given the opportunity to confirm their edits by setting the TQDataTable's confirmEdits property to True. If the confirmEdits property is True then user confirmation will be required for all insertions, updates and deletes. For finer control you can set the confirmInsert, confirmUpdate and confirmDelete properties individually.
        
+
        Browsing is supported by clicking records and by using the arrow keys. Once a record is active (highlighted) we can edit the it. Press the Insert key to INSERT a new record; press F2 to UPDATE the current record; press the Del key to DELETE the current record. All these operations take place immediately. Users can be given the opportunity to confirm their edits by setting the TQDataTable's confirmEdits property to True. If the confirmEdits property is True then user confirmation will be required for all insertions, updates and deletes. For finer control you can set the confirmInsert, confirmUpdate and confirmDelete properties individually.
        
 
        
-
         TQDataTable User Interface Interaction
        
-
        The default user-interface behavior for TQDataTables is as follows:
        
+
         TQDataTable User Interface Interaction
        
+
        The default user-interface behavior for TQDataTables is as follows:
        
 
        • Users can move to records by clicking the scrollbar and clicking records with the mouse. They can also use the keyboard's navigation keys, e.g. Left Arrow, Right Arrow, Up Arrow, Down Arrow, Page Up, Page Down, Home and End.
          
 
        • INSERT is initiated by right-clicking the record and clicking Insert or by pressing the Ins (Insert) key. The user moves between fields using Tab and Shift+Tab. The INSERT will take place if the user presses Enter or Tabs off the last field. If autoEdit is TRUE the insert will take place if the user navigates to another record. INSERT is cancelled by pressing Esc (Escape). If autoEdit is FALSE navigating to another record also cancels the INSERT. Setting confirmInsert to TRUE will require the user to confirm each INSERT.
          
 
        • UPDATE is initiated by right-clicking the record and clicking Update or by pressing F2. The update will take place if the user presses Enter or Tabs off the last field. If autoEdit is TRUE the update will take place if the user navigates to another record. UPDATE is cancelled by pressing Esc. If autoEdit is FALSE navigating to another record also cancels the UPDATE. Setting confirmUpdate to TRUE will require the user to confirm each UPDATE.
          
@@ -172,25 +172,25 @@ bool createConnections()
 
        You can change this default behavior programmatically if required.
        
 
        
 
        Relating Two Tables Together (Master-Detail)
        
-
        Databases often have pairs of tables that are related. For example, an invoice table might list the numbers, dates and customers for invoices, but not the actual invoice items, which an invoice item table might store. In the 'book' application we wish to have a TQDataTable that we can use to browse through the authors table and a second TQDataTable to show the books they've written.
        
-
        Open the book project if it isn't already open TQt Designer. We will modify this project to show two TQDataTables that relate the author table to the book table.
        
-
        1. Click the author TQDataTable and then click the Break Layout toolbutton.
          
+
          Databases often have pairs of tables that are related. For example, an invoice table might list the numbers, dates and customers for invoices, but not the actual invoice items, which an invoice item table might store. In the 'book' application we wish to have a TQDataTable that we can use to browse through the authors table and a second TQDataTable to show the books they've written.
          
+
          Open the book project if it isn't already open TQt Designer. We will modify this project to show two TQDataTables that relate the author table to the book table.
          
+
          1. Click the author TQDataTable and then click the Break Layout toolbutton.
            
 
          2. Resize the DataTable so that it only occupies the top half of the form.
            
 
          3. Now click on the DataTable toolbutton and click on the bottom half of the form. The Table Wizard will appear. (This Wizard is explained in Quickly Viewing a Database Table.)
            
 
            1. Click the connection you're using and click the book table. Click the Next button.
              
 
            2. Since we do not want them visible, make sure the authorid and id fields are moved to the Available Fields list box by using the arrow buttons. Move the title field to the top of the Displayed Fields, and move the price field above the notes field. Click the Next button.
              
 
            3. On the Table Properties page click the Read Only checkbox then click the Next button.
              
 
            4. On the SQL page we will leave the Filter (WHERE clause) empty. Move the title field to the Sort By list box and click Next. Now click Finish.
              
-
            5. Change this TQDataTable's name to "BookDataTable".
              
-
          4. Shift+Click the top TQDataTable so that both TQDataTables are selected and then click the Lay Out Vertically (in Splitter) toolbar button.
            
+
          5. Change this TQDataTable's name to "BookDataTable".
            
+
        2. Shift+Click the top TQDataTable so that both TQDataTables are selected and then click the Lay Out Vertically (in Splitter) toolbar button.
          
 
        3. Click on the form and click the Lay Out Vertically toolbar button.
          
-
        Preview the form by clicking Preview|Preview Form. All the authors are displayed in the top TQDataTable and all the books are displayed in the bottom TQDataTable. However we only want the books of the currently selected author showing in the bottom TQDataTable. We will deal with this by filtering the records in the book table according to the author selected in the author table.
        
+
        Preview the form by clicking Preview|Preview Form. All the authors are displayed in the top TQDataTable and all the books are displayed in the bottom TQDataTable. However we only want the books of the currently selected author showing in the bottom TQDataTable. We will deal with this by filtering the records in the book table according to the author selected in the author table.
        
 
        
 
         Using the Table Editor
        
 
        
 
        
 
        Edit Table Dialog
        
-
        TQDataTables are created and set up using the SQL Table Wizard. Like any other TQt Designer widget their properties may be changed in the Properties window. Some of the column and row based properties can also be be changed using the Edit Table dialog. This dialog is invoked by right clicking the TQDataTable and left clicking the Edit menu item. The right hand half of the Edit Table dialog is where we choose the fields we wish to display, their order and their labels. The procedure for creating columns is as follows:
        
+
        TQDataTables are created and set up using the SQL Table Wizard. Like any other TQt Designer widget their properties may be changed in the Properties window. Some of the column and row based properties can also be be changed using the Edit Table dialog. This dialog is invoked by right clicking the TQDataTable and left clicking the Edit menu item. The right hand half of the Edit Table dialog is where we choose the fields we wish to display, their order and their labels. The procedure for creating columns is as follows:
        
 
        1. Click the New Column button.
          
 
        2. Drop down the Field combobox to list the available fields.
          
 
        3. Click the field you wish to include at this point.
          
@@ -198,58 +198,58 @@ bool createConnections()
 
        4. Optionally click the Pixmap ellipsis (...) button to choose a pixmap to be displayed to the left of the column's label. (The ellipsis button appears when you click in the Value part of the Properties list by a pixmap or iconSet property.)
          
 
        Repeat the steps listed above for each column you wish to add. Once all the fields have been added you can change their ordering by using the blue up and down arrow buttons. At any point you can press Apply to see how the table will look. Finally click the OK button to save the properties you have set. You can always return to the table editor to change these settings later.
        
 
        
-
        Filtering One TQDataTable by Another
        
-
        To filter the book table's records we need to capture the author TQDataTable's currentChanged() signal and change the BookDataTable's filter accordingly.
        
+
        Filtering One TQDataTable by Another
        
+
        To filter the book table's records we need to capture the author TQDataTable's currentChanged() signal and change the BookDataTable's filter accordingly.
        
 
        1. Click Edit|Slots. In the Edit Functions dialog click New Function and enter a slot name of newCurrentAuthor(TQSqlRecord*). Click OK.
          
 
        2. Click Edit|Connections to invoke the View and Edit Connections dialog. Create a new connection, connecting the AuthorDataTable's currentChanged() signal to the form's newCurrentAuthor() slot. Click OK.
          
 
        3. Click the Members tab of the Object Explorer window (click Window|Views|Object Explorer to make the window visible if necessary). Click the newCurrentAuthor() slot and an editor window will appear.
          
 
        4. We must change the BookForm::newCurrentAuthor() slot to specify the parameter name and perform the necessary action:
          
-
              void BookForm::newCurrentAuthor( TQSqlRecord *author )
+
              void BookForm::newCurrentAuthor( TQSqlRecord *author )
     {
-        BookDataTable->setFilter( "authorid=" + author->value( "id" ).toString() );
+        BookDataTable->setFilter( "authorid=" + author->value( "id" ).toString() );
         BookDataTable->refresh();
     }
 
          
- 
          All that's required now is to change the BookDataTable's filter and refresh the TQDataTable to show the results of the filter.
          
+ 
          All that's required now is to change the BookDataTable's filter and refresh the TQDataTable to show the results of the filter.
          
 
        Preparing the Interface for Drilldown
        
-
        We can now browse and edit authors and see their books in the BookDataTable. In the next section we explore TQDataBrowser, which will allow us to drill down to a dialog through which we can edit books. For now we will add some buttons to the main BookForm which we will use to invoke the book editing dialog.
        
+
        We can now browse and edit authors and see their books in the BookDataTable. In the next section we explore TQDataBrowser, which will allow us to drill down to a dialog through which we can edit books. For now we will add some buttons to the main BookForm which we will use to invoke the book editing dialog.
        
 
        1. Click the form, then click the Break Layout toolbar button. Resize the form to make room for some buttons at the bottom.
          
 
        2. Add two buttons to the bottom of the form. Change their names and labels to the following:
          
 
          • EditPushButton -- &Edit Books
            
 
          • QuitPushButton -- &Quit
            
 
          Hold down the Shift key and Click both buttons (i.e. Shift+Click the buttons) and click the Lay Out Horizontally toolbar button. Click the form and click the Lay Out Vertically toolbar button.
          
 
        3. We will provide the Quit button with functionality now and work on the rest shortly. Click Edit|Connections, then connect the the Quit button's clicked() signal to the form's accept() slot. Click OK.
          
-
        Using TQDataBrowser and TQDataView
        
+
        Using TQDataBrowser and TQDataView
        
 
        
 
        
 
        The Book Application's Edit Books Dialog
        
-
        Drilling Down to a Form using TQDataBrowser
        
-
        Setting up a TQDataBrowser
        
-
        We will now create a new form to allow users to edit book records. Click the New toolbar button, click the Dialog template from the New File dialog and click OK. Change the name of the form to EditBookForm and its caption to 'Edit Books'. Click the Save toolbar button and call the file editbook.ui. Now that we have the form we can add a TQDataBrowser to show the book records.
        
+
        Drilling Down to a Form using TQDataBrowser
        
+
        Setting up a TQDataBrowser
        
+
        We will now create a new form to allow users to edit book records. Click the New toolbar button, click the Dialog template from the New File dialog and click OK. Change the name of the form to EditBookForm and its caption to 'Edit Books'. Click the Save toolbar button and call the file editbook.ui. Now that we have the form we can add a TQDataBrowser to show the book records.
        
 
        1. Click the Data Browser toolbar button, then click the form. The Data Browser Wizard will appear.
          
-
        2. The Database Connection and Table wizard page is used to set up a connection if one doesn't exist and to choose the table or view for the TQDataBrowser. (See Setting Up TQt Designer's Connections.)
          
+
        3. The Database Connection and Table wizard page is used to set up a connection if one doesn't exist and to choose the table or view for the TQDataBrowser. (See Setting Up TQt Designer's Connections.)
          
 
          Click the connection you wish to use, listed in the Database Connection list box, e.g. "(default)". The available tables and views will appear in the Table list box. Click the book table and then click the Next button.
          
-
        4. The Displayed Fields wizard page provides a means of selecting which fields should be displayed in the TQDataBrowser and in what order. By default all fields except the primary key (if there is one) are in the right hand Displayed Fields list box. The left and right blue arrow buttons can be used to move fields between the Displayed Fields and the Available Fields list boxes. The blue up and down arrow buttons are used to select the display order of the displayed fields.
          
+
        5. The Displayed Fields wizard page provides a means of selecting which fields should be displayed in the TQDataBrowser and in what order. By default all fields except the primary key (if there is one) are in the right hand Displayed Fields list box. The left and right blue arrow buttons can be used to move fields between the Displayed Fields and the Available Fields list boxes. The blue up and down arrow buttons are used to select the display order of the displayed fields.
          
 
          We don't want to see the authorid foreign key field on the form, so move it to the Available Fields list box. Also, move the title field to the top of the Displayed Fields list. Click the Next button.
          
 
        6. The Navigation and Editing wizard page allows us to choose which navigation and editing buttons should appear on the form.
          
 
          We will accept the defaults and simply click the Next button.
          
-
        7. The SQL wizard page is used to set the TQDataBrowser's Filter and Sort properties. The Filter is an SQL WHERE clause (without the word 'WHERE'). For example, to only list books that cost less than 50 (of some currency, e.g. dollars), we would enter price < 50. We will leave the filter empty. The Available Fields list box lists all the fields. The Sort By list box lists the fields that the TQDataBrowser is to sort by and the direction of their sorting (ASCending or DESCending). The left and right blue arrows are used to move fields between the two list boxes. The up and down blue arrows move fields up and down within the Sort By list box. The ASC or DESC setting is changed with the sort order button.
          
+
        8. The SQL wizard page is used to set the TQDataBrowser's Filter and Sort properties. The Filter is an SQL WHERE clause (without the word 'WHERE'). For example, to only list books that cost less than 50 (of some currency, e.g. dollars), we would enter price < 50. We will leave the filter empty. The Available Fields list box lists all the fields. The Sort By list box lists the fields that the TQDataBrowser is to sort by and the direction of their sorting (ASCending or DESCending). The left and right blue arrows are used to move fields between the two list boxes. The up and down blue arrows move fields up and down within the Sort By list box. The ASC or DESC setting is changed with the sort order button.
          
 
          Move the title field into the Sort By list box and click Next.
          
 
        9. The Layout wizard page is used to specify the initial layout of the form.
          
 
          Change the Number of Columns to 1, then click Next. Now click Finish.
          
-
        10. The TQDataBrowser will now appear on the form. Resize the form to make it smaller. Click the TQDataBrowser then click the Break Layout toolbar button. Click the buttons then click the Break Layout toolbar button. Add another button called 'PushButtonClose' with the text '&Close' and place it to the right of the Delete button.
          
-
        11. Shift+Click the Insert, Update, Delete and Close buttons, then click the Lay Out Horizontally toolbar button. Click the TQDataBrowser, then click the Lay Out in a Grid toolbar button. Finally click the form and click the Lay Out Vertically toolbar button. Now click the TQDataBrowser and rename it 'BookDataBrowser'.
          
+
        12. The TQDataBrowser will now appear on the form. Resize the form to make it smaller. Click the TQDataBrowser then click the Break Layout toolbar button. Click the buttons then click the Break Layout toolbar button. Add another button called 'PushButtonClose' with the text '&Close' and place it to the right of the Delete button.
          
+
        13. Shift+Click the Insert, Update, Delete and Close buttons, then click the Lay Out Horizontally toolbar button. Click the TQDataBrowser, then click the Lay Out in a Grid toolbar button. Finally click the form and click the Lay Out Vertically toolbar button. Now click the TQDataBrowser and rename it 'BookDataBrowser'.
          
 
        14. TQt Designer will generate the necessary code to make the browser operational (including generating the appropriate cursor, sort and filter code).
          
 
          For finer control over the form, we will be creating our own database cursor. Therefore, set the BookDataBrowser's frameworkCode property to FALSE in the Properties window to prevent TQt Designer from generating redundant code for the cursor.
          
 
        
-
         TQDataBrowser User Interface Interaction
        
-
        The user-interface behavior for TQDataBrowsers is created by connecting slots and signals. The slots provided are:
        
+
         TQDataBrowser User Interface Interaction
        
+
        The user-interface behavior for TQDataBrowsers is created by connecting slots and signals. The slots provided are:
        
 
        • insert(), update() and del() for editing;
          
 
        • first(), next(), prev(), and last() for navigation;
          
 
        • refresh() to refresh the cursor from the database;
          
 
        • readFields() to read data from the cursor's edit buffer and writeFields() to write the form's data to the cursor's edit buffer;
          
 
        • clearValues() to clear the form's values.
          
-
        If you use TQt Designer's TQDataBrowser wizard you will be given the option of creating a default set of buttons for navigation and editing. The behavior of these buttons is set up using the slots described above to provide the following functionality:
        
+
      If you use TQt Designer's TQDataBrowser wizard you will be given the option of creating a default set of buttons for navigation and editing. The behavior of these buttons is set up using the slots described above to provide the following functionality:
      
 
      • INSERT is initiated by pressing the Ins (Insert) key. The user moves between fields using Tab and Shift+Tab. If the user presses the Update button the INSERT will take place and the user will be taken to the record they have just inserted. If the user presses the Insert button (i.e. a second time) the INSERT will take place and a new insertion will be initiated. If autoEdit is TRUE the INSERT will take place if the user navigates to another record. INSERT is cancelled by pressing the Esc key or by pressing the Del (Delete) key. If autoEdit is FALSE then navigating to another record also cancels the INSERT. Setting confirmInsert to TRUE will require the user to confirm each INSERT.
        
 
      • UPDATE is automatically initiated whenever the user navigates to a record. An update will take place if the user presses the Update button. If autoEdit is TRUE the update will take place if the user navigates to another record. UPDATE is cancelled by pressing the Esc key or by pressing the Del button. If autoEdit is FALSE then navigating to another record also cancels the UPDATE. Setting confirmUpdate to TRUE will require the user to confirm each UPDATE.
        
 
      • DELETE is achieved by pressing the Del key. Setting confirmDelete to TRUE will require the user to confirm each DELETE.
        
@@ -261,10 +261,10 @@ bool createConnections()
 
            void BookForm::editClicked()
     {
         EditBookForm *dialog = new EditBookForm( this, "Edit Book Form", TRUE );
-        TQSqlCursor cur( "book" );
+        TQSqlCursor cur( "book" );
         dialog->BookDataBrowser->setSqlCursor( &cur );
         dialog->BookDataBrowser->setFilter( BookDataTable->filter() );
-        dialog->BookDataBrowser->setSort(TQSqlIndex::fromStringList(
+        dialog->BookDataBrowser->setSort(TQSqlIndex::fromStringList(
             BookDataTable->sort(), &cur ) );
         dialog->BookDataBrowser->refresh();
         int i = BookDataTable->currentRow();
@@ -275,28 +275,28 @@ bool createConnections()
         BookDataTable->refresh();
     }
 
        
- 
        We create our dialog as before. We also create a cursor over the book table and set the dialog's TQDataBrowser, BookDataBrowser, to use this new cursor. We set the TQDataBrowser's filter and sort to those that applied to the main form's book TQDataTable. We refresh the TQDataBrowser and seek to the same record the user was viewing on the main form. Then we exec the dialog and delete it when the user has finished with it. Finally we update the BookDataTable in the main form to reflect any changes that were made in the dialog.
        
-
      • Because our code refers to a class declared in editbook.h and to a TQDataBrowser we need to add two additional include files. Click on the BookForm, then click on the Members tab of the Object Explorer window. Right click the 'Includes (In Declaration)' item and click New. Type in "editbook.h". Now add a second include, this time, <qdatabrowser.h>.
        
-
        Now when we navigate through the author and book records in the BookForm we can click the Edit Books button to launch our Edit Books dialog. Although the dialog supports UPDATE, DELETE and navigation over the book table, we cannot edit the foreign keys nor perform inserts. We will deal with insertion in the same way as we did with the TQDataTable, then we will handle the foreign key relationship to author.
        
-
        Inserting into a TQDataBrowser
        
+ 
        We create our dialog as before. We also create a cursor over the book table and set the dialog's TQDataBrowser, BookDataBrowser, to use this new cursor. We set the TQDataBrowser's filter and sort to those that applied to the main form's book TQDataTable. We refresh the TQDataBrowser and seek to the same record the user was viewing on the main form. Then we exec the dialog and delete it when the user has finished with it. Finally we update the BookDataTable in the main form to reflect any changes that were made in the dialog.
        
+
      • Because our code refers to a class declared in editbook.h and to a TQDataBrowser we need to add two additional include files. Click on the BookForm, then click on the Members tab of the Object Explorer window. Right click the 'Includes (In Declaration)' item and click New. Type in "editbook.h". Now add a second include, this time, <ntqdatabrowser.h>.
        
+
        Now when we navigate through the author and book records in the BookForm we can click the Edit Books button to launch our Edit Books dialog. Although the dialog supports UPDATE, DELETE and navigation over the book table, we cannot edit the foreign keys nor perform inserts. We will deal with insertion in the same way as we did with the TQDataTable, then we will handle the foreign key relationship to author.
        
+
        Inserting into a TQDataBrowser
        
 
        We will create a slot to receive the Edit Books form's primeInsert() signal so that we can insert a unique primary key.
        
 
        1. Click on the Edit Books form, then create a new Slot called primeInsertBook(TQSqlRecord*).
          
 
          Click Edit|Slots, then click the New Function button and type the new function name in the Function Properties Function edit box. Click OK.
          
 
        2. Connect the BookDataBrowser's primeInsert() signal to the primeInsertBook() slot.
          
 
          Click the Connect Signals/Slots toolbar button, then click the BookDataBrowser and drag to the form; release the mouse on the form. Now click the primeInsert() signal and the primeInsertBook slot. Click OK.
          
 
        3. In the Object Explorer window click Members and then click the primeInsertBook slot. We need to change it to the following:
          
-
              void EditBookForm::primeInsertBook( TQSqlRecord * buffer )
+
              void EditBookForm::primeInsertBook( TQSqlRecord * buffer )
     {
-        TQSqlQuery query;
-        query.exec( "UPDATE sequence SET sequence = sequence + 1 WHERE tablename='book';" );
-        query.exec( "SELECT sequence FROM sequence WHERE tablename='book';" );
-        if ( query.next() ) {
-            buffer->setValue( "id", query.value( 0 ) );
+        TQSqlQuery query;
+        query.exec( "UPDATE sequence SET sequence = sequence + 1 WHERE tablename='book';" );
+        query.exec( "SELECT sequence FROM sequence WHERE tablename='book';" );
+        if ( query.next() ) {
+            buffer->setValue( "id", query.value( 0 ) );
         }
     }
 
          
 
        4.  
          We will also tidy up the user interface slightly. Click the Update button and set its default property to True. Connect the Close button's clicked() signal to the EditBookForm's accept() slot.
          
-
        Handling Foreign Keys in a TQDataBrowser
        
+
        Handling Foreign Keys in a TQDataBrowser
        
 
        TQt's SQL module provides two approaches to dealing with foreign keys. The most powerful and flexible approach is to subclass widgets and use property maps to relate the widgets to the database. This approach is described in the TQt SQL Module documentation, particularly the StatusPicker example. A simpler approach that can be taken wholly within TQt Designer is presented here.
        
 
        We will add a new field to the EditBookForm so that authors can be edited along with the title and price. Once we've handled the visual design we'll write the code to make it all work.
        
 
        1. First we'll add the new widgets. Click the BookDataBrowser and click the Break Layout toolbar button. Resize the form to make it larger and drag each set of buttons down to make some room below the title and price TQLineEdits. Click the Text Label toolbar button and click on the form beneath the Price label. Click the Text Label and change its text to 'Author'. Click the ComboBox toolbar button and click on the form beneath the price TQLineEdit. In the Property Window change the ComboBox's name to ComboBoxAuthor and change its sizePolicy hSizeType to Expanding.
          
@@ -309,31 +309,31 @@ bool createConnections()
 
          • We start with the init() function; this is called after the dialog is constructed and we will use it to populate the ComboBox with author names.
            
 
                void EditBookForm::init()
     {
-        TQSqlQuery query( "SELECT surname FROM author ORDER BY surname;" );
-        while ( query.next() )
-            ComboBoxAuthor->insertItem( query.value( 0 ).toString());
+        TQSqlQuery query( "SELECT surname FROM author ORDER BY surname;" );
+        while ( query.next() )
+            ComboBoxAuthor->insertItem( query.value( 0 ).toString());
     }
 
            
  
            Here we execute a query to get a list of author names and insert each one into the ComboBox.
            
 
          • We next write the code which will be executed just before a record is updated (or inserted) in the database.
            
-
                void EditBookForm::beforeUpdateBook( TQSqlRecord * buffer )
+
                void EditBookForm::beforeUpdateBook( TQSqlRecord * buffer )
     {
-        TQSqlQuery query( "SELECT id FROM author WHERE surname ='" +
+        TQSqlQuery query( "SELECT id FROM author WHERE surname ='" +
             ComboBoxAuthor->currentText() + "';" );
-        if ( query.next() )
-            buffer->setValue( "authorid", query.value( 0 ) );
+        if ( query.next() )
+            buffer->setValue( "authorid", query.value( 0 ) );
     }
 
            
  
            We look up the id of the ComboBox's current author and place it in the update (or insert) buffer's authorid field.
            
 
          • As the user navigates through the records we ensure that the ComboBox reflects the current author.
            
-
                void EditBookForm::primeUpdateBook( TQSqlRecord * buffer )
+
                void EditBookForm::primeUpdateBook( TQSqlRecord * buffer )
     {
         // Who is this book's author?
-        TQSqlQuery query( "SELECT surname FROM author WHERE id='" +
-            buffer->value( "authorid" ).toString() + "';" );
-        TQString author = "";
-        if ( query.next() )
-            author = query.value( 0 ).toString();
+        TQSqlQuery query( "SELECT surname FROM author WHERE id='" +
+            buffer->value( "authorid" ).toString() + "';" );
+        TQString author = "";
+        if ( query.next() )
+            author = query.value( 0 ).toString();
         // Set the ComboBox to the right author
         for ( int i = 0; i < ComboBoxAuthor->count(); i++ ) {
             if ( ComboBoxAuthor->text( i ) == author ) {
@@ -344,30 +344,30 @@ bool createConnections()
     }
 
            
  
            Firstly we look up the book's author and secondly we iterate through the ComboBox's items until we find the author and set the ComboBox's current item to the matching author.
            
-
        If the author name has changed or been deleted the query will fail and no author id will be inserted into the buffer causing the INSERT to fail. An alternative is to record the author id's as we populate the ComboBox and store them in a TQMap which we can then look up as required. This approach requires changes to the init(), beforeUpdateBook() and primeInsertBook() functions and the addition of a new function, mapAuthor(). The relevant code from qt/tools/designer/examples/book/book8/editbook.ui is shown below.
        
+
      If the author name has changed or been deleted the query will fail and no author id will be inserted into the buffer causing the INSERT to fail. An alternative is to record the author id's as we populate the ComboBox and store them in a TQMap which we can then look up as required. This approach requires changes to the init(), beforeUpdateBook() and primeInsertBook() functions and the addition of a new function, mapAuthor(). The relevant code from qt/tools/designer/examples/book/book8/editbook.ui is shown below.
      
 
      1. First we need to create a class variable to map author names to author id's. Click in the Members tab of the Object Explorer, then right click the Class Variables item and click New. Type in 'TQMap<TQString,int> authorMap;'.
        
 
      2. We now record the author id's in the init() function.
        
 
            void EditBookForm::init()
     {
-        TQSqlQuery query( "SELECT surname, id FROM author ORDER BY surname;" );
-        while ( query.next() ) {
-            ComboBoxAuthor->insertItem( query.value( 0 ).toString() );
-            int id = query.value( 1 ).toInt();
-            mapAuthor( query.value( 0 ).toString(), id, TRUE );
+        TQSqlQuery query( "SELECT surname, id FROM author ORDER BY surname;" );
+        while ( query.next() ) {
+            ComboBoxAuthor->insertItem( query.value( 0 ).toString() );
+            int id = query.value( 1 ).toInt();
+            mapAuthor( query.value( 0 ).toString(), id, TRUE );
         }
     }
 
        
- 
        After inserting each author's name into the ComboBox we populate a TQMap with the author's name and id.
        
-
      3. Instead of looking up the author's id in the database we look it up in the TQMap.
        
-
            void EditBookForm::beforeUpdateBook( TQSqlRecord * buffer )
+ 
        After inserting each author's name into the ComboBox we populate a TQMap with the author's name and id.
        
+
      4. Instead of looking up the author's id in the database we look it up in the TQMap.
        
+
            void EditBookForm::beforeUpdateBook( TQSqlRecord * buffer )
     {
         int id;
         mapAuthor( ComboBoxAuthor->currentText(), id, FALSE );
-        buffer->setValue( "authorid", id );
+        buffer->setValue( "authorid", id );
     }
 
        
 
      5.  
        We use a single function for storing author id's and returning them so that we can use a static data structure.
        
-
            void EditBookForm::mapAuthor( const TQString & name, int & id, bool populate )
+
            void EditBookForm::mapAuthor( const TQString & name, int & id, bool populate )
     {
         if ( populate )
             authorMap[ name ] = id;
@@ -375,13 +375,13 @@ bool createConnections()
             id = authorMap[ name ];
     }
 
        
- 
        If the populate flag is TRUE, we store the author's name and id in the TQMap, otherwise we look up the given author name and set id appropriately.
        
+ 
        If the populate flag is TRUE, we store the author's name and id in the TQMap, otherwise we look up the given author name and set id appropriately.
        
 
      6. Before we perform an update we must ensure that the author combobox shows the right author.
        
-
            void EditBookForm::primeUpdateBook( TQSqlRecord * buffer )
+
            void EditBookForm::primeUpdateBook( TQSqlRecord * buffer )
     {
-        int id = buffer->value( "authorid" ).toInt();
+        int id = buffer->value( "authorid" ).toInt();
         for ( int i = 0; i < ComboBoxAuthor->count(); i++ ) {
-            TQString author = ComboBoxAuthor->text( i );
+            TQString author = ComboBoxAuthor->text( i );
             if ( authorMap.contains( author ) && authorMap[author] == id ) {
                 ComboBoxAuthor->setCurrentItem( i ) ;
                 break;
@@ -389,8 +389,8 @@ bool createConnections()
         }
     }
 
        
-
       
      Another approach which is especially useful if the same foreign key lookups are required in different parts of the application is to subclass a cursor and use this for our lookups. This is described in the TQt SQL Module documentation, particulary the section on subclassing TQSqlCursor.
      
-
      The 'book' example demonstrates the basic techniques needed for SQL programming with TQt. Additional information on the TQt SQL classes, especially the TQSqlQuery and TQSqlCursor classes is provided in the TQt SQL Module documentation.
      
+ 
      Another approach which is especially useful if the same foreign key lookups are required in different parts of the application is to subclass a cursor and use this for our lookups. This is described in the TQt SQL Module documentation, particulary the section on subclassing TQSqlCursor.
      
+
      The 'book' example demonstrates the basic techniques needed for SQL programming with TQt. Additional information on the TQt SQL classes, especially the TQSqlQuery and TQSqlCursor classes is provided in the TQt SQL Module documentation.
      
 
 
      [Prev: Creating Custom Widgets] [Home] [Next: Customizing and Integrating TQt Designer]
      
 
      
diff --git a/doc/html/designer-manual-9.html b/doc/html/designer-manual-9.html
index ac66684e3..d87a9451c 100644
--- a/doc/html/designer-manual-9.html
+++ b/doc/html/designer-manual-9.html
@@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
      If you wish to delete the add-in remove it from the toolbar then delete the qmsdev.dll file from the add-ins directory.
      
 
      Creating Makefiles without qmake
      
 
      The qmake tool provided with TQt can create Makefiles appropriate to your platform based on .pro project files. This section describes the dependencies involved in building a TQt application and gives a couple of simple example Makefiles. This section assumes that you have a good understanding of Makefiles.
      
-
      TQt Designer produces .ui files which are used to generate .h and .cpp files for the compiler to compile. The .ui files are processed by uic. Classes which inherit from TQObject, e.g. those which use slots and signals, require an additional .cpp file to be generated. These files are generated by the moc and are named 'moc_file.cpp' where the original .cpp file is called 'file.cpp'. If your .cpp file contains the Q_OBJECT macro an additional file 'file.moc' should be generated which must be #included in the .cpp, normally at the end. This requires an extra dependency being created.
      
+
      TQt Designer produces .ui files which are used to generate .h and .cpp files for the compiler to compile. The .ui files are processed by uic. Classes which inherit from TQObject, e.g. those which use slots and signals, require an additional .cpp file to be generated. These files are generated by the moc and are named 'moc_file.cpp' where the original .cpp file is called 'file.cpp'. If your .cpp file contains the Q_OBJECT macro an additional file 'file.moc' should be generated which must be #included in the .cpp, normally at the end. This requires an extra dependency being created.
      
 
      Processing .ui files with uic is done twice:
      
 
       uic myform.ui -o myform.h
@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ uic -subdecl Form formbase.h formbase.ui -o form.h
 uic -subimpl Form form.h formbase.ui -o form.cpp
 
      
 
      First we generate the header and implementation file for our base class. Then we generate the header and implementation skeletons for our subclass. Note that the use of uic to generate skeletons is not something that would be done in a Makefile, we mention it here because it can be useful for command line users. Note also that the command line for -subdecl and for -subimpl are subtly different.
      
-
      For implementation files that contain classes which inherit from TQObject we must create moc files:
      
+
      For implementation files that contain classes which inherit from TQObject we must create moc files:
      
 
       moc myform.h -o moc_myform.cpp
 
      
@@ -193,16 +193,16 @@ myform.h: myform.ui
 
      Although Glade does not target TQt, the layout system and the widget set of GTK+ are similar to those of TQt, so the filter will retain most of the information in the .glade file.
      
 
      There are some considerations regarding the conversion of Glade files, as listed below:
      
 
      • Ampersands (&) in labels
        
-
        TQt displays an ampersand when a TQLabel has no buddy. (A buddy is a widget that accepts focus on behalf of a TQLabel.) Glade allows GtkLabel widgets with an (underlined) accelerator key but with no buddy. This is an error since users expect underlined characters to be accelerators. In this situation, TQt displays the ampersand itself instead of underlining the accelerator key. You should go over these TQLabel widgets and set their "buddy" property.
        
+
        TQt displays an ampersand when a TQLabel has no buddy. (A buddy is a widget that accepts focus on behalf of a TQLabel.) Glade allows GtkLabel widgets with an (underlined) accelerator key but with no buddy. This is an error since users expect underlined characters to be accelerators. In this situation, TQt displays the ampersand itself instead of underlining the accelerator key. You should go over these TQLabel widgets and set their "buddy" property.
        
 
      • Layout placeholders
        
-
        GTK allows a layout position to be occupied by a placeholder. TQt Designer converts those placeholders into TQLabels whose text is "?" in red, so that you can find them and fix them manually.
        
+
        GTK allows a layout position to be occupied by a placeholder. TQt Designer converts those placeholders into TQLabels whose text is "?" in red, so that you can find them and fix them manually.
        
 
      • GTK+ or GNOME widget with no TQt equivalent
        
-
        TQt has equivalents for most GTK+ widgets, but Glade also supports GNOME, whose goal is to provide a complete desktop environment. Because TQt's scope is narrower, when TQt Designer encounters a widget it cannot convert, it replaces it with a label that indicates the problem. For example, a GnomePaperSelector will be replaced by a TQLabel whose text is "GnomePaperSelector?" in red. If you are porting to KDE, you might want to use the corresponding KDE widget.
        
-
        Other GTK+/GNOME widgets are only supported in certain contexts. For example, the GnomeDruid can be embedded in another widget, whereas the corresponding TQWizard class cannot.
        
+
        TQt has equivalents for most GTK+ widgets, but Glade also supports GNOME, whose goal is to provide a complete desktop environment. Because TQt's scope is narrower, when TQt Designer encounters a widget it cannot convert, it replaces it with a label that indicates the problem. For example, a GnomePaperSelector will be replaced by a TQLabel whose text is "GnomePaperSelector?" in red. If you are porting to KDE, you might want to use the corresponding KDE widget.
        
+
        Other GTK+/GNOME widgets are only supported in certain contexts. For example, the GnomeDruid can be embedded in another widget, whereas the corresponding TQWizard class cannot.
        
 
      • Message boxes and other high-level dialogs
        
-
        Glade supports editing of GnomeMessageBox, GtkFileSelection, GtkFontSelectionDialog and others. This is trivially achieved in TQt by means of a TQMessageBox dialog, a TQFileDialog, a TQFontDialog, etc., in C++ code.
        
+
        Glade supports editing of GnomeMessageBox, GtkFileSelection, GtkFontSelectionDialog and others. This is trivially achieved in TQt by means of a TQMessageBox dialog, a TQFileDialog, a TQFontDialog, etc., in C++ code.
        
 
      • Stand-alone popup menus
        
-
        TQt Designer only supports popup menus inside a TQMainWindow. If you need a stand-alone popup menu (presumably a context menu), you can easily write code that does this using TQPopupMenu.
        
+
        TQt Designer only supports popup menus inside a TQMainWindow. If you need a stand-alone popup menu (presumably a context menu), you can easily write code that does this using TQPopupMenu.
        
 
      • Size policy parameters
        
 
        Glade provides size policies in the "Place" tab of the property editor. TQt Designer does not attempt to make use of the padding, expand, shrink and fill information, as the TQt defaults are usually good enough. In a few cases, you might have to set the "sizePolicy" property manually to obtain the effect you want.
        
 
      • GNOME standard icons
        
diff --git a/doc/html/desktop-example.html b/doc/html/desktop-example.html
index 933d4b6ff..1d778ace4 100644
--- a/doc/html/desktop-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/desktop-example.html
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
  
 
         
 The desktop demo contains three routines, each of which draws
-something on the desktop.  It does some nice stuff with TQPainter,
+something on the desktop.  It does some nice stuff with TQPainter,
 and also demonstrates how one can treat the desktop as a widget like
 any other.
 
         
        
@@ -49,12 +49,12 @@ any other.
 **
 *****************************************************************************/
 
-#include <qimage.h>
-#include <qbitmap.h>
-#include <qpainter.h>
-#include <qapplication.h>
-#include <qdropsite.h>
-#include <qdragobject.h>
+#include <ntqimage.h>
+#include <ntqbitmap.h>
+#include <ntqpainter.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
+#include <ntqdropsite.h>
+#include <ntqdragobject.h>
 #include <stdio.h>
 
 
@@ -85,8 +85,8 @@ static int velocity( int i )                    // change velocity
 
 void poly()
 {
-    TQWidget *d = TQApplication::desktop();
-    d->setBackgroundColor( TQt::white );         // white desktop
+    TQWidget *d = TQApplication::desktop();
+    d->setBackgroundColor( TQt::white );         // white desktop
 
     const int maxpoints = 5;
     const int maxcurves = 8;
@@ -94,32 +94,32 @@ void poly()
     static int yvel[maxpoints];
     int head = 0;
     int tail = -maxcurves + 2;
-    TQPointArray *a = new TQPointArray[ maxcurves ];
+    TQPointArray *a = new TQPointArray[ maxcurves ];
     register TQPointArray *p;
-    TQRect r = d->rect();                        // desktop rectangle
+    TQRect r = d->rect();                        // desktop rectangle
 
     int i;
     for ( i=0; i<maxcurves; i++ )
         a[i].resize( maxpoints );
     p = &a[0];
     for ( i=0; i<maxpoints; i++ ) {             // setup first polygon points
-        p->setPoint( i, (kindaRand()&0x7fff) % r.width(),
-                        (kindaRand()&0x7fff) % r.height() );
+        p->setPoint( i, (kindaRand()&0x7fff) % r.width(),
+                        (kindaRand()&0x7fff) % r.height() );
         xvel[i] = velocity(i);
         yvel[i] = velocity(i);
     }
 
-    TQPainter paint;
-    paint.begin( d );                           // start painting desktop
+    TQPainter paint;
+    paint.begin( d );                           // start painting desktop
 
     for ( int ntimes=0; ntimes<2000; ntimes++ ) {
-        paint.setBrush( TQColor(kindaRand()%360, 180, 255, TQColor::Hsv) );
-        paint.drawPolygon( a[head] );
+        paint.setBrush( TQColor(kindaRand()%360, 180, 255, TQColor::Hsv) );
+        paint.drawPolygon( a[head] );
         if ( ++tail >= maxcurves )
             tail = 0;
 
-        int minx=r.left(), maxx=r.right();
-        int miny=r.top(),  maxy=r.bottom();
+        int minx=r.left(), maxx=r.right();
+        int miny=r.top(),  maxy=r.bottom();
         int x, y;
         p = &a[head];
         if ( ++head >= maxcurves )
@@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ void poly()
             a[head].setPoint( i, x, y );
         }
     }
-    paint.end();                                // painting done
+    paint.end();                                // painting done
     delete[] a;
 }
 
@@ -161,27 +161,27 @@ void rotate()
     int i;
     const int w = 64;
     const int h = 64;
-    TQImage image( w, h, 8, 128 );               // create image
+    TQImage image( w, h, 8, 128 );               // create image
     for ( i=0; i<128; i++ )                     // build color table
-        image.setColor( i, qRgb(i,0,0) );
+        image.setColor( i, qRgb(i,0,0) );
     for ( int y=0; y<h; y++ ) {                 // set image pixels
-        uchar *p = image.scanLine(y);
+        uchar *p = image.scanLine(y);
         for ( int x=0; x<w; x++ )
             *p++ = (x+y)%128;
     }
 
-    TQPixmap pm;
+    TQPixmap pm;
     pm = image;                                 // convert image to pixmap
-    pm.setOptimization( TQPixmap::BestOptim );   // rotation will be faster
+    pm.setOptimization( TQPixmap::BestOptim );   // rotation will be faster
 
-    TQWidget *d = TQApplication::desktop();       // w = desktop widget
+    TQWidget *d = TQApplication::desktop();       // w = desktop widget
 
     for ( i=0; i<=360; i += 2 ) {
-        TQWMatrix m;
-        m.rotate( i );                          // rotate coordinate system
-        TQPixmap rpm = pm.xForm( m );            // rpm = rotated pixmap
-        d->setBackgroundPixmap( rpm );          // set desktop pixmap
-        d->update();                            // repaint desktop
+        TQWMatrix m;
+        m.rotate( i );                          // rotate coordinate system
+        TQPixmap rpm = pm.xForm( m );            // rpm = rotated pixmap
+        d->setBackgroundPixmap( rpm );          // set desktop pixmap
+        d->update();                            // repaint desktop
     }
 }
 
@@ -189,45 +189,45 @@ void rotate()
 // Generates a marble-like pattern in pm.
 //
 
-void generateStone( TQPixmap *pm,
-                    const TQColor &c1, const TQColor &c2, const TQColor &c3 )
+void generateStone( TQPixmap *pm,
+                    const TQColor &c1, const TQColor &c2, const TQColor &c3 )
 {
-    TQPainter p;
-    TQPen p1 ( c1, 0 );
-    TQPen p2 ( c2, 0 );
-    TQPen p3 ( c3, 0 );
-
-    p.begin( pm );
-    for( int i = 0 ; i < pm->width() ; i++ )
-        for( int j = 0 ; j < pm->height() ; j++ ) {
+    TQPainter p;
+    TQPen p1 ( c1, 0 );
+    TQPen p2 ( c2, 0 );
+    TQPen p3 ( c3, 0 );
+
+    p.begin( pm );
+    for( int i = 0 ; i < pm->width() ; i++ )
+        for( int j = 0 ; j < pm->height() ; j++ ) {
             int r = kindaRand();
             if ( r < KINDA_RAND_MAX / 3 )
-                p.setPen( p1 );
+                p.setPen( p1 );
             else if ( r < KINDA_RAND_MAX / 3 * 2 )
-                p.setPen( p2 );
+                p.setPen( p2 );
             else
-                p.setPen( p3 );
-            p.drawPoint( i,j );
+                p.setPen( p3 );
+            p.drawPoint( i,j );
         }
-    p.end();
+    p.end();
 }
 
-void drawShadeText( TQPainter *p, int x, int y, const char *text,
-                    const TQColor &topColor, const TQColor &bottomColor,
+void drawShadeText( TQPainter *p, int x, int y, const char *text,
+                    const TQColor &topColor, const TQColor &bottomColor,
                     int sw = 2 )
 {
-    if ( !p->isActive() )
+    if ( !p->isActive() )
         return;
 
-    p->setPen( bottomColor );
-    p->drawText( x+sw, y+sw, text );
-    p->setPen( topColor );
-    p->drawText( x, y, text );
+    p->setPen( bottomColor );
+    p->drawText( x+sw, y+sw, text );
+    p->setPen( topColor );
+    p->drawText( x, y, text );
 }
 
 // NOTE: desktop drag/drop is experimental
 
-class DesktopWidget : public TQWidget, private TQDropSite
+class DesktopWidget : public TQWidget, private TQDropSite
 {
 public:
     DesktopWidget( const char *s, TQWidget *parent=0, const char *name=0 );
@@ -251,20 +251,20 @@ public:
 
     void dropEvent( TQDropEvent * e )
     {
-        TQPixmap pmp;
+        TQPixmap pmp;
         if ( TQImageDrag::decode( e, pmp ) ) {
-            setBackgroundPixmap( pmp );
-            update();
+            setBackgroundPixmap( pmp );
+            update();
         }
     }
 
 private:
-    TQPixmap *pm;
-    TQString text;
+    TQPixmap *pm;
+    TQString text;
 };
 
 DesktopWidget::DesktopWidget( const char *s, TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name, WType_Desktop | WPaintDesktop),
+    : TQWidget( parent, name, WType_Desktop | WPaintDesktop),
         TQDropSite(this)
 {
     text = s;
@@ -276,34 +276,34 @@ DesktopWidget::~DesktopWidget()
     delete pm;
 }
 
-void DesktopWidget::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
+void DesktopWidget::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
 {
-    TQColor c1 = backgroundColor();
-    TQColor c2 = c1.light(104);
-    TQColor c3 = c1.dark(106);
+    TQColor c1 = backgroundColor();
+    TQColor c2 = c1.light(104);
+    TQColor c3 = c1.dark(106);
     if ( !pm ) {
-        pm = new TQPixmap( 64, 64 );
+        pm = new TQPixmap( 64, 64 );
         generateStone( pm, c1, c2, c3 );
-        setBackgroundPixmap( *pm );
-        update();
+        setBackgroundPixmap( *pm );
+        update();
     }
-    TQRect br = fontMetrics().boundingRect( text );
-    TQPixmap offscreen( br.width(), br.height() );
-    int x = width()/2  - br.width()/2;
-    int y = height()/2 - br.height()/2;
-    offscreen.fill( this, x, y );
-    TQPainter p;
-    p.begin( &offscreen );
-    drawShadeText( &p, -br.x(), -br.y(), text, c2, c3, 3 );
-    p.end();
-    bitBlt( this, x, y, &offscreen );
+    TQRect br = fontMetrics().boundingRect( text );
+    TQPixmap offscreen( br.width(), br.height() );
+    int x = width()/2  - br.width()/2;
+    int y = height()/2 - br.height()/2;
+    offscreen.fill( this, x, y );
+    TQPainter p;
+    p.begin( &offscreen );
+    drawShadeText( &p, -br.x(), -br.y(), text, c2, c3, 3 );
+    p.end();
+    bitBlt( this, x, y, &offscreen );
 }
 
 void desktopWidget( const char *s = "Trolltech" )
 {
     DesktopWidget *t = new DesktopWidget(s);
-    t->update();
-    qApp->exec();
+    t->update();
+    qApp->exec();
     delete t;
 }
 
@@ -311,31 +311,31 @@ void desktopText( const char *s = "Trolltech" )
 {
     const int border = 20;
 
-    TQColor c1 =  qApp->palette().inactive().background();
-    TQColor c2 = c1.light(104);
-    TQColor c3 = c1.dark(106);
+    TQColor c1 =  qApp->palette().inactive().background();
+    TQColor c2 = c1.light(104);
+    TQColor c3 = c1.dark(106);
 
-    TQPixmap pm(10,10);
+    TQPixmap pm(10,10);
 
-    TQPainter p;
-    p.begin( &pm );
-    TQRect r = p.fontMetrics().boundingRect( s );
-    p.end();
+    TQPainter p;
+    p.begin( &pm );
+    TQRect r = p.fontMetrics().boundingRect( s );
+    p.end();
 
-    int appWidth  =  qApp->desktop()->width();
-    int appHeight =  qApp->desktop()->height();
-    if ( r.width() > appWidth - border*2 )
-        r.setWidth( appWidth - border*2 );
-    if ( r.height() > appHeight - border*2 )
-        r.setHeight( appHeight - border*2 );
+    int appWidth  =  qApp->desktop()->width();
+    int appHeight =  qApp->desktop()->height();
+    if ( r.width() > appWidth - border*2 )
+        r.setWidth( appWidth - border*2 );
+    if ( r.height() > appHeight - border*2 )
+        r.setHeight( appHeight - border*2 );
 
-    pm.resize( r.size() + TQSize( border*2, border*2 ) );
+    pm.resize( r.size() + TQSize( border*2, border*2 ) );
     generateStone( &pm, c1, c2, c3 );
-    p.begin( &pm );
-    drawShadeText( &p, -r.x() + border, -r.y() + border, s, c2, c3 );
-    p.end();
+    p.begin( &pm );
+    drawShadeText( &p, -r.x() + border, -r.y() + border, s, c2, c3 );
+    p.end();
 
-    qApp->desktop()->setBackgroundPixmap( pm );
+    qApp->desktop()->setBackgroundPixmap( pm );
 }
 
 //
@@ -344,12 +344,12 @@ void desktopText( const char *s = "Trolltech" )
 
 int main( int argc, char **argv )
 {
-    TQApplication app( argc, argv );
+    TQApplication app( argc, argv );
 
     if ( argc > 1 ) {
-        TQFont f( "charter", 96, TQFont::Black );
-        f.setStyleHint( TQFont::Times );
-        app.setFont( f );
+        TQFont f( "charter", 96, TQFont::Black );
+        f.setStyleHint( TQFont::Times );
+        app.setFont( f );
     }
 
     bool validOptions = FALSE;
diff --git a/doc/html/dialogs.html b/doc/html/dialogs.html
index bef871c32..3201edf9d 100644
--- a/doc/html/dialogs.html
+++ b/doc/html/dialogs.html
@@ -36,16 +36,16 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 boxes, generally.
 
         
 
        
-
        TQColorDialogDialog widget for specifying colors
-
        TQDialogThe base class of dialog windows
-
        TQErrorMessageError message display dialog
-
        TQFileDialogDialogs that allow users to select files or directories
-
        TQFontDialogDialog widget for selecting a font
-
        TQInputDialogSimple convenience dialog to get a single value from the user
-
        TQMessageBoxModal dialog with a short message, an icon, and some buttons
-
        TQProgressDialogFeedback on the progress of a slow operation
-
        TQTabDialogStack of tabbed widgets
-
        TQWizardFramework for wizard dialogs
+
        TQColorDialogDialog widget for specifying colors
+
        TQDialogThe base class of dialog windows
+
        TQErrorMessageError message display dialog
+
        TQFileDialogDialogs that allow users to select files or directories
+
        TQFontDialogDialog widget for selecting a font
+
        TQInputDialogSimple convenience dialog to get a single value from the user
+
        TQMessageBoxModal dialog with a short message, an icon, and some buttons
+
        TQProgressDialogFeedback on the progress of a slow operation
+
        TQTabDialogStack of tabbed widgets
+
        TQWizardFramework for wizard dialogs
 
        
 
 
        
diff --git a/doc/html/dirview-example.html b/doc/html/dirview-example.html
index bfed86e6b..c0a9e7f6d 100644
--- a/doc/html/dirview-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/dirview-example.html
@@ -52,11 +52,11 @@ Drag&Drop in a listview.
 #ifndef DIRVIEW_H
 #define DIRVIEW_H
 
-#include <qlistview.h>
-#include <qstring.h>
-#include <qfile.h>
-#include <qfileinfo.h>
-#include <qtimer.h>
+#include <ntqlistview.h>
+#include <ntqstring.h>
+#include <ntqfile.h>
+#include <ntqfileinfo.h>
+#include <ntqtimer.h>
 
 class TQWidget;
 class TQDragEnterEvent;
@@ -67,63 +67,63 @@ class TQDropEvent;
 class FileItem : public TQListViewItem
 {
 public:
-    FileItem( TQListViewItem *parent, const TQString &s1, const TQString &s2 )
+    FileItem( TQListViewItem *parent, const TQString &s1, const TQString &s2 )
         : TQListViewItem( parent, s1, s2 ), pix( 0 ) {}
 
-    const TQPixmap *pixmap( int i ) const;
+    const TQPixmap *pixmap( int i ) const;
 #if !defined(Q_NO_USING_KEYWORD)
     using TQListViewItem::setPixmap;
 #endif
-    void setPixmap( TQPixmap *p );
+    void setPixmap( TQPixmap *p );
 
 private:
-    TQPixmap *pix;
+    TQPixmap *pix;
 
 };
 
 class Directory : public TQListViewItem
 {
 public:
-    Directory( TQListView * parent, const TQString& filename );
-    Directory( Directory * parent, const TQString& filename, const TQString &col2 )
+    Directory( TQListView * parent, const TQString& filename );
+    Directory( Directory * parent, const TQString& filename, const TQString &col2 )
         : TQListViewItem( parent, filename, col2 ), pix( 0 ) {}
-    Directory( Directory * parent, const TQString& filename );
+    Directory( Directory * parent, const TQString& filename );
 
-    TQString text( int column ) const;
+    TQString text( int column ) const;
 
-    TQString fullName();
+    TQString fullName();
 
     void setOpen( bool );
     void setup();
 
-    const TQPixmap *pixmap( int i ) const;
+    const TQPixmap *pixmap( int i ) const;
 #if !defined(Q_NO_USING_KEYWORD)
     using TQListViewItem::setPixmap;
 #endif
-    void setPixmap( TQPixmap *p );
+    void setPixmap( TQPixmap *p );
 
 private:
-    TQFile f;
+    TQFile f;
     Directory * p;
     bool readable;
     bool showDirsOnly;
-    TQPixmap *pix;
+    TQPixmap *pix;
 
 };
 
-class DirectoryView : public TQListView
+class DirectoryView : public TQListView
 {
     Q_OBJECT
 
 public:
-    DirectoryView( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0, bool sdo = FALSE );
+    DirectoryView( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0, bool sdo = FALSE );
     bool showDirsOnly() { return dirsOnly; }
 
 public slots:
-    void setDir( const TQString & );
+    void setDir( const TQString & );
 
 signals:
-    void folderSelected( const TQString & );
+    void folderSelected( const TQString & );
 
 protected slots:
     void slotFolderSelected( TQListViewItem * );
@@ -139,12 +139,12 @@ protected:
     void contentsMouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent *e );
 
 private:
-    TQString fullPath(TQListViewItem* item);
+    TQString fullPath(TQListViewItem* item);
     bool dirsOnly;
     TQListViewItem *oldCurrent;
     TQListViewItem *dropItem;
-    TQTimer* autoopen_timer;
-    TQPoint presspos;
+    TQTimer* autoopen_timer;
+    TQPoint presspos;
     bool mousePressed;
 
 };
@@ -169,19 +169,19 @@ can be used in any other trees.
 
 #include "dirview.h"
 
-#include <qdir.h>
-#include <qfile.h>
-#include <qfileinfo.h>
-#include <qpixmap.h>
-#include <qevent.h>
-#include <qpoint.h>
-#include <qmessagebox.h>
-#include <qdragobject.h>
-#include <qmime.h>
-#include <qstrlist.h>
-#include <qstringlist.h>
-#include <qapplication.h>
-#include <qheader.h>
+#include <ntqdir.h>
+#include <ntqfile.h>
+#include <ntqfileinfo.h>
+#include <ntqpixmap.h>
+#include <ntqevent.h>
+#include <ntqpoint.h>
+#include <ntqmessagebox.h>
+#include <ntqdragobject.h>
+#include <ntqmime.h>
+#include <ntqstrlist.h>
+#include <ntqstringlist.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
+#include <ntqheader.h>
 
 static const char* folder_closed_xpm[]={
     "16 16 9 1",
@@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ TQPixmap *fileNormal = 0;
  *
  *****************************************************************************/
 
-Directory::Directory( Directory * parent, const TQString& filename )
+Directory::Directory( Directory * parent, const TQString& filename )
     : TQListViewItem( parent ), f(filename),
       showDirsOnly( parent->showDirsOnly ),
       pix( 0 )
@@ -322,7 +322,7 @@ TQPixmap *fileNormal = 0;
 }
 
 
-Directory::Directory( TQListView * parent, const TQString& filename )
+Directory::Directory( TQListView * parent, const TQString& filename )
     : TQListViewItem( parent ), f(filename),
       showDirsOnly( ( (DirectoryView*)parent )->showDirsOnly() ),
       pix( 0 )
@@ -332,7 +332,7 @@ Directory::Directory( TQListView * parent, const void Directory::setPixmap( TQPixmap *px )
+void Directory::setPixmap( TQPixmap *px )
 {
     pix = px;
     setup();
@@ -357,34 +357,34 @@ Directory::Directory( TQListView * parent, const setPixmap( folderClosed );
 
     if ( o && !childCount() ) {
-        TQString s( fullName() );
-        TQDir thisDir( s );
-        if ( !thisDir.isReadable() ) {
+        TQString s( fullName() );
+        TQDir thisDir( s );
+        if ( !thisDir.isReadable() ) {
             readable = FALSE;
             setExpandable( FALSE );
             return;
         }
 
         listView()->setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE );
-        const TQFileInfoList * files = thisDir.entryInfoList();
+        const TQFileInfoList * files = thisDir.entryInfoList();
         if ( files ) {
             TQFileInfoListIterator it( *files );
-            TQFileInfo * fi;
+            TQFileInfo * fi;
             while( (fi=it.current()) != 0 ) {
                 ++it;
-                if ( fi->fileName() == "." || fi->fileName() == ".." )
+                if ( fi->fileName() == "." || fi->fileName() == ".." )
                     ; // nothing
-                else if ( fi->isSymLink() && !showDirsOnly ) {
-                    FileItem *item = new FileItem( this, fi->fileName(),
+                else if ( fi->isSymLink() && !showDirsOnly ) {
+                    FileItem *item = new FileItem( this, fi->fileName(),
                                                      "Symbolic Link" );
                     item->setPixmap( fileNormal );
                 }
-                else if ( fi->isDir() )
-                    (void)new Directory( this, fi->fileName() );
+                else if ( fi->isDir() )
+                    (void)new Directory( this, fi->fileName() );
                 else if ( !showDirsOnly ) {
                     FileItem *item
-                        = new FileItem( this, fi->fileName(),
-                                             fi->isFile()?"File":"Special" );
+                        = new FileItem( this, fi->fileName(),
+                                             fi->isFile()?"File":"Special" );
                     item->setPixmap( fileNormal );
                 }
             }
@@ -404,11 +404,11 @@ Directory::Directory( TQListView * parent, const Directory::fullName()
 {
-    TQString s;
+    TQString s;
     if ( p ) {
         s = p->fullName();
-        s.append( f.name() );
-        s.append( "/" );
+        s.append( f.name() );
+        s.append( "/" );
     } else {
         s = f.name();
     }
@@ -432,27 +432,27 @@ TQString Directory::fullName()
  *
  *****************************************************************************/
 
-DirectoryView::DirectoryView( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, bool sdo )
-    : TQListView( parent, name ), dirsOnly( sdo ), oldCurrent( 0 ),
+DirectoryView::DirectoryView( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, bool sdo )
+    : TQListView( parent, name ), dirsOnly( sdo ), oldCurrent( 0 ),
       dropItem( 0 ), mousePressed( FALSE )
 {
-    autoopen_timer = new TQTimer( this );
+    autoopen_timer = new TQTimer( this );
     if ( !folderLocked ) {
-        folderLocked = new TQPixmap( folder_locked );
-        folderClosed = new TQPixmap( folder_closed_xpm );
-        folderOpen = new TQPixmap( folder_open_xpm );
-        fileNormal = new TQPixmap( pix_file );
+        folderLocked = new TQPixmap( folder_locked );
+        folderClosed = new TQPixmap( folder_closed_xpm );
+        folderOpen = new TQPixmap( folder_open_xpm );
+        fileNormal = new TQPixmap( pix_file );
     }
 
-    connect( this, SIGNAL( doubleClicked( TQListViewItem * ) ),
+    connect( this, SIGNAL( doubleClicked( TQListViewItem * ) ),
              this, SLOT( slotFolderSelected( TQListViewItem * ) ) );
-    connect( this, SIGNAL( returnPressed( TQListViewItem * ) ),
+    connect( this, SIGNAL( returnPressed( TQListViewItem * ) ),
              this, SLOT( slotFolderSelected( TQListViewItem * ) ) );
 
-    setAcceptDrops( TRUE );
-    viewport()->setAcceptDrops( TRUE );
+    setAcceptDrops( TRUE );
+    viewport()->setAcceptDrops( TRUE );
 
-    connect( autoopen_timer, SIGNAL( timeout() ),
+    connect( autoopen_timer, SIGNAL( timeout() ),
              this, SLOT( openFolder() ) );
 }
 
@@ -467,7 +467,7 @@ void DirectoryView::slotFolderSelected( DirectoryView::openFolder()
 {
-    autoopen_timer->stop();
+    autoopen_timer->stop();
     if ( dropItem && !dropItem->isOpen() ) {
         dropItem->setOpen( TRUE );
         dropItem->repaint();
@@ -477,39 +477,39 @@ void DirectoryView::openFolder()
 static const int autoopenTime = 750;
 
 
-void DirectoryView::contentsDragEnterEvent( TQDragEnterEvent *e )
+void DirectoryView::contentsDragEnterEvent( TQDragEnterEvent *e )
 {
     if ( !TQUriDrag::canDecode(e) ) {
         e->ignore();
         return;
     }
 
-    oldCurrent = currentItem();
+    oldCurrent = currentItem();
 
-    TQListViewItem *i = itemAt( contentsToViewport(e->pos()) );
+    TQListViewItem *i = itemAt( contentsToViewport(e->pos()) );
     if ( i ) {
         dropItem = i;
-        autoopen_timer->start( autoopenTime );
+        autoopen_timer->start( autoopenTime );
     }
 }
 
 
-void DirectoryView::contentsDragMoveEvent( TQDragMoveEvent *e )
+void DirectoryView::contentsDragMoveEvent( TQDragMoveEvent *e )
 {
     if ( !TQUriDrag::canDecode(e) ) {
         e->ignore();
         return;
     }
 
-    TQPoint vp = contentsToViewport( ( (TQDragMoveEvent*)e )->pos() );
-    TQListViewItem *i = itemAt( vp );
+    TQPoint vp = contentsToViewport( ( (TQDragMoveEvent*)e )->pos() );
+    TQListViewItem *i = itemAt( vp );
     if ( i ) {
-        setSelected( i, TRUE );
+        setSelected( i, TRUE );
         e->accept();
         if ( i != dropItem ) {
-            autoopen_timer->stop();
+            autoopen_timer->stop();
             dropItem = i;
-            autoopen_timer->start( autoopenTime );
+            autoopen_timer->start( autoopenTime );
         }
         switch ( e->action() ) {
         case TQDropEvent::Copy:
@@ -525,37 +525,37 @@ static const int autoopenTime = 750;
         }
     } else {
         e->ignore();
-        autoopen_timer->stop();
+        autoopen_timer->stop();
         dropItem = 0;
     }
 }
 
-void DirectoryView::contentsDragLeaveEvent( TQDragLeaveEvent * )
+void DirectoryView::contentsDragLeaveEvent( TQDragLeaveEvent * )
 {
-    autoopen_timer->stop();
+    autoopen_timer->stop();
     dropItem = 0;
 
-    setCurrentItem( oldCurrent );
-    setSelected( oldCurrent, TRUE );
+    setCurrentItem( oldCurrent );
+    setSelected( oldCurrent, TRUE );
 }
 
-void DirectoryView::contentsDropEvent( TQDropEvent *e )
+void DirectoryView::contentsDropEvent( TQDropEvent *e )
 {
-    autoopen_timer->stop();
+    autoopen_timer->stop();
 
     if ( !TQUriDrag::canDecode(e) ) {
         e->ignore();
         return;
     }
 
-    TQListViewItem *item = itemAt( contentsToViewport(e->pos()) );
+    TQListViewItem *item = itemAt( contentsToViewport(e->pos()) );
     if ( item ) {
 
-        TQStrList lst;
+        TQStrList lst;
 
         TQUriDrag::decode( e, lst );
 
-        TQString str;
+        TQString str;
 
         switch ( e->action() ) {
             case TQDropEvent::Copy:
@@ -577,14 +577,14 @@ static const int autoopenTime = 750;
 
         e->accept();
 
-        for ( uint i = 0; i < lst.count(); ++i ) {
-            TQString filename = TQDir::convertSeparators(TQUriDrag::uriToLocalFile(lst.at(i)));
+        for ( uint i = 0; i < lst.count(); ++i ) {
+            TQString filename = TQDir::convertSeparators(TQUriDrag::uriToLocalFile(lst.at(i)));
             str += filename + "\n";
         }
         str += TQString( "\nTo\n\n   %1" )
-            .arg( TQDir::convertSeparators(fullPath(item)) );
+            .arg( TQDir::convertSeparators(fullPath(item)) );
 
-        TQMessageBox::information( this, "Drop target", str, "Not implemented" );
+        TQMessageBox::information( this, "Drop target", str, "Not implemented" );
     } else
         e->ignore();
 
@@ -593,7 +593,7 @@ static const int autoopenTime = 750;
 
 TQString DirectoryView::fullPath(TQListViewItem* item)
 {
-    TQString fullpath = item->text(0);
+    TQString fullpath = item->text(0);
     while ( (item=item->parent()) ) {
         if ( item->parent() )
             fullpath = item->text(0) + "/" + fullpath;
@@ -601,55 +601,55 @@ TQString DirectoryView::fullPath(TQListViewItem* item)
             fullpath = item->text(0) + fullpath;
     }
 #ifdef Q_WS_WIN
-        if (fullpath.length() > 2 && fullpath[1] != ':') {
-                TQDir dir(fullpath);
-                fullpath = dir.currentDirPath().left(2) + fullpath;
+        if (fullpath.length() > 2 && fullpath[1] != ':') {
+                TQDir dir(fullpath);
+                fullpath = dir.currentDirPath().left(2) + fullpath;
         }
 #endif
 
     return fullpath;
 }
 
-void DirectoryView::contentsMousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent* e )
+void DirectoryView::contentsMousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent* e )
 {
-    TQListView::contentsMousePressEvent(e);
-    TQPoint p( contentsToViewport( e->pos() ) );
+    TQListView::contentsMousePressEvent(e);
+    TQPoint p( contentsToViewport( e->pos() ) );
     TQListViewItem *i = itemAt( p );
     if ( i ) {
         // if the user clicked into the root decoration of the item, don't try to start a drag!
-        if ( p.x() > header()->cellPos( header()->mapToActual( 0 ) ) +
+        if ( p.x() > header()->cellPos( header()->mapToActual( 0 ) ) +
              treeStepSize() * ( i->depth() + ( rootIsDecorated() ? 1 : 0) ) + itemMargin() ||
-             p.x() < header()->cellPos( header()->mapToActual( 0 ) ) ) {
+             p.x() < header()->cellPos( header()->mapToActual( 0 ) ) ) {
             presspos = e->pos();
             mousePressed = TRUE;
         }
     }
 }
 
-void DirectoryView::contentsMouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent* e )
+void DirectoryView::contentsMouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent* e )
 {
-    if ( mousePressed && ( presspos - e->pos() ).manhattanLength() > TQApplication::startDragDistance() ) {
+    if ( mousePressed && ( presspos - e->pos() ).manhattanLength() > TQApplication::startDragDistance() ) {
         mousePressed = FALSE;
         TQListViewItem *item = itemAt( contentsToViewport(presspos) );
         if ( item ) {
-            TQString source = fullPath(item);
-            if ( TQFile::exists(source) ) {
+            TQString source = fullPath(item);
+            if ( TQFile::exists(source) ) {
                 TQUriDrag* ud = new TQUriDrag(viewport());
                 ud->setFileNames( source );
-                if ( ud->drag() )
-                    TQMessageBox::information( this, "Drag source",
+                if ( ud->drag() )
+                    TQMessageBox::information( this, "Drag source",
                     TQString("Delete ") + TQDir::convertSeparators(source), "Not implemented" );
             }
         }
     }
 }
 
-void DirectoryView::contentsMouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * )
+void DirectoryView::contentsMouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * )
 {
     mousePressed = FALSE;
 }
 
-void DirectoryView::setDir( const TQString &s )
+void DirectoryView::setDir( const TQString &s )
 {
     TQListViewItemIterator it( this );
     ++it;
@@ -657,10 +657,10 @@ void DirectoryView::setDir( const TQSt
         it.current()->setOpen( FALSE );
     }
 
-    TQStringList lst( TQStringList::split( "/", s ) );
+    TQStringList lst( TQStringList::split( "/", s ) );
     TQListViewItem *item = firstChild();
-    TQStringList::Iterator it2 = lst.begin();
-    for ( ; it2 != lst.end(); ++it2 ) {
+    TQStringList::Iterator it2 = lst.begin();
+    for ( ; it2 != lst.end(); ++it2 ) {
         while ( item ) {
             if ( item->text( 0 ) == *it2 ) {
                 item->setOpen( TRUE );
@@ -674,7 +674,7 @@ void DirectoryView::setDir( const TQSt
         setCurrentItem( item );
 }
 
-void FileItem::setPixmap( TQPixmap *p )
+void FileItem::setPixmap( TQPixmap *p )
 {
     pix = p;
     setup();
@@ -704,38 +704,38 @@ const TQPixmap *FileItem::pixmap( int i
 **
 *****************************************************************************/
 
-#include <qapplication.h>
-#include <qfileinfo.h>
-#include <qdir.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
+#include <ntqfileinfo.h>
+#include <ntqdir.h>
 #include "dirview.h"
 
 int main( int argc, char ** argv )
 {
-    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
+    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
 
     DirectoryView mw;
 
-    mw.addColumn( "Name" );
-    mw.addColumn( "Type" );
-    mw.setTreeStepSize( 20 );
+    mw.addColumn( "Name" );
+    mw.addColumn( "Type" );
+    mw.setTreeStepSize( 20 );
 
-    const TQFileInfoList* roots = TQDir::drives();
+    const TQFileInfoList* roots = TQDir::drives();
     TQPtrListIterator<TQFileInfo> i(*roots);
-    TQFileInfo* fi;
+    TQFileInfo* fi;
     while ( (fi = *i) ) {
         ++i;
-        Directory * root = new Directory( &mw, fi->filePath() );
+        Directory * root = new Directory( &mw, fi->filePath() );
         if ( roots->count() <= 1 )
             root->setOpen( TRUE ); // be interesting
     }
 
-    mw.resize( 400, 400 );
-    mw.setCaption( "TQt Example - Directory Browser" );
-    mw.setAllColumnsShowFocus( TRUE );
-    a.setMainWidget( &mw );
-    mw.show();
+    mw.resize( 400, 400 );
+    mw.setCaption( "TQt Example - Directory Browser" );
+    mw.setAllColumnsShowFocus( TRUE );
+    a.setMainWidget( &mw );
+    mw.show();
 
-    return a.exec();
+    return a.exec();
 }
 
    
 
diff --git a/doc/html/distributingntqt.html b/doc/html/distributingntqt.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cd47fe172
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/distributingntqt.html
@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+Deploying TQt Applications
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    Deploying TQt Applications
    
+
+
+
+
     This document lists the platform-specific files needed to distribute
+TQt applications. We do not include any compiler-specific files that
+may also be required. (See also, Window
+System-specific Notes.)
+
     
+
    
+
+
+
     
     Static TQt Applications
+
    
+
     To distribute static TQt applications, you need the following file for
+all platforms:
+
     
      
+
    •  your application's executable
+
    
+
     
     Dynamic TQt Applications
+
    
+
     To distribute dynamic TQt applications, you will need the following
+files for all platforms:
+
     
      
+
    •  application executable
+
    •  the TQt library 
+
    
+
     The TQt library must either be in the same directory as the application
+executable or in a directory which is included in the system library
+path.
+
     The library is in provided by the following platform specific files:
+
     
    
+
     Platform File
+
     Windows qt[version].dll
+
     Unix/Linux libqt[version].so
+
     Mac libqt[version].dylib
+
    
+
     version includes the three version numbers. For threaded builds the
+version is prefixed with -mt.
+
     
     Distributing Plugins
+
    
+
     You must include any plugin files required by the application.
+
     Plugins must be put into a subdirectory under a directory known to
+TQt as a plugin directory. The subdirectory must have the name of the
+plugin category (e.g. styles, sqldrivers, designer, etc.). 
+
     TQt searches in the following directories for plugin categories:
+
     
      
+
    •  Application specific plugin paths
+
    •  Build-directory of TQt
+
    •  The application directory
+
    
+
     Application specific plugin paths can be added using 
+TQApplication::addLibraryPath(). The build-directory of TQt is hardcoded
+in the TQt library and can be changed as a part of the installation
+process (see the distributor-example.html Distributor example).
+
     
     Dynamic Dialogs 
+
    
+
     For dynamic dialogs if you use TQWidgetFactory, you need the following
+files for all platforms:
+
     
      
+
    •  The same files as used for dynamic TQt applications
+
    •  The TQUI Library
+
    
+
     The TQUI library is provided by the following platform specific files:
+
    
+
     Platform File
+
     Windows  tqui.lib
+
     Unix/Linux  libtqui.so
+
     Mac libtqui.dylib
+
    
+
     The TQUI library must either be in the same directory as the
+application executable or in a directory which is included in the
+system library path.
+
     
+
+
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/distributingqt.html b/doc/html/distributingqt.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 5e040bd74..000000000
--- a/doc/html/distributingqt.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,124 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
-
-
-Deploying TQt Applications
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
    Deploying TQt Applications
    
-
-
-
-
     This document lists the platform-specific files needed to distribute
-TQt applications. We do not include any compiler-specific files that
-may also be required. (See also, Window
-System-specific Notes.)
-
     
-
    
-
-
-
     
     Static TQt Applications
-
    
-
     To distribute static TQt applications, you need the following file for
-all platforms:
-
     
      
-
    •  your application's executable
-
    
-
     
     Dynamic TQt Applications
-
    
-
     To distribute dynamic TQt applications, you will need the following
-files for all platforms:
-
     
      
-
    •  application executable
-
    •  the TQt library 
-
    
-
     The TQt library must either be in the same directory as the application
-executable or in a directory which is included in the system library
-path.
-
     The library is in provided by the following platform specific files:
-
     
    
-
     Platform File
-
     Windows qt[version].dll
-
     Unix/Linux libqt[version].so
-
     Mac libqt[version].dylib
-
    
-
     version includes the three version numbers. For threaded builds the
-version is prefixed with -mt.
-
     
     Distributing Plugins
-
    
-
     You must include any plugin files required by the application.
-
     Plugins must be put into a subdirectory under a directory known to
-TQt as a plugin directory. The subdirectory must have the name of the
-plugin category (e.g. styles, sqldrivers, designer, etc.). 
-
     TQt searches in the following directories for plugin categories:
-
     
      
-
    •  Application specific plugin paths
-
    •  Build-directory of TQt
-
    •  The application directory
-
    
-
     Application specific plugin paths can be added using 
-TQApplication::addLibraryPath(). The build-directory of TQt is hardcoded
-in the TQt library and can be changed as a part of the installation
-process (see the distributor-example.html Distributor example).
-
     
     Dynamic Dialogs 
-
    
-
     For dynamic dialogs if you use TQWidgetFactory, you need the following
-files for all platforms:
-
     
      
-
    •  The same files as used for dynamic TQt applications
-
    •  The TQUI Library
-
    
-
     The TQUI library is provided by the following platform specific files:
-
    
-
     Platform File
-
     Windows  tqui.lib
-
     Unix/Linux  libtqui.so
-
     Mac libtqui.dylib
-
    
-
     The TQUI library must either be in the same directory as the
-application executable or in a directory which is included in the
-system library path.
-
     
-
-
    
-
-
    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
    TQt 3.3.8
    
-
    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/distributor-example.html b/doc/html/distributor-example.html
index b7d034202..53abca50c 100644
--- a/doc/html/distributor-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/distributor-example.html
@@ -62,22 +62,22 @@ distributed with TQt.
 ** place of a destructor.
 *****************************************************************************/
 
-#include <qapplication.h>
-#include <qcursor.h>
-#include <qeventloop.h>
-#include <qfile.h>
-#include <qfiledialog.h>
-#include <qfileinfo.h>
-#include <qlineedit.h>
-#include <qmessagebox.h>
-#include <qpushbutton.h>
-#include <qtimer.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
+#include <ntqcursor.h>
+#include <ntqeventloop.h>
+#include <ntqfile.h>
+#include <ntqfiledialog.h>
+#include <ntqfileinfo.h>
+#include <ntqlineedit.h>
+#include <ntqmessagebox.h>
+#include <ntqpushbutton.h>
+#include <ntqtimer.h>
 
 
 void Distributor::init()
 {
-    timer = new TQTimer( this );
-    connect( timer, SIGNAL(timeout()), SLOT(checkLibData()) );
+    timer = new TQTimer( this );
+    connect( timer, SIGNAL(timeout()), SLOT(checkLibData()) );
 
     cancelButton()->setAutoDefault( FALSE );
     backButton()->setAutoDefault( FALSE );
@@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ void Distributor::init()
     setFinishEnabled( verifyMods, TRUE );
 }
 
-void Distributor::showPage( TQWidget *page )
+void Distributor::showPage( TQWidget *page )
 {
     if ( page == selectLibrary ) {
         nextButton()->setDefault( TRUE );
@@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ void Distributor::showPage( TQWidget *page )
         finishButton()->setDefault( TRUE );
         finishButton()->setFocus();
 
-        TQString labeltext =
+        TQString labeltext =
             tr("<p><b>Current Library File:</b> %1</p>"
                "<table border=0>"
                "<tr><td><b>New Installation Prefix:</b></td><td>%2</td></tr>"
@@ -131,24 +131,24 @@ void Distributor::showPage( TQWidget *page )
         textLabel4->setText( labeltext );
     }
 
-    TQWizard::showPage( page );
+    TQWizard::showPage( page );
 }
 
-void Distributor::checkLibFilename( const TQString &filename )
+void Distributor::checkLibFilename( const TQString &filename )
 {
     setNextEnabled( selectLibrary, FALSE );
 
-    TQFileInfo fileinfo( filename );
-    if ( ! filename.isEmpty() && fileinfo.exists() &&
-         fileinfo.isReadable() && fileinfo.isWritable() &&
-         fileinfo.isFile() && !fileinfo.isSymLink() )
-        timer->start( 500, TRUE );
+    TQFileInfo fileinfo( filename );
+    if ( ! filename.isEmpty() && fileinfo.exists() &&
+         fileinfo.isReadable() && fileinfo.isWritable() &&
+         fileinfo.isFile() && !fileinfo.isSymLink() )
+        timer->start( 500, TRUE );
 }
 
 void Distributor::browseLibFilename()
 {
-    TQString filename =
-        TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName( TQString::null, TQString::null, this );
+    TQString filename =
+        TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName( TQString::null, TQString::null, this );
     libFilename->setText( filename );
 }
 
@@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ static char *find_pattern( char *h, const char *n, ulong hlen )
 
         if ( nlen > hlen )
             return 0;
-    } while ( qstrncmp( h, n, nlen ) != 0 );
+    } while ( qstrncmp( h, n, nlen ) != 0 );
     return h + nlen;
 }
 
@@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ void Distributor::checkLibData()
 {
     struct step {
         const char *key;
-        TQCString value;
+        TQCString value;
         bool done;
     } steps[7];
 
@@ -212,18 +212,18 @@ void Distributor::checkLibData()
     uint completed = 0;
     uint total_steps = sizeof(steps) / sizeof(step);
 
-    TQFile file( libFilename->text() );
-    if ( file.open( IO_ReadOnly ) ) {
-        TQApplication::setOverrideCursor( WaitCursor );
+    TQFile file( libFilename->text() );
+    if ( file.open( IO_ReadOnly ) ) {
+        TQApplication::setOverrideCursor( WaitCursor );
 
         // instead of reading in the entire file, do the search in chunks
         char data[60000];
         ulong offset = 0;
 
-        while ( ! file.atEnd() && completed < total_steps ) {
-            TQApplication::eventLoop()->processEvents( TQEventLoop::ExcludeUserInput );
+        while ( ! file.atEnd() && completed < total_steps ) {
+            TQApplication::eventLoop()->processEvents( TQEventLoop::ExcludeUserInput );
 
-            ulong len = file.readBlock( data, sizeof(data) );
+            ulong len = file.readBlock( data, sizeof(data) );
             if ( len < 267 ) {
                 // not enough room to make any modifications... stop
                 break;
@@ -240,8 +240,8 @@ void Distributor::checkLibData()
                         // path... move the file pointer back to just
                         // before the pattern and continue
                         offset += where - 11;
-                        file.at( offset );
-                        len = file.readBlock( data, sizeof(data) );
+                        file.at( offset );
+                        len = file.readBlock( data, sizeof(data) );
                         --x; // retry the current step
                         continue;
                     }
@@ -255,33 +255,33 @@ void Distributor::checkLibData()
 
             // move to the new read position
             offset += len - 11;
-            file.at( offset );
+            file.at( offset );
         }
 
-        file.close();
+        file.close();
 
-        TQApplication::restoreOverrideCursor();
+        TQApplication::restoreOverrideCursor();
     }
 
     if ( completed == total_steps ) {
         setNextEnabled( selectLibrary, TRUE );
 
-        TQString prefix = TQFile::decodeName( steps[0].value );
+        TQString prefix = TQFile::decodeName( steps[0].value );
         prefixPath->setText( prefix );
 
-        TQString def_bin = prefix + TQString::fromLatin1( "/bin" );
-        TQString def_doc = prefix + TQString::fromLatin1( "/doc" );
-        TQString def_hdr = prefix + TQString::fromLatin1( "/include" );
-        TQString def_lib = prefix + TQString::fromLatin1( "/lib" );
-        TQString def_plg = prefix + TQString::fromLatin1( "/plugins" );
-        TQString def_dat = prefix;
+        TQString def_bin = prefix + TQString::fromLatin1( "/bin" );
+        TQString def_doc = prefix + TQString::fromLatin1( "/doc" );
+        TQString def_hdr = prefix + TQString::fromLatin1( "/include" );
+        TQString def_lib = prefix + TQString::fromLatin1( "/lib" );
+        TQString def_plg = prefix + TQString::fromLatin1( "/plugins" );
+        TQString def_dat = prefix;
 
-        TQString bin = TQFile::decodeName( steps[1].value );
-        TQString doc = TQFile::decodeName( steps[2].value );
-        TQString hdr = TQFile::decodeName( steps[3].value );
-        TQString lib = TQFile::decodeName( steps[4].value );
-        TQString plg = TQFile::decodeName( steps[5].value );
-        TQString dat = TQFile::decodeName( steps[6].value );
+        TQString bin = TQFile::decodeName( steps[1].value );
+        TQString doc = TQFile::decodeName( steps[2].value );
+        TQString hdr = TQFile::decodeName( steps[3].value );
+        TQString lib = TQFile::decodeName( steps[4].value );
+        TQString plg = TQFile::decodeName( steps[5].value );
+        TQString dat = TQFile::decodeName( steps[6].value );
 
         autoSet->setChecked( def_bin == bin &&
                              def_doc == doc &&
@@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ void Distributor::checkLibData()
     }
 }
 
-void Distributor::checkInstallationPrefix( const TQString &prefix )
+void Distributor::checkInstallationPrefix( const TQString &prefix )
 {
     if ( autoSet->isChecked() ) {
         binPath->setText( prefix + TQString::fromLatin1( "/bin" ) );
@@ -315,8 +315,8 @@ void Distributor::checkInstallationPrefix( const TQString
 
 void Distributor::browseInstallationPrefix()
 {
-    TQString prefix =
-        TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName( TQString::null, TQString::null, this );
+    TQString prefix =
+        TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName( TQString::null, TQString::null, this );
     prefixPath->setText( prefix );
 }
 
@@ -330,53 +330,53 @@ void Distributor::accept()
 {
     struct step {
         const char *key;
-        TQCString value;
+        TQCString value;
         bool done;
     } steps[7];
 
     steps[0].key = "qt_nstpath=";
-    steps[0].value = TQFile::encodeName( prefixPath->text() );
+    steps[0].value = TQFile::encodeName( prefixPath->text() );
     steps[0].done = FALSE;
 
     steps[1].key = "qt_binpath=";
-    steps[1].value = TQFile::encodeName( binPath->text() );
+    steps[1].value = TQFile::encodeName( binPath->text() );
     steps[1].done = FALSE;
 
     steps[2].key = "qt_docpath=";
-    steps[2].value = TQFile::encodeName( docPath->text() );
+    steps[2].value = TQFile::encodeName( docPath->text() );
     steps[2].done = FALSE;
 
     steps[3].key = "qt_hdrpath=";
-    steps[3].value = TQFile::encodeName( hdrPath->text() );
+    steps[3].value = TQFile::encodeName( hdrPath->text() );
     steps[3].done = FALSE;
 
     steps[4].key = "qt_libpath=";
-    steps[4].value = TQFile::encodeName( libPath->text() );
+    steps[4].value = TQFile::encodeName( libPath->text() );
     steps[4].done = FALSE;
 
     steps[5].key = "qt_plgpath=";
-    steps[5].value = TQFile::encodeName( plgPath->text() );
+    steps[5].value = TQFile::encodeName( plgPath->text() );
     steps[5].done = FALSE;
 
     steps[6].key = "qt_datpath=";
-    steps[6].value = TQFile::encodeName( datPath->text() );
+    steps[6].value = TQFile::encodeName( datPath->text() );
     steps[6].done = FALSE;
 
     uint completed = 0;
     uint total_steps = sizeof(steps) / sizeof(step);
 
-    TQFile file( libFilename->text() );
-    if ( file.open( IO_ReadWrite ) ) {
-        TQApplication::setOverrideCursor( WaitCursor );
+    TQFile file( libFilename->text() );
+    if ( file.open( IO_ReadWrite ) ) {
+        TQApplication::setOverrideCursor( WaitCursor );
 
         // instead of reading in the entire file, do the search in chunks
         char data[60000];
         ulong offset = 0;
 
-        while ( ! file.atEnd() && completed < total_steps ) {
-            TQApplication::eventLoop()->processEvents( TQEventLoop::ExcludeUserInput );
+        while ( ! file.atEnd() && completed < total_steps ) {
+            TQApplication::eventLoop()->processEvents( TQEventLoop::ExcludeUserInput );
 
-            ulong len = file.readBlock( data, sizeof(data) );
+            ulong len = file.readBlock( data, sizeof(data) );
             if ( len < 267 ) {
                 // not enough room to make any modifications... stop
                 break;
@@ -394,13 +394,13 @@ void Distributor::accept()
                         // path... move the file pointer back to just
                         // before the pattern and continue
                         offset += where - 11;
-                        file.at( offset );
-                        len = file.readBlock( data, sizeof(data) );
+                        file.at( offset );
+                        len = file.readBlock( data, sizeof(data) );
                         --x; // retry the current step
                         continue;
                     }
 
-                    qstrcpy( s, steps[x].value );
+                    qstrcpy( s, steps[x].value );
                     steps[x].done = TRUE;
 
                     ++completed;
@@ -410,22 +410,22 @@ void Distributor::accept()
             if ( completed != completed_save ) {
                 // something changed...  move file pointer back to
                 // where the data was read and write the new data
-                file.at( offset );
-                file.writeBlock( data, len );
+                file.at( offset );
+                file.writeBlock( data, len );
             }
 
             // move to the new read position
             offset += len - 11;
-            file.at( offset );
+            file.at( offset );
         }
 
-        file.close();
+        file.close();
 
-        TQApplication::restoreOverrideCursor();
+        TQApplication::restoreOverrideCursor();
     }
 
     if ( completed != total_steps ) {
-        TQMessageBox::information( this,
+        TQMessageBox::information( this,
                                   tr("TQt Distribution Wizard"),
                                   tr("<p><h3>Modifications failed.</h3></p>"
                                      "<p>Please make sure that you have permission "
@@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ void Distributor::accept()
         return;
     }
 
-    TQWizard::accept();
+    TQWizard::accept();
 }
 
    
 
diff --git a/doc/html/dnd.html b/doc/html/dnd.html
index 16512c0db..82f90aa51 100644
--- a/doc/html/dnd.html
+++ b/doc/html/dnd.html
@@ -59,10 +59,10 @@ mechanism.
 
 
     For drag and drop examples see (in increasing order of
 sophistication): qt/examples/iconview/simple_dd, qt/examples/dragdrop and qt/examples/fileiconview. See also the
-TQTextEdit widget source code.
+TQTextEdit widget source code.
 
     
     Dragging
 
    
-
     To start a drag, for example in a mouse motion event, create an object of the TQDragObject
+
     To start a drag, for example in a mouse motion event, create an object of the TQDragObject
 subclass appropriate for your media, such as TQTextDrag for text and
 TQImageDrag for images. Then call the drag() method. This is all you
 need for simple dragging of existing types.
@@ -70,8 +70,8 @@ need for simple dragging of existing types.
 
     void MyWidget::startDrag()
 {
-    TQDragObject *d = new TQTextDrag( myHighlightedText(), this );
-    d->dragCopy();
+    TQDragObject *d = new TQTextDrag( myHighlightedText(), this );
+    d->dragCopy();
     // do NOT delete d.
 }
 
    
@@ -86,19 +86,19 @@ references.
 
     
     Dropping
 
    
 
     To be able to receive media dropped on a widget, call
-setAcceptDrops(TRUE)
+setAcceptDrops(TRUE)
 for the widget (e.g. in its constructor), and override the
 event handler methods
-dragEnterEvent() and
-dropEvent().
+dragEnterEvent() and
+dropEvent().
 For more sophisticated applications overriding
-dragMoveEvent() and
-dragLeaveEvent() will also be
+dragMoveEvent() and
+dragLeaveEvent() will also be
 necessary.
 
     For example, to accept text and image drops:
 
     MyWidget::MyWidget(...) :
-    TQWidget(...)
+    TQWidget(...)
 {
     ...
     setAcceptDrops(TRUE);
@@ -114,8 +114,8 @@ void MyWidget::dragEnterEvent(TQDragEnterEvent* event)
 
 void MyWidget::dropEvent(TQDropEvent* event)
 {
-    TQImage image;
-    TQString text;
+    TQImage image;
+    TQString text;
 
     if ( TQImageDrag::decode(event, image) ) {
         insertImageAt(image, event->pos());
@@ -127,11 +127,11 @@ void MyWidget::dropEvent(TQDropEvent* event)
  
 
     
     The Clipboard
 
    
-
     The TQDragObject, TQDragEnterEvent, TQDragMoveEvent, and TQDropEvent
+
     The TQDragObject, TQDragEnterEvent, TQDragMoveEvent, and TQDropEvent
 classes are all subclasses of TQMimeSource: the class of objects which
 provide typed information. If you base your data transfers on
 TQDragObject, you not only get drag-and-drop, but you also get
-traditional cut-and-paste for free. The TQClipboard has two functions:
+traditional cut-and-paste for free. The TQClipboard has two functions:
 
         setData(TQMimeSource*)
     TQMimeSource* data()const
@@ -142,38 +142,38 @@ information on the clipboard:
 
     void MyWidget::copy()
 {
-    TQApplication::clipboard()->setData(
+    TQApplication::clipboard()->setData(
         new TQTextDrag(myHighlightedText()) );
 }
 
 void MyWidget::paste()
 {
-    TQString text;
-    if ( TQTextDrag::decode(TQApplication::clipboard()->data(), text) )
+    TQString text;
+    if ( TQTextDrag::decode(TQApplication::clipboard()->data(), text) )
         insertText( text );
 }
 
    
  
-You can even use TQDragObject subclasses as part of file IO. For
+You can even use TQDragObject subclasses as part of file IO. For
 example, if your application has a subclass of TQDragObject that
 encodes CAD designs in DXF format, your saving and loading code might
 be:
 
     void MyWidget::save()
 {
-    TQFile out(current_file_name);
-    if ( out.open(IO_WriteOnly) ) {
+    TQFile out(current_file_name);
+    if ( out.open(IO_WriteOnly) ) {
         MyCadDrag tmp(current_design);
-        out.writeBlock( tmp->encodedData( "image/x-dxf" ) );
+        out.writeBlock( tmp->encodedData( "image/x-dxf" ) );
     }
 }
 
 void MyWidget::load()
 {
-    TQFile in(current_file_name);
-    if ( in.open(IO_ReadOnly) ) {
-        if ( !MyCadDrag::decode(in.readAll(), current_design) ) {
-            TQMessageBox::warning( this, "Format error",
+    TQFile in(current_file_name);
+    if ( in.open(IO_ReadOnly) ) {
+        if ( !MyCadDrag::decode(in.readAll(), current_design) ) {
+            TQMessageBox::warning( this, "Format error",
                 tr("The file \"%1\" is not in any supported format")
                     .arg(current_file_name)
             );
@@ -182,9 +182,9 @@ void MyWidget::load()
 }
 
    
  
-Note how the TQDragObject subclass is called "MyCadDrag", not
+Note how the TQDragObject subclass is called "MyCadDrag", not
 "MyDxfDrag": because in the future you might extend it to provide
-DXF, DWG, SVF, WMF, or even TQPicture data to other applications.
+DXF, DWG, SVF, WMF, or even TQPicture data to other applications.
 
     
     Drag and Drop Actions
 
    
 
     In the simpler cases, the target of a drag-and-drop receives a copy of
@@ -218,7 +218,7 @@ provides for "image/*", where * is any image format that
 "text/uri-list", a standard format for transferring a list of
 filenames (or URLs).
 
     To implement drag-and-drop of some type of information for which there
-is no available TQDragObject subclass, the first and most important
+is no available TQDragObject subclass, the first and most important
 step is to look for existing formats that are appropriate: the
 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) provides a hierarchical
 list of MIME media types at the Information Sciences Institute
@@ -259,14 +259,14 @@ the drag start point and the drop event might look like this:
 
     
     void MyEditor::startDrag()
 {
-    TQDragObject *d = new TQTextDrag(myHighlightedText(), this);
-    if ( d->drag() && d->target() != this )
+    TQDragObject *d = new TQTextDrag(myHighlightedText(), this);
+    if ( d->drag() && d->target() != this )
         cutMyHighlightedText();
 }
 
 void MyEditor::dropEvent(TQDropEvent* event)
 {
-    TQString text;
+    TQString text;
 
     if ( TQTextDrag::decode(event, text) ) {
         if ( event->source() == this && event->action() == TQDropEvent::Move ) {
@@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ void MyEditor::dropEvent(TQDropEvent* event)
 
     Some widgets are more specific than just a "yes" or "no" response when
 data is dragged onto them. For example, a CAD program might only
 accept drops of text onto text objects in the view. In these cases,
-the dragMoveEvent() is used and
+the dragMoveEvent() is used and
 an area is given for which the drag is accepted or ignored:
 
     void MyWidget::dragMoveEvent(TQDragMoveEvent* event)
@@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ void MyWidget::dragMoveEvent(TQDragMoveEvent* event)
     if ( TQTextDrag::canDecode(event) ) {
         MyCadItem* item = findMyItemAt(event->pos());
         if ( item ) {
-            TQRect r = item->areaRelativeToMeClippedByAnythingInTheWay();
+            TQRect r = item->areaRelativeToMeClippedByAnythingInTheWay();
             if ( item->type() == MyTextType )
                 event->accept( r );
             else
@@ -319,12 +319,12 @@ void MyWidget::dragMoveEvent(TQDragMoveEvent* event)
 feedback as the drag progresses, to start timers, to scroll the
 window, or whatever is appropriate (don't forget to stop the scrolling
 and timers in a dragLeaveEvent() though).
-
     The TQApplication object (available as the qApp global) also
+
     The TQApplication object (available as the qApp global) also
 provides some drag and drop related functions:
-TQApplication::setStartDragTime(),
-TQApplication::setStartDragDistance(), and their corresponding
-getters, TQApplication::startDragTime() and
-TQApplication::startDragDistance().
+TQApplication::setStartDragTime(),
+TQApplication::setStartDragDistance(), and their corresponding
+getters, TQApplication::startDragTime() and
+TQApplication::startDragDistance().
 
     
     Inter-operating with Other Applications
 
    
 
     On X11, the public 
 TQDragEnterEventEvent which is sent to the widget when a drag and drop first drags onto the widget
 TQDragLeaveEventEvent which is sent to the widget when a drag and drop leaves the widget
 TQDragMoveEventEvent which is sent while a drag and drop is in progress
-TQDragObjectEncapsulates MIME-based data transfer
+TQDragObjectEncapsulates MIME-based data transfer
 TQDropEventEvent which is sent when a drag and drop is completed
 TQIconDragSupports drag and drop operations within a TQIconView
 TQIconDragItemEncapsulates a drag item
diff --git a/doc/html/drawdemo-example.html b/doc/html/drawdemo-example.html
index d6dabc878..98fae3588 100644
--- a/doc/html/drawdemo-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/drawdemo-example.html
@@ -47,13 +47,13 @@ You can easily add you own drawing functions.
 **
 *****************************************************************************/
 
-#include <qwidget.h>
-#include <qpainter.h>
-#include <qprinter.h>
-#include <qpushbutton.h>
-#include <qradiobutton.h>
-#include <qbuttongroup.h>
-#include <qapplication.h>
+#include <ntqwidget.h>
+#include <ntqpainter.h>
+#include <ntqprinter.h>
+#include <ntqpushbutton.h>
+#include <ntqradiobutton.h>
+#include <ntqbuttongroup.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
 #include <math.h>
 
 //
@@ -66,29 +66,29 @@ You can easily add you own drawing functions.
 // The coordinate system x=(0..500), y=(0..500) spans the paint device.
 //
 
-void drawColorWheel( TQPainter *p )
+void drawColorWheel( TQPainter *p )
 {
-    TQFont f( "times", 18, TQFont::Bold );
-    p->setFont( f );
-    p->setPen( TQt::black );
-    p->setWindow( 0, 0, 500, 500 );             // defines coordinate system
+    TQFont f( "times", 18, TQFont::Bold );
+    p->setFont( f );
+    p->setPen( TQt::black );
+    p->setWindow( 0, 0, 500, 500 );             // defines coordinate system
 
     for ( int i=0; i<36; i++ ) {                // draws 36 rotated rectangles
 
-        TQWMatrix matrix;
-        matrix.translate( 250.0F, 250.0F );     // move to center
-        matrix.shear( 0.0F, 0.3F );             // twist it
-        matrix.rotate( (float)i*10 );           // rotate 0,10,20,.. degrees
-        p->setWorldMatrix( matrix );            // use this world matrix
+        TQWMatrix matrix;
+        matrix.translate( 250.0F, 250.0F );     // move to center
+        matrix.shear( 0.0F, 0.3F );             // twist it
+        matrix.rotate( (float)i*10 );           // rotate 0,10,20,.. degrees
+        p->setWorldMatrix( matrix );            // use this world matrix
 
-        TQColor c;
-        c.setHsv( i*10, 255, 255 );             // rainbow effect
-        p->setBrush( c );                       // solid fill with color c
-        p->drawRect( 70, -10, 80, 10 );         // draw the rectangle
+        TQColor c;
+        c.setHsv( i*10, 255, 255 );             // rainbow effect
+        p->setBrush( c );                       // solid fill with color c
+        p->drawRect( 70, -10, 80, 10 );         // draw the rectangle
 
-        TQString n;
-        n.sprintf( "H=%d", i*10 );
-        p->drawText( 80+70+5, 0, n );           // draw the hue number
+        TQString n;
+        n.sprintf( "H=%d", i*10 );
+        p->drawText( 80+70+5, 0, n );           // draw the hue number
     }
 }
 
@@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ void drawColorWheel( TQPainter *p )
 // This function draws a few lines of text using different fonts.
 //
 
-void drawFonts( TQPainter *p )
+void drawFonts( TQPainter *p )
 {
     static const char *fonts[] = { "Helvetica", "Courier", "Times", 0 };
     static int   sizes[] = { 10, 12, 18, 24, 36, 0 };
@@ -106,12 +106,12 @@ void drawFonts( TQPainter *p )
     while ( fonts[f] ) {
         int s = 0;
         while ( sizes[s] ) {
-            TQFont font( fonts[f], sizes[s] );
-            p->setFont( font );
-            TQFontMetrics fm = p->fontMetrics();
-            y += fm.ascent();
-            p->drawText( 10, y, "Quartz Glyph Job Vex'd Cwm Finks" );
-            y += fm.descent();
+            TQFont font( fonts[f], sizes[s] );
+            p->setFont( font );
+            TQFontMetrics fm = p->fontMetrics();
+            y += fm.ascent();
+            p->drawText( 10, y, "Quartz Glyph Job Vex'd Cwm Finks" );
+            y += fm.descent();
             s++;
         }
         f++;
@@ -123,22 +123,22 @@ void drawFonts( TQPainter *p )
 // This function draws some shapes
 //
 
-void drawShapes( TQPainter *p )
+void drawShapes( TQPainter *p )
 {
-    TQBrush b1( TQt::blue );
-    TQBrush b2( TQt::green, TQt::Dense6Pattern );          // green 12% fill
-    TQBrush b3( TQt::NoBrush );                           // void brush
-    TQBrush b4( TQt::CrossPattern );                      // black cross pattern
-
-    p->setPen( TQt::red );
-    p->setBrush( b1 );
-    p->drawRect( 10, 10, 200, 100 );
-    p->setBrush( b2 );
-    p->drawRoundRect( 10, 150, 200, 100, 20, 20 );
-    p->setBrush( b3 );
-    p->drawEllipse( 250, 10, 200, 100 );
-    p->setBrush( b4 );
-    p->drawPie( 250, 150, 200, 100, 45*16, 90*16 );
+    TQBrush b1( TQt::blue );
+    TQBrush b2( TQt::green, TQt::Dense6Pattern );          // green 12% fill
+    TQBrush b3( TQt::NoBrush );                           // void brush
+    TQBrush b4( TQt::CrossPattern );                      // black cross pattern
+
+    p->setPen( TQt::red );
+    p->setBrush( b1 );
+    p->drawRect( 10, 10, 200, 100 );
+    p->setBrush( b2 );
+    p->drawRoundRect( 10, 150, 200, 100, 20, 20 );
+    p->setBrush( b3 );
+    p->drawEllipse( 250, 10, 200, 100 );
+    p->setBrush( b4 );
+    p->drawPie( 250, 150, 200, 100, 45*16, 90*16 );
 }
 
 
@@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ DrawThing ourDrawFunctions[] = {
 
 
 
-class DrawView : public TQWidget
+class DrawView : public TQWidget
 {
     Q_OBJECT
 public:
@@ -178,13 +178,13 @@ public slots:
     void   updateIt( int );
     void   printIt();
 protected:
-    void   drawIt( TQPainter * );
+    void   drawIt( TQPainter * );
     void   paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * );
     void   resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * );
 private:
-    TQPrinter     *printer;
-    TQButtonGroup *bgroup;
-    TQPushButton  *print;
+    TQPrinter     *printer;
+    TQButtonGroup *bgroup;
+    TQPushButton  *print;
     int           drawindex;
     int           maxindex;
 };
@@ -196,27 +196,27 @@ private:
 
 DrawView::DrawView()
 {
-    setCaption( "TQt Draw Demo Application" );
-    setBackgroundMode(PaletteBase);
+    setCaption( "TQt Draw Demo Application" );
+    setBackgroundMode(PaletteBase);
 
     // Create a button group to contain all buttons
-    bgroup = new TQButtonGroup( this );
-    bgroup->resize( 200, 200 );
-    connect( bgroup, SIGNAL(clicked(int)), SLOT(updateIt(int)) );
+    bgroup = new TQButtonGroup( this );
+    bgroup->resize( 200, 200 );
+    connect( bgroup, SIGNAL(clicked(int)), SLOT(updateIt(int)) );
 
     // Calculate the size for the radio buttons
     int maxwidth = 80;
     int maxheight = 10;
     int i;
     const char *n;
-    TQFontMetrics fm = bgroup->fontMetrics();
+    TQFontMetrics fm = bgroup->fontMetrics();
 
     // Find out the longest function description.
     // Here we make use of the last "0,0"-entry in the
     // ourDrawFunctions-array.
     for ( i=0; (n=ourDrawFunctions[i].name) != 0; i++ ) {
-        int w = fm.width( n );
-        maxwidth = TQMAX(w,maxwidth); // TQMAX is a macro defined in qglobal.h
+        int w = fm.width( n );
+        maxwidth = TQMAX(w,maxwidth); // TQMAX is a macro defined in ntqglobal.h
                                      // and returns the biggest of to values.
         // Due to its macro nature one should use it with care and with
         // constant parameters only.
@@ -225,13 +225,13 @@ private:
     maxwidth = maxwidth + 30;                   // allow 30 pixels for radiobuttons
 
     for ( i=0; (n=ourDrawFunctions[i].name) != 0; i++ ) {
-        TQRadioButton *rb = new TQRadioButton( n, bgroup );
-        rb->setGeometry( 10, i*30+10, maxwidth, 30 );
+        TQRadioButton *rb = new TQRadioButton( n, bgroup );
+        rb->setGeometry( 10, i*30+10, maxwidth, 30 );
 
         maxheight += 30;
 
         if ( i == 0 )
-            rb->setChecked( TRUE );
+            rb->setChecked( TRUE );
     }
 
     maxheight += 10;                            // maxheight is now 10 pixels upper margin
@@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ private:
     maxwidth += 20;                             // add some margin, this results in the
                                                 // final width of bgroup
 
-    bgroup->resize( maxwidth, maxheight );      // resize bgroup to its final size
+    bgroup->resize( maxwidth, maxheight );      // resize bgroup to its final size
                                                 // when no printersupport is provided
 
 
@@ -253,20 +253,20 @@ private:
 
 #ifndef QT_NO_PRINTER
 
-    printer = new TQPrinter;
+    printer = new TQPrinter;
 
     // Create and setup the print button
-    print = new TQPushButton( "Print...", bgroup );
-    print->resize( 80, 30 );
-    print->move( maxwidth/2 - print->width()/2, maxindex*30+20 );
-    connect( print, SIGNAL(clicked()), SLOT(printIt()) );
+    print = new TQPushButton( "Print...", bgroup );
+    print->resize( 80, 30 );
+    print->move( maxwidth/2 - print->width()/2, maxindex*30+20 );
+    connect( print, SIGNAL(clicked()), SLOT(printIt()) );
 
     // Resize bgroup to its final size when printersupport is given.
-    bgroup->resize( maxwidth, print->y()+print->height()+10 );
+    bgroup->resize( maxwidth, print->y()+print->height()+10 );
 
 #endif
 
-    resize( 640,300 );
+    resize( 640,300 );
 }
 
 //
@@ -287,7 +287,7 @@ void DrawView::updateIt( int index )
 {
     if ( index < maxindex ) {
         drawindex = index;
-        update();
+        update();
     }
 }
 
@@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ void DrawView::updateIt( int index )
 // Calls the drawing function as specified by the radio buttons.
 //
 
-void DrawView::drawIt( TQPainter *p )
+void DrawView::drawIt( TQPainter *p )
 {
     (*ourDrawFunctions[drawindex].f)(p);
 }
@@ -306,9 +306,9 @@ void DrawView::drawIt( TQPainter
 
 void DrawView::printIt()
 {
-    if ( printer->setup( this ) ) {
-        TQPainter paint;
-        if( !paint.begin( printer ) )
+    if ( printer->setup( this ) ) {
+        TQPainter paint;
+        if( !paint.begin( printer ) )
             return;
         drawIt( &paint );
     }
@@ -318,9 +318,9 @@ void DrawView::printIt()
 // Called when the widget needs to be updated.
 //
 
-void DrawView::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
+void DrawView::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
 {
-    TQPainter paint( this );
+    TQPainter paint( this );
     drawIt( &paint );
 }
 
@@ -329,9 +329,9 @@ void DrawView::paintEvent( void DrawView::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * )
+void DrawView::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * )
 {
-    bgroup->move( width()-bgroup->width(), 0 );
+    bgroup->move( width()-bgroup->width(), 0 );
 }
 
 
@@ -343,12 +343,12 @@ void DrawView::paintEvent( TQApplication app( argc, argv );
+    TQApplication app( argc, argv );
     DrawView   draw;
-    app.setMainWidget( &draw );
-    draw.setCaption("TQt Example - Drawdemo");
-    draw.show();
-    return app.exec();
+    app.setMainWidget( &draw );
+    draw.setCaption("TQt Example - Drawdemo");
+    draw.show();
+    return app.exec();
 }
 
    
 
diff --git a/doc/html/drawlines-example.html b/doc/html/drawlines-example.html
index eb804914e..2f96f4562 100644
--- a/doc/html/drawlines-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/drawlines-example.html
@@ -49,9 +49,9 @@ release the button, and watch the lines get drawn.
 **
 *****************************************************************************/
 
-#include <qwidget.h>
-#include <qpainter.h>
-#include <qapplication.h>
+#include <ntqwidget.h>
+#include <ntqpainter.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
 #include <stdlib.h>
 
 
@@ -63,10 +63,10 @@ const int MAXCOLORS = 40;
 // ConnectWidget - draws connected lines
 //
 
-class ConnectWidget : public TQWidget
+class ConnectWidget : public TQWidget
 {
 public:
-    ConnectWidget( TQWidget *parent=0, const char *name=0 );
+    ConnectWidget( TQWidget *parent=0, const char *name=0 );
    ~ConnectWidget();
 protected:
     void        paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * );
@@ -74,8 +74,8 @@ protected:
     void        mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent *);
     void        mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *);
 private:
-    TQPoint     *points;                         // point array
-    TQColor     *colors;                         // color array
+    TQPoint     *points;                         // point array
+    TQColor     *colors;                         // color array
     int         count;                          // count = number of points
     bool        down;                           // TRUE if mouse down
 };
@@ -85,14 +85,14 @@ private:
 // Constructs a ConnectWidget.
 //
 
-ConnectWidget::ConnectWidget( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name, WStaticContents )
+ConnectWidget::ConnectWidget( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+    : TQWidget( parent, name, WStaticContents )
 {
-    setBackgroundColor( white );                // white background
+    setBackgroundColor( white );                // white background
     count = 0;
     down = FALSE;
-    points = new TQPoint[MAXPOINTS];
-    colors = new TQColor[MAXCOLORS];
+    points = new TQPoint[MAXPOINTS];
+    colors = new TQColor[MAXCOLORS];
     for ( int i=0; i<MAXCOLORS; i++ )           // init color array
         colors[i] = TQColor( rand()&255, rand()&255, rand()&255 );
 }
@@ -108,13 +108,13 @@ ConnectWidget::~ConnectWidget()
 // Handles paint events for the connect widget.
 //
 
-void ConnectWidget::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
+void ConnectWidget::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
 {
-    TQPainter paint( this );
+    TQPainter paint( this );
     for ( int i=0; i<count-1; i++ ) {           // connect all points
         for ( int j=i+1; j<count; j++ ) {
-            paint.setPen( colors[rand()%MAXCOLORS] ); // set random pen color
-            paint.drawLine( points[i], points[j] ); // draw line
+            paint.setPen( colors[rand()%MAXCOLORS] ); // set random pen color
+            paint.drawLine( points[i], points[j] ); // draw line
         }
     }
 }
@@ -124,11 +124,11 @@ ConnectWidget::~ConnectWidget()
 // Handles mouse press events for the connect widget.
 //
 
-void ConnectWidget::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent * )
+void ConnectWidget::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent * )
 {
     down = TRUE;
     count = 0;                                  // start recording points
-    erase();                                    // erase widget contents
+    erase();                                    // erase widget contents
 }
 
 
@@ -136,10 +136,10 @@ ConnectWidget::~ConnectWidget()
 // Handles mouse release events for the connect widget.
 //
 
-void ConnectWidget::mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * )
+void ConnectWidget::mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * )
 {
     down = FALSE;                               // done recording points
-    update();                                   // draw the lines
+    update();                                   // draw the lines
 }
 
 
@@ -147,12 +147,12 @@ ConnectWidget::~ConnectWidget()
 // Handles mouse move events for the connect widget.
 //
 
-void ConnectWidget::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
+void ConnectWidget::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
 {
     if ( down && count < MAXPOINTS ) {
-        TQPainter paint( this );
+        TQPainter paint( this );
         points[count++] = e->pos();             // add point
-        paint.drawPoint( e->pos() );            // plot point
+        paint.drawPoint( e->pos() );            // plot point
     }
 }
 
@@ -163,14 +163,14 @@ ConnectWidget::~ConnectWidget()
 
 int main( int argc, char **argv )
 {
-    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
+    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
     ConnectWidget connect;
 #ifndef QT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA   // for TQt/Embedded minimal build
-    connect.setCaption( "TQt Example - Draw lines");
+    connect.setCaption( "TQt Example - Draw lines");
 #endif
-    a.setMainWidget( &connect );
-    connect.show();
-    return a.exec();
+    a.setMainWidget( &connect );
+    connect.show();
+    return a.exec();
 }
 
    
 
diff --git a/doc/html/editions.html b/doc/html/editions.html
index 0bb7292ba..f863ec378 100644
--- a/doc/html/editions.html
+++ b/doc/html/editions.html
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
 
     The TQt Professional and Enterprise Editions are the commercial
-versions of TQt.
+versions of TQt.
 
     TQt Open Source Edition is the non-commercial version of TQt. It is freely
 available for download.
 
     You may write commercial/proprietary/non-free software only if you
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Well-formed XML parser with SAX interface and DOM Level 1.
 X
 
 
-ActiveTQt extension
    
+ActiveTQt extension
    
 Support for building and hosting ActiveX controls on Windows.
 
    
 
diff --git a/doc/html/emb-accel.html b/doc/html/emb-accel.html
index de50e83c5..9ae80d35c 100644
--- a/doc/html/emb-accel.html
+++ b/doc/html/emb-accel.html
@@ -74,8 +74,8 @@ access the accelerator at once and possibly locking up the machine.
 It's possible that your source data is not on the graphics card so you
 should check in such cases and fall back to software if necessary.
 Note that TQGfxRaster supports some features not directly supported
-by TQPainter (for instance, alpha channels in 32-bit data and
-stretchBlt's). These features are used by TQt; stretchBlt speeds up TQPixmap::xForm() and drawPixmap() into a transformed TQPainter,
+by TQPainter (for instance, alpha channels in 32-bit data and
+stretchBlt's). These features are used by TQt; stretchBlt speeds up TQPixmap::xForm() and drawPixmap() into a transformed TQPainter,
 alpha channel acceleration is supported for 32-bit pixmaps.
 
     
  • 
 If you wish, define an accelerated descendant of TQScreenCursor. restoreUnder(), saveUnder(), drawCursor() and draw() should
diff --git a/doc/html/emb-charinput.html b/doc/html/emb-charinput.html
index a653dcd80..6380d5a51 100644
--- a/doc/html/emb-charinput.html
+++ b/doc/html/emb-charinput.html
@@ -40,10 +40,10 @@ following fields:
  unicode
 Unicode value
  keycode
-TQt keycode value as defined in qnamespace.h
+TQt keycode value as defined in ntqnamespace.h
  modifier
-A bitfield consisting of some of TQt::ShiftButton,
-TQt::ControlButton, and TQt::AltButton.
+A bitfield consisting of some of TQt::ShiftButton,
+TQt::ControlButton, and TQt::AltButton.
  is_press
 TRUE if this is a key press, FALSE if it is a key release.
  is_auto_repeat
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ specify characters with the pointer device.
 server would then just send the key events back to the input widget.
 One way to make sure that the input widget never takes focus is to set
 the WStyle_Customize and WStyle_Tool widget flags in
-the TQWidget constructor.
+the TQWidget constructor.
 
     The TQtopia
 environment contains various input widgets such as
 Handwriting Recognition and Virtual Keyboard.
diff --git a/doc/html/emb-classes.html b/doc/html/emb-classes.html
index 57ef51800..b6dae6467 100644
--- a/doc/html/emb-classes.html
+++ b/doc/html/emb-classes.html
@@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ would only want to do so if the hardware supports a hardware cursor).
 
     
     TQGfx » RasterBase » Raster » accelerated driver » TQGfxVfb » TQGfxTransformedRaster
 
    
 
     This class encapsulates drawing operations, a little like a low-level
-TQPainter. TQGfxRaster and its descendants are specifically intended
+TQPainter. TQGfxRaster and its descendants are specifically intended
 for drawing into a raw framebuffer. They can take an offset for drawing
 operations and a clipping region in order to support drawing into windows.
 You will need to subclass the TQGfxRaster template in order to implement
diff --git a/doc/html/emb-features.html b/doc/html/emb-features.html
index 7da1a42a4..622c93654 100644
--- a/doc/html/emb-features.html
+++ b/doc/html/emb-features.html
@@ -33,16 +33,16 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
 
-
     By modifying the configured qconfig.h file from src/tools, you
+
     By modifying the configured ntqconfig.h file from src/tools, you
 can define a subset of the full TQt functionality that you wish to
 be available in your installation. The -qconfig option to
 configure is used to select the configuration.
 
     Note that such modification is only supported on TQt/Embedded
 platforms, where reducing the size of TQt is
 important and the application set is often fixed.
-
     The qconfig.h definition file simply defines macros to disable
+
     The ntqconfig.h definition file simply defines macros to disable
 features. Some features are dependent on other features and these
-dependencies are expressed in qfeatures.h.
+dependencies are expressed in ntqfeatures.h.
 
     The available options are:
 
     
    
 
     Macro Disables Set automatically by
@@ -64,13 +64,13 @@ dependencies are expressed in qfeatures.h.
  
 
      Animation
 
     QT_NO_ASYNC_IO
-Asynchronous I/O (TQAsyncIO)
+Asynchronous I/O (TQAsyncIO)
  
 
     QT_NO_ASYNC_IMAGE_IO
 Asynchronous Image I/O and GIF image support (TQImageDecoder, ...)
  
 
     QT_NO_MOVIE
-Animation support (TQMovie)
+Animation support (TQMovie)
 QT_NO_ASYNC_IO, QT_NO_ASYNC_IMAGE_IO
 
      Fonts
 
     QT_NO_TRUETYPE
@@ -96,17 +96,17 @@ for all Unicode characters.
 and tagging typed data (eg. text, images, colors) (TQMimeSource)
  
 
     QT_NO_RICHTEXT
-HTML-like text (TQStyleSheet, TQLabel)
+HTML-like text (TQStyleSheet, TQLabel)
 QT_NO_MIME
 
     QT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-Drag-and-drop data between applications (TQDragObject)
+Drag-and-drop data between applications (TQDragObject)
 QT_NO_MIME
 
     QT_NO_CLIPBOARD
-Cut-and-paste data between applications (TQClipboard)
+Cut-and-paste data between applications (TQClipboard)
 QT_NO_MIME
 
      Sound
 
     QT_NO_SOUND
-Playing audio files (TQSound)
+Playing audio files (TQSound)
  
 
      Scripting
 
     QT_NO_PROPERTIES
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ Incompatible with TQWS_DEPTH_8GRAYSCALE.
 
      Networking
 
     QT_NO_NETWORKPROTOCOL
 Abstract multi-protocol data retrieval,
-with local file retrieval included (TQNetworkProtocol)
+with local file retrieval included (TQNetworkProtocol)
  
 
     QT_NO_NETWORKPROTOCOL_FTP
 FTP-protocol data retrieval.
@@ -153,96 +153,96 @@ with local file retrieval included (TQNetworkPro
 QT_NO_NETWORKPROTOCOL
 
      Painting/drawing
 
     QT_NO_COLORNAMES
-Color names such as "red", used by some TQColor constructors
-and by some HTML documents (TQColor, TQStyleSheet)
+Color names such as "red", used by some TQColor constructors
+and by some HTML documents (TQColor, TQStyleSheet)
  
 
     QT_NO_TRANSFORMATIONS
 Used by a number of classes in TQt. With this, rotation and
 scaling are possible. Without it you can only do coordinate
-translation (TQWMatrix)
+translation (TQWMatrix)
  
 
     QT_NO_PSPRINTER
 PostScript printer support.
  
 
     QT_NO_PRINTER
-Printer support (TQPrinter)
+Printer support (TQPrinter)
 QT_NO_PSPRINTER (Unix only)
 
     QT_NO_PICTURE
-Save TQt drawing commands to a files (TQPicture)
+Save TQt drawing commands to a files (TQPicture)
  
 
      Widgets
 
     QT_NO_WIDGETS
-Disabling this disables all widgets except TQWidget.
+Disabling this disables all widgets except TQWidget.
  
 
     QT_NO_TEXTVIEW
-HTML document viewing (TQTextView)
+HTML document viewing (TQTextView)
 QT_NO_WIDGETS, QT_NO_RICHTEXT
 
     QT_NO_TEXTBROWSER
-HTML document browsing (TQTextBrowser)
+HTML document browsing (TQTextBrowser)
 QT_NO_TEXTVIEW
 
     QT_NO_ICONVIEW
-Labelled icons (TQIconView)
+Labelled icons (TQIconView)
 QT_NO_WIDGETS, QT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
 
     QT_NO_LISTVIEW
-Lists of information (TQListView)
+Lists of information (TQListView)
 QT_NO_WIDGETS
 
     QT_NO_CANVAS
-Object canvas (TQCanvas)
+Object canvas (TQCanvas)
 QT_NO_WIDGETS
 
     QT_NO_DIAL
-Value control (TQDial)
+Value control (TQDial)
 QT_NO_WIDGETS
 
     QT_NO_WORKSPACE
-MDI (Multiple Document Interface) (TQWorkspace)
+MDI (Multiple Document Interface) (TQWorkspace)
 QT_NO_WIDGETS
 
     QT_NO_LCDNUMBER
-LCD-like number display (TQLCDNumber)
+LCD-like number display (TQLCDNumber)
 QT_NO_WIDGETS
 
      GUI Styles
 
     QT_NO_STYLE_WINDOWS
-Microsoft Windows style (TQWindowsStyle)
+Microsoft Windows style (TQWindowsStyle)
 QT_NO_WIDGETS
 
     QT_NO_STYLE_MOTIF
-OSF Motif style (TQMotifStyle)
+OSF Motif style (TQMotifStyle)
 QT_NO_WIDGETS
 
     QT_NO_STYLE_CDE
-Open Group CDE style (TQCDEStyle)
+Open Group CDE style (TQCDEStyle)
 QT_NO_STYLE_MOTIF
 
     QT_NO_STYLE_AQUA
 MacOS X style (TQAquaStyle)
 
     QT_NO_STYLE_PLATINUM
-MacOS 9 style (TQPlatinumStyle)
+MacOS 9 style (TQPlatinumStyle)
 QT_NO_WIDGETS
 
     QT_NO_STYLE_SGI
-SGI style (TQSGIStyle)
+SGI style (TQSGIStyle)
 QT_NO_STYLE_MOTIF
 
      Dialogs
 
     QT_NO_DIALOGS
-Disabling this disables all common dialogs TQWidget.
+Disabling this disables all common dialogs TQWidget.
 QT_NO_WIDGETS
 
     QT_NO_FILEDIALOG
-The file selection dialog (TQFileDialog)
+The file selection dialog (TQFileDialog)
 QT_NO_DIALOGS, QT_NO_NETWORKPROTOCOL, QT_NO_LISTVIEW
 
     QT_NO_FONTDIALOG
-The font selection dialog (TQFontDialog)
+The font selection dialog (TQFontDialog)
 QT_NO_DIALOGS, QT_NO_FONTDATABASE
 
     QT_NO_COLORDIALOG
-The color selection dialog (TQColorDialog)
+The color selection dialog (TQColorDialog)
 QT_NO_DIALOGS
 
     QT_NO_INPUTDIALOG
-Text input dialog (TQInputDialog)
+Text input dialog (TQInputDialog)
 QT_NO_DIALOGS
 
     QT_NO_MESSAGEBOX
-Message/prompting dialog (TQMessageBox)
+Message/prompting dialog (TQMessageBox)
 QT_NO_DIALOGS
 
     QT_NO_PROGRESSDIALOG
-Long-computation progress dialog (TQProgressDialog)
+Long-computation progress dialog (TQProgressDialog)
 QT_NO_DIALOGS
 
     QT_NO_TABDIALOG
-Tabbed-pages dialog (TQTabDialog)
+Tabbed-pages dialog (TQTabDialog)
 QT_NO_DIALOGS
 
     QT_NO_WIZARD
-Multi-step dialog (TQWizard)
+Multi-step dialog (TQWizard)
 QT_NO_DIALOGS
 
    
 
     
diff --git a/doc/html/emb-install.html b/doc/html/emb-install.html
index a2bd029c0..006f607bc 100644
--- a/doc/html/emb-install.html
+++ b/doc/html/emb-install.html
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ as a starting point.
 a little-endian machine (e.g. x86) for a big-endian processor
 (e.g. PowerPC) will use the host's endianness instead of the
 target's. Workaround: after running configure, and before running
-make, edit $QTDIR/include/qconfig.h and change the definition of
+make, edit $QTDIR/include/ntqconfig.h and change the definition of
 Q_BYTE_ORDER.
 
     
  •  Enable framebuffer support.
 
     You may need to recompile your kernel to enable the framebuffer.
diff --git a/doc/html/emb-performance.html b/doc/html/emb-performance.html
index 3311941cf..7906bba6d 100644
--- a/doc/html/emb-performance.html
+++ b/doc/html/emb-performance.html
@@ -47,8 +47,8 @@ requirements at the cost of other factors.
 
 
     The following guidelines will improve CPU performance:
 
      
-
    •  Create dialogs and widgets once, then TQWidget::hide() and
-TQWidget::show() them, rather than creating them and deleting
+
    •  Create dialogs and widgets once, then TQWidget::hide() and
+TQWidget::show() them, rather than creating them and deleting
 them every time they are needed.
 This will use a little more memory, but will be much faster.
 Try to create them the first time "lazily" to avoid slow
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ you run configure.
 
       To build your application suite as an all-in-one application, design each
 application as a stand-alone widget or set of widgets, with only minimal
 code in the main() function. Then, write an application that gives
-some way to switch between the applications (e.g. a TQIconView).
+some way to switch between the applications (e.g. a TQIconView).
 TQtopia is an example of this. It can be built either as a set of
 dynamically linked executables, or as a single static application.
 
       Note that you should generally still link dynamically against the
diff --git a/doc/html/emb-porting.html b/doc/html/emb-porting.html
index a48584eeb..05cc4b673 100644
--- a/doc/html/emb-porting.html
+++ b/doc/html/emb-porting.html
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
       Existing TQt applications should require no porting provided there is no
 platform dependent code. Platform dependent code includes system calls,
 calls to the underlying window system (Windows or X11), and TQt platform
-specific methods such as TQApplication::x11EventFilter().
+specific methods such as TQApplication::x11EventFilter().
 
       For cases where it is necessary to use platform dependent code there are
 macros defined that can be used to enable/disable code for each platform
 using #ifdef directives:
diff --git a/doc/html/emb-qvfb.html b/doc/html/emb-qvfb.html
index a89e14dc7..5b5c2eb22 100644
--- a/doc/html/emb-qvfb.html
+++ b/doc/html/emb-qvfb.html
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ a desktop machine, without switching between consoles and X11.
 
    •  Compile qvfb as a normal TQt/X11 application and run it. Do not
 compile it as a TQt/Embedded application.
 
    •  Start a TQt/Embedded master application (i.e., construct
-TQApplication with the TQApplication::GuiServer flag or use the -qws command line parameter). You can specify to the server that
+TQApplication with the TQApplication::GuiServer flag or use the -qws command line parameter). You can specify to the server that
 you wish to use the virtual framebuffer driver, e.g.:
 
           masterapp -qws -display TQVFb:0
diff --git a/doc/html/emb-running.html b/doc/html/emb-running.html
index e1d887eaf..d89e0e2e9 100644
--- a/doc/html/emb-running.html
+++ b/doc/html/emb-running.html
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ or to be a master application itself. The master application is
 primarily responsible for managing top-level window regions, and
 pointer and keyboard input.
 
       Any TQt/Embedded application can be a master application by
-constructing the TQApplication object with the
+constructing the TQApplication object with the
 TQApplication::GuiServer type, or by being run with the -qws
 command line option.
 
       This document assumes you have the Linux framebuffer configured correctly
diff --git a/doc/html/environment.html b/doc/html/environment.html
index 8e058bb0e..4805996dc 100644
--- a/doc/html/environment.html
+++ b/doc/html/environment.html
@@ -36,21 +36,21 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 event handling, access to system settings, internationalization, etc.
 
       
 
      
-
      TQClipboardAccess to the window system clipboard
-
      TQDesktopWidgetAccess to screen information on multi-head systems
-
      TQEventThe base class of all event classes. Event objects contain event parameters
-
      TQFontDatabaseInformation about the fonts available in the underlying window system
+
      TQClipboardAccess to the window system clipboard
+
      TQDesktopWidgetAccess to screen information on multi-head systems
+
      TQEventThe base class of all event classes. Event objects contain event parameters
+
      TQFontDatabaseInformation about the fonts available in the underlying window system
 
      TQMimeSourceFactoryExtensible provider of mime-typed data
-
      TQMutexAccess serialization between threads
+
      TQMutexAccess serialization between threads
 
      TQMutexLockerSimplifies locking and unlocking TQMutexes
-
      TQPixmapCacheApplication-global cache for pixmaps
-
      TQSemaphoreRobust integer semaphore
-
      TQSessionManagerAccess to the session manager
-
      TQThreadPlatform-independent threads
-
      TQThreadStoragePer-thread data storage
-
      TQTranslatorInternationalization support for text output
+
      TQPixmapCacheApplication-global cache for pixmaps
+
      TQSemaphoreRobust integer semaphore
+
      TQSessionManagerAccess to the session manager
+
      TQThreadPlatform-independent threads
+
      TQThreadStoragePer-thread data storage
+
      TQTranslatorInternationalization support for text output
 
      TQTranslatorMessageTranslator message and its properties
-
      TQWaitConditionAllows waiting/waking for conditions between threads
+
      TQWaitConditionAllows waiting/waking for conditions between threads
 
      
 
 
      
diff --git a/doc/html/events.html b/doc/html/events.html
index 9b9d71e52..c173994bd 100644
--- a/doc/html/events.html
+++ b/doc/html/events.html
@@ -45,8 +45,8 @@ and Signals and Slots.
 TQDragLeaveEventEvent which is sent to the widget when a drag and drop leaves the widget
 TQDragMoveEventEvent which is sent while a drag and drop is in progress
 TQDropEventEvent which is sent when a drag and drop is completed
-TQEventThe base class of all event classes. Event objects contain event parameters
-TQEventLoopManages the event queue
+TQEventThe base class of all event classes. Event objects contain event parameters
+TQEventLoopManages the event queue
 TQFocusEventEvent parameters for widget focus events
 TQHideEventEvent which is sent after a widget is hidden
 TQIconDragEventSignals that a main icon drag has begun
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ and Signals and Slots.
 TQResizeEventEvent parameters for resize events
 TQShowEventEvent which is sent when a widget is shown
 TQTabletEventParameters that describe a Tablet event
-TQTimerTimer signals and single-shot timers
+TQTimerTimer signals and single-shot timers
 TQTimerEventParameters that describe a timer event
 TQWheelEventParameters that describe a wheel event
 
diff --git a/doc/html/eventsandfilters.html b/doc/html/eventsandfilters.html
index 9b3480656..b4e0729e1 100644
--- a/doc/html/eventsandfilters.html
+++ b/doc/html/eventsandfilters.html
@@ -33,12 +33,12 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
 
-
       In TQt, an event is an object that inherits TQEvent. Events are
-delivered to objects that inherit TQObject through calling TQObject::event(). Event delivery means that an event has occurred, the
-TQEvent indicates precisely what, and the TQObject needs to respond. Most
-events are specific to TQWidget and its subclasses, but there are
+
       In TQt, an event is an object that inherits TQEvent. Events are
+delivered to objects that inherit TQObject through calling TQObject::event(). Event delivery means that an event has occurred, the
+TQEvent indicates precisely what, and the TQObject needs to respond. Most
+events are specific to TQWidget and its subclasses, but there are
 important events that aren't related to graphics, for example, socket
-activation, which is the event used by TQSocketNotifier for its
+activation, which is the event used by TQSocketNotifier for its
 work.
 
       Some events come from the window system, e.g. TQMouseEvent, some
 from other sources, e.g. TQTimerEvent, and some come from the
@@ -47,17 +47,17 @@ events in exactly the same ways as TQt's own event loop does.
 
       Most events types have special classes, most commonly TQResizeEvent,
 TQPaintEvent, TQMouseEvent, TQKeyEvent and TQCloseEvent.
 There are many others, perhaps forty or so, but most are rather odd.
-
       Each class subclasses TQEvent and adds event-specific functions; see,
+
       Each class subclasses TQEvent and adds event-specific functions; see,
 for example, TQResizeEvent. In the case of TQResizeEvent, TQResizeEvent::size() and TQResizeEvent::oldSize() are added.
 
       Some classes support more than one event type. TQMouseEvent
 supports mouse moves, presses, shift-presses, drags, clicks,
 right-presses, etc.
 
       Since programs need to react in varied and complex ways, TQt's
 event delivery mechanisms are flexible. The documentation for
-TQApplication::notify() concisely tells the whole story, here we
+TQApplication::notify() concisely tells the whole story, here we
 will explain enough for 99% of applications.
 
       The normal way for an event to be delivered is by calling a virtual
-function. For example, TQPaintEvent is delivered by calling TQWidget::paintEvent(). This virtual function is responsible for
+function. For example, TQPaintEvent is delivered by calling TQWidget::paintEvent(). This virtual function is responsible for
 reacting appropriately, normally by repainting the widget. If you
 do not perform all the necessary work in your implementation of the
 virtual function, you may need to call the base class's
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ implementation; for example:
     {
         // my implementation
 
-        TQTable::contentsMouseMoveEvent( me ); // hand it on
+        TQTable::contentsMouseMoveEvent( me ); // hand it on
     }
 
      
  
@@ -77,23 +77,23 @@ class's functionality, then you implement what you want and then call
 the base class.
 
       Occasionally there isn't such an event-specific function, or the
 event-specific function isn't sufficient. The most common example is
-tab key presses. Normally, those are interpreted by TQWidget to move
+tab key presses. Normally, those are interpreted by TQWidget to move
 the keyboard focus, but a few widgets need the tab key for themselves.
-
       These objects can reimplement TQObject::event(), the general event
+
       These objects can reimplement TQObject::event(), the general event
 handler, and either do their event handling before or after the usual
 handling, or replace it completely. A very unusual widget that both
 interprets tab and has an application-specific custom event might
 contain:
 
       
      -  bool MyClass:event( TQEvent *evt ) {
-      if ( evt->type() == TQEvent::KeyPress ) {
+  bool MyClass:event( TQEvent *evt ) {
+      if ( evt->type() == TQEvent::KeyPress ) {
           TQKeyEvent *ke = (TQKeyEvent *)evt;
           if ( ke->key() == Key_Tab ) {
               // special tab handling here
               ke->accept();
               return TRUE;
           }
-      } else if ( evt->type() >= TQEvent::User ) {
+      } else if ( evt->type() >= TQEvent::User ) {
           TQCustomEvent *ce = (TQCustomEvent*) evt;
           // custom event handling here
           return TRUE;
@@ -103,25 +103,25 @@ contain:
 
      
  
 
       More commonly, an object needs to look at another's events. TQt
-supports this using TQObject::installEventFilter() (and the
+supports this using TQObject::installEventFilter() (and the
 corresponding remove). For example, dialogs commonly want to filter
 key presses for some widgets, e.g. to modify Return-key handling.
 
       An event filter gets to process events before the target object does.
-The filter's TQObject::eventFilter() implementation is called, and
+The filter's TQObject::eventFilter() implementation is called, and
 can accept or reject the filter, and allow or deny further processing
 of the event. If all the event filters allow further processing of an
 event, the event is sent to the target object itself. If one of them
 stops processing, the target and any later event filters don't get to
 see the event at all.
 
       It's also possible to filter all events for the entire application,
-by installing an event filter on TQApplication. This is what TQToolTip does in order to see all the mouse and keyboard activity.
+by installing an event filter on TQApplication. This is what TQToolTip does in order to see all the mouse and keyboard activity.
 This is very powerful, but it also slows down event delivery of every
 single event in the entire application, so it's best avoided.
 
       The global event filters are called before the object-specific
 filters.
 
       Finally, many applications want to create and send their own events.
 
       Creating an event of a built-in type is very simple: create an object
-of the relevant type, and then call TQApplication::sendEvent() or TQApplication::postEvent().
+of the relevant type, and then call TQApplication::sendEvent() or TQApplication::postEvent().
 
       sendEvent() processes the event immediately - when sendEvent()
 returns, (the event filters and) the object have already processed the
 event. For many event classes there is a function called isAccepted()
@@ -130,13 +130,13 @@ handler that was called.
 
       postEvent() posts the event on a queue for later dispatch. The next
 time TQt's main event loop runs, it dispatches all posted events, with
 some optimization. For example, if there are several resize events,
-they are are compacted into one. The same applies to paint events: TQWidget::update() calls postEvent(), which minimizes flickering and
+they are are compacted into one. The same applies to paint events: TQWidget::update() calls postEvent(), which minimizes flickering and
 increases speed by avoiding multiple repaints.
 
       postEvent() is also often used during object initialization, since the
 posted event will typically be dispatched very soon after the
 initialization of the object is complete.
 
       To create events of a custom type, you need to define an event number,
-which must be greater than TQEvent::User, and probably you also need
+which must be greater than TQEvent::User, and probably you also need
 to subclass TQCustomEvent in order to pass characteristics about
 your custom event. See the documentation to TQCustomEvent for
 details.
diff --git a/doc/html/extension-dialog-example.html b/doc/html/extension-dialog-example.html
index 281905abf..074b091ce 100644
--- a/doc/html/extension-dialog-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/extension-dialog-example.html
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
       
 
       This example demonstrates how to create an extension dialog.
 
       Essentially all that is necessary is to create a standard dialog
-and then create a TQWidget form to be used as the extension. See
+and then create a TQWidget form to be used as the extension. See
 the article in TQt
     Quarterly issue #3.
 
       
      
@@ -67,15 +67,15 @@ DBFILE          = extension.db
 *****************************************************************************/
 #include "dialogform.h"
 #include "extension.h"
-#include <qapplication.h>
-#include <qcheckbox.h>
-#include <qlineedit.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
+#include <ntqcheckbox.h>
+#include <ntqlineedit.h>
 
 void MainForm::init()
 {
     sessions = FALSE;
     logging = FALSE;
-    log_filename = TQString::null;
+    log_filename = TQString::null;
     log_errors = TRUE;
     log_actions = TRUE;
 }
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ void MainForm::optionsDlg()
 
 void MainForm::quit()
 {
-    TQApplication::exit( 0 );
+    TQApplication::exit( 0 );
 }
 
    • 
 
@@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ void DialogForm::toggleDetails()
 {
     extensionShown = !extensionShown;
     showExtension( extensionShown );
-    TQString text = tr( "&Details " );
+    TQString text = tr( "&Details " );
     text += TQString( extensionShown ? "<<<" : ">>>" );
     detailsPushButton->setText( text );
 }
@@ -143,16 +143,16 @@ void DialogForm::toggleDetails()
 
 
     
    
 
     Main:
-
     
    #include <qapplication.h>
+
     
    #include <ntqapplication.h>
 #include "mainform.h"
 
 int main( int argc, char ** argv )
 {
-    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
+    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
     MainForm *w = new MainForm;
     w->show();
-    a.connect( &a, SIGNAL( lastWindowClosed() ), w, SLOT( quit() ) );
-    return a.exec();
+    a.connect( &a, SIGNAL( lastWindowClosed() ), w, SLOT( quit() ) );
+    return a.exec();
 }
 
    
 
diff --git a/doc/html/faq.html b/doc/html/faq.html
index f05c22630..645582761 100644
--- a/doc/html/faq.html
+++ b/doc/html/faq.html
@@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ TQt as a competitive advantage.
 
 
     There are many, e.g. Adobe Photoshop Album from Abobe
 Corporation and the KDE desktop. A partial list can be found at
-http://www.trolltech.com/products/qt/apps-using-qt.html
+http://www.trolltech.com/products/qt/apps-using-ntqt.html
 
     
    
 
     Questions about Developing Applications with TQt
 
    
diff --git a/doc/html/fileiconview-example.html b/doc/html/fileiconview-example.html
index 72eb6b69e..78a1a849c 100644
--- a/doc/html/fileiconview-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/fileiconview-example.html
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
    
 
     
 This example implements a simple and not fully functional file manager using
-a widget derived from TQIconView to display the current directory.
+a widget derived from TQIconView to display the current directory.
 To display the directory tree the
 widget written in the dirview example is
 used.
@@ -54,12 +54,12 @@ used.
 #define TQTFILEICONVIEW_H
 
 
-#include <qiconset.h>
-#include <qstring.h>
-#include <qfileinfo.h>
-#include <qdir.h>
-#include <qtimer.h>
-#include <qiconview.h>
+#include <ntqiconset.h>
+#include <ntqstring.h>
+#include <ntqfileinfo.h>
+#include <ntqdir.h>
+#include <ntqtimer.h>
+#include <ntqiconview.h>
 
 class TQtFileIconView;
 class TQDragObject;
@@ -76,15 +76,15 @@ class TQtFileIconDrag : public TQIconDrag
     Q_OBJECT
 
 public:
-    TQtFileIconDrag( TQWidget * dragSource, const char* name = 0 );
+    TQtFileIconDrag( TQWidget * dragSource, const char* name = 0 );
 
     const char* format( int i ) const;
     TQByteArray encodedData( const char* mime ) const;
     static bool canDecode( TQMimeSource* e );
-    void append( const TQIconDragItem &item, const TQRect &pr, const TQRect &tr, const TQString &url );
+    void append( const TQIconDragItem &item, const TQRect &pr, const TQRect &tr, const TQString &url );
 
 private:
-    TQStringList urls;
+    TQStringList urls;
 
 };
 
@@ -94,12 +94,12 @@ private:
  *
  *****************************************************************************/
 class TQtFileIconViewItem;
-class TQtFileIconView : public TQIconView
+class TQtFileIconView : public TQIconView
 {
     Q_OBJECT
 
 public:
-    TQtFileIconView( const TQString &dir, TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
+    TQtFileIconView( const TQString &dir, TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
 
     enum ViewMode { Large, Small };
 
@@ -110,13 +110,13 @@ public:
     }
 
 public slots:
-    void setDirectory( const TQString &dir );
-    void setDirectory( const TQDir &dir );
+    void setDirectory( const TQString &dir );
+    void setDirectory( const TQDir &dir );
     void newDirectory();
-    TQDir currentDir();
+    TQDir currentDir();
 
 signals:
-    void directoryChanged( const TQString & );
+    void directoryChanged( const TQString & );
     void startReadDir( int dirs );
     void readNextDir();
     void readDirDone();
@@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ signals:
 
 protected slots:
     void itemDoubleClicked( TQIconViewItem *i );
-    void slotDropped( TQDropEvent *e, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem> & );
+    void slotDropped( TQDropEvent *e, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem> & );
 
     void viewLarge();
     void viewSmall();
@@ -140,22 +140,22 @@ protected slots:
     void sortAscending();
     void sortDescending();
     void arrangeItemsInGrid() {
-        TQIconView::arrangeItemsInGrid( TRUE );
+        TQIconView::arrangeItemsInGrid( TRUE );
     }
 
     void slotRightPressed( TQIconViewItem *item );
     void openFolder();
 
 protected:
-    void readDir( const TQDir &dir );
+    void readDir( const TQDir &dir );
     virtual TQDragObject *dragObject();
 
     virtual void keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e );
 
-    TQDir viewDir;
+    TQDir viewDir;
     int newFolderNum;
-    TQSize sz;
-    TQPixmap pix;
+    TQSize sz;
+    TQPixmap pix;
     ViewMode vm;
     TQtFileIconViewItem *openItem;
 
@@ -184,27 +184,27 @@ public:
 
     ItemType type() const
     { return itemType; }
-    TQString filename() const { return itemFileName; }
+    TQString filename() const { return itemFileName; }
 
     virtual bool acceptDrop( const TQMimeSource *e ) const;
 
-    virtual void setText( const TQString &text );
+    virtual void setText( const TQString &text );
     virtual TQPixmap *pixmap() const;
 
     virtual void dragEntered();
     virtual void dragLeft();
 
     void viewModeChanged( TQtFileIconView::ViewMode m );
-    void paintItem( TQPainter *p, const TQColorGroup &cg );
+    void paintItem( TQPainter *p, const TQColorGroup &cg );
 
 protected:
-    virtual void dropped( TQDropEvent *e, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem> & );
+    virtual void dropped( TQDropEvent *e, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem> & );
 
-    TQString itemFileName;
-    TQFileInfo *itemFileInfo;
+    TQString itemFileName;
+    TQFileInfo *itemFileInfo;
     ItemType itemType;
     bool checkSetText;
-    TQTimer timer;
+    TQTimer timer;
     TQtFileIconView::ViewMode vm;
 
 };
@@ -226,18 +226,18 @@ protected:
 *****************************************************************************/
 
 #include "qfileiconview.h"
-#include <qpainter.h>
-#include <qstringlist.h>
-#include <qpixmap.h>
-#include <qmime.h>
-#include <qstrlist.h>
-#include <qdragobject.h>
-#include <qmessagebox.h>
-#include <qevent.h>
-#include <qpopupmenu.h>
-#include <qcursor.h>
-#include <qapplication.h>
-#include <qwmatrix.h>
+#include <ntqpainter.h>
+#include <ntqstringlist.h>
+#include <ntqpixmap.h>
+#include <ntqmime.h>
+#include <ntqstrlist.h>
+#include <ntqdragobject.h>
+#include <ntqmessagebox.h>
+#include <ntqevent.h>
+#include <ntqpopupmenu.h>
+#include <ntqcursor.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
+#include <ntqwmatrix.h>
 
 #include <stdlib.h>
 
@@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ static void cleanup()
  *
  *****************************************************************************/
 
-TQtFileIconDrag::TQtFileIconDrag( TQWidget * dragSource, const char* name )
+TQtFileIconDrag::TQtFileIconDrag( TQWidget * dragSource, const char* name )
     : TQIconDrag( dragSource, name )
 {
 }
@@ -490,9 +490,9 @@ static void cleanup()
     if ( TQString( mime ) == "application/x-qiconlist" ) {
         a = TQIconDrag::encodedData( mime );
     } else if ( TQString( mime ) == "text/uri-list" ) {
-        TQString s = urls.join( "\r\n" );
-        a.resize( s.length() );
-        memcpy( a.data(), s.latin1(), s.length() );
+        TQString s = urls.join( "\r\n" );
+        a.resize( s.length() );
+        memcpy( a.data(), s.latin1(), s.length() );
     }
     return a;
 }
@@ -503,15 +503,15 @@ static void cleanup()
         e->provides( "text/uri-list" );
 }
 
-void TQtFileIconDrag::append( const TQIconDragItem &item, const TQRect &pr,
-                             const TQRect &tr, const TQString &url )
+void TQtFileIconDrag::append( const TQIconDragItem &item, const TQRect &pr,
+                             const TQRect &tr, const TQString &url )
 {
     TQIconDrag::append( item, pr, tr );
-    TQString ourUrl = url;
+    TQString ourUrl = url;
 #ifdef Q_WS_WIN
-    if (ourUrl.length() > 2 && ourUrl[1] != ':') {
-        TQDir dir(ourUrl);
-        ourUrl = dir.absPath();
+    if (ourUrl.length() > 2 && ourUrl[1] != ':') {
+        TQDir dir(ourUrl);
+        ourUrl = dir.absPath();
     }
 #endif
     urls << TQUriDrag::localFileToUri(ourUrl);
@@ -524,36 +524,36 @@ static void cleanup()
  *****************************************************************************/
 
 TQtFileIconViewItem::TQtFileIconViewItem( TQtFileIconView *parent, TQFileInfo *fi )
-    : TQIconViewItem( parent, fi->fileName() ), itemFileName( fi->filePath() ),
+    : TQIconViewItem( parent, fi->fileName() ), itemFileName( fi->filePath() ),
       itemFileInfo( fi ), checkSetText( FALSE )
 {
     vm = TQtFileIconView::Large;
 
-    if ( itemFileInfo->isDir() )
+    if ( itemFileInfo->isDir() )
         itemType = Dir;
-    else if ( itemFileInfo->isFile() )
+    else if ( itemFileInfo->isFile() )
         itemType = File;
-    if ( itemFileInfo->isSymLink() )
+    if ( itemFileInfo->isSymLink() )
         itemType = Link;
 
     viewModeChanged( ( (TQtFileIconView*)iconView() )->viewMode() );
 
-    if ( itemFileInfo->fileName() == "." ||
-         itemFileInfo->fileName() == ".." )
+    if ( itemFileInfo->fileName() == "." ||
+         itemFileInfo->fileName() == ".." )
         setRenameEnabled( FALSE );
 
     checkSetText = TRUE;
 
-    TQObject::connect( &timer, SIGNAL( timeout() ),
+    TQObject::connect( &timer, SIGNAL( timeout() ),
                       iconView(), SLOT( openFolder() ) );
 }
 
-void TQtFileIconViewItem::paintItem( TQPainter *p, const TQColorGroup &cg )
+void TQtFileIconViewItem::paintItem( TQPainter *p, const TQColorGroup &cg )
 {
-    if ( itemFileInfo->isSymLink() ) {
-        TQFont f( p->font() );
-        f.setItalic( TRUE );
-        p->setFont( f );
+    if ( itemFileInfo->isSymLink() ) {
+        TQFont f( p->font() );
+        f.setItalic( TRUE );
+        p->setFont( f );
     }
 
     TQIconViewItem::paintItem( p, cg );
@@ -605,16 +605,16 @@ TQtFileIconViewItem::~TQtFileIconViewItem()
     delete itemFileInfo;
 }
 
-void TQtFileIconViewItem::setText( const TQString &text )
+void TQtFileIconViewItem::setText( const TQString &text )
 {
     if ( checkSetText ) {
-        if ( text == "." || text == "." || text.isEmpty() )
+        if ( text == "." || text == "." || text.isEmpty() )
             return;
-        TQDir dir( itemFileInfo->dir() );
-        if ( dir.rename( itemFileInfo->fileName(), text ) ) {
-            itemFileName = itemFileInfo->dirPath( TRUE ) + "/" + text;
+        TQDir dir( itemFileInfo->dir() );
+        if ( dir.rename( itemFileInfo->fileName(), text ) ) {
+            itemFileName = itemFileInfo->dirPath( TRUE ) + "/" + text;
             delete itemFileInfo;
-            itemFileInfo = new TQFileInfo( itemFileName );
+            itemFileInfo = new TQFileInfo( itemFileName );
             TQIconViewItem::setText( text );
         }
     } else {
@@ -631,7 +631,7 @@ TQtFileIconViewItem::~TQtFileIconViewItem()
     return FALSE;
 }
 
-void TQtFileIconViewItem::dropped( TQDropEvent *e, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem> & )
+void TQtFileIconViewItem::dropped( TQDropEvent *e, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem> & )
 {
     timer.stop();
 
@@ -640,23 +640,23 @@ TQtFileIconViewItem::~TQtFileIconViewItem()
         return;
     }
 
-    TQStringList lst;
+    TQStringList lst;
     TQUriDrag::decodeLocalFiles( e, lst );
 
-    TQString str;
+    TQString str;
     if ( e->action() == TQDropEvent::Copy )
         str = "Copy\n\n";
     else
         str = "Move\n\n";
-    for ( uint i = 0; i < lst.count(); ++i )
+    for ( uint i = 0; i < lst.count(); ++i )
         str += TQString( "   %1\n" ).arg( lst[i] );
     str += TQString( "\n"
         "To\n\n"
         "       %1" ).arg( filename() );
 
-    TQMessageBox::information( iconView(), e->action() == TQDropEvent::Copy ? "Copy" : "Move" , str, "Not Implemented" );
+    TQMessageBox::information( iconView(), e->action() == TQDropEvent::Copy ? "Copy" : "Move" , str, "Not Implemented" );
     if ( e->action() == TQDropEvent::Move )
-        TQMessageBox::information( iconView(), "Remove" , str, "Not Implemented" );
+        TQMessageBox::information( iconView(), "Remove" , str, "Not Implemented" );
     e->acceptAction();
 }
 
@@ -685,51 +685,51 @@ TQtFileIconViewItem::~TQtFileIconViewItem()
  *
  *****************************************************************************/
 
-TQtFileIconView::TQtFileIconView( const TQString &dir, TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQIconView( parent, name ), viewDir( dir ), newFolderNum( 0 )
+TQtFileIconView::TQtFileIconView( const TQString &dir, TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+    : TQIconView( parent, name ), viewDir( dir ), newFolderNum( 0 )
 {
     if ( !iconFolderLockedLarge ) {
-        qAddPostRoutine( cleanup );
-        TQWMatrix m;
-        m.scale( 0.6, 0.6 );
-        TQPixmap iconpix( folder_locked_icon );
-        iconFolderLockedLarge = new TQPixmap( folder_locked_icon );
-        iconpix = iconpix.xForm( m );
-        iconFolderLockedSmall = new TQPixmap( iconpix );
+        qAddPostRoutine( cleanup );
+        TQWMatrix m;
+        m.scale( 0.6, 0.6 );
+        TQPixmap iconpix( folder_locked_icon );
+        iconFolderLockedLarge = new TQPixmap( folder_locked_icon );
+        iconpix = iconpix.xForm( m );
+        iconFolderLockedSmall = new TQPixmap( iconpix );
         iconpix = TQPixmap( folder_icon );
-        iconFolderLarge = new TQPixmap( folder_icon );
-        iconpix = iconpix.xForm( m );
-        iconFolderSmall = new TQPixmap( iconpix );
+        iconFolderLarge = new TQPixmap( folder_icon );
+        iconpix = iconpix.xForm( m );
+        iconFolderSmall = new TQPixmap( iconpix );
         iconpix = TQPixmap( file_icon );
-        iconFileLarge = new TQPixmap( file_icon );
-        iconpix = iconpix.xForm( m );
-        iconFileSmall = new TQPixmap( iconpix );
+        iconFileLarge = new TQPixmap( file_icon );
+        iconpix = iconpix.xForm( m );
+        iconFileSmall = new TQPixmap( iconpix );
         iconpix = TQPixmap( link_icon );
-        iconLinkLarge = new TQPixmap( link_icon );
-        iconpix = iconpix.xForm( m );
-        iconLinkSmall = new TQPixmap( iconpix );
+        iconLinkLarge = new TQPixmap( link_icon );
+        iconpix = iconpix.xForm( m );
+        iconLinkSmall = new TQPixmap( iconpix );
     }
 
     vm = Large;
 
-    setGridX( 75 );
-    setResizeMode( Adjust );
-    setWordWrapIconText( FALSE );
+    setGridX( 75 );
+    setResizeMode( Adjust );
+    setWordWrapIconText( FALSE );
 
-    connect( this, SIGNAL( doubleClicked( TQIconViewItem * ) ),
+    connect( this, SIGNAL( doubleClicked( TQIconViewItem * ) ),
              this, SLOT( itemDoubleClicked( TQIconViewItem * ) ) );
-    connect( this, SIGNAL( returnPressed( TQIconViewItem * ) ),
+    connect( this, SIGNAL( returnPressed( TQIconViewItem * ) ),
              this, SLOT( itemDoubleClicked( TQIconViewItem * ) ) );
-    connect( this, SIGNAL( dropped( TQDropEvent *, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem> & ) ),
-             this, SLOT( slotDropped( TQDropEvent *, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem> & ) ) );
-    connect( this, SIGNAL( contextMenuRequested( TQIconViewItem *, const TQPoint & ) ),
+    connect( this, SIGNAL( dropped( TQDropEvent *, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem> & ) ),
+             this, SLOT( slotDropped( TQDropEvent *, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem> & ) ) );
+    connect( this, SIGNAL( contextMenuRequested( TQIconViewItem *, const TQPoint & ) ),
              this, SLOT( slotRightPressed( TQIconViewItem * ) ) );
 
-    setHScrollBarMode( AlwaysOff );
-    setVScrollBarMode( Auto );
+    setHScrollBarMode( AlwaysOff );
+    setVScrollBarMode( Auto );
 
-    setAutoArrange( TRUE );
-    setSorting( TRUE );
+    setAutoArrange( TRUE );
+    setSorting( TRUE );
     openItem = 0;
 }
 
@@ -746,13 +746,13 @@ void TQtFileIconView::openFolder()
     setDirectory( openItem->itemFileName );
 }
 
-void TQtFileIconView::setDirectory( const TQString &dir )
+void TQtFileIconView::setDirectory( const TQString &dir )
 {
     viewDir = TQDir( dir );
     readDir( viewDir );
 }
 
-void TQtFileIconView::setDirectory( const TQDir &dir )
+void TQtFileIconView::setDirectory( const TQDir &dir )
 {
     viewDir = dir;
     readDir( viewDir );
@@ -760,22 +760,22 @@ void TQtFileIconView::setDirectory( const TQDir &dir
 
 void TQtFileIconView::newDirectory()
 {
-    setAutoArrange( FALSE );
-    selectAll( FALSE );
+    setAutoArrange( FALSE );
+    selectAll( FALSE );
     if ( viewDir.mkdir( TQString( "New Folder %1" ).arg( ++newFolderNum ) ) ) {
-        TQFileInfo *fi = new TQFileInfo( viewDir, TQString( "New Folder %1" ).arg( newFolderNum ) );
-        TQtFileIconViewItem *item = new TQtFileIconViewItem( this, new TQFileInfo( *fi ) );
-        item->setKey( TQString( "000000%1" ).arg( fi->fileName() ) );
+        TQFileInfo *fi = new TQFileInfo( viewDir, TQString( "New Folder %1" ).arg( newFolderNum ) );
+        TQtFileIconViewItem *item = new TQtFileIconViewItem( this, new TQFileInfo( *fi ) );
+        item->setKey( TQString( "000000%1" ).arg( fi->fileName() ) );
         delete fi;
-        repaintContents( contentsX(), contentsY(), contentsWidth(), contentsHeight(), FALSE );
-        ensureItemVisible( item );
+        repaintContents( contentsX(), contentsY(), contentsWidth(), contentsHeight(), FALSE );
+        ensureItemVisible( item );
         item->setSelected( TRUE, TRUE );
-        setCurrentItem( item );
-        repaintItem( item );
-        qApp->processEvents();
+        setCurrentItem( item );
+        repaintItem( item );
+        qApp->processEvents();
         item->rename();
     }
-    setAutoArrange( TRUE );
+    setAutoArrange( TRUE );
 }
 
 TQDir TQtFileIconView::currentDir()
@@ -783,21 +783,21 @@ TQDir TQtFileIconView::currentDir()
     return viewDir;
 }
 
-static bool isRoot( const TQString &s )
+static bool isRoot( const TQString &s )
 {
 #if defined(Q_OS_UNIX)
     if ( s == "/" )
         return TRUE;
 #elif defined(Q_OS_WIN32)
-    TQString p = s;
-    if ( p.length() == 3 &&
-         p.right( 2 ) == ":/" )
+    TQString p = s;
+    if ( p.length() == 3 &&
+         p.right( 2 ) == ":/" )
         return TRUE;
     if ( p[ 0 ] == '/' && p[ 1 ] == '/' ) {
-        int slashes = p.contains( '/' );
+        int slashes = p.contains( '/' );
         if ( slashes <= 3 )
             return TRUE;
-        if ( slashes == 4 && p[ (int)p.length() - 1 ] == '/' )
+        if ( slashes == 4 && p[ (int)p.length() - 1 ] == '/' )
             return TRUE;
     }
 #endif
@@ -805,39 +805,39 @@ static bool isRoot( const TQString &s )
     return FALSE;
 }
 
-void TQtFileIconView::readDir( const TQDir &dir )
+void TQtFileIconView::readDir( const TQDir &dir )
 {
-    if ( !dir.isReadable() )
+    if ( !dir.isReadable() )
         return;
 
-    if ( isRoot( dir.absPath() ) )
+    if ( isRoot( dir.absPath() ) )
         emit disableUp();
     else
         emit enableUp();
 
-    clear();
+    clear();
 
-    emit directoryChanged( dir.absPath() );
+    emit directoryChanged( dir.absPath() );
 
-    const TQFileInfoList *filist = dir.entryInfoList( TQDir::DefaultFilter, TQDir::DirsFirst | TQDir::Name );
+    const TQFileInfoList *filist = dir.entryInfoList( TQDir::DefaultFilter, TQDir::DirsFirst | TQDir::Name );
 
     emit startReadDir( filist->count() );
 
     TQFileInfoListIterator it( *filist );
-    TQFileInfo *fi;
+    TQFileInfo *fi;
     bool allowRename = FALSE, allowRenameSet = FALSE;
     while ( ( fi = it.current() ) != 0 ) {
         ++it;
-        if ( fi && fi->fileName() == ".." && ( fi->dirPath() == "/" || fi->dirPath().isEmpty() ) )
+        if ( fi && fi->fileName() == ".." && ( fi->dirPath() == "/" || fi->dirPath().isEmpty() ) )
             continue;
         emit readNextDir();
-        TQtFileIconViewItem *item = new TQtFileIconViewItem( this, new TQFileInfo( *fi ) );
-        if ( fi->isDir() )
-            item->setKey( TQString( "000000%1" ).arg( fi->fileName() ) );
+        TQtFileIconViewItem *item = new TQtFileIconViewItem( this, new TQFileInfo( *fi ) );
+        if ( fi->isDir() )
+            item->setKey( TQString( "000000%1" ).arg( fi->fileName() ) );
         else
-            item->setKey( fi->fileName() );
+            item->setKey( fi->fileName() );
         if ( !allowRenameSet ) {
-            if ( !TQFileInfo( fi->absFilePath() ).isWritable() ||
+            if ( !TQFileInfo( fi->absFilePath() ).isWritable() ||
                  item->text() == "." || item->text() == ".." )
                 allowRename = FALSE;
             else
@@ -850,7 +850,7 @@ void TQtFileIconView::readDir( const TQDi
         item->setRenameEnabled( allowRename );
     }
 
-    if ( !TQFileInfo( dir.absPath() ).isWritable() )
+    if ( !TQFileInfo( dir.absPath() ).isWritable() )
         emit disableMkdir();
     else
         emit enableMkdir();
@@ -872,26 +872,26 @@ void TQtFileIconView::itemDoubleClicked( TQDragObject *TQtFileIconView::dragObject()
+TQDragObject *TQtFileIconView::dragObject()
 {
     if ( !currentItem() )
         return 0;
 
-    TQPoint orig = viewportToContents( viewport()->mapFromGlobal( TQCursor::pos() ) );
-    TQtFileIconDrag *drag = new TQtFileIconDrag( viewport() );
-    drag->setPixmap( *currentItem()->pixmap(),
-                     TQPoint( currentItem()->pixmapRect().width() / 2, currentItem()->pixmapRect().height() / 2 ) );
-    for ( TQtFileIconViewItem *item = (TQtFileIconViewItem*)firstItem(); item;
+    TQPoint orig = viewportToContents( viewport()->mapFromGlobal( TQCursor::pos() ) );
+    TQtFileIconDrag *drag = new TQtFileIconDrag( viewport() );
+    drag->setPixmap( *currentItem()->pixmap(),
+                     TQPoint( currentItem()->pixmapRect().width() / 2, currentItem()->pixmapRect().height() / 2 ) );
+    for ( TQtFileIconViewItem *item = (TQtFileIconViewItem*)firstItem(); item;
           item = (TQtFileIconViewItem*)item->nextItem() ) {
         if ( item->isSelected() ) {
             TQIconDragItem id;
             id.setData( TQCString( item->filename() ) );
             drag->append( id,
-                          TQRect( item->pixmapRect( FALSE ).x() - orig.x(),
-                                 item->pixmapRect( FALSE ).y() - orig.y(),
+                          TQRect( item->pixmapRect( FALSE ).x() - orig.x(),
+                                 item->pixmapRect( FALSE ).y() - orig.y(),
                                  item->pixmapRect().width(), item->pixmapRect().height() ),
-                          TQRect( item->textRect( FALSE ).x() - orig.x(),
-                                 item->textRect( FALSE ).y() - orig.y(),
+                          TQRect( item->textRect( FALSE ).x() - orig.x(),
+                                 item->textRect( FALSE ).y() - orig.y(),
                                  item->textRect().width(), item->textRect().height() ),
                           TQString( item->filename() ) );
         }
@@ -900,16 +900,16 @@ void TQtFileIconView::itemDoubleClicked( void TQtFileIconView::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e )
+void TQtFileIconView::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e )
 {
     if ( e->key() == Key_N &&
          ( e->state() & ControlButton ) )
         newDirectory();
     else
-        TQIconView::keyPressEvent( e );
+        TQIconView::keyPressEvent( e );
 }
 
-void TQtFileIconView::slotDropped( TQDropEvent *e, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem> & )
+void TQtFileIconView::slotDropped( TQDropEvent *e, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem> & )
 {
     if ( openItem )
         openItem->timer.stop();
@@ -918,23 +918,23 @@ void TQtFileIconView::slotDropped( 
         return;
     }
 
-    TQStringList lst;
+    TQStringList lst;
     TQUriDrag::decodeLocalFiles( e, lst );
 
-    TQString str;
+    TQString str;
     if ( e->action() == TQDropEvent::Copy )
         str = "Copy\n\n";
     else
         str = "Move\n\n";
-    for ( uint i = 0; i < lst.count(); ++i )
-        str += TQString( "   %1\n" ).arg( TQDir::convertSeparators(lst[i]) );
+    for ( uint i = 0; i < lst.count(); ++i )
+        str += TQString( "   %1\n" ).arg( TQDir::convertSeparators(lst[i]) );
     str += TQString( "\n"
         "To\n\n"
         "       %1" ).arg( viewDir.absPath() );
 
-    TQMessageBox::information( this, e->action() == TQDropEvent::Copy ? "Copy" : "Move" , str, "Not Implemented" );
+    TQMessageBox::information( this, e->action() == TQDropEvent::Copy ? "Copy" : "Move" , str, "Not Implemented" );
     if ( e->action() == TQDropEvent::Move )
-        TQMessageBox::information( this, "Remove" , TQDir::convertSeparators(lst.join("\n")), "Not Implemented" );
+        TQMessageBox::information( this, "Remove" , TQDir::convertSeparators(lst.join("\n")), "Not Implemented" );
     e->acceptAction();
     openItem = 0;
 }
@@ -951,80 +951,80 @@ void TQtFileIconView::viewSmall()
 
 void TQtFileIconView::viewBottom()
 {
-    setItemTextPos( Bottom );
+    setItemTextPos( Bottom );
 }
 
 void TQtFileIconView::viewRight()
 {
-    setItemTextPos( Right );
+    setItemTextPos( Right );
 }
 
 void TQtFileIconView::flowEast()
 {
-    setHScrollBarMode( AlwaysOff );
-    setVScrollBarMode( Auto );
-    setArrangement( LeftToRight );
+    setHScrollBarMode( AlwaysOff );
+    setVScrollBarMode( Auto );
+    setArrangement( LeftToRight );
 }
 
 void TQtFileIconView::flowSouth()
 {
-    setVScrollBarMode( AlwaysOff );
-    setHScrollBarMode( Auto );
-    setArrangement( TopToBottom );
+    setVScrollBarMode( AlwaysOff );
+    setHScrollBarMode( Auto );
+    setArrangement( TopToBottom );
 }
 
 void TQtFileIconView::sortAscending()
 {
-    sort( TRUE );
+    sort( TRUE );
 }
 
 void TQtFileIconView::sortDescending()
 {
-    sort( FALSE );
+    sort( FALSE );
 }
 
 void TQtFileIconView::itemTextTruncate()
 {
-    setWordWrapIconText( FALSE );
+    setWordWrapIconText( FALSE );
 }
 
 void TQtFileIconView::itemTextWordWrap()
 {
-    setWordWrapIconText( TRUE );
+    setWordWrapIconText( TRUE );
 }
 
 void TQtFileIconView::slotRightPressed( TQIconViewItem *item )
 {
     if ( !item ) { // right pressed on viewport
-        TQPopupMenu menu( this );
-
-        menu.insertItem( "&Large view", this, SLOT( viewLarge() ) );
-        menu.insertItem( "&Small view", this, SLOT( viewSmall() ) );
-        menu.insertSeparator();
-        menu.insertItem( "Text at the &bottom", this, SLOT( viewBottom() ) );
-        menu.insertItem( "Text at the &right", this, SLOT( viewRight() ) );
-        menu.insertSeparator();
-        menu.insertItem( "Arrange l&eft to right", this, SLOT( flowEast() ) );
-        menu.insertItem( "Arrange t&op to bottom", this, SLOT( flowSouth() ) );
-        menu.insertSeparator();
-        menu.insertItem( "&Truncate item text", this, SLOT( itemTextTruncate() ) );
-        menu.insertItem( "&Wordwrap item text", this, SLOT( itemTextWordWrap() ) );
-        menu.insertSeparator();
-        menu.insertItem( "Arrange items in &grid", this, SLOT( arrangeItemsInGrid() ) );
-        menu.insertSeparator();
-        menu.insertItem( "Sort &ascending", this, SLOT( sortAscending() ) );
-        menu.insertItem( "Sort &descending", this, SLOT( sortDescending() ) );
-
-        menu.setMouseTracking( TRUE );
-        menu.exec( TQCursor::pos() );
+        TQPopupMenu menu( this );
+
+        menu.insertItem( "&Large view", this, SLOT( viewLarge() ) );
+        menu.insertItem( "&Small view", this, SLOT( viewSmall() ) );
+        menu.insertSeparator();
+        menu.insertItem( "Text at the &bottom", this, SLOT( viewBottom() ) );
+        menu.insertItem( "Text at the &right", this, SLOT( viewRight() ) );
+        menu.insertSeparator();
+        menu.insertItem( "Arrange l&eft to right", this, SLOT( flowEast() ) );
+        menu.insertItem( "Arrange t&op to bottom", this, SLOT( flowSouth() ) );
+        menu.insertSeparator();
+        menu.insertItem( "&Truncate item text", this, SLOT( itemTextTruncate() ) );
+        menu.insertItem( "&Wordwrap item text", this, SLOT( itemTextWordWrap() ) );
+        menu.insertSeparator();
+        menu.insertItem( "Arrange items in &grid", this, SLOT( arrangeItemsInGrid() ) );
+        menu.insertSeparator();
+        menu.insertItem( "Sort &ascending", this, SLOT( sortAscending() ) );
+        menu.insertItem( "Sort &descending", this, SLOT( sortDescending() ) );
+
+        menu.setMouseTracking( TRUE );
+        menu.exec( TQCursor::pos() );
     } else { // on item
-        TQPopupMenu menu( this );
+        TQPopupMenu menu( this );
 
-        int RENAME_ITEM = menu.insertItem( "Rename Item" );
-        int REMOVE_ITEM = menu.insertItem( "Remove Item" );
+        int RENAME_ITEM = menu.insertItem( "Rename Item" );
+        int REMOVE_ITEM = menu.insertItem( "Remove Item" );
 
-        menu.setMouseTracking( TRUE );
-        int id = menu.exec( TQCursor::pos() );
+        menu.setMouseTracking( TRUE );
+        int id = menu.exec( TQCursor::pos() );
 
         if ( id == -1 )
             return;
@@ -1033,7 +1033,7 @@ void TQtFileIconView::slotRightPressed( rename();
         } else if ( id == REMOVE_ITEM ) {
             delete item;
-            TQMessageBox::information( this, "Not implemented!", "Deleting files not implemented yet,\n"
+            TQMessageBox::information( this, "Not implemented!", "Deleting files not implemented yet,\n"
                                       "The item has only been removed from the view! " );
         }
     }
@@ -1045,11 +1045,11 @@ void TQtFileIconView::setViewMode( ViewMode m )
         return;
 
     vm = m;
-    TQtFileIconViewItem *item = (TQtFileIconViewItem*)firstItem();
+    TQtFileIconViewItem *item = (TQtFileIconViewItem*)firstItem();
     for ( ; item; item = (TQtFileIconViewItem*)item->nextItem() )
         item->viewModeChanged( vm );
 
-    arrangeItemsInGrid();
+    arrangeItemsInGrid();
 }
 
    
 
@@ -1068,7 +1068,7 @@ void TQtFileIconView::setViewMode( ViewMode m )
 #ifndef MAINWIN_H
 #define MAINWIN_H
 
-#include <qmainwindow.h>
+#include <ntqmainwindow.h>
 
 class TQtFileIconView;
 class DirectoryView;
@@ -1077,7 +1077,7 @@ class TQLabel;
 class TQComboBox;
 class TQToolButton;
 
-class FileMainWindow : public TQMainWindow
+class FileMainWindow : public TQMainWindow
 {
     Q_OBJECT
 
@@ -1095,19 +1095,19 @@ protected:
 
     TQtFileIconView *fileview;
     DirectoryView *dirlist;
-    TQProgressBar *progress;
-    TQLabel *label;
-    TQComboBox *pathCombo;
-    TQToolButton *upButton, *mkdirButton;
+    TQProgressBar *progress;
+    TQLabel *label;
+    TQComboBox *pathCombo;
+    TQToolButton *upButton, *mkdirButton;
 
 protected slots:
-    void directoryChanged( const TQString & );
+    void directoryChanged( const TQString & );
     void slotStartReadDir( int dirs );
     void slotReadNextDir();
     void slotReadDirDone();
     void cdUp();
     void newFolder();
-    void changePath( const TQString &path );
+    void changePath( const TQString &path );
     void enableUp();
     void disableUp();
     void enableMkdir();
@@ -1134,16 +1134,16 @@ protected slots:
 #include "qfileiconview.h"
 #include "../dirview/dirview.h"
 
-#include <qsplitter.h>
-#include <qprogressbar.h>
-#include <qlabel.h>
-#include <qstatusbar.h>
-#include <qtoolbar.h>
-#include <qcombobox.h>
-#include <qpixmap.h>
-#include <qtoolbutton.h>
-#include <qdir.h>
-#include <qfileinfo.h>
+#include <ntqsplitter.h>
+#include <ntqprogressbar.h>
+#include <ntqlabel.h>
+#include <ntqstatusbar.h>
+#include <ntqtoolbar.h>
+#include <ntqcombobox.h>
+#include <ntqpixmap.h>
+#include <ntqtoolbutton.h>
+#include <ntqdir.h>
+#include <ntqfileinfo.h>
 
 static const char* cdtoparent_xpm[]={
     "15 13 3 1",
@@ -1186,134 +1186,134 @@ static const char* newfolder_xpm[] = {
     "...........    "};
 
 FileMainWindow::FileMainWindow()
-    : TQMainWindow()
+    : TQMainWindow()
 {
     setup();
 }
 
-void FileMainWindow::show()
+void FileMainWindow::show()
 {
-    TQMainWindow::show();
+    TQMainWindow::show();
 }
 
 void FileMainWindow::setup()
 {
-    TQSplitter *splitter = new TQSplitter( this );
+    TQSplitter *splitter = new TQSplitter( this );
 
     dirlist = new DirectoryView( splitter, "dirlist", TRUE );
-    dirlist->addColumn( "Name" );
-    dirlist->addColumn( "Type" );
+    dirlist->addColumn( "Name" );
+    dirlist->addColumn( "Type" );
     Directory *root = new Directory( dirlist, "/" );
     root->setOpen( TRUE );
-    splitter->setResizeMode( dirlist, TQSplitter::KeepSize );
+    splitter->setResizeMode( dirlist, TQSplitter::KeepSize );
 
     fileview = new TQtFileIconView( "/", splitter );
-    fileview->setSelectionMode( TQIconView::Extended );
+    fileview->setSelectionMode( TQIconView::Extended );
 
-    setCentralWidget( splitter );
+    setCentralWidget( splitter );
 
-    TQToolBar *toolbar = new TQToolBar( this, "toolbar" );
-    setRightJustification( TRUE );
+    TQToolBar *toolbar = new TQToolBar( this, "toolbar" );
+    setRightJustification( TRUE );
 
-    (void)new TQLabel( tr( " Path: " ), toolbar );
+    (void)new TQLabel( tr( " Path: " ), toolbar );
 
-    pathCombo = new TQComboBox( TRUE, toolbar );
-    pathCombo->setAutoCompletion( TRUE );
-    toolbar->setStretchableWidget( pathCombo );
-    connect( pathCombo, SIGNAL( activated( const TQString & ) ),
-             this, SLOT ( changePath( const TQString & ) ) );
+    pathCombo = new TQComboBox( TRUE, toolbar );
+    pathCombo->setAutoCompletion( TRUE );
+    toolbar->setStretchableWidget( pathCombo );
+    connect( pathCombo, SIGNAL( activated( const TQString & ) ),
+             this, SLOT ( changePath( const TQString & ) ) );
 
-    toolbar->addSeparator();
+    toolbar->addSeparator();
 
-    TQPixmap pix;
+    TQPixmap pix;
 
     pix = TQPixmap( cdtoparent_xpm );
-    upButton = new TQToolButton( pix, "One directory up", TQString::null,
+    upButton = new TQToolButton( pix, "One directory up", TQString::null,
                                 this, SLOT( cdUp() ), toolbar, "cd up" );
 
     pix = TQPixmap( newfolder_xpm );
-    mkdirButton = new TQToolButton( pix, "New Folder", TQString::null,
+    mkdirButton = new TQToolButton( pix, "New Folder", TQString::null,
                                    this, SLOT( newFolder() ), toolbar, "new folder" );
 
-    connect( dirlist, SIGNAL( folderSelected( const TQString & ) ),
-             fileview, SLOT ( setDirectory( const TQString & ) ) );
-    connect( fileview, SIGNAL( directoryChanged( const TQString & ) ),
-             this, SLOT( directoryChanged( const TQString & ) ) );
-    connect( fileview, SIGNAL( startReadDir( int ) ),
+    connect( dirlist, SIGNAL( folderSelected( const TQString & ) ),
+             fileview, SLOT ( setDirectory( const TQString & ) ) );
+    connect( fileview, SIGNAL( directoryChanged( const TQString & ) ),
+             this, SLOT( directoryChanged( const TQString & ) ) );
+    connect( fileview, SIGNAL( startReadDir( int ) ),
              this, SLOT( slotStartReadDir( int ) ) );
-    connect( fileview, SIGNAL( readNextDir() ),
+    connect( fileview, SIGNAL( readNextDir() ),
              this, SLOT( slotReadNextDir() ) );
-    connect( fileview, SIGNAL( readDirDone() ),
+    connect( fileview, SIGNAL( readDirDone() ),
              this, SLOT( slotReadDirDone() ) );
 
-    setDockEnabled( DockLeft, FALSE );
-    setDockEnabled( DockRight, FALSE );
+    setDockEnabled( DockLeft, FALSE );
+    setDockEnabled( DockRight, FALSE );
 
-    label = new TQLabel( statusBar() );
-    statusBar()->addWidget( label, 2, TRUE );
-    progress = new TQProgressBar( statusBar() );
-    statusBar()->addWidget( progress, 1, TRUE );
+    label = new TQLabel( statusBar() );
+    statusBar()->addWidget( label, 2, TRUE );
+    progress = new TQProgressBar( statusBar() );
+    statusBar()->addWidget( progress, 1, TRUE );
 
-    connect( fileview, SIGNAL( enableUp() ),
+    connect( fileview, SIGNAL( enableUp() ),
              this, SLOT( enableUp() ) );
-    connect( fileview, SIGNAL( disableUp() ),
+    connect( fileview, SIGNAL( disableUp() ),
              this, SLOT( disableUp() ) );
-    connect( fileview, SIGNAL( enableMkdir() ),
+    connect( fileview, SIGNAL( enableMkdir() ),
              this, SLOT( enableMkdir() ) );
-    connect( fileview, SIGNAL( disableMkdir() ),
+    connect( fileview, SIGNAL( disableMkdir() ),
              this, SLOT( disableMkdir() ) );
 }
 
 void FileMainWindow::setPathCombo()
 {
-    TQString dir = caption();
+    TQString dir = caption();
     int i = 0;
     bool found = FALSE;
-    for ( i = 0; i < pathCombo->count(); ++i ) {
-        if ( pathCombo->text( i ) == dir) {
+    for ( i = 0; i < pathCombo->count(); ++i ) {
+        if ( pathCombo->text( i ) == dir) {
             found = TRUE;
             break;
         }
     }
 
     if ( found )
-        pathCombo->setCurrentItem( i );
+        pathCombo->setCurrentItem( i );
     else {
-        pathCombo->insertItem( dir );
-        pathCombo->setCurrentItem( pathCombo->count() - 1 );
+        pathCombo->insertItem( dir );
+        pathCombo->setCurrentItem( pathCombo->count() - 1 );
     }
 
 }
 
-void FileMainWindow::directoryChanged( const TQString &dir )
+void FileMainWindow::directoryChanged( const TQString &dir )
 {
-    setCaption( dir );
+    setCaption( dir );
     setPathCombo();
 }
 
 void FileMainWindow::slotStartReadDir( int dirs )
 {
-    label->setText( tr( " Reading Directory..." ) );
-    progress->reset();
-    progress->setTotalSteps( dirs );
+    label->setText( tr( " Reading Directory..." ) );
+    progress->reset();
+    progress->setTotalSteps( dirs );
 }
 
 void FileMainWindow::slotReadNextDir()
 {
-    int p = progress->progress();
-    progress->setProgress( ++p );
+    int p = progress->progress();
+    progress->setProgress( ++p );
 }
 
 void FileMainWindow::slotReadDirDone()
 {
-    label->setText( tr( " Reading Directory Done." ) );
-    progress->setProgress( progress->totalSteps() );
+    label->setText( tr( " Reading Directory Done." ) );
+    progress->setProgress( progress->totalSteps() );
 }
 
 void FileMainWindow::cdUp()
 {
-    TQDir dir = fileview->currentDir();
-    dir.cd( ".." );
+    TQDir dir = fileview->currentDir();
+    dir.cd( ".." );
     fileview->setDirectory( dir );
 }
 
@@ -1322,7 +1322,7 @@ void FileMainWindow::newFolder()
     fileview->newDirectory();
 }
 
-void FileMainWindow::changePath( const TQString &path )
+void FileMainWindow::changePath( const TQString &path )
 {
     if ( TQFileInfo( path ).exists() )
         fileview->setDirectory( path );
@@ -1332,22 +1332,22 @@ void FileMainWindow::changePath( const FileMainWindow::enableUp()
 {
-    upButton->setEnabled( TRUE );
+    upButton->setEnabled( TRUE );
 }
 
 void FileMainWindow::disableUp()
 {
-    upButton->setEnabled( FALSE );
+    upButton->setEnabled( FALSE );
 }
 
 void FileMainWindow::enableMkdir()
 {
-    mkdirButton->setEnabled( TRUE );
+    mkdirButton->setEnabled( TRUE );
 }
 
 void FileMainWindow::disableMkdir()
 {
-    mkdirButton->setEnabled( FALSE );
+    mkdirButton->setEnabled( FALSE );
 }
 
    
 
@@ -1366,19 +1366,19 @@ void FileMainWindow::disableMkdir()
 #include "mainwindow.h"
 #include "qfileiconview.h"
 
-#include <qapplication.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
 
 
 int main( int argc, char **argv )
 {
-    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
+    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
 
     FileMainWindow mw;
-    mw.resize( 680, 480 );
-    a.setMainWidget( &mw );
+    mw.resize( 680, 480 );
+    a.setMainWidget( &mw );
     mw.fileView()->setDirectory( "/" );
-    mw.show();
-    return a.exec();
+    mw.show();
+    return a.exec();
 }
 
    
 
diff --git a/doc/html/focus.html b/doc/html/focus.html
index f9456559c..ed04ba415 100644
--- a/doc/html/focus.html
+++ b/doc/html/focus.html
@@ -68,11 +68,11 @@ keyboard focus to the next widget in a circular per-window list. Tab
 moves focus along the circular list in one direction, Shift+Tab in the
 other. The order in which Tab presses move from widget to widget is
 called the tab order.
-
     In TQt, this list is kept in the TQFocusData class. There is one
-TQFocusData object per window, and widgets automatically append
-themselves to the end of it when TQWidget::setFocusPolicy() is
-called with an appropriate TQWidget::FocusPolicy. You can customize
-the tab order using TQWidget::setTabOrder(). (If you don't, Tab
+
     In TQt, this list is kept in the TQFocusData class. There is one
+TQFocusData object per window, and widgets automatically append
+themselves to the end of it when TQWidget::setFocusPolicy() is
+called with an appropriate TQWidget::FocusPolicy. You can customize
+the tab order using TQWidget::setTabOrder(). (If you don't, Tab
 generally moves focus in the order of widget construction.) TQt Designer provides a means of visually
 changing the tab order.
 
     Since pressing Tab is so common, most widgets that can have focus
@@ -96,8 +96,8 @@ focus to this field.
 
     Another exception to Tab support is text-entry widgets that must
 support the insertion of tabs; almost all text editors fall into this
 class. TQt treats Control+Tab as Tab and Control+Shift+Tab as
-Shift+Tab, and such widgets can reimplement TQWidget::event() and
-handle Tab before calling TQWidget::event() to get normal processing of
+Shift+Tab, and such widgets can reimplement TQWidget::event() and
+handle Tab before calling TQWidget::event() to get normal processing of
 all other keys. However, since some systems use Control+Tab for other
 purposes, and many users aren't aware of Control+Tab anyway, this
 isn't a complete solution.
@@ -120,14 +120,14 @@ it move to the 'B' button?
 
     We advise supporting click-to-focus for widgets that support text
 entry, and to avoid it for most widgets where a mouse click has a
 different effect. (For buttons, we also recommend adding a keyboard
-shortcut: TQButton and its subclasses make this very easy.)
-
     In TQt, only the TQWidget::setFocusPolicy() function affects
+shortcut: TQButton and its subclasses make this very easy.)
+
     In TQt, only the TQWidget::setFocusPolicy() function affects
 click-to-focus.
 
     
     The user presses a keyboard shortcut.
 
    
 
     It's not unusual for keyboard shortcuts to move the focus. This can
 happen implicitly by opening modal dialogs, but also explicitly using
-focus accelerators such as those provided by TQLabel::setBuddy(), TQGroupBox and TQTabBar.
+focus accelerators such as those provided by TQLabel::setBuddy(), TQGroupBox and TQTabBar.
 
     We advise supporting shortcut focus for all widgets that the user may
 want to jump to. For example, a tab dialog can have keyboard shortcuts
 for each of its pages, so the user can press e.g. Alt+P to step to the
@@ -153,8 +153,8 @@ the window should receive the focus.
 the last widget to have focus should regain it. TQt does this
 automatically.
 
     If focus has never been in this window before and you know where focus
-should start out, call TQWidget::setFocus() on the widget which
-should receive focus before you TQWidget::show() it. If you don't,
+should start out, call TQWidget::setFocus() on the widget which
+should receive focus before you TQWidget::show() it. If you don't,
 TQt will pick a suitable widget.
 
     
 
diff --git a/doc/html/forever-example.html b/doc/html/forever-example.html
index e69d1fa57..25817f78e 100644
--- a/doc/html/forever-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/forever-example.html
@@ -55,17 +55,17 @@ are drawn per second.
 #ifndef FOREVER_H
 #define FOREVER_H
 
-#include <qwidget.h>
+#include <ntqwidget.h>
 
 
 const int numColors = 120;
 
 
-class Forever : public TQWidget
+class Forever : public TQWidget
 {
     Q_OBJECT
 public:
-    Forever( TQWidget *parent=0, const char *name=0 );
+    Forever( TQWidget *parent=0, const char *name=0 );
 protected:
     void        paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * );
     void        timerEvent( TQTimerEvent * );
@@ -92,9 +92,9 @@ private:
 **
 *****************************************************************************/
 
-#include <qtimer.h>
-#include <qpainter.h>
-#include <qapplication.h>
+#include <ntqtimer.h>
+#include <ntqpainter.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
 #include <stdlib.h>                             // defines rand() function
 
 #include "forever.h"
@@ -108,8 +108,8 @@ private:
 // Constructs a Forever widget.
 //
 
-Forever::Forever( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name )
+Forever::Forever( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+    : TQWidget( parent, name )
 {
     for (int a=0; a<numColors; a++) {
         colors[a] = TQColor( rand()&255,
@@ -117,20 +117,20 @@ private:
                             rand()&255 );
     }
     rectangles = 0;
-    startTimer( 0 );                            // run continuous timer
-    TQTimer * counter = new TQTimer( this );
-    connect( counter, SIGNAL(timeout()),
+    startTimer( 0 );                            // run continuous timer
+    TQTimer * counter = new TQTimer( this );
+    connect( counter, SIGNAL(timeout()),
              this, SLOT(updateCaption()) );
-    counter->start( 1000 );
+    counter->start( 1000 );
 }
 
 
 void Forever::updateCaption()
 {
-    TQString s;
-    s.sprintf( "TQt Example - Forever - %d rectangles/second", rectangles );
+    TQString s;
+    s.sprintf( "TQt Example - Forever - %d rectangles/second", rectangles );
     rectangles = 0;
-    setCaption( s );
+    setCaption( s );
 }
 
 
@@ -138,31 +138,31 @@ void Forever::updateCaption()
 // Handles paint events for the Forever widget.
 //
 
-void Forever::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
+void Forever::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
 {
-    TQPainter paint( this );                     // painter object
-    int w = width();
-    int h = height();
+    TQPainter paint( this );                     // painter object
+    int w = width();
+    int h = height();
     if(w <= 0 || h <= 0)
         return;
-    paint.setPen( NoPen );                      // do not draw outline
-    paint.setBrush( colors[rand() % numColors]);// set random brush color
+    paint.setPen( NoPen );                      // do not draw outline
+    paint.setBrush( colors[rand() % numColors]);// set random brush color
 
-    TQPoint p1( rand()%w, rand()%h );    // p1 = top left
-    TQPoint p2( rand()%w, rand()%h );    // p2 = bottom right
+    TQPoint p1( rand()%w, rand()%h );    // p1 = top left
+    TQPoint p2( rand()%w, rand()%h );    // p2 = bottom right
 
-    TQRect r( p1, p2 );
-    paint.drawRect( r );                        // draw filled rectangle
+    TQRect r( p1, p2 );
+    paint.drawRect( r );                        // draw filled rectangle
 }
 
 //
 // Handles timer events for the Forever widget.
 //
 
-void Forever::timerEvent( TQTimerEvent * )
+void Forever::timerEvent( TQTimerEvent * )
 {
     for ( int i=0; i<100; i++ ) {
-        repaint( FALSE );                       // repaint, don't erase
+        repaint( FALSE );                       // repaint, don't erase
         rectangles++;
     }
 }
@@ -174,13 +174,13 @@ void Forever::updateCaption()
 
 int main( int argc, char **argv )
 {
-    TQApplication a( argc, argv );               // create application object
+    TQApplication a( argc, argv );               // create application object
     Forever always;                             // create widget
-    always.resize( 400, 250 );                  // start up with size 400x250
-    a.setMainWidget( &always );                 // set as main widget
-    always.setCaption("TQt Example - Forever");
-    always.show();                              // show widget
-    return a.exec();                            // run event loop
+    always.resize( 400, 250 );                  // start up with size 400x250
+    a.setMainWidget( &always );                 // set as main widget
+    always.setCaption("TQt Example - Forever");
+    always.show();                              // show widget
+    return a.exec();                            // run event loop
 }
 
    
 
diff --git a/doc/html/ftpclient-example.html b/doc/html/ftpclient-example.html
index a11223e67..3dcedc208 100644
--- a/doc/html/ftpclient-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/ftpclient-example.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
  
 
     
-
     This example implements a FTP client. It uses TQFtp to perform its FTP
+
     This example implements a FTP client. It uses TQFtp to perform its FTP
 commands. The GUI parts are done in the Designer.
 
     
    
 
     The implementation of the FTP commands (ftpmainwindow.ui.h):
@@ -58,82 +58,82 @@ commands. The GUI parts are done in the Designer.
 **
 *****************************************************************************/
 
-#include <qftp.h>
-#include <qlineedit.h>
-#include <qspinbox.h>
-#include <qstatusbar.h>
-#include <qmessagebox.h>
-#include <qfiledialog.h>
-#include <qprogressdialog.h>
-#include <qapplication.h>
+#include <ntqftp.h>
+#include <ntqlineedit.h>
+#include <ntqspinbox.h>
+#include <ntqstatusbar.h>
+#include <ntqmessagebox.h>
+#include <ntqfiledialog.h>
+#include <ntqprogressdialog.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
 
 #include "connectdialog.h"
 #include "ftpviewitem.h"
 
 void FtpMainWindow::init()
 {
-    stateFtp = new TQLabel( tr("Unconnected"), statusBar() );
+    stateFtp = new TQLabel( tr("Unconnected"), statusBar() );
     statusBar()->addWidget( stateFtp, 0, TRUE );
 
-    ftp = new TQFtp( this );
-    connect( ftp, SIGNAL(commandStarted(int)),
+    ftp = new TQFtp( this );
+    connect( ftp, SIGNAL(commandStarted(int)),
             SLOT(ftp_commandStarted()) );
-    connect( ftp, SIGNAL(commandFinished(int,bool)),
+    connect( ftp, SIGNAL(commandFinished(int,bool)),
             SLOT(ftp_commandFinished()) );
-    connect( ftp, SIGNAL(done(bool)),
+    connect( ftp, SIGNAL(done(bool)),
             SLOT(ftp_done(bool)) );
-    connect( ftp, SIGNAL(stateChanged(int)),
+    connect( ftp, SIGNAL(stateChanged(int)),
             SLOT(ftp_stateChanged(int)) );
-    connect( ftp, SIGNAL(listInfo(const TQUrlInfo &)),
-            SLOT(ftp_listInfo(const TQUrlInfo &)) );
-    connect( ftp, SIGNAL(rawCommandReply(int, const TQString &)),
-            SLOT(ftp_rawCommandReply(int, const TQString &)) );
+    connect( ftp, SIGNAL(listInfo(const TQUrlInfo &)),
+            SLOT(ftp_listInfo(const TQUrlInfo &)) );
+    connect( ftp, SIGNAL(rawCommandReply(int, const TQString &)),
+            SLOT(ftp_rawCommandReply(int, const TQString &)) );
 }
 
 void FtpMainWindow::destroy()
 {
-    if ( ftp->state() != TQFtp::Unconnected )
-        ftp->close();
+    if ( ftp->state() != TQFtp::Unconnected )
+        ftp->close();
 }
 
 void FtpMainWindow::uploadFile()
 {
-    TQString fileName = TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName(
-            TQString::null,
+    TQString fileName = TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName(
+            TQString::null,
             TQString::null,
             this,
             "upload file dialog",
             tr("Choose a file to upload") );
-    if ( fileName.isNull() )
+    if ( fileName.isNull() )
         return;
 
-    TQFile *file = new TQFile( fileName );
-    if ( !file->open( IO_ReadOnly ) ) {
-        TQMessageBox::critical( this, tr("Upload error"),
+    TQFile *file = new TQFile( fileName );
+    if ( !file->open( IO_ReadOnly ) ) {
+        TQMessageBox::critical( this, tr("Upload error"),
                 tr("Can't open file '%1' for reading.").arg(fileName) );
         delete file;
         return;
     }
 
-    TQProgressDialog progress(
+    TQProgressDialog progress(
             tr("Uploading file..."),
             tr("Cancel"),
             0,
             this,
             "upload progress dialog",
             TRUE );
-    connect( ftp, SIGNAL(dataTransferProgress(int,int)),
-            &progress, SLOT(setProgress(int,int)) );
-    connect( ftp, SIGNAL(commandFinished(int,bool)),
-            &progress, SLOT(reset()) );
-    connect( &progress, SIGNAL(cancelled()),
-            ftp, SLOT(abort()) );
-
-    TQFileInfo fi( fileName );
-    ftp->put( file, fi.fileName() );
-    progress.exec(); // ### takes a lot of time!!!
-
-    ftp->list();
+    connect( ftp, SIGNAL(dataTransferProgress(int,int)),
+            &progress, SLOT(setProgress(int,int)) );
+    connect( ftp, SIGNAL(commandFinished(int,bool)),
+            &progress, SLOT(reset()) );
+    connect( &progress, SIGNAL(cancelled()),
+            ftp, SLOT(abort()) );
+
+    TQFileInfo fi( fileName );
+    ftp->put( file, fi.fileName() );
+    progress.exec(); // ### takes a lot of time!!!
+
+    ftp->list();
 }
 
 void FtpMainWindow::downloadFile()
@@ -142,41 +142,41 @@ void FtpMainWindow::downloadFile()
     if ( !item || item->isDir() )
         return;
 
-    TQString fileName = TQFileDialog::getSaveFileName(
+    TQString fileName = TQFileDialog::getSaveFileName(
             item->text(0),
             TQString::null,
             this,
             "download file dialog",
             tr("Save downloaded file as") );
-    if ( fileName.isNull() )
+    if ( fileName.isNull() )
         return;
 
     // create file on the heap because it has to be valid throughout the whole
     // asynchronous download operation
-    TQFile *file = new TQFile( fileName );
-    if ( !file->open( IO_WriteOnly ) ) {
-        TQMessageBox::critical( this, tr("Download error"),
+    TQFile *file = new TQFile( fileName );
+    if ( !file->open( IO_WriteOnly ) ) {
+        TQMessageBox::critical( this, tr("Download error"),
                 tr("Can't open file '%1' for writing.").arg(fileName) );
         delete file;
         return;
     }
 
-    TQProgressDialog progress(
+    TQProgressDialog progress(
             tr("Downloading file..."),
             tr("Cancel"),
             0,
             this,
             "download progress dialog",
             TRUE );
-    connect( ftp, SIGNAL(dataTransferProgress(int,int)),
-            &progress, SLOT(setProgress(int,int)) );
-    connect( ftp, SIGNAL(commandFinished(int,bool)),
-            &progress, SLOT(reset()) );
-    connect( &progress, SIGNAL(cancelled()),
-            ftp, SLOT(abort()) );
-
-    ftp->get( item->text(0), file );
-    progress.exec(); // ### takes a lot of time!!!
+    connect( ftp, SIGNAL(dataTransferProgress(int,int)),
+            &progress, SLOT(setProgress(int,int)) );
+    connect( ftp, SIGNAL(commandFinished(int,bool)),
+            &progress, SLOT(reset()) );
+    connect( &progress, SIGNAL(cancelled()),
+            ftp, SLOT(abort()) );
+
+    ftp->get( item->text(0), file );
+    progress.exec(); // ### takes a lot of time!!!
 }
 
 void FtpMainWindow::removeFile()
@@ -185,8 +185,8 @@ void FtpMainWindow::removeFile()
     if ( !item || item->isDir() )
         return;
 
-    ftp->remove( item->text(0) );
-    ftp->list();
+    ftp->remove( item->text(0) );
+    ftp->list();
 }
 
 void FtpMainWindow::connectToHost()
@@ -198,22 +198,22 @@ void FtpMainWindow::connectToHost()
     remotePath->clear();
     remoteView->clear();
 
-    if ( ftp->state() != TQFtp::Unconnected )
-        ftp->close();
+    if ( ftp->state() != TQFtp::Unconnected )
+        ftp->close();
 
-    ftp->connectToHost( connectDialog.host->text(), connectDialog.port->value() );
-    ftp->login( connectDialog.username->text(), connectDialog.password->text() );
-    ftp->rawCommand( "PWD" );
-    ftp->list();
+    ftp->connectToHost( connectDialog.host->text(), connectDialog.port->value() );
+    ftp->login( connectDialog.username->text(), connectDialog.password->text() );
+    ftp->rawCommand( "PWD" );
+    ftp->list();
 }
 
 // This slot is connected to the TQComboBox::activated() signal of the
 // remotePath.
-void FtpMainWindow::changePath( const TQString &newPath )
+void FtpMainWindow::changePath( const TQString &newPath )
 {
-    ftp->cd( newPath );
-    ftp->rawCommand( "PWD" );
-    ftp->list();
+    ftp->cd( newPath );
+    ftp->rawCommand( "PWD" );
+    ftp->list();
 }
 
 // This slot is connected to the TQListView::doubleClicked() and
@@ -234,8 +234,8 @@ void FtpMainWindow::changePathOrDownload( TQListVie
 
 void FtpMainWindow::ftp_commandStarted()
 {
-    TQApplication::setOverrideCursor( TQCursor(TQt::WaitCursor) );
-    if ( ftp->currentCommand() == TQFtp::List ) {
+    TQApplication::setOverrideCursor( TQCursor(TQt::WaitCursor) );
+    if ( ftp->currentCommand() == TQFtp::List ) {
         remoteView->clear();
         if ( currentFtpDir != "/" )
             new FtpViewItem( remoteView, FtpViewItem::Directory, "..", "", "" );
@@ -244,20 +244,20 @@ void FtpMainWindow::ftp_commandStarted()
 
 void FtpMainWindow::ftp_commandFinished()
 {
-    TQApplication::restoreOverrideCursor();
-    delete ftp->currentDevice();
+    TQApplication::restoreOverrideCursor();
+    delete ftp->currentDevice();
 }
 
 void FtpMainWindow::ftp_done( bool error )
 {
     if ( error ) {
-        TQMessageBox::critical( this, tr("FTP Error"), ftp->errorString() );
+        TQMessageBox::critical( this, tr("FTP Error"), ftp->errorString() );
 
         // If we are connected, but not logged in, it is not meaningful to stay
         // connected to the server since the error is a really fatal one (login
         // failed).
-        if ( ftp->state() == TQFtp::Connected )
-            ftp->close();
+        if ( ftp->state() == TQFtp::Connected )
+            ftp->close();
     }
 }
 
@@ -265,42 +265,42 @@ void FtpMainWindow::ftp_stateChanged( int state )
 {
     switch ( (TQFtp::State)state ) {
         case TQFtp::Unconnected:
-            stateFtp->setText( tr("Unconnected") );
+            stateFtp->setText( tr("Unconnected") );
             break;
         case TQFtp::HostLookup:
-            stateFtp->setText( tr("Host lookup") );
+            stateFtp->setText( tr("Host lookup") );
             break;
         case TQFtp::Connecting:
-            stateFtp->setText( tr("Connecting") );
+            stateFtp->setText( tr("Connecting") );
             break;
         case TQFtp::Connected:
-            stateFtp->setText( tr("Connected") );
+            stateFtp->setText( tr("Connected") );
             break;
         case TQFtp::LoggedIn:
-            stateFtp->setText( tr("Logged in") );
+            stateFtp->setText( tr("Logged in") );
             break;
         case TQFtp::Closing:
-            stateFtp->setText( tr("Closing") );
+            stateFtp->setText( tr("Closing") );
             break;
     }
 }
 
-void FtpMainWindow::ftp_listInfo( const TQUrlInfo &i )
+void FtpMainWindow::ftp_listInfo( const TQUrlInfo &i )
 {
     FtpViewItem::Type type;
-    if ( i.isDir() )
+    if ( i.isDir() )
         type = FtpViewItem::Directory;
     else
         type = FtpViewItem::File;
 
     new FtpViewItem( remoteView, type,
-            i.name(), TQString::number(i.size()), i.lastModified().toString() );
+            i.name(), TQString::number(i.size()), i.lastModified().toString() );
 }
 
-void FtpMainWindow::ftp_rawCommandReply( int code, const TQString &text )
+void FtpMainWindow::ftp_rawCommandReply( int code, const TQString &text )
 {
     if ( code == 257 ) {
-        currentFtpDir = text.section( '"', 1, 1 );
+        currentFtpDir = text.section( '"', 1, 1 );
 
         for ( int i = 0; i<remotePath->count(); i++ ) {
             // make sure that we don't insert duplicates
@@ -325,19 +325,19 @@ void FtpMainWindow::ftp_rawCommandReply( int code, const 
 **
 *****************************************************************************/
 
-#include <qapplication.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
 #include "ftpmainwindow.h"
 
 int main( int argc, char **argv )
 {
-    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
+    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
 
     FtpMainWindow m;
-    a.setMainWidget( &m );
+    a.setMainWidget( &m );
     m.show();
-    a.processEvents();
+    a.processEvents();
     m.connectToHost();
-    return a.exec();
+    return a.exec();
 }
 
    
 
diff --git a/doc/html/functions.html b/doc/html/functions.html
index 653896633..f04d62d91 100644
--- a/doc/html/functions.html
+++ b/doc/html/functions.html
@@ -40,183 +40,183 @@ API with links to the class documentation for each function.
 
+ TQTextEdit
  • zoomOut:
+ TQTextEdit
  • zoomTo:
+ TQTextEdit
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/geomanagement.html b/doc/html/geomanagement.html
index 96a0597be..00a9ae030 100644
--- a/doc/html/geomanagement.html
+++ b/doc/html/geomanagement.html
@@ -36,24 +36,24 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
     
 
    
 
    TQBoxLayoutLines up child widgets horizontally or vertically
-
    TQButtonGroupOrganizes TQButton widgets in a group
+
    TQButtonGroupOrganizes TQButton widgets in a group
 
    TQGLayoutIteratorAbstract base class of internal layout iterators
-
    TQGridSimple geometry management of its children
+
    TQGridSimple geometry management of its children
 
    TQGridLayoutLays out widgets in a grid
-
    TQGroupBoxGroup box frame with a title
-
    TQHBoxHorizontal geometry management for its child widgets
+
    TQGroupBoxGroup box frame with a title
+
    TQHBoxHorizontal geometry management for its child widgets
 
    TQHBoxLayoutLines up widgets horizontally
-
    TQHButtonGroupOrganizes TQButton widgets in a group with one horizontal row
-
    TQHGroupBoxOrganizes widgets in a group with one horizontal row
-
    TQLayoutThe base class of geometry managers
+
    TQHButtonGroupOrganizes TQButton widgets in a group with one horizontal row
+
    TQHGroupBoxOrganizes widgets in a group with one horizontal row
+
    TQLayoutThe base class of geometry managers
 
    TQLayoutItemAbstract item that a TQLayout manipulates
 
    TQLayoutIteratorIterators over TQLayoutItem
-
    TQSizePolicyLayout attribute describing horizontal and vertical resizing policy
+
    TQSizePolicyLayout attribute describing horizontal and vertical resizing policy
 
    TQSpacerItemBlank space in a layout
-
    TQVBoxVertical geometry management of its child widgets
+
    TQVBoxVertical geometry management of its child widgets
 
    TQVBoxLayoutLines up widgets vertically
-
    TQVButtonGroupOrganizes TQButton widgets in a vertical column
-
    TQVGroupBoxOrganizes a group of widgets in a vertical column
+
    TQVButtonGroupOrganizes TQButton widgets in a vertical column
+
    TQVGroupBoxOrganizes a group of widgets in a vertical column
 
    TQWidgetItemLayout item that represents a widget
 
    
 
diff --git a/doc/html/geometry.html b/doc/html/geometry.html
index 027a59492..12be7b982 100644
--- a/doc/html/geometry.html
+++ b/doc/html/geometry.html
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
  
 
     Overview
 
    
-
     TQWidget provides several functions that deal with a widget's
+
     TQWidget provides several functions that deal with a widget's
 geometry.  Some of these functions operate on the pure client area
 (i.e. the window excluding the window frame), others include the
 window frame. The differentiation is done in a way that covers the
@@ -100,8 +100,8 @@ example:
 
     
         MyWidget* widget = new MyWidget
     ...
-    TQPoint p = widget->pos();   // store position
-    TQSize s = widget->size();   // store size
+    TQPoint p = widget->pos();   // store position
+    TQSize s = widget->size();   // store size
     ...
     widget = new MyWidget;
     widget->resize( s );        // restore size
diff --git a/doc/html/grapher-nsplugin-example.html b/doc/html/grapher-nsplugin-example.html
index eef68856c..03759058c 100644
--- a/doc/html/grapher-nsplugin-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/grapher-nsplugin-example.html
@@ -72,17 +72,17 @@ to an image at the server.
 
    
 Implementation:
 
     
    // Include TQt Netscape Plugin classes.
-#include "qnp.h"
+#include "ntqnp.h"
 
 // Include other TQt classes.
-#include <qpainter.h>
-#include <qtextstream.h>
-#include <qbuffer.h>
-#include <qpixmap.h>
-#include <qmenubar.h>
-#include <qpushbutton.h>
-#include <qptrlist.h>
-#include <qmessagebox.h>
+#include <ntqpainter.h>
+#include <ntqtextstream.h>
+#include <ntqbuffer.h>
+#include <ntqpixmap.h>
+#include <ntqmenubar.h>
+#include <ntqpushbutton.h>
+#include <ntqptrlist.h>
+#include <ntqmessagebox.h>
 
 // Include some C library functions.
 #include <math.h>
@@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ public:
 
     union Datum {
         double dbl;
-        TQString* str;
+        TQString* str;
     };
 
     virtual TQPtrList<Datum>& graphData()=0;
@@ -164,12 +164,12 @@ signals:
 
 private:
     GraphModel& model;
-    TQMenuBar *menubar;
+    TQMenuBar *menubar;
     Style style;
-    TQPopupMenu* stylemenu;
+    TQPopupMenu* stylemenu;
     int pieRotationTimer;
     int pieRotation;
-    TQPixmap pm;
+    TQPixmap pm;
 
 private slots:
     void setStyleFromMenu(int id);
@@ -178,62 +178,62 @@ private slots:
 
 Graph::Graph( GraphModel& mdl ) :
     model(mdl),
-    style(Bar),
+    style(Bar),
     pieRotationTimer(0),
     pieRotation(0)
 {
     // Create a menubar for the widget
     //
-    menubar = new TQMenuBar( this );
-    stylemenu = new TQPopupMenu;
-    stylemenu->setCheckable(TRUE);
+    menubar = new TQMenuBar( this );
+    stylemenu = new TQPopupMenu;
+    stylemenu->setCheckable(TRUE);
     for ( Style s = Pie; styleName[s]; s = Style(s+1)) {
-        stylemenu->insertItem(styleName[s], s+100);
+        stylemenu->insertItem(styleName[s], s+100);
     }
-    connect(stylemenu, SIGNAL(activated(int)),
+    connect(stylemenu, SIGNAL(activated(int)),
         this, SLOT(setStyleFromMenu(int)));
-    setStyle(Pie);
+    setStyle(Pie);
 
-    menubar->insertItem("Style", stylemenu);
-    menubar->insertSeparator();
+    menubar->insertItem("Style", stylemenu);
+    menubar->insertSeparator();
 
-    TQPopupMenu* help = new TQPopupMenu;
-    help->insertItem( "About plugin...", this, SIGNAL(aboutPlugin()) );
-    help->insertItem( "About data...", this, SIGNAL(aboutData()) );
-    menubar->insertItem("Help", help);
-    menubar->hide();
+    TQPopupMenu* help = new TQPopupMenu;
+    help->insertItem( "About plugin...", this, SIGNAL(aboutPlugin()) );
+    help->insertItem( "About data...", this, SIGNAL(aboutData()) );
+    menubar->insertItem("Help", help);
+    menubar->hide();
 }
 
 Graph::~Graph()
 {
 }
 
-void Graph::setStyle(Style s)
+void Graph::setStyle(Style s)
 {
     if (style != s) {
         if (pieRotationTimer)
-            killTimer(pieRotationTimer);
-        stylemenu->setItemChecked(100+style, FALSE);
+            killTimer(pieRotationTimer);
+        stylemenu->setItemChecked(100+style, FALSE);
         style = s;
         if ( style == Pie )
-            pieRotationTimer = startTimer( 80 );
+            pieRotationTimer = startTimer( 80 );
         else
             pieRotationTimer = 0;
-        stylemenu->setItemChecked(100+style, TRUE);
-        update();
+        stylemenu->setItemChecked(100+style, TRUE);
+        update();
     }
 }
 
-void Graph::timerEvent(TQTimerEvent*)
+void Graph::timerEvent(TQTimerEvent*)
 {
     pieRotation = ( pieRotation + 6 ) % 360; repaint(FALSE);
 }
 
-void Graph::setStyle(const char* stext)
+void Graph::setStyle(const char* stext)
 {
     for ( Style s = Pie; styleName[s]; s = Style(s+1) ) {
-        if ( qstricmp(stext,styleName[s])==0 ) {
-            setStyle(s);
+        if ( qstricmp(stext,styleName[s])==0 ) {
+            setStyle(s);
             return;
         }
     }
@@ -241,19 +241,19 @@ void Graph::setStyle(const char* stext)
 
 void Graph::enterInstance()
 {
-    menubar->show();
+    menubar->show();
 }
 
 void Graph::leaveInstance()
 {
-    menubar->hide();
+    menubar->hide();
 }
 
 void Graph::paintError(const char* e)
 {
-    TQPainter p(this);
-    int w = width();
-    p.drawText(w/8, 0, w-w/4, height(), AlignCenter|WordBreak, e);
+    TQPainter p(this);
+    int w = width();
+    p.drawText(w/8, 0, w-w/4, height(), AlignCenter|WordBreak, e);
 }
 
 void Graph::paintBar(TQPaintEvent* event)
@@ -263,39 +263,39 @@ void Graph::paintBar(TQPaintEvent* event)
         return;
     }
 
-    TQPtrList<GraphModel::Datum>& data = model.graphData();
+    TQPtrList<GraphModel::Datum>& data = model.graphData();
 
     double max = 0.0;
 
-    for (GraphModel::Datum* rowdata = data.first();
-        rowdata; rowdata = data.next())
+    for (GraphModel::Datum* rowdata = data.first();
+        rowdata; rowdata = data.next())
     {
         if (rowdata[0].dbl > max) max = rowdata[0].dbl;
     }
 
-    const uint w = width();
-    const uint h = height();
+    const uint w = width();
+    const uint h = height();
 
-    TQPainter p(this);
+    TQPainter p(this);
 
-    p.setClipRect(event->rect());
+    p.setClipRect(event->rect());
 
-    if ( w > data.count() ) {
+    if ( w > data.count() ) {
         // More pixels than data
         int x = 0;
         int i = 0;
-        TQFontMetrics fm=fontMetrics();
-        int fh = fm.height();
+        TQFontMetrics fm=fontMetrics();
+        int fh = fm.height();
 
-        for (GraphModel::Datum* rowdata = data.first();
-            rowdata; rowdata = data.next())
+        for (GraphModel::Datum* rowdata = data.first();
+            rowdata; rowdata = data.next())
         {
-            TQColor c;
-            c.setHsv( (i * 255)/data.count(), 255, 255 );// rainbow effect
-            p.setBrush(c);
-            int bw = (w-w/4-x)/(data.count()-i);
+            TQColor c;
+            c.setHsv( (i * 255)/data.count(), 255, 255 );// rainbow effect
+            p.setBrush(c);
+            int bw = (w-w/4-x)/(data.count()-i);
             int bh = int((h-h/4-1)*rowdata[0].dbl/max);
-            p.drawRect( w/8+x, h-h/8-1-bh, bw, bh );
+            p.drawRect( w/8+x, h-h/8-1-bh, bw, bh );
 
             i++;
             x+=bw;
@@ -306,18 +306,18 @@ void Graph::paintBar(TQPaintEvent* event)
         int i = 0;
         double av = 0.0;
         int n = 0;
-        for (GraphModel::Datum* rowdata = data.first(); rowdata;
-            rowdata = data.next())
+        for (GraphModel::Datum* rowdata = data.first(); rowdata;
+            rowdata = data.next())
         {
-            int bx = i*w/data.count();
+            int bx = i*w/data.count();
 
             if (bx > x) {
-                TQColor c;
-                c.setHsv( (x * 255)/w, 255, 255 );// rainbow effect
-                p.setPen(c);
+                TQColor c;
+                c.setHsv( (x * 255)/w, 255, 255 );// rainbow effect
+                p.setPen(c);
                 int bh = int(h*av/n/max);
 
-                p.drawLine(x,h-1,x,h-bh);
+                p.drawLine(x,h-1,x,h-bh);
 
                 av = 0.0;
                 n = 0;
@@ -339,14 +339,14 @@ void Graph::paintPie(TQPaintEvent* event)
         return;
     }
 
-    TQPtrList<GraphModel::Datum>& data = model.graphData();
+    TQPtrList<GraphModel::Datum>& data = model.graphData();
 
     double total = 0.0;
 
     GraphModel::Datum* rowdata;
 
-    for (rowdata = data.first();
-        rowdata; rowdata = data.next())
+    for (rowdata = data.first();
+        rowdata; rowdata = data.next())
     {
         total += rowdata[0].dbl;
     }
@@ -356,31 +356,31 @@ void Graph::paintPie(TQPaintEvent* event)
 
     int apos = (pieRotation-90)*16;
 
-    const int w = width();
-    const int h = height();
+    const int w = width();
+    const int h = height();
 
     const int xd = w - w/5;
     const int yd = h - h/5;
 
-    pm.resize(width(),height());
-    pm.fill(backgroundColor());
-    TQPainter p(&pm);
-    p.setFont(font());
+    pm.resize(width(),height());
+    pm.fill(backgroundColor());
+    TQPainter p(&pm);
+    p.setFont(font());
 
-    p.setClipRect(event->rect());
+    p.setClipRect(event->rect());
 
     int i = 0;
 
-    for (rowdata = data.first();
-        rowdata; rowdata = data.next())
+    for (rowdata = data.first();
+        rowdata; rowdata = data.next())
     {
-        TQColor c;
+        TQColor c;
 
-        c.setHsv( ( i * 255)/data.count(), 255, 255 );// rainbow effect
-        p.setBrush( c );                        // solid fill with color c
+        c.setHsv( ( i * 255)/data.count(), 255, 255 );// rainbow effect
+        p.setBrush( c );                        // solid fill with color c
 
         int a = int(( rowdata[0].dbl * 360.0 ) / total * 16.0 + 0.5);
-        p.drawPie( w/10, h/10, xd, yd, -apos, -a );
+        p.drawPie( w/10, h/10, xd, yd, -apos, -a );
         apos += a;
         i++;
     }
@@ -388,33 +388,33 @@ void Graph::paintPie(TQPaintEvent* event)
     if (model.colType(1) == GraphModel::Label) {
         double apos = (pieRotation-90)*M_PI/180;
 
-        for (rowdata = data.first();
-            rowdata; rowdata = data.next())
+        for (rowdata = data.first();
+            rowdata; rowdata = data.next())
         {
             double a = rowdata[0].dbl * 360 / total * M_PI / 180;
             int x = int(cos(apos+a/2)*w*5/16 + w/2 + 0.5);
             int y = int(sin(apos+a/2)*h*5/16 + h/2 + 0.5);
 
             // ### This causes a crash, so comment out for now
-            /*p.drawText(x-w/8, y-h/8, w/4, h/4,
+            /*p.drawText(x-w/8, y-h/8, w/4, h/4,
                 WordBreak|AlignCenter,
                 *rowdata[1].str);*/
             apos += a;
         }
     }
 
-    TQPainter p2(this);
-    p2.setClipRect(event->rect());
-    p2.drawPixmap(0,0,pm);
+    TQPainter p2(this);
+    p2.setClipRect(event->rect());
+    p2.drawPixmap(0,0,pm);
 }
 
 void Graph::paintWait(TQPaintEvent*)
 {
-    TQPainter p(this);
-    p.drawText(rect(), AlignCenter, "Loading...");
+    TQPainter p(this);
+    p.drawText(rect(), AlignCenter, "Loading...");
 }
 
-void Graph::paintEvent(TQPaintEvent* event)
+void Graph::paintEvent(TQPaintEvent* event)
 {
     if (!model.nCols()) {
         paintWait(event);
@@ -471,13 +471,13 @@ private:
     // Grapher is a GraphModel, so it implements the pure virtual
     // functions of that class.
     //
-    TQPtrList<Datum>& graphData();
+    TQPtrList<Datum>& graphData();
     ColType colType(int col) const;
     int nCols() const;
 
     void consumeLine();
-    TQPtrList<Datum> data;
-    TQBuffer line;
+    TQPtrList<Datum> data;
+    TQBuffer line;
     int ncols;
     ColType *coltype;
 
@@ -490,9 +490,9 @@ private slots:
 
 Grapher::Grapher()
 {
-    data.setAutoDelete(TRUE);
+    data.setAutoDelete(TRUE);
     ncols = 0;
-    line.open(IO_WriteOnly|IO_Truncate);
+    line.open(IO_WriteOnly|IO_Truncate);
 }
 
 Grapher::~Grapher()
@@ -525,32 +525,32 @@ int Grapher::nCols() const
     //   FONTFAMILY and FONTSIZE choose the font
     //
     const char* style = arg("GRAPHSTYLE");
-    if ( style ) graph->setStyle(style);
+    if ( style ) graph->setStyle(style);
 
     const char* fontfamily = arg("FONTFAMILY");
     const char* fontsize = arg("FONTSIZE");
-    int ptsize = fontsize ? atoi(fontsize) : graph->font().pointSize();
-    if (fontfamily) graph->setFont(TQFont(fontfamily, ptsize));
+    int ptsize = fontsize ? atoi(fontsize) : graph->font().pointSize();
+    if (fontfamily) graph->setFont(TQFont(fontfamily, ptsize));
 
-    connect(graph, SIGNAL(aboutPlugin()), this, SLOT(aboutPlugin()));
-    connect(graph, SIGNAL(aboutData()), this, SLOT(aboutData()));
+    connect(graph, SIGNAL(aboutPlugin()), this, SLOT(aboutPlugin()));
+    connect(graph, SIGNAL(aboutData()), this, SLOT(aboutData()));
 
     return graph;
 }
 
 void Grapher::consumeLine()
 {
-    line.close();
-    line.open(IO_ReadOnly);
+    line.close();
+    line.open(IO_ReadOnly);
 
-    TQTextStream ts( &line );
+    TQTextStream ts( &line );
 
     if (ncols == 0 ) {
         ncols=0;
-        TQPtrList<ColType> typelist;
-        typelist.setAutoDelete(TRUE);
+        TQPtrList<ColType> typelist;
+        typelist.setAutoDelete(TRUE);
         do {
-            TQString typestr;
+            TQString typestr;
             ts >> typestr >> ws;
             ColType* t = 0;
             if ( typestr == "num" ) {
@@ -558,16 +558,16 @@ void Grapher::consumeLine()
             } else if ( typestr == "label" ) {
                 t = new ColType(Label);
             }
-            if (t) typelist.append(t);
-        } while (!ts.atEnd());
+            if (t) typelist.append(t);
+        } while (!ts.atEnd());
         coltype = new ColType[ncols];
-        for (ColType* t = typelist.first(); t; t = typelist.next()) {
+        for (ColType* t = typelist.first(); t; t = typelist.next()) {
             coltype[ncols++] = *t;
         }
     } else {
         int col=0;
         Datum *rowdata = new Datum[ncols];
-        while ( col < ncols && !ts.atEnd() ) {
+        while ( col < ncols && !ts.atEnd() ) {
             switch (coltype[col]) {
               case Numeric: {
                 double value;
@@ -576,7 +576,7 @@ void Grapher::consumeLine()
                 break;
               }
               case Label: {
-                TQString* value = new TQString;
+                TQString* value = new TQString;
                 ts >> *value >> ws;
                 rowdata[col].str = value;
                 break;
@@ -585,11 +585,11 @@ void Grapher::consumeLine()
             col++;
         }
 
-        data.append(rowdata);
+        data.append(rowdata);
     }
 
-    line.close();
-    line.open(IO_WriteOnly|IO_Truncate);
+    line.close();
+    line.open(IO_WriteOnly|IO_Truncate);
 }
 
 int Grapher::write(TQNPStream* /*str*/, int /*offset*/, int len, void* buffer)
@@ -611,7 +611,7 @@ void Grapher::consumeLine()
           case '\r': // ignore;
             break;
           default:
-            line.putch(ch);
+            line.putch(ch);
         }
     }
     if ( widget() )
@@ -631,7 +631,7 @@ void Grapher::aboutData()
     if (page)
         getURL( page, "_blank" );
     else
-        TQMessageBox::message("Help", "No help for this data");
+        TQMessageBox::message("Help", "No help for this data");
 }
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/graphics.html b/doc/html/graphics.html
index 50cb3ead4..fef572f97 100644
--- a/doc/html/graphics.html
+++ b/doc/html/graphics.html
@@ -38,9 +38,9 @@ and (with OpenGL) 3D.
 coordinate system.
 
     
 
    
-
    TQBitmapMonochrome (1-bit depth) pixmaps
-
    TQBrushDefines the fill pattern of shapes drawn by a TQPainter
-
    TQCanvas2D area that can contain TQCanvasItem objects
+
    TQBitmapMonochrome (1-bit depth) pixmaps
+
    TQBrushDefines the fill pattern of shapes drawn by a TQPainter
+
    TQCanvas2D area that can contain TQCanvasItem objects
 
    TQCanvasEllipseEllipse or ellipse segment on a TQCanvas
 
    TQCanvasItemAbstract graphic object on a TQCanvas
 
    TQCanvasItemListList of TQCanvasItems
@@ -54,44 +54,44 @@ coordinate system.
 
    TQCanvasSpriteAnimated canvas item on a TQCanvas
 
    TQCanvasTextText object on a TQCanvas
 
    TQCanvasViewOn-screen view of a TQCanvas
-
    TQColorColors based on RGB or HSV values
-
    TQColorDialogDialog widget for specifying colors
+
    TQColorColors based on RGB or HSV values
+
    TQColorDialogDialog widget for specifying colors
 
    TQColorGroupGroup of widget colors
 
    TQDirectPainterDirect access to the video hardware
-
    TQFontFont used for drawing text
-
    TQFontDatabaseInformation about the fonts available in the underlying window system
-
    TQFontInfoGeneral information about fonts
-
    TQFontMetricsFont metrics information
-
    TQGLNamespace for miscellaneous identifiers in the TQt OpenGL module
-
    TQGLColormapUsed for installing custom colormaps into TQGLWidgets
+
    TQFontFont used for drawing text
+
    TQFontDatabaseInformation about the fonts available in the underlying window system
+
    TQFontInfoGeneral information about fonts
+
    TQFontMetricsFont metrics information
+
    TQGLNamespace for miscellaneous identifiers in the TQt OpenGL module
+
    TQGLColormapUsed for installing custom colormaps into TQGLWidgets
 
    TQGLContextEncapsulates an OpenGL rendering context
 
    TQGLFormatThe display format of an OpenGL rendering context
 
    TQGLWidgetWidget for rendering OpenGL graphics
-
    TQIconSetSet of icons with different styles and sizes
-
    TQImageHardware-independent pixmap representation with direct access to the pixel data
+
    TQIconSetSet of icons with different styles and sizes
+
    TQImageHardware-independent pixmap representation with direct access to the pixel data
 
    TQImageConsumerAbstraction used by TQImageDecoder
 
    TQImageDecoderIncremental image decoder for all supported image formats
 
    TQImageFormatIncremental image decoder for a specific image format
 
    TQImageFormatTypeFactory that makes TQImageFormat objects
 
    TQImageIOParameters for loading and saving images
-
    TQMovieIncremental loading of animations or images, signalling as it progresses
-
    TQPaintDeviceThe base class of objects that can be painted
-
    TQPaintDeviceMetricsInformation about a paint device
-
    TQPainterDoes low-level painting e.g. on widgets
-
    TQPaletteColor groups for each widget state
-
    TQPenDefines how a TQPainter should draw lines and outlines of shapes
-
    TQPicturePaint device that records and replays TQPainter commands
-
    TQPixmapOff-screen, pixel-based paint device
-
    TQPixmapCacheApplication-global cache for pixmaps
+
    TQMovieIncremental loading of animations or images, signalling as it progresses
+
    TQPaintDeviceThe base class of objects that can be painted
+
    TQPaintDeviceMetricsInformation about a paint device
+
    TQPainterDoes low-level painting e.g. on widgets
+
    TQPaletteColor groups for each widget state
+
    TQPenDefines how a TQPainter should draw lines and outlines of shapes
+
    TQPicturePaint device that records and replays TQPainter commands
+
    TQPixmapOff-screen, pixel-based paint device
+
    TQPixmapCacheApplication-global cache for pixmaps
 
    TQPNGImagePackerCreates well-compressed PNG animations
-
    TQPointDefines a point in the plane
-
    TQPointArrayArray of points
-
    TQPrinterPaint device that paints on a printer
-
    TQRectDefines a rectangle in the plane
-
    TQRegionClip region for a painter
-
    TQSizeDefines the size of a two-dimensional object
-
    TQStyleSheetCollection of styles for rich text rendering and a generator of tags
-
    TQWMatrix2D transformations of a coordinate system
+
    TQPointDefines a point in the plane
+
    TQPointArrayArray of points
+
    TQPrinterPaint device that paints on a printer
+
    TQRectDefines a rectangle in the plane
+
    TQRegionClip region for a painter
+
    TQSizeDefines the size of a two-dimensional object
+
    TQStyleSheetCollection of styles for rich text rendering and a generator of tags
+
    TQWMatrix2D transformations of a coordinate system
 
    
 
 
    
diff --git a/doc/html/groups.html b/doc/html/groups.html
index 5b93b41b2..22356ee99 100644
--- a/doc/html/groups.html
+++ b/doc/html/groups.html
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ event handling, access to system settings and  
 Utility Classes
 Collection classes such as list, queue, stack and string, along
-with other classes that can be used without needing TQApplication.
+with other classes that can be used without needing TQApplication.
  
 Graphics and Printing
 Classes providing drawing (and printing) primitives, including
@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ including menus, toolbars, workspace, etc.
 Standard Dialogs
 Ready-made dialogs for file, font, color selection and more.
 
-Template Library
+Template Library
 TQt's template library container classes.
 
 Text Related Classes 
diff --git a/doc/html/headerfilesynonyms b/doc/html/headerfilesynonyms
index f3f8ff104..02c3d6e2a 100644
--- a/doc/html/headerfilesynonyms
+++ b/doc/html/headerfilesynonyms
@@ -1,170 +1,170 @@
-qaccessibleinterface.h qaccessible.h
-qaccessibleobject.h qaccessible.h
-qactiongroup.h qaction.h
-qasciicacheiterator.h qasciicache.h
-qasciidictiterator.h qasciidict.h
-qimageconsumer.h qasyncimageio.h
-qimageformat.h qasyncimageio.h
-qimageformattype.h qasyncimageio.h
-qimagedecoder.h qasyncimageio.h
+qaccessibleinterface.h ntqaccessible.h
+qaccessibleobject.h ntqaccessible.h
+qactiongroup.h ntqaction.h
+qasciicacheiterator.h ntqasciicache.h
+qasciidictiterator.h ntqasciidict.h
+qimageconsumer.h ntqasyncimageio.h
+qimageformat.h ntqasyncimageio.h
+qimageformattype.h ntqasyncimageio.h
+qimagedecoder.h ntqasyncimageio.h
 qaxaggregated.h qaxbindable.h
 qaxscriptengine.h qaxscript.h
 qaxscriptmanager.h qaxscript.h
-qbig5hkscscodec.h qbig5codec.h
-qbitval.h qbitarray.h
-qcacheiterator.h qcache.h
-qcanvasitemlist.h qcanvas.h
-qcanvasitem.h qcanvas.h
-qcanvasview.h qcanvas.h
-qcanvaspixmap.h qcanvas.h
-qcanvaspixmaparray.h qcanvas.h
-qcanvassprite.h qcanvas.h
-qcanvaspolygonalitem.h qcanvas.h
-qcanvasrectangle.h qcanvas.h
-qcanvaspolygon.h qcanvas.h
-qcanvasspline.h qcanvas.h
-qcanvasline.h qcanvas.h
-qcanvasellipse.h qcanvas.h
-qcanvastext.h qcanvas.h
-qbytearray.h qcstring.h
-qdate.h qdatetime.h
-qtime.h qdatetime.h
-qdatetimeeditbase.h qdatetimeedit.h
-qdateedit.h qdatetimeedit.h
-qtimeedit.h qdatetimeedit.h
-qdictiterator.h qdict.h
-qdomimplementation.h qdom.h
-qdomnode.h qdom.h
-qdomnodelist.h qdom.h
-qdomdocumenttype.h qdom.h
-qdomdocument.h qdom.h
-qdomnamednodemap.h qdom.h
-qdomdocumentfragment.h qdom.h
-qdomcharacterdata.h qdom.h
-qdomattr.h qdom.h
-qdomelement.h qdom.h
-qdomtext.h qdom.h
-qdomcomment.h qdom.h
-qdomcdatasection.h qdom.h
-qdomnotation.h qdom.h
-qdomentity.h qdom.h
-qdomentityreference.h qdom.h
-qdomprocessinginstruction.h qdom.h
-qstoreddrag.h qdragobject.h
-qtextdrag.h qdragobject.h
-qimagedrag.h qdragobject.h
-quridrag.h qdragobject.h
-qcolordrag.h qdragobject.h
-qtimerevent.h qevent.h
-qmouseevent.h qevent.h
-qwheelevent.h qevent.h
-qtabletevent.h qevent.h
-qkeyevent.h qevent.h
-qfocusevent.h qevent.h
-qpaintevent.h qevent.h
-qmoveevent.h qevent.h
-qresizeevent.h qevent.h
-qcloseevent.h qevent.h
-qicondragevent.h qevent.h
-qshowevent.h qevent.h
-qhideevent.h qevent.h
-qcontextmenuevent.h qevent.h
-qimevent.h qevent.h
-qdropevent.h qevent.h
-qdragmoveevent.h qevent.h
-qdragenterevent.h qevent.h
-qdragleaveevent.h qevent.h
-qchildevent.h qevent.h
-qcustomevent.h qevent.h
-qfileiconprovider.h qfiledialog.h
-qfilepreview.h qfiledialog.h
-qgbkcodec.h qgb18030codec.h
-qgb2312codec.h qgb18030codec.h
-qglformat.h qgl.h
-qglcontext.h qgl.h
-qglwidget.h qgl.h
-qhttpheader.h qhttp.h
-qhttpresponseheader.h qhttp.h
-qhttprequestheader.h qhttp.h
-qiconfactory.h qiconset.h
-qicondragitem.h qiconview.h
-qicondrag.h qiconview.h
-qiconviewitem.h qiconview.h
-qimageio.h qimage.h
-qintcacheiterator.h qintcache.h
-qintdictiterator.h qintdict.h
-qglayoutiterator.h qlayout.h
-qlayoutiterator.h qlayout.h
-qlayoutitem.h qlayout.h
-qspaceritem.h qlayout.h
-qwidgetitem.h qlayout.h
-qgridlayout.h qlayout.h
-qboxlayout.h qlayout.h
-qhboxlayout.h qlayout.h
-qvboxlayout.h qlayout.h
-qlistboxitem.h qlistbox.h
-qlistboxtext.h qlistbox.h
-qlistboxpixmap.h qlistbox.h
-qlistviewitem.h qlistview.h
-qchecklistitem.h qlistview.h
-qlistviewitemiterator.h qlistview.h
+qbig5hkscscodec.h ntqbig5codec.h
+qbitval.h ntqbitarray.h
+qcacheiterator.h ntqcache.h
+qcanvasitemlist.h ntqcanvas.h
+qcanvasitem.h ntqcanvas.h
+qcanvasview.h ntqcanvas.h
+qcanvaspixmap.h ntqcanvas.h
+qcanvaspixmaparray.h ntqcanvas.h
+qcanvassprite.h ntqcanvas.h
+qcanvaspolygonalitem.h ntqcanvas.h
+qcanvasrectangle.h ntqcanvas.h
+qcanvaspolygon.h ntqcanvas.h
+qcanvasspline.h ntqcanvas.h
+qcanvasline.h ntqcanvas.h
+qcanvasellipse.h ntqcanvas.h
+qcanvastext.h ntqcanvas.h
+qbytearray.h ntqcstring.h
+qdate.h ntqdatetime.h
+qtime.h ntqdatetime.h
+qdatetimeeditbase.h ntqdatetimeedit.h
+qdateedit.h ntqdatetimeedit.h
+qtimeedit.h ntqdatetimeedit.h
+qdictiterator.h ntqdict.h
+qdomimplementation.h ntqdom.h
+qdomnode.h ntqdom.h
+qdomnodelist.h ntqdom.h
+qdomdocumenttype.h ntqdom.h
+qdomdocument.h ntqdom.h
+qdomnamednodemap.h ntqdom.h
+qdomdocumentfragment.h ntqdom.h
+qdomcharacterdata.h ntqdom.h
+qdomattr.h ntqdom.h
+qdomelement.h ntqdom.h
+qdomtext.h ntqdom.h
+qdomcomment.h ntqdom.h
+qdomcdatasection.h ntqdom.h
+qdomnotation.h ntqdom.h
+qdomentity.h ntqdom.h
+qdomentityreference.h ntqdom.h
+qdomprocessinginstruction.h ntqdom.h
+qstoreddrag.h ntqdragobject.h
+qtextdrag.h ntqdragobject.h
+qimagedrag.h ntqdragobject.h
+quridrag.h ntqdragobject.h
+qcolordrag.h ntqdragobject.h
+qtimerevent.h ntqevent.h
+qmouseevent.h ntqevent.h
+qwheelevent.h ntqevent.h
+qtabletevent.h ntqevent.h
+qkeyevent.h ntqevent.h
+qfocusevent.h ntqevent.h
+qpaintevent.h ntqevent.h
+qmoveevent.h ntqevent.h
+qresizeevent.h ntqevent.h
+qcloseevent.h ntqevent.h
+qicondragevent.h ntqevent.h
+qshowevent.h ntqevent.h
+qhideevent.h ntqevent.h
+qcontextmenuevent.h ntqevent.h
+qimevent.h ntqevent.h
+qdropevent.h ntqevent.h
+qdragmoveevent.h ntqevent.h
+qdragenterevent.h ntqevent.h
+qdragleaveevent.h ntqevent.h
+qchildevent.h ntqevent.h
+qcustomevent.h ntqevent.h
+qfileiconprovider.h ntqfiledialog.h
+qfilepreview.h ntqfiledialog.h
+ntqgbkcodec.h ntqgb18030codec.h
+qgb2312codec.h ntqgb18030codec.h
+qglformat.h ntqgl.h
+qglcontext.h ntqgl.h
+qglwidget.h ntqgl.h
+qhttpheader.h ntqhttp.h
+qhttpresponseheader.h ntqhttp.h
+qhttprequestheader.h ntqhttp.h
+qiconfactory.h ntqiconset.h
+qicondragitem.h ntqiconview.h
+qicondrag.h ntqiconview.h
+qiconviewitem.h ntqiconview.h
+qimageio.h ntqimage.h
+qintcacheiterator.h ntqintcache.h
+qintdictiterator.h ntqintdict.h
+qglayoutiterator.h ntqlayout.h
+qlayoutiterator.h ntqlayout.h
+qlayoutitem.h ntqlayout.h
+qspaceritem.h ntqlayout.h
+qwidgetitem.h ntqlayout.h
+qgridlayout.h ntqlayout.h
+qboxlayout.h ntqlayout.h
+qhboxlayout.h ntqlayout.h
+qvboxlayout.h ntqlayout.h
+qlistboxitem.h ntqlistbox.h
+qlistboxtext.h ntqlistbox.h
+qlistboxpixmap.h ntqlistbox.h
+qlistviewitem.h ntqlistview.h
+qchecklistitem.h ntqlistview.h
+qlistviewitemiterator.h ntqlistview.h
 qmacstyle.h qmacstyle_mac.h
-qmapiterator.h qmap.h
-qmapconstiterator.h qmap.h
-qcustommenuitem.h qmenudata.h
-qmetaproperty.h qmetaobject.h
-qmimesource.h qmime.h
-qmimesourcefactory.h qmime.h
-qwindowsmime.h qmime.h
-qmacmime.h qmime.h
-qmutexlocker.h qmutex.h
-qnetworkoperation.h qnetworkprotocol.h
-qnpstream.h qnp.h
-qnpwidget.h qnp.h
-qnpinstance.h qnp.h
-qnplugin.h qnp.h
-qobjectlistiterator.h qobjectlist.h
-qcolorgroup.h qpalette.h
-qpngimagepacker.h qpngio.h
-qptrdictiterator.h qptrdict.h
-qptrlistiterator.h qptrlist.h
-qhebrewcodec.h qrtlcodec.h
-qsqlfieldinfo.h qsqlfield.h
-qsqlrecordinfo.h qsqlrecord.h
-qchar.h qstring.h
-qcharref.h qstring.h
-qconststring.h qstring.h
-qstrlistiterator.h qstrlist.h
-qstrilist.h qstrlist.h
-qstyleoption.h qstyle.h
-qstylesheetitem.h qstylesheet.h
-qtab.h qtabbar.h
-qtableselection.h qtable.h
-qtableitem.h qtable.h
-qcombotableitem.h qtable.h
-qchecktableitem.h qtable.h
-qtextencoder.h qtextcodec.h
-qtextdecoder.h qtextcodec.h
-qtextistream.h qtextstream.h
-qtextostream.h qtextstream.h
-qtooltipgroup.h qtooltip.h
-qtranslatormessage.h qtranslator.h
-qintvalidator.h qvalidator.h
-qdoublevalidator.h qvalidator.h
-qregexpvalidator.h qvalidator.h
-qvaluelistiterator.h qvaluelist.h
-qvaluelistconstiterator.h qvaluelist.h
-qxmlnamespacesupport.h qxml.h
-qxmlattributes.h qxml.h
-qxmlinputsource.h qxml.h
-qxmlparseexception.h qxml.h
-qxmlreader.h qxml.h
-qxmlsimplereader.h qxml.h
-qxmllocator.h qxml.h
-qxmlcontenthandler.h qxml.h
-qxmlerrorhandler.h qxml.h
-qxmldtdhandler.h qxml.h
-qxmlentityresolver.h qxml.h
-qxmllexicalhandler.h qxml.h
-qxmldeclhandler.h qxml.h
-qxmldefaulthandler.h qxml.h
+qmapiterator.h ntqmap.h
+qmapconstiterator.h ntqmap.h
+qcustommenuitem.h ntqmenudata.h
+qmetaproperty.h ntqmetaobject.h
+qmimesource.h ntqmime.h
+qmimesourcefactory.h ntqmime.h
+qwindowsmime.h ntqmime.h
+qmacmime.h ntqmime.h
+qmutexlocker.h ntqmutex.h
+qnetworkoperation.h ntqnetworkprotocol.h
+qnpstream.h ntqnp.h
+qnpwidget.h ntqnp.h
+qnpinstance.h ntqnp.h
+qnplugin.h ntqnp.h
+qobjectlistiterator.h ntqobjectlist.h
+qcolorgroup.h ntqpalette.h
+qpngimagepacker.h ntqpngio.h
+qptrdictiterator.h ntqptrdict.h
+qptrlistiterator.h ntqptrlist.h
+qhebrewcodec.h ntqrtlcodec.h
+qsqlfieldinfo.h ntqsqlfield.h
+qsqlrecordinfo.h ntqsqlrecord.h
+qchar.h ntqstring.h
+qcharref.h ntqstring.h
+qconststring.h ntqstring.h
+qstrlistiterator.h ntqstrlist.h
+qstrilist.h ntqstrlist.h
+qstyleoption.h ntqstyle.h
+qstylesheetitem.h ntqstylesheet.h
+qtab.h ntqtabbar.h
+qtableselection.h ntqtable.h
+qtableitem.h ntqtable.h
+qcombotableitem.h ntqtable.h
+qchecktableitem.h ntqtable.h
+qtextencoder.h ntqtextcodec.h
+qtextdecoder.h ntqtextcodec.h
+qtextistream.h ntqtextstream.h
+qtextostream.h ntqtextstream.h
+qtooltipgroup.h ntqtooltip.h
+qtranslatormessage.h ntqtranslator.h
+qintvalidator.h ntqvalidator.h
+qdoublevalidator.h ntqvalidator.h
+qregexpvalidator.h ntqvalidator.h
+qvaluelistiterator.h ntqvaluelist.h
+qvaluelistconstiterator.h ntqvaluelist.h
+qxmlnamespacesupport.h ntqxml.h
+qxmlattributes.h ntqxml.h
+qxmlinputsource.h ntqxml.h
+qxmlparseexception.h ntqxml.h
+qxmlreader.h ntqxml.h
+qxmlsimplereader.h ntqxml.h
+qxmllocator.h ntqxml.h
+qxmlcontenthandler.h ntqxml.h
+qxmlerrorhandler.h ntqxml.h
+qxmldtdhandler.h ntqxml.h
+qxmlentityresolver.h ntqxml.h
+qxmllexicalhandler.h ntqxml.h
+qxmldeclhandler.h ntqxml.h
+qxmldefaulthandler.h ntqxml.h
diff --git a/doc/html/headers.html b/doc/html/headers.html
index 954b11a29..13887d3e7 100644
--- a/doc/html/headers.html
+++ b/doc/html/headers.html
@@ -35,266 +35,266 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
     
    Here are the header files that make up the TQt API:
 
    
 
diff --git a/doc/html/hello-example.html b/doc/html/hello-example.html
index 31f338144..821c3ec57 100644
--- a/doc/html/hello-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/hello-example.html
@@ -50,10 +50,10 @@ and in different colors.
 #ifndef HELLO_H
 #define HELLO_H
 
-#include <qwidget.h>
+#include <ntqwidget.h>
 
 
-class Hello : public TQWidget
+class Hello : public TQWidget
 {
     Q_OBJECT
 public:
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ protected:
 private slots:
     void animate();
 private:
-    TQString t;
+    TQString t;
     int     b;
 };
 
@@ -86,10 +86,10 @@ private:
 *****************************************************************************/
 
 #include "hello.h"
-#include <qpushbutton.h>
-#include <qtimer.h>
-#include <qpainter.h>
-#include <qpixmap.h>
+#include <ntqpushbutton.h>
+#include <ntqtimer.h>
+#include <ntqpainter.h>
+#include <ntqpixmap.h>
 
 
 /*
@@ -97,13 +97,13 @@ private:
 */
 
 Hello::Hello( const char *text, TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQWidget(parent,name), t(text), b(0)
+    : TQWidget(parent,name), t(text), b(0)
 {
-    TQTimer *timer = new TQTimer(this);
-    connect( timer, SIGNAL(timeout()), SLOT(animate()) );
-    timer->start( 40 );
+    TQTimer *timer = new TQTimer(this);
+    connect( timer, SIGNAL(timeout()), SLOT(animate()) );
+    timer->start( 40 );
 
-    resize( 260, 130 );
+    resize( 260, 130 );
 }
 
 
@@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ private:
 void Hello::animate()
 {
     b = (b + 1) & 15;
-    repaint( FALSE );
+    repaint( FALSE );
 }
 
 
@@ -125,9 +125,9 @@ void Hello::animate()
   the widget.
 */
 
-void Hello::mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
+void Hello::mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
 {
-    if ( rect().contains( e->pos() ) )
+    if ( rect().contains( e->pos() ) )
         emit clicked();
 }
 
@@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ void Hello::animate()
   pixmap is then blt'ed to the screen.
 */
 
-void Hello::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
+void Hello::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
 {
     static int sin_tbl[16] = {
         0, 38, 71, 92, 100, 92, 71, 38, 0, -38, -71, -92, -100, -92, -71, -38};
@@ -148,34 +148,34 @@ void Hello::paintEvent( TQFontMetrics fm = fontMetrics();
-    int w = fm.width(t) + 20;
-    int h = fm.height() * 2;
-    int pmx = width()/2 - w/2;
-    int pmy = height()/2 - h/2;
+    TQFontMetrics fm = fontMetrics();
+    int w = fm.width(t) + 20;
+    int h = fm.height() * 2;
+    int pmx = width()/2 - w/2;
+    int pmy = height()/2 - h/2;
 
     // 2: Create the pixmap and fill it with the widget's background
-    TQPixmap pm( w, h );
-    pm.fill( this, pmx, pmy );
+    TQPixmap pm( w, h );
+    pm.fill( this, pmx, pmy );
 
     // 3: Paint the pixmap. Cool wave effect
-    TQPainter p;
+    TQPainter p;
     int x = 10;
-    int y = h/2 + fm.descent();
+    int y = h/2 + fm.descent();
     int i = 0;
-    p.begin( &pm );
-    p.setFont( font() );
+    p.begin( &pm );
+    p.setFont( font() );
     while ( !t[i].isNull() ) {
         int i16 = (b+i) & 15;
-        p.setPen( TQColor((15-i16)*16,255,255,TQColor::Hsv) );
-        p.drawText( x, y-sin_tbl[i16]*h/800, t.mid(i,1), 1 );
-        x += fm.width( t[i] );
+        p.setPen( TQColor((15-i16)*16,255,255,TQColor::Hsv) );
+        p.drawText( x, y-sin_tbl[i16]*h/800, t.mid(i,1), 1 );
+        x += fm.width( t[i] );
         i++;
     }
-    p.end();
+    p.end();
 
     // 4: Copy the pixmap to the Hello widget
-    bitBlt( this, pmx, pmy, &pm );
+    bitBlt( this, pmx, pmy, &pm );
 }
 
    
 
@@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ void Hello::paintEvent( qapplication.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
 
 
 /*
@@ -202,25 +202,25 @@ void Hello::paintEvent( TQApplication a(argc,argv);
-    TQString s;
+    TQApplication a(argc,argv);
+    TQString s;
     for ( int i=1; i<argc; i++ ) {
         s += argv[i];
         if ( i<argc-1 )
             s += " ";
     }
-    if ( s.isEmpty() )
+    if ( s.isEmpty() )
         s = "Hello, World";
     Hello h( s );
 #ifndef QT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA   // for TQt/Embedded minimal build
-    h.setCaption( "TQt says hello" );
+    h.setCaption( "TQt says hello" );
 #endif
-    TQObject::connect( &h, SIGNAL(clicked()), &a, SLOT(quit()) );
-    h.setFont( TQFont("times",32,TQFont::Bold) );         // default font
-    h.setBackgroundColor( TQt::white );                  // default bg color
-    a.setMainWidget( &h );
-    h.show();
-    return a.exec();
+    TQObject::connect( &h, SIGNAL(clicked()), &a, SLOT(quit()) );
+    h.setFont( TQFont("times",32,TQFont::Bold) );         // default font
+    h.setBackgroundColor( TQt::white );                  // default bg color
+    a.setMainWidget( &h );
+    h.show();
+    return a.exec();
 }
 
    
 
diff --git a/doc/html/helpsystem-example.html b/doc/html/helpsystem-example.html
index 3713cea67..69c998158 100644
--- a/doc/html/helpsystem-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/helpsystem-example.html
@@ -37,103 +37,103 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 This example demonstrates the different TQt classes
 that can be used to provide context sensitive help
 in an application.
-
     It uses TQToolTip and TQWhatsThis to provide both static and 
+
     It uses TQToolTip and TQWhatsThis to provide both static and 
 dynamic balloon help for the widgets in the application, and 
 TQToolTipGroup to display extended information for each tooltip
-in the statusbar. TQAssistantClient is used to display help 
+in the statusbar. TQAssistantClient is used to display help 
 pages using TQt Assistant. 
 
     The application has a user interface based on a 
-TQMainWindow with a menubar, statusbar and a toolbar, and uses 
-a TQTable as the central widget.
+TQMainWindow with a menubar, statusbar and a toolbar, and uses 
+a TQTable as the central widget.
 
 
-
        class HeaderToolTip : public TQToolTip
+
        class HeaderToolTip : public TQToolTip
     {
     public:
-        HeaderToolTip( TQHeader *header, TQToolTipGroup *group = 0 );
+        HeaderToolTip( TQHeader *header, TQToolTipGroup *group = 0 );
 
     protected:
-        void maybeTip ( const TQPoint &p );
+        void maybeTip ( const TQPoint &p );
     };
 
    
 
     Two TQToolTip subclasses implement dynamic tooltips for
-TQHeader and TQTable by reimplementing maybeTip(). The 
-constructors differ from the TQToolTip constructor in having a 
+TQHeader and TQTable by reimplementing maybeTip(). The 
+constructors differ from the TQToolTip constructor in having a 
 TQHeader and a TQTable respectively as the first parameter for 
-the constructor instead of a TQWidget. This is because 
+the constructor instead of a TQWidget. This is because 
 we want to ensure that only headers and tables can be 
 passed as arguments. A TQToolTipGroup can be provided as the
 second argument to show tooltips in, for example a statusbar.
-
     
        class TableToolTip : public TQToolTip
+
     
        class TableToolTip : public TQToolTip
     {
     public:
-        TableToolTip( TQTable* table, TQToolTipGroup *group = 0  );
+        TableToolTip( TQTable* table, TQToolTipGroup *group = 0  );
 
     protected:
-        void maybeTip( const TQPoint &p );
+        void maybeTip( const TQPoint &p );
 
     private:
-        TQTable *table;
+        TQTable *table;
     };
 
    
-
     The TableToolTip class keeps a reference to the TQTable
+
     The TableToolTip class keeps a reference to the TQTable
 as a member for easier access of the TQTable object later on.
 
     
 
-
        HeaderToolTip::HeaderToolTip( TQHeader *header, TQToolTipGroup *group )
-    : TQToolTip( header, group )
+
        HeaderToolTip::HeaderToolTip( TQHeader *header, TQToolTipGroup *group )
+    : TQToolTip( header, group )
     {
     }
 
    
 
     The HeaderToolTip constructor propagates the parameters
-to the TQToolTip constructor.
-
        void HeaderToolTip::maybeTip ( const TQPoint& p )
+to the TQToolTip constructor.
+
        void HeaderToolTip::maybeTip ( const TQPoint& p )
     {
-        TQHeader *header = (TQHeader*)parentWidget();
+        TQHeader *header = (TQHeader*)parentWidget();
 
         int section = 0;
 
-        if ( header->orientation() == Horizontal )
-            section = header->sectionAt( header->offset() + p.x() );
+        if ( header->orientation() == Horizontal )
+            section = header->sectionAt( header->offset() + p.x() );
         else
-            section = header->sectionAt( header->offset() + p.y() );
+            section = header->sectionAt( header->offset() + p.y() );
 
-        TQString tipString = header->label( section );
-        tip( header->sectionRect( section ), tipString, "This is a section in a header" );
+        TQString tipString = header->label( section );
+        tip( header->sectionRect( section ), tipString, "This is a section in a header" );
     }
 
    
-
     The implementation of maybeTip() uses the TQHeader API
+
     The implementation of maybeTip() uses the TQHeader API
 to get the section at the requested position and uses
-TQToolTip::tip() to display the section's label in a
+TQToolTip::tip() to display the section's label in a
 tooltip. The second string is used by TQToolTipGroup and will
 show up in the statusbar.
-
     
        TableToolTip::TableToolTip( TQTable *tipTable, TQToolTipGroup *group )
-    : TQToolTip( tipTable->viewport(), group ), table( tipTable )
+
     
        TableToolTip::TableToolTip( TQTable *tipTable, TQToolTipGroup *group )
+    : TQToolTip( tipTable->viewport(), group ), table( tipTable )
     {
     }
 
    
-
     Since TQTable is a TQScrollView all user interaction 
+
     Since TQTable is a TQScrollView all user interaction 
 happens on TQTable's viewport() . The TableToolTip 
 constructor passes the viewport() and the tooltip
-group to the TQToolTip constructor, and initializes the table
+group to the TQToolTip constructor, and initializes the table
 member with the TQTable pointer itself.
-
        void TableToolTip::maybeTip ( const TQPoint &p )
+
        void TableToolTip::maybeTip ( const TQPoint &p )
     {
-        TQPoint cp = table->viewportToContents( p );
-        int row = table->rowAt( cp.y() );
-        int col = table->columnAt( cp.x() );
+        TQPoint cp = table->viewportToContents( p );
+        int row = table->rowAt( cp.y() );
+        int col = table->columnAt( cp.x() );
 
-        TQString tipString = table->text( row, col );
+        TQString tipString = table->text( row, col );
 
-        TQRect cr = table->cellGeometry( row, col );
+        TQRect cr = table->cellGeometry( row, col );
 
    
 
     The implementation of maybeTip() uses the TQTable API
 to get information about the cell at the requested position. 
-The TQTable API expects contents coordinates, and since the 
+The TQTable API expects contents coordinates, and since the 
 requested point is relative to the viewport we need to translate
 the coordinates before we can use TQTable's functions.  
-
            cr.moveTopLeft( table->contentsToViewport( cr.topLeft() ) );
-        tip( cr, tipString, "This is a cell in a table" );
+
            cr.moveTopLeft( table->contentsToViewport( cr.topLeft() ) );
+        tip( cr, tipString, "This is a cell in a table" );
     }
 
    
 
@@ -141,50 +141,50 @@ the coordinates before we can use TQTable's functions.
 
 
     We translate the cell's geometry back to viewport coordinates
 so that the tooltip disappears when the mouse cursor leaves 
-the cell, and use TQToolTip::tip() to display the cell's label 
+the cell, and use TQToolTip::tip() to display the cell's label 
 in a tooltip and to provide text for the TQToolTipGroup as before. 
-
        class WhatsThis : public TQObject, public TQWhatsThis
+
        class WhatsThis : public TQObject, public TQWhatsThis
     {
         Q_OBJECT
     public:
-        WhatsThis( TQWidget *w, TQWidget *watch = 0 );
+        WhatsThis( TQWidget *w, TQWidget *watch = 0 );
 
-        bool clicked( const TQString &link );
-        TQWidget *parentWidget() const;
+        bool clicked( const TQString &link );
+        TQWidget *parentWidget() const;
 
     signals:
-        void linkClicked( const TQString &link );
+        void linkClicked( const TQString &link );
 
     private:
-        TQWidget *widget;
+        TQWidget *widget;
     };
 
    
 
 
 
-
     The WhatsThis class is a subclass of both TQObject and 
-TQWhatsThis and serves as a base class for the HeaderWhatsThis
+
     The WhatsThis class is a subclass of both TQObject and 
+TQWhatsThis and serves as a base class for the HeaderWhatsThis
 and TableWhatsThis classes. (1)  WhatsThis 
 reimplements clicked() which will be called when the user clicks
 inside the "What's this?" window. It also declares a signal 
 linkClicked() which will be emitted when a hyperlink is clicked.
-
        WhatsThis::WhatsThis( TQWidget *w, TQWidget *watch )
-    : TQWhatsThis( watch ? watch : w ), widget( w )
+
        WhatsThis::WhatsThis( TQWidget *w, TQWidget *watch )
+    : TQWhatsThis( watch ? watch : w ), widget( w )
     {
     }
 
    
 
     The WhatsThis constructor takes two parameters, the first is the
 widget we want to provide WhatsThis for, and the second is the
 one which receives the events. Normally this is the same widget,
-but some widgets, like TQTable, are more complex and have a 
+but some widgets, like TQTable, are more complex and have a 
 viewport() widget which receives the events. If such a widget
 is passed to the constructor it will propagate the parameter to 
-the TQWhatsThis constructor and store the TQWidget pointer itself 
+the TQWhatsThis constructor and store the TQWidget pointer itself 
 in it's member variable to allow easier use of the TQWidget API 
 later on.
-
        bool WhatsThis::clicked( const TQString &link )
+
        bool WhatsThis::clicked( const TQString &link )
     {
-        if ( !link.isEmpty() )
+        if ( !link.isEmpty() )
             emit linkClicked( link );
 
         return TRUE;
@@ -198,17 +198,17 @@ if a hyperlink has been clicked.
 
        class HeaderWhatsThis : public WhatsThis
     {
     public:
-        HeaderWhatsThis( TQHeader *h );
+        HeaderWhatsThis( TQHeader *h );
 
-        TQString text( const TQPoint &p );
+        TQString text( const TQPoint &p );
     };
 
    
 
     
        class TableWhatsThis : public WhatsThis
     {
     public:
-        TableWhatsThis( TQTable *t );
+        TableWhatsThis( TQTable *t );
 
-        TQString text( const TQPoint &p );
+        TQString text( const TQPoint &p );
     };
 
    
 
     
@@ -220,63 +220,63 @@ text() to make it possible to return texts depending on the
 mouse click's position. All the other functionality is 
 already provided by the generic WhatsThis base class. We ensure
 type safety here in the same manner as in the tooltip classes.
-
        HeaderWhatsThis::HeaderWhatsThis( TQHeader *h )
+
        HeaderWhatsThis::HeaderWhatsThis( TQHeader *h )
     : WhatsThis( h )
     {
     }
 
    
 
     The HeaderWhatsThis constructor propagates the parameter to the 
 WhatsThis constructor.
-
        TQString HeaderWhatsThis::text( const TQPoint &p )
+
        TQString HeaderWhatsThis::text( const TQPoint &p )
     {
-        TQHeader *header = (TQHeader*)parentWidget();
+        TQHeader *header = (TQHeader*)parentWidget();
 
-        TQString orient;
+        TQString orient;
         int section;
-        if ( header->orientation() == TQObject::Horizontal ) {
+        if ( header->orientation() == TQObject::Horizontal ) {
             orient = "horizontal";
-            section = header->sectionAt( p.x() );
+            section = header->sectionAt( p.x() );
         } else {
             orient = "vertical";
-            section = header->sectionAt( p.y() );
+            section = header->sectionAt( p.y() );
         }
         if( section == -1 )
             return "This is empty space.";
-        TQString docsPath = TQDir("../../doc").absPath();
-        return TQString("This is section number %1 in the %2 <a href=%2/html/qheader.html>header</a>.").
+        TQString docsPath = TQDir("../../doc").absPath();
+        return TQString("This is section number %1 in the %2 <a href=%2/html/ntqheader.html>header</a>.").
             arg(section + 1).
             arg(orient).
             arg(docsPath);
     }
 
    
-
     The implementation of text() uses the TQHeader API to determine
+
     The implementation of text() uses the TQHeader API to determine
 whether we have a horizontal or a vertical header and returns
 a string which states the header's orientation and section.
 (2)  
-
        TableWhatsThis::TableWhatsThis( TQTable *t )
-    : WhatsThis( t, t->viewport() )
+
        TableWhatsThis::TableWhatsThis( TQTable *t )
+    : WhatsThis( t, t->viewport() )
     {
     }
 
    
-
     Since TQTable is a scrollview and has a viewport() which receives
+
     Since TQTable is a scrollview and has a viewport() which receives
 the events, we propagate the table itself and the table's 
 viewport() to the WhatsThis constructor.
-
        TQString TableWhatsThis::text( const TQPoint &p )
+
        TQString TableWhatsThis::text( const TQPoint &p )
     {
-        TQTable *table = (TQTable*)parentWidget();
+        TQTable *table = (TQTable*)parentWidget();
 
-        TQPoint cp = table->viewportToContents( p );
-        int row = table->rowAt( cp.y() );
-        int col = table->columnAt( cp.x() );
+        TQPoint cp = table->viewportToContents( p );
+        int row = table->rowAt( cp.y() );
+        int col = table->columnAt( cp.x() );
 
         if ( row == -1 || col == -1 )
             return "This is empty space.";
 
-        TQTableItem* i = table->item( row,col  );
+        TQTableItem* i = table->item( row,col  );
         if ( !i )
             return "This is an empty cell.";
 
-        TQString docsPath = TQDir("../../doc").absPath();
+        TQString docsPath = TQDir("../../doc").absPath();
 
         if ( TQTableItem::RTTI == i->rtti() ) {
             return TQString("This is a <a href=%1/html/qtableitem.html>TQTableItem</a>.").
@@ -287,13 +287,13 @@ viewport() to the WhatsThis constructor.
                            arg(docsPath);
         } else if ( TQCheckTableItem::RTTI == i->rtti() ) {
             return TQString("This is a <a href=%1/html/qchecktableitem.html>TQCheckTableItem</a>."
-                           "<br>It provide <a href=%1/html/qcheckbox.html>checkboxes</a> in tables.").
+                           "<br>It provide <a href=%1/html/ntqcheckbox.html>checkboxes</a> in tables.").
                            arg(docsPath).arg(docsPath);
         }
         return "This is a user defined table item.";
     }
 
    
-
     The implementation of text() uses the TQTable API to get 
+
     The implementation of text() uses the TQTable API to get 
 information about the cell at the requested position. 
 The TQTable API expects contents coordinates, so we need to 
 translate the point as shown earlier for the tooltip classes. 
@@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ We use the rtti() function to figure out the item's type
 and return a string accordingly. 
 
     
 
-
        class MainWindow : public TQMainWindow
+
        class MainWindow : public TQMainWindow
     {
         Q_OBJECT
     public:
@@ -315,106 +315,106 @@ and return a string accordingly.
         HeaderToolTip *horizontalTip;
         HeaderToolTip *verticalTip;
         TableToolTip *cellTip;
-        TQAssistantClient *assistant;
+        TQAssistantClient *assistant;
     };
 
    
-
     A TQMainWindow is used to create a user interface that uses the 
+
     A TQMainWindow is used to create a user interface that uses the 
 above classes in addition to TQt Assistant to provide context
 sensitive help in the application.
 
     The MainWindow class declares a slot called assistantSlot() 
 which creates an instance of TQt Assistant when it is called. 
 The class keeps references to the tooltip classes as members
 because they are not TQObjects and need to be deleted explicitly.
-The class has a reference to TQAssistantClient as a 
+The class has a reference to TQAssistantClient as a 
 member as well, to allow easier access to TQt Assistant later on.
 
     
 
 
        MainWindow::MainWindow()
     {
-        statusBar();
-        assistant = new TQAssistantClient( TQDir("../../bin").absPath(), this );
+        statusBar();
+        assistant = new TQAssistantClient( TQDir("../../bin").absPath(), this );
 
    
 
     The MainWindow constructor creates an instance of 
-TQAssistantClient using TQString::null as the first argument
+TQAssistantClient using TQString::null as the first argument
 so that the system path is used.
-
            TQTable* table = new TQTable( 2, 3, this );
-        setCentralWidget( table );
+
            TQTable* table = new TQTable( 2, 3, this );
+        setCentralWidget( table );
 
         // populate table
-        TQStringList comboEntries;
+        TQStringList comboEntries;
         comboEntries << "one" << "two" << "three" << "four";
         TQComboTableItem* comboItem1 = new TQComboTableItem( table, comboEntries );
         TQComboTableItem* comboItem2 = new TQComboTableItem( table, comboEntries );
         TQCheckTableItem* checkItem1 = new TQCheckTableItem( table, "Check me" );
         TQCheckTableItem* checkItem2 = new TQCheckTableItem( table, "Check me" );
 
-        table->setItem( 0, 0, comboItem1 );
-        table->setItem( 1, 0, comboItem2 );
+        table->setItem( 0, 0, comboItem1 );
+        table->setItem( 1, 0, comboItem2 );
 
-        table->setItem( 1, 1, checkItem1  );
-        table->setItem( 0, 1, checkItem2 );
+        table->setItem( 1, 1, checkItem1  );
+        table->setItem( 0, 1, checkItem2 );
 
-        table->setText( 1, 2, "Text" );
+        table->setText( 1, 2, "Text" );
 
-        table->horizontalHeader()->setLabel( 0, " Combos" );
-        table->horizontalHeader()->setLabel( 1, "Checkboxes" );
-        table->verticalHeader()->setLabel( 0, "1" );
-        table->verticalHeader()->setLabel( 1, "2" );
+        table->horizontalHeader()->setLabel( 0, " Combos" );
+        table->horizontalHeader()->setLabel( 1, "Checkboxes" );
+        table->verticalHeader()->setLabel( 0, "1" );
+        table->verticalHeader()->setLabel( 1, "2" );
 
         // populate menubar
-        TQPopupMenu* fileMenu = new TQPopupMenu( this );
-        TQPopupMenu* helpMenu = new TQPopupMenu( this );
+        TQPopupMenu* fileMenu = new TQPopupMenu( this );
+        TQPopupMenu* helpMenu = new TQPopupMenu( this );
 
-        menuBar()->insertItem( "&File", fileMenu );
-        menuBar()->insertItem( "&Help", helpMenu );
+        menuBar()->insertItem( "&File", fileMenu );
+        menuBar()->insertItem( "&Help", helpMenu );
 
-        int fileId = fileMenu->insertItem( "E&xit", this, SLOT(close()) );
+        int fileId = fileMenu->insertItem( "E&xit", this, SLOT(close()) );
 
-        int helpId = helpMenu->insertItem( "Open Assistant", this, SLOT(assistantSlot()) );
+        int helpId = helpMenu->insertItem( "Open Assistant", this, SLOT(assistantSlot()) );
 
         // populate toolbar
-        TQToolBar* toolbar = new TQToolBar( this );
-        TQToolButton* assistantButton = new TQToolButton( toolbar );
-        assistantButton->setIconSet( TQPixmap("appicon.png") );
+        TQToolBar* toolbar = new TQToolBar( this );
+        TQToolButton* assistantButton = new TQToolButton( toolbar );
+        assistantButton->setIconSet( TQPixmap("appicon.png") );
 
    
-
     A TQTable is used as the central widget and the table, the menus 
+
     A TQTable is used as the central widget and the table, the menus 
 and the toolbar are populated.
-
            TQWhatsThis::whatsThisButton( toolbar );
+
            TQWhatsThis::whatsThisButton( toolbar );
 
    
-
     The static function whatsThisButton() creates a TQToolButton
+
     The static function whatsThisButton() creates a TQToolButton
 which will enter "What's this?" mode when clicked.
 
            //create tooltipgroup
         TQToolTipGroup * tipGroup = new TQToolTipGroup( this );
-        connect( tipGroup, SIGNAL(showTip(const TQString&)), statusBar(),
-            SLOT(message(const TQString&)) );
-        connect( tipGroup, SIGNAL(removeTip()), statusBar(), SLOT(clear()) );
+        connect( tipGroup, SIGNAL(showTip(const TQString&)), statusBar(),
+            SLOT(message(const TQString&)) );
+        connect( tipGroup, SIGNAL(removeTip()), statusBar(), SLOT(clear()) );
 
    
 
     A TQToolTipGroup is created and will show and remove tooltips
 in the statusbar as the tooltips are displayed on the widgets.
 
            // set up tooltips
-        TQToolTip::add( assistantButton, tr ("Open Assistant"), tipGroup, "Opens TQt Assistant" );
+        TQToolTip::add( assistantButton, tr ("Open Assistant"), tipGroup, "Opens TQt Assistant" );
 
-        horizontalTip = new HeaderToolTip( table->horizontalHeader(), tipGroup );
-        verticalTip = new HeaderToolTip( table->verticalHeader(), tipGroup );
+        horizontalTip = new HeaderToolTip( table->horizontalHeader(), tipGroup );
+        verticalTip = new HeaderToolTip( table->verticalHeader(), tipGroup );
 
         cellTip = new TableToolTip( table, tipGroup );
 
    
 
     The tooltips are set up. The static function add() sets up a 
 tooltip on the Assistant toolbutton. Tooltip objects are created
-using the TQToolTip subclasses, the constructor's first parameter
+using the TQToolTip subclasses, the constructor's first parameter
 specifies the widget we want to add dynamic tooltips for and the
 second argument specifies the TQToolTipGroup they should belong 
 to.
 
            // set up whats this
-        TQWhatsThis::add ( assistantButton, "This is a toolbutton which opens Assistant" );
+        TQWhatsThis::add ( assistantButton, "This is a toolbutton which opens Assistant" );
 
-        HeaderWhatsThis *horizontalWhatsThis = new HeaderWhatsThis( table->horizontalHeader() );
-        HeaderWhatsThis *verticalWhatsThis = new HeaderWhatsThis( table->verticalHeader() );
+        HeaderWhatsThis *horizontalWhatsThis = new HeaderWhatsThis( table->horizontalHeader() );
+        HeaderWhatsThis *verticalWhatsThis = new HeaderWhatsThis( table->verticalHeader() );
 
         TableWhatsThis *cellWhatsThis = new TableWhatsThis( table );
 
-        fileMenu->setWhatsThis( fileId, "Click here to exit the application" );
-        helpMenu->setWhatsThis( helpId, "Click here to open Assistant" );
+        fileMenu->setWhatsThis( fileId, "Click here to exit the application" );
+        helpMenu->setWhatsThis( helpId, "Click here to open Assistant" );
 
    
 
     The WhatsThis help is set up. The static function add() adds 
 What's This? help for the toolbutton which opens Assistant. 
@@ -422,13 +422,13 @@ Instances of the two WhatsThis subclasses are created for the
 headers and the table. What's This? help is also added for the 
 menu items.
 
            // connections
-        connect( assistantButton, SIGNAL(clicked()), this, SLOT(assistantSlot()) );
-        connect( horizontalWhatsThis, SIGNAL(linkClicked(const TQString&)), assistant,
-            SLOT(showPage(const TQString&)) );
-        connect( verticalWhatsThis, SIGNAL(linkClicked(const TQString&)), assistant,
-            SLOT(showPage(const TQString&)) );
-        connect( cellWhatsThis, SIGNAL(linkClicked(const TQString&)), assistant,
-            SLOT(showPage(const TQString&)) );
+        connect( assistantButton, SIGNAL(clicked()), this, SLOT(assistantSlot()) );
+        connect( horizontalWhatsThis, SIGNAL(linkClicked(const TQString&)), assistant,
+            SLOT(showPage(const TQString&)) );
+        connect( verticalWhatsThis, SIGNAL(linkClicked(const TQString&)), assistant,
+            SLOT(showPage(const TQString&)) );
+        connect( cellWhatsThis, SIGNAL(linkClicked(const TQString&)), assistant,
+            SLOT(showPage(const TQString&)) );
     }
 
    
 
     Signals and slots are connected, so that the relevant pages will
@@ -442,13 +442,13 @@ the assistant button.
     }
 
    
 
     The destructor deletes the tooltips. We need to delete the 
-tooltips explicitly since TQToolTip is, as mentioned above, not 
-a subclass of TQObject and the instances of TQToolTip not will be
+tooltips explicitly since TQToolTip is, as mentioned above, not 
+a subclass of TQObject and the instances of TQToolTip not will be
 deleted when the widget is deleted.
 
        void MainWindow::assistantSlot()
     {
-        TQString docsPath = TQDir("../../doc").absPath();
-        assistant->showPage( TQString("%1/html/qassistantclient.html").arg(docsPath) );
+        TQString docsPath = TQDir("../../doc").absPath();
+        assistant->showPage( TQString("%1/html/ntqassistantclient.html").arg(docsPath) );
     }
 
    
 
     The assistantSlot() uses applicationDirPath() to find the 
@@ -456,16 +456,16 @@ location of the documentation files and shows the specified page
 in TQt Assistant.
 
 
-
        #include <qapplication.h>
+
        #include <ntqapplication.h>
     #include "mainwindow.h"
 
     int main( int argc, char** argv )
     {
-        TQApplication app( argc, argv );
+        TQApplication app( argc, argv );
         MainWindow main;
-        main.show();
-        app.setMainWidget( &main );
-        return app.exec();
+        main.show();
+        app.setMainWidget( &main );
+        return app.exec();
     }
 
    
 
     The main function is a standard implementation opening
@@ -476,11 +476,11 @@ and use the make tool to build the library.
 
 
    
 
       
    1. 
-Note that moc requires that TQObject
+Note that moc requires that TQObject
 is the first base class.  Back... 
    2. 
 
 Note that we have to explicitly scope the orientation
-(TQObject or TQWhatsThis) since HeaderWhatsThis uses multiple 
+(TQObject or TQWhatsThis) since HeaderWhatsThis uses multiple 
 inheritance.  Back...
    
 
    See also Examples.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/helpsystem.html b/doc/html/helpsystem.html
index 7be8d7ca1..8d8a3ac00 100644
--- a/doc/html/helpsystem.html
+++ b/doc/html/helpsystem.html
@@ -48,12 +48,12 @@ help is a digression from their real task.
 
 
     
 
    
-
    TQStatusBarHorizontal bar suitable for presenting status information
-
    TQStyleSheetCollection of styles for rich text rendering and a generator of tags
-
    TQTextBrowserRich text browser with hypertext navigation
-
    TQToolTipTool tips (balloon help) for any widget or rectangular part of a widget
+
    TQStatusBarHorizontal bar suitable for presenting status information
+
    TQStyleSheetCollection of styles for rich text rendering and a generator of tags
+
    TQTextBrowserRich text browser with hypertext navigation
+
    TQToolTipTool tips (balloon help) for any widget or rectangular part of a widget
 
    TQToolTipGroupCollects tool tips into related groups
-
    TQWhatsThisSimple description of any widget, i.e. answering the question "What's this?"
+
    TQWhatsThisSimple description of any widget, i.e. answering the question "What's this?"
 
    
 
 
    
diff --git a/doc/html/helpviewer-example.html b/doc/html/helpviewer-example.html
index 005739c72..08bb94c00 100644
--- a/doc/html/helpviewer-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/helpviewer-example.html
@@ -50,34 +50,34 @@ TQt's richtext capabilities.
 #ifndef HELPWINDOW_H
 #define HELPWINDOW_H
 
-#include <qmainwindow.h>
-#include <qtextbrowser.h>
-#include <qstringlist.h>
-#include <qmap.h>
-#include <qdir.h>
+#include <ntqmainwindow.h>
+#include <ntqtextbrowser.h>
+#include <ntqstringlist.h>
+#include <ntqmap.h>
+#include <ntqdir.h>
 
 class TQComboBox;
 class TQPopupMenu;
 
-class HelpWindow : public TQMainWindow
+class HelpWindow : public TQMainWindow
 {
     Q_OBJECT
 public:
-    HelpWindow( const TQString& home_,  const TQString& path, TQWidget* parent = 0, const char *name=0 );
+    HelpWindow( const TQString& home_,  const TQString& path, TQWidget* parent = 0, const char *name=0 );
     ~HelpWindow();
 
 private slots:
     void setBackwardAvailable( bool );
     void setForwardAvailable( bool );
 
-    void sourceChanged( const TQString& );
+    void sourceChanged( const TQString& );
     void about();
     void aboutTQt();
     void openFile();
     void newWindow();
     void print();
 
-    void pathSelected( const TQString & );
+    void pathSelected( const TQString & );
     void histChosen( int );
     void bookmChosen( int );
     void addBookmark();
@@ -86,12 +86,12 @@ private:
     void readHistory();
     void readBookmarks();
 
-    TQTextBrowser* browser;
-    TQComboBox *pathCombo;
+    TQTextBrowser* browser;
+    TQComboBox *pathCombo;
     int backwardId, forwardId;
-    TQStringList history, bookmarks;
-    TQMap<int, TQString> mHistory, mBookmarks;
-    TQPopupMenu *hist, *bookm;
+    TQStringList history, bookmarks;
+    TQMap<int, TQString> mHistory, mBookmarks;
+    TQPopupMenu *hist, *bookm;
 
 };
 
@@ -116,177 +116,177 @@ private:
 *****************************************************************************/
 
 #include "helpwindow.h"
-#include <qstatusbar.h>
-#include <qpixmap.h>
-#include <qpopupmenu.h>
-#include <qmenubar.h>
-#include <qtoolbar.h>
-#include <qtoolbutton.h>
-#include <qiconset.h>
-#include <qfile.h>
-#include <qtextstream.h>
-#include <qstylesheet.h>
-#include <qmessagebox.h>
-#include <qfiledialog.h>
-#include <qapplication.h>
-#include <qcombobox.h>
-#include <qevent.h>
-#include <qlineedit.h>
-#include <qobjectlist.h>
-#include <qfileinfo.h>
-#include <qfile.h>
-#include <qdatastream.h>
-#include <qprinter.h>
-#include <qsimplerichtext.h>
-#include <qpainter.h>
-#include <qpaintdevicemetrics.h>
+#include <ntqstatusbar.h>
+#include <ntqpixmap.h>
+#include <ntqpopupmenu.h>
+#include <ntqmenubar.h>
+#include <ntqtoolbar.h>
+#include <ntqtoolbutton.h>
+#include <ntqiconset.h>
+#include <ntqfile.h>
+#include <ntqtextstream.h>
+#include <ntqstylesheet.h>
+#include <ntqmessagebox.h>
+#include <ntqfiledialog.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
+#include <ntqcombobox.h>
+#include <ntqevent.h>
+#include <ntqlineedit.h>
+#include <ntqobjectlist.h>
+#include <ntqfileinfo.h>
+#include <ntqfile.h>
+#include <ntqdatastream.h>
+#include <ntqprinter.h>
+#include <ntqsimplerichtext.h>
+#include <ntqpainter.h>
+#include <ntqpaintdevicemetrics.h>
 
 #include <ctype.h>
 
-HelpWindow::HelpWindow( const TQString& home_, const TQString& _path,
-                        TQWidget* parent, const char *name )
-    : TQMainWindow( parent, name, WDestructiveClose ),
+HelpWindow::HelpWindow( const TQString& home_, const TQString& _path,
+                        TQWidget* parent, const char *name )
+    : TQMainWindow( parent, name, WDestructiveClose ),
       pathCombo( 0 )
 {
     readHistory();
     readBookmarks();
 
-    browser = new TQTextBrowser( this );
+    browser = new TQTextBrowser( this );
 
-    browser->mimeSourceFactory()->setFilePath( _path );
-    browser->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Panel | TQFrame::Sunken );
-    connect( browser, SIGNAL( sourceChanged(const TQString& ) ),
-             this, SLOT( sourceChanged( const TQString&) ) );
+    browser->mimeSourceFactory()->setFilePath( _path );
+    browser->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Panel | TQFrame::Sunken );
+    connect( browser, SIGNAL( sourceChanged(const TQString& ) ),
+             this, SLOT( sourceChanged( const TQString&) ) );
 
-    setCentralWidget( browser );
+    setCentralWidget( browser );
 
-    if ( !home_.isEmpty() )
-        browser->setSource( home_ );
+    if ( !home_.isEmpty() )
+        browser->setSource( home_ );
 
-    connect( browser, SIGNAL( highlighted( const TQString&) ),
-             statusBar(), SLOT( message( const TQString&)) );
+    connect( browser, SIGNAL( highlighted( const TQString&) ),
+             statusBar(), SLOT( message( const TQString&)) );
 
-    resize( 640,700 );
+    resize( 640,700 );
 
-    TQPopupMenu* file = new TQPopupMenu( this );
-    file->insertItem( tr("&New Window"), this, SLOT( newWindow() ), CTRL+Key_N );
-    file->insertItem( tr("&Open File"), this, SLOT( openFile() ), CTRL+Key_O );
-    file->insertItem( tr("&Print"), this, SLOT( print() ), CTRL+Key_P );
-    file->insertSeparator();
-    file->insertItem( tr("&Close"), this, SLOT( close() ), CTRL+Key_Q );
-    file->insertItem( tr("E&xit"), qApp, SLOT( closeAllWindows() ), CTRL+Key_X );
+    TQPopupMenu* file = new TQPopupMenu( this );
+    file->insertItem( tr("&New Window"), this, SLOT( newWindow() ), CTRL+Key_N );
+    file->insertItem( tr("&Open File"), this, SLOT( openFile() ), CTRL+Key_O );
+    file->insertItem( tr("&Print"), this, SLOT( print() ), CTRL+Key_P );
+    file->insertSeparator();
+    file->insertItem( tr("&Close"), this, SLOT( close() ), CTRL+Key_Q );
+    file->insertItem( tr("E&xit"), qApp, SLOT( closeAllWindows() ), CTRL+Key_X );
 
     // The same three icons are used twice each.
-    TQIconSet icon_back( TQPixmap("back.xpm") );
-    TQIconSet icon_forward( TQPixmap("forward.xpm") );
-    TQIconSet icon_home( TQPixmap("home.xpm") );
+    TQIconSet icon_back( TQPixmap("back.xpm") );
+    TQIconSet icon_forward( TQPixmap("forward.xpm") );
+    TQIconSet icon_home( TQPixmap("home.xpm") );
 
-    TQPopupMenu* go = new TQPopupMenu( this );
-    backwardId = go->insertItem( icon_back,
-                                 tr("&Backward"), browser, SLOT( backward() ),
+    TQPopupMenu* go = new TQPopupMenu( this );
+    backwardId = go->insertItem( icon_back,
+                                 tr("&Backward"), browser, SLOT( backward() ),
                                  CTRL+Key_Left );
-    forwardId = go->insertItem( icon_forward,
-                                tr("&Forward"), browser, SLOT( forward() ),
+    forwardId = go->insertItem( icon_forward,
+                                tr("&Forward"), browser, SLOT( forward() ),
                                 CTRL+Key_Right );
-    go->insertItem( icon_home, tr("&Home"), browser, SLOT( home() ) );
+    go->insertItem( icon_home, tr("&Home"), browser, SLOT( home() ) );
 
-    TQPopupMenu* help = new TQPopupMenu( this );
-    help->insertItem( tr("&About"), this, SLOT( about() ) );
-    help->insertItem( tr("About &TQt"), this, SLOT( aboutTQt() ) );
+    TQPopupMenu* help = new TQPopupMenu( this );
+    help->insertItem( tr("&About"), this, SLOT( about() ) );
+    help->insertItem( tr("About &TQt"), this, SLOT( aboutTQt() ) );
 
-    hist = new TQPopupMenu( this );
+    hist = new TQPopupMenu( this );
     TQStringList::Iterator it = history.begin();
     for ( ; it != history.end(); ++it )
-        mHistory[ hist->insertItem( *it ) ] = *it;
-    connect( hist, SIGNAL( activated( int ) ),
+        mHistory[ hist->insertItem( *it ) ] = *it;
+    connect( hist, SIGNAL( activated( int ) ),
              this, SLOT( histChosen( int ) ) );
 
-    bookm = new TQPopupMenu( this );
-    bookm->insertItem( tr( "Add Bookmark" ), this, SLOT( addBookmark() ) );
-    bookm->insertSeparator();
+    bookm = new TQPopupMenu( this );
+    bookm->insertItem( tr( "Add Bookmark" ), this, SLOT( addBookmark() ) );
+    bookm->insertSeparator();
 
     TQStringList::Iterator it2 = bookmarks.begin();
     for ( ; it2 != bookmarks.end(); ++it2 )
-        mBookmarks[ bookm->insertItem( *it2 ) ] = *it2;
-    connect( bookm, SIGNAL( activated( int ) ),
+        mBookmarks[ bookm->insertItem( *it2 ) ] = *it2;
+    connect( bookm, SIGNAL( activated( int ) ),
              this, SLOT( bookmChosen( int ) ) );
 
-    menuBar()->insertItem( tr("&File"), file );
-    menuBar()->insertItem( tr("&Go"), go );
-    menuBar()->insertItem( tr( "History" ), hist );
-    menuBar()->insertItem( tr( "Bookmarks" ), bookm );
-    menuBar()->insertSeparator();
-    menuBar()->insertItem( tr("&Help"), help );
+    menuBar()->insertItem( tr("&File"), file );
+    menuBar()->insertItem( tr("&Go"), go );
+    menuBar()->insertItem( tr( "History" ), hist );
+    menuBar()->insertItem( tr( "Bookmarks" ), bookm );
+    menuBar()->insertSeparator();
+    menuBar()->insertItem( tr("&Help"), help );
 
-    menuBar()->setItemEnabled( forwardId, FALSE);
-    menuBar()->setItemEnabled( backwardId, FALSE);
-    connect( browser, SIGNAL( backwardAvailable( bool ) ),
+    menuBar()->setItemEnabled( forwardId, FALSE);
+    menuBar()->setItemEnabled( backwardId, FALSE);
+    connect( browser, SIGNAL( backwardAvailable( bool ) ),
              this, SLOT( setBackwardAvailable( bool ) ) );
-    connect( browser, SIGNAL( forwardAvailable( bool ) ),
+    connect( browser, SIGNAL( forwardAvailable( bool ) ),
              this, SLOT( setForwardAvailable( bool ) ) );
 
 
-    TQToolBar* toolbar = new TQToolBar( this );
-    addToolBar( toolbar, "Toolbar");
-    TQToolButton* button;
+    TQToolBar* toolbar = new TQToolBar( this );
+    addToolBar( toolbar, "Toolbar");
+    TQToolButton* button;
 
-    button = new TQToolButton( icon_back, tr("Backward"), "", browser, SLOT(backward()), toolbar );
-    connect( browser, SIGNAL( backwardAvailable(bool) ), button, SLOT( setEnabled(bool) ) );
-    button->setEnabled( FALSE );
-    button = new TQToolButton( icon_forward, tr("Forward"), "", browser, SLOT(forward()), toolbar );
-    connect( browser, SIGNAL( forwardAvailable(bool) ), button, SLOT( setEnabled(bool) ) );
-    button->setEnabled( FALSE );
-    button = new TQToolButton( icon_home, tr("Home"), "", browser, SLOT(home()), toolbar );
+    button = new TQToolButton( icon_back, tr("Backward"), "", browser, SLOT(backward()), toolbar );
+    connect( browser, SIGNAL( backwardAvailable(bool) ), button, SLOT( setEnabled(bool) ) );
+    button->setEnabled( FALSE );
+    button = new TQToolButton( icon_forward, tr("Forward"), "", browser, SLOT(forward()), toolbar );
+    connect( browser, SIGNAL( forwardAvailable(bool) ), button, SLOT( setEnabled(bool) ) );
+    button->setEnabled( FALSE );
+    button = new TQToolButton( icon_home, tr("Home"), "", browser, SLOT(home()), toolbar );
 
-    toolbar->addSeparator();
+    toolbar->addSeparator();
 
-    pathCombo = new TQComboBox( TRUE, toolbar );
-    connect( pathCombo, SIGNAL( activated( const TQString & ) ),
-             this, SLOT( pathSelected( const TQString & ) ) );
-    toolbar->setStretchableWidget( pathCombo );
-    setRightJustification( TRUE );
-    setDockEnabled( DockLeft, FALSE );
-    setDockEnabled( DockRight, FALSE );
+    pathCombo = new TQComboBox( TRUE, toolbar );
+    connect( pathCombo, SIGNAL( activated( const TQString & ) ),
+             this, SLOT( pathSelected( const TQString & ) ) );
+    toolbar->setStretchableWidget( pathCombo );
+    setRightJustification( TRUE );
+    setDockEnabled( DockLeft, FALSE );
+    setDockEnabled( DockRight, FALSE );
 
-    pathCombo->insertItem( home_ );
-    browser->setFocus();
+    pathCombo->insertItem( home_ );
+    browser->setFocus();
 
 }
 
 
 void HelpWindow::setBackwardAvailable( bool b)
 {
-    menuBar()->setItemEnabled( backwardId, b);
+    menuBar()->setItemEnabled( backwardId, b);
 }
 
 void HelpWindow::setForwardAvailable( bool b)
 {
-    menuBar()->setItemEnabled( forwardId, b);
+    menuBar()->setItemEnabled( forwardId, b);
 }
 
 
-void HelpWindow::sourceChanged( const TQString& url )
+void HelpWindow::sourceChanged( const TQString& url )
 {
-    if ( browser->documentTitle().isNull() )
-        setCaption( "TQt Example - Helpviewer - " + url );
+    if ( browser->documentTitle().isNull() )
+        setCaption( "TQt Example - Helpviewer - " + url );
     else
-        setCaption( "TQt Example - Helpviewer - " + browser->documentTitle() ) ;
+        setCaption( "TQt Example - Helpviewer - " + browser->documentTitle() ) ;
 
-    if ( !url.isEmpty() && pathCombo ) {
+    if ( !url.isEmpty() && pathCombo ) {
         bool exists = FALSE;
         int i;
-        for ( i = 0; i < pathCombo->count(); ++i ) {
-            if ( pathCombo->text( i ) == url ) {
+        for ( i = 0; i < pathCombo->count(); ++i ) {
+            if ( pathCombo->text( i ) == url ) {
                 exists = TRUE;
                 break;
             }
         }
         if ( !exists ) {
-            pathCombo->insertItem( url, 0 );
-            pathCombo->setCurrentItem( 0 );
-            mHistory[ hist->insertItem( url ) ] = url;
+            pathCombo->insertItem( url, 0 );
+            pathCombo->setCurrentItem( 0 );
+            mHistory[ hist->insertItem( url ) ] = url;
         } else
-            pathCombo->setCurrentItem( i );
+            pathCombo->setCurrentItem( i );
     }
 }
 
@@ -294,24 +294,24 @@ HelpWindow::~HelpWindow()
 {
     history =  mHistory.values();
 
-    TQFile f( TQDir::currentDirPath() + "/.history" );
-    f.open( IO_WriteOnly );
-    TQDataStream s( &f );
+    TQFile f( TQDir::currentDirPath() + "/.history" );
+    f.open( IO_WriteOnly );
+    TQDataStream s( &f );
     s << history;
-    f.close();
+    f.close();
 
     bookmarks = mBookmarks.values();
 
-    TQFile f2( TQDir::currentDirPath() + "/.bookmarks" );
-    f2.open( IO_WriteOnly );
-    TQDataStream s2( &f2 );
+    TQFile f2( TQDir::currentDirPath() + "/.bookmarks" );
+    f2.open( IO_WriteOnly );
+    TQDataStream s2( &f2 );
     s2 << bookmarks;
-    f2.close();
+    f2.close();
 }
 
 void HelpWindow::about()
 {
-    TQMessageBox::about( this, "HelpViewer Example",
+    TQMessageBox::about( this, "HelpViewer Example",
                         "<p>This example implements a simple HTML help viewer "
                         "using TQt's rich text capabilities</p>"
                         "<p>It's just about 400 lines of C++ code, so don't expect too much :-)</p>"
@@ -321,74 +321,74 @@ void HelpWindow::about()
 
 void HelpWindow::aboutTQt()
 {
-    TQMessageBox::aboutTQt( this, "TQBrowser" );
+    TQMessageBox::aboutTQt( this, "TQBrowser" );
 }
 
 void HelpWindow::openFile()
 {
 #ifndef QT_NO_FILEDIALOG
-    TQString fn = TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName( TQString::null, TQString::null, this );
-    if ( !fn.isEmpty() )
-        browser->setSource( fn );
+    TQString fn = TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName( TQString::null, TQString::null, this );
+    if ( !fn.isEmpty() )
+        browser->setSource( fn );
 #endif
 }
 
 void HelpWindow::newWindow()
 {
-    ( new HelpWindow(browser->source(), "qbrowser") )->show();
+    ( new HelpWindow(browser->source(), "qbrowser") )->show();
 }
 
 void HelpWindow::print()
 {
 #ifndef QT_NO_PRINTER
-    TQPrinter printer( TQPrinter::HighResolution );
-    printer.setFullPage(TRUE);
-    if ( printer.setup( this ) ) {
-        TQPainter p( &printer );
-        if( !p.isActive() ) // starting printing failed
+    TQPrinter printer( TQPrinter::HighResolution );
+    printer.setFullPage(TRUE);
+    if ( printer.setup( this ) ) {
+        TQPainter p( &printer );
+        if( !p.isActive() ) // starting printing failed
             return;
-        TQPaintDeviceMetrics metrics(p.device());
-        int dpiy = metrics.logicalDpiY();
+        TQPaintDeviceMetrics metrics(p.device());
+        int dpiy = metrics.logicalDpiY();
         int margin = (int) ( (2/2.54)*dpiy ); // 2 cm margins
-        TQRect view( margin, margin, metrics.width() - 2*margin, metrics.height() - 2*margin );
-        TQSimpleRichText richText( browser->text(),
+        TQRect view( margin, margin, metrics.width() - 2*margin, metrics.height() - 2*margin );
+        TQSimpleRichText richText( browser->text(),
                                   TQFont(),
-                                  browser->context(),
-                                  browser->styleSheet(),
-                                  browser->mimeSourceFactory(),
-                                  view.height() );
-        richText.setWidth( &p, view.width() );
+                                  browser->context(),
+                                  browser->styleSheet(),
+                                  browser->mimeSourceFactory(),
+                                  view.height() );
+        richText.setWidth( &p, view.width() );
         int page = 1;
         do {
-            richText.draw( &p, margin, margin, view, colorGroup() );
-            view.moveBy( 0, view.height() );
-            p.translate( 0 , -view.height() );
-            p.drawText( view.right() - p.fontMetrics().width( TQString::number(page) ),
-                        view.bottom() + p.fontMetrics().ascent() + 5, TQString::number(page) );
-            if ( view.top() - margin >= richText.height() )
+            richText.draw( &p, margin, margin, view, colorGroup() );
+            view.moveBy( 0, view.height() );
+            p.translate( 0 , -view.height() );
+            p.drawText( view.right() - p.fontMetrics().width( TQString::number(page) ),
+                        view.bottom() + p.fontMetrics().ascent() + 5, TQString::number(page) );
+            if ( view.top() - margin >= richText.height() )
                 break;
-            printer.newPage();
+            printer.newPage();
             page++;
         } while (TRUE);
     }
 #endif
 }
 
-void HelpWindow::pathSelected( const TQString &_path )
+void HelpWindow::pathSelected( const TQString &_path )
 {
-    browser->setSource( _path );
+    browser->setSource( _path );
     if ( mHistory.values().contains(_path) )
-        mHistory[ hist->insertItem( _path ) ] = _path;
+        mHistory[ hist->insertItem( _path ) ] = _path;
 }
 
 void HelpWindow::readHistory()
 {
-    if ( TQFile::exists( TQDir::currentDirPath() + "/.history" ) ) {
-        TQFile f( TQDir::currentDirPath() + "/.history" );
-        f.open( IO_ReadOnly );
-        TQDataStream s( &f );
+    if ( TQFile::exists( TQDir::currentDirPath() + "/.history" ) ) {
+        TQFile f( TQDir::currentDirPath() + "/.history" );
+        f.open( IO_ReadOnly );
+        TQDataStream s( &f );
         s >> history;
-        f.close();
+        f.close();
         while ( history.count() > 20 )
             history.remove( history.begin() );
     }
@@ -396,30 +396,30 @@ void HelpWindow::readHistory()
 
 void HelpWindow::readBookmarks()
 {
-    if ( TQFile::exists( TQDir::currentDirPath() + "/.bookmarks" ) ) {
-        TQFile f( TQDir::currentDirPath() + "/.bookmarks" );
-        f.open( IO_ReadOnly );
-        TQDataStream s( &f );
+    if ( TQFile::exists( TQDir::currentDirPath() + "/.bookmarks" ) ) {
+        TQFile f( TQDir::currentDirPath() + "/.bookmarks" );
+        f.open( IO_ReadOnly );
+        TQDataStream s( &f );
         s >> bookmarks;
-        f.close();
+        f.close();
     }
 }
 
 void HelpWindow::histChosen( int i )
 {
     if ( mHistory.contains( i ) )
-        browser->setSource( mHistory[ i ] );
+        browser->setSource( mHistory[ i ] );
 }
 
 void HelpWindow::bookmChosen( int i )
 {
     if ( mBookmarks.contains( i ) )
-        browser->setSource( mBookmarks[ i ] );
+        browser->setSource( mBookmarks[ i ] );
 }
 
 void HelpWindow::addBookmark()
 {
-    mBookmarks[ bookm->insertItem( caption() ) ] = browser->context();
+    mBookmarks[ bookm->insertItem( caption() ) ] = browser->context();
 }
 
    
 
@@ -436,17 +436,17 @@ void HelpWindow::addBookmark()
 *****************************************************************************/
 
 #include "helpwindow.h"
-#include <qapplication.h>
-#include <qdir.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
+#include <ntqdir.h>
 #include <stdlib.h>
 
 
 int main( int argc, char ** argv )
 {
-    TQApplication::setColorSpec( TQApplication::ManyColor );
-    TQApplication a(argc, argv);
+    TQApplication::setColorSpec( TQApplication::ManyColor );
+    TQApplication a(argc, argv);
 
-    TQString home;
+    TQString home;
     if (argc > 1) {
         home = argv[1];
     } else {
@@ -455,17 +455,17 @@ int main( int argc, char ** argv )
     }
 
     HelpWindow *help = new HelpWindow(home, ".", 0, "help viewer");
-    help->setCaption("TQt Example - Helpviewer");
-    if ( TQApplication::desktop()->width() > 400
-         && TQApplication::desktop()->height() > 500 )
-        help->show();
+    help->setCaption("TQt Example - Helpviewer");
+    if ( TQApplication::desktop()->width() > 400
+         && TQApplication::desktop()->height() > 500 )
+        help->show();
     else
-        help->showMaximized();
+        help->showMaximized();
 
-    TQObject::connect( &a, SIGNAL(lastWindowClosed()),
-                      &a, SLOT(quit()) );
+    TQObject::connect( &a, SIGNAL(lastWindowClosed()),
+                      &a, SLOT(quit()) );
 
-    return a.exec();
+    return a.exec();
 }
 
    
 
diff --git a/doc/html/hierarchy.html b/doc/html/hierarchy.html
index 76d25c523..1c3cf4366 100644
--- a/doc/html/hierarchy.html
+++ b/doc/html/hierarchy.html
@@ -37,13 +37,13 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 classes in the TQt API.
 
     
    The list is sorted roughly, but not completely, alphabetically.
 
     
    
 
  • TQLayoutIterator
-
  • TQLibrary
+
  • TQLibrary
 
  • TQListBoxItem
 
 
  • TQListViewItemIterator
-
  • TQLocale
+
  • TQLocale
 
  • TQMacMime
-
  • TQMap
+
  • TQMap
 
  • TQMapConstIterator
 
  • TQMapIterator
-
  • TQMemArray
+
  • TQMemArray
 
-
  • TQMenuData
-
  • TQMetaObject
+
  • TQMenuData
+
  • TQMetaObject
 
  • TQMetaProperty
 
  • TQMimeSource
 
  • TQMimeSourceFactory
 
  • TQMouseDriverFactory
 
  • TQMouseDriverPlugin
-
  • TQMovie
-
  • TQMutex
+
  • TQMovie
+
  • TQMutex
 
  • TQMutexLocker
 
  • TQNPlugin
 
  • TQNPStream
-
  • TQPaintDevice
+
  • TQPaintDevice
 
-
  • TQPaintDeviceMetrics
-
  • TQPair
-
  • TQPalette
-
  • TQPixmapCache
+
  • TQPaintDeviceMetrics
+
  • TQPair
+
  • TQPalette
+
  • TQPixmapCache
 
  • TQPNGImagePacker
-
  • TQPoint
-
  • TQPtrCollection
-
    • 
@@ -165,17 +165,17 @@ void MyWidget::initChoices(TQWidget* parent)
 **
 *****************************************************************************/
 
-#include <qapplication.h>
-#include <qtranslator.h>
-#include <qfileinfo.h>
-#include <qmessagebox.h>
-#include <qcheckbox.h>
-#include <qvbox.h>
-#include <qlayout.h>
-#include <qbuttongroup.h>
-#include <qpushbutton.h>
-#include <qsignalmapper.h>
-#include <qtextcodec.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
+#include <ntqtranslator.h>
+#include <ntqfileinfo.h>
+#include <ntqmessagebox.h>
+#include <ntqcheckbox.h>
+#include <ntqvbox.h>
+#include <ntqlayout.h>
+#include <ntqbuttongroup.h>
+#include <ntqpushbutton.h>
+#include <ntqsignalmapper.h>
+#include <ntqtextcodec.h>
 #include <stdlib.h>
 
 #if defined(Q_OS_UNIX)
@@ -186,42 +186,42 @@ void MyWidget::initChoices(TQWidget* parent)
 
 //#define USE_I18N_FONT
 
-class TQVDialog : public TQDialog {
+class TQVDialog : public TQDialog {
 public:
     TQVDialog(TQWidget *parent=0, const char *name=0, bool modal=FALSE,
-             WFlags f=0) : TQDialog(parent,name,modal,f)
+             WFlags f=0) : TQDialog(parent,name,modal,f)
     {
         TQVBoxLayout* vb = new TQVBoxLayout(this,8);
-        vb->setAutoAdd(TRUE);
+        vb->setAutoAdd(TRUE);
         hb = 0;
-        sm = new TQSignalMapper(this);
-        connect(sm,SIGNAL(mapped(int)),this,SLOT(done(int)));
+        sm = new TQSignalMapper(this);
+        connect(sm,SIGNAL(mapped(int)),this,SLOT(done(int)));
     }
-    void addButtons( const TQString& cancel=TQString::null,
-                    const TQString& ok=TQString::null,
-                    const TQString& mid1=TQString::null,
-                    const TQString& mid2=TQString::null,
-                    const TQString& mid3=TQString::null)
+    void addButtons( const TQString& cancel=TQString::null,
+                    const TQString& ok=TQString::null,
+                    const TQString& mid1=TQString::null,
+                    const TQString& mid2=TQString::null,
+                    const TQString& mid3=TQString::null)
     {
-        addButton(ok.isNull() ? TQObject::tr("OK") : ok, 1);
-        if ( !mid1.isNull() ) addButton(mid1,2);
-        if ( !mid2.isNull() ) addButton(mid2,3);
-        if ( !mid3.isNull() ) addButton(mid3,4);
-        addButton(cancel.isNull() ? TQObject::tr("Cancel") : cancel, 0);
+        addButton(ok.isNull() ? TQObject::tr("OK") : ok, 1);
+        if ( !mid1.isNull() ) addButton(mid1,2);
+        if ( !mid2.isNull() ) addButton(mid2,3);
+        if ( !mid3.isNull() ) addButton(mid3,4);
+        addButton(cancel.isNull() ? TQObject::tr("Cancel") : cancel, 0);
     }
 
-    void addButton( const TQString& text, int result )
+    void addButton( const TQString& text, int result )
     {
         if ( !hb )
-            hb = new TQHBox(this);
-        TQPushButton *c = new TQPushButton(text, hb);
-        sm->setMapping(c,result);
-        connect(c,SIGNAL(clicked()),sm,SLOT(map()));
+            hb = new TQHBox(this);
+        TQPushButton *c = new TQPushButton(text, hb);
+        sm->setMapping(c,result);
+        connect(c,SIGNAL(clicked()),sm,SLOT(map()));
     }
 
 private:
-    TQSignalMapper *sm;
-    TQHBox *hb;
+    TQSignalMapper *sm;
+    TQHBox *hb;
 };
 
 MyWidget* showLang(TQString lang)
@@ -229,32 +229,32 @@ MyWidget* showLang(TQString lang)
 
     static TQTranslator *translator = 0;
 
-    qApp->setPalette(TQPalette(TQColor(220-rand()%64,220-rand()%64,220-rand()%64)));
+    qApp->setPalette(TQPalette(TQColor(220-rand()%64,220-rand()%64,220-rand()%64)));
 
     lang = "mywidget_" + lang + ".qm";
-    TQFileInfo fi( lang );
+    TQFileInfo fi( lang );
 
-    if ( !fi.exists() ) {
-        TQMessageBox::warning( 0, "File error",
+    if ( !fi.exists() ) {
+        TQMessageBox::warning( 0, "File error",
                               TQString("Cannot find translation for language: "+lang+
                                       "\n(try eg. 'de', 'ko' or 'no')") );
         return 0;
     }
     if ( translator ) {
-        qApp->removeTranslator( translator );
+        qApp->removeTranslator( translator );
         delete translator;
     }
-    translator = new TQTranslator( 0 );
-    translator->load( lang, "." );
-    qApp->installTranslator( translator );
+    translator = new TQTranslator( 0 );
+    translator->load( lang, "." );
+    qApp->installTranslator( translator );
     MyWidget *m = new MyWidget;
-    m->setCaption("TQt Example - i18n - " + m->caption() );
+    m->setCaption("TQt Example - i18n - " + m->caption() );
     return m;
 }
 
 int main( int argc, char** argv )
 {
-    TQApplication app( argc, argv );
+    TQApplication app( argc, argv );
 
     const char* qm[]=
         { "ar", "cs", "de", "el", "en", "eo", "fr", "it", "jp", "ko", "no", "ru", "zh", 0 };
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ int main( int argc, char** argv )
     srand( getpid() << 2 );
 #endif
 
-    TQString lang;
+    TQString lang;
     if ( argc == 2 )
         lang = argv[1];
 
@@ -274,28 +274,28 @@ int main( int argc, char** argv )
         if ( lang == "all" ) {
             r = 2;
         } else {
-            TQButtonGroup *bg = new TQButtonGroup(4,TQt::Vertical,"Choose Locales",&dlg);
-            TQString loc = TQTextCodec::locale();
+            TQButtonGroup *bg = new TQButtonGroup(4,TQt::Vertical,"Choose Locales",&dlg);
+            TQString loc = TQTextCodec::locale();
             for ( int i=0; qm[i]; i++ ) {
-                qmb[i] = new TQCheckBox((const char*)qm[i],bg);
+                qmb[i] = new TQCheckBox((const char*)qm[i],bg);
                 qmb[i]->setChecked( loc == qm[i] );
             }
             dlg.addButtons("Cancel","OK","All");
-            r = dlg.exec();
+            r = dlg.exec();
         }
         if ( r ) {
-            TQRect screen = qApp->desktop()->availableGeometry();
-            bool tight = screen.width() < 1024;
-            int x=screen.left()+5;
-            int y=screen.top()+25;
+            TQRect screen = qApp->desktop()->availableGeometry();
+            bool tight = screen.width() < 1024;
+            int x=screen.left()+5;
+            int y=screen.top()+25;
             for ( int i=0; qm[i]; i++ ) {
                 if ( r == 2 || qmb[i]->isChecked() ) {
                     MyWidget* w = showLang((const char*)qm[i]);
 
                     if( w == 0 ) exit( 0 );
-                    TQObject::connect(w, SIGNAL(closed()), qApp, SLOT(quit()));
-                    w->setGeometry(x,y,197,356);
-                    w->show();
+                    TQObject::connect(w, SIGNAL(closed()), qApp, SLOT(quit()));
+                    w->setGeometry(x,y,197,356);
+                    w->show();
                     if ( tight ) {
                         x += 8;
                         y += 8;
@@ -312,11 +312,11 @@ int main( int argc, char** argv )
             exit( 0 );
         }
     } else {
-        TQString lang = argv[1];
-        TQWidget* m = showLang(lang);
-        app.setMainWidget( m );
-        m->setCaption("TQt Example - i18n");
-        m->show();
+        TQString lang = argv[1];
+        TQWidget* m = showLang(lang);
+        app.setMainWidget( m );
+        m->setCaption("TQt Example - i18n");
+        m->show();
     }
 
 #ifdef USE_I18N_FONT
@@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ int main( int argc, char** argv )
 #endif
 
     // While we run "all", kill them all
-    return app.exec();
+    return app.exec();
 
 }
 
    
diff --git a/doc/html/i18n.html b/doc/html/i18n.html
index c2203cf84..a49407e1c 100644
--- a/doc/html/i18n.html
+++ b/doc/html/i18n.html
@@ -133,25 +133,25 @@ the fl and fi ligatures used in typesetting US and European books.
 
     
 
     TQt tries to take care of all the special features listed above. You
 usually don't have to worry about these features so long as you use
-TQt's input widgets (e.g. TQLineEdit, TQTextEdit, and derived classes)
-and TQt's display widgets (e.g. TQLabel).
+TQt's input widgets (e.g. TQLineEdit, TQTextEdit, and derived classes)
+and TQt's display widgets (e.g. TQLabel).
 
     Support for these writing systems is transparent to the programmer
 and completely encapsulated in TQt's text engine. This means that you
 don't need to have any knowledge about the writing system used in a
 particular language, except for the following small points:
 
      
-
       
    •  TQPainter::drawText( int x, int y, const TQString &str ) will always
+
       
    •  TQPainter::drawText( int x, int y, const TQString &str ) will always
 draw the string with it's left edge at the position specified with
 the x, y parameters. This will usually give you left aligned strings.
 Arabic and Hebrew application strings are usually right
 aligned, so for these languages use the version of drawText() that
-takes a TQRect since this will align in accordance with the language.
-
       
    •  When you write your own text input controls, use TQFontMetrics::charWidth() to determine the width of a character in a
+takes a TQRect since this will align in accordance with the language.
+
       
    •  When you write your own text input controls, use TQFontMetrics::charWidth() to determine the width of a character in a
 string. In some languages (e.g. Arabic or languages from the Indian
 subcontinent), the width and shape of a glyph changes depending on the
 surrounding characters. Writing input controls usually requires a
 certain knowledge of the scripts it is going to be used in. Usually
-the easiest way is to subclass TQLineEdit or TQTextEdit.
+the easiest way is to subclass TQLineEdit or TQTextEdit.
 
       
    
 
     The following sections give some information on the status
 of the internationalization (i18n) support in TQt.
@@ -161,29 +161,29 @@ of the internationalization (i18n) support in TQt.
 
     Writing multi-platform international software with TQt is a gentle,
 incremental process. Your software can become internationalized in
 the following stages:
-
     
     Use TQString for all User-visible Text
+
     
     Use TQString for all User-visible Text
 
    
 
     Since TQString uses the Unicode encoding internally, every
 language in the world can be processed transparently using
 familiar text processing operations. Also, since all TQt
 functions that present text to the user take a TQString as a
 parameter, there is no char* to TQString conversion overhead.
-
     Strings that are in "programmer space" (such as TQObject names
+
     Strings that are in "programmer space" (such as TQObject names
 and file format texts) need not use TQString; the traditional
-char* or the TQCString class will suffice.
+char* or the TQCString class will suffice.
 
     You're unlikely to notice that you are using Unicode;
 TQString, and TQChar are just like easier versions of the crude
 const char* and char from traditional C.
 
     
     Use tr() for all Literal Text
 
    
 
     Wherever your program uses "quoted text" for text that will
-be presented to the user, ensure that it is processed by the TQApplication::translate() function. Essentially all that is necessary
-to achieve this is to use TQObject::tr(). For example, assuming the
+be presented to the user, ensure that it is processed by the TQApplication::translate() function. Essentially all that is necessary
+to achieve this is to use TQObject::tr(). For example, assuming the
 LoginWidget is a subclass of TQWidget:
 
     
         LoginWidget::LoginWidget()
     {
-        TQLabel *label = new TQLabel( tr("Password:"), this );
+        TQLabel *label = new TQLabel( tr("Password:"), this );
         ...
     }
 
    
@@ -191,20 +191,20 @@ to achieve this is to use TQObject::tr(). For exam
 
     This accounts for 99% of the user-visible strings you're likely to
 write.
 
     If the quoted text is not in a member function of a
-TQObject subclass, use either the tr() function of an
-appropriate class, or the TQApplication::translate() function
+TQObject subclass, use either the tr() function of an
+appropriate class, or the TQApplication::translate() function
 directly:
 
     
         void some_global_function( LoginWidget *logwid )
     {
-        TQLabel *label = new TQLabel(
+        TQLabel *label = new TQLabel(
                 LoginWidget::tr("Password:"), logwid );
     }
 
     void same_global_function( LoginWidget *logwid )
     {
-        TQLabel *label = new TQLabel(
-                qApp->translate("LoginWidget", "Password:"),
+        TQLabel *label = new TQLabel(
+                qApp->translate("LoginWidget", "Password:"),
                 logwid );
     }
 
    
@@ -238,42 +238,42 @@ The macros expand to just the text (without the context).
         return tr( greeting_strings[greet_type] );
     }
 
-    TQString global_greeting( int greet_type )
+    TQString global_greeting( int greet_type )
     {
-        return qApp->translate( "FriendlyConversation",
+        return qApp->translate( "FriendlyConversation",
                                 greeting_strings[greet_type] );
     }
 
    
  
-
     If you disable the const char* to TQString automatic conversion
+
     If you disable the const char* to TQString automatic conversion
 by compiling your software with the macro QT_NO_CAST_ASCII
 defined, you'll be very likely to catch any strings you are
-missing. See TQString::fromLatin1() for more information.
+missing. See TQString::fromLatin1() for more information.
 Disabling the conversion can make programming a bit cumbersome.
 
     If your source language uses characters outside Latin-1, you
-might find TQObject::trUtf8() more convenient than
-TQObject::tr(), as tr() depends on the
-TQApplication::defaultCodec(), which makes it more fragile than
+might find TQObject::trUtf8() more convenient than
+TQObject::tr(), as tr() depends on the
+TQApplication::defaultCodec(), which makes it more fragile than
 TQObject::trUtf8().
-
     
     Use TQKeySequence() for Accelerator Values
+
     
     Use TQKeySequence() for Accelerator Values
 
    
 
     Accelerator values such as Ctrl+Q or Alt+F need to be
 translated too. If you hardcode CTRL+Key_Q for "Quit" in
 your application, translators won't be able to override
 it. The correct idiom is
 
     
    -    TQPopupMenu *file = new TQPopupMenu( this );
-    file->insertItem( tr("&Quit"), this, SLOT(quit()),
+    TQPopupMenu *file = new TQPopupMenu( this );
+    file->insertItem( tr("&Quit"), this, SLOT(quit()),
                       TQKeySequence(tr("Ctrl+Q", "File|Quit")) );
 
    
  
-
     
     Use TQString::arg() for Dynamic Text
+
     
     Use TQString::arg() for Dynamic Text
 
    
 
     The TQString::arg() functions offer a simple means for substituting
 arguments:
 
         void FileCopier::showProgress( int done, int total,
-                                   const TQString& current_file )
+                                   const TQString& current_file )
     {
         label.setText( tr("%1 of %2 files copied.\nCopying: %3")
                         .arg(done)
@@ -286,11 +286,11 @@ arguments:
 can easily be achieved by changing the order of the % arguments. For
 example:
 
    -    TQString s1 = "%1 of %2 files copied. Copying: %3";
-    TQString s2 = "Kopierer nu %3. Av totalt %2 filer er %1 kopiert.";
+    TQString s1 = "%1 of %2 files copied. Copying: %3";
+    TQString s2 = "Kopierer nu %3. Av totalt %2 filer er %1 kopiert.";
 
-    qDebug( s1.arg(5).arg(10).arg("somefile.txt").ascii() );
-    qDebug( s2.arg(5).arg(10).arg("somefile.txt").ascii() );
+    qDebug( s1.arg(5).arg(10).arg("somefile.txt").ascii() );
+    qDebug( s2.arg(5).arg(10).arg("somefile.txt").ascii() );
 
    
  
 
     produces the correct output in English and Norwegian:
@@ -345,8 +345,8 @@ project file as a command-line argument.
 Norwegian and Swedish. If you use qmake, you usually don't need an extra project
 file for lupdate; your qmake project file will work fine once
 you add the TRANSLATIONS entry.
-
     In your application, you must TQTranslator::load() the translation
-files appropriate for the user's language, and install them using TQApplication::installTranslator().
+
     In your application, you must TQTranslator::load() the translation
+files appropriate for the user's language, and install them using TQApplication::installTranslator().
 
     If you have been using the old TQt tools (findtr, msg2qm and mergetr), you can use qm2ts to convert your old .qm files.
 
     linguist, lupdate and lrelease are installed in the bin
 subdirectory of the base directory TQt is installed into. Click Help|Manual
@@ -354,9 +354,9 @@ in TQt Linguist to access the user's manual; it contains a tutorial
 to get you started.
 
     While these utilities offer a convenient way to create .qm files,
 any system that writes .qm files is sufficient. You could make an
-application that adds translations to a TQTranslator with
-TQTranslator::insert() and then writes a .qm file with
-TQTranslator::save(). This way the translations can come from any
+application that adds translations to a TQTranslator with
+TQTranslator::insert() and then writes a .qm file with
+TQTranslator::save(). This way the translations can come from any
 source you choose.
 
     
 TQt itself contains over 400 strings that will also need to be
@@ -369,27 +369,27 @@ useful.)
 
         int main( int argc, char **argv )
     {
-        TQApplication app( argc, argv );
+        TQApplication app( argc, argv );
 
         // translation file for TQt
-        TQTranslator qt( 0 );
-        qt.load( TQString( "qt_" ) + TQTextCodec::locale(), "." );
-        app.installTranslator( &qt );
+        TQTranslator qt( 0 );
+        qt.load( TQString( "qt_" ) + TQTextCodec::locale(), "." );
+        app.installTranslator( &qt );
 
         // translation file for application strings
-        TQTranslator myapp( 0 );
-        myapp.load( TQString( "myapp_" ) + TQTextCodec::locale(), "." );
-        app.installTranslator( &myapp );
+        TQTranslator myapp( 0 );
+        myapp.load( TQString( "myapp_" ) + TQTextCodec::locale(), "." );
+        app.installTranslator( &myapp );
 
         ...
 
-        return app.exec();
+        return app.exec();
     }
 
    
  
 
     
     Support for Encodings
 
    
-
     The TQTextCodec class and the facilities in TQTextStream make it easy to
+
     The TQTextCodec class and the facilities in TQTextStream make it easy to
 support many input and output encodings for your users' data. When an
 application starts, the locale of the machine will determine the 8-bit
 encoding used when dealing with 8-bit data: such as for font
@@ -400,29 +400,29 @@ Cyrillic KOI8-R locale (the de-facto standard locale in Russia) might
 need to output Cyrillic in the ISO 8859-5 encoding. Code for this
 would be:
 
     
    -    TQString string = ...; // some Unicode text
+    TQString string = ...; // some Unicode text
 
-    TQTextCodec* codec = TQTextCodec::codecForName( "ISO 8859-5" );
-    TQCString encoded_string = codec->fromUnicode( string );
+    TQTextCodec* codec = TQTextCodec::codecForName( "ISO 8859-5" );
+    TQCString encoded_string = codec->fromUnicode( string );
 
     ...; // use encoded_string in 8-bit operations
 
    
  
 
     For converting Unicode to local 8-bit encodings, a shortcut is
-available: the local8Bit() method
-of TQString returns such 8-bit data. Another useful shortcut is the
-utf8() method, which returns text in the
+available: the local8Bit() method
+of TQString returns such 8-bit data. Another useful shortcut is the
+utf8() method, which returns text in the
 8-bit UTF-8 encoding: this perfectly preserves Unicode information
 while looking like plain US-ASCII if the text is wholly US-ASCII.
-
     For converting the other way, there are the TQString::fromUtf8() and
-TQString::fromLocal8Bit() convenience functions, or the general code,
+
     For converting the other way, there are the TQString::fromUtf8() and
+TQString::fromLocal8Bit() convenience functions, or the general code,
 demonstrated by this conversion from ISO 8859-5 Cyrillic to Unicode
 conversion:
 
     
    -    TQCString encoded_string = ...; // Some ISO 8859-5 encoded text.
+    TQCString encoded_string = ...; // Some ISO 8859-5 encoded text.
 
-    TQTextCodec* codec = TQTextCodec::codecForName("ISO 8859-5");
-    TQString string = codec->toUnicode(encoded_string);
+    TQTextCodec* codec = TQTextCodec::codecForName("ISO 8859-5");
+    TQString string = codec->toUnicode(encoded_string);
 
     ...; // Use string in all of TQt's TQString operations.
 
    
@@ -434,18 +434,18 @@ need to process existing documents. In general, Unicode (UTF-16 or
 UTF-8) is best for information transferred between arbitrary people,
 while within a language or national group, a local standard is often
 more appropriate. The most important encoding to support is the one
-returned by TQTextCodec::codecForLocale(), as this is the one the user
+returned by TQTextCodec::codecForLocale(), as this is the one the user
 is most likely to need for communicating with other people and
 applications (this is the codec used by local8Bit()).
 
     TQt supports most of the more frequently used encodings natively. For a
-complete list of supported encodings see the TQTextCodec
+complete list of supported encodings see the TQTextCodec
 documentation.
 
     In some cases and for less frequently used encodings it may be
-necessary to write your own TQTextCodec subclass. Depending on the
+necessary to write your own TQTextCodec subclass. Depending on the
 urgency, it may be useful to contact Trolltech technical support or
 ask on the qt-interest mailing list to see if someone else is
 already working on supporting the encoding. A useful interim measure
-can be to use the TQTextCodec::loadCharmapFile() function to build a
+can be to use the TQTextCodec::loadCharmapFile() function to build a
 data-driven codec, although this approach has a memory and speed
 penalty, especially with dynamically loaded libraries. For details of
 writing your own TQTextCodec, see the main TQTextCodec class
@@ -482,7 +482,7 @@ to the user's language settings while they are still running. To make
 widgets aware of changes to the system language, implement a public
 slot called languageChange() in each widget that needs to be notified.
 In this slot, you should update the text displayed by widgets using the
-TQObject::tr(){tr()} function in the usual way; for example:
+TQObject::tr(){tr()} function in the usual way; for example:
 
     
     void MyWidget::languageChange()
 {
@@ -492,8 +492,8 @@ void MyWidget::languageChange()
 }
 
    
  
-
     The default event handler for TQWidget subclasses responds to the
-LanguageChange event, and will call this slot
+
     The default event handler for TQWidget subclasses responds to the
+LanguageChange event, and will call this slot
 when necessary; other application components can also connect signals
 to this slot to force widgets to update themselves.
 
     
     System Support
@@ -514,10 +514,10 @@ are under development
 in some Unix variants. All TQt file functions allow Unicode,
 but convert filenames to the local 8-bit encoding, as
 this is the Unix convention
-(see TQFile::setEncodingFunction()
+(see TQFile::setEncodingFunction()
 to explore alternative encodings).
 
  •  File I/O defaults to the local 8-bit encoding,
-with Unicode options in TQTextStream.
+with Unicode options in TQTextStream.
 
 
     
     Windows
 
    
@@ -544,21 +544,21 @@ results, use complete locales from your system vendor.
 
     These classes are relevant to internationalizing TQt applications.
 
 
    
-
    TQBig5CodecConversion to and from the Big5 encoding
-
    TQEucJpCodecConversion to and from EUC-JP character sets
-
    TQEucKrCodecConversion to and from EUC-KR character sets
-
    TQGb18030CodecConversion to and from the Chinese GB18030/GBK/GB2312 encoding
+
    TQBig5CodecConversion to and from the Big5 encoding
+
    TQEucJpCodecConversion to and from EUC-JP character sets
+
    TQEucKrCodecConversion to and from EUC-KR character sets
+
    TQGb18030CodecConversion to and from the Chinese GB18030/GBK/GB2312 encoding
 
    TQGb2312CodecConversion to and from the Chinese GB2312 encoding
-
    TQGbkCodecConversion to and from the Chinese GBK encoding
+
    TQGbkCodecConversion to and from the Chinese GBK encoding
 
    TQHebrewCodecConversion to and from visually ordered Hebrew
-
    TQJisCodecConversion to and from JIS character sets
-
    TQSjisCodecConversion to and from Shift-JIS
-
    TQTextCodecConversion between text encodings
+
    TQJisCodecConversion to and from JIS character sets
+
    TQSjisCodecConversion to and from Shift-JIS
+
    TQTextCodecConversion between text encodings
 
    TQTextDecoderState-based decoder
 
    TQTextEncoderState-based encoder
-
    TQTranslatorInternationalization support for text output
+
    TQTranslatorInternationalization support for text output
 
    TQTranslatorMessageTranslator message and its properties
-
    TQTsciiCodecConversion to and from the Tamil TSCII encoding
+
    TQTsciiCodecConversion to and from the Tamil TSCII encoding
 
    
 
 
    
diff --git a/doc/html/iconview-example.html b/doc/html/iconview-example.html
index dd83f5f1b..a158fe431 100644
--- a/doc/html/iconview-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/iconview-example.html
@@ -47,69 +47,69 @@ view modes, rubberband selection, etc.
 **
 *****************************************************************************/
 
-#include <qiconview.h>
-#include <qapplication.h>
-#include <qdragobject.h>
-#include <qpixmap.h>
-#include <qiconset.h>
+#include <ntqiconview.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
+#include <ntqdragobject.h>
+#include <ntqpixmap.h>
+#include <ntqiconset.h>
 
-#include <qmime.h>
+#include <ntqmime.h>
 #include <stdio.h>
 
-class ListenDND : public TQObject
+class ListenDND : public TQObject
 {
     Q_OBJECT
 
 public:
-    ListenDND( TQWidget *w )
+    ListenDND( TQWidget *w )
         : view( w )
     {}
 
 public slots:
     void dropped( TQDropEvent *mime ) {
-        qDebug( "Dropped Mimesource %p into the view %p", mime, view );
-        qDebug( "  Formats:" );
+        qDebug( "Dropped Mimesource %p into the view %p", mime, view );
+        qDebug( "  Formats:" );
         int i = 0;
         const char *str = mime->format( i );
-        qDebug( "    %s", str );
+        qDebug( "    %s", str );
         while ( str ) {
-            qDebug( "    %s", str );
+            qDebug( "    %s", str );
             str = mime->format( ++i );
         }
     };
     void moved() {
-        qDebug( "All selected items were moved to another widget" );
+        qDebug( "All selected items were moved to another widget" );
     }
 
 protected:
-    TQWidget *view;
+    TQWidget *view;
 
 };
 
 int main( int argc, char **argv )
 {
-    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
+    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
 
-    TQIconView qiconview;
-    qiconview.setSelectionMode( TQIconView::Extended );
+    TQIconView qiconview;
+    qiconview.setSelectionMode( TQIconView::Extended );
 
     for ( unsigned int i = 0; i < 3000; i++ ) {
         TQIconViewItem *item = new TQIconViewItem( &qiconview, TQString( "Item %1" ).arg( i + 1 ) );
         item->setRenameEnabled( TRUE );
     }
 
-    qiconview.setCaption( "TQt Example - Iconview" );
+    qiconview.setCaption( "TQt Example - Iconview" );
 
     ListenDND listen_dnd( &qiconview );
-    TQObject::connect( &qiconview, SIGNAL( dropped( TQDropEvent *, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem> & ) ),
+    TQObject::connect( &qiconview, SIGNAL( dropped( TQDropEvent *, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem> & ) ),
                       &listen_dnd, SLOT( dropped( TQDropEvent * ) ) );
-    TQObject::connect( &qiconview, SIGNAL( moved() ), &listen_dnd, SLOT( moved() ) );
+    TQObject::connect( &qiconview, SIGNAL( moved() ), &listen_dnd, SLOT( moved() ) );
 
-    a.setMainWidget( &qiconview );
-    qiconview.show();
-    qiconview.resize( qiconview.sizeHint() );
+    a.setMainWidget( &qiconview );
+    qiconview.show();
+    qiconview.resize( qiconview.sizeHint() );
 
-    return a.exec();
+    return a.exec();
 }
 
 #include "main.moc"
diff --git a/doc/html/iconview-simple_dd-main-cpp.html b/doc/html/iconview-simple_dd-main-cpp.html
index 518dc35c7..c43a87b98 100644
--- a/doc/html/iconview-simple_dd-main-cpp.html
+++ b/doc/html/iconview-simple_dd-main-cpp.html
@@ -110,42 +110,42 @@ const char* green_icon[]={
 
 // ListBox -- low level drag and drop
 
-DDListBox::DDListBox( TQWidget * parent, const char * name, WFlags f ) :
-    TQListBox( parent, name, f )
+DDListBox::DDListBox( TQWidget * parent, const char * name, WFlags f ) :
+    TQListBox( parent, name, f )
 {
-    setAcceptDrops( TRUE );
+    setAcceptDrops( TRUE );
     dragging = FALSE;
 }
 
 
-void DDListBox::dragEnterEvent( TQDragEnterEvent *evt )
+void DDListBox::dragEnterEvent( TQDragEnterEvent *evt )
 {
     if ( TQTextDrag::canDecode( evt ) )
         evt->accept();
 }
 
 
-void DDListBox::dropEvent( TQDropEvent *evt )
+void DDListBox::dropEvent( TQDropEvent *evt )
 {
-    TQString text;
+    TQString text;
 
     if ( TQTextDrag::decode( evt, text ) )
-        insertItem( text );
+        insertItem( text );
 }
 
 
-void DDListBox::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *evt )
+void DDListBox::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *evt )
 {
-    TQListBox::mousePressEvent( evt );
+    TQListBox::mousePressEvent( evt );
     dragging = TRUE;
 }
 
 
-void DDListBox::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent * )
+void DDListBox::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent * )
 {
     if ( dragging ) {
-        TQDragObject *d = new TQTextDrag( currentText(), this );
-        d->dragCopy(); // do NOT delete d.
+        TQDragObject *d = new TQTextDrag( currentText(), this );
+        d->dragCopy(); // do NOT delete d.
         dragging = FALSE;
     }
 }
@@ -162,9 +162,9 @@ const char* green_icon[]={
 }
 
 
-void DDIconViewItem::dropped( TQDropEvent *evt, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem>& )
+void DDIconViewItem::dropped( TQDropEvent *evt, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem>& )
 {
-    TQString label;
+    TQString label;
 
     if ( TQTextDrag::decode( evt, label ) )
         setText( label );
@@ -173,14 +173,14 @@ const char* green_icon[]={
 
 // IconView -- high level drag and drop
 
-TQDragObject *DDIconView::dragObject()
+TQDragObject *DDIconView::dragObject()
 {
-  return new TQTextDrag( currentItem()->text(), this );
+  return new TQTextDrag( currentItem()->text(), this );
 }
 
-void DDIconView::slotNewItem( TQDropEvent *evt, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem>& )
+void DDIconView::slotNewItem( TQDropEvent *evt, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem>& )
 {
-    TQString label;
+    TQString label;
 
     if ( TQTextDrag::decode( evt, label ) ) {
         DDIconViewItem *item = new DDIconViewItem( this, label );
@@ -192,20 +192,20 @@ void DDIconView::slotNewItem( TQDropE
 
 int main( int argc, char *argv[] )
 {
-    TQApplication app( argc, argv );
+    TQApplication app( argc, argv );
 
     // Create and show the widgets
-    TQSplitter *split = new TQSplitter();
+    TQSplitter *split = new TQSplitter();
     DDIconView *iv   = new DDIconView( split );
     (void)             new DDListBox( split );
-    app.setMainWidget( split );
-    split->resize( 600, 400 );
-    split->show();
+    app.setMainWidget( split );
+    split->resize( 600, 400 );
+    split->show();
 
     // Set up the connection so that we can drop items into the icon view
-    TQObject::connect(
-        iv, SIGNAL(dropped(TQDropEvent*, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem>&)),
-        iv, SLOT(slotNewItem(TQDropEvent*, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem>&)));
+    TQObject::connect(
+        iv, SIGNAL(dropped(TQDropEvent*, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem>&)),
+        iv, SLOT(slotNewItem(TQDropEvent*, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem>&)));
 
     // Populate the TQIconView with icons
     DDIconViewItem *item;
@@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ int main( int argc, char *argv[] )
     item = new DDIconViewItem( iv, "Blue",  TQPixmap( blue_icon ) );
     item->setRenameEnabled( TRUE );
 
-    return app.exec();
+    return app.exec();
 }
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/iconview-simple_dd-main-h.html b/doc/html/iconview-simple_dd-main-h.html
index cd50dfebd..5784205ac 100644
--- a/doc/html/iconview-simple_dd-main-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/iconview-simple_dd-main-h.html
@@ -42,22 +42,22 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 **
 *****************************************************************************/
 
-#include <qapplication.h>
-#include <qcursor.h>
-#include <qsplitter.h>
-#include <qlistbox.h>
-#include <qiconview.h>
-#include <qpixmap.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
+#include <ntqcursor.h>
+#include <ntqsplitter.h>
+#include <ntqlistbox.h>
+#include <ntqiconview.h>
+#include <ntqpixmap.h>
 
 class TQDragEnterEvent;
 class TQDragDropEvent;
 
 
-class DDListBox : public TQListBox
+class DDListBox : public TQListBox
 {
     Q_OBJECT
 public:
-    DDListBox( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 );
+    DDListBox( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 );
     // Low-level drag and drop
     void dragEnterEvent( TQDragEnterEvent *evt );
     void dropEvent( TQDropEvent *evt );
@@ -71,26 +71,26 @@ private:
 class DDIconViewItem : public TQIconViewItem
 {
 public:
-    DDIconViewItem( TQIconView *parent, const TQString& text, const TQPixmap& icon ) :
+    DDIconViewItem( TQIconView *parent, const TQString& text, const TQPixmap& icon ) :
         TQIconViewItem( parent, text, icon ) {}
-    DDIconViewItem( TQIconView *parent, const TQString &text ) :
+    DDIconViewItem( TQIconView *parent, const TQString &text ) :
         TQIconViewItem( parent, text ) {}
     // High-level drag and drop
     bool acceptDrop( const TQMimeSource *mime ) const;
-    void dropped( TQDropEvent *evt, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem>& );
+    void dropped( TQDropEvent *evt, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem>& );
 };
 
 
-class DDIconView : public TQIconView
+class DDIconView : public TQIconView
 {
     Q_OBJECT
 public:
-    DDIconView( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 ) :
-        TQIconView( parent, name, f ) {}
+    DDIconView( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 ) :
+        TQIconView( parent, name, f ) {}
     // High-level drag and drop
-    TQDragObject *dragObject();
+    TQDragObject *dragObject();
 public slots:
-    void slotNewItem( TQDropEvent *evt, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem>& list );
+    void slotNewItem( TQDropEvent *evt, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem>& list );
 };
 
 
    • 
diff --git a/doc/html/iconview.html b/doc/html/iconview.html
index 77c2f00f0..7a6255b9c 100644
--- a/doc/html/iconview.html
+++ b/doc/html/iconview.html
@@ -34,11 +34,11 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
 
     The icon view module provides a powerful visualization widget called
-TQIconView. API and feature-wise it is similar to TQListView and
-TQListBox. It contains optionally labelled pixmap items that the user
+TQIconView. API and feature-wise it is similar to TQListView and
+TQListBox. It contains optionally labelled pixmap items that the user
 can select, drag around, rename, delete, etc.
-
     
    Screenshot of TQIconVIew
    
-
     Please see the class documentation for
+
     
    Screenshot of TQIconVIew
    
+
     Please see the class documentation for
 details.
 
     
 
diff --git a/doc/html/images.html b/doc/html/images.html
index 8ff5ac799..891a20255 100644
--- a/doc/html/images.html
+++ b/doc/html/images.html
@@ -35,9 +35,9 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
     These classes are used for manipulating images.
 
     
 
    
-
    TQBitmapMonochrome (1-bit depth) pixmaps
-
    TQBrushDefines the fill pattern of shapes drawn by a TQPainter
-
    TQCanvas2D area that can contain TQCanvasItem objects
+
    TQBitmapMonochrome (1-bit depth) pixmaps
+
    TQBrushDefines the fill pattern of shapes drawn by a TQPainter
+
    TQCanvas2D area that can contain TQCanvasItem objects
 
    TQCanvasEllipseEllipse or ellipse segment on a TQCanvas
 
    TQCanvasItemAbstract graphic object on a TQCanvas
 
    TQCanvasItemListList of TQCanvasItems
@@ -51,37 +51,37 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
    TQCanvasSpriteAnimated canvas item on a TQCanvas
 
    TQCanvasTextText object on a TQCanvas
 
    TQCanvasViewOn-screen view of a TQCanvas
-
    TQColorColors based on RGB or HSV values
+
    TQColorColors based on RGB or HSV values
 
    TQColorGroupGroup of widget colors
-
    TQGLNamespace for miscellaneous identifiers in the TQt OpenGL module
-
    TQGLColormapUsed for installing custom colormaps into TQGLWidgets
+
    TQGLNamespace for miscellaneous identifiers in the TQt OpenGL module
+
    TQGLColormapUsed for installing custom colormaps into TQGLWidgets
 
    TQGLContextEncapsulates an OpenGL rendering context
 
    TQGLFormatThe display format of an OpenGL rendering context
 
    TQGLWidgetWidget for rendering OpenGL graphics
-
    TQIconSetSet of icons with different styles and sizes
-
    TQImageHardware-independent pixmap representation with direct access to the pixel data
+
    TQIconSetSet of icons with different styles and sizes
+
    TQImageHardware-independent pixmap representation with direct access to the pixel data
 
    TQImageConsumerAbstraction used by TQImageDecoder
 
    TQImageDecoderIncremental image decoder for all supported image formats
 
    TQImageFormatIncremental image decoder for a specific image format
 
    TQImageFormatTypeFactory that makes TQImageFormat objects
 
    TQImageIOParameters for loading and saving images
-
    TQMovieIncremental loading of animations or images, signalling as it progresses
-
    TQPaintDeviceThe base class of objects that can be painted
-
    TQPaintDeviceMetricsInformation about a paint device
-
    TQPainterDoes low-level painting e.g. on widgets
-
    TQPaletteColor groups for each widget state
-
    TQPenDefines how a TQPainter should draw lines and outlines of shapes
-
    TQPicturePaint device that records and replays TQPainter commands
-
    TQPixmapOff-screen, pixel-based paint device
-
    TQPixmapCacheApplication-global cache for pixmaps
+
    TQMovieIncremental loading of animations or images, signalling as it progresses
+
    TQPaintDeviceThe base class of objects that can be painted
+
    TQPaintDeviceMetricsInformation about a paint device
+
    TQPainterDoes low-level painting e.g. on widgets
+
    TQPaletteColor groups for each widget state
+
    TQPenDefines how a TQPainter should draw lines and outlines of shapes
+
    TQPicturePaint device that records and replays TQPainter commands
+
    TQPixmapOff-screen, pixel-based paint device
+
    TQPixmapCacheApplication-global cache for pixmaps
 
    TQPNGImagePackerCreates well-compressed PNG animations
-
    TQPointDefines a point in the plane
-
    TQPointArrayArray of points
-
    TQPrinterPaint device that paints on a printer
-
    TQRectDefines a rectangle in the plane
-
    TQRegionClip region for a painter
-
    TQSizeDefines the size of a two-dimensional object
-
    TQWMatrix2D transformations of a coordinate system
+
    TQPointDefines a point in the plane
+
    TQPointArrayArray of points
+
    TQPrinterPaint device that paints on a printer
+
    TQRectDefines a rectangle in the plane
+
    TQRegionClip region for a painter
+
    TQSizeDefines the size of a two-dimensional object
+
    TQWMatrix2D transformations of a coordinate system
 
    
 
 
    
diff --git a/doc/html/index b/doc/html/index
index e6f742994..335534ca2 100644
--- a/doc/html/index
+++ b/doc/html/index
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
 "A standard ActiveX and the \"simple\" ActiveQt widget." qaxserver-demo-simple.html
 "A tiny SAX2 parser" tagreader-example.html
 "About Modules" modules.html
-"About Qt" aboutqt.html
+"About Qt" aboutntqt.html
 "About Unicode" unicode.html
 "About the Visual Studio Integration Plugin" integration.html
 "ActiveQt Examples" activeqt-examples.html
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@
 "Data Elements" tutorial2-03.html
 "Debugging Techniques" debug.html
 "Demonstration of SAX2 features" tagreader-with-features-example.html
-"Deploying Qt Applications" distributingqt.html
+"Deploying Qt Applications" distributingntqt.html
 "Digital Clock" dclock-example.html
 "Drag and Drop" dnd.html
 "Drag and Drop" dragdrop-example.html
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@
 "Header File Index" headers.html
 "Hello, World" hello-example.html
 "Helpsystem" helpsystem-example.html
-"How to Learn Qt" how-to-learn-qt.html
+"How to Learn Qt" how-to-learn-ntqt.html
 "How to Report A Bug" bughowto.html
 "How to create a large, sparse QTable" bigtable-example.html
 "How to use X11 overlays with the Qt OpenGL extension" opengl-x11-overlays.html
@@ -127,34 +127,34 @@
 "Progress Bar" progressbar-example.html
 "Progress Bar and Dialog Example" progress-example.html
 "Properties" properties.html
-"QAccel" qaccel.html
-"QAccel::activated" qaccel.html#activated
-"QAccel::activatedAmbiguously" qaccel.html#activatedAmbiguously
-"QAccel::clear" qaccel.html#clear
-"QAccel::connectItem" qaccel.html#connectItem
-"QAccel::count" qaccel.html#count
-"QAccel::disconnectItem" qaccel.html#disconnectItem
-"QAccel::findKey" qaccel.html#findKey
-"QAccel::insertItem" qaccel.html#insertItem
-"QAccel::isEnabled" qaccel.html#isEnabled
-"QAccel::isItemEnabled" qaccel.html#isItemEnabled
-"QAccel::key" qaccel.html#key
-"QAccel::removeItem" qaccel.html#removeItem
-"QAccel::setEnabled" qaccel.html#setEnabled
-"QAccel::setItemEnabled" qaccel.html#setItemEnabled
-"QAccel::setWhatsThis" qaccel.html#setWhatsThis
-"QAccel::shortcutKey" qaccel.html#shortcutKey
-"QAccel::whatsThis" qaccel.html#whatsThis
-"QAccel::~QAccel" qaccel.html#~QAccel
-"QAccessible" qaccessible.html
-"QAccessible::Event" qaccessible.html#Event
-"QAccessible::NavDirection" qaccessible.html#NavDirection
-"QAccessible::Role" qaccessible.html#Role
-"QAccessible::State" qaccessible.html#State
-"QAccessible::Text" qaccessible.html#Text
-"QAccessible::isActive" qaccessible.html#isActive
-"QAccessible::queryAccessibleInterface" qaccessible.html#queryAccessibleInterface
-"QAccessible::updateAccessibility" qaccessible.html#updateAccessibility
+"QAccel" ntqaccel.html
+"QAccel::activated" ntqaccel.html#activated
+"QAccel::activatedAmbiguously" ntqaccel.html#activatedAmbiguously
+"QAccel::clear" ntqaccel.html#clear
+"QAccel::connectItem" ntqaccel.html#connectItem
+"QAccel::count" ntqaccel.html#count
+"QAccel::disconnectItem" ntqaccel.html#disconnectItem
+"QAccel::findKey" ntqaccel.html#findKey
+"QAccel::insertItem" ntqaccel.html#insertItem
+"QAccel::isEnabled" ntqaccel.html#isEnabled
+"QAccel::isItemEnabled" ntqaccel.html#isItemEnabled
+"QAccel::key" ntqaccel.html#key
+"QAccel::removeItem" ntqaccel.html#removeItem
+"QAccel::setEnabled" ntqaccel.html#setEnabled
+"QAccel::setItemEnabled" ntqaccel.html#setItemEnabled
+"QAccel::setWhatsThis" ntqaccel.html#setWhatsThis
+"QAccel::shortcutKey" ntqaccel.html#shortcutKey
+"QAccel::whatsThis" ntqaccel.html#whatsThis
+"QAccel::~QAccel" ntqaccel.html#~QAccel
+"QAccessible" ntqaccessible.html
+"QAccessible::Event" ntqaccessible.html#Event
+"QAccessible::NavDirection" ntqaccessible.html#NavDirection
+"QAccessible::Role" ntqaccessible.html#Role
+"QAccessible::State" ntqaccessible.html#State
+"QAccessible::Text" ntqaccessible.html#Text
+"QAccessible::isActive" ntqaccessible.html#isActive
+"QAccessible::queryAccessibleInterface" ntqaccessible.html#queryAccessibleInterface
+"QAccessible::updateAccessibility" ntqaccessible.html#updateAccessibility
 "QAccessibleInterface" qaccessibleinterface.html
 "QAccessibleInterface::childCount" qaccessibleinterface.html#childCount
 "QAccessibleInterface::clearSelection" qaccessibleinterface.html#clearSelection
@@ -175,52 +175,52 @@
 "QAccessibleObject" qaccessibleobject.html
 "QAccessibleObject::object" qaccessibleobject.html#object
 "QAccessibleObject::~QAccessibleObject" qaccessibleobject.html#~QAccessibleObject
-"QAction" qaction.html
-"QAction::accel" qaction.html#accel
-"QAction::accel" qaction.html#accel-prop
-"QAction::activate" qaction.html#activate
-"QAction::activated" qaction.html#activated
-"QAction::addTo" qaction.html#addTo
-"QAction::addedTo" qaction.html#addedTo
-"QAction::clearStatusText" qaction.html#clearStatusText
-"QAction::enabled" qaction.html#enabled-prop
-"QAction::iconSet" qaction.html#iconSet
-"QAction::iconSet" qaction.html#iconSet-prop
-"QAction::isEnabled" qaction.html#isEnabled
-"QAction::isOn" qaction.html#isOn
-"QAction::isToggleAction" qaction.html#isToggleAction
-"QAction::isVisible" qaction.html#isVisible
-"QAction::menuStatusText" qaction.html#menuStatusText
-"QAction::menuText" qaction.html#menuText
-"QAction::menuText" qaction.html#menuText-prop
-"QAction::on" qaction.html#on-prop
-"QAction::removeFrom" qaction.html#removeFrom
-"QAction::setAccel" qaction.html#setAccel
-"QAction::setDisabled" qaction.html#setDisabled
-"QAction::setEnabled" qaction.html#setEnabled
-"QAction::setIconSet" qaction.html#setIconSet
-"QAction::setMenuText" qaction.html#setMenuText
-"QAction::setOn" qaction.html#setOn
-"QAction::setStatusTip" qaction.html#setStatusTip
-"QAction::setText" qaction.html#setText
-"QAction::setToggleAction" qaction.html#setToggleAction
-"QAction::setToolTip" qaction.html#setToolTip
-"QAction::setVisible" qaction.html#setVisible
-"QAction::setWhatsThis" qaction.html#setWhatsThis
-"QAction::showStatusText" qaction.html#showStatusText
-"QAction::statusTip" qaction.html#statusTip
-"QAction::statusTip" qaction.html#statusTip-prop
-"QAction::text" qaction.html#text
-"QAction::text" qaction.html#text-prop
-"QAction::toggle" qaction.html#toggle
-"QAction::toggleAction" qaction.html#toggleAction-prop
-"QAction::toggled" qaction.html#toggled
-"QAction::toolTip" qaction.html#toolTip
-"QAction::toolTip" qaction.html#toolTip-prop
-"QAction::visible" qaction.html#visible-prop
-"QAction::whatsThis" qaction.html#whatsThis
-"QAction::whatsThis" qaction.html#whatsThis-prop
-"QAction::~QAction" qaction.html#~QAction
+"QAction" ntqaction.html
+"QAction::accel" ntqaction.html#accel
+"QAction::accel" ntqaction.html#accel-prop
+"QAction::activate" ntqaction.html#activate
+"QAction::activated" ntqaction.html#activated
+"QAction::addTo" ntqaction.html#addTo
+"QAction::addedTo" ntqaction.html#addedTo
+"QAction::clearStatusText" ntqaction.html#clearStatusText
+"QAction::enabled" ntqaction.html#enabled-prop
+"QAction::iconSet" ntqaction.html#iconSet
+"QAction::iconSet" ntqaction.html#iconSet-prop
+"QAction::isEnabled" ntqaction.html#isEnabled
+"QAction::isOn" ntqaction.html#isOn
+"QAction::isToggleAction" ntqaction.html#isToggleAction
+"QAction::isVisible" ntqaction.html#isVisible
+"QAction::menuStatusText" ntqaction.html#menuStatusText
+"QAction::menuText" ntqaction.html#menuText
+"QAction::menuText" ntqaction.html#menuText-prop
+"QAction::on" ntqaction.html#on-prop
+"QAction::removeFrom" ntqaction.html#removeFrom
+"QAction::setAccel" ntqaction.html#setAccel
+"QAction::setDisabled" ntqaction.html#setDisabled
+"QAction::setEnabled" ntqaction.html#setEnabled
+"QAction::setIconSet" ntqaction.html#setIconSet
+"QAction::setMenuText" ntqaction.html#setMenuText
+"QAction::setOn" ntqaction.html#setOn
+"QAction::setStatusTip" ntqaction.html#setStatusTip
+"QAction::setText" ntqaction.html#setText
+"QAction::setToggleAction" ntqaction.html#setToggleAction
+"QAction::setToolTip" ntqaction.html#setToolTip
+"QAction::setVisible" ntqaction.html#setVisible
+"QAction::setWhatsThis" ntqaction.html#setWhatsThis
+"QAction::showStatusText" ntqaction.html#showStatusText
+"QAction::statusTip" ntqaction.html#statusTip
+"QAction::statusTip" ntqaction.html#statusTip-prop
+"QAction::text" ntqaction.html#text
+"QAction::text" ntqaction.html#text-prop
+"QAction::toggle" ntqaction.html#toggle
+"QAction::toggleAction" ntqaction.html#toggleAction-prop
+"QAction::toggled" ntqaction.html#toggled
+"QAction::toolTip" ntqaction.html#toolTip
+"QAction::toolTip" ntqaction.html#toolTip-prop
+"QAction::visible" ntqaction.html#visible-prop
+"QAction::whatsThis" ntqaction.html#whatsThis
+"QAction::whatsThis" ntqaction.html#whatsThis-prop
+"QAction::~QAction" ntqaction.html#~QAction
 "QActionGroup" qactiongroup.html
 "QActionGroup::add" qactiongroup.html#add
 "QActionGroup::addSeparator" qactiongroup.html#addSeparator
@@ -233,127 +233,127 @@
 "QActionGroup::usesDropDown" qactiongroup.html#usesDropDown
 "QActionGroup::usesDropDown" qactiongroup.html#usesDropDown-prop
 "QActionGroup::~QActionGroup" qactiongroup.html#~QActionGroup
-"QApplication" qapplication.html
-"QApplication::ColorSpec" qapplication.html#ColorSpec
-"QApplication::Encoding" qapplication.html#Encoding
-"QApplication::Type" qapplication.html#Type
-"QApplication::aboutTQt" qapplication.html#aboutTQt
-"QApplication::aboutToQuit" qapplication.html#aboutToQuit
-"QApplication::activeModalWidget" qapplication.html#activeModalWidget
-"QApplication::activePopupWidget" qapplication.html#activePopupWidget
-"QApplication::activeWindow" qapplication.html#activeWindow
-"QApplication::addLibraryPath" qapplication.html#addLibraryPath
-"QApplication::allWidgets" qapplication.html#allWidgets
-"QApplication::applicationDirPath" qapplication.html#applicationDirPath
-"QApplication::applicationFilePath" qapplication.html#applicationFilePath
-"QApplication::argc" qapplication.html#argc
-"QApplication::argv" qapplication.html#argv
-"QApplication::beep" qapplication.html#beep
-"QApplication::clipboard" qapplication.html#clipboard
-"QApplication::closeAllWindows" qapplication.html#closeAllWindows
-"QApplication::closingDown" qapplication.html#closingDown
-"QApplication::colorSpec" qapplication.html#colorSpec
-"QApplication::commitData" qapplication.html#commitData
-"QApplication::cursorFlashTime" qapplication.html#cursorFlashTime
-"QApplication::desktop" qapplication.html#desktop
-"QApplication::desktopSettingsAware" qapplication.html#desktopSettingsAware
-"QApplication::doubleClickInterval" qapplication.html#doubleClickInterval
-"QApplication::eventLoop" qapplication.html#eventLoop
-"QApplication::exec" qapplication.html#exec
-"QApplication::exit" qapplication.html#exit
-"QApplication::flush" qapplication.html#flush
-"QApplication::flushX" qapplication.html#flushX
-"QApplication::focusWidget" qapplication.html#focusWidget
-"QApplication::font" qapplication.html#font
-"QApplication::fontMetrics" qapplication.html#fontMetrics
-"QApplication::globalStrut" qapplication.html#globalStrut
-"QApplication::guiThreadAwake" qapplication.html#guiThreadAwake
-"QApplication::hasGlobalMouseTracking" qapplication.html#hasGlobalMouseTracking
-"QApplication::hasPendingEvents" qapplication.html#hasPendingEvents
-"QApplication::horizontalAlignment" qapplication.html#horizontalAlignment
-"QApplication::initialize" qapplication.html#initialize
-"QApplication::installTranslator" qapplication.html#installTranslator
-"QApplication::isEffectEnabled" qapplication.html#isEffectEnabled
-"QApplication::isSessionRestored" qapplication.html#isSessionRestored
-"QApplication::lastWindowClosed" qapplication.html#lastWindowClosed
-"QApplication::libraryPaths" qapplication.html#libraryPaths
-"QApplication::lock" qapplication.html#lock
-"QApplication::locked" qapplication.html#locked
-"QApplication::macEventFilter" qapplication.html#macEventFilter
-"QApplication::mainWidget" qapplication.html#mainWidget
-"QApplication::notify" qapplication.html#notify
-"QApplication::overrideCursor" qapplication.html#overrideCursor
-"QApplication::palette" qapplication.html#palette
-"QApplication::polish" qapplication.html#polish
-"QApplication::postEvent" qapplication.html#postEvent
-"QApplication::processEvents" qapplication.html#processEvents
-"QApplication::quit" qapplication.html#quit
-"QApplication::qwsDecoration" qapplication.html#qwsDecoration
-"QApplication::qwsEventFilter" qapplication.html#qwsEventFilter
-"QApplication::qwsSetCustomColors" qapplication.html#qwsSetCustomColors
-"QApplication::qwsSetDecoration" qapplication.html#qwsSetDecoration
-"QApplication::removeLibraryPath" qapplication.html#removeLibraryPath
-"QApplication::removePostedEvent" qapplication.html#removePostedEvent
-"QApplication::removePostedEvents" qapplication.html#removePostedEvents
-"QApplication::removeTranslator" qapplication.html#removeTranslator
-"QApplication::restoreOverrideCursor" qapplication.html#restoreOverrideCursor
-"QApplication::reverseLayout" qapplication.html#reverseLayout
-"QApplication::saveState" qapplication.html#saveState
-"QApplication::sendEvent" qapplication.html#sendEvent
-"QApplication::sendPostedEvents" qapplication.html#sendPostedEvents
-"QApplication::sessionId" qapplication.html#sessionId
-"QApplication::sessionKey" qapplication.html#sessionKey
-"QApplication::setColorSpec" qapplication.html#setColorSpec
-"QApplication::setCursorFlashTime" qapplication.html#setCursorFlashTime
-"QApplication::setDesktopSettingsAware" qapplication.html#setDesktopSettingsAware
-"QApplication::setDoubleClickInterval" qapplication.html#setDoubleClickInterval
-"QApplication::setEffectEnabled" qapplication.html#setEffectEnabled
-"QApplication::setFont" qapplication.html#setFont
-"QApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking" qapplication.html#setGlobalMouseTracking
-"QApplication::setGlobalStrut" qapplication.html#setGlobalStrut
-"QApplication::setLibraryPaths" qapplication.html#setLibraryPaths
-"QApplication::setMainWidget" qapplication.html#setMainWidget
-"QApplication::setOverrideCursor" qapplication.html#setOverrideCursor
-"QApplication::setPalette" qapplication.html#setPalette
-"QApplication::setReverseLayout" qapplication.html#setReverseLayout
-"QApplication::setStartDragDistance" qapplication.html#setStartDragDistance
-"QApplication::setStartDragTime" qapplication.html#setStartDragTime
-"QApplication::setStyle" qapplication.html#setStyle
-"QApplication::setWheelScrollLines" qapplication.html#setWheelScrollLines
-"QApplication::startDragDistance" qapplication.html#startDragDistance
-"QApplication::startDragTime" qapplication.html#startDragTime
-"QApplication::startingUp" qapplication.html#startingUp
-"QApplication::style" qapplication.html#style
-"QApplication::syncX" qapplication.html#syncX
-"QApplication::topLevelWidgets" qapplication.html#topLevelWidgets
-"QApplication::translate" qapplication.html#translate
-"QApplication::tryLock" qapplication.html#tryLock
-"QApplication::type" qapplication.html#type
-"QApplication::unlock" qapplication.html#unlock
-"QApplication::wakeUpGuiThread" qapplication.html#wakeUpGuiThread
-"QApplication::wheelScrollLines" qapplication.html#wheelScrollLines
-"QApplication::widgetAt" qapplication.html#widgetAt
-"QApplication::winEventFilter" qapplication.html#winEventFilter
-"QApplication::winFocus" qapplication.html#winFocus
-"QApplication::x11EventFilter" qapplication.html#x11EventFilter
-"QApplication::x11ProcessEvent" qapplication.html#x11ProcessEvent
-"QApplication::~QApplication" qapplication.html#~QApplication
-"QArray Class Reference (obsolete)" qarray.html
-"QAsciiCache" qasciicache.html
-"QAsciiCache::clear" qasciicache.html#clear
-"QAsciiCache::count" qasciicache.html#count
-"QAsciiCache::find" qasciicache.html#find
-"QAsciiCache::insert" qasciicache.html#insert
-"QAsciiCache::isEmpty" qasciicache.html#isEmpty
-"QAsciiCache::maxCost" qasciicache.html#maxCost
-"QAsciiCache::operator[]" qasciicache.html#operator[]
-"QAsciiCache::remove" qasciicache.html#remove
-"QAsciiCache::setMaxCost" qasciicache.html#setMaxCost
-"QAsciiCache::size" qasciicache.html#size
-"QAsciiCache::statistics" qasciicache.html#statistics
-"QAsciiCache::take" qasciicache.html#take
-"QAsciiCache::totalCost" qasciicache.html#totalCost
-"QAsciiCache::~QAsciiCache" qasciicache.html#~QAsciiCache
+"QApplication" ntqapplication.html
+"QApplication::ColorSpec" ntqapplication.html#ColorSpec
+"QApplication::Encoding" ntqapplication.html#Encoding
+"QApplication::Type" ntqapplication.html#Type
+"QApplication::aboutTQt" ntqapplication.html#aboutTQt
+"QApplication::aboutToQuit" ntqapplication.html#aboutToQuit
+"QApplication::activeModalWidget" ntqapplication.html#activeModalWidget
+"QApplication::activePopupWidget" ntqapplication.html#activePopupWidget
+"QApplication::activeWindow" ntqapplication.html#activeWindow
+"QApplication::addLibraryPath" ntqapplication.html#addLibraryPath
+"QApplication::allWidgets" ntqapplication.html#allWidgets
+"QApplication::applicationDirPath" ntqapplication.html#applicationDirPath
+"QApplication::applicationFilePath" ntqapplication.html#applicationFilePath
+"QApplication::argc" ntqapplication.html#argc
+"QApplication::argv" ntqapplication.html#argv
+"QApplication::beep" ntqapplication.html#beep
+"QApplication::clipboard" ntqapplication.html#clipboard
+"QApplication::closeAllWindows" ntqapplication.html#closeAllWindows
+"QApplication::closingDown" ntqapplication.html#closingDown
+"QApplication::colorSpec" ntqapplication.html#colorSpec
+"QApplication::commitData" ntqapplication.html#commitData
+"QApplication::cursorFlashTime" ntqapplication.html#cursorFlashTime
+"QApplication::desktop" ntqapplication.html#desktop
+"QApplication::desktopSettingsAware" ntqapplication.html#desktopSettingsAware
+"QApplication::doubleClickInterval" ntqapplication.html#doubleClickInterval
+"QApplication::eventLoop" ntqapplication.html#eventLoop
+"QApplication::exec" ntqapplication.html#exec
+"QApplication::exit" ntqapplication.html#exit
+"QApplication::flush" ntqapplication.html#flush
+"QApplication::flushX" ntqapplication.html#flushX
+"QApplication::focusWidget" ntqapplication.html#focusWidget
+"QApplication::font" ntqapplication.html#font
+"QApplication::fontMetrics" ntqapplication.html#fontMetrics
+"QApplication::globalStrut" ntqapplication.html#globalStrut
+"QApplication::guiThreadAwake" ntqapplication.html#guiThreadAwake
+"QApplication::hasGlobalMouseTracking" ntqapplication.html#hasGlobalMouseTracking
+"QApplication::hasPendingEvents" ntqapplication.html#hasPendingEvents
+"QApplication::horizontalAlignment" ntqapplication.html#horizontalAlignment
+"QApplication::initialize" ntqapplication.html#initialize
+"QApplication::installTranslator" ntqapplication.html#installTranslator
+"QApplication::isEffectEnabled" ntqapplication.html#isEffectEnabled
+"QApplication::isSessionRestored" ntqapplication.html#isSessionRestored
+"QApplication::lastWindowClosed" ntqapplication.html#lastWindowClosed
+"QApplication::libraryPaths" ntqapplication.html#libraryPaths
+"QApplication::lock" ntqapplication.html#lock
+"QApplication::locked" ntqapplication.html#locked
+"QApplication::macEventFilter" ntqapplication.html#macEventFilter
+"QApplication::mainWidget" ntqapplication.html#mainWidget
+"QApplication::notify" ntqapplication.html#notify
+"QApplication::overrideCursor" ntqapplication.html#overrideCursor
+"QApplication::palette" ntqapplication.html#palette
+"QApplication::polish" ntqapplication.html#polish
+"QApplication::postEvent" ntqapplication.html#postEvent
+"QApplication::processEvents" ntqapplication.html#processEvents
+"QApplication::quit" ntqapplication.html#quit
+"QApplication::qwsDecoration" ntqapplication.html#qwsDecoration
+"QApplication::qwsEventFilter" ntqapplication.html#qwsEventFilter
+"QApplication::qwsSetCustomColors" ntqapplication.html#qwsSetCustomColors
+"QApplication::qwsSetDecoration" ntqapplication.html#qwsSetDecoration
+"QApplication::removeLibraryPath" ntqapplication.html#removeLibraryPath
+"QApplication::removePostedEvent" ntqapplication.html#removePostedEvent
+"QApplication::removePostedEvents" ntqapplication.html#removePostedEvents
+"QApplication::removeTranslator" ntqapplication.html#removeTranslator
+"QApplication::restoreOverrideCursor" ntqapplication.html#restoreOverrideCursor
+"QApplication::reverseLayout" ntqapplication.html#reverseLayout
+"QApplication::saveState" ntqapplication.html#saveState
+"QApplication::sendEvent" ntqapplication.html#sendEvent
+"QApplication::sendPostedEvents" ntqapplication.html#sendPostedEvents
+"QApplication::sessionId" ntqapplication.html#sessionId
+"QApplication::sessionKey" ntqapplication.html#sessionKey
+"QApplication::setColorSpec" ntqapplication.html#setColorSpec
+"QApplication::setCursorFlashTime" ntqapplication.html#setCursorFlashTime
+"QApplication::setDesktopSettingsAware" ntqapplication.html#setDesktopSettingsAware
+"QApplication::setDoubleClickInterval" ntqapplication.html#setDoubleClickInterval
+"QApplication::setEffectEnabled" ntqapplication.html#setEffectEnabled
+"QApplication::setFont" ntqapplication.html#setFont
+"QApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking" ntqapplication.html#setGlobalMouseTracking
+"QApplication::setGlobalStrut" ntqapplication.html#setGlobalStrut
+"QApplication::setLibraryPaths" ntqapplication.html#setLibraryPaths
+"QApplication::setMainWidget" ntqapplication.html#setMainWidget
+"QApplication::setOverrideCursor" ntqapplication.html#setOverrideCursor
+"QApplication::setPalette" ntqapplication.html#setPalette
+"QApplication::setReverseLayout" ntqapplication.html#setReverseLayout
+"QApplication::setStartDragDistance" ntqapplication.html#setStartDragDistance
+"QApplication::setStartDragTime" ntqapplication.html#setStartDragTime
+"QApplication::setStyle" ntqapplication.html#setStyle
+"QApplication::setWheelScrollLines" ntqapplication.html#setWheelScrollLines
+"QApplication::startDragDistance" ntqapplication.html#startDragDistance
+"QApplication::startDragTime" ntqapplication.html#startDragTime
+"QApplication::startingUp" ntqapplication.html#startingUp
+"QApplication::style" ntqapplication.html#style
+"QApplication::syncX" ntqapplication.html#syncX
+"QApplication::topLevelWidgets" ntqapplication.html#topLevelWidgets
+"QApplication::translate" ntqapplication.html#translate
+"QApplication::tryLock" ntqapplication.html#tryLock
+"QApplication::type" ntqapplication.html#type
+"QApplication::unlock" ntqapplication.html#unlock
+"QApplication::wakeUpGuiThread" ntqapplication.html#wakeUpGuiThread
+"QApplication::wheelScrollLines" ntqapplication.html#wheelScrollLines
+"QApplication::widgetAt" ntqapplication.html#widgetAt
+"QApplication::winEventFilter" ntqapplication.html#winEventFilter
+"QApplication::winFocus" ntqapplication.html#winFocus
+"QApplication::x11EventFilter" ntqapplication.html#x11EventFilter
+"QApplication::x11ProcessEvent" ntqapplication.html#x11ProcessEvent
+"QApplication::~QApplication" ntqapplication.html#~QApplication
+"QArray Class Reference (obsolete)" ntqarray.html
+"QAsciiCache" ntqasciicache.html
+"QAsciiCache::clear" ntqasciicache.html#clear
+"QAsciiCache::count" ntqasciicache.html#count
+"QAsciiCache::find" ntqasciicache.html#find
+"QAsciiCache::insert" ntqasciicache.html#insert
+"QAsciiCache::isEmpty" ntqasciicache.html#isEmpty
+"QAsciiCache::maxCost" ntqasciicache.html#maxCost
+"QAsciiCache::operator[]" ntqasciicache.html#operator[]
+"QAsciiCache::remove" ntqasciicache.html#remove
+"QAsciiCache::setMaxCost" ntqasciicache.html#setMaxCost
+"QAsciiCache::size" ntqasciicache.html#size
+"QAsciiCache::statistics" ntqasciicache.html#statistics
+"QAsciiCache::take" ntqasciicache.html#take
+"QAsciiCache::totalCost" ntqasciicache.html#totalCost
+"QAsciiCache::~QAsciiCache" ntqasciicache.html#~QAsciiCache
 "QAsciiCacheIterator" qasciicacheiterator.html
 "QAsciiCacheIterator::atFirst" qasciicacheiterator.html#atFirst
 "QAsciiCacheIterator::atLast" qasciicacheiterator.html#atLast
@@ -370,23 +370,23 @@
 "QAsciiCacheIterator::operator=" qasciicacheiterator.html#operator-eq
 "QAsciiCacheIterator::toFirst" qasciicacheiterator.html#toFirst
 "QAsciiCacheIterator::toLast" qasciicacheiterator.html#toLast
-"QAsciiDict" qasciidict.html
-"QAsciiDict::clear" qasciidict.html#clear
-"QAsciiDict::count" qasciidict.html#count
-"QAsciiDict::find" qasciidict.html#find
-"QAsciiDict::insert" qasciidict.html#insert
-"QAsciiDict::isEmpty" qasciidict.html#isEmpty
-"QAsciiDict::operator=" qasciidict.html#operator-eq
-"QAsciiDict::operator[]" qasciidict.html#operator[]
-"QAsciiDict::read" qasciidict.html#read
-"QAsciiDict::remove" qasciidict.html#remove
-"QAsciiDict::replace" qasciidict.html#replace
-"QAsciiDict::resize" qasciidict.html#resize
-"QAsciiDict::size" qasciidict.html#size
-"QAsciiDict::statistics" qasciidict.html#statistics
-"QAsciiDict::take" qasciidict.html#take
-"QAsciiDict::write" qasciidict.html#write
-"QAsciiDict::~QAsciiDict" qasciidict.html#~QAsciiDict
+"QAsciiDict" ntqasciidict.html
+"QAsciiDict::clear" ntqasciidict.html#clear
+"QAsciiDict::count" ntqasciidict.html#count
+"QAsciiDict::find" ntqasciidict.html#find
+"QAsciiDict::insert" ntqasciidict.html#insert
+"QAsciiDict::isEmpty" ntqasciidict.html#isEmpty
+"QAsciiDict::operator=" ntqasciidict.html#operator-eq
+"QAsciiDict::operator[]" ntqasciidict.html#operator[]
+"QAsciiDict::read" ntqasciidict.html#read
+"QAsciiDict::remove" ntqasciidict.html#remove
+"QAsciiDict::replace" ntqasciidict.html#replace
+"QAsciiDict::resize" ntqasciidict.html#resize
+"QAsciiDict::size" ntqasciidict.html#size
+"QAsciiDict::statistics" ntqasciidict.html#statistics
+"QAsciiDict::take" ntqasciidict.html#take
+"QAsciiDict::write" ntqasciidict.html#write
+"QAsciiDict::~QAsciiDict" ntqasciidict.html#~QAsciiDict
 "QAsciiDictIterator" qasciidictiterator.html
 "QAsciiDictIterator::count" qasciidictiterator.html#count
 "QAsciiDictIterator::current" qasciidictiterator.html#current
@@ -398,20 +398,20 @@
 "QAsciiDictIterator::operator+=" qasciidictiterator.html#operator+-eq
 "QAsciiDictIterator::toFirst" qasciidictiterator.html#toFirst
 "QAsciiDictIterator::~QAsciiDictIterator" qasciidictiterator.html#~QAsciiDictIterator
-"QAssistantClient" qassistantclient.html
-"QAssistantClient::assistantClosed" qassistantclient.html#assistantClosed
-"QAssistantClient::assistantOpened" qassistantclient.html#assistantOpened
-"QAssistantClient::closeAssistant" qassistantclient.html#closeAssistant
-"QAssistantClient::error" qassistantclient.html#error
-"QAssistantClient::isOpen" qassistantclient.html#isOpen
-"QAssistantClient::open" qassistantclient.html#open-prop
-"QAssistantClient::openAssistant" qassistantclient.html#openAssistant
-"QAssistantClient::setArguments" qassistantclient.html#setArguments
-"QAssistantClient::showPage" qassistantclient.html#showPage
-"QAssistantClient::~QAssistantClient" qassistantclient.html#~QAssistantClient
-"QAsyncIO::connect" qasyncio.html#connect
-"QAsyncIO::ready" qasyncio.html#ready
-"QAsyncIO::~QAsyncIO" qasyncio.html#~QAsyncIO
+"QAssistantClient" ntqassistantclient.html
+"QAssistantClient::assistantClosed" ntqassistantclient.html#assistantClosed
+"QAssistantClient::assistantOpened" ntqassistantclient.html#assistantOpened
+"QAssistantClient::closeAssistant" ntqassistantclient.html#closeAssistant
+"QAssistantClient::error" ntqassistantclient.html#error
+"QAssistantClient::isOpen" ntqassistantclient.html#isOpen
+"QAssistantClient::open" ntqassistantclient.html#open-prop
+"QAssistantClient::openAssistant" ntqassistantclient.html#openAssistant
+"QAssistantClient::setArguments" ntqassistantclient.html#setArguments
+"QAssistantClient::showPage" ntqassistantclient.html#showPage
+"QAssistantClient::~QAssistantClient" ntqassistantclient.html#~QAssistantClient
+"QAsyncIO::connect" ntqasyncio.html#connect
+"QAsyncIO::ready" ntqasyncio.html#ready
+"QAsyncIO::~QAsyncIO" ntqasyncio.html#~QAsyncIO
 "QAuServer::bucket" qauserver.html#bucket
 "QAuServer::decLoop" qauserver.html#decLoop
 "QAuServer::init" qauserver.html#init
@@ -520,32 +520,32 @@
 "QAxWidget::createHostWindow" qaxwidget.html#createHostWindow
 "QAxWidget::translateKeyEvent" qaxwidget.html#translateKeyEvent
 "QAxWidget::~QAxWidget" qaxwidget.html#~QAxWidget
-"QBig5Codec" qbig5codec.html
+"QBig5Codec" ntqbig5codec.html
 "QBig5hkscsCodec" qbig5hkscscodec.html
-"QBitArray" qbitarray.html
-"QBitArray::at" qbitarray.html#at
-"QBitArray::clearBit" qbitarray.html#clearBit
-"QBitArray::copy" qbitarray.html#copy
-"QBitArray::detach" qbitarray.html#detach
-"QBitArray::fill" qbitarray.html#fill
-"QBitArray::operator&=" qbitarray.html#operator-and-eq
-"QBitArray::operator=" qbitarray.html#operator-eq
-"QBitArray::operator[]" qbitarray.html#operator[]
-"QBitArray::operator^=" qbitarray.html#operator^-eq
-"QBitArray::operator|=" qbitarray.html#operator|-eq
-"QBitArray::operator~" qbitarray.html#operator~
-"QBitArray::pad0" qbitarray.html#pad0
-"QBitArray::resize" qbitarray.html#resize
-"QBitArray::setBit" qbitarray.html#setBit
-"QBitArray::size" qbitarray.html#size
-"QBitArray::testBit" qbitarray.html#testBit
-"QBitArray::toggleBit" qbitarray.html#toggleBit
+"QBitArray" ntqbitarray.html
+"QBitArray::at" ntqbitarray.html#at
+"QBitArray::clearBit" ntqbitarray.html#clearBit
+"QBitArray::copy" ntqbitarray.html#copy
+"QBitArray::detach" ntqbitarray.html#detach
+"QBitArray::fill" ntqbitarray.html#fill
+"QBitArray::operator&=" ntqbitarray.html#operator-and-eq
+"QBitArray::operator=" ntqbitarray.html#operator-eq
+"QBitArray::operator[]" ntqbitarray.html#operator[]
+"QBitArray::operator^=" ntqbitarray.html#operator^-eq
+"QBitArray::operator|=" ntqbitarray.html#operator|-eq
+"QBitArray::operator~" ntqbitarray.html#operator~
+"QBitArray::pad0" ntqbitarray.html#pad0
+"QBitArray::resize" ntqbitarray.html#resize
+"QBitArray::setBit" ntqbitarray.html#setBit
+"QBitArray::size" ntqbitarray.html#size
+"QBitArray::testBit" ntqbitarray.html#testBit
+"QBitArray::toggleBit" ntqbitarray.html#toggleBit
 "QBitVal" qbitval.html
 "QBitVal::operator int" qbitval.html#operator-int
 "QBitVal::operator=" qbitval.html#operator-eq
-"QBitmap" qbitmap.html
-"QBitmap::operator=" qbitmap.html#operator-eq
-"QBitmap::xForm" qbitmap.html#xForm
+"QBitmap" ntqbitmap.html
+"QBitmap::operator=" ntqbitmap.html#operator-eq
+"QBitmap::xForm" ntqbitmap.html#xForm
 "QBoxLayout" qboxlayout.html
 "QBoxLayout::Direction" qboxlayout.html#Direction
 "QBoxLayout::addItem" qboxlayout.html#addItem
@@ -572,150 +572,150 @@
 "QBoxLayout::setStretchFactor" qboxlayout.html#setStretchFactor
 "QBoxLayout::sizeHint" qboxlayout.html#sizeHint
 "QBoxLayout::~QBoxLayout" qboxlayout.html#~QBoxLayout
-"QBrush" qbrush.html
-"QBrush::color" qbrush.html#color
-"QBrush::copy" qbrush.html#copy
-"QBrush::detach" qbrush.html#detach
-"QBrush::operator!=" qbrush.html#operator!-eq
-"QBrush::operator=" qbrush.html#operator-eq
-"QBrush::operator==" qbrush.html#operator-eq-eq
-"QBrush::pixmap" qbrush.html#pixmap
-"QBrush::setColor" qbrush.html#setColor
-"QBrush::setPixmap" qbrush.html#setPixmap
-"QBrush::setStyle" qbrush.html#setStyle
-"QBrush::style" qbrush.html#style
-"QBrush::~QBrush" qbrush.html#~QBrush
-"QBuffer" qbuffer.html
-"QBuffer::buffer" qbuffer.html#buffer
-"QBuffer::setBuffer" qbuffer.html#setBuffer
-"QBuffer::writeBlock" qbuffer.html#writeBlock
-"QBuffer::~QBuffer" qbuffer.html#~QBuffer
-"QButton" qbutton.html
-"QButton::ToggleState" qbutton.html#ToggleState
-"QButton::ToggleType" qbutton.html#ToggleType
-"QButton::accel" qbutton.html#accel
-"QButton::accel" qbutton.html#accel-prop
-"QButton::animateClick" qbutton.html#animateClick
-"QButton::animateTimeout" qbutton.html#animateTimeout
-"QButton::autoRepeat" qbutton.html#autoRepeat
-"QButton::autoRepeat" qbutton.html#autoRepeat-prop
-"QButton::autoRepeatTimeout" qbutton.html#autoRepeatTimeout
-"QButton::clicked" qbutton.html#clicked
-"QButton::down" qbutton.html#down-prop
-"QButton::drawButton" qbutton.html#drawButton
-"QButton::drawButtonLabel" qbutton.html#drawButtonLabel
-"QButton::exclusiveToggle" qbutton.html#exclusiveToggle-prop
-"QButton::group" qbutton.html#group
-"QButton::hitButton" qbutton.html#hitButton
-"QButton::isDown" qbutton.html#isDown
-"QButton::isExclusiveToggle" qbutton.html#isExclusiveToggle
-"QButton::isOn" qbutton.html#isOn
-"QButton::isToggleButton" qbutton.html#isToggleButton
-"QButton::on" qbutton.html#on-prop
-"QButton::paintEvent" qbutton.html#paintEvent
-"QButton::pixmap" qbutton.html#pixmap
-"QButton::pixmap" qbutton.html#pixmap-prop
-"QButton::pressed" qbutton.html#pressed
-"QButton::released" qbutton.html#released
-"QButton::setAccel" qbutton.html#setAccel
-"QButton::setAutoRepeat" qbutton.html#setAutoRepeat
-"QButton::setDown" qbutton.html#setDown
-"QButton::setOn" qbutton.html#setOn
-"QButton::setPixmap" qbutton.html#setPixmap
-"QButton::setState" qbutton.html#setState
-"QButton::setText" qbutton.html#setText
-"QButton::setToggleButton" qbutton.html#setToggleButton
-"QButton::setToggleType" qbutton.html#setToggleType
-"QButton::state" qbutton.html#state
-"QButton::stateChanged" qbutton.html#stateChanged
-"QButton::text" qbutton.html#text
-"QButton::text" qbutton.html#text-prop
-"QButton::toggle" qbutton.html#toggle
-"QButton::toggleButton" qbutton.html#toggleButton-prop
-"QButton::toggleState" qbutton.html#toggleState-prop
-"QButton::toggleType" qbutton.html#toggleType
-"QButton::toggleType" qbutton.html#toggleType-prop
-"QButton::toggled" qbutton.html#toggled
-"QButton::~QButton" qbutton.html#~QButton
-"QButtonGroup" qbuttongroup.html
-"QButtonGroup::clicked" qbuttongroup.html#clicked
-"QButtonGroup::count" qbuttongroup.html#count
-"QButtonGroup::exclusive" qbuttongroup.html#exclusive-prop
-"QButtonGroup::find" qbuttongroup.html#find
-"QButtonGroup::id" qbuttongroup.html#id
-"QButtonGroup::init" qbuttongroup.html#init
-"QButtonGroup::insert" qbuttongroup.html#insert
-"QButtonGroup::isExclusive" qbuttongroup.html#isExclusive
-"QButtonGroup::isRadioButtonExclusive" qbuttongroup.html#isRadioButtonExclusive
-"QButtonGroup::moveFocus" qbuttongroup.html#moveFocus
-"QButtonGroup::pressed" qbuttongroup.html#pressed
-"QButtonGroup::radioButtonExclusive" qbuttongroup.html#radioButtonExclusive-prop
-"QButtonGroup::released" qbuttongroup.html#released
-"QButtonGroup::remove" qbuttongroup.html#remove
-"QButtonGroup::selected" qbuttongroup.html#selected
-"QButtonGroup::selectedId" qbuttongroup.html#selectedId
-"QButtonGroup::selectedId" qbuttongroup.html#selectedId-prop
-"QButtonGroup::setButton" qbuttongroup.html#setButton
-"QButtonGroup::setExclusive" qbuttongroup.html#setExclusive
-"QButtonGroup::setRadioButtonExclusive" qbuttongroup.html#setRadioButtonExclusive
+"QBrush" ntqbrush.html
+"QBrush::color" ntqbrush.html#color
+"QBrush::copy" ntqbrush.html#copy
+"QBrush::detach" ntqbrush.html#detach
+"QBrush::operator!=" ntqbrush.html#operator!-eq
+"QBrush::operator=" ntqbrush.html#operator-eq
+"QBrush::operator==" ntqbrush.html#operator-eq-eq
+"QBrush::pixmap" ntqbrush.html#pixmap
+"QBrush::setColor" ntqbrush.html#setColor
+"QBrush::setPixmap" ntqbrush.html#setPixmap
+"QBrush::setStyle" ntqbrush.html#setStyle
+"QBrush::style" ntqbrush.html#style
+"QBrush::~QBrush" ntqbrush.html#~QBrush
+"QBuffer" ntqbuffer.html
+"QBuffer::buffer" ntqbuffer.html#buffer
+"QBuffer::setBuffer" ntqbuffer.html#setBuffer
+"QBuffer::writeBlock" ntqbuffer.html#writeBlock
+"QBuffer::~QBuffer" ntqbuffer.html#~QBuffer
+"QButton" ntqbutton.html
+"QButton::ToggleState" ntqbutton.html#ToggleState
+"QButton::ToggleType" ntqbutton.html#ToggleType
+"QButton::accel" ntqbutton.html#accel
+"QButton::accel" ntqbutton.html#accel-prop
+"QButton::animateClick" ntqbutton.html#animateClick
+"QButton::animateTimeout" ntqbutton.html#animateTimeout
+"QButton::autoRepeat" ntqbutton.html#autoRepeat
+"QButton::autoRepeat" ntqbutton.html#autoRepeat-prop
+"QButton::autoRepeatTimeout" ntqbutton.html#autoRepeatTimeout
+"QButton::clicked" ntqbutton.html#clicked
+"QButton::down" ntqbutton.html#down-prop
+"QButton::drawButton" ntqbutton.html#drawButton
+"QButton::drawButtonLabel" ntqbutton.html#drawButtonLabel
+"QButton::exclusiveToggle" ntqbutton.html#exclusiveToggle-prop
+"QButton::group" ntqbutton.html#group
+"QButton::hitButton" ntqbutton.html#hitButton
+"QButton::isDown" ntqbutton.html#isDown
+"QButton::isExclusiveToggle" ntqbutton.html#isExclusiveToggle
+"QButton::isOn" ntqbutton.html#isOn
+"QButton::isToggleButton" ntqbutton.html#isToggleButton
+"QButton::on" ntqbutton.html#on-prop
+"QButton::paintEvent" ntqbutton.html#paintEvent
+"QButton::pixmap" ntqbutton.html#pixmap
+"QButton::pixmap" ntqbutton.html#pixmap-prop
+"QButton::pressed" ntqbutton.html#pressed
+"QButton::released" ntqbutton.html#released
+"QButton::setAccel" ntqbutton.html#setAccel
+"QButton::setAutoRepeat" ntqbutton.html#setAutoRepeat
+"QButton::setDown" ntqbutton.html#setDown
+"QButton::setOn" ntqbutton.html#setOn
+"QButton::setPixmap" ntqbutton.html#setPixmap
+"QButton::setState" ntqbutton.html#setState
+"QButton::setText" ntqbutton.html#setText
+"QButton::setToggleButton" ntqbutton.html#setToggleButton
+"QButton::setToggleType" ntqbutton.html#setToggleType
+"QButton::state" ntqbutton.html#state
+"QButton::stateChanged" ntqbutton.html#stateChanged
+"QButton::text" ntqbutton.html#text
+"QButton::text" ntqbutton.html#text-prop
+"QButton::toggle" ntqbutton.html#toggle
+"QButton::toggleButton" ntqbutton.html#toggleButton-prop
+"QButton::toggleState" ntqbutton.html#toggleState-prop
+"QButton::toggleType" ntqbutton.html#toggleType
+"QButton::toggleType" ntqbutton.html#toggleType-prop
+"QButton::toggled" ntqbutton.html#toggled
+"QButton::~QButton" ntqbutton.html#~QButton
+"QButtonGroup" ntqbuttongroup.html
+"QButtonGroup::clicked" ntqbuttongroup.html#clicked
+"QButtonGroup::count" ntqbuttongroup.html#count
+"QButtonGroup::exclusive" ntqbuttongroup.html#exclusive-prop
+"QButtonGroup::find" ntqbuttongroup.html#find
+"QButtonGroup::id" ntqbuttongroup.html#id
+"QButtonGroup::init" ntqbuttongroup.html#init
+"QButtonGroup::insert" ntqbuttongroup.html#insert
+"QButtonGroup::isExclusive" ntqbuttongroup.html#isExclusive
+"QButtonGroup::isRadioButtonExclusive" ntqbuttongroup.html#isRadioButtonExclusive
+"QButtonGroup::moveFocus" ntqbuttongroup.html#moveFocus
+"QButtonGroup::pressed" ntqbuttongroup.html#pressed
+"QButtonGroup::radioButtonExclusive" ntqbuttongroup.html#radioButtonExclusive-prop
+"QButtonGroup::released" ntqbuttongroup.html#released
+"QButtonGroup::remove" ntqbuttongroup.html#remove
+"QButtonGroup::selected" ntqbuttongroup.html#selected
+"QButtonGroup::selectedId" ntqbuttongroup.html#selectedId
+"QButtonGroup::selectedId" ntqbuttongroup.html#selectedId-prop
+"QButtonGroup::setButton" ntqbuttongroup.html#setButton
+"QButtonGroup::setExclusive" ntqbuttongroup.html#setExclusive
+"QButtonGroup::setRadioButtonExclusive" ntqbuttongroup.html#setRadioButtonExclusive
 "QByteArray" qbytearray.html
-"QCDEStyle" qcdestyle.html
-"QCDEStyle::~QCDEStyle" qcdestyle.html#~QCDEStyle
-"QCString" qcstring.html
-"QCString::append" qcstring.html#append
-"QCString::contains" qcstring.html#contains
-"QCString::copy" qcstring.html#copy
-"QCString::fill" qcstring.html#fill
-"QCString::find" qcstring.html#find
-"QCString::findRev" qcstring.html#findRev
-"QCString::insert" qcstring.html#insert
-"QCString::isEmpty" qcstring.html#isEmpty
-"QCString::isNull" qcstring.html#isNull
-"QCString::left" qcstring.html#left
-"QCString::leftJustify" qcstring.html#leftJustify
-"QCString::length" qcstring.html#length
-"QCString::lower" qcstring.html#lower
-"QCString::mid" qcstring.html#mid
-"QCString::operator const char *" qcstring.html#operator-const-char-*
-"QCString::operator+=" qcstring.html#operator+-eq
-"QCString::operator=" qcstring.html#operator-eq
-"QCString::prepend" qcstring.html#prepend
-"QCString::remove" qcstring.html#remove
-"QCString::replace" qcstring.html#replace
-"QCString::resize" qcstring.html#resize
-"QCString::right" qcstring.html#right
-"QCString::rightJustify" qcstring.html#rightJustify
-"QCString::setExpand" qcstring.html#setExpand
-"QCString::setNum" qcstring.html#setNum
-"QCString::setStr" qcstring.html#setStr
-"QCString::simplifyWhiteSpace" qcstring.html#simplifyWhiteSpace
-"QCString::sprintf" qcstring.html#sprintf
-"QCString::stripWhiteSpace" qcstring.html#stripWhiteSpace
-"QCString::toDouble" qcstring.html#toDouble
-"QCString::toFloat" qcstring.html#toFloat
-"QCString::toInt" qcstring.html#toInt
-"QCString::toLong" qcstring.html#toLong
-"QCString::toShort" qcstring.html#toShort
-"QCString::toUInt" qcstring.html#toUInt
-"QCString::toULong" qcstring.html#toULong
-"QCString::toUShort" qcstring.html#toUShort
-"QCString::truncate" qcstring.html#truncate
-"QCString::upper" qcstring.html#upper
-"QCache" qcache.html
-"QCache::clear" qcache.html#clear
-"QCache::count" qcache.html#count
-"QCache::find" qcache.html#find
-"QCache::insert" qcache.html#insert
-"QCache::isEmpty" qcache.html#isEmpty
-"QCache::maxCost" qcache.html#maxCost
-"QCache::operator[]" qcache.html#operator[]
-"QCache::remove" qcache.html#remove
-"QCache::setMaxCost" qcache.html#setMaxCost
-"QCache::size" qcache.html#size
-"QCache::statistics" qcache.html#statistics
-"QCache::take" qcache.html#take
-"QCache::totalCost" qcache.html#totalCost
-"QCache::~QCache" qcache.html#~QCache
+"QCDEStyle" ntqcdestyle.html
+"QCDEStyle::~QCDEStyle" ntqcdestyle.html#~QCDEStyle
+"QCString" ntqcstring.html
+"QCString::append" ntqcstring.html#append
+"QCString::contains" ntqcstring.html#contains
+"QCString::copy" ntqcstring.html#copy
+"QCString::fill" ntqcstring.html#fill
+"QCString::find" ntqcstring.html#find
+"QCString::findRev" ntqcstring.html#findRev
+"QCString::insert" ntqcstring.html#insert
+"QCString::isEmpty" ntqcstring.html#isEmpty
+"QCString::isNull" ntqcstring.html#isNull
+"QCString::left" ntqcstring.html#left
+"QCString::leftJustify" ntqcstring.html#leftJustify
+"QCString::length" ntqcstring.html#length
+"QCString::lower" ntqcstring.html#lower
+"QCString::mid" ntqcstring.html#mid
+"QCString::operator const char *" ntqcstring.html#operator-const-char-*
+"QCString::operator+=" ntqcstring.html#operator+-eq
+"QCString::operator=" ntqcstring.html#operator-eq
+"QCString::prepend" ntqcstring.html#prepend
+"QCString::remove" ntqcstring.html#remove
+"QCString::replace" ntqcstring.html#replace
+"QCString::resize" ntqcstring.html#resize
+"QCString::right" ntqcstring.html#right
+"QCString::rightJustify" ntqcstring.html#rightJustify
+"QCString::setExpand" ntqcstring.html#setExpand
+"QCString::setNum" ntqcstring.html#setNum
+"QCString::setStr" ntqcstring.html#setStr
+"QCString::simplifyWhiteSpace" ntqcstring.html#simplifyWhiteSpace
+"QCString::sprintf" ntqcstring.html#sprintf
+"QCString::stripWhiteSpace" ntqcstring.html#stripWhiteSpace
+"QCString::toDouble" ntqcstring.html#toDouble
+"QCString::toFloat" ntqcstring.html#toFloat
+"QCString::toInt" ntqcstring.html#toInt
+"QCString::toLong" ntqcstring.html#toLong
+"QCString::toShort" ntqcstring.html#toShort
+"QCString::toUInt" ntqcstring.html#toUInt
+"QCString::toULong" ntqcstring.html#toULong
+"QCString::toUShort" ntqcstring.html#toUShort
+"QCString::truncate" ntqcstring.html#truncate
+"QCString::upper" ntqcstring.html#upper
+"QCache" ntqcache.html
+"QCache::clear" ntqcache.html#clear
+"QCache::count" ntqcache.html#count
+"QCache::find" ntqcache.html#find
+"QCache::insert" ntqcache.html#insert
+"QCache::isEmpty" ntqcache.html#isEmpty
+"QCache::maxCost" ntqcache.html#maxCost
+"QCache::operator[]" ntqcache.html#operator[]
+"QCache::remove" ntqcache.html#remove
+"QCache::setMaxCost" ntqcache.html#setMaxCost
+"QCache::size" ntqcache.html#size
+"QCache::statistics" ntqcache.html#statistics
+"QCache::take" ntqcache.html#take
+"QCache::totalCost" ntqcache.html#totalCost
+"QCache::~QCache" ntqcache.html#~QCache
 "QCacheIterator" qcacheiterator.html
 "QCacheIterator::atFirst" qcacheiterator.html#atFirst
 "QCacheIterator::atLast" qcacheiterator.html#atLast
@@ -732,42 +732,42 @@
 "QCacheIterator::operator=" qcacheiterator.html#operator-eq
 "QCacheIterator::toFirst" qcacheiterator.html#toFirst
 "QCacheIterator::toLast" qcacheiterator.html#toLast
-"QCanvas" qcanvas.html
-"QCanvas::advance" qcanvas.html#advance
-"QCanvas::allItems" qcanvas.html#allItems
-"QCanvas::backgroundColor" qcanvas.html#backgroundColor
-"QCanvas::backgroundPixmap" qcanvas.html#backgroundPixmap
-"QCanvas::chunkSize" qcanvas.html#chunkSize
-"QCanvas::collisions" qcanvas.html#collisions
-"QCanvas::drawArea" qcanvas.html#drawArea
-"QCanvas::drawBackground" qcanvas.html#drawBackground
-"QCanvas::drawForeground" qcanvas.html#drawForeground
-"QCanvas::height" qcanvas.html#height
-"QCanvas::onCanvas" qcanvas.html#onCanvas
-"QCanvas::rect" qcanvas.html#rect
-"QCanvas::resize" qcanvas.html#resize
-"QCanvas::resized" qcanvas.html#resized
-"QCanvas::retune" qcanvas.html#retune
-"QCanvas::setAdvancePeriod" qcanvas.html#setAdvancePeriod
-"QCanvas::setAllChanged" qcanvas.html#setAllChanged
-"QCanvas::setBackgroundColor" qcanvas.html#setBackgroundColor
-"QCanvas::setBackgroundPixmap" qcanvas.html#setBackgroundPixmap
-"QCanvas::setChanged" qcanvas.html#setChanged
-"QCanvas::setDoubleBuffering" qcanvas.html#setDoubleBuffering
-"QCanvas::setTile" qcanvas.html#setTile
-"QCanvas::setTiles" qcanvas.html#setTiles
-"QCanvas::setUnchanged" qcanvas.html#setUnchanged
-"QCanvas::setUpdatePeriod" qcanvas.html#setUpdatePeriod
-"QCanvas::size" qcanvas.html#size
-"QCanvas::tile" qcanvas.html#tile
-"QCanvas::tileHeight" qcanvas.html#tileHeight
-"QCanvas::tileWidth" qcanvas.html#tileWidth
-"QCanvas::tilesHorizontally" qcanvas.html#tilesHorizontally
-"QCanvas::tilesVertically" qcanvas.html#tilesVertically
-"QCanvas::update" qcanvas.html#update
-"QCanvas::validChunk" qcanvas.html#validChunk
-"QCanvas::width" qcanvas.html#width
-"QCanvas::~QCanvas" qcanvas.html#~QCanvas
+"QCanvas" ntqcanvas.html
+"QCanvas::advance" ntqcanvas.html#advance
+"QCanvas::allItems" ntqcanvas.html#allItems
+"QCanvas::backgroundColor" ntqcanvas.html#backgroundColor
+"QCanvas::backgroundPixmap" ntqcanvas.html#backgroundPixmap
+"QCanvas::chunkSize" ntqcanvas.html#chunkSize
+"QCanvas::collisions" ntqcanvas.html#collisions
+"QCanvas::drawArea" ntqcanvas.html#drawArea
+"QCanvas::drawBackground" ntqcanvas.html#drawBackground
+"QCanvas::drawForeground" ntqcanvas.html#drawForeground
+"QCanvas::height" ntqcanvas.html#height
+"QCanvas::onCanvas" ntqcanvas.html#onCanvas
+"QCanvas::rect" ntqcanvas.html#rect
+"QCanvas::resize" ntqcanvas.html#resize
+"QCanvas::resized" ntqcanvas.html#resized
+"QCanvas::retune" ntqcanvas.html#retune
+"QCanvas::setAdvancePeriod" ntqcanvas.html#setAdvancePeriod
+"QCanvas::setAllChanged" ntqcanvas.html#setAllChanged
+"QCanvas::setBackgroundColor" ntqcanvas.html#setBackgroundColor
+"QCanvas::setBackgroundPixmap" ntqcanvas.html#setBackgroundPixmap
+"QCanvas::setChanged" ntqcanvas.html#setChanged
+"QCanvas::setDoubleBuffering" ntqcanvas.html#setDoubleBuffering
+"QCanvas::setTile" ntqcanvas.html#setTile
+"QCanvas::setTiles" ntqcanvas.html#setTiles
+"QCanvas::setUnchanged" ntqcanvas.html#setUnchanged
+"QCanvas::setUpdatePeriod" ntqcanvas.html#setUpdatePeriod
+"QCanvas::size" ntqcanvas.html#size
+"QCanvas::tile" ntqcanvas.html#tile
+"QCanvas::tileHeight" ntqcanvas.html#tileHeight
+"QCanvas::tileWidth" ntqcanvas.html#tileWidth
+"QCanvas::tilesHorizontally" ntqcanvas.html#tilesHorizontally
+"QCanvas::tilesVertically" ntqcanvas.html#tilesVertically
+"QCanvas::update" ntqcanvas.html#update
+"QCanvas::validChunk" ntqcanvas.html#validChunk
+"QCanvas::width" ntqcanvas.html#width
+"QCanvas::~QCanvas" ntqcanvas.html#~QCanvas
 "QCanvasEllipse" qcanvasellipse.html
 "QCanvasEllipse::angleLength" qcanvasellipse.html#angleLength
 "QCanvasEllipse::angleStart" qcanvasellipse.html#angleStart
@@ -955,15 +955,15 @@
 "QChar::unicode" qchar.html#unicode
 "QChar::upper" qchar.html#upper
 "QCharRef" qcharref.html
-"QCheckBox" qcheckbox.html
-"QCheckBox::autoMask" qcheckbox.html#autoMask-prop
-"QCheckBox::checked" qcheckbox.html#checked-prop
-"QCheckBox::isChecked" qcheckbox.html#isChecked
-"QCheckBox::isTristate" qcheckbox.html#isTristate
-"QCheckBox::setChecked" qcheckbox.html#setChecked
-"QCheckBox::setNoChange" qcheckbox.html#setNoChange
-"QCheckBox::setTristate" qcheckbox.html#setTristate
-"QCheckBox::tristate" qcheckbox.html#tristate-prop
+"QCheckBox" ntqcheckbox.html
+"QCheckBox::autoMask" ntqcheckbox.html#autoMask-prop
+"QCheckBox::checked" ntqcheckbox.html#checked-prop
+"QCheckBox::isChecked" ntqcheckbox.html#isChecked
+"QCheckBox::isTristate" ntqcheckbox.html#isTristate
+"QCheckBox::setChecked" ntqcheckbox.html#setChecked
+"QCheckBox::setNoChange" ntqcheckbox.html#setNoChange
+"QCheckBox::setTristate" ntqcheckbox.html#setTristate
+"QCheckBox::tristate" ntqcheckbox.html#tristate-prop
 "QCheckListItem" qchecklistitem.html
 "QCheckListItem::ToggleState" qchecklistitem.html#ToggleState
 "QCheckListItem::Type" qchecklistitem.html#Type
@@ -990,70 +990,70 @@
 "QChildEvent::child" qchildevent.html#child
 "QChildEvent::inserted" qchildevent.html#inserted
 "QChildEvent::removed" qchildevent.html#removed
-"QClipboard" qclipboard.html
-"QClipboard::Mode" qclipboard.html#Mode
-"QClipboard::clear" qclipboard.html#clear
-"QClipboard::data" qclipboard.html#data
-"QClipboard::dataChanged" qclipboard.html#dataChanged
-"QClipboard::image" qclipboard.html#image
-"QClipboard::ownsClipboard" qclipboard.html#ownsClipboard
-"QClipboard::ownsSelection" qclipboard.html#ownsSelection
-"QClipboard::pixmap" qclipboard.html#pixmap
-"QClipboard::selectionChanged" qclipboard.html#selectionChanged
-"QClipboard::setData" qclipboard.html#setData
-"QClipboard::setImage" qclipboard.html#setImage
-"QClipboard::setPixmap" qclipboard.html#setPixmap
-"QClipboard::setText" qclipboard.html#setText
-"QClipboard::supportsSelection" qclipboard.html#supportsSelection
-"QClipboard::text" qclipboard.html#text
+"QClipboard" ntqclipboard.html
+"QClipboard::Mode" ntqclipboard.html#Mode
+"QClipboard::clear" ntqclipboard.html#clear
+"QClipboard::data" ntqclipboard.html#data
+"QClipboard::dataChanged" ntqclipboard.html#dataChanged
+"QClipboard::image" ntqclipboard.html#image
+"QClipboard::ownsClipboard" ntqclipboard.html#ownsClipboard
+"QClipboard::ownsSelection" ntqclipboard.html#ownsSelection
+"QClipboard::pixmap" ntqclipboard.html#pixmap
+"QClipboard::selectionChanged" ntqclipboard.html#selectionChanged
+"QClipboard::setData" ntqclipboard.html#setData
+"QClipboard::setImage" ntqclipboard.html#setImage
+"QClipboard::setPixmap" ntqclipboard.html#setPixmap
+"QClipboard::setText" ntqclipboard.html#setText
+"QClipboard::supportsSelection" ntqclipboard.html#supportsSelection
+"QClipboard::text" ntqclipboard.html#text
 "QCloseEvent" qcloseevent.html
 "QCloseEvent::accept" qcloseevent.html#accept
 "QCloseEvent::ignore" qcloseevent.html#ignore
 "QCloseEvent::isAccepted" qcloseevent.html#isAccepted
-"QCollection Class Reference (obsolete)" qcollection.html
-"QColor" qcolor.html
-"QColor::Spec" qcolor.html#Spec
-"QColor::alloc" qcolor.html#alloc
-"QColor::blue" qcolor.html#blue
-"QColor::cleanup" qcolor.html#cleanup
-"QColor::colorNames" qcolor.html#colorNames
-"QColor::currentAllocContext" qcolor.html#currentAllocContext
-"QColor::dark" qcolor.html#dark
-"QColor::destroyAllocContext" qcolor.html#destroyAllocContext
-"QColor::enterAllocContext" qcolor.html#enterAllocContext
-"QColor::getHsv" qcolor.html#getHsv
-"QColor::getRgb" qcolor.html#getRgb
-"QColor::green" qcolor.html#green
-"QColor::initGlobalColors" qcolor.html#initGlobalColors
-"QColor::initialize" qcolor.html#initialize
-"QColor::isValid" qcolor.html#isValid
-"QColor::leaveAllocContext" qcolor.html#leaveAllocContext
-"QColor::light" qcolor.html#light
-"QColor::maxColors" qcolor.html#maxColors
-"QColor::name" qcolor.html#name
-"QColor::numBitPlanes" qcolor.html#numBitPlanes
-"QColor::operator!=" qcolor.html#operator!-eq
-"QColor::operator=" qcolor.html#operator-eq
-"QColor::operator==" qcolor.html#operator-eq-eq
-"QColor::pixel" qcolor.html#pixel
-"QColor::red" qcolor.html#red
-"QColor::rgb" qcolor.html#rgb
-"QColor::setHsv" qcolor.html#setHsv
-"QColor::setNamedColor" qcolor.html#setNamedColor
-"QColor::setRgb" qcolor.html#setRgb
-"QColorDialog" qcolordialog.html
-"QColorDialog::color" qcolordialog.html#color
-"QColorDialog::customColor" qcolordialog.html#customColor
-"QColorDialog::customCount" qcolordialog.html#customCount
-"QColorDialog::getColor" qcolordialog.html#getColor
-"QColorDialog::getRgba" qcolordialog.html#getRgba
-"QColorDialog::selectColor" qcolordialog.html#selectColor
-"QColorDialog::selectedAlpha" qcolordialog.html#selectedAlpha
-"QColorDialog::setColor" qcolordialog.html#setColor
-"QColorDialog::setCustomColor" qcolordialog.html#setCustomColor
-"QColorDialog::setSelectedAlpha" qcolordialog.html#setSelectedAlpha
-"QColorDialog::setStandardColor" qcolordialog.html#setStandardColor
-"QColorDialog::~QColorDialog" qcolordialog.html#~QColorDialog
+"QCollection Class Reference (obsolete)" ntqcollection.html
+"QColor" ntqcolor.html
+"QColor::Spec" ntqcolor.html#Spec
+"QColor::alloc" ntqcolor.html#alloc
+"QColor::blue" ntqcolor.html#blue
+"QColor::cleanup" ntqcolor.html#cleanup
+"QColor::colorNames" ntqcolor.html#colorNames
+"QColor::currentAllocContext" ntqcolor.html#currentAllocContext
+"QColor::dark" ntqcolor.html#dark
+"QColor::destroyAllocContext" ntqcolor.html#destroyAllocContext
+"QColor::enterAllocContext" ntqcolor.html#enterAllocContext
+"QColor::getHsv" ntqcolor.html#getHsv
+"QColor::getRgb" ntqcolor.html#getRgb
+"QColor::green" ntqcolor.html#green
+"QColor::initGlobalColors" ntqcolor.html#initGlobalColors
+"QColor::initialize" ntqcolor.html#initialize
+"QColor::isValid" ntqcolor.html#isValid
+"QColor::leaveAllocContext" ntqcolor.html#leaveAllocContext
+"QColor::light" ntqcolor.html#light
+"QColor::maxColors" ntqcolor.html#maxColors
+"QColor::name" ntqcolor.html#name
+"QColor::numBitPlanes" ntqcolor.html#numBitPlanes
+"QColor::operator!=" ntqcolor.html#operator!-eq
+"QColor::operator=" ntqcolor.html#operator-eq
+"QColor::operator==" ntqcolor.html#operator-eq-eq
+"QColor::pixel" ntqcolor.html#pixel
+"QColor::red" ntqcolor.html#red
+"QColor::rgb" ntqcolor.html#rgb
+"QColor::setHsv" ntqcolor.html#setHsv
+"QColor::setNamedColor" ntqcolor.html#setNamedColor
+"QColor::setRgb" ntqcolor.html#setRgb
+"QColorDialog" ntqcolordialog.html
+"QColorDialog::color" ntqcolordialog.html#color
+"QColorDialog::customColor" ntqcolordialog.html#customColor
+"QColorDialog::customCount" ntqcolordialog.html#customCount
+"QColorDialog::getColor" ntqcolordialog.html#getColor
+"QColorDialog::getRgba" ntqcolordialog.html#getRgba
+"QColorDialog::selectColor" ntqcolordialog.html#selectColor
+"QColorDialog::selectedAlpha" ntqcolordialog.html#selectedAlpha
+"QColorDialog::setColor" ntqcolordialog.html#setColor
+"QColorDialog::setCustomColor" ntqcolordialog.html#setCustomColor
+"QColorDialog::setSelectedAlpha" ntqcolordialog.html#setSelectedAlpha
+"QColorDialog::setStandardColor" ntqcolordialog.html#setStandardColor
+"QColorDialog::~QColorDialog" ntqcolordialog.html#~QColorDialog
 "QColorDrag" qcolordrag.html
 "QColorDrag::canDecode" qcolordrag.html#canDecode
 "QColorDrag::decode" qcolordrag.html#decode
@@ -1084,61 +1084,61 @@
 "QColorGroup::shadow" qcolorgroup.html#shadow
 "QColorGroup::text" qcolorgroup.html#text
 "QColorGroup::~QColorGroup" qcolorgroup.html#~QColorGroup
-"QComboBox" qcombobox.html
-"QComboBox::Policy" qcombobox.html#Policy
-"QComboBox::activated" qcombobox.html#activated
-"QComboBox::autoCompletion" qcombobox.html#autoCompletion
-"QComboBox::autoCompletion" qcombobox.html#autoCompletion-prop
-"QComboBox::autoMask" qcombobox.html#autoMask-prop
-"QComboBox::changeItem" qcombobox.html#changeItem
-"QComboBox::clear" qcombobox.html#clear
-"QComboBox::clearEdit" qcombobox.html#clearEdit
-"QComboBox::clearValidator" qcombobox.html#clearValidator
-"QComboBox::completionIndex" qcombobox.html#completionIndex
-"QComboBox::count" qcombobox.html#count
-"QComboBox::count" qcombobox.html#count-prop
-"QComboBox::currentItem" qcombobox.html#currentItem
-"QComboBox::currentItem" qcombobox.html#currentItem-prop
-"QComboBox::currentText" qcombobox.html#currentText
-"QComboBox::currentText" qcombobox.html#currentText-prop
-"QComboBox::duplicatesEnabled" qcombobox.html#duplicatesEnabled
-"QComboBox::duplicatesEnabled" qcombobox.html#duplicatesEnabled-prop
-"QComboBox::editable" qcombobox.html#editable
-"QComboBox::editable" qcombobox.html#editable-prop
-"QComboBox::highlighted" qcombobox.html#highlighted
-"QComboBox::insertItem" qcombobox.html#insertItem
-"QComboBox::insertStrList" qcombobox.html#insertStrList
-"QComboBox::insertStringList" qcombobox.html#insertStringList
-"QComboBox::insertionPolicy" qcombobox.html#insertionPolicy
-"QComboBox::insertionPolicy" qcombobox.html#insertionPolicy-prop
-"QComboBox::lineEdit" qcombobox.html#lineEdit
-"QComboBox::listBox" qcombobox.html#listBox
-"QComboBox::maxCount" qcombobox.html#maxCount
-"QComboBox::maxCount" qcombobox.html#maxCount-prop
-"QComboBox::pixmap" qcombobox.html#pixmap
-"QComboBox::popup" qcombobox.html#popup
-"QComboBox::removeItem" qcombobox.html#removeItem
-"QComboBox::returnPressed" qcombobox.html#returnPressed
-"QComboBox::setAutoCompletion" qcombobox.html#setAutoCompletion
-"QComboBox::setCurrentItem" qcombobox.html#setCurrentItem
-"QComboBox::setCurrentText" qcombobox.html#setCurrentText
-"QComboBox::setDuplicatesEnabled" qcombobox.html#setDuplicatesEnabled
-"QComboBox::setEditText" qcombobox.html#setEditText
-"QComboBox::setEditable" qcombobox.html#setEditable
-"QComboBox::setFont" qcombobox.html#setFont
-"QComboBox::setInsertionPolicy" qcombobox.html#setInsertionPolicy
-"QComboBox::setLineEdit" qcombobox.html#setLineEdit
-"QComboBox::setListBox" qcombobox.html#setListBox
-"QComboBox::setMaxCount" qcombobox.html#setMaxCount
-"QComboBox::setPalette" qcombobox.html#setPalette
-"QComboBox::setSizeLimit" qcombobox.html#setSizeLimit
-"QComboBox::setValidator" qcombobox.html#setValidator
-"QComboBox::sizeLimit" qcombobox.html#sizeLimit
-"QComboBox::sizeLimit" qcombobox.html#sizeLimit-prop
-"QComboBox::text" qcombobox.html#text
-"QComboBox::textChanged" qcombobox.html#textChanged
-"QComboBox::validator" qcombobox.html#validator
-"QComboBox::~QComboBox" qcombobox.html#~QComboBox
+"QComboBox" ntqcombobox.html
+"QComboBox::Policy" ntqcombobox.html#Policy
+"QComboBox::activated" ntqcombobox.html#activated
+"QComboBox::autoCompletion" ntqcombobox.html#autoCompletion
+"QComboBox::autoCompletion" ntqcombobox.html#autoCompletion-prop
+"QComboBox::autoMask" ntqcombobox.html#autoMask-prop
+"QComboBox::changeItem" ntqcombobox.html#changeItem
+"QComboBox::clear" ntqcombobox.html#clear
+"QComboBox::clearEdit" ntqcombobox.html#clearEdit
+"QComboBox::clearValidator" ntqcombobox.html#clearValidator
+"QComboBox::completionIndex" ntqcombobox.html#completionIndex
+"QComboBox::count" ntqcombobox.html#count
+"QComboBox::count" ntqcombobox.html#count-prop
+"QComboBox::currentItem" ntqcombobox.html#currentItem
+"QComboBox::currentItem" ntqcombobox.html#currentItem-prop
+"QComboBox::currentText" ntqcombobox.html#currentText
+"QComboBox::currentText" ntqcombobox.html#currentText-prop
+"QComboBox::duplicatesEnabled" ntqcombobox.html#duplicatesEnabled
+"QComboBox::duplicatesEnabled" ntqcombobox.html#duplicatesEnabled-prop
+"QComboBox::editable" ntqcombobox.html#editable
+"QComboBox::editable" ntqcombobox.html#editable-prop
+"QComboBox::highlighted" ntqcombobox.html#highlighted
+"QComboBox::insertItem" ntqcombobox.html#insertItem
+"QComboBox::insertStrList" ntqcombobox.html#insertStrList
+"QComboBox::insertStringList" ntqcombobox.html#insertStringList
+"QComboBox::insertionPolicy" ntqcombobox.html#insertionPolicy
+"QComboBox::insertionPolicy" ntqcombobox.html#insertionPolicy-prop
+"QComboBox::lineEdit" ntqcombobox.html#lineEdit
+"QComboBox::listBox" ntqcombobox.html#listBox
+"QComboBox::maxCount" ntqcombobox.html#maxCount
+"QComboBox::maxCount" ntqcombobox.html#maxCount-prop
+"QComboBox::pixmap" ntqcombobox.html#pixmap
+"QComboBox::popup" ntqcombobox.html#popup
+"QComboBox::removeItem" ntqcombobox.html#removeItem
+"QComboBox::returnPressed" ntqcombobox.html#returnPressed
+"QComboBox::setAutoCompletion" ntqcombobox.html#setAutoCompletion
+"QComboBox::setCurrentItem" ntqcombobox.html#setCurrentItem
+"QComboBox::setCurrentText" ntqcombobox.html#setCurrentText
+"QComboBox::setDuplicatesEnabled" ntqcombobox.html#setDuplicatesEnabled
+"QComboBox::setEditText" ntqcombobox.html#setEditText
+"QComboBox::setEditable" ntqcombobox.html#setEditable
+"QComboBox::setFont" ntqcombobox.html#setFont
+"QComboBox::setInsertionPolicy" ntqcombobox.html#setInsertionPolicy
+"QComboBox::setLineEdit" ntqcombobox.html#setLineEdit
+"QComboBox::setListBox" ntqcombobox.html#setListBox
+"QComboBox::setMaxCount" ntqcombobox.html#setMaxCount
+"QComboBox::setPalette" ntqcombobox.html#setPalette
+"QComboBox::setSizeLimit" ntqcombobox.html#setSizeLimit
+"QComboBox::setValidator" ntqcombobox.html#setValidator
+"QComboBox::sizeLimit" ntqcombobox.html#sizeLimit
+"QComboBox::sizeLimit" ntqcombobox.html#sizeLimit-prop
+"QComboBox::text" ntqcombobox.html#text
+"QComboBox::textChanged" ntqcombobox.html#textChanged
+"QComboBox::validator" ntqcombobox.html#validator
+"QComboBox::~QComboBox" ntqcombobox.html#~QComboBox
 "QComboTableItem" qcombotableitem.html
 "QComboTableItem::count" qcombotableitem.html#count
 "QComboTableItem::currentItem" qcombotableitem.html#currentItem
@@ -1150,18 +1150,18 @@
 "QComboTableItem::setStringList" qcombotableitem.html#setStringList
 "QComboTableItem::text" qcombotableitem.html#text
 "QComboTableItem::~QComboTableItem" qcombotableitem.html#~QComboTableItem
-"QCommonStyle" qcommonstyle.html
+"QCommonStyle" ntqcommonstyle.html
 "QComponentFactory::createInstance" qcomponentfactory.html#createInstance
 "QComponentFactory::registerComponent" qcomponentfactory.html#registerComponent
 "QComponentFactory::registerServer" qcomponentfactory.html#registerServer
 "QComponentFactory::unregisterComponent" qcomponentfactory.html#unregisterComponent
 "QComponentFactory::unregisterServer" qcomponentfactory.html#unregisterServer
-"QConnection::isConnected" qconnection.html#isConnected
-"QConnection::member" qconnection.html#member
-"QConnection::memberName" qconnection.html#memberName
-"QConnection::numArgs" qconnection.html#numArgs
-"QConnection::object" qconnection.html#object
-"QConnection::~QConnection" qconnection.html#~QConnection
+"QConnection::isConnected" ntqconnection.html#isConnected
+"QConnection::member" ntqconnection.html#member
+"QConnection::memberName" ntqconnection.html#memberName
+"QConnection::numArgs" ntqconnection.html#numArgs
+"QConnection::object" ntqconnection.html#object
+"QConnection::~QConnection" ntqconnection.html#~QConnection
 "QConstString" qconststring.html
 "QConstString::string" qconststring.html#string
 "QConstString::~QConstString" qconststring.html#~QConstString
@@ -1187,19 +1187,19 @@
 "QCopChannel::received" qcopchannel.html#received
 "QCopChannel::send" qcopchannel.html#send
 "QCopChannel::~QCopChannel" qcopchannel.html#~QCopChannel
-"QCursor" qcursor.html
-"QCursor::bitmap" qcursor.html#bitmap
-"QCursor::cleanup" qcursor.html#cleanup
-"QCursor::handle" qcursor.html#handle
-"QCursor::hotSpot" qcursor.html#hotSpot
-"QCursor::initialize" qcursor.html#initialize
-"QCursor::mask" qcursor.html#mask
-"QCursor::operator=" qcursor.html#operator-eq
-"QCursor::pos" qcursor.html#pos
-"QCursor::setPos" qcursor.html#setPos
-"QCursor::setShape" qcursor.html#setShape
-"QCursor::shape" qcursor.html#shape
-"QCursor::~QCursor" qcursor.html#~QCursor
+"QCursor" ntqcursor.html
+"QCursor::bitmap" ntqcursor.html#bitmap
+"QCursor::cleanup" ntqcursor.html#cleanup
+"QCursor::handle" ntqcursor.html#handle
+"QCursor::hotSpot" ntqcursor.html#hotSpot
+"QCursor::initialize" ntqcursor.html#initialize
+"QCursor::mask" ntqcursor.html#mask
+"QCursor::operator=" ntqcursor.html#operator-eq
+"QCursor::pos" ntqcursor.html#pos
+"QCursor::setPos" ntqcursor.html#setPos
+"QCursor::setShape" ntqcursor.html#setShape
+"QCursor::shape" ntqcursor.html#shape
+"QCursor::~QCursor" ntqcursor.html#~QCursor
 "QCustomEvent" qcustomevent.html
 "QCustomEvent::data" qcustomevent.html#data
 "QCustomEvent::setData" qcustomevent.html#setData
@@ -1210,76 +1210,76 @@
 "QCustomMenuItem::setFont" qcustommenuitem.html#setFont
 "QCustomMenuItem::sizeHint" qcustommenuitem.html#sizeHint
 "QCustomMenuItem::~QCustomMenuItem" qcustommenuitem.html#~QCustomMenuItem
-"QDataBrowser" qdatabrowser.html
-"QDataBrowser::Boundary" qdatabrowser.html#Boundary
-"QDataBrowser::autoEdit" qdatabrowser.html#autoEdit
-"QDataBrowser::autoEdit" qdatabrowser.html#autoEdit-prop
-"QDataBrowser::beforeDelete" qdatabrowser.html#beforeDelete
-"QDataBrowser::beforeInsert" qdatabrowser.html#beforeInsert
-"QDataBrowser::beforeUpdate" qdatabrowser.html#beforeUpdate
-"QDataBrowser::boundary" qdatabrowser.html#boundary
-"QDataBrowser::boundaryChecking" qdatabrowser.html#boundaryChecking
-"QDataBrowser::boundaryChecking" qdatabrowser.html#boundaryChecking-prop
-"QDataBrowser::clearValues" qdatabrowser.html#clearValues
-"QDataBrowser::confirmCancel" qdatabrowser.html#confirmCancel
-"QDataBrowser::confirmCancels" qdatabrowser.html#confirmCancels
-"QDataBrowser::confirmCancels" qdatabrowser.html#confirmCancels-prop
-"QDataBrowser::confirmDelete" qdatabrowser.html#confirmDelete
-"QDataBrowser::confirmDelete" qdatabrowser.html#confirmDelete-prop
-"QDataBrowser::confirmEdit" qdatabrowser.html#confirmEdit
-"QDataBrowser::confirmEdits" qdatabrowser.html#confirmEdits
-"QDataBrowser::confirmEdits" qdatabrowser.html#confirmEdits-prop
-"QDataBrowser::confirmInsert" qdatabrowser.html#confirmInsert
-"QDataBrowser::confirmInsert" qdatabrowser.html#confirmInsert-prop
-"QDataBrowser::confirmUpdate" qdatabrowser.html#confirmUpdate
-"QDataBrowser::confirmUpdate" qdatabrowser.html#confirmUpdate-prop
-"QDataBrowser::currentChanged" qdatabrowser.html#currentChanged
-"QDataBrowser::currentEdited" qdatabrowser.html#currentEdited
-"QDataBrowser::cursorChanged" qdatabrowser.html#cursorChanged
-"QDataBrowser::del" qdatabrowser.html#del
-"QDataBrowser::deleteCurrent" qdatabrowser.html#deleteCurrent
-"QDataBrowser::filter" qdatabrowser.html#filter
-"QDataBrowser::filter" qdatabrowser.html#filter-prop
-"QDataBrowser::first" qdatabrowser.html#first
-"QDataBrowser::firstRecordAvailable" qdatabrowser.html#firstRecordAvailable
-"QDataBrowser::form" qdatabrowser.html#form
-"QDataBrowser::handleError" qdatabrowser.html#handleError
-"QDataBrowser::insert" qdatabrowser.html#insert
-"QDataBrowser::insertCurrent" qdatabrowser.html#insertCurrent
-"QDataBrowser::isReadOnly" qdatabrowser.html#isReadOnly
-"QDataBrowser::last" qdatabrowser.html#last
-"QDataBrowser::lastRecordAvailable" qdatabrowser.html#lastRecordAvailable
-"QDataBrowser::next" qdatabrowser.html#next
-"QDataBrowser::nextRecordAvailable" qdatabrowser.html#nextRecordAvailable
-"QDataBrowser::prev" qdatabrowser.html#prev
-"QDataBrowser::prevRecordAvailable" qdatabrowser.html#prevRecordAvailable
-"QDataBrowser::primeDelete" qdatabrowser.html#primeDelete
-"QDataBrowser::primeInsert" qdatabrowser.html#primeInsert
-"QDataBrowser::primeUpdate" qdatabrowser.html#primeUpdate
-"QDataBrowser::readFields" qdatabrowser.html#readFields
-"QDataBrowser::readOnly" qdatabrowser.html#readOnly-prop
-"QDataBrowser::refresh" qdatabrowser.html#refresh
-"QDataBrowser::seek" qdatabrowser.html#seek
-"QDataBrowser::setAutoEdit" qdatabrowser.html#setAutoEdit
-"QDataBrowser::setBoundaryChecking" qdatabrowser.html#setBoundaryChecking
-"QDataBrowser::setConfirmCancels" qdatabrowser.html#setConfirmCancels
-"QDataBrowser::setConfirmDelete" qdatabrowser.html#setConfirmDelete
-"QDataBrowser::setConfirmEdits" qdatabrowser.html#setConfirmEdits
-"QDataBrowser::setConfirmInsert" qdatabrowser.html#setConfirmInsert
-"QDataBrowser::setConfirmUpdate" qdatabrowser.html#setConfirmUpdate
-"QDataBrowser::setFilter" qdatabrowser.html#setFilter
-"QDataBrowser::setForm" qdatabrowser.html#setForm
-"QDataBrowser::setReadOnly" qdatabrowser.html#setReadOnly
-"QDataBrowser::setSort" qdatabrowser.html#setSort
-"QDataBrowser::setSqlCursor" qdatabrowser.html#setSqlCursor
-"QDataBrowser::sort" qdatabrowser.html#sort
-"QDataBrowser::sort" qdatabrowser.html#sort-prop
-"QDataBrowser::sqlCursor" qdatabrowser.html#sqlCursor
-"QDataBrowser::update" qdatabrowser.html#update
-"QDataBrowser::updateBoundary" qdatabrowser.html#updateBoundary
-"QDataBrowser::updateCurrent" qdatabrowser.html#updateCurrent
-"QDataBrowser::writeFields" qdatabrowser.html#writeFields
-"QDataBrowser::~QDataBrowser" qdatabrowser.html#~QDataBrowser
+"QDataBrowser" ntqdatabrowser.html
+"QDataBrowser::Boundary" ntqdatabrowser.html#Boundary
+"QDataBrowser::autoEdit" ntqdatabrowser.html#autoEdit
+"QDataBrowser::autoEdit" ntqdatabrowser.html#autoEdit-prop
+"QDataBrowser::beforeDelete" ntqdatabrowser.html#beforeDelete
+"QDataBrowser::beforeInsert" ntqdatabrowser.html#beforeInsert
+"QDataBrowser::beforeUpdate" ntqdatabrowser.html#beforeUpdate
+"QDataBrowser::boundary" ntqdatabrowser.html#boundary
+"QDataBrowser::boundaryChecking" ntqdatabrowser.html#boundaryChecking
+"QDataBrowser::boundaryChecking" ntqdatabrowser.html#boundaryChecking-prop
+"QDataBrowser::clearValues" ntqdatabrowser.html#clearValues
+"QDataBrowser::confirmCancel" ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmCancel
+"QDataBrowser::confirmCancels" ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmCancels
+"QDataBrowser::confirmCancels" ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmCancels-prop
+"QDataBrowser::confirmDelete" ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmDelete
+"QDataBrowser::confirmDelete" ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmDelete-prop
+"QDataBrowser::confirmEdit" ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmEdit
+"QDataBrowser::confirmEdits" ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmEdits
+"QDataBrowser::confirmEdits" ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmEdits-prop
+"QDataBrowser::confirmInsert" ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmInsert
+"QDataBrowser::confirmInsert" ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmInsert-prop
+"QDataBrowser::confirmUpdate" ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmUpdate
+"QDataBrowser::confirmUpdate" ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmUpdate-prop
+"QDataBrowser::currentChanged" ntqdatabrowser.html#currentChanged
+"QDataBrowser::currentEdited" ntqdatabrowser.html#currentEdited
+"QDataBrowser::cursorChanged" ntqdatabrowser.html#cursorChanged
+"QDataBrowser::del" ntqdatabrowser.html#del
+"QDataBrowser::deleteCurrent" ntqdatabrowser.html#deleteCurrent
+"QDataBrowser::filter" ntqdatabrowser.html#filter
+"QDataBrowser::filter" ntqdatabrowser.html#filter-prop
+"QDataBrowser::first" ntqdatabrowser.html#first
+"QDataBrowser::firstRecordAvailable" ntqdatabrowser.html#firstRecordAvailable
+"QDataBrowser::form" ntqdatabrowser.html#form
+"QDataBrowser::handleError" ntqdatabrowser.html#handleError
+"QDataBrowser::insert" ntqdatabrowser.html#insert
+"QDataBrowser::insertCurrent" ntqdatabrowser.html#insertCurrent
+"QDataBrowser::isReadOnly" ntqdatabrowser.html#isReadOnly
+"QDataBrowser::last" ntqdatabrowser.html#last
+"QDataBrowser::lastRecordAvailable" ntqdatabrowser.html#lastRecordAvailable
+"QDataBrowser::next" ntqdatabrowser.html#next
+"QDataBrowser::nextRecordAvailable" ntqdatabrowser.html#nextRecordAvailable
+"QDataBrowser::prev" ntqdatabrowser.html#prev
+"QDataBrowser::prevRecordAvailable" ntqdatabrowser.html#prevRecordAvailable
+"QDataBrowser::primeDelete" ntqdatabrowser.html#primeDelete
+"QDataBrowser::primeInsert" ntqdatabrowser.html#primeInsert
+"QDataBrowser::primeUpdate" ntqdatabrowser.html#primeUpdate
+"QDataBrowser::readFields" ntqdatabrowser.html#readFields
+"QDataBrowser::readOnly" ntqdatabrowser.html#readOnly-prop
+"QDataBrowser::refresh" ntqdatabrowser.html#refresh
+"QDataBrowser::seek" ntqdatabrowser.html#seek
+"QDataBrowser::setAutoEdit" ntqdatabrowser.html#setAutoEdit
+"QDataBrowser::setBoundaryChecking" ntqdatabrowser.html#setBoundaryChecking
+"QDataBrowser::setConfirmCancels" ntqdatabrowser.html#setConfirmCancels
+"QDataBrowser::setConfirmDelete" ntqdatabrowser.html#setConfirmDelete
+"QDataBrowser::setConfirmEdits" ntqdatabrowser.html#setConfirmEdits
+"QDataBrowser::setConfirmInsert" ntqdatabrowser.html#setConfirmInsert
+"QDataBrowser::setConfirmUpdate" ntqdatabrowser.html#setConfirmUpdate
+"QDataBrowser::setFilter" ntqdatabrowser.html#setFilter
+"QDataBrowser::setForm" ntqdatabrowser.html#setForm
+"QDataBrowser::setReadOnly" ntqdatabrowser.html#setReadOnly
+"QDataBrowser::setSort" ntqdatabrowser.html#setSort
+"QDataBrowser::setSqlCursor" ntqdatabrowser.html#setSqlCursor
+"QDataBrowser::sort" ntqdatabrowser.html#sort
+"QDataBrowser::sort" ntqdatabrowser.html#sort-prop
+"QDataBrowser::sqlCursor" ntqdatabrowser.html#sqlCursor
+"QDataBrowser::update" ntqdatabrowser.html#update
+"QDataBrowser::updateBoundary" ntqdatabrowser.html#updateBoundary
+"QDataBrowser::updateCurrent" ntqdatabrowser.html#updateCurrent
+"QDataBrowser::writeFields" ntqdatabrowser.html#writeFields
+"QDataBrowser::~QDataBrowser" ntqdatabrowser.html#~QDataBrowser
 "QDataSink::eof" qdatasink.html#eof
 "QDataSink::maybeReady" qdatasink.html#maybeReady
 "QDataSink::readyToReceive" qdatasink.html#readyToReceive
@@ -1290,118 +1290,118 @@
 "QDataSource::rewind" qdatasource.html#rewind
 "QDataSource::rewindable" qdatasource.html#rewindable
 "QDataSource::sendTo" qdatasource.html#sendTo
-"QDataStream" qdatastream.html
-"QDataStream::ByteOrder" qdatastream.html#ByteOrder
-"QDataStream::atEnd" qdatastream.html#atEnd
-"QDataStream::byteOrder" qdatastream.html#byteOrder
-"QDataStream::device" qdatastream.html#device
-"QDataStream::isPrintableData" qdatastream.html#isPrintableData
-"QDataStream::operator<<" qdatastream.html#operator-lt-lt
-"QDataStream::operator>>" qdatastream.html#operator-gt-gt
-"QDataStream::readBytes" qdatastream.html#readBytes
-"QDataStream::readRawBytes" qdatastream.html#readRawBytes
-"QDataStream::setByteOrder" qdatastream.html#setByteOrder
-"QDataStream::setDevice" qdatastream.html#setDevice
-"QDataStream::setPrintableData" qdatastream.html#setPrintableData
-"QDataStream::setVersion" qdatastream.html#setVersion
-"QDataStream::unsetDevice" qdatastream.html#unsetDevice
-"QDataStream::version" qdatastream.html#version
-"QDataStream::writeBytes" qdatastream.html#writeBytes
-"QDataStream::writeRawBytes" qdatastream.html#writeRawBytes
-"QDataStream::~QDataStream" qdatastream.html#~QDataStream
-"QDataTable" qdatatable.html
-"QDataTable::Refresh" qdatatable.html#Refresh
-"QDataTable::addColumn" qdatatable.html#addColumn
-"QDataTable::adjustColumn" qdatatable.html#adjustColumn
-"QDataTable::autoDelete" qdatatable.html#autoDelete
-"QDataTable::autoEdit" qdatatable.html#autoEdit
-"QDataTable::autoEdit" qdatatable.html#autoEdit-prop
-"QDataTable::beforeDelete" qdatatable.html#beforeDelete
-"QDataTable::beforeInsert" qdatatable.html#beforeInsert
-"QDataTable::beforeUpdate" qdatatable.html#beforeUpdate
-"QDataTable::beginInsert" qdatatable.html#beginInsert
-"QDataTable::beginUpdate" qdatatable.html#beginUpdate
-"QDataTable::confirmCancel" qdatatable.html#confirmCancel
-"QDataTable::confirmCancels" qdatatable.html#confirmCancels
-"QDataTable::confirmCancels" qdatatable.html#confirmCancels-prop
-"QDataTable::confirmDelete" qdatatable.html#confirmDelete
-"QDataTable::confirmDelete" qdatatable.html#confirmDelete-prop
-"QDataTable::confirmEdit" qdatatable.html#confirmEdit
-"QDataTable::confirmEdits" qdatatable.html#confirmEdits
-"QDataTable::confirmEdits" qdatatable.html#confirmEdits-prop
-"QDataTable::confirmInsert" qdatatable.html#confirmInsert
-"QDataTable::confirmInsert" qdatatable.html#confirmInsert-prop
-"QDataTable::confirmUpdate" qdatatable.html#confirmUpdate
-"QDataTable::confirmUpdate" qdatatable.html#confirmUpdate-prop
-"QDataTable::currentChanged" qdatatable.html#currentChanged
-"QDataTable::currentRecord" qdatatable.html#currentRecord
-"QDataTable::cursorChanged" qdatatable.html#cursorChanged
-"QDataTable::dateFormat" qdatatable.html#dateFormat
-"QDataTable::dateFormat" qdatatable.html#dateFormat-prop
-"QDataTable::deleteCurrent" qdatatable.html#deleteCurrent
-"QDataTable::falseText" qdatatable.html#falseText
-"QDataTable::falseText" qdatatable.html#falseText-prop
-"QDataTable::fieldAlignment" qdatatable.html#fieldAlignment
-"QDataTable::filter" qdatatable.html#filter
-"QDataTable::filter" qdatatable.html#filter-prop
-"QDataTable::find" qdatatable.html#find
-"QDataTable::handleError" qdatatable.html#handleError
-"QDataTable::indexOf" qdatatable.html#indexOf
-"QDataTable::insertCurrent" qdatatable.html#insertCurrent
-"QDataTable::installEditorFactory" qdatatable.html#installEditorFactory
-"QDataTable::installPropertyMap" qdatatable.html#installPropertyMap
-"QDataTable::nullText" qdatatable.html#nullText
-"QDataTable::nullText" qdatatable.html#nullText-prop
-"QDataTable::numCols" qdatatable.html#numCols
-"QDataTable::numCols" qdatatable.html#numCols-prop
-"QDataTable::numRows" qdatatable.html#numRows
-"QDataTable::numRows" qdatatable.html#numRows-prop
-"QDataTable::paintField" qdatatable.html#paintField
-"QDataTable::primeDelete" qdatatable.html#primeDelete
-"QDataTable::primeInsert" qdatatable.html#primeInsert
-"QDataTable::primeUpdate" qdatatable.html#primeUpdate
-"QDataTable::refresh" qdatatable.html#refresh
-"QDataTable::removeColumn" qdatatable.html#removeColumn
-"QDataTable::reset" qdatatable.html#reset
-"QDataTable::setAutoDelete" qdatatable.html#setAutoDelete
-"QDataTable::setAutoEdit" qdatatable.html#setAutoEdit
-"QDataTable::setColumn" qdatatable.html#setColumn
-"QDataTable::setColumnWidth" qdatatable.html#setColumnWidth
-"QDataTable::setConfirmCancels" qdatatable.html#setConfirmCancels
-"QDataTable::setConfirmDelete" qdatatable.html#setConfirmDelete
-"QDataTable::setConfirmEdits" qdatatable.html#setConfirmEdits
-"QDataTable::setConfirmInsert" qdatatable.html#setConfirmInsert
-"QDataTable::setConfirmUpdate" qdatatable.html#setConfirmUpdate
-"QDataTable::setDateFormat" qdatatable.html#setDateFormat
-"QDataTable::setFalseText" qdatatable.html#setFalseText
-"QDataTable::setFilter" qdatatable.html#setFilter
-"QDataTable::setNullText" qdatatable.html#setNullText
-"QDataTable::setSize" qdatatable.html#setSize
-"QDataTable::setSort" qdatatable.html#setSort
-"QDataTable::setSqlCursor" qdatatable.html#setSqlCursor
-"QDataTable::setTrueText" qdatatable.html#setTrueText
-"QDataTable::sort" qdatatable.html#sort
-"QDataTable::sort" qdatatable.html#sort-prop
-"QDataTable::sortAscending" qdatatable.html#sortAscending
-"QDataTable::sortColumn" qdatatable.html#sortColumn
-"QDataTable::sortDescending" qdatatable.html#sortDescending
-"QDataTable::sqlCursor" qdatatable.html#sqlCursor
-"QDataTable::text" qdatatable.html#text
-"QDataTable::trueText" qdatatable.html#trueText
-"QDataTable::trueText" qdatatable.html#trueText-prop
-"QDataTable::updateCurrent" qdatatable.html#updateCurrent
-"QDataTable::value" qdatatable.html#value
-"QDataTable::~QDataTable" qdatatable.html#~QDataTable
-"QDataView" qdataview.html
-"QDataView::clearValues" qdataview.html#clearValues
-"QDataView::form" qdataview.html#form
-"QDataView::readFields" qdataview.html#readFields
-"QDataView::record" qdataview.html#record
-"QDataView::refresh" qdataview.html#refresh
-"QDataView::setForm" qdataview.html#setForm
-"QDataView::setRecord" qdataview.html#setRecord
-"QDataView::writeFields" qdataview.html#writeFields
-"QDataView::~QDataView" qdataview.html#~QDataView
+"QDataStream" ntqdatastream.html
+"QDataStream::ByteOrder" ntqdatastream.html#ByteOrder
+"QDataStream::atEnd" ntqdatastream.html#atEnd
+"QDataStream::byteOrder" ntqdatastream.html#byteOrder
+"QDataStream::device" ntqdatastream.html#device
+"QDataStream::isPrintableData" ntqdatastream.html#isPrintableData
+"QDataStream::operator<<" ntqdatastream.html#operator-lt-lt
+"QDataStream::operator>>" ntqdatastream.html#operator-gt-gt
+"QDataStream::readBytes" ntqdatastream.html#readBytes
+"QDataStream::readRawBytes" ntqdatastream.html#readRawBytes
+"QDataStream::setByteOrder" ntqdatastream.html#setByteOrder
+"QDataStream::setDevice" ntqdatastream.html#setDevice
+"QDataStream::setPrintableData" ntqdatastream.html#setPrintableData
+"QDataStream::setVersion" ntqdatastream.html#setVersion
+"QDataStream::unsetDevice" ntqdatastream.html#unsetDevice
+"QDataStream::version" ntqdatastream.html#version
+"QDataStream::writeBytes" ntqdatastream.html#writeBytes
+"QDataStream::writeRawBytes" ntqdatastream.html#writeRawBytes
+"QDataStream::~QDataStream" ntqdatastream.html#~QDataStream
+"QDataTable" ntqdatatable.html
+"QDataTable::Refresh" ntqdatatable.html#Refresh
+"QDataTable::addColumn" ntqdatatable.html#addColumn
+"QDataTable::adjustColumn" ntqdatatable.html#adjustColumn
+"QDataTable::autoDelete" ntqdatatable.html#autoDelete
+"QDataTable::autoEdit" ntqdatatable.html#autoEdit
+"QDataTable::autoEdit" ntqdatatable.html#autoEdit-prop
+"QDataTable::beforeDelete" ntqdatatable.html#beforeDelete
+"QDataTable::beforeInsert" ntqdatatable.html#beforeInsert
+"QDataTable::beforeUpdate" ntqdatatable.html#beforeUpdate
+"QDataTable::beginInsert" ntqdatatable.html#beginInsert
+"QDataTable::beginUpdate" ntqdatatable.html#beginUpdate
+"QDataTable::confirmCancel" ntqdatatable.html#confirmCancel
+"QDataTable::confirmCancels" ntqdatatable.html#confirmCancels
+"QDataTable::confirmCancels" ntqdatatable.html#confirmCancels-prop
+"QDataTable::confirmDelete" ntqdatatable.html#confirmDelete
+"QDataTable::confirmDelete" ntqdatatable.html#confirmDelete-prop
+"QDataTable::confirmEdit" ntqdatatable.html#confirmEdit
+"QDataTable::confirmEdits" ntqdatatable.html#confirmEdits
+"QDataTable::confirmEdits" ntqdatatable.html#confirmEdits-prop
+"QDataTable::confirmInsert" ntqdatatable.html#confirmInsert
+"QDataTable::confirmInsert" ntqdatatable.html#confirmInsert-prop
+"QDataTable::confirmUpdate" ntqdatatable.html#confirmUpdate
+"QDataTable::confirmUpdate" ntqdatatable.html#confirmUpdate-prop
+"QDataTable::currentChanged" ntqdatatable.html#currentChanged
+"QDataTable::currentRecord" ntqdatatable.html#currentRecord
+"QDataTable::cursorChanged" ntqdatatable.html#cursorChanged
+"QDataTable::dateFormat" ntqdatatable.html#dateFormat
+"QDataTable::dateFormat" ntqdatatable.html#dateFormat-prop
+"QDataTable::deleteCurrent" ntqdatatable.html#deleteCurrent
+"QDataTable::falseText" ntqdatatable.html#falseText
+"QDataTable::falseText" ntqdatatable.html#falseText-prop
+"QDataTable::fieldAlignment" ntqdatatable.html#fieldAlignment
+"QDataTable::filter" ntqdatatable.html#filter
+"QDataTable::filter" ntqdatatable.html#filter-prop
+"QDataTable::find" ntqdatatable.html#find
+"QDataTable::handleError" ntqdatatable.html#handleError
+"QDataTable::indexOf" ntqdatatable.html#indexOf
+"QDataTable::insertCurrent" ntqdatatable.html#insertCurrent
+"QDataTable::installEditorFactory" ntqdatatable.html#installEditorFactory
+"QDataTable::installPropertyMap" ntqdatatable.html#installPropertyMap
+"QDataTable::nullText" ntqdatatable.html#nullText
+"QDataTable::nullText" ntqdatatable.html#nullText-prop
+"QDataTable::numCols" ntqdatatable.html#numCols
+"QDataTable::numCols" ntqdatatable.html#numCols-prop
+"QDataTable::numRows" ntqdatatable.html#numRows
+"QDataTable::numRows" ntqdatatable.html#numRows-prop
+"QDataTable::paintField" ntqdatatable.html#paintField
+"QDataTable::primeDelete" ntqdatatable.html#primeDelete
+"QDataTable::primeInsert" ntqdatatable.html#primeInsert
+"QDataTable::primeUpdate" ntqdatatable.html#primeUpdate
+"QDataTable::refresh" ntqdatatable.html#refresh
+"QDataTable::removeColumn" ntqdatatable.html#removeColumn
+"QDataTable::reset" ntqdatatable.html#reset
+"QDataTable::setAutoDelete" ntqdatatable.html#setAutoDelete
+"QDataTable::setAutoEdit" ntqdatatable.html#setAutoEdit
+"QDataTable::setColumn" ntqdatatable.html#setColumn
+"QDataTable::setColumnWidth" ntqdatatable.html#setColumnWidth
+"QDataTable::setConfirmCancels" ntqdatatable.html#setConfirmCancels
+"QDataTable::setConfirmDelete" ntqdatatable.html#setConfirmDelete
+"QDataTable::setConfirmEdits" ntqdatatable.html#setConfirmEdits
+"QDataTable::setConfirmInsert" ntqdatatable.html#setConfirmInsert
+"QDataTable::setConfirmUpdate" ntqdatatable.html#setConfirmUpdate
+"QDataTable::setDateFormat" ntqdatatable.html#setDateFormat
+"QDataTable::setFalseText" ntqdatatable.html#setFalseText
+"QDataTable::setFilter" ntqdatatable.html#setFilter
+"QDataTable::setNullText" ntqdatatable.html#setNullText
+"QDataTable::setSize" ntqdatatable.html#setSize
+"QDataTable::setSort" ntqdatatable.html#setSort
+"QDataTable::setSqlCursor" ntqdatatable.html#setSqlCursor
+"QDataTable::setTrueText" ntqdatatable.html#setTrueText
+"QDataTable::sort" ntqdatatable.html#sort
+"QDataTable::sort" ntqdatatable.html#sort-prop
+"QDataTable::sortAscending" ntqdatatable.html#sortAscending
+"QDataTable::sortColumn" ntqdatatable.html#sortColumn
+"QDataTable::sortDescending" ntqdatatable.html#sortDescending
+"QDataTable::sqlCursor" ntqdatatable.html#sqlCursor
+"QDataTable::text" ntqdatatable.html#text
+"QDataTable::trueText" ntqdatatable.html#trueText
+"QDataTable::trueText" ntqdatatable.html#trueText-prop
+"QDataTable::updateCurrent" ntqdatatable.html#updateCurrent
+"QDataTable::value" ntqdatatable.html#value
+"QDataTable::~QDataTable" ntqdatatable.html#~QDataTable
+"QDataView" ntqdataview.html
+"QDataView::clearValues" ntqdataview.html#clearValues
+"QDataView::form" ntqdataview.html#form
+"QDataView::readFields" ntqdataview.html#readFields
+"QDataView::record" ntqdataview.html#record
+"QDataView::refresh" ntqdataview.html#refresh
+"QDataView::setForm" ntqdataview.html#setForm
+"QDataView::setRecord" ntqdataview.html#setRecord
+"QDataView::writeFields" ntqdataview.html#writeFields
+"QDataView::~QDataView" ntqdataview.html#~QDataView
 "QDate" qdate.html
 "QDate::addDays" qdate.html#addDays
 "QDate::addMonths" qdate.html#addMonths
@@ -1462,134 +1462,134 @@
 "QDateEdit::updateButtons" qdateedit.html#updateButtons
 "QDateEdit::valueChanged" qdateedit.html#valueChanged
 "QDateEdit::~QDateEdit" qdateedit.html#~QDateEdit
-"QDateTime" qdatetime.html
-"QDateTime::addDays" qdatetime.html#addDays
-"QDateTime::addMonths" qdatetime.html#addMonths
-"QDateTime::addSecs" qdatetime.html#addSecs
-"QDateTime::addYears" qdatetime.html#addYears
-"QDateTime::currentDateTime" qdatetime.html#currentDateTime
-"QDateTime::date" qdatetime.html#date
-"QDateTime::daysTo" qdatetime.html#daysTo
-"QDateTime::fromString" qdatetime.html#fromString
-"QDateTime::isNull" qdatetime.html#isNull
-"QDateTime::isValid" qdatetime.html#isValid
-"QDateTime::operator!=" qdatetime.html#operator!-eq
-"QDateTime::operator<" qdatetime.html#operator-lt
-"QDateTime::operator<=" qdatetime.html#operator-lt-eq
-"QDateTime::operator==" qdatetime.html#operator-eq-eq
-"QDateTime::operator>" qdatetime.html#operator-gt
-"QDateTime::operator>=" qdatetime.html#operator-gt-eq
-"QDateTime::secsTo" qdatetime.html#secsTo
-"QDateTime::setDate" qdatetime.html#setDate
-"QDateTime::setTime" qdatetime.html#setTime
-"QDateTime::setTime_t" qdatetime.html#setTime_t
-"QDateTime::time" qdatetime.html#time
-"QDateTime::toString" qdatetime.html#toString
-"QDateTime::toTime_t" qdatetime.html#toTime_t
-"QDateTimeEdit" qdatetimeedit.html
-"QDateTimeEdit::autoAdvance" qdatetimeedit.html#autoAdvance
-"QDateTimeEdit::dateEdit" qdatetimeedit.html#dateEdit
-"QDateTimeEdit::dateTime" qdatetimeedit.html#dateTime
-"QDateTimeEdit::dateTime" qdatetimeedit.html#dateTime-prop
-"QDateTimeEdit::setAutoAdvance" qdatetimeedit.html#setAutoAdvance
-"QDateTimeEdit::setDateTime" qdatetimeedit.html#setDateTime
-"QDateTimeEdit::timeEdit" qdatetimeedit.html#timeEdit
-"QDateTimeEdit::valueChanged" qdatetimeedit.html#valueChanged
-"QDateTimeEdit::~QDateTimeEdit" qdatetimeedit.html#~QDateTimeEdit
+"QDateTime" ntqdatetime.html
+"QDateTime::addDays" ntqdatetime.html#addDays
+"QDateTime::addMonths" ntqdatetime.html#addMonths
+"QDateTime::addSecs" ntqdatetime.html#addSecs
+"QDateTime::addYears" ntqdatetime.html#addYears
+"QDateTime::currentDateTime" ntqdatetime.html#currentDateTime
+"QDateTime::date" ntqdatetime.html#date
+"QDateTime::daysTo" ntqdatetime.html#daysTo
+"QDateTime::fromString" ntqdatetime.html#fromString
+"QDateTime::isNull" ntqdatetime.html#isNull
+"QDateTime::isValid" ntqdatetime.html#isValid
+"QDateTime::operator!=" ntqdatetime.html#operator!-eq
+"QDateTime::operator<" ntqdatetime.html#operator-lt
+"QDateTime::operator<=" ntqdatetime.html#operator-lt-eq
+"QDateTime::operator==" ntqdatetime.html#operator-eq-eq
+"QDateTime::operator>" ntqdatetime.html#operator-gt
+"QDateTime::operator>=" ntqdatetime.html#operator-gt-eq
+"QDateTime::secsTo" ntqdatetime.html#secsTo
+"QDateTime::setDate" ntqdatetime.html#setDate
+"QDateTime::setTime" ntqdatetime.html#setTime
+"QDateTime::setTime_t" ntqdatetime.html#setTime_t
+"QDateTime::time" ntqdatetime.html#time
+"QDateTime::toString" ntqdatetime.html#toString
+"QDateTime::toTime_t" ntqdatetime.html#toTime_t
+"QDateTimeEdit" ntqdatetimeedit.html
+"QDateTimeEdit::autoAdvance" ntqdatetimeedit.html#autoAdvance
+"QDateTimeEdit::dateEdit" ntqdatetimeedit.html#dateEdit
+"QDateTimeEdit::dateTime" ntqdatetimeedit.html#dateTime
+"QDateTimeEdit::dateTime" ntqdatetimeedit.html#dateTime-prop
+"QDateTimeEdit::setAutoAdvance" ntqdatetimeedit.html#setAutoAdvance
+"QDateTimeEdit::setDateTime" ntqdatetimeedit.html#setDateTime
+"QDateTimeEdit::timeEdit" ntqdatetimeedit.html#timeEdit
+"QDateTimeEdit::valueChanged" ntqdatetimeedit.html#valueChanged
+"QDateTimeEdit::~QDateTimeEdit" ntqdatetimeedit.html#~QDateTimeEdit
 "QDateTimeEditBase" qdatetimeeditbase.html
-"QDeepCopy" qdeepcopy.html
-"QDeepCopy::operator T" qdeepcopy.html#operator-T
-"QDeepCopy::operator=" qdeepcopy.html#operator-eq
-"QDesktopWidget" qdesktopwidget.html
-"QDesktopWidget::availableGeometry" qdesktopwidget.html#availableGeometry
-"QDesktopWidget::isVirtualDesktop" qdesktopwidget.html#isVirtualDesktop
-"QDesktopWidget::numScreens" qdesktopwidget.html#numScreens
-"QDesktopWidget::primaryScreen" qdesktopwidget.html#primaryScreen
-"QDesktopWidget::resized" qdesktopwidget.html#resized
-"QDesktopWidget::screen" qdesktopwidget.html#screen
-"QDesktopWidget::screenGeometry" qdesktopwidget.html#screenGeometry
-"QDesktopWidget::screenNumber" qdesktopwidget.html#screenNumber
-"QDesktopWidget::~QDesktopWidget" qdesktopwidget.html#~QDesktopWidget
-"QDial" qdial.html
-"QDial::addLine" qdial.html#addLine
-"QDial::addPage" qdial.html#addPage
-"QDial::dialMoved" qdial.html#dialMoved
-"QDial::dialPressed" qdial.html#dialPressed
-"QDial::dialReleased" qdial.html#dialReleased
-"QDial::lineStep" qdial.html#lineStep
-"QDial::lineStep" qdial.html#lineStep-prop
-"QDial::maxValue" qdial.html#maxValue
-"QDial::maxValue" qdial.html#maxValue-prop
-"QDial::minValue" qdial.html#minValue
-"QDial::minValue" qdial.html#minValue-prop
-"QDial::notchSize" qdial.html#notchSize
-"QDial::notchSize" qdial.html#notchSize-prop
-"QDial::notchTarget" qdial.html#notchTarget
-"QDial::notchTarget" qdial.html#notchTarget-prop
-"QDial::notchesVisible" qdial.html#notchesVisible
-"QDial::notchesVisible" qdial.html#notchesVisible-prop
-"QDial::pageStep" qdial.html#pageStep
-"QDial::pageStep" qdial.html#pageStep-prop
-"QDial::rangeChange" qdial.html#rangeChange
-"QDial::repaintScreen" qdial.html#repaintScreen
-"QDial::setLineStep" qdial.html#setLineStep
-"QDial::setMaxValue" qdial.html#setMaxValue
-"QDial::setMinValue" qdial.html#setMinValue
-"QDial::setNotchTarget" qdial.html#setNotchTarget
-"QDial::setNotchesVisible" qdial.html#setNotchesVisible
-"QDial::setPageStep" qdial.html#setPageStep
-"QDial::setTracking" qdial.html#setTracking
-"QDial::setValue" qdial.html#setValue
-"QDial::setWrapping" qdial.html#setWrapping
-"QDial::subtractLine" qdial.html#subtractLine
-"QDial::subtractPage" qdial.html#subtractPage
-"QDial::tracking" qdial.html#tracking
-"QDial::tracking" qdial.html#tracking-prop
-"QDial::value" qdial.html#value
-"QDial::value" qdial.html#value-prop
-"QDial::valueChange" qdial.html#valueChange
-"QDial::valueChanged" qdial.html#valueChanged
-"QDial::wrapping" qdial.html#wrapping
-"QDial::wrapping" qdial.html#wrapping-prop
-"QDial::~QDial" qdial.html#~QDial
-"QDialog" qdialog.html
-"QDialog::DialogCode" qdialog.html#DialogCode
-"QDialog::accept" qdialog.html#accept
-"QDialog::done" qdialog.html#done
-"QDialog::exec" qdialog.html#exec
-"QDialog::extension" qdialog.html#extension
-"QDialog::isModal" qdialog.html#isModal
-"QDialog::isSizeGripEnabled" qdialog.html#isSizeGripEnabled
-"QDialog::modal" qdialog.html#modal-prop
-"QDialog::orientation" qdialog.html#orientation
-"QDialog::reject" qdialog.html#reject
-"QDialog::result" qdialog.html#result
-"QDialog::setExtension" qdialog.html#setExtension
-"QDialog::setModal" qdialog.html#setModal
-"QDialog::setOrientation" qdialog.html#setOrientation
-"QDialog::setResult" qdialog.html#setResult
-"QDialog::setSizeGripEnabled" qdialog.html#setSizeGripEnabled
-"QDialog::show" qdialog.html#show
-"QDialog::showExtension" qdialog.html#showExtension
-"QDialog::sizeGripEnabled" qdialog.html#sizeGripEnabled-prop
-"QDialog::~QDialog" qdialog.html#~QDialog
-"QDict" qdict.html
-"QDict::clear" qdict.html#clear
-"QDict::count" qdict.html#count
-"QDict::find" qdict.html#find
-"QDict::insert" qdict.html#insert
-"QDict::isEmpty" qdict.html#isEmpty
-"QDict::operator=" qdict.html#operator-eq
-"QDict::operator[]" qdict.html#operator[]
-"QDict::read" qdict.html#read
-"QDict::remove" qdict.html#remove
-"QDict::replace" qdict.html#replace
-"QDict::resize" qdict.html#resize
-"QDict::size" qdict.html#size
-"QDict::statistics" qdict.html#statistics
-"QDict::take" qdict.html#take
-"QDict::write" qdict.html#write
-"QDict::~QDict" qdict.html#~QDict
+"QDeepCopy" ntqdeepcopy.html
+"QDeepCopy::operator T" ntqdeepcopy.html#operator-T
+"QDeepCopy::operator=" ntqdeepcopy.html#operator-eq
+"QDesktopWidget" ntqdesktopwidget.html
+"QDesktopWidget::availableGeometry" ntqdesktopwidget.html#availableGeometry
+"QDesktopWidget::isVirtualDesktop" ntqdesktopwidget.html#isVirtualDesktop
+"QDesktopWidget::numScreens" ntqdesktopwidget.html#numScreens
+"QDesktopWidget::primaryScreen" ntqdesktopwidget.html#primaryScreen
+"QDesktopWidget::resized" ntqdesktopwidget.html#resized
+"QDesktopWidget::screen" ntqdesktopwidget.html#screen
+"QDesktopWidget::screenGeometry" ntqdesktopwidget.html#screenGeometry
+"QDesktopWidget::screenNumber" ntqdesktopwidget.html#screenNumber
+"QDesktopWidget::~QDesktopWidget" ntqdesktopwidget.html#~QDesktopWidget
+"QDial" ntqdial.html
+"QDial::addLine" ntqdial.html#addLine
+"QDial::addPage" ntqdial.html#addPage
+"QDial::dialMoved" ntqdial.html#dialMoved
+"QDial::dialPressed" ntqdial.html#dialPressed
+"QDial::dialReleased" ntqdial.html#dialReleased
+"QDial::lineStep" ntqdial.html#lineStep
+"QDial::lineStep" ntqdial.html#lineStep-prop
+"QDial::maxValue" ntqdial.html#maxValue
+"QDial::maxValue" ntqdial.html#maxValue-prop
+"QDial::minValue" ntqdial.html#minValue
+"QDial::minValue" ntqdial.html#minValue-prop
+"QDial::notchSize" ntqdial.html#notchSize
+"QDial::notchSize" ntqdial.html#notchSize-prop
+"QDial::notchTarget" ntqdial.html#notchTarget
+"QDial::notchTarget" ntqdial.html#notchTarget-prop
+"QDial::notchesVisible" ntqdial.html#notchesVisible
+"QDial::notchesVisible" ntqdial.html#notchesVisible-prop
+"QDial::pageStep" ntqdial.html#pageStep
+"QDial::pageStep" ntqdial.html#pageStep-prop
+"QDial::rangeChange" ntqdial.html#rangeChange
+"QDial::repaintScreen" ntqdial.html#repaintScreen
+"QDial::setLineStep" ntqdial.html#setLineStep
+"QDial::setMaxValue" ntqdial.html#setMaxValue
+"QDial::setMinValue" ntqdial.html#setMinValue
+"QDial::setNotchTarget" ntqdial.html#setNotchTarget
+"QDial::setNotchesVisible" ntqdial.html#setNotchesVisible
+"QDial::setPageStep" ntqdial.html#setPageStep
+"QDial::setTracking" ntqdial.html#setTracking
+"QDial::setValue" ntqdial.html#setValue
+"QDial::setWrapping" ntqdial.html#setWrapping
+"QDial::subtractLine" ntqdial.html#subtractLine
+"QDial::subtractPage" ntqdial.html#subtractPage
+"QDial::tracking" ntqdial.html#tracking
+"QDial::tracking" ntqdial.html#tracking-prop
+"QDial::value" ntqdial.html#value
+"QDial::value" ntqdial.html#value-prop
+"QDial::valueChange" ntqdial.html#valueChange
+"QDial::valueChanged" ntqdial.html#valueChanged
+"QDial::wrapping" ntqdial.html#wrapping
+"QDial::wrapping" ntqdial.html#wrapping-prop
+"QDial::~QDial" ntqdial.html#~QDial
+"QDialog" ntqdialog.html
+"QDialog::DialogCode" ntqdialog.html#DialogCode
+"QDialog::accept" ntqdialog.html#accept
+"QDialog::done" ntqdialog.html#done
+"QDialog::exec" ntqdialog.html#exec
+"QDialog::extension" ntqdialog.html#extension
+"QDialog::isModal" ntqdialog.html#isModal
+"QDialog::isSizeGripEnabled" ntqdialog.html#isSizeGripEnabled
+"QDialog::modal" ntqdialog.html#modal-prop
+"QDialog::orientation" ntqdialog.html#orientation
+"QDialog::reject" ntqdialog.html#reject
+"QDialog::result" ntqdialog.html#result
+"QDialog::setExtension" ntqdialog.html#setExtension
+"QDialog::setModal" ntqdialog.html#setModal
+"QDialog::setOrientation" ntqdialog.html#setOrientation
+"QDialog::setResult" ntqdialog.html#setResult
+"QDialog::setSizeGripEnabled" ntqdialog.html#setSizeGripEnabled
+"QDialog::show" ntqdialog.html#show
+"QDialog::showExtension" ntqdialog.html#showExtension
+"QDialog::sizeGripEnabled" ntqdialog.html#sizeGripEnabled-prop
+"QDialog::~QDialog" ntqdialog.html#~QDialog
+"QDict" ntqdict.html
+"QDict::clear" ntqdict.html#clear
+"QDict::count" ntqdict.html#count
+"QDict::find" ntqdict.html#find
+"QDict::insert" ntqdict.html#insert
+"QDict::isEmpty" ntqdict.html#isEmpty
+"QDict::operator=" ntqdict.html#operator-eq
+"QDict::operator[]" ntqdict.html#operator[]
+"QDict::read" ntqdict.html#read
+"QDict::remove" ntqdict.html#remove
+"QDict::replace" ntqdict.html#replace
+"QDict::resize" ntqdict.html#resize
+"QDict::size" ntqdict.html#size
+"QDict::statistics" ntqdict.html#statistics
+"QDict::take" ntqdict.html#take
+"QDict::write" ntqdict.html#write
+"QDict::~QDict" ntqdict.html#~QDict
 "QDictIterator" qdictiterator.html
 "QDictIterator::count" qdictiterator.html#count
 "QDictIterator::current" qdictiterator.html#current
@@ -1601,57 +1601,57 @@
 "QDictIterator::toFirst" qdictiterator.html#toFirst
 "QDictIterator::~QDictIterator" qdictiterator.html#~QDictIterator
 "QDir" qdir-example.html
-"QDir" qdir.html
-"QDir::FilterSpec" qdir.html#FilterSpec
-"QDir::SortSpec" qdir.html#SortSpec
-"QDir::absFilePath" qdir.html#absFilePath
-"QDir::absPath" qdir.html#absPath
-"QDir::canonicalPath" qdir.html#canonicalPath
-"QDir::cd" qdir.html#cd
-"QDir::cdUp" qdir.html#cdUp
-"QDir::cleanDirPath" qdir.html#cleanDirPath
-"QDir::convertSeparators" qdir.html#convertSeparators
-"QDir::convertToAbs" qdir.html#convertToAbs
-"QDir::count" qdir.html#count
-"QDir::current" qdir.html#current
-"QDir::currentDirPath" qdir.html#currentDirPath
-"QDir::dirName" qdir.html#dirName
-"QDir::drives" qdir.html#drives
-"QDir::entryInfoList" qdir.html#entryInfoList
-"QDir::entryList" qdir.html#entryList
-"QDir::exists" qdir.html#exists
-"QDir::filePath" qdir.html#filePath
-"QDir::filter" qdir.html#filter
-"QDir::home" qdir.html#home
-"QDir::homeDirPath" qdir.html#homeDirPath
-"QDir::isReadable" qdir.html#isReadable
-"QDir::isRelative" qdir.html#isRelative
-"QDir::isRelativePath" qdir.html#isRelativePath
-"QDir::isRoot" qdir.html#isRoot
-"QDir::match" qdir.html#match
-"QDir::matchAllDirs" qdir.html#matchAllDirs
-"QDir::mkdir" qdir.html#mkdir
-"QDir::nameFilter" qdir.html#nameFilter
-"QDir::operator!=" qdir.html#operator!-eq
-"QDir::operator=" qdir.html#operator-eq
-"QDir::operator==" qdir.html#operator-eq-eq
-"QDir::operator[]" qdir.html#operator[]
-"QDir::path" qdir.html#path
-"QDir::refresh" qdir.html#refresh
-"QDir::remove" qdir.html#remove
-"QDir::rename" qdir.html#rename
-"QDir::rmdir" qdir.html#rmdir
-"QDir::root" qdir.html#root
-"QDir::rootDirPath" qdir.html#rootDirPath
-"QDir::separator" qdir.html#separator
-"QDir::setCurrent" qdir.html#setCurrent
-"QDir::setFilter" qdir.html#setFilter
-"QDir::setMatchAllDirs" qdir.html#setMatchAllDirs
-"QDir::setNameFilter" qdir.html#setNameFilter
-"QDir::setPath" qdir.html#setPath
-"QDir::setSorting" qdir.html#setSorting
-"QDir::sorting" qdir.html#sorting
-"QDir::~QDir" qdir.html#~QDir
+"QDir" ntqdir.html
+"QDir::FilterSpec" ntqdir.html#FilterSpec
+"QDir::SortSpec" ntqdir.html#SortSpec
+"QDir::absFilePath" ntqdir.html#absFilePath
+"QDir::absPath" ntqdir.html#absPath
+"QDir::canonicalPath" ntqdir.html#canonicalPath
+"QDir::cd" ntqdir.html#cd
+"QDir::cdUp" ntqdir.html#cdUp
+"QDir::cleanDirPath" ntqdir.html#cleanDirPath
+"QDir::convertSeparators" ntqdir.html#convertSeparators
+"QDir::convertToAbs" ntqdir.html#convertToAbs
+"QDir::count" ntqdir.html#count
+"QDir::current" ntqdir.html#current
+"QDir::currentDirPath" ntqdir.html#currentDirPath
+"QDir::dirName" ntqdir.html#dirName
+"QDir::drives" ntqdir.html#drives
+"QDir::entryInfoList" ntqdir.html#entryInfoList
+"QDir::entryList" ntqdir.html#entryList
+"QDir::exists" ntqdir.html#exists
+"QDir::filePath" ntqdir.html#filePath
+"QDir::filter" ntqdir.html#filter
+"QDir::home" ntqdir.html#home
+"QDir::homeDirPath" ntqdir.html#homeDirPath
+"QDir::isReadable" ntqdir.html#isReadable
+"QDir::isRelative" ntqdir.html#isRelative
+"QDir::isRelativePath" ntqdir.html#isRelativePath
+"QDir::isRoot" ntqdir.html#isRoot
+"QDir::match" ntqdir.html#match
+"QDir::matchAllDirs" ntqdir.html#matchAllDirs
+"QDir::mkdir" ntqdir.html#mkdir
+"QDir::nameFilter" ntqdir.html#nameFilter
+"QDir::operator!=" ntqdir.html#operator!-eq
+"QDir::operator=" ntqdir.html#operator-eq
+"QDir::operator==" ntqdir.html#operator-eq-eq
+"QDir::operator[]" ntqdir.html#operator[]
+"QDir::path" ntqdir.html#path
+"QDir::refresh" ntqdir.html#refresh
+"QDir::remove" ntqdir.html#remove
+"QDir::rename" ntqdir.html#rename
+"QDir::rmdir" ntqdir.html#rmdir
+"QDir::root" ntqdir.html#root
+"QDir::rootDirPath" ntqdir.html#rootDirPath
+"QDir::separator" ntqdir.html#separator
+"QDir::setCurrent" ntqdir.html#setCurrent
+"QDir::setFilter" ntqdir.html#setFilter
+"QDir::setMatchAllDirs" ntqdir.html#setMatchAllDirs
+"QDir::setNameFilter" ntqdir.html#setNameFilter
+"QDir::setPath" ntqdir.html#setPath
+"QDir::setSorting" ntqdir.html#setSorting
+"QDir::sorting" ntqdir.html#sorting
+"QDir::~QDir" ntqdir.html#~QDir
 "QDirectPainter" qdirectpainter.html
 "QDirectPainter::depth" qdirectpainter.html#depth
 "QDirectPainter::frameBuffer" qdirectpainter.html#frameBuffer
@@ -1670,86 +1670,86 @@
 "QDirectPainter::~QDirectPainter" qdirectpainter.html#~QDirectPainter
 "QDiskFont::fontDef" qdiskfont.html#fontDef
 "QDiskFont::load" qdiskfont.html#load
-"QDns" qdns.html
-"QDns::RecordType" qdns.html#RecordType
-"QDns::addresses" qdns.html#addresses
-"QDns::canonicalName" qdns.html#canonicalName
-"QDns::hostNames" qdns.html#hostNames
-"QDns::isWorking" qdns.html#isWorking
-"QDns::label" qdns.html#label
-"QDns::mailServers" qdns.html#mailServers
-"QDns::qualifiedNames" qdns.html#qualifiedNames
-"QDns::recordType" qdns.html#recordType
-"QDns::resultsReady" qdns.html#resultsReady
-"QDns::servers" qdns.html#servers
-"QDns::setLabel" qdns.html#setLabel
-"QDns::setRecordType" qdns.html#setRecordType
-"QDns::setStartQueryTimer" qdns.html#setStartQueryTimer
-"QDns::texts" qdns.html#texts
-"QDns::~QDns" qdns.html#~QDns
-"QDockArea" qdockarea.html
-"QDockArea::HandlePosition" qdockarea.html#HandlePosition
-"QDockArea::count" qdockarea.html#count
-"QDockArea::count" qdockarea.html#count-prop
-"QDockArea::dockWindowList" qdockarea.html#dockWindowList
-"QDockArea::empty" qdockarea.html#empty-prop
-"QDockArea::handlePosition" qdockarea.html#handlePosition
-"QDockArea::handlePosition" qdockarea.html#handlePosition-prop
-"QDockArea::hasDockWindow" qdockarea.html#hasDockWindow
-"QDockArea::isDockWindowAccepted" qdockarea.html#isDockWindowAccepted
-"QDockArea::isEmpty" qdockarea.html#isEmpty
-"QDockArea::lineUp" qdockarea.html#lineUp
-"QDockArea::moveDockWindow" qdockarea.html#moveDockWindow
-"QDockArea::orientation" qdockarea.html#orientation
-"QDockArea::orientation" qdockarea.html#orientation-prop
-"QDockArea::removeDockWindow" qdockarea.html#removeDockWindow
-"QDockArea::setAcceptDockWindow" qdockarea.html#setAcceptDockWindow
-"QDockArea::~QDockArea" qdockarea.html#~QDockArea
-"QDockWindow" qdockwindow.html
-"QDockWindow::CloseMode" qdockwindow.html#CloseMode
-"QDockWindow::Place" qdockwindow.html#Place
-"QDockWindow::area" qdockwindow.html#area
-"QDockWindow::boxLayout" qdockwindow.html#boxLayout
-"QDockWindow::closeMode" qdockwindow.html#closeMode
-"QDockWindow::closeMode" qdockwindow.html#closeMode-prop
-"QDockWindow::dock" qdockwindow.html#dock
-"QDockWindow::fixedExtent" qdockwindow.html#fixedExtent
-"QDockWindow::horizontallyStretchable" qdockwindow.html#horizontallyStretchable-prop
-"QDockWindow::isCloseEnabled" qdockwindow.html#isCloseEnabled
-"QDockWindow::isHorizontallyStretchable" qdockwindow.html#isHorizontallyStretchable
-"QDockWindow::isMovingEnabled" qdockwindow.html#isMovingEnabled
-"QDockWindow::isResizeEnabled" qdockwindow.html#isResizeEnabled
-"QDockWindow::isStretchable" qdockwindow.html#isStretchable
-"QDockWindow::isVerticallyStretchable" qdockwindow.html#isVerticallyStretchable
-"QDockWindow::movingEnabled" qdockwindow.html#movingEnabled-prop
-"QDockWindow::newLine" qdockwindow.html#newLine
-"QDockWindow::newLine" qdockwindow.html#newLine-prop
-"QDockWindow::offset" qdockwindow.html#offset
-"QDockWindow::offset" qdockwindow.html#offset-prop
-"QDockWindow::opaqueMoving" qdockwindow.html#opaqueMoving
-"QDockWindow::opaqueMoving" qdockwindow.html#opaqueMoving-prop
-"QDockWindow::orientation" qdockwindow.html#orientation
-"QDockWindow::orientationChanged" qdockwindow.html#orientationChanged
-"QDockWindow::place" qdockwindow.html#place
-"QDockWindow::placeChanged" qdockwindow.html#placeChanged
-"QDockWindow::resizeEnabled" qdockwindow.html#resizeEnabled-prop
-"QDockWindow::setCloseMode" qdockwindow.html#setCloseMode
-"QDockWindow::setFixedExtentHeight" qdockwindow.html#setFixedExtentHeight
-"QDockWindow::setFixedExtentWidth" qdockwindow.html#setFixedExtentWidth
-"QDockWindow::setHorizontallyStretchable" qdockwindow.html#setHorizontallyStretchable
-"QDockWindow::setMovingEnabled" qdockwindow.html#setMovingEnabled
-"QDockWindow::setNewLine" qdockwindow.html#setNewLine
-"QDockWindow::setOffset" qdockwindow.html#setOffset
-"QDockWindow::setOpaqueMoving" qdockwindow.html#setOpaqueMoving
-"QDockWindow::setOrientation" qdockwindow.html#setOrientation
-"QDockWindow::setResizeEnabled" qdockwindow.html#setResizeEnabled
-"QDockWindow::setVerticallyStretchable" qdockwindow.html#setVerticallyStretchable
-"QDockWindow::setWidget" qdockwindow.html#setWidget
-"QDockWindow::stretchable" qdockwindow.html#stretchable-prop
-"QDockWindow::undock" qdockwindow.html#undock
-"QDockWindow::verticallyStretchable" qdockwindow.html#verticallyStretchable-prop
-"QDockWindow::visibilityChanged" qdockwindow.html#visibilityChanged
-"QDockWindow::widget" qdockwindow.html#widget
+"QDns" ntqdns.html
+"QDns::RecordType" ntqdns.html#RecordType
+"QDns::addresses" ntqdns.html#addresses
+"QDns::canonicalName" ntqdns.html#canonicalName
+"QDns::hostNames" ntqdns.html#hostNames
+"QDns::isWorking" ntqdns.html#isWorking
+"QDns::label" ntqdns.html#label
+"QDns::mailServers" ntqdns.html#mailServers
+"QDns::qualifiedNames" ntqdns.html#qualifiedNames
+"QDns::recordType" ntqdns.html#recordType
+"QDns::resultsReady" ntqdns.html#resultsReady
+"QDns::servers" ntqdns.html#servers
+"QDns::setLabel" ntqdns.html#setLabel
+"QDns::setRecordType" ntqdns.html#setRecordType
+"QDns::setStartQueryTimer" ntqdns.html#setStartQueryTimer
+"QDns::texts" ntqdns.html#texts
+"QDns::~QDns" ntqdns.html#~QDns
+"QDockArea" ntqdockarea.html
+"QDockArea::HandlePosition" ntqdockarea.html#HandlePosition
+"QDockArea::count" ntqdockarea.html#count
+"QDockArea::count" ntqdockarea.html#count-prop
+"QDockArea::dockWindowList" ntqdockarea.html#dockWindowList
+"QDockArea::empty" ntqdockarea.html#empty-prop
+"QDockArea::handlePosition" ntqdockarea.html#handlePosition
+"QDockArea::handlePosition" ntqdockarea.html#handlePosition-prop
+"QDockArea::hasDockWindow" ntqdockarea.html#hasDockWindow
+"QDockArea::isDockWindowAccepted" ntqdockarea.html#isDockWindowAccepted
+"QDockArea::isEmpty" ntqdockarea.html#isEmpty
+"QDockArea::lineUp" ntqdockarea.html#lineUp
+"QDockArea::moveDockWindow" ntqdockarea.html#moveDockWindow
+"QDockArea::orientation" ntqdockarea.html#orientation
+"QDockArea::orientation" ntqdockarea.html#orientation-prop
+"QDockArea::removeDockWindow" ntqdockarea.html#removeDockWindow
+"QDockArea::setAcceptDockWindow" ntqdockarea.html#setAcceptDockWindow
+"QDockArea::~QDockArea" ntqdockarea.html#~QDockArea
+"QDockWindow" ntqdockwindow.html
+"QDockWindow::CloseMode" ntqdockwindow.html#CloseMode
+"QDockWindow::Place" ntqdockwindow.html#Place
+"QDockWindow::area" ntqdockwindow.html#area
+"QDockWindow::boxLayout" ntqdockwindow.html#boxLayout
+"QDockWindow::closeMode" ntqdockwindow.html#closeMode
+"QDockWindow::closeMode" ntqdockwindow.html#closeMode-prop
+"QDockWindow::dock" ntqdockwindow.html#dock
+"QDockWindow::fixedExtent" ntqdockwindow.html#fixedExtent
+"QDockWindow::horizontallyStretchable" ntqdockwindow.html#horizontallyStretchable-prop
+"QDockWindow::isCloseEnabled" ntqdockwindow.html#isCloseEnabled
+"QDockWindow::isHorizontallyStretchable" ntqdockwindow.html#isHorizontallyStretchable
+"QDockWindow::isMovingEnabled" ntqdockwindow.html#isMovingEnabled
+"QDockWindow::isResizeEnabled" ntqdockwindow.html#isResizeEnabled
+"QDockWindow::isStretchable" ntqdockwindow.html#isStretchable
+"QDockWindow::isVerticallyStretchable" ntqdockwindow.html#isVerticallyStretchable
+"QDockWindow::movingEnabled" ntqdockwindow.html#movingEnabled-prop
+"QDockWindow::newLine" ntqdockwindow.html#newLine
+"QDockWindow::newLine" ntqdockwindow.html#newLine-prop
+"QDockWindow::offset" ntqdockwindow.html#offset
+"QDockWindow::offset" ntqdockwindow.html#offset-prop
+"QDockWindow::opaqueMoving" ntqdockwindow.html#opaqueMoving
+"QDockWindow::opaqueMoving" ntqdockwindow.html#opaqueMoving-prop
+"QDockWindow::orientation" ntqdockwindow.html#orientation
+"QDockWindow::orientationChanged" ntqdockwindow.html#orientationChanged
+"QDockWindow::place" ntqdockwindow.html#place
+"QDockWindow::placeChanged" ntqdockwindow.html#placeChanged
+"QDockWindow::resizeEnabled" ntqdockwindow.html#resizeEnabled-prop
+"QDockWindow::setCloseMode" ntqdockwindow.html#setCloseMode
+"QDockWindow::setFixedExtentHeight" ntqdockwindow.html#setFixedExtentHeight
+"QDockWindow::setFixedExtentWidth" ntqdockwindow.html#setFixedExtentWidth
+"QDockWindow::setHorizontallyStretchable" ntqdockwindow.html#setHorizontallyStretchable
+"QDockWindow::setMovingEnabled" ntqdockwindow.html#setMovingEnabled
+"QDockWindow::setNewLine" ntqdockwindow.html#setNewLine
+"QDockWindow::setOffset" ntqdockwindow.html#setOffset
+"QDockWindow::setOpaqueMoving" ntqdockwindow.html#setOpaqueMoving
+"QDockWindow::setOrientation" ntqdockwindow.html#setOrientation
+"QDockWindow::setResizeEnabled" ntqdockwindow.html#setResizeEnabled
+"QDockWindow::setVerticallyStretchable" ntqdockwindow.html#setVerticallyStretchable
+"QDockWindow::setWidget" ntqdockwindow.html#setWidget
+"QDockWindow::stretchable" ntqdockwindow.html#stretchable-prop
+"QDockWindow::undock" ntqdockwindow.html#undock
+"QDockWindow::verticallyStretchable" ntqdockwindow.html#verticallyStretchable-prop
+"QDockWindow::visibilityChanged" ntqdockwindow.html#visibilityChanged
+"QDockWindow::widget" ntqdockwindow.html#widget
 "QDomAttr" qdomattr.html
 "QDomAttr::isAttr" qdomattr.html#isAttr
 "QDomAttr::name" qdomattr.html#name
@@ -1995,18 +1995,18 @@
 "QDragMoveEvent::accept" qdragmoveevent.html#accept
 "QDragMoveEvent::answerRect" qdragmoveevent.html#answerRect
 "QDragMoveEvent::ignore" qdragmoveevent.html#ignore
-"QDragObject" qdragobject.html
-"QDragObject::DragMode" qdragobject.html#DragMode
-"QDragObject::drag" qdragobject.html#drag
-"QDragObject::dragCopy" qdragobject.html#dragCopy
-"QDragObject::dragLink" qdragobject.html#dragLink
-"QDragObject::dragMove" qdragobject.html#dragMove
-"QDragObject::pixmap" qdragobject.html#pixmap
-"QDragObject::pixmapHotSpot" qdragobject.html#pixmapHotSpot
-"QDragObject::setPixmap" qdragobject.html#setPixmap
-"QDragObject::source" qdragobject.html#source
-"QDragObject::target" qdragobject.html#target
-"QDragObject::~QDragObject" qdragobject.html#~QDragObject
+"QDragObject" ntqdragobject.html
+"QDragObject::DragMode" ntqdragobject.html#DragMode
+"QDragObject::drag" ntqdragobject.html#drag
+"QDragObject::dragCopy" ntqdragobject.html#dragCopy
+"QDragObject::dragLink" ntqdragobject.html#dragLink
+"QDragObject::dragMove" ntqdragobject.html#dragMove
+"QDragObject::pixmap" ntqdragobject.html#pixmap
+"QDragObject::pixmapHotSpot" ntqdragobject.html#pixmapHotSpot
+"QDragObject::setPixmap" ntqdragobject.html#setPixmap
+"QDragObject::source" ntqdragobject.html#source
+"QDragObject::target" ntqdragobject.html#target
+"QDragObject::~QDragObject" ntqdragobject.html#~QDragObject
 "QDropEvent" qdropevent.html
 "QDropEvent::Action" qdropevent.html#Action
 "QDropEvent::accept" qdropevent.html#accept
@@ -2022,188 +2022,188 @@
 "QDropEvent::setAction" qdropevent.html#setAction
 "QDropEvent::setPoint" qdropevent.html#setPoint
 "QDropEvent::source" qdropevent.html#source
-"QDropSite::~QDropSite" qdropsite.html#~QDropSite
-"QEditorFactory" qeditorfactory.html
-"QEditorFactory::createEditor" qeditorfactory.html#createEditor
-"QEditorFactory::defaultFactory" qeditorfactory.html#defaultFactory
-"QEditorFactory::installDefaultFactory" qeditorfactory.html#installDefaultFactory
-"QEditorFactory::~QEditorFactory" qeditorfactory.html#~QEditorFactory
+"QDropSite::~QDropSite" ntqdropsite.html#~QDropSite
+"QEditorFactory" ntqeditorfactory.html
+"QEditorFactory::createEditor" ntqeditorfactory.html#createEditor
+"QEditorFactory::defaultFactory" ntqeditorfactory.html#defaultFactory
+"QEditorFactory::installDefaultFactory" ntqeditorfactory.html#installDefaultFactory
+"QEditorFactory::~QEditorFactory" ntqeditorfactory.html#~QEditorFactory
 "QEmbed - File and Image Embedder" qembed.html
-"QErrorMessage" qerrormessage.html
-"QErrorMessage::message" qerrormessage.html#message
-"QErrorMessage::qtHandler" qerrormessage.html#qtHandler
-"QErrorMessage::~QErrorMessage" qerrormessage.html#~QErrorMessage
-"QEucJpCodec" qeucjpcodec.html
-"QEucJpCodec::mibEnum" qeucjpcodec.html#mibEnum
-"QEucJpCodec::mimeName" qeucjpcodec.html#mimeName
-"QEucJpCodec::~QEucJpCodec" qeucjpcodec.html#~QEucJpCodec
-"QEucKrCodec" qeuckrcodec.html
-"QEucKrCodec::mimeName" qeuckrcodec.html#mimeName
-"QEvent" qevent.html
-"QEvent::Type" qevent.html#Type
-"QEvent::spontaneous" qevent.html#spontaneous
-"QEvent::type" qevent.html#type
-"QEvent::~QEvent" qevent.html#~QEvent
-"QEventLoop" qeventloop.html
-"QEventLoop::ProcessEvents" qeventloop.html#ProcessEvents
-"QEventLoop::ProcessEventsFlags" qeventloop.html#ProcessEventsFlags
-"QEventLoop::aboutToBlock" qeventloop.html#aboutToBlock
-"QEventLoop::activateSocketNotifiers" qeventloop.html#activateSocketNotifiers
-"QEventLoop::activateTimers" qeventloop.html#activateTimers
-"QEventLoop::awake" qeventloop.html#awake
-"QEventLoop::enterLoop" qeventloop.html#enterLoop
-"QEventLoop::exec" qeventloop.html#exec
-"QEventLoop::exit" qeventloop.html#exit
-"QEventLoop::exitLoop" qeventloop.html#exitLoop
-"QEventLoop::hasPendingEvents" qeventloop.html#hasPendingEvents
-"QEventLoop::loopLevel" qeventloop.html#loopLevel
-"QEventLoop::processEvents" qeventloop.html#processEvents
-"QEventLoop::registerSocketNotifier" qeventloop.html#registerSocketNotifier
-"QEventLoop::setSocketNotifierPending" qeventloop.html#setSocketNotifierPending
-"QEventLoop::timeToWait" qeventloop.html#timeToWait
-"QEventLoop::unregisterSocketNotifier" qeventloop.html#unregisterSocketNotifier
-"QEventLoop::wakeUp" qeventloop.html#wakeUp
-"QEventLoop::~QEventLoop" qeventloop.html#~QEventLoop
-"QFile" qfile.html
-"QFile::DecoderFn" qfile.html#DecoderFn
-"QFile::EncoderFn" qfile.html#EncoderFn
-"QFile::at" qfile.html#at
-"QFile::atEnd" qfile.html#atEnd
-"QFile::close" qfile.html#close
-"QFile::decodeName" qfile.html#decodeName
-"QFile::encodeName" qfile.html#encodeName
-"QFile::errorString" qfile.html#errorString
-"QFile::exists" qfile.html#exists
-"QFile::flush" qfile.html#flush
-"QFile::getch" qfile.html#getch
-"QFile::handle" qfile.html#handle
-"QFile::name" qfile.html#name
-"QFile::open" qfile.html#open
-"QFile::putch" qfile.html#putch
-"QFile::readLine" qfile.html#readLine
-"QFile::remove" qfile.html#remove
-"QFile::setDecodingFunction" qfile.html#setDecodingFunction
-"QFile::setEncodingFunction" qfile.html#setEncodingFunction
-"QFile::setErrorString" qfile.html#setErrorString
-"QFile::setName" qfile.html#setName
-"QFile::size" qfile.html#size
-"QFile::ungetch" qfile.html#ungetch
-"QFile::writeBlock" qfile.html#writeBlock
-"QFile::~QFile" qfile.html#~QFile
-"QFileDialog" qfiledialog.html
-"QFileDialog::Mode" qfiledialog.html#Mode
-"QFileDialog::PreviewMode" qfiledialog.html#PreviewMode
-"QFileDialog::ViewMode" qfiledialog.html#ViewMode
-"QFileDialog::addFilter" qfiledialog.html#addFilter
-"QFileDialog::addLeftWidget" qfiledialog.html#addLeftWidget
-"QFileDialog::addRightWidget" qfiledialog.html#addRightWidget
-"QFileDialog::addToolButton" qfiledialog.html#addToolButton
-"QFileDialog::addWidgets" qfiledialog.html#addWidgets
-"QFileDialog::contentsPreview" qfiledialog.html#contentsPreview-prop
-"QFileDialog::dir" qfiledialog.html#dir
-"QFileDialog::dirEntered" qfiledialog.html#dirEntered
-"QFileDialog::dirPath" qfiledialog.html#dirPath
-"QFileDialog::dirPath" qfiledialog.html#dirPath-prop
-"QFileDialog::fileHighlighted" qfiledialog.html#fileHighlighted
-"QFileDialog::fileNameEditDone" qfiledialog.html#fileNameEditDone
-"QFileDialog::fileSelected" qfiledialog.html#fileSelected
-"QFileDialog::filesSelected" qfiledialog.html#filesSelected
-"QFileDialog::filterSelected" qfiledialog.html#filterSelected
-"QFileDialog::fixupNameEdit" qfiledialog.html#fixupNameEdit
-"QFileDialog::getExistingDirectory" qfiledialog.html#getExistingDirectory
-"QFileDialog::getOpenFileName" qfiledialog.html#getOpenFileName
-"QFileDialog::getOpenFileNames" qfiledialog.html#getOpenFileNames
-"QFileDialog::getSaveFileName" qfiledialog.html#getSaveFileName
-"QFileDialog::iconProvider" qfiledialog.html#iconProvider
-"QFileDialog::infoPreview" qfiledialog.html#infoPreview-prop
-"QFileDialog::isContentsPreviewEnabled" qfiledialog.html#isContentsPreviewEnabled
-"QFileDialog::isInfoPreviewEnabled" qfiledialog.html#isInfoPreviewEnabled
-"QFileDialog::mode" qfiledialog.html#mode
-"QFileDialog::mode" qfiledialog.html#mode-prop
-"QFileDialog::modeButtonsDestroyed" qfiledialog.html#modeButtonsDestroyed
-"QFileDialog::previewMode" qfiledialog.html#previewMode
-"QFileDialog::previewMode" qfiledialog.html#previewMode-prop
-"QFileDialog::rereadDir" qfiledialog.html#rereadDir
-"QFileDialog::resortDir" qfiledialog.html#resortDir
-"QFileDialog::selectAll" qfiledialog.html#selectAll
-"QFileDialog::selectDirectoryOrFile" qfiledialog.html#selectDirectoryOrFile
-"QFileDialog::selectedFile" qfiledialog.html#selectedFile
-"QFileDialog::selectedFile" qfiledialog.html#selectedFile-prop
-"QFileDialog::selectedFiles" qfiledialog.html#selectedFiles
-"QFileDialog::selectedFiles" qfiledialog.html#selectedFiles-prop
-"QFileDialog::selectedFilter" qfiledialog.html#selectedFilter
-"QFileDialog::selectedFilter" qfiledialog.html#selectedFilter-prop
-"QFileDialog::setContentsPreview" qfiledialog.html#setContentsPreview
-"QFileDialog::setContentsPreviewEnabled" qfiledialog.html#setContentsPreviewEnabled
-"QFileDialog::setDir" qfiledialog.html#setDir
-"QFileDialog::setFilter" qfiledialog.html#setFilter
-"QFileDialog::setFilters" qfiledialog.html#setFilters
-"QFileDialog::setIconProvider" qfiledialog.html#setIconProvider
-"QFileDialog::setInfoPreview" qfiledialog.html#setInfoPreview
-"QFileDialog::setInfoPreviewEnabled" qfiledialog.html#setInfoPreviewEnabled
-"QFileDialog::setMode" qfiledialog.html#setMode
-"QFileDialog::setPreviewMode" qfiledialog.html#setPreviewMode
-"QFileDialog::setSelectedFilter" qfiledialog.html#setSelectedFilter
-"QFileDialog::setSelection" qfiledialog.html#setSelection
-"QFileDialog::setShowHiddenFiles" qfiledialog.html#setShowHiddenFiles
-"QFileDialog::setUrl" qfiledialog.html#setUrl
-"QFileDialog::setViewMode" qfiledialog.html#setViewMode
-"QFileDialog::showHiddenFiles" qfiledialog.html#showHiddenFiles
-"QFileDialog::showHiddenFiles" qfiledialog.html#showHiddenFiles-prop
-"QFileDialog::stopCopy" qfiledialog.html#stopCopy
-"QFileDialog::updateFileNameEdit" qfiledialog.html#updateFileNameEdit
-"QFileDialog::updateGeometries" qfiledialog.html#updateGeometries
-"QFileDialog::url" qfiledialog.html#url
-"QFileDialog::viewMode" qfiledialog.html#viewMode
-"QFileDialog::viewMode" qfiledialog.html#viewMode-prop
-"QFileDialog::~QFileDialog" qfiledialog.html#~QFileDialog
+"QErrorMessage" ntqerrormessage.html
+"QErrorMessage::message" ntqerrormessage.html#message
+"QErrorMessage::qtHandler" ntqerrormessage.html#qtHandler
+"QErrorMessage::~QErrorMessage" ntqerrormessage.html#~QErrorMessage
+"QEucJpCodec" ntqeucjpcodec.html
+"QEucJpCodec::mibEnum" ntqeucjpcodec.html#mibEnum
+"QEucJpCodec::mimeName" ntqeucjpcodec.html#mimeName
+"QEucJpCodec::~QEucJpCodec" ntqeucjpcodec.html#~QEucJpCodec
+"QEucKrCodec" ntqeuckrcodec.html
+"QEucKrCodec::mimeName" ntqeuckrcodec.html#mimeName
+"QEvent" ntqevent.html
+"QEvent::Type" ntqevent.html#Type
+"QEvent::spontaneous" ntqevent.html#spontaneous
+"QEvent::type" ntqevent.html#type
+"QEvent::~QEvent" ntqevent.html#~QEvent
+"QEventLoop" ntqeventloop.html
+"QEventLoop::ProcessEvents" ntqeventloop.html#ProcessEvents
+"QEventLoop::ProcessEventsFlags" ntqeventloop.html#ProcessEventsFlags
+"QEventLoop::aboutToBlock" ntqeventloop.html#aboutToBlock
+"QEventLoop::activateSocketNotifiers" ntqeventloop.html#activateSocketNotifiers
+"QEventLoop::activateTimers" ntqeventloop.html#activateTimers
+"QEventLoop::awake" ntqeventloop.html#awake
+"QEventLoop::enterLoop" ntqeventloop.html#enterLoop
+"QEventLoop::exec" ntqeventloop.html#exec
+"QEventLoop::exit" ntqeventloop.html#exit
+"QEventLoop::exitLoop" ntqeventloop.html#exitLoop
+"QEventLoop::hasPendingEvents" ntqeventloop.html#hasPendingEvents
+"QEventLoop::loopLevel" ntqeventloop.html#loopLevel
+"QEventLoop::processEvents" ntqeventloop.html#processEvents
+"QEventLoop::registerSocketNotifier" ntqeventloop.html#registerSocketNotifier
+"QEventLoop::setSocketNotifierPending" ntqeventloop.html#setSocketNotifierPending
+"QEventLoop::timeToWait" ntqeventloop.html#timeToWait
+"QEventLoop::unregisterSocketNotifier" ntqeventloop.html#unregisterSocketNotifier
+"QEventLoop::wakeUp" ntqeventloop.html#wakeUp
+"QEventLoop::~QEventLoop" ntqeventloop.html#~QEventLoop
+"QFile" ntqfile.html
+"QFile::DecoderFn" ntqfile.html#DecoderFn
+"QFile::EncoderFn" ntqfile.html#EncoderFn
+"QFile::at" ntqfile.html#at
+"QFile::atEnd" ntqfile.html#atEnd
+"QFile::close" ntqfile.html#close
+"QFile::decodeName" ntqfile.html#decodeName
+"QFile::encodeName" ntqfile.html#encodeName
+"QFile::errorString" ntqfile.html#errorString
+"QFile::exists" ntqfile.html#exists
+"QFile::flush" ntqfile.html#flush
+"QFile::getch" ntqfile.html#getch
+"QFile::handle" ntqfile.html#handle
+"QFile::name" ntqfile.html#name
+"QFile::open" ntqfile.html#open
+"QFile::putch" ntqfile.html#putch
+"QFile::readLine" ntqfile.html#readLine
+"QFile::remove" ntqfile.html#remove
+"QFile::setDecodingFunction" ntqfile.html#setDecodingFunction
+"QFile::setEncodingFunction" ntqfile.html#setEncodingFunction
+"QFile::setErrorString" ntqfile.html#setErrorString
+"QFile::setName" ntqfile.html#setName
+"QFile::size" ntqfile.html#size
+"QFile::ungetch" ntqfile.html#ungetch
+"QFile::writeBlock" ntqfile.html#writeBlock
+"QFile::~QFile" ntqfile.html#~QFile
+"QFileDialog" ntqfiledialog.html
+"QFileDialog::Mode" ntqfiledialog.html#Mode
+"QFileDialog::PreviewMode" ntqfiledialog.html#PreviewMode
+"QFileDialog::ViewMode" ntqfiledialog.html#ViewMode
+"QFileDialog::addFilter" ntqfiledialog.html#addFilter
+"QFileDialog::addLeftWidget" ntqfiledialog.html#addLeftWidget
+"QFileDialog::addRightWidget" ntqfiledialog.html#addRightWidget
+"QFileDialog::addToolButton" ntqfiledialog.html#addToolButton
+"QFileDialog::addWidgets" ntqfiledialog.html#addWidgets
+"QFileDialog::contentsPreview" ntqfiledialog.html#contentsPreview-prop
+"QFileDialog::dir" ntqfiledialog.html#dir
+"QFileDialog::dirEntered" ntqfiledialog.html#dirEntered
+"QFileDialog::dirPath" ntqfiledialog.html#dirPath
+"QFileDialog::dirPath" ntqfiledialog.html#dirPath-prop
+"QFileDialog::fileHighlighted" ntqfiledialog.html#fileHighlighted
+"QFileDialog::fileNameEditDone" ntqfiledialog.html#fileNameEditDone
+"QFileDialog::fileSelected" ntqfiledialog.html#fileSelected
+"QFileDialog::filesSelected" ntqfiledialog.html#filesSelected
+"QFileDialog::filterSelected" ntqfiledialog.html#filterSelected
+"QFileDialog::fixupNameEdit" ntqfiledialog.html#fixupNameEdit
+"QFileDialog::getExistingDirectory" ntqfiledialog.html#getExistingDirectory
+"QFileDialog::getOpenFileName" ntqfiledialog.html#getOpenFileName
+"QFileDialog::getOpenFileNames" ntqfiledialog.html#getOpenFileNames
+"QFileDialog::getSaveFileName" ntqfiledialog.html#getSaveFileName
+"QFileDialog::iconProvider" ntqfiledialog.html#iconProvider
+"QFileDialog::infoPreview" ntqfiledialog.html#infoPreview-prop
+"QFileDialog::isContentsPreviewEnabled" ntqfiledialog.html#isContentsPreviewEnabled
+"QFileDialog::isInfoPreviewEnabled" ntqfiledialog.html#isInfoPreviewEnabled
+"QFileDialog::mode" ntqfiledialog.html#mode
+"QFileDialog::mode" ntqfiledialog.html#mode-prop
+"QFileDialog::modeButtonsDestroyed" ntqfiledialog.html#modeButtonsDestroyed
+"QFileDialog::previewMode" ntqfiledialog.html#previewMode
+"QFileDialog::previewMode" ntqfiledialog.html#previewMode-prop
+"QFileDialog::rereadDir" ntqfiledialog.html#rereadDir
+"QFileDialog::resortDir" ntqfiledialog.html#resortDir
+"QFileDialog::selectAll" ntqfiledialog.html#selectAll
+"QFileDialog::selectDirectoryOrFile" ntqfiledialog.html#selectDirectoryOrFile
+"QFileDialog::selectedFile" ntqfiledialog.html#selectedFile
+"QFileDialog::selectedFile" ntqfiledialog.html#selectedFile-prop
+"QFileDialog::selectedFiles" ntqfiledialog.html#selectedFiles
+"QFileDialog::selectedFiles" ntqfiledialog.html#selectedFiles-prop
+"QFileDialog::selectedFilter" ntqfiledialog.html#selectedFilter
+"QFileDialog::selectedFilter" ntqfiledialog.html#selectedFilter-prop
+"QFileDialog::setContentsPreview" ntqfiledialog.html#setContentsPreview
+"QFileDialog::setContentsPreviewEnabled" ntqfiledialog.html#setContentsPreviewEnabled
+"QFileDialog::setDir" ntqfiledialog.html#setDir
+"QFileDialog::setFilter" ntqfiledialog.html#setFilter
+"QFileDialog::setFilters" ntqfiledialog.html#setFilters
+"QFileDialog::setIconProvider" ntqfiledialog.html#setIconProvider
+"QFileDialog::setInfoPreview" ntqfiledialog.html#setInfoPreview
+"QFileDialog::setInfoPreviewEnabled" ntqfiledialog.html#setInfoPreviewEnabled
+"QFileDialog::setMode" ntqfiledialog.html#setMode
+"QFileDialog::setPreviewMode" ntqfiledialog.html#setPreviewMode
+"QFileDialog::setSelectedFilter" ntqfiledialog.html#setSelectedFilter
+"QFileDialog::setSelection" ntqfiledialog.html#setSelection
+"QFileDialog::setShowHiddenFiles" ntqfiledialog.html#setShowHiddenFiles
+"QFileDialog::setUrl" ntqfiledialog.html#setUrl
+"QFileDialog::setViewMode" ntqfiledialog.html#setViewMode
+"QFileDialog::showHiddenFiles" ntqfiledialog.html#showHiddenFiles
+"QFileDialog::showHiddenFiles" ntqfiledialog.html#showHiddenFiles-prop
+"QFileDialog::stopCopy" ntqfiledialog.html#stopCopy
+"QFileDialog::updateFileNameEdit" ntqfiledialog.html#updateFileNameEdit
+"QFileDialog::updateGeometries" ntqfiledialog.html#updateGeometries
+"QFileDialog::url" ntqfiledialog.html#url
+"QFileDialog::viewMode" ntqfiledialog.html#viewMode
+"QFileDialog::viewMode" ntqfiledialog.html#viewMode-prop
+"QFileDialog::~QFileDialog" ntqfiledialog.html#~QFileDialog
 "QFileIconProvider" qfileiconprovider.html
 "QFileIconProvider::pixmap" qfileiconprovider.html#pixmap
-"QFileInfo" qfileinfo.html
-"QFileInfo::PermissionSpec" qfileinfo.html#PermissionSpec
-"QFileInfo::absFilePath" qfileinfo.html#absFilePath
-"QFileInfo::baseName" qfileinfo.html#baseName
-"QFileInfo::caching" qfileinfo.html#caching
-"QFileInfo::convertToAbs" qfileinfo.html#convertToAbs
-"QFileInfo::created" qfileinfo.html#created
-"QFileInfo::dir" qfileinfo.html#dir
-"QFileInfo::dirPath" qfileinfo.html#dirPath
-"QFileInfo::exists" qfileinfo.html#exists
-"QFileInfo::extension" qfileinfo.html#extension
-"QFileInfo::fileName" qfileinfo.html#fileName
-"QFileInfo::filePath" qfileinfo.html#filePath
-"QFileInfo::group" qfileinfo.html#group
-"QFileInfo::groupId" qfileinfo.html#groupId
-"QFileInfo::isDir" qfileinfo.html#isDir
-"QFileInfo::isExecutable" qfileinfo.html#isExecutable
-"QFileInfo::isFile" qfileinfo.html#isFile
-"QFileInfo::isHidden" qfileinfo.html#isHidden
-"QFileInfo::isReadable" qfileinfo.html#isReadable
-"QFileInfo::isRelative" qfileinfo.html#isRelative
-"QFileInfo::isSymLink" qfileinfo.html#isSymLink
-"QFileInfo::isWritable" qfileinfo.html#isWritable
-"QFileInfo::lastModified" qfileinfo.html#lastModified
-"QFileInfo::lastRead" qfileinfo.html#lastRead
-"QFileInfo::operator=" qfileinfo.html#operator-eq
-"QFileInfo::owner" qfileinfo.html#owner
-"QFileInfo::ownerId" qfileinfo.html#ownerId
-"QFileInfo::permission" qfileinfo.html#permission
-"QFileInfo::readLink" qfileinfo.html#readLink
-"QFileInfo::refresh" qfileinfo.html#refresh
-"QFileInfo::setCaching" qfileinfo.html#setCaching
-"QFileInfo::setFile" qfileinfo.html#setFile
-"QFileInfo::size" qfileinfo.html#size
-"QFileInfo::~QFileInfo" qfileinfo.html#~QFileInfo
+"QFileInfo" ntqfileinfo.html
+"QFileInfo::PermissionSpec" ntqfileinfo.html#PermissionSpec
+"QFileInfo::absFilePath" ntqfileinfo.html#absFilePath
+"QFileInfo::baseName" ntqfileinfo.html#baseName
+"QFileInfo::caching" ntqfileinfo.html#caching
+"QFileInfo::convertToAbs" ntqfileinfo.html#convertToAbs
+"QFileInfo::created" ntqfileinfo.html#created
+"QFileInfo::dir" ntqfileinfo.html#dir
+"QFileInfo::dirPath" ntqfileinfo.html#dirPath
+"QFileInfo::exists" ntqfileinfo.html#exists
+"QFileInfo::extension" ntqfileinfo.html#extension
+"QFileInfo::fileName" ntqfileinfo.html#fileName
+"QFileInfo::filePath" ntqfileinfo.html#filePath
+"QFileInfo::group" ntqfileinfo.html#group
+"QFileInfo::groupId" ntqfileinfo.html#groupId
+"QFileInfo::isDir" ntqfileinfo.html#isDir
+"QFileInfo::isExecutable" ntqfileinfo.html#isExecutable
+"QFileInfo::isFile" ntqfileinfo.html#isFile
+"QFileInfo::isHidden" ntqfileinfo.html#isHidden
+"QFileInfo::isReadable" ntqfileinfo.html#isReadable
+"QFileInfo::isRelative" ntqfileinfo.html#isRelative
+"QFileInfo::isSymLink" ntqfileinfo.html#isSymLink
+"QFileInfo::isWritable" ntqfileinfo.html#isWritable
+"QFileInfo::lastModified" ntqfileinfo.html#lastModified
+"QFileInfo::lastRead" ntqfileinfo.html#lastRead
+"QFileInfo::operator=" ntqfileinfo.html#operator-eq
+"QFileInfo::owner" ntqfileinfo.html#owner
+"QFileInfo::ownerId" ntqfileinfo.html#ownerId
+"QFileInfo::permission" ntqfileinfo.html#permission
+"QFileInfo::readLink" ntqfileinfo.html#readLink
+"QFileInfo::refresh" ntqfileinfo.html#refresh
+"QFileInfo::setCaching" ntqfileinfo.html#setCaching
+"QFileInfo::setFile" ntqfileinfo.html#setFile
+"QFileInfo::size" ntqfileinfo.html#size
+"QFileInfo::~QFileInfo" ntqfileinfo.html#~QFileInfo
 "QFilePreview" qfilepreview.html
 "QFilePreview::previewUrl" qfilepreview.html#previewUrl
-"QFocusData" qfocusdata.html
-"QFocusData::count" qfocusdata.html#count
-"QFocusData::first" qfocusdata.html#first
-"QFocusData::focusWidget" qfocusdata.html#focusWidget
-"QFocusData::home" qfocusdata.html#home
-"QFocusData::last" qfocusdata.html#last
-"QFocusData::next" qfocusdata.html#next
-"QFocusData::prev" qfocusdata.html#prev
+"QFocusData" ntqfocusdata.html
+"QFocusData::count" ntqfocusdata.html#count
+"QFocusData::first" ntqfocusdata.html#first
+"QFocusData::focusWidget" ntqfocusdata.html#focusWidget
+"QFocusData::home" ntqfocusdata.html#home
+"QFocusData::last" ntqfocusdata.html#last
+"QFocusData::next" ntqfocusdata.html#next
+"QFocusData::prev" ntqfocusdata.html#prev
 "QFocusEvent" qfocusevent.html
 "QFocusEvent::Reason" qfocusevent.html#Reason
 "QFocusEvent::gotFocus" qfocusevent.html#gotFocus
@@ -2211,236 +2211,236 @@
 "QFocusEvent::reason" qfocusevent.html#reason
 "QFocusEvent::resetReason" qfocusevent.html#resetReason
 "QFocusEvent::setReason" qfocusevent.html#setReason
-"QFont" qfont.html
-"QFont::Script" qfont.html#Script
-"QFont::Stretch" qfont.html#Stretch
-"QFont::StyleHint" qfont.html#StyleHint
-"QFont::StyleStrategy" qfont.html#StyleStrategy
-"QFont::Weight" qfont.html#Weight
-"QFont::bold" qfont.html#bold
-"QFont::deciPointSize" qfont.html#deciPointSize
-"QFont::defaultFamily" qfont.html#defaultFamily
-"QFont::dirty" qfont.html#dirty
-"QFont::exactMatch" qfont.html#exactMatch
-"QFont::family" qfont.html#family
-"QFont::fixedPitch" qfont.html#fixedPitch
-"QFont::fromString" qfont.html#fromString
-"QFont::handle" qfont.html#handle
-"QFont::insertSubstitution" qfont.html#insertSubstitution
-"QFont::insertSubstitutions" qfont.html#insertSubstitutions
-"QFont::isCopyOf" qfont.html#isCopyOf
-"QFont::italic" qfont.html#italic
-"QFont::key" qfont.html#key
-"QFont::lastResortFamily" qfont.html#lastResortFamily
-"QFont::lastResortFont" qfont.html#lastResortFont
-"QFont::operator!=" qfont.html#operator!-eq
-"QFont::operator=" qfont.html#operator-eq
-"QFont::operator==" qfont.html#operator-eq-eq
-"QFont::overline" qfont.html#overline
-"QFont::pixelSize" qfont.html#pixelSize
-"QFont::pointSize" qfont.html#pointSize
-"QFont::pointSizeFloat" qfont.html#pointSizeFloat
-"QFont::qwsRenderToDisk" qfont.html#qwsRenderToDisk
-"QFont::rawMode" qfont.html#rawMode
-"QFont::rawName" qfont.html#rawName
-"QFont::removeSubstitution" qfont.html#removeSubstitution
-"QFont::resolve" qfont.html#resolve
-"QFont::setBold" qfont.html#setBold
-"QFont::setFamily" qfont.html#setFamily
-"QFont::setFixedPitch" qfont.html#setFixedPitch
-"QFont::setItalic" qfont.html#setItalic
-"QFont::setOverline" qfont.html#setOverline
-"QFont::setPixelSize" qfont.html#setPixelSize
-"QFont::setPointSize" qfont.html#setPointSize
-"QFont::setPointSizeFloat" qfont.html#setPointSizeFloat
-"QFont::setRawMode" qfont.html#setRawMode
-"QFont::setRawName" qfont.html#setRawName
-"QFont::setStretch" qfont.html#setStretch
-"QFont::setStrikeOut" qfont.html#setStrikeOut
-"QFont::setStyleHint" qfont.html#setStyleHint
-"QFont::setStyleStrategy" qfont.html#setStyleStrategy
-"QFont::setUnderline" qfont.html#setUnderline
-"QFont::setWeight" qfont.html#setWeight
-"QFont::stretch" qfont.html#stretch
-"QFont::strikeOut" qfont.html#strikeOut
-"QFont::styleHint" qfont.html#styleHint
-"QFont::styleStrategy" qfont.html#styleStrategy
-"QFont::substitute" qfont.html#substitute
-"QFont::substitutes" qfont.html#substitutes
-"QFont::substitutions" qfont.html#substitutions
-"QFont::toString" qfont.html#toString
-"QFont::underline" qfont.html#underline
-"QFont::weight" qfont.html#weight
-"QFont::~QFont" qfont.html#~QFont
-"QFontDatabase" qfontdatabase.html
-"QFontDatabase::bold" qfontdatabase.html#bold
-"QFontDatabase::families" qfontdatabase.html#families
-"QFontDatabase::font" qfontdatabase.html#font
-"QFontDatabase::isBitmapScalable" qfontdatabase.html#isBitmapScalable
-"QFontDatabase::isFixedPitch" qfontdatabase.html#isFixedPitch
-"QFontDatabase::isScalable" qfontdatabase.html#isScalable
-"QFontDatabase::isSmoothlyScalable" qfontdatabase.html#isSmoothlyScalable
-"QFontDatabase::italic" qfontdatabase.html#italic
-"QFontDatabase::pointSizes" qfontdatabase.html#pointSizes
-"QFontDatabase::scriptName" qfontdatabase.html#scriptName
-"QFontDatabase::scriptSample" qfontdatabase.html#scriptSample
-"QFontDatabase::smoothSizes" qfontdatabase.html#smoothSizes
-"QFontDatabase::standardSizes" qfontdatabase.html#standardSizes
-"QFontDatabase::styleString" qfontdatabase.html#styleString
-"QFontDatabase::styles" qfontdatabase.html#styles
-"QFontDatabase::weight" qfontdatabase.html#weight
-"QFontDialog" qfontdialog.html
-"QFontDialog::getFont" qfontdialog.html#getFont
-"QFontInfo" qfontinfo.html
-"QFontInfo::bold" qfontinfo.html#bold
-"QFontInfo::exactMatch" qfontinfo.html#exactMatch
-"QFontInfo::family" qfontinfo.html#family
-"QFontInfo::fixedPitch" qfontinfo.html#fixedPitch
-"QFontInfo::italic" qfontinfo.html#italic
-"QFontInfo::operator=" qfontinfo.html#operator-eq
-"QFontInfo::pixelSize" qfontinfo.html#pixelSize
-"QFontInfo::pointSize" qfontinfo.html#pointSize
-"QFontInfo::rawMode" qfontinfo.html#rawMode
-"QFontInfo::styleHint" qfontinfo.html#styleHint
-"QFontInfo::weight" qfontinfo.html#weight
-"QFontInfo::~QFontInfo" qfontinfo.html#~QFontInfo
+"QFont" ntqfont.html
+"QFont::Script" ntqfont.html#Script
+"QFont::Stretch" ntqfont.html#Stretch
+"QFont::StyleHint" ntqfont.html#StyleHint
+"QFont::StyleStrategy" ntqfont.html#StyleStrategy
+"QFont::Weight" ntqfont.html#Weight
+"QFont::bold" ntqfont.html#bold
+"QFont::deciPointSize" ntqfont.html#deciPointSize
+"QFont::defaultFamily" ntqfont.html#defaultFamily
+"QFont::dirty" ntqfont.html#dirty
+"QFont::exactMatch" ntqfont.html#exactMatch
+"QFont::family" ntqfont.html#family
+"QFont::fixedPitch" ntqfont.html#fixedPitch
+"QFont::fromString" ntqfont.html#fromString
+"QFont::handle" ntqfont.html#handle
+"QFont::insertSubstitution" ntqfont.html#insertSubstitution
+"QFont::insertSubstitutions" ntqfont.html#insertSubstitutions
+"QFont::isCopyOf" ntqfont.html#isCopyOf
+"QFont::italic" ntqfont.html#italic
+"QFont::key" ntqfont.html#key
+"QFont::lastResortFamily" ntqfont.html#lastResortFamily
+"QFont::lastResortFont" ntqfont.html#lastResortFont
+"QFont::operator!=" ntqfont.html#operator!-eq
+"QFont::operator=" ntqfont.html#operator-eq
+"QFont::operator==" ntqfont.html#operator-eq-eq
+"QFont::overline" ntqfont.html#overline
+"QFont::pixelSize" ntqfont.html#pixelSize
+"QFont::pointSize" ntqfont.html#pointSize
+"QFont::pointSizeFloat" ntqfont.html#pointSizeFloat
+"QFont::qwsRenderToDisk" ntqfont.html#qwsRenderToDisk
+"QFont::rawMode" ntqfont.html#rawMode
+"QFont::rawName" ntqfont.html#rawName
+"QFont::removeSubstitution" ntqfont.html#removeSubstitution
+"QFont::resolve" ntqfont.html#resolve
+"QFont::setBold" ntqfont.html#setBold
+"QFont::setFamily" ntqfont.html#setFamily
+"QFont::setFixedPitch" ntqfont.html#setFixedPitch
+"QFont::setItalic" ntqfont.html#setItalic
+"QFont::setOverline" ntqfont.html#setOverline
+"QFont::setPixelSize" ntqfont.html#setPixelSize
+"QFont::setPointSize" ntqfont.html#setPointSize
+"QFont::setPointSizeFloat" ntqfont.html#setPointSizeFloat
+"QFont::setRawMode" ntqfont.html#setRawMode
+"QFont::setRawName" ntqfont.html#setRawName
+"QFont::setStretch" ntqfont.html#setStretch
+"QFont::setStrikeOut" ntqfont.html#setStrikeOut
+"QFont::setStyleHint" ntqfont.html#setStyleHint
+"QFont::setStyleStrategy" ntqfont.html#setStyleStrategy
+"QFont::setUnderline" ntqfont.html#setUnderline
+"QFont::setWeight" ntqfont.html#setWeight
+"QFont::stretch" ntqfont.html#stretch
+"QFont::strikeOut" ntqfont.html#strikeOut
+"QFont::styleHint" ntqfont.html#styleHint
+"QFont::styleStrategy" ntqfont.html#styleStrategy
+"QFont::substitute" ntqfont.html#substitute
+"QFont::substitutes" ntqfont.html#substitutes
+"QFont::substitutions" ntqfont.html#substitutions
+"QFont::toString" ntqfont.html#toString
+"QFont::underline" ntqfont.html#underline
+"QFont::weight" ntqfont.html#weight
+"QFont::~QFont" ntqfont.html#~QFont
+"QFontDatabase" ntqfontdatabase.html
+"QFontDatabase::bold" ntqfontdatabase.html#bold
+"QFontDatabase::families" ntqfontdatabase.html#families
+"QFontDatabase::font" ntqfontdatabase.html#font
+"QFontDatabase::isBitmapScalable" ntqfontdatabase.html#isBitmapScalable
+"QFontDatabase::isFixedPitch" ntqfontdatabase.html#isFixedPitch
+"QFontDatabase::isScalable" ntqfontdatabase.html#isScalable
+"QFontDatabase::isSmoothlyScalable" ntqfontdatabase.html#isSmoothlyScalable
+"QFontDatabase::italic" ntqfontdatabase.html#italic
+"QFontDatabase::pointSizes" ntqfontdatabase.html#pointSizes
+"QFontDatabase::scriptName" ntqfontdatabase.html#scriptName
+"QFontDatabase::scriptSample" ntqfontdatabase.html#scriptSample
+"QFontDatabase::smoothSizes" ntqfontdatabase.html#smoothSizes
+"QFontDatabase::standardSizes" ntqfontdatabase.html#standardSizes
+"QFontDatabase::styleString" ntqfontdatabase.html#styleString
+"QFontDatabase::styles" ntqfontdatabase.html#styles
+"QFontDatabase::weight" ntqfontdatabase.html#weight
+"QFontDialog" ntqfontdialog.html
+"QFontDialog::getFont" ntqfontdialog.html#getFont
+"QFontInfo" ntqfontinfo.html
+"QFontInfo::bold" ntqfontinfo.html#bold
+"QFontInfo::exactMatch" ntqfontinfo.html#exactMatch
+"QFontInfo::family" ntqfontinfo.html#family
+"QFontInfo::fixedPitch" ntqfontinfo.html#fixedPitch
+"QFontInfo::italic" ntqfontinfo.html#italic
+"QFontInfo::operator=" ntqfontinfo.html#operator-eq
+"QFontInfo::pixelSize" ntqfontinfo.html#pixelSize
+"QFontInfo::pointSize" ntqfontinfo.html#pointSize
+"QFontInfo::rawMode" ntqfontinfo.html#rawMode
+"QFontInfo::styleHint" ntqfontinfo.html#styleHint
+"QFontInfo::weight" ntqfontinfo.html#weight
+"QFontInfo::~QFontInfo" ntqfontinfo.html#~QFontInfo
 "QFontManager" qfontmanager.html
 "QFontManager::cleanup" qfontmanager.html#cleanup
 "QFontManager::get" qfontmanager.html#get
 "QFontManager::initialize" qfontmanager.html#initialize
 "QFontManager::~QFontManager" qfontmanager.html#~QFontManager
-"QFontMetrics" qfontmetrics.html
-"QFontMetrics::ascent" qfontmetrics.html#ascent
-"QFontMetrics::boundingRect" qfontmetrics.html#boundingRect
-"QFontMetrics::charWidth" qfontmetrics.html#charWidth
-"QFontMetrics::descent" qfontmetrics.html#descent
-"QFontMetrics::height" qfontmetrics.html#height
-"QFontMetrics::inFont" qfontmetrics.html#inFont
-"QFontMetrics::leading" qfontmetrics.html#leading
-"QFontMetrics::leftBearing" qfontmetrics.html#leftBearing
-"QFontMetrics::lineSpacing" qfontmetrics.html#lineSpacing
-"QFontMetrics::lineWidth" qfontmetrics.html#lineWidth
-"QFontMetrics::maxWidth" qfontmetrics.html#maxWidth
-"QFontMetrics::minLeftBearing" qfontmetrics.html#minLeftBearing
-"QFontMetrics::minRightBearing" qfontmetrics.html#minRightBearing
-"QFontMetrics::operator=" qfontmetrics.html#operator-eq
-"QFontMetrics::overlinePos" qfontmetrics.html#overlinePos
-"QFontMetrics::rightBearing" qfontmetrics.html#rightBearing
-"QFontMetrics::size" qfontmetrics.html#size
-"QFontMetrics::strikeOutPos" qfontmetrics.html#strikeOutPos
-"QFontMetrics::underlinePos" qfontmetrics.html#underlinePos
-"QFontMetrics::width" qfontmetrics.html#width
-"QFontMetrics::~QFontMetrics" qfontmetrics.html#~QFontMetrics
-"QFrame" qframe.html
-"QFrame::Shadow" qframe.html#Shadow
-"QFrame::Shape" qframe.html#Shape
-"QFrame::contentsRect" qframe.html#contentsRect
-"QFrame::contentsRect" qframe.html#contentsRect-prop
-"QFrame::drawContents" qframe.html#drawContents
-"QFrame::drawFrame" qframe.html#drawFrame
-"QFrame::frameChanged" qframe.html#frameChanged
-"QFrame::frameRect" qframe.html#frameRect
-"QFrame::frameRect" qframe.html#frameRect-prop
-"QFrame::frameShadow" qframe.html#frameShadow
-"QFrame::frameShadow" qframe.html#frameShadow-prop
-"QFrame::frameShape" qframe.html#frameShape
-"QFrame::frameShape" qframe.html#frameShape-prop
-"QFrame::frameStyle" qframe.html#frameStyle
-"QFrame::frameWidth" qframe.html#frameWidth
-"QFrame::frameWidth" qframe.html#frameWidth-prop
-"QFrame::lineWidth" qframe.html#lineWidth
-"QFrame::lineWidth" qframe.html#lineWidth-prop
-"QFrame::margin" qframe.html#margin
-"QFrame::margin" qframe.html#margin-prop
-"QFrame::midLineWidth" qframe.html#midLineWidth
-"QFrame::midLineWidth" qframe.html#midLineWidth-prop
-"QFrame::paintEvent" qframe.html#paintEvent
-"QFrame::resizeEvent" qframe.html#resizeEvent
-"QFrame::setFrameRect" qframe.html#setFrameRect
-"QFrame::setFrameShadow" qframe.html#setFrameShadow
-"QFrame::setFrameShape" qframe.html#setFrameShape
-"QFrame::setFrameStyle" qframe.html#setFrameStyle
-"QFrame::setLineWidth" qframe.html#setLineWidth
-"QFrame::setMargin" qframe.html#setMargin
-"QFrame::setMidLineWidth" qframe.html#setMidLineWidth
-"QFtp" qftp.html
-"QFtp::Command" qftp.html#Command
-"QFtp::Error" qftp.html#Error
-"QFtp::State" qftp.html#State
-"QFtp::abort" qftp.html#abort
-"QFtp::bytesAvailable" qftp.html#bytesAvailable
-"QFtp::cd" qftp.html#cd
-"QFtp::clearPendingCommands" qftp.html#clearPendingCommands
-"QFtp::close" qftp.html#close
-"QFtp::commandFinished" qftp.html#commandFinished
-"QFtp::commandStarted" qftp.html#commandStarted
-"QFtp::connectToHost" qftp.html#connectToHost
-"QFtp::currentCommand" qftp.html#currentCommand
-"QFtp::currentDevice" qftp.html#currentDevice
-"QFtp::currentId" qftp.html#currentId
-"QFtp::dataTransferProgress" qftp.html#dataTransferProgress
-"QFtp::done" qftp.html#done
-"QFtp::error" qftp.html#error
-"QFtp::errorString" qftp.html#errorString
-"QFtp::get" qftp.html#get
-"QFtp::hasPendingCommands" qftp.html#hasPendingCommands
-"QFtp::list" qftp.html#list
-"QFtp::listInfo" qftp.html#listInfo
-"QFtp::login" qftp.html#login
-"QFtp::mkdir" qftp.html#mkdir
-"QFtp::put" qftp.html#put
-"QFtp::rawCommand" qftp.html#rawCommand
-"QFtp::rawCommandReply" qftp.html#rawCommandReply
-"QFtp::readAll" qftp.html#readAll
-"QFtp::readBlock" qftp.html#readBlock
-"QFtp::readyRead" qftp.html#readyRead
-"QFtp::remove" qftp.html#remove
-"QFtp::rename" qftp.html#rename
-"QFtp::rmdir" qftp.html#rmdir
-"QFtp::state" qftp.html#state
-"QFtp::stateChanged" qftp.html#stateChanged
-"QFtp::~QFtp" qftp.html#~QFtp
-"QGArray::assign" qgarray.html#assign
-"QGArray::at" qgarray.html#at
-"QGArray::bsearch" qgarray.html#bsearch
-"QGArray::contains" qgarray.html#contains
-"QGArray::data" qgarray.html#data
-"QGArray::deleteData" qgarray.html#deleteData
-"QGArray::detach" qgarray.html#detach
-"QGArray::duplicate" qgarray.html#duplicate
-"QGArray::fill" qgarray.html#fill
-"QGArray::find" qgarray.html#find
-"QGArray::isEqual" qgarray.html#isEqual
-"QGArray::msg_index" qgarray.html#msg_index
-"QGArray::newData" qgarray.html#newData
-"QGArray::nrefs" qgarray.html#nrefs
-"QGArray::operator=" qgarray.html#operator-eq
-"QGArray::resetRawData" qgarray.html#resetRawData
-"QGArray::resize" qgarray.html#resize
-"QGArray::setExpand" qgarray.html#setExpand
-"QGArray::setRawData" qgarray.html#setRawData
-"QGArray::setSharedBlock" qgarray.html#setSharedBlock
-"QGArray::sharedBlock" qgarray.html#sharedBlock
-"QGArray::size" qgarray.html#size
-"QGArray::sort" qgarray.html#sort
-"QGArray::store" qgarray.html#store
-"QGArray::~QGArray" qgarray.html#~QGArray
-"QGCache::clear" qgcache.html#clear
-"QGCache::count" qgcache.html#count
-"QGCache::find_other" qgcache.html#find_other
-"QGCache::find_string" qgcache.html#find_string
-"QGCache::insert_string" qgcache.html#insert_string
-"QGCache::makeRoomFor" qgcache.html#makeRoomFor
-"QGCache::maxCost" qgcache.html#maxCost
-"QGCache::operator=" qgcache.html#operator-eq
-"QGCache::remove_string" qgcache.html#remove_string
-"QGCache::setMaxCost" qgcache.html#setMaxCost
-"QGCache::size" qgcache.html#size
-"QGCache::statistics" qgcache.html#statistics
-"QGCache::take_other" qgcache.html#take_other
-"QGCache::take_string" qgcache.html#take_string
-"QGCache::totalCost" qgcache.html#totalCost
-"QGCache::~QGCache" qgcache.html#~QGCache
+"QFontMetrics" ntqfontmetrics.html
+"QFontMetrics::ascent" ntqfontmetrics.html#ascent
+"QFontMetrics::boundingRect" ntqfontmetrics.html#boundingRect
+"QFontMetrics::charWidth" ntqfontmetrics.html#charWidth
+"QFontMetrics::descent" ntqfontmetrics.html#descent
+"QFontMetrics::height" ntqfontmetrics.html#height
+"QFontMetrics::inFont" ntqfontmetrics.html#inFont
+"QFontMetrics::leading" ntqfontmetrics.html#leading
+"QFontMetrics::leftBearing" ntqfontmetrics.html#leftBearing
+"QFontMetrics::lineSpacing" ntqfontmetrics.html#lineSpacing
+"QFontMetrics::lineWidth" ntqfontmetrics.html#lineWidth
+"QFontMetrics::maxWidth" ntqfontmetrics.html#maxWidth
+"QFontMetrics::minLeftBearing" ntqfontmetrics.html#minLeftBearing
+"QFontMetrics::minRightBearing" ntqfontmetrics.html#minRightBearing
+"QFontMetrics::operator=" ntqfontmetrics.html#operator-eq
+"QFontMetrics::overlinePos" ntqfontmetrics.html#overlinePos
+"QFontMetrics::rightBearing" ntqfontmetrics.html#rightBearing
+"QFontMetrics::size" ntqfontmetrics.html#size
+"QFontMetrics::strikeOutPos" ntqfontmetrics.html#strikeOutPos
+"QFontMetrics::underlinePos" ntqfontmetrics.html#underlinePos
+"QFontMetrics::width" ntqfontmetrics.html#width
+"QFontMetrics::~QFontMetrics" ntqfontmetrics.html#~QFontMetrics
+"QFrame" ntqframe.html
+"QFrame::Shadow" ntqframe.html#Shadow
+"QFrame::Shape" ntqframe.html#Shape
+"QFrame::contentsRect" ntqframe.html#contentsRect
+"QFrame::contentsRect" ntqframe.html#contentsRect-prop
+"QFrame::drawContents" ntqframe.html#drawContents
+"QFrame::drawFrame" ntqframe.html#drawFrame
+"QFrame::frameChanged" ntqframe.html#frameChanged
+"QFrame::frameRect" ntqframe.html#frameRect
+"QFrame::frameRect" ntqframe.html#frameRect-prop
+"QFrame::frameShadow" ntqframe.html#frameShadow
+"QFrame::frameShadow" ntqframe.html#frameShadow-prop
+"QFrame::frameShape" ntqframe.html#frameShape
+"QFrame::frameShape" ntqframe.html#frameShape-prop
+"QFrame::frameStyle" ntqframe.html#frameStyle
+"QFrame::frameWidth" ntqframe.html#frameWidth
+"QFrame::frameWidth" ntqframe.html#frameWidth-prop
+"QFrame::lineWidth" ntqframe.html#lineWidth
+"QFrame::lineWidth" ntqframe.html#lineWidth-prop
+"QFrame::margin" ntqframe.html#margin
+"QFrame::margin" ntqframe.html#margin-prop
+"QFrame::midLineWidth" ntqframe.html#midLineWidth
+"QFrame::midLineWidth" ntqframe.html#midLineWidth-prop
+"QFrame::paintEvent" ntqframe.html#paintEvent
+"QFrame::resizeEvent" ntqframe.html#resizeEvent
+"QFrame::setFrameRect" ntqframe.html#setFrameRect
+"QFrame::setFrameShadow" ntqframe.html#setFrameShadow
+"QFrame::setFrameShape" ntqframe.html#setFrameShape
+"QFrame::setFrameStyle" ntqframe.html#setFrameStyle
+"QFrame::setLineWidth" ntqframe.html#setLineWidth
+"QFrame::setMargin" ntqframe.html#setMargin
+"QFrame::setMidLineWidth" ntqframe.html#setMidLineWidth
+"QFtp" ntqftp.html
+"QFtp::Command" ntqftp.html#Command
+"QFtp::Error" ntqftp.html#Error
+"QFtp::State" ntqftp.html#State
+"QFtp::abort" ntqftp.html#abort
+"QFtp::bytesAvailable" ntqftp.html#bytesAvailable
+"QFtp::cd" ntqftp.html#cd
+"QFtp::clearPendingCommands" ntqftp.html#clearPendingCommands
+"QFtp::close" ntqftp.html#close
+"QFtp::commandFinished" ntqftp.html#commandFinished
+"QFtp::commandStarted" ntqftp.html#commandStarted
+"QFtp::connectToHost" ntqftp.html#connectToHost
+"QFtp::currentCommand" ntqftp.html#currentCommand
+"QFtp::currentDevice" ntqftp.html#currentDevice
+"QFtp::currentId" ntqftp.html#currentId
+"QFtp::dataTransferProgress" ntqftp.html#dataTransferProgress
+"QFtp::done" ntqftp.html#done
+"QFtp::error" ntqftp.html#error
+"QFtp::errorString" ntqftp.html#errorString
+"QFtp::get" ntqftp.html#get
+"QFtp::hasPendingCommands" ntqftp.html#hasPendingCommands
+"QFtp::list" ntqftp.html#list
+"QFtp::listInfo" ntqftp.html#listInfo
+"QFtp::login" ntqftp.html#login
+"QFtp::mkdir" ntqftp.html#mkdir
+"QFtp::put" ntqftp.html#put
+"QFtp::rawCommand" ntqftp.html#rawCommand
+"QFtp::rawCommandReply" ntqftp.html#rawCommandReply
+"QFtp::readAll" ntqftp.html#readAll
+"QFtp::readBlock" ntqftp.html#readBlock
+"QFtp::readyRead" ntqftp.html#readyRead
+"QFtp::remove" ntqftp.html#remove
+"QFtp::rename" ntqftp.html#rename
+"QFtp::rmdir" ntqftp.html#rmdir
+"QFtp::state" ntqftp.html#state
+"QFtp::stateChanged" ntqftp.html#stateChanged
+"QFtp::~QFtp" ntqftp.html#~QFtp
+"QGArray::assign" ntqgarray.html#assign
+"QGArray::at" ntqgarray.html#at
+"QGArray::bsearch" ntqgarray.html#bsearch
+"QGArray::contains" ntqgarray.html#contains
+"QGArray::data" ntqgarray.html#data
+"QGArray::deleteData" ntqgarray.html#deleteData
+"QGArray::detach" ntqgarray.html#detach
+"QGArray::duplicate" ntqgarray.html#duplicate
+"QGArray::fill" ntqgarray.html#fill
+"QGArray::find" ntqgarray.html#find
+"QGArray::isEqual" ntqgarray.html#isEqual
+"QGArray::msg_index" ntqgarray.html#msg_index
+"QGArray::newData" ntqgarray.html#newData
+"QGArray::nrefs" ntqgarray.html#nrefs
+"QGArray::operator=" ntqgarray.html#operator-eq
+"QGArray::resetRawData" ntqgarray.html#resetRawData
+"QGArray::resize" ntqgarray.html#resize
+"QGArray::setExpand" ntqgarray.html#setExpand
+"QGArray::setRawData" ntqgarray.html#setRawData
+"QGArray::setSharedBlock" ntqgarray.html#setSharedBlock
+"QGArray::sharedBlock" ntqgarray.html#sharedBlock
+"QGArray::size" ntqgarray.html#size
+"QGArray::sort" ntqgarray.html#sort
+"QGArray::store" ntqgarray.html#store
+"QGArray::~QGArray" ntqgarray.html#~QGArray
+"QGCache::clear" ntqgcache.html#clear
+"QGCache::count" ntqgcache.html#count
+"QGCache::find_other" ntqgcache.html#find_other
+"QGCache::find_string" ntqgcache.html#find_string
+"QGCache::insert_string" ntqgcache.html#insert_string
+"QGCache::makeRoomFor" ntqgcache.html#makeRoomFor
+"QGCache::maxCost" ntqgcache.html#maxCost
+"QGCache::operator=" ntqgcache.html#operator-eq
+"QGCache::remove_string" ntqgcache.html#remove_string
+"QGCache::setMaxCost" ntqgcache.html#setMaxCost
+"QGCache::size" ntqgcache.html#size
+"QGCache::statistics" ntqgcache.html#statistics
+"QGCache::take_other" ntqgcache.html#take_other
+"QGCache::take_string" ntqgcache.html#take_string
+"QGCache::totalCost" ntqgcache.html#totalCost
+"QGCache::~QGCache" ntqgcache.html#~QGCache
 "QGCacheIterator::atFirst" qgcacheiterator.html#atFirst
 "QGCacheIterator::atLast" qgcacheiterator.html#atLast
 "QGCacheIterator::count" qgcacheiterator.html#count
@@ -2457,40 +2457,40 @@
 "QGCacheIterator::toFirst" qgcacheiterator.html#toFirst
 "QGCacheIterator::toLast" qgcacheiterator.html#toLast
 "QGCacheIterator::~QGCacheIterator" qgcacheiterator.html#~QGCacheIterator
-"QGDict::clear" qgdict.html#clear
-"QGDict::count" qgdict.html#count
-"QGDict::hashKeyAscii" qgdict.html#hashKeyAscii
-"QGDict::hashKeyString" qgdict.html#hashKeyString
-"QGDict::look_string" qgdict.html#look_string
-"QGDict::operator=" qgdict.html#operator-eq
-"QGDict::read" qgdict.html#read
-"QGDict::remove_string" qgdict.html#remove_string
-"QGDict::resize" qgdict.html#resize
-"QGDict::size" qgdict.html#size
-"QGDict::statistics" qgdict.html#statistics
-"QGDict::unlink_common" qgdict.html#unlink_common
-"QGDict::write" qgdict.html#write
-"QGDict::~QGDict" qgdict.html#~QGDict
+"QGDict::clear" ntqgdict.html#clear
+"QGDict::count" ntqgdict.html#count
+"QGDict::hashKeyAscii" ntqgdict.html#hashKeyAscii
+"QGDict::hashKeyString" ntqgdict.html#hashKeyString
+"QGDict::look_string" ntqgdict.html#look_string
+"QGDict::operator=" ntqgdict.html#operator-eq
+"QGDict::read" ntqgdict.html#read
+"QGDict::remove_string" ntqgdict.html#remove_string
+"QGDict::resize" ntqgdict.html#resize
+"QGDict::size" ntqgdict.html#size
+"QGDict::statistics" ntqgdict.html#statistics
+"QGDict::unlink_common" ntqgdict.html#unlink_common
+"QGDict::write" ntqgdict.html#write
+"QGDict::~QGDict" ntqgdict.html#~QGDict
 "QGDictIterator::operator()" qgdictiterator.html#operator()
 "QGDictIterator::operator++" qgdictiterator.html#operator++
 "QGDictIterator::operator+=" qgdictiterator.html#operator+-eq
 "QGDictIterator::operator=" qgdictiterator.html#operator-eq
 "QGDictIterator::toFirst" qgdictiterator.html#toFirst
 "QGDictIterator::~QGDictIterator" qgdictiterator.html#~QGDictIterator
-"QGL" qgl.html
-"QGL::FormatOption" qgl.html#FormatOption
-"QGLColormap" qglcolormap.html
-"QGLColormap::detach" qglcolormap.html#detach
-"QGLColormap::entryColor" qglcolormap.html#entryColor
-"QGLColormap::entryRgb" qglcolormap.html#entryRgb
-"QGLColormap::find" qglcolormap.html#find
-"QGLColormap::findNearest" qglcolormap.html#findNearest
-"QGLColormap::isEmpty" qglcolormap.html#isEmpty
-"QGLColormap::operator=" qglcolormap.html#operator-eq
-"QGLColormap::setEntries" qglcolormap.html#setEntries
-"QGLColormap::setEntry" qglcolormap.html#setEntry
-"QGLColormap::size" qglcolormap.html#size
-"QGLColormap::~QGLColormap" qglcolormap.html#~QGLColormap
+"QGL" ntqgl.html
+"QGL::FormatOption" ntqgl.html#FormatOption
+"QGLColormap" ntqglcolormap.html
+"QGLColormap::detach" ntqglcolormap.html#detach
+"QGLColormap::entryColor" ntqglcolormap.html#entryColor
+"QGLColormap::entryRgb" ntqglcolormap.html#entryRgb
+"QGLColormap::find" ntqglcolormap.html#find
+"QGLColormap::findNearest" ntqglcolormap.html#findNearest
+"QGLColormap::isEmpty" ntqglcolormap.html#isEmpty
+"QGLColormap::operator=" ntqglcolormap.html#operator-eq
+"QGLColormap::setEntries" ntqglcolormap.html#setEntries
+"QGLColormap::setEntry" ntqglcolormap.html#setEntry
+"QGLColormap::size" ntqglcolormap.html#size
+"QGLColormap::~QGLColormap" ntqglcolormap.html#~QGLColormap
 "QGLContext" qglcontext.html
 "QGLContext::chooseContext" qglcontext.html#chooseContext
 "QGLContext::chooseMacVisual" qglcontext.html#chooseMacVisual
@@ -2584,54 +2584,54 @@
 "QGLayoutIterator::next" qglayoutiterator.html#next
 "QGLayoutIterator::takeCurrent" qglayoutiterator.html#takeCurrent
 "QGLayoutIterator::~QGLayoutIterator" qglayoutiterator.html#~QGLayoutIterator
-"QGList::append" qglist.html#append
-"QGList::at" qglist.html#at
-"QGList::cfirst" qglist.html#cfirst
-"QGList::clast" qglist.html#clast
-"QGList::clear" qglist.html#clear
-"QGList::compareItems" qglist.html#compareItems
-"QGList::contains" qglist.html#contains
-"QGList::containsRef" qglist.html#containsRef
-"QGList::count" qglist.html#count
-"QGList::currentNode" qglist.html#currentNode
-"QGList::find" qglist.html#find
-"QGList::findRef" qglist.html#findRef
-"QGList::first" qglist.html#first
-"QGList::get" qglist.html#get
-"QGList::inSort" qglist.html#inSort
-"QGList::insertAt" qglist.html#insertAt
-"QGList::last" qglist.html#last
-"QGList::locate" qglist.html#locate
-"QGList::next" qglist.html#next
-"QGList::operator=" qglist.html#operator-eq
-"QGList::operator==" qglist.html#operator-eq-eq
-"QGList::prepend" qglist.html#prepend
-"QGList::prev" qglist.html#prev
-"QGList::read" qglist.html#read
-"QGList::relinkNode" qglist.html#relinkNode
-"QGList::remove" qglist.html#remove
-"QGList::removeAt" qglist.html#removeAt
-"QGList::removeFirst" qglist.html#removeFirst
-"QGList::removeLast" qglist.html#removeLast
-"QGList::removeNode" qglist.html#removeNode
-"QGList::removeRef" qglist.html#removeRef
-"QGList::replaceAt" qglist.html#replaceAt
-"QGList::sort" qglist.html#sort
-"QGList::take" qglist.html#take
-"QGList::takeAt" qglist.html#takeAt
-"QGList::takeFirst" qglist.html#takeFirst
-"QGList::takeLast" qglist.html#takeLast
-"QGList::takeNode" qglist.html#takeNode
-"QGList::toVector" qglist.html#toVector
-"QGList::unlink" qglist.html#unlink
-"QGList::write" qglist.html#write
-"QGList::~QGList" qglist.html#~QGList
-"QGVector::compareItems" qgvector.html#compareItems
-"QGVector::read" qgvector.html#read
-"QGVector::write" qgvector.html#write
-"QGb18030Codec" qgb18030codec.html
+"QGList::append" ntqglist.html#append
+"QGList::at" ntqglist.html#at
+"QGList::cfirst" ntqglist.html#cfirst
+"QGList::clast" ntqglist.html#clast
+"QGList::clear" ntqglist.html#clear
+"QGList::compareItems" ntqglist.html#compareItems
+"QGList::contains" ntqglist.html#contains
+"QGList::containsRef" ntqglist.html#containsRef
+"QGList::count" ntqglist.html#count
+"QGList::currentNode" ntqglist.html#currentNode
+"QGList::find" ntqglist.html#find
+"QGList::findRef" ntqglist.html#findRef
+"QGList::first" ntqglist.html#first
+"QGList::get" ntqglist.html#get
+"QGList::inSort" ntqglist.html#inSort
+"QGList::insertAt" ntqglist.html#insertAt
+"QGList::last" ntqglist.html#last
+"QGList::locate" ntqglist.html#locate
+"QGList::next" ntqglist.html#next
+"QGList::operator=" ntqglist.html#operator-eq
+"QGList::operator==" ntqglist.html#operator-eq-eq
+"QGList::prepend" ntqglist.html#prepend
+"QGList::prev" ntqglist.html#prev
+"QGList::read" ntqglist.html#read
+"QGList::relinkNode" ntqglist.html#relinkNode
+"QGList::remove" ntqglist.html#remove
+"QGList::removeAt" ntqglist.html#removeAt
+"QGList::removeFirst" ntqglist.html#removeFirst
+"QGList::removeLast" ntqglist.html#removeLast
+"QGList::removeNode" ntqglist.html#removeNode
+"QGList::removeRef" ntqglist.html#removeRef
+"QGList::replaceAt" ntqglist.html#replaceAt
+"QGList::sort" ntqglist.html#sort
+"QGList::take" ntqglist.html#take
+"QGList::takeAt" ntqglist.html#takeAt
+"QGList::takeFirst" ntqglist.html#takeFirst
+"QGList::takeLast" ntqglist.html#takeLast
+"QGList::takeNode" ntqglist.html#takeNode
+"QGList::toVector" ntqglist.html#toVector
+"QGList::unlink" ntqglist.html#unlink
+"QGList::write" ntqglist.html#write
+"QGList::~QGList" ntqglist.html#~QGList
+"QGVector::compareItems" ntqgvector.html#compareItems
+"QGVector::read" ntqgvector.html#read
+"QGVector::write" ntqgvector.html#write
+"QGb18030Codec" ntqgb18030codec.html
 "QGb2312Codec" qgb2312codec.html
-"QGbkCodec" qgbkcodec.html
+"QGbkCodec" ntqgbkcodec.html
 "QGfxDriverFactory" qgfxdriverfactory.html
 "QGfxDriverFactory::create" qgfxdriverfactory.html#create
 "QGfxDriverFactory::keys" qgfxdriverfactory.html#keys
@@ -2640,8 +2640,8 @@
 "QGfxDriverPlugin::keys" qgfxdriverplugin.html#keys
 "QGfxDriverPlugin::~QGfxDriverPlugin" qgfxdriverplugin.html#~QGfxDriverPlugin
 "QGfxRaster::vline" qgfxraster.html#vline
-"QGrid" qgrid.html
-"QGrid::setSpacing" qgrid.html#setSpacing
+"QGrid" ntqgrid.html
+"QGrid::setSpacing" ntqgrid.html#setSpacing
 "QGridLayout" qgridlayout.html
 "QGridLayout::Corner" qgridlayout.html#Corner
 "QGridLayout::add" qgridlayout.html#add
@@ -2676,177 +2676,177 @@
 "QGridLayout::setRowStretch" qgridlayout.html#setRowStretch
 "QGridLayout::sizeHint" qgridlayout.html#sizeHint
 "QGridLayout::~QGridLayout" qgridlayout.html#~QGridLayout
-"QGridView" qgridview.html
-"QGridView::cellGeometry" qgridview.html#cellGeometry
-"QGridView::cellHeight" qgridview.html#cellHeight
-"QGridView::cellHeight" qgridview.html#cellHeight-prop
-"QGridView::cellRect" qgridview.html#cellRect
-"QGridView::cellWidth" qgridview.html#cellWidth
-"QGridView::cellWidth" qgridview.html#cellWidth-prop
-"QGridView::columnAt" qgridview.html#columnAt
-"QGridView::dimensionChange" qgridview.html#dimensionChange
-"QGridView::ensureCellVisible" qgridview.html#ensureCellVisible
-"QGridView::gridSize" qgridview.html#gridSize
-"QGridView::numCols" qgridview.html#numCols
-"QGridView::numCols" qgridview.html#numCols-prop
-"QGridView::numRows" qgridview.html#numRows
-"QGridView::numRows" qgridview.html#numRows-prop
-"QGridView::paintCell" qgridview.html#paintCell
-"QGridView::paintEmptyArea" qgridview.html#paintEmptyArea
-"QGridView::repaintCell" qgridview.html#repaintCell
-"QGridView::rowAt" qgridview.html#rowAt
-"QGridView::setCellHeight" qgridview.html#setCellHeight
-"QGridView::setCellWidth" qgridview.html#setCellWidth
-"QGridView::setNumCols" qgridview.html#setNumCols
-"QGridView::setNumRows" qgridview.html#setNumRows
-"QGridView::updateCell" qgridview.html#updateCell
-"QGridView::~QGridView" qgridview.html#~QGridView
-"QGroupBox" qgroupbox.html
-"QGroupBox::addSpace" qgroupbox.html#addSpace
-"QGroupBox::alignment" qgroupbox.html#alignment
-"QGroupBox::alignment" qgroupbox.html#alignment-prop
-"QGroupBox::checkable" qgroupbox.html#checkable-prop
-"QGroupBox::checked" qgroupbox.html#checked-prop
-"QGroupBox::columns" qgroupbox.html#columns
-"QGroupBox::columns" qgroupbox.html#columns-prop
-"QGroupBox::flat" qgroupbox.html#flat-prop
-"QGroupBox::insideMargin" qgroupbox.html#insideMargin
-"QGroupBox::insideSpacing" qgroupbox.html#insideSpacing
-"QGroupBox::isCheckable" qgroupbox.html#isCheckable
-"QGroupBox::isChecked" qgroupbox.html#isChecked
-"QGroupBox::isFlat" qgroupbox.html#isFlat
-"QGroupBox::orientation" qgroupbox.html#orientation
-"QGroupBox::orientation" qgroupbox.html#orientation-prop
-"QGroupBox::setAlignment" qgroupbox.html#setAlignment
-"QGroupBox::setCheckable" qgroupbox.html#setCheckable
-"QGroupBox::setChecked" qgroupbox.html#setChecked
-"QGroupBox::setColumnLayout" qgroupbox.html#setColumnLayout
-"QGroupBox::setColumns" qgroupbox.html#setColumns
-"QGroupBox::setFlat" qgroupbox.html#setFlat
-"QGroupBox::setInsideMargin" qgroupbox.html#setInsideMargin
-"QGroupBox::setInsideSpacing" qgroupbox.html#setInsideSpacing
-"QGroupBox::setOrientation" qgroupbox.html#setOrientation
-"QGroupBox::setTitle" qgroupbox.html#setTitle
-"QGroupBox::title" qgroupbox.html#title
-"QGroupBox::title" qgroupbox.html#title-prop
-"QGroupBox::toggled" qgroupbox.html#toggled
-"QGroupBox::~QGroupBox" qgroupbox.html#~QGroupBox
-"QGuardedPtr" qguardedptr.html
-"QGuardedPtr::isNull" qguardedptr.html#isNull
-"QGuardedPtr::operator T *" qguardedptr.html#operator-T-*
-"QGuardedPtr::operator!=" qguardedptr.html#operator!-eq
-"QGuardedPtr::operator*" qguardedptr.html#operator*
-"QGuardedPtr::operator->" qguardedptr.html#operator--gt
-"QGuardedPtr::operator=" qguardedptr.html#operator-eq
-"QGuardedPtr::operator==" qguardedptr.html#operator-eq-eq
-"QGuardedPtr::~QGuardedPtr" qguardedptr.html#~QGuardedPtr
-"QHBox" qhbox.html
-"QHBox::setSpacing" qhbox.html#setSpacing
-"QHBox::setStretchFactor" qhbox.html#setStretchFactor
+"QGridView" ntqgridview.html
+"QGridView::cellGeometry" ntqgridview.html#cellGeometry
+"QGridView::cellHeight" ntqgridview.html#cellHeight
+"QGridView::cellHeight" ntqgridview.html#cellHeight-prop
+"QGridView::cellRect" ntqgridview.html#cellRect
+"QGridView::cellWidth" ntqgridview.html#cellWidth
+"QGridView::cellWidth" ntqgridview.html#cellWidth-prop
+"QGridView::columnAt" ntqgridview.html#columnAt
+"QGridView::dimensionChange" ntqgridview.html#dimensionChange
+"QGridView::ensureCellVisible" ntqgridview.html#ensureCellVisible
+"QGridView::gridSize" ntqgridview.html#gridSize
+"QGridView::numCols" ntqgridview.html#numCols
+"QGridView::numCols" ntqgridview.html#numCols-prop
+"QGridView::numRows" ntqgridview.html#numRows
+"QGridView::numRows" ntqgridview.html#numRows-prop
+"QGridView::paintCell" ntqgridview.html#paintCell
+"QGridView::paintEmptyArea" ntqgridview.html#paintEmptyArea
+"QGridView::repaintCell" ntqgridview.html#repaintCell
+"QGridView::rowAt" ntqgridview.html#rowAt
+"QGridView::setCellHeight" ntqgridview.html#setCellHeight
+"QGridView::setCellWidth" ntqgridview.html#setCellWidth
+"QGridView::setNumCols" ntqgridview.html#setNumCols
+"QGridView::setNumRows" ntqgridview.html#setNumRows
+"QGridView::updateCell" ntqgridview.html#updateCell
+"QGridView::~QGridView" ntqgridview.html#~QGridView
+"QGroupBox" ntqgroupbox.html
+"QGroupBox::addSpace" ntqgroupbox.html#addSpace
+"QGroupBox::alignment" ntqgroupbox.html#alignment
+"QGroupBox::alignment" ntqgroupbox.html#alignment-prop
+"QGroupBox::checkable" ntqgroupbox.html#checkable-prop
+"QGroupBox::checked" ntqgroupbox.html#checked-prop
+"QGroupBox::columns" ntqgroupbox.html#columns
+"QGroupBox::columns" ntqgroupbox.html#columns-prop
+"QGroupBox::flat" ntqgroupbox.html#flat-prop
+"QGroupBox::insideMargin" ntqgroupbox.html#insideMargin
+"QGroupBox::insideSpacing" ntqgroupbox.html#insideSpacing
+"QGroupBox::isCheckable" ntqgroupbox.html#isCheckable
+"QGroupBox::isChecked" ntqgroupbox.html#isChecked
+"QGroupBox::isFlat" ntqgroupbox.html#isFlat
+"QGroupBox::orientation" ntqgroupbox.html#orientation
+"QGroupBox::orientation" ntqgroupbox.html#orientation-prop
+"QGroupBox::setAlignment" ntqgroupbox.html#setAlignment
+"QGroupBox::setCheckable" ntqgroupbox.html#setCheckable
+"QGroupBox::setChecked" ntqgroupbox.html#setChecked
+"QGroupBox::setColumnLayout" ntqgroupbox.html#setColumnLayout
+"QGroupBox::setColumns" ntqgroupbox.html#setColumns
+"QGroupBox::setFlat" ntqgroupbox.html#setFlat
+"QGroupBox::setInsideMargin" ntqgroupbox.html#setInsideMargin
+"QGroupBox::setInsideSpacing" ntqgroupbox.html#setInsideSpacing
+"QGroupBox::setOrientation" ntqgroupbox.html#setOrientation
+"QGroupBox::setTitle" ntqgroupbox.html#setTitle
+"QGroupBox::title" ntqgroupbox.html#title
+"QGroupBox::title" ntqgroupbox.html#title-prop
+"QGroupBox::toggled" ntqgroupbox.html#toggled
+"QGroupBox::~QGroupBox" ntqgroupbox.html#~QGroupBox
+"QGuardedPtr" ntqguardedptr.html
+"QGuardedPtr::isNull" ntqguardedptr.html#isNull
+"QGuardedPtr::operator T *" ntqguardedptr.html#operator-T-*
+"QGuardedPtr::operator!=" ntqguardedptr.html#operator!-eq
+"QGuardedPtr::operator*" ntqguardedptr.html#operator*
+"QGuardedPtr::operator->" ntqguardedptr.html#operator--gt
+"QGuardedPtr::operator=" ntqguardedptr.html#operator-eq
+"QGuardedPtr::operator==" ntqguardedptr.html#operator-eq-eq
+"QGuardedPtr::~QGuardedPtr" ntqguardedptr.html#~QGuardedPtr
+"QHBox" ntqhbox.html
+"QHBox::setSpacing" ntqhbox.html#setSpacing
+"QHBox::setStretchFactor" ntqhbox.html#setStretchFactor
 "QHBoxLayout" qhboxlayout.html
 "QHBoxLayout::~QHBoxLayout" qhboxlayout.html#~QHBoxLayout
-"QHButtonGroup" qhbuttongroup.html
-"QHButtonGroup::~QHButtonGroup" qhbuttongroup.html#~QHButtonGroup
-"QHGroupBox" qhgroupbox.html
-"QHGroupBox::~QHGroupBox" qhgroupbox.html#~QHGroupBox
-"QHeader" qheader.html
-"QHeader::addLabel" qheader.html#addLabel
-"QHeader::adjustHeaderSize" qheader.html#adjustHeaderSize
-"QHeader::clicked" qheader.html#clicked
-"QHeader::count" qheader.html#count
-"QHeader::count" qheader.html#count-prop
-"QHeader::handleAt" qheader.html#handleAt
-"QHeader::handleColumnMove" qheader.html#handleColumnMove
-"QHeader::headerWidth" qheader.html#headerWidth
-"QHeader::iconSet" qheader.html#iconSet
-"QHeader::indexChange" qheader.html#indexChange
-"QHeader::isClickEnabled" qheader.html#isClickEnabled
-"QHeader::isMovingEnabled" qheader.html#isMovingEnabled
-"QHeader::isResizeEnabled" qheader.html#isResizeEnabled
-"QHeader::isStretchEnabled" qheader.html#isStretchEnabled
-"QHeader::label" qheader.html#label
-"QHeader::mapToIndex" qheader.html#mapToIndex
-"QHeader::mapToSection" qheader.html#mapToSection
-"QHeader::moveSection" qheader.html#moveSection
-"QHeader::moving" qheader.html#moving-prop
-"QHeader::offset" qheader.html#offset
-"QHeader::offset" qheader.html#offset-prop
-"QHeader::orientation" qheader.html#orientation
-"QHeader::orientation" qheader.html#orientation-prop
-"QHeader::paintSection" qheader.html#paintSection
-"QHeader::paintSectionLabel" qheader.html#paintSectionLabel
-"QHeader::pressed" qheader.html#pressed
-"QHeader::released" qheader.html#released
-"QHeader::removeLabel" qheader.html#removeLabel
-"QHeader::resizeSection" qheader.html#resizeSection
-"QHeader::sRect" qheader.html#sRect
-"QHeader::sectionAt" qheader.html#sectionAt
-"QHeader::sectionHandleDoubleClicked" qheader.html#sectionHandleDoubleClicked
-"QHeader::sectionPos" qheader.html#sectionPos
-"QHeader::sectionRect" qheader.html#sectionRect
-"QHeader::sectionSize" qheader.html#sectionSize
-"QHeader::setClickEnabled" qheader.html#setClickEnabled
-"QHeader::setLabel" qheader.html#setLabel
-"QHeader::setMovingEnabled" qheader.html#setMovingEnabled
-"QHeader::setOffset" qheader.html#setOffset
-"QHeader::setOrientation" qheader.html#setOrientation
-"QHeader::setResizeEnabled" qheader.html#setResizeEnabled
-"QHeader::setSortIndicator" qheader.html#setSortIndicator
-"QHeader::setStretchEnabled" qheader.html#setStretchEnabled
-"QHeader::setTracking" qheader.html#setTracking
-"QHeader::sizeChange" qheader.html#sizeChange
-"QHeader::sortIndicatorOrder" qheader.html#sortIndicatorOrder
-"QHeader::sortIndicatorSection" qheader.html#sortIndicatorSection
-"QHeader::stretching" qheader.html#stretching-prop
-"QHeader::tracking" qheader.html#tracking
-"QHeader::tracking" qheader.html#tracking-prop
-"QHeader::~QHeader" qheader.html#~QHeader
+"QHButtonGroup" ntqhbuttongroup.html
+"QHButtonGroup::~QHButtonGroup" ntqhbuttongroup.html#~QHButtonGroup
+"QHGroupBox" ntqhgroupbox.html
+"QHGroupBox::~QHGroupBox" ntqhgroupbox.html#~QHGroupBox
+"QHeader" ntqheader.html
+"QHeader::addLabel" ntqheader.html#addLabel
+"QHeader::adjustHeaderSize" ntqheader.html#adjustHeaderSize
+"QHeader::clicked" ntqheader.html#clicked
+"QHeader::count" ntqheader.html#count
+"QHeader::count" ntqheader.html#count-prop
+"QHeader::handleAt" ntqheader.html#handleAt
+"QHeader::handleColumnMove" ntqheader.html#handleColumnMove
+"QHeader::headerWidth" ntqheader.html#headerWidth
+"QHeader::iconSet" ntqheader.html#iconSet
+"QHeader::indexChange" ntqheader.html#indexChange
+"QHeader::isClickEnabled" ntqheader.html#isClickEnabled
+"QHeader::isMovingEnabled" ntqheader.html#isMovingEnabled
+"QHeader::isResizeEnabled" ntqheader.html#isResizeEnabled
+"QHeader::isStretchEnabled" ntqheader.html#isStretchEnabled
+"QHeader::label" ntqheader.html#label
+"QHeader::mapToIndex" ntqheader.html#mapToIndex
+"QHeader::mapToSection" ntqheader.html#mapToSection
+"QHeader::moveSection" ntqheader.html#moveSection
+"QHeader::moving" ntqheader.html#moving-prop
+"QHeader::offset" ntqheader.html#offset
+"QHeader::offset" ntqheader.html#offset-prop
+"QHeader::orientation" ntqheader.html#orientation
+"QHeader::orientation" ntqheader.html#orientation-prop
+"QHeader::paintSection" ntqheader.html#paintSection
+"QHeader::paintSectionLabel" ntqheader.html#paintSectionLabel
+"QHeader::pressed" ntqheader.html#pressed
+"QHeader::released" ntqheader.html#released
+"QHeader::removeLabel" ntqheader.html#removeLabel
+"QHeader::resizeSection" ntqheader.html#resizeSection
+"QHeader::sRect" ntqheader.html#sRect
+"QHeader::sectionAt" ntqheader.html#sectionAt
+"QHeader::sectionHandleDoubleClicked" ntqheader.html#sectionHandleDoubleClicked
+"QHeader::sectionPos" ntqheader.html#sectionPos
+"QHeader::sectionRect" ntqheader.html#sectionRect
+"QHeader::sectionSize" ntqheader.html#sectionSize
+"QHeader::setClickEnabled" ntqheader.html#setClickEnabled
+"QHeader::setLabel" ntqheader.html#setLabel
+"QHeader::setMovingEnabled" ntqheader.html#setMovingEnabled
+"QHeader::setOffset" ntqheader.html#setOffset
+"QHeader::setOrientation" ntqheader.html#setOrientation
+"QHeader::setResizeEnabled" ntqheader.html#setResizeEnabled
+"QHeader::setSortIndicator" ntqheader.html#setSortIndicator
+"QHeader::setStretchEnabled" ntqheader.html#setStretchEnabled
+"QHeader::setTracking" ntqheader.html#setTracking
+"QHeader::sizeChange" ntqheader.html#sizeChange
+"QHeader::sortIndicatorOrder" ntqheader.html#sortIndicatorOrder
+"QHeader::sortIndicatorSection" ntqheader.html#sortIndicatorSection
+"QHeader::stretching" ntqheader.html#stretching-prop
+"QHeader::tracking" ntqheader.html#tracking
+"QHeader::tracking" ntqheader.html#tracking-prop
+"QHeader::~QHeader" ntqheader.html#~QHeader
 "QHebrewCodec" qhebrewcodec.html
 "QHebrewCodec::fromUnicode" qhebrewcodec.html#fromUnicode
 "QHebrewCodec::mimeName" qhebrewcodec.html#mimeName
 "QHideEvent" qhideevent.html
-"QHostAddress" qhostaddress.html
-"QHostAddress::isIPv4Address" qhostaddress.html#isIPv4Address
-"QHostAddress::isIPv6Address" qhostaddress.html#isIPv6Address
-"QHostAddress::isNull" qhostaddress.html#isNull
-"QHostAddress::operator=" qhostaddress.html#operator-eq
-"QHostAddress::operator==" qhostaddress.html#operator-eq-eq
-"QHostAddress::setAddress" qhostaddress.html#setAddress
-"QHostAddress::toIPv4Address" qhostaddress.html#toIPv4Address
-"QHostAddress::toIPv6Address" qhostaddress.html#toIPv6Address
-"QHostAddress::toString" qhostaddress.html#toString
-"QHostAddress::~QHostAddress" qhostaddress.html#~QHostAddress
-"QHttp" qhttp.html
-"QHttp::Error" qhttp.html#Error
-"QHttp::State" qhttp.html#State
-"QHttp::abort" qhttp.html#abort
-"QHttp::bytesAvailable" qhttp.html#bytesAvailable
-"QHttp::clearPendingRequests" qhttp.html#clearPendingRequests
-"QHttp::closeConnection" qhttp.html#closeConnection
-"QHttp::currentDestinationDevice" qhttp.html#currentDestinationDevice
-"QHttp::currentId" qhttp.html#currentId
-"QHttp::currentRequest" qhttp.html#currentRequest
-"QHttp::currentSourceDevice" qhttp.html#currentSourceDevice
-"QHttp::dataReadProgress" qhttp.html#dataReadProgress
-"QHttp::dataSendProgress" qhttp.html#dataSendProgress
-"QHttp::done" qhttp.html#done
-"QHttp::error" qhttp.html#error
-"QHttp::errorString" qhttp.html#errorString
-"QHttp::get" qhttp.html#get
-"QHttp::hasPendingRequests" qhttp.html#hasPendingRequests
-"QHttp::head" qhttp.html#head
-"QHttp::post" qhttp.html#post
-"QHttp::readAll" qhttp.html#readAll
-"QHttp::readBlock" qhttp.html#readBlock
-"QHttp::readyRead" qhttp.html#readyRead
-"QHttp::request" qhttp.html#request
-"QHttp::requestFinished" qhttp.html#requestFinished
-"QHttp::requestStarted" qhttp.html#requestStarted
-"QHttp::responseHeaderReceived" qhttp.html#responseHeaderReceived
-"QHttp::setHost" qhttp.html#setHost
-"QHttp::state" qhttp.html#state
-"QHttp::stateChanged" qhttp.html#stateChanged
-"QHttp::~QHttp" qhttp.html#~QHttp
+"QHostAddress" ntqhostaddress.html
+"QHostAddress::isIPv4Address" ntqhostaddress.html#isIPv4Address
+"QHostAddress::isIPv6Address" ntqhostaddress.html#isIPv6Address
+"QHostAddress::isNull" ntqhostaddress.html#isNull
+"QHostAddress::operator=" ntqhostaddress.html#operator-eq
+"QHostAddress::operator==" ntqhostaddress.html#operator-eq-eq
+"QHostAddress::setAddress" ntqhostaddress.html#setAddress
+"QHostAddress::toIPv4Address" ntqhostaddress.html#toIPv4Address
+"QHostAddress::toIPv6Address" ntqhostaddress.html#toIPv6Address
+"QHostAddress::toString" ntqhostaddress.html#toString
+"QHostAddress::~QHostAddress" ntqhostaddress.html#~QHostAddress
+"QHttp" ntqhttp.html
+"QHttp::Error" ntqhttp.html#Error
+"QHttp::State" ntqhttp.html#State
+"QHttp::abort" ntqhttp.html#abort
+"QHttp::bytesAvailable" ntqhttp.html#bytesAvailable
+"QHttp::clearPendingRequests" ntqhttp.html#clearPendingRequests
+"QHttp::closeConnection" ntqhttp.html#closeConnection
+"QHttp::currentDestinationDevice" ntqhttp.html#currentDestinationDevice
+"QHttp::currentId" ntqhttp.html#currentId
+"QHttp::currentRequest" ntqhttp.html#currentRequest
+"QHttp::currentSourceDevice" ntqhttp.html#currentSourceDevice
+"QHttp::dataReadProgress" ntqhttp.html#dataReadProgress
+"QHttp::dataSendProgress" ntqhttp.html#dataSendProgress
+"QHttp::done" ntqhttp.html#done
+"QHttp::error" ntqhttp.html#error
+"QHttp::errorString" ntqhttp.html#errorString
+"QHttp::get" ntqhttp.html#get
+"QHttp::hasPendingRequests" ntqhttp.html#hasPendingRequests
+"QHttp::head" ntqhttp.html#head
+"QHttp::post" ntqhttp.html#post
+"QHttp::readAll" ntqhttp.html#readAll
+"QHttp::readBlock" ntqhttp.html#readBlock
+"QHttp::readyRead" ntqhttp.html#readyRead
+"QHttp::request" ntqhttp.html#request
+"QHttp::requestFinished" ntqhttp.html#requestFinished
+"QHttp::requestStarted" ntqhttp.html#requestStarted
+"QHttp::responseHeaderReceived" ntqhttp.html#responseHeaderReceived
+"QHttp::setHost" ntqhttp.html#setHost
+"QHttp::state" ntqhttp.html#state
+"QHttp::stateChanged" ntqhttp.html#stateChanged
+"QHttp::~QHttp" ntqhttp.html#~QHttp
 "QHttpHeader" qhttpheader.html
 "QHttpHeader::contentLength" qhttpheader.html#contentLength
 "QHttpHeader::contentType" qhttpheader.html#contentType
@@ -2884,46 +2884,46 @@
 "QIMEvent::isAccepted" qimevent.html#isAccepted
 "QIMEvent::selectionLength" qimevent.html#selectionLength
 "QIMEvent::text" qimevent.html#text
-"QIODevice" qiodevice.html
-"QIODevice::Offset" qiodevice.html#Offset
-"QIODevice::at" qiodevice.html#at
-"QIODevice::atEnd" qiodevice.html#atEnd
-"QIODevice::close" qiodevice.html#close
-"QIODevice::flags" qiodevice.html#flags
-"QIODevice::flush" qiodevice.html#flush
-"QIODevice::getch" qiodevice.html#getch
-"QIODevice::isAsynchronous" qiodevice.html#isAsynchronous
-"QIODevice::isBuffered" qiodevice.html#isBuffered
-"QIODevice::isCombinedAccess" qiodevice.html#isCombinedAccess
-"QIODevice::isDirectAccess" qiodevice.html#isDirectAccess
-"QIODevice::isInactive" qiodevice.html#isInactive
-"QIODevice::isOpen" qiodevice.html#isOpen
-"QIODevice::isRaw" qiodevice.html#isRaw
-"QIODevice::isReadWrite" qiodevice.html#isReadWrite
-"QIODevice::isReadable" qiodevice.html#isReadable
-"QIODevice::isSequentialAccess" qiodevice.html#isSequentialAccess
-"QIODevice::isSynchronous" qiodevice.html#isSynchronous
-"QIODevice::isTranslated" qiodevice.html#isTranslated
-"QIODevice::isWritable" qiodevice.html#isWritable
-"QIODevice::mode" qiodevice.html#mode
-"QIODevice::open" qiodevice.html#open
-"QIODevice::putch" qiodevice.html#putch
-"QIODevice::readAll" qiodevice.html#readAll
-"QIODevice::readBlock" qiodevice.html#readBlock
-"QIODevice::readLine" qiodevice.html#readLine
-"QIODevice::reset" qiodevice.html#reset
-"QIODevice::resetStatus" qiodevice.html#resetStatus
-"QIODevice::setFlags" qiodevice.html#setFlags
-"QIODevice::setMode" qiodevice.html#setMode
-"QIODevice::setState" qiodevice.html#setState
-"QIODevice::setStatus" qiodevice.html#setStatus
-"QIODevice::setType" qiodevice.html#setType
-"QIODevice::size" qiodevice.html#size
-"QIODevice::state" qiodevice.html#state
-"QIODevice::status" qiodevice.html#status
-"QIODevice::ungetch" qiodevice.html#ungetch
-"QIODevice::writeBlock" qiodevice.html#writeBlock
-"QIODevice::~QIODevice" qiodevice.html#~QIODevice
+"QIODevice" ntqiodevice.html
+"QIODevice::Offset" ntqiodevice.html#Offset
+"QIODevice::at" ntqiodevice.html#at
+"QIODevice::atEnd" ntqiodevice.html#atEnd
+"QIODevice::close" ntqiodevice.html#close
+"QIODevice::flags" ntqiodevice.html#flags
+"QIODevice::flush" ntqiodevice.html#flush
+"QIODevice::getch" ntqiodevice.html#getch
+"QIODevice::isAsynchronous" ntqiodevice.html#isAsynchronous
+"QIODevice::isBuffered" ntqiodevice.html#isBuffered
+"QIODevice::isCombinedAccess" ntqiodevice.html#isCombinedAccess
+"QIODevice::isDirectAccess" ntqiodevice.html#isDirectAccess
+"QIODevice::isInactive" ntqiodevice.html#isInactive
+"QIODevice::isOpen" ntqiodevice.html#isOpen
+"QIODevice::isRaw" ntqiodevice.html#isRaw
+"QIODevice::isReadWrite" ntqiodevice.html#isReadWrite
+"QIODevice::isReadable" ntqiodevice.html#isReadable
+"QIODevice::isSequentialAccess" ntqiodevice.html#isSequentialAccess
+"QIODevice::isSynchronous" ntqiodevice.html#isSynchronous
+"QIODevice::isTranslated" ntqiodevice.html#isTranslated
+"QIODevice::isWritable" ntqiodevice.html#isWritable
+"QIODevice::mode" ntqiodevice.html#mode
+"QIODevice::open" ntqiodevice.html#open
+"QIODevice::putch" ntqiodevice.html#putch
+"QIODevice::readAll" ntqiodevice.html#readAll
+"QIODevice::readBlock" ntqiodevice.html#readBlock
+"QIODevice::readLine" ntqiodevice.html#readLine
+"QIODevice::reset" ntqiodevice.html#reset
+"QIODevice::resetStatus" ntqiodevice.html#resetStatus
+"QIODevice::setFlags" ntqiodevice.html#setFlags
+"QIODevice::setMode" ntqiodevice.html#setMode
+"QIODevice::setState" ntqiodevice.html#setState
+"QIODevice::setStatus" ntqiodevice.html#setStatus
+"QIODevice::setType" ntqiodevice.html#setType
+"QIODevice::size" ntqiodevice.html#size
+"QIODevice::state" ntqiodevice.html#state
+"QIODevice::status" ntqiodevice.html#status
+"QIODevice::ungetch" ntqiodevice.html#ungetch
+"QIODevice::writeBlock" ntqiodevice.html#writeBlock
+"QIODevice::~QIODevice" ntqiodevice.html#~QIODevice
 "QIODeviceSource::enableRewind" qiodevicesource.html#enableRewind
 "QIODeviceSource::readyToSend" qiodevicesource.html#readyToSend
 "QIODeviceSource::rewind" qiodevicesource.html#rewind
@@ -2950,128 +2950,128 @@
 "QIconFactory::installDefaultFactory" qiconfactory.html#installDefaultFactory
 "QIconFactory::setAutoDelete" qiconfactory.html#setAutoDelete
 "QIconFactory::~QIconFactory" qiconfactory.html#~QIconFactory
-"QIconSet" qiconset.html
-"QIconSet::Mode" qiconset.html#Mode
-"QIconSet::Size" qiconset.html#Size
-"QIconSet::State" qiconset.html#State
-"QIconSet::clearGenerated" qiconset.html#clearGenerated
-"QIconSet::createDisabled" qiconset.html#createDisabled
-"QIconSet::createScaled" qiconset.html#createScaled
-"QIconSet::detach" qiconset.html#detach
-"QIconSet::iconSize" qiconset.html#iconSize
-"QIconSet::installIconFactory" qiconset.html#installIconFactory
-"QIconSet::isGenerated" qiconset.html#isGenerated
-"QIconSet::isNull" qiconset.html#isNull
-"QIconSet::operator=" qiconset.html#operator-eq
-"QIconSet::pixmap" qiconset.html#pixmap
-"QIconSet::reset" qiconset.html#reset
-"QIconSet::setIconSize" qiconset.html#setIconSize
-"QIconSet::setPixmap" qiconset.html#setPixmap
-"QIconSet::~QIconSet" qiconset.html#~QIconSet
-"QIconView" qiconview.html
-"QIconView::Arrangement" qiconview.html#Arrangement
-"QIconView::ItemTextPos" qiconview.html#ItemTextPos
-"QIconView::ResizeMode" qiconview.html#ResizeMode
-"QIconView::SelectionMode" qiconview.html#SelectionMode
-"QIconView::adjustItems" qiconview.html#adjustItems
-"QIconView::arrangeItemsInGrid" qiconview.html#arrangeItemsInGrid
-"QIconView::arrangement" qiconview.html#arrangement
-"QIconView::arrangement" qiconview.html#arrangement-prop
-"QIconView::autoArrange" qiconview.html#autoArrange
-"QIconView::autoArrange" qiconview.html#autoArrange-prop
-"QIconView::clear" qiconview.html#clear
-"QIconView::clearSelection" qiconview.html#clearSelection
-"QIconView::clicked" qiconview.html#clicked
-"QIconView::contextMenuRequested" qiconview.html#contextMenuRequested
-"QIconView::count" qiconview.html#count
-"QIconView::count" qiconview.html#count-prop
-"QIconView::currentChanged" qiconview.html#currentChanged
-"QIconView::currentItem" qiconview.html#currentItem
-"QIconView::doAutoScroll" qiconview.html#doAutoScroll
-"QIconView::doubleClicked" qiconview.html#doubleClicked
-"QIconView::dragObject" qiconview.html#dragObject
-"QIconView::drawBackground" qiconview.html#drawBackground
-"QIconView::drawDragShapes" qiconview.html#drawDragShapes
-"QIconView::drawRubber" qiconview.html#drawRubber
-"QIconView::dropped" qiconview.html#dropped
-"QIconView::emitSelectionChanged" qiconview.html#emitSelectionChanged
-"QIconView::ensureItemVisible" qiconview.html#ensureItemVisible
-"QIconView::findFirstVisibleItem" qiconview.html#findFirstVisibleItem
-"QIconView::findItem" qiconview.html#findItem
-"QIconView::findLastVisibleItem" qiconview.html#findLastVisibleItem
-"QIconView::firstItem" qiconview.html#firstItem
-"QIconView::gridX" qiconview.html#gridX
-"QIconView::gridX" qiconview.html#gridX-prop
-"QIconView::gridY" qiconview.html#gridY
-"QIconView::gridY" qiconview.html#gridY-prop
-"QIconView::index" qiconview.html#index
-"QIconView::initDragEnter" qiconview.html#initDragEnter
-"QIconView::insertInGrid" qiconview.html#insertInGrid
-"QIconView::insertItem" qiconview.html#insertItem
-"QIconView::invertSelection" qiconview.html#invertSelection
-"QIconView::isRenaming" qiconview.html#isRenaming
-"QIconView::itemRenamed" qiconview.html#itemRenamed
-"QIconView::itemTextBackground" qiconview.html#itemTextBackground
-"QIconView::itemTextBackground" qiconview.html#itemTextBackground-prop
-"QIconView::itemTextPos" qiconview.html#itemTextPos
-"QIconView::itemTextPos" qiconview.html#itemTextPos-prop
-"QIconView::itemsMovable" qiconview.html#itemsMovable
-"QIconView::itemsMovable" qiconview.html#itemsMovable-prop
-"QIconView::lastItem" qiconview.html#lastItem
-"QIconView::makeRowLayout" qiconview.html#makeRowLayout
-"QIconView::maxItemTextLength" qiconview.html#maxItemTextLength
-"QIconView::maxItemTextLength" qiconview.html#maxItemTextLength-prop
-"QIconView::maxItemWidth" qiconview.html#maxItemWidth
-"QIconView::maxItemWidth" qiconview.html#maxItemWidth-prop
-"QIconView::mouseButtonClicked" qiconview.html#mouseButtonClicked
-"QIconView::mouseButtonPressed" qiconview.html#mouseButtonPressed
-"QIconView::moved" qiconview.html#moved
-"QIconView::onItem" qiconview.html#onItem
-"QIconView::onViewport" qiconview.html#onViewport
-"QIconView::pressed" qiconview.html#pressed
-"QIconView::repaintItem" qiconview.html#repaintItem
-"QIconView::repaintSelectedItems" qiconview.html#repaintSelectedItems
-"QIconView::resizeMode" qiconview.html#resizeMode
-"QIconView::resizeMode" qiconview.html#resizeMode-prop
-"QIconView::returnPressed" qiconview.html#returnPressed
-"QIconView::rightButtonClicked" qiconview.html#rightButtonClicked
-"QIconView::rightButtonPressed" qiconview.html#rightButtonPressed
-"QIconView::selectAll" qiconview.html#selectAll
-"QIconView::selectionChanged" qiconview.html#selectionChanged
-"QIconView::selectionMode" qiconview.html#selectionMode
-"QIconView::selectionMode" qiconview.html#selectionMode-prop
-"QIconView::setArrangement" qiconview.html#setArrangement
-"QIconView::setAutoArrange" qiconview.html#setAutoArrange
-"QIconView::setCurrentItem" qiconview.html#setCurrentItem
-"QIconView::setGridX" qiconview.html#setGridX
-"QIconView::setGridY" qiconview.html#setGridY
-"QIconView::setItemTextBackground" qiconview.html#setItemTextBackground
-"QIconView::setItemTextPos" qiconview.html#setItemTextPos
-"QIconView::setItemsMovable" qiconview.html#setItemsMovable
-"QIconView::setMaxItemTextLength" qiconview.html#setMaxItemTextLength
-"QIconView::setMaxItemWidth" qiconview.html#setMaxItemWidth
-"QIconView::setResizeMode" qiconview.html#setResizeMode
-"QIconView::setSelected" qiconview.html#setSelected
-"QIconView::setSelectionMode" qiconview.html#setSelectionMode
-"QIconView::setShowToolTips" qiconview.html#setShowToolTips
-"QIconView::setSorting" qiconview.html#setSorting
-"QIconView::setSpacing" qiconview.html#setSpacing
-"QIconView::setWordWrapIconText" qiconview.html#setWordWrapIconText
-"QIconView::showToolTips" qiconview.html#showToolTips
-"QIconView::showToolTips" qiconview.html#showToolTips-prop
-"QIconView::slotUpdate" qiconview.html#slotUpdate
-"QIconView::sort" qiconview.html#sort
-"QIconView::sortDirection" qiconview.html#sortDirection
-"QIconView::sortDirection" qiconview.html#sortDirection-prop
-"QIconView::sorting" qiconview.html#sorting
-"QIconView::sorting" qiconview.html#sorting-prop
-"QIconView::spacing" qiconview.html#spacing
-"QIconView::spacing" qiconview.html#spacing-prop
-"QIconView::startDrag" qiconview.html#startDrag
-"QIconView::takeItem" qiconview.html#takeItem
-"QIconView::wordWrapIconText" qiconview.html#wordWrapIconText
-"QIconView::wordWrapIconText" qiconview.html#wordWrapIconText-prop
-"QIconView::~QIconView" qiconview.html#~QIconView
+"QIconSet" ntqiconset.html
+"QIconSet::Mode" ntqiconset.html#Mode
+"QIconSet::Size" ntqiconset.html#Size
+"QIconSet::State" ntqiconset.html#State
+"QIconSet::clearGenerated" ntqiconset.html#clearGenerated
+"QIconSet::createDisabled" ntqiconset.html#createDisabled
+"QIconSet::createScaled" ntqiconset.html#createScaled
+"QIconSet::detach" ntqiconset.html#detach
+"QIconSet::iconSize" ntqiconset.html#iconSize
+"QIconSet::installIconFactory" ntqiconset.html#installIconFactory
+"QIconSet::isGenerated" ntqiconset.html#isGenerated
+"QIconSet::isNull" ntqiconset.html#isNull
+"QIconSet::operator=" ntqiconset.html#operator-eq
+"QIconSet::pixmap" ntqiconset.html#pixmap
+"QIconSet::reset" ntqiconset.html#reset
+"QIconSet::setIconSize" ntqiconset.html#setIconSize
+"QIconSet::setPixmap" ntqiconset.html#setPixmap
+"QIconSet::~QIconSet" ntqiconset.html#~QIconSet
+"QIconView" ntqiconview.html
+"QIconView::Arrangement" ntqiconview.html#Arrangement
+"QIconView::ItemTextPos" ntqiconview.html#ItemTextPos
+"QIconView::ResizeMode" ntqiconview.html#ResizeMode
+"QIconView::SelectionMode" ntqiconview.html#SelectionMode
+"QIconView::adjustItems" ntqiconview.html#adjustItems
+"QIconView::arrangeItemsInGrid" ntqiconview.html#arrangeItemsInGrid
+"QIconView::arrangement" ntqiconview.html#arrangement
+"QIconView::arrangement" ntqiconview.html#arrangement-prop
+"QIconView::autoArrange" ntqiconview.html#autoArrange
+"QIconView::autoArrange" ntqiconview.html#autoArrange-prop
+"QIconView::clear" ntqiconview.html#clear
+"QIconView::clearSelection" ntqiconview.html#clearSelection
+"QIconView::clicked" ntqiconview.html#clicked
+"QIconView::contextMenuRequested" ntqiconview.html#contextMenuRequested
+"QIconView::count" ntqiconview.html#count
+"QIconView::count" ntqiconview.html#count-prop
+"QIconView::currentChanged" ntqiconview.html#currentChanged
+"QIconView::currentItem" ntqiconview.html#currentItem
+"QIconView::doAutoScroll" ntqiconview.html#doAutoScroll
+"QIconView::doubleClicked" ntqiconview.html#doubleClicked
+"QIconView::dragObject" ntqiconview.html#dragObject
+"QIconView::drawBackground" ntqiconview.html#drawBackground
+"QIconView::drawDragShapes" ntqiconview.html#drawDragShapes
+"QIconView::drawRubber" ntqiconview.html#drawRubber
+"QIconView::dropped" ntqiconview.html#dropped
+"QIconView::emitSelectionChanged" ntqiconview.html#emitSelectionChanged
+"QIconView::ensureItemVisible" ntqiconview.html#ensureItemVisible
+"QIconView::findFirstVisibleItem" ntqiconview.html#findFirstVisibleItem
+"QIconView::findItem" ntqiconview.html#findItem
+"QIconView::findLastVisibleItem" ntqiconview.html#findLastVisibleItem
+"QIconView::firstItem" ntqiconview.html#firstItem
+"QIconView::gridX" ntqiconview.html#gridX
+"QIconView::gridX" ntqiconview.html#gridX-prop
+"QIconView::gridY" ntqiconview.html#gridY
+"QIconView::gridY" ntqiconview.html#gridY-prop
+"QIconView::index" ntqiconview.html#index
+"QIconView::initDragEnter" ntqiconview.html#initDragEnter
+"QIconView::insertInGrid" ntqiconview.html#insertInGrid
+"QIconView::insertItem" ntqiconview.html#insertItem
+"QIconView::invertSelection" ntqiconview.html#invertSelection
+"QIconView::isRenaming" ntqiconview.html#isRenaming
+"QIconView::itemRenamed" ntqiconview.html#itemRenamed
+"QIconView::itemTextBackground" ntqiconview.html#itemTextBackground
+"QIconView::itemTextBackground" ntqiconview.html#itemTextBackground-prop
+"QIconView::itemTextPos" ntqiconview.html#itemTextPos
+"QIconView::itemTextPos" ntqiconview.html#itemTextPos-prop
+"QIconView::itemsMovable" ntqiconview.html#itemsMovable
+"QIconView::itemsMovable" ntqiconview.html#itemsMovable-prop
+"QIconView::lastItem" ntqiconview.html#lastItem
+"QIconView::makeRowLayout" ntqiconview.html#makeRowLayout
+"QIconView::maxItemTextLength" ntqiconview.html#maxItemTextLength
+"QIconView::maxItemTextLength" ntqiconview.html#maxItemTextLength-prop
+"QIconView::maxItemWidth" ntqiconview.html#maxItemWidth
+"QIconView::maxItemWidth" ntqiconview.html#maxItemWidth-prop
+"QIconView::mouseButtonClicked" ntqiconview.html#mouseButtonClicked
+"QIconView::mouseButtonPressed" ntqiconview.html#mouseButtonPressed
+"QIconView::moved" ntqiconview.html#moved
+"QIconView::onItem" ntqiconview.html#onItem
+"QIconView::onViewport" ntqiconview.html#onViewport
+"QIconView::pressed" ntqiconview.html#pressed
+"QIconView::repaintItem" ntqiconview.html#repaintItem
+"QIconView::repaintSelectedItems" ntqiconview.html#repaintSelectedItems
+"QIconView::resizeMode" ntqiconview.html#resizeMode
+"QIconView::resizeMode" ntqiconview.html#resizeMode-prop
+"QIconView::returnPressed" ntqiconview.html#returnPressed
+"QIconView::rightButtonClicked" ntqiconview.html#rightButtonClicked
+"QIconView::rightButtonPressed" ntqiconview.html#rightButtonPressed
+"QIconView::selectAll" ntqiconview.html#selectAll
+"QIconView::selectionChanged" ntqiconview.html#selectionChanged
+"QIconView::selectionMode" ntqiconview.html#selectionMode
+"QIconView::selectionMode" ntqiconview.html#selectionMode-prop
+"QIconView::setArrangement" ntqiconview.html#setArrangement
+"QIconView::setAutoArrange" ntqiconview.html#setAutoArrange
+"QIconView::setCurrentItem" ntqiconview.html#setCurrentItem
+"QIconView::setGridX" ntqiconview.html#setGridX
+"QIconView::setGridY" ntqiconview.html#setGridY
+"QIconView::setItemTextBackground" ntqiconview.html#setItemTextBackground
+"QIconView::setItemTextPos" ntqiconview.html#setItemTextPos
+"QIconView::setItemsMovable" ntqiconview.html#setItemsMovable
+"QIconView::setMaxItemTextLength" ntqiconview.html#setMaxItemTextLength
+"QIconView::setMaxItemWidth" ntqiconview.html#setMaxItemWidth
+"QIconView::setResizeMode" ntqiconview.html#setResizeMode
+"QIconView::setSelected" ntqiconview.html#setSelected
+"QIconView::setSelectionMode" ntqiconview.html#setSelectionMode
+"QIconView::setShowToolTips" ntqiconview.html#setShowToolTips
+"QIconView::setSorting" ntqiconview.html#setSorting
+"QIconView::setSpacing" ntqiconview.html#setSpacing
+"QIconView::setWordWrapIconText" ntqiconview.html#setWordWrapIconText
+"QIconView::showToolTips" ntqiconview.html#showToolTips
+"QIconView::showToolTips" ntqiconview.html#showToolTips-prop
+"QIconView::slotUpdate" ntqiconview.html#slotUpdate
+"QIconView::sort" ntqiconview.html#sort
+"QIconView::sortDirection" ntqiconview.html#sortDirection
+"QIconView::sortDirection" ntqiconview.html#sortDirection-prop
+"QIconView::sorting" ntqiconview.html#sorting
+"QIconView::sorting" ntqiconview.html#sorting-prop
+"QIconView::spacing" ntqiconview.html#spacing
+"QIconView::spacing" ntqiconview.html#spacing-prop
+"QIconView::startDrag" ntqiconview.html#startDrag
+"QIconView::takeItem" ntqiconview.html#takeItem
+"QIconView::wordWrapIconText" ntqiconview.html#wordWrapIconText
+"QIconView::wordWrapIconText" ntqiconview.html#wordWrapIconText-prop
+"QIconView::~QIconView" ntqiconview.html#~QIconView
 "QIconViewItem" qiconviewitem.html
 "QIconViewItem::acceptDrop" qiconviewitem.html#acceptDrop
 "QIconViewItem::calcRect" qiconviewitem.html#calcRect
@@ -3127,78 +3127,78 @@
 "QIconViewItem::x" qiconviewitem.html#x
 "QIconViewItem::y" qiconviewitem.html#y
 "QIconViewItem::~QIconViewItem" qiconviewitem.html#~QIconViewItem
-"QImage" qimage.html
-"QImage::Endian" qimage.html#Endian
-"QImage::ScaleMode" qimage.html#ScaleMode
-"QImage::allGray" qimage.html#allGray
-"QImage::bitOrder" qimage.html#bitOrder
-"QImage::bits" qimage.html#bits
-"QImage::bytesPerLine" qimage.html#bytesPerLine
-"QImage::color" qimage.html#color
-"QImage::colorTable" qimage.html#colorTable
-"QImage::convertBitOrder" qimage.html#convertBitOrder
-"QImage::convertDepth" qimage.html#convertDepth
-"QImage::convertDepthWithPalette" qimage.html#convertDepthWithPalette
-"QImage::copy" qimage.html#copy
-"QImage::create" qimage.html#create
-"QImage::createAlphaMask" qimage.html#createAlphaMask
-"QImage::createHeuristicMask" qimage.html#createHeuristicMask
-"QImage::depth" qimage.html#depth
-"QImage::detach" qimage.html#detach
-"QImage::dotsPerMeterX" qimage.html#dotsPerMeterX
-"QImage::dotsPerMeterY" qimage.html#dotsPerMeterY
-"QImage::fill" qimage.html#fill
-"QImage::fromMimeSource" qimage.html#fromMimeSource
-"QImage::hasAlphaBuffer" qimage.html#hasAlphaBuffer
-"QImage::height" qimage.html#height
-"QImage::imageFormat" qimage.html#imageFormat
-"QImage::inputFormatList" qimage.html#inputFormatList
-"QImage::inputFormats" qimage.html#inputFormats
-"QImage::invertPixels" qimage.html#invertPixels
-"QImage::isGrayscale" qimage.html#isGrayscale
-"QImage::isNull" qimage.html#isNull
-"QImage::jumpTable" qimage.html#jumpTable
-"QImage::load" qimage.html#load
-"QImage::loadFromData" qimage.html#loadFromData
-"QImage::mirror" qimage.html#mirror
-"QImage::numBytes" qimage.html#numBytes
-"QImage::numColors" qimage.html#numColors
-"QImage::offset" qimage.html#offset
-"QImage::operator!=" qimage.html#operator!-eq
-"QImage::operator=" qimage.html#operator-eq
-"QImage::operator==" qimage.html#operator-eq-eq
-"QImage::outputFormatList" qimage.html#outputFormatList
-"QImage::outputFormats" qimage.html#outputFormats
-"QImage::pixel" qimage.html#pixel
-"QImage::pixelIndex" qimage.html#pixelIndex
-"QImage::rect" qimage.html#rect
-"QImage::reset" qimage.html#reset
-"QImage::save" qimage.html#save
-"QImage::scale" qimage.html#scale
-"QImage::scaleHeight" qimage.html#scaleHeight
-"QImage::scaleWidth" qimage.html#scaleWidth
-"QImage::scanLine" qimage.html#scanLine
-"QImage::setAlphaBuffer" qimage.html#setAlphaBuffer
-"QImage::setColor" qimage.html#setColor
-"QImage::setDotsPerMeterX" qimage.html#setDotsPerMeterX
-"QImage::setDotsPerMeterY" qimage.html#setDotsPerMeterY
-"QImage::setNumColors" qimage.html#setNumColors
-"QImage::setOffset" qimage.html#setOffset
-"QImage::setPixel" qimage.html#setPixel
-"QImage::setText" qimage.html#setText
-"QImage::size" qimage.html#size
-"QImage::smoothScale" qimage.html#smoothScale
-"QImage::swapRGB" qimage.html#swapRGB
-"QImage::systemBitOrder" qimage.html#systemBitOrder
-"QImage::systemByteOrder" qimage.html#systemByteOrder
-"QImage::text" qimage.html#text
-"QImage::textKeys" qimage.html#textKeys
-"QImage::textLanguages" qimage.html#textLanguages
-"QImage::textList" qimage.html#textList
-"QImage::valid" qimage.html#valid
-"QImage::width" qimage.html#width
-"QImage::xForm" qimage.html#xForm
-"QImage::~QImage" qimage.html#~QImage
+"QImage" ntqimage.html
+"QImage::Endian" ntqimage.html#Endian
+"QImage::ScaleMode" ntqimage.html#ScaleMode
+"QImage::allGray" ntqimage.html#allGray
+"QImage::bitOrder" ntqimage.html#bitOrder
+"QImage::bits" ntqimage.html#bits
+"QImage::bytesPerLine" ntqimage.html#bytesPerLine
+"QImage::color" ntqimage.html#color
+"QImage::colorTable" ntqimage.html#colorTable
+"QImage::convertBitOrder" ntqimage.html#convertBitOrder
+"QImage::convertDepth" ntqimage.html#convertDepth
+"QImage::convertDepthWithPalette" ntqimage.html#convertDepthWithPalette
+"QImage::copy" ntqimage.html#copy
+"QImage::create" ntqimage.html#create
+"QImage::createAlphaMask" ntqimage.html#createAlphaMask
+"QImage::createHeuristicMask" ntqimage.html#createHeuristicMask
+"QImage::depth" ntqimage.html#depth
+"QImage::detach" ntqimage.html#detach
+"QImage::dotsPerMeterX" ntqimage.html#dotsPerMeterX
+"QImage::dotsPerMeterY" ntqimage.html#dotsPerMeterY
+"QImage::fill" ntqimage.html#fill
+"QImage::fromMimeSource" ntqimage.html#fromMimeSource
+"QImage::hasAlphaBuffer" ntqimage.html#hasAlphaBuffer
+"QImage::height" ntqimage.html#height
+"QImage::imageFormat" ntqimage.html#imageFormat
+"QImage::inputFormatList" ntqimage.html#inputFormatList
+"QImage::inputFormats" ntqimage.html#inputFormats
+"QImage::invertPixels" ntqimage.html#invertPixels
+"QImage::isGrayscale" ntqimage.html#isGrayscale
+"QImage::isNull" ntqimage.html#isNull
+"QImage::jumpTable" ntqimage.html#jumpTable
+"QImage::load" ntqimage.html#load
+"QImage::loadFromData" ntqimage.html#loadFromData
+"QImage::mirror" ntqimage.html#mirror
+"QImage::numBytes" ntqimage.html#numBytes
+"QImage::numColors" ntqimage.html#numColors
+"QImage::offset" ntqimage.html#offset
+"QImage::operator!=" ntqimage.html#operator!-eq
+"QImage::operator=" ntqimage.html#operator-eq
+"QImage::operator==" ntqimage.html#operator-eq-eq
+"QImage::outputFormatList" ntqimage.html#outputFormatList
+"QImage::outputFormats" ntqimage.html#outputFormats
+"QImage::pixel" ntqimage.html#pixel
+"QImage::pixelIndex" ntqimage.html#pixelIndex
+"QImage::rect" ntqimage.html#rect
+"QImage::reset" ntqimage.html#reset
+"QImage::save" ntqimage.html#save
+"QImage::scale" ntqimage.html#scale
+"QImage::scaleHeight" ntqimage.html#scaleHeight
+"QImage::scaleWidth" ntqimage.html#scaleWidth
+"QImage::scanLine" ntqimage.html#scanLine
+"QImage::setAlphaBuffer" ntqimage.html#setAlphaBuffer
+"QImage::setColor" ntqimage.html#setColor
+"QImage::setDotsPerMeterX" ntqimage.html#setDotsPerMeterX
+"QImage::setDotsPerMeterY" ntqimage.html#setDotsPerMeterY
+"QImage::setNumColors" ntqimage.html#setNumColors
+"QImage::setOffset" ntqimage.html#setOffset
+"QImage::setPixel" ntqimage.html#setPixel
+"QImage::setText" ntqimage.html#setText
+"QImage::size" ntqimage.html#size
+"QImage::smoothScale" ntqimage.html#smoothScale
+"QImage::swapRGB" ntqimage.html#swapRGB
+"QImage::systemBitOrder" ntqimage.html#systemBitOrder
+"QImage::systemByteOrder" ntqimage.html#systemByteOrder
+"QImage::text" ntqimage.html#text
+"QImage::textKeys" ntqimage.html#textKeys
+"QImage::textLanguages" ntqimage.html#textLanguages
+"QImage::textList" ntqimage.html#textList
+"QImage::valid" ntqimage.html#valid
+"QImage::width" ntqimage.html#width
+"QImage::xForm" ntqimage.html#xForm
+"QImage::~QImage" ntqimage.html#~QImage
 "QImageConsumer" qimageconsumer.html
 "QImageConsumer::changed" qimageconsumer.html#changed
 "QImageConsumer::end" qimageconsumer.html#end
@@ -3222,10 +3222,10 @@
 "QImageDrag::~QImageDrag" qimagedrag.html#~QImageDrag
 "QImageFormat" qimageformat.html
 "QImageFormat::decode" qimageformat.html#decode
-"QImageFormatPlugin" qimageformatplugin.html
-"QImageFormatPlugin::installIOHandler" qimageformatplugin.html#installIOHandler
-"QImageFormatPlugin::keys" qimageformatplugin.html#keys
-"QImageFormatPlugin::~QImageFormatPlugin" qimageformatplugin.html#~QImageFormatPlugin
+"QImageFormatPlugin" ntqimageformatplugin.html
+"QImageFormatPlugin::installIOHandler" ntqimageformatplugin.html#installIOHandler
+"QImageFormatPlugin::keys" ntqimageformatplugin.html#keys
+"QImageFormatPlugin::~QImageFormatPlugin" ntqimageformatplugin.html#~QImageFormatPlugin
 "QImageFormatType" qimageformattype.html
 "QImageFormatType::decoderFor" qimageformattype.html#decoderFor
 "QImageFormatType::formatName" qimageformattype.html#formatName
@@ -3257,34 +3257,34 @@
 "QImageIO::status" qimageio.html#status
 "QImageIO::write" qimageio.html#write
 "QImageIO::~QImageIO" qimageio.html#~QImageIO
-"QInputDialog" qinputdialog.html
-"QInputDialog::Type" qinputdialog.html#Type
-"QInputDialog::comboBox" qinputdialog.html#comboBox
-"QInputDialog::editableComboBox" qinputdialog.html#editableComboBox
-"QInputDialog::getDouble" qinputdialog.html#getDouble
-"QInputDialog::getInteger" qinputdialog.html#getInteger
-"QInputDialog::getItem" qinputdialog.html#getItem
-"QInputDialog::getText" qinputdialog.html#getText
-"QInputDialog::lineEdit" qinputdialog.html#lineEdit
-"QInputDialog::setType" qinputdialog.html#setType
-"QInputDialog::spinBox" qinputdialog.html#spinBox
-"QInputDialog::type" qinputdialog.html#type
-"QInputDialog::~QInputDialog" qinputdialog.html#~QInputDialog
-"QIntCache" qintcache.html
-"QIntCache::clear" qintcache.html#clear
-"QIntCache::count" qintcache.html#count
-"QIntCache::find" qintcache.html#find
-"QIntCache::insert" qintcache.html#insert
-"QIntCache::isEmpty" qintcache.html#isEmpty
-"QIntCache::maxCost" qintcache.html#maxCost
-"QIntCache::operator[]" qintcache.html#operator[]
-"QIntCache::remove" qintcache.html#remove
-"QIntCache::setMaxCost" qintcache.html#setMaxCost
-"QIntCache::size" qintcache.html#size
-"QIntCache::statistics" qintcache.html#statistics
-"QIntCache::take" qintcache.html#take
-"QIntCache::totalCost" qintcache.html#totalCost
-"QIntCache::~QIntCache" qintcache.html#~QIntCache
+"QInputDialog" ntqinputdialog.html
+"QInputDialog::Type" ntqinputdialog.html#Type
+"QInputDialog::comboBox" ntqinputdialog.html#comboBox
+"QInputDialog::editableComboBox" ntqinputdialog.html#editableComboBox
+"QInputDialog::getDouble" ntqinputdialog.html#getDouble
+"QInputDialog::getInteger" ntqinputdialog.html#getInteger
+"QInputDialog::getItem" ntqinputdialog.html#getItem
+"QInputDialog::getText" ntqinputdialog.html#getText
+"QInputDialog::lineEdit" ntqinputdialog.html#lineEdit
+"QInputDialog::setType" ntqinputdialog.html#setType
+"QInputDialog::spinBox" ntqinputdialog.html#spinBox
+"QInputDialog::type" ntqinputdialog.html#type
+"QInputDialog::~QInputDialog" ntqinputdialog.html#~QInputDialog
+"QIntCache" ntqintcache.html
+"QIntCache::clear" ntqintcache.html#clear
+"QIntCache::count" ntqintcache.html#count
+"QIntCache::find" ntqintcache.html#find
+"QIntCache::insert" ntqintcache.html#insert
+"QIntCache::isEmpty" ntqintcache.html#isEmpty
+"QIntCache::maxCost" ntqintcache.html#maxCost
+"QIntCache::operator[]" ntqintcache.html#operator[]
+"QIntCache::remove" ntqintcache.html#remove
+"QIntCache::setMaxCost" ntqintcache.html#setMaxCost
+"QIntCache::size" ntqintcache.html#size
+"QIntCache::statistics" ntqintcache.html#statistics
+"QIntCache::take" ntqintcache.html#take
+"QIntCache::totalCost" ntqintcache.html#totalCost
+"QIntCache::~QIntCache" ntqintcache.html#~QIntCache
 "QIntCacheIterator" qintcacheiterator.html
 "QIntCacheIterator::atFirst" qintcacheiterator.html#atFirst
 "QIntCacheIterator::atLast" qintcacheiterator.html#atLast
@@ -3301,23 +3301,23 @@
 "QIntCacheIterator::operator=" qintcacheiterator.html#operator-eq
 "QIntCacheIterator::toFirst" qintcacheiterator.html#toFirst
 "QIntCacheIterator::toLast" qintcacheiterator.html#toLast
-"QIntDict" qintdict.html
-"QIntDict::clear" qintdict.html#clear
-"QIntDict::count" qintdict.html#count
-"QIntDict::find" qintdict.html#find
-"QIntDict::insert" qintdict.html#insert
-"QIntDict::isEmpty" qintdict.html#isEmpty
-"QIntDict::operator=" qintdict.html#operator-eq
-"QIntDict::operator[]" qintdict.html#operator[]
-"QIntDict::read" qintdict.html#read
-"QIntDict::remove" qintdict.html#remove
-"QIntDict::replace" qintdict.html#replace
-"QIntDict::resize" qintdict.html#resize
-"QIntDict::size" qintdict.html#size
-"QIntDict::statistics" qintdict.html#statistics
-"QIntDict::take" qintdict.html#take
-"QIntDict::write" qintdict.html#write
-"QIntDict::~QIntDict" qintdict.html#~QIntDict
+"QIntDict" ntqintdict.html
+"QIntDict::clear" ntqintdict.html#clear
+"QIntDict::count" ntqintdict.html#count
+"QIntDict::find" ntqintdict.html#find
+"QIntDict::insert" ntqintdict.html#insert
+"QIntDict::isEmpty" ntqintdict.html#isEmpty
+"QIntDict::operator=" ntqintdict.html#operator-eq
+"QIntDict::operator[]" ntqintdict.html#operator[]
+"QIntDict::read" ntqintdict.html#read
+"QIntDict::remove" ntqintdict.html#remove
+"QIntDict::replace" ntqintdict.html#replace
+"QIntDict::resize" ntqintdict.html#resize
+"QIntDict::size" ntqintdict.html#size
+"QIntDict::statistics" ntqintdict.html#statistics
+"QIntDict::take" ntqintdict.html#take
+"QIntDict::write" ntqintdict.html#write
+"QIntDict::~QIntDict" ntqintdict.html#~QIntDict
 "QIntDictIterator" qintdictiterator.html
 "QIntDictIterator::count" qintdictiterator.html#count
 "QIntDictIterator::current" qintdictiterator.html#current
@@ -3339,8 +3339,8 @@
 "QIntValidator::top" qintvalidator.html#top-prop
 "QIntValidator::validate" qintvalidator.html#validate
 "QIntValidator::~QIntValidator" qintvalidator.html#~QIntValidator
-"QJisCodec" qjiscodec.html
-"QJisCodec::mimeName" qjiscodec.html#mimeName
+"QJisCodec" ntqjiscodec.html
+"QJisCodec::mimeName" ntqjiscodec.html#mimeName
 "QKbdDriverFactory" qkbddriverfactory.html
 "QKbdDriverFactory::create" qkbddriverfactory.html#create
 "QKbdDriverFactory::keys" qkbddriverfactory.html#keys
@@ -3359,118 +3359,118 @@
 "QKeyEvent::state" qkeyevent.html#state
 "QKeyEvent::stateAfter" qkeyevent.html#stateAfter
 "QKeyEvent::text" qkeyevent.html#text
-"QKeySequence" qkeysequence.html
-"QKeySequence::assign" qkeysequence.html#assign
-"QKeySequence::count" qkeysequence.html#count
-"QKeySequence::decodeString" qkeysequence.html#decodeString
-"QKeySequence::encodeString" qkeysequence.html#encodeString
-"QKeySequence::isEmpty" qkeysequence.html#isEmpty
-"QKeySequence::matches" qkeysequence.html#matches
-"QKeySequence::operator QString" qkeysequence.html#operator-QString
-"QKeySequence::operator!=" qkeysequence.html#operator!-eq
-"QKeySequence::operator=" qkeysequence.html#operator-eq
-"QKeySequence::operator==" qkeysequence.html#operator-eq-eq
-"QKeySequence::operator[]" qkeysequence.html#operator[]
-"QKeySequence::~QKeySequence" qkeysequence.html#~QKeySequence
-"QLCDNumber" qlcdnumber.html
-"QLCDNumber::Mode" qlcdnumber.html#Mode
-"QLCDNumber::SegmentStyle" qlcdnumber.html#SegmentStyle
-"QLCDNumber::checkOverflow" qlcdnumber.html#checkOverflow
-"QLCDNumber::display" qlcdnumber.html#display
-"QLCDNumber::drawContents" qlcdnumber.html#drawContents
-"QLCDNumber::intValue" qlcdnumber.html#intValue
-"QLCDNumber::intValue" qlcdnumber.html#intValue-prop
-"QLCDNumber::mode" qlcdnumber.html#mode
-"QLCDNumber::mode" qlcdnumber.html#mode-prop
-"QLCDNumber::numDigits" qlcdnumber.html#numDigits
-"QLCDNumber::numDigits" qlcdnumber.html#numDigits-prop
-"QLCDNumber::overflow" qlcdnumber.html#overflow
-"QLCDNumber::segmentStyle" qlcdnumber.html#segmentStyle
-"QLCDNumber::segmentStyle" qlcdnumber.html#segmentStyle-prop
-"QLCDNumber::setBinMode" qlcdnumber.html#setBinMode
-"QLCDNumber::setDecMode" qlcdnumber.html#setDecMode
-"QLCDNumber::setHexMode" qlcdnumber.html#setHexMode
-"QLCDNumber::setMode" qlcdnumber.html#setMode
-"QLCDNumber::setNumDigits" qlcdnumber.html#setNumDigits
-"QLCDNumber::setOctMode" qlcdnumber.html#setOctMode
-"QLCDNumber::setSegmentStyle" qlcdnumber.html#setSegmentStyle
-"QLCDNumber::setSmallDecimalPoint" qlcdnumber.html#setSmallDecimalPoint
-"QLCDNumber::smallDecimalPoint" qlcdnumber.html#smallDecimalPoint
-"QLCDNumber::smallDecimalPoint" qlcdnumber.html#smallDecimalPoint-prop
-"QLCDNumber::value" qlcdnumber.html#value
-"QLCDNumber::value" qlcdnumber.html#value-prop
-"QLCDNumber::~QLCDNumber" qlcdnumber.html#~QLCDNumber
+"QKeySequence" ntqkeysequence.html
+"QKeySequence::assign" ntqkeysequence.html#assign
+"QKeySequence::count" ntqkeysequence.html#count
+"QKeySequence::decodeString" ntqkeysequence.html#decodeString
+"QKeySequence::encodeString" ntqkeysequence.html#encodeString
+"QKeySequence::isEmpty" ntqkeysequence.html#isEmpty
+"QKeySequence::matches" ntqkeysequence.html#matches
+"QKeySequence::operator QString" ntqkeysequence.html#operator-QString
+"QKeySequence::operator!=" ntqkeysequence.html#operator!-eq
+"QKeySequence::operator=" ntqkeysequence.html#operator-eq
+"QKeySequence::operator==" ntqkeysequence.html#operator-eq-eq
+"QKeySequence::operator[]" ntqkeysequence.html#operator[]
+"QKeySequence::~QKeySequence" ntqkeysequence.html#~QKeySequence
+"QLCDNumber" ntqlcdnumber.html
+"QLCDNumber::Mode" ntqlcdnumber.html#Mode
+"QLCDNumber::SegmentStyle" ntqlcdnumber.html#SegmentStyle
+"QLCDNumber::checkOverflow" ntqlcdnumber.html#checkOverflow
+"QLCDNumber::display" ntqlcdnumber.html#display
+"QLCDNumber::drawContents" ntqlcdnumber.html#drawContents
+"QLCDNumber::intValue" ntqlcdnumber.html#intValue
+"QLCDNumber::intValue" ntqlcdnumber.html#intValue-prop
+"QLCDNumber::mode" ntqlcdnumber.html#mode
+"QLCDNumber::mode" ntqlcdnumber.html#mode-prop
+"QLCDNumber::numDigits" ntqlcdnumber.html#numDigits
+"QLCDNumber::numDigits" ntqlcdnumber.html#numDigits-prop
+"QLCDNumber::overflow" ntqlcdnumber.html#overflow
+"QLCDNumber::segmentStyle" ntqlcdnumber.html#segmentStyle
+"QLCDNumber::segmentStyle" ntqlcdnumber.html#segmentStyle-prop
+"QLCDNumber::setBinMode" ntqlcdnumber.html#setBinMode
+"QLCDNumber::setDecMode" ntqlcdnumber.html#setDecMode
+"QLCDNumber::setHexMode" ntqlcdnumber.html#setHexMode
+"QLCDNumber::setMode" ntqlcdnumber.html#setMode
+"QLCDNumber::setNumDigits" ntqlcdnumber.html#setNumDigits
+"QLCDNumber::setOctMode" ntqlcdnumber.html#setOctMode
+"QLCDNumber::setSegmentStyle" ntqlcdnumber.html#setSegmentStyle
+"QLCDNumber::setSmallDecimalPoint" ntqlcdnumber.html#setSmallDecimalPoint
+"QLCDNumber::smallDecimalPoint" ntqlcdnumber.html#smallDecimalPoint
+"QLCDNumber::smallDecimalPoint" ntqlcdnumber.html#smallDecimalPoint-prop
+"QLCDNumber::value" ntqlcdnumber.html#value
+"QLCDNumber::value" ntqlcdnumber.html#value-prop
+"QLCDNumber::~QLCDNumber" ntqlcdnumber.html#~QLCDNumber
 "QLNode::getData" qlnode.html#getData
-"QLabel" qlabel.html
-"QLabel::alignment" qlabel.html#alignment
-"QLabel::alignment" qlabel.html#alignment-prop
-"QLabel::backgroundMode" qlabel.html#backgroundMode-prop
-"QLabel::buddy" qlabel.html#buddy
-"QLabel::clear" qlabel.html#clear
-"QLabel::drawContents" qlabel.html#drawContents
-"QLabel::hasScaledContents" qlabel.html#hasScaledContents
-"QLabel::indent" qlabel.html#indent
-"QLabel::indent" qlabel.html#indent-prop
-"QLabel::movie" qlabel.html#movie
-"QLabel::picture" qlabel.html#picture
-"QLabel::pixmap" qlabel.html#pixmap
-"QLabel::pixmap" qlabel.html#pixmap-prop
-"QLabel::scaledContents" qlabel.html#scaledContents-prop
-"QLabel::setAlignment" qlabel.html#setAlignment
-"QLabel::setBuddy" qlabel.html#setBuddy
-"QLabel::setFont" qlabel.html#setFont
-"QLabel::setIndent" qlabel.html#setIndent
-"QLabel::setMovie" qlabel.html#setMovie
-"QLabel::setNum" qlabel.html#setNum
-"QLabel::setPicture" qlabel.html#setPicture
-"QLabel::setPixmap" qlabel.html#setPixmap
-"QLabel::setScaledContents" qlabel.html#setScaledContents
-"QLabel::setText" qlabel.html#setText
-"QLabel::setTextFormat" qlabel.html#setTextFormat
-"QLabel::sizeForWidth" qlabel.html#sizeForWidth
-"QLabel::text" qlabel.html#text
-"QLabel::text" qlabel.html#text-prop
-"QLabel::textFormat" qlabel.html#textFormat
-"QLabel::textFormat" qlabel.html#textFormat-prop
-"QLabel::updateLabel" qlabel.html#updateLabel
-"QLabel::~QLabel" qlabel.html#~QLabel
-"QLayout" qlayout.html
-"QLayout::ResizeMode" qlayout.html#ResizeMode
-"QLayout::activate" qlayout.html#activate
-"QLayout::add" qlayout.html#add
-"QLayout::addChildLayout" qlayout.html#addChildLayout
-"QLayout::addItem" qlayout.html#addItem
-"QLayout::alignmentRect" qlayout.html#alignmentRect
-"QLayout::autoAdd" qlayout.html#autoAdd
-"QLayout::deleteAllItems" qlayout.html#deleteAllItems
-"QLayout::expanding" qlayout.html#expanding
-"QLayout::invalidate" qlayout.html#invalidate
-"QLayout::isEmpty" qlayout.html#isEmpty
-"QLayout::isEnabled" qlayout.html#isEnabled
-"QLayout::isTopLevel" qlayout.html#isTopLevel
-"QLayout::iterator" qlayout.html#iterator
-"QLayout::mainWidget" qlayout.html#mainWidget
-"QLayout::margin" qlayout.html#margin
-"QLayout::margin" qlayout.html#margin-prop
-"QLayout::maximumSize" qlayout.html#maximumSize
-"QLayout::menuBar" qlayout.html#menuBar
-"QLayout::minimumSize" qlayout.html#minimumSize
-"QLayout::remove" qlayout.html#remove
-"QLayout::removeItem" qlayout.html#removeItem
-"QLayout::resizeMode" qlayout.html#resizeMode
-"QLayout::resizeMode" qlayout.html#resizeMode-prop
-"QLayout::setAutoAdd" qlayout.html#setAutoAdd
-"QLayout::setEnabled" qlayout.html#setEnabled
-"QLayout::setGeometry" qlayout.html#setGeometry
-"QLayout::setMargin" qlayout.html#setMargin
-"QLayout::setMenuBar" qlayout.html#setMenuBar
-"QLayout::setResizeMode" qlayout.html#setResizeMode
-"QLayout::setSpacing" qlayout.html#setSpacing
-"QLayout::setSupportsMargin" qlayout.html#setSupportsMargin
-"QLayout::setWidgetLayout" qlayout.html#setWidgetLayout
-"QLayout::spacing" qlayout.html#spacing
-"QLayout::spacing" qlayout.html#spacing-prop
-"QLayout::supportsMargin" qlayout.html#supportsMargin
+"QLabel" ntqlabel.html
+"QLabel::alignment" ntqlabel.html#alignment
+"QLabel::alignment" ntqlabel.html#alignment-prop
+"QLabel::backgroundMode" ntqlabel.html#backgroundMode-prop
+"QLabel::buddy" ntqlabel.html#buddy
+"QLabel::clear" ntqlabel.html#clear
+"QLabel::drawContents" ntqlabel.html#drawContents
+"QLabel::hasScaledContents" ntqlabel.html#hasScaledContents
+"QLabel::indent" ntqlabel.html#indent
+"QLabel::indent" ntqlabel.html#indent-prop
+"QLabel::movie" ntqlabel.html#movie
+"QLabel::picture" ntqlabel.html#picture
+"QLabel::pixmap" ntqlabel.html#pixmap
+"QLabel::pixmap" ntqlabel.html#pixmap-prop
+"QLabel::scaledContents" ntqlabel.html#scaledContents-prop
+"QLabel::setAlignment" ntqlabel.html#setAlignment
+"QLabel::setBuddy" ntqlabel.html#setBuddy
+"QLabel::setFont" ntqlabel.html#setFont
+"QLabel::setIndent" ntqlabel.html#setIndent
+"QLabel::setMovie" ntqlabel.html#setMovie
+"QLabel::setNum" ntqlabel.html#setNum
+"QLabel::setPicture" ntqlabel.html#setPicture
+"QLabel::setPixmap" ntqlabel.html#setPixmap
+"QLabel::setScaledContents" ntqlabel.html#setScaledContents
+"QLabel::setText" ntqlabel.html#setText
+"QLabel::setTextFormat" ntqlabel.html#setTextFormat
+"QLabel::sizeForWidth" ntqlabel.html#sizeForWidth
+"QLabel::text" ntqlabel.html#text
+"QLabel::text" ntqlabel.html#text-prop
+"QLabel::textFormat" ntqlabel.html#textFormat
+"QLabel::textFormat" ntqlabel.html#textFormat-prop
+"QLabel::updateLabel" ntqlabel.html#updateLabel
+"QLabel::~QLabel" ntqlabel.html#~QLabel
+"QLayout" ntqlayout.html
+"QLayout::ResizeMode" ntqlayout.html#ResizeMode
+"QLayout::activate" ntqlayout.html#activate
+"QLayout::add" ntqlayout.html#add
+"QLayout::addChildLayout" ntqlayout.html#addChildLayout
+"QLayout::addItem" ntqlayout.html#addItem
+"QLayout::alignmentRect" ntqlayout.html#alignmentRect
+"QLayout::autoAdd" ntqlayout.html#autoAdd
+"QLayout::deleteAllItems" ntqlayout.html#deleteAllItems
+"QLayout::expanding" ntqlayout.html#expanding
+"QLayout::invalidate" ntqlayout.html#invalidate
+"QLayout::isEmpty" ntqlayout.html#isEmpty
+"QLayout::isEnabled" ntqlayout.html#isEnabled
+"QLayout::isTopLevel" ntqlayout.html#isTopLevel
+"QLayout::iterator" ntqlayout.html#iterator
+"QLayout::mainWidget" ntqlayout.html#mainWidget
+"QLayout::margin" ntqlayout.html#margin
+"QLayout::margin" ntqlayout.html#margin-prop
+"QLayout::maximumSize" ntqlayout.html#maximumSize
+"QLayout::menuBar" ntqlayout.html#menuBar
+"QLayout::minimumSize" ntqlayout.html#minimumSize
+"QLayout::remove" ntqlayout.html#remove
+"QLayout::removeItem" ntqlayout.html#removeItem
+"QLayout::resizeMode" ntqlayout.html#resizeMode
+"QLayout::resizeMode" ntqlayout.html#resizeMode-prop
+"QLayout::setAutoAdd" ntqlayout.html#setAutoAdd
+"QLayout::setEnabled" ntqlayout.html#setEnabled
+"QLayout::setGeometry" ntqlayout.html#setGeometry
+"QLayout::setMargin" ntqlayout.html#setMargin
+"QLayout::setMenuBar" ntqlayout.html#setMenuBar
+"QLayout::setResizeMode" ntqlayout.html#setResizeMode
+"QLayout::setSpacing" ntqlayout.html#setSpacing
+"QLayout::setSupportsMargin" ntqlayout.html#setSupportsMargin
+"QLayout::setWidgetLayout" ntqlayout.html#setWidgetLayout
+"QLayout::spacing" ntqlayout.html#spacing
+"QLayout::spacing" ntqlayout.html#spacing-prop
+"QLayout::supportsMargin" ntqlayout.html#supportsMargin
 "QLayoutItem" qlayoutitem.html
 "QLayoutItem::alignment" qlayoutitem.html#alignment
 "QLayoutItem::expanding" qlayoutitem.html#expanding
@@ -3496,90 +3496,90 @@
 "QLayoutIterator::operator=" qlayoutiterator.html#operator-eq
 "QLayoutIterator::takeCurrent" qlayoutiterator.html#takeCurrent
 "QLayoutIterator::~QLayoutIterator" qlayoutiterator.html#~QLayoutIterator
-"QLibrary" qlibrary.html
-"QLibrary::autoUnload" qlibrary.html#autoUnload
-"QLibrary::isLoaded" qlibrary.html#isLoaded
-"QLibrary::library" qlibrary.html#library
-"QLibrary::load" qlibrary.html#load
-"QLibrary::resolve" qlibrary.html#resolve
-"QLibrary::setAutoUnload" qlibrary.html#setAutoUnload
-"QLibrary::unload" qlibrary.html#unload
-"QLibrary::~QLibrary" qlibrary.html#~QLibrary
-"QLineEdit" qlineedit.html
-"QLineEdit::EchoMode" qlineedit.html#EchoMode
-"QLineEdit::acceptableInput" qlineedit.html#acceptableInput-prop
-"QLineEdit::alignment" qlineedit.html#alignment
-"QLineEdit::alignment" qlineedit.html#alignment-prop
-"QLineEdit::backspace" qlineedit.html#backspace
-"QLineEdit::clear" qlineedit.html#clear
-"QLineEdit::clearModified" qlineedit.html#clearModified
-"QLineEdit::clearValidator" qlineedit.html#clearValidator
-"QLineEdit::copy" qlineedit.html#copy
-"QLineEdit::createPopupMenu" qlineedit.html#createPopupMenu
-"QLineEdit::cursorBackward" qlineedit.html#cursorBackward
-"QLineEdit::cursorForward" qlineedit.html#cursorForward
-"QLineEdit::cursorPosition" qlineedit.html#cursorPosition
-"QLineEdit::cursorPosition" qlineedit.html#cursorPosition-prop
-"QLineEdit::cursorWordBackward" qlineedit.html#cursorWordBackward
-"QLineEdit::cursorWordForward" qlineedit.html#cursorWordForward
-"QLineEdit::cut" qlineedit.html#cut
-"QLineEdit::del" qlineedit.html#del
-"QLineEdit::deselect" qlineedit.html#deselect
-"QLineEdit::displayText" qlineedit.html#displayText
-"QLineEdit::displayText" qlineedit.html#displayText-prop
-"QLineEdit::dragEnabled" qlineedit.html#dragEnabled
-"QLineEdit::dragEnabled" qlineedit.html#dragEnabled-prop
-"QLineEdit::echoMode" qlineedit.html#echoMode
-"QLineEdit::echoMode" qlineedit.html#echoMode-prop
-"QLineEdit::end" qlineedit.html#end
-"QLineEdit::frame" qlineedit.html#frame
-"QLineEdit::frame" qlineedit.html#frame-prop
-"QLineEdit::hasAcceptableInput" qlineedit.html#hasAcceptableInput
-"QLineEdit::hasSelectedText" qlineedit.html#hasSelectedText
-"QLineEdit::hasSelectedText" qlineedit.html#hasSelectedText-prop
-"QLineEdit::home" qlineedit.html#home
-"QLineEdit::inputMask" qlineedit.html#inputMask
-"QLineEdit::inputMask" qlineedit.html#inputMask-prop
-"QLineEdit::insert" qlineedit.html#insert
-"QLineEdit::isModified" qlineedit.html#isModified
-"QLineEdit::isReadOnly" qlineedit.html#isReadOnly
-"QLineEdit::isRedoAvailable" qlineedit.html#isRedoAvailable
-"QLineEdit::isUndoAvailable" qlineedit.html#isUndoAvailable
-"QLineEdit::keyPressEvent" qlineedit.html#keyPressEvent
-"QLineEdit::lostFocus" qlineedit.html#lostFocus
-"QLineEdit::maxLength" qlineedit.html#maxLength
-"QLineEdit::maxLength" qlineedit.html#maxLength-prop
-"QLineEdit::minimumSizeHint" qlineedit.html#minimumSizeHint
-"QLineEdit::modified" qlineedit.html#modified-prop
-"QLineEdit::paste" qlineedit.html#paste
-"QLineEdit::readOnly" qlineedit.html#readOnly-prop
-"QLineEdit::redo" qlineedit.html#redo
-"QLineEdit::redoAvailable" qlineedit.html#redoAvailable-prop
-"QLineEdit::returnPressed" qlineedit.html#returnPressed
-"QLineEdit::selectAll" qlineedit.html#selectAll
-"QLineEdit::selectedText" qlineedit.html#selectedText
-"QLineEdit::selectedText" qlineedit.html#selectedText-prop
-"QLineEdit::selectionChanged" qlineedit.html#selectionChanged
-"QLineEdit::selectionStart" qlineedit.html#selectionStart
-"QLineEdit::setAlignment" qlineedit.html#setAlignment
-"QLineEdit::setCursorPosition" qlineedit.html#setCursorPosition
-"QLineEdit::setDragEnabled" qlineedit.html#setDragEnabled
-"QLineEdit::setEchoMode" qlineedit.html#setEchoMode
-"QLineEdit::setFrame" qlineedit.html#setFrame
-"QLineEdit::setInputMask" qlineedit.html#setInputMask
-"QLineEdit::setMaxLength" qlineedit.html#setMaxLength
-"QLineEdit::setReadOnly" qlineedit.html#setReadOnly
-"QLineEdit::setSelection" qlineedit.html#setSelection
-"QLineEdit::setText" qlineedit.html#setText
-"QLineEdit::setValidator" qlineedit.html#setValidator
-"QLineEdit::sizeHint" qlineedit.html#sizeHint
-"QLineEdit::text" qlineedit.html#text
-"QLineEdit::text" qlineedit.html#text-prop
-"QLineEdit::textChanged" qlineedit.html#textChanged
-"QLineEdit::undo" qlineedit.html#undo
-"QLineEdit::undoAvailable" qlineedit.html#undoAvailable-prop
-"QLineEdit::validator" qlineedit.html#validator
-"QLineEdit::~QLineEdit" qlineedit.html#~QLineEdit
+"QLibrary" ntqlibrary.html
+"QLibrary::autoUnload" ntqlibrary.html#autoUnload
+"QLibrary::isLoaded" ntqlibrary.html#isLoaded
+"QLibrary::library" ntqlibrary.html#library
+"QLibrary::load" ntqlibrary.html#load
+"QLibrary::resolve" ntqlibrary.html#resolve
+"QLibrary::setAutoUnload" ntqlibrary.html#setAutoUnload
+"QLibrary::unload" ntqlibrary.html#unload
+"QLibrary::~QLibrary" ntqlibrary.html#~QLibrary
+"QLineEdit" ntqlineedit.html
+"QLineEdit::EchoMode" ntqlineedit.html#EchoMode
+"QLineEdit::acceptableInput" ntqlineedit.html#acceptableInput-prop
+"QLineEdit::alignment" ntqlineedit.html#alignment
+"QLineEdit::alignment" ntqlineedit.html#alignment-prop
+"QLineEdit::backspace" ntqlineedit.html#backspace
+"QLineEdit::clear" ntqlineedit.html#clear
+"QLineEdit::clearModified" ntqlineedit.html#clearModified
+"QLineEdit::clearValidator" ntqlineedit.html#clearValidator
+"QLineEdit::copy" ntqlineedit.html#copy
+"QLineEdit::createPopupMenu" ntqlineedit.html#createPopupMenu
+"QLineEdit::cursorBackward" ntqlineedit.html#cursorBackward
+"QLineEdit::cursorForward" ntqlineedit.html#cursorForward
+"QLineEdit::cursorPosition" ntqlineedit.html#cursorPosition
+"QLineEdit::cursorPosition" ntqlineedit.html#cursorPosition-prop
+"QLineEdit::cursorWordBackward" ntqlineedit.html#cursorWordBackward
+"QLineEdit::cursorWordForward" ntqlineedit.html#cursorWordForward
+"QLineEdit::cut" ntqlineedit.html#cut
+"QLineEdit::del" ntqlineedit.html#del
+"QLineEdit::deselect" ntqlineedit.html#deselect
+"QLineEdit::displayText" ntqlineedit.html#displayText
+"QLineEdit::displayText" ntqlineedit.html#displayText-prop
+"QLineEdit::dragEnabled" ntqlineedit.html#dragEnabled
+"QLineEdit::dragEnabled" ntqlineedit.html#dragEnabled-prop
+"QLineEdit::echoMode" ntqlineedit.html#echoMode
+"QLineEdit::echoMode" ntqlineedit.html#echoMode-prop
+"QLineEdit::end" ntqlineedit.html#end
+"QLineEdit::frame" ntqlineedit.html#frame
+"QLineEdit::frame" ntqlineedit.html#frame-prop
+"QLineEdit::hasAcceptableInput" ntqlineedit.html#hasAcceptableInput
+"QLineEdit::hasSelectedText" ntqlineedit.html#hasSelectedText
+"QLineEdit::hasSelectedText" ntqlineedit.html#hasSelectedText-prop
+"QLineEdit::home" ntqlineedit.html#home
+"QLineEdit::inputMask" ntqlineedit.html#inputMask
+"QLineEdit::inputMask" ntqlineedit.html#inputMask-prop
+"QLineEdit::insert" ntqlineedit.html#insert
+"QLineEdit::isModified" ntqlineedit.html#isModified
+"QLineEdit::isReadOnly" ntqlineedit.html#isReadOnly
+"QLineEdit::isRedoAvailable" ntqlineedit.html#isRedoAvailable
+"QLineEdit::isUndoAvailable" ntqlineedit.html#isUndoAvailable
+"QLineEdit::keyPressEvent" ntqlineedit.html#keyPressEvent
+"QLineEdit::lostFocus" ntqlineedit.html#lostFocus
+"QLineEdit::maxLength" ntqlineedit.html#maxLength
+"QLineEdit::maxLength" ntqlineedit.html#maxLength-prop
+"QLineEdit::minimumSizeHint" ntqlineedit.html#minimumSizeHint
+"QLineEdit::modified" ntqlineedit.html#modified-prop
+"QLineEdit::paste" ntqlineedit.html#paste
+"QLineEdit::readOnly" ntqlineedit.html#readOnly-prop
+"QLineEdit::redo" ntqlineedit.html#redo
+"QLineEdit::redoAvailable" ntqlineedit.html#redoAvailable-prop
+"QLineEdit::returnPressed" ntqlineedit.html#returnPressed
+"QLineEdit::selectAll" ntqlineedit.html#selectAll
+"QLineEdit::selectedText" ntqlineedit.html#selectedText
+"QLineEdit::selectedText" ntqlineedit.html#selectedText-prop
+"QLineEdit::selectionChanged" ntqlineedit.html#selectionChanged
+"QLineEdit::selectionStart" ntqlineedit.html#selectionStart
+"QLineEdit::setAlignment" ntqlineedit.html#setAlignment
+"QLineEdit::setCursorPosition" ntqlineedit.html#setCursorPosition
+"QLineEdit::setDragEnabled" ntqlineedit.html#setDragEnabled
+"QLineEdit::setEchoMode" ntqlineedit.html#setEchoMode
+"QLineEdit::setFrame" ntqlineedit.html#setFrame
+"QLineEdit::setInputMask" ntqlineedit.html#setInputMask
+"QLineEdit::setMaxLength" ntqlineedit.html#setMaxLength
+"QLineEdit::setReadOnly" ntqlineedit.html#setReadOnly
+"QLineEdit::setSelection" ntqlineedit.html#setSelection
+"QLineEdit::setText" ntqlineedit.html#setText
+"QLineEdit::setValidator" ntqlineedit.html#setValidator
+"QLineEdit::sizeHint" ntqlineedit.html#sizeHint
+"QLineEdit::text" ntqlineedit.html#text
+"QLineEdit::text" ntqlineedit.html#text-prop
+"QLineEdit::textChanged" ntqlineedit.html#textChanged
+"QLineEdit::undo" ntqlineedit.html#undo
+"QLineEdit::undoAvailable" ntqlineedit.html#undoAvailable-prop
+"QLineEdit::validator" ntqlineedit.html#validator
+"QLineEdit::~QLineEdit" ntqlineedit.html#~QLineEdit
 "QLinuxFbScreen::cache" qlinuxfbscreen.html#cache
 "QLinuxFbScreen::connect" qlinuxfbscreen.html#connect
 "QLinuxFbScreen::deleteEntry" qlinuxfbscreen.html#deleteEntry
@@ -3592,96 +3592,96 @@
 "QLinuxFbScreen::shutdownDevice" qlinuxfbscreen.html#shutdownDevice
 "QLinuxFbScreen::uncache" qlinuxfbscreen.html#uncache
 "QLinuxFbScreen::~QLinuxFbScreen" qlinuxfbscreen.html#~QLinuxFbScreen
-"QList Class Reference (obsolete)" qlist.html
-"QListBox" qlistbox.html
-"QListBox::LayoutMode" qlistbox.html#LayoutMode
-"QListBox::SelectionMode" qlistbox.html#SelectionMode
-"QListBox::changeItem" qlistbox.html#changeItem
-"QListBox::clear" qlistbox.html#clear
-"QListBox::clearSelection" qlistbox.html#clearSelection
-"QListBox::clicked" qlistbox.html#clicked
-"QListBox::columnAt" qlistbox.html#columnAt
-"QListBox::columnMode" qlistbox.html#columnMode
-"QListBox::columnMode" qlistbox.html#columnMode-prop
-"QListBox::contextMenuRequested" qlistbox.html#contextMenuRequested
-"QListBox::count" qlistbox.html#count
-"QListBox::count" qlistbox.html#count-prop
-"QListBox::currentChanged" qlistbox.html#currentChanged
-"QListBox::currentColumn" qlistbox.html#currentColumn
-"QListBox::currentItem" qlistbox.html#currentItem
-"QListBox::currentItem" qlistbox.html#currentItem-prop
-"QListBox::currentRow" qlistbox.html#currentRow
-"QListBox::currentText" qlistbox.html#currentText
-"QListBox::currentText" qlistbox.html#currentText-prop
-"QListBox::doLayout" qlistbox.html#doLayout
-"QListBox::doubleClicked" qlistbox.html#doubleClicked
-"QListBox::ensureCurrentVisible" qlistbox.html#ensureCurrentVisible
-"QListBox::findItem" qlistbox.html#findItem
-"QListBox::firstItem" qlistbox.html#firstItem
-"QListBox::highlighted" qlistbox.html#highlighted
-"QListBox::index" qlistbox.html#index
-"QListBox::insertItem" qlistbox.html#insertItem
-"QListBox::insertStrList" qlistbox.html#insertStrList
-"QListBox::insertStringList" qlistbox.html#insertStringList
-"QListBox::invertSelection" qlistbox.html#invertSelection
-"QListBox::isRubberSelecting" qlistbox.html#isRubberSelecting
-"QListBox::isSelected" qlistbox.html#isSelected
-"QListBox::item" qlistbox.html#item
-"QListBox::itemAt" qlistbox.html#itemAt
-"QListBox::itemHeight" qlistbox.html#itemHeight
-"QListBox::itemRect" qlistbox.html#itemRect
-"QListBox::itemVisible" qlistbox.html#itemVisible
-"QListBox::maxItemWidth" qlistbox.html#maxItemWidth
-"QListBox::mouseButtonClicked" qlistbox.html#mouseButtonClicked
-"QListBox::mouseButtonPressed" qlistbox.html#mouseButtonPressed
-"QListBox::numColumns" qlistbox.html#numColumns
-"QListBox::numColumns" qlistbox.html#numColumns-prop
-"QListBox::numItemsVisible" qlistbox.html#numItemsVisible
-"QListBox::numItemsVisible" qlistbox.html#numItemsVisible-prop
-"QListBox::numRows" qlistbox.html#numRows
-"QListBox::numRows" qlistbox.html#numRows-prop
-"QListBox::onItem" qlistbox.html#onItem
-"QListBox::onViewport" qlistbox.html#onViewport
-"QListBox::paintCell" qlistbox.html#paintCell
-"QListBox::pixmap" qlistbox.html#pixmap
-"QListBox::pressed" qlistbox.html#pressed
-"QListBox::refreshSlot" qlistbox.html#refreshSlot
-"QListBox::removeItem" qlistbox.html#removeItem
-"QListBox::returnPressed" qlistbox.html#returnPressed
-"QListBox::rightButtonClicked" qlistbox.html#rightButtonClicked
-"QListBox::rightButtonPressed" qlistbox.html#rightButtonPressed
-"QListBox::rowAt" qlistbox.html#rowAt
-"QListBox::rowMode" qlistbox.html#rowMode
-"QListBox::rowMode" qlistbox.html#rowMode-prop
-"QListBox::selectAll" qlistbox.html#selectAll
-"QListBox::selected" qlistbox.html#selected
-"QListBox::selectedItem" qlistbox.html#selectedItem
-"QListBox::selectionChanged" qlistbox.html#selectionChanged
-"QListBox::selectionMode" qlistbox.html#selectionMode
-"QListBox::selectionMode" qlistbox.html#selectionMode-prop
-"QListBox::setBottomItem" qlistbox.html#setBottomItem
-"QListBox::setColumnMode" qlistbox.html#setColumnMode
-"QListBox::setCurrentItem" qlistbox.html#setCurrentItem
-"QListBox::setRowMode" qlistbox.html#setRowMode
-"QListBox::setSelected" qlistbox.html#setSelected
-"QListBox::setSelectionMode" qlistbox.html#setSelectionMode
-"QListBox::setTopItem" qlistbox.html#setTopItem
-"QListBox::setVariableHeight" qlistbox.html#setVariableHeight
-"QListBox::setVariableWidth" qlistbox.html#setVariableWidth
-"QListBox::sort" qlistbox.html#sort
-"QListBox::takeItem" qlistbox.html#takeItem
-"QListBox::text" qlistbox.html#text
-"QListBox::toggleCurrentItem" qlistbox.html#toggleCurrentItem
-"QListBox::topItem" qlistbox.html#topItem
-"QListBox::topItem" qlistbox.html#topItem-prop
-"QListBox::triggerUpdate" qlistbox.html#triggerUpdate
-"QListBox::tryGeometry" qlistbox.html#tryGeometry
-"QListBox::updateItem" qlistbox.html#updateItem
-"QListBox::variableHeight" qlistbox.html#variableHeight
-"QListBox::variableHeight" qlistbox.html#variableHeight-prop
-"QListBox::variableWidth" qlistbox.html#variableWidth
-"QListBox::variableWidth" qlistbox.html#variableWidth-prop
-"QListBox::~QListBox" qlistbox.html#~QListBox
+"QList Class Reference (obsolete)" ntqlist.html
+"QListBox" ntqlistbox.html
+"QListBox::LayoutMode" ntqlistbox.html#LayoutMode
+"QListBox::SelectionMode" ntqlistbox.html#SelectionMode
+"QListBox::changeItem" ntqlistbox.html#changeItem
+"QListBox::clear" ntqlistbox.html#clear
+"QListBox::clearSelection" ntqlistbox.html#clearSelection
+"QListBox::clicked" ntqlistbox.html#clicked
+"QListBox::columnAt" ntqlistbox.html#columnAt
+"QListBox::columnMode" ntqlistbox.html#columnMode
+"QListBox::columnMode" ntqlistbox.html#columnMode-prop
+"QListBox::contextMenuRequested" ntqlistbox.html#contextMenuRequested
+"QListBox::count" ntqlistbox.html#count
+"QListBox::count" ntqlistbox.html#count-prop
+"QListBox::currentChanged" ntqlistbox.html#currentChanged
+"QListBox::currentColumn" ntqlistbox.html#currentColumn
+"QListBox::currentItem" ntqlistbox.html#currentItem
+"QListBox::currentItem" ntqlistbox.html#currentItem-prop
+"QListBox::currentRow" ntqlistbox.html#currentRow
+"QListBox::currentText" ntqlistbox.html#currentText
+"QListBox::currentText" ntqlistbox.html#currentText-prop
+"QListBox::doLayout" ntqlistbox.html#doLayout
+"QListBox::doubleClicked" ntqlistbox.html#doubleClicked
+"QListBox::ensureCurrentVisible" ntqlistbox.html#ensureCurrentVisible
+"QListBox::findItem" ntqlistbox.html#findItem
+"QListBox::firstItem" ntqlistbox.html#firstItem
+"QListBox::highlighted" ntqlistbox.html#highlighted
+"QListBox::index" ntqlistbox.html#index
+"QListBox::insertItem" ntqlistbox.html#insertItem
+"QListBox::insertStrList" ntqlistbox.html#insertStrList
+"QListBox::insertStringList" ntqlistbox.html#insertStringList
+"QListBox::invertSelection" ntqlistbox.html#invertSelection
+"QListBox::isRubberSelecting" ntqlistbox.html#isRubberSelecting
+"QListBox::isSelected" ntqlistbox.html#isSelected
+"QListBox::item" ntqlistbox.html#item
+"QListBox::itemAt" ntqlistbox.html#itemAt
+"QListBox::itemHeight" ntqlistbox.html#itemHeight
+"QListBox::itemRect" ntqlistbox.html#itemRect
+"QListBox::itemVisible" ntqlistbox.html#itemVisible
+"QListBox::maxItemWidth" ntqlistbox.html#maxItemWidth
+"QListBox::mouseButtonClicked" ntqlistbox.html#mouseButtonClicked
+"QListBox::mouseButtonPressed" ntqlistbox.html#mouseButtonPressed
+"QListBox::numColumns" ntqlistbox.html#numColumns
+"QListBox::numColumns" ntqlistbox.html#numColumns-prop
+"QListBox::numItemsVisible" ntqlistbox.html#numItemsVisible
+"QListBox::numItemsVisible" ntqlistbox.html#numItemsVisible-prop
+"QListBox::numRows" ntqlistbox.html#numRows
+"QListBox::numRows" ntqlistbox.html#numRows-prop
+"QListBox::onItem" ntqlistbox.html#onItem
+"QListBox::onViewport" ntqlistbox.html#onViewport
+"QListBox::paintCell" ntqlistbox.html#paintCell
+"QListBox::pixmap" ntqlistbox.html#pixmap
+"QListBox::pressed" ntqlistbox.html#pressed
+"QListBox::refreshSlot" ntqlistbox.html#refreshSlot
+"QListBox::removeItem" ntqlistbox.html#removeItem
+"QListBox::returnPressed" ntqlistbox.html#returnPressed
+"QListBox::rightButtonClicked" ntqlistbox.html#rightButtonClicked
+"QListBox::rightButtonPressed" ntqlistbox.html#rightButtonPressed
+"QListBox::rowAt" ntqlistbox.html#rowAt
+"QListBox::rowMode" ntqlistbox.html#rowMode
+"QListBox::rowMode" ntqlistbox.html#rowMode-prop
+"QListBox::selectAll" ntqlistbox.html#selectAll
+"QListBox::selected" ntqlistbox.html#selected
+"QListBox::selectedItem" ntqlistbox.html#selectedItem
+"QListBox::selectionChanged" ntqlistbox.html#selectionChanged
+"QListBox::selectionMode" ntqlistbox.html#selectionMode
+"QListBox::selectionMode" ntqlistbox.html#selectionMode-prop
+"QListBox::setBottomItem" ntqlistbox.html#setBottomItem
+"QListBox::setColumnMode" ntqlistbox.html#setColumnMode
+"QListBox::setCurrentItem" ntqlistbox.html#setCurrentItem
+"QListBox::setRowMode" ntqlistbox.html#setRowMode
+"QListBox::setSelected" ntqlistbox.html#setSelected
+"QListBox::setSelectionMode" ntqlistbox.html#setSelectionMode
+"QListBox::setTopItem" ntqlistbox.html#setTopItem
+"QListBox::setVariableHeight" ntqlistbox.html#setVariableHeight
+"QListBox::setVariableWidth" ntqlistbox.html#setVariableWidth
+"QListBox::sort" ntqlistbox.html#sort
+"QListBox::takeItem" ntqlistbox.html#takeItem
+"QListBox::text" ntqlistbox.html#text
+"QListBox::toggleCurrentItem" ntqlistbox.html#toggleCurrentItem
+"QListBox::topItem" ntqlistbox.html#topItem
+"QListBox::topItem" ntqlistbox.html#topItem-prop
+"QListBox::triggerUpdate" ntqlistbox.html#triggerUpdate
+"QListBox::tryGeometry" ntqlistbox.html#tryGeometry
+"QListBox::updateItem" ntqlistbox.html#updateItem
+"QListBox::variableHeight" ntqlistbox.html#variableHeight
+"QListBox::variableHeight" ntqlistbox.html#variableHeight-prop
+"QListBox::variableWidth" ntqlistbox.html#variableWidth
+"QListBox::variableWidth" ntqlistbox.html#variableWidth-prop
+"QListBox::~QListBox" ntqlistbox.html#~QListBox
 "QListBoxItem" qlistboxitem.html
 "QListBoxItem::height" qlistboxitem.html#height
 "QListBoxItem::isCurrent" qlistboxitem.html#isCurrent
@@ -3711,120 +3711,120 @@
 "QListBoxText::width" qlistboxtext.html#width
 "QListBoxText::~QListBoxText" qlistboxtext.html#~QListBoxText
 "QListIterator Class Reference (obsolete)" qlistiterator.html
-"QListView" qlistview.html
-"QListView::RenameAction" qlistview.html#RenameAction
-"QListView::ResizeMode" qlistview.html#ResizeMode
-"QListView::SelectionMode" qlistview.html#SelectionMode
-"QListView::WidthMode" qlistview.html#WidthMode
-"QListView::addColumn" qlistview.html#addColumn
-"QListView::adjustColumn" qlistview.html#adjustColumn
-"QListView::allColumnsShowFocus" qlistview.html#allColumnsShowFocus
-"QListView::allColumnsShowFocus" qlistview.html#allColumnsShowFocus-prop
-"QListView::changeSortColumn" qlistview.html#changeSortColumn
-"QListView::childCount" qlistview.html#childCount
-"QListView::childCount" qlistview.html#childCount-prop
-"QListView::clear" qlistview.html#clear
-"QListView::clearSelection" qlistview.html#clearSelection
-"QListView::clicked" qlistview.html#clicked
-"QListView::collapsed" qlistview.html#collapsed
-"QListView::columnAlignment" qlistview.html#columnAlignment
-"QListView::columnText" qlistview.html#columnText
-"QListView::columnWidth" qlistview.html#columnWidth
-"QListView::columnWidthMode" qlistview.html#columnWidthMode
-"QListView::columns" qlistview.html#columns
-"QListView::columns" qlistview.html#columns-prop
-"QListView::contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent" qlistview.html#contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent
-"QListView::contentsMouseMoveEvent" qlistview.html#contentsMouseMoveEvent
-"QListView::contentsMousePressEvent" qlistview.html#contentsMousePressEvent
-"QListView::contentsMouseReleaseEvent" qlistview.html#contentsMouseReleaseEvent
-"QListView::contextMenuRequested" qlistview.html#contextMenuRequested
-"QListView::currentChanged" qlistview.html#currentChanged
-"QListView::currentItem" qlistview.html#currentItem
-"QListView::defaultRenameAction" qlistview.html#defaultRenameAction
-"QListView::defaultRenameAction" qlistview.html#defaultRenameAction-prop
-"QListView::doAutoScroll" qlistview.html#doAutoScroll
-"QListView::doubleClicked" qlistview.html#doubleClicked
-"QListView::dragObject" qlistview.html#dragObject
-"QListView::drawContentsOffset" qlistview.html#drawContentsOffset
-"QListView::dropped" qlistview.html#dropped
-"QListView::ensureItemVisible" qlistview.html#ensureItemVisible
-"QListView::eventFilter" qlistview.html#eventFilter
-"QListView::expanded" qlistview.html#expanded
-"QListView::findItem" qlistview.html#findItem
-"QListView::firstChild" qlistview.html#firstChild
-"QListView::handleSizeChange" qlistview.html#handleSizeChange
-"QListView::header" qlistview.html#header
-"QListView::hideColumn" qlistview.html#hideColumn
-"QListView::insertItem" qlistview.html#insertItem
-"QListView::invertSelection" qlistview.html#invertSelection
-"QListView::isOpen" qlistview.html#isOpen
-"QListView::isRenaming" qlistview.html#isRenaming
-"QListView::isSelected" qlistview.html#isSelected
-"QListView::itemAt" qlistview.html#itemAt
-"QListView::itemMargin" qlistview.html#itemMargin
-"QListView::itemMargin" qlistview.html#itemMargin-prop
-"QListView::itemPos" qlistview.html#itemPos
-"QListView::itemRect" qlistview.html#itemRect
-"QListView::itemRenamed" qlistview.html#itemRenamed
-"QListView::lastItem" qlistview.html#lastItem
-"QListView::mouseButtonClicked" qlistview.html#mouseButtonClicked
-"QListView::mouseButtonPressed" qlistview.html#mouseButtonPressed
-"QListView::onItem" qlistview.html#onItem
-"QListView::onViewport" qlistview.html#onViewport
-"QListView::paintEmptyArea" qlistview.html#paintEmptyArea
-"QListView::pressed" qlistview.html#pressed
-"QListView::reconfigureItems" qlistview.html#reconfigureItems
-"QListView::removeColumn" qlistview.html#removeColumn
-"QListView::repaintItem" qlistview.html#repaintItem
-"QListView::resizeEvent" qlistview.html#resizeEvent
-"QListView::resizeMode" qlistview.html#resizeMode
-"QListView::resizeMode" qlistview.html#resizeMode-prop
-"QListView::returnPressed" qlistview.html#returnPressed
-"QListView::rightButtonClicked" qlistview.html#rightButtonClicked
-"QListView::rightButtonPressed" qlistview.html#rightButtonPressed
-"QListView::rootIsDecorated" qlistview.html#rootIsDecorated
-"QListView::rootIsDecorated" qlistview.html#rootIsDecorated-prop
-"QListView::selectAll" qlistview.html#selectAll
-"QListView::selectedItem" qlistview.html#selectedItem
-"QListView::selectionChanged" qlistview.html#selectionChanged
-"QListView::selectionMode" qlistview.html#selectionMode
-"QListView::selectionMode" qlistview.html#selectionMode-prop
-"QListView::setAllColumnsShowFocus" qlistview.html#setAllColumnsShowFocus
-"QListView::setColumnAlignment" qlistview.html#setColumnAlignment
-"QListView::setColumnText" qlistview.html#setColumnText
-"QListView::setColumnWidth" qlistview.html#setColumnWidth
-"QListView::setColumnWidthMode" qlistview.html#setColumnWidthMode
-"QListView::setCurrentItem" qlistview.html#setCurrentItem
-"QListView::setDefaultRenameAction" qlistview.html#setDefaultRenameAction
-"QListView::setItemMargin" qlistview.html#setItemMargin
-"QListView::setOpen" qlistview.html#setOpen
-"QListView::setResizeMode" qlistview.html#setResizeMode
-"QListView::setRootIsDecorated" qlistview.html#setRootIsDecorated
-"QListView::setSelected" qlistview.html#setSelected
-"QListView::setSelectionAnchor" qlistview.html#setSelectionAnchor
-"QListView::setSelectionMode" qlistview.html#setSelectionMode
-"QListView::setShowSortIndicator" qlistview.html#setShowSortIndicator
-"QListView::setShowToolTips" qlistview.html#setShowToolTips
-"QListView::setSortColumn" qlistview.html#setSortColumn
-"QListView::setSortOrder" qlistview.html#setSortOrder
-"QListView::setSorting" qlistview.html#setSorting
-"QListView::setTreeStepSize" qlistview.html#setTreeStepSize
-"QListView::showSortIndicator" qlistview.html#showSortIndicator
-"QListView::showSortIndicator" qlistview.html#showSortIndicator-prop
-"QListView::showToolTips" qlistview.html#showToolTips
-"QListView::showToolTips" qlistview.html#showToolTips-prop
-"QListView::sort" qlistview.html#sort
-"QListView::sortColumn" qlistview.html#sortColumn
-"QListView::sortOrder" qlistview.html#sortOrder
-"QListView::spacePressed" qlistview.html#spacePressed
-"QListView::startDrag" qlistview.html#startDrag
-"QListView::takeItem" qlistview.html#takeItem
-"QListView::treeStepSize" qlistview.html#treeStepSize
-"QListView::treeStepSize" qlistview.html#treeStepSize-prop
-"QListView::triggerUpdate" qlistview.html#triggerUpdate
-"QListView::updateContents" qlistview.html#updateContents
-"QListView::widthChanged" qlistview.html#widthChanged
-"QListView::~QListView" qlistview.html#~QListView
+"QListView" ntqlistview.html
+"QListView::RenameAction" ntqlistview.html#RenameAction
+"QListView::ResizeMode" ntqlistview.html#ResizeMode
+"QListView::SelectionMode" ntqlistview.html#SelectionMode
+"QListView::WidthMode" ntqlistview.html#WidthMode
+"QListView::addColumn" ntqlistview.html#addColumn
+"QListView::adjustColumn" ntqlistview.html#adjustColumn
+"QListView::allColumnsShowFocus" ntqlistview.html#allColumnsShowFocus
+"QListView::allColumnsShowFocus" ntqlistview.html#allColumnsShowFocus-prop
+"QListView::changeSortColumn" ntqlistview.html#changeSortColumn
+"QListView::childCount" ntqlistview.html#childCount
+"QListView::childCount" ntqlistview.html#childCount-prop
+"QListView::clear" ntqlistview.html#clear
+"QListView::clearSelection" ntqlistview.html#clearSelection
+"QListView::clicked" ntqlistview.html#clicked
+"QListView::collapsed" ntqlistview.html#collapsed
+"QListView::columnAlignment" ntqlistview.html#columnAlignment
+"QListView::columnText" ntqlistview.html#columnText
+"QListView::columnWidth" ntqlistview.html#columnWidth
+"QListView::columnWidthMode" ntqlistview.html#columnWidthMode
+"QListView::columns" ntqlistview.html#columns
+"QListView::columns" ntqlistview.html#columns-prop
+"QListView::contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent" ntqlistview.html#contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent
+"QListView::contentsMouseMoveEvent" ntqlistview.html#contentsMouseMoveEvent
+"QListView::contentsMousePressEvent" ntqlistview.html#contentsMousePressEvent
+"QListView::contentsMouseReleaseEvent" ntqlistview.html#contentsMouseReleaseEvent
+"QListView::contextMenuRequested" ntqlistview.html#contextMenuRequested
+"QListView::currentChanged" ntqlistview.html#currentChanged
+"QListView::currentItem" ntqlistview.html#currentItem
+"QListView::defaultRenameAction" ntqlistview.html#defaultRenameAction
+"QListView::defaultRenameAction" ntqlistview.html#defaultRenameAction-prop
+"QListView::doAutoScroll" ntqlistview.html#doAutoScroll
+"QListView::doubleClicked" ntqlistview.html#doubleClicked
+"QListView::dragObject" ntqlistview.html#dragObject
+"QListView::drawContentsOffset" ntqlistview.html#drawContentsOffset
+"QListView::dropped" ntqlistview.html#dropped
+"QListView::ensureItemVisible" ntqlistview.html#ensureItemVisible
+"QListView::eventFilter" ntqlistview.html#eventFilter
+"QListView::expanded" ntqlistview.html#expanded
+"QListView::findItem" ntqlistview.html#findItem
+"QListView::firstChild" ntqlistview.html#firstChild
+"QListView::handleSizeChange" ntqlistview.html#handleSizeChange
+"QListView::header" ntqlistview.html#header
+"QListView::hideColumn" ntqlistview.html#hideColumn
+"QListView::insertItem" ntqlistview.html#insertItem
+"QListView::invertSelection" ntqlistview.html#invertSelection
+"QListView::isOpen" ntqlistview.html#isOpen
+"QListView::isRenaming" ntqlistview.html#isRenaming
+"QListView::isSelected" ntqlistview.html#isSelected
+"QListView::itemAt" ntqlistview.html#itemAt
+"QListView::itemMargin" ntqlistview.html#itemMargin
+"QListView::itemMargin" ntqlistview.html#itemMargin-prop
+"QListView::itemPos" ntqlistview.html#itemPos
+"QListView::itemRect" ntqlistview.html#itemRect
+"QListView::itemRenamed" ntqlistview.html#itemRenamed
+"QListView::lastItem" ntqlistview.html#lastItem
+"QListView::mouseButtonClicked" ntqlistview.html#mouseButtonClicked
+"QListView::mouseButtonPressed" ntqlistview.html#mouseButtonPressed
+"QListView::onItem" ntqlistview.html#onItem
+"QListView::onViewport" ntqlistview.html#onViewport
+"QListView::paintEmptyArea" ntqlistview.html#paintEmptyArea
+"QListView::pressed" ntqlistview.html#pressed
+"QListView::reconfigureItems" ntqlistview.html#reconfigureItems
+"QListView::removeColumn" ntqlistview.html#removeColumn
+"QListView::repaintItem" ntqlistview.html#repaintItem
+"QListView::resizeEvent" ntqlistview.html#resizeEvent
+"QListView::resizeMode" ntqlistview.html#resizeMode
+"QListView::resizeMode" ntqlistview.html#resizeMode-prop
+"QListView::returnPressed" ntqlistview.html#returnPressed
+"QListView::rightButtonClicked" ntqlistview.html#rightButtonClicked
+"QListView::rightButtonPressed" ntqlistview.html#rightButtonPressed
+"QListView::rootIsDecorated" ntqlistview.html#rootIsDecorated
+"QListView::rootIsDecorated" ntqlistview.html#rootIsDecorated-prop
+"QListView::selectAll" ntqlistview.html#selectAll
+"QListView::selectedItem" ntqlistview.html#selectedItem
+"QListView::selectionChanged" ntqlistview.html#selectionChanged
+"QListView::selectionMode" ntqlistview.html#selectionMode
+"QListView::selectionMode" ntqlistview.html#selectionMode-prop
+"QListView::setAllColumnsShowFocus" ntqlistview.html#setAllColumnsShowFocus
+"QListView::setColumnAlignment" ntqlistview.html#setColumnAlignment
+"QListView::setColumnText" ntqlistview.html#setColumnText
+"QListView::setColumnWidth" ntqlistview.html#setColumnWidth
+"QListView::setColumnWidthMode" ntqlistview.html#setColumnWidthMode
+"QListView::setCurrentItem" ntqlistview.html#setCurrentItem
+"QListView::setDefaultRenameAction" ntqlistview.html#setDefaultRenameAction
+"QListView::setItemMargin" ntqlistview.html#setItemMargin
+"QListView::setOpen" ntqlistview.html#setOpen
+"QListView::setResizeMode" ntqlistview.html#setResizeMode
+"QListView::setRootIsDecorated" ntqlistview.html#setRootIsDecorated
+"QListView::setSelected" ntqlistview.html#setSelected
+"QListView::setSelectionAnchor" ntqlistview.html#setSelectionAnchor
+"QListView::setSelectionMode" ntqlistview.html#setSelectionMode
+"QListView::setShowSortIndicator" ntqlistview.html#setShowSortIndicator
+"QListView::setShowToolTips" ntqlistview.html#setShowToolTips
+"QListView::setSortColumn" ntqlistview.html#setSortColumn
+"QListView::setSortOrder" ntqlistview.html#setSortOrder
+"QListView::setSorting" ntqlistview.html#setSorting
+"QListView::setTreeStepSize" ntqlistview.html#setTreeStepSize
+"QListView::showSortIndicator" ntqlistview.html#showSortIndicator
+"QListView::showSortIndicator" ntqlistview.html#showSortIndicator-prop
+"QListView::showToolTips" ntqlistview.html#showToolTips
+"QListView::showToolTips" ntqlistview.html#showToolTips-prop
+"QListView::sort" ntqlistview.html#sort
+"QListView::sortColumn" ntqlistview.html#sortColumn
+"QListView::sortOrder" ntqlistview.html#sortOrder
+"QListView::spacePressed" ntqlistview.html#spacePressed
+"QListView::startDrag" ntqlistview.html#startDrag
+"QListView::takeItem" ntqlistview.html#takeItem
+"QListView::treeStepSize" ntqlistview.html#treeStepSize
+"QListView::treeStepSize" ntqlistview.html#treeStepSize-prop
+"QListView::triggerUpdate" ntqlistview.html#triggerUpdate
+"QListView::updateContents" ntqlistview.html#updateContents
+"QListView::widthChanged" ntqlistview.html#widthChanged
+"QListView::~QListView" ntqlistview.html#~QListView
 "QListViewItem" qlistviewitem.html
 "QListViewItem::acceptDrop" qlistviewitem.html#acceptDrop
 "QListViewItem::activate" qlistviewitem.html#activate
@@ -3900,30 +3900,30 @@
 "QListViewItemIterator::operator-=" qlistviewitemiterator.html#operator--eq
 "QListViewItemIterator::operator=" qlistviewitemiterator.html#operator-eq
 "QListViewItemIterator::~QListViewItemIterator" qlistviewitemiterator.html#~QListViewItemIterator
-"QLocalFs" qlocalfs.html
-"QLocale" qlocale.html
-"QLocale::Country" qlocale.html#Country
-"QLocale::Language" qlocale.html#Language
-"QLocale::c" qlocale.html#c
-"QLocale::country" qlocale.html#country
-"QLocale::countryToString" qlocale.html#countryToString
-"QLocale::language" qlocale.html#language
-"QLocale::languageToString" qlocale.html#languageToString
-"QLocale::name" qlocale.html#name
-"QLocale::operator=" qlocale.html#operator-eq
-"QLocale::setDefault" qlocale.html#setDefault
-"QLocale::system" qlocale.html#system
-"QLocale::toDouble" qlocale.html#toDouble
-"QLocale::toFloat" qlocale.html#toFloat
-"QLocale::toInt" qlocale.html#toInt
-"QLocale::toLong" qlocale.html#toLong
-"QLocale::toLongLong" qlocale.html#toLongLong
-"QLocale::toShort" qlocale.html#toShort
-"QLocale::toString" qlocale.html#toString
-"QLocale::toUInt" qlocale.html#toUInt
-"QLocale::toULong" qlocale.html#toULong
-"QLocale::toULongLong" qlocale.html#toULongLong
-"QLocale::toUShort" qlocale.html#toUShort
+"QLocalFs" ntqlocalfs.html
+"QLocale" ntqlocale.html
+"QLocale::Country" ntqlocale.html#Country
+"QLocale::Language" ntqlocale.html#Language
+"QLocale::c" ntqlocale.html#c
+"QLocale::country" ntqlocale.html#country
+"QLocale::countryToString" ntqlocale.html#countryToString
+"QLocale::language" ntqlocale.html#language
+"QLocale::languageToString" ntqlocale.html#languageToString
+"QLocale::name" ntqlocale.html#name
+"QLocale::operator=" ntqlocale.html#operator-eq
+"QLocale::setDefault" ntqlocale.html#setDefault
+"QLocale::system" ntqlocale.html#system
+"QLocale::toDouble" ntqlocale.html#toDouble
+"QLocale::toFloat" ntqlocale.html#toFloat
+"QLocale::toInt" ntqlocale.html#toInt
+"QLocale::toLong" ntqlocale.html#toLong
+"QLocale::toLongLong" ntqlocale.html#toLongLong
+"QLocale::toShort" ntqlocale.html#toShort
+"QLocale::toString" ntqlocale.html#toString
+"QLocale::toUInt" ntqlocale.html#toUInt
+"QLocale::toULong" ntqlocale.html#toULong
+"QLocale::toULongLong" ntqlocale.html#toULongLong
+"QLocale::toUShort" ntqlocale.html#toUShort
 "QLock::Type" qlock.html#Type
 "QLock::isValid" qlock.html#isValid
 "QLock::lock" qlock.html#lock
@@ -3952,93 +3952,93 @@
 "QMacStyle::widgetSizePolicy" qmacstyle.html#widgetSizePolicy
 "QMacStyle::~QMacStyle" qmacstyle.html#~QMacStyle
 "QMag" qmag-example.html
-"QMainWindow" qmainwindow.html
-"QMainWindow::DockWindows" qmainwindow.html#DockWindows
-"QMainWindow::addDockWindow" qmainwindow.html#addDockWindow
-"QMainWindow::appropriate" qmainwindow.html#appropriate
-"QMainWindow::bottomDock" qmainwindow.html#bottomDock
-"QMainWindow::centralWidget" qmainwindow.html#centralWidget
-"QMainWindow::childEvent" qmainwindow.html#childEvent
-"QMainWindow::createDockWindowMenu" qmainwindow.html#createDockWindowMenu
-"QMainWindow::customize" qmainwindow.html#customize
-"QMainWindow::dockWindowPositionChanged" qmainwindow.html#dockWindowPositionChanged
-"QMainWindow::dockWindows" qmainwindow.html#dockWindows
-"QMainWindow::dockWindowsMovable" qmainwindow.html#dockWindowsMovable
-"QMainWindow::dockWindowsMovable" qmainwindow.html#dockWindowsMovable-prop
-"QMainWindow::getLocation" qmainwindow.html#getLocation
-"QMainWindow::hasDockWindow" qmainwindow.html#hasDockWindow
-"QMainWindow::isCustomizable" qmainwindow.html#isCustomizable
-"QMainWindow::isDockEnabled" qmainwindow.html#isDockEnabled
-"QMainWindow::isDockMenuEnabled" qmainwindow.html#isDockMenuEnabled
-"QMainWindow::leftDock" qmainwindow.html#leftDock
-"QMainWindow::lineUpDockWindows" qmainwindow.html#lineUpDockWindows
-"QMainWindow::menuAboutToShow" qmainwindow.html#menuAboutToShow
-"QMainWindow::menuBar" qmainwindow.html#menuBar
-"QMainWindow::moveDockWindow" qmainwindow.html#moveDockWindow
-"QMainWindow::opaqueMoving" qmainwindow.html#opaqueMoving
-"QMainWindow::opaqueMoving" qmainwindow.html#opaqueMoving-prop
-"QMainWindow::pixmapSizeChanged" qmainwindow.html#pixmapSizeChanged
-"QMainWindow::removeDockWindow" qmainwindow.html#removeDockWindow
-"QMainWindow::rightDock" qmainwindow.html#rightDock
-"QMainWindow::setAppropriate" qmainwindow.html#setAppropriate
-"QMainWindow::setCentralWidget" qmainwindow.html#setCentralWidget
-"QMainWindow::setDockEnabled" qmainwindow.html#setDockEnabled
-"QMainWindow::setDockMenuEnabled" qmainwindow.html#setDockMenuEnabled
-"QMainWindow::setDockWindowsMovable" qmainwindow.html#setDockWindowsMovable
-"QMainWindow::setMenuBar" qmainwindow.html#setMenuBar
-"QMainWindow::setOpaqueMoving" qmainwindow.html#setOpaqueMoving
-"QMainWindow::setStatusBar" qmainwindow.html#setStatusBar
-"QMainWindow::setToolTipGroup" qmainwindow.html#setToolTipGroup
-"QMainWindow::setUpLayout" qmainwindow.html#setUpLayout
-"QMainWindow::setUsesBigPixmaps" qmainwindow.html#setUsesBigPixmaps
-"QMainWindow::setUsesTextLabel" qmainwindow.html#setUsesTextLabel
-"QMainWindow::showDockMenu" qmainwindow.html#showDockMenu
-"QMainWindow::statusBar" qmainwindow.html#statusBar
-"QMainWindow::toolBars" qmainwindow.html#toolBars
-"QMainWindow::toolTipGroup" qmainwindow.html#toolTipGroup
-"QMainWindow::topDock" qmainwindow.html#topDock
-"QMainWindow::usesBigPixmaps" qmainwindow.html#usesBigPixmaps
-"QMainWindow::usesBigPixmaps" qmainwindow.html#usesBigPixmaps-prop
-"QMainWindow::usesTextLabel" qmainwindow.html#usesTextLabel
-"QMainWindow::usesTextLabel" qmainwindow.html#usesTextLabel-prop
-"QMainWindow::usesTextLabelChanged" qmainwindow.html#usesTextLabelChanged
-"QMainWindow::whatsThis" qmainwindow.html#whatsThis
-"QMainWindow::~QMainWindow" qmainwindow.html#~QMainWindow
-"QMap" qmap.html
-"QMap::ConstIterator" qmap.html#ConstIterator
-"QMap::Iterator" qmap.html#Iterator
-"QMap::ValueType" qmap.html#ValueType
-"QMap::begin" qmap.html#begin
-"QMap::clear" qmap.html#clear
-"QMap::constBegin" qmap.html#constBegin
-"QMap::constEnd" qmap.html#constEnd
-"QMap::const_iterator" qmap.html#const_iterator
-"QMap::const_pointer" qmap.html#const_pointer
-"QMap::const_reference" qmap.html#const_reference
-"QMap::contains" qmap.html#contains
-"QMap::count" qmap.html#count
-"QMap::detach" qmap.html#detach
-"QMap::empty" qmap.html#empty
-"QMap::end" qmap.html#end
-"QMap::erase" qmap.html#erase
-"QMap::find" qmap.html#find
-"QMap::insert" qmap.html#insert
-"QMap::isEmpty" qmap.html#isEmpty
-"QMap::iterator" qmap.html#iterator
-"QMap::key_type" qmap.html#key_type
-"QMap::keys" qmap.html#keys
-"QMap::mapped_type" qmap.html#mapped_type
-"QMap::operator=" qmap.html#operator-eq
-"QMap::operator[]" qmap.html#operator[]
-"QMap::pointer" qmap.html#pointer
-"QMap::reference" qmap.html#reference
-"QMap::remove" qmap.html#remove
-"QMap::replace" qmap.html#replace
-"QMap::size" qmap.html#size
-"QMap::size_type" qmap.html#size_type
-"QMap::value_type" qmap.html#value_type
-"QMap::values" qmap.html#values
-"QMap::~QMap" qmap.html#~QMap
+"QMainWindow" ntqmainwindow.html
+"QMainWindow::DockWindows" ntqmainwindow.html#DockWindows
+"QMainWindow::addDockWindow" ntqmainwindow.html#addDockWindow
+"QMainWindow::appropriate" ntqmainwindow.html#appropriate
+"QMainWindow::bottomDock" ntqmainwindow.html#bottomDock
+"QMainWindow::centralWidget" ntqmainwindow.html#centralWidget
+"QMainWindow::childEvent" ntqmainwindow.html#childEvent
+"QMainWindow::createDockWindowMenu" ntqmainwindow.html#createDockWindowMenu
+"QMainWindow::customize" ntqmainwindow.html#customize
+"QMainWindow::dockWindowPositionChanged" ntqmainwindow.html#dockWindowPositionChanged
+"QMainWindow::dockWindows" ntqmainwindow.html#dockWindows
+"QMainWindow::dockWindowsMovable" ntqmainwindow.html#dockWindowsMovable
+"QMainWindow::dockWindowsMovable" ntqmainwindow.html#dockWindowsMovable-prop
+"QMainWindow::getLocation" ntqmainwindow.html#getLocation
+"QMainWindow::hasDockWindow" ntqmainwindow.html#hasDockWindow
+"QMainWindow::isCustomizable" ntqmainwindow.html#isCustomizable
+"QMainWindow::isDockEnabled" ntqmainwindow.html#isDockEnabled
+"QMainWindow::isDockMenuEnabled" ntqmainwindow.html#isDockMenuEnabled
+"QMainWindow::leftDock" ntqmainwindow.html#leftDock
+"QMainWindow::lineUpDockWindows" ntqmainwindow.html#lineUpDockWindows
+"QMainWindow::menuAboutToShow" ntqmainwindow.html#menuAboutToShow
+"QMainWindow::menuBar" ntqmainwindow.html#menuBar
+"QMainWindow::moveDockWindow" ntqmainwindow.html#moveDockWindow
+"QMainWindow::opaqueMoving" ntqmainwindow.html#opaqueMoving
+"QMainWindow::opaqueMoving" ntqmainwindow.html#opaqueMoving-prop
+"QMainWindow::pixmapSizeChanged" ntqmainwindow.html#pixmapSizeChanged
+"QMainWindow::removeDockWindow" ntqmainwindow.html#removeDockWindow
+"QMainWindow::rightDock" ntqmainwindow.html#rightDock
+"QMainWindow::setAppropriate" ntqmainwindow.html#setAppropriate
+"QMainWindow::setCentralWidget" ntqmainwindow.html#setCentralWidget
+"QMainWindow::setDockEnabled" ntqmainwindow.html#setDockEnabled
+"QMainWindow::setDockMenuEnabled" ntqmainwindow.html#setDockMenuEnabled
+"QMainWindow::setDockWindowsMovable" ntqmainwindow.html#setDockWindowsMovable
+"QMainWindow::setMenuBar" ntqmainwindow.html#setMenuBar
+"QMainWindow::setOpaqueMoving" ntqmainwindow.html#setOpaqueMoving
+"QMainWindow::setStatusBar" ntqmainwindow.html#setStatusBar
+"QMainWindow::setToolTipGroup" ntqmainwindow.html#setToolTipGroup
+"QMainWindow::setUpLayout" ntqmainwindow.html#setUpLayout
+"QMainWindow::setUsesBigPixmaps" ntqmainwindow.html#setUsesBigPixmaps
+"QMainWindow::setUsesTextLabel" ntqmainwindow.html#setUsesTextLabel
+"QMainWindow::showDockMenu" ntqmainwindow.html#showDockMenu
+"QMainWindow::statusBar" ntqmainwindow.html#statusBar
+"QMainWindow::toolBars" ntqmainwindow.html#toolBars
+"QMainWindow::toolTipGroup" ntqmainwindow.html#toolTipGroup
+"QMainWindow::topDock" ntqmainwindow.html#topDock
+"QMainWindow::usesBigPixmaps" ntqmainwindow.html#usesBigPixmaps
+"QMainWindow::usesBigPixmaps" ntqmainwindow.html#usesBigPixmaps-prop
+"QMainWindow::usesTextLabel" ntqmainwindow.html#usesTextLabel
+"QMainWindow::usesTextLabel" ntqmainwindow.html#usesTextLabel-prop
+"QMainWindow::usesTextLabelChanged" ntqmainwindow.html#usesTextLabelChanged
+"QMainWindow::whatsThis" ntqmainwindow.html#whatsThis
+"QMainWindow::~QMainWindow" ntqmainwindow.html#~QMainWindow
+"QMap" ntqmap.html
+"QMap::ConstIterator" ntqmap.html#ConstIterator
+"QMap::Iterator" ntqmap.html#Iterator
+"QMap::ValueType" ntqmap.html#ValueType
+"QMap::begin" ntqmap.html#begin
+"QMap::clear" ntqmap.html#clear
+"QMap::constBegin" ntqmap.html#constBegin
+"QMap::constEnd" ntqmap.html#constEnd
+"QMap::const_iterator" ntqmap.html#const_iterator
+"QMap::const_pointer" ntqmap.html#const_pointer
+"QMap::const_reference" ntqmap.html#const_reference
+"QMap::contains" ntqmap.html#contains
+"QMap::count" ntqmap.html#count
+"QMap::detach" ntqmap.html#detach
+"QMap::empty" ntqmap.html#empty
+"QMap::end" ntqmap.html#end
+"QMap::erase" ntqmap.html#erase
+"QMap::find" ntqmap.html#find
+"QMap::insert" ntqmap.html#insert
+"QMap::isEmpty" ntqmap.html#isEmpty
+"QMap::iterator" ntqmap.html#iterator
+"QMap::key_type" ntqmap.html#key_type
+"QMap::keys" ntqmap.html#keys
+"QMap::mapped_type" ntqmap.html#mapped_type
+"QMap::operator=" ntqmap.html#operator-eq
+"QMap::operator[]" ntqmap.html#operator[]
+"QMap::pointer" ntqmap.html#pointer
+"QMap::reference" ntqmap.html#reference
+"QMap::remove" ntqmap.html#remove
+"QMap::replace" ntqmap.html#replace
+"QMap::size" ntqmap.html#size
+"QMap::size_type" ntqmap.html#size_type
+"QMap::value_type" ntqmap.html#value_type
+"QMap::values" ntqmap.html#values
+"QMap::~QMap" ntqmap.html#~QMap
 "QMapConstIterator" qmapconstiterator.html
 "QMapConstIterator::data" qmapconstiterator.html#data
 "QMapConstIterator::iterator_category" qmapconstiterator.html#iterator_category
@@ -4063,130 +4063,130 @@
 "QMapIterator::pointer" qmapiterator.html#pointer
 "QMapIterator::reference" qmapiterator.html#reference
 "QMapIterator::value_type" qmapiterator.html#value_type
-"QMemArray" qmemarray.html
-"QMemArray::ConstIterator" qmemarray.html#ConstIterator
-"QMemArray::Iterator" qmemarray.html#Iterator
-"QMemArray::assign" qmemarray.html#assign
-"QMemArray::at" qmemarray.html#at
-"QMemArray::begin" qmemarray.html#begin
-"QMemArray::bsearch" qmemarray.html#bsearch
-"QMemArray::contains" qmemarray.html#contains
-"QMemArray::copy" qmemarray.html#copy
-"QMemArray::count" qmemarray.html#count
-"QMemArray::data" qmemarray.html#data
-"QMemArray::detach" qmemarray.html#detach
-"QMemArray::duplicate" qmemarray.html#duplicate
-"QMemArray::end" qmemarray.html#end
-"QMemArray::fill" qmemarray.html#fill
-"QMemArray::find" qmemarray.html#find
-"QMemArray::isEmpty" qmemarray.html#isEmpty
-"QMemArray::isNull" qmemarray.html#isNull
-"QMemArray::nrefs" qmemarray.html#nrefs
-"QMemArray::operator const type *" qmemarray.html#operator-const-type-*
-"QMemArray::operator!=" qmemarray.html#operator!-eq
-"QMemArray::operator=" qmemarray.html#operator-eq
-"QMemArray::operator==" qmemarray.html#operator-eq-eq
-"QMemArray::operator[]" qmemarray.html#operator[]
-"QMemArray::resetRawData" qmemarray.html#resetRawData
-"QMemArray::resize" qmemarray.html#resize
-"QMemArray::setRawData" qmemarray.html#setRawData
-"QMemArray::size" qmemarray.html#size
-"QMemArray::sort" qmemarray.html#sort
-"QMemArray::truncate" qmemarray.html#truncate
-"QMemArray::~QMemArray" qmemarray.html#~QMemArray
-"QMenuBar" qmenubar.html
-"QMenuBar::Separator" qmenubar.html#Separator
-"QMenuBar::activated" qmenubar.html#activated
-"QMenuBar::defaultUp" qmenubar.html#defaultUp-prop
-"QMenuBar::drawContents" qmenubar.html#drawContents
-"QMenuBar::heightForWidth" qmenubar.html#heightForWidth
-"QMenuBar::hide" qmenubar.html#hide
-"QMenuBar::highlighted" qmenubar.html#highlighted
-"QMenuBar::isDefaultUp" qmenubar.html#isDefaultUp
-"QMenuBar::menuContentsChanged" qmenubar.html#menuContentsChanged
-"QMenuBar::menuStateChanged" qmenubar.html#menuStateChanged
-"QMenuBar::setDefaultUp" qmenubar.html#setDefaultUp
-"QMenuBar::setupAccelerators" qmenubar.html#setupAccelerators
-"QMenuBar::show" qmenubar.html#show
-"QMenuBar::~QMenuBar" qmenubar.html#~QMenuBar
-"QMenuData" qmenudata.html
-"QMenuData::accel" qmenudata.html#accel
-"QMenuData::activateItemAt" qmenudata.html#activateItemAt
-"QMenuData::changeItem" qmenudata.html#changeItem
-"QMenuData::changeItemIconSet" qmenudata.html#changeItemIconSet
-"QMenuData::clear" qmenudata.html#clear
-"QMenuData::connectItem" qmenudata.html#connectItem
-"QMenuData::count" qmenudata.html#count
-"QMenuData::disconnectItem" qmenudata.html#disconnectItem
-"QMenuData::findItem" qmenudata.html#findItem
-"QMenuData::iconSet" qmenudata.html#iconSet
-"QMenuData::idAt" qmenudata.html#idAt
-"QMenuData::indexOf" qmenudata.html#indexOf
-"QMenuData::insertItem" qmenudata.html#insertItem
-"QMenuData::insertSeparator" qmenudata.html#insertSeparator
-"QMenuData::isItemActive" qmenudata.html#isItemActive
-"QMenuData::isItemChecked" qmenudata.html#isItemChecked
-"QMenuData::isItemEnabled" qmenudata.html#isItemEnabled
-"QMenuData::isItemVisible" qmenudata.html#isItemVisible
-"QMenuData::itemParameter" qmenudata.html#itemParameter
-"QMenuData::menuContentsChanged" qmenudata.html#menuContentsChanged
-"QMenuData::menuDelPopup" qmenudata.html#menuDelPopup
-"QMenuData::menuInsPopup" qmenudata.html#menuInsPopup
-"QMenuData::menuStateChanged" qmenudata.html#menuStateChanged
-"QMenuData::pixmap" qmenudata.html#pixmap
-"QMenuData::removeItem" qmenudata.html#removeItem
-"QMenuData::removeItemAt" qmenudata.html#removeItemAt
-"QMenuData::setAccel" qmenudata.html#setAccel
-"QMenuData::setId" qmenudata.html#setId
-"QMenuData::setItemChecked" qmenudata.html#setItemChecked
-"QMenuData::setItemEnabled" qmenudata.html#setItemEnabled
-"QMenuData::setItemParameter" qmenudata.html#setItemParameter
-"QMenuData::setItemVisible" qmenudata.html#setItemVisible
-"QMenuData::setWhatsThis" qmenudata.html#setWhatsThis
-"QMenuData::text" qmenudata.html#text
-"QMenuData::updateItem" qmenudata.html#updateItem
-"QMenuData::whatsThis" qmenudata.html#whatsThis
-"QMenuData::~QMenuData" qmenudata.html#~QMenuData
-"QMessageBox" qmessagebox.html
-"QMessageBox::Icon" qmessagebox.html#Icon
-"QMessageBox::about" qmessagebox.html#about
-"QMessageBox::aboutTQt" qmessagebox.html#aboutTQt
-"QMessageBox::adjustSize" qmessagebox.html#adjustSize
-"QMessageBox::buttonText" qmessagebox.html#buttonText
-"QMessageBox::critical" qmessagebox.html#critical
-"QMessageBox::icon" qmessagebox.html#icon
-"QMessageBox::icon" qmessagebox.html#icon-prop
-"QMessageBox::iconPixmap" qmessagebox.html#iconPixmap
-"QMessageBox::iconPixmap" qmessagebox.html#iconPixmap-prop
-"QMessageBox::information" qmessagebox.html#information
-"QMessageBox::question" qmessagebox.html#question
-"QMessageBox::setButtonText" qmessagebox.html#setButtonText
-"QMessageBox::setIcon" qmessagebox.html#setIcon
-"QMessageBox::setIconPixmap" qmessagebox.html#setIconPixmap
-"QMessageBox::setText" qmessagebox.html#setText
-"QMessageBox::setTextFormat" qmessagebox.html#setTextFormat
-"QMessageBox::standardIcon" qmessagebox.html#standardIcon
-"QMessageBox::text" qmessagebox.html#text
-"QMessageBox::text" qmessagebox.html#text-prop
-"QMessageBox::textFormat" qmessagebox.html#textFormat
-"QMessageBox::textFormat" qmessagebox.html#textFormat-prop
-"QMessageBox::warning" qmessagebox.html#warning
-"QMessageBox::~QMessageBox" qmessagebox.html#~QMessageBox
-"QMetaObject" qmetaobject.html
-"QMetaObject::classInfo" qmetaobject.html#classInfo
-"QMetaObject::className" qmetaobject.html#className
-"QMetaObject::findProperty" qmetaobject.html#findProperty
-"QMetaObject::inherits" qmetaobject.html#inherits
-"QMetaObject::numClassInfo" qmetaobject.html#numClassInfo
-"QMetaObject::numProperties" qmetaobject.html#numProperties
-"QMetaObject::numSignals" qmetaobject.html#numSignals
-"QMetaObject::numSlots" qmetaobject.html#numSlots
-"QMetaObject::property" qmetaobject.html#property
-"QMetaObject::propertyNames" qmetaobject.html#propertyNames
-"QMetaObject::signalNames" qmetaobject.html#signalNames
-"QMetaObject::slotNames" qmetaobject.html#slotNames
-"QMetaObject::superClass" qmetaobject.html#superClass
-"QMetaObject::superClassName" qmetaobject.html#superClassName
+"QMemArray" ntqmemarray.html
+"QMemArray::ConstIterator" ntqmemarray.html#ConstIterator
+"QMemArray::Iterator" ntqmemarray.html#Iterator
+"QMemArray::assign" ntqmemarray.html#assign
+"QMemArray::at" ntqmemarray.html#at
+"QMemArray::begin" ntqmemarray.html#begin
+"QMemArray::bsearch" ntqmemarray.html#bsearch
+"QMemArray::contains" ntqmemarray.html#contains
+"QMemArray::copy" ntqmemarray.html#copy
+"QMemArray::count" ntqmemarray.html#count
+"QMemArray::data" ntqmemarray.html#data
+"QMemArray::detach" ntqmemarray.html#detach
+"QMemArray::duplicate" ntqmemarray.html#duplicate
+"QMemArray::end" ntqmemarray.html#end
+"QMemArray::fill" ntqmemarray.html#fill
+"QMemArray::find" ntqmemarray.html#find
+"QMemArray::isEmpty" ntqmemarray.html#isEmpty
+"QMemArray::isNull" ntqmemarray.html#isNull
+"QMemArray::nrefs" ntqmemarray.html#nrefs
+"QMemArray::operator const type *" ntqmemarray.html#operator-const-type-*
+"QMemArray::operator!=" ntqmemarray.html#operator!-eq
+"QMemArray::operator=" ntqmemarray.html#operator-eq
+"QMemArray::operator==" ntqmemarray.html#operator-eq-eq
+"QMemArray::operator[]" ntqmemarray.html#operator[]
+"QMemArray::resetRawData" ntqmemarray.html#resetRawData
+"QMemArray::resize" ntqmemarray.html#resize
+"QMemArray::setRawData" ntqmemarray.html#setRawData
+"QMemArray::size" ntqmemarray.html#size
+"QMemArray::sort" ntqmemarray.html#sort
+"QMemArray::truncate" ntqmemarray.html#truncate
+"QMemArray::~QMemArray" ntqmemarray.html#~QMemArray
+"QMenuBar" ntqmenubar.html
+"QMenuBar::Separator" ntqmenubar.html#Separator
+"QMenuBar::activated" ntqmenubar.html#activated
+"QMenuBar::defaultUp" ntqmenubar.html#defaultUp-prop
+"QMenuBar::drawContents" ntqmenubar.html#drawContents
+"QMenuBar::heightForWidth" ntqmenubar.html#heightForWidth
+"QMenuBar::hide" ntqmenubar.html#hide
+"QMenuBar::highlighted" ntqmenubar.html#highlighted
+"QMenuBar::isDefaultUp" ntqmenubar.html#isDefaultUp
+"QMenuBar::menuContentsChanged" ntqmenubar.html#menuContentsChanged
+"QMenuBar::menuStateChanged" ntqmenubar.html#menuStateChanged
+"QMenuBar::setDefaultUp" ntqmenubar.html#setDefaultUp
+"QMenuBar::setupAccelerators" ntqmenubar.html#setupAccelerators
+"QMenuBar::show" ntqmenubar.html#show
+"QMenuBar::~QMenuBar" ntqmenubar.html#~QMenuBar
+"QMenuData" ntqmenudata.html
+"QMenuData::accel" ntqmenudata.html#accel
+"QMenuData::activateItemAt" ntqmenudata.html#activateItemAt
+"QMenuData::changeItem" ntqmenudata.html#changeItem
+"QMenuData::changeItemIconSet" ntqmenudata.html#changeItemIconSet
+"QMenuData::clear" ntqmenudata.html#clear
+"QMenuData::connectItem" ntqmenudata.html#connectItem
+"QMenuData::count" ntqmenudata.html#count
+"QMenuData::disconnectItem" ntqmenudata.html#disconnectItem
+"QMenuData::findItem" ntqmenudata.html#findItem
+"QMenuData::iconSet" ntqmenudata.html#iconSet
+"QMenuData::idAt" ntqmenudata.html#idAt
+"QMenuData::indexOf" ntqmenudata.html#indexOf
+"QMenuData::insertItem" ntqmenudata.html#insertItem
+"QMenuData::insertSeparator" ntqmenudata.html#insertSeparator
+"QMenuData::isItemActive" ntqmenudata.html#isItemActive
+"QMenuData::isItemChecked" ntqmenudata.html#isItemChecked
+"QMenuData::isItemEnabled" ntqmenudata.html#isItemEnabled
+"QMenuData::isItemVisible" ntqmenudata.html#isItemVisible
+"QMenuData::itemParameter" ntqmenudata.html#itemParameter
+"QMenuData::menuContentsChanged" ntqmenudata.html#menuContentsChanged
+"QMenuData::menuDelPopup" ntqmenudata.html#menuDelPopup
+"QMenuData::menuInsPopup" ntqmenudata.html#menuInsPopup
+"QMenuData::menuStateChanged" ntqmenudata.html#menuStateChanged
+"QMenuData::pixmap" ntqmenudata.html#pixmap
+"QMenuData::removeItem" ntqmenudata.html#removeItem
+"QMenuData::removeItemAt" ntqmenudata.html#removeItemAt
+"QMenuData::setAccel" ntqmenudata.html#setAccel
+"QMenuData::setId" ntqmenudata.html#setId
+"QMenuData::setItemChecked" ntqmenudata.html#setItemChecked
+"QMenuData::setItemEnabled" ntqmenudata.html#setItemEnabled
+"QMenuData::setItemParameter" ntqmenudata.html#setItemParameter
+"QMenuData::setItemVisible" ntqmenudata.html#setItemVisible
+"QMenuData::setWhatsThis" ntqmenudata.html#setWhatsThis
+"QMenuData::text" ntqmenudata.html#text
+"QMenuData::updateItem" ntqmenudata.html#updateItem
+"QMenuData::whatsThis" ntqmenudata.html#whatsThis
+"QMenuData::~QMenuData" ntqmenudata.html#~QMenuData
+"QMessageBox" ntqmessagebox.html
+"QMessageBox::Icon" ntqmessagebox.html#Icon
+"QMessageBox::about" ntqmessagebox.html#about
+"QMessageBox::aboutTQt" ntqmessagebox.html#aboutTQt
+"QMessageBox::adjustSize" ntqmessagebox.html#adjustSize
+"QMessageBox::buttonText" ntqmessagebox.html#buttonText
+"QMessageBox::critical" ntqmessagebox.html#critical
+"QMessageBox::icon" ntqmessagebox.html#icon
+"QMessageBox::icon" ntqmessagebox.html#icon-prop
+"QMessageBox::iconPixmap" ntqmessagebox.html#iconPixmap
+"QMessageBox::iconPixmap" ntqmessagebox.html#iconPixmap-prop
+"QMessageBox::information" ntqmessagebox.html#information
+"QMessageBox::question" ntqmessagebox.html#question
+"QMessageBox::setButtonText" ntqmessagebox.html#setButtonText
+"QMessageBox::setIcon" ntqmessagebox.html#setIcon
+"QMessageBox::setIconPixmap" ntqmessagebox.html#setIconPixmap
+"QMessageBox::setText" ntqmessagebox.html#setText
+"QMessageBox::setTextFormat" ntqmessagebox.html#setTextFormat
+"QMessageBox::standardIcon" ntqmessagebox.html#standardIcon
+"QMessageBox::text" ntqmessagebox.html#text
+"QMessageBox::text" ntqmessagebox.html#text-prop
+"QMessageBox::textFormat" ntqmessagebox.html#textFormat
+"QMessageBox::textFormat" ntqmessagebox.html#textFormat-prop
+"QMessageBox::warning" ntqmessagebox.html#warning
+"QMessageBox::~QMessageBox" ntqmessagebox.html#~QMessageBox
+"QMetaObject" ntqmetaobject.html
+"QMetaObject::classInfo" ntqmetaobject.html#classInfo
+"QMetaObject::className" ntqmetaobject.html#className
+"QMetaObject::findProperty" ntqmetaobject.html#findProperty
+"QMetaObject::inherits" ntqmetaobject.html#inherits
+"QMetaObject::numClassInfo" ntqmetaobject.html#numClassInfo
+"QMetaObject::numProperties" ntqmetaobject.html#numProperties
+"QMetaObject::numSignals" ntqmetaobject.html#numSignals
+"QMetaObject::numSlots" ntqmetaobject.html#numSlots
+"QMetaObject::property" ntqmetaobject.html#property
+"QMetaObject::propertyNames" ntqmetaobject.html#propertyNames
+"QMetaObject::signalNames" ntqmetaobject.html#signalNames
+"QMetaObject::slotNames" ntqmetaobject.html#slotNames
+"QMetaObject::superClass" ntqmetaobject.html#superClass
+"QMetaObject::superClassName" ntqmetaobject.html#superClassName
 "QMetaProperty" qmetaproperty.html
 "QMetaProperty::designable" qmetaproperty.html#designable
 "QMetaProperty::enumKeys" qmetaproperty.html#enumKeys
@@ -4235,10 +4235,10 @@
 "QMotifDialog::rejectCallback" qmotifdialog.html#rejectCallback
 "QMotifDialog::shell" qmotifdialog.html#shell
 "QMotifDialog::~QMotifDialog" qmotifdialog.html#~QMotifDialog
-"QMotifPlusStyle" qmotifplusstyle.html
-"QMotifStyle" qmotifstyle.html
-"QMotifStyle::setUseHighlightColors" qmotifstyle.html#setUseHighlightColors
-"QMotifStyle::useHighlightColors" qmotifstyle.html#useHighlightColors
+"QMotifPlusStyle" ntqmotifplusstyle.html
+"QMotifStyle" ntqmotifstyle.html
+"QMotifStyle::setUseHighlightColors" ntqmotifstyle.html#setUseHighlightColors
+"QMotifStyle::useHighlightColors" ntqmotifstyle.html#useHighlightColors
 "QMotifWidget" qmotifwidget.html
 "QMotifWidget::motifWidget" qmotifwidget.html#motifWidget
 "QMotifWidget::~QMotifWidget" qmotifwidget.html#~QMotifWidget
@@ -4265,77 +4265,77 @@
 "QMoveEvent" qmoveevent.html
 "QMoveEvent::oldPos" qmoveevent.html#oldPos
 "QMoveEvent::pos" qmoveevent.html#pos
-"QMovie" qmovie.html
-"QMovie::Status" qmovie.html#Status
-"QMovie::backgroundColor" qmovie.html#backgroundColor
-"QMovie::connectResize" qmovie.html#connectResize
-"QMovie::connectStatus" qmovie.html#connectStatus
-"QMovie::connectUpdate" qmovie.html#connectUpdate
-"QMovie::disconnectResize" qmovie.html#disconnectResize
-"QMovie::disconnectStatus" qmovie.html#disconnectStatus
-"QMovie::disconnectUpdate" qmovie.html#disconnectUpdate
-"QMovie::finished" qmovie.html#finished
-"QMovie::frameImage" qmovie.html#frameImage
-"QMovie::frameNumber" qmovie.html#frameNumber
-"QMovie::framePixmap" qmovie.html#framePixmap
-"QMovie::getValidRect" qmovie.html#getValidRect
-"QMovie::isNull" qmovie.html#isNull
-"QMovie::operator=" qmovie.html#operator-eq
-"QMovie::pause" qmovie.html#pause
-"QMovie::paused" qmovie.html#paused
-"QMovie::pushData" qmovie.html#pushData
-"QMovie::pushSpace" qmovie.html#pushSpace
-"QMovie::restart" qmovie.html#restart
-"QMovie::running" qmovie.html#running
-"QMovie::setBackgroundColor" qmovie.html#setBackgroundColor
-"QMovie::setSpeed" qmovie.html#setSpeed
-"QMovie::speed" qmovie.html#speed
-"QMovie::step" qmovie.html#step
-"QMovie::steps" qmovie.html#steps
-"QMovie::unpause" qmovie.html#unpause
-"QMovie::~QMovie" qmovie.html#~QMovie
-"QMultiLineEdit::alignment" qmultilineedit.html#alignment
-"QMultiLineEdit::alignment" qmultilineedit.html#alignment-prop
-"QMultiLineEdit::atBeginning" qmultilineedit.html#atBeginning
-"QMultiLineEdit::atBeginning" qmultilineedit.html#atBeginning-prop
-"QMultiLineEdit::atEnd" qmultilineedit.html#atEnd
-"QMultiLineEdit::atEnd" qmultilineedit.html#atEnd-prop
-"QMultiLineEdit::backspace" qmultilineedit.html#backspace
-"QMultiLineEdit::cursorDown" qmultilineedit.html#cursorDown
-"QMultiLineEdit::cursorLeft" qmultilineedit.html#cursorLeft
-"QMultiLineEdit::cursorPoint" qmultilineedit.html#cursorPoint
-"QMultiLineEdit::cursorRight" qmultilineedit.html#cursorRight
-"QMultiLineEdit::cursorUp" qmultilineedit.html#cursorUp
-"QMultiLineEdit::cursorWordBackward" qmultilineedit.html#cursorWordBackward
-"QMultiLineEdit::cursorWordForward" qmultilineedit.html#cursorWordForward
-"QMultiLineEdit::edited" qmultilineedit.html#edited
-"QMultiLineEdit::edited" qmultilineedit.html#edited-prop
-"QMultiLineEdit::end" qmultilineedit.html#end
-"QMultiLineEdit::getMarkedRegion" qmultilineedit.html#getMarkedRegion
-"QMultiLineEdit::hasMarkedText" qmultilineedit.html#hasMarkedText
-"QMultiLineEdit::home" qmultilineedit.html#home
-"QMultiLineEdit::insertAndMark" qmultilineedit.html#insertAndMark
-"QMultiLineEdit::insertAt" qmultilineedit.html#insertAt
-"QMultiLineEdit::insertLine" qmultilineedit.html#insertLine
-"QMultiLineEdit::killLine" qmultilineedit.html#killLine
-"QMultiLineEdit::lineLength" qmultilineedit.html#lineLength
-"QMultiLineEdit::markedText" qmultilineedit.html#markedText
-"QMultiLineEdit::newLine" qmultilineedit.html#newLine
-"QMultiLineEdit::numLines" qmultilineedit.html#numLines
-"QMultiLineEdit::numLines" qmultilineedit.html#numLines-prop
-"QMultiLineEdit::pageDown" qmultilineedit.html#pageDown
-"QMultiLineEdit::pageUp" qmultilineedit.html#pageUp
-"QMultiLineEdit::removeLine" qmultilineedit.html#removeLine
-"QMultiLineEdit::setAlignment" qmultilineedit.html#setAlignment
-"QMultiLineEdit::setCursorPosition" qmultilineedit.html#setCursorPosition
-"QMultiLineEdit::setEdited" qmultilineedit.html#setEdited
-"QMultiLineEdit::textLine" qmultilineedit.html#textLine
-"QMutex" qmutex.html
-"QMutex::lock" qmutex.html#lock
-"QMutex::locked" qmutex.html#locked
-"QMutex::tryLock" qmutex.html#tryLock
-"QMutex::unlock" qmutex.html#unlock
-"QMutex::~QMutex" qmutex.html#~QMutex
+"QMovie" ntqmovie.html
+"QMovie::Status" ntqmovie.html#Status
+"QMovie::backgroundColor" ntqmovie.html#backgroundColor
+"QMovie::connectResize" ntqmovie.html#connectResize
+"QMovie::connectStatus" ntqmovie.html#connectStatus
+"QMovie::connectUpdate" ntqmovie.html#connectUpdate
+"QMovie::disconnectResize" ntqmovie.html#disconnectResize
+"QMovie::disconnectStatus" ntqmovie.html#disconnectStatus
+"QMovie::disconnectUpdate" ntqmovie.html#disconnectUpdate
+"QMovie::finished" ntqmovie.html#finished
+"QMovie::frameImage" ntqmovie.html#frameImage
+"QMovie::frameNumber" ntqmovie.html#frameNumber
+"QMovie::framePixmap" ntqmovie.html#framePixmap
+"QMovie::getValidRect" ntqmovie.html#getValidRect
+"QMovie::isNull" ntqmovie.html#isNull
+"QMovie::operator=" ntqmovie.html#operator-eq
+"QMovie::pause" ntqmovie.html#pause
+"QMovie::paused" ntqmovie.html#paused
+"QMovie::pushData" ntqmovie.html#pushData
+"QMovie::pushSpace" ntqmovie.html#pushSpace
+"QMovie::restart" ntqmovie.html#restart
+"QMovie::running" ntqmovie.html#running
+"QMovie::setBackgroundColor" ntqmovie.html#setBackgroundColor
+"QMovie::setSpeed" ntqmovie.html#setSpeed
+"QMovie::speed" ntqmovie.html#speed
+"QMovie::step" ntqmovie.html#step
+"QMovie::steps" ntqmovie.html#steps
+"QMovie::unpause" ntqmovie.html#unpause
+"QMovie::~QMovie" ntqmovie.html#~QMovie
+"QMultiLineEdit::alignment" ntqmultilineedit.html#alignment
+"QMultiLineEdit::alignment" ntqmultilineedit.html#alignment-prop
+"QMultiLineEdit::atBeginning" ntqmultilineedit.html#atBeginning
+"QMultiLineEdit::atBeginning" ntqmultilineedit.html#atBeginning-prop
+"QMultiLineEdit::atEnd" ntqmultilineedit.html#atEnd
+"QMultiLineEdit::atEnd" ntqmultilineedit.html#atEnd-prop
+"QMultiLineEdit::backspace" ntqmultilineedit.html#backspace
+"QMultiLineEdit::cursorDown" ntqmultilineedit.html#cursorDown
+"QMultiLineEdit::cursorLeft" ntqmultilineedit.html#cursorLeft
+"QMultiLineEdit::cursorPoint" ntqmultilineedit.html#cursorPoint
+"QMultiLineEdit::cursorRight" ntqmultilineedit.html#cursorRight
+"QMultiLineEdit::cursorUp" ntqmultilineedit.html#cursorUp
+"QMultiLineEdit::cursorWordBackward" ntqmultilineedit.html#cursorWordBackward
+"QMultiLineEdit::cursorWordForward" ntqmultilineedit.html#cursorWordForward
+"QMultiLineEdit::edited" ntqmultilineedit.html#edited
+"QMultiLineEdit::edited" ntqmultilineedit.html#edited-prop
+"QMultiLineEdit::end" ntqmultilineedit.html#end
+"QMultiLineEdit::getMarkedRegion" ntqmultilineedit.html#getMarkedRegion
+"QMultiLineEdit::hasMarkedText" ntqmultilineedit.html#hasMarkedText
+"QMultiLineEdit::home" ntqmultilineedit.html#home
+"QMultiLineEdit::insertAndMark" ntqmultilineedit.html#insertAndMark
+"QMultiLineEdit::insertAt" ntqmultilineedit.html#insertAt
+"QMultiLineEdit::insertLine" ntqmultilineedit.html#insertLine
+"QMultiLineEdit::killLine" ntqmultilineedit.html#killLine
+"QMultiLineEdit::lineLength" ntqmultilineedit.html#lineLength
+"QMultiLineEdit::markedText" ntqmultilineedit.html#markedText
+"QMultiLineEdit::newLine" ntqmultilineedit.html#newLine
+"QMultiLineEdit::numLines" ntqmultilineedit.html#numLines
+"QMultiLineEdit::numLines" ntqmultilineedit.html#numLines-prop
+"QMultiLineEdit::pageDown" ntqmultilineedit.html#pageDown
+"QMultiLineEdit::pageUp" ntqmultilineedit.html#pageUp
+"QMultiLineEdit::removeLine" ntqmultilineedit.html#removeLine
+"QMultiLineEdit::setAlignment" ntqmultilineedit.html#setAlignment
+"QMultiLineEdit::setCursorPosition" ntqmultilineedit.html#setCursorPosition
+"QMultiLineEdit::setEdited" ntqmultilineedit.html#setEdited
+"QMultiLineEdit::textLine" ntqmultilineedit.html#textLine
+"QMutex" ntqmutex.html
+"QMutex::lock" ntqmutex.html#lock
+"QMutex::locked" ntqmutex.html#locked
+"QMutex::tryLock" ntqmutex.html#tryLock
+"QMutex::unlock" ntqmutex.html#unlock
+"QMutex::~QMutex" ntqmutex.html#~QMutex
 "QMutexLocker" qmutexlocker.html
 "QMutexLocker::mutex" qmutexlocker.html#mutex
 "QMutexLocker::~QMutexLocker" qmutexlocker.html#~QMutexLocker
@@ -4411,549 +4411,549 @@
 "QNetworkOperation::setState" qnetworkoperation.html#setState
 "QNetworkOperation::state" qnetworkoperation.html#state
 "QNetworkOperation::~QNetworkOperation" qnetworkoperation.html#~QNetworkOperation
-"QNetworkProtocol" qnetworkprotocol.html
-"QNetworkProtocol::ConnectionState" qnetworkprotocol.html#ConnectionState
-"QNetworkProtocol::Error" qnetworkprotocol.html#Error
-"QNetworkProtocol::Operation" qnetworkprotocol.html#Operation
-"QNetworkProtocol::State" qnetworkprotocol.html#State
-"QNetworkProtocol::addOperation" qnetworkprotocol.html#addOperation
-"QNetworkProtocol::autoDelete" qnetworkprotocol.html#autoDelete
-"QNetworkProtocol::checkConnection" qnetworkprotocol.html#checkConnection
-"QNetworkProtocol::clearOperationQueue" qnetworkprotocol.html#clearOperationQueue
-"QNetworkProtocol::connectionStateChanged" qnetworkprotocol.html#connectionStateChanged
-"QNetworkProtocol::createdDirectory" qnetworkprotocol.html#createdDirectory
-"QNetworkProtocol::data" qnetworkprotocol.html#data
-"QNetworkProtocol::dataTransferProgress" qnetworkprotocol.html#dataTransferProgress
-"QNetworkProtocol::finished" qnetworkprotocol.html#finished
-"QNetworkProtocol::getNetworkProtocol" qnetworkprotocol.html#getNetworkProtocol
-"QNetworkProtocol::hasOnlyLocalFileSystem" qnetworkprotocol.html#hasOnlyLocalFileSystem
-"QNetworkProtocol::itemChanged" qnetworkprotocol.html#itemChanged
-"QNetworkProtocol::newChild" qnetworkprotocol.html#newChild
-"QNetworkProtocol::newChildren" qnetworkprotocol.html#newChildren
-"QNetworkProtocol::operationGet" qnetworkprotocol.html#operationGet
-"QNetworkProtocol::operationInProgress" qnetworkprotocol.html#operationInProgress
-"QNetworkProtocol::operationListChildren" qnetworkprotocol.html#operationListChildren
-"QNetworkProtocol::operationMkDir" qnetworkprotocol.html#operationMkDir
-"QNetworkProtocol::operationPut" qnetworkprotocol.html#operationPut
-"QNetworkProtocol::operationRemove" qnetworkprotocol.html#operationRemove
-"QNetworkProtocol::operationRename" qnetworkprotocol.html#operationRename
-"QNetworkProtocol::registerNetworkProtocol" qnetworkprotocol.html#registerNetworkProtocol
-"QNetworkProtocol::removed" qnetworkprotocol.html#removed
-"QNetworkProtocol::setAutoDelete" qnetworkprotocol.html#setAutoDelete
-"QNetworkProtocol::setUrl" qnetworkprotocol.html#setUrl
-"QNetworkProtocol::start" qnetworkprotocol.html#start
-"QNetworkProtocol::stop" qnetworkprotocol.html#stop
-"QNetworkProtocol::supportedOperations" qnetworkprotocol.html#supportedOperations
-"QNetworkProtocol::url" qnetworkprotocol.html#url
-"QNetworkProtocol::~QNetworkProtocol" qnetworkprotocol.html#~QNetworkProtocol
-"QObject" qobject.html
-"QObject::activate_signal" qobject.html#activate_signal
-"QObject::blockSignals" qobject.html#blockSignals
-"QObject::checkConnectArgs" qobject.html#checkConnectArgs
-"QObject::child" qobject.html#child
-"QObject::childEvent" qobject.html#childEvent
-"QObject::children" qobject.html#children
-"QObject::className" qobject.html#className
-"QObject::cleanupEventFilter" qobject.html#cleanupEventFilter
-"QObject::connect" qobject.html#connect
-"QObject::connectNotify" qobject.html#connectNotify
-"QObject::customEvent" qobject.html#customEvent
-"QObject::deleteLater" qobject.html#deleteLater
-"QObject::destroyed" qobject.html#destroyed
-"QObject::disconnect" qobject.html#disconnect
-"QObject::disconnectNotify" qobject.html#disconnectNotify
-"QObject::dumpObjectInfo" qobject.html#dumpObjectInfo
-"QObject::dumpObjectTree" qobject.html#dumpObjectTree
-"QObject::event" qobject.html#event
-"QObject::eventFilter" qobject.html#eventFilter
-"QObject::highPriority" qobject.html#highPriority
-"QObject::inherits" qobject.html#inherits
-"QObject::insertChild" qobject.html#insertChild
-"QObject::installEventFilter" qobject.html#installEventFilter
-"QObject::isA" qobject.html#isA
-"QObject::isWidgetType" qobject.html#isWidgetType
-"QObject::killTimer" qobject.html#killTimer
-"QObject::killTimers" qobject.html#killTimers
-"QObject::metaObject" qobject.html#metaObject
-"QObject::name" qobject.html#name
-"QObject::name" qobject.html#name-prop
-"QObject::normalizeSignalSlot" qobject.html#normalizeSignalSlot
-"QObject::objectTrees" qobject.html#objectTrees
-"QObject::parent" qobject.html#parent
-"QObject::property" qobject.html#property
-"QObject::queryList" qobject.html#queryList
-"QObject::removeChild" qobject.html#removeChild
-"QObject::removeEventFilter" qobject.html#removeEventFilter
-"QObject::sender" qobject.html#sender
-"QObject::setName" qobject.html#setName
-"QObject::setProperty" qobject.html#setProperty
-"QObject::signalsBlocked" qobject.html#signalsBlocked
-"QObject::startTimer" qobject.html#startTimer
-"QObject::timerEvent" qobject.html#timerEvent
-"QObject::tr" qobject.html#tr
-"QObject::trUtf8" qobject.html#trUtf8
-"QObject::~QObject" qobject.html#~QObject
-"QObjectCleanupHandler" qobjectcleanuphandler.html
-"QObjectCleanupHandler::add" qobjectcleanuphandler.html#add
-"QObjectCleanupHandler::clear" qobjectcleanuphandler.html#clear
-"QObjectCleanupHandler::isEmpty" qobjectcleanuphandler.html#isEmpty
-"QObjectCleanupHandler::remove" qobjectcleanuphandler.html#remove
-"QObjectCleanupHandler::~QObjectCleanupHandler" qobjectcleanuphandler.html#~QObjectCleanupHandler
-"QObjectList" qobjectlist.html
-"QObjectList::operator=" qobjectlist.html#operator-eq
-"QObjectList::~QObjectList" qobjectlist.html#~QObjectList
+"QNetworkProtocol" ntqnetworkprotocol.html
+"QNetworkProtocol::ConnectionState" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#ConnectionState
+"QNetworkProtocol::Error" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#Error
+"QNetworkProtocol::Operation" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#Operation
+"QNetworkProtocol::State" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#State
+"QNetworkProtocol::addOperation" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#addOperation
+"QNetworkProtocol::autoDelete" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#autoDelete
+"QNetworkProtocol::checkConnection" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#checkConnection
+"QNetworkProtocol::clearOperationQueue" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#clearOperationQueue
+"QNetworkProtocol::connectionStateChanged" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#connectionStateChanged
+"QNetworkProtocol::createdDirectory" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#createdDirectory
+"QNetworkProtocol::data" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#data
+"QNetworkProtocol::dataTransferProgress" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#dataTransferProgress
+"QNetworkProtocol::finished" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#finished
+"QNetworkProtocol::getNetworkProtocol" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#getNetworkProtocol
+"QNetworkProtocol::hasOnlyLocalFileSystem" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#hasOnlyLocalFileSystem
+"QNetworkProtocol::itemChanged" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#itemChanged
+"QNetworkProtocol::newChild" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#newChild
+"QNetworkProtocol::newChildren" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#newChildren
+"QNetworkProtocol::operationGet" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#operationGet
+"QNetworkProtocol::operationInProgress" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#operationInProgress
+"QNetworkProtocol::operationListChildren" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#operationListChildren
+"QNetworkProtocol::operationMkDir" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#operationMkDir
+"QNetworkProtocol::operationPut" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#operationPut
+"QNetworkProtocol::operationRemove" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#operationRemove
+"QNetworkProtocol::operationRename" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#operationRename
+"QNetworkProtocol::registerNetworkProtocol" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#registerNetworkProtocol
+"QNetworkProtocol::removed" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#removed
+"QNetworkProtocol::setAutoDelete" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#setAutoDelete
+"QNetworkProtocol::setUrl" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#setUrl
+"QNetworkProtocol::start" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#start
+"QNetworkProtocol::stop" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#stop
+"QNetworkProtocol::supportedOperations" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#supportedOperations
+"QNetworkProtocol::url" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#url
+"QNetworkProtocol::~QNetworkProtocol" ntqnetworkprotocol.html#~QNetworkProtocol
+"QObject" ntqobject.html
+"QObject::activate_signal" ntqobject.html#activate_signal
+"QObject::blockSignals" ntqobject.html#blockSignals
+"QObject::checkConnectArgs" ntqobject.html#checkConnectArgs
+"QObject::child" ntqobject.html#child
+"QObject::childEvent" ntqobject.html#childEvent
+"QObject::children" ntqobject.html#children
+"QObject::className" ntqobject.html#className
+"QObject::cleanupEventFilter" ntqobject.html#cleanupEventFilter
+"QObject::connect" ntqobject.html#connect
+"QObject::connectNotify" ntqobject.html#connectNotify
+"QObject::customEvent" ntqobject.html#customEvent
+"QObject::deleteLater" ntqobject.html#deleteLater
+"QObject::destroyed" ntqobject.html#destroyed
+"QObject::disconnect" ntqobject.html#disconnect
+"QObject::disconnectNotify" ntqobject.html#disconnectNotify
+"QObject::dumpObjectInfo" ntqobject.html#dumpObjectInfo
+"QObject::dumpObjectTree" ntqobject.html#dumpObjectTree
+"QObject::event" ntqobject.html#event
+"QObject::eventFilter" ntqobject.html#eventFilter
+"QObject::highPriority" ntqobject.html#highPriority
+"QObject::inherits" ntqobject.html#inherits
+"QObject::insertChild" ntqobject.html#insertChild
+"QObject::installEventFilter" ntqobject.html#installEventFilter
+"QObject::isA" ntqobject.html#isA
+"QObject::isWidgetType" ntqobject.html#isWidgetType
+"QObject::killTimer" ntqobject.html#killTimer
+"QObject::killTimers" ntqobject.html#killTimers
+"QObject::metaObject" ntqobject.html#metaObject
+"QObject::name" ntqobject.html#name
+"QObject::name" ntqobject.html#name-prop
+"QObject::normalizeSignalSlot" ntqobject.html#normalizeSignalSlot
+"QObject::objectTrees" ntqobject.html#objectTrees
+"QObject::parent" ntqobject.html#parent
+"QObject::property" ntqobject.html#property
+"QObject::queryList" ntqobject.html#queryList
+"QObject::removeChild" ntqobject.html#removeChild
+"QObject::removeEventFilter" ntqobject.html#removeEventFilter
+"QObject::sender" ntqobject.html#sender
+"QObject::setName" ntqobject.html#setName
+"QObject::setProperty" ntqobject.html#setProperty
+"QObject::signalsBlocked" ntqobject.html#signalsBlocked
+"QObject::startTimer" ntqobject.html#startTimer
+"QObject::timerEvent" ntqobject.html#timerEvent
+"QObject::tr" ntqobject.html#tr
+"QObject::trUtf8" ntqobject.html#trUtf8
+"QObject::~QObject" ntqobject.html#~QObject
+"QObjectCleanupHandler" ntqobjectcleanuphandler.html
+"QObjectCleanupHandler::add" ntqobjectcleanuphandler.html#add
+"QObjectCleanupHandler::clear" ntqobjectcleanuphandler.html#clear
+"QObjectCleanupHandler::isEmpty" ntqobjectcleanuphandler.html#isEmpty
+"QObjectCleanupHandler::remove" ntqobjectcleanuphandler.html#remove
+"QObjectCleanupHandler::~QObjectCleanupHandler" ntqobjectcleanuphandler.html#~QObjectCleanupHandler
+"QObjectList" ntqobjectlist.html
+"QObjectList::operator=" ntqobjectlist.html#operator-eq
+"QObjectList::~QObjectList" ntqobjectlist.html#~QObjectList
 "QObjectListIterator" qobjectlistiterator.html
 "QObjectListIterator::operator=" qobjectlistiterator.html#operator-eq
 "QPNGImagePacker" qpngimagepacker.html
 "QPNGImagePacker::packImage" qpngimagepacker.html#packImage
 "QPNGImagePacker::setPixelAlignment" qpngimagepacker.html#setPixelAlignment
-"QPaintDevice" qpaintdevice.html
-"QPaintDevice::cmd" qpaintdevice.html#cmd
-"QPaintDevice::handle" qpaintdevice.html#handle
-"QPaintDevice::isExtDev" qpaintdevice.html#isExtDev
-"QPaintDevice::paintingActive" qpaintdevice.html#paintingActive
-"QPaintDevice::x11AppCells" qpaintdevice.html#x11AppCells
-"QPaintDevice::x11AppColormap" qpaintdevice.html#x11AppColormap
-"QPaintDevice::x11AppDefaultColormap" qpaintdevice.html#x11AppDefaultColormap
-"QPaintDevice::x11AppDefaultVisual" qpaintdevice.html#x11AppDefaultVisual
-"QPaintDevice::x11AppDepth" qpaintdevice.html#x11AppDepth
-"QPaintDevice::x11AppDisplay" qpaintdevice.html#x11AppDisplay
-"QPaintDevice::x11AppDpiX" qpaintdevice.html#x11AppDpiX
-"QPaintDevice::x11AppDpiY" qpaintdevice.html#x11AppDpiY
-"QPaintDevice::x11AppRootWindow" qpaintdevice.html#x11AppRootWindow
-"QPaintDevice::x11AppScreen" qpaintdevice.html#x11AppScreen
-"QPaintDevice::x11AppVisual" qpaintdevice.html#x11AppVisual
-"QPaintDevice::x11Cells" qpaintdevice.html#x11Cells
-"QPaintDevice::x11Colormap" qpaintdevice.html#x11Colormap
-"QPaintDevice::x11DefaultColormap" qpaintdevice.html#x11DefaultColormap
-"QPaintDevice::x11DefaultVisual" qpaintdevice.html#x11DefaultVisual
-"QPaintDevice::x11Depth" qpaintdevice.html#x11Depth
-"QPaintDevice::x11Display" qpaintdevice.html#x11Display
-"QPaintDevice::x11Screen" qpaintdevice.html#x11Screen
-"QPaintDevice::x11SetAppDpiX" qpaintdevice.html#x11SetAppDpiX
-"QPaintDevice::x11SetAppDpiY" qpaintdevice.html#x11SetAppDpiY
-"QPaintDevice::x11Visual" qpaintdevice.html#x11Visual
-"QPaintDevice::~QPaintDevice" qpaintdevice.html#~QPaintDevice
-"QPaintDeviceMetrics" qpaintdevicemetrics.html
-"QPaintDeviceMetrics::depth" qpaintdevicemetrics.html#depth
-"QPaintDeviceMetrics::height" qpaintdevicemetrics.html#height
-"QPaintDeviceMetrics::heightMM" qpaintdevicemetrics.html#heightMM
-"QPaintDeviceMetrics::logicalDpiX" qpaintdevicemetrics.html#logicalDpiX
-"QPaintDeviceMetrics::logicalDpiY" qpaintdevicemetrics.html#logicalDpiY
-"QPaintDeviceMetrics::numColors" qpaintdevicemetrics.html#numColors
-"QPaintDeviceMetrics::width" qpaintdevicemetrics.html#width
-"QPaintDeviceMetrics::widthMM" qpaintdevicemetrics.html#widthMM
+"QPaintDevice" ntqpaintdevice.html
+"QPaintDevice::cmd" ntqpaintdevice.html#cmd
+"QPaintDevice::handle" ntqpaintdevice.html#handle
+"QPaintDevice::isExtDev" ntqpaintdevice.html#isExtDev
+"QPaintDevice::paintingActive" ntqpaintdevice.html#paintingActive
+"QPaintDevice::x11AppCells" ntqpaintdevice.html#x11AppCells
+"QPaintDevice::x11AppColormap" ntqpaintdevice.html#x11AppColormap
+"QPaintDevice::x11AppDefaultColormap" ntqpaintdevice.html#x11AppDefaultColormap
+"QPaintDevice::x11AppDefaultVisual" ntqpaintdevice.html#x11AppDefaultVisual
+"QPaintDevice::x11AppDepth" ntqpaintdevice.html#x11AppDepth
+"QPaintDevice::x11AppDisplay" ntqpaintdevice.html#x11AppDisplay
+"QPaintDevice::x11AppDpiX" ntqpaintdevice.html#x11AppDpiX
+"QPaintDevice::x11AppDpiY" ntqpaintdevice.html#x11AppDpiY
+"QPaintDevice::x11AppRootWindow" ntqpaintdevice.html#x11AppRootWindow
+"QPaintDevice::x11AppScreen" ntqpaintdevice.html#x11AppScreen
+"QPaintDevice::x11AppVisual" ntqpaintdevice.html#x11AppVisual
+"QPaintDevice::x11Cells" ntqpaintdevice.html#x11Cells
+"QPaintDevice::x11Colormap" ntqpaintdevice.html#x11Colormap
+"QPaintDevice::x11DefaultColormap" ntqpaintdevice.html#x11DefaultColormap
+"QPaintDevice::x11DefaultVisual" ntqpaintdevice.html#x11DefaultVisual
+"QPaintDevice::x11Depth" ntqpaintdevice.html#x11Depth
+"QPaintDevice::x11Display" ntqpaintdevice.html#x11Display
+"QPaintDevice::x11Screen" ntqpaintdevice.html#x11Screen
+"QPaintDevice::x11SetAppDpiX" ntqpaintdevice.html#x11SetAppDpiX
+"QPaintDevice::x11SetAppDpiY" ntqpaintdevice.html#x11SetAppDpiY
+"QPaintDevice::x11Visual" ntqpaintdevice.html#x11Visual
+"QPaintDevice::~QPaintDevice" ntqpaintdevice.html#~QPaintDevice
+"QPaintDeviceMetrics" ntqpaintdevicemetrics.html
+"QPaintDeviceMetrics::depth" ntqpaintdevicemetrics.html#depth
+"QPaintDeviceMetrics::height" ntqpaintdevicemetrics.html#height
+"QPaintDeviceMetrics::heightMM" ntqpaintdevicemetrics.html#heightMM
+"QPaintDeviceMetrics::logicalDpiX" ntqpaintdevicemetrics.html#logicalDpiX
+"QPaintDeviceMetrics::logicalDpiY" ntqpaintdevicemetrics.html#logicalDpiY
+"QPaintDeviceMetrics::numColors" ntqpaintdevicemetrics.html#numColors
+"QPaintDeviceMetrics::width" ntqpaintdevicemetrics.html#width
+"QPaintDeviceMetrics::widthMM" ntqpaintdevicemetrics.html#widthMM
 "QPaintEvent" qpaintevent.html
 "QPaintEvent::erased" qpaintevent.html#erased
 "QPaintEvent::rect" qpaintevent.html#rect
 "QPaintEvent::region" qpaintevent.html#region
-"QPainter" qpainter.html
-"QPainter::CoordinateMode" qpainter.html#CoordinateMode
-"QPainter::TextDirection" qpainter.html#TextDirection
-"QPainter::backgroundColor" qpainter.html#backgroundColor
-"QPainter::backgroundMode" qpainter.html#backgroundMode
-"QPainter::begin" qpainter.html#begin
-"QPainter::boundingRect" qpainter.html#boundingRect
-"QPainter::brush" qpainter.html#brush
-"QPainter::brushOrigin" qpainter.html#brushOrigin
-"QPainter::clipRegion" qpainter.html#clipRegion
-"QPainter::device" qpainter.html#device
-"QPainter::drawArc" qpainter.html#drawArc
-"QPainter::drawChord" qpainter.html#drawChord
-"QPainter::drawConvexPolygon" qpainter.html#drawConvexPolygon
-"QPainter::drawCubicBezier" qpainter.html#drawCubicBezier
-"QPainter::drawEllipse" qpainter.html#drawEllipse
-"QPainter::drawImage" qpainter.html#drawImage
-"QPainter::drawLine" qpainter.html#drawLine
-"QPainter::drawLineSegments" qpainter.html#drawLineSegments
-"QPainter::drawPicture" qpainter.html#drawPicture
-"QPainter::drawPie" qpainter.html#drawPie
-"QPainter::drawPixmap" qpainter.html#drawPixmap
-"QPainter::drawPoint" qpainter.html#drawPoint
-"QPainter::drawPoints" qpainter.html#drawPoints
-"QPainter::drawPolygon" qpainter.html#drawPolygon
-"QPainter::drawPolyline" qpainter.html#drawPolyline
-"QPainter::drawRect" qpainter.html#drawRect
-"QPainter::drawRoundRect" qpainter.html#drawRoundRect
-"QPainter::drawText" qpainter.html#drawText
-"QPainter::drawTiledPixmap" qpainter.html#drawTiledPixmap
-"QPainter::drawWinFocusRect" qpainter.html#drawWinFocusRect
-"QPainter::end" qpainter.html#end
-"QPainter::eraseRect" qpainter.html#eraseRect
-"QPainter::fillRect" qpainter.html#fillRect
-"QPainter::flush" qpainter.html#flush
-"QPainter::font" qpainter.html#font
-"QPainter::fontInfo" qpainter.html#fontInfo
-"QPainter::fontMetrics" qpainter.html#fontMetrics
-"QPainter::handle" qpainter.html#handle
-"QPainter::hasClipping" qpainter.html#hasClipping
-"QPainter::hasViewXForm" qpainter.html#hasViewXForm
-"QPainter::hasWorldXForm" qpainter.html#hasWorldXForm
-"QPainter::isActive" qpainter.html#isActive
-"QPainter::lineTo" qpainter.html#lineTo
-"QPainter::moveTo" qpainter.html#moveTo
-"QPainter::pen" qpainter.html#pen
-"QPainter::rasterOp" qpainter.html#rasterOp
-"QPainter::redirect" qpainter.html#redirect
-"QPainter::resetXForm" qpainter.html#resetXForm
-"QPainter::restore" qpainter.html#restore
-"QPainter::rotate" qpainter.html#rotate
-"QPainter::save" qpainter.html#save
-"QPainter::scale" qpainter.html#scale
-"QPainter::setBackgroundColor" qpainter.html#setBackgroundColor
-"QPainter::setBackgroundMode" qpainter.html#setBackgroundMode
-"QPainter::setBrush" qpainter.html#setBrush
-"QPainter::setBrushOrigin" qpainter.html#setBrushOrigin
-"QPainter::setClipRect" qpainter.html#setClipRect
-"QPainter::setClipRegion" qpainter.html#setClipRegion
-"QPainter::setClipping" qpainter.html#setClipping
-"QPainter::setFont" qpainter.html#setFont
-"QPainter::setPen" qpainter.html#setPen
-"QPainter::setRasterOp" qpainter.html#setRasterOp
-"QPainter::setTabArray" qpainter.html#setTabArray
-"QPainter::setTabStops" qpainter.html#setTabStops
-"QPainter::setViewXForm" qpainter.html#setViewXForm
-"QPainter::setViewport" qpainter.html#setViewport
-"QPainter::setWindow" qpainter.html#setWindow
-"QPainter::setWorldMatrix" qpainter.html#setWorldMatrix
-"QPainter::setWorldXForm" qpainter.html#setWorldXForm
-"QPainter::shear" qpainter.html#shear
-"QPainter::tabArray" qpainter.html#tabArray
-"QPainter::tabStops" qpainter.html#tabStops
-"QPainter::translate" qpainter.html#translate
-"QPainter::viewport" qpainter.html#viewport
-"QPainter::window" qpainter.html#window
-"QPainter::worldMatrix" qpainter.html#worldMatrix
-"QPainter::xForm" qpainter.html#xForm
-"QPainter::xFormDev" qpainter.html#xFormDev
-"QPainter::~QPainter" qpainter.html#~QPainter
-"QPair" qpair.html
-"QPair::first_type" qpair.html#first_type
-"QPair::second_type" qpair.html#second_type
-"QPalette" qpalette.html
-"QPalette::ColorGroup" qpalette.html#ColorGroup
-"QPalette::active" qpalette.html#active
-"QPalette::brush" qpalette.html#brush
-"QPalette::color" qpalette.html#color
-"QPalette::copy" qpalette.html#copy
-"QPalette::detach" qpalette.html#detach
-"QPalette::disabled" qpalette.html#disabled
-"QPalette::inactive" qpalette.html#inactive
-"QPalette::isCopyOf" qpalette.html#isCopyOf
-"QPalette::operator!=" qpalette.html#operator!-eq
-"QPalette::operator=" qpalette.html#operator-eq
-"QPalette::operator==" qpalette.html#operator-eq-eq
-"QPalette::serialNumber" qpalette.html#serialNumber
-"QPalette::setActive" qpalette.html#setActive
-"QPalette::setBrush" qpalette.html#setBrush
-"QPalette::setColor" qpalette.html#setColor
-"QPalette::setDisabled" qpalette.html#setDisabled
-"QPalette::setInactive" qpalette.html#setInactive
-"QPalette::~QPalette" qpalette.html#~QPalette
-"QPen" qpen.html
-"QPen::capStyle" qpen.html#capStyle
-"QPen::color" qpen.html#color
-"QPen::copy" qpen.html#copy
-"QPen::detach" qpen.html#detach
-"QPen::joinStyle" qpen.html#joinStyle
-"QPen::operator!=" qpen.html#operator!-eq
-"QPen::operator=" qpen.html#operator-eq
-"QPen::operator==" qpen.html#operator-eq-eq
-"QPen::setCapStyle" qpen.html#setCapStyle
-"QPen::setColor" qpen.html#setColor
-"QPen::setJoinStyle" qpen.html#setJoinStyle
-"QPen::setStyle" qpen.html#setStyle
-"QPen::setWidth" qpen.html#setWidth
-"QPen::style" qpen.html#style
-"QPen::width" qpen.html#width
-"QPen::~QPen" qpen.html#~QPen
-"QPicture" qpicture.html
-"QPicture::boundingRect" qpicture.html#boundingRect
-"QPicture::copy" qpicture.html#copy
-"QPicture::data" qpicture.html#data
-"QPicture::detach" qpicture.html#detach
-"QPicture::isNull" qpicture.html#isNull
-"QPicture::load" qpicture.html#load
-"QPicture::metric" qpicture.html#metric
-"QPicture::operator=" qpicture.html#operator-eq
-"QPicture::play" qpicture.html#play
-"QPicture::save" qpicture.html#save
-"QPicture::setBoundingRect" qpicture.html#setBoundingRect
-"QPicture::setData" qpicture.html#setData
-"QPicture::size" qpicture.html#size
-"QPicture::~QPicture" qpicture.html#~QPicture
-"QPixmap" qpixmap.html
-"QPixmap::ColorMode" qpixmap.html#ColorMode
-"QPixmap::Optimization" qpixmap.html#Optimization
-"QPixmap::convertFromImage" qpixmap.html#convertFromImage
-"QPixmap::convertToImage" qpixmap.html#convertToImage
-"QPixmap::copy" qpixmap.html#copy
-"QPixmap::createHeuristicMask" qpixmap.html#createHeuristicMask
-"QPixmap::defaultDepth" qpixmap.html#defaultDepth
-"QPixmap::defaultOptimization" qpixmap.html#defaultOptimization
-"QPixmap::depth" qpixmap.html#depth
-"QPixmap::detach" qpixmap.html#detach
-"QPixmap::fill" qpixmap.html#fill
-"QPixmap::fromMimeSource" qpixmap.html#fromMimeSource
-"QPixmap::grabWidget" qpixmap.html#grabWidget
-"QPixmap::grabWindow" qpixmap.html#grabWindow
-"QPixmap::hasAlpha" qpixmap.html#hasAlpha
-"QPixmap::hasAlphaChannel" qpixmap.html#hasAlphaChannel
-"QPixmap::height" qpixmap.html#height
-"QPixmap::imageFormat" qpixmap.html#imageFormat
-"QPixmap::isNull" qpixmap.html#isNull
-"QPixmap::isQBitmap" qpixmap.html#isQBitmap
-"QPixmap::load" qpixmap.html#load
-"QPixmap::loadFromData" qpixmap.html#loadFromData
-"QPixmap::mask" qpixmap.html#mask
-"QPixmap::metric" qpixmap.html#metric
-"QPixmap::operator=" qpixmap.html#operator-eq
-"QPixmap::optimization" qpixmap.html#optimization
-"QPixmap::rect" qpixmap.html#rect
-"QPixmap::resize" qpixmap.html#resize
-"QPixmap::save" qpixmap.html#save
-"QPixmap::selfMask" qpixmap.html#selfMask
-"QPixmap::serialNumber" qpixmap.html#serialNumber
-"QPixmap::setDefaultOptimization" qpixmap.html#setDefaultOptimization
-"QPixmap::setMask" qpixmap.html#setMask
-"QPixmap::setOptimization" qpixmap.html#setOptimization
-"QPixmap::size" qpixmap.html#size
-"QPixmap::trueMatrix" qpixmap.html#trueMatrix
-"QPixmap::width" qpixmap.html#width
-"QPixmap::xForm" qpixmap.html#xForm
-"QPixmap::~QPixmap" qpixmap.html#~QPixmap
-"QPixmapCache" qpixmapcache.html
-"QPixmapCache::cacheLimit" qpixmapcache.html#cacheLimit
-"QPixmapCache::clear" qpixmapcache.html#clear
-"QPixmapCache::find" qpixmapcache.html#find
-"QPixmapCache::insert" qpixmapcache.html#insert
-"QPixmapCache::remove" qpixmapcache.html#remove
-"QPixmapCache::setCacheLimit" qpixmapcache.html#setCacheLimit
-"QPlatinumStyle" qplatinumstyle.html
-"QPlatinumStyle::drawRiffles" qplatinumstyle.html#drawRiffles
-"QPlatinumStyle::mixedColor" qplatinumstyle.html#mixedColor
+"QPainter" ntqpainter.html
+"QPainter::CoordinateMode" ntqpainter.html#CoordinateMode
+"QPainter::TextDirection" ntqpainter.html#TextDirection
+"QPainter::backgroundColor" ntqpainter.html#backgroundColor
+"QPainter::backgroundMode" ntqpainter.html#backgroundMode
+"QPainter::begin" ntqpainter.html#begin
+"QPainter::boundingRect" ntqpainter.html#boundingRect
+"QPainter::brush" ntqpainter.html#brush
+"QPainter::brushOrigin" ntqpainter.html#brushOrigin
+"QPainter::clipRegion" ntqpainter.html#clipRegion
+"QPainter::device" ntqpainter.html#device
+"QPainter::drawArc" ntqpainter.html#drawArc
+"QPainter::drawChord" ntqpainter.html#drawChord
+"QPainter::drawConvexPolygon" ntqpainter.html#drawConvexPolygon
+"QPainter::drawCubicBezier" ntqpainter.html#drawCubicBezier
+"QPainter::drawEllipse" ntqpainter.html#drawEllipse
+"QPainter::drawImage" ntqpainter.html#drawImage
+"QPainter::drawLine" ntqpainter.html#drawLine
+"QPainter::drawLineSegments" ntqpainter.html#drawLineSegments
+"QPainter::drawPicture" ntqpainter.html#drawPicture
+"QPainter::drawPie" ntqpainter.html#drawPie
+"QPainter::drawPixmap" ntqpainter.html#drawPixmap
+"QPainter::drawPoint" ntqpainter.html#drawPoint
+"QPainter::drawPoints" ntqpainter.html#drawPoints
+"QPainter::drawPolygon" ntqpainter.html#drawPolygon
+"QPainter::drawPolyline" ntqpainter.html#drawPolyline
+"QPainter::drawRect" ntqpainter.html#drawRect
+"QPainter::drawRoundRect" ntqpainter.html#drawRoundRect
+"QPainter::drawText" ntqpainter.html#drawText
+"QPainter::drawTiledPixmap" ntqpainter.html#drawTiledPixmap
+"QPainter::drawWinFocusRect" ntqpainter.html#drawWinFocusRect
+"QPainter::end" ntqpainter.html#end
+"QPainter::eraseRect" ntqpainter.html#eraseRect
+"QPainter::fillRect" ntqpainter.html#fillRect
+"QPainter::flush" ntqpainter.html#flush
+"QPainter::font" ntqpainter.html#font
+"QPainter::fontInfo" ntqpainter.html#fontInfo
+"QPainter::fontMetrics" ntqpainter.html#fontMetrics
+"QPainter::handle" ntqpainter.html#handle
+"QPainter::hasClipping" ntqpainter.html#hasClipping
+"QPainter::hasViewXForm" ntqpainter.html#hasViewXForm
+"QPainter::hasWorldXForm" ntqpainter.html#hasWorldXForm
+"QPainter::isActive" ntqpainter.html#isActive
+"QPainter::lineTo" ntqpainter.html#lineTo
+"QPainter::moveTo" ntqpainter.html#moveTo
+"QPainter::pen" ntqpainter.html#pen
+"QPainter::rasterOp" ntqpainter.html#rasterOp
+"QPainter::redirect" ntqpainter.html#redirect
+"QPainter::resetXForm" ntqpainter.html#resetXForm
+"QPainter::restore" ntqpainter.html#restore
+"QPainter::rotate" ntqpainter.html#rotate
+"QPainter::save" ntqpainter.html#save
+"QPainter::scale" ntqpainter.html#scale
+"QPainter::setBackgroundColor" ntqpainter.html#setBackgroundColor
+"QPainter::setBackgroundMode" ntqpainter.html#setBackgroundMode
+"QPainter::setBrush" ntqpainter.html#setBrush
+"QPainter::setBrushOrigin" ntqpainter.html#setBrushOrigin
+"QPainter::setClipRect" ntqpainter.html#setClipRect
+"QPainter::setClipRegion" ntqpainter.html#setClipRegion
+"QPainter::setClipping" ntqpainter.html#setClipping
+"QPainter::setFont" ntqpainter.html#setFont
+"QPainter::setPen" ntqpainter.html#setPen
+"QPainter::setRasterOp" ntqpainter.html#setRasterOp
+"QPainter::setTabArray" ntqpainter.html#setTabArray
+"QPainter::setTabStops" ntqpainter.html#setTabStops
+"QPainter::setViewXForm" ntqpainter.html#setViewXForm
+"QPainter::setViewport" ntqpainter.html#setViewport
+"QPainter::setWindow" ntqpainter.html#setWindow
+"QPainter::setWorldMatrix" ntqpainter.html#setWorldMatrix
+"QPainter::setWorldXForm" ntqpainter.html#setWorldXForm
+"QPainter::shear" ntqpainter.html#shear
+"QPainter::tabArray" ntqpainter.html#tabArray
+"QPainter::tabStops" ntqpainter.html#tabStops
+"QPainter::translate" ntqpainter.html#translate
+"QPainter::viewport" ntqpainter.html#viewport
+"QPainter::window" ntqpainter.html#window
+"QPainter::worldMatrix" ntqpainter.html#worldMatrix
+"QPainter::xForm" ntqpainter.html#xForm
+"QPainter::xFormDev" ntqpainter.html#xFormDev
+"QPainter::~QPainter" ntqpainter.html#~QPainter
+"QPair" ntqpair.html
+"QPair::first_type" ntqpair.html#first_type
+"QPair::second_type" ntqpair.html#second_type
+"QPalette" ntqpalette.html
+"QPalette::ColorGroup" ntqpalette.html#ColorGroup
+"QPalette::active" ntqpalette.html#active
+"QPalette::brush" ntqpalette.html#brush
+"QPalette::color" ntqpalette.html#color
+"QPalette::copy" ntqpalette.html#copy
+"QPalette::detach" ntqpalette.html#detach
+"QPalette::disabled" ntqpalette.html#disabled
+"QPalette::inactive" ntqpalette.html#inactive
+"QPalette::isCopyOf" ntqpalette.html#isCopyOf
+"QPalette::operator!=" ntqpalette.html#operator!-eq
+"QPalette::operator=" ntqpalette.html#operator-eq
+"QPalette::operator==" ntqpalette.html#operator-eq-eq
+"QPalette::serialNumber" ntqpalette.html#serialNumber
+"QPalette::setActive" ntqpalette.html#setActive
+"QPalette::setBrush" ntqpalette.html#setBrush
+"QPalette::setColor" ntqpalette.html#setColor
+"QPalette::setDisabled" ntqpalette.html#setDisabled
+"QPalette::setInactive" ntqpalette.html#setInactive
+"QPalette::~QPalette" ntqpalette.html#~QPalette
+"QPen" ntqpen.html
+"QPen::capStyle" ntqpen.html#capStyle
+"QPen::color" ntqpen.html#color
+"QPen::copy" ntqpen.html#copy
+"QPen::detach" ntqpen.html#detach
+"QPen::joinStyle" ntqpen.html#joinStyle
+"QPen::operator!=" ntqpen.html#operator!-eq
+"QPen::operator=" ntqpen.html#operator-eq
+"QPen::operator==" ntqpen.html#operator-eq-eq
+"QPen::setCapStyle" ntqpen.html#setCapStyle
+"QPen::setColor" ntqpen.html#setColor
+"QPen::setJoinStyle" ntqpen.html#setJoinStyle
+"QPen::setStyle" ntqpen.html#setStyle
+"QPen::setWidth" ntqpen.html#setWidth
+"QPen::style" ntqpen.html#style
+"QPen::width" ntqpen.html#width
+"QPen::~QPen" ntqpen.html#~QPen
+"QPicture" ntqpicture.html
+"QPicture::boundingRect" ntqpicture.html#boundingRect
+"QPicture::copy" ntqpicture.html#copy
+"QPicture::data" ntqpicture.html#data
+"QPicture::detach" ntqpicture.html#detach
+"QPicture::isNull" ntqpicture.html#isNull
+"QPicture::load" ntqpicture.html#load
+"QPicture::metric" ntqpicture.html#metric
+"QPicture::operator=" ntqpicture.html#operator-eq
+"QPicture::play" ntqpicture.html#play
+"QPicture::save" ntqpicture.html#save
+"QPicture::setBoundingRect" ntqpicture.html#setBoundingRect
+"QPicture::setData" ntqpicture.html#setData
+"QPicture::size" ntqpicture.html#size
+"QPicture::~QPicture" ntqpicture.html#~QPicture
+"QPixmap" ntqpixmap.html
+"QPixmap::ColorMode" ntqpixmap.html#ColorMode
+"QPixmap::Optimization" ntqpixmap.html#Optimization
+"QPixmap::convertFromImage" ntqpixmap.html#convertFromImage
+"QPixmap::convertToImage" ntqpixmap.html#convertToImage
+"QPixmap::copy" ntqpixmap.html#copy
+"QPixmap::createHeuristicMask" ntqpixmap.html#createHeuristicMask
+"QPixmap::defaultDepth" ntqpixmap.html#defaultDepth
+"QPixmap::defaultOptimization" ntqpixmap.html#defaultOptimization
+"QPixmap::depth" ntqpixmap.html#depth
+"QPixmap::detach" ntqpixmap.html#detach
+"QPixmap::fill" ntqpixmap.html#fill
+"QPixmap::fromMimeSource" ntqpixmap.html#fromMimeSource
+"QPixmap::grabWidget" ntqpixmap.html#grabWidget
+"QPixmap::grabWindow" ntqpixmap.html#grabWindow
+"QPixmap::hasAlpha" ntqpixmap.html#hasAlpha
+"QPixmap::hasAlphaChannel" ntqpixmap.html#hasAlphaChannel
+"QPixmap::height" ntqpixmap.html#height
+"QPixmap::imageFormat" ntqpixmap.html#imageFormat
+"QPixmap::isNull" ntqpixmap.html#isNull
+"QPixmap::isQBitmap" ntqpixmap.html#isQBitmap
+"QPixmap::load" ntqpixmap.html#load
+"QPixmap::loadFromData" ntqpixmap.html#loadFromData
+"QPixmap::mask" ntqpixmap.html#mask
+"QPixmap::metric" ntqpixmap.html#metric
+"QPixmap::operator=" ntqpixmap.html#operator-eq
+"QPixmap::optimization" ntqpixmap.html#optimization
+"QPixmap::rect" ntqpixmap.html#rect
+"QPixmap::resize" ntqpixmap.html#resize
+"QPixmap::save" ntqpixmap.html#save
+"QPixmap::selfMask" ntqpixmap.html#selfMask
+"QPixmap::serialNumber" ntqpixmap.html#serialNumber
+"QPixmap::setDefaultOptimization" ntqpixmap.html#setDefaultOptimization
+"QPixmap::setMask" ntqpixmap.html#setMask
+"QPixmap::setOptimization" ntqpixmap.html#setOptimization
+"QPixmap::size" ntqpixmap.html#size
+"QPixmap::trueMatrix" ntqpixmap.html#trueMatrix
+"QPixmap::width" ntqpixmap.html#width
+"QPixmap::xForm" ntqpixmap.html#xForm
+"QPixmap::~QPixmap" ntqpixmap.html#~QPixmap
+"QPixmapCache" ntqpixmapcache.html
+"QPixmapCache::cacheLimit" ntqpixmapcache.html#cacheLimit
+"QPixmapCache::clear" ntqpixmapcache.html#clear
+"QPixmapCache::find" ntqpixmapcache.html#find
+"QPixmapCache::insert" ntqpixmapcache.html#insert
+"QPixmapCache::remove" ntqpixmapcache.html#remove
+"QPixmapCache::setCacheLimit" ntqpixmapcache.html#setCacheLimit
+"QPlatinumStyle" ntqplatinumstyle.html
+"QPlatinumStyle::drawRiffles" ntqplatinumstyle.html#drawRiffles
+"QPlatinumStyle::mixedColor" ntqplatinumstyle.html#mixedColor
 "QPluginManager::queryInterface" qpluginmanager.html#queryInterface
-"QPoint" qpoint.html
-"QPoint::isNull" qpoint.html#isNull
-"QPoint::manhattanLength" qpoint.html#manhattanLength
-"QPoint::operator*=" qpoint.html#operator*-eq
-"QPoint::operator+=" qpoint.html#operator+-eq
-"QPoint::operator-=" qpoint.html#operator--eq
-"QPoint::operator/=" qpoint.html#operator/-eq
-"QPoint::rx" qpoint.html#rx
-"QPoint::ry" qpoint.html#ry
-"QPoint::setX" qpoint.html#setX
-"QPoint::setY" qpoint.html#setY
-"QPoint::x" qpoint.html#x
-"QPoint::y" qpoint.html#y
-"QPointArray" qpointarray.html
-"QPointArray::boundingRect" qpointarray.html#boundingRect
-"QPointArray::copy" qpointarray.html#copy
-"QPointArray::cubicBezier" qpointarray.html#cubicBezier
-"QPointArray::makeArc" qpointarray.html#makeArc
-"QPointArray::makeEllipse" qpointarray.html#makeEllipse
-"QPointArray::operator=" qpointarray.html#operator-eq
-"QPointArray::point" qpointarray.html#point
-"QPointArray::putPoints" qpointarray.html#putPoints
-"QPointArray::setPoint" qpointarray.html#setPoint
-"QPointArray::setPoints" qpointarray.html#setPoints
-"QPointArray::translate" qpointarray.html#translate
-"QPointArray::~QPointArray" qpointarray.html#~QPointArray
-"QPolygonScanner::scan" qpolygonscanner.html#scan
-"QPopupMenu" qpopupmenu.html
-"QPopupMenu::aboutToHide" qpopupmenu.html#aboutToHide
-"QPopupMenu::aboutToShow" qpopupmenu.html#aboutToShow
-"QPopupMenu::activated" qpopupmenu.html#activated
-"QPopupMenu::checkable" qpopupmenu.html#checkable-prop
-"QPopupMenu::columns" qpopupmenu.html#columns
-"QPopupMenu::drawContents" qpopupmenu.html#drawContents
-"QPopupMenu::drawItem" qpopupmenu.html#drawItem
-"QPopupMenu::exec" qpopupmenu.html#exec
-"QPopupMenu::highlighted" qpopupmenu.html#highlighted
-"QPopupMenu::idAt" qpopupmenu.html#idAt
-"QPopupMenu::insertTearOffHandle" qpopupmenu.html#insertTearOffHandle
-"QPopupMenu::isCheckable" qpopupmenu.html#isCheckable
-"QPopupMenu::itemHeight" qpopupmenu.html#itemHeight
-"QPopupMenu::popup" qpopupmenu.html#popup
-"QPopupMenu::setActiveItem" qpopupmenu.html#setActiveItem
-"QPopupMenu::setCheckable" qpopupmenu.html#setCheckable
-"QPopupMenu::updateItem" qpopupmenu.html#updateItem
-"QPopupMenu::~QPopupMenu" qpopupmenu.html#~QPopupMenu
-"QPrintDialog::addButton" qprintdialog.html#addButton
-"QPrintDialog::getPrinterSetup" qprintdialog.html#getPrinterSetup
-"QPrintDialog::printer" qprintdialog.html#printer
-"QPrintDialog::setGlobalPrintDialog" qprintdialog.html#setGlobalPrintDialog
-"QPrintDialog::setPrinter" qprintdialog.html#setPrinter
-"QPrintDialog::~QPrintDialog" qprintdialog.html#~QPrintDialog
-"QPrinter" qprinter.html
-"QPrinter::ColorMode" qprinter.html#ColorMode
-"QPrinter::Orientation" qprinter.html#Orientation
-"QPrinter::PageOrder" qprinter.html#PageOrder
-"QPrinter::PageSize" qprinter.html#PageSize
-"QPrinter::PaperSource" qprinter.html#PaperSource
-"QPrinter::PrintRange" qprinter.html#PrintRange
-"QPrinter::PrinterMode" qprinter.html#PrinterMode
-"QPrinter::PrinterOption" qprinter.html#PrinterOption
-"QPrinter::abort" qprinter.html#abort
-"QPrinter::aborted" qprinter.html#aborted
-"QPrinter::colorMode" qprinter.html#colorMode
-"QPrinter::creator" qprinter.html#creator
-"QPrinter::docName" qprinter.html#docName
-"QPrinter::fromPage" qprinter.html#fromPage
-"QPrinter::fullPage" qprinter.html#fullPage
-"QPrinter::isOptionEnabled" qprinter.html#isOptionEnabled
-"QPrinter::margins" qprinter.html#margins
-"QPrinter::maxPage" qprinter.html#maxPage
-"QPrinter::minPage" qprinter.html#minPage
-"QPrinter::newPage" qprinter.html#newPage
-"QPrinter::numCopies" qprinter.html#numCopies
-"QPrinter::orientation" qprinter.html#orientation
-"QPrinter::outputFileName" qprinter.html#outputFileName
-"QPrinter::outputToFile" qprinter.html#outputToFile
-"QPrinter::pageOrder" qprinter.html#pageOrder
-"QPrinter::pageSize" qprinter.html#pageSize
-"QPrinter::paperSource" qprinter.html#paperSource
-"QPrinter::printProgram" qprinter.html#printProgram
-"QPrinter::printRange" qprinter.html#printRange
-"QPrinter::printerName" qprinter.html#printerName
-"QPrinter::printerSelectionOption" qprinter.html#printerSelectionOption
-"QPrinter::resolution" qprinter.html#resolution
-"QPrinter::setColorMode" qprinter.html#setColorMode
-"QPrinter::setCreator" qprinter.html#setCreator
-"QPrinter::setDocName" qprinter.html#setDocName
-"QPrinter::setFromTo" qprinter.html#setFromTo
-"QPrinter::setFullPage" qprinter.html#setFullPage
-"QPrinter::setMargins" qprinter.html#setMargins
-"QPrinter::setMinMax" qprinter.html#setMinMax
-"QPrinter::setNumCopies" qprinter.html#setNumCopies
-"QPrinter::setOptionEnabled" qprinter.html#setOptionEnabled
-"QPrinter::setOrientation" qprinter.html#setOrientation
-"QPrinter::setOutputFileName" qprinter.html#setOutputFileName
-"QPrinter::setOutputToFile" qprinter.html#setOutputToFile
-"QPrinter::setPageOrder" qprinter.html#setPageOrder
-"QPrinter::setPageSize" qprinter.html#setPageSize
-"QPrinter::setPaperSource" qprinter.html#setPaperSource
-"QPrinter::setPrintProgram" qprinter.html#setPrintProgram
-"QPrinter::setPrintRange" qprinter.html#setPrintRange
-"QPrinter::setPrinterName" qprinter.html#setPrinterName
-"QPrinter::setPrinterSelectionOption" qprinter.html#setPrinterSelectionOption
-"QPrinter::setResolution" qprinter.html#setResolution
-"QPrinter::setWinPageSize" qprinter.html#setWinPageSize
-"QPrinter::setup" qprinter.html#setup
-"QPrinter::toPage" qprinter.html#toPage
-"QPrinter::winPageSize" qprinter.html#winPageSize
-"QPrinter::~QPrinter" qprinter.html#~QPrinter
-"QProcess" qprocess.html
-"QProcess::Communication" qprocess.html#Communication
-"QProcess::addArgument" qprocess.html#addArgument
-"QProcess::arguments" qprocess.html#arguments
-"QProcess::canReadLineStderr" qprocess.html#canReadLineStderr
-"QProcess::canReadLineStdout" qprocess.html#canReadLineStdout
-"QProcess::clearArguments" qprocess.html#clearArguments
-"QProcess::closeStdin" qprocess.html#closeStdin
-"QProcess::communication" qprocess.html#communication
-"QProcess::exitStatus" qprocess.html#exitStatus
-"QProcess::isRunning" qprocess.html#isRunning
-"QProcess::kill" qprocess.html#kill
-"QProcess::launch" qprocess.html#launch
-"QProcess::launchFinished" qprocess.html#launchFinished
-"QProcess::normalExit" qprocess.html#normalExit
-"QProcess::processExited" qprocess.html#processExited
-"QProcess::processIdentifier" qprocess.html#processIdentifier
-"QProcess::readLineStderr" qprocess.html#readLineStderr
-"QProcess::readLineStdout" qprocess.html#readLineStdout
-"QProcess::readStderr" qprocess.html#readStderr
-"QProcess::readStdout" qprocess.html#readStdout
-"QProcess::readyReadStderr" qprocess.html#readyReadStderr
-"QProcess::readyReadStdout" qprocess.html#readyReadStdout
-"QProcess::setArguments" qprocess.html#setArguments
-"QProcess::setCommunication" qprocess.html#setCommunication
-"QProcess::setWorkingDirectory" qprocess.html#setWorkingDirectory
-"QProcess::start" qprocess.html#start
-"QProcess::tryTerminate" qprocess.html#tryTerminate
-"QProcess::workingDirectory" qprocess.html#workingDirectory
-"QProcess::writeToStdin" qprocess.html#writeToStdin
-"QProcess::wroteToStdin" qprocess.html#wroteToStdin
-"QProcess::~QProcess" qprocess.html#~QProcess
-"QProgressBar" qprogressbar.html
-"QProgressBar::centerIndicator" qprogressbar.html#centerIndicator
-"QProgressBar::centerIndicator" qprogressbar.html#centerIndicator-prop
-"QProgressBar::indicatorFollowsStyle" qprogressbar.html#indicatorFollowsStyle
-"QProgressBar::indicatorFollowsStyle" qprogressbar.html#indicatorFollowsStyle-prop
-"QProgressBar::percentageVisible" qprogressbar.html#percentageVisible
-"QProgressBar::percentageVisible" qprogressbar.html#percentageVisible-prop
-"QProgressBar::progress" qprogressbar.html#progress
-"QProgressBar::progress" qprogressbar.html#progress-prop
-"QProgressBar::progressString" qprogressbar.html#progressString
-"QProgressBar::progressString" qprogressbar.html#progressString-prop
-"QProgressBar::reset" qprogressbar.html#reset
-"QProgressBar::setCenterIndicator" qprogressbar.html#setCenterIndicator
-"QProgressBar::setIndicator" qprogressbar.html#setIndicator
-"QProgressBar::setIndicatorFollowsStyle" qprogressbar.html#setIndicatorFollowsStyle
-"QProgressBar::setPercentageVisible" qprogressbar.html#setPercentageVisible
-"QProgressBar::setProgress" qprogressbar.html#setProgress
-"QProgressBar::setTotalSteps" qprogressbar.html#setTotalSteps
-"QProgressBar::totalSteps" qprogressbar.html#totalSteps
-"QProgressBar::totalSteps" qprogressbar.html#totalSteps-prop
-"QProgressDialog" qprogressdialog.html
-"QProgressDialog::autoClose" qprogressdialog.html#autoClose
-"QProgressDialog::autoClose" qprogressdialog.html#autoClose-prop
-"QProgressDialog::autoReset" qprogressdialog.html#autoReset
-"QProgressDialog::autoReset" qprogressdialog.html#autoReset-prop
-"QProgressDialog::bar" qprogressdialog.html#bar
-"QProgressDialog::cancel" qprogressdialog.html#cancel
-"QProgressDialog::canceled" qprogressdialog.html#canceled
-"QProgressDialog::forceShow" qprogressdialog.html#forceShow
-"QProgressDialog::label" qprogressdialog.html#label
-"QProgressDialog::labelText" qprogressdialog.html#labelText
-"QProgressDialog::labelText" qprogressdialog.html#labelText-prop
-"QProgressDialog::minimumDuration" qprogressdialog.html#minimumDuration
-"QProgressDialog::minimumDuration" qprogressdialog.html#minimumDuration-prop
-"QProgressDialog::progress" qprogressdialog.html#progress
-"QProgressDialog::progress" qprogressdialog.html#progress-prop
-"QProgressDialog::reset" qprogressdialog.html#reset
-"QProgressDialog::setAutoClose" qprogressdialog.html#setAutoClose
-"QProgressDialog::setAutoReset" qprogressdialog.html#setAutoReset
-"QProgressDialog::setBar" qprogressdialog.html#setBar
-"QProgressDialog::setCancelButton" qprogressdialog.html#setCancelButton
-"QProgressDialog::setCancelButtonText" qprogressdialog.html#setCancelButtonText
-"QProgressDialog::setLabel" qprogressdialog.html#setLabel
-"QProgressDialog::setLabelText" qprogressdialog.html#setLabelText
-"QProgressDialog::setMinimumDuration" qprogressdialog.html#setMinimumDuration
-"QProgressDialog::setProgress" qprogressdialog.html#setProgress
-"QProgressDialog::setTotalSteps" qprogressdialog.html#setTotalSteps
-"QProgressDialog::sizeHint" qprogressdialog.html#sizeHint
-"QProgressDialog::totalSteps" qprogressdialog.html#totalSteps
-"QProgressDialog::totalSteps" qprogressdialog.html#totalSteps-prop
-"QProgressDialog::wasCanceled" qprogressdialog.html#wasCanceled
-"QProgressDialog::wasCanceled" qprogressdialog.html#wasCanceled-prop
-"QProgressDialog::~QProgressDialog" qprogressdialog.html#~QProgressDialog
-"QPtrCollection" qptrcollection.html
-"QPtrCollection::Item" qptrcollection.html#Item
-"QPtrCollection::autoDelete" qptrcollection.html#autoDelete
-"QPtrCollection::clear" qptrcollection.html#clear
-"QPtrCollection::count" qptrcollection.html#count
-"QPtrCollection::deleteItem" qptrcollection.html#deleteItem
-"QPtrCollection::newItem" qptrcollection.html#newItem
-"QPtrCollection::setAutoDelete" qptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete
-"QPtrCollection::~QPtrCollection" qptrcollection.html#~QPtrCollection
-"QPtrDict" qptrdict.html
-"QPtrDict::clear" qptrdict.html#clear
-"QPtrDict::count" qptrdict.html#count
-"QPtrDict::find" qptrdict.html#find
-"QPtrDict::insert" qptrdict.html#insert
-"QPtrDict::isEmpty" qptrdict.html#isEmpty
-"QPtrDict::operator=" qptrdict.html#operator-eq
-"QPtrDict::operator[]" qptrdict.html#operator[]
-"QPtrDict::read" qptrdict.html#read
-"QPtrDict::remove" qptrdict.html#remove
-"QPtrDict::replace" qptrdict.html#replace
-"QPtrDict::resize" qptrdict.html#resize
-"QPtrDict::size" qptrdict.html#size
-"QPtrDict::statistics" qptrdict.html#statistics
-"QPtrDict::take" qptrdict.html#take
-"QPtrDict::write" qptrdict.html#write
-"QPtrDict::~QPtrDict" qptrdict.html#~QPtrDict
+"QPoint" ntqpoint.html
+"QPoint::isNull" ntqpoint.html#isNull
+"QPoint::manhattanLength" ntqpoint.html#manhattanLength
+"QPoint::operator*=" ntqpoint.html#operator*-eq
+"QPoint::operator+=" ntqpoint.html#operator+-eq
+"QPoint::operator-=" ntqpoint.html#operator--eq
+"QPoint::operator/=" ntqpoint.html#operator/-eq
+"QPoint::rx" ntqpoint.html#rx
+"QPoint::ry" ntqpoint.html#ry
+"QPoint::setX" ntqpoint.html#setX
+"QPoint::setY" ntqpoint.html#setY
+"QPoint::x" ntqpoint.html#x
+"QPoint::y" ntqpoint.html#y
+"QPointArray" ntqpointarray.html
+"QPointArray::boundingRect" ntqpointarray.html#boundingRect
+"QPointArray::copy" ntqpointarray.html#copy
+"QPointArray::cubicBezier" ntqpointarray.html#cubicBezier
+"QPointArray::makeArc" ntqpointarray.html#makeArc
+"QPointArray::makeEllipse" ntqpointarray.html#makeEllipse
+"QPointArray::operator=" ntqpointarray.html#operator-eq
+"QPointArray::point" ntqpointarray.html#point
+"QPointArray::putPoints" ntqpointarray.html#putPoints
+"QPointArray::setPoint" ntqpointarray.html#setPoint
+"QPointArray::setPoints" ntqpointarray.html#setPoints
+"QPointArray::translate" ntqpointarray.html#translate
+"QPointArray::~QPointArray" ntqpointarray.html#~QPointArray
+"QPolygonScanner::scan" ntqpolygonscanner.html#scan
+"QPopupMenu" ntqpopupmenu.html
+"QPopupMenu::aboutToHide" ntqpopupmenu.html#aboutToHide
+"QPopupMenu::aboutToShow" ntqpopupmenu.html#aboutToShow
+"QPopupMenu::activated" ntqpopupmenu.html#activated
+"QPopupMenu::checkable" ntqpopupmenu.html#checkable-prop
+"QPopupMenu::columns" ntqpopupmenu.html#columns
+"QPopupMenu::drawContents" ntqpopupmenu.html#drawContents
+"QPopupMenu::drawItem" ntqpopupmenu.html#drawItem
+"QPopupMenu::exec" ntqpopupmenu.html#exec
+"QPopupMenu::highlighted" ntqpopupmenu.html#highlighted
+"QPopupMenu::idAt" ntqpopupmenu.html#idAt
+"QPopupMenu::insertTearOffHandle" ntqpopupmenu.html#insertTearOffHandle
+"QPopupMenu::isCheckable" ntqpopupmenu.html#isCheckable
+"QPopupMenu::itemHeight" ntqpopupmenu.html#itemHeight
+"QPopupMenu::popup" ntqpopupmenu.html#popup
+"QPopupMenu::setActiveItem" ntqpopupmenu.html#setActiveItem
+"QPopupMenu::setCheckable" ntqpopupmenu.html#setCheckable
+"QPopupMenu::updateItem" ntqpopupmenu.html#updateItem
+"QPopupMenu::~QPopupMenu" ntqpopupmenu.html#~QPopupMenu
+"QPrintDialog::addButton" ntqprintdialog.html#addButton
+"QPrintDialog::getPrinterSetup" ntqprintdialog.html#getPrinterSetup
+"QPrintDialog::printer" ntqprintdialog.html#printer
+"QPrintDialog::setGlobalPrintDialog" ntqprintdialog.html#setGlobalPrintDialog
+"QPrintDialog::setPrinter" ntqprintdialog.html#setPrinter
+"QPrintDialog::~QPrintDialog" ntqprintdialog.html#~QPrintDialog
+"QPrinter" ntqprinter.html
+"QPrinter::ColorMode" ntqprinter.html#ColorMode
+"QPrinter::Orientation" ntqprinter.html#Orientation
+"QPrinter::PageOrder" ntqprinter.html#PageOrder
+"QPrinter::PageSize" ntqprinter.html#PageSize
+"QPrinter::PaperSource" ntqprinter.html#PaperSource
+"QPrinter::PrintRange" ntqprinter.html#PrintRange
+"QPrinter::PrinterMode" ntqprinter.html#PrinterMode
+"QPrinter::PrinterOption" ntqprinter.html#PrinterOption
+"QPrinter::abort" ntqprinter.html#abort
+"QPrinter::aborted" ntqprinter.html#aborted
+"QPrinter::colorMode" ntqprinter.html#colorMode
+"QPrinter::creator" ntqprinter.html#creator
+"QPrinter::docName" ntqprinter.html#docName
+"QPrinter::fromPage" ntqprinter.html#fromPage
+"QPrinter::fullPage" ntqprinter.html#fullPage
+"QPrinter::isOptionEnabled" ntqprinter.html#isOptionEnabled
+"QPrinter::margins" ntqprinter.html#margins
+"QPrinter::maxPage" ntqprinter.html#maxPage
+"QPrinter::minPage" ntqprinter.html#minPage
+"QPrinter::newPage" ntqprinter.html#newPage
+"QPrinter::numCopies" ntqprinter.html#numCopies
+"QPrinter::orientation" ntqprinter.html#orientation
+"QPrinter::outputFileName" ntqprinter.html#outputFileName
+"QPrinter::outputToFile" ntqprinter.html#outputToFile
+"QPrinter::pageOrder" ntqprinter.html#pageOrder
+"QPrinter::pageSize" ntqprinter.html#pageSize
+"QPrinter::paperSource" ntqprinter.html#paperSource
+"QPrinter::printProgram" ntqprinter.html#printProgram
+"QPrinter::printRange" ntqprinter.html#printRange
+"QPrinter::printerName" ntqprinter.html#printerName
+"QPrinter::printerSelectionOption" ntqprinter.html#printerSelectionOption
+"QPrinter::resolution" ntqprinter.html#resolution
+"QPrinter::setColorMode" ntqprinter.html#setColorMode
+"QPrinter::setCreator" ntqprinter.html#setCreator
+"QPrinter::setDocName" ntqprinter.html#setDocName
+"QPrinter::setFromTo" ntqprinter.html#setFromTo
+"QPrinter::setFullPage" ntqprinter.html#setFullPage
+"QPrinter::setMargins" ntqprinter.html#setMargins
+"QPrinter::setMinMax" ntqprinter.html#setMinMax
+"QPrinter::setNumCopies" ntqprinter.html#setNumCopies
+"QPrinter::setOptionEnabled" ntqprinter.html#setOptionEnabled
+"QPrinter::setOrientation" ntqprinter.html#setOrientation
+"QPrinter::setOutputFileName" ntqprinter.html#setOutputFileName
+"QPrinter::setOutputToFile" ntqprinter.html#setOutputToFile
+"QPrinter::setPageOrder" ntqprinter.html#setPageOrder
+"QPrinter::setPageSize" ntqprinter.html#setPageSize
+"QPrinter::setPaperSource" ntqprinter.html#setPaperSource
+"QPrinter::setPrintProgram" ntqprinter.html#setPrintProgram
+"QPrinter::setPrintRange" ntqprinter.html#setPrintRange
+"QPrinter::setPrinterName" ntqprinter.html#setPrinterName
+"QPrinter::setPrinterSelectionOption" ntqprinter.html#setPrinterSelectionOption
+"QPrinter::setResolution" ntqprinter.html#setResolution
+"QPrinter::setWinPageSize" ntqprinter.html#setWinPageSize
+"QPrinter::setup" ntqprinter.html#setup
+"QPrinter::toPage" ntqprinter.html#toPage
+"QPrinter::winPageSize" ntqprinter.html#winPageSize
+"QPrinter::~QPrinter" ntqprinter.html#~QPrinter
+"QProcess" ntqprocess.html
+"QProcess::Communication" ntqprocess.html#Communication
+"QProcess::addArgument" ntqprocess.html#addArgument
+"QProcess::arguments" ntqprocess.html#arguments
+"QProcess::canReadLineStderr" ntqprocess.html#canReadLineStderr
+"QProcess::canReadLineStdout" ntqprocess.html#canReadLineStdout
+"QProcess::clearArguments" ntqprocess.html#clearArguments
+"QProcess::closeStdin" ntqprocess.html#closeStdin
+"QProcess::communication" ntqprocess.html#communication
+"QProcess::exitStatus" ntqprocess.html#exitStatus
+"QProcess::isRunning" ntqprocess.html#isRunning
+"QProcess::kill" ntqprocess.html#kill
+"QProcess::launch" ntqprocess.html#launch
+"QProcess::launchFinished" ntqprocess.html#launchFinished
+"QProcess::normalExit" ntqprocess.html#normalExit
+"QProcess::processExited" ntqprocess.html#processExited
+"QProcess::processIdentifier" ntqprocess.html#processIdentifier
+"QProcess::readLineStderr" ntqprocess.html#readLineStderr
+"QProcess::readLineStdout" ntqprocess.html#readLineStdout
+"QProcess::readStderr" ntqprocess.html#readStderr
+"QProcess::readStdout" ntqprocess.html#readStdout
+"QProcess::readyReadStderr" ntqprocess.html#readyReadStderr
+"QProcess::readyReadStdout" ntqprocess.html#readyReadStdout
+"QProcess::setArguments" ntqprocess.html#setArguments
+"QProcess::setCommunication" ntqprocess.html#setCommunication
+"QProcess::setWorkingDirectory" ntqprocess.html#setWorkingDirectory
+"QProcess::start" ntqprocess.html#start
+"QProcess::tryTerminate" ntqprocess.html#tryTerminate
+"QProcess::workingDirectory" ntqprocess.html#workingDirectory
+"QProcess::writeToStdin" ntqprocess.html#writeToStdin
+"QProcess::wroteToStdin" ntqprocess.html#wroteToStdin
+"QProcess::~QProcess" ntqprocess.html#~QProcess
+"QProgressBar" ntqprogressbar.html
+"QProgressBar::centerIndicator" ntqprogressbar.html#centerIndicator
+"QProgressBar::centerIndicator" ntqprogressbar.html#centerIndicator-prop
+"QProgressBar::indicatorFollowsStyle" ntqprogressbar.html#indicatorFollowsStyle
+"QProgressBar::indicatorFollowsStyle" ntqprogressbar.html#indicatorFollowsStyle-prop
+"QProgressBar::percentageVisible" ntqprogressbar.html#percentageVisible
+"QProgressBar::percentageVisible" ntqprogressbar.html#percentageVisible-prop
+"QProgressBar::progress" ntqprogressbar.html#progress
+"QProgressBar::progress" ntqprogressbar.html#progress-prop
+"QProgressBar::progressString" ntqprogressbar.html#progressString
+"QProgressBar::progressString" ntqprogressbar.html#progressString-prop
+"QProgressBar::reset" ntqprogressbar.html#reset
+"QProgressBar::setCenterIndicator" ntqprogressbar.html#setCenterIndicator
+"QProgressBar::setIndicator" ntqprogressbar.html#setIndicator
+"QProgressBar::setIndicatorFollowsStyle" ntqprogressbar.html#setIndicatorFollowsStyle
+"QProgressBar::setPercentageVisible" ntqprogressbar.html#setPercentageVisible
+"QProgressBar::setProgress" ntqprogressbar.html#setProgress
+"QProgressBar::setTotalSteps" ntqprogressbar.html#setTotalSteps
+"QProgressBar::totalSteps" ntqprogressbar.html#totalSteps
+"QProgressBar::totalSteps" ntqprogressbar.html#totalSteps-prop
+"QProgressDialog" ntqprogressdialog.html
+"QProgressDialog::autoClose" ntqprogressdialog.html#autoClose
+"QProgressDialog::autoClose" ntqprogressdialog.html#autoClose-prop
+"QProgressDialog::autoReset" ntqprogressdialog.html#autoReset
+"QProgressDialog::autoReset" ntqprogressdialog.html#autoReset-prop
+"QProgressDialog::bar" ntqprogressdialog.html#bar
+"QProgressDialog::cancel" ntqprogressdialog.html#cancel
+"QProgressDialog::canceled" ntqprogressdialog.html#canceled
+"QProgressDialog::forceShow" ntqprogressdialog.html#forceShow
+"QProgressDialog::label" ntqprogressdialog.html#label
+"QProgressDialog::labelText" ntqprogressdialog.html#labelText
+"QProgressDialog::labelText" ntqprogressdialog.html#labelText-prop
+"QProgressDialog::minimumDuration" ntqprogressdialog.html#minimumDuration
+"QProgressDialog::minimumDuration" ntqprogressdialog.html#minimumDuration-prop
+"QProgressDialog::progress" ntqprogressdialog.html#progress
+"QProgressDialog::progress" ntqprogressdialog.html#progress-prop
+"QProgressDialog::reset" ntqprogressdialog.html#reset
+"QProgressDialog::setAutoClose" ntqprogressdialog.html#setAutoClose
+"QProgressDialog::setAutoReset" ntqprogressdialog.html#setAutoReset
+"QProgressDialog::setBar" ntqprogressdialog.html#setBar
+"QProgressDialog::setCancelButton" ntqprogressdialog.html#setCancelButton
+"QProgressDialog::setCancelButtonText" ntqprogressdialog.html#setCancelButtonText
+"QProgressDialog::setLabel" ntqprogressdialog.html#setLabel
+"QProgressDialog::setLabelText" ntqprogressdialog.html#setLabelText
+"QProgressDialog::setMinimumDuration" ntqprogressdialog.html#setMinimumDuration
+"QProgressDialog::setProgress" ntqprogressdialog.html#setProgress
+"QProgressDialog::setTotalSteps" ntqprogressdialog.html#setTotalSteps
+"QProgressDialog::sizeHint" ntqprogressdialog.html#sizeHint
+"QProgressDialog::totalSteps" ntqprogressdialog.html#totalSteps
+"QProgressDialog::totalSteps" ntqprogressdialog.html#totalSteps-prop
+"QProgressDialog::wasCanceled" ntqprogressdialog.html#wasCanceled
+"QProgressDialog::wasCanceled" ntqprogressdialog.html#wasCanceled-prop
+"QProgressDialog::~QProgressDialog" ntqprogressdialog.html#~QProgressDialog
+"QPtrCollection" ntqptrcollection.html
+"QPtrCollection::Item" ntqptrcollection.html#Item
+"QPtrCollection::autoDelete" ntqptrcollection.html#autoDelete
+"QPtrCollection::clear" ntqptrcollection.html#clear
+"QPtrCollection::count" ntqptrcollection.html#count
+"QPtrCollection::deleteItem" ntqptrcollection.html#deleteItem
+"QPtrCollection::newItem" ntqptrcollection.html#newItem
+"QPtrCollection::setAutoDelete" ntqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete
+"QPtrCollection::~QPtrCollection" ntqptrcollection.html#~QPtrCollection
+"QPtrDict" ntqptrdict.html
+"QPtrDict::clear" ntqptrdict.html#clear
+"QPtrDict::count" ntqptrdict.html#count
+"QPtrDict::find" ntqptrdict.html#find
+"QPtrDict::insert" ntqptrdict.html#insert
+"QPtrDict::isEmpty" ntqptrdict.html#isEmpty
+"QPtrDict::operator=" ntqptrdict.html#operator-eq
+"QPtrDict::operator[]" ntqptrdict.html#operator[]
+"QPtrDict::read" ntqptrdict.html#read
+"QPtrDict::remove" ntqptrdict.html#remove
+"QPtrDict::replace" ntqptrdict.html#replace
+"QPtrDict::resize" ntqptrdict.html#resize
+"QPtrDict::size" ntqptrdict.html#size
+"QPtrDict::statistics" ntqptrdict.html#statistics
+"QPtrDict::take" ntqptrdict.html#take
+"QPtrDict::write" ntqptrdict.html#write
+"QPtrDict::~QPtrDict" ntqptrdict.html#~QPtrDict
 "QPtrDictIterator" qptrdictiterator.html
 "QPtrDictIterator::count" qptrdictiterator.html#count
 "QPtrDictIterator::current" qptrdictiterator.html#current
@@ -4965,46 +4965,46 @@
 "QPtrDictIterator::operator+=" qptrdictiterator.html#operator+-eq
 "QPtrDictIterator::toFirst" qptrdictiterator.html#toFirst
 "QPtrDictIterator::~QPtrDictIterator" qptrdictiterator.html#~QPtrDictIterator
-"QPtrList" qptrlist.html
-"QPtrList::append" qptrlist.html#append
-"QPtrList::at" qptrlist.html#at
-"QPtrList::clear" qptrlist.html#clear
-"QPtrList::compareItems" qptrlist.html#compareItems
-"QPtrList::contains" qptrlist.html#contains
-"QPtrList::containsRef" qptrlist.html#containsRef
-"QPtrList::count" qptrlist.html#count
-"QPtrList::current" qptrlist.html#current
-"QPtrList::currentNode" qptrlist.html#currentNode
-"QPtrList::find" qptrlist.html#find
-"QPtrList::findNext" qptrlist.html#findNext
-"QPtrList::findNextRef" qptrlist.html#findNextRef
-"QPtrList::findRef" qptrlist.html#findRef
-"QPtrList::first" qptrlist.html#first
-"QPtrList::getFirst" qptrlist.html#getFirst
-"QPtrList::getLast" qptrlist.html#getLast
-"QPtrList::inSort" qptrlist.html#inSort
-"QPtrList::insert" qptrlist.html#insert
-"QPtrList::isEmpty" qptrlist.html#isEmpty
-"QPtrList::last" qptrlist.html#last
-"QPtrList::next" qptrlist.html#next
-"QPtrList::operator!=" qptrlist.html#operator!-eq
-"QPtrList::operator=" qptrlist.html#operator-eq
-"QPtrList::operator==" qptrlist.html#operator-eq-eq
-"QPtrList::prepend" qptrlist.html#prepend
-"QPtrList::prev" qptrlist.html#prev
-"QPtrList::read" qptrlist.html#read
-"QPtrList::remove" qptrlist.html#remove
-"QPtrList::removeFirst" qptrlist.html#removeFirst
-"QPtrList::removeLast" qptrlist.html#removeLast
-"QPtrList::removeNode" qptrlist.html#removeNode
-"QPtrList::removeRef" qptrlist.html#removeRef
-"QPtrList::replace" qptrlist.html#replace
-"QPtrList::sort" qptrlist.html#sort
-"QPtrList::take" qptrlist.html#take
-"QPtrList::takeNode" qptrlist.html#takeNode
-"QPtrList::toVector" qptrlist.html#toVector
-"QPtrList::write" qptrlist.html#write
-"QPtrList::~QPtrList" qptrlist.html#~QPtrList
+"QPtrList" ntqptrlist.html
+"QPtrList::append" ntqptrlist.html#append
+"QPtrList::at" ntqptrlist.html#at
+"QPtrList::clear" ntqptrlist.html#clear
+"QPtrList::compareItems" ntqptrlist.html#compareItems
+"QPtrList::contains" ntqptrlist.html#contains
+"QPtrList::containsRef" ntqptrlist.html#containsRef
+"QPtrList::count" ntqptrlist.html#count
+"QPtrList::current" ntqptrlist.html#current
+"QPtrList::currentNode" ntqptrlist.html#currentNode
+"QPtrList::find" ntqptrlist.html#find
+"QPtrList::findNext" ntqptrlist.html#findNext
+"QPtrList::findNextRef" ntqptrlist.html#findNextRef
+"QPtrList::findRef" ntqptrlist.html#findRef
+"QPtrList::first" ntqptrlist.html#first
+"QPtrList::getFirst" ntqptrlist.html#getFirst
+"QPtrList::getLast" ntqptrlist.html#getLast
+"QPtrList::inSort" ntqptrlist.html#inSort
+"QPtrList::insert" ntqptrlist.html#insert
+"QPtrList::isEmpty" ntqptrlist.html#isEmpty
+"QPtrList::last" ntqptrlist.html#last
+"QPtrList::next" ntqptrlist.html#next
+"QPtrList::operator!=" ntqptrlist.html#operator!-eq
+"QPtrList::operator=" ntqptrlist.html#operator-eq
+"QPtrList::operator==" ntqptrlist.html#operator-eq-eq
+"QPtrList::prepend" ntqptrlist.html#prepend
+"QPtrList::prev" ntqptrlist.html#prev
+"QPtrList::read" ntqptrlist.html#read
+"QPtrList::remove" ntqptrlist.html#remove
+"QPtrList::removeFirst" ntqptrlist.html#removeFirst
+"QPtrList::removeLast" ntqptrlist.html#removeLast
+"QPtrList::removeNode" ntqptrlist.html#removeNode
+"QPtrList::removeRef" ntqptrlist.html#removeRef
+"QPtrList::replace" ntqptrlist.html#replace
+"QPtrList::sort" ntqptrlist.html#sort
+"QPtrList::take" ntqptrlist.html#take
+"QPtrList::takeNode" ntqptrlist.html#takeNode
+"QPtrList::toVector" ntqptrlist.html#toVector
+"QPtrList::write" ntqptrlist.html#write
+"QPtrList::~QPtrList" ntqptrlist.html#~QPtrList
 "QPtrListIterator" qptrlistiterator.html
 "QPtrListIterator::atFirst" qptrlistiterator.html#atFirst
 "QPtrListIterator::atLast" qptrlistiterator.html#atLast
@@ -5022,234 +5022,234 @@
 "QPtrListIterator::toFirst" qptrlistiterator.html#toFirst
 "QPtrListIterator::toLast" qptrlistiterator.html#toLast
 "QPtrListIterator::~QPtrListIterator" qptrlistiterator.html#~QPtrListIterator
-"QPtrQueue" qptrqueue.html
-"QPtrQueue::autoDelete" qptrqueue.html#autoDelete
-"QPtrQueue::clear" qptrqueue.html#clear
-"QPtrQueue::count" qptrqueue.html#count
-"QPtrQueue::current" qptrqueue.html#current
-"QPtrQueue::dequeue" qptrqueue.html#dequeue
-"QPtrQueue::enqueue" qptrqueue.html#enqueue
-"QPtrQueue::head" qptrqueue.html#head
-"QPtrQueue::isEmpty" qptrqueue.html#isEmpty
-"QPtrQueue::operator type *" qptrqueue.html#operator-type-*
-"QPtrQueue::operator=" qptrqueue.html#operator-eq
-"QPtrQueue::read" qptrqueue.html#read
-"QPtrQueue::remove" qptrqueue.html#remove
-"QPtrQueue::setAutoDelete" qptrqueue.html#setAutoDelete
-"QPtrQueue::write" qptrqueue.html#write
-"QPtrQueue::~QPtrQueue" qptrqueue.html#~QPtrQueue
-"QPtrStack" qptrstack.html
-"QPtrStack::autoDelete" qptrstack.html#autoDelete
-"QPtrStack::clear" qptrstack.html#clear
-"QPtrStack::count" qptrstack.html#count
-"QPtrStack::current" qptrstack.html#current
-"QPtrStack::isEmpty" qptrstack.html#isEmpty
-"QPtrStack::operator type *" qptrstack.html#operator-type-*
-"QPtrStack::operator=" qptrstack.html#operator-eq
-"QPtrStack::pop" qptrstack.html#pop
-"QPtrStack::push" qptrstack.html#push
-"QPtrStack::read" qptrstack.html#read
-"QPtrStack::remove" qptrstack.html#remove
-"QPtrStack::setAutoDelete" qptrstack.html#setAutoDelete
-"QPtrStack::top" qptrstack.html#top
-"QPtrStack::write" qptrstack.html#write
-"QPtrStack::~QPtrStack" qptrstack.html#~QPtrStack
-"QPtrVector" qptrvector.html
-"QPtrVector::at" qptrvector.html#at
-"QPtrVector::bsearch" qptrvector.html#bsearch
-"QPtrVector::clear" qptrvector.html#clear
-"QPtrVector::compareItems" qptrvector.html#compareItems
-"QPtrVector::contains" qptrvector.html#contains
-"QPtrVector::containsRef" qptrvector.html#containsRef
-"QPtrVector::count" qptrvector.html#count
-"QPtrVector::data" qptrvector.html#data
-"QPtrVector::fill" qptrvector.html#fill
-"QPtrVector::find" qptrvector.html#find
-"QPtrVector::findRef" qptrvector.html#findRef
-"QPtrVector::insert" qptrvector.html#insert
-"QPtrVector::isEmpty" qptrvector.html#isEmpty
-"QPtrVector::isNull" qptrvector.html#isNull
-"QPtrVector::operator=" qptrvector.html#operator-eq
-"QPtrVector::operator==" qptrvector.html#operator-eq-eq
-"QPtrVector::operator[]" qptrvector.html#operator[]
-"QPtrVector::read" qptrvector.html#read
-"QPtrVector::remove" qptrvector.html#remove
-"QPtrVector::resize" qptrvector.html#resize
-"QPtrVector::size" qptrvector.html#size
-"QPtrVector::sort" qptrvector.html#sort
-"QPtrVector::take" qptrvector.html#take
-"QPtrVector::write" qptrvector.html#write
-"QPtrVector::~QPtrVector" qptrvector.html#~QPtrVector
-"QPushButton" qpushbutton.html
-"QPushButton::autoDefault" qpushbutton.html#autoDefault
-"QPushButton::autoDefault" qpushbutton.html#autoDefault-prop
-"QPushButton::autoMask" qpushbutton.html#autoMask-prop
-"QPushButton::default" qpushbutton.html#default-prop
-"QPushButton::flat" qpushbutton.html#flat-prop
-"QPushButton::iconSet" qpushbutton.html#iconSet
-"QPushButton::iconSet" qpushbutton.html#iconSet-prop
-"QPushButton::isDefault" qpushbutton.html#isDefault
-"QPushButton::isFlat" qpushbutton.html#isFlat
-"QPushButton::on" qpushbutton.html#on-prop
-"QPushButton::popup" qpushbutton.html#popup
-"QPushButton::setAutoDefault" qpushbutton.html#setAutoDefault
-"QPushButton::setDefault" qpushbutton.html#setDefault
-"QPushButton::setFlat" qpushbutton.html#setFlat
-"QPushButton::setIconSet" qpushbutton.html#setIconSet
-"QPushButton::setOn" qpushbutton.html#setOn
-"QPushButton::setPopup" qpushbutton.html#setPopup
-"QPushButton::setToggleButton" qpushbutton.html#setToggleButton
-"QPushButton::toggleButton" qpushbutton.html#toggleButton-prop
-"QPushButton::~QPushButton" qpushbutton.html#~QPushButton
-"QQueue Class Reference (obsolete)" qqueue.html
-"QRadioButton" qradiobutton.html
-"QRadioButton::autoMask" qradiobutton.html#autoMask-prop
-"QRadioButton::checked" qradiobutton.html#checked-prop
-"QRadioButton::isChecked" qradiobutton.html#isChecked
-"QRadioButton::setChecked" qradiobutton.html#setChecked
-"QRangeControl" qrangecontrol.html
-"QRangeControl::addLine" qrangecontrol.html#addLine
-"QRangeControl::addPage" qrangecontrol.html#addPage
-"QRangeControl::bound" qrangecontrol.html#bound
-"QRangeControl::directSetValue" qrangecontrol.html#directSetValue
-"QRangeControl::lineStep" qrangecontrol.html#lineStep
-"QRangeControl::maxValue" qrangecontrol.html#maxValue
-"QRangeControl::minValue" qrangecontrol.html#minValue
-"QRangeControl::pageStep" qrangecontrol.html#pageStep
-"QRangeControl::positionFromValue" qrangecontrol.html#positionFromValue
-"QRangeControl::prevValue" qrangecontrol.html#prevValue
-"QRangeControl::rangeChange" qrangecontrol.html#rangeChange
-"QRangeControl::setMaxValue" qrangecontrol.html#setMaxValue
-"QRangeControl::setMinValue" qrangecontrol.html#setMinValue
-"QRangeControl::setRange" qrangecontrol.html#setRange
-"QRangeControl::setSteps" qrangecontrol.html#setSteps
-"QRangeControl::setValue" qrangecontrol.html#setValue
-"QRangeControl::stepChange" qrangecontrol.html#stepChange
-"QRangeControl::subtractLine" qrangecontrol.html#subtractLine
-"QRangeControl::subtractPage" qrangecontrol.html#subtractPage
-"QRangeControl::value" qrangecontrol.html#value
-"QRangeControl::valueChange" qrangecontrol.html#valueChange
-"QRangeControl::valueFromPosition" qrangecontrol.html#valueFromPosition
-"QRangeControl::~QRangeControl" qrangecontrol.html#~QRangeControl
-"QRect" qrect.html
-"QRect::addCoords" qrect.html#addCoords
-"QRect::bottom" qrect.html#bottom
-"QRect::bottomLeft" qrect.html#bottomLeft
-"QRect::bottomRight" qrect.html#bottomRight
-"QRect::center" qrect.html#center
-"QRect::contains" qrect.html#contains
-"QRect::coords" qrect.html#coords
-"QRect::height" qrect.html#height
-"QRect::intersect" qrect.html#intersect
-"QRect::intersects" qrect.html#intersects
-"QRect::isEmpty" qrect.html#isEmpty
-"QRect::isNull" qrect.html#isNull
-"QRect::isValid" qrect.html#isValid
-"QRect::left" qrect.html#left
-"QRect::moveBottom" qrect.html#moveBottom
-"QRect::moveBottomLeft" qrect.html#moveBottomLeft
-"QRect::moveBottomRight" qrect.html#moveBottomRight
-"QRect::moveBy" qrect.html#moveBy
-"QRect::moveCenter" qrect.html#moveCenter
-"QRect::moveLeft" qrect.html#moveLeft
-"QRect::moveRight" qrect.html#moveRight
-"QRect::moveTop" qrect.html#moveTop
-"QRect::moveTopLeft" qrect.html#moveTopLeft
-"QRect::moveTopRight" qrect.html#moveTopRight
-"QRect::normalize" qrect.html#normalize
-"QRect::operator&" qrect.html#operator-and
-"QRect::operator&=" qrect.html#operator-and-eq
-"QRect::operator|" qrect.html#operator|
-"QRect::operator|=" qrect.html#operator|-eq
-"QRect::rBottom" qrect.html#rBottom
-"QRect::rLeft" qrect.html#rLeft
-"QRect::rRight" qrect.html#rRight
-"QRect::rTop" qrect.html#rTop
-"QRect::rect" qrect.html#rect
-"QRect::right" qrect.html#right
-"QRect::setBottom" qrect.html#setBottom
-"QRect::setBottomLeft" qrect.html#setBottomLeft
-"QRect::setBottomRight" qrect.html#setBottomRight
-"QRect::setCoords" qrect.html#setCoords
-"QRect::setHeight" qrect.html#setHeight
-"QRect::setLeft" qrect.html#setLeft
-"QRect::setRect" qrect.html#setRect
-"QRect::setRight" qrect.html#setRight
-"QRect::setSize" qrect.html#setSize
-"QRect::setTop" qrect.html#setTop
-"QRect::setTopLeft" qrect.html#setTopLeft
-"QRect::setTopRight" qrect.html#setTopRight
-"QRect::setWidth" qrect.html#setWidth
-"QRect::setX" qrect.html#setX
-"QRect::setY" qrect.html#setY
-"QRect::size" qrect.html#size
-"QRect::top" qrect.html#top
-"QRect::topLeft" qrect.html#topLeft
-"QRect::topRight" qrect.html#topRight
-"QRect::unite" qrect.html#unite
-"QRect::width" qrect.html#width
-"QRect::x" qrect.html#x
-"QRect::y" qrect.html#y
-"QRegExp" qregexp.html
-"QRegExp::CaretMode" qregexp.html#CaretMode
-"QRegExp::cap" qregexp.html#cap
-"QRegExp::capturedTexts" qregexp.html#capturedTexts
-"QRegExp::caseSensitive" qregexp.html#caseSensitive
-"QRegExp::errorString" qregexp.html#errorString
-"QRegExp::escape" qregexp.html#escape
-"QRegExp::exactMatch" qregexp.html#exactMatch
-"QRegExp::isEmpty" qregexp.html#isEmpty
-"QRegExp::isValid" qregexp.html#isValid
-"QRegExp::matchedLength" qregexp.html#matchedLength
-"QRegExp::minimal" qregexp.html#minimal
-"QRegExp::numCaptures" qregexp.html#numCaptures
-"QRegExp::operator!=" qregexp.html#operator!-eq
-"QRegExp::operator=" qregexp.html#operator-eq
-"QRegExp::operator==" qregexp.html#operator-eq-eq
-"QRegExp::pattern" qregexp.html#pattern
-"QRegExp::pos" qregexp.html#pos
-"QRegExp::search" qregexp.html#search
-"QRegExp::searchRev" qregexp.html#searchRev
-"QRegExp::setCaseSensitive" qregexp.html#setCaseSensitive
-"QRegExp::setMinimal" qregexp.html#setMinimal
-"QRegExp::setPattern" qregexp.html#setPattern
-"QRegExp::setWildcard" qregexp.html#setWildcard
-"QRegExp::wildcard" qregexp.html#wildcard
-"QRegExp::~QRegExp" qregexp.html#~QRegExp
+"QPtrQueue" ntqptrqueue.html
+"QPtrQueue::autoDelete" ntqptrqueue.html#autoDelete
+"QPtrQueue::clear" ntqptrqueue.html#clear
+"QPtrQueue::count" ntqptrqueue.html#count
+"QPtrQueue::current" ntqptrqueue.html#current
+"QPtrQueue::dequeue" ntqptrqueue.html#dequeue
+"QPtrQueue::enqueue" ntqptrqueue.html#enqueue
+"QPtrQueue::head" ntqptrqueue.html#head
+"QPtrQueue::isEmpty" ntqptrqueue.html#isEmpty
+"QPtrQueue::operator type *" ntqptrqueue.html#operator-type-*
+"QPtrQueue::operator=" ntqptrqueue.html#operator-eq
+"QPtrQueue::read" ntqptrqueue.html#read
+"QPtrQueue::remove" ntqptrqueue.html#remove
+"QPtrQueue::setAutoDelete" ntqptrqueue.html#setAutoDelete
+"QPtrQueue::write" ntqptrqueue.html#write
+"QPtrQueue::~QPtrQueue" ntqptrqueue.html#~QPtrQueue
+"QPtrStack" ntqptrstack.html
+"QPtrStack::autoDelete" ntqptrstack.html#autoDelete
+"QPtrStack::clear" ntqptrstack.html#clear
+"QPtrStack::count" ntqptrstack.html#count
+"QPtrStack::current" ntqptrstack.html#current
+"QPtrStack::isEmpty" ntqptrstack.html#isEmpty
+"QPtrStack::operator type *" ntqptrstack.html#operator-type-*
+"QPtrStack::operator=" ntqptrstack.html#operator-eq
+"QPtrStack::pop" ntqptrstack.html#pop
+"QPtrStack::push" ntqptrstack.html#push
+"QPtrStack::read" ntqptrstack.html#read
+"QPtrStack::remove" ntqptrstack.html#remove
+"QPtrStack::setAutoDelete" ntqptrstack.html#setAutoDelete
+"QPtrStack::top" ntqptrstack.html#top
+"QPtrStack::write" ntqptrstack.html#write
+"QPtrStack::~QPtrStack" ntqptrstack.html#~QPtrStack
+"QPtrVector" ntqptrvector.html
+"QPtrVector::at" ntqptrvector.html#at
+"QPtrVector::bsearch" ntqptrvector.html#bsearch
+"QPtrVector::clear" ntqptrvector.html#clear
+"QPtrVector::compareItems" ntqptrvector.html#compareItems
+"QPtrVector::contains" ntqptrvector.html#contains
+"QPtrVector::containsRef" ntqptrvector.html#containsRef
+"QPtrVector::count" ntqptrvector.html#count
+"QPtrVector::data" ntqptrvector.html#data
+"QPtrVector::fill" ntqptrvector.html#fill
+"QPtrVector::find" ntqptrvector.html#find
+"QPtrVector::findRef" ntqptrvector.html#findRef
+"QPtrVector::insert" ntqptrvector.html#insert
+"QPtrVector::isEmpty" ntqptrvector.html#isEmpty
+"QPtrVector::isNull" ntqptrvector.html#isNull
+"QPtrVector::operator=" ntqptrvector.html#operator-eq
+"QPtrVector::operator==" ntqptrvector.html#operator-eq-eq
+"QPtrVector::operator[]" ntqptrvector.html#operator[]
+"QPtrVector::read" ntqptrvector.html#read
+"QPtrVector::remove" ntqptrvector.html#remove
+"QPtrVector::resize" ntqptrvector.html#resize
+"QPtrVector::size" ntqptrvector.html#size
+"QPtrVector::sort" ntqptrvector.html#sort
+"QPtrVector::take" ntqptrvector.html#take
+"QPtrVector::write" ntqptrvector.html#write
+"QPtrVector::~QPtrVector" ntqptrvector.html#~QPtrVector
+"QPushButton" ntqpushbutton.html
+"QPushButton::autoDefault" ntqpushbutton.html#autoDefault
+"QPushButton::autoDefault" ntqpushbutton.html#autoDefault-prop
+"QPushButton::autoMask" ntqpushbutton.html#autoMask-prop
+"QPushButton::default" ntqpushbutton.html#default-prop
+"QPushButton::flat" ntqpushbutton.html#flat-prop
+"QPushButton::iconSet" ntqpushbutton.html#iconSet
+"QPushButton::iconSet" ntqpushbutton.html#iconSet-prop
+"QPushButton::isDefault" ntqpushbutton.html#isDefault
+"QPushButton::isFlat" ntqpushbutton.html#isFlat
+"QPushButton::on" ntqpushbutton.html#on-prop
+"QPushButton::popup" ntqpushbutton.html#popup
+"QPushButton::setAutoDefault" ntqpushbutton.html#setAutoDefault
+"QPushButton::setDefault" ntqpushbutton.html#setDefault
+"QPushButton::setFlat" ntqpushbutton.html#setFlat
+"QPushButton::setIconSet" ntqpushbutton.html#setIconSet
+"QPushButton::setOn" ntqpushbutton.html#setOn
+"QPushButton::setPopup" ntqpushbutton.html#setPopup
+"QPushButton::setToggleButton" ntqpushbutton.html#setToggleButton
+"QPushButton::toggleButton" ntqpushbutton.html#toggleButton-prop
+"QPushButton::~QPushButton" ntqpushbutton.html#~QPushButton
+"QQueue Class Reference (obsolete)" ntqqueue.html
+"QRadioButton" ntqradiobutton.html
+"QRadioButton::autoMask" ntqradiobutton.html#autoMask-prop
+"QRadioButton::checked" ntqradiobutton.html#checked-prop
+"QRadioButton::isChecked" ntqradiobutton.html#isChecked
+"QRadioButton::setChecked" ntqradiobutton.html#setChecked
+"QRangeControl" ntqrangecontrol.html
+"QRangeControl::addLine" ntqrangecontrol.html#addLine
+"QRangeControl::addPage" ntqrangecontrol.html#addPage
+"QRangeControl::bound" ntqrangecontrol.html#bound
+"QRangeControl::directSetValue" ntqrangecontrol.html#directSetValue
+"QRangeControl::lineStep" ntqrangecontrol.html#lineStep
+"QRangeControl::maxValue" ntqrangecontrol.html#maxValue
+"QRangeControl::minValue" ntqrangecontrol.html#minValue
+"QRangeControl::pageStep" ntqrangecontrol.html#pageStep
+"QRangeControl::positionFromValue" ntqrangecontrol.html#positionFromValue
+"QRangeControl::prevValue" ntqrangecontrol.html#prevValue
+"QRangeControl::rangeChange" ntqrangecontrol.html#rangeChange
+"QRangeControl::setMaxValue" ntqrangecontrol.html#setMaxValue
+"QRangeControl::setMinValue" ntqrangecontrol.html#setMinValue
+"QRangeControl::setRange" ntqrangecontrol.html#setRange
+"QRangeControl::setSteps" ntqrangecontrol.html#setSteps
+"QRangeControl::setValue" ntqrangecontrol.html#setValue
+"QRangeControl::stepChange" ntqrangecontrol.html#stepChange
+"QRangeControl::subtractLine" ntqrangecontrol.html#subtractLine
+"QRangeControl::subtractPage" ntqrangecontrol.html#subtractPage
+"QRangeControl::value" ntqrangecontrol.html#value
+"QRangeControl::valueChange" ntqrangecontrol.html#valueChange
+"QRangeControl::valueFromPosition" ntqrangecontrol.html#valueFromPosition
+"QRangeControl::~QRangeControl" ntqrangecontrol.html#~QRangeControl
+"QRect" ntqrect.html
+"QRect::addCoords" ntqrect.html#addCoords
+"QRect::bottom" ntqrect.html#bottom
+"QRect::bottomLeft" ntqrect.html#bottomLeft
+"QRect::bottomRight" ntqrect.html#bottomRight
+"QRect::center" ntqrect.html#center
+"QRect::contains" ntqrect.html#contains
+"QRect::coords" ntqrect.html#coords
+"QRect::height" ntqrect.html#height
+"QRect::intersect" ntqrect.html#intersect
+"QRect::intersects" ntqrect.html#intersects
+"QRect::isEmpty" ntqrect.html#isEmpty
+"QRect::isNull" ntqrect.html#isNull
+"QRect::isValid" ntqrect.html#isValid
+"QRect::left" ntqrect.html#left
+"QRect::moveBottom" ntqrect.html#moveBottom
+"QRect::moveBottomLeft" ntqrect.html#moveBottomLeft
+"QRect::moveBottomRight" ntqrect.html#moveBottomRight
+"QRect::moveBy" ntqrect.html#moveBy
+"QRect::moveCenter" ntqrect.html#moveCenter
+"QRect::moveLeft" ntqrect.html#moveLeft
+"QRect::moveRight" ntqrect.html#moveRight
+"QRect::moveTop" ntqrect.html#moveTop
+"QRect::moveTopLeft" ntqrect.html#moveTopLeft
+"QRect::moveTopRight" ntqrect.html#moveTopRight
+"QRect::normalize" ntqrect.html#normalize
+"QRect::operator&" ntqrect.html#operator-and
+"QRect::operator&=" ntqrect.html#operator-and-eq
+"QRect::operator|" ntqrect.html#operator|
+"QRect::operator|=" ntqrect.html#operator|-eq
+"QRect::rBottom" ntqrect.html#rBottom
+"QRect::rLeft" ntqrect.html#rLeft
+"QRect::rRight" ntqrect.html#rRight
+"QRect::rTop" ntqrect.html#rTop
+"QRect::rect" ntqrect.html#rect
+"QRect::right" ntqrect.html#right
+"QRect::setBottom" ntqrect.html#setBottom
+"QRect::setBottomLeft" ntqrect.html#setBottomLeft
+"QRect::setBottomRight" ntqrect.html#setBottomRight
+"QRect::setCoords" ntqrect.html#setCoords
+"QRect::setHeight" ntqrect.html#setHeight
+"QRect::setLeft" ntqrect.html#setLeft
+"QRect::setRect" ntqrect.html#setRect
+"QRect::setRight" ntqrect.html#setRight
+"QRect::setSize" ntqrect.html#setSize
+"QRect::setTop" ntqrect.html#setTop
+"QRect::setTopLeft" ntqrect.html#setTopLeft
+"QRect::setTopRight" ntqrect.html#setTopRight
+"QRect::setWidth" ntqrect.html#setWidth
+"QRect::setX" ntqrect.html#setX
+"QRect::setY" ntqrect.html#setY
+"QRect::size" ntqrect.html#size
+"QRect::top" ntqrect.html#top
+"QRect::topLeft" ntqrect.html#topLeft
+"QRect::topRight" ntqrect.html#topRight
+"QRect::unite" ntqrect.html#unite
+"QRect::width" ntqrect.html#width
+"QRect::x" ntqrect.html#x
+"QRect::y" ntqrect.html#y
+"QRegExp" ntqregexp.html
+"QRegExp::CaretMode" ntqregexp.html#CaretMode
+"QRegExp::cap" ntqregexp.html#cap
+"QRegExp::capturedTexts" ntqregexp.html#capturedTexts
+"QRegExp::caseSensitive" ntqregexp.html#caseSensitive
+"QRegExp::errorString" ntqregexp.html#errorString
+"QRegExp::escape" ntqregexp.html#escape
+"QRegExp::exactMatch" ntqregexp.html#exactMatch
+"QRegExp::isEmpty" ntqregexp.html#isEmpty
+"QRegExp::isValid" ntqregexp.html#isValid
+"QRegExp::matchedLength" ntqregexp.html#matchedLength
+"QRegExp::minimal" ntqregexp.html#minimal
+"QRegExp::numCaptures" ntqregexp.html#numCaptures
+"QRegExp::operator!=" ntqregexp.html#operator!-eq
+"QRegExp::operator=" ntqregexp.html#operator-eq
+"QRegExp::operator==" ntqregexp.html#operator-eq-eq
+"QRegExp::pattern" ntqregexp.html#pattern
+"QRegExp::pos" ntqregexp.html#pos
+"QRegExp::search" ntqregexp.html#search
+"QRegExp::searchRev" ntqregexp.html#searchRev
+"QRegExp::setCaseSensitive" ntqregexp.html#setCaseSensitive
+"QRegExp::setMinimal" ntqregexp.html#setMinimal
+"QRegExp::setPattern" ntqregexp.html#setPattern
+"QRegExp::setWildcard" ntqregexp.html#setWildcard
+"QRegExp::wildcard" ntqregexp.html#wildcard
+"QRegExp::~QRegExp" ntqregexp.html#~QRegExp
 "QRegExpValidator" qregexpvalidator.html
 "QRegExpValidator::regExp" qregexpvalidator.html#regExp
 "QRegExpValidator::setRegExp" qregexpvalidator.html#setRegExp
 "QRegExpValidator::validate" qregexpvalidator.html#validate
 "QRegExpValidator::~QRegExpValidator" qregexpvalidator.html#~QRegExpValidator
-"QRegion" qregion.html
-"QRegion::RegionType" qregion.html#RegionType
-"QRegion::boundingRect" qregion.html#boundingRect
-"QRegion::contains" qregion.html#contains
-"QRegion::copy" qregion.html#copy
-"QRegion::detach" qregion.html#detach
-"QRegion::eor" qregion.html#eor
-"QRegion::handle" qregion.html#handle
-"QRegion::intersect" qregion.html#intersect
-"QRegion::isEmpty" qregion.html#isEmpty
-"QRegion::isNull" qregion.html#isNull
-"QRegion::operator!=" qregion.html#operator!-eq
-"QRegion::operator&" qregion.html#operator-and
-"QRegion::operator&=" qregion.html#operator-and-eq
-"QRegion::operator+" qregion.html#operator+
-"QRegion::operator+=" qregion.html#operator+-eq
-"QRegion::operator-" qregion.html#operator-
-"QRegion::operator-=" qregion.html#operator--eq
-"QRegion::operator=" qregion.html#operator-eq
-"QRegion::operator==" qregion.html#operator-eq-eq
-"QRegion::operator^" qregion.html#operator^
-"QRegion::operator^=" qregion.html#operator^-eq
-"QRegion::operator|" qregion.html#operator|
-"QRegion::operator|=" qregion.html#operator|-eq
-"QRegion::rects" qregion.html#rects
-"QRegion::subtract" qregion.html#subtract
-"QRegion::translate" qregion.html#translate
-"QRegion::unite" qregion.html#unite
-"QRegion::~QRegion" qregion.html#~QRegion
+"QRegion" ntqregion.html
+"QRegion::RegionType" ntqregion.html#RegionType
+"QRegion::boundingRect" ntqregion.html#boundingRect
+"QRegion::contains" ntqregion.html#contains
+"QRegion::copy" ntqregion.html#copy
+"QRegion::detach" ntqregion.html#detach
+"QRegion::eor" ntqregion.html#eor
+"QRegion::handle" ntqregion.html#handle
+"QRegion::intersect" ntqregion.html#intersect
+"QRegion::isEmpty" ntqregion.html#isEmpty
+"QRegion::isNull" ntqregion.html#isNull
+"QRegion::operator!=" ntqregion.html#operator!-eq
+"QRegion::operator&" ntqregion.html#operator-and
+"QRegion::operator&=" ntqregion.html#operator-and-eq
+"QRegion::operator+" ntqregion.html#operator+
+"QRegion::operator+=" ntqregion.html#operator+-eq
+"QRegion::operator-" ntqregion.html#operator-
+"QRegion::operator-=" ntqregion.html#operator--eq
+"QRegion::operator=" ntqregion.html#operator-eq
+"QRegion::operator==" ntqregion.html#operator-eq-eq
+"QRegion::operator^" ntqregion.html#operator^
+"QRegion::operator^=" ntqregion.html#operator^-eq
+"QRegion::operator|" ntqregion.html#operator|
+"QRegion::operator|=" ntqregion.html#operator|-eq
+"QRegion::rects" ntqregion.html#rects
+"QRegion::subtract" ntqregion.html#subtract
+"QRegion::translate" ntqregion.html#translate
+"QRegion::unite" ntqregion.html#unite
+"QRegion::~QRegion" ntqregion.html#~QRegion
 "QRenderedFont::ascent" qrenderedfont.html#ascent
 "QRenderedFont::descent" qrenderedfont.html#descent
 "QRenderedFont::leftBearing" qrenderedfont.html#leftBearing
@@ -5262,8 +5262,8 @@
 "QResizeEvent" qresizeevent.html
 "QResizeEvent::oldSize" qresizeevent.html#oldSize
 "QResizeEvent::size" qresizeevent.html#size
-"QSGIStyle" qsgistyle.html
-"QSGIStyle::~QSGIStyle" qsgistyle.html#~QSGIStyle
+"QSGIStyle" ntqsgistyle.html
+"QSGIStyle::~QSGIStyle" ntqsgistyle.html#~QSGIStyle
 "QScreen" qscreen.html
 "QScreen::alloc" qscreen.html#alloc
 "QScreen::base" qscreen.html#base
@@ -5306,404 +5306,404 @@
 "QScreen::uncache" qscreen.html#uncache
 "QScreen::width" qscreen.html#width
 "QScreen::~QScreen" qscreen.html#~QScreen
-"QScrollBar" qscrollbar.html
-"QScrollBar::doAutoRepeat" qscrollbar.html#doAutoRepeat
-"QScrollBar::draggingSlider" qscrollbar.html#draggingSlider
-"QScrollBar::draggingSlider" qscrollbar.html#draggingSlider-prop
-"QScrollBar::hideEvent" qscrollbar.html#hideEvent
-"QScrollBar::lineStep" qscrollbar.html#lineStep
-"QScrollBar::lineStep" qscrollbar.html#lineStep-prop
-"QScrollBar::maxValue" qscrollbar.html#maxValue
-"QScrollBar::maxValue" qscrollbar.html#maxValue-prop
-"QScrollBar::minValue" qscrollbar.html#minValue
-"QScrollBar::minValue" qscrollbar.html#minValue-prop
-"QScrollBar::nextLine" qscrollbar.html#nextLine
-"QScrollBar::nextPage" qscrollbar.html#nextPage
-"QScrollBar::orientation" qscrollbar.html#orientation
-"QScrollBar::orientation" qscrollbar.html#orientation-prop
-"QScrollBar::pageStep" qscrollbar.html#pageStep
-"QScrollBar::pageStep" qscrollbar.html#pageStep-prop
-"QScrollBar::prevLine" qscrollbar.html#prevLine
-"QScrollBar::prevPage" qscrollbar.html#prevPage
-"QScrollBar::setLineStep" qscrollbar.html#setLineStep
-"QScrollBar::setMaxValue" qscrollbar.html#setMaxValue
-"QScrollBar::setMinValue" qscrollbar.html#setMinValue
-"QScrollBar::setOrientation" qscrollbar.html#setOrientation
-"QScrollBar::setPageStep" qscrollbar.html#setPageStep
-"QScrollBar::setPalette" qscrollbar.html#setPalette
-"QScrollBar::setTracking" qscrollbar.html#setTracking
-"QScrollBar::setValue" qscrollbar.html#setValue
-"QScrollBar::sliderMoved" qscrollbar.html#sliderMoved
-"QScrollBar::sliderPressed" qscrollbar.html#sliderPressed
-"QScrollBar::sliderRect" qscrollbar.html#sliderRect
-"QScrollBar::sliderReleased" qscrollbar.html#sliderReleased
-"QScrollBar::sliderStart" qscrollbar.html#sliderStart
-"QScrollBar::startAutoRepeat" qscrollbar.html#startAutoRepeat
-"QScrollBar::stopAutoRepeat" qscrollbar.html#stopAutoRepeat
-"QScrollBar::tracking" qscrollbar.html#tracking
-"QScrollBar::tracking" qscrollbar.html#tracking-prop
-"QScrollBar::value" qscrollbar.html#value
-"QScrollBar::value" qscrollbar.html#value-prop
-"QScrollBar::valueChanged" qscrollbar.html#valueChanged
-"QScrollBar::~QScrollBar" qscrollbar.html#~QScrollBar
-"QScrollView" qscrollview.html
-"QScrollView::ResizePolicy" qscrollview.html#ResizePolicy
-"QScrollView::ScrollBarMode" qscrollview.html#ScrollBarMode
-"QScrollView::addChild" qscrollview.html#addChild
-"QScrollView::bottomMargin" qscrollview.html#bottomMargin
-"QScrollView::center" qscrollview.html#center
-"QScrollView::childX" qscrollview.html#childX
-"QScrollView::childY" qscrollview.html#childY
-"QScrollView::clipper" qscrollview.html#clipper
-"QScrollView::contentsContextMenuEvent" qscrollview.html#contentsContextMenuEvent
-"QScrollView::contentsDragEnterEvent" qscrollview.html#contentsDragEnterEvent
-"QScrollView::contentsDragLeaveEvent" qscrollview.html#contentsDragLeaveEvent
-"QScrollView::contentsDragMoveEvent" qscrollview.html#contentsDragMoveEvent
-"QScrollView::contentsDropEvent" qscrollview.html#contentsDropEvent
-"QScrollView::contentsHeight" qscrollview.html#contentsHeight
-"QScrollView::contentsHeight" qscrollview.html#contentsHeight-prop
-"QScrollView::contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent" qscrollview.html#contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent
-"QScrollView::contentsMouseMoveEvent" qscrollview.html#contentsMouseMoveEvent
-"QScrollView::contentsMousePressEvent" qscrollview.html#contentsMousePressEvent
-"QScrollView::contentsMouseReleaseEvent" qscrollview.html#contentsMouseReleaseEvent
-"QScrollView::contentsMoving" qscrollview.html#contentsMoving
-"QScrollView::contentsToViewport" qscrollview.html#contentsToViewport
-"QScrollView::contentsWheelEvent" qscrollview.html#contentsWheelEvent
-"QScrollView::contentsWidth" qscrollview.html#contentsWidth
-"QScrollView::contentsWidth" qscrollview.html#contentsWidth-prop
-"QScrollView::contentsX" qscrollview.html#contentsX
-"QScrollView::contentsX" qscrollview.html#contentsX-prop
-"QScrollView::contentsY" qscrollview.html#contentsY
-"QScrollView::contentsY" qscrollview.html#contentsY-prop
-"QScrollView::cornerWidget" qscrollview.html#cornerWidget
-"QScrollView::dragAutoScroll" qscrollview.html#dragAutoScroll
-"QScrollView::dragAutoScroll" qscrollview.html#dragAutoScroll-prop
-"QScrollView::drawContents" qscrollview.html#drawContents
-"QScrollView::drawContentsOffset" qscrollview.html#drawContentsOffset
-"QScrollView::enableClipper" qscrollview.html#enableClipper
-"QScrollView::ensureVisible" qscrollview.html#ensureVisible
-"QScrollView::eventFilter" qscrollview.html#eventFilter
-"QScrollView::hScrollBarMode" qscrollview.html#hScrollBarMode
-"QScrollView::hScrollBarMode" qscrollview.html#hScrollBarMode-prop
-"QScrollView::hasStaticBackground" qscrollview.html#hasStaticBackground
-"QScrollView::horizontalScrollBar" qscrollview.html#horizontalScrollBar
-"QScrollView::horizontalSliderPressed" qscrollview.html#horizontalSliderPressed
-"QScrollView::horizontalSliderReleased" qscrollview.html#horizontalSliderReleased
-"QScrollView::isHorizontalSliderPressed" qscrollview.html#isHorizontalSliderPressed
-"QScrollView::isVerticalSliderPressed" qscrollview.html#isVerticalSliderPressed
-"QScrollView::leftMargin" qscrollview.html#leftMargin
-"QScrollView::moveChild" qscrollview.html#moveChild
-"QScrollView::moveContents" qscrollview.html#moveContents
-"QScrollView::removeChild" qscrollview.html#removeChild
-"QScrollView::repaintContents" qscrollview.html#repaintContents
-"QScrollView::resizeContents" qscrollview.html#resizeContents
-"QScrollView::resizePolicy" qscrollview.html#resizePolicy
-"QScrollView::resizePolicy" qscrollview.html#resizePolicy-prop
-"QScrollView::rightMargin" qscrollview.html#rightMargin
-"QScrollView::scrollBy" qscrollview.html#scrollBy
-"QScrollView::setContentsPos" qscrollview.html#setContentsPos
-"QScrollView::setCornerWidget" qscrollview.html#setCornerWidget
-"QScrollView::setDragAutoScroll" qscrollview.html#setDragAutoScroll
-"QScrollView::setHBarGeometry" qscrollview.html#setHBarGeometry
-"QScrollView::setHScrollBarMode" qscrollview.html#setHScrollBarMode
-"QScrollView::setMargins" qscrollview.html#setMargins
-"QScrollView::setResizePolicy" qscrollview.html#setResizePolicy
-"QScrollView::setStaticBackground" qscrollview.html#setStaticBackground
-"QScrollView::setVBarGeometry" qscrollview.html#setVBarGeometry
-"QScrollView::setVScrollBarMode" qscrollview.html#setVScrollBarMode
-"QScrollView::topMargin" qscrollview.html#topMargin
-"QScrollView::updateContents" qscrollview.html#updateContents
-"QScrollView::updateScrollBars" qscrollview.html#updateScrollBars
-"QScrollView::vScrollBarMode" qscrollview.html#vScrollBarMode
-"QScrollView::vScrollBarMode" qscrollview.html#vScrollBarMode-prop
-"QScrollView::verticalScrollBar" qscrollview.html#verticalScrollBar
-"QScrollView::verticalSliderPressed" qscrollview.html#verticalSliderPressed
-"QScrollView::verticalSliderReleased" qscrollview.html#verticalSliderReleased
-"QScrollView::viewport" qscrollview.html#viewport
-"QScrollView::viewportPaintEvent" qscrollview.html#viewportPaintEvent
-"QScrollView::viewportResizeEvent" qscrollview.html#viewportResizeEvent
-"QScrollView::viewportSize" qscrollview.html#viewportSize
-"QScrollView::viewportToContents" qscrollview.html#viewportToContents
-"QScrollView::visibleHeight" qscrollview.html#visibleHeight
-"QScrollView::visibleHeight" qscrollview.html#visibleHeight-prop
-"QScrollView::visibleWidth" qscrollview.html#visibleWidth
-"QScrollView::visibleWidth" qscrollview.html#visibleWidth-prop
-"QScrollView::~QScrollView" qscrollview.html#~QScrollView
-"QSemaphore" qsemaphore.html
-"QSemaphore::available" qsemaphore.html#available
-"QSemaphore::operator++" qsemaphore.html#operator++
-"QSemaphore::operator+=" qsemaphore.html#operator+-eq
-"QSemaphore::operator--" qsemaphore.html#operator--
-"QSemaphore::operator-=" qsemaphore.html#operator--eq
-"QSemaphore::total" qsemaphore.html#total
-"QSemaphore::tryAccess" qsemaphore.html#tryAccess
-"QSemaphore::~QSemaphore" qsemaphore.html#~QSemaphore
-"QServerSocket" qserversocket.html
-"QServerSocket::address" qserversocket.html#address
-"QServerSocket::newConnection" qserversocket.html#newConnection
-"QServerSocket::ok" qserversocket.html#ok
-"QServerSocket::port" qserversocket.html#port
-"QServerSocket::setSocket" qserversocket.html#setSocket
-"QServerSocket::socket" qserversocket.html#socket
-"QServerSocket::socketDevice" qserversocket.html#socketDevice
-"QServerSocket::~QServerSocket" qserversocket.html#~QServerSocket
-"QSessionManager" qsessionmanager.html
-"QSessionManager::RestartHint" qsessionmanager.html#RestartHint
-"QSessionManager::allowsErrorInteraction" qsessionmanager.html#allowsErrorInteraction
-"QSessionManager::allowsInteraction" qsessionmanager.html#allowsInteraction
-"QSessionManager::cancel" qsessionmanager.html#cancel
-"QSessionManager::discardCommand" qsessionmanager.html#discardCommand
-"QSessionManager::handle" qsessionmanager.html#handle
-"QSessionManager::isPhase2" qsessionmanager.html#isPhase2
-"QSessionManager::release" qsessionmanager.html#release
-"QSessionManager::requestPhase2" qsessionmanager.html#requestPhase2
-"QSessionManager::restartCommand" qsessionmanager.html#restartCommand
-"QSessionManager::restartHint" qsessionmanager.html#restartHint
-"QSessionManager::sessionId" qsessionmanager.html#sessionId
-"QSessionManager::sessionKey" qsessionmanager.html#sessionKey
-"QSessionManager::setDiscardCommand" qsessionmanager.html#setDiscardCommand
-"QSessionManager::setManagerProperty" qsessionmanager.html#setManagerProperty
-"QSessionManager::setRestartCommand" qsessionmanager.html#setRestartCommand
-"QSessionManager::setRestartHint" qsessionmanager.html#setRestartHint
-"QSettings" qsettings.html
-"QSettings::Format" qsettings.html#Format
-"QSettings::Scope" qsettings.html#Scope
-"QSettings::System" qsettings.html#System
-"QSettings::beginGroup" qsettings.html#beginGroup
-"QSettings::endGroup" qsettings.html#endGroup
-"QSettings::entryList" qsettings.html#entryList
-"QSettings::group" qsettings.html#group
-"QSettings::insertSearchPath" qsettings.html#insertSearchPath
-"QSettings::readBoolEntry" qsettings.html#readBoolEntry
-"QSettings::readDoubleEntry" qsettings.html#readDoubleEntry
-"QSettings::readEntry" qsettings.html#readEntry
-"QSettings::readListEntry" qsettings.html#readListEntry
-"QSettings::readNumEntry" qsettings.html#readNumEntry
-"QSettings::removeEntry" qsettings.html#removeEntry
-"QSettings::removeSearchPath" qsettings.html#removeSearchPath
-"QSettings::resetGroup" qsettings.html#resetGroup
-"QSettings::setPath" qsettings.html#setPath
-"QSettings::subkeyList" qsettings.html#subkeyList
-"QSettings::writeEntry" qsettings.html#writeEntry
-"QSettings::~QSettings" qsettings.html#~QSettings
+"QScrollBar" ntqscrollbar.html
+"QScrollBar::doAutoRepeat" ntqscrollbar.html#doAutoRepeat
+"QScrollBar::draggingSlider" ntqscrollbar.html#draggingSlider
+"QScrollBar::draggingSlider" ntqscrollbar.html#draggingSlider-prop
+"QScrollBar::hideEvent" ntqscrollbar.html#hideEvent
+"QScrollBar::lineStep" ntqscrollbar.html#lineStep
+"QScrollBar::lineStep" ntqscrollbar.html#lineStep-prop
+"QScrollBar::maxValue" ntqscrollbar.html#maxValue
+"QScrollBar::maxValue" ntqscrollbar.html#maxValue-prop
+"QScrollBar::minValue" ntqscrollbar.html#minValue
+"QScrollBar::minValue" ntqscrollbar.html#minValue-prop
+"QScrollBar::nextLine" ntqscrollbar.html#nextLine
+"QScrollBar::nextPage" ntqscrollbar.html#nextPage
+"QScrollBar::orientation" ntqscrollbar.html#orientation
+"QScrollBar::orientation" ntqscrollbar.html#orientation-prop
+"QScrollBar::pageStep" ntqscrollbar.html#pageStep
+"QScrollBar::pageStep" ntqscrollbar.html#pageStep-prop
+"QScrollBar::prevLine" ntqscrollbar.html#prevLine
+"QScrollBar::prevPage" ntqscrollbar.html#prevPage
+"QScrollBar::setLineStep" ntqscrollbar.html#setLineStep
+"QScrollBar::setMaxValue" ntqscrollbar.html#setMaxValue
+"QScrollBar::setMinValue" ntqscrollbar.html#setMinValue
+"QScrollBar::setOrientation" ntqscrollbar.html#setOrientation
+"QScrollBar::setPageStep" ntqscrollbar.html#setPageStep
+"QScrollBar::setPalette" ntqscrollbar.html#setPalette
+"QScrollBar::setTracking" ntqscrollbar.html#setTracking
+"QScrollBar::setValue" ntqscrollbar.html#setValue
+"QScrollBar::sliderMoved" ntqscrollbar.html#sliderMoved
+"QScrollBar::sliderPressed" ntqscrollbar.html#sliderPressed
+"QScrollBar::sliderRect" ntqscrollbar.html#sliderRect
+"QScrollBar::sliderReleased" ntqscrollbar.html#sliderReleased
+"QScrollBar::sliderStart" ntqscrollbar.html#sliderStart
+"QScrollBar::startAutoRepeat" ntqscrollbar.html#startAutoRepeat
+"QScrollBar::stopAutoRepeat" ntqscrollbar.html#stopAutoRepeat
+"QScrollBar::tracking" ntqscrollbar.html#tracking
+"QScrollBar::tracking" ntqscrollbar.html#tracking-prop
+"QScrollBar::value" ntqscrollbar.html#value
+"QScrollBar::value" ntqscrollbar.html#value-prop
+"QScrollBar::valueChanged" ntqscrollbar.html#valueChanged
+"QScrollBar::~QScrollBar" ntqscrollbar.html#~QScrollBar
+"QScrollView" ntqscrollview.html
+"QScrollView::ResizePolicy" ntqscrollview.html#ResizePolicy
+"QScrollView::ScrollBarMode" ntqscrollview.html#ScrollBarMode
+"QScrollView::addChild" ntqscrollview.html#addChild
+"QScrollView::bottomMargin" ntqscrollview.html#bottomMargin
+"QScrollView::center" ntqscrollview.html#center
+"QScrollView::childX" ntqscrollview.html#childX
+"QScrollView::childY" ntqscrollview.html#childY
+"QScrollView::clipper" ntqscrollview.html#clipper
+"QScrollView::contentsContextMenuEvent" ntqscrollview.html#contentsContextMenuEvent
+"QScrollView::contentsDragEnterEvent" ntqscrollview.html#contentsDragEnterEvent
+"QScrollView::contentsDragLeaveEvent" ntqscrollview.html#contentsDragLeaveEvent
+"QScrollView::contentsDragMoveEvent" ntqscrollview.html#contentsDragMoveEvent
+"QScrollView::contentsDropEvent" ntqscrollview.html#contentsDropEvent
+"QScrollView::contentsHeight" ntqscrollview.html#contentsHeight
+"QScrollView::contentsHeight" ntqscrollview.html#contentsHeight-prop
+"QScrollView::contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent" ntqscrollview.html#contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent
+"QScrollView::contentsMouseMoveEvent" ntqscrollview.html#contentsMouseMoveEvent
+"QScrollView::contentsMousePressEvent" ntqscrollview.html#contentsMousePressEvent
+"QScrollView::contentsMouseReleaseEvent" ntqscrollview.html#contentsMouseReleaseEvent
+"QScrollView::contentsMoving" ntqscrollview.html#contentsMoving
+"QScrollView::contentsToViewport" ntqscrollview.html#contentsToViewport
+"QScrollView::contentsWheelEvent" ntqscrollview.html#contentsWheelEvent
+"QScrollView::contentsWidth" ntqscrollview.html#contentsWidth
+"QScrollView::contentsWidth" ntqscrollview.html#contentsWidth-prop
+"QScrollView::contentsX" ntqscrollview.html#contentsX
+"QScrollView::contentsX" ntqscrollview.html#contentsX-prop
+"QScrollView::contentsY" ntqscrollview.html#contentsY
+"QScrollView::contentsY" ntqscrollview.html#contentsY-prop
+"QScrollView::cornerWidget" ntqscrollview.html#cornerWidget
+"QScrollView::dragAutoScroll" ntqscrollview.html#dragAutoScroll
+"QScrollView::dragAutoScroll" ntqscrollview.html#dragAutoScroll-prop
+"QScrollView::drawContents" ntqscrollview.html#drawContents
+"QScrollView::drawContentsOffset" ntqscrollview.html#drawContentsOffset
+"QScrollView::enableClipper" ntqscrollview.html#enableClipper
+"QScrollView::ensureVisible" ntqscrollview.html#ensureVisible
+"QScrollView::eventFilter" ntqscrollview.html#eventFilter
+"QScrollView::hScrollBarMode" ntqscrollview.html#hScrollBarMode
+"QScrollView::hScrollBarMode" ntqscrollview.html#hScrollBarMode-prop
+"QScrollView::hasStaticBackground" ntqscrollview.html#hasStaticBackground
+"QScrollView::horizontalScrollBar" ntqscrollview.html#horizontalScrollBar
+"QScrollView::horizontalSliderPressed" ntqscrollview.html#horizontalSliderPressed
+"QScrollView::horizontalSliderReleased" ntqscrollview.html#horizontalSliderReleased
+"QScrollView::isHorizontalSliderPressed" ntqscrollview.html#isHorizontalSliderPressed
+"QScrollView::isVerticalSliderPressed" ntqscrollview.html#isVerticalSliderPressed
+"QScrollView::leftMargin" ntqscrollview.html#leftMargin
+"QScrollView::moveChild" ntqscrollview.html#moveChild
+"QScrollView::moveContents" ntqscrollview.html#moveContents
+"QScrollView::removeChild" ntqscrollview.html#removeChild
+"QScrollView::repaintContents" ntqscrollview.html#repaintContents
+"QScrollView::resizeContents" ntqscrollview.html#resizeContents
+"QScrollView::resizePolicy" ntqscrollview.html#resizePolicy
+"QScrollView::resizePolicy" ntqscrollview.html#resizePolicy-prop
+"QScrollView::rightMargin" ntqscrollview.html#rightMargin
+"QScrollView::scrollBy" ntqscrollview.html#scrollBy
+"QScrollView::setContentsPos" ntqscrollview.html#setContentsPos
+"QScrollView::setCornerWidget" ntqscrollview.html#setCornerWidget
+"QScrollView::setDragAutoScroll" ntqscrollview.html#setDragAutoScroll
+"QScrollView::setHBarGeometry" ntqscrollview.html#setHBarGeometry
+"QScrollView::setHScrollBarMode" ntqscrollview.html#setHScrollBarMode
+"QScrollView::setMargins" ntqscrollview.html#setMargins
+"QScrollView::setResizePolicy" ntqscrollview.html#setResizePolicy
+"QScrollView::setStaticBackground" ntqscrollview.html#setStaticBackground
+"QScrollView::setVBarGeometry" ntqscrollview.html#setVBarGeometry
+"QScrollView::setVScrollBarMode" ntqscrollview.html#setVScrollBarMode
+"QScrollView::topMargin" ntqscrollview.html#topMargin
+"QScrollView::updateContents" ntqscrollview.html#updateContents
+"QScrollView::updateScrollBars" ntqscrollview.html#updateScrollBars
+"QScrollView::vScrollBarMode" ntqscrollview.html#vScrollBarMode
+"QScrollView::vScrollBarMode" ntqscrollview.html#vScrollBarMode-prop
+"QScrollView::verticalScrollBar" ntqscrollview.html#verticalScrollBar
+"QScrollView::verticalSliderPressed" ntqscrollview.html#verticalSliderPressed
+"QScrollView::verticalSliderReleased" ntqscrollview.html#verticalSliderReleased
+"QScrollView::viewport" ntqscrollview.html#viewport
+"QScrollView::viewportPaintEvent" ntqscrollview.html#viewportPaintEvent
+"QScrollView::viewportResizeEvent" ntqscrollview.html#viewportResizeEvent
+"QScrollView::viewportSize" ntqscrollview.html#viewportSize
+"QScrollView::viewportToContents" ntqscrollview.html#viewportToContents
+"QScrollView::visibleHeight" ntqscrollview.html#visibleHeight
+"QScrollView::visibleHeight" ntqscrollview.html#visibleHeight-prop
+"QScrollView::visibleWidth" ntqscrollview.html#visibleWidth
+"QScrollView::visibleWidth" ntqscrollview.html#visibleWidth-prop
+"QScrollView::~QScrollView" ntqscrollview.html#~QScrollView
+"QSemaphore" ntqsemaphore.html
+"QSemaphore::available" ntqsemaphore.html#available
+"QSemaphore::operator++" ntqsemaphore.html#operator++
+"QSemaphore::operator+=" ntqsemaphore.html#operator+-eq
+"QSemaphore::operator--" ntqsemaphore.html#operator--
+"QSemaphore::operator-=" ntqsemaphore.html#operator--eq
+"QSemaphore::total" ntqsemaphore.html#total
+"QSemaphore::tryAccess" ntqsemaphore.html#tryAccess
+"QSemaphore::~QSemaphore" ntqsemaphore.html#~QSemaphore
+"QServerSocket" ntqserversocket.html
+"QServerSocket::address" ntqserversocket.html#address
+"QServerSocket::newConnection" ntqserversocket.html#newConnection
+"QServerSocket::ok" ntqserversocket.html#ok
+"QServerSocket::port" ntqserversocket.html#port
+"QServerSocket::setSocket" ntqserversocket.html#setSocket
+"QServerSocket::socket" ntqserversocket.html#socket
+"QServerSocket::socketDevice" ntqserversocket.html#socketDevice
+"QServerSocket::~QServerSocket" ntqserversocket.html#~QServerSocket
+"QSessionManager" ntqsessionmanager.html
+"QSessionManager::RestartHint" ntqsessionmanager.html#RestartHint
+"QSessionManager::allowsErrorInteraction" ntqsessionmanager.html#allowsErrorInteraction
+"QSessionManager::allowsInteraction" ntqsessionmanager.html#allowsInteraction
+"QSessionManager::cancel" ntqsessionmanager.html#cancel
+"QSessionManager::discardCommand" ntqsessionmanager.html#discardCommand
+"QSessionManager::handle" ntqsessionmanager.html#handle
+"QSessionManager::isPhase2" ntqsessionmanager.html#isPhase2
+"QSessionManager::release" ntqsessionmanager.html#release
+"QSessionManager::requestPhase2" ntqsessionmanager.html#requestPhase2
+"QSessionManager::restartCommand" ntqsessionmanager.html#restartCommand
+"QSessionManager::restartHint" ntqsessionmanager.html#restartHint
+"QSessionManager::sessionId" ntqsessionmanager.html#sessionId
+"QSessionManager::sessionKey" ntqsessionmanager.html#sessionKey
+"QSessionManager::setDiscardCommand" ntqsessionmanager.html#setDiscardCommand
+"QSessionManager::setManagerProperty" ntqsessionmanager.html#setManagerProperty
+"QSessionManager::setRestartCommand" ntqsessionmanager.html#setRestartCommand
+"QSessionManager::setRestartHint" ntqsessionmanager.html#setRestartHint
+"QSettings" ntqsettings.html
+"QSettings::Format" ntqsettings.html#Format
+"QSettings::Scope" ntqsettings.html#Scope
+"QSettings::System" ntqsettings.html#System
+"QSettings::beginGroup" ntqsettings.html#beginGroup
+"QSettings::endGroup" ntqsettings.html#endGroup
+"QSettings::entryList" ntqsettings.html#entryList
+"QSettings::group" ntqsettings.html#group
+"QSettings::insertSearchPath" ntqsettings.html#insertSearchPath
+"QSettings::readBoolEntry" ntqsettings.html#readBoolEntry
+"QSettings::readDoubleEntry" ntqsettings.html#readDoubleEntry
+"QSettings::readEntry" ntqsettings.html#readEntry
+"QSettings::readListEntry" ntqsettings.html#readListEntry
+"QSettings::readNumEntry" ntqsettings.html#readNumEntry
+"QSettings::removeEntry" ntqsettings.html#removeEntry
+"QSettings::removeSearchPath" ntqsettings.html#removeSearchPath
+"QSettings::resetGroup" ntqsettings.html#resetGroup
+"QSettings::setPath" ntqsettings.html#setPath
+"QSettings::subkeyList" ntqsettings.html#subkeyList
+"QSettings::writeEntry" ntqsettings.html#writeEntry
+"QSettings::~QSettings" ntqsettings.html#~QSettings
 "QShowEvent" qshowevent.html
-"QSignal" qsignal.html
-"QSignal::activate" qsignal.html#activate
-"QSignal::connect" qsignal.html#connect
-"QSignal::disconnect" qsignal.html#disconnect
-"QSignal::setValue" qsignal.html#setValue
-"QSignal::value" qsignal.html#value
-"QSignal::~QSignal" qsignal.html#~QSignal
-"QSignalMapper" qsignalmapper.html
-"QSignalMapper::map" qsignalmapper.html#map
-"QSignalMapper::mapped" qsignalmapper.html#mapped
-"QSignalMapper::removeMappings" qsignalmapper.html#removeMappings
-"QSignalMapper::setMapping" qsignalmapper.html#setMapping
-"QSignalMapper::~QSignalMapper" qsignalmapper.html#~QSignalMapper
-"QSimpleRichText" qsimplerichtext.html
-"QSimpleRichText::adjustSize" qsimplerichtext.html#adjustSize
-"QSimpleRichText::anchorAt" qsimplerichtext.html#anchorAt
-"QSimpleRichText::context" qsimplerichtext.html#context
-"QSimpleRichText::draw" qsimplerichtext.html#draw
-"QSimpleRichText::height" qsimplerichtext.html#height
-"QSimpleRichText::inText" qsimplerichtext.html#inText
-"QSimpleRichText::setDefaultFont" qsimplerichtext.html#setDefaultFont
-"QSimpleRichText::setWidth" qsimplerichtext.html#setWidth
-"QSimpleRichText::width" qsimplerichtext.html#width
-"QSimpleRichText::widthUsed" qsimplerichtext.html#widthUsed
-"QSimpleRichText::~QSimpleRichText" qsimplerichtext.html#~QSimpleRichText
-"QSize" qsize.html
-"QSize::ScaleMode" qsize.html#ScaleMode
-"QSize::boundedTo" qsize.html#boundedTo
-"QSize::expandedTo" qsize.html#expandedTo
-"QSize::height" qsize.html#height
-"QSize::isEmpty" qsize.html#isEmpty
-"QSize::isNull" qsize.html#isNull
-"QSize::isValid" qsize.html#isValid
-"QSize::operator*=" qsize.html#operator*-eq
-"QSize::operator+=" qsize.html#operator+-eq
-"QSize::operator-=" qsize.html#operator--eq
-"QSize::operator/=" qsize.html#operator/-eq
-"QSize::rheight" qsize.html#rheight
-"QSize::rwidth" qsize.html#rwidth
-"QSize::scale" qsize.html#scale
-"QSize::setHeight" qsize.html#setHeight
-"QSize::setWidth" qsize.html#setWidth
-"QSize::transpose" qsize.html#transpose
-"QSize::width" qsize.html#width
-"QSizeGrip" qsizegrip.html
-"QSizeGrip::mouseMoveEvent" qsizegrip.html#mouseMoveEvent
-"QSizeGrip::mousePressEvent" qsizegrip.html#mousePressEvent
-"QSizeGrip::paintEvent" qsizegrip.html#paintEvent
-"QSizeGrip::sizeHint" qsizegrip.html#sizeHint
-"QSizeGrip::~QSizeGrip" qsizegrip.html#~QSizeGrip
-"QSizePolicy" qsizepolicy.html
-"QSizePolicy::ExpandData" qsizepolicy.html#ExpandData
-"QSizePolicy::SizeType" qsizepolicy.html#SizeType
-"QSizePolicy::expanding" qsizepolicy.html#expanding
-"QSizePolicy::hasHeightForWidth" qsizepolicy.html#hasHeightForWidth
-"QSizePolicy::horData" qsizepolicy.html#horData
-"QSizePolicy::horStretch" qsizepolicy.html#horStretch
-"QSizePolicy::mayGrowHorizontally" qsizepolicy.html#mayGrowHorizontally
-"QSizePolicy::mayGrowVertically" qsizepolicy.html#mayGrowVertically
-"QSizePolicy::mayShrinkHorizontally" qsizepolicy.html#mayShrinkHorizontally
-"QSizePolicy::mayShrinkVertically" qsizepolicy.html#mayShrinkVertically
-"QSizePolicy::operator!=" qsizepolicy.html#operator!-eq
-"QSizePolicy::operator==" qsizepolicy.html#operator-eq-eq
-"QSizePolicy::setHeightForWidth" qsizepolicy.html#setHeightForWidth
-"QSizePolicy::setHorData" qsizepolicy.html#setHorData
-"QSizePolicy::setHorStretch" qsizepolicy.html#setHorStretch
-"QSizePolicy::setVerData" qsizepolicy.html#setVerData
-"QSizePolicy::setVerStretch" qsizepolicy.html#setVerStretch
-"QSizePolicy::transpose" qsizepolicy.html#transpose
-"QSizePolicy::verData" qsizepolicy.html#verData
-"QSizePolicy::verStretch" qsizepolicy.html#verStretch
-"QSjisCodec" qsjiscodec.html
-"QSjisCodec::mimeName" qsjiscodec.html#mimeName
-"QSjisCodec::~QSjisCodec" qsjiscodec.html#~QSjisCodec
-"QSlider" qslider.html
-"QSlider::TickSetting" qslider.html#TickSetting
-"QSlider::addStep" qslider.html#addStep
-"QSlider::lineStep" qslider.html#lineStep
-"QSlider::lineStep" qslider.html#lineStep-prop
-"QSlider::maxValue" qslider.html#maxValue
-"QSlider::maxValue" qslider.html#maxValue-prop
-"QSlider::minValue" qslider.html#minValue
-"QSlider::minValue" qslider.html#minValue-prop
-"QSlider::moveSlider" qslider.html#moveSlider
-"QSlider::orientation" qslider.html#orientation
-"QSlider::orientation" qslider.html#orientation-prop
-"QSlider::pageStep" qslider.html#pageStep
-"QSlider::pageStep" qslider.html#pageStep-prop
-"QSlider::rangeChange" qslider.html#rangeChange
-"QSlider::setLineStep" qslider.html#setLineStep
-"QSlider::setMaxValue" qslider.html#setMaxValue
-"QSlider::setMinValue" qslider.html#setMinValue
-"QSlider::setOrientation" qslider.html#setOrientation
-"QSlider::setPageStep" qslider.html#setPageStep
-"QSlider::setPalette" qslider.html#setPalette
-"QSlider::setTickInterval" qslider.html#setTickInterval
-"QSlider::setTickmarks" qslider.html#setTickmarks
-"QSlider::setTracking" qslider.html#setTracking
-"QSlider::setValue" qslider.html#setValue
-"QSlider::sliderMoved" qslider.html#sliderMoved
-"QSlider::sliderPressed" qslider.html#sliderPressed
-"QSlider::sliderRect" qslider.html#sliderRect
-"QSlider::sliderReleased" qslider.html#sliderReleased
-"QSlider::sliderStart" qslider.html#sliderStart
-"QSlider::subtractStep" qslider.html#subtractStep
-"QSlider::tickInterval" qslider.html#tickInterval
-"QSlider::tickInterval" qslider.html#tickInterval-prop
-"QSlider::tickmarks" qslider.html#tickmarks
-"QSlider::tickmarks" qslider.html#tickmarks-prop
-"QSlider::tracking" qslider.html#tracking
-"QSlider::tracking" qslider.html#tracking-prop
-"QSlider::value" qslider.html#value
-"QSlider::value" qslider.html#value-prop
-"QSlider::valueChange" qslider.html#valueChange
-"QSlider::valueChanged" qslider.html#valueChanged
-"QSlider::~QSlider" qslider.html#~QSlider
-"QSocket" qsocket.html
-"QSocket::Error" qsocket.html#Error
-"QSocket::State" qsocket.html#State
-"QSocket::address" qsocket.html#address
-"QSocket::at" qsocket.html#at
-"QSocket::atEnd" qsocket.html#atEnd
-"QSocket::bytesAvailable" qsocket.html#bytesAvailable
-"QSocket::bytesToWrite" qsocket.html#bytesToWrite
-"QSocket::bytesWritten" qsocket.html#bytesWritten
-"QSocket::canReadLine" qsocket.html#canReadLine
-"QSocket::clearPendingData" qsocket.html#clearPendingData
-"QSocket::close" qsocket.html#close
-"QSocket::connectToHost" qsocket.html#connectToHost
-"QSocket::connected" qsocket.html#connected
-"QSocket::connectionClosed" qsocket.html#connectionClosed
-"QSocket::consumeWriteBuf" qsocket.html#consumeWriteBuf
-"QSocket::delayedCloseFinished" qsocket.html#delayedCloseFinished
-"QSocket::error" qsocket.html#error
-"QSocket::flush" qsocket.html#flush
-"QSocket::getch" qsocket.html#getch
-"QSocket::hostFound" qsocket.html#hostFound
-"QSocket::open" qsocket.html#open
-"QSocket::peerAddress" qsocket.html#peerAddress
-"QSocket::peerName" qsocket.html#peerName
-"QSocket::peerPort" qsocket.html#peerPort
-"QSocket::port" qsocket.html#port
-"QSocket::putch" qsocket.html#putch
-"QSocket::readBlock" qsocket.html#readBlock
-"QSocket::readBufferSize" qsocket.html#readBufferSize
-"QSocket::readLine" qsocket.html#readLine
-"QSocket::readyRead" qsocket.html#readyRead
-"QSocket::setReadBufferSize" qsocket.html#setReadBufferSize
-"QSocket::setSocket" qsocket.html#setSocket
-"QSocket::setSocketDevice" qsocket.html#setSocketDevice
-"QSocket::setSocketIntern" qsocket.html#setSocketIntern
-"QSocket::size" qsocket.html#size
-"QSocket::socket" qsocket.html#socket
-"QSocket::socketDevice" qsocket.html#socketDevice
-"QSocket::state" qsocket.html#state
-"QSocket::tryConnecting" qsocket.html#tryConnecting
-"QSocket::ungetch" qsocket.html#ungetch
-"QSocket::waitForMore" qsocket.html#waitForMore
-"QSocket::writeBlock" qsocket.html#writeBlock
-"QSocket::~QSocket" qsocket.html#~QSocket
-"QSocketDevice" qsocketdevice.html
-"QSocketDevice::Error" qsocketdevice.html#Error
-"QSocketDevice::Protocol" qsocketdevice.html#Protocol
-"QSocketDevice::Type" qsocketdevice.html#Type
-"QSocketDevice::accept" qsocketdevice.html#accept
-"QSocketDevice::address" qsocketdevice.html#address
-"QSocketDevice::addressReusable" qsocketdevice.html#addressReusable
-"QSocketDevice::bind" qsocketdevice.html#bind
-"QSocketDevice::blocking" qsocketdevice.html#blocking
-"QSocketDevice::bytesAvailable" qsocketdevice.html#bytesAvailable
-"QSocketDevice::connect" qsocketdevice.html#connect
-"QSocketDevice::createNewSocket" qsocketdevice.html#createNewSocket
-"QSocketDevice::error" qsocketdevice.html#error
-"QSocketDevice::fetchConnectionParameters" qsocketdevice.html#fetchConnectionParameters
-"QSocketDevice::isValid" qsocketdevice.html#isValid
-"QSocketDevice::listen" qsocketdevice.html#listen
-"QSocketDevice::option" qsocketdevice.html#option
-"QSocketDevice::peerAddress" qsocketdevice.html#peerAddress
-"QSocketDevice::peerPort" qsocketdevice.html#peerPort
-"QSocketDevice::port" qsocketdevice.html#port
-"QSocketDevice::protocol" qsocketdevice.html#protocol
-"QSocketDevice::readBlock" qsocketdevice.html#readBlock
-"QSocketDevice::receiveBufferSize" qsocketdevice.html#receiveBufferSize
-"QSocketDevice::sendBufferSize" qsocketdevice.html#sendBufferSize
-"QSocketDevice::setAddressReusable" qsocketdevice.html#setAddressReusable
-"QSocketDevice::setBlocking" qsocketdevice.html#setBlocking
-"QSocketDevice::setError" qsocketdevice.html#setError
-"QSocketDevice::setOption" qsocketdevice.html#setOption
-"QSocketDevice::setReceiveBufferSize" qsocketdevice.html#setReceiveBufferSize
-"QSocketDevice::setSendBufferSize" qsocketdevice.html#setSendBufferSize
-"QSocketDevice::setSocket" qsocketdevice.html#setSocket
-"QSocketDevice::socket" qsocketdevice.html#socket
-"QSocketDevice::type" qsocketdevice.html#type
-"QSocketDevice::waitForMore" qsocketdevice.html#waitForMore
-"QSocketDevice::writeBlock" qsocketdevice.html#writeBlock
-"QSocketDevice::~QSocketDevice" qsocketdevice.html#~QSocketDevice
-"QSocketNotifier" qsocketnotifier.html
-"QSocketNotifier::Type" qsocketnotifier.html#Type
-"QSocketNotifier::activated" qsocketnotifier.html#activated
-"QSocketNotifier::isEnabled" qsocketnotifier.html#isEnabled
-"QSocketNotifier::setEnabled" qsocketnotifier.html#setEnabled
-"QSocketNotifier::socket" qsocketnotifier.html#socket
-"QSocketNotifier::type" qsocketnotifier.html#type
-"QSocketNotifier::~QSocketNotifier" qsocketnotifier.html#~QSocketNotifier
-"QSortedList::operator=" qsortedlist.html#operator-eq
-"QSortedList::~QSortedList" qsortedlist.html#~QSortedList
-"QSound" qsound.html
-"QSound::available" qsound.html#available
-"QSound::fileName" qsound.html#fileName
-"QSound::isAvailable" qsound.html#isAvailable
-"QSound::isFinished" qsound.html#isFinished
-"QSound::loops" qsound.html#loops
-"QSound::loopsRemaining" qsound.html#loopsRemaining
-"QSound::play" qsound.html#play
-"QSound::setLoops" qsound.html#setLoops
-"QSound::stop" qsound.html#stop
-"QSound::~QSound" qsound.html#~QSound
+"QSignal" ntqsignal.html
+"QSignal::activate" ntqsignal.html#activate
+"QSignal::connect" ntqsignal.html#connect
+"QSignal::disconnect" ntqsignal.html#disconnect
+"QSignal::setValue" ntqsignal.html#setValue
+"QSignal::value" ntqsignal.html#value
+"QSignal::~QSignal" ntqsignal.html#~QSignal
+"QSignalMapper" ntqsignalmapper.html
+"QSignalMapper::map" ntqsignalmapper.html#map
+"QSignalMapper::mapped" ntqsignalmapper.html#mapped
+"QSignalMapper::removeMappings" ntqsignalmapper.html#removeMappings
+"QSignalMapper::setMapping" ntqsignalmapper.html#setMapping
+"QSignalMapper::~QSignalMapper" ntqsignalmapper.html#~QSignalMapper
+"QSimpleRichText" ntqsimplerichtext.html
+"QSimpleRichText::adjustSize" ntqsimplerichtext.html#adjustSize
+"QSimpleRichText::anchorAt" ntqsimplerichtext.html#anchorAt
+"QSimpleRichText::context" ntqsimplerichtext.html#context
+"QSimpleRichText::draw" ntqsimplerichtext.html#draw
+"QSimpleRichText::height" ntqsimplerichtext.html#height
+"QSimpleRichText::inText" ntqsimplerichtext.html#inText
+"QSimpleRichText::setDefaultFont" ntqsimplerichtext.html#setDefaultFont
+"QSimpleRichText::setWidth" ntqsimplerichtext.html#setWidth
+"QSimpleRichText::width" ntqsimplerichtext.html#width
+"QSimpleRichText::widthUsed" ntqsimplerichtext.html#widthUsed
+"QSimpleRichText::~QSimpleRichText" ntqsimplerichtext.html#~QSimpleRichText
+"QSize" ntqsize.html
+"QSize::ScaleMode" ntqsize.html#ScaleMode
+"QSize::boundedTo" ntqsize.html#boundedTo
+"QSize::expandedTo" ntqsize.html#expandedTo
+"QSize::height" ntqsize.html#height
+"QSize::isEmpty" ntqsize.html#isEmpty
+"QSize::isNull" ntqsize.html#isNull
+"QSize::isValid" ntqsize.html#isValid
+"QSize::operator*=" ntqsize.html#operator*-eq
+"QSize::operator+=" ntqsize.html#operator+-eq
+"QSize::operator-=" ntqsize.html#operator--eq
+"QSize::operator/=" ntqsize.html#operator/-eq
+"QSize::rheight" ntqsize.html#rheight
+"QSize::rwidth" ntqsize.html#rwidth
+"QSize::scale" ntqsize.html#scale
+"QSize::setHeight" ntqsize.html#setHeight
+"QSize::setWidth" ntqsize.html#setWidth
+"QSize::transpose" ntqsize.html#transpose
+"QSize::width" ntqsize.html#width
+"QSizeGrip" ntqsizegrip.html
+"QSizeGrip::mouseMoveEvent" ntqsizegrip.html#mouseMoveEvent
+"QSizeGrip::mousePressEvent" ntqsizegrip.html#mousePressEvent
+"QSizeGrip::paintEvent" ntqsizegrip.html#paintEvent
+"QSizeGrip::sizeHint" ntqsizegrip.html#sizeHint
+"QSizeGrip::~QSizeGrip" ntqsizegrip.html#~QSizeGrip
+"QSizePolicy" ntqsizepolicy.html
+"QSizePolicy::ExpandData" ntqsizepolicy.html#ExpandData
+"QSizePolicy::SizeType" ntqsizepolicy.html#SizeType
+"QSizePolicy::expanding" ntqsizepolicy.html#expanding
+"QSizePolicy::hasHeightForWidth" ntqsizepolicy.html#hasHeightForWidth
+"QSizePolicy::horData" ntqsizepolicy.html#horData
+"QSizePolicy::horStretch" ntqsizepolicy.html#horStretch
+"QSizePolicy::mayGrowHorizontally" ntqsizepolicy.html#mayGrowHorizontally
+"QSizePolicy::mayGrowVertically" ntqsizepolicy.html#mayGrowVertically
+"QSizePolicy::mayShrinkHorizontally" ntqsizepolicy.html#mayShrinkHorizontally
+"QSizePolicy::mayShrinkVertically" ntqsizepolicy.html#mayShrinkVertically
+"QSizePolicy::operator!=" ntqsizepolicy.html#operator!-eq
+"QSizePolicy::operator==" ntqsizepolicy.html#operator-eq-eq
+"QSizePolicy::setHeightForWidth" ntqsizepolicy.html#setHeightForWidth
+"QSizePolicy::setHorData" ntqsizepolicy.html#setHorData
+"QSizePolicy::setHorStretch" ntqsizepolicy.html#setHorStretch
+"QSizePolicy::setVerData" ntqsizepolicy.html#setVerData
+"QSizePolicy::setVerStretch" ntqsizepolicy.html#setVerStretch
+"QSizePolicy::transpose" ntqsizepolicy.html#transpose
+"QSizePolicy::verData" ntqsizepolicy.html#verData
+"QSizePolicy::verStretch" ntqsizepolicy.html#verStretch
+"QSjisCodec" ntqsjiscodec.html
+"QSjisCodec::mimeName" ntqsjiscodec.html#mimeName
+"QSjisCodec::~QSjisCodec" ntqsjiscodec.html#~QSjisCodec
+"QSlider" ntqslider.html
+"QSlider::TickSetting" ntqslider.html#TickSetting
+"QSlider::addStep" ntqslider.html#addStep
+"QSlider::lineStep" ntqslider.html#lineStep
+"QSlider::lineStep" ntqslider.html#lineStep-prop
+"QSlider::maxValue" ntqslider.html#maxValue
+"QSlider::maxValue" ntqslider.html#maxValue-prop
+"QSlider::minValue" ntqslider.html#minValue
+"QSlider::minValue" ntqslider.html#minValue-prop
+"QSlider::moveSlider" ntqslider.html#moveSlider
+"QSlider::orientation" ntqslider.html#orientation
+"QSlider::orientation" ntqslider.html#orientation-prop
+"QSlider::pageStep" ntqslider.html#pageStep
+"QSlider::pageStep" ntqslider.html#pageStep-prop
+"QSlider::rangeChange" ntqslider.html#rangeChange
+"QSlider::setLineStep" ntqslider.html#setLineStep
+"QSlider::setMaxValue" ntqslider.html#setMaxValue
+"QSlider::setMinValue" ntqslider.html#setMinValue
+"QSlider::setOrientation" ntqslider.html#setOrientation
+"QSlider::setPageStep" ntqslider.html#setPageStep
+"QSlider::setPalette" ntqslider.html#setPalette
+"QSlider::setTickInterval" ntqslider.html#setTickInterval
+"QSlider::setTickmarks" ntqslider.html#setTickmarks
+"QSlider::setTracking" ntqslider.html#setTracking
+"QSlider::setValue" ntqslider.html#setValue
+"QSlider::sliderMoved" ntqslider.html#sliderMoved
+"QSlider::sliderPressed" ntqslider.html#sliderPressed
+"QSlider::sliderRect" ntqslider.html#sliderRect
+"QSlider::sliderReleased" ntqslider.html#sliderReleased
+"QSlider::sliderStart" ntqslider.html#sliderStart
+"QSlider::subtractStep" ntqslider.html#subtractStep
+"QSlider::tickInterval" ntqslider.html#tickInterval
+"QSlider::tickInterval" ntqslider.html#tickInterval-prop
+"QSlider::tickmarks" ntqslider.html#tickmarks
+"QSlider::tickmarks" ntqslider.html#tickmarks-prop
+"QSlider::tracking" ntqslider.html#tracking
+"QSlider::tracking" ntqslider.html#tracking-prop
+"QSlider::value" ntqslider.html#value
+"QSlider::value" ntqslider.html#value-prop
+"QSlider::valueChange" ntqslider.html#valueChange
+"QSlider::valueChanged" ntqslider.html#valueChanged
+"QSlider::~QSlider" ntqslider.html#~QSlider
+"QSocket" ntqsocket.html
+"QSocket::Error" ntqsocket.html#Error
+"QSocket::State" ntqsocket.html#State
+"QSocket::address" ntqsocket.html#address
+"QSocket::at" ntqsocket.html#at
+"QSocket::atEnd" ntqsocket.html#atEnd
+"QSocket::bytesAvailable" ntqsocket.html#bytesAvailable
+"QSocket::bytesToWrite" ntqsocket.html#bytesToWrite
+"QSocket::bytesWritten" ntqsocket.html#bytesWritten
+"QSocket::canReadLine" ntqsocket.html#canReadLine
+"QSocket::clearPendingData" ntqsocket.html#clearPendingData
+"QSocket::close" ntqsocket.html#close
+"QSocket::connectToHost" ntqsocket.html#connectToHost
+"QSocket::connected" ntqsocket.html#connected
+"QSocket::connectionClosed" ntqsocket.html#connectionClosed
+"QSocket::consumeWriteBuf" ntqsocket.html#consumeWriteBuf
+"QSocket::delayedCloseFinished" ntqsocket.html#delayedCloseFinished
+"QSocket::error" ntqsocket.html#error
+"QSocket::flush" ntqsocket.html#flush
+"QSocket::getch" ntqsocket.html#getch
+"QSocket::hostFound" ntqsocket.html#hostFound
+"QSocket::open" ntqsocket.html#open
+"QSocket::peerAddress" ntqsocket.html#peerAddress
+"QSocket::peerName" ntqsocket.html#peerName
+"QSocket::peerPort" ntqsocket.html#peerPort
+"QSocket::port" ntqsocket.html#port
+"QSocket::putch" ntqsocket.html#putch
+"QSocket::readBlock" ntqsocket.html#readBlock
+"QSocket::readBufferSize" ntqsocket.html#readBufferSize
+"QSocket::readLine" ntqsocket.html#readLine
+"QSocket::readyRead" ntqsocket.html#readyRead
+"QSocket::setReadBufferSize" ntqsocket.html#setReadBufferSize
+"QSocket::setSocket" ntqsocket.html#setSocket
+"QSocket::setSocketDevice" ntqsocket.html#setSocketDevice
+"QSocket::setSocketIntern" ntqsocket.html#setSocketIntern
+"QSocket::size" ntqsocket.html#size
+"QSocket::socket" ntqsocket.html#socket
+"QSocket::socketDevice" ntqsocket.html#socketDevice
+"QSocket::state" ntqsocket.html#state
+"QSocket::tryConnecting" ntqsocket.html#tryConnecting
+"QSocket::ungetch" ntqsocket.html#ungetch
+"QSocket::waitForMore" ntqsocket.html#waitForMore
+"QSocket::writeBlock" ntqsocket.html#writeBlock
+"QSocket::~QSocket" ntqsocket.html#~QSocket
+"QSocketDevice" ntqsocketdevice.html
+"QSocketDevice::Error" ntqsocketdevice.html#Error
+"QSocketDevice::Protocol" ntqsocketdevice.html#Protocol
+"QSocketDevice::Type" ntqsocketdevice.html#Type
+"QSocketDevice::accept" ntqsocketdevice.html#accept
+"QSocketDevice::address" ntqsocketdevice.html#address
+"QSocketDevice::addressReusable" ntqsocketdevice.html#addressReusable
+"QSocketDevice::bind" ntqsocketdevice.html#bind
+"QSocketDevice::blocking" ntqsocketdevice.html#blocking
+"QSocketDevice::bytesAvailable" ntqsocketdevice.html#bytesAvailable
+"QSocketDevice::connect" ntqsocketdevice.html#connect
+"QSocketDevice::createNewSocket" ntqsocketdevice.html#createNewSocket
+"QSocketDevice::error" ntqsocketdevice.html#error
+"QSocketDevice::fetchConnectionParameters" ntqsocketdevice.html#fetchConnectionParameters
+"QSocketDevice::isValid" ntqsocketdevice.html#isValid
+"QSocketDevice::listen" ntqsocketdevice.html#listen
+"QSocketDevice::option" ntqsocketdevice.html#option
+"QSocketDevice::peerAddress" ntqsocketdevice.html#peerAddress
+"QSocketDevice::peerPort" ntqsocketdevice.html#peerPort
+"QSocketDevice::port" ntqsocketdevice.html#port
+"QSocketDevice::protocol" ntqsocketdevice.html#protocol
+"QSocketDevice::readBlock" ntqsocketdevice.html#readBlock
+"QSocketDevice::receiveBufferSize" ntqsocketdevice.html#receiveBufferSize
+"QSocketDevice::sendBufferSize" ntqsocketdevice.html#sendBufferSize
+"QSocketDevice::setAddressReusable" ntqsocketdevice.html#setAddressReusable
+"QSocketDevice::setBlocking" ntqsocketdevice.html#setBlocking
+"QSocketDevice::setError" ntqsocketdevice.html#setError
+"QSocketDevice::setOption" ntqsocketdevice.html#setOption
+"QSocketDevice::setReceiveBufferSize" ntqsocketdevice.html#setReceiveBufferSize
+"QSocketDevice::setSendBufferSize" ntqsocketdevice.html#setSendBufferSize
+"QSocketDevice::setSocket" ntqsocketdevice.html#setSocket
+"QSocketDevice::socket" ntqsocketdevice.html#socket
+"QSocketDevice::type" ntqsocketdevice.html#type
+"QSocketDevice::waitForMore" ntqsocketdevice.html#waitForMore
+"QSocketDevice::writeBlock" ntqsocketdevice.html#writeBlock
+"QSocketDevice::~QSocketDevice" ntqsocketdevice.html#~QSocketDevice
+"QSocketNotifier" ntqsocketnotifier.html
+"QSocketNotifier::Type" ntqsocketnotifier.html#Type
+"QSocketNotifier::activated" ntqsocketnotifier.html#activated
+"QSocketNotifier::isEnabled" ntqsocketnotifier.html#isEnabled
+"QSocketNotifier::setEnabled" ntqsocketnotifier.html#setEnabled
+"QSocketNotifier::socket" ntqsocketnotifier.html#socket
+"QSocketNotifier::type" ntqsocketnotifier.html#type
+"QSocketNotifier::~QSocketNotifier" ntqsocketnotifier.html#~QSocketNotifier
+"QSortedList::operator=" ntqsortedlist.html#operator-eq
+"QSortedList::~QSortedList" ntqsortedlist.html#~QSortedList
+"QSound" ntqsound.html
+"QSound::available" ntqsound.html#available
+"QSound::fileName" ntqsound.html#fileName
+"QSound::isAvailable" ntqsound.html#isAvailable
+"QSound::isFinished" ntqsound.html#isFinished
+"QSound::loops" ntqsound.html#loops
+"QSound::loopsRemaining" ntqsound.html#loopsRemaining
+"QSound::play" ntqsound.html#play
+"QSound::setLoops" ntqsound.html#setLoops
+"QSound::stop" ntqsound.html#stop
+"QSound::~QSound" ntqsound.html#~QSound
 "QSpacerItem" qspaceritem.html
 "QSpacerItem::changeSize" qspaceritem.html#changeSize
 "QSpacerItem::expanding" qspaceritem.html#expanding
@@ -5712,58 +5712,58 @@
 "QSpacerItem::minimumSize" qspaceritem.html#minimumSize
 "QSpacerItem::setGeometry" qspaceritem.html#setGeometry
 "QSpacerItem::sizeHint" qspaceritem.html#sizeHint
-"QSpinBox" qspinbox.html
-"QSpinBox::ButtonSymbols" qspinbox.html#ButtonSymbols
-"QSpinBox::buttonSymbols" qspinbox.html#buttonSymbols
-"QSpinBox::buttonSymbols" qspinbox.html#buttonSymbols-prop
-"QSpinBox::cleanText" qspinbox.html#cleanText
-"QSpinBox::cleanText" qspinbox.html#cleanText-prop
-"QSpinBox::currentValueText" qspinbox.html#currentValueText
-"QSpinBox::downRect" qspinbox.html#downRect
-"QSpinBox::editor" qspinbox.html#editor
-"QSpinBox::eventFilter" qspinbox.html#eventFilter
-"QSpinBox::interpretText" qspinbox.html#interpretText
-"QSpinBox::lineStep" qspinbox.html#lineStep
-"QSpinBox::lineStep" qspinbox.html#lineStep-prop
-"QSpinBox::mapTextToValue" qspinbox.html#mapTextToValue
-"QSpinBox::mapValueToText" qspinbox.html#mapValueToText
-"QSpinBox::maxValue" qspinbox.html#maxValue
-"QSpinBox::maxValue" qspinbox.html#maxValue-prop
-"QSpinBox::minValue" qspinbox.html#minValue
-"QSpinBox::minValue" qspinbox.html#minValue-prop
-"QSpinBox::prefix" qspinbox.html#prefix
-"QSpinBox::prefix" qspinbox.html#prefix-prop
-"QSpinBox::rangeChange" qspinbox.html#rangeChange
-"QSpinBox::selectAll" qspinbox.html#selectAll
-"QSpinBox::setButtonSymbols" qspinbox.html#setButtonSymbols
-"QSpinBox::setLineStep" qspinbox.html#setLineStep
-"QSpinBox::setMaxValue" qspinbox.html#setMaxValue
-"QSpinBox::setMinValue" qspinbox.html#setMinValue
-"QSpinBox::setPrefix" qspinbox.html#setPrefix
-"QSpinBox::setSpecialValueText" qspinbox.html#setSpecialValueText
-"QSpinBox::setSuffix" qspinbox.html#setSuffix
-"QSpinBox::setValidator" qspinbox.html#setValidator
-"QSpinBox::setValue" qspinbox.html#setValue
-"QSpinBox::setWrapping" qspinbox.html#setWrapping
-"QSpinBox::specialValueText" qspinbox.html#specialValueText
-"QSpinBox::specialValueText" qspinbox.html#specialValueText-prop
-"QSpinBox::stepDown" qspinbox.html#stepDown
-"QSpinBox::stepUp" qspinbox.html#stepUp
-"QSpinBox::suffix" qspinbox.html#suffix
-"QSpinBox::suffix" qspinbox.html#suffix-prop
-"QSpinBox::text" qspinbox.html#text
-"QSpinBox::text" qspinbox.html#text-prop
-"QSpinBox::textChanged" qspinbox.html#textChanged
-"QSpinBox::upRect" qspinbox.html#upRect
-"QSpinBox::updateDisplay" qspinbox.html#updateDisplay
-"QSpinBox::validator" qspinbox.html#validator
-"QSpinBox::value" qspinbox.html#value
-"QSpinBox::value" qspinbox.html#value-prop
-"QSpinBox::valueChange" qspinbox.html#valueChange
-"QSpinBox::valueChanged" qspinbox.html#valueChanged
-"QSpinBox::wrapping" qspinbox.html#wrapping
-"QSpinBox::wrapping" qspinbox.html#wrapping-prop
-"QSpinBox::~QSpinBox" qspinbox.html#~QSpinBox
+"QSpinBox" ntqspinbox.html
+"QSpinBox::ButtonSymbols" ntqspinbox.html#ButtonSymbols
+"QSpinBox::buttonSymbols" ntqspinbox.html#buttonSymbols
+"QSpinBox::buttonSymbols" ntqspinbox.html#buttonSymbols-prop
+"QSpinBox::cleanText" ntqspinbox.html#cleanText
+"QSpinBox::cleanText" ntqspinbox.html#cleanText-prop
+"QSpinBox::currentValueText" ntqspinbox.html#currentValueText
+"QSpinBox::downRect" ntqspinbox.html#downRect
+"QSpinBox::editor" ntqspinbox.html#editor
+"QSpinBox::eventFilter" ntqspinbox.html#eventFilter
+"QSpinBox::interpretText" ntqspinbox.html#interpretText
+"QSpinBox::lineStep" ntqspinbox.html#lineStep
+"QSpinBox::lineStep" ntqspinbox.html#lineStep-prop
+"QSpinBox::mapTextToValue" ntqspinbox.html#mapTextToValue
+"QSpinBox::mapValueToText" ntqspinbox.html#mapValueToText
+"QSpinBox::maxValue" ntqspinbox.html#maxValue
+"QSpinBox::maxValue" ntqspinbox.html#maxValue-prop
+"QSpinBox::minValue" ntqspinbox.html#minValue
+"QSpinBox::minValue" ntqspinbox.html#minValue-prop
+"QSpinBox::prefix" ntqspinbox.html#prefix
+"QSpinBox::prefix" ntqspinbox.html#prefix-prop
+"QSpinBox::rangeChange" ntqspinbox.html#rangeChange
+"QSpinBox::selectAll" ntqspinbox.html#selectAll
+"QSpinBox::setButtonSymbols" ntqspinbox.html#setButtonSymbols
+"QSpinBox::setLineStep" ntqspinbox.html#setLineStep
+"QSpinBox::setMaxValue" ntqspinbox.html#setMaxValue
+"QSpinBox::setMinValue" ntqspinbox.html#setMinValue
+"QSpinBox::setPrefix" ntqspinbox.html#setPrefix
+"QSpinBox::setSpecialValueText" ntqspinbox.html#setSpecialValueText
+"QSpinBox::setSuffix" ntqspinbox.html#setSuffix
+"QSpinBox::setValidator" ntqspinbox.html#setValidator
+"QSpinBox::setValue" ntqspinbox.html#setValue
+"QSpinBox::setWrapping" ntqspinbox.html#setWrapping
+"QSpinBox::specialValueText" ntqspinbox.html#specialValueText
+"QSpinBox::specialValueText" ntqspinbox.html#specialValueText-prop
+"QSpinBox::stepDown" ntqspinbox.html#stepDown
+"QSpinBox::stepUp" ntqspinbox.html#stepUp
+"QSpinBox::suffix" ntqspinbox.html#suffix
+"QSpinBox::suffix" ntqspinbox.html#suffix-prop
+"QSpinBox::text" ntqspinbox.html#text
+"QSpinBox::text" ntqspinbox.html#text-prop
+"QSpinBox::textChanged" ntqspinbox.html#textChanged
+"QSpinBox::upRect" ntqspinbox.html#upRect
+"QSpinBox::updateDisplay" ntqspinbox.html#updateDisplay
+"QSpinBox::validator" ntqspinbox.html#validator
+"QSpinBox::value" ntqspinbox.html#value
+"QSpinBox::value" ntqspinbox.html#value-prop
+"QSpinBox::valueChange" ntqspinbox.html#valueChange
+"QSpinBox::valueChanged" ntqspinbox.html#valueChanged
+"QSpinBox::wrapping" ntqspinbox.html#wrapping
+"QSpinBox::wrapping" ntqspinbox.html#wrapping-prop
+"QSpinBox::~QSpinBox" ntqspinbox.html#~QSpinBox
 "QSpinWidget::arrange" qspinwidget.html#arrange
 "QSpinWidget::buttonSymbols" qspinwidget.html#buttonSymbols
 "QSpinWidget::downRect" qspinwidget.html#downRect
@@ -5785,189 +5785,189 @@
 "QSpinWidget::updateDisplay" qspinwidget.html#updateDisplay
 "QSpinWidget::wheelEvent" qspinwidget.html#wheelEvent
 "QSpinWidget::~QSpinWidget" qspinwidget.html#~QSpinWidget
-"QSplashScreen" qsplashscreen.html
-"QSplashScreen::clear" qsplashscreen.html#clear
-"QSplashScreen::drawContents" qsplashscreen.html#drawContents
-"QSplashScreen::finish" qsplashscreen.html#finish
-"QSplashScreen::message" qsplashscreen.html#message
-"QSplashScreen::messageChanged" qsplashscreen.html#messageChanged
-"QSplashScreen::pixmap" qsplashscreen.html#pixmap
-"QSplashScreen::repaint" qsplashscreen.html#repaint
-"QSplashScreen::setPixmap" qsplashscreen.html#setPixmap
-"QSplashScreen::~QSplashScreen" qsplashscreen.html#~QSplashScreen
-"QSplitter" qsplitter.html
-"QSplitter::ResizeMode" qsplitter.html#ResizeMode
-"QSplitter::adjustPos" qsplitter.html#adjustPos
-"QSplitter::childEvent" qsplitter.html#childEvent
-"QSplitter::childrenCollapsible" qsplitter.html#childrenCollapsible
-"QSplitter::childrenCollapsible" qsplitter.html#childrenCollapsible-prop
-"QSplitter::getRange" qsplitter.html#getRange
-"QSplitter::handleWidth" qsplitter.html#handleWidth
-"QSplitter::handleWidth" qsplitter.html#handleWidth-prop
-"QSplitter::idAfter" qsplitter.html#idAfter
-"QSplitter::moveSplitter" qsplitter.html#moveSplitter
-"QSplitter::moveToFirst" qsplitter.html#moveToFirst
-"QSplitter::moveToLast" qsplitter.html#moveToLast
-"QSplitter::opaqueResize" qsplitter.html#opaqueResize
-"QSplitter::opaqueResize" qsplitter.html#opaqueResize-prop
-"QSplitter::orientation" qsplitter.html#orientation
-"QSplitter::orientation" qsplitter.html#orientation-prop
-"QSplitter::processChildEvents" qsplitter.html#processChildEvents
-"QSplitter::refresh" qsplitter.html#refresh
-"QSplitter::setChildrenCollapsible" qsplitter.html#setChildrenCollapsible
-"QSplitter::setCollapsible" qsplitter.html#setCollapsible
-"QSplitter::setHandleWidth" qsplitter.html#setHandleWidth
-"QSplitter::setOpaqueResize" qsplitter.html#setOpaqueResize
-"QSplitter::setOrientation" qsplitter.html#setOrientation
-"QSplitter::setResizeMode" qsplitter.html#setResizeMode
-"QSplitter::setRubberband" qsplitter.html#setRubberband
-"QSplitter::setSizes" qsplitter.html#setSizes
-"QSplitter::sizes" qsplitter.html#sizes
-"QSplitter::~QSplitter" qsplitter.html#~QSplitter
-"QSql" qsql.html
-"QSql::Confirm" qsql.html#Confirm
-"QSql::Location" qsql.html#Location
-"QSql::Op" qsql.html#Op
-"QSql::ParameterType" qsql.html#ParameterType
-"QSql::TableType" qsql.html#TableType
-"QSqlCursor" qsqlcursor.html
-"QSqlCursor::Mode" qsqlcursor.html#Mode
-"QSqlCursor::append" qsqlcursor.html#append
-"QSqlCursor::calculateField" qsqlcursor.html#calculateField
-"QSqlCursor::canDelete" qsqlcursor.html#canDelete
-"QSqlCursor::canInsert" qsqlcursor.html#canInsert
-"QSqlCursor::canUpdate" qsqlcursor.html#canUpdate
-"QSqlCursor::clear" qsqlcursor.html#clear
-"QSqlCursor::del" qsqlcursor.html#del
-"QSqlCursor::editBuffer" qsqlcursor.html#editBuffer
-"QSqlCursor::filter" qsqlcursor.html#filter
-"QSqlCursor::index" qsqlcursor.html#index
-"QSqlCursor::insert" qsqlcursor.html#insert
-"QSqlCursor::isCalculated" qsqlcursor.html#isCalculated
-"QSqlCursor::isNull" qsqlcursor.html#isNull
-"QSqlCursor::isReadOnly" qsqlcursor.html#isReadOnly
-"QSqlCursor::isTrimmed" qsqlcursor.html#isTrimmed
-"QSqlCursor::mode" qsqlcursor.html#mode
-"QSqlCursor::name" qsqlcursor.html#name
-"QSqlCursor::operator=" qsqlcursor.html#operator-eq
-"QSqlCursor::primaryIndex" qsqlcursor.html#primaryIndex
-"QSqlCursor::primeDelete" qsqlcursor.html#primeDelete
-"QSqlCursor::primeInsert" qsqlcursor.html#primeInsert
-"QSqlCursor::primeUpdate" qsqlcursor.html#primeUpdate
-"QSqlCursor::remove" qsqlcursor.html#remove
-"QSqlCursor::select" qsqlcursor.html#select
-"QSqlCursor::setCalculated" qsqlcursor.html#setCalculated
-"QSqlCursor::setFilter" qsqlcursor.html#setFilter
-"QSqlCursor::setGenerated" qsqlcursor.html#setGenerated
-"QSqlCursor::setMode" qsqlcursor.html#setMode
-"QSqlCursor::setName" qsqlcursor.html#setName
-"QSqlCursor::setPrimaryIndex" qsqlcursor.html#setPrimaryIndex
-"QSqlCursor::setSort" qsqlcursor.html#setSort
-"QSqlCursor::setTrimmed" qsqlcursor.html#setTrimmed
-"QSqlCursor::sort" qsqlcursor.html#sort
-"QSqlCursor::toString" qsqlcursor.html#toString
-"QSqlCursor::update" qsqlcursor.html#update
-"QSqlCursor::~QSqlCursor" qsqlcursor.html#~QSqlCursor
-"QSqlDatabase" qsqldatabase.html
-"QSqlDatabase::addDatabase" qsqldatabase.html#addDatabase
-"QSqlDatabase::close" qsqldatabase.html#close
-"QSqlDatabase::commit" qsqldatabase.html#commit
-"QSqlDatabase::connectOptions" qsqldatabase.html#connectOptions
-"QSqlDatabase::connectOptions" qsqldatabase.html#connectOptions-prop
-"QSqlDatabase::contains" qsqldatabase.html#contains
-"QSqlDatabase::database" qsqldatabase.html#database
-"QSqlDatabase::databaseName" qsqldatabase.html#databaseName
-"QSqlDatabase::databaseName" qsqldatabase.html#databaseName-prop
-"QSqlDatabase::driver" qsqldatabase.html#driver
-"QSqlDatabase::driverName" qsqldatabase.html#driverName
-"QSqlDatabase::drivers" qsqldatabase.html#drivers
-"QSqlDatabase::exec" qsqldatabase.html#exec
-"QSqlDatabase::hostName" qsqldatabase.html#hostName
-"QSqlDatabase::hostName" qsqldatabase.html#hostName-prop
-"QSqlDatabase::isDriverAvailable" qsqldatabase.html#isDriverAvailable
-"QSqlDatabase::isOpen" qsqldatabase.html#isOpen
-"QSqlDatabase::isOpenError" qsqldatabase.html#isOpenError
-"QSqlDatabase::lastError" qsqldatabase.html#lastError
-"QSqlDatabase::open" qsqldatabase.html#open
-"QSqlDatabase::password" qsqldatabase.html#password
-"QSqlDatabase::password" qsqldatabase.html#password-prop
-"QSqlDatabase::port" qsqldatabase.html#port
-"QSqlDatabase::port" qsqldatabase.html#port-prop
-"QSqlDatabase::primaryIndex" qsqldatabase.html#primaryIndex
-"QSqlDatabase::record" qsqldatabase.html#record
-"QSqlDatabase::recordInfo" qsqldatabase.html#recordInfo
-"QSqlDatabase::registerSqlDriver" qsqldatabase.html#registerSqlDriver
-"QSqlDatabase::removeDatabase" qsqldatabase.html#removeDatabase
-"QSqlDatabase::rollback" qsqldatabase.html#rollback
-"QSqlDatabase::setConnectOptions" qsqldatabase.html#setConnectOptions
-"QSqlDatabase::setDatabaseName" qsqldatabase.html#setDatabaseName
-"QSqlDatabase::setHostName" qsqldatabase.html#setHostName
-"QSqlDatabase::setPassword" qsqldatabase.html#setPassword
-"QSqlDatabase::setPort" qsqldatabase.html#setPort
-"QSqlDatabase::setUserName" qsqldatabase.html#setUserName
-"QSqlDatabase::tables" qsqldatabase.html#tables
-"QSqlDatabase::transaction" qsqldatabase.html#transaction
-"QSqlDatabase::userName" qsqldatabase.html#userName
-"QSqlDatabase::userName" qsqldatabase.html#userName-prop
-"QSqlDatabase::~QSqlDatabase" qsqldatabase.html#~QSqlDatabase
-"QSqlDriver" qsqldriver.html
-"QSqlDriver::DriverFeature" qsqldriver.html#DriverFeature
-"QSqlDriver::beginTransaction" qsqldriver.html#beginTransaction
-"QSqlDriver::close" qsqldriver.html#close
-"QSqlDriver::commitTransaction" qsqldriver.html#commitTransaction
-"QSqlDriver::createQuery" qsqldriver.html#createQuery
-"QSqlDriver::formatValue" qsqldriver.html#formatValue
-"QSqlDriver::hasFeature" qsqldriver.html#hasFeature
-"QSqlDriver::isOpen" qsqldriver.html#isOpen
-"QSqlDriver::isOpenError" qsqldriver.html#isOpenError
-"QSqlDriver::lastError" qsqldriver.html#lastError
-"QSqlDriver::nullText" qsqldriver.html#nullText
-"QSqlDriver::open" qsqldriver.html#open
-"QSqlDriver::primaryIndex" qsqldriver.html#primaryIndex
-"QSqlDriver::record" qsqldriver.html#record
-"QSqlDriver::recordInfo" qsqldriver.html#recordInfo
-"QSqlDriver::rollbackTransaction" qsqldriver.html#rollbackTransaction
-"QSqlDriver::setLastError" qsqldriver.html#setLastError
-"QSqlDriver::setOpen" qsqldriver.html#setOpen
-"QSqlDriver::setOpenError" qsqldriver.html#setOpenError
-"QSqlDriver::tables" qsqldriver.html#tables
-"QSqlDriver::~QSqlDriver" qsqldriver.html#~QSqlDriver
-"QSqlDriverPlugin" qsqldriverplugin.html
-"QSqlDriverPlugin::create" qsqldriverplugin.html#create
-"QSqlDriverPlugin::keys" qsqldriverplugin.html#keys
-"QSqlDriverPlugin::~QSqlDriverPlugin" qsqldriverplugin.html#~QSqlDriverPlugin
-"QSqlEditorFactory" qsqleditorfactory.html
-"QSqlEditorFactory::createEditor" qsqleditorfactory.html#createEditor
-"QSqlEditorFactory::defaultFactory" qsqleditorfactory.html#defaultFactory
-"QSqlEditorFactory::installDefaultFactory" qsqleditorfactory.html#installDefaultFactory
-"QSqlEditorFactory::~QSqlEditorFactory" qsqleditorfactory.html#~QSqlEditorFactory
-"QSqlError" qsqlerror.html
-"QSqlError::Type" qsqlerror.html#Type
-"QSqlError::databaseText" qsqlerror.html#databaseText
-"QSqlError::driverText" qsqlerror.html#driverText
-"QSqlError::number" qsqlerror.html#number
-"QSqlError::operator=" qsqlerror.html#operator-eq
-"QSqlError::setDatabaseText" qsqlerror.html#setDatabaseText
-"QSqlError::setDriverText" qsqlerror.html#setDriverText
-"QSqlError::setNumber" qsqlerror.html#setNumber
-"QSqlError::setType" qsqlerror.html#setType
-"QSqlError::text" qsqlerror.html#text
-"QSqlError::type" qsqlerror.html#type
-"QSqlError::~QSqlError" qsqlerror.html#~QSqlError
-"QSqlField" qsqlfield.html
-"QSqlField::clear" qsqlfield.html#clear
-"QSqlField::isNull" qsqlfield.html#isNull
-"QSqlField::isReadOnly" qsqlfield.html#isReadOnly
-"QSqlField::name" qsqlfield.html#name
-"QSqlField::operator=" qsqlfield.html#operator-eq
-"QSqlField::operator==" qsqlfield.html#operator-eq-eq
-"QSqlField::setName" qsqlfield.html#setName
-"QSqlField::setNull" qsqlfield.html#setNull
-"QSqlField::setReadOnly" qsqlfield.html#setReadOnly
-"QSqlField::setValue" qsqlfield.html#setValue
-"QSqlField::type" qsqlfield.html#type
-"QSqlField::value" qsqlfield.html#value
-"QSqlField::~QSqlField" qsqlfield.html#~QSqlField
+"QSplashScreen" ntqsplashscreen.html
+"QSplashScreen::clear" ntqsplashscreen.html#clear
+"QSplashScreen::drawContents" ntqsplashscreen.html#drawContents
+"QSplashScreen::finish" ntqsplashscreen.html#finish
+"QSplashScreen::message" ntqsplashscreen.html#message
+"QSplashScreen::messageChanged" ntqsplashscreen.html#messageChanged
+"QSplashScreen::pixmap" ntqsplashscreen.html#pixmap
+"QSplashScreen::repaint" ntqsplashscreen.html#repaint
+"QSplashScreen::setPixmap" ntqsplashscreen.html#setPixmap
+"QSplashScreen::~QSplashScreen" ntqsplashscreen.html#~QSplashScreen
+"QSplitter" ntqsplitter.html
+"QSplitter::ResizeMode" ntqsplitter.html#ResizeMode
+"QSplitter::adjustPos" ntqsplitter.html#adjustPos
+"QSplitter::childEvent" ntqsplitter.html#childEvent
+"QSplitter::childrenCollapsible" ntqsplitter.html#childrenCollapsible
+"QSplitter::childrenCollapsible" ntqsplitter.html#childrenCollapsible-prop
+"QSplitter::getRange" ntqsplitter.html#getRange
+"QSplitter::handleWidth" ntqsplitter.html#handleWidth
+"QSplitter::handleWidth" ntqsplitter.html#handleWidth-prop
+"QSplitter::idAfter" ntqsplitter.html#idAfter
+"QSplitter::moveSplitter" ntqsplitter.html#moveSplitter
+"QSplitter::moveToFirst" ntqsplitter.html#moveToFirst
+"QSplitter::moveToLast" ntqsplitter.html#moveToLast
+"QSplitter::opaqueResize" ntqsplitter.html#opaqueResize
+"QSplitter::opaqueResize" ntqsplitter.html#opaqueResize-prop
+"QSplitter::orientation" ntqsplitter.html#orientation
+"QSplitter::orientation" ntqsplitter.html#orientation-prop
+"QSplitter::processChildEvents" ntqsplitter.html#processChildEvents
+"QSplitter::refresh" ntqsplitter.html#refresh
+"QSplitter::setChildrenCollapsible" ntqsplitter.html#setChildrenCollapsible
+"QSplitter::setCollapsible" ntqsplitter.html#setCollapsible
+"QSplitter::setHandleWidth" ntqsplitter.html#setHandleWidth
+"QSplitter::setOpaqueResize" ntqsplitter.html#setOpaqueResize
+"QSplitter::setOrientation" ntqsplitter.html#setOrientation
+"QSplitter::setResizeMode" ntqsplitter.html#setResizeMode
+"QSplitter::setRubberband" ntqsplitter.html#setRubberband
+"QSplitter::setSizes" ntqsplitter.html#setSizes
+"QSplitter::sizes" ntqsplitter.html#sizes
+"QSplitter::~QSplitter" ntqsplitter.html#~QSplitter
+"QSql" ntqsql.html
+"QSql::Confirm" ntqsql.html#Confirm
+"QSql::Location" ntqsql.html#Location
+"QSql::Op" ntqsql.html#Op
+"QSql::ParameterType" ntqsql.html#ParameterType
+"QSql::TableType" ntqsql.html#TableType
+"QSqlCursor" ntqsqlcursor.html
+"QSqlCursor::Mode" ntqsqlcursor.html#Mode
+"QSqlCursor::append" ntqsqlcursor.html#append
+"QSqlCursor::calculateField" ntqsqlcursor.html#calculateField
+"QSqlCursor::canDelete" ntqsqlcursor.html#canDelete
+"QSqlCursor::canInsert" ntqsqlcursor.html#canInsert
+"QSqlCursor::canUpdate" ntqsqlcursor.html#canUpdate
+"QSqlCursor::clear" ntqsqlcursor.html#clear
+"QSqlCursor::del" ntqsqlcursor.html#del
+"QSqlCursor::editBuffer" ntqsqlcursor.html#editBuffer
+"QSqlCursor::filter" ntqsqlcursor.html#filter
+"QSqlCursor::index" ntqsqlcursor.html#index
+"QSqlCursor::insert" ntqsqlcursor.html#insert
+"QSqlCursor::isCalculated" ntqsqlcursor.html#isCalculated
+"QSqlCursor::isNull" ntqsqlcursor.html#isNull
+"QSqlCursor::isReadOnly" ntqsqlcursor.html#isReadOnly
+"QSqlCursor::isTrimmed" ntqsqlcursor.html#isTrimmed
+"QSqlCursor::mode" ntqsqlcursor.html#mode
+"QSqlCursor::name" ntqsqlcursor.html#name
+"QSqlCursor::operator=" ntqsqlcursor.html#operator-eq
+"QSqlCursor::primaryIndex" ntqsqlcursor.html#primaryIndex
+"QSqlCursor::primeDelete" ntqsqlcursor.html#primeDelete
+"QSqlCursor::primeInsert" ntqsqlcursor.html#primeInsert
+"QSqlCursor::primeUpdate" ntqsqlcursor.html#primeUpdate
+"QSqlCursor::remove" ntqsqlcursor.html#remove
+"QSqlCursor::select" ntqsqlcursor.html#select
+"QSqlCursor::setCalculated" ntqsqlcursor.html#setCalculated
+"QSqlCursor::setFilter" ntqsqlcursor.html#setFilter
+"QSqlCursor::setGenerated" ntqsqlcursor.html#setGenerated
+"QSqlCursor::setMode" ntqsqlcursor.html#setMode
+"QSqlCursor::setName" ntqsqlcursor.html#setName
+"QSqlCursor::setPrimaryIndex" ntqsqlcursor.html#setPrimaryIndex
+"QSqlCursor::setSort" ntqsqlcursor.html#setSort
+"QSqlCursor::setTrimmed" ntqsqlcursor.html#setTrimmed
+"QSqlCursor::sort" ntqsqlcursor.html#sort
+"QSqlCursor::toString" ntqsqlcursor.html#toString
+"QSqlCursor::update" ntqsqlcursor.html#update
+"QSqlCursor::~QSqlCursor" ntqsqlcursor.html#~QSqlCursor
+"QSqlDatabase" ntqsqldatabase.html
+"QSqlDatabase::addDatabase" ntqsqldatabase.html#addDatabase
+"QSqlDatabase::close" ntqsqldatabase.html#close
+"QSqlDatabase::commit" ntqsqldatabase.html#commit
+"QSqlDatabase::connectOptions" ntqsqldatabase.html#connectOptions
+"QSqlDatabase::connectOptions" ntqsqldatabase.html#connectOptions-prop
+"QSqlDatabase::contains" ntqsqldatabase.html#contains
+"QSqlDatabase::database" ntqsqldatabase.html#database
+"QSqlDatabase::databaseName" ntqsqldatabase.html#databaseName
+"QSqlDatabase::databaseName" ntqsqldatabase.html#databaseName-prop
+"QSqlDatabase::driver" ntqsqldatabase.html#driver
+"QSqlDatabase::driverName" ntqsqldatabase.html#driverName
+"QSqlDatabase::drivers" ntqsqldatabase.html#drivers
+"QSqlDatabase::exec" ntqsqldatabase.html#exec
+"QSqlDatabase::hostName" ntqsqldatabase.html#hostName
+"QSqlDatabase::hostName" ntqsqldatabase.html#hostName-prop
+"QSqlDatabase::isDriverAvailable" ntqsqldatabase.html#isDriverAvailable
+"QSqlDatabase::isOpen" ntqsqldatabase.html#isOpen
+"QSqlDatabase::isOpenError" ntqsqldatabase.html#isOpenError
+"QSqlDatabase::lastError" ntqsqldatabase.html#lastError
+"QSqlDatabase::open" ntqsqldatabase.html#open
+"QSqlDatabase::password" ntqsqldatabase.html#password
+"QSqlDatabase::password" ntqsqldatabase.html#password-prop
+"QSqlDatabase::port" ntqsqldatabase.html#port
+"QSqlDatabase::port" ntqsqldatabase.html#port-prop
+"QSqlDatabase::primaryIndex" ntqsqldatabase.html#primaryIndex
+"QSqlDatabase::record" ntqsqldatabase.html#record
+"QSqlDatabase::recordInfo" ntqsqldatabase.html#recordInfo
+"QSqlDatabase::registerSqlDriver" ntqsqldatabase.html#registerSqlDriver
+"QSqlDatabase::removeDatabase" ntqsqldatabase.html#removeDatabase
+"QSqlDatabase::rollback" ntqsqldatabase.html#rollback
+"QSqlDatabase::setConnectOptions" ntqsqldatabase.html#setConnectOptions
+"QSqlDatabase::setDatabaseName" ntqsqldatabase.html#setDatabaseName
+"QSqlDatabase::setHostName" ntqsqldatabase.html#setHostName
+"QSqlDatabase::setPassword" ntqsqldatabase.html#setPassword
+"QSqlDatabase::setPort" ntqsqldatabase.html#setPort
+"QSqlDatabase::setUserName" ntqsqldatabase.html#setUserName
+"QSqlDatabase::tables" ntqsqldatabase.html#tables
+"QSqlDatabase::transaction" ntqsqldatabase.html#transaction
+"QSqlDatabase::userName" ntqsqldatabase.html#userName
+"QSqlDatabase::userName" ntqsqldatabase.html#userName-prop
+"QSqlDatabase::~QSqlDatabase" ntqsqldatabase.html#~QSqlDatabase
+"QSqlDriver" ntqsqldriver.html
+"QSqlDriver::DriverFeature" ntqsqldriver.html#DriverFeature
+"QSqlDriver::beginTransaction" ntqsqldriver.html#beginTransaction
+"QSqlDriver::close" ntqsqldriver.html#close
+"QSqlDriver::commitTransaction" ntqsqldriver.html#commitTransaction
+"QSqlDriver::createQuery" ntqsqldriver.html#createQuery
+"QSqlDriver::formatValue" ntqsqldriver.html#formatValue
+"QSqlDriver::hasFeature" ntqsqldriver.html#hasFeature
+"QSqlDriver::isOpen" ntqsqldriver.html#isOpen
+"QSqlDriver::isOpenError" ntqsqldriver.html#isOpenError
+"QSqlDriver::lastError" ntqsqldriver.html#lastError
+"QSqlDriver::nullText" ntqsqldriver.html#nullText
+"QSqlDriver::open" ntqsqldriver.html#open
+"QSqlDriver::primaryIndex" ntqsqldriver.html#primaryIndex
+"QSqlDriver::record" ntqsqldriver.html#record
+"QSqlDriver::recordInfo" ntqsqldriver.html#recordInfo
+"QSqlDriver::rollbackTransaction" ntqsqldriver.html#rollbackTransaction
+"QSqlDriver::setLastError" ntqsqldriver.html#setLastError
+"QSqlDriver::setOpen" ntqsqldriver.html#setOpen
+"QSqlDriver::setOpenError" ntqsqldriver.html#setOpenError
+"QSqlDriver::tables" ntqsqldriver.html#tables
+"QSqlDriver::~QSqlDriver" ntqsqldriver.html#~QSqlDriver
+"QSqlDriverPlugin" ntqsqldriverplugin.html
+"QSqlDriverPlugin::create" ntqsqldriverplugin.html#create
+"QSqlDriverPlugin::keys" ntqsqldriverplugin.html#keys
+"QSqlDriverPlugin::~QSqlDriverPlugin" ntqsqldriverplugin.html#~QSqlDriverPlugin
+"QSqlEditorFactory" ntqsqleditorfactory.html
+"QSqlEditorFactory::createEditor" ntqsqleditorfactory.html#createEditor
+"QSqlEditorFactory::defaultFactory" ntqsqleditorfactory.html#defaultFactory
+"QSqlEditorFactory::installDefaultFactory" ntqsqleditorfactory.html#installDefaultFactory
+"QSqlEditorFactory::~QSqlEditorFactory" ntqsqleditorfactory.html#~QSqlEditorFactory
+"QSqlError" ntqsqlerror.html
+"QSqlError::Type" ntqsqlerror.html#Type
+"QSqlError::databaseText" ntqsqlerror.html#databaseText
+"QSqlError::driverText" ntqsqlerror.html#driverText
+"QSqlError::number" ntqsqlerror.html#number
+"QSqlError::operator=" ntqsqlerror.html#operator-eq
+"QSqlError::setDatabaseText" ntqsqlerror.html#setDatabaseText
+"QSqlError::setDriverText" ntqsqlerror.html#setDriverText
+"QSqlError::setNumber" ntqsqlerror.html#setNumber
+"QSqlError::setType" ntqsqlerror.html#setType
+"QSqlError::text" ntqsqlerror.html#text
+"QSqlError::type" ntqsqlerror.html#type
+"QSqlError::~QSqlError" ntqsqlerror.html#~QSqlError
+"QSqlField" ntqsqlfield.html
+"QSqlField::clear" ntqsqlfield.html#clear
+"QSqlField::isNull" ntqsqlfield.html#isNull
+"QSqlField::isReadOnly" ntqsqlfield.html#isReadOnly
+"QSqlField::name" ntqsqlfield.html#name
+"QSqlField::operator=" ntqsqlfield.html#operator-eq
+"QSqlField::operator==" ntqsqlfield.html#operator-eq-eq
+"QSqlField::setName" ntqsqlfield.html#setName
+"QSqlField::setNull" ntqsqlfield.html#setNull
+"QSqlField::setReadOnly" ntqsqlfield.html#setReadOnly
+"QSqlField::setValue" ntqsqlfield.html#setValue
+"QSqlField::type" ntqsqlfield.html#type
+"QSqlField::value" ntqsqlfield.html#value
+"QSqlField::~QSqlField" ntqsqlfield.html#~QSqlField
 "QSqlFieldInfo" qsqlfieldinfo.html
 "QSqlFieldInfo::defaultValue" qsqlfieldinfo.html#defaultValue
 "QSqlFieldInfo::isCalculated" qsqlfieldinfo.html#isCalculated
@@ -5986,267 +5986,267 @@
 "QSqlFieldInfo::type" qsqlfieldinfo.html#type
 "QSqlFieldInfo::typeID" qsqlfieldinfo.html#typeID
 "QSqlFieldInfo::~QSqlFieldInfo" qsqlfieldinfo.html#~QSqlFieldInfo
-"QSqlForm" qsqlform.html
-"QSqlForm::clear" qsqlform.html#clear
-"QSqlForm::clearValues" qsqlform.html#clearValues
-"QSqlForm::count" qsqlform.html#count
-"QSqlForm::fieldToWidget" qsqlform.html#fieldToWidget
-"QSqlForm::insert" qsqlform.html#insert
-"QSqlForm::installPropertyMap" qsqlform.html#installPropertyMap
-"QSqlForm::readField" qsqlform.html#readField
-"QSqlForm::readFields" qsqlform.html#readFields
-"QSqlForm::remove" qsqlform.html#remove
-"QSqlForm::setRecord" qsqlform.html#setRecord
-"QSqlForm::widget" qsqlform.html#widget
-"QSqlForm::widgetToField" qsqlform.html#widgetToField
-"QSqlForm::writeField" qsqlform.html#writeField
-"QSqlForm::writeFields" qsqlform.html#writeFields
-"QSqlForm::~QSqlForm" qsqlform.html#~QSqlForm
-"QSqlIndex" qsqlindex.html
-"QSqlIndex::append" qsqlindex.html#append
-"QSqlIndex::cursorName" qsqlindex.html#cursorName
-"QSqlIndex::fromStringList" qsqlindex.html#fromStringList
-"QSqlIndex::isDescending" qsqlindex.html#isDescending
-"QSqlIndex::name" qsqlindex.html#name
-"QSqlIndex::operator=" qsqlindex.html#operator-eq
-"QSqlIndex::setCursorName" qsqlindex.html#setCursorName
-"QSqlIndex::setDescending" qsqlindex.html#setDescending
-"QSqlIndex::setName" qsqlindex.html#setName
-"QSqlIndex::~QSqlIndex" qsqlindex.html#~QSqlIndex
-"QSqlPropertyMap" qsqlpropertymap.html
-"QSqlPropertyMap::defaultMap" qsqlpropertymap.html#defaultMap
-"QSqlPropertyMap::insert" qsqlpropertymap.html#insert
-"QSqlPropertyMap::installDefaultMap" qsqlpropertymap.html#installDefaultMap
-"QSqlPropertyMap::property" qsqlpropertymap.html#property
-"QSqlPropertyMap::remove" qsqlpropertymap.html#remove
-"QSqlPropertyMap::setProperty" qsqlpropertymap.html#setProperty
-"QSqlPropertyMap::~QSqlPropertyMap" qsqlpropertymap.html#~QSqlPropertyMap
-"QSqlQuery" qsqlquery.html
-"QSqlQuery::addBindValue" qsqlquery.html#addBindValue
-"QSqlQuery::afterSeek" qsqlquery.html#afterSeek
-"QSqlQuery::at" qsqlquery.html#at
-"QSqlQuery::beforeSeek" qsqlquery.html#beforeSeek
-"QSqlQuery::bindValue" qsqlquery.html#bindValue
-"QSqlQuery::boundValue" qsqlquery.html#boundValue
-"QSqlQuery::boundValues" qsqlquery.html#boundValues
-"QSqlQuery::driver" qsqlquery.html#driver
-"QSqlQuery::exec" qsqlquery.html#exec
-"QSqlQuery::executedQuery" qsqlquery.html#executedQuery
-"QSqlQuery::first" qsqlquery.html#first
-"QSqlQuery::isActive" qsqlquery.html#isActive
-"QSqlQuery::isForwardOnly" qsqlquery.html#isForwardOnly
-"QSqlQuery::isNull" qsqlquery.html#isNull
-"QSqlQuery::isSelect" qsqlquery.html#isSelect
-"QSqlQuery::isValid" qsqlquery.html#isValid
-"QSqlQuery::last" qsqlquery.html#last
-"QSqlQuery::lastError" qsqlquery.html#lastError
-"QSqlQuery::lastQuery" qsqlquery.html#lastQuery
-"QSqlQuery::next" qsqlquery.html#next
-"QSqlQuery::numRowsAffected" qsqlquery.html#numRowsAffected
-"QSqlQuery::operator=" qsqlquery.html#operator-eq
-"QSqlQuery::prepare" qsqlquery.html#prepare
-"QSqlQuery::prev" qsqlquery.html#prev
-"QSqlQuery::result" qsqlquery.html#result
-"QSqlQuery::seek" qsqlquery.html#seek
-"QSqlQuery::setForwardOnly" qsqlquery.html#setForwardOnly
-"QSqlQuery::size" qsqlquery.html#size
-"QSqlQuery::value" qsqlquery.html#value
-"QSqlQuery::~QSqlQuery" qsqlquery.html#~QSqlQuery
-"QSqlRecord" qsqlrecord.html
-"QSqlRecord::append" qsqlrecord.html#append
-"QSqlRecord::clear" qsqlrecord.html#clear
-"QSqlRecord::clearValues" qsqlrecord.html#clearValues
-"QSqlRecord::contains" qsqlrecord.html#contains
-"QSqlRecord::count" qsqlrecord.html#count
-"QSqlRecord::field" qsqlrecord.html#field
-"QSqlRecord::fieldName" qsqlrecord.html#fieldName
-"QSqlRecord::insert" qsqlrecord.html#insert
-"QSqlRecord::isEmpty" qsqlrecord.html#isEmpty
-"QSqlRecord::isGenerated" qsqlrecord.html#isGenerated
-"QSqlRecord::isNull" qsqlrecord.html#isNull
-"QSqlRecord::operator=" qsqlrecord.html#operator-eq
-"QSqlRecord::position" qsqlrecord.html#position
-"QSqlRecord::remove" qsqlrecord.html#remove
-"QSqlRecord::setGenerated" qsqlrecord.html#setGenerated
-"QSqlRecord::setNull" qsqlrecord.html#setNull
-"QSqlRecord::setValue" qsqlrecord.html#setValue
-"QSqlRecord::toString" qsqlrecord.html#toString
-"QSqlRecord::toStringList" qsqlrecord.html#toStringList
-"QSqlRecord::value" qsqlrecord.html#value
-"QSqlRecord::~QSqlRecord" qsqlrecord.html#~QSqlRecord
+"QSqlForm" ntqsqlform.html
+"QSqlForm::clear" ntqsqlform.html#clear
+"QSqlForm::clearValues" ntqsqlform.html#clearValues
+"QSqlForm::count" ntqsqlform.html#count
+"QSqlForm::fieldToWidget" ntqsqlform.html#fieldToWidget
+"QSqlForm::insert" ntqsqlform.html#insert
+"QSqlForm::installPropertyMap" ntqsqlform.html#installPropertyMap
+"QSqlForm::readField" ntqsqlform.html#readField
+"QSqlForm::readFields" ntqsqlform.html#readFields
+"QSqlForm::remove" ntqsqlform.html#remove
+"QSqlForm::setRecord" ntqsqlform.html#setRecord
+"QSqlForm::widget" ntqsqlform.html#widget
+"QSqlForm::widgetToField" ntqsqlform.html#widgetToField
+"QSqlForm::writeField" ntqsqlform.html#writeField
+"QSqlForm::writeFields" ntqsqlform.html#writeFields
+"QSqlForm::~QSqlForm" ntqsqlform.html#~QSqlForm
+"QSqlIndex" ntqsqlindex.html
+"QSqlIndex::append" ntqsqlindex.html#append
+"QSqlIndex::cursorName" ntqsqlindex.html#cursorName
+"QSqlIndex::fromStringList" ntqsqlindex.html#fromStringList
+"QSqlIndex::isDescending" ntqsqlindex.html#isDescending
+"QSqlIndex::name" ntqsqlindex.html#name
+"QSqlIndex::operator=" ntqsqlindex.html#operator-eq
+"QSqlIndex::setCursorName" ntqsqlindex.html#setCursorName
+"QSqlIndex::setDescending" ntqsqlindex.html#setDescending
+"QSqlIndex::setName" ntqsqlindex.html#setName
+"QSqlIndex::~QSqlIndex" ntqsqlindex.html#~QSqlIndex
+"QSqlPropertyMap" ntqsqlpropertymap.html
+"QSqlPropertyMap::defaultMap" ntqsqlpropertymap.html#defaultMap
+"QSqlPropertyMap::insert" ntqsqlpropertymap.html#insert
+"QSqlPropertyMap::installDefaultMap" ntqsqlpropertymap.html#installDefaultMap
+"QSqlPropertyMap::property" ntqsqlpropertymap.html#property
+"QSqlPropertyMap::remove" ntqsqlpropertymap.html#remove
+"QSqlPropertyMap::setProperty" ntqsqlpropertymap.html#setProperty
+"QSqlPropertyMap::~QSqlPropertyMap" ntqsqlpropertymap.html#~QSqlPropertyMap
+"QSqlQuery" ntqsqlquery.html
+"QSqlQuery::addBindValue" ntqsqlquery.html#addBindValue
+"QSqlQuery::afterSeek" ntqsqlquery.html#afterSeek
+"QSqlQuery::at" ntqsqlquery.html#at
+"QSqlQuery::beforeSeek" ntqsqlquery.html#beforeSeek
+"QSqlQuery::bindValue" ntqsqlquery.html#bindValue
+"QSqlQuery::boundValue" ntqsqlquery.html#boundValue
+"QSqlQuery::boundValues" ntqsqlquery.html#boundValues
+"QSqlQuery::driver" ntqsqlquery.html#driver
+"QSqlQuery::exec" ntqsqlquery.html#exec
+"QSqlQuery::executedQuery" ntqsqlquery.html#executedQuery
+"QSqlQuery::first" ntqsqlquery.html#first
+"QSqlQuery::isActive" ntqsqlquery.html#isActive
+"QSqlQuery::isForwardOnly" ntqsqlquery.html#isForwardOnly
+"QSqlQuery::isNull" ntqsqlquery.html#isNull
+"QSqlQuery::isSelect" ntqsqlquery.html#isSelect
+"QSqlQuery::isValid" ntqsqlquery.html#isValid
+"QSqlQuery::last" ntqsqlquery.html#last
+"QSqlQuery::lastError" ntqsqlquery.html#lastError
+"QSqlQuery::lastQuery" ntqsqlquery.html#lastQuery
+"QSqlQuery::next" ntqsqlquery.html#next
+"QSqlQuery::numRowsAffected" ntqsqlquery.html#numRowsAffected
+"QSqlQuery::operator=" ntqsqlquery.html#operator-eq
+"QSqlQuery::prepare" ntqsqlquery.html#prepare
+"QSqlQuery::prev" ntqsqlquery.html#prev
+"QSqlQuery::result" ntqsqlquery.html#result
+"QSqlQuery::seek" ntqsqlquery.html#seek
+"QSqlQuery::setForwardOnly" ntqsqlquery.html#setForwardOnly
+"QSqlQuery::size" ntqsqlquery.html#size
+"QSqlQuery::value" ntqsqlquery.html#value
+"QSqlQuery::~QSqlQuery" ntqsqlquery.html#~QSqlQuery
+"QSqlRecord" ntqsqlrecord.html
+"QSqlRecord::append" ntqsqlrecord.html#append
+"QSqlRecord::clear" ntqsqlrecord.html#clear
+"QSqlRecord::clearValues" ntqsqlrecord.html#clearValues
+"QSqlRecord::contains" ntqsqlrecord.html#contains
+"QSqlRecord::count" ntqsqlrecord.html#count
+"QSqlRecord::field" ntqsqlrecord.html#field
+"QSqlRecord::fieldName" ntqsqlrecord.html#fieldName
+"QSqlRecord::insert" ntqsqlrecord.html#insert
+"QSqlRecord::isEmpty" ntqsqlrecord.html#isEmpty
+"QSqlRecord::isGenerated" ntqsqlrecord.html#isGenerated
+"QSqlRecord::isNull" ntqsqlrecord.html#isNull
+"QSqlRecord::operator=" ntqsqlrecord.html#operator-eq
+"QSqlRecord::position" ntqsqlrecord.html#position
+"QSqlRecord::remove" ntqsqlrecord.html#remove
+"QSqlRecord::setGenerated" ntqsqlrecord.html#setGenerated
+"QSqlRecord::setNull" ntqsqlrecord.html#setNull
+"QSqlRecord::setValue" ntqsqlrecord.html#setValue
+"QSqlRecord::toString" ntqsqlrecord.html#toString
+"QSqlRecord::toStringList" ntqsqlrecord.html#toStringList
+"QSqlRecord::value" ntqsqlrecord.html#value
+"QSqlRecord::~QSqlRecord" ntqsqlrecord.html#~QSqlRecord
 "QSqlRecordInfo" qsqlrecordinfo.html
 "QSqlRecordInfo::contains" qsqlrecordinfo.html#contains
 "QSqlRecordInfo::find" qsqlrecordinfo.html#find
 "QSqlRecordInfo::toRecord" qsqlrecordinfo.html#toRecord
-"QSqlResult" qsqlresult.html
-"QSqlResult::at" qsqlresult.html#at
-"QSqlResult::data" qsqlresult.html#data
-"QSqlResult::driver" qsqlresult.html#driver
-"QSqlResult::fetch" qsqlresult.html#fetch
-"QSqlResult::fetchFirst" qsqlresult.html#fetchFirst
-"QSqlResult::fetchLast" qsqlresult.html#fetchLast
-"QSqlResult::fetchNext" qsqlresult.html#fetchNext
-"QSqlResult::fetchPrev" qsqlresult.html#fetchPrev
-"QSqlResult::isActive" qsqlresult.html#isActive
-"QSqlResult::isForwardOnly" qsqlresult.html#isForwardOnly
-"QSqlResult::isNull" qsqlresult.html#isNull
-"QSqlResult::isSelect" qsqlresult.html#isSelect
-"QSqlResult::isValid" qsqlresult.html#isValid
-"QSqlResult::lastError" qsqlresult.html#lastError
-"QSqlResult::lastQuery" qsqlresult.html#lastQuery
-"QSqlResult::numRowsAffected" qsqlresult.html#numRowsAffected
-"QSqlResult::reset" qsqlresult.html#reset
-"QSqlResult::setActive" qsqlresult.html#setActive
-"QSqlResult::setAt" qsqlresult.html#setAt
-"QSqlResult::setForwardOnly" qsqlresult.html#setForwardOnly
-"QSqlResult::setLastError" qsqlresult.html#setLastError
-"QSqlResult::setQuery" qsqlresult.html#setQuery
-"QSqlResult::setSelect" qsqlresult.html#setSelect
-"QSqlResult::size" qsqlresult.html#size
-"QSqlResult::~QSqlResult" qsqlresult.html#~QSqlResult
-"QSqlSelectCursor" qsqlselectcursor.html
-"QSqlSelectCursor::~QSqlSelectCursor" qsqlselectcursor.html#~QSqlSelectCursor
-"QStack Class Reference (obsolete)" qstack.html
-"QStatusBar" qstatusbar.html
-"QStatusBar::addWidget" qstatusbar.html#addWidget
-"QStatusBar::clear" qstatusbar.html#clear
-"QStatusBar::hideOrShow" qstatusbar.html#hideOrShow
-"QStatusBar::isSizeGripEnabled" qstatusbar.html#isSizeGripEnabled
-"QStatusBar::message" qstatusbar.html#message
-"QStatusBar::messageChanged" qstatusbar.html#messageChanged
-"QStatusBar::paintEvent" qstatusbar.html#paintEvent
-"QStatusBar::reformat" qstatusbar.html#reformat
-"QStatusBar::removeWidget" qstatusbar.html#removeWidget
-"QStatusBar::setSizeGripEnabled" qstatusbar.html#setSizeGripEnabled
-"QStatusBar::sizeGripEnabled" qstatusbar.html#sizeGripEnabled-prop
-"QStatusBar::~QStatusBar" qstatusbar.html#~QStatusBar
+"QSqlResult" ntqsqlresult.html
+"QSqlResult::at" ntqsqlresult.html#at
+"QSqlResult::data" ntqsqlresult.html#data
+"QSqlResult::driver" ntqsqlresult.html#driver
+"QSqlResult::fetch" ntqsqlresult.html#fetch
+"QSqlResult::fetchFirst" ntqsqlresult.html#fetchFirst
+"QSqlResult::fetchLast" ntqsqlresult.html#fetchLast
+"QSqlResult::fetchNext" ntqsqlresult.html#fetchNext
+"QSqlResult::fetchPrev" ntqsqlresult.html#fetchPrev
+"QSqlResult::isActive" ntqsqlresult.html#isActive
+"QSqlResult::isForwardOnly" ntqsqlresult.html#isForwardOnly
+"QSqlResult::isNull" ntqsqlresult.html#isNull
+"QSqlResult::isSelect" ntqsqlresult.html#isSelect
+"QSqlResult::isValid" ntqsqlresult.html#isValid
+"QSqlResult::lastError" ntqsqlresult.html#lastError
+"QSqlResult::lastQuery" ntqsqlresult.html#lastQuery
+"QSqlResult::numRowsAffected" ntqsqlresult.html#numRowsAffected
+"QSqlResult::reset" ntqsqlresult.html#reset
+"QSqlResult::setActive" ntqsqlresult.html#setActive
+"QSqlResult::setAt" ntqsqlresult.html#setAt
+"QSqlResult::setForwardOnly" ntqsqlresult.html#setForwardOnly
+"QSqlResult::setLastError" ntqsqlresult.html#setLastError
+"QSqlResult::setQuery" ntqsqlresult.html#setQuery
+"QSqlResult::setSelect" ntqsqlresult.html#setSelect
+"QSqlResult::size" ntqsqlresult.html#size
+"QSqlResult::~QSqlResult" ntqsqlresult.html#~QSqlResult
+"QSqlSelectCursor" ntqsqlselectcursor.html
+"QSqlSelectCursor::~QSqlSelectCursor" ntqsqlselectcursor.html#~QSqlSelectCursor
+"QStack Class Reference (obsolete)" ntqstack.html
+"QStatusBar" ntqstatusbar.html
+"QStatusBar::addWidget" ntqstatusbar.html#addWidget
+"QStatusBar::clear" ntqstatusbar.html#clear
+"QStatusBar::hideOrShow" ntqstatusbar.html#hideOrShow
+"QStatusBar::isSizeGripEnabled" ntqstatusbar.html#isSizeGripEnabled
+"QStatusBar::message" ntqstatusbar.html#message
+"QStatusBar::messageChanged" ntqstatusbar.html#messageChanged
+"QStatusBar::paintEvent" ntqstatusbar.html#paintEvent
+"QStatusBar::reformat" ntqstatusbar.html#reformat
+"QStatusBar::removeWidget" ntqstatusbar.html#removeWidget
+"QStatusBar::setSizeGripEnabled" ntqstatusbar.html#setSizeGripEnabled
+"QStatusBar::sizeGripEnabled" ntqstatusbar.html#sizeGripEnabled-prop
+"QStatusBar::~QStatusBar" ntqstatusbar.html#~QStatusBar
 "QStoredDrag" qstoreddrag.html
 "QStoredDrag::encodedData" qstoreddrag.html#encodedData
 "QStoredDrag::setEncodedData" qstoreddrag.html#setEncodedData
 "QStoredDrag::~QStoredDrag" qstoreddrag.html#~QStoredDrag
 "QStrIList" qstrilist.html
 "QStrIList::~QStrIList" qstrilist.html#~QStrIList
-"QStrList" qstrlist.html
-"QStrList::operator=" qstrlist.html#operator-eq
-"QStrList::~QStrList" qstrlist.html#~QStrList
+"QStrList" ntqstrlist.html
+"QStrList::operator=" ntqstrlist.html#operator-eq
+"QStrList::~QStrList" ntqstrlist.html#~QStrList
 "QStrListIterator" qstrlistiterator.html
-"QString" qstring.html
-"QString::SectionFlags" qstring.html#SectionFlags
-"QString::append" qstring.html#append
-"QString::arg" qstring.html#arg
-"QString::ascii" qstring.html#ascii
-"QString::at" qstring.html#at
-"QString::capacity" qstring.html#capacity
-"QString::compare" qstring.html#compare
-"QString::compose" qstring.html#compose
-"QString::constref" qstring.html#constref
-"QString::contains" qstring.html#contains
-"QString::detach" qstring.html#detach
-"QString::endsWith" qstring.html#endsWith
-"QString::fill" qstring.html#fill
-"QString::find" qstring.html#find
-"QString::findRev" qstring.html#findRev
-"QString::fromAscii" qstring.html#fromAscii
-"QString::fromLatin1" qstring.html#fromLatin1
-"QString::fromLocal8Bit" qstring.html#fromLocal8Bit
-"QString::fromUcs2" qstring.html#fromUcs2
-"QString::fromUtf8" qstring.html#fromUtf8
-"QString::insert" qstring.html#insert
-"QString::isEmpty" qstring.html#isEmpty
-"QString::isNull" qstring.html#isNull
-"QString::latin1" qstring.html#latin1
-"QString::latin1ToUnicode" qstring.html#latin1ToUnicode
-"QString::left" qstring.html#left
-"QString::leftJustify" qstring.html#leftJustify
-"QString::length" qstring.html#length
-"QString::local8Bit" qstring.html#local8Bit
-"QString::localeAwareCompare" qstring.html#localeAwareCompare
-"QString::lower" qstring.html#lower
-"QString::mid" qstring.html#mid
-"QString::number" qstring.html#number
-"QString::operator const char *" qstring.html#operator-const-char-*
-"QString::operator std::string" qstring.html#operator-std::string
-"QString::operator!" qstring.html#operator!
-"QString::operator+=" qstring.html#operator+-eq
-"QString::operator=" qstring.html#operator-eq
-"QString::operator[]" qstring.html#operator[]
-"QString::prepend" qstring.html#prepend
-"QString::real_detach" qstring.html#real_detach
-"QString::ref" qstring.html#ref
-"QString::remove" qstring.html#remove
-"QString::replace" qstring.html#replace
-"QString::reserve" qstring.html#reserve
-"QString::right" qstring.html#right
-"QString::rightJustify" qstring.html#rightJustify
-"QString::section" qstring.html#section
-"QString::setAscii" qstring.html#setAscii
-"QString::setLatin1" qstring.html#setLatin1
-"QString::setLength" qstring.html#setLength
-"QString::setNum" qstring.html#setNum
-"QString::setUnicode" qstring.html#setUnicode
-"QString::setUnicodeCodes" qstring.html#setUnicodeCodes
-"QString::simplifyWhiteSpace" qstring.html#simplifyWhiteSpace
-"QString::sprintf" qstring.html#sprintf
-"QString::squeeze" qstring.html#squeeze
-"QString::startsWith" qstring.html#startsWith
-"QString::stripWhiteSpace" qstring.html#stripWhiteSpace
-"QString::toDouble" qstring.html#toDouble
-"QString::toFloat" qstring.html#toFloat
-"QString::toInt" qstring.html#toInt
-"QString::toLong" qstring.html#toLong
-"QString::toLongLong" qstring.html#toLongLong
-"QString::toShort" qstring.html#toShort
-"QString::toUInt" qstring.html#toUInt
-"QString::toULong" qstring.html#toULong
-"QString::toULongLong" qstring.html#toULongLong
-"QString::toUShort" qstring.html#toUShort
-"QString::truncate" qstring.html#truncate
-"QString::ucs2" qstring.html#ucs2
-"QString::unicode" qstring.html#unicode
-"QString::unicodeToLatin1" qstring.html#unicodeToLatin1
-"QString::upper" qstring.html#upper
-"QString::utf8" qstring.html#utf8
-"QString::~QString" qstring.html#~QString
-"QStringList" qstringlist.html
-"QStringList::fromStrList" qstringlist.html#fromStrList
-"QStringList::grep" qstringlist.html#grep
-"QStringList::gres" qstringlist.html#gres
-"QStringList::join" qstringlist.html#join
-"QStringList::sort" qstringlist.html#sort
-"QStringList::split" qstringlist.html#split
-"QStyle" qstyle.html
-"QStyle::ComplexControl" qstyle.html#ComplexControl
-"QStyle::ContentsType" qstyle.html#ContentsType
-"QStyle::ControlElement" qstyle.html#ControlElement
-"QStyle::PixelMetric" qstyle.html#PixelMetric
-"QStyle::PrimitiveElement" qstyle.html#PrimitiveElement
-"QStyle::StyleFlags" qstyle.html#StyleFlags
-"QStyle::StyleHint" qstyle.html#StyleHint
-"QStyle::StylePixmap" qstyle.html#StylePixmap
-"QStyle::SubControl" qstyle.html#SubControl
-"QStyle::SubRect" qstyle.html#SubRect
-"QStyle::drawComplexControl" qstyle.html#drawComplexControl
-"QStyle::drawComplexControlMask" qstyle.html#drawComplexControlMask
-"QStyle::drawControl" qstyle.html#drawControl
-"QStyle::drawControlMask" qstyle.html#drawControlMask
-"QStyle::drawItem" qstyle.html#drawItem
-"QStyle::drawPrimitive" qstyle.html#drawPrimitive
-"QStyle::itemRect" qstyle.html#itemRect
-"QStyle::pixelMetric" qstyle.html#pixelMetric
-"QStyle::polish" qstyle.html#polish
-"QStyle::polishPopupMenu" qstyle.html#polishPopupMenu
-"QStyle::querySubControl" qstyle.html#querySubControl
-"QStyle::querySubControlMetrics" qstyle.html#querySubControlMetrics
-"QStyle::sizeFromContents" qstyle.html#sizeFromContents
-"QStyle::styleHint" qstyle.html#styleHint
-"QStyle::stylePixmap" qstyle.html#stylePixmap
-"QStyle::subRect" qstyle.html#subRect
-"QStyle::unPolish" qstyle.html#unPolish
-"QStyle::visualRect" qstyle.html#visualRect
-"QStyle::~QStyle" qstyle.html#~QStyle
-"QStyleFactory" qstylefactory.html
-"QStyleFactory::create" qstylefactory.html#create
-"QStyleFactory::keys" qstylefactory.html#keys
+"QString" ntqstring.html
+"QString::SectionFlags" ntqstring.html#SectionFlags
+"QString::append" ntqstring.html#append
+"QString::arg" ntqstring.html#arg
+"QString::ascii" ntqstring.html#ascii
+"QString::at" ntqstring.html#at
+"QString::capacity" ntqstring.html#capacity
+"QString::compare" ntqstring.html#compare
+"QString::compose" ntqstring.html#compose
+"QString::constref" ntqstring.html#constref
+"QString::contains" ntqstring.html#contains
+"QString::detach" ntqstring.html#detach
+"QString::endsWith" ntqstring.html#endsWith
+"QString::fill" ntqstring.html#fill
+"QString::find" ntqstring.html#find
+"QString::findRev" ntqstring.html#findRev
+"QString::fromAscii" ntqstring.html#fromAscii
+"QString::fromLatin1" ntqstring.html#fromLatin1
+"QString::fromLocal8Bit" ntqstring.html#fromLocal8Bit
+"QString::fromUcs2" ntqstring.html#fromUcs2
+"QString::fromUtf8" ntqstring.html#fromUtf8
+"QString::insert" ntqstring.html#insert
+"QString::isEmpty" ntqstring.html#isEmpty
+"QString::isNull" ntqstring.html#isNull
+"QString::latin1" ntqstring.html#latin1
+"QString::latin1ToUnicode" ntqstring.html#latin1ToUnicode
+"QString::left" ntqstring.html#left
+"QString::leftJustify" ntqstring.html#leftJustify
+"QString::length" ntqstring.html#length
+"QString::local8Bit" ntqstring.html#local8Bit
+"QString::localeAwareCompare" ntqstring.html#localeAwareCompare
+"QString::lower" ntqstring.html#lower
+"QString::mid" ntqstring.html#mid
+"QString::number" ntqstring.html#number
+"QString::operator const char *" ntqstring.html#operator-const-char-*
+"QString::operator std::string" ntqstring.html#operator-std::string
+"QString::operator!" ntqstring.html#operator!
+"QString::operator+=" ntqstring.html#operator+-eq
+"QString::operator=" ntqstring.html#operator-eq
+"QString::operator[]" ntqstring.html#operator[]
+"QString::prepend" ntqstring.html#prepend
+"QString::real_detach" ntqstring.html#real_detach
+"QString::ref" ntqstring.html#ref
+"QString::remove" ntqstring.html#remove
+"QString::replace" ntqstring.html#replace
+"QString::reserve" ntqstring.html#reserve
+"QString::right" ntqstring.html#right
+"QString::rightJustify" ntqstring.html#rightJustify
+"QString::section" ntqstring.html#section
+"QString::setAscii" ntqstring.html#setAscii
+"QString::setLatin1" ntqstring.html#setLatin1
+"QString::setLength" ntqstring.html#setLength
+"QString::setNum" ntqstring.html#setNum
+"QString::setUnicode" ntqstring.html#setUnicode
+"QString::setUnicodeCodes" ntqstring.html#setUnicodeCodes
+"QString::simplifyWhiteSpace" ntqstring.html#simplifyWhiteSpace
+"QString::sprintf" ntqstring.html#sprintf
+"QString::squeeze" ntqstring.html#squeeze
+"QString::startsWith" ntqstring.html#startsWith
+"QString::stripWhiteSpace" ntqstring.html#stripWhiteSpace
+"QString::toDouble" ntqstring.html#toDouble
+"QString::toFloat" ntqstring.html#toFloat
+"QString::toInt" ntqstring.html#toInt
+"QString::toLong" ntqstring.html#toLong
+"QString::toLongLong" ntqstring.html#toLongLong
+"QString::toShort" ntqstring.html#toShort
+"QString::toUInt" ntqstring.html#toUInt
+"QString::toULong" ntqstring.html#toULong
+"QString::toULongLong" ntqstring.html#toULongLong
+"QString::toUShort" ntqstring.html#toUShort
+"QString::truncate" ntqstring.html#truncate
+"QString::ucs2" ntqstring.html#ucs2
+"QString::unicode" ntqstring.html#unicode
+"QString::unicodeToLatin1" ntqstring.html#unicodeToLatin1
+"QString::upper" ntqstring.html#upper
+"QString::utf8" ntqstring.html#utf8
+"QString::~QString" ntqstring.html#~QString
+"QStringList" ntqstringlist.html
+"QStringList::fromStrList" ntqstringlist.html#fromStrList
+"QStringList::grep" ntqstringlist.html#grep
+"QStringList::gres" ntqstringlist.html#gres
+"QStringList::join" ntqstringlist.html#join
+"QStringList::sort" ntqstringlist.html#sort
+"QStringList::split" ntqstringlist.html#split
+"QStyle" ntqstyle.html
+"QStyle::ComplexControl" ntqstyle.html#ComplexControl
+"QStyle::ContentsType" ntqstyle.html#ContentsType
+"QStyle::ControlElement" ntqstyle.html#ControlElement
+"QStyle::PixelMetric" ntqstyle.html#PixelMetric
+"QStyle::PrimitiveElement" ntqstyle.html#PrimitiveElement
+"QStyle::StyleFlags" ntqstyle.html#StyleFlags
+"QStyle::StyleHint" ntqstyle.html#StyleHint
+"QStyle::StylePixmap" ntqstyle.html#StylePixmap
+"QStyle::SubControl" ntqstyle.html#SubControl
+"QStyle::SubRect" ntqstyle.html#SubRect
+"QStyle::drawComplexControl" ntqstyle.html#drawComplexControl
+"QStyle::drawComplexControlMask" ntqstyle.html#drawComplexControlMask
+"QStyle::drawControl" ntqstyle.html#drawControl
+"QStyle::drawControlMask" ntqstyle.html#drawControlMask
+"QStyle::drawItem" ntqstyle.html#drawItem
+"QStyle::drawPrimitive" ntqstyle.html#drawPrimitive
+"QStyle::itemRect" ntqstyle.html#itemRect
+"QStyle::pixelMetric" ntqstyle.html#pixelMetric
+"QStyle::polish" ntqstyle.html#polish
+"QStyle::polishPopupMenu" ntqstyle.html#polishPopupMenu
+"QStyle::querySubControl" ntqstyle.html#querySubControl
+"QStyle::querySubControlMetrics" ntqstyle.html#querySubControlMetrics
+"QStyle::sizeFromContents" ntqstyle.html#sizeFromContents
+"QStyle::styleHint" ntqstyle.html#styleHint
+"QStyle::stylePixmap" ntqstyle.html#stylePixmap
+"QStyle::subRect" ntqstyle.html#subRect
+"QStyle::unPolish" ntqstyle.html#unPolish
+"QStyle::visualRect" ntqstyle.html#visualRect
+"QStyle::~QStyle" ntqstyle.html#~QStyle
+"QStyleFactory" ntqstylefactory.html
+"QStyleFactory::create" ntqstylefactory.html#create
+"QStyleFactory::keys" ntqstylefactory.html#keys
 "QStyleOption" qstyleoption.html
 "QStyleOption::StyleOptionDefault" qstyleoption.html#StyleOptionDefault
 "QStyleOption::arrowType" qstyleoption.html#arrowType
@@ -6266,21 +6266,21 @@
 "QStyleOption::tab" qstyleoption.html#tab
 "QStyleOption::tabWidth" qstyleoption.html#tabWidth
 "QStyleOption::widget" qstyleoption.html#widget
-"QStylePlugin" qstyleplugin.html
-"QStylePlugin::create" qstyleplugin.html#create
-"QStylePlugin::keys" qstyleplugin.html#keys
-"QStylePlugin::~QStylePlugin" qstyleplugin.html#~QStylePlugin
-"QStyleSheet" qstylesheet.html
-"QStyleSheet::convertFromPlainText" qstylesheet.html#convertFromPlainText
-"QStyleSheet::defaultSheet" qstylesheet.html#defaultSheet
-"QStyleSheet::error" qstylesheet.html#error
-"QStyleSheet::escape" qstylesheet.html#escape
-"QStyleSheet::item" qstylesheet.html#item
-"QStyleSheet::mightBeRichText" qstylesheet.html#mightBeRichText
-"QStyleSheet::scaleFont" qstylesheet.html#scaleFont
-"QStyleSheet::setDefaultSheet" qstylesheet.html#setDefaultSheet
-"QStyleSheet::tag" qstylesheet.html#tag
-"QStyleSheet::~QStyleSheet" qstylesheet.html#~QStyleSheet
+"QStylePlugin" ntqstyleplugin.html
+"QStylePlugin::create" ntqstyleplugin.html#create
+"QStylePlugin::keys" ntqstyleplugin.html#keys
+"QStylePlugin::~QStylePlugin" ntqstyleplugin.html#~QStylePlugin
+"QStyleSheet" ntqstylesheet.html
+"QStyleSheet::convertFromPlainText" ntqstylesheet.html#convertFromPlainText
+"QStyleSheet::defaultSheet" ntqstylesheet.html#defaultSheet
+"QStyleSheet::error" ntqstylesheet.html#error
+"QStyleSheet::escape" ntqstylesheet.html#escape
+"QStyleSheet::item" ntqstylesheet.html#item
+"QStyleSheet::mightBeRichText" ntqstylesheet.html#mightBeRichText
+"QStyleSheet::scaleFont" ntqstylesheet.html#scaleFont
+"QStyleSheet::setDefaultSheet" ntqstylesheet.html#setDefaultSheet
+"QStyleSheet::tag" ntqstylesheet.html#tag
+"QStyleSheet::~QStyleSheet" ntqstylesheet.html#~QStyleSheet
 "QStyleSheetItem" qstylesheetitem.html
 "QStyleSheetItem::DisplayMode" qstylesheetitem.html#DisplayMode
 "QStyleSheetItem::ListStyle" qstylesheetitem.html#ListStyle
@@ -6339,13 +6339,13 @@
 "QSvgDevice::setBoundingRect" qsvgdevice.html#setBoundingRect
 "QSvgDevice::toString" qsvgdevice.html#toString
 "QSvgDevice::~QSvgDevice" qsvgdevice.html#~QSvgDevice
-"QSyntaxHighlighter" qsyntaxhighlighter.html
-"QSyntaxHighlighter::currentParagraph" qsyntaxhighlighter.html#currentParagraph
-"QSyntaxHighlighter::highlightParagraph" qsyntaxhighlighter.html#highlightParagraph
-"QSyntaxHighlighter::rehighlight" qsyntaxhighlighter.html#rehighlight
-"QSyntaxHighlighter::setFormat" qsyntaxhighlighter.html#setFormat
-"QSyntaxHighlighter::textEdit" qsyntaxhighlighter.html#textEdit
-"QSyntaxHighlighter::~QSyntaxHighlighter" qsyntaxhighlighter.html#~QSyntaxHighlighter
+"QSyntaxHighlighter" ntqsyntaxhighlighter.html
+"QSyntaxHighlighter::currentParagraph" ntqsyntaxhighlighter.html#currentParagraph
+"QSyntaxHighlighter::highlightParagraph" ntqsyntaxhighlighter.html#highlightParagraph
+"QSyntaxHighlighter::rehighlight" ntqsyntaxhighlighter.html#rehighlight
+"QSyntaxHighlighter::setFormat" ntqsyntaxhighlighter.html#setFormat
+"QSyntaxHighlighter::textEdit" ntqsyntaxhighlighter.html#textEdit
+"QSyntaxHighlighter::~QSyntaxHighlighter" ntqsyntaxhighlighter.html#~QSyntaxHighlighter
 "QTSManip::exec" qtsmanip.html#exec
 "QTab" qtab.html
 "QTab::iconSet" qtab.html#iconSet
@@ -6359,259 +6359,259 @@
 "QTab::setText" qtab.html#setText
 "QTab::text" qtab.html#text
 "QTab::~QTab" qtab.html#~QTab
-"QTabBar" qtabbar.html
-"QTabBar::Shape" qtabbar.html#Shape
-"QTabBar::addTab" qtabbar.html#addTab
-"QTabBar::count" qtabbar.html#count
-"QTabBar::count" qtabbar.html#count-prop
-"QTabBar::currentTab" qtabbar.html#currentTab
-"QTabBar::currentTab" qtabbar.html#currentTab-prop
-"QTabBar::indexOf" qtabbar.html#indexOf
-"QTabBar::insertTab" qtabbar.html#insertTab
-"QTabBar::isTabEnabled" qtabbar.html#isTabEnabled
-"QTabBar::keyboardFocusTab" qtabbar.html#keyboardFocusTab
-"QTabBar::keyboardFocusTab" qtabbar.html#keyboardFocusTab-prop
-"QTabBar::layoutChanged" qtabbar.html#layoutChanged
-"QTabBar::layoutTabs" qtabbar.html#layoutTabs
-"QTabBar::paint" qtabbar.html#paint
-"QTabBar::paintEvent" qtabbar.html#paintEvent
-"QTabBar::paintLabel" qtabbar.html#paintLabel
-"QTabBar::removeTab" qtabbar.html#removeTab
-"QTabBar::removeToolTip" qtabbar.html#removeToolTip
-"QTabBar::selectTab" qtabbar.html#selectTab
-"QTabBar::selected" qtabbar.html#selected
-"QTabBar::setCurrentTab" qtabbar.html#setCurrentTab
-"QTabBar::setShape" qtabbar.html#setShape
-"QTabBar::setTabEnabled" qtabbar.html#setTabEnabled
-"QTabBar::setToolTip" qtabbar.html#setToolTip
-"QTabBar::shape" qtabbar.html#shape
-"QTabBar::shape" qtabbar.html#shape-prop
-"QTabBar::tab" qtabbar.html#tab
-"QTabBar::tabAt" qtabbar.html#tabAt
-"QTabBar::tabList" qtabbar.html#tabList
-"QTabBar::toolTip" qtabbar.html#toolTip
-"QTabBar::~QTabBar" qtabbar.html#~QTabBar
-"QTabDialog" qtabdialog.html
-"QTabDialog::aboutToShow" qtabdialog.html#aboutToShow
-"QTabDialog::addTab" qtabdialog.html#addTab
-"QTabDialog::applyButtonPressed" qtabdialog.html#applyButtonPressed
-"QTabDialog::cancelButtonPressed" qtabdialog.html#cancelButtonPressed
-"QTabDialog::changeTab" qtabdialog.html#changeTab
-"QTabDialog::currentChanged" qtabdialog.html#currentChanged
-"QTabDialog::currentPage" qtabdialog.html#currentPage
-"QTabDialog::defaultButtonPressed" qtabdialog.html#defaultButtonPressed
-"QTabDialog::hasApplyButton" qtabdialog.html#hasApplyButton
-"QTabDialog::hasCancelButton" qtabdialog.html#hasCancelButton
-"QTabDialog::hasDefaultButton" qtabdialog.html#hasDefaultButton
-"QTabDialog::hasHelpButton" qtabdialog.html#hasHelpButton
-"QTabDialog::hasOkButton" qtabdialog.html#hasOkButton
-"QTabDialog::helpButtonPressed" qtabdialog.html#helpButtonPressed
-"QTabDialog::insertTab" qtabdialog.html#insertTab
-"QTabDialog::isTabEnabled" qtabdialog.html#isTabEnabled
-"QTabDialog::removePage" qtabdialog.html#removePage
-"QTabDialog::setApplyButton" qtabdialog.html#setApplyButton
-"QTabDialog::setCancelButton" qtabdialog.html#setCancelButton
-"QTabDialog::setDefaultButton" qtabdialog.html#setDefaultButton
-"QTabDialog::setFont" qtabdialog.html#setFont
-"QTabDialog::setHelpButton" qtabdialog.html#setHelpButton
-"QTabDialog::setOkButton" qtabdialog.html#setOkButton
-"QTabDialog::setSizes" qtabdialog.html#setSizes
-"QTabDialog::setTabBar" qtabdialog.html#setTabBar
-"QTabDialog::setTabEnabled" qtabdialog.html#setTabEnabled
-"QTabDialog::setUpLayout" qtabdialog.html#setUpLayout
-"QTabDialog::showPage" qtabdialog.html#showPage
-"QTabDialog::showTab" qtabdialog.html#showTab
-"QTabDialog::tabBar" qtabdialog.html#tabBar
-"QTabDialog::tabLabel" qtabdialog.html#tabLabel
-"QTabDialog::~QTabDialog" qtabdialog.html#~QTabDialog
-"QTabWidget" qtabwidget.html
-"QTabWidget::TabPosition" qtabwidget.html#TabPosition
-"QTabWidget::TabShape" qtabwidget.html#TabShape
-"QTabWidget::addTab" qtabwidget.html#addTab
-"QTabWidget::autoMask" qtabwidget.html#autoMask-prop
-"QTabWidget::changeTab" qtabwidget.html#changeTab
-"QTabWidget::cornerWidget" qtabwidget.html#cornerWidget
-"QTabWidget::count" qtabwidget.html#count
-"QTabWidget::count" qtabwidget.html#count-prop
-"QTabWidget::currentChanged" qtabwidget.html#currentChanged
-"QTabWidget::currentPage" qtabwidget.html#currentPage
-"QTabWidget::currentPage" qtabwidget.html#currentPage-prop
-"QTabWidget::currentPageIndex" qtabwidget.html#currentPageIndex
-"QTabWidget::indexOf" qtabwidget.html#indexOf
-"QTabWidget::insertTab" qtabwidget.html#insertTab
-"QTabWidget::isTabEnabled" qtabwidget.html#isTabEnabled
-"QTabWidget::label" qtabwidget.html#label
-"QTabWidget::margin" qtabwidget.html#margin
-"QTabWidget::margin" qtabwidget.html#margin-prop
-"QTabWidget::page" qtabwidget.html#page
-"QTabWidget::removePage" qtabwidget.html#removePage
-"QTabWidget::removeTabToolTip" qtabwidget.html#removeTabToolTip
-"QTabWidget::setCornerWidget" qtabwidget.html#setCornerWidget
-"QTabWidget::setCurrentPage" qtabwidget.html#setCurrentPage
-"QTabWidget::setMargin" qtabwidget.html#setMargin
-"QTabWidget::setTabBar" qtabwidget.html#setTabBar
-"QTabWidget::setTabEnabled" qtabwidget.html#setTabEnabled
-"QTabWidget::setTabIconSet" qtabwidget.html#setTabIconSet
-"QTabWidget::setTabLabel" qtabwidget.html#setTabLabel
-"QTabWidget::setTabPosition" qtabwidget.html#setTabPosition
-"QTabWidget::setTabShape" qtabwidget.html#setTabShape
-"QTabWidget::setTabToolTip" qtabwidget.html#setTabToolTip
-"QTabWidget::showPage" qtabwidget.html#showPage
-"QTabWidget::showTab" qtabwidget.html#showTab
-"QTabWidget::tabBar" qtabwidget.html#tabBar
-"QTabWidget::tabIconSet" qtabwidget.html#tabIconSet
-"QTabWidget::tabLabel" qtabwidget.html#tabLabel
-"QTabWidget::tabPosition" qtabwidget.html#tabPosition
-"QTabWidget::tabPosition" qtabwidget.html#tabPosition-prop
-"QTabWidget::tabShape" qtabwidget.html#tabShape
-"QTabWidget::tabShape" qtabwidget.html#tabShape-prop
-"QTabWidget::tabToolTip" qtabwidget.html#tabToolTip
-"QTable" qtable.html
-"QTable::EditMode" qtable.html#EditMode
-"QTable::FocusStyle" qtable.html#FocusStyle
-"QTable::SelectionMode" qtable.html#SelectionMode
-"QTable::activateNextCell" qtable.html#activateNextCell
-"QTable::addSelection" qtable.html#addSelection
-"QTable::adjustColumn" qtable.html#adjustColumn
-"QTable::adjustRow" qtable.html#adjustRow
-"QTable::beginEdit" qtable.html#beginEdit
-"QTable::cellGeometry" qtable.html#cellGeometry
-"QTable::cellRect" qtable.html#cellRect
-"QTable::cellWidget" qtable.html#cellWidget
-"QTable::clearCell" qtable.html#clearCell
-"QTable::clearCellWidget" qtable.html#clearCellWidget
-"QTable::clearSelection" qtable.html#clearSelection
-"QTable::clicked" qtable.html#clicked
-"QTable::columnAt" qtable.html#columnAt
-"QTable::columnClicked" qtable.html#columnClicked
-"QTable::columnIndexChanged" qtable.html#columnIndexChanged
-"QTable::columnMovingEnabled" qtable.html#columnMovingEnabled
-"QTable::columnMovingEnabled" qtable.html#columnMovingEnabled-prop
-"QTable::columnPos" qtable.html#columnPos
-"QTable::columnWidth" qtable.html#columnWidth
-"QTable::columnWidthChanged" qtable.html#columnWidthChanged
-"QTable::contentsDragEnterEvent" qtable.html#contentsDragEnterEvent
-"QTable::contentsDragLeaveEvent" qtable.html#contentsDragLeaveEvent
-"QTable::contentsDragMoveEvent" qtable.html#contentsDragMoveEvent
-"QTable::contentsDropEvent" qtable.html#contentsDropEvent
-"QTable::contextMenuRequested" qtable.html#contextMenuRequested
-"QTable::createEditor" qtable.html#createEditor
-"QTable::currEditCol" qtable.html#currEditCol
-"QTable::currEditRow" qtable.html#currEditRow
-"QTable::currentChanged" qtable.html#currentChanged
-"QTable::currentColumn" qtable.html#currentColumn
-"QTable::currentRow" qtable.html#currentRow
-"QTable::currentSelection" qtable.html#currentSelection
-"QTable::doubleClicked" qtable.html#doubleClicked
-"QTable::dragEnabled" qtable.html#dragEnabled
-"QTable::dragObject" qtable.html#dragObject
-"QTable::drawContents" qtable.html#drawContents
-"QTable::dropped" qtable.html#dropped
-"QTable::editCell" qtable.html#editCell
-"QTable::editMode" qtable.html#editMode
-"QTable::endEdit" qtable.html#endEdit
-"QTable::ensureCellVisible" qtable.html#ensureCellVisible
-"QTable::focusStyle" qtable.html#focusStyle
-"QTable::focusStyle" qtable.html#focusStyle-prop
-"QTable::hideColumn" qtable.html#hideColumn
-"QTable::hideRow" qtable.html#hideRow
-"QTable::horizontalHeader" qtable.html#horizontalHeader
-"QTable::indexOf" qtable.html#indexOf
-"QTable::insertColumns" qtable.html#insertColumns
-"QTable::insertRows" qtable.html#insertRows
-"QTable::insertWidget" qtable.html#insertWidget
-"QTable::isColumnHidden" qtable.html#isColumnHidden
-"QTable::isColumnReadOnly" qtable.html#isColumnReadOnly
-"QTable::isColumnSelected" qtable.html#isColumnSelected
-"QTable::isColumnStretchable" qtable.html#isColumnStretchable
-"QTable::isEditing" qtable.html#isEditing
-"QTable::isReadOnly" qtable.html#isReadOnly
-"QTable::isRowHidden" qtable.html#isRowHidden
-"QTable::isRowReadOnly" qtable.html#isRowReadOnly
-"QTable::isRowSelected" qtable.html#isRowSelected
-"QTable::isRowStretchable" qtable.html#isRowStretchable
-"QTable::isSelected" qtable.html#isSelected
-"QTable::item" qtable.html#item
-"QTable::numCols" qtable.html#numCols
-"QTable::numCols" qtable.html#numCols-prop
-"QTable::numRows" qtable.html#numRows
-"QTable::numRows" qtable.html#numRows-prop
-"QTable::numSelections" qtable.html#numSelections
-"QTable::numSelections" qtable.html#numSelections-prop
-"QTable::paintCell" qtable.html#paintCell
-"QTable::paintEmptyArea" qtable.html#paintEmptyArea
-"QTable::paintFocus" qtable.html#paintFocus
-"QTable::pixmap" qtable.html#pixmap
-"QTable::pressed" qtable.html#pressed
-"QTable::readOnly" qtable.html#readOnly-prop
-"QTable::removeColumn" qtable.html#removeColumn
-"QTable::removeColumns" qtable.html#removeColumns
-"QTable::removeRow" qtable.html#removeRow
-"QTable::removeRows" qtable.html#removeRows
-"QTable::removeSelection" qtable.html#removeSelection
-"QTable::repaintSelections" qtable.html#repaintSelections
-"QTable::resizeData" qtable.html#resizeData
-"QTable::rowAt" qtable.html#rowAt
-"QTable::rowHeight" qtable.html#rowHeight
-"QTable::rowHeightChanged" qtable.html#rowHeightChanged
-"QTable::rowIndexChanged" qtable.html#rowIndexChanged
-"QTable::rowMovingEnabled" qtable.html#rowMovingEnabled
-"QTable::rowMovingEnabled" qtable.html#rowMovingEnabled-prop
-"QTable::rowPos" qtable.html#rowPos
-"QTable::selectCells" qtable.html#selectCells
-"QTable::selectColumn" qtable.html#selectColumn
-"QTable::selectRow" qtable.html#selectRow
-"QTable::selection" qtable.html#selection
-"QTable::selectionChanged" qtable.html#selectionChanged
-"QTable::selectionMode" qtable.html#selectionMode
-"QTable::selectionMode" qtable.html#selectionMode-prop
-"QTable::setCellContentFromEditor" qtable.html#setCellContentFromEditor
-"QTable::setCellWidget" qtable.html#setCellWidget
-"QTable::setColumnLabels" qtable.html#setColumnLabels
-"QTable::setColumnMovingEnabled" qtable.html#setColumnMovingEnabled
-"QTable::setColumnReadOnly" qtable.html#setColumnReadOnly
-"QTable::setColumnStretchable" qtable.html#setColumnStretchable
-"QTable::setColumnWidth" qtable.html#setColumnWidth
-"QTable::setCurrentCell" qtable.html#setCurrentCell
-"QTable::setDragEnabled" qtable.html#setDragEnabled
-"QTable::setEditMode" qtable.html#setEditMode
-"QTable::setFocusStyle" qtable.html#setFocusStyle
-"QTable::setItem" qtable.html#setItem
-"QTable::setLeftMargin" qtable.html#setLeftMargin
-"QTable::setNumCols" qtable.html#setNumCols
-"QTable::setNumRows" qtable.html#setNumRows
-"QTable::setPixmap" qtable.html#setPixmap
-"QTable::setReadOnly" qtable.html#setReadOnly
-"QTable::setRowHeight" qtable.html#setRowHeight
-"QTable::setRowLabels" qtable.html#setRowLabels
-"QTable::setRowMovingEnabled" qtable.html#setRowMovingEnabled
-"QTable::setRowReadOnly" qtable.html#setRowReadOnly
-"QTable::setRowStretchable" qtable.html#setRowStretchable
-"QTable::setSelectionMode" qtable.html#setSelectionMode
-"QTable::setShowGrid" qtable.html#setShowGrid
-"QTable::setSorting" qtable.html#setSorting
-"QTable::setText" qtable.html#setText
-"QTable::setTopMargin" qtable.html#setTopMargin
-"QTable::showColumn" qtable.html#showColumn
-"QTable::showGrid" qtable.html#showGrid
-"QTable::showGrid" qtable.html#showGrid-prop
-"QTable::showRow" qtable.html#showRow
-"QTable::sortColumn" qtable.html#sortColumn
-"QTable::sorting" qtable.html#sorting
-"QTable::sorting" qtable.html#sorting-prop
-"QTable::startDrag" qtable.html#startDrag
-"QTable::swapCells" qtable.html#swapCells
-"QTable::swapColumns" qtable.html#swapColumns
-"QTable::swapRows" qtable.html#swapRows
-"QTable::tableSize" qtable.html#tableSize
-"QTable::takeItem" qtable.html#takeItem
-"QTable::text" qtable.html#text
-"QTable::updateCell" qtable.html#updateCell
-"QTable::updateGeometries" qtable.html#updateGeometries
-"QTable::updateHeaderStates" qtable.html#updateHeaderStates
-"QTable::valueChanged" qtable.html#valueChanged
-"QTable::verticalHeader" qtable.html#verticalHeader
-"QTable::~QTable" qtable.html#~QTable
+"QTabBar" ntqtabbar.html
+"QTabBar::Shape" ntqtabbar.html#Shape
+"QTabBar::addTab" ntqtabbar.html#addTab
+"QTabBar::count" ntqtabbar.html#count
+"QTabBar::count" ntqtabbar.html#count-prop
+"QTabBar::currentTab" ntqtabbar.html#currentTab
+"QTabBar::currentTab" ntqtabbar.html#currentTab-prop
+"QTabBar::indexOf" ntqtabbar.html#indexOf
+"QTabBar::insertTab" ntqtabbar.html#insertTab
+"QTabBar::isTabEnabled" ntqtabbar.html#isTabEnabled
+"QTabBar::keyboardFocusTab" ntqtabbar.html#keyboardFocusTab
+"QTabBar::keyboardFocusTab" ntqtabbar.html#keyboardFocusTab-prop
+"QTabBar::layoutChanged" ntqtabbar.html#layoutChanged
+"QTabBar::layoutTabs" ntqtabbar.html#layoutTabs
+"QTabBar::paint" ntqtabbar.html#paint
+"QTabBar::paintEvent" ntqtabbar.html#paintEvent
+"QTabBar::paintLabel" ntqtabbar.html#paintLabel
+"QTabBar::removeTab" ntqtabbar.html#removeTab
+"QTabBar::removeToolTip" ntqtabbar.html#removeToolTip
+"QTabBar::selectTab" ntqtabbar.html#selectTab
+"QTabBar::selected" ntqtabbar.html#selected
+"QTabBar::setCurrentTab" ntqtabbar.html#setCurrentTab
+"QTabBar::setShape" ntqtabbar.html#setShape
+"QTabBar::setTabEnabled" ntqtabbar.html#setTabEnabled
+"QTabBar::setToolTip" ntqtabbar.html#setToolTip
+"QTabBar::shape" ntqtabbar.html#shape
+"QTabBar::shape" ntqtabbar.html#shape-prop
+"QTabBar::tab" ntqtabbar.html#tab
+"QTabBar::tabAt" ntqtabbar.html#tabAt
+"QTabBar::tabList" ntqtabbar.html#tabList
+"QTabBar::toolTip" ntqtabbar.html#toolTip
+"QTabBar::~QTabBar" ntqtabbar.html#~QTabBar
+"QTabDialog" ntqtabdialog.html
+"QTabDialog::aboutToShow" ntqtabdialog.html#aboutToShow
+"QTabDialog::addTab" ntqtabdialog.html#addTab
+"QTabDialog::applyButtonPressed" ntqtabdialog.html#applyButtonPressed
+"QTabDialog::cancelButtonPressed" ntqtabdialog.html#cancelButtonPressed
+"QTabDialog::changeTab" ntqtabdialog.html#changeTab
+"QTabDialog::currentChanged" ntqtabdialog.html#currentChanged
+"QTabDialog::currentPage" ntqtabdialog.html#currentPage
+"QTabDialog::defaultButtonPressed" ntqtabdialog.html#defaultButtonPressed
+"QTabDialog::hasApplyButton" ntqtabdialog.html#hasApplyButton
+"QTabDialog::hasCancelButton" ntqtabdialog.html#hasCancelButton
+"QTabDialog::hasDefaultButton" ntqtabdialog.html#hasDefaultButton
+"QTabDialog::hasHelpButton" ntqtabdialog.html#hasHelpButton
+"QTabDialog::hasOkButton" ntqtabdialog.html#hasOkButton
+"QTabDialog::helpButtonPressed" ntqtabdialog.html#helpButtonPressed
+"QTabDialog::insertTab" ntqtabdialog.html#insertTab
+"QTabDialog::isTabEnabled" ntqtabdialog.html#isTabEnabled
+"QTabDialog::removePage" ntqtabdialog.html#removePage
+"QTabDialog::setApplyButton" ntqtabdialog.html#setApplyButton
+"QTabDialog::setCancelButton" ntqtabdialog.html#setCancelButton
+"QTabDialog::setDefaultButton" ntqtabdialog.html#setDefaultButton
+"QTabDialog::setFont" ntqtabdialog.html#setFont
+"QTabDialog::setHelpButton" ntqtabdialog.html#setHelpButton
+"QTabDialog::setOkButton" ntqtabdialog.html#setOkButton
+"QTabDialog::setSizes" ntqtabdialog.html#setSizes
+"QTabDialog::setTabBar" ntqtabdialog.html#setTabBar
+"QTabDialog::setTabEnabled" ntqtabdialog.html#setTabEnabled
+"QTabDialog::setUpLayout" ntqtabdialog.html#setUpLayout
+"QTabDialog::showPage" ntqtabdialog.html#showPage
+"QTabDialog::showTab" ntqtabdialog.html#showTab
+"QTabDialog::tabBar" ntqtabdialog.html#tabBar
+"QTabDialog::tabLabel" ntqtabdialog.html#tabLabel
+"QTabDialog::~QTabDialog" ntqtabdialog.html#~QTabDialog
+"QTabWidget" ntqtabwidget.html
+"QTabWidget::TabPosition" ntqtabwidget.html#TabPosition
+"QTabWidget::TabShape" ntqtabwidget.html#TabShape
+"QTabWidget::addTab" ntqtabwidget.html#addTab
+"QTabWidget::autoMask" ntqtabwidget.html#autoMask-prop
+"QTabWidget::changeTab" ntqtabwidget.html#changeTab
+"QTabWidget::cornerWidget" ntqtabwidget.html#cornerWidget
+"QTabWidget::count" ntqtabwidget.html#count
+"QTabWidget::count" ntqtabwidget.html#count-prop
+"QTabWidget::currentChanged" ntqtabwidget.html#currentChanged
+"QTabWidget::currentPage" ntqtabwidget.html#currentPage
+"QTabWidget::currentPage" ntqtabwidget.html#currentPage-prop
+"QTabWidget::currentPageIndex" ntqtabwidget.html#currentPageIndex
+"QTabWidget::indexOf" ntqtabwidget.html#indexOf
+"QTabWidget::insertTab" ntqtabwidget.html#insertTab
+"QTabWidget::isTabEnabled" ntqtabwidget.html#isTabEnabled
+"QTabWidget::label" ntqtabwidget.html#label
+"QTabWidget::margin" ntqtabwidget.html#margin
+"QTabWidget::margin" ntqtabwidget.html#margin-prop
+"QTabWidget::page" ntqtabwidget.html#page
+"QTabWidget::removePage" ntqtabwidget.html#removePage
+"QTabWidget::removeTabToolTip" ntqtabwidget.html#removeTabToolTip
+"QTabWidget::setCornerWidget" ntqtabwidget.html#setCornerWidget
+"QTabWidget::setCurrentPage" ntqtabwidget.html#setCurrentPage
+"QTabWidget::setMargin" ntqtabwidget.html#setMargin
+"QTabWidget::setTabBar" ntqtabwidget.html#setTabBar
+"QTabWidget::setTabEnabled" ntqtabwidget.html#setTabEnabled
+"QTabWidget::setTabIconSet" ntqtabwidget.html#setTabIconSet
+"QTabWidget::setTabLabel" ntqtabwidget.html#setTabLabel
+"QTabWidget::setTabPosition" ntqtabwidget.html#setTabPosition
+"QTabWidget::setTabShape" ntqtabwidget.html#setTabShape
+"QTabWidget::setTabToolTip" ntqtabwidget.html#setTabToolTip
+"QTabWidget::showPage" ntqtabwidget.html#showPage
+"QTabWidget::showTab" ntqtabwidget.html#showTab
+"QTabWidget::tabBar" ntqtabwidget.html#tabBar
+"QTabWidget::tabIconSet" ntqtabwidget.html#tabIconSet
+"QTabWidget::tabLabel" ntqtabwidget.html#tabLabel
+"QTabWidget::tabPosition" ntqtabwidget.html#tabPosition
+"QTabWidget::tabPosition" ntqtabwidget.html#tabPosition-prop
+"QTabWidget::tabShape" ntqtabwidget.html#tabShape
+"QTabWidget::tabShape" ntqtabwidget.html#tabShape-prop
+"QTabWidget::tabToolTip" ntqtabwidget.html#tabToolTip
+"QTable" ntqtable.html
+"QTable::EditMode" ntqtable.html#EditMode
+"QTable::FocusStyle" ntqtable.html#FocusStyle
+"QTable::SelectionMode" ntqtable.html#SelectionMode
+"QTable::activateNextCell" ntqtable.html#activateNextCell
+"QTable::addSelection" ntqtable.html#addSelection
+"QTable::adjustColumn" ntqtable.html#adjustColumn
+"QTable::adjustRow" ntqtable.html#adjustRow
+"QTable::beginEdit" ntqtable.html#beginEdit
+"QTable::cellGeometry" ntqtable.html#cellGeometry
+"QTable::cellRect" ntqtable.html#cellRect
+"QTable::cellWidget" ntqtable.html#cellWidget
+"QTable::clearCell" ntqtable.html#clearCell
+"QTable::clearCellWidget" ntqtable.html#clearCellWidget
+"QTable::clearSelection" ntqtable.html#clearSelection
+"QTable::clicked" ntqtable.html#clicked
+"QTable::columnAt" ntqtable.html#columnAt
+"QTable::columnClicked" ntqtable.html#columnClicked
+"QTable::columnIndexChanged" ntqtable.html#columnIndexChanged
+"QTable::columnMovingEnabled" ntqtable.html#columnMovingEnabled
+"QTable::columnMovingEnabled" ntqtable.html#columnMovingEnabled-prop
+"QTable::columnPos" ntqtable.html#columnPos
+"QTable::columnWidth" ntqtable.html#columnWidth
+"QTable::columnWidthChanged" ntqtable.html#columnWidthChanged
+"QTable::contentsDragEnterEvent" ntqtable.html#contentsDragEnterEvent
+"QTable::contentsDragLeaveEvent" ntqtable.html#contentsDragLeaveEvent
+"QTable::contentsDragMoveEvent" ntqtable.html#contentsDragMoveEvent
+"QTable::contentsDropEvent" ntqtable.html#contentsDropEvent
+"QTable::contextMenuRequested" ntqtable.html#contextMenuRequested
+"QTable::createEditor" ntqtable.html#createEditor
+"QTable::currEditCol" ntqtable.html#currEditCol
+"QTable::currEditRow" ntqtable.html#currEditRow
+"QTable::currentChanged" ntqtable.html#currentChanged
+"QTable::currentColumn" ntqtable.html#currentColumn
+"QTable::currentRow" ntqtable.html#currentRow
+"QTable::currentSelection" ntqtable.html#currentSelection
+"QTable::doubleClicked" ntqtable.html#doubleClicked
+"QTable::dragEnabled" ntqtable.html#dragEnabled
+"QTable::dragObject" ntqtable.html#dragObject
+"QTable::drawContents" ntqtable.html#drawContents
+"QTable::dropped" ntqtable.html#dropped
+"QTable::editCell" ntqtable.html#editCell
+"QTable::editMode" ntqtable.html#editMode
+"QTable::endEdit" ntqtable.html#endEdit
+"QTable::ensureCellVisible" ntqtable.html#ensureCellVisible
+"QTable::focusStyle" ntqtable.html#focusStyle
+"QTable::focusStyle" ntqtable.html#focusStyle-prop
+"QTable::hideColumn" ntqtable.html#hideColumn
+"QTable::hideRow" ntqtable.html#hideRow
+"QTable::horizontalHeader" ntqtable.html#horizontalHeader
+"QTable::indexOf" ntqtable.html#indexOf
+"QTable::insertColumns" ntqtable.html#insertColumns
+"QTable::insertRows" ntqtable.html#insertRows
+"QTable::insertWidget" ntqtable.html#insertWidget
+"QTable::isColumnHidden" ntqtable.html#isColumnHidden
+"QTable::isColumnReadOnly" ntqtable.html#isColumnReadOnly
+"QTable::isColumnSelected" ntqtable.html#isColumnSelected
+"QTable::isColumnStretchable" ntqtable.html#isColumnStretchable
+"QTable::isEditing" ntqtable.html#isEditing
+"QTable::isReadOnly" ntqtable.html#isReadOnly
+"QTable::isRowHidden" ntqtable.html#isRowHidden
+"QTable::isRowReadOnly" ntqtable.html#isRowReadOnly
+"QTable::isRowSelected" ntqtable.html#isRowSelected
+"QTable::isRowStretchable" ntqtable.html#isRowStretchable
+"QTable::isSelected" ntqtable.html#isSelected
+"QTable::item" ntqtable.html#item
+"QTable::numCols" ntqtable.html#numCols
+"QTable::numCols" ntqtable.html#numCols-prop
+"QTable::numRows" ntqtable.html#numRows
+"QTable::numRows" ntqtable.html#numRows-prop
+"QTable::numSelections" ntqtable.html#numSelections
+"QTable::numSelections" ntqtable.html#numSelections-prop
+"QTable::paintCell" ntqtable.html#paintCell
+"QTable::paintEmptyArea" ntqtable.html#paintEmptyArea
+"QTable::paintFocus" ntqtable.html#paintFocus
+"QTable::pixmap" ntqtable.html#pixmap
+"QTable::pressed" ntqtable.html#pressed
+"QTable::readOnly" ntqtable.html#readOnly-prop
+"QTable::removeColumn" ntqtable.html#removeColumn
+"QTable::removeColumns" ntqtable.html#removeColumns
+"QTable::removeRow" ntqtable.html#removeRow
+"QTable::removeRows" ntqtable.html#removeRows
+"QTable::removeSelection" ntqtable.html#removeSelection
+"QTable::repaintSelections" ntqtable.html#repaintSelections
+"QTable::resizeData" ntqtable.html#resizeData
+"QTable::rowAt" ntqtable.html#rowAt
+"QTable::rowHeight" ntqtable.html#rowHeight
+"QTable::rowHeightChanged" ntqtable.html#rowHeightChanged
+"QTable::rowIndexChanged" ntqtable.html#rowIndexChanged
+"QTable::rowMovingEnabled" ntqtable.html#rowMovingEnabled
+"QTable::rowMovingEnabled" ntqtable.html#rowMovingEnabled-prop
+"QTable::rowPos" ntqtable.html#rowPos
+"QTable::selectCells" ntqtable.html#selectCells
+"QTable::selectColumn" ntqtable.html#selectColumn
+"QTable::selectRow" ntqtable.html#selectRow
+"QTable::selection" ntqtable.html#selection
+"QTable::selectionChanged" ntqtable.html#selectionChanged
+"QTable::selectionMode" ntqtable.html#selectionMode
+"QTable::selectionMode" ntqtable.html#selectionMode-prop
+"QTable::setCellContentFromEditor" ntqtable.html#setCellContentFromEditor
+"QTable::setCellWidget" ntqtable.html#setCellWidget
+"QTable::setColumnLabels" ntqtable.html#setColumnLabels
+"QTable::setColumnMovingEnabled" ntqtable.html#setColumnMovingEnabled
+"QTable::setColumnReadOnly" ntqtable.html#setColumnReadOnly
+"QTable::setColumnStretchable" ntqtable.html#setColumnStretchable
+"QTable::setColumnWidth" ntqtable.html#setColumnWidth
+"QTable::setCurrentCell" ntqtable.html#setCurrentCell
+"QTable::setDragEnabled" ntqtable.html#setDragEnabled
+"QTable::setEditMode" ntqtable.html#setEditMode
+"QTable::setFocusStyle" ntqtable.html#setFocusStyle
+"QTable::setItem" ntqtable.html#setItem
+"QTable::setLeftMargin" ntqtable.html#setLeftMargin
+"QTable::setNumCols" ntqtable.html#setNumCols
+"QTable::setNumRows" ntqtable.html#setNumRows
+"QTable::setPixmap" ntqtable.html#setPixmap
+"QTable::setReadOnly" ntqtable.html#setReadOnly
+"QTable::setRowHeight" ntqtable.html#setRowHeight
+"QTable::setRowLabels" ntqtable.html#setRowLabels
+"QTable::setRowMovingEnabled" ntqtable.html#setRowMovingEnabled
+"QTable::setRowReadOnly" ntqtable.html#setRowReadOnly
+"QTable::setRowStretchable" ntqtable.html#setRowStretchable
+"QTable::setSelectionMode" ntqtable.html#setSelectionMode
+"QTable::setShowGrid" ntqtable.html#setShowGrid
+"QTable::setSorting" ntqtable.html#setSorting
+"QTable::setText" ntqtable.html#setText
+"QTable::setTopMargin" ntqtable.html#setTopMargin
+"QTable::showColumn" ntqtable.html#showColumn
+"QTable::showGrid" ntqtable.html#showGrid
+"QTable::showGrid" ntqtable.html#showGrid-prop
+"QTable::showRow" ntqtable.html#showRow
+"QTable::sortColumn" ntqtable.html#sortColumn
+"QTable::sorting" ntqtable.html#sorting
+"QTable::sorting" ntqtable.html#sorting-prop
+"QTable::startDrag" ntqtable.html#startDrag
+"QTable::swapCells" ntqtable.html#swapCells
+"QTable::swapColumns" ntqtable.html#swapColumns
+"QTable::swapRows" ntqtable.html#swapRows
+"QTable::tableSize" ntqtable.html#tableSize
+"QTable::takeItem" ntqtable.html#takeItem
+"QTable::text" ntqtable.html#text
+"QTable::updateCell" ntqtable.html#updateCell
+"QTable::updateGeometries" ntqtable.html#updateGeometries
+"QTable::updateHeaderStates" ntqtable.html#updateHeaderStates
+"QTable::valueChanged" ntqtable.html#valueChanged
+"QTable::verticalHeader" ntqtable.html#verticalHeader
+"QTable::~QTable" ntqtable.html#~QTable
 "QTableItem" qtableitem.html
 "QTableItem::EditType" qtableitem.html#EditType
 "QTableItem::alignment" qtableitem.html#alignment
@@ -6672,60 +6672,60 @@
 "QTabletEvent::xTilt" qtabletevent.html#xTilt
 "QTabletEvent::y" qtabletevent.html#y
 "QTabletEvent::yTilt" qtabletevent.html#yTilt
-"QTextBrowser" qtextbrowser.html
-"QTextBrowser::anchorClicked" qtextbrowser.html#anchorClicked
-"QTextBrowser::backward" qtextbrowser.html#backward
-"QTextBrowser::backwardAvailable" qtextbrowser.html#backwardAvailable
-"QTextBrowser::forward" qtextbrowser.html#forward
-"QTextBrowser::forwardAvailable" qtextbrowser.html#forwardAvailable
-"QTextBrowser::highlighted" qtextbrowser.html#highlighted
-"QTextBrowser::home" qtextbrowser.html#home
-"QTextBrowser::keyPressEvent" qtextbrowser.html#keyPressEvent
-"QTextBrowser::linkClicked" qtextbrowser.html#linkClicked
-"QTextBrowser::modified" qtextbrowser.html#modified-prop
-"QTextBrowser::overwriteMode" qtextbrowser.html#overwriteMode-prop
-"QTextBrowser::readOnly" qtextbrowser.html#readOnly-prop
-"QTextBrowser::reload" qtextbrowser.html#reload
-"QTextBrowser::setSource" qtextbrowser.html#setSource
-"QTextBrowser::setText" qtextbrowser.html#setText
-"QTextBrowser::source" qtextbrowser.html#source
-"QTextBrowser::source" qtextbrowser.html#source-prop
-"QTextBrowser::sourceChanged" qtextbrowser.html#sourceChanged
-"QTextBrowser::undoDepth" qtextbrowser.html#undoDepth-prop
-"QTextBrowser::undoRedoEnabled" qtextbrowser.html#undoRedoEnabled-prop
-"QTextCodec" qtextcodec.html
-"QTextCodec::canEncode" qtextcodec.html#canEncode
-"QTextCodec::codecForCStrings" qtextcodec.html#codecForCStrings
-"QTextCodec::codecForContent" qtextcodec.html#codecForContent
-"QTextCodec::codecForIndex" qtextcodec.html#codecForIndex
-"QTextCodec::codecForLocale" qtextcodec.html#codecForLocale
-"QTextCodec::codecForMib" qtextcodec.html#codecForMib
-"QTextCodec::codecForName" qtextcodec.html#codecForName
-"QTextCodec::codecForTr" qtextcodec.html#codecForTr
-"QTextCodec::deleteAllCodecs" qtextcodec.html#deleteAllCodecs
-"QTextCodec::fromUnicode" qtextcodec.html#fromUnicode
-"QTextCodec::heuristicContentMatch" qtextcodec.html#heuristicContentMatch
-"QTextCodec::heuristicNameMatch" qtextcodec.html#heuristicNameMatch
-"QTextCodec::loadCharmap" qtextcodec.html#loadCharmap
-"QTextCodec::loadCharmapFile" qtextcodec.html#loadCharmapFile
-"QTextCodec::locale" qtextcodec.html#locale
-"QTextCodec::makeDecoder" qtextcodec.html#makeDecoder
-"QTextCodec::makeEncoder" qtextcodec.html#makeEncoder
-"QTextCodec::mibEnum" qtextcodec.html#mibEnum
-"QTextCodec::mimeName" qtextcodec.html#mimeName
-"QTextCodec::name" qtextcodec.html#name
-"QTextCodec::setCodecForCStrings" qtextcodec.html#setCodecForCStrings
-"QTextCodec::setCodecForLocale" qtextcodec.html#setCodecForLocale
-"QTextCodec::setCodecForTr" qtextcodec.html#setCodecForTr
-"QTextCodec::simpleHeuristicNameMatch" qtextcodec.html#simpleHeuristicNameMatch
-"QTextCodec::toUnicode" qtextcodec.html#toUnicode
-"QTextCodec::~QTextCodec" qtextcodec.html#~QTextCodec
-"QTextCodecPlugin" qtextcodecplugin.html
-"QTextCodecPlugin::createForMib" qtextcodecplugin.html#createForMib
-"QTextCodecPlugin::createForName" qtextcodecplugin.html#createForName
-"QTextCodecPlugin::mibEnums" qtextcodecplugin.html#mibEnums
-"QTextCodecPlugin::names" qtextcodecplugin.html#names
-"QTextCodecPlugin::~QTextCodecPlugin" qtextcodecplugin.html#~QTextCodecPlugin
+"QTextBrowser" ntqtextbrowser.html
+"QTextBrowser::anchorClicked" ntqtextbrowser.html#anchorClicked
+"QTextBrowser::backward" ntqtextbrowser.html#backward
+"QTextBrowser::backwardAvailable" ntqtextbrowser.html#backwardAvailable
+"QTextBrowser::forward" ntqtextbrowser.html#forward
+"QTextBrowser::forwardAvailable" ntqtextbrowser.html#forwardAvailable
+"QTextBrowser::highlighted" ntqtextbrowser.html#highlighted
+"QTextBrowser::home" ntqtextbrowser.html#home
+"QTextBrowser::keyPressEvent" ntqtextbrowser.html#keyPressEvent
+"QTextBrowser::linkClicked" ntqtextbrowser.html#linkClicked
+"QTextBrowser::modified" ntqtextbrowser.html#modified-prop
+"QTextBrowser::overwriteMode" ntqtextbrowser.html#overwriteMode-prop
+"QTextBrowser::readOnly" ntqtextbrowser.html#readOnly-prop
+"QTextBrowser::reload" ntqtextbrowser.html#reload
+"QTextBrowser::setSource" ntqtextbrowser.html#setSource
+"QTextBrowser::setText" ntqtextbrowser.html#setText
+"QTextBrowser::source" ntqtextbrowser.html#source
+"QTextBrowser::source" ntqtextbrowser.html#source-prop
+"QTextBrowser::sourceChanged" ntqtextbrowser.html#sourceChanged
+"QTextBrowser::undoDepth" ntqtextbrowser.html#undoDepth-prop
+"QTextBrowser::undoRedoEnabled" ntqtextbrowser.html#undoRedoEnabled-prop
+"QTextCodec" ntqtextcodec.html
+"QTextCodec::canEncode" ntqtextcodec.html#canEncode
+"QTextCodec::codecForCStrings" ntqtextcodec.html#codecForCStrings
+"QTextCodec::codecForContent" ntqtextcodec.html#codecForContent
+"QTextCodec::codecForIndex" ntqtextcodec.html#codecForIndex
+"QTextCodec::codecForLocale" ntqtextcodec.html#codecForLocale
+"QTextCodec::codecForMib" ntqtextcodec.html#codecForMib
+"QTextCodec::codecForName" ntqtextcodec.html#codecForName
+"QTextCodec::codecForTr" ntqtextcodec.html#codecForTr
+"QTextCodec::deleteAllCodecs" ntqtextcodec.html#deleteAllCodecs
+"QTextCodec::fromUnicode" ntqtextcodec.html#fromUnicode
+"QTextCodec::heuristicContentMatch" ntqtextcodec.html#heuristicContentMatch
+"QTextCodec::heuristicNameMatch" ntqtextcodec.html#heuristicNameMatch
+"QTextCodec::loadCharmap" ntqtextcodec.html#loadCharmap
+"QTextCodec::loadCharmapFile" ntqtextcodec.html#loadCharmapFile
+"QTextCodec::locale" ntqtextcodec.html#locale
+"QTextCodec::makeDecoder" ntqtextcodec.html#makeDecoder
+"QTextCodec::makeEncoder" ntqtextcodec.html#makeEncoder
+"QTextCodec::mibEnum" ntqtextcodec.html#mibEnum
+"QTextCodec::mimeName" ntqtextcodec.html#mimeName
+"QTextCodec::name" ntqtextcodec.html#name
+"QTextCodec::setCodecForCStrings" ntqtextcodec.html#setCodecForCStrings
+"QTextCodec::setCodecForLocale" ntqtextcodec.html#setCodecForLocale
+"QTextCodec::setCodecForTr" ntqtextcodec.html#setCodecForTr
+"QTextCodec::simpleHeuristicNameMatch" ntqtextcodec.html#simpleHeuristicNameMatch
+"QTextCodec::toUnicode" ntqtextcodec.html#toUnicode
+"QTextCodec::~QTextCodec" ntqtextcodec.html#~QTextCodec
+"QTextCodecPlugin" ntqtextcodecplugin.html
+"QTextCodecPlugin::createForMib" ntqtextcodecplugin.html#createForMib
+"QTextCodecPlugin::createForName" ntqtextcodecplugin.html#createForName
+"QTextCodecPlugin::mibEnums" ntqtextcodecplugin.html#mibEnums
+"QTextCodecPlugin::names" ntqtextcodecplugin.html#names
+"QTextCodecPlugin::~QTextCodecPlugin" ntqtextcodecplugin.html#~QTextCodecPlugin
 "QTextDecoder" qtextdecoder.html
 "QTextDecoder::toUnicode" qtextdecoder.html#toUnicode
 "QTextDecoder::~QTextDecoder" qtextdecoder.html#~QTextDecoder
@@ -6735,215 +6735,215 @@
 "QTextDrag::setSubtype" qtextdrag.html#setSubtype
 "QTextDrag::setText" qtextdrag.html#setText
 "QTextDrag::~QTextDrag" qtextdrag.html#~QTextDrag
-"QTextEdit" qtextedit.html
-"QTextEdit::AutoFormatting" qtextedit.html#AutoFormatting
-"QTextEdit::CursorAction" qtextedit.html#CursorAction
-"QTextEdit::KeyboardAction" qtextedit.html#KeyboardAction
-"QTextEdit::VerticalAlignment" qtextedit.html#VerticalAlignment
-"QTextEdit::WordWrap" qtextedit.html#WordWrap
-"QTextEdit::WrapPolicy" qtextedit.html#WrapPolicy
-"QTextEdit::alignment" qtextedit.html#alignment
-"QTextEdit::anchorAt" qtextedit.html#anchorAt
-"QTextEdit::append" qtextedit.html#append
-"QTextEdit::autoFormatting" qtextedit.html#autoFormatting
-"QTextEdit::autoFormatting" qtextedit.html#autoFormatting-prop
-"QTextEdit::bold" qtextedit.html#bold
-"QTextEdit::charAt" qtextedit.html#charAt
-"QTextEdit::clear" qtextedit.html#clear
-"QTextEdit::clearParagraphBackground" qtextedit.html#clearParagraphBackground
-"QTextEdit::clicked" qtextedit.html#clicked
-"QTextEdit::color" qtextedit.html#color
-"QTextEdit::context" qtextedit.html#context
-"QTextEdit::copy" qtextedit.html#copy
-"QTextEdit::copyAvailable" qtextedit.html#copyAvailable
-"QTextEdit::createPopupMenu" qtextedit.html#createPopupMenu
-"QTextEdit::currentAlignmentChanged" qtextedit.html#currentAlignmentChanged
-"QTextEdit::currentColorChanged" qtextedit.html#currentColorChanged
-"QTextEdit::currentFont" qtextedit.html#currentFont
-"QTextEdit::currentFontChanged" qtextedit.html#currentFontChanged
-"QTextEdit::currentVerticalAlignmentChanged" qtextedit.html#currentVerticalAlignmentChanged
-"QTextEdit::cursorPositionChanged" qtextedit.html#cursorPositionChanged
-"QTextEdit::cut" qtextedit.html#cut
-"QTextEdit::del" qtextedit.html#del
-"QTextEdit::doKeyboardAction" qtextedit.html#doKeyboardAction
-"QTextEdit::documentTitle" qtextedit.html#documentTitle
-"QTextEdit::documentTitle" qtextedit.html#documentTitle-prop
-"QTextEdit::doubleClicked" qtextedit.html#doubleClicked
-"QTextEdit::ensureCursorVisible" qtextedit.html#ensureCursorVisible
-"QTextEdit::family" qtextedit.html#family
-"QTextEdit::find" qtextedit.html#find
-"QTextEdit::focusNextPrevChild" qtextedit.html#focusNextPrevChild
-"QTextEdit::getCursorPosition" qtextedit.html#getCursorPosition
-"QTextEdit::getSelection" qtextedit.html#getSelection
-"QTextEdit::hasSelectedText" qtextedit.html#hasSelectedText
-"QTextEdit::hasSelectedText" qtextedit.html#hasSelectedText-prop
-"QTextEdit::heightForWidth" qtextedit.html#heightForWidth
-"QTextEdit::insert" qtextedit.html#insert
-"QTextEdit::insertAt" qtextedit.html#insertAt
-"QTextEdit::insertParagraph" qtextedit.html#insertParagraph
-"QTextEdit::isModified" qtextedit.html#isModified
-"QTextEdit::isOverwriteMode" qtextedit.html#isOverwriteMode
-"QTextEdit::isReadOnly" qtextedit.html#isReadOnly
-"QTextEdit::isRedoAvailable" qtextedit.html#isRedoAvailable
-"QTextEdit::isUndoAvailable" qtextedit.html#isUndoAvailable
-"QTextEdit::isUndoRedoEnabled" qtextedit.html#isUndoRedoEnabled
-"QTextEdit::italic" qtextedit.html#italic
-"QTextEdit::keyPressEvent" qtextedit.html#keyPressEvent
-"QTextEdit::length" qtextedit.html#length
-"QTextEdit::length" qtextedit.html#length-prop
-"QTextEdit::lineOfChar" qtextedit.html#lineOfChar
-"QTextEdit::lines" qtextedit.html#lines
-"QTextEdit::linesOfParagraph" qtextedit.html#linesOfParagraph
-"QTextEdit::linkUnderline" qtextedit.html#linkUnderline
-"QTextEdit::linkUnderline" qtextedit.html#linkUnderline-prop
-"QTextEdit::maxLogLines" qtextedit.html#maxLogLines
-"QTextEdit::mimeSourceFactory" qtextedit.html#mimeSourceFactory
-"QTextEdit::modificationChanged" qtextedit.html#modificationChanged
-"QTextEdit::modified" qtextedit.html#modified-prop
-"QTextEdit::moveCursor" qtextedit.html#moveCursor
-"QTextEdit::optimCheckLimit" qtextedit.html#optimCheckLimit
-"QTextEdit::overwriteMode" qtextedit.html#overwriteMode-prop
-"QTextEdit::paper" qtextedit.html#paper
-"QTextEdit::paper" qtextedit.html#paper-prop
-"QTextEdit::paragraphAt" qtextedit.html#paragraphAt
-"QTextEdit::paragraphBackgroundColor" qtextedit.html#paragraphBackgroundColor
-"QTextEdit::paragraphLength" qtextedit.html#paragraphLength
-"QTextEdit::paragraphRect" qtextedit.html#paragraphRect
-"QTextEdit::paragraphs" qtextedit.html#paragraphs
-"QTextEdit::paste" qtextedit.html#paste
-"QTextEdit::pasteSpecial" qtextedit.html#pasteSpecial
-"QTextEdit::pasteSubType" qtextedit.html#pasteSubType
-"QTextEdit::placeCursor" qtextedit.html#placeCursor
-"QTextEdit::pointSize" qtextedit.html#pointSize
-"QTextEdit::readOnly" qtextedit.html#readOnly-prop
-"QTextEdit::redo" qtextedit.html#redo
-"QTextEdit::redoAvailable" qtextedit.html#redoAvailable
-"QTextEdit::removeParagraph" qtextedit.html#removeParagraph
-"QTextEdit::removeSelectedText" qtextedit.html#removeSelectedText
-"QTextEdit::removeSelection" qtextedit.html#removeSelection
-"QTextEdit::repaintChanged" qtextedit.html#repaintChanged
-"QTextEdit::returnPressed" qtextedit.html#returnPressed
-"QTextEdit::scrollToAnchor" qtextedit.html#scrollToAnchor
-"QTextEdit::scrollToBottom" qtextedit.html#scrollToBottom
-"QTextEdit::selectAll" qtextedit.html#selectAll
-"QTextEdit::selectedText" qtextedit.html#selectedText
-"QTextEdit::selectedText" qtextedit.html#selectedText-prop
-"QTextEdit::selectionChanged" qtextedit.html#selectionChanged
-"QTextEdit::setAlignment" qtextedit.html#setAlignment
-"QTextEdit::setAutoFormatting" qtextedit.html#setAutoFormatting
-"QTextEdit::setBold" qtextedit.html#setBold
-"QTextEdit::setColor" qtextedit.html#setColor
-"QTextEdit::setCurrentFont" qtextedit.html#setCurrentFont
-"QTextEdit::setCursorPosition" qtextedit.html#setCursorPosition
-"QTextEdit::setFamily" qtextedit.html#setFamily
-"QTextEdit::setItalic" qtextedit.html#setItalic
-"QTextEdit::setLinkUnderline" qtextedit.html#setLinkUnderline
-"QTextEdit::setMaxLogLines" qtextedit.html#setMaxLogLines
-"QTextEdit::setMimeSourceFactory" qtextedit.html#setMimeSourceFactory
-"QTextEdit::setModified" qtextedit.html#setModified
-"QTextEdit::setOverwriteMode" qtextedit.html#setOverwriteMode
-"QTextEdit::setPaper" qtextedit.html#setPaper
-"QTextEdit::setParagraphBackgroundColor" qtextedit.html#setParagraphBackgroundColor
-"QTextEdit::setPointSize" qtextedit.html#setPointSize
-"QTextEdit::setReadOnly" qtextedit.html#setReadOnly
-"QTextEdit::setSelection" qtextedit.html#setSelection
-"QTextEdit::setSelectionAttributes" qtextedit.html#setSelectionAttributes
-"QTextEdit::setStyleSheet" qtextedit.html#setStyleSheet
-"QTextEdit::setTabChangesFocus" qtextedit.html#setTabChangesFocus
-"QTextEdit::setTabStopWidth" qtextedit.html#setTabStopWidth
-"QTextEdit::setText" qtextedit.html#setText
-"QTextEdit::setTextFormat" qtextedit.html#setTextFormat
-"QTextEdit::setUnderline" qtextedit.html#setUnderline
-"QTextEdit::setUndoDepth" qtextedit.html#setUndoDepth
-"QTextEdit::setUndoRedoEnabled" qtextedit.html#setUndoRedoEnabled
-"QTextEdit::setVerticalAlignment" qtextedit.html#setVerticalAlignment
-"QTextEdit::setWordWrap" qtextedit.html#setWordWrap
-"QTextEdit::setWrapColumnOrWidth" qtextedit.html#setWrapColumnOrWidth
-"QTextEdit::setWrapPolicy" qtextedit.html#setWrapPolicy
-"QTextEdit::styleSheet" qtextedit.html#styleSheet
-"QTextEdit::sync" qtextedit.html#sync
-"QTextEdit::syntaxHighlighter" qtextedit.html#syntaxHighlighter
-"QTextEdit::tabChangesFocus" qtextedit.html#tabChangesFocus
-"QTextEdit::tabChangesFocus" qtextedit.html#tabChangesFocus-prop
-"QTextEdit::tabStopWidth" qtextedit.html#tabStopWidth
-"QTextEdit::tabStopWidth" qtextedit.html#tabStopWidth-prop
-"QTextEdit::text" qtextedit.html#text
-"QTextEdit::text" qtextedit.html#text-prop
-"QTextEdit::textChanged" qtextedit.html#textChanged
-"QTextEdit::textCursor" qtextedit.html#textCursor
-"QTextEdit::textFormat" qtextedit.html#textFormat
-"QTextEdit::textFormat" qtextedit.html#textFormat-prop
-"QTextEdit::underline" qtextedit.html#underline
-"QTextEdit::undo" qtextedit.html#undo
-"QTextEdit::undoAvailable" qtextedit.html#undoAvailable
-"QTextEdit::undoDepth" qtextedit.html#undoDepth
-"QTextEdit::undoDepth" qtextedit.html#undoDepth-prop
-"QTextEdit::undoRedoEnabled" qtextedit.html#undoRedoEnabled-prop
-"QTextEdit::wordWrap" qtextedit.html#wordWrap
-"QTextEdit::wordWrap" qtextedit.html#wordWrap-prop
-"QTextEdit::wrapColumnOrWidth" qtextedit.html#wrapColumnOrWidth
-"QTextEdit::wrapColumnOrWidth" qtextedit.html#wrapColumnOrWidth-prop
-"QTextEdit::wrapPolicy" qtextedit.html#wrapPolicy
-"QTextEdit::wrapPolicy" qtextedit.html#wrapPolicy-prop
-"QTextEdit::zoomIn" qtextedit.html#zoomIn
-"QTextEdit::zoomOut" qtextedit.html#zoomOut
-"QTextEdit::zoomTo" qtextedit.html#zoomTo
+"QTextEdit" ntqtextedit.html
+"QTextEdit::AutoFormatting" ntqtextedit.html#AutoFormatting
+"QTextEdit::CursorAction" ntqtextedit.html#CursorAction
+"QTextEdit::KeyboardAction" ntqtextedit.html#KeyboardAction
+"QTextEdit::VerticalAlignment" ntqtextedit.html#VerticalAlignment
+"QTextEdit::WordWrap" ntqtextedit.html#WordWrap
+"QTextEdit::WrapPolicy" ntqtextedit.html#WrapPolicy
+"QTextEdit::alignment" ntqtextedit.html#alignment
+"QTextEdit::anchorAt" ntqtextedit.html#anchorAt
+"QTextEdit::append" ntqtextedit.html#append
+"QTextEdit::autoFormatting" ntqtextedit.html#autoFormatting
+"QTextEdit::autoFormatting" ntqtextedit.html#autoFormatting-prop
+"QTextEdit::bold" ntqtextedit.html#bold
+"QTextEdit::charAt" ntqtextedit.html#charAt
+"QTextEdit::clear" ntqtextedit.html#clear
+"QTextEdit::clearParagraphBackground" ntqtextedit.html#clearParagraphBackground
+"QTextEdit::clicked" ntqtextedit.html#clicked
+"QTextEdit::color" ntqtextedit.html#color
+"QTextEdit::context" ntqtextedit.html#context
+"QTextEdit::copy" ntqtextedit.html#copy
+"QTextEdit::copyAvailable" ntqtextedit.html#copyAvailable
+"QTextEdit::createPopupMenu" ntqtextedit.html#createPopupMenu
+"QTextEdit::currentAlignmentChanged" ntqtextedit.html#currentAlignmentChanged
+"QTextEdit::currentColorChanged" ntqtextedit.html#currentColorChanged
+"QTextEdit::currentFont" ntqtextedit.html#currentFont
+"QTextEdit::currentFontChanged" ntqtextedit.html#currentFontChanged
+"QTextEdit::currentVerticalAlignmentChanged" ntqtextedit.html#currentVerticalAlignmentChanged
+"QTextEdit::cursorPositionChanged" ntqtextedit.html#cursorPositionChanged
+"QTextEdit::cut" ntqtextedit.html#cut
+"QTextEdit::del" ntqtextedit.html#del
+"QTextEdit::doKeyboardAction" ntqtextedit.html#doKeyboardAction
+"QTextEdit::documentTitle" ntqtextedit.html#documentTitle
+"QTextEdit::documentTitle" ntqtextedit.html#documentTitle-prop
+"QTextEdit::doubleClicked" ntqtextedit.html#doubleClicked
+"QTextEdit::ensureCursorVisible" ntqtextedit.html#ensureCursorVisible
+"QTextEdit::family" ntqtextedit.html#family
+"QTextEdit::find" ntqtextedit.html#find
+"QTextEdit::focusNextPrevChild" ntqtextedit.html#focusNextPrevChild
+"QTextEdit::getCursorPosition" ntqtextedit.html#getCursorPosition
+"QTextEdit::getSelection" ntqtextedit.html#getSelection
+"QTextEdit::hasSelectedText" ntqtextedit.html#hasSelectedText
+"QTextEdit::hasSelectedText" ntqtextedit.html#hasSelectedText-prop
+"QTextEdit::heightForWidth" ntqtextedit.html#heightForWidth
+"QTextEdit::insert" ntqtextedit.html#insert
+"QTextEdit::insertAt" ntqtextedit.html#insertAt
+"QTextEdit::insertParagraph" ntqtextedit.html#insertParagraph
+"QTextEdit::isModified" ntqtextedit.html#isModified
+"QTextEdit::isOverwriteMode" ntqtextedit.html#isOverwriteMode
+"QTextEdit::isReadOnly" ntqtextedit.html#isReadOnly
+"QTextEdit::isRedoAvailable" ntqtextedit.html#isRedoAvailable
+"QTextEdit::isUndoAvailable" ntqtextedit.html#isUndoAvailable
+"QTextEdit::isUndoRedoEnabled" ntqtextedit.html#isUndoRedoEnabled
+"QTextEdit::italic" ntqtextedit.html#italic
+"QTextEdit::keyPressEvent" ntqtextedit.html#keyPressEvent
+"QTextEdit::length" ntqtextedit.html#length
+"QTextEdit::length" ntqtextedit.html#length-prop
+"QTextEdit::lineOfChar" ntqtextedit.html#lineOfChar
+"QTextEdit::lines" ntqtextedit.html#lines
+"QTextEdit::linesOfParagraph" ntqtextedit.html#linesOfParagraph
+"QTextEdit::linkUnderline" ntqtextedit.html#linkUnderline
+"QTextEdit::linkUnderline" ntqtextedit.html#linkUnderline-prop
+"QTextEdit::maxLogLines" ntqtextedit.html#maxLogLines
+"QTextEdit::mimeSourceFactory" ntqtextedit.html#mimeSourceFactory
+"QTextEdit::modificationChanged" ntqtextedit.html#modificationChanged
+"QTextEdit::modified" ntqtextedit.html#modified-prop
+"QTextEdit::moveCursor" ntqtextedit.html#moveCursor
+"QTextEdit::optimCheckLimit" ntqtextedit.html#optimCheckLimit
+"QTextEdit::overwriteMode" ntqtextedit.html#overwriteMode-prop
+"QTextEdit::paper" ntqtextedit.html#paper
+"QTextEdit::paper" ntqtextedit.html#paper-prop
+"QTextEdit::paragraphAt" ntqtextedit.html#paragraphAt
+"QTextEdit::paragraphBackgroundColor" ntqtextedit.html#paragraphBackgroundColor
+"QTextEdit::paragraphLength" ntqtextedit.html#paragraphLength
+"QTextEdit::paragraphRect" ntqtextedit.html#paragraphRect
+"QTextEdit::paragraphs" ntqtextedit.html#paragraphs
+"QTextEdit::paste" ntqtextedit.html#paste
+"QTextEdit::pasteSpecial" ntqtextedit.html#pasteSpecial
+"QTextEdit::pasteSubType" ntqtextedit.html#pasteSubType
+"QTextEdit::placeCursor" ntqtextedit.html#placeCursor
+"QTextEdit::pointSize" ntqtextedit.html#pointSize
+"QTextEdit::readOnly" ntqtextedit.html#readOnly-prop
+"QTextEdit::redo" ntqtextedit.html#redo
+"QTextEdit::redoAvailable" ntqtextedit.html#redoAvailable
+"QTextEdit::removeParagraph" ntqtextedit.html#removeParagraph
+"QTextEdit::removeSelectedText" ntqtextedit.html#removeSelectedText
+"QTextEdit::removeSelection" ntqtextedit.html#removeSelection
+"QTextEdit::repaintChanged" ntqtextedit.html#repaintChanged
+"QTextEdit::returnPressed" ntqtextedit.html#returnPressed
+"QTextEdit::scrollToAnchor" ntqtextedit.html#scrollToAnchor
+"QTextEdit::scrollToBottom" ntqtextedit.html#scrollToBottom
+"QTextEdit::selectAll" ntqtextedit.html#selectAll
+"QTextEdit::selectedText" ntqtextedit.html#selectedText
+"QTextEdit::selectedText" ntqtextedit.html#selectedText-prop
+"QTextEdit::selectionChanged" ntqtextedit.html#selectionChanged
+"QTextEdit::setAlignment" ntqtextedit.html#setAlignment
+"QTextEdit::setAutoFormatting" ntqtextedit.html#setAutoFormatting
+"QTextEdit::setBold" ntqtextedit.html#setBold
+"QTextEdit::setColor" ntqtextedit.html#setColor
+"QTextEdit::setCurrentFont" ntqtextedit.html#setCurrentFont
+"QTextEdit::setCursorPosition" ntqtextedit.html#setCursorPosition
+"QTextEdit::setFamily" ntqtextedit.html#setFamily
+"QTextEdit::setItalic" ntqtextedit.html#setItalic
+"QTextEdit::setLinkUnderline" ntqtextedit.html#setLinkUnderline
+"QTextEdit::setMaxLogLines" ntqtextedit.html#setMaxLogLines
+"QTextEdit::setMimeSourceFactory" ntqtextedit.html#setMimeSourceFactory
+"QTextEdit::setModified" ntqtextedit.html#setModified
+"QTextEdit::setOverwriteMode" ntqtextedit.html#setOverwriteMode
+"QTextEdit::setPaper" ntqtextedit.html#setPaper
+"QTextEdit::setParagraphBackgroundColor" ntqtextedit.html#setParagraphBackgroundColor
+"QTextEdit::setPointSize" ntqtextedit.html#setPointSize
+"QTextEdit::setReadOnly" ntqtextedit.html#setReadOnly
+"QTextEdit::setSelection" ntqtextedit.html#setSelection
+"QTextEdit::setSelectionAttributes" ntqtextedit.html#setSelectionAttributes
+"QTextEdit::setStyleSheet" ntqtextedit.html#setStyleSheet
+"QTextEdit::setTabChangesFocus" ntqtextedit.html#setTabChangesFocus
+"QTextEdit::setTabStopWidth" ntqtextedit.html#setTabStopWidth
+"QTextEdit::setText" ntqtextedit.html#setText
+"QTextEdit::setTextFormat" ntqtextedit.html#setTextFormat
+"QTextEdit::setUnderline" ntqtextedit.html#setUnderline
+"QTextEdit::setUndoDepth" ntqtextedit.html#setUndoDepth
+"QTextEdit::setUndoRedoEnabled" ntqtextedit.html#setUndoRedoEnabled
+"QTextEdit::setVerticalAlignment" ntqtextedit.html#setVerticalAlignment
+"QTextEdit::setWordWrap" ntqtextedit.html#setWordWrap
+"QTextEdit::setWrapColumnOrWidth" ntqtextedit.html#setWrapColumnOrWidth
+"QTextEdit::setWrapPolicy" ntqtextedit.html#setWrapPolicy
+"QTextEdit::styleSheet" ntqtextedit.html#styleSheet
+"QTextEdit::sync" ntqtextedit.html#sync
+"QTextEdit::syntaxHighlighter" ntqtextedit.html#syntaxHighlighter
+"QTextEdit::tabChangesFocus" ntqtextedit.html#tabChangesFocus
+"QTextEdit::tabChangesFocus" ntqtextedit.html#tabChangesFocus-prop
+"QTextEdit::tabStopWidth" ntqtextedit.html#tabStopWidth
+"QTextEdit::tabStopWidth" ntqtextedit.html#tabStopWidth-prop
+"QTextEdit::text" ntqtextedit.html#text
+"QTextEdit::text" ntqtextedit.html#text-prop
+"QTextEdit::textChanged" ntqtextedit.html#textChanged
+"QTextEdit::textCursor" ntqtextedit.html#textCursor
+"QTextEdit::textFormat" ntqtextedit.html#textFormat
+"QTextEdit::textFormat" ntqtextedit.html#textFormat-prop
+"QTextEdit::underline" ntqtextedit.html#underline
+"QTextEdit::undo" ntqtextedit.html#undo
+"QTextEdit::undoAvailable" ntqtextedit.html#undoAvailable
+"QTextEdit::undoDepth" ntqtextedit.html#undoDepth
+"QTextEdit::undoDepth" ntqtextedit.html#undoDepth-prop
+"QTextEdit::undoRedoEnabled" ntqtextedit.html#undoRedoEnabled-prop
+"QTextEdit::wordWrap" ntqtextedit.html#wordWrap
+"QTextEdit::wordWrap" ntqtextedit.html#wordWrap-prop
+"QTextEdit::wrapColumnOrWidth" ntqtextedit.html#wrapColumnOrWidth
+"QTextEdit::wrapColumnOrWidth" ntqtextedit.html#wrapColumnOrWidth-prop
+"QTextEdit::wrapPolicy" ntqtextedit.html#wrapPolicy
+"QTextEdit::wrapPolicy" ntqtextedit.html#wrapPolicy-prop
+"QTextEdit::zoomIn" ntqtextedit.html#zoomIn
+"QTextEdit::zoomOut" ntqtextedit.html#zoomOut
+"QTextEdit::zoomTo" ntqtextedit.html#zoomTo
 "QTextEncoder" qtextencoder.html
 "QTextEncoder::fromUnicode" qtextencoder.html#fromUnicode
 "QTextEncoder::~QTextEncoder" qtextencoder.html#~QTextEncoder
 "QTextIStream" qtextistream.html
 "QTextOStream" qtextostream.html
-"QTextStream" qtextstream.html
-"QTextStream::Encoding" qtextstream.html#Encoding
-"QTextStream::atEnd" qtextstream.html#atEnd
-"QTextStream::codec" qtextstream.html#codec
-"QTextStream::device" qtextstream.html#device
-"QTextStream::fill" qtextstream.html#fill
-"QTextStream::flags" qtextstream.html#flags
-"QTextStream::operator<<" qtextstream.html#operator-lt-lt
-"QTextStream::operator>>" qtextstream.html#operator-gt-gt
-"QTextStream::precision" qtextstream.html#precision
-"QTextStream::read" qtextstream.html#read
-"QTextStream::readLine" qtextstream.html#readLine
-"QTextStream::readRawBytes" qtextstream.html#readRawBytes
-"QTextStream::reset" qtextstream.html#reset
-"QTextStream::setCodec" qtextstream.html#setCodec
-"QTextStream::setDevice" qtextstream.html#setDevice
-"QTextStream::setEncoding" qtextstream.html#setEncoding
-"QTextStream::setf" qtextstream.html#setf
-"QTextStream::skipWhiteSpace" qtextstream.html#skipWhiteSpace
-"QTextStream::ts_getbuf" qtextstream.html#ts_getbuf
-"QTextStream::ts_getline" qtextstream.html#ts_getline
-"QTextStream::ts_putc" qtextstream.html#ts_putc
-"QTextStream::unsetDevice" qtextstream.html#unsetDevice
-"QTextStream::unsetf" qtextstream.html#unsetf
-"QTextStream::width" qtextstream.html#width
-"QTextStream::writeRawBytes" qtextstream.html#writeRawBytes
-"QTextStream::~QTextStream" qtextstream.html#~QTextStream
-"QTextView::modified" qtextview.html#modified-prop
-"QTextView::overwriteMode" qtextview.html#overwriteMode-prop
-"QTextView::readOnly" qtextview.html#readOnly-prop
-"QTextView::undoDepth" qtextview.html#undoDepth-prop
-"QTextView::undoRedoEnabled" qtextview.html#undoRedoEnabled-prop
-"QThread" qthread.html
-"QThread::Priority" qthread.html#Priority
-"QThread::currentThread" qthread.html#currentThread
-"QThread::exit" qthread.html#exit
-"QThread::finished" qthread.html#finished
-"QThread::msleep" qthread.html#msleep
-"QThread::run" qthread.html#run
-"QThread::running" qthread.html#running
-"QThread::sleep" qthread.html#sleep
-"QThread::start" qthread.html#start
-"QThread::terminate" qthread.html#terminate
-"QThread::usleep" qthread.html#usleep
-"QThread::wait" qthread.html#wait
-"QThread::~QThread" qthread.html#~QThread
-"QThreadStorage" qthreadstorage.html
-"QThreadStorage::hasLocalData" qthreadstorage.html#hasLocalData
-"QThreadStorage::localData" qthreadstorage.html#localData
-"QThreadStorage::setLocalData" qthreadstorage.html#setLocalData
-"QThreadStorage::~QThreadStorage" qthreadstorage.html#~QThreadStorage
+"QTextStream" ntqtextstream.html
+"QTextStream::Encoding" ntqtextstream.html#Encoding
+"QTextStream::atEnd" ntqtextstream.html#atEnd
+"QTextStream::codec" ntqtextstream.html#codec
+"QTextStream::device" ntqtextstream.html#device
+"QTextStream::fill" ntqtextstream.html#fill
+"QTextStream::flags" ntqtextstream.html#flags
+"QTextStream::operator<<" ntqtextstream.html#operator-lt-lt
+"QTextStream::operator>>" ntqtextstream.html#operator-gt-gt
+"QTextStream::precision" ntqtextstream.html#precision
+"QTextStream::read" ntqtextstream.html#read
+"QTextStream::readLine" ntqtextstream.html#readLine
+"QTextStream::readRawBytes" ntqtextstream.html#readRawBytes
+"QTextStream::reset" ntqtextstream.html#reset
+"QTextStream::setCodec" ntqtextstream.html#setCodec
+"QTextStream::setDevice" ntqtextstream.html#setDevice
+"QTextStream::setEncoding" ntqtextstream.html#setEncoding
+"QTextStream::setf" ntqtextstream.html#setf
+"QTextStream::skipWhiteSpace" ntqtextstream.html#skipWhiteSpace
+"QTextStream::ts_getbuf" ntqtextstream.html#ts_getbuf
+"QTextStream::ts_getline" ntqtextstream.html#ts_getline
+"QTextStream::ts_putc" ntqtextstream.html#ts_putc
+"QTextStream::unsetDevice" ntqtextstream.html#unsetDevice
+"QTextStream::unsetf" ntqtextstream.html#unsetf
+"QTextStream::width" ntqtextstream.html#width
+"QTextStream::writeRawBytes" ntqtextstream.html#writeRawBytes
+"QTextStream::~QTextStream" ntqtextstream.html#~QTextStream
+"QTextView::modified" ntqtextview.html#modified-prop
+"QTextView::overwriteMode" ntqtextview.html#overwriteMode-prop
+"QTextView::readOnly" ntqtextview.html#readOnly-prop
+"QTextView::undoDepth" ntqtextview.html#undoDepth-prop
+"QTextView::undoRedoEnabled" ntqtextview.html#undoRedoEnabled-prop
+"QThread" ntqthread.html
+"QThread::Priority" ntqthread.html#Priority
+"QThread::currentThread" ntqthread.html#currentThread
+"QThread::exit" ntqthread.html#exit
+"QThread::finished" ntqthread.html#finished
+"QThread::msleep" ntqthread.html#msleep
+"QThread::run" ntqthread.html#run
+"QThread::running" ntqthread.html#running
+"QThread::sleep" ntqthread.html#sleep
+"QThread::start" ntqthread.html#start
+"QThread::terminate" ntqthread.html#terminate
+"QThread::usleep" ntqthread.html#usleep
+"QThread::wait" ntqthread.html#wait
+"QThread::~QThread" ntqthread.html#~QThread
+"QThreadStorage" ntqthreadstorage.html
+"QThreadStorage::hasLocalData" ntqthreadstorage.html#hasLocalData
+"QThreadStorage::localData" ntqthreadstorage.html#localData
+"QThreadStorage::setLocalData" ntqthreadstorage.html#setLocalData
+"QThreadStorage::~QThreadStorage" ntqthreadstorage.html#~QThreadStorage
 "QTime" qtime.html
 "QTime::addMSecs" qtime.html#addMSecs
 "QTime::addSecs" qtime.html#addSecs
@@ -6994,101 +6994,101 @@
 "QTimeEdit::time" qtimeedit.html#time-prop
 "QTimeEdit::valueChanged" qtimeedit.html#valueChanged
 "QTimeEdit::~QTimeEdit" qtimeedit.html#~QTimeEdit
-"QTimer" qtimer.html
-"QTimer::changeInterval" qtimer.html#changeInterval
-"QTimer::isActive" qtimer.html#isActive
-"QTimer::singleShot" qtimer.html#singleShot
-"QTimer::start" qtimer.html#start
-"QTimer::stop" qtimer.html#stop
-"QTimer::timeout" qtimer.html#timeout
-"QTimer::timerId" qtimer.html#timerId
-"QTimer::~QTimer" qtimer.html#~QTimer
+"QTimer" ntqtimer.html
+"QTimer::changeInterval" ntqtimer.html#changeInterval
+"QTimer::isActive" ntqtimer.html#isActive
+"QTimer::singleShot" ntqtimer.html#singleShot
+"QTimer::start" ntqtimer.html#start
+"QTimer::stop" ntqtimer.html#stop
+"QTimer::timeout" ntqtimer.html#timeout
+"QTimer::timerId" ntqtimer.html#timerId
+"QTimer::~QTimer" ntqtimer.html#~QTimer
 "QTimerEvent" qtimerevent.html
 "QTimerEvent::timerId" qtimerevent.html#timerId
-"QToolBar" qtoolbar.html
-"QToolBar::addSeparator" qtoolbar.html#addSeparator
-"QToolBar::clear" qtoolbar.html#clear
-"QToolBar::label" qtoolbar.html#label
-"QToolBar::label" qtoolbar.html#label-prop
-"QToolBar::mainWindow" qtoolbar.html#mainWindow
-"QToolBar::setLabel" qtoolbar.html#setLabel
-"QToolBar::setStretchableWidget" qtoolbar.html#setStretchableWidget
-"QToolBox" qtoolbox.html
-"QToolBox::addItem" qtoolbox.html#addItem
-"QToolBox::count" qtoolbox.html#count
-"QToolBox::count" qtoolbox.html#count-prop
-"QToolBox::currentChanged" qtoolbox.html#currentChanged
-"QToolBox::currentIndex" qtoolbox.html#currentIndex
-"QToolBox::currentIndex" qtoolbox.html#currentIndex-prop
-"QToolBox::currentItem" qtoolbox.html#currentItem
-"QToolBox::indexOf" qtoolbox.html#indexOf
-"QToolBox::insertItem" qtoolbox.html#insertItem
-"QToolBox::isItemEnabled" qtoolbox.html#isItemEnabled
-"QToolBox::item" qtoolbox.html#item
-"QToolBox::itemIconSet" qtoolbox.html#itemIconSet
-"QToolBox::itemInserted" qtoolbox.html#itemInserted
-"QToolBox::itemLabel" qtoolbox.html#itemLabel
-"QToolBox::itemRemoved" qtoolbox.html#itemRemoved
-"QToolBox::itemToolTip" qtoolbox.html#itemToolTip
-"QToolBox::removeItem" qtoolbox.html#removeItem
-"QToolBox::setCurrentIndex" qtoolbox.html#setCurrentIndex
-"QToolBox::setCurrentItem" qtoolbox.html#setCurrentItem
-"QToolBox::setItemEnabled" qtoolbox.html#setItemEnabled
-"QToolBox::setItemIconSet" qtoolbox.html#setItemIconSet
-"QToolBox::setItemLabel" qtoolbox.html#setItemLabel
-"QToolBox::setItemToolTip" qtoolbox.html#setItemToolTip
-"QToolButton" qtoolbutton.html
-"QToolButton::TextPosition" qtoolbutton.html#TextPosition
-"QToolButton::autoRaise" qtoolbutton.html#autoRaise
-"QToolButton::autoRaise" qtoolbutton.html#autoRaise-prop
-"QToolButton::backgroundMode" qtoolbutton.html#backgroundMode-prop
-"QToolButton::iconSet" qtoolbutton.html#iconSet
-"QToolButton::iconSet" qtoolbutton.html#iconSet-prop
-"QToolButton::on" qtoolbutton.html#on-prop
-"QToolButton::openPopup" qtoolbutton.html#openPopup
-"QToolButton::pixmap" qtoolbutton.html#pixmap-prop
-"QToolButton::popup" qtoolbutton.html#popup
-"QToolButton::popupDelay" qtoolbutton.html#popupDelay
-"QToolButton::popupDelay" qtoolbutton.html#popupDelay-prop
-"QToolButton::setAutoRaise" qtoolbutton.html#setAutoRaise
-"QToolButton::setIconSet" qtoolbutton.html#setIconSet
-"QToolButton::setOn" qtoolbutton.html#setOn
-"QToolButton::setPopup" qtoolbutton.html#setPopup
-"QToolButton::setPopupDelay" qtoolbutton.html#setPopupDelay
-"QToolButton::setTextLabel" qtoolbutton.html#setTextLabel
-"QToolButton::setTextPosition" qtoolbutton.html#setTextPosition
-"QToolButton::setToggleButton" qtoolbutton.html#setToggleButton
-"QToolButton::setUsesBigPixmap" qtoolbutton.html#setUsesBigPixmap
-"QToolButton::setUsesTextLabel" qtoolbutton.html#setUsesTextLabel
-"QToolButton::textLabel" qtoolbutton.html#textLabel
-"QToolButton::textLabel" qtoolbutton.html#textLabel-prop
-"QToolButton::textPosition" qtoolbutton.html#textPosition
-"QToolButton::textPosition" qtoolbutton.html#textPosition-prop
-"QToolButton::toggle" qtoolbutton.html#toggle
-"QToolButton::toggleButton" qtoolbutton.html#toggleButton-prop
-"QToolButton::uses3D" qtoolbutton.html#uses3D
-"QToolButton::usesBigPixmap" qtoolbutton.html#usesBigPixmap
-"QToolButton::usesBigPixmap" qtoolbutton.html#usesBigPixmap-prop
-"QToolButton::usesTextLabel" qtoolbutton.html#usesTextLabel
-"QToolButton::usesTextLabel" qtoolbutton.html#usesTextLabel-prop
-"QToolButton::~QToolButton" qtoolbutton.html#~QToolButton
-"QToolTip" qtooltip.html
-"QToolTip::add" qtooltip.html#add
-"QToolTip::clear" qtooltip.html#clear
-"QToolTip::font" qtooltip.html#font
-"QToolTip::group" qtooltip.html#group
-"QToolTip::hide" qtooltip.html#hide
-"QToolTip::isGloballyEnabled" qtooltip.html#isGloballyEnabled
-"QToolTip::maybeTip" qtooltip.html#maybeTip
-"QToolTip::palette" qtooltip.html#palette
-"QToolTip::parentWidget" qtooltip.html#parentWidget
-"QToolTip::remove" qtooltip.html#remove
-"QToolTip::setFont" qtooltip.html#setFont
-"QToolTip::setGloballyEnabled" qtooltip.html#setGloballyEnabled
-"QToolTip::setPalette" qtooltip.html#setPalette
-"QToolTip::setWakeUpDelay" qtooltip.html#setWakeUpDelay
-"QToolTip::textFor" qtooltip.html#textFor
-"QToolTip::tip" qtooltip.html#tip
+"QToolBar" ntqtoolbar.html
+"QToolBar::addSeparator" ntqtoolbar.html#addSeparator
+"QToolBar::clear" ntqtoolbar.html#clear
+"QToolBar::label" ntqtoolbar.html#label
+"QToolBar::label" ntqtoolbar.html#label-prop
+"QToolBar::mainWindow" ntqtoolbar.html#mainWindow
+"QToolBar::setLabel" ntqtoolbar.html#setLabel
+"QToolBar::setStretchableWidget" ntqtoolbar.html#setStretchableWidget
+"QToolBox" ntqtoolbox.html
+"QToolBox::addItem" ntqtoolbox.html#addItem
+"QToolBox::count" ntqtoolbox.html#count
+"QToolBox::count" ntqtoolbox.html#count-prop
+"QToolBox::currentChanged" ntqtoolbox.html#currentChanged
+"QToolBox::currentIndex" ntqtoolbox.html#currentIndex
+"QToolBox::currentIndex" ntqtoolbox.html#currentIndex-prop
+"QToolBox::currentItem" ntqtoolbox.html#currentItem
+"QToolBox::indexOf" ntqtoolbox.html#indexOf
+"QToolBox::insertItem" ntqtoolbox.html#insertItem
+"QToolBox::isItemEnabled" ntqtoolbox.html#isItemEnabled
+"QToolBox::item" ntqtoolbox.html#item
+"QToolBox::itemIconSet" ntqtoolbox.html#itemIconSet
+"QToolBox::itemInserted" ntqtoolbox.html#itemInserted
+"QToolBox::itemLabel" ntqtoolbox.html#itemLabel
+"QToolBox::itemRemoved" ntqtoolbox.html#itemRemoved
+"QToolBox::itemToolTip" ntqtoolbox.html#itemToolTip
+"QToolBox::removeItem" ntqtoolbox.html#removeItem
+"QToolBox::setCurrentIndex" ntqtoolbox.html#setCurrentIndex
+"QToolBox::setCurrentItem" ntqtoolbox.html#setCurrentItem
+"QToolBox::setItemEnabled" ntqtoolbox.html#setItemEnabled
+"QToolBox::setItemIconSet" ntqtoolbox.html#setItemIconSet
+"QToolBox::setItemLabel" ntqtoolbox.html#setItemLabel
+"QToolBox::setItemToolTip" ntqtoolbox.html#setItemToolTip
+"QToolButton" ntqtoolbutton.html
+"QToolButton::TextPosition" ntqtoolbutton.html#TextPosition
+"QToolButton::autoRaise" ntqtoolbutton.html#autoRaise
+"QToolButton::autoRaise" ntqtoolbutton.html#autoRaise-prop
+"QToolButton::backgroundMode" ntqtoolbutton.html#backgroundMode-prop
+"QToolButton::iconSet" ntqtoolbutton.html#iconSet
+"QToolButton::iconSet" ntqtoolbutton.html#iconSet-prop
+"QToolButton::on" ntqtoolbutton.html#on-prop
+"QToolButton::openPopup" ntqtoolbutton.html#openPopup
+"QToolButton::pixmap" ntqtoolbutton.html#pixmap-prop
+"QToolButton::popup" ntqtoolbutton.html#popup
+"QToolButton::popupDelay" ntqtoolbutton.html#popupDelay
+"QToolButton::popupDelay" ntqtoolbutton.html#popupDelay-prop
+"QToolButton::setAutoRaise" ntqtoolbutton.html#setAutoRaise
+"QToolButton::setIconSet" ntqtoolbutton.html#setIconSet
+"QToolButton::setOn" ntqtoolbutton.html#setOn
+"QToolButton::setPopup" ntqtoolbutton.html#setPopup
+"QToolButton::setPopupDelay" ntqtoolbutton.html#setPopupDelay
+"QToolButton::setTextLabel" ntqtoolbutton.html#setTextLabel
+"QToolButton::setTextPosition" ntqtoolbutton.html#setTextPosition
+"QToolButton::setToggleButton" ntqtoolbutton.html#setToggleButton
+"QToolButton::setUsesBigPixmap" ntqtoolbutton.html#setUsesBigPixmap
+"QToolButton::setUsesTextLabel" ntqtoolbutton.html#setUsesTextLabel
+"QToolButton::textLabel" ntqtoolbutton.html#textLabel
+"QToolButton::textLabel" ntqtoolbutton.html#textLabel-prop
+"QToolButton::textPosition" ntqtoolbutton.html#textPosition
+"QToolButton::textPosition" ntqtoolbutton.html#textPosition-prop
+"QToolButton::toggle" ntqtoolbutton.html#toggle
+"QToolButton::toggleButton" ntqtoolbutton.html#toggleButton-prop
+"QToolButton::uses3D" ntqtoolbutton.html#uses3D
+"QToolButton::usesBigPixmap" ntqtoolbutton.html#usesBigPixmap
+"QToolButton::usesBigPixmap" ntqtoolbutton.html#usesBigPixmap-prop
+"QToolButton::usesTextLabel" ntqtoolbutton.html#usesTextLabel
+"QToolButton::usesTextLabel" ntqtoolbutton.html#usesTextLabel-prop
+"QToolButton::~QToolButton" ntqtoolbutton.html#~QToolButton
+"QToolTip" ntqtooltip.html
+"QToolTip::add" ntqtooltip.html#add
+"QToolTip::clear" ntqtooltip.html#clear
+"QToolTip::font" ntqtooltip.html#font
+"QToolTip::group" ntqtooltip.html#group
+"QToolTip::hide" ntqtooltip.html#hide
+"QToolTip::isGloballyEnabled" ntqtooltip.html#isGloballyEnabled
+"QToolTip::maybeTip" ntqtooltip.html#maybeTip
+"QToolTip::palette" ntqtooltip.html#palette
+"QToolTip::parentWidget" ntqtooltip.html#parentWidget
+"QToolTip::remove" ntqtooltip.html#remove
+"QToolTip::setFont" ntqtooltip.html#setFont
+"QToolTip::setGloballyEnabled" ntqtooltip.html#setGloballyEnabled
+"QToolTip::setPalette" ntqtooltip.html#setPalette
+"QToolTip::setWakeUpDelay" ntqtooltip.html#setWakeUpDelay
+"QToolTip::textFor" ntqtooltip.html#textFor
+"QToolTip::tip" ntqtooltip.html#tip
 "QToolTipGroup" qtooltipgroup.html
 "QToolTipGroup::delay" qtooltipgroup.html#delay
 "QToolTipGroup::delay" qtooltipgroup.html#delay-prop
@@ -7100,20 +7100,20 @@
 "QToolTipGroup::showTip" qtooltipgroup.html#showTip
 "QToolTipGroup::~QToolTipGroup" qtooltipgroup.html#~QToolTipGroup
 "QTransformedScreen::transformOrientation" qtransformedscreen.html#transformOrientation
-"QTranslator" qtranslator.html
-"QTranslator::SaveMode" qtranslator.html#SaveMode
-"QTranslator::clear" qtranslator.html#clear
-"QTranslator::contains" qtranslator.html#contains
-"QTranslator::findMessage" qtranslator.html#findMessage
-"QTranslator::insert" qtranslator.html#insert
-"QTranslator::isEmpty" qtranslator.html#isEmpty
-"QTranslator::load" qtranslator.html#load
-"QTranslator::messages" qtranslator.html#messages
-"QTranslator::remove" qtranslator.html#remove
-"QTranslator::save" qtranslator.html#save
-"QTranslator::squeeze" qtranslator.html#squeeze
-"QTranslator::unsqueeze" qtranslator.html#unsqueeze
-"QTranslator::~QTranslator" qtranslator.html#~QTranslator
+"QTranslator" ntqtranslator.html
+"QTranslator::SaveMode" ntqtranslator.html#SaveMode
+"QTranslator::clear" ntqtranslator.html#clear
+"QTranslator::contains" ntqtranslator.html#contains
+"QTranslator::findMessage" ntqtranslator.html#findMessage
+"QTranslator::insert" ntqtranslator.html#insert
+"QTranslator::isEmpty" ntqtranslator.html#isEmpty
+"QTranslator::load" ntqtranslator.html#load
+"QTranslator::messages" ntqtranslator.html#messages
+"QTranslator::remove" ntqtranslator.html#remove
+"QTranslator::save" ntqtranslator.html#save
+"QTranslator::squeeze" ntqtranslator.html#squeeze
+"QTranslator::unsqueeze" ntqtranslator.html#unsqueeze
+"QTranslator::~QTranslator" ntqtranslator.html#~QTranslator
 "QTranslatorMessage" qtranslatormessage.html
 "QTranslatorMessage::Prefix" qtranslatormessage.html#Prefix
 "QTranslatorMessage::comment" qtranslatormessage.html#comment
@@ -7131,7 +7131,7 @@
 "QTranslatorMessage::sourceText" qtranslatormessage.html#sourceText
 "QTranslatorMessage::translation" qtranslatormessage.html#translation
 "QTranslatorMessage::write" qtranslatormessage.html#write
-"QTsciiCodec" qtsciicodec.html
+"QTsciiCodec" ntqtsciicodec.html
 "QUriDrag" quridrag.html
 "QUriDrag::canDecode" quridrag.html#canDecode
 "QUriDrag::decode" quridrag.html#decode
@@ -7145,182 +7145,182 @@
 "QUriDrag::uriToLocalFile" quridrag.html#uriToLocalFile
 "QUriDrag::uriToUnicodeUri" quridrag.html#uriToUnicodeUri
 "QUriDrag::~QUriDrag" quridrag.html#~QUriDrag
-"QUrl" qurl.html
-"QUrl::addPath" qurl.html#addPath
-"QUrl::cdUp" qurl.html#cdUp
-"QUrl::decode" qurl.html#decode
-"QUrl::dirPath" qurl.html#dirPath
-"QUrl::encode" qurl.html#encode
-"QUrl::encodedPathAndQuery" qurl.html#encodedPathAndQuery
-"QUrl::fileName" qurl.html#fileName
-"QUrl::hasHost" qurl.html#hasHost
-"QUrl::hasPassword" qurl.html#hasPassword
-"QUrl::hasPath" qurl.html#hasPath
-"QUrl::hasPort" qurl.html#hasPort
-"QUrl::hasRef" qurl.html#hasRef
-"QUrl::hasUser" qurl.html#hasUser
-"QUrl::host" qurl.html#host
-"QUrl::isLocalFile" qurl.html#isLocalFile
-"QUrl::isRelativeUrl" qurl.html#isRelativeUrl
-"QUrl::isValid" qurl.html#isValid
-"QUrl::operator QString" qurl.html#operator-QString
-"QUrl::operator=" qurl.html#operator-eq
-"QUrl::operator==" qurl.html#operator-eq-eq
-"QUrl::parse" qurl.html#parse
-"QUrl::password" qurl.html#password
-"QUrl::path" qurl.html#path
-"QUrl::port" qurl.html#port
-"QUrl::protocol" qurl.html#protocol
-"QUrl::query" qurl.html#query
-"QUrl::ref" qurl.html#ref
-"QUrl::reset" qurl.html#reset
-"QUrl::setEncodedPathAndQuery" qurl.html#setEncodedPathAndQuery
-"QUrl::setFileName" qurl.html#setFileName
-"QUrl::setHost" qurl.html#setHost
-"QUrl::setPassword" qurl.html#setPassword
-"QUrl::setPath" qurl.html#setPath
-"QUrl::setPort" qurl.html#setPort
-"QUrl::setProtocol" qurl.html#setProtocol
-"QUrl::setQuery" qurl.html#setQuery
-"QUrl::setRef" qurl.html#setRef
-"QUrl::setUser" qurl.html#setUser
-"QUrl::toString" qurl.html#toString
-"QUrl::user" qurl.html#user
-"QUrl::~QUrl" qurl.html#~QUrl
-"QUrlInfo" qurlinfo.html
-"QUrlInfo::PermissionSpec" qurlinfo.html#PermissionSpec
-"QUrlInfo::equal" qurlinfo.html#equal
-"QUrlInfo::greaterThan" qurlinfo.html#greaterThan
-"QUrlInfo::group" qurlinfo.html#group
-"QUrlInfo::isDir" qurlinfo.html#isDir
-"QUrlInfo::isExecutable" qurlinfo.html#isExecutable
-"QUrlInfo::isFile" qurlinfo.html#isFile
-"QUrlInfo::isReadable" qurlinfo.html#isReadable
-"QUrlInfo::isSymLink" qurlinfo.html#isSymLink
-"QUrlInfo::isValid" qurlinfo.html#isValid
-"QUrlInfo::isWritable" qurlinfo.html#isWritable
-"QUrlInfo::lastModified" qurlinfo.html#lastModified
-"QUrlInfo::lastRead" qurlinfo.html#lastRead
-"QUrlInfo::lessThan" qurlinfo.html#lessThan
-"QUrlInfo::name" qurlinfo.html#name
-"QUrlInfo::operator=" qurlinfo.html#operator-eq
-"QUrlInfo::operator==" qurlinfo.html#operator-eq-eq
-"QUrlInfo::owner" qurlinfo.html#owner
-"QUrlInfo::permissions" qurlinfo.html#permissions
-"QUrlInfo::setDir" qurlinfo.html#setDir
-"QUrlInfo::setFile" qurlinfo.html#setFile
-"QUrlInfo::setGroup" qurlinfo.html#setGroup
-"QUrlInfo::setLastModified" qurlinfo.html#setLastModified
-"QUrlInfo::setName" qurlinfo.html#setName
-"QUrlInfo::setOwner" qurlinfo.html#setOwner
-"QUrlInfo::setPermissions" qurlinfo.html#setPermissions
-"QUrlInfo::setReadable" qurlinfo.html#setReadable
-"QUrlInfo::setSize" qurlinfo.html#setSize
-"QUrlInfo::setSymLink" qurlinfo.html#setSymLink
-"QUrlInfo::setWritable" qurlinfo.html#setWritable
-"QUrlInfo::size" qurlinfo.html#size
-"QUrlInfo::~QUrlInfo" qurlinfo.html#~QUrlInfo
-"QUrlOperator" qurloperator.html
-"QUrlOperator::addEntry" qurloperator.html#addEntry
-"QUrlOperator::clearEntries" qurloperator.html#clearEntries
-"QUrlOperator::connectionStateChanged" qurloperator.html#connectionStateChanged
-"QUrlOperator::copy" qurloperator.html#copy
-"QUrlOperator::createdDirectory" qurloperator.html#createdDirectory
-"QUrlOperator::data" qurloperator.html#data
-"QUrlOperator::dataTransferProgress" qurloperator.html#dataTransferProgress
-"QUrlOperator::deleteNetworkProtocol" qurloperator.html#deleteNetworkProtocol
-"QUrlOperator::finished" qurloperator.html#finished
-"QUrlOperator::get" qurloperator.html#get
-"QUrlOperator::getNetworkProtocol" qurloperator.html#getNetworkProtocol
-"QUrlOperator::info" qurloperator.html#info
-"QUrlOperator::isDir" qurloperator.html#isDir
-"QUrlOperator::itemChanged" qurloperator.html#itemChanged
-"QUrlOperator::listChildren" qurloperator.html#listChildren
-"QUrlOperator::mkdir" qurloperator.html#mkdir
-"QUrlOperator::nameFilter" qurloperator.html#nameFilter
-"QUrlOperator::newChildren" qurloperator.html#newChildren
-"QUrlOperator::put" qurloperator.html#put
-"QUrlOperator::remove" qurloperator.html#remove
-"QUrlOperator::removed" qurloperator.html#removed
-"QUrlOperator::rename" qurloperator.html#rename
-"QUrlOperator::setNameFilter" qurloperator.html#setNameFilter
-"QUrlOperator::start" qurloperator.html#start
-"QUrlOperator::startOperation" qurloperator.html#startOperation
-"QUrlOperator::startedNextCopy" qurloperator.html#startedNextCopy
-"QUrlOperator::stop" qurloperator.html#stop
-"QUrlOperator::~QUrlOperator" qurloperator.html#~QUrlOperator
-"QUuid" quuid.html
-"QUuid::Variant" quuid.html#Variant
-"QUuid::Version" quuid.html#Version
-"QUuid::createUuid" quuid.html#createUuid
-"QUuid::isNull" quuid.html#isNull
-"QUuid::operator QString" quuid.html#operator-QString
-"QUuid::operator!=" quuid.html#operator!-eq
-"QUuid::operator<" quuid.html#operator-lt
-"QUuid::operator=" quuid.html#operator-eq
-"QUuid::operator==" quuid.html#operator-eq-eq
-"QUuid::operator>" quuid.html#operator-gt
-"QUuid::toString" quuid.html#toString
-"QUuid::variant" quuid.html#variant
-"QUuid::version" quuid.html#version
-"QVBox" qvbox.html
+"QUrl" ntqurl.html
+"QUrl::addPath" ntqurl.html#addPath
+"QUrl::cdUp" ntqurl.html#cdUp
+"QUrl::decode" ntqurl.html#decode
+"QUrl::dirPath" ntqurl.html#dirPath
+"QUrl::encode" ntqurl.html#encode
+"QUrl::encodedPathAndQuery" ntqurl.html#encodedPathAndQuery
+"QUrl::fileName" ntqurl.html#fileName
+"QUrl::hasHost" ntqurl.html#hasHost
+"QUrl::hasPassword" ntqurl.html#hasPassword
+"QUrl::hasPath" ntqurl.html#hasPath
+"QUrl::hasPort" ntqurl.html#hasPort
+"QUrl::hasRef" ntqurl.html#hasRef
+"QUrl::hasUser" ntqurl.html#hasUser
+"QUrl::host" ntqurl.html#host
+"QUrl::isLocalFile" ntqurl.html#isLocalFile
+"QUrl::isRelativeUrl" ntqurl.html#isRelativeUrl
+"QUrl::isValid" ntqurl.html#isValid
+"QUrl::operator QString" ntqurl.html#operator-QString
+"QUrl::operator=" ntqurl.html#operator-eq
+"QUrl::operator==" ntqurl.html#operator-eq-eq
+"QUrl::parse" ntqurl.html#parse
+"QUrl::password" ntqurl.html#password
+"QUrl::path" ntqurl.html#path
+"QUrl::port" ntqurl.html#port
+"QUrl::protocol" ntqurl.html#protocol
+"QUrl::query" ntqurl.html#query
+"QUrl::ref" ntqurl.html#ref
+"QUrl::reset" ntqurl.html#reset
+"QUrl::setEncodedPathAndQuery" ntqurl.html#setEncodedPathAndQuery
+"QUrl::setFileName" ntqurl.html#setFileName
+"QUrl::setHost" ntqurl.html#setHost
+"QUrl::setPassword" ntqurl.html#setPassword
+"QUrl::setPath" ntqurl.html#setPath
+"QUrl::setPort" ntqurl.html#setPort
+"QUrl::setProtocol" ntqurl.html#setProtocol
+"QUrl::setQuery" ntqurl.html#setQuery
+"QUrl::setRef" ntqurl.html#setRef
+"QUrl::setUser" ntqurl.html#setUser
+"QUrl::toString" ntqurl.html#toString
+"QUrl::user" ntqurl.html#user
+"QUrl::~QUrl" ntqurl.html#~QUrl
+"QUrlInfo" ntqurlinfo.html
+"QUrlInfo::PermissionSpec" ntqurlinfo.html#PermissionSpec
+"QUrlInfo::equal" ntqurlinfo.html#equal
+"QUrlInfo::greaterThan" ntqurlinfo.html#greaterThan
+"QUrlInfo::group" ntqurlinfo.html#group
+"QUrlInfo::isDir" ntqurlinfo.html#isDir
+"QUrlInfo::isExecutable" ntqurlinfo.html#isExecutable
+"QUrlInfo::isFile" ntqurlinfo.html#isFile
+"QUrlInfo::isReadable" ntqurlinfo.html#isReadable
+"QUrlInfo::isSymLink" ntqurlinfo.html#isSymLink
+"QUrlInfo::isValid" ntqurlinfo.html#isValid
+"QUrlInfo::isWritable" ntqurlinfo.html#isWritable
+"QUrlInfo::lastModified" ntqurlinfo.html#lastModified
+"QUrlInfo::lastRead" ntqurlinfo.html#lastRead
+"QUrlInfo::lessThan" ntqurlinfo.html#lessThan
+"QUrlInfo::name" ntqurlinfo.html#name
+"QUrlInfo::operator=" ntqurlinfo.html#operator-eq
+"QUrlInfo::operator==" ntqurlinfo.html#operator-eq-eq
+"QUrlInfo::owner" ntqurlinfo.html#owner
+"QUrlInfo::permissions" ntqurlinfo.html#permissions
+"QUrlInfo::setDir" ntqurlinfo.html#setDir
+"QUrlInfo::setFile" ntqurlinfo.html#setFile
+"QUrlInfo::setGroup" ntqurlinfo.html#setGroup
+"QUrlInfo::setLastModified" ntqurlinfo.html#setLastModified
+"QUrlInfo::setName" ntqurlinfo.html#setName
+"QUrlInfo::setOwner" ntqurlinfo.html#setOwner
+"QUrlInfo::setPermissions" ntqurlinfo.html#setPermissions
+"QUrlInfo::setReadable" ntqurlinfo.html#setReadable
+"QUrlInfo::setSize" ntqurlinfo.html#setSize
+"QUrlInfo::setSymLink" ntqurlinfo.html#setSymLink
+"QUrlInfo::setWritable" ntqurlinfo.html#setWritable
+"QUrlInfo::size" ntqurlinfo.html#size
+"QUrlInfo::~QUrlInfo" ntqurlinfo.html#~QUrlInfo
+"QUrlOperator" ntqurloperator.html
+"QUrlOperator::addEntry" ntqurloperator.html#addEntry
+"QUrlOperator::clearEntries" ntqurloperator.html#clearEntries
+"QUrlOperator::connectionStateChanged" ntqurloperator.html#connectionStateChanged
+"QUrlOperator::copy" ntqurloperator.html#copy
+"QUrlOperator::createdDirectory" ntqurloperator.html#createdDirectory
+"QUrlOperator::data" ntqurloperator.html#data
+"QUrlOperator::dataTransferProgress" ntqurloperator.html#dataTransferProgress
+"QUrlOperator::deleteNetworkProtocol" ntqurloperator.html#deleteNetworkProtocol
+"QUrlOperator::finished" ntqurloperator.html#finished
+"QUrlOperator::get" ntqurloperator.html#get
+"QUrlOperator::getNetworkProtocol" ntqurloperator.html#getNetworkProtocol
+"QUrlOperator::info" ntqurloperator.html#info
+"QUrlOperator::isDir" ntqurloperator.html#isDir
+"QUrlOperator::itemChanged" ntqurloperator.html#itemChanged
+"QUrlOperator::listChildren" ntqurloperator.html#listChildren
+"QUrlOperator::mkdir" ntqurloperator.html#mkdir
+"QUrlOperator::nameFilter" ntqurloperator.html#nameFilter
+"QUrlOperator::newChildren" ntqurloperator.html#newChildren
+"QUrlOperator::put" ntqurloperator.html#put
+"QUrlOperator::remove" ntqurloperator.html#remove
+"QUrlOperator::removed" ntqurloperator.html#removed
+"QUrlOperator::rename" ntqurloperator.html#rename
+"QUrlOperator::setNameFilter" ntqurloperator.html#setNameFilter
+"QUrlOperator::start" ntqurloperator.html#start
+"QUrlOperator::startOperation" ntqurloperator.html#startOperation
+"QUrlOperator::startedNextCopy" ntqurloperator.html#startedNextCopy
+"QUrlOperator::stop" ntqurloperator.html#stop
+"QUrlOperator::~QUrlOperator" ntqurloperator.html#~QUrlOperator
+"QUuid" ntquuid.html
+"QUuid::Variant" ntquuid.html#Variant
+"QUuid::Version" ntquuid.html#Version
+"QUuid::createUuid" ntquuid.html#createUuid
+"QUuid::isNull" ntquuid.html#isNull
+"QUuid::operator QString" ntquuid.html#operator-QString
+"QUuid::operator!=" ntquuid.html#operator!-eq
+"QUuid::operator<" ntquuid.html#operator-lt
+"QUuid::operator=" ntquuid.html#operator-eq
+"QUuid::operator==" ntquuid.html#operator-eq-eq
+"QUuid::operator>" ntquuid.html#operator-gt
+"QUuid::toString" ntquuid.html#toString
+"QUuid::variant" ntquuid.html#variant
+"QUuid::version" ntquuid.html#version
+"QVBox" ntqvbox.html
 "QVBoxLayout" qvboxlayout.html
 "QVBoxLayout::~QVBoxLayout" qvboxlayout.html#~QVBoxLayout
-"QVButtonGroup" qvbuttongroup.html
-"QVButtonGroup::~QVButtonGroup" qvbuttongroup.html#~QVButtonGroup
-"QVGroupBox" qvgroupbox.html
-"QVGroupBox::~QVGroupBox" qvgroupbox.html#~QVGroupBox
-"QValidator" qvalidator.html
-"QValidator::State" qvalidator.html#State
-"QValidator::fixup" qvalidator.html#fixup
-"QValidator::validate" qvalidator.html#validate
-"QValidator::~QValidator" qvalidator.html#~QValidator
-"QValueList" qvaluelist.html
-"QValueList::ConstIterator" qvaluelist.html#ConstIterator
-"QValueList::Iterator" qvaluelist.html#Iterator
-"QValueList::append" qvaluelist.html#append
-"QValueList::at" qvaluelist.html#at
-"QValueList::back" qvaluelist.html#back
-"QValueList::begin" qvaluelist.html#begin
-"QValueList::clear" qvaluelist.html#clear
-"QValueList::constBegin" qvaluelist.html#constBegin
-"QValueList::constEnd" qvaluelist.html#constEnd
-"QValueList::const_iterator" qvaluelist.html#const_iterator
-"QValueList::const_pointer" qvaluelist.html#const_pointer
-"QValueList::const_reference" qvaluelist.html#const_reference
-"QValueList::contains" qvaluelist.html#contains
-"QValueList::count" qvaluelist.html#count
-"QValueList::empty" qvaluelist.html#empty
-"QValueList::end" qvaluelist.html#end
-"QValueList::erase" qvaluelist.html#erase
-"QValueList::find" qvaluelist.html#find
-"QValueList::findIndex" qvaluelist.html#findIndex
-"QValueList::first" qvaluelist.html#first
-"QValueList::fromLast" qvaluelist.html#fromLast
-"QValueList::front" qvaluelist.html#front
-"QValueList::insert" qvaluelist.html#insert
-"QValueList::isEmpty" qvaluelist.html#isEmpty
-"QValueList::iterator" qvaluelist.html#iterator
-"QValueList::last" qvaluelist.html#last
-"QValueList::operator!=" qvaluelist.html#operator!-eq
-"QValueList::operator+" qvaluelist.html#operator+
-"QValueList::operator+=" qvaluelist.html#operator+-eq
-"QValueList::operator<<" qvaluelist.html#operator-lt-lt
-"QValueList::operator=" qvaluelist.html#operator-eq
-"QValueList::operator==" qvaluelist.html#operator-eq-eq
-"QValueList::operator[]" qvaluelist.html#operator[]
-"QValueList::pointer" qvaluelist.html#pointer
-"QValueList::pop_back" qvaluelist.html#pop_back
-"QValueList::pop_front" qvaluelist.html#pop_front
-"QValueList::prepend" qvaluelist.html#prepend
-"QValueList::push_back" qvaluelist.html#push_back
-"QValueList::push_front" qvaluelist.html#push_front
-"QValueList::reference" qvaluelist.html#reference
-"QValueList::remove" qvaluelist.html#remove
-"QValueList::size" qvaluelist.html#size
-"QValueList::size_type" qvaluelist.html#size_type
-"QValueList::value_type" qvaluelist.html#value_type
-"QValueList::~QValueList" qvaluelist.html#~QValueList
+"QVButtonGroup" ntqvbuttongroup.html
+"QVButtonGroup::~QVButtonGroup" ntqvbuttongroup.html#~QVButtonGroup
+"QVGroupBox" ntqvgroupbox.html
+"QVGroupBox::~QVGroupBox" ntqvgroupbox.html#~QVGroupBox
+"QValidator" ntqvalidator.html
+"QValidator::State" ntqvalidator.html#State
+"QValidator::fixup" ntqvalidator.html#fixup
+"QValidator::validate" ntqvalidator.html#validate
+"QValidator::~QValidator" ntqvalidator.html#~QValidator
+"QValueList" ntqvaluelist.html
+"QValueList::ConstIterator" ntqvaluelist.html#ConstIterator
+"QValueList::Iterator" ntqvaluelist.html#Iterator
+"QValueList::append" ntqvaluelist.html#append
+"QValueList::at" ntqvaluelist.html#at
+"QValueList::back" ntqvaluelist.html#back
+"QValueList::begin" ntqvaluelist.html#begin
+"QValueList::clear" ntqvaluelist.html#clear
+"QValueList::constBegin" ntqvaluelist.html#constBegin
+"QValueList::constEnd" ntqvaluelist.html#constEnd
+"QValueList::const_iterator" ntqvaluelist.html#const_iterator
+"QValueList::const_pointer" ntqvaluelist.html#const_pointer
+"QValueList::const_reference" ntqvaluelist.html#const_reference
+"QValueList::contains" ntqvaluelist.html#contains
+"QValueList::count" ntqvaluelist.html#count
+"QValueList::empty" ntqvaluelist.html#empty
+"QValueList::end" ntqvaluelist.html#end
+"QValueList::erase" ntqvaluelist.html#erase
+"QValueList::find" ntqvaluelist.html#find
+"QValueList::findIndex" ntqvaluelist.html#findIndex
+"QValueList::first" ntqvaluelist.html#first
+"QValueList::fromLast" ntqvaluelist.html#fromLast
+"QValueList::front" ntqvaluelist.html#front
+"QValueList::insert" ntqvaluelist.html#insert
+"QValueList::isEmpty" ntqvaluelist.html#isEmpty
+"QValueList::iterator" ntqvaluelist.html#iterator
+"QValueList::last" ntqvaluelist.html#last
+"QValueList::operator!=" ntqvaluelist.html#operator!-eq
+"QValueList::operator+" ntqvaluelist.html#operator+
+"QValueList::operator+=" ntqvaluelist.html#operator+-eq
+"QValueList::operator<<" ntqvaluelist.html#operator-lt-lt
+"QValueList::operator=" ntqvaluelist.html#operator-eq
+"QValueList::operator==" ntqvaluelist.html#operator-eq-eq
+"QValueList::operator[]" ntqvaluelist.html#operator[]
+"QValueList::pointer" ntqvaluelist.html#pointer
+"QValueList::pop_back" ntqvaluelist.html#pop_back
+"QValueList::pop_front" ntqvaluelist.html#pop_front
+"QValueList::prepend" ntqvaluelist.html#prepend
+"QValueList::push_back" ntqvaluelist.html#push_back
+"QValueList::push_front" ntqvaluelist.html#push_front
+"QValueList::reference" ntqvaluelist.html#reference
+"QValueList::remove" ntqvaluelist.html#remove
+"QValueList::size" ntqvaluelist.html#size
+"QValueList::size_type" ntqvaluelist.html#size_type
+"QValueList::value_type" ntqvaluelist.html#value_type
+"QValueList::~QValueList" ntqvaluelist.html#~QValueList
 "QValueListConstIterator" qvaluelistconstiterator.html
 "QValueListConstIterator::operator!=" qvaluelistconstiterator.html#operator!-eq
 "QValueListConstIterator::operator*" qvaluelistconstiterator.html#operator*
@@ -7341,161 +7341,161 @@
 "QValueListIterator::pointer" qvaluelistiterator.html#pointer
 "QValueListIterator::reference" qvaluelistiterator.html#reference
 "QValueListIterator::value_type" qvaluelistiterator.html#value_type
-"QValueStack" qvaluestack.html
-"QValueStack::pop" qvaluestack.html#pop
-"QValueStack::push" qvaluestack.html#push
-"QValueStack::top" qvaluestack.html#top
-"QValueStack::~QValueStack" qvaluestack.html#~QValueStack
-"QValueVector" qvaluevector.html
-"QValueVector::ConstIterator" qvaluevector.html#ConstIterator
-"QValueVector::Iterator" qvaluevector.html#Iterator
-"QValueVector::ValueType" qvaluevector.html#ValueType
-"QValueVector::append" qvaluevector.html#append
-"QValueVector::at" qvaluevector.html#at
-"QValueVector::back" qvaluevector.html#back
-"QValueVector::begin" qvaluevector.html#begin
-"QValueVector::capacity" qvaluevector.html#capacity
-"QValueVector::clear" qvaluevector.html#clear
-"QValueVector::constBegin" qvaluevector.html#constBegin
-"QValueVector::constEnd" qvaluevector.html#constEnd
-"QValueVector::const_iterator" qvaluevector.html#const_iterator
-"QValueVector::const_pointer" qvaluevector.html#const_pointer
-"QValueVector::const_reference" qvaluevector.html#const_reference
-"QValueVector::count" qvaluevector.html#count
-"QValueVector::difference_type" qvaluevector.html#difference_type
-"QValueVector::empty" qvaluevector.html#empty
-"QValueVector::end" qvaluevector.html#end
-"QValueVector::erase" qvaluevector.html#erase
-"QValueVector::first" qvaluevector.html#first
-"QValueVector::front" qvaluevector.html#front
-"QValueVector::insert" qvaluevector.html#insert
-"QValueVector::isEmpty" qvaluevector.html#isEmpty
-"QValueVector::iterator" qvaluevector.html#iterator
-"QValueVector::last" qvaluevector.html#last
-"QValueVector::operator=" qvaluevector.html#operator-eq
-"QValueVector::operator==" qvaluevector.html#operator-eq-eq
-"QValueVector::operator[]" qvaluevector.html#operator[]
-"QValueVector::pointer" qvaluevector.html#pointer
-"QValueVector::pop_back" qvaluevector.html#pop_back
-"QValueVector::push_back" qvaluevector.html#push_back
-"QValueVector::reference" qvaluevector.html#reference
-"QValueVector::reserve" qvaluevector.html#reserve
-"QValueVector::resize" qvaluevector.html#resize
-"QValueVector::size" qvaluevector.html#size
-"QValueVector::size_type" qvaluevector.html#size_type
-"QValueVector::value_type" qvaluevector.html#value_type
-"QValueVector::~QValueVector" qvaluevector.html#~QValueVector
-"QVariant" qvariant.html
-"QVariant::Type" qvariant.html#Type
-"QVariant::asBitArray" qvariant.html#asBitArray
-"QVariant::asBitmap" qvariant.html#asBitmap
-"QVariant::asBool" qvariant.html#asBool
-"QVariant::asBrush" qvariant.html#asBrush
-"QVariant::asByteArray" qvariant.html#asByteArray
-"QVariant::asCString" qvariant.html#asCString
-"QVariant::asColor" qvariant.html#asColor
-"QVariant::asColorGroup" qvariant.html#asColorGroup
-"QVariant::asCursor" qvariant.html#asCursor
-"QVariant::asDate" qvariant.html#asDate
-"QVariant::asDateTime" qvariant.html#asDateTime
-"QVariant::asDouble" qvariant.html#asDouble
-"QVariant::asFont" qvariant.html#asFont
-"QVariant::asIconSet" qvariant.html#asIconSet
-"QVariant::asImage" qvariant.html#asImage
-"QVariant::asInt" qvariant.html#asInt
-"QVariant::asKeySequence" qvariant.html#asKeySequence
-"QVariant::asList" qvariant.html#asList
-"QVariant::asLongLong" qvariant.html#asLongLong
-"QVariant::asMap" qvariant.html#asMap
-"QVariant::asPalette" qvariant.html#asPalette
-"QVariant::asPen" qvariant.html#asPen
-"QVariant::asPixmap" qvariant.html#asPixmap
-"QVariant::asPoint" qvariant.html#asPoint
-"QVariant::asPointArray" qvariant.html#asPointArray
-"QVariant::asRect" qvariant.html#asRect
-"QVariant::asRegion" qvariant.html#asRegion
-"QVariant::asSize" qvariant.html#asSize
-"QVariant::asSizePolicy" qvariant.html#asSizePolicy
-"QVariant::asString" qvariant.html#asString
-"QVariant::asStringList" qvariant.html#asStringList
-"QVariant::asTime" qvariant.html#asTime
-"QVariant::asUInt" qvariant.html#asUInt
-"QVariant::asULongLong" qvariant.html#asULongLong
-"QVariant::canCast" qvariant.html#canCast
-"QVariant::cast" qvariant.html#cast
-"QVariant::clear" qvariant.html#clear
-"QVariant::isNull" qvariant.html#isNull
-"QVariant::isValid" qvariant.html#isValid
-"QVariant::nameToType" qvariant.html#nameToType
-"QVariant::operator!=" qvariant.html#operator!-eq
-"QVariant::operator=" qvariant.html#operator-eq
-"QVariant::operator==" qvariant.html#operator-eq-eq
-"QVariant::toBitArray" qvariant.html#toBitArray
-"QVariant::toBitmap" qvariant.html#toBitmap
-"QVariant::toBool" qvariant.html#toBool
-"QVariant::toBrush" qvariant.html#toBrush
-"QVariant::toByteArray" qvariant.html#toByteArray
-"QVariant::toCString" qvariant.html#toCString
-"QVariant::toColor" qvariant.html#toColor
-"QVariant::toColorGroup" qvariant.html#toColorGroup
-"QVariant::toCursor" qvariant.html#toCursor
-"QVariant::toDate" qvariant.html#toDate
-"QVariant::toDateTime" qvariant.html#toDateTime
-"QVariant::toDouble" qvariant.html#toDouble
-"QVariant::toFont" qvariant.html#toFont
-"QVariant::toIconSet" qvariant.html#toIconSet
-"QVariant::toImage" qvariant.html#toImage
-"QVariant::toInt" qvariant.html#toInt
-"QVariant::toKeySequence" qvariant.html#toKeySequence
-"QVariant::toList" qvariant.html#toList
-"QVariant::toLongLong" qvariant.html#toLongLong
-"QVariant::toMap" qvariant.html#toMap
-"QVariant::toPalette" qvariant.html#toPalette
-"QVariant::toPen" qvariant.html#toPen
-"QVariant::toPixmap" qvariant.html#toPixmap
-"QVariant::toPoint" qvariant.html#toPoint
-"QVariant::toPointArray" qvariant.html#toPointArray
-"QVariant::toRect" qvariant.html#toRect
-"QVariant::toRegion" qvariant.html#toRegion
-"QVariant::toSize" qvariant.html#toSize
-"QVariant::toSizePolicy" qvariant.html#toSizePolicy
-"QVariant::toString" qvariant.html#toString
-"QVariant::toStringList" qvariant.html#toStringList
-"QVariant::toTime" qvariant.html#toTime
-"QVariant::toUInt" qvariant.html#toUInt
-"QVariant::toULongLong" qvariant.html#toULongLong
-"QVariant::type" qvariant.html#type
-"QVariant::typeName" qvariant.html#typeName
-"QVariant::typeToName" qvariant.html#typeToName
-"QVariant::~QVariant" qvariant.html#~QVariant
-"QVector Class Reference (obsolete)" qvector.html
-"QWMatrix" qwmatrix.html
-"QWMatrix::TransformationMode" qwmatrix.html#TransformationMode
-"QWMatrix::det" qwmatrix.html#det
-"QWMatrix::dx" qwmatrix.html#dx
-"QWMatrix::dy" qwmatrix.html#dy
-"QWMatrix::invert" qwmatrix.html#invert
-"QWMatrix::isIdentity" qwmatrix.html#isIdentity
-"QWMatrix::isInvertible" qwmatrix.html#isInvertible
-"QWMatrix::m11" qwmatrix.html#m11
-"QWMatrix::m12" qwmatrix.html#m12
-"QWMatrix::m21" qwmatrix.html#m21
-"QWMatrix::m22" qwmatrix.html#m22
-"QWMatrix::map" qwmatrix.html#map
-"QWMatrix::mapRect" qwmatrix.html#mapRect
-"QWMatrix::mapToPolygon" qwmatrix.html#mapToPolygon
-"QWMatrix::mapToRegion" qwmatrix.html#mapToRegion
-"QWMatrix::operator!=" qwmatrix.html#operator!-eq
-"QWMatrix::operator*=" qwmatrix.html#operator*-eq
-"QWMatrix::operator==" qwmatrix.html#operator-eq-eq
-"QWMatrix::reset" qwmatrix.html#reset
-"QWMatrix::rotate" qwmatrix.html#rotate
-"QWMatrix::scale" qwmatrix.html#scale
-"QWMatrix::setMatrix" qwmatrix.html#setMatrix
-"QWMatrix::setTransformationMode" qwmatrix.html#setTransformationMode
-"QWMatrix::shear" qwmatrix.html#shear
-"QWMatrix::transformationMode" qwmatrix.html#transformationMode
-"QWMatrix::translate" qwmatrix.html#translate
+"QValueStack" ntqvaluestack.html
+"QValueStack::pop" ntqvaluestack.html#pop
+"QValueStack::push" ntqvaluestack.html#push
+"QValueStack::top" ntqvaluestack.html#top
+"QValueStack::~QValueStack" ntqvaluestack.html#~QValueStack
+"QValueVector" ntqvaluevector.html
+"QValueVector::ConstIterator" ntqvaluevector.html#ConstIterator
+"QValueVector::Iterator" ntqvaluevector.html#Iterator
+"QValueVector::ValueType" ntqvaluevector.html#ValueType
+"QValueVector::append" ntqvaluevector.html#append
+"QValueVector::at" ntqvaluevector.html#at
+"QValueVector::back" ntqvaluevector.html#back
+"QValueVector::begin" ntqvaluevector.html#begin
+"QValueVector::capacity" ntqvaluevector.html#capacity
+"QValueVector::clear" ntqvaluevector.html#clear
+"QValueVector::constBegin" ntqvaluevector.html#constBegin
+"QValueVector::constEnd" ntqvaluevector.html#constEnd
+"QValueVector::const_iterator" ntqvaluevector.html#const_iterator
+"QValueVector::const_pointer" ntqvaluevector.html#const_pointer
+"QValueVector::const_reference" ntqvaluevector.html#const_reference
+"QValueVector::count" ntqvaluevector.html#count
+"QValueVector::difference_type" ntqvaluevector.html#difference_type
+"QValueVector::empty" ntqvaluevector.html#empty
+"QValueVector::end" ntqvaluevector.html#end
+"QValueVector::erase" ntqvaluevector.html#erase
+"QValueVector::first" ntqvaluevector.html#first
+"QValueVector::front" ntqvaluevector.html#front
+"QValueVector::insert" ntqvaluevector.html#insert
+"QValueVector::isEmpty" ntqvaluevector.html#isEmpty
+"QValueVector::iterator" ntqvaluevector.html#iterator
+"QValueVector::last" ntqvaluevector.html#last
+"QValueVector::operator=" ntqvaluevector.html#operator-eq
+"QValueVector::operator==" ntqvaluevector.html#operator-eq-eq
+"QValueVector::operator[]" ntqvaluevector.html#operator[]
+"QValueVector::pointer" ntqvaluevector.html#pointer
+"QValueVector::pop_back" ntqvaluevector.html#pop_back
+"QValueVector::push_back" ntqvaluevector.html#push_back
+"QValueVector::reference" ntqvaluevector.html#reference
+"QValueVector::reserve" ntqvaluevector.html#reserve
+"QValueVector::resize" ntqvaluevector.html#resize
+"QValueVector::size" ntqvaluevector.html#size
+"QValueVector::size_type" ntqvaluevector.html#size_type
+"QValueVector::value_type" ntqvaluevector.html#value_type
+"QValueVector::~QValueVector" ntqvaluevector.html#~QValueVector
+"QVariant" ntqvariant.html
+"QVariant::Type" ntqvariant.html#Type
+"QVariant::asBitArray" ntqvariant.html#asBitArray
+"QVariant::asBitmap" ntqvariant.html#asBitmap
+"QVariant::asBool" ntqvariant.html#asBool
+"QVariant::asBrush" ntqvariant.html#asBrush
+"QVariant::asByteArray" ntqvariant.html#asByteArray
+"QVariant::asCString" ntqvariant.html#asCString
+"QVariant::asColor" ntqvariant.html#asColor
+"QVariant::asColorGroup" ntqvariant.html#asColorGroup
+"QVariant::asCursor" ntqvariant.html#asCursor
+"QVariant::asDate" ntqvariant.html#asDate
+"QVariant::asDateTime" ntqvariant.html#asDateTime
+"QVariant::asDouble" ntqvariant.html#asDouble
+"QVariant::asFont" ntqvariant.html#asFont
+"QVariant::asIconSet" ntqvariant.html#asIconSet
+"QVariant::asImage" ntqvariant.html#asImage
+"QVariant::asInt" ntqvariant.html#asInt
+"QVariant::asKeySequence" ntqvariant.html#asKeySequence
+"QVariant::asList" ntqvariant.html#asList
+"QVariant::asLongLong" ntqvariant.html#asLongLong
+"QVariant::asMap" ntqvariant.html#asMap
+"QVariant::asPalette" ntqvariant.html#asPalette
+"QVariant::asPen" ntqvariant.html#asPen
+"QVariant::asPixmap" ntqvariant.html#asPixmap
+"QVariant::asPoint" ntqvariant.html#asPoint
+"QVariant::asPointArray" ntqvariant.html#asPointArray
+"QVariant::asRect" ntqvariant.html#asRect
+"QVariant::asRegion" ntqvariant.html#asRegion
+"QVariant::asSize" ntqvariant.html#asSize
+"QVariant::asSizePolicy" ntqvariant.html#asSizePolicy
+"QVariant::asString" ntqvariant.html#asString
+"QVariant::asStringList" ntqvariant.html#asStringList
+"QVariant::asTime" ntqvariant.html#asTime
+"QVariant::asUInt" ntqvariant.html#asUInt
+"QVariant::asULongLong" ntqvariant.html#asULongLong
+"QVariant::canCast" ntqvariant.html#canCast
+"QVariant::cast" ntqvariant.html#cast
+"QVariant::clear" ntqvariant.html#clear
+"QVariant::isNull" ntqvariant.html#isNull
+"QVariant::isValid" ntqvariant.html#isValid
+"QVariant::nameToType" ntqvariant.html#nameToType
+"QVariant::operator!=" ntqvariant.html#operator!-eq
+"QVariant::operator=" ntqvariant.html#operator-eq
+"QVariant::operator==" ntqvariant.html#operator-eq-eq
+"QVariant::toBitArray" ntqvariant.html#toBitArray
+"QVariant::toBitmap" ntqvariant.html#toBitmap
+"QVariant::toBool" ntqvariant.html#toBool
+"QVariant::toBrush" ntqvariant.html#toBrush
+"QVariant::toByteArray" ntqvariant.html#toByteArray
+"QVariant::toCString" ntqvariant.html#toCString
+"QVariant::toColor" ntqvariant.html#toColor
+"QVariant::toColorGroup" ntqvariant.html#toColorGroup
+"QVariant::toCursor" ntqvariant.html#toCursor
+"QVariant::toDate" ntqvariant.html#toDate
+"QVariant::toDateTime" ntqvariant.html#toDateTime
+"QVariant::toDouble" ntqvariant.html#toDouble
+"QVariant::toFont" ntqvariant.html#toFont
+"QVariant::toIconSet" ntqvariant.html#toIconSet
+"QVariant::toImage" ntqvariant.html#toImage
+"QVariant::toInt" ntqvariant.html#toInt
+"QVariant::toKeySequence" ntqvariant.html#toKeySequence
+"QVariant::toList" ntqvariant.html#toList
+"QVariant::toLongLong" ntqvariant.html#toLongLong
+"QVariant::toMap" ntqvariant.html#toMap
+"QVariant::toPalette" ntqvariant.html#toPalette
+"QVariant::toPen" ntqvariant.html#toPen
+"QVariant::toPixmap" ntqvariant.html#toPixmap
+"QVariant::toPoint" ntqvariant.html#toPoint
+"QVariant::toPointArray" ntqvariant.html#toPointArray
+"QVariant::toRect" ntqvariant.html#toRect
+"QVariant::toRegion" ntqvariant.html#toRegion
+"QVariant::toSize" ntqvariant.html#toSize
+"QVariant::toSizePolicy" ntqvariant.html#toSizePolicy
+"QVariant::toString" ntqvariant.html#toString
+"QVariant::toStringList" ntqvariant.html#toStringList
+"QVariant::toTime" ntqvariant.html#toTime
+"QVariant::toUInt" ntqvariant.html#toUInt
+"QVariant::toULongLong" ntqvariant.html#toULongLong
+"QVariant::type" ntqvariant.html#type
+"QVariant::typeName" ntqvariant.html#typeName
+"QVariant::typeToName" ntqvariant.html#typeToName
+"QVariant::~QVariant" ntqvariant.html#~QVariant
+"QVector Class Reference (obsolete)" ntqvector.html
+"QWMatrix" ntqwmatrix.html
+"QWMatrix::TransformationMode" ntqwmatrix.html#TransformationMode
+"QWMatrix::det" ntqwmatrix.html#det
+"QWMatrix::dx" ntqwmatrix.html#dx
+"QWMatrix::dy" ntqwmatrix.html#dy
+"QWMatrix::invert" ntqwmatrix.html#invert
+"QWMatrix::isIdentity" ntqwmatrix.html#isIdentity
+"QWMatrix::isInvertible" ntqwmatrix.html#isInvertible
+"QWMatrix::m11" ntqwmatrix.html#m11
+"QWMatrix::m12" ntqwmatrix.html#m12
+"QWMatrix::m21" ntqwmatrix.html#m21
+"QWMatrix::m22" ntqwmatrix.html#m22
+"QWMatrix::map" ntqwmatrix.html#map
+"QWMatrix::mapRect" ntqwmatrix.html#mapRect
+"QWMatrix::mapToPolygon" ntqwmatrix.html#mapToPolygon
+"QWMatrix::mapToRegion" ntqwmatrix.html#mapToRegion
+"QWMatrix::operator!=" ntqwmatrix.html#operator!-eq
+"QWMatrix::operator*=" ntqwmatrix.html#operator*-eq
+"QWMatrix::operator==" ntqwmatrix.html#operator-eq-eq
+"QWMatrix::reset" ntqwmatrix.html#reset
+"QWMatrix::rotate" ntqwmatrix.html#rotate
+"QWMatrix::scale" ntqwmatrix.html#scale
+"QWMatrix::setMatrix" ntqwmatrix.html#setMatrix
+"QWMatrix::setTransformationMode" ntqwmatrix.html#setTransformationMode
+"QWMatrix::shear" ntqwmatrix.html#shear
+"QWMatrix::transformationMode" ntqwmatrix.html#transformationMode
+"QWMatrix::translate" ntqwmatrix.html#translate
 "QWSDecoration" qwsdecoration.html
 "QWSDecoration::Region" qwsdecoration.html#Region
 "QWSDecoration::close" qwsdecoration.html#close
@@ -7574,24 +7574,24 @@
 "QWSWindow::show" qwswindow.html#show
 "QWSWindow::winId" qwswindow.html#winId
 "QWSWindow::~QWSWindow" qwswindow.html#~QWSWindow
-"QWaitCondition" qwaitcondition.html
-"QWaitCondition::wait" qwaitcondition.html#wait
-"QWaitCondition::wakeAll" qwaitcondition.html#wakeAll
-"QWaitCondition::wakeOne" qwaitcondition.html#wakeOne
-"QWaitCondition::~QWaitCondition" qwaitcondition.html#~QWaitCondition
-"QWhatsThis" qwhatsthis.html
-"QWhatsThis::add" qwhatsthis.html#add
-"QWhatsThis::clicked" qwhatsthis.html#clicked
-"QWhatsThis::display" qwhatsthis.html#display
-"QWhatsThis::enterWhatsThisMode" qwhatsthis.html#enterWhatsThisMode
-"QWhatsThis::inWhatsThisMode" qwhatsthis.html#inWhatsThisMode
-"QWhatsThis::leaveWhatsThisMode" qwhatsthis.html#leaveWhatsThisMode
-"QWhatsThis::remove" qwhatsthis.html#remove
-"QWhatsThis::setFont" qwhatsthis.html#setFont
-"QWhatsThis::text" qwhatsthis.html#text
-"QWhatsThis::textFor" qwhatsthis.html#textFor
-"QWhatsThis::whatsThisButton" qwhatsthis.html#whatsThisButton
-"QWhatsThis::~QWhatsThis" qwhatsthis.html#~QWhatsThis
+"QWaitCondition" ntqwaitcondition.html
+"QWaitCondition::wait" ntqwaitcondition.html#wait
+"QWaitCondition::wakeAll" ntqwaitcondition.html#wakeAll
+"QWaitCondition::wakeOne" ntqwaitcondition.html#wakeOne
+"QWaitCondition::~QWaitCondition" ntqwaitcondition.html#~QWaitCondition
+"QWhatsThis" ntqwhatsthis.html
+"QWhatsThis::add" ntqwhatsthis.html#add
+"QWhatsThis::clicked" ntqwhatsthis.html#clicked
+"QWhatsThis::display" ntqwhatsthis.html#display
+"QWhatsThis::enterWhatsThisMode" ntqwhatsthis.html#enterWhatsThisMode
+"QWhatsThis::inWhatsThisMode" ntqwhatsthis.html#inWhatsThisMode
+"QWhatsThis::leaveWhatsThisMode" ntqwhatsthis.html#leaveWhatsThisMode
+"QWhatsThis::remove" ntqwhatsthis.html#remove
+"QWhatsThis::setFont" ntqwhatsthis.html#setFont
+"QWhatsThis::text" ntqwhatsthis.html#text
+"QWhatsThis::textFor" ntqwhatsthis.html#textFor
+"QWhatsThis::whatsThisButton" ntqwhatsthis.html#whatsThisButton
+"QWhatsThis::~QWhatsThis" ntqwhatsthis.html#~QWhatsThis
 "QWheelEvent" qwheelevent.html
 "QWheelEvent::accept" qwheelevent.html#accept
 "QWheelEvent::delta" qwheelevent.html#delta
@@ -7605,298 +7605,298 @@
 "QWheelEvent::state" qwheelevent.html#state
 "QWheelEvent::x" qwheelevent.html#x
 "QWheelEvent::y" qwheelevent.html#y
-"QWidget" qwidget.html
-"QWidget::BackgroundOrigin" qwidget.html#BackgroundOrigin
-"QWidget::FocusPolicy" qwidget.html#FocusPolicy
-"QWidget::acceptDrops" qwidget.html#acceptDrops
-"QWidget::acceptDrops" qwidget.html#acceptDrops-prop
-"QWidget::adjustSize" qwidget.html#adjustSize
-"QWidget::autoMask" qwidget.html#autoMask
-"QWidget::autoMask" qwidget.html#autoMask-prop
-"QWidget::backgroundBrush" qwidget.html#backgroundBrush
-"QWidget::backgroundBrush" qwidget.html#backgroundBrush-prop
-"QWidget::backgroundMode" qwidget.html#backgroundMode
-"QWidget::backgroundMode" qwidget.html#backgroundMode-prop
-"QWidget::backgroundOrigin" qwidget.html#backgroundOrigin
-"QWidget::backgroundOrigin" qwidget.html#backgroundOrigin-prop
-"QWidget::baseSize" qwidget.html#baseSize
-"QWidget::baseSize" qwidget.html#baseSize-prop
-"QWidget::caption" qwidget.html#caption
-"QWidget::caption" qwidget.html#caption-prop
-"QWidget::childAt" qwidget.html#childAt
-"QWidget::childrenRect" qwidget.html#childrenRect
-"QWidget::childrenRect" qwidget.html#childrenRect-prop
-"QWidget::childrenRegion" qwidget.html#childrenRegion
-"QWidget::childrenRegion" qwidget.html#childrenRegion-prop
-"QWidget::clearFocus" qwidget.html#clearFocus
-"QWidget::clearMask" qwidget.html#clearMask
-"QWidget::clearWFlags" qwidget.html#clearWFlags
-"QWidget::clipRegion" qwidget.html#clipRegion
-"QWidget::close" qwidget.html#close
-"QWidget::closeEvent" qwidget.html#closeEvent
-"QWidget::colorGroup" qwidget.html#colorGroup
-"QWidget::colorGroup" qwidget.html#colorGroup-prop
-"QWidget::constPolish" qwidget.html#constPolish
-"QWidget::contextMenuEvent" qwidget.html#contextMenuEvent
-"QWidget::create" qwidget.html#create
-"QWidget::cursor" qwidget.html#cursor
-"QWidget::cursor" qwidget.html#cursor-prop
-"QWidget::customWhatsThis" qwidget.html#customWhatsThis
-"QWidget::customWhatsThis" qwidget.html#customWhatsThis-prop
-"QWidget::destroy" qwidget.html#destroy
-"QWidget::dragEnterEvent" qwidget.html#dragEnterEvent
-"QWidget::dragLeaveEvent" qwidget.html#dragLeaveEvent
-"QWidget::dragMoveEvent" qwidget.html#dragMoveEvent
-"QWidget::drawText" qwidget.html#drawText
-"QWidget::dropEvent" qwidget.html#dropEvent
-"QWidget::enabled" qwidget.html#enabled-prop
-"QWidget::enabledChange" qwidget.html#enabledChange
-"QWidget::enterEvent" qwidget.html#enterEvent
-"QWidget::erase" qwidget.html#erase
-"QWidget::eraseColor" qwidget.html#eraseColor
-"QWidget::erasePixmap" qwidget.html#erasePixmap
-"QWidget::event" qwidget.html#event
-"QWidget::find" qwidget.html#find
-"QWidget::focus" qwidget.html#focus-prop
-"QWidget::focusData" qwidget.html#focusData
-"QWidget::focusEnabled" qwidget.html#focusEnabled-prop
-"QWidget::focusInEvent" qwidget.html#focusInEvent
-"QWidget::focusNextPrevChild" qwidget.html#focusNextPrevChild
-"QWidget::focusOutEvent" qwidget.html#focusOutEvent
-"QWidget::focusPolicy" qwidget.html#focusPolicy
-"QWidget::focusPolicy" qwidget.html#focusPolicy-prop
-"QWidget::focusProxy" qwidget.html#focusProxy
-"QWidget::focusWidget" qwidget.html#focusWidget
-"QWidget::font" qwidget.html#font
-"QWidget::font" qwidget.html#font-prop
-"QWidget::fontChange" qwidget.html#fontChange
-"QWidget::fontInfo" qwidget.html#fontInfo
-"QWidget::fontMetrics" qwidget.html#fontMetrics
-"QWidget::foregroundColor" qwidget.html#foregroundColor
-"QWidget::frameGeometry" qwidget.html#frameGeometry
-"QWidget::frameGeometry" qwidget.html#frameGeometry-prop
-"QWidget::frameSize" qwidget.html#frameSize
-"QWidget::frameSize" qwidget.html#frameSize-prop
-"QWidget::fullScreen" qwidget.html#fullScreen-prop
-"QWidget::geometry" qwidget.html#geometry
-"QWidget::geometry" qwidget.html#geometry-prop
-"QWidget::getWFlags" qwidget.html#getWFlags
-"QWidget::grabKeyboard" qwidget.html#grabKeyboard
-"QWidget::grabMouse" qwidget.html#grabMouse
-"QWidget::hasFocus" qwidget.html#hasFocus
-"QWidget::hasMouse" qwidget.html#hasMouse
-"QWidget::hasMouseTracking" qwidget.html#hasMouseTracking
-"QWidget::height" qwidget.html#height
-"QWidget::height" qwidget.html#height-prop
-"QWidget::heightForWidth" qwidget.html#heightForWidth
-"QWidget::hidden" qwidget.html#hidden-prop
-"QWidget::hide" qwidget.html#hide
-"QWidget::hideEvent" qwidget.html#hideEvent
-"QWidget::icon" qwidget.html#icon
-"QWidget::icon" qwidget.html#icon-prop
-"QWidget::iconText" qwidget.html#iconText
-"QWidget::iconText" qwidget.html#iconText-prop
-"QWidget::imComposeEvent" qwidget.html#imComposeEvent
-"QWidget::imEndEvent" qwidget.html#imEndEvent
-"QWidget::imStartEvent" qwidget.html#imStartEvent
-"QWidget::inputMethodEnabled" qwidget.html#inputMethodEnabled-prop
-"QWidget::isActiveWindow" qwidget.html#isActiveWindow
-"QWidget::isActiveWindow" qwidget.html#isActiveWindow-prop
-"QWidget::isDesktop" qwidget.html#isDesktop
-"QWidget::isDesktop" qwidget.html#isDesktop-prop
-"QWidget::isDialog" qwidget.html#isDialog
-"QWidget::isDialog" qwidget.html#isDialog-prop
-"QWidget::isEnabled" qwidget.html#isEnabled
-"QWidget::isEnabledTo" qwidget.html#isEnabledTo
-"QWidget::isFocusEnabled" qwidget.html#isFocusEnabled
-"QWidget::isFullScreen" qwidget.html#isFullScreen
-"QWidget::isHidden" qwidget.html#isHidden
-"QWidget::isInputMethodEnabled" qwidget.html#isInputMethodEnabled
-"QWidget::isMaximized" qwidget.html#isMaximized
-"QWidget::isMinimized" qwidget.html#isMinimized
-"QWidget::isModal" qwidget.html#isModal
-"QWidget::isModal" qwidget.html#isModal-prop
-"QWidget::isPopup" qwidget.html#isPopup
-"QWidget::isPopup" qwidget.html#isPopup-prop
-"QWidget::isShown" qwidget.html#isShown
-"QWidget::isTopLevel" qwidget.html#isTopLevel
-"QWidget::isTopLevel" qwidget.html#isTopLevel-prop
-"QWidget::isUpdatesEnabled" qwidget.html#isUpdatesEnabled
-"QWidget::isVisible" qwidget.html#isVisible
-"QWidget::isVisibleTo" qwidget.html#isVisibleTo
-"QWidget::keyPressEvent" qwidget.html#keyPressEvent
-"QWidget::keyReleaseEvent" qwidget.html#keyReleaseEvent
-"QWidget::keyboardGrabber" qwidget.html#keyboardGrabber
-"QWidget::layout" qwidget.html#layout
-"QWidget::leaveEvent" qwidget.html#leaveEvent
-"QWidget::lower" qwidget.html#lower
-"QWidget::macEvent" qwidget.html#macEvent
-"QWidget::mapFrom" qwidget.html#mapFrom
-"QWidget::mapFromGlobal" qwidget.html#mapFromGlobal
-"QWidget::mapFromParent" qwidget.html#mapFromParent
-"QWidget::mapTo" qwidget.html#mapTo
-"QWidget::mapToGlobal" qwidget.html#mapToGlobal
-"QWidget::mapToParent" qwidget.html#mapToParent
-"QWidget::maximized" qwidget.html#maximized-prop
-"QWidget::maximumHeight" qwidget.html#maximumHeight
-"QWidget::maximumHeight" qwidget.html#maximumHeight-prop
-"QWidget::maximumSize" qwidget.html#maximumSize
-"QWidget::maximumSize" qwidget.html#maximumSize-prop
-"QWidget::maximumWidth" qwidget.html#maximumWidth
-"QWidget::maximumWidth" qwidget.html#maximumWidth-prop
-"QWidget::metric" qwidget.html#metric
-"QWidget::microFocusHint" qwidget.html#microFocusHint
-"QWidget::microFocusHint" qwidget.html#microFocusHint-prop
-"QWidget::minimized" qwidget.html#minimized-prop
-"QWidget::minimumHeight" qwidget.html#minimumHeight
-"QWidget::minimumHeight" qwidget.html#minimumHeight-prop
-"QWidget::minimumSize" qwidget.html#minimumSize
-"QWidget::minimumSize" qwidget.html#minimumSize-prop
-"QWidget::minimumSizeHint" qwidget.html#minimumSizeHint
-"QWidget::minimumSizeHint" qwidget.html#minimumSizeHint-prop
-"QWidget::minimumWidth" qwidget.html#minimumWidth
-"QWidget::minimumWidth" qwidget.html#minimumWidth-prop
-"QWidget::mouseDoubleClickEvent" qwidget.html#mouseDoubleClickEvent
-"QWidget::mouseGrabber" qwidget.html#mouseGrabber
-"QWidget::mouseMoveEvent" qwidget.html#mouseMoveEvent
-"QWidget::mousePressEvent" qwidget.html#mousePressEvent
-"QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent" qwidget.html#mouseReleaseEvent
-"QWidget::mouseTracking" qwidget.html#mouseTracking-prop
-"QWidget::move" qwidget.html#move
-"QWidget::moveEvent" qwidget.html#moveEvent
-"QWidget::ownCursor" qwidget.html#ownCursor
-"QWidget::ownCursor" qwidget.html#ownCursor-prop
-"QWidget::ownFont" qwidget.html#ownFont
-"QWidget::ownFont" qwidget.html#ownFont-prop
-"QWidget::ownPalette" qwidget.html#ownPalette
-"QWidget::ownPalette" qwidget.html#ownPalette-prop
-"QWidget::paintEvent" qwidget.html#paintEvent
-"QWidget::palette" qwidget.html#palette
-"QWidget::palette" qwidget.html#palette-prop
-"QWidget::paletteBackgroundColor" qwidget.html#paletteBackgroundColor
-"QWidget::paletteBackgroundColor" qwidget.html#paletteBackgroundColor-prop
-"QWidget::paletteBackgroundPixmap" qwidget.html#paletteBackgroundPixmap
-"QWidget::paletteBackgroundPixmap" qwidget.html#paletteBackgroundPixmap-prop
-"QWidget::paletteChange" qwidget.html#paletteChange
-"QWidget::paletteForegroundColor" qwidget.html#paletteForegroundColor
-"QWidget::paletteForegroundColor" qwidget.html#paletteForegroundColor-prop
-"QWidget::parentWidget" qwidget.html#parentWidget
-"QWidget::polish" qwidget.html#polish
-"QWidget::pos" qwidget.html#pos
-"QWidget::pos" qwidget.html#pos-prop
-"QWidget::qwsEvent" qwidget.html#qwsEvent
-"QWidget::raise" qwidget.html#raise
-"QWidget::rect" qwidget.html#rect
-"QWidget::rect" qwidget.html#rect-prop
-"QWidget::releaseKeyboard" qwidget.html#releaseKeyboard
-"QWidget::releaseMouse" qwidget.html#releaseMouse
-"QWidget::repaint" qwidget.html#repaint
-"QWidget::reparent" qwidget.html#reparent
-"QWidget::resetInputContext" qwidget.html#resetInputContext
-"QWidget::resize" qwidget.html#resize
-"QWidget::resizeEvent" qwidget.html#resizeEvent
-"QWidget::scroll" qwidget.html#scroll
-"QWidget::setAcceptDrops" qwidget.html#setAcceptDrops
-"QWidget::setActiveWindow" qwidget.html#setActiveWindow
-"QWidget::setAutoMask" qwidget.html#setAutoMask
-"QWidget::setBackgroundEmpty" qwidget.html#setBackgroundEmpty
-"QWidget::setBackgroundMode" qwidget.html#setBackgroundMode
-"QWidget::setBackgroundOrigin" qwidget.html#setBackgroundOrigin
-"QWidget::setBaseSize" qwidget.html#setBaseSize
-"QWidget::setCaption" qwidget.html#setCaption
-"QWidget::setCursor" qwidget.html#setCursor
-"QWidget::setDisabled" qwidget.html#setDisabled
-"QWidget::setEnabled" qwidget.html#setEnabled
-"QWidget::setEraseColor" qwidget.html#setEraseColor
-"QWidget::setErasePixmap" qwidget.html#setErasePixmap
-"QWidget::setFixedHeight" qwidget.html#setFixedHeight
-"QWidget::setFixedSize" qwidget.html#setFixedSize
-"QWidget::setFixedWidth" qwidget.html#setFixedWidth
-"QWidget::setFocus" qwidget.html#setFocus
-"QWidget::setFocusPolicy" qwidget.html#setFocusPolicy
-"QWidget::setFocusProxy" qwidget.html#setFocusProxy
-"QWidget::setFont" qwidget.html#setFont
-"QWidget::setGeometry" qwidget.html#setGeometry
-"QWidget::setHidden" qwidget.html#setHidden
-"QWidget::setIcon" qwidget.html#setIcon
-"QWidget::setIconText" qwidget.html#setIconText
-"QWidget::setInputMethodEnabled" qwidget.html#setInputMethodEnabled
-"QWidget::setKeyCompression" qwidget.html#setKeyCompression
-"QWidget::setMask" qwidget.html#setMask
-"QWidget::setMaximumHeight" qwidget.html#setMaximumHeight
-"QWidget::setMaximumSize" qwidget.html#setMaximumSize
-"QWidget::setMaximumWidth" qwidget.html#setMaximumWidth
-"QWidget::setMicroFocusHint" qwidget.html#setMicroFocusHint
-"QWidget::setMinimumHeight" qwidget.html#setMinimumHeight
-"QWidget::setMinimumSize" qwidget.html#setMinimumSize
-"QWidget::setMinimumWidth" qwidget.html#setMinimumWidth
-"QWidget::setMouseTracking" qwidget.html#setMouseTracking
-"QWidget::setPalette" qwidget.html#setPalette
-"QWidget::setPaletteBackgroundColor" qwidget.html#setPaletteBackgroundColor
-"QWidget::setPaletteBackgroundPixmap" qwidget.html#setPaletteBackgroundPixmap
-"QWidget::setPaletteForegroundColor" qwidget.html#setPaletteForegroundColor
-"QWidget::setShown" qwidget.html#setShown
-"QWidget::setSizeIncrement" qwidget.html#setSizeIncrement
-"QWidget::setSizePolicy" qwidget.html#setSizePolicy
-"QWidget::setStyle" qwidget.html#setStyle
-"QWidget::setTabOrder" qwidget.html#setTabOrder
-"QWidget::setUpdatesEnabled" qwidget.html#setUpdatesEnabled
-"QWidget::setWFlags" qwidget.html#setWFlags
-"QWidget::setWindowOpacity" qwidget.html#setWindowOpacity
-"QWidget::setWindowState" qwidget.html#setWindowState
-"QWidget::show" qwidget.html#show
-"QWidget::showEvent" qwidget.html#showEvent
-"QWidget::showFullScreen" qwidget.html#showFullScreen
-"QWidget::showMaximized" qwidget.html#showMaximized
-"QWidget::showMinimized" qwidget.html#showMinimized
-"QWidget::showNormal" qwidget.html#showNormal
-"QWidget::shown" qwidget.html#shown-prop
-"QWidget::size" qwidget.html#size
-"QWidget::size" qwidget.html#size-prop
-"QWidget::sizeHint" qwidget.html#sizeHint
-"QWidget::sizeHint" qwidget.html#sizeHint-prop
-"QWidget::sizeIncrement" qwidget.html#sizeIncrement
-"QWidget::sizeIncrement" qwidget.html#sizeIncrement-prop
-"QWidget::sizePolicy" qwidget.html#sizePolicy
-"QWidget::sizePolicy" qwidget.html#sizePolicy-prop
-"QWidget::stackUnder" qwidget.html#stackUnder
-"QWidget::style" qwidget.html#style
-"QWidget::styleChange" qwidget.html#styleChange
-"QWidget::tabletEvent" qwidget.html#tabletEvent
-"QWidget::testWFlags" qwidget.html#testWFlags
-"QWidget::topLevelWidget" qwidget.html#topLevelWidget
-"QWidget::underMouse" qwidget.html#underMouse-prop
-"QWidget::unsetCursor" qwidget.html#unsetCursor
-"QWidget::unsetFont" qwidget.html#unsetFont
-"QWidget::unsetPalette" qwidget.html#unsetPalette
-"QWidget::update" qwidget.html#update
-"QWidget::updateGeometry" qwidget.html#updateGeometry
-"QWidget::updateMask" qwidget.html#updateMask
-"QWidget::updatesEnabled" qwidget.html#updatesEnabled-prop
-"QWidget::visible" qwidget.html#visible-prop
-"QWidget::wheelEvent" qwidget.html#wheelEvent
-"QWidget::width" qwidget.html#width
-"QWidget::width" qwidget.html#width-prop
-"QWidget::winEvent" qwidget.html#winEvent
-"QWidget::winId" qwidget.html#winId
-"QWidget::windowActivationChange" qwidget.html#windowActivationChange
-"QWidget::windowOpacity" qwidget.html#windowOpacity
-"QWidget::windowOpacity" qwidget.html#windowOpacity-prop
-"QWidget::windowState" qwidget.html#windowState
-"QWidget::x" qwidget.html#x
-"QWidget::x" qwidget.html#x-prop
-"QWidget::x11Event" qwidget.html#x11Event
-"QWidget::y" qwidget.html#y
-"QWidget::y" qwidget.html#y-prop
-"QWidget::~QWidget" qwidget.html#~QWidget
-"QWidgetFactory" qwidgetfactory.html
-"QWidgetFactory::addWidgetFactory" qwidgetfactory.html#addWidgetFactory
-"QWidgetFactory::create" qwidgetfactory.html#create
-"QWidgetFactory::createWidget" qwidgetfactory.html#createWidget
-"QWidgetFactory::loadImages" qwidgetfactory.html#loadImages
-"QWidgetFactory::supportsWidget" qwidgetfactory.html#supportsWidget
-"QWidgetFactory::widgets" qwidgetfactory.html#widgets
-"QWidgetFactory::~QWidgetFactory" qwidgetfactory.html#~QWidgetFactory
+"QWidget" ntqwidget.html
+"QWidget::BackgroundOrigin" ntqwidget.html#BackgroundOrigin
+"QWidget::FocusPolicy" ntqwidget.html#FocusPolicy
+"QWidget::acceptDrops" ntqwidget.html#acceptDrops
+"QWidget::acceptDrops" ntqwidget.html#acceptDrops-prop
+"QWidget::adjustSize" ntqwidget.html#adjustSize
+"QWidget::autoMask" ntqwidget.html#autoMask
+"QWidget::autoMask" ntqwidget.html#autoMask-prop
+"QWidget::backgroundBrush" ntqwidget.html#backgroundBrush
+"QWidget::backgroundBrush" ntqwidget.html#backgroundBrush-prop
+"QWidget::backgroundMode" ntqwidget.html#backgroundMode
+"QWidget::backgroundMode" ntqwidget.html#backgroundMode-prop
+"QWidget::backgroundOrigin" ntqwidget.html#backgroundOrigin
+"QWidget::backgroundOrigin" ntqwidget.html#backgroundOrigin-prop
+"QWidget::baseSize" ntqwidget.html#baseSize
+"QWidget::baseSize" ntqwidget.html#baseSize-prop
+"QWidget::caption" ntqwidget.html#caption
+"QWidget::caption" ntqwidget.html#caption-prop
+"QWidget::childAt" ntqwidget.html#childAt
+"QWidget::childrenRect" ntqwidget.html#childrenRect
+"QWidget::childrenRect" ntqwidget.html#childrenRect-prop
+"QWidget::childrenRegion" ntqwidget.html#childrenRegion
+"QWidget::childrenRegion" ntqwidget.html#childrenRegion-prop
+"QWidget::clearFocus" ntqwidget.html#clearFocus
+"QWidget::clearMask" ntqwidget.html#clearMask
+"QWidget::clearWFlags" ntqwidget.html#clearWFlags
+"QWidget::clipRegion" ntqwidget.html#clipRegion
+"QWidget::close" ntqwidget.html#close
+"QWidget::closeEvent" ntqwidget.html#closeEvent
+"QWidget::colorGroup" ntqwidget.html#colorGroup
+"QWidget::colorGroup" ntqwidget.html#colorGroup-prop
+"QWidget::constPolish" ntqwidget.html#constPolish
+"QWidget::contextMenuEvent" ntqwidget.html#contextMenuEvent
+"QWidget::create" ntqwidget.html#create
+"QWidget::cursor" ntqwidget.html#cursor
+"QWidget::cursor" ntqwidget.html#cursor-prop
+"QWidget::customWhatsThis" ntqwidget.html#customWhatsThis
+"QWidget::customWhatsThis" ntqwidget.html#customWhatsThis-prop
+"QWidget::destroy" ntqwidget.html#destroy
+"QWidget::dragEnterEvent" ntqwidget.html#dragEnterEvent
+"QWidget::dragLeaveEvent" ntqwidget.html#dragLeaveEvent
+"QWidget::dragMoveEvent" ntqwidget.html#dragMoveEvent
+"QWidget::drawText" ntqwidget.html#drawText
+"QWidget::dropEvent" ntqwidget.html#dropEvent
+"QWidget::enabled" ntqwidget.html#enabled-prop
+"QWidget::enabledChange" ntqwidget.html#enabledChange
+"QWidget::enterEvent" ntqwidget.html#enterEvent
+"QWidget::erase" ntqwidget.html#erase
+"QWidget::eraseColor" ntqwidget.html#eraseColor
+"QWidget::erasePixmap" ntqwidget.html#erasePixmap
+"QWidget::event" ntqwidget.html#event
+"QWidget::find" ntqwidget.html#find
+"QWidget::focus" ntqwidget.html#focus-prop
+"QWidget::focusData" ntqwidget.html#focusData
+"QWidget::focusEnabled" ntqwidget.html#focusEnabled-prop
+"QWidget::focusInEvent" ntqwidget.html#focusInEvent
+"QWidget::focusNextPrevChild" ntqwidget.html#focusNextPrevChild
+"QWidget::focusOutEvent" ntqwidget.html#focusOutEvent
+"QWidget::focusPolicy" ntqwidget.html#focusPolicy
+"QWidget::focusPolicy" ntqwidget.html#focusPolicy-prop
+"QWidget::focusProxy" ntqwidget.html#focusProxy
+"QWidget::focusWidget" ntqwidget.html#focusWidget
+"QWidget::font" ntqwidget.html#font
+"QWidget::font" ntqwidget.html#font-prop
+"QWidget::fontChange" ntqwidget.html#fontChange
+"QWidget::fontInfo" ntqwidget.html#fontInfo
+"QWidget::fontMetrics" ntqwidget.html#fontMetrics
+"QWidget::foregroundColor" ntqwidget.html#foregroundColor
+"QWidget::frameGeometry" ntqwidget.html#frameGeometry
+"QWidget::frameGeometry" ntqwidget.html#frameGeometry-prop
+"QWidget::frameSize" ntqwidget.html#frameSize
+"QWidget::frameSize" ntqwidget.html#frameSize-prop
+"QWidget::fullScreen" ntqwidget.html#fullScreen-prop
+"QWidget::geometry" ntqwidget.html#geometry
+"QWidget::geometry" ntqwidget.html#geometry-prop
+"QWidget::getWFlags" ntqwidget.html#getWFlags
+"QWidget::grabKeyboard" ntqwidget.html#grabKeyboard
+"QWidget::grabMouse" ntqwidget.html#grabMouse
+"QWidget::hasFocus" ntqwidget.html#hasFocus
+"QWidget::hasMouse" ntqwidget.html#hasMouse
+"QWidget::hasMouseTracking" ntqwidget.html#hasMouseTracking
+"QWidget::height" ntqwidget.html#height
+"QWidget::height" ntqwidget.html#height-prop
+"QWidget::heightForWidth" ntqwidget.html#heightForWidth
+"QWidget::hidden" ntqwidget.html#hidden-prop
+"QWidget::hide" ntqwidget.html#hide
+"QWidget::hideEvent" ntqwidget.html#hideEvent
+"QWidget::icon" ntqwidget.html#icon
+"QWidget::icon" ntqwidget.html#icon-prop
+"QWidget::iconText" ntqwidget.html#iconText
+"QWidget::iconText" ntqwidget.html#iconText-prop
+"QWidget::imComposeEvent" ntqwidget.html#imComposeEvent
+"QWidget::imEndEvent" ntqwidget.html#imEndEvent
+"QWidget::imStartEvent" ntqwidget.html#imStartEvent
+"QWidget::inputMethodEnabled" ntqwidget.html#inputMethodEnabled-prop
+"QWidget::isActiveWindow" ntqwidget.html#isActiveWindow
+"QWidget::isActiveWindow" ntqwidget.html#isActiveWindow-prop
+"QWidget::isDesktop" ntqwidget.html#isDesktop
+"QWidget::isDesktop" ntqwidget.html#isDesktop-prop
+"QWidget::isDialog" ntqwidget.html#isDialog
+"QWidget::isDialog" ntqwidget.html#isDialog-prop
+"QWidget::isEnabled" ntqwidget.html#isEnabled
+"QWidget::isEnabledTo" ntqwidget.html#isEnabledTo
+"QWidget::isFocusEnabled" ntqwidget.html#isFocusEnabled
+"QWidget::isFullScreen" ntqwidget.html#isFullScreen
+"QWidget::isHidden" ntqwidget.html#isHidden
+"QWidget::isInputMethodEnabled" ntqwidget.html#isInputMethodEnabled
+"QWidget::isMaximized" ntqwidget.html#isMaximized
+"QWidget::isMinimized" ntqwidget.html#isMinimized
+"QWidget::isModal" ntqwidget.html#isModal
+"QWidget::isModal" ntqwidget.html#isModal-prop
+"QWidget::isPopup" ntqwidget.html#isPopup
+"QWidget::isPopup" ntqwidget.html#isPopup-prop
+"QWidget::isShown" ntqwidget.html#isShown
+"QWidget::isTopLevel" ntqwidget.html#isTopLevel
+"QWidget::isTopLevel" ntqwidget.html#isTopLevel-prop
+"QWidget::isUpdatesEnabled" ntqwidget.html#isUpdatesEnabled
+"QWidget::isVisible" ntqwidget.html#isVisible
+"QWidget::isVisibleTo" ntqwidget.html#isVisibleTo
+"QWidget::keyPressEvent" ntqwidget.html#keyPressEvent
+"QWidget::keyReleaseEvent" ntqwidget.html#keyReleaseEvent
+"QWidget::keyboardGrabber" ntqwidget.html#keyboardGrabber
+"QWidget::layout" ntqwidget.html#layout
+"QWidget::leaveEvent" ntqwidget.html#leaveEvent
+"QWidget::lower" ntqwidget.html#lower
+"QWidget::macEvent" ntqwidget.html#macEvent
+"QWidget::mapFrom" ntqwidget.html#mapFrom
+"QWidget::mapFromGlobal" ntqwidget.html#mapFromGlobal
+"QWidget::mapFromParent" ntqwidget.html#mapFromParent
+"QWidget::mapTo" ntqwidget.html#mapTo
+"QWidget::mapToGlobal" ntqwidget.html#mapToGlobal
+"QWidget::mapToParent" ntqwidget.html#mapToParent
+"QWidget::maximized" ntqwidget.html#maximized-prop
+"QWidget::maximumHeight" ntqwidget.html#maximumHeight
+"QWidget::maximumHeight" ntqwidget.html#maximumHeight-prop
+"QWidget::maximumSize" ntqwidget.html#maximumSize
+"QWidget::maximumSize" ntqwidget.html#maximumSize-prop
+"QWidget::maximumWidth" ntqwidget.html#maximumWidth
+"QWidget::maximumWidth" ntqwidget.html#maximumWidth-prop
+"QWidget::metric" ntqwidget.html#metric
+"QWidget::microFocusHint" ntqwidget.html#microFocusHint
+"QWidget::microFocusHint" ntqwidget.html#microFocusHint-prop
+"QWidget::minimized" ntqwidget.html#minimized-prop
+"QWidget::minimumHeight" ntqwidget.html#minimumHeight
+"QWidget::minimumHeight" ntqwidget.html#minimumHeight-prop
+"QWidget::minimumSize" ntqwidget.html#minimumSize
+"QWidget::minimumSize" ntqwidget.html#minimumSize-prop
+"QWidget::minimumSizeHint" ntqwidget.html#minimumSizeHint
+"QWidget::minimumSizeHint" ntqwidget.html#minimumSizeHint-prop
+"QWidget::minimumWidth" ntqwidget.html#minimumWidth
+"QWidget::minimumWidth" ntqwidget.html#minimumWidth-prop
+"QWidget::mouseDoubleClickEvent" ntqwidget.html#mouseDoubleClickEvent
+"QWidget::mouseGrabber" ntqwidget.html#mouseGrabber
+"QWidget::mouseMoveEvent" ntqwidget.html#mouseMoveEvent
+"QWidget::mousePressEvent" ntqwidget.html#mousePressEvent
+"QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent" ntqwidget.html#mouseReleaseEvent
+"QWidget::mouseTracking" ntqwidget.html#mouseTracking-prop
+"QWidget::move" ntqwidget.html#move
+"QWidget::moveEvent" ntqwidget.html#moveEvent
+"QWidget::ownCursor" ntqwidget.html#ownCursor
+"QWidget::ownCursor" ntqwidget.html#ownCursor-prop
+"QWidget::ownFont" ntqwidget.html#ownFont
+"QWidget::ownFont" ntqwidget.html#ownFont-prop
+"QWidget::ownPalette" ntqwidget.html#ownPalette
+"QWidget::ownPalette" ntqwidget.html#ownPalette-prop
+"QWidget::paintEvent" ntqwidget.html#paintEvent
+"QWidget::palette" ntqwidget.html#palette
+"QWidget::palette" ntqwidget.html#palette-prop
+"QWidget::paletteBackgroundColor" ntqwidget.html#paletteBackgroundColor
+"QWidget::paletteBackgroundColor" ntqwidget.html#paletteBackgroundColor-prop
+"QWidget::paletteBackgroundPixmap" ntqwidget.html#paletteBackgroundPixmap
+"QWidget::paletteBackgroundPixmap" ntqwidget.html#paletteBackgroundPixmap-prop
+"QWidget::paletteChange" ntqwidget.html#paletteChange
+"QWidget::paletteForegroundColor" ntqwidget.html#paletteForegroundColor
+"QWidget::paletteForegroundColor" ntqwidget.html#paletteForegroundColor-prop
+"QWidget::parentWidget" ntqwidget.html#parentWidget
+"QWidget::polish" ntqwidget.html#polish
+"QWidget::pos" ntqwidget.html#pos
+"QWidget::pos" ntqwidget.html#pos-prop
+"QWidget::qwsEvent" ntqwidget.html#qwsEvent
+"QWidget::raise" ntqwidget.html#raise
+"QWidget::rect" ntqwidget.html#rect
+"QWidget::rect" ntqwidget.html#rect-prop
+"QWidget::releaseKeyboard" ntqwidget.html#releaseKeyboard
+"QWidget::releaseMouse" ntqwidget.html#releaseMouse
+"QWidget::repaint" ntqwidget.html#repaint
+"QWidget::reparent" ntqwidget.html#reparent
+"QWidget::resetInputContext" ntqwidget.html#resetInputContext
+"QWidget::resize" ntqwidget.html#resize
+"QWidget::resizeEvent" ntqwidget.html#resizeEvent
+"QWidget::scroll" ntqwidget.html#scroll
+"QWidget::setAcceptDrops" ntqwidget.html#setAcceptDrops
+"QWidget::setActiveWindow" ntqwidget.html#setActiveWindow
+"QWidget::setAutoMask" ntqwidget.html#setAutoMask
+"QWidget::setBackgroundEmpty" ntqwidget.html#setBackgroundEmpty
+"QWidget::setBackgroundMode" ntqwidget.html#setBackgroundMode
+"QWidget::setBackgroundOrigin" ntqwidget.html#setBackgroundOrigin
+"QWidget::setBaseSize" ntqwidget.html#setBaseSize
+"QWidget::setCaption" ntqwidget.html#setCaption
+"QWidget::setCursor" ntqwidget.html#setCursor
+"QWidget::setDisabled" ntqwidget.html#setDisabled
+"QWidget::setEnabled" ntqwidget.html#setEnabled
+"QWidget::setEraseColor" ntqwidget.html#setEraseColor
+"QWidget::setErasePixmap" ntqwidget.html#setErasePixmap
+"QWidget::setFixedHeight" ntqwidget.html#setFixedHeight
+"QWidget::setFixedSize" ntqwidget.html#setFixedSize
+"QWidget::setFixedWidth" ntqwidget.html#setFixedWidth
+"QWidget::setFocus" ntqwidget.html#setFocus
+"QWidget::setFocusPolicy" ntqwidget.html#setFocusPolicy
+"QWidget::setFocusProxy" ntqwidget.html#setFocusProxy
+"QWidget::setFont" ntqwidget.html#setFont
+"QWidget::setGeometry" ntqwidget.html#setGeometry
+"QWidget::setHidden" ntqwidget.html#setHidden
+"QWidget::setIcon" ntqwidget.html#setIcon
+"QWidget::setIconText" ntqwidget.html#setIconText
+"QWidget::setInputMethodEnabled" ntqwidget.html#setInputMethodEnabled
+"QWidget::setKeyCompression" ntqwidget.html#setKeyCompression
+"QWidget::setMask" ntqwidget.html#setMask
+"QWidget::setMaximumHeight" ntqwidget.html#setMaximumHeight
+"QWidget::setMaximumSize" ntqwidget.html#setMaximumSize
+"QWidget::setMaximumWidth" ntqwidget.html#setMaximumWidth
+"QWidget::setMicroFocusHint" ntqwidget.html#setMicroFocusHint
+"QWidget::setMinimumHeight" ntqwidget.html#setMinimumHeight
+"QWidget::setMinimumSize" ntqwidget.html#setMinimumSize
+"QWidget::setMinimumWidth" ntqwidget.html#setMinimumWidth
+"QWidget::setMouseTracking" ntqwidget.html#setMouseTracking
+"QWidget::setPalette" ntqwidget.html#setPalette
+"QWidget::setPaletteBackgroundColor" ntqwidget.html#setPaletteBackgroundColor
+"QWidget::setPaletteBackgroundPixmap" ntqwidget.html#setPaletteBackgroundPixmap
+"QWidget::setPaletteForegroundColor" ntqwidget.html#setPaletteForegroundColor
+"QWidget::setShown" ntqwidget.html#setShown
+"QWidget::setSizeIncrement" ntqwidget.html#setSizeIncrement
+"QWidget::setSizePolicy" ntqwidget.html#setSizePolicy
+"QWidget::setStyle" ntqwidget.html#setStyle
+"QWidget::setTabOrder" ntqwidget.html#setTabOrder
+"QWidget::setUpdatesEnabled" ntqwidget.html#setUpdatesEnabled
+"QWidget::setWFlags" ntqwidget.html#setWFlags
+"QWidget::setWindowOpacity" ntqwidget.html#setWindowOpacity
+"QWidget::setWindowState" ntqwidget.html#setWindowState
+"QWidget::show" ntqwidget.html#show
+"QWidget::showEvent" ntqwidget.html#showEvent
+"QWidget::showFullScreen" ntqwidget.html#showFullScreen
+"QWidget::showMaximized" ntqwidget.html#showMaximized
+"QWidget::showMinimized" ntqwidget.html#showMinimized
+"QWidget::showNormal" ntqwidget.html#showNormal
+"QWidget::shown" ntqwidget.html#shown-prop
+"QWidget::size" ntqwidget.html#size
+"QWidget::size" ntqwidget.html#size-prop
+"QWidget::sizeHint" ntqwidget.html#sizeHint
+"QWidget::sizeHint" ntqwidget.html#sizeHint-prop
+"QWidget::sizeIncrement" ntqwidget.html#sizeIncrement
+"QWidget::sizeIncrement" ntqwidget.html#sizeIncrement-prop
+"QWidget::sizePolicy" ntqwidget.html#sizePolicy
+"QWidget::sizePolicy" ntqwidget.html#sizePolicy-prop
+"QWidget::stackUnder" ntqwidget.html#stackUnder
+"QWidget::style" ntqwidget.html#style
+"QWidget::styleChange" ntqwidget.html#styleChange
+"QWidget::tabletEvent" ntqwidget.html#tabletEvent
+"QWidget::testWFlags" ntqwidget.html#testWFlags
+"QWidget::topLevelWidget" ntqwidget.html#topLevelWidget
+"QWidget::underMouse" ntqwidget.html#underMouse-prop
+"QWidget::unsetCursor" ntqwidget.html#unsetCursor
+"QWidget::unsetFont" ntqwidget.html#unsetFont
+"QWidget::unsetPalette" ntqwidget.html#unsetPalette
+"QWidget::update" ntqwidget.html#update
+"QWidget::updateGeometry" ntqwidget.html#updateGeometry
+"QWidget::updateMask" ntqwidget.html#updateMask
+"QWidget::updatesEnabled" ntqwidget.html#updatesEnabled-prop
+"QWidget::visible" ntqwidget.html#visible-prop
+"QWidget::wheelEvent" ntqwidget.html#wheelEvent
+"QWidget::width" ntqwidget.html#width
+"QWidget::width" ntqwidget.html#width-prop
+"QWidget::winEvent" ntqwidget.html#winEvent
+"QWidget::winId" ntqwidget.html#winId
+"QWidget::windowActivationChange" ntqwidget.html#windowActivationChange
+"QWidget::windowOpacity" ntqwidget.html#windowOpacity
+"QWidget::windowOpacity" ntqwidget.html#windowOpacity-prop
+"QWidget::windowState" ntqwidget.html#windowState
+"QWidget::x" ntqwidget.html#x
+"QWidget::x" ntqwidget.html#x-prop
+"QWidget::x11Event" ntqwidget.html#x11Event
+"QWidget::y" ntqwidget.html#y
+"QWidget::y" ntqwidget.html#y-prop
+"QWidget::~QWidget" ntqwidget.html#~QWidget
+"QWidgetFactory" ntqwidgetfactory.html
+"QWidgetFactory::addWidgetFactory" ntqwidgetfactory.html#addWidgetFactory
+"QWidgetFactory::create" ntqwidgetfactory.html#create
+"QWidgetFactory::createWidget" ntqwidgetfactory.html#createWidget
+"QWidgetFactory::loadImages" ntqwidgetfactory.html#loadImages
+"QWidgetFactory::supportsWidget" ntqwidgetfactory.html#supportsWidget
+"QWidgetFactory::widgets" ntqwidgetfactory.html#widgets
+"QWidgetFactory::~QWidgetFactory" ntqwidgetfactory.html#~QWidgetFactory
 "QWidgetItem" qwidgetitem.html
 "QWidgetItem::expanding" qwidgetitem.html#expanding
 "QWidgetItem::isEmpty" qwidgetitem.html#isEmpty
@@ -7905,26 +7905,26 @@
 "QWidgetItem::setGeometry" qwidgetitem.html#setGeometry
 "QWidgetItem::sizeHint" qwidgetitem.html#sizeHint
 "QWidgetItem::widget" qwidgetitem.html#widget
-"QWidgetPlugin" qwidgetplugin.html
-"QWidgetPlugin::create" qwidgetplugin.html#create
-"QWidgetPlugin::group" qwidgetplugin.html#group
-"QWidgetPlugin::iconSet" qwidgetplugin.html#iconSet
-"QWidgetPlugin::includeFile" qwidgetplugin.html#includeFile
-"QWidgetPlugin::isContainer" qwidgetplugin.html#isContainer
-"QWidgetPlugin::keys" qwidgetplugin.html#keys
-"QWidgetPlugin::toolTip" qwidgetplugin.html#toolTip
-"QWidgetPlugin::whatsThis" qwidgetplugin.html#whatsThis
-"QWidgetPlugin::~QWidgetPlugin" qwidgetplugin.html#~QWidgetPlugin
-"QWidgetStack" qwidgetstack.html
-"QWidgetStack::aboutToShow" qwidgetstack.html#aboutToShow
-"QWidgetStack::addWidget" qwidgetstack.html#addWidget
-"QWidgetStack::id" qwidgetstack.html#id
-"QWidgetStack::raiseWidget" qwidgetstack.html#raiseWidget
-"QWidgetStack::removeWidget" qwidgetstack.html#removeWidget
-"QWidgetStack::setChildGeometries" qwidgetstack.html#setChildGeometries
-"QWidgetStack::visibleWidget" qwidgetstack.html#visibleWidget
-"QWidgetStack::widget" qwidgetstack.html#widget
-"QWidgetStack::~QWidgetStack" qwidgetstack.html#~QWidgetStack
+"QWidgetPlugin" ntqwidgetplugin.html
+"QWidgetPlugin::create" ntqwidgetplugin.html#create
+"QWidgetPlugin::group" ntqwidgetplugin.html#group
+"QWidgetPlugin::iconSet" ntqwidgetplugin.html#iconSet
+"QWidgetPlugin::includeFile" ntqwidgetplugin.html#includeFile
+"QWidgetPlugin::isContainer" ntqwidgetplugin.html#isContainer
+"QWidgetPlugin::keys" ntqwidgetplugin.html#keys
+"QWidgetPlugin::toolTip" ntqwidgetplugin.html#toolTip
+"QWidgetPlugin::whatsThis" ntqwidgetplugin.html#whatsThis
+"QWidgetPlugin::~QWidgetPlugin" ntqwidgetplugin.html#~QWidgetPlugin
+"QWidgetStack" ntqwidgetstack.html
+"QWidgetStack::aboutToShow" ntqwidgetstack.html#aboutToShow
+"QWidgetStack::addWidget" ntqwidgetstack.html#addWidget
+"QWidgetStack::id" ntqwidgetstack.html#id
+"QWidgetStack::raiseWidget" ntqwidgetstack.html#raiseWidget
+"QWidgetStack::removeWidget" ntqwidgetstack.html#removeWidget
+"QWidgetStack::setChildGeometries" ntqwidgetstack.html#setChildGeometries
+"QWidgetStack::visibleWidget" ntqwidgetstack.html#visibleWidget
+"QWidgetStack::widget" ntqwidgetstack.html#widget
+"QWidgetStack::~QWidgetStack" ntqwidgetstack.html#~QWidgetStack
 "QWindowsMime" qwindowsmime.html
 "QWindowsMime::all" qwindowsmime.html#all
 "QWindowsMime::canConvert" qwindowsmime.html#canConvert
@@ -7939,55 +7939,55 @@
 "QWindowsMime::initialize" qwindowsmime.html#initialize
 "QWindowsMime::mimeFor" qwindowsmime.html#mimeFor
 "QWindowsMime::~QWindowsMime" qwindowsmime.html#~QWindowsMime
-"QWindowsStyle" qwindowsstyle.html
-"QWizard" qwizard.html
-"QWizard::addPage" qwizard.html#addPage
-"QWizard::appropriate" qwizard.html#appropriate
-"QWizard::back" qwizard.html#back
-"QWizard::backButton" qwizard.html#backButton
-"QWizard::cancelButton" qwizard.html#cancelButton
-"QWizard::currentPage" qwizard.html#currentPage
-"QWizard::finishButton" qwizard.html#finishButton
-"QWizard::help" qwizard.html#help
-"QWizard::helpButton" qwizard.html#helpButton
-"QWizard::helpClicked" qwizard.html#helpClicked
-"QWizard::indexOf" qwizard.html#indexOf
-"QWizard::insertPage" qwizard.html#insertPage
-"QWizard::layOutButtonRow" qwizard.html#layOutButtonRow
-"QWizard::layOutTitleRow" qwizard.html#layOutTitleRow
-"QWizard::next" qwizard.html#next
-"QWizard::nextButton" qwizard.html#nextButton
-"QWizard::page" qwizard.html#page
-"QWizard::pageCount" qwizard.html#pageCount
-"QWizard::removePage" qwizard.html#removePage
-"QWizard::selected" qwizard.html#selected
-"QWizard::setAppropriate" qwizard.html#setAppropriate
-"QWizard::setBackEnabled" qwizard.html#setBackEnabled
-"QWizard::setFinishEnabled" qwizard.html#setFinishEnabled
-"QWizard::setHelpEnabled" qwizard.html#setHelpEnabled
-"QWizard::setNextEnabled" qwizard.html#setNextEnabled
-"QWizard::setTitle" qwizard.html#setTitle
-"QWizard::setTitleFont" qwizard.html#setTitleFont
-"QWizard::showPage" qwizard.html#showPage
-"QWizard::title" qwizard.html#title
-"QWizard::titleFont" qwizard.html#titleFont
-"QWizard::titleFont" qwizard.html#titleFont-prop
-"QWizard::~QWizard" qwizard.html#~QWizard
-"QWorkspace" qworkspace.html
-"QWorkspace::WindowOrder" qworkspace.html#WindowOrder
-"QWorkspace::activateNextWindow" qworkspace.html#activateNextWindow
-"QWorkspace::activatePrevWindow" qworkspace.html#activatePrevWindow
-"QWorkspace::activeWindow" qworkspace.html#activeWindow
-"QWorkspace::cascade" qworkspace.html#cascade
-"QWorkspace::closeActiveWindow" qworkspace.html#closeActiveWindow
-"QWorkspace::closeAllWindows" qworkspace.html#closeAllWindows
-"QWorkspace::scrollBarsEnabled" qworkspace.html#scrollBarsEnabled
-"QWorkspace::scrollBarsEnabled" qworkspace.html#scrollBarsEnabled-prop
-"QWorkspace::setScrollBarsEnabled" qworkspace.html#setScrollBarsEnabled
-"QWorkspace::tile" qworkspace.html#tile
-"QWorkspace::windowActivated" qworkspace.html#windowActivated
-"QWorkspace::windowList" qworkspace.html#windowList
-"QWorkspace::~QWorkspace" qworkspace.html#~QWorkspace
+"QWindowsStyle" ntqwindowsstyle.html
+"QWizard" ntqwizard.html
+"QWizard::addPage" ntqwizard.html#addPage
+"QWizard::appropriate" ntqwizard.html#appropriate
+"QWizard::back" ntqwizard.html#back
+"QWizard::backButton" ntqwizard.html#backButton
+"QWizard::cancelButton" ntqwizard.html#cancelButton
+"QWizard::currentPage" ntqwizard.html#currentPage
+"QWizard::finishButton" ntqwizard.html#finishButton
+"QWizard::help" ntqwizard.html#help
+"QWizard::helpButton" ntqwizard.html#helpButton
+"QWizard::helpClicked" ntqwizard.html#helpClicked
+"QWizard::indexOf" ntqwizard.html#indexOf
+"QWizard::insertPage" ntqwizard.html#insertPage
+"QWizard::layOutButtonRow" ntqwizard.html#layOutButtonRow
+"QWizard::layOutTitleRow" ntqwizard.html#layOutTitleRow
+"QWizard::next" ntqwizard.html#next
+"QWizard::nextButton" ntqwizard.html#nextButton
+"QWizard::page" ntqwizard.html#page
+"QWizard::pageCount" ntqwizard.html#pageCount
+"QWizard::removePage" ntqwizard.html#removePage
+"QWizard::selected" ntqwizard.html#selected
+"QWizard::setAppropriate" ntqwizard.html#setAppropriate
+"QWizard::setBackEnabled" ntqwizard.html#setBackEnabled
+"QWizard::setFinishEnabled" ntqwizard.html#setFinishEnabled
+"QWizard::setHelpEnabled" ntqwizard.html#setHelpEnabled
+"QWizard::setNextEnabled" ntqwizard.html#setNextEnabled
+"QWizard::setTitle" ntqwizard.html#setTitle
+"QWizard::setTitleFont" ntqwizard.html#setTitleFont
+"QWizard::showPage" ntqwizard.html#showPage
+"QWizard::title" ntqwizard.html#title
+"QWizard::titleFont" ntqwizard.html#titleFont
+"QWizard::titleFont" ntqwizard.html#titleFont-prop
+"QWizard::~QWizard" ntqwizard.html#~QWizard
+"QWorkspace" ntqworkspace.html
+"QWorkspace::WindowOrder" ntqworkspace.html#WindowOrder
+"QWorkspace::activateNextWindow" ntqworkspace.html#activateNextWindow
+"QWorkspace::activatePrevWindow" ntqworkspace.html#activatePrevWindow
+"QWorkspace::activeWindow" ntqworkspace.html#activeWindow
+"QWorkspace::cascade" ntqworkspace.html#cascade
+"QWorkspace::closeActiveWindow" ntqworkspace.html#closeActiveWindow
+"QWorkspace::closeAllWindows" ntqworkspace.html#closeAllWindows
+"QWorkspace::scrollBarsEnabled" ntqworkspace.html#scrollBarsEnabled
+"QWorkspace::scrollBarsEnabled" ntqworkspace.html#scrollBarsEnabled-prop
+"QWorkspace::setScrollBarsEnabled" ntqworkspace.html#setScrollBarsEnabled
+"QWorkspace::tile" ntqworkspace.html#tile
+"QWorkspace::windowActivated" ntqworkspace.html#windowActivated
+"QWorkspace::windowList" ntqworkspace.html#windowList
+"QWorkspace::~QWorkspace" ntqworkspace.html#~QWorkspace
 "QXmlAttributes" qxmlattributes.html
 "QXmlAttributes::append" qxmlattributes.html#append
 "QXmlAttributes::clear" qxmlattributes.html#clear
@@ -8100,9 +8100,9 @@
 "QXtWidget::x11Event" qxtwidget.html#x11Event
 "QXtWidget::xtWidget" qxtwidget.html#xtWidget
 "QXtWidget::~QXtWidget" qxtwidget.html#~QXtWidget
-"Q_ASSERT" qapplication.html#Q_ASSERT
-"Q_CHECK_PTR" qapplication.html#Q_CHECK_PTR
-"Qt" qt.html
+"Q_ASSERT" ntqapplication.html#Q_ASSERT
+"Q_CHECK_PTR" ntqapplication.html#Q_CHECK_PTR
+"Qt" ntqt.html
 "Qt Commercial Editions" commercialeditions.html
 "Qt Demo" demo-example.html
 "Qt Distribution Example" distributor-example.html
@@ -8145,38 +8145,38 @@
 "Qt/Embedded environment variables" emb-envvars.html
 "Qt/Mac Issues" mac-differences.html
 "Qt/Mac is Mac OS X Native" qtmac-as-native.html
-"Qt::AlignmentFlags" qt.html#AlignmentFlags
-"Qt::AnchorAttribute" qt.html#AnchorAttribute
-"Qt::ArrowType" qt.html#ArrowType
-"Qt::BGMode" qt.html#BGMode
-"Qt::BackgroundMode" qt.html#BackgroundMode
-"Qt::BrushStyle" qt.html#BrushStyle
-"Qt::ButtonState" qt.html#ButtonState
-"Qt::Corner" qt.html#Corner
-"Qt::CursorShape" qt.html#CursorShape
-"Qt::DateFormat" qt.html#DateFormat
-"Qt::Dock" qt.html#Dock
-"Qt::ImageConversionFlags" qt.html#ImageConversionFlags
-"Qt::Key" qt.html#Key
-"Qt::MacintoshVersion" qt.html#MacintoshVersion
-"Qt::Modifier" qt.html#Modifier
-"Qt::Orientation" qt.html#Orientation
-"Qt::PaintUnit" qt.html#PaintUnit
-"Qt::PenCapStyle" qt.html#PenCapStyle
-"Qt::PenJoinStyle" qt.html#PenJoinStyle
-"Qt::PenStyle" qt.html#PenStyle
-"Qt::RasterOp" qt.html#RasterOp
-"Qt::SequenceMatch" qt.html#SequenceMatch
-"Qt::SortOrder" qt.html#SortOrder
-"Qt::StringComparisonMode" qt.html#StringComparisonMode
-"Qt::TextFlags" qt.html#TextFlags
-"Qt::TextFormat" qt.html#TextFormat
-"Qt::TimeSpec" qt.html#TimeSpec
-"Qt::UIEffect" qt.html#UIEffect
-"Qt::WidgetFlags" qt.html#WidgetFlags
-"Qt::WidgetState" qt.html#WidgetState
-"Qt::WindowState" qt.html#WindowState
-"Qt::WindowsVersion" qt.html#WindowsVersion
+"Qt::AlignmentFlags" ntqt.html#AlignmentFlags
+"Qt::AnchorAttribute" ntqt.html#AnchorAttribute
+"Qt::ArrowType" ntqt.html#ArrowType
+"Qt::BGMode" ntqt.html#BGMode
+"Qt::BackgroundMode" ntqt.html#BackgroundMode
+"Qt::BrushStyle" ntqt.html#BrushStyle
+"Qt::ButtonState" ntqt.html#ButtonState
+"Qt::Corner" ntqt.html#Corner
+"Qt::CursorShape" ntqt.html#CursorShape
+"Qt::DateFormat" ntqt.html#DateFormat
+"Qt::Dock" ntqt.html#Dock
+"Qt::ImageConversionFlags" ntqt.html#ImageConversionFlags
+"Qt::Key" ntqt.html#Key
+"Qt::MacintoshVersion" ntqt.html#MacintoshVersion
+"Qt::Modifier" ntqt.html#Modifier
+"Qt::Orientation" ntqt.html#Orientation
+"Qt::PaintUnit" ntqt.html#PaintUnit
+"Qt::PenCapStyle" ntqt.html#PenCapStyle
+"Qt::PenJoinStyle" ntqt.html#PenJoinStyle
+"Qt::PenStyle" ntqt.html#PenStyle
+"Qt::RasterOp" ntqt.html#RasterOp
+"Qt::SequenceMatch" ntqt.html#SequenceMatch
+"Qt::SortOrder" ntqt.html#SortOrder
+"Qt::StringComparisonMode" ntqt.html#StringComparisonMode
+"Qt::TextFlags" ntqt.html#TextFlags
+"Qt::TextFormat" ntqt.html#TextFormat
+"Qt::TimeSpec" ntqt.html#TimeSpec
+"Qt::UIEffect" ntqt.html#UIEffect
+"Qt::WidgetFlags" ntqt.html#WidgetFlags
+"Qt::WidgetState" ntqt.html#WidgetState
+"Qt::WindowState" ntqt.html#WindowState
+"Qt::WindowsVersion" ntqt.html#WindowsVersion
 "Range controls" rangecontrols-example.html
 "Refactoring Existing Code" motif-walkthrough-7.html
 "Replacing the Print Dialog" motif-walkthrough-9.html
@@ -8217,7 +8217,7 @@
 "Text Edit Example" textedit-example.html
 "Thanks!" credits.html
 "The 'Big Picture'" tutorial2-02.html
-"The ActiveQt framework" activeqt.html
+"The ActiveQt framework" activentqt.html
 "The Coordinate System" coordsys.html
 "The DumpDoc Tool" activeqt-tools-dumpdoc.html
 "The Feature Definition File" emb-features.html
@@ -8266,10 +8266,10 @@
 "appearance" appearance.html
 "application" application.html
 "basic" basic.html
-"bitBlt" qimage.html#bitBlt
-"bitBlt" qpaintdevice.html#bitBlt
+"bitBlt" ntqimage.html#bitBlt
+"bitBlt" ntqpaintdevice.html#bitBlt
 "collection" collection.html
-"copyBlt" qpixmap.html#copyBlt
+"copyBlt" ntqpixmap.html#copyBlt
 "database" database.html
 "dialogs" dialogs.html
 "draganddrop" draganddrop.html
@@ -8291,147 +8291,147 @@
 "objectmodel" objectmodel.html
 "opengl-examples" opengl-examples.html
 "operator!=" qchar.html#operator!-eq
-"operator!=" qcstring.html#operator!-eq
-"operator!=" qpoint.html#operator!-eq
-"operator!=" qrect.html#operator!-eq
-"operator!=" qsize.html#operator!-eq
-"operator!=" qstring.html#operator!-eq
-"operator&" qbitarray.html#operator-and
-"operator*" qpoint.html#operator*
-"operator*" qsize.html#operator*
-"operator*" qwmatrix.html#operator*
-"operator+" qcstring.html#operator+
-"operator+" qpoint.html#operator+
-"operator+" qsize.html#operator+
-"operator+" qstring.html#operator+
-"operator-" qpoint.html#operator-
-"operator-" qsize.html#operator-
-"operator/" qpoint.html#operator/
-"operator/" qsize.html#operator/
+"operator!=" ntqcstring.html#operator!-eq
+"operator!=" ntqpoint.html#operator!-eq
+"operator!=" ntqrect.html#operator!-eq
+"operator!=" ntqsize.html#operator!-eq
+"operator!=" ntqstring.html#operator!-eq
+"operator&" ntqbitarray.html#operator-and
+"operator*" ntqpoint.html#operator*
+"operator*" ntqsize.html#operator*
+"operator*" ntqwmatrix.html#operator*
+"operator+" ntqcstring.html#operator+
+"operator+" ntqpoint.html#operator+
+"operator+" ntqsize.html#operator+
+"operator+" ntqstring.html#operator+
+"operator-" ntqpoint.html#operator-
+"operator-" ntqsize.html#operator-
+"operator/" ntqpoint.html#operator/
+"operator/" ntqsize.html#operator/
 "operator<" qchar.html#operator-lt
-"operator<" qcstring.html#operator-lt
-"operator<" qstring.html#operator-lt
-"operator<<" qbitarray.html#operator-lt-lt
-"operator<<" qbrush.html#operator-lt-lt
-"operator<<" qcolor.html#operator-lt-lt
+"operator<" ntqcstring.html#operator-lt
+"operator<" ntqstring.html#operator-lt
+"operator<<" ntqbitarray.html#operator-lt-lt
+"operator<<" ntqbrush.html#operator-lt-lt
+"operator<<" ntqcolor.html#operator-lt-lt
 "operator<<" qcolorgroup.html#operator-lt-lt
-"operator<<" qcstring.html#operator-lt-lt
-"operator<<" qcursor.html#operator-lt-lt
+"operator<<" ntqcstring.html#operator-lt-lt
+"operator<<" ntqcursor.html#operator-lt-lt
 "operator<<" qdate.html#operator-lt-lt
-"operator<<" qdatetime.html#operator-lt-lt
-"operator<<" qdockarea.html#operator-lt-lt
+"operator<<" ntqdatetime.html#operator-lt-lt
+"operator<<" ntqdockarea.html#operator-lt-lt
 "operator<<" qdomnode.html#operator-lt-lt
-"operator<<" qfont.html#operator-lt-lt
-"operator<<" qimage.html#operator-lt-lt
-"operator<<" qkeysequence.html#operator-lt-lt
-"operator<<" qmainwindow.html#operator-lt-lt
-"operator<<" qmap.html#operator-lt-lt
-"operator<<" qmemarray.html#operator-lt-lt
-"operator<<" qpalette.html#operator-lt-lt
-"operator<<" qpen.html#operator-lt-lt
-"operator<<" qpicture.html#operator-lt-lt
-"operator<<" qpixmap.html#operator-lt-lt
-"operator<<" qpoint.html#operator-lt-lt
-"operator<<" qpointarray.html#operator-lt-lt
-"operator<<" qrect.html#operator-lt-lt
-"operator<<" qregion.html#operator-lt-lt
-"operator<<" qsize.html#operator-lt-lt
-"operator<<" qsplitter.html#operator-lt-lt
-"operator<<" qstring.html#operator-lt-lt
+"operator<<" ntqfont.html#operator-lt-lt
+"operator<<" ntqimage.html#operator-lt-lt
+"operator<<" ntqkeysequence.html#operator-lt-lt
+"operator<<" ntqmainwindow.html#operator-lt-lt
+"operator<<" ntqmap.html#operator-lt-lt
+"operator<<" ntqmemarray.html#operator-lt-lt
+"operator<<" ntqpalette.html#operator-lt-lt
+"operator<<" ntqpen.html#operator-lt-lt
+"operator<<" ntqpicture.html#operator-lt-lt
+"operator<<" ntqpixmap.html#operator-lt-lt
+"operator<<" ntqpoint.html#operator-lt-lt
+"operator<<" ntqpointarray.html#operator-lt-lt
+"operator<<" ntqrect.html#operator-lt-lt
+"operator<<" ntqregion.html#operator-lt-lt
+"operator<<" ntqsize.html#operator-lt-lt
+"operator<<" ntqsplitter.html#operator-lt-lt
+"operator<<" ntqstring.html#operator-lt-lt
 "operator<<" qtime.html#operator-lt-lt
-"operator<<" quuid.html#operator-lt-lt
-"operator<<" qvaluelist.html#operator-lt-lt
-"operator<<" qwmatrix.html#operator-lt-lt
+"operator<<" ntquuid.html#operator-lt-lt
+"operator<<" ntqvaluelist.html#operator-lt-lt
+"operator<<" ntqwmatrix.html#operator-lt-lt
 "operator<=" qchar.html#operator-lt-eq
-"operator<=" qcstring.html#operator-lt-eq
-"operator<=" qstring.html#operator-lt-eq
+"operator<=" ntqcstring.html#operator-lt-eq
+"operator<=" ntqstring.html#operator-lt-eq
 "operator==" qchar.html#operator-eq-eq
-"operator==" qcstring.html#operator-eq-eq
-"operator==" qpoint.html#operator-eq-eq
-"operator==" qrect.html#operator-eq-eq
-"operator==" qsize.html#operator-eq-eq
-"operator==" qstring.html#operator-eq-eq
+"operator==" ntqcstring.html#operator-eq-eq
+"operator==" ntqpoint.html#operator-eq-eq
+"operator==" ntqrect.html#operator-eq-eq
+"operator==" ntqsize.html#operator-eq-eq
+"operator==" ntqstring.html#operator-eq-eq
 "operator>" qchar.html#operator-gt
-"operator>" qcstring.html#operator-gt
-"operator>" qstring.html#operator-gt
+"operator>" ntqcstring.html#operator-gt
+"operator>" ntqstring.html#operator-gt
 "operator>=" qchar.html#operator-gt-eq
-"operator>=" qcstring.html#operator-gt-eq
-"operator>=" qstring.html#operator-gt-eq
-"operator>>" qbitarray.html#operator-gt-gt
-"operator>>" qbrush.html#operator-gt-gt
-"operator>>" qcolor.html#operator-gt-gt
-"operator>>" qcstring.html#operator-gt-gt
-"operator>>" qcursor.html#operator-gt-gt
+"operator>=" ntqcstring.html#operator-gt-eq
+"operator>=" ntqstring.html#operator-gt-eq
+"operator>>" ntqbitarray.html#operator-gt-gt
+"operator>>" ntqbrush.html#operator-gt-gt
+"operator>>" ntqcolor.html#operator-gt-gt
+"operator>>" ntqcstring.html#operator-gt-gt
+"operator>>" ntqcursor.html#operator-gt-gt
 "operator>>" qdate.html#operator-gt-gt
-"operator>>" qdatetime.html#operator-gt-gt
-"operator>>" qdockarea.html#operator-gt-gt
-"operator>>" qfont.html#operator-gt-gt
-"operator>>" qimage.html#operator-gt-gt
-"operator>>" qkeysequence.html#operator-gt-gt
-"operator>>" qmainwindow.html#operator-gt-gt
-"operator>>" qmap.html#operator-gt-gt
-"operator>>" qmemarray.html#operator-gt-gt
-"operator>>" qpalette.html#operator-gt-gt
-"operator>>" qpen.html#operator-gt-gt
-"operator>>" qpicture.html#operator-gt-gt
-"operator>>" qpixmap.html#operator-gt-gt
-"operator>>" qpoint.html#operator-gt-gt
-"operator>>" qpointarray.html#operator-gt-gt
-"operator>>" qrect.html#operator-gt-gt
-"operator>>" qregion.html#operator-gt-gt
-"operator>>" qsize.html#operator-gt-gt
-"operator>>" qsplitter.html#operator-gt-gt
-"operator>>" qstring.html#operator-gt-gt
+"operator>>" ntqdatetime.html#operator-gt-gt
+"operator>>" ntqdockarea.html#operator-gt-gt
+"operator>>" ntqfont.html#operator-gt-gt
+"operator>>" ntqimage.html#operator-gt-gt
+"operator>>" ntqkeysequence.html#operator-gt-gt
+"operator>>" ntqmainwindow.html#operator-gt-gt
+"operator>>" ntqmap.html#operator-gt-gt
+"operator>>" ntqmemarray.html#operator-gt-gt
+"operator>>" ntqpalette.html#operator-gt-gt
+"operator>>" ntqpen.html#operator-gt-gt
+"operator>>" ntqpicture.html#operator-gt-gt
+"operator>>" ntqpixmap.html#operator-gt-gt
+"operator>>" ntqpoint.html#operator-gt-gt
+"operator>>" ntqpointarray.html#operator-gt-gt
+"operator>>" ntqrect.html#operator-gt-gt
+"operator>>" ntqregion.html#operator-gt-gt
+"operator>>" ntqsize.html#operator-gt-gt
+"operator>>" ntqsplitter.html#operator-gt-gt
+"operator>>" ntqstring.html#operator-gt-gt
 "operator>>" qtime.html#operator-gt-gt
-"operator>>" quuid.html#operator-gt-gt
-"operator>>" qvaluelist.html#operator-gt-gt
-"operator>>" qwmatrix.html#operator-gt-gt
-"operator^" qbitarray.html#operator^
-"operator|" qbitarray.html#operator|
+"operator>>" ntquuid.html#operator-gt-gt
+"operator>>" ntqvaluelist.html#operator-gt-gt
+"operator>>" ntqwmatrix.html#operator-gt-gt
+"operator^" ntqbitarray.html#operator^
+"operator|" ntqbitarray.html#operator|
 "organizers" organizers.html
 "plugins" plugins.html
-"qAddPostRoutine" qapplication.html#qAddPostRoutine
-"qAlpha" qcolor.html#qAlpha
-"qBlue" qcolor.html#qBlue
-"qChecksum" qmemarray.html#qChecksum
+"qAddPostRoutine" ntqapplication.html#qAddPostRoutine
+"qAlpha" ntqcolor.html#qAlpha
+"qBlue" ntqcolor.html#qBlue
+"qChecksum" ntqmemarray.html#qChecksum
 "qCompress" qbytearray.html#qCompress
-"qDebug" qapplication.html#qDebug
-"qDrawPlainRect" qpainter.html#qDrawPlainRect
-"qDrawShadeLine" qpainter.html#qDrawShadeLine
-"qDrawShadePanel" qpainter.html#qDrawShadePanel
-"qDrawShadeRect" qpainter.html#qDrawShadeRect
-"qDrawWinButton" qpainter.html#qDrawWinButton
-"qDrawWinPanel" qpainter.html#qDrawWinPanel
-"qFatal" qapplication.html#qFatal
-"qGray" qcolor.html#qGray
-"qGreen" qcolor.html#qGreen
-"qInitNetworkProtocols" qurloperator.html#qInitNetworkProtocols
-"qInstallMsgHandler" qapplication.html#qInstallMsgHandler
-"qMakePair" qpair.html#qMakePair
-"qRed" qcolor.html#qRed
-"qRgb" qcolor.html#qRgb
-"qRgba" qcolor.html#qRgba
-"qSysInfo" qapplication.html#qSysInfo
-"qSystemWarning" qapplication.html#qSystemWarning
+"qDebug" ntqapplication.html#qDebug
+"qDrawPlainRect" ntqpainter.html#qDrawPlainRect
+"qDrawShadeLine" ntqpainter.html#qDrawShadeLine
+"qDrawShadePanel" ntqpainter.html#qDrawShadePanel
+"qDrawShadeRect" ntqpainter.html#qDrawShadeRect
+"qDrawWinButton" ntqpainter.html#qDrawWinButton
+"qDrawWinPanel" ntqpainter.html#qDrawWinPanel
+"qFatal" ntqapplication.html#qFatal
+"qGray" ntqcolor.html#qGray
+"qGreen" ntqcolor.html#qGreen
+"qInitNetworkProtocols" ntqurloperator.html#qInitNetworkProtocols
+"qInstallMsgHandler" ntqapplication.html#qInstallMsgHandler
+"qMakePair" ntqpair.html#qMakePair
+"qRed" ntqcolor.html#qRed
+"qRgb" ntqcolor.html#qRgb
+"qRgba" ntqcolor.html#qRgba
+"qSysInfo" ntqapplication.html#qSysInfo
+"qSystemWarning" ntqapplication.html#qSystemWarning
 "qUncompress" qbytearray.html#qUncompress
-"qVersion" qapplication.html#qVersion
-"qWarning" qapplication.html#qWarning
+"qVersion" ntqapplication.html#qVersion
+"qWarning" ntqapplication.html#qWarning
 "qaction-examples" qaction-examples.html
 "qaxcontainer-examples" qaxcontainer-examples.html
 "qaxserver-examples" qaxserver-examples.html
 "qfont-examples" qfont-examples.html
-"qmemmove" qcstring.html#qmemmove
+"qmemmove" ntqcstring.html#qmemmove
 "qprocess-examples" qprocess-examples.html
-"qstrcmp" qcstring.html#qstrcmp
-"qstrcpy" qcstring.html#qstrcpy
-"qstrdup" qcstring.html#qstrdup
-"qstricmp" qcstring.html#qstricmp
-"qstrlen" qcstring.html#qstrlen
-"qstrncmp" qcstring.html#qstrncmp
-"qstrncpy" qcstring.html#qstrncpy
-"qstrnicmp" qcstring.html#qstrnicmp
-"qt_find_obj_child" qobject.html#qt_find_obj_child
-"qtl" qtl.html
+"qstrcmp" ntqcstring.html#qstrcmp
+"qstrcpy" ntqcstring.html#qstrcpy
+"qstrdup" ntqcstring.html#qstrdup
+"qstricmp" ntqcstring.html#qstricmp
+"qstrlen" ntqcstring.html#qstrlen
+"qstrncmp" ntqcstring.html#qstrncmp
+"qstrncpy" ntqcstring.html#qstrncpy
+"qstrnicmp" ntqcstring.html#qstrnicmp
+"qt_find_obj_child" ntqobject.html#qt_find_obj_child
+"qtl" ntqtl.html
 "qws" qws.html
 "shared" shared.html
 "sql-examples" sql-examples.html
diff --git a/doc/html/index.html b/doc/html/index.html
index fd7c62ff6..d5fb8cc00 100644
--- a/doc/html/index.html
+++ b/doc/html/index.html
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Solutions
 
 
 
      
-
    •  How to Learn TQt
+
    •  How to Learn TQt
 
    •  Getting Ready for TQt 4
 
    •  Tutorial #1, 
 Tutorial #2
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Solutions
 
 
 
        
-
      •  About TQt
+
      •  About TQt
 
      •  Commercial Editions
 
      •  Open Source Edition
 
      •  About Trolltech
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Licenses & Credits
 
 
          
 
        •  Window system specific notes
-
        •  ActiveTQt Framework
+
        •  ActiveTQt Framework
 
        •  Motif Extension
 
        •  Mac OS X development
 
        •  Porting from TQt 2.x to TQt 3.x
diff --git a/doc/html/io.html b/doc/html/io.html
index 8426b923f..35cc7807b 100644
--- a/doc/html/io.html
+++ b/doc/html/io.html
@@ -36,41 +36,41 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 devices, processes, files etc. as well as manipulating files and directories.
 
           
 
          
-
          TQBufferI/O device that operates on a TQByteArray
-
          TQClipboardAccess to the window system clipboard
-
          TQDataStreamSerialization of binary data to a TQIODevice
-
          TQDirAccess to directory structures and their contents in a platform-independent way
-
          TQDnsAsynchronous DNS lookups
-
          TQFileI/O device that operates on files
-
          TQFileInfoSystem-independent file information
-
          TQFtpImplementation of the FTP protocol
-
          TQHostAddressIP address
-
          TQHttpImplementation of the HTTP protocol
+
          TQBufferI/O device that operates on a TQByteArray
+
          TQClipboardAccess to the window system clipboard
+
          TQDataStreamSerialization of binary data to a TQIODevice
+
          TQDirAccess to directory structures and their contents in a platform-independent way
+
          TQDnsAsynchronous DNS lookups
+
          TQFileI/O device that operates on files
+
          TQFileInfoSystem-independent file information
+
          TQFtpImplementation of the FTP protocol
+
          TQHostAddressIP address
+
          TQHttpImplementation of the HTTP protocol
 
          TQHttpHeaderHeader information for HTTP
 
          TQHttpRequestHeaderRequest header information for HTTP
 
          TQHttpResponseHeaderResponse header information for HTTP
 
          TQImageIOParameters for loading and saving images
-
          TQIODeviceThe base class of I/O devices
-
          TQLocalFsImplementation of a TQNetworkProtocol that works on the local file system
+
          TQIODeviceThe base class of I/O devices
+
          TQLocalFsImplementation of a TQNetworkProtocol that works on the local file system
 
          TQMacMimeMaps open-standard MIME to Mac flavors
 
          TQMimeSourceAbstraction of objects which provide formatted data of a certain MIME type
 
          TQMimeSourceFactoryExtensible provider of mime-typed data
 
          TQNetworkOperationCommon operations for network protocols
-
          TQNetworkProtocolCommon API for network protocols
-
          TQProcessUsed to start external programs and to communicate with them
-
          TQServerSocketTCP-based server
-
          TQSettingsPersistent platform-independent application settings
-
          TQSignalCan be used to send signals for classes that don't inherit TQObject
-
          TQSignalMapperBundles signals from identifiable senders
-
          TQSocketBuffered TCP connection
-
          TQSocketDevicePlatform-independent low-level socket API
-
          TQSocketNotifierSupport for socket callbacks
+
          TQNetworkProtocolCommon API for network protocols
+
          TQProcessUsed to start external programs and to communicate with them
+
          TQServerSocketTCP-based server
+
          TQSettingsPersistent platform-independent application settings
+
          TQSignalCan be used to send signals for classes that don't inherit TQObject
+
          TQSignalMapperBundles signals from identifiable senders
+
          TQSocketBuffered TCP connection
+
          TQSocketDevicePlatform-independent low-level socket API
+
          TQSocketNotifierSupport for socket callbacks
 
          TQTextIStreamConvenience class for input streams
 
          TQTextOStreamConvenience class for output streams
-
          TQTextStreamBasic functions for reading and writing text using a TQIODevice
-
          TQUrlURL parser and simplifies working with URLs
-
          TQUrlInfoStores information about URLs
-
          TQUrlOperatorCommon operations on URLs
+
          TQTextStreamBasic functions for reading and writing text using a TQIODevice
+
          TQUrlURL parser and simplifies working with URLs
+
          TQUrlInfoStores information about URLs
+
          TQUrlOperatorCommon operations on URLs
 
          TQWindowsMimeMaps open-standard MIME to Window Clipboard formats
 
          
 
diff --git a/doc/html/keyfeatures30.html b/doc/html/keyfeatures30.html
index 0a549956a..4f948b0c9 100644
--- a/doc/html/keyfeatures30.html
+++ b/doc/html/keyfeatures30.html
@@ -53,10 +53,10 @@ Arabic and Hebrew) and also provides improved support for Asian
 languages.
 
           Many new classes have been added to the TQt Library. Amongst them are
 classes that provide a docking architecture
-(TQDockArea/TQDockWindow), a powerful rich text editor
-(TQTextEdit), a class to store and access application settings
-(TQSettings) and a class to create and communicate with processes
-(TQProcess).
+(TQDockArea/TQDockWindow), a powerful rich text editor
+(TQTextEdit), a class to store and access application settings
+(TQSettings) and a class to create and communicate with processes
+(TQProcess).
 
           Apart from the changes in the library itself a lot has been done to
 make the development of TQt applications with TQt 3.0 even easier than
 before. Two new applications have been added: TQt Linguist is a tool to
@@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ terms of TQt's signals/slots mechanism directly in TQt Designer.
 
           
 
           Plugins
 
          
-
           The TQLibrary class provides a platform independent wrapper for runtime
+
           The TQLibrary class provides a platform independent wrapper for runtime
 loading of shared libraries. TQPluginManager makes it trivial to implement
 plugin support in applications. The TQt library is able to load
 additional styles, database drivers and text codecs from plugins. 
@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ optimized and extended to support editing. It allows editing formatted
 text with different fonts, colors, paragraph styles, tables and
 images. The editor supports different word wrap modes, command-based
 undo/redo, multiple selections, drag and drop, and many other
-features.  The new TQTextEdit engine is highly optimized for proccesing
+features.  The new TQTextEdit engine is highly optimized for proccesing
 and displaying large documents tquickly and efficiently. 
 
           
           Unicode
 
          
@@ -139,35 +139,35 @@ these scripts, as TQt takes care of this automatically.
 windows are widgets, that can be attached to, and detached from, dock
 areas. The commonest kind of dock window is a tool bar. Any number of
 dock windows may be placed in a dock area. A main window can have dock
-areas, for example, TQMainWindow provides four dock areas (top, left,
+areas, for example, TQMainWindow provides four dock areas (top, left,
 bottom, right) by default. The user can freely move dock windows and
 place them at a convenient place in a dock area, or drag them out of
 the application and have them float freely as top level windows in
 their own right. Dock windows can also be minimized or hidden.
 
           For developers, dock windows behave just like ordinary widgets. TQToolbar
 for example is now a specialized subclass of a dock window.  The API
-of TQMainWindow and TQToolBar is source compatible with TQt 2.x, so
+of TQMainWindow and TQToolBar is source compatible with TQt 2.x, so
 existing code which uses these classes will continue to work.
 
           
           Regular Expressions
 
          
-
           TQt has always provided regular expression support, but that support
+
           TQt has always provided regular expression support, but that support
 was pretty much limited to what was required in common GUI control
 elements such as file dialogs. TQt 3.0 introduces a new regular
-expression engine, TQRegExp, that supports most of Perl's regex
+expression engine, TQRegExp, that supports most of Perl's regex
 features and is Unicode based. The most useful additions are support
 for parentheses (capturing and non-capturing) and backreferences.
 
           
           Storing application settings
 
          
 
           Most programs will need to store some settings between runs, for
 example, user selected fonts, colors and other preferences, or a list
-of recently used files.  The new TQSettings class provides a platform
+of recently used files.  The new TQSettings class provides a platform
 independent way to achieve this goal. The API makes it easy to store
 and retrieve most of the basic data types used in TQt (such as basic
 C++ types, strings, lists, colors, etc). The class uses the registry
 on the Windows platform and traditional resource files on Unix.
 
           
           Creating and controlling other processes
 
          
-
           TQProcess is a class that allows you to start other programs from
+
           TQProcess is a class that allows you to start other programs from
 within a TQt application in a platform independent manner. It gives you
 full control over the started program, for example you can redirect
 the input and output of console applications.
@@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ range of users, including those with disabilities. In TQt 3.0, most
 widgets provide accessibility information for assistive tools that can
 be used by a wide range of disabled users. TQt standard widgets like
 buttons or range controls are fully supported. Support for complex
-widgets, like e.g. TQListView, is in development. Existing applications
+widgets, like e.g. TQListView, is in development. Existing applications
 that make use of standard widgets will become accessible just by using
 TQt 3.0.
 
           TQt uses the Active Accessibility infrastructure on Windows, and needs
@@ -201,13 +201,13 @@ stage.
 
           
           SVG support
 
          
 
           SVG is a W3C standard for "Scalable Vector Graphics". TQt 3.0's XML
-support means that TQPicture can optionally generate and import static
+support means that TQPicture can optionally generate and import static
 SVG documents. All the SVG features that have an equivalent in
-TQPainter are supported.
+TQPainter are supported.
 
           
           Multihead support
 
          
 
           Many professional applications, such as DTP and CAD software, are able
-to display data on two or more monitors. In TQt 3.0 the TQDesktopWidget
+to display data on two or more monitors. In TQt 3.0 the TQDesktopWidget
 class provides the application with runtime information about the
 number and geometry of the desktops on the different monitors and such
 allows applications to efficiently use a multi-monitor setup.
@@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ X11.
 
           TQt 3.0 now complies with the NET WM Specification, recently adopted
 by KDE 2.0.  This allows easy integration and proper execution with
 desktop environments that support the NET WM specification.
-
           The font handling on X11 has undergone major changes.  TQFont no longer
+
           The font handling on X11 has undergone major changes.  TQFont no longer
 has a one-to-one relation with window system fonts.  TQFont is now a
 logical font that can load multiple window system fonts to simplify
 Unicode text display.  This completely removes the burden of
@@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ alpha channel (semi transparency) on the systems that support the
 rendering extension (at the moment XFree 4.0.3 and later).
 
           
           Printing
 
          
-
           Printing support has been enhanced on all platforms. The TQPrinter
+
           Printing support has been enhanced on all platforms. The TQPrinter
 class now supports setting a virtual resolution for the painting
 process. This makes WYSIWYG printing trivial, and also allows you to
 take full advantage of the high resolution of a printer when painting
@@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ enhanced. It supports the embedding of true/open type and type1 fonts
 into the document, and can correctly handle and display Unicode.
 Support for fonts built into the printer has been enhanced and TQt now
 knows about the most common printer fonts used for Asian languages.
-
           
           TQHttp
+
           
           TQHttp
 
          
 
           This class provides a simple interface for HTTP downloads and uploads.
 
           
           Compatibility with the Standard Template Library (STL)
@@ -286,7 +286,7 @@ dynamic creation of widgets directly from XML user interface
 description files (*.ui files) at runtime. This eliminates the need of
 recompiling your application when the GUI changes, and could be used
 to enable your customers to do their own customizations. Technically,
-the feature is provided by a new class, TQWidgetFactory in the
+the feature is provided by a new class, TQWidgetFactory in the
 TQResource library.
 
           
           TQt Linguist
 
          
diff --git a/doc/html/layout-example.html b/doc/html/layout-example.html
index bff159fab..a70717757 100644
--- a/doc/html/layout-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/layout-example.html
@@ -47,49 +47,49 @@ classes, TQGridLayout, 
 **
 *****************************************************************************/
 
-#include <qapplication.h>
-#include <qlabel.h>
-#include <qcolor.h>
-#include <qpushbutton.h>
-#include <qlayout.h>
-#include <qlineedit.h>
-#include <qmultilineedit.h>
-#include <qmenubar.h>
-#include <qpopupmenu.h>
-
-class ExampleWidget : public TQWidget
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
+#include <ntqlabel.h>
+#include <ntqcolor.h>
+#include <ntqpushbutton.h>
+#include <ntqlayout.h>
+#include <ntqlineedit.h>
+#include <ntqmultilineedit.h>
+#include <ntqmenubar.h>
+#include <ntqpopupmenu.h>
+
+class ExampleWidget : public TQWidget
 {
 public:
-    ExampleWidget( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
+    ExampleWidget( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
     ~ExampleWidget();
 };
 
-ExampleWidget::ExampleWidget( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name )
+ExampleWidget::ExampleWidget( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+    : TQWidget( parent, name )
 {
     // Make the top-level layout; a vertical box to contain all widgets
     // and sub-layouts.
     TQBoxLayout *topLayout = new TQVBoxLayout( this, 5 );
 
     // Create a menubar...
-    TQMenuBar *menubar = new TQMenuBar( this );
-    menubar->setSeparator( TQMenuBar::InWindowsStyle );
-    TQPopupMenu* popup;
-    popup = new TQPopupMenu( this );
-    popup->insertItem( "&Quit", qApp, SLOT(quit()) );
-    menubar->insertItem( "&File", popup );
+    TQMenuBar *menubar = new TQMenuBar( this );
+    menubar->setSeparator( TQMenuBar::InWindowsStyle );
+    TQPopupMenu* popup;
+    popup = new TQPopupMenu( this );
+    popup->insertItem( "&Quit", qApp, SLOT(quit()) );
+    menubar->insertItem( "&File", popup );
 
     // ...and tell the layout about it.
-    topLayout->setMenuBar( menubar );
+    topLayout->setMenuBar( menubar );
 
     // Make an hbox that will hold a row of buttons.
     TQBoxLayout *buttons = new TQHBoxLayout( topLayout );
     int i;
     for ( i = 1; i <= 4; i++ ) {
-        TQPushButton* but = new TQPushButton( this );
-        TQString s;
-        s.sprintf( "Button %d", i );
-        but->setText( s );
+        TQPushButton* but = new TQPushButton( this );
+        TQString s;
+        s.sprintf( "Button %d", i );
+        but->setText( s );
 
         // Set horizontal stretch factor to 10 to let the buttons
         // stretch horizontally. The buttons will not stretch
@@ -104,10 +104,10 @@ public:
     // Make another hbox that will hold a left-justified row of buttons.
     TQBoxLayout *buttons2 = new TQHBoxLayout( topLayout );
 
-    TQPushButton* but = new TQPushButton( "Button five", this );
+    TQPushButton* but = new TQPushButton( "Button five", this );
     buttons2->addWidget( but );
 
-    but = new TQPushButton( "Button 6", this );
+    but = new TQPushButton( "Button 6", this );
     buttons2->addWidget( but );
 
     // Fill up the rest of the hbox with stretchable space, so that
@@ -115,9 +115,9 @@ public:
     buttons2->addStretch( 10 );
 
     // Make  a big widget that will grab all space in the middle.
-    TQMultiLineEdit *bigWidget = new TQMultiLineEdit( this );
-    bigWidget->setText( "This widget will get all the remaining space" );
-    bigWidget->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Panel | TQFrame::Plain );
+    TQMultiLineEdit *bigWidget = new TQMultiLineEdit( this );
+    bigWidget->setText( "This widget will get all the remaining space" );
+    bigWidget->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Panel | TQFrame::Plain );
 
     // Set vertical stretch factor to 10 to let the bigWidget stretch
     // vertically. It will stretch horizontally because there are no
@@ -141,14 +141,14 @@ public:
     int row;
 
     for ( row = 0; row < numRows; row++ ) {
-        TQLineEdit *ed = new TQLineEdit( this );
+        TQLineEdit *ed = new TQLineEdit( this );
         // The line edit goes in the second column
         grid->addWidget( ed, row, linedCol );
 
         // Make a label that is a buddy of the line edit
-        TQString s;
-        s.sprintf( "Line &%d", row+1 );
-        TQLabel *label = new TQLabel( ed, s, this );
+        TQString s;
+        s.sprintf( "Line &%d", row+1 );
+        TQLabel *label = new TQLabel( ed, s, this );
         // The label goes in the first column.
         grid->addWidget( label, row, labelCol );
     }
@@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ public:
     // The multiline edit will cover the entire vertical range of the
     // grid (rows 0 to numRows) and stay in column 2.
 
-    TQMultiLineEdit *med = new TQMultiLineEdit( this );
+    TQMultiLineEdit *med = new TQMultiLineEdit( this );
     grid->addMultiCellWidget( med, 0, -1, multiCol, multiCol );
 
     // The labels will take the space they need. Let the remaining
@@ -166,18 +166,18 @@ public:
     grid->setColStretch( multiCol, 20 );
 
     // Add a widget at the bottom.
-    TQLabel* sb = new TQLabel( this );
-    sb->setText( "Let's pretend this is a status bar" );
-    sb->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Panel | TQFrame::Sunken );
+    TQLabel* sb = new TQLabel( this );
+    sb->setText( "Let's pretend this is a status bar" );
+    sb->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Panel | TQFrame::Sunken );
     // This widget will use all horizontal space, and have a fixed height.
 
     // we should have made a subclass and implemented sizePolicy there...
-    sb->setFixedHeight( sb->sizeHint().height() );
+    sb->setFixedHeight( sb->sizeHint().height() );
 
-    sb->setAlignment( AlignVCenter | AlignLeft );
+    sb->setAlignment( AlignVCenter | AlignLeft );
     topLayout->addWidget( sb );
 
-    topLayout->activate();
+    topLayout->activate();
 }
 
 ExampleWidget::~ExampleWidget()
@@ -188,14 +188,14 @@ ExampleWidget::~ExampleWidget()
 
 int main( int argc, char **argv )
 {
-    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
+    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
 
     ExampleWidget f;
-    a.setMainWidget(&f);
-    f.setCaption("TQt Example - Layouts");
-    f.show();
+    a.setMainWidget(&f);
+    f.setCaption("TQt Example - Layouts");
+    f.show();
 
-    return a.exec();
+    return a.exec();
 }
 
    
 
diff --git a/doc/html/layout.html b/doc/html/layout.html
index 749cd3c45..7fd76c805 100644
--- a/doc/html/layout.html
+++ b/doc/html/layout.html
@@ -59,18 +59,18 @@ layouts and which generates the C++ layout code for you.
 
     
     Layout Widgets
 
    
 
     The easiest way to give your widgets a good layout is to use the
-layout widgets: TQHBox, TQVBox and TQGrid. A layout widget
+layout widgets: TQHBox, TQVBox and TQGrid. A layout widget
 automatically lays out its child widgets in the order they are
 constructed. To create more complex layouts, you can nest layout
-widgets inside each other. (Note that TQWidget does not have a
+widgets inside each other. (Note that TQWidget does not have a
 layout by default, you must add one if you want to lay out widgets
-inside a TQWidget.)
+inside a TQWidget.)
 
     
      
-
    •  A TQHBox lays out its child widgets in a horizontal row, left to right.
+
    •  A TQHBox lays out its child widgets in a horizontal row, left to right.
 
       
      Horizontal box with five child widgets
       
-
       
    •  A TQVBox lays out its child widgets in a vertical column, top to bottom.
+
       
    •  A TQVBox lays out its child widgets in a vertical column, top to bottom.
 
       
      Vertical box with five child widgets
       
-
       
    •  A TQGrid lays out its child widgets in a two dimensional grid.
+
       
    •  A TQGrid lays out its child widgets in a two dimensional grid.
 You can specify how many columns the grid has, and it is populated left to
 right, beginning a new row when the previous row is full. The grid is
 fixed; the child widgets will not flow to other rows as the widget is
@@ -79,22 +79,22 @@ resized.
 
       
      Two-column grid with five child widgets
       
 
       The grid shown above can be produced by the following code:
 
      -    TQGrid *mainGrid = new TQGrid( 2 ); // a 2 x n grid
-    new TQLabel( "One", mainGrid );
-    new TQLabel( "Two", mainGrid );
-    new TQLabel( "Three", mainGrid );
-    new TQLabel( "Four", mainGrid );
-    new TQLabel( "Five", mainGrid );
+    TQGrid *mainGrid = new TQGrid( 2 ); // a 2 x n grid
+    new TQLabel( "One", mainGrid );
+    new TQLabel( "Two", mainGrid );
+    new TQLabel( "Three", mainGrid );
+    new TQLabel( "Four", mainGrid );
+    new TQLabel( "Five", mainGrid );
 
      
  
 
       You can adjust the layout to some extent by calling
-TQWidget::setMinimumSize() or TQWidget::setFixedSize() on the child widgets.
+TQWidget::setMinimumSize() or TQWidget::setFixedSize() on the child widgets.
 
       
       Adding Widgets to a Layout
 
      
 
       When you add widgets to a layout the layout process works as follows:
 
        
 
      1.  All the widgets will initially be allocated an amount of space in
-accordance with their TQWidget::sizePolicy(). 
+accordance with their TQWidget::sizePolicy(). 
 
      2.  If any of the widgets have stretch factors set, with a value
 greater than zero, then they are allocated space in proportion to
 their stretch factor. 
@@ -117,18 +117,18 @@ determining factor.)
 
 
         Widgets are normally created without any stretch factor set. When they
 are laid out in a layout the widgets are given a share of space in
-accordance with their TQWidget::sizePolicy() or their minimum size hint
+accordance with their TQWidget::sizePolicy() or their minimum size hint
 whichever is the greater. Stretch factors are used to change how much
 space widgets are given in proportion to one another.
-
         If we have three widgets laid out using a TQHBox with no stretch
+
         If we have three widgets laid out using a TQHBox with no stretch
 factors set we will get a layout like this:
 
         
        3 widgets in a row
         
 
         If we apply stretch factors to each widget, they will be laid out in
 proportion (but never less than their minimum size hint), e.g.
 
         
        3 stretch factored widgets in a row
         
-
         
         TQLayout subclassing
+
         
         TQLayout subclassing
 
        
-
         If you need more control over the layout, use a TQLayout subclass. The layout classes included in TQt are TQGridLayout and TQBoxLayout. (TQHBoxLayout and TQVBoxLayout are trivial subclasses of TQBoxLayout,
+
         If you need more control over the layout, use a TQLayout subclass. The layout classes included in TQt are TQGridLayout and TQBoxLayout. (TQHBoxLayout and TQVBoxLayout are trivial subclasses of TQBoxLayout,
 that are simpler to use and make the code easier to read.)
 
         When you use a layout, you must insert each child both into its parent
 widget (done in the constructor) and into its layout (typically done
@@ -138,20 +138,20 @@ stretch, and placement.
 
         The following code makes a grid like the one above, with a couple of
 improvements:
 
        -    TQWidget *main = new TQWidget;
+    TQWidget *main = new TQWidget;
 
     // make a 1x1 grid; it will auto-expand
     TQGridLayout *grid = new TQGridLayout( main, 1, 1 );
 
     // add the first four widgets with (row, column) addressing
-    grid->addWidget( new TQLabel( "One", main ),   0, 0 );
-    grid->addWidget( new TQLabel( "Two", main ),   0, 1 );
-    grid->addWidget( new TQLabel( "Three", main ), 1, 0 );
-    grid->addWidget( new TQLabel( "Four", main ),  1, 1 );
+    grid->addWidget( new TQLabel( "One", main ),   0, 0 );
+    grid->addWidget( new TQLabel( "Two", main ),   0, 1 );
+    grid->addWidget( new TQLabel( "Three", main ), 1, 0 );
+    grid->addWidget( new TQLabel( "Four", main ),  1, 1 );
 
     // add the last widget on row 2, spanning from column 0 to
     // column 1, and center aligned 
-    grid->addMultiCellWidget( new TQLabel( "Five", main ), 2, 2, 0, 1,
+    grid->addMultiCellWidget( new TQLabel( "Five", main ), 2, 2, 0, 1,
                               TQt::AlignCenter );
 
     // let the ratio between the widths of columns 0 and 1 be 2:3
@@ -162,11 +162,11 @@ improvements:
 
         You can insert layouts inside a layout by giving the parent layout as
 a parameter in the constructor.
 
        -    TQWidget *main = new TQWidget;
-    TQLineEdit *field = new TQLineEdit( main );
-    TQPushButton *ok = new TQPushButton( "OK", main );
-    TQPushButton *cancel = new TQPushButton( "Cancel", main );
-    TQLabel *label = new TQLabel( "Write once, compile everywhere.", main );
+    TQWidget *main = new TQWidget;
+    TQLineEdit *field = new TQLineEdit( main );
+    TQPushButton *ok = new TQPushButton( "OK", main );
+    TQPushButton *cancel = new TQPushButton( "Cancel", main );
+    TQLabel *label = new TQLabel( "Write once, compile everywhere.", main );
 
     // a layout on a widget
     TQVBoxLayout *vbox = new TQVBoxLayout( main );
@@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ into.
 
         
         Custom Layouts
 
        
 
         If the built-in layout classes are not sufficient, you can define your
-own. You must make a subclass of TQLayout that handles resizing and
+own. You must make a subclass of TQLayout that handles resizing and
 size calculations, as well as a subclass of TQGLayoutIterator to
 iterate over your layout class.
 
         See the Custom Layout page for an
@@ -194,24 +194,24 @@ in-depth description.
 
         
         Custom Widgets In Layouts
 
        
 
         When you make your own widget class, you should also communicate its
-layout properties. If the widget has a TQLayout, this is already taken
+layout properties. If the widget has a TQLayout, this is already taken
 care of. If the widget does not have any child widgets, or uses manual
-layout, you should reimplement the following TQWidget member functions:
+layout, you should reimplement the following TQWidget member functions:
 
         
        
-
         Call TQWidget::updateGeometry() whenever the size hint, minimum size
+
         Call TQWidget::updateGeometry() whenever the size hint, minimum size
 hint or size policy changes. This will cause a layout recalculation.
 Multiple calls to updateGeometry() will only cause one recalculation.
 
         If the preferred height of your widget depends on its actual width
-(e.g. a label with automatic word-breaking), set the hasHeightForWidth() flag in
-sizePolicy(), and reimplement TQWidget::heightForWidth().
+(e.g. a label with automatic word-breaking), set the hasHeightForWidth() flag in
+sizePolicy(), and reimplement TQWidget::heightForWidth().
 
         Even if you implement heightForWidth(), it is still necessary to
 provide a good sizeHint(). The sizeHint() provides the preferred width
-of the widget, and it is used by TQLayout subclasses that do not
+of the widget, and it is used by TQLayout subclasses that do not
 support heightForWidth() (both TQGridLayout and TQBoxLayout support it).
 
         For further guidance when implementing these functions, see their
 implementations in existing TQt classes that have similar layout
@@ -219,11 +219,11 @@ requirements to your new widget.
 
         
         Manual Layout
 
        
 
         If you are making a one-of-a-kind special layout, you can also make a
-custom widget as described above. Reimplement TQWidget::resizeEvent()
-to calculate the required distribution of sizes and call setGeometry() on each child.
-
         The widget will get an event with type
+custom widget as described above. Reimplement TQWidget::resizeEvent()
+to calculate the required distribution of sizes and call setGeometry() on each child.
+
         The widget will get an event with type
 LayoutHint when the layout needs to be recalculated. Reimplement
-TQWidget::event() to be notified of LayoutHint events.
+TQWidget::event() to be notified of LayoutHint events.
 
         
         Layout Issues
 
        
 
         The use of rich text in a label widget can introduce some problems to
diff --git a/doc/html/licenses.html b/doc/html/licenses.html
index 6813b516d..0ddaf557f 100644
--- a/doc/html/licenses.html
+++ b/doc/html/licenses.html
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission
 notice appear in supporting documentation. This software is
 provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
 
        
 
        
 
         Copyright (C) 1999 Serika Kurusugawa. All rights reserved.
@@ -75,9 +75,9 @@ HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
 LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
 OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
 SUCH DAMAGE.
        
 
        
 
         Copyright (C) 1999-2000 Mizi Research Inc. All rights reserved.
@@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
 LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
 OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
 SUCH DAMAGE.
        
 
        
 
         Copyright (C) 2000  Ming-Che Chuang
@@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
 LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
 OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
 SUCH DAMAGE.
        
 
        
 
         Copyright (C) 2000 Hans Petter Bieker. All rights reserved.
@@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
 LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
 OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
 SUCH DAMAGE.
        
 
        
 
         Copyright (C) 2000 TurboLinux, Inc.  Written by Justin Yu and Sean Chen.
@@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
 LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
 OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
 SUCH DAMAGE.
        
 
        
 
         Copyright (c) 1989 The Regents of the University of California.
@@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF ANY KIND CONCERNING THE MERCHANTABILITY
 OF THIS SOFTWARE OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
 
         This product includes software developed by the University of
 California, Berkeley and its contributors.
        
 
        
 
         Copyright (c) 2002 Jorge Acereda and Peter O'Gorman
@@ -260,8 +260,8 @@ NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
 LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
 OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
 WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
        
 
        
 
         Copyright 1995, Trinity College Computing Center.
@@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ TrueType font to a type 3 PostScript font.
 notice or indicate any restrictions on use.
 
         Last revised 11 July 1995.
 
        
 
        
 
         Copyright 1996 Daniel Dardailler.
@@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ above.
 
    
 
    
 
     TQt supports GIF reading if it is configured that way during
-installation (see qgif.h). If it is, we are required to state that
+installation (see ntqgif.h). If it is, we are required to state that
 "The Graphics Interchange Format(c) is the Copyright property of
 CompuServe Incorporated. GIF(sm) is a Service Mark property of
 CompuServe Incorporated."
diff --git a/doc/html/life-example.html b/doc/html/life-example.html
index f07f6127f..ed6771cd8 100644
--- a/doc/html/life-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/life-example.html
@@ -48,10 +48,10 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 #ifndef LIFE_H
 #define LIFE_H
 
-#include <qframe.h>
+#include <ntqframe.h>
 
 
-class LifeWidget : public TQFrame
+class LifeWidget : public TQFrame
 {
     Q_OBJECT
 public:
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ protected:
     virtual void mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
     virtual void mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
     virtual void resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * );
-    void         mouseHandle( const TQPoint &pos );
+    void         mouseHandle( const TQPoint &pos );
 
 private:
     enum { MAXSIZE = 50, MINSIZE = 10, BORDER = 5 };
@@ -110,28 +110,28 @@ private:
 
 #include "life.h"
 
-#include <qpainter.h>
-#include <qdrawutil.h>
-#include <qcheckbox.h>
-#include <qevent.h>
-#include <qapplication.h>
+#include <ntqpainter.h>
+#include <ntqdrawutil.h>
+#include <ntqcheckbox.h>
+#include <ntqevent.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
 
 // The main game of life widget
 
 LifeWidget::LifeWidget( int s, TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQFrame( parent, name )
+    : TQFrame( parent, name )
 {
     SCALE = s;
 
     maxi = maxj = 50;
-    setMinimumSize( MINSIZE * SCALE + 2 * BORDER,
+    setMinimumSize( MINSIZE * SCALE + 2 * BORDER,
                    MINSIZE * SCALE + 2 * BORDER );
-    setMaximumSize( MAXSIZE * SCALE + 2 * BORDER,
+    setMaximumSize( MAXSIZE * SCALE + 2 * BORDER,
                    MAXSIZE * SCALE + 2 * BORDER );
-    setSizeIncrement( SCALE, SCALE);
+    setSizeIncrement( SCALE, SCALE);
 
     clear();
-    resize( maxi * SCALE + 2 * BORDER , maxj * SCALE + 2 * BORDER );
+    resize( maxi * SCALE + 2 * BORDER , maxj * SCALE + 2 * BORDER );
 
 }
 
@@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ void LifeWidget::clear()
             for ( int j = 0; j < MAXSIZE + 2; j++ )
                 cells[t][i][j] = FALSE;
 
-    repaint();
+    repaint();
 }
 
 
@@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ void LifeWidget::clear()
 // this is not in general TRUE, but in practice it's good enough for
 // this program
 
-void LifeWidget::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * e )
+void LifeWidget::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * e )
 {
     maxi = (e->size().width()  - 2 * BORDER) / SCALE;
     maxj = (e->size().height() - 2 * BORDER) / SCALE;
@@ -164,25 +164,25 @@ void LifeWidget::setPoint( int i, int j )
     if ( i < 1 || i > maxi || j < 1 || j > maxi )
         return;
     cells[current][i][j] = TRUE;
-    repaint( index2pos(i), index2pos(j), SCALE, SCALE, FALSE );
+    repaint( index2pos(i), index2pos(j), SCALE, SCALE, FALSE );
 }
 
 
-void LifeWidget::mouseHandle( const TQPoint &pos )
+void LifeWidget::mouseHandle( const TQPoint &pos )
 {
-    int i = pos2index( pos.x() );
-    int j = pos2index( pos.y() );
+    int i = pos2index( pos.x() );
+    int j = pos2index( pos.y() );
     setPoint( i, j );
 }
 
 
-void LifeWidget::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
+void LifeWidget::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
 {
     mouseHandle( e->pos() );
 }
 
 
-void LifeWidget::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
+void LifeWidget::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
 {
     if ( e->button() == TQMouseEvent::LeftButton )
         mouseHandle( e->pos() );
@@ -207,11 +207,11 @@ void LifeWidget::nextGeneration()
         }
     }
     current = !current;
-    repaint( FALSE );           // repaint without erase
+    repaint( FALSE );           // repaint without erase
 }
 
 
-void LifeWidget::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * e )
+void LifeWidget::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * e )
 {
     int starti = pos2index( e->rect().left() );
     int stopi  = pos2index( e->rect().right() );
@@ -223,17 +223,17 @@ void LifeWidget::nextGeneration()
     if (stopj > maxj)
         stopj = maxj;
 
-    TQPainter paint( this );
+    TQPainter paint( this );
     for ( int i = starti; i <= stopi; i++ ) {
         for ( int j = startj; j <= stopj; j++ ) {
             if ( cells[current][i][j] )
-                qDrawShadePanel( &paint, index2pos( i ), index2pos( j ),
+                qDrawShadePanel( &paint, index2pos( i ), index2pos( j ),
                                  SCALE - 1, SCALE - 1, colorGroup() );
             else if ( cells[!current][i][j] )
-                erase(index2pos( i ), index2pos( j ), SCALE - 1, SCALE - 1);
+                erase(index2pos( i ), index2pos( j ), SCALE - 1, SCALE - 1);
         }
     }
-    drawFrame( &paint );
+    drawFrame( &paint );
 }
 
    
 
@@ -250,22 +250,22 @@ void LifeWidget::nextGeneration()
 *****************************************************************************/
 
 #include "lifedlg.h"
-#include <qapplication.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
 #include <stdlib.h>
 
 void usage()
 {
-    qWarning( "Usage: life [-scale scale]" );
+    qWarning( "Usage: life [-scale scale]" );
 }
 
 int main( int argc, char **argv )
 {
-    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
+    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
 
     int scale = 10;
 
     for ( int i = 1; i < argc; i++ ){
-        TQString arg = argv[i];
+        TQString arg = argv[i];
         if ( arg == "-scale" )
             scale = atoi( argv[++i] );
         else {
@@ -278,11 +278,11 @@ int main( int argc, char **argv )
         scale = 2;
 
     LifeDialog *life = new LifeDialog( scale );
-    a.setMainWidget( life );
-    life->setCaption("TQt Example - Life");
-    life->show();
+    a.setMainWidget( life );
+    life->setCaption("TQt Example - Life");
+    life->show();
 
-    return a.exec();
+    return a.exec();
 }
 
    
 
diff --git a/doc/html/lineedits-example.html b/doc/html/lineedits-example.html
index d467ed793..66611cf23 100644
--- a/doc/html/lineedits-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/lineedits-example.html
@@ -50,21 +50,21 @@ how to use different echo modes and validators.
 #ifndef LINEDITS_H
 #define LINEDITS_H
 
-#include <qgroupbox.h>
+#include <ntqgroupbox.h>
 
 class TQLineEdit;
 class TQComboBox;
 
-class LineEdits : public TQGroupBox
+class LineEdits : public TQGroupBox
 {
     Q_OBJECT
 
 public:
-    LineEdits( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
+    LineEdits( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
 
 protected:
-    TQLineEdit *lined1, *lined2, *lined3, *lined4, *lined5;
-    TQComboBox *combo1, *combo2, *combo3, *combo4, *combo5;
+    TQLineEdit *lined1, *lined2, *lined3, *lined4, *lined5;
+    TQComboBox *combo1, *combo2, *combo3, *combo4, *combo5;
 
 protected slots:
     void slotEchoChanged( int );
@@ -91,13 +91,13 @@ protected slots:
 
 #include "lineedits.h"
 
-#include <qlineedit.h>
-#include <qcombobox.h>
-#include <qframe.h>
-#include <qvalidator.h>
-#include <qlabel.h>
-#include <qlayout.h>
-#include <qhbox.h>
+#include <ntqlineedit.h>
+#include <ntqcombobox.h>
+#include <ntqframe.h>
+#include <ntqvalidator.h>
+#include <ntqlabel.h>
+#include <ntqlayout.h>
+#include <ntqhbox.h>
 
 /*
  * Constructor
@@ -105,121 +105,121 @@ protected slots:
  * Creates child widgets of the LineEdits widget
  */
 
-LineEdits::LineEdits( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQGroupBox( 0, Horizontal, "Line edits", parent, name )
+LineEdits::LineEdits( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+    : TQGroupBox( 0, Horizontal, "Line edits", parent, name )
 {
-    setMargin( 10 );
+    setMargin( 10 );
 
-    TQVBoxLayout* box = new TQVBoxLayout( layout() );
+    TQVBoxLayout* box = new TQVBoxLayout( layout() );
 
     TQHBoxLayout *row1 = new TQHBoxLayout( box );
-    row1->setMargin( 5 );
+    row1->setMargin( 5 );
 
     // Create a Label
-    TQLabel* label = new TQLabel( "Echo Mode: ", this);
+    TQLabel* label = new TQLabel( "Echo Mode: ", this);
     row1->addWidget( label );
 
     // Create a Combobox with three items...
-    combo1 = new TQComboBox( FALSE, this );
+    combo1 = new TQComboBox( FALSE, this );
     row1->addWidget( combo1 );
-    combo1->insertItem( "Normal" );
-    combo1->insertItem( "Password" );
-    combo1->insertItem( "No Echo" );
+    combo1->insertItem( "Normal" );
+    combo1->insertItem( "Password" );
+    combo1->insertItem( "No Echo" );
     // ...and connect the activated() SIGNAL with the slotEchoChanged() SLOT to be able
     // to react when an item is selected
-    connect( combo1, SIGNAL( activated( int ) ), this, SLOT( slotEchoChanged( int ) ) );
+    connect( combo1, SIGNAL( activated( int ) ), this, SLOT( slotEchoChanged( int ) ) );
 
     // insert the first LineEdit
-    lined1 = new TQLineEdit( this );
+    lined1 = new TQLineEdit( this );
     box->addWidget( lined1 );
 
     // another widget which is used for layouting
     TQHBoxLayout *row2 = new TQHBoxLayout( box );
-    row2->setMargin( 5 );
+    row2->setMargin( 5 );
 
     // and the second label
-    label = new TQLabel( "Validator: ", this );
+    label = new TQLabel( "Validator: ", this );
     row2->addWidget( label );
 
     // A second Combobox with again three items...
-    combo2 = new TQComboBox( FALSE, this );
+    combo2 = new TQComboBox( FALSE, this );
     row2->addWidget( combo2 );
-    combo2->insertItem( "No Validator" );
-    combo2->insertItem( "Integer Validator" );
-    combo2->insertItem( "Double Validator" );
+    combo2->insertItem( "No Validator" );
+    combo2->insertItem( "Integer Validator" );
+    combo2->insertItem( "Double Validator" );
     // ...and again the activated() SIGNAL gets connected with a SLOT
-    connect( combo2, SIGNAL( activated( int ) ), this, SLOT( slotValidatorChanged( int ) ) );
+    connect( combo2, SIGNAL( activated( int ) ), this, SLOT( slotValidatorChanged( int ) ) );
 
     // and the second LineEdit
-    lined2 = new TQLineEdit( this );
+    lined2 = new TQLineEdit( this );
     box->addWidget( lined2 );
 
     // yet another widget which is used for layouting
     TQHBoxLayout *row3 = new TQHBoxLayout( box );
-    row3->setMargin( 5 );
+    row3->setMargin( 5 );
 
     // we need a label for this too
-    label = new TQLabel( "Alignment: ", this );
+    label = new TQLabel( "Alignment: ", this );
     row3->addWidget( label );
 
     // A combo box for setting alignment
-    combo3 = new TQComboBox( FALSE, this );
+    combo3 = new TQComboBox( FALSE, this );
     row3->addWidget( combo3 );
-    combo3->insertItem( "Left" );
-    combo3->insertItem( "Centered" );
-    combo3->insertItem( "Right" );
+    combo3->insertItem( "Left" );
+    combo3->insertItem( "Centered" );
+    combo3->insertItem( "Right" );
     // ...and again the activated() SIGNAL gets connected with a SLOT
-    connect( combo3, SIGNAL( activated( int ) ), this, SLOT( slotAlignmentChanged( int ) ) );
+    connect( combo3, SIGNAL( activated( int ) ), this, SLOT( slotAlignmentChanged( int ) ) );
 
     // and the third lineedit
-    lined3 = new TQLineEdit( this );
+    lined3 = new TQLineEdit( this );
     box->addWidget( lined3 );
 
     // exactly the same for the fourth
     TQHBoxLayout *row4 = new TQHBoxLayout( box );
-    row4->setMargin( 5 );
+    row4->setMargin( 5 );
 
     // we need a label for this too
-    label = new TQLabel( "Input mask: ", this );
+    label = new TQLabel( "Input mask: ", this );
     row4->addWidget( label );
 
     // A combo box for choosing an input mask
-    combo4 = new TQComboBox( FALSE, this );
+    combo4 = new TQComboBox( FALSE, this );
     row4->addWidget( combo4 );
-    combo4->insertItem( "No mask" );
-    combo4->insertItem( "Phone number" );
-    combo4->insertItem( "ISO date" );
-    combo4->insertItem( "License key" );
+    combo4->insertItem( "No mask" );
+    combo4->insertItem( "Phone number" );
+    combo4->insertItem( "ISO date" );
+    combo4->insertItem( "License key" );
 
-    // ...this time we use the activated( const TQString & ) signal
-    connect( combo4, SIGNAL( activated( int ) ),
+    // ...this time we use the activated( const TQString & ) signal
+    connect( combo4, SIGNAL( activated( int ) ),
              this, SLOT( slotInputMaskChanged( int ) ) );
 
     // and the fourth lineedit
-    lined4 = new TQLineEdit( this );
+    lined4 = new TQLineEdit( this );
     box->addWidget( lined4 );
 
     // last widget used for layouting
-    TQHBox *row5 = new TQHBox( this );
+    TQHBox *row5 = new TQHBox( this );
     box->addWidget( row5 );
-    row5->setMargin( 5 );
+    row5->setMargin( 5 );
 
     // last label
-    (void)new TQLabel( "Read-Only: ", row5 );
+    (void)new TQLabel( "Read-Only: ", row5 );
 
     // A combo box for setting alignment
-    combo5 = new TQComboBox( FALSE, row5 );
-    combo5->insertItem( "False" );
-    combo5->insertItem( "True" );
+    combo5 = new TQComboBox( FALSE, row5 );
+    combo5->insertItem( "False" );
+    combo5->insertItem( "True" );
     // ...and again the activated() SIGNAL gets connected with a SLOT
-    connect( combo5, SIGNAL( activated( int ) ), this, SLOT( slotReadOnlyChanged( int ) ) );
+    connect( combo5, SIGNAL( activated( int ) ), this, SLOT( slotReadOnlyChanged( int ) ) );
 
     // and the last lineedit
-    lined5 = new TQLineEdit( this );
+    lined5 = new TQLineEdit( this );
     box->addWidget( lined5 );
 
     // give the first LineEdit the focus at the beginning
-    lined1->setFocus();
+    lined1->setFocus();
 }
 
 /*
@@ -234,17 +234,17 @@ void LineEdits::slotEchoChanged( int i )
 {
     switch ( i ) {
     case 0:
-        lined1->setEchoMode( TQLineEdit::Normal );
+        lined1->setEchoMode( TQLineEdit::Normal );
         break;
     case 1:
-        lined1->setEchoMode( TQLineEdit::Password );
+        lined1->setEchoMode( TQLineEdit::Password );
         break;
     case 2:
-        lined1->setEchoMode( TQLineEdit::NoEcho );
+        lined1->setEchoMode( TQLineEdit::NoEcho );
         break;
     }
 
-    lined1->setFocus();
+    lined1->setFocus();
 }
 
 /*
@@ -261,19 +261,19 @@ void LineEdits::slotValidatorChanged( int i )
 {
     switch ( i ) {
     case 0:
-        lined2->setValidator( 0 );
+        lined2->setValidator( 0 );
         break;
     case 1:
-        lined2->setValidator( new TQIntValidator( lined2 ) );
+        lined2->setValidator( new TQIntValidator( lined2 ) );
         break;
     case 2:
-        lined2->setValidator( new TQDoubleValidator( -999.0, 999.0, 2,
+        lined2->setValidator( new TQDoubleValidator( -999.0, 999.0, 2,
                                                     lined2 ) );
         break;
     }
 
-    lined2->setText( "" );
-    lined2->setFocus();
+    lined2->setText( "" );
+    lined2->setFocus();
 }
 
 
@@ -289,21 +289,21 @@ void LineEdits::slotAlignmentChanged( int i )
 {
     switch ( i ) {
     case 0:
-        lined3->setAlignment( TQLineEdit::AlignLeft );
+        lined3->setAlignment( TQLineEdit::AlignLeft );
         break;
     case 1:
-        lined3->setAlignment( TQLineEdit::AlignCenter );
+        lined3->setAlignment( TQLineEdit::AlignCenter );
         break;
     case 2:
-        lined3->setAlignment( TQLineEdit::AlignRight );
+        lined3->setAlignment( TQLineEdit::AlignRight );
         break;
     }
 
-    lined3->setFocus();
+    lined3->setFocus();
 }
 
 /*
- * SLOT slotInputMaskChanged( const TQString &mask )
+ * SLOT slotInputMaskChanged( const TQString &mask )
  *
  * i contains the number of the item which the user has been chosen in
  * the third Combobox.  According to this value, we set an input mask on
@@ -314,21 +314,21 @@ void LineEdits::slotInputMaskChanged( int i )
 {
     switch( i ) {
     case 0:
-        lined4->setInputMask( TQString::null );
+        lined4->setInputMask( TQString::null );
         break;
     case 1:
-        lined4->setInputMask( "+99 99 99 99 99;_" );
+        lined4->setInputMask( "+99 99 99 99 99;_" );
         break;
     case 2:
-        lined4->setInputMask( "0000-00-00" );
-        lined4->setText( "00000000" );
-        lined4->setCursorPosition( 0 );
+        lined4->setInputMask( "0000-00-00" );
+        lined4->setText( "00000000" );
+        lined4->setCursorPosition( 0 );
         break;
     case 3:
-        lined4->setInputMask( ">AAAAA-AAAAA-AAAAA-AAAAA-AAAAA;#" );
+        lined4->setInputMask( ">AAAAA-AAAAA-AAAAA-AAAAA-AAAAA;#" );
         break;
     }
-    lined4->setFocus();
+    lined4->setFocus();
 }
 
 /*
@@ -342,14 +342,14 @@ void LineEdits::slotReadOnlyChanged( int i )
 {
     switch ( i ) {
     case 0:
-        lined5->setReadOnly( FALSE );
+        lined5->setReadOnly( FALSE );
         break;
     case 1:
-        lined5->setReadOnly( TRUE );
+        lined5->setReadOnly( TRUE );
         break;
     }
 
-    lined5->setFocus();
+    lined5->setFocus();
 }
 
 
    
@@ -367,18 +367,18 @@ void LineEdits::slotReadOnlyChanged( int i )
 *****************************************************************************/
 
 #include "lineedits.h"
-#include <qapplication.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
 
 int main( int argc, char **argv )
 {
-    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
+    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
 
     LineEdits lineedits;
-    lineedits.setCaption( "TQt Example - Lineedits" );
-    a.setMainWidget( &lineedits );
-    lineedits.show();
+    lineedits.setCaption( "TQt Example - Lineedits" );
+    a.setMainWidget( &lineedits );
+    lineedits.show();
 
-    return a.exec();
+    return a.exec();
 }
 
    
 
diff --git a/doc/html/linguist-manual-2.html b/doc/html/linguist-manual-2.html
index 5ee79c540..36499f677 100644
--- a/doc/html/linguist-manual-2.html
+++ b/doc/html/linguist-manual-2.html
@@ -52,8 +52,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
                       superapp_no.ts \
                       superapp_se.ts
 
    
-
    TQTextCodec::setCodecForTr() makes it possible to choose a 8-bit encoding for literal strings that appear within tr() calls. This is useful for applications whose source language is, for example, Chinese or Japanese. If no encoding is set, tr() uses Latin-1.
    
-
    If you do use the TQTextCodec::codecForTr() mechanism in your application, TQt Linguist needs you to set the DEFAULTCODEC entry in the .pro file as well. For example:
    
+
    TQTextCodec::setCodecForTr() makes it possible to choose a 8-bit encoding for literal strings that appear within tr() calls. This is useful for applications whose source language is, for example, Chinese or Japanese. If no encoding is set, tr() uses Latin-1.
    
+
    If you do use the TQTextCodec::codecForTr() mechanism in your application, TQt Linguist needs you to set the DEFAULTCODEC entry in the .pro file as well. For example:
    
 
         DEFAULTCODEC    = ISO-8859-5
 
    
diff --git a/doc/html/linguist-manual-4.html b/doc/html/linguist-manual-4.html
index 5be94e04b..7407656bb 100644
--- a/doc/html/linguist-manual-4.html
+++ b/doc/html/linguist-manual-4.html
@@ -52,25 +52,25 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
    Loading Translations
    
 
        int main( int argc, char **argv )
     {
-        TQApplication app( argc, argv );
+        TQApplication app( argc, argv );
 
    
  
    This is how a simple main() function of a TQt application begins.
    
 
        int main( int argc, char **argv )
     {
-        TQApplication app( argc, argv );
+        TQApplication app( argc, argv );
 
-        TQTranslator translator( 0 );
-        translator.load( "tt1_la", "." );
-        app.installTranslator( &translator );
+        TQTranslator translator( 0 );
+        translator.load( "tt1_la", "." );
+        app.installTranslator( &translator );
 
    
  
    For a translation-aware application a translator object is created, a translation is loaded and the translator object installed into the application.
    
 
        int main( int argc, char **argv )
     {
-        TQApplication app( argc, argv );
+        TQApplication app( argc, argv );
 
-        TQTranslator translator( 0 );
-        translator.load( TQString("tt2_") + TQTextCodec::locale(), "." );
-        app.installTranslator( &translator );
+        TQTranslator translator( 0 );
+        translator.load( TQString("tt2_") + TQTextCodec::locale(), "." );
+        app.installTranslator( &translator );
 
    
  
    In production applications a more flexible approach, for example, loading translations according to locale, might be more appropriate. If the .ts files are all named according to a convention such as appname_locale, e.g. tt2_fr, tt2_de etc, then the code above will load the current locale's translation at runtime.
    
 
    If there is no translation file for the current locale the application will fall back to using the original source text.
    
@@ -83,8 +83,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
         button = new TQPushButton( tr("&Quit"), this);
 
    
-
    All TQObject subclasses that use the Q_OBJECT macro implement the tr() function.
    
-
    Although the tr() call is normally made directly since it is usually called as a member function of a TQObject subclass, in other cases an explicit class name can be supplied, for example:
    
+
    All TQObject subclasses that use the Q_OBJECT macro implement the tr() function.
    
+
    Although the tr() call is normally made directly since it is usually called as a member function of a TQObject subclass, in other cases an explicit class name can be supplied, for example:
    
 
         TQPushButton::tr("&Quit")
 
    
@@ -102,8 +102,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
     rbh = new TQRadioButton( tr("Enabled", "Hue frame"), this );
 
    
 
    Ctrl key accelerators are also translatable:
    
-
            file->insertItem( tr("E&xit"), qApp, SLOT(quit()),
-                          tr("Ctrl+Q", "Quit") );
+
            file->insertItem( tr("E&xit"), qApp, SLOT(quit()),
+                          tr("Ctrl+Q", "Quit") );
 
    
  
    It is strongly recommended that the two argument form of tr() is used for Ctrl key accelerators. The second argument is the only clue the translator has as to the function performed by the accelerator.
    
 
    Helping The Translator With Navigation Information
    
@@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
     }
 
    
 
    Tutorials
    
-
    Three tutorials are presented. The first demonstrates the creation of a TQTranslator object. It also shows the simplest use of the tr() function to mark user-visible source text for translation. The second tutorial explains how to make the application load the translation file applicable to the current locale. It also shows the use of the two-argument form of tr() which provides additional information to the translator. The third tutorial explains how identical source texts can be distinguished even when they occur in the same context. This tutorial also discusses how the translation tools help minimize the translator's work when an application is upgraded.
    
+
    Three tutorials are presented. The first demonstrates the creation of a TQTranslator object. It also shows the simplest use of the tr() function to mark user-visible source text for translation. The second tutorial explains how to make the application load the translation file applicable to the current locale. It also shows the use of the two-argument form of tr() which provides additional information to the translator. The third tutorial explains how identical source texts can be distinguished even when they occur in the same context. This tutorial also discusses how the translation tools help minimize the translator's work when an application is upgraded.
    
 
    Tutorial 1: Loading and Using Translations
    
 
    
 
    
@@ -189,45 +189,45 @@ TRANSLATIONS    = tt1_la.ts
 **
 ****************************************************************/
 
-#include <qapplication.h>
-#include <qpushbutton.h>
-#include <qtranslator.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
+#include <ntqpushbutton.h>
+#include <ntqtranslator.h>
 
 
 int main( int argc, char **argv )
 {
-    TQApplication app( argc, argv );
+    TQApplication app( argc, argv );
 
-    TQTranslator translator( 0 );
-    translator.load( "tt1_la", "." );
-    app.installTranslator( &translator );
+    TQTranslator translator( 0 );
+    translator.load( "tt1_la", "." );
+    app.installTranslator( &translator );
 
-    TQPushButton hello( TQPushButton::tr("Hello world!"), 0 );
+    TQPushButton hello( TQPushButton::tr("Hello world!"), 0 );
 
-    app.setMainWidget( &hello );
-    hello.show();
-    return app.exec();
+    app.setMainWidget( &hello );
+    hello.show();
+    return app.exec();
 }
 
    
 
    main.cpp
    
 
    This example is a reworking of the "hello-world" example from Tutorial #1, with a Latin translation. The Tutorial 1 Screenshot, English version, above, shows the English version.
    
 
    Line by Line Walk-through
    
-
        #include <qtranslator.h>
+
        #include <ntqtranslator.h>
 
    
- 
    This line includes the definition of the TQTranslator class. Objects of this class provide translations for user-visible text.
    
-
            TQTranslator translator( 0 );
+ 
    This line includes the definition of the TQTranslator class. Objects of this class provide translations for user-visible text.
    
+
            TQTranslator translator( 0 );
 
    
- 
    Creates a TQTranslator object without a parent.
    
-
            translator.load( "tt1_la", "." );
+ 
    Creates a TQTranslator object without a parent.
    
+
            translator.load( "tt1_la", "." );
 
    
  
    Tries to load a file called tt1_la.qm (the .qm file extension is implicit) that contains Latin translations for the source texts used in the program. No error will occur if the file is not found.
    
-
            app.installTranslator( &translator );
+
            app.installTranslator( &translator );
 
    
  
    Adds the translations from tt1_la.qm to the pool of translations used by the program.
    
-
            TQPushButton hello( TQPushButton::tr("Hello world!"), 0 );
+
            TQPushButton hello( TQPushButton::tr("Hello world!"), 0 );
 
    
  
    Creates a push button that displays "Hello world!". If tt1_la.qm was found and contains a translation for "Hello world!", the translation appears; if not, the source text appears.
    
-
    All classes that inherit TQObject have a tr() function. Inside a member function of a TQObject class, we simply write tr("Hello world!") instead of TQPushButton::tr("Hello world!") or TQObject::tr("Hello world!").
    
+
    All classes that inherit TQObject have a tr() function. Inside a member function of a TQObject class, we simply write tr("Hello world!") instead of TQPushButton::tr("Hello world!") or TQObject::tr("Hello world!").
    
 
    Running the Application in English
    
 
    Since we haven't made the translation file tt1_la.qm, the source text is shown when we run the application:
    
 
    
@@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ TRANSLATIONS    = tt2_fr.ts \
 
    This example is a slightly more involved and introduces a key TQt Linguist concept: "contexts".
    
 
    • arrowpad.h contains the definition of ArrowPad, a custom widget;
      
 
    • arrowpad.cpp contains the implementation of ArrowPad;
      
-
    • mainwindow.h contains the definition of MainWindow, a subclass of TQMainWindow
      
+
    • mainwindow.h contains the definition of MainWindow, a subclass of TQMainWindow
      
 
    • mainwindow.cpp contains the implementation of MainWindow;
      
 
    • main.cpp contains main().
      
 
    We will use two translations, French and Dutch, although there is no effective limit on the number of possible translations that can be used with an application. The relevant lines of tt2.pro are
    
@@ -312,8 +312,8 @@ TRANSLATIONS    = tt2_fr.ts \
 
    
  
    Run lupdate; it should produce two identical message files tt2_fr.ts and tt2_nl.ts. These files will contain all the source texts marked for translation with tr() calls and their contexts.
    
 
    Line by Line Walk-through
    
-
    In arrowpad.h we define the ArrowPad subclass which is a subclass of TQWidget. In the Tutorial 2 Screenshot, English version, above, the central widget with the four buttons is an ArrowPad.
    
-
        class ArrowPad : public TQGrid
+
    In arrowpad.h we define the ArrowPad subclass which is a subclass of TQWidget. In the Tutorial 2 Screenshot, English version, above, the central widget with the four buttons is an ArrowPad.
    
+
        class ArrowPad : public TQGrid
 
    
  
    When lupdate is run it not only extracts the source texts but it also groups them into contexts. A context is the name of the class in which the source text appears. Thus, in this example, "ArrowPad" is a context: it is the context of the texts in the ArrowPad class. The Q_OBJECT macro defines tr(x) in ArrowPad like this
    
 
    @@ -321,13 +321,13 @@ TRANSLATIONS    = tt2_fr.ts \
 
    
 
    Knowing which class each source text appears in enables TQt Linguist to group texts that are logically related together, e.g. all the text in a dialog will have the context of the dialog's class name and will be shown together. This provides useful information for the translator since the context in which text appears may influence how it should be translated. For some translations keyboard accelerators may need to be changed and having all the source texts in a particular context (class) grouped together makes it easier for the translator to perform any accelerator changes without introducing conflicts.
    
 
    In arrowpad.cpp we implement the ArrowPad class.
    
-
            (void) new TQPushButton( tr("&Up"), this );
+
            (void) new TQPushButton( tr("&Up"), this );
 
    
  
    We call ArrowPad::tr() for each button's label since the labels are user-visible text.
    
 
    
 
    
 
    Tutorial 2 Screenshot, English version
    
-
        class MainWindow : public TQMainWindow
+
        class MainWindow : public TQMainWindow
     {
         Q_OBJECT
 
    
@@ -336,16 +336,16 @@ TRANSLATIONS    = tt2_fr.ts \
 
            ArrowPad *ap = new ArrowPad( this, "arrow pad" );
 
    
  
    We also call MainWindow::tr() twice, once for the menu item and once for the accelerator.
    
-
            file->insertItem( tr("E&xit"), qApp, SLOT(quit()),
-                          tr("Ctrl+Q", "Quit") );
+
            file->insertItem( tr("E&xit"), qApp, SLOT(quit()),
+                          tr("Ctrl+Q", "Quit") );
 
    
  
    Note the use of tr() to support different keys in other languages. "Ctrl+Q" is a good choice for Quit in English, but a Dutch translator might want to use "Ctrl+A" (for Afsluiten) and a German translator "Strg+E" (for Beenden). When using tr() for Ctrl key accelerators, the two argument form should be used with the second argument describing the function that the accelerator performs.
    
 
    Our main() function is defined in main.cpp as usual.
    
-
            TQTranslator translator( 0 );
-        translator.load( TQString("tt2_") + TQTextCodec::locale(), "." );
-        app.installTranslator( &translator );
+
            TQTranslator translator( 0 );
+        translator.load( TQString("tt2_") + TQTextCodec::locale(), "." );
+        app.installTranslator( &translator );
 
    
- 
    We choose which translation to use according to the current locale. TQTextCodec::locale() can be influenced by setting the LANG environment variable, for example. Notice that the use of a naming convention that incorporates the locale for .qm message files, (and .ts files), makes it easy to implement choosing the translation file according to locale.
    
+ 
    We choose which translation to use according to the current locale. TQTextCodec::locale() can be influenced by setting the LANG environment variable, for example. Notice that the use of a naming convention that incorporates the locale for .qm message files, (and .ts files), makes it easy to implement choosing the translation file according to locale.
    
 
    If there is no .qm message file for the locale chosen the original source text will be used and no error raised.
    
 
    Translating to French and Dutch
    
 
    We'll begin by translating the example application into French. Start TQt Linguist with tt2_fr.ts. You should get the seven source texts ("&Up", "&Left", etc.) grouped in two contexts ("ArrowPad" and "MainWindow").
    
@@ -424,48 +424,48 @@ TRANSLATIONS    = tt3_pt.ts
 
  • tt3_pt.ts is the Portuguese message file.
    
 
    Line by Line Walk-through
    
 
    The PrintPanel is defined in printpanel.h.
    
-
        class PrintPanel : public TQVBox
+
        class PrintPanel : public TQVBox
     {
         Q_OBJECT
 
    
- 
    PrintPanel is a TQWidget. It needs the Q_OBJECT macro for tr() to work properly.
    
+ 
    PrintPanel is a TQWidget. It needs the Q_OBJECT macro for tr() to work properly.
    
 
    The implementation file is printpanel.cpp.
    
 
        /*
-        TQLabel *lab = new TQLabel( tr("<b>TROLL PRINT</b>"), this );
-        lab->setAlignment( AlignCenter );
+        TQLabel *lab = new TQLabel( tr("<b>TROLL PRINT</b>"), this );
+        lab->setAlignment( AlignCenter );
     */
 
    
  
    Some of the code is commented out in Troll Print 1.0; you will uncomment it later, for Troll Print 1.1.
    
-
            TQHButtonGroup *twoSided = new TQHButtonGroup( this );
-        twoSided->setTitle( tr("2-sided") );
-        but = new TQRadioButton( tr("Enabled"), twoSided );
-        but = new TQRadioButton( tr("Disabled"), twoSided );
-        but->toggle();
-        TQHButtonGroup *colors = new TQHButtonGroup( this );
-        colors->setTitle( tr("Colors") );
-        but = new TQRadioButton( tr("Enabled"), colors );
-        but = new TQRadioButton( tr("Disabled"), colors );
-        but->toggle();
+
            TQHButtonGroup *twoSided = new TQHButtonGroup( this );
+        twoSided->setTitle( tr("2-sided") );
+        but = new TQRadioButton( tr("Enabled"), twoSided );
+        but = new TQRadioButton( tr("Disabled"), twoSided );
+        but->toggle();
+        TQHButtonGroup *colors = new TQHButtonGroup( this );
+        colors->setTitle( tr("Colors") );
+        but = new TQRadioButton( tr("Enabled"), colors );
+        but = new TQRadioButton( tr("Disabled"), colors );
+        but->toggle();
 
    
  
    Notice the two occurrences of tr("Enabled") and of tr("Disabled") in PrintPanel. Since both "Enabled"s and "Disabled"s appear in the same context TQt Linguist will only display one occurrence of each and will use the same translations for the duplicates that it doesn't display. Whilst this is a useful timesaver, in some languages, such as Portuguese, the second occurrence requires a separate translation. We will see how TQt Linguist can be made to display all the occurrences for separate translation shortly.
    
 
    The header file for MainWindow, mainwindow.h, contains no surprises. In the implementation, mainwindow.cpp, we have some user-visible source texts that must be marked for translation.
    
-
            setCaption( tr("Troll Print 1.0") );
+
            setCaption( tr("Troll Print 1.0") );
 
    
  
    We must translate the window's caption.
    
-
            file->insertItem( tr("E&xit"), qApp, SLOT(quit()),
-                          tr("Ctrl+Q", "Quit") );
-        TQPopupMenu *help = new TQPopupMenu( this );
-        help->insertItem( tr("&About"), this, SLOT(about()), Key_F1 );
-        help->insertItem( tr("About &TQt"), this, SLOT(aboutTQt()) );
+
            file->insertItem( tr("E&xit"), qApp, SLOT(quit()),
+                          tr("Ctrl+Q", "Quit") );
+        TQPopupMenu *help = new TQPopupMenu( this );
+        help->insertItem( tr("&About"), this, SLOT(about()), Key_F1 );
+        help->insertItem( tr("About &TQt"), this, SLOT(aboutTQt()) );
 
-        menuBar()->insertItem( tr("&File"), file );
-        menuBar()->insertSeparator();
-        menuBar()->insertItem( tr("&Help"), help );
+        menuBar()->insertItem( tr("&File"), file );
+        menuBar()->insertSeparator();
+        menuBar()->insertItem( tr("&Help"), help );
 
    
  
    We also need to translate the menu items. Note that the two argument form of tr() is used for the keyboard accelerator, "Ctrl+Q", since the second argument is the only clue the translator has to indicate what function that accelerator will perform.
    
-
            TQTranslator translator( 0 );
-        translator.load( TQString("tt3_") + TQTextCodec::locale(), "." );
-        app.installTranslator( &translator );
+
            TQTranslator translator( 0 );
+        translator.load( TQString("tt3_") + TQTextCodec::locale(), "." );
+        app.installTranslator( &translator );
 
    
  
    The main() function in main.cpp is the same as the one in Tutorial 2. In particular it chooses a translation file based on the current locale.
    
 
    Running Troll Print 1.0 in English and in Portuguese
    
@@ -518,7 +518,7 @@ TRANSLATIONS    = tt3_pt.ts
 
    
 
    Troll Print 1.1
    
 
    We'll now prepare release 1.1 of Troll Print. Start your favorite text editor and follow these steps:
    
-
    
 
diff --git a/doc/html/listboxcombo-example.html b/doc/html/listboxcombo-example.html
index 9ea38d2ac..ffe8ba07e 100644
--- a/doc/html/listboxcombo-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/listboxcombo-example.html
@@ -50,26 +50,26 @@ and multi selection) and comboboxes (editable and non-editable).
 #ifndef LISTBOX_COMBO_H
 #define LISTBOX_COMBO_H
 
-#include <qvbox.h>
+#include <ntqvbox.h>
 
 class TQListBox;
 class TQLabel;
 
-class ListBoxCombo : public TQVBox
+class ListBoxCombo : public TQVBox
 {
     Q_OBJECT
 
 public:
-    ListBoxCombo( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
+    ListBoxCombo( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
 
 protected:
-    TQListBox *lb1, *lb2;
-    TQLabel *label1, *label2;
+    TQListBox *lb1, *lb2;
+    TQLabel *label1, *label2;
 
 protected slots:
     void slotLeft2Right();
-    void slotCombo1Activated( const TQString &s );
-    void slotCombo2Activated( const TQString &s );
+    void slotCombo1Activated( const TQString &s );
+    void slotCombo2Activated( const TQString &s );
 
 };
 
@@ -90,16 +90,16 @@ protected slots:
 
 #include "listboxcombo.h"
 
-#include <qcombobox.h>
-#include <qlistbox.h>
-#include <qhbox.h>
-#include <qpushbutton.h>
-#include <qstring.h>
-#include <qpixmap.h>
-#include <qlabel.h>
-#include <qimage.h>
-#include <qpainter.h>
-#include <qstyle.h>
+#include <ntqcombobox.h>
+#include <ntqlistbox.h>
+#include <ntqhbox.h>
+#include <ntqpushbutton.h>
+#include <ntqstring.h>
+#include <ntqpixmap.h>
+#include <ntqlabel.h>
+#include <ntqimage.h>
+#include <ntqpainter.h>
+#include <ntqstyle.h>
 
 
 class MyListBoxItem : public TQListBoxItem
@@ -112,21 +112,21 @@ public:
     }
 
 protected:
-    virtual void paint( TQPainter * );
-    virtual int width( const TQListBox* ) const { return 100; }
-    virtual int height( const TQListBox* ) const { return 16; }
+    virtual void paint( TQPainter * );
+    virtual int width( const TQListBox* ) const { return 100; }
+    virtual int height( const TQListBox* ) const { return 16; }
 
 };
 
-void MyListBoxItem::paint( TQPainter *painter )
+void MyListBoxItem::paint( TQPainter *painter )
 {
     // evil trick: find out whether we are painted onto our listbox
-    bool in_list_box = listBox() && listBox()->viewport() == painter->device();
+    bool in_list_box = listBox() && listBox()->viewport() == painter->device();
 
-    TQRect r ( 0, 0, width( listBox() ), height( listBox() ) );
+    TQRect r ( 0, 0, width( listBox() ), height( listBox() ) );
     if ( in_list_box && isSelected() )
-        painter->eraseRect( r );
-    painter->fillRect( 5, 5, width( listBox() ) - 10, height( listBox() ) - 10, TQt::red );
+        painter->eraseRect( r );
+    painter->fillRect( 5, 5, width( listBox() ) - 10, height( listBox() ) - 10, TQt::red );
     if ( in_list_box && isCurrent() )
         listBox()->style().drawPrimitive( TQStyle::PE_FocusRect, painter, r, listBox()->colorGroup() );
 }
@@ -137,83 +137,83 @@ protected:
  * Creates child widgets of the ListBoxCombo widget
  */
 
-ListBoxCombo::ListBoxCombo( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQVBox( parent, name )
+ListBoxCombo::ListBoxCombo( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+    : TQVBox( parent, name )
 {
-    setMargin( 5 );
-    setSpacing( 5 );
+    setMargin( 5 );
+    setSpacing( 5 );
 
     unsigned int i;
-    TQString str;
+    TQString str;
 
-    TQHBox *row1 = new TQHBox( this );
-    row1->setSpacing( 5 );
+    TQHBox *row1 = new TQHBox( this );
+    row1->setSpacing( 5 );
 
     // Create a multi-selection ListBox...
-    lb1 = new TQListBox( row1 );
-    lb1->setSelectionMode( TQListBox::Multi );
+    lb1 = new TQListBox( row1 );
+    lb1->setSelectionMode( TQListBox::Multi );
 
     // ...insert a pixmap item...
-    lb1->insertItem( TQPixmap( "qtlogo.png" ) );
+    lb1->insertItem( TQPixmap( "qtlogo.png" ) );
     // ...and 100 text items
     for ( i = 0; i < 100; i++ ) {
         str = TQString( "Listbox Item %1" ).arg( i );
         if ( !( i % 4 ) )
-            lb1->insertItem( TQPixmap( "fileopen.xpm" ), str );
+            lb1->insertItem( TQPixmap( "fileopen.xpm" ), str );
         else
-            lb1->insertItem( str );
+            lb1->insertItem( str );
     }
 
     // Create a pushbutton...
-    TQPushButton *arrow1 = new TQPushButton( " -> ", row1 );
+    TQPushButton *arrow1 = new TQPushButton( " -> ", row1 );
     // ...and connect the clicked SIGNAL with the SLOT slotLeft2Right
-    connect( arrow1, SIGNAL( clicked() ), this, SLOT( slotLeft2Right() ) );
+    connect( arrow1, SIGNAL( clicked() ), this, SLOT( slotLeft2Right() ) );
 
     // create an empty single-selection ListBox
-    lb2 = new TQListBox( row1 );
+    lb2 = new TQListBox( row1 );
 
-    TQHBox *row2 = new TQHBox( this );
-    row2->setSpacing( 5 );
+    TQHBox *row2 = new TQHBox( this );
+    row2->setSpacing( 5 );
 
-    TQVBox *box1 = new TQVBox( row2 );
-    box1->setSpacing( 5 );
+    TQVBox *box1 = new TQVBox( row2 );
+    box1->setSpacing( 5 );
 
     // Create a non-editable Combobox and a label below...
-    TQComboBox *cb1 = new TQComboBox( FALSE, box1 );
-    label1 = new TQLabel( "Current Item: Combobox Item 0", box1 );
-    label1->setMaximumHeight( label1->sizeHint().height() * 2 );
-    label1->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Panel | TQFrame::Sunken );
+    TQComboBox *cb1 = new TQComboBox( FALSE, box1 );
+    label1 = new TQLabel( "Current Item: Combobox Item 0", box1 );
+    label1->setMaximumHeight( label1->sizeHint().height() * 2 );
+    label1->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Panel | TQFrame::Sunken );
 
     //...and insert 50 items into the Combobox
     for ( i = 0; i < 50; i++ ) {
         str = TQString( "Combobox Item %1" ).arg( i );
         if ( i % 9 )
-            cb1->insertItem( str );
+            cb1->insertItem( str );
         else
-            cb1->listBox()->insertItem( new MyListBoxItem );
+            cb1->listBox()->insertItem( new MyListBoxItem );
     }
 
-    TQVBox *box2 = new TQVBox( row2 );
-    box2->setSpacing( 5 );
+    TQVBox *box2 = new TQVBox( row2 );
+    box2->setSpacing( 5 );
 
     // Create an editable Combobox and a label below...
-    TQComboBox *cb2 = new TQComboBox( TRUE, box2 );
-    label2 = new TQLabel( "Current Item: Combobox Item 0", box2 );
-    label2->setMaximumHeight( label2->sizeHint().height() * 2 );
-    label2->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Panel | TQFrame::Sunken );
+    TQComboBox *cb2 = new TQComboBox( TRUE, box2 );
+    label2 = new TQLabel( "Current Item: Combobox Item 0", box2 );
+    label2->setMaximumHeight( label2->sizeHint().height() * 2 );
+    label2->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Panel | TQFrame::Sunken );
 
     // ... and insert 50 items into the Combobox
     for ( i = 0; i < 50; i++ ) {
         str = TQString( "Combobox Item %1" ).arg( i );
         if ( !( i % 4 ) )
-            cb2->insertItem( TQPixmap( "fileopen.xpm" ), str );
+            cb2->insertItem( TQPixmap( "fileopen.xpm" ), str );
         else
-            cb2->insertItem( str );
+            cb2->insertItem( str );
     }
 
     // Connect the activated SIGNALs of the Comboboxes with SLOTs
-    connect( cb1, SIGNAL( activated( const TQString & ) ), this, SLOT( slotCombo1Activated( const TQString & ) ) );
-    connect( cb2, SIGNAL( activated( const TQString & ) ), this, SLOT( slotCombo2Activated( const TQString & ) ) );
+    connect( cb1, SIGNAL( activated( const TQString & ) ), this, SLOT( slotCombo1Activated( const TQString & ) ) );
+    connect( cb2, SIGNAL( activated( const TQString & ) ), this, SLOT( slotCombo2Activated( const TQString & ) ) );
 }
 
 /*
@@ -226,45 +226,45 @@ protected:
 void ListBoxCombo::slotLeft2Right()
 {
     // Go through all items of the first ListBox
-    for ( unsigned int i = 0; i < lb1->count(); i++ ) {
-        TQListBoxItem *item = lb1->item( i );
+    for ( unsigned int i = 0; i < lb1->count(); i++ ) {
+        TQListBoxItem *item = lb1->item( i );
         // if the item is selected...
         if ( item->isSelected() ) {
             // ...and it is a text item...
             if ( item->pixmap() && !item->text().isEmpty() )
-                lb2->insertItem( *item->pixmap(), item->text() );
+                lb2->insertItem( *item->pixmap(), item->text() );
             else if ( !item->pixmap() )
-                lb2->insertItem( item->text() );
+                lb2->insertItem( item->text() );
             else if ( item->text().isEmpty() )
-                lb2->insertItem( *item->pixmap() );
+                lb2->insertItem( *item->pixmap() );
         }
     }
 }
 
 /*
- * SLOT slotCombo1Activated( const TQString &s )
+ * SLOT slotCombo1Activated( const TQString &s )
  *
  * Sets the text of the item which the user just selected
  * in the first Combobox (and is now the value of s) to
  * the first Label.
  */
 
-void ListBoxCombo::slotCombo1Activated( const TQString &s )
+void ListBoxCombo::slotCombo1Activated( const TQString &s )
 {
-    label1->setText( TQString( "Current Item: %1" ).arg( s ) );
+    label1->setText( TQString( "Current Item: %1" ).arg( s ) );
 }
 
 /*
- * SLOT slotCombo2Activated( const TQString &s )
+ * SLOT slotCombo2Activated( const TQString &s )
  *
  * Sets the text of the item which the user just selected
  * in the second Combobox (and is now the value of s) to
  * the second Label.
  */
 
-void ListBoxCombo::slotCombo2Activated( const TQString &s )
+void ListBoxCombo::slotCombo2Activated( const TQString &s )
 {
-    label2->setText( TQString( "Current Item: %1" ).arg( s ) );
+    label2->setText( TQString( "Current Item: %1" ).arg( s ) );
 }
 
    
 
@@ -281,19 +281,19 @@ void ListBoxCombo::slotCombo2Activated( const qapplication.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
 
 int main( int argc, char **argv )
 {
-    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
+    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
 
     ListBoxCombo listboxcombo;
-    listboxcombo.resize( 400, 270 );
-    listboxcombo.setCaption( "TQt Example - Listboxes and Comboboxes" );
-    a.setMainWidget( &listboxcombo );
-    listboxcombo.show();
+    listboxcombo.resize( 400, 270 );
+    listboxcombo.setCaption( "TQt Example - Listboxes and Comboboxes" );
+    a.setMainWidget( &listboxcombo );
+    listboxcombo.show();
 
-    return a.exec();
+    return a.exec();
 }
 
    
 
diff --git a/doc/html/listviews-example.html b/doc/html/listviews-example.html
index 9b74fd363..04569ba62 100644
--- a/doc/html/listviews-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/listviews-example.html
@@ -51,12 +51,12 @@ and works like the main window of a mail client.
 #ifndef LISTVIEWS_H
 #define LISTVIEWS_H
 
-#include <qsplitter.h>
-#include <qstring.h>
-#include <qobject.h>
-#include <qdatetime.h>
-#include <qptrlist.h>
-#include <qlistview.h>
+#include <ntqsplitter.h>
+#include <ntqstring.h>
+#include <ntqobject.h>
+#include <ntqdatetime.h>
+#include <ntqptrlist.h>
+#include <ntqlistview.h>
 
 class TQListView;
 class TQLabel;
@@ -70,20 +70,20 @@ class TQPopupMenu;
 class MessageHeader
 {
 public:
-    MessageHeader( const TQString &_sender, const TQString &_subject, const TQDateTime &_datetime )
+    MessageHeader( const TQString &_sender, const TQString &_subject, const TQDateTime &_datetime )
         : msender( _sender ), msubject( _subject ), mdatetime( _datetime )
     {}
 
     MessageHeader( const MessageHeader &mh );
     MessageHeader &operator=( const MessageHeader &mh );
 
-    TQString sender() { return msender; }
-    TQString subject() { return msubject; }
-    TQDateTime datetime() { return mdatetime; }
+    TQString sender() { return msender; }
+    TQString subject() { return msubject; }
+    TQDateTime datetime() { return mdatetime; }
 
 protected:
-    TQString msender, msubject;
-    TQDateTime mdatetime;
+    TQString msender, msubject;
+    TQDateTime mdatetime;
 
 };
 
@@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ public:
     enum State { Read = 0,
                  Unread};
 
-    Message( const MessageHeader &mh, const TQString &_body )
+    Message( const MessageHeader &mh, const TQString &_body )
         : mheader( mh ), mbody( _body ), mstate( Unread )
     {}
 
@@ -104,40 +104,40 @@ public:
     {}
 
     MessageHeader header() { return mheader; }
-    TQString body() { return mbody; }
+    TQString body() { return mbody; }
 
     void setState( const State &s ) { mstate = s; }
     State state() { return mstate; }
 
 protected:
     MessageHeader mheader;
-    TQString mbody;
+    TQString mbody;
     State mstate;
 
 };
 
 // -----------------------------------------------------------------
 
-class Folder : public TQObject
+class Folder : public TQObject
 {
     Q_OBJECT
 
 public:
-    Folder( Folder *parent, const TQString &name );
+    Folder( Folder *parent, const TQString &name );
     ~Folder()
     {}
 
     void addMessage( Message *m )
-    { lstMessages.append( m ); }
+    { lstMessages.append( m ); }
 
-    TQString folderName() { return fName; }
+    TQString folderName() { return fName; }
 
-    Message *firstMessage() { return lstMessages.first(); }
-    Message *nextMessage() { return lstMessages.next(); }
+    Message *firstMessage() { return lstMessages.first(); }
+    Message *nextMessage() { return lstMessages.next(); }
 
 protected:
-    TQString fName;
-    TQPtrList<Message> lstMessages;
+    TQString fName;
+    TQPtrList<Message> lstMessages;
 
 };
 
@@ -146,10 +146,10 @@ protected:
 class FolderListItem : public TQListViewItem
 {
 public:
-    FolderListItem( TQListView *parent, Folder *f );
+    FolderListItem( TQListView *parent, Folder *f );
     FolderListItem( FolderListItem *parent, Folder *f );
 
-    void insertSubFolders( const TQObjectList *lst );
+    void insertSubFolders( const TQObjectList *lst );
 
     Folder *folder() { return myFolder; }
 
@@ -163,9 +163,9 @@ protected:
 class MessageListItem : public TQListViewItem
 {
 public:
-    MessageListItem( TQListView *parent, Message *m );
+    MessageListItem( TQListView *parent, Message *m );
 
-    virtual void paintCell( TQPainter *p, const TQColorGroup &cg,
+    virtual void paintCell( TQPainter *p, const TQColorGroup &cg,
                             int column, int width, int alignment );
 
     Message *message() { return myMessage; }
@@ -177,12 +177,12 @@ protected:
 
 // -----------------------------------------------------------------
 
-class ListViews : public TQSplitter
+class ListViews : public TQSplitter
 {
     Q_OBJECT
 
 public:
-    ListViews( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
+    ListViews( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
     ~ListViews()
     {}
 
@@ -191,16 +191,16 @@ protected:
     void initFolder( Folder *folder, unsigned int &count );
     void setupFolders();
 
-    TQListView *messages, *folders;
-    TQLabel *message;
-    TQPopupMenu* menu;
+    TQListView *messages, *folders;
+    TQLabel *message;
+    TQPopupMenu* menu;
 
-    TQPtrList<Folder> lstFolders;
+    TQPtrList<Folder> lstFolders;
 
 protected slots:
     void slotFolderChanged( TQListViewItem* );
     void slotMessageChanged();
-    void slotRMB( TQListViewItem*, const TQPoint &, int );
+    void slotRMB( TQListViewItem*, const TQPoint &, int );
 
 };
 
@@ -221,13 +221,13 @@ protected slots:
 
 #include "listviews.h"
 
-#include <qlabel.h>
-#include <qpainter.h>
-#include <qpalette.h>
-#include <qobjectlist.h>
-#include <qpopupmenu.h>
-#include <qheader.h>
-#include <qregexp.h>
+#include <ntqlabel.h>
+#include <ntqpainter.h>
+#include <ntqpalette.h>
+#include <ntqobjectlist.h>
+#include <ntqpopupmenu.h>
+#include <ntqheader.h>
+#include <ntqregexp.h>
 
 // -----------------------------------------------------------------
 
@@ -249,15 +249,15 @@ MessageHeader &MessageHeader::operator=( const MessageHeader &mh )
 
 // -----------------------------------------------------------------
 
-Folder::Folder( Folder *parent, const TQString &name )
-    : TQObject( parent, name ), fName( name )
+Folder::Folder( Folder *parent, const TQString &name )
+    : TQObject( parent, name ), fName( name )
 {
     lstMessages.setAutoDelete( TRUE );
 }
 
 // -----------------------------------------------------------------
 
-FolderListItem::FolderListItem( TQListView *parent, Folder *f )
+FolderListItem::FolderListItem( TQListView *parent, Folder *f )
     : TQListViewItem( parent )
 {
     myFolder = f;
@@ -278,16 +278,16 @@ FolderListItem::FolderListItem( FolderListItem *parent, Folder *f )
         insertSubFolders( myFolder->children() );
 }
 
-void FolderListItem::insertSubFolders( const TQObjectList *lst )
+void FolderListItem::insertSubFolders( const TQObjectList *lst )
 {
     Folder *f;
-    for ( f = ( Folder* )( ( TQObjectList* )lst )->first(); f; f = ( Folder* )( ( TQObjectList* )lst )->next() )
+    for ( f = ( Folder* )( ( TQObjectList* )lst )->first(); f; f = ( Folder* )( ( TQObjectList* )lst )->next() )
         (void)new FolderListItem( this, f );
 }
 
 // -----------------------------------------------------------------
 
-MessageListItem::MessageListItem( TQListView *parent, Message *m )
+MessageListItem::MessageListItem( TQListView *parent, Message *m )
     : TQListViewItem( parent )
 {
     myMessage = m;
@@ -296,11 +296,11 @@ void FolderListItem::insertSubFolders( const setText( 2, myMessage->header().datetime().toString() );
 }
 
-void MessageListItem::paintCell( TQPainter *p, const TQColorGroup &cg,
+void MessageListItem::paintCell( TQPainter *p, const TQColorGroup &cg,
                                  int column, int width, int alignment )
 {
     TQColorGroup _cg( cg );
-    TQColor c = _cg.text();
+    TQColor c = _cg.text();
 
     if ( myMessage->state() == Message::Unread )
         _cg.setColor( TQColorGroup::Text, TQt::red );
@@ -312,62 +312,62 @@ void FolderListItem::insertSubFolders( const ListViews::ListViews( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQSplitter( TQt::Horizontal, parent, name )
+ListViews::ListViews( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+    : TQSplitter( TQt::Horizontal, parent, name )
 {
     lstFolders.setAutoDelete( TRUE );
 
-    folders = new TQListView( this );
-    folders->header()->setClickEnabled( FALSE );
-    folders->addColumn( "Folder" );
+    folders = new TQListView( this );
+    folders->header()->setClickEnabled( FALSE );
+    folders->addColumn( "Folder" );
 
     initFolders();
     setupFolders();
 
-    folders->setRootIsDecorated( TRUE );
-    setResizeMode( folders, TQSplitter::KeepSize );
+    folders->setRootIsDecorated( TRUE );
+    setResizeMode( folders, TQSplitter::KeepSize );
 
-    TQSplitter *vsplitter = new TQSplitter( TQt::Vertical, this );
+    TQSplitter *vsplitter = new TQSplitter( TQt::Vertical, this );
 
-    messages = new TQListView( vsplitter );
-    messages->addColumn( "Sender" );
-    messages->addColumn( "Subject" );
-    messages->addColumn( "Date" );
-    messages->setColumnAlignment( 1, TQt::AlignRight );
-    messages->setAllColumnsShowFocus( TRUE );
-    messages->setShowSortIndicator( TRUE );
-    menu = new TQPopupMenu( messages );
+    messages = new TQListView( vsplitter );
+    messages->addColumn( "Sender" );
+    messages->addColumn( "Subject" );
+    messages->addColumn( "Date" );
+    messages->setColumnAlignment( 1, TQt::AlignRight );
+    messages->setAllColumnsShowFocus( TRUE );
+    messages->setShowSortIndicator( TRUE );
+    menu = new TQPopupMenu( messages );
     for( int i = 1; i <= 10; i++ )
-        menu->insertItem( TQString( "Context Item %1" ).arg( i ) );
-    connect(messages, SIGNAL( contextMenuRequested( TQListViewItem *, const TQPoint& , int ) ),
-            this, SLOT( slotRMB( TQListViewItem *, const TQPoint &, int ) ) );
-    vsplitter->setResizeMode( messages, TQSplitter::KeepSize );
+        menu->insertItem( TQString( "Context Item %1" ).arg( i ) );
+    connect(messages, SIGNAL( contextMenuRequested( TQListViewItem *, const TQPoint& , int ) ),
+            this, SLOT( slotRMB( TQListViewItem *, const TQPoint &, int ) ) );
+    vsplitter->setResizeMode( messages, TQSplitter::KeepSize );
 
-    message = new TQLabel( vsplitter );
-    message->setAlignment( TQt::AlignTop );
-    message->setBackgroundMode( PaletteBase );
+    message = new TQLabel( vsplitter );
+    message->setAlignment( TQt::AlignTop );
+    message->setBackgroundMode( PaletteBase );
 
-    connect( folders, SIGNAL( selectionChanged( TQListViewItem* ) ),
+    connect( folders, SIGNAL( selectionChanged( TQListViewItem* ) ),
              this, SLOT( slotFolderChanged( TQListViewItem* ) ) );
-    connect( messages, SIGNAL( selectionChanged() ),
+    connect( messages, SIGNAL( selectionChanged() ),
              this, SLOT( slotMessageChanged() ) );
-    connect( messages, SIGNAL( currentChanged( TQListViewItem * ) ),
+    connect( messages, SIGNAL( currentChanged( TQListViewItem * ) ),
              this, SLOT( slotMessageChanged() ) );
 
-    messages->setSelectionMode( TQListView::Extended );
+    messages->setSelectionMode( TQListView::Extended );
     // some preparations
-    folders->firstChild()->setOpen( TRUE );
-    folders->firstChild()->firstChild()->setOpen( TRUE );
-    folders->setCurrentItem( folders->firstChild()->firstChild()->firstChild() );
-    folders->setSelected( folders->firstChild()->firstChild()->firstChild(), TRUE );
-
-    messages->setSelected( messages->firstChild(), TRUE );
-    messages->setCurrentItem( messages->firstChild() );
-    message->setMargin( 5 );
-
-    TQValueList<int> lst;
-    lst.append( 170 );
-    setSizes( lst );
+    folders->firstChild()->setOpen( TRUE );
+    folders->firstChild()->firstChild()->setOpen( TRUE );
+    folders->setCurrentItem( folders->firstChild()->firstChild()->firstChild() );
+    folders->setSelected( folders->firstChild()->firstChild()->firstChild(), TRUE );
+
+    messages->setSelected( messages->firstChild(), TRUE );
+    messages->setCurrentItem( messages->firstChild() );
+    message->setMargin( 5 );
+
+    TQValueList<int> lst;
+    lst.append( 170 );
+    setSizes( lst );
 }
 
 void ListViews::initFolders()
@@ -375,15 +375,15 @@ void ListViews::initFolders()
     unsigned int mcount = 1;
 
     for ( unsigned int i = 1; i < 20; i++ ) {
-        TQString str;
+        TQString str;
         str = TQString( "Folder %1" ).arg( i );
         Folder *f = new Folder( 0, str );
         for ( unsigned int j = 1; j < 5; j++ ) {
-            TQString str2;
+            TQString str2;
             str2 = TQString( "Sub Folder %1" ).arg( j );
             Folder *f2 = new Folder( f, str2 );
             for ( unsigned int k = 1; k < 3; k++ ) {
-                TQString str3;
+                TQString str3;
                 str3 = TQString( "Sub Sub Folder %1" ).arg( k );
                 Folder *f3 = new Folder( f2, str3 );
                 initFolder( f3, mcount );
@@ -396,13 +396,13 @@ void ListViews::initFolders()
 void ListViews::initFolder( Folder *folder, unsigned int &count )
 {
     for ( unsigned int i = 0; i < 15; i++, count++ ) {
-        TQString str;
+        TQString str;
         str = TQString( "Message %1  " ).arg( count );
-        TQDateTime dt = TQDateTime::currentDateTime();
-        dt = dt.addSecs( 60 * count );
+        TQDateTime dt = TQDateTime::currentDateTime();
+        dt = dt.addSecs( 60 * count );
         MessageHeader mh( "Trolltech <info@trolltech.com>  ", str, dt );
 
-        TQString body;
+        TQString body;
         body = TQString( "This is the message number %1 of this application, \n"
                         "which shows how to use TQListViews, TQListViewItems, \n"
                         "TQSplitters and so on. The code should show how easy\n"
@@ -414,16 +414,16 @@ void ListViews::initFolder( Folder *folder, unsigned int &
 
 void ListViews::setupFolders()
 {
-    folders->clear();
+    folders->clear();
 
     for ( Folder* f = lstFolders.first(); f; f = lstFolders.next() )
         (void)new FolderListItem( folders, f );
 }
 
-void ListViews::slotRMB( TQListViewItem* Item, const TQPoint & point, int )
+void ListViews::slotRMB( TQListViewItem* Item, const TQPoint & point, int )
 {
     if( Item )
-        menu->popup( point );
+        menu->popup( point );
 }
 
 
@@ -431,8 +431,8 @@ void ListViews::slotFolderChanged( clear();
-    message->setText( "" );
+    messages->clear();
+    message->setText( "" );
 
     FolderListItem *item = ( FolderListItem* )i;
 
@@ -443,22 +443,22 @@ void ListViews::slotFolderChanged( ListViews::slotMessageChanged()
 {
-    TQListViewItem *i = messages->currentItem();
+    TQListViewItem *i = messages->currentItem();
     if ( !i )
         return;
 
     if ( !i->isSelected() ) {
-        message->setText( "" );
+        message->setText( "" );
         return;
     }
 
     MessageListItem *item = ( MessageListItem* )i;
     Message *msg = item->message();
 
-    TQString text;
-    TQString tmp = msg->header().sender();
-    tmp = tmp.replace( "<", "&lt;" );
-    tmp = tmp.replace( ">", "&gt;" );
+    TQString text;
+    TQString tmp = msg->header().sender();
+    tmp = tmp.replace( "<", "&lt;" );
+    tmp = tmp.replace( ">", "&gt;" );
     text = TQString( "<b><i>From:</i></b> <a href=\"mailto:info@trolltech.com\">%1</a><br>"
                     "<b><i>Subject:</i></b> <big><big><b>%2</b></big></big><br>"
                     "<b><i>Date:</i></b> %3<br><br>"
@@ -466,7 +466,7 @@ void ListViews::slotMessageChanged()
            arg( tmp ).arg( msg->header().subject() ).
            arg( msg->header().datetime().toString() ).arg( msg->body() );
 
-    message->setText( text );
+    message->setText( text );
 
     msg->setState( Message::Read );
 }
@@ -485,19 +485,19 @@ void ListViews::slotMessageChanged()
 *****************************************************************************/
 
 #include "listviews.h"
-#include <qapplication.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
 
 int main( int argc, char **argv )
 {
-    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
+    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
 
     ListViews listViews;
-    listViews.resize( 640, 480 );
-    listViews.setCaption( "TQt Example - Listview" );
-    a.setMainWidget( &listViews );
-    listViews.show();
+    listViews.resize( 640, 480 );
+    listViews.setCaption( "TQt Example - Listview" );
+    a.setMainWidget( &listViews );
+    listViews.show();
 
-    return a.exec();
+    return a.exec();
 }
 
    
 
diff --git a/doc/html/mac-differences.html b/doc/html/mac-differences.html
index c9a6eced5..c5653af30 100644
--- a/doc/html/mac-differences.html
+++ b/doc/html/mac-differences.html
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Native.
 or using the open(1) command. Mac OS X needs this to dispatch events correctly,
 as well as gaining access to the menubar. If using GDB you must run with the 
 full path to the executable.
-
     
     TQCursor
+
     
     TQCursor
 
    
 
     Due to Mac OS X having only 16x16 custom cursors TQCursor is limited by this
 as well. For now the only workaround to this problem is to use a small
@@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ automatically included in the make builds.
 
     If a static build fails with the following error messages during the
 designer make phase:
 
     
    -TQWidget::sizeHint() const referenced from libtqui expected to be defined in @executable_path/../Frameworks/libtqt-mt.3.dylib
+TQWidget::sizeHint() const referenced from libtqui expected to be defined in @executable_path/../Frameworks/libtqt-mt.3.dylib
 non-virtual thunk [nv:-40] to TQWidget::metric(int) const referenced from libtqui
  expected to be defined in @executable_path/../Frameworks/libtqt-mt.3.dylib
 
    
@@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ do this:
                                                kCFURLPOSIXPathStyle);
         const char *pathPtr = CFStringGetCStringPtr(macPath, 
                                                CFStringGetSystemEncoding());
-        qDebug("Path = %s", pathPtr);
+        qDebug("Path = %s", pathPtr);
         CFRelease(pluginRef);
         CFRelease(macPath);
 
    • 
@@ -254,8 +254,8 @@ one-button mouse support.
 into Mac native menubars. Fitting this into your existing TQt application
 will normally be automatic, however, if you have special needs the TQt/Mac
 implementation currently selects a menubar by starting at the active window
-(ie TQApplication::activeWindow()), and applying:
-
     1) If the window has a TQMenuBar then it is used.
+(ie TQApplication::activeWindow()), and applying:
+
     1) If the window has a TQMenuBar then it is used.
 2) If the window is a modal then its menubar is used. If no menubar is
 specified then a default menubar is used (as documented below)
 3) If the window has no parent then the default menubar is used (as documented below).
@@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ used whenever a default menubar is needed.
 
     
  •  TQCustomMenuItems are not supported in Mac native menubars, they are supported
 in popupmenus that are not in the Mac native menubar.
 
     
  •  Items with accelerators that have more than one keystroke
-(TQKeySequence) will not be honored, and the first key will be used.
+(TQKeySequence) will not be honored, and the first key will be used.
 
     
 
     
     Unsupported Native Widgets
 
    
diff --git a/doc/html/mail-example.html b/doc/html/mail-example.html
index 2dc1971ff..1598c1096 100644
--- a/doc/html/mail-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/mail-example.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
  
 
     
-
     This example shows how to use the TQSocket class. The client can only be
+
     This example shows how to use the TQSocket class. The client can only be
 used to send mails. The interesting part is the implementation of the
 SMTP protocol.
 
     
    
@@ -51,24 +51,24 @@ SMTP protocol.
 #ifndef SMTP_H
 #define SMTP_H
 
-#include <qobject.h>
-#include <qstring.h>
+#include <ntqobject.h>
+#include <ntqstring.h>
 
 class TQSocket;
 class TQTextStream;
 class TQDns;
 
-class Smtp : public TQObject
+class Smtp : public TQObject
 {
     Q_OBJECT
 
 public:
-    Smtp( const TQString &from, const TQString &to,
-          const TQString &subject, const TQString &body );
+    Smtp( const TQString &from, const TQString &to,
+          const TQString &subject, const TQString &body );
     ~Smtp();
 
 signals:
-    void status( const TQString & );
+    void status( const TQString & );
 
 private slots:
     void dnsLookupHelper();
@@ -86,14 +86,14 @@ private:
         Close
     };
 
-    TQString message;
-    TQString from;
-    TQString rcpt;
-    TQSocket *socket;
-    TQTextStream * t;
+    TQString message;
+    TQString from;
+    TQString rcpt;
+    TQSocket *socket;
+    TQTextStream * t;
     int state;
-    TQString response;
-    TQDns * mxLookup;
+    TQString response;
+    TQDns * mxLookup;
 };
 
 #endif
@@ -113,37 +113,37 @@ private:
 
 #include "smtp.h"
 
-#include <qtextstream.h>
-#include <qsocket.h>
-#include <qdns.h>
-#include <qtimer.h>
-#include <qapplication.h>
-#include <qmessagebox.h>
-#include <qregexp.h>
+#include <ntqtextstream.h>
+#include <ntqsocket.h>
+#include <ntqdns.h>
+#include <ntqtimer.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
+#include <ntqmessagebox.h>
+#include <ntqregexp.h>
 
 
-Smtp::Smtp( const TQString &from, const TQString &to,
-            const TQString &subject,
-            const TQString &body )
+Smtp::Smtp( const TQString &from, const TQString &to,
+            const TQString &subject,
+            const TQString &body )
 {
-    socket = new TQSocket( this );
-    connect ( socket, SIGNAL( readyRead() ),
+    socket = new TQSocket( this );
+    connect ( socket, SIGNAL( readyRead() ),
               this, SLOT( readyRead() ) );
-    connect ( socket, SIGNAL( connected() ),
+    connect ( socket, SIGNAL( connected() ),
               this, SLOT( connected() ) );
 
-    mxLookup = new TQDns( to.mid( to.find( '@' )+1 ), TQDns::Mx );
-    connect( mxLookup, SIGNAL(resultsReady()),
+    mxLookup = new TQDns( to.mid( to.find( '@' )+1 ), TQDns::Mx );
+    connect( mxLookup, SIGNAL(resultsReady()),
              this, SLOT(dnsLookupHelper()) );
 
-    message = TQString::fromLatin1( "From: " ) + from +
-              TQString::fromLatin1( "\nTo: " ) + to +
-              TQString::fromLatin1( "\nSubject: " ) + subject +
-              TQString::fromLatin1( "\n\n" ) + body + "\n";
-    message.replace( TQString::fromLatin1( "\n" ),
-                     TQString::fromLatin1( "\r\n" ) );
-    message.replace( TQString::fromLatin1( "\r\n.\r\n" ),
-                     TQString::fromLatin1( "\r\n..\r\n" ) );
+    message = TQString::fromLatin1( "From: " ) + from +
+              TQString::fromLatin1( "\nTo: " ) + to +
+              TQString::fromLatin1( "\nSubject: " ) + subject +
+              TQString::fromLatin1( "\n\n" ) + body + "\n";
+    message.replace( TQString::fromLatin1( "\n" ),
+                     TQString::fromLatin1( "\r\n" ) );
+    message.replace( TQString::fromLatin1( "\r\n.\r\n" ),
+                     TQString::fromLatin1( "\r\n..\r\n" ) );
 
     this->from = from;
     rcpt = to;
@@ -161,37 +161,37 @@ Smtp::~Smtp()
 
 void Smtp::dnsLookupHelper()
 {
-    TQValueList<TQDns::MailServer> s = mxLookup->mailServers();
-    if ( s.isEmpty() ) {
-        if ( !mxLookup->isWorking() )
-            emit status( tr( "Error in MX record lookup" ) );
+    TQValueList<TQDns::MailServer> s = mxLookup->mailServers();
+    if ( s.isEmpty() ) {
+        if ( !mxLookup->isWorking() )
+            emit status( tr( "Error in MX record lookup" ) );
         return;
     }
 
-    emit status( tr( "Connecting to %1" ).arg( s.first().name ) );
+    emit status( tr( "Connecting to %1" ).arg( s.first().name ) );
 
-    socket->connectToHost( s.first().name, 25 );
-    t = new TQTextStream( socket );
+    socket->connectToHost( s.first().name, 25 );
+    t = new TQTextStream( socket );
 }
 
 
 void Smtp::connected()
 {
-    emit status( tr( "Connected to %1" ).arg( socket->peerName() ) );
+    emit status( tr( "Connected to %1" ).arg( socket->peerName() ) );
 }
 
 void Smtp::readyRead()
 {
     // SMTP is line-oriented
-    if ( !socket->canReadLine() )
+    if ( !socket->canReadLine() )
         return;
 
-    TQString responseLine;
+    TQString responseLine;
     do {
-        responseLine = socket->readLine();
+        responseLine = socket->readLine();
         response += responseLine;
-    } while( socket->canReadLine() && responseLine[3] != ' ' );
-    responseLine.truncate( 3 );
+    } while( socket->canReadLine() && responseLine[3] != ' ' );
+    responseLine.truncate( 3 );
 
     if ( state == Init && responseLine[0] == '2' ) {
         // banner was okay, let's go on
@@ -214,15 +214,15 @@ void Smtp::readyRead()
         *t << "TQUIT\r\n";
         // here, we just close.
         state = Close;
-        emit status( tr( "Message sent" ) );
+        emit status( tr( "Message sent" ) );
     } else if ( state == Close ) {
-        deleteLater();
+        deleteLater();
         return;
     } else {
         // something broke.
-        TQMessageBox::warning( qApp->activeWindow(),
-                              tr( "TQt Mail Example" ),
-                              tr( "Unexpected reply from SMTP server:\n\n" ) +
+        TQMessageBox::warning( qApp->activeWindow(),
+                              tr( "TQt Mail Example" ),
+                              tr( "Unexpected reply from SMTP server:\n\n" ) +
                               response );
         state = Close;
     }
diff --git a/doc/html/mainclasses.html b/doc/html/mainclasses.html
index 7d60b3fbf..af05e6264 100644
--- a/doc/html/mainclasses.html
+++ b/doc/html/mainclasses.html
@@ -39,231 +39,231 @@ classes), see TQt's Classes.
 
     
    
@@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ not usually a problem in practice.
 
     The moc does not handle all of C++.  The main problem is that class
 templates cannot have signals or slots. Here is an example:
 
     
    -    class SomeTemplate<int> : public TQFrame {
+    class SomeTemplate<int> : public TQFrame {
         Q_OBJECT
         ...
     signals:
@@ -265,13 +265,13 @@ templates cannot have signals or slots. Here is an example:
 
     Less importantly, the following constructs are illegal.  All of them
 have alternatives which we think are usually better, so removing these
 limitations is not a high priority for us.
-
     
     Multiple inheritance requires TQObject to be first
+
     
     Multiple inheritance requires TQObject to be first
 
    
 
     If you are using multiple inheritance, moc assumes that the first
 inherited class is a subclass of TQObject.  Also, be sure that only
 the first inherited class is a TQObject.
 
     
    -    class SomeClass : public TQObject, public OtherClass {
+    class SomeClass : public TQObject, public OtherClass {
         ...
     };
 
    
@@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ is a TQObject.)
 signal/slot arguments, we think inheritance is a better alternative.
 Here is an example of illegal syntax:
 
     
    -    class SomeClass : public TQObject {
+    class SomeClass : public TQObject {
         Q_OBJECT
         ...
     public slots:
@@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ Here is an example of illegal syntax:
 
         typedef void (*ApplyFunctionType)( List *, void * );
 
-    class SomeClass : public TQObject {
+    class SomeClass : public TQObject {
         Q_OBJECT
         ...
     public slots:
@@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ placed in signals or slots sections.  Put them in the private,
 protected or public sections instead.  Here is an example of the
 illegal syntax:
 
     
    -    class SomeClass : public TQObject {
+    class SomeClass : public TQObject {
         Q_OBJECT
         ...
     signals:
@@ -329,10 +329,10 @@ illegal syntax:
 public status is not extended to cover signals and slots.  Here is an
 illegal example:
 
     
    -    class Whatever : public TQButtonGroup {
+    class Whatever : public TQButtonGroup {
         ...
     public slots:
-        TQButtonGroup::buttonPressed; // WRONG
+        TQButtonGroup::buttonPressed; // WRONG
         ...
     };
 
    
@@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ will not work in signals and slots. Here is an illegal example:
     #define SIGNEDNESS(a) a
     #endif
 
-    class Whatever : public TQObject {
+    class Whatever : public TQObject {
         ...
     signals:
         void someSignal( SIGNEDNESS(int) );
@@ -394,11 +394,11 @@ that it happens to work in some cases).  Put them in private,
 protected or public sections, where they belong.  Here is an example
 of the illegal syntax:
 
     
    -    class SomeClass : public TQObject {
+    class SomeClass : public TQObject {
         Q_OBJECT
     public slots:
-        SomeClass( TQObject *parent, const char *name )
-            : TQObject( parent, name ) { } // WRONG
+        SomeClass( TQObject *parent, const char *name )
+            : TQObject( parent, name ) { } // WRONG
         ...
     };
 
    
@@ -412,7 +412,7 @@ does not work as expected. The moc will complain that it can neither
 find the functions nor resolve the type. Here is an example of the
 illegal syntax:
 
     
    -    class SomeClass : public TQObject {
+    class SomeClass : public TQObject {
         Q_OBJECT
     public:
         ...
@@ -428,7 +428,7 @@ illegal syntax:
 
     Work around this limitation by declaring all properties at the
 beginning of the class declaration, right after Q_OBJECT:
 
     
    -    class SomeClass : public TQObject {
+    class SomeClass : public TQObject {
         Q_OBJECT
         Q_PROPERTY( Priority priority READ priority WRITE setPriority )
         Q_ENUMS( Priority )
diff --git a/doc/html/modules.html b/doc/html/modules.html
index 0c646d7bc..a739a2faa 100644
--- a/doc/html/modules.html
+++ b/doc/html/modules.html
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ with each Edition.
 
  •  Table Module
 
  •  Workspace (MDI) Module
 
  •  XML Module
-
  •  ActiveTQt Framework:
+
  •  ActiveTQt Framework:
 
      
 
    •  TQAxServer Module
 
    •  TQAxContainer Module
diff --git a/doc/html/motif-customwidget-example.html b/doc/html/motif-customwidget-example.html
index 6e02b4f81..ea42cd026 100644
--- a/doc/html/motif-customwidget-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/motif-customwidget-example.html
@@ -39,12 +39,12 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
       
      #ifndef MAINWINDOW_H
 #define MAINWINDOW_H
 
-#include <qmainwindow.h>
+#include <ntqmainwindow.h>
 
 
 class TQMotifWidget;
 
-class MainWindow : public TQMainWindow
+class MainWindow : public TQMainWindow
 {
 public:
     MainWindow();
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ private:
 
       Implementation:
 
       
      #include "mainwindow.h"
 
-#include <qapplication.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
 #include <qmotif.h>
 
 
@@ -69,22 +69,22 @@ int main( int argc, char **argv )
     XtSetLanguageProc( NULL, NULL, NULL );
 
     TQMotif integrator( "customwidget" );
-    TQApplication app( argc, argv );
+    TQApplication app( argc, argv );
 
     MainWindow mainwindow;
-    app.setMainWidget( &mainwindow );
-    mainwindow.show();
+    app.setMainWidget( &mainwindow );
+    mainwindow.show();
 
-    return app.exec();
+    return app.exec();
 }
 
      
 
 
       
      #include "mainwindow.h"
 
-#include <qapplication.h>
-#include <qmenubar.h>
-#include <qpopupmenu.h>
-#include <qstatusbar.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
+#include <ntqmenubar.h>
+#include <ntqpopupmenu.h>
+#include <ntqstatusbar.h>
 
 #include <qmotifwidget.h>
 
@@ -94,13 +94,13 @@ int main( int argc, char **argv )
 
 
 MainWindow::MainWindow()
-    : TQMainWindow( 0, "mainwindow" )
+    : TQMainWindow( 0, "mainwindow" )
 {
-    TQPopupMenu *filemenu = new TQPopupMenu( this );
-    filemenu->insertItem( tr("&Quit"), qApp, SLOT(quit()) );
+    TQPopupMenu *filemenu = new TQPopupMenu( this );
+    filemenu->insertItem( tr("&Quit"), qApp, SLOT(quit()) );
 
-    menuBar()->insertItem( tr("&File"), filemenu );
-    statusBar()->message( tr("This is a TQMainWindow with an XmText widget.") );
+    menuBar()->insertItem( tr("&File"), filemenu );
+    statusBar()->message( tr("This is a TQMainWindow with an XmText widget.") );
 
     customwidget =
         new TQMotifWidget( this, xmFormWidgetClass, NULL, 0, "form" );
@@ -129,9 +129,9 @@ int main( int argc, char **argv )
     XtManageChild( texteditor );
     XtManageChild( button );
 
-    setCentralWidget( customwidget );
+    setCentralWidget( customwidget );
 
-    resize( 400, 600 );
+    resize( 400, 600 );
 }
 
 
      
diff --git a/doc/html/motif-dialog-example.html b/doc/html/motif-dialog-example.html
index b30ffda91..87b861801 100644
--- a/doc/html/motif-dialog-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/motif-dialog-example.html
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ public:
 
 
       
      
 
       Implementation:
-
       
      #include <qapplication.h>
+
       
      #include <ntqapplication.h>
 #include <qmotif.h>
 
 #include "mainwindow.h"
@@ -67,13 +67,13 @@ int main( int argc, char **argv )
     XtSetLanguageProc( NULL, NULL, NULL );
 
     TQMotif integrator( "dialog" );
-    TQApplication app( argc, argv );
+    TQApplication app( argc, argv );
 
     MainWindow *mainwindow = new MainWindow;
-    app.setMainWidget( mainwindow );
-    mainwindow->show();
+    app.setMainWidget( mainwindow );
+    mainwindow->show();
 
-    return app.exec();
+    return app.exec();
 }
 
      
 
@@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ int main( int argc, char **argv )
 #include <Xm/Form.h>
 #include <Xm/LabelG.h>
 
-#include <qapplication.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
 
 
 static void motifDialogCallback( Widget, XtPointer client_data, XtPointer )
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ static void qtDialogCallback( Widget, XtPointer client_data, XtPointer )
 static void quitCallback( Widget, XtPointer client_data, XtPointer )
 {
     MainWindow *mw = (MainWindow *) client_data;
-    mw->close();
+    mw->close();
 }
 
 
@@ -166,14 +166,14 @@ static void quitCallback( Widget, XtPointer client_data, XtPointer )
                    XmNheight, 300,
                    NULL );
 
-    setCaption( tr("TQMotif Dialog Example") );
+    setCaption( tr("TQMotif Dialog Example") );
 
 }
 
 void MainWindow::showMotifDialog()
 {
     TQMotifDialog dialog( this, "custom dialog", TRUE );
-    dialog.setCaption( tr("Custom Motif Dialog") );
+    dialog.setCaption( tr("Custom Motif Dialog") );
 
     Widget form = XmCreateForm( dialog.shell(), "custom motif dialog", NULL, 0 );
 
@@ -214,14 +214,14 @@ void MainWindow::showMotifDialog()
     XtAddCallback( button, XmNactivateCallback,
                    (XtCallbackProc) TQMotifDialog::acceptCallback, &dialog );
 
-    dialog.exec();
+    dialog.exec();
 }
 
 void MainWindow::showTQtDialog()
 {
     // custom TQt-based dialog using a Motif-based parent
     CustomDialog customdialog( motifWidget(), "custom dialog", TRUE );
-    customdialog.exec();
+    customdialog.exec();
 }
 
      
 
diff --git a/doc/html/motif-extension.html b/doc/html/motif-extension.html
index 0e9931e85..19d0af80d 100644
--- a/doc/html/motif-extension.html
+++ b/doc/html/motif-extension.html
@@ -45,8 +45,8 @@ versions of TQt.
 
       The TQt Motif Extension consists of the following classes:
 
       
        
 
      •  TQMotif - Provides the basis of the TQt Motif Extension.
-
      •  TQMotifWidget - Provides the TQWidget API for Motif widgets.
-
      •  TQMotifDialog - Provides the TQDialog API for Motif dialogs.
+
      •  TQMotifWidget - Provides the TQWidget API for Motif widgets.
+
      •  TQMotifDialog - Provides the TQDialog API for Motif dialogs.
 
      •  TQXtWidget - The Xt/Motif integration widget from the previous
 Xt/Motif extension.  This class is unsupported and has many known
 problems and limitations.  It is provided only to keep existing source
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ complete migration of a Motif based program to the TQt toolkit.
 
         
         Incorrect CDE Color Scheme
 
        
 
         TQMotifWidget and TQMotifDialog will use the same Visual, Colormap
-and color depth that TQApplication uses.  When using CDE, the color
+and color depth that TQApplication uses.  When using CDE, the color
 scheme may be incorrect when using a Visual, Colormap and color depth
 that is not the default.  To work around this problem, add the
 following resource string to your startup files (for example,
@@ -81,9 +81,9 @@ headers from this extension, and all Xt/Motif and X11 headers last.
 For example:
 
         
             // TQt headers first
-    #include <qapplication.h>
-    #include <qpushbutton.h>
-    #include <qsocket.h>
+    #include <ntqapplication.h>
+    #include <ntqpushbutton.h>
+    #include <ntqsocket.h>
     ...
 
     // TQMotif* headers next
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ For example:
  
 
         
         Multiple Screen Support
 
        
-
         TQMotifWidget can be used together with TQDesktopWidget to create
+
         TQMotifWidget can be used together with TQDesktopWidget to create
 top-level windows on multiple screens.  A common mistake is to create
 a TQMotifWidget on a non-default screen while the Xt/Motif widgets are
 created on the default screen.  The solution is to specify the screen
@@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ to both TQMotifWidget and the Xt/Motif child.  For example:
     // make sure both TQMotifWidget and the XmMainWindow are on screen 1
     XtSetArg(args[0], XtNscreen, ScreenOfDisplay(dpy, 1));
     TQMotifWidget *toplevel =
-        new TQMotifWidget(TQApplication::desktop()->screen(1),
+        new TQMotifWidget(TQApplication::desktop()->screen(1),
                          xmMainWindowWidgetClass, args, 1, "mainwindow");
 
        
  
diff --git a/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-1.html b/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-1.html
index aac0cab67..59bf202aa 100644
--- a/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-1.html
+++ b/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-1.html
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 [ Home ]
 [ Next: Preparing to Migrate the User Interface ]
-
         
         Starting with TQMotif and TQApplication
+
         
         Starting with TQMotif and TQApplication
 
        
 
         To be able to use TQt, we need to create a TQApplication object. The
 TQApplication class controls all the event delivery and display
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ the TQt Motif Extension provides a complete integration.
 Normally, a Motif based program would use the XtAppMainLoop()
 function to run the application's event loop. This is still possible,
 but since we are migrating to the TQt toolkit, we prefer to use the
-TQApplication::exec() function for running the event loop.
+TQApplication::exec() function for running the event loop.
 
         
        
 
         Since we renamed todo.c to todo.cpp, we must change the
 project file and rerun qmake to regenerate our Makefile. When we
diff --git a/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-10.html b/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-10.html
index 35ab043c8..2644630e8 100644
--- a/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-10.html
+++ b/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-10.html
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ existing projects.
 
         
         Using Unicode
 
        
 
         Support for internationalization is very easy
-with TQt.  Using TQString instead of char* for storing text gives
+with TQt.  Using TQString instead of char* for storing text gives
 us support for most of the written languages around the world.  Our Page and Options structs look much simpler now.
 
         
 
@@ -51,12 +51,12 @@ us support for most of the written languages around the world.  Our Page 
        
 
         All functions that use the Page and Options structs need to be
 updated to use TQString properly.  Since TQString is also an implicitly shared class, we no longer have to do any memory management with our
-strings.  We can remove all occurences of the qstrdup() function,
+strings.  We can remove all occurences of the qstrdup() function,
 and we never need to use new or delete when done with a string.
 TQString will allocate and delete data when needed.
 
         Here are the MainWindow::fileOpen() and MainWindow::pageChange()
 functions from mainwindow.ui.h.  Notice that the code no longer
-uses delete or qstrdup() when storing text.
+uses delete or qstrdup() when storing text.
 
         
 
 
         
        
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ very similar to those shown above.
 
         TQt provides many input and output classes.  We
 can use these in MainWindow::readDB() and MainWindow::saveDB().
 Currently, these functions use functions only found on UNIX machines.
-Using TQFile and TQTextStream removes this dependency on UNIX, and we can
+Using TQFile and TQTextStream removes this dependency on UNIX, and we can
 begin building and testing our application on Microsoft Windows and
 Apple Mac OS X.
 
         The platform-independent versions of the MainWindow::readDB() and
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Apple Mac OS X.
 
 
         Since we used the TQt Designer to design the Main Window
 widget, we can extend the interface easily.  We can use some of the
-more advanced features of TQMainWindow, which includes dockable
+more advanced features of TQMainWindow, which includes dockable
 toolbars.  Adding these is simple with the TQt Designer.  The
 final version of our project includes a toolbar, which provides tquick
 access to the Open, Save, Print, New Page and Delete to Trash actions.  
diff --git a/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-2.html b/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-2.html
index cbe236daa..3b44a6e1e 100644
--- a/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-2.html
+++ b/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-2.html
@@ -53,18 +53,18 @@ way up the dependency tree until all the pieces have been migrated.
 Main Window widget with popup-menu hierarchy, and finally the View widget.
 
         However, we are not ready to begin just yet. The migration process can
 be long, but it does not have to be difficult. The Open, Save As, Page Delete and IO Error dialogs use Motif XmFileSelectionBox and XmMessageBox dialogs. TQt provides similar
-functionality with TQFileDialog and TQMessageBox, which we can begin
+functionality with TQFileDialog and TQMessageBox, which we can begin
 using immediately.
 
         The Print dialog is special, however. The Print dialog cannot be
 replaced until after we have replaced the View widget. TQt provides
-a complete printing mechanism with TQPrinter, but we cannot start using
+a complete printing mechanism with TQPrinter, but we cannot start using
 it until we have replaced the View widget.
 
         
         Removing the Help Dialog
 
        
 
         The Help dialog is also special.  Instead of replacing the Help
-dialog with a custom TQDialog, we will use the TQt
+dialog with a custom TQDialog, we will use the TQt
 Help System classes to provide a more advanced online help.
-However, we cannot start using classes like TQToolTip and TQWhatsThis
+However, we cannot start using classes like TQToolTip and TQWhatsThis
 until we replace the Main Window and View widgets.
 
         The help text included with the original project is very small and
 only contains information about the XmNoteBook widget.  The use of
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ creates the Help dialog.  We will also remove the code to create
 the Help menu, since this menu is now empty.  Finally, we remove
 the help_cb() function implementation.
 
         The Help dialog is now removed from our project.  We cannot add
-TQToolTip and TQWhatsThis help at the moment, since we are still using
+TQToolTip and TQWhatsThis help at the moment, since we are still using
 XmMainWindow for the Main Window widget.  Once we have
 migrated the Main Window and the popup-menu hierarchy, we can
 begin using TQToolTip and TQWhatsThis for online help.
diff --git a/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-3.html b/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-3.html
index 8427c5cf4..0ea97f2c3 100644
--- a/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-3.html
+++ b/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-3.html
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 [ Home ]
 [ Next: Using Custom TQDialogs ]
 
         We start by using two of the TQt Standard
-Dialogs: TQFileDialog and TQMessageBox. Both of these classes
+Dialogs: TQFileDialog and TQMessageBox. Both of these classes
 provide useful static convenience functions.
 
         
    • 
 
    
 A
-TQAction
+TQAction
 
-TQFileDialog
+TQFileDialog
 
-TQMessageBox
+TQMessageBox
 
-TQSlider
+TQSlider
 
-TQTimer
+TQTimer
 
    
 
-TQApplication
+TQApplication
 
-TQFont
+TQFont
 
-TQMovie
+TQMovie
 
-TQSound
+TQSound
 
-TQToolBar
+TQToolBar
 
    
 B
-TQButtonGroup
+TQButtonGroup
 
-TQFontDialog
+TQFontDialog
 N
-TQNetworkProtocol
+TQNetworkProtocol
 
-TQSpinBox
+TQSpinBox
 
-TQToolBox
+TQToolBox
 
    
 C
-TQCanvas
+TQCanvas
 G
 TQGLWidget
 O
-TQObject
+TQObject
 
-TQSplashScreen
+TQSplashScreen
 
-TQToolButton
+TQToolButton
 
    
 
-TQCheckBox
+TQCheckBox
 
 TQGridLayout
 P
-TQPainter
+TQPainter
 
-TQSplitter
+TQSplitter
 
-TQToolTip
+TQToolTip
 
    
 
-TQClipboard
+TQClipboard
 
-TQGroupBox
+TQGroupBox
 
-TQPalette
+TQPalette
 
-TQSql
+TQSql
 
-TQTranslator
+TQTranslator
 
    
 
-TQColorDialog
+TQColorDialog
 
-TQGuardedPtr
+TQGuardedPtr
 
-TQPen
+TQPen
 
-TQSqlDatabase
+TQSqlDatabase
 U
-TQUrl
+TQUrl
 
    
 
-TQComboBox
+TQComboBox
 H
 TQHBoxLayout
 
-TQPixmap
+TQPixmap
 
-TQSqlDriverPlugin
+TQSqlDriverPlugin
 
-TQUrlOperator
+TQUrlOperator
 
    
 D
-TQDataBrowser
+TQDataBrowser
 I
-TQIconSet
+TQIconSet
 
-TQPoint
+TQPoint
 
-TQSqlForm
+TQSqlForm
 V
-TQValidator
+TQValidator
 
    
 
-TQDataTable
+TQDataTable
 
-TQIconView
+TQIconView
 
-TQPopupMenu
+TQPopupMenu
 
-TQSqlQuery
+TQSqlQuery
 
-TQValueList
+TQValueList
 
    
 
-TQDataView
+TQDataView
 
-TQImage
+TQImage
 
-TQPrinter
+TQPrinter
 
-TQStatusBar
+TQStatusBar
 
-TQValueStack
+TQValueStack
 
    
 
 TQDate
 
-TQInputDialog
+TQInputDialog
 
-TQProcess
+TQProcess
 
-TQString
+TQString
 
-TQValueVector
+TQValueVector
 
    
 
 TQDateEdit
 L
-TQLabel
+TQLabel
 
-TQProgressBar
+TQProgressBar
 
-TQStringList
+TQStringList
 
-TQVariant
+TQVariant
 
    
 
-TQDateTime
+TQDateTime
 
-TQLCDNumber
+TQLCDNumber
 
-TQProgressDialog
+TQProgressDialog
 T
-TQTabDialog
+TQTabDialog
 
 TQVBoxLayout
 
    
 
-TQDateTimeEdit
+TQDateTimeEdit
 
-TQLibrary
+TQLibrary
 
-TQPushButton
+TQPushButton
 
-TQTable
+TQTable
 W
-TQWhatsThis
+TQWhatsThis
 
    
 
-TQDial
+TQDial
 
-TQLineEdit
+TQLineEdit
 R
-TQRadioButton
+TQRadioButton
 
-TQTabWidget
+TQTabWidget
 
-TQWidget
+TQWidget
 
    
 
-TQDialog
+TQDialog
 
-TQListBox
+TQListBox
 
-TQRect
+TQRect
 
-TQTextBrowser
+TQTextBrowser
 
-TQWidgetStack
+TQWidgetStack
 
    
 
-TQDict
+TQDict
 
-TQListView
+TQListView
 
-TQRegExp
+TQRegExp
 
-TQTextEdit
+TQTextEdit
 
-TQWizard
+TQWizard
 
    
 
-TQDir
+TQDir
 M
-TQMainWindow
+TQMainWindow
 S
-TQScrollView
+TQScrollView
 
-TQTextStream
+TQTextStream
 
-TQWorkspace
+TQWorkspace
 
    
 
-TQDockWindow
+TQDockWindow
 
-TQMap
+TQMap
 
-TQSettings
+TQSettings
 
 TQTime
 X
 TQXmlSimpleReader
 
    
 F
-TQFile
+TQFile
 
-TQMenuBar
+TQMenuBar
 
-TQSimpleRichText
+TQSimpleRichText
 
 TQTimeEdit
 
diff --git a/doc/html/mdi-example.html b/doc/html/mdi-example.html
index d816deb81..13833b943 100644
--- a/doc/html/mdi-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/mdi-example.html
@@ -50,8 +50,8 @@ that it provides a Multiple Document Interface (MDI).
 #ifndef APPLICATION_H
 #define APPLICATION_H
 
-#include <qmainwindow.h>
-#include <qptrlist.h>
+#include <ntqmainwindow.h>
+#include <ntqptrlist.h>
 
 class TQTextEdit;
 class TQToolBar;
@@ -60,32 +60,32 @@ class TQWorkspace;
 class TQPopupMenu;
 class TQMovie;
 
-class MDIWindow: public TQMainWindow
+class MDIWindow: public TQMainWindow
 {
     Q_OBJECT
 public:
-    MDIWindow( TQWidget* parent, const char* name, int wflags );
+    MDIWindow( TQWidget* parent, const char* name, int wflags );
     ~MDIWindow();
 
-    void load( const TQString& fn );
+    void load( const TQString& fn );
     void save();
     void saveAs();
-    void print( TQPrinter* );
+    void print( TQPrinter* );
 
 protected:
     void closeEvent( TQCloseEvent * );
 
 signals:
-    void message(const TQString&, int );
+    void message(const TQString&, int );
 
 private:
-    TQTextEdit* medit;
-    TQMovie * mmovie;
-    TQString filename;
+    TQTextEdit* medit;
+    TQMovie * mmovie;
+    TQString filename;
 };
 
 
-class ApplicationWindow: public TQMainWindow
+class ApplicationWindow: public TQMainWindow
 {
     Q_OBJECT
 public:
@@ -111,10 +111,10 @@ private slots:
     void windowsMenuActivated( int id );
 
 private:
-    TQPrinter *printer;
-    TQWorkspace* ws;
-    TQToolBar *fileTools;
-    TQPopupMenu* windowsMenu;
+    TQPrinter *printer;
+    TQWorkspace* ws;
+    TQToolBar *fileTools;
+    TQPopupMenu* windowsMenu;
 };
 
 
@@ -134,31 +134,31 @@ private:
 *****************************************************************************/
 
 #include "application.h"
-#include <qworkspace.h>
-#include <qimage.h>
-#include <qpixmap.h>
-#include <qtoolbar.h>
-#include <qtoolbutton.h>
-#include <qpopupmenu.h>
-#include <qmenubar.h>
-#include <qmovie.h>
-#include <qfile.h>
-#include <qfiledialog.h>
-#include <qlabel.h>
-#include <qstatusbar.h>
-#include <qmessagebox.h>
-#include <qprinter.h>
-#include <qapplication.h>
-#include <qpushbutton.h>
-#include <qaccel.h>
-#include <qtextstream.h>
-#include <qtextedit.h>
-#include <qpainter.h>
-#include <qpaintdevicemetrics.h>
-#include <qwhatsthis.h>
-#include <qobjectlist.h>
-#include <qvbox.h>
-#include <qsimplerichtext.h>
+#include <ntqworkspace.h>
+#include <ntqimage.h>
+#include <ntqpixmap.h>
+#include <ntqtoolbar.h>
+#include <ntqtoolbutton.h>
+#include <ntqpopupmenu.h>
+#include <ntqmenubar.h>
+#include <ntqmovie.h>
+#include <ntqfile.h>
+#include <ntqfiledialog.h>
+#include <ntqlabel.h>
+#include <ntqstatusbar.h>
+#include <ntqmessagebox.h>
+#include <ntqprinter.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
+#include <ntqpushbutton.h>
+#include <ntqaccel.h>
+#include <ntqtextstream.h>
+#include <ntqtextedit.h>
+#include <ntqpainter.h>
+#include <ntqpaintdevicemetrics.h>
+#include <ntqwhatsthis.h>
+#include <ntqobjectlist.h>
+#include <ntqvbox.h>
+#include <ntqsimplerichtext.h>
 
 #include "filesave.xpm"
 #include "fileopen.xpm"
@@ -176,87 +176,87 @@ const char * filePrintText = "Click this button to print the file you "
 "You can also select the Print command from the File menu.";
 
 ApplicationWindow::ApplicationWindow()
-    : TQMainWindow( 0, "example application main window", WDestructiveClose )
+    : TQMainWindow( 0, "example application main window", WDestructiveClose )
 {
     int id;
 
-    TQPixmap openIcon, saveIcon;
+    TQPixmap openIcon, saveIcon;
 
-    fileTools = new TQToolBar( this, "file operations" );
-    addToolBar( fileTools, tr( "File Operations" ), DockTop, TRUE );
+    fileTools = new TQToolBar( this, "file operations" );
+    addToolBar( fileTools, tr( "File Operations" ), DockTop, TRUE );
 
     openIcon = TQPixmap( fileopen );
     TQToolButton * fileOpen
-        = new TQToolButton( openIcon, "Open File", TQString::null,
+        = new TQToolButton( openIcon, "Open File", TQString::null,
                            this, SLOT(load()), fileTools, "open file" );
 
     saveIcon = TQPixmap( filesave );
     TQToolButton * fileSave
-        = new TQToolButton( saveIcon, "Save File", TQString::null,
+        = new TQToolButton( saveIcon, "Save File", TQString::null,
                            this, SLOT(save()), fileTools, "save file" );
 
 #ifndef QT_NO_PRINTER
-    printer = new TQPrinter( TQPrinter::HighResolution );
-    TQPixmap printIcon;
+    printer = new TQPrinter( TQPrinter::HighResolution );
+    TQPixmap printIcon;
 
     printIcon = TQPixmap( fileprint );
     TQToolButton * filePrint
-        = new TQToolButton( printIcon, "Print File", TQString::null,
+        = new TQToolButton( printIcon, "Print File", TQString::null,
                            this, SLOT(print()), fileTools, "print file" );
-    TQWhatsThis::add( filePrint, filePrintText );
+    TQWhatsThis::add( filePrint, filePrintText );
 #endif
 
     (void)TQWhatsThis::whatsThisButton( fileTools );
 
-    TQWhatsThis::add( fileOpen, fileOpenText );
-    TQWhatsThis::add( fileSave, fileSaveText );
+    TQWhatsThis::add( fileOpen, fileOpenText );
+    TQWhatsThis::add( fileSave, fileSaveText );
 
-    TQPopupMenu * file = new TQPopupMenu( this );
-    menuBar()->insertItem( "&File", file );
+    TQPopupMenu * file = new TQPopupMenu( this );
+    menuBar()->insertItem( "&File", file );
 
-    file->insertItem( "&New", this, SLOT(newDoc()), CTRL+Key_N );
+    file->insertItem( "&New", this, SLOT(newDoc()), CTRL+Key_N );
 
-    id = file->insertItem( openIcon, "&Open...",
+    id = file->insertItem( openIcon, "&Open...",
                            this, SLOT(load()), CTRL+Key_O );
-    file->setWhatsThis( id, fileOpenText );
+    file->setWhatsThis( id, fileOpenText );
 
-    id = file->insertItem( saveIcon, "&Save",
+    id = file->insertItem( saveIcon, "&Save",
                            this, SLOT(save()), CTRL+Key_S );
-    file->setWhatsThis( id, fileSaveText );
-    id = file->insertItem( "Save &As...", this, SLOT(saveAs()) );
-    file->setWhatsThis( id, fileSaveText );
+    file->setWhatsThis( id, fileSaveText );
+    id = file->insertItem( "Save &As...", this, SLOT(saveAs()) );
+    file->setWhatsThis( id, fileSaveText );
 #ifndef QT_NO_PRINTER
-    file->insertSeparator();
-    id = file->insertItem( printIcon, "&Print...",
+    file->insertSeparator();
+    id = file->insertItem( printIcon, "&Print...",
                            this, SLOT(print()), CTRL+Key_P );
-    file->setWhatsThis( id, filePrintText );
+    file->setWhatsThis( id, filePrintText );
 #endif
-    file->insertSeparator();
-    file->insertItem( "&Close", this, SLOT(closeWindow()), CTRL+Key_W );
-    file->insertItem( "&Quit", qApp, SLOT( closeAllWindows() ), CTRL+Key_Q );
+    file->insertSeparator();
+    file->insertItem( "&Close", this, SLOT(closeWindow()), CTRL+Key_W );
+    file->insertItem( "&Quit", qApp, SLOT( closeAllWindows() ), CTRL+Key_Q );
 
-    windowsMenu = new TQPopupMenu( this );
-    windowsMenu->setCheckable( TRUE );
-    connect( windowsMenu, SIGNAL( aboutToShow() ),
+    windowsMenu = new TQPopupMenu( this );
+    windowsMenu->setCheckable( TRUE );
+    connect( windowsMenu, SIGNAL( aboutToShow() ),
              this, SLOT( windowsMenuAboutToShow() ) );
-    menuBar()->insertItem( "&Windows", windowsMenu );
+    menuBar()->insertItem( "&Windows", windowsMenu );
 
-    menuBar()->insertSeparator();
-    TQPopupMenu * help = new TQPopupMenu( this );
-    menuBar()->insertItem( "&Help", help );
+    menuBar()->insertSeparator();
+    TQPopupMenu * help = new TQPopupMenu( this );
+    menuBar()->insertItem( "&Help", help );
 
-    help->insertItem( "&About", this, SLOT(about()), Key_F1);
-    help->insertItem( "About &TQt", this, SLOT(aboutTQt()));
-    help->insertSeparator();
-    help->insertItem( "What's &This", this, SLOT(whatsThis()), SHIFT+Key_F1);
+    help->insertItem( "&About", this, SLOT(about()), Key_F1);
+    help->insertItem( "About &TQt", this, SLOT(aboutTQt()));
+    help->insertSeparator();
+    help->insertItem( "What's &This", this, SLOT(whatsThis()), SHIFT+Key_F1);
 
-    TQVBox* vb = new TQVBox( this );
-    vb->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::StyledPanel | TQFrame::Sunken );
-    ws = new TQWorkspace( vb );
-    ws->setScrollBarsEnabled( TRUE );
-    setCentralWidget( vb );
+    TQVBox* vb = new TQVBox( this );
+    vb->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::StyledPanel | TQFrame::Sunken );
+    ws = new TQWorkspace( vb );
+    ws->setScrollBarsEnabled( TRUE );
+    setCentralWidget( vb );
 
-    statusBar()->message( "Ready", 2000 );
+    statusBar()->message( "Ready", 2000 );
 }
 
 
@@ -272,31 +272,31 @@ ApplicationWindow::~ApplicationWindow()
 MDIWindow* ApplicationWindow::newDoc()
 {
     MDIWindow* w = new MDIWindow( ws, 0, WDestructiveClose );
-    connect( w, SIGNAL( message(const TQString&, int) ), statusBar(), SLOT( message(const TQString&, int )) );
-    w->setCaption("unnamed document");
-    w->setIcon( TQPixmap("document.xpm") );
+    connect( w, SIGNAL( message(const TQString&, int) ), statusBar(), SLOT( message(const TQString&, int )) );
+    w->setCaption("unnamed document");
+    w->setIcon( TQPixmap("document.xpm") );
     // show the very first window in maximized mode
-    if ( ws->windowList().isEmpty() )
-        w->showMaximized();
+    if ( ws->windowList().isEmpty() )
+        w->showMaximized();
     else
-        w->show();
+        w->show();
     return w;
 }
 
 void ApplicationWindow::load()
 {
-    TQString fn = TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName( TQString::null, TQString::null, this );
-    if ( !fn.isEmpty() ) {
+    TQString fn = TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName( TQString::null, TQString::null, this );
+    if ( !fn.isEmpty() ) {
         MDIWindow* w = newDoc();
         w->load( fn );
     }  else {
-        statusBar()->message( "Loading aborted", 2000 );
+        statusBar()->message( "Loading aborted", 2000 );
     }
 }
 
 void ApplicationWindow::save()
 {
-    MDIWindow* m = (MDIWindow*)ws->activeWindow();
+    MDIWindow* m = (MDIWindow*)ws->activeWindow();
     if ( m )
         m->save();
 }
@@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ void ApplicationWindow::save()
 
 void ApplicationWindow::saveAs()
 {
-    MDIWindow* m = (MDIWindow*)ws->activeWindow();
+    MDIWindow* m = (MDIWindow*)ws->activeWindow();
     if ( m )
         m->saveAs();
 }
@@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ void ApplicationWindow::saveAs()
 void ApplicationWindow::print()
 {
 #ifndef QT_NO_PRINTER
-    MDIWindow* m = (MDIWindow*)ws->activeWindow();
+    MDIWindow* m = (MDIWindow*)ws->activeWindow();
     if ( m )
         m->print( printer );
 #endif
@@ -322,14 +322,14 @@ void ApplicationWindow::print()
 
 void ApplicationWindow::closeWindow()
 {
-    MDIWindow* m = (MDIWindow*)ws->activeWindow();
+    MDIWindow* m = (MDIWindow*)ws->activeWindow();
     if ( m )
-        m->close();
+        m->close();
 }
 
 void ApplicationWindow::about()
 {
-    TQMessageBox::about( this, "TQt Application Example",
+    TQMessageBox::about( this, "TQt Application Example",
                         "This example demonstrates simple use of\n "
                         "TQt's Multiple Document Interface (MDI).");
 }
@@ -337,84 +337,84 @@ void ApplicationWindow::about()
 
 void ApplicationWindow::aboutTQt()
 {
-    TQMessageBox::aboutTQt( this, "TQt Application Example" );
+    TQMessageBox::aboutTQt( this, "TQt Application Example" );
 }
 
 
 void ApplicationWindow::windowsMenuAboutToShow()
 {
-    windowsMenu->clear();
-    int cascadeId = windowsMenu->insertItem("&Cascade", ws, SLOT(cascade() ) );
-    int tileId = windowsMenu->insertItem("&Tile", ws, SLOT(tile() ) );
-    int horTileId = windowsMenu->insertItem("Tile &Horizontally", this, SLOT(tileHorizontal() ) );
-    if ( ws->windowList().isEmpty() ) {
-        windowsMenu->setItemEnabled( cascadeId, FALSE );
-        windowsMenu->setItemEnabled( tileId, FALSE );
-        windowsMenu->setItemEnabled( horTileId, FALSE );
+    windowsMenu->clear();
+    int cascadeId = windowsMenu->insertItem("&Cascade", ws, SLOT(cascade() ) );
+    int tileId = windowsMenu->insertItem("&Tile", ws, SLOT(tile() ) );
+    int horTileId = windowsMenu->insertItem("Tile &Horizontally", this, SLOT(tileHorizontal() ) );
+    if ( ws->windowList().isEmpty() ) {
+        windowsMenu->setItemEnabled( cascadeId, FALSE );
+        windowsMenu->setItemEnabled( tileId, FALSE );
+        windowsMenu->setItemEnabled( horTileId, FALSE );
     }
-    windowsMenu->insertSeparator();
-    TQWidgetList windows = ws->windowList();
+    windowsMenu->insertSeparator();
+    TQWidgetList windows = ws->windowList();
     for ( int i = 0; i < int(windows.count()); ++i ) {
-        int id = windowsMenu->insertItem(windows.at(i)->caption(),
+        int id = windowsMenu->insertItem(windows.at(i)->caption(),
                                          this, SLOT( windowsMenuActivated( int ) ) );
-        windowsMenu->setItemParameter( id, i );
-        windowsMenu->setItemChecked( id, ws->activeWindow() == windows.at(i) );
+        windowsMenu->setItemParameter( id, i );
+        windowsMenu->setItemChecked( id, ws->activeWindow() == windows.at(i) );
     }
 }
 
 void ApplicationWindow::windowsMenuActivated( int id )
 {
-    TQWidget* w = ws->windowList().at( id );
+    TQWidget* w = ws->windowList().at( id );
     if ( w )
-        w->showNormal();
-    w->setFocus();
+        w->showNormal();
+    w->setFocus();
 }
 
 void ApplicationWindow::tileHorizontal()
 {
     // primitive horizontal tiling
-    TQWidgetList windows = ws->windowList();
+    TQWidgetList windows = ws->windowList();
     if ( !windows.count() )
         return;
 
-    if (ws->activeWindow())
-        ws->activeWindow()->showNormal();
+    if (ws->activeWindow())
+        ws->activeWindow()->showNormal();
 
-    int heightForEach = ws->height() / windows.count();
+    int heightForEach = ws->height() / windows.count();
     int y = 0;
     for ( int i = 0; i < int(windows.count()); ++i ) {
-        TQWidget *window = windows.at(i);
-        int preferredHeight = window->minimumHeight()+window->parentWidget()->baseSize().height();
+        TQWidget *window = windows.at(i);
+        int preferredHeight = window->minimumHeight()+window->parentWidget()->baseSize().height();
         int actHeight = TQMAX(heightForEach, preferredHeight);
 
-        window->parentWidget()->setGeometry( 0, y, ws->width(), actHeight );
+        window->parentWidget()->setGeometry( 0, y, ws->width(), actHeight );
         y += actHeight;
     }
 }
 
-void ApplicationWindow::closeEvent( TQCloseEvent *e )
+void ApplicationWindow::closeEvent( TQCloseEvent *e )
 {
-    TQWidgetList windows = ws->windowList();
+    TQWidgetList windows = ws->windowList();
     if ( windows.count() ) {
         for ( int i = 0; i < int(windows.count()); ++i ) {
-            TQWidget *window = windows.at( i );
-            if ( !window->close() ) {
+            TQWidget *window = windows.at( i );
+            if ( !window->close() ) {
                 e->ignore();
                 return;
             }
         }
     }
 
-    TQMainWindow::closeEvent( e );
+    TQMainWindow::closeEvent( e );
 }
 
-MDIWindow::MDIWindow( TQWidget* parent, const char* name, int wflags )
-    : TQMainWindow( parent, name, wflags )
+MDIWindow::MDIWindow( TQWidget* parent, const char* name, int wflags )
+    : TQMainWindow( parent, name, wflags )
 {
     mmovie = 0;
-    medit = new TQTextEdit( this );
-    setFocusProxy( medit );
-    setCentralWidget( medit );
+    medit = new TQTextEdit( this );
+    setFocusProxy( medit );
+    setCentralWidget( medit );
 }
 
 MDIWindow::~MDIWindow()
@@ -422,12 +422,12 @@ MDIWindow::~MDIWindow()
     delete mmovie;
 }
 
-void MDIWindow::closeEvent( TQCloseEvent *e )
+void MDIWindow::closeEvent( TQCloseEvent *e )
 {
-    if ( medit->isModified() ) {
-        switch( TQMessageBox::warning( this, "Save Changes",
-            tr("Save changes to %1?").arg( caption() ),
-            tr("Yes"), tr("No"), tr("Cancel") ) ) {
+    if ( medit->isModified() ) {
+        switch( TQMessageBox::warning( this, "Save Changes",
+            tr("Save changes to %1?").arg( caption() ),
+            tr("Yes"), tr("No"), tr("Cancel") ) ) {
         case 0:
             {
                 save();
@@ -449,37 +449,37 @@ void MDIWindow::closeEvent( MDIWindow::load( const TQString& fn )
+void MDIWindow::load( const TQString& fn )
 {
     filename  = fn;
-    TQFile f( filename );
-    if ( !f.open( IO_ReadOnly ) )
+    TQFile f( filename );
+    if ( !f.open( IO_ReadOnly ) )
         return;
 
-    if(fn.contains(".gif")) {
-        TQWidget * tmp=new TQWidget(this);
-        setFocusProxy(tmp);
-        setCentralWidget(tmp);
-        medit->hide();
+    if(fn.contains(".gif")) {
+        TQWidget * tmp=new TQWidget(this);
+        setFocusProxy(tmp);
+        setCentralWidget(tmp);
+        medit->hide();
         delete medit;
-        TQMovie * qm=new TQMovie(fn);
+        TQMovie * qm=new TQMovie(fn);
 #ifdef Q_WS_QWS // temporary speed-test hack
         qm->setDisplayWidget(tmp);
 #endif
-        tmp->setBackgroundMode(TQWidget::NoBackground);
-        tmp->show();
+        tmp->setBackgroundMode(TQWidget::NoBackground);
+        tmp->show();
         mmovie=qm;
     } else {
         mmovie = 0;
 
-        TQTextStream t(&f);
-        TQString s = t.read();
-        medit->setText( s );
-        f.close();
+        TQTextStream t(&f);
+        TQString s = t.read();
+        medit->setText( s );
+        f.close();
 
 
     }
-    setCaption( filename );
+    setCaption( filename );
     emit message( TQString("Loaded document %1").arg(filename), 2000 );
 }
 
@@ -490,27 +490,27 @@ void MDIWindow::save()
         return;
     }
 
-    TQString text = medit->text();
-    TQFile f( filename );
-    if ( !f.open( IO_WriteOnly ) ) {
+    TQString text = medit->text();
+    TQFile f( filename );
+    if ( !f.open( IO_WriteOnly ) ) {
         emit message( TQString("Could not write to %1").arg(filename),
                       2000 );
         return;
     }
 
-    TQTextStream t( &f );
+    TQTextStream t( &f );
     t << text;
-    f.close();
+    f.close();
 
-    setCaption( filename );
+    setCaption( filename );
 
     emit message( TQString( "File %1 saved" ).arg( filename ), 2000 );
 }
 
 void MDIWindow::saveAs()
 {
-    TQString fn = TQFileDialog::getSaveFileName( filename, TQString::null, this );
-    if ( !fn.isEmpty() ) {
+    TQString fn = TQFileDialog::getSaveFileName( filename, TQString::null, this );
+    if ( !fn.isEmpty() ) {
         filename = fn;
         save();
     } else {
@@ -518,42 +518,42 @@ void MDIWindow::saveAs()
     }
 }
 
-void MDIWindow::print( TQPrinter* printer)
+void MDIWindow::print( TQPrinter* printer)
 {
 #ifndef QT_NO_PRINTER
     int pageNo = 1;
 
-    if ( printer->setup(this) ) {               // printer dialog
-        printer->setFullPage( TRUE );
+    if ( printer->setup(this) ) {               // printer dialog
+        printer->setFullPage( TRUE );
         emit message( "Printing...", 0 );
-        TQPainter p;
-        if ( !p.begin( printer ) )
+        TQPainter p;
+        if ( !p.begin( printer ) )
             return;                             // paint on printer
-        TQPaintDeviceMetrics metrics( p.device() );
-        int dpiy = metrics.logicalDpiY();
+        TQPaintDeviceMetrics metrics( p.device() );
+        int dpiy = metrics.logicalDpiY();
         int margin = (int) ( (2/2.54)*dpiy ); // 2 cm margins
-        TQRect view( margin, margin, metrics.width() - 2*margin, metrics.height() - 2*margin );
-        TQSimpleRichText richText( TQStyleSheet::convertFromPlainText(medit->text()),
+        TQRect view( margin, margin, metrics.width() - 2*margin, metrics.height() - 2*margin );
+        TQSimpleRichText richText( TQStyleSheet::convertFromPlainText(medit->text()),
                                   TQFont(),
-                                  medit->context(),
-                                  medit->styleSheet(),
-                                  medit->mimeSourceFactory(),
-                                  view.height() );
-        richText.setWidth( &p, view.width() );
+                                  medit->context(),
+                                  medit->styleSheet(),
+                                  medit->mimeSourceFactory(),
+                                  view.height() );
+        richText.setWidth( &p, view.width() );
         int page = 1;
         do {
-            richText.draw( &p, margin, margin, view, colorGroup() );
-            view.moveBy( 0, view.height() );
-            p.translate( 0 , -view.height() );
-            p.drawText( view.right() - p.fontMetrics().width( TQString::number( page ) ),
-                        view.bottom() + p.fontMetrics().ascent() + 5, TQString::number( page ) );
-            if ( view.top() - margin >= richText.height() )
+            richText.draw( &p, margin, margin, view, colorGroup() );
+            view.moveBy( 0, view.height() );
+            p.translate( 0 , -view.height() );
+            p.drawText( view.right() - p.fontMetrics().width( TQString::number( page ) ),
+                        view.bottom() + p.fontMetrics().ascent() + 5, TQString::number( page ) );
+            if ( view.top() - margin >= richText.height() )
                 break;
-            TQString msg( "Printing (page " );
-            msg += TQString::number( ++pageNo );
+            TQString msg( "Printing (page " );
+            msg += TQString::number( ++pageNo );
             msg += ")...";
             emit message( msg, 0 );
-            printer->newPage();
+            printer->newPage();
             page++;
         } while (TRUE);
     }
@@ -573,17 +573,17 @@ void MDIWindow::print( TQPrinter*
 **
 *****************************************************************************/
 
-#include <qapplication.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
 #include "application.h"
 
 int main( int argc, char ** argv ) {
-    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
+    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
     ApplicationWindow * mw = new ApplicationWindow();
-    a.setMainWidget(mw);
-    mw->setCaption( "TQt Example - Multiple Documents Interface (MDI)" );
-    mw->show();
-    a.connect( &a, SIGNAL(lastWindowClosed()), &a, SLOT(quit()) );
-    int res = a.exec();
+    a.setMainWidget(mw);
+    mw->setCaption( "TQt Example - Multiple Documents Interface (MDI)" );
+    mw->show();
+    a.connect( &a, SIGNAL(lastWindowClosed()), &a, SLOT(quit()) );
+    int res = a.exec();
     return res;
 }
 
diff --git a/doc/html/menu-example.html b/doc/html/menu-example.html
index d734a8531..b611166cd 100644
--- a/doc/html/menu-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/menu-example.html
@@ -51,16 +51,16 @@ context menu.
 #ifndef MENU_H
 #define MENU_H
 
-#include <qwidget.h>
-#include <qmenubar.h>
-#include <qlabel.h>
+#include <ntqwidget.h>
+#include <ntqmenubar.h>
+#include <ntqlabel.h>
 
 
-class MenuExample : public TQWidget
+class MenuExample : public TQWidget
 {
     Q_OBJECT
 public:
-    MenuExample( TQWidget *parent=0, const char *name=0 );
+    MenuExample( TQWidget *parent=0, const char *name=0 );
 
 public slots:
     void open();
@@ -83,14 +83,14 @@ protected:
     void    resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * );
 
 signals:
-    void    explain( const TQString& );
+    void    explain( const TQString& );
 
 private:
     void contextMenuEvent ( TQContextMenuEvent * );
 
 
-    TQMenuBar *menu;
-    TQLabel   *label;
+    TQMenuBar *menu;
+    TQLabel   *label;
     bool isBold;
     bool isUnderline;
     int boldID, underlineID;
@@ -113,12 +113,12 @@ private:
 *****************************************************************************/
 
 #include "menu.h"
-#include <qcursor.h>
-#include <qpopupmenu.h>
-#include <qapplication.h>
-#include <qmessagebox.h>
-#include <qpixmap.h>
-#include <qpainter.h>
+#include <ntqcursor.h>
+#include <ntqpopupmenu.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
+#include <ntqmessagebox.h>
+#include <ntqpixmap.h>
+#include <ntqpainter.h>
 
 /* XPM */
 static const char * p1_xpm[] = {
@@ -198,140 +198,140 @@ static const char * p3_xpm[] = {
 class MyMenuItem : public TQCustomMenuItem
 {
 public:
-    MyMenuItem( const TQString& s, const TQFont& f )
+    MyMenuItem( const TQString& s, const TQFont& f )
         : string( s ), font( f ){};
     ~MyMenuItem(){}
 
-    void paint( TQPainter* p, const TQColorGroup& /*cg*/, bool /*act*/, bool /*enabled*/, int x, int y, int w, int h )
+    void paint( TQPainter* p, const TQColorGroup& /*cg*/, bool /*act*/, bool /*enabled*/, int x, int y, int w, int h )
     {
-        p->setFont ( font );
-        p->drawText( x, y, w, h, AlignLeft | AlignVCenter | DontClip | ShowPrefix, string );
+        p->setFont ( font );
+        p->drawText( x, y, w, h, AlignLeft | AlignVCenter | DontClip | ShowPrefix, string );
     }
 
-    TQSize sizeHint()
+    TQSize sizeHint()
     {
         return TQFontMetrics( font ).size( AlignLeft | AlignVCenter | ShowPrefix | DontClip,  string );
     }
 private:
-    TQString string;
-    TQFont font;
+    TQString string;
+    TQFont font;
 };
 
 
-MenuExample::MenuExample( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name )
+MenuExample::MenuExample( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+    : TQWidget( parent, name )
 {
-    TQPixmap p1( p1_xpm );
-    TQPixmap p2( p2_xpm );
-    TQPixmap p3( p3_xpm );
-    TQPopupMenu *print = new TQPopupMenu( this );
-    Q_CHECK_PTR( print );
-    print->insertTearOffHandle();
-    print->insertItem( "&Print to printer", this, SLOT(printer()) );
-    print->insertItem( "Print to &file", this, SLOT(file()) );
-    print->insertItem( "Print to fa&x", this, SLOT(fax()) );
-    print->insertSeparator();
-    print->insertItem( "Printer &Setup", this, SLOT(printerSetup()) );
-
-    TQPopupMenu *file = new TQPopupMenu( this );
-    Q_CHECK_PTR( file );
-    file->insertItem( p1, "&Open",  this, SLOT(open()), CTRL+Key_O );
-    file->insertItem( p2, "&New", this, SLOT(news()), CTRL+Key_N );
-    file->insertItem( p3, "&Save", this, SLOT(save()), CTRL+Key_S );
-    file->insertItem( "&Close", this, SLOT(closeDoc()), CTRL+Key_W );
-    file->insertSeparator();
-    file->insertItem( "&Print", print, CTRL+Key_P );
-    file->insertSeparator();
-    file->insertItem( "E&xit",  qApp, SLOT(quit()), CTRL+Key_Q );
-
-    TQPopupMenu *edit = new TQPopupMenu( this );
-    Q_CHECK_PTR( edit );
-    int undoID = edit->insertItem( "&Undo", this, SLOT(undo()) );
-    int redoID = edit->insertItem( "&Redo", this, SLOT(redo()) );
-    edit->setItemEnabled( undoID, FALSE );
-    edit->setItemEnabled( redoID, FALSE );
-
-    TQPopupMenu* options = new TQPopupMenu( this );
-    Q_CHECK_PTR( options );
-    options->insertTearOffHandle();
-    options->setCaption("Options");
-    options->insertItem( "&Normal Font", this, SLOT(normal()) );
-    options->insertSeparator();
-
-    options->polish(); // adjust system settings
-    TQFont f = options->font();
-    f.setBold( TRUE );
-    boldID = options->insertItem( new MyMenuItem( "Bold", f ) );
-    options->setAccel( CTRL+Key_B, boldID );
-    options->connectItem( boldID, this, SLOT(bold()) );
-    f = font();
-    f.setUnderline( TRUE );
-    underlineID = options->insertItem( new MyMenuItem( "Underline", f ) );
-    options->setAccel( CTRL+Key_U, underlineID );
-    options->connectItem( underlineID, this, SLOT(underline()) );
+    TQPixmap p1( p1_xpm );
+    TQPixmap p2( p2_xpm );
+    TQPixmap p3( p3_xpm );
+    TQPopupMenu *print = new TQPopupMenu( this );
+    Q_CHECK_PTR( print );
+    print->insertTearOffHandle();
+    print->insertItem( "&Print to printer", this, SLOT(printer()) );
+    print->insertItem( "Print to &file", this, SLOT(file()) );
+    print->insertItem( "Print to fa&x", this, SLOT(fax()) );
+    print->insertSeparator();
+    print->insertItem( "Printer &Setup", this, SLOT(printerSetup()) );
+
+    TQPopupMenu *file = new TQPopupMenu( this );
+    Q_CHECK_PTR( file );
+    file->insertItem( p1, "&Open",  this, SLOT(open()), CTRL+Key_O );
+    file->insertItem( p2, "&New", this, SLOT(news()), CTRL+Key_N );
+    file->insertItem( p3, "&Save", this, SLOT(save()), CTRL+Key_S );
+    file->insertItem( "&Close", this, SLOT(closeDoc()), CTRL+Key_W );
+    file->insertSeparator();
+    file->insertItem( "&Print", print, CTRL+Key_P );
+    file->insertSeparator();
+    file->insertItem( "E&xit",  qApp, SLOT(quit()), CTRL+Key_Q );
+
+    TQPopupMenu *edit = new TQPopupMenu( this );
+    Q_CHECK_PTR( edit );
+    int undoID = edit->insertItem( "&Undo", this, SLOT(undo()) );
+    int redoID = edit->insertItem( "&Redo", this, SLOT(redo()) );
+    edit->setItemEnabled( undoID, FALSE );
+    edit->setItemEnabled( redoID, FALSE );
+
+    TQPopupMenu* options = new TQPopupMenu( this );
+    Q_CHECK_PTR( options );
+    options->insertTearOffHandle();
+    options->setCaption("Options");
+    options->insertItem( "&Normal Font", this, SLOT(normal()) );
+    options->insertSeparator();
+
+    options->polish(); // adjust system settings
+    TQFont f = options->font();
+    f.setBold( TRUE );
+    boldID = options->insertItem( new MyMenuItem( "Bold", f ) );
+    options->setAccel( CTRL+Key_B, boldID );
+    options->connectItem( boldID, this, SLOT(bold()) );
+    f = font();
+    f.setUnderline( TRUE );
+    underlineID = options->insertItem( new MyMenuItem( "Underline", f ) );
+    options->setAccel( CTRL+Key_U, underlineID );
+    options->connectItem( underlineID, this, SLOT(underline()) );
 
     isBold = FALSE;
     isUnderline = FALSE;
-    options->setCheckable( TRUE );
+    options->setCheckable( TRUE );
 
 
-    TQPopupMenu *help = new TQPopupMenu( this );
-    Q_CHECK_PTR( help );
-    help->insertItem( "&About", this, SLOT(about()), CTRL+Key_H );
-    help->insertItem( "About &TQt", this, SLOT(aboutTQt()) );
+    TQPopupMenu *help = new TQPopupMenu( this );
+    Q_CHECK_PTR( help );
+    help->insertItem( "&About", this, SLOT(about()), CTRL+Key_H );
+    help->insertItem( "About &TQt", this, SLOT(aboutTQt()) );
 
     // If we used a TQMainWindow we could use its built-in menuBar().
-    menu = new TQMenuBar( this );
-    Q_CHECK_PTR( menu );
-    menu->insertItem( "&File", file );
-    menu->insertItem( "&Edit", edit );
-    menu->insertItem( "&Options", options );
-    menu->insertSeparator();
-    menu->insertItem( "&Help", help );
-    menu->setSeparator( TQMenuBar::InWindowsStyle );
-
-
-    TQLabel *msg = new TQLabel( this );
-    Q_CHECK_PTR( msg );
-    msg->setText( "A context menu is available.\n"
+    menu = new TQMenuBar( this );
+    Q_CHECK_PTR( menu );
+    menu->insertItem( "&File", file );
+    menu->insertItem( "&Edit", edit );
+    menu->insertItem( "&Options", options );
+    menu->insertSeparator();
+    menu->insertItem( "&Help", help );
+    menu->setSeparator( TQMenuBar::InWindowsStyle );
+
+
+    TQLabel *msg = new TQLabel( this );
+    Q_CHECK_PTR( msg );
+    msg->setText( "A context menu is available.\n"
                   "Invoke it by right-clicking or by"
                   " pressing the 'context' button." );
-    msg->setGeometry( 0, height() - 60, width(), 60 );
-    msg->setAlignment( AlignCenter );
+    msg->setGeometry( 0, height() - 60, width(), 60 );
+    msg->setAlignment( AlignCenter );
 
-    label = new TQLabel( this );
-    Q_CHECK_PTR( label );
-    label->setGeometry( 20, rect().center().y()-20, width()-40, 40 );
-    label->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Box | TQFrame::Raised );
-    label->setLineWidth( 1 );
-    label->setAlignment( AlignCenter );
+    label = new TQLabel( this );
+    Q_CHECK_PTR( label );
+    label->setGeometry( 20, rect().center().y()-20, width()-40, 40 );
+    label->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Box | TQFrame::Raised );
+    label->setLineWidth( 1 );
+    label->setAlignment( AlignCenter );
 
-    connect( this,  SIGNAL(explain(const TQString&)),
-             label, SLOT(setText(const TQString&)) );
+    connect( this,  SIGNAL(explain(const TQString&)),
+             label, SLOT(setText(const TQString&)) );
 
-    setMinimumSize( 100, 80 );
-    setFocusPolicy( TQWidget::ClickFocus );
+    setMinimumSize( 100, 80 );
+    setFocusPolicy( TQWidget::ClickFocus );
 }
 
 
-void MenuExample::contextMenuEvent( TQContextMenuEvent * )
+void MenuExample::contextMenuEvent( TQContextMenuEvent * )
 {
-    TQPopupMenu* contextMenu = new TQPopupMenu( this );
-    Q_CHECK_PTR( contextMenu );
-    TQLabel *caption = new TQLabel( "<font color=darkblue><u><b>"
+    TQPopupMenu* contextMenu = new TQPopupMenu( this );
+    Q_CHECK_PTR( contextMenu );
+    TQLabel *caption = new TQLabel( "<font color=darkblue><u><b>"
         "Context Menu</b></u></font>", this );
-    caption->setAlignment( TQt::AlignCenter );
-    contextMenu->insertItem( caption );
-    contextMenu->insertItem( "&New",  this, SLOT(news()), CTRL+Key_N );
-    contextMenu->insertItem( "&Open...", this, SLOT(open()), CTRL+Key_O );
-    contextMenu->insertItem( "&Save", this, SLOT(save()), CTRL+Key_S );
-    TQPopupMenu *submenu = new TQPopupMenu( this );
-    Q_CHECK_PTR( submenu );
-    submenu->insertItem( "&Print to printer", this, SLOT(printer()) );
-    submenu->insertItem( "Print to &file", this, SLOT(file()) );
-    submenu->insertItem( "Print to fa&x", this, SLOT(fax()) );
-    contextMenu->insertItem( "&Print", submenu );
-    contextMenu->exec( TQCursor::pos() );
+    caption->setAlignment( TQt::AlignCenter );
+    contextMenu->insertItem( caption );
+    contextMenu->insertItem( "&New",  this, SLOT(news()), CTRL+Key_N );
+    contextMenu->insertItem( "&Open...", this, SLOT(open()), CTRL+Key_O );
+    contextMenu->insertItem( "&Save", this, SLOT(save()), CTRL+Key_S );
+    TQPopupMenu *submenu = new TQPopupMenu( this );
+    Q_CHECK_PTR( submenu );
+    submenu->insertItem( "&Print to printer", this, SLOT(printer()) );
+    submenu->insertItem( "Print to &file", this, SLOT(file()) );
+    submenu->insertItem( "Print to fa&x", this, SLOT(fax()) );
+    contextMenu->insertItem( "&Print", submenu );
+    contextMenu->exec( TQCursor::pos() );
     delete contextMenu;
 }
 
@@ -375,10 +375,10 @@ void MenuExample::normal()
 {
     isBold = FALSE;
     isUnderline = FALSE;
-    TQFont font;
-    label->setFont( font );
-    menu->setItemChecked( boldID, isBold );
-    menu->setItemChecked( underlineID, isUnderline );
+    TQFont font;
+    label->setFont( font );
+    menu->setItemChecked( boldID, isBold );
+    menu->setItemChecked( underlineID, isUnderline );
     emit explain( "Options/Normal selected" );
 }
 
@@ -386,11 +386,11 @@ void MenuExample::normal()
 void MenuExample::bold()
 {
     isBold = !isBold;
-    TQFont font;
-    font.setBold( isBold );
-    font.setUnderline( isUnderline );
-    label->setFont( font );
-    menu->setItemChecked( boldID, isBold );
+    TQFont font;
+    font.setBold( isBold );
+    font.setUnderline( isUnderline );
+    label->setFont( font );
+    menu->setItemChecked( boldID, isBold );
     emit explain( "Options/Bold selected" );
 }
 
@@ -398,18 +398,18 @@ void MenuExample::bold()
 void MenuExample::underline()
 {
     isUnderline = !isUnderline;
-    TQFont font;
-    font.setBold( isBold );
-    font.setUnderline( isUnderline );
-    label->setFont( font );
-    menu->setItemChecked( underlineID, isUnderline );
+    TQFont font;
+    font.setBold( isBold );
+    font.setUnderline( isUnderline );
+    label->setFont( font );
+    menu->setItemChecked( underlineID, isUnderline );
     emit explain( "Options/Underline selected" );
 }
 
 
 void MenuExample::about()
 {
-    TQMessageBox::about( this, "TQt Menu Example",
+    TQMessageBox::about( this, "TQt Menu Example",
                         "This example demonstrates simple use of TQt menus.\n"
                         "You can cut and paste lines from it to your own\n"
                         "programs." );
@@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ void MenuExample::about()
 
 void MenuExample::aboutTQt()
 {
-    TQMessageBox::aboutTQt( this, "TQt Menu Example" );
+    TQMessageBox::aboutTQt( this, "TQt Menu Example" );
 }
 
 
@@ -443,20 +443,20 @@ void MenuExample::printerSetup()
 }
 
 
-void MenuExample::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * )
+void MenuExample::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * )
 {
-    label->setGeometry( 20, rect().center().y()-20, width()-40, 40 );
+    label->setGeometry( 20, rect().center().y()-20, width()-40, 40 );
 }
 
 
 int main( int argc, char ** argv )
 {
-    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
+    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
     MenuExample m;
-    m.setCaption("TQt Examples - Menus");
-    a.setMainWidget( &m );
-    m.show();
-    return a.exec();
+    m.setCaption("TQt Examples - Menus");
+    a.setMainWidget( &m );
+    m.show();
+    return a.exec();
 }
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/metaobjects.html b/doc/html/metaobjects.html
index 4b0e832d9..e4e804b77 100644
--- a/doc/html/metaobjects.html
+++ b/doc/html/metaobjects.html
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ inter-object communication, runtime type information, and the dynamic
 property system.
 
     The Meta Object System is based on three things:
 
      
-
    1.  the TQObject class;
+
    2.  the TQObject class;
 
    3.  the Q_OBJECT macro inside the private section of the class
 declaration;
 
    4.  the Meta Object Compiler (moc). 
@@ -55,21 +55,21 @@ slots mechanism for communication between objects (the main
 reason for introducing the system), the meta object code provides
 additional features in TQObject:
 
       
      
 
       While it is possible to use TQObject as a base class without the
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ view, a TQObject subclass without meta code is equivalent to its
 closest ancestor with meta object code. This means for example, that
 className() will not return the actual name of your class, but the
 class name of this ancestor. We strongly recommend that all
-subclasses of TQObject use the Q_OBJECT macro regardless of whether
+subclasses of TQObject use the Q_OBJECT macro regardless of whether
 they actually use signals, slots and properties or not.
 
       
 
diff --git a/doc/html/misc.html b/doc/html/misc.html
index 7e07bac7f..a094954df 100644
--- a/doc/html/misc.html
+++ b/doc/html/misc.html
@@ -35,34 +35,34 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
       These classes are useful classes not fitting into any other category.
 
       
 
      
-
      TQAccelHandles keyboard accelerator and shortcut keys
-
      TQAccessibleEnums and static functions relating to accessibility
+
      TQAccelHandles keyboard accelerator and shortcut keys
+
      TQAccessibleEnums and static functions relating to accessibility
 
      TQAccessibleInterfaceDefines an interface that exposes information about accessible objects
 
      TQAccessibleObjectImplements parts of the TQAccessibleInterface for TQObjects
 
      TQCustomMenuItemAbstract base class for custom menu items in popup menus
 
      TQDoubleValidatorRange checking of floating-point numbers
-
      TQErrorMessageError message display dialog
+
      TQErrorMessageError message display dialog
 
      TQFileIconProviderIcons for TQFileDialog to use
 
      TQFilePreviewFile previewing in TQFileDialog
-
      TQFocusDataMaintains the list of widgets in the focus chain
+
      TQFocusDataMaintains the list of widgets in the focus chain
 
      TQIntValidatorValidator which ensures that a string contains a valid integer within a specified range
-
      TQKeySequenceEncapsulates a key sequence as used by accelerators
+
      TQKeySequenceEncapsulates a key sequence as used by accelerators
 
      TQMacMimeMaps open-standard MIME to Mac flavors
-
      TQMenuDataBase class for TQMenuBar and TQPopupMenu
+
      TQMenuDataBase class for TQMenuBar and TQPopupMenu
 
      TQMimeSourceAbstraction of objects which provide formatted data of a certain MIME type
-
      TQProcessUsed to start external programs and to communicate with them
-
      TQRangeControlInteger value within a range
-
      TQRegExpPattern matching using regular expressions
+
      TQProcessUsed to start external programs and to communicate with them
+
      TQRangeControlInteger value within a range
+
      TQRegExpPattern matching using regular expressions
 
      TQRegExpValidatorUsed to check a string against a regular expression
-
      TQSettingsPersistent platform-independent application settings
-
      TQSignalCan be used to send signals for classes that don't inherit TQObject
-
      TQSplashScreenSplash screen that can be shown during application startup
-
      TQtNamespace for miscellaneous identifiers that need to be global-like
-
      TQUrlURL parser and simplifies working with URLs
-
      TQUrlInfoStores information about URLs
-
      TQUrlOperatorCommon operations on URLs
-
      TQValidatorValidation of input text
-
      TQVariantActs like a union for the most common TQt data types
+
      TQSettingsPersistent platform-independent application settings
+
      TQSignalCan be used to send signals for classes that don't inherit TQObject
+
      TQSplashScreenSplash screen that can be shown during application startup
+
      TQtNamespace for miscellaneous identifiers that need to be global-like
+
      TQUrlURL parser and simplifies working with URLs
+
      TQUrlInfoStores information about URLs
+
      TQUrlOperatorCommon operations on URLs
+
      TQValidatorValidation of input text
+
      TQVariantActs like a union for the most common TQt data types
 
      TQWindowsMimeMaps open-standard MIME to Window Clipboard formats
 
      
 
diff --git a/doc/html/moc.html b/doc/html/moc.html
index ad5bdd955..bbc07e574 100644
--- a/doc/html/moc.html
+++ b/doc/html/moc.html
@@ -55,11 +55,11 @@ use templates for signals and slots?.
 
       The moc is typically used with an input file containing class declarations
 like this:
 
       
      -    class MyClass : public TQObject
+    class MyClass : public TQObject
     {
         Q_OBJECT
     public:
-        MyClass( TQObject * parent=0, const char * name=0 );
+        MyClass( TQObject * parent=0, const char * name=0 );
         ~MyClass();
 
     signals:
@@ -80,13 +80,13 @@ case we declare a property of the enumeration type Priority that is
 also called "priority" and has a get function priority() and a set
 function setPriority().
 
       
      -    class MyClass : public TQObject
+    class MyClass : public TQObject
     {
         Q_OBJECT
         Q_PROPERTY( Priority priority READ priority WRITE setPriority )
         Q_ENUMS( Priority )
     public:
-        MyClass( TQObject * parent=0, const char * name=0 );
+        MyClass( TQObject * parent=0, const char * name=0 );
         ~MyClass();
 
         enum Priority { High, Low, VeryHigh, VeryLow };
@@ -100,13 +100,13 @@ macro. The Q_SETS macro declares enums that are to be used as
 sets, i.e. OR'ed together. Another macro, Q_CLASSINFO, can be used to
 attach additional name/value-pairs to the class' meta object:
 
       
      -    class MyClass : public TQObject
+    class MyClass : public TQObject
     {
         Q_OBJECT
         Q_CLASSINFO( "Author", "Oscar Peterson")
         Q_CLASSINFO( "Status", "Active")
     public:
-        MyClass( TQObject * parent=0, const char * name=0 );
+        MyClass( TQObject * parent=0, const char * name=0 );
         ~MyClass();
     };
 
      
@@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ that file are fully known.
 
    
 -f 
 Force the generation of an #include statement in the
-output.  This is the default for files whose name matches the regular expression \.[hH][^.]* (i.e. the extension starts with H or h).  This
+output.  This is the default for files whose name matches the regular expression \.[hH][^.]* (i.e. the extension starts with H or h).  This
 option is only useful if you have header files that do not follow the
 standard naming conventions.
 
    
 
     TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName() replacement for the Open dialog
@@ -52,13 +52,13 @@ window. We can have TQMotifWidget create our Motif dialogs and TQt
 dialogs.
 
     We need to include the appropriate headers for TQMotifWidget and
-TQFileDialog in todo.cpp.
+TQFileDialog in todo.cpp.
 
     
 
 
    
 
     Next, we make a few modifications to how the application is
 initialized. We could initialize Xt/Motif and create the XtAppContext ourselves, but TQMotif can do this for us.
-We also let TQApplication open the connection to the X server. Next,
+We also let TQApplication open the connection to the X server. Next,
 we create a TQMotifWidget, passing xmMainWindowWidgetClass as the widgetclass argument. We can now use the TQMotifWidget::motifWidget()
 function to access the Motif widget. The shell widget is created
 automatically by TQMotifWidget. We use XtParent() to access it.
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ as the parent for the TQt Standard Dialogs.
 
     First, we completely remove all use of the existing Motif file
 selection dialog. We remove the Xm/FileSB.h include, the global file_dialog variable, and the code to create the dialog. We also
 remove the PresentFDialog() callback function. None of this code
-is needed to use TQFileDialog.
+is needed to use TQFileDialog.
 
     After removing the PresentFDialog() callback function, we need to
 make Open and Save As popup-menu callbacks call the Open()
 and Save() functions.
@@ -88,13 +88,13 @@ be using it as the parent for the TQFileDialog.
  
 
     
    
 
     Next, we modify the Save() function to use
-TQFileDialog::getSaveFileName().
+TQFileDialog::getSaveFileName().
 
     
    
-
     ... and the Open() function to use TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName().
+
     ... and the Open() function to use TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName().
 
     
    
 
     After we build the project, the application runs and operates as
 expected. The difference is that the Open and Save As dialogs
-now use TQFileDialog.
+now use TQFileDialog.
 
     
     Replacing the Page Delete and IO Error Dialogs
 
    
 
     The Page Delete dialog is created and used in actions.c. We
@@ -112,9 +112,9 @@ the correct symbols for these functions.
 
     
    
 
     And we need to change the variable named new to newstr in the Trim() function.
 
     We can now change the DeletePage() function to use
-TQMessageBox::information().
+TQMessageBox::information().
 
     First, we need to make sure we include the proper header for
-TQMessageBox.
+TQMessageBox.
 
     
 
 
    
@@ -147,8 +147,8 @@ functions.
 C++.
 
     
    
 
     We can now change the ReadDB() and SaveDB() functions to use
-TQMessageBox::warning().
-
     First, we need to make sure we include the proper header for TQMessageBox.
+TQMessageBox::warning().
+
     First, we need to make sure we include the proper header for TQMessageBox.
 
     
 
 
    
diff --git a/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-4.html b/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-4.html
index 5b1056650..bb02213c1 100644
--- a/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-4.html
+++ b/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-4.html
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ this document: see the TQt Designer Manual if
 with TQt's visual design tool.
 
     
     Replacing the Page Edit Dialog
 
    
-
     The custom TQDialog description for the Page Edit dialog is saved
+
     The custom TQDialog description for the Page Edit dialog is saved
 as pageeditdialog.ui.  We add this file to the project file by
 adding the line
 
    @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ done for the Open and Save As dialogs in todo.cpp.
 
 
     
    
 
     The EditPage() function is implemented in actions.cpp.  We start
-by adding the includes needed for the PageEditDialog and TQLineEdit.
+by adding the includes needed for the PageEditDialog and TQLineEdit.
 
     
 
 
     
    
@@ -81,8 +81,8 @@ contents of DoEditPage() to this point and remove the DoEditPage()<
 
     The Page struct defined in page.h stores strings in char*
 arrays.  Since the PageEditDialog and the data it contains will be
 destroyed when we return from this function, we need to convert the
-unicode TQString data into a TQCString in the local encoding and
-duplicate it with qstrdup().
+unicode TQString data into a TQCString in the local encoding and
+duplicate it with qstrdup().
 
     
    
 
     The same process must be done for the minorTab text:
 
     
    
diff --git a/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-5.html b/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-5.html
index d93d3258a..6ec175569 100644
--- a/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-5.html
+++ b/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-5.html
@@ -39,13 +39,13 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
     As mentioned earlier, the Print dialog cannot be replaced until we
 have converted the View widget.  The Print dialog will be
 removed once we have finished our migration, since we will use
-TQPrinter instead.  Based on this information, we decide that it is not
-worth replacing the Print dialog with a custom TQDialog replacement.
+TQPrinter instead.  Based on this information, we decide that it is not
+worth replacing the Print dialog with a custom TQDialog replacement.
 Instead, we will keep the Motif based dialog and use TQMotifDialog to
 integrate the dialog with the application.
 
     
     Modality Requirements
 
    
-
     Modality with TQDialog is different from Motif.  The TQDialog::exec()
+
     Modality with TQDialog is different from Motif.  The TQDialog::exec()
 function does not return until the dialog is finished.  In Motif,
 modality is simply a property of the shell, and the application
 programmer must write TQDialog::exec() style functionality if they
diff --git a/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-6.html b/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-6.html
index ec9ce6a47..abc558802 100644
--- a/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-6.html
+++ b/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-6.html
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ is then compiled and linked into our application.
 
     TQt Designer also created the mainwindow.ui.h file.  We need to
 add the implementation for our Main Window to this skeleton
 implementation.
-
     We begin by adding the necessary includes for TQApplication
+
     We begin by adding the necessary includes for TQApplication
 and TQMotifWidget.
 
     
 
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ existing callback functions found in todo.cpp and actions.cpp.
 
     Save MainWindow::fileSave() calls the SaveIt() callback
 
     Save As MainWindow::fileSaveAs() calls the Save() callback
 
     Print MainWindow::filePrint() calls the ShowPrintDialog() callback
-
     Exit MainWindow::fileExit() calls TQApplication::quit()
+
     Exit MainWindow::fileExit() calls TQApplication::quit()
 
      Selected menu
 
     Properties MainWindow::selProperties() calls the EditPage() callback
 
     New MainWindow::selNewPage() calls the NewPage() callback
@@ -85,9 +85,9 @@ Each slot implementation is a single line calling the related callback
 function. The code is not very interesting and would just take up
 space, so we've omitted it.
 
     There are four exceptions to the above.  The Open(), Save(), EditPage() and DeletePage() callbacks accept a pointer to the
-toplevel TQWidget as argument 2 (the client_data argument).  For
+toplevel TQWidget as argument 2 (the client_data argument).  For
 these four functions, we pass this as the second argument, which is
-a toplevel MainWindow derived from TQMainWindow.
+a toplevel MainWindow derived from TQMainWindow.
 
     
     Replacing the Main Window
 
    
 
     The next step is to use the new Main Window in our application.
@@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ either.  We remove it and all references to it in the New(), Save()
 
     We remove all of the code used to create the Motif menus.  The
 remaining code in main() is self-explanatory.
 
     
    
-
     Our application is now using TQMainWindow instead of XmMainWindow.
+
     Our application is now using TQMainWindow instead of XmMainWindow.
 After we build the project, the application runs and operates as
 expected.
 
     [ Previous: Using Existing Dialogs with TQMotifDialog ]
diff --git a/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-7.html b/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-7.html
index 018258ae2..c6e5a2a19 100644
--- a/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-7.html
+++ b/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-7.html
@@ -95,13 +95,13 @@ use new and delete when modifying members of the Page
 
     
 
 
    
-
     When storing the context of the XmText widget, we use qstrdup()
+
     When storing the context of the XmText widget, we use qstrdup()
 to make a copy of the string returned by the XmTextGetString()
 function.
 
     
    
 
     The ReadDB() function in io.cpp needs similar changes.  We
 replace all use of XtMalloc() and XtNewString() with new and
-qstrdup(), respectively.
+qstrdup(), respectively.
 
     This needs to be done just after opening the file.
 
     
 
diff --git a/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-8.html b/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-8.html
index 40bc1f1a3..d0a2c5720 100644
--- a/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-8.html
+++ b/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-8.html
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ and code will need to be modified or rewritten.  New code must be
 written in a way that maintains compatibility with previous versions
 of our application.
 
     
-
     
  •  We can write a new TQWidget subclass that is identical to the XmNotebook widget class.
+
     
  •  We can write a new TQWidget subclass that is identical to the XmNotebook widget class.
 
     
      
 
       
    •  Advantages - The existing data structures will not change, allowing
 compatibility with previous and future versions.
@@ -69,8 +69,8 @@ application on all platforms supported by TQt.
 
       
    
 
     
 
     We will use the first approach to complete the migration of the
-example project used in this walkthrough, using TQTextEdit, TQLabel and
-TQSpinBox to provide a similar look.  The only difference is that we
+example project used in this walkthrough, using TQTextEdit, TQLabel and
+TQSpinBox to provide a similar look.  The only difference is that we
 will not have tabs.
 
     We use TQt Designer to add the
 TQTextEdit, TQLabel and TQSpinBox widgets to the Main Window widget.
@@ -125,10 +125,10 @@ number (with an indication that the page is invalid).
 
     The PageChange() function is moved from todo.cpp to the MainWindow::pageChange() function in mainwindow.ui.h.  As with the
 MainWindow::setPae() function, we need to modify the code to use
 the new widgets in our Main Window widget.
-
     Note: TQTextEdit::text() returns a TQString, which needs to be converted
+
     Note: TQTextEdit::text() returns a TQString, which needs to be converted
 into a normal char* array.  To do this we create a copy of the
-string in the local encoding.  We need to make the copy using qstrdup() because the data contained in the TQCString returned by
-TQString::local8Bit() is deallocated when the TQCString is destroyed.
+string in the local encoding.  We need to make the copy using qstrdup() because the data contained in the TQCString returned by
+TQString::local8Bit() is deallocated when the TQCString is destroyed.
 
     
    
 
     The TextChanged() function does nothing more than set the modified variable to 1.  Our new MainWindow::textChanged() function
 does exactly the same.
@@ -140,8 +140,8 @@ variable, we add a forward declaration at the top of mainwindow.ui.h.
 renamed to MainWindow::readDB() and MainWindow::saveDB(),
 respectively.  We need to modify the code in order to make the code
 work properly.
-
     First, We add #include statements for the MainWindow, TQSpinBox
-and TQTextEdit classes.
+
     First, We add #include statements for the MainWindow, TQSpinBox
+and TQTextEdit classes.
 
     
 
 
    
@@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ will not use any Xt/Motif functions, so we remove the Xt/Motif #include
 These functions remain largely unchanged, maintaining compatibility
 with previous versions.  Also, the ReadDB() and SaveDB()
 functions have been converted into MainWindow member functions, so
-we can pass this as the parent argument to the TQMessageBox
+we can pass this as the parent argument to the TQMessageBox
 functions.
 
     
    
 
     After reading the file in the MainWindow::readDB() function, we set
@@ -160,11 +160,11 @@ values.
 
 
     
    
 
     In the MainWindow::saveDB() function, we need to store the text
-currently displayed, so we use TQTextEdit::text() instead of XmTextGetString().  Note: TQTextEdit::text() returns a TQString, which
+currently displayed, so we use TQTextEdit::text() instead of XmTextGetString().  Note: TQTextEdit::text() returns a TQString, which
 needs to be converted into a normal char* array.  To do this we
 create a copy of the string in the local encoding.  We need to make
-the copy using qstrdup() because the data contained in the TQCString
-returned by TQString::local8Bit() is deallocated when the TQCString is
+the copy using qstrdup() because the data contained in the TQCString
+returned by TQString::local8Bit() is deallocated when the TQCString is
 destroyed.
 
     
    
 
     
diff --git a/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-9.html b/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-9.html
index 4c0cc9dc6..76fb859a7 100644
--- a/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-9.html
+++ b/doc/html/motif-walkthrough-9.html
@@ -39,12 +39,12 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
     The Print dialog is the last component in our application that
 uses Motif.  The current Print() function does nothing more than
 write the plain text to a temporary file, and then executes 'lpr' to
-send the text to the printer.  Since we will use TQPrinter, we do not
+send the text to the printer.  Since we will use TQPrinter, we do not
 this function any more, so we remove it.  The current MainWindow::filePrint() implementation is removed as well.  We will
 write a new MainWindow::filePrint() implementation in mainwindow.ui.h.
 
     Note: The steps involved in using the TQPrinter class are beyond the
 scope of this walkthrough and will not be discussed here.  The
-TQPrinter Class Reference, TQSimpleRichText Class Reference and the
+TQPrinter Class Reference, TQSimpleRichText Class Reference and the
 Simple Application Walkthrough
 contain information on the use of TQPrinter.
 
     For completeness, the code to initialize a TQPrinter object is included below.
@@ -62,12 +62,12 @@ previous versions.
 
     
    
 
     Next we just loop over all pages, appending the page label, contents
 and formatting characters to a printtext variable (which is a
-TQString).
+TQString).
 
     
    
 
     The rest of the MainWindow::filePrint() function is the actual
-printing code.  Here we simply create a TQSimpleRichText object using
-the string we created above, and draw this string on the TQPrinter
-object using TQPainter.
+printing code.  Here we simply create a TQSimpleRichText object using
+the string we created above, and draw this string on the TQPrinter
+object using TQPainter.
 
     
    
 
     
     Removing the Dependency on Xt/Motif
 
    
diff --git a/doc/html/motif-walkthrough.html b/doc/html/motif-walkthrough.html
index b0add895c..79aa2e853 100644
--- a/doc/html/motif-walkthrough.html
+++ b/doc/html/motif-walkthrough.html
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ rest of the project need not be changed at all.
 existing Motif based project to the TQt toolkit. We assume that they
 have experience with C/C++ and Xt/Motif. Some experience with the TQt
 toolkit is also necessary. For developers completely new to TQt we
-recommend following the learning plan outlined in How to Learn TQt; or to go on a TQt
+recommend following the learning plan outlined in How to Learn TQt; or to go on a TQt
 training course. (See http://www.trolltech.com for
 details of training courses.)
 
     
     Goals for the Walkthrough
diff --git a/doc/html/movies-example.html b/doc/html/movies-example.html
index d607e6ac2..7c2544239 100644
--- a/doc/html/movies-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/movies-example.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
    
 
     
-The Movies example displays MNG and animated GIF files using the TQMovie and
-TQLabel classes.
+The Movies example displays MNG and animated GIF files using the TQMovie and
+TQLabel classes.
 
     The movies will only read an animated GIF if GIF reading was enabled when TQt was built.
 
     
    
 
     Main:
@@ -48,25 +48,25 @@ The Movies example displays MNG and animated GIF files using the qapplication.h>
-#include <qfiledialog.h>
-#include <qpushbutton.h>
-#include <qlabel.h>
-#include <qpainter.h>
-#include <qmessagebox.h>
-#include <qmovie.h>
-#include <qvbox.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
+#include <ntqfiledialog.h>
+#include <ntqpushbutton.h>
+#include <ntqlabel.h>
+#include <ntqpainter.h>
+#include <ntqmessagebox.h>
+#include <ntqmovie.h>
+#include <ntqvbox.h>
 
 
-class MovieScreen : public TQFrame {
+class MovieScreen : public TQFrame {
     Q_OBJECT
-    TQMovie movie;
-    TQString filename;
-    TQSize sh;
+    TQMovie movie;
+    TQString filename;
+    TQSize sh;
 
 public:
     MovieScreen(const char* fname, TQMovie m, TQWidget* p=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0) :
-        TQFrame(p, name, f),
+        TQFrame(p, name, f),
         sh(100,100)
     {
         setCaption(fname);
@@ -77,18 +77,18 @@ public:
         setFrameStyle(TQFrame::WinPanel|TQFrame::Sunken);
 
         // No background needed, since we draw on the whole widget.
-        movie.setBackgroundColor(backgroundColor());
+        movie.setBackgroundColor(backgroundColor());
         setBackgroundMode(NoBackground);
 
         // Get the movie to tell use when interesting things happen.
-        movie.connectUpdate(this, SLOT(movieUpdated(const TQRect&)));
-        movie.connectResize(this, SLOT(movieResized(const TQSize&)));
-        movie.connectStatus(this, SLOT(movieStatus(int)));
+        movie.connectUpdate(this, SLOT(movieUpdated(const TQRect&)));
+        movie.connectResize(this, SLOT(movieResized(const TQSize&)));
+        movie.connectStatus(this, SLOT(movieStatus(int)));
 
         setSizePolicy(TQSizePolicy(TQSizePolicy::Expanding,TQSizePolicy::Expanding));
     }
 
-    TQSize sizeHint() const
+    TQSize sizeHint() const
     {
         return sh;
     }
@@ -99,25 +99,25 @@ protected:
     void drawContents(TQPainter* p)
     {
         // Get the current movie frame.
-        TQPixmap pm = movie.framePixmap();
+        TQPixmap pm = movie.framePixmap();
 
         // Get the area we have to draw in.
-        TQRect r = contentsRect();
+        TQRect r = contentsRect();
 
-        if ( !pm.isNull() ) {
+        if ( !pm.isNull() ) {
             // Only rescale is we need to - it can take CPU!
-            if ( r.size() != pm.size() ) {
-                TQWMatrix m;
-                m.scale((double)r.width()/pm.width(),
-                        (double)r.height()/pm.height());
-                pm = pm.xForm(m);
+            if ( r.size() != pm.size() ) {
+                TQWMatrix m;
+                m.scale((double)r.width()/pm.width(),
+                        (double)r.height()/pm.height());
+                pm = pm.xForm(m);
             }
 
             // Draw the [possibly scaled] frame.  movieUpdated() below calls
             // repaint with only the changed area, so clipping will ensure we
             // only do the minimum amount of rendering.
             //
-            p->drawPixmap(r.x(), r.y(), pm);
+            p->drawPixmap(r.x(), r.y(), pm);
         }
 
 
@@ -125,11 +125,11 @@ protected:
 
         const char* message = 0;
 
-        if (movie.paused()) {
+        if (movie.paused()) {
             message = "PAUSED";
-        } else if (movie.finished()) {
+        } else if (movie.finished()) {
             message = "THE END";
-        } else if (movie.steps() > 0) {
+        } else if (movie.steps() > 0) {
             message = "FF >>";
         }
 
@@ -137,20 +137,20 @@ protected:
             // Find a good font size...
             p->setFont(TQFont("Helvetica", 24));
 
-            TQFontMetrics fm = p->fontMetrics();
-            if ( fm.width(message) > r.width()-10 )
+            TQFontMetrics fm = p->fontMetrics();
+            if ( fm.width(message) > r.width()-10 )
                 p->setFont(TQFont("Helvetica", 18));
 
             fm = p->fontMetrics();
-            if ( fm.width(message) > r.width()-10 )
+            if ( fm.width(message) > r.width()-10 )
                 p->setFont(TQFont("Helvetica", 14));
 
             fm = p->fontMetrics();
-            if ( fm.width(message) > r.width()-10 )
+            if ( fm.width(message) > r.width()-10 )
                 p->setFont(TQFont("Helvetica", 12));
 
             fm = p->fontMetrics();
-            if ( fm.width(message) > r.width()-10 )
+            if ( fm.width(message) > r.width()-10 )
                 p->setFont(TQFont("Helvetica", 10));
 
             // "Shadow" effect.
@@ -164,60 +164,60 @@ protected:
 public slots:
     void restart()
     {
-        movie.restart();
+        movie.restart();
         repaint();
     }
 
     void togglePause()
     {
-        if ( movie.paused() )
-            movie.unpause();
+        if ( movie.paused() )
+            movie.unpause();
         else
-            movie.pause();
+            movie.pause();
         repaint();
     }
 
     void step()
     {
-        movie.step();
+        movie.step();
         repaint();
     }
 
     void step10()
     {
-        movie.step(10);
+        movie.step(10);
         repaint();
     }
 
 private slots:
-    void movieUpdated(const TQRect& area)
+    void movieUpdated(const TQRect& area)
     {
         if (!isVisible())
             show();
 
         // The given area of the movie has changed.
 
-        TQRect r = contentsRect();
+        TQRect r = contentsRect();
 
-        if ( r.size() != movie.framePixmap().size() ) {
+        if ( r.size() != movie.framePixmap().size() ) {
             // Need to scale - redraw whole frame.
             repaint( r );
         } else {
             // Only redraw the changed area of the frame
-            repaint( area.x()+r.x(), area.y()+r.x(),
-                     area.width(), area.height() );
+            repaint( area.x()+r.x(), area.y()+r.x(),
+                     area.width(), area.height() );
         }
     }
 
-    void movieResized(const TQSize& size)
+    void movieResized(const TQSize& size)
     {
         // The movie changed size, probably from its initial zero size.
 
         int fw = frameWidth();
-        sh = TQSize( size.width() + fw*2, size.height() + fw*2 );
-        updateGeometry();
-        if ( parentWidget() && parentWidget()->isHidden() )
-            parentWidget()->show();
+        sh = TQSize( size.width() + fw*2, size.height() + fw*2 );
+        updateGeometry();
+        if ( parentWidget() && parentWidget()->isHidden() )
+            parentWidget()->show();
     }
 
     void movieStatus(int status)
@@ -225,46 +225,46 @@ private slots:
         // The movie has sent us a status message.
 
         if (status < 0) {
-            TQString msg;
-            msg.sprintf("Could not play movie \"%s\"", (const char*)filename);
-            TQMessageBox::warning(this, "movies", msg);
-            parentWidget()->close();
+            TQString msg;
+            msg.sprintf("Could not play movie \"%s\"", (const char*)filename);
+            TQMessageBox::warning(this, "movies", msg);
+            parentWidget()->close();
         } else if (status == TQMovie::Paused || status == TQMovie::EndOfMovie) {
-            repaint(); // Ensure status text is displayed
+            repaint(); // Ensure status text is displayed
         }
     }
 };
 
-class MoviePlayer : public TQVBox {
+class MoviePlayer : public TQVBox {
     MovieScreen* movie;
 public:
     MoviePlayer(const char* fname, TQMovie m, TQWidget* p=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0) :
-        TQVBox(p,name,f)
+        TQVBox(p,name,f)
     {
         movie = new MovieScreen(fname, m, this);
-        TQHBox* hb = new TQHBox(this);
-        TQPushButton* btn;
-        btn = new TQPushButton("<<", hb);
-        connect(btn, SIGNAL(clicked()), movie, SLOT(restart()));
-        btn = new TQPushButton("||", hb);
-        connect(btn, SIGNAL(clicked()), movie, SLOT(togglePause()));
-        btn = new TQPushButton(">|", hb);
-        connect(btn, SIGNAL(clicked()), movie, SLOT(step()));
-        btn = new TQPushButton(">>|", hb);
-        connect(btn, SIGNAL(clicked()), movie, SLOT(step10()));
+        TQHBox* hb = new TQHBox(this);
+        TQPushButton* btn;
+        btn = new TQPushButton("<<", hb);
+        connect(btn, SIGNAL(clicked()), movie, SLOT(restart()));
+        btn = new TQPushButton("||", hb);
+        connect(btn, SIGNAL(clicked()), movie, SLOT(togglePause()));
+        btn = new TQPushButton(">|", hb);
+        connect(btn, SIGNAL(clicked()), movie, SLOT(step()));
+        btn = new TQPushButton(">>|", hb);
+        connect(btn, SIGNAL(clicked()), movie, SLOT(step10()));
     }
 };
 
 
 // A TQFileDialog that chooses movies.
 //
-class MovieStarter: public TQFileDialog {
+class MovieStarter: public TQFileDialog {
     Q_OBJECT
 public:
     MovieStarter(const char *dir);
 
 public slots:
-    void startMovie(const TQString& filename);
+    void startMovie(const TQString& filename);
     // TQDialog's method - normally closes the file dialog.
     // We want it left open, and we want Cancel to quit everything.
     void done( int r );
@@ -272,28 +272,28 @@ public slots:
 
 
 MovieStarter::MovieStarter(const char *dir)
-    : TQFileDialog(dir, "*.gif *.mng")
+    : TQFileDialog(dir, "*.gif *.mng")
 {
     //behave as in getOpenFilename
-    setMode( ExistingFile );
+    setMode( ExistingFile );
     // When a file is selected, show it as a movie.
-    connect(this, SIGNAL(fileSelected(const TQString&)),
-            this, SLOT(startMovie(const TQString&)));
+    connect(this, SIGNAL(fileSelected(const TQString&)),
+            this, SLOT(startMovie(const TQString&)));
 }
 
 
-void MovieStarter::startMovie(const TQString& filename)
+void MovieStarter::startMovie(const TQString& filename)
 {
     if ( filename ) // Start a new movie - have it delete when closed.
         (new MoviePlayer( filename, TQMovie(filename), 0, 0,
                                WDestructiveClose))->show();
 }
 
-void MovieStarter::done( int r )
+void MovieStarter::done( int r )
 {
     if (r != Accepted)
-        qApp->quit(); // end on Cancel
-    setResult( r );
+        qApp->quit(); // end on Cancel
+    setResult( r );
 
     // And don't hide.
 }
@@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ void MovieStarter::startMovie(const TQ
 
 int main(int argc, char **argv)
 {
-    TQApplication a(argc, argv);
+    TQApplication a(argc, argv);
 
     if (argc > 1) {
         // Commandline mode - show movies given on the command line
@@ -317,16 +317,16 @@ int main(int argc, char **argv)
                 (void)new MovieScreen(argv[arg], TQMovie(argv[arg]), 0, 0,
                                       TQt::WDestructiveClose);
         }
-        TQObject::connect(qApp, SIGNAL(lastWindowClosed()), qApp, SLOT(quit()));
+        TQObject::connect(qApp, SIGNAL(lastWindowClosed()), qApp, SLOT(quit()));
     } else {
         // "GUI" mode - open a chooser for movies
         //
         MovieStarter* fd = new MovieStarter(".");
-        fd->show();
+        fd->show();
     }
 
     // Go!
-    return a.exec();
+    return a.exec();
 }
 
 #include "main.moc"
diff --git a/doc/html/multimedia.html b/doc/html/multimedia.html
index c59b7e637..4d8fcc2e7 100644
--- a/doc/html/multimedia.html
+++ b/doc/html/multimedia.html
@@ -39,8 +39,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
    • TQImageDecoderIncremental image decoder for all supported image formats
 
    TQImageFormatIncremental image decoder for a specific image format
 
    TQImageFormatTypeFactory that makes TQImageFormat objects
-
    TQMovieIncremental loading of animations or images, signalling as it progresses
-
    TQSoundAccess to the platform audio facilities
+
    TQMovieIncremental loading of animations or images, signalling as it progresses
+
    TQSoundAccess to the platform audio facilities
 
    
 
 
    
diff --git a/doc/html/netscape-plugin.html b/doc/html/netscape-plugin.html
index 7430efc60..ff72f4d4e 100644
--- a/doc/html/netscape-plugin.html
+++ b/doc/html/netscape-plugin.html
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 that can be used on both Unix/Linux and MS-Windows, in Netscape,
 Mozilla, and any other web browser supporting Netscape's LiveConnect
 protocol. Modern versions of MSIE do not support this protocol. Use
-the ActiveTQt Framework to develop plugins for these browsers.
+the ActiveTQt Framework to develop plugins for these browsers.
 
     
     Information
 
    
 
     The Netscape Plugin Extension consists of the follow classes:
diff --git a/doc/html/network.html b/doc/html/network.html
index 5d395af9c..c7bd4013b 100644
--- a/doc/html/network.html
+++ b/doc/html/network.html
@@ -53,34 +53,34 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
     The network module offers classes to make network programming easier
 and portable. Essentially, there are three sets of classes, first low
-level classes like TQSocket, TQServerSocket, TQDns, etc. which
+level classes like TQSocket, TQServerSocket, TQDns, etc. which
 allow you to work in a portable way with TCP/IP sockets. In addition,
-there are classes like TQNetworkProtocol, TQNetworkOperation in
+there are classes like TQNetworkProtocol, TQNetworkOperation in
 the TQt base library, which provide an abstract layer for implementing
-network protocols and TQUrlOperator which operates on such network
+network protocols and TQUrlOperator which operates on such network
 protocols. Finally the third set of network classes are the passive
-ones, specifically TQUrl and TQUrlInfo which do URL parsing and
+ones, specifically TQUrl and TQUrlInfo which do URL parsing and
 similar.
-
     The first set of classes (TQSocket, TQServerSocket, TQDns, TQFtp, etc.) are included in TQt's "network" module.
-
     The TQSocket classes are not directly related to the TQNetwork classes,
+
     The first set of classes (TQSocket, TQServerSocket, TQDns, TQFtp, etc.) are included in TQt's "network" module.
+
     The TQSocket classes are not directly related to the TQNetwork classes,
 but TQSocket should and will be used for implementing network
 protocols, which are directly related to the TQNetwork classes. For
-example, the TQFtp class (which implements the FTP protocol) uses
+example, the TQFtp class (which implements the FTP protocol) uses
 TQSockets. But TQSockets don't need to be used for protocol
-implementations, e.g. TQLocalFs (which is an implementation of the
-local filesystem as network protocol) uses TQDir and doesn't use
+implementations, e.g. TQLocalFs (which is an implementation of the
+local filesystem as network protocol) uses TQDir and doesn't use
 TQSocket. Using TQNetworkProtocols you can implement everything which
 fits into a hierarchical structure and can be accessed using URLs.
 This could be, for example, a protocol which can read pictures from a
 digital camera using a serial connection.
-
     
     Working Network Protocol independently with TQUrlOperator and TQNetworkOperation
+
     
     Working Network Protocol independently with TQUrlOperator and TQNetworkOperation
 
    
 
     It is quite easy to just use existing network protocol implementations
 and operate on URLs. For example, downloading a file from an FTP
 server to the local filesystem can be done with following code:
 
     
    -    TQUrlOperator op;
-    op.copy( "ftp://ftp.trolltech.com/qt/source/qt-2.1.0.tar.gz", "file:/tmp", FALSE );
+    TQUrlOperator op;
+    op.copy( "ftp://ftp.trolltech.com/qt/source/qt-2.1.0.tar.gz", "file:/tmp", FALSE );
 
    
  
 
     And that's all! Of course an implementation of the FTP protocol has to
@@ -90,11 +90,11 @@ later.
 renaming, etc. For example, to create a folder on a private FTP
 account do
 
     
    -    TQUrlOperator op( "ftp://username:password@host.domain.no/home/username" );
-    op.mkdir( "New Directory" );
+    TQUrlOperator op( "ftp://username:password@host.domain.no/home/username" );
+    op.mkdir( "New Directory" );
 
    
  
-
     To see all available operations, look at the TQUrlOperator class
+
     To see all available operations, look at the TQUrlOperator class
 documentation.
 
     Since networking works asynchronously, the function call for an
 operation will normally return before the operation has been
@@ -105,12 +105,12 @@ all the information about the operation.
 
     For example, TQNetworkOperation has a method which returns the state
 of this operation. Using this you can find out the state of the
 operation at any time. The object also makes available the arguments
-you passed to the TQUrlOperator method, the type of the operation
+you passed to the TQUrlOperator method, the type of the operation
 and some more information. For more details see the class
 documentation of TQNetworkOperation.
-
     The TQUrlOperator emits signals to inform you about the progress of
-the operations. As you can call many methods which operate on a TQUrlOperator's URL, it queues up all the operations. So you can't know
-which operation the TQUrlOperator just processed. Clearly you will
+
     The TQUrlOperator emits signals to inform you about the progress of
+the operations. As you can call many methods which operate on a TQUrlOperator's URL, it queues up all the operations. So you can't know
+which operation the TQUrlOperator just processed. Clearly you will
 want to know which operation just took place, so each signal's last
 argument is a pointer to the TQNetworkOperation object which was
 just processed and which caused the signal to be emitted.
@@ -119,8 +119,8 @@ this makes sense), and some of them send some signals during
 processing. All operations send a finished() signal after they are
 done. To find that out if an operation finished successfully you can
 use the TQNetworkOperation pointer you got with the finished()
-signal. If TQNetworkOperation::state() equals TQNetworkProtocol::StDone the operation finished successfully, if it is
-TQNetworkProtocol::StFailed the operation failed.
+signal. If TQNetworkOperation::state() equals TQNetworkProtocol::StDone the operation finished successfully, if it is
+TQNetworkProtocol::StFailed the operation failed.
 
     Example: A slot which you might connect to the 
 TQUrlOperator::finished( TQNetworkOperation * )
 
    @@ -129,9 +129,9 @@ void MyClass::slotOperationFinished( TQNetworkO
     switch ( op->operation() ) {
     case TQNetworkProtocol::OpMkDir: 
         if ( op->state() == TQNetworkProtocol::StFailed )
-            qDebug( "Couldn't create directory %s", op->arg( 0 ).latin1() );
+            qDebug( "Couldn't create directory %s", op->arg( 0 ).latin1() );
         else
-            qDebug( "Successfully created directory %s", op->arg( 0 ).latin1() );
+            qDebug( "Successfully created directory %s", op->arg( 0 ).latin1() );
         break;
     // ... and so on
     }
@@ -144,49 +144,49 @@ on a FTP server):
 
     
     TQUrlOperator op;
 
-MyClass::MyClass() : TQObject(), op( "ftp://ftp.trolltech.com" )
+MyClass::MyClass() : TQObject(), op( "ftp://ftp.trolltech.com" )
 {
-    connect( &op, SIGNAL( newChildren( const TQValueList<TQUrlInfo> &, TQNetworkOperation * ) ),
-             this, SLOT( slotInsertEntries( const TQValueList<TQUrlInfo> &, TQNetworkOperation * ) ) );
+    connect( &op, SIGNAL( newChildren( const TQValueList<TQUrlInfo> &, TQNetworkOperation * ) ),
+             this, SLOT( slotInsertEntries( const TQValueList<TQUrlInfo> &, TQNetworkOperation * ) ) );
     connect( &op, SIGNAL( start( TQNetworkOperation * ) ),
              this, SLOT( slotStart( TQNetworkOperation *) ) );
     connect( &op, SIGNAL( finished( TQNetworkOperation * ) ),
              this, SLOT( slotFinished( TQNetworkOperation *) ) );
 }
 
-void MyClass::slotInsertEntries( const TQValueList<TQUrlInfo> &info, TQNetworkOperation * )
+void MyClass::slotInsertEntries( const TQValueList<TQUrlInfo> &info, TQNetworkOperation * )
 {
-    TQValueList<TQUrlInfo>::ConstIterator it = info.begin();
-    for ( ; it != info.end(); ++it ) {
-        const TQUrlInfo &inf = *it;
-        qDebug( "Name: %s, Size: %d, Last Modified: %s",
-            inf.name().latin1(), inf.size(), inf.lastModified().toString().latin1() );
+    TQValueList<TQUrlInfo>::ConstIterator it = info.begin();
+    for ( ; it != info.end(); ++it ) {
+        const TQUrlInfo &inf = *it;
+        qDebug( "Name: %s, Size: %d, Last Modified: %s",
+            inf.name().latin1(), inf.size(), inf.lastModified().toString().latin1() );
     }
 }
 
 void MyClass::slotStart( TQNetworkOperation * )
 {
-    qDebug( "Start reading '%s'", op.toString().latin1() );
+    qDebug( "Start reading '%s'", op.toString().latin1() );
 }
 
 void MyClass::slotFinished( TQNetworkOperation *operation )
 {
     if ( operation->operation() == TQNetworkProtocol::OpListChildren ) {
         if ( operation->state() == TQNetworkProtocol::StFailed )
-            qDebug( "Couldn't read '%s'! Following error occurred: %s",
+            qDebug( "Couldn't read '%s'! Following error occurred: %s",
                 op.toString().latin1(), operation->protocolDetail().latin1() );
         else
-            qDebug( "Finished reading '%s'!", op.toString().latin1() );
+            qDebug( "Finished reading '%s'!", op.toString().latin1() );
     }
 }
 
 
    
  
-
     These examples demonstrate now how to use the TQUrlOperator and TQNetworkOperations. The network extension also contains useful example
+
     These examples demonstrate now how to use the TQUrlOperator and TQNetworkOperations. The network extension also contains useful example
 code.
 
     
     Implementing your own Network Protocol
 
    
-
     TQNetworkProtocol provides a base class for implementations
+
     TQNetworkProtocol provides a base class for implementations
 of network protocols and an architecture for the a dynamic
 registration and de-registration of network protocols. If you use this
 architecture you don't need to care about asynchronous programming, as
@@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ hierarchical structure and accessed via URLs, can be implemented as
 network protocol and easily used in TQt. This is not limited to
 filesystems only!
 
     To implement a network protocol create a class derived from
-TQNetworkProtocol.
+TQNetworkProtocol.
 
     Other classes will use this network protocol implementation
 to operate on it. So you should reimplement following protected members
 
     
    @@ -214,9 +214,9 @@ to operate on it. So you should reimplement following protected members
 
     Some notes on reimplementing these methods: You always get a pointer
 to a TQNetworkOperation as argument. This pointer holds all the
 information about the operation in the current state. If you start
-processing such an operation, set the state to TQNetworkProtocol::StInProgress. If you finished processing the
-operation, set the state to TQNetworkProtocol::StDone if it was
-successful or TQNetworkProtocol::StFailed if an error occurred. If
+processing such an operation, set the state to TQNetworkProtocol::StInProgress. If you finished processing the
+operation, set the state to TQNetworkProtocol::StDone if it was
+successful or TQNetworkProtocol::StFailed if an error occurred. If
 an error occurred you must set an error code (see
 TQNetworkOperation::setErrorCode()) and if you know some details
 (e.g. an error message) you can also set this message to the operation
@@ -269,10 +269,10 @@ to the user.
 
 
 
     And remember, always emit the finished() signal at the end!
-
     For more details about these signals' arguments look at the TQNetworkProtocol class documentation.
+
     For more details about these signals' arguments look at the TQNetworkProtocol class documentation.
 
     Here is a list of which TQNetworkOperation arguments you can get and
 which you must set in which function:
-
     (To get the URL on which you should work, use the TQNetworkProtocol::url() method which returns a pointer to the URL
+
     (To get the URL on which you should work, use the TQNetworkProtocol::url() method which returns a pointer to the URL
 operator. Using that you can get the path, host, name filter, etc.)
 
     
    
  
-
     That's all. The connection to the TQUrlOperator and so on is done
+
     That's all. The connection to the TQUrlOperator and so on is done
 automatically. Additionally, if the error was really bad so that no
 more operations can be done in the current state (e.g. if the host
 couldn't be found), call TQNetworkProtocol::clearOperationStack() before emitting finished().
-
     Ideally you should use one of the predefined error codes of TQNetworkProtocol. If this is not possible, you can add own error codes
+
     Ideally you should use one of the predefined error codes of TQNetworkProtocol. If this is not possible, you can add own error codes
 - they are just normal ints. Just be careful that the value of the
 error code doesn't conflict with an existing one.
 
     An example to look at is in qt/examples/network/ftpclient.
 This is the implementation of a fairly complete FTP client, which
 supports uploading and downloading files, making directories, etc.,
 all done using TQUrlOperators.
-
     You might also like to look at TQFtp (in qt/src/network/qftp.cpp) or at
+
     You might also like to look at TQFtp (in qt/src/network/qftp.cpp) or at
 the example in qt/examples/network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
 
     
 
diff --git a/doc/html/networkprotocol-example.html b/doc/html/networkprotocol-example.html
index 97473a376..087225691 100644
--- a/doc/html/networkprotocol-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/networkprotocol-example.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
  
 
     
-
     This example shows how to implement your own TQNetworkProtocol. The
+
     This example shows how to implement your own TQNetworkProtocol. The
 protocol that was chosen for this example is NTTP. Please note that this
 implementation is very simple since it is designed to be an example. It
 should not be used as a real NNTP implemention.
@@ -52,10 +52,10 @@ should not be used as a real NNTP implemention.
 #ifndef NNTP_H
 #define NNTP_H
 
-#include <qsocket.h>
-#include <qnetworkprotocol.h>
+#include <ntqsocket.h>
+#include <ntqnetworkprotocol.h>
 
-class Nntp : public TQNetworkProtocol
+class Nntp : public TQNetworkProtocol
 {
     Q_OBJECT
 
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ protected:
     virtual void operationListChildren( TQNetworkOperation *op );
     virtual void operationGet( TQNetworkOperation *op );
 
-    TQSocket *commandSocket;
+    TQSocket *commandSocket;
     bool connectionReady;
     bool readGroups;
     bool readArticle;
@@ -104,27 +104,27 @@ protected slots:
 *****************************************************************************/
 
 #include "nntp.h"
-#include <qurlinfo.h>
+#include <ntqurlinfo.h>
 #include <stdlib.h>
-#include <qurloperator.h>
-#include <qstringlist.h>
-#include <qregexp.h>
+#include <ntqurloperator.h>
+#include <ntqstringlist.h>
+#include <ntqregexp.h>
 
 Nntp::Nntp()
-    : TQNetworkProtocol(), connectionReady( FALSE ),
+    : TQNetworkProtocol(), connectionReady( FALSE ),
       readGroups( FALSE ), readArticle( FALSE )
 {
     // create the command socket and connect to its signals
-    commandSocket = new TQSocket( this );
-    connect( commandSocket, SIGNAL( hostFound() ),
+    commandSocket = new TQSocket( this );
+    connect( commandSocket, SIGNAL( hostFound() ),
              this, SLOT( hostFound() ) );
-    connect( commandSocket, SIGNAL( connected() ),
+    connect( commandSocket, SIGNAL( connected() ),
              this, SLOT( connected() ) );
-    connect( commandSocket, SIGNAL( connectionClosed() ),
+    connect( commandSocket, SIGNAL( connectionClosed() ),
              this, SLOT( closed() ) );
-    connect( commandSocket, SIGNAL( readyRead() ),
+    connect( commandSocket, SIGNAL( readyRead() ),
              this, SLOT( readyRead() ) );
-    connect( commandSocket, SIGNAL( error( int ) ),
+    connect( commandSocket, SIGNAL( error( int ) ),
              this, SLOT( error( int ) ) );
 }
 
@@ -134,77 +134,77 @@ Nntp::~Nntp()
     delete commandSocket;
 }
 
-void Nntp::operationListChildren( TQNetworkOperation * )
+void Nntp::operationListChildren( TQNetworkOperation * )
 {
     // create a command
-    TQString path = url()->path(), cmd;
-    if ( path.isEmpty() || path == "/" ) {
+    TQString path = url()->path(), cmd;
+    if ( path.isEmpty() || path == "/" ) {
         // if the path is empty or we are in the root dir,
         // we want to read the list of available newsgroups
         cmd = "list newsgroups\r\n";
-    } else if ( url()->isDir() ) {
+    } else if ( url()->isDir() ) {
         // if the path is a directory (in our case a news group)
         // we want to list the articles of this group
-        path = path.replace( "/", "" );
+        path = path.replace( "/", "" );
         cmd = "listgroup " + path + "\r\n";
     } else
         return;
 
     // write the command to the socket
-    commandSocket->writeBlock( cmd.latin1(), cmd.length() );
+    commandSocket->writeBlock( cmd.latin1(), cmd.length() );
     readGroups = TRUE;
 }
 
-void Nntp::operationGet( TQNetworkOperation *op )
+void Nntp::operationGet( TQNetworkOperation *op )
 {
     // get the dirPath of the URL (this is our news group)
     // and the filename (which is the article we want to read)
-    TQUrl u( op->arg( 0 ) );
-    TQString dirPath = u.dirPath(), file = u.fileName();
-    dirPath = dirPath.replace( "/", "" );
+    TQUrl u( op->arg( 0 ) );
+    TQString dirPath = u.dirPath(), file = u.fileName();
+    dirPath = dirPath.replace( "/", "" );
 
     // go to the group in which the article is
-    TQString cmd;
+    TQString cmd;
     cmd = "group " + dirPath + "\r\n";
-    commandSocket->writeBlock( cmd.latin1(), cmd.length() );
+    commandSocket->writeBlock( cmd.latin1(), cmd.length() );
 
     // read the head of the article
     cmd = "article " + file + "\r\n";
-    commandSocket->writeBlock( cmd.latin1(), cmd.length() );
+    commandSocket->writeBlock( cmd.latin1(), cmd.length() );
     readArticle = TRUE;
 }
 
-bool Nntp::checkConnection( TQNetworkOperation * )
+bool Nntp::checkConnection( TQNetworkOperation * )
 {
     // we are connected, return TRUE
-    if ( commandSocket->isOpen() && connectionReady )
+    if ( commandSocket->isOpen() && connectionReady )
         return TRUE;
 
     // seems that there is no chance to connect
-    if ( commandSocket->isOpen() )
+    if ( commandSocket->isOpen() )
         return FALSE;
 
     // don't call connectToHost() if we are already trying to connect
-    if ( commandSocket->state() == TQSocket::Connecting )
+    if ( commandSocket->state() == TQSocket::Connecting )
         return FALSE;
 
     // start connecting
     connectionReady = FALSE;
-    commandSocket->connectToHost( url()->host(),
-                                  url()->port() != -1 ? url()->port() : 119 );
+    commandSocket->connectToHost( url()->host(),
+                                  url()->port() != -1 ? url()->port() : 119 );
     return FALSE;
 }
 
 void Nntp::close()
 {
     // close the command socket
-    if ( commandSocket->isOpen() ) {
-        commandSocket->writeBlock( "quit\r\n", strlen( "quit\r\n" ) );
-        commandSocket->close();
+    if ( commandSocket->isOpen() ) {
+        commandSocket->writeBlock( "quit\r\n", strlen( "quit\r\n" ) );
+        commandSocket->close();
     }
 }
 
-int Nntp::supportedOperations() const
+int Nntp::supportedOperations() const
 {
     // we only support listing children and getting data
     return OpListChildren | OpGet;
@@ -212,24 +212,24 @@ void Nntp::close()
 
 void Nntp::hostFound()
 {
-    if ( url() )
-        emit connectionStateChanged( ConHostFound, tr( "Host %1 found" ).arg( url()->host() ) );
+    if ( url() )
+        emit connectionStateChanged( ConHostFound, tr( "Host %1 found" ).arg( url()->host() ) );
     else
         emit connectionStateChanged( ConHostFound, tr( "Host found" ) );
 }
 
 void Nntp::connected()
 {
-    if ( url() )
-        emit connectionStateChanged( ConConnected, tr( "Connected to host %1" ).arg( url()->host() ) );
+    if ( url() )
+        emit connectionStateChanged( ConConnected, tr( "Connected to host %1" ).arg( url()->host() ) );
     else
         emit connectionStateChanged( ConConnected, tr( "Connected to host" ) );
 }
 
 void Nntp::closed()
 {
-    if ( url() )
-        emit connectionStateChanged( ConClosed, tr( "Connection to %1 closed" ).arg( url()->host() ) );
+    if ( url() )
+        emit connectionStateChanged( ConClosed, tr( "Connection to %1 closed" ).arg( url()->host() ) );
     else
         emit connectionStateChanged( ConClosed, tr( "Connection closed" ) );
 }
@@ -251,58 +251,58 @@ void Nntp::readyRead()
     }
 
     // read the new data from the socket
-    TQCString s;
-    s.resize( commandSocket->bytesAvailable() + 1 );
-    commandSocket->readBlock( s.data(), commandSocket->bytesAvailable() );
+    TQCString s;
+    s.resize( commandSocket->bytesAvailable() + 1 );
+    commandSocket->readBlock( s.data(), commandSocket->bytesAvailable() );
 
     if ( !url() )
         return;
 
     // of the code of the server response was 200, we know that the
     // server is ready to get commands from us now
-    if ( s.left( 3 ) == "200" )
+    if ( s.left( 3 ) == "200" )
         connectionReady = TRUE;
 }
 
 void Nntp::parseGroups()
 {
-    if ( !commandSocket->canReadLine() )
+    if ( !commandSocket->canReadLine() )
         return;
 
     // read one line after the other
-    while ( commandSocket->canReadLine() ) {
-        TQString s = commandSocket->readLine();
+    while ( commandSocket->canReadLine() ) {
+        TQString s = commandSocket->readLine();
 
         // if the  line starts with a dot, all groups or articles have been listed,
         // so we finished processing the listChildren() command
         if ( s[ 0 ] == '.' ) {
             readGroups = FALSE;
-            operationInProgress()->setState( StDone );
-            emit finished( operationInProgress() );
+            operationInProgress()->setState( StDone );
+            emit finished( operationInProgress() );
             return;
         }
 
         // if the code of the server response is 215 or 211
         // the next line will be the first group or article (depending on what we read).
         // So let others know that we start reading now...
-        if ( s.left( 3 ) == "215" || s.left( 3 ) == "211" ) {
-            operationInProgress()->setState( StInProgress );
-            emit start( operationInProgress() );
+        if ( s.left( 3 ) == "215" || s.left( 3 ) == "211" ) {
+            operationInProgress()->setState( StInProgress );
+            emit start( operationInProgress() );
             continue;
         }
 
         // parse the line and create a TQUrlInfo object
         // which describes the child (group or article)
-        bool tab = s.find( '\t' ) != -1;
-        TQString group = s.mid( 0, s.find( tab ? '\t' : ' ' ) );
-        TQUrlInfo inf;
-        inf.setName( group );
-        TQString path = url()->path();
-        inf.setDir( path.isEmpty() || path == "/" );
-        inf.setSymLink( FALSE );
-        inf.setFile( !inf.isDir() );
-        inf.setWritable( FALSE );
-        inf.setReadable( TRUE );
+        bool tab = s.find( '\t' ) != -1;
+        TQString group = s.mid( 0, s.find( tab ? '\t' : ' ' ) );
+        TQUrlInfo inf;
+        inf.setName( group );
+        TQString path = url()->path();
+        inf.setDir( path.isEmpty() || path == "/" );
+        inf.setSymLink( FALSE );
+        inf.setFile( !inf.isDir() );
+        inf.setWritable( FALSE );
+        inf.setReadable( TRUE );
 
         // let others know about our new child
         emit newChild( inf, operationInProgress() );
@@ -312,26 +312,26 @@ void Nntp::parseGroups()
 
 void Nntp::parseArticle()
 {
-    if ( !commandSocket->canReadLine() )
+    if ( !commandSocket->canReadLine() )
         return;
 
     // read an article one line after the other
-    while ( commandSocket->canReadLine() ) {
-        TQString s = commandSocket->readLine();
+    while ( commandSocket->canReadLine() ) {
+        TQString s = commandSocket->readLine();
 
         // if the  line starts with a dot, we finished reading something
         if ( s[ 0 ] == '.' ) {
             readArticle = FALSE;
-            operationInProgress()->setState( StDone );
-            emit finished( operationInProgress() );
+            operationInProgress()->setState( StDone );
+            emit finished( operationInProgress() );
             return;
         }
 
-        if ( s.right( 1 ) == "\n" )
-            s.remove( s.length() - 1, 1 );
+        if ( s.right( 1 ) == "\n" )
+            s.remove( s.length() - 1, 1 );
 
         // emit the new data of the article which we read
-        emit data( TQCString( s.ascii() ), operationInProgress() );
+        emit data( TQCString( s.ascii() ), operationInProgress() );
     }
 }
 
@@ -340,13 +340,13 @@ void Nntp::error( int code )
     if ( code == TQSocket::ErrHostNotFound ||
          code == TQSocket::ErrConnectionRefused ) {
         // this signal is called if connecting to the server failed
-        if ( operationInProgress() ) {
-            TQString msg = tr( "Host not found or couldn't connect to: \n" + url()->host() );
-            operationInProgress()->setState( StFailed );
-            operationInProgress()->setProtocolDetail( msg );
-            operationInProgress()->setErrorCode( (int)ErrHostNotFound );
-            clearOperationQueue();
-            emit finished( operationInProgress() );
+        if ( operationInProgress() ) {
+            TQString msg = tr( "Host not found or couldn't connect to: \n" + url()->host() );
+            operationInProgress()->setState( StFailed );
+            operationInProgress()->setProtocolDetail( msg );
+            operationInProgress()->setErrorCode( (int)ErrHostNotFound );
+            clearOperationQueue();
+            emit finished( operationInProgress() );
         }
     }
 }
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqaccel.html b/doc/html/ntqaccel.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9c8f02f4b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqaccel.html
@@ -0,0 +1,337 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQAccel Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQAccel Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQAccel class handles keyboard accelerator and shortcut keys.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqaccel.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQAccel ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQAccel ( TQWidget * watch, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • ~TQAccel ()
      • 
+
    • bool isEnabled () const
      • 
+
    • void setEnabled ( bool enable )
      • 
+
    • uint count () const
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQKeySequence & key, int id = -1 )
      • 
+
    • void removeItem ( int id )
      • 
+
    • void clear ()
      • 
+
    • TQKeySequence key ( int id )
      • 
+
    • int findKey ( const TQKeySequence & key ) const
      • 
+
    • bool isItemEnabled ( int id ) const
      • 
+
    • void setItemEnabled ( int id, bool enable )
      • 
+
    • bool connectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
      • 
+
    • bool disconnectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
      • 
+
    • void repairEventFilter ()  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void setWhatsThis ( int id, const TQString & text )
      • 
+
    • TQString whatsThis ( int id ) const
      • 
+
    
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQKeySequence shortcutKey ( const TQString & str )
      • 
+
    • TQString keyToString ( TQKeySequence k )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • TQKeySequence stringToKey ( const TQString & s )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • virtual bool eventFilter ( TQObject *, TQEvent * )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQAccel class handles keyboard accelerator and shortcut keys.
+
     
+
     A keyboard accelerator triggers an action when a certain key
+combination is pressed. The accelerator handles all keyboard
+activity for all the children of one top-level widget, so it is
+not affected by the keyboard focus.
+
     In most cases, you will not need to use this class directly. Use
+the TQAction class to create actions with accelerators that can be
+used in both menus and toolbars. If you're only interested in
+menus use TQMenuData::insertItem() or TQMenuData::setAccel() to make
+accelerators for operations that are also available on menus. Many
+widgets automatically generate accelerators, such as TQButton,
+TQGroupBox, TQLabel (with TQLabel::setBuddy()), TQMenuBar and TQTabBar.
+Example:
+
    +        TQPushButton p( "&Exit", parent ); // automatic shortcut ALT+Key_E
+        TQPopupMenu *fileMenu = new fileMenu( parent );
+        fileMenu->insertItem( "Undo", parent, SLOT(undo()), CTRL+Key_Z );
+    
    
+ 
+
     A TQAccel contains a list of accelerator items that can be
+manipulated using insertItem(), removeItem(), clear(), key() and
+findKey().
+
     Each accelerator item consists of an identifier and a TQKeySequence. A single key sequence consists of a keyboard code
+combined with modifiers (SHIFT, CTRL, ALT or UNICODE_ACCEL). For example, CTRL + Key_P could be a shortcut
+for printing a document. The key codes are listed in ntqnamespace.h. As an alternative, use UNICODE_ACCEL with the
+unicode code point of the character. For example, UNICODE_ACCEL + 'A' gives the same accelerator as Key_A.
+
     When an accelerator key is pressed, the accelerator sends out the
+signal activated() with a number that identifies this particular
+accelerator item. Accelerator items can also be individually
+connected, so that two different keys will activate two different
+slots (see connectItem() and disconnectItem()).
+
     The activated() signal is not emitted when two or more
+accelerators match the same key.  Instead, the first matching
+accelerator sends out the activatedAmbiguously() signal. By
+pressing the key multiple times, users can navigate between all
+matching accelerators. Some standard controls like TQPushButton and
+TQCheckBox connect the activatedAmbiguously() signal to the
+harmless setFocus() slot, whereas activated() is connected to a
+slot invoking the button's action.	Most controls, like TQLabel and
+TQTabBar, treat activated() and activatedAmbiguously() as
+equivalent.
+
     Use setEnabled() to enable or disable all the items in an
+accelerator, or setItemEnabled() to enable or disable individual
+items. An item is active only when both the TQAccel and the item
+itself are enabled.
+
     The function setWhatsThis() specifies a help text that appears
+when the user presses an accelerator key in What's This mode.
+
     The accelerator will be deleted when parent is deleted,
+and will consume relevant key events until then.
+
     Please note that the accelerator
+
    +        accelerator->insertItem( TQKeySequence("M") );
+    
    
+ 
+can be triggered with both the 'M' key, and with Shift+M,
+unless a second accelerator is defined for the Shift+M
+combination.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQAccel *a = new TQAccel( myWindow );        // create accels for myWindow
+        a->connectItem( a->insertItem(Key_P+CTRL), // adds Ctrl+P accelerator
+                        myWindow,                  // connected to myWindow's
+                        SLOT(printDoc()) );        // printDoc() slot
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also TQKeyEvent, TQWidget::keyPressEvent(), TQMenuData::setAccel(), TQButton::accel, TQLabel::setBuddy(), TQKeySequence, GUI Design Handbook: Keyboard Shortcuts, and Miscellaneous Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQAccel::TQAccel ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a TQAccel object called name, with parent parent.
+The accelerator operates on parent.
+
+
    TQAccel::TQAccel ( TQWidget * watch, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a TQAccel object called name, that operates on watch, and is a child of parent.
+
     This constructor is not needed for normal application programming.
+
+
    TQAccel::~TQAccel ()
+
    
+Destroys the accelerator object and frees all allocated resources.
+
+
    void TQAccel::activated ( int id ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when an accelerator key is pressed. id
+is a number that identifies this particular accelerator item.
+
     
    See also activatedAmbiguously().
+
+
    void TQAccel::activatedAmbiguously ( int id ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when an accelerator key is pressed. id
+is a number that identifies this particular accelerator item.
+
     
    See also activated().
+
+
    void TQAccel::clear ()
+
    
+Removes all accelerator items.
+
+
    bool TQAccel::connectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
+
    
+Connects the accelerator item id to the slot member of receiver.
+
     
    +        a->connectItem( 201, mainView, SLOT(quit()) );
+    
    
+ 
+
     Of course, you can also send a signal as member.
+
     Normally accelerators are connected to slots which then receive
+the activated(int id) signal with the id of the accelerator
+item that was activated. If you choose to connect a specific
+accelerator item using this function, the activated() signal is
+emitted if the associated key sequence is pressed but no activated(int id) signal is emitted.
+
     
    See also disconnectItem().
+
+
    Example: t14/gamebrd.cpp.
+
    uint TQAccel::count () const
+
    
+Returns the number of accelerator items in this accelerator.
+
+
    bool TQAccel::disconnectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
+
    
+Disconnects an accelerator item with id id from the function
+called member in the receiver object.
+
     
    See also connectItem().
+
+
    bool TQAccel::eventFilter ( TQObject *, TQEvent * ) [virtual protected]
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+serves no purpose anymore 
+
    Reimplemented from TQObject.
+
    int TQAccel::findKey ( const TQKeySequence & key ) const
+
    
+Returns the identifier of the accelerator item with the key code
+key, or -1 if the item cannot be found.
+
+
    int TQAccel::insertItem ( const TQKeySequence & key, int id = -1 )
+
    
+Inserts an accelerator item and returns the item's identifier.
+
     key is a key code and an optional combination of SHIFT, CTRL
+and ALT. id is the accelerator item id.
+
     If id is negative, then the item will be assigned a unique
+negative identifier less than -1.
+
     
    +        TQAccel *a = new TQAccel( myWindow );        // create accels for myWindow
+        a->insertItem( CTRL + Key_P, 200 );        // Ctrl+P, e.g. to print document
+        a->insertItem( ALT + Key_X, 201 );         // Alt+X, e.g. to quit
+        a->insertItem( UNICODE_ACCEL + 'q', 202 ); // Unicode 'q', e.g. to quit
+        a->insertItem( Key_D );                    // gets a unique negative id < -1
+        a->insertItem( CTRL + SHIFT + Key_P );     // gets a unique negative id < -1
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    Example: t14/gamebrd.cpp.
+
    bool TQAccel::isEnabled () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the accelerator is enabled; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     
    See also setEnabled() and isItemEnabled().
+
+
    bool TQAccel::isItemEnabled ( int id ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the accelerator item with the identifier id is
+enabled. Returns FALSE if the item is disabled or cannot be found.
+
     
    See also setItemEnabled() and isEnabled().
+
+
    TQKeySequence TQAccel::key ( int id )
+
    
+Returns the key sequence of the accelerator item with identifier
+id, or an invalid key sequence (0) if the id cannot be found.
+
+
    TQString TQAccel::keyToString ( TQKeySequence k ) [static]
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Creates an accelerator string for the key k.
+For instance CTRL+Key_O gives "Ctrl+O". The "Ctrl" etc.
+are translated (using TQObject::tr()) in the "TQAccel" context.
+
     The function is superfluous. Cast the TQKeySequence k to a
+TQString for the same effect.
+
+
    void TQAccel::removeItem ( int id )
+
    
+Removes the accelerator item with the identifier id.
+
+
    void TQAccel::repairEventFilter ()
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+serves no purpose anymore 
+
    void TQAccel::setEnabled ( bool enable )
+
    
+Enables the accelerator if enable is TRUE, or disables it if enable is FALSE.
+
     Individual keys can also be enabled or disabled using
+setItemEnabled(). To work, a key must be an enabled item in an
+enabled TQAccel.
+
     
    See also isEnabled() and setItemEnabled().
+
+
    void TQAccel::setItemEnabled ( int id, bool enable )
+
    
+Enables the accelerator item with the identifier id if enable is TRUE, and disables item id if enable is FALSE.
+
     To work, an item must be enabled and be in an enabled TQAccel.
+
     
    See also isItemEnabled() and isEnabled().
+
+
    void TQAccel::setWhatsThis ( int id, const TQString & text )
+
    
+Sets a What's This help text for the accelerator item id to text.
+
     The text will be shown when the application is in What's This mode
+and the user hits the accelerator key.
+
     To set What's This help on a menu item (with or without an
+accelerator key), use TQMenuData::setWhatsThis().
+
     
    See also whatsThis(), TQWhatsThis::inWhatsThisMode(), TQMenuData::setWhatsThis(), and TQAction::whatsThis.
+
+
    TQKeySequence TQAccel::shortcutKey ( const TQString & str ) [static]
+
    
+Returns the shortcut key sequence for str, or an invalid key
+sequence (0) if str has no shortcut sequence.
+
     For example, shortcutKey("E&xit") returns ALT+Key_X,
+shortcutKey("&Quit") returns ALT+Key_Q and shortcutKey("Quit")
+returns 0. (In code that does not inherit the TQt namespace class,
+you must write e.g. TQt::ALT+TQt::Key_Q.)
+
     We provide a list of common accelerators in English. At the time of writing, Microsoft and Open
+Group do not appear to have issued equivalent recommendations for
+other languages.
+
+
    TQKeySequence TQAccel::stringToKey ( const TQString & s ) [static]
+
    This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Returns an accelerator code for the string s. For example
+"Ctrl+O" gives CTRL+UNICODE_ACCEL+'O'. The strings "Ctrl",
+"Shift", "Alt" are recognized, as well as their translated
+equivalents in the "TQAccel" context (using TQObject::tr()). Returns 0
+if s is not recognized.
+
     This function is typically used with tr(), so that accelerator keys can be replaced in
+translations:
+
     
    +    TQPopupMenu *file = new TQPopupMenu( this );
+    file->insertItem( p1, tr("&Open..."), this, SLOT(open()),
+                      TQAccel::stringToKey(tr("Ctrl+O", "File|Open")) );
+  
    
+ 
+
     Notice the "File|Open" translator comment. It is by no means
+necessary, but it provides some context for the human translator.
+
     The function is superfluous. Construct a TQKeySequence from the
+string s for the same effect.
+
     
    See also TQObject::tr() and Internationalization with TQt.
+
+
    Example: i18n/mywidget.cpp.
+
    TQString TQAccel::whatsThis ( int id ) const
+
    
+Returns the What's This help text for the specified item id or
+TQString::null if no text has been specified.
+
     
    See also setWhatsThis().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqaccessible.html b/doc/html/ntqaccessible.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..acccf5f79
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqaccessible.html
@@ -0,0 +1,291 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQAccessible Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQAccessible Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQAccessible class provides enums and static functions
+relating to accessibility.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqaccessible.h>
+
    Inherited by TQAccessibleInterface.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • enum Event { SoundPlayed = 0x0001, Alert = 0x0002, ForegroundChanged = 0x0003, MenuStart = 0x0004, MenuEnd = 0x0005, PopupMenuStart = 0x0006, PopupMenuEnd = 0x0007, ContextHelpStart = 0x000C, ContextHelpEnd = 0x000D, DragDropStart = 0x000E, DragDropEnd = 0x000F, DialogStart = 0x0010, DialogEnd = 0x0011, ScrollingStart = 0x0012, ScrollingEnd = 0x0013, MenuCommand = 0x0018, ObjectCreated = 0x8000, ObjectDestroyed = 0x8001, ObjectShow = 0x8002, ObjectHide = 0x8003, ObjectReorder = 0x8004, Focus = 0x8005, Selection = 0x8006, SelectionAdd = 0x8007, SelectionRemove = 0x8008, SelectionWithin = 0x8009, StateChanged = 0x800A, LocationChanged = 0x800B, NameChanged = 0x800C, DescriptionChanged = 0x800D, ValueChanged = 0x800E, ParentChanged = 0x800F, HelpChanged = 0x80A0, DefaultActionChanged = 0x80B0, AcceleratorChanged = 0x80C0 }
      • 
+
    • enum State { Normal = 0x00000000, Unavailable = 0x00000001, Selected = 0x00000002, Focused = 0x00000004, Pressed = 0x00000008, Checked = 0x00000010, Mixed = 0x00000020, ReadOnly = 0x00000040, HotTracked = 0x00000080, Default = 0x00000100, Expanded = 0x00000200, Collapsed = 0x00000400, Busy = 0x00000800, Floating = 0x00001000, Marqueed = 0x00002000, Animated = 0x00004000, Invisible = 0x00008000, Offscreen = 0x00010000, Sizeable = 0x00020000, Moveable = 0x00040000, SelfVoicing = 0x00080000, Focusable = 0x00100000, Selectable = 0x00200000, Linked = 0x00400000, Traversed = 0x00800000, MultiSelectable = 0x01000000, ExtSelectable = 0x02000000, AlertLow = 0x04000000, AlertMedium = 0x08000000, AlertHigh = 0x10000000, Protected = 0x20000000, Valid = 0x3fffffff }
      • 
+
    • enum Role { NoRole = 0x00000000, TitleBar = 0x00000001, MenuBar = 0x00000002, ScrollBar = 0x00000003, Grip = 0x00000004, Sound = 0x00000005, Cursor = 0x00000006, Caret = 0x00000007, AlertMessage = 0x00000008, Window = 0x00000009, Client = 0x0000000A, PopupMenu = 0x0000000B, MenuItem = 0x0000000C, ToolTip = 0x0000000D, Application = 0x0000000E, Document = 0x0000000F, Pane = 0x00000010, Chart = 0x00000011, Dialog = 0x00000012, Border = 0x00000013, Grouping = 0x00000014, Separator = 0x00000015, ToolBar = 0x00000016, StatusBar = 0x00000017, Table = 0x00000018, ColumnHeader = 0x00000019, RowHeader = 0x0000001A, Column = 0x0000001B, Row = 0x0000001C, Cell = 0x0000001D, Link = 0x0000001E, HelpBalloon = 0x0000001F, Character = 0x00000020, List = 0x00000021, ListItem = 0x00000022, Outline = 0x00000023, OutlineItem = 0x00000024, PageTab = 0x00000025, PropertyPage = 0x00000026, Indicator = 0x00000027, Graphic = 0x00000028, StaticText = 0x00000029, EditableText = 0x0000002A, PushButton = 0x0000002B, CheckBox = 0x0000002C, RadioButton = 0x0000002D, ComboBox = 0x0000002E, DropLest = 0x0000002F, ProgressBar = 0x00000030, Dial = 0x00000031, HotkeyField = 0x00000032, Slider = 0x00000033, SpinBox = 0x00000034, Diagram = 0x00000035, Animation = 0x00000036, Equation = 0x00000037, ButtonDropDown = 0x00000038, ButtonMenu = 0x00000039, ButtonDropGrid = 0x0000003A, Whitespace = 0x0000003B, PageTabList = 0x0000003C, Clock = 0x0000003D }
      • 
+
    • enum NavDirection { NavUp = 0x00000001, NavDown = 0x00000002, NavLeft = 0x00000003, NavRight = 0x00000004, NavNext = 0x00000005, NavPrevious = 0x00000006, NavFirstChild = 0x00000007, NavLastChild = 0x00000008, NavFocusChild = 0x00000009 }
      • 
+
    • enum Text { Name = 0, Description, Value, Help, Accelerator, DefaultAction }
      • 
+
    
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQAccessible class provides enums and static functions
+relating to accessibility.
+
     
+
     Accessibility clients use implementations of the
+TQAccessibleInterface to read the information an accessible object
+exposes, or to call functions to manipulate the accessible object.
+
     
+
     See the plugin documentation for
+more details about how to redistribute TQt plugins.
+
    See also Miscellaneous Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQAccessible::Event
    
+
+
     This enum type defines event types when the state of the
+accessible object has changed. The event types are:
+
      
+
    • TQAccessible::SoundPlayed
+
    • TQAccessible::Alert
+
    • TQAccessible::ForegroundChanged
+
    • TQAccessible::MenuStart
+
    • TQAccessible::MenuEnd
+
    • TQAccessible::PopupMenuStart
+
    • TQAccessible::PopupMenuEnd
+
    • TQAccessible::ContextHelpStart
+
    • TQAccessible::ContextHelpEnd
+
    • TQAccessible::DragDropStart
+
    • TQAccessible::DragDropEnd
+
    • TQAccessible::DialogStart
+
    • TQAccessible::DialogEnd
+
    • TQAccessible::ScrollingStart
+
    • TQAccessible::ScrollingEnd
+
    • TQAccessible::ObjectCreated
+
    • TQAccessible::ObjectDestroyed
+
    • TQAccessible::ObjectShow
+
    • TQAccessible::ObjectHide
+
    • TQAccessible::ObjectReorder
+
    • TQAccessible::Focus
+
    • TQAccessible::Selection
+
    • TQAccessible::SelectionAdd
+
    • TQAccessible::SelectionRemove
+
    • TQAccessible::SelectionWithin
+
    • TQAccessible::StateChanged
+
    • TQAccessible::LocationChanged
+
    • TQAccessible::NameChanged
+
    • TQAccessible::DescriptionChanged
+
    • TQAccessible::ValueChanged
+
    • TQAccessible::ParentChanged
+
    • TQAccessible::HelpChanged
+
    • TQAccessible::DefaultActionChanged
+
    • TQAccessible::AcceleratorChanged
+
    • TQAccessible::MenuCommand
+
    
+
    TQAccessible::NavDirection
    
+
+
     This enum specifies which item to move to when navigating.
+
      
+
    • TQAccessible::NavUp - sibling above
+
    • TQAccessible::NavDown - sibling below
+
    • TQAccessible::NavLeft - left sibling
+
    • TQAccessible::NavRight - right sibling
+
    • TQAccessible::NavNext - next sibling
+
    • TQAccessible::NavPrevious - previous sibling
+
    • TQAccessible::NavFirstChild - first child
+
    • TQAccessible::NavLastChild - last child
+
    • TQAccessible::NavFocusChild - child with focus
+
    
+
    TQAccessible::Role
    
+
+
     This enum defines a number of roles an accessible object can have.
+The roles are:
+
      
+
    • TQAccessible::NoRole
+
    • TQAccessible::TitleBar
+
    • TQAccessible::MenuBar
+
    • TQAccessible::ScrollBar
+
    • TQAccessible::Grip
+
    • TQAccessible::Sound
+
    • TQAccessible::Cursor
+
    • TQAccessible::Caret
+
    • TQAccessible::AlertMessage
+
    • TQAccessible::Window
+
    • TQAccessible::Client
+
    • TQAccessible::PopupMenu
+
    • TQAccessible::MenuItem
+
    • TQAccessible::ToolTip
+
    • TQAccessible::Application
+
    • TQAccessible::Document
+
    • TQAccessible::Pane
+
    • TQAccessible::Chart
+
    • TQAccessible::Dialog
+
    • TQAccessible::Border
+
    • TQAccessible::Grouping
+
    • TQAccessible::Separator
+
    • TQAccessible::ToolBar
+
    • TQAccessible::StatusBar
+
    • TQAccessible::Table
+
    • TQAccessible::ColumnHeader
+
    • TQAccessible::RowHeader
+
    • TQAccessible::Column
+
    • TQAccessible::Row
+
    • TQAccessible::Cell
+
    • TQAccessible::Link
+
    • TQAccessible::HelpBalloon
+
    • TQAccessible::Character
+
    • TQAccessible::List
+
    • TQAccessible::ListItem
+
    • TQAccessible::Outline
+
    • TQAccessible::OutlineItem
+
    • TQAccessible::PageTab
+
    • TQAccessible::PropertyPage
+
    • TQAccessible::Indicator
+
    • TQAccessible::Graphic
+
    • TQAccessible::StaticText
+
    • TQAccessible::EditableText
+
    • TQAccessible::PushButton
+
    • TQAccessible::CheckBox
+
    • TQAccessible::RadioButton
+
    • TQAccessible::ComboBox
+
    • TQAccessible::DropLest
+
    • TQAccessible::ProgressBar
+
    • TQAccessible::Dial
+
    • TQAccessible::HotkeyField
+
    • TQAccessible::Slider
+
    • TQAccessible::SpinBox
+
    • TQAccessible::Diagram
+
    • TQAccessible::Animation
+
    • TQAccessible::Equation
+
    • TQAccessible::ButtonDropDown
+
    • TQAccessible::ButtonMenu
+
    • TQAccessible::ButtonDropGrid
+
    • TQAccessible::Whitespace
+
    • TQAccessible::PageTabList
+
    • TQAccessible::Clock
+
    
+
    TQAccessible::State
    
+
+
     This enum type defines bitflags that can be combined to indicate
+the state of the accessible object. The values are:
+
      
+
    • TQAccessible::Normal
+
    • TQAccessible::Unavailable
+
    • TQAccessible::Selected
+
    • TQAccessible::Focused
+
    • TQAccessible::Pressed
+
    • TQAccessible::Checked
+
    • TQAccessible::Mixed
+
    • TQAccessible::ReadOnly
+
    • TQAccessible::HotTracked
+
    • TQAccessible::Default
+
    • TQAccessible::Expanded
+
    • TQAccessible::Collapsed
+
    • TQAccessible::Busy
+
    • TQAccessible::Floating
+
    • TQAccessible::Marqueed
+
    • TQAccessible::Animated
+
    • TQAccessible::Invisible
+
    • TQAccessible::Offscreen
+
    • TQAccessible::Sizeable
+
    • TQAccessible::Moveable
+
    • TQAccessible::SelfVoicing
+
    • TQAccessible::Focusable
+
    • TQAccessible::Selectable
+
    • TQAccessible::Linked
+
    • TQAccessible::Traversed
+
    • TQAccessible::MultiSelectable
+
    • TQAccessible::ExtSelectable
+
    • TQAccessible::AlertLow
+
    • TQAccessible::AlertMedium
+
    • TQAccessible::AlertHigh
+
    • TQAccessible::Protected
+
    • TQAccessible::Valid
+
    
+
    TQAccessible::Text
    
+
+
     This enum specifies string information that an accessible object
+returns.
+
      
+
    • TQAccessible::Name - The name of the object
+
    • TQAccessible::Description - A short text describing the object
+
    • TQAccessible::Value - The value of the object
+
    • TQAccessible::Help - A longer text giving information about how
+to use the object
+
    • TQAccessible::DefaultAction - The default method to interact with the object
+
    • TQAccessible::Accelerator - The keyboard shortcut that executes the
+default action
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    bool TQAccessible::isActive () [static]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if an accessibility implementation has been requested,
+during the runtime of the application, otherwise returns FALSE. 
+
     Use this function to prevent potentially expensive notifications via
+updateAccessibility().
+
     
+
+
    TQRESULT TQAccessible::queryAccessibleInterface ( TQObject * object, TQAccessibleInterface ** iface ) [static]
+
    
+Sets iface to point to the implementation of the
+TQAccessibleInterface for object, and returns TQS_OK if
+successfull, or sets iface to 0 and returns TQE_NOCOMPONENT if
+no accessibility implementation for object exists.
+
     The function uses the classname of object to find a suitable implementation. If no
+implementation for the object's class is available the function
+tries to find an implementation for the object's parent class.
+
     This function is called to answer an accessibility client's
+request for object information. You should never need to call this
+function yourself.
+
+
    void TQAccessible::updateAccessibility ( TQObject * object, int control, Event reason ) [static]
+
    
+
+
     Notifies accessibility clients about a change in object's
+accessibility information.
+
     reason specifies the cause of the change, for example,
+ValueChange when the position of a slider has been changed. control is the ID of the child element that has changed. When control is 0, the object itself has changed.
+
     Call this function whenever the state of your accessible object or
+one of it's sub-elements has been changed either programmatically
+(e.g. by calling TQLabel::setText()) or by user interaction.
+
     If there are no accessibility tools listening to this event, the
+performance penalty for calling this function is minor, but if determining
+the parameters of the call is expensive you can use isActive() to
+avoid unnecessary performance penalties if no client is listening.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqaction.html b/doc/html/ntqaction.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..909e8b630
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqaction.html
@@ -0,0 +1,520 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQAction Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQAction Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQAction class provides an abstract user interface
+action that can appear both in menus and tool bars.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqaction.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject.
+
    Inherited by TQActionGroup.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQAction ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQAction ( const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQAction ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQAction ( const TQString & text, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = FALSE )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • TQAction ( const TQString & text, const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = FALSE )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • TQAction ( TQObject * parent, const char * name, bool toggle )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • ~TQAction ()
      • 
+
    • virtual void setIconSet ( const TQIconSet & )
      • 
+
    • TQIconSet iconSet () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setText ( const TQString & )
      • 
+
    • TQString text () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setMenuText ( const TQString & )
      • 
+
    • TQString menuText () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setToolTip ( const TQString & )
      • 
+
    • TQString toolTip () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setStatusTip ( const TQString & )
      • 
+
    • TQString statusTip () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setWhatsThis ( const TQString & )
      • 
+
    • TQString whatsThis () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setAccel ( const TQKeySequence & key )
      • 
+
    • TQKeySequence accel () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setToggleAction ( bool )
      • 
+
    • bool isToggleAction () const
      • 
+
    • bool isOn () const
      • 
+
    • bool isEnabled () const
      • 
+
    • bool isVisible () const
      • 
+
    • virtual bool addTo ( TQWidget * w )
      • 
+
    • virtual bool removeFrom ( TQWidget * w )
      • 
+
    
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • TQKeySequence accel - the action's accelerator key
      • 
+
    • bool enabled - whether the action is enabled
      • 
+
    • TQIconSet iconSet - the action's icon
      • 
+
    • TQString menuText - the action's menu text
      • 
+
    • bool on - whether a toggle action is on
      • 
+
    • TQString statusTip - the action's status tip
      • 
+
    • TQString text - the action's descriptive text
      • 
+
    • bool toggleAction - whether the action is a toggle action
      • 
+
    • TQString toolTip - the action's tool tip
      • 
+
    • bool visible - whether the action can be seen (e.g. in menus and toolbars)
      • 
+
    • TQString whatsThis - the action's "What's This?" help text
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • virtual void addedTo ( TQWidget * actionWidget, TQWidget * container )
      • 
+
    • virtual void addedTo ( int index, TQPopupMenu * menu )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQAction class provides an abstract user interface
+action that can appear both in menus and tool bars.
+
     
+
+
+
     In GUI applications many commands can be invoked via a menu
+option, a toolbar button and a keyboard accelerator. Since the
+same action must be performed regardless of how the action was
+invoked, and since the menu and toolbar should be kept in sync, it
+is useful to represent a command as an action. An action can be
+added to a menu and a toolbar and will automatically keep them in
+sync. For example, if the user presses a Bold toolbar button the
+Bold menu item will automatically be checked.
+
     A TQAction may contain an icon, a menu text, an accelerator, a
+status text, a whats this text and a tool tip. Most of these can
+be set in the constructor. They can also be set independently with
+setIconSet(), setText(), setMenuText(), setToolTip(),
+setStatusTip(), setWhatsThis() and setAccel().
+
     An action may be a toggle action e.g. a Bold toolbar button, or a
+command action, e.g. 'Open File' to invoke an open file dialog.
+Toggle actions emit the toggled() signal when their state changes.
+Both command and toggle actions emit the activated() signal when
+they are invoked. Use setToggleAction() to set an action's toggled
+status. To see if an action is a toggle action use
+isToggleAction(). A toggle action may be "on", isOn() returns
+TRUE, or "off", isOn() returns FALSE.
+
     Actions are added to widgets (menus or toolbars) using addTo(),
+and removed using removeFrom().
+
     Once a TQAction has been created it should be added to the relevant
+menu and toolbar and then connected to the slot which will perform
+the action. For example:
+
     
+
+
            fileOpenAction = new TQAction( TQPixmap( fileopen ), "&Open...",
+                                      CTRL+Key_O, this, "open" );
+        connect( fileOpenAction, SIGNAL( activated() ) , this, SLOT( choose() ) );
+
    
+
     We create a "File Save" action with a menu text of "&Save" and
+Ctrl+S as the keyboard accelerator. We connect the
+fileSaveAction's activated() signal to our own save() slot. Note
+that at this point there is no menu or toolbar action, we'll add
+them next:
+
     
            TQToolBar * fileTools = new TQToolBar( this, "file operations" );
+
            fileSaveAction->addTo( fileTools );
+
            TQPopupMenu * file = new TQPopupMenu( this );
+        menuBar()->insertItem( "&File", file );
+
            fileSaveAction->addTo( file );
+
    
+
     We create a toolbar and add our fileSaveAction to it. Similarly we
+create a menu, add a top-level menu item, and add our
+fileSaveAction.
+
     We recommend that actions are created as children of the window
+that they are used in. In most cases actions will be children of
+the application's main window.
+
     To prevent recursion, don't create an action as a child of a
+widget that the action is later added to.
+
    See also Main Window and Related Classes and Basic Widgets.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQAction::TQAction ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs an action called name with parent parent.
+
     If parent is a TQActionGroup, the new action inserts itself into
+parent.
+
     For accelerators and status tips to work, parent must either be
+a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget.
+
     Warning: To prevent recursion, don't create an action as a child
+of a widget that the action is later added to.
+
+
    TQAction::TQAction ( const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+This constructor results in an icon-less action with the the menu
+text menuText and keyboard accelerator accel. It is a child
+of parent and called name.
+
     If  parent is a TQActionGroup, the action automatically becomes
+a member of it.
+
     For accelerators and status tips to work, parent must either be
+a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget.
+
     The action uses a stripped version of menuText (e.g. "&Menu
+Option..." becomes "Menu Option") as descriptive text for
+toolbuttons. You can override this by setting a specific
+description with setText(). The same text and accel will be
+used for tool tips and status tips unless you provide text for
+these using setToolTip() and setStatusTip().
+
     Call setToggleAction(TRUE) to make the action a toggle action.
+
     Warning: To prevent recursion, don't create an action as a child
+of a widget that the action is later added to.
+
+
    TQAction::TQAction ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+This constructor creates an action with the following properties:
+the icon or iconset icon, the menu text menuText and
+keyboard accelerator accel. It is a child of parent and
+called name.
+
     If parent is a TQActionGroup, the action automatically becomes
+a member of it.
+
     For accelerators and status tips to work, parent must either be
+a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget.
+
     The action uses a stripped version of menuText (e.g. "&Menu
+Option..." becomes "Menu Option") as descriptive text for
+toolbuttons. You can override this by setting a specific
+description with setText(). The same text and accel will be
+used for tool tips and status tips unless you provide text for
+these using setToolTip() and setStatusTip().
+
     Call setToggleAction(TRUE) to make the action a toggle action.
+
     Warning: To prevent recursion, don't create an action as a child
+of a widget that the action is later added to.
+
+
    TQAction::TQAction ( const TQString & text, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = FALSE )
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     This constructor creates an action with the following properties:
+the description text, the icon or iconset icon, the menu
+text menuText and keyboard accelerator accel. It is a child
+of parent and called name. If toggle is TRUE the action
+will be a toggle action, otherwise it will be a command action.
+
     If  parent is a TQActionGroup, the action automatically becomes
+a member of it.
+
     For accelerators and status tips to work, parent must either be
+a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget.
+
     The text and accel will be used for tool tips and status
+tips unless you provide specific text for these using setToolTip()
+and setStatusTip().
+
+
    TQAction::TQAction ( const TQString & text, const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = FALSE )
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     This constructor results in an icon-less action with the
+description text, the menu text menuText and the keyboard
+accelerator accel. Its parent is parent and it is called name. If toggle is TRUE the action will be a toggle action,
+otherwise it will be a command action.
+
     The action automatically becomes a member of parent if parent is a TQActionGroup.
+
     For accelerators and status tips to work, parent must either be
+a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget.
+
     The text and accel will be used for tool tips and status
+tips unless you provide specific text for these using setToolTip()
+and setStatusTip().
+
+
    TQAction::TQAction ( TQObject * parent, const char * name, bool toggle )
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Constructs an action called name with parent parent.
+
     If toggle is TRUE the action will be a toggle action, otherwise
+it will be a command action.
+
     If parent is a TQActionGroup, the new action inserts itself into
+parent.
+
     For accelerators and status tips to work, parent must either be
+a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget.
+
+
    TQAction::~TQAction ()
+
    
+Destroys the object and frees allocated resources.
+
+
    TQKeySequence TQAction::accel () const
+
    Returns the action's accelerator key.
+See the "accel" property for details.
+
    void TQAction::activate () [slot]
+
    
+Activates the action and executes all connected slots.
+This only works for actions that are not toggle action.
+
     
    See also toggle().
+
+
    void TQAction::activated () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when an action is activated by the user,
+e.g. when the user clicks a menu option or a toolbar button or
+presses an action's accelerator key combination.
+
     Connect to this signal for command actions. Connect to the
+toggled() signal for toggle actions.
+
+
    Examples: action/application.cpp, chart/chartform.cpp, and themes/themes.cpp.
+
    bool TQAction::addTo ( TQWidget * w ) [virtual]
+
    
+Adds this action to widget w.
+
     Currently actions may be added to TQToolBar and TQPopupMenu widgets.
+
     An action added to a tool bar is automatically displayed as a tool
+button; an action added to a pop up menu appears as a menu option.
+
     addTo() returns TRUE if the action was added successfully and
+FALSE otherwise. (If w is not a TQToolBar or TQPopupMenu the
+action will not be added and FALSE will be returned.)
+
     
    See also removeFrom().
+
+
    Examples: action/application.cpp, action/toggleaction/toggleaction.cpp, and chart/chartform.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented in TQActionGroup.
+
    void TQAction::addedTo ( TQWidget * actionWidget, TQWidget * container ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This function is called from the addTo() function when it has
+created a widget (actionWidget) for the action in the container.
+
+
    void TQAction::addedTo ( int index, TQPopupMenu * menu ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This function is called from the addTo() function when it has
+created a menu item at the index position index in the popup
+menu menu.
+
+
    TQIconSet TQAction::iconSet () const
+
    Returns the action's icon.
+See the "iconSet" property for details.
+
    bool TQAction::isEnabled () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the action is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "enabled" property for details.
+
    bool TQAction::isOn () const
+
    Returns TRUE if a toggle action is on; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "on" property for details.
+
    bool TQAction::isToggleAction () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the action is a toggle action; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "toggleAction" property for details.
+
    bool TQAction::isVisible () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the action can be seen (e.g. in menus and toolbars); otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "visible" property for details.
+
    TQString TQAction::menuText () const
+
    Returns the action's menu text.
+See the "menuText" property for details.
+
    bool TQAction::removeFrom ( TQWidget * w ) [virtual]
+
    
+Removes the action from widget w.
+
     Returns TRUE if the action was removed successfully; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also addTo().
+
+
    void TQAction::setAccel ( const TQKeySequence & key ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the action's accelerator key to key.
+See the "accel" property for details.
+
    void TQAction::setDisabled ( bool disable ) [slot]
+
    
+Disables the action if disable is TRUE; otherwise
+enables the action.
+
     See the enabled documentation for more information.
+
+
    void TQAction::setEnabled ( bool ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets whether the action is enabled.
+See the "enabled" property for details.
+
    void TQAction::setIconSet ( const TQIconSet & ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the action's icon.
+See the "iconSet" property for details.
+
    void TQAction::setMenuText ( const TQString & ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the action's menu text.
+See the "menuText" property for details.
+
    void TQAction::setOn ( bool ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets whether a toggle action is on.
+See the "on" property for details.
+
    void TQAction::setStatusTip ( const TQString & ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the action's status tip.
+See the "statusTip" property for details.
+
    void TQAction::setText ( const TQString & ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the action's descriptive text.
+See the "text" property for details.
+
    void TQAction::setToggleAction ( bool ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the action is a toggle action.
+See the "toggleAction" property for details.
+
    void TQAction::setToolTip ( const TQString & ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the action's tool tip.
+See the "toolTip" property for details.
+
    void TQAction::setVisible ( bool ) [slot]
+
    Sets whether the action can be seen (e.g. in menus and toolbars).
+See the "visible" property for details.
+
    void TQAction::setWhatsThis ( const TQString & ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the action's "What's This?" help text.
+See the "whatsThis" property for details.
+
    TQString TQAction::statusTip () const
+
    Returns the action's status tip.
+See the "statusTip" property for details.
+
    TQString TQAction::text () const
+
    Returns the action's descriptive text.
+See the "text" property for details.
+
    void TQAction::toggle () [slot]
+
    
+Toggles the state of a toggle action.
+
     
    See also on, activate(), toggled(), and toggleAction.
+
+
    void TQAction::toggled ( bool on ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when a toggle action changes state; command
+actions and TQActionGroups don't emit toggled().
+
     The on argument denotes the new state: If on is TRUE the
+toggle action is switched on, and if on is FALSE the toggle
+action is switched off.
+
     To trigger a user command depending on whether a toggle action has
+been switched on or off connect it to a slot that takes a bool to
+indicate the state, e.g.
+
     
+
+
            TQMainWindow * window = new TQMainWindow;
+
            TQAction * labelonoffaction = new TQAction( window, "labelonoff" );
+
            TQObject::connect( labelonoffaction, SIGNAL( toggled( bool ) ),
+                          window, SLOT( setUsesTextLabel( bool ) ) );
+
    
+
     
    See also activated(), toggleAction, and on.
+
+
    Example: action/toggleaction/toggleaction.cpp.
+
    TQString TQAction::toolTip () const
+
    Returns the action's tool tip.
+See the "toolTip" property for details.
+
    TQString TQAction::whatsThis () const
+
    Returns the action's "What's This?" help text.
+See the "whatsThis" property for details.
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    TQKeySequence accel
    
+
    This property holds the action's accelerator key.
+
    The keycodes can be found in TQt::Key and TQt::Modifier. There
+is no default accelerator key.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setAccel() and get this property's value with accel().
+
    bool enabled
    
+
    This property holds whether the action is enabled.
+
    Disabled actions can't be chosen by the user. They don't disappear
+from the menu/tool bar but are displayed in a way which indicates
+that they are unavailable, e.g. they might be displayed grayed
+out.
+
     What's this? help on disabled actions is still available provided
+the TQAction::whatsThis property is set.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setEnabled() and get this property's value with isEnabled().
+
    TQIconSet iconSet
    
+
    This property holds the action's icon.
+
    The icon is used as the tool button icon and in the menu to the
+left of the menu text. There is no default icon.
+
     If a null icon (TQIconSet::isNull() is passed into this function,
+the icon of the action is cleared.
+
     (See the action/toggleaction/toggleaction.cpp example.)
+
     
+
    Set this property's value with setIconSet() and get this property's value with iconSet().
+
    TQString menuText
    
+
    This property holds the action's menu text.
+
    If the action is added to a menu the menu option will consist of
+the icon (if there is one), the menu text and the accelerator (if
+there is one). If the menu text is not explicitly set in the
+constructor or by using setMenuText() the action's description
+text will be used as the menu text. There is no default menu text.
+
     
    See also text.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setMenuText() and get this property's value with menuText().
+
    bool on
    
+
    This property holds whether a toggle action is on.
+
    This property is always on (TRUE) for command actions and
+TQActionGroups; setOn() has no effect on them. For action's
+where isToggleAction() is TRUE, this property's default value is
+off (FALSE).
+
     
    See also toggleAction.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setOn() and get this property's value with isOn().
+
    TQString statusTip
    
+
    This property holds the action's status tip.
+
    The statusTip is displayed on all status bars that this action's
+toplevel parent widget provides.
+
     If no status tip is defined, the action uses the tool tip text.
+
     There is no default statusTip text.
+
     
    See also statusTip and toolTip.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setStatusTip() and get this property's value with statusTip().
+
    TQString text
    
+
    This property holds the action's descriptive text.
+
    If TQMainWindow::usesTextLabel is TRUE, the text appears as a
+label in the relevant tool button. It also serves as the default
+text in menus and tool tips if these have not been specifically
+defined. There is no default text.
+
     
    See also menuText, toolTip, and statusTip.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setText() and get this property's value with text().
+
    bool toggleAction
    
+
    This property holds whether the action is a toggle action.
+
    A toggle action is one which has an on/off state. For example a
+Bold toolbar button is either on or off. An action which is not a
+toggle action is a command action; a command action is simply
+executed, e.g. file save. This property's default is FALSE.
+
     In some situations, the state of one toggle action should depend
+on the state of others. For example, "Left Align", "Center" and
+"Right Align" toggle actions are mutually exclusive. To achieve
+exclusive toggling, add the relevant toggle actions to a
+TQActionGroup with the TQActionGroup::exclusive property set to
+TRUE.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setToggleAction() and get this property's value with isToggleAction().
+
    TQString toolTip
    
+
    This property holds the action's tool tip.
+
    This text is used for the tool tip. If no status tip has been set
+the tool tip will be used for the status tip.
+
     If no tool tip is specified the action's text is used, and if that
+hasn't been specified the description text is used as the tool tip
+text.
+
     There is no default tool tip text.
+
     
    See also statusTip and accel.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setToolTip() and get this property's value with toolTip().
+
    bool visible
    
+
    This property holds whether the action can be seen (e.g. in menus and toolbars).
+
    If visible is TRUE the action can be seen (e.g. in menus and
+toolbars) and chosen by the user; if visible is FALSE the
+action cannot be seen or chosen by the user.
+
     Actions which are not visible are not grayed out; they do not
+appear at all.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setVisible() and get this property's value with isVisible().
+
    TQString whatsThis
    
+
    This property holds the action's "What's This?" help text.
+
    The whats this text is used to provide a brief description of the
+action. The text may contain rich text (HTML-like tags -- see
+TQStyleSheet for the list of supported tags). There is no default
+"What's This" text.
+
     
    See also TQWhatsThis.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setWhatsThis() and get this property's value with whatsThis().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqapplication.html b/doc/html/ntqapplication.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2df65894c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqapplication.html
@@ -0,0 +1,2046 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQApplication Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQApplication Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQApplication class manages the GUI application's control
+flow and main settings.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqapplication.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQApplication class manages the GUI application's control
+flow and main settings.
+
     
+
+
     It contains the main event loop, where all events from the window
+system and other sources are processed and dispatched. It also
+handles the application's initialization and finalization, and
+provides session management. It also handles most system-wide and
+application-wide settings.
+
     For any GUI application that uses TQt, there is precisely one
+TQApplication object, no matter whether the application has 0, 1, 2
+or more windows at any time.
+
     The TQApplication object is accessible through the global pointer qApp. Its main areas of responsibility are:
+
      
+
       
    •  It initializes the application with the user's desktop settings
+such as palette(), font() and doubleClickInterval(). It keeps track
+of these properties in case the user changes the desktop globally, for
+example through some kind of control panel.
+
       
    •  It performs event handling, meaning that it receives events
+from the underlying window system and dispatches them to the relevant
+widgets. By using sendEvent() and postEvent() you can send your own
+events to widgets.
+
       
    •  It parses common command line arguments and sets its internal
+state accordingly. See the constructor documentation below for more details about this.
+
       
    •  It defines the application's look and feel, which is
+encapsulated in a TQStyle object. This can be changed at runtime
+with setStyle().
+
       
    •  It specifies how the application is to allocate colors.
+See setColorSpec() for details.
+
       
    •  It provides localization of strings that are visible to the user
+via translate().
+
       
    •  It provides some magical objects like the desktop() and the
+clipboard().
+
       
    •  It knows about the application's windows. You can ask which
+widget is at a certain position using widgetAt(), get a list of
+topLevelWidgets() and closeAllWindows(), etc.
+
       
    •  It manages the application's mouse cursor handling,
+see setOverrideCursor() and setGlobalMouseTracking().
+
       
    •  On the X window system, it provides functions to flush and sync
+the communication stream, see flushX() and syncX().
+
       
    •  It provides support for sophisticated session management. This makes it possible
+for applications to terminate gracefully when the user logs out, to
+cancel a shutdown process if termination isn't possible and even to
+preserve the entire application's state for a future session. See
+isSessionRestored(), sessionId() and commitData() and saveState()
+for details.
+
       
    
+
     The Application walk-through
+example contains a typical complete main() that does the usual
+things with TQApplication.
+
     Since the TQApplication object does so much initialization, it
+must be created before any other objects related to the user
+interface are created.
+
     Since it also deals with common command line arguments, it is
+usually a good idea to create it before any interpretation or
+modification of argv is done in the application itself. (Note
+also that for X11, setMainWidget() may change the main widget
+according to the -geometry option. To preserve this
+functionality, you must set your defaults before setMainWidget() and
+any overrides after.)
+
     
    
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
      Groups of functions
+
    System settings
+
+desktopSettingsAware(),
+setDesktopSettingsAware(),
+cursorFlashTime(),
+setCursorFlashTime(),
+doubleClickInterval(),
+setDoubleClickInterval(),
+wheelScrollLines(),
+setWheelScrollLines(),
+palette(),
+setPalette(),
+font(),
+setFont(),
+fontMetrics().
+
    Event handling
+
+exec(),
+processEvents(),
+enter_loop(),
+exit_loop(),
+exit(),
+quit().
+sendEvent(),
+postEvent(),
+sendPostedEvents(),
+removePostedEvents(),
+hasPendingEvents(),
+notify(),
+macEventFilter(),
+qwsEventFilter(),
+x11EventFilter(),
+x11ProcessEvent(),
+winEventFilter().
+
    GUI Styles
+
+style(),
+setStyle(),
+polish().
+
    Color usage
+
+colorSpec(),
+setColorSpec(),
+qwsSetCustomColors().
+
    Text handling
+
+installTranslator(),
+removeTranslator()
+translate().
+
    Widgets
+
+mainWidget(),
+setMainWidget(),
+allWidgets(),
+topLevelWidgets(),
+desktop(),
+activePopupWidget(),
+activeModalWidget(),
+clipboard(),
+focusWidget(),
+winFocus(),
+activeWindow(),
+widgetAt().
+
    Advanced cursor handling
+
+hasGlobalMouseTracking(),
+setGlobalMouseTracking(),
+overrideCursor(),
+setOverrideCursor(),
+restoreOverrideCursor().
+
    X Window System synchronization
+
+flushX(),
+syncX().
+
    Session management
+
+isSessionRestored(),
+sessionId(),
+commitData(),
+saveState().
+
    Threading
+
+lock(), unlock(), locked(), tryLock(),
+wakeUpGuiThread()
+
    Miscellaneous
+
+closeAllWindows(),
+startingUp(),
+closingDown(),
+type().
+
    
+
     Non-GUI programs: While TQt is not optimized or
+designed for writing non-GUI programs, it's possible to use
+some of its classes without creating a
+TQApplication. This can be useful if you wish to share code between
+a non-GUI server and a GUI client.
+
+
+
+
    See also Main Window and Related Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQApplication::ColorSpec
    
+
+
      
+
    • TQApplication::NormalColor - the default color allocation policy
+
    • TQApplication::CustomColor - the same as NormalColor for X11; allocates colors
+to a palette on demand under Windows
+
    • TQApplication::ManyColor - the right choice for applications that use thousands of
+colors
+
     See setColorSpec() for full details.
+
+
    TQApplication::Encoding
     
+
     This enum type defines the 8-bit encoding of character string
+arguments to translate():
+
      
+
    • TQApplication::DefaultCodec - the encoding specified by
+TQTextCodec::codecForTr() (Latin-1 if none has been set)
+
    • TQApplication::UnicodeUTF8 - UTF-8
+
     
    See also TQObject::tr(), TQObject::trUtf8(), and TQString::fromUtf8().
+
+
    TQApplication::Type
    
+
+
      
+
    • TQApplication::Tty - a console application
+
    • TQApplication::GuiClient - a GUI client application
+
    • TQApplication::GuiServer - a GUI server application
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQApplication::TQApplication ( int & argc, char ** argv )
+
    
+Initializes the window system and constructs an application object
+with argc command line arguments in argv.
+
     The global qApp pointer refers to this application object. Only
+one application object should be created.
+
     This application object must be constructed before any paint devices (including widgets, pixmaps, bitmaps
+etc.).
+
     Note that argc and argv might be changed. TQt removes command
+line arguments that it recognizes. The modified argc and argv
+can also be accessed later with qApp->argc() and qApp->argv().
+The documentation for argv() contains a detailed description of how
+to process command line arguments.
+
     TQt debugging options (not available if TQt was compiled with the
+QT_NO_DEBUG flag defined):
+
      
+
    •  -nograb, tells TQt that it must never grab the mouse or the keyboard.
+
    •  -dograb (only under X11), running under a debugger can cause
+an implicit -nograb, use -dograb to override.
+
    •  -sync (only under X11), switches to synchronous mode for
+debugging.
+
    
+
     See Debugging Techniques for a more
+detailed explanation.
+
     All TQt programs automatically support the following command line options:
+
      
+
    •  -reverse causes text to be formatted for right-to-left languages
+rather than in the usual left-to-right direction.
+
    •  -style= style, sets the application GUI style. Possible values
+are motif, windows, and platinum. If you compiled TQt
+with additional styles or have additional styles as plugins these
+will be available to the -style command line option.
+
    •  -style style, is the same as listed above.
+
    •  -session= session, restores the application from an earlier
+session.
+
    •  -session session, is the same as listed above.
+
    •  -widgetcount, prints debug message at the end about number of widgets left
+undestroyed and maximum number of widgets existed at the same time
+
    
+
     The X11 version of TQt also supports some traditional X11
+command line options:
+
      
+
    •  -display display, sets the X display (default is $DISPLAY).
+
    •  -geometry geometry, sets the client geometry of the
+main widget.
+
    •  -fn or -font font, defines the application font. The
+font should be specified using an X logical font description.
+
    •  -bg or -background color, sets the default background color
+and an application palette (light and dark shades are calculated).
+
    •  -fg or -foreground color, sets the default foreground color.
+
    •  -btn or -button color, sets the default button color.
+
    •  -name name, sets the application name.
+
    •  -title title, sets the application title (caption).
+
    •  -visual TrueColor, forces the application to use a TrueColor visual
+on an 8-bit display.
+
    •  -ncols count, limits the number of colors allocated in the
+color cube on an 8-bit display, if the application is using the
+TQApplication::ManyColor color specification. If count is
+216 then a 6x6x6 color cube is used (i.e. 6 levels of red, 6 of green,
+and 6 of blue); for other values, a cube
+approximately proportional to a 2x3x1 cube is used.
+
    •  -cmap, causes the application to install a private color map
+on an 8-bit display.
+
    
+
     
    See also argc() and argv().
+
+
    TQApplication::TQApplication ( int & argc, char ** argv, bool GUIenabled )
+
    
+Constructs an application object with argc command line arguments
+in argv. If GUIenabled is TRUE, a GUI application is
+constructed, otherwise a non-GUI (console) application is created.
+
     Set GUIenabled to FALSE for programs without a graphical user
+interface that should be able to run without a window system.
+
     On X11, the window system is initialized if GUIenabled is TRUE.
+If GUIenabled is FALSE, the application does not connect to the
+X-server.
+On Windows and Macintosh, currently the window system is always
+initialized, regardless of the value of GUIenabled. This may change in
+future versions of TQt.
+
     The following example shows how to create an application that
+uses a graphical interface when available.
+
    +  int main( int argc, char **argv )
+  {
+#ifdef Q_WS_X11
+    bool useGUI = getenv( "DISPLAY" ) != 0;
+#else
+    bool useGUI = TRUE;
+#endif
+    TQApplication app(argc, argv, useGUI);
+
+    if ( useGUI ) {
+       //start GUI version
+       ...
+    } else {
+       //start non-GUI version
+       ...
+    }
+    return app.exec();
+  }
+
    
+ 
+
+
    TQApplication::TQApplication ( int & argc, char ** argv, Type type )
+
    
+Constructs an application object with argc command line arguments
+in argv.
+
     For TQt/Embedded, passing TQApplication::GuiServer for type
+makes this application the server (equivalent to running with the
+-qws option).
+
+
    TQApplication::TQApplication ( Display * dpy, HANDLE visual = 0, HANDLE colormap = 0 )
+
    
+Create an application, given an already open display dpy. If visual and colormap are non-zero, the application will use those as
+the default Visual and Colormap contexts.
+
     Warning: TQt only supports TrueColor visuals at depths higher than 8
+bits-per-pixel.
+
     This is available only on X11.
+
+
    TQApplication::TQApplication ( Display * dpy, int argc, char ** argv, HANDLE visual = 0, HANDLE colormap = 0 )
+
    
+Create an application, given an already open display dpy and using
+argc command line arguments in argv. If visual and colormap are non-zero, the application will use those as
+the default Visual and Colormap contexts.
+
     Warning: TQt only supports TrueColor visuals at depths higher than 8
+bits-per-pixel.
+
     This is available only on X11.
+
     
+
    TQApplication::~TQApplication () [virtual]
+
    
+Cleans up any window system resources that were allocated by this
+application. Sets the global variable qApp to 0.
+
+
    void TQApplication::aboutTQt () [slot]
+
    
+Displays a simple message box about TQt. The message includes the
+version number of TQt being used by the application.
+
     This is useful for inclusion in the Help menu of an application.
+See the examples/menu/menu.cpp example.
+
     This function is a convenience slot for TQMessageBox::aboutTQt().
+
+
    void TQApplication::aboutToQuit () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the application is about to quit the
+main event loop, e.g. when the event loop level drops to zero.
+This may happen either after a call to quit() from inside the
+application or when the users shuts down the entire desktop session.
+
     The signal is particularly useful if your application has to do some
+last-second cleanup. Note that no user interaction is possible in
+this state.
+
     
    See also quit().
+
+
    TQWidget * TQApplication::activeModalWidget () [static]
+
    
+Returns the active modal widget.
+
     A modal widget is a special top level widget which is a subclass of
+TQDialog that specifies the modal parameter of the constructor as
+TRUE. A modal widget must be closed before the user can continue
+with other parts of the program.
+
     Modal widgets are organized in a stack. This function returns
+the active modal widget at the top of the stack.
+
     
    See also activePopupWidget() and topLevelWidgets().
+
+
    TQWidget * TQApplication::activePopupWidget () [static]
+
    
+Returns the active popup widget.
+
     A popup widget is a special top level widget that sets the WType_Popup widget flag, e.g. the TQPopupMenu widget. When the
+application opens a popup widget, all events are sent to the popup.
+Normal widgets and modal widgets cannot be accessed before the popup
+widget is closed.
+
     Only other popup widgets may be opened when a popup widget is shown.
+The popup widgets are organized in a stack. This function returns
+the active popup widget at the top of the stack.
+
     
    See also activeModalWidget() and topLevelWidgets().
+
+
    TQWidget * TQApplication::activeWindow () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the application top-level window that has the keyboard input
+focus, or 0 if no application window has the focus. Note that
+there might be an activeWindow() even if there is no focusWidget(),
+for example if no widget in that window accepts key events.
+
     
    See also TQWidget::setFocus(), TQWidget::focus, and focusWidget().
+
+
    Example: network/mail/smtp.cpp.
+
    void TQApplication::addLibraryPath ( const TQString & path ) [static]
+
    
+Append path to the end of the library path list. If path is
+empty or already in the path list, the path list is not changed.
+
     The default path list consists of a single entry, the installation
+directory for plugins.  The default installation directory for plugins
+is INSTALL/plugins, where INSTALL is the directory where TQt was
+installed.
+
     
    See also removeLibraryPath(), libraryPaths(), and setLibraryPaths().
+
+
    TQWidgetList * TQApplication::allWidgets () [static]
+
    
+Returns a list of all the widgets in the application.
+
     The list is created using new and must be deleted by the caller.
+
     The list is empty (TQPtrList::isEmpty()) if there are no widgets.
+
     Note that some of the widgets may be hidden.
+
     Example that updates all widgets:
+
    +    TQWidgetList  *list = TQApplication::allWidgets();
+    TQWidgetListIt it( *list );         // iterate over the widgets
+    TQWidget * w;
+    while ( (w=it.current()) != 0 ) {  // for each widget...
+        ++it;
+        w->update();
+    }
+    delete list;                      // delete the list, not the widgets
+  
    
+ 
+
     The TQWidgetList class is defined in the ntqwidgetlist.h header
+file.
+
     Warning: Delete the list as soon as you have finished using it.
+The widgets in the list may be deleted by someone else at any time.
+
     
    See also topLevelWidgets(), TQWidget::visible, and TQPtrList::isEmpty().
+
+
    TQString TQApplication::applicationDirPath ()
+
    
+Returns the directory that contains the application executable.
+
     For example, if you have installed TQt in the C:\Trolltech\TQt
+directory, and you run the demo example, this function will
+return "C:/Trolltech/TQt/examples/demo".
+
     On Mac OS X this will point to the directory actually containing the
+executable, which may be inside of an application bundle (if the
+application is bundled).
+
     Warning: On Unix, this function assumes that argv[0] contains the file
+name of the executable (which it normally does). It also assumes that
+the current directory hasn't been changed by the application.
+
     
    See also applicationFilePath().
+
+
    TQString TQApplication::applicationFilePath ()
+
    
+Returns the file path of the application executable.
+
     For example, if you have installed TQt in the C:\Trolltech\TQt
+directory, and you run the demo example, this function will
+return "C:/Trolltech/TQt/examples/demo/demo.exe".
+
     Warning: On Unix, this function assumes that argv[0] contains the file
+name of the executable (which it normally does). It also assumes that
+the current directory hasn't been changed by the application.
+
     
    See also applicationDirPath().
+
+
    int TQApplication::argc () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of command line arguments.
+
     The documentation for argv() describes how to process command line
+arguments.
+
     
    See also argv() and TQApplication::TQApplication().
+
+
    Examples: chart/main.cpp and scribble/scribble.cpp.
+
    char ** TQApplication::argv () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the command line argument vector.
+
     argv()[0] is the program name, argv()[1] is the first
+argument and argv()[argc()-1] is the last argument.
+
     A TQApplication object is constructed by passing argc and argv from the main() function. Some of the arguments may be
+recognized as TQt options and removed from the argument vector. For
+example, the X11 version of TQt knows about -display, -font
+and a few more options.
+
     Example:
+
    +        // showargs.cpp - displays program arguments in a list box
+
+        #include <ntqapplication.h>
+        #include <ntqlistbox.h>
+
+        int main( int argc, char **argv )
+        {
+            TQApplication a( argc, argv );
+            TQListBox b;
+            a.setMainWidget( &b );
+            for ( int i = 0; i < a.argc(); i++ )  // a.argc() == argc
+                b.insertItem( a.argv()[i] );      // a.argv()[i] == argv[i]
+            b.show();
+            return a.exec();
+        }
+    
    
+ 
+
     If you run showargs -display unix:0 -font 9x15bold hello world
+under X11, the list box contains the three strings "showargs",
+"hello" and "world".
+
     TQt provides a global pointer, qApp, that points to the
+TQApplication object, and through which you can access argc() and
+argv() in functions other than main().
+
     
    See also argc() and TQApplication::TQApplication().
+
+
    Examples: chart/main.cpp and scribble/scribble.cpp.
+
    void TQApplication::beep () [static]
+
    
+Sounds the bell, using the default volume and sound.
+
+
    TQClipboard * TQApplication::clipboard () [static]
+
    
+Returns a pointer to the application global clipboard.
+
+
    Examples: regexptester/regexptester.cpp and showimg/showimg.cpp.
+
    void TQApplication::closeAllWindows () [slot]
+
    
+Closes all top-level windows.
+
     This function is particularly useful for applications with many
+top-level windows. It could, for example, be connected to a "Quit"
+entry in the file menu as shown in the following code example:
+
     
    +    // the "Quit" menu entry should try to close all windows
+    TQPopupMenu* file = new TQPopupMenu( this );
+    file->insertItem( "&Quit", qApp, SLOT(closeAllWindows()), CTRL+Key_Q );
+
+    // when the last window is closed, the application should quit
+    connect( qApp, SIGNAL( lastWindowClosed() ), qApp, SLOT( quit() ) );
+  
    
+ 
+
     The windows are closed in random order, until one window does not
+accept the close event.
+
     
    See also TQWidget::close(), TQWidget::closeEvent(), lastWindowClosed(), quit(), topLevelWidgets(), and TQWidget::isTopLevel.
+
+
     
+
    Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
+
    bool TQApplication::closingDown () [static]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the application objects are being destroyed;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also startingUp().
+
+
    int TQApplication::colorSpec () [static]
+
    
+Returns the color specification.
+
    See also TQApplication::setColorSpec().
+
+
    Example: showimg/showimg.cpp.
+
    void TQApplication::commitData ( TQSessionManager & sm ) [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     This function deals with session
+  management. It is invoked when the TQSessionManager wants the
+application to commit all its data.
+
     Usually this means saving all open files, after getting
+permission from the user. Furthermore you may want to provide a means
+by which the user can cancel the shutdown.
+
     Note that you should not exit the application within this function.
+Instead, the session manager may or may not do this afterwards,
+depending on the context.
+
     Warning: Within this function, no user interaction is possible, unless you ask the session manager sm for explicit permission.
+See TQSessionManager::allowsInteraction() and
+TQSessionManager::allowsErrorInteraction() for details and example
+usage.
+
     The default implementation requests interaction and sends a close
+event to all visible top level widgets. If any event was
+rejected, the shutdown is canceled.
+
     
    See also isSessionRestored(), sessionId(), saveState(), and the Session Management overview.
+
+
    int TQApplication::cursorFlashTime () [static]
+
    
+Returns the text cursor's flash (blink) time in milliseconds. The
+flash time is the time required to display, invert and restore the
+caret display.
+
     The default value on X11 is 1000 milliseconds. On Windows, the
+control panel value is used.
+
     Widgets should not cache this value since it may be changed at any
+time by the user changing the global desktop settings.
+
     
    See also setCursorFlashTime().
+
+
    TQTextCodec * TQApplication::defaultCodec () const
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Returns TQTextCodec::codecForTr().
+
+
    TQDesktopWidget * TQApplication::desktop () [static]
+
    
+Returns the desktop widget (also called the root window).
+
     The desktop widget is useful for obtaining the size of the screen.
+It may also be possible to draw on the desktop. We recommend against
+assuming that it's possible to draw on the desktop, since this does
+not work on all operating systems.
+
     
    +    TQDesktopWidget *d = TQApplication::desktop();
+    int w = d->width();     // returns desktop width
+    int h = d->height();    // returns desktop height
+  
    
+ 
+
+
    Examples: canvas/main.cpp, desktop/desktop.cpp, helpviewer/main.cpp, i18n/main.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, qwerty/main.cpp, and scribble/main.cpp.
+
    bool TQApplication::desktopSettingsAware () [static]
+
    
+Returns the value set by setDesktopSettingsAware(); by default TRUE.
+
     
    See also setDesktopSettingsAware().
+
+
    int TQApplication::doubleClickInterval () [static]
+
    
+Returns the maximum duration for a double click.
+
     The default value on X11 is 400 milliseconds. On Windows, the
+control panel value is used.
+
     
    See also setDoubleClickInterval().
+
+
    int TQApplication::enter_loop ()
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     This function enters the main event loop (recursively). Do not call
+it unless you really know what you are doing.
+
     Use TQApplication::eventLoop()->enterLoop() instead.
+
     
+
    TQEventLoop * TQApplication::eventLoop () [static]
+
    
+Returns the application event loop. This function will return
+zero if called during and after destroying TQApplication.
+
     To create your own instance of TQEventLoop or TQEventLoop subclass create
+it before you create the TQApplication object.
+
     
    See also TQEventLoop.
+
+
    Example: distributor/distributor.ui.h.
+
    int TQApplication::exec ()
+
    
+Enters the main event loop and waits until exit() is called or the
+main widget is destroyed, and returns the value that was set to
+exit() (which is 0 if exit() is called via quit()).
+
     It is necessary to call this function to start event handling. The
+main event loop receives events from the window system and
+dispatches these to the application widgets.
+
     Generally speaking, no user interaction can take place before
+calling exec(). As a special case, modal widgets like TQMessageBox
+can be used before calling exec(), because modal widgets call
+exec() to start a local event loop.
+
     To make your application perform idle processing, i.e. executing a
+special function whenever there are no pending events, use a
+TQTimer with 0 timeout. More advanced idle processing schemes can
+be achieved using processEvents().
+
     
    See also quit(), exit(), processEvents(), and setMainWidget().
+
+
    Examples: helpsystem/main.cpp, life/main.cpp, network/archivesearch/main.cpp, network/ftpclient/main.cpp, opengl/main.cpp, t1/main.cpp, and t4/main.cpp.
+
    void TQApplication::exit ( int retcode = 0 ) [static]
+
    
+Tells the application to exit with a return code.
+
     After this function has been called, the application leaves the main
+event loop and returns from the call to exec(). The exec() function
+returns retcode.
+
     By convention, a retcode of 0 means success, and any non-zero
+value indicates an error.
+
     Note that unlike the C library function of the same name, this
+function does return to the caller -- it is event processing that
+stops.
+
     
    See also quit() and exec().
+
+
    Examples: chart/chartform.cpp, extension/mainform.ui.h, and picture/picture.cpp.
+
    void TQApplication::exit_loop ()
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     This function exits from a recursive call to the main event loop.
+Do not call it unless you are an expert.
+
     Use TQApplication::eventLoop()->exitLoop() instead.
+
     
+
    void TQApplication::flush () [static]
+
    
+Flushes the window system specific event queues.
+
     If you are doing graphical changes inside a loop that does not
+return to the event loop on asynchronous window systems like X11
+or double buffered window systems like MacOS X, and you want to
+visualize these changes immediately (e.g. Splash Screens), call
+this function.
+
     
    See also flushX(), sendPostedEvents(), and TQPainter::flush().
+
+
    void TQApplication::flushX () [static]
+
    
+Flushes the X event queue in the X11 implementation. This normally
+returns almost immediately. Does nothing on other platforms.
+
     
    See also syncX().
+
+
    Example: xform/xform.cpp.
+
    TQWidget * TQApplication::focusWidget () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the application widget that has the keyboard input focus, or
+0 if no widget in this application has the focus.
+
     
    See also TQWidget::setFocus(), TQWidget::focus, and activeWindow().
+
+
    TQFont TQApplication::font ( const TQWidget * w = 0 ) [static]
+
    
+Returns the default font for the widget w, or the default
+application font if w is 0.
+
     
    See also setFont(), fontMetrics(), and TQWidget::font.
+
+
    Examples: qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp, themes/metal.cpp, and themes/themes.cpp.
+
    TQFontMetrics TQApplication::fontMetrics () [static]
+
    
+Returns display (screen) font metrics for the application font.
+
     
    See also font(), setFont(), TQWidget::fontMetrics(), and TQPainter::fontMetrics().
+
+
    TQSize TQApplication::globalStrut () [static]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the application's global strut.
+
     The strut is a size object whose dimensions are the minimum that any
+GUI element that the user can interact with should have. For example
+no button should be resized to be smaller than the global strut size.
+
     
    See also setGlobalStrut().
+
+
    void TQApplication::guiThreadAwake () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted after the event loop returns from a function
+that could block.
+
     
    See also wakeUpGuiThread().
+
+
    bool TQApplication::hasGlobalMouseTracking () [static]
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if global mouse tracking is enabled; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setGlobalMouseTracking().
+
+
    bool TQApplication::hasPendingEvents ()
+
    
+This function returns TRUE if there are pending events; otherwise
+returns FALSE. Pending events can be either from the window system
+or posted events using TQApplication::postEvent().
+
+
    int TQApplication::horizontalAlignment ( int align ) [static]
+
    
+
+
     Strips out vertical alignment flags and transforms an
+alignment align of AlignAuto into AlignLeft or
+AlignRight according to the language used. The other horizontal
+alignment flags are left untouched.
+
+
    void TQApplication::installTranslator ( TQTranslator * mf )
+
    
+Adds the message file mf to the list of message files to be used
+for translations.
+
     Multiple message files can be installed. Translations are searched
+for in the last installed message file, then the one from last, and
+so on, back to the first installed message file. The search stops as
+soon as a matching translation is found.
+
     
    See also removeTranslator(), translate(), and TQTranslator::load().
+
+
    Example: i18n/main.cpp.
+
    bool TQApplication::isEffectEnabled ( TQt::UIEffect effect ) [static]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if effect is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     By default, TQt will try to use the desktop settings. Call
+setDesktopSettingsAware(FALSE) to prevent this.
+
     Note: All effects are disabled on screens running at less than
+16-bit color depth.
+
     
    See also setEffectEnabled() and TQt::UIEffect.
+
+
    bool TQApplication::isSessionRestored () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the application has been restored from an earlier
+session; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also sessionId(), commitData(), and saveState().
+
+
    void TQApplication::lastWindowClosed () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user has closed the last
+top level window.
+
     The signal is very useful when your application has many top level
+widgets but no main widget. You can then connect it to the quit()
+slot.
+
     For convenience, this signal is not emitted for transient top level
+widgets such as popup menus and dialogs.
+
     
    See also mainWidget(), topLevelWidgets(), TQWidget::isTopLevel, and TQWidget::close().
+
+
    Examples: addressbook/main.cpp, extension/main.cpp, helpviewer/main.cpp, mdi/main.cpp, network/archivesearch/main.cpp, qwerty/main.cpp, and regexptester/main.cpp.
+
    TQStringList TQApplication::libraryPaths () [static]
+
    
+Returns a list of paths that the application will search when
+dynamically loading libraries.
+The installation directory for plugins is the only entry if no
+paths have been set.  The default installation directory for plugins
+is INSTALL/plugins, where INSTALL is the directory where TQt was
+installed. The directory of the application executable (NOT the
+working directory) is also added to the plugin paths.
+
     If you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate over a
+copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQStringList list = app.libraryPaths();
+    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
+    while( it != list.end() ) {
+        myProcessing( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     See the plugins documentation for a
+description of how the library paths are used.
+
     
    See also setLibraryPaths(), addLibraryPath(), removeLibraryPath(), and TQLibrary.
+
+
    void TQApplication::lock ()
+
     
+
     Lock the TQt Library Mutex. If another thread has already locked the
+mutex, the calling thread will block until the other thread has
+unlocked the mutex.
+
     
    See also unlock(), locked(), and Thread Support in TQt.
+
+
    bool TQApplication::locked ()
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if the TQt Library Mutex is locked by a different thread;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     Warning: Due to different implementations of recursive mutexes on
+the supported platforms, calling this function from the same thread
+that previously locked the mutex will give undefined results.
+
     
    See also lock(), unlock(), and Thread Support in TQt.
+
+
    int TQApplication::loopLevel () const
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Returns the current loop level.
+
     Use TQApplication::eventLoop()->loopLevel() instead.
+
     
+
    bool TQApplication::macEventFilter ( EventHandlerCallRef, EventRef ) [virtual]
+
    
+This virtual function is only implemented under Macintosh.
+
     If you create an application that inherits TQApplication and
+reimplement this function, you get direct access to all Carbon Events
+that are received from the MacOS.
+
     Return TRUE if you want to stop the event from being processed.
+Return FALSE for normal event dispatching.
+
+
    TQWidget * TQApplication::mainWidget () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the main application widget, or 0 if there is no main
+widget.
+
     
    See also setMainWidget().
+
+
    bool TQApplication::notify ( TQObject * receiver, TQEvent * e ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sends event e to receiver: receiver->event(e).
+Returns the value that is returned from the receiver's event handler.
+
     For certain types of events (e.g. mouse and key events),
+the event will be propagated to the receiver's parent and so on up to
+the top-level object if the receiver is not interested in the event
+(i.e., it returns FALSE).
+
     There are five different ways that events can be processed;
+reimplementing this virtual function is just one of them. All five
+approaches are listed below:
+
      
+
    1.  Reimplementing this function. This is very powerful, providing
+complete control; but only one subclass can be qApp.
+
       
    2.  Installing an event filter on qApp. Such an event filter is able
+to process all events for all widgets, so it's just as powerful as
+reimplementing notify(); furthermore, it's possible to have more
+than one application-global event filter. Global event filters even
+see mouse events for disabled
+  widgets, and if global mouse
+  tracking is enabled, as well as mouse move events for all
+widgets.
+
       
    3.  Reimplementing TQObject::event() (as TQWidget does). If you do
+this you get Tab key presses, and you get to see the events before
+any widget-specific event filters.
+
       
    4.  Installing an event filter on the object. Such an event filter
+gets all the events except Tab and Shift-Tab key presses.
+
       
    5.  Reimplementing paintEvent(), mousePressEvent() and so
+on. This is the commonest, easiest and least powerful way.
+
    
+
     
    See also TQObject::event() and installEventFilter().
+
+
    TQCursor * TQApplication::overrideCursor () [static]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the active application override cursor.
+
     This function returns 0 if no application cursor has been defined
+(i.e. the internal cursor stack is empty).
+
     
    See also setOverrideCursor() and restoreOverrideCursor().
+
+
    TQPalette TQApplication::palette ( const TQWidget * w = 0 ) [static]
+
    
+Returns the application palette.
+
     If a widget is passed in w, the default palette for the
+widget's class is returned. This may or may not be the application
+palette. In most cases there isn't a special palette for certain
+types of widgets, but one notable exception is the popup menu under
+Windows, if the user has defined a special background color for
+menus in the display settings.
+
     
    See also setPalette() and TQWidget::palette.
+
+
    Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp, themes/metal.cpp, and themes/wood.cpp.
+
    void TQApplication::polish ( TQWidget * w ) [virtual]
+
    
+Initialization of the appearance of the widget w before it is first
+shown.
+
     Usually widgets call this automatically when they are polished. It
+may be used to do some style-based central customization of widgets.
+
     Note that you are not limited to the public functions of TQWidget.
+Instead, based on meta information like TQObject::className() you are
+able to customize any kind of widget.
+
     
    See also TQStyle::polish(), TQWidget::polish(), setPalette(), and setFont().
+
+
    void TQApplication::postEvent ( TQObject * receiver, TQEvent * event ) [static]
+
    Note: This function is thread-safe when TQt is built withthread support.
    
+
+Adds the event event with the object receiver as the receiver of the
+event, to an event queue and returns immediately.
+
     The event must be allocated on the heap since the post event queue
+will take ownership of the event and delete it once it has been posted.
+
     When control returns to the main event loop, all events that are
+stored in the queue will be sent using the notify() function.
+
     
+
     
    See also sendEvent() and notify().
+
+
    void TQApplication::processEvents ()
+
    
+Processes pending events, for 3 seconds or until there are no more
+events to process, whichever is shorter.
+
     You can call this function occasionally when your program is busy
+performing a long operation (e.g. copying a file).
+
     
    See also exec(), TQTimer, and TQEventLoop::processEvents().
+
+
    Examples: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp and network/ftpclient/main.cpp.
+
    void TQApplication::processEvents ( int maxtime )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Processes pending events for maxtime milliseconds or until
+there are no more events to process, whichever is shorter.
+
     You can call this function occasionally when you program is busy
+doing a long operation (e.g. copying a file).
+
     
    See also exec(), TQTimer, and TQEventLoop::processEvents().
+
+
    void TQApplication::processOneEvent ()
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Waits for an event to occur, processes it, then returns.
+
     This function is useful for adapting TQt to situations where the
+event processing must be grafted onto existing program loops.
+
     Using this function in new applications may be an indication of design
+problems.
+
     
    See also processEvents(), exec(), and TQTimer.
+
+
    void TQApplication::quit () [slot]
+
    
+Tells the application to exit with return code 0 (success).
+Equivalent to calling TQApplication::exit( 0 ).
+
     It's common to connect the lastWindowClosed() signal to quit(), and
+you also often connect e.g. TQButton::clicked() or signals in
+TQAction, TQPopupMenu or TQMenuBar to it.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQPushButton *quitButton = new TQPushButton( "Quit" );
+    connect( quitButton, SIGNAL(clicked()), qApp, SLOT(quit()) );
+  
    
+ 
+
     
    See also exit(), aboutToQuit(), lastWindowClosed(), and TQAction.
+
+
    Examples: addressbook/main.cpp, mdi/main.cpp, network/archivesearch/main.cpp, regexptester/main.cpp, t2/main.cpp, t4/main.cpp, and t6/main.cpp.
+
    TQWSDecoration & TQApplication::qwsDecoration () [static]
+
    
+Return the TQWSDecoration used for decorating windows.
+
     This method is non-portable. It is available only in TQt/Embedded.
+
     
    See also TQWSDecoration.
+
+
    bool TQApplication::qwsEventFilter ( TQWSEvent * ) [virtual]
+
    
+This virtual function is only implemented under TQt/Embedded.
+
     If you create an application that inherits TQApplication and
+reimplement this function, you get direct access to all TQWS (Q
+Window System) events that the are received from the TQWS master
+process.
+
     Return TRUE if you want to stop the event from being processed.
+Return FALSE for normal event dispatching.
+
+
    void TQApplication::qwsSetCustomColors ( TQRgb * colorTable, int start, int numColors )
+
    
+Set TQt/Embedded custom color table.
+
     TQt/Embedded on 8-bpp displays allocates a standard 216 color cube.
+The remaining 40 colors may be used by setting a custom color
+table in the TQWS master process before any clients connect.
+
     colorTable is an array of up to 40 custom colors. start is
+the starting index (0-39) and numColors is the number of colors
+to be set (1-40).
+
     This method is non-portable. It is available only in
+TQt/Embedded.
+
+
    void TQApplication::qwsSetDecoration ( TQWSDecoration * d ) [static]
+
    
+Set the TQWSDecoration derived class to use for decorating the
+TQt/Embedded windows to d.
+
     This method is non-portable. It is available only in
+TQt/Embedded.
+
     
    See also TQWSDecoration.
+
+
    void TQApplication::removeLibraryPath ( const TQString & path ) [static]
+
    
+Removes path from the library path list. If path is empty or not
+in the path list, the list is not changed.
+
     
    See also addLibraryPath(), libraryPaths(), and setLibraryPaths().
+
+
    void TQApplication::removePostedEvents ( TQObject * receiver ) [static]
+
    Note: This function is thread-safe when TQt is built withthread support.
    
+
+Removes all events posted using postEvent() for receiver.
+
     The events are not dispatched, instead they are removed from the
+queue. You should never need to call this function. If you do call it,
+be aware that killing events may cause receiver to break one or
+more invariants.
+
     
+
+
    void TQApplication::removeTranslator ( TQTranslator * mf )
+
    
+Removes the message file mf from the list of message files used by
+this application. (It does not delete the message file from the file
+system.)
+
     
    See also installTranslator(), translate(), and TQObject::tr().
+
+
    Example: i18n/main.cpp.
+
    void TQApplication::restoreOverrideCursor () [static]
+
    
+Undoes the last setOverrideCursor().
+
     If setOverrideCursor() has been called twice, calling
+restoreOverrideCursor() will activate the first cursor set.
+Calling this function a second time restores the original widgets'
+cursors.
+
     
    See also setOverrideCursor() and overrideCursor().
+
+
    Examples: distributor/distributor.ui.h, network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h, network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
+
    bool TQApplication::reverseLayout () [static]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if all dialogs and widgets will be laid out in a
+mirrored (right to left) fashion. Returns FALSE if dialogs and
+widgets will be laid out left to right.
+
     
    See also setReverseLayout().
+
+
    void TQApplication::saveState ( TQSessionManager & sm ) [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     This function deals with session
+  management. It is invoked when the
+session manager wants the application
+to preserve its state for a future session.
+
     For example, a text editor would create a temporary file that
+includes the current contents of its edit buffers, the location of
+the cursor and other aspects of the current editing session.
+
     Note that you should never exit the application within this
+function. Instead, the session manager may or may not do this
+afterwards, depending on the context. Futhermore, most session
+managers will very likely request a saved state immediately after
+the application has been started. This permits the session manager
+to learn about the application's restart policy.
+
     Warning: Within this function, no user interaction is possible, unless you ask the session manager sm for explicit permission.
+See TQSessionManager::allowsInteraction() and
+TQSessionManager::allowsErrorInteraction() for details.
+
     
    See also isSessionRestored(), sessionId(), commitData(), and the Session Management overview.
+
+
    bool TQApplication::sendEvent ( TQObject * receiver, TQEvent * event ) [static]
+
    
+
+
     Sends event event directly to receiver receiver, using the
+notify() function. Returns the value that was returned from the event
+handler.
+
     The event is not deleted when the event has been sent. The normal
+approach is to create the event on the stack, e.g.
+
    +    TQMouseEvent me( TQEvent::MouseButtonPress, pos, 0, 0 );
+    TQApplication::sendEvent( mainWindow, &me );
+    
    
+ 
+If you create the event on the heap you must delete it.
+
     
    See also postEvent() and notify().
+
+
    Example: popup/popup.cpp.
+
    void TQApplication::sendPostedEvents ( TQObject * receiver, int event_type ) [static]
+
    
+Immediately dispatches all events which have been previously queued
+with TQApplication::postEvent() and which are for the object receiver
+and have the event type event_type.
+
     Note that events from the window system are not dispatched by this
+function, but by processEvents().
+
     If receiver is null, the events of event_type are sent for all
+objects. If event_type is 0, all the events are sent for receiver.
+
+
    void TQApplication::sendPostedEvents () [static]
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Dispatches all posted events, i.e. empties the event queue.
+
+
    TQString TQApplication::sessionId () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the current session's identifier.
+
     If the application has been restored from an earlier session, this
+identifier is the same as it was in that previous session.
+
     The session identifier is guaranteed to be unique both for different
+applications and for different instances of the same application.
+
     
    See also isSessionRestored(), sessionKey(), commitData(), and saveState().
+
+
    TQString TQApplication::sessionKey () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the session key in the current session.
+
     If the application has been restored from an earlier session, this
+key is the same as it was when the previous session ended.
+
     The session key changes with every call of commitData() or
+saveState().
+
     
    See also isSessionRestored(), sessionId(), commitData(), and saveState().
+
+
    void TQApplication::setColorSpec ( int spec ) [static]
+
    
+Sets the color specification for the application to spec.
+
     The color specification controls how the application allocates colors
+when run on a display with a limited amount of colors, e.g. 8 bit / 256
+color displays.
+
     The color specification must be set before you create the TQApplication
+object.
+
     The options are:
+
      
+
    •  TQApplication::NormalColor.
+This is the default color allocation strategy. Use this option if
+your application uses buttons, menus, texts and pixmaps with few
+colors. With this option, the application uses system global
+colors. This works fine for most applications under X11, but on
+Windows machines it may cause dithering of non-standard colors.
+
    •  TQApplication::CustomColor.
+Use this option if your application needs a small number of custom
+colors. On X11, this option is the same as NormalColor. On Windows, TQt
+creates a Windows palette, and allocates colors to it on demand.
+
    •  TQApplication::ManyColor.
+Use this option if your application is very color hungry
+(e.g. it requires thousands of colors).
+Under X11 the effect is:
+
        
+
      •  For 256-color displays which have at best a 256 color true color
+visual, the default visual is used, and colors are allocated
+from a color cube. The color cube is the 6x6x6 (216 color) "Web
+palette"*, but the number of colors can be changed
+by the -ncols option. The user can force the application to
+use the true color visual with the -visual option.
+
      •  For 256-color displays which have a true color visual with more
+than 256 colors, use that visual. Silicon Graphics X servers
+have this feature, for example. They provide an 8 bit visual
+by default but can deliver true color when asked.
+
      
+On Windows, TQt creates a Windows palette, and fills it with a color cube.
+
    
+
     Be aware that the CustomColor and ManyColor choices may lead to colormap
+flashing: The foreground application gets (most) of the available
+colors, while the background windows will look less attractive.
+
     Example:
+
    +  int main( int argc, char **argv )
+  {
+      TQApplication::setColorSpec( TQApplication::ManyColor );
+      TQApplication a( argc, argv );
+      ...
+  }
+  
    
+ 
+
     TQColor provides more functionality for controlling color allocation and
+freeing up certain colors. See TQColor::enterAllocContext() for more
+information.
+
     To check what mode you end up with, call TQColor::numBitPlanes() once
+the TQApplication object exists. A value greater than 8 (typically
+16, 24 or 32) means true color.
+
     * The color cube used by TQt has 216 colors whose red,
+green, and blue components always have one of the following values:
+0x00, 0x33, 0x66, 0x99, 0xCC, or 0xFF.
+
     
    See also colorSpec(), TQColor::numBitPlanes(), and TQColor::enterAllocContext().
+
+
    Examples: helpviewer/main.cpp, opengl/main.cpp, showimg/main.cpp, t9/main.cpp, tetrax/tetrax.cpp, tetrix/tetrix.cpp, and themes/main.cpp.
+
    void TQApplication::setCursorFlashTime ( int msecs ) [static]
+
    
+Sets the text cursor's flash (blink) time to msecs
+milliseconds. The flash time is the time required to display,
+invert and restore the caret display. Usually the text cursor is
+displayed for msecs/2 milliseconds, then hidden for msecs/2
+milliseconds, but this may vary.
+
     Note that on Microsoft Windows, calling this function sets the
+cursor flash time for all windows.
+
     
    See also cursorFlashTime().
+
+
    void TQApplication::setDefaultCodec ( TQTextCodec * codec )
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     This is the same as TQTextCodec::setCodecForTr().
+
+
    void TQApplication::setDesktopSettingsAware ( bool on ) [static]
+
    
+By default, TQt will try to use the current standard colors, fonts
+etc., from the underlying window system's desktop settings,
+and use them for all relevant widgets. This behavior can be switched off
+by calling this function with on set to FALSE.
+
     This static function must be called before creating the TQApplication
+object, like this:
+
     
    +  int main( int argc, char** argv ) {
+    TQApplication::setDesktopSettingsAware( FALSE ); // I know better than the user
+    TQApplication myApp( argc, argv ); // Use default fonts & colors
+    ...
+  }
+  
    
+ 
+
     
    See also desktopSettingsAware().
+
+
    void TQApplication::setDoubleClickInterval ( int ms ) [static]
+
    
+Sets the time limit that distinguishes a double click from two
+consecutive mouse clicks to ms milliseconds.
+
     Note that on Microsoft Windows, calling this function sets the
+double click interval for all windows.
+
     
    See also doubleClickInterval().
+
+
    void TQApplication::setEffectEnabled ( TQt::UIEffect effect, bool enable = TRUE ) [static]
+
    
+Enables the UI effect effect if enable is TRUE, otherwise
+the effect will not be used.
+
     Note: All effects are disabled on screens running at less than
+16-bit color depth.
+
     
    See also isEffectEnabled(), TQt::UIEffect, and setDesktopSettingsAware().
+
+
    void TQApplication::setFont ( const TQFont & font, bool informWidgets = FALSE, const char * className = 0 ) [static]
+
     Changes the default application font to font. If informWidgets is TRUE, then existing widgets are informed about the
+change and may adjust themselves to the new application
+setting. If informWidgets is FALSE, the change only affects newly
+created widgets. If className is passed, the change applies only
+to classes that inherit className (as reported by
+TQObject::inherits()).
+
     On application start-up, the default font depends on the window
+system. It can vary depending on both the window system version and
+the locale. This function lets you override the default font; but
+overriding may be a bad idea because, for example, some locales need
+extra-large fonts to support their special characters.
+
     
    See also font(), fontMetrics(), and TQWidget::font.
+
+
    Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp, themes/metal.cpp, and themes/themes.cpp.
+
    void TQApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking ( bool enable ) [static]
+
    
+Enables global mouse tracking if enable is TRUE, or disables it
+if enable is FALSE.
+
     Enabling global mouse tracking makes it possible for widget event
+filters or application event filters to get all mouse move events,
+even when no button is depressed. This is useful for special GUI
+elements, e.g. tooltips.
+
     Global mouse tracking does not affect widgets and their
+mouseMoveEvent(). For a widget to get mouse move events when no
+button is depressed, it must do TQWidget::setMouseTracking(TRUE).
+
     This function uses an internal counter. Each
+setGlobalMouseTracking(TRUE) must have a corresponding
+setGlobalMouseTracking(FALSE):
+
    +        // at this point global mouse tracking is off
+        TQApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking( TRUE );
+        TQApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking( TRUE );
+        TQApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking( FALSE );
+        // at this point it's still on
+        TQApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking( FALSE );
+        // but now it's off
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also hasGlobalMouseTracking() and TQWidget::mouseTracking.
+
+
    void TQApplication::setGlobalStrut ( const TQSize & strut ) [static]
+
    
+Sets the application's global strut to strut.
+
     The strut is a size object whose dimensions are the minimum that any
+GUI element that the user can interact with should have. For example
+no button should be resized to be smaller than the global strut size.
+
     The strut size should be considered when reimplementing GUI controls
+that may be used on touch-screens or similar IO-devices.
+
     Example:
+
    +  TQSize& WidgetClass::sizeHint() const
+  {
+      return TQSize( 80, 25 ).expandedTo( TQApplication::globalStrut() );
+  }
+  
    
+ 
+
     
    See also globalStrut().
+
+
    void TQApplication::setLibraryPaths ( const TQStringList & paths ) [static]
+
    
+Sets the list of directories to search when loading libraries to paths.
+All existing paths will be deleted and the path list will consist of the
+paths given in paths.
+
     
    See also libraryPaths(), addLibraryPath(), removeLibraryPath(), and TQLibrary.
+
+
    void TQApplication::setMainWidget ( TQWidget * mainWidget ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the application's main widget to mainWidget.
+
     In most respects the main widget is like any other widget, except
+that if it is closed, the application exits. Note that
+TQApplication does not take ownership of the mainWidget, so
+if you create your main widget on the heap you must delete it
+yourself.
+
     You need not have a main widget; connecting lastWindowClosed() to
+quit() is an alternative.
+
     For X11, this function also resizes and moves the main widget
+according to the -geometry command-line option, so you should
+set the default geometry (using TQWidget::setGeometry()) before
+calling setMainWidget().
+
     
    See also mainWidget(), exec(), and quit().
+
+
    Examples: chart/main.cpp, helpsystem/main.cpp, life/main.cpp, network/ftpclient/main.cpp, opengl/main.cpp, t1/main.cpp, and t4/main.cpp.
+
    void TQApplication::setOverrideCursor ( const TQCursor & cursor, bool replace = FALSE ) [static]
+
    
+Sets the application override cursor to cursor.
+
     Application override cursors are intended for showing the user
+that the application is in a special state, for example during an
+operation that might take some time.
+
     This cursor will be displayed in all the application's widgets
+until restoreOverrideCursor() or another setOverrideCursor() is
+called.
+
     Application cursors are stored on an internal stack.
+setOverrideCursor() pushes the cursor onto the stack, and
+restoreOverrideCursor() pops the active cursor off the stack.
+Every setOverrideCursor() must eventually be followed by a
+corresponding restoreOverrideCursor(), otherwise the stack will
+never be emptied.
+
     If replace is TRUE, the new cursor will replace the last
+override cursor (the stack keeps its depth). If replace is
+FALSE, the new stack is pushed onto the top of the stack.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQApplication::setOverrideCursor( TQCursor(TQt::WaitCursor) );
+        calculateHugeMandelbrot();              // lunch time...
+        TQApplication::restoreOverrideCursor();
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also overrideCursor(), restoreOverrideCursor(), and TQWidget::cursor.
+
+
    Examples: distributor/distributor.ui.h, network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h, network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
+
    void TQApplication::setPalette ( const TQPalette & palette, bool informWidgets = FALSE, const char * className = 0 ) [static]
+
    
+Changes the default application palette to palette. If informWidgets is TRUE, then existing widgets are informed about the
+change and may adjust themselves to the new application
+setting. If informWidgets is FALSE, the change only affects newly
+created widgets.
+
     If className is passed, the change applies only to widgets that
+inherit className (as reported by TQObject::inherits()). If
+className is left 0, the change affects all widgets, thus overriding
+any previously set class specific palettes.
+
     The palette may be changed according to the current GUI style in
+TQStyle::polish().
+
     
    See also TQWidget::palette, palette(), and TQStyle::polish().
+
+
    Examples: i18n/main.cpp, themes/metal.cpp, themes/themes.cpp, and themes/wood.cpp.
+
    void TQApplication::setReverseLayout ( bool b ) [static]
+
    
+If b is TRUE, all dialogs and widgets will be laid out in a
+mirrored fashion, as required by right to left languages such as
+Arabic and Hebrew. If b is FALSE, dialogs and widgets are laid
+out left to right.
+
     Changing this flag in runtime does not cause a relayout of already
+instantiated widgets.
+
     
    See also reverseLayout().
+
+
    void TQApplication::setStartDragDistance ( int l ) [static]
+
    
+Sets the distance after which a drag should start to l pixels.
+
     
    See also startDragDistance().
+
+
    void TQApplication::setStartDragTime ( int ms ) [static]
+
    
+Sets the time after which a drag should start to ms ms.
+
     
    See also startDragTime().
+
+
    void TQApplication::setStyle ( TQStyle * style ) [static]
+
    
+Sets the application's GUI style to style. Ownership of the style
+object is transferred to TQApplication, so TQApplication will delete
+the style object on application exit or when a new style is set.
+
     Example usage:
+
    +    TQApplication::setStyle( new TQWindowsStyle );
+  
    
+ 
+
     When switching application styles, the color palette is set back to
+the initial colors or the system defaults. This is necessary since
+certain styles have to adapt the color palette to be fully
+style-guide compliant.
+
     
    See also style(), TQStyle, setPalette(), and desktopSettingsAware().
+
+
    Example: themes/themes.cpp.
+
    TQStyle * TQApplication::setStyle ( const TQString & style ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Requests a TQStyle object for style from the TQStyleFactory.
+
     The string must be one of the TQStyleFactory::keys(), typically one
+of "windows", "motif", "cde", "motifplus", "platinum", "sgi" and
+"compact". Depending on the platform, "windowsxp", "aqua" or
+"macintosh" may be available.
+
     A later call to the TQApplication constructor will override the
+requested style when a "-style" option is passed in as a commandline
+parameter.
+
     Returns 0 if an unknown style is passed, otherwise the TQStyle object
+returned is set as the application's GUI style.
+
+
    void TQApplication::setWheelScrollLines ( int n ) [static]
+
    
+Sets the number of lines to scroll when the mouse wheel is rotated
+to n.
+
     If this number exceeds the number of visible lines in a certain
+widget, the widget should interpret the scroll operation as a
+single page up / page down operation instead.
+
     
    See also wheelScrollLines().
+
+
    void TQApplication::setWinStyleHighlightColor ( const TQColor & c ) [static]
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Sets the color used to mark selections in windows style for all widgets
+in the application. Will repaint all widgets if the color is changed.
+
     The default color is darkBlue.
+
    See also winStyleHighlightColor().
+
+
    int TQApplication::startDragDistance () [static]
+
    
+If you support drag and drop in you application and a drag should
+start after a mouse click and after moving the mouse a certain
+distance, you should use the value which this method returns as the
+distance.
+
     For example, if the mouse position of the click is stored in startPos and the current position (e.g. in the mouse move event) is
+currPos, you can find out if a drag should be started with code
+like this:
+
    +  if ( ( startPos - currPos ).manhattanLength() >
+       TQApplication::startDragDistance() )
+    startTheDrag();
+  
    
+ 
+
     TQt uses this value internally, e.g. in TQFileDialog.
+
     The default value is 4 pixels.
+
     
    See also setStartDragDistance(), startDragTime(), and TQPoint::manhattanLength().
+
+
    int TQApplication::startDragTime () [static]
+
    
+If you support drag and drop in you application and a drag should
+start after a mouse click and after a certain time elapsed, you
+should use the value which this method returns as the delay (in ms).
+
     TQt also uses this delay internally, e.g. in TQTextEdit and TQLineEdit,
+for starting a drag.
+
     The default value is 500 ms.
+
     
    See also setStartDragTime() and startDragDistance().
+
+
    bool TQApplication::startingUp () [static]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if an application object has not been created yet;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also closingDown().
+
+
    TQStyle & TQApplication::style () [static]
+
    
+Returns the application's style object.
+
     
    See also setStyle() and TQStyle.
+
+
    void TQApplication::syncX () [static]
+
    
+Synchronizes with the X server in the X11 implementation. This
+normally takes some time. Does nothing on other platforms.
+
     
    See also flushX().
+
+
    TQWidgetList * TQApplication::topLevelWidgets () [static]
+
    
+Returns a list of the top level widgets in the application.
+
     The list is created using new and must be deleted by the caller.
+
     The list is empty (TQPtrList::isEmpty()) if there are no top level
+widgets.
+
     Note that some of the top level widgets may be hidden, for example
+the tooltip if no tooltip is currently shown.
+
     Example:
+
    +    // Show all hidden top level widgets.
+    TQWidgetList  *list = TQApplication::topLevelWidgets();
+    TQWidgetListIt it( *list );  // iterate over the widgets
+    TQWidget * w;
+    while ( (w=it.current()) != 0 ) {   // for each top level widget...
+        ++it;
+        if ( !w->isVisible() )
+            w->show();
+    }
+    delete list;                // delete the list, not the widgets
+  
    
+ 
+
     Warning: Delete the list as soon you have finished using it.
+The widgets in the list may be deleted by someone else at any time.
+
     
    See also allWidgets(), TQWidget::isTopLevel, TQWidget::visible, and TQPtrList::isEmpty().
+
+
    TQString TQApplication::translate ( const char * context, const char * sourceText, const char * comment = 0, Encoding encoding = DefaultCodec ) const
+
    Note: This function is reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+ 
+Returns the translation text for sourceText, by querying the
+installed messages files. The message files are searched from the most
+recently installed message file back to the first installed message
+file.
+
     TQObject::tr() and TQObject::trUtf8() provide this functionality more
+conveniently.
+
     context is typically a class name (e.g., "MyDialog") and
+sourceText is either English text or a short identifying text, if
+the output text will be very long (as for help texts).
+
     comment is a disambiguating comment, for when the same sourceText is used in different roles within the same context. By
+default, it is null. encoding indicates the 8-bit encoding of
+character stings
+
     See the TQTranslator documentation for more information about
+contexts and comments.
+
     If none of the message files contain a translation for sourceText in context, this function returns a TQString
+equivalent of sourceText. The encoding of sourceText is
+specified by encoding; it defaults to DefaultCodec.
+
     This function is not virtual. You can use alternative translation
+techniques by subclassing TQTranslator.
+
     Warning: This method is reentrant only if all translators are
+installed before calling this method.  Installing or removing
+translators while performing translations is not supported.  Doing
+so will most likely result in crashes or other undesirable behavior.
+
     
    See also TQObject::tr(), installTranslator(), and defaultCodec().
+
+
    bool TQApplication::tryLock ()
+
     
+
     Attempts to lock the TQt Library Mutex, and returns immediately. If
+the lock was obtained, this function returns TRUE. If another thread
+has locked the mutex, this function returns FALSE, instead of
+waiting for the lock to become available.
+
     The mutex must be unlocked with unlock() before another thread can
+successfully lock it.
+
     
    See also lock(), unlock(), and Thread Support in TQt.
+
+
    Type TQApplication::type () const
+
    
+Returns the type of application, Tty, GuiClient or GuiServer.
+
+
    void TQApplication::unlock ( bool wakeUpGui = TRUE )
+
     
+
     Unlock the TQt Library Mutex. If wakeUpGui is TRUE (the default),
+then the GUI thread will be woken with TQApplication::wakeUpGuiThread().
+
     
    See also lock(), locked(), and Thread Support in TQt.
+
+
    void TQApplication::wakeUpGuiThread ()
+
    
+
     Wakes up the GUI thread.
+
     
    See also guiThreadAwake() and Thread Support in TQt.
+
+
    int TQApplication::wheelScrollLines () [static]
+
    
+Returns the number of lines to scroll when the mouse wheel is
+rotated.
+
     
    See also setWheelScrollLines().
+
+
    TQWidget * TQApplication::widgetAt ( int x, int y, bool child = FALSE ) [static]
+
    
+Returns a pointer to the widget at global screen position (x, y), or 0 if there is no TQt widget there.
+
     If child is FALSE and there is a child widget at position (x, y), the top-level widget containing it is returned. If child
+is TRUE the child widget at position (x, y) is returned.
+
     This function is normally rather slow.
+
     
    See also TQCursor::pos(), TQWidget::grabMouse(), and TQWidget::grabKeyboard().
+
+
    TQWidget * TQApplication::widgetAt ( const TQPoint & pos, bool child = FALSE ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns a pointer to the widget at global screen position pos,
+or 0 if there is no TQt widget there.
+
     If child is FALSE and there is a child widget at position pos, the top-level widget containing it is returned. If child
+is TRUE the child widget at position pos is returned.
+
+
    bool TQApplication::winEventFilter ( MSG * ) [virtual]
+
    
+This virtual function is only implemented under Windows.
+
     The message procedure calls this function for every message
+received. Reimplement this function if you want to process window
+messages that are not processed by TQt. If you don't want
+the event to be processed by TQt, then return TRUE; otherwise
+return FALSE.
+
+
    void TQApplication::winFocus ( TQWidget * widget, bool gotFocus )
+
    
+This function is available only on Windows.
+
     If gotFocus is TRUE, widget will become the active window.
+Otherwise the active window is reset to NULL.
+
+
    const TQColor & TQApplication::winStyleHighlightColor () [static]
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Returns the color used to mark selections in windows style.
+
     
    See also setWinStyleHighlightColor().
+
+
    bool TQApplication::x11EventFilter ( XEvent * ) [virtual]
+
    
+This virtual function is only implemented under X11.
+
     If you create an application that inherits TQApplication and
+reimplement this function, you get direct access to all X events
+that the are received from the X server.
+
     Return TRUE if you want to stop the event from being processed.
+Return FALSE for normal event dispatching.
+
     
    See also x11ProcessEvent().
+
+
    int TQApplication::x11ProcessEvent ( XEvent * event )
+
    
+This function does the core processing of individual X
+events, normally by dispatching TQt events to the right
+destination.
+
     It returns 1 if the event was consumed by special handling, 0 if
+the event was consumed by normal handling, and -1 if the event was for an unrecognized widget.
+
     
    See also x11EventFilter().
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    void Q_ASSERT ( bool test )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     Prints a warning message containing the source code file name and
+line number if test is FALSE.
+
     This is really a macro defined in ntqglobal.h.
+
     Q_ASSERT is useful for testing pre- and post-conditions.
+
     Example:
+
    +        //
+        // File: div.cpp
+        //
+
+        #include <ntqglobal.h>
+
+        int divide( int a, int b )
+        {
+            Q_ASSERT( b != 0 );                 // this is line 9
+            return a/b;
+        }
+    
    
+ 
+
     If b is zero, the Q_ASSERT statement will output the following
+message using the qWarning() function:
+
    +        ASSERT: "b != 0" in div.cpp (9)
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also qWarning() and Debugging.
+
+
    void Q_CHECK_PTR ( void * p )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     If p is 0, prints a warning message containing the source code file
+name and line number, saying that the program ran out of memory.
+
     This is really a macro defined in ntqglobal.h.
+
     Example:
+
    +        int *a;
+
+        Q_CHECK_PTR( a = new int[80] );  // WRONG!
+
+        a = new (nothrow) int[80];       // Right
+        Q_CHECK_PTR( a );
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also qWarning() and Debugging.
+
+
    void qAddPostRoutine ( TQtCleanUpFunction p )
+
    
+
+
     Adds a global routine that will be called from the TQApplication
+destructor. This function is normally used to add cleanup routines
+for program-wide functionality.
+
     The function given by p should take no arguments and return
+nothing, like this:
+
    +    static int *global_ptr = 0;
+
+    static void cleanup_ptr()
+    {
+        delete [] global_ptr;
+        global_ptr = 0;
+    }
+
+    void init_ptr()
+    {
+        global_ptr = new int[100];      // allocate data
+        qAddPostRoutine( cleanup_ptr ); // delete later
+    }
+  
    
+ 
+
     Note that for an application- or module-wide cleanup,
+qAddPostRoutine() is often not suitable. People have a tendency to
+make such modules dynamically loaded, and then unload those modules
+long before the TQApplication destructor is called, for example.
+
     For modules and libraries, using a reference-counted initialization
+manager or TQt' parent-child delete mechanism may be better. Here is
+an example of a private class which uses the parent-child mechanism
+to call a cleanup function at the right time:
+
     
    +    class MyPrivateInitStuff: public TQObject {
+    private:
+        MyPrivateInitStuff( TQObject * parent ): TQObject( parent) {
+            // initialization goes here
+        }
+        MyPrivateInitStuff * p;
+
+    public:
+        static MyPrivateInitStuff * initStuff( TQObject * parent ) {
+            if ( !p )
+                p = new MyPrivateInitStuff( parent );
+            return p;
+        }
+
+        ~MyPrivateInitStuff() {
+            // cleanup (the "post routine") goes here
+        }
+    }
+  
    
+ 
+
     By selecting the right parent widget/object, this can often be made
+to clean up the module's data at the exact right moment.
+
+
    void qDebug ( const char * msg, ... )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     Prints a debug message msg, or calls the message handler (if it
+has been installed).
+
     This function takes a format string and a list of arguments,
+similar to the C printf() function.
+
     Example:
+
    +        qDebug( "my window handle = %x", myWidget->id() );
+    
    
+ 
+
     Under X11, the text is printed to stderr. Under Windows, the text
+is sent to the debugger.
+
     Warning: The internal buffer is limited to 8196 bytes (including
+the '\0'-terminator).
+
     Warning: Passing (const char *)0 as argument to qDebug might lead
+to crashes on certain platforms due to the platforms printf implementation.
+
     
    See also qWarning(), qFatal(), qInstallMsgHandler(), and Debugging.
+
+
    void qFatal ( const char * msg, ... )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     Prints a fatal error message msg and exits, or calls the
+message handler (if it has been installed).
+
     This function takes a format string and a list of arguments,
+similar to the C printf() function.
+
     Example:
+
    +        int divide( int a, int b )
+        {
+            if ( b == 0 )                               // program error
+                qFatal( "divide: cannot divide by zero" );
+            return a/b;
+        }
+    
    
+ 
+
     Under X11, the text is printed to stderr. Under Windows, the text
+is sent to the debugger.
+
     Warning: The internal buffer is limited to 8196 bytes (including
+the '\0'-terminator).
+
     Warning: Passing (const char *)0 as argument to qFatal might lead
+to crashes on certain platforms due to the platforms printf implementation.
+
     
    See also qDebug(), qWarning(), qInstallMsgHandler(), and Debugging.
+
+
    TQtMsgHandler qInstallMsgHandler ( TQtMsgHandler h )
+
    
+
+
     Installs a TQt message handler h. Returns a pointer to the
+message handler previously defined.
+
     The message handler is a function that prints out debug messages,
+warnings and fatal error messages. The TQt library (debug version)
+contains hundreds of warning messages that are printed when
+internal errors (usually invalid function arguments) occur. If you
+implement your own message handler, you get total control of these
+messages.
+
     The default message handler prints the message to the standard
+output under X11 or to the debugger under Windows. If it is a
+fatal message, the application aborts immediately.
+
     Only one message handler can be defined, since this is usually
+done on an application-wide basis to control debug output.
+
     To restore the message handler, call qInstallMsgHandler(0).
+
     Example:
+
    +        #include <ntqapplication.h>
+        #include <stdio.h>
+        #include <stdlib.h>
+
+        void myMessageOutput( TQtMsgType type, const char *msg )
+        {
+            switch ( type ) {
+                case TQtDebugMsg:
+                    fprintf( stderr, "Debug: %s\n", msg );
+                    break;
+                case TQtWarningMsg:
+                    fprintf( stderr, "Warning: %s\n", msg );
+                    break;
+                case TQtFatalMsg:
+                    fprintf( stderr, "Fatal: %s\n", msg );
+                    abort();                    // deliberately core dump
+            }
+        }
+
+        int main( int argc, char **argv )
+        {
+            qInstallMsgHandler( myMessageOutput );
+            TQApplication a( argc, argv );
+            ...
+            return a.exec();
+        }
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also qDebug(), qWarning(), qFatal(), and Debugging.
+
+
    bool qSysInfo ( int * wordSize, bool * bigEndian )
+
    
+
+
     Obtains information about the system.
+
     The system's word size in bits (typically 32) is returned in *wordSize. The *bigEndian is set to TRUE if this is a big-endian
+machine, or to FALSE if this is a little-endian machine.
+
     In debug mode, this function calls qFatal() with a message if the
+computer is truly weird (i.e. different endianness for 16 bit and
+32 bit integers); in release mode it returns FALSE.
+
+
    void qSystemWarning ( const char * msg, int code )
+
    
+
+
     Prints the message msg and uses code to get a system specific
+error message. When code is -1 (the default), the system's last
+error code will be used if possible. Use this method to handle
+failures in platform specific API calls.
+
     This function does nothing when TQt is built with QT_NO_DEBUG
+defined.
+
+
    const char * qVersion ()
+
    
+
+
     Returns the TQt version number as a string, for example, "2.3.0" or
+"3.0.5".
+
     The QT_VERSION define has the numeric value in the form:
+0xmmiibb (m = major, i = minor, b = bugfix). For example, TQt
+3.0.5's QT_VERSION is 0x030005.
+
+
    void qWarning ( const char * msg, ... )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     Prints a warning message msg, or calls the message handler (if
+it has been installed).
+
     This function takes a format string and a list of arguments,
+similar to the C printf() function.
+
     Example:
+
    +        void f( int c )
+        {
+            if ( c > 200 )
+                qWarning( "f: bad argument, c == %d", c );
+        }
+    
    
+ 
+
     Under X11, the text is printed to stderr. Under Windows, the text
+is sent to the debugger.
+
     Warning: The internal buffer is limited to 8196 bytes (including
+the '\0'-terminator).
+
     Warning: Passing (const char *)0 as argument to qWarning might lead
+to crashes on certain platforms due to the platforms printf implementation.
+
     
    See also qDebug(), qFatal(), qInstallMsgHandler(), and Debugging.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqarray.html b/doc/html/ntqarray.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9940d3c57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqarray.html
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQArray Class Reference (obsolete)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQArray Class Reference (obsolete)
    
+
+ 
+
     
    +#include <ntqarray.h>
    
+ 
+
     The TQArray class has been renamed  TQMemArray  in TQt 3.0.
+
+
+
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqasciicache.html b/doc/html/ntqasciicache.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..561b1fea3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqasciicache.html
@@ -0,0 +1,252 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQAsciiCache Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQAsciiCache Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQAsciiCache class is a template class that provides a cache based on char* keys.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqasciicache.h>
+
    Inherits TQPtrCollection.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQAsciiCache ( int maxCost = 100, int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE, bool copyKeys = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • ~TQAsciiCache ()
      • 
+
    • int maxCost () const
      • 
+
    • int totalCost () const
      • 
+
    • void setMaxCost ( int m )
      • 
+
    • virtual uint count () const
      • 
+
    • uint size () const
      • 
+
    • bool isEmpty () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void clear ()
      • 
+
    • bool insert ( const char * k, const type * d, int c = 1, int p = 0 )
      • 
+
    • bool remove ( const char * k )
      • 
+
    • type * take ( const char * k )
      • 
+
    • type * find ( const char * k, bool ref = TRUE ) const
      • 
+
    • type * operator[] ( const char * k ) const
      • 
+
    • void statistics () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
     The TQAsciiCache class is a template class that provides a cache based on char* keys.
+
     
+
+
     TQAsciiCache is implemented as a template class. Define a template
+instance TQAsciiCache<X> to create a cache that operates on
+pointers to X (X*).
+
     A cache is a least recently used (LRU) list of cache items. The
+cache items are accessed via char* keys. For Unicode keys use
+the TQCache template instead, which uses TQString keys. A TQCache
+has the same performace as a TQAsciiCache.
+
     Each cache item has a cost. The sum of item costs, totalCost(),
+will not exceed the maximum cache cost, maxCost(). If inserting a
+new item would cause the total cost to exceed the maximum cost,
+the least recently used items in the cache are removed.
+
     Apart from insert(), by far the most important function is find()
+(which also exists as operator[]()). This function looks up an
+item, returns it, and by default marks it as being the most
+recently used item.
+
     There are also methods to remove() or take() an object from the
+cache. Calling setAutoDelete(TRUE) tells the cache to delete items that
+are removed. The default is to not delete items when then are
+removed (i.e., remove() and take() are equivalent).
+
     When inserting an item into the cache, only the pointer is copied,
+not the item itself. This is called a shallow copy. It is possible
+to make the cache copy all of the item's data (known as a deep copy) when an item is inserted. insert() calls the virtual
+function TQPtrCollection::newItem() for the item to be inserted.
+Inherit a cache and reimplement newItem() if you want deep copies.
+
     When removing a cache item the virtual function
+TQPtrCollection::deleteItem() is called. Its default implementation
+in TQAsciiCache is to delete the item if auto-deletion is enabled.
+
     There is a TQAsciiCacheIterator which may be used to traverse the
+items in the cache in arbitrary order.
+
     
    See also TQAsciiCacheIterator, TQCache, TQIntCache, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQAsciiCache::TQAsciiCache ( int maxCost = 100, int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE, bool copyKeys = TRUE )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a cache whose contents will never have a total cost
+greater than maxCost and which is expected to contain less than
+size items.
+
     size is actually the size of an internal hash array; it's
+usually best to make it prime and at least 50% bigger than the
+largest expected number of items in the cache.
+
     Each inserted item has an associated cost. When inserting a new
+item, if the total cost of all items in the cache will exceed maxCost, the cache will start throwing out the older (least
+recently used) items until there is enough room for the new item
+to be inserted.
+
     If caseSensitive is TRUE (the default), the cache keys are case
+sensitive; if it is FALSE, they are case-insensitive.
+Case-insensitive comparison only affects the 26 letters in
+US-ASCII. If copyKeys is TRUE (the default), TQAsciiCache makes
+a copy of the cache keys, otherwise it copies just the const char
+* pointer - slightly faster if you can guarantee that the keys
+will never change, but very risky.
+
+
    TQAsciiCache::~TQAsciiCache ()
+
    
+
+
     Removes all items from the cache and destroys it.
+All iterators that access this cache will be reset.
+
+
    void TQAsciiCache::clear () [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Removes all items from the cache, and deletes them if auto-deletion has been
+enabled.
+
     All cache iterators that operate on this cache are reset.
+
     
    See also remove() and take().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
+
    uint TQAsciiCache::count () const [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of items in the cache.
+
     
    See also totalCost() and size().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
+
    type * TQAsciiCache::find ( const char * k, bool ref = TRUE ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the item with key k, or 0 if the key does not exist
+in the cache. If ref is TRUE (the default), the item is moved
+to the front of the least recently used list.
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was
+inserted last is returned.
+
+
    bool TQAsciiCache::insert ( const char * k, const type * d, int c = 1, int p = 0 )
+
    
+
+
     Inserts the item d into the cache using key k, and with an
+associated cost of c. Returns TRUE if the item is successfully
+inserted. Returns FALSE if the item is not inserted, for example,
+if the cost of the item exceeds maxCost().
+
     The cache's size is limited, and if the total cost is too high,
+TQAsciiCache will remove old, least recently used items until there
+is room for this new item.
+
     Items with duplicate keys can be inserted.
+
     The parameter p is internal and should be left at the default
+value (0).
+
     Warning: If this function returns FALSE, you must delete d
+yourself. Additionally, be very careful about using d after
+calling this function, because any other insertions into the
+cache, from anywhere in the application or within TQt itself, could
+cause the object to be discarded from the cache and the pointer to
+become invalid.
+
+
    bool TQAsciiCache::isEmpty () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the cache is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    int TQAsciiCache::maxCost () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the maximum allowed total cost of the cache.
+
     
    See also setMaxCost() and totalCost().
+
+
    type * TQAsciiCache::operator[] ( const char * k ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the item with key k, or 0 if k does not exist in
+the cache, and moves the item to the front of the least recently
+used list.
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was
+inserted last is returned.
+
     This is the same as find( k, TRUE ).
+
     
    See also find().
+
+
    bool TQAsciiCache::remove ( const char * k )
+
    
+
+
     Removes the item with key k and returns TRUE if the item was
+present in the cache; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     The item is deleted if auto-deletion has been enabled, i.e., if
+you have called setAutoDelete(TRUE).
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was
+inserted last is removed.
+
     All iterators that refer to the removed item are set to point to
+the next item in the cache's traversal order.
+
     
    See also take() and clear().
+
+
    void TQAsciiCache::setMaxCost ( int m )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the maximum allowed total cost of the cache to m. If the
+current total cost is greater than m, some items are removed
+immediately.
+
     
    See also maxCost() and totalCost().
+
+
    uint TQAsciiCache::size () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the size of the hash array used to implement the cache.
+This should be a bit bigger than count() is likely to be.
+
+
    void TQAsciiCache::statistics () const
+
    
+
+
     A debug-only utility function. Prints out cache usage, hit/miss,
+and distribution information using qDebug(). This function does
+nothing in the release library.
+
+
    type * TQAsciiCache::take ( const char * k )
+
    
+
+
     Takes the item associated with k out of the cache without
+deleting it and returns a pointer to the item taken out, or 0
+if the key does not exist in the cache.
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was
+inserted last is taken.
+
     All iterators that refer to the taken item are set to point to the
+next item in the cache's traversal order.
+
     
    See also remove() and clear().
+
+
    int TQAsciiCache::totalCost () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the total cost of the items in the cache. This is an
+integer in the range 0 to maxCost().
+
     
    See also setMaxCost().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqasciidict.html b/doc/html/ntqasciidict.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6f943da08
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqasciidict.html
@@ -0,0 +1,325 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQAsciiDict Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQAsciiDict Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQAsciiDict class is a template class that provides a dictionary based on char* keys.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqasciidict.h>
+
    Inherits TQPtrCollection.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQAsciiDict ( int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE, bool copyKeys = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • TQAsciiDict ( const TQAsciiDict<type> & dict )
      • 
+
    • ~TQAsciiDict ()
      • 
+
    • TQAsciiDict<type> & operator= ( const TQAsciiDict<type> & dict )
      • 
+
    • virtual uint count () const
      • 
+
    • uint size () const
      • 
+
    • bool isEmpty () const
      • 
+
    • void insert ( const char * key, const type * item )
      • 
+
    • void replace ( const char * key, const type * item )
      • 
+
    • bool remove ( const char * key )
      • 
+
    • type * take ( const char * key )
      • 
+
    • type * find ( const char * key ) const
      • 
+
    • type * operator[] ( const char * key ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual void clear ()
      • 
+
    • void resize ( uint newsize )
      • 
+
    • void statistics () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Important Inherited Members
    
+
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • virtual TQDataStream & read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item )
      • 
+
    • virtual TQDataStream & write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item ) const
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQAsciiDict class is a template class that provides a dictionary based on char* keys.
+
     
+
+
     
+
     TQAsciiDict is implemented as a template class. Define a template
+instance TQAsciiDict<X> to create a dictionary that operates on
+pointers to X (X*).
+
     A dictionary is a collection of key-value pairs. The key is a
+char* used for insertion, removal and lookup. The value is a
+pointer. Dictionaries provide very fast insertion and lookup.
+
     TQAsciiDict cannot handle Unicode keys; use the TQDict template
+instead, which uses TQString keys. A TQDict has the same
+performace as a TQAsciiDict.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQAsciiDict<TQLineEdit> fields; // char* keys, TQLineEdit* values
+    fields.insert( "forename", new TQLineEdit( this ) );
+    fields.insert( "surname", new TQLineEdit( this ) );
+
+    fields["forename"]->setText( "Homer" );
+    fields["surname"]->setText( "Simpson" );
+
+    TQAsciiDictIterator<TQLineEdit> it( fields ); // See TQAsciiDictIterator
+    for( ; it.current(); ++it )
+        cout << it.currentKey() << ": " << it.current()->text() << endl;
+    cout << endl;
+
+    if ( fields["forename"] && fields["surname"] )
+        cout << fields["forename"]->text() << " " 
+            << fields["surname"]->text() << endl;  // Prints "Homer Simpson"
+
+    fields.remove( "forename" ); // Does not delete the line edit
+    if ( ! fields["forename"] )
+        cout << "forename is not in the dictionary" << endl;
+    
    
+ 
+In this example we use a dictionary to keep track of the line
+edits we're using. We insert each line edit into the dictionary
+with a unique name and then access the line edits via the
+dictionary. See TQPtrDict, TQIntDict and TQDict.
+
     See TQDict for full details, including the choice of dictionary
+size, and how deletions are handled. 
+
     
    See also TQAsciiDictIterator, TQDict, TQIntDict, TQPtrDict, Collection Classes, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQAsciiDict::TQAsciiDict ( int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE, bool copyKeys = TRUE )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a dictionary optimized for less than size entries.
+
     We recommend setting size to a suitably large prime number (a
+bit larger than the expected number of entries). This makes the
+hash distribution better and will improve lookup performance.
+
     When caseSensitive is TRUE (the default) TQAsciiDict treats
+"abc" and "Abc" as different keys; when it is FALSE "abc" and
+"Abc" are the same. Case-insensitive comparison only considers the
+26 letters in US-ASCII.
+
     If copyKeys is TRUE (the default), the dictionary copies keys
+using strcpy(); if it is FALSE, the dictionary just copies the
+pointers.
+
+
    TQAsciiDict::TQAsciiDict ( const TQAsciiDict<type> & dict )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a copy of dict.
+
     Each item in dict is inserted into this dictionary. Only the
+pointers are copied (shallow copy).
+
+
    TQAsciiDict::~TQAsciiDict ()
+
    
+
+
     Removes all items from the dictionary and destroys it.
+
     The items are deleted if auto-delete is enabled.
+
     All iterators that access this dictionary will be reset.
+
     
    See also setAutoDelete().
+
+
    bool TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE.
+
     
    See also setAutoDelete().
+
+
    void TQAsciiDict::clear () [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Removes all items from the dictionary.
+
     The removed items are deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
+
     All dictionary iterators that operate on dictionary are reset.
+
     
    See also remove(), take(), and setAutoDelete().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
+
    uint TQAsciiDict::count () const [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of items in the dictionary.
+
     
    See also isEmpty().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
+
    type * TQAsciiDict::find ( const char * key ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the item associated with key, or 0 if the key does not
+exist in the dictionary.
+
     This function uses an internal hashing algorithm to optimize
+lookup.
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the item that
+was most recently inserted will be found.
+
     Equivalent to the [] operator.
+
     
    See also operator[]().
+
+
    void TQAsciiDict::insert ( const char * key, const type * item )
+
    
+
+
     Inserts the key with the item into the dictionary.
+
     Multiple items can have the same key, in which case only the last
+item will be accessible using operator[]().
+
     item may not be 0.
+
     
    See also replace().
+
+
    bool TQAsciiDict::isEmpty () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty, i.e. count() == 0;
+otherwise it returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also count().
+
+
    TQAsciiDict<type> & TQAsciiDict::operator= ( const TQAsciiDict<type> & dict )
+
    
+
+
     Assigns dict to this dictionary and returns a reference to this
+dictionary.
+
     This dictionary is first cleared and then each item in dict is
+inserted into this dictionary. Only the pointers are copied
+(shallow copy) unless newItem() has been reimplemented().
+
+
    type * TQAsciiDict::operator[] ( const char * key ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the item associated with key, or 0 if the key does
+not exist in the dictionary.
+
     This function uses an internal hashing algorithm to optimize
+lookup.
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the item that
+was most recently inserted will be found.
+
     Equivalent to the find() function.
+
     
    See also find().
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQAsciiDict::read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     Reads a dictionary item from the stream s and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
     The default implementation sets item to 0.
+
     
    See also write().
+
+
    bool TQAsciiDict::remove ( const char * key )
+
    
+
+
     Removes the item associated with key from the dictionary.
+Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the key existed in the
+dictionary; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most
+recently inserted item will be removed.
+
     The removed item is deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
+
     All dictionary iterators that refer to the removed item will be
+set to point to the next item in the dictionary traversal order.
+
     
    See also take(), clear(), and setAutoDelete().
+
+
    void TQAsciiDict::replace ( const char * key, const type * item )
+
    
+
+
     Replaces an item that has a key equal to key with item.
+
     If the item does not already exist, it will be inserted.
+
     item may not be 0.
+
     Equivalent to:
+
    +        TQAsciiDict<char> dict;
+            ...
+        if ( dict.find(key) )
+            dict.remove( key );
+        dict.insert( key, item );
+    
    
+ 
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most
+recently inserted item will be replaced.
+
     
    See also insert().
+
+
    void TQAsciiDict::resize ( uint newsize )
+
    
+
+
     Changes the size of the hashtable to newsize. The contents of
+the dictionary are preserved but all iterators on the dictionary
+become invalid.
+
+
    void TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if enable is
+TRUE and to never delete them if enable is FALSE.
+
     If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are
+deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient
+if the collection has the only pointer to the items.
+
     The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be
+careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself
+with two collections deleting the same items.
+
     Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions
+in subclasses. For example, a subclass that has a remove()
+function will remove the item from its data structure, and if
+auto-delete is enabled, will also delete the item.
+
     
    See also autoDelete().
+
+
    Examples: grapher/grapher.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, and table/bigtable/main.cpp.
+
    uint TQAsciiDict::size () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the size of the internal hash array (as specified in the
+constructor).
+
     
    See also count().
+
+
    void TQAsciiDict::statistics () const
+
    
+
+
     Debugging-only function that prints out the dictionary
+distribution using qDebug().
+
+
    type * TQAsciiDict::take ( const char * key )
+
    
+
+
     Takes the item associated with key out of the dictionary
+without deleting it (even if auto-deletion is enabled).
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most
+recently inserted item will be taken.
+
     Returns a pointer to the item taken out, or 0 if the key does not
+exist in the dictionary.
+
     All dictionary iterators that refer to the taken item will be set
+to point to the next item in the dictionary traversal order.
+
     
    See also remove(), clear(), and setAutoDelete().
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQAsciiDict::write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item ) const [virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     Writes a dictionary item to the stream s and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
     
    See also read().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqassistantclient.html b/doc/html/ntqassistantclient.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c28fb5b4f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqassistantclient.html
@@ -0,0 +1,179 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQAssistantClient Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQAssistantClient Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQAssistantClient class provides a means of using TQt
+Assistant as an application's help tool.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqassistantclient.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • bool open - whether TQt Assistant is open  (read only)
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQAssistantClient class provides a means of using TQt
+Assistant as an application's help tool.
+
     Using TQt Assistant is simple: Create a TQAssistantClient instance,
+then call showPage() as often as necessary to show your help
+pages. When you call showPage(), TQt Assistant will be launched if
+it isn't already running.
+
     The TQAssistantClient instance can open (openAssistant()) or close
+(closeAssistant()) TQt Assistant whenever required. If TQt Assistant
+is open, isOpen() returns TRUE.
+
     One TQAssistantClient instance interacts with one TQt Assistant
+instance, so every time you call openAssistant(), showPage() or
+closeAssistant() they are applied to the particular TQt Assistant
+instance associated with the TQAssistantClient.
+
     When you call openAssistant() the assistantOpened() signal is
+emitted. Similarly when closeAssistant() is called,
+assistantClosed() is emitted. In either case, if an error occurs,
+error() is emitted.
+
     This class is not included in the TQt library itself. To use it you
+must link against libqassistantclient.a (Unix) or qassistantclient.lib (Windows), which is built into INSTALL/lib
+if you built the TQt tools (INSTALL is the directory where TQt is
+installed). If you use qmake, then you can simply add the following
+line to your pro file:
+
     
    +        LIBS += -lqassistantclient
+    
    
+ 
+
     See also "Adding Documentation to TQt Assistant" in the TQt Assistant manual.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQAssistantClient::TQAssistantClient ( const TQString & path, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs an assistant client object. The path specifies the
+path to the TQt Assistant executable. If path is an empty
+string the system path (%PATH% or $PATH) is used.
+
     The assistant client object is a child of parent and is called
+name.
+
+
    TQAssistantClient::~TQAssistantClient ()
+
    
+Destroys the assistant client object and frees up all allocated
+resources.
+
+
    void TQAssistantClient::assistantClosed () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the connection to TQt Assistant is
+closed. This happens when the user exits TQt Assistant, or when an
+error in the server or client occurs, or if closeAssistant() is
+called.
+
+
    void TQAssistantClient::assistantOpened () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when TQt Assistant is open and the
+client-server communication is set up.
+
+
    void TQAssistantClient::closeAssistant () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Use this function to close TQt Assistant.
+
     
    See also assistantClosed().
+
+
    void TQAssistantClient::error ( const TQString & msg ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted if TQt Assistant cannot be started or if an
+error occurs during the initialization of the connection between
+TQt Assistant and the calling application. The msg provides an
+explanation of the error.
+
+
    bool TQAssistantClient::isOpen () const
+
    Returns TRUE if TQt Assistant is open; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "open" property for details.
+
    void TQAssistantClient::openAssistant () [virtual slot]
+
    
+This function opens TQt Assistant and sets up the client-server
+communiction between the application and TQt Assistant. If it is
+already open, this function does nothing. If an error occurs,
+error() is emitted.
+
     
    See also assistantOpened().
+
+
    void TQAssistantClient::setArguments ( const TQStringList & args )
+
    
+Sets the command line arguments used when TQt Assistant is
+started to args.
+
+
    void TQAssistantClient::showPage ( const TQString & page ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Call this function to make TQt Assistant show a particular page.
+The page is a filename (e.g. myhelpfile.html). See "Adding
+Documentation to TQt Assistant" in the TQt
+    Assistant manual for further information.
+
     If TQt Assistant hasn't been opened
+yet, this function will do nothing. You can use isOpen() to
+determine whether TQt Assistant is up and running, or you can
+connect to the asssistantOpened() signal.
+
     
    See also open and assistantOpened().
+
+
    Example: helpsystem/mainwindow.cpp.
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    bool open
    
+
    This property holds whether TQt Assistant is open.
+
    
+
    Get this property's value with isOpen().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqasyncio.html b/doc/html/ntqasyncio.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4f8664fd5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqasyncio.html
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQAsyncIO Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQAsyncIO Class Reference
    [obsolete]
    
+
+
    The TQAsyncIO class encapsulates I/O asynchronicity.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqasyncio.h>
+
    Inherited by TQDataSink and TQDataSource.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+This class is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     The TQAsyncIO class encapsulates I/O asynchronicity.
+
     The TQt classes for asynchronous input/output provide a simple
+mechanism to allow large files or slow data sources to be processed
+without using large amounts of memory or blocking the user interface.
+
     This facility is used in TQt to drive animated images.  See TQImageConsumer.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQAsyncIO::~TQAsyncIO () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the async IO object.
+
+
    void TQAsyncIO::connect ( TQObject * obj, const char * member )
+
    
+Ensures that only one object, obj and function, member, can
+respond to changes in readiness.
+
+
    void TQAsyncIO::ready () [protected]
+
    
+Derived classes should call this when they change from being
+unready to ready.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqbig5codec.html b/doc/html/ntqbig5codec.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ea7f2d6ad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqbig5codec.html
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQBig5Codec Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQBig5Codec Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQBig5Codec class provides conversion to and from the Big5 encoding.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqbig5codec.h>
+
    Inherits TQTextCodec.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
+
     The TQBig5Codec class provides conversion to and from the Big5 encoding.
+
     TQBig5Codec was originally contributed by Ming-Che Chuang
+<mingche@cobra.ee.ntu.edu.tw> for the Big-5+ encoding, and was
+included in TQt with the author's permission, and the grateful
+thanks of the Trolltech team. (Note: Ming-Che's code is TQPL'd, as
+per an mail to info@trolltech.com.)
+
     However, since Big-5+ was never formally approved, and was never
+used by anyone, the Taiwan Free Software community and the Li18nux
+Big5 Standard Subgroup agree that the de-facto standard Big5-ETen
+(zh_TW.Big5 or zh_TW.TW-Big5) be used instead.
+
     TQBig5Codec is currently implemented as a pure subset of
+TQBig5hkscsCodec, so more fine-tuning is needed to make it
+identical to the standard Big5 mapping as determined by
+Li18nux-Big5.  See http://www.autrijus.org/xml/ for the draft
+Big5 (2002) standard.
+
     James Su <suzhe@turbolinux.com.cn> <suzhe@gnuchina.org>
+generated the Big5-HKSCS<->Unicode tables with a very
+space-efficient algorithm. He generously donated his code to glibc
+in May 2002.  Subsequently, James has kindly allowed Anthony Fok
+<anthony@thizlinux.com> <foka@debian.org> to adapt the code
+for TQt.
+
     
+
     Copyright (C) 2000  Ming-Che Chuang
+Copyright (C) 2002  James Su, Turbolinux Inc.
+Copyright (C) 2002  Anthony Fok, ThizLinux Laboratory Ltd.
+
     Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+are met:
+
      
+
    1.  Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+
    2.  Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+
    
+
     THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSETQUENTIAL
+DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+SUCH DAMAGE.
+
    See also Internationalization with TQt.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqbitarray.html b/doc/html/ntqbitarray.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d4ecbf4af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqbitarray.html
@@ -0,0 +1,350 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQBitArray Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQBitArray Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQBitArray class provides an array of bits.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqbitarray.h>
+
    Inherits TQByteArray.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
      
+
    • TQBitArray operator& ( const TQBitArray & a1, const TQBitArray & a2 )
      • 
+
    • TQBitArray operator| ( const TQBitArray & a1, const TQBitArray & a2 )
      • 
+
    • TQBitArray operator^ ( const TQBitArray & a1, const TQBitArray & a2 )
      • 
+
    • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQBitArray & a )
      • 
+
    • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQBitArray & a )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
+The TQBitArray class provides an array of bits.
+
     
+
+
+
     Because TQBitArray is a TQMemArray, it uses explicit sharing with a reference count.
+
     A TQBitArray is a special byte array that can access individual
+bits and perform bit-operations (AND, OR, XOR and NOT) on entire
+arrays or bits.
+
     Bits can be manipulated by the setBit() and clearBit() functions,
+but it is also possible to use the indexing [] operator to test
+and set individual bits. The [] operator is a little slower than
+setBit() and clearBit() because some tricks are required to
+implement single-bit assignments.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQBitArray a(3);
+    a.setBit( 0 );
+    a.clearBit( 1 );
+    a.setBit( 2 );     // a = [1 0 1]
+
+    TQBitArray b(3);
+    b[0] = 1;
+    b[1] = 1;
+    b[2] = 0;          // b = [1 1 0]
+
+    TQBitArray c;
+    c = ~a & b;        // c = [0 1 0]
+    
    
+ 
+
     When a TQBitArray is constructed the bits are uninitialized. Use
+fill() to set all the bits to 0 or 1. The array can be resized
+with resize() and copied with copy(). Bits can be set with
+setBit() and cleared with clearBit(). Bits can be toggled with
+toggleBit(). A bit's value can be obtained with testBit() and with
+at().
+
     TQBitArray supports the & (AND), | (OR), ^ (XOR) and ~ (NOT)
+operators.
+
    See also Collection Classes, Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQBitArray::TQBitArray ()
+
    
+Constructs an empty bit array.
+
+
    TQBitArray::TQBitArray ( uint size )
+
    
+Constructs a bit array of size bits. The bits are uninitialized.
+
     
    See also fill().
+
+
    TQBitArray::TQBitArray ( const TQBitArray & a )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a shallow copy of a.
+
+
    bool TQBitArray::at ( uint index ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the value (0 or 1) of the bit at position index.
+
     
    See also operator[]().
+
+
    void TQBitArray::clearBit ( uint index )
+
    
+Clears the bit at position index, i.e. sets it to 0.
+
     
    See also setBit() and toggleBit().
+
+
    TQBitArray TQBitArray::copy () const
+
    
+Returns a deep copy of the bit array.
+
     
    See also detach().
+
+
    void TQBitArray::detach () [virtual]
+
    
+Detaches from shared bit array data and makes sure that this bit
+array is the only one referring to the data.
+
     If multiple bit arrays share common data, this bit array
+dereferences the data and gets a copy of the data. Nothing happens
+if there is only a single reference.
+
     
    See also copy().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQMemArray.
+
    bool TQBitArray::fill ( bool v, int size = -1 )
+
    
+Fills the bit array with v (1's if v is TRUE, or 0's if v
+is FALSE).
+
     fill() resizes the bit array to size bits if size is
+nonnegative.
+
     Returns FALSE if a nonnegative size was specified and the bit
+array could not be resized; otherwise returns TRUE.
+
     
    See also resize().
+
+
    TQBitArray & TQBitArray::operator&= ( const TQBitArray & a )
+
    
+Performs the AND operation between all bits in this bit array and
+a. Returns a reference to this bit array.
+
     The result has the length of the longest of the two bit arrays,
+with any missing bits (i.e. if one array is shorter than the
+other), taken to be 0.
+
    +    TQBitArray a( 3 ), b( 2 );
+    a[0] = 1;  a[1] = 0;  a[2] = 1;     // a = [1 0 1]
+    b[0] = 1;  b[1] = 0;                // b = [1 0]
+    a &= b;                             // a = [1 0 0]
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also operator|=(), operator^=(), and operator~().
+
+
    TQBitArray & TQBitArray::operator= ( const TQBitArray & a )
+
    
+
+
     Assigns a shallow copy of a to this bit array and returns a
+reference to this array.
+
+
    TQBitVal TQBitArray::operator[] ( int index )
+
    
+
+
     Implements the [] operator for bit arrays.
+
     The returned TQBitVal is a context object. It makes it possible to
+get and set a single bit value by its index position.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQBitArray a( 3 );
+    a[0] = 0;
+    a[1] = 1;
+    a[2] = a[0] ^ a[1];
+    
    
+ 
+
     The functions testBit(), setBit() and clearBit() are faster.
+
     
    See also at().
+
+
    bool TQBitArray::operator[] ( int index ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Implements the [] operator for constant bit arrays.
+
+
    TQBitArray & TQBitArray::operator^= ( const TQBitArray & a )
+
    
+Performs the XOR operation between all bits in this bit array and
+a. Returns a reference to this bit array.
+
     The result has the length of the longest of the two bit arrays,
+with any missing bits (i.e. if one array is shorter than the
+other), taken to be 0.
+
    +    TQBitArray a( 3 ), b( 2 );
+    a[0] = 1;  a[1] = 0;  a[2] = 1;     // a = [1 0 1]
+    b[0] = 1;  b[1] = 0;                // b = [1 0]
+    a ^= b;                             // a = [0 0 1]
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also operator&=(), operator|=(), and operator~().
+
+
    TQBitArray & TQBitArray::operator|= ( const TQBitArray & a )
+
    
+Performs the OR operation between all bits in this bit array and
+a. Returns a reference to this bit array.
+
     The result has the length of the longest of the two bit arrays,
+with any missing bits (i.e. if one array is shorter than the
+other), taken to be 0.
+
    +    TQBitArray a( 3 ), b( 2 );
+    a[0] = 1;  a[1] = 0;  a[2] = 1;     // a = [1 0 1]
+    b[0] = 1;  b[1] = 0;                // b = [1 0]
+    a |= b;                             // a = [1 0 1]
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also operator&=(), operator^=(), and operator~().
+
+
    TQBitArray TQBitArray::operator~ () const
+
    
+Returns a bit array that contains the inverted bits of this bit array.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQBitArray a( 3 ), b;
+    a[0] = 1;  a[1] = 0; a[2] = 1;      // a = [1 0 1]
+    b = ~a;                             // b = [0 1 0]
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    bool TQBitArray::resize ( uint size )
+
    
+Resizes the bit array to size bits and returns TRUE if the bit
+array could be resized; otherwise returns FALSE. The array becomes
+a null array if size == 0.
+
     If the array is expanded, the new bits are set to 0.
+
     
    See also size().
+
+
    void TQBitArray::setBit ( uint index, bool value )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the bit at position index to value.
+
     Equivalent to:
+
    +    if ( value )
+        setBit( index );
+    else
+        clearBit( index );
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also clearBit() and toggleBit().
+
+
    void TQBitArray::setBit ( uint index )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the bit at position index to 1.
+
     
    See also clearBit() and toggleBit().
+
+
    uint TQBitArray::size () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the bit array's size (number of bits).
+
     
    See also resize().
+
+
    bool TQBitArray::testBit ( uint index ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the bit at position index is set, i.e. is 1;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setBit() and clearBit().
+
+
    bool TQBitArray::toggleBit ( uint index )
+
    
+Toggles the bit at position index.
+
     If the previous value was 0, the new value will be 1. If the
+previous value was 1, the new value will be 0.
+
     
    See also setBit() and clearBit().
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    TQBitArray operator& ( const TQBitArray & a1, const TQBitArray & a2 )
+
    
+
+
     Returns the AND result between the bit arrays a1 and a2.
+
     The result has the length of the longest of the two bit arrays,
+with any missing bits (i.e. if one array is shorter than the
+other), taken to be 0.
+
     
    See also TQBitArray::operator&=().
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQBitArray & a )
+
    
+
+
     Writes bit array a to stream s.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQBitArray & a )
+
    
+
+
     Reads a bit array into a from stream s.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
    TQBitArray operator^ ( const TQBitArray & a1, const TQBitArray & a2 )
+
    
+
+
     Returns the XOR result between the bit arrays a1 and a2.
+
     The result has the length of the longest of the two bit arrays,
+with any missing bits (i.e. if one array is shorter than the
+other), taken to be 0.
+
     
    See also TQBitArray::operator^().
+
+
    TQBitArray operator| ( const TQBitArray & a1, const TQBitArray & a2 )
+
    
+
+
     Returns the OR result between the bit arrays a1 and a2.
+
     The result has the length of the longest of the two bit arrays,
+with any missing bits (i.e. if one array is shorter than the
+other), taken to be 0.
+
     
    See also TQBitArray::operator|=().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqbitmap.html b/doc/html/ntqbitmap.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f0e55c2de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqbitmap.html
@@ -0,0 +1,186 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQBitmap Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQBitmap Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQBitmap class provides monochrome (1-bit depth) pixmaps.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqbitmap.h>
+
    Inherits TQPixmap.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQBitmap ()
      • 
+
    • TQBitmap ( int w, int h, bool clear = FALSE, TQPixmap::Optimization optimization = TQPixmap::DefaultOptim )
      • 
+
    • TQBitmap ( const TQSize & size, bool clear = FALSE, TQPixmap::Optimization optimization = TQPixmap::DefaultOptim )
      • 
+
    • TQBitmap ( int w, int h, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap = FALSE )
      • 
+
    • TQBitmap ( const TQSize & size, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap = FALSE )
      • 
+
    • TQBitmap ( const TQBitmap & bitmap )
      • 
+
    • TQBitmap ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQBitmap & operator= ( const TQBitmap & bitmap )
      • 
+
    • TQBitmap & operator= ( const TQPixmap & pixmap )
      • 
+
    • TQBitmap & operator= ( const TQImage & image )
      • 
+
    • TQBitmap xForm ( const TQWMatrix & matrix ) const
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQBitmap class provides monochrome (1-bit depth) pixmaps.
+
     
+
+
+
     The TQBitmap class is a monochrome off-screen paint device used
+mainly for creating custom TQCursor and TQBrush objects, in
+TQPixmap::setMask() and for TQRegion.
+
     A TQBitmap is a TQPixmap with a depth
+of 1. If a pixmap with a depth greater than 1 is assigned to a
+bitmap, the bitmap will be dithered automatically. A TQBitmap is
+guaranteed to always have the depth 1, unless it is
+TQPixmap::isNull() which has depth 0.
+
     When drawing in a TQBitmap (or TQPixmap with depth 1), we recommend
+using the  TQColor objects TQt::color0 and TQt::color1.
+Painting with color0 sets the bitmap bits to 0, and painting
+with color1 sets the bits to 1. For a bitmap, 0-bits indicate
+background (or transparent) and 1-bits indicate foreground (or
+opaque). Using the black and white TQColor objects make no
+sense because the TQColor::pixel() value is not necessarily 0 for
+black and 1 for white.
+
     The TQBitmap can be transformed (translated, scaled, sheared or
+rotated) using xForm().
+
     Just like the TQPixmap class, TQBitmap is optimized by the use of
+implicit sharing, so it is very
+efficient to pass TQBitmap objects as arguments.
+
     
    See also TQPixmap, TQPainter::drawPixmap(), bitBlt(), Shared Classes, Graphics Classes, Image Processing Classes, and Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQBitmap::TQBitmap ()
+
    
+Constructs a null bitmap.
+
     
    See also TQPixmap::isNull().
+
+
    TQBitmap::TQBitmap ( int w, int h, bool clear = FALSE, TQPixmap::Optimization optimization = TQPixmap::DefaultOptim )
+
    
+Constructs a bitmap with width w and height h.
+
     The contents of the bitmap is uninitialized if clear is FALSE;
+otherwise it is filled with pixel value 0 (the TQColor TQt::color0).
+
     The optional optimization argument specifies the optimization
+setting for the bitmap. The default optimization should be used in
+most cases. Games and other pixmap-intensive applications may
+benefit from setting this argument; see TQPixmap::Optimization.
+
     
    See also TQPixmap::setOptimization() and TQPixmap::setDefaultOptimization().
+
+
    TQBitmap::TQBitmap ( const TQSize & size, bool clear = FALSE, TQPixmap::Optimization optimization = TQPixmap::DefaultOptim )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Constructs a bitmap with the size size.
+
     The contents of the bitmap is uninitialized if clear is FALSE;
+otherwise it is filled with pixel value 0 (the TQColor TQt::color0).
+
     The optional optimization argument specifies the optimization
+setting for the bitmap. The default optimization should be used in
+most cases. Games and other pixmap-intensive applications may
+benefit from setting this argument; see TQPixmap::Optimization.
+
+
    TQBitmap::TQBitmap ( int w, int h, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap = FALSE )
+
    
+Constructs a bitmap with width w and height h and sets the
+contents to bits.
+
     The isXbitmap flag should be TRUE if bits was generated by
+the X11 bitmap program. The X bitmap bit order is little endian.
+The TQImage documentation discusses bit order of monochrome images.
+
     Example (creates an arrow bitmap):
+
    +        uchar arrow_bits[] = { 0x3f, 0x1f, 0x0f, 0x1f, 0x3b, 0x71, 0xe0, 0xc0 };
+        TQBitmap bm( 8, 8, arrow_bits, TRUE );
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    TQBitmap::TQBitmap ( const TQSize & size, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap = FALSE )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Constructs a bitmap with the size size and sets the contents to
+bits.
+
     The isXbitmap flag should be TRUE if bits was generated by
+the X11 bitmap program. The X bitmap bit order is little endian.
+The TQImage documentation discusses bit order of monochrome images.
+
+
    TQBitmap::TQBitmap ( const TQBitmap & bitmap )
+
    
+Constructs a bitmap that is a copy of bitmap.
+
+
    TQBitmap::TQBitmap ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a bitmap from the file fileName. If the file does
+not exist or is of an unknown format, the bitmap becomes a null
+bitmap.
+
     The parameters fileName and format are passed on to
+TQPixmap::load(). Dithering will be performed if the file format
+uses more than 1 bit per pixel.
+
     
    See also TQPixmap::isNull(), TQPixmap::load(), TQPixmap::loadFromData(), TQPixmap::save(), and TQPixmap::imageFormat().
+
+
    TQBitmap & TQBitmap::operator= ( const TQBitmap & bitmap )
+
    
+Assigns the bitmap bitmap to this bitmap and returns a
+reference to this bitmap.
+
+
    TQBitmap & TQBitmap::operator= ( const TQPixmap & pixmap )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Assigns the pixmap pixmap to this bitmap and returns a
+reference to this bitmap.
+
     Dithering will be performed if the pixmap has a TQPixmap::depth()
+greater than 1.
+
+
    TQBitmap & TQBitmap::operator= ( const TQImage & image )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Converts the image image to a bitmap and assigns the result to
+this bitmap. Returns a reference to the bitmap.
+
     Dithering will be performed if the image has a TQImage::depth()
+greater than 1.
+
+
    TQBitmap TQBitmap::xForm ( const TQWMatrix & matrix ) const
+
    
+Returns a transformed copy of this bitmap by using matrix.
+
     This function does exactly the same as TQPixmap::xForm(), except
+that it returns a TQBitmap instead of a TQPixmap.
+
     
    See also TQPixmap::xForm().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqbrush.html b/doc/html/ntqbrush.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..473980a56
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqbrush.html
@@ -0,0 +1,239 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQBrush Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQBrush Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQBrush class defines the fill pattern of shapes drawn by a TQPainter.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqbrush.h>
+
    Inherits TQt.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQBrush ()
      • 
+
    • TQBrush ( BrushStyle style )
      • 
+
    • TQBrush ( const TQColor & color, BrushStyle style = SolidPattern )
      • 
+
    • TQBrush ( const TQColor & color, const TQPixmap & pixmap )
      • 
+
    • TQBrush ( const TQBrush & b )
      • 
+
    • ~TQBrush ()
      • 
+
    • TQBrush & operator= ( const TQBrush & b )
      • 
+
    • BrushStyle style () const
      • 
+
    • void setStyle ( BrushStyle s )
      • 
+
    • const TQColor & color () const
      • 
+
    • void setColor ( const TQColor & c )
      • 
+
    • TQPixmap * pixmap () const
      • 
+
    • void setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pixmap )
      • 
+
    • bool operator== ( const TQBrush & b ) const
      • 
+
    • bool operator!= ( const TQBrush & b ) const
      • 
+
    
+
    Related Functions
    
+
      
+
    • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQBrush & b )
      • 
+
    • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQBrush & b )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
     The TQBrush class defines the fill pattern of shapes drawn by a TQPainter.
+
     
+
+
+
     A brush has a style and a color. One of the brush styles is a
+custom pattern, which is defined by a TQPixmap.
+
     The brush style defines the fill pattern. The default brush style
+is NoBrush (depending on how you construct a brush). This style
+tells the painter to not fill shapes. The standard style for
+filling is SolidPattern.
+
     The brush color defines the color of the fill pattern. The TQColor
+documentation lists the predefined colors.
+
     Use the TQPen class for specifying line/outline styles.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQPainter painter;
+        TQBrush   brush( yellow );           // yellow solid pattern
+        painter.begin( &anyPaintDevice );   // paint something
+        painter.setBrush( brush );          // set the yellow brush
+        painter.setPen( NoPen );            // do not draw outline
+        painter.drawRect( 40,30, 200,100 ); // draw filled rectangle
+        painter.setBrush( NoBrush );        // do not fill
+        painter.setPen( black );            // set black pen, 0 pixel width
+        painter.drawRect( 10,10, 30,20 );   // draw rectangle outline
+        painter.end();                      // painting done
+    
    
+ 
+
     See the setStyle() function for a complete list of brush styles.
+
     
    Brush Styles
     
+
     
    See also TQPainter, TQPainter::setBrush(), TQPainter::setBrushOrigin(), Graphics Classes, Image Processing Classes, and Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQBrush::TQBrush ()
+
    
+Constructs a default black brush with the style NoBrush (will
+not fill shapes).
+
+
    TQBrush::TQBrush ( BrushStyle style )
+
    
+Constructs a black brush with the style style.
+
     
    See also setStyle().
+
+
    TQBrush::TQBrush ( const TQColor & color, BrushStyle style = SolidPattern )
+
    
+Constructs a brush with the color color and the style style.
+
     
    See also setColor() and setStyle().
+
+
    TQBrush::TQBrush ( const TQColor & color, const TQPixmap & pixmap )
+
    
+Constructs a brush with the color color and a custom pattern
+stored in pixmap.
+
     The color will only have an effect for monochrome pixmaps, i.e.
+for TQPixmap::depth() == 1.
+
     Pixmap brushes are currently not supported when printing on X11.
+
     
    See also setColor() and setPixmap().
+
+
    TQBrush::TQBrush ( const TQBrush & b )
+
    
+Constructs a brush that is a shallow
+    copy of b.
+
+
    TQBrush::~TQBrush ()
+
    
+Destroys the brush.
+
+
    const TQColor & TQBrush::color () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the brush color.
+
     
    See also setColor().
+
+
    bool TQBrush::operator!= ( const TQBrush & b ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the brush is different from b; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     Two brushes are different if they have different styles, colors or
+pixmaps.
+
     
    See also operator==().
+
+
    TQBrush & TQBrush::operator= ( const TQBrush & b )
+
    
+Assigns b to this brush and returns a reference to this brush.
+
+
    bool TQBrush::operator== ( const TQBrush & b ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the brush is equal to b; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     Two brushes are equal if they have equal styles, colors and
+pixmaps.
+
     
    See also operator!=().
+
+
    TQPixmap * TQBrush::pixmap () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a pointer to the custom brush pattern, or 0 if no custom
+brush pattern has been set.
+
     
    See also setPixmap().
+
+
    Example: richtext/richtext.cpp.
+
    void TQBrush::setColor ( const TQColor & c )
+
    
+Sets the brush color to c.
+
     
    See also color() and setStyle().
+
+
    Example: picture/picture.cpp.
+
    void TQBrush::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pixmap )
+
    
+Sets the brush pixmap to pixmap. The style is set to CustomPattern.
+
     The current brush color will only have an effect for monochrome
+pixmaps, i.e. for TQPixmap::depth() == 1.
+
     Pixmap brushes are currently not supported when printing on X11.
+
     
    See also pixmap() and color().
+
+
    Example: richtext/richtext.cpp.
+
    void TQBrush::setStyle ( BrushStyle s )
+
    
+Sets the brush style to s.
+
     The brush styles are:
+
    
+
     Pattern Meaning
+
     NoBrush will not fill shapes (default).
+
     SolidPattern  solid (100%) fill pattern.
+
     Dense1Pattern  94% fill pattern.
+
     Dense2Pattern  88% fill pattern.
+
     Dense3Pattern  63% fill pattern.
+
     Dense4Pattern  50% fill pattern.
+
     Dense5Pattern  37% fill pattern.
+
     Dense6Pattern  12% fill pattern.
+
     Dense7Pattern  6% fill pattern.
+
     HorPattern horizontal lines pattern.
+
     VerPattern vertical lines pattern.
+
     CrossPattern crossing lines pattern.
+
     BDiagPattern diagonal lines (directed /) pattern.
+
     FDiagPattern diagonal lines (directed \) pattern.
+
     DiagCrossPattern diagonal crossing lines pattern.
+
     CustomPattern set when a pixmap pattern is being used.
+
    
+
     On Windows, dense and custom patterns cannot be transparent.
+
     See the Detailed Description for a picture
+of all the styles.
+
     
    See also style().
+
+
    BrushStyle TQBrush::style () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the brush style.
+
     
    See also setStyle().
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQBrush & b )
+
    
+
+
     Writes the brush b to the stream s and returns a reference
+to the stream.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQBrush & b )
+
    
+
+
     Reads the brush b from the stream s and returns a reference
+to the stream.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqbuffer.html b/doc/html/ntqbuffer.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7f0714de8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqbuffer.html
@@ -0,0 +1,148 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQBuffer Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQBuffer Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQBuffer class is an I/O device that operates on a TQByteArray.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqbuffer.h>
+
    Inherits TQIODevice.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
+The TQBuffer class is an I/O device that operates on a TQByteArray.
+
     
+
+
     TQBuffer is used to read and write to a memory buffer. It is
+normally used with a TQTextStream or a TQDataStream. TQBuffer has an
+associated TQByteArray which holds the buffer data. The size() of
+the buffer is automatically adjusted as data is written.
+
     The constructor TQBuffer(TQByteArray) creates a TQBuffer using an
+existing byte array. The byte array can also be set with
+setBuffer(). Writing to the TQBuffer will modify the original byte
+array because TQByteArray is explicitly
+    shared.
+
     Use open() to open the buffer before use and to set the mode
+(read-only, write-only, etc.). close() closes the buffer. The
+buffer must be closed before reopening or calling setBuffer().
+
     A common way to use TQBuffer is through TQDataStream or TQTextStream, which have constructors that take a TQBuffer
+parameter. For convenience, there are also TQDataStream and
+TQTextStream constructors that take a TQByteArray parameter. These
+constructors create and open an internal TQBuffer.
+
     Note that TQTextStream can also operate on a TQString (a Unicode
+string); a TQBuffer cannot.
+
     You can also use TQBuffer directly through the standard TQIODevice
+functions readBlock(), writeBlock() readLine(), at(), getch(),
+putch() and ungetch().
+
     
    See also TQFile, TQDataStream, TQTextStream, TQByteArray, Shared Classes, Collection Classes, and Input/Output and Networking.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQBuffer::TQBuffer ()
+
    
+Constructs an empty buffer.
+
+
    TQBuffer::TQBuffer ( TQByteArray buf )
+
    
+Constructs a buffer that operates on buf.
+
     If you open the buffer in write mode (IO_WriteOnly or
+IO_ReadWrite) and write something into the buffer, buf
+will be modified.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQCString str = "abc";
+    TQBuffer b( str );
+    b.open( IO_WriteOnly );
+    b.at( 3 ); // position at the 4th character (the terminating \0)
+    b.writeBlock( "def", 4 ); // write "def" including the terminating \0
+    b.close();
+    // Now, str == "abcdef" with a terminating \0
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also setBuffer().
+
+
    TQBuffer::~TQBuffer ()
+
    
+Destroys the buffer.
+
+
    TQByteArray TQBuffer::buffer () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns this buffer's byte array.
+
     
    See also setBuffer().
+
+
    bool TQBuffer::setBuffer ( TQByteArray buf )
+
    
+Replaces the buffer's contents with buf and returns TRUE.
+
     Does nothing (and returns FALSE) if isOpen() is TRUE.
+
     Note that if you open the buffer in write mode (IO_WriteOnly or
+IO_ReadWrite) and write something into the buffer, buf is also
+modified because TQByteArray is an explicitly shared class.
+
     
    See also buffer(), open(), and close().
+
+
    Q_LONG TQBuffer::writeBlock ( const char * p, Q_ULONG len ) [virtual]
+
    
+Writes len bytes from p into the buffer at the current
+index position, overwriting any characters there and extending the
+buffer if necessary. Returns the number of bytes actually written.
+
     Returns -1 if an error occurred.
+
     
    See also readBlock().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
+
    Q_LONG TQBuffer::writeBlock ( const TQByteArray & data )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This convenience function is the same as calling
+writeBlock( data.data(), data.size() ) with data.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqbutton.html b/doc/html/ntqbutton.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..92676a71f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqbutton.html
@@ -0,0 +1,477 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQButton Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQButton Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQButton class is the abstract base class of button
+widgets, providing functionality common to buttons.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqbutton.h>
+
    Inherits TQWidget.
+
    Inherited by TQCheckBox, TQPushButton, TQRadioButton, and TQToolButton.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • TQKeySequence accel - the accelerator associated with the button
      • 
+
    • bool autoRepeat - whether autoRepeat is enabled
      • 
+
    • bool autoResize - whether autoResize is enabled  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • bool down - whether the button is pressed
      • 
+
    • bool exclusiveToggle - whether the button is an exclusive toggle  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool on - whether the button is toggled  (read only)
      • 
+
    • TQPixmap pixmap - the pixmap shown on the button
      • 
+
    • TQString text - the text shown on the button
      • 
+
    • bool toggleButton - whether the button is a toggle button  (read only)
      • 
+
    • ToggleState toggleState - the state of the toggle button  (read only)
      • 
+
    • ToggleType toggleType - the type of toggle on the button  (read only)
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQButton class is the abstract base class of button
+widgets, providing functionality common to buttons.
+
     
+
     If you want to create a button use TQPushButton.
+
     The TQButton class implements an abstract button, and lets
+subclasses specify how to reply to user actions and how to draw
+the button.
+
     TQButton provides both push and toggle buttons. The TQRadioButton
+and TQCheckBox classes provide only toggle buttons; TQPushButton and
+TQToolButton provide both toggle and push buttons.
+
     Any button can have either a text or pixmap label. setText() sets
+the button to be a text button and setPixmap() sets it to be a
+pixmap button. The text/pixmap is manipulated as necessary to
+create the "disabled" appearance when the button is disabled.
+
     TQButton provides most of the states used for buttons:
+
      
+
    •  isDown() indicates whether the button is pressed down.
+
    •  isOn() indicates whether the button is on.
+Only toggle buttons can be switched on and off  (see below).
+
    •  isEnabled() indicates whether the button can be pressed by the
+user.
+
    •  setAutoRepeat() sets whether the button will auto-repeat
+if the user holds it down.
+
    •  setToggleButton() sets whether the button is a toggle
+button or not.
+
    
+
     The difference between isDown() and isOn() is as follows: When the
+user clicks a toggle button to toggle it on, the button is first
+pressed and then released into the on state. When the user
+clicks it again (to toggle it off), the button moves first to the
+pressed state, then to the off state (isOn() and isDown()
+are both FALSE).
+
     Default buttons (as used in many dialogs) are provided by
+TQPushButton::setDefault() and TQPushButton::setAutoDefault().
+
     TQButton provides five signals:
+
      
+
    1.  pressed() is emitted when the button is pressed. E.g. with the mouse
+or when animateClick() is called.
+
    2.  released() is emitted when the button is released. E.g. when the mouse
+is released or the cursor is moved outside the widget.
+
    3.  clicked() is emitted when the button is first pressed and then
+released when the accelerator key is typed, or when
+animateClick() is called.
+
    4.  toggled(bool) is emitted when the state of a toggle button changes.
+
    5.  stateChanged(int) is emitted when the state of a tristate
+toggle button changes.
+
    
+
     If the button is a text button with an ampersand (&) in its text,
+TQButton creates an automatic accelerator key. This code creates a
+push button labelled "Rock & Roll" (where the c is
+underlined). The button gets an automatic accelerator key, Alt+C:
+
     
    +        TQPushButton *p = new TQPushButton( "Ro&ck && Roll", this );
+    
    
+ 
+
     In this example, when the user presses Alt+C the button will call
+animateClick().
+
     You can also set a custom accelerator using the setAccel()
+function. This is useful mostly for pixmap buttons because they
+have no automatic accelerator.
+
     
    +        p->setPixmap( TQPixmap("print.png") );
+        p->setAccel( ALT+Key_F7 );
+    
    
+ 
+
     All of the buttons provided by TQt (TQPushButton, TQToolButton,
+TQCheckBox and TQRadioButton) can display both text and
+pixmaps.
+
     To subclass TQButton, you must reimplement at least drawButton()
+(to draw the button's outline) and drawButtonLabel() (to draw its
+text or pixmap). It is generally advisable to reimplement
+sizeHint() as well, and sometimes hitButton() (to determine
+whether a button press is within the button).
+
     To reduce flickering, TQButton::paintEvent() sets up a pixmap that
+the drawButton() function draws in. You should not reimplement
+paintEvent() for a subclass of TQButton unless you want to take
+over all drawing.
+
     
    See also TQButtonGroup and Abstract Widget Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQButton::ToggleState
    
+
+
     This enum defines the state of a toggle button.
+
      
+
    • TQButton::Off - the button is in the "off" state
+
    • TQButton::NoChange - the button is in the default/unchanged state
+
    • TQButton::On - the button is in the "on" state
+
    
+
    TQButton::ToggleType
    
+
+
     This enum type defines what a button can do in response to a
+mouse/keyboard press:
+
      
+
    • TQButton::SingleShot - pressing the button causes an action, then the
+button returns to the unpressed state.
+
    • TQButton::Toggle - pressing the button toggles it between an On and
+an Off state.
+
    • TQButton::Tristate - pressing the button cycles between the three
+states On, Off and NoChange
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQButton::TQButton ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a standard button called name with parent parent,
+using the widget flags f.
+
     If parent is a TQButtonGroup, this constructor calls
+TQButtonGroup::insert().
+
+
    TQButton::~TQButton ()
+
    
+Destroys the button.
+
+
    TQKeySequence TQButton::accel () const
+
    Returns the accelerator associated with the button.
+See the "accel" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::animateClick () [slot]
+
    
+Performs an animated click: the button is pressed and released a
+short while later.
+
     The pressed(), released(), clicked(), toggled(), and
+stateChanged() signals are emitted as appropriate.
+
     This function does nothing if the button is disabled.
+
     
    See also accel.
+
+
    bool TQButton::autoRepeat () const
+
    Returns TRUE if autoRepeat is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "autoRepeat" property for details.
+
    bool TQButton::autoResize () const
+
    Returns TRUE if autoResize is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "autoResize" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::clicked () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the button is activated (i.e. first
+pressed down and then released when the mouse cursor is inside the
+button), when the accelerator key is typed or when animateClick()
+is called. This signal is not emitted if you call setDown().
+
     The TQButtonGroup::clicked() signal does the same job, if you want
+to connect several buttons to the same slot.
+
     Warning: Don't launch a model dialog in response to this signal
+for a button that has autoRepeat turned on.
+
     
    See also pressed(), released(), toggled(), autoRepeat, and down.
+
+
    Examples: chart/setdataform.cpp, listbox/listbox.cpp, network/clientserver/client/client.cpp, progressbar/progressbar.cpp, richtext/richtext.cpp, t2/main.cpp, and t4/main.cpp.
+
    void TQButton::drawButton ( TQPainter * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Draws the button. The default implementation does nothing.
+
     This virtual function is reimplemented by subclasses to draw real
+buttons. At some point, these reimplementations should call
+drawButtonLabel().
+
     
    See also drawButtonLabel() and paintEvent().
+
+
    void TQButton::drawButtonLabel ( TQPainter * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Draws the button text or pixmap.
+
     This virtual function is reimplemented by subclasses to draw real
+buttons. It is invoked by drawButton().
+
     
    See also drawButton() and paintEvent().
+
+
    TQButtonGroup * TQButton::group () const
+
    
+Returns the group that this button belongs to.
+
     If the button is not a member of any TQButtonGroup, this function
+returns 0.
+
     
    See also TQButtonGroup.
+
+
    bool TQButton::hitButton ( const TQPoint & pos ) const [virtual protected]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if pos is inside the clickable button rectangle;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     By default, the clickable area is the entire widget. Subclasses
+may reimplement it, though.
+
+
    bool TQButton::isDown () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the button is pressed; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "down" property for details.
+
    bool TQButton::isExclusiveToggle () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the button is an exclusive toggle; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "exclusiveToggle" property for details.
+
    bool TQButton::isOn () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the button is toggled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "on" property for details.
+
    bool TQButton::isToggleButton () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the button is a toggle button; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "toggleButton" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::paintEvent ( TQPaintEvent * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Handles paint events for buttons. Small and typically complex
+buttons are painted double-buffered to reduce flicker. The
+actually drawing is done in the virtual functions drawButton() and
+drawButtonLabel().
+
     
    See also drawButton() and drawButtonLabel().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
+
    const TQPixmap * TQButton::pixmap () const
+
    Returns the pixmap shown on the button.
+See the "pixmap" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::pressed () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the button is pressed down.
+
     
    See also released() and clicked().
+
+
    Examples: network/httpd/httpd.cpp and popup/popup.cpp.
+
    void TQButton::released () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the button is released.
+
     
    See also pressed(), clicked(), and toggled().
+
+
    void TQButton::setAccel ( const TQKeySequence & ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the accelerator associated with the button.
+See the "accel" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::setAutoRepeat ( bool ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether autoRepeat is enabled.
+See the "autoRepeat" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::setAutoResize ( bool )
+
    Sets whether autoResize is enabled.
+See the "autoResize" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::setDown ( bool ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the button is pressed.
+See the "down" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::setOn ( bool on ) [protected]
+
    
+
+
     Sets the state of this button to On if on is TRUE; otherwise to
+Off.
+
     
    See also toggleState.
+
+
    void TQButton::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the pixmap shown on the button.
+See the "pixmap" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::setState ( ToggleState s ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Sets the toggle state of the button to s. s can be Off, NoChange or On.
+
+
    void TQButton::setText ( const TQString & ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the text shown on the button.
+See the "text" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::setToggleButton ( bool b ) [protected]
+
    
+
+
     If b is TRUE, this button becomes a toggle button; if b is
+FALSE, this button becomes a command button.
+
     
    See also toggleButton.
+
+
    void TQButton::setToggleType ( ToggleType type ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Sets the toggle type of the button to type.
+
     type can be set to SingleShot, Toggle and Tristate.
+
+
    ToggleState TQButton::state () const
+
    Returns the state of the toggle button.
+See the "toggleState" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::stateChanged ( int state ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes state. state is On if the button is on, NoChange if it is in the
+"no change" state or Off
+if the button is off.
+
     This may be the result of a user action, toggle() slot activation,
+setState(), or because setOn() was called.
+
     
    See also clicked() and TQButton::ToggleState.
+
+
    TQString TQButton::text () const
+
    Returns the text shown on the button.
+See the "text" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::toggle () [slot]
+
    
+Toggles the state of a toggle button.
+
     
    See also on, setOn(), toggled(), and toggleButton.
+
+
    ToggleType TQButton::toggleType () const
+
    Returns the type of toggle on the button.
+See the "toggleType" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::toggled ( bool on ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes status. on is TRUE if the button is on, or FALSE if the button is off.
+
     This may be the result of a user action, toggle() slot activation,
+or because setOn() was called.
+
     
    See also clicked().
+
+
    Example: listbox/listbox.cpp.
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    TQKeySequence accel
    
+
    This property holds the accelerator associated with the button.
+
    This property is 0 if there is no accelerator set. If you set this
+property to 0 then any current accelerator is removed.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setAccel() and get this property's value with accel().
+
    bool autoRepeat
    
+
    This property holds whether autoRepeat is enabled.
+
    If autoRepeat is enabled then the clicked() signal is emitted at
+regular intervals if the button is down. This property has no
+effect on toggle buttons. autoRepeat is off by default.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setAutoRepeat() and get this property's value with autoRepeat().
+
    bool autoResize
     
    This property holds whether autoResize is enabled.
+
    This property is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     If autoResize is enabled then the button will resize itself
+whenever the contents are changed.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setAutoResize() and get this property's value with autoResize().
+
    bool down
    
+
    This property holds whether the button is pressed.
+
    If this property is TRUE, the button is pressed down. The signals
+pressed() and clicked() are not emitted if you set this property
+to TRUE. The default is FALSE.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setDown() and get this property's value with isDown().
+
    bool exclusiveToggle
    
+
    This property holds whether the button is an exclusive toggle.
+
    If this property is TRUE and the button is in a TQButtonGroup, the
+button can only be toggled off by another one being toggled on.
+The default is FALSE.
+
+
    Get this property's value with isExclusiveToggle().
+
    bool on
    
+
    This property holds whether the button is toggled.
+
    This property should only be set for toggle buttons.
+
+
    Get this property's value with isOn().
+
    TQPixmap pixmap
    
+
    This property holds the pixmap shown on the button.
+
    If the pixmap is monochrome (i.e. it is a TQBitmap or its depth is 1) and it does not have a mask,
+this property will set the pixmap to be its own mask. The purpose
+of this is to draw transparent bitmaps which are important for
+toggle buttons, for example.
+
     pixmap() returns 0 if no pixmap was set.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setPixmap() and get this property's value with pixmap().
+
    TQString text
    
+
    This property holds the text shown on the button.
+
    This property will return a TQString::null if the button has no
+text. If the text has an ampersand (&) in it, then an
+accelerator is automatically created for it using the character
+that follows the '&' as the accelerator key. Any previous
+accelerator will be overwritten, or cleared if no accelerator is
+defined by the text.
+
     There is no default text.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setText() and get this property's value with text().
+
    bool toggleButton
    
+
    This property holds whether the button is a toggle button.
+
    The default value is FALSE.
+
+
    Get this property's value with isToggleButton().
+
    ToggleState toggleState
    
+
    This property holds the state of the toggle button.
+
    If this property is changed then it does not cause the button
+to be repainted.
+
+
    Get this property's value with state().
+
    ToggleType toggleType
    
+
    This property holds the type of toggle on the button.
+
    The default toggle type is SingleShot.
+
     
    See also TQButton::ToggleType.
+
+
    Get this property's value with toggleType().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqbuttongroup.html b/doc/html/ntqbuttongroup.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ecefd0daf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqbuttongroup.html
@@ -0,0 +1,264 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQButtonGroup Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQButtonGroup Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQButtonGroup widget organizes TQButton widgets in a group.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqbuttongroup.h>
+
    Inherits TQGroupBox.
+
    Inherited by TQHButtonGroup and TQVButtonGroup.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQButtonGroup widget organizes TQButton widgets in a group.
+
     
+
+
+
+
     A button group widget makes it easier to deal with groups of
+buttons. Each button in a button group has a unique identifier.
+The button group emits a clicked() signal with this identifier
+when a button in the group is clicked. This makes a button group
+particularly useful when you have several similar buttons and want
+to connect all their clicked() signals to a single slot.
+
     An exclusive button group switches
+off all toggle buttons except the one that was clicked. A button
+group is, by default, non-exclusive. Note that all radio buttons
+that are inserted into a button group are mutually exclusive even
+if the button group is non-exclusive. (See
+setRadioButtonExclusive().)
+
     There are two ways of using a button group:
+
      
+
    •  The button group is the parent widget of a number of buttons,
+i.e. the button group is the parent argument in the button
+constructor. The buttons are assigned identifiers 0, 1, 2, etc.,
+in the order they are created. A TQButtonGroup can display a frame
+and a title because it inherits TQGroupBox.
+
    •  The button group is an invisible widget and the contained
+buttons have some other parent widget. In this usage, each button
+must be manually inserted, using insert(), into the button group
+and given an identifier.
+
    
+
     A button can be removed from the group with remove(). A pointer to
+a button with a given id can be obtained using find(). The id of a
+button is available using id(). A button can be set on with
+setButton(). The number of buttons in the group is returned by
+count().
+
      
+
     
    See also TQPushButton, TQCheckBox, TQRadioButton, Widget Appearance and Style, Layout Management, and Organizers.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQButtonGroup::TQButtonGroup ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a button group with no title.
+
     The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
+
    TQButtonGroup::TQButtonGroup ( const TQString & title, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a button group with the title title.
+
     The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
+
    TQButtonGroup::TQButtonGroup ( int strips, Orientation orientation, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a button group with no title. Child widgets will be
+arranged in strips rows or columns (depending on orientation).
+
     The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
+
    TQButtonGroup::TQButtonGroup ( int strips, Orientation orientation, const TQString & title, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a button group with title title. Child widgets will
+be arranged in strips rows or columns (depending on orientation).
+
     The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
+
    void TQButtonGroup::clicked ( int id ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when a button in the group is clicked. The id argument is the
+button's identifier.
+
     
    See also insert().
+
+
    Examples: drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    int TQButtonGroup::count () const
+
    
+Returns the number of buttons in the group.
+
+
    TQButton * TQButtonGroup::find ( int id ) const
+
    
+Returns the button with the specified identifier id, or 0 if
+the button was not found.
+
+
    int TQButtonGroup::id ( TQButton * button ) const
+
    
+Returns the id of button, or -1 if button is not a member of
+this group.
+
     
    See also selectedId.
+
+
    int TQButtonGroup::insert ( TQButton * button, int id = -1 )
+
    
+Inserts the button with the identifier id into the button
+group. Returns the button identifier.
+
     Buttons are normally inserted into a button group automatically by
+passing the button group as the parent when the button is
+constructed. So it is not necessary to manually insert buttons
+that have this button group as their parent widget. An exception
+is when you want custom identifiers instead of the default 0, 1,
+2, etc., or if you want the buttons to have some other parent.
+
     The button is assigned the identifier id or an automatically
+generated identifier. It works as follows: If id >= 0, this
+identifier is assigned. If id == -1 (default), the identifier
+is equal to the number of buttons in the group. If id is any
+other negative integer, for instance -2, a unique identifier
+(negative integer <= -2) is generated. No button has an id of -1.
+
     
    See also find(), remove(), and exclusive.
+
+
    Examples: listbox/listbox.cpp and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    bool TQButtonGroup::isExclusive () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the button group is exclusive; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "exclusive" property for details.
+
    bool TQButtonGroup::isRadioButtonExclusive () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the radio buttons in the group are exclusive; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "radioButtonExclusive" property for details.
+
    void TQButtonGroup::moveFocus ( int key ) [virtual]
+
    
+Moves the keyboard focus according to key, and if appropriate
+checks the new focus item.
+
     This function does nothing unless the keyboard focus points to one
+of the button group members and key is one of Key_Up, Key_Down, Key_Left and Key_Right.
+
+
    void TQButtonGroup::pressed ( int id ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when a button in the group is pressed. The id argument is the
+button's identifier.
+
     
    See also insert().
+
+
    void TQButtonGroup::released ( int id ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when a button in the group is released. The id argument is the
+button's identifier.
+
     
    See also insert().
+
+
    void TQButtonGroup::remove ( TQButton * button )
+
    
+Removes the button from the button group.
+
     
    See also insert().
+
+
    TQButton * TQButtonGroup::selected () const
+
    
+Returns the selected toggle button if exactly one is selected;
+otherwise returns 0.
+
     
    See also selectedId.
+
+
    int TQButtonGroup::selectedId () const
+
    Returns the selected toggle button.
+See the "selectedId" property for details.
+
    void TQButtonGroup::setButton ( int id ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the selected toggle button to id.
+See the "selectedId" property for details.
+
    void TQButtonGroup::setExclusive ( bool ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the button group is exclusive.
+See the "exclusive" property for details.
+
    void TQButtonGroup::setRadioButtonExclusive ( bool ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the radio buttons in the group are exclusive.
+See the "radioButtonExclusive" property for details.
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    bool exclusive
    
+
    This property holds whether the button group is exclusive.
+
    If this property is TRUE, then the buttons in the group are
+toggled, and to untoggle a button you must click on another button
+in the group. The default value is FALSE.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setExclusive() and get this property's value with isExclusive().
+
    bool radioButtonExclusive
    
+
    This property holds whether the radio buttons in the group are exclusive.
+
    If this property is TRUE (the default), the radiobuttons in the group are treated exclusively.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setRadioButtonExclusive() and get this property's value with isRadioButtonExclusive().
+
    int selectedId
    
+
    This property holds the selected toggle button.
+
    The toggle button is specified as an ID.
+
     If no toggle button is selected, this property holds -1.
+
     If setButton() is called on an exclusive group, the button with
+the given id will be set to on and all the others will be set to
+off.
+
     
    See also selected().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setButton() and get this property's value with selectedId().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqcache.html b/doc/html/ntqcache.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1d5d8ed33
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqcache.html
@@ -0,0 +1,279 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQCache Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQCache Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQCache class is a template class that provides a cache based on TQString keys.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqcache.h>
+
    Inherits TQPtrCollection.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQCache ( int maxCost = 100, int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • ~TQCache ()
      • 
+
    • int maxCost () const
      • 
+
    • int totalCost () const
      • 
+
    • void setMaxCost ( int m )
      • 
+
    • virtual uint count () const
      • 
+
    • uint size () const
      • 
+
    • bool isEmpty () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void clear ()
      • 
+
    • bool insert ( const TQString & k, const type * d, int c = 1, int p = 0 )
      • 
+
    • bool remove ( const TQString & k )
      • 
+
    • type * take ( const TQString & k )
      • 
+
    • type * find ( const TQString & k, bool ref = TRUE ) const
      • 
+
    • type * operator[] ( const TQString & k ) const
      • 
+
    • void statistics () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Important Inherited Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQCache class is a template class that provides a cache based on TQString keys.
+
     
+
+
     
+
     A cache is a least recently used (LRU) list of cache items. Each
+cache item has a key and a certain cost. The sum of item costs,
+totalCost(), never exceeds the maximum cache cost, maxCost(). If
+inserting a new item would cause the total cost to exceed the
+maximum cost, the least recently used items in the cache are
+removed.
+
     TQCache is a template class. TQCache<X> defines a cache that
+operates on pointers to X, or X*.
+
     Apart from insert(), by far the most important function is find()
+(which also exists as operator[]()). This function looks up an
+item, returns it, and by default marks it as being the most
+recently used item.
+
     There are also methods to remove() or take() an object from the
+cache. Calling setAutoDelete(TRUE) for a cache tells it to delete
+items that are removed. The default is to not delete items when
+they are removed (i.e., remove() and take() are equivalent).
+
     When inserting an item into the cache, only the pointer is copied,
+not the item itself. This is called a shallow copy. It is possible
+to make the cache copy all of the item's data (known as a deep copy) when an item is inserted. insert() calls the virtual
+function TQPtrCollection::newItem() for the item to be inserted.
+Inherit a cache and reimplement newItem() if you want deep copies.
+
     When removing a cache item, the virtual function
+TQPtrCollection::deleteItem() is called. The default
+implementation deletes the item if auto-deletion is enabled, and
+does nothing otherwise.
+
     There is a TQCacheIterator that can be used to traverse the items
+in the cache in arbitrary order.
+
     In TQCache, the cache items are accessed via TQString keys, which
+are Unicode strings. If you want to use non-Unicode, plain 8-bit
+char* keys, use the TQAsciiCache template. A TQCache has the
+same performance as a TQAsciiCache.
+
     
    See also TQCacheIterator, TQAsciiCache, TQIntCache, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQCache::TQCache ( int maxCost = 100, int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a cache whose contents will never have a total cost
+greater than maxCost and which is expected to contain less than
+size items.
+
     size is actually the size of an internal hash array; it's
+usually best to make it a prime number and at least 50% bigger
+than the largest expected number of items in the cache.
+
     Each inserted item has an associated cost. When inserting a new
+item, if the total cost of all items in the cache will exceed maxCost, the cache will start throwing out the older (least
+recently used) items until there is enough room for the new item
+to be inserted.
+
     If caseSensitive is TRUE (the default), the cache keys are case
+sensitive; if it is FALSE, they are case-insensitive.
+Case-insensitive comparison considers all Unicode letters.
+
+
    TQCache::~TQCache ()
+
    
+
+
     Removes all items from the cache and destroys it. All iterators
+that access this cache will be reset.
+
+
    bool TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE.
+
     
    See also setAutoDelete().
+
+
    void TQCache::clear () [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Removes all items from the cache and deletes them if auto-deletion
+has been enabled.
+
     All cache iterators that operate this on cache are reset.
+
     
    See also remove() and take().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
+
    uint TQCache::count () const [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of items in the cache.
+
     
    See also totalCost().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
+
    type * TQCache::find ( const TQString & k, bool ref = TRUE ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the item associated with key k, or 0 if the key does
+not exist in the cache. If ref is TRUE (the default), the item
+is moved to the front of the least recently used list.
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was
+inserted last is returned.
+
+
    bool TQCache::insert ( const TQString & k, const type * d, int c = 1, int p = 0 )
+
    
+
+
     Inserts the item d into the cache with key k and associated
+cost, c. Returns TRUE if it is successfully inserted; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     The cache's size is limited, and if the total cost is too high,
+TQCache will remove old, least recently used items until there is
+room for this new item.
+
     The parameter p is internal and should be left at the default
+value (0).
+
     Warning: If this function returns FALSE (which could happen, e.g.
+if the cost of this item alone exceeds maxCost()) you must delete
+d yourself. Additionally, be very careful about using d
+after calling this function because any other insertions into the
+cache, from anywhere in the application or within TQt itself, could
+cause the object to be discarded from the cache and the pointer to
+become invalid.
+
+
    bool TQCache::isEmpty () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the cache is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    int TQCache::maxCost () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the maximum allowed total cost of the cache.
+
     
    See also setMaxCost() and totalCost().
+
+
    type * TQCache::operator[] ( const TQString & k ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the item associated with key k, or 0 if k does not
+exist in the cache, and moves the item to the front of the least
+recently used list.
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was
+inserted last is returned.
+
     This is the same as find( k, TRUE ).
+
     
    See also find().
+
+
    bool TQCache::remove ( const TQString & k )
+
    
+
+
     Removes the item associated with k, and returns TRUE if the
+item was present in the cache; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     The item is deleted if auto-deletion has been enabled, i.e., if
+you have called setAutoDelete(TRUE).
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was
+inserted last is removed.
+
     All iterators that refer to the removed item are set to point to
+the next item in the cache's traversal order.
+
     
    See also take() and clear().
+
+
    void TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if enable is
+TRUE and to never delete them if enable is FALSE.
+
     If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are
+deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient
+if the collection has the only pointer to the items.
+
     The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be
+careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself
+with two collections deleting the same items.
+
     Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions
+in subclasses. For example, a subclass that has a remove()
+function will remove the item from its data structure, and if
+auto-delete is enabled, will also delete the item.
+
     
    See also autoDelete().
+
+
    Examples: grapher/grapher.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, and table/bigtable/main.cpp.
+
    void TQCache::setMaxCost ( int m )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the maximum allowed total cost of the cache to m. If the
+current total cost is greater than m, some items are deleted
+immediately.
+
     
    See also maxCost() and totalCost().
+
+
    uint TQCache::size () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the size of the hash array used to implement the cache.
+This should be a bit bigger than count() is likely to be.
+
+
    void TQCache::statistics () const
+
    
+
+
     A debug-only utility function. Prints out cache usage, hit/miss,
+and distribution information using qDebug(). This function does
+nothing in the release library.
+
+
    type * TQCache::take ( const TQString & k )
+
    
+
+
     Takes the item associated with k out of the cache without
+deleting it, and returns a pointer to the item taken out, or 0
+if the key does not exist in the cache.
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was
+inserted last is taken.
+
     All iterators that refer to the taken item are set to point to the
+next item in the cache's traversal order.
+
     
    See also remove() and clear().
+
+
    int TQCache::totalCost () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the total cost of the items in the cache. This is an
+integer in the range 0 to maxCost().
+
     
    See also setMaxCost().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqcanvas.html b/doc/html/ntqcanvas.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b4fab5810
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqcanvas.html
@@ -0,0 +1,588 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQCanvas Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQCanvas Class Reference
    [canvas module]
    
+
+
    The TQCanvas class provides a 2D area that can contain TQCanvasItem objects.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqcanvas.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • virtual void drawBackground ( TQPainter & painter, const TQRect & clip )
      • 
+
    • virtual void drawForeground ( TQPainter & painter, const TQRect & clip )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQCanvas class provides a 2D area that can contain TQCanvasItem objects.
+
+
     
+
+
+
+
+
     The TQCanvas class manages its 2D graphic area and all the canvas
+items the area contains. The canvas has no visual appearance of
+its own. Instead, it is displayed on screen using a TQCanvasView.
+Multiple TQCanvasView widgets may be associated with a canvas to
+provide multiple views of the same canvas.
+
     The canvas is optimized for large numbers of items, particularly
+where only a small percentage of the items change at any
+one time. If the entire display changes very frequently, you should
+consider using your own custom TQScrollView subclass.
+
     TQt provides a rich
+set of canvas item classes, e.g. TQCanvasEllipse, TQCanvasLine,
+TQCanvasPolygon, TQCanvasPolygonalItem, TQCanvasRectangle, TQCanvasSpline,
+TQCanvasSprite and TQCanvasText. You can subclass to create your own
+canvas items; TQCanvasPolygonalItem is the most common base class used
+for this purpose.
+
     Items appear on the canvas after their show() function has been called (or setVisible(TRUE)), and after
+update() has been called. The canvas only shows items that are
+visible, and then only if
+update() is called. (By default the canvas is white and so are
+canvas items, so if nothing appears try changing colors.)
+
     If you created the canvas without passing a width and height to
+the constructor you must also call resize().
+
     Although a canvas may appear to be similar to a widget with child
+widgets, there are several notable differences:
+
     
      
+
    •  Canvas items are usually much faster to manipulate and redraw than
+child widgets, with the speed advantage becoming especially great when
+there are many canvas items and non-rectangular items. In most
+situations canvas items are also a lot more memory efficient than child
+widgets.
+
       
    •  It's easy to detect overlapping items (collision detection).
+
       
    •  The canvas can be larger than a widget. A million-by-million canvas
+is perfectly possible. At such a size a widget might be very
+inefficient, and some window systems might not support it at all,
+whereas TQCanvas scales well. Even with a billion pixels and a million
+items, finding a particular canvas item, detecting collisions, etc.,
+is still fast (though the memory consumption may be prohibitive
+at such extremes).
+
       
    •  Two or more TQCanvasView objects can view the same canvas.
+
       
    •  An arbitrary transformation matrix can be set on each TQCanvasView
+which makes it easy to zoom, rotate or shear the viewed canvas.
+
       
    •  Widgets provide a lot more functionality, such as input (TQKeyEvent,
+TQMouseEvent etc.) and layout management (TQGridLayout etc.).
+
       
    
+
     A canvas consists of a background, a number of canvas items organized by
+x, y and z coordinates, and a foreground. A canvas item's z coordinate
+can be treated as a layer number -- canvas items with a higher z
+coordinate appear in front of canvas items with a lower z coordinate.
+
     The background is white by default, but can be set to a different color
+using setBackgroundColor(), or to a repeated pixmap using
+setBackgroundPixmap() or to a mosaic of smaller pixmaps using
+setTiles(). Individual tiles can be set with setTile(). There
+are corresponding get functions, e.g. backgroundColor() and
+backgroundPixmap().
+
     Note that TQCanvas does not inherit from TQWidget, even though it has some
+functions which provide the same functionality as those in TQWidget. One
+of these is setBackgroundPixmap(); some others are resize(), size(),
+width() and height(). TQCanvasView is the widget used to display a
+canvas on the screen.
+
     Canvas items are added to a canvas by constructing them and passing the
+canvas to the canvas item's constructor. An item can be moved to a
+different canvas using TQCanvasItem::setCanvas().
+
     Canvas items are movable (and in the case of TQCanvasSprites, animated)
+objects that inherit TQCanvasItem. Each canvas item has a position on the
+canvas (x, y coordinates) and a height (z coordinate), all of which are
+held as floating-point numbers. Moving canvas items also have x and y
+velocities. It's possible for a canvas item to be outside the canvas
+(for example TQCanvasItem::x() is greater than width()). When a canvas
+item is off the canvas, onCanvas() returns FALSE and the canvas
+disregards the item. (Canvas items off the canvas do not slow down any
+of the common operations on the canvas.)
+
     Canvas items can be moved with TQCanvasItem::move(). The advance()
+function moves all TQCanvasItem::animated() canvas items and
+setAdvancePeriod() makes TQCanvas move them automatically on a periodic
+basis. In the context of the TQCanvas classes, to `animate' a canvas item
+is to set it in motion, i.e. using TQCanvasItem::setVelocity(). Animation
+of a canvas item itself, i.e. items which change over time, is enabled
+by calling TQCanvasSprite::setFrameAnimation(), or more generally by
+subclassing and reimplementing TQCanvasItem::advance(). To detect collisions
+use one of the TQCanvasItem::collisions() functions.
+
     The changed parts of the canvas are redrawn (if they are visible in a
+canvas view) whenever update() is called. You can either call update()
+manually after having changed the contents of the canvas, or force
+periodic updates using setUpdatePeriod(). If you have moving objects on
+the canvas, you must call advance() every time the objects should
+move one step further. Periodic calls to advance() can be forced using
+setAdvancePeriod(). The advance() function will call
+TQCanvasItem::advance() on every item that is animated and trigger an update of the
+affected areas afterwards. (A canvas item that is `animated' is simply
+a canvas item that is in motion.)
+
     TQCanvas organizes its canvas items into chunks; these are areas on
+the canvas that are used to speed up most operations. Many operations
+start by eliminating most chunks (i.e. those which haven't changed)
+and then process only the canvas items that are in the few interesting
+(i.e. changed) chunks. A valid chunk, validChunk(), is one which is on
+the canvas.
+
     The chunk size is a key factor to TQCanvas's speed: if there are too many
+chunks, the speed benefit of grouping canvas items into chunks is
+reduced. If the chunks are too large, it takes too long to process each
+one. The TQCanvas constructor tries to pick a suitable size, but you
+can call retune() to change it at any time. The chunkSize() function
+returns the current chunk size. The canvas items always make sure
+they're in the right chunks; all you need to make sure of is that
+the canvas uses the right chunk size. A good rule of thumb is that
+the size should be a bit smaller than the average canvas item
+size. If you have moving objects, the chunk size should be a bit
+smaller than the average size of the moving items.
+
     The foreground is normally nothing, but if you reimplement
+drawForeground(), you can draw things in front of all the canvas
+items.
+
     Areas can be set as changed with setChanged() and set unchanged with
+setUnchanged(). The entire canvas can be set as changed with
+setAllChanged(). A list of all the items on the canvas is returned by
+allItems().
+
     An area can be copied (painted) to a TQPainter with drawArea().
+
     If the canvas is resized it emits the resized() signal.
+
     The examples/canvas application and the 2D graphics page of the
+examples/demo application demonstrate many of TQCanvas's facilities.
+
     
    See also TQCanvasView, TQCanvasItem, Abstract Widget Classes, Graphics Classes, and Image Processing Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQCanvas::TQCanvas ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Create a TQCanvas with no size. parent and name are passed to
+the TQObject superclass.
+
     Warning: You must call resize() at some time after creation to
+be able to use the canvas.
+
+
    TQCanvas::TQCanvas ( int w, int h )
+
    
+Constructs a TQCanvas that is w pixels wide and h pixels high.
+
+
    TQCanvas::TQCanvas ( TQPixmap p, int h, int v, int tilewidth, int tileheight )
+
    
+Constructs a TQCanvas which will be composed of h tiles
+horizontally and v tiles vertically. Each tile will be an image
+tilewidth by tileheight pixels taken from pixmap p.
+
     The pixmap p is a list of tiles, arranged left to right, (and
+in the case of pixmaps that have multiple rows of tiles, top to
+bottom), with tile 0 in the top-left corner, tile 1 next to the
+right, and so on, e.g.
+
     
    
+
     0 1 2 3
+
     4 5 6 7
+
    
+
     The TQCanvas is initially sized to show exactly the given number of
+tiles horizontally and vertically. If it is resized to be larger,
+the entire matrix of tiles will be repeated as often as necessary
+to cover the area. If it is smaller, tiles to the right and bottom
+will not be visible.
+
     
    See also setTiles().
+
+
    TQCanvas::~TQCanvas () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the canvas and all the canvas's canvas items.
+
+
    void TQCanvas::advance () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Moves all TQCanvasItem::animated() canvas items on the canvas and
+refreshes all changes to all views of the canvas. (An `animated'
+item is an item that is in motion; see setVelocity().)
+
     The advance takes place in two phases. In phase 0, the
+TQCanvasItem::advance() function of each TQCanvasItem::animated()
+canvas item is called with paramater 0. Then all these canvas
+items are called again, with parameter 1. In phase 0, the canvas
+items should not change position, merely examine other items on
+the canvas for which special processing is required, such as
+collisions between items. In phase 1, all canvas items should
+change positions, ignoring any other items on the canvas. This
+two-phase approach allows for considerations of "fairness",
+although no TQCanvasItem subclasses supplied with TQt do anything
+interesting in phase 0.
+
     The canvas can be configured to call this function periodically
+with setAdvancePeriod().
+
     
    See also update().
+
+
    TQCanvasItemList TQCanvas::allItems ()
+
    
+Returns a list of all the items in the canvas.
+
+
    TQColor TQCanvas::backgroundColor () const
+
    
+Returns the color set by setBackgroundColor(). By default, this is
+white.
+
     This function is not a reimplementation of
+TQWidget::backgroundColor() (TQCanvas is not a subclass of TQWidget),
+but all TQCanvasViews that are viewing the canvas will set their
+backgrounds to this color.
+
     
    See also setBackgroundColor() and backgroundPixmap().
+
+
    TQPixmap TQCanvas::backgroundPixmap () const
+
    
+Returns the pixmap set by setBackgroundPixmap(). By default,
+this is a null pixmap.
+
     
    See also setBackgroundPixmap() and backgroundColor().
+
+
    int TQCanvas::chunkSize () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the chunk size of the canvas.
+
     
    See also retune().
+
+
    TQCanvasItemList TQCanvas::collisions ( const TQPoint & p ) const
+
    
+Returns a list of canvas items that collide with the point p.
+The list is ordered by z coordinates, from highest z coordinate
+(front-most item) to lowest z coordinate (rear-most item).
+
+
    TQCanvasItemList TQCanvas::collisions ( const TQRect & r ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns a list of items which collide with the rectangle r. The
+list is ordered by z coordinates, from highest z coordinate
+(front-most item) to lowest z coordinate (rear-most item).
+
+
    TQCanvasItemList TQCanvas::collisions ( const TQPointArray & chunklist, const TQCanvasItem * item, bool exact ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns a list of canvas items which intersect with the chunks
+listed in chunklist, excluding item. If exact is TRUE,
+only those which actually collide with item are returned; otherwise canvas items
+are included just for being in the chunks.
+
     This is a utility function mainly used to implement the simpler
+TQCanvasItem::collisions() function.
+
+
    void TQCanvas::drawArea ( const TQRect & clip, TQPainter * painter, bool dbuf = FALSE )
+
    
+Paints all canvas items that are in the area clip to painter, using double-buffering if dbuf is TRUE.
+
     e.g. to print the canvas to a printer:
+
    +    TQPrinter pr;
+    if ( pr.setup() ) {
+        TQPainter p(&pr);
+        canvas.drawArea( canvas.rect(), &p );
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    Example: canvas/canvas.cpp.
+
    void TQCanvas::drawBackground ( TQPainter & painter, const TQRect & clip ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This virtual function is called for all updates of the canvas. It
+renders any background graphics using the painter painter, in
+the area clip. If the canvas has a background pixmap or a tiled
+background, that graphic is used, otherwise the canvas is cleared
+using the background color.
+
     If the graphics for an area change, you must explicitly call
+setChanged(const TQRect&) for the result to be visible when
+update() is next called.
+
     
    See also setBackgroundColor(), setBackgroundPixmap(), and setTiles().
+
+
    void TQCanvas::drawForeground ( TQPainter & painter, const TQRect & clip ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This virtual function is called for all updates of the canvas. It
+renders any foreground graphics using the painter painter, in
+the area clip.
+
     If the graphics for an area change, you must explicitly call
+setChanged(const TQRect&) for the result to be visible when
+update() is next called.
+
     The default is to draw nothing.
+
+
    int TQCanvas::height () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the height of the canvas, in pixels.
+
+
    Example: canvas/canvas.cpp.
+
    bool TQCanvas::onCanvas ( int x, int y ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the pixel position (x, y) is on the canvas;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also validChunk().
+
+
    bool TQCanvas::onCanvas ( const TQPoint & p ) const
+
    
+
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns TRUE if the pixel position p is on the canvas;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also validChunk().
+
+
    TQRect TQCanvas::rect () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a rectangle the size of the canvas.
+
+
    void TQCanvas::resize ( int w, int h ) [virtual]
+
    
+Changes the size of the canvas to have a width of w and a
+height of h. This is a slow operation.
+
+
    Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp and chart/chartform.cpp.
+
    void TQCanvas::resized () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the canvas is resized. Each
+TQCanvasView connects to this signal to keep the scrollview's size
+correct.
+
+
    void TQCanvas::retune ( int chunksze, int mxclusters = 100 ) [virtual]
+
    
+Change the efficiency tuning parameters to mxclusters clusters,
+each of size chunksze. This is a slow operation if there are
+many objects on the canvas.
+
     The canvas is divided into chunks which are rectangular areas chunksze wide by chunksze high. Use a chunk size which is about
+the average size of the canvas items. If you choose a chunk size
+which is too small it will increase the amount of calculation
+required when drawing since each change will affect many chunks.
+If you choose a chunk size which is too large the amount of
+drawing required will increase because for each change, a lot of
+drawing will be required since there will be many (unchanged)
+canvas items which are in the same chunk as the changed canvas
+items.
+
     Internally, a canvas uses a low-resolution "chunk matrix" to keep
+track of all the items in the canvas. A 64x64 chunk matrix is the
+default for a 1024x1024 pixel canvas, where each chunk collects
+canvas items in a 16x16 pixel square. This default is also
+affected by setTiles(). You can tune this default using this
+function. For example if you have a very large canvas and want to
+trade off speed for memory then you might set the chunk size to 32
+or 64.
+
     The mxclusters argument is the number of rectangular groups of
+chunks that will be separately drawn. If the canvas has a large
+number of small, dispersed items, this should be about that
+number. Our testing suggests that a large number of clusters is
+almost always best.
+
     
+
    void TQCanvas::setAdvancePeriod ( int ms ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the canvas to call advance() every ms milliseconds. Any
+previous setting by setAdvancePeriod() or setUpdatePeriod() is
+overridden.
+
     If ms is less than 0 advancing will be stopped.
+
+
    Example: canvas/main.cpp.
+
    void TQCanvas::setAllChanged () [virtual]
+
    
+Marks the whole canvas as changed.
+All views of the canvas will be entirely redrawn when
+update() is called next.
+
+
    void TQCanvas::setBackgroundColor ( const TQColor & c ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the solid background to be the color c.
+
     
    See also backgroundColor(), setBackgroundPixmap(), and setTiles().
+
+
    void TQCanvas::setBackgroundPixmap ( const TQPixmap & p ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the solid background to be the pixmap p repeated as
+necessary to cover the entire canvas.
+
     
    See also backgroundPixmap(), setBackgroundColor(), and setTiles().
+
+
    void TQCanvas::setChanged ( const TQRect & area ) [virtual]
+
    
+Marks area as changed. This area will be redrawn in all
+views that are showing it when update() is called next.
+
+
    void TQCanvas::setDoubleBuffering ( bool y ) [virtual]
+
    
+If y is TRUE (the default) double-buffering is switched on;
+otherwise double-buffering is switched off.
+
     Turning off double-buffering causes the redrawn areas to flicker a
+little and also gives a (usually small) performance improvement.
+
+
    Example: canvas/canvas.cpp.
+
    void TQCanvas::setTile ( int x, int y, int tilenum ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the tile at (x, y) to use tile number tilenum, which
+is an index into the tile pixmaps. The canvas will update
+appropriately when update() is next called.
+
     The images are taken from the pixmap set by setTiles() and are
+arranged left to right, (and in the case of pixmaps that have
+multiple rows of tiles, top to bottom), with tile 0 in the
+top-left corner, tile 1 next to the right, and so on, e.g.
+
     
    
+
     0 1 2 3
+
     4 5 6 7
+
    
+
     
    See also tile() and setTiles().
+
+
    void TQCanvas::setTiles ( TQPixmap p, int h, int v, int tilewidth, int tileheight ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the TQCanvas to be composed of h tiles horizontally and v tiles vertically. Each tile will be an image tilewidth by tileheight pixels from pixmap p.
+
     The pixmap p is a list of tiles, arranged left to right, (and
+in the case of pixmaps that have multiple rows of tiles, top to
+bottom), with tile 0 in the top-left corner, tile 1 next to the
+right, and so on, e.g.
+
     
    
+
     0 1 2 3
+
     4 5 6 7
+
    
+
     If the canvas is larger than the matrix of tiles, the entire
+matrix is repeated as necessary to cover the whole canvas. If it
+is smaller, tiles to the right and bottom are not visible.
+
     The width and height of p must be a multiple of tilewidth
+and tileheight. If they are not the function will do nothing.
+
     If you want to unset any tiling set, then just pass in a null
+pixmap and 0 for h, v, tilewidth, and
+tileheight.
+
+
    void TQCanvas::setUnchanged ( const TQRect & area ) [virtual]
+
    
+Marks area as unchanged. The area will not be redrawn in
+the views for the next update(), unless it is marked or changed
+again before the next call to update().
+
+
    void TQCanvas::setUpdatePeriod ( int ms ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the canvas to call update() every ms milliseconds. Any
+previous setting by setAdvancePeriod() or setUpdatePeriod() is
+overridden.
+
     If ms is less than 0 automatic updating will be stopped.
+
+
    TQSize TQCanvas::size () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the size of the canvas, in pixels.
+
+
    int TQCanvas::tile ( int x, int y ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the tile at position (x, y). Initially, all tiles
+are 0.
+
     The parameters must be within range, i.e.
+0 < x < tilesHorizontally() and
+0 < y < tilesVertically().
+
     
    See also setTile().
+
+
    int TQCanvas::tileHeight () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the height of each tile.
+
+
    int TQCanvas::tileWidth () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the width of each tile.
+
+
    int TQCanvas::tilesHorizontally () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of tiles horizontally.
+
+
    int TQCanvas::tilesVertically () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of tiles vertically.
+
+
    void TQCanvas::update () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Repaints changed areas in all views of the canvas.
+
     
    See also advance().
+
+
    bool TQCanvas::validChunk ( int x, int y ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the chunk position (x, y) is on the canvas;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also onCanvas().
+
+
    bool TQCanvas::validChunk ( const TQPoint & p ) const
+
    
+
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns TRUE if the chunk position p is on the canvas; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also onCanvas().
+
+
    int TQCanvas::width () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the width of the canvas, in pixels.
+
+
    Example: canvas/canvas.cpp.
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqcdestyle.html b/doc/html/ntqcdestyle.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a0b65d139
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqcdestyle.html
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQCDEStyle Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQCDEStyle Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQCDEStyle class provides a CDE look and feel.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqcdestyle.h>
+
    Inherits TQMotifStyle.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQCDEStyle class provides a CDE look and feel.
+
     
+
     This style provides a slightly improved Motif look similar to some
+versions of the Common Desktop Environment (CDE). The main
+differences are thinner frames and more modern radio buttons and
+checkboxes. Together with a dark background and a bright
+text/foreground color, the style looks quite attractive (at least
+for Motif fans).
+
     Note that the functions provided by TQCDEStyle are
+reimplementations of TQStyle functions; see TQStyle for their
+documentation.
+
    See also Widget Appearance and Style.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQCDEStyle::TQCDEStyle ( bool useHighlightCols = FALSE )
+
    
+Constructs a TQCDEStyle.
+
     If useHighlightCols is FALSE (the default), then the style will
+polish the application's color palette to emulate the Motif way of
+highlighting, which is a simple inversion between the base and the
+text color.
+
+
    TQCDEStyle::~TQCDEStyle () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the style.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqcheckbox.html b/doc/html/ntqcheckbox.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..233068c3b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqcheckbox.html
@@ -0,0 +1,302 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQCheckBox Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQCheckBox Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQCheckBox widget provides a checkbox with a text label.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqcheckbox.h>
+
    Inherits TQButton.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Important Inherited Members
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • bool autoMask - whether the checkbox is automatically masked  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool checked - whether the checkbox is checked
      • 
+
    • bool tristate - whether the checkbox is a tri-state checkbox
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQCheckBox widget provides a checkbox with a text label.
+
     
+
+
     TQCheckBox and TQRadioButton are both option buttons. That is, they
+can be switched on (checked) or off (unchecked). The classes
+differ in how the choices for the user are restricted. Radio
+buttons define a "one of many" choice, whereas checkboxes provide
+"many of many" choices.
+
     A TQButtonGroup can be used to group check buttons visually.
+
     Whenever a checkbox is checked or cleared it emits the signal
+toggled(). Connect to this signal if you want to trigger an action
+each time the checkbox changes state. You can use isChecked() to
+query whether or not a checkbox is checked.
+
     Warning: The toggled() signal can not be trusted for tristate
+checkboxes.
+
     In addition to the usual checked and unchecked states, TQCheckBox
+optionally provides a third state to indicate "no change". This
+is useful whenever you need to give the user the option of neither
+checking nor unchecking a checkbox. If you need this third state,
+enable it with setTristate() and use state() to query the current
+toggle state. When a tristate checkbox changes state, it emits the
+stateChanged() signal.
+
     Just like TQPushButton, a checkbox can display text or a pixmap.
+The text can be set in the constructor or with setText(); the
+pixmap is set with setPixmap().
+
     
+
      
+
     
    See also TQButton, TQRadioButton, Fowler: Check Box, and Basic Widgets.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQCheckBox::TQCheckBox ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a checkbox with no text.
+
     The parent and name arguments are sent to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
+
    TQCheckBox::TQCheckBox ( const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a checkbox with text text.
+
     The parent and name arguments are sent to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
+
    TQKeySequence TQButton::accel () const
+
    Returns the accelerator associated with the button.
+See the "accel" property for details.
+
    bool TQButton::autoRepeat () const
+
    Returns TRUE if autoRepeat is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "autoRepeat" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::clicked () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the button is activated (i.e. first
+pressed down and then released when the mouse cursor is inside the
+button), when the accelerator key is typed or when animateClick()
+is called. This signal is not emitted if you call setDown().
+
     The TQButtonGroup::clicked() signal does the same job, if you want
+to connect several buttons to the same slot.
+
     Warning: Don't launch a model dialog in response to this signal
+for a button that has autoRepeat turned on.
+
     
    See also pressed(), released(), toggled(), autoRepeat, and down.
+
+
    Examples: chart/setdataform.cpp, listbox/listbox.cpp, network/clientserver/client/client.cpp, progressbar/progressbar.cpp, richtext/richtext.cpp, t2/main.cpp, and t4/main.cpp.
+
    TQButtonGroup * TQButton::group () const
+
    
+Returns the group that this button belongs to.
+
     If the button is not a member of any TQButtonGroup, this function
+returns 0.
+
     
    See also TQButtonGroup.
+
+
    bool TQCheckBox::isChecked () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the checkbox is checked; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "checked" property for details.
+
    bool TQButton::isDown () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the button is pressed; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "down" property for details.
+
    bool TQButton::isExclusiveToggle () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the button is an exclusive toggle; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "exclusiveToggle" property for details.
+
    bool TQButton::isOn () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the button is toggled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "on" property for details.
+
    bool TQButton::isToggleButton () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the button is a toggle button; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "toggleButton" property for details.
+
    bool TQCheckBox::isTristate () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the checkbox is a tri-state checkbox; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "tristate" property for details.
+
    const TQPixmap * TQButton::pixmap () const
+
    Returns the pixmap shown on the button.
+See the "pixmap" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::pressed () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the button is pressed down.
+
     
    See also released() and clicked().
+
+
    Examples: network/httpd/httpd.cpp and popup/popup.cpp.
+
    void TQButton::released () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the button is released.
+
     
    See also pressed(), clicked(), and toggled().
+
+
    void TQButton::setAccel ( const TQKeySequence & ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the accelerator associated with the button.
+See the "accel" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::setAutoRepeat ( bool ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether autoRepeat is enabled.
+See the "autoRepeat" property for details.
+
    void TQCheckBox::setChecked ( bool check ) [slot]
+
    Sets whether the checkbox is checked to check.
+See the "checked" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::setDown ( bool ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the button is pressed.
+See the "down" property for details.
+
    void TQCheckBox::setNoChange ()
+
    
+Sets the checkbox to the "no change" state.
+
     
    See also tristate.
+
+
    void TQButton::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the pixmap shown on the button.
+See the "pixmap" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::setText ( const TQString & ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the text shown on the button.
+See the "text" property for details.
+
    void TQCheckBox::setTristate ( bool y = TRUE )
+
    Sets whether the checkbox is a tri-state checkbox to y.
+See the "tristate" property for details.
+
    ToggleState TQButton::state () const
+
    Returns the state of the toggle button.
+See the "toggleState" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::stateChanged ( int state ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes state. state is On if the button is on, NoChange if it is in the
+"no change" state or Off
+if the button is off.
+
     This may be the result of a user action, toggle() slot activation,
+setState(), or because setOn() was called.
+
     
    See also clicked() and TQButton::ToggleState.
+
+
    TQString TQButton::text () const
+
    Returns the text shown on the button.
+See the "text" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::toggle () [slot]
+
    
+Toggles the state of a toggle button.
+
     
    See also on, setOn(), toggled(), and toggleButton.
+
+
    void TQButton::toggled ( bool on ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes status. on is TRUE if the button is on, or FALSE if the button is off.
+
     This may be the result of a user action, toggle() slot activation,
+or because setOn() was called.
+
     
    See also clicked().
+
+
    Example: listbox/listbox.cpp.
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    TQKeySequence accel
    
+
    This property holds the accelerator associated with the button.
+
    This property is 0 if there is no accelerator set. If you set this
+property to 0 then any current accelerator is removed.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setAccel() and get this property's value with accel().
+
    bool autoMask
    
+
    This property holds whether the checkbox is automatically masked.
+
    See also TQWidget::autoMask.
+
+
    bool autoRepeat
    
+
    This property holds whether autoRepeat is enabled.
+
    If autoRepeat is enabled then the clicked() signal is emitted at
+regular intervals if the button is down. This property has no
+effect on toggle buttons. autoRepeat is off by default.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setAutoRepeat() and get this property's value with autoRepeat().
+
    bool checked
    
+
    This property holds whether the checkbox is checked.
+
    The default is unchecked, i.e. FALSE.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setChecked() and get this property's value with isChecked().
+
    TQPixmap pixmap
    
+
    This property holds the pixmap shown on the button.
+
    If the pixmap is monochrome (i.e. it is a TQBitmap or its depth is 1) and it does not have a mask,
+this property will set the pixmap to be its own mask. The purpose
+of this is to draw transparent bitmaps which are important for
+toggle buttons, for example.
+
     pixmap() returns 0 if no pixmap was set.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setPixmap() and get this property's value with pixmap().
+
    TQString text
    
+
    This property holds the text shown on the button.
+
    This property will return a TQString::null if the button has no
+text. If the text has an ampersand (&) in it, then an
+accelerator is automatically created for it using the character
+that follows the '&' as the accelerator key. Any previous
+accelerator will be overwritten, or cleared if no accelerator is
+defined by the text.
+
     There is no default text.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setText() and get this property's value with text().
+
    bool tristate
    
+
    This property holds whether the checkbox is a tri-state checkbox.
+
    The default is two-state, i.e. tri-state is FALSE.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setTristate() and get this property's value with isTristate().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqclipboard.html b/doc/html/ntqclipboard.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..74f235ff3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqclipboard.html
@@ -0,0 +1,447 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQClipboard Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQClipboard Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQClipboard class provides access to the window system clipboard.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqclipboard.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • enum Mode { Clipboard, Selection }
      • 
+
    • void clear ( Mode mode )
      • 
+
    • void clear ()
      • 
+
    • bool supportsSelection () const
      • 
+
    • bool ownsSelection () const
      • 
+
    • bool ownsClipboard () const
      • 
+
    • void setSelectionMode ( bool enable )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • bool selectionModeEnabled () const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • TQString text ( Mode mode ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString text ( TQCString & subtype, Mode mode ) const
      • 
+
    • void setText ( const TQString & text, Mode mode )
      • 
+
    • TQMimeSource * data ( Mode mode ) const
      • 
+
    • void setData ( TQMimeSource * src, Mode mode )
      • 
+
    • TQImage image ( Mode mode ) const
      • 
+
    • TQPixmap pixmap ( Mode mode ) const
      • 
+
    • void setImage ( const TQImage & image, Mode mode )
      • 
+
    • void setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, Mode mode )
      • 
+
    • TQString text () const
      • 
+
    • TQString text ( TQCString & subtype ) const
      • 
+
    • void setText ( const TQString & text )
      • 
+
    • TQMimeSource * data () const
      • 
+
    • void setData ( TQMimeSource * src )
      • 
+
    • TQImage image () const
      • 
+
    • TQPixmap pixmap () const
      • 
+
    • void setImage ( const TQImage & image )
      • 
+
    • void setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pixmap )
      • 
+
    
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQClipboard class provides access to the window system clipboard.
+
     
+
+
+
     The clipboard offers a simple mechanism to copy and paste data
+between applications.
+
     TQClipboard supports the same data types that TQDragObject does, and
+uses similar mechanisms. For advanced clipboard usage
+read the drag-and-drop documentation.
+
     There is a single TQClipboard object in an application, and you can
+access it using TQApplication::clipboard().
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQClipboard *cb = TQApplication::clipboard();
+
+    // Copy text from the clipboard (paste)
+    TQString text = cb->text(TQClipboard::Clipboard);
+    if ( !text.isNull() )
+        qDebug( "The clipboard contains: " + text );
+
+    // Copy text into the clipboard
+    cb->setText( "This text can be pasted by other programs",
+                 TQClipboard::Clipboard );
+    
    
+ 
+
     TQClipboard features some convenience functions to access common data
+types: setText() allows the exchange of Unicode text and
+setPixmap() and setImage() allows the exchange of TQPixmaps
+and TQImages between applications. The setData() function is the
+ultimate in flexibility: it allows you to add any TQMimeSource into the
+clipboard. There are corresponding getters for each of these, e.g.
+text(), image() and pixmap().
+
     You can clear the clipboard by calling clear().
+
     
     Platform Specific Information
+
    
+
     
     X11
+
    
+
     
      
+
       
    •  The X11 Window System has the concept of a separate selection
+and clipboard.  When text is selected, it is immediately available
+as the global mouse selection.  The global mouse selection may
+later be copied to the clipboard.  By convention, the middle mouse
+button is used to paste the global mouse selection.
+
       
    •  X11 also has the concept of ownership; if you change the
+selection within a window, X11 will only notify the owner and the
+previous owner of the change, i.e. it will not notify all
+applications that the selection or clipboard data changed.
+
       
    •  Lastly, the X11 clipboard is event driven, i.e. the clipboard
+will not function properly if the event loop is not running.
+Similarly, it is recommended that the contents of the clipboard
+are stored or retrieved in direct response to user-input events,
+e.g. mouse button or key presses and releases.  You should not
+store or retrieve the clipboard contents in response to timer or
+non-user-input events.
+
       
    
+
     
     Windows
+
    
+
     
      
+
       
    •  Microsoft Windows does not support the global mouse selection;
+it only supports the global clipboard, e.g. Windows only adds text
+to the clipboard when an explicit copy or cut is made.
+
       
    •  Windows does not have the concept of ownership; the clipboard
+is a fully global resource so all applications are notified of
+changes.
+
       
    
+
     See the multiclip example in the TQt Designer examples
+directory for an example of a multiplatform clipboard application
+that also demonstrates selection handling.
+
    See also Environment Classes and Input/Output and Networking.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQClipboard::Mode
     
+
+
     This enum type is used to control which part of the system clipboard is
+used by TQClipboard::data(), TQClipboard::setData() and related functions.
+
      
+
    • TQClipboard::Clipboard - indicates that data should be stored and retrieved from
+the global clipboard.
+
    • TQClipboard::Selection - indicates that data should be stored and retrieved from
+the global mouse selection.
+
     Note: Support for Selection is provided only on systems with a
+global mouse selection (e.g. X11).
+
     
    See also TQClipboard::supportsSelection().
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    void TQClipboard::clear ( Mode mode )
+
     
+Clear the clipboard contents.
+
     The mode argument is used to control which part of the system
+clipboard is used.  If mode is TQClipboard::Clipboard, this
+function clears the the global clipboard contents.  If mode is
+TQClipboard::Selection, this function clears the global mouse
+selection contents.
+
     
    See also TQClipboard::Mode and supportsSelection().
+
+
    void TQClipboard::clear ()
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This function uses the TQClipboard::clear() function which takes
+a TQClipboard::Mode argument.  The value of the mode argument is
+determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled().
+If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is
+TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard.
+
+
    TQMimeSource * TQClipboard::data ( Mode mode ) const
+
     
+Returns a reference to a TQMimeSource representation of the current
+clipboard data.
+
     The mode argument is used to control which part of the system
+clipboard is used.  If mode is TQClipboard::Clipboard, the
+data is retrieved from the global clipboard.  If mode is
+TQClipboard::Selection, the data is retrieved from the global
+mouse selection.
+
     
    See also setData().
+
+
    TQMimeSource * TQClipboard::data () const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This function uses the TQClipboard::data() function which takes
+a TQClipboard::Mode argument.  The value of the mode argument is
+determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled().
+If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is
+TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is
+TQClipboard::Clipboard.
+
+
    void TQClipboard::dataChanged () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the clipboard data is changed.
+
+
    TQImage TQClipboard::image ( Mode mode ) const
+
    
+Returns the clipboard image, or returns a null image if the
+clipboard does not contain an image or if it contains an image in
+an unsupported image format.
+
     The mode argument is used to control which part of the system
+clipboard is used.  If mode is TQClipboard::Clipboard, the
+image is retrieved from the global clipboard.  If mode is
+TQClipboard::Selection, the image is retrieved from the global
+mouse selection.
+
     
    See also setImage(), pixmap(), data(), and TQImage::isNull().
+
+
    TQImage TQClipboard::image () const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This function uses the TQClipboard::image() function which takes
+a TQClipboard::Mode argument.  The value of the mode argument is
+determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled().
+If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is
+TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is
+TQClipboard::Clipboard.
+
+
    bool TQClipboard::ownsClipboard () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this clipboard object owns the clipboard data;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQClipboard::ownsSelection () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this clipboard object owns the mouse selection
+data; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    TQPixmap TQClipboard::pixmap ( Mode mode ) const
+
    
+Returns the clipboard pixmap, or null if the clipboard does not
+contain a pixmap. Note that this can lose information. For
+example, if the image is 24-bit and the display is 8-bit, the
+result is converted to 8 bits, and if the image has an alpha
+channel, the result just has a mask.
+
     The mode argument is used to control which part of the system
+clipboard is used.  If mode is TQClipboard::Clipboard, the
+pixmap is retrieved from the global clipboard.  If mode is
+TQClipboard::Selection, the pixmap is retrieved from the global
+mouse selection.
+
     
    See also setPixmap(), image(), data(), and TQPixmap::convertFromImage().
+
+
    TQPixmap TQClipboard::pixmap () const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This function uses the TQClipboard::pixmap() function which takes
+a TQClipboard::Mode argument.  The value of the mode argument is
+determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled().
+If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is
+TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is
+TQClipboard::Clipboard.
+
+
    void TQClipboard::selectionChanged () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the selection is changed. This only
+applies to windowing systems that support selections, e.g. X11.
+Windows doesn't support selections.
+
+
    bool TQClipboard::selectionModeEnabled () const
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Use the TQClipboard::data(), TQClipboard::setData() and related functions
+which take a TQClipboard::Mode argument.
+
     Returns the selection mode.
+
     
    See also setSelectionMode() and supportsSelection().
+
+
    void TQClipboard::setData ( TQMimeSource * src, Mode mode )
+
     
+Sets the clipboard data to src. Ownership of the data is
+transferred to the clipboard. If you want to remove the data
+either call clear() or call setData() again with new data.
+
     The mode argument is used to control which part of the system
+clipboard is used.  If mode is TQClipboard::Clipboard, the
+data is retrieved from the global clipboard.  If mode is
+TQClipboard::Selection, the data is retrieved from the global
+mouse selection.
+
     The TQDragObject subclasses are reasonable objects to put into the
+clipboard (but do not try to call TQDragObject::drag() on the same
+object). Any TQDragObject placed in the clipboard should have a
+parent of 0. Do not put TQDragMoveEvent or TQDropEvent subclasses in
+the clipboard, as they do not belong to the event handler which
+receives them.
+
     The setText(), setImage() and setPixmap() functions are simpler
+wrappers for setting text, image and pixmap data respectively.
+
     
    See also data().
+
+
    void TQClipboard::setData ( TQMimeSource * src )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This function uses the TQClipboard::setData() function which takes
+a TQClipboard::Mode argument.  The value of the mode argument is
+determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled().
+If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is
+TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is
+TQClipboard::Clipboard.
+
+
    void TQClipboard::setImage ( const TQImage & image, Mode mode )
+
    
+Copies image into the clipboard.
+
     The mode argument is used to control which part of the system
+clipboard is used.  If mode is TQClipboard::Clipboard, the
+image is stored in the global clipboard.  If mode is
+TQClipboard::Selection, the data is stored in the global
+mouse selection.
+
     This is shorthand for:
+
    +        setData( new TQImageDrag(image), mode )
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also image(), setPixmap(), and setData().
+
+
    void TQClipboard::setImage ( const TQImage & image )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This function uses the TQClipboard::setImage() function which takes
+a TQClipboard::Mode argument.  The value of the mode argument is
+determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled().
+If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is
+TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is
+TQClipboard::Clipboard.
+
+
    void TQClipboard::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, Mode mode )
+
    
+Copies pixmap into the clipboard. Note that this is slower
+than setImage() because it needs to convert the TQPixmap to a
+TQImage first.
+
     The mode argument is used to control which part of the system
+clipboard is used.  If mode is TQClipboard::Clipboard, the
+pixmap is stored in the global clipboard.  If mode is
+TQClipboard::Selection, the pixmap is stored in the global
+mouse selection.
+
     
    See also pixmap(), setImage(), and setData().
+
+
    void TQClipboard::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pixmap )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This function uses the TQClipboard::setPixmap() function which takes
+a TQClipboard::Mode argument.  The value of the mode argument is
+determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled().
+If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is
+TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is
+TQClipboard::Clipboard.
+
+
    void TQClipboard::setSelectionMode ( bool enable )
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Use the TQClipboard::data(), TQClipboard::setData() and related functions
+which take a TQClipboard::Mode argument.
+
     Sets the clipboard selection mode. If enable is TRUE, then
+subsequent calls to TQClipboard::setData() and other functions
+which put data into the clipboard will put the data into the mouse
+selection, otherwise the data will be put into the clipboard.
+
     
    See also supportsSelection() and selectionModeEnabled().
+
+
    void TQClipboard::setText ( const TQString & text, Mode mode )
+
    
+Copies text into the clipboard as plain text.
+
     The mode argument is used to control which part of the system
+clipboard is used.  If mode is TQClipboard::Clipboard, the
+text is stored in the global clipboard.  If mode is
+TQClipboard::Selection, the text is stored in the global
+mouse selection.
+
     
    See also text() and setData().
+
+
    Example: regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
+
    void TQClipboard::setText ( const TQString & text )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This function uses the TQClipboard::setText() function which takes
+a TQClipboard::Mode argument.  The value of the mode argument is
+determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled().
+If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is
+TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is
+TQClipboard::Clipboard.
+
+
    bool TQClipboard::supportsSelection () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the clipboard supports mouse selection; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
+
    Example: regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
+
    TQString TQClipboard::text ( Mode mode ) const
+
    
+Returns the clipboard text as plain text, or a null string if the
+clipboard does not contain any text.
+
     The mode argument is used to control which part of the system
+clipboard is used.  If mode is TQClipboard::Clipboard, the
+text is retrieved from the global clipboard.  If mode is
+TQClipboard::Selection, the text is retrieved from the global
+mouse selection.
+
     
    See also setText(), data(), and TQString::operator!().
+
+
    TQString TQClipboard::text ( TQCString & subtype, Mode mode ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the clipboard text in subtype subtype, or a null string
+if the clipboard does not contain any text. If subtype is null,
+any subtype is acceptable, and subtype is set to the chosen
+subtype.
+
     The mode argument is used to control which part of the system
+clipboard is used.  If mode is TQClipboard::Clipboard, the
+text is retrieved from the global clipboard.  If mode is
+TQClipboard::Selection, the text is retrieved from the global
+mouse selection.
+
     Common values for subtype are "plain" and "html".
+
     
    See also setText(), data(), and TQString::operator!().
+
+
    TQString TQClipboard::text () const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This function uses the TQClipboard::text() function which takes
+a TQClipboard::Mode argument.  The value of the mode argument is
+determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled().
+If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is
+TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is
+TQClipboard::Clipboard.
+
+
    TQString TQClipboard::text ( TQCString & subtype ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the clipboard text in subtype subtype, or a null string
+if the clipboard does not contain any text. This function uses the
+TQClipboard::text() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode
+argument.  The value of the mode argument is determined by the
+return value of selectionModeEnabled(). If selectionModeEnabled()
+returns TRUE, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection,
+otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqcollection.html b/doc/html/ntqcollection.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0faed6327
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqcollection.html
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQCollection Class Reference (obsolete)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQCollection Class Reference (obsolete)
    
+
+ 
+
     
    +#include <ntqcollection.h>
    
+ 
+
     The TQCollection class has been renamed  TQPtrCollection  in TQt 3.0.
+
+
+
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqcolor.html b/doc/html/ntqcolor.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..24ed8f71a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqcolor.html
@@ -0,0 +1,618 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQColor Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQColor Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQColor class provides colors based on RGB or HSV values.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqcolor.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • enum Spec { Rgb, Hsv }
      • 
+
    • TQColor ()
      • 
+
    • TQColor ( int r, int g, int b )
      • 
+
    • TQColor ( int x, int y, int z, Spec colorSpec )
      • 
+
    • TQColor ( TQRgb rgb, uint pixel = 0xffffffff )
      • 
+
    • TQColor ( const TQString & name )
      • 
+
    • TQColor ( const char * name )
      • 
+
    • TQColor ( const TQColor & c )
      • 
+
    • TQColor & operator= ( const TQColor & c )
      • 
+
    • bool isValid () const
      • 
+
    • TQString name () const
      • 
+
    • void setNamedColor ( const TQString & name )
      • 
+
    • TQRgb rgb () const
      • 
+
    • void setRgb ( int r, int g, int b )
      • 
+
    • void setRgb ( TQRgb rgb )
      • 
+
    • void getRgb ( int * r, int * g, int * b ) const
      • 
+
    • void rgb ( int * r, int * g, int * b ) const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • int red () const
      • 
+
    • int green () const
      • 
+
    • int blue () const
      • 
+
    • void setHsv ( int h, int s, int v )
      • 
+
    • void getHsv ( int * h, int * s, int * v ) const
      • 
+
    • void hsv ( int * h, int * s, int * v ) const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void getHsv ( int & h, int & s, int & v ) const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • TQColor light ( int factor = 150 ) const
      • 
+
    • TQColor dark ( int factor = 200 ) const
      • 
+
    • bool operator== ( const TQColor & c ) const
      • 
+
    • bool operator!= ( const TQColor & c ) const
      • 
+
    • uint alloc ()
      • 
+
    • uint pixel () const
      • 
+
    • uint pixel ( int screen ) const
      • 
+
    
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
      
+
    • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQColor & c )
      • 
+
    • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQColor & c )
      • 
+
    • int qRed ( TQRgb rgb )
      • 
+
    • int qGreen ( TQRgb rgb )
      • 
+
    • int qBlue ( TQRgb rgb )
      • 
+
    • int qAlpha ( TQRgb rgba )
      • 
+
    • TQRgb qRgb ( int r, int g, int b )
      • 
+
    • TQRgb qRgba ( int r, int g, int b, int a )
      • 
+
    • int qGray ( int r, int g, int b )
      • 
+
    • int qGray ( qRgb rgb )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQColor class provides colors based on RGB or HSV values.
+
     
+
+
+
     A color is normally specified in terms of RGB (red, green and blue)
+components, but it is also possible to specify HSV (hue, saturation
+and value) or set a color name (the names are copied from from the
+X11 color database).
+
     In addition to the RGB value, a TQColor also has a pixel value and a
+validity. The pixel value is used by the underlying window system
+to refer to a color. It can be thought of as an index into the
+display hardware's color table.
+
     The validity (isValid()) indicates whether the color is legal at
+all. For example, a RGB color with RGB values out of range is
+illegal. For performance reasons, TQColor mostly disregards illegal
+colors. The result of using an invalid color is unspecified and
+will usually be surprising.
+
     There are 19 predefined TQColor objects: white, black, red, darkRed, green, darkGreen, blue, darkBlue, cyan, darkCyan, magenta, darkMagenta, yellow, darkYellow, gray, darkGray, lightGray, color0 and color1, accessible as members of the TQt namespace (ie. TQt::red).
+
     
    TQt Colors
     
+
     The colors color0 (zero pixel value) and color1 (non-zero
+pixel value) are special colors for drawing in bitmaps. Painting with color0 sets the bitmap bits to 0
+(transparent, i.e. background), and painting with color1 sets the
+bits to 1 (opaque, i.e. foreground).
+
     The TQColor class has an efficient, dynamic color allocation
+strategy. A color is normally allocated the first time it is used
+(lazy allocation), that is, whenever the pixel() function is called.
+The following steps are taken to allocate a color. If, at any point,
+a suitable color is found then the appropriate pixel value is
+returned and the subsequent steps are not taken:
+
     
      
+
    1.  Is the pixel value valid? If it is, just return it; otherwise,
+allocate a pixel value.
+
    2.  Check an internal hash table to see if we allocated an equal RGB
+value earlier. If we did, set the corresponding pixel value for the
+color and return it.
+
    3.  Try to allocate the RGB value. If we succeed, we get a pixel value
+that we save in the internal table with the RGB value.
+Return the pixel value.
+
    4.  The color could not be allocated. Find the closest matching
+color, save it in the internal table, and return it.
+
    
+
     A color can be set by passing setNamedColor() an RGB string like
+"#112233", or a color name, e.g. "blue". The names are taken from
+X11's rgb.txt database but can also be used under Windows. To get
+a lighter or darker color use light() and dark() respectively.
+Colors can also be set using setRgb() and setHsv(). The color
+components can be accessed in one go with rgb() and hsv(), or
+individually with red(), green() and blue().
+
     Use maxColors() and numBitPlanes() to determine the maximum number
+of colors and the number of bit planes supported by the underlying
+window system,
+
     If you need to allocate many colors temporarily, for example in an
+image viewer application, enterAllocContext(), leaveAllocContext() and
+destroyAllocContext() will prove useful.
+
     
     HSV Colors
+
    
+
     Because many people don't know the HSV color model very well, we'll
+cover it briefly here.
+
     The RGB model is hardware-oriented. Its representation is close to
+what most monitors show. In contrast, HSV represents color in a way
+more suited to the human perception of color. For example, the
+relationships "stronger than", "darker than" and "the opposite of"
+are easily expressed in HSV but are much harder to express in RGB.
+
     HSV, like RGB, has three components:
+
     
      
+
       
    •  H, for hue, is either 0-359 if the color is chromatic (not
+gray), or meaningless if it is gray. It represents degrees on the
+color wheel familiar to most people. Red is 0 (degrees), green is
+120 and blue is 240.
+
       
    •  S, for saturation, is 0-255, and the bigger it is, the
+stronger the color is. Grayish colors have saturation near 0; very
+strong colors have saturation near 255.
+
       
    •  V, for value, is 0-255 and represents lightness or brightness
+of the color. 0 is black; 255 is as far from black as possible.
+
       
    
+
     Here are some examples: Pure red is H=0, S=255, V=255. A dark red,
+moving slightly towards the magenta, could be H=350 (equivalent to
+-10), S=255, V=180. A grayish light red could have H about 0 (say
+350-359 or 0-10), S about 50-100, and S=255.
+
     TQt returns a hue value of -1 for achromatic colors. If you pass a
+too-big hue value, TQt forces it into range. Hue 360 or 720 is
+treated as 0; hue 540 is treated as 180.
+
     
    See also TQPalette, TQColorGroup, TQApplication::setColorSpec(), Color FAQ, Widget Appearance and Style, Graphics Classes, and Image Processing Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQColor::Spec
    
+
+
     The type of color specified, either RGB or HSV, e.g. in the
+TQColor::TQColor( x, y, z, colorSpec) constructor.
+
      
+
    • TQColor::Rgb
+
    • TQColor::Hsv
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQColor::TQColor ()
+
    
+
+
     Constructs an invalid color with the RGB value (0, 0, 0). An
+invalid color is a color that is not properly set up for the
+underlying window system.
+
     The alpha value of an invalid color is unspecified.
+
     
    See also isValid().
+
+
    TQColor::TQColor ( int r, int g, int b )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a color with the RGB value r, g, b, in the
+same way as setRgb().
+
     The color is left invalid if any or the arguments are illegal.
+
     
    See also setRgb().
+
+
    TQColor::TQColor ( int x, int y, int z, Spec colorSpec )
+
    
+Constructs a color with the RGB or HSV value x, y, z.
+
     The arguments are an RGB value if colorSpec is TQColor::Rgb. x (red), y (green), and z (blue). All of them must be in the
+range 0-255.
+
     The arguments are an HSV value if colorSpec is TQColor::Hsv. x (hue) must be -1 for achromatic colors and 0-359 for chromatic
+colors; y (saturation) and z (value) must both be in the
+range 0-255.
+
     
    See also setRgb() and setHsv().
+
+
    TQColor::TQColor ( TQRgb rgb, uint pixel = 0xffffffff )
+
    
+Constructs a color with the RGB value rgb and a custom pixel
+value pixel.
+
     If pixel == 0xffffffff (the default), then the color uses the
+RGB value in a standard way. If pixel is something else, then
+the pixel value is set directly to pixel, skipping the normal
+allocation procedure.
+
+
    TQColor::TQColor ( const TQString & name )
+
    
+Constructs a named color in the same way as setNamedColor() using
+name name.
+
     The color is left invalid if name cannot be parsed.
+
     
    See also setNamedColor().
+
+
    TQColor::TQColor ( const char * name )
+
    
+Constructs a named color in the same way as setNamedColor() using
+name name.
+
     The color is left invalid if name cannot be parsed.
+
     
    See also setNamedColor().
+
+
    TQColor::TQColor ( const TQColor & c )
+
    
+Constructs a color that is a copy of c.
+
+
    uint TQColor::alloc ()
+
    
+Allocates the RGB color and returns the pixel value.
+
     Allocating a color means to obtain a pixel value from the RGB
+specification.  The pixel value is an index into the global color
+table, but should be considered an arbitrary platform-dependent value.
+
     The pixel() function calls alloc() if necessary, so in general you
+don't need to call this function.
+
     
    See also enterAllocContext().
+
+
    int TQColor::blue () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the B (blue) component of the RGB value.
+
+
    void TQColor::cleanup () [static]
+
    
+Internal clean up required for TQColor.
+This function is called from the TQApplication destructor.
+
     
    See also initialize().
+
+
    TQStringList TQColor::colorNames () [static]
+
    
+
+Returns a TQStringList containing the color names TQt knows about.
+
+
    int TQColor::currentAllocContext () [static]
+
    
+Returns the current color allocation context.
+
     The default context is 0.
+
     
    See also enterAllocContext() and leaveAllocContext().
+
+
    TQColor TQColor::dark ( int factor = 200 ) const
+
    
+Returns a darker (or lighter) color, but does not change this
+object.
+
     Returns a darker color if factor is greater than 100. Setting
+factor to 300 returns a color that has one-third the
+brightness.
+
     Returns a lighter color if factor is less than 100. We
+recommend using lighter() for this purpose. If factor is 0 or
+negative, the return value is unspecified.
+
     (This function converts the current RGB color to HSV, divides V by
+factor and converts back to RGB.)
+
     
    See also light().
+
+
    Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
+
    void TQColor::destroyAllocContext ( int context ) [static]
+
    
+Destroys a color allocation context, context.
+
     This function deallocates all colors that were allocated in the
+specified context. If context == -1, it frees up all colors
+that the application has allocated. If context == -2, it frees
+up all colors that the application has allocated, except those in
+the default context.
+
     The function does nothing for true color displays.
+
     
    See also enterAllocContext() and alloc().
+
+
    Example: showimg/showimg.cpp.
+
    int TQColor::enterAllocContext () [static]
+
    
+Enters a color allocation context and returns a non-zero unique
+identifier.
+
     Color allocation contexts are useful for programs that need to
+allocate many colors and throw them away later, like image
+viewers. The allocation context functions work for true color
+displays as well as for colormap displays, except that
+TQColor::destroyAllocContext() does nothing for true color.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQPixmap loadPixmap( TQString fileName )
+    {
+        static int alloc_context = 0;
+        if ( alloc_context )
+            TQColor::destroyAllocContext( alloc_context );
+        alloc_context = TQColor::enterAllocContext();
+        TQPixmap pm( fileName );
+        TQColor::leaveAllocContext();
+        return pm;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     The example code loads a pixmap from file. It frees up all colors
+that were allocated the last time loadPixmap() was called.
+
     The initial/default context is 0. TQt keeps a list of colors
+associated with their allocation contexts. You can call
+destroyAllocContext() to get rid of all colors that were allocated
+in a specific context.
+
     Calling enterAllocContext() enters an allocation context. The
+allocation context lasts until you call leaveAllocContext().
+TQColor has an internal stack of allocation contexts. Each call to
+enterAllocContex() must have a corresponding leaveAllocContext().
+
     
    +        // context 0 active
+    int c1 = TQColor::enterAllocContext();    // enter context c1
+        // context c1 active
+    int c2 = TQColor::enterAllocContext();    // enter context c2
+        // context c2 active
+    TQColor::leaveAllocContext();             // leave context c2
+        // context c1 active
+    TQColor::leaveAllocContext();             // leave context c1
+        // context 0 active
+        // Now, free all colors that were allocated in context c2
+    TQColor::destroyAllocContext( c2 );
+    
    
+ 
+
     You may also want to set the application's color specification.
+See TQApplication::setColorSpec() for more information.
+
     
    See also leaveAllocContext(), currentAllocContext(), destroyAllocContext(), and TQApplication::setColorSpec().
+
+
    Example: showimg/showimg.cpp.
+
    void TQColor::getHsv ( int * h, int * s, int * v ) const
+
      
+
     Returns the current RGB value as HSV. The contents of the h, s and v pointers are set to the HSV values. If any of the three
+pointers are null, the function does nothing.
+
     The hue (which h points to) is set to -1 if the color is
+achromatic.
+
     Warning: Colors are stored internally as RGB values, so getHSv()
+may return slightly different values to those set by setHsv().
+
     
    See also setHsv() and rgb().
+
+
    void TQColor::getHsv ( int & h, int & s, int & v ) const
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
    void TQColor::getRgb ( int * r, int * g, int * b ) const
+
     
+
     Sets the contents pointed to by r, g and b to the red,
+green and blue components of the RGB value respectively. The value
+range for a component is 0..255.
+
     
    See also rgb(), setRgb(), and getHsv().
+
+
    int TQColor::green () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the G (green) component of the RGB value.
+
+
    void TQColor::hsv ( int * h, int * s, int * v ) const
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+Use getHsv() instead.
+
+
    Example: themes/metal.cpp.
+
    void TQColor::initialize () [static]
+
    
+Internal initialization required for TQColor.
+This function is called from the TQApplication constructor.
+
     
    See also cleanup().
+
+
    bool TQColor::isValid () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns FALSE if the color is invalid, i.e. it was constructed using the
+default constructor; otherwise returns TRUE.
+
+
    Examples: chart/element.cpp, chart/setdataform.cpp, and scribble/scribble.cpp.
+
    void TQColor::leaveAllocContext () [static]
+
    
+Leaves a color allocation context.
+
     See enterAllocContext() for a detailed explanation.
+
     
    See also enterAllocContext() and currentAllocContext().
+
+
    Example: showimg/showimg.cpp.
+
    TQColor TQColor::light ( int factor = 150 ) const
+
    
+Returns a lighter (or darker) color, but does not change this
+object.
+
     Returns a lighter color if factor is greater than 100. Setting
+factor to 150 returns a color that is 50% brighter.
+
     Returns a darker color if factor is less than 100. We recommend
+using dark() for this purpose. If factor is 0 or negative, the
+return value is unspecified.
+
     (This function converts the current RGB color to HSV, multiplies V
+by factor, and converts the result back to RGB.)
+
     
    See also dark().
+
+
    Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
+
    int TQColor::maxColors () [static]
+
    
+Returns the maximum number of colors supported by the underlying
+window system if the window system uses a palette.
+
     Otherwise returns -1. Use numBitPlanes() to calculate the available
+colors in that case.
+
+
    TQString TQColor::name () const
+
    
+Returns the name of the color in the format "#RRGGBB", i.e. a "#"
+character followed by three two-digit hexadecimal numbers.
+
     
    See also setNamedColor().
+
+
    Example: chart/setdataform.cpp.
+
    int TQColor::numBitPlanes () [static]
+
    
+Returns the number of color bit planes for the underlying window
+system.
+
     The returned value is equal to the default pixmap depth.
+
     
    See also TQPixmap::defaultDepth().
+
+
    bool TQColor::operator!= ( const TQColor & c ) const
+
    
+
+Returns TRUE if this color has a different RGB value from c;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    TQColor & TQColor::operator= ( const TQColor & c )
+
    
+Assigns a copy of the color c and returns a reference to this
+color.
+
+
    bool TQColor::operator== ( const TQColor & c ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if this color has the same RGB value as c;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    uint TQColor::pixel () const
+
    
+Returns the pixel value.
+
     This value is used by the underlying window system to refer to a
+color. It can be thought of as an index into the display
+hardware's color table, but the value is an arbitrary 32-bit
+value.
+
     
    See also alloc().
+
+
    uint TQColor::pixel ( int screen ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the pixel value for screen screen.
+
     This value is used by the underlying window system to refer to a color.
+It can be thought of as an index into the display hardware's color table,
+but the value is an arbitrary 32-bit value.
+
     
    See also alloc().
+
+
    int TQColor::red () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the R (red) component of the RGB value.
+
+
    TQRgb TQColor::rgb () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the RGB value.
+
     The return type TQRgb is equivalent to unsigned int.
+
     For an invalid color, the alpha value of the returned color is
+unspecified.
+
     
    See also setRgb(), hsv(), qRed(), qBlue(), qGreen(), and isValid().
+
+
    void TQColor::rgb ( int * r, int * g, int * b ) const
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+Use getRgb() instead 
+
    void TQColor::setHsv ( int h, int s, int v )
+
    
+Sets a HSV color value. h is the hue, s is the saturation
+and v is the value of the HSV color.
+
     If s or v are not in the range 0-255, or h is < -1, the
+color is not changed.
+
     Warning: Colors are stored internally as RGB values, so getHSv()
+may return slightly different values to those set by setHsv().
+
     
    See also hsv() and setRgb().
+
+
    Examples: drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, grapher/grapher.cpp, and progress/progress.cpp.
+
    void TQColor::setNamedColor ( const TQString & name )
+
    
+Sets the RGB value to name, which may be in one of these
+formats:
+
      
+
    •  #RGB (each of R, G and B is a single hex digit)
+
    •  #RRGGBB
+
    •  #RRRGGGBBB
+
    •  #RRRRGGGGBBBB
+
    •  A name from the X color database (rgb.txt) (e.g.
+"steelblue" or "gainsboro"). These color names also work
+under Windows.
+
    
+
     The color is invalid if name cannot be parsed.
+
+
    void TQColor::setRgb ( int r, int g, int b )
+
    
+Sets the RGB value to r, g, b. The arguments, r, g
+and b must all be in the range 0..255. If any of them are
+outside the legal range, the color is not changed.
+
     
    See also rgb() and setHsv().
+
+
    void TQColor::setRgb ( TQRgb rgb )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the RGB value to rgb.
+
     The type TQRgb is equivalent to unsigned int.
+
     
    See also rgb() and setHsv().
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQColor & c )
+
    
+
+Writes a color object, c to the stream, s.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQColor & c )
+
    
+
+Reads a color object, c, from the stream, s.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
    int qAlpha ( TQRgb rgba )
+
    
+
+
+
     Returns the alpha component of the RGBA quadruplet rgba.
+
+
    int qBlue ( TQRgb rgb )
+
    
+
+
+
     Returns the blue component of the RGB triplet rgb.
+
    See also qRgb() and TQColor::blue().
+
+
    int qGray ( int r, int g, int b )
+
    
+
+
+
     Returns a gray value 0..255 from the (r, g, b) triplet.
+
     The gray value is calculated using the formula (r*11 + g*16 +
+b*5)/32.
+
+
    int qGray ( qRgb rgb )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns a gray value 0..255 from the given rgb colour.
+
+
    int qGreen ( TQRgb rgb )
+
    
+
+
+
     Returns the green component of the RGB triplet rgb.
+
    See also qRgb() and TQColor::green().
+
+
    int qRed ( TQRgb rgb )
+
    
+
+
+
     Returns the red component of the RGB triplet rgb.
+
    See also qRgb() and TQColor::red().
+
+
    TQRgb qRgb ( int r, int g, int b )
+
    
+
+
+
     Returns the RGB triplet (r,g,b).
+
     The return type TQRgb is equivalent to unsigned int.
+
     
    See also qRgba(), qRed(), qGreen(), and qBlue().
+
+
    TQRgb qRgba ( int r, int g, int b, int a )
+
    
+
+
+
     Returns the RGBA quadruplet (r,g,b,a).
+
     The return type TQRgba is equivalent to unsigned int.
+
     
    See also qRgb(), qRed(), qGreen(), and qBlue().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqcolordialog.html b/doc/html/ntqcolordialog.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..98ffd65d8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqcolordialog.html
@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQColorDialog Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQColorDialog Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQColorDialog class provides a dialog widget for specifying colors.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqcolordialog.h>
+
    Inherits TQDialog.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQColor getColor ( const TQColor & initial = white, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQRgb getRgba ( TQRgb initial, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • int customCount ()
      • 
+
    • TQRgb customColor ( int i )
      • 
+
    • void setCustomColor ( int i, TQRgb c )
      • 
+
    • void setStandardColor ( int i, TQRgb c )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQColorDialog class provides a dialog widget for specifying colors.
+
+
+
+
     The color dialog's function is to allow users to choose colors.
+For example, you might use this in a drawing program to allow the
+user to set the brush color.
+
     The static functions provide modal color dialogs.
+
+
     The static getColor() function shows the dialog and allows the
+user to specify a color. The getRgba() function does the same but
+also allows the user to specify a color with an alpha channel
+(transparency) value.
+
     The user can store customCount() different custom colors. The
+custom colors are shared by all color dialogs, and remembered
+during the execution of the program. Use setCustomColor() to set
+the custom colors, and use customColor() to get them.
+
     
     
    See also Dialog Classes and Graphics Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQRgb TQColorDialog::customColor ( int i ) [static]
+
    
+Returns custom color number i as a TQRgb.
+
+
    int TQColorDialog::customCount () [static]
+
    
+Returns the number of custom colors supported by TQColorDialog. All
+color dialogs share the same custom colors.
+
+
    TQColor TQColorDialog::getColor ( const TQColor & initial = white, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) [static]
+
    
+Pops up a modal color dialog, lets the user choose a color, and
+returns that color. The color is initially set to initial. The
+dialog is a child of parent and is called name. It returns
+an invalid (see TQColor::isValid()) color if the user cancels the
+dialog. All colors allocated by the dialog will be deallocated
+before this function returns.
+
+
    Examples: chart/setdataform.cpp and scribble/scribble.cpp.
+
    TQRgb TQColorDialog::getRgba ( TQRgb initial, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) [static]
+
    
+Pops up a modal color dialog to allow the user to choose a color
+and an alpha channel (transparency) value. The color+alpha is
+initially set to initial. The dialog is a child of parent
+and called name.
+
     If ok is non-null, *ok is set to TRUE if the user clicked
+OK, and to FALSE if the user clicked Cancel.
+
     If the user clicks Cancel, the initial value is returned.
+
+
    void TQColorDialog::setCustomColor ( int i, TQRgb c ) [static]
+
    
+Sets custom color number i to the TQRgb value c.
+
+
    void TQColorDialog::setStandardColor ( int i, TQRgb c ) [static]
+
    
+Sets standard color number i to the TQRgb value c.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqcombobox.html b/doc/html/ntqcombobox.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a4f902773
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqcombobox.html
@@ -0,0 +1,602 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQComboBox Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQComboBox Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQComboBox widget is a combined button and popup list.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqcombobox.h>
+
    Inherits TQWidget.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • bool autoCompletion - whether auto-completion is enabled
      • 
+
    • bool autoMask - whether the combobox is automatically masked  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool autoResize - whether auto resize is enabled  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • int count - the number of items in the combobox  (read only)
      • 
+
    • int currentItem - the index of the current item in the combobox
      • 
+
    • TQString currentText - the text of the combobox's current item
      • 
+
    • bool duplicatesEnabled - whether duplicates are allowed
      • 
+
    • bool editable - whether the combobox is editable
      • 
+
    • Policy insertionPolicy - the position of the items inserted by the user
      • 
+
    • int maxCount - the maximum number of items allowed in the combobox
      • 
+
    • int sizeLimit - the maximum on-screen size of the combobox
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQComboBox widget is a combined button and popup list.
+
     
+
+
     A combobox is a selection widget which displays the current item
+and can pop up a list of items. A combobox may be editable in
+which case the user can enter arbitrary strings.
+
     Comboboxes provide a means of showing the user's current choice
+out of a list of options in a way that takes up the minimum amount
+of screen space.
+
     TQComboBox supports three different display styles: Aqua/Motif 1.x,
+Motif 2.0 and Windows. In Motif 1.x, a combobox was called
+XmOptionMenu. In Motif 2.0, OSF introduced an improved combobox
+and named that XmComboBox. TQComboBox provides both.
+
     TQComboBox provides two different constructors. The simplest
+constructor creates an "old-style" combobox in Motif (or Aqua)
+style:
+
    +        TQComboBox *c = new TQComboBox( this, "read-only combobox" );
+    
    
+ 
+
     The other constructor creates a new-style combobox in Motif style,
+and can create both read-only and editable comboboxes:
+
    +        TQComboBox *c1 = new TQComboBox( FALSE, this, "read-only combobox" );
+        TQComboBox *c2 = new TQComboBox( TRUE, this, "editable combobox" );
+    
    
+ 
+
     New-style comboboxes use a list box in both Motif and Windows
+styles, and both the content size and the on-screen size of the
+list box can be limited with sizeLimit() and setMaxCount()
+respectively. Old-style comboboxes use a popup in Aqua and Motif
+style, and that popup will happily grow larger than the desktop if
+you put enough data into it.
+
     The two constructors create identical-looking comboboxes in
+Windows style.
+
     Comboboxes can contain pixmaps as well as strings; the
+insertItem() and changeItem() functions are suitably overloaded.
+For editable comboboxes, the function clearEdit() is provided,
+to clear the displayed string without changing the combobox's
+contents.
+
     A combobox emits two signals, activated() and highlighted(), when
+a new item has been activated (selected) or highlighted (made
+current). Both signals exist in two versions, one with a TQString argument and one with an int argument. If the user
+highlights or activates a pixmap, only the int signals are
+emitted. Whenever the text of an editable combobox is changed the
+textChanged() signal is emitted.
+
     When the user enters a new string in an editable combobox, the
+widget may or may not insert it, and it can insert it in several
+locations. The default policy is is AtBottom but you can change
+this using setInsertionPolicy().
+
     It is possible to constrain the input to an editable combobox
+using TQValidator; see setValidator(). By default, any input is
+accepted.
+
     If the combobox is not editable then it has a default
+focusPolicy() of TabFocus, i.e. it will not grab focus if
+clicked. This differs from both Windows and Motif. If the combobox
+is editable then it has a default focusPolicy() of StrongFocus,
+i.e. it will grab focus if clicked.
+
     A combobox can be populated using the insert functions,
+insertStringList() and insertItem() for example. Items can be
+changed with changeItem(). An item can be removed with
+removeItem() and all items can be removed with clear(). The text
+of the current item is returned by currentText(), and the text of
+a numbered item is returned with text(). The current item can be
+set with setCurrentItem() or setCurrentText(). The number of items
+in the combobox is returned by count(); the maximum number of
+items can be set with setMaxCount(). You can allow editing using
+setEditable(). For editable comboboxes you can set auto-completion
+using setAutoCompletion() and whether or not the user can add
+duplicates is set with setDuplicatesEnabled().
+
     (Motif 1, read-only)
    
+(Motif 2, editable)
    
+(Motif 2, read-only)
    
+(Windows style)
+
     Depending on the style, TQComboBox will use a TQListBox or a
+TQPopupMenu to display the list of items. See setListBox() for
+more information.
+
     
    See also TQLineEdit, TQListBox, TQSpinBox, TQRadioButton, TQButtonGroup, GUI Design Handbook: Combo Box, GUI Design Handbook: Drop-Down List Box, and Basic Widgets.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQComboBox::Policy
    
+
+
     This enum specifies what the TQComboBox should do when a new string
+is entered by the user.
+
      
+
    • TQComboBox::NoInsertion - the string will not be inserted into the
+combobox.
+
    • TQComboBox::AtTop - insert the string as the first item in the combobox.
+
    • TQComboBox::AtCurrent - replace the previously selected item with the
+string the user has entered.
+
    • TQComboBox::AtBottom - insert the string as the last item in the
+combobox.
+
    • TQComboBox::AfterCurrent - insert the string after the previously
+selected item.
+
    • TQComboBox::BeforeCurrent - insert the string before the previously
+selected item.
+
     activated() is always emitted when the string is entered.
+
     If inserting the new string would cause the combobox to breach its
+content size limit, the item at the other end of the list is
+deleted. The definition of "other end" is
+implementation-dependent.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQComboBox::TQComboBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a combobox widget with parent parent called name.
+
     This constructor creates a popup list if the program uses Motif
+(or Aqua) look and feel; this is compatible with Motif 1.x and
+Aqua.
+
     Note: If you use this constructor to create your TQComboBox, then
+the pixmap() function will always return 0. To workaround this,
+use the other constructor.
+
     
+
    TQComboBox::TQComboBox ( bool rw, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a combobox with a maximum size and either Motif 2.0 or
+Windows look and feel.
+
     The input field can be edited if rw is TRUE, otherwise the user
+may only choose one of the items in the combobox.
+
     The parent and name arguments are passed on to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
+
    TQComboBox::~TQComboBox ()
+
    
+Destroys the combobox.
+
+
    void TQComboBox::activated ( int index ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when a new item has been activated
+(selected). The index is the position of the item in the
+combobox.
+
     This signal is not emitted if the item is changed
+programmatically, e.g. using setCurrentItem().
+
+
    Examples: fileiconview/mainwindow.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, lineedits/lineedits.cpp, listboxcombo/listboxcombo.cpp, and qmag/qmag.cpp.
+
    void TQComboBox::activated ( const TQString & string ) [signal]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This signal is emitted when a new item has been activated
+(selected). string is the selected string.
+
     You can also use the activated(int) signal, but be aware that its
+argument is meaningful only for selected strings, not for user
+entered strings.
+
+
    bool TQComboBox::autoCompletion () const
+
    Returns TRUE if auto-completion is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "autoCompletion" property for details.
+
    bool TQComboBox::autoResize () const
+
    Returns TRUE if auto resize is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "autoResize" property for details.
+
    void TQComboBox::changeItem ( const TQString & t, int index )
+
    
+Replaces the item at position index with the text t.
+
+
    void TQComboBox::changeItem ( const TQPixmap & im, int index )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Replaces the item at position index with the pixmap im,
+unless the combobox is editable.
+
     
    See also insertItem().
+
+
    void TQComboBox::changeItem ( const TQPixmap & im, const TQString & t, int index )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Replaces the item at position index with the pixmap im and
+the text t.
+
     
    See also insertItem().
+
+
    void TQComboBox::clear () [slot]
+
    
+Removes all combobox items.
+
+
    void TQComboBox::clearEdit () [slot]
+
    
+Clears the line edit without changing the combobox's contents.
+Does nothing if the combobox isn't editable.
+
     This is particularly useful when using a combobox as a line edit
+with history. For example you can connect the combobox's
+activated() signal to clearEdit() in order to present the user
+with a new, empty line as soon as Enter is pressed.
+
     
    See also setEditText().
+
+
    void TQComboBox::clearValidator () [slot]
+
    
+This slot is equivalent to setValidator( 0 ).
+
+
    int TQComboBox::count () const
+
    Returns the number of items in the combobox.
+See the "count" property for details.
+
    int TQComboBox::currentItem () const
+
    Returns the index of the current item in the combobox.
+See the "currentItem" property for details.
+
    TQString TQComboBox::currentText () const
+
    Returns the text of the combobox's current item.
+See the "currentText" property for details.
+
    bool TQComboBox::duplicatesEnabled () const
+
    Returns TRUE if duplicates are allowed; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "duplicatesEnabled" property for details.
+
    bool TQComboBox::editable () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the combobox is editable; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "editable" property for details.
+
    void TQComboBox::highlighted ( int index ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when a new item has been set to be the
+current item. The index is the position of the item in the
+combobox.
+
     This signal is not emitted if the item is changed
+programmatically, e.g. using setCurrentItem().
+
+
    void TQComboBox::highlighted ( const TQString & string ) [signal]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This signal is emitted when a new item has been set to be the
+current item. string is the item's text.
+
     You can also use the highlighted(int) signal.
+
+
    void TQComboBox::insertItem ( const TQString & t, int index = -1 )
+
    
+Inserts a text item with text t, at position index. The item
+will be appended if index is negative.
+
+
    Examples: chart/optionsform.cpp, fileiconview/mainwindow.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, lineedits/lineedits.cpp, listboxcombo/listboxcombo.cpp, regexptester/regexptester.cpp, and tictac/tictac.cpp.
+
    void TQComboBox::insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a pixmap item at position index. The item will be
+appended if index is negative.
+
+
    void TQComboBox::insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQString & text, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a pixmap item with additional text text at position
+index. The item will be appended if index is negative.
+
+
    void TQComboBox::insertStrList ( const char ** strings, int numStrings = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+Inserts the array of char * strings at position index in the
+combobox.
+
     The numStrings argument is the number of strings. If numStrings is -1 (default), the strings array must be
+terminated with 0.
+
     Example:
+
    +        static const char* items[] = { "red", "green", "blue", 0 };
+        combo->insertStrList( items );
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also insertStringList().
+
+
    Example: qmag/qmag.cpp.
+
    void TQComboBox::insertStrList ( const TQStrList & list, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts the list of strings at position index in the
+combobox.
+
     This is only for compatibility since it does not support Unicode
+strings. See insertStringList().
+
+
    void TQComboBox::insertStrList ( const TQStrList * list, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts the list of strings at position index in the
+combobox.
+
     This is only for compatibility since it does not support Unicode
+strings. See insertStringList().
+
+
    void TQComboBox::insertStringList ( const TQStringList & list, int index = -1 )
+
    
+Inserts the list of strings at position index in the
+combobox.
+
+
    Policy TQComboBox::insertionPolicy () const
+
    Returns the position of the items inserted by the user.
+See the "insertionPolicy" property for details.
+
    TQLineEdit * TQComboBox::lineEdit () const
+
    
+Returns the line edit, or 0 if there is no line edit.
+
     Only editable listboxes have a line editor.
+
+
    TQListBox * TQComboBox::listBox () const
+
    
+Returns the current list box, or 0 if there is no list box.
+(TQComboBox can use TQPopupMenu instead of TQListBox.) Provided to
+match setListBox().
+
     
    See also setListBox().
+
+
    Example: listboxcombo/listboxcombo.cpp.
+
    int TQComboBox::maxCount () const
+
    Returns the maximum number of items allowed in the combobox.
+See the "maxCount" property for details.
+
    const TQPixmap * TQComboBox::pixmap ( int index ) const
+
    
+Returns the pixmap item at position index, or 0 if the item is
+not a pixmap.
+
+
    void TQComboBox::popup () [virtual]
+
    
+Pops up the combobox popup list.
+
     If the list is empty, no items appear.
+
+
    void TQComboBox::removeItem ( int index )
+
    
+Removes the item at position index.
+
+
    void TQComboBox::setAutoCompletion ( bool ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether auto-completion is enabled.
+See the "autoCompletion" property for details.
+
    void TQComboBox::setAutoResize ( bool ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether auto resize is enabled.
+See the "autoResize" property for details.
+
    void TQComboBox::setCurrentItem ( int index ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the index of the current item in the combobox to index.
+See the "currentItem" property for details.
+
    void TQComboBox::setCurrentText ( const TQString & ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the text of the combobox's current item.
+See the "currentText" property for details.
+
    void TQComboBox::setDuplicatesEnabled ( bool enable )
+
    Sets whether duplicates are allowed to enable.
+See the "duplicatesEnabled" property for details.
+
    void TQComboBox::setEditText ( const TQString & newText ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Sets the text in the line edit to newText without changing the
+combobox's contents. Does nothing if the combobox isn't editable.
+
     This is useful e.g. for providing a good starting point for the
+user's editing and entering the change in the combobox only when
+the user presses Enter.
+
     
    See also clearEdit() and insertItem().
+
+
    void TQComboBox::setEditable ( bool )
+
    Sets whether the combobox is editable.
+See the "editable" property for details.
+
    void TQComboBox::setFont ( const TQFont & font ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the font for both the combobox button and the combobox popup
+list to font.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
+
    void TQComboBox::setInsertionPolicy ( Policy policy ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the position of the items inserted by the user to policy.
+See the "insertionPolicy" property for details.
+
    void TQComboBox::setLineEdit ( TQLineEdit * edit ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the line edit to use edit instead of the current line edit.
+
+
    void TQComboBox::setListBox ( TQListBox * newListBox ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the combobox to use newListBox instead of the current list
+box or popup. As a side effect, it clears the combobox of its
+current contents.
+
     Warning: TQComboBox assumes that newListBox->text(n) returns
+non-null for 0 <= n < newListbox->count(). This assumption is
+necessary because of the line edit in TQComboBox.
+
+
    void TQComboBox::setMaxCount ( int ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the maximum number of items allowed in the combobox.
+See the "maxCount" property for details.
+
    void TQComboBox::setPalette ( const TQPalette & palette ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the palette for both the combobox button and the combobox
+popup list to palette.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
+
    void TQComboBox::setSizeLimit ( int ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the maximum on-screen size of the combobox.
+See the "sizeLimit" property for details.
+
    void TQComboBox::setValidator ( const TQValidator * v ) [virtual]
+
    
+Applies the validator v to the combobox so that only text which
+is valid according to v is accepted.
+
     This function does nothing if the combobox is not editable.
+
     
    See also validator(), clearValidator(), and TQValidator.
+
+
    int TQComboBox::sizeLimit () const
+
    Returns the maximum on-screen size of the combobox.
+See the "sizeLimit" property for details.
+
    TQString TQComboBox::text ( int index ) const
+
    
+Returns the text item at position index, or TQString::null if
+the item is not a string.
+
     
    See also currentText.
+
+
    Examples: fileiconview/mainwindow.cpp and helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp.
+
    void TQComboBox::textChanged ( const TQString & string ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is used for editable comboboxes. It is emitted
+whenever the contents of the text entry field changes. string
+contains the new text.
+
+
    const TQValidator * TQComboBox::validator () const
+
    
+Returns the validator which constrains editing for this combobox
+if there is one; otherwise returns 0.
+
     
    See also setValidator(), clearValidator(), and TQValidator.
+
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    bool autoCompletion
    
+
    This property holds whether auto-completion is enabled.
+
    This property can only be set for editable comboboxes, for
+non-editable comboboxes it has no effect. It is FALSE by default.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setAutoCompletion() and get this property's value with autoCompletion().
+
    bool autoMask
    
+
    This property holds whether the combobox is automatically masked.
+
    See also TQWidget::autoMask.
+
+
    bool autoResize
     
    This property holds whether auto resize is enabled.
+
    This property is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     If this property is set to TRUE then the combobox will resize itself
+whenever its contents change. The default is FALSE.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setAutoResize() and get this property's value with autoResize().
+
    int count
    
+
    This property holds the number of items in the combobox.
+
    
+
    Get this property's value with count().
+
    int currentItem
    
+
    This property holds the index of the current item in the combobox.
+
    Note that the activated() and highlighted() signals are only
+emitted when the user changes the current item, not when it is
+changed programmatically.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setCurrentItem() and get this property's value with currentItem().
+
    TQString currentText
    
+
    This property holds the text of the combobox's current item.
+
    
+
    Set this property's value with setCurrentText() and get this property's value with currentText().
+
    bool duplicatesEnabled
    
+
    This property holds whether duplicates are allowed.
+
    If the combobox is editable and the user enters some text in the
+combobox's lineedit and presses Enter (and the insertionPolicy()
+is not NoInsertion), then what happens is this:
+
      
+
    •  If the text is not already in the list, the text is inserted.
+
    •  If the text is in the list and this property is TRUE (the
+default), the text is inserted.
+
    •  If the text is in the list and this property is FALSE, the text
+is not inserted; instead the item which has matching text becomes
+the current item.
+
    
+
     This property only affects user-interaction. You can use
+insertItem() to insert duplicates if you wish regardless of this
+setting.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setDuplicatesEnabled() and get this property's value with duplicatesEnabled().
+
    bool editable
    
+
    This property holds whether the combobox is editable.
+
    This property's default is FALSE. Note that the combobox will be
+cleared if this property is set to TRUE for a 1.x Motif style
+combobox. To avoid this, use setEditable() before inserting any
+items. Also note that the 1.x version of Motif didn't have any
+editable comboboxes, so the combobox will change it's appearance
+to a 2.0 style Motif combobox is it is set to be editable.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setEditable() and get this property's value with editable().
+
    Policy insertionPolicy
    
+
    This property holds the position of the items inserted by the user.
+
    The default insertion policy is AtBottom. See Policy.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setInsertionPolicy() and get this property's value with insertionPolicy().
+
    int maxCount
    
+
    This property holds the maximum number of items allowed in the combobox.
+
    
+
    Set this property's value with setMaxCount() and get this property's value with maxCount().
+
    int sizeLimit
    
+
    This property holds the maximum on-screen size of the combobox.
+
    This property is ignored for both Motif 1.x style and non-editable
+comboboxes in Mac style. The default limit is ten
+lines. If the number of items in the combobox is or grows larger
+than lines, a scrollbar is added.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setSizeLimit() and get this property's value with sizeLimit().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqcommonstyle.html b/doc/html/ntqcommonstyle.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5d46a613a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqcommonstyle.html
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQCommonStyle Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQCommonStyle Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQCommonStyle class encapsulates the common Look and Feel of a GUI.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqcommonstyle.h>
+
    Inherits TQStyle.
+
    Inherited by TQMotifStyle and TQWindowsStyle.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQCommonStyle class encapsulates the common Look and Feel of a GUI.
+
     
+
     This abstract class implements some of the widget's look and feel
+that is common to all GUI styles provided and shipped as part of
+TQt.
+
     All the functions are documented in TQStyle.
+
    See also Widget Appearance and Style.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQCommonStyle::TQCommonStyle ()
+
    
+Constructs a TQCommonStyle.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqcstring.html b/doc/html/ntqcstring.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d80baeffa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqcstring.html
@@ -0,0 +1,1105 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQCString Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQCString Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQCString class provides an abstraction of the classic C
+zero-terminated char array (char *).
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqcstring.h>
+
    Inherits TQByteArray.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQCString ()
      • 
+
    • TQCString ( int size )
      • 
+
    • TQCString ( const TQCString & s )
      • 
+
    • TQCString ( const char * str )
      • 
+
    • TQCString ( const char * str, uint maxsize )
      • 
+
    • TQCString & operator= ( const TQCString & s )
      • 
+
    • TQCString & operator= ( const char * str )
      • 
+
    • bool isNull () const
      • 
+
    • bool isEmpty () const
      • 
+
    • uint length () const
      • 
+
    • bool resize ( uint len )
      • 
+
    • bool truncate ( uint pos )
      • 
+
    • bool fill ( char c, int len = -1 )
      • 
+
    • TQCString copy () const
      • 
+
    • TQCString & sprintf ( const char * format, ... )
      • 
+
    • int find ( char c, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const
      • 
+
    • int find ( const char * str, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const
      • 
+
    • int find ( const TQRegExp & rx, int index = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • int findRev ( char c, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const
      • 
+
    • int findRev ( const char * str, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const
      • 
+
    • int findRev ( const TQRegExp & rx, int index = -1 ) const
      • 
+
    • int contains ( char c, bool cs = TRUE ) const
      • 
+
    • int contains ( const char * str, bool cs = TRUE ) const
      • 
+
    • int contains ( const TQRegExp & rx ) const
      • 
+
    • TQCString left ( uint len ) const
      • 
+
    • TQCString right ( uint len ) const
      • 
+
    • TQCString mid ( uint index, uint len = 0xffffffff ) const
      • 
+
    • TQCString leftJustify ( uint width, char fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const
      • 
+
    • TQCString rightJustify ( uint width, char fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const
      • 
+
    • TQCString lower () const
      • 
+
    • TQCString upper () const
      • 
+
    • TQCString stripWhiteSpace () const
      • 
+
    • TQCString simplifyWhiteSpace () const
      • 
+
    • TQCString & insert ( uint index, const char * s )
      • 
+
    • TQCString & insert ( uint index, char c )
      • 
+
    • TQCString & append ( const char * str )
      • 
+
    • TQCString & prepend ( const char * s )
      • 
+
    • TQCString & remove ( uint index, uint len )
      • 
+
    • TQCString & replace ( uint index, uint len, const char * str )
      • 
+
    • TQCString & replace ( const TQRegExp & rx, const char * str )
      • 
+
    • TQCString & replace ( char c, const char * after )
      • 
+
    • TQCString & replace ( const char * before, const char * after )
      • 
+
    • TQCString & replace ( char c1, char c2 )
      • 
+
    • short toShort ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • ushort toUShort ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • int toInt ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • uint toUInt ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • long toLong ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • ulong toULong ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • float toFloat ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • double toDouble ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • TQCString & setStr ( const char * str )
      • 
+
    • TQCString & setNum ( short n )
      • 
+
    • TQCString & setNum ( ushort n )
      • 
+
    • TQCString & setNum ( int n )
      • 
+
    • TQCString & setNum ( uint n )
      • 
+
    • TQCString & setNum ( long n )
      • 
+
    • TQCString & setNum ( ulong n )
      • 
+
    • TQCString & setNum ( float n, char f = 'g', int prec = 6 )
      • 
+
    • TQCString & setNum ( double n, char f = 'g', int prec = 6 )
      • 
+
    • bool setExpand ( uint index, char c )
      • 
+
    • operator const char * () const
      • 
+
    • TQCString & operator+= ( const char * str )
      • 
+
    • TQCString & operator+= ( char c )
      • 
+
    
+
    Related Functions
    
+
      
+
    • void * qmemmove ( void * dst, const void * src, uint len )
      • 
+
    • char * qstrdup ( const char * src )
      • 
+
    • char * qstrcpy ( char * dst, const char * src )
      • 
+
    • char * qstrncpy ( char * dst, const char * src, uint len )
      • 
+
    • uint qstrlen ( const char * str )
      • 
+
    • int qstrcmp ( const char * str1, const char * str2 )
      • 
+
    • int qstrncmp ( const char * str1, const char * str2, uint len )
      • 
+
    • int qstricmp ( const char * str1, const char * str2 )
      • 
+
    • int qstrnicmp ( const char * str1, const char * str2, uint len )
      • 
+
    • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQCString & str )
      • 
+
    • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQCString & str )
      • 
+
    • bool operator== ( const TQCString & s1, const TQCString & s2 )
      • 
+
    • bool operator== ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )
      • 
+
    • bool operator== ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )
      • 
+
    • bool operator!= ( const TQCString & s1, const TQCString & s2 )
      • 
+
    • bool operator!= ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )
      • 
+
    • bool operator!= ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )
      • 
+
    • bool operator< ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )
      • 
+
    • bool operator< ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )
      • 
+
    • bool operator<= ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )
      • 
+
    • bool operator<= ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )
      • 
+
    • bool operator> ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )
      • 
+
    • bool operator> ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )
      • 
+
    • bool operator>= ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )
      • 
+
    • bool operator>= ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )
      • 
+
    • const TQCString operator+ ( const TQCString & s1, const TQCString & s2 )
      • 
+
    • const TQCString operator+ ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )
      • 
+
    • const TQCString operator+ ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )
      • 
+
    • const TQCString operator+ ( const TQCString & s, char c )
      • 
+
    • const TQCString operator+ ( char c, const TQCString & s )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
+The TQCString class provides an abstraction of the classic C
+zero-terminated char array (char *).
+
     
+
+
+
+
     TQCString inherits TQByteArray, which is defined as
+TQMemArray<char>. Since TQCString is a TQMemArray, it uses explicit sharing with a reference count.
+
     TQCString tries to behave like a more convenient const char *.
+The price of doing this is that some algorithms will perform
+badly. For example, append() is O(length()) since it scans for a
+null terminator. Although you might use TQCString for text that is
+never exposed to the user, for most purposes, and especially for
+user-visible text, you should use TQString. TQString provides
+implicit sharing, Unicode and other internationalization support,
+and is well optimized.
+
     Note that for the TQCString methods that take a const char *
+parameter the const char * must either be 0 (null) or not-null
+and '\0' (NUL byte) terminated; otherwise the results are
+undefined.
+
     A TQCString that has not been assigned to anything is null, i.e.
+both the length and the data pointer is 0. A TQCString that
+references the empty string ("", a single '\0' char) is empty.
+Both null and empty TQCStrings are legal parameters to the methods.
+Assigning const char * 0 to TQCString produces a null TQCString.
+
     The length() function returns the length of the string; resize()
+resizes the string and truncate() truncates the string. A string
+can be filled with a character using fill(). Strings can be left
+or right padded with characters using leftJustify() and
+rightJustify(). Characters, strings and regular expressions can be
+searched for using find() and findRev(), and counted using
+contains().
+
     Strings and characters can be inserted with insert() and appended
+with append(). A string can be prepended with prepend().
+Characters can be removed from the string with remove() and
+replaced with replace().
+
     Portions of a string can be extracted using left(), right() and
+mid(). Whitespace can be removed using stripWhiteSpace() and
+simplifyWhiteSpace(). Strings can be converted to uppercase or
+lowercase with upper() and lower() respectively.
+
     Strings that contain numbers can be converted to numbers with
+toShort(), toInt(), toLong(), toULong(), toFloat() and toDouble().
+Numbers can be converted to strings with setNum().
+
     Many operators are overloaded to work with TQCStrings. TQCString
+also supports some more obscure functions, e.g. sprintf(),
+setStr() and setExpand().
+
     
+
     Note on Character Comparisons
+
+
     In TQCString the notion of uppercase and lowercase and of which
+character is greater than or less than another character is locale
+dependent. This affects functions which support a case insensitive
+option or which compare or lowercase or uppercase their arguments.
+Case insensitive operations and comparisons will be accurate if
+both strings contain only ASCII characters. (If $LC_CTYPE is
+set, most Unix systems do "the right thing".) Functions that this
+affects include contains(), find(), findRev(), operator<(), operator<=(), operator>(), operator>=(), lower() and
+upper().
+
     This issue does not apply to TQStrings since they represent
+characters using Unicode.
+
    
+
    
+
     Performance note: The TQCString methods for TQRegExp searching are
+implemented by converting the TQCString to a TQString and performing
+the search on that. This implies a deep copy of the TQCString data.
+If you are going to perform many TQRegExp searches on a large
+TQCString, you will get better performance by converting the
+TQCString to a TQString yourself, and then searching in the TQString.
+
    See also Collection Classes, Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes, Text Related Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQCString::TQCString ()
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a null string.
+
     
    See also isNull().
+
+
    TQCString::TQCString ( int size )
+
    
+Constructs a string with room for size characters, including
+the '\0'-terminator. Makes a null string if size == 0.
+
     If size > 0, then the first and last characters in the string
+are initialized to '\0'. All other characters are uninitialized.
+
     
    See also resize() and isNull().
+
+
    TQCString::TQCString ( const TQCString & s )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a shallow copy s.
+
     
    See also assign().
+
+
    TQCString::TQCString ( const char * str )
+
    
+Constructs a string that is a deep copy of str.
+
     If str is 0 a null string is created.
+
     
    See also isNull().
+
+
    TQCString::TQCString ( const char * str, uint maxsize )
+
    
+Constructs a string that is a deep copy of str. The copy will
+be at most maxsize bytes long including the '\0'-terminator.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQCString str( "helloworld", 6 ); // assigns "hello" to str
+    
    
+ 
+
     If str contains a 0 byte within the first maxsize bytes, the
+resulting TQCString will be terminated by this 0. If str is 0 a
+null string is created.
+
     
    See also isNull().
+
+
    TQCString & TQCString::append ( const char * str )
+
    
+
+
     Appends string str to the string and returns a reference to the
+string. Equivalent to operator+=().
+
+
    int TQCString::contains ( char c, bool cs = TRUE ) const
+
    
+Returns the number of times the character c occurs in the
+string.
+
     The match is case sensitive if cs is TRUE, or case insensitive
+if cs if FALSE.
+
     
    See also Note on character comparisons.
+
+
    int TQCString::contains ( const char * str, bool cs = TRUE ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the number of times str occurs in the string.
+
     The match is case sensitive if cs is TRUE, or case insensitive
+if cs if FALSE.
+
     This function counts overlapping substrings, for example, "banana"
+contains two occurrences of "ana".
+
     
    See also findRev() and Note on character comparisons.
+
+
    int TQCString::contains ( const TQRegExp & rx ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Counts the number of overlapping occurrences of rx in the string.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQString s = "banana and panama";
+    TQRegExp r = TQRegExp( "a[nm]a", TRUE, FALSE );
+    s.contains( r ); // 4 matches
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also find() and findRev().
+
+
     Warning: If you want to apply this function repeatedly to the same
+string it is more efficient to convert the string to a TQString and
+apply the function to that.
+
+
    TQCString TQCString::copy () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a deep copy of this string.
+
     
    See also detach().
+
+
    bool TQCString::fill ( char c, int len = -1 )
+
    
+Fills the string with len bytes of character c, followed by
+a '\0'-terminator.
+
     If len is negative, then the current string length is used.
+
     Returns FALSE is len is nonnegative and there is not enough
+memory to resize the string; otherwise returns TRUE.
+
+
    int TQCString::find ( char c, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const
+
    
+Finds the first occurrence of the character c, starting at
+position index.
+
     The search is case sensitive if cs is TRUE, or case insensitive
+if cs is FALSE.
+
     Returns the position of c, or -1 if c could not be found.
+
     
    See also Note on character comparisons.
+
+
    Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    int TQCString::find ( const char * str, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Finds the first occurrence of the string str, starting at
+position index.
+
     The search is case sensitive if cs is TRUE, or case insensitive
+if cs is FALSE.
+
     Returns the position of str, or -1 if str could not be
+found.
+
     
    See also Note on character comparisons.
+
+
    int TQCString::find ( const TQRegExp & rx, int index = 0 ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Finds the first occurrence of the regular expression rx,
+starting at position index.
+
     Returns the position of the next match, or -1 if rx was not
+found.
+
     Warning: If you want to apply this function repeatedly to the same
+string it is more efficient to convert the string to a TQString and
+apply the function to that.
+
+
    int TQCString::findRev ( char c, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const
+
    
+Finds the first occurrence of the character c, starting at
+position index and searching backwards.
+
     The search is case sensitive if cs is TRUE, or case insensitive
+if cs is FALSE.
+
     Returns the position of c, or -1 if c could not be found.
+
     
    See also Note on character comparisons.
+
+
    int TQCString::findRev ( const char * str, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Finds the first occurrence of the string str, starting at
+position index and searching backwards.
+
     The search is case sensitive if cs is TRUE, or case insensitive
+if cs is FALSE.
+
     Returns the position of str, or -1 if str could not be
+found.
+
     
    See also Note on character comparisons.
+
+
    int TQCString::findRev ( const TQRegExp & rx, int index = -1 ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Finds the first occurrence of the regular expression rx,
+starting at position index and searching backwards.
+
     Returns the position of the next match (backwards), or -1 if rx
+was not found.
+
     Warning: If you want to apply this function repeatedly to the same
+string it is more efficient to convert the string to a TQString and
+apply the function to that.
+
+
    TQCString & TQCString::insert ( uint index, char c )
+
    
+Inserts character c into the string at position index and
+returns a reference to the string.
+
     If index is beyond the end of the string, the string is
+padded with spaces (ASCII 32) to length index and then c
+is appended.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQCString s = "Yes";
+    s.insert( 3, '!');   // s == "Yes!"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also remove() and replace().
+
+
    TQCString & TQCString::insert ( uint index, const char * s )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts string s into the string at position index.
+
     If index is beyond the end of the string, the string is
+padded with spaces (ASCII 32) to length index and then s
+is appended.
+
     
    +    TQCString s = "I like fish";
+    s.insert( 2, "don't ");     // s == "I don't like fish"
+
+    s = "x";                    // index 01234
+    s.insert( 3, "yz" );        // s == "x  yz"
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    bool TQCString::isEmpty () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the string is empty, i.e. if length() == 0;
+otherwise returns FALSE. An empty string is not always a null
+string.
+
     See example in isNull().
+
     
    See also isNull(), length(), and size().
+
+
    bool TQCString::isNull () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the string is null, i.e. if data() == 0; otherwise
+returns FALSE. A null string is also an empty string.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQCString a;         // a.data() == 0,  a.size() == 0, a.length() == 0
+    TQCString b == "";   // b.data() == "", b.size() == 1, b.length() == 0
+    a.isNull();         // TRUE  because a.data() == 0
+    a.isEmpty();        // TRUE  because a.length() == 0
+    b.isNull();         // FALSE because b.data() == ""
+    b.isEmpty();        // TRUE  because b.length() == 0
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also isEmpty(), length(), and size().
+
+
    TQCString TQCString::left ( uint len ) const
+
    
+Returns a substring that contains the len leftmost characters
+of the string.
+
     The whole string is returned if len exceeds the length of the
+string.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQCString s = "Pineapple";
+    TQCString t = s.left( 4 );  // t == "Pine"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also right() and mid().
+
+
    Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    TQCString TQCString::leftJustify ( uint width, char fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const
+
    
+Returns a string of length width (plus one for the terminating
+'\0') that contains this string padded with the fill character.
+
     If the length of the string exceeds width and truncate is
+FALSE (the default), then the returned string is a copy of the
+string. If the length of the string exceeds width and truncate is TRUE, then the returned string is a left(width).
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQCString s("apple");
+    TQCString t = s.leftJustify(8, '.');  // t == "apple..."
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also rightJustify().
+
+
    uint TQCString::length () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the length of the string, excluding the '\0'-terminator.
+Equivalent to calling strlen(data()).
+
     Null strings and empty strings have zero length.
+
     
    See also size(), isNull(), and isEmpty().
+
+
    Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    TQCString TQCString::lower () const
+
    
+Returns a new string that is a copy of this string converted to lower
+case.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQCString s("Credit");
+    TQCString t = s.lower();  // t == "credit"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also upper() and Note on character comparisons.
+
+
    TQCString TQCString::mid ( uint index, uint len = 0xffffffff ) const
+
    
+Returns a substring that contains at most len characters from
+this string, starting at position index.
+
     Returns a null string if the string is empty or if index is out
+of range. Returns the whole string from index if index+len
+exceeds the length of the string.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQCString s = "Two pineapples";
+    TQCString t = s.mid( 4, 3 );     // t == "pin"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also left() and right().
+
+
    Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    TQCString::operator const char * () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the string data.
+
+
    TQCString & TQCString::operator+= ( const char * str )
+
    
+Appends string str to the string and returns a reference to the string.
+
+
    TQCString & TQCString::operator+= ( char c )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Appends character c to the string and returns a reference to the string.
+
+
    TQCString & TQCString::operator= ( const TQCString & s )
+
    
+
+
     Assigns a shallow copy of s to this string and returns a
+reference to this string.
+
+
    TQCString & TQCString::operator= ( const char * str )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Assigns a deep copy of str to this string and returns a
+reference to this string.
+
     If str is 0 a null string is created.
+
     
    See also isNull().
+
+
    TQCString & TQCString::prepend ( const char * s )
+
    
+
+
     Prepend s to the string. Equivalent to insert(0, s).
+
     
    See also insert().
+
+
    TQCString & TQCString::remove ( uint index, uint len )
+
    
+Removes len characters from the string, starting at position index, and returns a reference to the string.
+
     If index is out of range, nothing happens. If index is
+valid, but index + len is larger than the length of the
+string, the string is truncated at position index.
+
     
    +    TQCString s = "Montreal";
+    s.remove( 1, 4 );         // s == "Meal"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also insert() and replace().
+
+
    Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    TQCString & TQCString::replace ( uint index, uint len, const char * str )
+
    
+Replaces len characters from the string, starting at position
+index, with str, and returns a reference to the string.
+
     If index is out of range, nothing is removed and str is
+appended at the end of the string. If index is valid, but index + len is larger than the length of the string, str
+replaces the rest of the string from position index.
+
     
    +    TQCString s = "Say yes!";
+    s.replace( 4, 3, "NO" );  // s == "Say NO!"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also insert() and remove().
+
+
    TQCString & TQCString::replace ( const TQRegExp & rx, const char * str )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Replaces every occurrence of rx in the string with str.
+Returns a reference to the string.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQString s = "banana";
+    s.replace( TQRegExp("a.*a"), "" );     // becomes "b"
+
+    s = "banana";
+    s.replace( TQRegExp("^[bn]a"), "X" );  // becomes "Xnana"
+
+    s = "banana";
+    s.replace( TQRegExp("^[bn]a"), "" );   // becomes "nana"
+    
    
+ 
+
     Warning: If you want to apply this function repeatedly to the same
+string it is more efficient to convert the string to a TQString and
+apply the function to that.
+
+
    TQCString & TQCString::replace ( char c, const char * after )
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Replaces every occurrence of the character c in the string
+with after. Returns a reference to the string.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQCString s = "a,b,c";
+    s.replace( ',', " or " );
+    // s == "a or b or c"
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    TQCString & TQCString::replace ( const char * before, const char * after )
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Replaces every occurrence of the string before in the string
+with the string after. Returns a reference to the string.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQCString s = "Greek is Greek";
+    s.replace( "Greek", "English" );
+    // s == "English is English"
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    TQCString & TQCString::replace ( char c1, char c2 )
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Replaces every occurrence of c1 with the char c2.
+Returns a reference to the string.
+
+
    bool TQCString::resize ( uint len )
+
    
+Extends or shrinks the string to len bytes, including the
+'\0'-terminator.
+
     A '\0'-terminator is set at position len - 1 unless
+len == 0.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQCString s = "resize this string";
+    s.resize( 7 );                      // s == "resize"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also truncate().
+
+
    Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    TQCString TQCString::right ( uint len ) const
+
    
+Returns a substring that contains the len rightmost characters
+of the string.
+
     The whole string is returned if len exceeds the length of the
+string.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQCString s = "Pineapple";
+    TQCString t = s.right( 5 );  // t == "apple"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also left() and mid().
+
+
    Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    TQCString TQCString::rightJustify ( uint width, char fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const
+
    
+Returns a string of length width (plus one for the terminating
+'\0') that contains zero or more of the fill character followed
+by this string.
+
     If the length of the string exceeds width and truncate is
+FALSE (the default), then the returned string is a copy of the
+string. If the length of the string exceeds width and truncate is TRUE, then the returned string is a left(width).
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQCString s("pie");
+    TQCString t = s.rightJustify(8, '.');  // t == ".....pie"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also leftJustify().
+
+
    bool TQCString::setExpand ( uint index, char c )
+
    
+Sets the character at position index to c and expands the
+string if necessary, padding with spaces.
+
     Returns FALSE if index was out of range and the string could
+not be expanded; otherwise returns TRUE.
+
+
    TQCString & TQCString::setNum ( double n, char f = 'g', int prec = 6 )
+
    
+Sets the string to the string representation of the number n
+and returns a reference to the string.
+
     The format of the string representation is specified by the format
+character f, and the precision (number of digits after the
+decimal point) is specified with prec.
+
     The valid formats for f are 'e', 'E', 'f', 'g' and 'G'. The
+formats are the same as for sprintf(); they are explained in TQString::arg().
+
+
    TQCString & TQCString::setNum ( short n )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the string to the string representation of the number n
+and returns a reference to the string.
+
+
    TQCString & TQCString::setNum ( ushort n )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the string to the string representation of the number n
+and returns a reference to the string.
+
+
    TQCString & TQCString::setNum ( int n )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the string to the string representation of the number n
+and returns a reference to the string.
+
+
    TQCString & TQCString::setNum ( uint n )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the string to the string representation of the number n
+and returns a reference to the string.
+
+
    TQCString & TQCString::setNum ( long n )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the string to the string representation of the number n
+and returns a reference to the string.
+
+
    TQCString & TQCString::setNum ( ulong n )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the string to the string representation of the number n
+and returns a reference to the string.
+
+
    TQCString & TQCString::setNum ( float n, char f = 'g', int prec = 6 )
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
+
    TQCString & TQCString::setStr ( const char * str )
+
    
+Makes a deep copy of str. Returns a reference to the string.
+
+
    TQCString TQCString::simplifyWhiteSpace () const
+
    
+Returns a new string that has white space removed from the start
+and the end, plus any sequence of internal white space replaced
+with a single space (ASCII 32).
+
     White space means the decimal ASCII codes 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 and
+32.
+
     
    +    TQCString s = "  lots\t of\nwhite    space ";
+    TQCString t = s.simplifyWhiteSpace(); // t == "lots of white space"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also stripWhiteSpace().
+
+
    TQCString & TQCString::sprintf ( const char * format, ... )
+
    
+Implemented as a call to the native vsprintf() (see the manual for
+your C library).
+
     If the string is shorter than 256 characters, this sprintf() calls
+resize(256) to decrease the chance of memory corruption. The
+string is resized back to its actual length before sprintf()
+returns.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQCString s;
+    s.sprintf( "%d - %s", 1, "first" );         // result < 256 chars
+
+    TQCString big( 25000 );                      // very long string
+    big.sprintf( "%d - %s", 2, longString );    // result < 25000 chars
+    
    
+ 
+
     Warning: All vsprintf() implementations will write past the end of
+the target string (*this) if the format specification and
+arguments happen to be longer than the target string, and some
+will also fail if the target string is longer than some arbitrary
+implementation limit.
+
     Giving user-supplied arguments to sprintf() is risky: Sooner or
+later someone will paste a huge line into your application.
+
+
    TQCString TQCString::stripWhiteSpace () const
+
    
+Returns a new string that has white space removed from the start
+and the end.
+
     White space means the decimal ASCII codes 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 and
+32.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQCString s = " space ";
+    TQCString t = s.stripWhiteSpace();           // t == "space"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also simplifyWhiteSpace().
+
+
    double TQCString::toDouble ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns the string converted to a double value.
+
     If ok is not 0: *ok is set to FALSE if the string is not a
+number, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise *ok is set to
+TRUE.
+
+
    float TQCString::toFloat ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns the string converted to a float value.
+
     If ok is not 0: *ok is set to FALSE if the string is not a
+number, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise *ok is set to
+TRUE.
+
+
    int TQCString::toInt ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns the string converted to a int value.
+
     If ok is not 0: *ok is set to FALSE if the string is not a
+number, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise *ok is set to
+TRUE.
+
+
    long TQCString::toLong ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns the string converted to a long value.
+
     If ok is not 0: *ok is set to FALSE if the string is not a
+number, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise *ok is set to
+TRUE.
+
+
    short TQCString::toShort ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns the string converted to a short value.
+
     If ok is not 0: *ok is set to FALSE if the string is not a
+number, is out of range, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise
+*ok is set to TRUE.
+
+
    uint TQCString::toUInt ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns the string converted to an unsigned int value.
+
     If ok is not 0: *ok is set to FALSE if the string is not a
+number, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise *ok is set to
+TRUE.
+
+
    ulong TQCString::toULong ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns the string converted to an unsigned long value.
+
     If ok is not 0: *ok is set to FALSE if the string is not a
+number, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise *ok is set to
+TRUE.
+
+
    ushort TQCString::toUShort ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns the string converted to an unsigned short value.
+
     If ok is not 0: *ok is set to FALSE if the string is not a
+number, is out of range, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise
+*ok is set to TRUE.
+
+
    bool TQCString::truncate ( uint pos )
+
    
+
+
     Truncates the string at position pos.
+
     Equivalent to calling resize(pos+1).
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQCString s = "truncate this string";
+    s.truncate( 5 );                      // s == "trunc"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also resize().
+
+
    TQCString TQCString::upper () const
+
    
+Returns a new string that is a copy of this string converted to upper case.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQCString s( "Debit" );
+    TQCString t = s.upper();  // t == "DEBIT"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also lower() and Note on character comparisons.
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    bool operator!= ( const TQCString & s1, const TQCString & s2 )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if s1 and s2 are different; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     Equivalent to qstrcmp(s1, s2) != 0.
+
+
    bool operator!= ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if s1 and s2 are different; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     Equivalent to qstrcmp(s1, s2) != 0.
+
+
    bool operator!= ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if s1 and s2 are different; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     Equivalent to qstrcmp(s1, s2) != 0.
+
+
    const TQCString operator+ ( const TQCString & s1, const TQCString & s2 )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     Returns a string which consists of the concatenation of s1 and
+s2.
+
+
    const TQCString operator+ ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns a string which consists of the concatenation of s1 and s2.
+
+
    const TQCString operator+ ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns a string which consists of the concatenation of s1 and s2.
+
+
    const TQCString operator+ ( const TQCString & s, char c )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns a string which consists of the concatenation of s and c.
+
+
    const TQCString operator+ ( char c, const TQCString & s )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns a string which consists of the concatenation of c and s.
+
+
    bool operator< ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if s1 is less than s2; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     Equivalent to qstrcmp(s1, s2) < 0.
+
     
    See also Note on character comparisons.
+
+
    bool operator< ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if s1 is less than s2; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     Equivalent to qstrcmp(s1, s2) < 0.
+
     
    See also Note on character comparisons.
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQCString & str )
+
    
+
+
     Writes string str to the stream s.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
    bool operator<= ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if s1 is less than or equal to s2; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     Equivalent to qstrcmp(s1, s2) <= 0.
+
     
    See also Note on character comparisons.
+
+
    bool operator<= ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if s1 is less than or equal to s2; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     Equivalent to qstrcmp(s1, s2) <= 0.
+
     
    See also Note on character comparisons.
+
+
    bool operator== ( const TQCString & s1, const TQCString & s2 )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if s1 and s2 are equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     Equivalent to qstrcmp(s1, s2) == 0.
+
+
    bool operator== ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if s1 and s2 are equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     Equivalent to qstrcmp(s1, s2) == 0.
+
+
    bool operator== ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if s1 and s2 are equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     Equivalent to qstrcmp(s1, s2) == 0.
+
+
    bool operator> ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if s1 is greater than s2; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     Equivalent to qstrcmp(s1, s2) > 0.
+
     
    See also Note on character comparisons.
+
+
    bool operator> ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if s1 is greater than s2; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     Equivalent to qstrcmp(s1, s2) > 0.
+
     
    See also Note on character comparisons.
+
+
    bool operator>= ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if s1 is greater than or equal to s2; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     Equivalent to qstrcmp(s1, s2) >= 0.
+
     
    See also Note on character comparisons.
+
+
    bool operator>= ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if s1 is greater than or equal to s2; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     Equivalent to qstrcmp(s1, s2) >= 0.
+
     
    See also Note on character comparisons.
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQCString & str )
+
    
+
+
     Reads a string into str from the stream s.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
    void * qmemmove ( void * dst, const void * src, uint len )
+
    
+
+
     This function is normally part of the C library. TQt implements
+memmove() for platforms that do not provide it.
+
     memmove() copies len bytes from src into dst. The data
+is copied correctly even if src and dst overlap.
+
+
    int qstrcmp ( const char * str1, const char * str2 )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     A safe strcmp() function.
+
     Compares str1 and str2. Returns a negative value if str1
+is less than str2, 0 if str1 is equal to str2 or a
+positive value if str1 is greater than str2.
+
     Special case I: Returns 0 if str1 and str2 are both 0.
+
     Special case II: Returns a random nonzero value if str1 is 0
+or str2 is 0 (but not both).
+
     
    See also qstrncmp(), qstricmp(), qstrnicmp(), and Note on character comparisons.
+
+
    char * qstrcpy ( char * dst, const char * src )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     A safe strcpy() function.
+
     Copies all characters up to and including the '\0' from src
+into dst and returns a pointer to dst.
+
+
    char * qstrdup ( const char * src )
+
    
+
+
     Returns a duplicate string.
+
     Allocates space for a copy of src, copies it, and returns a
+pointer to the copy. If src is 0, it immediately returns 0.
+
     The returned string must be deleted using delete[].
+
+
    int qstricmp ( const char * str1, const char * str2 )
+
    
+
+
     A safe stricmp() function.
+
     Compares str1 and str2 ignoring the case.
+
     Returns a negative value if str1 is less than str2, 0 if str1 is equal to str2 or a positive value if str1 is greater
+than str2.
+
     Special case I: Returns 0 if str1 and str2 are both 0.
+
     Special case II: Returns a random nonzero value if str1 is 0
+or str2 is 0 (but not both).
+
     
    See also qstrcmp(), qstrncmp(), qstrnicmp(), and Note on character comparisons.
+
+
    uint qstrlen ( const char * str )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     A safe strlen function.
+
     Returns the number of characters that precede the terminating '\0'.
+or 0 if str is 0.
+
+
    int qstrncmp ( const char * str1, const char * str2, uint len )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     A safe strncmp() function.
+
     Compares at most len bytes of str1 and str2.
+
     Returns a negative value if str1 is less than str2, 0 if str1 is equal to str2 or a positive value if str1 is greater
+than str2.
+
     Special case I: Returns 0 if str1 and str2 are both 0.
+
     Special case II: Returns a random nonzero value if str1 is 0
+or str2 is 0 (but not both).
+
     
    See also qstrcmp(), qstricmp(), qstrnicmp(), and Note on character comparisons.
+
+
    char * qstrncpy ( char * dst, const char * src, uint len )
+
    
+
+
     A safe strncpy() function.
+
     Copies at most len bytes from src (stopping at len or the
+terminating '\0' whichever comes first) into dst and returns a
+pointer to dst. Guarantees that dst is '\0'-terminated. If
+src or dst is 0, returns 0 immediately.
+
     
    See also qstrcpy().
+
+
    int qstrnicmp ( const char * str1, const char * str2, uint len )
+
    
+
+
     A safe strnicmp() function.
+
     Compares at most len bytes of str1 and str2 ignoring the case.
+
     Returns a negative value if str1 is less than str2, 0 if str1
+is equal to str2 or a positive value if str1 is greater than str2.
+
     Special case I: Returns 0 if str1 and str2 are both 0.
+
     Special case II: Returns a random nonzero value if str1 is 0
+or str2 is 0 (but not both).
+
     
    See also qstrcmp(), qstrncmp(), qstricmp(), and Note on character comparisons.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqcursor.html b/doc/html/ntqcursor.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5f90ed600
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqcursor.html
@@ -0,0 +1,287 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQCursor Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQCursor Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQCursor class provides a mouse cursor with an arbitrary
+shape.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqcursor.h>
+
    Inherits TQt.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQCursor ()
      • 
+
    • TQCursor ( int shape )
      • 
+
    • TQCursor ( const TQBitmap & bitmap, const TQBitmap & mask, int hotX = -1, int hotY = -1 )
      • 
+
    • TQCursor ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int hotX = -1, int hotY = -1 )
      • 
+
    • TQCursor ( const TQCursor & c )
      • 
+
    • ~TQCursor ()
      • 
+
    • TQCursor & operator= ( const TQCursor & c )
      • 
+
    • int shape () const
      • 
+
    • void setShape ( int shape )
      • 
+
    • const TQBitmap * bitmap () const
      • 
+
    • const TQBitmap * mask () const
      • 
+
    • TQPoint hotSpot () const
      • 
+
    • HCURSOR handle () const
      • 
+
    • TQCursor ( HCURSOR handle )
      • 
+
    • HANDLE handle () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
      
+
    • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQCursor & c )
      • 
+
    • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQCursor & c )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
     The TQCursor class provides a mouse cursor with an arbitrary
+shape.
+
     
+
+
     This class is mainly used to create mouse cursors that are
+associated with particular widgets and to get and set the position
+of the mouse cursor.
+
     TQt has a number of standard cursor shapes, but you can also make
+custom cursor shapes based on a TQBitmap, a mask and a hotspot.
+
     To associate a cursor with a widget, use TQWidget::setCursor(). To
+associate a cursor with all widgets (normally for a short period
+of time), use TQApplication::setOverrideCursor().
+
     To set a cursor shape use TQCursor::setShape() or use the TQCursor
+constructor which takes the shape as argument, or you can use one
+of the predefined cursors defined in the CursorShape enum.
+
     If you want to create a cursor with your own bitmap, either use
+the TQCursor constructor which takes a bitmap and a mask or the
+constructor which takes a pixmap as arguments.
+
     To set or get the position of the mouse cursor use the static
+methods TQCursor::pos() and TQCursor::setPos().
+
     
    Cursor Shapes
     
+
     
    See also TQWidget, GUI Design Handbook:
+ Cursors, Widget Appearance and Style, and Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes.
+
+
     On X11, TQt supports the Xcursor
+library, which allows for full color icon themes. The table below
+shows the cursor name used for each TQt::CursorShape value. If a
+cursor cannot be found using the name shown below, a standard X11
+cursor will be used instead. Note: X11 does not provide
+appropriate cursors for all possible TQt::CursorShape values. It
+is possible that some cursors will be taken from the Xcursor
+theme, while others will use an internal bitmap cursor.
+
     
    
+
     TQt::CursorShape Values   Cursor Names
+
     TQt::ArrowCursor             left_ptr
+
     TQt::UpArrowCursor           up_arrow
+
     TQt::CrossCursor             cross
+
     TQt::WaitCursor              wait
+
     TQt::BusyCursor		left_ptr_watch
+
     TQt::IbeamCursor             ibeam
+
     TQt::SizeVerCursor           size_ver
+
     TQt::SizeHorCursor           size_hor
+
     TQt::SizeBDiagCursor         size_bdiag
+
     TQt::SizeFDiagCursor         size_fdiag
+
     TQt::SizeAllCursor           size_all
+
     TQt::SplitVCursor            split_v
+
     TQt::SplitHCursor            split_h
+
     TQt::PointingHandCursor      pointing_hand
+
     TQt::ForbiddenCursor         forbidden
+
     TQt::WhatsThisCursor         whats_this
+
    
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQCursor::TQCursor ()
+
    
+Constructs a cursor with the default arrow shape.
+
+
    TQCursor::TQCursor ( int shape )
+
    
+Constructs a cursor with the specified shape.
+
     See CursorShape for a list of shapes.
+
     
    See also setShape().
+
+
    TQCursor::TQCursor ( const TQBitmap & bitmap, const TQBitmap & mask, int hotX = -1, int hotY = -1 )
+
    
+Constructs a custom bitmap cursor.
+
     bitmap and
+mask make up the bitmap.
+hotX and
+hotY define the cursor's hot spot.
+
     If hotX is negative, it is set to the bitmap().width()/2.
+If hotY is negative, it is set to the bitmap().height()/2.
+
     The cursor bitmap (B) and mask (M) bits are combined like this:
+
      
+
    •  B=1 and M=1 gives black.
+
    •  B=0 and M=1 gives white.
+
    •  B=0 and M=0 gives transparent.
+
    •  B=1 and M=0 gives an undefined result.
+
    
+
     Use the global TQt color color0 to draw 0-pixels and color1 to
+draw 1-pixels in the bitmaps.
+
     Valid cursor sizes depend on the display hardware (or the
+underlying window system). We recommend using 32x32 cursors,
+because this size is supported on all platforms. Some platforms
+also support 16x16, 48x48 and 64x64 cursors.
+
     
    See also TQBitmap::TQBitmap() and TQBitmap::setMask().
+
+
    TQCursor::TQCursor ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int hotX = -1, int hotY = -1 )
+
    
+Constructs a custom pixmap cursor.
+
     pixmap is the image. It is usual to give it a mask (set using
+TQPixmap::setMask()). hotX and hotY define the cursor's hot
+spot.
+
     If hotX is negative, it is set to the pixmap().width()/2.
+If hotY is negative, it is set to the pixmap().height()/2.
+
     Valid cursor sizes depend on the display hardware (or the
+underlying window system). We recommend using 32x32 cursors,
+because this size is supported on all platforms. Some platforms
+also support 16x16, 48x48 and 64x64 cursors.
+
     Currently, only black-and-white pixmaps can be used.
+
     
    See also TQPixmap::TQPixmap() and TQPixmap::setMask().
+
+
    TQCursor::TQCursor ( const TQCursor & c )
+
    
+Constructs a copy of the cursor c.
+
+
    TQCursor::TQCursor ( HCURSOR handle )
+
    
+
+
     Creates a cursor with the specified window system handle handle.
+
     Warning:
+Portable in principle, but if you use it you are probably about to
+do something non-portable. Be careful.
+
+
    TQCursor::~TQCursor ()
+
    
+Destroys the cursor.
+
+
    const TQBitmap * TQCursor::bitmap () const
+
    
+Returns the cursor bitmap, or 0 if it is one of the standard
+cursors.
+
+
    void TQCursor::cleanup () [static]
+
    
+Internal function that deinitializes the predefined cursors.
+This function is called from the TQApplication destructor.
+
     
    See also initialize().
+
+
    HANDLE TQCursor::handle () const
+
    
+Returns the window system cursor handle.
+
     Warning:
+Portable in principle, but if you use it you are probably about to
+do something non-portable. Be careful.
+
+
    TQPoint TQCursor::hotSpot () const
+
    
+Returns the cursor hot spot, or (0, 0) if it is one of the
+standard cursors.
+
+
    void TQCursor::initialize () [static]
+
    
+Internal function that initializes the predefined cursors.
+This function is called from the TQApplication constructor.
+
     
    See also cleanup().
+
+
    const TQBitmap * TQCursor::mask () const
+
    
+Returns the cursor bitmap mask, or 0 if it is one of the standard
+cursors.
+
+
    TQCursor & TQCursor::operator= ( const TQCursor & c )
+
    
+Assigns c to this cursor and returns a reference to this
+cursor.
+
+
    TQPoint TQCursor::pos () [static]
+
    
+Returns the position of the cursor (hot spot) in global screen
+coordinates.
+
     You can call TQWidget::mapFromGlobal() to translate it to widget
+coordinates.
+
     
    See also setPos(), TQWidget::mapFromGlobal(), and TQWidget::mapToGlobal().
+
+
    Examples: chart/canvasview.cpp, fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp, and menu/menu.cpp.
+
    void TQCursor::setPos ( int x, int y ) [static]
+
    
+Moves the cursor (hot spot) to the global screen position (x,
+y).
+
     You can call TQWidget::mapToGlobal() to translate widget
+coordinates to global screen coordinates.
+
     
    See also pos(), TQWidget::mapFromGlobal(), and TQWidget::mapToGlobal().
+
+
    void TQCursor::setPos ( const TQPoint & ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
    void TQCursor::setShape ( int shape )
+
    
+Sets the cursor to the shape identified by shape.
+
     See CursorShape for the list of cursor shapes.
+
     
    See also shape().
+
+
    int TQCursor::shape () const
+
    
+Returns the cursor shape identifier. The return value is one of
+the CursorShape enum values (cast to an int).
+
     
    See also setShape().
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQCursor & c )
+
    
+
+Writes the cursor c to the stream s.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQCursor & c )
+
    
+
+Reads a cursor from the stream s and sets c to the read data.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqdatabrowser.html b/doc/html/ntqdatabrowser.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..baa33d688
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqdatabrowser.html
@@ -0,0 +1,715 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQDataBrowser Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQDataBrowser Class Reference
    [sql module]
    
+
+
    The TQDataBrowser class provides data manipulation and
+navigation for data entry forms.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqdatabrowser.h>
+
    Inherits TQWidget.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • bool autoEdit - whether the browser automatically applies edits
      • 
+
    • bool boundaryChecking - whether boundary checking is active
      • 
+
    • bool confirmCancels - whether the browser confirms cancel operations
      • 
+
    • bool confirmDelete - whether the browser confirms deletions
      • 
+
    • bool confirmEdits - whether the browser confirms edits
      • 
+
    • bool confirmInsert - whether the data browser confirms insertions
      • 
+
    • bool confirmUpdate - whether the browser confirms updates
      • 
+
    • TQString filter - the data browser's filter
      • 
+
    • bool readOnly - whether the browser is read-only
      • 
+
    • TQStringList sort - the data browser's sort
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQDataBrowser class provides data manipulation and
+navigation for data entry forms.
+
     
+
+
+
     A high-level API is provided for navigating through data records
+in a cursor, for inserting, updating and deleting records, and for
+refreshing data in the display.
+
     If you want a read-only form to present database data use
+TQDataView; if you want a table-based presentation of your data use
+TQDataTable.
+
     A TQDataBrowser is used to associate a dataset with a form in much
+the same way as a TQDataTable associates a dataset with a table.
+Once the data browser has been constructed it can be associated
+with a dataset with setSqlCursor(), and with a form with
+setForm(). Boundary checking, sorting and filtering can be set
+with setBoundaryChecking(), setSort() and setFilter(),
+respectively.
+
     The insertCurrent() function reads the fields from the default
+form into the default cursor and performs the insert. The
+updateCurrent() and deleteCurrent() functions perform similarly to
+update and delete the current record respectively.
+
     The user can be asked to confirm all edits with setConfirmEdits().
+For more precise control use setConfirmInsert(),
+setConfirmUpdate(), setConfirmDelete() and setConfirmCancels().
+Use setAutoEdit() to control the behaviour of the form when the
+user edits a record and then navigates.
+
     The record set is navigated using first(), next(), prev(), last()
+and seek(). The form's display is updated with refresh(). When
+navigation takes place the firstRecordAvailable(),
+lastRecordAvailable(), nextRecordAvailable() and
+prevRecordAvailable() signals are emitted. When the cursor record
+is changed due to navigation the cursorChanged() signal is
+emitted.
+
     If you want finer control of the insert, update and delete
+processes then you can use the lower level functions to perform
+these operations as described below.
+
     The form is populated with data from the database with
+readFields(). If the user is allowed to edit, (see setReadOnly()),
+write the form's data back to the cursor's edit buffer with
+writeFields(). You can clear the values in the form with
+clearValues(). Editing is performed as follows:
+
      
+
    •  insert When the data browser enters insertion mode it emits the
+primeInsert() signal which you can connect to, for example to
+pre-populate fields. Call writeFields() to write the user's edits to
+the cursor's edit buffer then call insert() to insert the record
+into the database. The beforeInsert() signal is emitted just before
+the cursor's edit buffer is inserted into the database; connect to
+this for example, to populate fields such as an auto-generated
+primary key.
+
    •  update For updates the primeUpdate() signal is emitted when
+the data browser enters update mode. After calling writeFields()
+call update() to update the record and connect to the beforeUpdate()
+signal to manipulate the user's data before the update takes place.
+
    •  delete For deletion the primeDelete() signal is emitted when
+the data browser enters deletion mode. After calling writeFields()
+call del() to delete the record and connect to the beforeDelete()
+signal, for example to record an audit of the deleted record.
+
    
+
     
    See also Database Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQDataBrowser::Boundary
    
+
+
     This enum describes where the data browser is positioned.
+
      
+
    • TQDataBrowser::Unknown - the boundary cannot be determined (usually because
+there is no default cursor, or the default cursor is not active).
+
    • TQDataBrowser::None - the browser is not positioned on a boundary, but it is
+positioned on a record somewhere in the middle.
+
    • TQDataBrowser::BeforeBeginning - the browser is positioned before the
+first available record.
+
    • TQDataBrowser::Beginning - the browser is positioned at the first record.
+
    • TQDataBrowser::End - the browser is positioned at the last
+record.
+
    • TQDataBrowser::AfterEnd - the browser is positioned after the last
+available record.
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQDataBrowser::TQDataBrowser ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags fl = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a data browser which is a child of parent, with the
+name name and widget flags set to fl.
+
+
    TQDataBrowser::~TQDataBrowser ()
+
    
+Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
+
+
    bool TQDataBrowser::autoEdit () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the browser automatically applies edits; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "autoEdit" property for details.
+
    void TQDataBrowser::beforeDelete ( TQSqlRecord * buf ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted just before the cursor's edit buffer  is
+deleted from the database. The buf parameter points to the edit
+buffer being deleted. You might connect to this signal to capture
+some auditing information about the deletion.
+
+
    void TQDataBrowser::beforeInsert ( TQSqlRecord * buf ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted just before the cursor's edit buffer is
+inserted into the database. The buf parameter points to the
+edit buffer being inserted. You might connect to this signal to
+populate a generated primary key for example.
+
+
    void TQDataBrowser::beforeUpdate ( TQSqlRecord * buf ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted just before the cursor's edit buffer is
+updated in the database. The buf parameter points to the edit
+buffer being updated. You might connect to this signal to capture
+some auditing information about the update.
+
+
    Boundary TQDataBrowser::boundary ()
+
    
+Returns an enum indicating the boundary status of the browser.
+
     This is achieved by moving the default cursor and checking the
+position, however the current default form values will not be
+altered. After checking for the boundary, the cursor is moved back
+to its former position. See TQDataBrowser::Boundary.
+
     
    See also Boundary.
+
+
    bool TQDataBrowser::boundaryChecking () const
+
    Returns TRUE if boundary checking is active; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "boundaryChecking" property for details.
+
    void TQDataBrowser::clearValues () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Clears all the values in the form.
+
     All the edit buffer field values are set to their 'zero state',
+e.g. 0 for numeric fields and "" for string fields. Then the
+widgets are updated using the property map. For example, a
+combobox that is property-mapped to integers would scroll to the
+first item. See the TQSqlPropertyMap constructor for the default
+mappings of widgets to properties.
+
+
    TQSql::Confirm TQDataBrowser::confirmCancel ( TQSql::Op m ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Protected virtual function which returns a confirmation for
+cancelling an edit mode m. Derived classes can reimplement this
+function and provide their own confirmation dialog. The default
+implementation uses a message box which prompts the user to
+confirm the edit action.
+
+
    bool TQDataBrowser::confirmCancels () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the browser confirms cancel operations; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "confirmCancels" property for details.
+
    bool TQDataBrowser::confirmDelete () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the browser confirms deletions; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "confirmDelete" property for details.
+
    TQSql::Confirm TQDataBrowser::confirmEdit ( TQSql::Op m ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Protected virtual function which returns a confirmation for an
+edit of mode m. Derived classes can reimplement this function
+and provide their own confirmation dialog. The default
+implementation uses a message box which prompts the user to
+confirm the edit action.
+
+
    bool TQDataBrowser::confirmEdits () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the browser confirms edits; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "confirmEdits" property for details.
+
    bool TQDataBrowser::confirmInsert () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the data browser confirms insertions; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "confirmInsert" property for details.
+
    bool TQDataBrowser::confirmUpdate () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the browser confirms updates; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "confirmUpdate" property for details.
+
    void TQDataBrowser::currentChanged ( const TQSqlRecord * record ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the current cursor position
+changes. The record parameter points to the contents of the
+current cursor's record.
+
+
    bool TQDataBrowser::currentEdited () [virtual protected]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the form's edit buffer differs from the current
+cursor buffer; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    void TQDataBrowser::cursorChanged ( TQSqlCursor::Mode mode ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the cursor record was changed due
+to navigation. The mode parameter is the edit that just took
+place, e.g. Insert, Update or Delete. See TQSqlCursor::Mode.
+
+
    void TQDataBrowser::del () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Performs a delete operation on the data browser's cursor. If there
+is no default cursor or no default form, nothing happens.
+
     Otherwise, the following happens:
+
     The current form's record is deleted from the database, providing
+that the data browser is not in insert mode. If the data browser
+is actively inserting a record (see insert()), the insert action
+is canceled, and the browser navigates to the last valid record
+that was current. If there is an error, handleError() is called.
+
+
    bool TQDataBrowser::deleteCurrent () [virtual protected]
+
    
+Performs a delete on the default cursor using the values from the
+default form and updates the default form. If there is no default
+form or no default cursor, nothing happens. If the deletion was
+successful, the cursor is repositioned to the nearest record and
+TRUE is returned. The nearest record is the next record if there
+is one otherwise the previous record if there is one. If an error
+occurred during the deletion from the database, handleError() is
+called and FALSE is returned.
+
     
    See also cursor, form(), and handleError().
+
+
    TQString TQDataBrowser::filter () const
+
    Returns the data browser's filter.
+See the "filter" property for details.
+
    void TQDataBrowser::first () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Moves the default cursor to the first record and refreshes the
+default form to display this record. If there is no default form
+or no default cursor, nothing happens. If the data browser
+successfully navigated to the first record, the default cursor is
+primed for update and the primeUpdate() signal is emitted.
+
     If the browser is already positioned on the first record nothing
+happens.
+
     
+
    void TQDataBrowser::firstRecordAvailable ( bool available ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the position of the cursor
+changes. The available parameter indicates whether or not the
+first record in the default cursor is available.
+
+
    TQSqlForm * TQDataBrowser::form ()
+
    
+Returns the data browser's default form or 0 if no form has been
+set.
+
+
    void TQDataBrowser::handleError ( const TQSqlError & error ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Virtual function which handles the error error. The default
+implementation warns the user with a message box.
+
+
    void TQDataBrowser::insert () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Performs an insert operation on the data browser's cursor. If
+there is no default cursor or no default form, nothing happens.
+
     If auto-editing is on (see setAutoEdit()), the following happens:
+
     
      
+
    •  If the browser is already actively inserting a record,
+the current form's data is inserted into the database.
+
    •  If the browser is not inserting a record, but the current record
+was changed by the user, the record is updated in the database with
+the current form's data (i.e. with the changes).
+
    
+
     If there is an error handling any of the above auto-edit actions,
+handleError() is called and no insert or update is performed.
+
     If no error occurred, or auto-editing is not enabled, the data browser
+begins actively inserting a record into the database by performing the
+following actions:
+
     
      
+
    •  The default cursor is primed for insert using TQSqlCursor::primeInsert().
+
    •  The primeInsert() signal is emitted.
+
    •  The form is updated with the values in the default cursor's.
+edit buffer so that the user can fill in the values to be inserted.
+
    
+
     
+
    bool TQDataBrowser::insertCurrent () [virtual protected]
+
    
+Reads the fields from the default form into the default cursor and
+performs an insert on the default cursor. If there is no default
+form or no default cursor, nothing happens. If an error occurred
+during the insert into the database, handleError() is called and
+FALSE is returned. If the insert was successfull, the cursor is
+refreshed and relocated to the newly inserted record, the
+cursorChanged() signal is emitted, and TRUE is returned.
+
     
    See also cursorChanged(), sqlCursor(), form(), and handleError().
+
+
    bool TQDataBrowser::isReadOnly () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the browser is read-only; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "readOnly" property for details.
+
    void TQDataBrowser::last () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Moves the default cursor to the last record and refreshes the
+default form to display this record. If there is no default form
+or no default cursor, nothing happens. If the data browser
+successfully navigated to the last record, the default cursor is
+primed for update and the primeUpdate() signal is emitted.
+
     If the browser is already positioned on the last record nothing
+happens.
+
+
    void TQDataBrowser::lastRecordAvailable ( bool available ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the position of the cursor
+changes. The available parameter indicates whether or not the
+last record in the default cursor is available.
+
+
    void TQDataBrowser::next () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Moves the default cursor to the next record and refreshes the
+default form to display this record. If there is no default form
+or no default cursor, nothing happens. If the data browser
+successfully navigated to the next record, the default cursor is
+primed for update and the primeUpdate() signal is emitted.
+
     If the browser is positioned on the last record nothing happens.
+
+
    void TQDataBrowser::nextRecordAvailable ( bool available ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the position of the cursor
+changes. The available parameter indicates whether or not the
+next record in the default cursor is available.
+
+
    void TQDataBrowser::prev () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Moves the default cursor to the previous record and refreshes the
+default form to display this record. If there is no default form
+or no default cursor, nothing happens. If the data browser
+successfully navigated to the previous record, the default cursor
+is primed for update and the primeUpdate() signal is emitted.
+
     If the browser is positioned on the first record nothing happens.
+
+
    void TQDataBrowser::prevRecordAvailable ( bool available ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the position of the cursor
+changes. The available parameter indicates whether or not the
+previous record in the default cursor is available.
+
+
    void TQDataBrowser::primeDelete ( TQSqlRecord * buf ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the data browser enters deletion mode.
+The buf parameter points to the record buffer being deleted.
+(Note that TQSqlCursor::primeDelete() is not called on the
+default cursor, as this would corrupt values in the form.)
+Connect to this signal in order to, for example, save a copy of
+the deleted record for auditing purposes.
+
     
    See also del().
+
+
    void TQDataBrowser::primeInsert ( TQSqlRecord * buf ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the data browser enters insertion
+mode. The buf parameter points to the record buffer that is to
+be inserted. Connect to this signal to, for example, prime the
+record buffer with default data values, auto-numbered fields etc.
+(Note that TQSqlCursor::primeInsert() is not called on the
+default cursor, as this would corrupt values in the form.)
+
     
    See also insert().
+
+
    void TQDataBrowser::primeUpdate ( TQSqlRecord * buf ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the data browser enters update mode.
+Note that during navigation (first(), last(), next(), prev()),
+each record that is shown in the default form is primed for
+update. The buf parameter points to the record buffer being
+updated. (Note that TQSqlCursor::primeUpdate() is not called on
+the default cursor, as this would corrupt values in the form.)
+Connect to this signal in order to, for example, keep track of
+which records have been updated, perhaps for auditing purposes.
+
     
    See also update().
+
+
    void TQDataBrowser::readFields () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Reads the fields from the default cursor's edit buffer and
+displays them in the form. If there is no default cursor or no
+default form, nothing happens.
+
+
    void TQDataBrowser::refresh () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Refreshes the data browser's data using the default cursor. The
+browser's current filter and sort are applied if they have been
+set.
+
     
    See also filter and sort.
+
+
    bool TQDataBrowser::seek ( int i, bool relative = FALSE ) [virtual]
+
    
+Moves the default cursor to the record specified by the index i
+and refreshes the default form to display this record. If there is
+no default form or no default cursor, nothing happens. If relative is TRUE (the default is FALSE), the cursor is moved
+relative to its current position. If the data browser successfully
+navigated to the desired record, the default cursor is primed for
+update and the primeUpdate() signal is emitted.
+
     If the browser is already positioned on the desired record nothing
+happens.
+
+
    void TQDataBrowser::setAutoEdit ( bool autoEdit ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the browser automatically applies edits to autoEdit.
+See the "autoEdit" property for details.
+
    void TQDataBrowser::setBoundaryChecking ( bool active )
+
    Sets whether boundary checking is active to active.
+See the "boundaryChecking" property for details.
+
    void TQDataBrowser::setConfirmCancels ( bool confirm ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the browser confirms cancel operations to confirm.
+See the "confirmCancels" property for details.
+
    void TQDataBrowser::setConfirmDelete ( bool confirm ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the browser confirms deletions to confirm.
+See the "confirmDelete" property for details.
+
    void TQDataBrowser::setConfirmEdits ( bool confirm ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the browser confirms edits to confirm.
+See the "confirmEdits" property for details.
+
    void TQDataBrowser::setConfirmInsert ( bool confirm ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the data browser confirms insertions to confirm.
+See the "confirmInsert" property for details.
+
    void TQDataBrowser::setConfirmUpdate ( bool confirm ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the browser confirms updates to confirm.
+See the "confirmUpdate" property for details.
+
    void TQDataBrowser::setFilter ( const TQString & filter )
+
    Sets the data browser's filter to filter.
+See the "filter" property for details.
+
    void TQDataBrowser::setForm ( TQSqlForm * form ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the browser's default form to form. The cursor and all
+navigation and data manipulation functions that the browser
+provides become available to the form.
+
+
    void TQDataBrowser::setReadOnly ( bool active ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the browser is read-only to active.
+See the "readOnly" property for details.
+
    void TQDataBrowser::setSort ( const TQStringList & sort )
+
    Sets the data browser's sort to sort.
+See the "sort" property for details.
+
    void TQDataBrowser::setSort ( const TQSqlIndex & sort )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the data browser's sort to the TQSqlIndex sort. To apply
+the new sort, use refresh().
+
     
+
    void TQDataBrowser::setSqlCursor ( TQSqlCursor * cursor, bool autoDelete = FALSE ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the default cursor used by the data browser to cursor. If
+autoDelete is TRUE (the default is FALSE), the data browser
+takes ownership of the cursor pointer, which will be deleted
+when the browser is destroyed, or when setSqlCursor() is called
+again. To activate the cursor use refresh(). The cursor's edit
+buffer is used in the default form to browse and edit records.
+
     
    See also sqlCursor(), form(), and setForm().
+
+
    TQStringList TQDataBrowser::sort () const
+
    Returns the data browser's sort.
+See the "sort" property for details.
+
    TQSqlCursor * TQDataBrowser::sqlCursor () const
+
    
+Returns the default cursor used for navigation, or 0 if there is
+no default cursor.
+
     
    See also setSqlCursor().
+
+
    void TQDataBrowser::update () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Performs an update operation on the data browser's cursor.
+
     If there is no default cursor or no default form, nothing happens.
+Otherwise, the following happens:
+
     If the data browser is actively inserting a record (see insert()),
+that record is inserted into the database using insertCurrent().
+Otherwise, the database is updated with the current form's data
+using updateCurrent(). If there is an error handling either
+action, handleError() is called.
+
+
    void TQDataBrowser::updateBoundary () [slot]
+
    
+If boundaryChecking() is TRUE, checks the boundary of the current
+default cursor and emits signals which indicate the position of
+the cursor.
+
+
    bool TQDataBrowser::updateCurrent () [virtual protected]
+
    
+Reads the fields from the default form into the default cursor and
+performs an update on the default cursor. If there is no default
+form or no default cursor, nothing happens. If an error occurred
+during the update on the database, handleError() is called and
+FALSE is returned. If the update was successfull, the cursor is
+refreshed and relocated to the updated record, the cursorChanged()
+signal is emitted, and TRUE is returned.
+
     
    See also cursor, form(), and handleError().
+
+
    void TQDataBrowser::writeFields () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Writes the form's data to the default cursor's edit buffer. If
+there is no default cursor or no default form, nothing happens.
+
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    bool autoEdit
    
+
    This property holds whether the browser automatically applies edits.
+
    The default value for this property is TRUE. When the user begins
+an insertion or an update on a form there are two possible
+outcomes when they navigate to another record:
+
     
      
+
    •  the insert or update is is performed -- this occurs if autoEdit is TRUE
+
    •  the insert or update is discarded -- this occurs if autoEdit is FALSE
+
    
+
+
    Set this property's value with setAutoEdit() and get this property's value with autoEdit().
+
    bool boundaryChecking
    
+
    This property holds whether boundary checking is active.
+
    When boundary checking is active (the default), signals are
+emitted indicating the current position of the default cursor.
+
     
    See also boundary().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setBoundaryChecking() and get this property's value with boundaryChecking().
+
    bool confirmCancels
    
+
    This property holds whether the browser confirms cancel operations.
+
    If this property is TRUE, all cancels must be confirmed by the
+user through a message box (this behavior can be changed by
+overriding the confirmCancel() function), otherwise all cancels
+occur immediately. The default is FALSE.
+
     
    See also confirmEdits and confirmCancel().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setConfirmCancels() and get this property's value with confirmCancels().
+
    bool confirmDelete
    
+
    This property holds whether the browser confirms deletions.
+
    If this property is TRUE, the browser confirms deletions,
+otherwise deletions happen immediately.
+
     
    See also confirmCancels, confirmEdits, confirmUpdate, confirmInsert, and confirmEdit().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setConfirmDelete() and get this property's value with confirmDelete().
+
    bool confirmEdits
    
+
    This property holds whether the browser confirms edits.
+
    If this property is TRUE, the browser confirms all edit operations
+(insertions, updates and deletions), otherwise all edit operations
+happen immediately. Confirmation is achieved by presenting the
+user with a message box -- this behavior can be changed by
+reimplementing the confirmEdit() function,
+
     
    See also confirmEdit(), confirmCancels, confirmInsert, confirmUpdate, and confirmDelete.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setConfirmEdits() and get this property's value with confirmEdits().
+
    bool confirmInsert
    
+
    This property holds whether the data browser confirms insertions.
+
    If this property is TRUE, the browser confirms insertions,
+otherwise insertions happen immediately.
+
     
    See also confirmCancels, confirmEdits, confirmUpdate, confirmDelete, and confirmEdit().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setConfirmInsert() and get this property's value with confirmInsert().
+
    bool confirmUpdate
    
+
    This property holds whether the browser confirms updates.
+
    If this property is TRUE, the browser confirms updates, otherwise
+updates happen immediately.
+
     
    See also confirmCancels, confirmEdits, confirmInsert, confirmDelete, and confirmEdit().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setConfirmUpdate() and get this property's value with confirmUpdate().
+
    TQString filter
    
+
    This property holds the data browser's filter.
+
    The filter applies to the data shown in the browser. Call
+refresh() to apply the new filter. A filter is a string containing
+a SQL WHERE clause without the WHERE keyword, e.g. "id>1000",
+"name LIKE 'A%'", etc.
+
     There is no default filter.
+
     
    See also sort.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setFilter() and get this property's value with filter().
+
    bool readOnly
    
+
    This property holds whether the browser is read-only.
+
    The default is FALSE, i.e. data can be edited. If the data browser
+is read-only, no database edits will be allowed.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setReadOnly() and get this property's value with isReadOnly().
+
    TQStringList sort
    
+
    This property holds the data browser's sort.
+
    The data browser's sort affects the order in which records are
+viewed in the browser. Call refresh() to apply the new sort.
+
     When retrieving the sort property, a string list is returned in
+the form 'fieldname order', e.g. 'id ASC', 'surname DESC'.
+
     There is no default sort.
+
     Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
+over a copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQStringList list = myDataBrowser.sort();
+    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
+    while( it != list.end() ) {
+        myProcessing( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    Set this property's value with setSort() and get this property's value with sort().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqdatastream.html b/doc/html/ntqdatastream.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a20fd8eab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqdatastream.html
@@ -0,0 +1,570 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQDataStream Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQDataStream Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQDataStream class provides serialization of binary data
+to a TQIODevice.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqdatastream.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
+The TQDataStream class provides serialization of binary data
+to a TQIODevice.
+
     
+
     A data stream is a binary stream of encoded information which is
+100% independent of the host computer's operating system, CPU or
+byte order. For example, a data stream that is written by a PC
+under Windows can be read by a Sun SPARC running Solaris.
+
     You can also use a data stream to read/write raw
+    unencoded binary data. If you want a "parsing" input
+stream, see TQTextStream.
+
     The TQDataStream class implements the serialization of C++'s basic
+data types, like char, short, int, char*, etc.
+Serialization of more complex data is accomplished by breaking up
+the data into primitive units.
+
     A data stream cooperates closely with a TQIODevice. A TQIODevice
+represents an input/output medium one can read data from and write
+data to. The TQFile class is an example of an IO device.
+
     Example (write binary data to a stream):
+
    +    TQFile file( "file.dat" );
+    file.open( IO_WriteOnly );
+    TQDataStream stream( &file ); // we will serialize the data into the file
+    stream << "the answer is";   // serialize a string
+    stream << (Q_INT32)42;       // serialize an integer
+    
    
+ 
+
     Example (read binary data from a stream):
+
    +    TQFile file( "file.dat" );
+    file.open( IO_ReadOnly );
+    TQDataStream stream( &file );  // read the data serialized from the file
+    TQString str;
+    Q_INT32 a;
+    stream >> str >> a;           // extract "the answer is" and 42
+    
    
+ 
+
     Each item written to the stream is written in a predefined binary
+format that varies depending on the item's type. Supported TQt
+types include TQBrush, TQColor, TQDateTime, TQFont, TQPixmap, TQString,
+TQVariant and many others. For the complete list of all TQt types
+supporting data streaming see the Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
     For integers it is best to always cast to a TQt integer type for
+writing, and to read back into the same TQt integer type. This
+ensures that you get integers of the size you want and insulates
+you from compiler and platform differences.
+
     To take one example, a char* string is written as a 32-bit
+integer equal to the length of the string including the NUL byte
+('\0'), followed by all the characters of the string including the
+NUL byte. When reading a char* string, 4 bytes are read to
+create the 32-bit length value, then that many characters for the
+char* string including the NUL are read.
+
     The initial IODevice is usually set in the constructor, but can be
+changed with setDevice(). If you've reached the end of the data
+(or if there is no IODevice set) atEnd() will return TRUE.
+
     If you want the data to be compatible with an earlier version of
+TQt use setVersion().
+
     If you want the data to be human-readable, e.g. for debugging, you
+can set the data stream into printable data mode with
+setPrintableData(). The data is then written slower, in a bloated
+but human readable format.
+
     If you are producing a new binary data format, such as a file
+format for documents created by your application, you could use a
+TQDataStream to write the data in a portable format. Typically, you
+would write a brief header containing a magic string and a version
+number to give yourself room for future expansion. For example:
+
     
    +    TQFile file( "file.xxx" );
+    file.open( IO_WriteOnly );
+    TQDataStream stream( &file );
+
+    // Write a header with a "magic number" and a version
+    stream << (Q_UINT32)0xA0B0C0D0;
+    stream << (Q_INT32)123;
+
+    // Write the data
+    stream << [lots of interesting data]
+    
    
+ 
+
     Then read it in with:
+
     
    +    TQFile file( "file.xxx" );
+    file.open( IO_ReadOnly );
+    TQDataStream stream( &file );
+
+    // Read and check the header
+    Q_UINT32 magic;
+    stream >> magic;
+    if ( magic != 0xA0B0C0D0 )
+        return XXX_BAD_FILE_FORMAT;
+
+    // Read the version
+    Q_INT32 version;
+    stream >> version;
+    if ( version < 100 )
+        return XXX_BAD_FILE_TOO_OLD;
+    if ( version > 123 )
+        return XXX_BAD_FILE_TOO_NEW;
+    if ( version <= 110 )
+        stream.setVersion(1);
+
+    // Read the data
+    stream >> [lots of interesting data];
+    if ( version > 120 )
+        stream >> [data new in XXX version 1.2];
+    stream >> [other interesting data];
+    
    
+ 
+
     You can select which byte order to use when serializing data. The
+default setting is big endian (MSB first). Changing it to little
+endian breaks the portability (unless the reader also changes to
+little endian). We recommend keeping this setting unless you have
+special requirements.
+
     
+
     Reading and writing raw binary data
+
    
+
     You may wish to read/write your own raw binary data to/from the
+data stream directly. Data may be read from the stream into a
+preallocated char* using readRawBytes(). Similarly data can be
+written to the stream using writeRawBytes(). Notice that any
+encoding/decoding of the data must be done by you.
+
     A similar pair of functions is readBytes() and writeBytes(). These
+differ from their raw counterparts as follows: readBytes()
+reads a Q_UINT32 which is taken to be the length of the data to be
+read, then that number of bytes is read into the preallocated
+char*; writeBytes() writes a Q_UINT32 containing the length of the
+data, followed by the data. Notice that any encoding/decoding of
+the data (apart from the length Q_UINT32) must be done by you.
+
     
    See also TQTextStream, TQVariant, and Input/Output and Networking.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQDataStream::ByteOrder
    
+
+
     The byte order used for reading/writing the data.
+
      
+
    • TQDataStream::BigEndian - the default
+
    • TQDataStream::LittleEndian
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQDataStream::TQDataStream ()
+
    
+Constructs a data stream that has no IO device.
+
     
    See also setDevice().
+
+
    TQDataStream::TQDataStream ( TQIODevice * d )
+
    
+Constructs a data stream that uses the IO device d.
+
     Warning: If you use TQSocket or TQSocketDevice as the IO device d
+for reading data, you must make sure that enough data is available
+on the socket for the operation to successfully proceed;
+TQDataStream does not have any means to handle or recover from
+short-reads.
+
     
    See also setDevice() and device().
+
+
    TQDataStream::TQDataStream ( TQByteArray a, int mode )
+
    
+Constructs a data stream that operates on a byte array, a,
+through an internal TQBuffer device. The mode is a
+TQIODevice::mode(), usually either IO_ReadOnly or IO_WriteOnly.
+
     Example:
+
    +    static char bindata[] = { 231, 1, 44, ... };
+    TQByteArray a;
+    a.setRawData( bindata, sizeof(bindata) );   // a points to bindata
+    TQDataStream stream( a, IO_ReadOnly );       // open on a's data
+    stream >> [something];                      // read raw bindata
+    a.resetRawData( bindata, sizeof(bindata) ); // finished
+    
    
+ 
+
     The TQByteArray::setRawData() function is not for the inexperienced.
+
+
    TQDataStream::~TQDataStream () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the data stream.
+
     The destructor will not affect the current IO device, unless it is
+an internal IO device processing a TQByteArray passed in the constructor, in which case the internal IO device is destroyed.
+
+
    bool TQDataStream::atEnd () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the IO device has reached the end position (end of
+the stream or file) or if there is no IO device set; otherwise
+returns FALSE, i.e. if the current position of the IO device is
+before the end position.
+
     
    See also TQIODevice::atEnd().
+
+
    int TQDataStream::byteOrder () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the current byte order setting -- either BigEndian or
+LittleEndian.
+
     
    See also setByteOrder().
+
+
    TQIODevice * TQDataStream::device () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the IO device currently set.
+
     
    See also setDevice() and unsetDevice().
+
+
    bool TQDataStream::eof () const
+
    
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Returns TRUE if the IO device has reached the end position (end of
+stream or file) or if there is no IO device set.
+
     Returns FALSE if the current position of the read/write head of the IO
+device is somewhere before the end position.
+
     
    See also TQIODevice::atEnd().
+
+
    bool TQDataStream::isPrintableData () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the printable data flag has been set; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setPrintableData().
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator<< ( Q_INT8 i )
+
    
+Writes a signed byte, i, to the stream and returns a reference
+to the stream.
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator<< ( Q_UINT8 i )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Writes an unsigned byte, i, to the stream and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator<< ( Q_INT16 i )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Writes a signed 16-bit integer, i, to the stream and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator<< ( Q_UINT16 i )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Writes an unsigned 16-bit integer, i, to the stream and returns
+a reference to the stream.
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator<< ( Q_INT32 i )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Writes a signed 32-bit integer, i, to the stream and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator<< ( Q_UINT32 i )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Writes an unsigned integer, i, to the stream as a 32-bit
+unsigned integer (Q_UINT32). Returns a reference to the stream.
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator<< ( Q_INT64 i )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Writes a signed 64-bit integer, i, to the stream and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator<< ( Q_UINT64 i )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Writes an unsigned 64-bit integer, i, to the stream and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator<< ( Q_LONG i )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Writes a signed integer i, of the system's word length, to the
+stream and returns a reference to the stream.
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator<< ( Q_ULONG i )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Writes an unsigned integer i, of the system's word length, to
+the stream and returns a reference to the stream.
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator<< ( float f )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Writes a 32-bit floating point number, f, to the stream using
+the standard IEEE754 format. Returns a reference to the stream.
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator<< ( double f )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Writes a 64-bit floating point number, f, to the stream using
+the standard IEEE754 format. Returns a reference to the stream.
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator<< ( const char * s )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Writes the '\0'-terminated string s to the stream and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
     The string is serialized using writeBytes().
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator>> ( Q_INT8 & i )
+
    
+Reads a signed byte from the stream into i, and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator>> ( Q_UINT8 & i )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Reads an unsigned byte from the stream into i, and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator>> ( Q_INT16 & i )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Reads a signed 16-bit integer from the stream into i, and
+returns a reference to the stream.
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator>> ( Q_UINT16 & i )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Reads an unsigned 16-bit integer from the stream into i, and
+returns a reference to the stream.
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator>> ( Q_INT32 & i )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Reads a signed 32-bit integer from the stream into i, and
+returns a reference to the stream.
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator>> ( Q_UINT32 & i )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Reads an unsigned 32-bit integer from the stream into i, and
+returns a reference to the stream.
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator>> ( Q_INT64 & i )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Reads a signed 64-bit integer from the stream into i, and
+returns a reference to the stream.
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator>> ( Q_UINT64 & i )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Reads an unsigned 64-bit integer from the stream, into i, and
+returns a reference to the stream.
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator>> ( Q_LONG & i )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Reads a signed integer of the system's word length from the stream
+into i, and returns a reference to the stream.
+
     
+
    TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator>> ( Q_ULONG & i )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Reads an unsigned integer of the system's word length from the
+stream, into i, and returns a reference to the stream.
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator>> ( float & f )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Reads a 32-bit floating point number from the stream into f,
+using the standard IEEE754 format. Returns a reference to the
+stream.
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator>> ( double & f )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Reads a 64-bit floating point number from the stream into f,
+using the standard IEEE754 format. Returns a reference to the
+stream.
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator>> ( char *& s )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Reads the '\0'-terminated string s from the stream and returns
+a reference to the stream.
+
     Space for the string is allocated using new -- the caller must
+destroy it with delete[].
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQDataStream::readBytes ( char *& s, uint & l )
+
    
+Reads the buffer s from the stream and returns a reference to
+the stream.
+
     The buffer s is allocated using new. Destroy it with the delete[] operator. If the length is zero or s cannot be
+allocated, s is set to 0.
+
     The l parameter will be set to the length of the buffer.
+
     The serialization format is a Q_UINT32 length specifier first,
+then l bytes of data. Note that the data is not encoded.
+
     
    See also readRawBytes() and writeBytes().
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQDataStream::readRawBytes ( char * s, uint len )
+
    
+Reads len bytes from the stream into s and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
     The buffer s must be preallocated. The data is not encoded.
+
     
    See also readBytes(), TQIODevice::readBlock(), and writeRawBytes().
+
+
    void TQDataStream::setByteOrder ( int bo )
+
    
+Sets the serialization byte order to bo.
+
     The bo parameter can be TQDataStream::BigEndian or TQDataStream::LittleEndian.
+
     The default setting is big endian. We recommend leaving this
+setting unless you have special requirements.
+
     
    See also byteOrder().
+
+
    void TQDataStream::setDevice ( TQIODevice * d )
+
    
+void TQDataStream::setDevice(TQIODevice *d )
+
     Sets the IO device to d.
+
     
    See also device() and unsetDevice().
+
+
    void TQDataStream::setPrintableData ( bool enable )
+
    
+
+
     If enable is TRUE, data will be output in a human readable
+format. If enable is FALSE, data will be output in a binary
+format.
+
     If enable is TRUE, the write functions will generate output
+that consists of printable characters (7 bit ASCII). This output
+will typically be a lot larger than the default binary output, and
+consequently slower to write.
+
     We recommend only enabling printable data for debugging purposes.
+
+
    void TQDataStream::setVersion ( int v )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the version number of the data serialization format to v.
+
     You don't need to set a version if you are using the current
+version of TQt.
+
     In order to accommodate new functionality, the datastream
+serialization format of some TQt classes has changed in some
+versions of TQt. If you want to read data that was created by an
+earlier version of TQt, or write data that can be read by a program
+that was compiled with an earlier version of TQt, use this function
+to modify the serialization format of TQDataStream.
+
     
    
+
     TQt Version         TQDataStream Version
+
     TQt 3.3                 6
+
     TQt 3.2                 5
+
     TQt 3.1                 5
+
     TQt 3.0                 4
+
     TQt 2.1.x and TQt 2.2.x  3
+
     TQt 2.0.x               2
+
     TQt 1.x                 1
+
    
+
     
    See also version().
+
+
    void TQDataStream::unsetDevice ()
+
    
+Unsets the IO device. This is the same as calling setDevice( 0 ).
+
     
    See also device() and setDevice().
+
+
    int TQDataStream::version () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the version number of the data serialization format. In TQt
+3.1, this number is 5.
+
     
    See also setVersion().
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQDataStream::writeBytes ( const char * s, uint len )
+
    
+Writes the length specifier len and the buffer s to the
+stream and returns a reference to the stream.
+
     The len is serialized as a Q_UINT32, followed by len bytes
+from s. Note that the data is not encoded.
+
     
    See also writeRawBytes() and readBytes().
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQDataStream::writeRawBytes ( const char * s, uint len )
+
    
+Writes len bytes from s to the stream and returns a
+reference to the stream. The data is not encoded.
+
     
    See also writeBytes(), TQIODevice::writeBlock(), and readRawBytes().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqdatatable.html b/doc/html/ntqdatatable.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a2ed372fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqdatatable.html
@@ -0,0 +1,809 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQDataTable Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQDataTable Class Reference
    [sql module]
    
+
+
    The TQDataTable class provides a flexible SQL table widget that supports browsing and editing.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqdatatable.h>
+
    Inherits TQTable.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • bool autoEdit - whether the data table automatically applies edits
      • 
+
    • bool confirmCancels - whether the data table confirms cancel operations
      • 
+
    • bool confirmDelete - whether the data table confirms delete operations
      • 
+
    • bool confirmEdits - whether the data table confirms edit operations
      • 
+
    • bool confirmInsert - whether the data table confirms insert operations
      • 
+
    • bool confirmUpdate - whether the data table confirms update operations
      • 
+
    • DateFormat dateFormat - the format used for displaying date/time values
      • 
+
    • TQString falseText - the text used to represent false values
      • 
+
    • TQString filter - the data filter for the data table
      • 
+
    • TQString nullText - the text used to represent NULL values
      • 
+
    • int numCols - the number of columns in the table  (read only)
      • 
+
    • int numRows - the number of rows in the table  (read only)
      • 
+
    • TQStringList sort - the data table's sort
      • 
+
    • TQString trueText - the text used to represent true values
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQDataTable class provides a flexible SQL table widget that supports browsing and editing.
+
     
+
+
+
     TQDataTable supports various functions for presenting and editing
+SQL data from a TQSqlCursor in a table.
+
     If you want a to present your data in a form use TQDataBrowser, or
+for read-only forms, TQDataView.
+
     When displaying data, TQDataTable only retrieves data for visible
+rows. If the driver supports the 'query size' property the
+TQDataTable will have the correct number of rows and the vertical
+scrollbar will accurately reflect the number of rows displayed in
+proportion to the number of rows in the dataset. If the driver
+does not support the 'query size' property, rows are dynamically
+fetched from the database on an as-needed basis with the scrollbar
+becoming more accurate as the user scrolls down through the
+records. This allows extremely large queries to be displayed as
+tquickly as possible, with minimum memory usage.
+
     TQDataTable inherits TQTable's API and extends it with functions to
+sort and filter the data and sort columns. See setSqlCursor(),
+setFilter(), setSort(), setSorting(), sortColumn() and refresh().
+
     When displaying editable cursors, cell editing will be enabled.
+(For more information on editable cursors, see TQSqlCursor).
+TQDataTable can be used to modify existing data and to add new
+records. When a user makes changes to a field in the table, the
+cursor's edit buffer is used. The table will not send changes in
+the edit buffer to the database until the user moves to a
+different record in the grid or presses Enter. Cell editing is
+initiated by pressing F2 (or right clicking and then clicking the
+appropriate popup menu item) and canceled by pressing Esc. If
+there is a problem updating or adding data, errors are handled
+automatically (see handleError() to change this behavior). Note
+that if autoEdit() is FALSE navigating to another record will
+cancel the insert or update.
+
     The user can be asked to confirm all edits with setConfirmEdits().
+For more precise control use setConfirmInsert(),
+setConfirmUpdate(), setConfirmDelete() and setConfirmCancels().
+Use setAutoEdit() to control the behaviour of the table when the
+user edits a record and then navigates. (Note that setAutoDelete()
+is unrelated; it is used to set whether the TQSqlCursor is deleted
+when the table is deleted.)
+
     Since the data table can perform edits, it must be able to
+uniquely identify every record so that edits are correctly
+applied. Because of this the underlying cursor must have a valid
+primary index to ensure that a unique record is inserted, updated
+or deleted within the database otherwise the database may be
+changed to an inconsistent state.
+
     TQDataTable creates editors using the default TQSqlEditorFactory.
+Different editor factories can be used by calling
+installEditorFactory(). A property map is used to map between the
+cell's value and the editor. You can use your own property map
+with installPropertyMap().
+
     The contents of a cell is available as a TQString with text() or as
+a TQVariant with value(). The current record is returned by
+currentRecord(). Use the find() function to search for a string in
+the table.
+
     Editing actions can be applied programatically. For example, the
+insertCurrent() function reads the fields from the current record
+into the cursor and performs the insert. The updateCurrent() and
+deleteCurrent() functions perform similarly to update and delete
+the current record respectively.
+
     Columns in the table can be created automatically based on the
+cursor (see setSqlCursor()). Columns can be manipulated manually
+using addColumn(), removeColumn() and setColumn().
+
     The table automatically copies many of the properties of the
+cursor to format the display of data within cells (alignment,
+visibility, etc.). The cursor can be changed with setSqlCursor().
+The filter (see setFilter()) and sort defined within the table are
+used instead of the filter and sort set on the cursor. For sorting
+options see setSort(), sortColumn(), sortAscending() and
+sortDescending(). Note that sorting operations will not behave as
+expected if you are using a TQSqlSelectCursor because it uses
+user-defined SQL queries to obtain data.
+
     The text used to represent NULL, TRUE and FALSE values can be
+changed with setNullText(), setTrueText() and setFalseText()
+respectively. You can change the appearance of cells by
+reimplementing paintField().
+
     Whenever a new row is selected in the table the currentChanged()
+signal is emitted. The primeInsert() signal is emitted when an
+insert is initiated. The primeUpdate() and primeDelete() signals
+are emitted when update and deletion are initiated respectively.
+Just before the database is updated a signal is emitted;
+beforeInsert(), beforeUpdate() or beforeDelete() as appropriate.
+
     
    See also Database Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQDataTable::Refresh
    
+
+
     This enum describes the refresh options.
+
      
+
    • TQDataTable::RefreshData - refresh the data, i.e. read it from the database
+
    • TQDataTable::RefreshColumns - refresh the list of fields, e.g. the column headings
+
    • TQDataTable::RefreshAll - refresh both the data and the list of fields
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQDataTable::TQDataTable ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a data table which is a child of parent, called
+name name.
+
+
    TQDataTable::TQDataTable ( TQSqlCursor * cursor, bool autoPopulate = FALSE, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a data table which is a child of parent, called name
+name using the cursor cursor.
+
     If autoPopulate is TRUE (the default is FALSE), columns are
+automatically created based upon the fields in the cursor
+record. Note that autoPopulate only governs the creation of
+columns; to load the cursor's data into the table use refresh().
+
     If the cursor is read-only, the table also becomes read-only.
+In addition, the table adopts the cursor's driver's definition for
+representing NULL values as strings.
+
+
    TQDataTable::~TQDataTable ()
+
    
+Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
+
+
    void TQDataTable::addColumn ( const TQString & fieldName, const TQString & label = TQString::null, int width = -1, const TQIconSet & iconset = TQIconSet ( ) ) [virtual]
+
    
+Adds the next column to be displayed using the field fieldName,
+column label label, width width and iconset iconset.
+
     If label is specified, it is used as the column's header label,
+otherwise the field's display label is used when setSqlCursor() is
+called. The iconset is used to set the icon used by the column
+header; by default there is no icon.
+
     
    See also setSqlCursor() and refresh().
+
+
    Examples: sql/overview/subclass1/main.cpp, sql/overview/subclass3/main.cpp, sql/overview/table2/main.cpp, and sql/sqltable/main.cpp.
+
    void TQDataTable::adjustColumn ( int col ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Resizes column col so that the column width is wide enough to
+display the widest item the column contains (including the column
+label). If the table's TQSqlCursor is not currently active, the
+cursor will be refreshed before the column width is calculated. Be
+aware that this function may be slow on tables that contain large
+result sets.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQTable.
+
    bool TQDataTable::autoDelete () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the table will automatically delete the cursor
+specified by setSqlCursor(); otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQDataTable::autoEdit () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the data table automatically applies edits; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "autoEdit" property for details.
+
    void TQDataTable::beforeDelete ( TQSqlRecord * buf ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted just before the currently selected record
+is deleted from the database. The buf parameter points to the
+edit buffer being deleted. Connect to this signal to, for example,
+copy some of the fields for later use.
+
+
    void TQDataTable::beforeInsert ( TQSqlRecord * buf ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted just before the cursor's edit buffer is
+inserted into the database. The buf parameter points to the
+edit buffer being inserted. Connect to this signal to, for
+example, populate a key field with a unique sequence number.
+
+
    void TQDataTable::beforeUpdate ( TQSqlRecord * buf ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted just before the cursor's edit buffer is
+updated in the database. The buf parameter points to the edit
+buffer being updated. Connect to this signal when you want to
+transform the user's data behind-the-scenes.
+
+
    bool TQDataTable::beginInsert () [virtual protected]
+
    
+Protected virtual function called when editing is about to begin
+on a new record. If the table is read-only, or if there's no
+cursor or the cursor does not allow inserts, nothing happens.
+
     Editing takes place using the cursor's edit buffer(see
+TQSqlCursor::editBuffer()).
+
     When editing begins, a new row is created in the table marked with
+an asterisk '*' in the row's vertical header column, i.e. at the
+left of the row.
+
+
    TQWidget * TQDataTable::beginUpdate ( int row, int col, bool replace ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Protected virtual function called when editing is about to begin
+on an existing row. If the table is read-only, or if there's no
+cursor, nothing happens.
+
     Editing takes place using the cursor's edit buffer (see
+TQSqlCursor::editBuffer()).
+
     row and col refer to the row and column in the TQDataTable.
+
     (replace is provided for reimplementors and reflects the API of
+TQTable::beginEdit().)
+
+
    TQSql::Confirm TQDataTable::confirmCancel ( TQSql::Op m ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Protected virtual function which returns a confirmation for
+cancelling an edit mode of m. Derived classes can reimplement
+this function to provide their own cancel dialog. The default
+implementation uses a message box which prompts the user to
+confirm the cancel.
+
+
    bool TQDataTable::confirmCancels () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the data table confirms cancel operations; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "confirmCancels" property for details.
+
    bool TQDataTable::confirmDelete () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the data table confirms delete operations; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "confirmDelete" property for details.
+
    TQSql::Confirm TQDataTable::confirmEdit ( TQSql::Op m ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Protected virtual function which returns a confirmation for an
+edit of mode m. Derived classes can reimplement this function
+to provide their own confirmation dialog. The default
+implementation uses a message box which prompts the user to
+confirm the edit action.
+
+
    bool TQDataTable::confirmEdits () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the data table confirms edit operations; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "confirmEdits" property for details.
+
    bool TQDataTable::confirmInsert () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the data table confirms insert operations; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "confirmInsert" property for details.
+
    bool TQDataTable::confirmUpdate () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the data table confirms update operations; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "confirmUpdate" property for details.
+
    void TQDataTable::currentChanged ( TQSqlRecord * record ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever a new row is selected in the
+table. The record parameter points to the contents of the newly
+selected record.
+
+
    TQSqlRecord * TQDataTable::currentRecord () const
+
    
+Returns the currently selected record, or 0 if there is no current
+selection. The table owns the pointer, so do not delete it or
+otherwise modify it or the cursor it points to.
+
+
    void TQDataTable::cursorChanged ( TQSql::Op mode ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the cursor record was changed due
+to an edit. The mode parameter is the type of edit that just
+took place.
+
+
    DateFormat TQDataTable::dateFormat () const
+
    Returns the format used for displaying date/time values.
+See the "dateFormat" property for details.
+
    bool TQDataTable::deleteCurrent () [virtual protected]
+
    
+For an editable table, issues a delete on the current cursor's
+primary index using the values of the currently selected row. If
+there is no current cursor or there is no current selection,
+nothing happens. If confirmEdits() or confirmDelete() is TRUE,
+confirmEdit() is called to confirm the delete. Returns TRUE if the
+delete succeeded; otherwise FALSE.
+
     The underlying cursor must have a valid primary index to ensure
+that a unique record is deleted within the database otherwise the
+database may be changed to an inconsistent state.
+
+
    TQString TQDataTable::falseText () const
+
    Returns the text used to represent false values.
+See the "falseText" property for details.
+
    int TQDataTable::fieldAlignment ( const TQSqlField * field ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Returns the alignment for field.
+
+
    TQString TQDataTable::filter () const
+
    Returns the data filter for the data table.
+See the "filter" property for details.
+
    void TQDataTable::find ( const TQString & str, bool caseSensitive, bool backwards ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Searches the current cursor for a cell containing the string str starting at the current cell and working forwards (or
+backwards if backwards is TRUE). If the string is found, the
+cell containing the string is set as the current cell. If caseSensitive is FALSE the case of str will be ignored.
+
     The search will wrap, i.e. if the first (or if backwards is TRUE,
+last) cell is reached without finding str the search will
+continue until it reaches the starting cell. If str is not
+found the search will fail and the current cell will remain
+unchanged.
+
+
    void TQDataTable::handleError ( const TQSqlError & e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Protected virtual function which is called when an error e has
+occurred on the current cursor(). The default implementation
+displays a warning message to the user with information about the
+error.
+
+
    int TQDataTable::indexOf ( uint i ) const [protected]
+
    
+Returns the index of the field within the current SQL query that
+is displayed in column i.
+
+
    bool TQDataTable::insertCurrent () [virtual protected]
+
    
+For an editable table, issues an insert on the current cursor
+using the values in the cursor's edit buffer. If there is no
+current cursor or there is no current "insert" row, nothing
+happens. If confirmEdits() or confirmInsert() is TRUE,
+confirmEdit() is called to confirm the insert. Returns TRUE if the
+insert succeeded; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     The underlying cursor must have a valid primary index to ensure
+that a unique record is inserted within the database otherwise the
+database may be changed to an inconsistent state.
+
+
    void TQDataTable::installEditorFactory ( TQSqlEditorFactory * f )
+
    
+Installs a new SQL editor factory f. This enables the user to
+create and instantiate their own editors for use in cell editing.
+Note that TQDataTable takes ownership of this pointer, and will
+delete it when it is no longer needed or when
+installEditorFactory() is called again.
+
     
    See also TQSqlEditorFactory.
+
+
    void TQDataTable::installPropertyMap ( TQSqlPropertyMap * m )
+
    
+Installs a new property map m. This enables the user to create
+and instantiate their own property maps for use in cell editing.
+Note that TQDataTable takes ownership of this pointer, and will
+delete it when it is no longer needed or when installPropertMap()
+is called again.
+
     
    See also TQSqlPropertyMap.
+
+
    TQString TQDataTable::nullText () const
+
    Returns the text used to represent NULL values.
+See the "nullText" property for details.
+
    int TQDataTable::numCols () const [virtual]
+
    Returns the number of columns in the table.
+See the "numCols" property for details.
+
    Reimplemented from TQTable.
+
    int TQDataTable::numRows () const [virtual]
+
    Returns the number of rows in the table.
+See the "numRows" property for details.
+
    Reimplemented from TQTable.
+
    void TQDataTable::paintField ( TQPainter * p, const TQSqlField * field, const TQRect & cr, bool selected ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Paints the field on the painter p. The painter has already
+been translated to the appropriate cell's origin where the field is to be rendered. cr describes the cell coordinates in
+the content coordinate system. The selected parameter is
+ignored.
+
     If you want to draw custom field content you must reimplement
+paintField() to do the custom drawing. The default implementation
+renders the field value as text. If the field is NULL,
+nullText() is displayed in the cell. If the field is Boolean,
+trueText() or falseText() is displayed as appropriate.
+
+
    Example: sql/overview/table4/main.cpp.
+
    void TQDataTable::primeDelete ( TQSqlRecord * buf ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted after the cursor is primed for delete by
+the table, when a delete action is beginning on the table. The buf parameter points to the edit buffer being deleted. Connect to
+this signal in order to, for example, record auditing information
+on deletions.
+
+
    void TQDataTable::primeInsert ( TQSqlRecord * buf ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted after the cursor is primed for insert by
+the table, when an insert action is beginning on the table. The buf parameter points to the edit buffer being inserted. Connect to
+this signal in order to, for example, prime the record buffer with
+default data values.
+
+
    void TQDataTable::primeUpdate ( TQSqlRecord * buf ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted after the cursor is primed for update by
+the table, when an update action is beginning on the table. The buf parameter points to the edit buffer being updated. Connect to
+this signal in order to, for example, provide some visual feedback
+that the user is in 'edit mode'.
+
+
    void TQDataTable::refresh () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Refreshes the table. The cursor is refreshed using the current
+filter, the current sort, and the currently defined columns.
+Equivalent to calling refresh( TQDataTable::RefreshData ).
+
+
    Examples: sql/overview/subclass1/main.cpp, sql/overview/table1/main.cpp, sql/overview/table2/main.cpp, and sql/sqltable/main.cpp.
+
    void TQDataTable::refresh ( Refresh mode )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Refreshes the table. If there is no currently defined cursor (see
+setSqlCursor()), nothing happens. The mode parameter determines
+which type of refresh will take place.
+
     
    See also Refresh, setSqlCursor(), and addColumn().
+
+
    void TQDataTable::removeColumn ( uint col ) [virtual]
+
    
+Removes column col from the list of columns to be displayed. If
+col does not exist, nothing happens.
+
     
    See also TQSqlField.
+
+
    void TQDataTable::reset () [protected]
+
    
+Resets the table so that it displays no data.
+
     
    See also setSqlCursor().
+
+
    void TQDataTable::setAutoDelete ( bool enable ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the cursor auto-delete flag to enable. If enable is
+TRUE, the table will automatically delete the cursor specified by
+setSqlCursor(). If enable is FALSE (the default), the cursor
+will not be deleted.
+
+
    void TQDataTable::setAutoEdit ( bool autoEdit ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the data table automatically applies edits to autoEdit.
+See the "autoEdit" property for details.
+
    void TQDataTable::setColumn ( uint col, const TQString & fieldName, const TQString & label = TQString::null, int width = -1, const TQIconSet & iconset = TQIconSet ( ) ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the col column to display using the field fieldName,
+column label label, width width and iconset iconset.
+
     If label is specified, it is used as the column's header label,
+otherwise the field's display label is used when setSqlCursor() is
+called. The iconset is used to set the icon used by the column
+header; by default there is no icon.
+
     
    See also setSqlCursor() and refresh().
+
+
    void TQDataTable::setColumnWidth ( int col, int w ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Sets the column col to the width w. Note that unlike TQTable
+the TQDataTable is not immediately redrawn, you must call
+refresh(TQDataTable::RefreshColumns)
+yourself.
+
     
    See also refresh().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQTable.
+
    void TQDataTable::setConfirmCancels ( bool confirm ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the data table confirms cancel operations to confirm.
+See the "confirmCancels" property for details.
+
    void TQDataTable::setConfirmDelete ( bool confirm ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the data table confirms delete operations to confirm.
+See the "confirmDelete" property for details.
+
    void TQDataTable::setConfirmEdits ( bool confirm ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the data table confirms edit operations to confirm.
+See the "confirmEdits" property for details.
+
    void TQDataTable::setConfirmInsert ( bool confirm ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the data table confirms insert operations to confirm.
+See the "confirmInsert" property for details.
+
    void TQDataTable::setConfirmUpdate ( bool confirm ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the data table confirms update operations to confirm.
+See the "confirmUpdate" property for details.
+
    void TQDataTable::setDateFormat ( const DateFormat f ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the format used for displaying date/time values to f.
+See the "dateFormat" property for details.
+
    void TQDataTable::setFalseText ( const TQString & falseText ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the text used to represent false values to falseText.
+See the "falseText" property for details.
+
    void TQDataTable::setFilter ( const TQString & filter ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the data filter for the data table to filter.
+See the "filter" property for details.
+
    void TQDataTable::setNullText ( const TQString & nullText ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the text used to represent NULL values to nullText.
+See the "nullText" property for details.
+
    void TQDataTable::setSize ( TQSqlCursor * sql ) [protected]
+
    
+If the cursor's sql driver supports query sizes, the number of
+rows in the table is set to the size of the query. Otherwise, the
+table dynamically resizes itself as it is scrolled. If sql is
+not active, it is made active by issuing a select() on the cursor
+using the sql cursor's current filter and current sort.
+
+
    void TQDataTable::setSort ( const TQStringList & sort ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the data table's sort to sort.
+See the "sort" property for details.
+
    void TQDataTable::setSort ( const TQSqlIndex & sort ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the sort to be applied to the displayed data to sort. If
+there is no current cursor, nothing happens. A TQSqlIndex contains
+field names and their ordering (ASC or DESC); these are used to
+compose the ORDER BY clause.
+
     
    See also sort.
+
+
    void TQDataTable::setSqlCursor ( TQSqlCursor * cursor = 0, bool autoPopulate = FALSE, bool autoDelete = FALSE ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets cursor as the data source for the table. To force the
+display of the data from cursor, use refresh(). If autoPopulate is TRUE, columns are automatically created based upon
+the fields in the cursor record. If autoDelete is TRUE (the
+default is FALSE), the table will take ownership of the cursor
+and delete it when appropriate. If the cursor is read-only, the
+table becomes read-only. The table adopts the cursor's driver's
+definition for representing NULL values as strings.
+
     
    See also refresh(), readOnly, setAutoDelete(), and TQSqlDriver::nullText().
+
+
    void TQDataTable::setTrueText ( const TQString & trueText ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the text used to represent true values to trueText.
+See the "trueText" property for details.
+
    TQStringList TQDataTable::sort () const
+
    Returns the data table's sort.
+See the "sort" property for details.
+
    void TQDataTable::sortAscending ( int col ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Sorts column col in ascending order.
+
     
    See also sorting.
+
+
    void TQDataTable::sortColumn ( int col, bool ascending = TRUE, bool wholeRows = FALSE ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sorts column col in ascending order if ascending is TRUE
+(the default); otherwise sorts in descending order.
+
     The wholeRows parameter is ignored; TQDataTable always sorts
+whole rows by the specified column.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQTable.
+
    void TQDataTable::sortDescending ( int col ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Sorts column col in descending order.
+
     
    See also sorting.
+
+
    TQSqlCursor * TQDataTable::sqlCursor () const
+
    
+Returns the cursor used by the data table.
+
+
    TQString TQDataTable::text ( int row, int col ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the text in cell row, col, or an empty string if the
+cell is empty. If the cell's value is NULL then nullText() will be
+returned. If the cell does not exist then TQString::null is
+returned.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQTable.
+
    TQString TQDataTable::trueText () const
+
    Returns the text used to represent true values.
+See the "trueText" property for details.
+
    bool TQDataTable::updateCurrent () [virtual protected]
+
    
+For an editable table, issues an update using the cursor's edit
+buffer. If there is no current cursor or there is no current
+selection, nothing happens. If confirmEdits() or confirmUpdate()
+is TRUE, confirmEdit() is called to confirm the update. Returns
+TRUE if the update succeeded; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     The underlying cursor must have a valid primary index to ensure
+that a unique record is updated within the database otherwise the
+database may be changed to an inconsistent state.
+
+
    TQVariant TQDataTable::value ( int row, int col ) const
+
    
+Returns the value in cell row, col, or an invalid value if
+the cell does not exist or has no value.
+
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    bool autoEdit
    
+
    This property holds whether the data table automatically applies edits.
+
    The default value for this property is TRUE. When the user begins
+an insert or update in the table there are two possible outcomes
+when they navigate to another record:
+
     
      
+
    1.  the insert or update is is performed -- this occurs if autoEdit is TRUE
+
    2.  the insert or update is abandoned -- this occurs if autoEdit is FALSE
+
    
+
+
    Set this property's value with setAutoEdit() and get this property's value with autoEdit().
+
    bool confirmCancels
    
+
    This property holds whether the data table confirms cancel operations.
+
    If the confirmCancel property is TRUE, all cancels must be
+confirmed by the user through a message box (this behavior can be
+changed by overriding the confirmCancel() function), otherwise all
+cancels occur immediately. The default is FALSE.
+
     
    See also confirmEdits and confirmCancel().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setConfirmCancels() and get this property's value with confirmCancels().
+
    bool confirmDelete
    
+
    This property holds whether the data table confirms delete operations.
+
    If the confirmDelete property is TRUE, all deletions must be
+confirmed by the user through a message box (this behaviour can be
+changed by overriding the confirmEdit() function), otherwise all
+delete operations occur immediately.
+
     
    See also confirmCancels, confirmEdits, confirmUpdate, and confirmInsert.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setConfirmDelete() and get this property's value with confirmDelete().
+
    bool confirmEdits
    
+
    This property holds whether the data table confirms edit operations.
+
    If the confirmEdits property is TRUE, the data table confirms all
+edit operations (inserts, updates and deletes). Finer control of
+edit confirmation can be achieved using confirmCancels, confirmInsert, confirmUpdate and confirmDelete.
+
     
    See also confirmCancels, confirmInsert, confirmUpdate, and confirmDelete.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setConfirmEdits() and get this property's value with confirmEdits().
+
    bool confirmInsert
    
+
    This property holds whether the data table confirms insert operations.
+
    If the confirmInsert property is TRUE, all insertions must be
+confirmed by the user through a message box (this behaviour can be
+changed by overriding the confirmEdit() function), otherwise all
+insert operations occur immediately.
+
     
    See also confirmCancels, confirmEdits, confirmUpdate, and confirmDelete.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setConfirmInsert() and get this property's value with confirmInsert().
+
    bool confirmUpdate
    
+
    This property holds whether the data table confirms update operations.
+
    If the confirmUpdate property is TRUE, all updates must be
+confirmed by the user through a message box (this behaviour can be
+changed by overriding the confirmEdit() function), otherwise all
+update operations occur immediately.
+
     
    See also confirmCancels, confirmEdits, confirmInsert, and confirmDelete.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setConfirmUpdate() and get this property's value with confirmUpdate().
+
    DateFormat dateFormat
    
+
    This property holds the format used for displaying date/time values.
+
    The dateFormat property is used for displaying date/time values in
+the table. The default value is TQt::LocalDate.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setDateFormat() and get this property's value with dateFormat().
+
    TQString falseText
    
+
    This property holds the text used to represent false values.
+
    The falseText property will be used to represent NULL values in
+the table. The default value is "False".
+
+
    Set this property's value with setFalseText() and get this property's value with falseText().
+
    TQString filter
    
+
    This property holds the data filter for the data table.
+
    The filter applies to the data shown in the table. To view data
+with a new filter, use refresh(). A filter string is an SQL WHERE
+clause without the WHERE keyword.
+
     There is no default filter.
+
     
    See also sort.
+
+
     
+
    Set this property's value with setFilter() and get this property's value with filter().
+
    TQString nullText
    
+
    This property holds the text used to represent NULL values.
+
    The nullText property will be used to represent NULL values in the
+table. The default value is provided by the cursor's driver.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setNullText() and get this property's value with nullText().
+
    int numCols
    
+
    This property holds the number of columns in the table.
+
    
+
    Get this property's value with numCols().
+
    int numRows
    
+
    This property holds the number of rows in the table.
+
    
+
    Get this property's value with numRows().
+
    TQStringList sort
    
+
    This property holds the data table's sort.
+
    The table's sort affects the order in which data records are
+displayed in the table. To apply a sort, use refresh().
+
     When examining the sort property, a string list is returned with
+each item having the form 'fieldname order' (e.g., 'id ASC',
+'surname DESC').
+
     There is no default sort.
+
     Note that if you want to iterate over the sort list, you should
+iterate over a copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQStringList list = myDataTable.sort();
+    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
+    while( it != list.end() ) {
+        myProcessing( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also filter and refresh().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setSort() and get this property's value with sort().
+
    TQString trueText
    
+
    This property holds the text used to represent true values.
+
    The trueText property will be used to represent NULL values in the
+table. The default value is "True".
+
+
    Set this property's value with setTrueText() and get this property's value with trueText().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqdataview.html b/doc/html/ntqdataview.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..336364560
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqdataview.html
@@ -0,0 +1,151 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQDataView Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQDataView Class Reference
    [sql module]
    
+
+
    The TQDataView class provides read-only SQL forms.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqdataview.h>
+
    Inherits TQWidget.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQDataView ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags fl = 0 )
      • 
+
    • ~TQDataView ()
      • 
+
    • virtual void setForm ( TQSqlForm * form )
      • 
+
    • TQSqlForm * form ()
      • 
+
    • virtual void setRecord ( TQSqlRecord * record )
      • 
+
    • TQSqlRecord * record ()
      • 
+
    
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQDataView class provides read-only SQL forms.
+
     
+
+
+
     This class provides a form which displays SQL field data from a
+record buffer. Because TQDataView does not support editing it uses
+less resources than a TQDataBrowser. This class is well suited for
+displaying read-only data from a SQL database.
+
     If you want a to present your data in an editable form use
+TQDataBrowser; if you want a table-based presentation of your data
+use TQDataTable.
+
     The form is associated with the data view with setForm() and the
+record is associated with setRecord(). You can also pass a
+TQSqlRecord to the refresh() function which will set the record to
+the given record and read the record's fields into the form.
+
    See also Database Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQDataView::TQDataView ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags fl = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a data view which is a child of parent, called name, and with widget flags fl.
+
+
    TQDataView::~TQDataView ()
+
    
+Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
+
+
    void TQDataView::clearValues () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Clears the default form's values. If there is no default form,
+nothing happens. All the values are set to their 'zero state',
+e.g. 0 for numeric fields, "" for string fields.
+
+
    TQSqlForm * TQDataView::form ()
+
    
+Returns the default form used by the data view, or 0 if there is
+none.
+
     
    See also setForm().
+
+
    void TQDataView::readFields () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Causes the default form to read its fields from the record buffer.
+If there is no default form, or no record, nothing happens.
+
     
    See also setForm().
+
+
    TQSqlRecord * TQDataView::record ()
+
    
+Returns the default record used by the data view, or 0 if there is
+none.
+
     
    See also setRecord().
+
+
    void TQDataView::refresh ( TQSqlRecord * buf ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Causes the default form to display the contents of buf. If
+there is no default form, nothing happens.The buf also becomes
+the default record for all subsequent calls to readFields() and
+writefields(). This slot is equivalant to calling:
+
     
    +    myView.setRecord( record );
+    myView.readFields();
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also setRecord() and readFields().
+
+
    void TQDataView::setForm ( TQSqlForm * form ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the form used by the data view to form. If a record has
+already been assigned to the data view, the form will display that
+record's data.
+
     
    See also form().
+
+
    void TQDataView::setRecord ( TQSqlRecord * record ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the record used by the data view to record. If a form has
+already been assigned to the data view, the form will display the
+data from record in that form.
+
     
    See also record().
+
+
    void TQDataView::writeFields () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Causes the default form to write its fields to the record buffer.
+If there is no default form, or no record, nothing happens.
+
     
    See also setForm().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqdatetime.html b/doc/html/ntqdatetime.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..614c23be5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqdatetime.html
@@ -0,0 +1,393 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQDateTime Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQDateTime Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQDateTime class provides date and time functions.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqdatetime.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQDateTime ()
      • 
+
    • TQDateTime ( const TQDate & date )
      • 
+
    • TQDateTime ( const TQDate & date, const TQTime & time )
      • 
+
    • bool isNull () const
      • 
+
    • bool isValid () const
      • 
+
    • TQDate date () const
      • 
+
    • TQTime time () const
      • 
+
    • uint toTime_t () const
      • 
+
    • void setDate ( const TQDate & date )
      • 
+
    • void setTime ( const TQTime & time )
      • 
+
    • void setTime_t ( uint secsSince1Jan1970UTC )
      • 
+
    • void setTime_t ( uint secsSince1Jan1970UTC, TQt::TimeSpec ts )
      • 
+
    • TQString toString ( TQt::DateFormat f = TQt::TextDate ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString toString ( const TQString & format ) const
      • 
+
    • TQDateTime addDays ( int ndays ) const
      • 
+
    • TQDateTime addMonths ( int nmonths ) const
      • 
+
    • TQDateTime addYears ( int nyears ) const
      • 
+
    • TQDateTime addSecs ( int nsecs ) const
      • 
+
    • int daysTo ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
      • 
+
    • int secsTo ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
      • 
+
    • bool operator== ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
      • 
+
    • bool operator!= ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
      • 
+
    • bool operator< ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
      • 
+
    • bool operator<= ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
      • 
+
    • bool operator> ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
      • 
+
    • bool operator>= ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
      • 
+
    
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
      
+
    • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQDateTime & dt )
      • 
+
    • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQDateTime & dt )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
+The TQDateTime class provides date and time functions.
+
     
+
+
     A TQDateTime object contains a calendar date and a clock time (a
+"datetime"). It is a combination of the TQDate and TQTime classes.
+It can read the current datetime from the system clock. It
+provides functions for comparing datetimes and for manipulating a
+datetime by adding a number of seconds, days, months or years.
+
     A TQDateTime object is typically created either by giving a date
+and time explicitly in the constructor, or by using the static
+function currentDateTime(), which returns a TQDateTime object set
+to the system clock's time. The date and time can be changed with
+setDate() and setTime(). A datetime can also be set using the
+setTime_t() function, which takes a POSIX-standard "number of
+seconds since 00:00:00 on January 1, 1970" value. The fromString()
+function returns a TQDateTime given a string and a date format
+which is used to interpret the date within the string.
+
     The date() and time() functions provide access to the date and
+time parts of the datetime. The same information is provided in
+textual format by the toString() function.
+
     TQDateTime provides a full set of operators to compare two
+TQDateTime objects where smaller means earlier and larger means
+later.
+
     You can increment (or decrement) a datetime by a given number of
+seconds using addSecs() or days using addDays(). Similarly you can
+use addMonths() and addYears(). The daysTo() function returns the
+number of days between two datetimes, and secsTo() returns the
+number of seconds between two datetimes.
+
     The range of a datetime object is constrained to the ranges of the
+TQDate and TQTime objects which it embodies.
+
     
    See also TQDate, TQTime, TQDateTimeEdit, and Time and Date.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQDateTime::TQDateTime ()
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a null datetime (i.e. null date and null time). A null
+datetime is invalid, since the date is invalid.
+
     
    See also isValid().
+
+
    TQDateTime::TQDateTime ( const TQDate & date )
+
    
+Constructs a datetime with date date and null (but valid) time
+(00:00:00.000).
+
+
    TQDateTime::TQDateTime ( const TQDate & date, const TQTime & time )
+
    
+Constructs a datetime with date date and time time.
+
+
    TQDateTime TQDateTime::addDays ( int ndays ) const
+
    
+Returns a TQDateTime object containing a datetime ndays days
+later than the datetime of this object (or earlier if ndays is
+negative).
+
     
    See also daysTo(), addMonths(), addYears(), and addSecs().
+
+
    TQDateTime TQDateTime::addMonths ( int nmonths ) const
+
    
+Returns a TQDateTime object containing a datetime nmonths months
+later than the datetime of this object (or earlier if nmonths
+is negative).
+
     
    See also daysTo(), addDays(), addYears(), and addSecs().
+
+
    TQDateTime TQDateTime::addSecs ( int nsecs ) const
+
    
+Returns a TQDateTime object containing a datetime nsecs seconds
+later than the datetime of this object (or earlier if nsecs is
+negative).
+
     
    See also secsTo(), addDays(), addMonths(), and addYears().
+
+
    Example: listviews/listviews.cpp.
+
    TQDateTime TQDateTime::addYears ( int nyears ) const
+
    
+Returns a TQDateTime object containing a datetime nyears years
+later than the datetime of this object (or earlier if nyears is
+negative).
+
     
    See also daysTo(), addDays(), addMonths(), and addSecs().
+
+
    TQDateTime TQDateTime::currentDateTime ( TQt::TimeSpec ts ) [static]
+
    
+Returns the current datetime, as reported by the system clock, for the
+TimeSpec ts. The default TimeSpec is LocalTime.
+
     
    See also TQDate::currentDate(), TQTime::currentTime(), and TQt::TimeSpec.
+
+
    Example: listviews/listviews.cpp.
+
    TQDateTime TQDateTime::currentDateTime () [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the current datetime, as reported by the system clock.
+
     
    See also TQDate::currentDate() and TQTime::currentTime().
+
+
    TQDate TQDateTime::date () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the date part of the datetime.
+
     
    See also setDate() and time().
+
+
    int TQDateTime::daysTo ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
+
    
+Returns the number of days from this datetime to dt (which is
+negative if dt is earlier than this datetime).
+
     
    See also addDays() and secsTo().
+
+
    TQDateTime TQDateTime::fromString ( const TQString & s, TQt::DateFormat f = TQt::TextDate ) [static]
+
    
+Returns the TQDateTime represented by the string s, using the
+format f, or an invalid datetime if this is not possible.
+
     Note for TQt::TextDate: It is recommended that you use the
+English short month names (e.g. "Jan"). Although localized month
+names can also be used, they depend on the user's locale settings.
+
     Warning: Note that TQt::LocalDate cannot be used here.
+
+
    bool TQDateTime::isNull () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if both the date and the time are null; otherwise
+returns FALSE. A null datetime is invalid.
+
     
    See also TQDate::isNull() and TQTime::isNull().
+
+
    bool TQDateTime::isValid () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if both the date and the time are valid; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also TQDate::isValid() and TQTime::isValid().
+
+
    bool TQDateTime::operator!= ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this datetime is different from dt; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also operator==().
+
+
    bool TQDateTime::operator< ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this datetime is earlier than dt; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQDateTime::operator<= ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this datetime is earlier than or equal to dt;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQDateTime::operator== ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this datetime is equal to dt; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also operator!=().
+
+
    bool TQDateTime::operator> ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this datetime is later than dt; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQDateTime::operator>= ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this datetime is later than or equal to dt;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    int TQDateTime::secsTo ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
+
    
+Returns the number of seconds from this datetime to dt (which
+is negative if dt is earlier than this datetime).
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQDateTime dt = TQDateTime::currentDateTime();
+    TQDateTime xmas( TQDate(dt.date().year(),12,24), TQTime(17,00) );
+    qDebug( "There are %d seconds to Christmas", dt.secsTo(xmas) );
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also addSecs(), daysTo(), and TQTime::secsTo().
+
+
    void TQDateTime::setDate ( const TQDate & date )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the date part of this datetime to date.
+
     
    See also date() and setTime().
+
+
    void TQDateTime::setTime ( const TQTime & time )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the time part of this datetime to time.
+
     
    See also time() and setDate().
+
+
    void TQDateTime::setTime_t ( uint secsSince1Jan1970UTC, TQt::TimeSpec ts )
+
    
+Sets the date and time to ts time (TQt::LocalTime or TQt::UTC) given the number of seconds that have passed since
+1970-01-01T00:00:00, Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). On systems
+that do not support timezones this function will behave as if
+local time were UTC.
+
     On Windows, only a subset of secsSince1Jan1970UTC values are
+supported, as Windows starts counting from 1980.
+
     
    See also toTime_t().
+
+
    void TQDateTime::setTime_t ( uint secsSince1Jan1970UTC )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Convenience function that sets the date and time to local time
+based on the given UTC time.
+
+
    TQTime TQDateTime::time () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the time part of the datetime.
+
     
    See also setTime() and date().
+
+
    TQString TQDateTime::toString ( const TQString & format ) const
+
    
+Returns the datetime as a string. The format parameter
+determines the format of the result string.
+
     These expressions may be used for the date:
+
     
    
+
     Expression Output
+
     d the day as number without a leading zero (1-31)
+
     dd the day as number with a leading zero (01-31)
+
     ddd
+the abbreviated localized day name (e.g. 'Mon'..'Sun').
+Uses TQDate::shortDayName().
+
     dddd
+the long localized day name (e.g. 'Monday'..'Sunday').
+Uses TQDate::longDayName().
+
     M the month as number without a leading zero (1-12)
+
     MM the month as number with a leading zero (01-12)
+
     MMM
+the abbreviated localized month name (e.g. 'Jan'..'Dec').
+Uses TQDate::shortMonthName().
+
     MMMM
+the long localized month name (e.g. 'January'..'December').
+Uses TQDate::longMonthName().
+
     yy the year as two digit number (00-99)
+
     yyyy the year as four digit number (1752-8000)
+
    
+
     These expressions may be used for the time:
+
     
    
+
     Expression Output
+
     h
+the hour without a leading zero (0..23 or 1..12 if AM/PM display)
+
     hh
+the hour with a leading zero (00..23 or 01..12 if AM/PM display)
+
     m the minute without a leading zero (0..59)
+
     mm the minute with a leading zero (00..59)
+
     s the second whithout a leading zero (0..59)
+
     ss the second whith a leading zero (00..59)
+
     z the milliseconds without leading zeroes (0..999)
+
     zzz the milliseconds with leading zeroes (000..999)
+
     AP
+use AM/PM display. AP will be replaced by either "AM" or "PM".
+
     ap
+use am/pm display. ap will be replaced by either "am" or "pm".
+
    
+
     All other input characters will be ignored.
+
     Example format strings (assumed that the TQDateTime is
+21st May 2001 14:13:09)
+
     
    
+
     Format Result
+
     dd.MM.yyyy	     21.05.2001
+
     ddd MMMM d yy    Tue May 21 01
+
     hh:mm:ss.zzz     14:13:09.042
+
     h:m:s ap	     2:13:9 pm
+
    
+
     If the datetime is an invalid datetime, then TQString::null will be returned.
+
     
    See also TQDate::toString() and TQTime::toString().
+
+
    TQString TQDateTime::toString ( TQt::DateFormat f = TQt::TextDate ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the datetime as a string. The f parameter determines
+the format of the string.
+
     If f is TQt::TextDate, the string format is "Wed May 20
+03:40:13 1998" (using TQDate::shortDayName(), TQDate::shortMonthName(),
+and TQTime::toString() to generate the string, so the day and month
+names will have localized names).
+
     If f is TQt::ISODate, the string format corresponds to the
+ISO 8601 extended specification for representations of dates and
+times, which is YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS.
+
     If f is TQt::LocalDate, the string format depends on the
+locale settings of the system.
+
     If the format f is invalid or the datetime is invalid, toString()
+returns a null string.
+
     
    See also TQDate::toString() and TQTime::toString().
+
+
    uint TQDateTime::toTime_t () const
+
    
+Returns the datetime as the number of seconds that have passed
+since 1970-01-01T00:00:00, Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
+
     On systems that do not support timezones, this function will
+behave as if local time were UTC.
+
     
    See also setTime_t().
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQDateTime & dt )
+
    
+
+
     Writes the datetime dt to the stream s.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQDateTime & dt )
+
    
+
+
     Reads a datetime from the stream s into dt.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqdatetimeedit.html b/doc/html/ntqdatetimeedit.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8fb65813c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqdatetimeedit.html
@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQDateTimeEdit Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQDateTimeEdit Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQDateTimeEdit class combines a TQDateEdit and TQTimeEdit
+widget into a single widget for editing datetimes.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqdatetimeedit.h>
+
    Inherits TQWidget.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
      
+
    • virtual void setDateTime ( const TQDateTime & dt )
      • 
+
    
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • TQDateTime dateTime - the editor's datetime value
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQDateTimeEdit class combines a TQDateEdit and TQTimeEdit
+widget into a single widget for editing datetimes.
+
     
+
+
+
     TQDateTimeEdit consists of a TQDateEdit and TQTimeEdit widget placed
+side by side and offers the functionality of both. The user can
+edit the date and time by using the keyboard or the arrow keys to
+increase/decrease date or time values. The Tab key can be used to
+move from section to section within the TQDateTimeEdit widget, and
+the user can be moved automatically when they complete a section
+using setAutoAdvance(). The datetime can be set with
+setDateTime().
+
     The date format is read from the system's locale settings. It is
+set to year, month, day order if that is not possible. See
+TQDateEdit::setOrder() to change this. Times appear in the order
+hours, minutes, seconds using the 24 hour clock.
+
     It is recommended that the TQDateTimeEdit is initialised with a
+datetime, e.g.
+
    +    TQDateTimeEdit *dateTimeEdit = new TQDateTimeEdit( TQDateTime::currentDateTime(), this );
+    dateTimeEdit->dateEdit()->setRange( TQDateTime::currentDate(),
+                                        TQDateTime::currentDate().addDays( 7 ) );
+    
    
+ 
+Here we've created a new TQDateTimeEdit set to the current date and
+time, and set the date to have a minimum date of now and a maximum
+date of a week from now.
+
     Terminology: A TQDateEdit widget consists of three 'sections', one
+each for the year, month and day. Similarly a TQTimeEdit consists
+of three sections, one each for the hour, minute and second. The
+character that separates each date section is specified with
+setDateSeparator(); similarly setTimeSeparator() is used for the
+time sections.
+
     
    Date Time Widgets
     
+
     
    See also TQDateEdit, TQTimeEdit, Advanced Widgets, and Time and Date.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQDateTimeEdit::TQDateTimeEdit ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs an empty datetime edit with parent parent and called
+name.
+
+
    TQDateTimeEdit::TQDateTimeEdit ( const TQDateTime & datetime, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Constructs a datetime edit with the initial value datetime,
+parent parent and called name.
+
+
    TQDateTimeEdit::~TQDateTimeEdit ()
+
    
+Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
+
+
    bool TQDateTimeEdit::autoAdvance () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if auto-advance is enabled, otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setAutoAdvance().
+
+
    TQDateEdit * TQDateTimeEdit::dateEdit ()
+
    
+
+
     Returns the internal widget used for editing the date part of the
+datetime.
+
+
    TQDateTime TQDateTimeEdit::dateTime () const
+
    Returns the editor's datetime value.
+See the "dateTime" property for details.
+
    void TQDateTimeEdit::setAutoAdvance ( bool advance ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the auto advance property of the editor to advance. If set
+to TRUE, the editor will automatically advance focus to the next
+date or time section if the user has completed a section.
+
+
    void TQDateTimeEdit::setDateTime ( const TQDateTime & dt ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the editor's datetime value to dt.
+See the "dateTime" property for details.
+
    TQTimeEdit * TQDateTimeEdit::timeEdit ()
+
    
+
+
     Returns the internal widget used for editing the time part of the
+datetime.
+
+
    void TQDateTimeEdit::valueChanged ( const TQDateTime & datetime ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted every time the date or time changes. The datetime argument is the new datetime.
+
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    TQDateTime dateTime
    
+
    This property holds the editor's datetime value.
+
    The datetime edit's datetime which may be an invalid datetime.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setDateTime() and get this property's value with dateTime().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqdeepcopy.html b/doc/html/ntqdeepcopy.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3df2ba2e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqdeepcopy.html
@@ -0,0 +1,168 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQDeepCopy Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQDeepCopy Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQDeepCopy class is a template class which ensures that
+implicitly shared and explicitly shared classes reference unique
+data.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqdeepcopy.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQDeepCopy class is a template class which ensures that
+implicitly shared and explicitly shared classes reference unique
+data.
+
     
+
     
+
+
     Normally, shared copies reference the same data to optimize memory
+use and for maximum speed. In the example below, s1, s2, s3, s4 and s5 share data.
+
     
    +    // all 5 strings share the same data
+    TQString s1 = "abcd";
+    TQString s2 = s1;
+    TQString s3 = s2;
+    TQString s4 = s3;
+    TQString s5 = s2;
+    
    
+ 
+
     TQDeepCopy can be used several ways to ensure that an object
+references unique, unshared data. In the example below, s1, s2 and s5 share data, while neither s3 nor s4 share data.
+
    +    // s1, s2 and s5 share the same data, neither s3 nor s4 are shared
+    TQString s1 = "abcd";
+    TQString s2 = s1;
+    TQDeepCopy<TQString> s3 = s2;  // s3 is a deep copy of s2
+    TQString s4 = s3;             // s4 is a deep copy of s3
+    TQString s5 = s2;
+    
    
+ 
+
     In the example below, s1, s2 and s5 share data, and s3
+and s4 share data.
+
    +    // s1, s2 and s5 share the same data, s3 and s4 share the same data
+    TQString s1 = "abcd";
+    TQString s2 = s1;
+    TQString s3 = TQDeepCopy<TQString>( s2 );  // s3 is a deep copy of s2
+    TQString s4 = s3;                        // s4 is a shallow copy of s3
+    TQString s5 = s2;
+    
    
+ 
+
     TQDeepCopy can also provide safety in multithreaded applications
+that use shared classes. In the example below, the variable global_string is used safely since the data contained in global_string is always a deep copy. This ensures that all threads
+get a unique copy of the data, and that any assignments to global_string will result in a deep copy.
+
     
    +    TQDeepCopy<TQString> global_string;  // global string data
+    TQMutex global_mutex;               // mutex to protext global_string
+
+    ...
+
+    void setGlobalString( const TQString &str )
+    {
+        global_mutex.lock();
+        global_string = str;           // global_string is a deep copy of str
+        global_mutex.unlock();
+    }
+
+    ...
+
+    void MyThread::run()
+    {
+        global_mutex.lock();
+        TQString str = global_string;          // str is a deep copy of global_string
+        global_mutex.unlock();
+
+        // process the string data
+        ...
+
+        // update global_string
+        setGlobalString( str );
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     Warning: It is the application developer's responsibility to
+protect the object shared across multiple threads.
+
     The examples above use TQString, which is an implicitly shared
+class. The behavior of TQDeepCopy is the same when using explicitly
+shared classes like TQByteArray.
+
     Currently, TQDeepCopy works with the following classes:
+
    
+
     
    See also Thread Support in TQt, Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQDeepCopy::TQDeepCopy ()
+
    
+
+
     Constructs an empty instance of type T.
+
+
    TQDeepCopy::TQDeepCopy ( const T & t )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a deep copy of t.
+
+
    TQDeepCopy::operator T ()
+
    
+
+
     Returns a deep copy of the encapsulated data.
+
+
    TQDeepCopy<T> & TQDeepCopy::operator= ( const T & t )
+
    
+
+
     Assigns a deep copy of t.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqdesktopwidget.html b/doc/html/ntqdesktopwidget.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e404289c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqdesktopwidget.html
@@ -0,0 +1,202 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQDesktopWidget Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQDesktopWidget Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQDesktopWidget class provides access to screen information on multi-head systems.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqdesktopwidget.h>
+
    Inherits TQWidget.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQDesktopWidget class provides access to screen information on multi-head systems.
+
     
+
+
     Systems with more than one graphics card and monitor can manage the
+physical screen space available either as multiple desktops, or as a
+large virtual desktop, which usually has the size of the bounding
+rectangle of all the screens (see isVirtualDesktop()). For an
+application, one of the available screens is the primary screen, i.e.
+the screen where the main widget resides (see primaryScreen()). All
+windows opened in the context of the application must be
+constrained to the boundaries of the primary screen; for example,
+it would be inconvenient if a dialog box popped up on a different
+screen, or split over two screens.
+
     The TQDesktopWidget provides information about the geometry of the
+available screens with screenGeometry(). The number of screens
+available is returned by numScreens(). The screen number that a
+particular point or widget is located in is returned by
+screenNumber().
+
     Widgets provided by TQt use this class, for example, to place
+tooltips, menus and dialog boxes according to the parent or
+application widget.
+
     Applications can use this class to save window positions, or to place
+child widgets on one screen.
+
     
    Managing Multiple Screens
     
+
     In the illustration above, Application One's primary screen is
+screen 0, and App Two's primary screen is screen 1.
+
     
    See also Advanced Widgets and Environment Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQDesktopWidget::TQDesktopWidget ()
+
    
+Creates the desktop widget.
+
     If the system supports a virtual desktop, this widget will have
+the size of the virtual desktop; otherwise this widget will have
+the size of the primary screen.
+
     Instead of using TQDesktopWidget directly, use
+TQApplication::desktop().
+
+
    TQDesktopWidget::~TQDesktopWidget ()
+
    
+Destroy the object and free allocated resources.
+
+
    const TQRect & TQDesktopWidget::availableGeometry ( int screen = -1 ) const
+
    
+Returns the available geometry of the screen with index screen. What
+is available will be subrect of screenGeometry() based on what the
+platform decides is available (for example excludes the Dock and Menubar
+on Mac OS X, or the taskbar on Windows).
+
     
    See also screenNumber() and screenGeometry().
+
+
    const TQRect & TQDesktopWidget::availableGeometry ( TQWidget * widget ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the available geometry of the screen which contains widget.
+
     
    See also screenGeometry().
+
+
    const TQRect & TQDesktopWidget::availableGeometry ( const TQPoint & p ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the available geometry of the screen which contains p.
+
     
    See also screenGeometry().
+
+
    bool TQDesktopWidget::isVirtualDesktop () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the system manages the available screens in a
+virtual desktop; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     For virtual desktops, screen() will always return the same widget.
+The size of the virtual desktop is the size of this desktop
+widget.
+
+
    int TQDesktopWidget::numScreens () const
+
    
+Returns the number of available screens.
+
     
    See also primaryScreen().
+
+
    int TQDesktopWidget::primaryScreen () const
+
    
+Returns the index of the primary screen.
+
     
    See also numScreens().
+
+
    void TQDesktopWidget::resized ( int screen ) [signal]
+
     
+This signal is emitted when the size of screen changes.
+
+
    TQWidget * TQDesktopWidget::screen ( int screen = -1 )
+
    
+Returns a widget that represents the screen with index screen.
+This widget can be used to draw directly on the desktop, using an
+unclipped painter like this:
+
     
    +    TQPainter paint( TQApplication::desktop()->screen( 0 ), TRUE );
+    paint.draw...
+    ...
+    paint.end();
+    
    
+ 
+
     If the system uses a virtual desktop, the returned widget will
+have the geometry of the entire virtual desktop i.e. bounding
+every screen.
+
     
    See also primaryScreen(), numScreens(), and isVirtualDesktop().
+
+
    const TQRect & TQDesktopWidget::screenGeometry ( int screen = -1 ) const
+
    
+Returns the geometry of the screen with index screen.
+
     
    See also screenNumber().
+
+
    const TQRect & TQDesktopWidget::screenGeometry ( TQWidget * widget ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the geometry of the screen which contains widget.
+
+
    const TQRect & TQDesktopWidget::screenGeometry ( const TQPoint & p ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the geometry of the screen which contains p.
+
+
    int TQDesktopWidget::screenNumber ( TQWidget * widget = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns the index of the screen that contains the largest
+part of widget, or -1 if the widget not on a screen.
+
     
    See also primaryScreen().
+
+
    int TQDesktopWidget::screenNumber ( const TQPoint & point ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the index of the screen that contains point, or -1 if
+no screen contains the point.
+
     
    See also primaryScreen().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqdial.html b/doc/html/ntqdial.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..57fddbe1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqdial.html
@@ -0,0 +1,352 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQDial Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQDial Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQDial class provides a rounded range control (like a speedometer or potentiometer).
+More...
+
    #include <ntqdial.h>
+
    Inherits TQWidget and TQRangeControl.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • int lineStep - the current line step
      • 
+
    • int maxValue - the current maximum value
      • 
+
    • int minValue - the current minimum value
      • 
+
    • int notchSize - the current notch size  (read only)
      • 
+
    • double notchTarget - the target number of pixels between notches
      • 
+
    • bool notchesVisible - whether the notches are shown
      • 
+
    • int pageStep - the current page step
      • 
+
    • bool tracking - whether tracking is enabled
      • 
+
    • int value - the current dial value
      • 
+
    • bool wrapping - whether wrapping is enabled
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
     The TQDial class provides a rounded range control (like a speedometer or potentiometer).
+
     
+
+
     TQDial is used when the user needs to control a value within a
+program-definable range, and the range either wraps around
+(typically, 0..359 degrees) or the dialog layout needs a square
+widget.
+
     Both API- and UI-wise, the dial is very similar to a slider. Indeed, when wrapping() is FALSE (the default)
+there is no real difference between a slider and a dial. They
+have the same signals, slots and member functions, all of which do
+the same things. Which one you use depends only on your taste
+and on the application.
+
     The dial initially emits valueChanged() signals continuously while
+the slider is being moved; you can make it emit the signal less
+often by calling setTracking(FALSE). dialMoved() is emitted
+continuously even when tracking() is FALSE.
+
     The slider also emits dialPressed() and dialReleased() signals
+when the mouse button is pressed and released. But note that the
+dial's value can change without these signals being emitted; the
+keyboard and wheel can be used to change the value.
+
     Unlike the slider, TQDial attempts to draw a "nice" number of
+notches rather than one per lineStep(). If possible, the number
+of notches drawn is one per lineStep(), but if there aren't enough
+pixels to draw every one, TQDial will draw every second, third
+etc., notch. notchSize() returns the number of units per notch,
+hopefully a multiple of lineStep(); setNotchTarget() sets the
+target distance between neighbouring notches in pixels. The
+default is 3.75 pixels.
+
     Like the slider, the dial makes the TQRangeControl functions
+setValue(), addLine(), subtractLine(), addPage() and
+subtractPage() available as slots.
+
     The dial's keyboard interface is fairly simple: The left/up and
+right/down arrow keys move by lineStep(), page up and page down by
+pageStep() and Home and End to minValue() and maxValue().
+
      
+
     
    See also TQScrollBar, TQSpinBox, GUI Design Handbook: Slider, and Basic Widgets.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQDial::TQDial ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a dial called name with parent parent. f is
+propagated to the TQWidget constructor. It has the default range of
+a TQRangeControl.
+
+
    TQDial::TQDial ( int minValue, int maxValue, int pageStep, int value, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a dial called name with parent parent. The dial's
+value can never be smaller than minValue or greater than maxValue. Its page step size is pageStep, and its initial value
+is value.
+
     value is forced to be within the legal range.
+
+
    TQDial::~TQDial ()
+
    
+Destroys the dial.
+
+
    void TQDial::addLine () [slot]
+
    
+Increments the dial's value() by one lineStep().
+
+
    void TQDial::addPage () [slot]
+
    
+Increments the dial's value() by one pageStep() of steps.
+
+
    void TQDial::dialMoved ( int value ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the dial value changes. The
+frequency of this signal is not influenced by setTracking().
+
     
    See also valueChanged().
+
+
    void TQDial::dialPressed () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user begins mouse interaction with
+the dial.
+
     
    See also dialReleased().
+
+
    void TQDial::dialReleased () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user ends mouse interaction with
+the dial.
+
     
    See also dialPressed().
+
+
    int TQDial::lineStep () const
+
    Returns the current line step.
+See the "lineStep" property for details.
+
    int TQDial::maxValue () const
+
    Returns the current maximum value.
+See the "maxValue" property for details.
+
    int TQDial::minValue () const
+
    Returns the current minimum value.
+See the "minValue" property for details.
+
    int TQDial::notchSize () const
+
    Returns the current notch size.
+See the "notchSize" property for details.
+
    double TQDial::notchTarget () const
+
    Returns the target number of pixels between notches.
+See the "notchTarget" property for details.
+
    bool TQDial::notchesVisible () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the notches are shown; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "notchesVisible" property for details.
+
    int TQDial::pageStep () const
+
    Returns the current page step.
+See the "pageStep" property for details.
+
    void TQDial::rangeChange () [virtual protected]
+
    
+Reimplemented to ensure tick-marks are consistent with the new range.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQRangeControl.
+
    void TQDial::repaintScreen ( const TQRect * cr = 0 ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Paints the dial using clip region cr.
+
+
    void TQDial::setLineStep ( int )
+
    Sets the current line step.
+See the "lineStep" property for details.
+
    void TQDial::setMaxValue ( int )
+
    Sets the current maximum value.
+See the "maxValue" property for details.
+
    void TQDial::setMinValue ( int )
+
    Sets the current minimum value.
+See the "minValue" property for details.
+
    void TQDial::setNotchTarget ( double ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the target number of pixels between notches.
+See the "notchTarget" property for details.
+
    void TQDial::setNotchesVisible ( bool b ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets whether the notches are shown to b.
+See the "notchesVisible" property for details.
+
    void TQDial::setPageStep ( int )
+
    Sets the current page step.
+See the "pageStep" property for details.
+
    void TQDial::setTracking ( bool enable ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets whether tracking is enabled to enable.
+See the "tracking" property for details.
+
    void TQDial::setValue ( int ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the current dial value.
+See the "value" property for details.
+
    void TQDial::setWrapping ( bool on ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets whether wrapping is enabled to on.
+See the "wrapping" property for details.
+
    void TQDial::subtractLine () [slot]
+
    
+Decrements the dial's value() by one lineStep().
+
+
    void TQDial::subtractPage () [slot]
+
    
+Decrements the dial's value() by one pageStep() of steps.
+
+
    bool TQDial::tracking () const
+
    Returns TRUE if tracking is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "tracking" property for details.
+
    int TQDial::value () const
+
    Returns the current dial value.
+See the "value" property for details.
+
    void TQDial::valueChange () [virtual protected]
+
    
+Reimplemented to ensure the display is correct and to emit the
+valueChanged(int) signal when appropriate.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQRangeControl.
+
    void TQDial::valueChanged ( int value ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the dial's value changes. The
+frequency of this signal is influenced by setTracking().
+
+
    bool TQDial::wrapping () const
+
    Returns TRUE if wrapping is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "wrapping" property for details.
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    int lineStep
    
+
    This property holds the current line step.
+
    setLineStep() calls the virtual stepChange() function if the new
+line step is different from the previous setting.
+
     
    See also TQRangeControl::setSteps(), pageStep, and setRange().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setLineStep() and get this property's value with lineStep().
+
    int maxValue
    
+
    This property holds the current maximum value.
+
    When setting this property, the TQDial::minValue is adjusted if
+necessary to ensure that the range remains valid.
+
     
    See also setRange().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setMaxValue() and get this property's value with maxValue().
+
    int minValue
    
+
    This property holds the current minimum value.
+
    When setting this property, the TQDial::maxValue is adjusted if
+necessary to ensure that the range remains valid.
+
     
    See also setRange().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setMinValue() and get this property's value with minValue().
+
    int notchSize
    
+
    This property holds the current notch size.
+
    The notch size is in range control units, not pixels, and if
+possible it is a multiple of lineStep() that results in an
+on-screen notch size near notchTarget().
+
     
    See also notchTarget and lineStep.
+
+
    Get this property's value with notchSize().
+
    double notchTarget
    
+
    This property holds the target number of pixels between notches.
+
    The notch target is the number of pixels TQDial attempts to put
+between each notch.
+
     The actual size may differ from the target size.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setNotchTarget() and get this property's value with notchTarget().
+
    bool notchesVisible
    
+
    This property holds whether the notches are shown.
+
    If TRUE, the notches are shown. If FALSE (the default) notches are
+not shown.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setNotchesVisible() and get this property's value with notchesVisible().
+
    int pageStep
    
+
    This property holds the current page step.
+
    setPageStep() calls the virtual stepChange() function if the new
+page step is different from the previous setting.
+
     
    See also stepChange().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setPageStep() and get this property's value with pageStep().
+
    bool tracking
    
+
    This property holds whether tracking is enabled.
+
    If TRUE (the default), tracking is enabled. This means that the
+arrow can be moved using the mouse; otherwise the arrow cannot be
+moved with the mouse.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setTracking() and get this property's value with tracking().
+
    int value
    
+
    This property holds the current dial value.
+
    This is guaranteed to be within the range
+TQDial::minValue..TQDial::maxValue.
+
     
    See also minValue and maxValue.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setValue() and get this property's value with value().
+
    bool wrapping
    
+
    This property holds whether wrapping is enabled.
+
    If TRUE, wrapping is enabled. This means that the arrow can be
+turned around 360°. Otherwise there is some space at the bottom of
+the dial which is skipped by the arrow.
+
     This property's default is FALSE.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setWrapping() and get this property's value with wrapping().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqdialog.html b/doc/html/ntqdialog.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..beb7c7ffe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqdialog.html
@@ -0,0 +1,355 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQDialog Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQDialog Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQDialog class is the base class of dialog windows.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqdialog.h>
+
    Inherits TQWidget.
+
    Inherited by TQColorDialog, TQErrorMessage, TQFileDialog, TQFontDialog, TQInputDialog, TQMessageBox, TQMotifDialog, TQProgressDialog, TQTabDialog, and TQWizard.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • bool modal - whether show() should pop up the dialog as modal or modeless
      • 
+
    • bool sizeGripEnabled - whether the size grip is enabled
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Protected Slots
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQDialog class is the base class of dialog windows.
+
     
+
+
+
     A dialog window is a top-level window mostly used for short-term
+tasks and brief communications with the user. TQDialogs may be
+modal or modeless. TQDialogs support extensibility and can provide a return
+    value. They can have default
+    buttons. TQDialogs can also have a TQSizeGrip in their
+lower-right corner, using setSizeGripEnabled().
+
     Note that TQDialog uses the parent widget slightly differently from
+other classes in TQt. A dialog is always a top-level widget, but if
+it has a parent, its default location is centered on top of the
+parent's top-level widget (if it is not top-level itself). It will
+also share the parent's taskbar entry.
+
     
+
     Modal Dialogs
+
    
+
     A modal dialog is a dialog that blocks input to other
+visible windows in the same application. Users must finish
+interacting with the dialog and close it before they can access
+any other window in the application. Dialogs that are used to
+request a file name from the user or that are used to set
+application preferences are usually modal.
+
     The most common way to display a modal dialog is to call its
+exec() function. When the user closes the dialog, exec() will
+provide a useful return value. Typically we
+connect a default button, e.g. "OK", to the accept() slot and a
+"Cancel" button to the reject() slot, to get the dialog to close
+and return the appropriate value. Alternatively you can connect to
+the done() slot, passing it Accepted or Rejected.
+
     An alternative is to call setModal(TRUE), then show(). Unlike
+exec(), show() returns control to the caller immediately. Calling
+setModal(TRUE) is especially useful for progress dialogs, where
+the user must have the ability to interact with the dialog, e.g.
+to cancel a long running operation. If you use show() and
+setModal(TRUE) together you must call
+TQApplication::processEvents() periodically during processing to
+enable the user to interact with the dialog. (See TQProgressDialog.)
+
     
+
     Modeless Dialogs
+
    
+
     A modeless dialog is a dialog that operates
+independently of other windows in the same application. Find and
+replace dialogs in word-processors are often modeless to allow the
+user to interact with both the application's main window and with
+the dialog.
+
     Modeless dialogs are displayed using show(), which returns control
+to the caller immediately.
+
     
+
     Default button
+
    
+
     A dialog's default button is the button that's pressed when the
+user presses Enter (Return). This button is used to signify that
+the user accepts the dialog's settings and wants to close the
+dialog. Use TQPushButton::setDefault(), TQPushButton::isDefault()
+and TQPushButton::autoDefault() to set and control the dialog's
+default button.
+
     
+
     Escape Key
+
    
+
     If the user presses the Esc key in a dialog, TQDialog::reject()
+will be called. This will cause the window to close: the closeEvent cannot be ignored.
+
     
+
     Extensibility
+
    
+
     Extensibility is the ability to show the dialog in two ways: a
+partial dialog that shows the most commonly used options, and a
+full dialog that shows all the options. Typically an extensible
+dialog will initially appear as a partial dialog, but with a
+"More" toggle button. If the user presses the "More" button down,
+the full dialog will appear. The extension widget will be resized
+to its sizeHint(). If orientation is Horizontal the extension
+widget's height() will be expanded to the height() of the dialog.
+If the orientation is Vertical the extension widget's width()
+will be expanded to the width() of the dialog. Extensibility is
+controlled with setExtension(), setOrientation() and
+showExtension().
+
     
+
     Return value (modal dialogs)
+
    
+
     Modal dialogs are often used in situations where a return value is
+required, e.g. to indicate whether the user pressed "OK" or
+"Cancel". A dialog can be closed by calling the accept() or the
+reject() slots, and exec() will return Accepted or Rejected
+as appropriate. The exec() call returns the result of the dialog.
+The result is also available from result() if the dialog has not
+been destroyed. If the WDestructiveClose flag is set, the
+dialog is deleted after exec() returns.
+
     
+
     Examples
+
    
+
     A modal dialog.
+
     
+
+
            TQFileDialog *dlg = new TQFileDialog( workingDirectory,
+                TQString::null, 0, 0, TRUE );
+        dlg->setCaption( TQFileDialog::tr( "Open" ) );
+        dlg->setMode( TQFileDialog::ExistingFile );
+        TQString result;
+        if ( dlg->exec() == TQDialog::Accepted ) {
+            result = dlg->selectedFile();
+            workingDirectory = dlg->url();
+        }
+        delete dlg;
+        return result;
+
    
+
     A modeless dialog. After the show() call, control returns to the main
+event loop.
+
+
+
        int main( int argc, char **argv )
+    {
+        TQApplication a( argc, argv );
+
            int scale = 10;
+
            LifeDialog *life = new LifeDialog( scale );
+        a.setMainWidget( life );
+        life->setCaption("TQt Example - Life");
+        life->show();
+
            return a.exec();
+    }
+
    
+
     
    See also TQTabDialog, TQWidget, TQProgressDialog, GUI Design Handbook: Dialogs, Standard, Abstract Widget Classes, and Dialog Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQDialog::DialogCode
     
+
     The value returned by a modal dialog.
+
      
+
    • TQDialog::Accepted
+
    • TQDialog::Rejected
+
     
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    explicit TQDialog::TQDialog ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a dialog called name, with parent parent.
+
     A dialog is always a top-level widget, but if it has a parent, its
+default location is centered on top of the parent. It will also
+share the parent's taskbar entry.
+
     The widget flags f are passed on to the TQWidget constructor.
+If, for example, you don't want a What's This button in the titlebar
+of the dialog, pass WStyle_Customize | WStyle_NormalBorder |
+WStyle_Title | WStyle_SysMenu in f.
+
     Warning: In TQt 3.2, the modal flag is obsolete. There is now a
+setModal() function that can be used for obtaining a modal behavior
+when calling show(). This is rarely needed, because modal dialogs
+are usually invoked using exec(), which ignores the modal flag.
+
     
    See also TQWidget::setWFlags() and TQt::WidgetFlags.
+
+
    TQDialog::~TQDialog ()
+
    
+Destroys the TQDialog, deleting all its children.
+
+
    void TQDialog::accept () [virtual protected slot]
+
    
+Hides the modal dialog and sets the result code to Accepted.
+
     
    See also reject() and done().
+
+
    Examples: chart/setdataform.cpp and distributor/distributor.ui.h.
+
    void TQDialog::done ( int r ) [virtual protected slot]
+
     Closes the dialog and sets its result code to r. If this dialog
+is shown with exec(), done() causes the local event loop to finish,
+and exec() to return r.
+
     As with TQWidget::close(), done() deletes the dialog if the WDestructiveClose flag is set. If the dialog is the application's
+main widget, the application terminates. If the dialog is the
+last window closed, the TQApplication::lastWindowClosed() signal is
+emitted.
+
     
    See also accept(), reject(), TQApplication::mainWidget(), and TQApplication::quit().
+
+
    int TQDialog::exec () [slot]
+
    
+Shows the dialog as a modal dialog,
+blocking until the user closes it. The function returns a DialogCode result.
+
     Users cannot interact with any other window in the same
+application until they close the dialog.
+
     
    See also show() and result().
+
+
    Examples: chart/chartform.cpp, dialog/mainwindow.cpp, i18n/main.cpp, network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h, network/networkprotocol/view.cpp, qdir/qdir.cpp, and wizard/main.cpp.
+
    TQWidget * TQDialog::extension () const
+
    
+Returns the dialog's extension or 0 if no extension has been
+defined.
+
     
    See also setExtension().
+
+
    bool TQDialog::isModal () const
+
    Returns TRUE if show() should pop up the dialog as modal or modeless; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "modal" property for details.
+
    bool TQDialog::isSizeGripEnabled () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the size grip is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "sizeGripEnabled" property for details.
+
    Orientation TQDialog::orientation () const
+
    
+Returns the dialog's extension orientation.
+
     
    See also setOrientation().
+
+
    void TQDialog::reject () [virtual protected slot]
+
    
+Hides the modal dialog and sets the result code to Rejected.
+
     
    See also accept() and done().
+
+
    int TQDialog::result () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the modal dialog's result code, Accepted or Rejected.
+
     Do not call this function if the dialog was constructed with the WDestructiveClose flag.
+
+
    void TQDialog::setExtension ( TQWidget * extension )
+
    
+Sets the widget, extension, to be the dialog's extension,
+deleting any previous extension. The dialog takes ownership of the
+extension. Note that if 0 is passed any existing extension will be
+deleted.
+
     This function must only be called while the dialog is hidden.
+
     
    See also showExtension(), setOrientation(), and extension().
+
+
    void TQDialog::setModal ( bool modal )
+
    Sets whether show() should pop up the dialog as modal or modeless to modal.
+See the "modal" property for details.
+
    void TQDialog::setOrientation ( Orientation orientation )
+
    
+If orientation is Horizontal, the extension will be displayed
+to the right of the dialog's main area. If orientation is Vertical, the extension will be displayed below the dialog's main
+area.
+
     
    See also orientation() and setExtension().
+
+
    void TQDialog::setResult ( int i ) [protected]
+
    
+
+
     Sets the modal dialog's result code to i.
+
+
    void TQDialog::setSizeGripEnabled ( bool )
+
    Sets whether the size grip is enabled.
+See the "sizeGripEnabled" property for details.
+
    void TQDialog::show () [virtual]
+
    
+Shows the dialog as a modeless dialog.
+Control returns immediately to the calling code.
+
     The dialog will be modal or modeless according to the value
+of the modal property.
+
     
    See also exec() and modal.
+
+
    Examples: movies/main.cpp, regexptester/main.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, and sql/overview/form1/main.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
+
    void TQDialog::showExtension ( bool showIt ) [protected slot]
+
    
+If showIt is TRUE, the dialog's extension is shown; otherwise the
+extension is hidden.
+
     This slot is usually connected to the TQButton::toggled() signal
+of a TQPushButton.
+
     A dialog with a visible extension is not resizeable.
+
     
    See also show(), setExtension(), and setOrientation().
+
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    bool modal
     
    This property holds whether show() should pop up the dialog as modal or modeless.
+
    By default, this property is false and show() pops up the dialog as
+modeless.
+
     exec() ignores the value of this property and always pops up the
+dialog as modal.
+
     
    See also show() and exec().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setModal() and get this property's value with isModal().
+
    bool sizeGripEnabled
    
+
    This property holds whether the size grip is enabled.
+
    A TQSizeGrip is placed in the bottom right corner of the dialog when this
+property is enabled. By default, the size grip is disabled.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setSizeGripEnabled() and get this property's value with isSizeGripEnabled().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqdict.html b/doc/html/ntqdict.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1ef14852f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqdict.html
@@ -0,0 +1,399 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQDict Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQDict Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQDict class is a template class that provides a
+dictionary based on TQString keys.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqdict.h>
+
    Inherits TQPtrCollection.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQDict ( int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • TQDict ( const TQDict<type> & dict )
      • 
+
    • ~TQDict ()
      • 
+
    • TQDict<type> & operator= ( const TQDict<type> & dict )
      • 
+
    • virtual uint count () const
      • 
+
    • uint size () const
      • 
+
    • bool isEmpty () const
      • 
+
    • void insert ( const TQString & key, const type * item )
      • 
+
    • void replace ( const TQString & key, const type * item )
      • 
+
    • bool remove ( const TQString & key )
      • 
+
    • type * take ( const TQString & key )
      • 
+
    • type * find ( const TQString & key ) const
      • 
+
    • type * operator[] ( const TQString & key ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual void clear ()
      • 
+
    • void resize ( uint newsize )
      • 
+
    • void statistics () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Important Inherited Members
    
+
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • virtual TQDataStream & read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item )
      • 
+
    • virtual TQDataStream & write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item ) const
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQDict class is a template class that provides a
+dictionary based on TQString keys.
+
     
+
+
+
     
+
     TQMap is an STL-compatible alternative to this class.
+
     TQDict is implemented as a template class. Define a template
+instance TQDict<X> to create a dictionary that operates on
+pointers to X (X *).
+
     A dictionary is a collection of key-value pairs. The key is a
+TQString used for insertion, removal and lookup. The value is a
+pointer. Dictionaries provide very fast insertion and lookup.
+
     If you want to use non-Unicode, plain 8-bit char* keys, use the
+TQAsciiDict template. A TQDict has the same performance as a
+TQAsciiDict. If you want to have a dictionary that maps TQStrings to
+TQStrings use TQMap.
+
     The size() of the dictionary is very important. In order to get
+good performance, you should use a suitably large prime number.
+Suitable means equal to or larger than the maximum expected number
+of dictionary items. Size is set in the constructor but may be
+changed with resize().
+
     Items are inserted with insert(); 0 pointers cannot be inserted.
+Items are removed with remove(). All the items in a dictionary can
+be removed with clear(). The number of items in the dictionary is
+returned by count(). If the dictionary contains no items isEmpty()
+returns TRUE. You can change an item's value with replace(). Items
+are looked up with operator[](), or with find() which return a
+pointer to the value or 0 if the given key does not exist. You can
+take an item out of the dictionary with take().
+
     Calling setAutoDelete(TRUE) for a dictionary tells it to delete
+items that are removed. The default behaviour is not to delete
+items when they are removed.
+
     When an item is inserted, the key is converted (hashed) to an
+integer index into an internal hash array. This makes lookup very
+fast.
+
     Items with equal keys are allowed. When inserting two items with
+the same key, only the last inserted item will be accessible (last
+in, first out) until it is removed.
+
     The TQDictIterator class can traverse the dictionary, but only in
+an arbitrary order. Multiple iterators may independently traverse
+the same dictionary.
+
     When inserting an item into a dictionary, only the pointer is
+copied, not the item itself, i.e. a shallow copy is made. It is
+possible to make the dictionary copy all of the item's data (a
+deep copy) when an item is inserted. insert() calls the virtual
+function TQPtrCollection::newItem() for the item to be inserted.
+Inherit a dictionary and reimplement newItem() if you want deep
+copies.
+
     When removing a dictionary item, the virtual function
+TQPtrCollection::deleteItem() is called. TQDict's default
+implementation is to delete the item if auto-deletion is enabled.
+
     Example #1:
+
    +    TQDict<TQLineEdit> fields; // TQString keys, TQLineEdit* values
+    fields.insert( "forename", new TQLineEdit( this ) );
+    fields.insert( "surname", new TQLineEdit( this ) );
+
+    fields["forename"]->setText( "Homer" );
+    fields["surname"]->setText( "Simpson" );
+
+    TQDictIterator<TQLineEdit> it( fields ); // See TQDictIterator
+    for( ; it.current(); ++it )
+        cout << it.currentKey() << ": " << it.current()->text() << endl;
+    cout << endl;
+
+    if ( fields["forename"] && fields["surname"] )
+        cout << fields["forename"]->text() << " " 
+            << fields["surname"]->text() << endl;  // Prints "Homer Simpson"
+
+    fields.remove( "forename" ); // Does not delete the line edit
+    if ( ! fields["forename"] )
+        cout << "forename is not in the dictionary" << endl;
+    
    
+ 
+In this example we use a dictionary to keep track of the line
+edits we're using. We insert each line edit into the dictionary
+with a unique name and then access the line edits via the
+dictionary. 
+
     Example #2:
+
    +    TQStringList styleList = TQStyleFactory::styles();
+    styleList.sort();
+    TQDict<int> letterDict( 17, FALSE );
+    for ( TQStringList::Iterator it = styleList.begin(); it != styleList.end(); ++it ) {
+        TQString styleName = *it;
+        TQString styleAccel = styleName;
+        if ( letterDict[styleAccel.left(1)] ) {
+            for ( uint i = 0; i < styleAccel.length(); i++ ) {
+                if ( ! letterDict[styleAccel.mid( i, 1 )] ) {
+                    styleAccel = styleAccel.insert( i, '&' );
+                    letterDict.insert(styleAccel.mid( i, 1 ), (const int *)1);
+                    break;
+                }
+            }
+        } else {
+            styleAccel = "&" + styleAccel;
+            letterDict.insert(styleAccel.left(1), (const int *)1);
+        }
+        (void) new TQAction( styleName, TQIconSet(), styleAccel, parent );
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+In the example we are using the dictionary to provide fast random
+access to the keys, and we don't care what the values are. The
+example is used to generate a menu of TQStyles, each with a unique
+accelerator key (or no accelerator if there are no unused letters
+left).
+
     We first obtain the list of available styles, then sort them so
+that the menu items will be ordered alphabetically. Next we create
+a dictionary of int pointers. The keys in the dictionary are each
+one character long, representing letters that have been used for
+accelerators. We iterate through our list of style names. If the
+first letter of the style name is in the dictionary, i.e. has been
+used, we iterate over all the characters in the style name to see
+if we can find a letter that hasn't been used. If we find an
+unused letter we put the accelerator ampersand (&) in front of it
+and add that letter to the dictionary. If we can't find an unused
+letter the style will simply have no accelerator. If the first
+letter of the style name is not in the dictionary we use it for
+the accelerator and add it to the dictionary. Finally we create a
+TQAction for each style.
+
     
    See also TQDictIterator, TQAsciiDict, TQIntDict, TQPtrDict, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQDict::TQDict ( int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a dictionary optimized for less than size entries.
+
     We recommend setting size to a suitably large prime number
+(e.g. a prime that's slightly larger than the expected number of
+entries). This makes the hash distribution better which will lead
+to faster lookup.
+
     If caseSensitive is TRUE (the default), keys which differ only
+by case are considered different.
+
+
    TQDict::TQDict ( const TQDict<type> & dict )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a copy of dict.
+
     Each item in dict is inserted into this dictionary. Only the
+pointers are copied (shallow copy).
+
+
    TQDict::~TQDict ()
+
    
+
+
     Removes all items from the dictionary and destroys it. If
+setAutoDelete() is TRUE, each value is deleted. All iterators that
+access this dictionary will be reset.
+
     
    See also setAutoDelete().
+
+
    bool TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE.
+
     
    See also setAutoDelete().
+
+
    void TQDict::clear () [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Removes all items from the dictionary.
+
     The removed items are deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
+
     All dictionary iterators that operate on the dictionary are reset.
+
     
    See also remove(), take(), and setAutoDelete().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
+
    uint TQDict::count () const [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of items in the dictionary.
+
     
    See also isEmpty().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
+
    type * TQDict::find ( const TQString & key ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the item with key key, or 0 if the key does not exist
+in the dictionary.
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most
+recently inserted item will be found.
+
     Equivalent to the [] operator.
+
     
    See also operator[]().
+
+
    void TQDict::insert ( const TQString & key, const type * item )
+
    
+
+
     Inserts the key key with value item into the dictionary.
+
     Multiple items can have the same key, in which case only the last
+item will be accessible using operator[]().
+
     item may not be 0.
+
     
    See also replace().
+
+
    Example: themes/themes.cpp.
+
    bool TQDict::isEmpty () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty, i.e. count() == 0;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also count().
+
+
    TQDict<type> & TQDict::operator= ( const TQDict<type> & dict )
+
    
+
+
     Assigns dict to this dictionary and returns a reference to this
+dictionary.
+
     This dictionary is first cleared, then each item in dict is
+inserted into this dictionary. Only the pointers are copied
+(shallow copy), unless newItem() has been reimplemented.
+
+
    type * TQDict::operator[] ( const TQString & key ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the item with key key, or 0 if the key does not
+exist in the dictionary.
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most
+recently inserted item will be found.
+
     Equivalent to the find() function.
+
     
    See also find().
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQDict::read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     Reads a dictionary item from the stream s and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
     The default implementation sets item to 0.
+
     
    See also write().
+
+
    bool TQDict::remove ( const TQString & key )
+
    
+
+
     Removes the item with key from the dictionary. Returns TRUE if
+successful, i.e. if the item is in the dictionary; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the last item
+that was inserted will be removed.
+
     The removed item is deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
+
     All dictionary iterators that refer to the removed item will be
+set to point to the next item in the dictionary's traversal order.
+
     
    See also take(), clear(), and setAutoDelete().
+
+
    void TQDict::replace ( const TQString & key, const type * item )
+
    
+
+
     Replaces the value of the key, key with item.
+
     If the item does not already exist, it will be inserted.
+
     item may not be 0.
+
     Equivalent to:
+
    +        TQDict<char> dict;
+            ...
+        if ( dict.find( key ) )
+            dict.remove( key );
+        dict.insert( key, item );
+    
    
+ 
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the last item
+that was inserted will be replaced.
+
     
    See also insert().
+
+
    void TQDict::resize ( uint newsize )
+
    
+
+
     Changes the size of the hash table to newsize. The contents of
+the dictionary are preserved, but all iterators on the dictionary
+become invalid.
+
+
    void TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if enable is
+TRUE and to never delete them if enable is FALSE.
+
     If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are
+deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient
+if the collection has the only pointer to the items.
+
     The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be
+careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself
+with two collections deleting the same items.
+
     Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions
+in subclasses. For example, a subclass that has a remove()
+function will remove the item from its data structure, and if
+auto-delete is enabled, will also delete the item.
+
     
    See also autoDelete().
+
+
    Examples: grapher/grapher.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, and table/bigtable/main.cpp.
+
    uint TQDict::size () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the size of the internal hash array (as specified in the
+constructor).
+
     
    See also count().
+
+
    void TQDict::statistics () const
+
    
+
+
     Debugging-only function that prints out the dictionary
+distribution using qDebug().
+
+
    type * TQDict::take ( const TQString & key )
+
    
+
+
     Takes the item with key out of the dictionary without deleting
+it (even if auto-deletion is enabled).
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the last item
+that was inserted will be taken.
+
     Returns a pointer to the item taken out, or 0 if the key does not
+exist in the dictionary.
+
     All dictionary iterators that refer to the taken item will be set
+to point to the next item in the dictionary traversal order.
+
     
    See also remove(), clear(), and setAutoDelete().
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQDict::write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item ) const [virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     Writes a dictionary item to the stream s and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
     
    See also read().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqdir.html b/doc/html/ntqdir.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..22feca597
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqdir.html
@@ -0,0 +1,818 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQDir Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQDir Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQDir class provides access to directory structures and their contents in a platform-independent way.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqdir.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • enum FilterSpec { Dirs = 0x001, Files = 0x002, Drives = 0x004, NoSymLinks = 0x008, All = 0x007, TypeMask = 0x00F, Readable = 0x010, Writable = 0x020, Executable = 0x040, RWEMask = 0x070, Modified = 0x080, Hidden = 0x100, System = 0x200, AccessMask = 0x3F0, DefaultFilter = -1 }
      • 
+
    • enum SortSpec { Name = 0x00, Time = 0x01, Size = 0x02, Unsorted = 0x03, SortByMask = 0x03, DirsFirst = 0x04, Reversed = 0x08, IgnoreCase = 0x10, LocaleAware = 0x20, DefaultSort = -1 }
      • 
+
    • TQDir ()
      • 
+
    • TQDir ( const TQString & path, const TQString & nameFilter = TQString::null, int sortSpec = Name | IgnoreCase, int filterSpec = All )
      • 
+
    • TQDir ( const TQDir & d )
      • 
+
    • virtual ~TQDir ()
      • 
+
    • TQDir & operator= ( const TQDir & d )
      • 
+
    • TQDir & operator= ( const TQString & path )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setPath ( const TQString & path )
      • 
+
    • virtual TQString path () const
      • 
+
    • virtual TQString absPath () const
      • 
+
    • virtual TQString canonicalPath () const
      • 
+
    • virtual TQString dirName () const
      • 
+
    • virtual TQString filePath ( const TQString & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual TQString absFilePath ( const TQString & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual bool cd ( const TQString & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • virtual bool cdUp ()
      • 
+
    • TQString nameFilter () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setNameFilter ( const TQString & nameFilter )
      • 
+
    • FilterSpec filter () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setFilter ( int filterSpec )
      • 
+
    • SortSpec sorting () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setSorting ( int sortSpec )
      • 
+
    • bool matchAllDirs () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setMatchAllDirs ( bool enable )
      • 
+
    • uint count () const
      • 
+
    • TQString operator[] ( int index ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual TQStrList encodedEntryList ( int filterSpec = DefaultFilter, int sortSpec = DefaultSort ) const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • virtual TQStrList encodedEntryList ( const TQString & nameFilter, int filterSpec = DefaultFilter, int sortSpec = DefaultSort ) const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • virtual TQStringList entryList ( int filterSpec = DefaultFilter, int sortSpec = DefaultSort ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual TQStringList entryList ( const TQString & nameFilter, int filterSpec = DefaultFilter, int sortSpec = DefaultSort ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual const TQFileInfoList * entryInfoList ( int filterSpec = DefaultFilter, int sortSpec = DefaultSort ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual const TQFileInfoList * entryInfoList ( const TQString & nameFilter, int filterSpec = DefaultFilter, int sortSpec = DefaultSort ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual bool mkdir ( const TQString & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual bool rmdir ( const TQString & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual bool isReadable () const
      • 
+
    • virtual bool exists () const
      • 
+
    • virtual bool isRoot () const
      • 
+
    • virtual bool isRelative () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void convertToAbs ()
      • 
+
    • virtual bool operator== ( const TQDir & d ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual bool operator!= ( const TQDir & d ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual bool remove ( const TQString & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • virtual bool rename ( const TQString & oldName, const TQString & newName, bool acceptAbsPaths = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • virtual bool exists ( const TQString & name, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • void refresh () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
+The TQDir class provides access to directory structures and their contents in a platform-independent way.
+
     
+
+
     A TQDir is used to manipulate path names, access information
+regarding paths and files, and manipulate the underlying file
+system.
+
     A TQDir can point to a file using either a relative or an absolute
+path. Absolute paths begin with the directory separator "/"
+(optionally preceded by a drive specification under Windows). If
+you always use "/" as a directory separator, TQt will translate
+your paths to conform to the underlying operating system. Relative
+file names begin with a directory name or a file name and specify
+a path relative to the current directory.
+
     The "current" path refers to the application's working directory.
+A TQDir's own path is set and retrieved with setPath() and path().
+
     An example of an absolute path is the string "/tmp/quartz", a
+relative path might look like "src/fatlib". You can use the
+function isRelative() to check if a TQDir is using a relative or an
+absolute file path. Call convertToAbs() to convert a relative TQDir
+to an absolute one. For a simplified path use cleanDirPath(). To
+obtain a path which has no symbolic links or redundant ".."
+elements use canonicalPath(). The path can be set with setPath(),
+and changed with cd() and cdUp().
+
     TQDir provides several static functions, for example, setCurrent()
+to set the application's working directory and currentDirPath() to
+retrieve the application's working directory. Access to some
+common paths is provided with the static functions, current(),
+home() and root() which return TQDir objects or currentDirPath(),
+homeDirPath() and rootDirPath() which return the path as a string.
+If you want to know about your application's path use
+TQApplication::applicationDirPath().
+
     The number of entries in a directory is returned by count().
+Obtain a string list of the names of all the files and directories
+in a directory with entryList(). If you prefer a list of TQFileInfo
+pointers use entryInfoList(). Both these functions can apply a
+name filter, an attributes filter (e.g. read-only, files not
+directories, etc.), and a sort order. The filters and sort may be
+set with calls to setNameFilter(), setFilter() and setSorting().
+They may also be specified in the entryList() and
+entryInfoList()'s arguments.
+
     Create a new directory with mkdir(), rename a directory with
+rename() and remove an existing directory with rmdir(). Remove a
+file with remove(). You can interrogate a directory with exists(),
+isReadable() and isRoot().
+
     To get a path with a filename use filePath(), and to get a
+directory name use dirName(); neither of these functions checks
+for the existence of the file or directory.
+
     The list of root directories is provided by drives(); on Unix
+systems this returns a list containing one root directory, "/"; on
+Windows the list will usually contain "C:/", and possibly "D:/",
+etc.
+
     It is easiest to work with "/" separators in TQt code. If you need
+to present a path to the user or need a path in a form suitable
+for a function in the underlying operating system use
+convertSeparators().
+
     Examples:
+
     See if a directory exists.
+
    +    TQDir d( "example" );                        // "./example"
+    if ( !d.exists() )
+        qWarning( "Cannot find the example directory" );
+    
    
+ 
+
     Traversing directories and reading a file.
+
    +    TQDir d = TQDir::root();                      // "/"
+    if ( !d.cd("tmp") ) {                       // "/tmp"
+        qWarning( "Cannot find the \"/tmp\" directory" );
+    } else {
+        TQFile f( d.filePath("ex1.txt") );       // "/tmp/ex1.txt"
+        if ( !f.open(IO_ReadWrite) )
+            qWarning( "Cannot create the file %s", f.name() );
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     A program that lists all the files in the current directory
+(excluding symbolic links), sorted by size, smallest first:
+
    +    #include <stdio.h>
+    #include <ntqdir.h>
+
+    int main( int argc, char **argv )
+    {
+        TQDir d;
+        d.setFilter( TQDir::Files | TQDir::Hidden | TQDir::NoSymLinks );
+        d.setSorting( TQDir::Size | TQDir::Reversed );
+
+        const TQFileInfoList *list = d.entryInfoList();
+        TQFileInfoListIterator it( *list );
+        TQFileInfo *fi;
+
+        printf( "     Bytes Filename\n" );
+        while ( (fi = it.current()) != 0 ) {
+            printf( "%10li %s\n", fi->size(), fi->fileName().latin1() );
+            ++it;
+        }
+        return 0;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also TQApplication::applicationDirPath() and Input/Output and Networking.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQDir::FilterSpec
    
+
+
     This enum describes the filtering options available to TQDir, e.g.
+for entryList() and entryInfoList(). The filter value is specified
+by OR-ing together values from the following list:
+
      
+
    • TQDir::Dirs - List directories only.
+
    • TQDir::Files - List files only.
+
    • TQDir::Drives - List disk drives (ignored under Unix).
+
    • TQDir::NoSymLinks - Do not list symbolic links (ignored by operating
+systems that don't support symbolic links).
+
    • TQDir::All - List directories, files, drives and symlinks (this does not list
+broken symlinks unless you specify System).
+
    • TQDir::TypeMask - A mask for the the Dirs, Files, Drives and
+NoSymLinks flags.
+
    • TQDir::Readable - List files for which the application has read access.
+
    • TQDir::Writable - List files for which the application has write access.
+
    • TQDir::Executable - List files for which the application has execute
+access. Executables needs to be combined with Dirs or Files.
+
    • TQDir::RWEMask - A mask for the Readable, Writable and Executable flags.
+
    • TQDir::Modified - Only list files that have been modified (ignored
+under Unix).
+
    • TQDir::Hidden - List hidden files (on Unix, files starting with a .).
+
    • TQDir::System - List system files (on Unix, FIFOs, sockets and
+device files)
+
    • TQDir::AccessMask - A mask for the Readable, Writable, Executable
+Modified, Hidden and System flags
+
    • TQDir::DefaultFilter - Internal flag.
+
     If you do not set any of Readable, Writable or Executable, TQDir will set all three of them. This makes the
+default easy to write and at the same time useful.
+
     Examples: Readable|Writable means list all files for which the
+application has read access, write access or both. Dirs|Drives
+means list drives, directories, all files that the application can
+read, write or execute, and also symlinks to such
+files/directories.
+
+
    TQDir::SortSpec
    
+
+
     This enum describes the sort options available to TQDir, e.g. for
+entryList() and entryInfoList(). The sort value is specified by
+OR-ing together values from the following list:
+
      
+
    • TQDir::Name - Sort by name.
+
    • TQDir::Time - Sort by time (modification time).
+
    • TQDir::Size - Sort by file size.
+
    • TQDir::Unsorted - Do not sort.
+
    • TQDir::SortByMask - A mask for Name, Time and Size.
+
    • TQDir::DirsFirst - Put the directories first, then the files.
+
    • TQDir::Reversed - Reverse the sort order.
+
    • TQDir::IgnoreCase - Sort case-insensitively.
+
    • TQDir::LocaleAware - Sort names using locale aware compares
+
    • TQDir::DefaultSort - Internal flag.
+
     You can only specify one of the first four.
+
     If you specify both DirsFirst and Reversed, directories are
+still put first, but in reverse order; the files will be listed
+after the directories, again in reverse order.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQDir::TQDir ()
+
    
+Constructs a TQDir pointing to the current directory (".").
+
     
    See also currentDirPath().
+
+
    TQDir::TQDir ( const TQString & path, const TQString & nameFilter = TQString::null, int sortSpec = Name | IgnoreCase, int filterSpec = All )
+
    
+Constructs a TQDir with path path, that filters its entries by
+name using nameFilter and by attributes using filterSpec. It
+also sorts the names using sortSpec.
+
     The default nameFilter is an empty string, which excludes
+nothing; the default filterSpec is All, which also means
+exclude nothing. The default sortSpec is Name|IgnoreCase,
+i.e. sort by name case-insensitively.
+
     Example that lists all the files in "/tmp":
+
    +    TQDir d( "/tmp" );
+    for ( int i = 0; i < d.count(); i++ )
+        printf( "%s\n", d[i] );
+    
    
+ 
+
     If path is "" or TQString::null, TQDir uses "." (the current
+directory). If nameFilter is "" or TQString::null, TQDir uses the
+name filter "*" (all files).
+
     Note that path need not exist.
+
     
    See also exists(), setPath(), setNameFilter(), setFilter(), and setSorting().
+
+
    TQDir::TQDir ( const TQDir & d )
+
    
+Constructs a TQDir that is a copy of the directory d.
+
     
    See also operator=().
+
+
    TQDir::~TQDir () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the TQDir frees up its resources.
+
+
    TQString TQDir::absFilePath ( const TQString & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the absolute path name of a file in the directory. Does not check if the file actually exists in the directory. Redundant
+multiple separators or "." and ".." directories in fileName
+will not be removed (see cleanDirPath()).
+
     If acceptAbsPath is TRUE a fileName starting with a
+separator "/" will be returned without change. If acceptAbsPath
+is FALSE an absolute path will be prepended to the fileName and
+the resultant string returned.
+
     
    See also filePath().
+
+
    TQString TQDir::absPath () const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the absolute path (a path that starts with "/" or with a
+drive specification), which may contain symbolic links, but never
+contains redundant ".", ".." or multiple separators.
+
     
    See also setPath(), canonicalPath(), exists(), cleanDirPath(), dirName(), and absFilePath().
+
+
    Example: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
+
    TQString TQDir::canonicalPath () const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the canonical path, i.e. a path without symbolic links or
+redundant "." or ".." elements.
+
     On systems that do not have symbolic links this function will
+always return the same string that absPath() returns. If the
+canonical path does not exist (normally due to dangling symbolic
+links) canonicalPath() returns TQString::null.
+
     
    See also path(), absPath(), exists(), cleanDirPath(), dirName(), absFilePath(), and TQString::isNull().
+
+
    bool TQDir::cd ( const TQString & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) [virtual]
+
    
+Changes the TQDir's directory to dirName.
+
     If acceptAbsPath is TRUE a path starting with separator "/"
+will cause the function to change to the absolute directory. If acceptAbsPath is FALSE any number of separators at the beginning
+of dirName will be removed and the function will descend into
+dirName.
+
     Returns TRUE if the new directory exists and is readable;
+otherwise returns FALSE. Note that the logical cd() operation is
+not performed if the new directory does not exist.
+
     Calling cd( ".." ) is equivalent to calling cdUp().
+
     
    See also cdUp(), isReadable(), exists(), and path().
+
+
    Example: fileiconview/mainwindow.cpp.
+
    bool TQDir::cdUp () [virtual]
+
    
+Changes directory by moving one directory up from the TQDir's
+current directory.
+
     Returns TRUE if the new directory exists and is readable;
+otherwise returns FALSE. Note that the logical cdUp() operation is
+not performed if the new directory does not exist.
+
     
    See also cd(), isReadable(), exists(), and path().
+
+
    TQString TQDir::cleanDirPath ( const TQString & filePath ) [static]
+
    
+Removes all multiple directory separators "/" and resolves any
+"."s or ".."s found in the path, filePath.
+
     Symbolic links are kept. This function does not return the
+canonical path, but rather the simplest version of the input.
+For example, "./local" becomes "local", "local/../bin" becomes
+"bin" and "/local/usr/../bin" becomes "/local/bin".
+
     
    See also absPath() and canonicalPath().
+
+
    TQString TQDir::convertSeparators ( const TQString & pathName ) [static]
+
    
+Returns pathName with the '/' separators converted to
+separators that are appropriate for the underlying operating
+system.
+
     On Windows, convertSeparators("c:/winnt/system32") returns
+"c:\winnt\system32".
+
     The returned string may be the same as the argument on some
+operating systems, for example on Unix.
+
+
    Examples: dirview/dirview.cpp and fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
+
    void TQDir::convertToAbs () [virtual]
+
    
+Converts the directory path to an absolute path. If it is already
+absolute nothing is done.
+
     
    See also isRelative().
+
+
    uint TQDir::count () const
+
    
+Returns the total number of directories and files that were found.
+
     Equivalent to entryList().count().
+
     
    See also operator[]() and entryList().
+
+
    TQDir TQDir::current () [static]
+
    
+Returns the application's current directory.
+
     Use path() to access a TQDir object's path.
+
     
    See also currentDirPath() and TQDir::TQDir().
+
+
    TQString TQDir::currentDirPath () [static]
+
    
+Returns the absolute path of the application's current directory.
+
     
    See also current().
+
+
    Examples: dirview/dirview.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, and qdir/qdir.cpp.
+
    TQString TQDir::dirName () const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the name of the directory; this is not the same as the
+path, e.g. a directory with the name "mail", might have the path
+"/var/spool/mail". If the directory has no name (e.g. it is the
+root directory) TQString::null is returned.
+
     No check is made to ensure that a directory with this name
+actually exists.
+
     
    See also path(), absPath(), absFilePath(), exists(), and TQString::isNull().
+
+
    const TQFileInfoList * TQDir::drives () [static]
+
    
+Returns a list of the root directories on this system. On Windows
+this returns a number of TQFileInfo objects containing "C:/", "D:/"
+etc. On other operating systems, it returns a list containing just
+one root directory (e.g. "/").
+
     The returned pointer is owned by TQt. Callers should not delete
+or modify it.
+
+
    Example: dirview/main.cpp.
+
    TQStrList TQDir::encodedEntryList ( int filterSpec = DefaultFilter, int sortSpec = DefaultSort ) const [virtual]
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     This function is included to easy porting from TQt 1.x to TQt 2.0,
+it is the same as entryList(), but encodes the filenames as 8-bit
+strings using TQFile::encodedName().
+
     It is more efficient to use entryList().
+
+
    TQStrList TQDir::encodedEntryList ( const TQString & nameFilter, int filterSpec = DefaultFilter, int sortSpec = DefaultSort ) const [virtual]
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This function is included to easy porting from TQt 1.x to TQt 2.0,
+it is the same as entryList(), but encodes the filenames as 8-bit
+strings using TQFile::encodedName().
+
     It is more efficient to use entryList().
+
+
    const TQFileInfoList * TQDir::entryInfoList ( const TQString & nameFilter, int filterSpec = DefaultFilter, int sortSpec = DefaultSort ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns a list of TQFileInfo objects for all the files and
+directories in the directory, ordered in accordance with
+setSorting() and filtered in accordance with setFilter() and
+setNameFilter().
+
     The filter and sorting specifications can be overridden using the
+nameFilter, filterSpec and sortSpec arguments.
+
     Returns 0 if the directory is unreadable or does not exist.
+
     The returned pointer is a const pointer to a TQFileInfoList. The
+list is owned by the TQDir object and will be reused on the next
+call to entryInfoList() for the same TQDir instance. If you want to
+keep the entries of the list after a subsequent call to this
+function you must copy them.
+
     Note: TQFileInfoList is really a TQPtrList.
+
     
    See also entryList(), setNameFilter(), setSorting(), and setFilter().
+
+
    Examples: dirview/dirview.cpp and fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
+
    const TQFileInfoList * TQDir::entryInfoList ( int filterSpec = DefaultFilter, int sortSpec = DefaultSort ) const [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns a list of TQFileInfo objects for all the files and
+directories in the directory, ordered in accordance with
+setSorting() and filtered in accordance with setFilter() and
+setNameFilter().
+
     The filter and sorting specifications can be overridden using the
+filterSpec and sortSpec arguments.
+
     Returns 0 if the directory is unreadable or does not exist.
+
     The returned pointer is a const pointer to a TQFileInfoList. The
+list is owned by the TQDir object and will be reused on the next
+call to entryInfoList() for the same TQDir instance. If you want to
+keep the entries of the list after a subsequent call to this
+function you must copy them.
+
     Note: TQFileInfoList is really a TQPtrList.
+
     
    See also entryList(), setNameFilter(), setSorting(), and setFilter().
+
+
    TQStringList TQDir::entryList ( const TQString & nameFilter, int filterSpec = DefaultFilter, int sortSpec = DefaultSort ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns a list of the names of all the files and directories in
+the directory, ordered in accordance with setSorting() and
+filtered in accordance with setFilter() and setNameFilter().
+
     The filter and sorting specifications can be overridden using the
+nameFilter, filterSpec and sortSpec arguments.
+
     Returns an empty list if the directory is unreadable or does not
+exist.
+
     
    See also entryInfoList(), setNameFilter(), setSorting(), and setFilter().
+
+
    Example: table/statistics/statistics.cpp.
+
    TQStringList TQDir::entryList ( int filterSpec = DefaultFilter, int sortSpec = DefaultSort ) const [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns a list of the names of all the files and directories in
+the directory, ordered in accordance with setSorting() and
+filtered in accordance with setFilter() and setNameFilter().
+
     The filter and sorting specifications can be overridden using the
+filterSpec and sortSpec arguments.
+
     Returns an empty list if the directory is unreadable or does not
+exist.
+
     
    See also entryInfoList(), setNameFilter(), setSorting(), and setFilter().
+
+
    bool TQDir::exists ( const TQString & name, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) [virtual]
+
    
+Checks for the existence of the file name.
+
     If acceptAbsPath is TRUE a path starting with separator "/"
+will check the file with the absolute path. If acceptAbsPath is
+FALSE any number of separators at the beginning of name will be
+removed and the resultant file name will be checked.
+
     Returns TRUE if the file exists; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also TQFileInfo::exists() and TQFile::exists().
+
+
    bool TQDir::exists () const [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns TRUE if the directory exists; otherwise returns FALSE.
+(If a file with the same name is found this function will return
+FALSE).
+
     
    See also TQFileInfo::exists() and TQFile::exists().
+
+
    TQString TQDir::filePath ( const TQString & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the path name of a file in the directory. Does not
+check if the file actually exists in the directory. If the TQDir is
+relative the returned path name will also be relative. Redundant
+multiple separators or "." and ".." directories in fileName
+will not be removed (see cleanDirPath()).
+
     If acceptAbsPath is TRUE a fileName starting with a
+separator "/" will be returned without change. If acceptAbsPath
+is FALSE an absolute path will be prepended to the fileName and
+the resultant string returned.
+
     
    See also absFilePath(), isRelative(), and canonicalPath().
+
+
    FilterSpec TQDir::filter () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the value set by setFilter()
+
+
    TQDir TQDir::home () [static]
+
    
+Returns the home directory.
+
     Under Windows the HOME environment variable is used. If this
+does not exist the USERPROFILE environment variable is used. If
+that does not exist the path is formed by concatenating the HOMEDRIVE and HOMEPATH environment variables. If they don't
+exist the rootDirPath() is used (this uses the SystemDrive
+environment variable). If none of these exist "C:\" is used.
+
     Under non-Windows operating systems the HOME environment
+variable is used if it exists, otherwise rootDirPath() is used.
+
     
    See also homeDirPath().
+
+
    TQString TQDir::homeDirPath () [static]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the absolute path of the user's home directory.
+
     
    See also home().
+
+
    bool TQDir::isReadable () const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the directory is readable and we can open files
+by name; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     Warning: A FALSE value from this function is not a guarantee that
+files in the directory are not accessible.
+
     
    See also TQFileInfo::isReadable().
+
+
    Examples: dirview/dirview.cpp and fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
+
    bool TQDir::isRelative () const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the directory path is relative to the current
+directory and returns FALSE if the path is absolute (e.g. under
+UNIX a path is relative if it does not start with a "/").
+
     
    See also convertToAbs().
+
+
    bool TQDir::isRelativePath ( const TQString & path ) [static]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if path is relative; returns FALSE if it is
+absolute.
+
     
    See also isRelative().
+
+
    bool TQDir::isRoot () const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the directory is the root directory; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     Note: If the directory is a symbolic link to the root directory
+this function returns FALSE. If you want to test for this use
+canonicalPath(), e.g.
+
    +    TQDir d( "/tmp/root_link" );
+    d = d.canonicalPath();
+    if ( d.isRoot() )
+        qWarning( "It is a root link" );
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also root() and rootDirPath().
+
+
    bool TQDir::match ( const TQString & filter, const TQString & fileName ) [static]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the fileName matches the wildcard (glob)
+pattern filter; otherwise returns FALSE. The filter may
+contain multiple patterns separated by spaces or semicolons.
+
     (See TQRegExp wildcard
+    matching.)
+
    See also TQRegExp::match().
+
+
    bool TQDir::match ( const TQStringList & filters, const TQString & fileName ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns TRUE if the fileName matches any of the wildcard (glob)
+patterns in the list of filters; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     (See TQRegExp wildcard
+    matching.)
+
    See also TQRegExp::match().
+
+
    bool TQDir::matchAllDirs () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the value set by setMatchAllDirs()
+
     
    See also setMatchAllDirs().
+
+
    bool TQDir::mkdir ( const TQString & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Creates a directory.
+
     If acceptAbsPath is TRUE a path starting with a separator ('/')
+will create the absolute directory; if acceptAbsPath is FALSE
+any number of separators at the beginning of dirName will be
+removed.
+
     Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also rmdir().
+
+
    TQString TQDir::nameFilter () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the string set by setNameFilter()
+
+
    bool TQDir::operator!= ( const TQDir & d ) const [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if directory d and this directory have different
+paths or different sort or filter settings; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     Example:
+
    +    // The current directory is "/usr/local"
+    TQDir d1( "/usr/local/bin" );
+    TQDir d2( "bin" );
+    if ( d1 != d2 )
+        qDebug( "They differ" );
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    TQDir & TQDir::operator= ( const TQDir & d )
+
    
+Makes a copy of TQDir d and assigns it to this TQDir.
+
+
    TQDir & TQDir::operator= ( const TQString & path )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the directory path to be the given path.
+
+
    bool TQDir::operator== ( const TQDir & d ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if directory d and this directory have the same
+path and their sort and filter settings are the same; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     Example:
+
    +    // The current directory is "/usr/local"
+    TQDir d1( "/usr/local/bin" );
+    TQDir d2( "bin" );
+    d2.convertToAbs();
+    if ( d1 == d2 )
+        qDebug( "They're the same" );
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    TQString TQDir::operator[] ( int index ) const
+
    
+Returns the file name at position index in the list of file
+names. Equivalent to entryList().at(index).
+
     Returns a TQString::null if the index is out of range or if the
+entryList() function failed.
+
     
    See also count() and entryList().
+
+
    TQString TQDir::path () const [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the path, this may contain symbolic links, but never
+contains redundant ".", ".." or multiple separators.
+
     The returned path can be either absolute or relative (see
+setPath()).
+
     
    See also setPath(), absPath(), exists(), cleanDirPath(), dirName(), absFilePath(), and convertSeparators().
+
+
    void TQDir::refresh () const
+
    
+Refreshes the directory information.
+
+
    bool TQDir::remove ( const TQString & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) [virtual]
+
    
+Removes the file, fileName.
+
     If acceptAbsPath is TRUE a path starting with separator "/"
+will remove the file with the absolute path. If acceptAbsPath
+is FALSE any number of separators at the beginning of fileName
+will be removed and the resultant file name will be removed.
+
     Returns TRUE if the file is removed successfully; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQDir::rename ( const TQString & oldName, const TQString & newName, bool acceptAbsPaths = TRUE ) [virtual]
+
    
+Renames a file or directory.
+
     If acceptAbsPaths is TRUE a path starting with a separator
+('/') will rename the file with the absolute path; if acceptAbsPaths is FALSE any number of separators at the beginning
+of the names will be removed.
+
     Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     On most file systems, rename() fails only if oldName does not
+exist or if newName and oldName are not on the same
+partition. On Windows, rename() will fail if newName already
+exists. However, there are also other reasons why rename() can
+fail. For example, on at least one file system rename() fails if
+newName points to an open file.
+
+
    Example: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
+
    bool TQDir::rmdir ( const TQString & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Removes a directory.
+
     If acceptAbsPath is TRUE a path starting with a separator ('/')
+will remove the absolute directory; if acceptAbsPath is FALSE
+any number of separators at the beginning of dirName will be
+removed.
+
     The directory must be empty for rmdir() to succeed.
+
     Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also mkdir().
+
+
    TQDir TQDir::root () [static]
+
    
+Returns the root directory.
+
     
    See also rootDirPath() and drives().
+
+
    TQString TQDir::rootDirPath () [static]
+
    
+Returns the absolute path for the root directory.
+
     For UNIX operating systems this returns "/". For Windows file
+systems this normally returns "c:/".
+
     
    See also root() and drives().
+
+
    char TQDir::separator () [static]
+
    
+Returns the native directory separator; "/" under UNIX (including
+Mac OS X) and "\" under Windows.
+
     You do not need to use this function to build file paths. If you
+always use "/", TQt will translate your paths to conform to the
+underlying operating system.
+
+
    bool TQDir::setCurrent ( const TQString & path ) [static]
+
    
+Sets the application's current working directory to path.
+Returns TRUE if the directory was successfully changed; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
+
    void TQDir::setFilter ( int filterSpec ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the filter used by entryList() and entryInfoList() to filterSpec. The filter is used to specify the kind of files that
+should be returned by entryList() and entryInfoList(). See
+TQDir::FilterSpec.
+
     
    See also filter() and setNameFilter().
+
+
    void TQDir::setMatchAllDirs ( bool enable ) [virtual]
+
    
+If enable is TRUE then all directories are included (e.g. in
+entryList()), and the nameFilter() is only applied to the files.
+If enable is FALSE then the nameFilter() is applied to both
+directories and files.
+
     
    See also matchAllDirs().
+
+
    void TQDir::setNameFilter ( const TQString & nameFilter ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the name filter used by entryList() and entryInfoList() to nameFilter.
+
     The nameFilter is a wildcard (globbing) filter that understands
+"*" and "?" wildcards. (See TQRegExp wildcard matching.) You may specify several filter
+entries all separated by a single space " " or by a semi-colon
+";".
+
     For example, if you want entryList() and entryInfoList() to list
+all files ending with either ".cpp" or ".h", you would use either
+dir.setNameFilter("*.cpp *.h") or dir.setNameFilter("*.cpp;*.h").
+
     
    See also nameFilter() and setFilter().
+
+
    void TQDir::setPath ( const TQString & path ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the path of the directory to path. The path is cleaned of
+redundant ".", ".." and of multiple separators. No check is made
+to ensure that a directory with this path exists.
+
     The path can be either absolute or relative. Absolute paths begin
+with the directory separator "/" (optionally preceded by a drive
+specification under Windows). Relative file names begin with a
+directory name or a file name and specify a path relative to the
+current directory. An example of an absolute path is the string
+"/tmp/quartz", a relative path might look like "src/fatlib".
+
     
    See also path(), absPath(), exists(), cleanDirPath(), dirName(), absFilePath(), isRelative(), and convertToAbs().
+
+
    void TQDir::setSorting ( int sortSpec ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the sort order used by entryList() and entryInfoList().
+
     The sortSpec is specified by OR-ing values from the enum
+TQDir::SortSpec.
+
     
    See also sorting() and SortSpec.
+
+
    SortSpec TQDir::sorting () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the value set by setSorting()
+
     
    See also setSorting() and SortSpec.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqdns.html b/doc/html/ntqdns.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..049dc526f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqdns.html
@@ -0,0 +1,334 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQDns Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQDns Class Reference
    [network module]
    
+
+
    The TQDns class provides asynchronous DNS lookups.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqdns.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQDns class provides asynchronous DNS lookups.
+
+
     
+
+
     Both Windows and Unix provide synchronous DNS lookups; Windows
+provides some asynchronous support too. At the time of writing
+neither operating system provides asynchronous support for
+anything other than hostname-to-address mapping.
+
     TQDns rectifies this shortcoming, by providing asynchronous caching
+lookups for the record types that we expect modern GUI
+applications to need in the near future.
+
     The class is not straightforward to use (although it is much
+simpler than the native APIs); TQSocket provides much easier to use
+TCP connection facilities. The aim of TQDns is to provide a correct
+and small API to the DNS and nothing more. (We use "correctness"
+to mean that the DNS information is correctly cached, and
+correctly timed out.)
+
     The API comprises a constructor, functions to set the DNS node
+(the domain in DNS terminology) and record type (setLabel() and
+setRecordType()), the corresponding get functions, an isWorking()
+function to determine whether TQDns is working or reading, a
+resultsReady() signal and query functions for the result.
+
     There is one query function for each RecordType, namely
+addresses(), mailServers(), servers(), hostNames() and texts().
+There are also two generic query functions: canonicalName()
+returns the name you'll presumably end up using (the exact meaning
+of this depends on the record type) and qualifiedNames() returns a
+list of the fully qualified names label() maps to.
+
     
    See also TQSocket and Input/Output and Networking.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQDns::RecordType
    
+
+
     This enum type defines the record types TQDns can handle. The DNS
+provides many more; these are the ones we've judged to be in
+current use, useful for GUI programs and important enough to
+support right away:
+
      
+
    • TQDns::None - No information. This exists only so that TQDns can
+have a default.
+
    • TQDns::A - IPv4 addresses. By far the most common type.
+
    • TQDns::Aaaa - IPv6 addresses. So far mostly unused.
+
    • TQDns::Mx - Mail eXchanger names. Used for mail delivery.
+
    • TQDns::Srv - SeRVer names. Generic record type for finding
+servers. So far mostly unused.
+
    • TQDns::Cname - Canonical names. Maps from nicknames to the true
+name (the canonical name) for a host.
+
    • TQDns::Ptr - name PoinTeRs. Maps from IPv4 or IPv6 addresses to hostnames.
+
    • TQDns::Txt - arbitrary TeXT for domains.
+
     We expect that some support for the
+RFC-2535
+extensions will be added in future versions.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQDns::TQDns ()
+
    
+Constructs a DNS query object with invalid settings for both the
+label and the search type.
+
+
    TQDns::TQDns ( const TQString & label, RecordType rr = A )
+
    
+Constructs a DNS query object that will return record type rr
+information about label.
+
     The DNS lookup is started the next time the application enters the
+event loop. When the result is found the signal resultsReady() is
+emitted.
+
     rr defaults to A, IPv4 addresses.
+
+
    TQDns::TQDns ( const TQHostAddress & address, RecordType rr = Ptr )
+
    
+Constructs a DNS query object that will return record type rr
+information about host address address. The label is set to the
+IN-ADDR.ARPA domain name. This is useful in combination with the
+Ptr record type (e.g. if you want to look up a hostname for a
+given address).
+
     The DNS lookup is started the next time the application enters the
+event loop. When the result is found the signal resultsReady() is
+emitted.
+
     rr defaults to Ptr, that maps addresses to hostnames.
+
+
    TQDns::~TQDns () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the DNS query object and frees its allocated resources.
+
+
    TQValueList<TQHostAddress> TQDns::addresses () const
+
    
+Returns a list of the addresses for this name if this TQDns object
+has a recordType() of TQDns::A or TQDns::Aaaa and the answer
+is available; otherwise returns an empty list.
+
     As a special case, if label() is a valid numeric IP address, this
+function returns that address.
+
     Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
+over a copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQValueList<TQHostAddress> list = myDns.addresses();
+    TQValueList<TQHostAddress>::Iterator it = list.begin();
+    while( it != list.end() ) {
+        myProcessing( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     
+
    TQString TQDns::canonicalName () const
+
    
+Returns the canonical name for this DNS node. (This works
+regardless of what recordType() is set to.)
+
     If the canonical name isn't known, this function returns a null
+string.
+
     The canonical name of a DNS node is its full name, or the full
+name of the target of its CNAME. For example, if l.trolltech.com
+is a CNAME to lillian.troll.no, and the search path for TQDns is
+"trolltech.com", then the canonical name for all of "lillian",
+"l", "lillian.troll.no." and "l.trolltech.com" is
+"lillian.troll.no.".
+
+
    TQStringList TQDns::hostNames () const
+
    
+Returns a list of host names if the record type is Ptr.
+
     Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
+over a copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQStringList list = myDns.hostNames();
+    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
+    while( it != list.end() ) {
+        myProcessing( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     
+
    bool TQDns::isWorking () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if TQDns is doing a lookup for this object (i.e. if it
+does not already have the necessary information); otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     TQDns emits the resultsReady() signal when the status changes to FALSE.
+
+
    Example: network/mail/smtp.cpp.
+
    TQString TQDns::label () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the domain name for which this object returns information.
+
     
    See also setLabel().
+
+
    TQValueList<MailServer> TQDns::mailServers () const
+
    
+Returns a list of mail servers if the record type is Mx. The
+class TQDns::MailServer contains the following public variables:
+
      
+
    •  TQString TQDns::MailServer::name
+
    •  Q_UINT16 TQDns::MailServer::priority
+
    
+
     Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
+over a copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQValueList<TQDns::MailServer> list = myDns.mailServers();
+    TQValueList<TQDns::MailServer>::Iterator it = list.begin();
+    while( it != list.end() ) {
+        myProcessing( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     
+
    Example: network/mail/smtp.cpp.
+
    TQStringList TQDns::qualifiedNames () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a list of the fully qualified names label() maps to.
+
     Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
+over a copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQStringList list = myDns.qualifiedNames();
+    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
+    while( it != list.end() ) {
+        myProcessing( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     
+
    RecordType TQDns::recordType () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the record type of this DNS query object.
+
     
    See also setRecordType() and RecordType.
+
+
    void TQDns::resultsReady () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when results are available for one of the
+qualifiedNames().
+
+
    Example: network/mail/smtp.cpp.
+
    TQValueList<Server> TQDns::servers () const
+
    
+Returns a list of servers if the record type is Srv. The class
+TQDns::Server contains the following public variables:
+
      
+
    •  TQString TQDns::Server::name
+
    •  Q_UINT16 TQDns::Server::priority
+
    •  Q_UINT16 TQDns::Server::weight
+
    •  Q_UINT16 TQDns::Server::port
+
    
+
     Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
+over a copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQValueList<TQDns::Server> list = myDns.servers();
+    TQValueList<TQDns::Server>::Iterator it = list.begin();
+    while( it != list.end() ) {
+        myProcessing( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    void TQDns::setLabel ( const TQString & label ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets this DNS query object to query for information about label.
+
     This does not change the recordType(), but its isWorking() status
+will probably change as a result.
+
     The DNS lookup is started the next time the application enters the
+event loop. When the result is found the signal resultsReady() is
+emitted.
+
+
    void TQDns::setLabel ( const TQHostAddress & address ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets this DNS query object to query for information about the host
+address address. The label is set to the IN-ADDR.ARPA domain
+name. This is useful in combination with the Ptr record type
+(e.g. if you want to look up a hostname for a given address).
+
+
    void TQDns::setRecordType ( RecordType rr = A ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets this object to query for record type rr records.
+
     The DNS lookup is started the next time the application enters the
+event loop. When the result is found the signal resultsReady() is
+emitted.
+
     
    See also RecordType.
+
+
    TQStringList TQDns::texts () const
+
    
+Returns a list of texts if the record type is Txt.
+
     Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
+over a copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQStringList list = myDns.texts();
+    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
+    while( it != list.end() ) {
+        myProcessing( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqdockarea.html b/doc/html/ntqdockarea.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6cac1b250
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqdockarea.html
@@ -0,0 +1,278 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQDockArea Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQDockArea Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQDockArea class manages and lays out TQDockWindows.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqdockarea.h>
+
    Inherits TQWidget.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
      
+
    • void lineUp ( bool keepNewLines )
      • 
+
    
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • int count - the number of dock windows in the dock area  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool empty - whether the dock area is empty  (read only)
      • 
+
    • HandlePosition handlePosition - where the dock window splitter handle is placed in the dock area  (read only)
      • 
+
    • Orientation orientation - the dock area's orientation  (read only)
      • 
+
    
+
    Related Functions
    
+
      
+
    • TQTextStream & operator<< ( TQTextStream & ts, const TQDockArea & dockArea )
      • 
+
    • TQTextStream & operator>> ( TQTextStream & ts, TQDockArea & dockArea )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQDockArea class manages and lays out TQDockWindows.
+
     
+
     A TQDockArea is a container which manages a list of
+TQDockWindows which it lays out within its area. In cooperation
+with the TQDockWindows it is responsible for the docking and
+undocking of TQDockWindows and moving them inside the dock
+area. TQDockAreas also handle the wrapping of TQDockWindows to
+fill the available space as compactly as possible. TQDockAreas can
+contain TQToolBars since TQToolBar is a TQDockWindow subclass.
+
     TQMainWindow contains four TQDockAreas which you can use for your
+TQToolBars and TQDockWindows, so in most situations you do not need
+to use the TQDockArea class directly. Although TQMainWindow contains
+support for its own dock areas it isn't convenient for adding new
+TQDockAreas. If you need to create your own dock areas we suggest
+that you create a subclass of TQWidget and add your TQDockAreas to
+your subclass.
+
     
    TQMainWindow's TQDockAreas
     
+
     
+Lines. TQDockArea uses the concept of lines. A line is a
+horizontal region which may contain dock windows side-by-side. A
+dock area may have room for more than one line. When dock windows
+are docked into a dock area they are usually added at the right
+hand side of the top-most line that has room (unless manually
+placed by the user). When users move dock windows they may leave
+empty lines or gaps in non-empty lines. Dock windows can be lined
+up to minimize wasted space using the lineUp() function.
+
     The TQDockArea class maintains a position list of all its child
+dock windows. Dock windows are added to a dock area from position
+0 onwards. Dock windows are laid out sequentially in position
+order from left to right, and in the case of multiple lines of
+dock windows, from top to bottom. If a dock window is floated it
+still retains its position since this is where the window will
+return if the user double clicks its caption. A dock window's
+position can be determined with hasDockWindow(). The position can
+be changed with moveDockWindow().
+
     To dock or undock a dock window use TQDockWindow::dock() and
+TQDockWindow::undock() respectively. If you want to control which
+dock windows can dock in a dock area use setAcceptDockWindow(). To
+see if a dock area contains a particular dock window use
+hasDockWindow(); to see how many dock windows a dock area
+contains use count().
+
     The streaming operators can write the positions of the dock
+windows in the dock area to a TQTextStream. The positions can be
+read back later to restore the saved positions.
+
     Save the positions to a TQTextStream:
+
    +    ts << *myDockArea;
+    
    
+ 
+
     Restore the positions from a TQTextStream:
+
    +    ts >> *myDockArea;
+    
    
+ 
+
    See also Main Window and Related Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQDockArea::HandlePosition
    
+
+
     A dock window has two kinds of handles, the dock window handle
+used for dragging the dock window, and the splitter handle used to
+resize the dock window in relation to other dock windows using a
+splitter. (The splitter handle is only visible for docked
+windows.)
+
     This enum specifies where the dock window splitter handle is
+placed in the dock area.
+
      
+
    • TQDockArea::Normal - The splitter handles of dock windows are placed at
+the right or bottom.
+
    • TQDockArea::Reverse - The splitter handles of dock windows are placed at
+the left or top.
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQDockArea::TQDockArea ( Orientation o, HandlePosition h = Normal, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a TQDockArea with orientation o, HandlePosition h,
+parent parent and called name.
+
+
    TQDockArea::~TQDockArea ()
+
    
+Destroys the dock area and all the dock windows docked in the dock
+area.
+
     Does not affect any floating dock windows or dock windows in other
+dock areas, even if they first appeared in this dock area.
+Floating dock windows are effectively top level windows and are
+not child windows of the dock area. When a floating dock window is
+docked (dragged into a dock area) its parent becomes the dock
+area.
+
+
    int TQDockArea::count () const
+
    Returns the number of dock windows in the dock area.
+See the "count" property for details.
+
    TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> TQDockArea::dockWindowList () const
+
    
+Returns a list of the dock windows in the dock area.
+
+
    HandlePosition TQDockArea::handlePosition () const
+
    Returns where the dock window splitter handle is placed in the dock area.
+See the "handlePosition" property for details.
+
    bool TQDockArea::hasDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * w, int * index = 0 )
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the dock area contains the dock window w;
+otherwise returns FALSE. If index is not 0 it will be set as
+follows: if the dock area contains the dock window *index is
+set to w's index position; otherwise *index is set to -1.
+
+
    bool TQDockArea::isDockWindowAccepted ( TQDockWindow * dw )
+
    
+Returns TRUE if dock window dw could be docked into the dock
+area; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setAcceptDockWindow().
+
+
    bool TQDockArea::isEmpty () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the dock area is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "empty" property for details.
+
    void TQDockArea::lineUp ( bool keepNewLines ) [slot]
+
    
+Lines up the dock windows in this dock area to minimize wasted
+space. If keepNewLines is TRUE, only space within lines is
+cleaned up. If keepNewLines is FALSE the number of lines might
+be changed.
+
+
    void TQDockArea::moveDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * w, int index = -1 )
+
    
+Moves the TQDockWindow w within the dock area. If w is not
+already docked in this area, w is docked first. If index is
+-1 or larger than the number of docked widgets, w is appended
+at the end, otherwise it is inserted at the position index.
+
+
    void TQDockArea::moveDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * w, const TQPoint & p, const TQRect & r, bool swap )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Moves the dock window w inside the dock area where p is the
+new position (in global screen coordinates), r is the suggested
+rectangle of the dock window and swap specifies whether or not
+the orientation of the docked widget needs to be changed.
+
     This function is used internally by TQDockWindow. You shouldn't
+need to call it yourself.
+
+
    Orientation TQDockArea::orientation () const
+
    Returns the dock area's orientation.
+See the "orientation" property for details.
+
    void TQDockArea::removeDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * w, bool makeFloating, bool swap, bool fixNewLines = TRUE )
+
    
+Removes the dock window w from the dock area. If makeFloating is TRUE, w gets floated, and if swap is TRUE,
+the orientation of w gets swapped. If fixNewLines is TRUE
+(the default) newlines in the area will be fixed.
+
     You should never need to call this function yourself. Use
+TQDockWindow::dock() and TQDockWindow::undock() instead.
+
+
    void TQDockArea::setAcceptDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dw, bool accept )
+
    
+If accept is TRUE, dock window dw can be docked in the dock
+area. If accept is FALSE, dock window dw cannot be docked in
+the dock area.
+
     
    See also isDockWindowAccepted().
+
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    int count
    
+
    This property holds the number of dock windows in the dock area.
+
    
+
    Get this property's value with count().
+
    bool empty
    
+
    This property holds whether the dock area is empty.
+
    
+
    Get this property's value with isEmpty().
+
    HandlePosition handlePosition
    
+
    This property holds where the dock window splitter handle is placed in the dock area.
+
    The default position is Normal.
+
+
    Get this property's value with handlePosition().
+
    Orientation orientation
    
+
    This property holds the dock area's orientation.
+
    There is no default value; the orientation is specified in the
+constructor.
+
+
    Get this property's value with orientation().
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    TQTextStream & operator<< ( TQTextStream & ts, const TQDockArea & dockArea )
+
    
+
+
     Writes the layout of the dock windows in dock area dockArea to
+the text stream ts.
+
     
    See also operator>>().
+
+
    TQTextStream & operator>> ( TQTextStream & ts, TQDockArea & dockArea )
+
    
+
+
     Reads the layout description of the dock windows in dock area dockArea from the text stream ts and restores it. The layout
+description must have been previously written by the operator<<()
+function.
+
     
    See also operator<<().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqdockwindow.html b/doc/html/ntqdockwindow.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..58aca1318
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqdockwindow.html
@@ -0,0 +1,509 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQDockWindow Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQDockWindow Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQDockWindow class provides a widget which can be docked
+inside a TQDockArea or floated as a top level window on the
+desktop.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqdockwindow.h>
+
    Inherits TQFrame.
+
    Inherited by TQToolBar.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • int closeMode - the close mode of a dock window
      • 
+
    • bool horizontallyStretchable - whether the dock window is horizontally stretchable
      • 
+
    • bool movingEnabled - whether the user can move the dock window within the dock area, move the dock window to another dock area, or float the dock window
      • 
+
    • bool newLine - whether the dock window prefers to start a new line in the dock area
      • 
+
    • int offset - the dock window's preferred offset from the dock area's left edge (top edge for vertical dock areas)
      • 
+
    • bool opaqueMoving - whether the dock window will be shown normally whilst it is being moved
      • 
+
    • Place place  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool resizeEnabled - whether the dock window is resizeable
      • 
+
    • bool stretchable - whether the dock window is stretchable in the current orientation()  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool verticallyStretchable - whether the dock window is vertically stretchable
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQDockWindow class provides a widget which can be docked
+inside a TQDockArea or floated as a top level window on the
+desktop.
+
     
+
+
     This class handles moving, resizing, docking and undocking dock
+windows. TQToolBar is a subclass of TQDockWindow so the
+functionality provided for dock windows is available with the same
+API for toolbars.
+
     
    TQDockWindows in a TQDockArea
     
     Two TQDockWindows (TQToolBars) in a TQDockArea
+
    
+
     
    A TQDockWindow
     
     A Floating TQDockWindow
+
    
+
     If the user drags the dock window into the dock area the dock
+window will be docked. If the user drags the dock area outside any
+dock areas the dock window will be undocked (floated) and will
+become a top level window. Double clicking a floating dock
+window's titlebar will dock the dock window to the last dock area
+it was docked in. Double clicking a docked dock window's handle
+will undock (float) the dock window.
+
+If the user clicks the close button (which does not appear on
+dock windows by default - see closeMode) the dock window will
+disappear. You can control whether or not a dock window has a
+close button with setCloseMode().
+
     TQMainWindow provides four dock areas (top, left, right and bottom)
+which can be used by dock windows. For many applications using the
+dock areas provided by TQMainWindow is sufficient. (See the TQDockArea documentation if you want to create your own dock
+areas.) In TQMainWindow a right-click popup menu (the dock window
+menu) is available which lists dock windows and can be used to
+show or hide them. (The popup menu only lists dock windows that
+have a caption.)
+
     When you construct a dock window you must pass it a TQDockArea
+or a TQMainWindow as its parent if you want it docked. Pass 0 for
+the parent if you want it floated.
+
     
    +    TQToolBar *fileTools = new TQToolBar( this, "File Actions" );
+    moveDockWindow( fileTools, Left );
+    
    
+ 
+
     In the example above we create a new TQToolBar in the constructor
+of a TQMainWindow subclass (so that the this pointer points to
+the TQMainWindow). By default the toolbar will be added to the Top dock area, but we've moved it to the Left dock area.
+
     A dock window is often used to contain a single widget. In these
+cases the widget can be set by calling setWidget(). If you're
+constructing a dock window that contains multiple widgets, e.g. a
+toolbar, arrange the widgets within a box layout inside the dock
+window. To do this use the boxLayout() function to get a pointer
+to the dock window's box layout, then add widgets to the layout
+using the box layout's TQBoxLayout::addWidget() function. The dock
+window will dynamically set the orientation of the layout to be
+vertical or horizontal as necessary, although you can control this
+yourself with setOrientation().
+
     Although a common use of dock windows is for toolbars, they can be
+used with any widgets. (See the TQt
+    Designer and TQt
+    Linguist applications, for example.) When using larger
+widgets it may make sense for the dock window to be resizable by
+calling setResizeEnabled(). Resizable dock windows are given
+splitter-like handles to allow the user to resize them within
+their dock area. When resizable dock windows are undocked they
+become top level windows and can be resized like any other top
+level windows, e.g. by dragging a corner or edge.
+
     Dock windows can be docked and undocked using dock() and undock().
+A dock window's orientation can be set with setOrientation(). You
+can also use TQDockArea::moveDockWindow(). If you're using a
+TQMainWindow, TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow() and
+TQMainWindow::removeDockWindow() are available.
+
     A dock window can have some preferred settings, for example, you
+can set a preferred offset from the left edge (or top edge for
+vertical dock areas) of the dock area using setOffset(). If you'd
+prefer a dock window to start on a new line when it is docked use setNewLine(). The
+setFixedExtentWidth() and setFixedExtentHeight() functions can be
+used to define the dock window's preferred size, and the
+setHorizontallyStretchable() and setVerticallyStretchable()
+functions set whether the dock window can be stretched or not.
+Dock windows can be moved by default, but this can be changed with
+setMovingEnabled(). When a dock window is moved it is shown as a
+rectangular outline, but it can be shown normally using
+setOpaqueMoving().
+
     When a dock window's visibility changes, i.e. it is shown or
+hidden, the visibilityChanged() signal is emitted. When a dock
+window is docked, undocked or moved inside the dock area the
+placeChanged() signal is emitted.
+
    See also Main Window and Related Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQDockWindow::CloseMode
    
+
+
     This enum type specifies when (if ever) a dock window has a close
+button.
+
      
+
    • TQDockWindow::Never - The dock window never has a close button and cannot
+be closed by the user.
+
    • TQDockWindow::Docked - The dock window has a close button only when
+docked.
+
    • TQDockWindow::Undocked - The dock window has a close button only when
+floating.
+
    • TQDockWindow::Always - The dock window always has a close button.
+
+
    
+
    TQDockWindow::Place
    
+
+
     This enum specifies the possible locations for a TQDockWindow:
+
      
+
    • TQDockWindow::InDock - Inside a TQDockArea.
+
    • TQDockWindow::OutsideDock - Floating as a top level window on the desktop.
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQDockWindow::TQDockWindow ( Place p = InDock, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a TQDockWindow with parent parent, called name and
+with widget flags f.
+
     If p is InDock, the dock window is docked into a dock area
+and parent must be a TQDockArea or a TQMainWindow. If the parent is a TQMainWindow the dock window will be docked in the main
+window's Top dock area.
+
     If p is OutsideDock, the dock window is created as a floating
+window.
+
     We recommend creating the dock area InDock with a TQMainWindow
+as parent then calling TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow() to move the
+dock window where you want it.
+
+
    TQDockWindow::TQDockWindow ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a TQDockWindow with parent parent, called name and
+with widget flags f.
+
+
    TQDockArea * TQDockWindow::area () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the dock area in which this dock window is docked, or 0 if
+the dock window is floating.
+
+
    TQBoxLayout * TQDockWindow::boxLayout ()
+
    
+Returns the layout which is used for adding widgets to the dock
+window. The layout's orientation is set automatically to match the
+orientation of the dock window. You can add widgets to the layout
+using the box layout's TQBoxLayout::addWidget() function.
+
     If the dock window only needs to contain a single widget use
+setWidget() instead.
+
     
    See also setWidget() and setOrientation().
+
+
    int TQDockWindow::closeMode () const
+
    Returns the close mode of a dock window.
+See the "closeMode" property for details.
+
    void TQDockWindow::dock () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Docks the dock window into the last dock area in which it was
+docked.
+
     If the dock window has no last dock area (e.g. it was created as a
+floating window and has never been docked), or if the last dock
+area it was docked in does not exist (e.g. the dock area has been
+deleted), nothing happens.
+
     The dock window will dock with the dock area regardless of the return value
+of TQDockArea::isDockWindowAccepted().
+
     
    See also undock(), TQDockArea::moveDockWindow(), TQDockArea::removeDockWindow(), TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow(), TQMainWindow::removeDockWindow(), and TQDockArea::isDockWindowAccepted().
+
+
     
+
    TQSize TQDockWindow::fixedExtent () const
+
    
+Returns the dock window's preferred size (fixed extent).
+
     
    See also setFixedExtentWidth() and setFixedExtentHeight().
+
+
    bool TQDockWindow::isCloseEnabled () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the dock window has a close button; otherwise
+returns FALSE. The result depends on the dock window's Place
+and its CloseMode.
+
     
    See also closeMode.
+
+
    bool TQDockWindow::isHorizontalStretchable () const
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
    bool TQDockWindow::isHorizontallyStretchable () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the dock window is horizontally stretchable; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "horizontallyStretchable" property for details.
+
    bool TQDockWindow::isMovingEnabled () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the user can move the dock window within the dock area, move the dock window to another dock area, or float the dock window; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "movingEnabled" property for details.
+
    bool TQDockWindow::isResizeEnabled () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the dock window is resizeable; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "resizeEnabled" property for details.
+
    bool TQDockWindow::isStretchable () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the dock window is stretchable in the current orientation(); otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "stretchable" property for details.
+
    bool TQDockWindow::isVerticalStretchable () const
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
    bool TQDockWindow::isVerticallyStretchable () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the dock window is vertically stretchable; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "verticallyStretchable" property for details.
+
    bool TQDockWindow::newLine () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the dock window prefers to start a new line in the dock area; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "newLine" property for details.
+
    int TQDockWindow::offset () const
+
    Returns the dock window's preferred offset from the dock area's left edge (top edge for vertical dock areas).
+See the "offset" property for details.
+
    bool TQDockWindow::opaqueMoving () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the dock window will be shown normally whilst it is being moved; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "opaqueMoving" property for details.
+
    TQt::Orientation TQDockWindow::orientation () const
+
    
+Returns the orientation of the dock window.
+
     
    See also orientationChanged().
+
+
    void TQDockWindow::orientationChanged ( Orientation o ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the orientation of the dock window is
+changed. The new orientation is o.
+
+
    Place TQDockWindow::place () const
+
    
+
+
     This function returns where the dock window is placed. This is
+either InDock or OutsideDock.
+
     
    See also TQDockArea::moveDockWindow(), TQDockArea::removeDockWindow(), TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow(), and TQMainWindow::removeDockWindow().
+
+
    void TQDockWindow::placeChanged ( TQDockWindow::Place p ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the dock window is docked (p is InDock), undocked (p is OutsideDock) or moved inside the
+the dock area.
+
     
    See also TQDockArea::moveDockWindow(), TQDockArea::removeDockWindow(), TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow(), and TQMainWindow::removeDockWindow().
+
+
    void TQDockWindow::setCloseMode ( int m ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the close mode of a dock window to m.
+See the "closeMode" property for details.
+
    void TQDockWindow::setFixedExtentHeight ( int h ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the dock window's preferred height for its fixed extent
+(size) to h.
+
     
    See also setFixedExtentWidth().
+
+
    void TQDockWindow::setFixedExtentWidth ( int w ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the dock window's preferred width for its fixed extent (size)
+to w.
+
     
    See also setFixedExtentHeight().
+
+
    void TQDockWindow::setHorizontalStretchable ( bool b )
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
    void TQDockWindow::setHorizontallyStretchable ( bool b ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the dock window is horizontally stretchable to b.
+See the "horizontallyStretchable" property for details.
+
    void TQDockWindow::setMovingEnabled ( bool b ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the user can move the dock window within the dock area, move the dock window to another dock area, or float the dock window to b.
+See the "movingEnabled" property for details.
+
    void TQDockWindow::setNewLine ( bool b ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the dock window prefers to start a new line in the dock area to b.
+See the "newLine" property for details.
+
    void TQDockWindow::setOffset ( int o ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the dock window's preferred offset from the dock area's left edge (top edge for vertical dock areas) to o.
+See the "offset" property for details.
+
    void TQDockWindow::setOpaqueMoving ( bool b ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the dock window will be shown normally whilst it is being moved to b.
+See the "opaqueMoving" property for details.
+
    void TQDockWindow::setOrientation ( Orientation o ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Sets the orientation of the dock window to o. The orientation
+is propagated to the layout boxLayout().
+
     Warning: All undocked TQToolBars will always have a horizontal orientation.
+
+
    void TQDockWindow::setResizeEnabled ( bool b ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the dock window is resizeable to b.
+See the "resizeEnabled" property for details.
+
    void TQDockWindow::setVerticalStretchable ( bool b )
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
    void TQDockWindow::setVerticallyStretchable ( bool b ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the dock window is vertically stretchable to b.
+See the "verticallyStretchable" property for details.
+
    void TQDockWindow::setWidget ( TQWidget * w ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the dock window's main widget to w.
+
     
    See also boxLayout().
+
+
    void TQDockWindow::undock () [virtual slot]
+
    
+
+
     Undocks the TQDockWindow from its current dock area if it is
+docked; otherwise does nothing.
+
     
    See also dock(), TQDockArea::moveDockWindow(), TQDockArea::removeDockWindow(), TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow(), and TQMainWindow::removeDockWindow().
+
+
    void TQDockWindow::visibilityChanged ( bool visible ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the visibility of the dock window
+relatively to its dock area is changed. If visible is TRUE, the
+TQDockWindow is now visible to the dock area, otherwise it has been
+hidden.
+
     A dock window can be hidden if it has a close button which the
+user has clicked. In the case of a TQMainWindow a dock window can
+have its visibility changed (hidden or shown) by clicking its name
+in the dock window menu that lists the TQMainWindow's dock windows.
+
+
    TQWidget * TQDockWindow::widget () const
+
    
+Returns the dock window's main widget.
+
     
    See also setWidget().
+
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    int closeMode
    
+
    This property holds the close mode of a dock window.
+
    Defines when (if ever) the dock window has a close button. The
+choices are Never, Docked (i.e. only when docked), Undocked (only when undocked, i.e. floated) or Always.
+
     The default is Never.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setCloseMode() and get this property's value with closeMode().
+
    bool horizontallyStretchable
    
+
    This property holds whether the dock window is horizontally stretchable.
+
    A dock window is horizontally stretchable if you call
+setHorizontallyStretchable(TRUE) or setResizeEnabled(TRUE).
+
     
    See also resizeEnabled.
+
+
    Bugs and limitations:
+
      
+
    •  Strecthability is broken. You must call setResizeEnabled(TRUE) to get
+proper behavior and even then TQDockWindow does not limit stretchablilty.
+
    
+
    Set this property's value with setHorizontallyStretchable() and get this property's value with isHorizontallyStretchable().
+
    bool movingEnabled
    
+
    This property holds whether the user can move the dock window within the dock area, move the dock window to another dock area, or float the dock window.
+
    This property is TRUE by default.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setMovingEnabled() and get this property's value with isMovingEnabled().
+
    bool newLine
    
+
    This property holds whether the dock window prefers to start a new line in the dock area.
+
    The default is FALSE, i.e. the dock window doesn't require a new
+line in the dock area.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setNewLine() and get this property's value with newLine().
+
    int offset
    
+
    This property holds the dock window's preferred offset from the dock area's left edge (top edge for vertical dock areas).
+
    The default is 0.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setOffset() and get this property's value with offset().
+
    bool opaqueMoving
    
+
    This property holds whether the dock window will be shown normally whilst it is being moved.
+
    If this property is FALSE, (the default), the dock window will be
+represented by an outline rectangle whilst it is being moved.
+
     Warning: Currently opaque moving has some problems and we do not
+recommend using it at this time. We expect to fix these problems
+in a future release.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setOpaqueMoving() and get this property's value with opaqueMoving().
+
    bool resizeEnabled
    
+
    This property holds whether the dock window is resizeable.
+
    A resizeable dock window can be resized using splitter-like
+handles inside a dock area and like every other top level window
+when floating.
+
     A dock window is both horizontally and vertically stretchable if
+you call setResizeEnabled(TRUE).
+
     This property is FALSE by default.
+
     
    See also verticallyStretchable and horizontallyStretchable.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setResizeEnabled() and get this property's value with isResizeEnabled().
+
    bool stretchable
    
+
    This property holds whether the dock window is stretchable in the current orientation().
+
    This property can be set using setHorizontallyStretchable() and
+setVerticallyStretchable(), or with setResizeEnabled().
+
     
    See also resizeEnabled.
+
+
    Bugs and limitations:
+
      
+
    •  Strecthability is broken. You must call setResizeEnabled(TRUE) to get
+proper behavior and even then TQDockWindow does not limit stretchablilty.
+
    
+
    Get this property's value with isStretchable().
+
    bool verticallyStretchable
    
+
    This property holds whether the dock window is vertically stretchable.
+
    A dock window is vertically stretchable if you call
+setVerticallyStretchable(TRUE) or setResizeEnabled(TRUE).
+
     
    See also resizeEnabled.
+
+
    Bugs and limitations:
+
      
+
    •  Strecthability is broken. You must call setResizeEnabled(TRUE) to get
+proper behavior and even then TQDockWindow does not limit stretchablilty.
+
    
+
    Set this property's value with setVerticallyStretchable() and get this property's value with isVerticallyStretchable().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqdragobject.html b/doc/html/ntqdragobject.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f6444ac78
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqdragobject.html
@@ -0,0 +1,220 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQDragObject Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQDragObject Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQDragObject class encapsulates MIME-based data
+transfer.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqdragobject.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject and TQMimeSource.
+
    Inherited by TQStoredDrag, TQTextDrag, TQImageDrag, and TQIconDrag.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • virtual bool drag ( DragMode mode )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
     The TQDragObject class encapsulates MIME-based data
+transfer.
+
     
+
     TQDragObject is the base class for all data that needs to be
+transferred between and within applications, both for drag and
+drop and for the clipboard.
+
     See the Drag-and-drop documentation for an
+overview of how to provide drag and drop in your application.
+
     See the TQClipboard documentation for an overview of how to provide
+cut-and-paste in your application.
+
     The drag() function is used to start a drag operation. You can
+specify the DragMode in the call or use one of the convenience
+functions dragCopy(), dragMove() or dragLink(). The drag source
+where the data originated is retrieved with source(). If the data
+was dropped on a widget within the application, target() will
+return a pointer to that widget. Specify the pixmap to display
+during the drag with setPixmap().
+
    See also Drag And Drop Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQDragObject::DragMode
    
+
+
     This enum describes the possible drag modes.
+
      
+
    • TQDragObject::DragDefault - The mode is determined heuristically.
+
    • TQDragObject::DragCopy - The data is copied, never moved.
+
    • TQDragObject::DragMove - The data is moved, if dragged at all.
+
    • TQDragObject::DragLink - The data is linked, if dragged at all.
+
    • TQDragObject::DragCopyOrMove - The user chooses the mode by using a
+control key to switch from the default.
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQDragObject::TQDragObject ( TQWidget * dragSource = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a drag object called name, which is a child of dragSource.
+
     Note that the drag object will be deleted when dragSource is
+deleted.
+
+
    TQDragObject::~TQDragObject () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the drag object, canceling any drag and drop operation in
+which it is involved, and frees up the storage used.
+
+
    bool TQDragObject::drag ()
+
    
+Starts a drag operation using the contents of this object, using
+DragDefault mode.
+
     The function returns TRUE if the caller should delete the original
+copy of the dragged data (but see target()); otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     If the drag contains references to information (e.g. file names
+in a TQUriDrag are references) then the return value should always
+be ignored, as the target is expected to manipulate the
+referred-to content directly. On X11 the return value should
+always be correct anyway, but on Windows this is not necessarily
+the case (e.g. the file manager starts a background process to
+move files, so the source must not delete the files!)
+
     Note that on Windows the drag operation will spin a blocking modal
+event loop that will not dispatch any TQTimers.
+
+
    Example: dirview/dirview.cpp.
+
    bool TQDragObject::drag ( DragMode mode ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Starts a drag operation using the contents of this object.
+
     At this point, the object becomes owned by TQt, not the
+application. You should not delete the drag object or anything it
+references. The actual transfer of data to the target application
+will be done during future event processing - after that time the
+drag object will be deleted.
+
     Returns TRUE if the dragged data was dragged as a move,
+indicating that the caller should remove the original source of
+the data (the drag object must continue to have a copy); otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     The mode specifies the drag mode (see
+TQDragObject::DragMode.) Normally one of the simpler drag(),
+dragMove(), or dragCopy() functions would be used instead.
+
+
    void TQDragObject::dragCopy ()
+
    
+Starts a drag operation using the contents of this object, using
+DragCopy mode. Be sure to read the constraints described in
+drag().
+
     
    See also drag(), dragMove(), and dragLink().
+
+
    Example: iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp.
+
    void TQDragObject::dragLink ()
+
    
+Starts a drag operation using the contents of this object, using
+DragLink mode. Be sure to read the constraints described in
+drag().
+
     
    See also drag(), dragCopy(), and dragMove().
+
+
    bool TQDragObject::dragMove ()
+
    
+Starts a drag operation using the contents of this object, using
+DragMove mode. Be sure to read the constraints described in
+drag().
+
     
    See also drag(), dragCopy(), and dragLink().
+
+
    TQPixmap TQDragObject::pixmap () const
+
    
+Returns the currently set pixmap (which isNull() if none is set).
+
+
    TQPoint TQDragObject::pixmapHotSpot () const
+
    
+Returns the currently set pixmap hotspot.
+
+
    void TQDragObject::setPixmap ( TQPixmap pm, const TQPoint & hotspot ) [virtual]
+
    
+Set the pixmap pm to display while dragging the object. The
+platform-specific implementation will use this where it can - so
+provide a small masked pixmap, and do not assume that the user
+will actually see it. For example, cursors on Windows 95 are of
+limited size.
+
     The hotspot is the point on (or off) the pixmap that should be
+under the cursor as it is dragged. It is relative to the top-left
+pixel of the pixmap.
+
     Warning: We have seen problems with drag cursors on different
+graphics hardware and driver software on Windows. Setting the
+graphics acceleration in the display settings down one tick solved
+the problems in all cases.
+
+
    Example: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
+
    void TQDragObject::setPixmap ( TQPixmap pm ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Uses a hotspot that positions the pixmap below and to the right of
+the mouse pointer. This allows the user to clearly see the point
+on the window which they are dragging the data onto.
+
+
    TQWidget * TQDragObject::source ()
+
    
+Returns a pointer to the drag source where this object originated.
+
+
    TQWidget * TQDragObject::target () [static]
+
    
+After the drag completes, this function will return the TQWidget
+which received the drop, or 0 if the data was dropped on another
+application.
+
     This can be useful for detecting the case where drag and drop is
+to and from the same widget.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqdropsite.html b/doc/html/ntqdropsite.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d46035f73
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqdropsite.html
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQDropSite Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQDropSite Class Reference
    [obsolete]
    
+
+
    The TQDropSite class provides nothing and does nothing.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqdropsite.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQDropSite class provides nothing and does nothing.
+
     This class is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     If your code uses it, you can safely delete it.
+
     It was used in TQt 1.x to do some drag and drop; that has since been
+folded into TQWidget.
+
     For detailed information about drag-and-drop, see the TQDragObject class.
+
     
    See also TQDragObject, TQTextDrag, and TQImageDrag.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQDropSite::TQDropSite ( TQWidget * self )
+
    
+Constructs a TQDropSite to handle events for the widget self.
+
     Pass this as the self parameter.
+This enables dropping by calling TQWidget::setAcceptDrops(TRUE).
+
+
    TQDropSite::~TQDropSite () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the drop site.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqeditorfactory.html b/doc/html/ntqeditorfactory.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..015374086
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqeditorfactory.html
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQEditorFactory Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQEditorFactory Class Reference
    [sql module]
    
+
+
    The TQEditorFactory class is used to create editor widgets
+for TQVariant data types.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqeditorfactory.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject.
+
    Inherited by TQSqlEditorFactory.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQEditorFactory class is used to create editor widgets
+for TQVariant data types.
+
     
+
+
     Each editor factory provides the createEditor() function which
+given a TQVariant will create and return a TQWidget that can edit
+that TQVariant. For example if you have a TQVariant::String type, a
+TQLineEdit would be the default editor returned, whereas a
+TQVariant::Int's default editor would be a TQSpinBox.
+
     If you want to create different editors for fields with the same
+data type, subclass TQEditorFactory and reimplement the
+createEditor() function.
+
    See also Database Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQEditorFactory::TQEditorFactory ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs an editor factory with parent parent, called name.
+
+
    TQEditorFactory::~TQEditorFactory ()
+
    
+Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
+
+
    TQWidget * TQEditorFactory::createEditor ( TQWidget * parent, const TQVariant & v ) [virtual]
+
    
+Creates and returns the appropriate editor for the TQVariant v.
+If the TQVariant is invalid, 0 is returned. The parent is passed
+to the appropriate editor's constructor.
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQSqlEditorFactory.
+
    TQEditorFactory * TQEditorFactory::defaultFactory () [static]
+
    
+Returns an instance of a default editor factory.
+
+
    void TQEditorFactory::installDefaultFactory ( TQEditorFactory * factory ) [static]
+
    
+Replaces the default editor factory with factory.
+TQEditorFactory takes ownership of factory, and destroys it when it is no longer needed.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqerrormessage.html b/doc/html/ntqerrormessage.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1876f4319
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqerrormessage.html
@@ -0,0 +1,105 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQErrorMessage Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQErrorMessage Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQErrorMessage class provides an error message display dialog.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqerrormessage.h>
+
    Inherits TQDialog.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
      
+
    • void message ( const TQString & m )
      • 
+
    
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+ 
+
     The TQErrorMessage class provides an error message display dialog.
+
     
+
+
     This is basically a TQLabel and a "show this message again" checkbox which
+remembers what not to show.
+
     There are two ways to use this class:
+
      
+
    1.  For production applications. In this context the class can be used to
+display messages which you don't need the user to see more than once. To use
+TQErrorMessage like this, you create the dialog in the usual way and call the
+message() slot, or connect signals to it.
+
       
    2.  For developers. In this context the static qtHandler() installs
+a message handler using qInstallMsgHandler() and creates a TQErrorMessage
+that displays qDebug(), qWarning() and qFatal() messages.
+
    
+
     In both cases TQErrorMessage will queue pending messages, and display
+them (or not) in order, as soon as the user presses Enter or clicks OK
+after seeing each message.
+
     
     
+
     
    See also TQMessageBox, TQStatusBar::message(), Dialog Classes, and Miscellaneous Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQErrorMessage::TQErrorMessage ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
      Constructs and installs an error handler window.
+The parent parent and name name are passed on to the TQDialog
+constructor.
+
+
    TQErrorMessage::~TQErrorMessage ()
+
     Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.  Notably,
+the list of "do not show again" messages is deleted. 
+
    void TQErrorMessage::message ( const TQString & m ) [slot]
+
     Shows message m and returns immediately.  If the user has requested
+that m not be shown, this function does nothing.
+
     Normally, m is shown at once, but if there are pending messages,
+m is queued for later display.
+
+
    TQErrorMessage * TQErrorMessage::qtHandler () [static]
+
      Returns a pointer to a TQErrorMessage object that outputs the
+default TQt messages.  This function creates such an object, if there
+isn't one already.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqeucjpcodec.html b/doc/html/ntqeucjpcodec.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e082807f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqeucjpcodec.html
@@ -0,0 +1,116 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQEucJpCodec Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQEucJpCodec Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQEucJpCodec class provides conversion to and from EUC-JP character sets.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqeucjpcodec.h>
+
    Inherits TQTextCodec.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+ 
+
+
+
     The TQEucJpCodec class provides conversion to and from EUC-JP character sets.
+
     More precisely, the TQEucJpCodec class subclasses TQTextCodec to
+provide support for EUC-JP, the main legacy encoding for Unix
+machines in Japan.
+
     The environment variable UNICODEMAP_JP can be used to fine-tune
+TQJisCodec, TQSjisCodec and TQEucJpCodec. The TQJisCodec
+documentation describes how to use this variable.
+
     Most of the code here was written by Serika Kurusugawa,
+a.k.a. Junji Takagi, and is included in TQt with the author's
+permission and the grateful thanks of the Trolltech team. Here is
+the copyright statement for that code:
+
     
+
     Copyright (C) 1999 Serika Kurusugawa. All rights reserved.
+
     Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+are met:
+
      
+
    1.  Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+
    2.  Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+
    
+
     THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS".
+ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSETQUENTIAL
+DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+SUCH DAMAGE.
+
    See also Internationalization with TQt.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQEucJpCodec::TQEucJpCodec ()
+
    
+Constructs a TQEucJpCodec.
+
+
    TQEucJpCodec::~TQEucJpCodec ()
+
    
+Destroys the codec.
+
+
    int TQEucJpCodec::mibEnum () const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns 18.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQTextCodec.
+
    const char * TQEucJpCodec::mimeName () const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the codec's mime name.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQTextCodec.
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqeuckrcodec.html b/doc/html/ntqeuckrcodec.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..63b7a9f3e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqeuckrcodec.html
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQEucKrCodec Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQEucKrCodec Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQEucKrCodec class provides conversion to and from EUC-KR character sets.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqeuckrcodec.h>
+
    Inherits TQTextCodec.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • virtual const char * mimeName () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+ 
+
+
+
     The TQEucKrCodec class provides conversion to and from EUC-KR character sets.
+
     The TQEucKrCodec class subclasses TQTextCodec to provide support for
+EUC-KR, the main legacy encoding for UNIX machines in Korea.
+
     It was largely written by Mizi Research Inc. Here is the copyright
+statement for the code as it was at the point of contribution.
+Trolltech's subsequent modifications are covered by the usual
+copyright for TQt.
+
     
+
     Copyright (C) 1999-2000 Mizi Research Inc. All rights reserved.
+
     Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+are met: 
      
+
    1.  Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+
    2.  Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+
    
+
     THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
+ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSETQUENTIAL
+DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+SUCH DAMAGE.
+
    See also Internationalization with TQt.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    const char * TQEucKrCodec::mimeName () const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the codec's mime name.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQTextCodec.
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqevent.html b/doc/html/ntqevent.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4137dfdba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqevent.html
@@ -0,0 +1,193 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQEvent Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQEvent Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQEvent class is the base class of all
+event classes. Event objects contain event parameters.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqevent.h>
+
    Inherits TQt.
+
    Inherited by TQTimerEvent, TQMouseEvent, TQWheelEvent, TQTabletEvent, TQKeyEvent, TQFocusEvent, TQPaintEvent, TQMoveEvent, TQResizeEvent, TQCloseEvent, TQIconDragEvent, TQShowEvent, TQHideEvent, TQContextMenuEvent, TQIMEvent, TQDropEvent, TQDragLeaveEvent, TQChildEvent, and TQCustomEvent.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • enum Type { None = 0, Timer = 1, MouseButtonPress = 2, MouseButtonRelease = 3, MouseButtonDblClick = 4, MouseMove = 5, KeyPress = 6, KeyRelease = 7, FocusIn = 8, FocusOut = 9, Enter = 10, Leave = 11, Paint = 12, Move = 13, Resize = 14, Create = 15, Destroy = 16, Show = 17, Hide = 18, Close = 19, Quit = 20, Reparent = 21, ShowMinimized = 22, ShowNormal = 23, WindowActivate = 24, WindowDeactivate = 25, ShowToParent = 26, HideToParent = 27, ShowMaximized = 28, ShowFullScreen = 29, Accel = 30, Wheel = 31, AccelAvailable = 32, CaptionChange = 33, IconChange = 34, ParentFontChange = 35, ApplicationFontChange = 36, ParentPaletteChange = 37, ApplicationPaletteChange = 38, PaletteChange = 39, Clipboard = 40, Speech = 42, SockAct = 50, AccelOverride = 51, DeferredDelete = 52, DragEnter = 60, DragMove = 61, DragLeave = 62, Drop = 63, DragResponse = 64, ChildInserted = 70, ChildRemoved = 71, LayoutHint = 72, ShowWindowRequest = 73, WindowBlocked = 74, WindowUnblocked = 75, ActivateControl = 80, DeactivateControl = 81, ContextMenu = 82, IMStart = 83, IMCompose = 84, IMEnd = 85, Accessibility = 86, TabletMove = 87, LocaleChange = 88, LanguageChange = 89, LayoutDirectionChange = 90, Style = 91, TabletPress = 92, TabletRelease = 93, OkRequest = 94, HelpRequest = 95, WindowStateChange = 96, IconDrag = 97, User = 1000, MaxUser = 65535 }
      • 
+
    • TQEvent ( Type type )
      • 
+
    • virtual ~TQEvent ()
      • 
+
    • Type type () const
      • 
+
    • bool spontaneous () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQEvent class is the base class of all
+event classes. Event objects contain event parameters.
+
     
+
+
     TQt's main event loop (TQApplication::exec()) fetches native window
+system events from the event queue, translates them into TQEvents
+and sends the translated events to TQObjects.
+
     In general, events come from the underlying window system
+(spontaneous() returns TRUE) but it is also possible to manually
+send events using TQApplication::sendEvent() and
+TQApplication::postEvent() (spontaneous() returns FALSE).
+
     TQObjects receive events by having their TQObject::event() function
+called. The function can be reimplemented in subclasses to
+customize event handling and add additional event types;
+TQWidget::event() is a notable example. By default, events are
+dispatched to event handlers like TQObject::timerEvent() and
+TQWidget::mouseMoveEvent(). TQObject::installEventFilter() allows an
+object to intercept events destined for another object.
+
     The basic TQEvent contains only an event type parameter.
+Subclasses of TQEvent contain additional parameters that describe
+the particular event.
+
     
    See also TQObject::event(), TQObject::installEventFilter(), TQWidget::event(), TQApplication::sendEvent(), TQApplication::postEvent(), TQApplication::processEvents(), Environment Classes, and Event Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQEvent::Type
    
+
+
     This enum type defines the valid event types in TQt. The event
+types and the specialized classes for each type are these:
+
      
+
    • TQEvent::None - Not an event.
+
    • TQEvent::Accessibility - Accessibility information is requested
+
    • TQEvent::Timer - Regular timer events, TQTimerEvent.
+
    • TQEvent::MouseButtonPress - Mouse press, TQMouseEvent.
+
    • TQEvent::MouseButtonRelease - Mouse release, TQMouseEvent.
+
    • TQEvent::MouseButtonDblClick - Mouse press again, TQMouseEvent.
+
    • TQEvent::MouseMove - Mouse move, TQMouseEvent.
+
    • TQEvent::KeyPress - Key press (including Shift, for example), TQKeyEvent.
+
    • TQEvent::KeyRelease - Key release, TQKeyEvent.
+
    • TQEvent::IMStart - The start of input method composition, TQIMEvent.
+
    • TQEvent::IMCompose - Input method composition is taking place, TQIMEvent.
+
    • TQEvent::IMEnd - The end of input method composition, TQIMEvent.
+
    • TQEvent::FocusIn - Widget gains keyboard focus, TQFocusEvent.
+
    • TQEvent::FocusOut - Widget loses keyboard focus, TQFocusEvent.
+
    • TQEvent::Enter - Mouse enters widget's boundaries.
+
    • TQEvent::Leave - Mouse leaves widget's boundaries.
+
    • TQEvent::Paint - Screen update necessary, TQPaintEvent.
+
    • TQEvent::Move - Widget's position changed, TQMoveEvent.
+
    • TQEvent::Resize - Widget's size changed, TQResizeEvent.
+
    • TQEvent::Show - Widget was shown on screen, TQShowEvent.
+
    • TQEvent::Hide - Widget was hidden, TQHideEvent.
+
    • TQEvent::ShowToParent - A child widget has been shown.
+
    • TQEvent::HideToParent - A child widget has been hidden.
+
    • TQEvent::Close - Widget was closed (permanently), TQCloseEvent.
+
    • TQEvent::ShowNormal - Widget should be shown normally (obsolete).
+
    • TQEvent::ShowMaximized - Widget should be shown maximized (obsolete).
+
    • TQEvent::ShowMinimized - Widget should be shown minimized (obsolete).
+
    • TQEvent::ShowFullScreen - Widget should be shown full-screen (obsolete).
+
    • TQEvent::ShowWindowRequest - Widget's window should be shown (obsolete).
+
    • TQEvent::DeferredDelete - The object will be deleted after it has
+cleaned up.
+
    • TQEvent::Accel - Key press in child for shortcut key handling, TQKeyEvent.
+
    • TQEvent::Wheel - Mouse wheel rolled, TQWheelEvent.
+
    • TQEvent::ContextMenu - Context popup menu, TQContextMenuEvent
+
    • TQEvent::AccelOverride - Key press in child, for overriding shortcut key handling, TQKeyEvent.
+
    • TQEvent::AccelAvailable - internal.
+
    • TQEvent::WindowActivate - Window was activated.
+
    • TQEvent::WindowDeactivate - Window was deactivated.
+
    • TQEvent::CaptionChange - Widget's caption changed.
+
    • TQEvent::IconChange - Widget's icon changed.
+
    • TQEvent::ParentFontChange - Font of the parent widget changed.
+
    • TQEvent::ApplicationFontChange - Default application font changed.
+
    • TQEvent::PaletteChange - Palette of the widget changed.
+
    • TQEvent::ParentPaletteChange - Palette of the parent widget changed.
+
    • TQEvent::ApplicationPaletteChange - Default application palette changed.
+
    • TQEvent::Clipboard - Clipboard contents have changed.
+
    • TQEvent::SockAct - Socket activated, used to implement TQSocketNotifier.
+
    • TQEvent::DragEnter - A drag-and-drop enters widget, TQDragEnterEvent.
+
    • TQEvent::DragMove - A drag-and-drop is in progress, TQDragMoveEvent.
+
    • TQEvent::DragLeave - A drag-and-drop leaves widget, TQDragLeaveEvent.
+
    • TQEvent::Drop - A drag-and-drop is completed, TQDropEvent.
+
    • TQEvent::DragResponse - Internal event used by TQt on some platforms.
+
    • TQEvent::ChildInserted - Object gets a child, TQChildEvent.
+
    • TQEvent::ChildRemoved - Object loses a child, TQChildEvent.
+
    • TQEvent::LayoutHint - Widget child has changed layout properties.
+
    • TQEvent::ActivateControl - Internal event used by TQt on some platforms.
+
    • TQEvent::DeactivateControl - Internal event used by TQt on some platforms.
+
    • TQEvent::LanguageChange - The application translation changed, TQTranslator
+
    • TQEvent::LayoutDirectionChange - The direction of layouts changed
+
    • TQEvent::LocaleChange - The system locale changed
+
    • TQEvent::Quit - Reserved.
+
    • TQEvent::Create - Reserved.
+
    • TQEvent::Destroy - Reserved.
+
    • TQEvent::Reparent - Reserved.
+
    • TQEvent::Speech - Reserved for speech input.
+
    • TQEvent::TabletMove - A Wacom Tablet Move Event.
+
    • TQEvent::Style - Internal use only
+
    • TQEvent::TabletPress - A Wacom Tablet Press Event
+
    • TQEvent::TabletRelease - A Wacom Tablet Release Event
+
    • TQEvent::OkRequest - Internal event used by TQt on some platforms.
+
    • TQEvent::HelpRequest - Internal event used by TQt on some platforms.
+
    • TQEvent::IconDrag - Internal event used by TQt on some platforms when proxy icon is dragged.
+
    • TQEvent::WindowStateChange - The window's state, i.e. minimized,
+maximized or full-screen, has changed. See TQWidget::windowState().
+
    • TQEvent::WindowBlocked - The window is modally blocked
+
    • TQEvent::WindowUnblocked - The window leaves modal blocking
+
    • TQEvent::User - User defined event.
+
    • TQEvent::MaxUser - Last user event id.
+
     User events should have values between User and MaxUser inclusive.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQEvent::TQEvent ( Type type )
+
    
+
+
     Contructs an event object of type type.
+
+
    TQEvent::~TQEvent () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the event. If it was posted,
+it will be removed from the list of events to be posted.
+
+
    bool TQEvent::spontaneous () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the event originated outside the application, i.e.
+it is a system event; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    Type TQEvent::type () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the event type.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqeventloop.html b/doc/html/ntqeventloop.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2fe9c05ac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqeventloop.html
@@ -0,0 +1,280 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQEventLoop Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQEventLoop Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQEventLoop class manages the event queue.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqeventloop.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject.
+
    Inherited by TQMotif.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQEventLoop class manages the event queue.
+
     
+
+
     It receives events from the window system and other sources.  It
+then sends them to TQApplication for processing and delivery.
+
     TQEventLoop allows the application programmer to have more control
+over event delivery.  Programs that perform long operations can
+call either processOneEvent() or processEvents() with various
+ProcessEvent values OR'ed together to control which events should
+be delivered.
+
     TQEventLoop also allows the integration of an external event loop
+with the TQt event loop.  The Motif Extension included with TQt
+includes a reimplementation of TQEventLoop for merging TQt and Motif
+events together.
+
     To use your own instance of TQEventLoop or TQEventLoop subclass create 
+it before you create the TQApplication object.
+
    See also Main Window and Related Classes and Event Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQEventLoop::ProcessEvents
     
+
     This enum controls the types of events processed by the
+processEvents() functions.
+
      
+
    • TQEventLoop::AllEvents - All events are processed
+
    • TQEventLoop::ExcludeUserInput - Do not process user input events.
+( ButtonPress, KeyPress, etc. )
+
    • TQEventLoop::ExcludeSocketNotifiers - Do not process socket notifier
+events.
+
    • TQEventLoop::WaitForMore - Wait for events if no pending events
+are available.
+
     
    See also processEvents().
+
+
    TQEventLoop::ProcessEventsFlags
     
+A typedef to allow various ProcessEvents values to be OR'ed together.
+
     
    See also ProcessEvents.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQEventLoop::TQEventLoop ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Creates a TQEventLoop object, this object becomes the global event loop object.
+There can only be one event loop object. The TQEventLoop is usually constructed 
+by calling TQApplication::eventLoop(). To create your own event loop object create 
+it before you instantiate the TQApplication object.
+
     The parent and name arguments are passed on to the TQObject constructor.
+
+
    TQEventLoop::~TQEventLoop ()
+
    
+Destructs the TQEventLoop object.
+
+
    void TQEventLoop::aboutToBlock () [signal]
+
     
+
     This signal is emitted before the event loop calls a function that
+could block.
+
     
    See also awake().
+
+
    int TQEventLoop::activateSocketNotifiers ()
+
     
+
     Activates all pending socket notifiers and returns the number of
+socket notifiers that were activated.
+
+
    int TQEventLoop::activateTimers ()
+
     
+
     Activates all TQt timers and returns the number of timers that were
+activated.
+
     TQEventLoop subclasses that do their own timer handling need to
+call this after the time returned by timeToWait() has elapsed.
+
     Note: This function is only useful on systems where select() is
+used to block the eventloop.  On Windows, this function always
+returns 0.  On MacOS X, this function always returns 0 when the
+GUI is enabled.  On MacOS X, this function returns the documented
+value when the GUI is disabled.
+
+
    void TQEventLoop::awake () [signal]
+
     
+
     This signal is emitted after the event loop returns from a
+function that could block.
+
     
    See also wakeUp() and aboutToBlock().
+
+
    int TQEventLoop::enterLoop () [virtual]
+
     
+
     This function enters the main event loop (recursively). Do not call
+it unless you really know what you are doing.
+
+
    int TQEventLoop::exec () [virtual]
+
    
+Enters the main event loop and waits until exit() is called, and
+returns the value that was set to exit().
+
     It is necessary to call this function to start event handling. The
+main event loop receives events from the window system and
+dispatches these to the application widgets.
+
     Generally speaking, no user interaction can take place before
+calling exec(). As a special case, modal widgets like TQMessageBox
+can be used before calling exec(), because modal widgets call
+exec() to start a local event loop.
+
     To make your application perform idle processing, i.e. executing a
+special function whenever there are no pending events, use a
+TQTimer with 0 timeout. More advanced idle processing schemes can
+be achieved using processEvents().
+
     
    See also TQApplication::quit(), exit(), and processEvents().
+
+
    void TQEventLoop::exit ( int retcode = 0 ) [virtual]
+
     
+
     Tells the event loop to exit with a return code.
+
     After this function has been called, the event loop returns from
+the call to exec(). The exec() function returns retcode.
+
     By convention, a retcode of 0 means success, and any non-zero
+value indicates an error.
+
     Note that unlike the C library function of the same name, this
+function does return to the caller -- it is event processing that
+stops.
+
     
    See also TQApplication::quit() and exec().
+
+
    void TQEventLoop::exitLoop () [virtual]
+
     
+
     This function exits from a recursive call to the main event loop.
+Do not call it unless you really know what you are doing.
+
+
    bool TQEventLoop::hasPendingEvents () const [virtual]
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if there is an event waiting, otherwise it returns FALSE.
+
+
    int TQEventLoop::loopLevel () const [virtual]
+
     
+
     Returns the current loop level.
+
+
    void TQEventLoop::processEvents ( ProcessEventsFlags flags, int maxTime )
+
    
+Process pending events that match flags for a maximum of maxTime milliseconds, or until there are no more events to
+process, which ever is shorter.
+
     This function is especially useful if you have a long running
+operation and want to show its progress without allowing user
+input, i.e. by using the ExcludeUserInput flag.
+
     NOTE: This function will not process events continuously; it
+returns after all available events are processed.
+
     NOTE: Specifying the WaitForMore flag makes no sense and will
+be ignored.
+
+
    bool TQEventLoop::processEvents ( ProcessEventsFlags flags ) [virtual]
+
    
+
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Processes pending events that match flags until there are no
+more events to process.
+
     This function is especially useful if you have a long running
+operation and want to show its progress without allowing user
+input, i.e. by using the ExcludeUserInput flag.
+
     If the WaitForMore flag is set in flags, the behavior of
+this function is as follows:
+
     
      
+
       
    •  If events are available, this function returns after processing
+them.
+
       
    •  If no events are available, this function will wait until more
+are available and return after processing newly available events.
+
       
    
+
     If the WaitForMore flag is not set in flags, and no
+events are available, this function will return immediately.
+
     NOTE: This function will not process events continuously; it
+returns after all available events are processed.
+
     This function returns TRUE if an event was processed; otherwise it
+returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also ProcessEvents and hasPendingEvents().
+
+
    void TQEventLoop::registerSocketNotifier ( TQSocketNotifier * notifier ) [virtual]
+
     
+
     Registers notifier with the event loop.  Subclasses need to
+reimplement this method to tie a socket notifier into another
+event loop.  Reimplementations MUST call the base
+implementation.
+
+
    void TQEventLoop::setSocketNotifierPending ( TQSocketNotifier * notifier )
+
     
+
     Marks notifier as pending.  The socket notifier will be
+activated the next time activateSocketNotifiers() is called.
+
+
    int TQEventLoop::timeToWait () const
+
     
+
     Returns the number of milliseconds that TQt needs to handle its
+timers or -1 if there are no timers running.
+
     TQEventLoop subclasses that do their own timer handling need to use
+this to make sure that TQt's timers continue to work.
+
     Note: This function is only useful on systems where select() is
+used to block the eventloop.  On Windows, this function always
+returns -1.  On MacOS X, this function always returns -1 when the
+GUI is enabled.  On MacOS X, this function returns the documented
+value when the GUI is disabled.
+
+
    void TQEventLoop::unregisterSocketNotifier ( TQSocketNotifier * notifier ) [virtual]
+
     
+
     Unregisters notifier from the event loop.  Subclasses need to
+reimplement this method to tie a socket notifier into another
+event loop.  Reimplementations MUST call the base
+implementation.
+
+
    void TQEventLoop::wakeUp () [virtual]
+
    Note: This function is thread-safe when TQt is built withthread support.
    
+ 
+
+
     Wakes up the event loop.
+
     
    See also awake().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqfile.html b/doc/html/ntqfile.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2c5612b00
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqfile.html
@@ -0,0 +1,503 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQFile Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQFile Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQFile class is an I/O device that operates on files.
+More...
+
    Almost all the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support. The exceptions are setEncodingFunction(), setDecodingFunction(), and setErrorString().
+
    #include <ntqfile.h>
+
    Inherits TQIODevice.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQFile ()
      • 
+
    • TQFile ( const TQString & name )
      • 
+
    • ~TQFile ()
      • 
+
    • TQString name () const
      • 
+
    • void setName ( const TQString & name )
      • 
+
    • typedef TQCString (* EncoderFn ) ( const TQString & fileName )
      • 
+
    • typedef TQString (* DecoderFn ) ( const TQCString & localfileName )
      • 
+
    • bool exists () const
      • 
+
    • bool remove ()
      • 
+
    • virtual bool open ( int m )
      • 
+
    • bool open ( int m, FILE * f )
      • 
+
    • bool open ( int m, int f )
      • 
+
    • virtual void close ()
      • 
+
    • virtual void flush ()
      • 
+
    • virtual Offset size () const
      • 
+
    • virtual bool atEnd () const
      • 
+
    • virtual Q_LONG readLine ( char * p, Q_ULONG maxlen )
      • 
+
    • Q_LONG readLine ( TQString & s, Q_ULONG maxlen )
      • 
+
    • virtual int getch ()
      • 
+
    • virtual int putch ( int ch )
      • 
+
    • virtual int ungetch ( int ch )
      • 
+
    • int handle () const
      • 
+
    • TQString errorString () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
+
    Important Inherited Members
    
+
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
+The TQFile class is an I/O device that operates on files.
+
     
+
+
     TQFile is an I/O device for reading and writing binary and text
+files. A TQFile may be used by itself or more conveniently with a
+TQDataStream or TQTextStream.
+
     The file name is usually passed in the constructor but can be
+changed with setName(). You can check for a file's existence with
+exists() and remove a file with remove().
+
     The file is opened with open(), closed with close() and flushed
+with flush(). Data is usually read and written using TQDataStream
+or TQTextStream, but you can read with readBlock() and readLine()
+and write with writeBlock(). TQFile also supports getch(),
+ungetch() and putch().
+
     The size of the file is returned by size(). You can get the
+current file position or move to a new file position using the
+at() functions. If you've reached the end of the file, atEnd()
+returns TRUE. The file handle is returned by handle().
+
     Here is a code fragment that uses TQTextStream to read a text file
+line by line. It prints each line with a line number.
+
    +    TQStringList lines;
+    TQFile file( "file.txt" );
+    if ( file.open( IO_ReadOnly ) ) {
+        TQTextStream stream( &file );
+        TQString line;
+        int i = 1;
+        while ( !stream.atEnd() ) {
+            line = stream.readLine(); // line of text excluding '\n'
+            printf( "%3d: %s\n", i++, line.latin1() );
+            lines += line;
+        }
+        file.close();
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     Writing text is just as easy. The following example shows how to
+write the data we read into the string list from the previous
+example:
+
    +    TQFile file( "file.txt" );
+    if ( file.open( IO_WriteOnly ) ) {
+        TQTextStream stream( &file );
+        for ( TQStringList::Iterator it = lines.begin(); it != lines.end(); ++it )
+            stream << *it << "\n";
+        file.close();
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     The TQFileInfo class holds detailed information about a file, such
+as access permissions, file dates and file types.
+
     The TQDir class manages directories and lists of file names.
+
     TQt uses Unicode file names. If you want to do your own I/O on Unix
+systems you may want to use encodeName() (and decodeName()) to
+convert the file name into the local encoding.
+
     
+
     
    See also TQDataStream, TQTextStream, and Input/Output and Networking.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQFile::DecoderFn
    
+
+
     This is used by TQFile::setDecodingFunction().
+
+
    TQFile::EncoderFn
    
+
+
     This is used by TQFile::setEncodingFunction().
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQFile::TQFile ()
+
    
+Constructs a TQFile with no name.
+
+
    TQFile::TQFile ( const TQString & name )
+
    
+Constructs a TQFile with a file name name.
+
     
    See also setName().
+
+
    TQFile::~TQFile ()
+
    
+Destroys a TQFile. Calls close().
+
+
    bool TQFile::atEnd () const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the end of file has been reached; otherwise returns FALSE.
+If TQFile has not been open()'d, then the behavior is undefined.
+
     
    See also size().
+
+
    Example: distributor/distributor.ui.h.
+
    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
+
    void TQFile::close () [virtual]
+
    
+Closes an open file.
+
     The file is not closed if it was opened with an existing file handle.
+If the existing file handle is a FILE*, the file is flushed.
+If the existing file handle is an int file descriptor, nothing
+is done to the file.
+
     Some "write-behind" filesystems may report an unspecified error on
+closing the file. These errors only indicate that something may
+have gone wrong since the previous open(). In such a case status()
+reports IO_UnspecifiedError after close(), otherwise IO_Ok.
+
     
    See also open() and flush().
+
+
    Examples: chart/chartform_files.cpp, distributor/distributor.ui.h, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, qdir/qdir.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, and xml/outliner/outlinetree.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
+
    TQString TQFile::decodeName ( const TQCString & localFileName ) [static]
+
    
+This does the reverse of TQFile::encodeName() using localFileName.
+
     
    See also setDecodingFunction().
+
+
    Example: distributor/distributor.ui.h.
+
    TQCString TQFile::encodeName ( const TQString & fileName ) [static]
+
    
+When you use TQFile, TQFileInfo, and TQDir to access the file system
+with TQt, you can use Unicode file names. On Unix, these file names
+are converted to an 8-bit encoding. If you want to do your own
+file I/O on Unix, you should convert the file name using this
+function. On Windows NT/2000, Unicode file names are supported
+directly in the file system and this function should be avoided.
+On Windows 95, non-Latin1 locales are not supported.
+
     By default, this function converts fileName to the local 8-bit
+encoding determined by the user's locale. This is sufficient for
+file names that the user chooses. File names hard-coded into the
+application should only use 7-bit ASCII filename characters.
+
     The conversion scheme can be changed using setEncodingFunction().
+This might be useful if you wish to give the user an option to
+store file names in UTF-8, etc., but be aware that such file names
+would probably then be unrecognizable when seen by other programs.
+
     
    See also decodeName().
+
+
    Example: distributor/distributor.ui.h.
+
    TQString TQFile::errorString () const
+
    
+Returns a human-readable description of the reason of an error that occurred
+on the device. The error described by the string corresponds to changes of
+TQIODevice::status(). If the status is reset, the error string is also reset.
+
     The returned strings are not translated with the TQObject::tr() or
+TQApplication::translate() functions. They are marked as translatable
+strings in the "TQFile" context. Before you show the string to the user you
+should translate it first, for example:
+
     
    +        TQFile f( "address.dat" );
+        if ( !f.open( IO_ReadOnly ) {
+            TQMessageBox::critical(
+                this,
+                tr("Open failed"),
+                tr("Could not open file for reading: %1").arg( qApp->translate("TQFile",f.errorString()) )
+                );
+            return;
+        }
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also TQIODevice::status(), TQIODevice::resetStatus(), and setErrorString().
+
+
    bool TQFile::exists ( const TQString & fileName ) [static]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the file given by fileName exists; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
+
    Examples: chart/chartform.cpp, dirview/dirview.cpp, and helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp.
+
    bool TQFile::exists () const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns TRUE if this file exists; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also name().
+
+
    void TQFile::flush () [virtual]
+
    
+Flushes the file buffer to the disk.
+
     close() also flushes the file buffer.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
+
    int TQFile::getch () [virtual]
+
    
+Reads a single byte/character from the file.
+
     Returns the byte/character read, or -1 if the end of the file has
+been reached.
+
     
    See also putch() and ungetch().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
+
    int TQFile::handle () const
+
    
+Returns the file handle of the file.
+
     This is a small positive integer, suitable for use with C library
+functions such as fdopen() and fcntl(). On systems that use file
+descriptors for sockets (ie. Unix systems, but not Windows) the handle
+can be used with TQSocketNotifier as well.
+
     If the file is not open or there is an error, handle() returns -1.
+
     
    See also TQSocketNotifier.
+
+
    TQString TQFile::name () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the name set by setName().
+
     
    See also setName() and TQFileInfo::fileName().
+
+
    bool TQFile::open ( int m ) [virtual]
+
    
+Opens the file specified by the file name currently set, using the
+mode m. Returns TRUE if successful, otherwise FALSE.
+
     
+
     The mode parameter m must be a combination of the following flags:
+
    
+
     Flag Meaning
+
     IO_Raw
+Raw (non-buffered) file access.
+
     IO_ReadOnly
+Opens the file in read-only mode.
+
     IO_WriteOnly
+Opens the file in write-only mode. If this flag is used
+with another flag, e.g. IO_ReadOnly or IO_Raw or IO_Append, the file is not truncated; but if used on
+its own (or with IO_Truncate), the file is truncated.
+
     IO_ReadWrite
+Opens the file in read/write mode, equivalent to (IO_ReadOnly | IO_WriteOnly).
+
     IO_Append
+Opens the file in append mode. (You must actually use (IO_WriteOnly | IO_Append) to make the file writable and
+to go into append mode.) This mode is very useful when you
+want to write something to a log file. The file index is
+set to the end of the file. Note that the result is
+undefined if you position the file index manually using
+at() in append mode.
+
     IO_Truncate
+Truncates the file.
+
     IO_Translate
+Enables carriage returns and linefeed translation for text
+files under Windows.
+
    
+
     The raw access mode is best when I/O is block-operated using a 4KB
+block size or greater. Buffered access works better when reading
+small portions of data at a time.
+
     Warning: When working with buffered files, data may not be written
+to the file at once. Call flush() to make sure that the data is
+really written.
+
     Warning: If you have a buffered file opened for both reading and
+writing you must not perform an input operation immediately after
+an output operation or vice versa. You should always call flush()
+or a file positioning operation, e.g. at(), between input and
+output operations, otherwise the buffer may contain garbage.
+
     If the file does not exist and IO_WriteOnly or IO_ReadWrite
+is specified, it is created.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQFile f1( "/tmp/data.bin" );
+        f1.open( IO_Raw | IO_ReadWrite );
+
+        TQFile f2( "readme.txt" );
+        f2.open( IO_ReadOnly | IO_Translate );
+
+        TQFile f3( "audit.log" );
+        f3.open( IO_WriteOnly | IO_Append );
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also name(), close(), isOpen(), and flush().
+
+
    Examples: application/application.cpp, chart/chartform_files.cpp, distributor/distributor.ui.h, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, qdir/qdir.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, and xml/outliner/outlinetree.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
+
    bool TQFile::open ( int m, FILE * f )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Opens a file in the mode m using an existing file handle f.
+Returns TRUE if successful, otherwise FALSE.
+
     Example:
+
    +    #include <stdio.h>
+
+    void printError( const char* msg )
+    {
+        TQFile f;
+        f.open( IO_WriteOnly, stderr );
+        f.writeBlock( msg, qstrlen(msg) );      // write to stderr
+        f.close();
+    }
+  
    
+ 
+
     When a TQFile is opened using this function, close() does not actually
+close the file, only flushes it.
+
     Warning: If f is stdin, stdout, stderr, you may not
+be able to seek.  See TQIODevice::isSequentialAccess() for more
+information.
+
     
    See also close().
+
+
    bool TQFile::open ( int m, int f )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Opens a file in the mode m using an existing file descriptor f.
+Returns TRUE if successful, otherwise FALSE.
+
     When a TQFile is opened using this function, close() does not actually
+close the file.
+
     The TQFile that is opened using this function, is automatically set to be in
+raw mode; this means that the file input/output functions are slow. If you
+run into performance issues, you should try to use one of the other open
+functions.
+
     Warning: If f is one of 0 (stdin), 1 (stdout) or 2 (stderr), you may not
+be able to seek. size() is set to INT_MAX (in limits.h).
+
     
    See also close().
+
+
    int TQFile::putch ( int ch ) [virtual]
+
    
+Writes the character ch to the file.
+
     Returns ch, or -1 if some error occurred.
+
     
    See also getch() and ungetch().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
+
    TQByteArray TQIODevice::readAll () [virtual]
+
    
+This convenience function returns all of the remaining data in the
+device.
+
+
    Q_LONG TQFile::readLine ( char * p, Q_ULONG maxlen ) [virtual]
+
    
+Reads a line of text.
+
     Reads bytes from the file into the char* p, until end-of-line
+or maxlen bytes have been read, whichever occurs first. Returns
+the number of bytes read, or -1 if there was an error. Any
+terminating newline is not stripped.
+
     This function is only efficient for buffered files. Avoid
+readLine() for files that have been opened with the IO_Raw
+flag.
+
     
    See also readBlock() and TQTextStream::readLine().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
+
    Q_LONG TQFile::readLine ( TQString & s, Q_ULONG maxlen )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Reads a line of text.
+
     Reads bytes from the file into string s, until end-of-line or
+maxlen bytes have been read, whichever occurs first. Returns
+the number of bytes read, or -1 if there was an error, e.g. end of
+file. Any terminating newline is not stripped.
+
     This function is only efficient for buffered files. Avoid using
+readLine() for files that have been opened with the IO_Raw
+flag.
+
     Note that the string is read as plain Latin1 bytes, not Unicode.
+
     
    See also readBlock() and TQTextStream::readLine().
+
+
    bool TQFile::remove ()
+
    
+Removes the file specified by the file name currently set. Returns
+TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     The file is closed before it is removed.
+
+
    bool TQFile::remove ( const TQString & fileName ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Removes the file fileName.
+Returns TRUE if successful, otherwise FALSE.
+
+
    void TQFile::setDecodingFunction ( DecoderFn f ) [static]
+
    Warning: This function is not reentrant.
    
+
+
+
     Sets the function for decoding 8-bit file names to f. The
+default uses the locale-specific 8-bit encoding.
+
     
    See also encodeName() and decodeName().
+
+
    void TQFile::setEncodingFunction ( EncoderFn f ) [static]
+
    Warning: This function is not reentrant.
    
+
+
+
     Sets the function for encoding Unicode file names to f. The
+default encodes in the locale-specific 8-bit encoding.
+
     
    See also encodeName().
+
+
    void TQFile::setErrorString ( const TQString & str ) [protected]
+
    Warning: This function is not reentrant.
    
+
+
+
     Sets the error string returned by the errorString() function to str.
+
     
    See also errorString() and TQIODevice::status().
+
+
    void TQFile::setName ( const TQString & name )
+
    
+Sets the name of the file to name. The name can have no path, a
+relative path or an absolute absolute path.
+
     Do not call this function if the file has already been opened.
+
     If the file name has no path or a relative path, the path used
+will be whatever the application's current directory path is
+at the time of the open() call.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQFile file;
+        TQDir::setCurrent( "/tmp" );
+        file.setName( "readme.txt" );
+        TQDir::setCurrent( "/home" );
+        file.open( IO_ReadOnly );      // opens "/home/readme.txt" under Unix
+    
    
+ 
+
     Note that the directory separator "/" works for all operating
+systems supported by TQt.
+
     
    See also name(), TQFileInfo, and TQDir.
+
+
    Offset TQFile::size () const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the file size.
+
    See also at().
+
+
    Example: table/statistics/statistics.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
+
    int TQFile::ungetch ( int ch ) [virtual]
+
    
+Puts the character ch back into the file and decrements the
+index if it is not zero.
+
     This function is normally called to "undo" a getch() operation.
+
     Returns ch, or -1 if an error occurred.
+
     
    See also getch() and putch().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqfiledialog.html b/doc/html/ntqfiledialog.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..437d07a2f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqfiledialog.html
@@ -0,0 +1,907 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQFileDialog Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQFileDialog Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQFileDialog class provides dialogs that allow users to select files or directories.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqfiledialog.h>
+
    Inherits TQDialog.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
      
+
    • void setDir ( const TQString & pathstr )
      • 
+
    • void setUrl ( const TQUrlOperator & url )
      • 
+
    • void setFilter ( const TQString & newFilter )
      • 
+
    • void setFilters ( const TQString & filters )
      • 
+
    • void setFilters ( const char ** types )
      • 
+
    • void setFilters ( const TQStringList & )
      • 
+
    
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQString getOpenFileName ( const TQString & startWith = TQString::null, const TQString & filter = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, TQString * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • TQString getSaveFileName ( const TQString & startWith = TQString::null, const TQString & filter = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, TQString * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • TQString getExistingDirectory ( const TQString & dir = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, bool dirOnly = TRUE, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • TQStringList getOpenFileNames ( const TQString & filter = TQString::null, const TQString & dir = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, TQString * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • void setIconProvider ( TQFileIconProvider * provider )
      • 
+
    • TQFileIconProvider * iconProvider ()
      • 
+
    
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • bool contentsPreview - whether the file dialog can provide a contents preview of the currently selected file
      • 
+
    • TQString dirPath - the file dialog's working directory  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool infoPreview - whether the file dialog can provide preview information about the currently selected file
      • 
+
    • Mode mode - the file dialog's mode
      • 
+
    • PreviewMode previewMode - the preview mode for the file dialog
      • 
+
    • TQString selectedFile - the name of the selected file  (read only)
      • 
+
    • TQStringList selectedFiles - the list of selected files  (read only)
      • 
+
    • TQString selectedFilter - the filter which the user has selected in the file dialog  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool showHiddenFiles - whether hidden files are shown in the file dialog
      • 
+
    • ViewMode viewMode - the file dialog's view mode
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQFileDialog class provides dialogs that allow users to select files or directories.
+
+
+
     The TQFileDialog class enables a user to traverse their file system in
+order to select one or many files or a directory.
+
     The easiest way to create a TQFileDialog is to use the static
+functions. On Windows, these static functions will call the native
+Windows file dialog and on Mac OS X, these static function will call
+the native Mac OS X file dialog.
+
     
    +    TQString s = TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName(
+                    "/home",
+                    "Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)",
+                    this,
+                    "open file dialog",
+                    "Choose a file" );
+  
    
+ 
+
     In the above example, a modal TQFileDialog is created using a static
+function. The startup directory is set to "/home". The file filter
+is set to "Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)". The parent of the file dialog
+is set to this and it is given the identification name - "open file
+dialog". The caption at the top of file dialog is set to "Choose a
+file". If you want to use multiple filters, separate each one with
+two semi-colons, e.g.
+
    +  "Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg);;Text files (*.txt);;XML files (*.xml)"
+  
    
+ 
+
     You can create your own TQFileDialog without using the static
+functions. By calling setMode(), you can set what can be returned by
+the TQFileDialog.
+
     
    +    TQFileDialog* fd = new TQFileDialog( this, "file dialog", TRUE );
+    fd->setMode( TQFileDialog::AnyFile );
+  
    
+ 
+
     In the above example, the mode of the file dialog is set to AnyFile, meaning that the user can select any file, or even specify a
+file that doesn't exist. This mode is useful for creating a "File Save
+As" file dialog. Use ExistingFile if the user must select an
+existing file or Directory if only a directory may be selected.
+(See the TQFileDialog::Mode enum for the complete list of modes.)
+
     You can retrieve the dialog's mode with mode(). Use setFilter() to set
+the dialog's file filter, e.g.
+
     
    +    fd->setFilter( "Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)" );
+  
    
+ 
+
     In the above example, the filter is set to "Images (*.png *.xpm
+*.jpg)", this means that only files with the extension png, xpm
+or jpg will be shown in the TQFileDialog. You can apply
+several filters by using setFilters() and add additional filters with
+addFilter(). Use setSelectedFilter() to select one of the filters
+you've given as the file dialog's default filter. Whenever the user
+changes the filter the filterSelected() signal is emitted.
+
     The file dialog has two view modes, TQFileDialog::List which simply
+lists file and directory names and TQFileDialog::Detail which
+displays additional information alongside each name, e.g. file size,
+modification date, etc. Set the mode with setViewMode().
+
     
    +    fd->setViewMode( TQFileDialog::Detail );
+  
    
+ 
+
     The last important function you will need to use when creating your
+own file dialog is selectedFile().
+
     
    +    TQString fileName;
+    if ( fd->exec() == TQDialog::Accepted )
+        fileName = fd->selectedFile();
+  
    
+ 
+
     In the above example, a modal file dialog is created and shown. If
+the user clicked OK, then the file they selected is put in fileName.
+
     If you are using the ExistingFiles mode then you will need to use
+selectedFiles() which will return the selected files in a TQStringList.
+
     The dialog's working directory can be set with setDir(). The display
+of hidden files is controlled with setShowHiddenFiles(). The dialog
+can be forced to re-read the directory with rereadDir() and re-sort
+the directory with resortDir(). All the files in the current directory
+can be selected with selectAll().
+
     
     Creating and using preview widgets
+
    
+
     There are two kinds of preview widgets that can be used with
+TQFileDialogs: content preview widgets and information preview
+widgets. They are created and used in the same way except that the
+function names differ, e.g. setContentsPreview() and setInfoPreview().
+
     A preview widget is a widget that is placed inside a TQFileDialog so
+that the user can see either the contents of the file, or information
+about the file.
+
     
    +    class Preview : public TQLabel, public TQFilePreview
+    {
+    public:
+        Preview( TQWidget *parent=0 ) : TQLabel( parent ) {}
+
+        void previewUrl( const TQUrl &u )
+        {
+            TQString path = u.path();
+            TQPixmap pix( path );
+            if ( pix.isNull() )
+                setText( "This is not a pixmap" );
+            else
+                setPixmap( pix );
+        }
+    };
+  
    
+ 
+
     In the above snippet, we create a preview widget which inherits from
+TQLabel and TQFilePreview. File preview widgets must inherit from
+TQFilePreview.
+
     Inside the class we reimplement TQFilePreview::previewUrl(), this is
+where we determine what happens when a file is selected. In the
+above example we only show a preview of the file if it is a valid
+pixmap. Here's how to make a file dialog use a preview widget:
+
     
    +    Preview* p = new Preview;
+
+    TQFileDialog* fd = new TQFileDialog( this );
+    fd->setContentsPreviewEnabled( TRUE );
+    fd->setContentsPreview( p, p );
+    fd->setPreviewMode( TQFileDialog::Contents );
+    fd->show();
+  
    
+ 
+
     The first line creates an instance of our preview widget. We then
+create our file dialog and call setContentsPreviewEnabled( TRUE ),
+this tell the file dialog to preview the contents of the currently
+selected file. We then call setContentsPreview() -- note that we pass
+the same preview widget twice. Finally, before showing the file
+dialog, we call setPreviewMode() setting the mode to Contents which
+will show the contents preview of the file that the user has selected.
+
     If you create another preview widget that is used for displaying
+information about a file, create it in the same way as the contents
+preview widget and call setInfoPreviewEnabled(), and
+setInfoPreview(). Then the user will be able to switch between the
+two preview modes.
+
     For more information about creating a TQFilePreview widget see
+TQFilePreview.
+
      
+
     
    See also Dialog Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQFileDialog::Mode
     
+
     This enum is used to indicate what the user may select in the file
+dialog, i.e. what the dialog will return if the user clicks OK.
+
      
+
    • TQFileDialog::AnyFile - The name of a file, whether it exists or not.
+
    • TQFileDialog::ExistingFile - The name of a single existing file.
+
    • TQFileDialog::Directory - The name of a directory. Both files and directories
+are displayed.
+
    • TQFileDialog::DirectoryOnly - The name of a directory. The file dialog will only display directories.
+
    • TQFileDialog::ExistingFiles - The names of zero or more existing files.
+
     See setMode().
+
+
    TQFileDialog::PreviewMode
    
+
+
     This enum describes the preview mode of the file dialog.
+
      
+
    • TQFileDialog::NoPreview - No preview is shown at all.
+
    • TQFileDialog::Contents - Show a preview of the contents of the current file
+using the contents preview widget.
+
    • TQFileDialog::Info - Show information about the current file using the
+info preview widget.
+
     See setPreviewMode(), setContentsPreview() and setInfoPreview().
+
+
    TQFileDialog::ViewMode
    
+
+
     This enum describes the view mode of the file dialog, i.e. what
+information about each file will be displayed.
+
      
+
    • TQFileDialog::List - Display file and directory names with icons.
+
    • TQFileDialog::Detail - Display file and directory names with icons plus
+additional information, such as file size and modification date.
+
     See setViewMode().
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQFileDialog::TQFileDialog ( const TQString & dirName, const TQString & filter = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE )
+
    
+Constructs a file dialog called name with the parent, parent.
+If modal is TRUE then the file dialog is modal; otherwise it is
+modeless.
+
     If dirName is specified then it will be used as the dialog's
+working directory, i.e. it will be the directory that is shown when
+the dialog appears. If filter is specified it will be used as the
+dialog's file filter.
+
     
+
    TQFileDialog::TQFileDialog ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE )
+
    
+Constructs a file dialog called name, with the parent, parent.
+If modal is TRUE then the file dialog is modal; otherwise it is
+modeless.
+
+
    TQFileDialog::~TQFileDialog ()
+
    
+Destroys the file dialog.
+
+
    void TQFileDialog::addFilter ( const TQString & filter )
+
    
+Adds the filter filter to the list of filters and makes it the
+current filter.
+
     
    +    TQFileDialog* fd = new TQFileDialog( this );
+    fd->addFilter( "Images (*.png *.jpg *.xpm)" );
+    fd->show();
+  
    
+ 
+
     In the above example, a file dialog is created, and the file filter "Images
+(*.png *.jpg *.xpm)" is added and is set as the current filter. The original
+filter, "All Files (*)", is still available.
+
     
    See also setFilter() and setFilters().
+
+
    void TQFileDialog::addLeftWidget ( TQWidget * w ) [protected]
+
    
+Adds the widget w to the left-hand side of the file dialog.
+
     
    See also addRightWidget(), addWidgets(), and addToolButton().
+
+
    void TQFileDialog::addRightWidget ( TQWidget * w ) [protected]
+
    
+Adds the widget w to the right-hand side of the file dialog.
+
     
    See also addLeftWidget(), addWidgets(), and addToolButton().
+
+
    void TQFileDialog::addToolButton ( TQButton * b, bool separator = FALSE ) [protected]
+
    
+Adds the tool button b to the row of tool buttons at the top of the
+file dialog. The button is appended to the right of
+this row. If separator is TRUE, a small space is inserted between the
+last button of the row and the new button b.
+
     
    See also addWidgets(), addLeftWidget(), and addRightWidget().
+
+
    void TQFileDialog::addWidgets ( TQLabel * l, TQWidget * w, TQPushButton * b ) [protected]
+
    
+Adds the specified widgets to the bottom of the file dialog. The
+label l is placed underneath the "file name" and the "file types"
+labels. The widget w is placed underneath the file types combobox.
+The button b is placed underneath the Cancel pushbutton.
+
     
    +    MyFileDialog::MyFileDialog( TQWidget* parent, const char* name ) :
+        TQFileDialog( parent, name )
+    {
+        TQLabel* label = new TQLabel( "Added widgets", this );
+        TQLineEdit* lineedit = new TQLineEdit( this );
+        TQPushButton* pushbutton = new TQPushButton( this );
+
+        addWidgets( label, lineedit, pushbutton );
+    }
+  
    
+ 
+
     If you don't want to have one of the widgets added, pass 0 in that
+widget's position.
+
     Every time you call this function, a new row of widgets will be added
+to the bottom of the file dialog.
+
     
    See also addToolButton(), addLeftWidget(), and addRightWidget().
+
+
    const TQDir * TQFileDialog::dir () const
+
    
+Returns the current directory shown in the file dialog.
+
     The ownership of the TQDir pointer is transferred to the caller, so
+it must be deleted by the caller when no longer required.
+
     
    See also setDir().
+
+
    void TQFileDialog::dirEntered ( const TQString & ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user enters a directory.
+
     
    See also dir().
+
+
    TQString TQFileDialog::dirPath () const
+
    Returns the file dialog's working directory.
+See the "dirPath" property for details.
+
    void TQFileDialog::fileHighlighted ( const TQString & ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user highlights a file, i.e. makes
+it the current file.
+
     
    See also fileSelected() and filesSelected().
+
+
    void TQFileDialog::fileSelected ( const TQString & ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user selects a file.
+
     
    See also filesSelected(), fileHighlighted(), and selectedFile.
+
+
    void TQFileDialog::filesSelected ( const TQStringList & ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user selects one or more files in ExistingFiles mode.
+
     
    See also fileSelected(), fileHighlighted(), and selectedFiles.
+
+
    void TQFileDialog::filterSelected ( const TQString & ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user selects a filter.
+
     
    See also selectedFilter.
+
+
    TQString TQFileDialog::getExistingDirectory ( const TQString & dir = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, bool dirOnly = TRUE, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE ) [static]
+
    
+This is a convenience static function that will return an existing directory
+selected by the user.
+
     
    +    TQString s = TQFileDialog::getExistingDirectory(
+                    "/home",
+                    this,
+                    "get existing directory",
+                    "Choose a directory",
+                    TRUE );
+  
    
+ 
+
     This function creates a modal file dialog called name, with
+parent, parent. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown
+centered over the parent.
+
     The dialog's working directory is set to dir, and the caption is
+set to caption. Either of these may be TQString::null in which case
+the current directory and a default caption will be used respectively.
+
     Note on Windows that if dir is TQString::null then the dialog's working
+directory will be set to the user's My Documents directory.
+
     If dirOnly is TRUE, then only directories will be shown in
+the file dialog; otherwise both directories and files will be shown.
+
     Under Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve
+and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp,
+the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp.
+If resolveSymlinks is FALSE, the file dialog will treat
+symlinks as regular directories.
+
     Under Windows and Mac OS X, this static function will use the native
+file dialog and not a TQFileDialog, unless the style of the application
+is set to something other than the native style. (Note that on Windows the
+dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any
+TQTimers and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just under
+the parent's titlebar).
+
     
    See also getOpenFileName(), getOpenFileNames(), and getSaveFileName().
+
+
    TQString TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName ( const TQString & startWith = TQString::null, const TQString & filter = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, TQString * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE ) [static]
+
    
+This is a convenience static function that returns an existing file
+selected by the user. If the user pressed Cancel, it returns a null
+string.
+
     
    +    TQString s = TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName(
+                    "/home",
+                    "Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)",
+                    this,
+                    "open file dialog",
+                    "Choose a file to open" );
+  
    
+ 
+
     The function creates a modal file dialog called name, with
+parent, parent. If a parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown
+centered over the parent.
+
     The file dialog's working directory will be set to startWith. If startWith includes a file name, the file will be selected. The filter
+is set to filter so that only those files which match the filter
+are shown. The filter selected is set to selectedFilter. The parameters
+startWith, selectedFilter and filter may be TQString::null.
+
     The dialog's caption is set to caption. If caption is not
+specified then a default caption will be used.
+
     Under Windows and Mac OS X, this static function will use the native
+file dialog and not a TQFileDialog, unless the style of the application
+is set to something other than the native style (Note that on Windows the
+dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any
+TQTimers and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just under
+the parent's titlebar).
+
     Under Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve
+and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp,
+the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp.
+If resolveSymlinks is FALSE, the file dialog will treat
+symlinks as regular directories.
+
     
    See also getOpenFileNames(), getSaveFileName(), and getExistingDirectory().
+
+
    Examples: action/application.cpp, addressbook/mainwindow.cpp, application/application.cpp, distributor/distributor.ui.h, network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
+
    TQStringList TQFileDialog::getOpenFileNames ( const TQString & filter = TQString::null, const TQString & dir = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, TQString * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE ) [static]
+
    
+This is a convenience static function that will return one or more
+existing files selected by the user.
+
     
    +    TQStringList files = TQFileDialog::getOpenFileNames(
+                            "Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)",
+                            "/home",
+                            this,
+                            "open files dialog",
+                            "Select one or more files to open" );
+  
    
+ 
+
     This function creates a modal file dialog called name, with
+parent parent. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown
+centered over the parent.
+
     The file dialog's working directory will be set to dir. If dir includes a file name, the file will be selected. The filter
+is set to filter so that only those files which match the filter
+are shown. The filter selected is set to selectedFilter. The parameters
+dir, selectedFilter and filter may be TQString::null.
+
     The dialog's caption is set to caption. If caption is not
+specified then a default caption will be used.
+
     Under Windows and Mac OS X, this static function will use the native
+file dialog and not a TQFileDialog, unless the style of the application
+is set to something other than the native style. (Note that on Windows the
+dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any
+TQTimers and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just under
+the parent's titlebar).
+
     Under Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve
+and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp,
+the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp.
+If resolveSymlinks is FALSE, the file dialog will treat
+symlinks as regular directories.
+
     Note that if you want to iterate over the list of files, you should
+iterate over a copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQStringList list = files;
+    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
+    while( it != list.end() ) {
+        myProcessing( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also getOpenFileName(), getSaveFileName(), and getExistingDirectory().
+
+
    TQString TQFileDialog::getSaveFileName ( const TQString & startWith = TQString::null, const TQString & filter = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, TQString * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE ) [static]
+
    
+This is a convenience static function that will return a file name
+selected by the user. The file does not have to exist.
+
     It creates a modal file dialog called name, with parent, parent.
+If a parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the
+parent.
+
     
    +    TQString s = TQFileDialog::getSaveFileName(
+                    "/home",
+                    "Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)",
+                    this,
+                    "save file dialog",
+                    "Choose a filename to save under" );
+  
    
+ 
+
     The file dialog's working directory will be set to startWith. If startWith includes a file name, the file will be selected. The filter
+is set to filter so that only those files which match the filter
+are shown. The filter selected is set to selectedFilter. The parameters
+startWith, selectedFilter and filter may be TQString::null.
+
     The dialog's caption is set to caption. If caption is not
+specified then a default caption will be used.
+
     Under Windows and Mac OS X, this static function will use the native
+file dialog and not a TQFileDialog, unless the style of the application
+is set to something other than the native style. (Note that on Windows the
+dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any
+TQTimers and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just under
+the parent's titlebar.
+
     Under Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve
+and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp,
+the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp.
+If resolveSymlinks is FALSE, the file dialog will treat
+symlinks as regular directories.
+
     
    See also getOpenFileName(), getOpenFileNames(), and getExistingDirectory().
+
+
    Examples: action/application.cpp, addressbook/mainwindow.cpp, application/application.cpp, network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h, qmag/qmag.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
+
    TQFileIconProvider * TQFileDialog::iconProvider () [static]
+
    
+Returns a pointer to the icon provider currently set on the file dialog.
+By default there is no icon provider, and this function returns 0.
+
     
    See also setIconProvider() and TQFileIconProvider.
+
+
    bool TQFileDialog::isContentsPreviewEnabled () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the file dialog can provide a contents preview of the currently selected file; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "contentsPreview" property for details.
+
    bool TQFileDialog::isInfoPreviewEnabled () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the file dialog can provide preview information about the currently selected file; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "infoPreview" property for details.
+
    Mode TQFileDialog::mode () const
+
    Returns the file dialog's mode.
+See the "mode" property for details.
+
    PreviewMode TQFileDialog::previewMode () const
+
    Returns the preview mode for the file dialog.
+See the "previewMode" property for details.
+
    void TQFileDialog::rereadDir ()
+
    
+Rereads the current directory shown in the file dialog.
+
     The only time you will need to call this function is if the contents of
+the directory change and you wish to refresh the file dialog to reflect
+the change.
+
     
    See also resortDir().
+
+
    void TQFileDialog::resortDir ()
+
    
+Re-sorts the displayed directory.
+
     
    See also rereadDir().
+
+
    void TQFileDialog::selectAll ( bool b )
+
    
+If b is TRUE then all the files in the current directory are selected;
+otherwise, they are deselected.
+
+
    TQString TQFileDialog::selectedFile () const
+
    Returns the name of the selected file.
+See the "selectedFile" property for details.
+
    TQStringList TQFileDialog::selectedFiles () const
+
    Returns the list of selected files.
+See the "selectedFiles" property for details.
+
    TQString TQFileDialog::selectedFilter () const
+
    Returns the filter which the user has selected in the file dialog.
+See the "selectedFilter" property for details.
+
    void TQFileDialog::setContentsPreview ( TQWidget * w, TQFilePreview * preview )
+
    
+Sets the widget to be used for displaying the contents of the file
+to the widget w and a preview of those contents to the
+TQFilePreview preview.
+
     Normally you would create a preview widget that derives from both TQWidget and
+TQFilePreview, so you should pass the same widget twice. If you
+don't, you must remember to delete the preview object in order to
+avoid memory leaks.
+
     
    +    class Preview : public TQLabel, public TQFilePreview
+    {
+    public:
+        Preview( TQWidget *parent=0 ) : TQLabel( parent ) {}
+
+        void previewUrl( const TQUrl &u )
+        {
+            TQString path = u.path();
+            TQPixmap pix( path );
+            if ( pix.isNull() )
+                setText( "This is not a pixmap" );
+            else
+                setPixmap( pix );
+        }
+    };
+
+  //...
+
+  int main( int argc, char** argv )
+  {
+    Preview* p = new Preview;
+
+    TQFileDialog* fd = new TQFileDialog( this );
+    fd->setContentsPreviewEnabled( TRUE );
+    fd->setContentsPreview( p, p );
+    fd->setPreviewMode( TQFileDialog::Contents );
+    fd->show();
+  }
+  
    
+ 
+
     
    See also contentsPreview, setInfoPreview(), and previewMode.
+
+
    Example: qdir/qdir.cpp.
+
    void TQFileDialog::setContentsPreviewEnabled ( bool )
+
    Sets whether the file dialog can provide a contents preview of the currently selected file.
+See the "contentsPreview" property for details.
+
    void TQFileDialog::setDir ( const TQDir & dir )
+
    
+Sets the file dialog's working directory to dir.
+
    See also dir().
+
+
    void TQFileDialog::setDir ( const TQString & pathstr ) [slot]
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the file dialog's working directory to pathstr.
+
     
    See also dir().
+
+
    void TQFileDialog::setFilter ( const TQString & newFilter ) [slot]
+
    
+
     Sets the filter used in the file dialog to newFilter.
+
     If newFilter contains a pair of parentheses containing one or more
+of anything*something separated by spaces or by
+semi-colons then only the text contained in the parentheses is used as
+the filter. This means that these calls are all equivalent:
+
     
    +     fd->setFilter( "All C++ files (*.cpp *.cc *.C *.cxx *.c++)" );
+     fd->setFilter( "*.cpp *.cc *.C *.cxx *.c++" );
+     fd->setFilter( "All C++ files (*.cpp;*.cc;*.C;*.cxx;*.c++)" );
+     fd->setFilter( "*.cpp;*.cc;*.C;*.cxx;*.c++" );
+  
    
+ 
+
     
    See also setFilters().
+
+
    void TQFileDialog::setFilters ( const TQString & filters ) [slot]
+
    
+Sets the filters used in the file dialog to filters. Each group
+of filters must be separated by ;; (two semi-colons).
+
     
    +    TQString types("Image files (*.png *.xpm *.jpg);;"
+                  "Text files (*.txt);;"
+                  "Any files (*)");
+    TQFileDialog fd = new TQFileDialog( this );
+    fd->setFilters( types );
+    fd->show();
+  
    
+ 
+
     
+
    void TQFileDialog::setFilters ( const char ** types ) [slot]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     types must be a null-terminated list of strings.
+
     
+
    void TQFileDialog::setFilters ( const TQStringList & ) [slot]
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
    void TQFileDialog::setIconProvider ( TQFileIconProvider * provider ) [static]
+
    
+Sets the TQFileIconProvider used by the file dialog to provider.
+
     The default is that there is no TQFileIconProvider and TQFileDialog
+just draws a folder icon next to each directory and nothing next
+to files.
+
     
    See also TQFileIconProvider and iconProvider().
+
+
    Example: showimg/main.cpp.
+
    void TQFileDialog::setInfoPreview ( TQWidget * w, TQFilePreview * preview )
+
    
+Sets the widget to be used for displaying information about the file
+to the widget w and a preview of that information to the
+TQFilePreview preview.
+
     Normally you would create a preview widget that derives from both TQWidget and
+TQFilePreview, so you should pass the same widget twice. If you
+don't, you must remember to delete the preview object in order to
+avoid memory leaks.
+
     
    +    class Preview : public TQLabel, public TQFilePreview
+    {
+    public:
+        Preview( TQWidget *parent=0 ) : TQLabel( parent ) {}
+
+        void previewUrl( const TQUrl &u )
+        {
+            TQString path = u.path();
+            TQPixmap pix( path );
+            if ( pix.isNull() )
+                setText( "This is not a pixmap" );
+            else
+                setText( "This is a pixmap" );
+        }
+    };
+
+  //...
+
+  int main( int argc, char** argv )
+  {
+    Preview* p = new Preview;
+
+    TQFileDialog* fd = new TQFileDialog( this );
+    fd->setInfoPreviewEnabled( TRUE );
+    fd->setInfoPreview( p, p );
+    fd->setPreviewMode( TQFileDialog::Info );
+    fd->show();
+  }
+
+  
    
+ 
+
     
    See also setContentsPreview(), infoPreview, and previewMode.
+
+
     
+
    void TQFileDialog::setInfoPreviewEnabled ( bool )
+
    Sets whether the file dialog can provide preview information about the currently selected file.
+See the "infoPreview" property for details.
+
    void TQFileDialog::setMode ( Mode )
+
    Sets the file dialog's mode.
+See the "mode" property for details.
+
    void TQFileDialog::setPreviewMode ( PreviewMode m )
+
    Sets the preview mode for the file dialog to m.
+See the "previewMode" property for details.
+
    void TQFileDialog::setSelectedFilter ( const TQString & mask ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the current filter selected in the file dialog to the first
+one that contains the text mask.
+
+
    void TQFileDialog::setSelectedFilter ( int n ) [virtual]
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the current filter selected in the file dialog to the
+n-th filter in the filter list.
+
     
    See also filterSelected(), selectedFilter, selectedFiles, and selectedFile.
+
+
    void TQFileDialog::setSelection ( const TQString & filename )
+
    
+Sets the default selection to filename. If filename is
+absolute, setDir() is also called to set the file dialog's working
+directory to the filename's directory.
+
     
+
+
    Example: qdir/qdir.cpp.
+
    void TQFileDialog::setShowHiddenFiles ( bool s )
+
    Sets whether hidden files are shown in the file dialog to s.
+See the "showHiddenFiles" property for details.
+
    void TQFileDialog::setUrl ( const TQUrlOperator & url ) [slot]
+
    
+Sets the file dialog's working directory to the directory specified at url.
+
     
    See also url().
+
+
    void TQFileDialog::setViewMode ( ViewMode m )
+
    Sets the file dialog's view mode to m.
+See the "viewMode" property for details.
+
    bool TQFileDialog::showHiddenFiles () const
+
    Returns TRUE if hidden files are shown in the file dialog; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "showHiddenFiles" property for details.
+
    TQUrl TQFileDialog::url () const
+
    
+Returns the URL of the current working directory in the file dialog.
+
     
    See also setUrl().
+
+
    Example: network/networkprotocol/view.cpp.
+
    ViewMode TQFileDialog::viewMode () const
+
    Returns the file dialog's view mode.
+See the "viewMode" property for details.
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    bool contentsPreview
    
+
    This property holds whether the file dialog can provide a contents preview of the currently selected file.
+
    The default is FALSE.
+
     
    See also setContentsPreview() and infoPreview.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setContentsPreviewEnabled() and get this property's value with isContentsPreviewEnabled().
+
    TQString dirPath
    
+
    This property holds the file dialog's working directory.
+
    Get this property's value with dirPath().
+
    See also dir() and setDir().
+
+
    bool infoPreview
    
+
    This property holds whether the file dialog can provide preview information about the currently selected file.
+
    The default is FALSE.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setInfoPreviewEnabled() and get this property's value with isInfoPreviewEnabled().
+
    Mode mode
    
+
    This property holds the file dialog's mode.
+
    The default mode is ExistingFile.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setMode() and get this property's value with mode().
+
    PreviewMode previewMode
    
+
    This property holds the preview mode for the file dialog.
+
    If you set the mode to be a mode other than NoPreview, you must
+use setInfoPreview() or setContentsPreview() to set the dialog's
+preview widget to your preview widget and enable the preview
+widget(s) with setInfoPreviewEnabled() or
+setContentsPreviewEnabled().
+
     
    See also infoPreview, contentsPreview, and viewMode.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setPreviewMode() and get this property's value with previewMode().
+
    TQString selectedFile
    
+
    This property holds the name of the selected file.
+
    If a file was selected selectedFile contains the file's name including
+its absolute path; otherwise selectedFile is empty.
+
     
    See also TQString::isEmpty(), selectedFiles, and selectedFilter.
+
+
    Get this property's value with selectedFile().
+
    TQStringList selectedFiles
    
+
    This property holds the list of selected files.
+
    If one or more files are selected, selectedFiles contains their
+names including their absolute paths. If no files are selected or
+the mode isn't ExistingFiles selectedFiles is an empty list.
+
     It is more convenient to use selectedFile() if the mode is
+ExistingFile, Directory or DirectoryOnly.
+
     Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should
+iterate over a copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQStringList list = myFileDialog.selectedFiles();
+    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
+    while( it != list.end() ) {
+        myProcessing( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also selectedFile, selectedFilter, and TQValueList::empty().
+
+
    Get this property's value with selectedFiles().
+
    TQString selectedFilter
    
+
    This property holds the filter which the user has selected in the file dialog.
+
    Get this property's value with selectedFilter().
+
    See also filterSelected(), selectedFiles, and selectedFile.
+
+
    bool showHiddenFiles
    
+
    This property holds whether hidden files are shown in the file dialog.
+
    The default is FALSE, i.e. don't show hidden files.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setShowHiddenFiles() and get this property's value with showHiddenFiles().
+
    ViewMode viewMode
    
+
    This property holds the file dialog's view mode.
+
    If you set the view mode to be Detail (the default), then you
+will see the file's details, such as the size of the file and the
+date the file was last modified in addition to the file's name.
+
     If you set the view mode to be List, then you will just
+see a list of the files and folders.
+
     See TQFileDialog::ViewMode
+
+
    Set this property's value with setViewMode() and get this property's value with viewMode().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqfileinfo.html b/doc/html/ntqfileinfo.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..38038845e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqfileinfo.html
@@ -0,0 +1,503 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQFileInfo Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQFileInfo Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQFileInfo class provides system-independent file information.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqfileinfo.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
+The TQFileInfo class provides system-independent file information.
+
     
+
     TQFileInfo provides information about a file's name and position
+(path) in the file system, its access rights and whether it is a
+directory or symbolic link, etc. The file's size and last
+modified/read times are also available.
+
     A TQFileInfo can point to a file with either a relative or an
+absolute file path. Absolute file paths begin with the directory
+separator "/" (or with a drive specification on Windows). Relative
+file names begin with a directory name or a file name and specify
+a path relative to the current working directory. An example of an
+absolute path is the string "/tmp/quartz". A relative path might
+look like "src/fatlib". You can use the function isRelative() to
+check whether a TQFileInfo is using a relative or an absolute file
+path. You can call the function convertToAbs() to convert a
+relative TQFileInfo's path to an absolute path.
+
     The file that the TQFileInfo works on is set in the constructor or
+later with setFile(). Use exists() to see if the file exists and
+size() to get its size.
+
     To speed up performance, TQFileInfo caches information about the
+file. Because files can be changed by other users or programs, or
+even by other parts of the same program, there is a function that
+refreshes the file information: refresh(). If you want to switch
+off a TQFileInfo's caching and force it to access the file system
+every time you request information from it call setCaching(FALSE).
+
     The file's type is obtained with isFile(), isDir() and
+isSymLink(). The readLink() function provides the name of the file
+the symlink points to.
+
     Elements of the file's name can be extracted with dirPath() and
+fileName(). The fileName()'s parts can be extracted with
+baseName() and extension().
+
     The file's dates are returned by created(), lastModified() and
+lastRead(). Information about the file's access permissions is
+obtained with isReadable(), isWritable() and isExecutable(). The
+file's ownership is available from owner(), ownerId(), group() and
+groupId(). You can examine a file's permissions and ownership in a
+single statement using the permission() function.
+
     If you need to read and traverse directories, see the TQDir class.
+
    See also Input/Output and Networking.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQFileInfo::PermissionSpec
    
+
+
     This enum is used by the permission() function to report the
+permissions and ownership of a file. The values may be OR-ed
+together to test multiple permissions and ownership values.
+
      
+
    • TQFileInfo::ReadOwner - The file is readable by the owner of the file.
+
    • TQFileInfo::WriteOwner - The file is writable by the owner of the file.
+
    • TQFileInfo::ExeOwner - The file is executable by the owner of the file.
+
    • TQFileInfo::ReadUser - The file is readable by the user.
+
    • TQFileInfo::WriteUser - The file is writable by the user.
+
    • TQFileInfo::ExeUser - The file is executable by the user.
+
    • TQFileInfo::ReadGroup - The file is readable by the group.
+
    • TQFileInfo::WriteGroup - The file is writable by the group.
+
    • TQFileInfo::ExeGroup - The file is executable by the group.
+
    • TQFileInfo::ReadOther - The file is readable by anyone.
+
    • TQFileInfo::WriteOther - The file is writable by anyone.
+
    • TQFileInfo::ExeOther - The file is executable by anyone.
+
     Warning: The semantics of ReadUser, WriteUser and ExeUser are
+unfortunately not platform independent: on Unix, the rights of the owner of
+the file are returned and on Windows the rights of the current user are
+returned. This behavior might change in a future TQt version. If you want to
+find the rights of the owner of the file, you should use the flags ReadOwner, WriteOwner and ExeOwner. If you want to find out the
+rights of the current user, you should use isReadable(), isWritable() and
+isExecutable().
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQFileInfo::TQFileInfo ()
+
    
+Constructs a new empty TQFileInfo.
+
+
    TQFileInfo::TQFileInfo ( const TQString & file )
+
    
+Constructs a new TQFileInfo that gives information about the given
+file. The file can also include an absolute or relative path.
+
     Warning: Some functions might behave in a counter-intuitive way
+if file has a trailing directory separator.
+
     
    See also setFile(), isRelative(), TQDir::setCurrent(), and TQDir::isRelativePath().
+
+
    TQFileInfo::TQFileInfo ( const TQFile & file )
+
    
+Constructs a new TQFileInfo that gives information about file file.
+
     If the file has a relative path, the TQFileInfo will also have a
+relative path.
+
     
    See also isRelative().
+
+
    TQFileInfo::TQFileInfo ( const TQDir & d, const TQString & fileName )
+
    
+Constructs a new TQFileInfo that gives information about the file
+called fileName in the directory d.
+
     If d has a relative path, the TQFileInfo will also have a
+relative path.
+
     
    See also isRelative().
+
+
    TQFileInfo::TQFileInfo ( const TQFileInfo & fi )
+
    
+Constructs a new TQFileInfo that is a copy of fi.
+
+
    TQFileInfo::~TQFileInfo ()
+
    
+Destroys the TQFileInfo and frees its resources.
+
+
    TQString TQFileInfo::absFilePath () const
+
    
+Returns the absolute path including the file name.
+
     The absolute path name consists of the full path and the file
+name. On Unix this will always begin with the root, '/',
+directory. On Windows this will always begin 'D:/' where D is a
+drive letter, except for network shares that are not mapped to a
+drive letter, in which case the path will begin '//sharename/'.
+
     This function returns the same as filePath(), unless isRelative()
+is TRUE.
+
     If the TQFileInfo is empty it returns TQDir::currentDirPath().
+
     This function can be time consuming under Unix (in the order of
+milliseconds).
+
     
    See also isRelative() and filePath().
+
+
    Examples: biff/biff.cpp and fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
+
    TQString TQFileInfo::baseName ( bool complete = FALSE ) const
+
    
+Returns the base name of the file.
+
     If complete is FALSE (the default) the base name consists of
+all characters in the file name up to (but not including) the first '.' character.
+
     If complete is TRUE the base name consists of all characters in
+the file up to (but not including) the last '.' character.
+
     The path is not included in either case.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQFileInfo fi( "/tmp/archive.tar.gz" );
+        TQString base = fi.baseName();  // base = "archive"
+        base = fi.baseName( TRUE );    // base = "archive.tar"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also fileName() and extension().
+
+
    bool TQFileInfo::caching () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if caching is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setCaching() and refresh().
+
+
    bool TQFileInfo::convertToAbs ()
+
    
+Converts the file's path to an absolute path.
+
     If it is already absolute, nothing is done.
+
     
    See also filePath() and isRelative().
+
+
    TQDateTime TQFileInfo::created () const
+
    
+Returns the date and time when the file was created.
+
     On platforms where this information is not available, returns the
+same as lastModified().
+
     
    See also lastModified() and lastRead().
+
+
    TQDir TQFileInfo::dir ( bool absPath = FALSE ) const
+
    
+Returns the file's path as a TQDir object.
+
     If the TQFileInfo is relative and absPath is FALSE, the TQDir
+will be relative; otherwise it will be absolute.
+
     
    See also dirPath(), filePath(), fileName(), and isRelative().
+
+
    Example: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
+
    TQString TQFileInfo::dirPath ( bool absPath = FALSE ) const
+
    
+Returns the file's path.
+
     If absPath is TRUE an absolute path is returned.
+
     
    See also dir(), filePath(), fileName(), and isRelative().
+
+
    Example: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
+
    bool TQFileInfo::exists () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the file exists; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    Examples: biff/biff.cpp, distributor/distributor.ui.h, and i18n/main.cpp.
+
    TQString TQFileInfo::extension ( bool complete = TRUE ) const
+
    
+Returns the file's extension name.
+
     If complete is TRUE (the default), extension() returns the
+string of all characters in the file name after (but not
+including) the first '.'  character.
+
     If complete is FALSE, extension() returns the string of all
+characters in the file name after (but not including) the last '.'
+character.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQFileInfo fi( "/tmp/archive.tar.gz" );
+        TQString ext = fi.extension();  // ext = "tar.gz"
+        ext = fi.extension( FALSE );   // ext = "gz"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also fileName() and baseName().
+
+
    Example: qdir/qdir.cpp.
+
    TQString TQFileInfo::fileName () const
+
    
+Returns the name of the file, excluding the path.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQFileInfo fi( "/tmp/archive.tar.gz" );
+        TQString name = fi.fileName();           // name = "archive.tar.gz"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also isRelative(), filePath(), baseName(), and extension().
+
+
    Examples: dirview/dirview.cpp, fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp, and network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
+
    TQString TQFileInfo::filePath () const
+
    
+Returns the file name, including the path (which may be absolute
+or relative).
+
     
    See also isRelative() and absFilePath().
+
+
    Examples: dirview/main.cpp and fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
+
    TQString TQFileInfo::group () const
+
    
+Returns the group of the file. On Windows, on systems where files
+do not have groups, or if an error occurs, TQString::null is
+returned.
+
     This function can be time consuming under Unix (in the order of
+milliseconds).
+
     
    See also groupId(), owner(), and ownerId().
+
+
    uint TQFileInfo::groupId () const
+
    
+Returns the id of the group the file belongs to.
+
     On Windows and on systems where files do not have groups this
+function always returns (uint) -2.
+
     
    See also group(), owner(), and ownerId().
+
+
    bool TQFileInfo::isDir () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this object points to a directory or to a symbolic
+link to a directory; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also isFile() and isSymLink().
+
+
    Examples: dirview/dirview.cpp and fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
+
    bool TQFileInfo::isExecutable () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the file is executable; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also isReadable(), isWritable(), and permission().
+
+
    bool TQFileInfo::isFile () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this object points to a file. Returns FALSE if the
+object points to something which isn't a file, e.g. a directory or
+a symlink.
+
     
    See also isDir() and isSymLink().
+
+
    Examples: dirview/dirview.cpp, distributor/distributor.ui.h, fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp, and qdir/qdir.cpp.
+
    bool TQFileInfo::isHidden () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the file is hidden; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     On Unix-like operating systems, including Mac OS X, a file is
+hidden if its name begins with ".". On Windows a file is hidden if
+its hidden attribute is set.
+
+
    bool TQFileInfo::isReadable () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the file is readable; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also isWritable(), isExecutable(), and permission().
+
+
    Example: distributor/distributor.ui.h.
+
    bool TQFileInfo::isRelative () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the file path name is relative. Returns FALSE if
+the path is absolute (e.g. under Unix a path is absolute if it
+begins with a "/").
+
+
    bool TQFileInfo::isSymLink () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this object points to a symbolic link (or to a
+shortcut on Windows, or an alias on Mac OS X); otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     
    See also isFile(), isDir(), and readLink().
+
+
    Examples: dirview/dirview.cpp, distributor/distributor.ui.h, and fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
+
    bool TQFileInfo::isWritable () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the file is writable; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also isReadable(), isExecutable(), and permission().
+
+
    Example: distributor/distributor.ui.h.
+
    TQDateTime TQFileInfo::lastModified () const
+
    
+Returns the date and time when the file was last modified.
+
     
    See also created() and lastRead().
+
+
    Example: biff/biff.cpp.
+
    TQDateTime TQFileInfo::lastRead () const
+
    
+Returns the date and time when the file was last read (accessed).
+
     On platforms where this information is not available, returns the
+same as lastModified().
+
     
    See also created() and lastModified().
+
+
    Example: biff/biff.cpp.
+
    TQFileInfo & TQFileInfo::operator= ( const TQFileInfo & fi )
+
    
+Makes a copy of fi and assigns it to this TQFileInfo.
+
+
    TQString TQFileInfo::owner () const
+
    
+Returns the owner of the file. On systems where files
+do not have owners, or if an error occurs, TQString::null is
+returned.
+
     This function can be time consuming under Unix (in the order of
+milliseconds).
+
     
    See also ownerId(), group(), and groupId().
+
+
    uint TQFileInfo::ownerId () const
+
    
+Returns the id of the owner of the file.
+
     On Windows and on systems where files do not have owners this
+function returns ((uint) -2).
+
     
    See also owner(), group(), and groupId().
+
+
    bool TQFileInfo::permission ( int permissionSpec ) const
+
    
+Tests for file permissions. The permissionSpec argument can be
+several flags of type PermissionSpec OR-ed together to check
+for permission combinations.
+
     On systems where files do not have permissions this function
+always returns TRUE.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQFileInfo fi( "/tmp/archive.tar.gz" );
+        if ( fi.permission( TQFileInfo::WriteUser | TQFileInfo::ReadGroup ) )
+            qWarning( "I can change the file; my group can read the file" );
+        if ( fi.permission( TQFileInfo::WriteGroup | TQFileInfo::WriteOther ) )
+            qWarning( "The group or others can change the file" );
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also isReadable(), isWritable(), and isExecutable().
+
+
    TQString TQFileInfo::readLink () const
+
    
+Returns the name a symlink (or shortcut on Windows) points to, or
+a TQString::null if the object isn't a symbolic link.
+
     This name may not represent an existing file; it is only a string.
+TQFileInfo::exists() returns TRUE if the symlink points to an
+existing file.
+
     
    See also exists(), isSymLink(), isDir(), and isFile().
+
+
    void TQFileInfo::refresh () const
+
    
+Refreshes the information about the file, i.e. reads in information
+from the file system the next time a cached property is fetched.
+
     
    See also setCaching().
+
+
    void TQFileInfo::setCaching ( bool enable )
+
    
+If enable is TRUE, enables caching of file information. If enable is FALSE caching is disabled.
+
     When caching is enabled, TQFileInfo reads the file information from
+the file system the first time it's needed, but generally not
+later.
+
     Caching is enabled by default.
+
     
    See also refresh() and caching().
+
+
    void TQFileInfo::setFile ( const TQString & file )
+
    
+Sets the file that the TQFileInfo provides information about to file.
+
     The file can also include an absolute or relative file path.
+Absolute paths begin with the directory separator (e.g. "/" under
+Unix) or a drive specification (under Windows). Relative file
+names begin with a directory name or a file name and specify a
+path relative to the current directory.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQString absolute = "/local/bin";
+    TQString relative = "local/bin";
+    TQFileInfo absFile( absolute );
+    TQFileInfo relFile( relative );
+
+    TQDir::setCurrent( TQDir::rootDirPath() );
+    // absFile and relFile now point to the same file
+
+    TQDir::setCurrent( "/tmp" );
+    // absFile now points to "/local/bin",
+    // while relFile points to "/tmp/local/bin"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also isRelative(), TQDir::setCurrent(), and TQDir::isRelativePath().
+
+
    Example: biff/biff.cpp.
+
    void TQFileInfo::setFile ( const TQFile & file )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the file that the TQFileInfo provides information about to file.
+
     If file includes a relative path, the TQFileInfo will also have
+a relative path.
+
     
    See also isRelative().
+
+
    void TQFileInfo::setFile ( const TQDir & d, const TQString & fileName )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the file that the TQFileInfo provides information about to fileName in directory d.
+
     If fileName includes a relative path, the TQFileInfo will also
+have a relative path.
+
     
    See also isRelative().
+
+
    uint TQFileInfo::size () const
+
    
+Returns the file size in bytes, or 0 if the file does not exist or
+if the size is 0 or if the size cannot be fetched.
+
+
    Example: qdir/qdir.cpp.
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqfocusdata.html b/doc/html/ntqfocusdata.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e42f7aeda
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqfocusdata.html
@@ -0,0 +1,123 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQFocusData Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQFocusData Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQFocusData class maintains the list of widgets in the focus
+chain.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqfocusdata.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQFocusData class maintains the list of widgets in the focus
+chain.
+
     
+
     This read-only list always contains at least one widget (i.e. the
+top-level widget). It provides a simple cursor which can be reset
+to the current focus widget using home(), or moved to its
+neighboring widgets using next() and prev(). You can also retrieve
+the count() of the number of widgets in the list. The list is a
+loop, so if you keep iterating, for example using next(), you will
+never come to the end.
+
     Some widgets in the list may not accept focus. Widgets are added
+to the list as necessary, but not removed from it. This lets
+widgets change focus policy dynamically without disrupting the
+focus chain the user experiences. When a widget disables and
+re-enables tab focus, its position in the focus chain does not
+change.
+
     When reimplementing TQWidget::focusNextPrevChild() to provide
+special focus flow, you will usually call TQWidget::focusData() to
+retrieve the focus data stored at the top-level widget. A
+top-level widget's focus data contains the focus list for its
+hierarchy of widgets.
+
     The cursor may change at any time.
+
     This class is not thread-safe.
+
     
    See also TQWidget::focusNextPrevChild(), TQWidget::setTabOrder(), TQWidget::focusPolicy, and Miscellaneous Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    int TQFocusData::count () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of widgets in the focus chain.
+
+
    TQWidget * TQFocusData::first () const
+
    
+Returns the first widget in the focus chain.
+The cursor is not modified.
+
+
    TQWidget * TQFocusData::focusWidget () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the widgets in the hierarchy that are in the focus chain.
+
+
    TQWidget * TQFocusData::home ()
+
    
+Moves the cursor to the focusWidget() and returns that widget. You
+must call this before next() or prev() to iterate meaningfully.
+
+
    TQWidget * TQFocusData::last () const
+
    
+Returns the last widget in the focus chain.
+The cursor is not modified.
+
+
    TQWidget * TQFocusData::next ()
+
    
+Moves the cursor to the next widget in the focus chain. There is
+always a next widget because the list is a loop.
+
+
    TQWidget * TQFocusData::prev ()
+
    
+Moves the cursor to the previous widget in the focus chain. There
+is always a previous widget because the list is a loop.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqfont.html b/doc/html/ntqfont.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6fad0c182
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqfont.html
@@ -0,0 +1,922 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQFont Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQFont Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQFont class specifies a font used for drawing text.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqfont.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • enum StyleHint { Helvetica, SansSerif = Helvetica, Times, Serif = Times, Courier, TypeWriter = Courier, OldEnglish, Decorative = OldEnglish, System, AnyStyle }
      • 
+
    • enum StyleStrategy { PreferDefault = 0x0001, PreferBitmap = 0x0002, PreferDevice = 0x0004, PreferOutline = 0x0008, ForceOutline = 0x0010, PreferMatch = 0x0020, PreferQuality = 0x0040, PreferAntialias = 0x0080, NoAntialias = 0x0100, OpenGLCompatible = 0x0200 }
      • 
+
    • enum Weight { Light = 25, Normal = 50, DemiBold = 63, Bold = 75, Black = 87 }
      • 
+
    • enum Stretch { UltraCondensed = 50, ExtraCondensed = 62, Condensed = 75, SemiCondensed = 87, Unstretched = 100, SemiExpanded = 112, Expanded = 125, ExtraExpanded = 150, UltraExpanded = 200 }
      • 
+
    • TQFont ()
      • 
+
    • TQFont ( const TQString & family, int pointSize = 12, int weight = Normal, bool italic = FALSE )
      • 
+
    • TQFont ( const TQFont & font )
      • 
+
    • ~TQFont ()
      • 
+
    • TQString family () const
      • 
+
    • void setFamily ( const TQString & family )
      • 
+
    • int pointSize () const
      • 
+
    • float pointSizeFloat () const
      • 
+
    • void setPointSize ( int pointSize )
      • 
+
    • void setPointSizeFloat ( float pointSize )
      • 
+
    • int pixelSize () const
      • 
+
    • void setPixelSize ( int pixelSize )
      • 
+
    • void setPixelSizeFloat ( float pixelSize )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • int weight () const
      • 
+
    • void setWeight ( int weight )
      • 
+
    • bool bold () const
      • 
+
    • void setBold ( bool enable )
      • 
+
    • bool italic () const
      • 
+
    • void setItalic ( bool enable )
      • 
+
    • bool underline () const
      • 
+
    • void setUnderline ( bool enable )
      • 
+
    • bool overline () const
      • 
+
    • void setOverline ( bool enable )
      • 
+
    • bool strikeOut () const
      • 
+
    • void setStrikeOut ( bool enable )
      • 
+
    • bool fixedPitch () const
      • 
+
    • void setFixedPitch ( bool enable )
      • 
+
    • StyleHint styleHint () const
      • 
+
    • StyleStrategy styleStrategy () const
      • 
+
    • void setStyleHint ( StyleHint hint, StyleStrategy strategy = PreferDefault )
      • 
+
    • void setStyleStrategy ( StyleStrategy s )
      • 
+
    • int stretch () const
      • 
+
    • void setStretch ( int factor )
      • 
+
    • bool rawMode () const
      • 
+
    • void setRawMode ( bool enable )
      • 
+
    • bool exactMatch () const
      • 
+
    • TQFont & operator= ( const TQFont & font )
      • 
+
    • bool operator== ( const TQFont & f ) const
      • 
+
    • bool operator!= ( const TQFont & f ) const
      • 
+
    • bool isCopyOf ( const TQFont & f ) const
      • 
+
    • HFONT handle () const
      • 
+
    • void setRawName ( const TQString & name )
      • 
+
    • TQString rawName () const
      • 
+
    • TQString key () const
      • 
+
    • TQString toString () const
      • 
+
    • bool fromString ( const TQString & descrip )
      • 
+
    • void qwsRenderToDisk ( bool all = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • enum Script { Latin, Greek, Cyrillic, Armenian, Georgian, Runic, Ogham, SpacingModifiers, CombiningMarks, Hebrew, Arabic, Syriac, Thaana, Devanagari, Bengali, Gurmukhi, Gujarati, Oriya, Tamil, Telugu, Kannada, Malayalam, Sinhala, Thai, Lao, Tibetan, Myanmar, Khmer, Han, Hiragana, Katakana, Hangul, Bopomofo, Yi, Ethiopic, Cherokee, CanadianAboriginal, Mongolian, CurrencySymbols, LetterlikeSymbols, NumberForms, MathematicalOperators, TechnicalSymbols, GeometricSymbols, MiscellaneousSymbols, EnclosedAndSquare, Braille, Unicode, Tagalog, Hanunoo, Buhid, Tagbanwa, KatakanaHalfWidth, Limbu, TaiLe }
      • 
+
    • TQString defaultFamily () const
      • 
+
    • TQString lastResortFamily () const
      • 
+
    • TQString lastResortFont () const
      • 
+
    • TQFont resolve ( const TQFont & other ) const
      • 
+
    
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQString substitute ( const TQString & familyName )
      • 
+
    • TQStringList substitutes ( const TQString & familyName )
      • 
+
    • TQStringList substitutions ()
      • 
+
    • void insertSubstitution ( const TQString & familyName, const TQString & substituteName )
      • 
+
    • void insertSubstitutions ( const TQString & familyName, const TQStringList & substituteNames )
      • 
+
    • void removeSubstitution ( const TQString & familyName )
      • 
+
    • TQFont defaultFont ()  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void setDefaultFont ( const TQFont & f )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
      
+
    • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQFont & font )
      • 
+
    • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQFont & font )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQFont class specifies a font used for drawing text.
+
     
+
+
+
+
     When you create a TQFont object you specify various attributes that
+you want the font to have. TQt will use the font with the specified
+attributes, or if no matching font exists, TQt will use the closest
+matching installed font. The attributes of the font that is
+actually used are retrievable from a TQFontInfo object. If the
+window system provides an exact match exactMatch() returns TRUE.
+Use TQFontMetrics to get measurements, e.g. the pixel length of a
+string using TQFontMetrics::width().
+
     Use TQApplication::setFont() to set the application's default font.
+
     If a choosen X11 font does not include all the characters that
+need to be displayed, TQFont will try to find the characters in the
+nearest equivalent fonts. When a TQPainter draws a character from a
+font the TQFont will report whether or not it has the character; if
+it does not, TQPainter will draw an unfilled square.
+
     Create TQFonts like this:
+
    +    TQFont serifFont( "Times", 10, Bold );
+    TQFont sansFont( "Helvetica [Cronyx]", 12 );
+    
    
+ 
+
     The attributes set in the constructor can also be set later, e.g.
+setFamily(), setPointSize(), setPointSizeFloat(), setWeight() and
+setItalic(). The remaining attributes must be set after
+contstruction, e.g. setBold(), setUnderline(), setOverline(),
+setStrikeOut() and setFixedPitch(). TQFontInfo objects should be
+created after the font's attributes have been set. A TQFontInfo
+object will not change, even if you change the font's
+attributes. The corresponding "get" functions, e.g. family(),
+pointSize(), etc., return the values that were set, even though
+the values used may differ. The actual values are available from a
+TQFontInfo object.
+
     If the requested font family is unavailable you can influence the
+font matching algorithm by choosing a
+particular TQFont::StyleHint and TQFont::StyleStrategy with
+setStyleHint(). The default family (corresponding to the current
+style hint) is returned by defaultFamily().
+
     The font-matching algorithm has a lastResortFamily() and
+lastResortFont() in cases where a suitable match cannot be found.
+You can provide substitutions for font family names using
+insertSubstitution() and insertSubstitutions(). Substitutions can
+be removed with removeSubstitution(). Use substitute() to retrieve
+a family's first substitute, or the family name itself if it has
+no substitutes. Use substitutes() to retrieve a list of a family's
+substitutes (which may be empty).
+
     Every TQFont has a key() which you can use, for example, as the key
+in a cache or dictionary. If you want to store a user's font
+preferences you could use TQSettings, writing the font information
+with toString() and reading it back with fromString(). The
+operator<<() and operator>>() functions are also available, but
+they work on a data stream.
+
     It is possible to set the height of characters shown on the screen
+to a specified number of pixels with setPixelSize(); however using
+setPointSize() has a similar effect and provides device
+independence.
+
     Under the X Window System you can set a font using its system
+specific name with setRawName().
+
     Loading fonts can be expensive, especially on X11. TQFont contains
+extensive optimizations to make the copying of TQFont objects fast,
+and to cache the results of the slow window system functions it
+depends upon.
+
     
+The font matching algorithm works as follows:
+
      
+
    1.  The specified font family is searched for.
+
    2.  If not found, the styleHint() is used to select a replacement
+family.
+
    3.  Each replacement font family is searched for.
+
    4.  If none of these are found or there was no styleHint(), "helvetica"
+will be searched for.
+
    5.  If "helvetica" isn't found TQt will try the lastResortFamily().
+
    6.  If the lastResortFamily() isn't found TQt will try the
+lastResortFont() which will always return a name of some kind.
+
    
+
     Once a font is found, the remaining attributes are matched in order of
+priority:
+
      
+
    1.  fixedPitch()
+
    2.  pointSize() (see below)
+
    3.  weight()
+
    4.  italic()
+
    
+
     If you have a font which matches on family, even if none of the
+other attributes match, this font will be chosen in preference to
+a font which doesn't match on family but which does match on the
+other attributes. This is because font family is the dominant
+search criteria.
+
     The point size is defined to match if it is within 20% of the
+requested point size. When several fonts match and are only
+distinguished by point size, the font with the closest point size
+to the one requested will be chosen.
+
     The actual family, font size, weight and other font attributes
+used for drawing text will depend on what's available for the
+chosen family under the window system. A TQFontInfo object can be
+used to determine the actual values used for drawing the text.
+
     Examples:
+
     
    +    TQFont f("Helvetica");
+    
    
+ 
+If you had both an Adobe and a Cronyx Helvetica, you might get
+either.
+
     
    +    TQFont f1( "Helvetica [Cronyx]" );  // TQt 3.x
+    TQFont f2( "Cronyx-Helvetica" );    // TQt 2.x compatibility
+    
    
+ 
+You can specify the foundry you want in the family name. Both fonts,
+f1 and f2, in the above example will be set to  "Helvetica
+[Cronyx]".
+
     To determine the attributes of the font actually used in the window
+system, use a TQFontInfo object, e.g.
+
    +    TQFontInfo info( f1 );
+    TQString family = info.family();
+    
    
+ 
+
     To find out font metrics use a TQFontMetrics object, e.g.
+
    +    TQFontMetrics fm( f1 );
+    int pixelWidth = fm.width( "How many pixels wide is this text?" );
+    int pixelHeight = fm.height();
+    
    
+ 
+
     For more general information on fonts, see the
+comp.fonts FAQ.
+Information on encodings can be found from
+Roman Czyborra's page.
+
     
    See also TQFontMetrics, TQFontInfo, TQFontDatabase, TQApplication::setFont(), TQWidget::font, TQPainter::setFont(), TQFont::StyleHint, TQFont::Weight, Widget Appearance and Style, Graphics Classes, and Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQFont::Script
    
+
+
     This enum represents Unicode allocated
+scripts. For exhaustive coverage see The
+    Unicode Standard Version 3.0. The following scripts are
+supported:
+
     Modern European alphabetic scripts (left to right):
+
      
+
    • TQFont::Latin - consists of most alphabets based on the original Latin alphabet.
+
    • TQFont::Greek - covers ancient and modern Greek and Coptic.
+
    • TQFont::Cyrillic - covers the Slavic and non-Slavic languages using
+cyrillic alphabets.
+
    • TQFont::Armenian - contains the Armenian alphabet used with the
+Armenian language.
+
    • TQFont::Georgian - covers at least the language Georgian.
+
    • TQFont::Runic - covers the known constituents of the Runic alphabets used
+by the early and medieval societies in the Germanic,
+Scandinavian, and Anglo-Saxon areas.
+
    • TQFont::Ogham - is an alphabetical script used to write a very early
+form of Irish.
+
    • TQFont::SpacingModifiers - are small signs indicating modifications
+to the preceeding letter.
+
    • TQFont::CombiningMarks - consist of diacritical marks not specific to
+a particular alphabet, diacritical marks used in
+combination with mathematical and technical symbols, and
+glyph encodings applied to multiple letterforms.
+
     Middle Eastern scripts (right to left):
+
      
+
    • TQFont::Hebrew - is used for writing Hebrew, Yiddish, and some other languages.
+
    • TQFont::Arabic - covers the Arabic language as well as Persian, Urdu,
+Kurdish and some others.
+
    • TQFont::Syriac - is used to write the active liturgical languages and
+dialects of several Middle Eastern and Southeast Indian
+communities.
+
    • TQFont::Thaana - is used to write the Maledivian Dhivehi language.
+
     South and Southeast Asian scripts (left to right with few historical exceptions):
+
      
+
    • TQFont::Devanagari - covers classical Sanskrit and modern Hindi as
+well as several other languages.
+
    • TQFont::Bengali - is a relative to Devanagari employed to write the
+Bengali language used in West Bengal/India and Bangladesh
+as well as several minority languages.
+
    • TQFont::Gurmukhi - is another Devanagari relative used to write Punjabi.
+
    • TQFont::Gujarati - is closely related to Devanagari and used to write
+the Gujarati language of the Gujarat state in India.
+
    • TQFont::Oriya - is used to write the Oriya language of Orissa state/India.
+
    • TQFont::Tamil - is used to write the Tamil language of Tamil Nadu state/India,
+Sri Lanka, Singapore and parts of Malaysia as well as some
+minority languages.
+
    • TQFont::Telugu - is used to write the Telugu language of Andhra
+Pradesh state/India and some minority languages.
+
    • TQFont::Kannada - is another South Indian script used to write the
+Kannada language of Karnataka state/India and some minority
+languages.
+
    • TQFont::Malayalam - is used to write the Malayalam language of Kerala
+state/India.
+
    • TQFont::Sinhala - is used for Sri Lanka's majority language Sinhala
+and is also employed to write Pali, Sanskrit, and Tamil.
+
    • TQFont::Thai - is used to write Thai and other Southeast Asian languages.
+
    • TQFont::Lao - is a language and script quite similar to Thai.
+
    • TQFont::Tibetan - is the script used to write Tibetan in several
+countries like Tibet, the bordering Indian regions and
+Nepal. It is also used in the Buddist philosophy and
+liturgy of the Mongolian cultural area.
+
    • TQFont::Myanmar - is mainly used to write the Burmese language of
+Myanmar (former Burma).
+
    • TQFont::Khmer - is the official language of Kampuchea.
+
     East Asian scripts (traditionally top-down, right to left, modern
+often horizontal left to right):
+
      
+
    • TQFont::Han - consists of the CJK (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
+idiographic characters.
+
    • TQFont::Hiragana - is a cursive syllabary used to indicate phonetics
+and pronounciation of Japanese words.
+
    • TQFont::Katakana - is a non-cursive syllabic script used to write
+Japanese words with visual emphasis and non-Japanese words
+in a phonetical manner.
+
    • TQFont::Hangul - is a Korean script consisting of alphabetic components.
+
    • TQFont::Bopomofo - is a phonetic alphabet for Chinese (mainly Mandarin).
+
    • TQFont::Yi - (also called Cuan or Wei) is a syllabary used to write
+the Yi language of Southwestern China, Myanmar, Laos, and Vietnam.
+
     Additional scripts that do not fit well into the script categories above:
+
      
+
    • TQFont::Ethiopic - is a syllabary used by several Central East African languages.
+
    • TQFont::Cherokee - is a left-to-right syllabic script used to write
+the Cherokee language.
+
    • TQFont::CanadianAboriginal - consists of the syllabics used by some
+Canadian aboriginal societies.
+
    • TQFont::Mongolian - is the traditional (and recently reintroduced)
+script used to write Mongolian.
+
     Symbols:
+
      
+
    • TQFont::CurrencySymbols - contains currency symbols not encoded in other scripts.
+
    • TQFont::LetterlikeSymbols - consists of symbols derived  from
+ordinary letters of an alphabetical script.
+
    • TQFont::NumberForms - are provided for compatibility with other
+existing character sets.
+
    • TQFont::MathematicalOperators - consists of encodings for operators,
+relations and other symbols like arrows used in a mathematical context.
+
    • TQFont::TechnicalSymbols - contains representations for control
+codes, the space symbol, APL symbols and other symbols
+mainly used in the context of electronic data processing.
+
    • TQFont::GeometricSymbols - covers block elements and geometric shapes.
+
    • TQFont::MiscellaneousSymbols - consists of a heterogeneous collection
+of symbols that do not fit any other Unicode character
+block, e.g. Dingbats.
+
    • TQFont::EnclosedAndSquare - is provided for compatibility with some
+East Asian standards.
+
    • TQFont::Braille - is an international writing system used by blind
+people. This script encodes the 256 eight-dot patterns with
+the 64 six-dot patterns as a subset.
+
    • TQFont::Tagalog
+
    • TQFont::Hanunoo
+
    • TQFont::Buhid
+
    • TQFont::Tagbanwa
+
    • TQFont::KatakanaHalfWidth
+
    • TQFont::Limbu - (Unicode 4.0)
+
    • TQFont::TaiLe - (Unicode 4.0)
+
    • TQFont::Unicode - includes all the above scripts.
+
    
+
    TQFont::Stretch
    
+
+
     Predefined stretch values that follow the CSS naming convention.
+
      
+
    • TQFont::UltraCondensed - 50
+
    • TQFont::ExtraCondensed - 62
+
    • TQFont::Condensed - 75
+
    • TQFont::SemiCondensed - 87
+
    • TQFont::Unstretched - 100
+
    • TQFont::SemiExpanded - 112
+
    • TQFont::Expanded - 125
+
    • TQFont::ExtraExpanded - 150
+
    • TQFont::UltraExpanded - 200
+
     
    See also setStretch() and stretch().
+
+
    TQFont::StyleHint
    
+
+
     Style hints are used by the font
+    matching algorithm to find an appropriate default family
+if a selected font family is not available.
+
      
+
    • TQFont::AnyStyle - leaves the font matching algorithm to choose the
+family. This is the default.
+
    • TQFont::SansSerif - the font matcher prefer sans serif fonts.
+
    • TQFont::Helvetica - is a synonym for SansSerif.
+
    • TQFont::Serif - the font matcher prefers serif fonts.
+
    • TQFont::Times - is a synonym for Serif.
+
    • TQFont::TypeWriter - the font matcher prefers fixed pitch fonts.
+
    • TQFont::Courier - a synonym for TypeWriter.
+
    • TQFont::OldEnglish - the font matcher prefers decorative fonts.
+
    • TQFont::Decorative - is a synonym for OldEnglish.
+
    • TQFont::System - the font matcher prefers system fonts.
+
    
+
    TQFont::StyleStrategy
    
+
+
     The style strategy tells the font
+    matching algorithm what type of fonts should be used to
+find an appropriate default family.
+
     The following strategies are available:
+
      
+
    • TQFont::PreferDefault - the default style strategy. It does not prefer
+any type of font.
+
    • TQFont::PreferBitmap - prefers bitmap fonts (as opposed to outline
+fonts).
+
    • TQFont::PreferDevice - prefers device fonts.
+
    • TQFont::PreferOutline - prefers outline fonts (as opposed to bitmap fonts).
+
    • TQFont::ForceOutline - forces the use of outline fonts.
+
    • TQFont::NoAntialias - don't antialias the fonts.
+
    • TQFont::PreferAntialias - antialias if possible.
+
    • TQFont::OpenGLCompatible - forces the use of OpenGL compatible
+fonts.
+
     Any of these may be OR-ed with one of these flags:
+
      
+
    • TQFont::PreferMatch - prefer an exact match. The font matcher will try to
+use the exact font size that has been specified.
+
    • TQFont::PreferQuality - prefer the best quality font. The font matcher
+will use the nearest standard point size that the font
+supports.
+
    
+
    TQFont::Weight
    
+
+
     TQt uses a weighting scale from 0 to 99 similar to, but not the
+same as, the scales used in Windows or CSS. A weight of 0 is
+ultralight, whilst 99 will be an extremely black.
+
     This enum contains the predefined font weights:
+
      
+
    • TQFont::Light - 25
+
    • TQFont::Normal - 50
+
    • TQFont::DemiBold - 63
+
    • TQFont::Bold - 75
+
    • TQFont::Black - 87
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQFont::TQFont ()
+
    
+Constructs a font object that uses the application's default font.
+
     
    See also TQApplication::setFont() and TQApplication::font().
+
+
    TQFont::TQFont ( const TQString & family, int pointSize = 12, int weight = Normal, bool italic = FALSE )
+
    
+Constructs a font object with the specified family, pointSize, weight and italic settings.
+
     If pointSize is <= 0 it is set to 1.
+
     The family name may optionally also include a foundry name,
+e.g. "Helvetica [Cronyx]". (The TQt 2.x syntax, i.e.
+"Cronyx-Helvetica", is also supported.) If the family is
+available from more than one foundry and the foundry isn't
+specified, an arbitrary foundry is chosen. If the family isn't
+available a family will be set using the font
+    matching algorithm.
+
     
    See also Weight, setFamily(), setPointSize(), setWeight(), setItalic(), setStyleHint(), and TQApplication::font().
+
+
    TQFont::TQFont ( const TQFont & font )
+
    
+Constructs a font that is a copy of font.
+
+
    TQFont::~TQFont ()
+
    
+Destroys the font object and frees all allocated resources.
+
+
    bool TQFont::bold () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if weight() is a value greater than TQFont::Normal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also weight(), setBold(), and TQFontInfo::bold().
+
+
    Example: chart/optionsform.cpp.
+
    int TQFont::deciPointSize () const [protected]
+
    
+Returns the point size in 1/10ths of a point.
+
     The returned value will be -1 if the font size has been specified
+in pixels.
+
     
    See also pointSize() and pointSizeFloat().
+
+
    TQString TQFont::defaultFamily () const
+
    
+Returns the family name that corresponds to the current style
+hint.
+
     
    See also StyleHint, styleHint(), and setStyleHint().
+
+
    TQFont TQFont::defaultFont () [static]
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Please use TQApplication::font() instead.
+
+
    bool TQFont::dirty () const [protected]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the font attributes have been changed and the font
+has to be (re)loaded; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQFont::exactMatch () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if a window system font exactly matching the settings
+of this font is available.
+
     
    See also TQFontInfo.
+
+
    TQString TQFont::family () const
+
    
+Returns the requested font family name, i.e. the name set in the
+constructor or the last setFont() call.
+
     
    See also setFamily(), substitutes(), and substitute().
+
+
    Examples: chart/optionsform.cpp and fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp.
+
    bool TQFont::fixedPitch () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if fixed pitch has been set; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setFixedPitch() and TQFontInfo::fixedPitch().
+
+
    bool TQFont::fromString ( const TQString & descrip )
+
    
+Sets this font to match the description descrip. The description
+is a comma-separated list of the font attributes, as returned by
+toString().
+
     
    See also toString() and operator>>().
+
+
    HFONT TQFont::handle () const
+
    
+Returns the window system handle to the font, for low-level
+access. Using this function is not portable.
+
+
    void TQFont::insertSubstitution ( const TQString & familyName, const TQString & substituteName ) [static]
+
    
+Inserts the family name substituteName into the substitution
+table for familyName.
+
     
    See also insertSubstitutions(), removeSubstitution(), substitutions(), substitute(), and substitutes().
+
+
    Example: fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp.
+
    void TQFont::insertSubstitutions ( const TQString & familyName, const TQStringList & substituteNames ) [static]
+
    
+Inserts the list of families substituteNames into the
+substitution list for familyName.
+
     
    See also insertSubstitution(), removeSubstitution(), substitutions(), and substitute().
+
+
    Example: fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp.
+
    bool TQFont::isCopyOf ( const TQFont & f ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this font and f are copies of each other, i.e.
+one of them was created as a copy of the other and neither has
+been modified since. This is much stricter than equality.
+
     
    See also operator=() and operator==().
+
+
    bool TQFont::italic () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if italic has been set; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setItalic().
+
+
    Example: chart/optionsform.cpp.
+
    TQString TQFont::key () const
+
    
+Returns the font's key, a textual representation of a font. It is
+typically used as the key for a cache or dictionary of fonts.
+
     
    See also TQMap.
+
+
    TQString TQFont::lastResortFamily () const
+
    
+Returns the "last resort" font family name.
+
     The current implementation tries a wide variety of common fonts,
+returning the first one it finds. Is is possible that no family is
+found in which case a null string is returned.
+
     
    See also lastResortFont().
+
+
    TQString TQFont::lastResortFont () const
+
    
+Returns a "last resort" font name for the font matching algorithm.
+This is used if the last resort family is not available. It will
+always return a name, if necessary returning something like
+"fixed" or "system".
+
     The current implementation tries a wide variety of common fonts,
+returning the first one it finds. The implementation may change
+at any time, but this function will always return a string
+containing something.
+
     It is theoretically possible that there really isn't a
+lastResortFont() in which case TQt will abort with an error
+message. We have not been able to identify a case where this
+happens. Please report it as a bug if
+it does, preferably with a list of the fonts you have installed.
+
     
    See also lastResortFamily() and rawName().
+
+
    bool TQFont::operator!= ( const TQFont & f ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this font is different from f; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     Two TQFonts are considered to be different if their font attributes
+are different. If rawMode() is enabled for both fonts, only the
+family fields are compared.
+
     
    See also operator==().
+
+
    TQFont & TQFont::operator= ( const TQFont & font )
+
    
+Assigns font to this font and returns a reference to it.
+
+
    bool TQFont::operator== ( const TQFont & f ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this font is equal to f; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     Two TQFonts are considered equal if their font attributes are
+equal. If rawMode() is enabled for both fonts, only the family
+fields are compared.
+
     
    See also operator!=() and isCopyOf().
+
+
    bool TQFont::overline () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if overline has been set; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setOverline().
+
+
    int TQFont::pixelSize () const
+
    
+Returns the pixel size of the font if it was set with
+setPixelSize(). Returns -1 if the size was set with setPointSize()
+or setPointSizeFloat().
+
     
    See also setPixelSize(), pointSize(), TQFontInfo::pointSize(), and TQFontInfo::pixelSize().
+
+
    int TQFont::pointSize () const
+
    
+Returns the point size of the font. Returns -1 if the font size
+was specified in pixels.
+
     
    See also setPointSize(), deciPointSize(), and pointSizeFloat().
+
+
    Examples: chart/optionsform.cpp and fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp.
+
    float TQFont::pointSizeFloat () const
+
    
+Returns the point size of the font. Returns -1 if the font size was
+specified in pixels.
+
     
    See also pointSize(), setPointSizeFloat(), pixelSize(), TQFontInfo::pointSize(), and TQFontInfo::pixelSize().
+
+
    void TQFont::qwsRenderToDisk ( bool all = TRUE )
+
    
+Saves the glyphs in the font that have previously been accessed as
+a TQPF file. If all is TRUE (the default), then before saving,
+all glyphs are marked as used.
+
     If the font is large and you are sure that only a subset of
+characters will ever be required on the target device, passing
+FALSE for the all parameter can save a significant amount of
+disk space.
+
     Note that this function is only applicable on TQt/Embedded.
+
+
    bool TQFont::rawMode () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if raw mode is used for font name matching; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setRawMode() and rawName().
+
+
    TQString TQFont::rawName () const
+
    
+Returns the name of the font within the underlying window system.
+
     On Windows, this is usually just the family name of a TrueType
+font.
+
     On X11, it is an XLFD (X Logical Font Description).  When TQt is
+build with Xft support on X11, the return value can be an Xft
+pattern or an XLFD.
+
     Using the return value of this function is usually not portable.
+
     
    See also setRawName().
+
+
    void TQFont::removeSubstitution ( const TQString & familyName ) [static]
+
    
+Removes all the substitutions for familyName.
+
     
    See also insertSubstitutions(), insertSubstitution(), substitutions(), and substitute().
+
+
    TQFont TQFont::resolve ( const TQFont & other ) const
+
    
+Returns a new TQFont that has attributes copied from other.
+
+
    void TQFont::setBold ( bool enable )
+
    
+
+
     If enable is true sets the font's weight to TQFont::Bold; otherwise sets the weight to TQFont::Normal.
+
     For finer boldness control use setWeight().
+
     
    See also bold() and setWeight().
+
+
    Examples: menu/menu.cpp and themes/metal.cpp.
+
    void TQFont::setDefaultFont ( const TQFont & f ) [static]
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Please use TQApplication::setFont() instead.
+
+
    void TQFont::setFamily ( const TQString & family )
+
    
+Sets the family name of the font. The name is case insensitive and
+may include a foundry name.
+
     The family name may optionally also include a foundry name,
+e.g. "Helvetica [Cronyx]". (The TQt 2.x syntax, i.e.
+"Cronyx-Helvetica", is also supported.) If the family is
+available from more than one foundry and the foundry isn't
+specified, an arbitrary foundry is chosen. If the family isn't
+available a family will be set using the font
+    matching algorithm.
+
     
    See also family(), setStyleHint(), and TQFontInfo.
+
+
    void TQFont::setFixedPitch ( bool enable )
+
    
+If enable is TRUE, sets fixed pitch on; otherwise sets fixed
+pitch off.
+
     
    See also fixedPitch() and TQFontInfo.
+
+
    void TQFont::setItalic ( bool enable )
+
    
+If enable is TRUE, italic is set on; otherwise italic is set
+off.
+
     
    See also italic() and TQFontInfo.
+
+
    Examples: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp, fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp, and themes/metal.cpp.
+
    void TQFont::setOverline ( bool enable )
+
    
+If enable is TRUE, sets overline on; otherwise sets overline off.
+
     
    See also overline() and TQFontInfo.
+
+
    void TQFont::setPixelSize ( int pixelSize )
+
    
+Sets the font size to pixelSize pixels.
+
     Using this function makes the font device dependent. Use
+setPointSize() or setPointSizeFloat() to set the size of the font
+in a device independent manner.
+
     
    See also pixelSize().
+
+
    Example: qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
+
    void TQFont::setPixelSizeFloat ( float pixelSize )
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Sets the logical pixel height of font characters when shown on
+the screen to pixelSize.
+
+
    void TQFont::setPointSize ( int pointSize )
+
    
+Sets the point size to pointSize. The point size must be
+greater than zero.
+
     
    See also pointSize() and setPointSizeFloat().
+
+
    Example: fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp.
+
    void TQFont::setPointSizeFloat ( float pointSize )
+
    
+Sets the point size to pointSize. The point size must be
+greater than zero. The requested precision may not be achieved on
+all platforms.
+
     
    See also pointSizeFloat(), setPointSize(), and setPixelSize().
+
+
    void TQFont::setRawMode ( bool enable )
+
    
+If enable is TRUE, turns raw mode on; otherwise turns raw mode
+off. This function only has an effect under X11.
+
     If raw mode is enabled, TQt will search for an X font with a
+complete font name matching the family name, ignoring all other
+values set for the TQFont. If the font name matches several fonts,
+TQt will use the first font returned by X. TQFontInfo cannot be
+used to fetch information about a TQFont using raw mode (it will
+return the values set in the TQFont for all parameters, including
+the family name).
+
     Warning: Do not use raw mode unless you really, really need it! In
+most (if not all) cases, setRawName() is a much better choice.
+
     
    See also rawMode() and setRawName().
+
+
    void TQFont::setRawName ( const TQString & name )
+
    
+Sets a font by its system specific name. The function is
+particularly useful under X, where system font settings (for
+example X resources) are usually available in XLFD (X Logical Font
+Description) form only. You can pass an XLFD as name to this
+function.
+
     A font set with setRawName() is still a full-featured TQFont. It can
+be queried (for example with italic()) or modified (for example with
+setItalic()) and is therefore also suitable for rendering rich text.
+
     If TQt's internal font database cannot resolve the raw name, the
+font becomes a raw font with name as its family.
+
     Note that the present implementation does not handle wildcards in
+XLFDs well, and that font aliases (file fonts.alias in the font
+directory on X11) are not supported.
+
     
    See also rawName(), setRawMode(), and setFamily().
+
+
    void TQFont::setStretch ( int factor )
+
    
+Sets the stretch factor for the font.
+
     The stretch factor changes the width of all characters in the font
+by factor percent.  For example, setting factor to 150
+results in all characters in the font being 1.5 times ( ie. 150% )
+wider.  The default stretch factor is 100.  The minimum stretch
+factor is 1, and the maximum stretch factor is 4000.
+
     The stretch factor is only applied to outline fonts.  The stretch
+factor is ignored for bitmap fonts.
+
     NOTE: TQFont cannot stretch XLFD fonts.  When loading XLFD fonts on
+X11, the stretch factor is matched against a predefined set of
+values for the SETWIDTH_NAME field of the XLFD.
+
     
    See also stretch() and TQFont::StyleStrategy.
+
+
    void TQFont::setStrikeOut ( bool enable )
+
    
+If enable is TRUE, sets strikeout on; otherwise sets strikeout
+off.
+
     
    See also strikeOut() and TQFontInfo.
+
+
    void TQFont::setStyleHint ( StyleHint hint, StyleStrategy strategy = PreferDefault )
+
    
+Sets the style hint and strategy to hint and strategy,
+respectively.
+
     If these aren't set explicitly the style hint will default to
+AnyStyle and the style strategy to PreferDefault.
+
     TQt does not support style hints on X11 since this information
+is not provided by the window system.
+
     
    See also StyleHint, styleHint(), StyleStrategy, styleStrategy(), and TQFontInfo.
+
+
    Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp and fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp.
+
    void TQFont::setStyleStrategy ( StyleStrategy s )
+
    
+Sets the style strategy for the font to s.
+
     
    See also TQFont::StyleStrategy.
+
+
    void TQFont::setUnderline ( bool enable )
+
    
+If enable is TRUE, sets underline on; otherwise sets underline
+off.
+
     
    See also underline() and TQFontInfo.
+
+
    Examples: fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp and menu/menu.cpp.
+
    void TQFont::setWeight ( int weight )
+
    
+Sets the weight the font to weight, which should be a value
+from the TQFont::Weight enumeration.
+
     
    See also weight() and TQFontInfo.
+
+
    Example: fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp.
+
    int TQFont::stretch () const
+
    
+Returns the stretch factor for the font.
+
     
    See also setStretch().
+
+
    bool TQFont::strikeOut () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if strikeout has been set; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setStrikeOut().
+
+
    StyleHint TQFont::styleHint () const
+
    
+Returns the StyleHint.
+
     The style hint affects the font
+    matching algorithm. See TQFont::StyleHint for the list
+of strategies.
+
     
    See also setStyleHint(), TQFont::StyleStrategy, and TQFontInfo::styleHint().
+
+
    StyleStrategy TQFont::styleStrategy () const
+
    
+Returns the StyleStrategy.
+
     The style strategy affects the font
+    matching algorithm. See TQFont::StyleStrategy for the
+list of strategies.
+
     
    See also setStyleHint() and TQFont::StyleHint.
+
+
    TQString TQFont::substitute ( const TQString & familyName ) [static]
+
    
+Returns the first family name to be used whenever familyName is
+specified. The lookup is case insensitive.
+
     If there is no substitution for familyName, familyName is
+returned.
+
     To obtain a list of substitutions use substitutes().
+
     
    See also setFamily(), insertSubstitutions(), insertSubstitution(), and removeSubstitution().
+
+
    TQStringList TQFont::substitutes ( const TQString & familyName ) [static]
+
    
+Returns a list of family names to be used whenever familyName
+is specified. The lookup is case insensitive.
+
     If there is no substitution for familyName, an empty list is
+returned.
+
     
    See also substitute(), insertSubstitutions(), insertSubstitution(), and removeSubstitution().
+
+
    Example: fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp.
+
    TQStringList TQFont::substitutions () [static]
+
    
+Returns a sorted list of substituted family names.
+
     
    See also insertSubstitution(), removeSubstitution(), and substitute().
+
+
    TQString TQFont::toString () const
+
    
+Returns a description of the font. The description is a
+comma-separated list of the attributes, perfectly suited for use
+in TQSettings.
+
     
    See also fromString() and operator<<().
+
+
    bool TQFont::underline () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if underline has been set; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setUnderline().
+
+
    int TQFont::weight () const
+
    
+Returns the weight of the font which is one of the enumerated
+values from TQFont::Weight.
+
     
    See also setWeight(), Weight, and TQFontInfo.
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQFont & font )
+
    
+
+
     Writes the font font to the data stream s. (toString()
+writes to a text stream.)
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQFont & font )
+
    
+
+
     Reads the font font from the data stream s. (fromString()
+reads from a text stream.)
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqfontdatabase.html b/doc/html/ntqfontdatabase.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..81f0cd4bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqfontdatabase.html
@@ -0,0 +1,322 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQFontDatabase Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQFontDatabase Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQFontDatabase class provides information about the fonts available in the underlying window system.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqfontdatabase.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQFontDatabase ()
      • 
+
    • TQStringList families () const
      • 
+
    • TQStringList families ( TQFont::Script script ) const
      • 
+
    • TQStringList styles ( const TQString & family ) const
      • 
+
    • TQValueList<int> pointSizes ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style = TQString::null )
      • 
+
    • TQValueList<int> smoothSizes ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style )
      • 
+
    • TQString styleString ( const TQFont & f )
      • 
+
    • TQFont font ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, int pointSize )
      • 
+
    • bool isBitmapScalable ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style = TQString::null ) const
      • 
+
    • bool isSmoothlyScalable ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style = TQString::null ) const
      • 
+
    • bool isScalable ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style = TQString::null ) const
      • 
+
    • bool isFixedPitch ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style = TQString::null ) const
      • 
+
    • bool italic ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style ) const
      • 
+
    • bool bold ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style ) const
      • 
+
    • int weight ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style ) const
      • 
+
    • TQStringList families ( bool ) const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • TQStringList styles ( const TQString & family, const TQString & ) const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • TQValueList<int> pointSizes ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • TQValueList<int> smoothSizes ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • TQFont font ( const TQString & familyName, const TQString & style, int pointSize, const TQString & )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • bool isBitmapScalable ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • bool isSmoothlyScalable ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • bool isScalable ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • bool isFixedPitch ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • bool italic ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • bool bold ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • int weight ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQFontDatabase class provides information about the fonts available in the underlying window system.
+
     
+
+
     The most common uses of this class are to query the database for
+the list of font families() and for the pointSizes() and styles()
+that are available for each family. An alternative to pointSizes()
+is smoothSizes() which returns the sizes at which a given family
+and style will look attractive.
+
     If the font family is available from two or more foundries the
+foundry name is included in the family name, e.g. "Helvetica
+[Adobe]" and "Helvetica [Cronyx]". When you specify a family you
+can either use the old hyphenated TQt 2.x "foundry-family" format,
+e.g. "Cronyx-Helvetica", or the new bracketed TQt 3.x "family
+[foundry]" format e.g. "Helvetica [Cronyx]". If the family has a
+foundry it is always returned, e.g. by families(), using the
+bracketed format.
+
     The font() function returns a TQFont given a family, style and
+point size.
+
     A family and style combination can be checked to see if it is
+italic() or bold(), and to retrieve its weight(). Similarly we can
+call isBitmapScalable(), isSmoothlyScalable(), isScalable() and
+isFixedPitch().
+
     A text version of a style is given by styleString().
+
     The TQFontDatabase class also supports some static functions, for
+example, standardSizes(). You can retrieve the Unicode 3.0
+description of a script using
+scriptName(), and a sample of characters in a script with
+scriptSample().
+
     Example:
+
    +#include <ntqapplication.h>
+#include <ntqfontdatabase.h>
+#include <else.h>
+
+int main( int argc, char **argv )
+{
+    TQApplication app( argc, argv );
+    TQFontDatabase fdb;
+    TQStringList families = fdb.families();
+    for ( TQStringList::Iterator f = families.begin(); f != families.end(); ++f ) {
+        TQString family = *f;
+        qDebug( family );
+        TQStringList styles = fdb.styles( family );
+        for ( TQStringList::Iterator s = styles.begin(); s != styles.end(); ++s ) {
+            TQString style = *s;
+            TQString dstyle = "\t" + style + " (";
+            TQValueList<int> smoothies = fdb.smoothSizes( family, style );
+            for ( TQValueList<int>::Iterator points = smoothies.begin();
+                  points != smoothies.end(); ++points ) {
+                dstyle += TQString::number( *points ) + " ";
+            }
+            dstyle = dstyle.left( dstyle.length() - 1 ) + ")";
+            qDebug( dstyle );
+        }
+    }
+    return 0;
+}
+
    
+ 
+This example gets the list of font families, then the list of
+styles for each family and the point sizes that are available for
+each family/style combination.
+
    See also Environment Classes and Graphics Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQFontDatabase::TQFontDatabase ()
+
    
+Creates a font database object.
+
+
    bool TQFontDatabase::bold ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the font that has family family and style style is bold; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also italic() and weight().
+
+
    bool TQFontDatabase::bold ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
+
    TQStringList TQFontDatabase::families () const
+
     Returns a sorted list of the names of the available font families.
+
     If a family exists in several foundries, the returned name for
+that font is in the form "family [foundry]". Examples: "Times
+[Adobe]", "Times [Cronyx]", "Palatino".
+
+
    TQStringList TQFontDatabase::families ( TQFont::Script script ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns a sorted list of the available font families which support
+the Unicode script script.
+
     If a family exists in several foundries, the returned name for
+that font is in the form "family [foundry]". Examples: "Times
+[Adobe]", "Times [Cronyx]", "Palatino".
+
+
    TQStringList TQFontDatabase::families ( bool ) const
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
+
    TQFont TQFontDatabase::font ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, int pointSize )
+
    
+Returns a TQFont object that has family family, style style
+and point size pointSize. If no matching font could be created,
+a TQFont object that uses the application's default font is
+returned.
+
+
    TQFont TQFontDatabase::font ( const TQString & familyName, const TQString & style, int pointSize, const TQString & )
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
+
    bool TQFontDatabase::isBitmapScalable ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style = TQString::null ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the font that has family family and style style is a scalable bitmap font; otherwise returns FALSE. Scaling
+a bitmap font usually produces an unattractive hardly readable
+result, because the pixels of the font are scaled. If you need to
+scale a bitmap font it is better to scale it to one of the fixed
+sizes returned by smoothSizes().
+
     
    See also isScalable() and isSmoothlyScalable().
+
+
    bool TQFontDatabase::isBitmapScalable ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
+
    bool TQFontDatabase::isFixedPitch ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style = TQString::null ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the font that has family family and style style is fixed pitch; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQFontDatabase::isFixedPitch ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
+
    bool TQFontDatabase::isScalable ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style = TQString::null ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the font that has family family and style style is scalable; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also isBitmapScalable() and isSmoothlyScalable().
+
+
    bool TQFontDatabase::isScalable ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
+
    bool TQFontDatabase::isSmoothlyScalable ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style = TQString::null ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the font that has family family and style style is smoothly scalable; otherwise returns FALSE. If this
+function returns TRUE, it's safe to scale this font to any size,
+and the result will always look attractive.
+
     
    See also isScalable() and isBitmapScalable().
+
+
    bool TQFontDatabase::isSmoothlyScalable ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
+
    bool TQFontDatabase::italic ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the font that has family family and style style is italic; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also weight() and bold().
+
+
    bool TQFontDatabase::italic ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
+
    TQValueList<int> TQFontDatabase::pointSizes ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style = TQString::null )
+
    
+Returns a list of the point sizes available for the font that has
+family family and style style. The list may be empty.
+
     
    See also smoothSizes() and standardSizes().
+
+
    TQValueList<int> TQFontDatabase::pointSizes ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & )
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
+
    TQString TQFontDatabase::scriptName ( TQFont::Script script ) [static]
+
    
+Returns a string that gives a default description of the script
+(e.g. for displaying to the user in a dialog).  The name matches
+the name of the script as defined by the Unicode 3.0 standard.
+
     
    See also TQFont::Script.
+
+
    TQString TQFontDatabase::scriptSample ( TQFont::Script script ) [static]
+
    
+Returns a string with sample characters from script.
+
     
    See also TQFont::Script.
+
+
    TQValueList<int> TQFontDatabase::smoothSizes ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style )
+
    
+Returns the point sizes of a font that has family family and
+style style that will look attractive. The list may be empty.
+For non-scalable fonts and bitmap scalable fonts, this function
+is equivalent to pointSizes().
+
     
    See also pointSizes() and standardSizes().
+
+
    TQValueList<int> TQFontDatabase::smoothSizes ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & )
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
+
    TQValueList<int> TQFontDatabase::standardSizes () [static]
+
    
+Returns a list of standard font sizes.
+
     
    See also smoothSizes() and pointSizes().
+
+
    TQString TQFontDatabase::styleString ( const TQFont & f )
+
    
+Returns a string that describes the style of the font f. For
+example, "Bold Italic", "Bold", "Italic" or "Normal". An empty
+string may be returned.
+
+
    TQStringList TQFontDatabase::styles ( const TQString & family ) const
+
    
+Returns a list of the styles available for the font family family. Some example styles: "Light", "Light Italic", "Bold",
+"Oblique", "Demi". The list may be empty.
+
+
    TQStringList TQFontDatabase::styles ( const TQString & family, const TQString & ) const
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
+
    int TQFontDatabase::weight ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style ) const
+
    
+Returns the weight of the font that has family family and style
+style. If there is no such family and style combination,
+returns -1.
+
     
    See also italic() and bold().
+
+
    int TQFontDatabase::weight ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqfontdialog.html b/doc/html/ntqfontdialog.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..aafa8053f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqfontdialog.html
@@ -0,0 +1,143 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQFontDialog Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQFontDialog Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQFontDialog class provides a dialog widget for selecting a font.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqfontdialog.h>
+
    Inherits TQDialog.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQFont getFont ( bool * ok, const TQFont & initial, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQFont getFont ( bool * ok, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
+
+The TQFontDialog class provides a dialog widget for selecting a font.
+
     The usual way to use this class is to call one of the static convenience
+functions, e.g. getFont().
+
     Examples:
+
     
    +    bool ok;
+    TQFont font = TQFontDialog::getFont(
+                    &ok, TQFont( "Helvetica [Cronyx]", 10 ), this );
+    if ( ok ) {
+        // font is set to the font the user selected
+    } else {
+        // the user canceled the dialog; font is set to the initial
+        // value, in this case Helvetica [Cronyx], 10
+    }
+  
    
+ 
+
     The dialog can also be used to set a widget's font directly:
+
    +    myWidget.setFont( TQFontDialog::getFont( 0, myWidget.font() ) );
+  
    
+ 
+If the user clicks OK the font they chose will be used for myWidget,
+and if they click Cancel the original font is used.
+
     
    See also TQFont, TQFontInfo, TQFontMetrics, and Dialog Classes.
+
+
     
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQFont TQFontDialog::getFont ( bool * ok, const TQFont & initial, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) [static]
+
    
+Executes a modal font dialog and returns a font.
+
     If the user clicks OK, the selected font is returned. If the user
+clicks Cancel, the initial font is returned.
+
     The dialog is called name, with the parent parent.
+initial is the initially selected font.
+If the ok parameter is not-null, *ok is set to TRUE if the
+user clicked OK, and set to FALSE if the user clicked Cancel.
+
     This static function is less flexible than the full TQFontDialog
+object, but is convenient and easy to use.
+
     Examples:
+
    +    bool ok;
+    TQFont font = TQFontDialog::getFont( &ok, TQFont( "Times", 12 ), this );
+    if ( ok ) {
+        // font is set to the font the user selected
+    } else {
+        // the user canceled the dialog; font is set to the initial
+        // value, in this case Times, 12.
+    }
+  
    
+ 
+
     The dialog can also be used to set a widget's font directly:
+
    +    myWidget.setFont( TQFontDialog::getFont( 0, myWidget.font() ) );
+  
    
+ 
+In this example, if the user clicks OK the font they chose will be
+used, and if they click Cancel the original font is used.
+
+
    Examples: chart/chartform.cpp, chart/optionsform.cpp, qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    TQFont TQFontDialog::getFont ( bool * ok, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Executes a modal font dialog and returns a font.
+
     If the user clicks OK, the selected font is returned. If the user
+clicks Cancel, the TQt default font is returned.
+
     The dialog is called name, with parent parent.
+If the ok parameter is not-null, *ok is set to TRUE if the
+user clicked OK, and FALSE if the user clicked Cancel.
+
     This static function is less functional than the full TQFontDialog
+object, but is convenient and easy to use.
+
     Example:
+
    +    bool ok;
+    TQFont font = TQFontDialog::getFont( &ok, this );
+    if ( ok ) {
+        // font is set to the font the user selected
+    } else {
+        // the user canceled the dialog; font is set to the default
+        // application font, TQApplication::font()
+    }
+  
    
+ 
+
     
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqfontinfo.html b/doc/html/ntqfontinfo.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2d1f00c04
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqfontinfo.html
@@ -0,0 +1,191 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQFontInfo Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQFontInfo Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQFontInfo class provides general information about fonts.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqfontinfo.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
     The TQFontInfo class provides general information about fonts.
+
     
+
+
     The TQFontInfo class provides the same access functions as TQFont,
+e.g. family(), pointSize(), italic(), weight(), fixedPitch(),
+styleHint() etc. But whilst the TQFont access functions return the
+values that were set, a TQFontInfo object returns the values that
+apply to the font that will actually be used to draw the text.
+
     For example, when the program asks for a 25pt Courier font on a
+machine that has a non-scalable 24pt Courier font, TQFont will
+(normally) use the 24pt Courier for rendering. In this case,
+TQFont::pointSize() returns 25 and TQFontInfo::pointSize() returns
+24.
+
     There are three ways to create a TQFontInfo object.
+
      
+
    1.  Calling the TQFontInfo constructor with a TQFont creates a font
+info object for a screen-compatible font, i.e. the font cannot be
+a printer font*. If the font is changed later, the font
+info object is not updated.
+
       
    2.  TQWidget::fontInfo() returns the font info for a widget's font.
+This is equivalent to calling TQFontInfo(widget->font()). If the
+widget's font is changed later, the font info object is not
+updated.
+
       
    3.  TQPainter::fontInfo() returns the font info for a painter's
+current font. If the painter's font is changed later, the font
+info object is not updated.
+
    
+
     * If you use a printer font the values returned may be
+inaccurate. Printer fonts are not always accessible so the nearest
+screen font is used if a printer font is supplied.
+
     
    See also TQFont, TQFontMetrics, TQFontDatabase, Graphics Classes, and Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQFontInfo::TQFontInfo ( const TQFont & font )
+
    
+Constructs a font info object for font.
+
     The font must be screen-compatible, i.e. a font you use when
+drawing text in widgets or pixmaps, not TQPicture or TQPrinter.
+
     The font info object holds the information for the font that is
+passed in the constructor at the time it is created, and is not
+updated if the font's attributes are changed later.
+
     Use TQPainter::fontInfo() to get the font info when painting.
+This will give correct results also when painting on paint device
+that is not screen-compatible.
+
+
    TQFontInfo::TQFontInfo ( const TQFont & font, TQFont::Script script )
+
    
+Constructs a font info object for font using the specified script.
+
+
    TQFontInfo::TQFontInfo ( const TQFontInfo & fi )
+
    
+Constructs a copy of fi.
+
+
    TQFontInfo::~TQFontInfo ()
+
    
+Destroys the font info object.
+
+
    bool TQFontInfo::bold () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if weight() would return a value greater than TQFont::Normal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also weight() and TQFont::bold().
+
+
    Example: qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp.
+
    bool TQFontInfo::exactMatch () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the matched window system font is exactly the same
+as the one specified by the font; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also TQFont::exactMatch().
+
+
    TQString TQFontInfo::family () const
+
    
+Returns the family name of the matched window system font.
+
     
    See also TQFont::family().
+
+
    Examples: fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp and qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp.
+
    bool TQFontInfo::fixedPitch () const
+
    
+Returns the fixed pitch value of the matched window system font.
+
     
    See also TQFont::fixedPitch().
+
+
    bool TQFontInfo::italic () const
+
    
+Returns the italic value of the matched window system font.
+
     
    See also TQFont::italic().
+
+
    Example: qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp.
+
    TQFontInfo & TQFontInfo::operator= ( const TQFontInfo & fi )
+
    
+Assigns the font info in fi.
+
+
    int TQFontInfo::pixelSize () const
+
    
+Returns the pixel size of the matched window system font.
+
     
    See also TQFont::pointSize().
+
+
    int TQFontInfo::pointSize () const
+
    
+Returns the point size of the matched window system font.
+
     
    See also TQFont::pointSize().
+
+
    Examples: fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp and qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp.
+
    bool TQFontInfo::rawMode () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the font is a raw mode font; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     If it is a raw mode font, all other functions in TQFontInfo will
+return the same values set in the TQFont, regardless of the font
+actually used.
+
     
    See also TQFont::rawMode().
+
+
    TQFont::StyleHint TQFontInfo::styleHint () const
+
    
+Returns the style of the matched window system font.
+
     Currently only returns the style hint set in TQFont.
+
     
    See also TQFont::styleHint() and TQFont::StyleHint.
+
+
    int TQFontInfo::weight () const
+
    
+Returns the weight of the matched window system font.
+
     
    See also TQFont::weight() and bold().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqfontmetrics.html b/doc/html/ntqfontmetrics.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ebe49b115
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqfontmetrics.html
@@ -0,0 +1,419 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQFontMetrics Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQFontMetrics Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQFontMetrics class provides font metrics information.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqfontmetrics.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQFontMetrics class provides font metrics information.
+
     
+
+
     TQFontMetrics functions calculate the size of characters and
+strings for a given font. There are three ways you can create a
+TQFontMetrics object:
+
     
      
+
    1.  Calling the TQFontMetrics constructor with a TQFont creates a
+font metrics object for a screen-compatible font, i.e. the font
+cannot be a printer font*. If the font is changed
+later, the font metrics object is not updated.
+
       
    2.  TQWidget::fontMetrics() returns the font metrics for a widget's
+font. This is equivalent to TQFontMetrics(widget->font()). If the
+widget's font is changed later, the font metrics object is not
+updated.
+
       
    3.  TQPainter::fontMetrics() returns the font metrics for a
+painter's current font. If the painter's font is changed later, the
+font metrics object is not updated.
+
    
+
     * If you use a printer font the values returned may be
+inaccurate. Printer fonts are not always accessible so the nearest
+screen font is used if a printer font is supplied.
+
     Once created, the object provides functions to access the
+individual metrics of the font, its characters, and for strings
+rendered in the font.
+
     There are several functions that operate on the font: ascent(),
+descent(), height(), leading() and lineSpacing() return the basic
+size properties of the font. The underlinePos(), overlinePos(),
+strikeOutPos() and lineWidth() functions, return the properties of
+the line that underlines, overlines or strikes out the
+characters. These functions are all fast.
+
     There are also some functions that operate on the set of glyphs in
+the font: minLeftBearing(), minRightBearing() and maxWidth().
+These are by necessity slow, and we recommend avoiding them if
+possible.
+
     For each character, you can get its width(), leftBearing() and
+rightBearing() and find out whether it is in the font using
+inFont(). You can also treat the character as a string, and use
+the string functions on it.
+
     The string functions include width(), to return the width of a
+string in pixels (or points, for a printer), boundingRect(), to
+return a rectangle large enough to contain the rendered string,
+and size(), to return the size of that rectangle.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQFont font( "times", 24 );
+    TQFontMetrics fm( font );
+    int pixelsWide = fm.width( "What's the width of this text?" );
+    int pixelsHigh = fm.height();
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also TQFont, TQFontInfo, TQFontDatabase, Graphics Classes, and Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQFontMetrics::TQFontMetrics ( const TQFont & font )
+
    
+Constructs a font metrics object for font.
+
     The font must be screen-compatible, i.e. a font you use when
+drawing text in widgets or pixmaps, not TQPicture or TQPrinter.
+
     The font metrics object holds the information for the font that is
+passed in the constructor at the time it is created, and is not
+updated if the font's attributes are changed later.
+
     Use TQPainter::fontMetrics() to get the font metrics when painting.
+This will give correct results also when painting on paint device
+that is not screen-compatible.
+
+
    TQFontMetrics::TQFontMetrics ( const TQFont & font, TQFont::Script script )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Constructs a font metrics object for font using the given script.
+
+
    TQFontMetrics::TQFontMetrics ( const TQFontMetrics & fm )
+
    
+Constructs a copy of fm.
+
+
    TQFontMetrics::~TQFontMetrics ()
+
    
+Destroys the font metrics object and frees all allocated
+resources.
+
+
    int TQFontMetrics::ascent () const
+
    
+Returns the ascent of the font.
+
     The ascent of a font is the distance from the baseline to the
+highest position characters extend to. In practice, some font
+designers break this rule, e.g. when they put more than one accent
+on top of a character, or to accommodate an unusual character in
+an exotic language, so it is possible (though rare) that this
+value will be too small.
+
     
    See also descent().
+
+
    Examples: drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp and scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
+
    TQRect TQFontMetrics::boundingRect ( TQChar ch ) const
+
    
+Returns the rectangle that is covered by ink if the character
+specified by ch were to be drawn at the origin of the coordinate
+system.
+
     Note that the bounding rectangle may extend to the left of (0, 0),
+e.g. for italicized fonts, and that the text output may cover all pixels in the bounding rectangle. For a space character the rectangle
+will usually be empty.
+
     Note that the rectangle usually extends both above and below the
+base line.
+
     Warning: The width of the returned rectangle is not the advance width
+of the character. Use boundingRect(const TQString &) or width() instead.
+
     
    See also width().
+
+
    Example: xform/xform.cpp.
+
    TQRect TQFontMetrics::boundingRect ( const TQString & str, int len = -1 ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the bounding rectangle that contains the first len
+characters of string str.
+
+
    TQRect TQFontMetrics::boundingRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int flgs, const TQString & str, int len = -1, int tabstops = 0, int * tabarray = 0, TQTextParag ** intern = 0 ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the bounding rectangle of the first len characters of
+str, which is the set of pixels the text would cover if drawn
+at (0, 0). The drawing, and hence the bounding rectangle, is
+constrained to the rectangle (x, y, w, h).
+
     If len is negative (which is the default), the entire string is
+used.
+
     The flgs argument is the bitwise OR of the following flags:
+
      
+
    •  AlignAuto aligns to the left border for all languages except
+Arabic and Hebrew where it aligns to the right.
+
    •  AlignLeft aligns to the left border.
+
    •  AlignRight aligns to the right border.
+
    •  AlignJustify produces justified text.
+
    •  AlignHCenter aligns horizontally centered.
+
    •  AlignTop aligns to the top border.
+
    •  AlignBottom aligns to the bottom border.
+
    •  AlignVCenter aligns vertically centered
+
    •  AlignCenter (== AlignHCenter | AlignVCenter)
+
    •  SingleLine ignores newline characters in the text.
+
    •  ExpandTabs expands tabs (see below)
+
    •  ShowPrefix interprets "&x" as "x", i.e. underlined.
+
    •  WordBreak breaks the text to fit the rectangle.
+
    
+
     Horizontal alignment defaults to AlignAuto and vertical
+alignment defaults to AlignTop.
+
     If several of the horizontal or several of the vertical alignment
+flags are set, the resulting alignment is undefined.
+
     These flags are defined in ntqnamespace.h.
+
     If ExpandTabs is set in flgs, then: if tabarray is
+non-null, it specifies a 0-terminated sequence of pixel-positions
+for tabs; otherwise if tabstops is non-zero, it is used as the
+tab spacing (in pixels).
+
     Note that the bounding rectangle may extend to the left of (0, 0),
+e.g. for italicized fonts, and that the text output may cover all pixels in the bounding rectangle.
+
     Newline characters are processed as linebreaks.
+
     Despite the different actual character heights, the heights of the
+bounding rectangles of "Yes" and "yes" are the same.
+
     The bounding rectangle given by this function is somewhat larger
+than that calculated by the simpler boundingRect() function. This
+function uses the maximum left and
+right font bearings as is
+necessary for multi-line text to align correctly. Also,
+fontHeight() and lineSpacing() are used to calculate the height,
+rather than individual character heights.
+
     The intern argument should not be used.
+
     
    See also width(), TQPainter::boundingRect(), and TQt::AlignmentFlags.
+
+
    int TQFontMetrics::charWidth ( const TQString & str, int pos ) const
+
     
+Returns the width of the character at position pos in the
+string str.
+
     The whole string is needed, as the glyph drawn may change
+depending on the context (the letter before and after the current
+one) for some languages (e.g. Arabic).
+
     This function also takes non spacing marks and ligatures into
+account.
+
+
    int TQFontMetrics::descent () const
+
    
+Returns the descent of the font.
+
     The descent is the distance from the base line to the lowest point
+characters extend to. (Note that this is different from X, which
+adds 1 pixel.) In practice, some font designers break this rule,
+e.g. to accommodate an unusual character in an exotic language, so
+it is possible (though rare) that this value will be too small.
+
     
    See also ascent().
+
+
    Examples: drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp and hello/hello.cpp.
+
    int TQFontMetrics::height () const
+
    
+Returns the height of the font.
+
     This is always equal to ascent()+descent()+1 (the 1 is for the
+base line).
+
     
    See also leading() and lineSpacing().
+
+
    Examples: grapher/grapher.cpp, hello/hello.cpp, and qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp.
+
    bool TQFontMetrics::inFont ( TQChar ch ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if character ch is a valid character in the font;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    Example: qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp.
+
    int TQFontMetrics::leading () const
+
    
+Returns the leading of the font.
+
     This is the natural inter-line spacing.
+
     
    See also height() and lineSpacing().
+
+
    int TQFontMetrics::leftBearing ( TQChar ch ) const
+
     
+Returns the left bearing of character ch in the font.
+
     The left bearing is the right-ward distance of the left-most pixel
+of the character from the logical origin of the character. This
+value is negative if the pixels of the character extend to the
+left of the logical origin.
+
     See width(TQChar) for a graphical description of this metric.
+
     
    See also rightBearing(), minLeftBearing(), and width().
+
+
    Example: qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp.
+
    int TQFontMetrics::lineSpacing () const
+
    
+Returns the distance from one base line to the next.
+
     This value is always equal to leading()+height().
+
     
    See also height() and leading().
+
+
    Examples: qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, and scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
+
    int TQFontMetrics::lineWidth () const
+
    
+Returns the width of the underline and strikeout lines, adjusted
+for the point size of the font.
+
     
    See also underlinePos(), overlinePos(), and strikeOutPos().
+
+
    int TQFontMetrics::maxWidth () const
+
    
+Returns the width of the widest character in the font.
+
+
    Example: qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp.
+
    int TQFontMetrics::minLeftBearing () const
+
    
+Returns the minimum left bearing of the font.
+
     This is the smallest leftBearing(char) of all characters in the
+font.
+
     Note that this function can be very slow if the font is large.
+
     
    See also minRightBearing() and leftBearing().
+
+
    Example: qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp.
+
    int TQFontMetrics::minRightBearing () const
+
    
+Returns the minimum right bearing of the font.
+
     This is the smallest rightBearing(char) of all characters in the
+font.
+
     Note that this function can be very slow if the font is large.
+
     
    See also minLeftBearing() and rightBearing().
+
+
    Example: qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp.
+
    TQFontMetrics & TQFontMetrics::operator= ( const TQFontMetrics & fm )
+
    
+Assigns the font metrics fm.
+
+
    int TQFontMetrics::overlinePos () const
+
    
+Returns the distance from the base line to where an overline
+should be drawn.
+
     
    See also underlinePos(), strikeOutPos(), and lineWidth().
+
+
    int TQFontMetrics::rightBearing ( TQChar ch ) const
+
     
+Returns the right bearing of character ch in the font.
+
     The right bearing is the left-ward distance of the right-most
+pixel of the character from the logical origin of a subsequent
+character. This value is negative if the pixels of the character
+extend to the right of the width() of the character.
+
     See width() for a graphical description of this metric.
+
     
    See also leftBearing(), minRightBearing(), and width().
+
+
    Example: qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp.
+
    TQSize TQFontMetrics::size ( int flgs, const TQString & str, int len = -1, int tabstops = 0, int * tabarray = 0, TQTextParag ** intern = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns the size in pixels of the first len characters of str.
+
     If len is negative (the default), the entire string is used.
+
     The flgs argument is the bitwise OR of the following flags:
+
      
+
    •  SingleLine ignores newline characters.
+
    •  ExpandTabs expands tabs (see below)
+
    •  ShowPrefix interprets "&x" as "x", i.e. underlined.
+
    •  WordBreak breaks the text to fit the rectangle.
+
    
+
     These flags are defined in ntqnamespace.h.
+
     If ExpandTabs is set in flgs, then: if tabarray is
+non-null, it specifies a 0-terminated sequence of pixel-positions
+for tabs; otherwise if tabstops is non-zero, it is used as the
+tab spacing (in pixels).
+
     Newline characters are processed as linebreaks.
+
     Despite the different actual character heights, the heights of the
+bounding rectangles of "Yes" and "yes" are the same.
+
     The intern argument should not be used.
+
     
    See also boundingRect().
+
+
    int TQFontMetrics::strikeOutPos () const
+
    
+Returns the distance from the base line to where the strikeout
+line should be drawn.
+
     
    See also underlinePos(), overlinePos(), and lineWidth().
+
+
    int TQFontMetrics::underlinePos () const
+
    
+Returns the distance from the base line to where an underscore
+should be drawn.
+
     
    See also overlinePos(), strikeOutPos(), and lineWidth().
+
+
    int TQFontMetrics::width ( TQChar ch ) const
+
     
+
     
+
     Returns the logical width of character ch in pixels. This is a
+distance appropriate for drawing a subsequent character after ch.
+
     Some of the metrics are described in the image to the right. The
+central dark rectangles cover the logical width() of each
+character. The outer pale rectangles cover the leftBearing() and
+rightBearing() of each character. Notice that the bearings of "f"
+in this particular font are both negative, while the bearings of
+"o" are both positive.
+
     Warning: This function will produce incorrect results for Arabic
+characters or non spacing marks in the middle of a string, as the
+glyph shaping and positioning of marks that happens when
+processing strings cannot be taken into account. Use charWidth()
+instead if you aren't looking for the width of isolated
+characters.
+
     
    See also boundingRect() and charWidth().
+
+
    Examples: drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, hello/hello.cpp, movies/main.cpp, qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp, and scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
+
    int TQFontMetrics::width ( const TQString & str, int len = -1 ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the width of the first len characters of string str.
+
+
    int TQFontMetrics::width ( char c ) const
+
     
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Provided to aid porting from TQt 1.x.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqframe.html b/doc/html/ntqframe.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fa6672e08
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqframe.html
@@ -0,0 +1,370 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQFrame Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQFrame Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQFrame class is the base class of widgets that can have a frame.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqframe.h>
+
    Inherits TQWidget.
+
    Inherited by TQGroupBox, TQScrollView, TQDockWindow, TQGrid, TQHBox, TQLabel, TQLCDNumber, TQLineEdit, TQMenuBar, TQPopupMenu, TQProgressBar, TQSplitter, TQToolBox, and TQWidgetStack.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • TQRect contentsRect - the rectangle inside the frame  (read only)
      • 
+
    • TQRect frameRect - the frame rectangle
      • 
+
    • Shadow frameShadow - the frame shadow value from the frame style
      • 
+
    • Shape frameShape - the frame shape value from the frame style
      • 
+
    • int frameWidth - the width of the frame that is drawn  (read only)
      • 
+
    • int lineWidth - the line width
      • 
+
    • int margin - the width of the margin
      • 
+
    • int midLineWidth - the width of the mid-line
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQFrame class is the base class of widgets that can have a frame.
+
     
+
     It draws a frame and calls a virtual function, drawContents(), to
+fill in the frame. This function is reimplemented by subclasses.
+There are also two other less useful functions: drawFrame() and
+frameChanged().
+
     TQPopupMenu uses this to "raise" the menu above the surrounding
+screen. TQProgressBar has a "sunken" look. TQLabel has a flat look.
+The frames of widgets like these can be changed.
+
     
    +    TQLabel label(...);
+    label.setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Panel | TQFrame::Raised );
+    label.setLineWidth( 2 );
+
+    TQProgressBar pbar(...);
+    label.setFrameStyle( TQFrame::NoFrame );
+    
    
+ 
+
     The TQFrame class can also be used directly for creating simple
+frames without any contents, although usually you would use a
+TQHBox or TQVBox because they automatically lay out the widgets you
+put inside the frame.
+
     A frame widget has four attributes: frameStyle(), lineWidth(),
+midLineWidth(), and margin().
+
     The frame style is specified by a frame
+    shape and a shadow style. The
+frame shapes are NoFrame, Box, Panel, StyledPanel, PopupPanel, WinPanel, ToolBarPanel, MenuBarPanel, HLine and VLine; the shadow styles are Plain, Raised and
+Sunken.
+
     The line width is the width of the frame border.
+
     The mid-line width specifies the width of an extra line in the
+middle of the frame, which uses a third color to obtain a special
+3D effect. Notice that a mid-line is only drawn for Box, HLine and VLine frames that are raised or sunken.
+
     The margin is the gap between the frame and the contents of the
+frame.
+
     
+This table shows the most useful combinations of styles and widths
+(and some rather useless ones):
+
     
    Table of frame styles
     
    See also Abstract Widget Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQFrame::Shadow
    
+
+
     This enum type defines the 3D effect used for TQFrame's frame.
+
      
+
    • TQFrame::Plain - the frame and contents appear level with the
+surroundings; draws using the palette foreground color (without
+any 3D effect)
+
    • TQFrame::Raised - the frame and contents appear raised; draws a 3D
+raised line using the light and dark colors of the current color
+group
+
    • TQFrame::Sunken - the frame and contents appear sunken; draws a 3D
+sunken line using the light and dark colors of the current color
+group
+
    • TQFrame::MShadow - internal; mask for the shadow
+
     Shadow interacts with TQFrame::Shape, the lineWidth() and the
+midLineWidth(). See the picture of the frames
+in the class description.
+
     
    See also TQFrame::Shape, lineWidth, and midLineWidth.
+
+
    TQFrame::Shape
    
+
+
     This enum type defines the shapes of a TQFrame's frame.
+
      
+
    • TQFrame::NoFrame - TQFrame draws nothing
+
    • TQFrame::Box - TQFrame draws a box around its contents
+
    • TQFrame::Panel - TQFrame draws a panel to make the contents appear
+raised or sunken
+
    • TQFrame::StyledPanel - draws a rectangular panel with a look that
+depends on the current GUI style. It can be raised or sunken.
+
    • TQFrame::HLine - TQFrame draws a horizontal line that frames nothing
+(useful as separator)
+
    • TQFrame::VLine - TQFrame draws a vertical line that frames nothing
+(useful as separator)
+
    • TQFrame::GroupBoxPanel - draws a rectangular panel
+
    • TQFrame::WinPanel - draws a rectangular panel that can be raised or
+sunken like those in Windows 95. Specifying this shape sets
+the line width to 2 pixels. WinPanel is provided for compatibility.
+For GUI style independence we recommend using StyledPanel instead.
+
    • TQFrame::ToolBarPanel
+
    • TQFrame::MenuBarPanel
+
    • TQFrame::PopupPanel
+
    • TQFrame::LineEditPanel - is used to draw a frame suitable for line edits. The
+look depends upon the current GUI style.
+
    • TQFrame::TabWidgetPanel - is used to draw a frame suitable for tab widgets. The
+look depends upon the current GUI style.
+
    • TQFrame::MShape - internal mask
+
     When it does not call TQStyle, Shape interacts with TQFrame::Shadow,
+the lineWidth() and the midLineWidth() to create the total result.
+See the picture of the frames in the class
+description.
+
     
    See also TQFrame::Shadow, TQFrame::style(), and TQStyle::drawPrimitive().
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQFrame::TQFrame ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a frame widget with frame style NoFrame and a
+1-pixel frame width.
+
     The parent, name and f arguments are passed to the
+TQWidget constructor.
+
+
    TQRect TQFrame::contentsRect () const
+
    Returns the rectangle inside the frame.
+See the "contentsRect" property for details.
+
    void TQFrame::drawContents ( TQPainter * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Virtual function that draws the contents of the frame.
+
     The TQPainter is already open when you get it, and you must leave
+it open. Painter transformations are switched off on entry. If you
+transform the painter, remember to take the frame into account and
+reset transformation before
+returning.
+
     This function is reimplemented by subclasses that draw something
+inside the frame. It should only draw inside contentsRect(). The
+default function does nothing.
+
     
    See also contentsRect and TQPainter::setClipRect().
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQLabel, TQLCDNumber, TQMenuBar, and TQPopupMenu.
+
    void TQFrame::drawFrame ( TQPainter * p ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Draws the frame using the painter p and the current frame
+attributes and color group. The rectangle inside the frame is not
+affected.
+
     This function is virtual, but in general you do not need to
+reimplement it. If you do, note that the TQPainter is already open
+and must remain open.
+
     
    See also frameRect, contentsRect, drawContents(), frameStyle(), and palette.
+
+
    void TQFrame::frameChanged () [virtual protected]
+
    
+Virtual function that is called when the frame style, line width
+or mid-line width changes.
+
     This function can be reimplemented by subclasses that need to know
+when the frame attributes change.
+
     The default implementation calls update().
+
+
    TQRect TQFrame::frameRect () const
+
    Returns the frame rectangle.
+See the "frameRect" property for details.
+
    Shadow TQFrame::frameShadow () const
+
    Returns the frame shadow value from the frame style.
+See the "frameShadow" property for details.
+
    Shape TQFrame::frameShape () const
+
    Returns the frame shape value from the frame style.
+See the "frameShape" property for details.
+
    int TQFrame::frameStyle () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the frame style.
+
     The default value is TQFrame::NoFrame.
+
     
    See also setFrameStyle(), frameShape, and frameShadow.
+
+
    Example: scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
+
    int TQFrame::frameWidth () const
+
    Returns the width of the frame that is drawn.
+See the "frameWidth" property for details.
+
    int TQFrame::lineWidth () const
+
    Returns the line width.
+See the "lineWidth" property for details.
+
    int TQFrame::margin () const
+
    Returns the width of the margin.
+See the "margin" property for details.
+
    int TQFrame::midLineWidth () const
+
    Returns the width of the mid-line.
+See the "midLineWidth" property for details.
+
    void TQFrame::paintEvent ( TQPaintEvent * event ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Processes the paint event event.
+
     Paints the frame and the contents.
+
     Opens the painter on the frame and calls drawFrame(), then
+drawContents().
+
+
    Examples: life/life.cpp and qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
+
    void TQFrame::resizeEvent ( TQResizeEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Processes the resize event e.
+
     Adjusts the frame rectangle for the resized widget. The frame
+rectangle is elastic, and the surrounding area is static.
+
     The resulting frame rectangle may be null or invalid. You can use
+setMinimumSize() to avoid those possibilities.
+
     Nothing is done if the frame rectangle is a null rectangle already.
+
+
    Example: life/life.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
+
    void TQFrame::setFrameRect ( const TQRect & ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the frame rectangle.
+See the "frameRect" property for details.
+
    void TQFrame::setFrameShadow ( Shadow )
+
    Sets the frame shadow value from the frame style.
+See the "frameShadow" property for details.
+
    void TQFrame::setFrameShape ( Shape )
+
    Sets the frame shape value from the frame style.
+See the "frameShape" property for details.
+
    void TQFrame::setFrameStyle ( int style ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the frame style to style.
+
     The style is the bitwise OR between a frame shape and a frame
+shadow style. See the illustration in the
+class documentation.
+
     The frame shapes are given in TQFrame::Shape and the shadow
+styles in TQFrame::Shadow.
+
     If a mid-line width greater than 0 is specified, an additional
+line is drawn for Raised or Sunken Box, HLine, and VLine frames. The mid-color of the current color group is used for
+drawing middle lines.
+
     
    See also Illustration, frameStyle(), colorGroup, and TQColorGroup.
+
+
    Examples: cursor/cursor.cpp, layout/layout.cpp, listboxcombo/listboxcombo.cpp, rangecontrols/rangecontrols.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, tabdialog/tabdialog.cpp, and tictac/tictac.cpp.
+
    void TQFrame::setLineWidth ( int ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the line width.
+See the "lineWidth" property for details.
+
    void TQFrame::setMargin ( int ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the width of the margin.
+See the "margin" property for details.
+
    void TQFrame::setMidLineWidth ( int ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the width of the mid-line.
+See the "midLineWidth" property for details.
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    TQRect contentsRect
    
+
    This property holds the rectangle inside the frame.
+
    Get this property's value with contentsRect().
+
    See also frameRect and drawContents().
+
+
    TQRect frameRect
    
+
    This property holds the frame rectangle.
+
    The frame rectangle is the rectangle the frame is drawn in. By
+default, this is the entire widget. Setting this property does not cause a widget update.
+
     If this property is set to a null rectangle (for example
+TQRect(0, 0, 0, 0)), then the frame rectangle is equivalent to
+the widget rectangle.
+
     
    See also contentsRect.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setFrameRect() and get this property's value with frameRect().
+
    Shadow frameShadow
    
+
    This property holds the frame shadow value from the frame style.
+
    Set this property's value with setFrameShadow() and get this property's value with frameShadow().
+
    See also frameStyle() and frameShape.
+
+
    Shape frameShape
    
+
    This property holds the frame shape value from the frame style.
+
    Set this property's value with setFrameShape() and get this property's value with frameShape().
+
    See also frameStyle() and frameShadow.
+
+
    int frameWidth
    
+
    This property holds the width of the frame that is drawn.
+
    Note that the frame width depends on the frame style, not only the line
+width and the mid-line width. For example, the style NoFrame
+always has a frame width of 0, whereas the style Panel has a
+frame width equivalent to the line width. The frame width also
+includes the margin.
+
     
    See also lineWidth, midLineWidth, frameStyle(), and margin.
+
+
    Get this property's value with frameWidth().
+
    int lineWidth
    
+
    This property holds the line width.
+
    Note that the total line width for HLine and VLine is
+given by frameWidth(), not lineWidth().
+
     The default value is 1.
+
     
    See also midLineWidth and frameWidth.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setLineWidth() and get this property's value with lineWidth().
+
    int margin
    
+
    This property holds the width of the margin.
+
    The margin is the distance between the innermost pixel of the
+frame and the outermost pixel of contentsRect(). It is included in
+frameWidth().
+
     The margin is filled according to backgroundMode().
+
     The default value is 0.
+
     
    See also margin, lineWidth, and frameWidth.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setMargin() and get this property's value with margin().
+
    int midLineWidth
    
+
    This property holds the width of the mid-line.
+
    The default value is 0.
+
     
    See also lineWidth and frameWidth.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setMidLineWidth() and get this property's value with midLineWidth().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqftp.html b/doc/html/ntqftp.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9a3b6a927
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqftp.html
@@ -0,0 +1,693 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQFtp Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQFtp Class Reference
    [network module]
    
+
+
    The TQFtp class provides an implementation of the FTP protocol.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqftp.h>
+
    Inherits TQNetworkProtocol.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQFtp ()
      • 
+
    • TQFtp ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • virtual ~TQFtp ()
      • 
+
    • enum State { Unconnected, HostLookup, Connecting, Connected, LoggedIn, Closing }
      • 
+
    • enum Error { NoError, UnknownError, HostNotFound, ConnectionRefused, NotConnected }
      • 
+
    • enum Command { None, ConnectToHost, Login, Close, List, Cd, Get, Put, Remove, Mkdir, Rmdir, Rename, RawCommand }
      • 
+
    • int connectToHost ( const TQString & host, Q_UINT16 port = 21 )
      • 
+
    • int login ( const TQString & user = TQString::null, const TQString & password = TQString::null )
      • 
+
    • int close ()
      • 
+
    • int list ( const TQString & dir = TQString::null )
      • 
+
    • int cd ( const TQString & dir )
      • 
+
    • int get ( const TQString & file, TQIODevice * dev = 0 )
      • 
+
    • int put ( const TQByteArray & data, const TQString & file )
      • 
+
    • int put ( TQIODevice * dev, const TQString & file )
      • 
+
    • int remove ( const TQString & file )
      • 
+
    • int mkdir ( const TQString & dir )
      • 
+
    • int rmdir ( const TQString & dir )
      • 
+
    • int rename ( const TQString & oldname, const TQString & newname )
      • 
+
    • int rawCommand ( const TQString & command )
      • 
+
    • Q_ULONG bytesAvailable () const
      • 
+
    • Q_LONG readBlock ( char * data, Q_ULONG maxlen )
      • 
+
    • TQByteArray readAll ()
      • 
+
    • int currentId () const
      • 
+
    • TQIODevice * currentDevice () const
      • 
+
    • Command currentCommand () const
      • 
+
    • bool hasPendingCommands () const
      • 
+
    • void clearPendingCommands ()
      • 
+
    • State state () const
      • 
+
    • Error error () const
      • 
+
    • TQString errorString () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQFtp class provides an implementation of the FTP protocol.
+
+
     
+
+
     This class provides two different interfaces: one is the
+TQNetworkProtocol interface that allows you to use FTP through the
+TQUrlOperator abstraction. The other is a direct interface to FTP
+that gives you lower-level access to the FTP protocol for finer
+control. Using the direct interface you can also execute arbitrary
+FTP commands.
+
     Don't mix the two interfaces, since the behavior is not
+well-defined.
+
     If you want to use TQFtp with the TQNetworkProtocol interface, you
+do not use it directly, but rather through a TQUrlOperator, for
+example:
+
     
    +    TQUrlOperator op( "ftp://ftp.trolltech.com" );
+    op.listChildren(); // Asks the server to provide a directory listing
+    
    
+ 
+
     This code will only work if the TQFtp class is registered; to
+register the class, you must call qInitNetworkProtocols() before
+using a TQUrlOperator with TQFtp.
+
     The rest of this descrption describes the direct interface to FTP.
+
     The class works asynchronously, so there are no blocking
+functions. If an operation cannot be executed immediately, the
+function will still return straight away and the operation will be
+scheduled for later execution. The results of scheduled operations
+are reported via signals. This approach depends on the event loop
+being in operation.
+
     The operations that can be scheduled (they are called "commands"
+in the rest of the documentation) are the following:
+connectToHost(), login(), close(), list(), cd(), get(), put(),
+remove(), mkdir(), rmdir(), rename() and rawCommand().
+
     All of these commands return a unique identifier that allows you
+to keep track of the command that is currently being executed.
+When the execution of a command starts, the commandStarted()
+signal with the command's identifier is emitted. When the command
+is finished, the commandFinished() signal is emitted with the
+command's identifier and a bool that indicates whether the command
+finished with an error.
+
     In some cases, you might want to execute a sequence of commands,
+e.g. if you want to connect and login to a FTP server. This is
+simply achieved:
+
     
    +    TQFtp *ftp = new TQFtp( this ); // this is an optional TQObject parent
+    ftp->connectToHost( "ftp.trolltech.com" );
+    ftp->login();
+    
    
+ 
+
     In this case two FTP commands have been scheduled. When the last
+scheduled command has finished, a done() signal is emitted with
+a bool argument that tells you whether the sequence finished with
+an error.
+
     If an error occurs during the execution of one of the commands in
+a sequence of commands, all the pending commands (i.e. scheduled,
+but not yet executed commands) are cleared and no signals are
+emitted for them.
+
     Some commands, e.g. list(), emit additional signals to report
+their results.
+
     Example: If you want to download the INSTALL file from Trolltech's
+FTP server, you would write this:
+
     
    +    ftp->connectToHost( "ftp.trolltech.com" );  // id == 1
+    ftp->login();                               // id == 2
+    ftp->cd( "qt" );                            // id == 3
+    ftp->get( "INSTALL" );                      // id == 4
+    ftp->close();                               // id == 5
+    
    
+ 
+
     For this example the following sequence of signals is emitted
+(with small variations, depending on network traffic, etc.):
+
     
    +    start( 1 )
+    stateChanged( HostLookup )
+    stateChanged( Connecting )
+    stateChanged( Connected )
+    finished( 1, FALSE )
+
+    start( 2 )
+    stateChanged( LoggedIn )
+    finished( 2, FALSE )
+
+    start( 3 )
+    finished( 3, FALSE )
+
+    start( 4 )
+    dataTransferProgress( 0, 3798 )
+    dataTransferProgress( 2896, 3798 )
+    readyRead()
+    dataTransferProgress( 3798, 3798 )
+    readyRead()
+    finished( 4, FALSE )
+
+    start( 5 )
+    stateChanged( Closing )
+    stateChanged( Unconnected )
+    finished( 5, FALSE )
+
+    done( FALSE )
+    
    
+ 
+
     The dataTransferProgress() signal in the above example is useful
+if you want to show a progressbar to
+inform the user about the progress of the download. The
+readyRead() signal tells you that there is data ready to be read.
+The amount of data can be queried then with the bytesAvailable()
+function and it can be read with the readBlock() or readAll()
+function.
+
     If the login fails for the above example, the signals would look
+like this:
+
     
    +    start( 1 )
+    stateChanged( HostLookup )
+    stateChanged( Connecting )
+    stateChanged( Connected )
+    finished( 1, FALSE )
+
+    start( 2 )
+    finished( 2, TRUE )
+
+    done( TRUE )
+    
    
+ 
+
     You can then get details about the error with the error() and
+errorString() functions.
+
     The functions currentId() and currentCommand() provide more
+information about the currently executing command.
+
     The functions hasPendingCommands() and clearPendingCommands()
+allow you to query and clear the list of pending commands.
+
     The safest and easiest way to use the FTP protocol is to use
+TQUrlOperator() or the FTP commands described above. If you are an
+experienced network programmer and want to have complete control
+you can use rawCommand() to execute arbitrary FTP commands.
+
     
    See also TQt Network Documentation, TQNetworkProtocol, TQUrlOperator, TQHttp, and Input/Output and Networking.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQFtp::Command
    
+
+
     This enum is used as the return value for the currentCommand() function.
+This allows you to perform specific actions for particular
+commands, e.g. in a FTP client, you might want to clear the
+directory view when a list() command is started; in this case you
+can simply check in the slot connected to the start() signal if
+the currentCommand() is List.
+
      
+
    • TQFtp::None - No command is being executed.
+
    • TQFtp::ConnectToHost - connectToHost() is being executed.
+
    • TQFtp::Login - login() is being executed.
+
    • TQFtp::Close - close() is being executed.
+
    • TQFtp::List - list() is being executed.
+
    • TQFtp::Cd - cd() is being executed.
+
    • TQFtp::Get - get() is being executed.
+
    • TQFtp::Put - put() is being executed.
+
    • TQFtp::Remove - remove() is being executed.
+
    • TQFtp::Mkdir - mkdir() is being executed.
+
    • TQFtp::Rmdir - rmdir() is being executed.
+
    • TQFtp::Rename - rename() is being executed.
+
    • TQFtp::RawCommand - rawCommand() is being executed.
+
     
    See also currentCommand().
+
+
    TQFtp::Error
    
+
+
     This enum identifies the error that occurred.
+
      
+
    • TQFtp::NoError - No error occurred.
+
    • TQFtp::HostNotFound - The host name lookup failed.
+
    • TQFtp::ConnectionRefused - The server refused the connection.
+
    • TQFtp::NotConnected - Tried to send a command, but there is no connection to
+a server.
+
    • TQFtp::UnknownError - An error other than those specified above
+occurred.
+
     
    See also error().
+
+
    TQFtp::State
    
+
+
     This enum defines the connection state:
+
      
+
    • TQFtp::Unconnected - There is no connection to the host.
+
    • TQFtp::HostLookup - A host name lookup is in progress.
+
    • TQFtp::Connecting - An attempt to connect to the host is in progress.
+
    • TQFtp::Connected - Connection to the host has been achieved.
+
    • TQFtp::LoggedIn - Connection and user login have been achieved.
+
    • TQFtp::Closing - The connection is closing down, but it is not yet
+closed. (The state will be Unconnected when the connection is
+closed.)
+
     
    See also stateChanged() and state().
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQFtp::TQFtp ()
+
    
+Constructs a TQFtp object.
+
+
    TQFtp::TQFtp ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a TQFtp object. The parent and name parameters
+are passed to the TQObject constructor.
+
+
    TQFtp::~TQFtp () [virtual]
+
    
+Destructor.
+
+
    void TQFtp::abort () [slot]
+
    
+Aborts the current command and deletes all scheduled commands.
+
     If there is an unfinished command (i.e. a command for which the
+commandStarted() signal has been emitted, but for which the
+commandFinished() signal has not been emitted), this function
+sends an ABORT command to the server. When the server replies
+that the command is aborted, the commandFinished() signal with the
+error argument set to TRUE is emitted for the command. Due
+to timing issues, it is possible that the command had already
+finished before the abort request reached the server, in which
+case, the commandFinished() signal is emitted with the error
+argument set to FALSE.
+
     For all other commands that are affected by the abort(), no
+signals are emitted.
+
     If you don't start further FTP commands directly after the
+abort(), there won't be any scheduled commands and the done()
+signal is emitted.
+
     Warning: Some FTP servers, for example the BSD FTP daemon (version
+0.3), wrongly return a positive reply even when an abort has
+occurred. For these servers the commandFinished() signal has its
+error flag set to FALSE, even though the command did not
+complete successfully.
+
     
    See also clearPendingCommands().
+
+
    Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
+
    Q_ULONG TQFtp::bytesAvailable () const
+
    
+Returns the number of bytes that can be read from the data socket
+at the moment.
+
     
    See also get(), readyRead(), readBlock(), and readAll().
+
+
    int TQFtp::cd ( const TQString & dir )
+
    
+Changes the working directory of the server to dir.
+
     The function does not block and returns immediately. The command
+is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
+function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
+commandStarted() and commandFinished().
+
     When the command is started the commandStarted() signal is
+emitted. When it is finished the commandFinished() signal is
+emitted.
+
     
    See also commandStarted() and commandFinished().
+
+
    Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
+
    void TQFtp::clearPendingCommands ()
+
    
+Deletes all pending commands from the list of scheduled commands.
+This does not affect the command that is being executed. If you
+want to stop this this as well, use abort().
+
     
    See also hasPendingCommands() and abort().
+
+
    int TQFtp::close ()
+
    
+Closes the connection to the FTP server.
+
     The stateChanged() signal is emitted when the state of the
+connecting process changes, e.g. to Closing, then Unconnected.
+
     The function does not block and returns immediately. The command
+is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
+function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
+commandStarted() and commandFinished().
+
     When the command is started the commandStarted() signal is
+emitted. When it is finished the commandFinished() signal is
+emitted.
+
     
    See also stateChanged(), commandStarted(), and commandFinished().
+
+
    Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
+
    void TQFtp::commandFinished ( int id, bool error ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when processing the command identified by
+id has finished. error is TRUE if an error occurred during
+the processing; otherwise error is FALSE.
+
     
    See also commandStarted(), done(), error(), and errorString().
+
+
    Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
+
    void TQFtp::commandStarted ( int id ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when processing the command identified by
+id starts.
+
     
    See also commandFinished() and done().
+
+
    Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
+
    int TQFtp::connectToHost ( const TQString & host, Q_UINT16 port = 21 )
+
    
+Connects to the FTP server host using port port.
+
     The stateChanged() signal is emitted when the state of the
+connecting process changes, e.g. to HostLookup, then Connecting, then Connected.
+
     The function does not block and returns immediately. The command
+is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
+function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
+commandStarted() and commandFinished().
+
     When the command is started the commandStarted() signal is
+emitted. When it is finished the commandFinished() signal is
+emitted.
+
     
    See also stateChanged(), commandStarted(), and commandFinished().
+
+
    Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
+
    Command TQFtp::currentCommand () const
+
    
+Returns the command type of the FTP command being executed or None if there is no command being executed.
+
     
    See also currentId().
+
+
    Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
+
    TQIODevice * TQFtp::currentDevice () const
+
    
+Returns the TQIODevice pointer that is used by the FTP command to read data
+from or store data to. If there is no current FTP command being executed or
+if the command does not use an IO device, this function returns 0.
+
     This function can be used to delete the TQIODevice in the slot connected to
+the commandFinished() signal.
+
     
    See also get() and put().
+
+
    Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
+
    int TQFtp::currentId () const
+
    
+Returns the identifier of the FTP command that is being executed
+or 0 if there is no command being executed.
+
     
    See also currentCommand().
+
+
    void TQFtp::dataTransferProgress ( int done, int total ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted in response to a get() or put() request to
+indicate the current progress of the download or upload.
+
     done is the amount of data that has already been transferred
+and total is the total amount of data to be read or written. It
+is possible that the TQFtp class is not able to determine the total
+amount of data that should be transferred, in which case total
+is 0. (If you connect this signal to a TQProgressBar, the progress
+bar shows a busy indicator if the total is 0).
+
     Warning: done and total are not necessarily the size in
+bytes, since for large files these values might need to be
+"scaled" to avoid overflow.
+
     
    See also get(), put(), and TQProgressBar::progress.
+
+
    Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
+
    void TQFtp::done ( bool error ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the last pending command has finished;
+(it is emitted after the last command's commandFinished() signal).
+error is TRUE if an error occurred during the processing;
+otherwise error is FALSE.
+
     
    See also commandFinished(), error(), and errorString().
+
+
    Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
+
    Error TQFtp::error () const
+
    
+Returns the last error that occurred. This is useful to find out
+what when wrong when receiving a commandFinished() or a done()
+signal with the error argument set to TRUE.
+
     If you start a new command, the error status is reset to NoError.
+
+
    TQString TQFtp::errorString () const
+
    
+Returns a human-readable description of the last error that
+occurred. This is useful for presenting a error message to the
+user when receiving a commandFinished() or a done() signal with
+the error argument set to TRUE.
+
     The error string is often (but not always) the reply from the
+server, so it is not always possible to translate the string. If
+the message comes from TQt, the string has already passed through
+tr().
+
+
    Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
+
    int TQFtp::get ( const TQString & file, TQIODevice * dev = 0 )
+
    
+Downloads the file file from the server.
+
     If dev is 0, then the readyRead() signal is emitted when there
+is data available to read. You can then read the data with the
+readBlock() or readAll() functions.
+
     If dev is not 0, the data is written directly to the device dev. Make sure that the dev pointer is valid for the duration
+of the operation (it is safe to delete it when the
+commandFinished() signal is emitted). In this case the readyRead()
+signal is not emitted and you cannot read data with the
+readBlock() or readAll() functions.
+
     If you don't read the data immediately it becomes available, i.e.
+when the readyRead() signal is emitted, it is still available
+until the next command is started.
+
     For example, if you want to present the data to the user as soon
+as there is something available, connect to the readyRead() signal
+and read the data immediately. On the other hand, if you only want
+to work with the complete data, you can connect to the
+commandFinished() signal and read the data when the get() command
+is finished.
+
     The function does not block and returns immediately. The command
+is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
+function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
+commandStarted() and commandFinished().
+
     When the command is started the commandStarted() signal is
+emitted. When it is finished the commandFinished() signal is
+emitted.
+
     
    See also readyRead(), dataTransferProgress(), commandStarted(), and commandFinished().
+
+
    Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
+
    bool TQFtp::hasPendingCommands () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if there are any commands scheduled that have not yet
+been executed; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     The command that is being executed is not considered as a
+scheduled command.
+
     
    See also clearPendingCommands(), currentId(), and currentCommand().
+
+
    int TQFtp::list ( const TQString & dir = TQString::null )
+
    
+Lists the contents of directory dir on the FTP server. If dir is empty, it lists the contents of the current directory.
+
     The listInfo() signal is emitted for each directory entry found.
+
     The function does not block and returns immediately. The command
+is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
+function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
+commandStarted() and commandFinished().
+
     When the command is started the commandStarted() signal is
+emitted. When it is finished the commandFinished() signal is
+emitted.
+
     
    See also listInfo(), commandStarted(), and commandFinished().
+
+
    Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
+
    void TQFtp::listInfo ( const TQUrlInfo & i ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted for each directory entry the list() command
+finds. The details of the entry are stored in i.
+
     
    See also list().
+
+
    Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
+
    int TQFtp::login ( const TQString & user = TQString::null, const TQString & password = TQString::null )
+
    
+Logs in to the FTP server with the username user and the
+password password.
+
     The stateChanged() signal is emitted when the state of the
+connecting process changes, e.g. to LoggedIn.
+
     The function does not block and returns immediately. The command
+is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
+function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
+commandStarted() and commandFinished().
+
     When the command is started the commandStarted() signal is
+emitted. When it is finished the commandFinished() signal is
+emitted.
+
     
    See also commandStarted() and commandFinished().
+
+
    Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
+
    int TQFtp::mkdir ( const TQString & dir )
+
    
+Creates a directory called dir on the server.
+
     The function does not block and returns immediately. The command
+is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
+function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
+commandStarted() and commandFinished().
+
     When the command is started the commandStarted() signal is
+emitted. When it is finished the commandFinished() signal is
+emitted.
+
     
    See also commandStarted() and commandFinished().
+
+
    int TQFtp::put ( TQIODevice * dev, const TQString & file )
+
    
+Reads the data from the IO device dev, and writes it to the
+file called file on the server. The data is read in chunks from
+the IO device, so this overload allows you to transmit large
+amounts of data without the need to read all the data into memory
+at once.
+
     Make sure that the dev pointer is valid for the duration of the
+operation (it is safe to delete it when the commandFinished() is
+emitted).
+
+
    Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
+
    int TQFtp::put ( const TQByteArray & data, const TQString & file )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Writes the data data to the file called file on the server.
+The progress of the upload is reported by the
+dataTransferProgress() signal.
+
     The function does not block and returns immediately. The command
+is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
+function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
+commandStarted() and commandFinished().
+
     When the command is started the commandStarted() signal is
+emitted. When it is finished the commandFinished() signal is
+emitted.
+
     
    See also dataTransferProgress(), commandStarted(), and commandFinished().
+
+
    int TQFtp::rawCommand ( const TQString & command )
+
    
+Sends the raw FTP command command to the FTP server. This is
+useful for low-level FTP access. If the operation you wish to
+perform has an equivalent TQFtp function, we recommend using the
+function instead of raw FTP commands since the functions are
+easier and safer.
+
     The function does not block and returns immediately. The command
+is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
+function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
+commandStarted() and commandFinished().
+
     When the command is started the commandStarted() signal is
+emitted. When it is finished the commandFinished() signal is
+emitted.
+
     
    See also rawCommandReply(), commandStarted(), and commandFinished().
+
+
    Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
+
    void TQFtp::rawCommandReply ( int replyCode, const TQString & detail ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted in response to the rawCommand() function.
+replyCode is the 3 digit reply code and detail is the text
+that follows the reply code.
+
     
    See also rawCommand().
+
+
    Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
+
    TQByteArray TQFtp::readAll ()
+
    
+Reads all the bytes available from the data socket and returns
+them.
+
     
    See also get(), readyRead(), bytesAvailable(), and readBlock().
+
+
    Q_LONG TQFtp::readBlock ( char * data, Q_ULONG maxlen )
+
    
+Reads maxlen bytes from the data socket into data and
+returns the number of bytes read. Returns -1 if an error occurred.
+
     
    See also get(), readyRead(), bytesAvailable(), and readAll().
+
+
    void TQFtp::readyRead () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted in response to a get() command when there
+is new data to read.
+
     If you specify a device as the second argument in the get()
+command, this signal is not emitted; instead the data is
+written directly to the device.
+
     You can read the data with the readAll() or readBlock() functions.
+
     This signal is useful if you want to process the data in chunks as
+soon as it becomes available. If you are only interested in the
+complete data, just connect to the commandFinished() signal and
+read the data then instead.
+
     
    See also get(), readBlock(), readAll(), and bytesAvailable().
+
+
    int TQFtp::remove ( const TQString & file )
+
    
+Deletes the file called file from the server.
+
     The function does not block and returns immediately. The command
+is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
+function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
+commandStarted() and commandFinished().
+
     When the command is started the commandStarted() signal is
+emitted. When it is finished the commandFinished() signal is
+emitted.
+
     
    See also commandStarted() and commandFinished().
+
+
    Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
+
    int TQFtp::rename ( const TQString & oldname, const TQString & newname )
+
    
+Renames the file called oldname to newname on the server.
+
     The function does not block and returns immediately. The command
+is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
+function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
+commandStarted() and commandFinished().
+
     When the command is started the commandStarted() signal is
+emitted. When it is finished the commandFinished() signal is
+emitted.
+
     
    See also commandStarted() and commandFinished().
+
+
    int TQFtp::rmdir ( const TQString & dir )
+
    
+Removes the directory called dir from the server.
+
     The function does not block and returns immediately. The command
+is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
+function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
+commandStarted() and commandFinished().
+
     When the command is started the commandStarted() signal is
+emitted. When it is finished the commandFinished() signal is
+emitted.
+
     
    See also commandStarted() and commandFinished().
+
+
    State TQFtp::state () const
+
    
+Returns the current state of the object. When the state changes,
+the stateChanged() signal is emitted.
+
     
    See also State and stateChanged().
+
+
    Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
+
    void TQFtp::stateChanged ( int state ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the state of the connection changes.
+The argument state is the new state of the connection; it is
+one of the State values.
+
     It is usually emitted in response to a connectToHost() or close()
+command, but it can also be emitted "spontaneously", e.g. when the
+server closes the connection unexpectedly.
+
     
    See also connectToHost(), close(), state(), and State.
+
+
    Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqgb18030codec.html b/doc/html/ntqgb18030codec.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a278ea03b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqgb18030codec.html
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQGb18030Codec Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQGb18030Codec Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQGb18030Codec class provides conversion to and from the Chinese
+GB18030/GBK/GB2312 encoding.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqgb18030codec.h>
+
    Inherits TQTextCodec.
+
    Inherited by TQGbkCodec and TQGb2312Codec.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Detailed Description
    
+ 
+
+
+
     The TQGb18030Codec class provides conversion to and from the Chinese
+GB18030/GBK/GB2312 encoding.
+
     
+
     GBK, formally the Chinese Internal Code Specification, is a commonly
+used extension of GB 2312-80.  Microsoft Windows uses it under the
+name codepage 936.
+
     GBK has been superceded by the new Chinese national standard
+GB 18030-2000, which added a 4-byte encoding while remaining
+compatible with GB2312 and GBK.  The new GB 18030-2000 may be described
+as a special encoding of Unicode 3.x and ISO-10646-1.
+
     Special thanks to charset gurus Markus Scherer (IBM),
+Dirk Meyer (Adobe Systems) and Ken Lunde (Adobe Systems) for publishing
+an excellent GB 18030-2000 summary and specification on the Internet.
+Some must-read documents are:
+
    
+
     The GBK codec was contributed to TQt by
+Justin Yu <justiny@turbolinux.com.cn> and
+Sean Chen <seanc@turbolinux.com.cn>.  They may also be reached at
+Yu Mingjian <yumj@sun.ihep.ac.cn>, <yumingjian@china.com>
+Chen Xiangyang <chenxy@sun.ihep.ac.cn>
+
     The GB18030 codec TQt functions were contributed to TQt by
+James Su <suzhe@gnuchina.org>, <suzhe@turbolinux.com.cn>
+who pioneered much of GB18030 development on GNU/Linux systems.
+
     The GB18030 codec was contributed to TQt by
+Anthony Fok <anthony@thizlinux.com>, <foka@debian.org>
+using a Perl script to generate C++ tables from gb-18030-2000.xml
+while merging contributions from James Su, Justin Yu and Sean Chen.
+A copy of the source Perl script is available at:
+
     http://people.debian.org/~foka/gb18030/gen-qgb18030codec.pl
+
     The copyright notice for their code follows:
+
     
+
     Copyright (C) 2000 TurboLinux, Inc.  Written by Justin Yu and Sean Chen.
+Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 Turbolinux, Inc.  Written by James Su.
+Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 ThizLinux Laboratory Ltd.  Written by Anthony Fok.
+
     Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+are met:
+
      
+
    1.  Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+
    2.  Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+
    
+
     THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSETQUENTIAL
+DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+SUCH DAMAGE.
+
    See also Internationalization with TQt.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqgbkcodec.html b/doc/html/ntqgbkcodec.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ac365b960
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqgbkcodec.html
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQGbkCodec Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQGbkCodec Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQGbkCodec class provides conversion to and from the Chinese
+GBK encoding.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqgb18030codec.h>
+
    Inherits TQGb18030Codec.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Detailed Description
    
+ 
+
+
+
     The TQGbkCodec class provides conversion to and from the Chinese
+GBK encoding.
+
     GBK, formally the Chinese Internal Code Specification, is a commonly
+used extension of GB 2312-80. Microsoft Windows uses it under the
+name code page 936.
+
     The GBK encoding has been superceded by the GB18030 encoding and
+GB18030 is backward compatible to GBK.  For this reason the TQGbkCodec class
+is implemented in terms of the GB18030 codec and uses its 1-byte and
+2-byte portion for conversion from and to Unicode.
+
     The TQGbkCodec is kept mainly for compatibility reasons with older software.
+
    See also Internationalization with TQt.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqgl.html b/doc/html/ntqgl.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b91314a5b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqgl.html
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQGL Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQGL Class Reference
    [OpenGL module]
    
+
+
    The TQGL class is a namespace for miscellaneous identifiers
+in the TQt OpenGL module.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqgl.h>
+
    Inherited by TQGLFormat, TQGLContext, and TQGLWidget.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • enum FormatOption { DoubleBuffer = 0x0001, DepthBuffer = 0x0002, Rgba = 0x0004, AlphaChannel = 0x0008, AccumBuffer = 0x0010, StencilBuffer = 0x0020, StereoBuffers = 0x0040, DirectRendering = 0x0080, HasOverlay = 0x0100, SingleBuffer = DoubleBuffer<<16, NoDepthBuffer = DepthBuffer<<16, ColorIndex = Rgba<<16, NoAlphaChannel = AlphaChannel<<16, NoAccumBuffer = AccumBuffer<<16, NoStencilBuffer = StencilBuffer<<16, NoStereoBuffers = StereoBuffers<<16, IndirectRendering = DirectRendering<<16, NoOverlay = HasOverlay<<16 }
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQGL class is a namespace for miscellaneous identifiers
+in the TQt OpenGL module.
+
+
     
+
+
+
     Normally you can ignore this class. TQGLWidget and the other
+OpenGL* module classes inherit it, so when you make your
+own TQGLWidget subclass you can use the identifiers in the TQGL
+namespace without qualification.
+
     However, you may occasionally find yourself in situations where you
+need to refer to these identifiers from outside the TQGL namespace's
+scope, e.g. in static functions. In such cases, simply write e.g. TQGL::DoubleBuffer instead of just DoubleBuffer.
+
     * OpenGL is a trademark of Silicon Graphics, Inc. in the
+United States and other countries.
+
     
    See also Graphics Classes and Image Processing Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQGL::FormatOption
    
+
+
     This enum specifies the format options.
+
      
+
    • TQGL::DoubleBuffer
+
    • TQGL::DepthBuffer
+
    • TQGL::Rgba
+
    • TQGL::AlphaChannel
+
    • TQGL::AccumBuffer
+
    • TQGL::StencilBuffer
+
    • TQGL::StereoBuffers
+
    • TQGL::DirectRendering
+
    • TQGL::HasOverlay
+
    • TQGL::SingleBuffer
+
    • TQGL::NoDepthBuffer
+
    • TQGL::ColorIndex
+
    • TQGL::NoAlphaChannel
+
    • TQGL::NoAccumBuffer
+
    • TQGL::NoStencilBuffer
+
    • TQGL::NoStereoBuffers
+
    • TQGL::IndirectRendering
+
    • TQGL::NoOverlay
+
    
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqglcolormap.html b/doc/html/ntqglcolormap.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3468ee647
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqglcolormap.html
@@ -0,0 +1,179 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQGLColormap Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQGLColormap Class Reference
    [OpenGL module]
    
+
+
    The TQGLColormap class is used for installing custom colormaps into
+TQGLWidgets.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqglcolormap.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQGLColormap class is used for installing custom colormaps into
+TQGLWidgets.
+
+
     
+
+
+
     TQGLColormap provides a platform independent way of specifying and
+installing indexed colormaps into TQGLWidgets. TQGLColormap is
+especially useful when using the OpenGL
+color-index mode.
+
     Under X11 you must use an X server that supports either a PseudoColor or DirectColor visual class. If your X server
+currently only provides a GrayScale, TrueColor, StaticColor or StaticGray visual, you will not be able to
+allocate colorcells for writing. If this is the case, try setting
+your X server to 8 bit mode. It should then provide you with at
+least a PseudoColor visual. Note that you may experience
+colormap flashing if your X server is running in 8 bit mode.
+
     Under Windows the size of the colormap is always set to 256
+colors. Note that under Windows you can also install colormaps
+in child widgets.
+
     This class uses explicit sharing (see Shared
+    Classes).
+
     Example of use:
+
    +    #include <ntqapplication.h>
+    #include <ntqglcolormap.h>
+
+    int main()
+    {
+        TQApplication a( argc, argv );
+
+        MySuperGLWidget widget( 0 ); // A TQGLWidget in color-index mode
+        TQGLColormap colormap;
+
+        // This will fill the colormap with colors ranging from
+        // black to white.
+        for ( int i = 0; i < colormap.size(); i++ )
+            colormap.setEntry( i, qRgb( i, i, i ) );
+
+        widget.setColormap( colormap );
+        widget.show();
+        return a.exec();
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also TQGLWidget::setColormap(), TQGLWidget::colormap(), Graphics Classes, and Image Processing Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQGLColormap::TQGLColormap ()
+
    
+Construct a TQGLColormap.
+
+
    TQGLColormap::TQGLColormap ( const TQGLColormap & map )
+
    
+Construct a shallow copy of map.
+
+
    TQGLColormap::~TQGLColormap ()
+
    
+Dereferences the TQGLColormap and deletes it if this was the last
+reference to it.
+
+
    void TQGLColormap::detach ()
+
    
+Detaches this TQGLColormap from the shared block.
+
+
    TQColor TQGLColormap::entryColor ( int idx ) const
+
    
+Returns the TQRgb value in the colorcell with index idx.
+
+
    TQRgb TQGLColormap::entryRgb ( int idx ) const
+
    
+Returns the TQRgb value in the colorcell with index idx.
+
+
    int TQGLColormap::find ( TQRgb color ) const
+
    
+Returns the index of the color color. If color is not in the
+map, -1 is returned.
+
+
    int TQGLColormap::findNearest ( TQRgb color ) const
+
    
+Returns the index of the color that is the closest match to color
+color.
+
+
    bool TQGLColormap::isEmpty () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the colormap is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. A
+colormap with no color values set is considered to be empty.
+
+
    TQGLColormap & TQGLColormap::operator= ( const TQGLColormap & map )
+
    
+Assign a shallow copy of map to this TQGLColormap.
+
+
    void TQGLColormap::setEntries ( int count, const TQRgb * colors, int base = 0 )
+
    
+Set an array of cells in this colormap. count is the number of
+colors that should be set, colors is the array of colors, and
+base is the starting index.
+
+
    void TQGLColormap::setEntry ( int idx, TQRgb color )
+
    
+Set cell at index idx in the colormap to color color.
+
+
    void TQGLColormap::setEntry ( int idx, const TQColor & color )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Set the cell with index idx in the colormap to color color.
+
+
    int TQGLColormap::size () const
+
    
+Returns the number of colorcells in the colormap.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqgrid.html b/doc/html/ntqgrid.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fb042ffca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqgrid.html
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQGrid Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQGrid Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQGrid widget provides simple geometry management of its children.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqgrid.h>
+
    Inherits TQFrame.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQGrid ( int n, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQGrid ( int n, Orientation orient, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
      • 
+
    • void setSpacing ( int space )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQGrid widget provides simple geometry management of its children.
+
     
+
+
     The grid places its widgets either in columns or in rows depending
+on its orientation.
+
     The number of rows or columns is defined in the constructor.
+All the grid's children will be placed and sized in accordance
+with their sizeHint() and sizePolicy().
+
     Use setMargin() to add space around the grid itself, and
+setSpacing() to add space between the widgets.
+
     
    TQGrid
     
+
     
    See also TQVBox, TQHBox, TQGridLayout, Widget Appearance and Style, and Layout Management.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQGrid::TQGrid ( int n, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a grid widget with parent parent, called name.
+n specifies the number of columns. The widget flags f are
+passed to the TQFrame constructor.
+
+
    TQGrid::TQGrid ( int n, Orientation orient, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a grid widget with parent parent, called name.
+If orient is Horizontal, n specifies the number of
+columns. If orient is Vertical, n specifies the number of
+rows. The widget flags f are passed to the TQFrame constructor.
+
+
    void TQGrid::setSpacing ( int space )
+
    
+Sets the spacing between the child widgets to space.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqgridview.html b/doc/html/ntqgridview.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4124c7507
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqgridview.html
@@ -0,0 +1,261 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQGridView Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQGridView Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQGridView class provides an abstract base for
+fixed-size grids.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqgridview.h>
+
    Inherits TQScrollView.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • int cellHeight - the height of a grid row
      • 
+
    • int cellWidth - the width of a grid column
      • 
+
    • int numCols - the number of columns in the grid
      • 
+
    • int numRows - the number of rows in the grid
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • virtual void paintCell ( TQPainter * p, int row, int col ) = 0
      • 
+
    • virtual void paintEmptyArea ( TQPainter * p, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch )
      • 
+
    • virtual void dimensionChange ( int oldNumRows, int oldNumCols )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQGridView class provides an abstract base for
+fixed-size grids.
+
     
+
     A grid view consists of a number of abstract cells organized in
+rows and columns. The cells have a fixed size and are identified
+with a row index and a column index. The top-left cell is in row
+0, column 0. The bottom-right cell is in row numRows()-1, column
+numCols()-1.
+
     You can define numRows, numCols, cellWidth and cellHeight. Reimplement the pure virtual function paintCell() to
+draw the contents of a cell.
+
     With ensureCellVisible(), you can ensure a certain cell is
+visible. With rowAt() and columnAt() you can find a cell based on
+the given x- and y-coordinates.
+
     If you need to monitor changes to the grid's dimensions (i.e. when
+numRows or numCols is changed), reimplement the dimensionChange()
+change handler.
+
     Note: the row and column indices are always given in the order,
+row (vertical offset) then column (horizontal offset). This order
+is the opposite of all pixel operations, which are given in the
+order x (horizontal offset), y (vertical offset).
+
     TQGridView is a very simple abstract class based on TQScrollView. It
+is designed to simplify the task of drawing many cells of the same
+size in a potentially scrollable canvas. If you need rows and
+columns with different sizes, use a TQTable instead. If you need a
+simple list of items, use a TQListBox. If you need to present
+hierachical data use a TQListView, and if you need random objects
+at random positions, consider using either a TQIconView or a
+TQCanvas.
+
    See also Abstract Widget Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQGridView::TQGridView ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a grid view.
+
     The parent, name and widget flag, f, arguments are passed
+to the TQScrollView constructor.
+
+
    TQGridView::~TQGridView ()
+
    
+Destroys the grid view.
+
+
    TQRect TQGridView::cellGeometry ( int row, int column )
+
    
+Returns the geometry of cell (row, column) in the content
+coordinate system.
+
     
    See also cellRect().
+
+
    int TQGridView::cellHeight () const
+
    Returns the height of a grid row.
+See the "cellHeight" property for details.
+
    TQRect TQGridView::cellRect () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the geometry of a cell in a cell's coordinate system. This
+is a convenience function useful in paintCell(). It is equivalent
+to TQRect( 0, 0, cellWidth(), cellHeight() ).
+
     
    See also cellGeometry().
+
+
     
+
    int TQGridView::cellWidth () const
+
    Returns the width of a grid column.
+See the "cellWidth" property for details.
+
    int TQGridView::columnAt ( int x ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of the column at position x. x must be
+given in content coordinates.
+
     
    See also rowAt().
+
+
    void TQGridView::dimensionChange ( int oldNumRows, int oldNumCols ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     This change handler is called whenever any of the grid's
+dimensions change. oldNumRows and oldNumCols contain the
+old dimensions, numRows() and numCols() contain the new
+dimensions.
+
+
    void TQGridView::ensureCellVisible ( int row, int column )
+
    
+Ensures cell (row, column) is visible, scrolling the grid
+view if necessary.
+
+
    TQSize TQGridView::gridSize () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the size of the grid in pixels.
+
     
+
    int TQGridView::numCols () const
+
    Returns the number of columns in the grid.
+See the "numCols" property for details.
+
    int TQGridView::numRows () const
+
    Returns the number of rows in the grid.
+See the "numRows" property for details.
+
    void TQGridView::paintCell ( TQPainter * p, int row, int col ) [pure virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     This pure virtual function is called to paint the single cell at
+(row, col) using painter p. The painter must be open when
+paintCell() is called and must remain open.
+
     The coordinate system is translated so that the origin is at the top-left corner of the cell
+to be painted, i.e. cell coordinates. Do not scale or shear
+the coordinate system (or if you do, restore the transformation matrix before you return).
+
     The painter is not clipped by default in order to get maximum
+efficiency. If you want clipping, use
+
     
    +    p->setClipRect( cellRect(), TQPainter::CoordPainter );
+    //... your drawing code
+    p->setClipping( FALSE );
+
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    void TQGridView::paintEmptyArea ( TQPainter * p, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This function fills the cw pixels wide and ch pixels high
+rectangle starting at position (cx, cy) with the background
+color using the painter p.
+
     paintEmptyArea() is invoked by drawContents() to erase or fill
+unused areas.
+
+
    void TQGridView::repaintCell ( int row, int column, bool erase = TRUE )
+
    
+Repaints cell (row, column).
+
     If erase is TRUE, TQt erases the area of the cell before the
+paintCell() call; otherwise no erasing takes place.
+
     
    See also TQWidget::repaint().
+
+
    int TQGridView::rowAt ( int y ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of the row at position y. y must be given
+in content coordinates.
+
     
    See also columnAt().
+
+
    void TQGridView::setCellHeight ( int ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the height of a grid row.
+See the "cellHeight" property for details.
+
    void TQGridView::setCellWidth ( int ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the width of a grid column.
+See the "cellWidth" property for details.
+
    void TQGridView::setNumCols ( int ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the number of columns in the grid.
+See the "numCols" property for details.
+
    void TQGridView::setNumRows ( int ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the number of rows in the grid.
+See the "numRows" property for details.
+
    void TQGridView::updateCell ( int row, int column )
+
    
+Updates cell (row, column).
+
     
    See also TQWidget::update().
+
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    int cellHeight
    
+
    This property holds the height of a grid row.
+
    All rows in a grid view have the same height.
+
     
    See also cellWidth.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setCellHeight() and get this property's value with cellHeight().
+
    int cellWidth
    
+
    This property holds the width of a grid column.
+
    All columns in a grid view have the same width.
+
     
    See also cellHeight.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setCellWidth() and get this property's value with cellWidth().
+
    int numCols
    
+
    This property holds the number of columns in the grid.
+
    Set this property's value with setNumCols() and get this property's value with numCols().
+
    See also numRows.
+
+
    int numRows
    
+
    This property holds the number of rows in the grid.
+
    Set this property's value with setNumRows() and get this property's value with numRows().
+
    See also numCols.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqgroupbox.html b/doc/html/ntqgroupbox.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4fb9c0a63
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqgroupbox.html
@@ -0,0 +1,330 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQGroupBox Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQGroupBox Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQGroupBox widget provides a group box frame with a title.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqgroupbox.h>
+
    Inherits TQFrame.
+
    Inherited by TQButtonGroup, TQHGroupBox, and TQVGroupBox.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • Alignment alignment - the alignment of the group box title
      • 
+
    • bool checkable - whether the group box has a checkbox in its title
      • 
+
    • bool checked - whether the group box's checkbox is checked
      • 
+
    • int columns - the number of columns or rows (depending on \l TQGroupBox::orientation) in the group box
      • 
+
    • bool flat - whether the group box is painted flat or has a frame
      • 
+
    • Orientation orientation - the group box's orientation
      • 
+
    • TQString title - the group box title text
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQGroupBox widget provides a group box frame with a title.
+
     
+
+
+
+
     A group box provides a frame, a title and a keyboard shortcut, and
+displays various other widgets inside itself. The title is on top,
+the keyboard shortcut moves keyboard focus to one of the group
+box's child widgets, and the child widgets are usually laid out
+horizontally (or vertically) inside the frame.
+
     The simplest way to use it is to create a group box with the
+desired number of columns (or rows) and orientation, and then just
+create widgets with the group box as parent.
+
     It is also possible to change the orientation() and number of
+columns() after construction, or to ignore all the automatic
+layout support and manage the layout yourself. You can add 'empty'
+spaces to the group box with addSpace().
+
     TQGroupBox also lets you set the title() (normally set in the
+constructor) and the title's alignment().
+
     You can change the spacing used by the group box with
+setInsideMargin() and setInsideSpacing(). To minimize space
+consumption, you can remove the right, left and bottom edges of
+the frame with setFlat().
+
     
+
     
    See also TQButtonGroup, Widget Appearance and Style, Layout Management, and Organizers.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQGroupBox::TQGroupBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a group box widget with no title.
+
     The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
     This constructor does not do automatic layout.
+
+
    TQGroupBox::TQGroupBox ( const TQString & title, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a group box with the title title.
+
     The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
     This constructor does not do automatic layout.
+
+
    TQGroupBox::TQGroupBox ( int strips, Orientation orientation, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a group box with no title. Child widgets will be
+arranged in strips rows or columns (depending on orientation).
+
     The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
+
    TQGroupBox::TQGroupBox ( int strips, Orientation orientation, const TQString & title, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a group box titled title. Child widgets will be
+arranged in strips rows or columns (depending on orientation).
+
     The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
+
    TQGroupBox::~TQGroupBox ()
+
    
+Destroys the group box.
+
+
    void TQGroupBox::addSpace ( int size )
+
    
+Adds an empty cell at the next free position. If size is
+greater than 0, the empty cell takes size to be its fixed width
+(if orientation() is Horizontal) or height (if orientation() is
+Vertical).
+
     Use this method to separate the widgets in the group box or to
+skip the next free cell. For performance reasons, call this method
+after calling setColumnLayout() or by changing the TQGroupBox::columns or TQGroupBox::orientation properties. It is
+generally a good idea to call these methods first (if needed at
+all), and insert the widgets and spaces afterwards.
+
+
    int TQGroupBox::alignment () const
+
    Returns the alignment of the group box title.
+See the "alignment" property for details.
+
    int TQGroupBox::columns () const
+
    Returns the number of columns or rows (depending on TQGroupBox::orientation) in the group box.
+See the "columns" property for details.
+
    int TQGroupBox::insideMargin () const
+
    
+Returns the width of the empty space between the items in the
+group and the frame of the group.
+
     Only applies if the group box has a defined orientation.
+
     The default is usually 11, by may vary depending on the platform
+and style.
+
     
    See also setInsideMargin() and orientation.
+
+
    int TQGroupBox::insideSpacing () const
+
    
+Returns the width of the empty space between each of the items
+in the group.
+
     Only applies if the group box has a defined orientation.
+
     The default is usually 5, by may vary depending on the platform
+and style.
+
     
    See also setInsideSpacing() and orientation.
+
+
    bool TQGroupBox::isCheckable () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the group box has a checkbox in its title; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "checkable" property for details.
+
    bool TQGroupBox::isChecked () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the group box's checkbox is checked; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "checked" property for details.
+
    bool TQGroupBox::isFlat () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the group box is painted flat or has a frame; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "flat" property for details.
+
    Orientation TQGroupBox::orientation () const
+
    Returns the group box's orientation.
+See the "orientation" property for details.
+
    void TQGroupBox::setAlignment ( int ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the alignment of the group box title.
+See the "alignment" property for details.
+
    void TQGroupBox::setCheckable ( bool b )
+
    Sets whether the group box has a checkbox in its title to b.
+See the "checkable" property for details.
+
    void TQGroupBox::setChecked ( bool b ) [slot]
+
    Sets whether the group box's checkbox is checked to b.
+See the "checked" property for details.
+
    void TQGroupBox::setColumnLayout ( int strips, Orientation direction ) [virtual]
+
    
+Changes the layout of the group box. This function is only useful
+in combination with the default constructor that does not take any
+layout information. This function will put all existing children
+in the new layout. It is not good TQt programming style to call
+this function after children have been inserted. Sets the number
+of columns or rows to be strips, depending on direction.
+
     
    See also orientation and columns.
+
+
    Example: chart/optionsform.cpp.
+
    void TQGroupBox::setColumns ( int )
+
    Sets the number of columns or rows (depending on TQGroupBox::orientation) in the group box.
+See the "columns" property for details.
+
    void TQGroupBox::setFlat ( bool b )
+
    Sets whether the group box is painted flat or has a frame to b.
+See the "flat" property for details.
+
    void TQGroupBox::setInsideMargin ( int m )
+
    
+Sets the the width of the inside margin to m pixels.
+
     
    See also insideMargin().
+
+
    void TQGroupBox::setInsideSpacing ( int s )
+
    
+Sets the width of the empty space between each of the items in
+the group to s pixels.
+
     
    See also insideSpacing().
+
+
    void TQGroupBox::setOrientation ( Orientation )
+
    Sets the group box's orientation.
+See the "orientation" property for details.
+
    void TQGroupBox::setTitle ( const TQString & ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the group box title text.
+See the "title" property for details.
+
    TQString TQGroupBox::title () const
+
    Returns the group box title text.
+See the "title" property for details.
+
    void TQGroupBox::toggled ( bool on ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     If the group box has a check box (see isCheckable()) this signal
+is emitted when the check box is toggled. on is TRUE if the check
+box is checked; otherwise it is FALSE.
+
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    Alignment alignment
    
+
    This property holds the alignment of the group box title.
+
    The title is always placed on the upper frame line. The horizontal
+alignment can be specified by the alignment parameter.
+
     The alignment is one of the following flags:
+
      
+
    •  AlignAuto aligns the title according to the language,
+usually to the left.
+
    •  AlignLeft aligns the title text to the left.
+
    •  AlignRight aligns the title text to the right.
+
    •  AlignHCenter aligns the title text centered.
+
    
+
     The default alignment is AlignAuto.
+
     
    See also TQt::AlignmentFlags.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setAlignment() and get this property's value with alignment().
+
    bool checkable
    
+
    This property holds whether the group box has a checkbox in its title.
+
    If this property is TRUE, the group box has a checkbox. If the
+checkbox is checked (which is the default), the group box's
+children are enabled.
+
     setCheckable() controls whether or not the group box has a
+checkbox, and isCheckable() controls whether the checkbox is
+checked or not.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setCheckable() and get this property's value with isCheckable().
+
    bool checked
    
+
    This property holds whether the group box's checkbox is checked.
+
    If the group box has a check box (see isCheckable()), and the
+check box is checked (see isChecked()), the group box's children
+are enabled. If the checkbox is unchecked the children are
+disabled.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setChecked() and get this property's value with isChecked().
+
    int columns
    
+
    This property holds the number of columns or rows (depending on TQGroupBox::orientation) in the group box.
+
    Usually it is not a good idea to set this property because it is
+slow (it does a complete layout). It is best to set the number
+of columns directly in the constructor.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setColumns() and get this property's value with columns().
+
    bool flat
    
+
    This property holds whether the group box is painted flat or has a frame.
+
    By default a group box has a surrounding frame, with the title
+being placed on the upper frame line. In flat mode the right, left
+and bottom frame lines are omitted, and only the thin line at the
+top is drawn.
+
     
    See also title.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setFlat() and get this property's value with isFlat().
+
    Orientation orientation
    
+
    This property holds the group box's orientation.
+
    A horizontal group box arranges it's children in columns, while a
+vertical group box arranges them in rows.
+
     Usually it is not a good idea to set this property because it is
+slow (it does a complete layout). It is better to set the
+orientation directly in the constructor.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setOrientation() and get this property's value with orientation().
+
    TQString title
    
+
    This property holds the group box title text.
+
    The group box title text will have a focus-change keyboard
+accelerator if the title contains &, followed by a letter.
+
     
    +        g->setTitle( "&User information" );
+    
    
+ 
+This produces "User information"; Alt+U moves the keyboard focus to the group box.
+
     There is no default title text.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setTitle() and get this property's value with title().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqguardedptr.html b/doc/html/ntqguardedptr.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9d6f85029
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqguardedptr.html
@@ -0,0 +1,194 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQGuardedPtr Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQGuardedPtr Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQGuardedPtr class is a template class that provides guarded pointers to TQObjects.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqguardedptr.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQGuardedPtr class is a template class that provides guarded pointers to TQObjects.
+
     
+
+
     A guarded pointer, TQGuardedPtr<X>, behaves like a normal C++
+pointer X*, except that it is automatically set to 0 when
+the referenced object is destroyed (unlike normal C++ pointers,
+which become "dangling pointers" in such cases). X must be a
+subclass of TQObject.
+
     Guarded pointers are useful whenever you need to store a pointer
+to a TQObject that is owned by someone else and therefore might be
+destroyed while you still hold a reference to it. You can safely
+test the pointer for validity.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQGuardedPtr<TQLabel> label = new TQLabel( 0, "label" );
+        label->setText( "I like guarded pointers" );
+
+        delete (TQLabel*) label; // simulate somebody destroying the label
+
+        if ( label)
+            label->show();
+        else
+            qDebug("The label has been destroyed");
+    
    
+ 
+
     The program will output The label has been destroyed rather
+than dereferencing an invalid address in label->show().
+
     The functions and operators available with a TQGuardedPtr are the
+same as those available with a normal unguarded pointer, except
+the pointer arithmetic operators (++, --, -, and +), which are
+normally used only with arrays of objects. Use them like normal
+pointers and you will not need to read this class documentation.
+
     For creating guarded pointers, you can construct or assign to them
+from an X* or from another guarded pointer of the same type. You
+can compare them with each other using operator==() and
+operator!=(), or test for 0 with isNull(). And you can dereference
+them using either the *x or the x->member notation.
+
     A guarded pointer will automatically cast to an X*, so you can
+freely mix guarded and unguarded pointers. This means that if you
+have a TQGuardedPtr, you can pass it to a function that
+requires a TQWidget*. For this reason, it is of little value to
+declare functions to take a TQGuardedPtr as a parameter; just use
+normal pointers. Use a TQGuardedPtr when you are storing a pointer
+over time.
+
     Note again that class X must inherit TQObject, or a compilation
+or link error will result.
+
    See also Object Model.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQGuardedPtr::TQGuardedPtr ()
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a 0 guarded pointer.
+
     
    See also isNull().
+
+
    TQGuardedPtr::TQGuardedPtr ( T * p )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a guarded pointer that points to same object as p
+points to.
+
+
    TQGuardedPtr::TQGuardedPtr ( const TQGuardedPtr<T> & p )
+
    
+
+
     Copy one guarded pointer from another. The constructed guarded
+pointer points to the same object that p points to (which may
+be 0).
+
+
    TQGuardedPtr::~TQGuardedPtr ()
+
    
+
+
     Destroys the guarded pointer. Just like a normal pointer,
+destroying a guarded pointer does not destroy the object being
+pointed to.
+
+
    bool TQGuardedPtr::isNull () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the referenced object has been destroyed or if
+there is no referenced object; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    TQGuardedPtr::operator T * () const
+
    
+
+
     Cast operator; implements pointer semantics. Because of this
+function you can pass a TQGuardedPtr<X> to a function where an X*
+is required.
+
+
    bool TQGuardedPtr::operator!= ( const TQGuardedPtr<T> & p ) const
+
    
+
+
     Inequality operator; implements pointer semantics, the negation of
+operator==(). Returns TRUE if p and this guarded pointer are
+not pointing to the same object; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    T & TQGuardedPtr::operator* () const
+
    
+
+
     Dereference operator; implements pointer semantics. Just use this
+operator as you would with a normal C++ pointer.
+
+
    T * TQGuardedPtr::operator-> () const
+
    
+
+
     Overloaded arrow operator; implements pointer semantics. Just use
+this operator as you would with a normal C++ pointer.
+
+
    TQGuardedPtr<T> & TQGuardedPtr::operator= ( const TQGuardedPtr<T> & p )
+
    
+
+
     Assignment operator. This guarded pointer then points to the same
+object as p points to.
+
+
    TQGuardedPtr<T> & TQGuardedPtr::operator= ( T * p )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Assignment operator. This guarded pointer then points to the same
+object as p points to.
+
+
    bool TQGuardedPtr::operator== ( const TQGuardedPtr<T> & p ) const
+
    
+
+
     Equality operator; implements traditional pointer semantics.
+Returns TRUE if both p and this guarded pointer are 0, or if
+both p and this pointer point to the same object; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also operator!=().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqhbox.html b/doc/html/ntqhbox.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9a106ebc0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqhbox.html
@@ -0,0 +1,105 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQHBox Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQHBox Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQHBox widget provides horizontal geometry management
+for its child widgets.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqhbox.h>
+
    Inherits TQFrame.
+
    Inherited by TQVBox.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQHBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
      • 
+
    • void setSpacing ( int space )
      • 
+
    • bool setStretchFactor ( TQWidget * w, int stretch )
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQHBox ( bool horizontal, TQWidget * parent, const char * name, WFlags f = 0 )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQHBox widget provides horizontal geometry management
+for its child widgets.
+
     
+
+
+
     All the horizontal box's child widgets will be placed alongside
+each other and sized according to their sizeHint()s.
+
     Use setMargin() to add space around the edges, and use
+setSpacing() to add space between the widgets. Use
+setStretchFactor() if you want the widgets to be different sizes
+in proportion to one another. (See Layouts for more information on stretch factors.)
+
     
    TQHBox
     
+
     
    See also TQHBoxLayout, TQVBox, TQGrid, Widget Appearance and Style, Layout Management, and Organizers.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQHBox::TQHBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs an hbox widget with parent parent, called name.
+The parent, name and widget flags, f, are passed to the TQFrame
+constructor.
+
+
    TQHBox::TQHBox ( bool horizontal, TQWidget * parent, const char * name, WFlags f = 0 ) [protected]
+
    
+Constructs a horizontal hbox if horizontal is TRUE, otherwise
+constructs a vertical hbox (also known as a vbox).
+
     This constructor is provided for the TQVBox class. You should never
+need to use it directly.
+
     The parent, name and widget flags, f, are passed to the
+TQFrame constructor.
+
+
    void TQHBox::setSpacing ( int space )
+
    
+Sets the spacing between the child widgets to space.
+
+
    Examples: i18n/mywidget.cpp, listboxcombo/listboxcombo.cpp, qdir/qdir.cpp, tabdialog/tabdialog.cpp, wizard/wizard.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    bool TQHBox::setStretchFactor ( TQWidget * w, int stretch )
+
    
+Sets the stretch factor of widget w to stretch. Returns TRUE if
+w is found. Otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also TQBoxLayout::setStretchFactor() and Layouts.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqhbuttongroup.html b/doc/html/ntqhbuttongroup.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e7d572324
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqhbuttongroup.html
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQHButtonGroup Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQHButtonGroup Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQHButtonGroup widget organizes TQButton widgets in a
+group with one horizontal row.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqhbuttongroup.h>
+
    Inherits TQButtonGroup.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQHButtonGroup widget organizes TQButton widgets in a
+group with one horizontal row.
+
     
+
+
+
     TQHButtonGroup is a convenience class that offers a thin layer on
+top of TQButtonGroup. From a layout point of view it is effectively
+a TQHBox that offers a frame with a title and is specifically
+designed for buttons. From a functionality point of view it is a
+TQButtonGroup.
+
     
    TQButtonGroup
     
+
     
    See also TQVButtonGroup, Widget Appearance and Style, Layout Management, and Organizers.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQHButtonGroup::TQHButtonGroup ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a horizontal button group with no title.
+
     The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
+
    TQHButtonGroup::TQHButtonGroup ( const TQString & title, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a horizontal button group with the title title.
+
     The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
+
    TQHButtonGroup::~TQHButtonGroup ()
+
    
+Destroys the horizontal button group, deleting its child widgets.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqheader.html b/doc/html/ntqheader.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e918e8044
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqheader.html
@@ -0,0 +1,607 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQHeader Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQHeader Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQHeader class provides a header row or column, e.g. for
+tables and listviews.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqheader.h>
+
    Inherits TQWidget.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
      
+
    • void clicked ( int section )
      • 
+
    • void pressed ( int section )
      • 
+
    • void released ( int section )
      • 
+
    • void sizeChange ( int section, int oldSize, int newSize )
      • 
+
    • void indexChange ( int section, int fromIndex, int toIndex )
      • 
+
    • void sectionClicked ( int index )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void moved ( int fromIndex, int toIndex )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void sectionHandleDoubleClicked ( int section )
      • 
+
    
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • int count - the number of sections in the header  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool moving - whether the header sections can be moved
      • 
+
    • int offset - the header's left-most (or top-most) visible pixel
      • 
+
    • Orientation orientation - the header's orientation
      • 
+
    • bool stretching - whether the header sections always take up the full width (or height) of the header
      • 
+
    • bool tracking - whether the sizeChange() signal is emitted continuously
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQRect sRect ( int index )
      • 
+
    • virtual void paintSection ( TQPainter * p, int index, const TQRect & fr )
      • 
+
    • virtual void paintSectionLabel ( TQPainter * p, int index, const TQRect & fr )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQHeader class provides a header row or column, e.g. for
+tables and listviews.
+
     
+
     This class provides a header, e.g. a vertical header to display
+row labels, or a horizontal header to display column labels. It is
+used by TQTable and TQListView for example.
+
     A header is composed of one or more sections, each of which can
+display a text label and an iconset. A sort
+indicator (an arrow) can also be displayed using
+setSortIndicator().
+
     Sections are added with addLabel() and removed with removeLabel().
+The label and iconset are set in addLabel() and can be changed
+later with setLabel(). Use count() to retrieve the number of
+sections in the header.
+
     The orientation of the header is set with setOrientation(). If
+setStretchEnabled() is TRUE, the sections will expand to take up
+the full width (height for vertical headers) of the header. The
+user can resize the sections manually if setResizeEnabled() is
+TRUE. Call adjustHeaderSize() to have the sections resize to
+occupy the full width (or height).
+
     A section can be moved with moveSection(). If setMovingEnabled()
+is TRUE (the default)the user may drag a section from one position
+to another. If a section is moved, the index positions at which
+sections were added (with addLabel()), may not be the same after the
+move. You don't have to worry about this in practice because the
+TQHeader API works in terms of section numbers, so it doesn't matter
+where a particular section has been moved to.
+
     If you want the current index position of a section call
+mapToIndex() giving it the section number. (This is the number
+returned by the addLabel() call which created the section.) If you
+want to get the section number of a section at a particular index
+position call mapToSection() giving it the index number.
+
     Here's an example to clarify mapToSection() and mapToIndex():
+
     
    
+
      Index positions
+
     0 1 2 3
+
      Original section ordering
+
     Sect 0 Sect 1 Sect 2 Sect 3
+
      Ordering after the user moves a section
+
     Sect 0 Sect 2 Sect 3 Sect 1
+
    
+
     
    
+
     k mapToSection(k) mapToIndex(k)
+
     0 0 0
+
     1 2 3
+
     2 3 1
+
     3 1 2
+
    
+
     In the example above, if we wanted to find out which section is at
+index position 3 we'd call mapToSection(3) and get a section
+number of 1 since section 1 was moved. Similarly, if we wanted to
+know which index position section 2 occupied we'd call
+mapToIndex(2) and get an index of 1.
+
     TQHeader provides the clicked(), pressed() and released() signals.
+If the user changes the size of a section, the sizeChange() signal
+is emitted. If you want to have a sizeChange() signal emitted
+continuously whilst the user is resizing (rather than just after
+the resizing is finished), use setTracking(). If the user moves a
+section the indexChange() signal is emitted.
+
      
+
     
    See also TQListView, TQTable, and Advanced Widgets.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQHeader::TQHeader ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a horizontal header called name, with parent parent.
+
+
    TQHeader::TQHeader ( int n, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a horizontal header called name, with n sections
+and parent parent.
+
+
    TQHeader::~TQHeader ()
+
    
+Destroys the header and all its sections.
+
+
    int TQHeader::addLabel ( const TQString & s, int size = -1 )
+
    
+Adds a new section with label text s. Returns the index
+position where the section was added (at the right for horizontal
+headers, at the bottom for vertical headers). The section's width
+is set to size. If size < 0, an appropriate size for the
+text s is chosen.
+
+
    int TQHeader::addLabel ( const TQIconSet & iconset, const TQString & s, int size = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Adds a new section with iconset iconset and label text s.
+Returns the index position where the section was added (at the
+right for horizontal headers, at the bottom for vertical headers).
+The section's width is set to size, unless size is negative in
+which case the size is calculated taking account of the size of
+the text.
+
+
    void TQHeader::adjustHeaderSize ()
+
    
+
+
     Adjusts the size of the sections to fit the size of the header as
+completely as possible. Only sections for which isStretchEnabled()
+is TRUE will be resized.
+
+
    int TQHeader::cellAt ( int pos ) const
+
     
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Use sectionAt() instead.
+
     Returns the index at which the section is displayed, which contains
+pos in widget coordinates, or -1 if pos is outside the header
+sections.
+
+
    int TQHeader::cellPos ( int i ) const
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Use sectionPos() instead.
+
     Returns the position in pixels of the section that is displayed at the
+index i. The  position is measured from the start of the header.
+
+
    int TQHeader::cellSize ( int i ) const
+
     
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Use sectionSize() instead.
+
     Returns the size in pixels of the section that is displayed at
+the index i.
+
+
    void TQHeader::clicked ( int section ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     If isClickEnabled() is TRUE, this signal is emitted when the user
+clicks section section.
+
     
    See also pressed() and released().
+
+
    int TQHeader::count () const
+
    Returns the number of sections in the header.
+See the "count" property for details.
+
    int TQHeader::headerWidth () const
+
    
+Returns the total width of all the header columns.
+
+
    TQIconSet * TQHeader::iconSet ( int section ) const
+
    
+Returns the icon set for section section. If the section does
+not exist, 0 is returned.
+
+
    void TQHeader::indexChange ( int section, int fromIndex, int toIndex ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user moves section section from
+index position fromIndex, to index position toIndex.
+
+
    bool TQHeader::isClickEnabled ( int section = -1 ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if section section is clickable; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     If section is out of range (negative or larger than count() -
+1): returns TRUE if all sections are clickable; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     
    See also setClickEnabled().
+
+
    bool TQHeader::isMovingEnabled () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the header sections can be moved; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "moving" property for details.
+
    bool TQHeader::isResizeEnabled ( int section = -1 ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if section section is resizeable; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     If section is -1 then this function applies to all sections,
+i.e. returns TRUE if all sections are resizeable; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setResizeEnabled().
+
+
    bool TQHeader::isStretchEnabled () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the header sections always take up the full width (or height) of the header; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "stretching" property for details.
+
    bool TQHeader::isStretchEnabled ( int section ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns TRUE if section section will resize to take up the full
+width (or height) of the header; otherwise returns FALSE. If at
+least one section has stretch enabled the sections will always
+take up the full width of the header.
+
     
    See also setStretchEnabled().
+
+
    TQString TQHeader::label ( int section ) const
+
    
+Returns the text for section section. If the section does not
+exist, a TQString::null is returned.
+
+
    Example: helpsystem/tooltip.cpp.
+
    int TQHeader::mapToActual ( int l ) const
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Use mapToIndex() instead.
+
     Translates from logical index l to actual index (index at which the section l is displayed) .
+Returns -1 if l is outside the legal range.
+
     
    See also mapToLogical().
+
+
    int TQHeader::mapToIndex ( int section ) const
+
    
+Returns the index position corresponding to the specified section number.
+
     Warning: If TQTable is used to move header sections as a result of user
+interaction, the mapping exposed by this function will not reflect the
+order of the headers in the table; i.e., TQTable does not call moveSection()
+to move sections but handles move operations internally.
+
     
    See also mapToSection().
+
+
    int TQHeader::mapToLogical ( int a ) const
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Use mapToSection() instead.
+
     Translates from actual index a (index at which the section is displayed)  to
+logical index of the section.  Returns -1 if a is outside the legal range.
+
     
    See also mapToActual().
+
+
    int TQHeader::mapToSection ( int index ) const
+
    
+Returns the number of the section that corresponds to the specified index.
+
     Warning: If TQTable is used to move header sections as a result of user
+interaction, the mapping exposed by this function will not reflect the
+order of the headers in the table; i.e., TQTable does not call moveSection()
+to move sections but handles move operations internally.
+
     
    See also mapToIndex().
+
+
    void TQHeader::moveCell ( int fromIdx, int toIdx ) [virtual]
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Use moveSection() instead.
+
     Moves the section that is currently displayed at index fromIdx
+to index toIdx.
+
+
    void TQHeader::moveSection ( int section, int toIndex )
+
    
+Moves section section to index position toIndex.
+
+
    void TQHeader::moved ( int fromIndex, int toIndex ) [signal]
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Use indexChange() instead.
+
     This signal is emitted when the user has moved the section which
+is displayed at the index fromIndex to the index toIndex.
+
+
    int TQHeader::offset () const
+
    Returns the header's left-most (or top-most) visible pixel.
+See the "offset" property for details.
+
    Orientation TQHeader::orientation () const
+
    Returns the header's orientation.
+See the "orientation" property for details.
+
    void TQHeader::paintSection ( TQPainter * p, int index, const TQRect & fr ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Paints the section at position index, inside rectangle fr
+(which uses widget coordinates) using painter p.
+
     Calls paintSectionLabel().
+
+
    void TQHeader::paintSectionLabel ( TQPainter * p, int index, const TQRect & fr ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Paints the label of the section at position index, inside
+rectangle fr (which uses widget coordinates) using painter p.
+
     Called by paintSection()
+
+
    void TQHeader::pressed ( int section ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user presses section section
+down.
+
     
    See also released().
+
+
    void TQHeader::released ( int section ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when section section is released.
+
     
    See also pressed().
+
+
    void TQHeader::removeLabel ( int section )
+
    
+Removes section section. If the section does not exist, nothing
+happens.
+
+
    void TQHeader::resizeSection ( int section, int s )
+
    
+Resizes section section to s pixels wide (or high).
+
+
    TQRect TQHeader::sRect ( int index ) [protected]
+
    
+Returns the rectangle covered by the section at index index.
+
+
    int TQHeader::sectionAt ( int pos ) const
+
    
+Returns the index of the section which contains the position pos given in pixels from the left (or top).
+
     
    See also offset.
+
+
    Example: helpsystem/tooltip.cpp.
+
    void TQHeader::sectionClicked ( int index ) [signal]
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Use clicked() instead.
+
     This signal is emitted when a part of the header is clicked. index is the index at which the section is displayed.
+
     In a list view this signal would typically be connected to a slot
+that sorts the specified column (or row).
+
+
    void TQHeader::sectionHandleDoubleClicked ( int section ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user doubleclicks on the edge
+(handle) of section section.
+
+
    int TQHeader::sectionPos ( int section ) const
+
    
+Returns the position (in pixels) at which the section starts.
+
     
    See also offset.
+
+
    TQRect TQHeader::sectionRect ( int section ) const
+
    
+Returns the rectangle covered by section section.
+
+
    Example: helpsystem/tooltip.cpp.
+
    int TQHeader::sectionSize ( int section ) const
+
    
+Returns the width (or height) of the section in pixels.
+
+
    void TQHeader::setCellSize ( int section, int s ) [virtual]
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Use resizeSection() instead.
+
     Sets the size of the section section to s pixels.
+
     Warning: does not repaint or send out signals
+
+
    void TQHeader::setClickEnabled ( bool enable, int section = -1 ) [virtual]
+
    
+If enable is TRUE, any clicks on section section will result
+in clicked() signals being emitted; otherwise the section will
+ignore clicks.
+
     If section is -1 (the default) then the enable value is set
+for all existing sections and will be applied to any new sections
+that are added.
+
     
    See also moving and setResizeEnabled().
+
+
    void TQHeader::setLabel ( int section, const TQString & s, int size = -1 ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the text of section section to s. The section's width
+is set to size if size >= 0; otherwise it is left
+unchanged. Any icon set that has been set for this section remains
+unchanged.
+
     If the section does not exist, nothing happens.
+
+
    Examples: chart/setdataform.cpp and table/small-table-demo/main.cpp.
+
    void TQHeader::setLabel ( int section, const TQIconSet & iconset, const TQString & s, int size = -1 ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the icon for section section to iconset and the text to
+s. The section's width is set to size if size >= 0;
+otherwise it is left unchanged.
+
     If the section does not exist, nothing happens.
+
+
    void TQHeader::setMovingEnabled ( bool ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the header sections can be moved.
+See the "moving" property for details.
+
    void TQHeader::setOffset ( int pos ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the header's left-most (or top-most) visible pixel to pos.
+See the "offset" property for details.
+
    void TQHeader::setOrientation ( Orientation ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the header's orientation.
+See the "orientation" property for details.
+
    void TQHeader::setResizeEnabled ( bool enable, int section = -1 ) [virtual]
+
    
+If enable is TRUE the user may resize section section;
+otherwise the section may not be manually resized.
+
     If section is negative (the default) then the enable value
+is set for all existing sections and will be applied to any new
+sections that are added.
+Example:
+
    +    // Allow resizing of all current and future sections
+    header->setResizeEnabled(TRUE);
+    // Disable resizing of section 3, (the fourth section added)
+    header->setResizeEnabled(FALSE, 3);
+    
    
+ 
+
     If the user resizes a section, a sizeChange() signal is emitted.
+
     
    See also moving, setClickEnabled(), and tracking.
+
+
    void TQHeader::setSortIndicator ( int section, SortOrder order )
+
    
+
+
     Sets a sort indicator onto the specified section. The indicator's
+order is either Ascending or Descending.
+
     Only one section can show a sort indicator at any one time. If you
+don't want any section to show a sort indicator pass a section
+number of -1.
+
     
    See also sortIndicatorSection() and sortIndicatorOrder().
+
+
    void TQHeader::setSortIndicator ( int section, bool ascending = TRUE )
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Use the other overload instead.
+
+
    void TQHeader::setStretchEnabled ( bool b, int section ) [virtual]
+
    
+If b is TRUE, section section will be resized when the
+header is resized, so that the sections take up the full width (or
+height for vertical headers) of the header; otherwise section section will be set to be unstretchable and will not resize when
+the header is resized.
+
     If section is -1, and if b is TRUE, then all sections will
+be resized equally when the header is resized so that they take up
+the full width (or height for vertical headers) of the header;
+otherwise all the sections will be set to be unstretchable and
+will not resize when the header is resized.
+
     
    See also adjustHeaderSize().
+
+
    void TQHeader::setStretchEnabled ( bool b )
+
    Sets whether the header sections always take up the full width (or height) of the header to b.
+See the "stretching" property for details.
+
    void TQHeader::setTracking ( bool enable ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the sizeChange() signal is emitted continuously to enable.
+See the "tracking" property for details.
+
    void TQHeader::sizeChange ( int section, int oldSize, int newSize ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user has changed the size of a section from oldSize to newSize. This signal is typically
+connected to a slot that repaints the table or list that contains
+the header.
+
+
    SortOrder TQHeader::sortIndicatorOrder () const
+
    
+Returns the implied sort order of the TQHeaders sort indicator.
+
     
    See also setSortIndicator() and sortIndicatorSection().
+
+
    int TQHeader::sortIndicatorSection () const
+
    
+Returns the section showing the sort indicator or -1 if there is no sort indicator.
+
     
    See also setSortIndicator() and sortIndicatorOrder().
+
+
    bool TQHeader::tracking () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the sizeChange() signal is emitted continuously; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "tracking" property for details.
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    int count
    
+
    This property holds the number of sections in the header.
+
    
+
    Get this property's value with count().
+
    bool moving
    
+
    This property holds whether the header sections can be moved.
+
    If this property is TRUE (the default) the user can move sections.
+If the user moves a section the indexChange() signal is emitted.
+
     
    See also setClickEnabled() and setResizeEnabled().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setMovingEnabled() and get this property's value with isMovingEnabled().
+
    int offset
    
+
    This property holds the header's left-most (or top-most) visible pixel.
+
    Setting this property will scroll the header so that offset
+becomes the left-most (or top-most for vertical headers) visible
+pixel.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setOffset() and get this property's value with offset().
+
    Orientation orientation
    
+
    This property holds the header's orientation.
+
    The orientation is either Vertical or Horizontal (the
+default).
+
     Call setOrientation() before adding labels if you don't provide a
+size parameter otherwise the sizes will be incorrect.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setOrientation() and get this property's value with orientation().
+
    bool stretching
    
+
    This property holds whether the header sections always take up the full width (or height) of the header.
+
    
+
    Set this property's value with setStretchEnabled() and get this property's value with isStretchEnabled().
+
    bool tracking
    
+
    This property holds whether the sizeChange() signal is emitted continuously.
+
    If tracking is on, the sizeChange() signal is emitted continuously
+while the mouse is moved (i.e. when the header is resized),
+otherwise it is only emitted when the mouse button is released at
+the end of resizing.
+
     Tracking defaults to FALSE.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setTracking() and get this property's value with tracking().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqhgroupbox.html b/doc/html/ntqhgroupbox.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0578cdac1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqhgroupbox.html
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQHGroupBox Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQHGroupBox Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQHGroupBox widget organizes widgets in a group with one
+horizontal row.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqhgroupbox.h>
+
    Inherits TQGroupBox.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQHGroupBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQHGroupBox ( const TQString & title, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • ~TQHGroupBox ()
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
     The TQHGroupBox widget organizes widgets in a group with one
+horizontal row.
+
     
+
+
+
     TQHGroupBox is a convenience class that offers a thin layer on top
+of TQGroupBox. Think of it as a TQHBox that offers a frame with a
+title.
+
     
    Group Boxes
     
+
     
    See also TQVGroupBox, Widget Appearance and Style, Layout Management, and Organizers.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQHGroupBox::TQHGroupBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a horizontal group box with no title.
+
     The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
+
    TQHGroupBox::TQHGroupBox ( const TQString & title, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a horizontal group box with the title title.
+
     The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
+
    TQHGroupBox::~TQHGroupBox ()
+
    
+Destroys the horizontal group box, deleting its child widgets.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqhostaddress.html b/doc/html/ntqhostaddress.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2efa94de1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqhostaddress.html
@@ -0,0 +1,200 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQHostAddress Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQHostAddress Class Reference
    [network module]
    
+
+
    The TQHostAddress class provides an IP address.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqhostaddress.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQHostAddress class provides an IP address.
+
+
     
+
+
     This class contains an IP address in a platform and protocol
+independent manner. It stores both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses in a
+way that you can easily access on any platform.
+
     TQHostAddress is normally used with the classes TQSocket,
+TQServerSocket and TQSocketDevice to set up a server or to connect
+to a host.
+
     Host addresses may be set with setAddress() and retrieved with
+ip4Addr() or toString().
+
     
    See also TQSocket, TQServerSocket, TQSocketDevice, and Input/Output and Networking.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQHostAddress::TQHostAddress ()
+
    
+Creates a host address object with the IP address 0.0.0.0.
+
+
    TQHostAddress::TQHostAddress ( Q_UINT32 ip4Addr )
+
    
+Creates a host address object for the IPv4 address ip4Addr.
+
+
    TQHostAddress::TQHostAddress ( Q_UINT8 * ip6Addr )
+
    
+Creates a host address object with the specified IPv6 address.
+
     ip6Addr must be a 16 byte array in network byte order
+(high-order byte first).
+
+
    TQHostAddress::TQHostAddress ( const Q_IPV6ADDR & ip6Addr )
+
    
+Creates a host address object with the IPv6 address, ip6Addr.
+
+
    TQHostAddress::TQHostAddress ( const TQHostAddress & address )
+
    
+Creates a copy of address.
+
+
    TQHostAddress::~TQHostAddress () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the host address object.
+
+
    Q_UINT32 TQHostAddress::ip4Addr () const
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Use toIPv4Address() instead.
+
+
    bool TQHostAddress::isIPv4Address () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the host address represents an IPv4 address;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQHostAddress::isIPv6Address () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the host address represents an IPv6 address;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQHostAddress::isIp4Addr () const
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Use isIPv4Address() instead.
+
+
    bool TQHostAddress::isNull () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this host address is null (INADDR_ANY or in6addr_any). The
+default constructor creates a null address, and that address isn't valid
+for any particular host or interface.
+
+
    TQHostAddress & TQHostAddress::operator= ( const TQHostAddress & address )
+
    
+Assigns another host address object address to this object and
+returns a reference to this object.
+
+
    bool TQHostAddress::operator== ( const TQHostAddress & other ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this host address is the same as other;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    void TQHostAddress::setAddress ( Q_UINT32 ip4Addr )
+
    
+Set the IPv4 address specified by ip4Addr.
+
+
    void TQHostAddress::setAddress ( Q_UINT8 * ip6Addr )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Set the IPv6 address specified by ip6Addr.
+
     ip6Addr must be a 16 byte array in network byte order
+(high-order byte first).
+
+
    bool TQHostAddress::setAddress ( const TQString & address )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the IPv4 or IPv6 address specified by the string
+representation address (e.g. "127.0.0.1"). Returns TRUE and
+sets the address if the address was successfully parsed; otherwise
+returns FALSE and leaves the address unchanged.
+
+
    Q_UINT32 TQHostAddress::toIPv4Address () const
+
    
+Returns the IPv4 address as a number.
+
     For example, if the address is 127.0.0.1, the returned value is
+2130706433 (i.e. 0x7f000001).
+
     This value is only valid when isIp4Addr() returns TRUE.
+
     
    See also toString().
+
+
    Q_IPV6ADDR TQHostAddress::toIPv6Address () const
+
    
+Returns the IPv6 address as a Q_IPV6ADDR structure. The structure
+consists of 16 unsigned characters.
+
     
    +        Q_IPV6ADDR addr = hostAddr.ip6Addr();
+        // addr.c[] contains 16 unsigned characters
+
+        for (int i = 0; i < 16; ++i) {
+            // process addr.c[i]
+        }
+    
    
+ 
+
     This value is only valid when isIPv6Address() returns TRUE.
+
     
    See also toString().
+
+
    TQString TQHostAddress::toString () const
+
    
+Returns the address as a string.
+
     For example, if the address is the IPv4 address 127.0.0.1, the
+returned string is "127.0.0.1".
+
     
    See also ip4Addr().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqhttp.html b/doc/html/ntqhttp.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5bc3db1fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqhttp.html
@@ -0,0 +1,593 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQHttp Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQHttp Class Reference
    [network module]
    
+
+
    The TQHttp class provides an implementation of the HTTP protocol.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqhttp.h>
+
    Inherits TQNetworkProtocol.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQHttp ()
      • 
+
    • TQHttp ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQHttp ( const TQString & hostname, Q_UINT16 port = 80, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • virtual ~TQHttp ()
      • 
+
    • enum State { Unconnected, HostLookup, Connecting, Sending, Reading, Connected, Closing }
      • 
+
    • enum Error { NoError, UnknownError, HostNotFound, ConnectionRefused, UnexpectedClose, InvalidResponseHeader, WrongContentLength, Aborted }
      • 
+
    • int setHost ( const TQString & hostname, Q_UINT16 port = 80 )
      • 
+
    • int get ( const TQString & path, TQIODevice * to = 0 )
      • 
+
    • int post ( const TQString & path, TQIODevice * data, TQIODevice * to = 0 )
      • 
+
    • int post ( const TQString & path, const TQByteArray & data, TQIODevice * to = 0 )
      • 
+
    • int head ( const TQString & path )
      • 
+
    • int request ( const TQHttpRequestHeader & header, TQIODevice * data = 0, TQIODevice * to = 0 )
      • 
+
    • int request ( const TQHttpRequestHeader & header, const TQByteArray & data, TQIODevice * to = 0 )
      • 
+
    • int closeConnection ()
      • 
+
    • Q_ULONG bytesAvailable () const
      • 
+
    • Q_LONG readBlock ( char * data, Q_ULONG maxlen )
      • 
+
    • TQByteArray readAll ()
      • 
+
    • int currentId () const
      • 
+
    • TQIODevice * currentSourceDevice () const
      • 
+
    • TQIODevice * currentDestinationDevice () const
      • 
+
    • TQHttpRequestHeader currentRequest () const
      • 
+
    • bool hasPendingRequests () const
      • 
+
    • void clearPendingRequests ()
      • 
+
    • State state () const
      • 
+
    • Error error () const
      • 
+
    • TQString errorString () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQHttp class provides an implementation of the HTTP protocol.
+
+
     
+
+
     This class provides two different interfaces: one is the
+TQNetworkProtocol interface that allows you to use HTTP through the
+TQUrlOperator abstraction. The other is a direct interface to HTTP
+that allows you to have more control over the requests and that
+allows you to access the response header fields.
+
     Don't mix the two interfaces, since the behavior is not
+well-defined.
+
     If you want to use TQHttp with the TQNetworkProtocol interface, you
+do not use it directly, but rather through a TQUrlOperator, for
+example:
+
     
    +    TQUrlOperator op( "http://www.trolltech.com" );
+    op.get( "index.html" );
+    
    
+ 
+
     This code will only work if the TQHttp class is registered; to
+register the class, you must call qInitNetworkProtocols() before
+using a TQUrlOperator with HTTP.
+
     The TQNetworkProtocol interface for HTTP only supports the
+operations operationGet() and operationPut(), i.e.
+TQUrlOperator::get() and TQUrlOperator::put(), if you use it with a
+TQUrlOperator.
+
     The rest of this descrption describes the direct interface to
+HTTP.
+
     The class works asynchronously, so there are no blocking
+functions. If an operation cannot be executed immediately, the
+function will still return straight away and the operation will be
+scheduled for later execution. The results of scheduled operations
+are reported via signals. This approach depends on the event loop
+being in operation.
+
     The operations that can be scheduled (they are called "requests"
+in the rest of the documentation) are the following: setHost(),
+get(), post(), head() and request().
+
     All of these requests return a unique identifier that allows you
+to keep track of the request that is currently executed. When the
+execution of a request starts, the requestStarted() signal with
+the identifier is emitted and when the request is finished, the
+requestFinished() signal is emitted with the identifier and a bool
+that indicates if the request finished with an error.
+
     To make an HTTP request you must set up suitable HTTP headers. The
+following example demonstrates, how to request the main HTML page
+from the Trolltech home page (i.e. the URL
+http://www.trolltech.com/index.html):
+
     
    +    TQHttpRequestHeader header( "GET", "/index.html" );
+    header.setValue( "Host", "www.trolltech.com" );
+    http->setHost( "www.trolltech.com" );
+    http->request( header );
+    
    
+ 
+
     For the common HTTP requests GET, POST and HEAD, TQHttp
+provides the convenience functions get(), post() and head(). They
+already use a reasonable header and if you don't have to set
+special header fields, they are easier to use. The above example
+can also be written as:
+
     
    +    http->setHost( "www.trolltech.com" ); // id == 1
+    http->get( "/index.html" );           // id == 2
+    
    
+ 
+
     For this example the following sequence of signals is emitted
+(with small variations, depending on network traffic, etc.):
+
     
    +    requestStarted( 1 )
+    requestFinished( 1, FALSE )
+
+    requestStarted( 2 )
+    stateChanged( Connecting )
+    stateChanged( Sending )
+    dataSendProgress( 77, 77 )
+    stateChanged( Reading )
+    responseHeaderReceived( responseheader )
+    dataReadProgress( 5388, 0 )
+    readyRead( responseheader )
+    dataReadProgress( 18300, 0 )
+    readyRead( responseheader )
+    stateChanged( Connected )
+    requestFinished( 2, FALSE )
+
+    done( FALSE )
+
+    stateChanged( Closing )
+    stateChanged( Unconnected )
+    
    
+ 
+
     The dataSendProgress() and dataReadProgress() signals in the above
+example are useful if you want to show a progressbar to inform the user about the progress of the
+download. The second argument is the total size of data. In
+certain cases it is not possible to know the total amount in
+advance, in which case the second argument is 0. (If you connect
+to a TQProgressBar a total of 0 results in a busy indicator.)
+
     When the response header is read, it is reported with the
+responseHeaderReceived() signal.
+
     The readyRead() signal tells you that there is data ready to be
+read. The amount of data can then be queried with the
+bytesAvailable() function and it can be read with the readBlock()
+or readAll() functions.
+
     If an error occurs during the execution of one of the commands in
+a sequence of commands, all the pending commands (i.e. scheduled,
+but not yet executed commands) are cleared and no signals are
+emitted for them.
+
     For example, if you have the following sequence of reqeusts
+
     
    +    http->setHost( "www.foo.bar" );       // id == 1
+    http->get( "/index.html" );           // id == 2
+    http->post( "register.html", data );  // id == 3
+    
    
+ 
+
     and the get() request fails because the host lookup fails, then
+the post() request is never executed and the signals would look
+like this:
+
     
    +    requestStarted( 1 )
+    requestFinished( 1, FALSE )
+
+    requestStarted( 2 )
+    stateChanged( HostLookup )
+    requestFinished( 2, TRUE )
+
+    done( TRUE )
+
+    stateChanged( Unconnected )
+    
    
+ 
+
     You can then get details about the error with the error() and
+errorString() functions. Note that only unexpected behaviour, like
+network failure is considered as an error. If the server response
+contains an error status, like a 404 response, this is reported as
+a normal response case. So you should always check the status code of the
+response header.
+
     The functions currentId() and currentRequest() provide more
+information about the currently executing request.
+
     The functions hasPendingRequests() and clearPendingRequests()
+allow you to query and clear the list of pending requests.
+
     
    See also TQt Network Documentation, TQNetworkProtocol, TQUrlOperator, TQFtp, and Input/Output and Networking.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQHttp::Error
      
+
     This enum identifies the error that occurred.
+
      
+
    • TQHttp::NoError - No error occurred.
+
    • TQHttp::HostNotFound - The host name lookup failed.
+
    • TQHttp::ConnectionRefused - The server refused the connection.
+
    • TQHttp::UnexpectedClose - The server closed the connection unexpectedly.
+
    • TQHttp::InvalidResponseHeader - The server sent an invalid response header.
+
    • TQHttp::WrongContentLength - The client could not read the content correctly
+because an error with respect to the content length occurred.
+
    • TQHttp::Aborted - The request was aborted with abort().
+
    • TQHttp::UnknownError - An error other than those specified above
+occurred.
+
     
    See also error().
+
+
    TQHttp::State
    
+
+
     This enum is used to specify the state the client is in:
+
      
+
    • TQHttp::Unconnected - There is no connection to the host.
+
    • TQHttp::HostLookup - A host name lookup is in progress.
+
    • TQHttp::Connecting - An attempt to connect to the host is in progress.
+
    • TQHttp::Sending - The client is sending its request to the server.
+
    • TQHttp::Reading - The client's request has been sent and the client
+is reading the server's response.
+
    • TQHttp::Connected - The connection to the host is open, but the client is
+neither sending a request, nor waiting for a response.
+
    • TQHttp::Closing - The connection is closing down, but is not yet
+closed. (The state will be Unconnected when the connection is
+closed.)
+
     
    See also stateChanged() and state().
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQHttp::TQHttp ()
+
    
+Constructs a TQHttp object.
+
+
    TQHttp::TQHttp ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a TQHttp object. The parameters parent and name
+are passed on to the TQObject constructor.
+
+
    TQHttp::TQHttp ( const TQString & hostname, Q_UINT16 port = 80, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a TQHttp object. Subsequent requests are done by
+connecting to the server hostname on port port. The
+parameters parent and name are passed on to the TQObject
+constructor.
+
     
    See also setHost().
+
+
    TQHttp::~TQHttp () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the TQHttp object. If there is an open connection, it is
+closed.
+
+
    void TQHttp::abort () [slot]
+
    
+Aborts the current request and deletes all scheduled requests.
+
     For the current request, the requestFinished() signal with the error argument TRUE is emitted. For all other requests that are
+affected by the abort(), no signals are emitted.
+
     Since this slot also deletes the scheduled requests, there are no
+requests left and the done() signal is emitted (with the error
+argument TRUE).
+
     
    See also clearPendingRequests().
+
+
    Q_ULONG TQHttp::bytesAvailable () const
+
    
+Returns the number of bytes that can be read from the response
+content at the moment.
+
     
    See also get(), post(), request(), readyRead(), readBlock(), and readAll().
+
+
    void TQHttp::clearPendingRequests ()
+
    
+Deletes all pending requests from the list of scheduled requests.
+This does not affect the request that is being executed. If
+you want to stop this this as well, use abort().
+
     
    See also hasPendingRequests() and abort().
+
+
    int TQHttp::closeConnection ()
+
    
+Closes the connection; this is useful if you have a keep-alive
+connection and want to close it.
+
     For the requests issued with get(), post() and head(), TQHttp sets
+the connection to be keep-alive. You can also do this using the
+header you pass to the request() function. TQHttp only closes the
+connection to the HTTP server if the response header requires it
+to do so.
+
     The function does not block and returns immediately. The request
+is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
+function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
+requestStarted() and requestFinished().
+
     When the request is started the requestStarted() signal is
+emitted. When it is finished the requestFinished() signal is
+emitted.
+
     If you want to close the connection immediately, you have to use
+abort() instead.
+
     
    See also stateChanged(), abort(), requestStarted(), requestFinished(), and done().
+
+
    TQIODevice * TQHttp::currentDestinationDevice () const
+
    
+Returns the TQIODevice pointer that is used as to store the data of the HTTP
+request being executed. If there is no current request or if the request
+does not store the data to an IO device, this function returns 0.
+
     This function can be used to delete the TQIODevice in the slot connected to
+the requestFinished() signal.
+
     
    See also get(), post(), and request().
+
+
    int TQHttp::currentId () const
+
    
+Returns the identifier of the HTTP request being executed or 0 if
+there is no request being executed (i.e. they've all finished).
+
     
    See also currentRequest().
+
+
    TQHttpRequestHeader TQHttp::currentRequest () const
+
    
+Returns the request header of the HTTP request being executed. If
+the request is one issued by setHost() or closeConnection(), it
+returns an invalid request header, i.e.
+TQHttpRequestHeader::isValid() returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also currentId().
+
+
    TQIODevice * TQHttp::currentSourceDevice () const
+
    
+Returns the TQIODevice pointer that is used as the data source of the HTTP
+request being executed. If there is no current request or if the request
+does not use an IO device as the data source, this function returns 0.
+
     This function can be used to delete the TQIODevice in the slot connected to
+the requestFinished() signal.
+
     
    See also currentDestinationDevice(), post(), and request().
+
+
    void TQHttp::dataReadProgress ( int done, int total ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when this object reads data from a HTTP
+server to indicate the current progress of the download.
+
     done is the amount of data that has already arrived and total is the total amount of data. It is possible that the total
+amount of data that should be transferred cannot be determined, in
+which case total is 0.(If you connect to a TQProgressBar, the
+progress bar shows a busy indicator if the total is 0).
+
     Warning: done and total are not necessarily the size in
+bytes, since for large files these values might need to be
+"scaled" to avoid overflow.
+
     
    See also dataSendProgress(), get(), post(), request(), and TQProgressBar::progress.
+
+
    void TQHttp::dataSendProgress ( int done, int total ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when this object sends data to a HTTP
+server to inform it about the progress of the upload.
+
     done is the amount of data that has already arrived and total is the total amount of data. It is possible that the total
+amount of data that should be transferred cannot be determined, in
+which case total is 0.(If you connect to a TQProgressBar, the
+progress bar shows a busy indicator if the total is 0).
+
     Warning: done and total are not necessarily the size in
+bytes, since for large files these values might need to be
+"scaled" to avoid overflow.
+
     
    See also dataReadProgress(), post(), request(), and TQProgressBar::progress.
+
+
    void TQHttp::done ( bool error ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the last pending request has finished;
+(it is emitted after the last request's requestFinished() signal).
+error is TRUE if an error occurred during the processing;
+otherwise error is FALSE.
+
     
    See also requestFinished(), error(), and errorString().
+
+
    Error TQHttp::error () const
+
    
+Returns the last error that occurred. This is useful to find out
+what happened when receiving a requestFinished() or a done()
+signal with the error argument TRUE.
+
     If you start a new request, the error status is reset to NoError.
+
+
    TQString TQHttp::errorString () const
+
    
+Returns a human-readable description of the last error that
+occurred. This is useful to present a error message to the user
+when receiving a requestFinished() or a done() signal with the error argument TRUE.
+
+
    int TQHttp::get ( const TQString & path, TQIODevice * to = 0 )
+
    
+Sends a get request for path to the server set by setHost() or
+as specified in the constructor.
+
     path must be an absolute path like /index.html or an
+absolute URI like http://www.trolltech.com/index.html.
+
     If the IO device to is 0 the readyRead() signal is emitted
+every time new content data is available to read.
+
     If the IO device to is not 0, the content data of the response
+is written directly to the device. Make sure that the to
+pointer is valid for the duration of the operation (it is safe to
+delete it when the requestFinished() signal is emitted).
+
     The function does not block and returns immediately. The request
+is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
+function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
+requestStarted() and requestFinished().
+
     When the request is started the requestStarted() signal is
+emitted. When it is finished the requestFinished() signal is
+emitted.
+
     
    See also setHost(), post(), head(), request(), requestStarted(), requestFinished(), and done().
+
+
    bool TQHttp::hasPendingRequests () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if there are any requests scheduled that have not yet
+been executed; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     The request that is being executed is not considered as a
+scheduled request.
+
     
    See also clearPendingRequests(), currentId(), and currentRequest().
+
+
    int TQHttp::head ( const TQString & path )
+
    
+Sends a header request for path to the server set by setHost()
+or as specified in the constructor.
+
     path must be an absolute path like /index.html or an
+absolute URI like http://www.trolltech.com/index.html.
+
     The function does not block and returns immediately. The request
+is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
+function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
+requestStarted() and requestFinished().
+
     When the request is started the requestStarted() signal is
+emitted. When it is finished the requestFinished() signal is
+emitted.
+
     
    See also setHost(), get(), post(), request(), requestStarted(), requestFinished(), and done().
+
+
    int TQHttp::post ( const TQString & path, TQIODevice * data, TQIODevice * to = 0 )
+
    
+Sends a post request for path to the server set by setHost() or
+as specified in the constructor.
+
     path must be an absolute path like /index.html or an
+absolute URI like http://www.trolltech.com/index.html.
+
     The incoming data comes via the data IO device.
+
     If the IO device to is 0 the readyRead() signal is emitted
+every time new content data is available to read.
+
     If the IO device to is not 0, the content data of the response
+is written directly to the device. Make sure that the to
+pointer is valid for the duration of the operation (it is safe to
+delete it when the requestFinished() signal is emitted).
+
     The function does not block and returns immediately. The request
+is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
+function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
+requestStarted() and requestFinished().
+
     When the request is started the requestStarted() signal is
+emitted. When it is finished the requestFinished() signal is
+emitted.
+
     
    See also setHost(), get(), head(), request(), requestStarted(), requestFinished(), and done().
+
+
    int TQHttp::post ( const TQString & path, const TQByteArray & data, TQIODevice * to = 0 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     data is used as the content data of the HTTP request.
+
+
    TQByteArray TQHttp::readAll ()
+
    
+Reads all the bytes from the response content and returns them.
+
     
    See also get(), post(), request(), readyRead(), bytesAvailable(), and readBlock().
+
+
    Q_LONG TQHttp::readBlock ( char * data, Q_ULONG maxlen )
+
    
+Reads maxlen bytes from the response content into data and
+returns the number of bytes read. Returns -1 if an error occurred.
+
     
    See also get(), post(), request(), readyRead(), bytesAvailable(), and readAll().
+
+
    void TQHttp::readyRead ( const TQHttpResponseHeader & resp ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when there is new response data to read.
+
     If you specified a device in the request where the data should be
+written to, then this signal is not emitted; instead the data
+is written directly to the device.
+
     The response header is passed in resp.
+
     You can read the data with the readAll() or readBlock() functions
+
     This signal is useful if you want to process the data in chunks as
+soon as it becomes available. If you are only interested in the
+complete data, just connect to the requestFinished() signal and
+read the data then instead.
+
     
    See also get(), post(), request(), readAll(), readBlock(), and bytesAvailable().
+
+
    int TQHttp::request ( const TQHttpRequestHeader & header, TQIODevice * data = 0, TQIODevice * to = 0 )
+
    
+Sends a request to the server set by setHost() or as specified in
+the constructor. Uses the header as the HTTP request header.
+You are responsible for setting up a header that is appropriate
+for your request.
+
     The incoming data comes via the data IO device.
+
     If the IO device to is 0 the readyRead() signal is emitted
+every time new content data is available to read.
+
     If the IO device to is not 0, the content data of the response
+is written directly to the device. Make sure that the to
+pointer is valid for the duration of the operation (it is safe to
+delete it when the requestFinished() signal is emitted).
+
     The function does not block and returns immediately. The request
+is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
+function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
+requestStarted() and requestFinished().
+
     When the request is started the requestStarted() signal is
+emitted. When it is finished the requestFinished() signal is
+emitted.
+
     
    See also setHost(), get(), post(), head(), requestStarted(), requestFinished(), and done().
+
+
    int TQHttp::request ( const TQHttpRequestHeader & header, const TQByteArray & data, TQIODevice * to = 0 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     data is used as the content data of the HTTP request.
+
+
    void TQHttp::requestFinished ( int id, bool error ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when processing the request identified by
+id has finished. error is TRUE if an error occurred during
+the processing; otherwise error is FALSE.
+
     
    See also requestStarted(), done(), error(), and errorString().
+
+
    void TQHttp::requestStarted ( int id ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when processing the request identified by
+id starts.
+
     
    See also requestFinished() and done().
+
+
    void TQHttp::responseHeaderReceived ( const TQHttpResponseHeader & resp ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the HTTP header of a server response
+is available. The header is passed in resp.
+
     
    See also get(), post(), head(), request(), and readyRead().
+
+
    int TQHttp::setHost ( const TQString & hostname, Q_UINT16 port = 80 )
+
    
+Sets the HTTP server that is used for requests to hostname on
+port port.
+
     The function does not block and returns immediately. The request
+is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
+function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
+requestStarted() and requestFinished().
+
     When the request is started the requestStarted() signal is
+emitted. When it is finished the requestFinished() signal is
+emitted.
+
     
    See also get(), post(), head(), request(), requestStarted(), requestFinished(), and done().
+
+
    State TQHttp::state () const
+
    
+Returns the current state of the object. When the state changes,
+the stateChanged() signal is emitted.
+
     
    See also State and stateChanged().
+
+
    void TQHttp::stateChanged ( int state ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the state of the TQHttp object changes.
+The argument state is the new state of the connection; it is
+one of the State values.
+
     This usually happens when a request is started, but it can also
+happen when the server closes the connection or when a call to
+closeConnection() succeeded.
+
     
    See also get(), post(), head(), request(), closeConnection(), state(), and State.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqiconset.html b/doc/html/ntqiconset.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..21152bb9b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqiconset.html
@@ -0,0 +1,328 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQIconSet Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQIconSet Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQIconSet class provides a set of icons with different
+styles and sizes.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqiconset.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • enum Size { Automatic, Small, Large }
      • 
+
    • enum Mode { Normal, Disabled, Active }
      • 
+
    • enum State { On, Off }
      • 
+
    • TQIconSet ()
      • 
+
    • TQIconSet ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, Size size = Automatic )
      • 
+
    • TQIconSet ( const TQPixmap & smallPix, const TQPixmap & largePix )
      • 
+
    • TQIconSet ( const TQIconSet & other )
      • 
+
    • virtual ~TQIconSet ()
      • 
+
    • void reset ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, Size size )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, Size size, Mode mode = Normal, State state = Off )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setPixmap ( const TQString & fileName, Size size, Mode mode = Normal, State state = Off )
      • 
+
    • TQPixmap pixmap ( Size size, Mode mode, State state = Off ) const
      • 
+
    • TQPixmap pixmap ( Size size, bool enabled, State state = Off ) const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • TQPixmap pixmap () const
      • 
+
    • bool isGenerated ( Size size, Mode mode, State state = Off ) const
      • 
+
    • void clearGenerated ()
      • 
+
    • void installIconFactory ( TQIconFactory * factory )
      • 
+
    • bool isNull () const
      • 
+
    • void detach ()
      • 
+
    • TQIconSet & operator= ( const TQIconSet & other )
      • 
+
    
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • void setIconSize ( Size which, const TQSize & size )
      • 
+
    • const TQSize & iconSize ( Size which )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+ 
+
     The TQIconSet class provides a set of icons with different
+styles and sizes.
+
     
+
+
+
+
     A TQIconSet can generate smaller, larger, active, and disabled pixmaps
+from the set of icons it is given. Such pixmaps are used by
+TQToolButton, TQHeader, TQPopupMenu, etc. to show an icon representing a
+particular action.
+
     The simplest use of TQIconSet is to create one from a TQPixmap and then
+use it, allowing TQt to work out all the required icon styles and
+sizes. For example:
+
     
    +    TQToolButton *but = new TQToolButton( TQIconSet( TQPixmap("open.xpm") ), ... );
+  
    
+ 
+
     Using whichever pixmaps you specify as a base, TQIconSet provides a
+set of six icons, each with a Size and a Mode: Small Normal,
+Small Disabled, Small Active, Large Normal, Large Disabled, and
+Large Active.
+
     An additional set of six icons can be provided for widgets that have
+an "On" or "Off" state, like checkable menu items or toggleable
+toolbuttons. If you provide pixmaps for the "On" state, but not for
+the "Off" state, the TQIconSet will provide the "Off" pixmaps. You may
+specify icons for both states in you wish.
+
     You can set any of the icons using setPixmap().
+
     When you retrieve a pixmap using pixmap(Size, Mode, State),
+TQIconSet will return the icon that has been set or previously
+generated for that size, mode and state combination. If none is
+available, TQIconSet will ask the icon factory. If the icon factory
+cannot provide any (the default), TQIconSet generates a pixmap based
+on the pixmaps it has been given and returns it.
+
     The Disabled appearance is computed using an algorithm that
+produces results very similar to those used in Microsoft Windows
+95. The Active appearance is identical to the Normal
+appearance unless you use setPixmap() to set it to something
+special.
+
     When scaling icons, TQIconSet uses smooth scaling, which can partially blend the color component
+of pixmaps.  If the results look poor, the best solution
+is to supply pixmaps in both large and small sizes.
+
     You can use the static function setIconSize() to set the preferred
+size of the generated large/small icons. The default small size is
+22 x 22, while the default large size is 32 x 32. These sizes only
+affect generated icons.
+
     The isGenerated() function returns TRUE if an icon was generated by
+TQIconSet or by a factory; clearGenerated() clears all cached
+pixmaps.
+
     
     Making Classes that Use TQIconSet
+
    
+
     If you write your own widgets that have an option to set a small
+pixmap, consider allowing a TQIconSet to be set for that pixmap.  The
+TQt class TQToolButton is an example of such a widget.
+
     Provide a method to set a TQIconSet, and when you draw the icon, choose
+whichever icon is appropriate for the current state of your widget.
+For example:
+
    +    void MyWidget::drawIcon( TQPainter* p, TQPoint pos )
+    {
+        p->drawPixmap( pos, icons->pixmap(
+                                TQIconSet::Small,
+                                isEnabled() ? TQIconSet::Normal :
+                                              TQIconSet::Disabled,
+                                isEnabled() ? TQIconSet::On :
+                                              TQIconSet::Off));
+    }
+  
    
+ 
+
     You might also make use of the Active mode, perhaps making your
+widget Active when the mouse is over the widget (see TQWidget::enterEvent()), while the mouse is pressed pending the
+release that will activate the function, or when it is the currently
+selected item. If the widget can be toggled, the "On" mode might be
+used to draw a different icon.
+
     
    TQIconSet
     
+
     
    See also TQIconFactory, TQPixmap, TQMainWindow::usesBigPixmaps, GUI Design Handbook: Iconic Label, Graphics Classes, Image Processing Classes, and Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQIconSet::Mode
    
+
+
     This enum type describes the mode for which a pixmap is intended to be
+used.
+The currently defined modes are:
+
      
+
    • TQIconSet::Normal - 
+Display the pixmap when the user is
+not interacting with the icon, but the
+functionality represented by the icon is available.
+
    • TQIconSet::Disabled - 
+Display the pixmap when the
+functionality represented by the icon is not available.
+
    • TQIconSet::Active - 
+Display the pixmap when the
+functionality represented by the icon is available and
+the user is interacting with the icon, for example, moving the
+mouse over it or clicking it.
+
    
+
    TQIconSet::Size
    
+
+
     This enum type describes the size at which a pixmap is intended to be
+used.
+The currently defined sizes are:
+
      
+
    • TQIconSet::Automatic - The size of the pixmap is determined from its
+pixel size. This is a useful default.
+
    • TQIconSet::Small - The pixmap is the smaller of two.
+
    • TQIconSet::Large - The pixmap is the larger of two.
+
     If a Small pixmap is not set by TQIconSet::setPixmap(), the Large
+pixmap will be automatically scaled down to the size of a small pixmap
+to generate the Small pixmap when required.  Similarly, a Small pixmap
+will be automatically scaled up to generate a Large pixmap. The
+preferred sizes for large/small generated icons can be set using
+setIconSize().
+
     
    See also setIconSize(), iconSize(), setPixmap(), pixmap(), and TQMainWindow::usesBigPixmaps.
+
+
    TQIconSet::State
    
+
+
     This enum describes the state for which a pixmap is intended to be
+used. The state can be:
+
      
+
    • TQIconSet::Off - Display the pixmap when the widget is in an "off" state
+
    • TQIconSet::On - Display the pixmap when the widget is in an "on" state
+
     
    See also setPixmap() and pixmap().
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQIconSet::TQIconSet ()
+
    
+Constructs a null icon set.
+
     
    See also setPixmap() and reset().
+
+
    TQIconSet::TQIconSet ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, Size size = Automatic )
+
    
+Constructs an icon set for which the Normal pixmap is pixmap,
+which is assumed to be of size size.
+
     The default for size is Automatic, which means that TQIconSet
+will determine whether the pixmap is Small or Large from its pixel
+size. Pixmaps less than the width of a small generated icon are
+considered to be Small. You can use setIconSize() to set the
+preferred size of a generated icon.
+
     
    See also setIconSize() and reset().
+
+
    TQIconSet::TQIconSet ( const TQPixmap & smallPix, const TQPixmap & largePix )
+
      Creates an iconset which uses the pixmap smallPix for for
+displaying a small icon, and the pixmap largePix for displaying a
+large icon.
+
+
    TQIconSet::TQIconSet ( const TQIconSet & other )
+
    
+Constructs a copy of other. This is very fast.
+
+
    TQIconSet::~TQIconSet () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the icon set and frees any allocated resources.
+
+
    void TQIconSet::clearGenerated ()
+
    
+Clears all cached pixmaps, including those obtained from an
+eventual TQIconFactory.
+
+
    void TQIconSet::detach ()
+
    
+Detaches this icon set from others with which it may share data.
+
     You will never need to call this function; other TQIconSet functions
+call it as necessary.
+
+
    const TQSize & TQIconSet::iconSize ( Size which ) [static]
+
    
+If which is Small, returns the preferred size of a small
+generated icon; if which is Large, returns the preferred size
+of a large generated icon.
+
     
    See also setIconSize().
+
+
    void TQIconSet::installIconFactory ( TQIconFactory * factory )
+
    
+Installs factory as the icon factory for this iconset. The
+icon factory is used to generates pixmaps not set by the user.
+
     If no icon factory is installed, TQIconFactory::defaultFactory()
+is used.
+
+
    bool TQIconSet::isGenerated ( Size size, Mode mode, State state = Off ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the pixmap with size size, mode mode and
+state state is generated from other pixmaps; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     A pixmap obtained from a TQIconFactory is considered non-generated.
+
+
    bool TQIconSet::isNull () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the icon set is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    TQIconSet & TQIconSet::operator= ( const TQIconSet & other )
+
    
+Assigns other to this icon set and returns a reference to this
+icon set.
+
     
    See also detach().
+
+
    TQPixmap TQIconSet::pixmap ( Size size, Mode mode, State state = Off ) const
+
    
+Returns a pixmap with size size, mode mode and state state, generating one if necessary. Generated pixmaps are cached.
+
+
    TQPixmap TQIconSet::pixmap ( Size size, bool enabled, State state = Off ) const
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     This is the same as pixmap(size, enabled, state).
+
+
    TQPixmap TQIconSet::pixmap () const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the pixmap originally provided to the constructor or to
+reset(). This is the Normal pixmap of unspecified Size.
+
     
    See also reset().
+
+
    void TQIconSet::reset ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, Size size )
+
    
+Sets this icon set to use pixmap pixmap for the Normal pixmap,
+assuming it to be of size size.
+
     This is equivalent to assigning TQIconSet(pixmap, size) to this
+icon set.
+
     This function does nothing if pixmap is a null pixmap.
+
+
    void TQIconSet::setIconSize ( Size which, const TQSize & size ) [static]
+
    
+Set the preferred size for all small or large icons that are
+generated after this call. If which is Small, sets the preferred
+size of small generated icons to size. Similarly, if which is
+Large, sets the preferred size of large generated icons to size.
+
     Note that cached icons will not be regenerated, so it is recommended
+that you set the preferred icon sizes before generating any icon sets.
+Also note that the preferred icon sizes will be ignored for icon sets
+that have been created using both small and large pixmaps.
+
     
    See also iconSize().
+
+
    void TQIconSet::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, Size size, Mode mode = Normal, State state = Off ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets this icon set to provide pixmap pixmap for size size, mode mode and state state. The icon set may also use pixmap for
+generating other pixmaps if they are not explicitly set.
+
     The size can be one of Automatic, Large or Small.  If Automatic is
+used, TQIconSet will determine if the pixmap is Small or Large from its
+pixel size.
+
     Pixmaps less than the width of a small generated icon are
+considered to be Small. You can use setIconSize() to set the preferred
+size of a generated icon.
+
     This function does nothing if pixmap is a null pixmap.
+
     
    See also reset().
+
+
    void TQIconSet::setPixmap ( const TQString & fileName, Size size, Mode mode = Normal, State state = Off ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     The pixmap is loaded from fileName when it becomes necessary.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqiconview.html b/doc/html/ntqiconview.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0e4056622
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqiconview.html
@@ -0,0 +1,1009 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQIconView Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQIconView Class Reference
    [iconview module]
    
+
+
    The TQIconView class provides an area with movable labelled icons.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqiconview.h>
+
    Inherits TQScrollView.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • Arrangement arrangement - the arrangement mode of the icon view
      • 
+
    • bool autoArrange - whether the icon view rearranges its items when a new item is inserted
      • 
+
    • uint count - the number of items in the icon view  (read only)
      • 
+
    • int gridX - the horizontal grid of the icon view
      • 
+
    • int gridY - the vertical grid of the icon view
      • 
+
    • TQBrush itemTextBackground - the brush to use when drawing the background of an item's text
      • 
+
    • ItemTextPos itemTextPos - the position where the text of each item is drawn
      • 
+
    • bool itemsMovable - whether the user is allowed to move items around in the icon view
      • 
+
    • int maxItemTextLength - the maximum length (in characters) that an item's text may have
      • 
+
    • int maxItemWidth - the maximum width that an item may have
      • 
+
    • ResizeMode resizeMode - the resize mode of the icon view
      • 
+
    • SelectionMode selectionMode - the selection mode of the icon view
      • 
+
    • bool showToolTips - whether the icon view will display a tool tip with the complete text for any truncated item text
      • 
+
    • bool sortDirection - whether the sort direction for inserting new items is ascending;  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool sorting - whether the icon view sorts on insertion  (read only)
      • 
+
    • int spacing - the space in pixels between icon view items
      • 
+
    • bool wordWrapIconText - whether the item text will be word-wrapped if it is too long
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Protected Slots
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQIconView class provides an area with movable labelled icons.
+
     
+
+
+
     A TQIconView can display and manage a grid or other 2D layout of
+labelled icons. Each labelled icon is a TQIconViewItem. Items
+(TQIconViewItems) can be added or deleted at any time; items can be
+moved within the TQIconView. Single or multiple items can be
+selected. Items can be renamed in-place. TQIconView also supports
+drag and drop.
+
     Each item contains a label string, a pixmap or picture (the icon
+itself) and optionally a sort key. The sort key is used for
+sorting the items and defaults to the label string. The label
+string can be displayed below or to the right of the icon (see ItemTextPos).
+
     The simplest way to create a TQIconView is to create a TQIconView
+object and create some TQIconViewItems with the TQIconView as their
+parent, set the icon view's geometry and show it.
+For example:
+
    +    TQIconView *iv = new TQIconView( this );
+    TQDir dir( path, "*.xpm" );
+    for ( uint i = 0; i < dir.count(); i++ ) {
+        (void) new TQIconViewItem( iv, dir[i], TQPixmap( path + dir[i] ) );
+    }
+    iv->resize( 600, 400 );
+    iv->show();
+    
    
+ 
+
     The TQIconViewItem call passes a pointer to the TQIconView we wish to
+populate, along with the label text and a TQPixmap.
+
     When an item is inserted the TQIconView allocates a position for it.
+Existing items are rearranged if autoArrange() is TRUE. The
+default arrangement is LeftToRight -- the TQIconView fills up
+the left-most column from top to bottom, then moves one column
+right and fills that from top to bottom and so on. The
+arrangement can be modified with any of the following approaches:
+
      
+
    •  Call setArrangement(), e.g. with TopToBottom which will fill
+the top-most row from left to right, then moves one row down
+and fills that row from left to right and so on.
+
    •  Construct each TQIconViewItem using a constructor which allows
+you to specify which item the new one is to follow.
+
    •  Call setSorting() or sort() to sort the items.
+
    
+
     The spacing between items is set with setSpacing(). Items can be
+laid out using a fixed grid using setGridX() and setGridY(); by
+default the TQIconView calculates a grid dynamically. The position
+of items' label text is set with setItemTextPos(). The text's
+background can be set with setItemTextBackground(). The maximum
+width of an item and of its text are set with setMaxItemWidth()
+and setMaxItemTextLength(). The label text will be word-wrapped if
+it is too long; this is controlled by setWordWrapIconText(). If
+the label text is truncated, the user can still see the entire
+text in a tool tip if they hover the mouse over the item. This is
+controlled with setShowToolTips().
+
     Items which are selectable may be selected depending on the SelectionMode;
+the default is Single. Because TQIconView offers multiple
+selection it must display keyboard focus and selection state
+separately. Therefore there are functions to set the selection
+state of an item (setSelected()) and to select which item displays
+keyboard focus (setCurrentItem()). When multiple items may be
+selected the icon view provides a rubberband, too.
+
     When in-place renaming is enabled (it is disabled by default), the
+user may change the item's label. They do this by selecting the item
+(single clicking it or navigating to it with the arrow keys), then
+single clicking it (or pressing F2), and entering their text. If no
+key has been set with TQIconViewItem::setKey() the new text will also
+serve as the key. (See TQIconViewItem::setRenameEnabled().)
+
     You can control whether users can move items themselves with
+setItemsMovable().
+
     Because the internal structure used to store the icon view items is
+linear, no iterator class is needed to iterate over all the items.
+Instead we iterate by getting the first item from the icon view
+and then each subsequent (TQIconViewItem::nextItem()) from each
+item in turn:
+
    +        for ( TQIconViewItem *item = iv->firstItem(); item; item = item->nextItem() )
+            do_something( item );
+    
    
+ 
+TQIconView also provides currentItem(). You can search for an item
+using findItem() (searching by position or for label text) and
+with findFirstVisibleItem() and findLastVisibleItem(). The number
+of items is returned by count(). An item can be removed from an
+icon view using takeItem(); to delete an item use delete. All
+the items can be deleted with clear().
+
     The TQIconView emits a wide range of useful signals, including
+selectionChanged(), currentChanged(), clicked(), moved() and
+itemRenamed().
+
     
+
     Drag and Drop
+
    
+
     TQIconView supports the drag and drop of items within the TQIconView
+itself. It also supports the drag and drop of items out of or into
+the TQIconView and drag and drop onto items themselves. The drag and
+drop of items outside the TQIconView can be achieved in a simple way
+with basic functionality, or in a more sophisticated way which
+provides more power and control.
+
     The simple approach to dragging items out of the icon view is to
+subclass TQIconView and reimplement TQIconView::dragObject().
+
     
    +    TQDragObject *MyIconView::dragObject()
+    {
+        return new TQTextDrag( currentItem()->text(), this );
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     In this example we create a TQTextDrag object, (derived from
+TQDragObject), containing the item's label and return it as the drag
+object. We could just as easily have created a TQImageDrag from the
+item's pixmap and returned that instead.
+
     TQIconViews and their TQIconViewItems can also be the targets of drag
+and drops. To make the TQIconView itself able to accept drops connect
+to the dropped() signal. When a drop occurs this signal will be
+emitted with a TQDragEvent and a TQValueList of TQIconDragItems. To
+make a TQIconViewItem into a drop target subclass TQIconViewItem and
+reimplement TQIconViewItem::acceptDrop() and
+TQIconViewItem::dropped().
+
     
    +    bool MyIconViewItem::acceptDrop( const TQMimeSource *mime ) const
+    {
+        if ( mime->provides( "text/plain" ) )
+            return TRUE;
+        return FALSE;
+    }
+
+    void MyIconViewItem::dropped( TQDropEvent *evt, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem>& )
+    {
+        TQString label;
+        if ( TQTextDrag::decode( evt, label ) )
+            setText( label );
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     See iconview/simple_dd/main.h and iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp for a simple drag and drop example
+which demonstrates drag and drop between a TQIconView and a
+TQListBox.
+
     If you want to use extended drag-and-drop or have drag shapes drawn
+you must take a more sophisticated approach.
+
     The first part is starting drags -- you should use a TQIconDrag (or a
+class derived from it) for the drag object. In dragObject() create the
+drag object, populate it with TQIconDragItems and return it. Normally
+such a drag should offer each selected item's data. So in dragObject()
+you should iterate over all the items, and create a TQIconDragItem for
+each selected item, and append these items with TQIconDrag::append() to
+the TQIconDrag object. You can use TQIconDragItem::setData() to set the
+data of each item that should be dragged. If you want to offer the
+data in additional mime-types, it's best to use a class derived from
+TQIconDrag, which implements additional encoding and decoding
+functions.
+
     When a drag enters the icon view, there is little to do. Simply
+connect to the dropped() signal and reimplement
+TQIconViewItem::acceptDrop() and TQIconViewItem::dropped(). If you've
+used a TQIconDrag (or a subclass of it) the second argument to the
+dropped signal contains a TQValueList of TQIconDragItems -- you can
+access their data by calling TQIconDragItem::data() on each one.
+
     For an example implementation of complex drag-and-drop look at the
+fileiconview example (qt/examples/fileiconview).
+
     
    See also TQIconViewItem::setDragEnabled(), TQIconViewItem::setDropEnabled(), TQIconViewItem::acceptDrop(), TQIconViewItem::dropped(), and Advanced Widgets.
+
+
      
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQIconView::Arrangement
    
+
+
     This enum type determines in which direction the items flow when
+the view runs out of space.
+
      
+
    • TQIconView::LeftToRight - Items which don't fit into the view cause the
+viewport to extend vertically (you get a vertical scrollbar).
+
    • TQIconView::TopToBottom - Items which don't fit into the view cause the
+viewport to extend horizontally (you get a horizontal scrollbar).
+
    
+
    TQIconView::ItemTextPos
    
+
+
     This enum type specifies the position of the item text in relation
+to the icon.
+
      
+
    • TQIconView::Bottom - The text is drawn below the icon.
+
    • TQIconView::Right - The text is drawn to the right of the icon.
+
    
+
    TQIconView::ResizeMode
     
+
     This enum type is used to tell TQIconView how it should treat the
+positions of its icons when the widget is resized. The modes are:
+
      
+
    • TQIconView::Fixed - The icons' positions are not changed.
+
    • TQIconView::Adjust - The icons' positions are adjusted to be within the
+new geometry, if possible.
+
    
+
    TQIconView::SelectionMode
    
+
+
     This enumerated type is used by TQIconView to indicate how it
+reacts to selection by the user. It has four values:
+
      
+
    • TQIconView::Single - When the user selects an item, any already-selected
+item becomes unselected and the user cannot unselect the selected
+item. This means that the user can never clear the selection. (The
+application programmer can, using TQIconView::clearSelection().)
+
    • TQIconView::Multi - When the user selects an item, e.g. by navigating
+to it with the keyboard arrow keys or by clicking it, the
+selection status of that item is toggled and the other items are
+left alone. Also, multiple items can be selected by dragging the
+mouse while the left mouse button stays pressed.
+
    • TQIconView::Extended - When the user selects an item the selection is
+cleared and the new item selected. However, if the user presses
+the Ctrl key when clicking on an item, the clicked item gets
+toggled and all other items are left untouched. If the user
+presses the Shift key while clicking on an item, all items between
+the current item and the clicked item get selected or unselected,
+depending on the state of the clicked item. Also, multiple items
+can be selected by dragging the mouse while the left mouse button
+stays pressed.
+
    • TQIconView::NoSelection - Items cannot be selected.
+
     To summarise: Single is a real single-selection icon view; Multi a real multi-selection icon view; Extended is an icon
+view in which users can select multiple items but usually want to
+select either just one or a range of contiguous items; and NoSelection mode is for an icon view where the user can look but
+not touch.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQIconView::TQIconView ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs an empty icon view called name, with parent parent and using the widget flags f.
+
+
    TQIconView::~TQIconView () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the icon view and deletes all items.
+
+
    void TQIconView::adjustItems () [virtual protected slot]
+
    
+Adjusts the positions of the items to the geometry of the icon
+view.
+
+
    void TQIconView::arrangeItemsInGrid ( const TQSize & grid, bool update = TRUE ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+This variant uses grid instead of (gridX(), gridY()). If grid is invalid (see TQSize::isValid()), arrangeItemsInGrid()
+calculates a valid grid itself and uses that.
+
     If update is TRUE (the default) the viewport is repainted.
+
+
    Example: fileiconview/qfileiconview.h.
+
    void TQIconView::arrangeItemsInGrid ( bool update = TRUE ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Arranges all the items in the grid given by gridX() and gridY().
+
     Even if sorting() is enabled, the items are not sorted by this
+function. If you want to sort or rearrange the items, use
+iconview->sort(iconview->sortDirection()).
+
     If update is TRUE (the default), the viewport is repainted as
+well.
+
     
    See also TQIconView::gridX, TQIconView::gridY, and TQIconView::sort().
+
+
    Arrangement TQIconView::arrangement () const
+
    Returns the arrangement mode of the icon view.
+See the "arrangement" property for details.
+
    bool TQIconView::autoArrange () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the icon view rearranges its items when a new item is inserted; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "autoArrange" property for details.
+
    void TQIconView::clear () [virtual]
+
    
+Clears the icon view. All items are deleted.
+
+
    void TQIconView::clearSelection () [virtual]
+
    
+Unselects all the items.
+
+
    void TQIconView::clicked ( TQIconViewItem * item ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user clicks any mouse button. If
+item is non-null, the cursor is on item. If item is null,
+the mouse cursor isn't on any item.
+
     
    See also mouseButtonClicked(), rightButtonClicked(), and pressed().
+
+
    void TQIconView::clicked ( TQIconViewItem * item, const TQPoint & pos ) [signal]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This signal is emitted when the user clicks any mouse button on an
+icon view item. item is a pointer to the item that has been
+clicked.
+
     pos is the position of the mouse cursor in the global coordinate
+system (TQMouseEvent::globalPos()). (If the click's press and release
+differ by a pixel or two, pos is the  position at release time.)
+
     
    See also mouseButtonClicked(), rightButtonClicked(), and pressed().
+
+
    void TQIconView::contextMenuRequested ( TQIconViewItem * item, const TQPoint & pos ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user invokes a context menu with
+the right mouse button or with special system keys, with item
+being the item under the mouse cursor or the current item,
+respectively.
+
     pos is the position for the context menu in the global
+coordinate system.
+
+
    uint TQIconView::count () const
+
    Returns the number of items in the icon view.
+See the "count" property for details.
+
    void TQIconView::currentChanged ( TQIconViewItem * item ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when a new item becomes current. item is
+the new current item (or 0 if no item is now current).
+
     
    See also currentItem().
+
+
    TQIconViewItem * TQIconView::currentItem () const
+
    
+Returns a pointer to the current item of the icon view, or 0 if no
+item is current.
+
     
    See also setCurrentItem(), firstItem(), and lastItem().
+
+
    void TQIconView::doAutoScroll () [virtual protected slot]
+
    
+Performs autoscrolling when selecting multiple icons with the
+rubber band.
+
+
    void TQIconView::doubleClicked ( TQIconViewItem * item ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user double-clicks on item.
+
+
    TQDragObject * TQIconView::dragObject () [virtual protected]
+
    
+Returns the TQDragObject that should be used for drag-and-drop.
+This function is called by the icon view when starting a drag to
+get the dragobject that should be used for the drag. Subclasses
+may reimplement this.
+
     
    See also TQIconDrag.
+
+
    Examples: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp and iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp.
+
    void TQIconView::drawBackground ( TQPainter * p, const TQRect & r ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This function is called to draw the rectangle r of the
+background using the painter p.
+
     The default implementation fills r with the viewport's
+backgroundBrush(). Subclasses may reimplement this to draw custom
+backgrounds.
+
     
    See also contentsX, contentsY, and drawContents().
+
+
    void TQIconView::drawRubber ( TQPainter * p ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Draws the rubber band using the painter p.
+
+
    void TQIconView::dropped ( TQDropEvent * e, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem> & lst ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when a drop event occurs in the viewport
+(but not on any icon) which the icon view itself can't handle.
+
     e provides all the information about the drop. If the drag
+object of the drop was a TQIconDrag, lst contains the list of
+the dropped items. You can get the data using
+TQIconDragItem::data() on each item. If the lst is empty, i.e.
+the drag was not a TQIconDrag, you have to decode the data in e
+and work with that.
+
     Note TQIconViewItems may be drop targets; if a drop event occurs on
+an item the item handles the drop.
+
+
    Examples: iconview/main.cpp and iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp.
+
    void TQIconView::emitSelectionChanged ( TQIconViewItem * i = 0 ) [protected]
+
    
+Emits a signal to indicate selection changes. i is the
+TQIconViewItem that was selected or de-selected.
+
     You should never need to call this function.
+
+
    void TQIconView::ensureItemVisible ( TQIconViewItem * item )
+
    
+Makes sure that item is entirely visible. If necessary,
+ensureItemVisible() scrolls the icon view.
+
     
    See also ensureVisible().
+
+
    TQIconViewItem * TQIconView::findFirstVisibleItem ( const TQRect & r ) const
+
    
+Finds the first item whose bounding rectangle overlaps r and
+returns a pointer to that item. r is given in content
+coordinates. Returns 0 if no item overlaps r.
+
     If you want to find all items that touch r, you will need to
+use this function and nextItem() in a loop ending at
+findLastVisibleItem() and test TQIconViewItem::rect() for each of
+these items.
+
     
    See also findLastVisibleItem() and TQIconViewItem::rect().
+
+
    TQIconViewItem * TQIconView::findItem ( const TQPoint & pos ) const
+
    
+Returns a pointer to the item that contains point pos, which is
+given in contents coordinates, or 0 if no item contains point pos.
+
+
    TQIconViewItem * TQIconView::findItem ( const TQString & text, ComparisonFlags compare = BeginsWith ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns a pointer to the first item whose text begins with text, or 0 if no such item could be found. Use the compare flag
+to control the comparison behaviour. (See TQt::StringComparisonMode.)
+
+
    TQIconViewItem * TQIconView::findLastVisibleItem ( const TQRect & r ) const
+
    
+Finds the last item whose bounding rectangle overlaps r and
+returns a pointer to that item. r is given in content
+coordinates. Returns 0 if no item overlaps r.
+
     
    See also findFirstVisibleItem().
+
+
    TQIconViewItem * TQIconView::firstItem () const
+
    
+Returns a pointer to the first item of the icon view, or 0 if
+there are no items in the icon view.
+
     
    See also lastItem() and currentItem().
+
+
    int TQIconView::gridX () const
+
    Returns the horizontal grid of the icon view.
+See the "gridX" property for details.
+
    int TQIconView::gridY () const
+
    Returns the vertical grid of the icon view.
+See the "gridY" property for details.
+
    int TQIconView::index ( const TQIconViewItem * item ) const
+
    
+Returns the index of item, or -1 if item doesn't exist in
+this icon view.
+
+
    void TQIconView::insertInGrid ( TQIconViewItem * item ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Inserts the TQIconViewItem item in the icon view's grid. You should never need to call this function. Instead, insert
+TQIconViewItems by creating them with a pointer to the TQIconView
+that they are to be inserted into.
+
+
    void TQIconView::insertItem ( TQIconViewItem * item, TQIconViewItem * after = 0L ) [virtual]
+
    
+Inserts the icon view item item after after. If after is
+0, item is appended after the last item.
+
     You should never need to call this function. Instead create
+TQIconViewItem's and associate them with your icon view like this:
+
     
    +        (void) new TQIconViewItem( myIconview, "The text of the item", aPixmap );
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    void TQIconView::invertSelection () [virtual]
+
    
+Inverts the selection. Works only in Multi and Extended selection
+mode.
+
+
    bool TQIconView::isRenaming () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if an iconview item is being renamed; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
+
    void TQIconView::itemRenamed ( TQIconViewItem * item, const TQString & name ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when item has been renamed to name,
+usually by in-place renaming.
+
     
    See also TQIconViewItem::setRenameEnabled() and TQIconViewItem::rename().
+
+
    void TQIconView::itemRenamed ( TQIconViewItem * item ) [signal]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This signal is emitted when item has been renamed, usually by
+in-place renaming.
+
     
    See also TQIconViewItem::setRenameEnabled() and TQIconViewItem::rename().
+
+
    TQBrush TQIconView::itemTextBackground () const
+
    Returns the brush to use when drawing the background of an item's text.
+See the "itemTextBackground" property for details.
+
    ItemTextPos TQIconView::itemTextPos () const
+
    Returns the position where the text of each item is drawn.
+See the "itemTextPos" property for details.
+
    bool TQIconView::itemsMovable () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the user is allowed to move items around in the icon view; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "itemsMovable" property for details.
+
    TQIconViewItem * TQIconView::lastItem () const
+
    
+Returns a pointer to the last item of the icon view, or 0 if there
+are no items in the icon view.
+
     
    See also firstItem() and currentItem().
+
+
    TQIconViewItem * TQIconView::makeRowLayout ( TQIconViewItem * begin, int & y, bool & changed ) [protected]
+
    
+Lays out a row of icons (if Arrangement == TopToBottom this is
+a column). Starts laying out with the item begin. y is the
+starting coordinate. Returns the last item of the row (column) and
+sets the new starting coordinate to y. The changed parameter
+is used internally.
+
     Warning: This function may be made private in a future version of
+TQt. We do not recommend calling it.
+
+
    int TQIconView::maxItemTextLength () const
+
    Returns the maximum length (in characters) that an item's text may have.
+See the "maxItemTextLength" property for details.
+
    int TQIconView::maxItemWidth () const
+
    Returns the maximum width that an item may have.
+See the "maxItemWidth" property for details.
+
    void TQIconView::mouseButtonClicked ( int button, TQIconViewItem * item, const TQPoint & pos ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user clicks mouse button button. If item is non-null, the cursor is on item. If item is null, the mouse cursor isn't on any item.
+
     pos is the position of the mouse cursor in the global
+coordinate system (TQMouseEvent::globalPos()). (If the click's
+press and release differ by a pixel or two, pos is the
+position at release time.)
+
     
    See also mouseButtonPressed(), rightButtonClicked(), and clicked().
+
+
    void TQIconView::mouseButtonPressed ( int button, TQIconViewItem * item, const TQPoint & pos ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user presses mouse button button. If item is non-null, the cursor is on item. If item is null, the mouse cursor isn't on any item.
+
     pos is the position of the mouse cursor in the global
+coordinate system (TQMouseEvent::globalPos()).
+
     
    See also rightButtonClicked() and pressed().
+
+
    void TQIconView::moved () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted after successfully dropping one (or more)
+items of the icon view. If the items should be removed, it's best
+to do so in a slot connected to this signal.
+
+
    Example: iconview/main.cpp.
+
    void TQIconView::onItem ( TQIconViewItem * item ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user moves the mouse cursor onto
+an item, similar to the TQWidget::enterEvent() function.
+
+
    void TQIconView::onViewport () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user moves the mouse cursor from
+an item to an empty part of the icon view.
+
     
    See also onItem().
+
+
    void TQIconView::pressed ( TQIconViewItem * item ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user presses any mouse button. If
+item is non-null, the cursor is on item. If item is null,
+the mouse cursor isn't on any item.
+
     
    See also mouseButtonPressed(), rightButtonPressed(), and clicked().
+
+
    void TQIconView::pressed ( TQIconViewItem * item, const TQPoint & pos ) [signal]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This signal is emitted when the user presses any mouse button. If
+item is non-null, the cursor is on item. If item is null,
+the mouse cursor isn't on any item.
+
     pos is the position of the mouse cursor in the global
+coordinate system (TQMouseEvent::globalPos()). (If the click's
+press and release differ by a pixel or two, pos is the
+position at release time.)
+
     
    See also mouseButtonPressed(), rightButtonPressed(), and clicked().
+
+
    void TQIconView::repaintItem ( TQIconViewItem * item ) [virtual]
+
    
+Repaints the item.
+
+
    void TQIconView::repaintSelectedItems ()
+
    
+Repaints the selected items.
+
+
    ResizeMode TQIconView::resizeMode () const
+
    Returns the resize mode of the icon view.
+See the "resizeMode" property for details.
+
    void TQIconView::returnPressed ( TQIconViewItem * item ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted if the user presses the Return or Enter
+key. item is the currentItem() at the time of the keypress.
+
+
    void TQIconView::rightButtonClicked ( TQIconViewItem * item, const TQPoint & pos ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user clicks the right mouse
+button. If item is non-null, the cursor is on item. If item is null, the mouse cursor isn't on any item.
+
     pos is the position of the mouse cursor in the global
+coordinate system (TQMouseEvent::globalPos()). (If the click's
+press and release differ by a pixel or two, pos is the
+position at release time.)
+
     
    See also rightButtonPressed(), mouseButtonClicked(), and clicked().
+
+
    void TQIconView::rightButtonPressed ( TQIconViewItem * item, const TQPoint & pos ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user presses the right mouse
+button. If item is non-null, the cursor is on item. If item is null, the mouse cursor isn't on any item.
+
     pos is the position of the mouse cursor in the global
+coordinate system (TQMouseEvent::globalPos()).
+
+
    void TQIconView::selectAll ( bool select ) [virtual]
+
    
+In Multi and Extended modes, this function sets all items to be
+selected if select is TRUE, and to be unselected if select
+is FALSE.
+
     In Single and NoSelection modes, this function only changes the
+selection status of currentItem().
+
+
    void TQIconView::selectionChanged () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the selection has been changed. It's
+emitted in each selection mode.
+
+
    void TQIconView::selectionChanged ( TQIconViewItem * item ) [signal]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This signal is emitted when the selection changes. item is the
+newly selected item. This signal is emitted only in single
+selection mode.
+
+
    SelectionMode TQIconView::selectionMode () const
+
    Returns the selection mode of the icon view.
+See the "selectionMode" property for details.
+
    void TQIconView::setArrangement ( Arrangement am ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the arrangement mode of the icon view to am.
+See the "arrangement" property for details.
+
    void TQIconView::setAutoArrange ( bool b ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the icon view rearranges its items when a new item is inserted to b.
+See the "autoArrange" property for details.
+
    void TQIconView::setCurrentItem ( TQIconViewItem * item ) [virtual]
+
    
+Makes item the new current item of the icon view.
+
+
    void TQIconView::setGridX ( int rx ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the horizontal grid of the icon view to rx.
+See the "gridX" property for details.
+
    void TQIconView::setGridY ( int ry ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the vertical grid of the icon view to ry.
+See the "gridY" property for details.
+
    void TQIconView::setItemTextBackground ( const TQBrush & b ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the brush to use when drawing the background of an item's text to b.
+See the "itemTextBackground" property for details.
+
    void TQIconView::setItemTextPos ( ItemTextPos pos ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the position where the text of each item is drawn to pos.
+See the "itemTextPos" property for details.
+
    void TQIconView::setItemsMovable ( bool b ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the user is allowed to move items around in the icon view to b.
+See the "itemsMovable" property for details.
+
    void TQIconView::setMaxItemTextLength ( int w ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the maximum length (in characters) that an item's text may have to w.
+See the "maxItemTextLength" property for details.
+
    void TQIconView::setMaxItemWidth ( int w ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the maximum width that an item may have to w.
+See the "maxItemWidth" property for details.
+
    void TQIconView::setResizeMode ( ResizeMode am ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the resize mode of the icon view to am.
+See the "resizeMode" property for details.
+
    void TQIconView::setSelected ( TQIconViewItem * item, bool s, bool cb = FALSE ) [virtual]
+
    
+Selects or unselects item depending on s, and may also
+unselect other items, depending on TQIconView::selectionMode() and
+cb.
+
     If s is FALSE, item is unselected.
+
     If s is TRUE and TQIconView::selectionMode() is Single, item is selected, and the item which was selected is unselected.
+
     If s is TRUE and TQIconView::selectionMode() is Extended, item is selected. If cb is TRUE, the selection state of the
+icon view's other items is left unchanged. If cb is FALSE (the
+default) all other items are unselected.
+
     If s is TRUE and TQIconView::selectionMode() is Multi item
+is selected.
+
     Note that cb is used only if TQIconView::selectionMode() is Extended. cb defaults to FALSE.
+
     All items whose selection status is changed repaint themselves.
+
+
    void TQIconView::setSelectionMode ( SelectionMode m ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the selection mode of the icon view to m.
+See the "selectionMode" property for details.
+
    void TQIconView::setShowToolTips ( bool b ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the icon view will display a tool tip with the complete text for any truncated item text to b.
+See the "showToolTips" property for details.
+
    void TQIconView::setSorting ( bool sort, bool ascending = TRUE )
+
    
+If sort is TRUE, this function sets the icon view to sort items
+when a new item is inserted. If sort is FALSE, the icon view
+will not be sorted.
+
     Note that autoArrange() must be TRUE for sorting to take place.
+
     If ascending is TRUE (the default), items are sorted in
+ascending order. If ascending is FALSE, items are sorted in
+descending order.
+
     TQIconViewItem::compare() is used to compare pairs of items. The
+sorting is based on the items' keys; these default to the items'
+text unless specifically set to something else.
+
     
    See also TQIconView::autoArrange, TQIconView::autoArrange, sortDirection, sort(), and TQIconViewItem::setKey().
+
+
    void TQIconView::setSpacing ( int sp ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the space in pixels between icon view items to sp.
+See the "spacing" property for details.
+
    void TQIconView::setWordWrapIconText ( bool b ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the item text will be word-wrapped if it is too long to b.
+See the "wordWrapIconText" property for details.
+
    bool TQIconView::showToolTips () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the icon view will display a tool tip with the complete text for any truncated item text; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "showToolTips" property for details.
+
    void TQIconView::slotUpdate () [virtual protected slot]
+
    
+This slot is used for a slightly-delayed update.
+
     The icon view is not redrawn immediately after inserting a new item
+but after a very small delay using a TQTimer. This means that when
+many items are inserted in a loop the icon view is probably redrawn
+only once at the end of the loop. This makes the insertions both
+flicker-free and faster.
+
+
    void TQIconView::sort ( bool ascending = TRUE ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sorts and rearranges all the items in the icon view. If ascending is TRUE, the items are sorted in increasing order,
+otherwise they are sorted in decreasing order.
+
     TQIconViewItem::compare() is used to compare pairs of items. The
+sorting is based on the items' keys; these default to the items'
+text unless specifically set to something else.
+
     Note that this function sets the sort order to ascending.
+
     
    See also TQIconViewItem::key(), TQIconViewItem::setKey(), TQIconViewItem::compare(), TQIconView::setSorting(), and TQIconView::sortDirection.
+
+
    bool TQIconView::sortDirection () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the sort direction for inserting new items is ascending;; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "sortDirection" property for details.
+
    bool TQIconView::sorting () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the icon view sorts on insertion; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "sorting" property for details.
+
    int TQIconView::spacing () const
+
    Returns the space in pixels between icon view items.
+See the "spacing" property for details.
+
    void TQIconView::startDrag () [virtual protected]
+
    
+Starts a drag.
+
+
    void TQIconView::takeItem ( TQIconViewItem * item ) [virtual]
+
    
+Takes the icon view item item out of the icon view and causes
+an update of the screen display. The item is not deleted. You
+should normally not need to call this function because
+TQIconViewItem::~TQIconViewItem() calls it. The normal way to delete
+an item is to delete it.
+
+
    bool TQIconView::wordWrapIconText () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the item text will be word-wrapped if it is too long; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "wordWrapIconText" property for details.
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    Arrangement arrangement
    
+
    This property holds the arrangement mode of the icon view.
+
    This can be LeftToRight or TopToBottom. The default is LeftToRight.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setArrangement() and get this property's value with arrangement().
+
    bool autoArrange
    
+
    This property holds whether the icon view rearranges its items when a new item is inserted.
+
    The default is TRUE.
+
     Note that if the icon view is not visible at the time of
+insertion, TQIconView defers all position-related work until it is
+shown and then calls arrangeItemsInGrid().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setAutoArrange() and get this property's value with autoArrange().
+
    uint count
    
+
    This property holds the number of items in the icon view.
+
    
+
    Get this property's value with count().
+
    int gridX
    
+
    This property holds the horizontal grid of the icon view.
+
    If the value is -1, (the default), TQIconView computes suitable
+column widths based on the icon view's contents.
+
     Note that setting a grid width overrides setMaxItemWidth().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setGridX() and get this property's value with gridX().
+
    int gridY
    
+
    This property holds the vertical grid of the icon view.
+
    If the value is -1, (the default), TQIconView computes suitable
+column heights based on the icon view's contents.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setGridY() and get this property's value with gridY().
+
    TQBrush itemTextBackground
    
+
    This property holds the brush to use when drawing the background of an item's text.
+
    By default this brush is set to NoBrush, meaning that only the
+normal icon view background is used.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setItemTextBackground() and get this property's value with itemTextBackground().
+
    ItemTextPos itemTextPos
    
+
    This property holds the position where the text of each item is drawn.
+
    Valid values are Bottom or Right. The default is Bottom.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setItemTextPos() and get this property's value with itemTextPos().
+
    bool itemsMovable
    
+
    This property holds whether the user is allowed to move items around in the icon view.
+
    The default is TRUE.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setItemsMovable() and get this property's value with itemsMovable().
+
    int maxItemTextLength
    
+
    This property holds the maximum length (in characters) that an item's text may have.
+
    The default is 255 characters.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setMaxItemTextLength() and get this property's value with maxItemTextLength().
+
    int maxItemWidth
    
+
    This property holds the maximum width that an item may have.
+
    The default is 100 pixels.
+
     Note that if the gridX() value is set TQIconView will ignore
+this property.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setMaxItemWidth() and get this property's value with maxItemWidth().
+
    ResizeMode resizeMode
    
+
    This property holds the resize mode of the icon view.
+
    This can be Fixed or Adjust. The default is Fixed.
+See ResizeMode.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setResizeMode() and get this property's value with resizeMode().
+
    SelectionMode selectionMode
    
+
    This property holds the selection mode of the icon view.
+
    This can be Single (the default), Extended, Multi or NoSelection.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setSelectionMode() and get this property's value with selectionMode().
+
    bool showToolTips
    
+
    This property holds whether the icon view will display a tool tip with the complete text for any truncated item text.
+
    The default is TRUE. Note that this has no effect if
+setWordWrapIconText() is TRUE, as it is by default.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setShowToolTips() and get this property's value with showToolTips().
+
    bool sortDirection
    
+
    This property holds whether the sort direction for inserting new items is ascending;.
+
    The default is TRUE (i.e. ascending). This sort direction is only
+meaningful if both sorting() and autoArrange() are TRUE.
+
     To set the sort direction, use setSorting()
+
+
    Get this property's value with sortDirection().
+
    bool sorting
    
+
    This property holds whether the icon view sorts on insertion.
+
    The default is FALSE, i.e. no sorting on insertion.
+
     To set the sorting, use setSorting().
+
+
    Get this property's value with sorting().
+
    int spacing
    
+
    This property holds the space in pixels between icon view items.
+
    The default is 5 pixels.
+
     Negative values for spacing are illegal.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setSpacing() and get this property's value with spacing().
+
    bool wordWrapIconText
    
+
    This property holds whether the item text will be word-wrapped if it is too long.
+
    The default is TRUE.
+
     If this property is FALSE, icon text that is too long is
+truncated, and an ellipsis (...) appended to indicate that
+truncation has occurred. The full text can still be seen by the
+user if they hover the mouse because the full text is shown in a
+tooltip; see setShowToolTips().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setWordWrapIconText() and get this property's value with wordWrapIconText().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqimage.html b/doc/html/ntqimage.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0fa297597
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqimage.html
@@ -0,0 +1,1117 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQImage Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQImage Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQImage class provides a hardware-independent pixmap
+representation with direct access to the pixel data.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqimage.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • enum Endian { IgnoreEndian, BigEndian, LittleEndian }
      • 
+
    • TQImage ()
      • 
+
    • TQImage ( int w, int h, int depth, int numColors = 0, Endian bitOrder = IgnoreEndian )
      • 
+
    • TQImage ( const TQSize & size, int depth, int numColors = 0, Endian bitOrder = IgnoreEndian )
      • 
+
    • TQImage ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQImage ( const char * const xpm[] )
      • 
+
    • TQImage ( const TQByteArray & array )
      • 
+
    • TQImage ( uchar * yourdata, int w, int h, int depth, TQRgb * colortable, int numColors, Endian bitOrder )
      • 
+
    • TQImage ( uchar * yourdata, int w, int h, int depth, int bpl, TQRgb * colortable, int numColors, Endian bitOrder )
      • 
+
    • TQImage ( const TQImage & image )
      • 
+
    • ~TQImage ()
      • 
+
    • TQImage & operator= ( const TQImage & image )
      • 
+
    • TQImage & operator= ( const TQPixmap & pixmap )
      • 
+
    • bool operator== ( const TQImage & i ) const
      • 
+
    • bool operator!= ( const TQImage & i ) const
      • 
+
    • void detach ()
      • 
+
    • TQImage copy () const
      • 
+
    • TQImage copy ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int conversion_flags = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • TQImage copy ( const TQRect & r ) const
      • 
+
    • bool isNull () const
      • 
+
    • int width () const
      • 
+
    • int height () const
      • 
+
    • TQSize size () const
      • 
+
    • TQRect rect () const
      • 
+
    • int depth () const
      • 
+
    • int numColors () const
      • 
+
    • Endian bitOrder () const
      • 
+
    • TQRgb color ( int i ) const
      • 
+
    • void setColor ( int i, TQRgb c )
      • 
+
    • void setNumColors ( int numColors )
      • 
+
    • bool hasAlphaBuffer () const
      • 
+
    • void setAlphaBuffer ( bool enable )
      • 
+
    • bool allGray () const
      • 
+
    • bool isGrayscale () const
      • 
+
    • uchar * bits () const
      • 
+
    • uchar * scanLine ( int i ) const
      • 
+
    • uchar ** jumpTable () const
      • 
+
    • TQRgb * colorTable () const
      • 
+
    • int numBytes () const
      • 
+
    • int bytesPerLine () const
      • 
+
    • bool create ( int width, int height, int depth, int numColors = 0, Endian bitOrder = IgnoreEndian )
      • 
+
    • bool create ( const TQSize &, int depth, int numColors = 0, Endian bitOrder = IgnoreEndian )
      • 
+
    • void reset ()
      • 
+
    • void fill ( uint pixel )
      • 
+
    • void invertPixels ( bool invertAlpha = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • TQImage convertDepth ( int depth ) const
      • 
+
    • TQImage convertDepthWithPalette ( int d, TQRgb * palette, int palette_count, int conversion_flags = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • TQImage convertDepth ( int depth, int conversion_flags ) const
      • 
+
    • TQImage convertBitOrder ( Endian bitOrder ) const
      • 
+
    • enum ScaleMode { ScaleFree, ScaleMin, ScaleMax }
      • 
+
    • TQImage smoothScale ( int w, int h, ScaleMode mode = ScaleFree ) const
      • 
+
    • TQImage smoothScale ( const TQSize & s, ScaleMode mode = ScaleFree ) const
      • 
+
    • TQImage scale ( int w, int h, ScaleMode mode = ScaleFree ) const
      • 
+
    • TQImage scale ( const TQSize & s, ScaleMode mode = ScaleFree ) const
      • 
+
    • TQImage scaleWidth ( int w ) const
      • 
+
    • TQImage scaleHeight ( int h ) const
      • 
+
    • TQImage xForm ( const TQWMatrix & matrix ) const
      • 
+
    • TQImage createAlphaMask ( int conversion_flags = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • TQImage createHeuristicMask ( bool clipTight = TRUE ) const
      • 
+
    • TQImage mirror () const
      • 
+
    • TQImage mirror ( bool horizontal, bool vertical ) const
      • 
+
    • TQImage swapRGB () const
      • 
+
    • bool load ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0 )
      • 
+
    • bool loadFromData ( const uchar * buf, uint len, const char * format = 0 )
      • 
+
    • bool loadFromData ( TQByteArray buf, const char * format = 0 )
      • 
+
    • bool save ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format, int quality = -1 ) const
      • 
+
    • bool save ( TQIODevice * device, const char * format, int quality = -1 ) const
      • 
+
    • bool valid ( int x, int y ) const
      • 
+
    • int pixelIndex ( int x, int y ) const
      • 
+
    • TQRgb pixel ( int x, int y ) const
      • 
+
    • void setPixel ( int x, int y, uint index_or_rgb )
      • 
+
    • int dotsPerMeterX () const
      • 
+
    • int dotsPerMeterY () const
      • 
+
    • void setDotsPerMeterX ( int x )
      • 
+
    • void setDotsPerMeterY ( int y )
      • 
+
    • TQPoint offset () const
      • 
+
    • void setOffset ( const TQPoint & p )
      • 
+
    • TQValueList<TQImageTextKeyLang> textList () const
      • 
+
    • TQStringList textLanguages () const
      • 
+
    • TQStringList textKeys () const
      • 
+
    • TQString text ( const char * key, const char * lang = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString text ( const TQImageTextKeyLang & kl ) const
      • 
+
    • void setText ( const char * key, const char * lang, const TQString & s )
      • 
+
    
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
      
+
    • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQImage & image )
      • 
+
    • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQImage & image )
      • 
+
    • void bitBlt ( TQImage * dst, int dx, int dy, const TQImage * src, int sx, int sy, int sw, int sh, int conversion_flags )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQImage class provides a hardware-independent pixmap
+representation with direct access to the pixel data.
+
     
+
+
+
+
     It is one of the two classes TQt provides for dealing with images,
+the other being TQPixmap. TQImage is designed and optimized for I/O
+and for direct pixel access/manipulation. TQPixmap is designed and
+optimized for drawing. There are (slow) functions to convert
+between TQImage and TQPixmap: TQPixmap::convertToImage() and
+TQPixmap::convertFromImage().
+
     An image has the parameters width, height and depth (bits per
+pixel, bpp), a color table and the actual pixels. TQImage supports 1-bpp, 8-bpp and 32-bpp image
+data. 1-bpp and 8-bpp images use a color lookup table; the pixel
+value is a color table index.
+
     32-bpp images encode an RGB value in 24 bits and ignore the color
+table. The most significant byte is used for the alpha buffer.
+
     An entry in the color table is an RGB triplet encoded as a uint. Use the qRed(), qGreen() and qBlue() functions (ntqcolor.h) to access the components, and qRgb to make an RGB triplet (see the TQColor class
+documentation).
+
     1-bpp (monochrome) images have a color table with a most two
+colors. There are two different formats: big endian (MSB first) or
+little endian (LSB first) bit order. To access a single bit you
+will must do some bit shifts:
+
     
    +    TQImage image;
+    // sets bit at (x,y) to 1
+    if ( image.bitOrder() == TQImage::LittleEndian )
+        *(image.scanLine(y) + (x >> 3)) |= 1 << (x & 7);
+    else
+        *(image.scanLine(y) + (x >> 3)) |= 1 << (7 - (x & 7));
+    
    
+ 
+
     If this looks complicated, it might be a good idea to convert the
+1-bpp image to an 8-bpp image using convertDepth().
+
     8-bpp images are much easier to work with than 1-bpp images
+because they have a single byte per pixel:
+
     
    +    TQImage image;
+    // set entry 19 in the color table to yellow
+    image.setColor( 19, qRgb(255,255,0) );
+    // set 8 bit pixel at (x,y) to value yellow (in color table)
+    *(image.scanLine(y) + x) = 19;
+    
    
+ 
+
     32-bpp images ignore the color table; instead, each pixel contains
+the RGB triplet. 24 bits contain the RGB value; the most
+significant byte is reserved for the alpha buffer.
+
     
    +    TQImage image;
+    // sets 32 bit pixel at (x,y) to yellow.
+    uint *p = (uint *)image.scanLine(y) + x;
+    *p = qRgb(255,255,0);
+    
    
+ 
+
     On TQt/Embedded, scanlines are aligned to the pixel depth and may
+be padded to any degree, while on all other platforms, the
+scanlines are 32-bit aligned for all depths. The constructor
+taking a uchar* argument always expects 32-bit aligned data.
+On TQt/Embedded, an additional constructor allows the number of
+bytes-per-line to be specified.
+
     TQImage supports a variety of methods for getting information about
+the image, for example, colorTable(), allGray(), isGrayscale(),
+bitOrder(), bytesPerLine(), depth(), dotsPerMeterX() and
+dotsPerMeterY(), hasAlphaBuffer(), numBytes(), numColors(), and
+width() and height().
+
     Pixel colors are retrieved with pixel() and set with setPixel().
+
     TQImage also supports a number of functions for creating a new
+image that is a transformed version of the original. For example,
+copy(), convertBitOrder(), convertDepth(), createAlphaMask(),
+createHeuristicMask(), mirror(), scale(), smoothScale(), swapRGB()
+and xForm(). There are also functions for changing attributes of
+an image in-place, for example, setAlphaBuffer(), setColor(),
+setDotsPerMeterX() and setDotsPerMeterY() and setNumColors().
+
     Images can be loaded and saved in the supported formats. Images
+are saved to a file with save(). Images are loaded from a file
+with load() (or in the constructor) or from an array of data with
+loadFromData(). The lists of supported formats are available from
+inputFormatList() and outputFormatList().
+
     Strings of text may be added to images using setText().
+
     The TQImage class uses explicit sharing,
+similar to that used by TQMemArray.
+
     New image formats can be added as plugins.
+
     
    See also TQImageIO, TQPixmap, Shared Classes, Graphics Classes, Image Processing Classes, and Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQImage::Endian
    
+
+
     This enum type is used to describe the endianness of the CPU and
+graphics hardware.
+
      
+
    • TQImage::IgnoreEndian - Endianness does not matter. Useful for some
+operations that are independent of endianness.
+
    • TQImage::BigEndian - Network byte order, as on SPARC and Motorola CPUs.
+
    • TQImage::LittleEndian - PC/Alpha byte order.
+
    
+
    TQImage::ScaleMode
    
+
+
     The functions scale() and smoothScale() use different modes for
+scaling the image. The purpose of these modes is to retain the
+ratio of the image if this is required.
+
     
     
+
      
+
    • TQImage::ScaleFree - The image is scaled freely: the resulting image
+fits exactly into the specified size; the ratio will not
+necessarily be preserved.
+
    • TQImage::ScaleMin - The ratio of the image is preserved and the
+resulting image is guaranteed to fit into the specified size
+(it is as large as possible within these constraints) - the
+image might be smaller than the requested size.
+
    • TQImage::ScaleMax - The ratio of the image is preserved and the
+resulting image fills the whole specified rectangle (it is as
+small as possible within these constraints) - the image might
+be larger than the requested size.
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQImage::TQImage ()
+
    
+Constructs a null image.
+
     
    See also isNull().
+
+
    TQImage::TQImage ( int w, int h, int depth, int numColors = 0, Endian bitOrder = IgnoreEndian )
+
    
+Constructs an image with w width, h height, depth bits
+per pixel, numColors colors and bit order bitOrder.
+
     Using this constructor is the same as first constructing a null
+image and then calling the create() function.
+
     
    See also create().
+
+
    TQImage::TQImage ( const TQSize & size, int depth, int numColors = 0, Endian bitOrder = IgnoreEndian )
+
    
+Constructs an image with size size pixels, depth depth bits,
+numColors and bitOrder endianness.
+
     Using this constructor is the same as first constructing a null
+image and then calling the create() function.
+
     
    See also create().
+
+
    TQImage::TQImage ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs an image and tries to load the image from the file fileName.
+
     If format is specified, the loader attempts to read the image
+using the specified format. If format is not specified (which
+is the default), the loader reads a few bytes from the header to
+guess the file format.
+
     If the loading of the image failed, this object is a null image.
+
     The TQImageIO documentation lists the supported image formats and
+explains how to add extra formats.
+
     
    See also load(), isNull(), and TQImageIO.
+
+
    TQImage::TQImage ( const char * const xpm[] )
+
    
+Constructs an image from xpm, which must be a valid XPM image.
+
     Errors are silently ignored.
+
     Note that it's possible to squeeze the XPM variable a little bit
+by using an unusual declaration:
+
     
    +        static const char * const start_xpm[]={
+            "16 15 8 1",
+            "a c #cec6bd",
+        ....
+    
    
+ 
+
     The extra const makes the entire definition read-only, which is
+slightly more efficient (e.g. when the code is in a shared
+library) and ROMable when the application is to be stored in ROM.
+
+
    TQImage::TQImage ( const TQByteArray & array )
+
    
+Constructs an image from the binary data array. It tries to
+guess the file format.
+
     If the loading of the image failed, this object is a null image.
+
     
    See also loadFromData(), isNull(), and imageFormat().
+
+
    TQImage::TQImage ( uchar * yourdata, int w, int h, int depth, TQRgb * colortable, int numColors, Endian bitOrder )
+
    
+Constructs an image w pixels wide, h pixels high with a
+color depth of depth, that uses an existing memory buffer, yourdata. The buffer must remain valid throughout the life of the
+TQImage. The image does not delete the buffer at destruction.
+
     If colortable is 0, a color table sufficient for numColors
+will be allocated (and destructed later).
+
     Note that yourdata must be 32-bit aligned.
+
     The endianness is given in bitOrder.
+
+
    TQImage::TQImage ( uchar * yourdata, int w, int h, int depth, int bpl, TQRgb * colortable, int numColors, Endian bitOrder )
+
    
+Constructs an image that uses an existing memory buffer. The
+buffer must remain valid for the life of the TQImage. The image
+does not delete the buffer at destruction. The buffer is passed as
+yourdata. The image's width is w and its height is h. The
+color depth is depth. bpl specifies the number of bytes per
+line.
+
     If colortable is 0, a color table sufficient for numColors
+will be allocated (and destructed later).
+
     The endianness is specified by bitOrder.
+
     Warning: This constructor is only available on TQt/Embedded.
+
+
    TQImage::TQImage ( const TQImage & image )
+
    
+Constructs a shallow copy of image.
+
+
    TQImage::~TQImage ()
+
    
+Destroys the image and cleans up.
+
+
    bool TQImage::allGray () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if all the colors in the image are shades of gray
+(i.e. their red, green and blue components are equal); otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     This function is slow for large 16-bit (TQt/Embedded only) and 32-bit images.
+
     
    See also isGrayscale().
+
+
    Endian TQImage::bitOrder () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the bit order for the image.
+
     If it is a 1-bpp image, this function returns either
+TQImage::BigEndian or TQImage::LittleEndian.
+
     If it is not a 1-bpp image, this function returns
+TQImage::IgnoreEndian.
+
     
    See also depth().
+
+
    uchar * TQImage::bits () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a pointer to the first pixel data. This is equivalent to
+scanLine(0).
+
     
    See also numBytes(), scanLine(), and jumpTable().
+
+
    Example: opengl/texture/gltexobj.cpp.
+
    int TQImage::bytesPerLine () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of bytes per image scanline. This is equivalent
+to numBytes()/height().
+
     
    See also numBytes() and scanLine().
+
+
    TQRgb TQImage::color ( int i ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the color in the color table at index i. The first
+color is at index 0.
+
     A color value is an RGB triplet. Use the qRed(), qGreen() and qBlue() functions (defined in ntqcolor.h) to
+get the color value components.
+
     
    See also setColor(), numColors(), and TQColor.
+
+
    Example: themes/wood.cpp.
+
    TQRgb * TQImage::colorTable () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a pointer to the color table.
+
     
    See also numColors().
+
+
    TQImage TQImage::convertBitOrder ( Endian bitOrder ) const
+
    
+Converts the bit order of the image to bitOrder and returns the
+converted image. The original image is not changed.
+
     Returns *this if the bitOrder is equal to the image bit
+order, or a null image if this image cannot
+be converted.
+
     
    See also bitOrder(), systemBitOrder(), and isNull().
+
+
    TQImage TQImage::convertDepth ( int depth, int conversion_flags ) const
+
    
+Converts the depth (bpp) of the image to depth and returns the
+converted image. The original image is not changed.
+
     The depth argument must be 1, 8, 16 (TQt/Embedded only) or 32.
+
     Returns *this if depth is equal to the image depth, or a
+null image if this image cannot be
+converted.
+
     If the image needs to be modified to fit in a lower-resolution
+result (e.g. converting from 32-bit to 8-bit), use the conversion_flags to specify how you'd prefer this to happen.
+
     
    See also TQt::ImageConversionFlags, depth(), and isNull().
+
+
    TQImage TQImage::convertDepth ( int depth ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
    TQImage TQImage::convertDepthWithPalette ( int d, TQRgb * palette, int palette_count, int conversion_flags = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns an image with depth d, using the palette_count
+colors pointed to by palette. If d is 1 or 8, the returned
+image will have its color table ordered the same as palette.
+
     If the image needs to be modified to fit in a lower-resolution
+result (e.g. converting from 32-bit to 8-bit), use the conversion_flags to specify how you'd prefer this to happen.
+
     Note: currently no closest-color search is made. If colors are
+found that are not in the palette, the palette may not be used at
+all. This result should not be considered valid because it may
+change in future implementations.
+
     Currently inefficient for non-32-bit images.
+
     
    See also TQt::ImageConversionFlags.
+
+
    TQImage TQImage::copy () const
+
    
+Returns a deep copy of the image.
+
     
    See also detach().
+
+
    TQImage TQImage::copy ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int conversion_flags = 0 ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns a deep copy of a sub-area of
+the image.
+
     The returned image is always w by h pixels in size, and is
+copied from position x, y in this image. In areas beyond
+this image pixels are filled with pixel 0.
+
     If the image needs to be modified to fit in a lower-resolution
+result (e.g. converting from 32-bit to 8-bit), use the conversion_flags to specify how you'd prefer this to happen.
+
     
    See also bitBlt() and TQt::ImageConversionFlags.
+
+
    TQImage TQImage::copy ( const TQRect & r ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns a deep copy of a sub-area of
+the image.
+
     The returned image always has the size of the rectangle r. In
+areas beyond this image pixels are filled with pixel 0.
+
+
    bool TQImage::create ( int width, int height, int depth, int numColors = 0, Endian bitOrder = IgnoreEndian )
+
    
+Sets the image width, height, depth, its number of colors
+(in numColors), and bit order. Returns TRUE if successful, or
+FALSE if the parameters are incorrect or if memory cannot be
+allocated.
+
     The width and height is limited to 32767. depth must be
+1, 8, or 32. If depth is 1, bitOrder must be set to
+either TQImage::LittleEndian or TQImage::BigEndian. For other depths
+bitOrder must be TQImage::IgnoreEndian.
+
     This function allocates a color table and a buffer for the image
+data. The image data is not initialized.
+
     The image buffer is allocated as a single block that consists of a
+table of scanline pointers (jumpTable())
+and the image data (bits()).
+
     
    See also fill(), width(), height(), depth(), numColors(), bitOrder(), jumpTable(), scanLine(), bits(), bytesPerLine(), and numBytes().
+
+
    bool TQImage::create ( const TQSize &, int depth, int numColors = 0, Endian bitOrder = IgnoreEndian )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
    TQImage TQImage::createAlphaMask ( int conversion_flags = 0 ) const
+
    
+Builds and returns a 1-bpp mask from the alpha buffer in this
+image. Returns a null image if alpha buffer mode is disabled.
+
     See TQPixmap::convertFromImage() for a description of the conversion_flags argument.
+
     The returned image has little-endian bit order, which you can
+convert to big-endianness using convertBitOrder().
+
     
    See also createHeuristicMask(), hasAlphaBuffer(), and setAlphaBuffer().
+
+
    TQImage TQImage::createHeuristicMask ( bool clipTight = TRUE ) const
+
    
+Creates and returns a 1-bpp heuristic mask for this image. It
+works by selecting a color from one of the corners, then chipping
+away pixels of that color starting at all the edges.
+
     The four corners vote for which color is to be masked away. In
+case of a draw (this generally means that this function is not
+applicable to the image), the result is arbitrary.
+
     The returned image has little-endian bit order, which you can
+convert to big-endianness using convertBitOrder().
+
     If clipTight is TRUE the mask is just large enough to cover the
+pixels; otherwise, the mask is larger than the data pixels.
+
     This function disregards the alpha buffer.
+
     
    See also createAlphaMask().
+
+
    int TQImage::depth () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the depth of the image.
+
     The image depth is the number of bits used to encode a single
+pixel, also called bits per pixel (bpp) or bit planes of an image.
+
     The supported depths are 1, 8, 16 (TQt/Embedded only) and 32.
+
     
    See also convertDepth().
+
+
    void TQImage::detach ()
+
    
+Detaches from shared image data and makes sure that this image is
+the only one referring to the data.
+
     If multiple images share common data, this image makes a copy of
+the data and detaches itself from the sharing mechanism.
+Nothing is done if there is just a single reference.
+
     
    See also copy().
+
+
    Example: themes/wood.cpp.
+
    int TQImage::dotsPerMeterX () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of pixels that fit horizontally in a physical
+meter. This and dotsPerMeterY() define the intended scale and
+aspect ratio of the image.
+
     
    See also setDotsPerMeterX().
+
+
    int TQImage::dotsPerMeterY () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of pixels that fit vertically in a physical
+meter. This and dotsPerMeterX() define the intended scale and
+aspect ratio of the image.
+
     
    See also setDotsPerMeterY().
+
+
    void TQImage::fill ( uint pixel )
+
    
+Fills the entire image with the pixel value pixel.
+
     If the depth of this image is 1, only the
+lowest bit is used. If you say fill(0), fill(2), etc., the image
+is filled with 0s. If you say fill(1), fill(3), etc., the image is
+filled with 1s. If the depth is 8, the lowest 8 bits are used.
+
     If the depth is 32 and the image has no alpha buffer, the pixel
+value is written to each pixel in the image. If the image has an
+alpha buffer, only the 24 RGB bits are set and the upper 8 bits
+(alpha value) are left unchanged.
+
     Note: TQImage::pixel() returns the color of the pixel at the given
+coordinates; TQColor::pixel() returns the pixel value of the
+underlying window system (essentially an index value), so normally
+you will want to use TQImage::pixel() to use a color from an
+existing image or TQColor::rgb() to use a specific color.
+
     
    See also invertPixels(), depth(), hasAlphaBuffer(), and create().
+
+
    TQImage TQImage::fromMimeSource ( const TQString & abs_name ) [static]
+
     Convenience function. Gets the data associated with the absolute
+name abs_name from the default mime source factory and decodes it
+to an image.
+
     
    See also TQMimeSourceFactory, TQImage::fromMimeSource(), and TQImageDrag::decode().
+
+
    bool TQImage::hasAlphaBuffer () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if alpha buffer mode is enabled; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     
    See also setAlphaBuffer().
+
+
    int TQImage::height () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the height of the image.
+
     
    See also width(), size(), and rect().
+
+
    Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp and opengl/texture/gltexobj.cpp.
+
    const char * TQImage::imageFormat ( const TQString & fileName ) [static]
+
    
+Returns a string that specifies the image format of the file fileName, or 0 if the file cannot be read or if the format is not
+recognized.
+
     The TQImageIO documentation lists the guaranteed supported image
+formats, or use TQImage::inputFormats() and TQImage::outputFormats()
+to get lists that include the installed formats.
+
     
    See also load() and save().
+
+
    TQStringList TQImage::inputFormatList () [static]
+
    
+Returns a list of image formats that are supported for image
+input.
+
     Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
+over a copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQStringList list = myImage.inputFormatList();
+    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
+    while( it != list.end() ) {
+        myProcessing( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also outputFormatList(), inputFormats(), and TQImageIO.
+
+
    Example: showimg/showimg.cpp.
+
    TQStrList TQImage::inputFormats () [static]
+
    
+Returns a list of image formats that are supported for image
+input.
+
     
    See also outputFormats(), inputFormatList(), and TQImageIO.
+
+
    void TQImage::invertPixels ( bool invertAlpha = TRUE )
+
    
+Inverts all pixel values in the image.
+
     If the depth is 32: if invertAlpha is TRUE, the alpha bits are
+also inverted, otherwise they are left unchanged.
+
     If the depth is not 32, the argument invertAlpha has no
+meaning.
+
     Note that inverting an 8-bit image means to replace all pixels
+using color index i with a pixel using color index 255 minus i. Similarly for a 1-bit image. The color table is not changed.
+
     
    See also fill(), depth(), and hasAlphaBuffer().
+
+
    bool TQImage::isGrayscale () const
+
    
+For 16-bit (TQt/Embedded only) and 32-bit images, this function is
+equivalent to allGray().
+
     For 8-bpp images, this function returns TRUE if color(i) is
+TQRgb(i,i,i) for all indices of the color table; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     
    See also allGray() and depth().
+
+
    bool TQImage::isNull () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if it is a null image; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     A null image has all parameters set to zero and no allocated data.
+
+
    Example: showimg/showimg.cpp.
+
    uchar ** TQImage::jumpTable () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a pointer to the scanline pointer table.
+
     This is the beginning of the data block for the image.
+
     
    See also bits() and scanLine().
+
+
    bool TQImage::load ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0 )
+
    
+Loads an image from the file fileName. Returns TRUE if the
+image was successfully loaded; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     If format is specified, the loader attempts to read the image
+using the specified format. If format is not specified (which
+is the default), the loader reads a few bytes from the header to
+guess the file format.
+
     The TQImageIO documentation lists the supported image formats and
+explains how to add extra formats.
+
     
    See also loadFromData(), save(), imageFormat(), TQPixmap::load(), and TQImageIO.
+
+
    bool TQImage::loadFromData ( const uchar * buf, uint len, const char * format = 0 )
+
    
+Loads an image from the first len bytes of binary data in buf. Returns TRUE if the image was successfully loaded; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     If format is specified, the loader attempts to read the image
+using the specified format. If format is not specified (which
+is the default), the loader reads a few bytes from the header to
+guess the file format.
+
     The TQImageIO documentation lists the supported image formats and
+explains how to add extra formats.
+
     
    See also load(), save(), imageFormat(), TQPixmap::loadFromData(), and TQImageIO.
+
+
    bool TQImage::loadFromData ( TQByteArray buf, const char * format = 0 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Loads an image from the TQByteArray buf.
+
+
    TQImage TQImage::mirror () const
+
    
+Returns a TQImage which is a vertically mirrored copy of this
+image. The original TQImage is not changed.
+
+
    TQImage TQImage::mirror ( bool horizontal, bool vertical ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns a mirror of the image, mirrored in the horizontal and/or
+the vertical direction depending on whether horizontal and vertical are set to TRUE or FALSE. The original image is not
+changed.
+
     
    See also smoothScale().
+
+
    int TQImage::numBytes () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of bytes occupied by the image data.
+
     
    See also bytesPerLine() and bits().
+
+
    int TQImage::numColors () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the size of the color table for the image.
+
     Notice that numColors() returns 0 for 16-bpp (TQt/Embedded only)
+and 32-bpp images because these images do not use color tables,
+but instead encode pixel values as RGB triplets.
+
     
    See also setNumColors() and colorTable().
+
+
    Example: themes/wood.cpp.
+
    TQPoint TQImage::offset () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of pixels by which the image is intended to be
+offset by when positioning relative to other images.
+
+
    bool TQImage::operator!= ( const TQImage & i ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this image and image i have different contents;
+otherwise returns FALSE. The comparison can be slow, unless there
+is some obvious difference, such as different widths, in which
+case the function will return tquickly.
+
     
    See also operator=().
+
+
    TQImage & TQImage::operator= ( const TQImage & image )
+
    
+Assigns a shallow copy of image to
+this image and returns a reference to this image.
+
     
    See also copy().
+
+
    TQImage & TQImage::operator= ( const TQPixmap & pixmap )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the image bits to the pixmap contents and returns a
+reference to the image.
+
     If the image shares data with other images, it will first
+dereference the shared data.
+
     Makes a call to TQPixmap::convertToImage().
+
+
    bool TQImage::operator== ( const TQImage & i ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this image and image i have the same contents;
+otherwise returns FALSE. The comparison can be slow, unless there
+is some obvious difference, such as different widths, in which
+case the function will return tquickly.
+
     
    See also operator=().
+
+
    TQStringList TQImage::outputFormatList () [static]
+
    
+Returns a list of image formats that are supported for image
+output.
+
     Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
+over a copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQStringList list = myImage.outputFormatList();
+    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
+    while( it != list.end() ) {
+        myProcessing( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also inputFormatList(), outputFormats(), and TQImageIO.
+
+
    TQStrList TQImage::outputFormats () [static]
+
    
+Returns a list of image formats that are supported for image
+output.
+
     
    See also inputFormats(), outputFormatList(), and TQImageIO.
+
+
    Example: showimg/showimg.cpp.
+
    TQRgb TQImage::pixel ( int x, int y ) const
+
    
+Returns the color of the pixel at the coordinates (x, y).
+
     If (x, y) is not on the image, the
+results are undefined.
+
     
    See also setPixel(), qRed(), qGreen(), qBlue(), and valid().
+
+
    Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp and qmag/qmag.cpp.
+
    int TQImage::pixelIndex ( int x, int y ) const
+
    
+Returns the pixel index at the given coordinates.
+
     If (x, y) is not valid, or if the
+image is not a paletted image (depth() > 8), the results are
+undefined.
+
     
    See also valid() and depth().
+
+
    TQRect TQImage::rect () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the enclosing rectangle (0, 0, width(), height()) of the
+image.
+
     
    See also width(), height(), and size().
+
+
    void TQImage::reset ()
+
    
+Resets all image parameters and deallocates the image data.
+
+
    bool TQImage::save ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format, int quality = -1 ) const
+
    
+Saves the image to the file fileName, using the image file
+format format and a quality factor of quality. quality
+must be in the range 0..100 or -1. Specify 0 to obtain small
+compressed files, 100 for large uncompressed files, and -1 (the
+default) to use the default settings.
+
     Returns TRUE if the image was successfully saved; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also load(), loadFromData(), imageFormat(), TQPixmap::save(), and TQImageIO.
+
+
    bool TQImage::save ( TQIODevice * device, const char * format, int quality = -1 ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This function writes a TQImage to the TQIODevice, device. This
+can be used, for example, to save an image directly into a
+TQByteArray:
+
    +    TQImage image;
+    TQByteArray ba;
+    TQBuffer buffer( ba );
+    buffer.open( IO_WriteOnly );
+    image.save( &buffer, "PNG" ); // writes image into ba in PNG format
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    TQImage TQImage::scale ( int w, int h, ScaleMode mode = ScaleFree ) const
+
    
+Returns a copy of the image scaled to a rectangle of width w
+and height h according to the ScaleMode mode.
+
     
      
+
    •  If mode is ScaleFree, the image is scaled to (w,
+h).
+
    •  If mode is ScaleMin, the image is scaled to a rectangle
+as large as possible inside (w, h), preserving the aspect
+ratio.
+
    •  If mode is ScaleMax, the image is scaled to a rectangle
+as small as possible outside (w, h), preserving the aspect
+ratio.
+
    
+
     If either the width w or the height h is 0 or negative, this
+function returns a null image.
+
     This function uses a simple, fast algorithm. If you need better
+quality, use smoothScale() instead.
+
     
    See also scaleWidth(), scaleHeight(), smoothScale(), and xForm().
+
+
    TQImage TQImage::scale ( const TQSize & s, ScaleMode mode = ScaleFree ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     The requested size of the image is s.
+
+
    TQImage TQImage::scaleHeight ( int h ) const
+
    
+Returns a scaled copy of the image. The returned image has a
+height of h pixels. This function automatically calculates the
+width of the image so that the ratio of the image is preserved.
+
     If h is 0 or negative a null image is
+returned.
+
     
    See also scale(), scaleWidth(), smoothScale(), and xForm().
+
+
    Example: table/small-table-demo/main.cpp.
+
    TQImage TQImage::scaleWidth ( int w ) const
+
    
+Returns a scaled copy of the image. The returned image has a width
+of w pixels. This function automatically calculates the height
+of the image so that the ratio of the image is preserved.
+
     If w is 0 or negative a null image is
+returned.
+
     
    See also scale(), scaleHeight(), smoothScale(), and xForm().
+
+
    uchar * TQImage::scanLine ( int i ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a pointer to the pixel data at the scanline with index i. The first scanline is at index 0.
+
     The scanline data is aligned on a 32-bit boundary.
+
     Warning: If you are accessing 32-bpp image data, cast the returned
+pointer to TQRgb* (TQRgb has a 32-bit size) and use it to
+read/write the pixel value. You cannot use the uchar* pointer
+directly, because the pixel format depends on the byte order on
+the underlying platform. Hint: use qRed(),
+qGreen() and qBlue(), etc. (ntqcolor.h) to access the pixels.
+
     Warning: If you are accessing 16-bpp image data, you must handle
+endianness yourself. (TQt/Embedded only)
+
     
    See also bytesPerLine(), bits(), and jumpTable().
+
+
    Example: desktop/desktop.cpp.
+
    void TQImage::setAlphaBuffer ( bool enable )
+
    
+Enables alpha buffer mode if enable is TRUE, otherwise disables
+it. The default setting is disabled.
+
     An 8-bpp image has 8-bit pixels. A pixel is an index into the
+color table, which contains 32-bit color
+values. In a 32-bpp image, the 32-bit pixels are the color values.
+
     This 32-bit value is encoded as follows: The lower 24 bits are
+used for the red, green, and blue components. The upper 8 bits
+contain the alpha component.
+
     The alpha component specifies the transparency of a pixel. 0 means
+completely transparent and 255 means opaque. The alpha component
+is ignored if you do not enable alpha buffer mode.
+
     The alpha buffer is used to set a mask when a TQImage is translated
+to a TQPixmap.
+
     
    See also hasAlphaBuffer() and createAlphaMask().
+
+
    void TQImage::setColor ( int i, TQRgb c )
+
    
+
+
     Sets a color in the color table at index i to c.
+
     A color value is an RGB triplet. Use the qRgb() function (defined in ntqcolor.h) to make RGB
+triplets.
+
     
    See also color(), setNumColors(), and numColors().
+
+
    Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
+
    void TQImage::setDotsPerMeterX ( int x )
+
    
+Sets the value returned by dotsPerMeterX() to x.
+
+
    void TQImage::setDotsPerMeterY ( int y )
+
    
+Sets the value returned by dotsPerMeterY() to y.
+
+
    void TQImage::setNumColors ( int numColors )
+
    
+Resizes the color table to numColors colors.
+
     If the color table is expanded all the extra colors will be set to
+black (RGB 0,0,0).
+
     
    See also numColors(), color(), setColor(), and colorTable().
+
+
    void TQImage::setOffset ( const TQPoint & p )
+
    
+Sets the value returned by offset() to p.
+
+
    void TQImage::setPixel ( int x, int y, uint index_or_rgb )
+
    
+Sets the pixel index or color at the coordinates (x, y) to
+index_or_rgb.
+
     If (x, y) is not valid, the result is
+undefined.
+
     If the image is a paletted image (depth() <= 8) and index_or_rgb >= numColors(), the result is undefined.
+
     
    See also pixelIndex(), pixel(), qRgb(), qRgba(), and valid().
+
+
    void TQImage::setText ( const char * key, const char * lang, const TQString & s )
+
    
+Records string s for the keyword key. The key should be a
+portable keyword recognizable by other software - some suggested
+values can be found in the PNG specification. s can be any text. lang
+should specify the language code (see
+RFC 1766) or 0.
+
+
    TQSize TQImage::size () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the size of the image, i.e. its width and height.
+
     
    See also width(), height(), and rect().
+
+
    TQImage TQImage::smoothScale ( int w, int h, ScaleMode mode = ScaleFree ) const
+
    
+Returns a smoothly scaled copy of the image. The returned image
+has a size of width w by height h pixels if mode is ScaleFree. The modes ScaleMin and ScaleMax may be used to
+preserve the ratio of the image: if mode is ScaleMin, the
+returned image is guaranteed to fit into the rectangle specified
+by w and h (it is as large as possible within the
+constraints); if mode is ScaleMax, the returned image fits
+at least into the specified rectangle (it is a small as possible
+within the constraints).
+
     For 32-bpp images and 1-bpp/8-bpp color images the result will be
+32-bpp, whereas all-gray images
+(including black-and-white 1-bpp) will produce 8-bit grayscale images with the palette spanning
+256 grays from black to white.
+
     This function uses code based on pnmscale.c by Jef Poskanzer.
+
     pnmscale.c - read a portable anymap and scale it
+
     
+
     Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
+
     Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and
+its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission
+notice appear in supporting documentation. This software is
+provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
+
     
    See also scale() and mirror().
+
+
    TQImage TQImage::smoothScale ( const TQSize & s, ScaleMode mode = ScaleFree ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     The requested size of the image is s.
+
+
    TQImage TQImage::swapRGB () const
+
    
+Returns a TQImage in which the values of the red and blue
+components of all pixels have been swapped, effectively converting
+an RGB image to a BGR image. The original TQImage is not changed.
+
+
    Endian TQImage::systemBitOrder () [static]
+
    
+Determines the bit order of the display hardware. Returns
+TQImage::LittleEndian (LSB first) or TQImage::BigEndian (MSB first).
+
     
    See also systemByteOrder().
+
+
    Endian TQImage::systemByteOrder () [static]
+
    
+Determines the host computer byte order. Returns
+TQImage::LittleEndian (LSB first) or TQImage::BigEndian (MSB first).
+
     
    See also systemBitOrder().
+
+
    TQString TQImage::text ( const char * key, const char * lang = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns the string recorded for the keyword key in language lang, or in a default language if lang is 0.
+
+
    TQString TQImage::text ( const TQImageTextKeyLang & kl ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the string recorded for the keyword and language kl.
+
+
    TQStringList TQImage::textKeys () const
+
    
+Returns the keywords for which some texts are recorded.
+
     Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
+over a copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQStringList list = myImage.textKeys();
+    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
+    while( it != list.end() ) {
+        myProcessing( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also textList(), text(), setText(), and textLanguages().
+
+
    TQStringList TQImage::textLanguages () const
+
    
+Returns the language identifiers for which some texts are
+recorded.
+
     Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
+over a copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQStringList list = myImage.textLanguages();
+    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
+    while( it != list.end() ) {
+        myProcessing( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also textList(), text(), setText(), and textKeys().
+
+
    TQValueList<TQImageTextKeyLang> TQImage::textList () const
+
    
+Returns a list of TQImageTextKeyLang objects that enumerate all the
+texts key/language pairs set by setText() for this image.
+
     Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
+over a copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQValueList<TQImageTextKeyLang> list = myImage.textList();
+    TQValueList<TQImageTextKeyLang>::Iterator it = list.begin();
+    while( it != list.end() ) {
+        myProcessing( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    bool TQImage::valid ( int x, int y ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if ( x, y ) is a valid coordinate in the image;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also width(), height(), and pixelIndex().
+
+
    Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp and qmag/qmag.cpp.
+
    int TQImage::width () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the width of the image.
+
     
    See also height(), size(), and rect().
+
+
    Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp and opengl/texture/gltexobj.cpp.
+
    TQImage TQImage::xForm ( const TQWMatrix & matrix ) const
+
    
+Returns a copy of the image that is transformed using the
+transformation matrix, matrix.
+
     The transformation matrix is internally adjusted to compensate
+for unwanted translation, i.e. xForm() returns the smallest image
+that contains all the transformed points of the original image.
+
     
    See also scale(), TQPixmap::xForm(), TQPixmap::trueMatrix(), and TQWMatrix.
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    void bitBlt ( TQImage * dst, int dx, int dy, const TQImage * src, int sx, int sy, int sw, int sh, int conversion_flags )
+
    
+
+
     Copies a block of pixels from src to dst. The pixels
+copied from source (src) are converted according to
+conversion_flags if it is incompatible with the destination
+(dst).
+
     sx, sy is the top-left pixel in src, dx, dy
+is the top-left position in dst and sw, \sh is the
+size of the copied block.
+
     The copying is clipped if areas outside src or dst are
+specified.
+
     If sw is -1, it is adjusted to src->width(). Similarly, if sh is -1, it is adjusted to src->height().
+
     Currently inefficient for non 32-bit images.
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQImage & image )
+
    
+
+
     Writes the image image to the stream s as a PNG image, or as a
+BMP image if the stream's version is 1.
+
     Note that writing the stream to a file will not produce a valid image file.
+
     
    See also TQImage::save() and Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQImage & image )
+
    
+
+
     Reads an image from the stream s and stores it in image.
+
     
    See also TQImage::load() and Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqimageformatplugin.html b/doc/html/ntqimageformatplugin.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6389e67de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqimageformatplugin.html
@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQImageFormatPlugin Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQImageFormatPlugin Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQImageFormatPlugin class provides an abstract base for custom image format plugins.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqimageformatplugin.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQImageFormatPlugin class provides an abstract base for custom image format plugins.
+
     
+
     The image format plugin is a simple plugin interface that makes
+it easy to create custom image formats that can be used
+transparently by applications.
+
     Writing an image format plugin is achieved by subclassing this
+base class, reimplementing the pure virtual functions keys() and
+installIOHandler(), and exporting the class with the
+Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN macro.  See the Plugins
+    documentation for details.
+
    See also Plugins.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQImageFormatPlugin::TQImageFormatPlugin ()
+
    
+Constructs an image format plugin. This is invoked automatically
+by the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN macro.
+
+
    TQImageFormatPlugin::~TQImageFormatPlugin ()
+
    
+Destroys the image format plugin.
+
     You never have to call this explicitly. TQt destroys a plugin
+automatically when it is no longer used.
+
+
    bool TQImageFormatPlugin::installIOHandler ( const TQString & format ) [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Installs a TQImageIO image I/O handler for the image format format.
+
     
    See also keys().
+
+
    TQStringList TQImageFormatPlugin::keys () const [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the list of image formats this plugin supports.
+
     
    See also installIOHandler().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqinputdialog.html b/doc/html/ntqinputdialog.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6ba9d306d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqinputdialog.html
@@ -0,0 +1,196 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQInputDialog Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQInputDialog Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQInputDialog class provides a simple convenience dialog to get a single value from the user.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqinputdialog.h>
+
    Inherits TQDialog.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQString getText ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, TQLineEdit::EchoMode mode = TQLineEdit::Normal, const TQString & text = TQString::null, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • int getInteger ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, int value = 0, int minValue = -2147483647, int maxValue = 2147483647, int step = 1, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • double getDouble ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, double value = 0, double minValue = -2147483647, double maxValue = 2147483647, int decimals = 1, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQString getItem ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, const TQStringList & list, int current = 0, bool editable = TRUE, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQInputDialog class provides a simple convenience dialog to get a single value from the user.
+
+
+
     The input value can be a string, a number or an item from a list. A
+label must be set to tell the user what they should enter.
+
     Four static convenience functions are provided:
+getText(), getInteger(), getDouble() and getItem(). All the
+functions can be used in a similar way, for example:
+
    +    bool ok;
+    TQString text = TQInputDialog::getText(
+            "MyApp 3000", "Enter your name:", TQLineEdit::Normal,
+            TQString::null, &ok, this );
+    if ( ok && !text.isEmpty() ) {
+        // user entered something and pressed OK
+    } else {
+        // user entered nothing or pressed Cancel
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    Input Dialogs
     
    See also Dialog Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    double TQInputDialog::getDouble ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, double value = 0, double minValue = -2147483647, double maxValue = 2147483647, int decimals = 1, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) [static]
+
    
+Static convenience function to get a floating point number from
+the user. caption is the text which is displayed in the title
+bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user
+(it should say what should be entered). value is the default
+floating point number that the line edit will be set to. minValue and maxValue are the minimum and maximum values the
+user may choose, and decimals is the maximum number of decimal
+places the number may have.
+
     If ok is not-null *ok will be set to TRUE if the user
+pressed OK and to FALSE if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's
+parent is parent; the dialog is called name. The dialog will
+be modal.
+
     This function returns the floating point number which has been
+entered by the user.
+
     Use this static function like this:
+
     
    +    bool ok;
+    double res = TQInputDialog::getDouble(
+            "MyApp 3000", "Enter a decimal number:", 33.7, 0,
+            1000, 2, &ok, this );
+    if ( ok ) {
+        // user entered something and pressed OK
+    } else {
+        // user pressed Cancel
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    int TQInputDialog::getInteger ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, int value = 0, int minValue = -2147483647, int maxValue = 2147483647, int step = 1, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) [static]
+
    
+Static convenience function to get an integer input from the
+user. caption is the text which is displayed in the title bar
+of the dialog.  label is the text which is shown to the user
+(it should say what should be entered). value is the default
+integer which the spinbox will be set to.  minValue and maxValue are the minimum and maximum values the user may choose,
+and step is the amount by which the values change as the user
+presses the arrow buttons to increment or decrement the value.
+
     If ok is not-null *ok will be set to TRUE if the user
+pressed OK and to FALSE if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's
+parent is parent; the dialog is called name. The dialog will
+be modal.
+
     This function returns the integer which has been entered by the user.
+
     Use this static function like this:
+
     
    +    bool ok;
+    int res = TQInputDialog::getInteger(
+            "MyApp 3000", "Enter a number:", 22, 0, 1000, 2,
+            &ok, this );
+    if ( ok ) {
+        // user entered something and pressed OK
+    } else {
+        // user pressed Cancel
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    TQString TQInputDialog::getItem ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, const TQStringList & list, int current = 0, bool editable = TRUE, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) [static]
+
    
+Static convenience function to let the user select an item from a
+string list. caption is the text which is displayed in the title
+bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it
+should say what should be entered). list is the
+string list which is inserted into the combobox, and current is the number
+of the item which should be the current item. If editable is TRUE
+the user can enter their own text; if editable is FALSE the user
+may only select one of the existing items.
+
     If ok is not-null *ok will be set to TRUE if the user
+pressed OK and to FALSE if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's
+parent is parent; the dialog is called name. The dialog will
+be modal.
+
     This function returns the text of the current item, or if editable is TRUE, the current text of the combobox.
+
     Use this static function like this:
+
     
    +    TQStringList lst;
+    lst << "First" << "Second" << "Third" << "Fourth" << "Fifth";
+    bool ok;
+    TQString res = TQInputDialog::getItem(
+            "MyApp 3000", "Select an item:", lst, 1, TRUE, &ok,
+            this );
+    if ( ok ) {
+        // user selected an item and pressed OK
+    } else {
+        // user pressed Cancel
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    TQString TQInputDialog::getText ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, TQLineEdit::EchoMode mode = TQLineEdit::Normal, const TQString & text = TQString::null, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) [static]
+
    
+Static convenience function to get a string from the user. caption is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the
+dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should
+say what should be entered). text is the default text which is
+placed in the line edit. The mode is the echo mode the line edit
+will use. If ok is not-null *ok will be set to TRUE if the
+user pressed OK and to FALSE if the user pressed Cancel. The
+dialog's parent is parent; the dialog is called name. The
+dialog will be modal.
+
     This function returns the text which has been entered in the line
+edit. It will not return an empty string.
+
     Use this static function like this:
+
     
    +    bool ok;
+    TQString text = TQInputDialog::getText(
+            "MyApp 3000", "Enter your name:", TQLineEdit::Normal,
+            TQString::null, &ok, this );
+    if ( ok && !text.isEmpty() ) {
+        // user entered something and pressed OK
+    } else {
+        // user entered nothing or pressed Cancel
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqintcache.html b/doc/html/ntqintcache.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..89ed6f165
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqintcache.html
@@ -0,0 +1,242 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQIntCache Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQIntCache Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQIntCache class is a template class that provides a cache based on long keys.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqintcache.h>
+
    Inherits TQPtrCollection.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQIntCache class is a template class that provides a cache based on long keys.
+
     
+
+
     TQIntCache is implemented as a template class. Define a template
+instance TQIntCache<X> to create a cache that operates on
+pointers to X, or X*.
+
     A cache is a least recently used (LRU) list of cache items,
+accessed via long keys. Each cache item has a cost. The sum
+of item costs, totalCost(), will not exceed the maximum cache
+cost, maxCost(). If inserting a new item would cause the total
+cost to exceed the maximum cost, the least recently used items in
+the cache are removed.
+
     Apart from insert(), by far the most important function is find()
+(which also exists as operator[]). This function looks up an
+item, returns it, and by default marks it as being the most
+recently used item.
+
     There are also methods to remove() or take() an object from the
+cache. Calling setAutoDelete(TRUE) for a cache tells it to delete
+items that are removed. The default is to not delete items when
+they are removed (i.e. remove() and take() are equivalent).
+
     When inserting an item into the cache, only the pointer is copied,
+not the item itself. This is called a shallow copy. It is possible
+to make the cache copy all of the item's data (known as a deep copy) when an item is inserted. insert() calls the virtual
+function TQPtrCollection::newItem() for the item to be inserted.
+Inherit a dictionary and reimplement newItem() if you want deep
+copies.
+
     When removing a cache item, the item will be automatically
+deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
+
     There is a TQIntCacheIterator which may be used to traverse the
+items in the cache in arbitrary order.
+
     
    See also TQIntCacheIterator, TQCache, TQAsciiCache, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQIntCache::TQIntCache ( int maxCost = 100, int size = 17 )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a cache whose contents will never have a total cost
+greater than maxCost and which is expected to contain less than
+size items.
+
     size is actually the size of an internal hash array; it's
+usually best to make it prime and at least 50% bigger than the
+largest expected number of items in the cache.
+
     Each inserted item is associated with a cost. When inserting a new
+item, if the total cost of all items in the cache will exceed maxCost, the cache will start throwing out the older (least
+recently used) items until there is enough room for the new item
+to be inserted.
+
+
    TQIntCache::~TQIntCache ()
+
    
+
+
     Removes all items from the cache and then destroys the int cache.
+If auto-deletion is enabled the cache's items are deleted. All
+iterators that access this cache will be reset.
+
+
    void TQIntCache::clear () [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Removes all items from the cache, and deletes them if
+auto-deletion has been enabled.
+
     All cache iterators that operate this on cache are reset.
+
     
    See also remove() and take().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
+
    uint TQIntCache::count () const [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of items in the cache.
+
     
    See also totalCost().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
+
    type * TQIntCache::find ( long k, bool ref = TRUE ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the item associated with k, or 0 if the key does not
+exist in the cache. If ref is TRUE (the default), the item is
+moved to the front of the least recently used list.
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was
+inserted most recently is returned.
+
+
    bool TQIntCache::insert ( long k, const type * d, int c = 1, int p = 0 )
+
    
+
+
     Inserts the item d into the cache with key k and assigns it
+a cost of c (default 1). Returns TRUE if it succeeds; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     The cache's size is limited, and if the total cost is too high,
+TQIntCache will remove old, least-used items until there is room
+for this new item.
+
     The parameter p is internal and should be left at the default
+value (0).
+
     Warning: If this function returns FALSE (for example, the cost ,
+exceeds maxCost()), you must delete d yourself. Additionally,
+be very careful about using d after calling this function. Any
+other insertions into the cache, from anywhere in the application
+or within TQt itself, could cause the object to be discarded from
+the cache and the pointer to become invalid.
+
+
    bool TQIntCache::isEmpty () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the cache is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    int TQIntCache::maxCost () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the maximum allowed total cost of the cache.
+
     
    See also setMaxCost() and totalCost().
+
+
    type * TQIntCache::operator[] ( long k ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the item associated with k, or 0 if k does not exist
+in the cache, and moves the item to the front of the least
+recently used list.
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was
+inserted most recently is returned.
+
     This is the same as find( k, TRUE ).
+
     
    See also find().
+
+
    bool TQIntCache::remove ( long k )
+
    
+
+
     Removes the item associated with k, and returns TRUE if the
+item was present in the cache; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     The item is deleted if auto-deletion has been enabled, i.e. if you
+have called setAutoDelete(TRUE).
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was
+inserted most recently is removed.
+
     All iterators that refer to the removed item are set to point to
+the next item in the cache's traversal order.
+
     
    See also take() and clear().
+
+
    void TQIntCache::setMaxCost ( int m )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the maximum allowed total cost of the cache to m. If the
+current total cost is greater than m, some items are removed
+immediately.
+
     
    See also maxCost() and totalCost().
+
+
    uint TQIntCache::size () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the size of the hash array used to implement the cache.
+This should be a bit larger than count() is likely to be.
+
+
    void TQIntCache::statistics () const
+
    
+
+
     A debug-only utility function. Prints out cache usage, hit/miss,
+and distribution information using qDebug(). This function does
+nothing in the release library.
+
+
    type * TQIntCache::take ( long k )
+
    
+
+
     Takes the item associated with k out of the cache without
+deleting it, and returns a pointer to the item taken out or 0 if
+the key does not exist in the cache.
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was
+inserted most recently is taken.
+
     All iterators that refer to the taken item are set to point to the
+next item in the cache's traversal order.
+
     
    See also remove() and clear().
+
+
    int TQIntCache::totalCost () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the total cost of the items in the cache. This is an
+integer in the range 0 to maxCost().
+
     
    See also setMaxCost().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqintdict.html b/doc/html/ntqintdict.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..da3d16f61
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqintdict.html
@@ -0,0 +1,313 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQIntDict Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQIntDict Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQIntDict class is a template class that provides a dictionary based on long keys.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqintdict.h>
+
    Inherits TQPtrCollection.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Important Inherited Members
    
+
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • virtual TQDataStream & read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item )
      • 
+
    • virtual TQDataStream & write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item ) const
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQIntDict class is a template class that provides a dictionary based on long keys.
+
     
+
+
     
+
     TQMap is an STL-compatible alternative to this class.
+
     TQIntDict is implemented as a template class. Define a template
+instance TQIntDict<X> to create a dictionary that operates on
+pointers to X (X*).
+
     A dictionary is a collection of key-value pairs. The key is an long used for insertion, removal and lookup. The value is a
+pointer. Dictionaries provide very fast insertion and lookup.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQIntDict<TQLineEdit> fields; // long int keys, TQLineEdit* values
+    for ( int i = 0; i < 3; i++ )
+        fields.insert( i, new TQLineEdit( this ) );
+
+    fields[0]->setText( "Homer" );
+    fields[1]->setText( "Simpson" );
+    fields[2]->setText( "45" );
+
+    TQIntDictIterator<TQLineEdit> it( fields );
+    for ( ; it.current(); ++it )
+        cout << it.currentKey() << ": " << it.current()->text() << endl;
+
+    for ( int i = 0; i < 3; i++ )
+        cout << fields[i]->text() << " "; // Prints "Homer Simpson 45"
+    cout << endl;
+
+    fields.remove( 1 ); // Does not delete the line edit
+    for ( int i = 0; i < 3; i++ )
+        if ( fields[i] )
+            cout << fields[i]->text() << " "; // Prints "Homer 45"
+    
    
+ 
+
     See TQDict for full details, including the choice of dictionary
+size, and how deletions are handled. 
+
     
    See also TQIntDictIterator, TQDict, TQAsciiDict, TQPtrDict, Collection Classes, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQIntDict::TQIntDict ( int size = 17 )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a dictionary using an internal hash array of size size.
+
     Setting size to a suitably large prime number (equal to or
+greater than the expected number of entries) makes the hash
+distribution better which leads to faster lookup.
+
+
    TQIntDict::TQIntDict ( const TQIntDict<type> & dict )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a copy of dict.
+
     Each item in dict is inserted into this dictionary. Only the
+pointers are copied (shallow copy).
+
+
    TQIntDict::~TQIntDict ()
+
    
+
+
     Removes all items from the dictionary and destroys it.
+
     All iterators that access this dictionary will be reset.
+
     
    See also setAutoDelete().
+
+
    bool TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE.
+
     
    See also setAutoDelete().
+
+
    void TQIntDict::clear () [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Removes all items from the dictionary.
+
     The removed items are deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
+
     All dictionary iterators that access this dictionary will be reset.
+
     
    See also remove(), take(), and setAutoDelete().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
+
    uint TQIntDict::count () const [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of items in the dictionary.
+
     
    See also isEmpty().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
+
    type * TQIntDict::find ( long key ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the item associated with key, or 0 if the key does not
+exist in the dictionary.
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most
+recently inserted item will be found.
+
     Equivalent to operator[].
+
     
    See also operator[]().
+
+
    Example: table/bigtable/main.cpp.
+
    void TQIntDict::insert ( long key, const type * item )
+
    
+
+
     Insert item item into the dictionary using key key.
+
     Multiple items can have the same key, in which case only the last
+item will be accessible using operator[]().
+
     item may not be 0.
+
     
    See also replace().
+
+
    Example: scribble/scribble.cpp.
+
    bool TQIntDict::isEmpty () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also count().
+
+
    TQIntDict<type> & TQIntDict::operator= ( const TQIntDict<type> & dict )
+
    
+
+
     Assigns dict to this dictionary and returns a reference to this
+dictionary.
+
     This dictionary is first cleared and then each item in dict is
+inserted into this dictionary. Only the pointers are copied
+(shallow copy), unless newItem() has been reimplemented.
+
+
    type * TQIntDict::operator[] ( long key ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the item associated with key, or 0 if the key does not
+exist in the dictionary.
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most
+recently inserted item will be found.
+
     Equivalent to the find() function.
+
     
    See also find().
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQIntDict::read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     Reads a dictionary item from the stream s and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
     The default implementation sets item to 0.
+
     
    See also write().
+
+
    bool TQIntDict::remove ( long key )
+
    
+
+
     Removes the item associated with key from the dictionary.
+Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the key is in the
+dictionary; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most
+recently inserted item will be removed.
+
     The removed item is deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
+
     All dictionary iterators that refer to the removed item will be
+set to point to the next item in the dictionary's traversal
+order.
+
     
    See also take(), clear(), and setAutoDelete().
+
+
    Example: table/bigtable/main.cpp.
+
    void TQIntDict::replace ( long key, const type * item )
+
    
+
+
     If the dictionary has key key, this key's item is replaced with
+item. If the dictionary doesn't contain key key, item is
+inserted into the dictionary using key key. 
+
     item may not be 0.
+
     Equivalent to:
+
    +        TQIntDict<char> dict;
+        //      ...
+        if ( dict.find(key) )
+            dict.remove( key );
+        dict.insert( key, item );
+    
    
+ 
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most
+recently inserted item will be replaced.
+
     
    See also insert().
+
+
    Example: table/bigtable/main.cpp.
+
    void TQIntDict::resize ( uint newsize )
+
    
+
+
     Changes the size of the hashtable to newsize. The contents of
+the dictionary are preserved, but all iterators on the dictionary
+become invalid.
+
+
    void TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if enable is
+TRUE and to never delete them if enable is FALSE.
+
     If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are
+deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient
+if the collection has the only pointer to the items.
+
     The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be
+careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself
+with two collections deleting the same items.
+
     Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions
+in subclasses. For example, a subclass that has a remove()
+function will remove the item from its data structure, and if
+auto-delete is enabled, will also delete the item.
+
     
    See also autoDelete().
+
+
    Examples: grapher/grapher.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, and table/bigtable/main.cpp.
+
    uint TQIntDict::size () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the size of the internal hash array (as specified in the
+constructor).
+
     
    See also count().
+
+
    void TQIntDict::statistics () const
+
    
+
+
     Debugging-only function that prints out the dictionary
+distribution using qDebug().
+
+
    type * TQIntDict::take ( long key )
+
    
+
+
     Takes the item associated with key out of the dictionary
+without deleting it (even if auto-deletion is enabled).
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most
+recently inserted item will be taken.
+
     Returns a pointer to the item taken out, or 0 if the key does not
+exist in the dictionary.
+
     All dictionary iterators that refer to the taken item will be set
+to point to the next item in the dictionary's traversing order.
+
     
    See also remove(), clear(), and setAutoDelete().
+
+
    Example: table/bigtable/main.cpp.
+
    TQDataStream & TQIntDict::write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item ) const [virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     Writes a dictionary item to the stream s and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
     
    See also read().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqiodevice.html b/doc/html/ntqiodevice.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..16b77679f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqiodevice.html
@@ -0,0 +1,553 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQIODevice Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQIODevice Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQIODevice class is the base class of I/O devices.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqiodevice.h>
+
    Inherited by TQBuffer, TQFile, TQSocket, and TQSocketDevice.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
+
     The TQIODevice class is the base class of I/O devices.
+
     
+
     An I/O device represents a medium that one can read bytes from
+and/or write bytes to. The TQIODevice class is the abstract
+superclass of all such devices; classes such as TQFile, TQBuffer and
+TQSocket inherit TQIODevice and implement virtual functions such as
+write() appropriately.
+
     Although applications sometimes use TQIODevice directly, it is
+usually better to use TQTextStream and TQDataStream, which provide
+stream operations on any TQIODevice subclass. TQTextStream provides
+text-oriented stream functionality (for human-readable ASCII
+files, for example), whereas TQDataStream deals with binary data in
+a totally platform-independent manner.
+
     The public member functions in TQIODevice roughly fall into two
+groups: the action functions and the state access functions. The
+most important action functions are:
+
     
      
+
       
    •   open() opens a device for reading and/or writing, depending on
+the mode argument.
+
       
    •   close() closes the device and tidies up (e.g. flushes buffered
+data)
+
       
    •   readBlock() reads a block of data from the device.
+
       
    •   writeBlock() writes a block of data to the device.
+
       
    •   readLine() reads a line (of text, usually) from the device.
+
       
    •   flush() ensures that all buffered data are written to the real device.
+
       
    
+
     There are also some other, less used, action functions:
+
     
      
+
       
    •   getch() reads a single character.
+
       
    •   ungetch() forgets the last call to getch(), if possible.
+
       
    •   putch() writes a single character.
+
       
    •   size() returns the size of the device, if there is one.
+
       
    •   at() returns the current read/write pointer's position, if there
+is one for this device, or it moves the pointer if given an offset.
+
       
    •   atEnd() indicates whether there is more to read, if this is
+meaningful for this device.
+
       
    •   reset() moves the read/write pointer to the start of the
+device, if that is possible for this device.
+
       
    
+
     The state access are all "get" functions. The TQIODevice subclass
+calls setState() to update the state, and simple access functions
+tell the user of the device what the device's state is. Here are
+the settings, and their associated access functions:
+
     
      
+
       
    •   Access type. Some devices are direct access (it is possible
+to read/write anywhere), whereas others are sequential. TQIODevice
+provides the access functions (isDirectAccess(),
+isSequentialAccess(), and isCombinedAccess()) to tell users what a
+given I/O device supports.
+
       
    •   Buffering. Some devices are accessed in raw mode, whereas
+others are buffered. Buffering usually provides greater
+efficiency, particularly for small read/write operations.
+isBuffered() tells the user whether a given device is buffered.
+(This can often be set by the application in the call to open().)
+
       
    •   Synchronicity. Synchronous devices work immediately (for
+example, files). When you read from a file, the file delivers its
+data straight away. Other kinds of device, such as a socket
+connected to a HTTP server, may not deliver the data until seconds
+after you ask to read it. isSynchronous() and isAsynchronous()
+tell the user how this device operates.
+
       
    •   CR/LF translation. For simplicity, applications often like to
+see just a single CR/LF style, and TQIODevice subclasses can
+provide this. isTranslated() returns TRUE if this object
+translates CR/LF to just LF. (This can often be set by the
+application in the call to open().)
+
       
    •   Permissions. Some files cannot be written. For example,
+isReadable(), isWritable() and isReadWrite() tell the application
+whether it can read from and write to a given device. (This can
+often be set by the application in the call to open().)
+
       
    •   Finally, isOpen() returns TRUE if the device is open, i.e.
+after an open() call.
+
       
    
+
     TQIODevice provides numerous pure virtual functions that you need
+to implement when subclassing it. Here is a skeleton subclass with
+all the members you are sure to need and some that you will
+probably need:
+
     
    +    class MyDevice : public TQIODevice
+    {
+    public:
+        MyDevice();
+        ~MyDevice();
+
+        bool open( int mode );
+        void close();
+        void flush();
+
+        uint size() const;
+        int  at() const;        // non-pure virtual
+        bool at( int );         // non-pure virtual
+        bool atEnd() const;     // non-pure virtual
+
+        int readBlock( char *data, uint maxlen );
+        int writeBlock( const char *data, uint len );
+        int readLine( char *data, uint maxlen );
+
+        int getch();
+        int putch( int );
+        int ungetch( int );
+    };
+    
    
+ 
+
     The three non-pure virtual functions need not be reimplemented for
+sequential devices.
+
     
    See also TQDataStream, TQTextStream, and Input/Output and Networking.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQIODevice::Offset
    
+
+
     The offset within the device.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQIODevice::TQIODevice ()
+
    
+Constructs an I/O device.
+
+
    TQIODevice::~TQIODevice () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the I/O device.
+
+
    Offset TQIODevice::at () const [virtual]
+
    
+Virtual function that returns the current I/O device position.
+
     This is the position of the data read/write head of the I/O
+device.
+
     
    See also size().
+
+
    Example: distributor/distributor.ui.h.
+
    Reimplemented in TQSocket.
+
    bool TQIODevice::at ( Offset pos ) [virtual]
+
    
+Virtual function that sets the I/O device position to pos.
+Returns TRUE if the position was successfully set, i.e. pos is
+within range and the seek was successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also size().
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQSocket.
+
    bool TQIODevice::atEnd () const [virtual]
+
    
+Virtual function that returns TRUE if the I/O device position is
+at the end of the input; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQFile and TQSocket.
+
    void TQIODevice::close () [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Closes the I/O device.
+
     This virtual function must be reimplemented by all subclasses.
+
     
    See also open().
+
+
    Example: grapher/grapher.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented in TQFile and TQSocket.
+
    int TQIODevice::flags () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the current I/O device flags setting.
+
     Flags consists of mode flags and state flags.
+
     
    See also mode() and state().
+
+
    void TQIODevice::flush () [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Flushes an open I/O device.
+
     This virtual function must be reimplemented by all subclasses.
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQFile and TQSocket.
+
    int TQIODevice::getch () [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Reads a single byte/character from the I/O device.
+
     Returns the byte/character read, or -1 if the end of the I/O
+device has been reached.
+
     This virtual function must be reimplemented by all subclasses.
+
     
    See also putch() and ungetch().
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQFile and TQSocket.
+
    bool TQIODevice::isAsynchronous () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the device is an asynchronous device; otherwise
+returns FALSE, i.e. if the device is a synchronous device.
+
     This mode is currently not in use.
+
     
    See also isSynchronous().
+
+
    bool TQIODevice::isBuffered () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the I/O device is a buffered device; otherwise
+returns FALSE, i.e. the device is a raw device.
+
     
    See also isRaw().
+
+
    bool TQIODevice::isCombinedAccess () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the I/O device is a combined access (both direct
+and sequential) device; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     This access method is currently not in use.
+
+
    bool TQIODevice::isDirectAccess () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the I/O device is a direct access device;
+otherwise returns FALSE, i.e. if the device is a sequential access
+device.
+
     
    See also isSequentialAccess().
+
+
    bool TQIODevice::isInactive () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the I/O device state is 0, i.e. the device is not
+open; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also isOpen().
+
+
    bool TQIODevice::isOpen () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the I/O device has been opened; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     
    See also isInactive().
+
+
    Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    bool TQIODevice::isRaw () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the device is a raw device; otherwise returns
+FALSE, i.e. if the device is a buffered device.
+
     
    See also isBuffered().
+
+
    bool TQIODevice::isReadWrite () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the I/O device was opened using IO_ReadWrite
+mode; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also isReadable() and isWritable().
+
+
    bool TQIODevice::isReadable () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the I/O device was opened using IO_ReadOnly or
+IO_ReadWrite mode; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also isWritable() and isReadWrite().
+
+
    bool TQIODevice::isSequentialAccess () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the device is a sequential access device;
+otherwise returns FALSE, i.e. if the device is a direct access
+device.
+
     Operations involving size() and at(int) are not valid on
+sequential devices.
+
     
    See also isDirectAccess().
+
+
    bool TQIODevice::isSynchronous () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the I/O device is a synchronous device; otherwise
+returns FALSE, i.e. the device is an asynchronous device.
+
     
    See also isAsynchronous().
+
+
    bool TQIODevice::isTranslated () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the I/O device translates carriage-return and
+linefeed characters; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     A TQFile is translated if it is opened with the IO_Translate
+mode flag.
+
+
    bool TQIODevice::isWritable () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the I/O device was opened using IO_WriteOnly or
+IO_ReadWrite mode; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also isReadable() and isReadWrite().
+
+
    int TQIODevice::mode () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns bits OR'ed together that specify the current operation
+mode.
+
     These are the flags that were given to the open() function.
+
     The flags are IO_ReadOnly, IO_WriteOnly, IO_ReadWrite,
+IO_Append, IO_Truncate and IO_Translate.
+
+
    bool TQIODevice::open ( int mode ) [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Opens the I/O device using the specified mode. Returns TRUE if
+the device was successfully opened; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     The mode parameter mode must be an OR'ed combination of the
+following flags.
+
    
+
     Mode flags Meaning
+
     IO_Raw specifies raw (unbuffered) file access.
+
     IO_ReadOnly opens a file in read-only mode.
+
     IO_WriteOnly opens a file in write-only mode.
+
     IO_ReadWrite opens a file in read/write mode.
+
     IO_Append sets the file index to the end of the file.
+
     IO_Truncate truncates the file.
+
     IO_Translate enables carriage returns and linefeed
+translation for text files under MS-DOS, Windows and Macintosh. On
+Unix systems this flag has no effect. Use with caution as it will
+also transform every linefeed written to the file into a CRLF
+pair. This is likely to corrupt your file if you write write
+binary data. Cannot be combined with IO_Raw.
+
    
+
     This virtual function must be reimplemented by all subclasses.
+
     
    See also close().
+
+
    Example: grapher/grapher.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented in TQFile and TQSocket.
+
    int TQIODevice::putch ( int ch ) [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Writes the character ch to the I/O device.
+
     Returns ch, or -1 if an error occurred.
+
     This virtual function must be reimplemented by all subclasses.
+
     
    See also getch() and ungetch().
+
+
    Example: grapher/grapher.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented in TQFile and TQSocket.
+
    TQByteArray TQIODevice::readAll () [virtual]
+
    
+This convenience function returns all of the remaining data in the
+device.
+
+
    Q_LONG TQIODevice::readBlock ( char * data, Q_ULONG maxlen ) [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Reads at most maxlen bytes from the I/O device into data and
+returns the number of bytes actually read.
+
     This function should return -1 if a fatal error occurs and should
+return 0 if there are no bytes to read.
+
     The device must be opened for reading, and data must not be 0.
+
     This virtual function must be reimplemented by all subclasses.
+
     
    See also writeBlock(), isOpen(), and isReadable().
+
+
    Example: distributor/distributor.ui.h.
+
    Reimplemented in TQSocket and TQSocketDevice.
+
    Q_LONG TQIODevice::readLine ( char * data, Q_ULONG maxlen ) [virtual]
+
    
+Reads a line of text, (or up to maxlen bytes if a newline isn't
+encountered) plus a terminating '\0' into data. If there is a
+newline at the end if the line, it is not stripped.
+
     Returns the number of bytes read including the terminating '\0',
+or -1 if an error occurred.
+
     This virtual function can be reimplemented much more efficiently
+by the most subclasses.
+
     
    See also readBlock() and TQTextStream::readLine().
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQFile.
+
    bool TQIODevice::reset ()
+
    
+
+
     Sets the device index position to 0.
+
     
    See also at().
+
+
    void TQIODevice::resetStatus ()
+
    
+
+
     Sets the I/O device status to IO_Ok.
+
     
    See also status().
+
+
    void TQIODevice::setFlags ( int flags ) [protected]
+
    
+
+
     Used by subclasses to set the device flags to the flags specified.
+
+
    void TQIODevice::setMode ( int mode ) [protected]
+
    
+
+
     Used by subclasses to set the device mode to the mode specified.
+
+
    void TQIODevice::setState ( int state ) [protected]
+
    
+
+
     Used by subclasses to set the device state to the state specified.
+
+
    void TQIODevice::setStatus ( int s ) [protected]
+
    
+Used by subclasses to set the device status (not state) to s.
+
+
    void TQIODevice::setType ( int type ) [protected]
+
    
+
+
     Used by subclasses to set the device type to the type specified.
+
+
    Offset TQIODevice::size () const [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Virtual function that returns the size of the I/O device.
+
     
    See also at().
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQFile and TQSocket.
+
    int TQIODevice::state () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns bits OR'ed together that specify the current state.
+
     The flags are: IO_Open.
+
     Subclasses may define additional flags.
+
+
    int TQIODevice::status () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the I/O device status.
+
     The I/O device status returns an error code. If open() returns
+FALSE or readBlock() or writeBlock() return -1, this function can
+be called to find out the reason why the operation failed.
+
     
+
     The status codes are:
+
    
+
     Status code Meaning
+
     IO_Ok The operation was successful.
+
     IO_ReadError Could not read from the device.
+
     IO_WriteError Could not write to the device.
+
     IO_FatalError A fatal unrecoverable error occurred.
+
     IO_OpenError Could not open the device.
+
     IO_ConnectError Could not connect to the device.
+
     IO_AbortError The operation was unexpectedly aborted.
+
     IO_TimeOutError The operation timed out.
+
     IO_UnspecifiedError An unspecified error happened on close.
+
    
+
     
    See also resetStatus().
+
+
    int TQIODevice::ungetch ( int ch ) [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Puts the character ch back into the I/O device and decrements
+the index position if it is not zero.
+
     This function is normally called to "undo" a getch() operation.
+
     Returns ch, or -1 if an error occurred.
+
     This virtual function must be reimplemented by all subclasses.
+
     
    See also getch() and putch().
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQFile and TQSocket.
+
    Q_LONG TQIODevice::writeBlock ( const char * data, Q_ULONG len ) [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Writes len bytes from data to the I/O device and returns the
+number of bytes actually written.
+
     This function should return -1 if a fatal error occurs.
+
     This virtual function must be reimplemented by all subclasses.
+
     
    See also readBlock().
+
+
    Example: distributor/distributor.ui.h.
+
    Reimplemented in TQBuffer, TQSocket, and TQSocketDevice.
+
    Q_LONG TQIODevice::writeBlock ( const TQByteArray & data )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This convenience function is the same as calling writeBlock(
+data.data(), data.size() ).
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqjiscodec.html b/doc/html/ntqjiscodec.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2bee9fc8b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqjiscodec.html
@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQJisCodec Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQJisCodec Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQJisCodec class provides conversion to and from JIS character sets.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqjiscodec.h>
+
    Inherits TQTextCodec.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • virtual const char * mimeName () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+ 
+
+
+
     The TQJisCodec class provides conversion to and from JIS character sets.
+
     More precisely, the TQJisCodec class subclasses TQTextCodec to
+provide support for JIS X 0201 Latin, JIS X 0201 Kana, JIS X 0208
+and JIS X 0212.
+
     The environment variable UNICODEMAP_JP can be used to fine-tune
+TQJisCodec, TQSjisCodec and TQEucJpCodec. The mapping names are as for
+the Japanese XML working group's XML
+  Japanese Profile, because it names and explains all the
+widely used mappings. Here are brief descriptions, written by
+Serika Kurusugawa:
+
     
      
+
       
    •  "unicode-0.9" or "unicode-0201" for Unicode style. This assumes
+JISX0201 for 0x00-0x7f. (0.9 is a table version of jisx02xx mapping
+used for Uniocde spec version 1.1.)
+
       
    •  "unicode-ascii" This assumes US-ASCII for 0x00-0x7f; some
+chars (JISX0208 0x2140 and JISX0212 0x2237) are different from
+Unicode 1.1 to avoid conflict.
+
       
    •  "open-19970715-0201" ("open-0201" for convenience) or
+"jisx0221-1995" for JISX0221-JISX0201 style. JIS X 0221 is JIS
+version of Unicode, but a few chars (0x5c, 0x7e, 0x2140, 0x216f,
+0x2131) are different from Unicode 1.1. This is used when 0x5c is
+treated as YEN SIGN.
+
       
    •  "open-19970715-ascii" ("open-ascii" for convenience) for
+JISX0221-ASCII style. This is used when 0x5c is treated as REVERSE
+SOLIDUS.
+
       
    •  "open-19970715-ms" ("open-ms" for convenience) or "cp932" for
+Microsoft Windows style. Windows Code Page 932. Some chars (0x2140,
+0x2141, 0x2142, 0x215d, 0x2171, 0x2172) are different from Unicode
+1.1.
+
       
    •  "jdk1.1.7" for Sun's JDK style. Same as Unicode 1.1, except that
+JIS 0x2140 is mapped to UFF3C. Either ASCII or JISX0201 can be used
+for 0x00-0x7f.
+
       
    
+
     In addition, the extensions "nec-vdc", "ibm-vdc" and "udc" are
+supported.
+
     For example, if you want to use Unicode style conversion but with
+NEC's extension, set UNICODEMAP_JP to
+unicode-0.9, nec-vdc. (You will probably
+need to quote that in a shell command.)
+
     Most of the code here was written by Serika Kurusugawa,
+a.k.a. Junji Takagi, and is included in TQt with the author's
+permission and the grateful thanks of the Trolltech team. Here is
+the copyright statement for that code:
+
     
+
     Copyright (C) 1999 Serika Kurusugawa. All rights reserved.
+
     Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+are met:
+
      
+
    1.  Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+
    2.  Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+
    
+
     THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS".
+ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSETQUENTIAL
+DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+SUCH DAMAGE.
+
    See also Internationalization with TQt.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    const char * TQJisCodec::mimeName () const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the codec's mime name.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQTextCodec.
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqkeysequence.html b/doc/html/ntqkeysequence.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b6b93b9c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqkeysequence.html
@@ -0,0 +1,206 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQKeySequence Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQKeySequence Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQKeySequence class encapsulates a key sequence as used
+by accelerators.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqkeysequence.h>
+
    Inherits TQt.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
      
+
    • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQKeySequence & keysequence )
      • 
+
    • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQKeySequence & keysequence )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQKeySequence class encapsulates a key sequence as used
+by accelerators.
+
     
+
     A key sequence consists of up to four keyboard codes, each
+optionally combined with modifiers, e.g. SHIFT, CTRL, ALT, META, or UNICODE_ACCEL. For example, CTRL + Key_P
+might be a sequence used as a shortcut for printing a document.
+The key codes are listed in ntqnamespace.h. As an alternative,
+use UNICODE_ACCEL with the unicode code point of the character.
+For example, UNICODE_ACCEL + 'A' gives the same key sequence
+as Key_A.
+
     Key sequences can be constructed either from an integer key code,
+or from a human readable translatable string such as
+"Ctrl+X,Alt+Space". A key sequence can be cast to a TQString to
+obtain a human readable translated version of the sequence.
+Translations are done in the "TQAccel" context.
+
     
    See also TQAccel and Miscellaneous Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQKeySequence::TQKeySequence ()
+
    
+Constructs an empty key sequence.
+
+
    TQKeySequence::TQKeySequence ( const TQString & key )
+
    
+Creates a key sequence from the string key. For example
+"Ctrl+O" gives CTRL+UNICODE_ACCEL+'O'. The strings "Ctrl",
+"Shift", "Alt" and "Meta" are recognized, as well as their
+translated equivalents in the "TQAccel" context (using
+TQObject::tr()).
+
     Multiple key codes (up to four) may be entered by separating them
+with commas, e.g. "Alt+X,Ctrl+S,Q".
+
     This contructor is typically used with tr(), so that accelerator keys can be replaced in
+translations:
+
     
    +        TQPopupMenu *file = new TQPopupMenu( this );
+        file->insertItem( tr("&Open..."), this, SLOT(open()),
+                          TQKeySequence( tr("Ctrl+O", "File|Open") ) );
+    
    
+ 
+
     Note the "File|Open" translator comment. It is by no means
+necessary, but it provides some context for the human translator.
+
+
    TQKeySequence::TQKeySequence ( int key )
+
    
+Constructs a key sequence that has a single key.
+
     The key codes are listed in ntqnamespace.h and can be
+combined with modifiers, e.g. with SHIFT, CTRL, ALT, META or UNICODE_ACCEL.
+
+
    TQKeySequence::TQKeySequence ( int k1, int k2, int k3 = 0, int k4 = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a key sequence with up to 4 keys k1, k2,
+k3 and k4.
+
     The key codes are listed in ntqnamespace.h and can be
+combined with modifiers, e.g. with SHIFT, CTRL, ALT, META or UNICODE_ACCEL.
+
+
    TQKeySequence::TQKeySequence ( const TQKeySequence & keysequence )
+
    
+Copy constructor. Makes a copy of keysequence.
+
+
    TQKeySequence::~TQKeySequence ()
+
    
+Destroys the key sequence.
+
+
    uint TQKeySequence::count () const
+
    
+Returns the number of keys in the key sequence.
+The maximum is 4.
+
+
    bool TQKeySequence::isEmpty () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the key sequence is empty; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
+
    TQt::SequenceMatch TQKeySequence::matches ( const TQKeySequence & seq ) const
+
    
+Matches the sequence with seq. Returns TQt::Identical if
+successful, TQt::PartialMatch for matching but incomplete seq,
+and TQt::NoMatch if the sequences have nothing in common.
+Returns TQt::NoMatch if seq is shorter.
+
+
    TQKeySequence::operator TQString () const
+
    
+Creates an accelerator string for the key sequence.
+For instance CTRL+Key_O gives "Ctrl+O". If the key sequence has
+multiple key codes they are returned comma-separated, e.g.
+"Alt+X, Ctrl+Y, Z". The strings, "Ctrl", "Shift", etc. are
+translated (using TQObject::tr()) in the "TQAccel" scope. If the key
+sequence has no keys, TQString::null is returned.
+
     On Mac OS X, the string returned resembles the sequence that is shown in
+the menubar.
+
+
    TQKeySequence::operator int () const
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     For backward compatibility: returns the first keycode
+as integer. If the key sequence is empty, 0 is returned.
+
+
    bool TQKeySequence::operator!= ( const TQKeySequence & keysequence ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if keysequence is not equal to this key sequence;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    TQKeySequence & TQKeySequence::operator= ( const TQKeySequence & keysequence )
+
    
+Assignment operator. Assigns keysequence to this
+object.
+
+
    bool TQKeySequence::operator== ( const TQKeySequence & keysequence ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if keysequence is equal to this key
+sequence; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    int TQKeySequence::operator[] ( uint index ) const
+
    
+Returns a reference to the element at position index in the key
+sequence. This can only be used to read an element.
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQKeySequence & keysequence )
+
    
+
+
     Writes the key sequence keysequence to the stream s.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQKeySequence & keysequence )
+
    
+
+
     Reads a key sequence from the stream s into the key sequence keysequence.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqlabel.html b/doc/html/ntqlabel.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d60d71cb7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqlabel.html
@@ -0,0 +1,420 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQLabel Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQLabel Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQLabel widget provides a text or image display.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqlabel.h>
+
    Inherits TQFrame.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQLabel ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQLabel ( const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQLabel ( TQWidget * buddy, const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
      • 
+
    • ~TQLabel ()
      • 
+
    • TQString text () const
      • 
+
    • TQPixmap * pixmap () const
      • 
+
    • TQPicture * picture () const
      • 
+
    • TQMovie * movie () const
      • 
+
    • TextFormat textFormat () const
      • 
+
    • void setTextFormat ( TextFormat )
      • 
+
    • int alignment () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setAlignment ( int )
      • 
+
    • int indent () const
      • 
+
    • void setIndent ( int )
      • 
+
    • bool autoResize () const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • virtual void setAutoResize ( bool enable )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • bool hasScaledContents () const
      • 
+
    • void setScaledContents ( bool )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setBuddy ( TQWidget * buddy )
      • 
+
    • TQWidget * buddy () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setFont ( const TQFont & f )
      • 
+
    
+
    Public Slots
    
+
      
+
    • virtual void setText ( const TQString & )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setPicture ( const TQPicture & picture )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setMovie ( const TQMovie & movie )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setNum ( int num )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setNum ( double num )
      • 
+
    • void clear ()
      • 
+
    
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • Alignment alignment - the alignment of the label's contents
      • 
+
    • BackgroundMode backgroundMode - the label's background mode  (read only)
      • 
+
    • int indent - the label's text indent in pixels
      • 
+
    • TQPixmap pixmap - the label's pixmap
      • 
+
    • bool scaledContents - whether the label will scale its contents to fill all available space
      • 
+
    • TQString text - the label's text
      • 
+
    • TextFormat textFormat - the label's text format
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQLabel widget provides a text or image display.
+
     
+
+
+
     TQLabel is used for displaying text or an image. No user
+interaction functionality is provided. The visual appearance of
+the label can be configured in various ways, and it can be used
+for specifying a focus accelerator key for another widget.
+
     A TQLabel can contain any of the following content types:
+
    
+
     Content Setting
+
     Plain text
+Pass a TQString to setText().
+
     Rich text
+Pass a TQString that contains rich text to setText().
+
     A pixmap
+Pass a TQPixmap to setPixmap().
+
     A movie
+Pass a TQMovie to setMovie().
+
     A number
+Pass an int or a double to setNum(), which converts
+the number to plain text.
+
     Nothing
+The same as an empty plain text. This is the default. Set
+by clear().
+
    
+
     When the content is changed using any of these functions, any
+previous content is cleared.
+
     The look of a TQLabel can be tuned in several ways. All the
+settings of TQFrame are available for specifying a widget frame.
+The positioning of the content within the TQLabel widget area can
+be tuned with setAlignment() and setIndent(). For example, this
+code sets up a sunken panel with a two-line text in the bottom
+right corner (both lines being flush with the right side of the
+label):
+
    +    TQLabel *label = new TQLabel( this );
+    label->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Panel | TQFrame::Sunken );
+    label->setText( "first line\nsecond line" );
+    label->setAlignment( AlignBottom | AlignRight );
+    
    
+ 
+
     A TQLabel is often used as a label for an interactive widget. For
+this use TQLabel provides a useful mechanism for adding an
+accelerator key (see TQAccel) that will set the keyboard focus to
+the other widget (called the TQLabel's "buddy"). For example:
+
    +    TQLineEdit* phoneEdit = new TQLineEdit( this, "phoneEdit" );
+    TQLabel* phoneLabel = new TQLabel( phoneEdit, "&Phone:", this, "phoneLabel" );
+    
    
+ 
+
     In this example, keyboard focus is transferred to the label's
+buddy (the TQLineEdit) when the user presses Alt+P. You can
+also use the setBuddy() function to accomplish the same thing.
+
      
+
     
    See also TQLineEdit, TQTextEdit, TQPixmap, TQMovie, GUI Design Handbook: Label, Basic Widgets, and Text Related Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQLabel::TQLabel ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs an empty label.
+
     The parent, name and widget flag f, arguments are passed
+to the TQFrame constructor.
+
     
    See also alignment, setFrameStyle(), and indent.
+
+
    TQLabel::TQLabel ( const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a label that displays the text, text.
+
     The parent, name and widget flag f, arguments are passed
+to the TQFrame constructor.
+
     
    See also text, alignment, setFrameStyle(), and indent.
+
+
    TQLabel::TQLabel ( TQWidget * buddy, const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a label that displays the text text. The label has a
+buddy widget, buddy.
+
     If the text contains an underlined letter (a letter preceded by
+an ampersand, &), and the text is in plain text format, when the
+user presses Alt+ the underlined letter, focus is passed to the
+buddy widget.
+
     The parent, name and widget flag, f, arguments are passed
+to the TQFrame constructor.
+
     
    See also text, setBuddy(), alignment, setFrameStyle(), and indent.
+
+
    TQLabel::~TQLabel ()
+
    
+Destroys the label.
+
+
    int TQLabel::alignment () const
+
    Returns the alignment of the label's contents.
+See the "alignment" property for details.
+
    bool TQLabel::autoResize () const
+
    
+
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Returns TRUE if auto-resizing is enabled, or FALSE if auto-resizing
+is disabled.
+
     Auto-resizing is disabled by default.
+
     
    See also setAutoResize().
+
+
    TQWidget * TQLabel::buddy () const
+
    
+Returns this label's buddy, or 0 if no buddy is currently set.
+
     
    See also setBuddy().
+
+
    void TQLabel::clear () [slot]
+
    
+Clears any label contents. Equivalent to setText( "" ).
+
+
    void TQLabel::drawContents ( TQPainter * p ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Draws the label contents using the painter p.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQFrame.
+
    bool TQLabel::hasScaledContents () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the label will scale its contents to fill all available space; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "scaledContents" property for details.
+
    int TQLabel::indent () const
+
    Returns the label's text indent in pixels.
+See the "indent" property for details.
+
    TQMovie * TQLabel::movie () const
+
    
+Returns a pointer to the label's movie, or 0 if no movie has been
+set.
+
     
    See also setMovie().
+
+
    TQPicture * TQLabel::picture () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the label's picture or 0 if the label doesn't have a
+picture.
+
+
    TQPixmap * TQLabel::pixmap () const
+
    Returns the label's pixmap.
+See the "pixmap" property for details.
+
    void TQLabel::setAlignment ( int ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the alignment of the label's contents.
+See the "alignment" property for details.
+
    void TQLabel::setAutoResize ( bool enable ) [virtual]
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Enables auto-resizing if enable is TRUE, or disables it if enable is FALSE.
+
     When auto-resizing is enabled the label will resize itself to fit
+the contents whenever the contents change. The top-left corner is
+not moved. This is useful for TQLabel widgets that are not managed by
+a TQLayout (e.g., top-level widgets).
+
     Auto-resizing is disabled by default.
+
     
    See also autoResize(), adjustSize(), and sizeHint.
+
+
    void TQLabel::setBuddy ( TQWidget * buddy ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets this label's buddy to buddy.
+
     When the user presses the accelerator key indicated by this label,
+the keyboard focus is transferred to the label's buddy widget.
+
     The buddy mechanism is only available for TQLabels that contain
+plain text in which one letter is prefixed with an ampersand, &.
+This letter is set as the accelerator key. The letter is displayed
+underlined, and the '&' is not displayed (i.e. the ShowPrefix
+alignment flag is turned on; see setAlignment()).
+
     In a dialog, you might create two data entry widgets and a label
+for each, and set up the geometry layout so each label is just to
+the left of its data entry widget (its "buddy"), for example:
+
    +    TQLineEdit *nameEd  = new TQLineEdit( this );
+    TQLabel    *nameLb  = new TQLabel( "&Name:", this );
+    nameLb->setBuddy( nameEd );
+    TQLineEdit *phoneEd = new TQLineEdit( this );
+    TQLabel    *phoneLb = new TQLabel( "&Phone:", this );
+    phoneLb->setBuddy( phoneEd );
+    // ( layout setup not shown )
+    
    
+ 
+
     With the code above, the focus jumps to the Name field when the
+user presses Alt+N, and to the Phone field when the user presses
+Alt+P.
+
     To unset a previously set buddy, call this function with buddy
+set to 0.
+
     
    See also buddy(), text, TQAccel, and alignment.
+
+
    Examples: addressbook/centralwidget.cpp, chart/optionsform.cpp, and regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
+
    void TQLabel::setFont ( const TQFont & f ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the font used on the TQLabel to font f.
+
+
    Example: menu/menu.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
+
    void TQLabel::setIndent ( int )
+
    Sets the label's text indent in pixels.
+See the "indent" property for details.
+
    void TQLabel::setMovie ( const TQMovie & movie ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Sets the label contents to movie. Any previous content is
+cleared.
+
     The buddy accelerator, if any, is disabled.
+
     The label resizes itself if auto-resizing is enabled.
+
     
    See also movie() and setBuddy().
+
+
    void TQLabel::setNum ( int num ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Sets the label contents to plain text containing the textual
+representation of integer num. Any previous content is cleared.
+Does nothing if the integer's string representation is the same as
+the current contents of the label.
+
     The buddy accelerator, if any, is disabled.
+
     The label resizes itself if auto-resizing is enabled.
+
     
    See also text, TQString::setNum(), and setBuddy().
+
+
    void TQLabel::setNum ( double num ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the label contents to plain text containing the textual
+representation of double num. Any previous content is cleared.
+Does nothing if the double's string representation is the same as
+the current contents of the label.
+
     The buddy accelerator, if any, is disabled.
+
     The label resizes itself if auto-resizing is enabled.
+
     
    See also text, TQString::setNum(), and setBuddy().
+
+
    void TQLabel::setPicture ( const TQPicture & picture ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Sets the label contents to picture. Any previous content is
+cleared.
+
     The buddy accelerator, if any, is disabled.
+
     
    See also picture() and setBuddy().
+
+
    void TQLabel::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the label's pixmap.
+See the "pixmap" property for details.
+
    void TQLabel::setScaledContents ( bool )
+
    Sets whether the label will scale its contents to fill all available space.
+See the "scaledContents" property for details.
+
    void TQLabel::setText ( const TQString & ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the label's text.
+See the "text" property for details.
+
    void TQLabel::setTextFormat ( TextFormat )
+
    Sets the label's text format.
+See the "textFormat" property for details.
+
    TQString TQLabel::text () const
+
    Returns the label's text.
+See the "text" property for details.
+
    TextFormat TQLabel::textFormat () const
+
    Returns the label's text format.
+See the "textFormat" property for details.
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    Alignment alignment
    
+
    This property holds the alignment of the label's contents.
+
    The alignment is a bitwise OR of TQt::AlignmentFlags and TQt::TextFlags values. The ExpandTabs, SingleLine and ShowPrefix flags apply only if the label contains plain text;
+otherwise they are ignored. The DontClip flag is always
+ignored. WordBreak applies to both rich text and plain text
+labels. The BreakAnywhere flag is not supported in TQLabel.
+
     If the label has a buddy, the ShowPrefix flag is forced to
+TRUE.
+
     The default alignment is AlignAuto | AlignVCenter | ExpandTabs
+if the label doesn't have a buddy and AlignAuto | AlignVCenter | ExpandTabs | ShowPrefix if the label has a buddy. If the label
+contains rich text, additionally WordBreak is turned on.
+
     
    See also TQt::AlignmentFlags, setBuddy(), and text.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setAlignment() and get this property's value with alignment().
+
    BackgroundMode backgroundMode
    
+
    This property holds the label's background mode.
+
    Get this property with backgroundMode().
+
     
    See also TQWidget::backgroundMode.
+
+
    int indent
    
+
    This property holds the label's text indent in pixels.
+
    If a label displays text, the indent applies to the left edge if
+alignment() is AlignLeft, to the right edge if alignment() is
+AlignRight, to the top edge if alignment() is AlignTop, and
+to to the bottom edge if alignment() is AlignBottom.
+
     If indent is negative, or if no indent has been set, the label
+computes the effective indent as follows: If frameWidth() is 0,
+the effective indent becomes 0. If frameWidth() is greater than 0,
+the effective indent becomes half the width of the "x" character
+of the widget's current font().
+
     
    See also alignment, frameWidth, and font.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setIndent() and get this property's value with indent().
+
    TQPixmap pixmap
    
+
    This property holds the label's pixmap.
+
    If no pixmap has been set this will return an invalid pixmap.
+
     Setting the pixmap clears any previous content, and resizes the
+label if TQLabel::autoResize() is TRUE. The buddy accelerator,
+if any, is disabled.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setPixmap() and get this property's value with pixmap().
+
    bool scaledContents
    
+
    This property holds whether the label will scale its contents to fill all available space.
+
    When enabled and the label shows a pixmap, it will scale the
+pixmap to fill the available space.
+
     This property's default is FALSE.
+
     
    See also scaledContents.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setScaledContents() and get this property's value with hasScaledContents().
+
    TQString text
    
+
    This property holds the label's text.
+
    If no text has been set this will return an empty string. Setting
+the text clears any previous content, unless they are the same.
+
     The text will be interpreted either as a plain text or as a rich
+text, depending on the text format setting; see setTextFormat().
+The default setting is AutoText, i.e. TQLabel will try to
+auto-detect the format of the text set.
+
     If the text is interpreted as a plain text and a buddy has been
+set, the buddy accelerator key is updated from the new text.
+
     The label resizes itself if auto-resizing is enabled.
+
     Note that Qlabel is well-suited to display small rich text
+documents, i.e. those small documents that get their document
+specific settings (font, text color, link color) from the label's
+palette and font properties. For large documents, use TQTextEdit
+in read-only mode instead. TQTextEdit will flicker less on resize
+and can also provide a scrollbar when necessary.
+
     
    See also textFormat, setBuddy(), and alignment.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setText() and get this property's value with text().
+
    TextFormat textFormat
    
+
    This property holds the label's text format.
+
    See the TQt::TextFormat enum for an explanation of the possible
+options.
+
     The default format is AutoText.
+
     
    See also text.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setTextFormat() and get this property's value with textFormat().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqlayout.html b/doc/html/ntqlayout.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d63bfad8a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqlayout.html
@@ -0,0 +1,414 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQLayout Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQLayout Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQLayout class is the base class of geometry managers.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqlayout.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject and TQLayoutItem.
+
    Inherited by TQGridLayout and TQBoxLayout.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • int margin - the width of the outside border of the layout
      • 
+
    • ResizeMode resizeMode - the resize mode of the layout
      • 
+
    • int spacing - the spacing between widgets inside the layout
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQLayout class is the base class of geometry managers.
+
     
+
+
     This is an abstract base class inherited by the concrete classes,
+TQBoxLayout and TQGridLayout.
+
     For users of TQLayout subclasses or of TQMainWindow there is seldom
+any need to use the basic functions provided by TQLayout, such as
+setResizeMode() or setMenuBar(). See the layout
+    overview page for more information.
+
     To make your own layout manager, subclass TQGLayoutIterator and
+implement the functions addItem(), sizeHint(), setGeometry(), and
+iterator(). You should also implement minimumSize() to ensure your
+layout isn't resized to zero size if there is too little space. To
+support children whose heights depend on their widths, implement
+hasHeightForWidth() and heightForWidth(). See the custom layout page for an in-depth
+description.
+
     Geometry management stops when the layout manager is deleted.
+
    See also Widget Appearance and Style and Layout Management.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQLayout::ResizeMode
    
+
+
     The possible values are:
+
      
+
    • TQLayout::Auto - If the main widget is a top-level widget with no
+height-for-width (hasHeightForWidth()), this is
+the same as Minimium; otherwise, this is the
+same as FreeResize.
+
    • TQLayout::Fixed - The main widget's size is set to sizeHint(); it
+cannot be resized at all.
+
    • TQLayout::Minimum - The main widget's minimum size is set to
+minimumSize(); it cannot be smaller.
+
    • TQLayout::FreeResize - The widget is not constrained.
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQLayout::TQLayout ( TQWidget * parent, int margin = 0, int spacing = -1, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a new top-level TQLayout called name, with main
+widget parent. parent may not be 0.
+
     The margin is the number of pixels between the edge of the
+widget and the managed children. The spacing sets the value of
+spacing(), which gives the spacing between the managed widgets. If
+spacing is -1 (the default), spacing is set to the value of margin.
+
     There can be only one top-level layout for a widget. It is
+returned by TQWidget::layout()
+
+
    TQLayout::TQLayout ( TQLayout * parentLayout, int spacing = -1, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a new child TQLayout called name, and places it
+inside parentLayout by using the default placement defined by
+addItem().
+
     If spacing is -1, this TQLayout inherits parentLayout's
+spacing(), otherwise the value of spacing is used.
+
+
    TQLayout::TQLayout ( int spacing = -1, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a new child TQLayout called name. If spacing is
+-1, this TQLayout inherits its parent's spacing(); otherwise the
+value of spacing is used.
+
     This layout has to be inserted into another layout before geometry
+management will work.
+
+
    bool TQLayout::activate ()
+
    
+Redoes the layout for mainWidget(). You should generally not need
+to call this because it is automatically called at the most
+appropriate times.
+
     However, if you set up a TQLayout for a visible widget without
+resizing that widget, you will need to call this function in order
+to lay it out.
+
     
    See also TQWidget::updateGeometry().
+
+
    Examples: layout/layout.cpp, popup/popup.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, and sql/overview/form1/main.cpp.
+
    void TQLayout::add ( TQWidget * w )
+
    
+
+
     Adds widget w to this layout in a manner specific to the
+layout. This function uses addItem().
+
+
    Examples: customlayout/border.cpp and customlayout/main.cpp.
+
    void TQLayout::addChildLayout ( TQLayout * l ) [protected]
+
    
+This function is called from addLayout() functions in subclasses
+to add layout l as a sub-layout.
+
+
    void TQLayout::addItem ( TQLayoutItem * item ) [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Implemented in subclasses to add an item. How it is added is
+specific to each subclass.
+
     The ownership of item is transferred to the layout, and it's
+the layout's responsibility to delete it.
+
+
    Examples: customlayout/border.cpp, customlayout/card.cpp, and customlayout/flow.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented in TQGridLayout and TQBoxLayout.
+
    TQRect TQLayout::alignmentRect ( const TQRect & r ) const [protected]
+
    
+Returns the rectangle that should be covered when the geometry of
+this layout is set to r, provided that this layout supports
+setAlignment().
+
     The result is derived from sizeHint() and expanding(). It is never
+larger than r.
+
+
    bool TQLayout::autoAdd () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if this layout automatically grabs all new
+mainWidget()'s new children and adds them as defined by addItem();
+otherwise returns FALSE. This has effect only for top-level
+layouts, i.e. layouts that are direct children of their
+mainWidget().
+
     autoAdd() is disabled by default.
+
     Note that a top-level layout is not necessarily associated with
+the top-level widget.
+
     
    See also setAutoAdd().
+
+
    void TQLayout::deleteAllItems () [protected]
+
    
+Removes and deletes all items in this layout.
+
+
    TQSizePolicy::ExpandData TQLayout::expanding () const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns whether this layout can make use of more space than
+sizeHint(). A value of Vertical or Horizontal means that it wants
+to grow in only one dimension, whereas BothDirections means that
+it wants to grow in both dimensions.
+
     The default implementation returns BothDirections.
+
+
    Examples: customlayout/border.cpp and customlayout/flow.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
+
    Reimplemented in TQGridLayout and TQBoxLayout.
+
    void TQLayout::invalidate () [virtual]
+
    
+Invalidates cached information. Reimplementations must call this.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
+
    Reimplemented in TQGridLayout and TQBoxLayout.
+
    bool TQLayout::isEmpty () const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this layout is empty. The default implementation
+returns FALSE.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
+
    bool TQLayout::isEnabled () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the layout is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setEnabled().
+
+
    bool TQLayout::isTopLevel () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if this layout is a top-level layout, i.e. not a
+child of another layout; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    TQLayoutIterator TQLayout::iterator () [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Implemented in subclasses to return an iterator that iterates over
+this layout's children.
+
     A typical implementation will be:
+
    +        TQLayoutIterator MyLayout::iterator()
+        {
+            TQGLayoutIterator *i = new MyLayoutIterator( internal_data );
+            return TQLayoutIterator( i );
+        }
+    
    
+ 
+where MyLayoutIterator is a subclass of TQGLayoutIterator.
+
+
    Examples: customlayout/border.cpp, customlayout/card.cpp, and customlayout/flow.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
+
    TQWidget * TQLayout::mainWidget ()
+
    
+Returns the main widget (parent widget) of this layout, or 0 if
+this layout is a sub-layout that is not yet inserted.
+
+
    int TQLayout::margin () const
+
    Returns the width of the outside border of the layout.
+See the "margin" property for details.
+
    TQSize TQLayout::maximumSize () const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the maximum size of this layout. This is the largest size
+that the layout can have while still respecting the
+specifications. Does not include what's needed by margin() or
+menuBar().
+
     The default implementation allows unlimited resizing.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
+
    Reimplemented in TQGridLayout and TQBoxLayout.
+
    TQMenuBar * TQLayout::menuBar () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the menu bar set for this layout, or 0 if no menu bar is
+set.
+
+
    TQSize TQLayout::minimumSize () const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the minimum size of this layout. This is the smallest size
+that the layout can have while still respecting the
+specifications. Does not include what's needed by margin() or
+menuBar().
+
     The default implementation allows unlimited resizing.
+
+
    Examples: customlayout/border.cpp, customlayout/card.cpp, and customlayout/flow.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
+
    Reimplemented in TQGridLayout and TQBoxLayout.
+
    void TQLayout::remove ( TQWidget * widget )
+
    
+Removes the widget widget from the layout. After this call, it
+is the caller's responsibility to give the widget a reasonable
+geometry or to put the widget back into a layout.
+
     
    See also removeItem(), TQWidget::geometry, and add().
+
+
    void TQLayout::removeItem ( TQLayoutItem * item )
+
    
+Removes the layout item item from the layout. It is the
+caller's responsibility to delete the item.
+
     Notice that item can be a layout (since TQLayout inherits
+TQLayoutItem).
+
     
    See also remove() and addItem().
+
+
    ResizeMode TQLayout::resizeMode () const
+
    Returns the resize mode of the layout.
+See the "resizeMode" property for details.
+
    void TQLayout::setAutoAdd ( bool b ) [virtual]
+
    
+If b is TRUE, auto-add is enabled; otherwise auto-add is
+disabled.
+
     Warning: If auto-add is enabled, you cannot set stretch factors
+on the child widgets until the widgets are actually inserted in
+the layout (after control returned to the event loop). We
+therefore recommend that you avoid the auto-add feature in new
+programs.
+
     
    See also autoAdd().
+
+
    Examples: hierarchy/objects.cpp and i18n/main.cpp.
+
    void TQLayout::setEnabled ( bool enable )
+
    
+Enables this layout if enable is TRUE, otherwise disables it.
+
     An enabled layout adjusts dynamically to changes; a disabled
+layout acts as if it did not exist.
+
     By default all layouts are enabled.
+
     
    See also isEnabled().
+
+
    void TQLayout::setGeometry ( const TQRect & r ) [pure virtual]
+
    
+This function is reimplemented in subclasses to perform layout.
+
     The default implementation maintains the geometry() information
+given by rect r. Reimplementors must call this function.
+
+
    Examples: customlayout/border.cpp, customlayout/card.cpp, and customlayout/flow.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
+
    Reimplemented in TQGridLayout and TQBoxLayout.
+
    void TQLayout::setMargin ( int ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the width of the outside border of the layout.
+See the "margin" property for details.
+
    void TQLayout::setMenuBar ( TQMenuBar * w ) [virtual]
+
    
+Makes the geometry manager take account of the menu bar w. All
+child widgets are placed below the bottom edge of the menu bar.
+
     A menu bar does its own geometry management: never do addWidget()
+on a TQMenuBar.
+
+
    Examples: layout/layout.cpp and scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
+
    void TQLayout::setResizeMode ( ResizeMode )
+
    Sets the resize mode of the layout.
+See the "resizeMode" property for details.
+
    void TQLayout::setSpacing ( int ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the spacing between widgets inside the layout.
+See the "spacing" property for details.
+
    void TQLayout::setSupportsMargin ( bool b ) [protected]
+
    
+Sets the value returned by supportsMargin(). If b is TRUE,
+margin() handling is implemented by the subclass. If b is
+FALSE (the default), TQLayout will add margin() around top-level
+layouts.
+
     If b is TRUE, margin handling needs to be implemented in
+setGeometry(), maximumSize(), minimumSize(), sizeHint() and
+heightForWidth().
+
     
    See also supportsMargin().
+
+
    int TQLayout::spacing () const
+
    Returns the spacing between widgets inside the layout.
+See the "spacing" property for details.
+
    bool TQLayout::supportsMargin () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if this layout supports TQLayout::margin on
+non-top-level layouts; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also margin.
+
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    int margin
    
+
    This property holds the width of the outside border of the layout.
+
    For some layout classes this property has an effect only on
+top-level layouts; TQBoxLayout and TQGridLayout support margins for
+child layouts. The default value is 0.
+
     
    See also spacing.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setMargin() and get this property's value with margin().
+
    ResizeMode resizeMode
    
+
    This property holds the resize mode of the layout.
+
    The default mode is Auto.
+
     
    See also TQLayout::ResizeMode.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setResizeMode() and get this property's value with resizeMode().
+
    int spacing
    
+
    This property holds the spacing between widgets inside the layout.
+
    The default value is -1, which signifies that the layout's spacing
+should not override the widget's spacing.
+
     
    See also margin.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setSpacing() and get this property's value with spacing().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqlcdnumber.html b/doc/html/ntqlcdnumber.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..dbe811804
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqlcdnumber.html
@@ -0,0 +1,332 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQLCDNumber Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQLCDNumber Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQLCDNumber widget displays a number with LCD-like digits.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqlcdnumber.h>
+
    Inherits TQFrame.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • int intValue - the displayed value rounded to the nearest integer
      • 
+
    • Mode mode - the current display mode (number base)
      • 
+
    • int numDigits - the current number of digits displayed
      • 
+
    • SegmentStyle segmentStyle - the style of the LCDNumber
      • 
+
    • bool smallDecimalPoint - the style of the decimal point
      • 
+
    • double value - the displayed value
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
     The TQLCDNumber widget displays a number with LCD-like digits.
+
     
+
+
     It can display a number in just about any size. It can display
+decimal, hexadecimal, octal or binary numbers. It is easy to
+connect to data sources using the display() slot, which is
+overloaded to take any of five argument types.
+
     There are also slots to change the base with setMode() and the
+decimal point with setSmallDecimalPoint().
+
     TQLCDNumber emits the overflow() signal when it is asked to display
+something beyond its range. The range is set by setNumDigits(),
+but setSmallDecimalPoint() also influences it. If the display is
+set to hexadecimal, octal or binary, the integer equivalent of the
+value is displayed.
+
     These digits and other symbols can be shown: 0/O, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5/S,
+6, 7, 8, 9/g, minus, decimal point, A, B, C, D, E, F, h, H, L, o,
+P, r, u, U, Y, colon, degree sign (which is specified as single
+quote in the string) and space. TQLCDNumber substitutes spaces for
+illegal characters.
+
     It is not possible to retrieve the contents of a TQLCDNumber
+object, although you can retrieve the numeric value with value().
+If you really need the text, we recommend that you connect the
+signals that feed the display() slot to another slot as well and
+store the value there.
+
     Incidentally, TQLCDNumber is the very oldest part of TQt, tracing
+back to a BASIC program on the Sinclair Spectrum.
+
      
+
     
    See also TQLabel, TQFrame, and Basic Widgets.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQLCDNumber::Mode
    
+
+
     This type determines how numbers are shown.
+
      
+
    • TQLCDNumber::Hex - Hexadecimal
+
    • TQLCDNumber::Dec - Decimal
+
    • TQLCDNumber::Oct - Octal
+
    • TQLCDNumber::Bin - Binary
+
     If the display is set to hexadecimal, octal or binary, the integer
+equivalent of the value is displayed.
+
+
    TQLCDNumber::SegmentStyle
    
+
+
     This type determines the visual appearance of the TQLCDNumber
+widget.
+
      
+
    • TQLCDNumber::Outline - gives raised segments filled with the background brush.
+
    • TQLCDNumber::Filled - gives raised segments filled with the foreground brush.
+
    • TQLCDNumber::Flat - gives flat segments filled with the foreground brush.
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQLCDNumber::TQLCDNumber ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs an LCD number, sets the number of digits to 5, the base
+to decimal, the decimal point mode to 'small' and the frame style
+to a raised box. The segmentStyle() is set to Outline.
+
     The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQFrame
+constructor.
+
     
    See also numDigits and smallDecimalPoint.
+
+
    TQLCDNumber::TQLCDNumber ( uint numDigits, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs an LCD number, sets the number of digits to numDigits, the base to decimal, the decimal point mode to 'small'
+and the frame style to a raised box. The segmentStyle() is set to
+Outline.
+
     The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQFrame
+constructor.
+
     
    See also numDigits and smallDecimalPoint.
+
+
    TQLCDNumber::~TQLCDNumber ()
+
    
+Destroys the LCD number.
+
+
    bool TQLCDNumber::checkOverflow ( double num ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if num is too big to be displayed in its entirety;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also display(), numDigits, and smallDecimalPoint.
+
+
    bool TQLCDNumber::checkOverflow ( int num ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns TRUE if num is too big to be displayed in its entirety;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also display(), numDigits, and smallDecimalPoint.
+
+
    void TQLCDNumber::display ( const TQString & s ) [slot]
+
    
+Displays the number represented by the string s.
+
     This version of the function disregards mode() and
+smallDecimalPoint().
+
     These digits and other symbols can be shown: 0/O, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5/S,
+6, 7, 8, 9/g, minus, decimal point, A, B, C, D, E, F, h, H, L, o,
+P, r, u, U, Y, colon, degree sign (which is specified as single
+quote in the string) and space. TQLCDNumber substitutes spaces for
+illegal characters.
+
+
    Examples: rangecontrols/rangecontrols.cpp, t12/lcdrange.cpp, t13/gamebrd.cpp, t5/main.cpp, t6/main.cpp, t7/lcdrange.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    void TQLCDNumber::display ( int num ) [slot]
+
    Sets the displayed value rounded to the nearest integer to num.
+See the "intValue" property for details.
+
    void TQLCDNumber::display ( double num ) [slot]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Displays the number num.
+
+
    void TQLCDNumber::drawContents ( TQPainter * p ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Draws the LCD number using painter p. This function is called
+from TQFrame::paintEvent().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQFrame.
+
    int TQLCDNumber::intValue () const
+
    Returns the displayed value rounded to the nearest integer.
+See the "intValue" property for details.
+
    Mode TQLCDNumber::mode () const
+
    Returns the current display mode (number base).
+See the "mode" property for details.
+
    int TQLCDNumber::numDigits () const
+
    Returns the current number of digits displayed.
+See the "numDigits" property for details.
+
    void TQLCDNumber::overflow () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the TQLCDNumber is asked to display
+a too-large number or a too-long string.
+
     It is never emitted by setNumDigits().
+
+
    SegmentStyle TQLCDNumber::segmentStyle () const
+
    Returns the style of the LCDNumber.
+See the "segmentStyle" property for details.
+
    void TQLCDNumber::setBinMode () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Calls setMode( BIN ). Provided for convenience (e.g. for
+connecting buttons to it).
+
     
    See also mode, setHexMode(), setDecMode(), setOctMode(), and mode.
+
+
    void TQLCDNumber::setDecMode () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Calls setMode( DEC ). Provided for convenience (e.g. for
+connecting buttons to it).
+
     
    See also mode, setHexMode(), setOctMode(), setBinMode(), and mode.
+
+
    void TQLCDNumber::setHexMode () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Calls setMode( HEX ). Provided for convenience (e.g. for
+connecting buttons to it).
+
     
    See also mode, setDecMode(), setOctMode(), setBinMode(), and mode.
+
+
    void TQLCDNumber::setMode ( Mode ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the current display mode (number base).
+See the "mode" property for details.
+
    void TQLCDNumber::setNumDigits ( int nDigits ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the current number of digits displayed to nDigits.
+See the "numDigits" property for details.
+
    void TQLCDNumber::setOctMode () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Calls setMode( OCT ). Provided for convenience (e.g. for
+connecting buttons to it).
+
     
    See also mode, setHexMode(), setDecMode(), setBinMode(), and mode.
+
+
    void TQLCDNumber::setSegmentStyle ( SegmentStyle ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the style of the LCDNumber.
+See the "segmentStyle" property for details.
+
    void TQLCDNumber::setSmallDecimalPoint ( bool ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the style of the decimal point.
+See the "smallDecimalPoint" property for details.
+
    bool TQLCDNumber::smallDecimalPoint () const
+
    Returns the style of the decimal point.
+See the "smallDecimalPoint" property for details.
+
    double TQLCDNumber::value () const
+
    Returns the displayed value.
+See the "value" property for details.
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    int intValue
    
+
    This property holds the displayed value rounded to the nearest integer.
+
    This property corresponds to the nearest integer to the current
+value displayed by the LCDNumber. This is the value used for
+hexadecimal, octal and binary modes.
+
     If the displayed value is not a number, the property has a value
+of 0.
+
+
    Set this property's value with display() and get this property's value with intValue().
+
    Mode mode
    
+
    This property holds the current display mode (number base).
+
    Corresponds to the current display mode, which is one of BIN,
+OCT, DEC (the default) and HEX. DEC mode can display
+floating point values, the other modes display the integer
+equivalent.
+
     
    See also smallDecimalPoint, setHexMode(), setDecMode(), setOctMode(), and setBinMode().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setMode() and get this property's value with mode().
+
    int numDigits
    
+
    This property holds the current number of digits displayed.
+
    Corresponds to the current number of digits. If TQLCDNumber::smallDecimalPoint is FALSE, the decimal point occupies
+one digit position.
+
     
    See also smallDecimalPoint.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setNumDigits() and get this property's value with numDigits().
+
    SegmentStyle segmentStyle
    
+
    This property holds the style of the LCDNumber.
+
    
+
     Style Result
+
     Outline
+Produces raised segments filled with the background color
+(this is the default).
+
     Filled
+Produces raised segments filled with the foreground color.
+
     Flat
+Produces flat segments filled with the foreground color.
+
    
+
     Outline and Filled will additionally use
+TQColorGroup::light() and TQColorGroup::dark() for shadow effects.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setSegmentStyle() and get this property's value with segmentStyle().
+
    bool smallDecimalPoint
    
+
    This property holds the style of the decimal point.
+
    If TRUE the decimal point is drawn between two digit positions.
+Otherwise it occupies a digit position of its own, i.e. is drawn
+in a digit position. The default is FALSE.
+
     The inter-digit space is made slightly wider when the decimal
+point is drawn between the digits.
+
     
    See also mode.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setSmallDecimalPoint() and get this property's value with smallDecimalPoint().
+
    double value
    
+
    This property holds the displayed value.
+
    This property corresponds to the current value displayed by the
+LCDNumber.
+
     If the displayed value is not a number, the property has a value
+of 0.
+
+
    Set this property's value with display() and get this property's value with value().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqlibrary.html b/doc/html/ntqlibrary.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6d5966ead
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqlibrary.html
@@ -0,0 +1,290 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQLibrary Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQLibrary Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQLibrary class provides a wrapper for handling shared libraries.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqlibrary.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • void * resolve ( const TQString & filename, const char * symb )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
+The TQLibrary class provides a wrapper for handling shared libraries.
+
     
+
+
     An instance of a TQLibrary object can handle a single shared
+library and provide access to the functionality in the library in
+a platform independent way. If the library is a component server,
+TQLibrary provides access to the exported component and can
+directly query this component for interfaces.
+
     TQLibrary ensures that the shared library is loaded and stays in
+memory whilst it is in use. TQLibrary can also unload the library
+on destruction and release unused resources.
+
     A typical use of TQLibrary is to resolve an exported symbol in a
+shared object, and to call the function that this symbol
+represents. This is called "explicit linking" in contrast to
+"implicit linking", which is done by the link step in the build
+process when linking an executable against a library.
+
     The following code snippet loads a library, resolves the symbol
+"mysymbol", and calls the function if everything succeeded. If
+something went wrong, e.g. the library file does not exist or the
+symbol is not defined, the function pointer will be 0 and won't be
+called. When the TQLibrary object is destroyed the library will be
+unloaded, making all references to memory allocated in the library
+invalid.
+
     
    +    typedef void (*MyPrototype)();
+    MyPrototype myFunction;
+
+    TQLibrary myLib( "mylib" );
+    myFunction = (MyPrototype) myLib.resolve( "mysymbol" );
+    if ( myFunction ) {
+        myFunction();
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
    See also Plugins.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQLibrary::TQLibrary ( const TQString & filename )
+
    
+Creates a TQLibrary object for the shared library filename. The
+library will be unloaded in the destructor.
+
     Note that filename does not need to include the (platform specific)
+file extension, so calling
+
    +    TQLibrary lib( "mylib" );
+    
    
+ 
+is equivalent to calling
+
    +    TQLibrary lib( "mylib.dll" );
+    
    
+ 
+on Windows, and
+
    +    TQLibrary lib( "libmylib.so" );
+    
    
+ 
+on Unix. Specifying the extension is not recommended, since
+doing so introduces a platform dependency.
+
     If filename does not include a path, the library loader will
+look for the file in the platform specific search paths.
+
     
    See also load(), unload(), and setAutoUnload().
+
+
    TQLibrary::~TQLibrary () [virtual]
+
    
+Deletes the TQLibrary object.
+
     The library will be unloaded if autoUnload() is TRUE (the
+default), otherwise it stays in memory until the application
+exits.
+
     
    See also unload() and setAutoUnload().
+
+
    bool TQLibrary::autoUnload () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the library will be automatically unloaded when
+this wrapper object is destructed; otherwise returns FALSE. The
+default is TRUE.
+
     
    See also setAutoUnload().
+
+
    bool TQLibrary::isLoaded () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the library is loaded; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also unload().
+
+
    TQString TQLibrary::library () const
+
    
+Returns the filename of the shared library this TQLibrary object
+handles, including the platform specific file extension.
+
     For example:
+
    +    TQLibrary lib( "mylib" );
+    TQString str = lib.library();
+    
    
+ 
+will set str to "mylib.dll" on Windows, and "libmylib.so" on Linux.
+
+
    bool TQLibrary::load ()
+
    
+Loads the library. Since resolve() always calls this function
+before resolving any symbols it is not necessary to call it
+explicitly. In some situations you might want the library loaded
+in advance, in which case you would use this function.
+
     On Darwin and Mac OS X this function uses code from dlcompat, part of the
+OpenDarwin project.
+
     
+
     Copyright (c) 2002 Jorge Acereda and Peter O'Gorman
+
     Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+the following conditions:
+
     The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+
     THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+
+
    void * TQLibrary::resolve ( const char * symb )
+
    
+Returns the address of the exported symbol symb. The library is
+loaded if necessary. The function returns 0 if the symbol could
+not be resolved or the library could not be loaded.
+
     
    +    typedef int (*avgProc)( int, int );
+
+    avgProc avg = (avgProc) library->resolve( "avg" );
+    if ( avg )
+        return avg( 5, 8 );
+    else
+        return -1;
+    
    
+ 
+
     The symbol must be exported as a C-function from the library. This
+requires the extern "C" notation if the library is compiled
+with a C++ compiler. On Windows you also have to explicitly export
+the function from the DLL using the __declspec(dllexport)
+compiler directive.
+
     
    +    extern "C" MY_EXPORT_MACRO int avg(int a, int b)
+    {
+        return (a + b) / 2;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     with MY_EXPORT defined as
+
     
    +    #ifdef Q_WS_WIN
+    # define MY_EXPORT __declspec(dllexport)
+    #else
+    # define MY_EXPORT
+    #endif
+    
    
+ 
+
     On Darwin and Mac OS X this function uses code from dlcompat, part of the
+OpenDarwin project.
+
     
+
     Copyright (c) 2002 Jorge Acereda and Peter O'Gorman
+
     Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+the following conditions:
+
     The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+
     THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
+NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
+LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
+OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+
+
    void * TQLibrary::resolve ( const TQString & filename, const char * symb ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Loads the library filename and returns the address of the
+exported symbol symb. Note that like the constructor, filename does not need to include the (platform specific) file
+extension. The library remains loaded until the process exits.
+
     The function returns 0 if the symbol could not be resolved or the
+library could not be loaded.
+
     This function is useful only if you want to resolve a single
+symbol, e.g. a function pointer from a specific library once:
+
     
    +    typedef void (*FunctionType)();
+    static FunctionType *ptrFunction = 0;
+    static bool triedResolve = FALSE;
+    if ( !ptrFunction && !triedResolve )
+        ptrFunction = TQLibrary::resolve( "mylib", "mysymb" );
+
+    if ( ptrFunction )
+        ptrFunction();
+    else
+        ...
+    
    
+ 
+
     If you want to resolve multiple symbols, use a TQLibrary object and
+call the non-static version of resolve().
+
     
    See also 
+
    void TQLibrary::setAutoUnload ( bool enabled )
+
    
+If enabled is TRUE (the default), the wrapper object is set to
+automatically unload the library upon destruction. If enabled
+is FALSE, the wrapper object is not unloaded unless you explicitly
+call unload().
+
     
    See also autoUnload().
+
+
    bool TQLibrary::unload () [virtual]
+
    
+Unloads the library and returns TRUE if the library could be
+unloaded; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     This function is called by the destructor if autoUnload() is
+enabled.
+
     
    See also resolve().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqlineedit.html b/doc/html/ntqlineedit.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..923c3de0c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqlineedit.html
@@ -0,0 +1,773 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQLineEdit Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQLineEdit Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQLineEdit widget is a one-line text editor.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqlineedit.h>
+
    Inherits TQFrame.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • bool acceptableInput - whether the input satisfies the inputMask and the validator  (read only)
      • 
+
    • Alignment alignment - the alignment of the line edit
      • 
+
    • int cursorPosition - the current cursor position for this line edit
      • 
+
    • TQString displayText - the displayed text  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool dragEnabled - whether the lineedit starts a drag if the user presses and moves the mouse on some selected text
      • 
+
    • EchoMode echoMode - the line edit's echo mode
      • 
+
    • bool edited - whether the line edit has been edited. Use modified instead  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • bool frame - whether the line edit draws itself with a frame
      • 
+
    • bool hasMarkedText - whether part of the text has been selected by the user. Use hasSelectedText instead  (read only)  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • bool hasSelectedText - whether there is any text selected  (read only)
      • 
+
    • TQString inputMask - the validation input mask
      • 
+
    • TQString markedText - the text selected by the user. Use selectedText instead  (read only)  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • int maxLength - the maximum permitted length of the text
      • 
+
    • bool modified - whether the line edit's contents has been modified by the user  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool readOnly - whether the line edit is read only
      • 
+
    • bool redoAvailable - whether redo is available  (read only)
      • 
+
    • TQString selectedText - the selected text  (read only)
      • 
+
    • TQString text - the line edit's text
      • 
+
    • bool undoAvailable - whether undo is available  (read only)
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • virtual void keyPressEvent ( TQKeyEvent * e )
      • 
+
    • virtual TQPopupMenu * createPopupMenu ()
      • 
+
    • void repaintArea ( int from, int to )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQLineEdit widget is a one-line text editor.
+
     
+
+
     A line edit allows the user to enter and edit a single line of
+plain text with a useful collection of editing functions,
+including undo and redo, cut and paste, and drag and drop.
+
     By changing the echoMode() of a line edit, it can also be used as
+a "write-only" field, for inputs such as passwords.
+
     The length of the text can be constrained to maxLength(). The text
+can be arbitrarily constrained using a validator() or an
+inputMask(), or both.
+
     A related class is TQTextEdit which allows multi-line, rich-text
+editing.
+
     You can change the text with setText() or insert(). The text is
+retrieved with text(); the displayed text (which may be different,
+see EchoMode) is retrieved with displayText(). Text can be
+selected with setSelection() or selectAll(), and the selection can
+be cut(), copy()ied and paste()d. The text can be aligned with
+setAlignment().
+
     When the text changes the textChanged() signal is emitted; when
+the Return or Enter key is pressed the returnPressed() signal is
+emitted. Note that if there is a validator set on the line edit,
+the returnPressed() signal will only be emitted if the validator
+returns Acceptable.
+
     By default, TQLineEdits have a frame as specified by the Windows
+and Motif style guides; you can turn it off by calling
+setFrame(FALSE).
+
     The default key bindings are described below. The line edit also
+provides a context menu (usually invoked by a right mouse click)
+that presents some of these editing options.
+
+
    
+
     Keypress Action
+
     Left Arrow Moves the cursor one character to the left.
+
     Shift+Left Arrow Moves and selects text one character to the left.
+
     Right Arrow Moves the cursor one character to the right.
+
     Shift+Right Arrow Moves and selects text one character to the right.
+
     Home Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line.
+
     End Moves the cursor to the end of the line.
+
     Backspace Deletes the character to the left of the cursor.
+
     Ctrl+Backspace Deletes the word to the left of the cursor.
+
     Delete Deletes the character to the right of the cursor.
+
     Ctrl+Delete Deletes the word to the right of the cursor.
+
     Ctrl+A Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line.
+
     Ctrl+B Moves the cursor one character to the left.
+
     Ctrl+C Copies the selected text to the clipboard.
+(Windows also supports Ctrl+Insert for this operation.)
+
     Ctrl+D Deletes the character to the right of the cursor.
+
     Ctrl+E Moves the cursor to the end of the line.
+
     Ctrl+F Moves the cursor one character to the right.
+
     Ctrl+H Deletes the character to the left of the cursor.
+
     Ctrl+K Deletes to the end of the line.
+
     Ctrl+V Pastes the clipboard text into line edit.
+(Windows also supports Shift+Insert for this operation.)
+
     Ctrl+X Deletes the selected text and copies it to the clipboard.
+(Windows also supports Shift+Delete for this operation.)
+
     Ctrl+Z Undoes the last operation.
+
     Ctrl+Y Redoes the last undone operation.
+
    
+
     Any other key sequence that represents a valid character, will
+cause the character to be inserted into the line edit.
+
      
+
     
    See also TQTextEdit, TQLabel, TQComboBox, GUI Design Handbook: Field, Entry, and Basic Widgets.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQLineEdit::EchoMode
    
+
+
     This enum type describes how a line edit should display its
+contents.
+
      
+
    • TQLineEdit::Normal - Display characters as they are entered. This is the
+default.
+
    • TQLineEdit::NoEcho - Do not display anything. This may be appropriate
+for passwords where even the length of the
+password should be kept secret.
+
    • TQLineEdit::Password - Display asterisks instead of the characters
+actually entered.
+
     
    See also echoMode and echoMode.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQLineEdit::TQLineEdit ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a line edit with no text.
+
     The maximum text length is set to 32767 characters.
+
     The parent and name arguments are sent to the TQWidget constructor.
+
     
    See also text and maxLength.
+
+
    TQLineEdit::TQLineEdit ( const TQString & contents, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a line edit containing the text contents.
+
     The cursor position is set to the end of the line and the maximum
+text length to 32767 characters.
+
     The parent and name arguments are sent to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
     
    See also text and maxLength.
+
+
    TQLineEdit::TQLineEdit ( const TQString & contents, const TQString & inputMask, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a line edit with an input inputMask and the text contents.
+
     The cursor position is set to the end of the line and the maximum
+text length is set to the length of the mask (the number of mask
+characters and separators).
+
     The parent and name arguments are sent to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
     
    See also setMask() and text.
+
+
    TQLineEdit::~TQLineEdit ()
+
    
+Destroys the line edit.
+
+
    int TQLineEdit::alignment () const
+
    Returns the alignment of the line edit.
+See the "alignment" property for details.
+
    void TQLineEdit::backspace ()
+
    
+If no text is selected, deletes the character to the left of the
+text cursor and moves the cursor one position to the left. If any
+text is selected, the cursor is moved to the beginning of the
+selected text and the selected text is deleted.
+
     
    See also del().
+
+
    int TQLineEdit::characterAt ( int xpos, TQChar * chr ) const
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
    void TQLineEdit::clear () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Clears the contents of the line edit.
+
+
    void TQLineEdit::clearModified ()
+
    
+Resets the modified flag to FALSE.
+
     
    See also modified.
+
+
    void TQLineEdit::clearValidator () [virtual slot]
+
    
+This slot is equivalent to setValidator(0).
+
+
    void TQLineEdit::copy () const [virtual slot]
+
    
+Copies the selected text to the clipboard, if there is any, and if
+echoMode() is Normal.
+
     
    See also cut() and paste().
+
+
    TQPopupMenu * TQLineEdit::createPopupMenu () [virtual protected]
+
    
+This function is called to create the popup menu which is shown
+when the user clicks on the line edit with the right mouse button.
+If you want to create a custom popup menu, reimplement this
+function and return the popup menu you create. The popup menu's
+ownership is transferred to the caller.
+
+
    void TQLineEdit::cursorBackward ( bool mark, int steps = 1 )
+
    
+Moves the cursor back steps characters. If mark is TRUE each
+character moved over is added to the selection; if mark is
+FALSE the selection is cleared.
+
     
    See also cursorForward().
+
+
    void TQLineEdit::cursorForward ( bool mark, int steps = 1 )
+
    
+Moves the cursor forward steps characters. If mark is TRUE
+each character moved over is added to the selection; if mark is
+FALSE the selection is cleared.
+
     
    See also cursorBackward().
+
+
    void TQLineEdit::cursorLeft ( bool mark, int steps = 1 )
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+For compatibilty with older applications only. Use cursorBackward()
+instead.
+
    See also cursorBackward().
+
+
    int TQLineEdit::cursorPosition () const
+
    Returns the current cursor position for this line edit.
+See the "cursorPosition" property for details.
+
    void TQLineEdit::cursorRight ( bool mark, int steps = 1 )
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
     Use cursorForward() instead.
+
     
    See also cursorForward().
+
+
    void TQLineEdit::cursorWordBackward ( bool mark )
+
    
+Moves the cursor one word backward. If mark is TRUE, the word
+is also selected.
+
     
    See also cursorWordForward().
+
+
    void TQLineEdit::cursorWordForward ( bool mark )
+
    
+Moves the cursor one word forward. If mark is TRUE, the word is
+also selected.
+
     
    See also cursorWordBackward().
+
+
    void TQLineEdit::cut () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Copies the selected text to the clipboard and deletes it, if there
+is any, and if echoMode() is Normal.
+
     If the current validator disallows deleting the selected text,
+cut() will copy without deleting.
+
     
    See also copy(), paste(), and setValidator().
+
+
    void TQLineEdit::del ()
+
    
+If no text is selected, deletes the character to the right of the
+text cursor. If any text is selected, the cursor is moved to the
+beginning of the selected text and the selected text is deleted.
+
     
    See also backspace().
+
+
    void TQLineEdit::deselect () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Deselects any selected text.
+
     
    See also setSelection() and selectAll().
+
+
    TQString TQLineEdit::displayText () const
+
    Returns the displayed text.
+See the "displayText" property for details.
+
    bool TQLineEdit::dragEnabled () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the lineedit starts a drag if the user presses and moves the mouse on some selected text; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "dragEnabled" property for details.
+
    EchoMode TQLineEdit::echoMode () const
+
    Returns the line edit's echo mode.
+See the "echoMode" property for details.
+
    bool TQLineEdit::edited () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the line edit has been edited. Use modified instead; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "edited" property for details.
+
    void TQLineEdit::end ( bool mark )
+
    
+Moves the text cursor to the end of the line unless it is already
+there. If mark is TRUE, text is selected towards the last
+position; otherwise, any selected text is unselected if the cursor
+is moved.
+
     
    See also home().
+
+
    bool TQLineEdit::frame () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the line edit draws itself with a frame; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "frame" property for details.
+
    bool TQLineEdit::getSelection ( int * start, int * end )
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+use selectedText(), selectionStart() 
+
    bool TQLineEdit::hasAcceptableInput () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the input satisfies the inputMask and the validator; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "acceptableInput" property for details.
+
    bool TQLineEdit::hasMarkedText () const
+
    Returns TRUE if part of the text has been selected by the user. Use hasSelectedText instead; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "hasMarkedText" property for details.
+
    bool TQLineEdit::hasSelectedText () const
+
    Returns TRUE if there is any text selected; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "hasSelectedText" property for details.
+
    void TQLineEdit::home ( bool mark )
+
    
+Moves the text cursor to the beginning of the line unless it is
+already there. If mark is TRUE, text is selected towards the
+first position; otherwise, any selected text is unselected if the
+cursor is moved.
+
     
    See also end().
+
+
    TQString TQLineEdit::inputMask () const
+
    Returns the validation input mask.
+See the "inputMask" property for details.
+
    void TQLineEdit::insert ( const TQString & newText ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Deletes any selected text, inserts newText, and validates the
+result. If it is valid, it sets it as the new contents of the line
+edit.
+
+
    bool TQLineEdit::isModified () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the line edit's contents has been modified by the user; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "modified" property for details.
+
    bool TQLineEdit::isReadOnly () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the line edit is read only; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "readOnly" property for details.
+
    bool TQLineEdit::isRedoAvailable () const
+
    Returns TRUE if redo is available; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "redoAvailable" property for details.
+
    bool TQLineEdit::isUndoAvailable () const
+
    Returns TRUE if undo is available; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "undoAvailable" property for details.
+
    void TQLineEdit::keyPressEvent ( TQKeyEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Converts key press event e into a line edit action.
+
     If Return or Enter is pressed and the current text is valid (or
+can be made valid by the
+validator), the signal returnPressed() is emitted.
+
     The default key bindings are listed in the detailed
+    description.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
+
    void TQLineEdit::lostFocus () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the line edit has lost focus.
+
     
    See also focus, TQWidget::focusInEvent(), and TQWidget::focusOutEvent().
+
+
    TQString TQLineEdit::markedText () const
+
    Returns the text selected by the user. Use selectedText instead.
+See the "markedText" property for details.
+
    int TQLineEdit::maxLength () const
+
    Returns the maximum permitted length of the text.
+See the "maxLength" property for details.
+
    TQSize TQLineEdit::minimumSizeHint () const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns a minimum size for the line edit.
+
     The width returned is enough for at least one character.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
+
    void TQLineEdit::paste () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Inserts the clipboard's text at the cursor position, deleting any
+selected text, providing the line edit is not read-only.
+
     If the end result would not be acceptable to the current
+validator, nothing happens.
+
     
    See also copy() and cut().
+
+
    void TQLineEdit::redo () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Redoes the last operation if redo is available.
+
+
    void TQLineEdit::repaintArea ( int from, int to ) [protected]
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+Repaints all characters from from to to. If cursorPos is
+between from and to, ensures that cursorPos is visible.
+
+
    void TQLineEdit::returnPressed () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the Return or Enter key is pressed.
+Note that if there is a validator() or inputMask() set on the line
+edit, the returnPressed() signal will only be emitted if the input
+follows the inputMask() and the validator() returns Acceptable.
+
+
    Example: popup/popup.cpp.
+
    void TQLineEdit::selectAll () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Selects all the text (i.e. highlights it) and moves the cursor to
+the end. This is useful when a default value has been inserted
+because if the user types before clicking on the widget, the
+selected text will be deleted.
+
     
    See also setSelection() and deselect().
+
+
    TQString TQLineEdit::selectedText () const
+
    Returns the selected text.
+See the "selectedText" property for details.
+
    void TQLineEdit::selectionChanged () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the selection changes.
+
     
    See also hasSelectedText and selectedText.
+
+
    int TQLineEdit::selectionStart () const
+
    
+selectionStart() returns the index of the first selected character in the
+line edit or -1 if no text is selected.
+
     
    See also selectedText.
+
+
    void TQLineEdit::setAlignment ( int flag ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the alignment of the line edit to flag.
+See the "alignment" property for details.
+
    void TQLineEdit::setCursorPosition ( int ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the current cursor position for this line edit.
+See the "cursorPosition" property for details.
+
    void TQLineEdit::setDragEnabled ( bool b ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets whether the lineedit starts a drag if the user presses and moves the mouse on some selected text to b.
+See the "dragEnabled" property for details.
+
    void TQLineEdit::setEchoMode ( EchoMode ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the line edit's echo mode.
+See the "echoMode" property for details.
+
    void TQLineEdit::setEdited ( bool )
+
    Sets whether the line edit has been edited. Use modified instead.
+See the "edited" property for details.
+
    void TQLineEdit::setFrame ( bool ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets whether the line edit draws itself with a frame.
+See the "frame" property for details.
+
    void TQLineEdit::setInputMask ( const TQString & inputMask )
+
    Sets the validation input mask to inputMask.
+See the "inputMask" property for details.
+
    void TQLineEdit::setMaxLength ( int ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the maximum permitted length of the text.
+See the "maxLength" property for details.
+
    void TQLineEdit::setReadOnly ( bool ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets whether the line edit is read only.
+See the "readOnly" property for details.
+
    void TQLineEdit::setSelection ( int start, int length ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Selects text from position start and for length characters.
+
     Note that this function sets the cursor's position to the end of
+the selection regardless of its current position.
+
     
    See also deselect(), selectAll(), getSelection(), cursorForward(), and cursorBackward().
+
+
    void TQLineEdit::setText ( const TQString & ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the line edit's text.
+See the "text" property for details.
+
    void TQLineEdit::setValidator ( const TQValidator * v ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Sets this line edit to only accept input that the validator, v,
+will accept. This allows you to place any arbitrary constraints on
+the text which may be entered.
+
     If v == 0, setValidator() removes the current input validator.
+The initial setting is to have no input validator (i.e. any input
+is accepted up to maxLength()).
+
     
    See also validator(), TQIntValidator, TQDoubleValidator, and TQRegExpValidator.
+
+
    Examples: lineedits/lineedits.cpp and wizard/wizard.cpp.
+
    TQSize TQLineEdit::sizeHint () const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns a recommended size for the widget.
+
     The width returned, in pixels, is usually enough for about 15 to
+20 characters.
+
+
    Example: addressbook/centralwidget.cpp.
+
    TQString TQLineEdit::text () const
+
    Returns the line edit's text.
+See the "text" property for details.
+
    void TQLineEdit::textChanged ( const TQString & ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the text changes. The argument is
+the new text.
+
+
    Examples: simple/main.cpp, wizard/wizard.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    void TQLineEdit::undo () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Undoes the last operation if undo is available. Deselects any current
+selection, and updates the selection start to the current cursor
+position.
+
+
    bool TQLineEdit::validateAndSet ( const TQString & newText, int newPos, int newMarkAnchor, int newMarkDrag )
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+Use setText(), setCursorPosition() and setSelection() instead.
+
+
    const TQValidator * TQLineEdit::validator () const
+
    
+Returns a pointer to the current input validator, or 0 if no
+validator has been set.
+
     
    See also setValidator().
+
+
    Example: wizard/wizard.cpp.
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    bool acceptableInput
    
+
    This property holds whether the input satisfies the inputMask and the validator.
+
    Get this property's value with hasAcceptableInput().
+
    See also inputMask and setValidator().
+
+
    Alignment alignment
    
+
    This property holds the alignment of the line edit.
+
    Possible Values are TQt::AlignAuto, TQt::AlignLeft, TQt::AlignRight and TQt::AlignHCenter.
+
     Attempting to set the alignment to an illegal flag combination
+does nothing.
+
     
    See also TQt::AlignmentFlags.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setAlignment() and get this property's value with alignment().
+
    int cursorPosition
    
+
    This property holds the current cursor position for this line edit.
+
    Setting the cursor position causes a repaint when appropriate.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setCursorPosition() and get this property's value with cursorPosition().
+
    TQString displayText
    
+
    This property holds the displayed text.
+
    If EchoMode is Normal this returns the same as text(); if
+EchoMode is Password it returns a string of asterisks
+text().length() characters long, e.g. "******"; if EchoMode is
+NoEcho returns an empty string, "".
+
     
    See also echoMode, text, and EchoMode.
+
+
    Get this property's value with displayText().
+
    bool dragEnabled
    
+
    This property holds whether the lineedit starts a drag if the user presses and moves the mouse on some selected text.
+
    
+
    Set this property's value with setDragEnabled() and get this property's value with dragEnabled().
+
    EchoMode echoMode
    
+
    This property holds the line edit's echo mode.
+
    The initial setting is Normal, but TQLineEdit also supports NoEcho and Password modes.
+
     The widget's display and the ability to copy or drag the text is
+affected by this setting.
+
     
    See also EchoMode and displayText.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setEchoMode() and get this property's value with echoMode().
+
    bool edited
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
    This property holds whether the line edit has been edited. Use modified instead.
+
    
+
    Set this property's value with setEdited() and get this property's value with edited().
+
    bool frame
    
+
    This property holds whether the line edit draws itself with a frame.
+
    If enabled (the default) the line edit draws itself inside a
+two-pixel frame, otherwise the line edit draws itself without any
+frame.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setFrame() and get this property's value with frame().
+
    bool hasMarkedText
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
    This property holds whether part of the text has been selected by the user. Use hasSelectedText instead.
+
    
+
    Get this property's value with hasMarkedText().
+
    bool hasSelectedText
    
+
    This property holds whether there is any text selected.
+
    hasSelectedText() returns TRUE if some or all of the text has been
+selected by the user; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also selectedText.
+
+
    Get this property's value with hasSelectedText().
+
    TQString inputMask
    
+
    This property holds the validation input mask.
+
    If no mask is set, inputMask() returns TQString::null.
+
     Sets the TQLineEdit's validation mask. Validators can be used
+instead of, or in conjunction with masks; see setValidator().
+
     Unset the mask and return to normal TQLineEdit operation by passing
+an empty string ("") or just calling setInputMask() with no
+arguments.
+
     The mask format understands these mask characters:
+
    
+
     Character Meaning
+
     A ASCII alphabetic character required. A-Z, a-z.
+
     a ASCII alphabetic character permitted but not required.
+
     N ASCII alphanumeric character required. A-Z, a-z, 0-9.
+
     n ASCII alphanumeric character permitted but not required.
+
     X Any character required.
+
     x Any character permitted but not required.
+
     9 ASCII digit required. 0-9.
+
     0 ASCII digit permitted but not required.
+
     D ASCII digit required. 1-9.
+
     d ASCII digit permitted but not required (1-9).
+
     # ASCII digit or plus/minus sign permitted but not required.
+
     > All following alphabetic characters are uppercased.
+
     < All following alphabetic characters are lowercased.
+
     ! Switch off case conversion.
+
     \ Use \ to escape the special
+characters listed above to use them as
+separators.
+
    
+
     The mask consists of a string of mask characters and separators,
+optionally followed by a semi-colon and the character used for
+blanks: the blank characters are always removed from the text
+after editing. The default blank character is space.
+
     Examples:
+
    
+
     Mask Notes
+
     000.000.000.000;_ IP address; blanks are _.
+
     0000-00-00 ISO Date; blanks are space
+
     >AAAAA-AAAAA-AAAAA-AAAAA-AAAAA;# License number;
+blanks are - and all (alphabetic) characters are converted to
+uppercase.
+
    
+
     To get range control (e.g. for an IP address) use masks together
+with validators.
+
     
    See also maxLength.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setInputMask() and get this property's value with inputMask().
+
    TQString markedText
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
    This property holds the text selected by the user. Use selectedText instead.
+
    
+
    Get this property's value with markedText().
+
    int maxLength
    
+
    This property holds the maximum permitted length of the text.
+
    If the text is too long, it is truncated at the limit.
+
     If truncation occurs any selected text will be unselected, the
+cursor position is set to 0 and the first part of the string is
+shown.
+
     If the line edit has an input mask, the mask defines the maximum
+string length.
+
     
    See also inputMask.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setMaxLength() and get this property's value with maxLength().
+
    bool modified
    
+
    This property holds whether the line edit's contents has been modified by the user.
+
    The modified flag is never read by TQLineEdit; it has a default value
+of FALSE and is changed to TRUE whenever the user changes the line
+edit's contents.
+
     This is useful for things that need to provide a default value but
+do not start out knowing what the default should be (perhaps it
+depends on other fields on the form). Start the line edit without
+the best default, and when the default is known, if modified()
+returns FALSE (the user hasn't entered any text), insert the
+default value.
+
     Calling clearModified() or setText() resets the modified flag to
+FALSE.
+
+
    Get this property's value with isModified().
+
    bool readOnly
    
+
    This property holds whether the line edit is read only.
+
    In read-only mode, the user can still copy the text to the
+clipboard or drag-and-drop the text (if echoMode() is Normal),
+but cannot edit it.
+
     TQLineEdit does not show a cursor in read-only mode.
+
     
    See also enabled.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setReadOnly() and get this property's value with isReadOnly().
+
    bool redoAvailable
    
+
    This property holds whether redo is available.
+
    
+
    Get this property's value with isRedoAvailable().
+
    TQString selectedText
    
+
    This property holds the selected text.
+
    If there is no selected text this property's value is
+TQString::null.
+
     
    See also hasSelectedText.
+
+
    Get this property's value with selectedText().
+
    TQString text
    
+
    This property holds the line edit's text.
+
    Note that setting this property clears the selection, clears the
+undo/redo history, moves the cursor to the end of the line and
+resets the modified property to FALSE. The text is not
+validated when inserted with setText().
+
     The text is truncated to maxLength() length.
+
     
    See also insert().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setText() and get this property's value with text().
+
    bool undoAvailable
    
+
    This property holds whether undo is available.
+
    
+
    Get this property's value with isUndoAvailable().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqlist.html b/doc/html/ntqlist.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..eadb6b2e7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqlist.html
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQList Class Reference (obsolete)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQList Class Reference (obsolete)
    
+
+ 
+
     
    +#include <ntqlist.h>
    
+ 
+
     The TQList class has been renamed  TQPtrList  in TQt 3.0.
+
+
+
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqlistbox.html b/doc/html/ntqlistbox.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8b9bb4ef0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqlistbox.html
@@ -0,0 +1,1163 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQListBox Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQListBox Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQListBox widget provides a list of selectable, read-only items.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqlistbox.h>
+
    Inherits TQScrollView.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQListBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
      • 
+
    • ~TQListBox ()
      • 
+
    • uint count () const
      • 
+
    • void insertStringList ( const TQStringList & list, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • void insertStrList ( const TQStrList * list, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • void insertStrList ( const TQStrList & list, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • void insertStrList ( const char ** strings, int numStrings = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • void insertItem ( const TQListBoxItem * lbi, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • void insertItem ( const TQListBoxItem * lbi, const TQListBoxItem * after )
      • 
+
    • void insertItem ( const TQString & text, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • void insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • void insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQString & text, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • void removeItem ( int index )
      • 
+
    • TQString text ( int index ) const
      • 
+
    • const TQPixmap * pixmap ( int index ) const
      • 
+
    • void changeItem ( const TQListBoxItem * lbi, int index )
      • 
+
    • void changeItem ( const TQString & text, int index )
      • 
+
    • void changeItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int index )
      • 
+
    • void changeItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQString & text, int index )
      • 
+
    • void takeItem ( const TQListBoxItem * item )
      • 
+
    • int numItemsVisible () const
      • 
+
    • int currentItem () const
      • 
+
    • TQString currentText () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setCurrentItem ( int index )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setCurrentItem ( TQListBoxItem * i )
      • 
+
    • void centerCurrentItem ()  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • int topItem () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setTopItem ( int index )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setBottomItem ( int index )
      • 
+
    • long maxItemWidth () const
      • 
+
    • enum SelectionMode { Single, Multi, Extended, NoSelection }
      • 
+
    • virtual void setSelectionMode ( SelectionMode )
      • 
+
    • SelectionMode selectionMode () const
      • 
+
    • void setMultiSelection ( bool multi )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • bool isMultiSelection () const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • virtual void setSelected ( TQListBoxItem * item, bool select )
      • 
+
    • void setSelected ( int index, bool select )
      • 
+
    • bool isSelected ( int i ) const
      • 
+
    • bool isSelected ( const TQListBoxItem * i ) const
      • 
+
    • TQListBoxItem * selectedItem () const
      • 
+
    • TQListBoxItem * item ( int index ) const
      • 
+
    • int index ( const TQListBoxItem * lbi ) const
      • 
+
    • TQListBoxItem * findItem ( const TQString & text, ComparisonFlags compare = BeginsWith ) const
      • 
+
    • void triggerUpdate ( bool doLayout )
      • 
+
    • bool itemVisible ( int index )
      • 
+
    • bool itemVisible ( const TQListBoxItem * item )
      • 
+
    • enum LayoutMode { FixedNumber, FitToWidth, FitToHeight = FitToWidth, Variable }
      • 
+
    • virtual void setColumnMode ( LayoutMode )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setColumnMode ( int )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setRowMode ( LayoutMode )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setRowMode ( int )
      • 
+
    • LayoutMode columnMode () const
      • 
+
    • LayoutMode rowMode () const
      • 
+
    • int numColumns () const
      • 
+
    • int numRows () const
      • 
+
    • bool variableWidth () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setVariableWidth ( bool )
      • 
+
    • bool variableHeight () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setVariableHeight ( bool )
      • 
+
    • bool autoScrollBar () const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void setAutoScrollBar ( bool enable )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • bool scrollBar () const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void setScrollBar ( bool enable )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • bool autoBottomScrollBar () const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void setAutoBottomScrollBar ( bool enable )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • bool bottomScrollBar () const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void setBottomScrollBar ( bool enable )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • int inSort ( const TQListBoxItem * lbi )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • int inSort ( const TQString & text )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • int cellHeight ( int i ) const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • int cellHeight () const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • int cellWidth () const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • int numCols () const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • int itemHeight ( int index = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • TQListBoxItem * itemAt ( const TQPoint & p ) const
      • 
+
    • TQRect itemRect ( TQListBoxItem * item ) const
      • 
+
    • TQListBoxItem * firstItem () const
      • 
+
    • void sort ( bool ascending = TRUE )
      • 
+
    
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • LayoutMode columnMode - the column layout mode for this list box
      • 
+
    • uint count - the number of items in the list box  (read only)
      • 
+
    • int currentItem - the current highlighted item
      • 
+
    • TQString currentText - the text of the current item  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool multiSelection - whether or not the list box is in Multi selection mode  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • int numColumns - the number of columns in the list box  (read only)
      • 
+
    • int numItemsVisible - the number of visible items  (read only)
      • 
+
    • int numRows - the number of rows in the list box  (read only)
      • 
+
    • LayoutMode rowMode - the row layout mode for this list box
      • 
+
    • SelectionMode selectionMode - the selection mode of the list box
      • 
+
    • int topItem - the index of an item at the top of the screen
      • 
+
    • bool variableHeight - whether this list box has variable-height rows
      • 
+
    • bool variableWidth - whether this list box has variable-width columns
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • void updateItem ( int index )
      • 
+
    • void updateItem ( TQListBoxItem * i )
      • 
+
    • int totalWidth () const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • int totalHeight () const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • virtual void paintCell ( TQPainter * p, int row, int col )
      • 
+
    • void toggleCurrentItem ()
      • 
+
    • bool isRubberSelecting () const
      • 
+
    • void doLayout () const
      • 
+
    • bool itemYPos ( int index, int * yPos ) const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • int findItem ( int yPos ) const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQListBox widget provides a list of selectable, read-only items.
+
     
+
+
     This is typically a single-column list in which either no item or
+one item is selected, but it can also be used in many other ways.
+
     TQListBox will add scroll bars as necessary, but it isn't intended
+for really big lists. If you want more than a few thousand
+items, it's probably better to use a different widget mainly
+because the scroll bars won't provide very good navigation, but
+also because TQListBox may become slow with huge lists. (See
+TQListView and TQTable for possible alternatives.)
+
     There are a variety of selection modes described in the
+TQListBox::SelectionMode documentation. The default is Single
+selection mode, but you can change it using setSelectionMode().
+(setMultiSelection() is still provided for compatibility with TQt
+1.x. We recommend using setSelectionMode() in all code.)
+
     Because TQListBox offers multiple selection it must display
+keyboard focus and selection state separately. Therefore there are
+functions both to set the selection state of an item, i.e.
+setSelected(), and to set which item displays keyboard focus, i.e.
+setCurrentItem().
+
     The list box normally arranges its items in a single column and
+adds a vertical scroll bar if required. It is possible to have a
+different fixed number of columns (setColumnMode()), or as many
+columns as will fit in the list box's assigned screen space
+(setColumnMode(FitToWidth)), or to have a fixed number of rows
+(setRowMode()) or as many rows as will fit in the list box's
+assigned screen space (setRowMode(FitToHeight)). In all these
+cases TQListBox will add scroll bars, as appropriate, in at least
+one direction.
+
     If multiple rows are used, each row can be as high as necessary
+(the normal setting), or you can request that all items will have
+the same height by calling setVariableHeight(FALSE). The same
+applies to a column's width, see setVariableWidth().
+
     The TQListBox's items are TQListBoxItem objects. TQListBox provides
+methods to insert new items as strings, as pixmaps, and as
+TQListBoxItem * (insertItem() with various arguments), and to
+replace an existing item with a new string, pixmap or TQListBoxItem
+(changeItem() with various arguments). You can also remove items
+singly with removeItem() or clear() the entire list box. Note that
+if you create a TQListBoxItem yourself and insert it, TQListBox
+takes ownership of the item.
+
     You can also create a TQListBoxItem, such as TQListBoxText or
+TQListBoxPixmap, with the list box as first parameter. The item
+will then append itself. When you delete an item it is
+automatically removed from the list box.
+
     The list of items can be arbitrarily large; TQListBox will add
+scroll bars if necessary. TQListBox can display a single-column
+(the common case) or multiple-columns, and offers both single and
+multiple selection. TQListBox does not support multiple-column
+items (but TQListView and TQTable do), or tree hierarchies (but
+TQListView does).
+
     The list box items can be accessed both as TQListBoxItem objects
+(recommended) and using integer indexes (the original TQListBox
+implementation used an array of strings internally, and the API
+still supports this mode of operation). Everything can be done
+using the new objects, and most things can be done using indexes.
+
     Each item in a TQListBox contains a TQListBoxItem. One of the items
+can be the current item. The currentChanged() signal and the
+highlighted() signal are emitted when a new item becomes current,
+e.g. because the user clicks on it or TQListBox::setCurrentItem()
+is called. The selected() signal is emitted when the user
+double-clicks on an item or presses Enter on the current item.
+
     If the user does not select anything, no signals are emitted and
+currentItem() returns -1.
+
     A list box has WheelFocus as a default focusPolicy(), i.e. it
+can get keyboard focus by tabbing, clicking and through the use of
+the mouse wheel.
+
     New items can be inserted using insertItem(), insertStrList() or
+insertStringList(). inSort() is obsolete because this method is
+quite inefficient. It's preferable to insert the items normally
+and call sort() afterwards, or to insert a sorted TQStringList().
+
     By default, vertical and horizontal scroll bars are added and
+removed as necessary. setHScrollBarMode() and setVScrollBarMode()
+can be used to change this policy.
+
     If you need to insert types other than strings and pixmaps, you
+must define new classes which inherit TQListBoxItem.
+
     Warning: The list box assumes ownership of all list box items and
+will delete them when it does not need them any more.
+
      
+
     
    See also TQListView, TQComboBox, TQButtonGroup, GUI Design Handbook: List Box (two
+ sections), and Advanced Widgets.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQListBox::LayoutMode
    
+
+
     This enum type is used to specify how TQListBox lays out its rows
+and columns.
+
      
+
    • TQListBox::FixedNumber - There is a fixed number of rows (or columns).
+
    • TQListBox::FitToWidth - There are as many columns as will fit
+on-screen.
+
    • TQListBox::FitToHeight - There are as many rows as will fit on-screen.
+
    • TQListBox::Variable - There are as many rows as are required by the
+column mode. (Or as many columns as required by the row mode.)
+
     Example: When you call setRowMode( FitToHeight ), columnMode()
+automatically becomes Variable to accommodate the row mode
+you've set.
+
+
    TQListBox::SelectionMode
    
+
+
     This enumerated type is used by TQListBox to indicate how it reacts
+to selection by the user.
+
      
+
    • TQListBox::Single - When the user selects an item, any already-selected
+item becomes unselected and the user cannot unselect the selected
+item. This means that the user can never clear the selection, even
+though the selection may be cleared by the application programmer
+using TQListBox::clearSelection().
+
    • TQListBox::Multi - When the user selects an item the selection status
+of that item is toggled and the other items are left alone. Also,
+multiple items can be selected by dragging the mouse while the
+left mouse button is kept pressed.
+
    • TQListBox::Extended - When the user selects an item the selection is
+cleared and the new item selected. However, if the user presses
+the Ctrl key when clicking on an item, the clicked item gets
+toggled and all other items are left untouched. And if the user
+presses the Shift key while clicking on an item, all items between
+the current item and the clicked item get selected or unselected,
+depending on the state of the clicked item. Also, multiple items
+can be selected by dragging the mouse while the left mouse button
+is kept pressed.
+
    • TQListBox::NoSelection - Items cannot be selected.
+
     In other words, Single is a real single-selection list box, Multi is a real multi-selection list box, Extended is a list
+box in which users can select multiple items but usually want to
+select either just one or a range of contiguous items, and NoSelection is for a list box where the user can look but not
+touch.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQListBox::TQListBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a new empty list box called name and with parent parent.
+
     Performance is boosted by modifying the widget flags f so that
+only part of the TQListBoxItem children is redrawn. This may be
+unsuitable for custom TQListBoxItem classes, in which case WStaticContents and WNoAutoErase should be cleared
+immediately after construction.
+
     
    See also TQWidget::clearWFlags() and TQt::WidgetFlags.
+
+
    TQListBox::~TQListBox ()
+
    
+Destroys the list box. Deletes all list box items.
+
+
    bool TQListBox::autoBottomScrollBar () const
+
    
+
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Returns TRUE if hScrollBarMode() is Auto; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQListBox::autoScrollBar () const
+
    
+
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Returns TRUE if vScrollBarMode() is Auto; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQListBox::bottomScrollBar () const
+
    
+
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Returns FALSE if vScrollBarMode() is AlwaysOff; otherwise
+returns TRUE.
+
+
    int TQListBox::cellHeight ( int i ) const
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+Returns the item height of item i.
+
    See also itemHeight().
+
+
    int TQListBox::cellHeight () const
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the item height of the first item, item 0.
+
    See also itemHeight().
+
+
    int TQListBox::cellWidth () const
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+Returns the maximum item width.
+
    See also maxItemWidth().
+
+
    void TQListBox::centerCurrentItem ()
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     This function does exactly the same as ensureCurrentVisible()
+
     
    See also TQListBox::ensureCurrentVisible().
+
+
    void TQListBox::changeItem ( const TQListBoxItem * lbi, int index )
+
    
+Replaces the item at position index with lbi.	If index is
+negative or too large, changeItem() does nothing.
+
     The item that has been changed will become selected.
+
     
    See also insertItem() and removeItem().
+
+
    void TQListBox::changeItem ( const TQString & text, int index )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Replaces the item at position index with a new list box text
+item with text text.
+
     The operation is ignored if index is out of range.
+
     
    See also insertItem() and removeItem().
+
+
    void TQListBox::changeItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int index )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Replaces the item at position index with a new list box pixmap
+item with pixmap pixmap.
+
     The operation is ignored if index is out of range.
+
     
    See also insertItem() and removeItem().
+
+
    void TQListBox::changeItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQString & text, int index )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Replaces the item at position index with a new list box pixmap
+item with pixmap pixmap and text text.
+
     The operation is ignored if index is out of range.
+
     
    See also insertItem() and removeItem().
+
+
    void TQListBox::clear () [slot]
+
    
+Deletes all the items in the list.
+
     
    See also removeItem().
+
+
    void TQListBox::clearSelection () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Deselects all items, if possible.
+
     Note that a Single selection list box will automatically select
+an item if it has keyboard focus.
+
+
    Example: listbox/listbox.cpp.
+
    void TQListBox::clicked ( TQListBoxItem * item ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user clicks any mouse button. If
+item is not 0, the cursor is on item. If item is 0, the
+mouse cursor isn't on any item.
+
     Note that you must not delete any TQListBoxItem objects in slots
+connected to this signal.
+
+
    void TQListBox::clicked ( TQListBoxItem * item, const TQPoint & pnt ) [signal]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This signal is emitted when the user clicks any mouse button. If
+item is not 0, the cursor is on item. If item is 0, the
+mouse cursor isn't on any item.
+
     pnt is the position of the mouse cursor in the global
+coordinate system (TQMouseEvent::globalPos()). (If the click's
+press and release differs by a pixel or two, pnt is the
+position at release time.)
+
     Note that you must not delete any TQListBoxItem objects in slots
+connected to this signal.
+
+
    LayoutMode TQListBox::columnMode () const
+
    Returns the column layout mode for this list box.
+See the "columnMode" property for details.
+
    void TQListBox::contextMenuRequested ( TQListBoxItem * item, const TQPoint & pos ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user invokes a context menu with
+the right mouse button or with special system keys, with item
+being the item under the mouse cursor or the current item,
+respectively.
+
     pos is the position for the context menu in the global
+coordinate system.
+
+
    uint TQListBox::count () const
+
    Returns the number of items in the list box.
+See the "count" property for details.
+
    void TQListBox::currentChanged ( TQListBoxItem * item ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user makes a new item the current
+item. item is the new current list box item.
+
     
    See also currentItem and currentItem.
+
+
    int TQListBox::currentItem () const
+
    Returns the current highlighted item.
+See the "currentItem" property for details.
+
    TQString TQListBox::currentText () const
+
    Returns the text of the current item.
+See the "currentText" property for details.
+
    void TQListBox::doLayout () const [protected]
+
    
+This function does the hard layout work. You should never need to
+call it.
+
+
    void TQListBox::doubleClicked ( TQListBoxItem * item ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever an item is double-clicked. It's
+emitted on the second button press, not the second button release.
+If item is not 0, the cursor is on item. If item is 0,
+the mouse cursor isn't on any item.
+
+
    void TQListBox::ensureCurrentVisible () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Ensures that the current item is visible.
+
+
    TQListBoxItem * TQListBox::findItem ( const TQString & text, ComparisonFlags compare = BeginsWith ) const
+
    
+Finds the first list box item that has the text text and
+returns it, or returns 0 of no such item could be found.
+The search starts from the current item if the current item exists,
+otherwise it starts from the first list box item.
+If ComparisonFlags are specified in compare then these flags
+are used, otherwise the default is a case-insensitive, "begins
+with" search.
+
     
    See also TQt::StringComparisonMode.
+
+
    int TQListBox::findItem ( int yPos ) const [protected]
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+Returns the index of the item a point (0, yPos).
+
    See also index() and itemAt().
+
+
    TQListBoxItem * TQListBox::firstItem () const
+
    
+Returns the first item in this list box. If the list box is empty,
+returns 0.
+
+
    void TQListBox::highlighted ( int index ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user makes a new item the current
+item. index is the index of the new current item.
+
     
    See also currentChanged(), selected(), currentItem, and selectionChanged().
+
+
    void TQListBox::highlighted ( const TQString & ) [signal]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This signal is emitted when the user makes a new item the current
+item and the item is (or has) a string. The argument is the text
+of the new current item.
+
     
    See also currentChanged(), selected(), currentItem, and selectionChanged().
+
+
    void TQListBox::highlighted ( TQListBoxItem * ) [signal]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This signal is emitted when the user makes a new item the current
+item. The argument is a pointer to the new current item.
+
     
    See also currentChanged(), selected(), currentItem, and selectionChanged().
+
+
    int TQListBox::inSort ( const TQListBoxItem * lbi )
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Using this method is quite inefficient. We suggest to use insertItem()
+for inserting and sort() afterwards.
+
     Inserts lbi at its sorted position in the list box and returns the
+position.
+
     All items must be inserted with inSort() to maintain the sorting
+order. inSort() treats any pixmap (or user-defined type) as
+lexicographically less than any string.
+
     
    See also insertItem() and sort().
+
+
    int TQListBox::inSort ( const TQString & text )
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Using this method is quite inefficient. We suggest to use insertItem()
+for inserting and sort() afterwards.
+
     Inserts a new item of text at its sorted position in the list box and
+returns the position.
+
     All items must be inserted with inSort() to maintain the sorting
+order. inSort() treats any pixmap (or user-defined type) as
+lexicographically less than any string.
+
     
    See also insertItem() and sort().
+
+
    int TQListBox::index ( const TQListBoxItem * lbi ) const
+
    
+Returns the index of lbi, or -1 if the item is not in this list
+box or lbi is 0.
+
     
    See also item().
+
+
    void TQListBox::insertItem ( const TQListBoxItem * lbi, int index = -1 )
+
    
+Inserts the item lbi into the list at position index.
+
     If index is negative or larger than the number of items in the
+list box, lbi is inserted at the end of the list.
+
     
    See also insertStrList().
+
+
    Examples: i18n/mywidget.cpp, listbox/listbox.cpp, listboxcombo/listboxcombo.cpp, and tabdialog/tabdialog.cpp.
+
    void TQListBox::insertItem ( const TQListBoxItem * lbi, const TQListBoxItem * after )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts the item lbi into the list after the item after, or
+at the beginning if after is 0.
+
     
    See also insertStrList().
+
+
    void TQListBox::insertItem ( const TQString & text, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a new list box text item with the text text into the
+list at position index.
+
     If index is negative, text is inserted at the end of the
+list.
+
     
    See also insertStrList().
+
+
    void TQListBox::insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a new list box pixmap item with the pixmap pixmap into
+the list at position index.
+
     If index is negative, pixmap is inserted at the end of the
+list.
+
     
    See also insertStrList().
+
+
    void TQListBox::insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQString & text, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a new list box pixmap item with the pixmap pixmap and
+the text text into the list at position index.
+
     If index is negative, pixmap is inserted at the end of the
+list.
+
     
    See also insertStrList().
+
+
    void TQListBox::insertStrList ( const TQStrList * list, int index = -1 )
+
    
+Inserts the string list list into the list at position index.
+
     If index is negative, list is inserted at the end of the
+list. If index is too large, the operation is ignored.
+
     Warning: This function uses const char * rather than TQString,
+so we recommend against using it. It is provided so that legacy
+code will continue to work, and so that programs that certainly
+will not need to handle code outside a single 8-bit locale can use
+it. See insertStringList() which uses real TQStrings.
+
     Warning: This function is never significantly faster than a loop
+around insertItem().
+
     
    See also insertItem() and insertStringList().
+
+
    void TQListBox::insertStrList ( const TQStrList & list, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts the string list list into the list at position index.
+
     If index is negative, list is inserted at the end of the
+list. If index is too large, the operation is ignored.
+
     Warning: This function uses const char * rather than TQString,
+so we recommend against using it. It is provided so that legacy
+code will continue to work, and so that programs that certainly
+will not need to handle code outside a single 8-bit locale can use
+it. See insertStringList() which uses real TQStrings.
+
     Warning: This function is never significantly faster than a loop
+around insertItem().
+
     
    See also insertItem() and insertStringList().
+
+
    void TQListBox::insertStrList ( const char ** strings, int numStrings = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts the numStrings strings of the array strings into the
+list at position index.
+
     If index is negative, insertStrList() inserts strings at the
+end of the list. If index is too large, the operation is
+ignored.
+
     Warning: This function uses const char * rather than TQString,
+so we recommend against using it. It is provided so that legacy
+code will continue to work, and so that programs that certainly
+will not need to handle code outside a single 8-bit locale can use
+it. See insertStringList() which uses real TQStrings.
+
     Warning: This function is never significantly faster than a loop
+around insertItem().
+
     
    See also insertItem() and insertStringList().
+
+
    void TQListBox::insertStringList ( const TQStringList & list, int index = -1 )
+
    
+Inserts the string list list into the list at position index.
+
     If index is negative, list is inserted at the end of the
+list. If index is too large, the operation is ignored.
+
     Warning: This function is never significantly faster than a loop
+around insertItem().
+
     
    See also insertItem() and insertStrList().
+
+
    void TQListBox::invertSelection () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Inverts the selection. Only works in Multi and Extended
+selection mode.
+
+
    bool TQListBox::isMultiSelection () const
+
    Returns TRUE if or not the list box is in Multi selection mode; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "multiSelection" property for details.
+
    bool TQListBox::isRubberSelecting () const [protected]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the user is selecting items using a rubber band
+rectangle; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQListBox::isSelected ( int i ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if item i is selected; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQListBox::isSelected ( const TQListBoxItem * i ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns TRUE if item i is selected; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    TQListBoxItem * TQListBox::item ( int index ) const
+
    
+Returns a pointer to the item at position index, or 0 if index is out of bounds.
+
     
    See also index().
+
+
    Example: listboxcombo/listboxcombo.cpp.
+
    TQListBoxItem * TQListBox::itemAt ( const TQPoint & p ) const
+
    
+Returns the item at point p, specified in viewport coordinates,
+or a 0 if there is no item at p.
+
     Use contentsToViewport() to convert between widget coordinates and
+viewport coordinates.
+
+
    int TQListBox::itemHeight ( int index = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns the height in pixels of the item with index index. index defaults to 0.
+
     If index is too large, this function returns 0.
+
+
    TQRect TQListBox::itemRect ( TQListBoxItem * item ) const
+
    
+Returns the rectangle on the screen that item occupies in
+viewport()'s coordinates, or an invalid rectangle if item is 0
+or is not currently visible.
+
+
    bool TQListBox::itemVisible ( int index )
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the item at position index is at least partly
+visible; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQListBox::itemVisible ( const TQListBoxItem * item )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns TRUE if item is at least partly visible; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQListBox::itemYPos ( int index, int * yPos ) const [protected]
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Returns the vertical pixel-coordinate in *yPos, of the list box
+item at position index in the list. Returns FALSE if the item is
+outside the visible area.
+
+
    long TQListBox::maxItemWidth () const
+
    
+Returns the width of the widest item in the list box.
+
+
    void TQListBox::mouseButtonClicked ( int button, TQListBoxItem * item, const TQPoint & pos ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user clicks mouse button button. If item is not 0, the cursor is on item. If item
+is 0, the mouse cursor isn't on any item.
+
     pos is the position of the mouse cursor in the global
+coordinate system (TQMouseEvent::globalPos()). (If the click's
+press and release differs by a pixel or two, pos is the
+position at release time.)
+
     Note that you must not delete any TQListBoxItem objects in slots
+connected to this signal.
+
+
    void TQListBox::mouseButtonPressed ( int button, TQListBoxItem * item, const TQPoint & pos ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user presses mouse button button. If item is not 0, the cursor is on item. If item
+is 0, the mouse cursor isn't on any item.
+
     pos is the position of the mouse cursor in the global
+coordinate system (TQMouseEvent::globalPos()).
+
     Note that you must not delete any TQListBoxItem objects in slots
+connected to this signal.
+
+
    int TQListBox::numCols () const
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+Returns the number of columns.
+
    See also numColumns.
+
+
    int TQListBox::numColumns () const
+
    Returns the number of columns in the list box.
+See the "numColumns" property for details.
+
    int TQListBox::numItemsVisible () const
+
    Returns the number of visible items.
+See the "numItemsVisible" property for details.
+
    int TQListBox::numRows () const
+
    Returns the number of rows in the list box.
+See the "numRows" property for details.
+
    void TQListBox::onItem ( TQListBoxItem * i ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user moves the mouse cursor onto
+an item, similar to the TQWidget::enterEvent() function. i is
+the TQListBoxItem that the mouse has moved on.
+
+
    void TQListBox::onViewport () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user moves the mouse cursor from
+an item to an empty part of the list box.
+
+
    void TQListBox::paintCell ( TQPainter * p, int row, int col ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Provided for compatibility with the old TQListBox. We recommend
+using TQListBoxItem::paint() instead.
+
     Repaints the cell at row, col using painter p.
+
+
    const TQPixmap * TQListBox::pixmap ( int index ) const
+
    
+Returns a pointer to the pixmap at position index, or 0 if
+there is no pixmap there.
+
     
    See also text().
+
+
    void TQListBox::pressed ( TQListBoxItem * item ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user presses any mouse button. If
+item is not 0, the cursor is on item. If item is 0, the
+mouse cursor isn't on any item.
+
     Note that you must not delete any TQListBoxItem objects in slots
+connected to this signal.
+
+
    void TQListBox::pressed ( TQListBoxItem * item, const TQPoint & pnt ) [signal]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This signal is emitted when the user presses any mouse button. If
+item is not 0, the cursor is on item. If item is 0, the
+mouse cursor isn't on any item.
+
     pnt is the position of the mouse cursor in the global
+coordinate system (TQMouseEvent::globalPos()).
+
     Note that you must not delete any TQListBoxItem objects in slots
+connected to this signal.
+
     
    See also mouseButtonPressed(), rightButtonPressed(), and clicked().
+
+
    void TQListBox::removeItem ( int index )
+
    
+Removes and deletes the item at position index. If index is
+equal to currentItem(), a new item becomes current and the
+currentChanged() and highlighted() signals are emitted.
+
     
    See also insertItem() and clear().
+
+
    void TQListBox::returnPressed ( TQListBoxItem * ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when Enter or Return is pressed. The
+argument is currentItem().
+
+
    void TQListBox::rightButtonClicked ( TQListBoxItem *, const TQPoint & ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the right button is clicked (i.e. when
+it's released at the same point where it was pressed). The
+arguments are the relevant TQListBoxItem (may be 0) and the point
+in global coordinates.
+
+
    void TQListBox::rightButtonPressed ( TQListBoxItem *, const TQPoint & ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the right button is pressed. The
+arguments are the relevant TQListBoxItem (may be 0) and the point
+in global coordinates.
+
+
    LayoutMode TQListBox::rowMode () const
+
    Returns the row layout mode for this list box.
+See the "rowMode" property for details.
+
    bool TQListBox::scrollBar () const
+
    
+
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Returns FALSE if vScrollBarMode() is AlwaysOff; otherwise
+returns TRUE.
+
+
    void TQListBox::selectAll ( bool select ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+In Multi and Extended modes, this function sets all items to
+be selected if select is TRUE, and to be unselected if select is FALSE.
+
     In Single and NoSelection modes, this function only changes
+the selection status of currentItem().
+
+
    void TQListBox::selected ( int index ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user double-clicks on an item or
+presses Enter on the current item. index is the index of the
+selected item.
+
     
    See also currentChanged(), highlighted(), and selectionChanged().
+
+
    void TQListBox::selected ( const TQString & ) [signal]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This signal is emitted when the user double-clicks on an item or
+presses Enter on the current item, and the item is (or has) a
+string. The argument is the text of the selected item.
+
     
    See also currentChanged(), highlighted(), and selectionChanged().
+
+
    void TQListBox::selected ( TQListBoxItem * ) [signal]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This signal is emitted when the user double-clicks on an item or
+presses Enter on the current item. The argument is a pointer to
+the new selected item.
+
     
    See also currentChanged(), highlighted(), and selectionChanged().
+
+
    TQListBoxItem * TQListBox::selectedItem () const
+
      Returns the selected item if the list box is in
+single-selection mode and an item is selected.
+
     If no items are selected or the list box is in another selection mode
+this function returns 0.
+
     
    See also setSelected() and multiSelection.
+
+
    void TQListBox::selectionChanged () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the selection set of a list box
+changes. This signal is emitted in each selection mode. If the
+user selects five items by drag-selecting, TQListBox tries to emit
+just one selectionChanged() signal so the signal can be connected
+to computationally expensive slots.
+
     
    See also selected() and currentItem.
+
+
    void TQListBox::selectionChanged ( TQListBoxItem * item ) [signal]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This signal is emitted when the selection in a Single selection
+list box changes. item is the newly selected list box item.
+
     
    See also selected() and currentItem.
+
+
    SelectionMode TQListBox::selectionMode () const
+
    Returns the selection mode of the list box.
+See the "selectionMode" property for details.
+
    void TQListBox::setAutoBottomScrollBar ( bool enable )
+
    
+
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     If enable is TRUE sets setHScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOn;
+otherwise sets setHScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOff.
+
+
    void TQListBox::setAutoScrollBar ( bool enable )
+
    
+
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     If enable is TRUE sets setVScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOn;
+otherwise sets setVScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOff.
+
+
    void TQListBox::setBottomItem ( int index ) [virtual]
+
    
+Scrolls the list box so the item at position index in the list
+is displayed in the bottom row of the list box.
+
     
    See also topItem.
+
+
    void TQListBox::setBottomScrollBar ( bool enable )
+
    
+
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     If enable is TRUE sets setHScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOn;
+otherwise sets setHScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOff.
+
+
    void TQListBox::setColumnMode ( LayoutMode ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the column layout mode for this list box.
+See the "columnMode" property for details.
+
    void TQListBox::setColumnMode ( int ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the column layout mode for this list box.
+See the "columnMode" property for details.
+
    void TQListBox::setCurrentItem ( int index ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the current highlighted item to index.
+See the "currentItem" property for details.
+
    void TQListBox::setCurrentItem ( TQListBoxItem * i ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the current item to the TQListBoxItem i.
+
+
    void TQListBox::setMultiSelection ( bool multi )
+
    Sets whether or not the list box is in Multi selection mode to multi.
+See the "multiSelection" property for details.
+
    void TQListBox::setRowMode ( LayoutMode ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the row layout mode for this list box.
+See the "rowMode" property for details.
+
    void TQListBox::setRowMode ( int ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the row layout mode for this list box.
+See the "rowMode" property for details.
+
    void TQListBox::setScrollBar ( bool enable )
+
    
+
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     If enable is TRUE sets setVScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOn;
+otherwise sets setVScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOff.
+
+
    void TQListBox::setSelected ( TQListBoxItem * item, bool select ) [virtual]
+
    
+Selects item if select is TRUE or unselects it if select
+is FALSE, and repaints the item appropriately.
+
     If the list box is a Single selection list box and select is
+TRUE, setSelected() calls setCurrentItem().
+
     If the list box is a Single selection list box, select is
+FALSE, setSelected() calls clearSelection().
+
     
    See also multiSelection, currentItem, clearSelection(), and currentItem.
+
+
    void TQListBox::setSelected ( int index, bool select )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     If select is TRUE the item at position index is selected;
+otherwise the item is deselected.
+
+
    void TQListBox::setSelectionMode ( SelectionMode ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the selection mode of the list box.
+See the "selectionMode" property for details.
+
    void TQListBox::setTopItem ( int index ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the index of an item at the top of the screen to index.
+See the "topItem" property for details.
+
    void TQListBox::setVariableHeight ( bool ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether this list box has variable-height rows.
+See the "variableHeight" property for details.
+
    void TQListBox::setVariableWidth ( bool ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether this list box has variable-width columns.
+See the "variableWidth" property for details.
+
    void TQListBox::sort ( bool ascending = TRUE )
+
    
+If ascending is TRUE sorts the items in ascending order;
+otherwise sorts in descending order.
+
     To compare the items, the text (TQListBoxItem::text()) of the items
+is used.
+
+
    Example: listbox/listbox.cpp.
+
    void TQListBox::takeItem ( const TQListBoxItem * item )
+
    
+Removes item from the list box and causes an update of the
+screen display. The item is not deleted. You should normally not
+need to call this function because TQListBoxItem::~TQListBoxItem()
+calls it. The normal way to delete an item is with delete.
+
     
    See also TQListBox::insertItem().
+
+
    TQString TQListBox::text ( int index ) const
+
    
+Returns the text at position index, or TQString::null if there
+is no text at that position.
+
     
    See also pixmap().
+
+
    void TQListBox::toggleCurrentItem () [protected]
+
    
+Toggles the selection status of currentItem() and repaints if the
+list box is a Multi selection list box.
+
     
    See also multiSelection.
+
+
    int TQListBox::topItem () const
+
    Returns the index of an item at the top of the screen.
+See the "topItem" property for details.
+
    int TQListBox::totalHeight () const [protected]
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+Returns contentsHeight().
+
+
    int TQListBox::totalWidth () const [protected]
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+Returns contentsWidth().
+
+
    void TQListBox::triggerUpdate ( bool doLayout )
+
    
+Ensures that a single paint event will occur at the end of the
+current event loop iteration. If doLayout is TRUE, the layout
+is also redone.
+
+
    void TQListBox::updateItem ( int index ) [protected]
+
    
+Repaints the item at position index in the list.
+
+
    void TQListBox::updateItem ( TQListBoxItem * i ) [protected]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Repaints the TQListBoxItem i.
+
+
    bool TQListBox::variableHeight () const
+
    Returns TRUE if this list box has variable-height rows; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "variableHeight" property for details.
+
    bool TQListBox::variableWidth () const
+
    Returns TRUE if this list box has variable-width columns; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "variableWidth" property for details.
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    LayoutMode columnMode
    
+
    This property holds the column layout mode for this list box.
+
    setColumnMode() sets the layout mode and adjusts the number of
+displayed columns. The row layout mode automatically becomes Variable, unless the column mode is Variable.
+
     
    See also rowMode, rowMode, and numColumns.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setColumnMode() and get this property's value with columnMode().
+
    uint count
    
+
    This property holds the number of items in the list box.
+
    
+
    Get this property's value with count().
+
    int currentItem
    
+
    This property holds the current highlighted item.
+
    When setting this property, the highlighting is moved to the item
+and the list box scrolled as necessary.
+
     If no item is current, currentItem() returns -1.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setCurrentItem() and get this property's value with currentItem().
+
    TQString currentText
    
+
    This property holds the text of the current item.
+
    This is equivalent to text(currentItem()).
+
+
    Get this property's value with currentText().
+
    bool multiSelection
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
    This property holds whether or not the list box is in Multi selection mode.
+
    Consider using the TQListBox::selectionMode property instead of
+this property.
+
     When setting this property, Multi selection mode is used if set to TRUE and
+to Single selection mode if set to FALSE.
+
     When getting this property, TRUE is returned if the list box is in
+Multi selection mode or Extended selection mode, and FALSE if it is
+in Single selection mode or NoSelection mode.
+
     
    See also selectionMode.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setMultiSelection() and get this property's value with isMultiSelection().
+
    int numColumns
    
+
    This property holds the number of columns in the list box.
+
    This is normally 1, but can be different if TQListBox::columnMode or TQListBox::rowMode has been set.
+
     
    See also columnMode, rowMode, and numRows.
+
+
    Get this property's value with numColumns().
+
    int numItemsVisible
    
+
    This property holds the number of visible items.
+
    Both partially and entirely visible items are counted.
+
+
    Get this property's value with numItemsVisible().
+
    int numRows
    
+
    This property holds the number of rows in the list box.
+
    This is equal to the number of items in the default single-column
+layout, but can be different.
+
     
    See also columnMode, rowMode, and numColumns.
+
+
    Get this property's value with numRows().
+
    LayoutMode rowMode
    
+
    This property holds the row layout mode for this list box.
+
    This property is normally Variable.
+
     setRowMode() sets the layout mode and adjusts the number of
+displayed rows. The column layout mode automatically becomes Variable, unless the row mode is Variable.
+
     
    See also columnMode.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setRowMode() and get this property's value with rowMode().
+
    SelectionMode selectionMode
    
+
    This property holds the selection mode of the list box.
+
    Sets the list box's selection mode, which may be one of Single
+(the default), Extended, Multi or NoSelection.
+
     
    See also SelectionMode.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setSelectionMode() and get this property's value with selectionMode().
+
    int topItem
    
+
    This property holds the index of an item at the top of the screen.
+
    When getting this property and the listbox has multiple columns,
+an arbitrary item is selected and returned.
+
     When setting this property, the list box is scrolled so the item
+at position index in the list is displayed in the top row of
+the list box.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setTopItem() and get this property's value with topItem().
+
    bool variableHeight
    
+
    This property holds whether this list box has variable-height rows.
+
    When the list box has variable-height rows (the default), each row
+is as high as the highest item in that row. When it has same-sized
+rows, all rows are as high as the highest item in the list box.
+
     
    See also variableWidth.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setVariableHeight() and get this property's value with variableHeight().
+
    bool variableWidth
    
+
    This property holds whether this list box has variable-width columns.
+
    When the list box has variable-width columns, each column is as
+wide as the widest item in that column. When it has same-sized
+columns (the default), all columns are as wide as the widest item
+in the list box.
+
     
    See also variableHeight.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setVariableWidth() and get this property's value with variableWidth().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqlistview.html b/doc/html/ntqlistview.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7c63751c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqlistview.html
@@ -0,0 +1,1231 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQListView Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQListView Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQListView class implements a list/tree view.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqlistview.h>
+
    Inherits TQScrollView.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • bool allColumnsShowFocus - whether items should show keyboard focus using all columns
      • 
+
    • int childCount - the number of parentless (top-level) TQListViewItem objects in this TQListView  (read only)
      • 
+
    • int columns - the number of columns in this list view  (read only)
      • 
+
    • RenameAction defaultRenameAction - what action to perform when the editor loses focus during renaming
      • 
+
    • int itemMargin - the advisory item margin that list items may use
      • 
+
    • bool multiSelection - whether the list view is in multi-selection or extended-selection mode  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • ResizeMode resizeMode - whether all, none or the only the last column should be resized
      • 
+
    • bool rootIsDecorated - whether the list view shows open/close signs on root items
      • 
+
    • SelectionMode selectionMode - the list view's selection mode
      • 
+
    • bool showSortIndicator - whether the list view header should display a sort indicator
      • 
+
    • bool showToolTips - whether this list view should show tooltips for truncated column texts
      • 
+
    • int treeStepSize - the number of pixels a child is offset from its parent
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Protected Slots
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQListView class implements a list/tree view.
+
     
+
+
     It can display and control a hierarchy of multi-column items, and
+provides the ability to add new items at any time. The user may
+select one or many items (depending on the SelectionMode) and
+sort the list in increasing or decreasing order by any column.
+
     The simplest pattern of use is to create a TQListView, add some
+column headers using addColumn() and create one or more
+TQListViewItem or TQCheckListItem objects with the TQListView as
+parent:
+
     
+
+
            TQListView * table;
+
    
+
+
            table->addColumn( "Qualified name" );
+        table->addColumn( "Namespace" );
+
                element = new TQListViewItem( table, qName, namespaceURI );
+
    
+
     Further nodes can be added to the list view object (the root of the
+tree) or as child nodes to TQListViewItems:
+
     
                for ( int i = 0 ; i < attributes.length(); i++ ) {
+                new TQListViewItem( element, attributes.qName(i), attributes.uri(i) );
+            }
+
    
+
     (From xml/tagreader-with-features/structureparser.cpp)
+
     The main setup functions are:
+
    
+
     Function Action
+
     addColumn()
+Adds a column with a text label and perhaps width. Columns
+are counted from the left starting with column 0.
+
     setColumnWidthMode()
+Sets the column to be resized automatically or not.
+
     setAllColumnsShowFocus()
+Sets whether items should show keyboard focus using all
+columns or just column 0. The default is to show focus
+just using column 0.
+
     setRootIsDecorated()
+Sets whether root items should show open/close decoration to their left.
+The default is FALSE.
+
     setTreeStepSize()
+Sets how many pixels an item's children are indented
+relative to their parent. The default is 20. This is
+mostly a matter of taste.
+
     setSorting()
+Sets whether the items should be sorted, whether it should
+be in ascending or descending order, and by what column
+they should be sorted. By default the list view is sorted
+by the first column; to switch this off call setSorting(-1).
+
    
+
     To handle events such as mouse presses on the list view, derived
+classes can reimplement the TQScrollView functions:
+contentsMousePressEvent,
+contentsMouseReleaseEvent,
+contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent,
+contentsMouseMoveEvent,
+contentsDragEnterEvent,
+contentsDragMoveEvent,
+contentsDragLeaveEvent,
+contentsDropEvent, and
+contentsWheelEvent.
+
     There are also several functions for mapping between items and
+coordinates. itemAt() returns the item at a position on-screen,
+itemRect() returns the rectangle an item occupies on the screen,
+and itemPos() returns the position of any item (whether it is
+on-screen or not). firstChild() returns the list view's first item
+(not necessarily visible on-screen).
+
     You can iterate over visible items using
+TQListViewItem::itemBelow(); over a list view's top-level items
+using TQListViewItem::firstChild() and
+TQListViewItem::nextSibling(); or every item using a
+TQListViewItemIterator. See
+the TQListViewItem documentation for examples of traversal.
+
     An item can be moved amongst its siblings using
+TQListViewItem::moveItem(). To move an item in the hierarchy use
+takeItem() and insertItem(). Item's (and all their child items)
+are deleted with delete; to delete all the list view's items
+use clear().
+
     There are a variety of selection modes described in the
+TQListView::SelectionMode documentation. The default is Single
+selection, which you can change using setSelectionMode().
+
     Because TQListView offers multiple selection it must display
+keyboard focus and selection state separately. Therefore there are
+functions both to set the selection state of an item
+(setSelected()) and to set which item displays keyboard focus
+(setCurrentItem()).
+
     TQListView emits two groups of signals; one group signals changes
+in selection/focus state and one indicates selection. The first
+group consists of selectionChanged() (applicable to all list
+views), selectionChanged(TQListViewItem*) (applicable only to a
+Single selection list view), and currentChanged(TQListViewItem*).
+The second group consists of doubleClicked(TQListViewItem*),
+returnPressed(TQListViewItem*),
+rightButtonClicked(TQListViewItem*, const TQPoint&, int), etc.
+
     Note that changing the state of the list view in a slot connected
+to a list view signal may cause unexpected side effects. If you
+need to change the list view's state in response to a signal, use
+a single shot timer with a
+time out of 0, and connect this timer to a slot that modifies the
+list view's state.
+
     In Motif style, TQListView deviates fairly strongly from the look
+and feel of the Motif hierarchical tree view. This is done mostly
+to provide a usable keyboard interface and to make the list view
+look better with a white background.
+
     If selectionMode() is Single (the default) the user can select
+one item at a time, e.g. by clicking an item with the mouse, see
+TQListView::SelectionMode for details.
+
     The list view can be navigated either using the mouse or the
+keyboard. Clicking a - icon closes an item (hides its
+children) and clicking a + icon opens an item (shows its
+children). The keyboard controls are these:
+
    
+
     Keypress Action
+
     Home
+Make the first item current and visible.
+
     End
+Make the last item current and visible.
+
     Page Up
+Make the item above the top visible item current and visible.
+
     Page Down
+Make the item below the bottom visible item current and visible.
+
     Up Arrow
+Make the item above the current item current and visible.
+
     Down Arrow
+Make the item below the current item current and visible.
+
     Left Arrow
+If the current item is closed (+ icon) or has no
+children, make its parent item current and visible. If the
+current item is open (- icon) close it, i.e. hide its
+children. Exception: if the current item is the first item
+and is closed and the horizontal scrollbar is offset to
+the right the list view will be scrolled left.
+
     Right Arrow
+If the current item is closed (+ icon) and has
+children, the item is opened. If the current item is
+opened (- icon) and has children the item's first
+child is made current and visible. If the current item has
+no children the list view is scrolled right.
+
    
+
     If the user starts typing letters with the focus in the list view
+an incremental search will occur. For example if the user types
+'d' the current item will change to the first item that begins
+with the letter 'd'; if they then type 'a', the current item will
+change to the first item that begins with 'da', and so on. If no
+item begins with the letters they type the current item doesn't
+change.
+
     Warning: The list view assumes ownership of all list view items
+and will delete them when it does not need them any more.
+
      
+
     
    See also TQListViewItem, TQCheckListItem, and Advanced Widgets.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQListView::RenameAction
    
+
+
     This enum describes whether a rename operation is accepted if the
+rename editor loses focus without the user pressing Enter.
+
      
+
    • TQListView::Accept - Rename if Enter is pressed or focus is lost.
+
    • TQListView::Reject - Discard the rename operation if focus is lost (and
+Enter has not been pressed).
+
    
+
    TQListView::ResizeMode
    
+
+
     This enum describes how the list view's header adjusts to resize
+events which affect the width of the list view.
+
      
+
    • TQListView::NoColumn - The columns do not get resized in resize events.
+
    • TQListView::AllColumns - All columns are resized equally to fit the width
+of the list view.
+
    • TQListView::LastColumn - The last column is resized to fit the width of
+the list view.
+
    
+
    TQListView::SelectionMode
    
+
+
     This enumerated type is used by TQListView to indicate how it
+reacts to selection by the user.
+
      
+
    • TQListView::Single - When the user selects an item, any already-selected
+item becomes unselected. The user can unselect the selected
+item by clicking on some empty space within the view.
+
    • TQListView::Multi - When the user selects an item in the usual way, the
+selection status of that item is toggled and the other items are
+left alone. Also, multiple items can be selected by dragging the
+mouse while the left mouse button stays pressed.
+
    • TQListView::Extended - When the user selects an item in the usual way,
+the selection is cleared and the new item selected. However, if
+the user presses the Ctrl key when clicking on an item, the
+clicked item gets toggled and all other items are left untouched.
+And if the user presses the Shift key while clicking on an item,
+all items between the current item and the clicked item get
+selected or unselected, depending on the state of the clicked
+item. Also, multiple items can be selected by dragging the mouse
+over them.
+
    • TQListView::NoSelection - Items cannot be selected.
+
     In other words, Single is a real single-selection list view, Multi a real multi-selection list view, Extended is a list view
+where users can select multiple items but usually want to select
+either just one or a range of contiguous items, and NoSelection
+is a list view where the user can look but not touch.
+
+
    TQListView::WidthMode
    
+
+
     This enum type describes how the width of a column in the view
+changes.
+
      
+
    • TQListView::Manual - the column width does not change automatically.
+
    • TQListView::Maximum - the column is automatically sized according to the
+widths of all items in the column. (Note: The column never shrinks
+in this case.) This means that the column is always resized to the
+width of the item with the largest width in the column.
+
     
    See also setColumnWidth(), setColumnWidthMode(), and columnWidth().
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQListView::TQListView ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a new empty list view called name with parent parent.
+
     Performance is boosted by modifying the widget flags f so that
+only part of the TQListViewItem children is redrawn. This may be
+unsuitable for custom TQListViewItem classes, in which case WStaticContents and WNoAutoErase should be cleared.
+
     
    See also TQWidget::clearWFlags() and TQt::WidgetFlags.
+
+
    TQListView::~TQListView ()
+
    
+Destroys the list view, deleting all its items, and frees up all
+allocated resources.
+
+
    int TQListView::addColumn ( const TQString & label, int width = -1 ) [virtual]
+
    
+Adds a width pixels wide column with the column header label
+to the list view, and returns the index of the new column.
+
     All columns apart from the first one are inserted to the right of
+the existing ones.
+
     If width is negative, the new column's WidthMode is set to
+Maximum instead of Manual.
+
     
    See also setColumnText(), setColumnWidth(), and setColumnWidthMode().
+
+
    Examples: addressbook/centralwidget.cpp, checklists/checklists.cpp, dirview/main.cpp, fileiconview/mainwindow.cpp, listviews/listviews.cpp, and qdir/qdir.cpp.
+
    int TQListView::addColumn ( const TQIconSet & iconset, const TQString & label, int width = -1 ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Adds a width pixels wide new column with the header label
+and the iconset to the list view, and returns the index of the
+column.
+
     If width is negative, the new column's WidthMode is set to
+Maximum, and to Manual otherwise.
+
     
    See also setColumnText(), setColumnWidth(), and setColumnWidthMode().
+
+
    void TQListView::adjustColumn ( int col ) [slot]
+
     Adjusts the column col to its preferred width 
+
    bool TQListView::allColumnsShowFocus () const
+
    Returns TRUE if items should show keyboard focus using all columns; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "allColumnsShowFocus" property for details.
+
    int TQListView::childCount () const
+
    Returns the number of parentless (top-level) TQListViewItem objects in this TQListView.
+See the "childCount" property for details.
+
    void TQListView::clear () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Removes and deletes all the items in this list view and triggers
+an update.
+
     Note that the currentChanged() signal is not emitted when this slot is invoked.
+
    See also triggerUpdate().
+
+
    Examples: addressbook/centralwidget.cpp, checklists/checklists.cpp, listviews/listviews.cpp, and qutlook/centralwidget.cpp.
+
    void TQListView::clearSelection () [virtual]
+
    
+Sets all the items to be not selected, updates the list view as
+necessary, and emits the selectionChanged() signals. Note that for
+Multi selection list views this function needs to iterate over
+all items.
+
     
    See also setSelected() and multiSelection.
+
+
    Example: addressbook/centralwidget.cpp.
+
    void TQListView::clicked ( TQListViewItem * item ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the user clicks (mouse pressed and mouse released) in the list view. item is the clicked list
+view item, or 0 if the user didn't click on an item.
+
     Warning: Do not delete any TQListViewItem objects in slots
+connected to this signal.
+
+
    Example: addressbook/centralwidget.cpp.
+
    void TQListView::clicked ( TQListViewItem * item, const TQPoint & pnt, int c ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the user clicks (mouse pressed and mouse released) in the list view. item is the clicked list
+view item, or 0 if the user didn't click on an item. pnt is the
+position where the user has clicked in global coordinates. If item is not 0, c is the list view column into which the user
+pressed; if item is 0 c's value is undefined.
+
     Warning: Do not delete any TQListViewItem objects in slots
+connected to this signal.
+
+
    void TQListView::collapsed ( TQListViewItem * item ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the item has been collapsed, i.e.
+when the children of item are hidden.
+
     
    See also setOpen() and expanded().
+
+
    int TQListView::columnAlignment ( int column ) const
+
    
+Returns the alignment of column column. The default is AlignAuto.
+
     
    See also TQt::AlignmentFlags.
+
+
    TQString TQListView::columnText ( int c ) const
+
    
+Returns the text of column c.
+
     
    See also setColumnText().
+
+
    int TQListView::columnWidth ( int c ) const
+
    
+Returns the width of column c.
+
     
    See also setColumnWidth().
+
+
    WidthMode TQListView::columnWidthMode ( int c ) const
+
    
+Returns the WidthMode for column c.
+
     
    See also setColumnWidthMode().
+
+
    int TQListView::columns () const
+
    Returns the number of columns in this list view.
+See the "columns" property for details.
+
    void TQListView::contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent ( TQMouseEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Processes the mouse double-click event e on behalf of the viewed widget.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQScrollView.
+
    void TQListView::contentsMouseMoveEvent ( TQMouseEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Processes the mouse move event e on behalf of the viewed widget.
+
+
    Example: dirview/dirview.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented from TQScrollView.
+
    void TQListView::contentsMousePressEvent ( TQMouseEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Processes the mouse press event e on behalf of the viewed widget.
+
+
    Example: dirview/dirview.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented from TQScrollView.
+
    void TQListView::contentsMouseReleaseEvent ( TQMouseEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Processes the mouse release event e on behalf of the viewed widget.
+
+
    Example: dirview/dirview.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented from TQScrollView.
+
    void TQListView::contextMenuRequested ( TQListViewItem * item, const TQPoint & pos, int col ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user invokes a context menu with
+the right mouse button or with special system keys. If the
+keyboard was used item is the current item; if the mouse was
+used, item is the item under the mouse pointer or 0 if there is
+no item under the mouse pointer. If no item is clicked, the column
+index emitted is -1.
+
     pos is the position for the context menu in the global
+coordinate system.
+
     col is the column on which the user pressed, or -1 if the
+signal was triggered by a key event.
+
+
    Example: listviews/listviews.cpp.
+
    void TQListView::currentChanged ( TQListViewItem * ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the current item has changed
+(normally after the screen update). The current item is the item
+responsible for indicating keyboard focus.
+
     The argument is the newly current item, or 0 if the change made no
+item current. This can happen, for example, if all items in the
+list view are deleted.
+
     Warning: Do not delete any TQListViewItem objects in slots
+connected to this signal.
+
     
    See also setCurrentItem() and currentItem().
+
+
    Example: listviews/listviews.cpp.
+
    TQListViewItem * TQListView::currentItem () const
+
    
+Returns the current item, or 0 if there isn't one.
+
     
    See also setCurrentItem().
+
+
    Examples: addressbook/centralwidget.cpp, listviews/listviews.cpp, and qutlook/centralwidget.cpp.
+
    RenameAction TQListView::defaultRenameAction () const
+
    Returns what action to perform when the editor loses focus during renaming.
+See the "defaultRenameAction" property for details.
+
    void TQListView::doAutoScroll () [protected slot]
+
    
+This slot handles auto-scrolling when the mouse button is pressed
+and the mouse is outside the widget.
+
+
    void TQListView::doubleClicked ( TQListViewItem *, const TQPoint &, int ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever an item is double-clicked. It's
+emitted on the second button press, not the second button release.
+The arguments are the relevant TQListViewItem (may be 0), the point
+in global coordinates and the relevant column (or -1 if the click
+was outside the list).
+
     Warning: Do not delete any TQListViewItem objects in slots
+connected to this signal.
+
+
    void TQListView::doubleClicked ( TQListViewItem * item ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+(use doubleClicked( TQListViewItem *, const TQPoint&, int ))
+
     This signal is emitted whenever an item is double-clicked. It's
+emitted on the second button press, not the second button release.
+item is the list view item on which the user did the
+double-click.
+
+
    TQDragObject * TQListView::dragObject () [virtual protected]
+
    
+If the user presses the mouse on an item and starts moving the
+mouse, and the item allow dragging (see
+TQListViewItem::setDragEnabled()), this function is called to get a
+drag object and a drag is started unless dragObject() returns 0.
+
     By default this function returns 0. You should reimplement it and
+create a TQDragObject depending on the selected items.
+
+
    void TQListView::drawContentsOffset ( TQPainter * p, int ox, int oy, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Calls TQListViewItem::paintCell() and
+TQListViewItem::paintBranches() as necessary for all list view
+items that require repainting in the cw pixels wide and ch
+pixels high bounding rectangle starting at position cx, cy
+with offset ox, oy. Uses the painter p.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQScrollView.
+
    void TQListView::dropped ( TQDropEvent * e ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted, when a drop event occurred on the
+viewport (not onto an item).
+
     e provides all the information about the drop.
+
+
    void TQListView::ensureItemVisible ( const TQListViewItem * i )
+
    
+Ensures that item i is visible, scrolling the list view
+vertically if necessary and opening (expanding) any parent items
+if this is required to show the item.
+
     
    See also itemRect() and TQScrollView::ensureVisible().
+
+
    bool TQListView::eventFilter ( TQObject * o, TQEvent * e ) [virtual]
+
    
+Redirects the event e relating to object o, for the viewport
+to mousePressEvent(), keyPressEvent() and friends.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQScrollView.
+
    void TQListView::expanded ( TQListViewItem * item ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when item has been expanded, i.e. when
+the children of item are shown.
+
     
    See also setOpen() and collapsed().
+
+
    TQListViewItem * TQListView::findItem ( const TQString & text, int column, ComparisonFlags compare = ExactMatch | CaseSensitive ) const
+
    
+Finds the first list view item in column column, that matches
+text and returns the item, or returns 0 of no such item could
+be found.
+The search starts from the current item if the current item exists,
+otherwise it starts from the first list view item. After reaching
+the last item the search continues from the first item.
+Pass OR-ed together TQt::StringComparisonMode values
+in the compare flag, to control how the matching is performed.
+The default comparison mode is case-sensitive, exact match.
+
+
    TQListViewItem * TQListView::firstChild () const
+
    
+Returns the first item in this TQListView. Returns 0 if there is no
+first item.
+
     A list view's items can be traversed using firstChild()
+and nextSibling() or using a TQListViewItemIterator.
+
     
    See also itemAt(), TQListViewItem::itemBelow(), and TQListViewItem::itemAbove().
+
+
    Examples: addressbook/centralwidget.cpp and listviews/listviews.cpp.
+
    TQHeader * TQListView::header () const
+
    
+Returns the TQHeader object that manages this list view's columns.
+Please don't modify the header behind the list view's back.
+
     You may safely call TQHeader::setClickEnabled(),
+TQHeader::setResizeEnabled(), TQHeader::setMovingEnabled(),
+TQHeader::hide() and all the const TQHeader functions.
+
+
    Examples: listviews/listviews.cpp and qdir/qdir.cpp.
+
    void TQListView::hideColumn ( int column )
+
    
+Hides the column specified at column. This is a convenience
+function that calls setColumnWidth( column, 0 ).
+
     Note: The user may still be able to resize the hidden column using
+the header handles. To prevent this, call setResizeEnabled(FALSE,
+column) on the list views header.
+
     
    See also setColumnWidth().
+
+
    void TQListView::insertItem ( TQListViewItem * i ) [virtual]
+
    
+Inserts item i into the list view as a top-level item. You do
+not need to call this unless you've called takeItem(i) or
+TQListViewItem::takeItem(i) and need to reinsert i elsewhere.
+
     
    See also TQListViewItem::takeItem() and takeItem().
+
+
    void TQListView::invertSelection () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Inverts the selection. Only works in Multi and Extended
+selection modes.
+
+
    bool TQListView::isMultiSelection () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the list view is in multi-selection or extended-selection mode; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "multiSelection" property for details.
+
    bool TQListView::isOpen ( const TQListViewItem * item ) const
+
    
+Identical to item->isOpen(). Provided for completeness.
+
     
    See also setOpen().
+
+
    bool TQListView::isRenaming () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if an item is being renamed; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQListView::isSelected ( const TQListViewItem * i ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the list view item i is selected; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also TQListViewItem::isSelected().
+
+
    TQListViewItem * TQListView::itemAt ( const TQPoint & viewPos ) const
+
    
+Returns the list view item at viewPos. Note that viewPos is
+in the viewport()'s coordinate system, not in the list view's own,
+much larger, coordinate system.
+
     itemAt() returns 0 if there is no such item.
+
     Note that you also get the pointer to the item if viewPos
+points to the root decoration (see setRootIsDecorated()) of the
+item. To check whether or not viewPos is on the root decoration
+of the item, you can do something like this:
+
     
    +    TQListViewItem *i = itemAt( p );
+    if ( i ) {
+        if ( p.x() > header()->sectionPos( header()->mapToIndex( 0 ) ) +
+                treeStepSize() * ( i->depth() + ( rootIsDecorated() ? 1 : 0) ) + itemMargin() ||
+                p.x() < header()->sectionPos( header()->mapToIndex( 0 ) ) ) {
+            ; // p is not on root decoration
+        else
+            ; // p is on the root decoration
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     This might be interesting if you use this function to find out
+where the user clicked and if you want to start a drag (which you
+do not want to do if the user clicked onto the root decoration of
+an item).
+
     
    See also itemPos(), itemRect(), and viewportToContents().
+
+
    int TQListView::itemMargin () const
+
    Returns the advisory item margin that list items may use.
+See the "itemMargin" property for details.
+
    int TQListView::itemPos ( const TQListViewItem * item )
+
    
+Returns the y-coordinate of item in the list view's coordinate
+system. This function is normally much slower than itemAt() but it
+works for all items, whereas itemAt() normally works only for
+items on the screen.
+
     This is a thin wrapper around TQListViewItem::itemPos().
+
     
    See also itemAt() and itemRect().
+
+
    TQRect TQListView::itemRect ( const TQListViewItem * i ) const
+
    
+Returns the rectangle on the screen that item i occupies in
+viewport()'s coordinates, or an invalid rectangle if i is 0 or
+is not currently visible.
+
     The rectangle returned does not include any children of the
+rectangle (i.e. it uses TQListViewItem::height(), rather than
+TQListViewItem::totalHeight()). If you want the rectangle to
+include children you can use something like this:
+
     
    +    TQRect r( listView->itemRect( item ) );
+    r.setHeight( (TQCOORD)(TQMIN( item->totalHeight(),
+                                listView->viewport->height() - r.y() ) ) )
+    
    
+ 
+
     Note the way it avoids too-high rectangles. totalHeight() can be
+much larger than the window system's coordinate system allows.
+
     itemRect() is comparatively slow. It's best to call it only for
+items that are probably on-screen.
+
+
    void TQListView::itemRenamed ( TQListViewItem * item, int col, const TQString & text ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when item has been renamed to text,
+e.g. by in in-place renaming, in column col.
+
     
    See also TQListViewItem::setRenameEnabled().
+
+
    void TQListView::itemRenamed ( TQListViewItem * item, int col ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This signal is emitted when item has been renamed, e.g. by
+in-place renaming, in column col.
+
     
    See also TQListViewItem::setRenameEnabled().
+
+
    TQListViewItem * TQListView::lastItem () const
+
    
+Returns the last item in the list view tree. Returns 0 if there
+are no items in the TQListView.
+
     This function is slow because it traverses the entire tree to find
+the last item.
+
+
    void TQListView::mouseButtonClicked ( int button, TQListViewItem * item, const TQPoint & pos, int c ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the user clicks (mouse pressed and mouse released) in the list view at position pos. button
+is the mouse button that the user pressed, item is the clicked
+list view item or 0 if the user didn't click on an item. If item is not 0, c is the list view column into which the user
+pressed; if item is 0 c's value is undefined.
+
     Warning: Do not delete any TQListViewItem objects in slots
+connected to this signal.
+
+
    void TQListView::mouseButtonPressed ( int button, TQListViewItem * item, const TQPoint & pos, int c ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the user pressed the mouse button
+in the list view at position pos. button is the mouse button
+which the user pressed, item is the pressed list view item or 0
+if the user didn't press on an item. If item is not 0, c is
+the list view column into which the user pressed; if item is 0
+c's value is undefined.
+
     Warning: Do not delete any TQListViewItem objects in slots
+connected to this signal.
+
+
    void TQListView::onItem ( TQListViewItem * i ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user moves the mouse cursor onto
+item i, similar to the TQWidget::enterEvent() function.
+
+
    void TQListView::onViewport () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user moves the mouse cursor from
+an item to an empty part of the list view.
+
+
    void TQListView::paintEmptyArea ( TQPainter * p, const TQRect & rect ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Paints rect so that it looks like empty background using
+painter p. rect is in widget coordinates, ready to be fed to
+p.
+
     The default function fills rect with the
+viewport()->backgroundBrush().
+
+
    void TQListView::pressed ( TQListViewItem * item ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the user presses the mouse button
+in a list view. item is the list view item on which the user
+pressed the mouse button, or 0 if the user didn't press the mouse
+on an item.
+
     Warning: Do not delete any TQListViewItem objects in slots
+connected to this signal.
+
+
    void TQListView::pressed ( TQListViewItem * item, const TQPoint & pnt, int c ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the user presses the mouse button
+in a list view. item is the list view item on which the user
+pressed the mouse button, or 0 if the user didn't press the mouse
+on an item. pnt is the position of the mouse cursor in global
+coordinates, and c is the column where the mouse cursor was
+when the user pressed the mouse button.
+
     Warning: Do not delete any TQListViewItem objects in slots
+connected to this signal.
+
+
    void TQListView::removeColumn ( int index ) [virtual]
+
    
+Removes the column at position index.
+
     If no columns remain after the column is removed, the
+list view will be cleared.
+
     
    See also clear().
+
+
    void TQListView::removeItem ( TQListViewItem * item ) [virtual]
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     This function has been renamed takeItem().
+
+
    void TQListView::repaintItem ( const TQListViewItem * item ) const
+
    
+Repaints item on the screen if item is currently visible.
+Takes care to avoid multiple repaints.
+
+
    void TQListView::resizeEvent ( TQResizeEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Ensures that the header is correctly sized and positioned when the
+resize event e occurs.
+
+
    ResizeMode TQListView::resizeMode () const
+
    Returns TRUE if all, none or the only the last column should be resized; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "resizeMode" property for details.
+
    void TQListView::returnPressed ( TQListViewItem * ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when Enter or Return is pressed. The
+argument is the currentItem().
+
+
    void TQListView::rightButtonClicked ( TQListViewItem *, const TQPoint &, int ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the right button is clicked (i.e. when
+it's released). The arguments are the relevant TQListViewItem (may
+be 0), the point in global coordinates and the relevant column (or
+-1 if the click was outside the list).
+
+
    void TQListView::rightButtonPressed ( TQListViewItem *, const TQPoint &, int ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the right button is pressed. The
+arguments are the relevant TQListViewItem (may be 0), the point in
+global coordinates and the relevant column (or -1 if the click was
+outside the list).
+
+
    bool TQListView::rootIsDecorated () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the list view shows open/close signs on root items; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "rootIsDecorated" property for details.
+
    void TQListView::selectAll ( bool select ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+If select is TRUE, all the items get selected; otherwise all
+the items get unselected. This only works in the selection modes Multi and Extended. In Single and NoSelection mode the
+selection of the current item is just set to select.
+
+
    TQListViewItem * TQListView::selectedItem () const
+
    
+Returns the selected item if the list view is in Single
+selection mode and an item is selected.
+
     If no items are selected or the list view is not in Single
+selection mode this function returns 0.
+
     
    See also setSelected() and multiSelection.
+
+
    void TQListView::selectionChanged () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the set of selected items has
+changed (normally before the screen update). It is available in
+Single, Multi, and Extended selection modes, but is most
+useful in Multi selection mode.
+
     Warning: Do not delete any TQListViewItem objects in slots
+connected to this signal.
+
     
    See also setSelected() and TQListViewItem::setSelected().
+
+
    Example: listviews/listviews.cpp.
+
    void TQListView::selectionChanged ( TQListViewItem * ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the selected item has changed in
+Single selection mode (normally after the screen update). The
+argument is the newly selected item. If the selection is cleared
+(when, for example, the user clicks in the unused area of the list
+view) then this signal will not be emitted.
+
     In Multi selection mode, use the no argument overload of this
+signal.
+
     Warning: Do not delete any TQListViewItem objects in slots
+connected to this signal.
+
     
    See also setSelected(), TQListViewItem::setSelected(), and currentChanged().
+
+
    SelectionMode TQListView::selectionMode () const
+
    Returns the list view's selection mode.
+See the "selectionMode" property for details.
+
    void TQListView::setAllColumnsShowFocus ( bool ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether items should show keyboard focus using all columns.
+See the "allColumnsShowFocus" property for details.
+
    void TQListView::setColumnAlignment ( int column, int align ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets column column's alignment to align. The alignment is
+ultimately passed to TQListViewItem::paintCell() for each item in
+the list view. For horizontally aligned text with TQt::AlignLeft or
+TQt::AlignHCenter the ellipsis (...) will be to the right, for
+TQt::AlignRight the ellipsis will be to the left.
+
     
    See also TQt::AlignmentFlags.
+
+
    Example: listviews/listviews.cpp.
+
    void TQListView::setColumnText ( int column, const TQString & label ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the heading of column column to label.
+
     
    See also columnText().
+
+
    void TQListView::setColumnText ( int column, const TQIconSet & iconset, const TQString & label ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the heading of column column to iconset and label.
+
     
    See also columnText().
+
+
    void TQListView::setColumnWidth ( int column, int w ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the width of column column to w pixels. Note that if
+the column has a WidthMode other than Manual, this width
+setting may be subsequently overridden.
+
     
    See also columnWidth().
+
+
    void TQListView::setColumnWidthMode ( int c, WidthMode mode ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets column c's width mode to mode. The default depends on
+the original width argument to addColumn().
+
     
    See also TQListViewItem::width().
+
+
    void TQListView::setCurrentItem ( TQListViewItem * i ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets item i to be the current item and repaints appropriately
+(i.e. highlights the item). The current item is used for keyboard
+navigation and focus indication; it is independent of any selected
+items, although a selected item can also be the current item.
+
     This function does not set the selection anchor. Use
+setSelectionAnchor() instead.
+
     
    See also currentItem() and setSelected().
+
+
    Example: listviews/listviews.cpp.
+
    void TQListView::setDefaultRenameAction ( RenameAction a ) [virtual]
+
    Sets what action to perform when the editor loses focus during renaming to a.
+See the "defaultRenameAction" property for details.
+
    void TQListView::setItemMargin ( int ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the advisory item margin that list items may use.
+See the "itemMargin" property for details.
+
    void TQListView::setMultiSelection ( bool enable ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the list view is in multi-selection or extended-selection mode to enable.
+See the "multiSelection" property for details.
+
    void TQListView::setOpen ( TQListViewItem * item, bool open ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets item to be open if open is TRUE and item is
+expandable, and to be closed if open is FALSE. Repaints
+accordingly.
+
     
    See also TQListViewItem::setOpen() and TQListViewItem::setExpandable().
+
+
    void TQListView::setResizeMode ( ResizeMode m ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether all, none or the only the last column should be resized to m.
+See the "resizeMode" property for details.
+
    void TQListView::setRootIsDecorated ( bool ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the list view shows open/close signs on root items.
+See the "rootIsDecorated" property for details.
+
    void TQListView::setSelected ( TQListViewItem * item, bool selected ) [virtual]
+
    
+If selected is TRUE the item is selected; otherwise it is
+unselected.
+
     If the list view is in Single selection mode and selected is
+TRUE, the currently selected item is unselected and item is
+made current. Unlike TQListViewItem::setSelected(), this function
+updates the list view as necessary and emits the
+selectionChanged() signals.
+
     
    See also isSelected(), multiSelection, multiSelection, setCurrentItem(), and setSelectionAnchor().
+
+
    Example: listviews/listviews.cpp.
+
    void TQListView::setSelectionAnchor ( TQListViewItem * item )
+
    
+Sets the selection anchor to item, if item is selectable.
+
     The selection anchor is the item that remains selected when
+Shift-selecting with either mouse or keyboard in Extended
+selection mode.
+
     
    See also setSelected().
+
+
    void TQListView::setSelectionMode ( SelectionMode mode )
+
    Sets the list view's selection mode to mode.
+See the "selectionMode" property for details.
+
    void TQListView::setShowSortIndicator ( bool show ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the list view header should display a sort indicator to show.
+See the "showSortIndicator" property for details.
+
    void TQListView::setShowToolTips ( bool b ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether this list view should show tooltips for truncated column texts to b.
+See the "showToolTips" property for details.
+
    void TQListView::setSortColumn ( int column )
+
    
+Sets the sorting column for the list view.
+
     If column is -1, sorting is disabled and the user cannot sort
+columns by clicking on the column headers. If column is larger
+than the number of columns the user must click on a column header
+to sort the list view.
+
     
    See also setSorting().
+
+
    void TQListView::setSortOrder ( SortOrder order )
+
    
+Sets the sort order for the items in the list view to order.
+
     
    See also setSorting().
+
+
    void TQListView::setSorting ( int column, bool ascending = TRUE ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the list view to be sorted by column column in ascending
+order if ascending is TRUE or descending order if it is FALSE.
+
     If column is -1, sorting is disabled and the user cannot sort
+columns by clicking on the column headers. If column is larger
+than the number of columns the user must click on a column
+header to sort the list view.
+
+
    void TQListView::setTreeStepSize ( int ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the number of pixels a child is offset from its parent.
+See the "treeStepSize" property for details.
+
    bool TQListView::showSortIndicator () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the list view header should display a sort indicator; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "showSortIndicator" property for details.
+
    bool TQListView::showToolTips () const
+
    Returns TRUE if this list view should show tooltips for truncated column texts; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "showToolTips" property for details.
+
    void TQListView::sort () [virtual]
+
    
+Sorts the list view using the last sorting configuration (sort
+column and ascending/descending).
+
+
    int TQListView::sortColumn () const
+
    
+Returns the column by which the list view is sorted, or -1 if
+sorting is disabled.
+
     
    See also sortOrder().
+
+
    SortOrder TQListView::sortOrder () const
+
    
+Returns the sorting order of the list view items.
+
     
    See also sortColumn().
+
+
    void TQListView::spacePressed ( TQListViewItem * ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when Space is pressed. The argument is
+the currentItem().
+
+
    void TQListView::startDrag () [virtual protected]
+
    
+Starts a drag.
+
+
    void TQListView::takeItem ( TQListViewItem * i ) [virtual]
+
    
+Removes item i from the list view; i must be a top-level
+item. The warnings regarding TQListViewItem::takeItem() apply to
+this function, too.
+
     
    See also insertItem().
+
+
    int TQListView::treeStepSize () const
+
    Returns the number of pixels a child is offset from its parent.
+See the "treeStepSize" property for details.
+
    void TQListView::triggerUpdate () [slot]
+
    
+Triggers a size, geometry and content update during the next
+iteration of the event loop. Ensures that there'll be just one
+update to avoid flicker.
+
+
    void TQListView::updateContents () [protected slot]
+
    
+Updates the sizes of the viewport, header, scroll bars and so on.
+
     Warning: Don't call this directly; call triggerUpdate() instead.
+
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    bool allColumnsShowFocus
    
+
    This property holds whether items should show keyboard focus using all columns.
+
    If this property is TRUE all columns will show focus and selection
+states, otherwise only column 0 will show focus.
+
     The default is FALSE.
+
     Setting this to TRUE if it's not necessary may cause noticeable
+flicker.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setAllColumnsShowFocus() and get this property's value with allColumnsShowFocus().
+
    int childCount
    
+
    This property holds the number of parentless (top-level) TQListViewItem objects in this TQListView.
+
    Holds the current number of parentless (top-level) TQListViewItem
+objects in this TQListView.
+
     
    See also TQListViewItem::childCount().
+
+
    Get this property's value with childCount().
+
    int columns
    
+
    This property holds the number of columns in this list view.
+
    Get this property's value with columns().
+
    See also addColumn() and removeColumn().
+
+
    RenameAction defaultRenameAction
    
+
    This property holds what action to perform when the editor loses focus during renaming.
+
    If this property is Accept, and the user renames an item and
+the editor loses focus (without the user pressing Enter), the
+item will still be renamed. If the property's value is Reject,
+the item will not be renamed unless the user presses Enter. The
+default is Reject.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setDefaultRenameAction() and get this property's value with defaultRenameAction().
+
    int itemMargin
    
+
    This property holds the advisory item margin that list items may use.
+
    The item margin defaults to one pixel and is the margin between
+the item's edges and the area where it draws its contents.
+TQListViewItem::paintFocus() draws in the margin.
+
     
    See also TQListViewItem::paintCell().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setItemMargin() and get this property's value with itemMargin().
+
    bool multiSelection
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
    This property holds whether the list view is in multi-selection or extended-selection mode.
+
    If you enable multi-selection, Multi, mode, it is possible to
+specify whether or not this mode should be extended. Extended
+means that the user can select multiple items only when pressing
+the Shift or Ctrl key at the same time.
+
     The default selection mode is Single.
+
     
    See also selectionMode.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setMultiSelection() and get this property's value with isMultiSelection().
+
    ResizeMode resizeMode
    
+
    This property holds whether all, none or the only the last column should be resized.
+
    Specifies whether all, none or only the last column should be
+resized to fit the full width of the list view. The values for this
+property can be one of: NoColumn (the default), AllColumns
+or LastColumn.
+
     Warning: Setting the resize mode should be done after all necessary
+columns have been added to the list view, otherwise the behavior is
+undefined.
+
     
    See also TQHeader and header().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setResizeMode() and get this property's value with resizeMode().
+
    bool rootIsDecorated
    
+
    This property holds whether the list view shows open/close signs on root items.
+
    Open/close signs are small + or - symbols in windows
+style, or arrows in Motif style. The default is FALSE.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setRootIsDecorated() and get this property's value with rootIsDecorated().
+
    SelectionMode selectionMode
    
+
    This property holds the list view's selection mode.
+
    The mode can be Single (the default), Extended, Multi or
+NoSelection.
+
     
    See also multiSelection.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setSelectionMode() and get this property's value with selectionMode().
+
    bool showSortIndicator
    
+
    This property holds whether the list view header should display a sort indicator.
+
    If this property is TRUE, an arrow is drawn in the header of the
+list view to indicate the sort order of the list view contents.
+The arrow will be drawn in the correct column and will point up or
+down, depending on the current sort direction. The default is
+FALSE (don't show an indicator).
+
     
    See also TQHeader::setSortIndicator().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setShowSortIndicator() and get this property's value with showSortIndicator().
+
    bool showToolTips
    
+
    This property holds whether this list view should show tooltips for truncated column texts.
+
    The default is TRUE.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setShowToolTips() and get this property's value with showToolTips().
+
    int treeStepSize
    
+
    This property holds the number of pixels a child is offset from its parent.
+
    The default is 20 pixels.
+
     Of course, this property is only meaningful for hierarchical list
+views.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setTreeStepSize() and get this property's value with treeStepSize().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqlocale.html b/doc/html/ntqlocale.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9f675f2ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqlocale.html
@@ -0,0 +1,852 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQLocale Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQLocale Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQLocale class converts between numbers and their
+string representations in various languages.
+More...
+
    Almost all the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support. The exception is setDefault().
+
    #include <ntqlocale.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • enum Language { C = 1, Abkhazian = 2, Afan = 3, Afar = 4, Afrikaans = 5, Albanian = 6, Amharic = 7, Arabic = 8, Armenian = 9, Assamese = 10, Aymara = 11, Azerbaijani = 12, Bashkir = 13, Basque = 14, Bengali = 15, Bhutani = 16, Bihari = 17, Bislama = 18, Breton = 19, Bulgarian = 20, Burmese = 21, Byelorussian = 22, Cambodian = 23, Catalan = 24, Chinese = 25, Corsican = 26, Croatian = 27, Czech = 28, Danish = 29, Dutch = 30, English = 31, Esperanto = 32, Estonian = 33, Faroese = 34, FijiLanguage = 35, Finnish = 36, French = 37, Frisian = 38, Gaelic = 39, Galician = 40, Georgian = 41, German = 42, Greek = 43, Greenlandic = 44, Guarani = 45, Gujarati = 46, Hausa = 47, Hebrew = 48, Hindi = 49, Hungarian = 50, Icelandic = 51, Indonesian = 52, Interlingua = 53, Interlingue = 54, Inuktitut = 55, Inupiak = 56, Irish = 57, Italian = 58, Japanese = 59, Javanese = 60, Kannada = 61, Kashmiri = 62, Kazakh = 63, Kinyarwanda = 64, Kirghiz = 65, Korean = 66, Kurdish = 67, Kurundi = 68, Laothian = 69, Latin = 70, Latvian = 71, Lingala = 72, Lithuanian = 73, Macedonian = 74, Malagasy = 75, Malay = 76, Malayalam = 77, Maltese = 78, Maori = 79, Marathi = 80, Moldavian = 81, Mongolian = 82, NauruLanguage = 83, Nepali = 84, Norwegian = 85, Occitan = 86, Oriya = 87, Pashto = 88, Persian = 89, Polish = 90, Portuguese = 91, Punjabi = 92, Quechua = 93, RhaetoRomance = 94, Romanian = 95, Russian = 96, Samoan = 97, Sangho = 98, Sanskrit = 99, Serbian = 100, SerboCroatian = 101, Sesotho = 102, Setswana = 103, Shona = 104, Sindhi = 105, Singhalese = 106, Siswati = 107, Slovak = 108, Slovenian = 109, Somali = 110, Spanish = 111, Sundanese = 112, Swahili = 113, Swedish = 114, Tagalog = 115, Tajik = 116, Tamil = 117, Tatar = 118, Telugu = 119, Thai = 120, Tibetan = 121, Tigrinya = 122, TongaLanguage = 123, Tsonga = 124, Turkish = 125, Turkmen = 126, Twi = 127, Uigur = 128, Ukrainian = 129, Urdu = 130, Uzbek = 131, Vietnamese = 132, Volapuk = 133, Welsh = 134, Wolof = 135, Xhosa = 136, Yiddish = 137, Yoruba = 138, Zhuang = 139, Zulu = 140, LastLanguage = Zulu }
      • 
+
    • enum Country { AnyCountry = 0, Afghanistan = 1, Albania = 2, Algeria = 3, AmericanSamoa = 4, Andorra = 5, Angola = 6, Anguilla = 7, Antarctica = 8, AntiguaAndBarbuda = 9, Argentina = 10, Armenia = 11, Aruba = 12, Australia = 13, Austria = 14, Azerbaijan = 15, Bahamas = 16, Bahrain = 17, Bangladesh = 18, Barbados = 19, Belarus = 20, Belgium = 21, Belize = 22, Benin = 23, Bermuda = 24, Bhutan = 25, Bolivia = 26, BosniaAndHerzegowina = 27, Botswana = 28, BouvetIsland = 29, Brazil = 30, BritishIndianOceanTerritory = 31, BruneiDarussalam = 32, Bulgaria = 33, BurkinaFaso = 34, Burundi = 35, Cambodia = 36, Cameroon = 37, Canada = 38, CapeVerde = 39, CaymanIslands = 40, CentralAfricanRepublic = 41, Chad = 42, Chile = 43, China = 44, ChristmasIsland = 45, CocosIslands = 46, Colombia = 47, Comoros = 48, DemocraticRepublicOfCongo = 49, PeoplesRepublicOfCongo = 50, CookIslands = 51, CostaRica = 52, IvoryCoast = 53, Croatia = 54, Cuba = 55, Cyprus = 56, CzechRepublic = 57, Denmark = 58, Djibouti = 59, Dominica = 60, DominicanRepublic = 61, EastTimor = 62, Ecuador = 63, Egypt = 64, ElSalvador = 65, EquatorialGuinea = 66, Eritrea = 67, Estonia = 68, Ethiopia = 69, FalklandIslands = 70, FaroeIslands = 71, FijiCountry = 72, Finland = 73, France = 74, MetropolitanFrance = 75, FrenchGuiana = 76, FrenchPolynesia = 77, FrenchSouthernTerritories = 78, Gabon = 79, Gambia = 80, Georgia = 81, Germany = 82, Ghana = 83, Gibraltar = 84, Greece = 85, Greenland = 86, Grenada = 87, Guadeloupe = 88, Guam = 89, Guatemala = 90, Guinea = 91, GuineaBissau = 92, Guyana = 93, Haiti = 94, HeardAndMcDonaldIslands = 95, Honduras = 96, HongKong = 97, Hungary = 98, Iceland = 99, India = 100, Indonesia = 101, Iran = 102, Iraq = 103, Ireland = 104, Israel = 105, Italy = 106, Jamaica = 107, Japan = 108, Jordan = 109, Kazakhstan = 110, Kenya = 111, Kiribati = 112, DemocraticRepublicOfKorea = 113, RepublicOfKorea = 114, Kuwait = 115, Kyrgyzstan = 116, Lao = 117, Latvia = 118, Lebanon = 119, Lesotho = 120, Liberia = 121, LibyanArabJamahiriya = 122, Liechtenstein = 123, Lithuania = 124, Luxembourg = 125, Macau = 126, Macedonia = 127, Madagascar = 128, Malawi = 129, Malaysia = 130, Maldives = 131, Mali = 132, Malta = 133, MarshallIslands = 134, Martinique = 135, Mauritania = 136, Mauritius = 137, Mayotte = 138, Mexico = 139, Micronesia = 140, Moldova = 141, Monaco = 142, Mongolia = 143, Montserrat = 144, Morocco = 145, Mozambique = 146, Myanmar = 147, Namibia = 148, NauruCountry = 149, Nepal = 150, Netherlands = 151, NetherlandsAntilles = 152, NewCaledonia = 153, NewZealand = 154, Nicaragua = 155, Niger = 156, Nigeria = 157, Niue = 158, NorfolkIsland = 159, NorthernMarianaIslands = 160, Norway = 161, Oman = 162, Pakistan = 163, Palau = 164, PalestinianTerritory = 165, Panama = 166, PapuaNewGuinea = 167, Paraguay = 168, Peru = 169, Philippines = 170, Pitcairn = 171, Poland = 172, Portugal = 173, PuertoRico = 174, Qatar = 175, Reunion = 176, Romania = 177, RussianFederation = 178, Rwanda = 179, SaintKittsAndNevis = 180, StLucia = 181, StVincentAndTheGrenadines = 182, Samoa = 183, SanMarino = 184, SaoTomeAndPrincipe = 185, SaudiArabia = 186, Senegal = 187, Seychelles = 188, SierraLeone = 189, Singapore = 190, Slovakia = 191, Slovenia = 192, SolomonIslands = 193, Somalia = 194, SouthAfrica = 195, SouthGeorgiaAndTheSouthSandwichIslands = 196, Spain = 197, SriLanka = 198, StHelena = 199, StPierreAndMiquelon = 200, Sudan = 201, Suriname = 202, SvalbardAndJanMayenIslands = 203, Swaziland = 204, Sweden = 205, Switzerland = 206, SyrianArabRepublic = 207, Taiwan = 208, Tajikistan = 209, Tanzania = 210, Thailand = 211, Togo = 212, Tokelau = 213, TongaCountry = 214, TrinidadAndTobago = 215, Tunisia = 216, Turkey = 217, Turkmenistan = 218, TurksAndCaicosIslands = 219, Tuvalu = 220, Uganda = 221, Ukraine = 222, UnitedArabEmirates = 223, UnitedKingdom = 224, UnitedStates = 225, UnitedStatesMinorOutlyingIslands = 226, Uruguay = 227, Uzbekistan = 228, Vanuatu = 229, VaticanCityState = 230, Venezuela = 231, VietNam = 232, BritishVirginIslands = 233, USVirginIslands = 234, WallisAndFutunaIslands = 235, WesternSahara = 236, Yemen = 237, Yugoslavia = 238, Zambia = 239, Zimbabwe = 240, LastCountry = Zimbabwe }
      • 
+
    • TQLocale ()
      • 
+
    • TQLocale ( const TQString & name )
      • 
+
    • TQLocale ( Language language, Country country = AnyCountry )
      • 
+
    • TQLocale ( const TQLocale & other )
      • 
+
    • TQLocale & operator= ( const TQLocale & other )
      • 
+
    • Language language () const
      • 
+
    • Country country () const
      • 
+
    • TQString name () const
      • 
+
    • short toShort ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • ushort toUShort ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • int toInt ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • uint toUInt ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • Q_LONG toLong ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • Q_ULONG toULong ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • Q_LLONG toLongLong ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • Q_ULLONG toULongLong ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • float toFloat ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • double toDouble ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString toString ( short i ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString toString ( ushort i ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString toString ( int i ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString toString ( uint i ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString toString ( Q_LONG i ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString toString ( Q_ULONG i ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString toString ( Q_LLONG i ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString toString ( Q_ULLONG i ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString toString ( float i, char f = 'g', int prec = 6 ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString toString ( double i, char f = 'g', int prec = 6 ) const
      • 
+
    
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQLocale class converts between numbers and their
+string representations in various languages.
+
     
+
+
     It is initialized with a country/language pair in its constructor
+and offers number-to-string and string-to-number conversion
+functions simmilar to those in TQString.
+
     
    +    TQLocale egyptian(TQLocale::Arabic, TQLocale::Egypt);
+    TQString s1 = egyptian.toString(1.571429E+07, 'e');
+    TQString s2 = egyptian.toString(10);
+
+    double d = egyptian.toDouble(s1);
+    int s2 = egyptian.toInt(s2);
+    
    
+ 
+
     TQLocale supports the concept of a default locale, which is
+determined from the system's locale settings at application
+startup. The default locale can be changed by calling the
+static member setDefault(). The default locale has the
+following effects:
+
     
      
+
    •  If a TQLocale object is constructed with the default constructor,
+it will use the default locale's settings.
+
    •  TQString::toDouble() interprets the string according to the default
+locale. If this fails, it falls back on the "C" locale.
+
    •  TQString::arg() uses the default locale to format a number when
+its position specifier in the format string contains an 'L',
+e.g. "%L1".
+
    
+
     
    +    TQLocale::setDefault(TQLocale(TQLocale::Hebrew, TQLocale::Israel));
+    TQLocale hebrew; // Constructs a default TQLocale
+    TQString s1 = hebrew.toString(15714.3, 'e');
+
+    bool ok;
+    double d;
+
+    TQLocale::setDefault(TQLocale::C);
+    d = TQString( "1234,56" ).toDouble(&ok); // ok == false
+    d = TQString( "1234.56" ).toDouble(&ok); // ok == true, d == 1234.56
+
+    TQLocale::setDefault(TQLocale::German);
+    d = TQString( "1234,56" ).toDouble(&ok); // ok == true, d == 1234.56
+    d = TQString( "1234.56" ).toDouble(&ok); // ok == true, d == 1234.56
+
+    TQLocale::setDefault(TQLocale(TQLocale::English, TQLocale::UnitedStates));
+    str = TQString( "%1 %L2 %L3" )
+            .arg( 12345 )
+            .arg( 12345 )
+            .arg( 12345, 0, 16 );
+    // str == "12345 12,345 3039"
+    
    
+ 
+
     When a language/country pair is specified in the constructor, one
+of three things can happen:
+
     
      
+
    •  If the language/country pair is found in the database, it is used.
+
    •  If the language is found but the country is not, or if the country
+is AnyCountry, the language is used with the most
+appropriate available country (for example, Germany for German),
+
    •  If neither the language nor the country are found, TQLocale
+defaults to the default locale (see setDefault()).
+
    
+
     The "C" locale is identical to English/UnitedStates.
+
     Use language() and country() to determine the actual language and
+country values used.
+
     An alternative method for constructing a TQLocale object is by
+specifying the locale name.
+
     
    +    TQLocale korean("ko");
+    TQLocale swiss("de_CH");
+    
    
+ 
+
     This constructor converts the locale name to a language/country
+pair; it does not use the system locale database.
+
     All the methods in TQLocale, with the exception of setDefault(),
+are reentrant.
+
     
    See also TQString::toDouble(), TQString::arg(), and Text Related Classes.
+
+
     The double-to-string and string-to-double conversion functions are
+covered by the following licenses:
+
     
+
     Copyright (c) 1991 by AT&T.
+
     Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
+purpose without fee is hereby granted, provided that this entire notice
+is included in all copies of any software which is or includes a copy
+or modification of this software and in all copies of the supporting
+documentation for such software.
+
     THIS SOFTWARE IS BEING PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
+WARRANTY.  IN PARTICULAR, NEITHER THE AUTHOR NOR AT&T MAKES ANY
+REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF ANY KIND CONCERNING THE MERCHANTABILITY
+OF THIS SOFTWARE OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
     This product includes software developed by the University of
+California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQLocale::Country
    
+
+
     This enumerated type is used to specify a country.
+
      
+
    • TQLocale::AnyCountry
+
    • TQLocale::Afghanistan
+
    • TQLocale::Albania
+
    • TQLocale::Algeria
+
    • TQLocale::AmericanSamoa
+
    • TQLocale::Andorra
+
    • TQLocale::Angola
+
    • TQLocale::Anguilla
+
    • TQLocale::Antarctica
+
    • TQLocale::AntiguaAndBarbuda
+
    • TQLocale::Argentina
+
    • TQLocale::Armenia
+
    • TQLocale::Aruba
+
    • TQLocale::Australia
+
    • TQLocale::Austria
+
    • TQLocale::Azerbaijan
+
    • TQLocale::Bahamas
+
    • TQLocale::Bahrain
+
    • TQLocale::Bangladesh
+
    • TQLocale::Barbados
+
    • TQLocale::Belarus
+
    • TQLocale::Belgium
+
    • TQLocale::Belize
+
    • TQLocale::Benin
+
    • TQLocale::Bermuda
+
    • TQLocale::Bhutan
+
    • TQLocale::Bolivia
+
    • TQLocale::BosniaAndHerzegowina
+
    • TQLocale::Botswana
+
    • TQLocale::BouvetIsland
+
    • TQLocale::Brazil
+
    • TQLocale::BritishIndianOceanTerritory
+
    • TQLocale::BruneiDarussalam
+
    • TQLocale::Bulgaria
+
    • TQLocale::BurkinaFaso
+
    • TQLocale::Burundi
+
    • TQLocale::Cambodia
+
    • TQLocale::Cameroon
+
    • TQLocale::Canada
+
    • TQLocale::CapeVerde
+
    • TQLocale::CaymanIslands
+
    • TQLocale::CentralAfricanRepublic
+
    • TQLocale::Chad
+
    • TQLocale::Chile
+
    • TQLocale::China
+
    • TQLocale::ChristmasIsland
+
    • TQLocale::CocosIslands
+
    • TQLocale::Colombia
+
    • TQLocale::Comoros
+
    • TQLocale::DemocraticRepublicOfCongo
+
    • TQLocale::PeoplesRepublicOfCongo
+
    • TQLocale::CookIslands
+
    • TQLocale::CostaRica
+
    • TQLocale::IvoryCoast
+
    • TQLocale::Croatia
+
    • TQLocale::Cuba
+
    • TQLocale::Cyprus
+
    • TQLocale::CzechRepublic
+
    • TQLocale::Denmark
+
    • TQLocale::Djibouti
+
    • TQLocale::Dominica
+
    • TQLocale::DominicanRepublic
+
    • TQLocale::EastTimor
+
    • TQLocale::Ecuador
+
    • TQLocale::Egypt
+
    • TQLocale::ElSalvador
+
    • TQLocale::EquatorialGuinea
+
    • TQLocale::Eritrea
+
    • TQLocale::Estonia
+
    • TQLocale::Ethiopia
+
    • TQLocale::FalklandIslands
+
    • TQLocale::FaroeIslands
+
    • TQLocale::FijiCountry
+
    • TQLocale::Finland
+
    • TQLocale::France
+
    • TQLocale::MetropolitanFrance
+
    • TQLocale::FrenchGuiana
+
    • TQLocale::FrenchPolynesia
+
    • TQLocale::FrenchSouthernTerritories
+
    • TQLocale::Gabon
+
    • TQLocale::Gambia
+
    • TQLocale::Georgia
+
    • TQLocale::Germany
+
    • TQLocale::Ghana
+
    • TQLocale::Gibraltar
+
    • TQLocale::Greece
+
    • TQLocale::Greenland
+
    • TQLocale::Grenada
+
    • TQLocale::Guadeloupe
+
    • TQLocale::Guam
+
    • TQLocale::Guatemala
+
    • TQLocale::Guinea
+
    • TQLocale::GuineaBissau
+
    • TQLocale::Guyana
+
    • TQLocale::Haiti
+
    • TQLocale::HeardAndMcDonaldIslands
+
    • TQLocale::Honduras
+
    • TQLocale::HongKong
+
    • TQLocale::Hungary
+
    • TQLocale::Iceland
+
    • TQLocale::India
+
    • TQLocale::Indonesia
+
    • TQLocale::Iran
+
    • TQLocale::Iraq
+
    • TQLocale::Ireland
+
    • TQLocale::Israel
+
    • TQLocale::Italy
+
    • TQLocale::Jamaica
+
    • TQLocale::Japan
+
    • TQLocale::Jordan
+
    • TQLocale::Kazakhstan
+
    • TQLocale::Kenya
+
    • TQLocale::Kiribati
+
    • TQLocale::DemocraticRepublicOfKorea
+
    • TQLocale::RepublicOfKorea
+
    • TQLocale::Kuwait
+
    • TQLocale::Kyrgyzstan
+
    • TQLocale::Lao
+
    • TQLocale::Latvia
+
    • TQLocale::Lebanon
+
    • TQLocale::Lesotho
+
    • TQLocale::Liberia
+
    • TQLocale::LibyanArabJamahiriya
+
    • TQLocale::Liechtenstein
+
    • TQLocale::Lithuania
+
    • TQLocale::Luxembourg
+
    • TQLocale::Macau
+
    • TQLocale::Macedonia
+
    • TQLocale::Madagascar
+
    • TQLocale::Malawi
+
    • TQLocale::Malaysia
+
    • TQLocale::Maldives
+
    • TQLocale::Mali
+
    • TQLocale::Malta
+
    • TQLocale::MarshallIslands
+
    • TQLocale::Martinique
+
    • TQLocale::Mauritania
+
    • TQLocale::Mauritius
+
    • TQLocale::Mayotte
+
    • TQLocale::Mexico
+
    • TQLocale::Micronesia
+
    • TQLocale::Moldova
+
    • TQLocale::Monaco
+
    • TQLocale::Mongolia
+
    • TQLocale::Montserrat
+
    • TQLocale::Morocco
+
    • TQLocale::Mozambique
+
    • TQLocale::Myanmar
+
    • TQLocale::Namibia
+
    • TQLocale::NauruCountry
+
    • TQLocale::Nepal
+
    • TQLocale::Netherlands
+
    • TQLocale::NetherlandsAntilles
+
    • TQLocale::NewCaledonia
+
    • TQLocale::NewZealand
+
    • TQLocale::Nicaragua
+
    • TQLocale::Niger
+
    • TQLocale::Nigeria
+
    • TQLocale::Niue
+
    • TQLocale::NorfolkIsland
+
    • TQLocale::NorthernMarianaIslands
+
    • TQLocale::Norway
+
    • TQLocale::Oman
+
    • TQLocale::Pakistan
+
    • TQLocale::Palau
+
    • TQLocale::PalestinianTerritory
+
    • TQLocale::Panama
+
    • TQLocale::PapuaNewGuinea
+
    • TQLocale::Paraguay
+
    • TQLocale::Peru
+
    • TQLocale::Philippines
+
    • TQLocale::Pitcairn
+
    • TQLocale::Poland
+
    • TQLocale::Portugal
+
    • TQLocale::PuertoRico
+
    • TQLocale::Qatar
+
    • TQLocale::Reunion
+
    • TQLocale::Romania
+
    • TQLocale::RussianFederation
+
    • TQLocale::Rwanda
+
    • TQLocale::SaintKittsAndNevis
+
    • TQLocale::StLucia
+
    • TQLocale::StVincentAndTheGrenadines
+
    • TQLocale::Samoa
+
    • TQLocale::SanMarino
+
    • TQLocale::SaoTomeAndPrincipe
+
    • TQLocale::SaudiArabia
+
    • TQLocale::Senegal
+
    • TQLocale::Seychelles
+
    • TQLocale::SierraLeone
+
    • TQLocale::Singapore
+
    • TQLocale::Slovakia
+
    • TQLocale::Slovenia
+
    • TQLocale::SolomonIslands
+
    • TQLocale::Somalia
+
    • TQLocale::SouthAfrica
+
    • TQLocale::SouthGeorgiaAndTheSouthSandwichIslands
+
    • TQLocale::Spain
+
    • TQLocale::SriLanka
+
    • TQLocale::StHelena
+
    • TQLocale::StPierreAndMiquelon
+
    • TQLocale::Sudan
+
    • TQLocale::Suriname
+
    • TQLocale::SvalbardAndJanMayenIslands
+
    • TQLocale::Swaziland
+
    • TQLocale::Sweden
+
    • TQLocale::Switzerland
+
    • TQLocale::SyrianArabRepublic
+
    • TQLocale::Taiwan
+
    • TQLocale::Tajikistan
+
    • TQLocale::Tanzania
+
    • TQLocale::Thailand
+
    • TQLocale::Togo
+
    • TQLocale::Tokelau
+
    • TQLocale::TongaCountry
+
    • TQLocale::TrinidadAndTobago
+
    • TQLocale::Tunisia
+
    • TQLocale::Turkey
+
    • TQLocale::Turkmenistan
+
    • TQLocale::TurksAndCaicosIslands
+
    • TQLocale::Tuvalu
+
    • TQLocale::Uganda
+
    • TQLocale::Ukraine
+
    • TQLocale::UnitedArabEmirates
+
    • TQLocale::UnitedKingdom
+
    • TQLocale::UnitedStates
+
    • TQLocale::UnitedStatesMinorOutlyingIslands
+
    • TQLocale::Uruguay
+
    • TQLocale::Uzbekistan
+
    • TQLocale::Vanuatu
+
    • TQLocale::VaticanCityState
+
    • TQLocale::Venezuela
+
    • TQLocale::VietNam
+
    • TQLocale::BritishVirginIslands
+
    • TQLocale::USVirginIslands
+
    • TQLocale::WallisAndFutunaIslands
+
    • TQLocale::WesternSahara
+
    • TQLocale::Yemen
+
    • TQLocale::Yugoslavia
+
    • TQLocale::Zambia
+
    • TQLocale::Zimbabwe
+
    
+
    TQLocale::Language
    
+
+
     This enumerated type is used to specify a language.
+
      
+
    • TQLocale::C - Identical to English/UnitedStates
+
    • TQLocale::Abkhazian
+
    • TQLocale::Afan
+
    • TQLocale::Afar
+
    • TQLocale::Afrikaans
+
    • TQLocale::Albanian
+
    • TQLocale::Amharic
+
    • TQLocale::Arabic
+
    • TQLocale::Armenian
+
    • TQLocale::Assamese
+
    • TQLocale::Aymara
+
    • TQLocale::Azerbaijani
+
    • TQLocale::Bashkir
+
    • TQLocale::Basque
+
    • TQLocale::Bengali
+
    • TQLocale::Bhutani
+
    • TQLocale::Bihari
+
    • TQLocale::Bislama
+
    • TQLocale::Breton
+
    • TQLocale::Bulgarian
+
    • TQLocale::Burmese
+
    • TQLocale::Byelorussian
+
    • TQLocale::Cambodian
+
    • TQLocale::Catalan
+
    • TQLocale::Chinese
+
    • TQLocale::Corsican
+
    • TQLocale::Croatian
+
    • TQLocale::Czech
+
    • TQLocale::Danish
+
    • TQLocale::Dutch
+
    • TQLocale::English
+
    • TQLocale::Esperanto
+
    • TQLocale::Estonian
+
    • TQLocale::Faroese
+
    • TQLocale::FijiLanguage
+
    • TQLocale::Finnish
+
    • TQLocale::French
+
    • TQLocale::Frisian
+
    • TQLocale::Gaelic
+
    • TQLocale::Galician
+
    • TQLocale::Georgian
+
    • TQLocale::German
+
    • TQLocale::Greek
+
    • TQLocale::Greenlandic
+
    • TQLocale::Guarani
+
    • TQLocale::Gujarati
+
    • TQLocale::Hausa
+
    • TQLocale::Hebrew
+
    • TQLocale::Hindi
+
    • TQLocale::Hungarian
+
    • TQLocale::Icelandic
+
    • TQLocale::Indonesian
+
    • TQLocale::Interlingua
+
    • TQLocale::Interlingue
+
    • TQLocale::Inuktitut
+
    • TQLocale::Inupiak
+
    • TQLocale::Irish
+
    • TQLocale::Italian
+
    • TQLocale::Japanese
+
    • TQLocale::Javanese
+
    • TQLocale::Kannada
+
    • TQLocale::Kashmiri
+
    • TQLocale::Kazakh
+
    • TQLocale::Kinyarwanda
+
    • TQLocale::Kirghiz
+
    • TQLocale::Korean
+
    • TQLocale::Kurdish
+
    • TQLocale::Kurundi
+
    • TQLocale::Laothian
+
    • TQLocale::Latin
+
    • TQLocale::Latvian
+
    • TQLocale::Lingala
+
    • TQLocale::Lithuanian
+
    • TQLocale::Macedonian
+
    • TQLocale::Malagasy
+
    • TQLocale::Malay
+
    • TQLocale::Malayalam
+
    • TQLocale::Maltese
+
    • TQLocale::Maori
+
    • TQLocale::Marathi
+
    • TQLocale::Moldavian
+
    • TQLocale::Mongolian
+
    • TQLocale::NauruLanguage
+
    • TQLocale::Nepali
+
    • TQLocale::Norwegian
+
    • TQLocale::Occitan
+
    • TQLocale::Oriya
+
    • TQLocale::Pashto
+
    • TQLocale::Persian
+
    • TQLocale::Polish
+
    • TQLocale::Portuguese
+
    • TQLocale::Punjabi
+
    • TQLocale::Quechua
+
    • TQLocale::RhaetoRomance
+
    • TQLocale::Romanian
+
    • TQLocale::Russian
+
    • TQLocale::Samoan
+
    • TQLocale::Sangho
+
    • TQLocale::Sanskrit
+
    • TQLocale::Serbian
+
    • TQLocale::SerboCroatian
+
    • TQLocale::Sesotho
+
    • TQLocale::Setswana
+
    • TQLocale::Shona
+
    • TQLocale::Sindhi
+
    • TQLocale::Singhalese
+
    • TQLocale::Siswati
+
    • TQLocale::Slovak
+
    • TQLocale::Slovenian
+
    • TQLocale::Somali
+
    • TQLocale::Spanish
+
    • TQLocale::Sundanese
+
    • TQLocale::Swahili
+
    • TQLocale::Swedish
+
    • TQLocale::Tagalog
+
    • TQLocale::Tajik
+
    • TQLocale::Tamil
+
    • TQLocale::Tatar
+
    • TQLocale::Telugu
+
    • TQLocale::Thai
+
    • TQLocale::Tibetan
+
    • TQLocale::Tigrinya
+
    • TQLocale::TongaLanguage
+
    • TQLocale::Tsonga
+
    • TQLocale::Turkish
+
    • TQLocale::Turkmen
+
    • TQLocale::Twi
+
    • TQLocale::Uigur
+
    • TQLocale::Ukrainian
+
    • TQLocale::Urdu
+
    • TQLocale::Uzbek
+
    • TQLocale::Vietnamese
+
    • TQLocale::Volapuk
+
    • TQLocale::Welsh
+
    • TQLocale::Wolof
+
    • TQLocale::Xhosa
+
    • TQLocale::Yiddish
+
    • TQLocale::Yoruba
+
    • TQLocale::Zhuang
+
    • TQLocale::Zulu
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQLocale::TQLocale ()
+
    
+Constructs a TQLocale object initialized with the default locale.
+
     
    See also setDefault().
+
+
    TQLocale::TQLocale ( const TQString & name )
+
    
+Constructs a TQLocale object with the specified name,
+which has the format
+"language[_country][.codeset][@modifier]" or "C", where:
+
     
      
+
    •  language is a lowercase, two-letter, ISO 639 language code,
+
    •  territory is an uppercase, two-letter, ISO 3166 country code,
+
    •  and codeset and modifier are ignored.
+
    
+
     If the string violates the locale format, or language is not
+a valid ISO 369 code, the "C" locale is used instead. If country
+is not present, or is not a valid ISO 3166 code, the most
+appropriate country is chosen for the specified language.
+
     The language and country codes are converted to their respective
+Language and Country enums. After this conversion is
+performed the constructor behaves exactly like TQLocale(Country,
+Language).
+
     This constructor is much slower than TQLocale(Country, Language).
+
     
    See also name().
+
+
    TQLocale::TQLocale ( Language language, Country country = AnyCountry )
+
    
+Constructs a TQLocale object with the specified language and country.
+
     
      
+
    •  If the language/country pair is found in the database, it is used.
+
    •  If the language is found but the country is not, or if the country
+is AnyCountry, the language is used with the most
+appropriate available country (for example, Germany for German),
+
    •  If neither the language nor the country are found, TQLocale
+defaults to the default locale (see setDefault()).
+
    
+
     The language and country that are actually used can be queried
+using language() and country().
+
     
    See also setDefault(), language(), and country().
+
+
    TQLocale::TQLocale ( const TQLocale & other )
+
    
+Constructs a TQLocale object as a copy of other.
+
+
    TQLocale TQLocale::c () [static]
+
    
+
+
     Returns a TQLocale object initialized to the "C" locale.
+
     
    See also system().
+
+
    Country TQLocale::country () const
+
    
+Returns the country of this locale.
+
     
    See also TQLocale().
+
+
    TQString TQLocale::countryToString ( Country country ) [static]
+
    
+Returns a TQString containing the name of country.
+
+
    Language TQLocale::language () const
+
    
+Returns the language of this locale.
+
     
    See also TQLocale().
+
+
    TQString TQLocale::languageToString ( Language language ) [static]
+
    
+Returns a TQString containing the name of language.
+
+
    TQString TQLocale::name () const
+
    
+Returns the language and country of this locale as a
+string of the form "language_country", where
+language is a lowercase, two-letter ISO 639 language code,
+and country is an uppercase, two-letter ISO 3166 country code.
+
     
    See also TQLocale().
+
+
    TQLocale & TQLocale::operator= ( const TQLocale & other )
+
    
+Assigns other to this TQLocale object and returns a reference
+to this TQLocale object.
+
+
    void TQLocale::setDefault ( const TQLocale & locale ) [static]
+
    Warning: This function is not reentrant.
    
+
+
+
     Sets the global default locale to locale. These
+values are used when a TQLocale object is constructed with
+no arguments. If this function is not called, the system's
+locale is used.
+
     Warning: In a multithreaded application, the default locale
+should be set at application startup, before any non-GUI threads
+are created.
+
     
    See also system() and c().
+
+
    TQLocale TQLocale::system () [static]
+
    
+Returns a TQLocale object initialized to the system locale.
+
+
    double TQLocale::toDouble ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns the double represented by the localized string s, or
+0.0 if the conversion failed.
+
     If ok is not 0, reports failure by setting
+*ok to false and success by setting *ok to true.
+
     Unlike TQString::toDouble(), this function does not fall back to
+the "C" locale if the string cannot be interpreted in this
+locale.
+
     
    +        bool ok;
+        double d;
+
+        TQLocale c(TQLocale::C);
+        d = c.toDouble( "1234.56", &ok );  // ok == true, d == 1234.56
+        d = c.toDouble( "1,234.56", &ok ); // ok == true, d == 1234.56
+        d = c.toDouble( "1234,56", &ok );  // ok == false
+
+        TQLocale german(TQLocale::German);
+        d = german.toDouble( "1234,56", &ok );  // ok == true, d == 1234.56
+        d = german.toDouble( "1.234,56", &ok ); // ok == true, d == 1234.56
+        d = german.toDouble( "1234.56", &ok );  // ok == false
+
+        d = german.toDouble( "1.234", &ok );    // ok == true, d == 1234.0
+    
    
+ 
+
     Notice that the last conversion returns 1234.0, because '.' is the
+thousands group separator in the German locale.
+
     This function ignores leading and trailing whitespace.
+
     
    See also toString() and TQString::toDouble().
+
+
    float TQLocale::toFloat ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns the float represented by the localized string s, or 0.0
+if the conversion failed.
+
     If ok is not 0, reports failure by setting
+*ok to false and success by setting *ok to true.
+
     This function ignores leading and trailing whitespace.
+
     
    See also toString().
+
+
    int TQLocale::toInt ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns the int represented by the localized string s, or 0 if
+the conversion failed.
+
     If ok is not 0, reports failure by setting *ok to false and
+success by setting *ok to true.
+
     This function ignores leading and trailing whitespace.
+
     
    See also toString().
+
+
    Q_LONG TQLocale::toLong ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns the long int represented by the localized string s, or
+0 if the conversion failed.
+
     If ok is not 0, reports failure by setting
+*ok to false and success by setting *ok to true.
+
     This function ignores leading and trailing whitespace.
+
     
    See also toString().
+
+
    Q_LLONG TQLocale::toLongLong ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns the long long int represented by the localized string s, or 0 if the conversion failed.
+
     If ok is not 0, reports failure by setting
+*ok to false and success by setting *ok to true.
+
     This function ignores leading and trailing whitespace.
+
     
    See also toString().
+
+
    short TQLocale::toShort ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns the short int represented by the localized string s, or
+0 if the conversion failed.
+
     If ok is not 0, reports failure by setting
+*ok to false and success by setting *ok to true.
+
     This function ignores leading and trailing whitespace.
+
     
    See also toString().
+
+
    TQString TQLocale::toString ( Q_LLONG i ) const
+
    
+Returns a localized string representation of i.
+
     
    See also toLongLong().
+
+
    TQString TQLocale::toString ( short i ) const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
    See also toShort().
+
+
    TQString TQLocale::toString ( ushort i ) const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
    See also toUShort().
+
+
    TQString TQLocale::toString ( int i ) const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
    See also toInt().
+
+
    TQString TQLocale::toString ( uint i ) const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
    See also toUInt().
+
+
    TQString TQLocale::toString ( Q_LONG i ) const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
    See also toLong().
+
+
    TQString TQLocale::toString ( Q_ULONG i ) const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
    See also toULong().
+
+
    TQString TQLocale::toString ( Q_ULLONG i ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
    See also toULongLong().
+
+
    TQString TQLocale::toString ( float i, char f = 'g', int prec = 6 ) const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     f and prec have the same meaning as in TQString::number(double, char, int).
+
     
    See also toDouble().
+
+
    TQString TQLocale::toString ( double i, char f = 'g', int prec = 6 ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     f and prec have the same meaning as in TQString::number(double, char, int).
+
     
    See also toDouble().
+
+
    uint TQLocale::toUInt ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns the unsigned int represented by the localized string s,
+or 0 if the conversion failed.
+
     If ok is not 0, reports failure by setting
+*ok to false and success by setting *ok to true.
+
     This function ignores leading and trailing whitespace.
+
     
    See also toString().
+
+
    Q_ULONG TQLocale::toULong ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns the unsigned long int represented by the localized string
+s, or 0 if the conversion failed.
+
     If ok is not 0, reports failure by setting
+*ok to false and success by setting *ok to true.
+
     This function ignores leading and trailing whitespace.
+
     
    See also toString().
+
+
    Q_ULLONG TQLocale::toULongLong ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns the unsigned long long int represented by the localized
+string s, or 0 if the conversion failed.
+
     If ok is not 0, reports failure by setting
+*ok to false and success by setting *ok to true.
+
     This function ignores leading and trailing whitespace.
+
     
    See also toString().
+
+
    ushort TQLocale::toUShort ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns the unsigned short int represented by the localized string
+s, or 0 if the conversion failed.
+
     If ok is not 0, reports failure by setting
+*ok to false and success by setting *ok to true.
+
     This function ignores leading and trailing whitespace.
+
     
    See also toString().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqlocalfs.html b/doc/html/ntqlocalfs.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..007d0ea1c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqlocalfs.html
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQLocalFs Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQLocalFs Class Reference
    [network module]
    
+
+
    The TQLocalFs class is an implementation of a
+TQNetworkProtocol that works on the local file system.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqlocalfs.h>
+
    Inherits TQNetworkProtocol.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQLocalFs class is an implementation of a
+TQNetworkProtocol that works on the local file system.
+
+
     
+
     
+
     This class is derived from TQNetworkProtocol. TQLocalFs is not
+normally used directly, but rather through a TQUrlOperator, for
+example:
+
    +    TQUrlOperator op( "file:///tmp" );
+    op.listChildren(); // Asks the server to provide a directory listing
+    
    
+ 
+
     This code will only work if the TQLocalFs class is registered; to
+register the class, you must call qInitNetworkProtocols() before
+using a TQUrlOperator with TQLocalFs.
+
     If you really need to use TQLocalFs directly, don't forget
+to set its TQUrlOperator with setUrl().
+
     
    See also TQt Network Documentation, TQNetworkProtocol, TQUrlOperator, and Input/Output and Networking.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQLocalFs::TQLocalFs ()
+
    
+Constructor.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqmainwindow.html b/doc/html/ntqmainwindow.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fc0fb1044
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqmainwindow.html
@@ -0,0 +1,956 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQMainWindow Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQMainWindow Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQMainWindow class provides a main application window,
+with a menu bar, dock windows (e.g. for toolbars), and a status
+bar.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqmainwindow.h>
+
    Inherits TQWidget.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQMainWindow ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = WType_TopLevel )
      • 
+
    • ~TQMainWindow ()
      • 
+
    • TQMenuBar * menuBar () const
      • 
+
    • TQStatusBar * statusBar () const
      • 
+
    • TQToolTipGroup * toolTipGroup () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setCentralWidget ( TQWidget * w )
      • 
+
    • TQWidget * centralWidget () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setDockEnabled ( Dock dock, bool enable )
      • 
+
    • bool isDockEnabled ( Dock dock ) const
      • 
+
    • bool isDockEnabled ( TQDockArea * area ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setDockEnabled ( TQDockWindow * dw, Dock dock, bool enable )
      • 
+
    • bool isDockEnabled ( TQDockWindow * tb, Dock dock ) const
      • 
+
    • bool isDockEnabled ( TQDockWindow * dw, TQDockArea * area ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual void addDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, Dock edge = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )
      • 
+
    • virtual void addDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, const TQString & label, Dock edge = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )
      • 
+
    • virtual void moveDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, Dock edge = DockTop )
      • 
+
    • virtual void moveDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, Dock edge, bool nl, int index, int extraOffset = -1 )
      • 
+
    • virtual void removeDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow )
      • 
+
    • bool rightJustification () const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • bool usesBigPixmaps () const
      • 
+
    • bool usesTextLabel () const
      • 
+
    • bool dockWindowsMovable () const
      • 
+
    • bool opaqueMoving () const
      • 
+
    • bool getLocation ( TQDockWindow * dw, Dock & dock, int & index, bool & nl, int & extraOffset ) const
      • 
+
    • TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> dockWindows ( Dock dock ) const
      • 
+
    • TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> dockWindows () const
      • 
+
    • void lineUpDockWindows ( bool keepNewLines = FALSE )
      • 
+
    • bool isDockMenuEnabled () const
      • 
+
    • bool hasDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dw )
      • 
+
    • void addToolBar ( TQDockWindow *, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void addToolBar ( TQDockWindow *, const TQString & label, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void moveToolBar ( TQDockWindow *, Dock = DockTop )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void moveToolBar ( TQDockWindow *, Dock, bool nl, int index, int extraOffset = -1 )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void removeToolBar ( TQDockWindow * )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • bool toolBarsMovable () const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • TQPtrList<TQToolBar> toolBars ( Dock dock ) const
      • 
+
    • void lineUpToolBars ( bool keepNewLines = FALSE )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • TQDockArea * leftDock () const
      • 
+
    • TQDockArea * rightDock () const
      • 
+
    • TQDockArea * topDock () const
      • 
+
    • TQDockArea * bottomDock () const
      • 
+
    • virtual bool isCustomizable () const
      • 
+
    • bool appropriate ( TQDockWindow * dw ) const
      • 
+
    • enum DockWindows { OnlyToolBars, NoToolBars, AllDockWindows }
      • 
+
    • TQPopupMenu * createDockWindowMenu ( DockWindows dockWindows = AllDockWindows ) const
      • 
+
    
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • bool dockWindowsMovable - whether the dock windows are movable
      • 
+
    • bool opaqueMoving - whether dock windows are moved opaquely
      • 
+
    • bool rightJustification - whether the main window right-justifies its dock windows  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • bool usesBigPixmaps - whether big pixmaps are enabled
      • 
+
    • bool usesTextLabel - whether text labels for toolbar buttons are enabled
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • virtual void childEvent ( TQChildEvent * e )
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Slots
    
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
      
+
    • TQTextStream & operator<< ( TQTextStream & ts, const TQMainWindow & mainWindow )
      • 
+
    • TQTextStream & operator>> ( TQTextStream & ts, TQMainWindow & mainWindow )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQMainWindow class provides a main application window,
+with a menu bar, dock windows (e.g. for toolbars), and a status
+bar.
+
     
+
+
     Main windows are most often used to provide menus, toolbars and a
+status bar around a large central widget, such as a text edit,
+drawing canvas or TQWorkspace (for MDI applications). TQMainWindow
+is usually subclassed since this makes it easier to encapsulate
+the central widget, menus and toolbars as well as the window's
+state. Subclassing makes it possible to create the slots that are
+called when the user clicks menu items or toolbar buttons. You can
+also create main windows using TQt
+    Designer. We'll briefly review adding menu items and
+toolbar buttons then describe the facilities of TQMainWindow
+itself.
+
     
    +    TQMainWindow *mw = new TQMainWindow;
+    TQTextEdit *edit = new TQTextEdit( mw, "editor" );
+    edit->setFocus();
+    mw->setCaption( "Main Window" );
+    mw->setCentralWidget( edit );
+    mw->show();
+    
    
+ 
+
     TQMainWindows may be created in their own right as shown above.
+The central widget is set with setCentralWidget(). Popup menus can
+be added to the default menu bar, widgets can be added to the
+status bar, toolbars and dock windows can be added to any of the
+dock areas.
+
     
+
+
            ApplicationWindow *mw = new ApplicationWindow();
+        mw->setCaption( "TQt Example - Application" );
+        mw->show();
+
    
+
     In the extract above ApplicationWindow is a subclass of
+TQMainWindow that we must write for ourselves; this is the usual
+approach to using TQMainWindow. (The source for the extracts in
+this description are taken from application/main.cpp, application/application.cpp, action/main.cpp, and action/application.cpp )
+
     When subclassing we add the menu items and toolbars in the
+subclass's constructor. If we've created a TQMainWindow instance
+directly we can add menu items and toolbars just as easily by
+passing the TQMainWindow instance as the parent instead of the this pointer.
+
     
+
+
            TQPopupMenu * help = new TQPopupMenu( this );
+        menuBar()->insertItem( "&Help", help );
+
+        help->insertItem( "&About", this, SLOT(about()), Key_F1 );
+
    
+
     Here we've added a new menu with one menu item. The menu has been
+inserted into the menu bar that TQMainWindow provides by default
+and which is accessible through the menuBar() function. The slot
+will be called when the menu item is clicked.
+
     
+
+
            TQToolBar * fileTools = new TQToolBar( this, "file operations" );
+        fileTools->setLabel( "File Operations" );
+
            TQToolButton * fileOpen
+            = new TQToolButton( openIcon, "Open File", TQString::null,
+                               this, SLOT(choose()), fileTools, "open file" );
+
    
+
     This extract shows the creation of a toolbar with one toolbar
+button. TQMainWindow supplies four dock areas for toolbars. When a
+toolbar is created as a child of a TQMainWindow (or derived class)
+instance it will be placed in a dock area (the Top dock area by
+default). The slot will be called when the toolbar button is
+clicked. Any dock window can be added to a dock area either using
+addDockWindow(), or by creating a dock window with the TQMainWindow
+as the parent.
+
     
+
+
            e = new TQTextEdit( this, "editor" );
+        e->setFocus();
+        setCentralWidget( e );
+        statusBar()->message( "Ready", 2000 );
+
    
+
     Having created the menus and toolbar we create an instance of the
+large central widget, give it the focus and set it as the main
+window's central widget. In the example we've also set the status
+bar, accessed via the statusBar() function, to an initial message
+which will be displayed for two seconds. Note that you can add
+additional widgets to the status bar, for example labels, to show
+further status information. See the TQStatusBar documentation for
+details, particularly the addWidget() function.
+
     Often we want to synchronize a toolbar button with a menu item.
+For example, if the user clicks a 'bold' toolbar button we want
+the 'bold' menu item to be checked. This synchronization can be
+achieved automatically by creating actions and adding the actions
+to the toolbar and menu.
+
     
+
+
            TQAction * fileOpenAction;
+
            fileOpenAction = new TQAction( TQPixmap( fileopen ), "&Open...",
+                                      CTRL+Key_O, this, "open" );
+        connect( fileOpenAction, SIGNAL( activated() ) , this, SLOT( choose() ) );
+
    
+
     Here we create an action with an icon which will be used in any
+menu and toolbar that the action is added to. We've also given the
+action a menu name, '&Open', and a keyboard shortcut. The
+connection that we have made will be used when the user clicks
+either the menu item or the toolbar button.
+
     
+
+
            TQPopupMenu * file = new TQPopupMenu( this );
+        menuBar()->insertItem( "&File", file );
+
            fileOpenAction->addTo( file );
+
    
+
     The extract above shows the creation of a popup menu. We add the
+menu to the TQMainWindow's menu bar and add our action.
+
     
+
+
            TQToolBar * fileTools = new TQToolBar( this, "file operations" );
+        fileTools->setLabel( "File Operations" );
+        fileOpenAction->addTo( fileTools );
+
    
+
     Here we create a new toolbar as a child of the TQMainWindow and add
+our action to the toolbar.
+
     We'll now explore the functionality offered by TQMainWindow.
+
     The main window will take care of the dock areas, and the geometry
+of the central widget, but all other aspects of the central widget
+are left to you. TQMainWindow automatically detects the creation of
+a menu bar or status bar if you specify the TQMainWindow as parent,
+or you can use the provided menuBar() and statusBar() functions.
+The functions menuBar() and statusBar() create a suitable widget
+if one doesn't exist, and update the window's layout to make
+space.
+
     TQMainWindow provides a TQToolTipGroup connected to the status bar.
+The function toolTipGroup() provides access to the default
+TQToolTipGroup. It isn't possible to set a different tool tip
+group.
+
     New dock windows and toolbars can be added to a TQMainWindow using
+addDockWindow(). Dock windows can be moved using moveDockWindow()
+and removed with removeDockWindow(). TQMainWindow allows default
+dock window (toolbar) docking in all its dock areas (Top, Left, Right, Bottom). You can use setDockEnabled() to
+enable and disable docking areas for dock windows. When adding or
+moving dock windows you can specify their 'edge' (dock area). The
+currently available edges are: Top, Left, Right, Bottom, Minimized (effectively a 'hidden' dock area) and TornOff (floating). See TQt::Dock for an explanation of these
+areas. Note that the *ToolBar functions are included for backward
+compatibility; all new code should use the *DockWindow functions.
+TQToolbar is a subclass of TQDockWindow so all functions that work
+with dock windows work on toolbars in the same way.
+
     
+If the user clicks the close button, then the dock window is
+hidden. A dock window can be hidden or unhidden by the user by
+right clicking a dock area and clicking the name of the relevant
+dock window on the pop up dock window menu. This menu lists the
+names of every dock window; visible dock windows have a tick
+beside their names. The dock window menu is created automatically
+as required by createDockWindowMenu(). Since it may not always be
+appropriate for a dock window to appear on this menu the
+setAppropriate() function is used to inform the main window
+whether or not the dock window menu should include a particular
+dock window. Double clicking a dock window handle (usually on the
+left-hand side of the dock window) undocks (floats) the dock
+window. Double clicking a floating dock window's titlebar will
+dock the floating dock window. (See also
+TQMainWindow::DockWindows.)
+
     Some functions change the appearance of a TQMainWindow globally:
+
    
+
     The user can drag dock windows into any enabled docking area. Dock
+windows can also be dragged within a docking area, for example
+to rearrange the order of some toolbars. Dock windows can also be
+dragged outside any docking area (undocked or 'floated'). Being
+able to drag dock windows can be enabled (the default) and
+disabled using setDockWindowsMovable().
+
     The Minimized edge is a hidden dock area. If this dock area is
+enabled the user can hide (minimize) a dock window or show (restore)
+a minimized dock window by clicking the dock window handle. If the
+user hovers the mouse cursor over one of the handles, the caption of
+the dock window is displayed in a tool tip (see
+TQDockWindow::caption() or TQToolBar::label()), so if you enable the
+Minimized dock area, it is best to specify a meaningful caption
+or label for each dock window. To minimize a dock window
+programmatically use moveDockWindow() with an edge of Minimized.
+
     Dock windows are moved transparently by default, i.e. during the
+drag an outline rectangle is drawn on the screen representing the
+position of the dock window as it moves. If you want the dock
+window to be shown normally whilst it is moved use
+setOpaqueMoving().
+
     The location of a dock window, i.e. its dock area and position
+within the dock area, can be determined by calling getLocation().
+Movable dock windows can be lined up to minimize wasted space with
+lineUpDockWindows(). Pointers to the dock areas are available from
+topDock(), leftDock(), rightDock() and bottomDock(). A customize
+menu item is added to the pop up dock window menu if
+isCustomizable() returns TRUE; it returns FALSE by default.
+Reimplement isCustomizable() and customize() if you want to offer
+this extra menu item, for example, to allow the user to change
+settings relating to the main window and its toolbars and dock
+windows.
+
     The main window's menu bar is fixed (at the top) by default. If
+you want a movable menu bar, create a TQMenuBar as a stretchable
+widget inside its own movable dock window and restrict this dock
+window to only live within the Top or Bottom dock:
+
     
    +    TQToolBar *tb = new TQToolBar( this );
+    addDockWindow( tb, tr( "Menubar" ), Top, FALSE );
+    TQMenuBar *mb = new TQMenuBar( tb );
+    mb->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::NoFrame );
+    tb->setStretchableWidget( mb );
+    setDockEnabled( tb, Left, FALSE );
+    setDockEnabled( tb, Right, FALSE );
+    
    
+ 
+
     An application with multiple dock windows can choose to save the
+current dock window layout in order to restore it later, e.g. in
+the next session. You can do this by using the streaming operators
+for TQMainWindow.
+
     To save the layout and positions of all the dock windows do this:
+
     
    +    TQFile file( filename );
+    if ( file.open( IO_WriteOnly ) ) {
+        TQTextStream stream( &file );
+        stream << *mainWindow;
+        file.close();
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     To restore the dock window positions and sizes (normally when the
+application is next started), do following:
+
     
    +    TQFile file( filename );
+    if ( file.open( IO_ReadOnly ) ) {
+        TQTextStream stream( &file );
+        stream >> *mainWindow;
+        file.close();
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     The TQSettings class can be used in conjunction with the streaming
+operators to store the application's settings.
+
     TQMainWindow's management of dock windows and toolbars is done
+transparently behind-the-scenes by TQDockArea.
+
     For multi-document interfaces (MDI), use a TQWorkspace as the
+central widget.
+
     Adding dock windows, e.g. toolbars, to TQMainWindow's dock areas is
+straightforward. If the supplied dock areas are not sufficient for
+your application we suggest that you create a TQWidget subclass and
+add your own dock areas (see TQDockArea) to the subclass since
+TQMainWindow provides functionality specific to the standard dock
+areas it provides.
+
      
+
     
    See also TQToolBar, TQDockWindow, TQStatusBar, TQAction, TQMenuBar, TQPopupMenu, TQToolTipGroup, TQDialog, and Main Window and Related Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQMainWindow::DockWindows
    
+
+
     Right-clicking a dock area will pop-up the dock window menu
+(createDockWindowMenu() is called automatically). When called in
+code you can specify what items should appear on the menu with
+this enum.
+
      
+
    • TQMainWindow::OnlyToolBars - The menu will list all the toolbars, but not
+any other dock windows.
+
    • TQMainWindow::NoToolBars - The menu will list dock windows but not
+toolbars.
+
    • TQMainWindow::AllDockWindows - The menu will list all toolbars and other
+dock windows. (This is the default.)
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQMainWindow::TQMainWindow ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = WType_TopLevel )
+
    
+Constructs an empty main window. The parent, name and widget
+flags f, are passed on to the TQWidget constructor.
+
     By default, the widget flags are set to WType_TopLevel rather
+than 0 as they are with TQWidget. If you don't want your
+TQMainWindow to be a top level widget then you will need to set f to 0.
+
+
    TQMainWindow::~TQMainWindow ()
+
    
+Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
+
+
    void TQMainWindow::addDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, Dock edge = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE ) [virtual]
+
    
+Adds dockWindow to the edge dock area.
+
     If newLine is FALSE (the default) then the dockWindow is
+added at the end of the edge. For vertical edges the end is at
+the bottom, for horizontal edges (including Minimized) the end
+is at the right. If newLine is TRUE a new line of dock windows
+is started with dockWindow as the first (left-most and
+top-most) dock window.
+
     If dockWindow is managed by another main window, it is first
+removed from that window.
+
+
    void TQMainWindow::addDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, const TQString & label, Dock edge = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Adds dockWindow to the dock area with label label.
+
     If newLine is FALSE (the default) the dockWindow is added at
+the end of the edge. For vertical edges the end is at the
+bottom, for horizontal edges (including Minimized) the end is
+at the right. If newLine is TRUE a new line of dock windows is
+started with dockWindow as the first (left-most and top-most)
+dock window.
+
     If dockWindow is managed by another main window, it is first
+removed from that window.
+
+
    void TQMainWindow::addToolBar ( TQDockWindow *, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
+
    void TQMainWindow::addToolBar ( TQDockWindow *, const TQString & label, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
    bool TQMainWindow::appropriate ( TQDockWindow * dw ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if it is appropriate to include a menu item for the
+dw dock window in the dock window menu; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     The user is able to change the state (show or hide) a dock window
+that has a menu item by clicking the item.
+
     Call setAppropriate() to indicate whether or not a particular dock
+window should appear on the popup menu.
+
     
    See also setAppropriate().
+
+
    TQDockArea * TQMainWindow::bottomDock () const
+
    
+Returns a pointer the Bottom dock area
+
     
    See also topDock(), leftDock(), and rightDock().
+
+
    TQWidget * TQMainWindow::centralWidget () const
+
    
+Returns a pointer to the main window's central widget.
+
     The central widget is surrounded by the left, top, right and
+bottom dock areas. The menu bar is above the top dock area.
+
     
    See also setCentralWidget().
+
+
    Example: qfd/qfd.cpp.
+
    void TQMainWindow::childEvent ( TQChildEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Monitors events, recieved in e, to ensure the layout is updated.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQObject.
+
    TQPopupMenu * TQMainWindow::createDockWindowMenu ( DockWindows dockWindows = AllDockWindows ) const
+
    
+Creates the dock window menu which contains all toolbars (if dockWindows is OnlyToolBars ), all dock windows (if dockWindows is NoToolBars) or all toolbars and dock windows (if
+dockWindows is AllDockWindows - the default).
+
     This function is called internally when necessary, e.g. when the
+user right clicks a dock area (providing isDockMenuEnabled()
+returns TRUE).
+
+
     The menu items representing the toolbars and dock windows are
+checkable. The visible dock windows are checked and the hidden
+dock windows are unchecked. The user can click a menu item to
+change its state (show or hide the dock window).
+
     The list and the state are always kept up-to-date.
+
     Toolbars and dock windows which are not appropriate in the current
+context (see setAppropriate()) are not listed in the menu.
+
     The menu also has a menu item for lining up the dock windows.
+
     If isCustomizable() returns TRUE, a Customize menu item is added
+to the menu, which if clicked will call customize(). The
+isCustomizable() function we provide returns FALSE and customize()
+does nothing, so they must be reimplemented in a subclass to be
+useful.
+
+
    void TQMainWindow::customize () [virtual slot]
+
    
+This function is called when the user clicks the Customize menu
+item on the dock window menu.
+
     The customize menu item will only appear if isCustomizable()
+returns TRUE (it returns FALSE by default).
+
     The function is intended, for example, to provide the user with a
+means of telling the application that they wish to customize the
+main window, dock windows or dock areas.
+
     The default implementation does nothing and the Customize menu
+item is not shown on the right-click menu by default. If you want
+the item to appear then reimplement isCustomizable() to return
+TRUE, and reimplement this function to do whatever you want.
+
     
    See also isCustomizable().
+
+
    void TQMainWindow::dockWindowPositionChanged ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the dockWindow has changed its
+position. A change in position occurs when a dock window is moved
+within its dock area or moved to another dock area (including the
+Minimized and TearOff dock areas).
+
     
    See also getLocation().
+
+
    TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> TQMainWindow::dockWindows ( Dock dock ) const
+
    
+Returns a list of all the dock windows which are in the dock
+dock area, regardless of their state.
+
     For example, the DockTornOff dock area may contain closed dock
+windows but these are returned along with the visible dock
+windows.
+
+
    TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> TQMainWindow::dockWindows () const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the list of dock windows which belong to this main window,
+regardless of which dock area they are in or what their state is,
+(e.g. irrespective of whether they are visible or not).
+
+
    bool TQMainWindow::dockWindowsMovable () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the dock windows are movable; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "dockWindowsMovable" property for details.
+
    bool TQMainWindow::getLocation ( TQDockWindow * dw, Dock & dock, int & index, bool & nl, int & extraOffset ) const
+
    
+Finds the location of the dock window dw.
+
     If the dw dock window is found in the main window the function
+returns TRUE and populates the dock variable with the dw's dock
+area and the index with the dw's position within the dock area.
+It also sets nl to TRUE if the dw begins a new line
+(otherwise FALSE), and extraOffset with the dock window's offset.
+
     If the dw dock window is not found then the function returns
+FALSE and the state of dock, index, nl and extraOffset
+is undefined.
+
     If you want to save and restore dock window positions then use
+operator>>() and operator<<().
+
     
    See also operator>>() and operator<<().
+
+
    bool TQMainWindow::hasDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dw )
+
    
+Returns TRUE if dw is a dock window known to the main window;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQMainWindow::isCustomizable () const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the dock area dock window menu includes the
+Customize menu item (which calls customize() when clicked).
+Returns FALSE by default, i.e. the popup menu will not contain a
+Customize menu item. You will need to reimplement this function
+and set it to return TRUE if you wish the user to be able to see
+the dock window menu.
+
     
    See also customize().
+
+
    bool TQMainWindow::isDockEnabled ( Dock dock ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the dock dock area is enabled, i.e. it can
+accept user dragged dock windows; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setDockEnabled().
+
+
    bool TQMainWindow::isDockEnabled ( TQDockArea * area ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns TRUE if dock area area is enabled, i.e. it can accept
+user dragged dock windows; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setDockEnabled().
+
+
    bool TQMainWindow::isDockEnabled ( TQDockWindow * tb, Dock dock ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns TRUE if dock area dock is enabled for the dock window
+tb; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setDockEnabled().
+
+
    bool TQMainWindow::isDockEnabled ( TQDockWindow * dw, TQDockArea * area ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns TRUE if dock area area is enabled for the dock window
+dw; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setDockEnabled().
+
+
    bool TQMainWindow::isDockMenuEnabled () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE, if the dock window menu is enabled; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     The menu lists the (appropriate()) dock windows (which may be
+shown or hidden), and has a "Line Up Dock Windows" menu item. It
+will also have a "Customize" menu item if isCustomizable() returns
+TRUE.
+
     
    See also setDockEnabled(), lineUpDockWindows(), appropriate(), and setAppropriate().
+
+
    TQDockArea * TQMainWindow::leftDock () const
+
    
+Returns the Left dock area
+
     
    See also rightDock(), topDock(), and bottomDock().
+
+
    void TQMainWindow::lineUpDockWindows ( bool keepNewLines = FALSE )
+
    
+This function will line up dock windows within the visible dock
+areas (Top, Left, Right and Bottom) as compactly as
+possible.
+
     If keepNewLines is TRUE, all dock windows stay on their
+original lines. If keepNewLines is FALSE then newlines may be
+removed to achieve the most compact layout possible.
+
     The method only works if dockWindowsMovable() returns TRUE.
+
+
    void TQMainWindow::lineUpToolBars ( bool keepNewLines = FALSE )
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
+
    void TQMainWindow::menuAboutToShow () [protected slot]
+
    
+This slot is called from the aboutToShow() signal of the default
+dock menu of the mainwindow. The default implementation
+initializes the menu with all dock windows and toolbars in this
+slot.
+
+
+
    TQMenuBar * TQMainWindow::menuBar () const
+
    
+Returns the menu bar for this window.
+
     If there isn't one, then menuBar() creates an empty menu bar.
+
     
    See also statusBar().
+
+
    void TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, Dock edge = DockTop ) [virtual]
+
    
+Moves dockWindow to the end of the edge.
+
     For vertical edges the end is at the bottom, for horizontal edges
+(including Minimized) the end is at the right.
+
     If dockWindow is managed by another main window, it is first
+removed from that window.
+
+
    void TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, Dock edge, bool nl, int index, int extraOffset = -1 ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Moves dockWindow to position index within the edge dock
+area.
+
     Any dock windows with positions index or higher have their
+position number incremented and any of these on the same line are
+moved right (down for vertical dock areas) to make room.
+
     If nl is TRUE, a new dock window line is created below the line
+in which the moved dock window appears and the moved dock window,
+with any others with higher positions on the same line, is moved
+to this new line.
+
     The extraOffset is the space to put between the left side of
+the dock area (top side for vertical dock areas) and the dock
+window. (This is mostly used for restoring dock windows to the
+positions the user has dragged them to.)
+
     If dockWindow is managed by another main window, it is first
+removed from that window.
+
+
    void TQMainWindow::moveToolBar ( TQDockWindow *, Dock = DockTop )
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
+
    void TQMainWindow::moveToolBar ( TQDockWindow *, Dock, bool nl, int index, int extraOffset = -1 )
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
    bool TQMainWindow::opaqueMoving () const
+
    Returns TRUE if dock windows are moved opaquely; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "opaqueMoving" property for details.
+
    void TQMainWindow::pixmapSizeChanged ( bool ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the setUsesBigPixmaps() is called
+with a value different to the current setting. All widgets that
+should respond to such changes, e.g. toolbar buttons, must connect
+to this signal.
+
+
    void TQMainWindow::removeDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow ) [virtual]
+
    
+Removes dockWindow from the main window's docking area,
+provided dockWindow is non-null and managed by this main
+window.
+
+
    void TQMainWindow::removeToolBar ( TQDockWindow * )
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
+
    TQDockArea * TQMainWindow::rightDock () const
+
    
+Returns the Right dock area
+
     
    See also leftDock(), topDock(), and bottomDock().
+
+
    bool TQMainWindow::rightJustification () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the main window right-justifies its dock windows; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "rightJustification" property for details.
+
    void TQMainWindow::setAppropriate ( TQDockWindow * dw, bool a ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Use this function to control whether or not the dw dock
+window's caption should appear as a menu item on the dock window
+menu that lists the dock windows.
+
     If a is TRUE then the dw will appear as a menu item on the
+dock window menu. The user is able to change the state (show or
+hide) a dock window that has a menu item by clicking the item;
+depending on the state of your application, this may or may not be
+appropriate. If a is FALSE the dw will not appear on the
+popup menu.
+
     
    See also showDockMenu(), isCustomizable(), and customize().
+
+
    void TQMainWindow::setCentralWidget ( TQWidget * w ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the central widget for this main window to w.
+
     The central widget is surrounded by the left, top, right and
+bottom dock areas. The menu bar is above the top dock area.
+
     
    See also centralWidget().
+
+
    void TQMainWindow::setDockEnabled ( Dock dock, bool enable ) [virtual]
+
    
+If enable is TRUE then users can dock windows in the dock
+area. If enable is FALSE users cannot dock windows in the dock dock area.
+
     Users can dock (drag) dock windows into any enabled dock area.
+
+
    void TQMainWindow::setDockEnabled ( TQDockWindow * dw, Dock dock, bool enable ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     If enable is TRUE then users can dock the dw dock window in
+the dock area. If enable is FALSE users cannot dock the dw dock window in the dock area.
+
     In general users can dock (drag) dock windows into any enabled
+dock area. Using this function particular dock areas can be
+enabled (or disabled) as docking points for particular dock
+windows.
+
+
    void TQMainWindow::setDockMenuEnabled ( bool b ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+If b is TRUE, then right clicking on a dock window or dock area
+will pop up the dock window menu. If b is FALSE, right clicking
+a dock window or dock area will not pop up the menu.
+
     The menu lists the (appropriate()) dock windows (which may be
+shown or hidden), and has a "Line Up Dock Windows" item. It will
+also have a "Customize" menu item if isCustomizable() returns
+TRUE.
+
     
    See also lineUpDockWindows() and isDockMenuEnabled().
+
+
    void TQMainWindow::setDockWindowsMovable ( bool ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets whether the dock windows are movable.
+See the "dockWindowsMovable" property for details.
+
    void TQMainWindow::setOpaqueMoving ( bool ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets whether dock windows are moved opaquely.
+See the "opaqueMoving" property for details.
+
    void TQMainWindow::setRightJustification ( bool ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets whether the main window right-justifies its dock windows.
+See the "rightJustification" property for details.
+
    void TQMainWindow::setToolBarsMovable ( bool ) [slot]
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
+
    void TQMainWindow::setUpLayout () [virtual protected slot]
+
    
+Sets up the geometry management of the window. It is called
+automatically when needed, so you shouldn't need to call it.
+
+
    void TQMainWindow::setUsesBigPixmaps ( bool ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets whether big pixmaps are enabled.
+See the "usesBigPixmaps" property for details.
+
    void TQMainWindow::setUsesTextLabel ( bool ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets whether text labels for toolbar buttons are enabled.
+See the "usesTextLabel" property for details.
+
    bool TQMainWindow::showDockMenu ( const TQPoint & globalPos ) [virtual protected slot]
+
    
+Shows the dock menu at the position globalPos. The menu lists
+the dock windows so that they can be shown (or hidden), lined up,
+and possibly customized. Returns TRUE if the menu is shown;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     If you want a custom menu, reimplement this function. You can
+create the menu from scratch or call createDockWindowMenu() and
+modify the result.
+
+
+
    TQStatusBar * TQMainWindow::statusBar () const
+
    
+Returns this main window's status bar. If there isn't one,
+statusBar() creates an empty status bar, and if necessary a tool
+tip group too.
+
     
    See also menuBar() and toolTipGroup().
+
+
    Example: qfd/qfd.cpp.
+
    void TQMainWindow::toolBarPositionChanged ( TQToolBar * ) [signal]
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
+
    TQPtrList<TQToolBar> TQMainWindow::toolBars ( Dock dock ) const
+
    
+Returns a list of all the toolbars which are in the dock dock
+area, regardless of their state.
+
     For example, the TornOff dock area may contain closed toolbars
+but these are returned along with the visible toolbars.
+
     
    See also dockWindows().
+
+
    bool TQMainWindow::toolBarsMovable () const
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
+
    TQToolTipGroup * TQMainWindow::toolTipGroup () const
+
    
+Returns this main window's tool tip group. If there isn't one,
+toolTipGroup() creates an empty tool tip group.
+
     
    See also menuBar() and statusBar().
+
+
    TQDockArea * TQMainWindow::topDock () const
+
    
+Returns the Top dock area
+
     
    See also bottomDock(), leftDock(), and rightDock().
+
+
    bool TQMainWindow::usesBigPixmaps () const
+
    Returns TRUE if big pixmaps are enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "usesBigPixmaps" property for details.
+
    bool TQMainWindow::usesTextLabel () const
+
    Returns TRUE if text labels for toolbar buttons are enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "usesTextLabel" property for details.
+
    void TQMainWindow::usesTextLabelChanged ( bool ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the setUsesTextLabel() is called
+with a value different to the current setting. All widgets that
+should respond to such changes, e.g. toolbar buttons, must connect
+to this signal.
+
+
    void TQMainWindow::whatsThis () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Enters 'What's This?' mode and returns immediately.
+
     This is the same as TQWhatsThis::enterWhatsThisMode(), but
+implemented as a main window object's slot. This way it can easily
+be used for popup menus, for example:
+
     
    +    TQPopupMenu * help = new TQPopupMenu( this );
+    help->insertItem( "What's &This", this , SLOT(whatsThis()), SHIFT+Key_F1);
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also TQWhatsThis::enterWhatsThisMode().
+
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    bool dockWindowsMovable
    
+
    This property holds whether the dock windows are movable.
+
    If TRUE (the default), the user will be able to move movable dock
+windows from one TQMainWindow dock area to another, including the
+TearOff area (i.e. where the dock window floats freely as a
+window in its own right), and the Minimized area (where only
+the dock window's handle is shown below the menu bar). Moveable
+dock windows can also be moved within TQMainWindow dock areas, i.e.
+to rearrange them within a dock area.
+
     If FALSE the user will not be able to move any dock windows.
+
     By default dock windows are moved transparently (i.e. only an
+outline rectangle is shown during the drag), but this setting can
+be changed with setOpaqueMoving().
+
     
    See also setDockEnabled() and opaqueMoving.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setDockWindowsMovable() and get this property's value with dockWindowsMovable().
+
    bool opaqueMoving
    
+
    This property holds whether dock windows are moved opaquely.
+
    If TRUE the dock windows of the main window are shown opaquely
+(i.e. it shows the toolbar as it looks when docked) whilst it is
+being moved. If FALSE (the default) they are shown transparently,
+(i.e. as an outline rectangle).
+
     Warning: Opaque moving of toolbars and dockwindows is known to
+have several problems. We recommend avoiding the use of this
+feature for the time being. We intend fixing the problems in a
+future release.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setOpaqueMoving() and get this property's value with opaqueMoving().
+
    bool rightJustification
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
    This property holds whether the main window right-justifies its dock windows.
+
    If disabled (the default), stretchable dock windows are expanded,
+and non-stretchable dock windows are given the minimum space they
+need. Since most dock windows are not stretchable, this usually
+results in an unjustified right edge (or unjustified bottom edge
+for a vertical dock area). If enabled, the main window will
+right-justify its dock windows.
+
     
    See also TQDockWindow::setVerticalStretchable() and TQDockWindow::setHorizontalStretchable().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setRightJustification() and get this property's value with rightJustification().
+
    bool usesBigPixmaps
    
+
    This property holds whether big pixmaps are enabled.
+
    If FALSE (the default), the tool buttons will use small pixmaps;
+otherwise big pixmaps will be used.
+
     Tool buttons and other widgets that wish to respond to this
+setting are responsible for reading the correct state on startup,
+and for connecting to the main window's widget's
+pixmapSizeChanged() signal.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setUsesBigPixmaps() and get this property's value with usesBigPixmaps().
+
    bool usesTextLabel
    
+
    This property holds whether text labels for toolbar buttons are enabled.
+
    If disabled (the default), the tool buttons will not use text
+labels. If enabled, text labels will be used.
+
     Tool buttons and other widgets that wish to respond to this
+setting are responsible for reading the correct state on startup,
+and for connecting to the main window's widget's
+usesTextLabelChanged() signal.
+
     
    See also TQToolButton::usesTextLabel.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setUsesTextLabel() and get this property's value with usesTextLabel().
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    TQTextStream & operator<< ( TQTextStream & ts, const TQMainWindow & mainWindow )
+
    
+
+
     Writes the layout (sizes and positions) of the dock windows in the
+dock areas of the TQMainWindow mainWindow, including Minimized and TornOff dock windows, to the text stream ts.
+
     This can be used, for example, in conjunction with TQSettings to
+save the user's layout when the \mainWindow receives a closeEvent.
+
     
    See also operator>>() and closeEvent().
+
+
    TQTextStream & operator>> ( TQTextStream & ts, TQMainWindow & mainWindow )
+
    
+
+
     Reads the layout (sizes and positions) of the dock windows in the
+dock areas of the TQMainWindow mainWindow from the text stream,
+ts, including Minimized and TornOff dock windows.
+Restores the dock windows and dock areas to these sizes and
+positions. The layout information must be in the format produced
+by operator<<().
+
     This can be used, for example, in conjunction with TQSettings to
+restore the user's layout.
+
     
    See also operator<<().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqmap.html b/doc/html/ntqmap.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f79d8dba1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqmap.html
@@ -0,0 +1,574 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQMap Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQMap Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQMap class is a value-based template class that
+provides a dictionary.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqmap.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • typedef Key key_type
      • 
+
    • typedef T mapped_type
      • 
+
    • typedef TQPair<const key_type, mapped_type> value_type
      • 
+
    • typedef value_type * pointer
      • 
+
    • typedef const value_type * const_pointer
      • 
+
    • typedef value_type & reference
      • 
+
    • typedef const value_type & const_reference
      • 
+
    • typedef size_t size_type
      • 
+
    • typedef TQMapIterator<Key, T> iterator
      • 
+
    • typedef TQMapConstIterator<Key, T> const_iterator
      • 
+
    • typedef TQPair<iterator, bool> insert_pair
      • 
+
    • typedef TQMapIterator<Key, T> Iterator
      • 
+
    • typedef TQMapConstIterator<Key, T> ConstIterator
      • 
+
    • typedef T ValueType
      • 
+
    • TQMap ()
      • 
+
    • TQMap ( const TQMap<Key, T> & m )
      • 
+
    • TQMap ( const std::map<Key, T> & m )
      • 
+
    • ~TQMap ()
      • 
+
    • TQMap<Key, T> & operator= ( const TQMap<Key, T> & m )
      • 
+
    • TQMap<Key, T> & operator= ( const std::map<Key, T> & m )
      • 
+
    • iterator begin ()
      • 
+
    • iterator end ()
      • 
+
    • const_iterator begin () const
      • 
+
    • const_iterator end () const
      • 
+
    • const_iterator constBegin () const
      • 
+
    • const_iterator constEnd () const
      • 
+
    • iterator replace ( const Key & k, const T & v )
      • 
+
    • size_type size () const
      • 
+
    • bool empty () const
      • 
+
    • TQPair<iterator, bool> insert ( const value_type & x )
      • 
+
    • void erase ( iterator it )
      • 
+
    • void erase ( const key_type & k )
      • 
+
    • size_type count ( const key_type & k ) const
      • 
+
    • T & operator[] ( const Key & k )
      • 
+
    • void clear ()
      • 
+
    • iterator find ( const Key & k )
      • 
+
    • const_iterator find ( const Key & k ) const
      • 
+
    • const T & operator[] ( const Key & k ) const
      • 
+
    • bool contains ( const Key & k ) const
      • 
+
    • size_type count () const
      • 
+
    • TQValueList<Key> keys () const
      • 
+
    • TQValueList<T> values () const
      • 
+
    • bool isEmpty () const
      • 
+
    • iterator insert ( const Key & key, const T & value, bool overwrite = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • void remove ( iterator it )
      • 
+
    • void remove ( const Key & k )
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
      
+
    • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQMap<Key, T> & m )
      • 
+
    • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQMap<Key, T> & m )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQMap class is a value-based template class that
+provides a dictionary.
+
     
+
+
+
+
     TQMap is a TQt implementation of an STL-like map container. It can
+be used in your application if the standard map is not
+available on all your target platforms. TQMap is part of the TQt Template Library.
+
     TQMap<Key, Data> defines a template instance to create a
+dictionary with keys of type Key and values of type Data. TQMap
+does not store pointers to the members of the map; instead, it
+holds a copy of every member. For this reason, TQMap is
+value-based, whereas TQPtrList and TQDict are pointer-based.
+
     TQMap contains and manages a collection of objects of type Data
+with associated key values of type Key and provides iterators that
+allow the contained objects to be addressed. TQMap owns the
+contained items.
+
     Some classes cannot be used within a TQMap. For example everything
+derived from TQObject and thus all classes that implement widgets.
+Only values can be used in a TQMap. To qualify as a value, the
+class must provide
+
     
      
+
    •  A copy constructor
+
    •  An assignment operator
+
    •  A default constructor, i.e. a constructor that does not take
+any arguments.
+
    
+
     Note that C++ defaults to field-by-field assignment operators and
+copy constructors if no explicit version is supplied. In many
+cases, this is sufficient.
+
     The class used for the key requires that the operator< is
+implemented to define ordering of the keys.
+
     TQMap's function naming is consistent with the other TQt classes
+(e.g., count(), isEmpty()). TQMap also provides extra functions for
+compatibility with STL algorithms, such as size() and empty().
+Programmers already familiar with the STL map can use these
+the STL-like functions if preferred.
+
     Example:
+
+
    +    #include <ntqstring.h>
+    #include <ntqmap.h>
+    #include <ntqstring.h>
+
+    class Employee
+    {
+    public:
+        Employee(): sn(0) {}
+        Employee( const TQString& forename, const TQString& surname, int salary )
+            : fn(forename), sn(surname), sal(salary)
+        { }
+
+        TQString forename() const { return fn; }
+        TQString surname() const { return sn; }
+        int salary() const { return sal; }
+        void setSalary( int salary ) { sal = salary; }
+
+    private:
+        TQString fn;
+        TQString sn;
+        int sal;
+    };
+
+    int main(int argc, char **argv)
+    {
+        TQApplication app( argc, argv );
+
+        typedef TQMap<TQString, Employee> EmployeeMap;
+        EmployeeMap map;
+
+        map["JD001"] = Employee("John", "Doe", 50000);
+        map["JW002"] = Employee("Jane", "Williams", 80000);
+        map["TJ001"] = Employee("Tom", "Jones", 60000);
+
+        Employee sasha( "Sasha", "Hind", 50000 );
+        map["SH001"] = sasha;
+        sasha.setSalary( 40000 );
+
+        EmployeeMap::Iterator it;
+        for ( it = map.begin(); it != map.end(); ++it ) {
+            printf( "%s: %s, %s earns %d\n",
+                    it.key().latin1(),
+                    it.data().surname().latin1(),
+                    it.data().forename().latin1(),
+                    it.data().salary() );
+        }
+        return 0;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     Program output:
+
    +    JD001: Doe, John earns 50000
+    JW002: Williams, Jane earns 80000
+    SH001: Hind, Sasha earns 50000
+    TJ001: Jones, Tom earns 60000
+    
    
+ 
+
     The latest changes to Sasha's salary did not affect the value in
+the list because the map created a copy of Sasha's entry. In
+addition, notice that the items are sorted alphabetically (by key)
+when iterating over the map.
+
     There are several ways to find items in a map. The begin() and
+end() functions return iterators to the beginning and end of the
+map. The advantage of using an iterator is that you can move
+forward or backward by incrementing/decrementing the iterator.
+The iterator returned by end() points to the element which is one
+past the last element in the container. The past-the-end iterator
+is still associated with the map it belongs to, however it is not dereferenceable; operator*() will not return a well-defined
+value. If the map is empty, the iterator returned by begin() will
+equal the iterator returned by end().
+
     Another way to find an element in the map is by using the find()
+function. This returns an iterator pointing to the desired item or
+to the end() iterator if no such element exists.
+
     Another approach uses the operator[]. But be warned: if the map
+does not contain an entry for the element you are looking for,
+operator[] inserts a default value. If you do not know that the
+element you are searching for is really in the list, you should
+not use operator[]. The following example illustrates this:
+
     
    +        TQMap<TQString,TQString> map;
+        map["Clinton"] = "Bill";
+        str << map["Clinton"] << map["Bush"] << endl;
+    
    
+ 
+
     The code fragment will print out "Clinton", "". Since the value
+associated with the "Bush" key did not exist, the map inserted a
+default value (in this case, an empty string). If you are not
+sure whether a certain element is in the map, you should use
+find() and iterators instead.
+
     If you just want to know whether a certain key is contained in the
+map, use the contains() function. In addition, count() tells you
+how many keys are in the map.
+
     It is safe to have multiple iterators at the same time. If some
+member of the map is removed, only iterators pointing to the
+removed member become invalid; inserting in the map does not
+invalidate any iterators.
+
     Since TQMap is value-based, there is no need to be concerned about
+deleting items in the map. The map holds its own copies and will
+free them if the corresponding member or the map itself is
+deleted.
+
     TQMap is implicitly shared. This means you can just make copies of
+the map in time O(1). If multiple TQMap instances share the same
+data and one is modifying the map's data, this modifying instance
+makes a copy and modifies its private copy: so it does not affect
+other instances. If a TQMap is being used in a multi-threaded
+program, you must protect all access to the map. See TQMutex.
+
     There are a couple of ways of inserting new items into the map.
+One uses the insert() method; the other uses operator[]:
+
    +    TQMap<TQString, TQString> map;
+    map["Clinton"] = "Bill";
+    map.insert( "Bush", "George" );
+    
    
+ 
+
     Items can also be removed from the map in several ways. One way is
+to pass an iterator to remove(). Another way is to pass a key
+value to remove(), which will delete the entry with the requested
+key. In addition you can clear the entire map using the clear()
+method.
+
     
    See also TQMapIterator, TQt Template Library Classes, Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQMap::ConstIterator
     
+The map's const iterator type, TQt style.
+
    TQMap::Iterator
     
+The map's iterator type, TQt style. 
+
    TQMap::ValueType
     
+Corresponds to TQPair<key_type, mapped_type>, TQt style.
+
    TQMap::const_iterator
     
+The map's const iterator type.
+
    TQMap::const_pointer
     
+Const pointer to value_type.
+
    TQMap::const_reference
     
+Const reference to value_type.
+
    TQMap::iterator
     
+The map's iterator type.
+
    TQMap::key_type
     
+The map's key type. 
+
    TQMap::mapped_type
     
+The map's data type. 
+
    TQMap::pointer
     
+Pointer to value_type.
+
    TQMap::reference
     
+Reference to value_type.
+
    TQMap::size_type
     
+An unsigned integral type, used to represent various sizes. 
+
    TQMap::value_type
     
+Corresponds to TQPair<key_type, mapped_type>. 
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQMap::TQMap ()
+
    
+
+
     Constructs an empty map.
+
+
    TQMap::TQMap ( const TQMap<Key, T> & m )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a copy of m.
+
     This operation costs O(1) time because TQMap is implicitly shared.
+This makes returning a TQMap from a function very fast. If a shared
+instance is modified, it will be copied (copy-on-write), and this
+takes O(n) time.
+
+
    TQMap::TQMap ( const std::map<Key, T> & m )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a copy of m.
+
+
    TQMap::~TQMap ()
+
    
+
+
     Destroys the map. References to the values in the map and all
+iterators of this map become invalidated. Since TQMap is highly
+tuned for performance you won't see warnings if you use invalid
+iterators, because it is not possible for an iterator to check
+whether it is valid or not.
+
+
    iterator TQMap::begin ()
+
    
+
+
     Returns an iterator pointing to the first element in the map. This
+iterator equals end() if the map is empty.
+
     The items in the map are traversed in the order defined by
+operator<(Key, Key).
+
     
    See also end() and TQMapIterator.
+
+
    const_iterator TQMap::begin () const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
    See also end() and TQMapConstIterator.
+
+
    void TQMap::clear ()
+
    
+
+
     Removes all items from the map.
+
     
    See also remove().
+
+
    const_iterator TQMap::constBegin () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns an iterator pointing to the first element in the map. This
+iterator equals end() if the map is empty.
+
     The items in the map are traversed in the order defined by
+operator<(Key, Key).
+
     
    See also constEnd() and TQMapConstIterator.
+
+
    const_iterator TQMap::constEnd () const
+
    
+
+
     The iterator returned by end() points to the element which is one
+past the last element in the container. The past-the-end iterator
+is still associated with the map it belongs to, but it is not
+dereferenceable; operator*() will not return a well-defined value.
+
     This iterator equals constBegin() if the map is empty.
+
     
    See also constBegin() and TQMapConstIterator.
+
+
    bool TQMap::contains ( const Key & k ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the map contains an item with key k; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
+
    size_type TQMap::count ( const key_type & k ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of items whose key is k. Since TQMap does not
+allow duplicate keys, the return value is always 0 or 1.
+
     This function is provided for STL compatibility.
+
+
    size_type TQMap::count () const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the number of items in the map.
+
     
    See also isEmpty().
+
+
    void TQMap::detach () [protected]
+
    
+
+
     If the map does not share its data with another TQMap instance,
+nothing happens; otherwise the function creates a new copy of this
+map and detaches from the shared one. This function is called
+whenever the map is modified. The implicit sharing mechanism is
+implemented this way.
+
+
    bool TQMap::empty () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the map contains no items; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent
+to isEmpty().
+
     
    See also size().
+
+
    iterator TQMap::end ()
+
    
+
+
     The iterator returned by end() points to the element which is one
+past the last element in the container. The past-the-end iterator
+is still associated with the map it belongs to, but it is not
+dereferenceable; operator*() will not return a well-defined value.
+
     This iterator equals begin() if the map is empty.
+
     
    See also begin() and TQMapIterator.
+
+
    const_iterator TQMap::end () const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
    void TQMap::erase ( iterator it )
+
    
+
+
     Removes the item associated with the iterator it from the map.
+
     This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent
+to remove().
+
     
    See also clear().
+
+
    void TQMap::erase ( const key_type & k )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Removes the item with the key k from the map.
+
+
    iterator TQMap::find ( const Key & k )
+
    
+
+
     Returns an iterator pointing to the element with key k in the
+map.
+
     Returns end() if no key matched.
+
     
    See also TQMapIterator.
+
+
    const_iterator TQMap::find ( const Key & k ) const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns an iterator pointing to the element with key k in the
+map.
+
     Returns end() if no key matched.
+
     
    See also TQMapConstIterator.
+
+
    iterator TQMap::insert ( const Key & key, const T & value, bool overwrite = TRUE )
+
    
+
+
     Inserts a new item with the key, key, and a value of value.
+If there is already an item whose key is key, that item's value
+is replaced with value, unless overwrite is FALSE (it is
+TRUE by default). In this case an iterator to this item is
+returned, else an iterator to the new item is returned.
+
     
+
    TQPair<iterator, bool> TQMap::insert ( const value_type & x )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts the (key, value) pair x into the map. x is a TQPair
+whose first element is a key to be inserted and whose second
+element is the associated value to be inserted. Returns a pair
+whose first element is an iterator pointing to the inserted
+item and whose second element is a bool indicating TRUE if x
+was inserted and FALSE if it was not inserted, e.g. because it was
+already present.
+
     
    See also replace().
+
+
    bool TQMap::isEmpty () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the map contains no items; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     
    See also count().
+
+
    TQValueList<Key> TQMap::keys () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a list of all the keys in the map, in order.
+
+
    TQMap<Key, T> & TQMap::operator= ( const TQMap<Key, T> & m )
+
    
+
+
     Assigns m to this map and returns a reference to this map.
+
     All iterators of the current map become invalidated by this
+operation. The cost of such an assignment is O(1), because TQMap is
+implicitly shared.
+
+
    TQMap<Key, T> & TQMap::operator= ( const std::map<Key, T> & m )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Assigns m to this map and returns a reference to this map.
+
     All iterators of the current map become invalidated by this
+operation.
+
+
    T & TQMap::operator[] ( const Key & k )
+
    
+
+
     Returns the value associated with the key k. If no such key is
+present, an empty item is inserted with this key and a reference
+to the empty item is returned.
+
     You can use this operator both for reading and writing:
+
    +    TQMap<TQString, TQString> map;
+    map["Clinton"] = "Bill";
+    stream << map["Clinton"];
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    const T & TQMap::operator[] ( const Key & k ) const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Warning: This function differs from the non-const version of the
+same function. It will not insert an empty value if the key k does not exist. This may lead to logic errors in your program.
+You should check if the element exists before calling this
+function.
+
     Returns the value associated with the key k. If no such key is
+present, a reference to an empty item is returned.
+
+
    void TQMap::remove ( iterator it )
+
    
+
+
     Removes the item associated with the iterator it from the map.
+
     
    See also clear().
+
+
    void TQMap::remove ( const Key & k )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Removes the item with the key k from the map.
+
+
    iterator TQMap::replace ( const Key & k, const T & v )
+
    
+
+
     Replaces the value of the element with key k, with the value v.
+
     
    See also insert() and remove().
+
+
    size_type TQMap::size () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of items in the map.
+
     This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent
+to count().
+
     
    See also empty().
+
+
    TQValueList<T> TQMap::values () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a list of all the values in the map, in key order.
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQMap<Key, T> & m )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     Writes the map m to the stream s. The types Key and T
+must implement the streaming operator as well.
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQMap<Key, T> & m )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     Reads the map m from the stream s. The types Key and T
+must implement the streaming operator as well.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqmemarray.html b/doc/html/ntqmemarray.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..32f1e2519
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqmemarray.html
@@ -0,0 +1,561 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQMemArray Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQMemArray Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQMemArray class is a template class that provides arrays of simple types.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqmemarray.h>
+
    Inherited by TQByteArray and TQPointArray.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • typedef type * Iterator
      • 
+
    • typedef const type * ConstIterator
      • 
+
    • TQMemArray ()
      • 
+
    • TQMemArray ( int size )
      • 
+
    • TQMemArray ( const TQMemArray<type> & a )
      • 
+
    • ~TQMemArray ()
      • 
+
    • TQMemArray<type> & operator= ( const TQMemArray<type> & a )
      • 
+
    • type * data () const
      • 
+
    • uint nrefs () const
      • 
+
    • uint size () const
      • 
+
    • uint count () const
      • 
+
    • bool isEmpty () const
      • 
+
    • bool isNull () const
      • 
+
    • bool resize ( uint size )
      • 
+
    • bool resize ( uint size, Optimization optim )
      • 
+
    • bool truncate ( uint pos )
      • 
+
    • bool fill ( const type & v, int size = -1 )
      • 
+
    • virtual void detach ()
      • 
+
    • TQMemArray<type> copy () const
      • 
+
    • TQMemArray<type> & assign ( const TQMemArray<type> & a )
      • 
+
    • TQMemArray<type> & assign ( const type * data, uint size )
      • 
+
    • TQMemArray<type> & duplicate ( const TQMemArray<type> & a )
      • 
+
    • TQMemArray<type> & duplicate ( const type * data, uint size )
      • 
+
    • TQMemArray<type> & setRawData ( const type * data, uint size )
      • 
+
    • void resetRawData ( const type * data, uint size )
      • 
+
    • int find ( const type & v, uint index = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • int contains ( const type & v ) const
      • 
+
    • void sort ()
      • 
+
    • int bsearch ( const type & v ) const
      • 
+
    • type & operator[] ( int index ) const
      • 
+
    • type & at ( uint index ) const
      • 
+
    • operator const type * () const
      • 
+
    • bool operator== ( const TQMemArray<type> & a ) const
      • 
+
    • bool operator!= ( const TQMemArray<type> & a ) const
      • 
+
    • Iterator begin ()
      • 
+
    • Iterator end ()
      • 
+
    • ConstIterator begin () const
      • 
+
    • ConstIterator end () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
      
+
    • Q_UINT16 qChecksum ( const char * data, uint len )
      • 
+
    • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQByteArray & a )
      • 
+
    • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQByteArray & a )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
+The TQMemArray class is a template class that provides arrays of simple types.
+
     
+
     TQMemArray is implemented as a template class. Define a template
+instance TQMemArray<X> to create an array that contains X items.
+
     TQMemArray stores the array elements directly in the array. It can
+only deal with simple types (i.e. C++ types, structs, and classes
+that have no constructors, destructors, or virtual functions).
+TQMemArray uses bitwise operations to copy and compare array
+elements. 
+
     The TQPtrVector collection class is also a kind of array. Like most
+collection classes, it uses pointers
+to the contained items.
+
     TQMemArray uses explicit sharing with a
+reference count. If more than one array shares common data and one
+of the arrays is modified, all the arrays are modified.
+
     The benefit of sharing is that a program does not need to duplicate
+data when it is not required, which results in lower memory use
+and less copying of data.
+
     An alternative to TQMemArray is TQValueVector. The TQValueVector class
+also provides an array of objects, but can deal with objects that
+have constructors (specifically a copy constructor and a default
+constructor). TQValueVector provides an STL-compatible syntax and is
+implicitly shared.
+
     Example:
+
    +    #include <ntqmemarray.h>
+    #include <stdio.h>
+
+    TQMemArray<int> fib( int num ) // returns fibonacci array
+    {
+        Q_ASSERT( num > 2 );
+        TQMemArray<int> f( num ); // array of ints
+
+        f[0] = f[1] = 1;
+        for ( int i = 2; i < num; i++ )
+            f[i] = f[i-1] + f[i-2];
+
+        return f;
+    }
+
+    int main()
+    {
+        TQMemArray<int> a = fib( 6 ); // get first 6 fibonaccis
+        for ( int i = 0; i < a.size(); i++ )
+            qDebug( "%d: %d", i, a[i] );
+
+        qDebug( "1 is found %d times", a.contains(1) );
+        qDebug( "5 is found at index %d", a.find(5) );
+
+        return 0;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     Program output:
+
    +    0: 1
+    1: 1
+    2: 2
+    3: 3
+    4: 5
+    5: 8
+    1 is found 2 times
+    5 is found at index 4
+    
    
+ 
+
     Note concerning the use of TQMemArray for manipulating structs or
+classes: Compilers will often pad the size of structs of odd sizes
+up to the nearest word boundary. This will then be the size
+TQMemArray will use for its bitwise element comparisons. Because
+the remaining bytes will typically be uninitialized, this can
+cause find() etc. to fail to find the element. Example:
+
     
    +    // MyStruct may be padded to 4 or 8 bytes
+    struct MyStruct
+    {
+        short i; // 2 bytes
+        char c;  // 1 byte
+    };
+
+    TQMemArray<MyStruct> a(1);
+    a[0].i = 5;
+    a[0].c = 't';
+
+    MyStruct x;
+    x.i = '5';
+    x.c = 't';
+    int i = a.find( x ); // may return -1 if the pad bytes differ
+    
    
+ 
+
     To work around this, make sure that you use a struct where
+sizeof() returns the same as the sum of the sizes of the members
+either by changing the types of the struct members or by adding
+dummy members.
+
     TQMemArray data can be traversed by iterators (see begin() and
+end()). The number of items is returned by count(). The array can
+be resized with resize() and filled using fill().
+
     You can make a shallow copy of the array with assign() (or
+operator=()) and a deep copy with duplicate().
+
     Search for values in the array with find() and contains(). For
+sorted arrays (see sort()) you can search using bsearch().
+
     You can set the data directly using setRawData() and
+resetRawData(), although this requires care.
+
     
    See also Shared Classes and Non-GUI Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQMemArray::ConstIterator
     
+A const TQMemArray iterator.
+
    See also begin() and end().
+
+
    TQMemArray::Iterator
     
+A TQMemArray iterator.
+
    See also begin() and end().
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQMemArray::TQMemArray ( int, int ) [protected]
+
    
+
+
     Constructs an array without allocating array space. The
+arguments should be (0, 0). Use at your own risk.
+
+
    TQMemArray::TQMemArray ()
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a null array.
+
     
    See also isNull().
+
+
    TQMemArray::TQMemArray ( int size )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs an array with room for size elements. Makes a null
+array if size == 0.
+
     The elements are left uninitialized.
+
     
    See also resize() and isNull().
+
+
    TQMemArray::TQMemArray ( const TQMemArray<type> & a )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a shallow copy of a.
+
     
    See also assign().
+
+
    TQMemArray::~TQMemArray ()
+
    
+
+
     Dereferences the array data and deletes it if this was the last
+reference.
+
+
    TQMemArray<type> & TQMemArray::assign ( const TQMemArray<type> & a )
+
    
+
+
     Shallow copy. Dereferences the current array and references the
+data contained in a instead. Returns a reference to this array.
+
     
    See also operator=().
+
+
    TQMemArray<type> & TQMemArray::assign ( const type * data, uint size )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Shallow copy. Dereferences the current array and references the
+array data data, which contains size elements. Returns a
+reference to this array.
+
     Do not delete data later; TQMemArray will call free() on it
+at the right time.
+
+
    type & TQMemArray::at ( uint index ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a reference to the element at position index in the array.
+
     This can be used to both read and set an element.
+
     
    See also operator[]().
+
+
    Iterator TQMemArray::begin ()
+
    
+
+
     Returns an iterator pointing at the beginning of this array. This
+iterator can be used in the same way as the iterators of
+TQValueList and TQMap, for example.
+
+
    ConstIterator TQMemArray::begin () const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns a const iterator pointing at the beginning of this array.
+This iterator can be used in the same way as the iterators of
+TQValueList and TQMap, for example.
+
+
    int TQMemArray::bsearch ( const type & v ) const
+
    
+
+
     In a sorted array (as sorted by sort()), finds the first
+occurrence of v by using a binary search. For a sorted
+array this is generally much faster than find(), which does
+a linear search.
+
     Returns the position of v, or -1 if v could not be found.
+
     
    See also sort() and find().
+
+
    int TQMemArray::contains ( const type & v ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of times v occurs in the array.
+
     
    See also find().
+
+
    TQMemArray<type> TQMemArray::copy () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a deep copy of this array.
+
     
    See also detach() and duplicate().
+
+
    uint TQMemArray::count () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the same as size().
+
     
    See also size().
+
+
    Example: scribble/scribble.cpp.
+
    type * TQMemArray::data () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a pointer to the actual array data.
+
     The array is a null array if data() == 0 (null pointer).
+
     
    See also isNull().
+
+
    Examples: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp and network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    void TQMemArray::detach () [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Detaches this array from shared array data; i.e. it makes a
+private, deep copy of the data.
+
     Copying will be performed only if the reference
+    count is greater than one.
+
     
    See also copy().
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQBitArray.
+
    TQMemArray<type> & TQMemArray::duplicate ( const TQMemArray<type> & a )
+
    
+
+
     Deep copy. Dereferences the current array and obtains a copy of
+the data contained in a instead. Returns a reference to this
+array.
+
     
    See also copy().
+
+
    TQMemArray<type> & TQMemArray::duplicate ( const type * data, uint size )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Deep copy. Dereferences the current array and obtains a copy of
+the array data data instead. Returns a reference to this array.
+The size of the array is given by size.
+
     
    See also copy().
+
+
    Iterator TQMemArray::end ()
+
    
+
+
     Returns an iterator pointing behind the last element of this
+array. This iterator can be used in the same way as the iterators
+of TQValueList and TQMap, for example.
+
+
    ConstIterator TQMemArray::end () const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns a const iterator pointing behind the last element of this
+array. This iterator can be used in the same way as the iterators
+of TQValueList and TQMap, for example. 
+
+
    bool TQMemArray::fill ( const type & v, int size = -1 )
+
    
+
+
     Fills the array with the value v. If size is specified as
+different from -1, then the array will be resized before being
+filled.
+
     Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if size is -1, or size is
+!= -1 and the memory can be allocated; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also resize().
+
+
    int TQMemArray::find ( const type & v, uint index = 0 ) const
+
    
+
+
     Finds the first occurrence of v, starting at position index.
+
     Returns the position of v, or -1 if v could not be found.
+
     
    See also contains().
+
+
    bool TQMemArray::isEmpty () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the array is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     isEmpty() is equivalent to isNull() for TQMemArray (unlike
+TQString).
+
+
    bool TQMemArray::isNull () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the array is null; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     A null array has size() == 0 and data() == 0.
+
+
    uint TQMemArray::nrefs () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the reference count for the shared array data. This
+reference count is always greater than zero.
+
+
    TQMemArray::operator const type * () const
+
    
+
+
     Cast operator. Returns a pointer to the array.
+
     
    See also data().
+
+
    bool TQMemArray::operator!= ( const TQMemArray<type> & a ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if this array is different from a; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     The two arrays are compared bitwise.
+
     
    See also operator==().
+
+
    TQMemArray<type> & TQMemArray::operator= ( const TQMemArray<type> & a )
+
    
+
+
     Assigns a shallow copy of a to this array and returns a
+reference to this array.
+
     Equivalent to assign( a ).
+
+
    bool TQMemArray::operator== ( const TQMemArray<type> & a ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if this array is equal to a; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     The two arrays are compared bitwise.
+
     
    See also operator!=().
+
+
    type & TQMemArray::operator[] ( int index ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a reference to the element at position index in the
+array.
+
     This can be used to both read and set an element. Equivalent to
+at().
+
     
    See also at().
+
+
    void TQMemArray::resetRawData ( const type * data, uint size )
+
    
+
+
     Removes internal references to the raw data that was set using
+setRawData(). This means that TQMemArray no longer has access to
+the data, so you are free to manipulate data as you wish.
+You can now use the TQMemArray without affecting the original data, for example by calling setRawData() with a pointer to some
+other data.
+
     The arguments must be the data and length, size, that were
+passed to setRawData(). This is for consistency checking.
+
     
    See also setRawData().
+
+
    bool TQMemArray::resize ( uint size, Optimization optim )
+
    
+
+
     Resizes (expands or shrinks) the array to size elements. The
+array becomes a null array if size == 0.
+
     Returns TRUE if successful, or FALSE if the memory cannot be
+allocated.
+
     New elements are not initialized.
+
     optim is either TQGArray::MemOptim (the default) or
+TQGArray::SpeedOptim.
+
     Note: By default, SpeedOptim is not available for general
+use since it is only available if TQt is built in a particular
+configuration.
+
     
    See also size().
+
+
    Example: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
+
    bool TQMemArray::resize ( uint size )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Resizes (expands or shrinks) the array to size elements. The
+array becomes a null array if size == 0.
+
     Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the memory can be allocated;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     New elements are not initialized.
+
     
    See also size().
+
+
    TQMemArray<type> & TQMemArray::setRawData ( const type * data, uint size )
+
    
+
+
     Sets raw data and returns a reference to the array.
+
     Dereferences the current array and sets the new array data to data and the new array size to size. Do not attempt to resize
+or re-assign the array data when raw data has been set. Call
+resetRawData(data, size) to reset the array.
+
     Setting raw data is useful because it sets TQMemArray data without
+allocating memory or copying data.
+
     Example I (intended use):
+
    +    static char bindata[] = { 231, 1, 44, ... };
+    TQByteArray  a;
+    a.setRawData( bindata, sizeof(bindata) );   // a points to bindata
+    TQDataStream s( a, IO_ReadOnly );            // open on a's data
+    s >> <something>;                           // read raw bindata
+    a.resetRawData( bindata, sizeof(bindata) ); // finished
+    
    
+ 
+
     Example II (you don't want to do this):
+
    +    static char bindata[] = { 231, 1, 44, ... };
+    TQByteArray  a, b;
+    a.setRawData( bindata, sizeof(bindata) );   // a points to bindata
+    a.resize( 8 );                              // will crash
+    b = a;                                      // will crash
+    a[2] = 123;                                 // might crash
+    // forget to resetRawData: will crash
+    
    
+ 
+
     Warning: If you do not call resetRawData(), TQMemArray will attempt
+to deallocate or reallocate the raw data, which might not be too
+good. Be careful.
+
     
    See also resetRawData().
+
+
    uint TQMemArray::size () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the size of the array (maximum number of elements).
+
     The array is a null array if size() == 0.
+
     
    See also isNull() and resize().
+
+
    void TQMemArray::sort ()
+
    
+
+
     Sorts the array elements in ascending order, using bitwise
+comparison (memcmp()).
+
     
    See also bsearch().
+
+
    bool TQMemArray::truncate ( uint pos )
+
    
+
+
     Truncates the array at position pos.
+
     Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the memory can be allocated;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     Equivalent to resize(pos).
+
     
    See also resize().
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQByteArray & a )
+
    
+
+
     Writes byte array a to the stream s and returns a reference
+to the stream.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQByteArray & a )
+
    
+
+
     Reads a byte array into a from the stream s and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
    Q_UINT16 qChecksum ( const char * data, uint len )
+
    
+
+
     Returns the CRC-16 checksum of len bytes starting at data.
+
     The checksum is independent of the byte order (endianness).
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqmenubar.html b/doc/html/ntqmenubar.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4dde93ad7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqmenubar.html
@@ -0,0 +1,593 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQMenuBar Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQMenuBar Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQMenuBar class provides a horizontal menu bar.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqmenubar.h>
+
    Inherits TQFrame and TQMenuData.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQMenuBar ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • ~TQMenuBar ()
      • 
+
    • virtual void show ()
      • 
+
    • virtual void hide ()
      • 
+
    • virtual int heightForWidth ( int max_width ) const
      • 
+
    • enum Separator { Never = 0, InWindowsStyle = 1 }
      • 
+
    • Separator separator () const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • virtual void setSeparator ( Separator when )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void setDefaultUp ( bool )
      • 
+
    • bool isDefaultUp () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Important Inherited Members
    
+
      
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( TQWidget * widget, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, TQCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( TQCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertSeparator ( int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • void removeItem ( int id )
      • 
+
    • void clear ()
      • 
+
    • bool isItemEnabled ( int id ) const
      • 
+
    • void setItemEnabled ( int id, bool enable )
      • 
+
    • bool isItemVisible ( int id ) const
      • 
+
    • void setItemVisible ( int id, bool visible )
      • 
+
    
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • bool defaultUp - the popup orientation
      • 
+
    • Separator separator - in which cases a menubar sparator is drawn  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQMenuBar class provides a horizontal menu bar.
+
     
+
+
     A menu bar consists of a list of pull-down menu items. You add
+menu items with insertItem(). For example, asuming that menubar is a
+pointer to a TQMenuBar and filemenu is a pointer to a
+TQPopupMenu, the following statement inserts the menu into the menu
+bar:
+
    +    menubar->insertItem( "&File", filemenu );
+    
    
+ 
+The ampersand in the menu item's text sets Alt+F as a shortcut for
+this menu. (You can use "&&" to get a real ampersand in the menu
+bar.)
+
     Items are either enabled or disabled. You toggle their state with
+setItemEnabled().
+
     There is no need to lay out a menu bar. It automatically sets its
+own geometry to the top of the parent widget and changes it
+appropriately whenever the parent is resized.
+
     
+
     Example of creating a menu bar with menu items (from menu/menu.cpp):
+
+
+
            TQPopupMenu *file = new TQPopupMenu( this );
+
            file->insertItem( p1, "&Open",  this, SLOT(open()), CTRL+Key_O );
+        file->insertItem( p2, "&New", this, SLOT(news()), CTRL+Key_N );
+
            menu = new TQMenuBar( this );
+
            menu->insertItem( "&File", file );
+
    
+
     In most main window style applications you would use the menuBar()
+provided in TQMainWindow, adding TQPopupMenus to the menu bar
+and adding TQActions to the popup menus.
+
     Example (from action/application.cpp):
+
+
+
            TQPopupMenu * file = new TQPopupMenu( this );
+        menuBar()->insertItem( "&File", file );
+        fileNewAction->addTo( file );
+
    
+
     Menu items can have text and pixmaps (or iconsets), see the
+various insertItem()
+overloads, as well as separators, see insertSeparator(). You can
+also add custom menu items that are derived from
+TQCustomMenuItem.
+
     Menu items may be removed with removeItem() and enabled or
+disabled with setItemEnabled().
+
      
+
     
     TQMenuBar on TQt/Mac
+
    
+
     TQMenuBar on TQt/Mac is a wrapper for using the system-wide menubar.
+If you have multiple menubars in one dialog the outermost menubar
+(normally inside a widget with widget flag WType_TopLevel) will
+be used for the system-wide menubar.
+
     Note that arbitrary TQt widgets cannot be inserted into a
+TQMenuBar on the Mac because TQt uses Mac's native menus which don't
+support this functionality. This limitation does not apply to
+stand-alone TQPopupMenus.
+
     TQt/Mac also provides a menubar merging feature to make TQMenuBar
+conform more closely to accepted Mac OS X menubar layout. The
+merging functionality is based on string matching the title of a
+TQPopupMenu entry. These strings are translated (using
+TQObject::tr()) in the "TQMenuBar" context. If an entry is moved its
+slots will still fire as if it was in the original place. The
+table below outlines the strings looked for and where the entry is
+placed if matched:
+
     
    
+
     String matches Placement Notes
+
     about.*
+Application Menu | About 
+If this entry is not found no About item will appear in
+the Application Menu
+
     config, options, setup, settings or preferences
+Application Menu | Preferences
+If this entry is not found the Settings item will be disabled
+
     quit or exit
+Application Menu | Quit 
+If this entry is not found a default Quit item will be
+created to call TQApplication::quit()
+
    
+
     menu/menu.cpp is an example of
+TQMenuBar and TQPopupMenu use.
+
     
    See also TQPopupMenu, TQAccel, TQAction, Aqua Style Guidelines, GUI Design Handbook: Menu Bar, and Main Window and Related Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQMenuBar::Separator
    
+
+
     This enum type is used to decide whether TQMenuBar should draw a
+separator line at its bottom.
+
      
+
    • TQMenuBar::Never - In many applications there is already a separator,
+and having two looks wrong.
+
    • TQMenuBar::InWindowsStyle - In some other applications a separator looks
+good in Windows style, but nowhere else.
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQMenuBar::TQMenuBar ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a menu bar called name with parent parent.
+
+
    TQMenuBar::~TQMenuBar ()
+
    
+Destroys the menu bar.
+
+
    void TQMenuBar::activated ( int id ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when a menu item is selected; id is the
+id of the selected item.
+
     Normally you will connect each menu item to a single slot using
+TQMenuData::insertItem(), but sometimes you will want to connect
+several items to a single slot (most often if the user selects
+from an array). This signal is useful in such cases.
+
     
    See also highlighted() and TQMenuData::insertItem().
+
+
    Example: progress/progress.cpp.
+
    void TQMenuData::clear ()
+
    
+Removes all menu items.
+
     
    See also removeItem() and removeItemAt().
+
+
    Examples: mdi/application.cpp and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
+
    void TQMenuBar::drawContents ( TQPainter * p ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Called from TQFrame::paintEvent(). Draws the menu bar contents
+using painter p.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQFrame.
+
    int TQMenuBar::heightForWidth ( int max_width ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the height that the menu would resize itself to if its
+parent (and hence itself) resized to the given max_width. This
+can be useful for simple layout tasks in which the height of the
+menu bar is needed after items have been inserted. See showimg/showimg.cpp for an example of the usage.
+
+
    Example: showimg/showimg.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
+
    void TQMenuBar::hide () [virtual]
+
    
+Reimplements TQWidget::hide() in order to deselect any selected
+item, and calls setUpLayout() for the main window.
+
+
    Example: grapher/grapher.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
+
    void TQMenuBar::highlighted ( int id ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when a menu item is highlighted; id is
+the id of the highlighted item.
+
     Normally, you will connect each menu item to a single slot using
+TQMenuData::insertItem(), but sometimes you will want to connect
+several items to a single slot (most often if the user selects
+from an array). This signal is useful in such cases.
+
     
    See also activated() and TQMenuData::insertItem().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+The family of insertItem() functions inserts menu items into a
+popup menu or a menu bar.
+
     A menu item is usually either a text string or a pixmap, both with
+an optional icon or keyboard accelerator. For special cases it is
+also possible to insert custom items (see TQCustomMenuItem) or
+even widgets into popup menus.
+
     Some insertItem() members take a popup menu as an additional
+argument. Use this to insert submenus into existing menus or
+pulldown menus into a menu bar.
+
     The number of insert functions may look confusing, but they are
+actually quite simple to use.
+
     This default version inserts a menu item with the text text,
+the accelerator key accel, an id and an optional index and
+connects it to the slot member in the object receiver.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQMenuBar   *mainMenu = new TQMenuBar;
+        TQPopupMenu *fileMenu = new TQPopupMenu;
+        fileMenu->insertItem( "New",  myView, SLOT(newFile()), CTRL+Key_N );
+        fileMenu->insertItem( "Open", myView, SLOT(open()),    CTRL+Key_O );
+        mainMenu->insertItem( "File", fileMenu );
+    
    
+ 
+
     Not all insert functions take an object/slot parameter or an
+accelerator key. Use connectItem() and setAccel() on those items.
+
     If you need to translate accelerators, use tr() with the text and
+accelerator. (For translations use a string key
+    sequence.):
+
    +        fileMenu->insertItem( tr("Open"), myView, SLOT(open()),
+                              tr("Ctrl+O") );
+    
    
+ 
+
     In the example above, pressing Ctrl+O or selecting "Open" from the
+menu activates the myView->open() function.
+
     Some insert functions take a TQIconSet parameter to specify the
+little menu item icon. Note that you can always pass a TQPixmap
+object instead.
+
     The id specifies the identification number associated with the
+menu item. Note that only positive values are valid, as a negative
+value will make TQt select a unique id for the item.
+
     The index specifies the position in the menu. The menu item is
+appended at the end of the list if index is negative.
+
     Note that keyboard accelerators in TQt are not application-global,
+instead they are bound to a certain top-level window. For example,
+accelerators in TQPopupMenu items only work for menus that are
+associated with a certain window. This is true for popup menus
+that live in a menu bar since their accelerators will then be
+installed in the menu bar itself. This also applies to stand-alone
+popup menus that have a top-level widget in their parentWidget()
+chain. The menu will then install its accelerator object on that
+top-level widget. For all other cases use an independent TQAccel
+object.
+
     Warning: Be careful when passing a literal 0 to insertItem()
+because some C++ compilers choose the wrong overloaded function.
+Cast the 0 to what you mean, e.g. (TQObject*)0.
+
     Warning: On Mac OS X, items that connect to a slot that are inserted into a
+menubar will not function as we use the native menubar that knows nothing
+about signals or slots. Instead insert the items into a popup menu and
+insert the popup menu into the menubar. This may be fixed in a future TQt
+version.
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem(), TQAccel, and ntqnamespace.h.
+
+
    Examples: addressbook/mainwindow.cpp, canvas/canvas.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, and sound/sound.cpp.
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with icon icon, text text, accelerator
+accel, optional id id, and optional index position. The
+menu item is connected it to the receiver's member slot. The
+icon will be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem(), TQAccel, and ntqnamespace.h.
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with pixmap pixmap, accelerator accel,
+optional id id, and optional index position. The menu item
+is connected it to the receiver's member slot. The icon will
+be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
+
     To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap
+should provide a mask (see TQPixmap::mask()).
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with icon icon, pixmap pixmap,
+accelerator accel, optional id id, and optional index
+position. The icon will be displayed to the left of the pixmap in
+the item. The item is connected to the member slot in the receiver object.
+
     To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap
+should provide a mask (see TQPixmap::mask()).
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem(), TQAccel, and ntqnamespace.h.
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with text text, optional id id, and
+optional index position.
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with icon icon, text text, optional id
+id, and optional index position. The icon will be displayed
+to the left of the text in the item.
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with text text, submenu popup, optional
+id id, and optional index position.
+
     The popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent
+widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when
+the menu is deleted.
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with icon icon, text text, submenu popup, optional id id, and optional index position. The icon
+will be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
+
     The popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent
+widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when
+the menu is deleted.
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with pixmap pixmap, optional id id, and
+optional index position.
+
     To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap
+should provide a mask (see TQPixmap::mask()).
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with icon icon, pixmap pixmap, optional
+id id, and optional index position. The icon will be
+displayed to the left of the pixmap in the item.
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with pixmap pixmap, submenu popup,
+optional id id, and optional index position.
+
     The popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent
+widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when
+the menu is deleted.
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with icon icon, pixmap pixmap submenu popup, optional id id, and optional index position. The icon
+will be displayed to the left of the pixmap in the item.
+
     The popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent
+widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when
+the menu is deleted.
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( TQWidget * widget, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item that consists of the widget widget with
+optional id id, and optional index position.
+
     Ownership of widget is transferred to the popup menu or to the
+menu bar.
+
     Theoretically, any widget can be inserted into a popup menu. In
+practice, this only makes sense with certain widgets.
+
     If a widget is not focus-enabled (see
+TQWidget::isFocusEnabled()), the menu treats it as a separator;
+this means that the item is not selectable and will never get
+focus. In this way you can, for example, simply insert a TQLabel if
+you need a popup menu with a title.
+
     If the widget is focus-enabled it will get focus when the user
+traverses the popup menu with the arrow keys. If the widget does
+not accept ArrowUp and ArrowDown in its key event handler,
+the focus will move back to the menu when the respective arrow key
+is hit one more time. This works with a TQLineEdit, for example. If
+the widget accepts the arrow key itself, it must also provide the
+possibility to put the focus back on the menu again by calling
+TQWidget::focusNextPrevChild(). Futhermore, if the embedded widget
+closes the menu when the user made a selection, this can be done
+safely by calling:
+
    +        if ( isVisible() &&
+             parentWidget() &&
+             parentWidget()->inherits("TQPopupMenu") )
+            parentWidget()->close();
+    
    
+ 
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, TQCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a custom menu item custom with an icon and with
+optional id id, and optional index position.
+
     This only works with popup menus. It is not supported for menu
+bars. Ownership of custom is transferred to the popup menu.
+
     If you want to connect a custom item to a slot, use connectItem().
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also connectItem(), removeItem(), and TQCustomMenuItem.
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( TQCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a custom menu item custom with optional id id, and
+optional index position.
+
     This only works with popup menus. It is not supported for menu
+bars. Ownership of custom is transferred to the popup menu.
+
     If you want to connect a custom item to a slot, use connectItem().
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also connectItem(), removeItem(), and TQCustomMenuItem.
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertSeparator ( int index = -1 )
+
    
+Inserts a separator at position index, and returns the menu identifier
+number allocated to it. The separator becomes the last menu item if
+index is negative.
+
     In a popup menu a separator is rendered as a horizontal line. In a
+Motif menu bar a separator is spacing, so the rest of the items
+(normally just "Help") are drawn right-justified. In a Windows
+menu bar separators are ignored (to comply with the Windows style
+guidelines).
+
+
    Examples: addressbook/mainwindow.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, and sound/sound.cpp.
+
    bool TQMenuBar::isDefaultUp () const
+
    Returns the popup orientation.
+See the "defaultUp" property for details.
+
    bool TQMenuData::isItemEnabled ( int id ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the item with identifier id is enabled;
+otherwise returns FALSE
+
     
    See also setItemEnabled() and isItemVisible().
+
+
    bool TQMenuData::isItemVisible ( int id ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id id is  visible;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setItemVisible().
+
+
    void TQMenuBar::menuContentsChanged () [virtual protected]
+
    
+Recomputes the menu bar's display data according to the new
+contents.
+
     You should never need to call this; it is called automatically by
+TQMenuData whenever it needs to be called.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQMenuData.
+
    void TQMenuBar::menuStateChanged () [virtual protected]
+
    
+Recomputes the menu bar's display data according to the new state.
+
     You should never need to call this; it is called automatically by
+TQMenuData whenever it needs to be called.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQMenuData.
+
    void TQMenuData::removeItem ( int id )
+
    
+
+
     Removes the menu item that has the identifier id.
+
     
    See also removeItemAt() and clear().
+
+
    Example: chart/chartform.cpp.
+
    Separator TQMenuBar::separator () const
+
    Returns in which cases a menubar sparator is drawn.
+See the "separator" property for details.
+
    void TQMenuBar::setDefaultUp ( bool )
+
    Sets the popup orientation.
+See the "defaultUp" property for details.
+
    void TQMenuData::setItemEnabled ( int id, bool enable )
+
    
+If enable is TRUE, enables the menu item with identifier id;
+otherwise disables the menu item with identifier id.
+
     
    See also isItemEnabled().
+
+
    Examples: mdi/application.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
+
    void TQMenuData::setItemVisible ( int id, bool visible )
+
    
+If visible is TRUE, shows the menu item with id id; otherwise
+hides the menu item with id id.
+
     
    See also isItemVisible() and isItemEnabled().
+
+
    void TQMenuBar::setSeparator ( Separator when ) [virtual]
+
    Sets in which cases a menubar sparator is drawn to when.
+See the "separator" property for details.
+
    void TQMenuBar::show () [virtual]
+
    
+Reimplements TQWidget::show() in order to set up the correct
+keyboard accelerators and to raise itself to the top of the widget
+stack.
+
+
    Example: grapher/grapher.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    bool defaultUp
    
+
    This property holds the popup orientation.
+
    The default popup orientation. By default, menus pop "down" the
+screen. By setting the property to TRUE, the menu will pop "up".
+You might call this for menus that are below the document to
+which they refer.
+
     If the menu would not fit on the screen, the other direction is
+used automatically.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setDefaultUp() and get this property's value with isDefaultUp().
+
    Separator separator
    
+
    This property holds in which cases a menubar sparator is drawn.
+
    This property is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
    Set this property's value with setSeparator() and get this property's value with separator().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqmenudata.html b/doc/html/ntqmenudata.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0343f2cff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqmenudata.html
@@ -0,0 +1,706 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQMenuData Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQMenuData Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQMenuData class is a base class for TQMenuBar and TQPopupMenu.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqmenudata.h>
+
    Inherited by TQMenuBar and TQPopupMenu.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQMenuData ()
      • 
+
    • virtual ~TQMenuData ()
      • 
+
    • uint count () const
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( TQWidget * widget, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, TQCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( TQCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertSeparator ( int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • void removeItem ( int id )
      • 
+
    • void removeItemAt ( int index )
      • 
+
    • void clear ()
      • 
+
    • TQKeySequence accel ( int id ) const
      • 
+
    • void setAccel ( const TQKeySequence & key, int id )
      • 
+
    • TQIconSet * iconSet ( int id ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString text ( int id ) const
      • 
+
    • TQPixmap * pixmap ( int id ) const
      • 
+
    • void setWhatsThis ( int id, const TQString & text )
      • 
+
    • TQString whatsThis ( int id ) const
      • 
+
    • void changeItem ( int id, const TQString & text )
      • 
+
    • void changeItem ( int id, const TQPixmap & pixmap )
      • 
+
    • void changeItem ( int id, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text )
      • 
+
    • void changeItem ( int id, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap )
      • 
+
    • void changeItem ( const TQString & text, int id )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void changeItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int id )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void changeItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, int id )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • bool isItemActive ( int id ) const
      • 
+
    • bool isItemEnabled ( int id ) const
      • 
+
    • void setItemEnabled ( int id, bool enable )
      • 
+
    • bool isItemChecked ( int id ) const
      • 
+
    • void setItemChecked ( int id, bool check )
      • 
+
    • bool isItemVisible ( int id ) const
      • 
+
    • void setItemVisible ( int id, bool visible )
      • 
+
    • virtual void updateItem ( int id )
      • 
+
    • int indexOf ( int id ) const
      • 
+
    • int idAt ( int index ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setId ( int index, int id )
      • 
+
    • bool connectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
      • 
+
    • bool disconnectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
      • 
+
    • bool setItemParameter ( int id, int param )
      • 
+
    • int itemParameter ( int id ) const
      • 
+
    • TQMenuItem * findItem ( int id ) const
      • 
+
    • TQMenuItem * findItem ( int id, TQMenuData ** parent ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual void activateItemAt ( int index )
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQMenuData class is a base class for TQMenuBar and TQPopupMenu.
+
     
+
     TQMenuData has an internal list of menu items. A menu item can have
+a text(), an accelerator, a pixmap(), an
+iconSet(), a whatsThis() text and a popup menu (unless it is a
+separator). Menu items may optionally be checked (except for separators).
+
     The menu item sends out an activated() signal when it is chosen and a highlighted() signal when it
+receives the user input focus.
+
     
+
     Menu items are assigned the menu identifier id that is passed
+in insertItem() or an automatically generated identifier if id
+is < 0 (the default). The generated identifiers (negative
+integers) are guaranteed to be unique within the entire
+application. The identifier is used to access the menu item in
+other functions.
+
     Menu items can be removed with removeItem() and removeItemAt(), or
+changed with changeItem(). All menu items can be removed with
+clear(). Accelerators can be changed or set with setAccel().
+Checkable items can be checked or unchecked with setItemChecked().
+Items can be enabled or disabled using setItemEnabled() and
+connected and disconnected with connectItem() and disconnectItem()
+respectively. By default, newly created menu items are visible.
+They can be hidden (and shown again) with setItemVisible().
+
     Menu items are stored in a list. Use findItem() to find an item by
+its list position or by its menu identifier. (See also indexOf()
+and idAt().)
+
     
    See also TQAccel, TQPopupMenu, TQAction, and Miscellaneous Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQMenuData::TQMenuData ()
+
    
+Constructs an empty menu data list.
+
+
    TQMenuData::~TQMenuData () [virtual]
+
    
+Removes all menu items and disconnects any signals that have been
+connected.
+
+
    TQKeySequence TQMenuData::accel ( int id ) const
+
    
+Returns the accelerator key that has been defined for the menu
+item id, or 0 if it has no accelerator key or if there is no
+such menu item.
+
     
    See also setAccel(), TQAccel, and ntqnamespace.h.
+
+
    void TQMenuData::activateItemAt ( int index ) [virtual]
+
    
+Activates the menu item at position index.
+
     If the index is invalid (for example, -1), the object itself is
+deactivated.
+
+
    void TQMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const TQString & text )
+
    
+Changes the text of the menu item id to text. If the item
+has an icon, the icon remains unchanged.
+
     
    See also text().
+
+
    void TQMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const TQPixmap & pixmap )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Changes the pixmap of the menu item id to the pixmap pixmap.
+If the item has an icon, the icon is unchanged.
+
     
    See also pixmap().
+
+
    void TQMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Changes the iconset and text of the menu item id to the icon
+and text respectively.
+
     
    See also pixmap().
+
+
    void TQMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Changes the iconset and pixmap of the menu item id to icon
+and pixmap respectively.
+
     
    See also pixmap().
+
+
    void TQMenuData::changeItem ( const TQString & text, int id )
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Changes the text of the menu item id. If the item has an icon,
+the icon remains unchanged.
+
     
    See also text().
+
+
    void TQMenuData::changeItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int id )
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Changes the pixmap of the menu item id. If the item has an icon,
+the icon remains unchanged.
+
     
    See also pixmap().
+
+
    void TQMenuData::changeItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, int id )
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Changes the icon and text of the menu item id.
+
     
    See also pixmap().
+
+
    void TQMenuData::clear ()
+
    
+Removes all menu items.
+
     
    See also removeItem() and removeItemAt().
+
+
    Examples: mdi/application.cpp and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
+
    bool TQMenuData::connectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
+
    
+Connects the menu item with identifier id to receiver's member slot or signal.
+
     The receiver's slot (or signal) is activated when the menu item is
+activated.
+
     
    See also disconnectItem() and setItemParameter().
+
+
    Example: menu/menu.cpp.
+
    uint TQMenuData::count () const
+
    
+Returns the number of items in the menu.
+
+
    bool TQMenuData::disconnectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
+
    
+Disconnects the receiver's member from the menu item with
+identifier id.
+
     All connections are removed when the menu data object is
+destroyed.
+
     
    See also connectItem() and setItemParameter().
+
+
    TQMenuItem * TQMenuData::findItem ( int id ) const
+
    
+Returns the menu item with identifier id, or 0 if there is no
+item with this identifier.
+
     Note that TQMenuItem is an internal class, and that you should not
+need to call this function. Use the higher level functions like
+text(), pixmap() and changeItem() to get and modify menu item
+attributes instead.
+
     
    See also indexOf().
+
+
    Example: chart/chartform.cpp.
+
    TQMenuItem * TQMenuData::findItem ( int id, TQMenuData ** parent ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the menu item with identifier id, or 0 if there is no
+item with this identifier. Changes *parent to point to the
+parent of the return value.
+
     Note that TQMenuItem is an internal class, and that you should not
+need to call this function. Use the higher level functions like
+text(), pixmap() and changeItem() to get and modify menu item
+attributes instead.
+
     
    See also indexOf().
+
+
    TQIconSet * TQMenuData::iconSet ( int id ) const
+
    
+Returns the icon set that has been set for menu item id, or 0
+if no icon set has been set.
+
     
    See also changeItem(), text(), and pixmap().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::idAt ( int index ) const
+
    
+Returns the identifier of the menu item at position index in
+the internal list, or -1 if index is out of range.
+
     
    See also setId() and indexOf().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::indexOf ( int id ) const
+
    
+Returns the index of the menu item with identifier id, or -1 if
+there is no item with this identifier.
+
     
    See also idAt() and findItem().
+
+
    Example: scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+The family of insertItem() functions inserts menu items into a
+popup menu or a menu bar.
+
     A menu item is usually either a text string or a pixmap, both with
+an optional icon or keyboard accelerator. For special cases it is
+also possible to insert custom items (see TQCustomMenuItem) or
+even widgets into popup menus.
+
     Some insertItem() members take a popup menu as an additional
+argument. Use this to insert submenus into existing menus or
+pulldown menus into a menu bar.
+
     The number of insert functions may look confusing, but they are
+actually quite simple to use.
+
     This default version inserts a menu item with the text text,
+the accelerator key accel, an id and an optional index and
+connects it to the slot member in the object receiver.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQMenuBar   *mainMenu = new TQMenuBar;
+        TQPopupMenu *fileMenu = new TQPopupMenu;
+        fileMenu->insertItem( "New",  myView, SLOT(newFile()), CTRL+Key_N );
+        fileMenu->insertItem( "Open", myView, SLOT(open()),    CTRL+Key_O );
+        mainMenu->insertItem( "File", fileMenu );
+    
    
+ 
+
     Not all insert functions take an object/slot parameter or an
+accelerator key. Use connectItem() and setAccel() on those items.
+
     If you need to translate accelerators, use tr() with the text and
+accelerator. (For translations use a string key
+    sequence.):
+
    +        fileMenu->insertItem( tr("Open"), myView, SLOT(open()),
+                              tr("Ctrl+O") );
+    
    
+ 
+
     In the example above, pressing Ctrl+O or selecting "Open" from the
+menu activates the myView->open() function.
+
     Some insert functions take a TQIconSet parameter to specify the
+little menu item icon. Note that you can always pass a TQPixmap
+object instead.
+
     The id specifies the identification number associated with the
+menu item. Note that only positive values are valid, as a negative
+value will make TQt select a unique id for the item.
+
     The index specifies the position in the menu. The menu item is
+appended at the end of the list if index is negative.
+
     Note that keyboard accelerators in TQt are not application-global,
+instead they are bound to a certain top-level window. For example,
+accelerators in TQPopupMenu items only work for menus that are
+associated with a certain window. This is true for popup menus
+that live in a menu bar since their accelerators will then be
+installed in the menu bar itself. This also applies to stand-alone
+popup menus that have a top-level widget in their parentWidget()
+chain. The menu will then install its accelerator object on that
+top-level widget. For all other cases use an independent TQAccel
+object.
+
     Warning: Be careful when passing a literal 0 to insertItem()
+because some C++ compilers choose the wrong overloaded function.
+Cast the 0 to what you mean, e.g. (TQObject*)0.
+
     Warning: On Mac OS X, items that connect to a slot that are inserted into a
+menubar will not function as we use the native menubar that knows nothing
+about signals or slots. Instead insert the items into a popup menu and
+insert the popup menu into the menubar. This may be fixed in a future TQt
+version.
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem(), TQAccel, and ntqnamespace.h.
+
+
    Examples: addressbook/mainwindow.cpp, canvas/canvas.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, and sound/sound.cpp.
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with icon icon, text text, accelerator
+accel, optional id id, and optional index position. The
+menu item is connected it to the receiver's member slot. The
+icon will be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem(), TQAccel, and ntqnamespace.h.
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with pixmap pixmap, accelerator accel,
+optional id id, and optional index position. The menu item
+is connected it to the receiver's member slot. The icon will
+be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
+
     To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap
+should provide a mask (see TQPixmap::mask()).
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with icon icon, pixmap pixmap,
+accelerator accel, optional id id, and optional index
+position. The icon will be displayed to the left of the pixmap in
+the item. The item is connected to the member slot in the receiver object.
+
     To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap
+should provide a mask (see TQPixmap::mask()).
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem(), TQAccel, and ntqnamespace.h.
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with text text, optional id id, and
+optional index position.
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with icon icon, text text, optional id
+id, and optional index position. The icon will be displayed
+to the left of the text in the item.
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with text text, submenu popup, optional
+id id, and optional index position.
+
     The popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent
+widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when
+the menu is deleted.
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with icon icon, text text, submenu popup, optional id id, and optional index position. The icon
+will be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
+
     The popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent
+widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when
+the menu is deleted.
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with pixmap pixmap, optional id id, and
+optional index position.
+
     To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap
+should provide a mask (see TQPixmap::mask()).
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with icon icon, pixmap pixmap, optional
+id id, and optional index position. The icon will be
+displayed to the left of the pixmap in the item.
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with pixmap pixmap, submenu popup,
+optional id id, and optional index position.
+
     The popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent
+widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when
+the menu is deleted.
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with icon icon, pixmap pixmap submenu popup, optional id id, and optional index position. The icon
+will be displayed to the left of the pixmap in the item.
+
     The popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent
+widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when
+the menu is deleted.
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( TQWidget * widget, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item that consists of the widget widget with
+optional id id, and optional index position.
+
     Ownership of widget is transferred to the popup menu or to the
+menu bar.
+
     Theoretically, any widget can be inserted into a popup menu. In
+practice, this only makes sense with certain widgets.
+
     If a widget is not focus-enabled (see
+TQWidget::isFocusEnabled()), the menu treats it as a separator;
+this means that the item is not selectable and will never get
+focus. In this way you can, for example, simply insert a TQLabel if
+you need a popup menu with a title.
+
     If the widget is focus-enabled it will get focus when the user
+traverses the popup menu with the arrow keys. If the widget does
+not accept ArrowUp and ArrowDown in its key event handler,
+the focus will move back to the menu when the respective arrow key
+is hit one more time. This works with a TQLineEdit, for example. If
+the widget accepts the arrow key itself, it must also provide the
+possibility to put the focus back on the menu again by calling
+TQWidget::focusNextPrevChild(). Futhermore, if the embedded widget
+closes the menu when the user made a selection, this can be done
+safely by calling:
+
    +        if ( isVisible() &&
+             parentWidget() &&
+             parentWidget()->inherits("TQPopupMenu") )
+            parentWidget()->close();
+    
    
+ 
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, TQCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a custom menu item custom with an icon and with
+optional id id, and optional index position.
+
     This only works with popup menus. It is not supported for menu
+bars. Ownership of custom is transferred to the popup menu.
+
     If you want to connect a custom item to a slot, use connectItem().
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also connectItem(), removeItem(), and TQCustomMenuItem.
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( TQCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a custom menu item custom with optional id id, and
+optional index position.
+
     This only works with popup menus. It is not supported for menu
+bars. Ownership of custom is transferred to the popup menu.
+
     If you want to connect a custom item to a slot, use connectItem().
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also connectItem(), removeItem(), and TQCustomMenuItem.
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertSeparator ( int index = -1 )
+
    
+Inserts a separator at position index, and returns the menu identifier
+number allocated to it. The separator becomes the last menu item if
+index is negative.
+
     In a popup menu a separator is rendered as a horizontal line. In a
+Motif menu bar a separator is spacing, so the rest of the items
+(normally just "Help") are drawn right-justified. In a Windows
+menu bar separators are ignored (to comply with the Windows style
+guidelines).
+
+
    Examples: addressbook/mainwindow.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, and sound/sound.cpp.
+
    bool TQMenuData::isItemActive ( int id ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id id is currently
+active; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQMenuData::isItemChecked ( int id ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id id has been checked;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setItemChecked().
+
+
    Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
+
    bool TQMenuData::isItemEnabled ( int id ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the item with identifier id is enabled;
+otherwise returns FALSE
+
     
    See also setItemEnabled() and isItemVisible().
+
+
    bool TQMenuData::isItemVisible ( int id ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id id is  visible;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setItemVisible().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::itemParameter ( int id ) const
+
    
+Returns the parameter of the activation signal of item id.
+
     If no parameter has been specified for this item with
+setItemParameter(), the value defaults to id.
+
     
    See also connectItem(), disconnectItem(), and setItemParameter().
+
+
    void TQMenuData::menuContentsChanged () [virtual protected]
+
    
+Virtual function; notifies subclasses that one or more items have
+been inserted or removed.
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQMenuBar.
+
    void TQMenuData::menuDelPopup ( TQPopupMenu * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Virtual function; notifies subclasses that a popup menu item has
+been removed.
+
+
    void TQMenuData::menuInsPopup ( TQPopupMenu * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Virtual function; notifies subclasses that a popup menu item has
+been inserted.
+
+
    void TQMenuData::menuStateChanged () [virtual protected]
+
    
+Virtual function; notifies subclasses that one or more items have
+changed state (enabled/disabled or checked/unchecked).
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQMenuBar.
+
    TQPixmap * TQMenuData::pixmap ( int id ) const
+
    
+Returns the pixmap that has been set for menu item id, or 0 if
+no pixmap has been set.
+
     
    See also changeItem(), text(), and iconSet().
+
+
    void TQMenuData::removeItem ( int id )
+
    
+
+
     Removes the menu item that has the identifier id.
+
     
    See also removeItemAt() and clear().
+
+
    Example: chart/chartform.cpp.
+
    void TQMenuData::removeItemAt ( int index )
+
    
+Removes the menu item at position index.
+
     
    See also removeItem() and clear().
+
+
    void TQMenuData::setAccel ( const TQKeySequence & key, int id )
+
    
+Sets the accelerator key for the menu item id to key.
+
     An accelerator key consists of a key code and a combination of the
+modifiers SHIFT, CTRL, ALT or UNICODE_ACCEL (OR'ed or
+added). The header file ntqnamespace.h contains a list of key
+codes.
+
     Defining an accelerator key produces a text that is added to the
+menu item; for instance, CTRL + Key_O produces "Ctrl+O". The
+text is formatted differently for different platforms.
+
     Note that keyboard accelerators in TQt are not application-global,
+instead they are bound to a certain top-level window. For example,
+accelerators in TQPopupMenu items only work for menus that are
+associated with a certain window. This is true for popup menus
+that live in a menu bar since their accelerators will then be
+installed in the menu bar itself. This also applies to stand-alone
+popup menus that have a top-level widget in their parentWidget()
+chain. The menu will then install its accelerator object on that
+top-level widget. For all other cases use an independent TQAccel
+object.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQMenuBar *mainMenu = new TQMenuBar;
+        TQPopupMenu *fileMenu = new TQPopupMenu;       // file sub menu
+        fileMenu->insertItem( "Open Document", 67 ); // add "Open" item
+        fileMenu->setAccel( CTRL + Key_O, 67 );      // Ctrl+O to open
+        fileMenu->insertItem( "Quit", 69 );          // add "Quit" item
+        fileMenu->setAccel( CTRL + ALT + Key_Delete, 69 ); // add Alt+Del to quit
+        mainMenu->insertItem( "File", fileMenu );    // add the file menu
+    
    
+ 
+
     If you need to translate accelerators, use tr() with a string:
+
    +        fileMenu->setAccel( tr("Ctrl+O"), 67 );
+    
    
+ 
+
     You can also specify the accelerator in the insertItem() function.
+You may prefer to use TQAction to associate accelerators with menu
+items.
+
     
    See also accel(), insertItem(), TQAccel, and TQAction.
+
+
    Example: menu/menu.cpp.
+
    void TQMenuData::setId ( int index, int id ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the menu identifier of the item at index to id.
+
     If index is out of range, the operation is ignored.
+
     
    See also idAt().
+
+
    void TQMenuData::setItemChecked ( int id, bool check )
+
    
+If check is TRUE, checks the menu item with id id; otherwise
+unchecks the menu item with id id. Calls
+TQPopupMenu::setCheckable( TRUE ) if necessary.
+
     
    See also isItemChecked().
+
+
    Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp, grapher/grapher.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
+
    void TQMenuData::setItemEnabled ( int id, bool enable )
+
    
+If enable is TRUE, enables the menu item with identifier id;
+otherwise disables the menu item with identifier id.
+
     
    See also isItemEnabled().
+
+
    Examples: mdi/application.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
+
    bool TQMenuData::setItemParameter ( int id, int param )
+
    
+Sets the parameter of the activation signal of item id to param.
+
     If any receiver takes an integer parameter, this value is passed.
+
     
    See also connectItem(), disconnectItem(), and itemParameter().
+
+
    Example: mdi/application.cpp.
+
    void TQMenuData::setItemVisible ( int id, bool visible )
+
    
+If visible is TRUE, shows the menu item with id id; otherwise
+hides the menu item with id id.
+
     
    See also isItemVisible() and isItemEnabled().
+
+
    void TQMenuData::setWhatsThis ( int id, const TQString & text )
+
    
+Sets text as What's This help for the menu item with identifier
+id.
+
     
    See also whatsThis().
+
+
    Examples: application/application.cpp, helpsystem/mainwindow.cpp, and mdi/application.cpp.
+
    TQString TQMenuData::text ( int id ) const
+
    
+Returns the text that has been set for menu item id, or
+TQString::null if no text has been set.
+
     
    See also changeItem(), pixmap(), and iconSet().
+
+
    Examples: qdir/qdir.cpp and showimg/showimg.cpp.
+
    void TQMenuData::updateItem ( int id ) [virtual]
+
    
+Virtual function; notifies subclasses about an item with id
+that has been changed.
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQPopupMenu.
+
    TQString TQMenuData::whatsThis ( int id ) const
+
    
+Returns the What's This help text for the item with identifier id or TQString::null if no text has yet been defined.
+
     
    See also setWhatsThis().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqmessagebox.html b/doc/html/ntqmessagebox.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ec37f5e2c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqmessagebox.html
@@ -0,0 +1,751 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQMessageBox Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQMessageBox Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQMessageBox class provides a modal dialog with a short message, an icon, and some buttons.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqmessagebox.h>
+
    Inherits TQDialog.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • enum Icon { NoIcon = 0, Information = 1, Warning = 2, Critical = 3, Question = 4 }
      • 
+
    • TQMessageBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQMessageBox ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, Icon icon, int button0, int button1, int button2, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = TRUE, WFlags f = WStyle_DialogBorder )
      • 
+
    • ~TQMessageBox ()
      • 
+
    • TQString text () const
      • 
+
    • void setText ( const TQString & )
      • 
+
    • Icon icon () const
      • 
+
    • void setIcon ( Icon )
      • 
+
    • const TQPixmap * iconPixmap () const
      • 
+
    • void setIconPixmap ( const TQPixmap & )
      • 
+
    • TQString buttonText ( int button ) const
      • 
+
    • void setButtonText ( int button, const TQString & text )
      • 
+
    • virtual void adjustSize ()
      • 
+
    • TextFormat textFormat () const
      • 
+
    • void setTextFormat ( TextFormat )
      • 
+
    
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • int information ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, int button0, int button1 = 0, int button2 = 0 )
      • 
+
    • int information ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, const TQString & button0Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button1Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button2Text = TQString::null, int defaultButtonNumber = 0, int escapeButtonNumber = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int question ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, int button0, int button1 = 0, int button2 = 0 )
      • 
+
    • int question ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, const TQString & button0Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button1Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button2Text = TQString::null, int defaultButtonNumber = 0, int escapeButtonNumber = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int warning ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, int button0, int button1, int button2 = 0 )
      • 
+
    • int warning ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, const TQString & button0Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button1Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button2Text = TQString::null, int defaultButtonNumber = 0, int escapeButtonNumber = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int critical ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, int button0, int button1, int button2 = 0 )
      • 
+
    • int critical ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, const TQString & button0Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button1Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button2Text = TQString::null, int defaultButtonNumber = 0, int escapeButtonNumber = -1 )
      • 
+
    • void about ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text )
      • 
+
    • void aboutTQt ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption = TQString::null )
      • 
+
    • int message ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, const TQString & buttonText = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * = 0 )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • bool query ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, const TQString & yesButtonText = TQString::null, const TQString & noButtonText = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * = 0 )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • TQPixmap standardIcon ( Icon icon, GUIStyle style )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • TQPixmap standardIcon ( Icon icon )
      • 
+
    
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • Icon icon - the message box's icon
      • 
+
    • TQPixmap iconPixmap - the current icon
      • 
+
    • TQString text - the message box text to be displayed
      • 
+
    • TextFormat textFormat - the format of the text displayed by the message box
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQMessageBox class provides a modal dialog with a short message, an icon, and some buttons.
+
+
+
     Message boxes are used to provide informative messages and to ask
+simple questions.
+
     TQMessageBox provides a range of different messages, arranged
+roughly along two axes: severity and complexity.
+
     Severity is
+
    
+
+
+
+
+
         		Question
+For message boxes that ask a question as part of normal
+operation. Some style guides recommend using Information for this
+purpose.
+
         		Information
+For message boxes that are part of normal operation.
+
         		Warning
+For message boxes that tell the user about unusual errors.
+
         		Critical
+For message boxes that tell the user about critical errors.
+
    
+
     The message box has a different icon for each of the severity levels.
+
     Complexity is one button (OK) for simple messages, or two or even
+three buttons for questions.
+
     There are static functions for the most common cases.
+
     Examples:
+
     If a program is unable to find a supporting file, but can do perfectly
+well without it:
+
     
    +    TQMessageBox::information( this, "Application name",
+    "Unable to find the user preferences file.\n"
+    "The factory default will be used instead." );
+    
    
+ 
+
     question() is useful for simple yes/no questions:
+
     
    +    if ( TQFile::exists( filename ) &&
+        TQMessageBox::question(
+            this,
+            tr("Overwrite File? -- Application Name"),
+            tr("A file called %1 already exists."
+                "Do you want to overwrite it?")
+                .arg( filename ),
+            tr("&Yes"), tr("&No"),
+            TQString::null, 0, 1 ) )
+        return false;
+    
    
+ 
+
     warning() can be used to tell the user about unusual errors, or
+errors which can't be easily fixed:
+
     
    +    switch( TQMessageBox::warning( this, "Application name",
+        "Could not connect to the <mumble> server.\n"
+        "This program can't function correctly "
+        "without the server.\n\n",
+        "Retry",
+        "Quit", 0, 0, 1 ) ) {
+    case 0: // The user clicked the Retry again button or pressed Enter
+        // try again
+        break;
+    case 1: // The user clicked the Quit or pressed Escape
+        // exit
+        break;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     The text part of all message box messages can be either rich text
+or plain text. If you specify a rich text formatted string, it
+will be rendered using the default stylesheet. See
+TQStyleSheet::defaultSheet() for details. With certain strings that
+contain XML meta characters, the auto-rich text detection may
+fail, interpreting plain text incorrectly as rich text. In these
+rare cases, use TQStyleSheet::convertFromPlainText() to convert
+your plain text string to a visually equivalent rich text string
+or set the text format explicitly with setTextFormat().
+
     Note that the Microsoft Windows User Interface Guidelines
+recommend using the application name as the window's caption.
+
     Below are more examples of how to use the static member functions.
+After these examples you will find an overview of the non-static
+member functions.
+
     Exiting a program is part of its normal operation. If there is
+unsaved data the user probably should be asked if they want to
+save the data. For example:
+
     
    +    switch( TQMessageBox::information( this, "Application name here",
+        "The document contains unsaved changes\n"
+        "Do you want to save the changes before exiting?",
+        "&Save", "&Discard", "Cancel",
+        0,      // Enter == button 0
+        2 ) ) { // Escape == button 2
+    case 0: // Save clicked or Alt+S pressed or Enter pressed.
+        // save
+        break;
+    case 1: // Discard clicked or Alt+D pressed
+        // don't save but exit
+        break;
+    case 2: // Cancel clicked or Escape pressed
+        // don't exit
+        break;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     The Escape button cancels the entire exit operation, and pressing
+Enter causes the changes to be saved before the exit occurs.
+
     Disk full errors are unusual and they certainly can be hard to
+correct. This example uses predefined buttons instead of
+hard-coded button texts:
+
     
    +    switch( TQMessageBox::warning( this, "Application name here",
+        "Could not save the user preferences,\n"
+        "because the disk is full. You can delete\n"
+        "some files and press Retry, or you can\n"
+        "abort the Save Preferences operation.",
+        TQMessageBox::Retry | TQMessageBox::Default,
+        TQMessageBox::Abort | TQMessageBox::Escape )) {
+    case TQMessageBox::Retry: // Retry clicked or Enter pressed
+        // try again
+        break;
+    case TQMessageBox::Abort: // Abort clicked or Escape pressed
+        // abort
+        break;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     The critical() function should be reserved for critical errors. In
+this example errorDetails is a TQString or const char*, and TQString
+is used to concatenate several strings:
+
     
    +    TQMessageBox::critical( 0, "Application name here",
+        TQString("An internal error occurred. Please ") +
+        "call technical support at 1234-56789 and report\n"+
+        "these numbers:\n\n" + errorDetails +
+        "\n\nApplication will now exit." );
+    
    
+ 
+
     In this example an OK button is displayed.
+
     TQMessageBox provides a very simple About box which displays an
+appropriate icon and the string you provide:
+
     
    +    TQMessageBox::about( this, "About <Application>",
+        "<Application> is a <one-paragraph blurb>\n\n"
+        "Copyright 1991-2003 Such-and-such. "
+        "<License words here.>\n\n"
+        "For technical support, call 1234-56789 or see\n"
+        "http://www.such-and-such.com/Application/\n" );
+    
    
+ 
+
     See about() for more information.
+
     If you want your users to know that the application is built using
+TQt (so they know that you use high quality tools) you might like
+to add an "About TQt" menu option under the Help menu to invoke
+aboutTQt().
+
     If none of the standard message boxes is suitable, you can create a
+TQMessageBox from scratch and use custom button texts:
+
     
    +    TQMessageBox mb( "Application name here",
+        "Saving the file will overwrite the original file on the disk.\n"
+        "Do you really want to save?",
+        TQMessageBox::Information,
+        TQMessageBox::Yes | TQMessageBox::Default,
+        TQMessageBox::No,
+        TQMessageBox::Cancel | TQMessageBox::Escape );
+    mb.setButtonText( TQMessageBox::Yes, "Save" );
+    mb.setButtonText( TQMessageBox::No, "Discard" );
+    switch( mb.exec() ) {
+    case TQMessageBox::Yes:
+        // save and exit
+        break;
+    case TQMessageBox::No:
+        // exit without saving
+        break;
+    case TQMessageBox::Cancel:
+        // don't save and don't exit
+        break;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     TQMessageBox defines two enum types: Icon and an unnamed button type.
+Icon defines the Question, Information, Warning, and Critical icons for each GUI style. It is used by the constructor
+and by the static member functions question(), information(),
+warning() and critical(). A function called standardIcon() gives
+you access to the various icons.
+
     The button types are:
+
      
+
    •  Ok - the default for single-button message boxes
+
    •  Cancel - note that this is not automatically Escape
+
    •  Yes
+
    •  No
+
    •  Abort
+
    •  Retry
+
    •  Ignore
+
    •  YesAll
+
    •  NoAll
+
    
+
     Button types can be combined with two modifiers by using OR, '|':
+
      
+
    •  Default - makes pressing Enter equivalent to
+clicking this button. Normally used with Ok, Yes or similar.
+
    •  Escape - makes pressing Escape equivalent to clicking this button.
+Normally used with Abort, Cancel or similar.
+
    
+
     The text(), icon() and iconPixmap() functions provide access to the
+current text and pixmap of the message box. The setText(), setIcon()
+and setIconPixmap() let you change it. The difference between
+setIcon() and setIconPixmap() is that the former accepts a
+TQMessageBox::Icon and can be used to set standard icons, whereas the
+latter accepts a TQPixmap and can be used to set custom icons.
+
     setButtonText() and buttonText() provide access to the buttons.
+
     TQMessageBox has no signals or slots.
+
      
+
     
    See also TQDialog, Isys on error messages, GUI Design Handbook: Message Box, and Dialog Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQMessageBox::Icon
    
+
+
     This enum has the following values:
+
      
+
    • TQMessageBox::NoIcon - the message box does not have any icon.
+
    • TQMessageBox::Question - an icon indicating that
+the message is asking a question.
+
    • TQMessageBox::Information - an icon indicating that
+the message is nothing out of the ordinary.
+
    • TQMessageBox::Warning - an icon indicating that the
+message is a warning, but can be dealt with.
+
    • TQMessageBox::Critical - an icon indicating that
+the message represents a critical problem.
+
     
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQMessageBox::TQMessageBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a message box with no text and a button with the label
+"OK".
+
     If parent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global
+modal dialog box. If parent is a widget, the message box
+becomes modal relative to parent.
+
     The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQDialog
+constructor.
+
+
    TQMessageBox::TQMessageBox ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, Icon icon, int button0, int button1, int button2, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = TRUE, WFlags f = WStyle_DialogBorder )
+
    
+Constructs a message box with a caption, a text, an icon,
+and up to three buttons.
+
     The icon must be one of the following:
+
      
+
    •  TQMessageBox::NoIcon
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Question
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Information
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Warning
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Critical
+
    
+
     Each button, button0, button1 and button2, can have one
+of the following values:
+
      
+
    •  TQMessageBox::NoButton
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Ok
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Cancel
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Yes
+
    •  TQMessageBox::No
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Abort
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Retry
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Ignore
+
    •  TQMessageBox::YesAll
+
    •  TQMessageBox::NoAll
+
    
+
     Use TQMessageBox::NoButton for the later parameters to have fewer
+than three buttons in your message box. If you don't specify any
+buttons at all, TQMessageBox will provide an Ok button.
+
     One of the buttons can be OR-ed with the TQMessageBox::Default
+flag to make it the default button (clicked when Enter is
+pressed).
+
     One of the buttons can be OR-ed with the TQMessageBox::Escape
+flag to make it the cancel or close button (clicked when Escape is
+pressed).
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQMessageBox mb( "Application Name",
+        "Hardware failure.\n\nDisk error detected\nDo you want to stop?",
+        TQMessageBox::Question,
+        TQMessageBox::Yes | TQMessageBox::Default,
+        TQMessageBox::No  | TQMessageBox::Escape,
+        TQMessageBox::NoButton );
+    if ( mb.exec() == TQMessageBox::No )
+        // try again
+    
    
+ 
+
     If parent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global
+modal dialog box. If parent is a widget, the message box
+becomes modal relative to parent.
+
     If modal is TRUE the message box is modal; otherwise it
+is modeless.
+
     The parent, name, modal, and f arguments are passed to
+the TQDialog constructor.
+
     
    See also caption, text, and icon.
+
+
    TQMessageBox::~TQMessageBox ()
+
    
+Destroys the message box.
+
+
    void TQMessageBox::about ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text ) [static]
+
    
+Displays a simple about box with caption caption and text text. The about box's parent is parent.
+
     about() looks for a suitable icon in four locations:
+
      
+
    1.  It prefers parent->icon() if that exists.
+
    2.  If not, it tries the top-level widget containing parent.
+
    3.  If that fails, it tries the main widget.
+
    4.  As a last resort it uses the Information icon.
+
    
+
     The about box has a single button labelled "OK".
+
     
    See also TQWidget::icon and TQApplication::mainWidget().
+
+
    Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, chart/chartform.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, and themes/themes.cpp.
+
    void TQMessageBox::aboutTQt ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption = TQString::null ) [static]
+
    
+Displays a simple message box about TQt, with caption caption
+and centered over parent (if parent is not 0). The message
+includes the version number of TQt being used by the application.
+
     This is useful for inclusion in the Help menu of an application.
+See the examples/menu/menu.cpp example.
+
     TQApplication provides this functionality as a slot.
+
     
    See also TQApplication::aboutTQt().
+
+
    Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, chart/chartform.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, themes/themes.cpp, and trivial/trivial.cpp.
+
    void TQMessageBox::adjustSize () [virtual]
+
    
+Adjusts the size of the message box to fit the contents just before
+TQDialog::exec() or TQDialog::show() is called.
+
     This function will not be called if the message box has been explicitly
+resized before showing it.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
+
    TQString TQMessageBox::buttonText ( int button ) const
+
    
+Returns the text of the message box button button, or
+TQString::null if the message box does not contain the button.
+
     
    See also setButtonText().
+
+
    int TQMessageBox::critical ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, int button0, int button1, int button2 = 0 ) [static]
+
    
+Opens a critical message box with the caption caption and the
+text text. The dialog may have up to three buttons. Each of the
+button parameters, button0, button1 and button2 may be
+set to one of the following values:
+
     
      
+
    •  TQMessageBox::NoButton
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Ok
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Cancel
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Yes
+
    •  TQMessageBox::No
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Abort
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Retry
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Ignore
+
    •  TQMessageBox::YesAll
+
    •  TQMessageBox::NoAll
+
    
+
     If you don't want all three buttons, set the last button, or last
+two buttons to TQMessageBox::NoButton.
+
     One button can be OR-ed with TQMessageBox::Default, and one
+button can be OR-ed with TQMessageBox::Escape.
+
     Returns the identity (TQMessageBox::Ok, or TQMessageBox::No, etc.)
+of the button that was clicked.
+
     If parent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global
+modal dialog box. If parent is a widget, the message box
+becomes modal relative to parent.
+
     
    See also information(), question(), and warning().
+
+
    Examples: network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h, network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h, process/process.cpp, and xml/outliner/outlinetree.cpp.
+
    int TQMessageBox::critical ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, const TQString & button0Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button1Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button2Text = TQString::null, int defaultButtonNumber = 0, int escapeButtonNumber = -1 ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Displays a critical error message box with a caption, a text, and
+1, 2 or 3 buttons. Returns the number of the button that was
+clicked (0, 1 or 2).
+
     button0Text is the text of the first button, and is optional.
+If button0Text is not supplied, "OK" (translated) will be used.
+button1Text is the text of the second button, and is optional,
+and button2Text is the text of the third button, and is
+optional. defaultButtonNumber (0, 1 or 2) is the index of the
+default button; pressing Return or Enter is the same as clicking
+the default button. It defaults to 0 (the first button). escapeButtonNumber is the index of the Escape button; pressing
+Escape is the same as clicking this button. It defaults to -1;
+supply 0, 1, or 2 to make pressing Escape equivalent to clicking
+the relevant button.
+
     If parent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global
+modal dialog box. If parent is a widget, the message box
+becomes modal relative to parent.
+
     
    See also information(), question(), and warning().
+
+
    Icon TQMessageBox::icon () const
+
    Returns the message box's icon.
+See the "icon" property for details.
+
    const TQPixmap * TQMessageBox::iconPixmap () const
+
    Returns the current icon.
+See the "iconPixmap" property for details.
+
    int TQMessageBox::information ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, int button0, int button1 = 0, int button2 = 0 ) [static]
+
    
+Opens an information message box with the caption caption and
+the text text. The dialog may have up to three buttons. Each of
+the buttons, button0, button1 and button2 may be set to
+one of the following values:
+
     
      
+
    •  TQMessageBox::NoButton
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Ok
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Cancel
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Yes
+
    •  TQMessageBox::No
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Abort
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Retry
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Ignore
+
    •  TQMessageBox::YesAll
+
    •  TQMessageBox::NoAll
+
    
+
     If you don't want all three buttons, set the last button, or last
+two buttons to TQMessageBox::NoButton.
+
     One button can be OR-ed with TQMessageBox::Default, and one
+button can be OR-ed with TQMessageBox::Escape.
+
     Returns the identity (TQMessageBox::Ok, or TQMessageBox::No, etc.)
+of the button that was clicked.
+
     If parent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global
+modal dialog box. If parent is a widget, the message box
+becomes modal relative to parent.
+
     
    See also question(), warning(), and critical().
+
+
    Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, dirview/dirview.cpp, fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp, picture/picture.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, and simple/main.cpp.
+
    int TQMessageBox::information ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, const TQString & button0Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button1Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button2Text = TQString::null, int defaultButtonNumber = 0, int escapeButtonNumber = -1 ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Displays an information message box with caption caption, text
+text and one, two or three buttons. Returns the index of the
+button that was clicked (0, 1 or 2).
+
     button0Text is the text of the first button, and is optional.
+If button0Text is not supplied, "OK" (translated) will be used.
+button1Text is the text of the second button, and is optional.
+button2Text is the text of the third button, and is optional.
+defaultButtonNumber (0, 1 or 2) is the index of the default
+button; pressing Return or Enter is the same as clicking the
+default button. It defaults to 0 (the first button). escapeButtonNumber is the index of the Escape button; pressing
+Escape is the same as clicking this button. It defaults to -1;
+supply 0, 1 or 2 to make pressing Escape equivalent to clicking
+the relevant button.
+
     If parent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global
+modal dialog box. If parent is a widget, the message box
+becomes modal relative to parent.
+
     Note: If you do not specify an Escape button then if the Escape
+button is pressed then -1 will be returned.  It is suggested that
+you specify an Escape button to prevent this from happening.
+
     
    See also question(), warning(), and critical().
+
+
    int TQMessageBox::message ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, const TQString & buttonText = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * = 0 ) [static]
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Opens a modal message box directly using the specified parameters.
+
     Please use information(), warning(), question(), or critical() instead.
+
+
    Example: grapher/grapher.cpp.
+
    bool TQMessageBox::query ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, const TQString & yesButtonText = TQString::null, const TQString & noButtonText = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * = 0 ) [static]
+
     
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Queries the user using a modal message box with two buttons.
+Note that caption is not always shown, it depends on the window manager.
+
     Please use information(), question(), warning(), or critical() instead.
+
+
    int TQMessageBox::question ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, int button0, int button1 = 0, int button2 = 0 ) [static]
+
    
+Opens a question message box with the caption caption and the
+text text. The dialog may have up to three buttons. Each of the
+buttons, button0, button1 and button2 may be set to one
+of the following values:
+
     
      
+
    •  TQMessageBox::NoButton
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Ok
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Cancel
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Yes
+
    •  TQMessageBox::No
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Abort
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Retry
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Ignore
+
    •  TQMessageBox::YesAll
+
    •  TQMessageBox::NoAll
+
    
+
     If you don't want all three buttons, set the last button, or last
+two buttons to TQMessageBox::NoButton.
+
     One button can be OR-ed with TQMessageBox::Default, and one
+button can be OR-ed with TQMessageBox::Escape.
+
     Returns the identity (TQMessageBox::Yes, or TQMessageBox::No, etc.)
+of the button that was clicked.
+
     If parent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global
+modal dialog box. If parent is a widget, the message box
+becomes modal relative to parent.
+
     
    See also information(), warning(), and critical().
+
+
    int TQMessageBox::question ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, const TQString & button0Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button1Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button2Text = TQString::null, int defaultButtonNumber = 0, int escapeButtonNumber = -1 ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Displays a question message box with caption caption, text text and one, two or three buttons. Returns the index of the
+button that was clicked (0, 1 or 2).
+
     button0Text is the text of the first button, and is optional.
+If button0Text is not supplied, "OK" (translated) will be used.
+button1Text is the text of the second button, and is optional.
+button2Text is the text of the third button, and is optional.
+defaultButtonNumber (0, 1 or 2) is the index of the default
+button; pressing Return or Enter is the same as clicking the
+default button. It defaults to 0 (the first button). escapeButtonNumber is the index of the Escape button; pressing
+Escape is the same as clicking this button. It defaults to -1;
+supply 0, 1 or 2 to make pressing Escape equivalent to clicking
+the relevant button.
+
     If parent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global
+modal dialog box. If parent is a widget, the message box
+becomes modal relative to parent.
+
     Note: If you do not specify an Escape button then if the Escape
+button is pressed then -1 will be returned.  It is suggested that
+you specify an Escape button to prevent this from happening.
+
     
    See also information(), warning(), and critical().
+
+
    void TQMessageBox::setButtonText ( int button, const TQString & text )
+
    
+Sets the text of the message box button button to text.
+Setting the text of a button that is not in the message box is
+silently ignored.
+
     
    See also buttonText().
+
+
    void TQMessageBox::setIcon ( Icon )
+
    Sets the message box's icon.
+See the "icon" property for details.
+
    void TQMessageBox::setIconPixmap ( const TQPixmap & )
+
    Sets the current icon.
+See the "iconPixmap" property for details.
+
    void TQMessageBox::setText ( const TQString & )
+
    Sets the message box text to be displayed.
+See the "text" property for details.
+
    void TQMessageBox::setTextFormat ( TextFormat )
+
    Sets the format of the text displayed by the message box.
+See the "textFormat" property for details.
+
    TQPixmap TQMessageBox::standardIcon ( Icon icon ) [static]
+
    
+Returns the pixmap used for a standard icon. This allows the
+pixmaps to be used in more complex message boxes. icon
+specifies the required icon, e.g. TQMessageBox::Question,
+TQMessageBox::Information, TQMessageBox::Warning or
+TQMessageBox::Critical.
+
+
    TQPixmap TQMessageBox::standardIcon ( Icon icon, GUIStyle style ) [static]
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Returns the pixmap used for a standard icon. This
+allows the pixmaps to be used in more complex message boxes.
+icon specifies the required icon, e.g. TQMessageBox::Information,
+TQMessageBox::Warning or TQMessageBox::Critical.
+
     style is unused.
+
+
    TQString TQMessageBox::text () const
+
    Returns the message box text to be displayed.
+See the "text" property for details.
+
    TextFormat TQMessageBox::textFormat () const
+
    Returns the format of the text displayed by the message box.
+See the "textFormat" property for details.
+
    int TQMessageBox::warning ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, int button0, int button1, int button2 = 0 ) [static]
+
    
+Opens a warning message box with the caption caption and the
+text text. The dialog may have up to three buttons. Each of the
+button parameters, button0, button1 and button2 may be
+set to one of the following values:
+
     
      
+
    •  TQMessageBox::NoButton
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Ok
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Cancel
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Yes
+
    •  TQMessageBox::No
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Abort
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Retry
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Ignore
+
    •  TQMessageBox::YesAll
+
    •  TQMessageBox::NoAll
+
    
+
     If you don't want all three buttons, set the last button, or last
+two buttons to TQMessageBox::NoButton.
+
     One button can be OR-ed with TQMessageBox::Default, and one
+button can be OR-ed with TQMessageBox::Escape.
+
     Returns the identity (TQMessageBox::Ok, or TQMessageBox::No, etc.)
+of the button that was clicked.
+
     If parent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global
+modal dialog box. If parent is a widget, the message box
+becomes modal relative to parent.
+
     
    See also information(), question(), and critical().
+
+
    Examples: chart/chartform.cpp, i18n/main.cpp, network/mail/smtp.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, and sound/sound.cpp.
+
    int TQMessageBox::warning ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, const TQString & button0Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button1Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button2Text = TQString::null, int defaultButtonNumber = 0, int escapeButtonNumber = -1 ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Displays a warning message box with a caption, a text, and 1, 2 or
+3 buttons. Returns the number of the button that was clicked (0,
+1, or 2).
+
     button0Text is the text of the first button, and is optional.
+If button0Text is not supplied, "OK" (translated) will be used.
+button1Text is the text of the second button, and is optional,
+and button2Text is the text of the third button, and is
+optional. defaultButtonNumber (0, 1 or 2) is the index of the
+default button; pressing Return or Enter is the same as clicking
+the default button. It defaults to 0 (the first button). escapeButtonNumber is the index of the Escape button; pressing
+Escape is the same as clicking this button. It defaults to -1;
+supply 0, 1, or 2 to make pressing Escape equivalent to clicking
+the relevant button.
+
     If parent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global
+modal dialog box. If parent is a widget, the message box
+becomes modal relative to parent.
+
     Note: If you do not specify an Escape button then if the Escape
+button is pressed then -1 will be returned.  It is suggested that
+you specify an Escape button to prevent this from happening.
+
     
    See also information(), question(), and critical().
+
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    Icon icon
    
+
    This property holds the message box's icon.
+
    The icon of the message box can be one of the following predefined
+icons:
+
      
+
    •  TQMessageBox::NoIcon
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Question
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Information
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Warning
+
    •  TQMessageBox::Critical
+
    
+
     The actual pixmap used for displaying the icon depends on the
+current GUI style. You can also set
+a custom pixmap icon using the TQMessageBox::iconPixmap
+property. The default icon is TQMessageBox::NoIcon.
+
     
    See also iconPixmap.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setIcon() and get this property's value with icon().
+
    TQPixmap iconPixmap
    
+
    This property holds the current icon.
+
    The icon currently used by the message box. Note that it's often
+hard to draw one pixmap that looks appropriate in both Motif and
+Windows GUI styles; you may want to draw two pixmaps.
+
     
    See also icon.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setIconPixmap() and get this property's value with iconPixmap().
+
    TQString text
    
+
    This property holds the message box text to be displayed.
+
    The text will be interpreted either as a plain text or as rich
+text, depending on the text format setting (TQMessageBox::textFormat). The default setting is AutoText, i.e.
+the message box will try to auto-detect the format of the text.
+
     The default value of this property is TQString::null.
+
     
    See also textFormat.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setText() and get this property's value with text().
+
    TextFormat textFormat
    
+
    This property holds the format of the text displayed by the message box.
+
    The current text format used by the message box. See the TQt::TextFormat enum for an explanation of the possible options.
+
     The default format is AutoText.
+
     
    See also text.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setTextFormat() and get this property's value with textFormat().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqmetaobject.html b/doc/html/ntqmetaobject.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b693c5c6a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqmetaobject.html
@@ -0,0 +1,187 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQMetaObject Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQMetaObject Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQMetaObject class contains meta information about TQt objects.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqmetaobject.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • const char * className () const
      • 
+
    • const char * superClassName () const
      • 
+
    • TQMetaObject * superClass () const
      • 
+
    • bool inherits ( const char * clname ) const
      • 
+
    • int numSlots ( bool super = FALSE ) const
      • 
+
    • int numSignals ( bool super = FALSE ) const
      • 
+
    • TQStrList slotNames ( bool super = FALSE ) const
      • 
+
    • TQStrList signalNames ( bool super = FALSE ) const
      • 
+
    • int numClassInfo ( bool super = FALSE ) const
      • 
+
    • const TQClassInfo * classInfo ( int index, bool super = FALSE ) const
      • 
+
    • const char * classInfo ( const char * name, bool super = FALSE ) const
      • 
+
    • const TQMetaProperty * property ( int index, bool super = FALSE ) const
      • 
+
    • int findProperty ( const char * name, bool super = FALSE ) const
      • 
+
    • TQStrList propertyNames ( bool super = FALSE ) const
      • 
+
    • int numProperties ( bool super = FALSE ) const
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQMetaObject class contains meta information about TQt objects.
+
     
+
     The Meta Object System in TQt is responsible for the signals and
+slots inter-object communication mechanism, runtime type
+information and the property system. All meta information in TQt is
+kept in a single instance of TQMetaObject per class.
+
     This class is not normally required for application programming.
+But if you write meta applications, such as scripting engines or
+GUI builders, you might find these functions useful:
+
    
+
     Classes may have a list of name-value pairs of class information.
+The number of pairs is returned by numClassInfo(), and values are
+returned by classInfo().
+
     
    See also moc (Meta Object Compiler) and Object Model.
+
+
     
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    const TQClassInfo * TQMetaObject::classInfo ( int index, bool super = FALSE ) const
+
    
+Returns the class information with index index or 0 if no such
+information exists.
+
     If super is TRUE,  inherited class information is included.
+
+
    const char * TQMetaObject::classInfo ( const char * name, bool super = FALSE ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the class information with name name or 0 if no such
+information exists.
+
     If super is TRUE, inherited class information is included.
+
+
    const char * TQMetaObject::className () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the class name.
+
     
    See also TQObject::className() and superClassName().
+
+
    int TQMetaObject::findProperty ( const char * name, bool super = FALSE ) const
+
    
+Returns the index for the property with name name or -1 if no
+such property exists.
+
     If super is TRUE, inherited properties are included.
+
     
    See also property() and propertyNames().
+
+
    bool TQMetaObject::inherits ( const char * clname ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this class inherits clname within the meta object inheritance chain; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     (A class is considered to inherit itself.)
+
+
    int TQMetaObject::numClassInfo ( bool super = FALSE ) const
+
    
+Returns the number of items of class information available for
+this class.
+
     If super is TRUE, inherited class information is included.
+
+
    int TQMetaObject::numProperties ( bool super = FALSE ) const
+
    
+Returns the number of properties for this class.
+
     If super is TRUE, inherited properties are included.
+
     
    See also propertyNames().
+
+
    int TQMetaObject::numSignals ( bool super = FALSE ) const
+
    
+Returns the number of signals for this class.
+
     If super is TRUE, inherited signals are included.
+
     
    See also signalNames().
+
+
    int TQMetaObject::numSlots ( bool super = FALSE ) const
+
    
+Returns the number of slots for this class.
+
     If super is TRUE, inherited slots are included.
+
     
    See also slotNames().
+
+
    const TQMetaProperty * TQMetaObject::property ( int index, bool super = FALSE ) const
+
    
+Returns the property meta data for the property at index index
+or 0 if no such property exists.
+
     If super is TRUE, inherited properties are included.
+
     
    See also propertyNames().
+
+
    TQStrList TQMetaObject::propertyNames ( bool super = FALSE ) const
+
    
+Returns a list with the names of all this class's properties.
+
     If super is TRUE, inherited properties are included.
+
     
    See also property().
+
+
    TQStrList TQMetaObject::signalNames ( bool super = FALSE ) const
+
    
+Returns a list with the names of all this class's signals.
+
     If super is TRUE, inherited signals are included.
+
+
    TQStrList TQMetaObject::slotNames ( bool super = FALSE ) const
+
    
+Returns a list with the names of all this class's slots.
+
     If super is TRUE, inherited slots are included.
+
     
    See also numSlots().
+
+
    TQMetaObject * TQMetaObject::superClass () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the meta object of the super class or 0 if there is no
+such object.
+
+
    const char * TQMetaObject::superClassName () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the class name of the superclass or 0 if there is no
+superclass in the TQObject hierachy.
+
     
    See also className().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqmotifplusstyle.html b/doc/html/ntqmotifplusstyle.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..437bf1bd8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqmotifplusstyle.html
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQMotifPlusStyle Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQMotifPlusStyle Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQMotifPlusStyle class provides a more sophisticated Motif-ish look and feel.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqmotifplusstyle.h>
+
    Inherits TQMotifStyle.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQMotifPlusStyle class provides a more sophisticated Motif-ish look and feel.
+
     
+
     This class implements a Motif-ish look and feel with the more
+sophisticated bevelling as used by the GIMP Toolkit (GTK+) for
+Unix/X11.
+
    See also Widget Appearance and Style.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQMotifPlusStyle::TQMotifPlusStyle ( bool hoveringHighlight = TRUE )
+
    
+Constructs a TQMotifPlusStyle
+
     If hoveringHighlight is TRUE (the default), then the style will
+not highlight push buttons, checkboxes, radiobuttons, comboboxes,
+scrollbars or sliders.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqmotifstyle.html b/doc/html/ntqmotifstyle.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..64f27b367
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqmotifstyle.html
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQMotifStyle Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQMotifStyle Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQMotifStyle class provides Motif look and feel.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqmotifstyle.h>
+
    Inherits TQCommonStyle.
+
    Inherited by TQCDEStyle, TQMotifPlusStyle, and TQSGIStyle.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQMotifStyle class provides Motif look and feel.
+
     
+
     This class implements the Motif look and feel. It closely
+resembles the original Motif look as defined by the Open Group,
+but with some minor improvements. The Motif style is TQt's default
+GUI style on UNIX platforms.
+
    See also Widget Appearance and Style.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQMotifStyle::TQMotifStyle ( bool useHighlightCols = FALSE )
+
    
+Constructs a TQMotifStyle.
+
     If useHighlightCols is FALSE (the default), the style will
+polish the application's color palette to emulate the Motif way of
+highlighting, which is a simple inversion between the base and the
+text color.
+
+
    void TQMotifStyle::setUseHighlightColors ( bool arg )
+
    
+If arg is FALSE, the style will polish the application's color
+palette to emulate the Motif way of highlighting, which is a
+simple inversion between the base and the text color.
+
     The effect will show up the next time an application palette is
+set via TQApplication::setPalette(). The current color palette of
+the application remains unchanged.
+
     
    See also TQStyle::polish().
+
+
    bool TQMotifStyle::useHighlightColors () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the style treats the highlight colors of the
+palette in a Motif-like manner, which is a simple inversion
+between the base and the text color; otherwise returns FALSE. The
+default is FALSE.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqmovie.html b/doc/html/ntqmovie.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9a02f4cb9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqmovie.html
@@ -0,0 +1,388 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQMovie Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQMovie Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQMovie class provides incremental loading of animations or images, signalling as it progresses.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqmovie.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQMovie class provides incremental loading of animations or images, signalling as it progresses.
+
     
+
+
+
+
     The simplest way to display a TQMovie is to use a TQLabel and
+TQLabel::setMovie().
+
     A TQMovie provides a TQPixmap as the framePixmap(); connections can
+be made via connectResize() and connectUpdate() to receive
+notification of size and pixmap changes. All decoding is driven
+by the normal event-processing mechanisms.
+
     The movie begins playing as soon as the TQMovie is created
+(actually, once control returns to the event loop). When the last
+frame in the movie has been played, it may loop back to the start
+if such looping is defined in the input source.
+
     TQMovie objects are explicitly shared. This means that a TQMovie
+copied from another TQMovie will be displaying the same frame at
+all times. If one shared movie pauses, all pause. To make independent movies, they must be constructed separately.
+
     The set of data formats supported by TQMovie is determined by the
+decoder factories that have been installed; the format of the
+input is determined as the input is decoded.
+
     The supported formats are MNG (if TQt is configured with MNG
+support enabled) and GIF (if TQt is configured with GIF support
+enabled, see ntqgif.h).
+
     If TQt is configured to support GIF reading, we are required to
+state that "The Graphics Interchange Format(c) is the Copyright
+property of CompuServe Incorporated. GIF(sm) is a Service Mark
+property of CompuServe Incorporated.
+
     Warning: If you are in a country that recognizes software patents
+and in which Unisys holds a patent on LZW compression and/or
+decompression and you want to use GIF, Unisys may require you to
+license that technology. Such countries include Canada, Japan,
+the USA, France, Germany, Italy and the UK.
+
     GIF support may be removed completely in a future version of TQt.
+We recommend using the MNG or PNG format.
+
     
    TQMovie
     
+
     
    See also TQLabel::setMovie(), Graphics Classes, Image Processing Classes, and Multimedia Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQMovie::Status
    
+
+
      
+
    • TQMovie::SourceEmpty
+
    • TQMovie::UnrecognizedFormat
+
    • TQMovie::Paused
+
    • TQMovie::EndOfFrame
+
    • TQMovie::EndOfLoop
+
    • TQMovie::EndOfMovie
+
    • TQMovie::SpeedChanged
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQMovie::TQMovie ()
+
    
+Constructs a null TQMovie. The only interesting thing to do with
+such a movie is to assign another movie to it.
+
     
    See also isNull().
+
+
    TQMovie::TQMovie ( int bufsize )
+
    
+Constructs a TQMovie with an external data source. You should later
+call pushData() to send incoming animation data to the movie.
+
     The bufsize argument sets the maximum amount of data the movie
+will transfer from the data source per event loop. The lower this
+value, the better interleaved the movie playback will be with
+other event processing, but the slower the overall processing will
+be.
+
     
    See also pushData().
+
+
    TQMovie::TQMovie ( TQDataSource * src, int bufsize = 1024 )
+
    
+Constructs a TQMovie that reads an image sequence from the given
+data source, src. The source must be allocated dynamically,
+because TQMovie will take ownership of it and will destroy it when
+the movie is destroyed. The movie starts playing as soon as event
+processing continues.
+
     The bufsize argument sets the maximum amount of data the movie
+will transfer from the data source per event loop. The lower this
+value, the better interleaved the movie playback will be with
+other event processing, but the slower the overall processing will
+be.
+
+
    TQMovie::TQMovie ( const TQString & fileName, int bufsize = 1024 )
+
    
+Constructs a TQMovie that reads an image sequence from the file, fileName.
+
     The bufsize argument sets the maximum amount of data the movie
+will transfer from the data source per event loop. The lower this
+value, the better interleaved the movie playback will be with
+other event processing, but the slower the overall processing will
+be.
+
+
    TQMovie::TQMovie ( TQByteArray data, int bufsize = 1024 )
+
    
+Constructs a TQMovie that reads an image sequence from the byte
+array, data.
+
     The bufsize argument sets the maximum amount of data the movie
+will transfer from the data source per event loop. The lower this
+value, the better interleaved the movie playback will be with
+other event processing, but the slower the overall processing will
+be.
+
+
    TQMovie::TQMovie ( const TQMovie & movie )
+
    
+Constructs a movie that uses the same data as movie movie.
+TQMovies use explicit sharing, so operations on the copy will
+affect both.
+
+
    TQMovie::~TQMovie ()
+
    
+Destroys the TQMovie. If this is the last reference to the data of
+the movie, the data is deallocated.
+
+
    const TQColor & TQMovie::backgroundColor () const
+
    
+Returns the background color of the movie set by
+setBackgroundColor().
+
+
    void TQMovie::connectResize ( TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
+
    
+Connects the receiver's member of type void member(const TQSize&) so that it is signalled when the movie changes size.
+
     Note that due to the explicit sharing of TQMovie objects, these
+connections persist until they are explicitly disconnected with
+disconnectResize() or until every shared copy of the movie is
+deleted.
+
+
    Example: movies/main.cpp.
+
    void TQMovie::connectStatus ( TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
+
    
+Connects the receiver's member, of type void member(int) so that it is signalled when the movie changes
+status. The status codes are negative for errors and positive for
+information.
+
     
    
+
     Status Code Meaning
+
     TQMovie::SourceEmpty
+signalled if the input cannot be read.
+
     TQMovie::UnrecognizedFormat
+signalled if the input data is unrecognized.
+
     TQMovie::Paused
+signalled when the movie is paused by a call to paused()
+or by after stepping pauses.
+
     TQMovie::EndOfFrame
+signalled at end-of-frame after any update and Paused signals.
+
     TQMovie::EndOfLoop
+signalled at end-of-loop, after any update signals,
+EndOfFrame - but before EndOfMovie.
+
     TQMovie::EndOfMovie
+signalled when the movie completes and is not about to loop.
+
    
+
     More status messages may be added in the future, so a general test
+for errors would test for negative.
+
     Note that due to the explicit sharing of TQMovie objects, these
+connections persist until they are explicitly disconnected with
+disconnectStatus() or until every shared copy of the movie is
+deleted.
+
+
    Example: movies/main.cpp.
+
    void TQMovie::connectUpdate ( TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
+
    
+Connects the receiver's member of type void member(const TQRect&) so that it is signalled when an area of the framePixmap()
+has changed since the previous frame.
+
     Note that due to the explicit sharing of TQMovie objects, these
+connections persist until they are explicitly disconnected with
+disconnectUpdate() or until every shared copy of the movie is
+deleted.
+
+
    Example: movies/main.cpp.
+
    void TQMovie::disconnectResize ( TQObject * receiver, const char * member = 0 )
+
    
+Disconnects the receiver's member (or all members if member is zero) that were previously connected by connectResize().
+
+
    void TQMovie::disconnectStatus ( TQObject * receiver, const char * member = 0 )
+
    
+Disconnects the receiver's member (or all members if member is zero) that were previously connected by connectStatus().
+
+
    void TQMovie::disconnectUpdate ( TQObject * receiver, const char * member = 0 )
+
    
+Disconnects the receiver's member (or all members if \q
+member is zero) that were previously connected by connectUpdate().
+
+
    bool TQMovie::finished () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the image is no longer playing: this happens when
+all loops of all frames are complete; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    Example: movies/main.cpp.
+
    const TQImage & TQMovie::frameImage () const
+
    
+Returns the current frame of the movie, as a TQImage. It is not
+generally useful to keep a copy of this image. Also note that you
+must not call this function if the movie is finished(), since by
+then the image will not be available.
+
     
    See also framePixmap().
+
+
    int TQMovie::frameNumber () const
+
    
+Returns the number of times EndOfFrame has been emitted since the
+start of the current loop of the movie. Thus, before any
+EndOfFrame has been emitted the value will be 0; within slots
+processing the first signal, frameNumber() will be 1, and so on.
+
+
    const TQPixmap & TQMovie::framePixmap () const
+
    
+Returns the current frame of the movie, as a TQPixmap. It is not
+generally useful to keep a copy of this pixmap. It is better to
+keep a copy of the TQMovie and get the framePixmap() only when
+needed for drawing.
+
     
    See also frameImage().
+
+
    Example: movies/main.cpp.
+
    const TQRect & TQMovie::getValidRect () const
+
    
+Returns the area of the pixmap for which pixels have been
+generated.
+
+
    bool TQMovie::isNull () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the movie is null; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    TQMovie & TQMovie::operator= ( const TQMovie & movie )
+
    
+Makes this movie use the same data as movie movie. TQMovies use
+explicit sharing.
+
+
    void TQMovie::pause ()
+
    
+Pauses the progress of the animation.
+
     
    See also unpause().
+
+
    Example: movies/main.cpp.
+
    bool TQMovie::paused () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the image is paused; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    Example: movies/main.cpp.
+
    void TQMovie::pushData ( const uchar * data, int length )
+
    
+Pushes length bytes from data into the movie. length must
+be no more than the amount returned by pushSpace() since the
+previous call to pushData().
+
+
    int TQMovie::pushSpace () const
+
    
+Returns the maximum amount of data that can currently be pushed
+into the movie by a call to pushData(). This is affected by the
+initial buffer size, but varies as the movie plays and data is
+consumed.
+
+
    void TQMovie::restart ()
+
    
+Rewinds the movie to the beginning. If the movie has not been
+paused, it begins playing again.
+
+
    Example: movies/main.cpp.
+
    bool TQMovie::running () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the image is not single-stepping, not paused, and
+not finished; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    void TQMovie::setBackgroundColor ( const TQColor & c )
+
    
+Sets the background color of the pixmap to c. If the background
+color isValid(), the pixmap will never have a mask because the
+background color will be used in transparent regions of the image.
+
     
    See also backgroundColor().
+
+
    void TQMovie::setSpeed ( int percent )
+
    
+Sets the movie's play speed as a percentage, to percent. This
+is a percentage of the speed dictated by the input data format.
+The default is 100 percent.
+
+
    int TQMovie::speed () const
+
    
+Returns the movie's play speed as a percentage. The default is 100
+percent.
+
     
    See also setSpeed().
+
+
    void TQMovie::step ()
+
    
+Steps forward 1 frame and then pauses.
+
+
    Example: movies/main.cpp.
+
    void TQMovie::step ( int steps )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Steps forward, showing steps frames, and then pauses.
+
+
    int TQMovie::steps () const
+
    
+Returns the number of steps remaining after a call to step(). If
+the movie is paused, steps() returns 0. If it's running normally
+or is finished, steps() returns a negative number.
+
+
    Example: movies/main.cpp.
+
    void TQMovie::unpause ()
+
    
+Unpauses the progress of the animation.
+
     
    See also pause().
+
+
    Example: movies/main.cpp.
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqmultilineedit.html b/doc/html/ntqmultilineedit.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4ea029778
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqmultilineedit.html
@@ -0,0 +1,343 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQMultiLineEdit Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQMultiLineEdit Class Reference
    [obsolete]
    
+
+
    The TQMultiLineEdit widget is a simple editor for inputting text.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqmultilineedit.h>
+
    Inherits TQTextEdit.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQMultiLineEdit ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQString textLine ( int line ) const
      • 
+
    • int numLines () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void insertLine ( const TQString & txt, int line = -1 )
      • 
+
    • virtual void insertAt ( const TQString & s, int line, int col, bool mark )
      • 
+
    • virtual void removeLine ( int paragraph )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setCursorPosition ( int line, int col, bool mark )
      • 
+
    • bool atBeginning () const
      • 
+
    • bool atEnd () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setAlignment ( int flags )
      • 
+
    • int alignment () const
      • 
+
    • void setEdited ( bool )
      • 
+
    • bool edited () const
      • 
+
    • bool hasMarkedText () const
      • 
+
    • TQString markedText () const
      • 
+
    • void cursorWordForward ( bool mark )
      • 
+
    • void cursorWordBackward ( bool mark )
      • 
+
    • bool autoUpdate () const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • virtual void setAutoUpdate ( bool )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • int totalWidth () const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • int totalHeight () const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • int maxLines () const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void setMaxLines ( int )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    
+
    Public Slots
    
+
      
+
    • void deselect ()  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • Alignment alignment - the editor's paragraph alignment
      • 
+
    • bool atBeginning - whether the cursor is placed at the beginning of the text  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool atEnd - whether the cursor is placed at the end of the text  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool edited - whether the document has been edited by the user
      • 
+
    • int numLines - the number of paragraphs in the editor  (read only)
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQPoint cursorPoint () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void insertAndMark ( const TQString & str, bool mark )
      • 
+
    • virtual void newLine ()
      • 
+
    • virtual void killLine ()
      • 
+
    • virtual void pageUp ( bool mark = FALSE )
      • 
+
    • virtual void pageDown ( bool mark = FALSE )
      • 
+
    • virtual void cursorLeft ( bool mark = FALSE, bool wrap = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • virtual void cursorRight ( bool mark = FALSE, bool wrap = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • virtual void cursorUp ( bool mark = FALSE )
      • 
+
    • virtual void cursorDown ( bool mark = FALSE )
      • 
+
    • virtual void backspace ()
      • 
+
    • virtual void home ( bool mark = FALSE )
      • 
+
    • virtual void end ( bool mark = FALSE )
      • 
+
    • bool getMarkedRegion ( int * line1, int * col1, int * line2, int * col2 ) const
      • 
+
    • int lineLength ( int row ) const
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+This class is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     The TQMultiLineEdit widget is a simple editor for inputting text.
+
     
+
     The TQMultiLineEdit was a simple editor widget in former TQt versions.  TQt
+3.0 includes a new richtext engine which obsoletes TQMultiLineEdit. It is
+still included for compatibility reasons. It is now a subclass of
+TQTextEdit, and provides enough of the old TQMultiLineEdit API to keep old
+applications working.
+
     If you implement something new with TQMultiLineEdit, we suggest using
+TQTextEdit instead and call TQTextEdit::setTextFormat(TQt::PlainText).
+
     Although most of the old TQMultiLineEdit API is still available, there is
+a few difference. The old TQMultiLineEdit operated on lines, not on
+paragraphs.  As lines change all the time during wordwrap, the new
+richtext engine uses paragraphs as basic elements in the data structure.
+All functions (numLines(), textLine(), etc.) that operated on lines, now
+operate on paragraphs. Further, getString() has been removed completely.
+It revealed too much of the internal data structure.
+
     Applications which made normal and reasonable use of TQMultiLineEdit
+should still work without problems. Some odd usage will require some
+porting. In these cases, it may be better to use TQTextEdit now.
+
      
+
     
    See also TQTextEdit and Advanced Widgets.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQMultiLineEdit::TQMultiLineEdit ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a new, empty, TQMultiLineEdit with parent parent called
+name.
+
+
    int TQMultiLineEdit::alignment () const
+
    Returns the editor's paragraph alignment.
+See the "alignment" property for details.
+
    bool TQMultiLineEdit::atBeginning () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the cursor is placed at the beginning of the text; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "atBeginning" property for details.
+
    bool TQMultiLineEdit::atEnd () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the cursor is placed at the end of the text; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "atEnd" property for details.
+
    bool TQMultiLineEdit::autoUpdate () const
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
    void TQMultiLineEdit::backspace () [virtual protected]
+
      Deletes the character on the left side of the text cursor and
+moves the cursor one position to the left. If a text has been selected
+by the user (e.g. by clicking and dragging) the cursor is put at the
+beginning of the selected text and the selected text is removed.  
+del()
+
+
    void TQMultiLineEdit::cursorDown ( bool mark = FALSE ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Moves the cursor one line down.  If mark is TRUE, the text
+is selected.
+
    See also cursorUp(), cursorLeft(), and cursorRight().
+
+
    void TQMultiLineEdit::cursorLeft ( bool mark = FALSE, bool wrap = TRUE ) [virtual protected]
+
      Moves the cursor one character to the left. If mark is TRUE,
+the text is selected.
+The wrap parameter is currently ignored.
+
     
    See also cursorRight(), cursorUp(), and cursorDown().
+
+
    TQPoint TQMultiLineEdit::cursorPoint () const [protected]
+
      Returns the top center point where the cursor is drawn.
+
+
    void TQMultiLineEdit::cursorRight ( bool mark = FALSE, bool wrap = TRUE ) [virtual protected]
+
      Moves the cursor one character to the right.  If mark is TRUE,
+the text is selected.
+The wrap parameter is currently ignored.
+
     
    See also cursorLeft(), cursorUp(), and cursorDown().
+
+
    void TQMultiLineEdit::cursorUp ( bool mark = FALSE ) [virtual protected]
+
      Moves the cursor up one line.  If mark is TRUE, the text is
+selected.
+
     
    See also cursorDown(), cursorLeft(), and cursorRight().
+
+
    void TQMultiLineEdit::cursorWordBackward ( bool mark )
+
      Moves the cursor one word to the left.  If mark is TRUE, the
+text is selected.
+
     
    See also cursorWordForward().
+
+
    void TQMultiLineEdit::cursorWordForward ( bool mark )
+
      Moves the cursor one word to the right.  If mark is TRUE, the text
+is selected.
+
     
    See also cursorWordBackward().
+
+
    void TQMultiLineEdit::deselect () [slot]
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
    bool TQMultiLineEdit::edited () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the document has been edited by the user; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "edited" property for details.
+
    void TQMultiLineEdit::end ( bool mark = FALSE ) [virtual protected]
+
      Moves the text cursor to the right end of the line. If mark is
+TRUE, text is selected toward the last position.  If it is FALSE and the
+cursor is moved, all selected text is unselected.
+
     
    See also home().
+
+
    bool TQMultiLineEdit::getMarkedRegion ( int * line1, int * col1, int * line2, int * col2 ) const [protected]
+
    
+If there is selected text, sets line1, col1, line2 and col2
+to the start and end of the selected region and returns TRUE. Returns
+FALSE if there is no selected text.
+
+
    bool TQMultiLineEdit::hasMarkedText () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if there is selected text.
+
+
    void TQMultiLineEdit::home ( bool mark = FALSE ) [virtual protected]
+
      Moves the text cursor to the left end of the line. If mark is
+TRUE, text is selected toward the first position. If it is FALSE and the
+cursor is moved, all selected text is unselected.
+
     
    See also end().
+
+
    void TQMultiLineEdit::insertAndMark ( const TQString & str, bool mark ) [virtual protected]
+
      Inserts str at the current cursor position and selects the
+text if mark is TRUE.
+
+
    void TQMultiLineEdit::insertAt ( const TQString & s, int line, int col, bool mark ) [virtual]
+
      Inserts string s at paragraph number line, after character
+number col in the paragraph.  If s contains newline
+characters, new lines are inserted.
+If mark is TRUE the inserted string will be selected.
+
     The cursor position is adjusted.
+
+
    void TQMultiLineEdit::insertLine ( const TQString & txt, int line = -1 ) [virtual]
+
      Inserts txt at paragraph number line. If line is less
+than zero, or larger than the number of paragraphs, the new text is
+put at the end.  If txt contains newline characters, several
+paragraphs are inserted.
+
     The cursor position is not changed.
+
+
    void TQMultiLineEdit::killLine () [virtual protected]
+
      Deletes text from the current cursor position to the end of the
+line. (Note that this function still operates on lines, not paragraphs.)
+
+
    int TQMultiLineEdit::lineLength ( int row ) const [protected]
+
      Returns the number of characters at paragraph number row. If
+row is out of range, -1 is returned.
+
+
    TQString TQMultiLineEdit::markedText () const
+
    
+Returns a copy of the selected text.
+
+
    int TQMultiLineEdit::maxLines () const
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
    void TQMultiLineEdit::newLine () [virtual protected]
+
      Splits the paragraph at the current cursor position.
+
+
    int TQMultiLineEdit::numLines () const
+
    Returns the number of paragraphs in the editor.
+See the "numLines" property for details.
+
    void TQMultiLineEdit::pageDown ( bool mark = FALSE ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Moves the cursor one page down.  If mark is TRUE, the text
+is selected.
+
+
    void TQMultiLineEdit::pageUp ( bool mark = FALSE ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Moves the cursor one page up.  If mark is TRUE, the text
+is selected.
+
+
    void TQMultiLineEdit::removeLine ( int paragraph ) [virtual]
+
      Deletes the paragraph at paragraph number paragraph. If paragraph is less than zero or larger than the number of paragraphs,
+nothing is deleted.
+
+
    void TQMultiLineEdit::setAlignment ( int flags ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the editor's paragraph alignment to flags.
+See the "alignment" property for details.
+
    Reimplemented from TQTextEdit.
+
    void TQMultiLineEdit::setAutoUpdate ( bool ) [virtual]
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
    Example: qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
+
    void TQMultiLineEdit::setCursorPosition ( int line, int col, bool mark ) [virtual]
+
      Sets the cursor position to character number col in paragraph
+number line.  The parameters are adjusted to lie within the legal
+range.
+
     If mark is FALSE, the selection is cleared. otherwise it is extended.
+
     
+
    void TQMultiLineEdit::setEdited ( bool )
+
    Sets whether the document has been edited by the user.
+See the "edited" property for details.
+
    void TQMultiLineEdit::setMaxLines ( int )
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
    TQString TQMultiLineEdit::textLine ( int line ) const
+
      Returns the text at line number line (possibly the empty
+string), or a null string if line is invalid.
+
+
    Example: qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
+
    int TQMultiLineEdit::totalHeight () const
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
    int TQMultiLineEdit::totalWidth () const
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    Alignment alignment
      
    This property holds the editor's paragraph alignment.
+
    Sets the alignment to flag, which must be AlignLeft, AlignHCenter or AlignRight.
+
     If flag is an illegal flag nothing happens.
+
     
    See also TQt::AlignmentFlags.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setAlignment() and get this property's value with alignment().
+
    bool atBeginning
     
    This property holds whether the cursor is placed at the beginning of the text.
+
    Get this property's value with atBeginning().
+
    See also atEnd.
+
+
    bool atEnd
     
    This property holds whether the cursor is placed at the end of the text.
+
    Get this property's value with atEnd().
+
    See also atBeginning.
+
+
    bool edited
      
    This property holds whether the document has been edited by the user.
+
    This is the same as TQTextEdit's "modifed" property.
+
     
    See also TQTextEdit::modified.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setEdited() and get this property's value with edited().
+
    int numLines
     
    This property holds the number of paragraphs in the editor.
+
    The count includes any empty paragraph at top and bottom, so for an
+empty editor this method returns 1.
+
+
    Get this property's value with numLines().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqmutex.html b/doc/html/ntqmutex.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a3fa2426f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqmutex.html
@@ -0,0 +1,195 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQMutex Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQMutex Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQMutex class provides access serialization between threads.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are thread-safe when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqmutex.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
+The TQMutex class provides access serialization between threads.
+
     
+
+
     The purpose of a TQMutex is to protect an object, data structure or
+section of code so that only one thread can access it at a time
+(This is similar to the Java synchronized keyword). For
+example, say there is a method which prints a message to the user
+on two lines:
+
     
    +    int number = 6;
+
+    void method1()
+    {
+        number *= 5;
+        number /= 4;
+    }
+
+    void method2()
+    {
+        number *= 3;
+        number /= 2;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     If these two methods are called in succession, the following happens:
+
     
    +    // method1()
+    number *= 5;        // number is now 30
+    number /= 4;        // number is now 7
+
+    // method2()
+    number *= 3;        // nubmer is now 21
+    number /= 2;        // number is now 10
+    
    
+ 
+
     If these two methods are called simultaneously from two threads then the
+following sequence could result:
+
     
    +    // Thread 1 calls method1()
+    number *= 5;        // number is now 30
+
+    // Thread 2 calls method2().
+    //
+    // Most likely Thread 1 has been put to sleep by the operating
+    // system to allow Thread 2 to run.
+    number *= 3;        // number is now 90
+    number /= 2;        // number is now 45
+
+    // Thread 1 finishes executing.
+    number /= 4;        // number is now 11, instead of 10
+    
    
+ 
+
     If we add a mutex, we should get the result we want:
+
     
    +    TQMutex mutex;
+    int number = 6;
+
+    void method1()
+    {
+        mutex.lock();
+        number *= 5;
+        number /= 4;
+        mutex.unlock();
+    }
+
+    void method2()
+    {
+        mutex.lock();
+        number *= 3;
+        number /= 2;
+        mutex.unlock();
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     Then only one thread can modify number at any given time and
+the result is correct. This is a trivial example, of course, but
+applies to any other case where things need to happen in a
+particular sequence.
+
     When you call lock() in a thread, other threads that try to call
+lock() in the same place will block until the thread that got the
+lock calls unlock(). A non-blocking alternative to lock() is
+tryLock().
+
    See also Environment Classes and Threading.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQMutex::TQMutex ( bool recursive = FALSE )
+
    
+Constructs a new mutex. The mutex is created in an unlocked state.
+A recursive mutex is created if recursive is TRUE; a normal
+mutex is created if recursive is FALSE (the default). With a
+recursive mutex, a thread can lock the same mutex multiple times
+and it will not be unlocked until a corresponding number of
+unlock() calls have been made.
+
+
    TQMutex::~TQMutex () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the mutex.
+
     Warning: If you destroy a mutex that still holds a lock the
+resultant behavior is undefined.
+
+
    void TQMutex::lock ()
+
    
+Attempt to lock the mutex. If another thread has locked the mutex
+then this call will block until that thread has unlocked it.
+
     
    See also unlock() and locked().
+
+
    bool TQMutex::locked ()
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the mutex is locked by another thread; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     Warning: Due to differing implementations of recursive mutexes on
+various platforms, calling this function from the same thread that
+previously locked the mutex will return undefined results.
+
     
    See also lock() and unlock().
+
+
    bool TQMutex::tryLock ()
+
    
+Attempt to lock the mutex. If the lock was obtained, this function
+returns TRUE. If another thread has locked the mutex, this
+function returns FALSE, instead of waiting for the mutex to become
+available, i.e. it does not block.
+
     If the lock was obtained, the mutex must be unlocked with unlock()
+before another thread can successfully lock it.
+
     
    See also lock(), unlock(), and locked().
+
+
    void TQMutex::unlock ()
+
    
+Unlocks the mutex. Attempting to unlock a mutex in a different
+thread to the one that locked it results in an error. Unlocking a
+mutex that is not locked results in undefined behaviour (varies
+between different Operating Systems' thread implementations).
+
     
    See also lock() and locked().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqnetworkprotocol.html b/doc/html/ntqnetworkprotocol.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..396100712
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqnetworkprotocol.html
@@ -0,0 +1,532 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQNetworkProtocol Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQNetworkProtocol Class Reference
    [network module]
    
+
+
    The TQNetworkProtocol class provides a common API for network protocols.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqnetworkprotocol.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject.
+
    Inherited by TQFtp, TQHttp, and TQLocalFs.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • enum State { StWaiting = 0, StInProgress, StDone, StFailed, StStopped }
      • 
+
    • enum Operation { OpListChildren = 1, OpMkDir = 2, OpMkdir = OpMkDir, OpRemove = 4, OpRename = 8, OpGet = 32, OpPut = 64 }
      • 
+
    • enum ConnectionState { ConHostFound, ConConnected, ConClosed }
      • 
+
    • enum Error { NoError = 0, ErrValid, ErrUnknownProtocol, ErrUnsupported, ErrParse, ErrLoginIncorrect, ErrHostNotFound, ErrListChildren, ErrListChlidren = ErrListChildren, ErrMkDir, ErrMkdir = ErrMkDir, ErrRemove, ErrRename, ErrGet, ErrPut, ErrFileNotExisting, ErrPermissionDenied }
      • 
+
    • TQNetworkProtocol ()
      • 
+
    • virtual ~TQNetworkProtocol ()
      • 
+
    • virtual void setUrl ( TQUrlOperator * u )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setAutoDelete ( bool b, int i = 10000 )
      • 
+
    • bool autoDelete () const
      • 
+
    • virtual int supportedOperations () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void addOperation ( TQNetworkOperation * op )
      • 
+
    • TQUrlOperator * url () const
      • 
+
    • TQNetworkOperation * operationInProgress () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void clearOperationQueue ()
      • 
+
    • virtual void stop ()
      • 
+
    
+
    Signals
    
+
      
+
    • void data ( const TQByteArray & data, TQNetworkOperation * op )
      • 
+
    • void connectionStateChanged ( int state, const TQString & data )
      • 
+
    • void finished ( TQNetworkOperation * op )
      • 
+
    • void start ( TQNetworkOperation * op )
      • 
+
    • void newChildren ( const TQValueList<TQUrlInfo> & i, TQNetworkOperation * op )
      • 
+
    • void newChild ( const TQUrlInfo & i, TQNetworkOperation * op )
      • 
+
    • void createdDirectory ( const TQUrlInfo & i, TQNetworkOperation * op )
      • 
+
    • void removed ( TQNetworkOperation * op )
      • 
+
    • void itemChanged ( TQNetworkOperation * op )
      • 
+
    • void dataTransferProgress ( int bytesDone, int bytesTotal, TQNetworkOperation * op )
      • 
+
    
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQNetworkProtocol class provides a common API for network protocols.
+
+
     
+
+
+
+
     This is a base class which should be used for network protocols
+implementations that can then be used in TQt (e.g. in the file
+dialog) together with the TQUrlOperator.
+
     The easiest way to implement a new network protocol is to
+reimplement the operation*() methods, e.g. operationGet(), etc.
+Only the supported operations should be reimplemented. To specify
+which operations are supported, also reimplement
+supportedOperations() and return an int that is OR'd together
+using the supported operations from the TQNetworkProtocol::Operation enum.
+
     When you implement a network protocol this way, it is important to
+emit the correct signals. Also, always emit the finished() signal
+when an operation is done (on success and on failure). TQt
+relies on correctly emitted finished() signals.
+
     For a detailed description of the TQt Network Architecture and how
+to implement and use network protocols in TQt, see the TQt Network Documentation.
+
    See also Input/Output and Networking.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQNetworkProtocol::ConnectionState
    
+
+
     When the connection state of a network protocol changes it emits
+the signal connectionStateChanged(). The first argument is one of
+the following values:
+
      
+
    • TQNetworkProtocol::ConHostFound - Host has been found.
+
    • TQNetworkProtocol::ConConnected - Connection to the host has been established.
+
    • TQNetworkProtocol::ConClosed - Connection has been closed.
+
    
+
    TQNetworkProtocol::Error
    
+
+
     When an operation fails (finishes unsuccessfully), the
+TQNetworkOperation of the operation returns an error code which has
+one of the following values:
+
      
+
    • TQNetworkProtocol::NoError - No error occurred.
+
    • TQNetworkProtocol::ErrValid - The URL you are operating on is not valid.
+
    • TQNetworkProtocol::ErrUnknownProtocol - There is no protocol implementation
+available for the protocol of the URL you are operating on (e.g.
+if the protocol is http and no http implementation has been
+registered).
+
    • TQNetworkProtocol::ErrUnsupported - The operation is not supported by the
+protocol.
+
    • TQNetworkProtocol::ErrParse - The URL could not be parsed correctly.
+
    • TQNetworkProtocol::ErrLoginIncorrect - You needed to login but the username
+or password is wrong.
+
    • TQNetworkProtocol::ErrHostNotFound - The specified host (in the URL) couldn't
+be found.
+
    • TQNetworkProtocol::ErrListChildren - An error occurred while listing the
+children (files).
+
    • TQNetworkProtocol::ErrMkDir - An error occurred when creating a directory.
+
    • TQNetworkProtocol::ErrRemove - An error occurred when removing a child (file).
+
    • TQNetworkProtocol::ErrRename - An error occurred when renaming a child (file).
+
    • TQNetworkProtocol::ErrGet - An error occurred while getting (retrieving) data.
+
    • TQNetworkProtocol::ErrPut - An error occurred while putting (uploading) data.
+
    • TQNetworkProtocol::ErrFileNotExisting - A file which is needed by the operation
+doesn't exist.
+
    • TQNetworkProtocol::ErrPermissionDenied - Permission for doing the operation has
+been denied.
+
     You should also use these error codes when implementing custom
+network protocols. If this is not possible, you can define your own
+error codes by using integer values that don't conflict with any
+of these values.
+
+
    TQNetworkProtocol::Operation
    
+
+
     This enum lists the possible operations that a network protocol
+can support. supportedOperations() returns an int of these that is
+OR'd together. Also, the type() of a TQNetworkOperation is always
+one of these values.
+
      
+
    • TQNetworkProtocol::OpListChildren - List the children of a URL, e.g. of a directory.
+
    • TQNetworkProtocol::OpMkDir - Create a directory.
+
    • TQNetworkProtocol::OpRemove - Remove a child (e.g. a file).
+
    • TQNetworkProtocol::OpRename - Rename a child (e.g. a file).
+
    • TQNetworkProtocol::OpGet - Get data from a location.
+
    • TQNetworkProtocol::OpPut - Put data to a location.
+
    
+
    TQNetworkProtocol::State
    
+
+
     This enum contains the state that a TQNetworkOperation can have.
+
      
+
    • TQNetworkProtocol::StWaiting - The operation is in the TQNetworkProtocol's queue
+waiting to be prcessed.
+
    • TQNetworkProtocol::StInProgress - The operation is being processed.
+
    • TQNetworkProtocol::StDone - The operation has been processed succesfully.
+
    • TQNetworkProtocol::StFailed - The operation has been processed but an error occurred.
+
    • TQNetworkProtocol::StStopped - The operation has been processed but has been
+stopped before it finished, and is waiting to be processed.
+
     
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQNetworkProtocol::TQNetworkProtocol ()
+
    
+Constructor of the network protocol base class. Does some
+initialization and connecting of signals and slots.
+
+
    TQNetworkProtocol::~TQNetworkProtocol () [virtual]
+
    
+Destructor.
+
+
    void TQNetworkProtocol::addOperation ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [virtual]
+
    
+Adds the operation op to the operation queue. The operation
+will be processed as soon as possible. This method returns
+immediately.
+
+
    bool TQNetworkProtocol::autoDelete () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if auto-deleting is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also TQNetworkProtocol::setAutoDelete().
+
+
    bool TQNetworkProtocol::checkConnection ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+For processing operations the network protocol base class calls
+this method quite often. This should be reimplemented by new
+network protocols. It should return TRUE if the connection is OK
+(open); otherwise it should return FALSE. If the connection is not
+open the protocol should open it.
+
     If the connection can't be opened (e.g. because you already tried
+but the host couldn't be found), set the state of op to
+TQNetworkProtocol::StFailed and emit the finished() signal with
+this TQNetworkOperation as argument.
+
     op is the operation that needs an open connection.
+
+
    Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    void TQNetworkProtocol::clearOperationQueue () [virtual]
+
    
+Clears the operation queue.
+
+
    void TQNetworkProtocol::connectionStateChanged ( int state, const TQString & data ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the state of the connection of the
+network protocol is changed. state describes the new state,
+which is one of, ConHostFound, ConConnected or ConClosed.
+data is a message text.
+
+
    void TQNetworkProtocol::createdDirectory ( const TQUrlInfo & i, TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when mkdir() has been succesful and the
+directory has been created. i holds the information about the
+new directory. op is the pointer to the operation object which
+contains all the information about the operation, including the
+state, etc. Using op->arg( 0 ), you can get the file name of the
+new directory.
+
     When a protocol emits this signal, TQNetworkProtocol is smart
+enough to let the TQUrlOperator, which is used by the network
+protocol, emit its corresponding signal.
+
+
    void TQNetworkProtocol::data ( const TQByteArray & data, TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when new data has been received after
+calling get() or put(). op holds the name of the file from
+which data is retrieved or uploaded in its first argument, and the
+(raw) data in its second argument. You can get them with
+op->arg( 0 ) and op->rawArg( 1 ). op is the pointer to the
+operation object, which contains all the information about the
+operation, including the state, etc.
+
     When a protocol emits this signal, TQNetworkProtocol is smart
+enough to let the TQUrlOperator (which is used by the network
+protocol) emit its corresponding signal.
+
+
    void TQNetworkProtocol::dataTransferProgress ( int bytesDone, int bytesTotal, TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted during the transfer of data (using put() or
+get()). bytesDone is how many bytes of bytesTotal have been
+transferred. bytesTotal may be -1, which means that the total
+number of bytes is not known. op is the pointer to the
+operation object which contains all the information about the
+operation, including the state, etc.
+
     When a protocol emits this signal, TQNetworkProtocol is smart
+enough to let the TQUrlOperator, which is used by the network
+protocol, emit its corresponding signal.
+
+
    void TQNetworkProtocol::finished ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when an operation finishes. This signal is
+always emitted, for both success and failure. op is the pointer
+to the operation object which contains all the information about
+the operation, including the state, etc. Check the state and error
+code of the operation object to determine whether or not the
+operation was successful.
+
     When a protocol emits this signal, TQNetworkProtocol is smart
+enough to let the TQUrlOperator, which is used by the network
+protocol, emit its corresponding signal.
+
+
    TQNetworkProtocol * TQNetworkProtocol::getNetworkProtocol ( const TQString & protocol ) [static]
+
    
+Static method to get a new instance of the network protocol protocol. For example, if you need to do some FTP operations, do
+the following:
+
    +    TQFtp *ftp = TQNetworkProtocol::getNetworkProtocol( "ftp" );
+    
    
+ 
+This returns a pointer to a new instance of an ftp implementation
+or null if no protocol for ftp was registered. The ownership of
+the pointer is transferred to you, so you must delete it if you
+don't need it anymore.
+
     Normally you should not work directly with network protocols, so
+you will not need to call this method yourself. Instead, use
+TQUrlOperator, which makes working with network protocols much more
+convenient.
+
     
    See also TQUrlOperator.
+
+
    bool TQNetworkProtocol::hasOnlyLocalFileSystem () [static]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the only protocol registered is for working on the
+local filesystem; returns FALSE if other network protocols are
+also registered.
+
+
    void TQNetworkProtocol::itemChanged ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever a file which is a child of this
+URL has been changed, e.g. by successfully calling rename(). op
+holds the original and the new file names in the first and second
+arguments, accessible with op->arg( 0 ) and op->arg( 1 )
+respectively. op is the pointer to the operation object which
+contains all the information about the operation, including the
+state, etc.
+
     When a protocol emits this signal, TQNetworkProtocol is smart
+enough to let the TQUrlOperator, which is used by the network
+protocol, emit its corresponding signal.
+
+
    void TQNetworkProtocol::newChild ( const TQUrlInfo & i, TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted if a new child (file) has been read.
+TQNetworkProtocol automatically connects it to a slot which creates
+a list of TQUrlInfo objects (with just one TQUrlInfo i) and emits
+the newChildren() signal with this list. op is the pointer to
+the operation object which contains all the information about the
+operation that has finished, including the state, etc.
+
     This is just a convenience signal useful for implementing your own
+network protocol. In all other cases connect to the newChildren()
+signal with its list of TQUrlInfo objects.
+
+
    void TQNetworkProtocol::newChildren ( const TQValueList<TQUrlInfo> & i, TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted after listChildren() was called and new
+children (files) have been read from the list of files. i holds
+the information about the new children. op is the pointer to
+the operation object which contains all the information about the
+operation, including the state, etc.
+
     When a protocol emits this signal, TQNetworkProtocol is smart
+enough to let the TQUrlOperator, which is used by the network
+protocol, emit its corresponding signal.
+
     When implementing your own network protocol and reading children,
+you usually don't read one child at once, but rather a list of
+them. That's why this signal takes a list of TQUrlInfo objects. If
+you prefer to read just one child at a time you can use the
+convenience signal newChild(), which takes a single TQUrlInfo
+object.
+
+
    void TQNetworkProtocol::operationGet ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+When implementing a new network protocol, this method should be
+reimplemented if the protocol supports getting data; this method
+should then process the TQNetworkOperation.
+
     When you reimplement this method it's very important that you emit
+the correct signals at the correct time (especially the finished()
+signal after processing an operation). Take a look at the TQt Network Documentation which describes in
+detail how to reimplement this method. You may also want to look
+at the example implementation in
+examples/network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
     op is the pointer to the operation object which contains all
+the information on the operation that has finished, including the
+state, etc.
+
+
    Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    TQNetworkOperation * TQNetworkProtocol::operationInProgress () const
+
    
+Returns the operation, which is being processed, or 0 of no
+operation is being processed at the moment.
+
+
    void TQNetworkProtocol::operationListChildren ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+When implementing a new network protocol, this method should be
+reimplemented if the protocol supports listing children (files);
+this method should then process this TQNetworkOperation.
+
     When you reimplement this method it's very important that you emit
+the correct signals at the correct time (especially the finished()
+signal after processing an operation). Take a look at the TQt Network Documentation which describes in
+detail how to reimplement this method. You may also want to look
+at the example implementation in
+examples/network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
     op is the pointer to the operation object which contains all
+the information on the operation that has finished, including the
+state, etc.
+
+
    Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    void TQNetworkProtocol::operationMkDir ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+When implementing a new network protocol, this method should be
+reimplemented if the protocol supports making directories; this
+method should then process this TQNetworkOperation.
+
     When you reimplement this method it's very important that you emit
+the correct signals at the correct time (especially the finished()
+signal after processing an operation). Take a look at the TQt Network Documentation which describes in
+detail how to reimplement this method. You may also want to look
+at the example implementation in
+examples/network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
     op is the pointer to the operation object which contains all
+the information on the operation that has finished, including the
+state, etc.
+
+
    void TQNetworkProtocol::operationPut ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+When implementing a new network protocol, this method should be
+reimplemented if the protocol supports putting (uploading) data;
+this method should then process the TQNetworkOperation.
+
     When you reimplement this method it's very important that you emit
+the correct signals at the correct time (especially the finished()
+signal after processing an operation). Take a look at the TQt Network Documentation which describes in
+detail how to reimplement this method. You may also want to look
+at the example implementation in
+examples/network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
     op is the pointer to the operation object which contains all
+the information on the operation that has finished, including the
+state, etc.
+
+
    void TQNetworkProtocol::operationRemove ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+When implementing a new network protocol, this method should be
+reimplemented if the protocol supports removing children (files);
+this method should then process this TQNetworkOperation.
+
     When you reimplement this method it's very important that you emit
+the correct signals at the correct time (especially the finished()
+signal after processing an operation). Take a look at the TQt Network Documentation which is describes
+in detail how to reimplement this method. You may also want to
+look at the example implementation in
+examples/network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
     op is the pointer to the operation object which contains all
+the information on the operation that has finished, including the
+state, etc.
+
+
    void TQNetworkProtocol::operationRename ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+When implementing a new newtork protocol, this method should be
+reimplemented if the protocol supports renaming children (files);
+this method should then process this TQNetworkOperation.
+
     When you reimplement this method it's very important that you emit
+the correct signals at the correct time (especially the finished()
+signal after processing an operation). Take a look at the TQt Network Documentation which describes in
+detail how to reimplement this method. You may also want to look
+at the example implementation in
+examples/network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
     op is the pointer to the operation object which contains all
+the information on the operation that has finished, including the
+state, etc.
+
+
    void TQNetworkProtocol::registerNetworkProtocol ( const TQString & protocol, TQNetworkProtocolFactoryBase * protocolFactory ) [static]
+
    
+Static method to register a network protocol for TQt. For example,
+if you have an implementation of NNTP (called Nntp) which is
+derived from TQNetworkProtocol, call:
+
    +    TQNetworkProtocol::registerNetworkProtocol( "nntp", new TQNetworkProtocolFactory<Nntp> );
+    
    
+ 
+after which your implementation is registered for future nntp
+operations.
+
     The name of the protocol is given in protocol and a pointer to
+the protocol factory is given in protocolFactory.
+
+
    void TQNetworkProtocol::removed ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when remove() has been succesful and the
+file has been removed. op holds the file name of the removed
+file in the first argument, accessible with op->arg( 0 ). op is
+the pointer to the operation object which contains all the
+information about the operation, including the state, etc.
+
     When a protocol emits this signal, TQNetworkProtocol is smart
+enough to let the TQUrlOperator, which is used by the network
+protocol, emit its corresponding signal.
+
+
    void TQNetworkProtocol::setAutoDelete ( bool b, int i = 10000 ) [virtual]
+
    
+Because it's sometimes hard to take care of removing network
+protocol instances, TQNetworkProtocol provides an auto-delete
+mechanism. If you set b to TRUE, the network protocol instance
+is removed after it has been inactive for i milliseconds (i.e.
+i milliseconds after the last operation has been processed).
+If you set b to FALSE the auto-delete mechanism is switched
+off.
+
     If you switch on auto-delete, the TQNetworkProtocol also deletes
+its TQUrlOperator.
+
+
    void TQNetworkProtocol::setUrl ( TQUrlOperator * u ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the TQUrlOperator, on which the protocol works, to u.
+
     
    See also TQUrlOperator.
+
+
    void TQNetworkProtocol::start ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     Some operations (such as listChildren()) emit this signal when
+they start processing the operation. op is the pointer to the
+operation object which contains all the information about the
+operation, including the state, etc.
+
     When a protocol emits this signal, TQNetworkProtocol is smart
+enough to let the TQUrlOperator, which is used by the network
+protocol, emit its corresponding signal.
+
+
    void TQNetworkProtocol::stop () [virtual]
+
    
+Stops the current operation that is being processed and clears all
+waiting operations.
+
+
    int TQNetworkProtocol::supportedOperations () const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns an int that is OR'd together using the enum values of
+TQNetworkProtocol::Operation, which describes which operations
+are supported by the network protocol. Should be reimplemented by
+new network protocols.
+
+
    Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    TQUrlOperator * TQNetworkProtocol::url () const
+
    
+Returns the TQUrlOperator on which the protocol works.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqobject.html b/doc/html/ntqobject.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2adf28d95
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqobject.html
@@ -0,0 +1,958 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQObject Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQObject Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQObject class is the base class of all TQt objects.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqobject.h>
+
    Inherits TQt.
+
    Inherited by TQAccel, TQAccessibleObject, TQAction, TQApplication, TQAssistantClient, TQDataPump, TQAxObject, TQAxScript, TQAxScriptManager, TQWidget, TQCanvas, TQStyle, TQClipboard, TQCopChannel, TQDns, TQLayout, TQDragObject, TQEditorFactory, TQEventLoop, TQFileIconProvider, TQNetworkProtocol, TQWSKeyboardHandler, TQNetworkOperation, TQNPInstance, TQObjectCleanupHandler, TQProcess, TQServerSocket, TQSessionManager, TQSignal, TQSignalMapper, TQSocket, TQSocketNotifier, TQSound, TQSqlDatabase, TQSqlDriver, TQSqlForm, TQStyleSheet, TQTimer, TQToolTipGroup, TQTranslator, TQUrlOperator, and TQValidator.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQObject ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • virtual ~TQObject ()
      • 
+
    • virtual const char * className () const
      • 
+
    • virtual TQMetaObject * metaObject () const
      • 
+
    • virtual bool event ( TQEvent * e )
      • 
+
    • virtual bool eventFilter ( TQObject * watched, TQEvent * e )
      • 
+
    • bool isA ( const char * clname ) const
      • 
+
    • bool inherits ( const char * clname ) const
      • 
+
    • const char * name () const
      • 
+
    • const char * name ( const char * defaultName ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setName ( const char * name )
      • 
+
    • bool isWidgetType () const
      • 
+
    • bool highPriority () const
      • 
+
    • bool signalsBlocked () const
      • 
+
    • void blockSignals ( bool block )
      • 
+
    • int startTimer ( int interval )
      • 
+
    • void killTimer ( int id )
      • 
+
    • void killTimers ()
      • 
+
    • TQObject * child ( const char * objName, const char * inheritsClass = 0, bool recursiveSearch = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • const TQObjectList * children () const
      • 
+
    • TQObjectList * queryList ( const char * inheritsClass = 0, const char * objName = 0, bool regexpMatch = TRUE, bool recursiveSearch = TRUE ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual void insertChild ( TQObject * obj )
      • 
+
    • virtual void removeChild ( TQObject * obj )
      • 
+
    • void installEventFilter ( const TQObject * filterObj )
      • 
+
    • void removeEventFilter ( const TQObject * obj )
      • 
+
    • bool connect ( const TQObject * sender, const char * signal, const char * member ) const
      • 
+
    • bool disconnect ( const char * signal = 0, const TQObject * receiver = 0, const char * member = 0 )
      • 
+
    • bool disconnect ( const TQObject * receiver, const char * member = 0 )
      • 
+
    • void dumpObjectTree ()
      • 
+
    • void dumpObjectInfo ()
      • 
+
    • virtual bool setProperty ( const char * name, const TQVariant & value )
      • 
+
    • virtual TQVariant property ( const char * name ) const
      • 
+
    • TQObject * parent () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQString tr ( const char * sourceText, const char * comment )
      • 
+
    • TQString trUtf8 ( const char * sourceText, const char * comment )
      • 
+
    • const TQObjectList * objectTrees ()
      • 
+
    • bool connect ( const TQObject * sender, const char * signal, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
      • 
+
    • bool disconnect ( const TQObject * sender, const char * signal, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
      • 
+
    
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • TQCString name - the name of this object
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Static Protected Members
    
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
      
+
    • void * qt_find_obj_child ( TQObject * parent, const char * type, const char * name )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQObject class is the base class of all TQt objects.
+
     
+
+
+
     TQObject is the heart of the TQt object model. The central feature in this model is a very powerful
+mechanism for seamless object communication called signals and slots. You can
+connect a signal to a slot with connect() and destroy the
+connection with disconnect(). To avoid never ending notification
+loops you can temporarily block signals with blockSignals(). The
+protected functions connectNotify() and disconnectNotify() make it
+possible to track connections.
+
     TQObjects organize themselves in object trees. When you create a
+TQObject with another object as parent, the object will
+automatically do an insertChild() on the parent and thus show up
+in the parent's children() list. The parent takes ownership of the
+object i.e. it will automatically delete its children in its
+destructor. You can look for an object by name and optionally type
+using child() or queryList(), and get the list of tree roots using
+objectTrees().
+
     Every object has an object name() and can report its className()
+and whether it inherits() another class in the TQObject inheritance
+hierarchy.
+
     When an object is deleted, it emits a destroyed() signal. You can
+catch this signal to avoid dangling references to TQObjects. The
+TQGuardedPtr class provides an elegant way to use this feature.
+
     TQObjects can receive events through event() and filter the events
+of other objects. See installEventFilter() and eventFilter() for
+details. A convenience handler, childEvent(), can be reimplemented
+to catch child events.
+
     Last but not least, TQObject provides the basic timer support in
+TQt; see TQTimer for high-level support for timers.
+
     Notice that the Q_OBJECT macro is mandatory for any object that
+implements signals, slots or properties. You also need to run the
+moc program (Meta Object Compiler) on the
+source file. We strongly recommend the use of this macro in all
+subclasses of TQObject regardless of whether or not they actually
+use signals, slots and properties, since failure to do so may lead
+certain functions to exhibit undefined behaviour.
+
     All TQt widgets inherit TQObject. The convenience function
+isWidgetType() returns whether an object is actually a widget. It
+is much faster than inherits( "TQWidget" ).
+
     Some TQObject functions, e.g. children(), objectTrees() and
+queryList() return a TQObjectList. A TQObjectList is a TQPtrList of
+TQObjects. TQObjectLists support the same operations as TQPtrLists
+and have an iterator class, TQObjectListIt.
+
    See also Object Model.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQObject::TQObject ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs an object called name with parent object, parent.
+
     The parent of an object may be viewed as the object's owner. For
+instance, a dialog box is the parent of the
+"OK" and "Cancel" buttons it contains.
+
     The destructor of a parent object destroys all child objects.
+
     Setting parent to 0 constructs an object with no parent. If the
+object is a widget, it will become a top-level window.
+
     The object name is some text that can be used to identify a
+TQObject. It's particularly useful in conjunction with TQt Designer. You can find an
+object by name (and type) using child(). To find several objects
+use queryList().
+
     
    See also parent(), name, child(), and queryList().
+
+
    TQObject::~TQObject () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the object, deleting all its child objects.
+
     All signals to and from the object are automatically disconnected.
+
     Warning: All child objects are deleted. If any of these objects
+are on the stack or global, sooner or later your program will
+crash. We do not recommend holding pointers to child objects from
+outside the parent. If you still do, the TQObject::destroyed()
+signal gives you an opportunity to detect when an object is
+destroyed.
+
     Warning: Deleting a TQObject while pending events are waiting to be
+delivered can cause a crash.  You must not delete the TQObject
+directly from a thread that is not the GUI thread.  Use the
+TQObject::deleteLater() method instead, which will cause the event
+loop to delete the object after all pending events have been
+delivered to the object.
+
+
    void TQObject::blockSignals ( bool block )
+
    
+Blocks signals if block is TRUE, or unblocks signals if block is FALSE.
+
     Emitted signals disappear into hyperspace if signals are blocked.
+Note that the destroyed() signals will be emitted even if the signals
+for this object have been blocked.
+
+
    Examples: rot13/rot13.cpp and simple/main.cpp.
+
    bool TQObject::checkConnectArgs ( const char * signal, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the signal and the member arguments are
+compatible; otherwise returns FALSE. (The receiver argument is
+currently ignored.)
+
     Warning: We recommend that you use the default implementation and
+do not reimplement this function.
+
     
+
+
    TQObject * TQObject::child ( const char * objName, const char * inheritsClass = 0, bool recursiveSearch = TRUE )
+
    
+Searches the children and optionally grandchildren of this object,
+and returns a child that is called objName that inherits inheritsClass. If inheritsClass is 0 (the default), any class
+matches.
+
     If recursiveSearch is TRUE (the default), child() performs a
+depth-first search of the object's children.
+
     If there is no such object, this function returns 0. If there are
+more than one, the first one found is retured; if you need all of
+them, use queryList().
+
+
    void TQObject::childEvent ( TQChildEvent * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
+child events.
+
     Child events are sent to objects when children are inserted or
+removed.
+
     Note that events with TQEvent::type() TQEvent::ChildInserted are
+posted (with TQApplication::postEvent()) to make sure that the
+child's construction is completed before this function is called.
+
     If a child is removed immediately after it is inserted, the ChildInserted event may be suppressed, but the ChildRemoved
+event will always be sent. In such cases it is possible that there
+will be a ChildRemoved event without a corresponding ChildInserted event.
+
     If you change state based on ChildInserted events, call
+TQWidget::constPolish(), or do
+
    +        TQApplication::sendPostedEvents( this, TQEvent::ChildInserted );
+    
    
+ 
+in functions that depend on the state. One notable example is
+TQWidget::sizeHint().
+
     
    See also event() and TQChildEvent.
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQMainWindow and TQSplitter.
+
    const TQObjectList * TQObject::children () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a list of child objects, or 0 if this object has no
+children.
+
     The TQObjectList class is defined in the ntqobjectlist.h header
+file.
+
     The first child added is the first
+object in the list and the last child added is the last object in the list, i.e. new
+children are appended at the end.
+
     Note that the list order changes when TQWidget children are raised or lowered. A widget that is raised becomes the last object
+in the list, and a widget that is lowered becomes the first object
+in the list.
+
     
    See also child(), queryList(), parent(), insertChild(), and removeChild().
+
+
    const char * TQObject::className () const [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the class name of this object.
+
     This function is generated by the Meta
+    Object Compiler.
+
     Warning: This function will return the wrong name if the class
+definition lacks the Q_OBJECT macro.
+
     
    See also name, inherits(), isA(), and isWidgetType().
+
+
    Example: sql/overview/custom1/main.cpp.
+
    bool TQObject::connect ( const TQObject * sender, const char * signal, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member ) [static]
+
    
+Connects signal from the sender object to member in object
+receiver, and returns TRUE if the connection succeeds; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     You must use the SIGNAL() and SLOT() macros when specifying the signal
+and the member, for example:
+
    +    TQLabel     *label  = new TQLabel;
+    TQScrollBar *scroll = new TQScrollBar;
+    TQObject::connect( scroll, SIGNAL(valueChanged(int)),
+                      label,  SLOT(setNum(int)) );
+    
    
+ 
+
     This example ensures that the label always displays the current
+scroll bar value. Note that the signal and slots parameters must not
+contain any variable names, only the type. E.g. the following would
+not work and return FALSE:
+TQObject::connect( scroll, SIGNAL(valueChanged(int v)),
+label,  SLOT(setNum(int v)) );
+
     A signal can also be connected to another signal:
+
     
    +    class MyWidget : public TQWidget
+    {
+        Q_OBJECT
+    public:
+        MyWidget();
+
+    signals:
+        void myUsefulSignal();
+
+    private:
+        TQPushButton *aButton;
+    };
+
+    MyWidget::MyWidget()
+    {
+        aButton = new TQPushButton( this );
+        connect( aButton, SIGNAL(clicked()), SIGNAL(myUsefulSignal()) );
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     In this example, the MyWidget constructor relays a signal from a
+private member variable, and makes it available under a name that
+relates to MyWidget.
+
     A signal can be connected to many slots and signals. Many signals
+can be connected to one slot.
+
     If a signal is connected to several slots, the slots are activated
+in an arbitrary order when the signal is emitted.
+
     The function returns TRUE if it successfully connects the signal
+to the slot. It will return FALSE if it cannot create the
+connection, for example, if TQObject is unable to verify the
+existence of either signal or member, or if their signatures
+aren't compatible.
+
     A signal is emitted for every connection you make, so if you
+duplicate a connection, two signals will be emitted. You can
+always break a connection using disconnect().
+
     
    See also disconnect().
+
+
    Examples: action/main.cpp, application/main.cpp, extension/main.cpp, iconview/main.cpp, network/archivesearch/main.cpp, regexptester/main.cpp, and t2/main.cpp.
+
    bool TQObject::connect ( const TQObject * sender, const char * signal, const char * member ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Connects signal from the sender object to this object's member.
+
     Equivalent to: TQObject::connect(sender, signal, this, member).
+
     
    See also disconnect().
+
+
    void TQObject::connectNotify ( const char * signal ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     This virtual function is called when something has been connected
+to signal in this object.
+
     Warning: This function violates the object-oriented principle of
+modularity. However, it might be useful when you need to perform
+expensive initialization only if something is connected to a
+signal.
+
     
    See also connect() and disconnectNotify().
+
+
    void TQObject::customEvent ( TQCustomEvent * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
+custom events. Custom events are user-defined events with a type
+value at least as large as the "User" item of the TQEvent::Type
+enum, and is typically a TQCustomEvent or TQCustomEvent subclass.
+
     
    See also event() and TQCustomEvent.
+
+
    void TQObject::deleteLater () [slot]
+
    
+Performs a deferred deletion of this object.
+
     Instead of an immediate deletion this function schedules a
+deferred delete event for processing when TQt returns to the main
+event loop.
+
+
    Example: table/bigtable/main.cpp.
+
    void TQObject::destroyed () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the object is being destroyed.
+
     Note that the signal is emitted by the TQObject destructor, so
+the object's virtual table is already degenerated at this point,
+and it is not safe to call any functions on the object emitting
+the signal. This signal can not be blocked.
+
     All the objects's children are destroyed immediately after this
+signal is emitted.
+
+
    void TQObject::destroyed ( TQObject * obj ) [signal]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This signal is emitted immediately before the object obj is
+destroyed, and can not be blocked.
+
     All the objects's children are destroyed immediately after this
+signal is emitted.
+
+
    bool TQObject::disconnect ( const TQObject * sender, const char * signal, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member ) [static]
+
    
+Disconnects signal in object sender from member in object
+receiver.
+
     A signal-slot connection is removed when either of the objects
+involved are destroyed.
+
     disconnect() is typically used in three ways, as the following
+examples demonstrate.
+
      
+
    1.  Disconnect everything connected to an object's signals:
+
      +       disconnect( myObject, 0, 0, 0 );
+       
      
+ 
+equivalent to the non-static overloaded function
+
      +       myObject->disconnect();
+       
      
+ 
+
    2.  Disconnect everything connected to a specific signal:
+
      +       disconnect( myObject, SIGNAL(mySignal()), 0, 0 );
+       
      
+ 
+equivalent to the non-static overloaded function
+
      +       myObject->disconnect( SIGNAL(mySignal()) );
+       
      
+ 
+
    3.  Disconnect a specific receiver:
+
      +       disconnect( myObject, 0, myReceiver, 0 );
+       
      
+ 
+equivalent to the non-static overloaded function
+
      +       myObject->disconnect(  myReceiver );
+       
      
+ 
+
    
+
     0 may be used as a wildcard, meaning "any signal", "any receiving
+object", or "any slot in the receiving object", respectively.
+
     The sender may never be 0. (You cannot disconnect signals from
+more than one object in a single call.)
+
     If signal is 0, it disconnects receiver and member from
+any signal. If not, only the specified signal is disconnected.
+
     If receiver is 0, it disconnects anything connected to signal. If not, slots in objects other than receiver are not
+disconnected.
+
     If member is 0, it disconnects anything that is connected to receiver. If not, only slots named member will be disconnected,
+and all other slots are left alone. The member must be 0 if receiver is left out, so you cannot disconnect a
+specifically-named slot on all objects.
+
     
    See also connect().
+
+
    bool TQObject::disconnect ( const char * signal = 0, const TQObject * receiver = 0, const char * member = 0 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Disconnects signal from member of receiver.
+
     A signal-slot connection is removed when either of the objects
+involved are destroyed.
+
+
    bool TQObject::disconnect ( const TQObject * receiver, const char * member = 0 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Disconnects all signals in this object from receiver's member.
+
     A signal-slot connection is removed when either of the objects
+involved are destroyed.
+
+
    void TQObject::disconnectNotify ( const char * signal ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     This virtual function is called when something has been
+disconnected from signal in this object.
+
     Warning: This function violates the object-oriented principle of
+modularity. However, it might be useful for optimizing access to
+expensive resources.
+
     
    See also disconnect() and connectNotify().
+
+
    void TQObject::dumpObjectInfo ()
+
    
+Dumps information about signal connections, etc. for this object
+to the debug output.
+
     This function is useful for debugging, but does nothing if the
+library has been compiled in release mode (i.e. without debugging
+information).
+
+
    void TQObject::dumpObjectTree ()
+
    
+Dumps a tree of children to the debug output.
+
     This function is useful for debugging, but does nothing if the
+library has been compiled in release mode (i.e. without debugging
+information).
+
+
    bool TQObject::event ( TQEvent * e ) [virtual]
+
    
+This virtual function receives events to an object and should
+return TRUE if the event e was recognized and processed.
+
     The event() function can be reimplemented to customize the
+behavior of an object.
+
     
    See also installEventFilter(), timerEvent(), TQApplication::sendEvent(), TQApplication::postEvent(), and TQWidget::event().
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQWidget.
+
    bool TQObject::eventFilter ( TQObject * watched, TQEvent * e ) [virtual]
+
    
+Filters events if this object has been installed as an event
+filter for the watched object.
+
     In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to filter
+the event e, out, i.e. stop it being handled further, return
+TRUE; otherwise return FALSE.
+
     Example:
+
    +    class MyMainWindow : public TQMainWindow
+    {
+    public:
+        MyMainWindow( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
+
+    protected:
+        bool eventFilter( TQObject *obj, TQEvent *ev );
+
+    private:
+        TQTextEdit *textEdit;
+    };
+
+    MyMainWindow::MyMainWindow( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+        : TQMainWindow( parent, name )
+    {
+        textEdit = new TQTextEdit( this );
+        setCentralWidget( textEdit );
+        textEdit->installEventFilter( this );
+    }
+
+    bool MyMainWindow::eventFilter( TQObject *obj, TQEvent *ev )
+    {
+        if ( obj == textEdit ) {
+            if ( e->type() == TQEvent::KeyPress ) {
+                TQKeyEvent *k = (TQKeyEvent*)ev;
+                qDebug( "Ate key press %d", k->key() );
+                return TRUE;
+            } else {
+                return FALSE;
+            }
+        } else {
+            // pass the event on to the parent class
+            return TQMainWindow::eventFilter( obj, ev );
+        }
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     Notice in the example above that unhandled events are passed to
+the base class's eventFilter() function, since the base class
+might have reimplemented eventFilter() for its own internal
+purposes.
+
     Warning: If you delete the receiver object in this function, be
+sure to return TRUE. Otherwise, TQt will forward the event to the
+deleted object and the program might crash.
+
     
    See also installEventFilter().
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQAccel, TQScrollView, and TQSpinBox.
+
    bool TQObject::highPriority () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the object is a high-priority object, or FALSE if
+it is a standard-priority object.
+
     High-priority objects are placed first in TQObject's list of
+children on the assumption that they will be referenced very
+often.
+
+
    bool TQObject::inherits ( const char * clname ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this object is an instance of a class that
+inherits clname, and clname inherits TQObject; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     A class is considered to inherit itself.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQTimer *t = new TQTimer;         // TQTimer inherits TQObject
+        t->inherits( "TQTimer" );        // returns TRUE
+        t->inherits( "TQObject" );       // returns TRUE
+        t->inherits( "TQButton" );       // returns FALSE
+
+        // TQScrollBar inherits TQWidget and TQRangeControl
+        TQScrollBar *s = new TQScrollBar( 0 );
+        s->inherits( "TQWidget" );       // returns TRUE
+        s->inherits( "TQRangeControl" ); // returns FALSE
+    
    
+ 
+
     (TQRangeControl is not a TQObject.)
+
     
    See also isA() and metaObject().
+
+
    Examples: table/statistics/statistics.cpp, themes/metal.cpp, and themes/wood.cpp.
+
    void TQObject::insertChild ( TQObject * obj ) [virtual]
+
    
+Inserts an object obj into the list of child objects.
+
     Warning: This function cannot be used to make one widget the child
+widget of another widget. Child widgets can only be created by
+setting the parent widget in the constructor or by calling
+TQWidget::reparent().
+
     
    See also removeChild() and TQWidget::reparent().
+
+
    void TQObject::installEventFilter ( const TQObject * filterObj )
+
    
+
+
     Installs an event filter filterObj on this object. For example:
+
    +    monitoredObj->installEventFilter( filterObj );
+    
    
+ 
+
     An event filter is an object that receives all events that are
+sent to this object. The filter can either stop the event or
+forward it to this object. The event filter filterObj receives
+events via its eventFilter() function. The eventFilter() function
+must return TRUE if the event should be filtered, (i.e. stopped);
+otherwise it must return FALSE.
+
     If multiple event filters are installed on a single object, the
+filter that was installed last is activated first.
+
     Here's a KeyPressEater class that eats the key presses of its
+monitored objects:
+
    +    class KeyPressEater : public TQObject
+    {
+        ...
+    protected:
+        bool eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *e );
+    };
+
+    bool KeyPressEater::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *e )
+    {
+        if ( e->type() == TQEvent::KeyPress ) {
+            // special processing for key press
+            TQKeyEvent *k = (TQKeyEvent *)e;
+            qDebug( "Ate key press %d", k->key() );
+            return TRUE; // eat event
+        } else {
+            // standard event processing
+            return FALSE;
+        }
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     And here's how to install it on two widgets:
+
    +        KeyPressEater *keyPressEater = new KeyPressEater( this );
+        TQPushButton *pushButton = new TQPushButton( this );
+        TQListView *listView = new TQListView( this );
+
+        pushButton->installEventFilter( keyPressEater );
+        listView->installEventFilter( keyPressEater );
+    
    
+ 
+
     The TQAccel class, for example, uses this technique to intercept
+accelerator key presses.
+
     Warning: If you delete the receiver object in your eventFilter()
+function, be sure to return TRUE. If you return FALSE, TQt sends
+the event to the deleted object and the program will crash.
+
     
    See also removeEventFilter(), eventFilter(), and event().
+
+
    bool TQObject::isA ( const char * clname ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this object is an instance of the class clname;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQTimer *t = new TQTimer; // TQTimer inherits TQObject
+    t->isA( "TQTimer" );     // returns TRUE
+    t->isA( "TQObject" );    // returns FALSE
+  
    
+ 
+
     
    See also inherits() and metaObject().
+
+
    bool TQObject::isWidgetType () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the object is a widget; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     Calling this function is equivalent to calling
+inherits("TQWidget"), except that it is much faster.
+
+
    void TQObject::killTimer ( int id )
+
    
+Kills the timer with timer identifier, id.
+
     The timer identifier is returned by startTimer() when a timer
+event is started.
+
     
    See also timerEvent(), startTimer(), and killTimers().
+
+
    void TQObject::killTimers ()
+
    
+Kills all timers that this object has started.
+
     Warning: Using this function can cause hard-to-find bugs: it kills
+timers started by sub- and superclasses as well as those started
+by you, which is often not what you want. We recommend using a
+TQTimer or perhaps killTimer().
+
     
    See also timerEvent(), startTimer(), and killTimer().
+
+
    TQMetaObject * TQObject::metaObject () const [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Returns a pointer to the meta object of this object.
+
     A meta object contains information about a class that inherits
+TQObject, e.g. class name, superclass name, properties, signals and
+slots. Every class that contains the Q_OBJECT macro will also have
+a meta object.
+
     The meta object information is required by the signal/slot
+connection mechanism and the property system. The functions isA()
+and inherits() also make use of the meta object.
+
+
    const char * TQObject::name () const
+
    Returns the name of this object.
+See the "name" property for details.
+
    const char * TQObject::name ( const char * defaultName ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the name of this object, or defaultName if the object
+does not have a name.
+
+
    TQCString TQObject::normalizeSignalSlot ( const char * signalSlot ) [static protected]
+
    
+Normlizes the signal or slot definition signalSlot by removing
+unnecessary whitespace.
+
+
    const TQObjectList * TQObject::objectTrees () [static]
+
    
+Returns a pointer to the list of all object trees (their root
+objects), or 0 if there are no objects.
+
     The TQObjectList class is defined in the ntqobjectlist.h header
+file.
+
     The most recent root object created is the first object in the list and the first root object added
+is the last object in the list.
+
     
    See also children(), parent(), insertChild(), and removeChild().
+
+
    TQObject * TQObject::parent () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a pointer to the parent object.
+
     
    See also children().
+
+
    TQVariant TQObject::property ( const char * name ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the value of the object's name property.
+
     If no such property exists, the returned variant is invalid.
+
     Information about all available properties are provided through
+the metaObject().
+
     
    See also setProperty(), TQVariant::isValid(), metaObject(), TQMetaObject::propertyNames(), and TQMetaObject::property().
+
+
    Example: qutlook/centralwidget.cpp.
+
    TQObjectList * TQObject::queryList ( const char * inheritsClass = 0, const char * objName = 0, bool regexpMatch = TRUE, bool recursiveSearch = TRUE ) const
+
    
+Searches the children and optionally grandchildren of this object,
+and returns a list of those objects that are named or that match
+objName and inherit inheritsClass. If inheritsClass is 0
+(the default), all classes match. If objName is 0 (the
+default), all object names match.
+
     If regexpMatch is TRUE (the default), objName is a regular expression that the objects's names must match. The syntax is that
+of a TQRegExp. If regexpMatch is FALSE, objName is a string
+and object names must match it exactly.
+
     Note that inheritsClass uses single inheritance from TQObject,
+the way inherits() does. According to inherits(), TQMenuBar
+inherits TQWidget but not TQMenuData. This does not quite match
+reality, but is the best that can be done on the wide variety of
+compilers TQt supports.
+
     Finally, if recursiveSearch is TRUE (the default), queryList()
+searches nth-generation as well as first-generation children.
+
     If all this seems a bit complex for your needs, the simpler
+child() function may be what you want.
+
     This somewhat contrived example disables all the buttons in this
+window:
+
    +    TQObjectList *l = topLevelWidget()->queryList( "TQButton" );
+    TQObjectListIt it( *l ); // iterate over the buttons
+    TQObject *obj;
+
+    while ( (obj = it.current()) != 0 ) {
+        // for each found object...
+        ++it;
+        ((TQButton*)obj)->setEnabled( FALSE );
+    }
+    delete l; // delete the list, not the objects
+    
    
+ 
+
     The TQObjectList class is defined in the ntqobjectlist.h header
+file.
+
     Warning: Delete the list as soon you have finished using it. The
+list contains pointers that may become invalid at almost any time
+without notice (as soon as the user closes a window you may have
+dangling pointers, for example).
+
     
    See also child(), children(), parent(), inherits(), name, and TQRegExp.
+
+
    void TQObject::removeChild ( TQObject * obj ) [virtual]
+
    
+Removes the child object obj from the list of children.
+
     Warning: This function will not remove a child widget from the
+screen. It will only remove it from the parent widget's list of
+children.
+
     
    See also insertChild() and TQWidget::reparent().
+
+
    void TQObject::removeEventFilter ( const TQObject * obj )
+
    
+Removes an event filter object obj from this object. The
+request is ignored if such an event filter has not been installed.
+
     All event filters for this object are automatically removed when
+this object is destroyed.
+
     It is always safe to remove an event filter, even during event
+filter activation (i.e. from the eventFilter() function).
+
     
    See also installEventFilter(), eventFilter(), and event().
+
+
    const TQObject * TQObject::sender () [protected]
+
    
+Returns a pointer to the object that sent the signal, if called in
+a slot activated by a signal; otherwise it returns 0. The pointer
+is valid only during the execution of the slot that calls this
+function.
+
     The pointer returned by this function becomes invalid if the
+sender is destroyed, or if the slot is disconnected from the
+sender's signal.
+
     Warning: This function violates the object-oriented principle of
+modularity. However, getting access to the sender might be useful
+when many signals are connected to a single slot. The sender is
+undefined if the slot is called as a normal C++ function.
+
+
    void TQObject::setName ( const char * name ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the object's name to name.
+
+
    bool TQObject::setProperty ( const char * name, const TQVariant & value ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the value of the object's name property to value.
+
     Returns TRUE if the operation was successful; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     Information about all available properties is provided through the
+metaObject().
+
     
    See also property(), metaObject(), TQMetaObject::propertyNames(), and TQMetaObject::property().
+
+
    Example: qutlook/centralwidget.cpp.
+
    bool TQObject::signalsBlocked () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if signals are blocked; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     Signals are not blocked by default.
+
     
    See also blockSignals().
+
+
    int TQObject::startTimer ( int interval )
+
    
+Starts a timer and returns a timer identifier, or returns zero if
+it could not start a timer.
+
     A timer event will occur every interval milliseconds until
+killTimer() or killTimers() is called. If interval is 0, then
+the timer event occurs once every time there are no more window
+system events to process.
+
     The virtual timerEvent() function is called with the TQTimerEvent
+event parameter class when a timer event occurs. Reimplement this
+function to get timer events.
+
     If multiple timers are running, the TQTimerEvent::timerId() can be
+used to find out which timer was activated.
+
     Example:
+
    +    class MyObject : public TQObject
+    {
+        Q_OBJECT
+    public:
+        MyObject( TQObject *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
+
+    protected:
+        void timerEvent( TQTimerEvent * );
+    };
+
+    MyObject::MyObject( TQObject *parent, const char *name )
+        : TQObject( parent, name )
+    {
+        startTimer( 50 );    // 50-millisecond timer
+        startTimer( 1000 );  // 1-second timer
+        startTimer( 60000 ); // 1-minute timer
+    }
+
+    void MyObject::timerEvent( TQTimerEvent *e )
+    {
+        qDebug( "timer event, id %d", e->timerId() );
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     Note that TQTimer's accuracy depends on the underlying operating
+system and hardware. Most platforms support an accuracy of 20 ms;
+some provide more. If TQt is unable to deliver the requested
+number of timer clicks, it will silently discard some.
+
     The TQTimer class provides a high-level programming interface with
+one-shot timers and timer signals instead of events.
+
     
    See also timerEvent(), killTimer(), killTimers(), TQEventLoop::awake(), and TQEventLoop::aboutToBlock().
+
+
    void TQObject::timerEvent ( TQTimerEvent * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
+timer events for the object.
+
     TQTimer provides a higher-level interface to the timer
+functionality, and also more general information about timers.
+
     
    See also startTimer(), killTimer(), killTimers(), and event().
+
+
    Examples: biff/biff.cpp, dclock/dclock.cpp, forever/forever.cpp, grapher/grapher.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    TQString TQObject::tr ( const char * sourceText, const char * comment ) [static]
+
    
+
+
+
     Returns a translated version of sourceText, or sourceText
+itself if there is no appropriate translated version. The
+translation context is TQObject with comment (0 by default).
+All TQObject subclasses using the Q_OBJECT macro automatically have
+a reimplementation of this function with the subclass name as
+context.
+
     Warning: This method is reentrant only if all translators are
+installed before calling this method. Installing or removing
+translators while performing translations is not supported. Doing
+so will probably result in crashes or other undesirable behavior.
+
     
    See also trUtf8(), TQApplication::translate(), and Internationalization with TQt.
+
+
    Example: network/networkprotocol/view.cpp.
+
    TQString TQObject::trUtf8 ( const char * sourceText, const char * comment ) [static]
+
    
+
+
+
     Returns a translated version of sourceText, or
+TQString::fromUtf8(sourceText) if there is no appropriate
+version. It is otherwise identical to tr(sourceText, comment).
+
     Warning: This method is reentrant only if all translators are
+installed before calling this method. Installing or removing
+translators while performing translations is not supported. Doing
+so will probably result in crashes or other undesirable behavior.
+
     
    See also tr() and TQApplication::translate().
+
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    TQCString name
    
+
    This property holds the name of this object.
+
    You can find an object by name (and type) using child(). You can
+find a set of objects with queryList().
+
     The object name is set by the constructor or by the setName()
+function. The object name is not very useful in the current
+version of TQt, but will become increasingly important in the
+future.
+
     If the object does not have a name, the name() function returns
+"unnamed", so printf() (used in qDebug()) will not be asked to
+output a null pointer. If you want a null pointer to be returned
+for unnamed objects, you can call name( 0 ).
+
     
    +        qDebug( "MyClass::setPrecision(): (%s) invalid precision %f",
+                name(), newPrecision );
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also className(), child(), and queryList().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setName() and get this property's value with name().
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    void * qt_find_obj_child ( TQObject * parent, const char * type, const char * name )
+
    
+
+
     Returns a pointer to the object named name that inherits type and with a given parent.
+
     Returns 0 if there is no such child.
+
     
    +        TQListBox *c = (TQListBox *) qt_find_obj_child( myWidget, "TQListBox",
+                                                      "my list box" );
+        if ( c )
+            c->insertItem( "another string" );
+    
    
+ 
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqobjectcleanuphandler.html b/doc/html/ntqobjectcleanuphandler.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4428f0feb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqobjectcleanuphandler.html
@@ -0,0 +1,139 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQObjectCleanupHandler Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQObjectCleanupHandler Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQObjectCleanupHandler class watches the lifetime of multiple TQObjects.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqobjectcleanuphandler.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQObjectCleanupHandler class watches the lifetime of multiple TQObjects.
+
     
+
     A TQObjectCleanupHandler is useful whenever you need to know when a
+number of TQObjects that are owned by someone else have been
+deleted. This is important, for example, when referencing memory
+in an application that has been allocated in a shared library.
+
     Example:
+
     
    +    class FactoryComponent : public FactoryInterface, public TQLibraryInterface
+    {
+    public:
+        ...
+
+        TQObject *createObject();
+
+        bool init();
+        void cleanup();
+        bool canUnload() const;
+
+    private:
+        TQObjectCleanupHandler objects;
+    };
+
+    // allocate a new object, and add it to the cleanup handler
+    TQObject *FactoryComponent::createObject()
+    {
+        return objects.add( new TQObject() );
+    }
+
+    // TQLibraryInterface implementation
+    bool FactoryComponent::init()
+    {
+        return TRUE;
+    }
+
+    void FactoryComponent::cleanup()
+    {
+    }
+
+    // it is only safe to unload the library when all TQObject's have been destroyed
+    bool FactoryComponent::canUnload() const
+    {
+        return objects.isEmpty();
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
    See also Object Model.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQObjectCleanupHandler::TQObjectCleanupHandler ()
+
    
+Constructs an empty TQObjectCleanupHandler.
+
+
    TQObjectCleanupHandler::~TQObjectCleanupHandler ()
+
    
+Destroys the cleanup handler. All objects in this cleanup handler
+will be deleted.
+
+
    TQObject * TQObjectCleanupHandler::add ( TQObject * object )
+
    
+Adds object to this cleanup handler and returns the pointer to
+the object.
+
+
    void TQObjectCleanupHandler::clear ()
+
    
+Deletes all objects in this cleanup handler. The cleanup handler
+becomes empty.
+
+
    bool TQObjectCleanupHandler::isEmpty () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this cleanup handler is empty or if all objects in
+this cleanup handler have been destroyed; otherwise return FALSE.
+
+
    void TQObjectCleanupHandler::remove ( TQObject * object )
+
    
+Removes the object from this cleanup handler. The object will
+not be destroyed.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqobjectlist.html b/doc/html/ntqobjectlist.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..05c8ea288
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqobjectlist.html
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQObjectList Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQObjectList Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQObjectList class is a TQPtrList of TQObjects.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqobjectlist.h>
+
    Inherits TQPtrList<TQObject>.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQObjectList class is a TQPtrList of TQObjects.
+
     
+
+
     A TQObjectList is a TQPtrList<TQObject>. The list can be traversed using
+inherited functions, e.g. getFirst(), next(), etc., or using a
+TQObjectListIterator iterator.
+
     See TQObject::queryList() for an example of use.
+
     
    See also TQObjectListIterator, TQObject, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQObjectList::TQObjectList ()
+
    
+
+
     Constructs an empty TQObject list.
+
+
    TQObjectList::TQObjectList ( const TQObjectList & list )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a copy of list.
+
     Each item in list is appended to this
+list. Only the pointers are copied (shallow copy).
+
+
    TQObjectList::~TQObjectList ()
+
    
+
+
     Removes all the object pointers from the list and destroys the
+list.
+
     All list iterators that access this list will be reset.
+
     
    See also setAutoDelete().
+
+
    TQObjectList & TQObjectList::operator= ( const TQObjectList & list )
+
    
+
+
     Assigns list to this list and returns a reference to this list.
+
     This list is first cleared and then each item in list is appended to this list. Only the pointers are
+copied (shallow copy) unless newItem() has been reimplemented().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqpaintdevice.html b/doc/html/ntqpaintdevice.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0af3d6913
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqpaintdevice.html
@@ -0,0 +1,464 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQPaintDevice Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQPaintDevice Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQPaintDevice class is the base class of objects that
+can be painted.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqpaintdevice.h>
+
    Inherited by TQWidget, TQPixmap, TQPicture, and TQPrinter.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQPaintDevice ( uint devflags )
      • 
+
    • virtual bool cmd ( int, TQPainter *, TQPDevCmdParam * )
      • 
+
    
+
    Related Functions
    
+
      
+
    • void bitBlt ( TQPaintDevice * dst, int dx, int dy, const TQPaintDevice * src, int sx, int sy, int sw, int sh, TQt::RasterOp rop, bool ignoreMask )
      • 
+
    • void bitBlt ( TQPaintDevice * dst, const TQPoint & dp, const TQPaintDevice * src, const TQRect & sr, RasterOp rop )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQPaintDevice class is the base class of objects that
+can be painted.
+
     
+
+
     A paint device is an abstraction of a two-dimensional space that
+can be drawn using a TQPainter. The drawing capabilities are
+implemented by the subclasses TQWidget, TQPixmap, TQPicture and
+TQPrinter.
+
     The default coordinate system of a paint device has its origin
+located at the top-left position. X increases to the right and Y
+increases downward. The unit is one pixel. There are several ways
+to set up a user-defined coordinate system using the painter, for
+example, using TQPainter::setWorldMatrix().
+
     Example (draw on a paint device):
+
    +    void MyWidget::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
+    {
+        TQPainter p;                       // our painter
+        p.begin( this );                  // start painting the widget
+        p.setPen( red );                  // red outline
+        p.setBrush( yellow );             // yellow fill
+        p.drawEllipse( 10, 20, 100,100 ); // 100x100 ellipse at position (10, 20)
+        p.end();                          // painting done
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     The bit block transfer is an extremely useful operation for
+copying pixels from one paint device to another (or to itself). It
+is implemented as the global function bitBlt().
+
     Example (scroll widget contents 10 pixels to the right):
+
    +    bitBlt( myWidget, 10, 0, myWidget );
+    
    
+ 
+
     Warning: TQt requires that a TQApplication object exists before
+any paint devices can be created. Paint devices access window
+system resources, and these resources are not initialized before
+an application object is created.
+
    See also Graphics Classes and Image Processing Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQPaintDevice::TQPaintDevice ( uint devflags ) [protected]
+
    
+Constructs a paint device with internal flags devflags. This
+constructor can be invoked only from TQPaintDevice subclasses.
+
+
    TQPaintDevice::~TQPaintDevice () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the paint device and frees window system resources.
+
+
    bool TQPaintDevice::cmd ( int, TQPainter *, TQPDevCmdParam * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Internal virtual function that interprets drawing commands from
+the painter.
+
     Implemented by subclasses that have no direct support for drawing
+graphics (external paint devices, for example, TQPicture).
+
+
    TQt::HANDLE TQPaintDevice::handle () const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the window system handle of the paint device, for
+low-level access. Using this function is not portable.
+
     The HANDLE type varies with platform; see ntqpaintdevice.h and
+ntqwindowdefs.h for details.
+
     
    See also x11Display().
+
+
    bool TQPaintDevice::isExtDev () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the device is an external paint device; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     External paint devices cannot be bitBlt()'ed from. TQPicture and
+TQPrinter are external paint devices.
+
+
    bool TQPaintDevice::paintingActive () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the device is being painted, i.e. someone has
+called TQPainter::begin() but not yet called TQPainter::end() for
+this device; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also TQPainter::isActive().
+
+
    int TQPaintDevice::x11AppCells () [static]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of entries in the colormap for the default
+screen of the X display global to the application (X11
+only). Using this function is not portable.
+
     
    See also x11Colormap().
+
+
    int TQPaintDevice::x11AppCells ( int screen ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns the number of entries in the colormap for screen screen
+of the X display global to the application (X11 only). Using this
+function is not portable.
+
     
    See also x11Colormap().
+
+
    TQt::HANDLE TQPaintDevice::x11AppColormap () [static]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the colormap for the default screen of the X display
+global to the application (X11 only). Using this function is not
+portable.
+
     
    See also x11Cells().
+
+
    TQt::HANDLE TQPaintDevice::x11AppColormap ( int screen ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns the colormap for screen screen of the X display global
+to the application (X11 only). Using this function is not
+portable.
+
     
    See also x11Cells().
+
+
    bool TQPaintDevice::x11AppDefaultColormap () [static]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the default colormap for the default screen of the X
+display global to the application (X11 only). Using this function
+is not portable.
+
     
    See also x11Cells().
+
+
    bool TQPaintDevice::x11AppDefaultColormap ( int screen ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns the default colormap for screen screen of the X display
+global to the application (X11 only). Using this function is not
+portable.
+
     
    See also x11Cells().
+
+
    bool TQPaintDevice::x11AppDefaultVisual () [static]
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the Visual used is the default for the default
+screen of the X display global to the application (X11 only);
+otherwise returns FALSE. Using this function is not portable.
+
+
    bool TQPaintDevice::x11AppDefaultVisual ( int screen ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if the Visual used is the default for screen
+screen of the X display global to the application (X11 only);
+otherwise returns FALSE. Using this function is not portable.
+
+
    int TQPaintDevice::x11AppDepth ( int screen ) [static]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the depth for screen screen of the X display global to
+the application (X11 only). Using this function is not portable.
+
     
    See also TQPixmap::defaultDepth().
+
+
    int TQPaintDevice::x11AppDepth () [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns the depth for the default screen of the X display global
+to the application (X11 only). Using this function is not
+portable.
+
     
    See also TQPixmap::defaultDepth().
+
+
    Display * TQPaintDevice::x11AppDisplay () [static]
+
    
+
+
     Returns a pointer to the X display global to the application (X11
+only). Using this function is not portable.
+
     
    See also handle().
+
+
    int TQPaintDevice::x11AppDpiX ( int screen ) [static]
+
    
+Returns the horizontal DPI of the X display (X11 only) for screen
+screen. Using this function is not portable. See
+TQPaintDeviceMetrics for portable access to related information.
+Using this function is not portable.
+
     
    See also x11AppDpiY(), x11SetAppDpiX(), and TQPaintDeviceMetrics::logicalDpiX().
+
+
    int TQPaintDevice::x11AppDpiX () [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the horizontal DPI of the X display (X11 only) for the
+default screen. Using this function is not portable. See
+TQPaintDeviceMetrics for portable access to related information.
+Using this function is not portable.
+
+
    int TQPaintDevice::x11AppDpiY ( int screen ) [static]
+
    
+Returns the vertical DPI of the X11 display (X11 only) for screen
+screen.  Using this function is not portable. See
+TQPaintDeviceMetrics for portable access to related information.
+Using this function is not portable.
+
     
    See also x11AppDpiX(), x11SetAppDpiY(), and TQPaintDeviceMetrics::logicalDpiY().
+
+
    int TQPaintDevice::x11AppDpiY () [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the vertical DPI of the X11 display (X11 only) for the
+default screen.  Using this function is not portable. See
+TQPaintDeviceMetrics for portable access to related information.
+Using this function is not portable.
+
     
    See also x11AppDpiX(), x11SetAppDpiY(), and TQPaintDeviceMetrics::logicalDpiY().
+
+
    TQt::HANDLE TQPaintDevice::x11AppRootWindow () [static]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the root window for the default screen of the X display
+global to the applicatoin (X11 only). Using this function is not
+portable.
+
+
    TQt::HANDLE TQPaintDevice::x11AppRootWindow ( int screen ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns the root window for screen screen of the X display
+global to the applicatoin (X11 only). Using this function is not
+portable.
+
+
    int TQPaintDevice::x11AppScreen () [static]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the screen number on the X display global to the
+application (X11 only). Using this function is not portable.
+
+
    void * TQPaintDevice::x11AppVisual () [static]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the Visual for the default screen of the X display global
+to the application (X11 only). Using this function is not
+portable.
+
+
    void * TQPaintDevice::x11AppVisual ( int screen ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns the Visual for screen screen of the X display global to
+the application (X11 only). Using this function is not portable.
+
+
    int TQPaintDevice::x11Cells () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of entries in the colormap of the X display for
+the paint device (X11 only). Using this function is not portable.
+
     
    See also x11Colormap().
+
+
    TQt::HANDLE TQPaintDevice::x11Colormap () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the colormap of the X display for the paint device (X11
+only). Using this function is not portable.
+
     
    See also x11Cells().
+
+
    bool TQPaintDevice::x11DefaultColormap () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the default colormap of the X display for the paint device
+(X11 only). Using this function is not portable.
+
     
    See also x11Cells().
+
+
    bool TQPaintDevice::x11DefaultVisual () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the default Visual of the X display for the paint device
+(X11 only). Using this function is not portable.
+
+
    int TQPaintDevice::x11Depth () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the depth of the X display for the paint device (X11
+only). Using this function is not portable.
+
     
    See also TQPixmap::defaultDepth().
+
+
    Display * TQPaintDevice::x11Display () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a pointer to the X display for the paint device (X11
+only). Using this function is not portable.
+
     
    See also handle().
+
+
    int TQPaintDevice::x11Screen () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the screen number on the X display for the paint device
+(X11 only). Using this function is not portable.
+
+
    void TQPaintDevice::x11SetAppDpiX ( int dpi, int screen ) [static]
+
    
+Sets the value returned by x11AppDpiX() to dpi for screen
+screen. The default is determined by the display configuration.
+Changing this value will alter the scaling of fonts and many other
+metrics and is not recommended. Using this function is not
+portable.
+
     
    See also x11SetAppDpiY().
+
+
    void TQPaintDevice::x11SetAppDpiX ( int dpi ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the value returned by x11AppDpiX() to dpi for the default
+screen. The default is determined by the display configuration.
+Changing this value will alter the scaling of fonts and many other
+metrics and is not recommended. Using this function is not
+portable.
+
     
+
    void TQPaintDevice::x11SetAppDpiY ( int dpi, int screen ) [static]
+
    
+Sets the value returned by x11AppDpiY() to dpi for screen
+screen. The default is determined by the display configuration.
+Changing this value will alter the scaling of fonts and many other
+metrics and is not recommended. Using this function is not
+portable.
+
     
    See also x11SetAppDpiX().
+
+
    void TQPaintDevice::x11SetAppDpiY ( int dpi ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the value returned by x11AppDpiY() to dpi for the default
+screen.  The default is determined by the display configuration.
+Changing this value will alter the scaling of fonts and many other
+metrics and is not recommended. Using this function is not
+portable.
+
+
    void * TQPaintDevice::x11Visual () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the Visual of the X display for the paint device (X11
+only). Using this function is not portable.
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    void bitBlt ( TQPaintDevice * dst, int dx, int dy, const TQPaintDevice * src, int sx, int sy, int sw, int sh, TQt::RasterOp rop, bool ignoreMask )
+
    
+
+
     Copies a block of pixels from src to dst, perhaps merging
+each pixel according to the raster operation
+rop. sx, sy
+is the top-left pixel in src (0, 0) by default, dx, dy is
+the top-left position in dst and sw, sh is the size of
+the copied block (all of src by default).
+
     The most common values for rop are CopyROP and XorROP; the TQt::RasterOp documentation defines all the possible values.
+
     If ignoreMask is FALSE (the default) and src is a
+masked TQPixmap, the entire blit is masked by src->mask().
+
     If src, dst, sw or sh is 0, bitBlt() does nothing. If
+sw or sh is negative bitBlt() copies starting at sx (and
+respectively, sy) and ending at the right end (respectively,
+bottom) of src.
+
     src must be a TQWidget or TQPixmap. You cannot blit from a
+TQPrinter, for example. bitBlt() does nothing if you attempt to
+blit from an unsupported device.
+
     bitBlt() does nothing if src has a greater depth than dst.
+If you need to for example, draw a 24-bit pixmap on an 8-bit
+widget, you must use drawPixmap().
+
+
    void bitBlt ( TQPaintDevice * dst, const TQPoint & dp, const TQPaintDevice * src, const TQRect & sr, RasterOp rop )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Overloaded bitBlt() with the destination point dp and source
+rectangle sr.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqpaintdevicemetrics.html b/doc/html/ntqpaintdevicemetrics.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..388b53298
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqpaintdevicemetrics.html
@@ -0,0 +1,150 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQPaintDeviceMetrics Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQPaintDeviceMetrics Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQPaintDeviceMetrics class provides information about a
+paint device.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqpaintdevicemetrics.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQPaintDeviceMetrics class provides information about a
+paint device.
+
     
+
+
     Sometimes when drawing graphics it is necessary to obtain
+information about the physical characteristics of a paint device.
+This class provides the information. For example, to compute the
+aspect ratio of a paint device:
+
     
    +        TQPaintDeviceMetrics pdm( myWidget );
+        double aspect = (double)pdm.widthMM() / (double)pdm.heightMM();
+    
    
+ 
+
     TQPaintDeviceMetrics contains methods to provide the width and
+height of a device in both pixels (width() and height()) and
+millimeters (widthMM() and heightMM()), the number of colors the
+device supports (numColors()), the number of bit planes (depth()),
+and the resolution of the device (logicalDpiX() and
+logicalDpiY()).
+
     It is not always possible for TQPaintDeviceMetrics to compute the
+values you ask for, particularly for external devices. The
+ultimate example is asking for the resolution of of a TQPrinter
+that is set to "print to file": who knows what printer that file
+will end up on?
+
    See also Graphics Classes and Image Processing Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQPaintDeviceMetrics::TQPaintDeviceMetrics ( const TQPaintDevice * pd )
+
    
+Constructs a metric for the paint device pd.
+
+
    int TQPaintDeviceMetrics::depth () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the bit depth (number of bit planes) of the paint device.
+
+
    int TQPaintDeviceMetrics::height () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the height of the paint device in default coordinate
+system units (e.g. pixels for TQPixmap and TQWidget).
+
+
    Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
+
    int TQPaintDeviceMetrics::heightMM () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the height of the paint device, measured in millimeters.
+
+
    int TQPaintDeviceMetrics::logicalDpiX () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the horizontal resolution of the device in dots per inch,
+which is used when computing font sizes. For X, this is usually
+the same as could be computed from widthMM(), but it varies on
+Windows.
+
+
    Example: qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
+
    int TQPaintDeviceMetrics::logicalDpiY () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the vertical resolution of the device in dots per inch,
+which is used when computing font sizes. For X, this is usually
+the same as could be computed from heightMM(), but it varies on
+Windows.
+
+
    Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, and mdi/application.cpp.
+
    int TQPaintDeviceMetrics::numColors () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of different colors available for the paint
+device. Since this value is an int will not be sufficient to represent
+the number of colors on 32 bit displays, in which case INT_MAX is
+returned instead.
+
+
    int TQPaintDeviceMetrics::width () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the width of the paint device in default coordinate system
+units (e.g. pixels for TQPixmap and TQWidget).
+
+
    Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
+
    int TQPaintDeviceMetrics::widthMM () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the width of the paint device, measured in millimeters.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqpainter.html b/doc/html/ntqpainter.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c9ab96488
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqpainter.html
@@ -0,0 +1,1626 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQPainter Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQPainter Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQPainter class does low-level painting e.g. on widgets.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqpainter.h>
+
    Inherits TQt.
+
    Inherited by TQDirectPainter.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • enum CoordinateMode { CoordDevice, CoordPainter }
      • 
+
    • TQPainter ()
      • 
+
    • TQPainter ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, bool unclipped = FALSE )
      • 
+
    • TQPainter ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, const TQWidget * copyAttributes, bool unclipped = FALSE )
      • 
+
    • ~TQPainter ()
      • 
+
    • bool begin ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, bool unclipped = FALSE )
      • 
+
    • bool begin ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, const TQWidget * copyAttributes, bool unclipped = FALSE )
      • 
+
    • bool end ()
      • 
+
    • TQPaintDevice * device () const
      • 
+
    • bool isActive () const
      • 
+
    • void flush ( const TQRegion & region, CoordinateMode cm = CoordDevice )
      • 
+
    • void flush ()
      • 
+
    • void save ()
      • 
+
    • void restore ()
      • 
+
    • TQFontMetrics fontMetrics () const
      • 
+
    • TQFontInfo fontInfo () const
      • 
+
    • const TQFont & font () const
      • 
+
    • void setFont ( const TQFont & font )
      • 
+
    • const TQPen & pen () const
      • 
+
    • void setPen ( const TQPen & pen )
      • 
+
    • void setPen ( PenStyle style )
      • 
+
    • void setPen ( const TQColor & color )
      • 
+
    • const TQBrush & brush () const
      • 
+
    • void setBrush ( const TQBrush & brush )
      • 
+
    • void setBrush ( BrushStyle style )
      • 
+
    • void setBrush ( const TQColor & color )
      • 
+
    • TQPoint pos () const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • const TQColor & backgroundColor () const
      • 
+
    • void setBackgroundColor ( const TQColor & c )
      • 
+
    • BGMode backgroundMode () const
      • 
+
    • void setBackgroundMode ( BGMode m )
      • 
+
    • RasterOp rasterOp () const
      • 
+
    • void setRasterOp ( RasterOp r )
      • 
+
    • const TQPoint & brushOrigin () const
      • 
+
    • void setBrushOrigin ( int x, int y )
      • 
+
    • void setBrushOrigin ( const TQPoint & p )
      • 
+
    • bool hasViewXForm () const
      • 
+
    • bool hasWorldXForm () const
      • 
+
    • void setViewXForm ( bool enable )
      • 
+
    • TQRect window () const
      • 
+
    • void setWindow ( const TQRect & r )
      • 
+
    • void setWindow ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
      • 
+
    • TQRect viewport () const
      • 
+
    • void setViewport ( const TQRect & r )
      • 
+
    • void setViewport ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
      • 
+
    • void setWorldXForm ( bool enable )
      • 
+
    • const TQWMatrix & worldMatrix () const
      • 
+
    • void setWorldMatrix ( const TQWMatrix & m, bool combine = FALSE )
      • 
+
    • void saveWorldMatrix ()  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void restoreWorldMatrix ()  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void scale ( double sx, double sy )
      • 
+
    • void shear ( double sh, double sv )
      • 
+
    • void rotate ( double a )
      • 
+
    • void translate ( double dx, double dy )
      • 
+
    • void resetXForm ()
      • 
+
    • TQPoint xForm ( const TQPoint & pv ) const
      • 
+
    • TQRect xForm ( const TQRect & rv ) const
      • 
+
    • TQPointArray xForm ( const TQPointArray & av ) const
      • 
+
    • TQPointArray xForm ( const TQPointArray & av, int index, int npoints ) const
      • 
+
    • TQPoint xFormDev ( const TQPoint & pd ) const
      • 
+
    • TQRect xFormDev ( const TQRect & rd ) const
      • 
+
    • TQPointArray xFormDev ( const TQPointArray & ad ) const
      • 
+
    • TQPointArray xFormDev ( const TQPointArray & ad, int index, int npoints ) const
      • 
+
    • void setClipping ( bool enable )
      • 
+
    • bool hasClipping () const
      • 
+
    • TQRegion clipRegion ( CoordinateMode m = CoordDevice ) const
      • 
+
    • void setClipRect ( const TQRect & r, CoordinateMode m = CoordDevice )
      • 
+
    • void setClipRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h, CoordinateMode m = CoordDevice )
      • 
+
    • void setClipRegion ( const TQRegion & rgn, CoordinateMode m = CoordDevice )
      • 
+
    • void drawPoint ( int x, int y )
      • 
+
    • void drawPoint ( const TQPoint & p )
      • 
+
    • void drawPoints ( const TQPointArray & a, int index = 0, int npoints = -1 )
      • 
+
    • void moveTo ( int x, int y )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void moveTo ( const TQPoint & p )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void lineTo ( int x, int y )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void lineTo ( const TQPoint & p )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void drawLine ( int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2 )
      • 
+
    • void drawLine ( const TQPoint & p1, const TQPoint & p2 )
      • 
+
    • void drawRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
      • 
+
    • void drawRect ( const TQRect & r )
      • 
+
    • void drawWinFocusRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
      • 
+
    • void drawWinFocusRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColor & bgColor )
      • 
+
    • void drawWinFocusRect ( const TQRect & r )
      • 
+
    • void drawWinFocusRect ( const TQRect & r, const TQColor & bgColor )
      • 
+
    • void drawRoundRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int xRnd = 25, int yRnd = 25 )
      • 
+
    • void drawRoundRect ( const TQRect & r, int xRnd = 25, int yRnd = 25 )
      • 
+
    • void drawEllipse ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
      • 
+
    • void drawEllipse ( const TQRect & r )
      • 
+
    • void drawArc ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int a, int alen )
      • 
+
    • void drawArc ( const TQRect & r, int a, int alen )
      • 
+
    • void drawPie ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int a, int alen )
      • 
+
    • void drawPie ( const TQRect & r, int a, int alen )
      • 
+
    • void drawChord ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int a, int alen )
      • 
+
    • void drawChord ( const TQRect & r, int a, int alen )
      • 
+
    • void drawLineSegments ( const TQPointArray & a, int index = 0, int nlines = -1 )
      • 
+
    • void drawPolyline ( const TQPointArray & a, int index = 0, int npoints = -1 )
      • 
+
    • void drawPolygon ( const TQPointArray & a, bool winding = FALSE, int index = 0, int npoints = -1 )
      • 
+
    • void drawConvexPolygon ( const TQPointArray & pa, int index = 0, int npoints = -1 )
      • 
+
    • void drawCubicBezier ( const TQPointArray & a, int index = 0 )
      • 
+
    • void drawPixmap ( int x, int y, const TQPixmap & pixmap, int sx = 0, int sy = 0, int sw = -1, int sh = -1 )
      • 
+
    • void drawPixmap ( const TQPoint & p, const TQPixmap & pm, const TQRect & sr )
      • 
+
    • void drawPixmap ( const TQPoint & p, const TQPixmap & pm )
      • 
+
    • void drawPixmap ( const TQRect & r, const TQPixmap & pm )
      • 
+
    • void drawImage ( int x, int y, const TQImage & image, int sx = 0, int sy = 0, int sw = -1, int sh = -1, int conversionFlags = 0 )
      • 
+
    • void drawImage ( const TQPoint &, const TQImage &, const TQRect & sr, int conversionFlags = 0 )
      • 
+
    • void drawImage ( const TQPoint & p, const TQImage & i, int conversion_flags = 0 )
      • 
+
    • void drawImage ( const TQRect & r, const TQImage & i )
      • 
+
    • void drawTiledPixmap ( int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQPixmap & pixmap, int sx = 0, int sy = 0 )
      • 
+
    • void drawTiledPixmap ( const TQRect & r, const TQPixmap & pm, const TQPoint & sp )
      • 
+
    • void drawTiledPixmap ( const TQRect & r, const TQPixmap & pm )
      • 
+
    • void drawPicture ( const TQPicture & pic )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void drawPicture ( int x, int y, const TQPicture & pic )
      • 
+
    • void drawPicture ( const TQPoint & p, const TQPicture & pic )
      • 
+
    • void fillRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQBrush & brush )
      • 
+
    • void fillRect ( const TQRect & r, const TQBrush & brush )
      • 
+
    • void eraseRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
      • 
+
    • void eraseRect ( const TQRect & r )
      • 
+
    • enum TextDirection { Auto, RTL, LTR }
      • 
+
    • void drawText ( int x, int y, const TQString &, int len = -1, TextDirection dir = Auto )
      • 
+
    • void drawText ( const TQPoint &, const TQString &, int len = -1, TextDirection dir = Auto )
      • 
+
    • void drawText ( int x, int y, const TQString &, int pos, int len, TextDirection dir = Auto )
      • 
+
    • void drawText ( const TQPoint & p, const TQString &, int pos, int len, TextDirection dir = Auto )
      • 
+
    • void drawText ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int flags, const TQString &, int len = -1, TQRect * br = 0, TQTextParag ** internal = 0 )
      • 
+
    • void drawText ( const TQRect & r, int tf, const TQString & str, int len = -1, TQRect * brect = 0, TQTextParag ** internal = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQRect boundingRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int flags, const TQString &, int len = -1, TQTextParag ** intern = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQRect boundingRect ( const TQRect & r, int flags, const TQString & str, int len = -1, TQTextParag ** internal = 0 )
      • 
+
    • int tabStops () const
      • 
+
    • void setTabStops ( int ts )
      • 
+
    • int * tabArray () const
      • 
+
    • void setTabArray ( int * ta )
      • 
+
    • HDC handle () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • void redirect ( TQPaintDevice * pdev, TQPaintDevice * replacement )
      • 
+
    
+
    Related Functions
    
+
      
+
    • void qDrawShadeLine ( TQPainter * p, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2, const TQColorGroup & g, bool sunken, int lineWidth, int midLineWidth )
      • 
+
    • void qDrawShadeRect ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColorGroup & g, bool sunken, int lineWidth, int midLineWidth, const TQBrush * fill )
      • 
+
    • void qDrawShadePanel ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColorGroup & g, bool sunken, int lineWidth, const TQBrush * fill )
      • 
+
    • void qDrawWinButton ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColorGroup & g, bool sunken, const TQBrush * fill )
      • 
+
    • void qDrawWinPanel ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColorGroup & g, bool sunken, const TQBrush * fill )
      • 
+
    • void qDrawPlainRect ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColor & c, int lineWidth, const TQBrush * fill )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQPainter class does low-level painting e.g. on widgets.
+
     
+
+
+
     The painter provides highly optimized functions to do most of the
+drawing GUI programs require. TQPainter can draw everything from
+simple lines to complex shapes like pies and chords. It can also
+draw aligned text and pixmaps. Normally, it draws in a "natural"
+coordinate system, but it can also do view and world
+transformation.
+
     The typical use of a painter is:
+
     
      
+
    •  Construct a painter.
+
    •  Set a pen, a brush etc.
+
    •  Draw.
+
    •  Destroy the painter.
+
    
+
     Mostly, all this is done inside a paint event. (In fact, 99% of
+all TQPainter use is in a reimplementation of
+TQWidget::paintEvent(), and the painter is heavily optimized for
+such use.) Here's one very simple example:
+
     
    +    void SimpleExampleWidget::paintEvent()
+    {
+        TQPainter paint( this );
+        paint.setPen( TQt::blue );
+        paint.drawText( rect(), AlignCenter, "The Text" );
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     Usage is simple, and there are many settings you can use:
+
     
      
+
       
    •  font() is the currently set font. If you set a font that isn't
+available, TQt finds a close match. In fact font() returns what
+you set using setFont() and fontInfo() returns the font actually
+being used (which may be the same).
+
       
    •  brush() is the currently set brush; the color or pattern that's
+used for filling e.g. circles.
+
       
    •  pen() is the currently set pen; the color or stipple that's
+used for drawing lines or boundaries.
+
       
    •  backgroundMode() is Opaque or Transparent, i.e. whether
+backgroundColor() is used or not.
+
       
    •  backgroundColor() only applies when backgroundMode() is Opaque
+and pen() is a stipple. In that case, it describes the color of
+the background pixels in the stipple.
+
       
    •  rasterOp() is how pixels drawn interact with the pixels already
+there.
+
       
    •  brushOrigin() is the origin of the tiled brushes, normally the
+origin of the window.
+
       
    •  viewport(), window(), worldMatrix() and many more make up the
+painter's coordinate transformation system. See The Coordinate System for an explanation of
+this, or see below for a very brief overview of the functions.
+
       
    •  hasClipping() is whether the painter clips at all. (The paint
+device clips, too.) If the painter clips, it clips to clipRegion().
+
       
    •  pos() is the current position, set by moveTo() and used by
+lineTo().
+
       
    
+
     Note that some of these settings mirror settings in some paint
+devices, e.g. TQWidget::font(). TQPainter::begin() (or the TQPainter
+constructor) copies these attributes from the paint device.
+Calling, for example, TQWidget::setFont() doesn't take effect until
+the next time a painter begins painting on it.
+
     save() saves all of these settings on an internal stack, restore()
+pops them back.
+
     The core functionality of TQPainter is drawing, and there are
+functions to draw most primitives: drawPoint(), drawPoints(),
+drawLine(), drawRect(), drawWinFocusRect(), drawRoundRect(),
+drawEllipse(), drawArc(), drawPie(), drawChord(),
+drawLineSegments(), drawPolyline(), drawPolygon(),
+drawConvexPolygon() and drawCubicBezier(). All of these functions
+take integer coordinates; there are no floating-point versions
+since we want drawing to be as fast as possible.
+
     There are functions to draw pixmaps/images, namely drawPixmap(),
+drawImage() and drawTiledPixmap(). drawPixmap() and drawImage()
+produce the same result, except that drawPixmap() is faster
+on-screen and drawImage() faster and sometimes better on TQPrinter
+and TQPicture.
+
     Text drawing is done using drawText(), and when you need
+fine-grained positioning, boundingRect() tells you where a given
+drawText() command would draw.
+
     There is a drawPicture() function that draws the contents of an
+entire TQPicture using this painter. drawPicture() is the only
+function that disregards all the painter's settings: the TQPicture
+has its own settings.
+
     Normally, the TQPainter operates on the device's own coordinate
+system (usually pixels), but TQPainter has good support for
+coordinate transformation. See The Coordinate
+    System for a more general overview and a simple example.
+
     The most common functions used are scale(), rotate(), translate()
+and shear(), all of which operate on the worldMatrix().
+setWorldMatrix() can replace or add to the currently set
+worldMatrix().
+
     setViewport() sets the rectangle on which TQPainter operates. The
+default is the entire device, which is usually fine, except on
+printers. setWindow() sets the coordinate system, that is, the
+rectangle that maps to viewport(). What's drawn inside the
+window() ends up being inside the viewport(). The window's
+default is the same as the viewport, and if you don't use the
+transformations, they are optimized away, gaining another little
+bit of speed.
+
     After all the coordinate transformation is done, TQPainter can clip
+the drawing to an arbitrary rectangle or region. hasClipping() is
+TRUE if TQPainter clips, and clipRegion() returns the clip region.
+You can set it using either setClipRegion() or setClipRect().
+Note that the clipping can be slow. It's all system-dependent,
+but as a rule of thumb, you can assume that drawing speed is
+inversely proportional to the number of rectangles in the clip
+region.
+
     After TQPainter's clipping, the paint device may also clip. For
+example, most widgets clip away the pixels used by child widgets,
+and most printers clip away an area near the edges of the paper.
+This additional clipping is not reflected by the return value of
+clipRegion() or hasClipping().
+
     TQPainter also includes some less-used functions that are very
+useful on those occasions when they're needed.
+
     isActive() indicates whether the painter is active. begin() (and
+the most usual constructor) makes it active. end() (and the
+destructor) deactivates it. If the painter is active, device()
+returns the paint device on which the painter paints.
+
     Sometimes it is desirable to make someone else paint on an unusual
+TQPaintDevice. TQPainter supports a static function to do this,
+redirect(). We recommend not using it, but for some hacks it's
+perfect.
+
     setTabStops() and setTabArray() can change where the tab stops
+are, but these are very seldomly used.
+
     Warning: Note that TQPainter does not attempt to work around
+coordinate limitations in the underlying window system. Some
+platforms may behave incorrectly with coordinates as small as
++/-4000.
+
+
     
    See also TQPaintDevice, TQWidget, TQPixmap, TQPrinter, TQPicture, Application Walkthrough, Coordinate System Overview, Graphics Classes, and Image Processing Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQPainter::CoordinateMode
    
+
+
      
+
    • TQPainter::CoordDevice
+
    • TQPainter::CoordPainter
+
     
    See also clipRegion().
+
+
    TQPainter::TextDirection
    
+
+
      
+
    • TQPainter::Auto
+
    • TQPainter::RTL - right to left
+
    • TQPainter::LTR - left to right
+
     
    See also drawText().
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQPainter::TQPainter ()
+
    
+Constructs a painter.
+
     Notice that all painter settings (setPen, setBrush etc.) are reset
+to default values when begin() is called.
+
     
    See also begin() and end().
+
+
    TQPainter::TQPainter ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, bool unclipped = FALSE )
+
    
+Constructs a painter that begins painting the paint device pd
+immediately. Depending on the underlying graphic system the
+painter will paint over children of the paintdevice if unclipped is TRUE.
+
     This constructor is convenient for short-lived painters, e.g. in a
+paint event and should be used
+only once. The constructor calls begin() for you and the TQPainter
+destructor automatically calls end().
+
     Here's an example using begin() and end():
+
    +        void MyWidget::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
+        {
+            TQPainter p;
+            p.begin( this );
+            p.drawLine( ... );  // drawing code
+            p.end();
+        }
+    
    
+ 
+
     The same example using this constructor:
+
    +        void MyWidget::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
+        {
+            TQPainter p( this );
+            p.drawLine( ... );  // drawing code
+        }
+    
    
+ 
+
     Since the constructor cannot provide feedback when the initialization
+of the painter failed you should rather use begin() and end() to paint
+on external devices, e.g. printers.
+
     
    See also begin() and end().
+
+
    TQPainter::TQPainter ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, const TQWidget * copyAttributes, bool unclipped = FALSE )
+
    
+Constructs a painter that begins painting the paint device pd
+immediately, with the default arguments taken from copyAttributes. The painter will paint over children of the paint
+device if unclipped is TRUE (although this is not supported on
+all platforms).
+
     
    See also begin().
+
+
    TQPainter::~TQPainter ()
+
    
+Destroys the painter.
+
+
    const TQColor & TQPainter::backgroundColor () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the current background color.
+
     
    See also setBackgroundColor() and TQColor.
+
+
    BGMode TQPainter::backgroundMode () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the current background mode.
+
     
    See also setBackgroundMode() and BGMode.
+
+
    bool TQPainter::begin ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, bool unclipped = FALSE )
+
    
+Begins painting the paint device pd and returns TRUE if
+successful; otherwise returns FALSE. If unclipped is TRUE, the
+painting will not be clipped at the paint device's boundaries,
+(although this is not supported by all platforms).
+
     The errors that can occur are serious problems, such as these:
+
     
    +        p->begin( 0 ); // impossible - paint device cannot be 0
+
+        TQPixmap pm( 0, 0 );
+        p->begin( pm ); // impossible - pm.isNull();
+
+        p->begin( myWidget );
+        p2->begin( myWidget ); // impossible - only one painter at a time
+    
    
+ 
+
     Note that most of the time, you can use one of the constructors
+instead of begin(), and that end() is automatically done at
+destruction.
+
     Warning: A paint device can only be painted by one painter at a
+time.
+
     
    See also end() and flush().
+
+
    Examples: aclock/aclock.cpp, desktop/desktop.cpp, drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, hello/hello.cpp, picture/picture.cpp, t10/cannon.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    bool TQPainter::begin ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, const TQWidget * copyAttributes, bool unclipped = FALSE )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This version opens the painter on a paint device pd and sets
+the initial pen, background color and font from copyAttributes,
+painting over the paint device's children when unclipped is
+TRUE. This is equivalent to:
+
     
    +        TQPainter p;
+        p.begin( pd );
+        p.setPen( copyAttributes->foregroundColor() );
+        p.setBackgroundColor( copyAttributes->backgroundColor() );
+        p.setFont( copyAttributes->font() );
+    
    
+ 
+
     This begin function is convenient for double buffering. When you
+draw in a pixmap instead of directly in a widget (to later bitBlt
+the pixmap into the widget) you will need to set the widget's
+font etc. This function does exactly that.
+
     Example:
+
    +        void MyWidget::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
+        {
+            TQPixmap pm(size());
+            TQPainter p;
+            p.begin(&pm, this);
+            // ... potentially flickering paint operation ...
+            p.end();
+            bitBlt(this, 0, 0, &pm);
+        }
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also end().
+
+
    TQRect TQPainter::boundingRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int flags, const TQString &, int len = -1, TQTextParag ** intern = 0 )
+
    
+
+
     Returns the bounding rectangle of the aligned text that would be
+printed with the corresponding drawText() function using the first
+len characters of the string if len is > -1, or the whole of
+the string if len is -1. The drawing, and hence the bounding
+rectangle, is constrained to the rectangle that begins at point (x, y) with width w and hight h, or to the
+rectangle required to draw the text, whichever is the larger.
+
     The flags argument is
+the bitwise OR of the following flags:
+
    
+
     Flag Meaning
+
     AlignAuto aligns according to the language, usually left.
+
     AlignLeft aligns to the left border.
+
     AlignRight aligns to the right border.
+
     AlignHCenter aligns horizontally centered.
+
     AlignTop aligns to the top border.
+
     AlignBottom aligns to the bottom border.
+
     AlignVCenter aligns vertically centered.
+
     AlignCenter (== AlignHCenter | AlignVCenter).
+
     SingleLine ignores newline characters in the text.
+
     ExpandTabs expands tabs.
+
     ShowPrefix interprets "&x" as "x".
+
     WordBreak breaks the text to fit the rectangle.
+
    
+
     Horizontal alignment defaults to AlignLeft and vertical
+alignment defaults to AlignTop.
+
     If several of the horizontal or several of the vertical alignment flags
+are set, the resulting alignment is undefined.
+
     The intern parameter should not be used.
+
     
    See also TQt::TextFlags.
+
+
    TQRect TQPainter::boundingRect ( const TQRect & r, int flags, const TQString & str, int len = -1, TQTextParag ** internal = 0 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the bounding rectangle of the aligned text that would be
+printed with the corresponding drawText() function using the first
+len characters from str if len is > -1, or the whole of
+str if len is -1. The drawing, and hence the bounding
+rectangle, is constrained to the rectangle r, or to the
+rectangle required to draw the text, whichever is the larger.
+
     The internal parameter should not be used.
+
     
    See also drawText(), fontMetrics(), TQFontMetrics::boundingRect(), and TQt::TextFlags.
+
+
    const TQBrush & TQPainter::brush () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the painter's current brush.
+
     
    See also TQPainter::setBrush().
+
+
    Examples: themes/metal.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
+
    const TQPoint & TQPainter::brushOrigin () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the brush origin currently set.
+
     
    See also setBrushOrigin().
+
+
    TQRegion TQPainter::clipRegion ( CoordinateMode m = CoordDevice ) const
+
    
+Returns the currently set clip region. Note that the clip region
+is given in physical device coordinates and not subject to any
+coordinate transformation if m is
+equal to CoordDevice (the default). If m equals CoordPainter the returned region is in model coordinates.
+
     
    See also setClipRegion(), setClipRect(), setClipping(), and TQPainter::CoordinateMode.
+
+
    Example: themes/wood.cpp.
+
    TQPaintDevice * TQPainter::device () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the paint device on which this painter is currently
+painting, or 0 if the painter is not active.
+
     
    See also TQPaintDevice::paintingActive().
+
+
    Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, listboxcombo/listboxcombo.cpp, and mdi/application.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::drawArc ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int a, int alen )
+
    
+Draws an arc defined by the rectangle (x, y, w, h), the start
+angle a and the arc length alen.
+
     The angles a and alen are 1/16th of a degree, i.e. a full
+circle equals 5760 (16*360). Positive values of a and alen
+mean counter-clockwise while negative values mean the clockwise
+direction. Zero degrees is at the 3 o'clock position.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQPainter p( myWidget );
+        p.drawArc( 10,10, 70,100, 100*16, 160*16 ); // draws a "(" arc
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also drawPie() and drawChord().
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawArc ( const TQRect & r, int a, int alen )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Draws the arc that fits inside the rectangle r with start angle
+a and arc length alen.
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawChord ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int a, int alen )
+
    
+Draws a chord defined by the rectangle (x, y, w, h), the start
+angle a and the arc length alen.
+
     The chord is filled with the current brush().
+
     The angles a and alen are 1/16th of a degree, i.e. a full
+circle equals 5760 (16*360). Positive values of a and alen
+mean counter-clockwise while negative values mean the clockwise
+direction. Zero degrees is at the 3 o'clock position.
+
     
    See also drawArc() and drawPie().
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawChord ( const TQRect & r, int a, int alen )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Draws a chord that fits inside the rectangle r with start angle
+a and arc length alen.
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawConvexPolygon ( const TQPointArray & pa, int index = 0, int npoints = -1 )
+
    
+Draws the convex polygon defined by the npoints points in pa
+starting at pa[index] (index defaults to 0).
+
     If the supplied polygon is not convex, the results are undefined.
+
     On some platforms (e.g. X Window), this is faster than
+drawPolygon().
+
     Warning: On X11, coordinates that do not fit into 16-bit signed
+values are truncated. This limitation is expected to go away in
+TQt 4.
+
+
    Example: aclock/aclock.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::drawCubicBezier ( const TQPointArray & a, int index = 0 )
+
    
+Draws a cubic Bezier curve defined by the control points in a,
+starting at a[index] (index defaults to 0).
+
     Control points after a[index + 3] are ignored. Nothing happens
+if there aren't enough control points.
+
     Warning: On X11, coordinates that do not fit into 16-bit signed
+values are truncated. This limitation is expected to go away in
+TQt 4.
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawEllipse ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
+
    
+Draws an ellipse with center at (x + w/2, y + h/2) and size (w, h).
+
+
    Examples: drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, multiple/ax2.h, picture/picture.cpp, and tictac/tictac.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::drawEllipse ( const TQRect & r )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Draws the ellipse that fits inside rectangle r.
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawImage ( int x, int y, const TQImage & image, int sx = 0, int sy = 0, int sw = -1, int sh = -1, int conversionFlags = 0 )
+
    
+Draws at (x, y) the sw by sh area of pixels from (sx, sy) in image, using conversionFlags if the image
+needs to be converted to a pixmap. The default value for conversionFlags is 0; see convertFromImage() for information about
+what other values do.
+
     This function may convert image to a pixmap and then draw it,
+if device() is a TQPixmap or a TQWidget, or else draw it directly,
+if device() is a TQPrinter or TQPicture.
+
     Currently alpha masks of the image are ignored when painting on a TQPrinter.
+
     
    See also drawPixmap() and TQPixmap::convertFromImage().
+
+
    Example: canvas/canvas.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::drawImage ( const TQPoint &, const TQImage &, const TQRect & sr, int conversionFlags = 0 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Draws the rectangle sr from the image at the given point.
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawImage ( const TQPoint & p, const TQImage & i, int conversion_flags = 0 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Draws the image i at point p.
+
     If the image needs to be modified to fit in a lower-resolution
+result (e.g. converting from 32-bit to 8-bit), use the conversion_flags to specify how you'd prefer this to happen.
+
     
    See also TQt::ImageConversionFlags.
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawImage ( const TQRect & r, const TQImage & i )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Draws the image i into the rectangle r. The image will be
+scaled to fit the rectangle if image and rectangle dimensions
+differ.
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawLine ( int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2 )
+
    
+Draws a line from (x1, y1) to (x2, y2) and sets the
+current pen position to (x2, y2).
+
     
    See also pen().
+
+
    Examples: aclock/aclock.cpp, drawlines/connect.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, splitter/splitter.cpp, themes/metal.cpp, and themes/wood.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::drawLine ( const TQPoint & p1, const TQPoint & p2 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Draws a line from point p1 to point p2.
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawLineSegments ( const TQPointArray & a, int index = 0, int nlines = -1 )
+
    
+Draws nlines separate lines from points defined in a,
+starting at a[index] (index defaults to 0). If nlines is
+-1 (the default) all points until the end of the array are used
+(i.e. (a.size()-index)/2 lines are drawn).
+
     Draws the 1st line from a[index] to a[index+1]. Draws the
+2nd line from a[index+2] to a[index+3] etc.
+
     Warning: On X11, coordinates that do not fit into 16-bit signed
+values are truncated. This limitation is expected to go away in
+TQt 4.
+
     
    See also drawPolyline(), drawPolygon(), and TQPen.
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawPicture ( int x, int y, const TQPicture & pic )
+
    
+Replays the picture pic translated by (x, y).
+
     This function does exactly the same as TQPicture::play() when
+called with (x, y) = (0, 0).
+
+
    Examples: picture/picture.cpp and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::drawPicture ( const TQPicture & pic )
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Use one of the other TQPainter::drawPicture() functions with a (0, 0)
+offset instead.
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawPicture ( const TQPoint & p, const TQPicture & pic )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Draws picture pic at point p.
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawPie ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int a, int alen )
+
    
+Draws a pie defined by the rectangle (x, y, w, h), the start
+angle a and the arc length alen.
+
     The pie is filled with the current brush().
+
     The angles a and alen are 1/16th of a degree, i.e. a full
+circle equals 5760 (16*360). Positive values of a and alen
+mean counter-clockwise while negative values mean the clockwise
+direction. Zero degrees is at the 3 o'clock position.
+
     
    See also drawArc() and drawChord().
+
+
    Examples: drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, grapher/grapher.cpp, t10/cannon.cpp, and t9/cannon.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::drawPie ( const TQRect & r, int a, int alen )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Draws a pie segment that fits inside the rectangle r with start
+angle a and arc length alen.
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawPixmap ( int x, int y, const TQPixmap & pixmap, int sx = 0, int sy = 0, int sw = -1, int sh = -1 )
+
    
+Draws a pixmap at (x, y) by copying a part of pixmap into
+the paint device.
+
     (x, y) specifies the top-left point in the paint device that is
+to be drawn onto. (sx, sy) specifies the top-left point in pixmap that is to be drawn. The default is (0, 0).
+
     (sw, sh) specifies the size of the pixmap that is to be drawn.
+The default, (-1, -1), means all the way to the bottom right of
+the pixmap.
+
     Currently the mask of the pixmap or it's alpha channel are ignored
+when painting on a TQPrinter.
+
     
    See also bitBlt() and TQPixmap::setMask().
+
+
    Examples: grapher/grapher.cpp, picture/picture.cpp, qdir/qdir.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, t10/cannon.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::drawPixmap ( const TQPoint & p, const TQPixmap & pm, const TQRect & sr )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Draws the rectangle sr of pixmap pm with its origin at point
+p.
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawPixmap ( const TQPoint & p, const TQPixmap & pm )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Draws the pixmap pm with its origin at point p.
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawPixmap ( const TQRect & r, const TQPixmap & pm )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Draws the pixmap pm into the rectangle r. The pixmap is
+scaled to fit the rectangle, if image and rectangle size disagree.
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawPoint ( int x, int y )
+
    
+Draws/plots a single point at (x, y) using the current pen.
+
     
    See also TQPen.
+
+
    Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp and drawlines/connect.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::drawPoint ( const TQPoint & p )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Draws the point p.
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawPoints ( const TQPointArray & a, int index = 0, int npoints = -1 )
+
    
+Draws/plots an array of points, a, using the current pen.
+
     If index is non-zero (the default is zero) only points from index are drawn. If npoints is negative (the default) the rest
+of the points from index are drawn. If npoints is zero or
+greater, npoints points are drawn.
+
     Warning: On X11, coordinates that do not fit into 16-bit signed
+values are truncated. This limitation is expected to go away in
+TQt 4.
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawPolygon ( const TQPointArray & a, bool winding = FALSE, int index = 0, int npoints = -1 )
+
    
+Draws the polygon defined by the npoints points in a
+starting at a[index]. (index defaults to 0.)
+
     If npoints is -1 (the default) all points until the end of the
+array are used (i.e. a.size()-index line segments define the
+polygon).
+
     The first point is always connected to the last point.
+
     The polygon is filled with the current brush(). If winding is
+TRUE, the polygon is filled using the winding fill algorithm. If
+winding is FALSE, the polygon is filled using the even-odd
+(alternative) fill algorithm.
+
     Warning: On X11, coordinates that do not fit into 16-bit signed
+values are truncated. This limitation is expected to go away in
+TQt 4.
+
     
    See also drawLineSegments(), drawPolyline(), and TQPen.
+
+
    Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp and picture/picture.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::drawPolyline ( const TQPointArray & a, int index = 0, int npoints = -1 )
+
    
+Draws the polyline defined by the npoints points in a
+starting at a[index]. (index defaults to 0.)
+
     If npoints is -1 (the default) all points until the end of the
+array are used (i.e. a.size()-index-1 line segments are drawn).
+
     Warning: On X11, coordinates that do not fit into 16-bit signed
+values are truncated. This limitation is expected to go away in
+TQt 4.
+
     
    See also drawLineSegments(), drawPolygon(), and TQPen.
+
+
    Examples: scribble/scribble.cpp and themes/metal.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::drawRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
+
    
+Draws a rectangle with upper left corner at (x, y) and with
+width w and height h.
+
     
    See also TQPen and drawRoundRect().
+
+
    Examples: drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, picture/picture.cpp, t10/cannon.cpp, t11/cannon.cpp, t9/cannon.cpp, tooltip/tooltip.cpp, and trivial/trivial.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::drawRect ( const TQRect & r )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Draws the rectangle r.
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawRoundRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int xRnd = 25, int yRnd = 25 )
+
    
+Draws a rectangle with rounded corners at (x, y), with width w and height h.
+
     The xRnd and yRnd arguments specify how rounded the corners
+should be. 0 is angled corners, 99 is maximum roundedness.
+
     The width and height include all of the drawn lines.
+
     
    See also drawRect() and TQPen.
+
+
    Examples: drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::drawRoundRect ( const TQRect & r, int xRnd = 25, int yRnd = 25 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Draws a rounded rectangle r, rounding to the x position xRnd
+and the y position yRnd on each corner.
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawText ( const TQPoint & p, const TQString &, int pos, int len, TextDirection dir = Auto )
+
    
+
+
     Draws the text from position pos, at point p. If len is
+-1 the entire string is drawn, otherwise just the first len
+characters. The text's direction is specified by dir.
+
     Note that the meaning of y is not the same for the two
+drawText() varieties. For overloads that take a simple x, y
+pair (or a point), the y value is the text's baseline; for
+overloads that take a rectangle, rect.y() is the top of the
+rectangle and the text is aligned within that rectangle in
+accordance with the alignment flags.
+
     
    See also TQPainter::TextDirection.
+
+
    Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp, drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, grapher/grapher.cpp, picture/picture.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, t8/cannon.cpp, and trivial/trivial.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::drawText ( int x, int y, const TQString &, int len = -1, TextDirection dir = Auto )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Draws the given text at position x, y. If len is -1 (the
+default) all the text is drawn, otherwise the first len
+characters are drawn. The text's direction is given by dir.
+
     
    See also TQPainter::TextDirection.
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawText ( const TQPoint &, const TQString &, int len = -1, TextDirection dir = Auto )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Draws the text at the given point.
+
     
    See also TQPainter::TextDirection.
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawText ( int x, int y, const TQString &, int pos, int len, TextDirection dir = Auto )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Draws the text from position pos, at point (x, y). If len is
+-1 the entire string is drawn, otherwise just the first len
+characters. The text's direction is specified by dir.
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawText ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int flags, const TQString &, int len = -1, TQRect * br = 0, TQTextParag ** internal = 0 )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Draws the given text within the rectangle starting at x, y,
+with width w and height h. If len is -1 (the default) all
+the text is drawn, otherwise the first len characters are
+drawn. The text's flags that are given in the flags parameter
+are TQt::AlignmentFlags and TQt::TextFlags OR'd together. br (if not null) is set to the actual bounding rectangle of the
+output. The internal parameter is for internal use only.
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawText ( const TQRect & r, int tf, const TQString & str, int len = -1, TQRect * brect = 0, TQTextParag ** internal = 0 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Draws at most len characters from str in the rectangle r.
+
     This function draws formatted text. The tf text format is
+really of type TQt::AlignmentFlags and TQt::TextFlags OR'd
+together.
+
     Horizontal alignment defaults to AlignAuto and vertical alignment
+defaults to AlignTop.
+
     brect (if not null) is set to the actual bounding rectangle of
+the output. internal is, yes, internal.
+
     
    See also boundingRect().
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawTiledPixmap ( int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQPixmap & pixmap, int sx = 0, int sy = 0 )
+
    
+Draws a tiled pixmap in the specified rectangle.
+
     (x, y) specifies the top-left point in the paint device that is
+to be drawn onto; with the width and height given by w and h. (sx, sy) specifies the top-left point in pixmap that is
+to be drawn. The default is (0, 0).
+
     Calling drawTiledPixmap() is similar to calling drawPixmap()
+several times to fill (tile) an area with a pixmap, but is
+potentially much more efficient depending on the underlying window
+system.
+
     
    See also drawPixmap().
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawTiledPixmap ( const TQRect & r, const TQPixmap & pm, const TQPoint & sp )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Draws a tiled pixmap, pm, inside rectangle r with its origin
+at point sp.
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawTiledPixmap ( const TQRect & r, const TQPixmap & pm )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Draws a tiled pixmap, pm, inside rectangle r.
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawWinFocusRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColor & bgColor )
+
    
+Draws a Windows focus rectangle with upper left corner at (x,
+y) and with width w and height h using a pen color that
+contrasts with bgColor.
+
     This function draws a stippled rectangle (XOR is not used) that is
+used to indicate keyboard focus (when the TQApplication::style() is
+WindowStyle).
+
     The pen color used to draw the rectangle is either white or black
+depending on the color of bgColor (see TQColor::gray()).
+
     Warning: This function draws nothing if the coordinate system has
+been rotated or sheared.
+
     
    See also drawRect() and TQApplication::style().
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawWinFocusRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Draws a Windows focus rectangle with upper left corner at (x,
+y) and with width w and height h.
+
     This function draws a stippled XOR rectangle that is used to
+indicate keyboard focus (when TQApplication::style() is WindowStyle).
+
     Warning: This function draws nothing if the coordinate system has
+been rotated or sheared.
+
     
    See also drawRect() and TQApplication::style().
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawWinFocusRect ( const TQRect & r )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Draws rectangle r as a window focus rectangle.
+
+
    void TQPainter::drawWinFocusRect ( const TQRect & r, const TQColor & bgColor )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Draws rectangle r as a window focus rectangle using background
+color bgColor.
+
+
    bool TQPainter::end ()
+
    
+Ends painting. Any resources used while painting are released.
+
     Note that while you mostly don't need to call end(), the
+destructor will do it, there is at least one common case when it
+is needed, namely double buffering.
+
     
    +        TQPainter p( myPixmap, this )
+        // ...
+        p.end(); // stops drawing on myPixmap
+        p.begin( this );
+        p.drawPixmap( 0, 0, myPixmap );
+    
    
+ 
+
     Since you can't draw a TQPixmap while it is being painted, it is
+necessary to close the active painter.
+
     
    See also begin() and isActive().
+
+
    Examples: aclock/aclock.cpp, desktop/desktop.cpp, hello/hello.cpp, picture/picture.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, t10/cannon.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::eraseRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
+
    
+
+
     Erases the area inside x, y, w, h. Equivalent to
+fillRect( x, y, w, h, backgroundColor() ).
+
+
    Examples: listboxcombo/listboxcombo.cpp and showimg/showimg.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::eraseRect ( const TQRect & r )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Erases the area inside the rectangle r.
+
+
    void TQPainter::fillRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQBrush & brush )
+
    
+Fills the rectangle (x, y, w, h) with the brush.
+
     You can specify a TQColor as brush, since there is a TQBrush
+constructor that takes a TQColor argument and creates a solid
+pattern brush.
+
     
    See also drawRect().
+
+
    Examples: listboxcombo/listboxcombo.cpp, multiple/ax1.h, progress/progress.cpp, qdir/qdir.cpp, qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp, themes/metal.cpp, and themes/wood.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::fillRect ( const TQRect & r, const TQBrush & brush )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Fills the rectangle r using brush brush.
+
+
    void TQPainter::flush ( const TQRegion & region, CoordinateMode cm = CoordDevice )
+
    
+Flushes any buffered drawing operations inside the region region using clipping mode cm.
+
     The flush may update the whole device if the platform does not
+support flushing to a specified region.
+
     
    See also CoordinateMode.
+
+
    void TQPainter::flush ()
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Flushes any buffered drawing operations.
+
+
    const TQFont & TQPainter::font () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the currently set painter font.
+
     
    See also setFont() and TQFont.
+
+
    Example: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
+
    TQFontInfo TQPainter::fontInfo () const
+
    
+Returns the font info for the painter, if the painter is active.
+It is not possible to obtain font information for an inactive
+painter, so the return value is undefined if the painter is not
+active.
+
     
    See also fontMetrics() and isActive().
+
+
    TQFontMetrics TQPainter::fontMetrics () const
+
    
+Returns the font metrics for the painter, if the painter is
+active. It is not possible to obtain metrics for an inactive
+painter, so the return value is undefined if the painter is not
+active.
+
     
    See also fontInfo() and isActive().
+
+
    Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, desktop/desktop.cpp, drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
+
    HDC TQPainter::handle () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the platform-dependent handle used for drawing. Using this
+function is not portable.
+
+
    bool TQPainter::hasClipping () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if clipping has been set; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setClipping().
+
+
    Example: themes/wood.cpp.
+
    bool TQPainter::hasViewXForm () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if view transformation is enabled; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     
    See also setViewXForm() and xForm().
+
+
    bool TQPainter::hasWorldXForm () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if world transformation is enabled; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     
    See also setWorldXForm().
+
+
    bool TQPainter::isActive () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the painter is active painting, i.e. begin() has
+been called and end() has not yet been called; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     
    See also TQPaintDevice::paintingActive().
+
+
    Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp and helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::lineTo ( int x, int y )
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Use drawLine() instead.
+
     Draws a line from the current pen position to (x, y) and sets
+(x, y) to be the new current pen position.
+
     
    See also TQPen, moveTo(), drawLine(), and pos().
+
+
    void TQPainter::lineTo ( const TQPoint & p )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Draws a line to the point p.
+
+
    void TQPainter::moveTo ( int x, int y )
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Sets the current pen position to (x, y)
+
     
    See also lineTo() and pos().
+
+
    void TQPainter::moveTo ( const TQPoint & p )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Moves to the point p.
+
+
    const TQPen & TQPainter::pen () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the painter's current pen.
+
     
    See also setPen().
+
+
    Examples: multiple/ax2.h, progress/progress.cpp, and themes/wood.cpp.
+
    TQPoint TQPainter::pos () const
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Returns the current position of the  pen.
+
     
    See also moveTo().
+
+
    RasterOp TQPainter::rasterOp () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the current raster operation.
+
     
    See also setRasterOp() and RasterOp.
+
+
    void TQPainter::redirect ( TQPaintDevice * pdev, TQPaintDevice * replacement ) [static]
+
    
+Redirects all paint commands for a paint device, pdev, to
+another paint device, replacement, unless replacement is 0.
+If replacement is 0, the redirection for pdev is removed.
+
     In general, you'll probably find calling TQPixmap::grabWidget() or
+TQPixmap::grabWindow() is an easier solution.
+
+
    void TQPainter::resetXForm ()
+
    
+Resets any transformations that were made using translate(), scale(),
+shear(), rotate(), setWorldMatrix(), setViewport() and
+setWindow().
+
     
    See also worldMatrix(), viewport(), and window().
+
+
    void TQPainter::restore ()
+
    
+Restores the current painter state (pops a saved state off the
+stack).
+
     
    See also save().
+
+
    Example: aclock/aclock.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::restoreWorldMatrix ()
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     We recommend using restore() instead.
+
+
    void TQPainter::rotate ( double a )
+
    
+Rotates the coordinate system a degrees counterclockwise.
+
     
    See also translate(), scale(), shear(), resetXForm(), setWorldMatrix(), and xForm().
+
+
    Examples: aclock/aclock.cpp, t10/cannon.cpp, and t9/cannon.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::save ()
+
    
+Saves the current painter state (pushes the state onto a stack). A
+save() must be followed by a corresponding restore(). end()
+unwinds the stack.
+
     
    See also restore().
+
+
    Example: aclock/aclock.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::saveWorldMatrix ()
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     We recommend using save() instead.
+
+
    void TQPainter::scale ( double sx, double sy )
+
    
+Scales the coordinate system by (sx, sy).
+
     
    See also translate(), shear(), rotate(), resetXForm(), setWorldMatrix(), and xForm().
+
+
    Example: xform/xform.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::setBackgroundColor ( const TQColor & c )
+
    
+Sets the background color of the painter to c.
+
     The background color is the color that is filled in when drawing
+opaque text, stippled lines and bitmaps. The background color has
+no effect in transparent background mode (which is the default).
+
     
    See also backgroundColor(), setBackgroundMode(), and BackgroundMode.
+
+
    void TQPainter::setBackgroundMode ( BGMode m )
+
    
+Sets the background mode of the painter to m, which must be
+either TransparentMode (the default) or OpaqueMode.
+
     Transparent mode draws stippled lines and text without setting the
+background pixels. Opaque mode fills these space with the current
+background color.
+
     Note that in order to draw a bitmap or pixmap transparently, you
+must use TQPixmap::setMask().
+
     
    See also backgroundMode() and setBackgroundColor().
+
+
    Example: picture/picture.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::setBrush ( BrushStyle style )
+
    
+Sets the painter's brush to black color and the specified style.
+
     
    See also brush() and TQBrush.
+
+
    Examples: aclock/aclock.cpp, drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, picture/picture.cpp, t10/cannon.cpp, t9/cannon.cpp, themes/wood.cpp, and tooltip/tooltip.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::setBrush ( const TQBrush & brush )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the painter's brush to brush.
+
     The brush defines how shapes are filled.
+
     
    See also brush().
+
+
    void TQPainter::setBrush ( const TQColor & color )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the painter's brush to have style SolidPattern and the
+specified color.
+
     
    See also brush() and TQBrush.
+
+
    void TQPainter::setBrushOrigin ( int x, int y )
+
    
+Sets the brush origin to (x, y).
+
     The brush origin specifies the (0, 0) coordinate of the painter's
+brush. This setting only applies to pattern brushes and pixmap
+brushes.
+
     
    See also brushOrigin().
+
+
    void TQPainter::setBrushOrigin ( const TQPoint & p )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the brush origin to point p.
+
+
    void TQPainter::setClipRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h, CoordinateMode m = CoordDevice )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the clip region to the rectangle x, y, w, h and
+enables clipping. The clip mode is set to m.
+
     If m is CoordDevice (the default), the coordinates given for
+the clip region are taken to be physical device coordinates and
+are not subject to any coordinate
+    transformations. If m is CoordPainter, the
+coordinates given for the clip region are taken to be model
+coordinates.
+
     
    See also setClipRegion(), clipRegion(), setClipping(), and TQPainter::CoordinateMode.
+
+
    Examples: grapher/grapher.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, splitter/splitter.cpp, and trivial/trivial.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::setClipRect ( const TQRect & r, CoordinateMode m = CoordDevice )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the clip region to the rectangle r and enables clipping.
+The clip mode is set to m.
+
     
    See also CoordinateMode.
+
+
    void TQPainter::setClipRegion ( const TQRegion & rgn, CoordinateMode m = CoordDevice )
+
    
+Sets the clip region to rgn and enables clipping. The clip mode
+is set to m.
+
     Note that the clip region is given in physical device coordinates
+and not subject to any coordinate
+    transformation.
+
     
    See also setClipRect(), clipRegion(), setClipping(), and CoordinateMode.
+
+
    Examples: qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::setClipping ( bool enable )
+
    
+Enables clipping if enable is TRUE, or disables clipping if enable is FALSE.
+
     
    See also hasClipping(), setClipRect(), and setClipRegion().
+
+
    Example: themes/wood.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::setFont ( const TQFont & font )
+
    
+Sets the painter's font to font.
+
     This font is used by subsequent drawText() functions. The text
+color is the same as the pen color.
+
     
    See also font() and drawText().
+
+
    Examples: drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, grapher/grapher.cpp, hello/hello.cpp, picture/picture.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, t13/cannon.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::setPen ( const TQPen & pen )
+
    
+Sets a new painter pen.
+
     The pen defines how to draw lines and outlines, and it also
+defines the text color.
+
     
    See also pen().
+
+
    Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp, drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, multiple/ax2.h, progress/progress.cpp, t9/cannon.cpp, themes/metal.cpp, and themes/wood.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::setPen ( PenStyle style )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the painter's pen to have style style, width 0 and black
+color.
+
     
    See also pen() and TQPen.
+
+
    void TQPainter::setPen ( const TQColor & color )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the painter's pen to have style SolidLine, width 0 and the
+specified color.
+
     
    See also pen() and TQPen.
+
+
    void TQPainter::setRasterOp ( RasterOp r )
+
    
+Sets the raster operation to r.
+The default is CopyROP.
+
     
    See also rasterOp() and TQt::RasterOp.
+
+
    void TQPainter::setTabArray ( int * ta )
+
    
+Sets the tab stop array to ta. This puts tab stops at ta[0],
+ta[1] and so on. The array is null-terminated.
+
     If both a tab array and a tab top size is set, the tab array wins.
+
     
    See also tabArray(), setTabStops(), drawText(), and fontMetrics().
+
+
    void TQPainter::setTabStops ( int ts )
+
    
+Set the tab stop width to ts, i.e. locates tab stops at ts,
+2*ts, 3*ts and so on.
+
     Tab stops are used when drawing formatted text with ExpandTabs
+set. This fixed tab stop value is used only if no tab array is set
+(which is the default case).
+
     A value of 0 (the default) implies a tabstop setting of 8 times the width of the
+character 'x' in the font currently set on the painter.
+
     
    See also tabStops(), setTabArray(), drawText(), and fontMetrics().
+
+
    void TQPainter::setViewXForm ( bool enable )
+
    
+Enables view transformations if enable is TRUE, or disables
+view transformations if enable is FALSE.
+
     
    See also hasViewXForm(), setWindow(), setViewport(), setWorldMatrix(), setWorldXForm(), and xForm().
+
+
    void TQPainter::setViewport ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
+
    
+Sets the viewport rectangle view transformation for the painter
+and enables view transformation.
+
     The viewport rectangle is part of the view transformation. The
+viewport specifies the device coordinate system and is specified
+by the x, y, w width and h height parameters. Its
+sister, the window(), specifies the logical coordinate system.
+
     The default viewport rectangle is the same as the device's
+rectangle. See the Coordinate System Overview for an overview of coordinate transformation.
+
     
    See also viewport(), setWindow(), setViewXForm(), setWorldMatrix(), setWorldXForm(), and xForm().
+
+
    Example: aclock/aclock.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::setViewport ( const TQRect & r )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the painter's viewport to rectangle r.
+
+
    void TQPainter::setWindow ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
+
    
+Sets the window rectangle view transformation for the painter and
+enables view transformation.
+
     The window rectangle is part of the view transformation. The
+window specifies the logical coordinate system and is specified by
+the x, y, w width and h height parameters. Its sister,
+the viewport(), specifies the device coordinate system.
+
     The default window rectangle is the same as the device's
+rectangle. See the Coordinate System Overview for an overview of coordinate transformation.
+
     
    See also window(), setViewport(), setViewXForm(), setWorldMatrix(), and setWorldXForm().
+
+
    Examples: aclock/aclock.cpp and drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::setWindow ( const TQRect & r )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the painter's window to rectangle r.
+
+
    void TQPainter::setWorldMatrix ( const TQWMatrix & m, bool combine = FALSE )
+
    
+Sets the world transformation matrix to m and enables world
+transformation.
+
     If combine is TRUE, then m is combined with the current
+transformation matrix, otherwise m replaces the current
+transformation matrix.
+
     If m is the identity matrix and combine is FALSE, this
+function calls setWorldXForm(FALSE). (The identity matrix is the
+matrix where TQWMatrix::m11() and TQWMatrix::m22() are 1.0 and the
+rest are 0.0.)
+
     World transformations are applied after the view transformations
+(i.e. window and viewport).
+
     The following functions can transform the coordinate system without using
+a TQWMatrix:
+
    
+
     They operate on the painter's worldMatrix() and are implemented like this:
+
     
    +        void TQPainter::rotate( double a )
+        {
+            TQWMatrix m;
+            m.rotate( a );
+            setWorldMatrix( m, TRUE );
+        }
+    
    
+ 
+
     Note that you should always use combine when you are drawing
+into a TQPicture. Otherwise it may not be possible to replay the
+picture with additional transformations. Using translate(),
+scale(), etc., is safe.
+
     For a brief overview of coordinate transformation, see the Coordinate System Overview.
+
     
    See also worldMatrix(), setWorldXForm(), setWindow(), setViewport(), setViewXForm(), xForm(), and TQWMatrix.
+
+
    Examples: drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    void TQPainter::setWorldXForm ( bool enable )
+
    
+Enables world transformations if enable is TRUE, or disables
+world transformations if enable is FALSE. The world
+transformation matrix is not changed.
+
     
    See also setWorldMatrix(), setWindow(), setViewport(), setViewXForm(), and xForm().
+
+
    void TQPainter::shear ( double sh, double sv )
+
    
+Shears the coordinate system by (sh, sv).
+
     
    See also translate(), scale(), rotate(), resetXForm(), setWorldMatrix(), and xForm().
+
+
    int * TQPainter::tabArray () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the currently set tab stop array.
+
     
    See also setTabArray().
+
+
    int TQPainter::tabStops () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the tab stop setting.
+
     
    See also setTabStops().
+
+
    void TQPainter::translate ( double dx, double dy )
+
    
+Translates the coordinate system by (dx, dy). After this call,
+(dx, dy) is added to points.
+
     For example, the following code draws the same point twice:
+
    +        void MyWidget::paintEvent()
+        {
+            TQPainter paint( this );
+
+            paint.drawPoint( 0, 0 );
+
+            paint.translate( 100.0, 40.0 );
+            paint.drawPoint( -100, -40 );
+        }
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also scale(), shear(), rotate(), resetXForm(), setWorldMatrix(), and xForm().
+
+
    Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, t10/cannon.cpp, t9/cannon.cpp, themes/metal.cpp, themes/wood.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    TQRect TQPainter::viewport () const
+
    
+Returns the viewport rectangle.
+
     
    See also setViewport() and setViewXForm().
+
+
    Example: aclock/aclock.cpp.
+
    TQRect TQPainter::window () const
+
    
+Returns the window rectangle.
+
     
    See also setWindow() and setViewXForm().
+
+
    const TQWMatrix & TQPainter::worldMatrix () const
+
    
+Returns the world transformation matrix.
+
     
    See also setWorldMatrix().
+
+
    TQPoint TQPainter::xForm ( const TQPoint & pv ) const
+
    
+Returns the point pv transformed from model coordinates to
+device coordinates.
+
     
    See also xFormDev() and TQWMatrix::map().
+
+
    TQRect TQPainter::xForm ( const TQRect & rv ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the rectangle rv transformed from model coordinates to
+device coordinates.
+
     If world transformation is enabled and rotation or shearing has
+been specified, then the bounding rectangle is returned.
+
     
    See also xFormDev() and TQWMatrix::map().
+
+
    TQPointArray TQPainter::xForm ( const TQPointArray & av ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the point array av transformed from model coordinates
+to device coordinates.
+
     
    See also xFormDev() and TQWMatrix::map().
+
+
    TQPointArray TQPainter::xForm ( const TQPointArray & av, int index, int npoints ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the point array av transformed from model coordinates
+to device coordinates. The index is the first point in the
+array and npoints denotes the number of points to be
+transformed. If npoints is negative, all points from av[index] until the last point in the array are transformed.
+
     The returned point array consists of the number of points that
+were transformed.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQPointArray a(10);
+        TQPointArray b;
+        b = painter.xForm(a, 2, 4);  // b.size() == 4
+        b = painter.xForm(a, 2, -1); // b.size() == 8
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also xFormDev() and TQWMatrix::map().
+
+
    TQRect TQPainter::xFormDev ( const TQRect & rd ) const
+
    
+Returns the rectangle rd transformed from device coordinates to
+model coordinates.
+
     If world transformation is enabled and rotation or shearing is
+used, then the bounding rectangle is returned.
+
     
    See also xForm() and TQWMatrix::map().
+
+
    TQPoint TQPainter::xFormDev ( const TQPoint & pd ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the point pd transformed from device coordinates to
+model coordinates.
+
     
    See also xForm() and TQWMatrix::map().
+
+
    TQPointArray TQPainter::xFormDev ( const TQPointArray & ad ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the point array ad transformed from device coordinates
+to model coordinates.
+
     
    See also xForm() and TQWMatrix::map().
+
+
    TQPointArray TQPainter::xFormDev ( const TQPointArray & ad, int index, int npoints ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the point array ad transformed from device coordinates
+to model coordinates. The index is the first point in the array
+and npoints denotes the number of points to be transformed. If
+npoints is negative, all points from ad[index] until the
+last point in the array are transformed.
+
     The returned point array consists of the number of points that
+were transformed.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQPointArray a(10);
+        TQPointArray b;
+        b = painter.xFormDev(a, 1, 3);  // b.size() == 3
+        b = painter.xFormDev(a, 1, -1); // b.size() == 9
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also xForm() and TQWMatrix::map().
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    void qDrawPlainRect ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColor & c, int lineWidth, const TQBrush * fill )
+
    
+
+
     #include <ntqdrawutil.h>
+
     Draws the plain rectangle specified by (x, y, w, h)
+using the painter p.
+
     The color argument c specifies the line color.
+
     The lineWidth argument specifies the line width.
+
     The rectangle's interior is filled with the fill brush unless
+fill is 0.
+
     If you want to use a TQFrame widget instead, you can make it
+display a plain rectangle, for example TQFrame::setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Box | TQFrame::Plain ).
+
     Warning: This function does not look at TQWidget::style() or
+TQApplication::style(). Use the drawing functions in TQStyle to make
+widgets that follow the current GUI style.
+
     
    See also qDrawShadeRect() and TQStyle::drawPrimitive().
+
+
    void qDrawShadeLine ( TQPainter * p, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2, const TQColorGroup & g, bool sunken, int lineWidth, int midLineWidth )
+
    
+
+
     #include <ntqdrawutil.h>
+
     Draws a horizontal (y1 == y2) or vertical (x1 == x2)
+shaded line using the painter p.
+
     Nothing is drawn if y1 != y2 and x1 != x2 (i.e. the
+line is neither horizontal nor vertical).
+
     The color group argument g specifies the shading colors (light, dark and middle colors).
+
     The line appears sunken if sunken is TRUE, or raised if sunken is FALSE.
+
     The lineWidth argument specifies the line width for each of the
+lines. It is not the total line width.
+
     The midLineWidth argument specifies the width of a middle line
+drawn in the TQColorGroup::mid() color.
+
     If you want to use a TQFrame widget instead, you can make it
+display a shaded line, for example TQFrame::setFrameStyle( TQFrame::HLine | TQFrame::Sunken ).
+
     Warning: This function does not look at TQWidget::style() or
+TQApplication::style(). Use the drawing functions in TQStyle to make
+widgets that follow the current GUI style.
+
     
    See also qDrawShadeRect(), qDrawShadePanel(), and TQStyle::drawPrimitive().
+
+
    void qDrawShadePanel ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColorGroup & g, bool sunken, int lineWidth, const TQBrush * fill )
+
    
+
+
     #include <ntqdrawutil.h>
+
     Draws the shaded panel specified by (x, y, w, h) using
+the painter p.
+
     The color group argument g specifies the shading colors (light, dark and middle colors).
+
     The panel appears sunken if sunken is TRUE, or raised if sunken is FALSE.
+
     The lineWidth argument specifies the line width.
+
     The panel's interior is filled with the fill brush unless fill is 0.
+
     If you want to use a TQFrame widget instead, you can make it
+display a shaded panel, for example TQFrame::setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Panel | TQFrame::Sunken ).
+
     Warning: This function does not look at TQWidget::style() or
+TQApplication::style(). Use the drawing functions in TQStyle to make
+widgets that follow the current GUI style.
+
     
    See also qDrawWinPanel(), qDrawShadeLine(), qDrawShadeRect(), and TQStyle::drawPrimitive().
+
+
    void qDrawShadeRect ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColorGroup & g, bool sunken, int lineWidth, int midLineWidth, const TQBrush * fill )
+
    
+
+
     #include <ntqdrawutil.h>
+
     Draws the shaded rectangle specified by (x, y, w, h)
+using the painter p.
+
     The color group argument g specifies the shading colors (light, dark and middle colors).
+
     The rectangle appears sunken if sunken is TRUE, or raised if sunken is FALSE.
+
     The lineWidth argument specifies the line width for each of the
+lines. It is not the total line width.
+
     The midLineWidth argument specifies the width of a middle line
+drawn in the TQColorGroup::mid() color.
+
     The rectangle's interior is filled with the fill brush unless
+fill is 0.
+
     If you want to use a TQFrame widget instead, you can make it
+display a shaded rectangle, for example TQFrame::setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Box | TQFrame::Raised ).
+
     Warning: This function does not look at TQWidget::style() or
+TQApplication::style(). Use the drawing functions in TQStyle to make
+widgets that follow the current GUI style.
+
     
    See also qDrawShadeLine(), qDrawShadePanel(), qDrawPlainRect(), TQStyle::drawItem(), TQStyle::drawControl(), and TQStyle::drawComplexControl().
+
+
    void qDrawWinButton ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColorGroup & g, bool sunken, const TQBrush * fill )
+
    
+
+
     #include <ntqdrawutil.h>
+
     Draws the Windows-style button specified by (x, y, w, h) using the painter p.
+
     The color group argument g specifies the shading colors (light, dark and middle colors).
+
     The button appears sunken if sunken is TRUE, or raised if sunken is FALSE.
+
     The line width is 2 pixels.
+
     The button's interior is filled with the *fill brush unless fill is 0.
+
     Warning: This function does not look at TQWidget::style() or
+TQApplication::style(). Use the drawing functions in TQStyle to make
+widgets that follow the current GUI style.
+
     
    See also qDrawWinPanel() and TQStyle::drawControl().
+
+
    void qDrawWinPanel ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColorGroup & g, bool sunken, const TQBrush * fill )
+
    
+
+
     #include <ntqdrawutil.h>
+
     Draws the Windows-style panel specified by (x, y, w, h) using the painter p.
+
     The color group argument g specifies the shading colors.
+
     The panel appears sunken if sunken is TRUE, or raised if sunken is FALSE.
+
     The line width is 2 pixels.
+
     The button's interior is filled with the fill brush unless fill is 0.
+
     If you want to use a TQFrame widget instead, you can make it
+display a shaded panel, for example TQFrame::setFrameStyle( TQFrame::WinPanel | TQFrame::Raised ).
+
     Warning: This function does not look at TQWidget::style() or
+TQApplication::style(). Use the drawing functions in TQStyle to make
+widgets that follow the current GUI style.
+
     
    See also qDrawShadePanel(), qDrawWinButton(), and TQStyle::drawPrimitive().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqpair.html b/doc/html/ntqpair.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..97d7afb89
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqpair.html
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQPair Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQPair Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQPair class is a value-based template class that provides a pair of elements.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqpair.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • typedef T1 first_type
      • 
+
    • typedef T2 second_type
      • 
+
    • TQPair ()
      • 
+
    • TQPair ( const T1 & t1, const T2 & t2 )
      • 
+
    • TQPair<T1, T2> & operator= ( const TQPair<T1, T2> & other )
      • 
+
    
+
    Related Functions
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQPair class is a value-based template class that provides a pair of elements.
+
     
+
+
+
     TQPair is a TQt implementation of an STL-like pair. It can be used
+in your application if the standard pair<> is not available on
+your target platforms.
+
     TQPair<T1, T2> defines a template instance to create a pair of
+values that contains two values of type T1 and T2. Please note
+that TQPair does not store pointers to the two elements; it holds a
+copy of every member. This is why these kinds of classes are
+called value based. If you're interested in pointer based
+classes see, for example, TQPtrList and TQDict.
+
     TQPair holds one copy of type T1 and one copy of type T2, but does
+not provide iterators to access these elements. Instead, the two
+elements (first and second) are public member variables of
+the pair. TQPair owns the contained elements. For more relaxed
+ownership semantics, see TQPtrCollection and friends which are
+pointer-based containers.
+
     Some classes cannot be used within a TQPair: for example, all
+classes derived from TQObject and thus all classes that implement
+widgets. Only "values" can be used in a TQPair. To qualify as a
+value the class must provide:
+
     
      
+
    •  A copy constructor
+
    •  An assignment operator
+
    •  A constructor that takes no arguments
+
    
+
     Note that C++ defaults to field-by-field assignment operators and
+copy constructors if no explicit version is supplied. In many
+cases this is sufficient.
+
     TQPair uses an STL-like syntax to manipulate and address the
+objects it contains. See the TQTL
+    documentation for more information.
+
     Functions that need to return two values can use a TQPair.
+
    See also TQt Template Library Classes, Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQPair::first_type
     
+The type of the first element in the pair. 
+
    TQPair::second_type
     
+The type of the second element in the pair. 
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQPair::TQPair ()
+
    
+
+
     Constructs an empty pair. The first and second elements are
+default constructed. 
+
+
    TQPair::TQPair ( const T1 & t1, const T2 & t2 )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a pair and initializes the first element with t1
+and the second element with t2.
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    TQPair qMakePair ( T1 t1, T2 t2 )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     This is a template convenience function. It is used to create a
+TQPair<> object that contains t1 and t2.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqpalette.html b/doc/html/ntqpalette.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c62c1110e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqpalette.html
@@ -0,0 +1,308 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQPalette Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQPalette Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQPalette class contains color groups for each widget state.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqpalette.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQPalette ()
      • 
+
    • TQPalette ( const TQColor & button )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • TQPalette ( const TQColor & button, const TQColor & background )
      • 
+
    • TQPalette ( const TQColorGroup & active, const TQColorGroup & disabled, const TQColorGroup & inactive )
      • 
+
    • TQPalette ( const TQPalette & p )
      • 
+
    • ~TQPalette ()
      • 
+
    • TQPalette & operator= ( const TQPalette & p )
      • 
+
    • enum ColorGroup { Disabled, Active, Inactive, NColorGroups, Normal = Active }
      • 
+
    • const TQColor & color ( ColorGroup gr, TQColorGroup::ColorRole r ) const
      • 
+
    • const TQBrush & brush ( ColorGroup gr, TQColorGroup::ColorRole r ) const
      • 
+
    • void setColor ( ColorGroup gr, TQColorGroup::ColorRole r, const TQColor & c )
      • 
+
    • void setBrush ( ColorGroup gr, TQColorGroup::ColorRole r, const TQBrush & b )
      • 
+
    • void setColor ( TQColorGroup::ColorRole r, const TQColor & c )
      • 
+
    • void setBrush ( TQColorGroup::ColorRole r, const TQBrush & b )
      • 
+
    • TQPalette copy () const
      • 
+
    • const TQColorGroup & active () const
      • 
+
    • const TQColorGroup & disabled () const
      • 
+
    • const TQColorGroup & inactive () const
      • 
+
    • const TQColorGroup & normal () const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void setActive ( const TQColorGroup & g )
      • 
+
    • void setDisabled ( const TQColorGroup & g )
      • 
+
    • void setInactive ( const TQColorGroup & g )
      • 
+
    • void setNormal ( const TQColorGroup & cg )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • bool operator== ( const TQPalette & p ) const
      • 
+
    • bool operator!= ( const TQPalette & p ) const
      • 
+
    • bool isCopyOf ( const TQPalette & p )
      • 
+
    • int serialNumber () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Related Functions
    
+
      
+
    • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQPalette & p )
      • 
+
    • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQPalette & p )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
     The TQPalette class contains color groups for each widget state.
+
     
+
+
+
+
+
     A palette consists of three color groups: active, disabled,
+and inactive. All widgets contain a palette, and all widgets in
+TQt use their palette to draw themselves. This makes the user
+interface easily configurable and easier to keep consistent.
+
     If you create a new widget we strongly recommend that you use the
+colors in the palette rather than hard-coding specific colors.
+
     The color groups:
+
      
+
    •  The active() group is used for the window that has keyboard focus.
+
    •  The inactive() group is used for other windows.
+
    •  The disabled() group is used for widgets (not windows) that are
+disabled for some reason.
+
    
+
     Both active and inactive windows can contain disabled widgets.
+(Disabled widgets are often called inaccessible or grayed out.)
+
     In Motif style, active() and inactive() look the same. In Windows
+2000 style and Macintosh Platinum style, the two styles look
+slightly different.
+
     There are setActive(), setInactive(), and setDisabled() functions
+to modify the palette. (TQt also supports a normal() group; this is
+an obsolete alias for active(), supported for backwards
+compatibility.)
+
     Colors and brushes can be set for particular roles in any of a
+palette's color groups with setColor() and setBrush().
+
     You can copy a palette using the copy constructor and test to see
+if two palettes are identical using isCopyOf().
+
     
    See also TQApplication::setPalette(), TQWidget::palette, TQColorGroup, TQColor, Widget Appearance and Style, Graphics Classes, Image Processing Classes, and Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQPalette::ColorGroup
    
+
+
      
+
    • TQPalette::Disabled
+
    • TQPalette::Active
+
    • TQPalette::Inactive
+
    • TQPalette::NColorGroups
+
    • TQPalette::Normal - synonym for Active
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQPalette::TQPalette ()
+
    
+Constructs a palette that consists of color groups with only black
+colors.
+
+
    TQPalette::TQPalette ( const TQColor & button )
+
    This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Constructs a palette from the button color. The other colors are
+automatically calculated, based on this color. Background will be
+the button color as well.
+
+
    TQPalette::TQPalette ( const TQColor & button, const TQColor & background )
+
    
+Constructs a palette from a button color and a background.
+The other colors are automatically calculated, based on these
+colors.
+
+
    TQPalette::TQPalette ( const TQColorGroup & active, const TQColorGroup & disabled, const TQColorGroup & inactive )
+
    
+Constructs a palette that consists of the three color groups active, disabled and inactive. See the Detailed Description for definitions of the color groups
+and TQColorGroup::ColorRole for definitions of each color role
+in the three groups.
+
     
    See also TQColorGroup and TQColorGroup::ColorRole.
+
+
    TQPalette::TQPalette ( const TQPalette & p )
+
    
+Constructs a copy of p.
+
     This constructor is fast (it uses copy-on-write).
+
+
    TQPalette::~TQPalette ()
+
    
+Destroys the palette.
+
+
    const TQColorGroup & TQPalette::active () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the active color group of this palette.
+
     
    See also TQColorGroup, setActive(), inactive(), and disabled().
+
+
    Examples: themes/metal.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
+
    const TQBrush & TQPalette::brush ( ColorGroup gr, TQColorGroup::ColorRole r ) const
+
    
+Returns the brush in color group gr, used for color role r.
+
     
    See also color(), setBrush(), and TQColorGroup::ColorRole.
+
+
    const TQColor & TQPalette::color ( ColorGroup gr, TQColorGroup::ColorRole r ) const
+
    
+Returns the color in color group gr, used for color role r.
+
     
    See also brush(), setColor(), and TQColorGroup::ColorRole.
+
+
    TQPalette TQPalette::copy () const
+
    
+Returns a deep copy of this palette.
+
     Warning: This is slower than the copy constructor and assignment
+operator and offers no benefits.
+
+
    const TQColorGroup & TQPalette::disabled () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the disabled color group of this palette.
+
     
    See also TQColorGroup, setDisabled(), active(), and inactive().
+
+
    Examples: themes/metal.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
+
    const TQColorGroup & TQPalette::inactive () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the inactive color group of this palette.
+
     
    See also TQColorGroup, setInactive(), active(), and disabled().
+
+
    bool TQPalette::isCopyOf ( const TQPalette & p )
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this palette and p are copies of each other,
+i.e. one of them was created as a copy of the other and neither
+was subsequently modified; otherwise returns FALSE. This is much
+stricter than equality.
+
     
    See also operator=() and operator==().
+
+
    const TQColorGroup & TQPalette::normal () const
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
     Returns the active color group. Use active() instead.
+
     
    See also setActive() and active().
+
+
    bool TQPalette::operator!= ( const TQPalette & p ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE (slowly) if this palette is different from p;
+otherwise returns FALSE (usually tquickly).
+
+
    TQPalette & TQPalette::operator= ( const TQPalette & p )
+
    
+Assigns p to this palette and returns a reference to this
+palette.
+
     This is fast (it uses copy-on-write).
+
     
    See also copy().
+
+
    bool TQPalette::operator== ( const TQPalette & p ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE (usually tquickly) if this palette is equal to p;
+otherwise returns FALSE (slowly).
+
+
    int TQPalette::serialNumber () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a number that uniquely identifies this TQPalette object.
+The serial number is intended for caching. Its value may not be
+used for anything other than equality testing.
+
     Note that TQPalette uses copy-on-write, and the serial number
+changes during the lazy copy operation (detach()), not during a
+shallow copy (copy constructor or assignment).
+
     
    See also TQPixmap, TQPixmapCache, and TQCache.
+
+
    void TQPalette::setActive ( const TQColorGroup & g )
+
    
+Sets the Active color group to g.
+
     
    See also active(), setDisabled(), setInactive(), and TQColorGroup.
+
+
    void TQPalette::setBrush ( ColorGroup gr, TQColorGroup::ColorRole r, const TQBrush & b )
+
    
+Sets the brush in color group gr, used for color role r, to
+b.
+
     
    See also brush(), setColor(), and TQColorGroup::ColorRole.
+
+
    void TQPalette::setBrush ( TQColorGroup::ColorRole r, const TQBrush & b )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the brush in for color role r in all three color groups to
+b.
+
     
    See also brush(), setColor(), TQColorGroup::ColorRole, active(), inactive(), and disabled().
+
+
    void TQPalette::setColor ( ColorGroup gr, TQColorGroup::ColorRole r, const TQColor & c )
+
    
+Sets the brush in color group gr, used for color role r, to
+the solid color c.
+
     
    See also setBrush(), color(), and TQColorGroup::ColorRole.
+
+
    Example: themes/themes.cpp.
+
    void TQPalette::setColor ( TQColorGroup::ColorRole r, const TQColor & c )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the brush color used for color role r to color c in all
+three color groups.
+
     
    See also color(), setBrush(), and TQColorGroup::ColorRole.
+
+
    void TQPalette::setDisabled ( const TQColorGroup & g )
+
    
+Sets the Disabled color group to g.
+
     
    See also disabled(), setActive(), and setInactive().
+
+
    void TQPalette::setInactive ( const TQColorGroup & g )
+
    
+Sets the Inactive color group to g.
+
     
    See also active(), setDisabled(), setActive(), and TQColorGroup.
+
+
    void TQPalette::setNormal ( const TQColorGroup & cg )
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
     Sets the active color group to cg. Use setActive() instead.
+
     
    See also setActive() and active().
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQPalette & p )
+
    
+
+
     Writes the palette, p to the stream s and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQPalette & p )
+
    
+
+
     Reads a palette from the stream, s into the palette p, and
+returns a reference to the stream.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqpen.html b/doc/html/ntqpen.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ff962fceb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqpen.html
@@ -0,0 +1,287 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQPen Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQPen Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQPen class defines how a TQPainter should draw lines and outlines
+of shapes.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqpen.h>
+
    Inherits TQt.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQPen ()
      • 
+
    • TQPen ( PenStyle style )
      • 
+
    • TQPen ( const TQColor & color, uint width = 0, PenStyle style = SolidLine )
      • 
+
    • TQPen ( const TQColor & cl, uint w, PenStyle s, PenCapStyle c, PenJoinStyle j )
      • 
+
    • TQPen ( const TQPen & p )
      • 
+
    • ~TQPen ()
      • 
+
    • TQPen & operator= ( const TQPen & p )
      • 
+
    • PenStyle style () const
      • 
+
    • void setStyle ( PenStyle s )
      • 
+
    • uint width () const
      • 
+
    • void setWidth ( uint w )
      • 
+
    • const TQColor & color () const
      • 
+
    • void setColor ( const TQColor & c )
      • 
+
    • PenCapStyle capStyle () const
      • 
+
    • void setCapStyle ( PenCapStyle c )
      • 
+
    • PenJoinStyle joinStyle () const
      • 
+
    • void setJoinStyle ( PenJoinStyle j )
      • 
+
    • bool operator== ( const TQPen & p ) const
      • 
+
    • bool operator!= ( const TQPen & p ) const
      • 
+
    
+
    Related Functions
    
+
      
+
    • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQPen & p )
      • 
+
    • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQPen & p )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQPen class defines how a TQPainter should draw lines and outlines
+of shapes.
+
     
+
+
+
+
     A pen has a style, width, color, cap style and join style.
+
     The pen style defines the line type. The default pen style is TQt::SolidLine. Setting the style to NoPen tells the painter to
+not draw lines or outlines.
+
     When drawing 1 pixel wide diagonal lines you can either use a very
+fast algorithm (specified by a line width of 0, which is the
+default), or a slower but more accurate algorithm (specified by a
+line width of 1). For horizontal and vertical lines a line width
+of 0 is the same as a line width of 1. The cap and join style have
+no effect on 0-width lines.
+
     The pen color defines the color of lines and text. The default
+line color is black. The TQColor documentation lists predefined
+colors.
+
     The cap style defines how the end points of lines are drawn. The
+join style defines how the joins between two lines are drawn when
+multiple connected lines are drawn (TQPainter::drawPolyline()
+etc.). The cap and join styles only apply to wide lines, i.e. when
+the width is 1 or greater.
+
     Use the TQBrush class to specify fill styles.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQPainter painter;
+    TQPen     pen( red, 2 );             // red solid line, 2 pixels wide
+    painter.begin( &anyPaintDevice );   // paint something
+    painter.setPen( pen );              // set the red, wide pen
+    painter.drawRect( 40,30, 200,100 ); // draw a rectangle
+    painter.setPen( blue );             // set blue pen, 0 pixel width
+    painter.drawLine( 40,30, 240,130 ); // draw a diagonal in rectangle
+    painter.end();                      // painting done
+    
    
+ 
+
     See the TQt::PenStyle enum type for a complete list of pen
+styles.
+
     With reference to the end points of lines, for wide (non-0-width)
+pens it depends on the cap style whether the end point is drawn or
+not. TQPainter will try to make sure that the end point is drawn
+for 0-width pens, but this cannot be absolutely guaranteed because
+the underlying drawing engine is free to use any (typically
+accelerated) algorithm for drawing 0-width lines. On all tested
+systems, however, the end point of at least all non-diagonal lines
+are drawn.
+
     A pen's color(), width(), style(), capStyle() and joinStyle() can
+be set in the constructor or later with setColor(), setWidth(),
+setStyle(), setCapStyle() and setJoinStyle(). Pens may also be
+compared and streamed.
+
     
    Pen styles
     
+
     
    See also TQPainter, TQPainter::setPen(), Graphics Classes, Image Processing Classes, and Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQPen::TQPen ()
+
    
+Constructs a default black solid line pen with 0 width, which
+renders lines 1 pixel wide (fast diagonals).
+
+
    TQPen::TQPen ( PenStyle style )
+
    
+Constructs a black pen with 0 width (fast diagonals) and style style.
+
     
    See also setStyle().
+
+
    TQPen::TQPen ( const TQColor & color, uint width = 0, PenStyle style = SolidLine )
+
    
+Constructs a pen with the specified color, width and style.
+
     
    See also setWidth(), setStyle(), and setColor().
+
+
    TQPen::TQPen ( const TQColor & cl, uint w, PenStyle s, PenCapStyle c, PenJoinStyle j )
+
    
+Constructs a pen with the specified color cl and width w.
+The pen style is set to s, the pen cap style to c and the
+pen join style to j.
+
     A line width of 0 will produce a 1 pixel wide line using a fast
+algorithm for diagonals. A line width of 1 will also produce a 1
+pixel wide line, but uses a slower more accurate algorithm for
+diagonals. For horizontal and vertical lines a line width of 0 is
+the same as a line width of 1. The cap and join style have no
+effect on 0-width lines.
+
     
    See also setWidth(), setStyle(), and setColor().
+
+
    TQPen::TQPen ( const TQPen & p )
+
    
+Constructs a pen that is a copy of p.
+
+
    TQPen::~TQPen ()
+
    
+Destroys the pen.
+
+
    PenCapStyle TQPen::capStyle () const
+
    
+Returns the pen's cap style.
+
     
    See also setCapStyle().
+
+
    const TQColor & TQPen::color () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the pen color.
+
     
    See also setColor().
+
+
    Example: scribble/scribble.h.
+
    PenJoinStyle TQPen::joinStyle () const
+
    
+Returns the pen's join style.
+
     
    See also setJoinStyle().
+
+
    bool TQPen::operator!= ( const TQPen & p ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the pen is different from p; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     Two pens are different if they have different styles, widths or
+colors.
+
     
    See also operator==().
+
+
    TQPen & TQPen::operator= ( const TQPen & p )
+
    
+Assigns p to this pen and returns a reference to this pen.
+
+
    bool TQPen::operator== ( const TQPen & p ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the pen is equal to p; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     Two pens are equal if they have equal styles, widths and colors.
+
     
    See also operator!=().
+
+
    void TQPen::setCapStyle ( PenCapStyle c )
+
    
+Sets the pen's cap style to c.
+
     The default value is FlatCap. The cap style has no effect on
+0-width pens.
+
     
    Pen Cap Styles
     
+
     Warning: On Windows 95/98 and Macintosh, the cap style setting has
+no effect. Wide lines are rendered as if the cap style was SquareCap.
+
     
    See also capStyle().
+
+
    Example: themes/wood.cpp.
+
    void TQPen::setColor ( const TQColor & c )
+
    
+Sets the pen color to c.
+
     
    See also color().
+
+
    Examples: progress/progress.cpp and scribble/scribble.h.
+
    void TQPen::setJoinStyle ( PenJoinStyle j )
+
    
+Sets the pen's join style to j.
+
     The default value is MiterJoin. The join style has no effect on
+0-width pens.
+
     
    Pen Join Styles
     
+
     Warning: On Windows 95/98 and Macintosh, the join style setting
+has no effect. Wide lines are rendered as if the join style was BevelJoin.
+
     
    See also joinStyle().
+
+
    Example: themes/wood.cpp.
+
    void TQPen::setStyle ( PenStyle s )
+
    
+Sets the pen style to s.
+
     See the TQt::PenStyle documentation for a list of all the
+styles.
+
     Warning: On Mac OS X the style setting (other than NoPen and SolidLine) have no effect as they are not implemented by the
+underlying system.
+
     Warning: On Windows 95/98, the style setting (other than NoPen
+and SolidLine) has no effect for lines with width greater than
+1.
+
     
    See also style().
+
+
    Example: chart/chartform_canvas.cpp.
+
    void TQPen::setWidth ( uint w )
+
    
+Sets the pen width to w.
+
     A line width of 0 will produce a 1 pixel wide line using a fast
+algorithm for diagonals. A line width of 1 will also produce a 1
+pixel wide line, but uses a slower more accurate algorithm for
+diagonals. For horizontal and vertical lines a line width of 0 is
+the same as a line width of 1. The cap and join style have no
+effect on 0-width lines.
+
     
    See also width().
+
+
    Examples: multiple/ax2.h, progress/progress.cpp, and scribble/scribble.h.
+
    PenStyle TQPen::style () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the pen style.
+
     
    See also setStyle().
+
+
    uint TQPen::width () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the pen width.
+
     
    See also setWidth().
+
+
    Example: scribble/scribble.h.
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQPen & p )
+
    
+
+
     Writes the pen p to the stream s and returns a reference to
+the stream.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQPen & p )
+
    
+
+
     Reads a pen from the stream s into p and returns a reference
+to the stream.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqpicture.html b/doc/html/ntqpicture.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2aefde870
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqpicture.html
@@ -0,0 +1,270 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQPicture Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQPicture Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQPicture class is a paint device that records and
+replays TQPainter commands.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqpicture.h>
+
    Inherits TQPaintDevice.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQPicture ( int formatVersion = -1 )
      • 
+
    • TQPicture ( const TQPicture & pic )
      • 
+
    • ~TQPicture ()
      • 
+
    • bool isNull () const
      • 
+
    • uint size () const
      • 
+
    • const char * data () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setData ( const char * data, uint size )
      • 
+
    • bool play ( TQPainter * painter )
      • 
+
    • bool load ( TQIODevice * dev, const char * format = 0 )
      • 
+
    • bool load ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0 )
      • 
+
    • bool save ( TQIODevice * dev, const char * format = 0 )
      • 
+
    • bool save ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQRect boundingRect () const
      • 
+
    • void setBoundingRect ( const TQRect & r )
      • 
+
    • TQPicture & operator= ( const TQPicture & p )
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • virtual int metric ( int m ) const
      • 
+
    • void detach ()
      • 
+
    • TQPicture copy () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Related Functions
    
+
      
+
    • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQPicture & r )
      • 
+
    • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQPicture & r )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQPicture class is a paint device that records and
+replays TQPainter commands.
+
     
+
+
+
     A picture serializes painter commands to an IO device in a
+platform-independent format. For example, a picture created under
+Windows can be read on a Sun SPARC.
+
     Pictures are called meta-files on some platforms.
+
     TQt pictures use a proprietary binary format. Unlike native picture
+(meta-file) formats on many window systems, TQt pictures have no
+limitations regarding their contents. Everything that can be
+painted can also be stored in a picture, e.g. fonts, pixmaps,
+regions, transformed graphics, etc.
+
     TQPicture is an implicitly shared class.
+
     Example of how to record a picture:
+
    +    TQPicture  pic;
+    TQPainter  p;
+    p.begin( &pic );               // paint in picture
+    p.drawEllipse( 10,20, 80,70 ); // draw an ellipse
+    p.end();                       // painting done
+    pic.save( "drawing.pic" );     // save picture
+    
    
+ 
+
     Example of how to replay a picture:
+
    +    TQPicture  pic;
+    pic.load( "drawing.pic" );     // load picture
+    TQPainter  p;
+    p.begin( &myWidget );          // paint in myWidget
+    p.drawPicture( pic );          // draw the picture
+    p.end();                       // painting done
+    
    
+ 
+
     Pictures can also be drawn using play(). Some basic data about a
+picture is available, for example, size(), isNull() and
+boundingRect().
+
     
    See also Graphics Classes, Image Processing Classes, and Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQPicture::TQPicture ( int formatVersion = -1 )
+
    
+Constructs an empty picture.
+
     The formatVersion parameter may be used to create a TQPicture
+that can be read by applications that are compiled with earlier
+versions of TQt.
+
      
+
    •  formatVersion == 1 is binary compatible with TQt 1.x and later.
+
    •  formatVersion == 2 is binary compatible with TQt 2.0.x and later.
+
    •  formatVersion == 3 is binary compatible with TQt 2.1.x and later.
+
    •  formatVersion == 4 is binary compatible with TQt 3.0.x and later.
+
    •  formatVersion == 5 is binary compatible with TQt 3.1.
+
    
+
     Note that the default formatVersion is -1 which signifies the
+current release, i.e. for TQt 3.1 a formatVersion of 5 is the same
+as the default formatVersion of -1.
+
     Reading pictures generated by earlier versions of TQt is supported
+and needs no special coding; the format is automatically detected.
+
+
    TQPicture::TQPicture ( const TQPicture & pic )
+
    
+Constructs a shallow copy of pic.
+
+
    TQPicture::~TQPicture ()
+
    
+Destroys the picture.
+
+
    TQRect TQPicture::boundingRect () const
+
    
+Returns the picture's bounding rectangle or an invalid rectangle
+if the picture contains no data.
+
+
    TQPicture TQPicture::copy () const [protected]
+
    
+Returns a deep copy of the picture.
+
+
    const char * TQPicture::data () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a pointer to the picture data. The pointer is only valid
+until the next non-const function is called on this picture. The
+returned pointer is 0 if the picture contains no data.
+
     
    See also size() and isNull().
+
+
    void TQPicture::detach () [protected]
+
    
+Detaches from shared picture data and makes sure that this picture
+is the only one referring to the data.
+
     If multiple pictures share common data, this picture makes a copy
+of the data and detaches itself from the sharing mechanism.
+Nothing is done if there is just a single reference.
+
+
    bool TQPicture::isNull () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the picture contains no data; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQPicture::load ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0 )
+
    
+Loads a picture from the file specified by fileName and returns
+TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     By default, the file will be interpreted as being in the native
+TQPicture format. Specifying the format string is optional and
+is only needed for importing picture data stored in a different
+format.
+
     Currently, the only external format supported is the W3C SVG format which
+requires the TQt XML module. The
+corresponding format string is "svg".
+
     
    See also save().
+
+
    Examples: picture/picture.cpp and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    bool TQPicture::load ( TQIODevice * dev, const char * format = 0 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     dev is the device to use for loading.
+
+
    int TQPicture::metric ( int m ) const [virtual protected]
+
    
+Internal implementation of the virtual TQPaintDevice::metric()
+function.
+
     Use the TQPaintDeviceMetrics class instead.
+
     A picture has the following hard-coded values: dpi=72,
+numcolors=16777216 and depth=24.
+
     m is the metric to get.
+
+
    TQPicture & TQPicture::operator= ( const TQPicture & p )
+
    
+Assigns a shallow copy of p to this
+picture and returns a reference to this picture.
+
+
    bool TQPicture::play ( TQPainter * painter )
+
    
+Replays the picture using painter, and returns TRUE if
+successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     This function does exactly the same as TQPainter::drawPicture()
+with (x, y) = (0, 0).
+
+
    bool TQPicture::save ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0 )
+
    
+Saves a picture to the file specified by fileName and returns
+TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     Specifying the file format string is optional. It's not
+recommended unless you intend to export the picture data for
+use by a third party reader. By default the data will be saved in
+the native TQPicture file format.
+
     Currently, the only external format supported is the W3C SVG format which
+requires the TQt XML module. The
+corresponding format string is "svg".
+
     
    See also load().
+
+
    Example: picture/picture.cpp.
+
    bool TQPicture::save ( TQIODevice * dev, const char * format = 0 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     dev is the device to use for saving.
+
+
    void TQPicture::setBoundingRect ( const TQRect & r )
+
    
+Sets the picture's bounding rectangle to r. The automatically
+calculated value is overriden.
+
+
    void TQPicture::setData ( const char * data, uint size ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the picture data directly from data and size. This
+function copies the input data.
+
     
    See also data() and size().
+
+
    uint TQPicture::size () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the size of the picture data.
+
     
    See also data().
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQPicture & r )
+
    
+
+
     Writes picture r to the stream s and returns a reference to
+the stream.
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQPicture & r )
+
    
+
+
     Reads a picture from the stream s into picture r and returns
+a reference to the stream.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqpixmap.html b/doc/html/ntqpixmap.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..449abccec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqpixmap.html
@@ -0,0 +1,825 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQPixmap Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQPixmap Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQPixmap class is an off-screen, pixel-based paint device.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqpixmap.h>
+
    Inherits TQPaintDevice and TQt.
+
    Inherited by TQBitmap and TQCanvasPixmap.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • enum ColorMode { Auto, Color, Mono }
      • 
+
    • enum Optimization { DefaultOptim, NoOptim, MemoryOptim = NoOptim, NormalOptim, BestOptim }
      • 
+
    • TQPixmap ()
      • 
+
    • TQPixmap ( const TQImage & image )
      • 
+
    • TQPixmap ( int w, int h, int depth = -1, Optimization optimization = DefaultOptim )
      • 
+
    • TQPixmap ( const TQSize & size, int depth = -1, Optimization optimization = DefaultOptim )
      • 
+
    • TQPixmap ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0, ColorMode mode = Auto )
      • 
+
    • TQPixmap ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format, int conversion_flags )
      • 
+
    • TQPixmap ( const char * xpm[] )
      • 
+
    • TQPixmap ( const TQByteArray & img_data )
      • 
+
    • TQPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pixmap )
      • 
+
    • ~TQPixmap ()
      • 
+
    • TQPixmap & operator= ( const TQPixmap & pixmap )
      • 
+
    • TQPixmap & operator= ( const TQImage & image )
      • 
+
    • bool isNull () const
      • 
+
    • int width () const
      • 
+
    • int height () const
      • 
+
    • TQSize size () const
      • 
+
    • TQRect rect () const
      • 
+
    • int depth () const
      • 
+
    • void fill ( const TQColor & fillColor = TQt::white )
      • 
+
    • void fill ( const TQWidget * widget, int xofs, int yofs )
      • 
+
    • void fill ( const TQWidget * widget, const TQPoint & ofs )
      • 
+
    • void resize ( int w, int h )
      • 
+
    • void resize ( const TQSize & size )
      • 
+
    • const TQBitmap * mask () const
      • 
+
    • void setMask ( const TQBitmap & newmask )
      • 
+
    • bool selfMask () const
      • 
+
    • bool hasAlpha () const
      • 
+
    • bool hasAlphaChannel () const
      • 
+
    • TQBitmap createHeuristicMask ( bool clipTight = TRUE ) const
      • 
+
    • TQPixmap xForm ( const TQWMatrix & matrix ) const
      • 
+
    • TQImage convertToImage () const
      • 
+
    • bool convertFromImage ( const TQImage & image, ColorMode mode = Auto )
      • 
+
    • bool convertFromImage ( const TQImage & img, int conversion_flags )
      • 
+
    • bool load ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0, ColorMode mode = Auto )
      • 
+
    • bool load ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format, int conversion_flags )
      • 
+
    • bool loadFromData ( const uchar * buf, uint len, const char * format = 0, ColorMode mode = Auto )
      • 
+
    • bool loadFromData ( const uchar * buf, uint len, const char * format, int conversion_flags )
      • 
+
    • bool loadFromData ( const TQByteArray & buf, const char * format = 0, int conversion_flags = 0 )
      • 
+
    • bool save ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format, int quality = -1 ) const
      • 
+
    • bool save ( TQIODevice * device, const char * format, int quality = -1 ) const
      • 
+
    • int serialNumber () const
      • 
+
    • Optimization optimization () const
      • 
+
    • void setOptimization ( Optimization optimization )
      • 
+
    • virtual void detach ()
      • 
+
    • bool isTQBitmap () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQPixmap ( int w, int h, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap )
      • 
+
    • virtual int metric ( int m ) const
      • 
+
    
+
    Related Functions
    
+
      
+
    • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQPixmap & pixmap )
      • 
+
    • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQPixmap & pixmap )
      • 
+
    • void copyBlt ( TQPixmap * dst, int dx, int dy, const TQPixmap * src, int sx, int sy, int sw, int sh )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQPixmap class is an off-screen, pixel-based paint device.
+
     
+
+
+
+
     TQPixmap is one of the two classes TQt provides for dealing with
+images; the other is TQImage. TQPixmap is designed and optimized
+for drawing; TQImage is designed and optimized for I/O and for
+direct pixel access/manipulation. There are (slow) functions to
+convert between TQImage and TQPixmap: convertToImage() and
+convertFromImage().
+
     One common use of the TQPixmap class is to enable smooth updating
+of widgets. Whenever something complex needs to be drawn, you can
+use a pixmap to obtain flicker-free drawing, like this:
+
     
      
+
    1.  Create a pixmap with the same size as the widget.
+
    2.  Fill the pixmap with the widget background color.
+
    3.  Paint the pixmap.
+
    4.  bitBlt() the pixmap contents onto the widget.
+
    
+
     Pixel data in a pixmap is internal and is managed by the
+underlying window system. Pixels can be accessed only through
+TQPainter functions, through bitBlt(), and by converting the
+TQPixmap to a TQImage.
+
     You can easily display a TQPixmap on the screen using
+TQLabel::setPixmap(). For example, all the TQButton subclasses
+support pixmap use.
+
     The TQPixmap class uses copy-on-write,
+so it is practical to pass TQPixmap objects by value.
+
     You can retrieve the width(), height(), depth() and size() of a
+pixmap. The enclosing rectangle is given by rect(). Pixmaps can be
+filled with fill() and resized with resize(). You can create and
+set a mask with createHeuristicMask() and setMask(). Use
+selfMask() to see if the pixmap is identical to its mask.
+
     In addition to loading a pixmap from file using load() you can
+also loadFromData(). You can control optimization with
+setOptimization() and obtain a transformed version of the pixmap
+using xForm()
+
     Note regarding Windows 95 and 98: on Windows 9x the system crashes
+if you create more than about 1000 pixmaps, independent of the
+size of the pixmaps or installed RAM. Windows NT-systems (including
+2000, XP and following versions) do not have the same limitation,
+but depending on the graphics etquipment the system will fail to
+allocate pixmap objects at some point (due to system running out of
+GDI resources).
+
     TQt tries to work around the resource limitation. If you set the
+pixmap optimization to TQPixmap::MemoryOptim and the width of
+your pixmap is less than or equal to 128 pixels, TQt stores the
+pixmap in a way that is very memory-efficient when there are many
+pixmaps.
+
     If your application uses dozens or hundreds of pixmaps (for
+example on tool bar buttons and in popup menus), and you plan to
+run it on Windows 95 or Windows 98, we recommend using code like
+this:
+
     
    +        TQPixmap::setDefaultOptimization( TQPixmap::MemoryOptim );
+        while ( ... ) {
+            // load tool bar pixmaps etc.
+            TQPixmap *pixmap = new TQPixmap(fileName);
+        }
+        TQPixmap::setDefaultOptimization( TQPixmap::NormalOptim );
+    
    
+ 
+
     In general it is recommended to make as much use of TQPixmap's
+implicit sharing and the TQPixmapCache as possible.
+
     
    See also TQBitmap, TQImage, TQImageIO, Shared Classes, Graphics Classes, Image Processing Classes, and Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQPixmap::ColorMode
    
+
+
     This enum type defines the color modes that exist for converting
+TQImage objects to TQPixmap.
+
      
+
    • TQPixmap::Auto - Select Color or Mono on a case-by-case basis.
+
    • TQPixmap::Color - Always create colored pixmaps.
+
    • TQPixmap::Mono - Always create bitmaps.
+
    
+
    TQPixmap::Optimization
    
+
+
     TQPixmap has the choice of optimizing for speed or memory in a few
+places; the best choice varies from pixmap to pixmap but can
+generally be derived heuristically. This enum type defines a
+number of optimization modes that you can set for any pixmap to
+tweak the speed/memory tradeoffs:
+
      
+
    • TQPixmap::DefaultOptim - Whatever TQPixmap::defaultOptimization()
+returns. A pixmap with this optimization will have whatever
+the current default optimization is. If the default
+optimization is changed using setDefaultOptimization(), then
+this will not effect any pixmaps that have already been
+created.
+
    • TQPixmap::NoOptim - No optimization (currently the same as MemoryOptim).
+
    • TQPixmap::MemoryOptim - Optimize for minimal memory use on Windows
+9x and X11 systems.
+
    • TQPixmap::NormalOptim - Optimize for typical usage. Often uses more
+memory than MemoryOptim, and is often faster.
+
    • TQPixmap::BestOptim - Optimize for pixmaps that are drawn very often
+and where performance is critical. Generally uses more memory
+than NormalOptim and may provide a little more speed.
+
     We recommend using DefaultOptim.
+
     
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQPixmap::TQPixmap ()
+
    
+Constructs a null pixmap.
+
     
    See also isNull().
+
+
    TQPixmap::TQPixmap ( const TQImage & image )
+
    
+Constructs a pixmap from the TQImage image.
+
     
    See also convertFromImage().
+
+
    TQPixmap::TQPixmap ( int w, int h, int depth = -1, Optimization optimization = DefaultOptim )
+
    
+Constructs a pixmap with w width, h height and depth bits
+per pixel. The pixmap is optimized in accordance with the optimization value.
+
     The contents of the pixmap is uninitialized.
+
     The depth can be either 1 (monochrome) or the depth of the
+current video mode. If depth is negative, then the hardware
+depth of the current video mode will be used.
+
     If either w or h is zero, a null pixmap is constructed.
+
     
    See also isNull() and TQPixmap::Optimization.
+
+
    TQPixmap::TQPixmap ( const TQSize & size, int depth = -1, Optimization optimization = DefaultOptim )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Constructs a pixmap of size size, depth bits per pixel,
+optimized in accordance with the optimization value.
+
+
    TQPixmap::TQPixmap ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0, ColorMode mode = Auto )
+
    
+Constructs a pixmap from the file fileName. If the file does
+not exist or is of an unknown format, the pixmap becomes a null
+pixmap.
+
     The fileName, format and mode parameters are passed on to
+load(). This means that the data in fileName is not compiled
+into the binary. If fileName contains a relative path (e.g. the
+filename only) the relevant file must be found relative to the
+runtime working directory.
+
     
    See also TQPixmap::ColorMode, isNull(), load(), loadFromData(), save(), and imageFormat().
+
+
    TQPixmap::TQPixmap ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format, int conversion_flags )
+
    
+Constructs a pixmap from the file fileName. If the file does
+not exist or is of an unknown format, the pixmap becomes a null
+pixmap.
+
     The fileName, format and conversion_flags parameters are
+passed on to load(). This means that the data in fileName is
+not compiled into the binary. If fileName contains a relative
+path (e.g. the filename only) the relevant file must be found
+relative to the runtime working directory.
+
     If the image needs to be modified to fit in a lower-resolution
+result (e.g. converting from 32-bit to 8-bit), use the conversion_flags to specify how you'd prefer this to happen.
+
     
    See also TQt::ImageConversionFlags, isNull(), load(), loadFromData(), save(), and imageFormat().
+
+
    TQPixmap::TQPixmap ( const char * xpm[] )
+
    
+Constructs a pixmap from xpm, which must be a valid XPM image.
+
     Errors are silently ignored.
+
     Note that it's possible to squeeze the XPM variable a little bit
+by using an unusual declaration:
+
     
    +        static const char * const start_xpm[]={
+            "16 15 8 1",
+            "a c #cec6bd",
+        ....
+    
    
+ 
+
     The extra const makes the entire definition read-only, which is
+slightly more efficient (for example, when the code is in a shared
+library) and ROMable when the application is to be stored in ROM.
+
     In order to use that sort of declaration you must cast the
+variable back to const char ** when you create the TQPixmap.
+
+
    TQPixmap::TQPixmap ( const TQByteArray & img_data )
+
    
+Constructs a pixmaps by loading from img_data. The data can be
+in any image format supported by TQt.
+
     
    See also loadFromData().
+
+
    TQPixmap::TQPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pixmap )
+
    
+Constructs a pixmap that is a copy of pixmap.
+
+
    TQPixmap::TQPixmap ( int w, int h, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap ) [protected]
+
    
+Constructs a monochrome pixmap, with width w and height h,
+that is initialized with the data in bits. The isXbitmap
+indicates whether the data is an X bitmap and defaults to FALSE.
+This constructor is protected and used by the TQBitmap class.
+
+
    TQPixmap::~TQPixmap ()
+
    
+Destroys the pixmap.
+
+
    bool TQPixmap::convertFromImage ( const TQImage & img, int conversion_flags )
+
    
+Converts image img and sets this pixmap. Returns TRUE if
+successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     The conversion_flags argument is a bitwise-OR of the
+TQt::ImageConversionFlags. Passing 0 for conversion_flags
+sets all the default options.
+
     Note that even though a TQPixmap with depth 1 behaves much like a
+TQBitmap, isTQBitmap() returns FALSE.
+
     If a pixmap with depth 1 is painted with color0 and color1 and
+converted to an image, the pixels painted with color0 will produce
+pixel index 0 in the image and those painted with color1 will
+produce pixel index 1.
+
     
    See also convertToImage(), isTQBitmap(), TQImage::convertDepth(), defaultDepth(), and TQImage::hasAlphaBuffer().
+
+
    Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
+
    bool TQPixmap::convertFromImage ( const TQImage & image, ColorMode mode = Auto )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Converts image and sets this pixmap using color mode mode.
+Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also TQPixmap::ColorMode.
+
+
    TQImage TQPixmap::convertToImage () const
+
    
+Converts the pixmap to a TQImage. Returns a null image if it fails.
+
     If the pixmap has 1-bit depth, the returned image will also be 1
+bit deep. If the pixmap has 2- to 8-bit depth, the returned image
+has 8-bit depth. If the pixmap has greater than 8-bit depth, the
+returned image has 32-bit depth.
+
     Note that for the moment, alpha masks on monochrome images are
+ignored.
+
     
    See also convertFromImage().
+
+
    Example: qmag/qmag.cpp.
+
    TQBitmap TQPixmap::createHeuristicMask ( bool clipTight = TRUE ) const
+
    
+Creates and returns a heuristic mask for this pixmap. It works by
+selecting a color from one of the corners and then chipping away
+pixels of that color, starting at all the edges.
+
     The mask may not be perfect but it should be reasonable, so you
+can do things such as the following:
+
    +    pm->setMask( pm->createHeuristicMask() );
+    
    
+ 
+
     This function is slow because it involves transformation to a
+TQImage, non-trivial computations and a transformation back to a
+TQBitmap.
+
     If clipTight is TRUE the mask is just large enough to cover the
+pixels; otherwise, the mask is larger than the data pixels.
+
     
    See also TQImage::createHeuristicMask().
+
+
    int TQPixmap::defaultDepth () [static]
+
    
+Returns the default pixmap depth, i.e. the depth a pixmap gets if
+-1 is specified.
+
     
    See also depth().
+
+
    Optimization TQPixmap::defaultOptimization () [static]
+
    
+Returns the default pixmap optimization setting.
+
     
    See also setDefaultOptimization(), setOptimization(), and optimization().
+
+
    int TQPixmap::depth () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the depth of the pixmap.
+
     The pixmap depth is also called bits per pixel (bpp) or bit planes
+of a pixmap. A null pixmap has depth 0.
+
     
    See also defaultDepth(), isNull(), and TQImage::convertDepth().
+
+
    void TQPixmap::detach () [virtual]
+
    
+This is a special-purpose function that detaches the pixmap from
+shared pixmap data.
+
     A pixmap is automatically detached by TQt whenever its contents is
+about to change. This is done in all TQPixmap member functions
+that modify the pixmap (fill(), resize(), convertFromImage(),
+load(), etc.), in bitBlt() for the destination pixmap and in
+TQPainter::begin() on a pixmap.
+
     It is possible to modify a pixmap without letting TQt know. You can
+first obtain the system-dependent handle() and then call
+system-specific functions (for instance, BitBlt under Windows)
+that modify the pixmap contents. In such cases, you can call
+detach() to cut the pixmap loose from other pixmaps that share
+data with this one.
+
     detach() returns immediately if there is just a single reference
+or if the pixmap has not been initialized yet.
+
+
    void TQPixmap::fill ( const TQColor & fillColor = TQt::white )
+
    
+Fills the pixmap with the color fillColor.
+
+
    Examples: chart/setdataform.cpp, desktop/desktop.cpp, grapher/grapher.cpp, hello/hello.cpp, t10/cannon.cpp, themes/metal.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    void TQPixmap::fill ( const TQWidget * widget, int xofs, int yofs )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Fills the pixmap with the widget's background color or pixmap.
+If the background is empty, nothing is done. xofs, yofs is
+an offset in the widget.
+
+
    void TQPixmap::fill ( const TQWidget * widget, const TQPoint & ofs )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Fills the pixmap with the widget's background color or pixmap.
+If the background is empty, nothing is done.
+
     The ofs point is an offset in the widget.
+
     The point ofs is a point in the widget's coordinate system. The
+pixmap's top-left pixel will be mapped to the point ofs in the
+widget. This is significant if the widget has a background pixmap;
+otherwise the pixmap will simply be filled with the background
+color of the widget.
+
     Example:
+
    +    void CuteWidget::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent *e )
+    {
+        TQRect ur = e->rect();            // rectangle to update
+        TQPixmap pix( ur.size() );        // Pixmap for double-buffering
+        pix.fill( this, ur.topLeft() );  // fill with widget background
+
+        TQPainter p( &pix );
+        p.translate( -ur.x(), -ur.y() ); // use widget coordinate system
+                                         // when drawing on pixmap
+        //    ... draw on pixmap ...
+
+        p.end();
+
+        bitBlt( this, ur.topLeft(), &pix );
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    TQPixmap TQPixmap::fromMimeSource ( const TQString & abs_name ) [static]
+
     Convenience function. Gets the data associated with the absolute
+name abs_name from the default mime source factory and decodes it
+to a pixmap.
+
     
    See also TQMimeSourceFactory, TQImage::fromMimeSource(), and TQImageDrag::decode().
+
+
    Example: textedit/textedit.cpp.
+
    TQPixmap TQPixmap::grabWidget ( TQWidget * widget, int x = 0, int y = 0, int w = -1, int h = -1 ) [static]
+
    
+Creates a pixmap and paints widget in it.
+
     If the widget has any children, then they are also painted in
+the appropriate positions.
+
     If you specify x, y, w or h, only the rectangle you
+specify is painted. The defaults are 0, 0 (top-left corner) and
+-1,-1 (which means the entire widget).
+
     (If w is negative, the function copies everything to the right
+border of the window. If h is negative, the function copies
+everything to the bottom of the window.)
+
     If widget is 0, or if the rectangle defined by x, y, the
+modified w and the modified h does not overlap the widget->rect(), this function will return a null TQPixmap.
+
     This function actually asks widget to paint itself (and its
+children to paint themselves). TQPixmap::grabWindow() grabs pixels
+off the screen, which is a bit faster and picks up exactly
+what's on-screen. This function works by calling paintEvent() with
+painter redirection turned on. If there are overlaying windows,
+grabWindow() will see them, but not this function.
+
     If there is overlap, it returns a pixmap of the size you want,
+containing a rendering of widget. If the rectangle you ask for
+is a superset of widget, the areas outside widget are
+covered with the widget's background.
+
     If an error occurs when trying to grab the widget, such as the
+size of the widget being too large to fit in memory, an isNull()
+pixmap is returned.
+
     
    See also grabWindow(), TQPainter::redirect(), and TQWidget::paintEvent().
+
+
    TQPixmap TQPixmap::grabWindow ( WId window, int x = 0, int y = 0, int w = -1, int h = -1 ) [static]
+
    
+Grabs the contents of the window window and makes a pixmap out
+of it. Returns the pixmap.
+
     The arguments (x, y) specify the offset in the window, whereas
+(w, h) specify the width and height of the area to be copied.
+
     If w is negative, the function copies everything to the right
+border of the window. If h is negative, the function copies
+everything to the bottom of the window.
+
     Note that grabWindow() grabs pixels from the screen, not from the
+window. If there is another window partially or entirely over the
+one you grab, you get pixels from the overlying window, too.
+
     Note also that the mouse cursor is generally not grabbed.
+
     The reason we use a window identifier and not a TQWidget is to
+enable grabbing of windows that are not part of the application,
+window system frames, and so on.
+
     Warning: Grabbing an area outside the screen is not safe in
+general. This depends on the underlying window system.
+
     Warning: X11 only: If window is not the same depth as the root
+window and another window partially or entirely obscures the one
+you grab, you will not get pixels from the overlying window.
+The contests of the obscured areas in the pixmap are undefined and
+uninitialized.
+
     
    See also grabWidget().
+
+
    Example: qmag/qmag.cpp.
+
    bool TQPixmap::hasAlpha () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE this pixmap has an alpha channel or a mask.
+
     
    See also hasAlphaChannel() and mask().
+
+
    bool TQPixmap::hasAlphaChannel () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the pixmap has an alpha channel; otherwise it
+returns FALSE.
+
     NOTE: If the pixmap has a mask but not alpha channel, this
+function returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also hasAlpha() and mask().
+
+
    int TQPixmap::height () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the height of the pixmap.
+
     
    See also width(), size(), and rect().
+
+
    Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp, movies/main.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, t10/cannon.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    const char * TQPixmap::imageFormat ( const TQString & fileName ) [static]
+
    
+Returns a string that specifies the image format of the file fileName, or 0 if the file cannot be read or if the format cannot
+be recognized.
+
     The TQImageIO documentation lists the supported image formats.
+
     
    See also load() and save().
+
+
    bool TQPixmap::isNull () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if this is a null pixmap; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     A null pixmap has zero width, zero height and no contents. You
+cannot draw in a null pixmap or bitBlt() anything to it.
+
     Resizing an existing pixmap to (0, 0) makes a pixmap into a null
+pixmap.
+
     
    See also resize().
+
+
    Examples: movies/main.cpp, qdir/qdir.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, and scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
+
    bool TQPixmap::isTQBitmap () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if this is a TQBitmap; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQPixmap::load ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format, int conversion_flags )
+
    
+Loads a pixmap from the file fileName at runtime. Returns TRUE
+if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     If format is specified, the loader attempts to read the pixmap
+using the specified format. If format is not specified
+(default), the loader reads a few bytes from the header to guess
+the file's format.
+
     See the convertFromImage() documentation for a description of the
+conversion_flags argument.
+
     The TQImageIO documentation lists the supported image formats and
+explains how to add extra formats.
+
     
    See also loadFromData(), save(), imageFormat(), TQImage::load(), and TQImageIO.
+
+
    Examples: picture/picture.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    bool TQPixmap::load ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0, ColorMode mode = Auto )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Loads a pixmap from the file fileName at runtime.
+
     If format is specified, the loader attempts to read the pixmap
+using the specified format. If format is not specified
+(default), the loader reads a few bytes from the header to guess
+the file's format.
+
     The mode is used to specify the color mode of the pixmap.
+
     
    See also TQPixmap::ColorMode.
+
+
    bool TQPixmap::loadFromData ( const uchar * buf, uint len, const char * format, int conversion_flags )
+
    
+Loads a pixmap from the binary data in buf (len bytes).
+Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     If format is specified, the loader attempts to read the pixmap
+using the specified format. If format is not specified
+(default), the loader reads a few bytes from the header to guess
+the file's format.
+
     See the convertFromImage() documentation for a description of the
+conversion_flags argument.
+
     The TQImageIO documentation lists the supported image formats and
+explains how to add extra formats.
+
     
    See also load(), save(), imageFormat(), TQImage::loadFromData(), and TQImageIO.
+
+
    bool TQPixmap::loadFromData ( const uchar * buf, uint len, const char * format = 0, ColorMode mode = Auto )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Loads a pixmap from the binary data in buf (len bytes) using
+color mode mode. Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     If format is specified, the loader attempts to read the pixmap
+using the specified format. If format is not specified
+(default), the loader reads a few bytes from the header to guess
+the file's format.
+
     
    See also TQPixmap::ColorMode.
+
+
    bool TQPixmap::loadFromData ( const TQByteArray & buf, const char * format = 0, int conversion_flags = 0 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
    const TQBitmap * TQPixmap::mask () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the mask bitmap, or 0 if no mask has been set.
+
     
    See also setMask(), TQBitmap, and hasAlpha().
+
+
    int TQPixmap::metric ( int m ) const [virtual protected]
+
    
+Internal implementation of the virtual TQPaintDevice::metric() function.
+
     Use the TQPaintDeviceMetrics class instead.
+
     m is the metric to get.
+
+
    TQPixmap & TQPixmap::operator= ( const TQPixmap & pixmap )
+
    
+Assigns the pixmap pixmap to this pixmap and returns a
+reference to this pixmap.
+
+
    TQPixmap & TQPixmap::operator= ( const TQImage & image )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Converts the image image to a pixmap that is assigned to this
+pixmap. Returns a reference to the pixmap.
+
     
    See also convertFromImage().
+
+
    Optimization TQPixmap::optimization () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the optimization setting for this pixmap.
+
     The default optimization setting is TQPixmap::NormalOptim. You
+can change this setting in two ways:
+
    
+
     
    See also setOptimization(), setDefaultOptimization(), and defaultOptimization().
+
+
    TQRect TQPixmap::rect () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the enclosing rectangle (0,0,width(),height()) of the pixmap.
+
     
    See also width(), height(), and size().
+
+
    void TQPixmap::resize ( int w, int h )
+
    
+Resizes the pixmap to w width and h height. If either w
+or h is 0, the pixmap becomes a null pixmap.
+
     If both w and h are greater than 0, a valid pixmap is
+created. New pixels will be uninitialized (random) if the pixmap
+is expanded.
+
+
    Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp and grapher/grapher.cpp.
+
    void TQPixmap::resize ( const TQSize & size )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Resizes the pixmap to size size.
+
+
    bool TQPixmap::save ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format, int quality = -1 ) const
+
    
+Saves the pixmap to the file fileName using the image file
+format format and a quality factor quality. quality must
+be in the range [0,100] or -1. Specify 0 to obtain small
+compressed files, 100 for large uncompressed files, and -1 to use
+the default settings. Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also load(), loadFromData(), imageFormat(), TQImage::save(), and TQImageIO.
+
+
    Example: qmag/qmag.cpp.
+
    bool TQPixmap::save ( TQIODevice * device, const char * format, int quality = -1 ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This function writes a TQPixmap to the TQIODevice, device. This
+can be used, for example, to save a pixmap directly into a
+TQByteArray:
+
    +    TQPixmap pixmap;
+    TQByteArray ba;
+    TQBuffer buffer( ba );
+    buffer.open( IO_WriteOnly );
+    pixmap.save( &buffer, "PNG" ); // writes pixmap into ba in PNG format
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    bool TQPixmap::selfMask () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the pixmap's mask is identical to the pixmap
+itself; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also mask().
+
+
    int TQPixmap::serialNumber () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a number that uniquely identifies the contents of this
+TQPixmap object. This means that multiple TQPixmap objects can have
+the same serial number as long as they refer to the same contents.
+
     An example of where this is useful is for caching TQPixmaps.
+
     
    See also TQPixmapCache.
+
+
    void TQPixmap::setDefaultOptimization ( Optimization optimization ) [static]
+
    
+Sets the default pixmap optimization.
+
     All new pixmaps that are created will use this default
+optimization. You may also set optimization for individual pixmaps
+using the setOptimization() function.
+
     The initial default optimization setting is TQPixmap::Normal.
+
     
    See also defaultOptimization(), setOptimization(), and optimization().
+
+
    void TQPixmap::setMask ( const TQBitmap & newmask )
+
    
+Sets a mask bitmap.
+
     The newmask bitmap defines the clip mask for this pixmap. Every
+pixel in newmask corresponds to a pixel in this pixmap. Pixel
+value 1 means opaque and pixel value 0 means transparent. The mask
+must have the same size as this pixmap.
+
     Warning: Setting the mask on a pixmap will cause any alpha channel
+data to be cleared. For example:
+
    +        TQPixmap alpha( "image-with-alpha.png" );
+        TQPixmap alphacopy = alpha;
+        alphacopy.setMask( *alphacopy.mask() );
+    
    
+ 
+Now, alpha and alphacopy are visually different.
+
     Setting a null mask resets the mask.
+
     
    See also mask(), createHeuristicMask(), and TQBitmap.
+
+
    void TQPixmap::setOptimization ( Optimization optimization )
+
    
+Sets pixmap drawing optimization for this pixmap.
+
     The optimization setting affects pixmap operations, in
+particular drawing of transparent pixmaps (bitBlt() a pixmap with
+a mask set) and pixmap transformations (the xForm() function).
+
     Pixmap optimization involves keeping intermediate results in a
+cache buffer and using the cache to speed up bitBlt() and xForm().
+The cost is more memory consumption, up to twice as much as an
+unoptimized pixmap.
+
     Use the setDefaultOptimization() to change the default
+optimization for all new pixmaps.
+
     
    See also optimization(), setDefaultOptimization(), and defaultOptimization().
+
+
    Example: desktop/desktop.cpp.
+
    TQSize TQPixmap::size () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the size of the pixmap.
+
     
    See also width(), height(), and rect().
+
+
    Example: movies/main.cpp.
+
    TQWMatrix TQPixmap::trueMatrix ( const TQWMatrix & matrix, int w, int h ) [static]
+
    
+Returns the actual matrix used for transforming a pixmap with w
+width and h height and matrix matrix.
+
     When transforming a pixmap with xForm(), the transformation matrix
+is internally adjusted to compensate for unwanted translation,
+i.e. xForm() returns the smallest pixmap containing all
+transformed points of the original pixmap.
+
     This function returns the modified matrix, which maps points
+correctly from the original pixmap into the new pixmap.
+
     
    See also xForm() and TQWMatrix.
+
+
    int TQPixmap::width () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the width of the pixmap.
+
     
    See also height(), size(), and rect().
+
+
    Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp, movies/main.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    TQPixmap TQPixmap::xForm ( const TQWMatrix & matrix ) const
+
    
+Returns a copy of the pixmap that is transformed using matrix.
+The original pixmap is not changed.
+
     The transformation matrix is internally adjusted to compensate
+for unwanted translation, i.e. xForm() returns the smallest image
+that contains all the transformed points of the original image.
+
     This function is slow because it involves transformation to a
+TQImage, non-trivial computations and a transformation back to a
+TQPixmap.
+
     
    See also trueMatrix(), TQWMatrix, TQPainter::setWorldMatrix(), and TQImage::xForm().
+
+
    Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp, fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp, movies/main.cpp, and qmag/qmag.cpp.
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    void copyBlt ( TQPixmap * dst, int dx, int dy, const TQPixmap * src, int sx, int sy, int sw, int sh )
+
    
+
+
     Copies a block of pixels from src to dst.  The alpha channel
+and mask data (if any) is also copied from src.  NOTE: src
+is not alpha blended or masked when copied to dst.  Use
+bitBlt() or TQPainter::drawPixmap() to perform alpha blending or
+masked drawing.
+
     sx, sy is the top-left pixel in src (0, 0 by default), dx, dy is the top-left position in dst and sw, \sh is the
+size of the copied block (all of src by default).
+
     If src, dst, sw or sh is 0 (zero), copyBlt() does
+nothing.  If sw or sh is negative, copyBlt() copies starting
+at sx (and respectively, sy) and ending at the right edge
+(and respectively, the bottom edge) of src.
+
     copyBlt() does nothing if src and dst have different depths.
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQPixmap & pixmap )
+
    
+
+
     Writes the pixmap pixmap to the stream s as a PNG image.
+
     Note that writing the stream to a file will not produce a valid image file.
+
     
    See also TQPixmap::save() and Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQPixmap & pixmap )
+
    
+
+
     Reads a pixmap from the stream s into the pixmap pixmap.
+
     
    See also TQPixmap::load() and Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqpixmapcache.html b/doc/html/ntqpixmapcache.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e407d6806
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqpixmapcache.html
@@ -0,0 +1,191 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQPixmapCache Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQPixmapCache Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQPixmapCache class provides an application-global cache for
+pixmaps.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqpixmapcache.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • int cacheLimit ()
      • 
+
    • void setCacheLimit ( int n )
      • 
+
    • TQPixmap * find ( const TQString & key )
      • 
+
    • bool find ( const TQString & key, TQPixmap & pm )
      • 
+
    • bool insert ( const TQString & key, TQPixmap * pm )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • bool insert ( const TQString & key, const TQPixmap & pm )
      • 
+
    • void remove ( const TQString & key )
      • 
+
    • void clear ()
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
     The TQPixmapCache class provides an application-global cache for
+pixmaps.
+
     
+
+
+
     This class is a tool for optimized drawing with TQPixmap. You can
+use it to store temporary pixmaps that are expensive to generate
+without using more storage space than cacheLimit(). Use insert()
+to insert pixmaps, find() to find them and clear() to empty the
+cache.
+
     For example, TQRadioButton has a non-trivial visual representation
+so we don't want to regenerate a pixmap whenever a radio button is
+displayed or changes state. In the function
+TQRadioButton::drawButton(), we do not draw the radio button
+directly. Instead, we first check the global pixmap cache for a
+pixmap with the key "$qt_radio_nnn_", where nnn is a numerical
+value that specifies the the radio button state. If a pixmap is
+found, we bitBlt() it onto the widget and return. Otherwise, we
+create a new pixmap, draw the radio button in the pixmap, and
+finally insert the pixmap in the global pixmap cache, using the
+key above. The bitBlt() is ten times faster than drawing the
+radio button. All radio buttons in the program share the cached
+pixmap since TQPixmapCache is application-global.
+
     TQPixmapCache contains no member data, only static functions to
+access the global pixmap cache. It creates an internal TQCache for
+caching the pixmaps.
+
     The cache associates a pixmap with a string (key). If two pixmaps
+are inserted into the cache using equal keys, then the last pixmap
+will hide the first pixmap. The TQDict and TQCache classes do
+exactly the same.
+
     The cache becomes full when the total size of all pixmaps in the
+cache exceeds cacheLimit(). The initial cache limit is 1024 KByte
+(1 MByte); it is changed with setCacheLimit(). A pixmap takes
+roughly width*height*depth/8 bytes of memory.
+
     See the TQCache documentation for more details about the cache
+mechanism.
+
    See also Environment Classes, Graphics Classes, and Image Processing Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    int TQPixmapCache::cacheLimit () [static]
+
    
+Returns the cache limit (in kilobytes).
+
     The default setting is 1024 kilobytes.
+
     
    See also setCacheLimit().
+
+
    void TQPixmapCache::clear () [static]
+
    
+Removes all pixmaps from the cache.
+
+
    TQPixmap * TQPixmapCache::find ( const TQString & key ) [static]
+
    
+Returns the pixmap associated with the key in the cache, or
+null if there is no such pixmap.
+
     Warning: If valid, you should copy the pixmap immediately (this is
+fast). Subsequent insertions into the cache could cause the
+pointer to become invalid. For this reason, we recommend you use
+find(const TQString&, TQPixmap&) instead.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQPixmap* pp;
+        TQPixmap p;
+        if ( (pp=TQPixmapCache::find("my_big_image", pm)) ) {
+            p = *pp;
+        } else {
+            p.load("bigimage.png");
+            TQPixmapCache::insert("my_big_image", new TQPixmap(p));
+        }
+        painter->drawPixmap(0, 0, p);
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    bool TQPixmapCache::find ( const TQString & key, TQPixmap & pm ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Looks for a cached pixmap associated with the key in the cache.
+If a pixmap is found, the function sets pm to that pixmap and
+returns TRUE; otherwise leaves pm alone and returns FALSE.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQPixmap p;
+        if ( !TQPixmapCache::find("my_big_image", pm) ) {
+            pm.load("bigimage.png");
+            TQPixmapCache::insert("my_big_image", pm);
+        }
+        painter->drawPixmap(0, 0, p);
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    bool TQPixmapCache::insert ( const TQString & key, const TQPixmap & pm ) [static]
+
    
+Inserts a copy of the pixmap pm associated with the key into
+the cache.
+
     All pixmaps inserted by the TQt library have a key starting with
+"$qt", so your own pixmap keys should never begin "$qt".
+
     When a pixmap is inserted and the cache is about to exceed its
+limit, it removes pixmaps until there is enough room for the
+pixmap to be inserted.
+
     The oldest pixmaps (least recently accessed in the cache) are
+deleted when more space is needed.
+
     
    See also setCacheLimit().
+
+
    bool TQPixmapCache::insert ( const TQString & key, TQPixmap * pm ) [static]
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Inserts the pixmap pm associated with key into the cache.
+Returns TRUE if successful, or FALSE if the pixmap is too big for the cache.
+
     
+Note: pm must be allocated on the heap (using new).
+
     If this function returns FALSE, you must delete pm yourself.
+
     If this function returns TRUE, do not use pm afterwards or
+keep references to it because any other insertions into the cache,
+whether from anywhere in the application or within TQt itself, could cause
+the pixmap to be discarded from the cache and the pointer to
+become invalid.
+
     Due to these dangers, we strongly recommend that you use
+insert(const TQString&, const TQPixmap&) instead.
+
+
+
    void TQPixmapCache::remove ( const TQString & key ) [static]
+
    
+Removes the pixmap associated with key from the cache.
+
+
    void TQPixmapCache::setCacheLimit ( int n ) [static]
+
    
+Sets the cache limit to n kilobytes.
+
     The default setting is 1024 kilobytes.
+
     
    See also cacheLimit().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqplatinumstyle.html b/doc/html/ntqplatinumstyle.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..82f60043f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqplatinumstyle.html
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQPlatinumStyle Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQPlatinumStyle Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQPlatinumStyle class provides Mac/Platinum look and feel.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqplatinumstyle.h>
+
    Inherits TQWindowsStyle.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQColor mixedColor ( const TQColor & c1, const TQColor & c2 ) const
      • 
+
    • void drawRiffles ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColorGroup & g, bool horizontal ) const
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQPlatinumStyle class provides Mac/Platinum look and feel.
+
     
+
     This class implements the Platinum look and feel. It's an
+experimental class that tries to resemble a Macinosh-like GUI
+style with the TQStyle system. The emulation is currently far from
+perfect.
+
     
    See also TQAquaStyle and Widget Appearance and Style.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQPlatinumStyle::TQPlatinumStyle ()
+
    
+Constructs a TQPlatinumStyle
+
+
    void TQPlatinumStyle::drawRiffles ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColorGroup & g, bool horizontal ) const [protected]
+
    
+Draws the nifty Macintosh decoration used on sliders using painter
+p and colorgroup g. x, y, w, h and horizontal
+specify the geometry and orientation of the riffles.
+
+
    TQColor TQPlatinumStyle::mixedColor ( const TQColor & c1, const TQColor & c2 ) const [protected]
+
    
+Mixes two colors c1 and c2 to a new color.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqpoint.html b/doc/html/ntqpoint.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..afe9033a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqpoint.html
@@ -0,0 +1,378 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQPoint Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQPoint Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQPoint class defines a point in the plane.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqpoint.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
      
+
    • bool operator== ( const TQPoint & p1, const TQPoint & p2 )
      • 
+
    • bool operator!= ( const TQPoint & p1, const TQPoint & p2 )
      • 
+
    • const TQPoint operator+ ( const TQPoint & p1, const TQPoint & p2 )
      • 
+
    • const TQPoint operator- ( const TQPoint & p1, const TQPoint & p2 )
      • 
+
    • const TQPoint operator* ( const TQPoint & p, int c )
      • 
+
    • const TQPoint operator* ( int c, const TQPoint & p )
      • 
+
    • const TQPoint operator* ( const TQPoint & p, double c )
      • 
+
    • const TQPoint operator* ( double c, const TQPoint & p )
      • 
+
    • const TQPoint operator- ( const TQPoint & p )
      • 
+
    • const TQPoint operator/ ( const TQPoint & p, int c )
      • 
+
    • const TQPoint operator/ ( const TQPoint & p, double c )
      • 
+
    • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQPoint & p )
      • 
+
    • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQPoint & p )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQPoint class defines a point in the plane.
+
     
+
+
+
     A point is specified by an x coordinate and a y coordinate.
+
     The coordinate type is TQCOORD (a 32-bit integer). The minimum
+value of TQCOORD is TQCOORD_MIN (-2147483648) and the maximum
+value is  TQCOORD_MAX (2147483647).
+
     The coordinates are accessed by the functions x() and y(); they
+can be set by setX() and setY() or by the reference functions rx()
+and ry().
+
     Given a point p, the following statements are all equivalent:
+
    +        p.setX( p.x() + 1 );
+        p += TQPoint( 1, 0 );
+        p.rx()++;
+    
    
+ 
+
     A TQPoint can also be used as a vector. Addition and subtraction
+of TQPoints are defined as for vectors (each component is added
+separately). You can divide or multiply a TQPoint by an int or a
+double. The function manhattanLength() gives an inexpensive
+approximation of the length of the TQPoint interpreted as a vector.
+
     Example:
+
    +        //TQPoint oldPos is defined somewhere else
+        MyWidget::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
+        {
+            TQPoint vector = e->pos() - oldPos;
+            if ( vector.manhattanLength() > 3 )
+            ... //mouse has moved more than 3 pixels since oldPos
+        }
+    
    
+ 
+
     TQPoints can be compared for equality or inequality, and they can
+be written to and read from a TQStream.
+
     
    See also TQPointArray, TQSize, TQRect, Graphics Classes, and Image Processing Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQPoint::TQPoint ()
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a point with coordinates (0, 0) (isNull() returns TRUE).
+
+
    TQPoint::TQPoint ( int xpos, int ypos )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a point with x value xpos and y value ypos.
+
+
    bool TQPoint::isNull () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if both the x value and the y value are 0; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
+
    int TQPoint::manhattanLength () const
+
    
+Returns the sum of the absolute values of x() and y(),
+traditionally known as the "Manhattan length" of the vector from
+the origin to the point. The tradition arises because such
+distances apply to travelers who can only travel on a rectangular
+grid, like the streets of Manhattan.
+
     This is a useful, and tquick to calculate, approximation to the
+true length: sqrt(pow(x(),2)+pow(y(),2)).
+
+
    TQPoint & TQPoint::operator*= ( int c )
+
    
+
+
     Multiplies this point's x and y by c, and returns a reference
+to this point.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQPoint p( -1, 4 );
+        p *= 2;            // p becomes (-2,8)
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    TQPoint & TQPoint::operator*= ( double c )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Multiplies this point's x and y by c, and returns a reference
+to this point.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQPoint p( -1, 4 );
+        p *= 2.5;          // p becomes (-3,10)
+    
    
+ 
+
     Note that the result is truncated because points are held as
+integers.
+
+
    TQPoint & TQPoint::operator+= ( const TQPoint & p )
+
    
+
+
     Adds point p to this point and returns a reference to this
+point.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQPoint p(  3, 7 );
+        TQPoint q( -1, 4 );
+        p += q;            // p becomes (2,11)
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    TQPoint & TQPoint::operator-= ( const TQPoint & p )
+
    
+
+
     Subtracts point p from this point and returns a reference to
+this point.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQPoint p(  3, 7 );
+        TQPoint q( -1, 4 );
+        p -= q;            // p becomes (4,3)
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    TQPoint & TQPoint::operator/= ( int c )
+
    
+
+
     Divides both x and y by c, and returns a reference to this
+point.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQPoint p( -2, 8 );
+        p /= 2;            // p becomes (-1,4)
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    TQPoint & TQPoint::operator/= ( double c )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Divides both x and y by c, and returns a reference to this
+point.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQPoint p( -3, 10 );
+        p /= 2.5;           // p becomes (-1,4)
+    
    
+ 
+
     Note that the result is truncated because points are held as
+integers.
+
+
    TQCOORD & TQPoint::rx ()
+
    
+
+
     Returns a reference to the x coordinate of the point.
+
     Using a reference makes it possible to directly manipulate x.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQPoint p( 1, 2 );
+        p.rx()--;         // p becomes (0, 2)
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also ry().
+
+
    TQCOORD & TQPoint::ry ()
+
    
+
+
     Returns a reference to the y coordinate of the point.
+
     Using a reference makes it possible to directly manipulate y.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQPoint p( 1, 2 );
+        p.ry()++;         // p becomes (1, 3)
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also rx().
+
+
    void TQPoint::setX ( int x )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the x coordinate of the point to x.
+
     
    See also x() and setY().
+
+
    Example: t14/cannon.cpp.
+
    void TQPoint::setY ( int y )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the y coordinate of the point to y.
+
     
    See also y() and setX().
+
+
    Example: t14/cannon.cpp.
+
    int TQPoint::x () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the x coordinate of the point.
+
     
    See also setX() and y().
+
+
    Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp, chart/canvasview.cpp, dirview/dirview.cpp, fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp, helpsystem/tooltip.cpp, life/life.cpp, and t14/cannon.cpp.
+
    int TQPoint::y () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the y coordinate of the point.
+
     
    See also setY() and x().
+
+
    Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp, chart/canvasview.cpp, fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp, helpsystem/tooltip.cpp, life/life.cpp, t14/cannon.cpp, and themes/wood.cpp.
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    bool operator!= ( const TQPoint & p1, const TQPoint & p2 )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if p1 and p2 are not equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    const TQPoint operator* ( const TQPoint & p, int c )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     Returns the TQPoint formed by multiplying both components of p
+by c.
+
+
    const TQPoint operator* ( int c, const TQPoint & p )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns the TQPoint formed by multiplying both components of p
+by c.
+
+
    const TQPoint operator* ( const TQPoint & p, double c )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns the TQPoint formed by multiplying both components of p
+by c.
+
     Note that the result is truncated because points are held as
+integers.
+
+
    const TQPoint operator* ( double c, const TQPoint & p )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns the TQPoint formed by multiplying both components of p
+by c.
+
     Note that the result is truncated because points are held as
+integers.
+
+
    const TQPoint operator+ ( const TQPoint & p1, const TQPoint & p2 )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     Returns the sum of p1 and p2; each component is added separately.
+
+
    const TQPoint operator- ( const TQPoint & p1, const TQPoint & p2 )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     Returns p2 subtracted from p1; each component is subtracted
+separately.
+
+
    const TQPoint operator- ( const TQPoint & p )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns the TQPoint formed by changing the sign of both components
+of p, equivalent to TQPoint(0,0) - p.
+
+
    const TQPoint operator/ ( const TQPoint & p, int c )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     Returns the TQPoint formed by dividing both components of p by
+c.
+
+
    const TQPoint operator/ ( const TQPoint & p, double c )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns the TQPoint formed by dividing both components of p
+by c.
+
     Note that the result is truncated because points are held as
+integers.
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQPoint & p )
+
    
+
+
     Writes point p to the stream s and returns a reference to
+the stream.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
    bool operator== ( const TQPoint & p1, const TQPoint & p2 )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if p1 and p2 are equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQPoint & p )
+
    
+
+
     Reads a TQPoint from the stream s into point p and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqpointarray.html b/doc/html/ntqpointarray.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7a82d214f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqpointarray.html
@@ -0,0 +1,285 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQPointArray Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQPointArray Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQPointArray class provides an array of points.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqpointarray.h>
+
    Inherits TQMemArray<TQPoint>.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQPointArray ()
      • 
+
    • ~TQPointArray ()
      • 
+
    • TQPointArray ( int size )
      • 
+
    • TQPointArray ( const TQPointArray & a )
      • 
+
    • TQPointArray ( const TQRect & r, bool closed = FALSE )
      • 
+
    • TQPointArray & operator= ( const TQPointArray & a )
      • 
+
    • TQPointArray copy () const
      • 
+
    • void translate ( int dx, int dy )
      • 
+
    • TQRect boundingRect () const
      • 
+
    • void point ( uint index, int * x, int * y ) const
      • 
+
    • TQPoint point ( uint index ) const
      • 
+
    • void setPoint ( uint index, int x, int y )
      • 
+
    • void setPoint ( uint i, const TQPoint & p )
      • 
+
    • bool putPoints ( int index, int nPoints, int firstx, int firsty, ... )
      • 
+
    • bool putPoints ( int index, int nPoints, const TQPointArray & from, int fromIndex = 0 )
      • 
+
    • void makeArc ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int a1, int a2 )
      • 
+
    • void makeEllipse ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
      • 
+
    • void makeArc ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int a1, int a2, const TQWMatrix & xf )
      • 
+
    • TQPointArray cubicBezier () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Related Functions
    
+
      
+
    • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQPointArray & a )
      • 
+
    • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQPointArray & a )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQPointArray class provides an array of points.
+
     
+
+
+
     A TQPointArray is an array of TQPoint objects. In addition to the
+functions provided by TQMemArray, TQPointArray provides some
+point-specific functions.
+
     For convenient reading and writing of the point data use
+setPoints(), putPoints(), point(), and setPoint().
+
     For geometry operations use boundingRect() and translate(). There
+is also the TQWMatrix::map() function for more general
+transformations of TQPointArrays. You can also create arcs and
+ellipses with makeArc() and makeEllipse().
+
     Among others, TQPointArray is used by TQPainter::drawLineSegments(),
+TQPainter::drawPolyline(), TQPainter::drawPolygon() and
+TQPainter::drawCubicBezier().
+
     Note that because this class is a TQMemArray, copying an array and
+modifying the copy modifies the original as well, i.e. a shallow copy. If you need a deep copy use copy() or detach(), for example:
+
     
    +        void drawGiraffe( const TQPointArray & r, TQPainter * p )
+        {
+            TQPointArray tmp = r;
+            tmp.detach();
+            // some code that modifies tmp
+            p->drawPoints( tmp );
+        }
+    
    
+ 
+
     If you forget the tmp.detach(), the const array will be modified.
+
     
    See also TQPainter, TQWMatrix, TQMemArray, Graphics Classes, Image Processing Classes, and Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQPointArray::TQPointArray ()
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a null point array.
+
     
    See also isNull().
+
+
    TQPointArray::TQPointArray ( int size )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a point array with room for size points. Makes a
+null array if size == 0.
+
     
    See also resize() and isNull().
+
+
    TQPointArray::TQPointArray ( const TQPointArray & a )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a shallow copy of the point array a.
+
     
    See also copy() and detach().
+
+
    TQPointArray::TQPointArray ( const TQRect & r, bool closed = FALSE )
+
    
+Constructs a point array from the rectangle r.
+
     If closed is FALSE, then the point array just contains the
+following four points in the listed order: r.topLeft(),
+r.topRight(), r.bottomRight() and r.bottomLeft().
+
     If closed is TRUE, then a fifth point is set to r.topLeft().
+
+
    TQPointArray::~TQPointArray ()
+
    
+
+
     Destroys the point array.
+
+
    TQRect TQPointArray::boundingRect () const
+
    
+Returns the bounding rectangle of the points in the array, or
+TQRect(0,0,0,0) if the array is empty.
+
+
    TQPointArray TQPointArray::copy () const
+
    
+
+
     Creates a deep copy of the array.
+
     
    See also detach().
+
+
    TQPointArray TQPointArray::cubicBezier () const
+
    
+Returns the Bezier points for the four control points in this
+array.
+
+
    void TQPointArray::makeArc ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int a1, int a2 )
+
    
+Sets the points of the array to those describing an arc of an
+ellipse with size, width w by height h, and position (x,
+y), starting from angle a1 and spanning by angle a2. The
+resulting array has sufficient resolution for pixel accuracy (see
+the overloaded function which takes an additional TQWMatrix
+parameter).
+
     Angles are specified in 16ths of a degree, i.e. a full circle
+equals 5760 (16*360). Positive values mean counter-clockwise,
+whereas negative values mean the clockwise direction. Zero degrees
+is at the 3 o'clock position.
+
     See the angle diagram.
+
+
    void TQPointArray::makeArc ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int a1, int a2, const TQWMatrix & xf )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the points of the array to those describing an arc of an
+ellipse with width w and height h and position (x, y),
+starting from angle a1, and spanning angle by a2, and
+transformed by the matrix xf. The resulting array has
+sufficient resolution for pixel accuracy.
+
     Angles are specified in 16ths of a degree, i.e. a full circle
+equals 5760 (16*360). Positive values mean counter-clockwise,
+whereas negative values mean the clockwise direction. Zero degrees
+is at the 3 o'clock position.
+
     See the angle diagram.
+
+
    void TQPointArray::makeEllipse ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
+
    
+Sets the points of the array to those describing an ellipse with
+size, width w by height h, and position (x, y).
+
     The returned array has sufficient resolution for use as pixels.
+
+
    TQPointArray & TQPointArray::operator= ( const TQPointArray & a )
+
    
+
+
     Assigns a shallow copy of a to this point array and returns a
+reference to this point array.
+
     Equivalent to assign(a).
+
     
    See also copy() and detach().
+
+
    void TQPointArray::point ( uint index, int * x, int * y ) const
+
    
+Reads the coordinates of the point at position index within the
+array and writes them into *x and *y.
+
+
    TQPoint TQPointArray::point ( uint index ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the point at position index within the array.
+
+
    bool TQPointArray::putPoints ( int index, int nPoints, int firstx, int firsty, ... )
+
    
+Copies nPoints points from the variable argument list into this
+point array from position index, and resizes the point array if
+index+nPoints exceeds the size of the array.
+
     Returns TRUE if successful, or FALSE if the array could not be
+resized (typically due to lack of memory).
+
     The example code creates an array with three points (4,5), (6,7)
+and (8,9), by expanding the array from 1 to 3 points:
+
     
    +        TQPointArray a( 1 );
+        a[0] = TQPoint( 4, 5 );
+        a.putPoints( 1, 2, 6,7, 8,9 ); // index == 1, points == 2
+    
    
+ 
+
     This has the same result, but here putPoints overwrites rather
+than extends:
+
    +        TQPointArray a( 3 );
+        a.putPoints( 0, 3, 4,5, 0,0, 8,9 );
+        a.putPoints( 1, 1, 6,7 );
+    
    
+ 
+
     The points are given as a sequence of integers, starting with firstx then firsty, and so on.
+
     
    See also resize().
+
+
    bool TQPointArray::putPoints ( int index, int nPoints, const TQPointArray & from, int fromIndex = 0 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This version of the function copies nPoints from from into
+this array, starting at index in this array and fromIndex in
+from. fromIndex is 0 by default.
+
     
    +        TQPointArray a;
+        a.putPoints( 0, 3, 1,2, 0,0, 5,6 );
+        // a is now the three-point array ( 1,2, 0,0, 5,6 );
+        TQPointArray b;
+        b.putPoints( 0, 3, 4,4, 5,5, 6,6 );
+        // b is now ( 4,4, 5,5, 6,6 );
+        a.putPoints( 2, 3, b );
+        // a is now ( 1,2, 0,0, 4,4, 5,5, 6,6 );
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    void TQPointArray::setPoint ( uint index, int x, int y )
+
    
+Sets the point at position index in the array to (x, y).
+
+
    Example: themes/wood.cpp.
+
    void TQPointArray::setPoint ( uint i, const TQPoint & p )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the point at array index i to p.
+
+
    void TQPointArray::translate ( int dx, int dy )
+
    
+Translates all points in the array by (dx, dy).
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQPointArray & a )
+
    
+
+
     Writes the point array, a to the stream s and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQPointArray & a )
+
    
+
+
     Reads a point array, a from the stream s and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqpopupmenu.html b/doc/html/ntqpopupmenu.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..470a19a1b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqpopupmenu.html
@@ -0,0 +1,830 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQPopupMenu Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQPopupMenu Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQPopupMenu class provides a popup menu widget.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqpopupmenu.h>
+
    Inherits TQFrame and TQMenuData.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Important Inherited Members
    
+
      
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( TQWidget * widget, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, TQCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( TQCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int insertSeparator ( int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • void removeItem ( int id )
      • 
+
    • void removeItemAt ( int index )
      • 
+
    • void clear ()
      • 
+
    • TQKeySequence accel ( int id ) const
      • 
+
    • void setAccel ( const TQKeySequence & key, int id )
      • 
+
    • TQIconSet * iconSet ( int id ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString text ( int id ) const
      • 
+
    • TQPixmap * pixmap ( int id ) const
      • 
+
    • void setWhatsThis ( int id, const TQString & text )
      • 
+
    • TQString whatsThis ( int id ) const
      • 
+
    • void changeItem ( int id, const TQString & text )
      • 
+
    • void changeItem ( int id, const TQPixmap & pixmap )
      • 
+
    • void changeItem ( int id, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text )
      • 
+
    • void changeItem ( int id, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap )
      • 
+
    • bool isItemEnabled ( int id ) const
      • 
+
    • void setItemEnabled ( int id, bool enable )
      • 
+
    • bool isItemChecked ( int id ) const
      • 
+
    • void setItemChecked ( int id, bool check )
      • 
+
    • bool isItemVisible ( int id ) const
      • 
+
    • void setItemVisible ( int id, bool visible )
      • 
+
    • bool connectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
      • 
+
    • bool disconnectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
      • 
+
    • bool setItemParameter ( int id, int param )
      • 
+
    • int itemParameter ( int id ) const
      • 
+
    
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • bool checkable - whether the display of check marks on menu items is enabled
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • int itemHeight ( int row ) const
      • 
+
    • int itemHeight ( TQMenuItem * mi ) const
      • 
+
    • void drawItem ( TQPainter * p, int tab_, TQMenuItem * mi, bool act, int x, int y, int w, int h )
      • 
+
    • virtual void drawContents ( TQPainter * p )
      • 
+
    • int columns () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQPopupMenu class provides a popup menu widget.
+
     
+
+
+
     A popup menu widget is a selection menu. It can be either a
+pull-down menu in a menu bar or a standalone context (popup) menu.
+Pull-down menus are shown by the menu bar when the user clicks on
+the respective item or presses the specified shortcut key. Use
+TQMenuBar::insertItem() to insert a popup menu into a menu bar.
+Show a context menu either asynchronously with popup() or
+synchronously with exec().
+
     Technically, a popup menu consists of a list of menu items. You
+add items with insertItem(). An item is either a string, a pixmap
+or a custom item that provides its own drawing function (see
+TQCustomMenuItem). In addition, items can have an optional icon
+drawn on the very left side and an accelerator key such as
+"Ctrl+X".
+
     There are three kinds of menu items: separators, menu items that
+perform an action and menu items that show a submenu. Separators
+are inserted with insertSeparator(). For submenus, you pass a
+pointer to a TQPopupMenu in your call to insertItem(). All other
+items are considered action items.
+
     When inserting action items you usually specify a receiver and a
+slot. The receiver will be notifed whenever the item is selected.
+In addition, TQPopupMenu provides two signals, activated() and
+highlighted(), which signal the identifier of the respective menu
+item. It is sometimes practical to connect several items to one
+slot. To distinguish between them, specify a slot that takes an
+integer argument and use setItemParameter() to associate a unique
+value with each item.
+
     You clear a popup menu with clear() and remove single items with
+removeItem() or removeItemAt().
+
     A popup menu can display check marks for certain items when
+enabled with setCheckable(TRUE). You check or uncheck items with
+setItemChecked().
+
     Items are either enabled or disabled. You toggle their state with
+setItemEnabled(). Just before a popup menu becomes visible, it
+emits the aboutToShow() signal. You can use this signal to set the
+correct enabled/disabled states of all menu items before the user
+sees it. The corresponding aboutToHide() signal is emitted when
+the menu hides again.
+
     You can provide What's This? help for single menu items with
+setWhatsThis(). See TQWhatsThis for general information about this
+kind of lightweight online help.
+
     For ultimate flexibility, you can also add entire widgets as items
+into a popup menu (for example, a color selector).
+
     A TQPopupMenu can also provide a tear-off menu. A tear-off menu is
+a top-level window that contains a copy of the menu. This makes it
+possible for the user to "tear off" frequently used menus and
+position them in a convenient place on the screen. If you want
+that functionality for a certain menu, insert a tear-off handle
+with insertTearOffHandle(). When using tear-off menus, bear in
+mind that the concept isn't typically used on Microsoft Windows so
+users may not be familiar with it. Consider using a TQToolBar
+instead. Tear-off menus cannot contain custom widgets; if the
+original menu contains a custom widget item, this item is omitted.
+
     menu/menu.cpp is an example of
+TQMenuBar and TQPopupMenu use.
+
     
+
      
+
     
    See also TQMenuBar, GUI Design Handbook: Menu, Drop-Down and
+ Pop-Up, Main Window and Related Classes, and Basic Widgets.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQPopupMenu::TQPopupMenu ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a popup menu called name with parent parent.
+
     Although a popup menu is always a top-level widget, if a parent is
+passed the popup menu will be deleted when that parent is
+destroyed (as with any other TQObject).
+
+
    TQPopupMenu::~TQPopupMenu ()
+
    
+Destroys the popup menu.
+
+
    void TQPopupMenu::aboutToHide () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted just before the popup menu is hidden after
+it has been displayed.
+
     Warning: Do not open a widget in a slot connected to this signal.
+
     
    See also aboutToShow(), setItemEnabled(), setItemChecked(), insertItem(), and removeItem().
+
+
    void TQPopupMenu::aboutToShow () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted just before the popup menu is displayed.
+You can connect it to any slot that sets up the menu contents
+(e.g. to ensure that the right items are enabled).
+
     
    See also aboutToHide(), setItemEnabled(), setItemChecked(), insertItem(), and removeItem().
+
+
    Example: mdi/application.cpp.
+
    TQKeySequence TQMenuData::accel ( int id ) const
+
    
+Returns the accelerator key that has been defined for the menu
+item id, or 0 if it has no accelerator key or if there is no
+such menu item.
+
     
    See also setAccel(), TQAccel, and ntqnamespace.h.
+
+
    void TQPopupMenu::activated ( int id ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when a menu item is selected; id is the
+id of the selected item.
+
     Normally, you connect each menu item to a single slot using
+TQMenuData::insertItem(), but sometimes you will want to connect
+several items to a single slot (most often if the user selects
+from an array). This signal is useful in such cases.
+
     
    See also highlighted() and TQMenuData::insertItem().
+
+
    Examples: grapher/grapher.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, qdir/qdir.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
+
    void TQMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const TQString & text )
+
    
+Changes the text of the menu item id to text. If the item
+has an icon, the icon remains unchanged.
+
     
    See also text().
+
+
    void TQMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const TQPixmap & pixmap )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Changes the pixmap of the menu item id to the pixmap pixmap.
+If the item has an icon, the icon is unchanged.
+
     
    See also pixmap().
+
+
    void TQMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Changes the iconset and text of the menu item id to the icon
+and text respectively.
+
     
    See also pixmap().
+
+
    void TQMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Changes the iconset and pixmap of the menu item id to icon
+and pixmap respectively.
+
     
    See also pixmap().
+
+
    void TQMenuData::clear ()
+
    
+Removes all menu items.
+
     
    See also removeItem() and removeItemAt().
+
+
    Examples: mdi/application.cpp and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
+
    int TQPopupMenu::columns () const [protected]
+
    
+If a popup menu does not fit on the screen it lays itself out so
+that it does fit. It is style dependent what layout means (for
+example, on Windows it will use multiple columns).
+
     This functions returns the number of columns necessary.
+
     
    See also sizeHint.
+
+
    bool TQMenuData::connectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
+
    
+Connects the menu item with identifier id to receiver's member slot or signal.
+
     The receiver's slot (or signal) is activated when the menu item is
+activated.
+
     
    See also disconnectItem() and setItemParameter().
+
+
    Example: menu/menu.cpp.
+
    bool TQMenuData::disconnectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
+
    
+Disconnects the receiver's member from the menu item with
+identifier id.
+
     All connections are removed when the menu data object is
+destroyed.
+
     
    See also connectItem() and setItemParameter().
+
+
    void TQPopupMenu::drawContents ( TQPainter * p ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Draws all menu items using painter p.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQFrame.
+
    void TQPopupMenu::drawItem ( TQPainter * p, int tab_, TQMenuItem * mi, bool act, int x, int y, int w, int h ) [protected]
+
    
+Draws menu item mi in the area x, y, w, h, using
+painter p. The item is drawn active if act is TRUE or drawn
+inactive if act is FALSE. The rightmost tab_ pixels are used
+for accelerator text.
+
     
    See also TQStyle::drawControl().
+
+
    int TQPopupMenu::exec ()
+
    
+Executes this popup synchronously.
+
     This is equivalent to exec(mapToGlobal(TQPoint(0,0))). In most
+situations you'll want to specify the position yourself, for
+example at the current mouse position:
+
    +        exec(TQCursor::pos());
+    
    
+ 
+or aligned to a widget:
+
    +        exec(somewidget.mapToGlobal(TQPoint(0,0)));
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    Examples: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, and scribble/scribble.cpp.
+
    int TQPopupMenu::exec ( const TQPoint & pos, int indexAtPoint = 0 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Executes this popup synchronously.
+
     Opens the popup menu so that the item number indexAtPoint will
+be at the specified global position pos. To translate a
+widget's local coordinates into global coordinates, use
+TQWidget::mapToGlobal().
+
     The return code is the id of the selected item in either the popup
+menu or one of its submenus, or -1 if no item is selected
+(normally because the user pressed Esc).
+
     Note that all signals are emitted as usual. If you connect a menu
+item to a slot and call the menu's exec(), you get the result both
+via the signal-slot connection and in the return value of exec().
+
     Common usage is to position the popup at the current mouse
+position:
+
    +        exec( TQCursor::pos() );
+    
    
+ 
+or aligned to a widget:
+
    +        exec( somewidget.mapToGlobal(TQPoint(0, 0)) );
+    
    
+ 
+
     When positioning a popup with exec() or popup(), bear in mind that
+you cannot rely on the popup menu's current size(). For
+performance reasons, the popup adapts its size only when
+necessary. So in many cases, the size before and after the show is
+different. Instead, use sizeHint(). It calculates the proper size
+depending on the menu's current contents.
+
     
    See also popup() and sizeHint.
+
+
    void TQPopupMenu::highlighted ( int id ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when a menu item is highlighted; id is
+the id of the highlighted item.
+
     
    See also activated() and TQMenuData::insertItem().
+
+
    TQIconSet * TQMenuData::iconSet ( int id ) const
+
    
+Returns the icon set that has been set for menu item id, or 0
+if no icon set has been set.
+
     
    See also changeItem(), text(), and pixmap().
+
+
    int TQPopupMenu::idAt ( int index ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the identifier of the menu item at position index in
+the internal list, or -1 if index is out of range.
+
     
    See also TQMenuData::setId() and TQMenuData::indexOf().
+
+
    Example: scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
+
    int TQPopupMenu::idAt ( const TQPoint & pos ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the id of the item at pos, or -1 if there is no item
+there or if it is a separator.
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+The family of insertItem() functions inserts menu items into a
+popup menu or a menu bar.
+
     A menu item is usually either a text string or a pixmap, both with
+an optional icon or keyboard accelerator. For special cases it is
+also possible to insert custom items (see TQCustomMenuItem) or
+even widgets into popup menus.
+
     Some insertItem() members take a popup menu as an additional
+argument. Use this to insert submenus into existing menus or
+pulldown menus into a menu bar.
+
     The number of insert functions may look confusing, but they are
+actually quite simple to use.
+
     This default version inserts a menu item with the text text,
+the accelerator key accel, an id and an optional index and
+connects it to the slot member in the object receiver.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQMenuBar   *mainMenu = new TQMenuBar;
+        TQPopupMenu *fileMenu = new TQPopupMenu;
+        fileMenu->insertItem( "New",  myView, SLOT(newFile()), CTRL+Key_N );
+        fileMenu->insertItem( "Open", myView, SLOT(open()),    CTRL+Key_O );
+        mainMenu->insertItem( "File", fileMenu );
+    
    
+ 
+
     Not all insert functions take an object/slot parameter or an
+accelerator key. Use connectItem() and setAccel() on those items.
+
     If you need to translate accelerators, use tr() with the text and
+accelerator. (For translations use a string key
+    sequence.):
+
    +        fileMenu->insertItem( tr("Open"), myView, SLOT(open()),
+                              tr("Ctrl+O") );
+    
    
+ 
+
     In the example above, pressing Ctrl+O or selecting "Open" from the
+menu activates the myView->open() function.
+
     Some insert functions take a TQIconSet parameter to specify the
+little menu item icon. Note that you can always pass a TQPixmap
+object instead.
+
     The id specifies the identification number associated with the
+menu item. Note that only positive values are valid, as a negative
+value will make TQt select a unique id for the item.
+
     The index specifies the position in the menu. The menu item is
+appended at the end of the list if index is negative.
+
     Note that keyboard accelerators in TQt are not application-global,
+instead they are bound to a certain top-level window. For example,
+accelerators in TQPopupMenu items only work for menus that are
+associated with a certain window. This is true for popup menus
+that live in a menu bar since their accelerators will then be
+installed in the menu bar itself. This also applies to stand-alone
+popup menus that have a top-level widget in their parentWidget()
+chain. The menu will then install its accelerator object on that
+top-level widget. For all other cases use an independent TQAccel
+object.
+
     Warning: Be careful when passing a literal 0 to insertItem()
+because some C++ compilers choose the wrong overloaded function.
+Cast the 0 to what you mean, e.g. (TQObject*)0.
+
     Warning: On Mac OS X, items that connect to a slot that are inserted into a
+menubar will not function as we use the native menubar that knows nothing
+about signals or slots. Instead insert the items into a popup menu and
+insert the popup menu into the menubar. This may be fixed in a future TQt
+version.
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem(), TQAccel, and ntqnamespace.h.
+
+
    Examples: addressbook/mainwindow.cpp, canvas/canvas.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, and sound/sound.cpp.
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with icon icon, text text, accelerator
+accel, optional id id, and optional index position. The
+menu item is connected it to the receiver's member slot. The
+icon will be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem(), TQAccel, and ntqnamespace.h.
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with pixmap pixmap, accelerator accel,
+optional id id, and optional index position. The menu item
+is connected it to the receiver's member slot. The icon will
+be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
+
     To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap
+should provide a mask (see TQPixmap::mask()).
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with icon icon, pixmap pixmap,
+accelerator accel, optional id id, and optional index
+position. The icon will be displayed to the left of the pixmap in
+the item. The item is connected to the member slot in the receiver object.
+
     To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap
+should provide a mask (see TQPixmap::mask()).
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem(), TQAccel, and ntqnamespace.h.
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with text text, optional id id, and
+optional index position.
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with icon icon, text text, optional id
+id, and optional index position. The icon will be displayed
+to the left of the text in the item.
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with text text, submenu popup, optional
+id id, and optional index position.
+
     The popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent
+widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when
+the menu is deleted.
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with icon icon, text text, submenu popup, optional id id, and optional index position. The icon
+will be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
+
     The popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent
+widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when
+the menu is deleted.
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with pixmap pixmap, optional id id, and
+optional index position.
+
     To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap
+should provide a mask (see TQPixmap::mask()).
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with icon icon, pixmap pixmap, optional
+id id, and optional index position. The icon will be
+displayed to the left of the pixmap in the item.
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with pixmap pixmap, submenu popup,
+optional id id, and optional index position.
+
     The popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent
+widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when
+the menu is deleted.
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item with icon icon, pixmap pixmap submenu popup, optional id id, and optional index position. The icon
+will be displayed to the left of the pixmap in the item.
+
     The popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent
+widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when
+the menu is deleted.
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( TQWidget * widget, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a menu item that consists of the widget widget with
+optional id id, and optional index position.
+
     Ownership of widget is transferred to the popup menu or to the
+menu bar.
+
     Theoretically, any widget can be inserted into a popup menu. In
+practice, this only makes sense with certain widgets.
+
     If a widget is not focus-enabled (see
+TQWidget::isFocusEnabled()), the menu treats it as a separator;
+this means that the item is not selectable and will never get
+focus. In this way you can, for example, simply insert a TQLabel if
+you need a popup menu with a title.
+
     If the widget is focus-enabled it will get focus when the user
+traverses the popup menu with the arrow keys. If the widget does
+not accept ArrowUp and ArrowDown in its key event handler,
+the focus will move back to the menu when the respective arrow key
+is hit one more time. This works with a TQLineEdit, for example. If
+the widget accepts the arrow key itself, it must also provide the
+possibility to put the focus back on the menu again by calling
+TQWidget::focusNextPrevChild(). Futhermore, if the embedded widget
+closes the menu when the user made a selection, this can be done
+safely by calling:
+
    +        if ( isVisible() &&
+             parentWidget() &&
+             parentWidget()->inherits("TQPopupMenu") )
+            parentWidget()->close();
+    
    
+ 
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also removeItem().
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, TQCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a custom menu item custom with an icon and with
+optional id id, and optional index position.
+
     This only works with popup menus. It is not supported for menu
+bars. Ownership of custom is transferred to the popup menu.
+
     If you want to connect a custom item to a slot, use connectItem().
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also connectItem(), removeItem(), and TQCustomMenuItem.
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertItem ( TQCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a custom menu item custom with optional id id, and
+optional index position.
+
     This only works with popup menus. It is not supported for menu
+bars. Ownership of custom is transferred to the popup menu.
+
     If you want to connect a custom item to a slot, use connectItem().
+
     Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
+
     
    See also connectItem(), removeItem(), and TQCustomMenuItem.
+
+
    int TQMenuData::insertSeparator ( int index = -1 )
+
    
+Inserts a separator at position index, and returns the menu identifier
+number allocated to it. The separator becomes the last menu item if
+index is negative.
+
     In a popup menu a separator is rendered as a horizontal line. In a
+Motif menu bar a separator is spacing, so the rest of the items
+(normally just "Help") are drawn right-justified. In a Windows
+menu bar separators are ignored (to comply with the Windows style
+guidelines).
+
+
    Examples: addressbook/mainwindow.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, and sound/sound.cpp.
+
    int TQPopupMenu::insertTearOffHandle ( int id = -1, int index = -1 )
+
    
+Inserts a tear-off handle into the menu. A tear-off handle is a
+special menu item that creates a copy of the menu when the menu is
+selected. This "torn-off" copy lives in a separate window. It
+contains the same menu items as the original menu, with the
+exception of the tear-off handle.
+
     The handle item is assigned the identifier id or an
+automatically generated identifier if id is < 0. The generated
+identifiers (negative integers) are guaranteed to be unique within
+the entire application.
+
     The index specifies the position in the menu. The tear-off
+handle is appended at the end of the list if index is negative.
+
+
    Example: menu/menu.cpp.
+
    bool TQPopupMenu::isCheckable () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the display of check marks on menu items is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "checkable" property for details.
+
    bool TQMenuData::isItemChecked ( int id ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id id has been checked;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setItemChecked().
+
+
    Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
+
    bool TQMenuData::isItemEnabled ( int id ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the item with identifier id is enabled;
+otherwise returns FALSE
+
     
    See also setItemEnabled() and isItemVisible().
+
+
    bool TQMenuData::isItemVisible ( int id ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id id is  visible;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setItemVisible().
+
+
    int TQPopupMenu::itemHeight ( int row ) const [protected]
+
    
+Calculates the height in pixels of the item in row row.
+
+
    int TQPopupMenu::itemHeight ( TQMenuItem * mi ) const [protected]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Calculates the height in pixels of the menu item mi.
+
+
    int TQMenuData::itemParameter ( int id ) const
+
    
+Returns the parameter of the activation signal of item id.
+
     If no parameter has been specified for this item with
+setItemParameter(), the value defaults to id.
+
     
    See also connectItem(), disconnectItem(), and setItemParameter().
+
+
    TQPixmap * TQMenuData::pixmap ( int id ) const
+
    
+Returns the pixmap that has been set for menu item id, or 0 if
+no pixmap has been set.
+
     
    See also changeItem(), text(), and iconSet().
+
+
    void TQPopupMenu::popup ( const TQPoint & pos, int indexAtPoint = -1 )
+
    
+Displays the popup menu so that the item number indexAtPoint
+will be at the specified global position pos. To translate a
+widget's local coordinates into global coordinates, use
+TQWidget::mapToGlobal().
+
     When positioning a popup with exec() or popup(), bear in mind that
+you cannot rely on the popup menu's current size(). For
+performance reasons, the popup adapts its size only when
+necessary, so in many cases, the size before and after the show is
+different. Instead, use sizeHint(). It calculates the proper size
+depending on the menu's current contents.
+
+
    Example: listviews/listviews.cpp.
+
    void TQMenuData::removeItem ( int id )
+
    
+
+
     Removes the menu item that has the identifier id.
+
     
    See also removeItemAt() and clear().
+
+
    Example: chart/chartform.cpp.
+
    void TQMenuData::removeItemAt ( int index )
+
    
+Removes the menu item at position index.
+
     
    See also removeItem() and clear().
+
+
    void TQMenuData::setAccel ( const TQKeySequence & key, int id )
+
    
+Sets the accelerator key for the menu item id to key.
+
     An accelerator key consists of a key code and a combination of the
+modifiers SHIFT, CTRL, ALT or UNICODE_ACCEL (OR'ed or
+added). The header file ntqnamespace.h contains a list of key
+codes.
+
     Defining an accelerator key produces a text that is added to the
+menu item; for instance, CTRL + Key_O produces "Ctrl+O". The
+text is formatted differently for different platforms.
+
     Note that keyboard accelerators in TQt are not application-global,
+instead they are bound to a certain top-level window. For example,
+accelerators in TQPopupMenu items only work for menus that are
+associated with a certain window. This is true for popup menus
+that live in a menu bar since their accelerators will then be
+installed in the menu bar itself. This also applies to stand-alone
+popup menus that have a top-level widget in their parentWidget()
+chain. The menu will then install its accelerator object on that
+top-level widget. For all other cases use an independent TQAccel
+object.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQMenuBar *mainMenu = new TQMenuBar;
+        TQPopupMenu *fileMenu = new TQPopupMenu;       // file sub menu
+        fileMenu->insertItem( "Open Document", 67 ); // add "Open" item
+        fileMenu->setAccel( CTRL + Key_O, 67 );      // Ctrl+O to open
+        fileMenu->insertItem( "Quit", 69 );          // add "Quit" item
+        fileMenu->setAccel( CTRL + ALT + Key_Delete, 69 ); // add Alt+Del to quit
+        mainMenu->insertItem( "File", fileMenu );    // add the file menu
+    
    
+ 
+
     If you need to translate accelerators, use tr() with a string:
+
    +        fileMenu->setAccel( tr("Ctrl+O"), 67 );
+    
    
+ 
+
     You can also specify the accelerator in the insertItem() function.
+You may prefer to use TQAction to associate accelerators with menu
+items.
+
     
    See also accel(), insertItem(), TQAccel, and TQAction.
+
+
    Example: menu/menu.cpp.
+
    void TQPopupMenu::setActiveItem ( int i ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the currently active item to index i and repaints as necessary.
+
+
    void TQPopupMenu::setCheckable ( bool ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the display of check marks on menu items is enabled.
+See the "checkable" property for details.
+
    void TQMenuData::setItemChecked ( int id, bool check )
+
    
+If check is TRUE, checks the menu item with id id; otherwise
+unchecks the menu item with id id. Calls
+TQPopupMenu::setCheckable( TRUE ) if necessary.
+
     
    See also isItemChecked().
+
+
    Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp, grapher/grapher.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
+
    void TQMenuData::setItemEnabled ( int id, bool enable )
+
    
+If enable is TRUE, enables the menu item with identifier id;
+otherwise disables the menu item with identifier id.
+
     
    See also isItemEnabled().
+
+
    Examples: mdi/application.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
+
    bool TQMenuData::setItemParameter ( int id, int param )
+
    
+Sets the parameter of the activation signal of item id to param.
+
     If any receiver takes an integer parameter, this value is passed.
+
     
    See also connectItem(), disconnectItem(), and itemParameter().
+
+
    Example: mdi/application.cpp.
+
    void TQMenuData::setItemVisible ( int id, bool visible )
+
    
+If visible is TRUE, shows the menu item with id id; otherwise
+hides the menu item with id id.
+
     
    See also isItemVisible() and isItemEnabled().
+
+
    void TQMenuData::setWhatsThis ( int id, const TQString & text )
+
    
+Sets text as What's This help for the menu item with identifier
+id.
+
     
    See also whatsThis().
+
+
    Examples: application/application.cpp, helpsystem/mainwindow.cpp, and mdi/application.cpp.
+
    TQString TQMenuData::text ( int id ) const
+
    
+Returns the text that has been set for menu item id, or
+TQString::null if no text has been set.
+
     
    See also changeItem(), pixmap(), and iconSet().
+
+
    Examples: qdir/qdir.cpp and showimg/showimg.cpp.
+
    void TQPopupMenu::updateItem ( int id ) [virtual]
+
    
+Updates the item with identity id.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQMenuData.
+
    TQString TQMenuData::whatsThis ( int id ) const
+
    
+Returns the What's This help text for the item with identifier id or TQString::null if no text has yet been defined.
+
     
    See also setWhatsThis().
+
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    bool checkable
    
+
    This property holds whether the display of check marks on menu items is enabled.
+
    When TRUE, the display of check marks on menu items is enabled.
+Checking is always enabled when in Windows-style.
+
     
    See also TQMenuData::setItemChecked().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setCheckable() and get this property's value with isCheckable().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqprinter.html b/doc/html/ntqprinter.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..331bc72e5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqprinter.html
@@ -0,0 +1,758 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQPrinter Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQPrinter Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQPrinter class is a paint device that paints on a printer.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqprinter.h>
+
    Inherits TQPaintDevice.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQPrinter class is a paint device that paints on a printer.
+
     
+
+
+
     On Windows it uses the built-in printer drivers. On X11 it
+generates postscript and sends that to lpr, lp, or another print
+command.
+
     TQPrinter is used in much the same way as TQWidget and TQPixmap are
+used. The big difference is that you must keep track of the pages.
+
     TQPrinter supports a number of settable parameters, most of which
+can be changed by the end user when the application calls
+TQPrinter::setup().
+
     The most important parameters are:
+
      
+
    •  setOrientation() tells TQPrinter which page orientation to use (virtual).
+
    •  setPageSize() tells TQPrinter what page size to expect from the
+printer.
+
    •  setResolution() tells TQPrinter what resolution you wish the
+printer to provide (in dpi).
+
    •  setFullPage() tells TQPrinter whether you want to deal with the
+full page or just with the part the printer can draw on. The
+default is FALSE, so that by default you should be able to paint
+on (0,0). If TRUE the origin of the coordinate system will be in
+the top left corner of the paper and most probably the printer
+will not be able to paint something there due to it's physical
+margins.
+
    •  setNumCopies() tells TQPrinter how many copies of the document
+it should print.
+
    •  setMinMax() tells TQPrinter and TQPrintDialog what the allowed
+range for fromPage() and toPage() are.
+
    
+
     Except where noted, you can only call the set functions before
+setup(), or between TQPainter::end() and setup(). (Some may take
+effect between setup() and begin(), or between begin() and end(),
+but that's strictly undocumented and such behaviour may differ
+depending on platform.)
+
     There are also some settings that the user sets (through the
+printer dialog) and that applications are expected to obey:
+
     
      
+
       
    •  pageOrder() tells the application program whether to print
+first-page-first or last-page-first.
+
       
    •  colorMode() tells the application program whether to print in
+color or grayscale. (If you print in color and the printer does
+not support color, TQt will try to approximate. The document may
+take longer to print, but the quality should not be made visibly
+poorer.)
+
       
    •  fromPage() and toPage() indicate what pages the application
+program should print.
+
       
    •  paperSource() tells the application progam which paper source
+to print from.
+
       
    
+
     You can of course call these functions to establish defaults
+before you ask the user through TQPrinter::setup().
+
     Once you start printing, calling newPage() is essential. You will
+probably also need to look at the TQPaintDeviceMetrics for the
+printer (see the print
+    function in the Application walk-through). In previous versions,
+paint device metrics were valid only after the TQPrinter has been set
+up, i.e. after setup() has returned successfully. This is no longer
+the case and paint device metrics can be requested safely before set up.
+
     If you want to abort the print job, abort() will try its best to
+stop printing. It may cancel the entire job or just some of it.
+
     
+
     If your current locale converts "," to ".", you will need to set
+a locale (via the standard C setlocale() function) that doen't do this
+before using TQPrinter. The "C" locale works well for this.
+
     The TrueType font embedding for TQt's postscript driver uses code
+by David Chappell of Trinity College Computing Center.
+
     
+
     Copyright 1995, Trinity College Computing Center.
+Written by David Chappell.
+
     Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and
+its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission
+notice appear in supporting documentation. This software is
+provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
+
     TrueType font support. These functions allow PPR to generate
+PostScript fonts from Microsoft compatible TrueType font files.
+
     The functions in this file do most of the work to convert a
+TrueType font to a type 3 PostScript font.
+
     Most of the material in this file is derived from a program called
+"ttf2ps" which L. S. Ng posted to the usenet news group
+"comp.sources.postscript". The author did not provide a copyright
+notice or indicate any restrictions on use.
+
     Last revised 11 July 1995.
+
     
    See also Graphics Classes and Image Processing Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQPrinter::ColorMode
    
+
+
     This enum type is used to indicate whether TQPrinter should print
+in color or not.
+
      
+
    • TQPrinter::Color - print in color if available, otherwise in grayscale.
+
    • TQPrinter::GrayScale - print in grayscale, even on color printers.
+Might be a little faster than Color. This is the default.
+
    
+
    TQPrinter::Orientation
    
+
+
     This enum type (not to be confused with TQt::Orientation) is used
+to specify each page's orientation.
+
      
+
    • TQPrinter::Portrait - the page's height is greater than its width (the
+default).
+
    • TQPrinter::Landscape - the page's width is greater than its height.
+
     This type interacts with TQPrinter::PageSize and
+TQPrinter::setFullPage() to determine the final size of the page
+available to the application.
+
+
    TQPrinter::PageOrder
    
+
+
     This enum type is used by TQPrinter to tell the application program
+how to print.
+
      
+
    • TQPrinter::FirstPageFirst - the lowest-numbered page should be printed
+first.
+
    • TQPrinter::LastPageFirst - the highest-numbered page should be printed
+first.
+
    
+
    TQPrinter::PageSize
    
+
+
     This enum type specifies what paper size TQPrinter should use.
+TQPrinter does not check that the paper size is available; it just
+uses this information, together with TQPrinter::Orientation and
+TQPrinter::setFullPage(), to determine the printable area (see
+TQPaintDeviceMetrics).
+
     The defined sizes (with setFullPage(TRUE)) are:
+
      
+
    • TQPrinter::A0 - 841 x 1189 mm This value is not supported on windows.
+
    • TQPrinter::A1 - 594 x 841 mm This value is not supported on windows.
+
    • TQPrinter::A2 - 420 x 594 mm
+
    • TQPrinter::A3 - 297 x 420 mm
+
    • TQPrinter::A4 - 210 x 297 mm, 8.26 x 11.7 inches
+
    • TQPrinter::A5 - 148 x 210 mm
+
    • TQPrinter::A6 - 105 x 148 mm
+
    • TQPrinter::A7 - 74 x 105 mm
+
    • TQPrinter::A8 - 52 x 74 mm
+
    • TQPrinter::A9 - 37 x 52 mm
+
    • TQPrinter::B0 - 1030 x 1456 mm
+
    • TQPrinter::B1 - 728 x 1030 mm
+
    • TQPrinter::B10 - 32 x 45 mm
+
    • TQPrinter::B2 - 515 x 728 mm
+
    • TQPrinter::B3 - 364 x 515 mm
+
    • TQPrinter::B4 - 257 x 364 mm
+
    • TQPrinter::B5 - 182 x 257 mm, 7.17 x 10.13 inches
+
    • TQPrinter::B6 - 128 x 182 mm
+
    • TQPrinter::B7 - 91 x 128 mm
+
    • TQPrinter::B8 - 64 x 91 mm
+
    • TQPrinter::B9 - 45 x 64 mm
+
    • TQPrinter::C5E - 163 x 229 mm
+
    • TQPrinter::Comm10E - 105 x 241 mm, US Common #10 Envelope
+
    • TQPrinter::DLE - 110 x 220 mm
+
    • TQPrinter::Executive - 7.5 x 10 inches, 191 x 254 mm
+
    • TQPrinter::Folio - 210 x 330 mm
+
    • TQPrinter::Ledger - 432 x 279 mm
+
    • TQPrinter::Legal - 8.5 x 14 inches, 216 x 356 mm
+
    • TQPrinter::Letter - 8.5 x 11 inches, 216 x 279 mm
+
    • TQPrinter::Tabloid - 279 x 432 mm
+
    • TQPrinter::Custom
+
    • TQPrinter::NPageSize - (internal)
+
     With setFullPage(FALSE) (the default), the metrics will be a bit
+smaller; how much depends on the printer in use.
+
+
    TQPrinter::PaperSource
    
+
+
     This enum type specifies what paper source TQPrinter is to use.
+TQPrinter does not check that the paper source is available; it
+just uses this information to try and set the paper source.
+Whether it will set the paper source depends on whether the
+printer has that particular source.
+
     Note: this is currently only implemented for Windows.
+
      
+
    • TQPrinter::OnlyOne
+
    • TQPrinter::Lower
+
    • TQPrinter::Middle
+
    • TQPrinter::Manual
+
    • TQPrinter::Envelope
+
    • TQPrinter::EnvelopeManual
+
    • TQPrinter::Auto
+
    • TQPrinter::Tractor
+
    • TQPrinter::SmallFormat
+
    • TQPrinter::LargeFormat
+
    • TQPrinter::LargeCapacity
+
    • TQPrinter::Cassette
+
    • TQPrinter::FormSource
+
    
+
    TQPrinter::PrintRange
    
+
+
     This enum is used to specify which print range the application
+should use to print.
+
      
+
    • TQPrinter::AllPages - All pages should be printed
+
    • TQPrinter::Selection - Only the selection should be printed.
+
    • TQPrinter::PageRange - From page, to page option.
+
     
    See also setPrintRange() and printRange().
+
+
    TQPrinter::PrinterMode
    
+
+
     This enum describes the mode the printer should work in. It
+basically presets a certain resolution and working mode.
+
      
+
    • TQPrinter::ScreenResolution - Sets the resolution of the print device to
+the screen resolution. This has the big advantage that the results
+obtained when painting on the printer will match more or less
+exactly the visible output on the screen. It is the easiest to
+use, as font metrics on the screen and on the printer are the
+same. This is the default value. ScreenResolution will produce a
+lower quality output than HighResolution and should only be used
+for drafts.
+
    • TQPrinter::PrinterResolution - Use the physical resolution of the
+printer on Windows. On Unix, set the postscript resolution to 72
+dpi.
+
    • TQPrinter::HighResolution - Use printer resolution on windows, set the
+resolution of the postscript driver to 600dpi.
+
    • TQPrinter::Compatible - Almost the same as PrinterResolution, but keeps
+some peculiarities of the TQt 2.x printer driver. This is useful
+for applications ported from TQt 2.x to TQt 3.x.
+
    
+
    TQPrinter::PrinterOption
    
+
+
     This enum describes various printer options that appear in the
+printer setup dialog. It is used to enable and disable these
+options in the setup dialog.
+
      
+
    • TQPrinter::PrintToFile - Describes if print to file should be enabled.
+
    • TQPrinter::PrintSelection - Describes if printing selections should be enabled.
+
    • TQPrinter::PrintPageRange - Describes if printing page ranges (from, to) should
+be enabled
+
     
    See also setOptionEnabled() and isOptionEnabled().
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQPrinter::TQPrinter ( PrinterMode m = ScreenResolution )
+
    
+Constructs a printer paint device with mode m.
+
     
    See also TQPrinter::PrinterMode.
+
+
    TQPrinter::~TQPrinter ()
+
    
+Destroys the printer paint device and cleans up.
+
+
    bool TQPrinter::abort ()
+
    
+Aborts the print job. Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also aborted().
+
+
    bool TQPrinter::aborted () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the print job was aborted; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     
    See also abort().
+
+
    ColorMode TQPrinter::colorMode () const
+
    
+Returns the current color mode. The default color mode is Color.
+
     
    See also setColorMode().
+
+
    TQString TQPrinter::creator () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the name of the application that created the document.
+
     
    See also setCreator().
+
+
    TQString TQPrinter::docName () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the document name.
+
     
    See also setDocName().
+
+
    int TQPrinter::fromPage () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the from-page setting. The default value is 0.
+
     If fromPage() and toPage() both return 0 this signifies 'print the
+whole document'.
+
     The programmer is responsible for reading this setting and
+printing accordingly.
+
     
    See also setFromTo() and toPage().
+
+
    bool TQPrinter::fullPage () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the origin of the printer's coordinate system is
+at the corner of the sheet and FALSE if it is at the edge of the
+printable area.
+
     See setFullPage() for details and caveats.
+
     
    See also setFullPage(), PageSize, and TQPaintDeviceMetrics.
+
+
    bool TQPrinter::isOptionEnabled ( PrinterOption option )
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the printer option with identifier option is enabled;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setOptionEnabled().
+
+
    TQSize TQPrinter::margins () const
+
    
+Returns the width of the left margin and the height of the top
+margin of the printer. On Unix, this is a best-effort guess, not
+based on perfect knowledge.
+
     If you have called setFullPage( TRUE ), margins().width() may be
+treated as the smallest sane left margin you can use, and
+margins().height() as the smallest sane top margin you can
+use.
+
     If you have called setFullPage( FALSE ) (this is the default),
+margins() is automatically subtracted from the pageSize() by
+TQPrinter.
+
     
    See also setFullPage(), TQPaintDeviceMetrics, and PageSize.
+
+
    void TQPrinter::margins ( uint * top, uint * left, uint * bottom, uint * right ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets top, left, bottom and right to the margins of the
+printer.  On Unix, this is a best-effort guess, not based on
+perfect knowledge.
+
     If you have called setFullPage( TRUE ), the four values specify
+the smallest sane margins you can use.
+
     If you have called setFullPage( FALSE ) (this is the default),
+the margins are automatically subtracted from the pageSize() by
+TQPrinter.
+
     
    See also setFullPage(), TQPaintDeviceMetrics, and PageSize.
+
+
    int TQPrinter::maxPage () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the max-page setting. A user can't choose a higher page
+number than maxPage() when they select a print range. The default
+value is 0.
+
     
    See also minPage(), setMinMax(), and setFromTo().
+
+
    int TQPrinter::minPage () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the min-page setting, i.e. the lowest page number a user
+is allowed to choose. The default value is 0.
+
     
    See also maxPage(), setMinMax(), and setFromTo().
+
+
    bool TQPrinter::newPage ()
+
    
+Advances to a new page on the printer. Returns TRUE if successful;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, and mdi/application.cpp.
+
    int TQPrinter::numCopies () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of copies to be printed. The default value is 1.
+
     This value will return the number of times the application is
+required to print in order to match the number specified in the
+printer setup dialog. This has been done since some printer
+drivers are not capable of buffering up the copies and the
+application in those cases have to make an explicit call to the
+print code for each copy.
+
     
    See also setNumCopies().
+
+
    Orientation TQPrinter::orientation () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the orientation setting. The default value is TQPrinter::Portrait.
+
     
    See also setOrientation().
+
+
    TQString TQPrinter::outputFileName () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the name of the output file. There is no default file
+name.
+
     
    See also setOutputFileName() and setOutputToFile().
+
+
    bool TQPrinter::outputToFile () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the output should be written to a file, or FALSE
+if the output should be sent directly to the printer. The default
+setting is FALSE.
+
     This function is currently only supported under X11 and Mac OS X.
+
     
    See also setOutputToFile() and setOutputFileName().
+
+
    PageOrder TQPrinter::pageOrder () const
+
    
+Returns the current page order.
+
     The default page order is FirstPageFirst.
+
    Bugs and limitations:
+
      
+
    •  This value is not kept in sync with the Windows or Mac OS X printer
+dialogs.
+
    
+
    PageSize TQPrinter::pageSize () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the printer page size. The default value is system-dependent.
+
     
    See also setPageSize().
+
+
    PaperSource TQPrinter::paperSource () const
+
    
+Returns the currently set paper source of the printer.
+
     
    See also setPaperSource().
+
+
    TQString TQPrinter::printProgram () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the name of the program that sends the print output to the
+printer.
+
     The default is to return a null string; meaning that TQPrinter will
+try to be smart in a system-dependent way. On X11 only, you can
+set it to something different to use a specific print program.
+
     On Windows, this function returns the name of the printer device
+driver.
+
     
    See also setPrintProgram() and setPrinterSelectionOption().
+
+
    PrintRange TQPrinter::printRange () const
+
    
+Returns the PageRange of the TQPrinter. After the print setup dialog
+has been opened, this function returns the value selected by the user.
+
     
    See also setPrintRange().
+
+
    TQString TQPrinter::printerName () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the printer name. This value is initially set to the name
+of the default printer.
+
     
    See also setPrinterName().
+
+
    TQString TQPrinter::printerSelectionOption () const
+
    
+Returns the printer options selection string. This is useful only
+if the print command has been explicitly set.
+
     The default value (a null string) implies that the printer should
+be selected in a system-dependent manner.
+
     Any other value implies that the given value should be used.
+
     
    See also setPrinterSelectionOption().
+
+
    int TQPrinter::resolution () const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the current assumed resolution of the printer, as set by
+setResolution() or by the printer subsystem.
+
     
    See also setResolution().
+
+
    void TQPrinter::setColorMode ( ColorMode newColorMode ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the printer's color mode to newColorMode, which can be
+either Color or GrayScale (the default).
+
     
    See also colorMode().
+
+
    void TQPrinter::setCreator ( const TQString & creator ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the name of the application that created the document to creator.
+
     This function is only applicable to the X11 version of TQt. If no
+creator name is specified, the creator will be set to "TQt"
+followed by some version number.
+
     
    See also creator().
+
+
    void TQPrinter::setDocName ( const TQString & name ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the document name to name.
+
+
    void TQPrinter::setFromTo ( int fromPage, int toPage ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the from-page and to-page settings to fromPage and toPage respectively.
+
     The from-page and to-page settings specify what pages to print.
+
     If fromPage() and toPage() both return 0 this signifies 'print the
+whole document'.
+
     This function is useful mostly to set a default value that the
+user can override in the print dialog when you call setup().
+
     
    See also fromPage(), toPage(), setMinMax(), and setup().
+
+
    void TQPrinter::setFullPage ( bool fp ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets TQPrinter to have the origin of the coordinate system at the
+top-left corner of the paper if fp is TRUE, or where it thinks
+the top-left corner of the printable area is if fp is FALSE.
+
     The default is FALSE. You can (probably) print on (0,0), and
+TQPaintDeviceMetrics will report something smaller than the size
+indicated by PageSize. (Note that TQPrinter may be wrong on Unix
+systems - it does not have perfect knowledge of the physical
+printer.)
+
     If you set fp to TRUE, TQPaintDeviceMetrics will report the
+exact same size as indicated by PageSize, but you cannot print
+on all of that - you must take care of the output margins
+yourself.
+
     
    See also PageSize, setPageSize(), TQPaintDeviceMetrics, and fullPage().
+
+
    Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, and mdi/application.cpp.
+
    void TQPrinter::setMargins ( uint top, uint left, uint bottom, uint right )
+
    
+Sets the printer margins to the sizes specified in top, left,
+bottom and right.
+
     This function currently only has an effect on Unix systems.
+
     
    See also margins().
+
+
    void TQPrinter::setMinMax ( int minPage, int maxPage ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the min-page and max-page settings to minPage and maxPage respectively.
+
     The min-page and max-page restrict the from-page and to-page
+settings. When the printer setup dialog appears, the user cannot
+select a from page or a to page that are outside the range
+specified by min and max pages.
+
     
    See also minPage(), maxPage(), setFromTo(), and setup().
+
+
    void TQPrinter::setNumCopies ( int numCopies ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the number of copies to be printed to numCopies.
+
     The printer driver reads this setting and prints the specified
+number of copies.
+
     
    See also numCopies() and setup().
+
+
    void TQPrinter::setOptionEnabled ( PrinterOption option, bool enable )
+
    
+Enables the printer option with the identifier option if enable is TRUE, and disables option option if enable is FALSE.
+
     
    See also isOptionEnabled().
+
+
    void TQPrinter::setOrientation ( Orientation orientation ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the print orientation to orientation.
+
     The orientation can be either TQPrinter::Portrait or TQPrinter::Landscape.
+
     The printer driver reads this setting and prints using the
+specified orientation. On Windows this setting won't take effect
+until the printer dialog is shown (using TQPrinter::setup()).
+
     Windows only! This option can be changed while printing and will
+take effect from the next call to newPage()
+
     
    See also orientation().
+
+
    void TQPrinter::setOutputFileName ( const TQString & fileName ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the name of the output file to fileName.
+
     Setting a null or empty name (0 or "") disables output to a file,
+i.e. calls setOutputToFile(FALSE). Setting a non-empty name
+enables output to a file, i.e. calls setOutputToFile(TRUE).
+
     This function is currently only supported under X11.
+
     
    See also outputFileName() and setOutputToFile().
+
+
    void TQPrinter::setOutputToFile ( bool enable ) [virtual]
+
    
+Specifies whether the output should be written to a file or sent
+directly to the printer.
+
     Will output to a file if enable is TRUE, or will output
+directly to the printer if enable is FALSE.
+
     This function is currently only supported under X11 and Mac OS X.
+
     
    See also outputToFile() and setOutputFileName().
+
+
    void TQPrinter::setPageOrder ( PageOrder newPageOrder ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the page order to newPageOrder.
+
     The page order can be TQPrinter::FirstPageFirst or TQPrinter::LastPageFirst. The application programmer is responsible
+for reading the page order and printing accordingly.
+
     This function is useful mostly for setting a default value that
+the user can override in the print dialog when you call setup().
+
    Bugs and limitations:
+
      
+
    •  This value is not kept in sync with the Windows or Mac OS X printer
+dialogs.
+
    
+
    void TQPrinter::setPageSize ( PageSize newPageSize ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the printer page size to newPageSize if that size is
+supported. The result if undefined if newPageSize is not
+supported.
+
     The default page size is system-dependent.
+
     This function is useful mostly for setting a default value that
+the user can override in the print dialog when you call setup().
+
     
    See also pageSize(), PageSize, setFullPage(), and setResolution().
+
+
    void TQPrinter::setPaperSource ( PaperSource source ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the paper source setting to source.
+
     Windows only! This option can be changed while printing and will
+take effect from the next call to newPage()
+
     
    See also paperSource().
+
+
    void TQPrinter::setPrintProgram ( const TQString & printProg ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the name of the program that should do the print job to printProg.
+
     On X11, this function sets the program to call with the PostScript
+output. On other platforms, it has no effect.
+
     
    See also printProgram().
+
+
    void TQPrinter::setPrintRange ( PrintRange range )
+
    
+Sets the default selected page range to be used when the print setup
+dialog is opened to range. If the PageRange specified by range is
+currently disabled the function does nothing.
+
     
    See also printRange().
+
+
    void TQPrinter::setPrinterName ( const TQString & name ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the printer name to name.
+
     The default printer will be used if no printer name is set.
+
     Under X11, the PRINTER environment variable defines the default
+printer.  Under any other window system, the window system defines
+the default printer.
+
     
    See also printerName().
+
+
    void TQPrinter::setPrinterSelectionOption ( const TQString & option ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the printer to use option to select the printer. option
+is null by default (which implies that TQt should be smart enough
+to guess correctly), but it can be set to other values to use a
+specific printer selection option.
+
     If the printer selection option is changed while the printer is
+active, the current print job may or may not be affected.
+
     
    See also printerSelectionOption().
+
+
    void TQPrinter::setResolution ( int dpi ) [virtual]
+
    
+Requests that the printer prints at dpi or as near to dpi as
+possible.
+
     This setting affects the coordinate system as returned by, for
+example, TQPaintDeviceMetrics and TQPainter::viewport().
+
     The value depends on the PrintingMode used in the TQPrinter
+constructor. By default, the dpi value of the screen is used.
+
     This function must be called before setup() to have an effect on
+all platforms.
+
     
    See also resolution() and setPageSize().
+
+
    void TQPrinter::setWinPageSize ( short winPageSize )
+
    
+Windows only, using this function is not portable!
+Sets the windows page size value that is used by the DEVMODE
+struct. The winPageSize value must be one of the DMPAPER_ defines
+from wingdi.h.
+
+
    bool TQPrinter::setup ( TQWidget * parent = 0 )
+
    
+Opens a printer setup dialog, with parent parent, and asks the
+user to specify which printer they wish to use and what settings
+it should have.
+
     Returns TRUE if the user pressed "OK" to print, or FALSE if the
+user canceled the operation.
+
+
    Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, and mdi/application.cpp.
+
    int TQPrinter::toPage () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the to-page setting. The default value is 0.
+
     If fromPage() and toPage() both return 0 this signifies 'print the
+whole document'.
+
     The programmer is responsible for reading this setting and
+printing accordingly.
+
     
    See also setFromTo() and fromPage().
+
+
    short TQPrinter::winPageSize () const
+
    
+Returns the Windows page size value as used by the DEVMODE
+struct (Windows only). Using this function is not portable.
+
     Use pageSize() to get the PageSize, e.g. 'A4', 'Letter', etc.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqprocess.html b/doc/html/ntqprocess.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..22afc994b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqprocess.html
@@ -0,0 +1,633 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQProcess Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQProcess Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQProcess class is used to start external programs and
+to communicate with them.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqprocess.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
     The TQProcess class is used to start external programs and
+to communicate with them.
+
     
+
+
+
     You can write to the started program's standard input, and can
+read the program's standard output and standard error. You can
+pass command line arguments to the program either in the
+constructor or with setArguments() or addArgument(). The program's
+working directory can be set with setWorkingDirectory(). If you
+need to set up environment variables pass them to the start() or
+launch() functions (see below). The processExited() signal is
+emitted if the program exits. The program's exit status is
+available from exitStatus(), although you could simply call
+normalExit() to see if the program terminated normally.
+
     There are two different ways to start a process. If you just want
+to run a program, optionally passing data to its standard input at
+the beginning, use one of the launch() functions. If you want full
+control of the program's standard input (especially if you don't
+know all the data you want to send to standard input at the
+beginning), use the start() function.
+
     If you use start() you can write to the program's standard input
+using writeToStdin() and you can close the standard input with
+closeStdin(). The wroteToStdin() signal is emitted if the data
+sent to standard input has been written. You can read from the
+program's standard output using readStdout() or readLineStdout().
+These functions return an empty TQByteArray if there is no data to
+read. The readyReadStdout() signal is emitted when there is data
+available to be read from standard output. Standard error has a
+set of functions that correspond to the standard output functions,
+i.e. readStderr(), readLineStderr() and readyReadStderr().
+
     If you use one of the launch() functions the data you pass will be
+sent to the program's standard input which will be closed once all
+the data has been written. You should not use writeToStdin() or
+closeStdin() if you use launch(). If you need to send data to the
+program's standard input after it has started running use start()
+instead of launch().
+
     Both start() and launch() can accept a string list of strings each
+of which has the format, key=value, where the keys are the names
+of environment variables.
+
     You can test to see if a program is running with isRunning(). The
+program's process identifier is available from
+processIdentifier(). If you want to terminate a running program
+use tryTerminate(), but note that the program may ignore this. If
+you really want to terminate the program, without it having any
+chance to clean up, you can use kill().
+
     As an example, suppose we want to start the uic command (a TQt
+command line tool used with TQt Designer) and perform some
+operations on the output (the uic outputs the code it generates
+to standard output by default). Suppose further that we want to
+run the program on the file "small_dialog.ui" with the command
+line options "-tr i18n". On the command line we would write:
+
    +    uic -tr i18n small_dialog.ui
+    
    
+ 
+
     
+
+
     A code snippet for this with the TQProcess class might look like
+this:
+
     
        UicManager::UicManager()
+    {
+
            proc = new TQProcess( this );
+
            proc->addArgument( "uic" );
+        proc->addArgument( "-tr" );
+        proc->addArgument( "i18n" );
+        proc->addArgument( "small_dialog.ui" );
+
+        connect( proc, SIGNAL(readyReadStdout()),
+                this, SLOT(readFromStdout()) );
+
            if ( !proc->start() ) {
+            // error handling
+
            }
+    }
+
    
+
     
        void UicManager::readFromStdout()
+    {
+        // Read and process the data.
+        // Bear in mind that the data might be output in chunks.
+
        }
+
    
+
     Although you may need quotes for a file named on the command line
+(e.g. if it contains spaces) you shouldn't use extra quotes for
+arguments passed to addArgument() or setArguments().
+
     The readyReadStdout() signal is emitted when there is new data on
+standard output. This happens asynchronously: you don't know if
+more data will arrive later.
+
     In the above example you could connect the processExited() signal
+to the slot UicManager::readFromStdout() instead. If you do so,
+you will be certain that all the data is available when the slot
+is called. On the other hand, you must wait until the process has
+finished before doing any processing.
+
     Note that if you are expecting a lot of output from the process,
+you may hit platform-dependent limits to the pipe buffer size. The
+solution is to make sure you connect to the output, e.g. the
+readyReadStdout() and readyReadStderr() signals and read the data
+as soon as it becomes available.
+
     Please note that TQProcess does not emulate a shell. This means that
+TQProcess does not do any expansion of arguments: a '*' is passed as a '*'
+to the program and is not replaced by all the files, a '$HOME' is also
+passed literally and is not replaced by the environment variable HOME
+and the special characters for IO redirection ('>', '|', etc.) are also
+passed literally and do not have the special meaning as they have in a
+shell.
+
     Also note that TQProcess does not emulate a terminal. This means that
+certain programs which need direct terminal control, do not work as
+expected with TQProcess. Such programs include console email programs (like
+pine and mutt) but also programs which require the user to enter a password
+(like su and ssh).
+
     
     Notes for Windows users
+
    
+
     Some Windows commands, for example, dir, are not provided by
+separate applications, but by the command interpreter.
+If you attempt to use TQProcess to execute these commands directly
+it won't work. One possible solution is to execute the command
+interpreter itself (cmd.exe on some Windows systems), and ask
+the interpreter to execute the desired command.
+
     Under Windows there are certain problems starting 16-bit applications
+and capturing their output. Microsoft recommends using an intermediate
+application to start 16-bit applications.
+
     
    See also TQSocket, Input/Output and Networking, and Miscellaneous Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQProcess::Communication
    
+
+
     This enum type defines the communication channels connected to the
+process.
+
      
+
    • TQProcess::Stdin - Data can be written to the process's standard input.
+
    • TQProcess::Stdout - Data can be read from the process's standard
+output.
+
    • TQProcess::Stderr - Data can be read from the process's standard error.
+
    • TQProcess::DupStderr - Both the process's standard error output and
+its standard output are written to its standard output. (Like
+Unix's dup2().) This means that nothing is sent to the standard
+error output. This is especially useful if your application
+requires that the output on standard output and on standard error
+must be read in the same order that they are produced. This is a
+flag, so to activate it you must pass Stdout|Stderr|DupStderr,
+or Stdin|Stdout|Stderr|DupStderr if you want to provide input,
+to the setCommunication() call.
+
     
    See also setCommunication() and communication().
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQProcess::TQProcess ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a TQProcess object. The parent and name parameters
+are passed to the TQObject constructor.
+
     
    See also setArguments(), addArgument(), and start().
+
+
    TQProcess::TQProcess ( const TQString & arg0, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a TQProcess with arg0 as the command to be executed.
+The parent and name parameters are passed to the TQObject
+constructor.
+
     The process is not started. You must call start() or launch() to
+start the process.
+
     
    See also setArguments(), addArgument(), and start().
+
+
    TQProcess::TQProcess ( const TQStringList & args, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a TQProcess with args as the arguments of the
+process. The first element in the list is the command to be
+executed. The other elements in the list are the arguments to this
+command. The parent and name parameters are passed to the
+TQObject constructor.
+
     The process is not started. You must call start() or launch() to
+start the process.
+
     
    See also setArguments(), addArgument(), and start().
+
+
    TQProcess::~TQProcess ()
+
    
+Destroys the instance.
+
     If the process is running, it is not terminated! The
+standard input, standard output and standard error of the process
+are closed.
+
     You can connect the destroyed() signal to the kill() slot, if you
+want the process to be terminated automatically when the instance
+is destroyed.
+
     
    See also tryTerminate() and kill().
+
+
    void TQProcess::addArgument ( const TQString & arg ) [virtual]
+
    
+Adds arg to the end of the list of arguments.
+
     The first element in the list of arguments is the command to be
+executed; the following elements are the command's arguments.
+
     
    See also arguments() and setArguments().
+
+
    Example: process/process.cpp.
+
    TQStringList TQProcess::arguments () const
+
    
+Returns the list of arguments that are set for the process.
+Arguments can be specified with the constructor or with the
+functions setArguments() and addArgument().
+
     Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
+over a copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQStringList list = myProcess.arguments();
+    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
+    while( it != list.end() ) {
+        myProcessing( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also setArguments() and addArgument().
+
+
    bool TQProcess::canReadLineStderr () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if it's possible to read an entire line of text from
+standard error at this time; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also readLineStderr() and canReadLineStdout().
+
+
    bool TQProcess::canReadLineStdout () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if it's possible to read an entire line of text from
+standard output at this time; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also readLineStdout() and canReadLineStderr().
+
+
    void TQProcess::clearArguments ()
+
    
+Clears the list of arguments that are set for the process.
+
     
    See also setArguments() and addArgument().
+
+
    void TQProcess::closeStdin () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Closes the process's standard input.
+
     This function also deletes any pending data that has not been
+written to standard input.
+
     
    See also wroteToStdin().
+
+
    int TQProcess::communication () const
+
    
+Returns the communication required with the process, i.e. some
+combination of the Communication flags.
+
     
    See also setCommunication().
+
+
    int TQProcess::exitStatus () const
+
    
+Returns the exit status of the process or 0 if the process is
+still running. This function returns immediately and does not wait
+until the process is finished.
+
     If normalExit() is FALSE (e.g. if the program was killed or
+crashed), this function returns 0, so you should check the return
+value of normalExit() before relying on this value.
+
     
    See also normalExit() and processExited().
+
+
    bool TQProcess::isRunning () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the process is running; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also normalExit(), exitStatus(), and processExited().
+
+
    void TQProcess::kill () const [slot]
+
    
+Terminates the process. This is not a safe way to end a process
+since the process will not be able to do any cleanup.
+tryTerminate() is safer, but processes can ignore a
+tryTerminate().
+
     The nice way to end a process and to be sure that it is finished,
+is to do something like this:
+
    +        process->tryTerminate();
+        TQTimer::singleShot( 5000, process, SLOT( kill() ) );
+    
    
+ 
+
     This tries to terminate the process the nice way. If the process
+is still running after 5 seconds, it terminates the process the
+hard way. The timeout should be chosen depending on the time the
+process needs to do all its cleanup: use a higher value if the
+process is likely to do a lot of computation or I/O on cleanup.
+
     The slot returns immediately: it does not wait until the process
+has finished. When the process terminates, the processExited()
+signal is emitted.
+
     
    See also tryTerminate() and processExited().
+
+
    bool TQProcess::launch ( const TQByteArray & buf, TQStringList * env = 0 ) [virtual]
+
    
+Runs the process and writes the data buf to the process's
+standard input. If all the data is written to standard input,
+standard input is closed. The command is searched for in the path
+for executable programs; you can also use an absolute path in the
+command itself.
+
     If env is null, then the process is started with the same
+environment as the starting process. If env is non-null, then
+the values in the string list are interpreted as environment
+setttings of the form key=value and the process is started
+with these environment settings. For convenience, there is a small
+exception to this rule under Unix: if env does not contain any
+settings for the environment variable LD_LIBRARY_PATH, then
+this variable is inherited from the starting process.
+
     Returns TRUE if the process could be started; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     Note that you should not use the slots writeToStdin() and
+closeStdin() on processes started with launch(), since the result
+is not well-defined. If you need these slots, use start() instead.
+
     The process may or may not read the buf data sent to its
+standard input.
+
     You can call this function even when a process that was started
+with this instance is still running. Be aware that if you do this
+the standard input of the process that was launched first will be
+closed, with any pending data being deleted, and the process will
+be left to run out of your control. Similarly, if the process
+could not be started the standard input will be closed and the
+pending data deleted. (On operating systems that have zombie
+processes, TQt will also wait() on the old process.)
+
     The object emits the signal launchFinished() when this function
+call is finished. If the start was successful, this signal is
+emitted after all the data has been written to standard input. If
+the start failed, then this signal is emitted immediately.
+
     
    See also start() and launchFinished().
+
+
    bool TQProcess::launch ( const TQString & buf, TQStringList * env = 0 ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     The data buf is written to standard input with writeToStdin()
+using the TQString::local8Bit() representation of the strings.
+
+
    void TQProcess::launchFinished () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the process was started with launch().
+If the start was successful, this signal is emitted after all the
+data has been written to standard input. If the start failed, then
+this signal is emitted immediately.
+
     This signal is especially useful if you want to know when you can
+safely delete the TQProcess object when you are not interested in
+reading from standard output or standard error.
+
     
    See also launch() and TQObject::deleteLater().
+
+
    bool TQProcess::normalExit () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the process has exited normally; otherwise returns
+FALSE. This implies that this function returns FALSE if the
+process is still running.
+
     
    See also isRunning(), exitStatus(), and processExited().
+
+
    void TQProcess::processExited () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the process has exited.
+
     
    See also isRunning(), normalExit(), exitStatus(), start(), and launch().
+
+
    Example: process/process.cpp.
+
    PID TQProcess::processIdentifier ()
+
    
+Returns platform dependent information about the process. This can
+be used together with platform specific system calls.
+
     Under Unix the return value is the PID of the process, or -1 if no
+process belongs to this object.
+
     Under Windows it is a pointer to the PROCESS_INFORMATION
+struct, or 0 if no process is belongs to this object.
+
     Use of this function's return value is likely to be non-portable.
+
+
    TQString TQProcess::readLineStderr () [virtual]
+
    
+Reads a line of text from standard error, excluding any trailing
+newline or carriage return characters and returns it. Returns
+TQString::null if canReadLineStderr() returns FALSE.
+
     By default, the text is interpreted to be in Latin-1 encoding. If you need
+other codecs, you can set a different codec with
+TQTextCodec::setCodecForCStrings().
+
     
    See also canReadLineStderr(), readyReadStderr(), readStderr(), and readLineStdout().
+
+
    TQString TQProcess::readLineStdout () [virtual]
+
    
+Reads a line of text from standard output, excluding any trailing
+newline or carriage return characters, and returns it. Returns
+TQString::null if canReadLineStdout() returns FALSE.
+
     By default, the text is interpreted to be in Latin-1 encoding. If you need
+other codecs, you can set a different codec with
+TQTextCodec::setCodecForCStrings().
+
     
    See also canReadLineStdout(), readyReadStdout(), readStdout(), and readLineStderr().
+
+
    TQByteArray TQProcess::readStderr () [virtual]
+
    
+Reads the data that the process has written to standard error.
+When new data is written to standard error, the class emits the
+signal readyReadStderr().
+
     If there is no data to read, this function returns a TQByteArray of
+size 0: it does not wait until there is something to read.
+
     
    See also readyReadStderr(), readLineStderr(), readStdout(), and writeToStdin().
+
+
    TQByteArray TQProcess::readStdout () [virtual]
+
    
+Reads the data that the process has written to standard output.
+When new data is written to standard output, the class emits the
+signal readyReadStdout().
+
     If there is no data to read, this function returns a TQByteArray of
+size 0: it does not wait until there is something to read.
+
     
    See also readyReadStdout(), readLineStdout(), readStderr(), and writeToStdin().
+
+
    Example: process/process.cpp.
+
    void TQProcess::readyReadStderr () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the process has written data to
+standard error. You can read the data with readStderr().
+
     Note that this signal is only emitted when there is new data and
+not when there is old, but unread data. In the slot connected to
+this signal, you should always read everything that is available
+at that moment to make sure that you don't lose any data.
+
     
    See also readStderr(), readLineStderr(), and readyReadStdout().
+
+
    void TQProcess::readyReadStdout () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the process has written data to
+standard output. You can read the data with readStdout().
+
     Note that this signal is only emitted when there is new data and
+not when there is old, but unread data. In the slot connected to
+this signal, you should always read everything that is available
+at that moment to make sure that you don't lose any data.
+
     
    See also readStdout(), readLineStdout(), and readyReadStderr().
+
+
    Example: process/process.cpp.
+
    void TQProcess::setArguments ( const TQStringList & args ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets args as the arguments for the process. The first element
+in the list is the command to be executed. The other elements in
+the list are the arguments to the command. Any previous arguments
+are deleted.
+
     TQProcess does not perform argument substitutions; for example, if you
+specify "*" or "$DISPLAY", these values are passed to the process
+literally. If you want to have the same behavior as the shell
+provides, you must do the substitutions yourself; i.e. instead of
+specifying a "*" you must specify the list of all the filenames in
+the current directory, and instead of "$DISPLAY" you must specify
+the value of the environment variable DISPLAY.
+
     Note for Windows users. The standard Windows shells, e.g. command.com and cmd.exe, do not perform file globbing, i.e.
+they do not convert a "*" on the command line into a list of files
+in the current directory. For this reason most Windows
+applications implement their own file globbing, and as a result of
+this, specifying an argument of "*" for a Windows application is
+likely to result in the application performing a file glob and
+ending up with a list of filenames.
+
     
    See also arguments() and addArgument().
+
+
    void TQProcess::setCommunication ( int commFlags )
+
    
+Sets commFlags as the communication required with the process.
+
     commFlags is a bitwise OR of the flags defined by the Communication enum.
+
     The default is Stdin|Stdout|Stderr.
+
     
    See also communication().
+
+
    void TQProcess::setWorkingDirectory ( const TQDir & dir ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets dir as the working directory for processes. This does not
+affect running processes; only processes that are started
+afterwards are affected.
+
     Setting the working directory is especially useful for processes
+that try to access files with relative paths.
+
     
    See also workingDirectory() and start().
+
+
    bool TQProcess::start ( TQStringList * env = 0 ) [virtual]
+
    
+Tries to run a process for the command and arguments that were
+specified with setArguments(), addArgument() or that were
+specified in the constructor. The command is searched for in the
+path for executable programs; you can also use an absolute path in
+the command itself.
+
     If env is null, then the process is started with the same
+environment as the starting process. If env is non-null, then
+the values in the stringlist are interpreted as environment
+setttings of the form key=value and the process is started in
+these environment settings. For convenience, there is a small
+exception to this rule: under Unix, if env does not contain any
+settings for the environment variable LD_LIBRARY_PATH, then
+this variable is inherited from the starting process; under
+Windows the same applies for the environment variable PATH.
+
     Returns TRUE if the process could be started; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     You can write data to the process's standard input with
+writeToStdin(). You can close standard input with closeStdin() and
+you can terminate the process with tryTerminate(), or with kill().
+
     You can call this function even if you've used this instance to
+create a another process which is still running. In such cases,
+TQProcess closes the old process's standard input and deletes
+pending data, i.e., you lose all control over the old process, but
+the old process is not terminated. This applies also if the
+process could not be started. (On operating systems that have
+zombie processes, TQt will also wait() on the old process.)
+
     
    See also launch() and closeStdin().
+
+
    Example: process/process.cpp.
+
    void TQProcess::tryTerminate () const [slot]
+
    
+Asks the process to terminate. Processes can ignore this if they
+wish. If you want to be certain that the process really
+terminates, you can use kill() instead.
+
     The slot returns immediately: it does not wait until the process
+has finished. When the process terminates, the processExited()
+signal is emitted.
+
     
    See also kill() and processExited().
+
+
    TQDir TQProcess::workingDirectory () const
+
    
+Returns the working directory that was set with
+setWorkingDirectory(), or the current directory if none has been
+explicitly set.
+
     
    See also setWorkingDirectory() and TQDir::current().
+
+
    void TQProcess::writeToStdin ( const TQByteArray & buf ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Writes the data buf to the process's standard input. The
+process may or may not read this data.
+
     This function always returns immediately. The data you
+pass to writeToStdin() is copied into an internal memory buffer in
+TQProcess, and when control goes back to the event loop, TQProcess will
+starting transferring data from this buffer to the running process.  
+Sometimes the data will be transferred in several payloads, depending on
+how much data is read at a time by the process itself. When TQProcess has
+transferred all the data from its memory buffer to the running process, it
+emits wroteToStdin().
+
     Note that some operating systems use a buffer to transfer
+the data. As a result, wroteToStdin() may be emitted before the
+running process has actually read all the data.
+
     
    See also wroteToStdin(), closeStdin(), readStdout(), and readStderr().
+
+
    void TQProcess::writeToStdin ( const TQString & buf ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     The string buf is handled as text using the
+TQString::local8Bit() representation.
+
+
    void TQProcess::wroteToStdin () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted if the data sent to standard input (via
+writeToStdin()) was actually written to the process. This does not
+imply that the process really read the data, since this class only
+detects when it was able to write the data to the operating
+system. But it is now safe to close standard input without losing
+pending data.
+
     
    See also writeToStdin() and closeStdin().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqprogressbar.html b/doc/html/ntqprogressbar.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b6617acba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqprogressbar.html
@@ -0,0 +1,224 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQProgressBar Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQProgressBar Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQProgressBar widget provides a horizontal progress bar.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqprogressbar.h>
+
    Inherits TQFrame.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • virtual bool setIndicator ( TQString & indicator, int progress, int totalSteps )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQProgressBar widget provides a horizontal progress bar.
+
     
+
+
     A progress bar is used to give the user an indication of the
+progress of an operation and to reassure them that the application
+is still running.
+
     The progress bar uses the concept of steps; you give it the
+total number of steps and the number of steps completed so far and
+it will display the percentage of steps that have been completed.
+You can specify the total number of steps in the constructor or
+later with setTotalSteps(). The current number of steps is set
+with setProgress(). The progress bar can be rewound to the
+beginning with reset().
+
     If the total is given as 0 the progress bar shows a busy indicator
+instead of a percentage of steps. This is useful, for example,
+when using TQFtp or TQHttp to download items when they are unable to
+determine the size of the item being downloaded.
+
     
    See also TQProgressDialog, GUI Design Handbook: Progress Indicator, and Advanced Widgets.
+
+
      
+
     
    See also TQProgressDialog, GUI Design Handbook: Progress Indicator, and Advanced Widgets.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQProgressBar::TQProgressBar ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a progress bar.
+
     The total number of steps is set to 100 by default.
+
     The parent, name and widget flags, f, are passed on to
+the TQFrame::TQFrame() constructor.
+
     
    See also totalSteps.
+
+
    TQProgressBar::TQProgressBar ( int totalSteps, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a progress bar.
+
     The totalSteps is the total number of steps that need to be
+completed for the operation which this progress bar represents.
+For example, if the operation is to examine 50 files, this value
+would be 50. Before examining the first file, call setProgress(0);
+call setProgress(50) after examining the last file.
+
     The parent, name and widget flags, f, are passed to the
+TQFrame::TQFrame() constructor.
+
     
    See also totalSteps and progress.
+
+
    bool TQProgressBar::centerIndicator () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the indicator string should be centered; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "centerIndicator" property for details.
+
    bool TQProgressBar::indicatorFollowsStyle () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the display of the indicator string should follow the GUI style; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "indicatorFollowsStyle" property for details.
+
    bool TQProgressBar::percentageVisible () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the current progress value is displayed; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "percentageVisible" property for details.
+
    int TQProgressBar::progress () const
+
    Returns the current amount of progress.
+See the "progress" property for details.
+
    const TQString & TQProgressBar::progressString () const
+
    Returns the amount of progress as a string.
+See the "progressString" property for details.
+
    void TQProgressBar::reset () [slot]
+
    
+Reset the progress bar. The progress bar "rewinds" and shows no
+progress.
+
+
    Examples: fileiconview/mainwindow.cpp and progressbar/progressbar.cpp.
+
    void TQProgressBar::setCenterIndicator ( bool on )
+
    Sets whether the indicator string should be centered to on.
+See the "centerIndicator" property for details.
+
    bool TQProgressBar::setIndicator ( TQString & indicator, int progress, int totalSteps ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This method is called to generate the text displayed in the center
+(or in some styles, to the left) of the progress bar.
+
     The progress may be negative, indicating that the progress bar
+is in the "reset" state before any progress is set.
+
     The default implementation is the percentage of completion or
+blank in the reset state. The percentage is calculated based on
+the progress and totalSteps. You can set the indicator
+text if you wish.
+
     To allow efficient repainting of the progress bar, this method
+should return FALSE if the string is unchanged from the last call
+to this function.
+
+
    void TQProgressBar::setIndicatorFollowsStyle ( bool )
+
    Sets whether the display of the indicator string should follow the GUI style.
+See the "indicatorFollowsStyle" property for details.
+
    void TQProgressBar::setPercentageVisible ( bool )
+
    Sets whether the current progress value is displayed.
+See the "percentageVisible" property for details.
+
    void TQProgressBar::setProgress ( int progress ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the current amount of progress to progress.
+See the "progress" property for details.
+
    void TQProgressBar::setProgress ( int progress, int totalSteps ) [slot]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the amount of progress to progress and the total number of
+steps to totalSteps.
+
     
    See also totalSteps.
+
+
    void TQProgressBar::setTotalSteps ( int totalSteps ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the total number of steps to totalSteps.
+See the "totalSteps" property for details.
+
    int TQProgressBar::totalSteps () const
+
    Returns the total number of steps.
+See the "totalSteps" property for details.
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    bool centerIndicator
    
+
    This property holds whether the indicator string should be centered.
+
    Changing this property sets TQProgressBar::indicatorFollowsStyle
+to FALSE. The default is TRUE.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setCenterIndicator() and get this property's value with centerIndicator().
+
    bool indicatorFollowsStyle
    
+
    This property holds whether the display of the indicator string should follow the GUI style.
+
    The default is TRUE.
+
     
    See also centerIndicator.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setIndicatorFollowsStyle() and get this property's value with indicatorFollowsStyle().
+
    bool percentageVisible
    
+
    This property holds whether the current progress value is displayed.
+
    The default is TRUE.
+
     
    See also centerIndicator and indicatorFollowsStyle.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setPercentageVisible() and get this property's value with percentageVisible().
+
    int progress
    
+
    This property holds the current amount of progress.
+
    This property is -1 if progress counting has not started.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setProgress() and get this property's value with progress().
+
    TQString progressString
    
+
    This property holds the amount of progress as a string.
+
    This property is TQString::null if progress counting has not started.
+
+
    Get this property's value with progressString().
+
    int totalSteps
    
+
    This property holds the total number of steps.
+
    If totalSteps is 0, the progress bar will display a busy
+indicator.
+
     
    See also 
+
    Set this property's value with setTotalSteps() and get this property's value with totalSteps().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqprogressdialog.html b/doc/html/ntqprogressdialog.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..68d8f3cbf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqprogressdialog.html
@@ -0,0 +1,409 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQProgressDialog Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQProgressDialog Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQProgressDialog class provides feedback on the progress of a slow operation.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqprogressdialog.h>
+
    Inherits TQDialog.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
      
+
    • void cancelled ()  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void canceled ()
      • 
+
    
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • bool autoClose - whether the dialog gets hidden by reset()
      • 
+
    • bool autoReset - whether the progress dialog calls reset() as soon as progress() equals totalSteps()
      • 
+
    • TQString labelText - the label's text
      • 
+
    • int minimumDuration - the time that must pass before the dialog appears
      • 
+
    • int progress - the current amount of progress made
      • 
+
    • int totalSteps - the total number of steps
      • 
+
    • bool wasCanceled - whether the dialog was canceled  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool wasCancelled - whether the dialog was canceled  (read only)  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Slots
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQProgressDialog class provides feedback on the progress of a slow operation.
+
+
+
     A progress dialog is used to give the user an indication of how long
+an operation is going to take, and to demonstrate that the
+application has not frozen. It can also give the user an opportunity
+to abort the operation.
+
     A common problem with progress dialogs is that it is difficult to know
+when to use them; operations take different amounts of time on different
+hardware.  TQProgressDialog offers a solution to this problem:
+it estimates the time the operation will take (based on time for
+steps), and only shows itself if that estimate is beyond minimumDuration()
+(4 seconds by default).
+
     Use setTotalSteps() (or the constructor) to set the number of
+"steps" in the operation and call setProgress() as the operation
+progresses. The step value can be chosen arbitrarily. It can be the
+number of files copied, the number of bytes received, the number of
+iterations through the main loop of your algorithm, or some other
+suitable unit.  Progress starts at 0, and the progress dialog shows
+that the operation has finished when you call setProgress() with
+totalSteps() as its argument.
+
     The dialog automatically resets and hides itself at the end of the
+operation. Use setAutoReset() and setAutoClose() to change this
+behavior.
+
     There are two ways of using TQProgressDialog: modal and modeless.
+
     Using a modal TQProgressDialog is simpler for the programmer, but you
+must call TQApplication::processEvents() or
+TQEventLoop::processEvents(ExcludeUserInput) to keep the event loop
+running to ensure that the application doesn't freeze. Do the
+operation in a loop, call setProgress() at intervals, and check
+for cancellation with wasCanceled(). For example:
+
    +TQProgressDialog progress( "Copying files...", "Abort Copy", numFiles,
+                          this, "progress", TRUE );
+for ( int i = 0; i < numFiles; i++ ) {
+    progress.setProgress( i );
+    qApp->processEvents();
+
+    if ( progress.wasCanceled() )
+        break;
+    //... copy one file
+}
+progress.setProgress( numFiles );
+
    
+ 
+
     A modeless progress dialog is suitable for operations that take
+place in the background, where the user is able to interact with the
+application. Such operations are typically based on TQTimer (or
+TQObject::timerEvent()), TQSocketNotifier, or TQUrlOperator; or performed
+in a separate thread. A TQProgressBar in the status bar of your main window
+is often an alternative to a modeless progress dialog.
+
     You need to have an event loop to be running, connect the
+canceled() signal to a slot that stops the operation, and call setProgress() at intervals. For example:
+
    +Operation::Operation( TQObject *parent = 0 )
+    : TQObject( parent ), steps( 0 )
+{
+    pd = new TQProgressDialog( "Operation in progress.", "Cancel", 100 );
+    connect( pd, SIGNAL(canceled()), this, SLOT(cancel()) );
+    t = new TQTimer( this );
+    connect( t, SIGNAL(timeout()), this, SLOT(perform()) );
+    t->start( 0 );
+}
+
+void Operation::perform()
+{
+    pd->setProgress( steps );
+    //... perform one percent of the operation
+    steps++;
+    if ( steps > pd->totalSteps() )
+        t->stop();
+}
+
+void Operation::cancel()
+{
+    t->stop();
+    //... cleanup
+}
+
    
+ 
+
     In both modes the progress dialog may be customized by
+replacing the child widgets with custom widgets by using setLabel(),
+setBar(), and setCancelButton().
+The functions setLabelText() and setCancelButtonText()
+set the texts shown.
+
      
+
     
    See also TQDialog, TQProgressBar, GUI Design Handbook: Progress Indicator, and Dialog Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQProgressDialog::TQProgressDialog ( TQWidget * creator = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a progress dialog.
+
     Default settings:
+
      
+
    •  The label text is empty.
+
    •  The cancel button text is (translated) "Cancel".
+
    •  The total number of steps is 100.
+
    
+
     The creator argument is the widget to use as the dialog's parent.
+The name, modal, and the widget flags, f, are
+passed to the TQDialog::TQDialog() constructor. If modal is FALSE (the
+default), you must have an event loop proceeding for any redrawing
+of the dialog to occur. If modal is TRUE, the dialog ensures that
+events are processed when needed.
+
     
    See also labelText, setLabel(), setCancelButtonText(), setCancelButton(), and totalSteps.
+
+
    TQProgressDialog::TQProgressDialog ( const TQString & labelText, const TQString & cancelButtonText, int totalSteps, TQWidget * creator = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a progress dialog.
+
     The labelText is text used to remind the user what is progressing.
+
     The cancelButtonText is the text to display on the cancel button,
+or 0 if no cancel button is to be shown.
+
     The totalSteps is the total number of steps in the operation for
+which this progress dialog shows progress.  For example, if the
+operation is to examine 50 files, this value would be 50. Before
+examining the first file, call setProgress(0). As each file is
+processed call setProgress(1), setProgress(2), etc., finally
+calling setProgress(50) after examining the last file.
+
     The creator argument is the widget to use as the dialog's parent.
+The name, modal, and widget flags, f, are passed to the
+TQDialog::TQDialog() constructor. If modal is FALSE (the default),
+you will must have an event loop proceeding for any redrawing of
+the dialog to occur. If modal is TRUE, the dialog ensures that
+events are processed when needed.
+
     
    See also labelText, setLabel(), setCancelButtonText(), setCancelButton(), and totalSteps.
+
+
    TQProgressDialog::~TQProgressDialog ()
+
    
+Destroys the progress dialog.
+
+
    bool TQProgressDialog::autoClose () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the dialog gets hidden by reset(); otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "autoClose" property for details.
+
    bool TQProgressDialog::autoReset () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the progress dialog calls reset() as soon as progress() equals totalSteps(); otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "autoReset" property for details.
+
    void TQProgressDialog::cancel () [slot]
+
    
+Resets the progress dialog. wasCanceled() becomes TRUE until
+the progress dialog is reset.
+The progress dialog becomes hidden.
+
+
    void TQProgressDialog::canceled () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the cancel button is clicked.
+It is connected to the cancel() slot by default.
+
     
    See also wasCanceled.
+
+
    void TQProgressDialog::cancelled () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Use canceled() instead.
+
+
    Examples: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h and progress/progress.cpp.
+
    void TQProgressDialog::forceShow () [protected slot]
+
    
+Shows the dialog if it is still hidden after the algorithm has been started
+and minimumDuration milliseconds have passed.
+
     
    See also minimumDuration.
+
+
    TQString TQProgressDialog::labelText () const
+
    Returns the label's text.
+See the "labelText" property for details.
+
    int TQProgressDialog::minimumDuration () const
+
    Returns the time that must pass before the dialog appears.
+See the "minimumDuration" property for details.
+
    int TQProgressDialog::progress () const
+
    Returns the current amount of progress made.
+See the "progress" property for details.
+
    void TQProgressDialog::reset () [slot]
+
    
+Resets the progress dialog.
+The progress dialog becomes hidden if autoClose() is TRUE.
+
     
    See also autoClose and autoReset.
+
+
    Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
+
    void TQProgressDialog::setAutoClose ( bool b )
+
    Sets whether the dialog gets hidden by reset() to b.
+See the "autoClose" property for details.
+
    void TQProgressDialog::setAutoReset ( bool b )
+
    Sets whether the progress dialog calls reset() as soon as progress() equals totalSteps() to b.
+See the "autoReset" property for details.
+
    void TQProgressDialog::setBar ( TQProgressBar * bar )
+
    
+Sets the progress bar widget to bar. The progress dialog resizes to
+fit. The progress dialog takes ownership of the progress bar which
+will be deleted when necessary, so do not use a progress bar
+allocated on the stack.
+
+
    void TQProgressDialog::setCancelButton ( TQPushButton * cancelButton )
+
    
+Sets the cancel button to the push button, cancelButton. The
+progress dialog takes ownership of this button which will be deleted
+when necessary, so do not pass the address of an object that is on
+the stack, i.e. use new() to create the button.
+
     
    See also setCancelButtonText().
+
+
    void TQProgressDialog::setCancelButtonText ( const TQString & cancelButtonText ) [slot]
+
    
+Sets the cancel button's text to cancelButtonText.
+
    See also setCancelButton().
+
+
    void TQProgressDialog::setLabel ( TQLabel * label )
+
    
+Sets the label to label. The progress dialog resizes to fit. The
+label becomes owned by the progress dialog and will be deleted when
+necessary, so do not pass the address of an object on the stack.
+
     
    See also labelText.
+
+
    Example: progress/progress.cpp.
+
    void TQProgressDialog::setLabelText ( const TQString & ) [slot]
+
    Sets the label's text.
+See the "labelText" property for details.
+
    void TQProgressDialog::setMinimumDuration ( int ms ) [slot]
+
    Sets the time that must pass before the dialog appears to ms.
+See the "minimumDuration" property for details.
+
    void TQProgressDialog::setProgress ( int progress ) [slot]
+
    Sets the current amount of progress made to progress.
+See the "progress" property for details.
+
    void TQProgressDialog::setProgress ( int progress, int totalSteps ) [slot]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the current amount of progress to progress and the total number of
+steps to totalSteps.
+
     
    See also totalSteps.
+
+
    void TQProgressDialog::setTotalSteps ( int totalSteps ) [slot]
+
    Sets the total number of steps to totalSteps.
+See the "totalSteps" property for details.
+
    TQSize TQProgressDialog::sizeHint () const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns a size that fits the contents of the progress dialog.
+The progress dialog resizes itself as required, so you should not
+need to call this yourself.
+
+
    int TQProgressDialog::totalSteps () const
+
    Returns the total number of steps.
+See the "totalSteps" property for details.
+
    bool TQProgressDialog::wasCanceled () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the dialog was canceled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "wasCanceled" property for details.
+
    bool TQProgressDialog::wasCancelled () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the dialog was canceled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "wasCancelled" property for details.
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    bool autoClose
    
+
    This property holds whether the dialog gets hidden by reset().
+
    The default is TRUE.
+
     
    See also autoReset.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setAutoClose() and get this property's value with autoClose().
+
    bool autoReset
    
+
    This property holds whether the progress dialog calls reset() as soon as progress() equals totalSteps().
+
    The default is TRUE.
+
     
    See also autoClose.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setAutoReset() and get this property's value with autoReset().
+
    TQString labelText
    
+
    This property holds the label's text.
+
    The default text is TQString::null.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setLabelText() and get this property's value with labelText().
+
    int minimumDuration
    
+
    This property holds the time that must pass before the dialog appears.
+
    If the expected duration of the task is less than the
+minimumDuration, the dialog will not appear at all. This prevents
+the dialog popping up for tasks that are tquickly over. For tasks
+that are expected to exceed the minimumDuration, the dialog will
+pop up after the minimumDuration time or as soon as any progress
+is set.
+
     If set to 0, the dialog is always shown as soon as any progress is
+set. The default is 4000 milliseconds.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setMinimumDuration() and get this property's value with minimumDuration().
+
    int progress
    
+
    This property holds the current amount of progress made.
+
    For the progress dialog to work as expected, you should initially set
+this property to 0 and finally set it to
+TQProgressDialog::totalSteps(); you can call setProgress() any number of times
+in-between.
+
     Warning: If the progress dialog is modal
+(see TQProgressDialog::TQProgressDialog()),
+this function calls TQApplication::processEvents(), so take care that
+this does not cause undesirable re-entrancy in your code. For example,
+don't use a TQProgressDialog inside a paintEvent()!
+
     
    See also totalSteps.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setProgress() and get this property's value with progress().
+
    int totalSteps
    
+
    This property holds the total number of steps.
+
    The default is 0.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setTotalSteps() and get this property's value with totalSteps().
+
    bool wasCanceled
    
+
    This property holds whether the dialog was canceled.
+
    Get this property's value with wasCanceled().
+
    See also progress.
+
+
    bool wasCancelled
    
+
    This property holds whether the dialog was canceled.
+
    This property is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Use wasCanceled instead.
+
+
    Get this property's value with wasCancelled().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqptrcollection.html b/doc/html/ntqptrcollection.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..da3f299b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqptrcollection.html
@@ -0,0 +1,177 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQPtrCollection Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQPtrCollection Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQPtrCollection class is the base class of most pointer-based TQt collections.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqptrcollection.h>
+
    Inherited by TQAsciiCache, TQAsciiDict, TQCache, TQDict, TQIntCache, TQIntDict, TQPtrList, TQPtrDict, and TQPtrVector.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
+The TQPtrCollection class is the base class of most pointer-based TQt collections.
+
     
+
+
     The TQPtrCollection class is an abstract base class for the TQt
+collection classes TQDict, TQPtrList,
+etc. TQt also includes value based collections, e.g. TQValueList,
+TQMap, etc.
+
     A TQPtrCollection only knows about the number of objects in the
+collection and the deletion strategy (see setAutoDelete()).
+
     A collection is implemented using the Item (generic collection
+item) type, which is a void*. The template classes that create
+the real collections cast the Item to the required type.
+
    See also Collection Classes and Non-GUI Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQPtrCollection::Item
    
+
+
     This type is the generic "item" in a TQPtrCollection.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQPtrCollection::TQPtrCollection () [protected]
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a collection. The constructor is protected because
+TQPtrCollection is an abstract class.
+
+
    TQPtrCollection::TQPtrCollection ( const TQPtrCollection & source ) [protected]
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a copy of source with autoDelete() set to FALSE. The
+constructor is protected because TQPtrCollection is an abstract
+class.
+
     Note that if source has autoDelete turned on, copying it will
+risk memory leaks, reading freed memory, or both.
+
+
    TQPtrCollection::~TQPtrCollection () [virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     Destroys the collection. The destructor is protected because
+TQPtrCollection is an abstract class.
+
+
    bool TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE.
+
     
    See also setAutoDelete().
+
+
    void TQPtrCollection::clear () [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Removes all objects from the collection. The objects will be
+deleted if auto-delete has been enabled.
+
     
    See also setAutoDelete().
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQAsciiCache, TQAsciiDict, TQCache, TQDict, TQIntCache, TQIntDict, TQPtrList, TQPtrDict, and TQPtrVector.
+
    uint TQPtrCollection::count () const [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of objects in the collection.
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQAsciiCache, TQAsciiDict, TQCache, TQDict, TQIntCache, TQIntDict, TQPtrList, TQPtrDict, and TQPtrVector.
+
    void TQPtrCollection::deleteItem ( Item d ) [pure virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     Reimplement this function if you want to be able to delete items.
+
     Deletes an item that is about to be removed from the collection.
+
     This function has to reimplemented in the collection template
+classes, and should only delete item d if auto-delete has
+been enabled.
+
     Warning: If you reimplement this function you must also
+reimplement the destructor and call the virtual function clear()
+from your destructor. This is due to the way virtual functions and
+destructors work in C++: Virtual functions in derived classes
+cannot be called from a destructor. If you do not do this, your
+deleteItem() function will not be called when the container is
+destroyed.
+
     
    See also newItem() and setAutoDelete().
+
+
    Item TQPtrCollection::newItem ( Item d ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Virtual function that creates a copy of an object that is about to
+be inserted into the collection.
+
     The default implementation returns the d pointer, i.e. no copy
+is made.
+
     This function is seldom reimplemented in the collection template
+classes. It is not common practice to make a copy of something
+that is being inserted.
+
     
    See also deleteItem().
+
+
    void TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if enable is
+TRUE and to never delete them if enable is FALSE.
+
     If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are
+deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient
+if the collection has the only pointer to the items.
+
     The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be
+careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself
+with two collections deleting the same items.
+
     Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions
+in subclasses. For example, a subclass that has a remove()
+function will remove the item from its data structure, and if
+auto-delete is enabled, will also delete the item.
+
     
    See also autoDelete().
+
+
    Examples: grapher/grapher.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, and table/bigtable/main.cpp.
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqptrdict.html b/doc/html/ntqptrdict.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3cfaf5b1d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqptrdict.html
@@ -0,0 +1,316 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQPtrDict Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQPtrDict Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQPtrDict class is a template class that provides a dictionary based on void* keys.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqptrdict.h>
+
    Inherits TQPtrCollection.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Important Inherited Members
    
+
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • virtual TQDataStream & read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item )
      • 
+
    • virtual TQDataStream & write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item ) const
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQPtrDict class is a template class that provides a dictionary based on void* keys.
+
     
+
+
     
+
     TQPtrDict is implemented as a template class. Define a template
+instance TQPtrDict<X> to create a dictionary that operates on
+pointers to X (X*).
+
     A dictionary is a collection of key-value pairs. The key is a
+void* used for insertion, removal and lookup. The value is a
+pointer. Dictionaries provide very fast insertion and lookup.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQPtrDict<char> fields; // void* keys, char* values
+
+    TQLineEdit *le1 = new TQLineEdit( this );
+    le1->setText( "Simpson" );
+    TQLineEdit *le2 = new TQLineEdit( this );
+    le2->setText( "Homer" );
+    TQLineEdit *le3 = new TQLineEdit( this );
+    le3->setText( "45" );
+
+    fields.insert( le1, "Surname" );
+    fields.insert( le2, "Forename" );
+    fields.insert( le3, "Age" );
+
+    TQPtrDictIterator<char> it( fields );
+    for( ; it.current(); ++it )
+        cout << it.current() << endl;
+    cout << endl;
+
+    if ( fields[le1] ) // Prints "Surname: Simpson"
+        cout << fields[le1] << ": " << le1->text() << endl; 
+    if ( fields[le2] ) // Prints "Forename: Homer"
+        cout << fields[le2] << ": " << le2->text() << endl; 
+
+    fields.remove( le1 ); // Removes le1 from the dictionary
+    cout << le1->text() << endl; // Prints "Simpson"
+    
    
+ 
+In this example we use a dictionary to add an extra property (a
+char*) to the line edits we're using. 
+
     See TQDict for full details, including the choice of dictionary
+size, and how deletions are handled. 
+
     
    See also TQPtrDictIterator, TQDict, TQAsciiDict, TQIntDict, Collection Classes, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQPtrDict::TQPtrDict ( int size = 17 )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a dictionary using an internal hash array with the size
+size.
+
     Setting size to a suitably large prime number (equal to or
+greater than the expected number of entries) makes the hash
+distribution better and improves lookup performance.
+
+
    TQPtrDict::TQPtrDict ( const TQPtrDict<type> & dict )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a copy of dict.
+
     Each item in dict is inserted into this dictionary. Only the
+pointers are copied (shallow copy).
+
+
    TQPtrDict::~TQPtrDict ()
+
    
+
+
     Removes all items from the dictionary and destroys it.
+
     All iterators that access this dictionary will be reset.
+
     
    See also setAutoDelete().
+
+
    bool TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE.
+
     
    See also setAutoDelete().
+
+
    void TQPtrDict::clear () [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Removes all items from the dictionary.
+
     The removed items are deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
+
     All dictionary iterators that access this dictionary will be
+reset.
+
     
    See also remove(), take(), and setAutoDelete().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
+
    uint TQPtrDict::count () const [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of items in the dictionary.
+
     
    See also isEmpty().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
+
    type * TQPtrDict::find ( void * key ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the item associated with key, or 0 if the key does not
+exist in the dictionary.
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most
+recently inserted item will be found.
+
     Equivalent to operator[].
+
     
    See also operator[]().
+
+
    void TQPtrDict::insert ( void * key, const type * item )
+
    
+
+
     Inserts the key with the item into the dictionary.
+
     Multiple items can have the same key, in which case only the last
+item will be accessible using operator[]().
+
     item may not be 0.
+
     
    See also replace().
+
+
    bool TQPtrDict::isEmpty () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also count().
+
+
    TQPtrDict<type> & TQPtrDict::operator= ( const TQPtrDict<type> & dict )
+
    
+
+
     Assigns dict to this dictionary and returns a reference to this
+dictionary.
+
     This dictionary is first cleared and then each item in dict is
+inserted into the dictionary. Only the pointers are copied
+(shallow copy), unless newItem() has been reimplemented.
+
+
    type * TQPtrDict::operator[] ( void * key ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the item associated with key, or 0 if the key does not
+exist in the dictionary.
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most
+recently inserted item will be found.
+
     Equivalent to the find() function.
+
     
    See also find().
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQPtrDict::read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     Reads a dictionary item from the stream s and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
     The default implementation sets item to 0.
+
     
    See also write().
+
+
    bool TQPtrDict::remove ( void * key )
+
    
+
+
     Removes the item associated with key from the dictionary.
+Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if key is in the dictionary;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most
+recently inserted item will be removed.
+
     The removed item is deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
+
     All dictionary iterators that refer to the removed item will be
+set to point to the next item in the dictionary traversal order.
+
     
    See also take(), clear(), and setAutoDelete().
+
+
    void TQPtrDict::replace ( void * key, const type * item )
+
    
+
+
     If the dictionary has key key, this key's item is replaced with
+item. If the dictionary doesn't contain key key, item is
+inserted into the dictionary using key key. 
+
     item may not be 0.
+
     Equivalent to
+
    +        TQPtrDict<ItemType> dict;
+            ...
+        if ( dict.find( key ) )
+            dict.remove( key );
+        dict.insert( key, item );
+    
    
+ 
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most
+recently inserted item will be replaced.
+
     
    See also insert().
+
+
    void TQPtrDict::resize ( uint newsize )
+
    
+
+
     Changes the size of the hash table to newsize. The contents of
+the dictionary are preserved, but all iterators on the dictionary
+become invalid.
+
+
    void TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if enable is
+TRUE and to never delete them if enable is FALSE.
+
     If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are
+deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient
+if the collection has the only pointer to the items.
+
     The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be
+careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself
+with two collections deleting the same items.
+
     Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions
+in subclasses. For example, a subclass that has a remove()
+function will remove the item from its data structure, and if
+auto-delete is enabled, will also delete the item.
+
     
    See also autoDelete().
+
+
    Examples: grapher/grapher.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, and table/bigtable/main.cpp.
+
    uint TQPtrDict::size () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the size of the internal hash table (as specified in the
+constructor).
+
     
    See also count().
+
+
    void TQPtrDict::statistics () const
+
    
+
+
     Debugging-only function that prints out the dictionary
+distribution using qDebug().
+
+
    type * TQPtrDict::take ( void * key )
+
    
+
+
     Takes the item associated with key out of the dictionary
+without deleting it (even if auto-deletion is enabled).
+
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most
+recently inserted item will be removed.
+
     Returns a pointer to the item taken out, or 0 if the key does not
+exist in the dictionary.
+
     All dictionary iterators that refer to the taken item will be set
+to point to the next item in the dictionary traversal order.
+
     
    See also remove(), clear(), and setAutoDelete().
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQPtrDict::write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item ) const [virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     Writes a dictionary item to the stream s and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
     
    See also read().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqptrlist.html b/doc/html/ntqptrlist.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..305b49949
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqptrlist.html
@@ -0,0 +1,741 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQPtrList Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQPtrList Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQPtrList class is a template class that provides a list.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqptrlist.h>
+
    Inherits TQPtrCollection.
+
    Inherited by TQObjectList, TQSortedList, and TQStrList.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Important Inherited Members
    
+
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • virtual int compareItems ( TQPtrCollection::Item item1, TQPtrCollection::Item item2 )
      • 
+
    • virtual TQDataStream & read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item )
      • 
+
    • virtual TQDataStream & write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item item ) const
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQPtrList class is a template class that provides a list.
+
     
+
+
     
+
     TQValueList is an STL-compatible alternative to this class.
+
     Define a template instance TQPtrList<X> to create a list that
+operates on pointers to X (X*).
+
     The list class is indexable and has a current
+    index and a current item. The
+first item corresponds to index position 0. The current index is
+-1 if the current item is 0.
+
     Items are inserted with prepend(), insert() or append(). Items are
+removed with remove(), removeRef(), removeFirst() and
+removeLast(). You can search for an item using find(), findNext(),
+findRef() or findNextRef(). The list can be sorted with sort().
+You can count the number of occurrences of an item with contains()
+or containsRef(). You can get a pointer to the current item with
+current(), to an item at a particular index position in the list
+with at() or to the first or last item with getFirst() and
+getLast(). You can also iterate over the list with first(),
+last(), next() and prev() (which all update current()). The list's
+deletion property is set with setAutoDelete().
+
     
+Example:
+
    +    class Employee
+    {
+    public:
+        Employee() : sn( 0 ) { }
+        Employee( const TQString& forename, const TQString& surname, int salary )
+            : fn( forename ), sn( surname ), sal( salary )
+        { }
+
+        void setSalary( int salary ) { sal = salary; }
+
+        TQString forename() const { return fn; }
+        TQString surname() const { return sn; }
+        int salary() const { return sal; }
+
+    private:
+        TQString fn;
+        TQString sn;
+        int sal;
+    };
+
+    TQPtrList<Employee> list;
+    list.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); // the list owns the objects
+
+    list.append( new Employee("John", "Doe", 50000) );
+    list.append( new Employee("Jane", "Williams", 80000) );
+    list.append( new Employee("Tom", "Jones", 60000) );
+
+    Employee *employee;
+    for ( employee = list.first(); employee; employee = list.next() )
+        cout << employee->surname().latin1() << ", " <<
+                employee->forename().latin1() << " earns " <<
+                employee->salary() << endl;
+    cout << endl;
+
+    // very inefficient for big lists
+    for ( uint i = 0; i < list.count(); ++i )
+        if ( list.at(i) )
+            cout << list.at( i )->surname().latin1() << endl;
+    
    
+ 
+
     The output is
+
    +    Doe, John earns 50000
+    Williams, Jane earns 80000
+    Jones, Tom earns 60000
+
+    Doe
+    Williams
+    Jones
+    
    
+ 
+
     TQPtrList has several member functions for traversing the list, but
+using a TQPtrListIterator can be more practical. Multiple list
+iterators may traverse the same list, independently of each other
+and of the current list item.
+
     In the example above we make the call setAutoDelete(TRUE).
+Enabling auto-deletion tells the list to delete items that are
+removed. The default is to not delete items when they are removed
+but this would cause a memory leak in the example because there
+are no other references to the list items.
+
     When inserting an item into a list only the pointer is copied, not
+the item itself, i.e. a shallow copy. It is possible to make the
+list copy all of the item's data (deep copy) when an item is
+inserted. insert(), inSort() and append() call the virtual
+function TQPtrCollection::newItem() for the item to be inserted.
+Inherit a list and reimplement newItem() to have deep copies.
+
     When removing an item from a list, the virtual function
+TQPtrCollection::deleteItem() is called. TQPtrList's default
+implementation is to delete the item if auto-deletion is enabled.
+
     The virtual function compareItems() can be reimplemented to
+compare two list items. This function is called from all list
+functions that need to compare list items, for instance
+remove(const type*). If you only want to deal with pointers, there
+are functions that compare pointers instead, for instance
+removeRef(const type*). These functions are somewhat faster than
+those that call compareItems().
+
     List items are stored as void* in an internal TQLNode, which
+also holds pointers to the next and previous list items. The
+functions currentNode(), removeNode(), and takeNode() operate
+directly on the TQLNode, but they should be used with care. The
+data component of the node is available through TQLNode::getData().
+
     The TQStrList class defined in ntqstrlist.h is a list of char*.
+It reimplements newItem(), deleteItem() and compareItems(). (But
+see TQStringList for a list of Unicode TQStrings.)
+
     
    See also TQPtrListIterator, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQPtrList::TQPtrList ()
+
    
+
+
     Constructs an empty list.
+
+
    TQPtrList::TQPtrList ( const TQPtrList<type> & list )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a copy of list.
+
     Each item in list is appended to this
+list. Only the pointers are copied (shallow copy).
+
+
    TQPtrList::~TQPtrList ()
+
    
+
+
     Removes all items from the list and destroys the list.
+
     All list iterators that access this list will be reset.
+
     
    See also setAutoDelete().
+
+
    void TQPtrList::append ( const type * item )
+
    
+
+
     Inserts the item at the end of the list.
+
     The inserted item becomes the current list item. This is
+equivalent to insert( count(), item ).
+
     item must not be 0.
+
     
    See also insert(), current(), and prepend().
+
+
    Examples: customlayout/border.cpp, customlayout/card.cpp, customlayout/flow.cpp, grapher/grapher.cpp, listviews/listviews.cpp, listviews/listviews.h, and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
+
    type * TQPtrList::at ( uint index )
+
    
+
+
     Returns a pointer to the item at position index in the list, or
+0 if the index is out of range.
+
     Sets the current list item to this item if index is valid. The
+valid range is 0..(count() - 1) inclusive.
+
     This function is very efficient. It starts scanning from the first
+item, last item, or current item, whichever is closest to index.
+
     
    See also current().
+
+
    Examples: customlayout/border.cpp, customlayout/card.cpp, customlayout/flow.cpp, dirview/dirview.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
+
    int TQPtrList::at () const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the index of the current list item. The returned value is
+-1 if the current item is 0.
+
     
    See also current().
+
+
    bool TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE.
+
     
    See also setAutoDelete().
+
+
    void TQPtrList::clear () [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Removes all items from the list.
+
     The removed items are deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
+
     All list iterators that access this list will be reset.
+
     
    See also remove(), take(), and setAutoDelete().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
+
    int TQPtrList::compareItems ( TQPtrCollection::Item item1, TQPtrCollection::Item item2 ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     This virtual function compares two list items.
+
     Returns:
+
      
+
    •  zero if item1 == item2
+
    •  nonzero if item1 != item2
+
    
+
     This function returns int rather than bool so that
+reimplementations can return three values and use it to sort by:
+
     
      
+
    •  0 if item1 == item2
+
    •  > 0 (positive integer) if item1 > item2
+
    •  < 0 (negative integer) if item1 < item2
+
    
+
     inSort() requires that compareItems() is implemented as described
+here.
+
     This function should not modify the list because some const
+functions call compareItems().
+
     The default implementation compares the pointers.
+
+
    uint TQPtrList::contains ( const type * item ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of occurrences of item in the list.
+
     The compareItems() function is called when looking for the item
+in the list. If compareItems() is not reimplemented, it is more
+efficient to call containsRef().
+
     This function does not affect the current list item.
+
     
    See also containsRef() and compareItems().
+
+
    uint TQPtrList::containsRef ( const type * item ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of occurrences of item in the list.
+
     Calling this function is much faster than contains() because
+contains() compares item with each list item using
+compareItems(), whereas his function only compares the pointers.
+
     This function does not affect the current list item.
+
     
    See also contains().
+
+
    uint TQPtrList::count () const [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of items in the list.
+
     
    See also isEmpty().
+
+
    Examples: customlayout/border.cpp, customlayout/card.cpp, customlayout/flow.cpp, dirview/dirview.cpp, grapher/grapher.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
+
    type * TQPtrList::current () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a pointer to the current list item. The current item may
+be 0 (implies that the current index is -1). 
+
     
    See also at().
+
+
    TQLNode * TQPtrList::currentNode () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a pointer to the current list node.
+
     The node can be kept and removed later using removeNode(). The
+advantage is that the item can be removed directly without
+searching the list.
+
     Warning: Do not call this function unless you are an expert.
+
     
    See also removeNode(), takeNode(), and current().
+
+
    int TQPtrList::find ( const type * item )
+
    
+
+
     Finds the first occurrence of item in the list.
+
     If the item is found, the list sets the current item to point to
+the found item and returns the index of this item. If the item is
+not found, the list sets the current item to 0, the current
+index to -1, and returns -1.
+
     The compareItems() function is called when searching for the item
+in the list. If compareItems() is not reimplemented, it is more
+efficient to call findRef().
+
     
    See also findNext(), findRef(), compareItems(), and current().
+
+
    int TQPtrList::findNext ( const type * item )
+
    
+
+
     Finds the next occurrence of item in the list, starting from
+the current list item.
+
     If the item is found, the list sets the current item to point to
+the found item and returns the index of this item. If the item is
+not found, the list sets the current item to 0, the current
+index to -1, and returns -1.
+
     The compareItems() function is called when searching for the item
+in the list. If compareItems() is not reimplemented, it is more
+efficient to call findNextRef().
+
     
    See also find(), findNextRef(), compareItems(), and current().
+
+
    int TQPtrList::findNextRef ( const type * item )
+
    
+
+
     Finds the next occurrence of item in the list, starting from
+the current list item.
+
     If the item is found, the list sets the current item to point to
+the found item and returns the index of this item. If the item is
+not found, the list sets the current item to 0, the current
+index to -1, and returns -1.
+
     Calling this function is much faster than findNext() because
+findNext() compares item with each list item using
+compareItems(), whereas this function only compares the pointers.
+
     
    See also findRef(), findNext(), and current().
+
+
    int TQPtrList::findRef ( const type * item )
+
    
+
+
     Finds the first occurrence of item in the list.
+
     If the item is found, the list sets the current item to point to
+the found item and returns the index of this item. If the item is
+not found, the list sets the current item to 0, the current
+index to -1, and returns -1.
+
     Calling this function is much faster than find() because find()
+compares item with each list item using compareItems(), whereas
+this function only compares the pointers.
+
     
    See also findNextRef(), find(), and current().
+
+
    type * TQPtrList::first ()
+
    
+
+
     Returns a pointer to the first item in the list and makes this the
+current list item; returns 0 if the list is empty.
+
     
    See also getFirst(), last(), next(), prev(), and current().
+
+
    Examples: grapher/grapher.cpp, listviews/listviews.h, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
+
    type * TQPtrList::getFirst () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a pointer to the first item in the list, or 0 if the list
+is empty.
+
     This function does not affect the current list item.
+
     
    See also first() and getLast().
+
+
    type * TQPtrList::getLast () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a pointer to the last item in the list, or 0 if the list
+is empty.
+
     This function does not affect the current list item.
+
     
    See also last() and getFirst().
+
+
    void TQPtrList::inSort ( const type * item )
+
    
+
+
     Inserts the item at its sorted position in the list.
+
     The sort order depends on the virtual compareItems() function. All
+items must be inserted with inSort() to maintain the sorting
+order.
+
     The inserted item becomes the current list item.
+
     item must not be 0.
+
     Warning: Using inSort() is slow. An alternative, especially if you
+have lots of items, is to simply append() or insert() them and
+then use sort(). inSort() takes up to O(n) compares. That means
+inserting n items in your list will need O(n^2) compares whereas
+sort() only needs O(n*log n) for the same task. So use inSort()
+only if you already have a presorted list and want to insert just
+a few additional items.
+
     
    See also insert(), compareItems(), current(), and sort().
+
+
    bool TQPtrList::insert ( uint index, const type * item )
+
    
+
+
     Inserts the item at position index in the list.
+
     Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if index is in range;
+otherwise returns FALSE. The valid range is 0 to count()
+(inclusively). The item is appended if index == count().
+
     The inserted item becomes the current list item.
+
     item must not be 0.
+
     
    See also append(), current(), and replace().
+
+
    bool TQPtrList::isEmpty () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the list is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also count().
+
+
    type * TQPtrList::last ()
+
    
+
+
     Returns a pointer to the last item in the list and makes this the
+current list item; returns 0 if the list is empty.
+
     
    See also getLast(), first(), next(), prev(), and current().
+
+
    type * TQPtrList::next ()
+
    
+
+
     Returns a pointer to the item succeeding the current item. Returns
+0 if the current item is 0 or equal to the last item.
+
     Makes the succeeding item current. If the current item before this
+function call was the last item, the current item will be set to
+0. If the current item was 0, this function does nothing.
+
     
    See also first(), last(), prev(), and current().
+
+
    Examples: grapher/grapher.cpp, listviews/listviews.h, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
+
    bool TQPtrList::operator!= ( const TQPtrList<type> & list ) const
+
    
+
+
     Compares this list with list. Returns TRUE if the lists contain
+different data; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    TQPtrList<type> & TQPtrList::operator= ( const TQPtrList<type> & list )
+
    
+
+
     Assigns list to this list and returns a reference to this list.
+
     This list is first cleared and then each item in list is appended to this list. Only the pointers are
+copied (shallow copy) unless newItem() has been reimplemented.
+
+
    bool TQPtrList::operator== ( const TQPtrList<type> & list ) const
+
    
+
+
     Compares this list with list. Returns TRUE if the lists contain
+the same data; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    void TQPtrList::prepend ( const type * item )
+
    
+
+
     Inserts the item at the start of the list.
+
     The inserted item becomes the current list item. This is
+equivalent to insert( 0, item ).
+
     item must not be 0.
+
     
    See also append(), insert(), and current().
+
+
    type * TQPtrList::prev ()
+
    
+
+
     Returns a pointer to the item preceding the current item. Returns
+0 if the current item is 0 or equal to the first item.
+
     Makes the preceding item current. If the current item before this
+function call was the first item, the current item will be set to
+0. If the current item was 0, this function does nothing.
+
     
    See also first(), last(), next(), and current().
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQPtrList::read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     Reads a list item from the stream s and returns a reference to
+the stream.
+
     The default implementation sets item to 0.
+
     
    See also write().
+
+
    bool TQPtrList::remove ( uint index )
+
    
+
+
     Removes the item at position index in the list.
+
     Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if index is in range;
+otherwise returns FALSE. The valid range is 0..(count() - 1)
+inclusive.
+
     The removed item is deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
+
     The item after the removed item becomes the new current list item
+if the removed item is not the last item in the list. If the last
+item is removed, the new last item becomes the current item.
+
     All list iterators that refer to the removed item will be set to
+point to the new current item.
+
     
    See also take(), clear(), setAutoDelete(), current(), and removeRef().
+
+
    bool TQPtrList::remove ()
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Removes the current list item.
+
     Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the current item isn't 0;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     The removed item is deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
+
     The item after the removed item becomes the new current list item
+if the removed item is not the last item in the list. If the last
+item is removed, the new last item becomes the current item. The
+current item is set to 0 if the list becomes empty.
+
     All list iterators that refer to the removed item will be set to
+point to the new current item.
+
     
    See also take(), clear(), setAutoDelete(), current(), and removeRef().
+
+
    bool TQPtrList::remove ( const type * item )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Removes the first occurrence of item from the list.
+
     Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if item is in the list;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     The removed item is deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
+
     The compareItems() function is called when searching for the item
+in the list. If compareItems() is not reimplemented, it is more
+efficient to call removeRef().
+
     If item is NULL then the current item is removed from the list.
+
     The item after the removed item becomes the new current list item
+if the removed item is not the last item in the list. If the last
+item is removed, the new last item becomes the current item. The
+current item is set to 0 if the list becomes empty.
+
     All list iterators that refer to the removed item will be set to
+point to the new current item.
+
     
    See also removeRef(), take(), clear(), setAutoDelete(), compareItems(), and current().
+
+
    bool TQPtrList::removeFirst ()
+
    
+
+
     Removes the first item from the list. Returns TRUE if successful,
+i.e. if the list isn't empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     The removed item is deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
+
     The first item in the list becomes the new current list item. The
+current item is set to 0 if the list becomes empty.
+
     All list iterators that refer to the removed item will be set to
+point to the new current item.
+
     
    See also removeLast(), setAutoDelete(), current(), and remove().
+
+
    bool TQPtrList::removeLast ()
+
    
+
+
     Removes the last item from the list. Returns TRUE if successful,
+i.e. if the list isn't empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     The removed item is deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
+
     The last item in the list becomes the new current list item. The
+current item is set to 0 if the list becomes empty.
+
     All list iterators that refer to the removed item will be set to
+point to the new current item.
+
     
    See also removeFirst(), setAutoDelete(), and current().
+
+
    void TQPtrList::removeNode ( TQLNode * node )
+
    
+
+
     Removes the node from the list.
+
     This node must exist in the list, otherwise the program may crash.
+
     The removed item is deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
+
     The first item in the list will become the new current list item.
+The current item is set to 0 if the list becomes empty.
+
     All list iterators that refer to the removed item will be set to
+point to the item succeeding this item or to the preceding item if
+the removed item was the last item.
+
     Warning: Do not call this function unless you are an expert.
+
     
    See also takeNode(), currentNode(), remove(), and removeRef().
+
+
    bool TQPtrList::removeRef ( const type * item )
+
    
+
+
     Removes the first occurrence of item from the list.
+
     Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if item is in the list;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     The removed item is deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
+
     Equivalent to:
+
    +        if ( list.findRef( item ) != -1 )
+            list.remove();
+    
    
+ 
+
     The item after the removed item becomes the new current list item
+if the removed item is not the last item in the list. If the last
+item is removed, the new last item becomes the current item. The
+current item is set to 0 if the list becomes empty.
+
     All list iterators that refer to the removed item will be set to
+point to the new current item.
+
     
    See also remove(), clear(), setAutoDelete(), and current().
+
+
    bool TQPtrList::replace ( uint index, const type * item )
+
    
+
+
     Replaces the item at position index with the new item. 
+
     Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. index is in the range 0 to
+count()-1.
+
     
    See also append(), current(), and insert().
+
+
    void TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if enable is
+TRUE and to never delete them if enable is FALSE.
+
     If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are
+deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient
+if the collection has the only pointer to the items.
+
     The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be
+careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself
+with two collections deleting the same items.
+
     Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions
+in subclasses. For example, a subclass that has a remove()
+function will remove the item from its data structure, and if
+auto-delete is enabled, will also delete the item.
+
     
    See also autoDelete().
+
+
    Examples: grapher/grapher.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, and table/bigtable/main.cpp.
+
    void TQPtrList::sort ()
+
    
+
+
     Sorts the list by the result of the virtual compareItems()
+function.
+
     The heap sort algorithm is used for sorting. It sorts n items with
+O(n*log n) comparisons. This is the asymptotic optimal solution of
+the sorting problem.
+
     If the items in your list support operator<() and operator==(),
+you might be better off with TQSortedList because it implements the
+compareItems() function for you using these two operators.
+
     
    See also inSort().
+
+
    type * TQPtrList::take ( uint index )
+
    
+
+
     Takes the item at position index out of the list without
+deleting it (even if auto-deletion
+is enabled).
+
     Returns a pointer to the item taken out of the list, or 0 if the
+index is out of range. The valid range is 0..(count() - 1)
+inclusive.
+
     The item after the removed item becomes the new current list item
+if the removed item is not the last item in the list. If the last
+item is removed, the new last item becomes the current item. The
+current item is set to 0 if the list becomes empty.
+
     All list iterators that refer to the taken item will be set to
+point to the new current item.
+
     
    See also remove(), clear(), and current().
+
+
    Examples: customlayout/border.cpp, customlayout/card.cpp, and customlayout/flow.cpp.
+
    type * TQPtrList::take ()
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Takes the current item out of the list without deleting it (even
+if auto-deletion is enabled).
+
     Returns a pointer to the item taken out of the list, or 0 if
+the current item is 0.
+
     The item after the removed item becomes the new current list item
+if the removed item is not the last item in the list. If the last
+item is removed, the new last item becomes the current item. The
+current item is set to 0 if the list becomes empty.
+
     All list iterators that refer to the taken item will be set to
+point to the new current item.
+
     
    See also remove(), clear(), and current().
+
+
    type * TQPtrList::takeNode ( TQLNode * node )
+
    
+
+
     Takes the node out of the list without deleting its item (even
+if auto-deletion is enabled).
+Returns a pointer to the item taken out of the list.
+
     This node must exist in the list, otherwise the program may crash.
+
     The first item in the list becomes the new current list item.
+
     All list iterators that refer to the taken item will be set to
+point to the item succeeding this item or to the preceding item if
+the taken item was the last item.
+
     Warning: Do not call this function unless you are an expert.
+
     
    See also removeNode() and currentNode().
+
+
    void TQPtrList::toVector ( TQGVector * vec ) const
+
    
+
+
     Stores all list items in the vector vec.
+
     The vector must be of the same item type, otherwise the result
+will be undefined.
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQPtrList::write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item item ) const [virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     Writes a list item, item to the stream s and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
     The default implementation does nothing.
+
     
    See also read().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqptrqueue.html b/doc/html/ntqptrqueue.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bae7c7442
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqptrqueue.html
@@ -0,0 +1,216 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQPtrQueue Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQPtrQueue Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQPtrQueue class is a template class that provides a queue.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqptrqueue.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • virtual TQDataStream & read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item )
      • 
+
    • virtual TQDataStream & write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item item ) const
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQPtrQueue class is a template class that provides a queue.
+
     
+
+
     TQValueVector can be used as an STL-compatible alternative to this
+class.
+
     A template instance TQPtrQueue<X> is a queue that operates on
+pointers to X (X*).
+
     A queue is a first in, first out structure. Items are added to the
+tail of the queue with enqueue() and retrieved from the head with
+dequeue(). You can peek at the head item without dequeing it using
+head().
+
     You can control the queue's deletion policy with setAutoDelete().
+
     For compatibility with the TQPtrCollection classes, current() and
+remove() are provided; both operate on the head().
+
     
    See also TQPtrList, TQPtrStack, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQPtrQueue::TQPtrQueue ()
+
    
+
+
     Creates an empty queue with autoDelete() set to FALSE.
+
+
    TQPtrQueue::TQPtrQueue ( const TQPtrQueue<type> & queue )
+
    
+
+
     Creates a queue from queue.
+
     Only the pointers are copied; the items are not. The autoDelete()
+flag is set to FALSE.
+
+
    TQPtrQueue::~TQPtrQueue ()
+
    
+
+
     Destroys the queue. Items in the queue are deleted if autoDelete()
+is TRUE.
+
+
    bool TQPtrQueue::autoDelete () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is
+FALSE.
+
     
    See also setAutoDelete().
+
+
    void TQPtrQueue::clear ()
+
    
+
+
     Removes all items from the queue, and deletes them if autoDelete()
+is TRUE.
+
     
    See also remove().
+
+
    uint TQPtrQueue::count () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of items in the queue.
+
     
    See also isEmpty().
+
+
    type * TQPtrQueue::current () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a pointer to the head item in the queue. The queue is not
+changed. Returns 0 if the queue is empty.
+
     
    See also dequeue() and isEmpty().
+
+
    type * TQPtrQueue::dequeue ()
+
    
+
+
     Takes the head item from the queue and returns a pointer to it.
+Returns 0 if the queue is empty.
+
     
    See also enqueue() and count().
+
+
    void TQPtrQueue::enqueue ( const type * d )
+
    
+
+
     Adds item d to the tail of the queue.
+
     
    See also count() and dequeue().
+
+
    type * TQPtrQueue::head () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a pointer to the head item in the queue. The queue is not
+changed. Returns 0 if the queue is empty.
+
     
    See also dequeue() and isEmpty().
+
+
    bool TQPtrQueue::isEmpty () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the queue is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also count(), dequeue(), and head().
+
+
    TQPtrQueue::operator type * () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a pointer to the head item in the queue. The queue is not
+changed. Returns 0 if the queue is empty.
+
     
    See also dequeue() and isEmpty().
+
+
    TQPtrQueue<type> & TQPtrQueue::operator= ( const TQPtrQueue<type> & queue )
+
    
+
+
     Assigns queue to this queue and returns a reference to this
+queue.
+
     This queue is first cleared and then each item in queue is
+enqueued to this queue. Only the pointers are copied.
+
     Warning: The autoDelete() flag is not modified. If it it TRUE for
+both queue and this queue, deleting the two lists will cause double-deletion of the items.
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQPtrQueue::read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     Reads a queue item, item, from the stream s and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
     The default implementation sets item to 0.
+
     
    See also write().
+
+
    bool TQPtrQueue::remove ()
+
    
+
+
     Removes the head item from the queue, and returns TRUE if there
+was an item, i.e. the queue wasn't empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     The item is deleted if autoDelete() is TRUE.
+
     
    See also head(), isEmpty(), and dequeue().
+
+
    void TQPtrQueue::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the queue to auto-delete its contents if enable is TRUE
+and not to delete them if enable is FALSE.
+
     If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a queue are
+deleted when the queue itself is deleted. This can be quite
+convenient if the queue has the only pointer to the items.
+
     The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be
+careful about copying the queue: you might find yourself with two
+queues deleting the same items.
+
     
    See also autoDelete().
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQPtrQueue::write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item item ) const [virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     Writes a queue item, item, to the stream s and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
     The default implementation does nothing.
+
     
    See also read().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqptrstack.html b/doc/html/ntqptrstack.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..df6f7a23c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqptrstack.html
@@ -0,0 +1,201 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQPtrStack Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQPtrStack Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQPtrStack class is a template class that provides a stack.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqptrstack.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • virtual TQDataStream & read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item )
      • 
+
    • virtual TQDataStream & write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item item ) const
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQPtrStack class is a template class that provides a stack.
+
     
+
     TQValueStack is an STL-compatible alternative to this class.
+
     Define a template instance TQPtrStack<X> to create a stack that
+operates on pointers to X, (X*). 
+
     A stack is a last in, first out (LIFO) structure. Items are added
+to the top of the stack with push() and retrieved from the top
+with pop(). Use top() to get a reference to the top element
+without changing the stack.
+
     You can control the stack's deletion policy with setAutoDelete().
+
     For compatibility with the TQPtrCollection classes current() and
+remove() are provided; they both operate on the top().
+
     
    See also TQPtrList, TQPtrQueue, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQPtrStack::TQPtrStack ()
+
    
+
+
     Creates an empty stack.
+
+
    TQPtrStack::TQPtrStack ( const TQPtrStack<type> & s )
+
    
+
+
     Creates a stack by making a shallow copy of another stack s.
+
+
    TQPtrStack::~TQPtrStack ()
+
    
+
+
     Destroys the stack. All items will be deleted if autoDelete() is
+TRUE.
+
+
    bool TQPtrStack::autoDelete () const
+
    
+
+
     The same as TQPtrCollection::autoDelete().
+
     
    See also setAutoDelete().
+
+
    void TQPtrStack::clear ()
+
    
+
+
     Removes all items from the stack, deleting them if autoDelete() is
+TRUE.
+
     
    See also remove().
+
+
    uint TQPtrStack::count () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of items in the stack.
+
     
    See also isEmpty().
+
+
    type * TQPtrStack::current () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a pointer to the top item on the stack (most recently
+pushed). The stack is not changed. Returns 0 if the stack is
+empty.
+
+
    bool TQPtrStack::isEmpty () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the stack contains no elements; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
+
    TQPtrStack::operator type * () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a pointer to the top item on the stack (most recently
+pushed). The stack is not changed. Returns 0 if the stack is
+empty.
+
+
    TQPtrStack<type> & TQPtrStack::operator= ( const TQPtrStack<type> & s )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the contents of this stack by making a shallow copy of
+another stack s. Elements currently in this stack will be
+deleted if autoDelete() is TRUE.
+
+
    type * TQPtrStack::pop ()
+
    
+
+
     Removes the top item from the stack and returns it. The stack must
+not be empty.
+
+
    void TQPtrStack::push ( const type * d )
+
    
+
+
     Adds an element d to the top of the stack. Last in, first out.
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQPtrStack::read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     Reads a stack item, item, from the stream s and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
     The default implementation sets item to 0.
+
     
    See also write().
+
+
    bool TQPtrStack::remove ()
+
    
+
+
     Removes the top item from the stack and deletes it if autoDelete()
+is TRUE. Returns TRUE if there was an item to pop; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also clear().
+
+
    void TQPtrStack::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )
+
    
+
+
     Defines whether this stack auto-deletes its contents. The same as
+TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete().
+
     If enable is TRUE the stack auto-deletes its contents; if enable is FALSE the stack does not delete its contents.
+
     
    See also autoDelete().
+
+
    type * TQPtrStack::top () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a pointer to the top item on the stack (most recently
+pushed). The stack is not changed. Returns 0 if the stack is
+empty.
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQPtrStack::write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item item ) const [virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     Writes a stack item, item, to the stream s and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
     The default implementation does nothing.
+
     
    See also read().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqptrvector.html b/doc/html/ntqptrvector.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f2f3ff9fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqptrvector.html
@@ -0,0 +1,393 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQPtrVector Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQPtrVector Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQPtrVector class is a template collection class that
+provides a vector (array).
+More...
+
    #include <ntqptrvector.h>
+
    Inherits TQPtrCollection.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Important Inherited Members
    
+
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • virtual int compareItems ( TQPtrCollection::Item d1, TQPtrCollection::Item d2 )
      • 
+
    • virtual TQDataStream & read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item )
      • 
+
    • virtual TQDataStream & write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item item ) const
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQPtrVector class is a template collection class that
+provides a vector (array).
+
     
+
     
+
     TQValueVector is an STL-compatible alternative to this class.
+
     TQPtrVector is implemented as a template class. Defines a template
+instance TQPtrVector<X> to create a vector that contains pointers
+to X (X*).
+
     A vector is the same as an array. The main difference between
+TQPtrVector and TQMemArray is that TQPtrVector stores pointers to the
+elements, whereas TQMemArray stores the elements themselves (i.e.
+TQMemArray is value-based and TQPtrVector is pointer-based).
+
     Items are added to the vector using insert() or fill(). Items are
+removed with remove(). You can get a pointer to an item at a
+particular index position using at().
+
     Unless otherwise stated, all functions that remove items from the
+vector will also delete the element pointed to if auto-deletion is enabled. By default,
+auto-deletion is disabled; see setAutoDelete(). This behaviour can
+be changed in a subclass by reimplementing the virtual function
+deleteItem().
+
     Functions that compare items (find() and sort() for example) will
+do so using the virtual function compareItems(). The default
+implementation of this function only compares the pointer values.
+Reimplement compareItems() in a subclass to get searching and
+sorting based on the item contents. You can perform a linear
+search for a pointer in the vector using findRef(), or a binary
+search (of a sorted vector) using bsearch(). You can count the
+number of times an item appears in the vector with contains() or
+containsRef().
+
     
    See also TQMemArray and Non-GUI Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQPtrVector::TQPtrVector ()
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a null vector.
+
     
    See also isNull().
+
+
    TQPtrVector::TQPtrVector ( uint size )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs an vector with room for size items. Makes a null
+vector if size == 0.
+
     All size positions in the vector are initialized to 0.
+
     
    See also size(), resize(), and isNull().
+
+
    TQPtrVector::TQPtrVector ( const TQPtrVector<type> & v )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a copy of v. Only the pointers are copied (i.e.
+shallow copy).
+
+
    TQPtrVector::~TQPtrVector ()
+
    
+
+
     Removes all items from the vector, and destroys the vector itself.
+
     
    See also clear().
+
+
    type * TQPtrVector::at ( uint i ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the item at position i, or 0 if there is no item at
+that position. i must be less than size().
+
+
    bool TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE.
+
     
    See also setAutoDelete().
+
+
    int TQPtrVector::bsearch ( const type * d ) const
+
    
+
+
     In a sorted array, finds the first occurrence of d using a
+binary search. For a sorted array, this is generally much faster
+than find(), which performs a linear search.
+
     Returns the position of d, or -1 if d could not be found. d must not be 0.
+
     Compares items using the virtual function compareItems().
+
     
    See also sort() and find().
+
+
    void TQPtrVector::clear () [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Removes all items from the vector, and destroys the vector itself.
+
     The vector becomes a null vector.
+
     
    See also isNull().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
+
    int TQPtrVector::compareItems ( TQPtrCollection::Item d1, TQPtrCollection::Item d2 ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     This virtual function compares two list items.
+
     Returns:
+
      
+
    •  zero if d1 == d2
+
    •  nonzero if d1 != d2
+
    
+
     This function returns int rather than bool so that
+reimplementations can return one of three values and use it to
+sort by:
+
      
+
    •  0 if d1 == d2
+
    •  > 0 (positive integer) if d1 > d2
+
    •  < 0 (negative integer) if d1 < d2
+
    
+
     The sort() and bsearch() functions require compareItems() to be
+implemented as described here.
+
     This function should not modify the vector because some const
+functions call compareItems().
+
+
    uint TQPtrVector::contains ( const type * d ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of occurrences of item d in the vector.
+
     Compares items using the virtual function compareItems().
+
     
    See also containsRef().
+
+
    uint TQPtrVector::containsRef ( const type * d ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of occurrences of the item pointer d in the
+vector.
+
     This function does not use compareItems() to compare items.
+
     
    See also findRef().
+
+
    uint TQPtrVector::count () const [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of items in the vector. The vector is empty if
+count() == 0.
+
     
    See also isEmpty(), size(), and isNull().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
+
    type ** TQPtrVector::data () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a pointer to the actual vector data, which is an array of
+type*.
+
     The vector is a null vector if data() == 0 (null pointer).
+
     
    See also isNull().
+
+
    bool TQPtrVector::fill ( const type * d, int size = -1 )
+
    
+
+
     Inserts item d in all positions in the vector. Any existing
+items are removed. If d is 0, the vector becomes empty.
+
     If size >= 0, the vector is first resized to size. By
+default, size is -1.
+
     Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. size is the same as the
+current size, or size is larger and the memory has successfully
+been allocated; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also resize(), insert(), and isEmpty().
+
+
    int TQPtrVector::find ( const type * d, uint i = 0 ) const
+
    
+
+
     Finds the first occurrence of item d in the vector using a
+linear search. The search starts at position i, which must be
+less than size(). i is by default 0; i.e. the search starts at
+the start of the vector.
+
     Returns the position of d, or -1 if d could not be found.
+
     Compares items using the virtual function compareItems().
+
     Use the much faster bsearch() to search a sorted vector.
+
     
    See also findRef() and bsearch().
+
+
    int TQPtrVector::findRef ( const type * d, uint i = 0 ) const
+
    
+
+
     Finds the first occurrence of the item pointer d in the vector
+using a linear search. The search starts at position i, which
+must be less than size(). i is by default 0; i.e. the search
+starts at the start of the vector.
+
     Returns the position of d, or -1 if d could not be found.
+
     This function does not use compareItems() to compare items.
+
     Use the much faster bsearch() to search a sorted vector.
+
     
    See also find() and bsearch().
+
+
    bool TQPtrVector::insert ( uint i, const type * d )
+
    
+
+
     Sets position i in the vector to contain the item d. i
+must be less than size(). Any previous element in position i is
+removed.
+
     
    See also at().
+
+
    bool TQPtrVector::isEmpty () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the vector is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also count().
+
+
    bool TQPtrVector::isNull () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the vector is null; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     A null vector has size() == 0 and data() == 0.
+
     
    See also size().
+
+
    TQPtrVector<type> & TQPtrVector::operator= ( const TQPtrVector<type> & v )
+
    
+
+
     Assigns v to this vector and returns a reference to this
+vector.
+
     This vector is first cleared and then all the items from v are
+copied into the vector. Only the pointers are copied (i.e. shallow copy).
+
     
    See also clear().
+
+
    bool TQPtrVector::operator== ( const TQPtrVector<type> & v ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if this vector and v are equal; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
+
    type * TQPtrVector::operator[] ( int i ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the item at position i, or 0 if there is no item at
+that position. i must be less than size().
+
     Equivalent to at( i ).
+
     
    See also at().
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQPtrVector::read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     Reads a vector item, item, from the stream s and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
     The default implementation sets item to 0.
+
     
    See also write().
+
+
    bool TQPtrVector::remove ( uint i )
+
    
+
+
     Removes the item at position i in the vector, if there is one.
+i must be less than size().
+
     Returns TRUE if i is within range; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also take() and at().
+
+
    bool TQPtrVector::resize ( uint size )
+
    
+
+
     Resizes (expands or shrinks) the vector to size elements. The
+vector becomes a null vector if size == 0.
+
     Any items at position size or beyond in the vector are removed.
+New positions are initialized to 0.
+
     Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the memory was successfully
+allocated; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also size() and isNull().
+
+
    void TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if enable is
+TRUE and to never delete them if enable is FALSE.
+
     If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are
+deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient
+if the collection has the only pointer to the items.
+
     The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be
+careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself
+with two collections deleting the same items.
+
     Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions
+in subclasses. For example, a subclass that has a remove()
+function will remove the item from its data structure, and if
+auto-delete is enabled, will also delete the item.
+
     
    See also autoDelete().
+
+
    Examples: grapher/grapher.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, and table/bigtable/main.cpp.
+
    uint TQPtrVector::size () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the size of the vector, i.e. the number of vector
+positions. This is also the maximum number of items the vector can
+hold.
+
     The vector is a null vector if size() == 0.
+
     
    See also isNull(), resize(), and count().
+
+
    void TQPtrVector::sort ()
+
    
+
+
     Sorts the items in ascending order. Any empty positions will be
+put last.
+
     Compares items using the virtual function compareItems().
+
     
    See also bsearch().
+
+
    type * TQPtrVector::take ( uint i )
+
    
+
+
     Returns the item at position i in the vector, and removes that
+item from the vector. i must be less than size(). If there is
+no item at position i, 0 is returned.
+
     Unlike remove(), this function does not call deleteItem() for
+the removed item.
+
     
    See also remove() and at().
+
+
    TQDataStream & TQPtrVector::write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item item ) const [virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     Writes a vector item, item, to the stream s and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
     The default implementation does nothing.
+
     
    See also read().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqpushbutton.html b/doc/html/ntqpushbutton.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8cf81fdc3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqpushbutton.html
@@ -0,0 +1,470 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQPushButton Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQPushButton Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQPushButton widget provides a command button.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqpushbutton.h>
+
    Inherits TQButton.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
      
+
    • virtual void setOn ( bool )
      • 
+
    
+
    Important Inherited Members
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • bool autoDefault - whether the push button is the auto default button
      • 
+
    • bool autoMask - whether the button is automatically masked  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool default - whether the push button is the default button
      • 
+
    • bool flat - whether the border is disabled
      • 
+
    • TQIconSet iconSet - the icon set on the push button
      • 
+
    • bool menuButton - whether the push button has a menu button on it  (read only)  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • bool on - whether the push button is toggled
      • 
+
    • bool toggleButton - whether the button is a toggle button
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQPushButton widget provides a command button.
+
     
+
+
     The push button, or command button, is perhaps the most commonly
+used widget in any graphical user interface. Push (click) a button
+to command the computer to perform some action, or to answer a
+question. Typical buttons are OK, Apply, Cancel, Close, Yes, No
+and Help.
+
     A command button is rectangular and typically displays a text
+label describing its action. An underlined character in the label
+(signified by preceding it with an ampersand in the text)
+indicates an accelerator key, e.g.
+
    +        TQPushButton *pb = new TQPushButton( "&Download", this );
+    
    
+ 
+In this example the accelerator is Alt+D, and the label text
+will be displayed as Download.
+
     Push buttons can display a textual label or a pixmap, and
+optionally a small icon. These can be set using the constructors
+and changed later using setText(), setPixmap() and setIconSet().
+If the button is disabled the appearance of the text or pixmap and
+iconset will be manipulated with respect to the GUI style to make
+the button look "disabled".
+
     A push button emits the signal clicked() when it is activated by
+the mouse, the Spacebar or by a keyboard accelerator. Connect to
+this signal to perform the button's action. Push buttons also
+provide less commonly used signals, for example, pressed() and
+released().
+
     Command buttons in dialogs are by default auto-default buttons,
+i.e. they become the default push button automatically when they
+receive the keyboard input focus. A default button is a push
+button that is activated when the user presses the Enter or Return
+key in a dialog. You can change this with setAutoDefault(). Note
+that auto-default buttons reserve a little extra space which is
+necessary to draw a default-button indicator. If you do not want
+this space around your buttons, call setAutoDefault(FALSE).
+
     Being so central, the button widget has grown to accommodate a
+great many variations in the past decade. The Microsoft style
+guide now shows about ten different states of Windows push buttons
+and the text implies that there are dozens more when all the
+combinations of features are taken into consideration.
+
     The most important modes or states are:
+
      
+
    •  Available or not (grayed out, disabled).
+
    •  Standard push button, toggling push button or menu button.
+
    •  On or off (only for toggling push buttons).
+
    •  Default or normal. The default button in a dialog can generally
+be "clicked" using the Enter or Return key.
+
    •  Auto-repeat or not.
+
    •  Pressed down or not.
+
    
+
     As a general rule, use a push button when the application or
+dialog window performs an action when the user clicks on it (such
+as Apply, Cancel, Close and Help) and when the widget is
+supposed to have a wide, rectangular shape with a text label.
+Small, typically square buttons that change the state of the
+window rather than performing an action (such as the buttons in
+the top-right corner of the TQFileDialog) are not command buttons,
+but tool buttons. TQt provides a special class (TQToolButton) for
+these buttons.
+
     If you need toggle behavior (see setToggleButton()) or a button
+that auto-repeats the activation signal when being pushed down
+like the arrows in a scroll bar (see setAutoRepeat()), a command
+button is probably not what you want. When in doubt, use a tool
+button.
+
     A variation of a command button is a menu button. These provide
+not just one command, but several, since when they are clicked
+they pop up a menu of options. Use the method setPopup() to
+associate a popup menu with a push button.
+
     Other classes of buttons are option buttons (see TQRadioButton) and
+check boxes (see TQCheckBox).
+
      
+
     In TQt, the TQButton abstract base class provides most of the modes
+and other API, and TQPushButton provides GUI logic. See TQButton for
+more information about the API.
+
     
+
     
    See also TQToolButton, TQRadioButton, TQCheckBox, GUI Design Handbook: Push Button, and Basic Widgets.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQPushButton::TQPushButton ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a push button with no text.
+
     The parent and name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
+
    TQPushButton::TQPushButton ( const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a push button called name with the parent parent
+and the text text.
+
+
    TQPushButton::TQPushButton ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a push button with an icon and a text.
+
     Note that you can also pass a TQPixmap object as an icon (thanks to
+the implicit type conversion provided by C++).
+
     The parent and name arguments are sent to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
+
    TQPushButton::~TQPushButton ()
+
    
+Destroys the push button.
+
+
    TQKeySequence TQButton::accel () const
+
    Returns the accelerator associated with the button.
+See the "accel" property for details.
+
    bool TQPushButton::autoDefault () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the push button is the auto default button; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "autoDefault" property for details.
+
    bool TQButton::autoRepeat () const
+
    Returns TRUE if autoRepeat is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "autoRepeat" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::clicked () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the button is activated (i.e. first
+pressed down and then released when the mouse cursor is inside the
+button), when the accelerator key is typed or when animateClick()
+is called. This signal is not emitted if you call setDown().
+
     The TQButtonGroup::clicked() signal does the same job, if you want
+to connect several buttons to the same slot.
+
     Warning: Don't launch a model dialog in response to this signal
+for a button that has autoRepeat turned on.
+
     
    See also pressed(), released(), toggled(), autoRepeat, and down.
+
+
    Examples: chart/setdataform.cpp, listbox/listbox.cpp, network/clientserver/client/client.cpp, progressbar/progressbar.cpp, richtext/richtext.cpp, t2/main.cpp, and t4/main.cpp.
+
    TQButtonGroup * TQButton::group () const
+
    
+Returns the group that this button belongs to.
+
     If the button is not a member of any TQButtonGroup, this function
+returns 0.
+
     
    See also TQButtonGroup.
+
+
    TQIconSet * TQPushButton::iconSet () const
+
    Returns the icon set on the push button.
+See the "iconSet" property for details.
+
    bool TQPushButton::isDefault () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the push button is the default button; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "default" property for details.
+
    bool TQButton::isDown () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the button is pressed; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "down" property for details.
+
    bool TQButton::isExclusiveToggle () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the button is an exclusive toggle; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "exclusiveToggle" property for details.
+
    bool TQPushButton::isFlat () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the border is disabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "flat" property for details.
+
    bool TQPushButton::isMenuButton () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the push button has a menu button on it; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "menuButton" property for details.
+
    bool TQButton::isOn () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the button is toggled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "on" property for details.
+
    bool TQButton::isToggleButton () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the button is a toggle button; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "toggleButton" property for details.
+
    const TQPixmap * TQButton::pixmap () const
+
    Returns the pixmap shown on the button.
+See the "pixmap" property for details.
+
    TQPopupMenu * TQPushButton::popup () const
+
    
+Returns the button's associated popup menu or 0 if no popup menu
+has been set.
+
     
    See also setPopup().
+
+
    void TQButton::pressed () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the button is pressed down.
+
     
    See also released() and clicked().
+
+
    Examples: network/httpd/httpd.cpp and popup/popup.cpp.
+
    void TQButton::released () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the button is released.
+
     
    See also pressed(), clicked(), and toggled().
+
+
    void TQButton::setAccel ( const TQKeySequence & ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the accelerator associated with the button.
+See the "accel" property for details.
+
    void TQPushButton::setAutoDefault ( bool autoDef ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the push button is the auto default button to autoDef.
+See the "autoDefault" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::setAutoRepeat ( bool ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether autoRepeat is enabled.
+See the "autoRepeat" property for details.
+
    void TQPushButton::setDefault ( bool def ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the push button is the default button to def.
+See the "default" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::setDown ( bool ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the button is pressed.
+See the "down" property for details.
+
    void TQPushButton::setFlat ( bool )
+
    Sets whether the border is disabled.
+See the "flat" property for details.
+
    void TQPushButton::setIconSet ( const TQIconSet & )
+
    Sets the icon set on the push button.
+See the "iconSet" property for details.
+
    void TQPushButton::setIsMenuButton ( bool enable ) [virtual]
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
+
    void TQPushButton::setOn ( bool ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets whether the push button is toggled.
+See the "on" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the pixmap shown on the button.
+See the "pixmap" property for details.
+
    void TQPushButton::setPopup ( TQPopupMenu * popup )
+
    
+Associates the popup menu popup with this push button. This
+turns the button into a menu button.
+
     Ownership of the popup menu is not transferred to the push
+button.
+
     
    See also popup().
+
+
    Examples: buttongroups/buttongroups.cpp and qdir/qdir.cpp.
+
    void TQButton::setText ( const TQString & ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the text shown on the button.
+See the "text" property for details.
+
    void TQPushButton::setToggleButton ( bool )
+
    Sets whether the button is a toggle button.
+See the "toggleButton" property for details.
+
    ToggleState TQButton::state () const
+
    Returns the state of the toggle button.
+See the "toggleState" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::stateChanged ( int state ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes state. state is On if the button is on, NoChange if it is in the
+"no change" state or Off
+if the button is off.
+
     This may be the result of a user action, toggle() slot activation,
+setState(), or because setOn() was called.
+
     
    See also clicked() and TQButton::ToggleState.
+
+
    TQString TQButton::text () const
+
    Returns the text shown on the button.
+See the "text" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::toggle () [slot]
+
    
+Toggles the state of a toggle button.
+
     
    See also on, on, toggled(), and toggleButton.
+
+
    void TQButton::toggled ( bool on ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes status. on is TRUE if the button is on, or FALSE if the button is off.
+
     This may be the result of a user action, toggle() slot activation,
+or because setOn() was called.
+
     
    See also clicked().
+
+
    Example: listbox/listbox.cpp.
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    TQKeySequence accel
    
+
    This property holds the accelerator associated with the button.
+
    This property is 0 if there is no accelerator set. If you set this
+property to 0 then any current accelerator is removed.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setAccel() and get this property's value with accel().
+
    bool autoDefault
    
+
    This property holds whether the push button is the auto default button.
+
    If this property is set to TRUE then the push button is the auto
+default button in a dialog.
+
     In some GUI styles a default button is drawn with an extra frame
+around it, up to 3 pixels or more. TQt automatically keeps this
+space free around auto-default buttons, i.e. auto-default buttons
+may have a slightly larger size hint.
+
     This property's default is TRUE for buttons that have a TQDialog
+parent; otherwise it defaults to FALSE.
+
     See the default property for details of how default and
+auto-default interact.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setAutoDefault() and get this property's value with autoDefault().
+
    bool autoMask
    
+
    This property holds whether the button is automatically masked.
+
    See also TQWidget::autoMask.
+
+
    bool autoRepeat
    
+
    This property holds whether autoRepeat is enabled.
+
    If autoRepeat is enabled then the clicked() signal is emitted at
+regular intervals if the button is down. This property has no
+effect on toggle buttons. autoRepeat is off by default.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setAutoRepeat() and get this property's value with autoRepeat().
+
    bool default
    
+
    This property holds whether the push button is the default button.
+
    If this property is set to TRUE then the push button will be
+pressed if the user presses the Enter (or Return) key in a dialog.
+
     Regardless of focus, if the user presses Enter: If there is a
+default button the default button is pressed; otherwise, if
+there are one or more autoDefault buttons the first autoDefault
+button that is next in the tab order is pressed. If there are no
+default or autoDefault buttons only pressing Space on a button
+with focus, mouse clicking, or using an accelerator will press a
+button.
+
     In a dialog, only one push button at a time can be the default
+button. This button is then displayed with an additional frame
+(depending on the GUI style).
+
     The default button behavior is provided only in dialogs. Buttons
+can always be clicked from the keyboard by pressing Enter (or
+Return) or the Spacebar when the button has focus.
+
     This property's default is FALSE.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setDefault() and get this property's value with isDefault().
+
    bool flat
    
+
    This property holds whether the border is disabled.
+
    This property's default is FALSE.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setFlat() and get this property's value with isFlat().
+
    TQIconSet iconSet
    
+
    This property holds the icon set on the push button.
+
    This property will return 0 if the push button has no iconset.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setIconSet() and get this property's value with iconSet().
+
    bool menuButton
     
    This property holds whether the push button has a menu button on it.
+
    This property is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     If this property is set to TRUE, then a down arrow is drawn on the push
+button to indicate that a menu will pop up if the user clicks on the
+arrow.
+
+
    Get this property's value with isMenuButton().
+
    bool on
    
+
    This property holds whether the push button is toggled.
+
    This property should only be set for toggle push buttons. The
+default value is FALSE.
+
     
    See also on, toggle(), toggled(), and toggleButton.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setOn().
+
    TQPixmap pixmap
    
+
    This property holds the pixmap shown on the button.
+
    If the pixmap is monochrome (i.e. it is a TQBitmap or its depth is 1) and it does not have a mask,
+this property will set the pixmap to be its own mask. The purpose
+of this is to draw transparent bitmaps which are important for
+toggle buttons, for example.
+
     pixmap() returns 0 if no pixmap was set.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setPixmap() and get this property's value with pixmap().
+
    TQString text
    
+
    This property holds the text shown on the button.
+
    This property will return a TQString::null if the button has no
+text. If the text has an ampersand (&) in it, then an
+accelerator is automatically created for it using the character
+that follows the '&' as the accelerator key. Any previous
+accelerator will be overwritten, or cleared if no accelerator is
+defined by the text.
+
     There is no default text.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setText() and get this property's value with text().
+
    bool toggleButton
    
+
    This property holds whether the button is a toggle button.
+
    Toggle buttons have an on/off state similar to check boxes. A push button is initially not a toggle
+button.
+
     
    See also on, toggle(), toggleButton, and toggled().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setToggleButton().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqqueue.html b/doc/html/ntqqueue.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9f7bb4f3b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqqueue.html
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQQueue Class Reference (obsolete)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQQueue Class Reference (obsolete)
    
+
+ 
+
     
    +#include <ntqqueue.h>
    
+ 
+
     The TQQueue class has been renamed  TQPtrQueue  in TQt 3.0.
+
+
+
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqradiobutton.html b/doc/html/ntqradiobutton.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..424d36fa2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqradiobutton.html
@@ -0,0 +1,278 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQRadioButton Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQRadioButton Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQRadioButton widget provides a radio button with a text or pixmap label.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqradiobutton.h>
+
    Inherits TQButton.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQRadioButton ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQRadioButton ( const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • bool isChecked () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Important Inherited Members
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • bool autoMask - whether the radio button is automatically masked  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool checked - whether the radio button is checked
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQRadioButton widget provides a radio button with a text or pixmap label.
+
     
+
+
     TQRadioButton and TQCheckBox are both option buttons. That is, they
+can be switched on (checked) or off (unchecked). The classes
+differ in how the choices for the user are restricted. Check boxes
+define "many of many" choices, whereas radio buttons provide a
+"one of many" choice. In a group of radio buttons only one radio
+button at a time can be checked; if the user selects another
+button, the previously selected button is switched off.
+
     The easiest way to implement a "one of many" choice is simply to
+put the radio buttons into TQButtonGroup.
+
     Whenever a button is switched on or off it emits the signal
+toggled(). Connect to this signal if you want to trigger an action
+each time the button changes state. Otherwise, use isChecked() to
+see if a particular button is selected.
+
     Just like TQPushButton, a radio button can display text or a
+pixmap. The text can be set in the constructor or with setText();
+the pixmap is set with setPixmap().
+
      
+
     
+
     
    See also TQPushButton, TQToolButton, GUI Design Handbook: Radio Button, and Basic Widgets.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQRadioButton::TQRadioButton ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a radio button with no text.
+
     The parent and name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
+
    TQRadioButton::TQRadioButton ( const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a radio button with the text text.
+
     The parent and name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
+
    TQKeySequence TQButton::accel () const
+
    Returns the accelerator associated with the button.
+See the "accel" property for details.
+
    bool TQButton::autoRepeat () const
+
    Returns TRUE if autoRepeat is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "autoRepeat" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::clicked () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the button is activated (i.e. first
+pressed down and then released when the mouse cursor is inside the
+button), when the accelerator key is typed or when animateClick()
+is called. This signal is not emitted if you call setDown().
+
     The TQButtonGroup::clicked() signal does the same job, if you want
+to connect several buttons to the same slot.
+
     Warning: Don't launch a model dialog in response to this signal
+for a button that has autoRepeat turned on.
+
     
    See also pressed(), released(), toggled(), autoRepeat, and down.
+
+
    Examples: chart/setdataform.cpp, listbox/listbox.cpp, network/clientserver/client/client.cpp, progressbar/progressbar.cpp, richtext/richtext.cpp, t2/main.cpp, and t4/main.cpp.
+
    TQButtonGroup * TQButton::group () const
+
    
+Returns the group that this button belongs to.
+
     If the button is not a member of any TQButtonGroup, this function
+returns 0.
+
     
    See also TQButtonGroup.
+
+
    bool TQRadioButton::isChecked () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the radio button is checked; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "checked" property for details.
+
    bool TQButton::isDown () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the button is pressed; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "down" property for details.
+
    bool TQButton::isExclusiveToggle () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the button is an exclusive toggle; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "exclusiveToggle" property for details.
+
    bool TQButton::isOn () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the button is toggled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "on" property for details.
+
    bool TQButton::isToggleButton () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the button is a toggle button; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "toggleButton" property for details.
+
    const TQPixmap * TQButton::pixmap () const
+
    Returns the pixmap shown on the button.
+See the "pixmap" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::pressed () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the button is pressed down.
+
     
    See also released() and clicked().
+
+
    Examples: network/httpd/httpd.cpp and popup/popup.cpp.
+
    void TQButton::released () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the button is released.
+
     
    See also pressed(), clicked(), and toggled().
+
+
    void TQButton::setAccel ( const TQKeySequence & ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the accelerator associated with the button.
+See the "accel" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::setAutoRepeat ( bool ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether autoRepeat is enabled.
+See the "autoRepeat" property for details.
+
    void TQRadioButton::setChecked ( bool check ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets whether the radio button is checked to check.
+See the "checked" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::setDown ( bool ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the button is pressed.
+See the "down" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the pixmap shown on the button.
+See the "pixmap" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::setText ( const TQString & ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the text shown on the button.
+See the "text" property for details.
+
    ToggleState TQButton::state () const
+
    Returns the state of the toggle button.
+See the "toggleState" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::stateChanged ( int state ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes state. state is On if the button is on, NoChange if it is in the
+"no change" state or Off
+if the button is off.
+
     This may be the result of a user action, toggle() slot activation,
+setState(), or because setOn() was called.
+
     
    See also clicked() and TQButton::ToggleState.
+
+
    TQString TQButton::text () const
+
    Returns the text shown on the button.
+See the "text" property for details.
+
    void TQButton::toggle () [slot]
+
    
+Toggles the state of a toggle button.
+
     
    See also on, setOn(), toggled(), and toggleButton.
+
+
    void TQButton::toggled ( bool on ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes status. on is TRUE if the button is on, or FALSE if the button is off.
+
     This may be the result of a user action, toggle() slot activation,
+or because setOn() was called.
+
     
    See also clicked().
+
+
    Example: listbox/listbox.cpp.
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    TQKeySequence accel
    
+
    This property holds the accelerator associated with the button.
+
    This property is 0 if there is no accelerator set. If you set this
+property to 0 then any current accelerator is removed.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setAccel() and get this property's value with accel().
+
    bool autoMask
    
+
    This property holds whether the radio button is automatically masked.
+
    See also TQWidget::autoMask.
+
+
    bool autoRepeat
    
+
    This property holds whether autoRepeat is enabled.
+
    If autoRepeat is enabled then the clicked() signal is emitted at
+regular intervals if the button is down. This property has no
+effect on toggle buttons. autoRepeat is off by default.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setAutoRepeat() and get this property's value with autoRepeat().
+
    bool checked
    
+
    This property holds whether the radio button is checked.
+
    This property will not effect any other radio buttons unless they
+have been placed in the same TQButtonGroup. The default value is
+FALSE (unchecked).
+
+
    Set this property's value with setChecked() and get this property's value with isChecked().
+
    TQPixmap pixmap
    
+
    This property holds the pixmap shown on the button.
+
    If the pixmap is monochrome (i.e. it is a TQBitmap or its depth is 1) and it does not have a mask,
+this property will set the pixmap to be its own mask. The purpose
+of this is to draw transparent bitmaps which are important for
+toggle buttons, for example.
+
     pixmap() returns 0 if no pixmap was set.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setPixmap() and get this property's value with pixmap().
+
    TQString text
    
+
    This property holds the text shown on the button.
+
    This property will return a TQString::null if the button has no
+text. If the text has an ampersand (&) in it, then an
+accelerator is automatically created for it using the character
+that follows the '&' as the accelerator key. Any previous
+accelerator will be overwritten, or cleared if no accelerator is
+defined by the text.
+
     There is no default text.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setText() and get this property's value with text().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqrangecontrol.html b/doc/html/ntqrangecontrol.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6f826d947
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqrangecontrol.html
@@ -0,0 +1,336 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQRangeControl Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQRangeControl Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQRangeControl class provides an integer value within a range.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqrangecontrol.h>
+
    Inherited by TQDial, TQScrollBar, TQSlider, and TQSpinBox.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQRangeControl class provides an integer value within a range.
+
     
+
     Although originally designed for the TQScrollBar widget, the
+TQRangeControl can also be used in conjunction with other widgets
+such as TQSlider and TQSpinBox. Here are the five main concepts in
+the class:
+
     
      
+
       
    1.  Current value The bounded integer that
+TQRangeControl maintains. value() returns it, and several
+functions, including setValue(), set it.
+
       
    2.  Minimum The lowest value that value() can ever
+return. Returned by minValue() and set by setRange() or one of the
+constructors.
+
       
    3.  Maximum The highest value that value() can ever
+return. Returned by maxValue() and set by setRange() or one of the
+constructors.
+
       
    4.  Line step The smaller of two natural steps that
+TQRangeControl provides and typically corresponds to the user
+pressing an arrow key. The line step is returned by lineStep()
+and set using setSteps(). The functions addLine() and
+subtractLine() respectively increment and decrement the current
+value by lineStep().
+
       
    5.  Page step The larger of two natural steps that
+TQRangeControl provides and typically corresponds to the user
+pressing PageUp or PageDown. The page step is returned by
+pageStep() and set using setSteps(). The functions addPage() and
+substractPage() respectively increment and decrement the current
+value by pageStep().
+
       
    
+
     Unity (1) may be viewed as a third step size. setValue() lets you
+set the current value to any integer in the allowed range, not
+just minValue() + n * lineStep() for integer values of n.
+Some widgets may allow the user to set any value at all; others
+may just provide multiples of lineStep() or pageStep().
+
     TQRangeControl provides three virtual functions that are well
+suited for updating the on-screen representation of range controls
+and emitting signals: valueChange(), rangeChange() and
+stepChange().
+
     TQRangeControl also provides a function called bound() which lets
+you force arbitrary integers to be within the allowed range of the
+range control.
+
     We recommend that all widgets that inherit TQRangeControl provide
+at least a signal called valueChanged(); many widgets will want to
+provide addStep(), addPage(), substractStep() and substractPage()
+as slots.
+
     Note that you must use multiple inheritance if you plan to
+implement a widget using TQRangeControl because TQRangeControl is
+not derived from TQWidget.
+
    See also Miscellaneous Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQRangeControl::TQRangeControl ()
+
    
+Constructs a range control with a minimum value of 0, maximum
+value of 99, line step of 1, page step of 10 and initial value 0.
+
+
    TQRangeControl::TQRangeControl ( int minValue, int maxValue, int lineStep, int pageStep, int value )
+
    
+Constructs a range control whose value can never be smaller than
+minValue or greater than maxValue, whose line step size is
+lineStep and page step size is pageStep and whose value is
+initially value (which is guaranteed to be in range using
+bound()).
+
+
    TQRangeControl::~TQRangeControl () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the range control
+
+
    void TQRangeControl::addLine ()
+
    
+Equivalent to setValue( value() + lineStep() ).
+
     If the value is changed, then valueChange() is called.
+
     
    See also subtractLine(), addPage(), and setValue().
+
+
    void TQRangeControl::addPage ()
+
    
+Equivalent to setValue( value() + pageStep() ).
+
     If the value is changed, then valueChange() is called.
+
     
    See also subtractPage(), addLine(), and setValue().
+
+
    int TQRangeControl::bound ( int v ) const
+
    
+Forces the value v to be within the range from minValue() to
+maxValue() inclusive, and returns the result.
+
     This function is provided so that you can easily force other
+numbers than value() into the allowed range. You do not need to
+call it in order to use TQRangeControl itself.
+
     
    See also setValue(), value(), minValue(), and maxValue().
+
+
    void TQRangeControl::directSetValue ( int value ) [protected]
+
    
+Sets the range control value directly without calling
+valueChange().
+
     Forces the new value to be within the legal range.
+
     You will rarely have to call this function. However, if you want
+to change the range control's value inside the overloaded method
+valueChange(), setValue() would call the function valueChange()
+again. To avoid this recursion you must use directSetValue()
+instead.
+
     
    See also setValue().
+
+
    int TQRangeControl::lineStep () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the line step.
+
     
    See also setSteps() and pageStep().
+
+
    int TQRangeControl::maxValue () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the maximum value of the range.
+
     
    See also setMaxValue(), setRange(), and minValue().
+
+
    int TQRangeControl::minValue () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the minimum value of the range.
+
     
    See also setMinValue(), setRange(), and maxValue().
+
+
    int TQRangeControl::pageStep () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the page step.
+
     
    See also setSteps() and lineStep().
+
+
    int TQRangeControl::positionFromValue ( int logical_val, int span ) const [protected]
+
    
+Converts logical_val to a pixel position. minValue() maps to 0,
+maxValue() maps to span and other values are distributed evenly
+in-between.
+
     This function can handle the entire integer range without
+overflow, providing span is <= 4096.
+
     Calling this method is useful when actually drawing a range
+control such as a TQScrollBar on-screen.
+
     
    See also valueFromPosition().
+
+
    int TQRangeControl::prevValue () const [protected]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the previous value of the range control. "Previous value"
+means the value before the last change occurred. Setting a new
+range may affect the value, too, because the value is forced to be
+inside the specified range. When the range control is initially
+created, this is the same as value().
+
     prevValue() can be outside the current legal range if a call to
+setRange() causes the current value to change. For example, if the
+range was [0, 1000] and the current value is 500, setRange(0, 400)
+makes value() return 400 and prevValue() return 500.
+
     
    See also value() and setRange().
+
+
    void TQRangeControl::rangeChange () [virtual protected]
+
    
+This virtual function is called whenever the range control's range
+changes. You can reimplement it if you want to be notified when
+the range changes. The default implementation does nothing.
+
     Note that this method is called after the range has changed.
+
     
    See also setRange(), valueChange(), and stepChange().
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQDial, TQSlider, and TQSpinBox.
+
    void TQRangeControl::setMaxValue ( int maxVal )
+
    
+Sets the minimum value of the range to maxVal.
+
     If necessary, the minValue() is adjusted so that the range remains
+valid.
+
     
    See also maxValue() and setMinValue().
+
+
    void TQRangeControl::setMinValue ( int minVal )
+
    
+Sets the minimum value of the range to minVal.
+
     If necessary, the maxValue() is adjusted so that the range remains
+valid.
+
     
    See also minValue() and setMaxValue().
+
+
    void TQRangeControl::setRange ( int minValue, int maxValue )
+
    
+Sets the range control's minimum value to minValue and its
+maximum value to maxValue.
+
     Calls the virtual rangeChange() function if one or both of the new
+minimum and maximum values are different from the previous
+setting. Calls the virtual valueChange() function if the current
+value is adjusted because it was outside the new range.
+
     If maxValue is smaller than minValue, minValue becomes
+the only legal value.
+
     
    See also minValue() and maxValue().
+
+
    Examples: listbox/listbox.cpp, t12/lcdrange.cpp, t5/main.cpp, t6/main.cpp, t8/lcdrange.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    void TQRangeControl::setSteps ( int lineStep, int pageStep )
+
    
+Sets the range's line step to lineStep and page step to pageStep.
+
     Calls the virtual stepChange() function if the new line step
+or page step are different from the previous settings.
+
     
    See also lineStep(), pageStep(), and setRange().
+
+
    void TQRangeControl::setValue ( int value )
+
    
+Sets the range control's value to value and forces it to be
+within the legal range.
+
     Calls the virtual valueChange() function if the new value is
+different from the previous value. The old value can still be
+retrieved using prevValue().
+
     
    See also value().
+
+
    void TQRangeControl::stepChange () [virtual protected]
+
    
+This virtual function is called whenever the range control's
+line or page step settings change. You can reimplement it if you
+want to be notified when the step changes. The default
+implementation does nothing.
+
     Note that this method is called after a step setting has changed.
+
     
    See also setSteps(), rangeChange(), and valueChange().
+
+
    void TQRangeControl::subtractLine ()
+
    
+Equivalent to setValue( value() - lineStep() ).
+
     If the value is changed, then valueChange() is called.
+
     
    See also addLine(), subtractPage(), and setValue().
+
+
    void TQRangeControl::subtractPage ()
+
    
+Equivalent to setValue( value() - pageStep() ).
+
     If the value is changed, then valueChange() is called.
+
     
    See also addPage(), subtractLine(), and setValue().
+
+
    int TQRangeControl::value () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the current range control value. This is guaranteed to be
+within the range [minValue(), maxValue()].
+
     
    See also setValue() and prevValue().
+
+
    void TQRangeControl::valueChange () [virtual protected]
+
    
+This virtual function is called whenever the range control value
+changes. You can reimplement it if you want to be notified when
+the value changes. The default implementation does nothing.
+
     Note that this method is called after the value has changed. The
+previous value can be retrieved using prevValue().
+
     
    See also setValue(), addPage(), subtractPage(), addLine(), subtractLine(), rangeChange(), and stepChange().
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQDial, TQSlider, and TQSpinBox.
+
    int TQRangeControl::valueFromPosition ( int pos, int span ) const [protected]
+
    
+Converts the pixel position pos to a value. 0 maps to
+minValue(), span maps to maxValue() and other values are
+distributed evenly in-between.
+
     This function can handle the entire integer range without
+overflow.
+
     Calling this method is useful if you actually implemented a range
+control widget such as TQScrollBar and want to handle mouse press
+events. This function then maps screen coordinates to the logical
+values.
+
     
    See also positionFromValue().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqrect.html b/doc/html/ntqrect.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b71a12db0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqrect.html
@@ -0,0 +1,645 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQRect Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQRect Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQRect class defines a rectangle in the plane.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqrect.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
      
+
    • bool operator== ( const TQRect & r1, const TQRect & r2 )
      • 
+
    • bool operator!= ( const TQRect & r1, const TQRect & r2 )
      • 
+
    • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQRect & r )
      • 
+
    • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQRect & r )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQRect class defines a rectangle in the plane.
+
     
+
+
+
     A rectangle is internally represented as an upper-left corner and
+a bottom-right corner, but it is normally expressed as an
+upper-left corner and a size.
+
     The coordinate type is TQCOORD (defined in ntqwindowdefs.h as int). The minimum value of TQCOORD is TQCOORD_MIN (-2147483648) and
+the maximum value is  TQCOORD_MAX (2147483647).
+
     Note that the size (width and height) of a rectangle might be
+different from what you are used to. If the top-left corner and
+the bottom-right corner are the same, the height and the width of
+the rectangle will both be 1.
+
     Generally, width = right - left + 1 and height = bottom - top + 1. We designed it this way to make it correspond to
+rectangular spaces used by drawing functions in which the width
+and height denote a number of pixels. For example, drawing a
+rectangle with width and height 1 draws a single pixel.
+
     The default coordinate system has origin (0, 0) in the top-left
+corner. The positive direction of the y axis is down, and the
+positive x axis is from left to right.
+
     A TQRect can be constructed with a set of left, top, width and
+height integers, from two TQPoints or from a TQPoint and a TQSize.
+After creation the dimensions can be changed, e.g. with setLeft(),
+setRight(), setTop() and setBottom(), or by setting sizes, e.g.
+setWidth(), setHeight() and setSize(). The dimensions can also be
+changed with the move functions, e.g. moveBy(), moveCenter(),
+moveBottomRight(), etc. You can also add coordinates to a
+rectangle with addCoords().
+
     You can test to see if a TQRect contains a specific point with
+contains(). You can also test to see if two TQRects intersect with
+intersects() (see also intersect()). To get the bounding rectangle
+of two TQRects use unite().
+
     
    See also TQPoint, TQSize, Graphics Classes, and Image Processing Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQRect::TQRect ()
+
    
+
+
     Constructs an invalid rectangle.
+
+
    TQRect::TQRect ( const TQPoint & topLeft, const TQPoint & bottomRight )
+
    
+Constructs a rectangle with topLeft as the top-left corner and
+bottomRight as the bottom-right corner.
+
+
    TQRect::TQRect ( const TQPoint & topLeft, const TQSize & size )
+
    
+Constructs a rectangle with topLeft as the top-left corner and
+size as the rectangle size.
+
+
    TQRect::TQRect ( int left, int top, int width, int height )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a rectangle with the top, left corner and width and height.
+
     Example (creates three identical rectangles):
+
    +        TQRect r1( TQPoint(100,200), TQPoint(110,215) );
+        TQRect r2( TQPoint(100,200), TQSize(11,16) );
+        TQRect r3( 100, 200, 11, 16 );
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    void TQRect::addCoords ( int xp1, int yp1, int xp2, int yp2 )
+
    
+Adds xp1, yp1, xp2 and yp2 respectively to the
+existing coordinates of the rectangle.
+
+
    Examples: multiple/ax1.h and multiple/ax2.h.
+
    int TQRect::bottom () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the bottom coordinate of the rectangle.
+
     
    See also setBottom(), top(), bottomLeft(), and bottomRight().
+
+
    Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, desktop/desktop.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, and themes/wood.cpp.
+
    TQPoint TQRect::bottomLeft () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the bottom-left position of the rectangle.
+
     
    See also setBottomLeft(), moveBottomLeft(), topRight(), bottom(), and left().
+
+
    Example: tictac/tictac.cpp.
+
    TQPoint TQRect::bottomRight () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the bottom-right position of the rectangle.
+
     
    See also setBottomRight(), moveBottomRight(), topLeft(), right(), and bottom().
+
+
    Example: tictac/tictac.cpp.
+
    TQPoint TQRect::center () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the center point of the rectangle.
+
     
    See also moveCenter(), topLeft(), bottomRight(), topRight(), and bottomLeft().
+
+
    Example: tooltip/tooltip.cpp.
+
    bool TQRect::contains ( const TQPoint & p, bool proper = FALSE ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the point p is inside or on the edge of the
+rectangle; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     If proper is TRUE, this function returns TRUE only if p is
+inside (not on the edge).
+
+
    Example: t14/cannon.cpp.
+
    bool TQRect::contains ( int x, int y ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns TRUE if the point x, y is inside this rectangle;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQRect::contains ( int x, int y, bool proper ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns TRUE if the point x, y is inside this rectangle;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     If proper is TRUE, this function returns TRUE only if the point
+is entirely inside (not on the edge).
+
+
    bool TQRect::contains ( const TQRect & r, bool proper = FALSE ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns TRUE if the rectangle r is inside this rectangle;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     If proper is TRUE, this function returns TRUE only if r is
+entirely inside (not on the edge).
+
     
    See also unite(), intersect(), and intersects().
+
+
    void TQRect::coords ( int * xp1, int * yp1, int * xp2, int * yp2 ) const
+
    
+Extracts the rectangle parameters as the top-left point *xp1,
+*yp1 and the bottom-right point *xp2, *yp2.
+
     
    See also setCoords() and rect().
+
+
    Examples: themes/metal.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
+
    int TQRect::height () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the height of the rectangle. The height includes both the
+top and bottom edges, i.e. height = bottom - top + 1.
+
     
    See also width(), size(), and setHeight().
+
+
    Examples: aclock/aclock.cpp, desktop/desktop.cpp, movies/main.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, themes/metal.cpp, themes/wood.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    TQRect TQRect::intersect ( const TQRect & r ) const
+
    
+Returns the intersection of this rectangle and rectangle r.
+r.intersect(s) is equivalent to r&s.
+
+
    bool TQRect::intersects ( const TQRect & r ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this rectangle intersects with rectangle r
+(there is at least one pixel that is within both rectangles);
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also intersect() and contains().
+
+
    Examples: t11/cannon.cpp, t12/cannon.cpp, t13/cannon.cpp, and t14/cannon.cpp.
+
    bool TQRect::isEmpty () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the rectangle is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     An empty rectangle has a left() > right() or top() > bottom().
+
     An empty rectangle is not valid. isEmpty() == !isValid()
+
     
    See also isNull(), isValid(), and normalize().
+
+
    bool TQRect::isNull () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the rectangle is a null rectangle; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     A null rectangle has both the width and the height set to 0, that
+is right() == left() - 1 and bottom() == top() - 1.
+
     Note that if right() == left() and bottom() == top(), then the
+rectangle has width 1 and height 1.
+
     A null rectangle is also empty.
+
     A null rectangle is not valid.
+
     
    See also isEmpty() and isValid().
+
+
    bool TQRect::isValid () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the rectangle is valid; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     A valid rectangle has a left() <= right() and top() <= bottom().
+
     Note that non-trivial operations like intersections are not defined
+for invalid rectangles.
+
     isValid() == !isEmpty()
+
     
    See also isNull(), isEmpty(), and normalize().
+
+
    Examples: themes/metal.cpp and tooltip/tooltip.cpp.
+
    int TQRect::left () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the left coordinate of the rectangle. Identical to x().
+
     
    See also setLeft(), right(), topLeft(), and bottomLeft().
+
+
    Examples: aclock/aclock.cpp, desktop/desktop.cpp, i18n/main.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, tictac/tictac.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    void TQRect::moveBottom ( int pos )
+
    
+Sets the bottom position of the rectangle to pos, leaving the
+size unchanged.
+
     
    See also bottom(), setBottom(), moveLeft(), moveTop(), and moveRight().
+
+
    void TQRect::moveBottomLeft ( const TQPoint & p )
+
    
+Sets the bottom-left position of the rectangle to p, leaving
+the size unchanged.
+
     
    See also bottomLeft(), setBottomLeft(), moveTopLeft(), moveBottomRight(), and moveTopRight().
+
+
    Example: t10/cannon.cpp.
+
    void TQRect::moveBottomRight ( const TQPoint & p )
+
    
+Sets the bottom-right position of the rectangle to p, leaving
+the size unchanged.
+
     
    See also bottomRight(), setBottomRight(), moveTopLeft(), moveTopRight(), and moveBottomLeft().
+
+
    void TQRect::moveBy ( int dx, int dy )
+
    
+Moves the rectangle dx along the x axis and dy along the y
+axis, relative to the current position. Positive values move the
+rectangle to the right and down.
+
     
    See also moveTopLeft().
+
+
    Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, themes/wood.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    void TQRect::moveCenter ( const TQPoint & p )
+
    
+Sets the center point of the rectangle to p, leaving the size
+unchanged.
+
     
    See also center(), moveTopLeft(), moveBottomRight(), moveTopRight(), and moveBottomLeft().
+
+
    Examples: t11/cannon.cpp and t12/cannon.cpp.
+
    void TQRect::moveLeft ( int pos )
+
    
+Sets the left position of the rectangle to pos, leaving the
+size unchanged.
+
     
    See also left(), setLeft(), moveTop(), moveRight(), and moveBottom().
+
+
    void TQRect::moveRight ( int pos )
+
    
+Sets the right position of the rectangle to pos, leaving the
+size unchanged.
+
     
    See also right(), setRight(), moveLeft(), moveTop(), and moveBottom().
+
+
    void TQRect::moveTop ( int pos )
+
    
+Sets the top position of the rectangle to pos, leaving the
+size unchanged.
+
     
    See also top(), setTop(), moveLeft(), moveRight(), and moveBottom().
+
+
    void TQRect::moveTopLeft ( const TQPoint & p )
+
    
+Sets the top-left position of the rectangle to p, leaving the
+size unchanged.
+
     
    See also topLeft(), setTopLeft(), moveBottomRight(), moveTopRight(), and moveBottomLeft().
+
+
    Examples: helpsystem/tooltip.cpp and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    void TQRect::moveTopRight ( const TQPoint & p )
+
    
+Sets the top-right position of the rectangle to p, leaving the
+size unchanged.
+
     
    See also topRight(), setTopRight(), moveTopLeft(), moveBottomRight(), and moveBottomLeft().
+
+
    TQRect TQRect::normalize () const
+
    
+Returns a normalized rectangle, i.e. a rectangle that has a
+non-negative width and height.
+
     It swaps left and right if left() > right(), and swaps top and
+bottom if top() > bottom().
+
     
    See also isValid().
+
+
    Example: scribble/scribble.cpp.
+
    TQRect TQRect::operator& ( const TQRect & r ) const
+
    
+Returns the intersection of this rectangle and rectangle r.
+
     Returns an empty rectangle if there is no intersection.
+
     
    See also operator&=(), operator|(), isEmpty(), intersects(), and contains().
+
+
    TQRect & TQRect::operator&= ( const TQRect & r )
+
    
+Intersects this rectangle with rectangle r.
+
+
    TQRect TQRect::operator| ( const TQRect & r ) const
+
    
+Returns the bounding rectangle of this rectangle and rectangle r.
+
     The bounding rectangle of a nonempty rectangle and an empty or
+invalid rectangle is defined to be the nonempty rectangle.
+
     
    See also operator|=(), operator&(), intersects(), and contains().
+
+
    TQRect & TQRect::operator|= ( const TQRect & r )
+
    
+Unites this rectangle with rectangle r.
+
+
    TQCOORD & TQRect::rBottom ()
+
    
+
+
     Returns a reference to the bottom coordinate of the rectangle.
+
     
    See also rLeft(), rTop(), and rRight().
+
+
    TQCOORD & TQRect::rLeft ()
+
    
+
+
     Returns a reference to the left coordinate of the rectangle.
+
     
    See also rTop(), rRight(), and rBottom().
+
+
    TQCOORD & TQRect::rRight ()
+
    
+
+
     Returns a reference to the right coordinate of the rectangle.
+
     
    See also rLeft(), rTop(), and rBottom().
+
+
    TQCOORD & TQRect::rTop ()
+
    
+
+
     Returns a reference to the top coordinate of the rectangle.
+
     
    See also rLeft(), rRight(), and rBottom().
+
+
    void TQRect::rect ( int * x, int * y, int * w, int * h ) const
+
    
+Extracts the rectangle parameters as the position *x, *y and
+width *w and height *h.
+
     
    See also setRect() and coords().
+
+
    Examples: themes/metal.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
+
    int TQRect::right () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the right coordinate of the rectangle.
+
     
    See also setRight(), left(), topRight(), and bottomRight().
+
+
    Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, customlayout/flow.cpp, desktop/desktop.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, t11/cannon.cpp, and themes/wood.cpp.
+
    void TQRect::setBottom ( int pos )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the bottom edge of the rectangle to pos. May change the
+height, but will never change the top edge of the rectangle.
+
     
    See also bottom(), setTop(), and setHeight().
+
+
    Example: scribble/scribble.cpp.
+
    void TQRect::setBottomLeft ( const TQPoint & p )
+
    
+Set the bottom-left corner of the rectangle to p. May change
+the size, but will the never change the top-right corner of
+the rectangle.
+
     
    See also bottomLeft(), moveBottomLeft(), setTopLeft(), setBottomRight(), and setTopRight().
+
+
    void TQRect::setBottomRight ( const TQPoint & p )
+
    
+Set the bottom-right corner of the rectangle to p. May change
+the size, but will the never change the top-left corner of
+the rectangle.
+
     
    See also bottomRight(), moveBottomRight(), setTopLeft(), setTopRight(), and setBottomLeft().
+
+
    void TQRect::setCoords ( int xp1, int yp1, int xp2, int yp2 )
+
    
+Sets the coordinates of the rectangle's top-left corner to (xp1, yp1), and the coordinates of its bottom-right corner to (xp2, yp2).
+
     
    See also coords() and setRect().
+
+
    void TQRect::setHeight ( int h )
+
    
+Sets the height of the rectangle to h. The top edge is not
+moved, but the bottom edge may be moved.
+
     
    See also height(), setTop(), setBottom(), and setSize().
+
+
    Example: desktop/desktop.cpp.
+
    void TQRect::setLeft ( int pos )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the left edge of the rectangle to pos. May change the
+width, but will never change the right edge of the rectangle.
+
     Identical to setX().
+
     
    See also left(), setTop(), and setWidth().
+
+
    Example: scribble/scribble.cpp.
+
    void TQRect::setRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
+
    
+Sets the coordinates of the rectangle's top-left corner to (x, y), and its size to (w, h).
+
     
    See also rect() and setCoords().
+
+
    Example: themes/wood.cpp.
+
    void TQRect::setRight ( int pos )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the right edge of the rectangle to pos. May change the
+width, but will never change the left edge of the rectangle.
+
     
    See also right(), setLeft(), and setWidth().
+
+
    Example: scribble/scribble.cpp.
+
    void TQRect::setSize ( const TQSize & s )
+
    
+Sets the size of the rectangle to s. The top-left corner is not
+moved.
+
     
    See also size(), setWidth(), and setHeight().
+
+
    Example: xform/xform.cpp.
+
    void TQRect::setTop ( int pos )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the top edge of the rectangle to pos. May change the
+height, but will never change the bottom edge of the rectangle.
+
     Identical to setY().
+
     
    See also top(), setBottom(), and setHeight().
+
+
    Example: scribble/scribble.cpp.
+
    void TQRect::setTopLeft ( const TQPoint & p )
+
    
+Set the top-left corner of the rectangle to p. May change
+the size, but will the never change the bottom-right corner of
+the rectangle.
+
     
    See also topLeft(), moveTopLeft(), setBottomRight(), setTopRight(), and setBottomLeft().
+
+
    void TQRect::setTopRight ( const TQPoint & p )
+
    
+Set the top-right corner of the rectangle to p. May change
+the size, but will the never change the bottom-left corner of
+the rectangle.
+
     
    See also topRight(), moveTopRight(), setTopLeft(), setBottomRight(), and setBottomLeft().
+
+
    void TQRect::setWidth ( int w )
+
    
+Sets the width of the rectangle to w. The right edge is
+changed, but not the left edge.
+
     
    See also width(), setLeft(), setRight(), and setSize().
+
+
    Example: desktop/desktop.cpp.
+
    void TQRect::setX ( int x )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the x position of the rectangle (its left end) to x. May
+change the width, but will never change the right edge of the
+rectangle.
+
     Identical to setLeft().
+
     
    See also x() and setY().
+
+
    void TQRect::setY ( int y )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the y position of the rectangle (its top) to y. May change
+the height, but will never change the bottom edge of the
+rectangle.
+
     Identical to setTop().
+
     
    See also y() and setX().
+
+
    TQSize TQRect::size () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the size of the rectangle.
+
     
    See also width() and height().
+
+
    Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp, movies/main.cpp, and t10/cannon.cpp.
+
    int TQRect::top () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the top coordinate of the rectangle. Identical to y().
+
     
    See also setTop(), bottom(), topLeft(), and topRight().
+
+
    Examples: aclock/aclock.cpp, desktop/desktop.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, themes/wood.cpp, tictac/tictac.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    TQPoint TQRect::topLeft () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the top-left position of the rectangle.
+
     
    See also setTopLeft(), moveTopLeft(), bottomRight(), left(), and top().
+
+
    Examples: helpsystem/tooltip.cpp, t10/cannon.cpp, and tictac/tictac.cpp.
+
    TQPoint TQRect::topRight () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the top-right position of the rectangle.
+
     
    See also setTopRight(), moveTopRight(), bottomLeft(), top(), and right().
+
+
    Example: tictac/tictac.cpp.
+
    TQRect TQRect::unite ( const TQRect & r ) const
+
    
+Returns the bounding rectangle of this rectangle and rectangle r. r.unite(s) is equivalent to r|s.
+
+
    Examples: t11/cannon.cpp, t12/cannon.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    int TQRect::width () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the width of the rectangle. The width includes both the
+left and right edges, i.e. width = right - left + 1.
+
     
    See also height(), size(), and setHeight().
+
+
    Examples: aclock/aclock.cpp, customlayout/border.cpp, desktop/desktop.cpp, movies/main.cpp, themes/metal.cpp, themes/wood.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    int TQRect::x () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the left coordinate of the rectangle. Identical to left().
+
     
    See also left(), y(), and setX().
+
+
    Examples: customlayout/border.cpp, desktop/desktop.cpp, movies/main.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, t12/cannon.cpp, themes/metal.cpp, and themes/wood.cpp.
+
    int TQRect::y () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the top coordinate of the rectangle. Identical to top().
+
     
    See also top(), x(), and setY().
+
+
    Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp, movies/main.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, t12/cannon.cpp, t14/cannon.cpp, themes/metal.cpp, and themes/wood.cpp.
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    bool operator!= ( const TQRect & r1, const TQRect & r2 )
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if r1 and r2 are different; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQRect & r )
+
    
+
+
     Writes the TQRect, r, to the stream s, and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
    bool operator== ( const TQRect & r1, const TQRect & r2 )
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if r1 and r2 are equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQRect & r )
+
    
+
+
     Reads a TQRect from the stream s into rect r and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqregexp.html b/doc/html/ntqregexp.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..16ee5d8c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqregexp.html
@@ -0,0 +1,1037 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQRegExp Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQRegExp Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQRegExp class provides pattern matching using regular expressions.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqregexp.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQString escape ( const TQString & str )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
+The TQRegExp class provides pattern matching using regular expressions.
+
     
+
+
+
+
+
     Regular expressions, or "regexps", provide a way to find patterns
+within text. This is useful in many contexts, for example:
+
     
    
+
     Validation
+A regexp can be used to check whether a piece of text
+meets some criteria, e.g. is an integer or contains no
+whitespace.
+
     Searching
+Regexps provide a much more powerful means of searching
+text than simple string matching does. For example we can
+create a regexp which says "find one of the words 'mail',
+'letter' or 'correspondence' but not any of the words
+'email', 'mailman' 'mailer', 'letterbox' etc."
+
     Search and Replace
+A regexp can be used to replace a pattern with a piece of
+text, for example replace all occurrences of '&' with
+'&amp;' except where the '&' is already followed by 'amp;'.
+
     String Splitting
+A regexp can be used to identify where a string should be
+split into its component fields, e.g. splitting tab-delimited
+strings.
+
    
+
     We present a very brief introduction to regexps, a description of
+TQt's regexp language, some code examples, and finally the function
+documentation itself. TQRegExp is modeled on Perl's regexp
+language, and also fully supports Unicode. TQRegExp can also be
+used in the weaker 'wildcard' (globbing) mode which works in a
+similar way to command shells. A good text on regexps is Mastering Regular Expressions: Powerful Techniques for Perl and Other Tools by Jeffrey E. Friedl, ISBN 1565922573.
+
     Experienced regexp users may prefer to skip the introduction and
+go directly to the relevant information.
+
     In case of multi-threaded programming, note that TQRegExp depends on
+TQThreadStorage internally. For that reason, TQRegExp should only be
+used with threads started with TQThread, i.e. not with threads
+started with platform-specific APIs.
+
     
+
    
+
+
+
     
     Introduction
+
    
+
     Regexps are built up from expressions, quantifiers, and assertions.
+The simplest form of expression is simply a character, e.g.
+x or 5. An expression can also be a set of
+characters. For example, [ABCD], will match an A or
+a B or a C or a D. As a shorthand we could
+write this as [A-D]. If we want to match any of the
+captital letters in the English alphabet we can write
+[A-Z]. A quantifier tells the regexp engine how many
+occurrences of the expression we want, e.g. x{1,1} means
+match an x which occurs at least once and at most once.
+We'll look at assertions and more complex expressions later.
+
     Note that in general regexps cannot be used to check for balanced
+brackets or tags. For example if you want to match an opening html
+<b> and its closing </b> you can only use a regexp if you
+know that these tags are not nested; the html fragment, <b>bold <b>bolder</b></b> will not match as expected. If you know the
+maximum level of nesting it is possible to create a regexp that
+will match correctly, but for an unknown level of nesting, regexps
+will fail.
+
     We'll start by writing a regexp to match integers in the range 0
+to 99. We will require at least one digit so we will start with
+[0-9]{1,1} which means match a digit exactly once. This
+regexp alone will match integers in the range 0 to 9. To match one
+or two digits we can increase the maximum number of occurrences so
+the regexp becomes [0-9]{1,2} meaning match a digit at
+least once and at most twice. However, this regexp as it stands
+will not match correctly. This regexp will match one or two digits
+within a string. To ensure that we match against the whole
+string we must use the anchor assertions. We need ^ (caret)
+which when it is the first character in the regexp means that the
+regexp must match from the beginning of the string. And we also
+need $ (dollar) which when it is the last character in the
+regexp means that the regexp must match until the end of the
+string. So now our regexp is ^[0-9]{1,2}$. Note that
+assertions, such as ^ and $, do not match any
+characters.
+
     If you've seen regexps elsewhere they may have looked different from
+the ones above. This is because some sets of characters and some
+quantifiers are so common that they have special symbols to
+represent them. [0-9] can be replaced with the symbol
+\d. The quantifier to match exactly one occurrence,
+{1,1}, can be replaced with the expression itself. This means
+that x{1,1} is exactly the same as x alone. So our 0
+to 99 matcher could be written ^\d{1,2}$. Another way of
+writing it would be ^\d\d{0,1}$, i.e. from the start of the
+string match a digit followed by zero or one digits. In practice
+most people would write it ^\d\d?$. The ? is a
+shorthand for the quantifier {0,1}, i.e. a minimum of no
+occurrences a maximum of one occurrence. This is used to make an
+expression optional. The regexp ^\d\d?$ means "from the
+beginning of the string match one digit followed by zero or one
+digits and then the end of the string".
+
     Our second example is matching the words 'mail', 'letter' or
+'correspondence' but without matching 'email', 'mailman',
+'mailer', 'letterbox' etc. We'll start by just matching 'mail'. In
+full the regexp is, m{1,1}a{1,1}i{1,1}l{1,1}, but since
+each expression itself is automatically quantified by {1,1}
+we can simply write this as mail; an 'm' followed by an 'a'
+followed by an 'i' followed by an 'l'. The symbol '|' (bar) is
+used for alternation, so our regexp now becomes
+mail|letter|correspondence which means match 'mail' or
+'letter' or 'correspondence'. Whilst this regexp will find the
+words we want it will also find words we don't want such as
+'email'. We will start by putting our regexp in parentheses,
+(mail|letter|correspondence). Parentheses have two effects,
+firstly they group expressions together and secondly they identify
+parts of the regexp that we wish to capture. Our regexp still matches any of the three words but now
+they are grouped together as a unit. This is useful for building
+up more complex regexps. It is also useful because it allows us to
+examine which of the words actually matched. We need to use
+another assertion, this time \b "word boundary":
+\b(mail|letter|correspondence)\b. This regexp means "match
+a word boundary followed by the expression in parentheses followed
+by another word boundary". The \b assertion matches at a position in the regexp not a character in the regexp. A word
+boundary is any non-word character such as a space a newline or
+the beginning or end of the string.
+
     For our third example we want to replace ampersands with the HTML
+entity '&amp;'. The regexp to match is simple: &, i.e.
+match one ampersand. Unfortunately this will mess up our text if
+some of the ampersands have already been turned into HTML
+entities. So what we really want to say is replace an ampersand
+providing it is not followed by 'amp;'. For this we need the
+negative lookahead assertion and our regexp becomes:
+&(?!amp;). The negative lookahead assertion is introduced
+with '(?!' and finishes at the ')'. It means that the text it
+contains, 'amp;' in our example, must not follow the expression
+that preceeds it.
+
     Regexps provide a rich language that can be used in a variety of
+ways. For example suppose we want to count all the occurrences of
+'Eric' and 'Eirik' in a string. Two valid regexps to match these
+are \b(Eric|Eirik)\b and \bEi?ri[ck]\b. We need
+the word boundary '\b' so we don't get 'Ericsson' etc. The second
+regexp actually matches more than we want, 'Eric', 'Erik', 'Eiric'
+and 'Eirik'.
+
     We will implement some the examples above in the
+code examples section.
+
     
+
     Characters and Abbreviations for Sets of Characters
+
    
+
     
    
+
     Element Meaning
+
     c
+Any character represents itself unless it has a special
+regexp meaning. Thus c matches the character c.
+
     \c
+A character that follows a backslash matches the character
+itself except where mentioned below. For example if you
+wished to match a literal caret at the beginning of a string
+you would write \^.
+
     \a
+This matches the ASCII bell character (BEL, 0x07).
+
     \f
+This matches the ASCII form feed character (FF, 0x0C).
+
     \n
+This matches the ASCII line feed character (LF, 0x0A, Unix newline).
+
     \r
+This matches the ASCII carriage return character (CR, 0x0D).
+
     \t
+This matches the ASCII horizontal tab character (HT, 0x09).
+
     \v
+This matches the ASCII vertical tab character (VT, 0x0B).
+
     \xhhhh
+This matches the Unicode character corresponding to the
+hexadecimal number hhhh (between 0x0000 and 0xFFFF). \0ooo
+(i.e., \zero ooo) matches the ASCII/Latin-1 character
+corresponding to the octal number ooo (between 0 and 0377).
+
     . (dot)
+This matches any character (including newline).
+
     \d
+This matches a digit (TQChar::isDigit()).
+
     \D
+This matches a non-digit.
+
     \s
+This matches a whitespace (TQChar::isSpace()).
+
     \S
+This matches a non-whitespace.
+
     \w
+This matches a word character (TQChar::isLetterOrNumber() or '_').
+
     \W
+This matches a non-word character.
+
     \n
+The n-th backreference,
+e.g. \1, \2, etc.
+
    
+
     Note that the C++ compiler transforms backslashes in strings so to include a \ in a regexp you will need to enter it twice, i.e. \\.
+
     
+
     Sets of Characters
+
    
+
     Square brackets are used to match any character in the set of
+characters contained within the square brackets. All the character
+set abbreviations described above can be used within square
+brackets. Apart from the character set abbreviations and the
+following two exceptions no characters have special meanings in
+square brackets.
+
     
    
+
     ^
+The caret negates the character set if it occurs as the
+first character, i.e. immediately after the opening square
+bracket. For example, [abc] matches 'a' or 'b' or 'c',
+but [^abc] matches anything except 'a' or 'b' or
+'c'.
+
     -
+The dash is used to indicate a range of characters, for
+example [W-Z] matches 'W' or 'X' or 'Y' or 'Z'.
+
    
+
     Using the predefined character set abbreviations is more portable
+than using character ranges across platforms and languages. For
+example, [0-9] matches a digit in Western alphabets but
+\d matches a digit in any alphabet.
+
     Note that in most regexp literature sets of characters are called
+"character classes".
+
     
+
     Quantifiers
+
    
+
     By default an expression is automatically quantified by
+{1,1}, i.e. it should occur exactly once. In the following
+list E stands for any expression. An expression is a
+character or an abbreviation for a set of characters or a set of
+characters in square brackets or any parenthesised expression.
+
     
    
+
     E?
+Matches zero or one occurrence of E. This quantifier
+means "the previous expression is optional" since it will
+match whether or not the expression occurs in the string. It
+is the same as E{0,1}. For example dents?
+will match 'dent' and 'dents'.
+
     E+
+Matches one or more occurrences of E. This is the same
+as E{1,MAXINT}. For example, 0+ will match
+'0', '00', '000', etc.
+
     E*
+Matches zero or more occurrences of E. This is the same
+as E{0,MAXINT}. The * quantifier is often
+used by a mistake. Since it matches zero or more
+occurrences it will match no occurrences at all. For example
+if we want to match strings that end in whitespace and use
+the regexp \s*$ we would get a match on every string.
+This is because we have said find zero or more whitespace
+followed by the end of string, so even strings that don't end
+in whitespace will match. The regexp we want in this case is
+\s+$ to match strings that have at least one
+whitespace at the end.
+
     E{n}
+Matches exactly n occurrences of the expression. This
+is the same as repeating the expression n times. For
+example, x{5} is the same as xxxxx. It is also
+the same as E{n,n}, e.g. x{5,5}.
+
     E{n,}
+Matches at least n occurrences of the expression. This
+is the same as E{n,MAXINT}.
+
     E{,m}
+Matches at most m occurrences of the expression. This
+is the same as E{0,m}.
+
     E{n,m}
+Matches at least n occurrences of the expression and at
+most m occurrences of the expression.
+
    
+
     (MAXINT is implementation dependent but will not be smaller than
+1024.)
+
     If we wish to apply a quantifier to more than just the preceding
+character we can use parentheses to group characters together in
+an expression. For example, tag+ matches a 't' followed by
+an 'a' followed by at least one 'g', whereas (tag)+ matches
+at least one occurrence of 'tag'.
+
     Note that quantifiers are "greedy". They will match as much text
+as they can. For example, 0+ will match as many zeros as it
+can from the first zero it finds, e.g. '2.0005'.
+Quantifiers can be made non-greedy, see setMinimal().
+
     
+
     Capturing Text
+
    
+
     Parentheses allow us to group elements together so that we can
+quantify and capture them. For example if we have the expression
+mail|letter|correspondence that matches a string we know
+that one of the words matched but not which one. Using
+parentheses allows us to "capture" whatever is matched within
+their bounds, so if we used (mail|letter|correspondence)
+and matched this regexp against the string "I sent you some email"
+we can use the cap() or capturedTexts() functions to extract the
+matched characters, in this case 'mail'.
+
     We can use captured text within the regexp itself. To refer to the
+captured text we use backreferences which are indexed from 1,
+the same as for cap(). For example we could search for duplicate
+words in a string using \b(\w+)\W+\1\b which means match a
+word boundary followed by one or more word characters followed by
+one or more non-word characters followed by the same text as the
+first parenthesised expression followed by a word boundary.
+
     If we want to use parentheses purely for grouping and not for
+capturing we can use the non-capturing syntax, e.g.
+(?:green|blue). Non-capturing parentheses begin '(?:' and
+end ')'. In this example we match either 'green' or 'blue' but we
+do not capture the match so we only know whether or not we matched
+but not which color we actually found. Using non-capturing
+parentheses is more efficient than using capturing parentheses
+since the regexp engine has to do less book-keeping.
+
     Both capturing and non-capturing parentheses may be nested.
+
     
+
     Assertions
+
    
+
     Assertions make some statement about the text at the point where
+they occur in the regexp but they do not match any characters. In
+the following list E stands for any expression.
+
     
    
+
     ^
+The caret signifies the beginning of the string. If you
+wish to match a literal ^ you must escape it by
+writing \^. For example, ^#include will only
+match strings which begin with the characters '#include'.
+(When the caret is the first character of a character set it
+has a special meaning, see Sets of
+	 Characters.)
+
     $
+The dollar signifies the end of the string. For example
+\d\s*$ will match strings which end with a digit
+optionally followed by whitespace. If you wish to match a
+literal $ you must escape it by writing
+\$.
+
     \b
+A word boundary. For example the regexp
+\bOK\b means match immediately after a word
+boundary (e.g. start of string or whitespace) the letter 'O'
+then the letter 'K' immediately before another word boundary
+(e.g. end of string or whitespace). But note that the
+assertion does not actually match any whitespace so if we
+write (\bOK\b) and we have a match it will only
+contain 'OK' even if the string is "Its OK now".
+
     \B
+A non-word boundary. This assertion is true wherever
+\b is false. For example if we searched for
+\Bon\B in "Left on" the match would fail (space
+and end of string aren't non-word boundaries), but it would
+match in "tonne".
+
     (?=E)
+Positive lookahead. This assertion is true if the
+expression matches at this point in the regexp. For example,
+const(?=\s+char) matches 'const' whenever it is
+followed by 'char', as in 'static const char *'.
+(Compare with const\s+char, which matches 'static
+const char *'.)
+
     (?!E)
+Negative lookahead. This assertion is true if the
+expression does not match at this point in the regexp. For
+example, const(?!\s+char) matches 'const' except
+when it is followed by 'char'.
+
    
+
     
+
     Wildcard Matching (globbing)
+
    
+
     Most command shells such as bash or cmd.exe support "file
+globbing", the ability to identify a group of files by using
+wildcards. The setWildcard() function is used to switch between
+regexp and wildcard mode. Wildcard matching is much simpler than
+full regexps and has only four features:
+
     
    
+
     c
+Any character represents itself apart from those mentioned
+below. Thus c matches the character c.
+
     ?
+This matches any single character. It is the same as
+. in full regexps.
+
     *
+This matches zero or more of any characters. It is the
+same as .* in full regexps.
+
     [...]
+Sets of characters can be represented in square brackets,
+similar to full regexps. Within the character class, like
+outside, backslash has no special meaning.
+
    
+
     For example if we are in wildcard mode and have strings which
+contain filenames we could identify HTML files with *.html.
+This will match zero or more characters followed by a dot followed
+by 'h', 't', 'm' and 'l'.
+
     
+
     Notes for Perl Users
+
    
+
     Most of the character class abbreviations supported by Perl are
+supported by TQRegExp, see characters
+    and abbreviations for sets of characters.
+
     In TQRegExp, apart from within character classes, ^ always
+signifies the start of the string, so carets must always be
+escaped unless used for that purpose. In Perl the meaning of caret
+varies automagically depending on where it occurs so escaping it
+is rarely necessary. The same applies to $ which in
+TQRegExp always signifies the end of the string.
+
     TQRegExp's quantifiers are the same as Perl's greedy quantifiers.
+Non-greedy matching cannot be applied to individual quantifiers,
+but can be applied to all the quantifiers in the pattern. For
+example, to match the Perl regexp ro+?m requires:
+
    +    TQRegExp rx( "ro+m" );
+    rx.setMinimal( TRUE );
+    
    
+ 
+
     The equivalent of Perl's /i option is
+setCaseSensitive(FALSE).
+
     Perl's /g option can be emulated using a loop.
+
     In TQRegExp . matches any character, therefore all TQRegExp
+regexps have the equivalent of Perl's /s option. TQRegExp
+does not have an equivalent to Perl's /m option, but this
+can be emulated in various ways for example by splitting the input
+into lines or by looping with a regexp that searches for newlines.
+
     Because TQRegExp is string oriented there are no \A, \Z or \z
+assertions. The \G assertion is not supported but can be emulated
+in a loop.
+
     Perl's $& is cap(0) or capturedTexts()[0]. There are no TQRegExp
+equivalents for $`, $' or $+. Perl's capturing variables, $1, $2,
+... correspond to cap(1) or capturedTexts()[1], cap(2) or
+capturedTexts()[2], etc.
+
     To substitute a pattern use TQString::replace().
+
     Perl's extended /x syntax is not supported, nor are
+directives, e.g. (?i), or regexp comments, e.g. (?#comment). On
+the other hand, C++'s rules for literal strings can be used to
+achieve the same:
+
    +    TQRegExp mark( "\\b" // word boundary
+                  "[Mm]ark" // the word we want to match
+                );
+    
    
+ 
+
     Both zero-width positive and zero-width negative lookahead
+assertions (?=pattern) and (?!pattern) are supported with the same
+syntax as Perl. Perl's lookbehind assertions, "independent"
+subexpressions and conditional expressions are not supported.
+
     Non-capturing parentheses are also supported, with the same
+(?:pattern) syntax.
+
     See TQStringList::split() and TQStringList::join() for equivalents
+to Perl's split and join functions.
+
     Note: because C++ transforms \'s they must be written twice in
+code, e.g. \b must be written \\b.
+
     
+
     Code Examples
+
    
+
     
    +    TQRegExp rx( "^\\d\\d?$" );  // match integers 0 to 99
+    rx.search( "123" );         // returns -1 (no match)
+    rx.search( "-6" );          // returns -1 (no match)
+    rx.search( "6" );           // returns 0 (matched as position 0)
+    
    
+ 
+
     The third string matches '6'. This is a simple validation
+regexp for integers in the range 0 to 99.
+
     
    +    TQRegExp rx( "^\\S+$" );     // match strings without whitespace
+    rx.search( "Hello world" ); // returns -1 (no match)
+    rx.search( "This_is-OK" );  // returns 0 (matched at position 0)
+    
    
+ 
+
     The second string matches 'This_is-OK'. We've used the
+character set abbreviation '\S' (non-whitespace) and the anchors
+to match strings which contain no whitespace.
+
     In the following example we match strings containing 'mail' or
+'letter' or 'correspondence' but only match whole words i.e. not
+'email'
+
     
    +    TQRegExp rx( "\\b(mail|letter|correspondence)\\b" );
+    rx.search( "I sent you an email" );     // returns -1 (no match)
+    rx.search( "Please write the letter" ); // returns 17
+    
    
+ 
+
     The second string matches "Please write the letter". The
+word 'letter' is also captured (because of the parentheses). We
+can see what text we've captured like this:
+
     
    +    TQString captured = rx.cap( 1 ); // captured == "letter"
+    
    
+ 
+
     This will capture the text from the first set of capturing
+parentheses (counting capturing left parentheses from left to
+right). The parentheses are counted from 1 since cap( 0 ) is the
+whole matched regexp (equivalent to '&' in most regexp engines).
+
     
    +    TQRegExp rx( "&(?!amp;)" );      // match ampersands but not &amp;
+    TQString line1 = "This & that";
+    line1.replace( rx, "&amp;" );
+    // line1 == "This &amp; that"
+    TQString line2 = "His &amp; hers & theirs";
+    line2.replace( rx, "&amp;" );
+    // line2 == "His &amp; hers &amp; theirs"
+    
    
+ 
+
     Here we've passed the TQRegExp to TQString's replace() function to
+replace the matched text with new text.
+
     
    +    TQString str = "One Eric another Eirik, and an Ericsson."
+                    " How many Eiriks, Eric?";
+    TQRegExp rx( "\\b(Eric|Eirik)\\b" ); // match Eric or Eirik
+    int pos = 0;    // where we are in the string
+    int count = 0;  // how many Eric and Eirik's we've counted
+    while ( pos >= 0 ) {
+        pos = rx.search( str, pos );
+        if ( pos >= 0 ) {
+            pos++;      // move along in str
+            count++;    // count our Eric or Eirik
+        }
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     We've used the search() function to repeatedly match the regexp in
+the string. Note that instead of moving forward by one character
+at a time pos++ we could have written pos += rx.matchedLength() to skip over the already matched string. The
+count will equal 3, matching 'One Eric another
+Eirik, and an Ericsson. How many Eiriks, Eric?'; it
+doesn't match 'Ericsson' or 'Eiriks' because they are not bounded
+by non-word boundaries.
+
     One common use of regexps is to split lines of delimited data into
+their component fields.
+
     
    +    str = "Trolltech AS\twww.trolltech.com\tNorway";
+    TQString company, web, country;
+    rx.setPattern( "^([^\t]+)\t([^\t]+)\t([^\t]+)$" );
+    if ( rx.search( str ) != -1 ) {
+        company = rx.cap( 1 );
+        web = rx.cap( 2 );
+        country = rx.cap( 3 );
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     In this example our input lines have the format company name, web
+address and country. Unfortunately the regexp is rather long and
+not very versatile -- the code will break if we add any more
+fields. A simpler and better solution is to look for the
+separator, '\t' in this case, and take the surrounding text. The
+TQStringList split() function can take a separator string or regexp
+as an argument and split a string accordingly.
+
     
    +    TQStringList field = TQStringList::split( "\t", str );
+    
    
+ 
+
     Here field[0] is the company, field[1] the web address and so on.
+
     To imitate the matching of a shell we can use wildcard mode.
+
     
    +    TQRegExp rx( "*.html" );         // invalid regexp: * doesn't quantify anything
+    rx.setWildcard( TRUE );         // now it's a valid wildcard regexp
+    rx.exactMatch( "index.html" );  // returns TRUE
+    rx.exactMatch( "default.htm" ); // returns FALSE
+    rx.exactMatch( "readme.txt" );  // returns FALSE
+    
    
+ 
+
     Wildcard matching can be convenient because of its simplicity, but
+any wildcard regexp can be defined using full regexps, e.g.
+.*\.html$. Notice that we can't match both .html and .htm files with a wildcard unless we use *.htm* which will
+also match 'test.html.bak'. A full regexp gives us the precision
+we need, .*\.html?$.
+
     TQRegExp can match case insensitively using setCaseSensitive(), and
+can use non-greedy matching, see setMinimal(). By default TQRegExp
+uses full regexps but this can be changed with setWildcard().
+Searching can be forward with search() or backward with
+searchRev(). Captured text can be accessed using capturedTexts()
+which returns a string list of all captured strings, or using
+cap() which returns the captured string for the given index. The
+pos() function takes a match index and returns the position in the
+string where the match was made (or -1 if there was no match).
+
     
    See also TQRegExpValidator, TQString, TQStringList, Miscellaneous Classes, Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
+
     
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQRegExp::CaretMode
    
+
+
     The CaretMode enum defines the different meanings of the caret
+(^) in a regular expression. The possible values are:
+
      
+
    • TQRegExp::CaretAtZero - 
+The caret corresponds to index 0 in the searched string.
+
    • TQRegExp::CaretAtOffset - 
+The caret corresponds to the start offset of the search.
+
    • TQRegExp::CaretWontMatch - 
+The caret never matches.
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQRegExp::TQRegExp ()
+
    
+Constructs an empty regexp.
+
     
    See also isValid() and errorString().
+
+
    TQRegExp::TQRegExp ( const TQString & pattern, bool caseSensitive = TRUE, bool wildcard = FALSE )
+
    
+Constructs a regular expression object for the given pattern
+string. The pattern must be given using wildcard notation if wildcard is TRUE (default is FALSE). The pattern is case
+sensitive, unless caseSensitive is FALSE. Matching is greedy
+(maximal), but can be changed by calling setMinimal().
+
     
    See also setPattern(), setCaseSensitive(), setWildcard(), and setMinimal().
+
+
    TQRegExp::TQRegExp ( const TQRegExp & rx )
+
    
+Constructs a regular expression as a copy of rx.
+
     
    See also operator=().
+
+
    TQRegExp::~TQRegExp ()
+
    
+Destroys the regular expression and cleans up its internal data.
+
+
    TQString TQRegExp::cap ( int nth = 0 )
+
    
+Returns the text captured by the nth subexpression. The entire
+match has index 0 and the parenthesized subexpressions have
+indices starting from 1 (excluding non-capturing parentheses).
+
     
    +    TQRegExp rxlen( "(\\d+)(?:\\s*)(cm|inch)" );
+    int pos = rxlen.search( "Length: 189cm" );
+    if ( pos > -1 ) {
+        TQString value = rxlen.cap( 1 ); // "189"
+        TQString unit = rxlen.cap( 2 );  // "cm"
+        // ...
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     The order of elements matched by cap() is as follows. The first
+element, cap(0), is the entire matching string. Each subsequent
+element corresponds to the next capturing open left parentheses.
+Thus cap(1) is the text of the first capturing parentheses, cap(2)
+is the text of the second, and so on.
+
     
+Some patterns may lead to a number of matches which cannot be
+determined in advance, for example:
+
     
    +    TQRegExp rx( "(\\d+)" );
+    str = "Offsets: 12 14 99 231 7";
+    TQStringList list;
+    pos = 0;
+    while ( pos >= 0 ) {
+        pos = rx.search( str, pos );
+        if ( pos > -1 ) {
+            list += rx.cap( 1 );
+            pos  += rx.matchedLength();
+        }
+    }
+    // list contains "12", "14", "99", "231", "7"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also capturedTexts(), pos(), exactMatch(), search(), and searchRev().
+
+
    Examples: network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h and regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
+
    TQStringList TQRegExp::capturedTexts ()
+
    
+Returns a list of the captured text strings.
+
     The first string in the list is the entire matched string. Each
+subsequent list element contains a string that matched a
+(capturing) subexpression of the regexp.
+
     For example:
+
    +        TQRegExp rx( "(\\d+)(\\s*)(cm|inch(es)?)" );
+        int pos = rx.search( "Length: 36 inches" );
+        TQStringList list = rx.capturedTexts();
+        // list is now ( "36 inches", "36", " ", "inches", "es" )
+    
    
+ 
+
     The above example also captures elements that may be present but
+which we have no interest in. This problem can be solved by using
+non-capturing parentheses:
+
     
    +        TQRegExp rx( "(\\d+)(?:\\s*)(cm|inch(?:es)?)" );
+        int pos = rx.search( "Length: 36 inches" );
+        TQStringList list = rx.capturedTexts();
+        // list is now ( "36 inches", "36", "inches" )
+    
    
+ 
+
     Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
+over a copy, e.g.
+
    +        TQStringList list = rx.capturedTexts();
+        TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
+        while( it != list.end() ) {
+            myProcessing( *it );
+            ++it;
+        }
+    
    
+ 
+
     Some regexps can match an indeterminate number of times. For
+example if the input string is "Offsets: 12 14 99 231 7" and the
+regexp, rx, is (\d+)+, we would hope to get a list of
+all the numbers matched. However, after calling
+rx.search(str), capturedTexts() will return the list ( "12",
+"12" ), i.e. the entire match was "12" and the first subexpression
+matched was "12". The correct approach is to use cap() in a loop.
+
     The order of elements in the string list is as follows. The first
+element is the entire matching string. Each subsequent element
+corresponds to the next capturing open left parentheses. Thus
+capturedTexts()[1] is the text of the first capturing parentheses,
+capturedTexts()[2] is the text of the second and so on
+(corresponding to $1, $2, etc., in some other regexp languages).
+
     
    See also cap(), pos(), exactMatch(), search(), and searchRev().
+
+
    bool TQRegExp::caseSensitive () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if case sensitivity is enabled; otherwise returns
+FALSE. The default is TRUE.
+
     
    See also setCaseSensitive().
+
+
    TQString TQRegExp::errorString ()
+
    
+Returns a text string that explains why a regexp pattern is
+invalid the case being; otherwise returns "no error occurred".
+
     
    See also isValid().
+
+
    Example: regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
+
    TQString TQRegExp::escape ( const TQString & str ) [static]
+
    
+Returns the string str with every regexp special character
+escaped with a backslash. The special characters are $, (, ), *, +,
+., ?, [, \, ], ^, {, | and }.
+
     Example:
+
    +     s1 = TQRegExp::escape( "bingo" );   // s1 == "bingo"
+     s2 = TQRegExp::escape( "f(x)" );    // s2 == "f\\(x\\)"
+  
    
+ 
+
     This function is useful to construct regexp patterns dynamically:
+
     
    +    TQRegExp rx( "(" + TQRegExp::escape(name) +
+                "|" + TQRegExp::escape(alias) + ")" );
+  
    
+ 
+
+
    bool TQRegExp::exactMatch ( const TQString & str ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if str is matched exactly by this regular expression; otherwise returns FALSE. You can determine how much of
+the string was matched by calling matchedLength().
+
     For a given regexp string, R, exactMatch("R") is the equivalent of
+search("^R$") since exactMatch() effectively encloses the regexp
+in the start of string and end of string anchors, except that it
+sets matchedLength() differently.
+
     For example, if the regular expression is blue, then
+exactMatch() returns TRUE only for input blue. For inputs bluebell, blutak and lightblue, exactMatch() returns FALSE
+and matchedLength() will return 4, 3 and 0 respectively.
+
     Although const, this function sets matchedLength(),
+capturedTexts() and pos().
+
     
    See also search(), searchRev(), and TQRegExpValidator.
+
+
    bool TQRegExp::isEmpty () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the pattern string is empty; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     If you call exactMatch() with an empty pattern on an empty string
+it will return TRUE; otherwise it returns FALSE since it operates
+over the whole string. If you call search() with an empty pattern
+on any string it will return the start offset (0 by default)
+because the empty pattern matches the 'emptiness' at the start of
+the string. In this case the length of the match returned by
+matchedLength() will be 0.
+
     See TQString::isEmpty().
+
+
    bool TQRegExp::isValid () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the regular expression is valid; otherwise returns
+FALSE. An invalid regular expression never matches.
+
     The pattern [a-z is an example of an invalid pattern, since
+it lacks a closing square bracket.
+
     Note that the validity of a regexp may also depend on the setting
+of the wildcard flag, for example *.html is a valid
+wildcard regexp but an invalid full regexp.
+
     
    See also errorString().
+
+
    Example: regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
+
    int TQRegExp::match ( const TQString & str, int index = 0, int * len = 0, bool indexIsStart = TRUE ) const
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Attempts to match in str, starting from position index.
+Returns the position of the match, or -1 if there was no match.
+
     The length of the match is stored in *len, unless len is a
+null pointer.
+
     If indexIsStart is TRUE (the default), the position index in
+the string will match the start of string anchor, ^, in the
+regexp, if present. Otherwise, position 0 in str will match.
+
     Use search() and matchedLength() instead of this function.
+
     
    See also TQString::mid() and TQConstString.
+
+
    Example: qmag/qmag.cpp.
+
    int TQRegExp::matchedLength () const
+
    
+Returns the length of the last matched string, or -1 if there was
+no match.
+
     
    See also exactMatch(), search(), and searchRev().
+
+
    Examples: network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h and regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
+
    bool TQRegExp::minimal () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if minimal (non-greedy) matching is enabled;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setMinimal().
+
+
    int TQRegExp::numCaptures () const
+
    
+Returns the number of captures contained in the regular expression.
+
+
    Example: regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
+
    bool TQRegExp::operator!= ( const TQRegExp & rx ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if this regular expression is not equal to rx;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also operator==().
+
+
    TQRegExp & TQRegExp::operator= ( const TQRegExp & rx )
+
    
+Copies the regular expression rx and returns a reference to the
+copy. The case sensitivity, wildcard and minimal matching options
+are also copied.
+
+
    bool TQRegExp::operator== ( const TQRegExp & rx ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this regular expression is equal to rx;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     Two TQRegExp objects are equal if they have the same pattern
+strings and the same settings for case sensitivity, wildcard and
+minimal matching.
+
+
    TQString TQRegExp::pattern () const
+
    
+Returns the pattern string of the regular expression. The pattern
+has either regular expression syntax or wildcard syntax, depending
+on wildcard().
+
     
    See also setPattern().
+
+
    int TQRegExp::pos ( int nth = 0 )
+
    
+Returns the position of the nth captured text in the searched
+string. If nth is 0 (the default), pos() returns the position
+of the whole match.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQRegExp rx( "/([a-z]+)/([a-z]+)" );
+    rx.search( "Output /dev/null" );    // returns 7 (position of /dev/null)
+    rx.pos( 0 );                        // returns 7 (position of /dev/null)
+    rx.pos( 1 );                        // returns 8 (position of dev)
+    rx.pos( 2 );                        // returns 12 (position of null)
+    
    
+ 
+
     For zero-length matches, pos() always returns -1. (For example, if
+cap(4) would return an empty string, pos(4) returns -1.) This is
+due to an implementation tradeoff.
+
     
    See also capturedTexts(), exactMatch(), search(), and searchRev().
+
+
    int TQRegExp::search ( const TQString & str, int offset = 0, CaretMode caretMode = CaretAtZero ) const
+
    
+Attempts to find a match in str from position offset (0 by
+default). If offset is -1, the search starts at the last
+character; if -2, at the next to last character; etc.
+
     Returns the position of the first match, or -1 if there was no
+match.
+
     The caretMode parameter can be used to instruct whether ^
+should match at index 0 or at offset.
+
     You might prefer to use TQString::find(), TQString::contains() or
+even TQStringList::grep(). To replace matches use
+TQString::replace().
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQString str = "offsets: 1.23 .50 71.00 6.00";
+        TQRegExp rx( "\\d*\\.\\d+" );    // primitive floating point matching
+        int count = 0;
+        int pos = 0;
+        while ( (pos = rx.search(str, pos)) != -1 ) {
+            count++;
+            pos += rx.matchedLength();
+        }
+        // pos will be 9, 14, 18 and finally 24; count will end up as 4
+    
    
+ 
+
     Although const, this function sets matchedLength(),
+capturedTexts() and pos().
+
     
    See also searchRev() and exactMatch().
+
+
    Examples: network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h and regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
+
    int TQRegExp::searchRev ( const TQString & str, int offset = -1, CaretMode caretMode = CaretAtZero ) const
+
    
+Attempts to find a match backwards in str from position offset. If offset is -1 (the default), the search starts at the
+last character; if -2, at the next to last character; etc.
+
     Returns the position of the first match, or -1 if there was no
+match.
+
     The caretMode parameter can be used to instruct whether ^
+should match at index 0 or at offset.
+
     Although const, this function sets matchedLength(),
+capturedTexts() and pos().
+
     Warning: Searching backwards is much slower than searching
+forwards.
+
     
    See also search() and exactMatch().
+
+
    void TQRegExp::setCaseSensitive ( bool sensitive )
+
    
+Sets case sensitive matching to sensitive.
+
     If sensitive is TRUE, \.txt$ matches readme.txt but
+not README.TXT.
+
     
    See also caseSensitive().
+
+
    Example: regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
+
    void TQRegExp::setMinimal ( bool minimal )
+
    
+Enables or disables minimal matching. If minimal is FALSE,
+matching is greedy (maximal) which is the default.
+
     For example, suppose we have the input string "We must be
+<b>bold</b>, very <b>bold</b>!" and the pattern
+<b>.*</b>. With the default greedy (maximal) matching,
+the match is "We must be <b>bold</b>, very
+<b>bold</b>!". But with minimal (non-greedy) matching the
+first match is: "We must be <b>bold</b>, very
+<b>bold</b>!" and the second match is "We must be <b>bold</b>,
+very <b>bold</b>!". In practice we might use the pattern
+<b>[^<]+</b> instead, although this will still fail for
+nested tags.
+
     
    See also minimal().
+
+
    Examples: network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h and regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
+
    void TQRegExp::setPattern ( const TQString & pattern )
+
    
+Sets the pattern string to pattern. The case sensitivity,
+wildcard and minimal matching options are not changed.
+
     
    See also pattern().
+
+
    void TQRegExp::setWildcard ( bool wildcard )
+
    
+Sets the wildcard mode for the regular expression. The default is
+FALSE.
+
     Setting wildcard to TRUE enables simple shell-like wildcard
+matching. (See wildcard matching
+    (globbing).)
+
     For example, r*.txt matches the string readme.txt in
+wildcard mode, but does not match readme.
+
     
    See also wildcard().
+
+
    Example: regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
+
    bool TQRegExp::wildcard () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if wildcard mode is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+The default is FALSE.
+
     
    See also setWildcard().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqregion.html b/doc/html/ntqregion.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d83c20ccd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqregion.html
@@ -0,0 +1,364 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQRegion Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQRegion Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQRegion class specifies a clip region for a painter.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqregion.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • enum RegionType { Rectangle, Ellipse }
      • 
+
    • TQRegion ()
      • 
+
    • TQRegion ( int x, int y, int w, int h, RegionType t = Rectangle )
      • 
+
    • TQRegion ( const TQRect & r, RegionType t = Rectangle )
      • 
+
    • TQRegion ( const TQPointArray & a, bool winding = FALSE )
      • 
+
    • TQRegion ( const TQRegion & r )
      • 
+
    • TQRegion ( const TQBitmap & bm )
      • 
+
    • ~TQRegion ()
      • 
+
    • TQRegion & operator= ( const TQRegion & r )
      • 
+
    • bool isNull () const
      • 
+
    • bool isEmpty () const
      • 
+
    • bool contains ( const TQPoint & p ) const
      • 
+
    • bool contains ( const TQRect & r ) const
      • 
+
    • void translate ( int dx, int dy )
      • 
+
    • TQRegion unite ( const TQRegion & r ) const
      • 
+
    • TQRegion intersect ( const TQRegion & r ) const
      • 
+
    • TQRegion subtract ( const TQRegion & r ) const
      • 
+
    • TQRegion eor ( const TQRegion & r ) const
      • 
+
    • TQRect boundingRect () const
      • 
+
    • TQMemArray<TQRect> rects () const
      • 
+
    • const TQRegion operator| ( const TQRegion & r ) const
      • 
+
    • const TQRegion operator+ ( const TQRegion & r ) const
      • 
+
    • const TQRegion operator& ( const TQRegion & r ) const
      • 
+
    • const TQRegion operator- ( const TQRegion & r ) const
      • 
+
    • const TQRegion operator^ ( const TQRegion & r ) const
      • 
+
    • TQRegion & operator|= ( const TQRegion & r )
      • 
+
    • TQRegion & operator+= ( const TQRegion & r )
      • 
+
    • TQRegion & operator&= ( const TQRegion & r )
      • 
+
    • TQRegion & operator-= ( const TQRegion & r )
      • 
+
    • TQRegion & operator^= ( const TQRegion & r )
      • 
+
    • bool operator== ( const TQRegion & r ) const
      • 
+
    • bool operator!= ( const TQRegion & r ) const
      • 
+
    • HRGN handle () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Related Functions
    
+
      
+
    • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQRegion & r )
      • 
+
    • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQRegion & r )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQRegion class specifies a clip region for a painter.
+
     
+
+
     TQRegion is used with TQPainter::setClipRegion() to limit the paint
+area to what needs to be painted. There is also a
+TQWidget::repaint() that takes a TQRegion parameter. TQRegion is the
+best tool for reducing flicker.
+
     A region can be created from a rectangle, an ellipse, a polygon or
+a bitmap. Complex regions may be created by combining simple
+regions using unite(), intersect(), subtract() or eor() (exclusive
+or). You can move a region using translate().
+
     You can test whether a region isNull(), isEmpty() or if it
+contains() a TQPoint or TQRect. The bounding rectangle is given by
+boundingRect().
+
     The function rects() gives a decomposition of the region into
+rectangles.
+
     Example of using complex regions:
+
    +        void MyWidget::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
+        {
+            TQPainter p;                         // our painter
+            TQRegion r1( TQRect(100,100,200,80),  // r1 = elliptic region
+                        TQRegion::Ellipse );
+            TQRegion r2( TQRect(100,120,90,30) ); // r2 = rectangular region
+            TQRegion r3 = r1.intersect( r2 );    // r3 = intersection
+            p.begin( this );                    // start painting widget
+            p.setClipRegion( r3 );              // set clip region
+            ...                                 // paint clipped graphics
+            p.end();                            // painting done
+        }
+    
    
+ 
+
     TQRegion is an implicitly shared class.
+
     Warning: Due to window system limitations, the whole coordinate
+space for a region is limited to the points between -32767 and
+32767 on Mac OS X and Windows 95/98/ME.
+
     
    See also TQPainter::setClipRegion(), TQPainter::setClipRect(), Graphics Classes, and Image Processing Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQRegion::RegionType
    
+
+
     Specifies the shape of the region to be created.
+
      
+
    • TQRegion::Rectangle - the region covers the entire rectangle.
+
    • TQRegion::Ellipse - the region is an ellipse inside the rectangle.
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQRegion::TQRegion ()
+
    
+Constructs a null region.
+
     
    See also isNull().
+
+
    TQRegion::TQRegion ( int x, int y, int w, int h, RegionType t = Rectangle )
+
    
+Constructs a rectangular or elliptic region.
+
     If t is Rectangle, the region is the filled rectangle (x,
+y, w, h). If t is Ellipse, the region is the filled
+ellipse with center at (x + w / 2, y + h / 2) and size
+(w ,h ).
+
+
    TQRegion::TQRegion ( const TQRect & r, RegionType t = Rectangle )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Create a region based on the rectange r with region type t.
+
     If the rectangle is invalid a null region will be created.
+
     
    See also TQRegion::RegionType.
+
+
    TQRegion::TQRegion ( const TQPointArray & a, bool winding = FALSE )
+
    
+Constructs a polygon region from the point array a.
+
     If winding is TRUE, the polygon region is filled using the
+winding algorithm, otherwise the default even-odd fill algorithm
+is used.
+
     This constructor may create complex regions that will slow down
+painting when used.
+
+
    TQRegion::TQRegion ( const TQRegion & r )
+
    
+Constructs a new region which is equal to region r.
+
+
    TQRegion::TQRegion ( const TQBitmap & bm )
+
    
+Constructs a region from the bitmap bm.
+
     The resulting region consists of the pixels in bitmap bm that
+are color1, as if each pixel was a 1 by 1 rectangle.
+
     This constructor may create complex regions that will slow down
+painting when used. Note that drawing masked pixmaps can be done
+much faster using TQPixmap::setMask().
+
+
    TQRegion::~TQRegion ()
+
    
+Destroys the region.
+
+
    TQRect TQRegion::boundingRect () const
+
    
+Returns the bounding rectangle of this region. An empty region
+gives a rectangle that is TQRect::isNull().
+
+
    bool TQRegion::contains ( const TQPoint & p ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the region contains the point p; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQRegion::contains ( const TQRect & r ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns TRUE if the region overlaps the rectangle r; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
+
    TQRegion TQRegion::eor ( const TQRegion & r ) const
+
    
+Returns a region which is the exclusive or (XOR) of this region
+and r.
+
     
    Region XORed
     
+
     The figure shows the exclusive or of two elliptical regions.
+
+
    HRGN TQRegion::handle () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the region's handle.
+
+
    TQRegion TQRegion::intersect ( const TQRegion & r ) const
+
    
+Returns a region which is the intersection of this region and r.
+
     
    Region Intersection
     
+
     The figure shows the intersection of two elliptical regions.
+
+
    bool TQRegion::isEmpty () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the region is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. An
+empty region is a region that contains no points.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQRegion r1( 10, 10, 20, 20 );
+        TQRegion r2( 40, 40, 20, 20 );
+        TQRegion r3;
+        r1.isNull();             // FALSE
+        r1.isEmpty();            // FALSE
+        r3.isNull();             // TRUE
+        r3.isEmpty();            // TRUE
+        r3 = r1.intersect( r2 ); // r3 = intersection of r1 and r2
+        r3.isNull();             // FALSE
+        r3.isEmpty();            // TRUE
+        r3 = r1.unite( r2 );     // r3 = union of r1 and r2
+        r3.isNull();             // FALSE
+        r3.isEmpty();            // FALSE
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also isNull().
+
+
    bool TQRegion::isNull () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the region is a null region; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     A null region is a region that has not been initialized. A null
+region is always empty.
+
     
    See also isEmpty().
+
+
    bool TQRegion::operator!= ( const TQRegion & r ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the region is different from r; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
+
    const TQRegion TQRegion::operator& ( const TQRegion & r ) const
+
    
+Applies the intersect() function to this region and r. r1&r2
+is equivalent to r1.intersect(r2)
+
     
    See also intersect().
+
+
    TQRegion & TQRegion::operator&= ( const TQRegion & r )
+
    
+Applies the intersect() function to this region and r and
+assigns the result to this region. r1&=r2 is equivalent to r1=r1.intersect(r2)
+
     
    See also intersect().
+
+
    const TQRegion TQRegion::operator+ ( const TQRegion & r ) const
+
    
+Applies the unite() function to this region and r. r1+r2 is
+equivalent to r1.unite(r2)
+
     
    See also unite() and operator|().
+
+
    TQRegion & TQRegion::operator+= ( const TQRegion & r )
+
    
+Applies the unite() function to this region and r and assigns
+the result to this region. r1+=r2 is equivalent to r1=r1.unite(r2)
+
     
    See also intersect().
+
+
    const TQRegion TQRegion::operator- ( const TQRegion & r ) const
+
    
+Applies the subtract() function to this region and r. r1-r2
+is equivalent to r1.subtract(r2)
+
     
    See also subtract().
+
+
    TQRegion & TQRegion::operator-= ( const TQRegion & r )
+
    
+Applies the subtract() function to this region and r and
+assigns the result to this region. r1-=r2 is equivalent to r1=r1.subtract(r2)
+
     
    See also subtract().
+
+
    TQRegion & TQRegion::operator= ( const TQRegion & r )
+
    
+Assigns r to this region and returns a reference to the region.
+
+
    bool TQRegion::operator== ( const TQRegion & r ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the region is equal to r; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
+
    const TQRegion TQRegion::operator^ ( const TQRegion & r ) const
+
    
+Applies the eor() function to this region and r. r1^r2 is
+equivalent to r1.eor(r2)
+
     
    See also eor().
+
+
    TQRegion & TQRegion::operator^= ( const TQRegion & r )
+
    
+Applies the eor() function to this region and r and
+assigns the result to this region. r1^=r2 is equivalent to r1=r1.eor(r2)
+
     
    See also eor().
+
+
    const TQRegion TQRegion::operator| ( const TQRegion & r ) const
+
    
+Applies the unite() function to this region and r. r1|r2 is
+equivalent to r1.unite(r2)
+
     
    See also unite() and operator+().
+
+
    TQRegion & TQRegion::operator|= ( const TQRegion & r )
+
    
+Applies the unite() function to this region and r and assigns
+the result to this region. r1|=r2 is equivalent to r1=r1.unite(r2)
+
     
    See also unite().
+
+
    TQMemArray<TQRect> TQRegion::rects () const
+
    
+Returns an array of non-overlapping rectangles that make up the
+region.
+
     The union of all the rectangles is equal to the original region.
+
+
    TQRegion TQRegion::subtract ( const TQRegion & r ) const
+
    
+Returns a region which is r subtracted from this region.
+
     
    Region Subtraction
     
+
     The figure shows the result when the ellipse on the right is
+subtracted from the ellipse on the left. (left-right )
+
+
    void TQRegion::translate ( int dx, int dy )
+
    
+Translates (moves) the region dx along the X axis and dy
+along the Y axis.
+
+
    TQRegion TQRegion::unite ( const TQRegion & r ) const
+
    
+Returns a region which is the union of this region and r.
+
     
    Region Union
     
+
     The figure shows the union of two elliptical regions.
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQRegion & r )
+
    
+
+
     Writes the region r to the stream s and returns a reference
+to the stream.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQRegion & r )
+
    
+
+
     Reads a region from the stream s into r and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqscrollbar.html b/doc/html/ntqscrollbar.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a7ecca4b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqscrollbar.html
@@ -0,0 +1,382 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQScrollBar Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQScrollBar Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQScrollBar widget provides a vertical or horizontal scroll bar.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqscrollbar.h>
+
    Inherits TQWidget and TQRangeControl.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • bool draggingSlider - whether the user has clicked the mouse on the slider and is currently dragging it  (read only)
      • 
+
    • int lineStep - the line step
      • 
+
    • int maxValue - the scroll bar's maximum value
      • 
+
    • int minValue - the scroll bar's minimum value
      • 
+
    • Orientation orientation - the orientation of the scroll bar
      • 
+
    • int pageStep - the page step
      • 
+
    • bool tracking - whether scroll bar tracking is enabled
      • 
+
    • int value - the scroll bar's value
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQScrollBar widget provides a vertical or horizontal scroll bar.
+
     
+
     A scroll bar allows the user to control a value within a
+program-definable range and gives users a visible indication of
+the current value of a range control.
+
     Scroll bars include four separate controls:
+
     
      
+
       
    •  The line-up and line-down controls are little buttons
+which the user can use to move one "line" up or down. The meaning
+of line is configurable. In editors and list boxes it means one
+line of text; in an image viewer it might mean 20 pixels.
+
       
    •  The slider is the handle that indicates the current value of
+the scroll bar, which the user can drag to change the value. This
+part of the scroll bar is sometimes called the "thumb".
+
       
    •  The page-up/page-down control is the area on which the
+slider slides (the scroll bar's background). Clicking here moves
+the scroll bar towards the click. The meaning of "page" is also
+configurable: in editors and list boxes it means as many lines as
+there is space for in the widget.
+
       
    
+
     TQScrollBar has very few of its own functions; it mostly relies on
+TQRangeControl. The most useful functions are setValue() to set the
+scroll bar directly to some value; addPage(), addLine(),
+subtractPage(), and subtractLine() to simulate the effects of
+clicking (useful for accelerator keys); setSteps() to define the
+values of pageStep() and lineStep(); and setRange() to set the
+minValue() and maxValue() of the scroll bar. TQScrollBar has a
+convenience constructor with which you can set most of these
+properties.
+
     Some GUI styles (for example, the Windows and Motif styles
+provided with TQt), also use the pageStep() value to calculate the
+size of the slider.
+
     In addition to the access functions from TQRangeControl, TQScrollBar
+provides a comprehensive set of signals:
+
    
+
     Signal Emitted when
+
     valueChanged()
+the scroll bar's value has changed. The tracking()
+determines whether this signal is emitted during user
+interaction.
+
     sliderPressed()
+the user starts to drag the slider.
+
     sliderMoved()
+the user drags the slider.
+
     sliderReleased()
+the user releases the slider.
+
     nextLine()
+the scroll bar has moved one line down or right. Line is
+defined in TQRangeControl.
+
     prevLine()
+the scroll bar has moved one line up or left.
+
     nextPage()
+the scroll bar has moved one page down or right.
+
     prevPage()
+the scroll bar has moved one page up or left.
+
    
+
     TQScrollBar only provides integer ranges. Note that although
+TQScrollBar handles very large numbers, scroll bars on current
+screens cannot usefully control ranges above about 100,000 pixels.
+Beyond that, it becomes difficult for the user to control the
+scroll bar using either the keyboard or the mouse.
+
     A scroll bar can be controlled by the keyboard, but it has a
+default focusPolicy() of NoFocus. Use setFocusPolicy() to
+enable keyboard focus. See keyPressEvent() for a list of key
+bindings.
+
     If you need to add scroll bars to an interface, consider using the
+TQScrollView class, which encapsulates the common uses for scroll
+bars.
+
      
+
     
    See also TQSlider, TQSpinBox, TQScrollView, GUI Design Handbook: Scroll Bar, and Basic Widgets.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQScrollBar::TQScrollBar ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a vertical scroll bar.
+
     The parent and name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
     The minValue defaults to 0, the maxValue to 99, with a lineStep size of 1 and a pageStep size of 10, and an initial
+value of 0.
+
+
    TQScrollBar::TQScrollBar ( Orientation orientation, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a scroll bar.
+
     The orientation must be TQt::Vertical or TQt::Horizontal.
+
     The parent and name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
     The minValue defaults to 0, the maxValue to 99, with a lineStep size of 1 and a pageStep size of 10, and an initial
+value of 0.
+
+
    TQScrollBar::TQScrollBar ( int minValue, int maxValue, int lineStep, int pageStep, int value, Orientation orientation, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a scroll bar whose value can never be smaller than minValue or greater than maxValue, whose line step size is lineStep and page step size is pageStep and whose value is
+initially value (which is guaranteed to be in range using
+bound()).
+
     If orientation is Vertical the scroll bar is vertical and if
+it is Horizontal the scroll bar is horizontal.
+
     The parent and name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
+
    TQScrollBar::~TQScrollBar ()
+
    
+Destructor.
+
+
    bool TQScrollBar::draggingSlider () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the user has clicked the mouse on the slider and is currently dragging it; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "draggingSlider" property for details.
+
    void TQScrollBar::hideEvent ( TQHideEvent * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This function is called when the scrollbar is hidden.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
+
    int TQScrollBar::lineStep () const
+
    Returns the line step.
+See the "lineStep" property for details.
+
    int TQScrollBar::maxValue () const
+
    Returns the scroll bar's maximum value.
+See the "maxValue" property for details.
+
    int TQScrollBar::minValue () const
+
    Returns the scroll bar's minimum value.
+See the "minValue" property for details.
+
    void TQScrollBar::nextLine () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the scroll bar scrolls one line down
+or right.
+
+
    void TQScrollBar::nextPage () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the scroll bar scrolls one page down
+or right.
+
+
    Orientation TQScrollBar::orientation () const
+
    Returns the orientation of the scroll bar.
+See the "orientation" property for details.
+
    int TQScrollBar::pageStep () const
+
    Returns the page step.
+See the "pageStep" property for details.
+
    void TQScrollBar::prevLine () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the scroll bar scrolls one line up or
+left.
+
+
    void TQScrollBar::prevPage () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the scroll bar scrolls one page up or
+left.
+
+
    void TQScrollBar::setLineStep ( int )
+
    Sets the line step.
+See the "lineStep" property for details.
+
    void TQScrollBar::setMaxValue ( int )
+
    Sets the scroll bar's maximum value.
+See the "maxValue" property for details.
+
    void TQScrollBar::setMinValue ( int )
+
    Sets the scroll bar's minimum value.
+See the "minValue" property for details.
+
    void TQScrollBar::setOrientation ( Orientation ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the orientation of the scroll bar.
+See the "orientation" property for details.
+
    void TQScrollBar::setPageStep ( int )
+
    Sets the page step.
+See the "pageStep" property for details.
+
    void TQScrollBar::setPalette ( const TQPalette & p ) [virtual]
+
    
+Reimplements the virtual function TQWidget::setPalette().
+
     Sets the background color to the mid color for Motif style scroll
+bars using palette p.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
+
    void TQScrollBar::setTracking ( bool enable ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether scroll bar tracking is enabled to enable.
+See the "tracking" property for details.
+
    void TQScrollBar::setValue ( int ) [slot]
+
    Sets the scroll bar's value.
+See the "value" property for details.
+
    void TQScrollBar::sliderMoved ( int value ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the slider is dragged by the user, with
+the new scroll bar value as an argument.
+
     This signal is emitted even when tracking is turned off.
+
     
    See also tracking, valueChanged(), nextLine(), prevLine(), nextPage(), and prevPage().
+
+
    void TQScrollBar::sliderPressed () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user presses the slider with the
+mouse.
+
+
    TQRect TQScrollBar::sliderRect () const
+
    
+Returns the scroll bar slider rectangle.
+
     
    See also sliderStart().
+
+
    void TQScrollBar::sliderReleased () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user releases the slider with the
+mouse.
+
+
    int TQScrollBar::sliderStart () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the pixel position where the scroll bar slider starts.
+
     This is equivalent to sliderRect().y() for vertical scroll bars or
+sliderRect().x() for horizontal scroll bars.
+
+
    bool TQScrollBar::tracking () const
+
    Returns TRUE if scroll bar tracking is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "tracking" property for details.
+
    int TQScrollBar::value () const
+
    Returns the scroll bar's value.
+See the "value" property for details.
+
    void TQScrollBar::valueChanged ( int value ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the scroll bar value has changed, with
+the new scroll bar value as an argument.
+
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    bool draggingSlider
    
+
    This property holds whether the user has clicked the mouse on the slider and is currently dragging it.
+
    
+
    Get this property's value with draggingSlider().
+
    int lineStep
    
+
    This property holds the line step.
+
    When setting lineStep, the virtual stepChange() function will be
+called if the new line step is different from the previous
+setting.
+
     
    See also setSteps(), TQRangeControl::pageStep(), and setRange().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setLineStep() and get this property's value with lineStep().
+
    int maxValue
    
+
    This property holds the scroll bar's maximum value.
+
    When setting this property, the TQScrollBar::minValue is
+adjusted if necessary to ensure that the range remains valid.
+
     
    See also setRange().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setMaxValue() and get this property's value with maxValue().
+
    int minValue
    
+
    This property holds the scroll bar's minimum value.
+
    When setting this property, the TQScrollBar::maxValue is
+adjusted if necessary to ensure that the range remains valid.
+
     
    See also setRange().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setMinValue() and get this property's value with minValue().
+
    Orientation orientation
    
+
    This property holds the orientation of the scroll bar.
+
    The orientation must be TQt::Vertical (the default) or TQt::Horizontal.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setOrientation() and get this property's value with orientation().
+
    int pageStep
    
+
    This property holds the page step.
+
    When setting pageStep, the virtual stepChange() function will be
+called if the new page step is different from the previous
+setting.
+
     
    See also TQRangeControl::setSteps(), lineStep, and setRange().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setPageStep() and get this property's value with pageStep().
+
    bool tracking
    
+
    This property holds whether scroll bar tracking is enabled.
+
    If tracking is enabled (the default), the scroll bar emits the
+valueChanged() signal while the slider is being dragged. If
+tracking is disabled, the scroll bar emits the valueChanged()
+signal only when the user releases the mouse button after moving
+the slider.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setTracking() and get this property's value with tracking().
+
    int value
    
+
    This property holds the scroll bar's value.
+
    Set this property's value with setValue() and get this property's value with value().
+
    See also TQRangeControl::value() and prevValue().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqscrollview.html b/doc/html/ntqscrollview.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a75ad119a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqscrollview.html
@@ -0,0 +1,930 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQScrollView Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQScrollView Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQScrollView widget provides a scrolling area with on-demand scroll bars.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqscrollview.h>
+
    Inherits TQFrame.
+
    Inherited by TQCanvasView, TQTable, TQGridView, TQIconView, TQListBox, TQListView, and TQTextEdit.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • int contentsHeight - the height of the contents area  (read only)
      • 
+
    • int contentsWidth - the width of the contents area  (read only)
      • 
+
    • int contentsX - the X coordinate of the contents that are at the left edge of the viewport  (read only)
      • 
+
    • int contentsY - the Y coordinate of the contents that are at the top edge of the viewport  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool dragAutoScroll - whether autoscrolling in drag move events is enabled
      • 
+
    • ScrollBarMode hScrollBarMode - the mode for the horizontal scroll bar
      • 
+
    • ResizePolicy resizePolicy - the resize policy
      • 
+
    • ScrollBarMode vScrollBarMode - the mode for the vertical scroll bar
      • 
+
    • int visibleHeight - the vertical amount of the content that is visible  (read only)
      • 
+
    • int visibleWidth - the horizontal amount of the content that is visible  (read only)
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQScrollView widget provides a scrolling area with on-demand scroll bars.
+
     
+
+
     The TQScrollView is a large canvas - potentially larger than the
+coordinate system normally supported by the underlying window
+system. This is important because it is quite easy to go beyond
+these limitations (e.g. many web pages are more than 32000 pixels
+high). Additionally, the TQScrollView can have TQWidgets positioned
+on it that scroll around with the drawn content. These sub-widgets
+can also have positions outside the normal coordinate range (but
+they are still limited in size).
+
     To provide content for the widget, inherit from TQScrollView,
+reimplement drawContents() and use resizeContents() to set the
+size of the viewed area. Use addChild() and moveChild() to
+position widgets on the view.
+
     To use TQScrollView effectively it is important to understand its
+widget structure in the three styles of use: a single large child
+widget, a large panning area with some widgets and a large panning
+area with many widgets.
+
     
     Using One Big Widget
+
    
+
     
     
+
     The first, simplest usage of TQScrollView (depicted above), is
+appropriate for scrolling areas that are never more than about
+4000 pixels in either dimension (this is about the maximum
+reliable size on X11 servers). In this usage, you just make one
+large child in the TQScrollView. The child should be a child of the
+viewport() of the scrollview and be added with addChild():
+
    +        TQScrollView* sv = new TQScrollView(...);
+        TQVBox* big_box = new TQVBox(sv->viewport());
+        sv->addChild(big_box);
+    
    
+ 
+You can go on to add arbitrary child widgets to the single child
+in the scrollview as you would with any widget:
+
    +        TQLabel* child1 = new TQLabel("CHILD", big_box);
+        TQLabel* child2 = new TQLabel("CHILD", big_box);
+        TQLabel* child3 = new TQLabel("CHILD", big_box);
+        ...
+    
    
+ 
+
     Here the TQScrollView has four children: the viewport(), the
+verticalScrollBar(), the horizontalScrollBar() and a small
+cornerWidget(). The viewport() has one child: the big TQVBox. The
+TQVBox has the three TQLabel objects as child widgets. When the view
+is scrolled, the TQVBox is moved; its children move with it as
+child widgets normally do.
+
     
     Using a Very Big View with Some Widgets
+
    
+
     
     
+
     The second usage of TQScrollView (depicted above) is appropriate
+when few, if any, widgets are on a very large scrolling area that
+is potentially larger than 4000 pixels in either dimension. In
+this usage you call resizeContents() to set the size of the area
+and reimplement drawContents() to paint the contents. You may also
+add some widgets by making them children of the viewport() and
+adding them with addChild() (this is the same as the process for
+the single large widget in the previous example):
+
    +        TQScrollView* sv = new TQScrollView(...);
+        TQLabel* child1 = new TQLabel("CHILD", sv->viewport());
+        sv->addChild(child1);
+        TQLabel* child2 = new TQLabel("CHILD", sv->viewport());
+        sv->addChild(child2);
+        TQLabel* child3 = new TQLabel("CHILD", sv->viewport());
+        sv->addChild(child3);
+    
    
+ 
+Here, the TQScrollView has the same four children: the viewport(),
+the verticalScrollBar(), the horizontalScrollBar() and a small
+cornerWidget(). The viewport() has the three TQLabel objects as
+child widgets. When the view is scrolled, the scrollview moves the
+child widgets individually.
+
     
     Using a Very Big View with Many Widgets
+
    
+
     
+
     
+
     The final usage of TQScrollView (depicted above) is appropriate
+when many widgets are on a very large scrolling area that is
+potentially larger than 4000 pixels in either dimension. In this
+usage you call resizeContents() to set the size of the area and
+reimplement drawContents() to paint the contents. You then call
+enableClipper(TRUE) and add widgets, again by making them children
+of the viewport(), and adding them with addChild():
+
    +        TQScrollView* sv = new TQScrollView(...);
+        sv->enableClipper(TRUE);
+        TQLabel* child1 = new TQLabel("CHILD", sv->viewport());
+        sv->addChild(child1);
+        TQLabel* child2 = new TQLabel("CHILD", sv->viewport());
+        sv->addChild(child2);
+        TQLabel* child3 = new TQLabel("CHILD", sv->viewport());
+        sv->addChild(child3);
+    
    
+ 
+
     Here, the TQScrollView has four children:  the clipper() (not the
+viewport() this time), the verticalScrollBar(), the
+horizontalScrollBar() and a small cornerWidget(). The clipper()
+has one child: the viewport(). The viewport() has the same three
+labels as child widgets. When the view is scrolled the viewport()
+is moved; its children move with it as child widgets normally do.
+
     
+
     Details Relevant for All Views
+
    
+
     Normally you will use the first or third method if you want any
+child widgets in the view.
+
     Note that the widget you see in the scrolled area is the
+viewport() widget, not the TQScrollView itself. So to turn mouse
+tracking on, for example, use viewport()->setMouseTracking(TRUE).
+
     To enable drag-and-drop, you would setAcceptDrops(TRUE) on the
+TQScrollView (because drag-and-drop events propagate to the
+parent). But to work out the logical position in the view, you
+would need to map the drop co-ordinate from being relative to the
+TQScrollView to being relative to the contents; use the function
+viewportToContents() for this.
+
     To handle mouse events on the scrolling area, subclass scrollview
+as you would subclass other widgets, but rather than
+reimplementing mousePressEvent(), reimplement
+contentsMousePressEvent() instead. The contents specific event
+handlers provide translated events in the coordinate system of the
+scrollview. If you reimplement mousePressEvent(), you'll get
+called only when part of the TQScrollView is clicked: and the only
+such part is the "corner" (if you don't set a cornerWidget()) and
+the frame; everything else is covered up by the viewport, clipper
+or scroll bars.
+
     When you construct a TQScrollView, some of the widget flags apply
+to the viewport() instead of being sent to the TQWidget constructor
+for the TQScrollView. This applies to WNoAutoErase, WStaticContents, and WPaintClever. See TQt::WidgetFlags for
+documentation about these flags. Here are some examples:
+
     
      
+
       
    •  An image-manipulation widget would use WNoAutoErase|WStaticContents because the widget draws all pixels
+itself, and when its size increases, it only needs a paint event
+for the new part because the old part remains unchanged.
+
       
    •  A scrolling game widget in which the background scrolls as the
+characters move might use WNoAutoErase (in addition to WStaticContents) so that the window system background does not
+flash in and out during scrolling.
+
       
    •  A word processing widget might use WNoAutoErase and repaint
+itself line by line to get a less-flickery resizing. If the widget
+is in a mode in which no text justification can take place, it
+might use WStaticContents too, so that it would only get a
+repaint for the newly visible parts.
+
       
    
+
     Child widgets may be moved using addChild() or moveChild(). Use
+childX() and childY() to get the position of a child widget.
+
     A widget may be placed in the corner between the vertical and
+horizontal scrollbars with setCornerWidget(). You can get access
+to the scrollbars using horizontalScrollBar() and
+verticalScrollBar(), and to the viewport with viewport(). The
+scroll view can be scrolled using scrollBy(), ensureVisible(),
+setContentsPos() or center().
+
     The visible area is given by visibleWidth() and visibleHeight(),
+and the contents area by contentsWidth() and contentsHeight(). The
+contents may be repainted using one of the repaintContents() or
+updateContents() functions.
+
     Coordinate conversion is provided by contentsToViewport() and
+viewportToContents().
+
     The contentsMoving() signal is emitted just before the contents
+are moved to a new position.
+
     Warning: TQScrollView currently does not erase the background when
+resized, i.e. you must always clear the background manually in
+scrollview subclasses. This will change in a future version of TQt
+and we recommend specifying the WNoAutoErase flag explicitly.
+
      
+
    See also Abstract Widget Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQScrollView::ResizePolicy
    
+
+
     This enum type is used to control a TQScrollView's reaction to
+resize events.
+
      
+
    • TQScrollView::Default - the TQScrollView selects one of the other settings
+automatically when it has to. In this version of TQt, TQScrollView
+changes to Manual if you resize the contents with
+resizeContents() and to AutoOne if a child is added.
+
    • TQScrollView::Manual - the contents stays the size set by resizeContents().
+
    • TQScrollView::AutoOne - if there is only one child widget the contents stays
+the size of that widget. Otherwise the behavior is undefined.
+
    • TQScrollView::AutoOneFit - if there is only one child widget the contents stays
+the size of that widget's sizeHint(). If the scrollview is resized
+larger than the child's sizeHint(), the child will be resized to
+fit. If there is more than one child, the behavior is undefined.
+
     
+
    TQScrollView::ScrollBarMode
    
+
+
     This enum type describes the various modes of TQScrollView's scroll
+bars.
+
      
+
    • TQScrollView::Auto - TQScrollView shows a scroll bar when the content is
+too large to fit and not otherwise. This is the default.
+
    • TQScrollView::AlwaysOff - TQScrollView never shows a scroll bar.
+
    • TQScrollView::AlwaysOn - TQScrollView always shows a scroll bar.
+
     (The modes for the horizontal and vertical scroll bars are
+independent.)
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQScrollView::TQScrollView ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a TQScrollView called name with parent parent and
+widget flags f.
+
     The widget flags WStaticContents, WNoAutoErase and WPaintClever are propagated to the viewport() widget. The other
+widget flags are propagated to the parent constructor as usual.
+
+
    TQScrollView::~TQScrollView ()
+
    
+Destroys the TQScrollView. Any children added with addChild() will
+be deleted.
+
+
    void TQScrollView::addChild ( TQWidget * child, int x = 0, int y = 0 ) [virtual]
+
    
+Inserts the widget, child, into the scrolled area positioned at
+(x, y). The position defaults to (0, 0). If the child is
+already in the view, it is just moved.
+
     You may want to call enableClipper(TRUE) if you add a large number
+of widgets.
+
+
    Example: scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
+
    int TQScrollView::bottomMargin () const [protected]
+
    
+Returns the bottom margin.
+
     
    See also setMargins().
+
+
    void TQScrollView::center ( int x, int y ) [slot]
+
    
+Scrolls the content so that the point (x, y) is in the center
+of visible area.
+
+
    Example: scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
+
    void TQScrollView::center ( int x, int y, float xmargin, float ymargin ) [slot]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Scrolls the content so that the point (x, y) is visible with
+the xmargin and ymargin margins (as fractions of visible
+the area).
+
     For example:
+
      
+
    •  Margin 0.0 allows (x, y) to be on the edge of the visible area.
+
    •  Margin 0.5 ensures that (x, y) is in middle 50% of the visible area.
+
    •  Margin 1.0 ensures that (x, y) is in the center of the the visible area.
+
    
+
+
    bool TQScrollView::childIsVisible ( TQWidget * child )
+
     
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Returns TRUE if child is visible. This is equivalent
+to child->isVisible().
+
+
    int TQScrollView::childX ( TQWidget * child )
+
    
+Returns the X position of the given child widget. Use this
+rather than TQWidget::x() for widgets added to the view.
+
     This function returns 0 if child has not been added to the view.
+
+
    int TQScrollView::childY ( TQWidget * child )
+
    
+Returns the Y position of the given child widget. Use this
+rather than TQWidget::y() for widgets added to the view.
+
     This function returns 0 if child has not been added to the view.
+
+
    TQWidget * TQScrollView::clipper () const
+
    
+Returns the clipper widget. Contents in the scrollview are
+ultimately clipped to be inside the clipper widget.
+
     You should not need to use this function.
+
     
    See also visibleWidth and visibleHeight.
+
+
    void TQScrollView::contentsContextMenuEvent ( TQContextMenuEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a
+contextMenuEvent() in e: the mouse position is translated to
+be a point on the contents.
+
+
    Example: chart/canvasview.cpp.
+
    void TQScrollView::contentsDragEnterEvent ( TQDragEnterEvent * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a
+dragEnterEvent(): the drag position is translated to be a point
+on the contents.
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQTable.
+
    void TQScrollView::contentsDragLeaveEvent ( TQDragLeaveEvent * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a
+dragLeaveEvent(): the drag position is translated to be a point
+on the contents.
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQTable.
+
    void TQScrollView::contentsDragMoveEvent ( TQDragMoveEvent * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a
+dragMoveEvent(): the drag position is translated to be a point on
+the contents.
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQTable.
+
    void TQScrollView::contentsDropEvent ( TQDropEvent * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a
+dropEvent(): the drop position is translated to be a point on the
+contents.
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQTable.
+
    int TQScrollView::contentsHeight () const
+
    Returns the height of the contents area.
+See the "contentsHeight" property for details.
+
    void TQScrollView::contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent ( TQMouseEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a
+mouseDoubleClickEvent(): the click position in e is translated to be a
+point on the contents.
+
     The default implementation generates a normal mouse press event.
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQListView.
+
    void TQScrollView::contentsMouseMoveEvent ( TQMouseEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a
+mouseMoveEvent(): the mouse position in e is translated to be a point
+on the contents.
+
+
    Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp and chart/canvasview.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented in TQListView.
+
    void TQScrollView::contentsMousePressEvent ( TQMouseEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a
+mousePressEvent(): the press position in e is translated to be a point
+on the contents.
+
+
    Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp and chart/canvasview.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented in TQListView.
+
    void TQScrollView::contentsMouseReleaseEvent ( TQMouseEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a
+mouseReleaseEvent(): the release position in e is translated to be a
+point on the contents.
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQListView.
+
    void TQScrollView::contentsMoving ( int x, int y ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted just before the contents are moved to
+position (x, y).
+
     
    See also contentsX and contentsY.
+
+
    void TQScrollView::contentsToViewport ( int x, int y, int & vx, int & vy ) const
+
    
+Translates a point (x, y) in the contents to a point (vx,
+vy) on the viewport() widget.
+
+
    TQPoint TQScrollView::contentsToViewport ( const TQPoint & p ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the point p translated to a point on the viewport()
+widget.
+
+
    void TQScrollView::contentsWheelEvent ( TQWheelEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a
+wheelEvent() in e: the mouse position is translated to be a
+point on the contents.
+
+
    int TQScrollView::contentsWidth () const
+
    Returns the width of the contents area.
+See the "contentsWidth" property for details.
+
    int TQScrollView::contentsX () const
+
    Returns the X coordinate of the contents that are at the left edge of the viewport.
+See the "contentsX" property for details.
+
    int TQScrollView::contentsY () const
+
    Returns the Y coordinate of the contents that are at the top edge of the viewport.
+See the "contentsY" property for details.
+
    TQWidget * TQScrollView::cornerWidget () const
+
    
+Returns the widget in the corner between the two scroll bars.
+
     By default, no corner widget is present.
+
+
    Example: scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
+
    bool TQScrollView::dragAutoScroll () const
+
    Returns TRUE if autoscrolling in drag move events is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "dragAutoScroll" property for details.
+
    void TQScrollView::drawContents ( TQPainter * p, int clipx, int clipy, int clipw, int cliph ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     Reimplement this function if you are viewing a drawing area rather
+than a widget.
+
     The function should draw the rectangle (clipx, clipy, clipw, cliph) of the contents using painter p. The clip
+rectangle is in the scrollview's coordinates.
+
     For example:
+
    +    {
+        // Fill a 40000 by 50000 rectangle at (100000,150000)
+
+        // Calculate the coordinates...
+        int x1 = 100000, y1 = 150000;
+        int x2 = x1+40000-1, y2 = y1+50000-1;
+
+        // Clip the coordinates so X/Windows will not have problems...
+        if (x1 < clipx) x1=clipx;
+        if (y1 < clipy) y1=clipy;
+        if (x2 > clipx+clipw-1) x2=clipx+clipw-1;
+        if (y2 > clipy+cliph-1) y2=clipy+cliph-1;
+
+        // Paint using the small coordinates...
+        if ( x2 >= x1 && y2 >= y1 )
+            p->fillRect(x1, y1, x2-x1+1, y2-y1+1, red);
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     The clip rectangle and translation of the painter p is already
+set appropriately.
+
+
    Example: qdir/qdir.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented in TQCanvasView and TQTable.
+
    void TQScrollView::drawContentsOffset ( TQPainter * p, int offsetx, int offsety, int clipx, int clipy, int clipw, int cliph ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+For backward-compatibility only. It is easier to use
+drawContents(TQPainter*,int,int,int,int).
+
     The default implementation translates the painter appropriately
+and calls drawContents(TQPainter*,int,int,int,int). See
+drawContents() for an explanation of the parameters p, offsetx, offsety, clipx, clipy, clipw and cliph.
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQListView.
+
    void TQScrollView::enableClipper ( bool y )
+
    
+When a large numbers of child widgets are in a scrollview,
+especially if they are close together, the scrolling performance
+can suffer greatly. If y is TRUE the scrollview will use an
+extra widget to group child widgets.
+
     Note that you may only call enableClipper() prior to adding
+widgets.
+
     For a full discussion, see this class's detailed description.
+
+
    Example: scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
+
    void TQScrollView::ensureVisible ( int x, int y ) [slot]
+
    
+Scrolls the content so that the point (x, y) is visible with at
+least 50-pixel margins (if possible, otherwise centered).
+
+
    void TQScrollView::ensureVisible ( int x, int y, int xmargin, int ymargin ) [slot]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Scrolls the content so that the point (x, y) is visible with at
+least the xmargin and ymargin margins (if possible,
+otherwise centered).
+
+
    bool TQScrollView::eventFilter ( TQObject * obj, TQEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event filter ensures the scroll bars are updated when a
+single contents widget is resized, shown, hidden or destroyed; it
+passes mouse events to the TQScrollView. The event is in e and
+the object is in obj.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQObject.
+
    Reimplemented in TQListView.
+
    ScrollBarMode TQScrollView::hScrollBarMode () const
+
    Returns the mode for the horizontal scroll bar.
+See the "hScrollBarMode" property for details.
+
    bool TQScrollView::hasStaticBackground () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if TQScrollView uses a static background; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setStaticBackground().
+
+
    TQScrollBar * TQScrollView::horizontalScrollBar () const
+
    
+Returns the component horizontal scroll bar. It is made available
+to allow accelerators, autoscrolling, etc.
+
     It should not be used for other purposes.
+
     This function never returns 0.
+
+
    void TQScrollView::horizontalSliderPressed () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the user presses the horizontal slider.
+
+
    void TQScrollView::horizontalSliderReleased () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the user releases the horizontal slider.
+
+
    bool TQScrollView::isHorizontalSliderPressed ()
+
    
+Returns TRUE if horizontal slider is pressed by user; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQScrollView::isVerticalSliderPressed ()
+
    
+Returns TRUE if vertical slider is pressed by user; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    int TQScrollView::leftMargin () const [protected]
+
    
+Returns the left margin.
+
     
    See also setMargins().
+
+
    void TQScrollView::moveChild ( TQWidget * child, int x, int y ) [virtual]
+
    
+Repositions the child widget to (x, y). This function is
+the same as addChild().
+
+
    void TQScrollView::removeChild ( TQWidget * child )
+
    
+Removes the child widget from the scrolled area. Note that this
+happens automatically if the child is deleted.
+
+
    void TQScrollView::repaintContents ( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool erase = TRUE )
+
    
+Calls repaint() on a rectangle defined by x, y, w, h,
+translated appropriately. If the rectangle is not visible, nothing
+is repainted. If erase is TRUE the background is cleared using
+the background color.
+
     
    See also updateContents().
+
+
    void TQScrollView::repaintContents ( const TQRect & r, bool erase = TRUE )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Repaints the contents of rectangle r. If erase is TRUE the
+background is cleared using the background color.
+
+
    void TQScrollView::repaintContents ( bool erase = TRUE )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Repaints the contents. If erase is TRUE the background is
+cleared using the background color.
+
+
    void TQScrollView::resizeContents ( int w, int h ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Sets the size of the contents area to w pixels wide and h
+pixels high and updates the viewport accordingly.
+
+
    ResizePolicy TQScrollView::resizePolicy () const
+
    Returns the resize policy.
+See the "resizePolicy" property for details.
+
    int TQScrollView::rightMargin () const [protected]
+
    
+Returns the right margin.
+
     
    See also setMargins().
+
+
    void TQScrollView::scrollBy ( int dx, int dy ) [slot]
+
    
+Scrolls the content by dx to the left and dy upwards.
+
+
    void TQScrollView::setContentsPos ( int x, int y ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Scrolls the content so that the point (x, y) is in the top-left
+corner.
+
+
    Example: process/process.cpp.
+
    void TQScrollView::setCornerWidget ( TQWidget * corner ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the widget in the corner between the two scroll bars.
+
     You will probably also want to set at least one of the scroll bar
+modes to AlwaysOn.
+
     Passing 0 shows no widget in the corner.
+
     Any previous corner widget is hidden.
+
     You may call setCornerWidget() with the same widget at different
+times.
+
     All widgets set here will be deleted by the TQScrollView when it is
+destroyed unless you separately reparent the widget after setting
+some other corner widget (or 0).
+
     Any newly set widget should have no current parent.
+
     By default, no corner widget is present.
+
     
    See also vScrollBarMode and hScrollBarMode.
+
+
    Example: scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
+
    void TQScrollView::setDragAutoScroll ( bool b ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether autoscrolling in drag move events is enabled to b.
+See the "dragAutoScroll" property for details.
+
    void TQScrollView::setHBarGeometry ( TQScrollBar & hbar, int x, int y, int w, int h ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Called when the horizontal scroll bar geometry changes. This is
+provided as a protected function so that subclasses can do
+interesting things such as providing extra buttons in some of the
+space normally used by the scroll bars.
+
     The default implementation simply gives all the space to hbar.
+The new geometry is given by x, y, w and h.
+
     
    See also setVBarGeometry().
+
+
    void TQScrollView::setHScrollBarMode ( ScrollBarMode ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the mode for the horizontal scroll bar.
+See the "hScrollBarMode" property for details.
+
    void TQScrollView::setMargins ( int left, int top, int right, int bottom ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Sets the margins around the scrolling area to left, top, right and bottom. This is useful for applications such as
+spreadsheets with "locked" rows and columns. The marginal space is
+inside the frameRect() and is left blank; reimplement
+drawFrame() or put widgets in the unused area.
+
     By default all margins are zero.
+
     
    See also frameChanged().
+
+
    void TQScrollView::setResizePolicy ( ResizePolicy ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the resize policy.
+See the "resizePolicy" property for details.
+
    void TQScrollView::setStaticBackground ( bool y )
+
    
+Sets the scrollview to have a static background if y is TRUE,
+or a scrolling background if y is FALSE. By default, the
+background is scrolling.
+
     Be aware that this mode is quite slow, as a full repaint of the
+visible area has to be triggered on every contents move.
+
     
    See also hasStaticBackground().
+
+
    void TQScrollView::setVBarGeometry ( TQScrollBar & vbar, int x, int y, int w, int h ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Called when the vertical scroll bar geometry changes. This is
+provided as a protected function so that subclasses can do
+interesting things such as providing extra buttons in some of the
+space normally used by the scroll bars.
+
     The default implementation simply gives all the space to vbar.
+The new geometry is given by x, y, w and h.
+
     
    See also setHBarGeometry().
+
+
    void TQScrollView::setVScrollBarMode ( ScrollBarMode ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the mode for the vertical scroll bar.
+See the "vScrollBarMode" property for details.
+
    void TQScrollView::showChild ( TQWidget * child, bool y = TRUE )
+
     
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Sets the visibility of child. Equivalent to
+TQWidget::show() or TQWidget::hide().
+
+
    int TQScrollView::topMargin () const [protected]
+
    
+Returns the top margin.
+
     
    See also setMargins().
+
+
    void TQScrollView::updateContents ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
+
    
+Calls update() on a rectangle defined by x, y, w, h,
+translated appropriately. If the rectangle is not visible, nothing
+is repainted.
+
     
    See also repaintContents().
+
+
    void TQScrollView::updateContents ( const TQRect & r )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Updates the contents in rectangle r
+
+
    void TQScrollView::updateContents ()
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
    void TQScrollView::updateScrollBars () [slot]
+
    
+Updates scroll bars: all possibilities are considered. You should
+never need to call this in your code.
+
+
    ScrollBarMode TQScrollView::vScrollBarMode () const
+
    Returns the mode for the vertical scroll bar.
+See the "vScrollBarMode" property for details.
+
    TQScrollBar * TQScrollView::verticalScrollBar () const
+
    
+Returns the component vertical scroll bar. It is made available to
+allow accelerators, autoscrolling, etc.
+
     It should not be used for other purposes.
+
     This function never returns 0.
+
+
    void TQScrollView::verticalSliderPressed () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the user presses the vertical slider.
+
+
    void TQScrollView::verticalSliderReleased () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the user releases the vertical slider.
+
+
    TQWidget * TQScrollView::viewport () const
+
    
+Returns the viewport widget of the scrollview. This is the widget
+containing the contents widget or which is the drawing area.
+
+
    Examples: helpsystem/tooltip.cpp and scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
+
    void TQScrollView::viewportPaintEvent ( TQPaintEvent * pe ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This is a low-level painting routine that draws the viewport
+contents. Reimplement this if drawContents() is too high-level
+(for example, if you don't want to open a TQPainter on the
+viewport). The paint event is passed in pe.
+
+
    void TQScrollView::viewportResizeEvent ( TQResizeEvent * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+To provide simple processing of events on the contents, this
+function receives all resize events sent to the viewport.
+
     
    See also TQWidget::resizeEvent().
+
+
    Example: chart/canvasview.cpp.
+
    TQSize TQScrollView::viewportSize ( int x, int y ) const
+
    
+Returns the viewport size for size (x, y).
+
     The viewport size depends on (x, y) (the size of the contents),
+the size of this widget and the modes of the horizontal and
+vertical scroll bars.
+
     This function permits widgets that can trade vertical and
+horizontal space for each other to control scroll bar appearance
+better. For example, a word processor or web browser can control
+the width of the right margin accurately, whether or not there
+needs to be a vertical scroll bar.
+
+
    void TQScrollView::viewportToContents ( int vx, int vy, int & x, int & y ) const
+
    
+Translates a point (vx, vy) on the viewport() widget to a
+point (x, y) in the contents.
+
+
    TQPoint TQScrollView::viewportToContents ( const TQPoint & vp ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the point on the viewport vp translated to a point in
+the contents.
+
+
    int TQScrollView::visibleHeight () const
+
    Returns the vertical amount of the content that is visible.
+See the "visibleHeight" property for details.
+
    int TQScrollView::visibleWidth () const
+
    Returns the horizontal amount of the content that is visible.
+See the "visibleWidth" property for details.
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    int contentsHeight
    
+
    This property holds the height of the contents area.
+
    
+
    Get this property's value with contentsHeight().
+
    int contentsWidth
    
+
    This property holds the width of the contents area.
+
    
+
    Get this property's value with contentsWidth().
+
    int contentsX
    
+
    This property holds the X coordinate of the contents that are at the left edge of the viewport.
+
    
+
    Get this property's value with contentsX().
+
    int contentsY
    
+
    This property holds the Y coordinate of the contents that are at the top edge of the viewport.
+
    
+
    Get this property's value with contentsY().
+
    bool dragAutoScroll
    
+
    This property holds whether autoscrolling in drag move events is enabled.
+
    If this property is set to TRUE (the default), the TQScrollView
+automatically scrolls the contents in drag move events if the user
+moves the cursor close to a border of the view. Of course this
+works only if the viewport accepts drops. Specifying FALSE
+disables this autoscroll feature.
+
     Warning: Enabling this property might not be enough to
+effectively turn on autoscrolling. If you put a custom widget in
+the TQScrollView, you might need to call TQDragEvent::ignore() on
+the event in the dragEnterEvent() and dragMoveEvent()
+reimplementations.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setDragAutoScroll() and get this property's value with dragAutoScroll().
+
    ScrollBarMode hScrollBarMode
    
+
    This property holds the mode for the horizontal scroll bar.
+
    The default mode is TQScrollView::Auto.
+
     
    See also vScrollBarMode.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setHScrollBarMode() and get this property's value with hScrollBarMode().
+
    ResizePolicy resizePolicy
    
+
    This property holds the resize policy.
+
    The default is Default.
+
     
    See also ResizePolicy.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setResizePolicy() and get this property's value with resizePolicy().
+
    ScrollBarMode vScrollBarMode
    
+
    This property holds the mode for the vertical scroll bar.
+
    The default mode is TQScrollView::Auto.
+
     
    See also hScrollBarMode.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setVScrollBarMode() and get this property's value with vScrollBarMode().
+
    int visibleHeight
    
+
    This property holds the vertical amount of the content that is visible.
+
    
+
    Get this property's value with visibleHeight().
+
    int visibleWidth
    
+
    This property holds the horizontal amount of the content that is visible.
+
    
+
    Get this property's value with visibleWidth().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsemaphore.html b/doc/html/ntqsemaphore.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3f1c9506f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsemaphore.html
@@ -0,0 +1,149 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSemaphore Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSemaphore Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQSemaphore class provides a robust integer semaphore.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are thread-safe when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqsemaphore.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
+The TQSemaphore class provides a robust integer semaphore.
+
     
+
+
     A TQSemaphore can be used to serialize thread execution, in a
+similar way to a TQMutex. A semaphore differs from a mutex, in
+that a semaphore can be accessed by more than one thread at a
+time.
+
     For example, suppose we have an application that stores data in a
+large tree structure. The application creates 10 threads
+(commonly called a thread pool) to perform searches on the tree.
+When the application searches the tree for some piece of data, it
+uses one thread per base node to do the searching. A semaphore
+could be used to make sure that two threads don't try to search
+the same branch of the tree at the same time.
+
     A non-computing example of a semaphore would be dining at a
+restuarant. A semaphore is initialized to have a maximum count
+equal to the number of chairs in the restuarant. As people
+arrive, they want a seat. As seats are filled, the semaphore is
+accessed, once per person. As people leave, the access is
+released, allowing more people to enter. If a party of 10 people
+want to be seated, but there are only 9 seats, those 10 people
+will wait, but a party of 4 people would be seated (taking the
+available seats to 5, making the party of 10 people wait longer).
+
     When a semaphore is created it is given a number which is the
+maximum number of concurrent accesses it will permit. Accesses to
+the sempahore are gained using operator++() or operator+=(), and
+released with operator--() or operator-=(). The number of
+accesses allowed is retrieved with available(), and the total
+number with total(). Note that the incrementing functions will
+block if there aren't enough available accesses. Use tryAccess()
+if you want to actquire accesses without blocking.
+
    See also Environment Classes and Threading.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSemaphore::TQSemaphore ( int maxcount )
+
    
+Creates a new semaphore. The semaphore can be concurrently
+accessed at most maxcount times.
+
+
    TQSemaphore::~TQSemaphore () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the semaphore.
+
     Warning: If you destroy a semaphore that has accesses in use the
+resultant behavior is undefined.
+
+
    int TQSemaphore::available () const
+
    
+Returns the number of accesses currently available to the
+semaphore.
+
+
    int TQSemaphore::operator++ ( int )
+
    
+Postfix ++ operator.
+
     Try to get access to the semaphore. If available() == 0, this
+call will block until it can get access, i.e. until available() >
+0.
+
+
    int TQSemaphore::operator+= ( int n )
+
    
+Try to get access to the semaphore. If available() < n, this
+call will block until it can get all the accesses it wants, i.e.
+until available() >= n.
+
+
    int TQSemaphore::operator-- ( int )
+
    
+Postfix -- operator.
+
     Release access of the semaphore. This wakes all threads waiting
+for access to the semaphore.
+
+
    int TQSemaphore::operator-= ( int n )
+
    
+Release n accesses to the semaphore.
+
+
    int TQSemaphore::total () const
+
    
+Returns the total number of accesses to the semaphore.
+
+
    bool TQSemaphore::tryAccess ( int n )
+
    
+Try to get access to the semaphore. If available() < n, this
+function will return FALSE immediately. If available() >= n,
+this function will take n accesses and return TRUE. This
+function does not block.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqserversocket.html b/doc/html/ntqserversocket.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..976dc8163
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqserversocket.html
@@ -0,0 +1,173 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQServerSocket Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQServerSocket Class Reference
    [network module]
    
+
+
    The TQServerSocket class provides a TCP-based server.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqserversocket.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQServerSocket ( Q_UINT16 port, int backlog = 1, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQServerSocket ( const TQHostAddress & address, Q_UINT16 port, int backlog = 1, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQServerSocket ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • virtual ~TQServerSocket ()
      • 
+
    • bool ok () const
      • 
+
    • Q_UINT16 port () const
      • 
+
    • int socket () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setSocket ( int socket )
      • 
+
    • TQHostAddress address () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void newConnection ( int socket ) = 0
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQServerSocket class provides a TCP-based server.
+
+
     
+
+
     This class is a convenience class for accepting incoming TCP
+connections. You can specify the port or have TQServerSocket pick
+one, and listen on just one address or on all the machine's
+addresses.
+
     Using the API is very simple: subclass TQServerSocket, call the
+constructor of your choice, and implement newConnection() to
+handle new incoming connections. There is nothing more to do.
+
     (Note that due to lack of support in the underlying APIs,
+TQServerSocket cannot accept or reject connections conditionally.)
+
     
    See also TQSocket, TQSocketDevice, TQHostAddress, TQSocketNotifier, and Input/Output and Networking.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQServerSocket::TQServerSocket ( Q_UINT16 port, int backlog = 1, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Creates a server socket object, that will serve the given port
+on all the addresses of this host. If port is 0, TQServerSocket
+will pick a suitable port in a system-dependent manner. Use backlog to specify how many pending connections the server can
+have.
+
     The parent and name arguments are passed on to the TQObject
+constructor.
+
     Warning: On Tru64 Unix systems a value of 0 for backlog means
+that you don't accept any connections at all; you should specify a
+value larger than 0.
+
+
    TQServerSocket::TQServerSocket ( const TQHostAddress & address, Q_UINT16 port, int backlog = 1, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Creates a server socket object, that will serve the given port
+only on the given address. Use backlog to specify how many
+pending connections the server can have.
+
     The parent and name arguments are passed on to the TQObject
+constructor.
+
     Warning: On Tru64 Unix systems a value of 0 for backlog means
+that you don't accept any connections at all; you should specify a
+value larger than 0.
+
+
    TQServerSocket::TQServerSocket ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Construct an empty server socket.
+
     This constructor, in combination with setSocket(), allows us to
+use the TQServerSocket class as a wrapper for other socket types
+(e.g. Unix Domain Sockets under Unix).
+
     The parent and name arguments are passed on to the TQObject
+constructor.
+
     
    See also setSocket().
+
+
    TQServerSocket::~TQServerSocket () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the socket.
+
     This causes any backlogged connections (connections that have
+reached the host, but not yet been completely set up by calling
+TQSocketDevice::accept()) to be severed.
+
     Existing connections continue to exist; this only affects the
+acceptance of new connections.
+
+
    TQHostAddress TQServerSocket::address () const
+
    
+Returns the address on which this object listens, or 0.0.0.0 if
+this object listens on more than one address. ok() must be TRUE
+before calling this function.
+
     
    See also port() and TQSocketDevice::address().
+
+
    void TQServerSocket::newConnection ( int socket ) [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     This pure virtual function is responsible for setting up a new
+incoming connection. socket is the fd (file descriptor) for the
+newly accepted connection.
+
+
    bool TQServerSocket::ok () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the construction succeeded; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    Q_UINT16 TQServerSocket::port () const
+
    
+Returns the port number on which this server socket listens. This
+is always non-zero; if you specify 0 in the constructor,
+TQServerSocket will pick a non-zero port itself. ok() must be TRUE
+before calling this function.
+
     
    See also address() and TQSocketDevice::port().
+
+
    Example: network/httpd/httpd.cpp.
+
    void TQServerSocket::setSocket ( int socket ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the socket to use socket. bind() and listen() should
+already have been called for socket.
+
     This allows us to use the TQServerSocket class as a wrapper for
+other socket types (e.g. Unix Domain Sockets).
+
+
    int TQServerSocket::socket () const
+
    
+Returns the operating system socket.
+
+
    TQSocketDevice * TQServerSocket::socketDevice () [protected]
+
    
+Returns a pointer to the internal socket device. The returned
+pointer is 0 if there is no connection or pending connection.
+
     There is normally no need to manipulate the socket device directly
+since this class does all the necessary setup for most client or
+server socket applications.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsessionmanager.html b/doc/html/ntqsessionmanager.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f5be4a501
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsessionmanager.html
@@ -0,0 +1,346 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSessionManager Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSessionManager Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQSessionManager class provides access to the session manager.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsessionmanager.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSessionManager class provides access to the session manager.
+
     
+
+
     The session manager is responsible for session management, most
+importantly for interruption and resumption. A "session" is a kind
+of record of the state of the system, e.g. which applications were
+run at start up and which applications are currently running. The
+session manager is used to save the session, e.g. when the machine
+is shut down; and to restore a session, e.g. when the machine is
+started up. Use TQSettings to save and restore an individual
+application's settings, e.g. window positions, recently used files,
+etc.
+
     TQSessionManager provides an interface between the application and
+the session manager so that the program can work well with the
+session manager. In TQt, session management requests for action
+are handled by the two virtual functions TQApplication::commitData()
+and TQApplication::saveState(). Both provide a reference to
+a session manager object as argument, to allow the application
+to communicate with the session manager.
+
     During a session management action (i.e. within commitData() and
+saveState()), no user interaction is possible unless the
+application got explicit permission from the session manager. You
+ask for permission by calling allowsInteraction() or, if it's really
+urgent, allowsErrorInteraction(). TQt does not enforce this, but the
+session manager may.
+
     You can try to abort the shutdown process by calling cancel(). The
+default commitData() function does this if some top-level window
+rejected its closeEvent().
+
     For sophisticated session managers provided on Unix/X11, TQSessionManager
+offers further possibilites to fine-tune an application's session
+management behavior: setRestartCommand(), setDiscardCommand(),
+setRestartHint(), setProperty(), requestPhase2(). See the respective
+function descriptions for further details.
+
    See also Main Window and Related Classes and Environment Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQSessionManager::RestartHint
     
+
     This enum type defines the circumstances under which this
+application wants to be restarted by the session manager. The
+current values are
+
      
+
    • TQSessionManager::RestartIfRunning - if the application is still running when
+the session is shut down, it wants to be restarted at the start of
+the next session.
+
    • TQSessionManager::RestartAnyway - the application wants to be started at the
+start of the next session, no matter what. (This is useful for
+utilities that run just after startup and then quit.)
+
    • TQSessionManager::RestartImmediately - the application wants to be started
+immediately whenever it is not running.
+
    • TQSessionManager::RestartNever - the application does not want to be restarted
+automatically.
+
     The default hint is RestartIfRunning.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    bool TQSessionManager::allowsErrorInteraction ()
+
    
+
+
     This is similar to allowsInteraction(), but also tells the session
+manager that an error occurred. Session managers may give error
+interaction request higher priority, which means that it is more likely
+that an error interaction is permitted. However, you are still not
+guaranteed that the session manager will allow interaction.
+
     
    See also allowsInteraction(), release(), and cancel().
+
+
    bool TQSessionManager::allowsInteraction ()
+
    
+
+
     Asks the session manager for permission to interact with the
+user. Returns TRUE if interaction is permitted; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     The rationale behind this mechanism is to make it possible to
+synchronize user interaction during a shutdown. Advanced session
+managers may ask all applications simultaneously to commit their
+data, resulting in a much faster shutdown.
+
     When the interaction is completed we strongly recommend releasing the
+user interaction semaphore with a call to release(). This way, other
+applications may get the chance to interact with the user while your
+application is still busy saving data. (The semaphore is implicitly
+released when the application exits.)
+
     If the user decides to cancel the shutdown process during the
+interaction phase, you must tell the session manager that this has
+happened by calling cancel().
+
     Here's an example of how an application's TQApplication::commitData()
+might be implemented:
+
     
    +void MyApplication::commitData( TQSessionManager& sm ) {
+    if ( sm.allowsInteraction() ) {
+        switch ( TQMessageBox::warning(
+                    yourMainWindow,
+                    tr("Application Name"),
+                    tr("Save changes to document Foo?"),
+                    tr("&Yes"),
+                    tr("&No"),
+                    tr("Cancel"),
+                    0, 2) ) {
+        case 0: // yes
+            sm.release();
+            // save document here; if saving fails, call sm.cancel()
+            break;
+        case 1: // continue without saving
+            break;
+        default: // cancel
+            sm.cancel();
+            break;
+        }
+    } else {
+        // we did not get permission to interact, then
+        // do something reasonable instead.
+    }
+}
+
    
+ 
+
     If an error occurred within the application while saving its data,
+you may want to try allowsErrorInteraction() instead.
+
     
    See also TQApplication::commitData(), release(), and cancel().
+
+
    void TQSessionManager::cancel ()
+
    
+
+
     Tells the session manager to cancel the shutdown process.  Applications
+should not call this function without first asking the user.
+
     
    See also allowsInteraction() and allowsErrorInteraction().
+
+
     
+
    TQStringList TQSessionManager::discardCommand () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the currently set discard command.
+
     Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should
+iterate over a copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQStringList list = mySession.discardCommand();
+    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
+    while( it != list.end() ) {
+        myProcessing( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also setDiscardCommand(), restartCommand(), and setRestartCommand().
+
+
    void * TQSessionManager::handle () const
+
    
+
+
     X11 only: returns a handle to the current SmcConnection.
+
+
    bool TQSessionManager::isPhase2 () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the session manager is currently performing a second
+session management phase; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also requestPhase2().
+
+
    void TQSessionManager::release ()
+
    
+
+
     Releases the session manager's interaction semaphore after an
+interaction phase.
+
     
    See also allowsInteraction() and allowsErrorInteraction().
+
+
    void TQSessionManager::requestPhase2 ()
+
    
+
+
     Requests a second session management phase for the application. The
+application may then return immediately from the
+TQApplication::commitData() or TQApplication::saveState() function,
+and they will be called again once most or all other applications have
+finished their session management.
+
     The two phases are useful for applications such as the X11 window manager
+that need to store information about another application's windows
+and therefore have to wait until these applications have completed their
+respective session management tasks.
+
     Note that if another application has requested a second phase it
+may get called before, simultaneously with, or after your
+application's second phase.
+
     
    See also isPhase2().
+
+
    TQStringList TQSessionManager::restartCommand () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the currently set restart command.
+
     Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should
+iterate over a copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQStringList list = mySession.restartCommand();
+    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
+    while( it != list.end() ) {
+        myProcessing( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also setRestartCommand() and restartHint().
+
+
    RestartHint TQSessionManager::restartHint () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the application's current restart hint. The default is
+RestartIfRunning.
+
     
    See also setRestartHint().
+
+
    TQString TQSessionManager::sessionId () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the identifier of the current session.
+
     If the application has been restored from an earlier session, this
+identifier is the same as it was in that earlier session.
+
     
    See also sessionKey() and TQApplication::sessionId().
+
+
    TQString TQSessionManager::sessionKey () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the session key in the current session.
+
     If the application has been restored from an earlier session, this
+key is the same as it was when the previous session ended.
+
     The session key changes with every call of commitData() or
+saveState().
+
     
    See also sessionId() and TQApplication::sessionKey().
+
+
    void TQSessionManager::setDiscardCommand ( const TQStringList & )
+
    
+
+
     
    See also discardCommand() and setRestartCommand().
+
+
    void TQSessionManager::setManagerProperty ( const TQString & name, const TQStringList & value )
+
    
+
+
     Low-level write access to the application's identification and state
+record are kept in the session manager.
+
     The property called name has its value set to the string list value.
+
+
    void TQSessionManager::setManagerProperty ( const TQString & name, const TQString & value )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Low-level write access to the application's identification and state
+records are kept in the session manager.
+
     The property called name has its value set to the string value.
+
+
    void TQSessionManager::setRestartCommand ( const TQStringList & command )
+
    
+
+
     If the session manager is capable of restoring sessions it will
+execute command in order to restore the application. The command
+defaults to
+
     
    +        appname -session id
+  
    
+ 
+
     The -session option is mandatory; otherwise TQApplication cannot
+tell whether it has been restored or what the current session
+identifier is. See TQApplication::isSessionRestored() and
+TQApplication::sessionId() for details.
+
     If your application is very simple, it may be possible to store the
+entire application state in additional command line options. This
+is usually a very bad idea because command lines are often limited
+to a few hundred bytes. Instead, use TQSettings, or temporary files
+or a database for this purpose. By marking the data with the unique
+sessionId(), you will be able to restore the application in a future
+session.
+
     
    See also restartCommand(), setDiscardCommand(), and setRestartHint().
+
+
    void TQSessionManager::setRestartHint ( RestartHint hint )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the application's restart hint to hint. On application
+startup the hint is set to RestartIfRunning.
+
     Note that these flags are only hints, a session manager may or may
+not respect them.
+
     We recommend setting the restart hint in TQApplication::saveState()
+because most session managers perform a checkpoint shortly after an
+application's startup.
+
     
    See also restartHint().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsettings.html b/doc/html/ntqsettings.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f827d3619
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsettings.html
@@ -0,0 +1,626 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSettings Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSettings Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQSettings class provides persistent platform-independent application settings.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsettings.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • enum Format { Native = 0, Ini }
      • 
+
    • enum System { Unix = 0, Windows, Mac }
      • 
+
    • enum Scope { User, Global }
      • 
+
    • TQSettings ()
      • 
+
    • TQSettings ( Format format )
      • 
+
    • ~TQSettings ()
      • 
+
    • bool writeEntry ( const TQString & key, bool value )
      • 
+
    • bool writeEntry ( const TQString & key, double value )
      • 
+
    • bool writeEntry ( const TQString & key, int value )
      • 
+
    • bool writeEntry ( const TQString & key, const TQString & value )
      • 
+
    • bool writeEntry ( const TQString & key, const TQStringList & value )
      • 
+
    • bool writeEntry ( const TQString & key, const TQStringList & value, const TQChar & separator )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • TQStringList entryList ( const TQString & key ) const
      • 
+
    • TQStringList subkeyList ( const TQString & key ) const
      • 
+
    • TQStringList readListEntry ( const TQString & key, bool * ok = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • TQStringList readListEntry ( const TQString & key, const TQChar & separator, bool * ok = 0 ) const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • TQString readEntry ( const TQString & key, const TQString & def = TQString::null, bool * ok = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • int readNumEntry ( const TQString & key, int def = 0, bool * ok = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • double readDoubleEntry ( const TQString & key, double def = 0, bool * ok = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • bool readBoolEntry ( const TQString & key, bool def = FALSE, bool * ok = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • bool removeEntry ( const TQString & key )
      • 
+
    • void insertSearchPath ( System s, const TQString & path )
      • 
+
    • void removeSearchPath ( System s, const TQString & path )
      • 
+
    • void setPath ( const TQString & domain, const TQString & product, Scope scope = Global )
      • 
+
    • void beginGroup ( const TQString & group )
      • 
+
    • void endGroup ()
      • 
+
    • void resetGroup ()
      • 
+
    • TQString group () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSettings class provides persistent platform-independent application settings.
+
     
+
+
+
     On Unix systems, TQSettings uses text files to store settings. On Windows
+systems, TQSettings uses the system registry.  On Mac OS X, TQSettings uses
+the Carbon preferences API.
+
     Each setting comprises an identifying key and the data associated with
+the key. A key is a unicode string which consists of two or more
+subkeys. A subkey is a slash, '/', followed by one or more unicode
+characters (excluding slashes, newlines, carriage returns and equals,
+'=', signs). The associated data, called the entry or value, may be a
+boolean, an integer, a double, a string or a list of strings. Entry
+strings may contain any unicode characters.
+
     If you want to save and restore the entire desktop's settings, i.e.
+which applications are running, use TQSettings to save the settings
+for each individual application and TQSessionManager to save the
+desktop's session.
+
     Example settings:
+
    +    /MyCompany/MyApplication/background color
+    /MyCompany/MyApplication/foreground color
+    /MyCompany/MyApplication/geometry/x
+    /MyCompany/MyApplication/geometry/y
+    /MyCompany/MyApplication/geometry/width
+    /MyCompany/MyApplication/geometry/height
+    /MyCompany/MyApplication/recent files/1
+    /MyCompany/MyApplication/recent files/2
+    /MyCompany/MyApplication/recent files/3
+    
    
+ 
+Each line above is a complete key, made up of subkeys.
+
     A typical usage pattern for reading settings at application
+startup:
+
    +    TQSettings settings;
+    settings.setPath( "MyCompany.com", "MyApplication" );
+
+    TQString bgColor = settings.readEntry( "/colors/background", "white" );
+    int width = settings.readNumEntry( "/geometry/width", 640 );
+    // ...
+    
    
+ 
+
     A typical usage pattern for saving settings at application exit or
+'save preferences':
+
    +    TQSettings settings;
+    settings.setPath( "MyCompany.com", "MyApplication" );
+
+    settings.writeEntry( "/colors/background", bgColor );
+    settings.writeEntry( "/geometry/width", width );
+    // ...
+    
    
+ 
+
     A key prefix can be prepended to all keys using beginGroup(). The
+application of the prefix is stopped using endGroup(). For
+example:
+
    +    TQSettings settings;
+
+    settings.beginGroup( "/MainWindow" );
+        settings.beginGroup( "/Geometry" );
+            int x = settings.readEntry( "/x" );
+            // ...
+        settings.endGroup();
+        settings.beginGroup( "/Toolbars" );
+            // ...
+        settings.endGroup();
+    settings.endGroup();
+    
    
+ 
+
     You can get a list of entry-holding keys by calling entryList(), and
+a list of key-holding keys using subkeyList().
+
     
    +    TQStringList keys = settings.entryList( "/MyApplication" );
+    // keys contains 'background color' and 'foreground color'.
+
+    TQStringList keys = settings.entryList( "/MyApplication/recent files" );
+    // keys contains '1', '2' and '3'.
+
+    TQStringList subkeys = settings.subkeyList( "/MyApplication" );
+    // subkeys contains 'geometry' and 'recent files'
+
+    TQStringList subkeys = settings.subkeyList( "/MyApplication/recent files" );
+    // subkeys is empty.
+    
    
+ 
+
     Since settings for Windows are stored in the registry there are
+some size limitations as follows:
+
      
+
    •  A subkey may not exceed 255 characters.
+
    •  An entry's value may not exceed 16,300 characters.
+
    •  All the values of a key (for example, all the 'recent files'
+subkeys values), may not exceed 65,535 characters.
+
    
+
     These limitations are not enforced on Unix or Mac OS X.
+
     Warning: Creating multiple, simultaneous instances of TQSettings writing
+to a text file may lead to data loss! This is a known issue which will
+be fixed in a future release of TQt.
+
     
     Notes for Mac OS X Applications
+
    
+
     The location where settings are stored is not formally defined by
+the CFPreferences API.
+
     At the time of writing settings are stored (either on a global or
+user basis, preferring locally) into a plist file in $ROOT/System/Library/Preferences (in XML format). TQSettings will
+create an appropriate plist file (com.<first group name>.plist)
+out of the full path to a key.
+
     For further information on CFPreferences see
+Apple's Specifications
+
     
     Notes for Unix Applications
+
    
+
     There is no universally accepted place for storing application
+settings under Unix. In the examples the settings file will be
+searched for in the following directories:
+
      
+
    1.  SYSCONF - the default value is INSTALL/etc/settings
+
    2.  /opt/MyCompany/share/etc
+
    3.  /opt/MyCompany/share/MyApplication/etc
+
    4.  $HOME/.qt
+
    
+When reading settings the files are searched in the order shown
+above, with later settings overriding earlier settings. Files for
+which the user doesn't have read permission are ignored. When saving
+settings TQSettings works in the order shown above, writing
+to the first settings file for which the user has write permission.
+(INSTALL is the directory where TQt was installed.  This can be
+modified by using the configure script's -prefix argument )
+
     If you want to put the settings in a particular place in the
+filesystem you could do this:
+
    +    settings.insertSearchPath( TQSettings::Unix, "/opt/MyCompany/share" );
+    
    
+ 
+
     But in practice you may prefer not to use a search path for Unix.
+For example the following code:
+
    +    settings.writeEntry( "/MyApplication/geometry/width", width );
+    
    
+ 
+will end up writing the "geometry/width" setting to the file
+$HOME/.qt/myapplicationrc (assuming that the application is
+being run by an ordinary user, i.e. not by root).
+
     For cross-platform applications you should ensure that the
+Windows size limitations are not exceeded.
+
     Warning: TQSettings doesn't write the settings until it is destroyed so
+you should construct the TQSettings object on the stack.
+
    See also Input/Output and Networking and Miscellaneous Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQSettings::Format
    
+
+
      
+
    • TQSettings::Native - Store the settings in a platform dependent location
+
    • TQSettings::Ini - Store the settings in a text file
+
    
+
    TQSettings::Scope
    
+
+
      
+
    • TQSettings::Global - Save settings as global as possible
+
    • TQSettings::User - Save settings in user space
+
    
+
    TQSettings::System
    
+
+
      
+
    • TQSettings::Mac - Macintosh execution environments
+
    • TQSettings::Unix - Mac OS X, Unix, Linux and Unix-like execution environments
+
    • TQSettings::Windows - Windows execution environments
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSettings::TQSettings ()
+
    
+Creates a settings object.
+
     Be aware that you must call setPath() or insertSearchPath() before
+you can use the TQSettings object.
+
+
    TQSettings::TQSettings ( Format format )
+
    
+Creates a settings object. If format is 'Ini' the settings will
+be stored in a text file, using the Unix strategy (see above). If format
+is 'Native', the settings will be stored in a platform specific way
+(ie. the Windows registry).
+
     Be aware that you must call setPath() or insertSearchPath() before
+you can use the TQSettings object.
+
+
    TQSettings::~TQSettings ()
+
    
+Destroys the settings object.  All modifications made to the settings
+will automatically be saved.
+
     
+
    void TQSettings::beginGroup ( const TQString & group )
+
    
+Appends group to the current key prefix.
+
     
    +    TQSettings settings;
+    settings.beginGroup( "/MainWindow" );
+    // read values
+    settings.endGroup();
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    void TQSettings::endGroup ()
+
    
+Undo previous calls to beginGroup(). Note that a single beginGroup("a/b/c") is undone
+by a single call to endGroup().
+
     
    +    TQSettings settings;
+    settings.beginGroup( "/MainWindow/Geometry" );
+    // read values
+    settings.endGroup();
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    TQStringList TQSettings::entryList ( const TQString & key ) const
+
    
+Returns a list of the keys which contain entries under key. Does not return any keys that contain subkeys.
+
     Example settings:
+
    +    /MyCompany/MyApplication/background color
+    /MyCompany/MyApplication/foreground color
+    /MyCompany/MyApplication/geometry/x
+    /MyCompany/MyApplication/geometry/y
+    /MyCompany/MyApplication/geometry/width
+    /MyCompany/MyApplication/geometry/height
+    
    
+ 
+
    +    TQStringList keys = settings.entryList( "/MyCompany/MyApplication" );
+    
    
+ 
+
     In the above example, keys will contain 'background color' and
+'foreground color'. It will not contain 'geometry' because this key
+contains subkeys not entries.
+
     To access the geometry values, you could either use subkeyList()
+to read the keys then read each entry, or simply read each entry
+directly by specifying its full key, e.g.
+"/MyCompany/MyApplication/geometry/y".
+
     
    See also subkeyList().
+
+
    TQString TQSettings::group () const
+
    
+Returns the current key prefix, or a null string if there is no key prefix set.
+
     
    See also beginGroup().
+
+
    void TQSettings::insertSearchPath ( System s, const TQString & path )
+
    
+Inserts path into the settings search path. The semantics of path depends on the system s. It is usually easier and better to
+use setPath() instead of this function.
+
     When s is Windows and the execution environment is not
+Windows the function does nothing. Similarly when s is Unix and
+the execution environment is not Unix the function does nothing.
+
     When s is Windows, and the execution environment is Windows, the
+search path list will be used as the first subfolder of the "Software"
+folder in the registry.
+
     When reading settings the folders are searched forwards from the
+first folder (listed below) to the last, returning the first
+settings found, and ignoring any folders for which the user doesn't
+have read permission.
+
      
+
    1.  HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/MyCompany/MyApplication
+
    2.  HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/Software/MyCompany/MyApplication
+
    3.  HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/MyApplication
+
    4.  HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/Software/MyApplication
+
    
+
     
    +  TQSettings settings;
+  settings.insertSearchPath( TQSettings::Windows, "/MyCompany" );
+  settings.writeEntry( "/MyApplication/Tip of the day", TRUE );
+  
    
+ 
+The code above will write the subkey "Tip of the day" into the first of the registry folders listed below that is found and for
+which the user has write permission.
+
      
+
    1.  HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/Software/MyCompany/MyApplication
+
    2.  HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/MyCompany/MyApplication
+
    3.  HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/Software/MyApplication
+
    4.  HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/MyApplication
+
    
+If a setting is found in the HKEY_CURRENT_USER space, this setting
+is overwritten independently of write permissions in the
+HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE space.
+
     When s is Unix, and the execution environment is Unix, the
+search path list will be used when trying to determine a suitable
+filename for reading and writing settings files. By default, there are
+two entries in the search path:
+
     
      
+
    1.  SYSCONF - where SYSCONF is a directory specified when
+configuring TQt; by default it is INSTALL/etc/settings.
+
    2.  $HOME/.qt/ - where $HOME is the user's home directory.
+
    
+
     All insertions into the search path will go before $HOME/.qt/.
+For example:
+
    +  TQSettings settings;
+  settings.insertSearchPath( TQSettings::Unix, "/opt/MyCompany/share/etc" );
+  settings.insertSearchPath( TQSettings::Unix, "/opt/MyCompany/share/MyApplication/etc" );
+  // ...
+  
    
+ 
+Will result in a search path of:
+
      
+
    1.  SYSCONF
+
    2.  /opt/MyCompany/share/etc
+
    3.  /opt/MyCompany/share/MyApplication/etc
+
    4.  $HOME/.qt
+
    
+When reading settings the files are searched in the order shown
+above, with later settings overriding earlier settings. Files for
+which the user doesn't have read permission are ignored. When saving
+settings TQSettings works in the order shown above, writing
+to the first settings file for which the user has write permission.
+
     Note that paths in the file system are not created by this
+function, so they must already exist to be useful.
+
     Settings under Unix are stored in files whose names are based on the
+first subkey of the key (not including the search path). The algorithm
+for creating names is essentially: lowercase the first subkey, replace
+spaces with underscores and add 'rc', e.g.
+/MyCompany/MyApplication/background color will be stored in
+myapplicationrc (assuming that /MyCompany is part of
+the search path).
+
     
    See also removeSearchPath().
+
+
     
+
    Example: chart/chartform.cpp.
+
    bool TQSettings::readBoolEntry ( const TQString & key, bool def = FALSE, bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+
+
     Reads the entry specified by key, and returns a bool, or the
+default value, def, if the entry couldn't be read.
+If ok is non-null, *ok is set to TRUE if the key was read, FALSE
+otherwise.
+
     
    See also readEntry(), readNumEntry(), readDoubleEntry(), writeEntry(), and removeEntry().
+
+
    double TQSettings::readDoubleEntry ( const TQString & key, double def = 0, bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+
+
     Reads the entry specified by key, and returns a double, or the
+default value, def, if the entry couldn't be read.
+If ok is non-null, *ok is set to TRUE if the key was read, FALSE
+otherwise.
+
     
    See also readEntry(), readNumEntry(), readBoolEntry(), writeEntry(), and removeEntry().
+
+
    TQString TQSettings::readEntry ( const TQString & key, const TQString & def = TQString::null, bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+
+
     Reads the entry specified by key, and returns a TQString, or the
+default value, def, if the entry couldn't be read.
+If ok is non-null, *ok is set to TRUE if the key was read, FALSE
+otherwise.
+
     
    See also readListEntry(), readNumEntry(), readDoubleEntry(), readBoolEntry(), writeEntry(), and removeEntry().
+
+
    TQStringList TQSettings::readListEntry ( const TQString & key, bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+
+Reads the entry specified by key as a string. If ok is not
+0, *ok is set to TRUE if the key was read, otherwise *ok is
+set to FALSE.
+
     Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
+over a copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQStringList list = mySettings.readListEntry( "recentfiles" );
+    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
+    while( it != list.end() ) {
+        myProcessing( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also readEntry(), readDoubleEntry(), readBoolEntry(), writeEntry(), removeEntry(), and TQStringList::split().
+
+
    TQStringList TQSettings::readListEntry ( const TQString & key, const TQChar & separator, bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Reads the entry specified by key as a string. The separator
+is used to create a TQStringList by calling TQStringList::split(separator, entry). If ok is not 0: *ok is set to TRUE
+if the key was read, otherwise *ok is set to FALSE.
+
     Warning: As the documentation states, TQStringList::split() will
+omit empty strings from the list.  Because of this, it is
+impossible to retrieve identical list data with this function.  We
+recommend using the readListEntry() and writeEntry() overloads
+that do not take a separator argument.
+
     Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
+over a copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQStringList list = mySettings.readListEntry( "size", " " );
+    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
+    while( it != list.end() ) {
+        myProcessing( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also readEntry(), readDoubleEntry(), readBoolEntry(), writeEntry(), removeEntry(), and TQStringList::split().
+
+
    int TQSettings::readNumEntry ( const TQString & key, int def = 0, bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+
+
     Reads the entry specified by key, and returns an integer, or the
+default value, def, if the entry couldn't be read.
+If ok is non-null, *ok is set to TRUE if the key was read, FALSE
+otherwise.
+
     
    See also readEntry(), readDoubleEntry(), readBoolEntry(), writeEntry(), and removeEntry().
+
+
    bool TQSettings::removeEntry ( const TQString & key )
+
    
+Removes the entry specified by key.
+
     Returns true if the entry was successfully removed; otherwise
+returns false. Note that removing the last entry in any given
+folder, will also remove the folder.
+
     
    See also readEntry() and writeEntry().
+
+
    void TQSettings::removeSearchPath ( System s, const TQString & path )
+
    
+Removes all occurrences of path (using exact matching) from the
+settings search path for system s. Note that the default search
+paths cannot be removed.
+
     
    See also insertSearchPath().
+
+
    void TQSettings::resetGroup ()
+
    
+Set the current key prefix to the empty string.
+
+
    void TQSettings::setPath ( const TQString & domain, const TQString & product, Scope scope = Global )
+
    
+Insert platform-dependent paths from platform-independent information.
+
     The domain should be an Internet domain name
+controlled by the producer of the software, eg. Trolltech products
+use "trolltech.com".
+
     The product should be the official name of the product.
+
     The scope should be
+TQSettings::User for user-specific settings, or
+TQSettings::Global for system-wide settings (generally
+these will be read-only to many users).
+
     Not all information is relevant on all systems.
+
+
    TQStringList TQSettings::subkeyList ( const TQString & key ) const
+
    
+Returns a list of the keys which contain subkeys under key. Does not return any keys that contain entries.
+
     Example settings:
+
    +    /MyCompany/MyApplication/background color
+    /MyCompany/MyApplication/foreground color
+    /MyCompany/MyApplication/geometry/x
+    /MyCompany/MyApplication/geometry/y
+    /MyCompany/MyApplication/geometry/width
+    /MyCompany/MyApplication/geometry/height
+    /MyCompany/MyApplication/recent files/1
+    /MyCompany/MyApplication/recent files/2
+    /MyCompany/MyApplication/recent files/3
+    
    
+ 
+
    +    TQStringList keys = settings.subkeyList( "/MyCompany/MyApplication" );
+    
    
+ 
+
     In the above example, keys will contain 'geometry' and
+'recent files'. It will not contain 'background color' or
+'foreground color' because those keys contain entries not
+subkeys. To get a list of keys that contain entries rather than
+subkeys use entryList() instead.
+
     Warning: In the above example, if TQSettings is writing to an Ini file,
+then a call to
+
     subkeyList("/MyCompany") 
    
+ 
+will return an empty list. This happens because a key like
+
     /MyCompany/MyApplication/background color 
    
+ 
+is written to the file "mycompanyrc", under the section [MyApplication].
+This call is therefore a request to list the sections in an ini file, which
+is not supported in this version of TQSettings. This is a known issue which
+will be fixed in TQt-4.
+
     
    See also entryList().
+
+
    bool TQSettings::writeEntry ( const TQString & key, bool value )
+
    
+Writes the boolean entry value into key key. The key is
+created if it doesn't exist. Any previous value is overwritten by value.
+
     If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and FALSE is
+returned; otherwise TRUE is returned.
+
     Warning: On certain platforms, keys are required to contain at least
+two components (e.g., "/foo/bar"). This limitation does not apply to
+TQt 4.
+
     
    See also readListEntry(), readNumEntry(), readDoubleEntry(), readBoolEntry(), and removeEntry().
+
+
    Example: chart/chartform.cpp.
+
    bool TQSettings::writeEntry ( const TQString & key, double value )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Writes the double entry value into key key. The key is
+created if it doesn't exist. Any previous value is overwritten by value.
+
     If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and FALSE is
+returned; otherwise TRUE is returned.
+
     
    See also readListEntry(), readNumEntry(), readDoubleEntry(), readBoolEntry(), and removeEntry().
+
+
    bool TQSettings::writeEntry ( const TQString & key, int value )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Writes the integer entry value into key key. The key is
+created if it doesn't exist. Any previous value is overwritten by value.
+
     If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and FALSE is
+returned; otherwise TRUE is returned.
+
     
    See also readListEntry(), readNumEntry(), readDoubleEntry(), readBoolEntry(), and removeEntry().
+
+
    bool TQSettings::writeEntry ( const TQString & key, const TQString & value )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Writes the string entry value into key key. The key is
+created if it doesn't exist. Any previous value is overwritten by value. If value is an empty string or a null string the key's
+value will be an empty string.
+
     If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and FALSE is
+returned; otherwise TRUE is returned.
+
     
    See also readListEntry(), readNumEntry(), readDoubleEntry(), readBoolEntry(), and removeEntry().
+
+
    bool TQSettings::writeEntry ( const TQString & key, const TQStringList & value )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Writes the string list entry value into key key. The key
+is created if it doesn't exist. Any previous value is overwritten
+by value.
+
     If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and FALSE is
+returned; otherwise returns TRUE.
+
     
    See also readListEntry(), readNumEntry(), readDoubleEntry(), readBoolEntry(), and removeEntry().
+
+
    bool TQSettings::writeEntry ( const TQString & key, const TQStringList & value, const TQChar & separator )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Writes the string list entry value into key key. The key
+is created if it doesn't exist. Any previous value is overwritten
+by value. The list is stored as a sequence of strings separated
+by separator (using TQStringList::join()), so none of the
+strings in the list should contain the separator. If the list is
+empty or null the key's value will be an empty string.
+
     Warning: The list should not contain empty or null strings, as
+readListEntry() will use TQStringList::split() to recreate the
+list.  As the documentation states, TQStringList::split() will omit
+empty strings from the list.  Because of this, it is impossible to
+retrieve identical list data that is stored with this function.
+We recommend using the writeEntry() and readListEntry() overloads
+that do not take a separator argument.
+
     If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and FALSE is
+returned; otherwise returns TRUE.
+
     
    See also readListEntry(), readNumEntry(), readDoubleEntry(), readBoolEntry(), removeEntry(), and TQStringList::join().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsgistyle.html b/doc/html/ntqsgistyle.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3c1f8c8ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsgistyle.html
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSGIStyle Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSGIStyle Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQSGIStyle class provides SGI/Irix look and feel.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsgistyle.h>
+
    Inherits TQMotifStyle.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSGIStyle class provides SGI/Irix look and feel.
+
     
+
     This class implements the SGI look and feel. It resembles the
+SGI/Irix Motif GUI style as closely as TQStyle allows.
+
    See also Widget Appearance and Style.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSGIStyle::TQSGIStyle ( bool useHighlightCols = FALSE )
+
    
+Constructs a TQSGIStyle.
+
     If useHighlightCols is FALSE (default value), the style will
+polish the application's color palette to emulate the Motif way of
+highlighting, which is a simple inversion between the base and the
+text color.
+
     
    See also TQMotifStyle::useHighlightColors().
+
+
    TQSGIStyle::~TQSGIStyle () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the style.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsignal.html b/doc/html/ntqsignal.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e57bb471d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsignal.html
@@ -0,0 +1,182 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSignal Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSignal Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQSignal class can be used to send signals for classes
+that don't inherit TQObject.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsignal.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQSignal ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • ~TQSignal ()
      • 
+
    • bool connect ( const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
      • 
+
    • bool disconnect ( const TQObject * receiver, const char * member = 0 )
      • 
+
    • void activate ()
      • 
+
    • bool isBlocked () const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void block ( bool b )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void setParameter ( int value )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • int parameter () const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void setValue ( const TQVariant & value )
      • 
+
    • TQVariant value () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSignal class can be used to send signals for classes
+that don't inherit TQObject.
+
     
+
+
     If you want to send signals from a class that does not inherit
+TQObject, you can create an internal TQSignal object to emit the
+signal. You must also provide a function that connects the signal
+to an outside object slot.  This is how we have implemented
+signals in the TQMenuData class, which is not a TQObject.
+
     In general, we recommend inheriting TQObject instead. TQObject
+provides much more functionality.
+
     You can set a single TQVariant parameter for the signal with
+setValue().
+
     Note that TQObject is a private base class of TQSignal, i.e. you
+cannot call any TQObject member functions from a TQSignal object.
+
     Example:
+
    +        #include <ntqsignal.h>
+
+        class MyClass
+        {
+        public:
+            MyClass();
+            ~MyClass();
+
+            void doSomething();
+
+            void connect( TQObject *receiver, const char *member );
+
+        private:
+            TQSignal *sig;
+        };
+
+        MyClass::MyClass()
+        {
+            sig = new TQSignal;
+        }
+
+        MyClass::~MyClass()
+        {
+            delete sig;
+        }
+
+        void MyClass::doSomething()
+        {
+            // ... does something
+            sig->activate(); // emits the signal
+        }
+
+        void MyClass::connect( TQObject *receiver, const char *member )
+        {
+            sig->connect( receiver, member );
+        }
+    
    
+ 
+
    See also Input/Output and Networking and Miscellaneous Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSignal::TQSignal ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a signal object called name, with the parent object
+parent. These arguments are passed directly to TQObject.
+
+
    TQSignal::~TQSignal ()
+
    
+Destroys the signal. All connections are removed, as is the case
+with all TQObjects.
+
+
    void TQSignal::activate ()
+
    
+
+
     Emits the signal. If the platform supports TQVariant and a
+parameter has been set with setValue(), this value is passed in
+the signal.
+
+
    void TQSignal::block ( bool b )
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Blocks the signal if b is TRUE, or unblocks the signal if b is FALSE.
+
     An activated signal disappears into hyperspace if it is blocked.
+
     
    See also isBlocked(), activate(), and TQObject::blockSignals().
+
+
    bool TQSignal::connect ( const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
+
    
+Connects the signal to member in object receiver.
+
     
    See also disconnect() and TQObject::connect().
+
+
    bool TQSignal::disconnect ( const TQObject * receiver, const char * member = 0 )
+
    
+Disonnects the signal from member in object receiver.
+
     
    See also connect() and TQObject::disconnect().
+
+
    bool TQSignal::isBlocked () const
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Returns TRUE if the signal is blocked, or FALSE if it is not blocked.
+
     The signal is not blocked by default.
+
     
    See also block() and TQObject::signalsBlocked().
+
+
    int TQSignal::parameter () const
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
+
    void TQSignal::setParameter ( int value )
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
+
    void TQSignal::setValue ( const TQVariant & value )
+
    
+Sets the signal's parameter to value
+
+
    TQVariant TQSignal::value () const
+
    
+Returns the signal's parameter
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsignalmapper.html b/doc/html/ntqsignalmapper.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..54c4c57aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsignalmapper.html
@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSignalMapper Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSignalMapper Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQSignalMapper class bundles signals from identifiable senders.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsignalmapper.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
      
+
    • void map ()
      • 
+
    
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSignalMapper class bundles signals from identifiable senders.
+
     
+
     This class collects a set of parameterless signals, and re-emits
+them with integer or string parameters corresponding to the object
+that sent the signal.
+
    See also Input/Output and Networking.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSignalMapper::TQSignalMapper ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a TQSignalMapper called name, with parent parent.
+Like all TQObjects, it will be deleted when the parent is deleted.
+
+
    TQSignalMapper::~TQSignalMapper ()
+
    
+Destroys the TQSignalMapper.
+
+
    void TQSignalMapper::map () [slot]
+
    
+This slot emits signals based on which object sends signals to it.
+
+
    Examples: i18n/main.cpp and themes/themes.cpp.
+
    void TQSignalMapper::mapped ( int ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when map() is signaled from an object that
+has an integer mapping set.
+
     
    See also setMapping().
+
+
    Examples: i18n/main.cpp and themes/themes.cpp.
+
    void TQSignalMapper::mapped ( const TQString & ) [signal]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This signal is emitted when map() is signaled from an object that
+has a string mapping set.
+
     
    See also setMapping().
+
+
    void TQSignalMapper::removeMappings ( const TQObject * sender )
+
    
+Removes all mappings for sender. This is done automatically
+when mapped objects are destroyed.
+
+
    void TQSignalMapper::setMapping ( const TQObject * sender, int identifier ) [virtual]
+
    
+Adds a mapping so that when map() is signaled from the given sender, the signal mapped(identifier) is emitted.
+
     There may be at most one integer identifier for each object.
+
+
    Examples: i18n/main.cpp and themes/themes.cpp.
+
    void TQSignalMapper::setMapping ( const TQObject * sender, const TQString & identifier ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Adds a mapping so that when map() is signaled from the given sender, the signal mapper(identifier) is emitted.
+
     There may be at most one string identifier for each object, and it
+may not be empty.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsimplerichtext.html b/doc/html/ntqsimplerichtext.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3bba1f9a5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsimplerichtext.html
@@ -0,0 +1,223 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSimpleRichText Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSimpleRichText Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQSimpleRichText class provides a small displayable piece of rich text.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsimplerichtext.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQSimpleRichText ( const TQString & text, const TQFont & fnt, const TQString & context = TQString::null, const TQStyleSheet * sheet = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQSimpleRichText ( const TQString & text, const TQFont & fnt, const TQString & context, const TQStyleSheet * sheet, const TQMimeSourceFactory * factory, int pageBreak = -1, const TQColor & linkColor = TQt::blue, bool linkUnderline = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • ~TQSimpleRichText ()
      • 
+
    • void setWidth ( int w )
      • 
+
    • void setWidth ( TQPainter * p, int w )
      • 
+
    • void setDefaultFont ( const TQFont & f )
      • 
+
    • int width () const
      • 
+
    • int widthUsed () const
      • 
+
    • int height () const
      • 
+
    • void adjustSize ()
      • 
+
    • void draw ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, const TQRect & clipRect, const TQColorGroup & cg, const TQBrush * paper = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • void draw ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, const TQRegion & clipRegion, const TQColorGroup & cg, const TQBrush * paper = 0 ) const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • TQString context () const
      • 
+
    • TQString anchorAt ( const TQPoint & pos ) const
      • 
+
    • bool inText ( const TQPoint & pos ) const
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSimpleRichText class provides a small displayable piece of rich text.
+
     
+
+
     This class encapsulates simple rich text usage in which a string
+is interpreted as rich text and can be drawn. This is particularly
+useful if you want to display some rich text in a custom widget. A
+TQStyleSheet is needed to interpret the tags and format the rich
+text. TQt provides a default HTML-like style sheet, but you may
+define custom style sheets.
+
     Once created, the rich text object can be queried for its width(),
+height(), and the actual width used (see widthUsed()). Most
+importantly, it can be drawn on any given TQPainter with draw().
+TQSimpleRichText can also be used to implement hypertext or active
+text facilities by using anchorAt(). A hit test through inText()
+makes it possible to use simple rich text for text objects in
+editable drawing canvases.
+
     Once constructed from a string the contents cannot be changed,
+only resized. If the contents change, just throw the rich text
+object away and make a new one with the new contents.
+
     For large documents use TQTextEdit or TQTextBrowser. For very small
+items of rich text you can use a TQLabel.
+
     If you are using TQSimpleRichText to print in high resolution you
+should call setWidth(TQPainter, int) so that the content will be
+laid out properly on the page.
+
    See also Text Related Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSimpleRichText::TQSimpleRichText ( const TQString & text, const TQFont & fnt, const TQString & context = TQString::null, const TQStyleSheet * sheet = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a TQSimpleRichText from the rich text string text and
+the font fnt.
+
     The font is used as a basis for the text rendering. When using
+rich text rendering on a widget w, you would normally specify
+the widget's font, for example:
+
     
    +    TQSimpleRichText myrichtext( contents, mywidget->font() );
+    
    
+ 
+
     context is the optional context of the rich text object. This
+becomes important if text contains relative references, for
+example within image tags. TQSimpleRichText always uses the default
+mime source factory (see TQMimeSourceFactory::defaultFactory())
+to resolve those references. The context will then be used to
+calculate the absolute path. See
+TQMimeSourceFactory::makeAbsolute() for details.
+
     The sheet is an optional style sheet. If it is 0, the default
+style sheet will be used (see TQStyleSheet::defaultSheet()).
+
+
    TQSimpleRichText::TQSimpleRichText ( const TQString & text, const TQFont & fnt, const TQString & context, const TQStyleSheet * sheet, const TQMimeSourceFactory * factory, int pageBreak = -1, const TQColor & linkColor = TQt::blue, bool linkUnderline = TRUE )
+
    
+Constructs a TQSimpleRichText from the rich text string text and
+the font fnt.
+
     This is a slightly more complex constructor for TQSimpleRichText
+that takes an additional mime source factory factory, a page
+break parameter pageBreak and a bool linkUnderline. linkColor is only provided for compatibility, but has no effect,
+as TQColorGroup's TQColorGroup::link() color is used now.
+
     context is the optional context of the rich text object. This
+becomes important if text contains relative references, for
+example within image tags. TQSimpleRichText always uses the default
+mime source factory (see TQMimeSourceFactory::defaultFactory())
+to resolve those references. The context will then be used to
+calculate the absolute path. See
+TQMimeSourceFactory::makeAbsolute() for details.
+
     The sheet is an optional style sheet. If it is 0, the default
+style sheet will be used (see TQStyleSheet::defaultSheet()).
+
     This constructor is useful for creating a TQSimpleRichText object
+suitable for printing. Set pageBreak to be the height of the
+contents area of the pages.
+
+
    TQSimpleRichText::~TQSimpleRichText ()
+
    
+Destroys the rich text object, freeing memory.
+
+
    void TQSimpleRichText::adjustSize ()
+
    
+Adjusts the richt text object to a reasonable size.
+
     
    See also setWidth().
+
+
    TQString TQSimpleRichText::anchorAt ( const TQPoint & pos ) const
+
    
+Returns the anchor at the requested position, pos. An empty
+string is returned if no anchor is specified for this position.
+
+
    TQString TQSimpleRichText::context () const
+
    
+Returns the context of the rich text object. If no context has
+been specified in the constructor, a null string is returned. The
+context is the path to use to look up relative links, such as
+image tags and anchor references.
+
+
    void TQSimpleRichText::draw ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, const TQRect & clipRect, const TQColorGroup & cg, const TQBrush * paper = 0 ) const
+
    
+Draws the formatted text with painter p, at position (x, y), clipped to clipRect. The clipping rectangle is given in the
+rich text object's coordinates translated by (x, y). Passing
+an null rectangle results in no clipping. Colors from the color
+group cg are used as needed, and if not 0, *paper is used as
+the background brush.
+
     Note that the display code is highly optimized to reduce flicker,
+so passing a brush for paper is preferable to simply clearing
+the area to be painted and then calling this without a brush.
+
+
    Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, and mdi/application.cpp.
+
    void TQSimpleRichText::draw ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, const TQRegion & clipRegion, const TQColorGroup & cg, const TQBrush * paper = 0 ) const
+
     
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Use the version with clipRect instead. The region version has
+problems with larger documents on some platforms (on X11 regions
+internally are represented with 16bit coordinates).
+
+
    int TQSimpleRichText::height () const
+
    
+Returns the height of the rich text object in pixels.
+
     
    See also setWidth().
+
+
    Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, and mdi/application.cpp.
+
    bool TQSimpleRichText::inText ( const TQPoint & pos ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if pos is within a text line of the rich text
+object; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    void TQSimpleRichText::setDefaultFont ( const TQFont & f )
+
    
+Sets the default font for the rich text object to f
+
+
    void TQSimpleRichText::setWidth ( TQPainter * p, int w )
+
    
+Sets the width of the rich text object to w pixels,
+recalculating the layout as if it were to be drawn with painter p.
+
     Passing a painter is useful when you intend drawing on devices
+other than the screen, for example a TQPrinter.
+
     
    See also height() and adjustSize().
+
+
    Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, and mdi/application.cpp.
+
    void TQSimpleRichText::setWidth ( int w )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the width of the rich text object to w pixels.
+
     
    See also height() and adjustSize().
+
+
    int TQSimpleRichText::width () const
+
    
+Returns the set width of the rich text object in pixels.
+
     
    See also widthUsed().
+
+
    int TQSimpleRichText::widthUsed () const
+
    
+Returns the width in pixels that is actually used by the rich text
+object. This can be smaller or wider than the set width.
+
     It may be wider, for example, if the text contains images or
+non-breakable words that are already wider than the available
+space. It's smaller when the object only consists of lines that do
+not fill the width completely.
+
     
    See also width().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsize.html b/doc/html/ntqsize.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..de930bdbe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsize.html
@@ -0,0 +1,378 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSize Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSize Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQSize class defines the size of a two-dimensional object.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsize.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
      
+
    • bool operator== ( const TQSize & s1, const TQSize & s2 )
      • 
+
    • bool operator!= ( const TQSize & s1, const TQSize & s2 )
      • 
+
    • const TQSize operator+ ( const TQSize & s1, const TQSize & s2 )
      • 
+
    • const TQSize operator- ( const TQSize & s1, const TQSize & s2 )
      • 
+
    • const TQSize operator* ( const TQSize & s, int c )
      • 
+
    • const TQSize operator* ( int c, const TQSize & s )
      • 
+
    • const TQSize operator* ( const TQSize & s, double c )
      • 
+
    • const TQSize operator* ( double c, const TQSize & s )
      • 
+
    • const TQSize operator/ ( const TQSize & s, int c )
      • 
+
    • const TQSize operator/ ( const TQSize & s, double c )
      • 
+
    • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQSize & sz )
      • 
+
    • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQSize & sz )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSize class defines the size of a two-dimensional object.
+
     
+
+
     A size is specified by a width and a height.
+
     The coordinate type is TQCOORD (defined in <ntqwindowdefs.h> as int).
+The minimum value of TQCOORD is TQCOORD_MIN (-2147483648) and the maximum
+value is TQCOORD_MAX (2147483647).
+
     The size can be set in the constructor and changed with setWidth()
+and setHeight(), or using operator+=(), operator-=(), operator*=()
+and operator/=(), etc. You can swap the width and height with
+transpose(). You can get a size which holds the maximum height and
+width of two sizes using expandedTo(), and the minimum height and
+width of two sizes using boundedTo().
+
     
    See also TQPoint, TQRect, Graphics Classes, and Image Processing Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQSize::ScaleMode
     
+
     This enum type defines the different ways of scaling a size.
+
     
     
+
      
+
    • TQSize::ScaleFree - The size is scaled freely. The ratio is not preserved.
+
    • TQSize::ScaleMin - The size is scaled to a rectangle as large as possible
+inside a given rectangle, preserving the aspect ratio.
+
    • TQSize::ScaleMax - The size is scaled to a rectangle as small as possible
+outside a given rectangle, preserving the aspect ratio.
+
     
    See also TQSize::scale(), TQImage::scale(), and TQImage::smoothScale().
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSize::TQSize ()
+
    
+
+Constructs a size with invalid (negative) width and height.
+
+
    TQSize::TQSize ( int w, int h )
+
    
+
+Constructs a size with width w and height h.
+
+
    TQSize TQSize::boundedTo ( const TQSize & otherSize ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a size with the minimum width and height of this size and
+otherSize.
+
+
    TQSize TQSize::expandedTo ( const TQSize & otherSize ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a size with the maximum width and height of this size and
+otherSize.
+
+
    Examples: customlayout/card.cpp and customlayout/flow.cpp.
+
    int TQSize::height () const
+
    
+
+Returns the height.
+
    See also width().
+
+
    Examples: movies/main.cpp, qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp, and qfd/qfd.cpp.
+
    bool TQSize::isEmpty () const
+
    
+
+Returns TRUE if the width is less than or equal to 0, or the height is
+less than or equal to 0; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQSize::isNull () const
+
    
+
+Returns TRUE if the width is 0 and the height is 0; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQSize::isValid () const
+
    
+
+Returns TRUE if the width is equal to or greater than 0 and the height is
+equal to or greater than 0; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    TQSize & TQSize::operator*= ( int c )
+
    
+
+Multiplies both the width and height by c and returns a reference to
+the size.
+
+
    TQSize & TQSize::operator*= ( double c )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Multiplies both the width and height by c and returns a reference to
+the size.
+
     Note that the result is truncated.
+
+
    TQSize & TQSize::operator+= ( const TQSize & s )
+
    
+
+
     Adds s to the size and returns a reference to this size.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQSize s(  3, 7 );
+    TQSize r( -1, 4 );
+    s += r;                     // s becomes (2,11)
+
    
+ 
+
+
    TQSize & TQSize::operator-= ( const TQSize & s )
+
    
+
+
     Subtracts s from the size and returns a reference to this size.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQSize s(  3, 7 );
+    TQSize r( -1, 4 );
+    s -= r;                     // s becomes (4,3)
+  
    
+ 
+
+
    TQSize & TQSize::operator/= ( int c )
+
    
+
+Divides both the width and height by c and returns a reference to the
+size.
+
+
    TQSize & TQSize::operator/= ( double c )
+
    
+
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Divides both the width and height by c and returns a reference to the
+size.
+
     Note that the result is truncated.
+
+
    TQCOORD & TQSize::rheight ()
+
    
+
+Returns a reference to the height.
+
     Using a reference makes it possible to directly manipulate the height.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQSize s( 100, 10 );
+    s.rheight() += 5;           // s becomes (100,15)
+  
    
+ 
+
     
    See also rwidth().
+
+
    TQCOORD & TQSize::rwidth ()
+
    
+
+Returns a reference to the width.
+
     Using a reference makes it possible to directly manipulate the width.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQSize s( 100, 10 );
+    s.rwidth() += 20;           // s becomes (120,10)
+  
    
+ 
+
     
    See also rheight().
+
+
    void TQSize::scale ( int w, int h, ScaleMode mode )
+
    
+Scales the size to a rectangle of width w and height h according
+to the ScaleMode mode.
+
     
      
+
    •  If mode is ScaleFree, the size is set to (w, h).
+
    •  If mode is ScaleMin, the current size is scaled to a rectangle
+as large as possible inside (w, h), preserving the aspect ratio.
+
    •  If mode is ScaleMax, the current size is scaled to a rectangle
+as small as possible outside (w, h), preserving the aspect ratio.
+
    
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQSize t1( 10, 12 );
+    t1.scale( 60, 60, TQSize::ScaleFree );
+    // t1 is (60, 60)
+
+    TQSize t2( 10, 12 );
+    t2.scale( 60, 60, TQSize::ScaleMin );
+    // t2 is (50, 60)
+
+    TQSize t3( 10, 12 );
+    t3.scale( 60, 60, TQSize::ScaleMax );
+    // t3 is (60, 72)
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    void TQSize::scale ( const TQSize & s, ScaleMode mode )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Equivalent to scale(s.width(), s.height(), mode).
+
+
    void TQSize::setHeight ( int h )
+
    
+
+Sets the height to h.
+
    See also height() and setWidth().
+
+
    void TQSize::setWidth ( int w )
+
    
+
+Sets the width to w.
+
    See also width() and setHeight().
+
+
    void TQSize::transpose ()
+
    
+Swaps the values of width and height.
+
+
    int TQSize::width () const
+
    
+
+Returns the width.
+
    See also height().
+
+
    Examples: movies/main.cpp, qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp, and qfd/qfd.cpp.
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    bool operator!= ( const TQSize & s1, const TQSize & s2 )
+
    
+
+
+Returns TRUE if s1 and s2 are different; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    const TQSize operator* ( const TQSize & s, int c )
+
    
+
+
+Multiplies s by c and returns the result.
+
+
    const TQSize operator* ( int c, const TQSize & s )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+Multiplies s by c and returns the result.
+
+
    const TQSize operator* ( const TQSize & s, double c )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+Multiplies s by c and returns the result.
+
+
    const TQSize operator* ( double c, const TQSize & s )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+Multiplies s by c and returns the result.
+
+
    const TQSize operator+ ( const TQSize & s1, const TQSize & s2 )
+
    
+
+
+Returns the sum of s1 and s2; each component is added separately.
+
+
    const TQSize operator- ( const TQSize & s1, const TQSize & s2 )
+
    
+
+
+Returns s2 subtracted from s1; each component is
+subtracted separately.
+
+
    const TQSize operator/ ( const TQSize & s, int c )
+
    
+
+
+Divides s by c and returns the result.
+
+
    const TQSize operator/ ( const TQSize & s, double c )
+
    
+
+
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Divides s by c and returns the result.
+
     Note that the result is truncated.
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQSize & sz )
+
    
+
+Writes the size sz to the stream s and returns a reference to
+the stream.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
    bool operator== ( const TQSize & s1, const TQSize & s2 )
+
    
+
+
+Returns TRUE if s1 and s2 are equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQSize & sz )
+
    
+
+Reads the size from the stream s into size sz and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsizegrip.html b/doc/html/ntqsizegrip.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..faf977270
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsizegrip.html
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSizeGrip Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSizeGrip Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQSizeGrip class provides a corner-grip for resizing a top-level window.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsizegrip.h>
+
    Inherits TQWidget.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
     The TQSizeGrip class provides a corner-grip for resizing a top-level window.
+
     
+
+
+
     This widget works like the standard Windows resize handle. In the
+X11 version this resize handle generally works differently from
+the one provided by the system; we hope to reduce this difference
+in the future.
+
     Put this widget anywhere in a widget tree and the user can use it
+to resize the top-level window. Generally, this should be in the
+lower right-hand corner. Note that TQStatusBar already uses this
+widget, so if you have a status bar (e.g. you are using
+TQMainWindow), then you don't need to use this widget explicitly.
+
      
+
     
    See also TQStatusBar, Widget Appearance and Style, Main Window and Related Classes, and Basic Widgets.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSizeGrip::TQSizeGrip ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a resize corner called name, as a child widget of parent.
+
+
    TQSizeGrip::~TQSizeGrip ()
+
    
+Destroys the size grip.
+
+
    void TQSizeGrip::mouseMoveEvent ( TQMouseEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Resizes the top-level widget containing this widget. The event is
+in e.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
+
    void TQSizeGrip::mousePressEvent ( TQMouseEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Primes the resize operation. The event is in e.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
+
    void TQSizeGrip::paintEvent ( TQPaintEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Paints the resize grip. Resize grips are usually rendered as small
+diagonal textured lines in the lower-right corner. The event is in
+e.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
+
    TQSize TQSizeGrip::sizeHint () const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the size grip's size hint; this is a small size.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsizepolicy.html b/doc/html/ntqsizepolicy.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bbc58841b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsizepolicy.html
@@ -0,0 +1,291 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSizePolicy Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSizePolicy Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQSizePolicy class is a layout attribute describing horizontal
+and vertical resizing policy.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsizepolicy.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSizePolicy class is a layout attribute describing horizontal
+and vertical resizing policy.
+
     
+
+
     The size policy of a widget is an expression of its willingness to
+be resized in various ways.
+
     Widgets that reimplement TQWidget::sizePolicy() return a TQSizePolicy
+that describes the horizontal and vertical resizing policy they
+prefer when being laid out. Only one of the
+    constructors is of interest in most applications.
+
     TQSizePolicy contains two independent SizeType objects; one describes
+the widgets's horizontal size policy, and the other describes its
+vertical size policy. It also contains a flag to indicate whether the
+height and width of its preferred size are related.
+
     The horizontal and vertical SizeTypes are set in the usual constructor
+and can be queried using a variety of functions.
+
     The hasHeightForWidth() flag indicates whether the widget's sizeHint()
+is width-dependent (such as a word-wrapping label) or not.
+
     
    See also TQSizePolicy::SizeType, Widget Appearance and Style, and Layout Management.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQSizePolicy::ExpandData
    
+
+
     This enum type describes in which directions a widget can make use
+of extra space. There are four possible values:
+
      
+
    • TQSizePolicy::NoDirection - the widget cannot make use of extra space in
+any direction.
+
    • TQSizePolicy::Horizontally - the widget can usefully be wider than the
+sizeHint().
+
    • TQSizePolicy::Vertically - the widget can usefully be taller than the
+sizeHint().
+
    • TQSizePolicy::BothDirections - the widget can usefully be both wider and
+taller than the sizeHint().
+
    
+
    TQSizePolicy::SizeType
    
+
+
     The per-dimension sizing types used when constructing a
+TQSizePolicy are:
+
      
+
    • TQSizePolicy::Fixed - The TQWidget::sizeHint() is the only acceptable
+alternative, so the widget can never grow or shrink (e.g. the
+vertical direction of a push button).
+
    • TQSizePolicy::Minimum - The sizeHint() is minimal, and sufficient. The
+widget can be expanded, but there is no advantage to it being
+larger (e.g. the horizontal direction of a push button).
+It cannot be smaller than the size provided by sizeHint().
+
    • TQSizePolicy::Maximum - The sizeHint() is a maximum. The widget can be
+shrunk any amount without detriment if other widgets need the
+space (e.g. a separator line).
+It cannot be larger than the size provided by sizeHint().
+
    • TQSizePolicy::Preferred - The sizeHint() is best, but the widget can be
+shrunk and still be useful. The widget can be expanded, but there
+is no advantage to it being larger than sizeHint() (the default
+TQWidget policy).
+
    • TQSizePolicy::Expanding - The sizeHint() is a sensible size, but the
+widget can be shrunk and still be useful. The widget can make use
+of extra space, so it should get as much space as possible (e.g.
+the horizontal direction of a slider).
+
    • TQSizePolicy::MinimumExpanding - The sizeHint() is minimal, and sufficient.
+The widget can make use of extra space, so it should get as much
+space as possible (e.g. the horizontal direction of a slider).
+
    • TQSizePolicy::Ignored - the sizeHint() is ignored. The widget will get as
+much space as possible.
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSizePolicy::TQSizePolicy ()
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a minimally initialized TQSizePolicy.
+
+
    TQSizePolicy::TQSizePolicy ( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, bool hfw = FALSE )
+
    
+
+
     
+This is the constructor normally used to return a value in the
+overridden TQWidget::sizePolicy() function of a TQWidget
+subclass.
+
     It constructs a TQSizePolicy with independent horizontal and
+vertical sizing types, hor and ver respectively. These sizing types affect how the widget
+is treated by the layout engine.
+
     If hfw is TRUE, the preferred height of the widget is dependent
+on the width of the widget (for example, a TQLabel with line
+wrapping).
+
     
    See also horData(), verData(), and hasHeightForWidth().
+
+
    TQSizePolicy::TQSizePolicy ( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, uchar horStretch, uchar verStretch, bool hfw = FALSE )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a TQSizePolicy with independent horizontal and vertical
+sizing types hor and ver, and stretch factors horStretch
+and verStretch.
+
     If hfw is TRUE, the preferred height of the widget is dependent on the
+width of the widget.
+
     
    See also horStretch() and verStretch().
+
+
    ExpandData TQSizePolicy::expanding () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns whether this layout can make use of more space than
+sizeHint(). A value of Vertical or Horizontal means that it wants
+to grow in only one dimension, whereas BothDirections means that
+it wants to grow in both dimensions.
+
     
    See also mayShrinkHorizontally(), mayGrowHorizontally(), mayShrinkVertically(), and mayGrowVertically().
+
+
    bool TQSizePolicy::hasHeightForWidth () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the widget's preferred height depends on its
+width; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setHeightForWidth().
+
+
    SizeType TQSizePolicy::horData () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the horizontal component of the size policy.
+
     
    See also setHorData(), verData(), and horStretch().
+
+
    uint TQSizePolicy::horStretch () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the horizontal stretch factor of the size policy.
+
     
    See also setHorStretch() and verStretch().
+
+
    bool TQSizePolicy::mayGrowHorizontally () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the widget can sensibly be wider than its
+sizeHint(); otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also mayGrowVertically() and mayShrinkHorizontally().
+
+
    bool TQSizePolicy::mayGrowVertically () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the widget can sensibly be taller than its
+sizeHint(); otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also mayGrowHorizontally() and mayShrinkVertically().
+
+
    bool TQSizePolicy::mayShrinkHorizontally () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the widget can sensibly be narrower than its
+sizeHint(); otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also mayShrinkVertically() and mayGrowHorizontally().
+
+
    bool TQSizePolicy::mayShrinkVertically () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the widget can sensibly be shorter than its
+sizeHint(); otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also mayShrinkHorizontally() and mayGrowVertically().
+
+
    bool TQSizePolicy::operator!= ( const TQSizePolicy & s ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if this policy is different from s; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also operator==().
+
+
    bool TQSizePolicy::operator== ( const TQSizePolicy & s ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if this policy is equal to s; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     
    See also operator!=().
+
+
    void TQSizePolicy::setHeightForWidth ( bool b )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the hasHeightForWidth() flag to b.
+
     
    See also hasHeightForWidth().
+
+
    void TQSizePolicy::setHorData ( SizeType d )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the horizontal component of the size policy to size type d.
+
     
    See also horData() and setVerData().
+
+
    void TQSizePolicy::setHorStretch ( uchar sf )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the horizontal stretch factor of the size policy to sf.
+
     
    See also horStretch() and setVerStretch().
+
+
    void TQSizePolicy::setVerData ( SizeType d )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the vertical component of the size policy to size type d.
+
     
    See also verData() and setHorData().
+
+
    void TQSizePolicy::setVerStretch ( uchar sf )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the vertical stretch factor of the size policy to sf.
+
     
    See also verStretch() and setHorStretch().
+
+
    void TQSizePolicy::transpose ()
+
    
+
+
     Swaps the horizontal and vertical policies and stretches.
+
+
    SizeType TQSizePolicy::verData () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the vertical component of the size policy.
+
     
    See also setVerData(), horData(), and verStretch().
+
+
    uint TQSizePolicy::verStretch () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the vertical stretch factor of the size policy.
+
     
    See also setVerStretch() and horStretch().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsjiscodec.html b/doc/html/ntqsjiscodec.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ec11ca4de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsjiscodec.html
@@ -0,0 +1,113 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSjisCodec Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSjisCodec Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQSjisCodec class provides conversion to and from Shift-JIS.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqsjiscodec.h>
+
    Inherits TQTextCodec.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+ 
+
+
+The TQSjisCodec class provides conversion to and from Shift-JIS.
+
     More precisely, the TQSjisCodec class subclasses TQTextCodec to
+provide support for Shift-JIS, an encoding of JIS X 0201 Latin, JIS
+X 0201 Kana or JIS X 0208.
+
     The environment variable UNICODEMAP_JP can be used to fine-tune
+TQJisCodec, TQSjisCodec and TQEucJpCodec. The TQJisCodec
+documentation describes how to use this variable.
+
     Most of the code here was written by Serika Kurusugawa,
+a.k.a. Junji Takagi, and is included in TQt with the author's
+permission and the grateful thanks of the Trolltech team.
+Here is the copyright statement for the code as it was at the
+point of contribution. Trolltech's subsequent modifications
+are covered by the usual copyright for TQt.
+
     
+
     Copyright (C) 1999 Serika Kurusugawa. All rights reserved.
+
     Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+are met:
+
      
+
    1.  Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+
    2.  Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+
    
+
     THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS".
+ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSETQUENTIAL
+DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+SUCH DAMAGE.
+
    See also Internationalization with TQt.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSjisCodec::TQSjisCodec ()
+
    
+Creates a Shift-JIS codec. Note that this is done automatically by
+the TQApplication, you do not need construct your own.
+
+
    TQSjisCodec::~TQSjisCodec ()
+
    
+Destroys the Shift-JIS codec.
+
+
    const char * TQSjisCodec::mimeName () const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the codec's mime name.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQTextCodec.
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqslider.html b/doc/html/ntqslider.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a5b5e9781
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqslider.html
@@ -0,0 +1,368 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSlider Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSlider Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQSlider widget provides a vertical or horizontal slider.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqslider.h>
+
    Inherits TQWidget and TQRangeControl.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Important Inherited Members
    
+
      
+
    • void setRange ( int minValue, int maxValue )
      • 
+
    
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • int lineStep - the current line step
      • 
+
    • int maxValue - the current maximum value of the slider
      • 
+
    • int minValue - the current minimum value of the slider
      • 
+
    • Orientation orientation - the slider's orientation
      • 
+
    • int pageStep - the current page step
      • 
+
    • int tickInterval - the interval between tickmarks
      • 
+
    • TickSetting tickmarks - the tickmark settings for this slider
      • 
+
    • bool tracking - whether slider tracking is enabled
      • 
+
    • int value - the current slider value
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSlider widget provides a vertical or horizontal slider.
+
     
+
+
     The slider is the classic widget for controlling a bounded value.
+It lets the user move a slider along a horizontal or vertical
+groove and translates the slider's position into an integer value
+within the legal range.
+
     TQSlider inherits TQRangeControl, which provides the "integer" side
+of the slider. setRange() and value() are likely to be used by
+practically all slider users; see the TQRangeControl
+documentation for information about the many other functions that
+class provides.
+
     The main functions offered by the slider itself are tickmark and
+orientation control; you can use setTickmarks() to indicate where
+you want the tickmarks to be, setTickInterval() to indicate how
+many of them you want and setOrientation() to indicate whether the
+slider is to be horizontal or vertical.
+
     A slider accepts focus on Tab and uses the mouse wheel and a
+suitable keyboard interface.
+
      
+
     
+
     
    See also TQScrollBar, TQSpinBox, GUI Design Handbook: Slider, and Basic Widgets.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQSlider::TickSetting
    
+
+
     This enum specifies where the tickmarks are to be drawn relative
+to the slider's groove and the handle the user moves.
+
      
+
    • TQSlider::NoMarks - do not draw any tickmarks.
+
    • TQSlider::Both - draw tickmarks on both sides of the groove.
+
    • TQSlider::Above - draw tickmarks above the (horizontal) slider
+
    • TQSlider::Below - draw tickmarks below the (horizontal) slider
+
    • TQSlider::Left - draw tickmarks to the left of the (vertical) slider
+
    • TQSlider::Right - draw tickmarks to the right of the (vertical) slider
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSlider::TQSlider ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a vertical slider.
+
     The parent and name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
+
    TQSlider::TQSlider ( Orientation orientation, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a slider.
+
     The orientation must be TQt::Vertical or TQt::Horizontal.
+
     The parent and name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
+
    TQSlider::TQSlider ( int minValue, int maxValue, int pageStep, int value, Orientation orientation, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a slider whose value can never be smaller than minValue or greater than maxValue, whose page step size is pageStep and whose value is initially value (which is
+guaranteed to be in range using bound()).
+
     If orientation is TQt::Vertical the slider is vertical and if it
+is TQt::Horizontal the slider is horizontal.
+
     The parent and name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
+
    TQSlider::~TQSlider ()
+
    
+Destructor.
+
+
    void TQSlider::addStep () [slot]
+
    
+Moves the slider one pageStep() up or right.
+
+
    int TQSlider::lineStep () const
+
    Returns the current line step.
+See the "lineStep" property for details.
+
    int TQSlider::maxValue () const
+
    Returns the current maximum value of the slider.
+See the "maxValue" property for details.
+
    int TQSlider::minValue () const
+
    Returns the current minimum value of the slider.
+See the "minValue" property for details.
+
    Orientation TQSlider::orientation () const
+
    Returns the slider's orientation.
+See the "orientation" property for details.
+
    int TQSlider::pageStep () const
+
    Returns the current page step.
+See the "pageStep" property for details.
+
    void TQSlider::rangeChange () [virtual protected]
+
    
+Implements the virtual TQRangeControl function.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQRangeControl.
+
    void TQSlider::setLineStep ( int )
+
    Sets the current line step.
+See the "lineStep" property for details.
+
    void TQSlider::setMaxValue ( int )
+
    Sets the current maximum value of the slider.
+See the "maxValue" property for details.
+
    void TQSlider::setMinValue ( int )
+
    Sets the current minimum value of the slider.
+See the "minValue" property for details.
+
    void TQSlider::setOrientation ( Orientation ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the slider's orientation.
+See the "orientation" property for details.
+
    void TQSlider::setPageStep ( int )
+
    Sets the current page step.
+See the "pageStep" property for details.
+
    void TQSlider::setPalette ( const TQPalette & p ) [virtual]
+
    
+Reimplements the virtual function TQWidget::setPalette().
+
     Sets the background color to the mid color for Motif style sliders
+using palette p.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
+
    void TQRangeControl::setRange ( int minValue, int maxValue )
+
    
+Sets the range control's minimum value to minValue and its
+maximum value to maxValue.
+
     Calls the virtual rangeChange() function if one or both of the new
+minimum and maximum values are different from the previous
+setting. Calls the virtual valueChange() function if the current
+value is adjusted because it was outside the new range.
+
     If maxValue is smaller than minValue, minValue becomes
+the only legal value.
+
     
    See also minValue and maxValue.
+
+
    Examples: listbox/listbox.cpp, t12/lcdrange.cpp, t5/main.cpp, t6/main.cpp, t8/lcdrange.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    void TQSlider::setTickInterval ( int ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the interval between tickmarks.
+See the "tickInterval" property for details.
+
    void TQSlider::setTickmarks ( TickSetting ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the tickmark settings for this slider.
+See the "tickmarks" property for details.
+
    void TQSlider::setTracking ( bool enable ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether slider tracking is enabled to enable.
+See the "tracking" property for details.
+
    void TQSlider::setValue ( int ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the current slider value.
+See the "value" property for details.
+
    void TQSlider::sliderMoved ( int value ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the slider is dragged, with the new
+slider value as its argument.
+
+
    void TQSlider::sliderPressed () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user presses the slider with the
+mouse.
+
+
    TQRect TQSlider::sliderRect () const
+
    
+Returns the slider handle rectangle. (This is the visual marker
+that the user can move.)
+
+
    void TQSlider::sliderReleased () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user releases the slider with the mouse.
+
+
    int TQSlider::sliderStart () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the start position of the slider.
+
+
    void TQSlider::subtractStep () [slot]
+
    
+Moves the slider one pageStep() down or left.
+
+
    int TQSlider::tickInterval () const
+
    Returns the interval between tickmarks.
+See the "tickInterval" property for details.
+
    TickSetting TQSlider::tickmarks () const
+
    Returns the tickmark settings for this slider.
+See the "tickmarks" property for details.
+
    bool TQSlider::tracking () const
+
    Returns TRUE if slider tracking is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "tracking" property for details.
+
    int TQSlider::value () const
+
    Returns the current slider value.
+See the "value" property for details.
+
    void TQSlider::valueChange () [virtual protected]
+
    
+Implements the virtual TQRangeControl function.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQRangeControl.
+
    void TQSlider::valueChanged ( int value ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the slider value is changed, with the
+new slider value as its argument.
+
+
    Examples: rangecontrols/rangecontrols.cpp, simple/main.cpp, t12/lcdrange.cpp, t5/main.cpp, t6/main.cpp, t7/lcdrange.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    int lineStep
    
+
    This property holds the current line step.
+
    When setting lineStep, the virtual stepChange() function will be
+called if the new line step is different from the previous
+setting.
+
     
    See also setSteps(), TQRangeControl::pageStep(), and setRange().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setLineStep() and get this property's value with lineStep().
+
    int maxValue
    
+
    This property holds the current maximum value of the slider.
+
    When setting this property, the TQSlider::minValue is adjusted,
+if necessary, to ensure that the range remains valid.
+
     
    See also setRange().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setMaxValue() and get this property's value with maxValue().
+
    int minValue
    
+
    This property holds the current minimum value of the slider.
+
    When setting this property, the TQSlider::maxValue is adjusted,
+if necessary, to ensure that the range remains valid.
+
     
    See also setRange().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setMinValue() and get this property's value with minValue().
+
    Orientation orientation
    
+
    This property holds the slider's orientation.
+
    The orientation must be TQt::Vertical (the default) or TQt::Horizontal.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setOrientation() and get this property's value with orientation().
+
    int pageStep
    
+
    This property holds the current page step.
+
    When setting pageStep, the virtual stepChange() function will be
+called if the new page step is different from the previous
+setting.
+
     
    See also TQRangeControl::setSteps(), lineStep, and setRange().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setPageStep() and get this property's value with pageStep().
+
    int tickInterval
    
+
    This property holds the interval between tickmarks.
+
    This is a value interval, not a pixel interval. If it is 0, the
+slider will choose between lineStep() and pageStep(). The initial
+value of tickInterval is 0.
+
     
    See also TQRangeControl::lineStep() and TQRangeControl::pageStep().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setTickInterval() and get this property's value with tickInterval().
+
    TickSetting tickmarks
    
+
    This property holds the tickmark settings for this slider.
+
    The valid values are in TQSlider::TickSetting. The default is
+NoMarks.
+
     
    See also tickInterval.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setTickmarks() and get this property's value with tickmarks().
+
    bool tracking
    
+
    This property holds whether slider tracking is enabled.
+
    If tracking is enabled (the default), the slider emits the
+valueChanged() signal whenever the slider is being dragged. If
+tracking is disabled, the slider emits the valueChanged() signal
+when the user releases the mouse button (unless the value happens
+to be the same as before).
+
+
    Set this property's value with setTracking() and get this property's value with tracking().
+
    int value
    
+
    This property holds the current slider value.
+
    Set this property's value with setValue() and get this property's value with value().
+
    See also TQRangeControl::value() and prevValue().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsocket.html b/doc/html/ntqsocket.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7faad57d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsocket.html
@@ -0,0 +1,500 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSocket Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSocket Class Reference
    [network module]
    
+
+
    The TQSocket class provides a buffered TCP connection.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsocket.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject and TQIODevice.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSocket class provides a buffered TCP connection.
+
+
     
+
+
     It provides a totally non-blocking TQIODevice, and modifies and
+extends the API of TQIODevice with socket-specific code.
+
     Note that a TQApplication must have been constructed before this
+class can be used.
+
     The functions you're likely to call most are connectToHost(),
+bytesAvailable(), canReadLine() and the ones it inherits from
+TQIODevice.
+
     connectToHost() is the most-used function. As its name implies,
+it opens a connection to a named host.
+
     Most network protocols are either packet-oriented or
+line-oriented. canReadLine() indicates whether a connection
+contains an entire unread line or not, and bytesAvailable()
+returns the number of bytes available for reading.
+
     The signals error(), connected(), readyRead() and
+connectionClosed() inform you of the progress of the connection.
+There are also some less commonly used signals. hostFound() is
+emitted when connectToHost() has finished its DNS lookup and is
+starting its TCP connection. delayedCloseFinished() is emitted
+when close() succeeds. bytesWritten() is emitted when TQSocket
+moves data from its "to be written" queue into the TCP
+implementation.
+
     There are several access functions for the socket: state() returns
+whether the object is idle, is doing a DNS lookup, is connecting,
+has an operational connection, etc. address() and port() return
+the IP address and port used for the connection. The peerAddress()
+and peerPort() functions return the IP address and port used by
+the peer, and peerName() returns the name of the peer (normally
+the name that was passed to connectToHost()). socketDevice()
+returns a pointer to the TQSocketDevice used for this socket.
+
     TQSocket inherits TQIODevice, and reimplements some functions. In
+general, you can treat it as a TQIODevice for writing, and mostly
+also for reading. The match isn't perfect, since the TQIODevice
+API is designed for devices that are controlled by the same
+machine, and an asynchronous peer-to-peer network connection isn't
+quite like that. For example, there is nothing that matches
+TQIODevice::size() exactly. The documentation for open(), close(),
+flush(), size(), at(), atEnd(), readBlock(), writeBlock(),
+getch(), putch(), ungetch() and readLine() describes the
+differences in detail.
+
     Warning: TQSocket is not suitable for use in threads. If you need
+to uses sockets in threads use the lower-level TQSocketDevice class.
+
     Warning: Because TQt doesn't use the native socketstream
+implementation on Mac OS X, TQSocket has an implicit transfer
+latency of 100ms. You can achieve lower latency on Mac OS X by
+using TQSocketDevice instead.
+
     
    See also TQSocketDevice, TQHostAddress, TQSocketNotifier, and Input/Output and Networking.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQSocket::Error
    
+
+
     This enum specifies the possible errors:
+
      
+
    • TQSocket::ErrConnectionRefused - if the connection was refused
+
    • TQSocket::ErrHostNotFound - if the host was not found
+
    • TQSocket::ErrSocketRead - if a read from the socket failed
+
    
+
    TQSocket::State
    
+
+
     This enum defines the connection states:
+
      
+
    • TQSocket::Idle - if there is no connection
+
    • TQSocket::HostLookup - during a DNS lookup
+
    • TQSocket::Connecting - during TCP connection establishment
+
    • TQSocket::Connected - when there is an operational connection
+
    • TQSocket::Closing - if the socket is closing down, but is not yet closed.
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSocket::TQSocket ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Creates a TQSocket object in TQSocket::Idle state.
+
     The parent and name arguments are passed on to the TQObject
+constructor.
+
     Note that a TQApplication must have been constructed before sockets
+can be used.
+
+
    TQSocket::~TQSocket () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the socket. Closes the connection if necessary.
+
     
    See also close().
+
+
    TQHostAddress TQSocket::address () const
+
    
+Returns the host address of this socket. (This is normally the
+main IP address of the host, but can be e.g. 127.0.0.1 for
+connections to localhost.)
+
+
    Offset TQSocket::at () const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the current read index. Since TQSocket is a sequential
+device, the current read index is always zero.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
+
    bool TQSocket::at ( Offset index ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Moves the read index forward to index and returns TRUE if the
+operation was successful; otherwise returns FALSE. Moving the
+index forward means skipping incoming data.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
+
    bool TQSocket::atEnd () const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if there is no more data to read; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
+
    Q_ULONG TQSocket::bytesAvailable () const
+
    
+Returns the number of incoming bytes that can be read, i.e. the
+size of the input buffer. Equivalent to size().
+
     This function can trigger the readyRead() signal, if more data has
+arrived on the socket.
+
     
    See also bytesToWrite().
+
+
    Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    Q_ULONG TQSocket::bytesToWrite () const
+
    
+Returns the number of bytes that are waiting to be written, i.e.
+the size of the output buffer.
+
     
    See also bytesAvailable() and clearPendingData().
+
+
    void TQSocket::bytesWritten ( int nbytes ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when data has been written to the network.
+The nbytes parameter specifies how many bytes were written.
+
     The bytesToWrite() function is often used in the same context; it
+indicates how many buffered bytes there are left to write.
+
     
    See also writeBlock() and bytesToWrite().
+
+
    bool TQSocket::canReadLine () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if it's possible to read an entire line of text from
+this socket at this time; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     Note that if the peer closes the connection unexpectedly, this
+function returns FALSE. This means that loops such as this won't
+work:
+
     
    +        while( !socket->canReadLine() ) // WRONG
+            ;
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also readLine().
+
+
    Examples: network/clientserver/client/client.cpp, network/httpd/httpd.cpp, network/mail/smtp.cpp, and network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    void TQSocket::clearPendingData ()
+
    
+Deletes the data that is waiting to be written. This is useful if you want
+to close the socket without waiting for all the data to be written.
+
     
    See also bytesToWrite(), close(), and delayedCloseFinished().
+
+
    void TQSocket::close () [virtual]
+
    
+Closes the socket.
+
     The read buffer is cleared.
+
     If the output buffer is empty, the state is set to TQSocket::Idle and the connection is terminated immediately. If the
+output buffer still contains data to be written, TQSocket goes into
+the TQSocket::Closing state and the rest of the data will be
+written. When all of the outgoing data have been written, the
+state is set to TQSocket::Idle and the connection is terminated.
+At this point, the delayedCloseFinished() signal is emitted.
+
     If you don't want that the data of the output buffer is written, call
+clearPendingData() before you call close().
+
     
    See also state(), bytesToWrite(), and clearPendingData().
+
+
    Examples: network/clientserver/client/client.cpp, network/httpd/httpd.cpp, and network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
+
    void TQSocket::connectToHost ( const TQString & host, Q_UINT16 port ) [virtual]
+
    
+Attempts to make a connection to host on the specified port
+and return immediately.
+
     Any connection or pending connection is closed immediately, and
+TQSocket goes into the HostLookup state. When the lookup
+succeeds, it emits hostFound(), starts a TCP connection and goes
+into the Connecting state. Finally, when the connection
+succeeds, it emits connected() and goes into the Connected
+state. If there is an error at any point, it emits error().
+
     host may be an IP address in string form, or it may be a DNS
+name. TQSocket will do a normal DNS lookup if required. Note that
+port is in native byte order, unlike some other libraries.
+
     
    See also state().
+
+
    Examples: network/clientserver/client/client.cpp, network/mail/smtp.cpp, and network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    void TQSocket::connected () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted after connectToHost() has been called and a
+connection has been successfully established.
+
     
    See also connectToHost() and connectionClosed().
+
+
    Examples: network/clientserver/client/client.cpp, network/mail/smtp.cpp, and network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    void TQSocket::connectionClosed () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the other end has closed the
+connection. The read buffers may contain buffered input data which
+you can read after the connection was closed.
+
     
    See also connectToHost() and close().
+
+
    Examples: network/clientserver/client/client.cpp, network/clientserver/server/server.cpp, and network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    void TQSocket::delayedCloseFinished () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when a delayed close is finished.
+
     If you call close() and there is buffered output data to be
+written, TQSocket goes into the TQSocket::Closing state and
+returns immediately. It will then keep writing to the socket until
+all the data has been written. Then, the delayedCloseFinished()
+signal is emitted.
+
     
    See also close().
+
+
    Examples: network/clientserver/client/client.cpp and network/httpd/httpd.cpp.
+
    void TQSocket::error ( int ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted after an error occurred. The parameter is
+the Error value.
+
+
    Examples: network/clientserver/client/client.cpp and network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    void TQSocket::flush () [virtual]
+
    
+Implementation of the abstract virtual TQIODevice::flush() function.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
+
    int TQSocket::getch () [virtual]
+
    
+Reads a single byte/character from the internal read buffer.
+Returns the byte/character read, or -1 if there is nothing to be
+read.
+
     
    See also bytesAvailable() and putch().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
+
    void TQSocket::hostFound () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted after connectToHost() has been called and
+the host lookup has succeeded.
+
     
    See also connected().
+
+
    Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    bool TQSocket::open ( int m ) [virtual]
+
    
+Opens the socket using the specified TQIODevice file mode m.
+This function is called automatically when needed and you should
+not call it yourself.
+
     
    See also close().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
+
    TQHostAddress TQSocket::peerAddress () const
+
    
+Returns the address of the connected peer if the socket is in
+Connected state; otherwise an empty TQHostAddress is returned.
+
+
    TQString TQSocket::peerName () const
+
    
+Returns the host name as specified to the connectToHost()
+function. An empty string is returned if none has been set.
+
+
    Example: network/mail/smtp.cpp.
+
    Q_UINT16 TQSocket::peerPort () const
+
    
+Returns the peer's host port number, normally as specified to the
+connectToHost() function. If none has been set, this function
+returns 0.
+
     Note that TQt always uses native byte order, i.e. 67 is 67 in TQt;
+there is no need to call htons().
+
+
    Q_UINT16 TQSocket::port () const
+
    
+Returns the host port number of this socket, in native byte order.
+
+
    int TQSocket::putch ( int ch ) [virtual]
+
    
+Writes the character ch to the output buffer.
+
     Returns ch, or -1 if an error occurred.
+
     
    See also getch().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
+
    Q_LONG TQSocket::readBlock ( char * data, Q_ULONG maxlen ) [virtual]
+
    
+Reads maxlen bytes from the socket into data and returns the
+number of bytes read. Returns -1 if an error occurred.
+
+
    Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
+
    Q_ULONG TQSocket::readBufferSize () const
+
    
+Returns the size of the read buffer.
+
     
    See also setReadBufferSize().
+
+
    TQString TQSocket::readLine () [virtual]
+
    
+Returns a line of text including a terminating newline character
+(\n). Returns "" if canReadLine() returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also canReadLine().
+
+
    Examples: network/clientserver/client/client.cpp, network/httpd/httpd.cpp, network/mail/smtp.cpp, and network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    void TQSocket::readyRead () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted every time there is new incoming data.
+
     Bear in mind that new incoming data is only reported once; if you do not
+read all the data, this class buffers the data and you can read it later,
+but no signal is emitted unless new data arrives. A good practice is to
+read all data in the slot connected to this signal unless you are sure that
+you need to receive more data to be able to process it.
+
     
    See also readBlock(), readLine(), and bytesAvailable().
+
+
    Examples: network/clientserver/client/client.cpp, network/httpd/httpd.cpp, network/mail/smtp.cpp, and network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    void TQSocket::setReadBufferSize ( Q_ULONG bufSize )
+
    
+Sets the size of the TQSocket's internal read buffer to bufSize.
+
     Usually TQSocket reads all data that is available from the operating
+system's socket. If the buffer size is limited to a certain size, this
+means that the TQSocket class doesn't buffer more than this size of data.
+
     If the size of the read buffer is 0, the read buffer is unlimited and all
+incoming data is buffered. This is the default.
+
     If you read the data in the readyRead() signal, you shouldn't use this
+option since it might slow down your program unnecessary. This option is
+useful if you only need to read the data at certain points in time, like in
+a realtime streaming application.
+
     
    See also readBufferSize().
+
+
    void TQSocket::setSocket ( int socket ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the socket to use socket and the state() to Connected.
+The socket must already be connected.
+
     This allows us to use the TQSocket class as a wrapper for other
+socket types (e.g. Unix Domain Sockets).
+
+
    Example: network/httpd/httpd.cpp.
+
    void TQSocket::setSocketDevice ( TQSocketDevice * device ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the internal socket device to device. Passing a device
+of 0 will cause the internal socket device to be used. Any
+existing connection will be disconnected before using the new device.
+
     The new device should not be connected before being associated
+with a TQSocket; after setting the socket call connectToHost() to
+make the connection.
+
     This function is useful if you need to subclass TQSocketDevice and
+want to use the TQSocket API, for example, to implement Unix domain
+sockets.
+
+
    Offset TQSocket::size () const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the number of incoming bytes that can be read right now
+(like bytesAvailable()).
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
+
    int TQSocket::socket () const
+
    
+Returns the socket number, or -1 if there is no socket at the moment.
+
+
    TQSocketDevice * TQSocket::socketDevice ()
+
    
+Returns a pointer to the internal socket device.
+
     There is normally no need to manipulate the socket device directly
+since this class does the necessary setup for most applications.
+
+
    State TQSocket::state () const
+
    
+Returns the current state of the socket connection.
+
     
    See also TQSocket::State.
+
+
    Examples: network/clientserver/client/client.cpp and network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    int TQSocket::ungetch ( int ch ) [virtual]
+
    
+This implementation of the virtual function TQIODevice::ungetch()
+prepends the character ch to the read buffer so that the next
+read returns this character as the first character of the output.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
+
    Q_ULONG TQSocket::waitForMore ( int msecs, bool * timeout ) const
+
    
+Wait up to msecs milliseconds for more data to be available.
+
     If msecs is -1 the call will block indefinitely.
+
     Returns the number of bytes available.
+
     If timeout is non-null and no error occurred (i.e. it does not
+return -1): this function sets *timeout to TRUE, if the reason
+for returning was that the timeout was reached; otherwise it sets
+*timeout to FALSE. This is useful to find out if the peer
+closed the connection.
+
     Warning: This is a blocking call and should be avoided in event
+driven applications.
+
     
    See also bytesAvailable().
+
+
    Q_ULONG TQSocket::waitForMore ( int msecs ) const
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
    Q_LONG TQSocket::writeBlock ( const char * data, Q_ULONG len ) [virtual]
+
    
+Writes len bytes to the socket from data and returns the
+number of bytes written. Returns -1 if an error occurred.
+
+
    Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsocketdevice.html b/doc/html/ntqsocketdevice.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c3a4afc75
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsocketdevice.html
@@ -0,0 +1,419 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSocketDevice Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSocketDevice Class Reference
    [network module]
    
+
+
    The TQSocketDevice class provides a platform-independent low-level socket API.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsocketdevice.h>
+
    Inherits TQIODevice.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSocketDevice class provides a platform-independent low-level socket API.
+
+
     
+
+
     This class provides a low level API for working with sockets.  Users of
+this class are assumed to have networking experience. For most users the
+TQSocket class provides a much easier and high level alternative, but
+certain things (like UDP) can't be done with TQSocket and if you need a
+platform-independent API for those, TQSocketDevice is the right choice.
+
     The essential purpose of the class is to provide a TQIODevice that
+works on sockets, wrapped in a platform-independent API.
+
     When calling connect() or bind(), TQSocketDevice detects the
+protocol family (IPv4, IPv6) automatically. Passing the protocol
+family to TQSocketDevice's constructor or to setSocket() forces
+creation of a socket device of a specific protocol. If not set, the
+protocol will be detected at the first call to connect() or bind().
+
     
    See also TQSocket, TQSocketNotifier, TQHostAddress, and Input/Output and Networking.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQSocketDevice::Error
    
+
+
     This enum type describes the error states of TQSocketDevice.
+
      
+
    • TQSocketDevice::NoError - No error has occurred.
+
    • TQSocketDevice::AlreadyBound - The device is already bound, according to bind().
+
    • TQSocketDevice::Inaccessible - The operating system or firewall prohibited
+the action.
+
    • TQSocketDevice::NoResources - The operating system ran out of a resource.
+
    • TQSocketDevice::InternalError - An internal error occurred in TQSocketDevice.
+
    • TQSocketDevice::Impossible - An attempt was made to do something which makes
+no sense. For example:
+
      +    ::close( sd->socket() );
+    sd->writeBlock( someData, 42 );
+    
      
+ 
+The libc ::close() closes the socket, but TQSocketDevice is not aware
+of this. So when you call writeBlock(), the impossible happens.
+
    • TQSocketDevice::NoFiles - The operating system will not let TQSocketDevice open
+another file.
+
    • TQSocketDevice::ConnectionRefused - A connection attempt was rejected by the
+peer.
+
    • TQSocketDevice::NetworkFailure - There is a network failure.
+
    • TQSocketDevice::UnknownError - The operating system did something
+unexpected.
+
    
+
    TQSocketDevice::Protocol
    
+
+
     This enum type describes the protocol family of the socket. Possible values
+are:
+
      
+
    • TQSocketDevice::IPv4 - The socket is an IPv4 socket.
+
    • TQSocketDevice::IPv6 - The socket is an IPv6 socket.
+
    • TQSocketDevice::Unknown - The protocol family of the socket is not known. This can
+happen if you use TQSocketDevice with an already existing socket; it
+tries to determine the protocol family, but this can fail if the
+protocol family is not known to TQSocketDevice.
+
     
    See also protocol() and setSocket().
+
+
    TQSocketDevice::Type
    
+
+
     This enum type describes the type of the socket:
+
      
+
    • TQSocketDevice::Stream - a stream socket (TCP, usually)
+
    • TQSocketDevice::Datagram - a datagram socket (UDP, usually)
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSocketDevice::TQSocketDevice ( Type type = Stream )
+
    
+Creates a TQSocketDevice object for a stream or datagram socket.
+
     The type argument must be either TQSocketDevice::Stream for a
+reliable, connection-oriented TCP socket, or TQSocketDevice::Datagram for an unreliable UDP socket.
+
     The socket is created as an IPv4 socket.
+
     
    See also blocking() and protocol().
+
+
    TQSocketDevice::TQSocketDevice ( Type type, Protocol protocol, int dummy )
+
    
+Creates a TQSocketDevice object for a stream or datagram socket.
+
     The type argument must be either TQSocketDevice::Stream for a
+reliable, connection-oriented TCP socket, or TQSocketDevice::Datagram for an unreliable UDP socket.
+
     The protocol indicates whether the socket should be of type IPv4
+or IPv6. Passing Unknown is not meaningful in this context and you
+should avoid using (it creates an IPv4 socket, but your code is not easily
+readable).
+
     The argument dummy is necessary for compatibility with some
+compilers.
+
     
    See also blocking() and protocol().
+
+
    TQSocketDevice::TQSocketDevice ( int socket, Type type )
+
    
+Creates a TQSocketDevice object for the existing socket socket.
+
     The type argument must match the actual socket type; use TQSocketDevice::Stream for a reliable, connection-oriented TCP
+socket, or TQSocketDevice::Datagram for an unreliable,
+connectionless UDP socket.
+
+
    TQSocketDevice::~TQSocketDevice () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the socket device and closes the socket if it is open.
+
+
    int TQSocketDevice::accept () [virtual]
+
    
+Extracts the first connection from the queue of pending
+connections for this socket and returns a new socket identifier.
+Returns -1 if the operation failed.
+
     
    See also bind() and listen().
+
+
    TQHostAddress TQSocketDevice::address () const
+
    
+Returns the address of this socket device. This may be 0.0.0.0 for
+a while, but is set to something sensible as soon as a sensible
+value is available.
+
+
    bool TQSocketDevice::addressReusable () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the address of this socket can be used by other
+sockets at the same time, and FALSE if this socket claims
+exclusive ownership.
+
     
    See also setAddressReusable().
+
+
    bool TQSocketDevice::bind ( const TQHostAddress & address, Q_UINT16 port ) [virtual]
+
    
+Assigns a name to an unnamed socket. The name is the host address
+address and the port number port. If the operation succeeds,
+bind() returns TRUE; otherwise it returns FALSE without changing
+what port() and address() return.
+
     bind() is used by servers for setting up incoming connections.
+Call bind() before listen().
+
+
    bool TQSocketDevice::blocking () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the socket is valid and in blocking mode;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     Note that this function does not set error().
+
     Warning: On Windows, this function always returns TRUE since the
+ioctlsocket() function is broken.
+
     
    See also setBlocking() and isValid().
+
+
    Q_LONG TQSocketDevice::bytesAvailable () const
+
    
+Returns the number of bytes available for reading, or -1 if an
+error occurred.
+
     Warning: On Microsoft Windows, we use the ioctlsocket() function
+to determine the number of bytes queued on the socket. According
+to Microsoft (KB Q125486), ioctlsocket() sometimes returns an
+incorrect number. The only safe way to determine the amount of
+data on the socket is to read it using readBlock(). TQSocket has
+workarounds to deal with this problem.
+
+
    bool TQSocketDevice::connect ( const TQHostAddress & addr, Q_UINT16 port ) [virtual]
+
    
+Connects to the IP address and port specified by addr and port. Returns TRUE if it establishes a connection; otherwise returns FALSE.
+If it returns FALSE, error() explains why.
+
     Note that error() commonly returns NoError for non-blocking
+sockets; this just means that you can call connect() again in a
+little while and it'll probably succeed.
+
+
    Error TQSocketDevice::error () const
+
    
+Returns the first error seen.
+
+
    bool TQSocketDevice::isValid () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this is a valid socket; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also socket().
+
+
    bool TQSocketDevice::listen ( int backlog ) [virtual]
+
    
+Specifies how many pending connections a server socket can have.
+Returns TRUE if the operation was successful; otherwise returns
+FALSE. A backlog value of 50 is quite common.
+
     The listen() call only applies to sockets where type() is Stream, i.e. not to Datagram sockets. listen() must not be
+called before bind() or after accept().
+
     
    See also bind() and accept().
+
+
    TQHostAddress TQSocketDevice::peerAddress () const
+
    
+Returns the address of the port this socket device is connected
+to. This may be 0.0.0.0 for a while, but is set to something
+sensible as soon as a sensible value is available.
+
     Note that for Datagram sockets, this is the source port of the
+last packet received.
+
+
    Q_UINT16 TQSocketDevice::peerPort () const
+
    
+Returns the port number of the port this socket device is
+connected to. This may be 0 for a while, but is set to something
+sensible as soon as a sensible value is available.
+
     Note that for Datagram sockets, this is the source port of the
+last packet received, and that it is in native byte order.
+
+
    Q_UINT16 TQSocketDevice::port () const
+
    
+Returns the port number of this socket device. This may be 0 for a
+while, but is set to something sensible as soon as a sensible
+value is available.
+
     Note that TQt always uses native byte order, i.e. 67 is 67 in TQt;
+there is no need to call htons().
+
+
    Protocol TQSocketDevice::protocol () const
+
    
+Returns the socket's protocol family, which is one of Unknown, IPv4,
+or IPv6.
+
     TQSocketDevice either creates a socket with a well known protocol family or
+it uses an already existing socket. In the first case, this function
+returns the protocol family it was constructed with. In the second case, it
+tries to determine the protocol family of the socket; if this fails, it
+returns Unknown.
+
     
    See also Protocol and setSocket().
+
+
    Q_LONG TQSocketDevice::readBlock ( char * data, Q_ULONG maxlen ) [virtual]
+
    
+Reads maxlen bytes from the socket into data and returns the
+number of bytes read. Returns -1 if an error occurred. Returning 0
+is not an error. For Stream sockets, 0 is returned when the remote
+host closes the connection. For Datagram sockets, 0 is a valid
+datagram size.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
+
    int TQSocketDevice::receiveBufferSize () const
+
    
+Returns the size of the operating system receive buffer.
+
     
    See also setReceiveBufferSize().
+
+
    int TQSocketDevice::sendBufferSize () const
+
    
+Returns the size of the operating system send buffer.
+
     
    See also setSendBufferSize().
+
+
    void TQSocketDevice::setAddressReusable ( bool enable ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the address of this socket to be usable by other sockets too
+if enable is TRUE, and to be used exclusively by this socket if
+enable is FALSE.
+
     When a socket is reusable, other sockets can use the same port
+number (and IP address), which is generally useful. Of course
+other sockets cannot use the same
+(address,port,peer-address,peer-port) 4-tuple as this socket, so
+there is no risk of confusing the two TCP connections.
+
     
    See also addressReusable().
+
+
    void TQSocketDevice::setBlocking ( bool enable ) [virtual]
+
    
+Makes the socket blocking if enable is TRUE or nonblocking if
+enable is FALSE.
+
     Sockets are blocking by default, but we recommend using
+nonblocking socket operations, especially for GUI programs that
+need to be responsive.
+
     Warning: On Windows, this function should be used with care since
+whenever you use a TQSocketNotifier on Windows, the socket is
+immediately made nonblocking.
+
     
    See also blocking() and isValid().
+
+
    void TQSocketDevice::setError ( Error err ) [protected]
+
    
+Allows subclasses to set the error state to err.
+
+
    void TQSocketDevice::setReceiveBufferSize ( uint size ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the size of the operating system receive buffer to size.
+
     The operating system receive buffer size effectively limits two
+things: how much data can be in transit at any one moment, and how
+much data can be received in one iteration of the main event loop.
+
     The default is operating system-dependent. A socket that receives
+large amounts of data is probably best with a buffer size of
+49152.
+
+
    void TQSocketDevice::setSendBufferSize ( uint size ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the size of the operating system send buffer to size.
+
     The operating system send buffer size effectively limits how much
+data can be in transit at any one moment.
+
     The default is operating system-dependent. A socket that sends
+large amounts of data is probably best with a buffer size of
+49152.
+
+
    void TQSocketDevice::setSocket ( int socket, Type type ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the socket device to operate on the existing socket socket.
+
     The type argument must match the actual socket type; use TQSocketDevice::Stream for a reliable, connection-oriented TCP
+socket, or TQSocketDevice::Datagram for an unreliable,
+connectionless UDP socket.
+
     Any existing socket is closed.
+
     
    See also isValid() and close().
+
+
    int TQSocketDevice::socket () const
+
    
+Returns the socket number, or -1 if it is an invalid socket.
+
     
    See also isValid() and type().
+
+
    Type TQSocketDevice::type () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the socket type which is either TQSocketDevice::Stream
+or TQSocketDevice::Datagram.
+
     
    See also socket().
+
+
    Q_LONG TQSocketDevice::waitForMore ( int msecs, bool * timeout = 0 ) const
+
    
+Wait up to msecs milliseconds for more data to be available. If
+msecs is -1 the call will block indefinitely.
+
     Returns the number of bytes available for reading, or -1 if an
+error occurred.
+
     If timeout is non-null and no error occurred (i.e. it does not
+return -1): this function sets *timeout to TRUE, if the reason
+for returning was that the timeout was reached; otherwise it sets
+*timeout to FALSE. This is useful to find out if the peer
+closed the connection.
+
     Warning: This is a blocking call and should be avoided in event
+driven applications.
+
     
    See also bytesAvailable().
+
+
    Q_LONG TQSocketDevice::writeBlock ( const char * data, Q_ULONG len ) [virtual]
+
    
+Writes len bytes to the socket from data and returns the
+number of bytes written. Returns -1 if an error occurred.
+
     This is used for TQSocketDevice::Stream sockets.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
+
    Q_LONG TQSocketDevice::writeBlock ( const char * data, Q_ULONG len, const TQHostAddress & host, Q_UINT16 port ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Writes len bytes to the socket from data and returns the
+number of bytes written. Returns -1 if an error occurred.
+
     This is used for TQSocketDevice::Datagram sockets. You must
+specify the host and port of the destination of the data.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsocketnotifier.html b/doc/html/ntqsocketnotifier.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4bb9f14dd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsocketnotifier.html
@@ -0,0 +1,183 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSocketNotifier Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSocketNotifier Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQSocketNotifier class provides support for socket callbacks.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsocketnotifier.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSocketNotifier class provides support for socket callbacks.
+
     
+
     This class makes it possible to write asynchronous socket-based
+code in TQt. Using synchronous socket operations blocks the
+program, which is clearly not acceptable for an event-driven GUI
+program.
+
     Once you have opened a non-blocking socket (whether for TCP, UDP,
+a UNIX-domain socket, or any other protocol family your operating
+system supports), you can create a socket notifier to monitor the
+socket. Then you connect the activated() signal to the slot you
+want to be called when a socket event occurs.
+
     Note for Windows users: the socket passed to TQSocketNotifier will
+become non-blocking, even if it was created as a blocking socket.
+
     There are three types of socket notifiers (read, write and
+exception); you must specify one of these in the constructor.
+
     The type specifies when the activated() signal is to be emitted:
+
      
+
    1.  TQSocketNotifier::Read - There is data to be read (socket read event).
+
    2.  TQSocketNotifier::Write - Data can be written (socket write event).
+
    3.  TQSocketNofifier::Exception - An exception has occurred (socket
+exception event). We recommend against using this.
+
    
+
     For example, if you need to monitor both reads and writes for the
+same socket you must create two socket notifiers.
+
     For read notifiers it makes little sense to connect the
+activated() signal to more than one slot because the data can be
+read from the socket only once.
+
     Also observe that if you do not read all the available data when
+the read notifier fires, it fires again and again.
+
     For write notifiers, immediately disable the notifier after the
+activated() signal has been received and you have sent the data to
+be written on the socket. When you have more data to be written,
+enable it again to get a new activated() signal. The exception is
+if the socket data writing operation (send() or equivalent) fails
+with a "would block" error, which means that some buffer is full
+and you must wait before sending more data. In that case you do
+not need to disable and re-enable the write notifier; it will fire
+again as soon as the system allows more data to be sent.
+
     The behavior of a write notifier that is left in enabled state
+after having emitting the first activated() signal (and no "would
+block" error has occurred) is undefined. Depending on the
+operating system, it may fire on every pass of the event loop or
+not at all.
+
     If you need a time-out for your sockets you can use either timer events or the TQTimer class.
+
     Socket action is detected in the main
+    event loop of TQt. The X11 version of TQt has a single UNIX
+select() call that incorporates all socket notifiers and the X
+socket.
+
     Note that on XFree86 for OS/2, select() works only in the thread
+in which main() is running; you should therefore use that thread
+for GUI operations.
+
     
    See also TQSocket, TQServerSocket, TQSocketDevice, TQFile::handle(), and Input/Output and Networking.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQSocketNotifier::Type
    
+
+
      
+
    • TQSocketNotifier::Read
+
    • TQSocketNotifier::Write
+
    • TQSocketNotifier::Exception
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSocketNotifier::TQSocketNotifier ( int socket, Type type, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a socket notifier called name, with the parent, parent. It watches socket for type events, and enables it.
+
     It is generally advisable to explicitly enable or disable the
+socket notifier, especially for write notifiers.
+
     
    See also setEnabled() and isEnabled().
+
+
    TQSocketNotifier::~TQSocketNotifier ()
+
    
+Destroys the socket notifier.
+
+
    void TQSocketNotifier::activated ( int socket ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted under certain conditions specified by the
+notifier type():
+
      
+
    1.  TQSocketNotifier::Read - There is data to be read (socket read event).
+
    2.  TQSocketNotifier::Write - Data can be written (socket write event).
+
    3.  TQSocketNofifier::Exception - An exception has occurred (socket
+exception event).
+
    
+
     The socket argument is the socket identifier.
+
     
    See also type() and socket().
+
+
    bool TQSocketNotifier::isEnabled () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the notifier is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setEnabled().
+
+
    void TQSocketNotifier::setEnabled ( bool enable ) [virtual]
+
    
+Enables the notifier if enable is TRUE or disables it if enable is FALSE.
+
     The notifier is enabled by default.
+
     If the notifier is enabled, it emits the activated() signal
+whenever a socket event corresponding to its type occurs. If it is disabled, it ignores socket events
+(the same effect as not creating the socket notifier).
+
     Write notifiers should normally be disabled immediately after the
+activated() signal has been emitted; see discussion of write
+notifiers in the class description above.
+
     
    See also isEnabled() and activated().
+
+
    int TQSocketNotifier::socket () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the socket identifier specified to the constructor.
+
     
    See also type().
+
+
    Type TQSocketNotifier::type () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the socket event type specified to the constructor: TQSocketNotifier::Read, TQSocketNotifier::Write, or TQSocketNotifier::Exception.
+
     
    See also socket().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsortedlist.html b/doc/html/ntqsortedlist.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a8880cf5a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsortedlist.html
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSortedList Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSortedList Class Reference
    [obsolete]
    
+
+
    The TQSortedList class provides a list sorted by operator< and operator==.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsortedlist.h>
+
    Inherits TQPtrList<type>.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSortedList class provides a list sorted by operator< and operator==.
+
     This class is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     If you want to sort a TQPtrList you have to reimplement the
+TQGList::compareItems() method.  If the elements of your list support
+operator<() and operator==(), you can use TQSortedList instead.
+Its compareItems() calls operator<() and operator==() and returns an
+appropriate result.
+
     Otherwise, this is as TQPtrList.
+
     
    See also TQPtrList.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSortedList::TQSortedList ()
+
    
+
+Constructs an empty list.
+
+
    TQSortedList::TQSortedList ( const TQSortedList<type> & list )
+
    
+
+Constructs a copy of list.
+
     Each item in list is copied to this new list.
+
+
    TQSortedList::~TQSortedList ()
+
    
+
+Removes all items from the list and destroys the list.
+
     All list iterators that access this list will be reset.
+
+
    TQSortedList<type> & TQSortedList::operator= ( const TQSortedList<type> & list )
+
    
+
+Assigns list to this list and returns a reference to this list.
+
     This list is first cleared; each item in list is then
+appended to this list.  Only the pointers are copied
+(shallow copy) unless newItem() has been reimplemented().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsound.html b/doc/html/ntqsound.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2e052157f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsound.html
@@ -0,0 +1,180 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSound Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSound Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQSound class provides access to the platform audio facilities.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsound.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSound class provides access to the platform audio facilities.
+
     
+
+
     TQt provides the most commonly required audio operation in GUI
+applications: asynchronously playing a sound file. This is most
+easily accomplished with a single call:
+
    +        TQSound::play("mysounds/bells.wav");
+    
    
+ 
+
     A second API is provided in which a TQSound object is created from
+a sound file and is played later:
+
    +        TQSound bells("mysounds/bells.wav");
+
+        bells.play();
+    
    
+ 
+
     Sounds played using the second model may use more memory but play
+more immediately than sounds played using the first model,
+depending on the underlying platform audio facilities.
+
     On Microsoft Windows the underlying multimedia system is used;
+only WAVE format sound files are supported.
+
     On X11 the Network Audio
+    System is used if available, otherwise all operations work
+silently. NAS supports WAVE and AU files.
+
     On Macintosh, ironically, we use QT (QuickTime) for sound, this
+means all QuickTime formats are supported by TQt/Mac.
+
     On TQt/Embedded, a built-in mixing sound server is used, which
+accesses /dev/dsp directly. Only the WAVE format is supported.
+
     The availability of sound can be tested with
+TQSound::isAvailable().
+
    See also Multimedia Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSound::TQSound ( const TQString & filename, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a TQSound that can tquickly play the sound in a file
+named filename.
+
     This may use more memory than the static play function.
+
     The parent and name arguments (default 0) are passed on to
+the TQObject constructor.
+
+
    TQSound::~TQSound ()
+
    
+Destroys the sound object. If the sound is not finished playing stop() is called on it.
+
     
    See also stop() and isFinished().
+
+
    bool TQSound::available () [static]
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if sound support is available; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    TQString TQSound::fileName () const
+
    
+Returns the filename associated with the sound.
+
+
    bool TQSound::isAvailable () [static]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if sound facilities exist on the platform; otherwise
+returns FALSE. An application may choose either to notify the user
+if sound is crucial to the application or to operate silently
+without bothering the user.
+
     If no sound is available, all TQSound operations work silently and
+tquickly.
+
+
    bool TQSound::isFinished () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the sound has finished playing; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     Warning: On Windows this function always returns TRUE for unlooped sounds.
+
+
    int TQSound::loops () const
+
    
+Returns the number of times the sound will play.
+
+
    int TQSound::loopsRemaining () const
+
    
+Returns the number of times the sound will loop. This value
+decreases each time the sound loops.
+
+
    void TQSound::play ( const TQString & filename ) [static]
+
    
+Plays the sound in a file called filename.
+
+
    Example: sound/sound.cpp.
+
    void TQSound::play () [slot]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Starts the sound playing. The function returns immediately.
+Depending on the platform audio facilities, other sounds may stop
+or may be mixed with the new sound.
+
     The sound can be played again at any time, possibly mixing or
+replacing previous plays of the sound.
+
+
    void TQSound::setLoops ( int l )
+
    
+Sets the sound to repeat l times when it is played. Passing the
+value -1 will cause the sound to loop indefinitely.
+
     
    See also loops().
+
+
    void TQSound::stop () [slot]
+
    
+Stops the sound playing.
+
     On Windows the current loop will finish if a sound is played
+in a loop.
+
     
    See also play().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqspinbox.html b/doc/html/ntqspinbox.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..02b334959
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqspinbox.html
@@ -0,0 +1,561 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSpinBox Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSpinBox Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQSpinBox class provides a spin box widget (spin button).
+More...
+
    #include <ntqspinbox.h>
+
    Inherits TQWidget and TQRangeControl.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • ButtonSymbols buttonSymbols - the current button symbol mode
      • 
+
    • TQString cleanText - the spin box's text with no prefix(), suffix() or leading or trailing whitespace  (read only)
      • 
+
    • int lineStep - the line step
      • 
+
    • int maxValue - the maximum value of the spin box
      • 
+
    • int minValue - the minimum value of the spin box
      • 
+
    • TQString prefix - the spin box's prefix
      • 
+
    • TQString specialValueText - the special-value text
      • 
+
    • TQString suffix - the suffix of the spin box
      • 
+
    • TQString text - the spin box's text, including any prefix() and suffix()  (read only)
      • 
+
    • int value - the value of the spin box
      • 
+
    • bool wrapping - whether it is possible to step the value from the highest value to the lowest value and vice versa
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Protected Slots
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSpinBox class provides a spin box widget (spin button).
+
     
+
+
     TQSpinBox allows the user to choose a value either by clicking the
+up/down buttons to increase/decrease the value currently displayed
+or by typing the value directly into the spin box. If the value is
+entered directly into the spin box, Enter (or Return) must be
+pressed to apply the new value. The value is usually an integer.
+
     Every time the value changes TQSpinBox emits the valueChanged()
+signal. The current value can be fetched with value() and set
+with setValue().
+
     The spin box keeps the value within a numeric range, and to
+multiples of the lineStep() size (see TQRangeControl for details).
+Clicking the up/down buttons or using the keyboard accelerator's
+up and down arrows will increase or decrease the current value in
+steps of size lineStep(). The minimum and maximum value and the
+step size can be set using one of the constructors, and can be
+changed later with setMinValue(), setMaxValue() and setLineStep().
+
     Most spin boxes are directional, but TQSpinBox can also operate as
+a circular spin box, i.e. if the range is 0-99 and the current
+value is 99, clicking "up" will give 0. Use setWrapping() if you
+want circular behavior.
+
     The displayed value can be prepended and appended with arbitrary
+strings indicating, for example, currency or the unit of
+measurement. See setPrefix() and setSuffix(). The text in the spin
+box is retrieved with text() (which includes any prefix() and
+suffix()), or with cleanText() (which has no prefix(), no suffix()
+and no leading or trailing whitespace). currentValueText() returns
+the spin box's current value as text.
+
     Normally the spin box displays up and down arrows in the buttons.
+You can use setButtonSymbols() to change the display to show
++ and - symbols if you prefer. In either case the up
+and down arrow keys work as expected.
+
     It is often desirable to give the user a special (often default)
+choice in addition to the range of numeric values. See
+setSpecialValueText() for how to do this with TQSpinBox.
+
     The default TQWidget::focusPolicy() is StrongFocus.
+
     If using prefix(), suffix() and specialValueText() don't provide
+enough control, you can ignore them and subclass TQSpinBox instead.
+
     TQSpinBox can easily be subclassed to allow the user to input
+things other than an integer value as long as the allowed input
+can be mapped to a range of integers. This can be done by
+overriding the virtual functions mapValueToText() and
+mapTextToValue(), and setting another suitable validator using
+setValidator().
+
     For example, these functions could be changed so that the user
+provided values from 0.0 to 10.0, or -1 to signify 'Auto', while
+the range of integers used inside the program would be -1 to 100:
+
     
    +        class MySpinBox : public TQSpinBox
+        {
+            Q_OBJECT
+        public:
+            ...
+
+            TQString mapValueToText( int value )
+            {
+                if ( value == -1 ) // special case
+                    return TQString( "Auto" );
+
+                return TQString( "%1.%2" ) // 0.0 to 10.0
+                    .arg( value / 10 ).arg( value % 10 );
+            }
+
+            int mapTextToValue( bool *ok )
+            {
+                if ( text() == "Auto" ) // special case
+                    return -1;
+
+                return (int) ( 10 * text().toFloat() ); // 0 to 100
+            }
+        };
+    
    
+ 
+
      
+
     
    See also TQScrollBar, TQSlider, GUI Design Handbook: Spin Box, and Basic Widgets.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQSpinBox::ButtonSymbols
    
+
+
     This enum type determines what the buttons in a spin box show.
+
      
+
    • TQSpinBox::UpDownArrows - the buttons show little arrows in the classic
+style.
+
    • TQSpinBox::PlusMinus - the buttons show + and - symbols.
+
     
    See also TQSpinBox::buttonSymbols.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSpinBox::TQSpinBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a spin box with the default TQRangeControl range and
+step values. It is called name and has parent parent.
+
     
    See also minValue, maxValue, setRange(), lineStep, and setSteps().
+
+
    TQSpinBox::TQSpinBox ( int minValue, int maxValue, int step = 1, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a spin box that allows values from minValue to maxValue inclusive, with step amount step. The value is
+initially set to minValue.
+
     The spin box is called name and has parent parent.
+
     
    See also minValue, maxValue, setRange(), lineStep, and setSteps().
+
+
    TQSpinBox::~TQSpinBox ()
+
    
+Destroys the spin box, freeing all memory and other resources.
+
+
    ButtonSymbols TQSpinBox::buttonSymbols () const
+
    Returns the current button symbol mode.
+See the "buttonSymbols" property for details.
+
    TQString TQSpinBox::cleanText () const [virtual]
+
    Returns the spin box's text with no prefix(), suffix() or leading or trailing whitespace.
+See the "cleanText" property for details.
+
    TQString TQSpinBox::currentValueText () [protected]
+
    
+Returns the full text calculated from the current value, including
+any prefix and suffix. If there is special value text and the
+value is minValue() the specialValueText() is returned.
+
+
    TQRect TQSpinBox::downRect () const
+
    
+Returns the geometry of the "down" button.
+
+
    TQLineEdit * TQSpinBox::editor () const [protected]
+
    
+Returns a pointer to the embedded TQLineEdit.
+
+
    bool TQSpinBox::eventFilter ( TQObject * o, TQEvent * ev ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Intercepts and handles the events coming to the embedded TQLineEdit
+that have special meaning for the TQSpinBox. The object is passed
+as o and the event is passed as ev.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQObject.
+
    void TQSpinBox::interpretText () [virtual protected]
+
    
+TQSpinBox calls this after the user has manually edited the
+contents of the spin box (i.e. by typing in the embedded
+TQLineEdit, rather than using the up/down buttons/keys).
+
     The default implementation of this function interprets the new
+text using mapTextToValue(). If mapTextToValue() is successful, it
+changes the spin box's value; if not, the value is left unchanged.
+
     
    See also editor().
+
+
    int TQSpinBox::lineStep () const
+
    Returns the line step.
+See the "lineStep" property for details.
+
    int TQSpinBox::mapTextToValue ( bool * ok ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This virtual function is used by the spin box whenever it needs to
+interpret text entered by the user as a value. The text is
+available as text() and as cleanText(), and this function must
+parse it if possible. If ok is not 0: if it parses the text
+successfully, *ok is set to TRUE; otherwise *ok is set to
+FALSE.
+
     Subclasses that need to display spin box values in a non-numeric
+way need to reimplement this function.
+
     Note that TQt handles specialValueText() separately; this function
+is only concerned with the other values.
+
     The default implementation tries to interpret the text() as an
+integer in the standard way and returns the integer value.
+
     
    See also interpretText() and mapValueToText().
+
+
    TQString TQSpinBox::mapValueToText ( int v ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This virtual function is used by the spin box whenever it needs to
+display value v. The default implementation returns a string
+containing v printed in the standard way. Reimplementations may
+return anything. (See the example in the detailed description.)
+
     Note that TQt does not call this function for specialValueText()
+and that neither prefix() nor suffix() are included in the return
+value.
+
     If you reimplement this, you may also need to reimplement
+mapTextToValue().
+
     
    See also updateDisplay() and mapTextToValue().
+
+
    int TQSpinBox::maxValue () const
+
    Returns the maximum value of the spin box.
+See the "maxValue" property for details.
+
    int TQSpinBox::minValue () const
+
    Returns the minimum value of the spin box.
+See the "minValue" property for details.
+
    TQString TQSpinBox::prefix () const [virtual]
+
    Returns the spin box's prefix.
+See the "prefix" property for details.
+
    void TQSpinBox::rangeChange () [virtual protected]
+
    
+This virtual function is called by TQRangeControl whenever the
+range has changed. It adjusts the default validator and updates
+the display; if you need additional processing, you can
+reimplement this function.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQRangeControl.
+
    void TQSpinBox::selectAll () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Selects all the text in the spin box's editor.
+
+
    void TQSpinBox::setButtonSymbols ( ButtonSymbols ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the current button symbol mode.
+See the "buttonSymbols" property for details.
+
    void TQSpinBox::setLineStep ( int )
+
    Sets the line step.
+See the "lineStep" property for details.
+
    void TQSpinBox::setMaxValue ( int )
+
    Sets the maximum value of the spin box.
+See the "maxValue" property for details.
+
    void TQSpinBox::setMinValue ( int )
+
    Sets the minimum value of the spin box.
+See the "minValue" property for details.
+
    void TQSpinBox::setPrefix ( const TQString & text ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the spin box's prefix to text.
+See the "prefix" property for details.
+
    void TQSpinBox::setSpecialValueText ( const TQString & text ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the special-value text to text.
+See the "specialValueText" property for details.
+
    void TQSpinBox::setSuffix ( const TQString & text ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the suffix of the spin box to text.
+See the "suffix" property for details.
+
    void TQSpinBox::setValidator ( const TQValidator * v ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the validator to v. The validator controls what keyboard
+input is accepted when the user is editing in the value field. The
+default is to use a suitable TQIntValidator.
+
     Use setValidator(0) to turn off input validation (entered input
+will still be kept within the spin box's range).
+
+
    void TQSpinBox::setValue ( int value ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the value of the spin box to value.
+See the "value" property for details.
+
    void TQSpinBox::setWrapping ( bool on ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether it is possible to step the value from the highest value to the lowest value and vice versa to on.
+See the "wrapping" property for details.
+
    TQString TQSpinBox::specialValueText () const
+
    Returns the special-value text.
+See the "specialValueText" property for details.
+
    void TQSpinBox::stepDown () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Decreases the spin box's value one lineStep(), wrapping as
+necessary if wrapping() is TRUE. This is the same as clicking on
+the pointing-down button and can be used for keyboard
+accelerators, for example.
+
     
    See also stepUp(), subtractLine(), lineStep, setSteps(), value, and value.
+
+
    void TQSpinBox::stepUp () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Increases the spin box's value by one lineStep(), wrapping as
+necessary if wrapping() is TRUE. This is the same as clicking on
+the pointing-up button and can be used for keyboard accelerators,
+for example.
+
     
    See also stepDown(), addLine(), lineStep, setSteps(), value, and value.
+
+
    TQString TQSpinBox::suffix () const [virtual]
+
    Returns the suffix of the spin box.
+See the "suffix" property for details.
+
    TQString TQSpinBox::text () const
+
    Returns the spin box's text, including any prefix() and suffix().
+See the "text" property for details.
+
    void TQSpinBox::textChanged () [protected slot]
+
    
+This slot is called whenever the user edits the spin box's text.
+
+
    TQRect TQSpinBox::upRect () const
+
    
+Returns the geometry of the "up" button.
+
+
    void TQSpinBox::updateDisplay () [virtual protected]
+
    
+Updates the contents of the embedded TQLineEdit to reflect the
+current value using mapValueToText(). Also enables/disables the
+up/down push buttons accordingly.
+
     
    See also mapValueToText().
+
+
    const TQValidator * TQSpinBox::validator () const
+
    
+Returns the validator that constrains editing for this spin box if
+there is any; otherwise returns 0.
+
     
    See also setValidator() and TQValidator.
+
+
    int TQSpinBox::value () const
+
    Returns the value of the spin box.
+See the "value" property for details.
+
    void TQSpinBox::valueChange () [virtual protected]
+
    
+This virtual function is called by TQRangeControl whenever the
+value has changed. The TQSpinBox reimplementation updates the
+display and emits the valueChanged() signals; if you need
+additional processing, either reimplement this or connect to one
+of the valueChanged() signals.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQRangeControl.
+
    void TQSpinBox::valueChanged ( int value ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted every time the value of the spin box
+changes; the new value is passed in value. This signal will be
+emitted as a result of a call to setValue(), or because the user
+changed the value by using a keyboard accelerator or mouse click,
+etc.
+
     Note that the valueChanged() signal is emitted every time, not
+just for the "last" step; i.e. if the user clicks "up" three
+times, this signal is emitted three times.
+
     
    See also value.
+
+
    Examples: listbox/listbox.cpp, qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp, and scribble/scribble.cpp.
+
    void TQSpinBox::valueChanged ( const TQString & valueText ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the valueChanged( int ) signal is
+emitted, i.e. every time the value of the spin box changes
+(whatever the cause, e.g. by setValue(), by a keyboard
+accelerator, by mouse clicks, etc.).
+
     The valueText parameter is the same string that is displayed in
+the edit field of the spin box.
+
     
    See also value, prefix, suffix, and specialValueText.
+
+
    bool TQSpinBox::wrapping () const
+
    Returns TRUE if it is possible to step the value from the highest value to the lowest value and vice versa; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "wrapping" property for details.
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    ButtonSymbols buttonSymbols
    
+
    This property holds the current button symbol mode.
+
    The possible values can be either UpDownArrows or PlusMinus.
+The default is UpDownArrows.
+
     
    See also ButtonSymbols.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setButtonSymbols() and get this property's value with buttonSymbols().
+
    TQString cleanText
    
+
    This property holds the spin box's text with no prefix(), suffix() or leading or trailing whitespace.
+
    Get this property's value with cleanText().
+
    See also text, prefix, and suffix.
+
+
    int lineStep
    
+
    This property holds the line step.
+
    When the user uses the arrows to change the spin box's value the
+value will be incremented/decremented by the amount of the line
+step.
+
     The setLineStep() function calls the virtual stepChange() function
+if the new line step is different from the previous setting.
+
     
    See also TQRangeControl::setSteps() and setRange().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setLineStep() and get this property's value with lineStep().
+
    int maxValue
    
+
    This property holds the maximum value of the spin box.
+
    When setting this property, TQSpinBox::minValue is adjusted, if
+necessary, to ensure that the range remains valid.
+
     
    See also setRange() and specialValueText.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setMaxValue() and get this property's value with maxValue().
+
    int minValue
    
+
    This property holds the minimum value of the spin box.
+
    When setting this property, TQSpinBox::maxValue is adjusted, if
+necessary, to ensure that the range remains valid.
+
     
    See also setRange() and specialValueText.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setMinValue() and get this property's value with minValue().
+
    TQString prefix
    
+
    This property holds the spin box's prefix.
+
    The prefix is prepended to the start of the displayed value.
+Typical use is to display a unit of measurement or a currency
+symbol. For example:
+
     
    +        sb->setPrefix( "$" );
+    
    
+ 
+
     To turn off the prefix display, set this property to an empty
+string. The default is no prefix. The prefix is not displayed for
+the minValue() if specialValueText() is not empty.
+
     If no prefix is set, prefix() returns TQString::null.
+
     
    See also suffix.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setPrefix() and get this property's value with prefix().
+
    TQString specialValueText
    
+
    This property holds the special-value text.
+
    If set, the spin box will display this text instead of a numeric
+value whenever the current value is equal to minVal(). Typical use
+is to indicate that this choice has a special (default) meaning.
+
     For example, if your spin box allows the user to choose the margin
+width in a print dialog and your application is able to
+automatically choose a good margin width, you can set up the spin
+box like this:
+
    +        TQSpinBox marginBox( -1, 20, 1, parent, "marginBox" );
+        marginBox->setSuffix( " mm" );
+        marginBox->setSpecialValueText( "Auto" );
+    
    
+ 
+The user will then be able to choose a margin width from 0-20
+millimeters or select "Auto" to leave it to the application to
+choose. Your code must then interpret the spin box value of -1 as
+the user requesting automatic margin width.
+
     All values are displayed with the prefix() and suffix() (if set),
+except for the special value, which only shows the special
+value text.
+
     To turn off the special-value text display, call this function
+with an empty string. The default is no special-value text, i.e.
+the numeric value is shown as usual.
+
     If no special-value text is set, specialValueText() returns
+TQString::null.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setSpecialValueText() and get this property's value with specialValueText().
+
    TQString suffix
    
+
    This property holds the suffix of the spin box.
+
    The suffix is appended to the end of the displayed value. Typical
+use is to display a unit of measurement or a currency symbol. For
+example:
+
     
    +        sb->setSuffix( " km" );
+    
    
+ 
+
     To turn off the suffix display, set this property to an empty
+string. The default is no suffix. The suffix is not displayed for
+the minValue() if specialValueText() is not empty.
+
     If no suffix is set, suffix() returns a TQString::null.
+
     
    See also prefix.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setSuffix() and get this property's value with suffix().
+
    TQString text
    
+
    This property holds the spin box's text, including any prefix() and suffix().
+
    There is no default text.
+
     
    See also value.
+
+
    Get this property's value with text().
+
    int value
    
+
    This property holds the value of the spin box.
+
    Set this property's value with setValue() and get this property's value with value().
+
    See also TQRangeControl::setValue().
+
+
    bool wrapping
    
+
    This property holds whether it is possible to step the value from the highest value to the lowest value and vice versa.
+
    By default, wrapping is turned off.
+
     If you have a range of 0..100 and wrapping is off when the user
+reaches 100 and presses the Up Arrow nothing will happen; but if
+wrapping is on the value will change from 100 to 0, then to 1,
+etc. When wrapping is on, navigating past the highest value takes
+you to the lowest and vice versa.
+
     
    See also minValue, maxValue, and setRange().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setWrapping() and get this property's value with wrapping().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsplashscreen.html b/doc/html/ntqsplashscreen.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..da8cfa38e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsplashscreen.html
@@ -0,0 +1,193 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSplashScreen Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSplashScreen Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQSplashScreen widget provides a splash screen that can
+be shown during application startup.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsplashscreen.h>
+
    Inherits TQWidget.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
      
+
    • void message ( const TQString & message, int alignment = AlignLeft, const TQColor & color = black )
      • 
+
    • void clear ()
      • 
+
    
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSplashScreen widget provides a splash screen that can
+be shown during application startup.
+
     
+
+
     A splash screen is a widget that is usually displayed when an
+application is being started. Splash screens are often used for
+applications that have long start up times (e.g. database or
+networking applications that take time to establish connections) to
+provide the user with feedback that the application is loading.
+
     The splash screen appears centered on the screen. It may be useful to add
+the WStyle_StaysOnTop if you desire to keep above all the windows in the
+GUI.
+
     Some X11 window managers do not support the "stays on top" flag. A
+solution is to set up a timer that periodically calls raise() on
+the splash screen to simulate the "stays on top" effect.
+
     The most common usage is to show a splash screen before the main
+widget is displayed on the screen. This is illustrated in the
+following code snippet.
+
     
    +   int main( int argc, char **argv )
+   {
+       TQApplication app( argc, argv );
+       TQPixmap pixmap( "splash.png" );
+       TQSplashScreen *splash = new TQSplashScreen( pixmap );
+       splash->show();
+       TQMainWindow *mainWin = new TQMainWindow;
+       ...
+       app.setMainWidget( mainWin );
+       mainWin->show();
+       splash->finish( mainWin );
+       delete splash;
+       return app.exec();
+   }
+   
    
+ 
+
     It is sometimes useful to update the splash screen with messages,
+for example, announcing connections established or modules loaded
+as the application starts up. TQSplashScreen supports this with the
+message() function. If you wish to do your own drawing you can
+get a pointer to the pixmap used in the splash screen with pixmap().
+Alternatively, you can subclass TQSplashScreen and reimplement
+drawContents().
+
     The user can hide the splash screen by clicking on it with the
+mouse. Since the splash screen is typically displayed before the
+event loop has started running, it is necessary to periodically
+call TQApplication::processEvents() to receive the mouse clicks.
+
     
    +   TQPixmap pixmap( "splash.png" );
+   TQSplashScreen *splash = new TQSplashScreen( pixmap );
+   splash->show();
+   ... // Loading some items
+   splash->message( "Loaded modules" );
+   qApp->processEvents();
+   ... // Establishing connections
+   splash->message( "Established connections" );
+   qApp->processEvents();
+   
    
+ 
+
     
    See also Miscellaneous Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSplashScreen::TQSplashScreen ( const TQPixmap & pixmap = TQPixmap ( ), WFlags f = 0 )
+
    
+Construct a splash screen that will display the pixmap.
+
     There should be no need to set the widget flags, f, except
+perhaps WDestructiveClose or WStyle_StaysOnTop.
+
+
    TQSplashScreen::~TQSplashScreen () [virtual]
+
    
+Destructor.
+
+
    void TQSplashScreen::clear () [slot]
+
    
+Removes the message being displayed on the splash screen
+
     
    See also message().
+
+
    void TQSplashScreen::drawContents ( TQPainter * painter ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Draw the contents of the splash screen using painter painter.
+The default implementation draws the message passed by message().
+Reimplement this function if you want to do your own drawing on
+the splash screen.
+
+
    void TQSplashScreen::finish ( TQWidget * mainWin )
+
    
+Makes the splash screen wait until the widget mainWin is displayed
+before calling close() on itself.
+
+
    void TQSplashScreen::message ( const TQString & message, int alignment = AlignLeft, const TQColor & color = black ) [slot]
+
    
+Draws the message text onto the splash screen with color color and aligns the text according to the flags in alignment.
+
     
    See also TQt::AlignmentFlags and clear().
+
+
    void TQSplashScreen::messageChanged ( const TQString & message ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the message on the splash screen
+changes. message is the new message and is a null-string
+when the message has been removed.
+
     
    See also message() and clear().
+
+
    TQPixmap * TQSplashScreen::pixmap () const
+
    
+Returns the pixmap that is used in the splash screen. The image
+does not have any of the text drawn by message() calls.
+
+
    void TQSplashScreen::repaint ()
+
    
+This overrides TQWidget::repaint(). It differs from the standard
+repaint function in that it also calls TQApplication::flush() to
+ensure the updates are displayed, even when there is no event loop
+present.
+
+
    void TQSplashScreen::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pixmap )
+
    
+Sets the pixmap that will be used as the splash screen's image to
+pixmap.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsplitter.html b/doc/html/ntqsplitter.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..295d820bb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsplitter.html
@@ -0,0 +1,337 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSplitter Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSplitter Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQSplitter class implements a splitter widget.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsplitter.h>
+
    Inherits TQFrame.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • virtual void childEvent ( TQChildEvent * c )
      • 
+
    • int idAfter ( TQWidget * w ) const
      • 
+
    • void moveSplitter ( TQCOORD p, int id )
      • 
+
    • virtual void drawSplitter ( TQPainter * p, TQCOORD x, TQCOORD y, TQCOORD w, TQCOORD h )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • int adjustPos ( int pos, int id )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setRubberband ( int p )
      • 
+
    • void getRange ( int id, int * min, int * max )
      • 
+
    
+
    Related Functions
    
+
      
+
    • TQTextStream & operator<< ( TQTextStream & ts, const TQSplitter & splitter )
      • 
+
    • TQTextStream & operator>> ( TQTextStream & ts, TQSplitter & splitter )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSplitter class implements a splitter widget.
+
     
+
+
     A splitter lets the user control the size of child widgets by
+dragging the boundary between the children. Any number of widgets
+may be controlled by a single splitter.
+
     To show a TQListBox, a TQListView and a TQTextEdit side by side:
+
    +        TQSplitter *split = new TQSplitter( parent );
+        TQListBox *lb = new TQListBox( split );
+        TQListView *lv = new TQListView( split );
+        TQTextEdit *ed = new TQTextEdit( split );
+    
    
+ 
+
     TQSplitter lays out its children horizontally (side by side); you
+can use setOrientation(TQSplitter::Vertical) to lay out the
+children vertically.
+
     By default, all widgets can be as large or as small as the user
+wishes, between the minimumSizeHint() (or minimumSize())
+and maximumSize() of the widgets. Use setResizeMode() to
+specify that a widget should keep its size when the splitter is
+resized, or set the stretch component of the sizePolicy.
+
     Although TQSplitter normally resizes the children only at the end
+of a resize operation, if you call setOpaqueResize(TRUE) the
+widgets are resized as often as possible.
+
     The initial distribution of size between the widgets is determined
+by the initial size of each widget. You can also use setSizes() to
+set the sizes of all the widgets. The function sizes() returns the
+sizes set by the user.
+
     If you hide() a child its space will be distributed among the
+other children. It will be reinstated when you show() it again. It
+is also possible to reorder the widgets within the splitter using
+moveToFirst() and moveToLast().
+
      
+
     
    See also TQTabBar and Organizers.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQSplitter::ResizeMode
    
+
+
     This enum type describes how TQSplitter will resize each of its
+child widgets.
+
      
+
    • TQSplitter::Auto - The widget will be resized according to the stretch
+factors set in its sizePolicy().
+
    • TQSplitter::Stretch - The widget will be resized when the splitter
+itself is resized.
+
    • TQSplitter::KeepSize - TQSplitter will try to keep the widget's size
+unchanged.
+
    • TQSplitter::FollowSizeHint - TQSplitter will resize the widget when the
+widget's size hint changes.
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSplitter::TQSplitter ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a horizontal splitter with the parent and name
+arguments being passed on to the TQFrame constructor.
+
+
    TQSplitter::TQSplitter ( Orientation o, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a splitter with orientation o with the parent and
+name arguments being passed on to the TQFrame constructor.
+
+
    TQSplitter::~TQSplitter ()
+
    
+Destroys the splitter and any children.
+
+
    int TQSplitter::adjustPos ( int pos, int id ) [protected]
+
    
+Returns the closest legal position to pos of the widget with ID
+id.
+
     
    See also idAfter().
+
+
    void TQSplitter::childEvent ( TQChildEvent * c ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Tells the splitter that the child widget described by c has
+been inserted or removed.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQObject.
+
    bool TQSplitter::childrenCollapsible () const
+
    Returns TRUE if child widgets can be resized down to size 0 by the user; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "childrenCollapsible" property for details.
+
    void TQSplitter::drawSplitter ( TQPainter * p, TQCOORD x, TQCOORD y, TQCOORD w, TQCOORD h ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Draws the splitter handle in the rectangle described by x, y,
+w, h using painter p.
+
    See also TQStyle::drawPrimitive().
+
+
    void TQSplitter::getRange ( int id, int * min, int * max ) [protected]
+
    
+Returns the valid range of the splitter with ID id in *min
+and *max if min and max are not 0.
+
     
    See also idAfter().
+
+
    int TQSplitter::handleWidth () const
+
    Returns the width of the splitter handle.
+See the "handleWidth" property for details.
+
    int TQSplitter::idAfter ( TQWidget * w ) const [protected]
+
    
+Returns the ID of the widget to the right of or below the widget
+w, or 0 if there is no such widget (i.e. it is either not in
+this TQSplitter or w is at the end).
+
+
    void TQSplitter::moveSplitter ( TQCOORD p, int id ) [protected]
+
    
+Moves the left/top edge of the splitter handle with ID id as
+close as possible to position p, which is the distance from the
+left (or top) edge of the widget.
+
     For Arabic, Hebrew and other right-to-left languages the layout is
+reversed.  p is then the distance from the right (or top) edge
+of the widget.
+
     
    See also idAfter().
+
+
    void TQSplitter::moveToFirst ( TQWidget * w )
+
    
+Moves widget w to the leftmost/top position.
+
+
    Example: splitter/splitter.cpp.
+
    void TQSplitter::moveToLast ( TQWidget * w )
+
    
+Moves widget w to the rightmost/bottom position.
+
+
    bool TQSplitter::opaqueResize () const
+
    Returns TRUE if resizing is opaque; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "opaqueResize" property for details.
+
    Orientation TQSplitter::orientation () const
+
    Returns the orientation of the splitter.
+See the "orientation" property for details.
+
    void TQSplitter::refresh ()
+
    
+
+
     Updates the splitter's state. You should not need to call this
+function.
+
+
    void TQSplitter::setChildrenCollapsible ( bool )
+
    Sets whether child widgets can be resized down to size 0 by the user.
+See the "childrenCollapsible" property for details.
+
    void TQSplitter::setCollapsible ( TQWidget * w, bool collapse )
+
    
+Sets whether the child widget w is collapsible to collapse.
+
     By default, children are collapsible, meaning that the user can
+resize them down to size 0, even if they have a non-zero
+minimumSize() or minimumSizeHint(). This behavior can be changed
+on a per-widget basis by calling this function, or globally for
+all the widgets in the splitter by setting the childrenCollapsible property.
+
     
    See also childrenCollapsible.
+
+
    void TQSplitter::setHandleWidth ( int )
+
    Sets the width of the splitter handle.
+See the "handleWidth" property for details.
+
    void TQSplitter::setOpaqueResize ( bool = TRUE ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether resizing is opaque.
+See the "opaqueResize" property for details.
+
    void TQSplitter::setOrientation ( Orientation ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the orientation of the splitter.
+See the "orientation" property for details.
+
    void TQSplitter::setResizeMode ( TQWidget * w, ResizeMode mode ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets resize mode of widget w to mode. (The default is Auto.)
+
+
    Examples: fileiconview/mainwindow.cpp, listviews/listviews.cpp, and splitter/splitter.cpp.
+
    void TQSplitter::setRubberband ( int p ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Displays a rubber band at position p. If p is negative, the
+rubber band is removed.
+
+
    void TQSplitter::setSizes ( TQValueList<int> list )
+
    
+Sets the size parameters to the values given in the list. If
+the splitter is horizontal, the values set the widths of each
+widget going from left to right. If the splitter is vertical, the
+values set the heights of each widget going from top to bottom.
+Extra values in the list are ignored.
+
     If list contains too few values, the result is undefined but
+the program will still be well-behaved.
+
     Note that the values in list should be the height/width that
+the widgets should be resized to.
+
     
    See also sizes().
+
+
    TQValueList<int> TQSplitter::sizes () const
+
    
+Returns a list of the size parameters of all the widgets in this
+splitter.
+
     If the splitter's orientation is horizontal, the list is a list of
+widget widths; if the orientation is vertical, the list is a list
+of widget heights.
+
     Giving the values to another splitter's setSizes() function will
+produce a splitter with the same layout as this one.
+
     Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
+over a copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQValueList<int> list = mySplitter.sizes();
+    TQValueList<int>::Iterator it = list.begin();
+    while( it != list.end() ) {
+        myProcessing( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also setSizes().
+
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    bool childrenCollapsible
    
+
    This property holds whether child widgets can be resized down to size 0 by the user.
+
    By default, children are collapsible. It is possible to enable
+and disable the collapsing of individual children; see
+setCollapsible().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setChildrenCollapsible() and get this property's value with childrenCollapsible().
+
    int handleWidth
    
+
    This property holds the width of the splitter handle.
+
    
+
    Set this property's value with setHandleWidth() and get this property's value with handleWidth().
+
    bool opaqueResize
    
+
    This property holds whether resizing is opaque.
+
    Opaque resizing is off by default.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setOpaqueResize() and get this property's value with opaqueResize().
+
    Orientation orientation
    
+
    This property holds the orientation of the splitter.
+
    By default the orientation is horizontal (the widgets are side by
+side). The possible orientations are Horizontal and
+Vertical.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setOrientation() and get this property's value with orientation().
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    TQTextStream & operator<< ( TQTextStream & ts, const TQSplitter & splitter )
+
    
+
+
     Writes the sizes and the hidden state of the widgets in the
+splitter splitter to the text stream ts.
+
     
    See also operator>>(), sizes(), and TQWidget::hidden.
+
+
    TQTextStream & operator>> ( TQTextStream & ts, TQSplitter & splitter )
+
    
+
+
     Reads the sizes and the hidden state of the widgets in the
+splitter splitter from the text stream ts. The sizes must
+have been previously written by the operator<<() function.
+
     
    See also operator<<(), setSizes(), and TQWidget::hide().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsql.html b/doc/html/ntqsql.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..02e5c3ac6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsql.html
@@ -0,0 +1,121 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSql Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSql Class Reference
    [sql module]
    
+
+
    The TQSql class is a namespace for TQt SQL identifiers that
+need to be global-like.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsql.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQSql ()
      • 
+
    • enum Op { None = -1, Insert = 0, Update = 1, Delete = 2 }
      • 
+
    • enum Location { BeforeFirst = -1, AfterLast = -2 }
      • 
+
    • enum Confirm { Cancel = -1, No = 0, Yes = 1 }
      • 
+
    • enum ParameterType { In = 1, Out = 2, InOut = 3 }
      • 
+
    • enum TableType { Tables = 0x01, SystemTables = 0x02, Views = 0x04, AllTables = 0xff }
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSql class is a namespace for TQt SQL identifiers that
+need to be global-like.
+
     
+
+
+
     Normally, you can ignore this class. Several TQt SQL classes
+inherit it, so all the identifiers in the TQt SQL namespace are
+visible without qualification.
+
    See also Database Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQSql::Confirm
    
+
+
     This enum type describes edit confirmations.
+
      
+
    • TQSql::Yes
+
    • TQSql::No
+
    • TQSql::Cancel
+
    
+
    TQSql::Location
    
+
+
     This enum type describes SQL navigation locations.
+
      
+
    • TQSql::BeforeFirst
+
    • TQSql::AfterLast
+
    
+
    TQSql::Op
    
+
+
     This enum type describes edit operations.
+
      
+
    • TQSql::None
+
    • TQSql::Insert
+
    • TQSql::Update
+
    • TQSql::Delete
+
    
+
    TQSql::ParameterType
    
+
+
     This enum is used to set the type of a bind parameter
+
      
+
    • TQSql::In - the bind parameter is used to put data into the database
+
    • TQSql::Out - the bind parameter is used to receive data from the database
+
    • TQSql::InOut - the bind parameter is used to put data into the
+database; it will be overwritten with output data on executing
+a query.
+
    
+
    TQSql::TableType
    
+
+
     This enum type describes types of tables
+
      
+
    • TQSql::Tables - All the tables visible to the user
+
    • TQSql::SystemTables - Internal tables used by the DBMS
+
    • TQSql::Views - All the views visible to the user
+
    • TQSql::AllTables - All of the above
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSql::TQSql ()
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a TQt SQL namespace class
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsqlcursor.html b/doc/html/ntqsqlcursor.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..aaa3ad329
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsqlcursor.html
@@ -0,0 +1,761 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSqlCursor Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSqlCursor Class Reference
    [sql module]
    
+
+
    The TQSqlCursor class provides browsing and editing of SQL
+tables and views.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsqlcursor.h>
+
    Inherits TQSqlRecord and TQSqlQuery.
+
    Inherited by TQSqlSelectCursor.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQSqlCursor ( const TQString & name = TQString::null, bool autopopulate = TRUE, TQSqlDatabase * db = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQSqlCursor ( const TQSqlCursor & other )
      • 
+
    • TQSqlCursor & operator= ( const TQSqlCursor & other )
      • 
+
    • ~TQSqlCursor ()
      • 
+
    • enum Mode { ReadOnly = 0, Insert = 1, Update = 2, Delete = 4, Writable = 7 }
      • 
+
    • virtual TQSqlIndex primaryIndex ( bool setFromCursor = TRUE ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual TQSqlIndex index ( const TQStringList & fieldNames ) const
      • 
+
    • TQSqlIndex index ( const TQString & fieldName ) const
      • 
+
    • TQSqlIndex index ( const char * fieldName ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setPrimaryIndex ( const TQSqlIndex & idx )
      • 
+
    • virtual void append ( const TQSqlFieldInfo & fieldInfo )
      • 
+
    • virtual void insert ( int pos, const TQSqlFieldInfo & fieldInfo )
      • 
+
    • virtual void remove ( int pos )
      • 
+
    • virtual void clear ()
      • 
+
    • virtual void setGenerated ( const TQString & name, bool generated )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setGenerated ( int i, bool generated )
      • 
+
    • virtual TQSqlRecord * editBuffer ( bool copy = FALSE )
      • 
+
    • virtual TQSqlRecord * primeInsert ()
      • 
+
    • virtual TQSqlRecord * primeUpdate ()
      • 
+
    • virtual TQSqlRecord * primeDelete ()
      • 
+
    • virtual int insert ( bool invalidate = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • virtual int update ( bool invalidate = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • virtual int del ( bool invalidate = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setMode ( int mode )
      • 
+
    • int mode () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setCalculated ( const TQString & name, bool calculated )
      • 
+
    • bool isCalculated ( const TQString & name ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setTrimmed ( const TQString & name, bool trim )
      • 
+
    • bool isTrimmed ( const TQString & name ) const
      • 
+
    • bool isReadOnly () const
      • 
+
    • bool canInsert () const
      • 
+
    • bool canUpdate () const
      • 
+
    • bool canDelete () const
      • 
+
    • bool select ()
      • 
+
    • bool select ( const TQSqlIndex & sort )
      • 
+
    • bool select ( const TQSqlIndex & filter, const TQSqlIndex & sort )
      • 
+
    • virtual bool select ( const TQString & filter, const TQSqlIndex & sort = TQSqlIndex ( ) )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setSort ( const TQSqlIndex & sort )
      • 
+
    • TQSqlIndex sort () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setFilter ( const TQString & filter )
      • 
+
    • TQString filter () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setName ( const TQString & name, bool autopopulate = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • TQString name () const
      • 
+
    • bool isNull ( int i ) const
      • 
+
    • bool isNull ( const TQString & name ) const
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • virtual TQVariant calculateField ( const TQString & name )
      • 
+
    • virtual int update ( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • virtual int del ( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • virtual TQString toString ( const TQString & prefix, TQSqlField * field, const TQString & fieldSep ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual TQString toString ( TQSqlRecord * rec, const TQString & prefix, const TQString & fieldSep, const TQString & sep ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual TQString toString ( const TQSqlIndex & i, TQSqlRecord * rec, const TQString & prefix, const TQString & fieldSep, const TQString & sep ) const
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSqlCursor class provides browsing and editing of SQL
+tables and views.
+
     
+
+
     A TQSqlCursor is a database record (see TQSqlRecord) that
+corresponds to a table or view within an SQL database (see TQSqlDatabase). There are two buffers in a cursor, one used for
+browsing and one used for editing records. Each buffer contains a
+list of fields which correspond to the fields in the table or
+view.
+
     When positioned on a valid record, the browse buffer contains the
+values of the current record's fields from the database. The edit
+buffer is separate, and is used for editing existing records and
+inserting new records.
+
     For browsing data, a cursor must first select() data from the
+database. After a successful select() the cursor is active
+(isActive() returns TRUE), but is initially not positioned on a
+valid record (isValid() returns FALSE). To position the cursor on
+a valid record, use one of the navigation functions, next(),
+prev(), first(), last(), or seek(). Once positioned on a valid
+record, data can be retrieved from the browse buffer using
+value(). If a navigation function is not successful, it returns
+FALSE, the cursor will no longer be positioned on a valid record
+and the values returned by value() are undefined.
+
     For example:
+
     
+
+
                TQSqlCursor cur( "staff" ); // Specify the table/view name
+            cur.select(); // We'll retrieve every record
+            while ( cur.next() ) {
+                qDebug( cur.value( "id" ).toString() + ": " +
+                        cur.value( "surname" ).toString() + " " +
+                        cur.value( "salary" ).toString() );
+            }
+
    
+
     In the above example, a cursor is created specifying a table or
+view name in the database. Then, select() is called, which can be
+optionally parameterised to filter and order the records
+retrieved. Each record in the cursor is retrieved using next().
+When next() returns FALSE, there are no more records to process,
+and the loop terminates.
+
     For editing records (rows of data), a cursor contains a separate
+edit buffer which is independent of the fields used when browsing.
+The functions insert(), update() and del() operate on the edit
+buffer. This allows the cursor to be repositioned to other
+records while simultaneously maintaining a separate buffer for
+edits. You can get a pointer to the edit buffer using
+editBuffer(). The primeInsert(), primeUpdate() and primeDelete()
+functions also return a pointer to the edit buffer and prepare it
+for insert, update and delete respectively. Edit operations only
+affect a single row at a time. Note that update() and del()
+require that the table or view contain a primaryIndex() to ensure
+that edit operations affect a unique record within the database.
+
     For example:
+
     
+
+
                TQSqlCursor cur( "prices" );
+            cur.select( "id=202" );
+            if ( cur.next() ) {
+                TQSqlRecord *buffer = cur.primeUpdate();
+                double price = buffer->value( "price" ).toDouble();
+                double newprice = price * 1.05;
+                buffer->setValue( "price", newprice );
+                cur.update();
+            }
+
    
+
     To edit an existing database record, first move to the record you
+wish to update. Call primeUpdate() to get the pointer to the
+cursor's edit buffer. Then use this pointer to modify the values
+in the edit buffer. Finally, call update() to save the changes to
+the database. The values in the edit buffer will be used to
+locate the appropriate record when updating the database (see
+primaryIndex()).
+
     Similarly, when deleting an existing database record, first move
+to the record you wish to delete. Then, call primeDelete() to get
+the pointer to the edit buffer. Finally, call del() to delete the
+record from the database. Again, the values in the edit buffer
+will be used to locate and delete the appropriate record.
+
     To insert a new record, call primeInsert() to get the pointer to
+the edit buffer. Use this pointer to populate the edit buffer
+with new values and then insert() the record into the database.
+
     After calling insert(), update() or del(), the cursor is no longer
+positioned on a valid record and can no longer be navigated
+(isValid() return FALSE). The reason for this is that any changes
+made to the database will not be visible until select() is called
+to refresh the cursor. You can change this behavior by passing
+FALSE to insert(), update() or del() which will prevent the cursor
+from becoming invalid. The edits will still not be visible when
+navigating the cursor until select() is called.
+
     TQSqlCursor contains virtual methods which allow editing behavior
+to be customized by subclasses. This allows custom cursors to be
+created that encapsulate the editing behavior of a database table
+for an entire application. For example, a cursor can be customized
+to always auto-number primary index fields, or provide fields with
+suitable default values, when inserting new records. TQSqlCursor
+generates SQL statements which are sent to the database engine;
+you can control which fields are included in these statements
+using setGenerated().
+
     Note that TQSqlCursor does not inherit from TQObject. This means
+that you are responsible for destroying instances of this class
+yourself. However if you create a TQSqlCursor and use it in a
+TQDataTable, TQDataBrowser or a TQDataView these classes will
+usually take ownership of the cursor and destroy it when they
+don't need it anymore. The documentation for TQDataTable,
+TQDataBrowser and TQDataView explicitly states which calls take
+ownership of the cursor.
+
    See also Database Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQSqlCursor::Mode
    
+
+
     This enum type describes how TQSqlCursor operates on records in the
+database.
+
      
+
    • TQSqlCursor::ReadOnly - the cursor can only SELECT records from the
+database.
+
    • TQSqlCursor::Insert - the cursor can INSERT records into the database.
+
    • TQSqlCursor::Update - the cursor can UPDATE records in the database.
+
    • TQSqlCursor::Delete - the cursor can DELETE records from the database.
+
    • TQSqlCursor::Writable - the cursor can INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE records
+in the database.
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSqlCursor::TQSqlCursor ( const TQString & name = TQString::null, bool autopopulate = TRUE, TQSqlDatabase * db = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a cursor on database db using table or view name.
+
     If autopopulate is TRUE (the default), the name of the
+cursor must correspond to an existing table or view name in the
+database so that field information can be automatically created.
+If the table or view does not exist, the cursor will not be
+functional.
+
     The cursor is created with an initial mode of TQSqlCursor::Writable
+(meaning that records can be inserted, updated or deleted using
+the cursor). If the cursor does not have a unique primary index,
+update and deletes cannot be performed.
+
     Note that autopopulate refers to populating the cursor with
+meta-data, e.g. the names of the table's fields, not with
+retrieving data. The select() function is used to populate the
+cursor with data.
+
     
    See also setName() and setMode().
+
+
    TQSqlCursor::TQSqlCursor ( const TQSqlCursor & other )
+
    
+Constructs a copy of other.
+
+
    TQSqlCursor::~TQSqlCursor ()
+
    
+Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
+
+
    void TQSqlCursor::append ( const TQSqlFieldInfo & fieldInfo ) [virtual]
+
    
+Append a copy of field fieldInfo to the end of the cursor. Note
+that all references to the cursor edit buffer become invalidated.
+
+
    TQVariant TQSqlCursor::calculateField ( const TQString & name ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Protected virtual function which is called whenever a field needs
+to be calculated. If calculated fields are being used, derived
+classes must reimplement this function and return the appropriate
+value for field name. The default implementation returns an
+invalid TQVariant.
+
     
    See also setCalculated().
+
+
    Examples: sql/overview/subclass3/main.cpp and sql/overview/subclass4/main.cpp.
+
    bool TQSqlCursor::canDelete () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the cursor will perform deletes; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     
    See also setMode().
+
+
    bool TQSqlCursor::canInsert () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the cursor will perform inserts; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     
    See also setMode().
+
+
    bool TQSqlCursor::canUpdate () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the cursor will perform updates; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     
    See also setMode().
+
+
    void TQSqlCursor::clear () [virtual]
+
    
+Removes all fields from the cursor. Note that all references to
+the cursor edit buffer become invalidated.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQSqlRecord.
+
    int TQSqlCursor::del ( bool invalidate = TRUE ) [virtual]
+
    
+Deletes a record from the database using the cursor's primary
+index and the contents of the cursor edit buffer. Returns the
+number of records which were deleted.
+For error information, use lastError().
+
     Only records which meet the filter criteria specified by the
+cursor's primary index are deleted. If the cursor does not contain
+a primary index, no delete is performed and 0 is returned. If invalidate is TRUE (the default), the current cursor can no longer
+be navigated. A new select() call must be made before you can move
+to a valid record. For example:
+
     
+
+
                TQSqlCursor cur( "prices" );
+            cur.select( "id=999" );
+            if ( cur.next() ) {
+                cur.primeDelete();
+                cur.del();
+            }
+
    
+
     In the above example, a cursor is created on the 'prices' table
+and positioned to the record to be deleted. First primeDelete() is
+called to populate the edit buffer with the current cursor values,
+e.g. with an id of 999, and then del() is called to actually
+delete the record from the database. Remember: all edit operations
+(insert(), update() and delete()) operate on the contents of the
+cursor edit buffer and not on the contents of the cursor itself.
+
     
    See also primeDelete(), setMode(), and lastError().
+
+
    Example: sql/overview/delete/main.cpp.
+
    int TQSqlCursor::del ( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate = TRUE ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Deletes the current cursor record from the database using the
+filter filter. Only records which meet the filter criteria are
+deleted. Returns the number of records which were deleted. If invalidate is TRUE (the default), the current cursor can no longer
+be navigated. A new select() call must be made before you can move
+to a valid record. For error information, use lastError().
+
     The filter is an SQL WHERE clause, e.g. id=500.
+
     
    See also setMode() and lastError().
+
+
    TQSqlRecord * TQSqlCursor::editBuffer ( bool copy = FALSE ) [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the current internal edit buffer. If copy is TRUE (the
+default is FALSE), the current cursor field values are first
+copied into the edit buffer. The edit buffer is valid as long as
+the cursor remains valid. The cursor retains ownership of the
+returned pointer, so it must not be deleted or modified.
+
     
    See also primeInsert(), primeUpdate(), and primeDelete().
+
+
    TQString TQSqlCursor::filter () const
+
    
+Returns the current filter, or an empty string if there is no
+current filter.
+
+
    TQSqlIndex TQSqlCursor::index ( const TQStringList & fieldNames ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns an index composed of fieldNames, all in ASCending
+order. Note that all field names must exist in the cursor,
+otherwise an empty index is returned.
+
     
    See also TQSqlIndex.
+
+
    Examples: sql/overview/extract/main.cpp, sql/overview/order1/main.cpp, sql/overview/order2/main.cpp, and sql/overview/table3/main.cpp.
+
    TQSqlIndex TQSqlCursor::index ( const TQString & fieldName ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns an index based on fieldName.
+
+
    TQSqlIndex TQSqlCursor::index ( const char * fieldName ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns an index based on fieldName.
+
+
    void TQSqlCursor::insert ( int pos, const TQSqlFieldInfo & fieldInfo ) [virtual]
+
    
+Insert a copy of fieldInfo at position pos. If a field
+already exists at pos, it is removed. Note that all references
+to the cursor edit buffer become invalidated.
+
+
    Examples: sql/overview/insert/main.cpp and sql/overview/insert2/main.cpp.
+
    int TQSqlCursor::insert ( bool invalidate = TRUE ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts the current contents of the cursor's edit record buffer
+into the database, if the cursor allows inserts. Returns the
+number of rows affected by the insert. For error information, use
+lastError().
+
     If invalidate is TRUE (the default), the cursor will no longer
+be positioned on a valid record and can no longer be navigated. A
+new select() call must be made before navigating to a valid
+record.
+
     
+
+
                TQSqlCursor cur( "prices" );
+            TQSqlRecord *buffer = cur.primeInsert();
+            buffer->setValue( "id",    53981 );
+            buffer->setValue( "name",  "Thingy" );
+            buffer->setValue( "price", 105.75 );
+            cur.insert();
+
    
+
     In the above example, a cursor is created on the 'prices' table
+and a pointer to the insert buffer is atquired using primeInsert().
+Each field's value is set to the desired value and then insert()
+is called to insert the data into the database. Remember: all edit
+operations (insert(), update() and delete()) operate on the
+contents of the cursor edit buffer and not on the contents of the
+cursor itself.
+
     
    See also setMode() and lastError().
+
+
    bool TQSqlCursor::isCalculated ( const TQString & name ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the field name exists and is calculated;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setCalculated().
+
+
    bool TQSqlCursor::isNull ( int i ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the field i is NULL or if there is no field at
+position i; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     This is the same as calling TQSqlRecord::isNull( i )
+
+
    bool TQSqlCursor::isNull ( const TQString & name ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns TRUE if the field called name is NULL or if there is no
+field called name; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     This is the same as calling TQSqlRecord::isNull( name )
+
+
    bool TQSqlCursor::isReadOnly () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the cursor is read-only; otherwise returns FALSE.
+The default is FALSE. Read-only cursors cannot be edited using
+insert(), update() or del().
+
     
    See also setMode().
+
+
    bool TQSqlCursor::isTrimmed ( const TQString & name ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the field name exists and is trimmed; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     When a trimmed field of type string or cstring is read from the
+database any trailing (right-most) spaces are removed.
+
     
    See also setTrimmed().
+
+
    int TQSqlCursor::mode () const
+
    
+Returns the current cursor mode.
+
     
    See also setMode().
+
+
    TQString TQSqlCursor::name () const
+
    
+Returns the name of the cursor.
+
+
    TQSqlCursor & TQSqlCursor::operator= ( const TQSqlCursor & other )
+
    
+Sets the cursor equal to other.
+
+
    TQSqlIndex TQSqlCursor::primaryIndex ( bool setFromCursor = TRUE ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the primary index associated with the cursor as defined in
+the database, or an empty index if there is no primary index. If
+setFromCursor is TRUE (the default), the index fields are
+populated with the corresponding values in the cursor's current
+record.
+
+
    TQSqlRecord * TQSqlCursor::primeDelete () [virtual]
+
    
+This function primes the edit buffer's field values for delete and
+returns the edit buffer. The default implementation copies the
+field values from the current cursor record into the edit buffer
+(therefore, this function is equivalent to calling editBuffer(
+TRUE ) ). The cursor retains ownership of the returned pointer, so
+it must not be deleted or modified.
+
     
    See also editBuffer() and del().
+
+
    Example: sql/overview/delete/main.cpp.
+
    TQSqlRecord * TQSqlCursor::primeInsert () [virtual]
+
    
+This function primes the edit buffer's field values for insert and
+returns the edit buffer. The default implementation clears all
+field values in the edit buffer. The cursor retains ownership of
+the returned pointer, so it must not be deleted or modified.
+
     
    See also editBuffer() and insert().
+
+
    Examples: sql/overview/insert/main.cpp, sql/overview/insert2/main.cpp, sql/overview/subclass5/main.cpp, and sql/sqltable/main.cpp.
+
    TQSqlRecord * TQSqlCursor::primeUpdate () [virtual]
+
    
+This function primes the edit buffer's field values for update and
+returns the edit buffer. The default implementation copies the
+field values from the current cursor record into the edit buffer
+(therefore, this function is equivalent to calling editBuffer(
+TRUE ) ). The cursor retains ownership of the returned pointer, so
+it must not be deleted or modified.
+
     
    See also editBuffer() and update().
+
+
    Examples: sql/overview/custom1/main.cpp, sql/overview/form1/main.cpp, and sql/overview/update/main.cpp.
+
    void TQSqlCursor::remove ( int pos ) [virtual]
+
    
+Removes the field at pos. If pos does not exist, nothing
+happens. Note that all references to the cursor edit buffer become
+invalidated.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQSqlRecord.
+
    bool TQSqlCursor::select ( const TQString & filter, const TQSqlIndex & sort = TQSqlIndex ( ) ) [virtual]
+
    
+Selects all fields in the cursor from the database matching the
+filter criteria filter. The data is returned in the order
+specified by the index sort. Returns TRUE if the data was
+successfully selected; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     The filter is a string containing a SQL WHERE clause but
+without the 'WHERE' keyword. The cursor is initially positioned at
+an invalid row after this function is called. To move to a valid
+row, use seek(), first(), last(), prev() or next().
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQSqlCursor cur( "Employee" ); // Use the Employee table or view
+    cur.select( "deptno=10" ); // select all records in department 10
+    while( cur.next() ) {
+        ... // process data
+    }
+    ...
+    // select records in other departments, ordered by department number
+    cur.select( "deptno>10", cur.index( "deptno" ) );
+    ...
+    
    
+ 
+
     The filter will apply to any subsequent select() calls that do not
+explicitly specify another filter. Similarly the sort will apply
+to any subsequent select() calls that do not explicitly specify
+another sort.
+
     
    +    TQSqlCursor cur( "Employee" );
+    cur.select( "deptno=10" ); // select all records in department 10
+    while( cur.next() ) {
+        ... // process data
+    }
+    ...
+    cur.select(); // re-selects all records in department 10
+    ...
+    
    
+ 
+
     
+
    Examples: sql/overview/delete/main.cpp, sql/overview/extract/main.cpp, sql/overview/order1/main.cpp, sql/overview/order2/main.cpp, sql/overview/retrieve2/main.cpp, sql/overview/table3/main.cpp, and sql/overview/update/main.cpp.
+
    bool TQSqlCursor::select ()
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Selects all fields in the cursor from the database. The rows are
+returned in the order specified by the last call to setSort() or
+the last call to select() that specified a sort, whichever is the
+most recent. If there is no current sort, the order in which the
+rows are returned is undefined. The records are filtered according
+to the filter specified by the last call to setFilter() or the
+last call to select() that specified a filter, whichever is the
+most recent. If there is no current filter, all records are
+returned. The cursor is initially positioned at an invalid row. To
+move to a valid row, use seek(), first(), last(), prev() or
+next().
+
     
    See also setSort() and setFilter().
+
+
    bool TQSqlCursor::select ( const TQSqlIndex & sort )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Selects all fields in the cursor from the database. The data is
+returned in the order specified by the index sort. The records
+are filtered according to the filter specified by the last call to
+setFilter() or the last call to select() that specified a filter,
+whichever is the most recent. The cursor is initially positioned
+at an invalid row. To move to a valid row, use seek(), first(),
+last(), prev() or next().
+
+
    bool TQSqlCursor::select ( const TQSqlIndex & filter, const TQSqlIndex & sort )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Selects all fields in the cursor matching the filter index filter. The data is returned in the order specified by the index
+sort. The filter index works by constructing a WHERE clause
+using the names of the fields from the filter and their values
+from the current cursor record. The cursor is initially positioned
+at an invalid row. To move to a valid row, use seek(), first(),
+last(), prev() or next(). This function is useful, for example,
+for retrieving data based upon a table's primary index:
+
     
    +    TQSqlCursor cur( "Employee" );
+    TQSqlIndex pk = cur.primaryIndex();
+    cur.setValue( "id", 10 );
+    cur.select( pk, pk ); // generates "SELECT ... FROM Employee WHERE id=10 ORDER BY id"
+    ...
+    
    
+ 
+
     In this example the TQSqlIndex, pk, is used for two different
+purposes. When used as the filter (first) argument, the field
+names it contains are used to construct the WHERE clause, each set
+to the current cursor value, WHERE id=10, in this case. When
+used as the sort (second) argument the field names it contains are
+used for the ORDER BY clause, ORDER BY id in this example.
+
+
    void TQSqlCursor::setCalculated ( const TQString & name, bool calculated ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets field name to calculated. If the field name does not
+exist, nothing happens. The value of a calculated field is set by
+the calculateField() virtual function which you must reimplement
+(or the field value will be an invalid TQVariant). Calculated
+fields do not appear in generated SQL statements sent to the
+database.
+
     
    See also calculateField() and TQSqlRecord::setGenerated().
+
+
    void TQSqlCursor::setFilter ( const TQString & filter ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the current filter to filter. Note that no new records are
+selected. To select new records, use select(). The filter will
+apply to any subsequent select() calls that do not explicitly
+specify a filter.
+
     The filter is a SQL WHERE clause without the keyword 'WHERE',
+e.g. name='Dave' which will be processed by the DBMS.
+
+
    void TQSqlCursor::setGenerated ( const TQString & name, bool generated ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the generated flag for the field name to generated. If
+the field does not exist, nothing happens. Only fields that have
+generated set to TRUE are included in the SQL that is
+generated by insert(), update() or del().
+
     
    See also isGenerated().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQSqlRecord.
+
    void TQSqlCursor::setGenerated ( int i, bool generated ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the generated flag for the field i to generated.
+
     
    See also isGenerated().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQSqlRecord.
+
    void TQSqlCursor::setMode ( int mode ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the cursor mode to mode. This value can be an OR'ed
+combination of TQSqlCursor::Mode values. The default mode for a
+cursor is TQSqlCursor::Writable.
+
     
    +    TQSqlCursor cur( "Employee" );
+    cur.setMode( TQSqlCursor::Writable ); // allow insert/update/delete
+    ...
+    cur.setMode( TQSqlCursor::Insert | TQSqlCursor::Update ); // allow inserts and updates only
+    ...
+    cur.setMode( TQSqlCursor::ReadOnly ); // no inserts/updates/deletes allowed
+
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    void TQSqlCursor::setName ( const TQString & name, bool autopopulate = TRUE ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the name of the cursor to name. If autopopulate is TRUE
+(the default), the name must correspond to a valid table or
+view name in the database. Also, note that all references to the
+cursor edit buffer become invalidated when fields are
+auto-populated. See the TQSqlCursor constructor documentation for
+more information.
+
+
    void TQSqlCursor::setPrimaryIndex ( const TQSqlIndex & idx ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the primary index associated with the cursor to the index idx. Note that this index must contain a field or set of fields
+which identify a unique record within the underlying database
+table or view so that update() and del() will execute as expected.
+
     
    See also update() and del().
+
+
    void TQSqlCursor::setSort ( const TQSqlIndex & sort ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the current sort to sort. Note that no new records are
+selected. To select new records, use select(). The sort will
+apply to any subsequent select() calls that do not explicitly
+specify a sort.
+
+
    void TQSqlCursor::setTrimmed ( const TQString & name, bool trim ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets field name's trimmed status to trim. If the field name does not exist, nothing happens.
+
     When a trimmed field of type string or cstring is read from the
+database any trailing (right-most) spaces are removed.
+
     
    See also isTrimmed() and TQVariant.
+
+
    TQSqlIndex TQSqlCursor::sort () const
+
    
+Returns the current sort, or an empty index if there is no current
+sort.
+
+
    TQString TQSqlCursor::toString ( TQSqlRecord * rec, const TQString & prefix, const TQString & fieldSep, const TQString & sep ) const [virtual protected]
+
    
+Returns a formatted string composed of all the fields in rec.
+Each field is composed of the prefix (e.g. table or view name),
+".", the field name, the fieldSep and the field value. If the
+prefix is empty then each field will begin with the field name.
+The fields are then joined together separated by sep. Fields
+where isGenerated() returns FALSE are not included. This function
+is useful for generating SQL statements.
+
+
    TQString TQSqlCursor::toString ( const TQString & prefix, TQSqlField * field, const TQString & fieldSep ) const [virtual protected]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns a formatted string composed of the prefix (e.g. table
+or view name), ".", the field name, the fieldSep and the
+field value. If the prefix is empty then the string will begin
+with the field name. This function is useful for generating SQL
+statements.
+
+
    TQString TQSqlCursor::toString ( const TQSqlIndex & i, TQSqlRecord * rec, const TQString & prefix, const TQString & fieldSep, const TQString & sep ) const [virtual protected]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns a formatted string composed of all the fields in the index
+i. Each field is composed of the prefix (e.g. table or view
+name), ".", the field name, the fieldSep and the field value.
+If the prefix is empty then each field will begin with the field
+name. The field values are taken from rec. The fields are then
+joined together separated by sep. Fields where isGenerated()
+returns FALSE are ignored. This function is useful for generating
+SQL statements.
+
+
    int TQSqlCursor::update ( bool invalidate = TRUE ) [virtual]
+
    
+Updates the database with the current contents of the edit buffer.
+Returns the number of records which were updated.
+For error information, use lastError().
+
     Only records which meet the filter criteria specified by the
+cursor's primary index are updated. If the cursor does not contain
+a primary index, no update is performed and 0 is returned.
+
     If invalidate is TRUE (the default), the current cursor can no
+longer be navigated. A new select() call must be made before you
+can move to a valid record. For example:
+
     
+
+
                TQSqlCursor cur( "prices" );
+            cur.select( "id=202" );
+            if ( cur.next() ) {
+                TQSqlRecord *buffer = cur.primeUpdate();
+                double price = buffer->value( "price" ).toDouble();
+                double newprice = price * 1.05;
+                buffer->setValue( "price", newprice );
+                cur.update();
+            }
+
    
+
     In the above example, a cursor is created on the 'prices' table
+and is positioned on the record to be updated. Then a pointer to
+the cursor's edit buffer is actquired using primeUpdate(). A new
+value is calculated and placed into the edit buffer with the
+setValue() call. Finally, an update() call is made on the cursor
+which uses the tables's primary index to update the record in the
+database with the contents of the cursor's edit buffer. Remember:
+all edit operations (insert(), update() and delete()) operate on
+the contents of the cursor edit buffer and not on the contents of
+the cursor itself.
+
     Note that if the primary index does not uniquely distinguish
+records the database may be changed into an inconsistent state.
+
     
    See also setMode() and lastError().
+
+
    Example: sql/overview/update/main.cpp.
+
    int TQSqlCursor::update ( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate = TRUE ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Updates the database with the current contents of the cursor edit
+buffer using the specified filter. Returns the number of
+records which were updated.
+For error information, use lastError().
+
     Only records which meet the filter criteria are updated, otherwise
+all records in the table are updated.
+
     If invalidate is TRUE (the default), the cursor can no longer
+be navigated. A new select() call must be made before you can move
+to a valid record.
+
     
    See also primeUpdate(), setMode(), and lastError().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsqldatabase.html b/doc/html/ntqsqldatabase.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..40332ea19
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsqldatabase.html
@@ -0,0 +1,668 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSqlDatabase Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSqlDatabase Class Reference
    [sql module]
    
+
+
    The TQSqlDatabase class is used to create SQL database
+connections and to provide transaction handling.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsqldatabase.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQSqlDatabase * addDatabase ( const TQString & type, const TQString & connectionName = defaultConnection )
      • 
+
    • TQSqlDatabase * addDatabase ( TQSqlDriver * driver, const TQString & connectionName = defaultConnection )
      • 
+
    • TQSqlDatabase * database ( const TQString & connectionName = defaultConnection, bool open = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • void removeDatabase ( const TQString & connectionName )
      • 
+
    • void removeDatabase ( TQSqlDatabase * db )
      • 
+
    • bool contains ( const TQString & connectionName = defaultConnection )
      • 
+
    • TQStringList drivers ()
      • 
+
    • void registerSqlDriver ( const TQString & name, const TQSqlDriverCreatorBase * creator )
      • 
+
    • bool isDriverAvailable ( const TQString & name )
      • 
+
    
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • TQString connectOptions - the database connect options
      • 
+
    • TQString databaseName - the name of the database
      • 
+
    • TQString hostName - the host name where the database resides
      • 
+
    • TQString password - the password used to connect to the database
      • 
+
    • int port - the port used to connect to the database
      • 
+
    • TQString userName - the user name connected to the database
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQSqlDatabase ( const TQString & type, const TQString & name, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * objname = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQSqlDatabase ( TQSqlDriver * driver, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * objname = 0 )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSqlDatabase class is used to create SQL database
+connections and to provide transaction handling.
+
     
+
+
+
     Note that transaction handling is not supported by every SQL
+database. You can find out whether transactions are supported
+using TQSqlDriver::hasFeature().
+
     The TQSqlDatabase class provides an abstract interface for
+accessing many types of database backends. Database-specific
+drivers are used internally to actually access and manipulate
+data, (see TQSqlDriver). Result set objects provide the interface
+for executing and manipulating SQL queries (see TQSqlQuery).
+
    See also Database Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSqlDatabase::TQSqlDatabase ( const TQString & type, const TQString & name, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * objname = 0 ) [protected]
+
    
+Creates a TQSqlDatabase connection called name that uses the
+driver referred to by type, with the parent parent and the
+object name objname. If the type is not recognized, the
+database connection will have no functionality.
+
     The currently available drivers are:
+
     
    
+
     Driver Type Description
+
     TQODBC3 ODBC Driver (includes Microsoft SQL Server)
+
     TQOCI8 Oracle Call Interface Driver
+
     TQPSQL7 PostgreSQL v6.x and v7.x Driver
+
     TQTDS7 Sybase Adaptive Server
+
     TQMYSQL3 MySQL Driver
+
     TQDB2 IBM DB2, v7.1 and higher
+
     TQSQLITE SQLite Driver
+
     TQIBASE Borland Interbase Driver
+
    
+
     Additional third party drivers, including your own custom drivers,
+can be loaded dynamically.
+
     
    See also registerSqlDriver().
+
+
    TQSqlDatabase::TQSqlDatabase ( TQSqlDriver * driver, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * objname = 0 ) [protected]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Creates a database connection using the driver driver, with
+the parent parent and the object name objname.
+
     Warning: The framework takes ownership of the driver pointer,
+so it should not be deleted.
+
+
    TQSqlDatabase::~TQSqlDatabase ()
+
    
+Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
+
+
    TQSqlDatabase * TQSqlDatabase::addDatabase ( const TQString & type, const TQString & connectionName = defaultConnection ) [static]
+
    
+Adds a database to the list of database connections using the
+driver type and the connection name connectionName.
+
     The database connection is referred to by connectionName. The
+newly added database connection is returned. This pointer is owned
+by TQSqlDatabase and will be deleted on program exit or when
+removeDatabase() is called.
+
     If connectionName is not specified, the newly added database
+connection becomes the default database connection for the
+application, and subsequent calls to database() (without a
+database name parameter) will return a pointer to it. If connectionName is given, use database(connectionName) to retrieve a pointer to the
+database connection.
+
     Warning: If you add a database with the same name as an
+existing database, the new database will replace the old one.
+This will happen automatically if you call this function more
+than once without specifying connectionName.
+
     
    See also database() and removeDatabase().
+
+
    Examples: sql/overview/connect1/main.cpp, sql/overview/connection.cpp, and sql/sqltable/main.cpp.
+
    TQSqlDatabase * TQSqlDatabase::addDatabase ( TQSqlDriver * driver, const TQString & connectionName = defaultConnection ) [static]
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This function is useful if you need to set up the database
+connection and instantiate the driver yourself. If you do this, it
+is recommended that you include the driver code in your own
+application. For example, setting up a custom PostgreSQL
+connection and instantiating the TQPSQL7 driver can be done the
+following way:
+
     
    +    #include "qtdir/src/sql/drivers/psql/qsql_psql.cpp"
+    
    
+ 
+(We assume that qtdir is the directory where TQt is installed.)
+This will pull in the code that is needed to use the PostgreSQL
+client library and to instantiate a TQPSQLDriver object, assuming
+that you have the PostgreSQL headers somewhere in your include
+search path.
+
     
    +    PGconn* con = PQconnectdb( "host=server user=bart password=simpson dbname=springfield" );
+    TQPSQLDriver* drv =  new TQPSQLDriver( con );
+    TQSqlDatabase* db = TQSqlDatabase::addDatabase( drv ); // becomes the new default connection
+    TQSqlQuery q;
+    q.exec( "SELECT * FROM people" );
+    ...
+    
    
+ 
+
     The above code sets up a PostgreSQL connection and instantiates a
+TQPSQLDriver object. Next, addDatabase() is called to add the
+connection to the known connections so that it can be used by the
+TQt SQL classes. When a driver is instantiated with a connection
+handle (or set of handles), TQt assumes that you have already
+opened the database connection.
+
     Remember that you must link your application against the database
+client library as well. The simplest way to do this is to add
+lines like those below to your .pro file:
+
     
    +    unix:LIBS += -lpq
+    win32:LIBS += libpqdll.lib
+    
    
+ 
+
     You will need to have the client library in your linker's search
+path.
+
     The method described above will work for all the drivers, the only
+difference is the arguments the driver constructors take. Below is
+an overview of the drivers and their constructor arguments.
+
     
    
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
     Driver Class name Constructor arguments File to include
+
    TQPSQL7
+TQPSQLDriver
+PGconn* connection
+qsql_psql.cpp
+
    TQMYSQL3
+TQMYSQLDriver
+MYSQL* connection
+qsql_mysql.cpp
+
    TQOCI8
+TQOCIDriver
+OCIEnv* environment, OCIError* error, OCISvcCtx* serviceContext
+qsql_oci.cpp
+
    TQODBC3
+TQODBCDriver
+SQLHANDLE environment, SQLHANDLE connection
+qsql_odbc.cpp
+
    TQDB2
+TQDB2
+SQLHANDLE environment, SQLHANDLE connection
+qsql_db2.cpp
+
    TQTDS7
+TQTDSDriver
+LOGINREC* loginRecord, DBPROCESS* dbProcess, const TQString& hostName
+qsql_tds.cpp
+
    TQSQLITE
+TQSQLiteDriver
+sqlite* connection
+qsql_sqlite.cpp
+
    TQIBASE
+TQIBaseDriver
+isc_db_handle connection
+qsql_ibase.cpp
+
    
+
     Note: The host name (or service name) is needed when constructing
+the TQTDSDriver for creating new connections for internal
+queries. This is to prevent the simultaneous usage of several
+TQSqlQuery/TQSqlCursor objects from blocking each other.
+
     Warning: The SQL framework takes ownership of the driver pointer,
+and it should not be deleted. The returned TQSqlDatabase object is
+owned by the framework and must not be deleted. If you want to
+explicitly remove the connection, use removeDatabase()
+
     
    See also drivers().
+
+
    void TQSqlDatabase::close ()
+
    
+Closes the database connection, freeing any resources actquired.
+
     
    See also removeDatabase().
+
+
    bool TQSqlDatabase::commit ()
+
    
+Commits a transaction to the database if the driver supports
+transactions. Returns TRUE if the operation succeeded; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also TQSqlDriver::hasFeature() and rollback().
+
+
    TQString TQSqlDatabase::connectOptions () const
+
    Returns the database connect options.
+See the "connectOptions" property for details.
+
    bool TQSqlDatabase::contains ( const TQString & connectionName = defaultConnection ) [static]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the list of database connections contains connectionName; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    TQSqlDatabase * TQSqlDatabase::database ( const TQString & connectionName = defaultConnection, bool open = TRUE ) [static]
+
    
+Returns the database connection called connectionName. The
+database connection must have been previously added with
+addDatabase(). If open is TRUE (the default) and the database
+connection is not already open it is opened now. If no connectionName is specified the default connection is used. If connectionName does not exist in the list of databases, 0 is
+returned. The pointer returned is owned by TQSqlDatabase and should
+not be deleted.
+
     Warning: There are restrictions on the use of database connections
+in threaded applications. Please see the Thread Support in TQt document for more information about
+threading and SQL databases.
+
+
    Examples: sql/overview/basicbrowsing/main.cpp and sql/overview/create_connections/main.cpp.
+
    TQString TQSqlDatabase::databaseName () const
+
    Returns the name of the database.
+See the "databaseName" property for details.
+
    TQSqlDriver * TQSqlDatabase::driver () const
+
    
+Returns the database driver used to access the database
+connection.
+
+
    TQString TQSqlDatabase::driverName () const
+
    
+Returns the name of the driver used by the database connection.
+
+
    TQStringList TQSqlDatabase::drivers () [static]
+
    
+Returns a list of all the available database drivers.
+
     Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
+over a copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQStringList list = TQSqlDatabase::drivers();
+    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
+    while( it != list.end() ) {
+        myProcessing( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    TQSqlQuery TQSqlDatabase::exec ( const TQString & query = TQString::null ) const
+
    
+Executes a SQL statement (e.g. an INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE statement) on the database, and returns a TQSqlQuery object.
+Use lastError() to retrieve error information. If query is
+TQString::null, an empty, invalid query is returned and lastError()
+is not affected.
+
     
    See also TQSqlQuery and lastError().
+
+
    TQString TQSqlDatabase::hostName () const
+
    Returns the host name where the database resides.
+See the "hostName" property for details.
+
    bool TQSqlDatabase::isDriverAvailable ( const TQString & name ) [static]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if a driver called name is available; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also drivers().
+
+
    bool TQSqlDatabase::isOpen () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the database connection is currently open;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQSqlDatabase::isOpenError () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if there was an error opening the database
+connection; otherwise returns FALSE. Error information can be
+retrieved using the lastError() function.
+
+
    TQSqlError TQSqlDatabase::lastError () const
+
    
+Returns information about the last error that occurred on the
+database. See TQSqlError for more information.
+
+
    Examples: sql/overview/connection.cpp and sql/sqltable/main.cpp.
+
    bool TQSqlDatabase::open ()
+
    
+Opens the database connection using the current connection values.
+Returns TRUE on success; otherwise returns FALSE. Error
+information can be retrieved using the lastError() function.
+
     
    See also lastError().
+
+
    Examples: sql/overview/connect1/main.cpp, sql/overview/connection.cpp, and sql/sqltable/main.cpp.
+
    bool TQSqlDatabase::open ( const TQString & user, const TQString & password )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Opens the database connection using the given user name and password. Returns TRUE on success; otherwise returns FALSE. Error
+information can be retrieved using the lastError() function.
+
     This function does not store the password it is given. Instead,
+the password is passed directly to the driver for opening a
+connection and is then discarded.
+
     
    See also lastError().
+
+
    TQString TQSqlDatabase::password () const
+
    Returns the password used to connect to the database.
+See the "password" property for details.
+
    int TQSqlDatabase::port () const
+
    Returns the port used to connect to the database.
+See the "port" property for details.
+
    TQSqlIndex TQSqlDatabase::primaryIndex ( const TQString & tablename ) const
+
    
+Returns the primary index for table tablename. If no primary
+index exists an empty TQSqlIndex will be returned.
+
+
    TQSqlRecord TQSqlDatabase::record ( const TQString & tablename ) const
+
    
+Returns a TQSqlRecord populated with the names of all the fields in
+the table (or view) called tablename. The order in which the
+fields appear in the record is undefined. If no such table (or
+view) exists, an empty record is returned.
+
     
    See also recordInfo().
+
+
    TQSqlRecord TQSqlDatabase::record ( const TQSqlQuery & query ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns a TQSqlRecord populated with the names of all the fields
+used in the SQL query. If the query is a "SELECT *" the order
+in which fields appear in the record is undefined.
+
     
    See also recordInfo().
+
+
    TQSqlRecordInfo TQSqlDatabase::recordInfo ( const TQString & tablename ) const
+
    
+Returns a TQSqlRecordInfo populated with meta data about the table
+or view tablename. If no such table (or view) exists, an empty
+record is returned.
+
     
    See also TQSqlRecordInfo, TQSqlFieldInfo, and record().
+
+
    TQSqlRecordInfo TQSqlDatabase::recordInfo ( const TQSqlQuery & query ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns a TQSqlRecordInfo object with meta data for the TQSqlQuery
+query. Note that this overloaded function may return less
+information than the recordInfo() function which takes the name of
+a table as parameter.
+
     
    See also TQSqlRecordInfo, TQSqlFieldInfo, and record().
+
+
    void TQSqlDatabase::registerSqlDriver ( const TQString & name, const TQSqlDriverCreatorBase * creator ) [static]
+
    
+This function registers a new SQL driver called name, within
+the SQL framework. This is useful if you have a custom SQL driver
+and don't want to compile it as a plugin.
+
     Example usage:
+
     
    +    TQSqlDatabase::registerSqlDriver( "MYDRIVER", new TQSqlDriverCreator<MyDatabaseDriver> );
+    TQSqlDatabase* db = TQSqlDatabase::addDatabase( "MYDRIVER" );
+    ...
+    
    
+ 
+
     Warning: The framework takes ownership of the creator pointer,
+so it should not be deleted.
+
+
    void TQSqlDatabase::removeDatabase ( const TQString & connectionName ) [static]
+
    
+Removes the database connection connectionName from the list of
+database connections.
+
     Warning: There should be no open queries on the database
+connection when this function is called, otherwise a resource leak
+will occur.
+
+
    void TQSqlDatabase::removeDatabase ( TQSqlDatabase * db ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Removes the database connection db from the list of database
+connections. The TQSqlDatabase object is destroyed when it is removed
+from the list.
+
     Warning: The db pointer is not valid after this function has
+been called. There should be no open queries on the database
+connection when this function is called, otherwise a resource leak
+will occur.
+
+
    bool TQSqlDatabase::rollback ()
+
    
+Rolls a transaction back on the database if the driver supports
+transactions. Returns TRUE if the operation succeeded; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also TQSqlDriver::hasFeature(), commit(), and transaction().
+
+
    void TQSqlDatabase::setConnectOptions ( const TQString & options = TQString::null )
+
    Sets the database connect options to options.
+See the "connectOptions" property for details.
+
    void TQSqlDatabase::setDatabaseName ( const TQString & name ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the name of the database to name.
+See the "databaseName" property for details.
+
    void TQSqlDatabase::setHostName ( const TQString & host ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the host name where the database resides to host.
+See the "hostName" property for details.
+
    void TQSqlDatabase::setPassword ( const TQString & password ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the password used to connect to the database to password.
+See the "password" property for details.
+
    void TQSqlDatabase::setPort ( int p ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the port used to connect to the database to p.
+See the "port" property for details.
+
    void TQSqlDatabase::setUserName ( const TQString & name ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the user name connected to the database to name.
+See the "userName" property for details.
+
    TQStringList TQSqlDatabase::tables ( TQSql::TableType type ) const
+
    
+Returns a list of the database's tables, system tables and views,
+as specified by the parameter type.
+
     Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
+over a copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQStringList list = myDatabase.tables( TQSql::Tables | TQSql::Views );
+    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
+    while( it != list.end() ) {
+        myProcessing( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    Example: sql/sqltable/main.cpp.
+
    TQStringList TQSqlDatabase::tables () const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns a list of the database's tables that are visible to the
+user. To include views or system tables, use the version of this
+function that takes a table type parameter.
+
     Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
+over a copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQStringList list = myDatabase.tables();
+    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
+    while( it != list.end() ) {
+        myProcessing( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    bool TQSqlDatabase::transaction ()
+
    
+Begins a transaction on the database if the driver supports
+transactions. Returns TRUE if the operation succeeded; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also TQSqlDriver::hasFeature(), commit(), and rollback().
+
+
    TQString TQSqlDatabase::userName () const
+
    Returns the user name connected to the database.
+See the "userName" property for details.
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    TQString connectOptions
    
+
    This property holds the database connect options.
+
    The format of the options string is a semi-colon separated list of
+option names or option = value pairs. The options depend on the
+database client used:
+
     
    
+
+
     
    
+
     
     ODBC MySQL PostgreSQL
+
    
+
      
+
    •  SQL_ATTR_ACCESS_MODE
+
    •  SQL_ATTR_LOGIN_TIMEOUT
+
    •  SQL_ATTR_CONNECTION_TIMEOUT
+
    •  SQL_ATTR_CURRENT_CATALOG
+
    •  SQL_ATTR_METADATA_ID
+
    •  SQL_ATTR_PACKET_SIZE
+
    •  SQL_ATTR_TRACEFILE
+
    •  SQL_ATTR_TRACE
+
    
+
     
    		
+
      
+
    •  CLIENT_COMPRESS
+
    •  CLIENT_FOUND_ROWS
+
    •  CLIENT_IGNORE_SPACE
+
    •  CLIENT_SSL
+
    •  CLIENT_ODBC
+
    •  CLIENT_NO_SCHEMA
+
    •  CLIENT_INTERACTIVE
+
    
+
     
    		
+
      
+
    •  connect_timeout
+
    •  options
+
    •  tty
+
    •  requiressl
+
    •  service
+
    
+
     DB2 OCI TDS
+
    
+
      
+
    •  SQL_ATTR_ACCESS_MODE
+
    •  SQL_ATTR_LOGIN_TIMEOUT
+
    
+
     
    		
+none
+
     
    		
+none
+
     
    
+
     Example of usage:
+
    +    ...
+    // MySQL connection
+    db->setConnectOptions( "CLIENT_SSL;CLIENT_IGNORE_SPACE" ); // use an SSL connection to the server
+    if ( !db->open() ) {
+        db->setConnectOptions(); // clears the connect option string
+        ...
+    }
+    ...
+    // PostgreSQL connection
+    db->setConnectOptions( "requiressl=1" ); // enable PostgreSQL SSL connections
+    if ( !db->open() ) {
+        db->setConnectOptions(); // clear options
+        ...
+    }
+    ...
+    // ODBC connection
+    db->setConnectOptions( "SQL_ATTR_ACCESS_MODE=SQL_MODE_READ_ONLY;SQL_ATTR_TRACE=SQL_OPT_TRACE_ON" ); // set ODBC options
+    if ( !db->open() ) {
+        db->setConnectOptions(); // don't try to set this option
+        ...
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     Please refer to the client library documentation for more
+information about the different options. The options will be set
+prior to opening the database connection. Setting new options
+without re-opening the connection does nothing.
+
     
    See also 
+
    Set this property's value with setConnectOptions() and get this property's value with connectOptions().
+
    TQString databaseName
    
+
    This property holds the name of the database.
+
    Note that the database name is the TNS Service Name for the TQOCI8
+(Oracle) driver.
+
     For the TQODBC3 driver it can either be a DSN, a DSN filename (the
+file must have a .dsn extension), or a connection string. MS
+Access users can for example use the following connection string
+to open a .mdb file directly, instead of having to create a DSN
+entry in the ODBC manager:
+
     
    +    ...
+    db = TQSqlDatabase::addDatabase( "TQODBC3" );
+    db->setDatabaseName( "DRIVER={Microsoft Access Driver (*.mdb)};FIL={MS Access};DBQ=myaccessfile.mdb" );
+    if ( db->open() ) {
+        // success!
+    }
+    ...
+    
    
+ 
+("FIL" is the required spelling in Microsoft's API.)
+
     There is no default value.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setDatabaseName() and get this property's value with databaseName().
+
    TQString hostName
    
+
    This property holds the host name where the database resides.
+
    There is no default value.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setHostName() and get this property's value with hostName().
+
    TQString password
    
+
    This property holds the password used to connect to the database.
+
    There is no default value.
+
     Warning: This function stores the password in plain text within
+TQt. Use the open() call that takes a password as parameter to
+avoid this behaviour.
+
     
    See also open().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setPassword() and get this property's value with password().
+
    int port
    
+
    This property holds the port used to connect to the database.
+
    There is no default value.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setPort() and get this property's value with port().
+
    TQString userName
    
+
    This property holds the user name connected to the database.
+
    There is no default value.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setUserName() and get this property's value with userName().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsqldriver.html b/doc/html/ntqsqldriver.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d95832b3d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsqldriver.html
@@ -0,0 +1,295 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSqlDriver Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSqlDriver Class Reference
    [sql module]
    
+
+
    The TQSqlDriver class is an abstract base class for accessing
+SQL databases.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsqldriver.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • enum DriverFeature { Transactions, QuerySize, BLOB, Unicode, PreparedQueries, NamedPlaceholders, PositionalPlaceholders }
      • 
+
    • TQSqlDriver ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • ~TQSqlDriver ()
      • 
+
    • bool isOpen () const
      • 
+
    • bool isOpenError () const
      • 
+
    • virtual bool beginTransaction ()
      • 
+
    • virtual bool commitTransaction ()
      • 
+
    • virtual bool rollbackTransaction ()
      • 
+
    • virtual TQStringList tables ( const TQString & tableType ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual TQSqlIndex primaryIndex ( const TQString & tableName ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual TQSqlRecord record ( const TQString & tableName ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual TQSqlRecord record ( const TQSqlQuery & query ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual TQSqlRecordInfo recordInfo ( const TQString & tablename ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual TQSqlRecordInfo recordInfo ( const TQSqlQuery & query ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual TQString nullText () const
      • 
+
    • virtual TQString formatValue ( const TQSqlField * field, bool trimStrings = FALSE ) const
      • 
+
    • TQSqlError lastError () const
      • 
+
    • virtual bool hasFeature ( DriverFeature f ) const = 0
      • 
+
    • virtual bool open ( const TQString & db, const TQString & user = TQString::null, const TQString & password = TQString::null, const TQString & host = TQString::null, int port = -1 ) = 0
      • 
+
    • virtual void close () = 0
      • 
+
    • virtual TQSqlQuery createQuery () const = 0
      • 
+
    • bool open ( const TQString & db, const TQString & user, const TQString & password, const TQString & host, int port, const TQString & connOpts )
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSqlDriver class is an abstract base class for accessing
+SQL databases.
+
     
+
+
     This class should not be used directly. Use TQSqlDatabase instead.
+
    See also Database Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQSqlDriver::DriverFeature
    
+
+
     This enum contains a list of features a driver may support. Use
+hasFeature() to query whether a feature is supported or not.
+
      
+
    • TQSqlDriver::Transactions - whether the driver supports SQL transactions
+
    • TQSqlDriver::QuerySize - whether the database is capable of reporting the size
+of a query. Note that some databases do not support returning the size
+(i.e. number of rows returned) of a query, in which case
+TQSqlQuery::size() will return -1
+
    • TQSqlDriver::BLOB - whether the driver supports Binary Large Object fields
+
    • TQSqlDriver::Unicode - whether the driver supports Unicode strings if the
+database server does
+
    • TQSqlDriver::PreparedQueries - whether the driver supports prepared query execution
+
    • TQSqlDriver::NamedPlaceholders - whether the driver supports usage of named placeholders
+
    • TQSqlDriver::PositionalPlaceholders - whether the driver supports usage of positional placeholders
+
     More information about supported features can be found in the
+TQt SQL driver documentation.
+
     
    See also hasFeature().
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSqlDriver::TQSqlDriver ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Default constructor. Creates a new driver with parent parent,
+called name.
+
     
+
    TQSqlDriver::~TQSqlDriver ()
+
    
+Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
+
+
    bool TQSqlDriver::beginTransaction () [virtual]
+
    
+Protected function which derived classes can reimplement to begin
+a transaction. If successful, return TRUE, otherwise return FALSE.
+The default implementation returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also commitTransaction() and rollbackTransaction().
+
+
    void TQSqlDriver::close () [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Derived classes must reimplement this abstract virtual function in
+order to close the database connection. Return TRUE on success,
+FALSE on failure.
+
     
    See also setOpen().
+
+
     
+
    bool TQSqlDriver::commitTransaction () [virtual]
+
    
+Protected function which derived classes can reimplement to commit
+a transaction. If successful, return TRUE, otherwise return FALSE.
+The default implementation returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also beginTransaction() and rollbackTransaction().
+
+
    TQSqlQuery TQSqlDriver::createQuery () const [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Creates an empty SQL result on the database. Derived classes must
+reimplement this function and return a TQSqlQuery object
+appropriate for their database to the caller.
+
     
+
    TQString TQSqlDriver::formatValue ( const TQSqlField * field, bool trimStrings = FALSE ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns a string representation of the field value for the
+database. This is used, for example, when constructing INSERT and
+UPDATE statements.
+
     The default implementation returns the value formatted as a string
+according to the following rules:
+
     
      
+
       
    •  If field is NULL, nullText() is returned.
+
       
    •  If field is character data, the value is returned enclosed
+in single quotation marks, which is appropriate for many SQL
+databases. Any embedded single-quote characters are escaped
+(replaced with two single-quote characters). If trimStrings is
+TRUE (the default is FALSE), all trailing whitespace is trimmed
+from the field.
+
       
    •  If field is date/time data, the value is formatted in ISO
+format and enclosed in single quotation marks. If the date/time
+data is invalid, nullText() is returned.
+
       
    •  If field is bytearray data, and the driver can edit binary
+fields, the value is formatted as a hexadecimal string.
+
       
    •  For any other field type toString() will be called on its value
+and the result returned.
+
       
    
+
     
    See also TQVariant::toString().
+
+
     
+
    bool TQSqlDriver::hasFeature ( DriverFeature f ) const [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the driver supports feature f; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     Note that some databases need to be open() before this can be
+determined.
+
     
    See also DriverFeature.
+
+
    bool TQSqlDriver::isOpen () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the database connection is open; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQSqlDriver::isOpenError () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the there was an error opening the database
+connection; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    TQSqlError TQSqlDriver::lastError () const
+
    
+Returns a TQSqlError object which contains information about the
+last error that occurred on the database.
+
+
    TQString TQSqlDriver::nullText () const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns a string representation of the NULL value for the
+database. This is used, for example, when constructing INSERT and
+UPDATE statements. The default implementation returns the string
+"NULL".
+
+
    bool TQSqlDriver::open ( const TQString & db, const TQString & user = TQString::null, const TQString & password = TQString::null, const TQString & host = TQString::null, int port = -1 ) [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Derived classes must reimplement this abstract virtual function in
+order to open a database connection on database db, using user
+name user, password password, host host and port port.
+
     The function must return TRUE on success and FALSE on failure.
+
     
    See also setOpen().
+
+
     
+
    bool TQSqlDriver::open ( const TQString & db, const TQString & user, const TQString & password, const TQString & host, int port, const TQString & connOpts )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Open a database connection on database db, using user name user, password password, host host, port port and
+connection options connOpts.
+
     Returns TRUE on success and FALSE on failure.
+
     
    See also setOpen().
+
+
    TQSqlIndex TQSqlDriver::primaryIndex ( const TQString & tableName ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the primary index for table tableName. Returns an empty
+TQSqlIndex if the table doesn't have a primary index. The default
+implementation returns an empty index.
+
+
    TQSqlRecord TQSqlDriver::record ( const TQString & tableName ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns a TQSqlRecord populated with the names of the fields in
+table tableName. If no such table exists, an empty record is
+returned. The default implementation returns an empty record.
+
+
    TQSqlRecord TQSqlDriver::record ( const TQSqlQuery & query ) const [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns a TQSqlRecord populated with the names of the fields in the
+SQL query. The default implementation returns an empty record.
+
+
    TQSqlRecordInfo TQSqlDriver::recordInfo ( const TQString & tablename ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns a TQSqlRecordInfo object with meta data about the table tablename.
+
+
    TQSqlRecordInfo TQSqlDriver::recordInfo ( const TQSqlQuery & query ) const [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns a TQSqlRecordInfo object with meta data for the TQSqlQuery
+query. Note that this overloaded function may return less
+information than the recordInfo() function which takes the name of
+a table as parameter.
+
+
    bool TQSqlDriver::rollbackTransaction () [virtual]
+
    
+Protected function which derived classes can reimplement to
+rollback a transaction. If successful, return TRUE, otherwise
+return FALSE. The default implementation returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also beginTransaction() and commitTransaction().
+
+
    void TQSqlDriver::setLastError ( const TQSqlError & e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Protected function which allows derived classes to set the value
+of the last error, e, that occurred on the database.
+
     
    See also lastError().
+
+
    void TQSqlDriver::setOpen ( bool o ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Protected function which sets the open state of the database to o. Derived classes can use this function to report the status of
+open().
+
     
    See also open() and setOpenError().
+
+
    void TQSqlDriver::setOpenError ( bool e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Protected function which sets the open error state of the database
+to e. Derived classes can use this function to report the
+status of open(). Note that if e is TRUE the open state of the
+database is set to closed (i.e. isOpen() returns FALSE).
+
     
    See also open().
+
+
    TQStringList TQSqlDriver::tables ( const TQString & tableType ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns a list of tables in the database. The default
+implementation returns an empty list.
+
     The tableType argument describes what types of tables
+should be returned. Due to binary compatibility, the string
+contains the value of the enum TQSql::TableTypes as text.
+An empty string should be treated as TQSql::Tables for
+downward compatibility.
+
     
    See also TQSql::TableType.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsqldriverplugin.html b/doc/html/ntqsqldriverplugin.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ae1ed41b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsqldriverplugin.html
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSqlDriverPlugin Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSqlDriverPlugin Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQSqlDriverPlugin class provides an abstract base for custom TQSqlDriver plugins.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsqldriverplugin.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSqlDriverPlugin class provides an abstract base for custom TQSqlDriver plugins.
+
     
+
+
     The SQL driver plugin is a simple plugin interface that makes it
+easy to create your own SQL driver plugins that can be loaded
+dynamically by TQt.
+
     Writing a SQL plugin is achieved by subclassing this base class,
+reimplementing the pure virtual functions keys() and create(), and
+exporting the class with the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN macro. See the SQL
+plugins that come with TQt for example implementations (in the
+plugins/src/sqldrivers subdirectory of the source
+distribution). Read the plugins
+    documentation for more information on plugins.
+
    See also Plugins.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSqlDriverPlugin::TQSqlDriverPlugin ()
+
    
+Constructs a SQL driver plugin. This is invoked automatically by
+the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN macro.
+
+
    TQSqlDriverPlugin::~TQSqlDriverPlugin ()
+
    
+Destroys the SQL driver plugin.
+
     You never have to call this explicitly. TQt destroys a plugin
+automatically when it is no longer used.
+
+
    TQSqlDriver * TQSqlDriverPlugin::create ( const TQString & key ) [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Creates and returns a TQSqlDriver object for the driver key key.
+The driver key is usually the class name of the required driver.
+
     
    See also keys().
+
+
    TQStringList TQSqlDriverPlugin::keys () const [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the list of drivers (keys) this plugin supports.
+
     These keys are usually the class names of the custom drivers that
+are implemented in the plugin.
+
     
    See also create().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsqleditorfactory.html b/doc/html/ntqsqleditorfactory.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c25722d9f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsqleditorfactory.html
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSqlEditorFactory Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSqlEditorFactory Class Reference
    [sql module]
    
+
+
    The TQSqlEditorFactory class is used to create the editors
+used by TQDataTable and TQSqlForm.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsqleditorfactory.h>
+
    Inherits TQEditorFactory.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSqlEditorFactory class is used to create the editors
+used by TQDataTable and TQSqlForm.
+
     
+
+
     TQSqlEditorFactory is used by TQDataTable and TQSqlForm to
+automatically create appropriate editors for a given TQSqlField.
+For example if the field is a TQVariant::String a TQLineEdit would
+be the default editor, whereas a TQVariant::Int's default editor
+would be a TQSpinBox.
+
     If you want to create different editors for fields with the same
+data type, subclass TQSqlEditorFactory and reimplement the
+createEditor() function.
+
     
    See also TQDataTable, TQSqlForm, and Database Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSqlEditorFactory::TQSqlEditorFactory ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a SQL editor factory with parent parent, called name.
+
+
    TQSqlEditorFactory::~TQSqlEditorFactory ()
+
    
+Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
+
+
    TQWidget * TQSqlEditorFactory::createEditor ( TQWidget * parent, const TQVariant & variant ) [virtual]
+
    
+Creates and returns the appropriate editor widget for the TQVariant
+variant.
+
     The widget that is returned has the parent parent (which may be
+zero). If variant is invalid, 0 is returned.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQEditorFactory.
+
    TQWidget * TQSqlEditorFactory::createEditor ( TQWidget * parent, const TQSqlField * field ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Creates and returns the appropriate editor for the TQSqlField field.
+
+
    TQSqlEditorFactory * TQSqlEditorFactory::defaultFactory () [static]
+
    
+Returns an instance of a default editor factory.
+
+
    void TQSqlEditorFactory::installDefaultFactory ( TQSqlEditorFactory * factory ) [static]
+
    
+Replaces the default editor factory with factory. All
+TQDataTable and TQSqlForm instantiations will use this new factory
+for creating field editors. TQSqlEditorFactory takes ownership of \a factory, and destroys it when it is no longer needed.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsqlerror.html b/doc/html/ntqsqlerror.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..37c25dfd5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsqlerror.html
@@ -0,0 +1,157 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSqlError Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSqlError Class Reference
    [sql module]
    
+
+
    The TQSqlError class provides SQL database error information.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsqlerror.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • enum Type { None, Connection, Statement, Transaction, Unknown }
      • 
+
    • TQSqlError ( const TQString & driverText = TQString::null, const TQString & databaseText = TQString::null, int type = TQSqlError::None, int number = -1 )
      • 
+
    • TQSqlError ( const TQSqlError & other )
      • 
+
    • TQSqlError & operator= ( const TQSqlError & other )
      • 
+
    • virtual ~TQSqlError ()
      • 
+
    • TQString driverText () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setDriverText ( const TQString & driverText )
      • 
+
    • TQString databaseText () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setDatabaseText ( const TQString & databaseText )
      • 
+
    • int type () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setType ( int type )
      • 
+
    • int number () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setNumber ( int number )
      • 
+
    • TQString text () const
      • 
+
    • void showMessage ( const TQString & msg = TQString::null ) const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSqlError class provides SQL database error information.
+
     
+
+
     This class is used to report database-specific errors. An error
+description and (if appropriate) a database-specific error number
+can be obtained using this class.
+
    See also Database Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQSqlError::Type
    
+
+
     This enum type describes the type of SQL error that occurred.
+
      
+
    • TQSqlError::None - no error occurred
+
    • TQSqlError::Connection - connection error
+
    • TQSqlError::Statement - SQL statement syntax error
+
    • TQSqlError::Transaction - transaction failed error
+
    • TQSqlError::Unknown - unknown error
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSqlError::TQSqlError ( const TQString & driverText = TQString::null, const TQString & databaseText = TQString::null, int type = TQSqlError::None, int number = -1 )
+
    
+Constructs an error containing the driver error text driverText, the database-specific error text databaseText, the
+type type and the optional error number number.
+
+
    TQSqlError::TQSqlError ( const TQSqlError & other )
+
    
+Creates a copy of other.
+
+
    TQSqlError::~TQSqlError () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
+
+
    TQString TQSqlError::databaseText () const
+
    
+Returns the text of the error as reported by the database. This
+may contain database-specific descriptions.
+
+
    TQString TQSqlError::driverText () const
+
    
+Returns the text of the error as reported by the driver. This may
+contain database-specific descriptions.
+
+
    int TQSqlError::number () const
+
    
+Returns the database-specific error number, or -1 if it cannot be
+determined.
+
+
    TQSqlError & TQSqlError::operator= ( const TQSqlError & other )
+
    
+Sets the error equal to other.
+
+
    void TQSqlError::setDatabaseText ( const TQString & databaseText ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the database error text to the value of databaseText.
+
+
    void TQSqlError::setDriverText ( const TQString & driverText ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the driver error text to the value of driverText.
+
+
    void TQSqlError::setNumber ( int number ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the database-specific error number to number.
+
+
    void TQSqlError::setType ( int type ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the error type to the value of type.
+
+
    void TQSqlError::showMessage ( const TQString & msg = TQString::null ) const
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     This is a convenience function that pops up a TQMessageBox
+containing the message returned by text(). An additional string
+can be passed in via the msg parameter, which will be
+concatenated with the text() message.
+
     
    See also text(), driverText(), and databaseText().
+
+
    TQString TQSqlError::text () const
+
    
+This is a convenience function that returns databaseText() and
+driverText() concatenated into a single string.
+
     
    See also showMessage(), driverText(), and databaseText().
+
+
    int TQSqlError::type () const
+
    
+Returns the error type, or -1 if the type cannot be determined.
+
     
    See also TQSqlError::Type.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsqlfield.html b/doc/html/ntqsqlfield.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ba809da54
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsqlfield.html
@@ -0,0 +1,216 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSqlField Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSqlField Class Reference
    [sql module]
    
+
+
    The TQSqlField class manipulates the fields in SQL database tables
+and views.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsqlfield.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQSqlField ( const TQString & fieldName = TQString::null, TQVariant::Type type = TQVariant::Invalid )
      • 
+
    • TQSqlField ( const TQSqlField & other )
      • 
+
    • TQSqlField & operator= ( const TQSqlField & other )
      • 
+
    • bool operator== ( const TQSqlField & other ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual ~TQSqlField ()
      • 
+
    • virtual void setValue ( const TQVariant & value )
      • 
+
    • virtual TQVariant value () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setName ( const TQString & name )
      • 
+
    • TQString name () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setNull ()
      • 
+
    • bool isNull () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setReadOnly ( bool readOnly )
      • 
+
    • bool isReadOnly () const
      • 
+
    • void clear ( bool nullify = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • TQVariant::Type type () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSqlField class manipulates the fields in SQL database tables
+and views.
+
     
+
+
     TQSqlField represents the characteristics of a single column in a
+database table or view, such as the data type and column name. A
+field also contains the value of the database column, which can be
+viewed or changed.
+
     Field data values are stored as TQVariants. Using an incompatible
+type is not permitted. For example:
+
     
    +    TQSqlField f( "myfield", TQVariant::Int );
+    f.setValue( TQPixmap() );  // will not work
+    
    
+ 
+
     However, the field will attempt to cast certain data types to the
+field data type where possible:
+
     
    +    TQSqlField f( "myfield", TQVariant::Int );
+    f.setValue( TQString("123") ); // casts TQString to int
+    
    
+ 
+
     TQSqlField objects are rarely created explicitly in application
+code. They are usually accessed indirectly through TQSqlRecord
+or TQSqlCursor which already contain a list of fields. For
+example:
+
     
    +    TQSqlCursor cur( "Employee" );        // create cursor using the 'Employee' table
+    TQSqlField* f = cur.field( "name" );  // use the 'name' field
+    f->setValue( "Dave" );               // set field value
+    ...
+    
    
+ 
+
     In practice we rarely need to extract a pointer to a field at all.
+The previous example would normally be written:
+
     
    +    TQSqlCursor cur( "Employee" );
+    cur.setValue( "name", "Dave" );
+    ...
+    
    
+ 
+
    See also Database Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSqlField::TQSqlField ( const TQString & fieldName = TQString::null, TQVariant::Type type = TQVariant::Invalid )
+
    
+Constructs an empty field called fieldName of type type.
+
+
    TQSqlField::TQSqlField ( const TQSqlField & other )
+
    
+Constructs a copy of other.
+
+
    TQSqlField::~TQSqlField () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
+
+
    void TQSqlField::clear ( bool nullify = TRUE )
+
    
+Clears the value of the field. If the field is read-only, nothing
+happens. If nullify is TRUE (the default), the field is set to
+NULL.
+
+
    bool TQSqlField::isNull () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the field is currently NULL; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQSqlField::isReadOnly () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the field's value is read only; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
+
    TQString TQSqlField::name () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the name of the field.
+
+
    Example: sql/overview/table4/main.cpp.
+
    TQSqlField & TQSqlField::operator= ( const TQSqlField & other )
+
    
+Sets the field equal to other.
+
+
    bool TQSqlField::operator== ( const TQSqlField & other ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the field is equal to other; otherwise returns
+FALSE. Fields are considered equal when the following field
+properties are the same:
+
     
    
+
     
+
    void TQSqlField::setName ( const TQString & name ) [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Sets the name of the field to name.
+
+
    void TQSqlField::setNull () [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Sets the field to NULL and clears the value using clear(). If the
+field is read-only, nothing happens.
+
     
    See also isReadOnly() and clear().
+
+
    void TQSqlField::setReadOnly ( bool readOnly ) [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Sets the read only flag of the field's value to readOnly.
+
     
    See also setValue().
+
+
    void TQSqlField::setValue ( const TQVariant & value ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the value of the field to value. If the field is read-only
+(isReadOnly() returns TRUE), nothing happens. If the data type of
+value differs from the field's current data type, an attempt is
+made to cast it to the proper type. This preserves the data type
+of the field in the case of assignment, e.g. a TQString to an
+integer data type. For example:
+
     
    +    TQSqlCursor cur( "Employee" );                 // 'Employee' table
+    TQSqlField* f = cur.field( "student_count" );  // an integer field
+    ...
+    f->setValue( myLineEdit->text() );            // cast the line edit text to an integer
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also isReadOnly().
+
+
    TQVariant::Type TQSqlField::type () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the field's type as stored in the database.
+Note that the actual value might have a different type,
+Numerical values that are too large to store in a long
+int or double are usually stored as strings to prevent
+precision loss.
+
+
    TQVariant TQSqlField::value () const [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the value of the field as a TQVariant.
+
+
    Example: sql/overview/table4/main.cpp.
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsqlform.html b/doc/html/ntqsqlform.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..79090960f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsqlform.html
@@ -0,0 +1,237 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSqlForm Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSqlForm Class Reference
    [sql module]
    
+
+
    The TQSqlForm class creates and manages data entry forms
+tied to SQL databases.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsqlform.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQSqlForm ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • ~TQSqlForm ()
      • 
+
    • virtual void insert ( TQWidget * widget, const TQString & field )
      • 
+
    • virtual void remove ( const TQString & field )
      • 
+
    • uint count () const
      • 
+
    • TQWidget * widget ( uint i ) const
      • 
+
    • TQSqlField * widgetToField ( TQWidget * widget ) const
      • 
+
    • TQWidget * fieldToWidget ( TQSqlField * field ) const
      • 
+
    • void installPropertyMap ( TQSqlPropertyMap * pmap )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setRecord ( TQSqlRecord * buf )
      • 
+
    
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • virtual void insert ( TQWidget * widget, TQSqlField * field )
      • 
+
    • virtual void remove ( TQWidget * widget )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSqlForm class creates and manages data entry forms
+tied to SQL databases.
+
     
+
+
+
     Typical use of a TQSqlForm consists of the following steps:
+
      
+
    •  Create the widgets you want to appear in the form.
+
    •  Create a cursor and navigate to the record to be edited.
+
    •  Create the TQSqlForm.
+
    •  Set the form's record buffer to the cursor's update buffer.
+
    •  Insert each widget and the field it is to edit into the form.
+
    •  Use readFields() to update the editor widgets with values from
+the database's fields.
+
    •  Display the form and let the user edit values etc.
+
    •  Use writeFields() to update the database's field values with
+the values in the editor widgets.
+
    
+
     Note that a TQSqlForm does not access the database directly, but
+most often via TQSqlFields which are part of a TQSqlCursor. A
+TQSqlCursor::insert(), TQSqlCursor::update() or TQSqlCursor::del()
+call is needed to actually write values to the database.
+
     Some sample code to initialize a form successfully:
+
     
    +    TQLineEdit  myEditor( this );
+    TQSqlForm   myForm( this );
+    TQSqlCursor myCursor( "mytable" );
+
+    // Execute a query to make the cursor valid
+    myCursor.select();
+    // Move the cursor to a valid record (the first record)
+    myCursor.next();
+    // Set the form's record pointer to the cursor's edit buffer (which
+    // contains the current record's values)
+    myForm.setRecord( myCursor.primeUpdate() );
+
+    // Insert a field into the form that uses myEditor to edit the
+    // field 'somefield' in 'mytable'
+    myForm.insert( &myEditor, "somefield" );
+
+    // Update myEditor with the value from the mapped database field
+    myForm.readFields();
+    ...
+    // Let the user edit the form
+    ...
+    // Update the database
+    myForm.writeFields();  // Update the cursor's edit buffer from the form
+    myCursor.update();  // Update the database from the cursor's buffer
+    
    
+ 
+
     If you want to use custom editors for displaying and editing data
+fields, you must install a custom TQSqlPropertyMap. The form
+uses this object to get or set the value of a widget.
+
     Note that TQt Designer provides
+a visual means of creating data-aware forms.
+
     
    See also installPropertyMap(), TQSqlPropertyMap, and Database Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSqlForm::TQSqlForm ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a TQSqlForm with parent parent and called name.
+
+
    TQSqlForm::~TQSqlForm ()
+
    
+Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
+
+
    void TQSqlForm::clear () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Removes every widget, and the fields they're mapped to, from the form.
+
+
    void TQSqlForm::clearValues ( bool nullify = FALSE ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Clears the values in all the widgets, and the fields they are
+mapped to, in the form. If nullify is TRUE (the default is
+FALSE), each field is also set to NULL.
+
+
    uint TQSqlForm::count () const
+
    
+Returns the number of widgets in the form.
+
+
    TQWidget * TQSqlForm::fieldToWidget ( TQSqlField * field ) const
+
    
+Returns the widget that field field is mapped to.
+
+
    void TQSqlForm::insert ( TQWidget * widget, const TQString & field ) [virtual]
+
    
+Inserts a widget, and the name of the field it is to be
+mapped to, into the form. To actually associate inserted widgets
+with an edit buffer, use setRecord().
+
     
    See also setRecord().
+
+
    Examples: sql/overview/form1/main.cpp and sql/overview/form2/main.cpp.
+
    void TQSqlForm::insert ( TQWidget * widget, TQSqlField * field ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts a widget, and the field it is to be mapped to, into
+the form.
+
+
    void TQSqlForm::installPropertyMap ( TQSqlPropertyMap * pmap )
+
    
+Installs a custom TQSqlPropertyMap. This is useful if you plan to
+create your own custom editor widgets.
+
     TQSqlForm takes ownership of pmap, so pmap is deleted when
+TQSqlForm goes out of scope.
+
     
    See also TQDataTable::installEditorFactory().
+
+
    Example: sql/overview/custom1/main.cpp.
+
    void TQSqlForm::readField ( TQWidget * widget ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Updates the widget widget with the value from the SQL field it
+is mapped to. Nothing happens if no SQL field is mapped to the widget.
+
+
    void TQSqlForm::readFields () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Updates the widgets in the form with current values from the SQL
+fields they are mapped to.
+
+
    Examples: sql/overview/form1/main.cpp and sql/overview/form2/main.cpp.
+
    void TQSqlForm::remove ( TQWidget * widget ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Removes a widget, and hence the field it's mapped to, from the
+form.
+
+
    void TQSqlForm::remove ( const TQString & field ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Removes field from the form.
+
+
    void TQSqlForm::setRecord ( TQSqlRecord * buf ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets buf as the record buffer for the form. To force the
+display of the data from buf, use readFields().
+
     
    See also readFields() and writeFields().
+
+
    Examples: sql/overview/custom1/main.cpp, sql/overview/form1/main.cpp, and sql/overview/form2/main.cpp.
+
    TQWidget * TQSqlForm::widget ( uint i ) const
+
    
+Returns the i-th widget in the form. Useful for traversing
+the widgets in the form.
+
+
    TQSqlField * TQSqlForm::widgetToField ( TQWidget * widget ) const
+
    
+Returns the SQL field that widget widget is mapped to.
+
+
    void TQSqlForm::writeField ( TQWidget * widget ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Updates the SQL field with the value from the widget it is
+mapped to. Nothing happens if no SQL field is mapped to the widget.
+
+
    void TQSqlForm::writeFields () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Updates the SQL fields with values from the widgets they are
+mapped to. To actually update the database with the contents of
+the record buffer, use TQSqlCursor::insert(), TQSqlCursor::update()
+or TQSqlCursor::del() as appropriate.
+
+
    Example: sql/overview/form2/main.cpp.
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsqlindex.html b/doc/html/ntqsqlindex.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..453e195c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsqlindex.html
@@ -0,0 +1,155 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSqlIndex Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSqlIndex Class Reference
    [sql module]
    
+
+
    The TQSqlIndex class provides functions to manipulate and
+describe TQSqlCursor and TQSqlDatabase indexes.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsqlindex.h>
+
    Inherits TQSqlRecord.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQSqlIndex ( const TQString & cursorname = TQString::null, const TQString & name = TQString::null )
      • 
+
    • TQSqlIndex ( const TQSqlIndex & other )
      • 
+
    • ~TQSqlIndex ()
      • 
+
    • TQSqlIndex & operator= ( const TQSqlIndex & other )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setCursorName ( const TQString & cursorName )
      • 
+
    • TQString cursorName () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setName ( const TQString & name )
      • 
+
    • TQString name () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void append ( const TQSqlField & field )
      • 
+
    • virtual void append ( const TQSqlField & field, bool desc )
      • 
+
    • bool isDescending ( int i ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setDescending ( int i, bool desc )
      • 
+
    
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQSqlIndex fromStringList ( const TQStringList & l, const TQSqlCursor * cursor )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSqlIndex class provides functions to manipulate and
+describe TQSqlCursor and TQSqlDatabase indexes.
+
     
+
+
     This class is used to describe and manipulate TQSqlCursor and
+TQSqlDatabase indexes. An index refers to a single table or view
+in a database. Information about the fields that comprise the
+index can be used to generate SQL statements, or to affect the
+behavior of a TQSqlCursor object.
+
     Normally, TQSqlIndex objects are created by TQSqlDatabase or
+TQSqlCursor.
+
    See also Database Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSqlIndex::TQSqlIndex ( const TQString & cursorname = TQString::null, const TQString & name = TQString::null )
+
    
+Constructs an empty index using the cursor name cursorname and
+index name name.
+
+
    TQSqlIndex::TQSqlIndex ( const TQSqlIndex & other )
+
    
+Constructs a copy of other.
+
+
    TQSqlIndex::~TQSqlIndex ()
+
    
+Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
+
+
    void TQSqlIndex::append ( const TQSqlField & field ) [virtual]
+
    
+Appends the field field to the list of indexed fields. The
+field is appended with an ascending sort order.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQSqlRecord.
+
    void TQSqlIndex::append ( const TQSqlField & field, bool desc ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Appends the field field to the list of indexed fields. The
+field is appended with an ascending sort order, unless desc is
+TRUE.
+
+
    TQString TQSqlIndex::cursorName () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the name of the cursor which the index is associated with.
+
+
    TQSqlIndex TQSqlIndex::fromStringList ( const TQStringList & l, const TQSqlCursor * cursor ) [static]
+
    
+Returns an index based on the field descriptions in l and the
+cursor cursor. The field descriptions should be in the same
+format that toStringList() produces, for example, a surname field
+in the people table might be in one of these forms: "surname",
+"surname DESC" or "people.surname ASC".
+
     
    See also toStringList().
+
+
    bool TQSqlIndex::isDescending ( int i ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if field i in the index is sorted in descending
+order; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    TQString TQSqlIndex::name () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the name of the index.
+
+
    TQSqlIndex & TQSqlIndex::operator= ( const TQSqlIndex & other )
+
    
+Sets the index equal to other.
+
+
    void TQSqlIndex::setCursorName ( const TQString & cursorName ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the name of the cursor that the index is associated with to
+cursorName.
+
+
    void TQSqlIndex::setDescending ( int i, bool desc ) [virtual]
+
    
+If desc is TRUE, field i is sorted in descending order.
+Otherwise, field i is sorted in ascending order (the default).
+If the field does not exist, nothing happens.
+
+
    void TQSqlIndex::setName ( const TQString & name ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the name of the index to name.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsqlpropertymap.html b/doc/html/ntqsqlpropertymap.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..76a6bdbee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsqlpropertymap.html
@@ -0,0 +1,199 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSqlPropertyMap Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSqlPropertyMap Class Reference
    [sql module]
    
+
+
    The TQSqlPropertyMap class is used to map widgets to SQL fields.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsqlpropertymap.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSqlPropertyMap class is used to map widgets to SQL fields.
+
     
+
+
     The SQL module uses TQt object
+    properties to insert and extract values from editor
+widgets.
+
     This class is used to map editors to SQL fields. This works by
+associating SQL editor class names to the properties used to
+insert and extract values to/from the editor.
+
     For example, a TQLineEdit can be used to edit text strings and
+other data types in TQDataTables or TQSqlForms. Several properties
+are defined in TQLineEdit, but only the text property is used to
+insert and extract text from a TQLineEdit. Both TQDataTable and
+TQSqlForm use the global TQSqlPropertyMap for inserting and
+extracting values to and from an editor widget. The global
+property map defines several common widgets and properties that
+are suitable for many applications. You can add and remove widget
+properties to suit your specific needs.
+
     If you want to use custom editors with your TQDataTable or
+TQSqlForm, you must install your own TQSqlPropertyMap for that table
+or form. Example:
+
     
    +    TQSqlPropertyMap *myMap  = new TQSqlPropertyMap();
+    TQSqlForm        *myForm = new TQSqlForm( this );
+    MyEditor myEditor( this );
+
+    // Set the TQSqlForm's record buffer to the update buffer of
+    // a pre-existing TQSqlCursor called 'cur'.
+    myForm->setRecord( cur->primeUpdate() );
+
+    // Install the customized map
+    myMap->insert( "MyEditor", "content" );
+    myForm->installPropertyMap( myMap ); // myForm now owns myMap
+    ...
+    // Insert a field into the form that uses a myEditor to edit the
+    // field 'somefield'
+    myForm->insert( &myEditor, "somefield" );
+
+    // Update myEditor with the value from the mapped database field
+    myForm->readFields();
+    ...
+    // Let the user edit the form
+    ...
+    // Update the database fields with the values in the form
+    myForm->writeFields();
+    ...
+    
    
+ 
+
     You can also replace the global TQSqlPropertyMap that is used by
+default. (Bear in mind that TQSqlPropertyMap takes ownership of the
+new default map.)
+
     
    +    TQSqlPropertyMap *myMap = new TQSqlPropertyMap;
+
+    myMap->insert( "MyEditor", "content" );
+    TQSqlPropertyMap::installDefaultMap( myMap );
+    ...
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also TQDataTable, TQSqlForm, TQSqlEditorFactory, and Database Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSqlPropertyMap::TQSqlPropertyMap ()
+
    
+
     Constructs a TQSqlPropertyMap.
+
     The default property mappings used by TQt widgets are:
+
    
+
     Widgets Property
+
     TQCheckBox,
+TQRadioButton
+checked
+
     TQComboBox,
+TQListBox
+currentItem
+
     TQDateEdit
+date
+
     TQDateTimeEdit
+dateTime
+
     TQTextBrowser
+source
+
     TQButton,
+TQDial,
+TQLabel,
+TQLineEdit,
+TQMultiLineEdit,
+TQPushButton,
+TQTextEdit,
+text
+
     TQTimeEdit
+time
+
     TQLCDNumber,
+TQScrollBar
+TQSlider,
+TQSpinBox
+value
+
    
+
+
    TQSqlPropertyMap::~TQSqlPropertyMap () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the TQSqlPropertyMap.
+
     Note that if the TQSqlPropertyMap is installed with
+installPropertyMap() the object it was installed into, e.g. the
+TQSqlForm, takes ownership and will delete the TQSqlPropertyMap when
+necessary.
+
+
    TQSqlPropertyMap * TQSqlPropertyMap::defaultMap () [static]
+
    
+Returns the application global TQSqlPropertyMap.
+
+
    void TQSqlPropertyMap::insert ( const TQString & classname, const TQString & property )
+
    
+Insert a new classname/property pair, which is used for custom SQL
+field editors. There must be a Q_PROPERTY clause in the classname class declaration for the property.
+
+
    Example: sql/overview/custom1/main.cpp.
+
    void TQSqlPropertyMap::installDefaultMap ( TQSqlPropertyMap * map ) [static]
+
    
+Replaces the global default property map with map. All
+TQDataTable and TQSqlForm instantiations will use this new map for
+inserting and extracting values to and from editors.
+TQSqlPropertyMap takes ownership of \a map, and destroys it when it is no longer needed.
+
+
    TQVariant TQSqlPropertyMap::property ( TQWidget * widget )
+
    
+Returns the mapped property of widget as a TQVariant.
+
+
    void TQSqlPropertyMap::remove ( const TQString & classname )
+
    
+Removes classname from the map.
+
+
    void TQSqlPropertyMap::setProperty ( TQWidget * widget, const TQVariant & value ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the property of widget to value.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsqlquery.html b/doc/html/ntqsqlquery.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3f5e54fa5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsqlquery.html
@@ -0,0 +1,595 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSqlQuery Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSqlQuery Class Reference
    [sql module]
    
+
+
    The TQSqlQuery class provides a means of executing and
+manipulating SQL statements.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsqlquery.h>
+
    Inherited by TQSqlCursor.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQSqlQuery ( TQSqlResult * r )
      • 
+
    • TQSqlQuery ( const TQString & query = TQString::null, TQSqlDatabase * db = 0 )
      • 
+
    • explicit TQSqlQuery ( TQSqlDatabase * db )
      • 
+
    • TQSqlQuery ( const TQSqlQuery & other )
      • 
+
    • TQSqlQuery & operator= ( const TQSqlQuery & other )
      • 
+
    • virtual ~TQSqlQuery ()
      • 
+
    • bool isValid () const
      • 
+
    • bool isActive () const
      • 
+
    • bool isNull ( int field ) const
      • 
+
    • int at () const
      • 
+
    • TQString lastQuery () const
      • 
+
    • int numRowsAffected () const
      • 
+
    • TQSqlError lastError () const
      • 
+
    • bool isSelect () const
      • 
+
    • int size () const
      • 
+
    • const TQSqlDriver * driver () const
      • 
+
    • const TQSqlResult * result () const
      • 
+
    • bool isForwardOnly () const
      • 
+
    • void setForwardOnly ( bool forward )
      • 
+
    • virtual bool exec ( const TQString & query )
      • 
+
    • virtual TQVariant value ( int i ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual bool seek ( int i, bool relative = FALSE )
      • 
+
    • virtual bool next ()
      • 
+
    • virtual bool prev ()
      • 
+
    • virtual bool first ()
      • 
+
    • virtual bool last ()
      • 
+
    • bool exec ()
      • 
+
    • bool prepare ( const TQString & query )
      • 
+
    • void bindValue ( const TQString & placeholder, const TQVariant & val )
      • 
+
    • void bindValue ( int pos, const TQVariant & val )
      • 
+
    • void addBindValue ( const TQVariant & val )
      • 
+
    • void bindValue ( const TQString & placeholder, const TQVariant & val, TQSql::ParameterType type )
      • 
+
    • void bindValue ( int pos, const TQVariant & val, TQSql::ParameterType type )
      • 
+
    • void addBindValue ( const TQVariant & val, TQSql::ParameterType type )
      • 
+
    • TQVariant boundValue ( const TQString & placeholder ) const
      • 
+
    • TQVariant boundValue ( int pos ) const
      • 
+
    • TQMap<TQString, TQVariant> boundValues () const
      • 
+
    • TQString executedQuery () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSqlQuery class provides a means of executing and
+manipulating SQL statements.
+
     
+
+
+
     TQSqlQuery encapsulates the functionality involved in creating,
+navigating and retrieving data from SQL queries which are executed
+on a TQSqlDatabase. It can be used to execute DML (data
+manipulation language) statements, e.g. SELECT, INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE, and also DDL (data definition language)
+statements, e.g. CREATE TABLE. It can also be used to
+execute database-specific commands which are not standard SQL
+(e.g. SET DATESTYLE=ISO for PostgreSQL).
+
     Successfully executed SQL statements set the query's state to
+active (isActive() returns TRUE); otherwise the query's state is
+set to inactive. In either case, when executing a new SQL
+statement, the query is positioned on an invalid record; an active
+query must be navigated to a valid record (so that isValid()
+returns TRUE) before values can be retrieved.
+
     Navigating records is performed with the following functions:
+
     
    
+
     These functions allow the programmer to move forward, backward or
+arbitrarily through the records returned by the query. If you only
+need to move forward through the results, e.g. using next() or
+using seek() with a positive offset, you can use setForwardOnly()
+and save a significant amount of memory overhead. Once an active
+query is positioned on a valid record, data can be retrieved using
+value(). All data is transferred from the SQL backend using
+TQVariants.
+
     For example:
+
     
    +    TQSqlQuery query( "SELECT name FROM customer" );
+    while ( query.next() ) {
+        TQString name = query.value(0).toString();
+        doSomething( name );
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     To access the data returned by a query, use the value() method.
+Each field in the data returned by a SELECT statement is accessed
+by passing the field's position in the statement, starting from 0.
+Information about the fields can be obtained via TQSqlDatabase::record().
+For the sake of efficiency there are no functions to access a field
+by name. (The TQSqlCursor class provides a higher-level interface
+with field access by name and automatic SQL generation.)
+
     TQSqlQuery supports prepared query execution and the binding of
+parameter values to placeholders. Some databases don't support
+these features, so for them TQt emulates the required
+functionality. For example, the Oracle and ODBC drivers have
+proper prepared query support, and TQt makes use of it; but for
+databases that don't have this support, TQt implements the feature
+itself, e.g. by replacing placeholders with actual values when a
+query is executed. The exception is positional binding using named
+placeholders, which requires that the database supports prepared
+queries.
+
     Oracle databases identify placeholders by using a colon-name
+syntax, e.g :name. ODBC simply uses ? characters. TQt
+supports both syntaxes (although you can't mix them in the same
+query).
+
     Below we present the same example using each of the four different
+binding approaches.
+
     Named binding using named placeholders
+
    +    TQSqlQuery query;
+    query.prepare( "INSERT INTO atable (id, forename, surname) "
+                   "VALUES (:id, :forename, :surname)" );
+    query.bindValue( ":id", 1001 );
+    query.bindValue( ":forename", "Bart" );
+    query.bindValue( ":surname", "Simpson" );
+    query.exec();
+    
    
+ 
+
     Positional binding using named placeholders
+
    +    TQSqlQuery query;
+    query.prepare( "INSERT INTO atable (id, forename, surname) "
+                   "VALUES (:id, :forename, :surname)" );
+    query.bindValue( 0, 1001 );
+    query.bindValue( 1, "Bart" );
+    query.bindValue( 2, "Simpson" );
+    query.exec();
+    
    
+ 
+Note: Using positional binding with named placeholders will
+only work if the database supports prepared queries. This can be
+checked with TQSqlDriver::hasFeature() using TQSqlDriver::PreparedQueries
+as argument for driver feature.
+
     Binding values using positional placeholders #1
+
    +    TQSqlQuery query;
+    query.prepare( "INSERT INTO atable (id, forename, surname) "
+                   "VALUES (?, ?, ?)" );
+    query.bindValue( 0, 1001 );
+    query.bindValue( 1, "Bart" );
+    query.bindValue( 2, "Simpson" );
+    query.exec();
+    
    
+ 
+
     Binding values using positional placeholders #2
+
    +    query.prepare( "INSERT INTO atable (id, forename, surname) "
+                   "VALUES (?, ?, ?)" );
+    query.addBindValue( 1001 );
+    query.addBindValue( "Bart" );
+    query.addBindValue( "Simpson" );
+    query.exec();
+    
    
+ 
+
     Binding values to a stored procedure
+This code calls a stored procedure called AsciiToInt(), passing
+it a character through its in parameter, and taking its result in
+the out parameter.
+
    +    TQSqlQuery query;
+    query.prepare( "call AsciiToInt(?, ?)" );
+    query.bindValue( 0, "A" );
+    query.bindValue( 1, 0, TQSql::Out );
+    query.exec();
+    int i = query.boundValue( 1 ).toInt(); // i is 65.
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also TQSqlDatabase, TQSqlCursor, TQVariant, and Database Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSqlQuery::TQSqlQuery ( TQSqlResult * r )
+
    
+Creates a TQSqlQuery object which uses the TQSqlResult r to
+communicate with a database.
+
+
    TQSqlQuery::TQSqlQuery ( const TQString & query = TQString::null, TQSqlDatabase * db = 0 )
+
    
+Creates a TQSqlQuery object using the SQL query and the database
+db. If db is 0, (the default), the application's default
+database is used. If query is not a null string, it will be
+executed.
+
     
    See also TQSqlDatabase.
+
+
    explicit TQSqlQuery::TQSqlQuery ( TQSqlDatabase * db )
+
    
+Creates a TQSqlQuery object using the database db. If db is
+0, the application's default database is used.
+
     
    See also TQSqlDatabase.
+
+
    TQSqlQuery::TQSqlQuery ( const TQSqlQuery & other )
+
    
+Constructs a copy of other.
+
+
    TQSqlQuery::~TQSqlQuery () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
+
+
    void TQSqlQuery::addBindValue ( const TQVariant & val, TQSql::ParameterType type )
+
    
+Adds the value val to the list of values when using positional
+value binding. The order of the addBindValue() calls determines
+which placeholder a value will be bound to in the prepared query.
+If type is TQSql::Out or TQSql::InOut, the placeholder will
+be overwritten with data from the database after the exec() call.
+
     
    See also bindValue(), prepare(), and exec().
+
+
    void TQSqlQuery::addBindValue ( const TQVariant & val )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Binds the placeholder with type TQSql::In.
+
+
    void TQSqlQuery::afterSeek () [virtual protected]
+
    
+Protected virtual function called after the internal record
+pointer is moved to a new record. The default implementation does
+nothing.
+
+
    int TQSqlQuery::at () const
+
    
+Returns the current internal position of the query. The first
+record is at position zero. If the position is invalid, a
+TQSql::Location will be returned indicating the invalid position.
+
     
    See also prev(), next(), first(), last(), seek(), isActive(), and isValid().
+
+
    Example: sql/overview/navigating/main.cpp.
+
    void TQSqlQuery::beforeSeek () [virtual protected]
+
    
+Protected virtual function called before the internal record
+pointer is moved to a new record. The default implementation does
+nothing.
+
+
    void TQSqlQuery::bindValue ( const TQString & placeholder, const TQVariant & val, TQSql::ParameterType type )
+
    
+Set the placeholder placeholder to be bound to value val in
+the prepared statement. Note that the placeholder mark (e.g :)
+must be included when specifying the placeholder name. If type
+is TQSql::Out or TQSql::InOut, the placeholder will be
+overwritten with data from the database after the exec() call.
+
     
    See also addBindValue(), prepare(), and exec().
+
+
    void TQSqlQuery::bindValue ( const TQString & placeholder, const TQVariant & val )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Binds the placeholder with type TQSql::In.
+
+
    void TQSqlQuery::bindValue ( int pos, const TQVariant & val )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Binds the placeholder at position pos with type TQSql::In.
+
+
    void TQSqlQuery::bindValue ( int pos, const TQVariant & val, TQSql::ParameterType type )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Set the placeholder in position pos to be bound to value val
+in the prepared statement. Field numbering starts at 0. If type
+is TQSql::Out or TQSql::InOut, the placeholder will be
+overwritten with data from the database after the exec() call.
+
     
    See also addBindValue(), prepare(), and exec().
+
+
    TQVariant TQSqlQuery::boundValue ( const TQString & placeholder ) const
+
    
+Returns the value for the placeholder.
+
+
    TQVariant TQSqlQuery::boundValue ( int pos ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the value for the placeholder at position pos.
+
+
    TQMap<TQString, TQVariant> TQSqlQuery::boundValues () const
+
    
+Returns a map of the bound values.
+
     The bound values can be examined in the following way:
+
    +    TQSqlQuery query;
+    ...
+    // Examine the bound values - bound using named binding
+    TQMap<TQString, TQVariant>::ConstIterator it;
+    TQMap<TQString, TQVariant> vals = query.boundValues();
+    for ( it = vals.begin(); it != vals.end(); ++it )
+        qWarning( "Placeholder: " + it.key() + ", Value: " + (*it).toString() );
+    ...
+
+    // Examine the bound values - bound using positional binding
+    TQValueList<TQVariant>::ConstIterator it;
+    TQValueList<TQVariant> list = query.boundValues().values();
+    int i = 0;
+    for ( it = list.begin(); it != list.end(); ++it )
+        qWarning( "Placeholder pos: %d, Value: " + (*it).toString(), i++ );
+    ...
+
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    const TQSqlDriver * TQSqlQuery::driver () const
+
    
+Returns the database driver associated with the query.
+
+
    bool TQSqlQuery::exec ( const TQString & query ) [virtual]
+
    
+Executes the SQL in query. Returns TRUE and sets the query
+state to active if the query was successful; otherwise returns
+FALSE and sets the query state to inactive. The query string
+must use syntax appropriate for the SQL database being queried,
+for example, standard SQL.
+
     After the query is executed, the query is positioned on an invalid record, and must be navigated to a valid record before
+data values can be retrieved, e.g. using next().
+
     Note that the last error for this query is reset when exec() is
+called.
+
     
    See also isActive(), isValid(), next(), prev(), first(), last(), and seek().
+
+
    Examples: sql/overview/basicbrowsing/main.cpp, sql/overview/basicbrowsing2/main.cpp, sql/overview/basicdatamanip/main.cpp, and sql/overview/connection.cpp.
+
    bool TQSqlQuery::exec ()
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Executes a previously prepared SQL query. Returns TRUE if the
+query executed successfully; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also prepare(), bindValue(), and addBindValue().
+
+
    TQString TQSqlQuery::executedQuery () const
+
    
+Returns the last query that was executed.
+
     In most cases this function returns the same as lastQuery(). If a
+prepared query with placeholders is executed on a DBMS that does
+not support it, the preparation of this query is emulated. The
+placeholders in the original query are replaced with their bound
+values to form a new query. This function returns the modified
+query. Useful for debugging purposes.
+
     
    See also lastQuery().
+
+
    bool TQSqlQuery::first () [virtual]
+
    
+Retrieves the first record in the result, if available, and
+positions the query on the retrieved record. Note that the result
+must be in an active state and isSelect() must return TRUE before
+calling this function or it will do nothing and return FALSE.
+Returns TRUE if successful. If unsuccessful the query position is
+set to an invalid position and FALSE is returned.
+
     
    See also next(), prev(), last(), seek(), at(), isActive(), and isValid().
+
+
    Example: sql/overview/navigating/main.cpp.
+
    bool TQSqlQuery::isActive () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the query is currently active; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
+
    Examples: sql/overview/basicbrowsing/main.cpp, sql/overview/basicbrowsing2/main.cpp, sql/overview/basicdatamanip/main.cpp, sql/overview/navigating/main.cpp, and sql/overview/retrieve1/main.cpp.
+
    bool TQSqlQuery::isForwardOnly () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if you can only scroll forward through a result
+set; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setForwardOnly().
+
+
    bool TQSqlQuery::isNull ( int field ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the query is active and positioned on a valid
+record and the field is NULL; otherwise returns FALSE. Note
+that for some drivers isNull() will not return accurate
+information until after an attempt is made to retrieve data.
+
     
    See also isActive(), isValid(), and value().
+
+
    bool TQSqlQuery::isSelect () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the current query is a SELECT statement;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQSqlQuery::isValid () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the query is currently positioned on a valid
+record; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQSqlQuery::last () [virtual]
+
    
+Retrieves the last record in the result, if available, and
+positions the query on the retrieved record. Note that the result
+must be in an active state and isSelect() must return TRUE before
+calling this function or it will do nothing and return FALSE.
+Returns TRUE if successful. If unsuccessful the query position is
+set to an invalid position and FALSE is returned.
+
     
    See also next(), prev(), first(), seek(), at(), isActive(), and isValid().
+
+
    Example: sql/overview/navigating/main.cpp.
+
    TQSqlError TQSqlQuery::lastError () const
+
    
+Returns error information about the last error (if any) that
+occurred.
+
     
    See also TQSqlError.
+
+
    TQString TQSqlQuery::lastQuery () const
+
    
+Returns the text of the current query being used, or TQString::null
+if there is no current query text.
+
     
    See also executedQuery().
+
+
    bool TQSqlQuery::next () [virtual]
+
    
+Retrieves the next record in the result, if available, and
+positions the query on the retrieved record. Note that the result
+must be in an active state and isSelect() must return TRUE before
+calling this function or it will do nothing and return FALSE.
+
     The following rules apply:
+
     
      
+
    •  If the result is currently located before the first
+record, e.g. immediately after a query is executed, an attempt is
+made to retrieve the first record.
+
       
    •  If the result is currently located after the last record,
+there is no change and FALSE is returned.
+
       
    •  If the result is located somewhere in the middle, an attempt
+is made to retrieve the next record.
+
    
+
     If the record could not be retrieved, the result is positioned after
+the last record and FALSE is returned. If the record is successfully
+retrieved, TRUE is returned.
+
     
    See also prev(), first(), last(), seek(), at(), isActive(), and isValid().
+
+
    Examples: sql/overview/basicbrowsing/main.cpp, sql/overview/basicbrowsing2/main.cpp, sql/overview/delete/main.cpp, sql/overview/order1/main.cpp, sql/overview/retrieve1/main.cpp, sql/overview/subclass4/main.cpp, and sql/overview/subclass5/main.cpp.
+
    int TQSqlQuery::numRowsAffected () const
+
    
+Returns the number of rows affected by the result's SQL statement,
+or -1 if it cannot be determined. Note that for SELECT
+statements, the value is undefined; see size() instead. If the
+query is not active (isActive() returns FALSE), -1 is returned.
+
     
    See also size() and TQSqlDriver::hasFeature().
+
+
    Examples: sql/overview/basicbrowsing2/main.cpp and sql/overview/basicdatamanip/main.cpp.
+
    TQSqlQuery & TQSqlQuery::operator= ( const TQSqlQuery & other )
+
    
+Assigns other to the query.
+
+
    bool TQSqlQuery::prepare ( const TQString & query )
+
    
+Prepares the SQL query query for execution. The query may
+contain placeholders for binding values. Both Oracle style
+colon-name (e.g. :surname), and ODBC style (e.g. ?)
+placeholders are supported; but they cannot be mixed in the same
+query. See the Description for examples.
+
     
    See also exec(), bindValue(), and addBindValue().
+
+
    bool TQSqlQuery::prev () [virtual]
+
    
+Retrieves the previous record in the result, if available, and
+positions the query on the retrieved record. Note that the result
+must be in an active state and isSelect() must return TRUE before
+calling this function or it will do nothing and return FALSE.
+
     The following rules apply:
+
     
      
+
    •  If the result is currently located before the first record,
+there is no change and FALSE is returned.
+
       
    •  If the result is currently located after the last record, an
+attempt is made to retrieve the last record.
+
       
    •  If the result is somewhere in the middle, an attempt is made
+to retrieve the previous record.
+
    
+
     If the record could not be retrieved, the result is positioned
+before the first record and FALSE is returned. If the record is
+successfully retrieved, TRUE is returned.
+
     
    See also next(), first(), last(), seek(), at(), isActive(), and isValid().
+
+
    const TQSqlResult * TQSqlQuery::result () const
+
    
+Returns the result associated with the query.
+
+
    bool TQSqlQuery::seek ( int i, bool relative = FALSE ) [virtual]
+
    
+Retrieves the record at position (offset) i, if available, and
+positions the query on the retrieved record. The first record is
+at position 0. Note that the query must be in an active state and
+isSelect() must return TRUE before calling this function.
+
     If relative is FALSE (the default), the following rules apply:
+
     
      
+
    •  If i is negative, the result is positioned before the
+first record and FALSE is returned.
+
    •  Otherwise, an attempt is made to move to the record at position
+i. If the record at position i could not be retrieved, the
+result is positioned after the last record and FALSE is returned. If
+the record is successfully retrieved, TRUE is returned.
+
    
+
     If relative is TRUE, the following rules apply:
+
     
      
+
    •  If the result is currently positioned before the first
+record or on the first record, and i is negative, there is no
+change, and FALSE is returned.
+
    •  If the result is currently located after the last record, and
+i is positive, there is no change, and FALSE is returned.
+
    •  If the result is currently located somewhere in the middle,
+and the relative offset i moves the result below zero, the
+result is positioned before the first record and FALSE is
+returned.
+
    •  Otherwise, an attempt is made to move to the record i
+records ahead of the current record (or i records behind the
+current record if i is negative). If the record at offset i
+could not be retrieved, the result is positioned after the last
+record if i >= 0, (or before the first record if i is
+negative), and FALSE is returned. If the record is successfully
+retrieved, TRUE is returned.
+
    
+
     
    See also next(), prev(), first(), last(), at(), isActive(), and isValid().
+
+
    Example: sql/overview/navigating/main.cpp.
+
    void TQSqlQuery::setForwardOnly ( bool forward )
+
    
+Sets forward only mode to forward. If forward is TRUE only
+next(), and seek() with positive values, are allowed for
+navigating the results. Forward only mode needs far less memory
+since results do not need to be cached.
+
     Forward only mode is off by default.
+
     Forward only mode cannot be used with data aware widgets like
+TQDataTable, since they must to be able to scroll backward as well
+as forward.
+
     
    See also isForwardOnly(), next(), and seek().
+
+
    int TQSqlQuery::size () const
+
    
+Returns the size of the result, (number of rows returned), or -1
+if the size cannot be determined or if the database does not
+support reporting information about query sizes. Note that for
+non-SELECT statements (isSelect() returns FALSE), size() will
+return -1. If the query is not active (isActive() returns FALSE),
+-1 is returned.
+
     To determine the number of rows affected by a non-SELECT
+statement, use numRowsAffected().
+
     
    See also isActive(), numRowsAffected(), and TQSqlDriver::hasFeature().
+
+
    Example: sql/overview/navigating/main.cpp.
+
    TQVariant TQSqlQuery::value ( int i ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the value of the i-th field in the query (zero based).
+
     The fields are numbered from left to right using the text of the
+SELECT statement, e.g. in SELECT forename, surname FROM people,
+field 0 is forename and field 1 is surname. Using SELECT *
+is not recommended because the order of the fields in the query is
+undefined.
+
     An invalid TQVariant is returned if field i does not exist, if
+the query is inactive, or if the query is positioned on an invalid
+record.
+
     
    See also prev(), next(), first(), last(), seek(), isActive(), and isValid().
+
+
    Examples: sql/overview/basicbrowsing/main.cpp, sql/overview/basicbrowsing2/main.cpp, sql/overview/retrieve1/main.cpp, sql/overview/subclass3/main.cpp, sql/overview/subclass4/main.cpp, sql/overview/subclass5/main.cpp, and sql/overview/table4/main.cpp.
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsqlrecord.html b/doc/html/ntqsqlrecord.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9d13a2470
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsqlrecord.html
@@ -0,0 +1,294 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSqlRecord Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSqlRecord Class Reference
    [sql module]
    
+
+
    The TQSqlRecord class encapsulates a database record, i.e. a
+set of database fields.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsqlrecord.h>
+
    Inherited by TQSqlCursor and TQSqlIndex.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQSqlRecord ()
      • 
+
    • TQSqlRecord ( const TQSqlRecord & other )
      • 
+
    • TQSqlRecord & operator= ( const TQSqlRecord & other )
      • 
+
    • virtual ~TQSqlRecord ()
      • 
+
    • virtual TQVariant value ( int i ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual TQVariant value ( const TQString & name ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setValue ( int i, const TQVariant & val )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setValue ( const TQString & name, const TQVariant & val )
      • 
+
    • bool isGenerated ( int i ) const
      • 
+
    • bool isGenerated ( const TQString & name ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setGenerated ( const TQString & name, bool generated )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setGenerated ( int i, bool generated )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setNull ( int i )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setNull ( const TQString & name )
      • 
+
    • bool isNull ( int i ) const
      • 
+
    • bool isNull ( const TQString & name ) const
      • 
+
    • int position ( const TQString & name ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString fieldName ( int i ) const
      • 
+
    • TQSqlField * field ( int i )
      • 
+
    • TQSqlField * field ( const TQString & name )
      • 
+
    • const TQSqlField * field ( int i ) const
      • 
+
    • const TQSqlField * field ( const TQString & name ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual void append ( const TQSqlField & field )
      • 
+
    • virtual void insert ( int pos, const TQSqlField & field )
      • 
+
    • virtual void remove ( int pos )
      • 
+
    • bool isEmpty () const
      • 
+
    • bool contains ( const TQString & name ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual void clear ()
      • 
+
    • virtual void clearValues ( bool nullify = FALSE )
      • 
+
    • uint count () const
      • 
+
    • virtual TQString toString ( const TQString & prefix = TQString::null, const TQString & sep = "," ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual TQStringList toStringList ( const TQString & prefix = TQString::null ) const
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSqlRecord class encapsulates a database record, i.e. a
+set of database fields.
+
     
+
+
     The TQSqlRecord class encapsulates the functionality and
+characteristics of a database record (usually a table or view within
+the database). TQSqlRecords support adding and removing fields as
+well as setting and retrieving field values.
+
     TQSqlRecord is implicitly shared. This means you can make copies of
+the record in time O(1). If multiple TQSqlRecord instances share
+the same data and one is modifying the record's data then this
+modifying instance makes a copy and modifies its private copy -
+thus it does not affect other instances.
+
     
    See also TQSqlRecordInfo and Database Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSqlRecord::TQSqlRecord ()
+
    
+Constructs an empty record.
+
+
    TQSqlRecord::TQSqlRecord ( const TQSqlRecord & other )
+
    
+Constructs a copy of other.
+
+
    TQSqlRecord::~TQSqlRecord () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
+
+
    void TQSqlRecord::append ( const TQSqlField & field ) [virtual]
+
    
+Append a copy of field field to the end of the record.
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQSqlIndex.
+
    void TQSqlRecord::clear () [virtual]
+
    
+Removes all the record's fields.
+
     
    See also clearValues().
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQSqlCursor.
+
    void TQSqlRecord::clearValues ( bool nullify = FALSE ) [virtual]
+
    
+Clears the value of all fields in the record. If nullify is
+TRUE, (the default is FALSE), each field is set to NULL.
+
+
    bool TQSqlRecord::contains ( const TQString & name ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if there is a field in the record called name;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    uint TQSqlRecord::count () const
+
    
+Returns the number of fields in the record.
+
+
    TQSqlField * TQSqlRecord::field ( int i )
+
    
+Returns the field at position i within the record, or 0 if it
+cannot be found.
+
+
    TQSqlField * TQSqlRecord::field ( const TQString & name )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the field called name within the record, or 0 if it
+cannot be found. Field names are not case-sensitive.
+
+
    const TQSqlField * TQSqlRecord::field ( int i ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
    const TQSqlField * TQSqlRecord::field ( const TQString & name ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the field called name within the record, or 0 if it
+cannot be found. Field names are not case-sensitive.
+
+
    TQString TQSqlRecord::fieldName ( int i ) const
+
    
+Returns the name of the field at position i. If the field does
+not exist, TQString::null is returned.
+
+
    void TQSqlRecord::insert ( int pos, const TQSqlField & field ) [virtual]
+
    
+Insert a copy of field at position pos. If a field already
+exists at pos, it is removed.
+
+
    bool TQSqlRecord::isEmpty () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if there are no fields in the record; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQSqlRecord::isGenerated ( const TQString & name ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the record has a field called name and this
+field is to be generated (the default); otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setGenerated().
+
+
    bool TQSqlRecord::isGenerated ( int i ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns TRUE if the record has a field at position i and this
+field is to be generated (the default); otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setGenerated().
+
+
    bool TQSqlRecord::isNull ( const TQString & name ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the field called name is NULL or if there is no
+field called name; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also position().
+
+
    bool TQSqlRecord::isNull ( int i ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns TRUE if the field i is NULL or if there is no field at
+position i; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also fieldName().
+
+
    TQSqlRecord & TQSqlRecord::operator= ( const TQSqlRecord & other )
+
    
+Sets the record equal to other.
+
+
    int TQSqlRecord::position ( const TQString & name ) const
+
    
+Returns the position of the field called name within the
+record, or -1 if it cannot be found. Field names are not
+case-sensitive. If more than one field matches, the first one is
+returned.
+
+
    void TQSqlRecord::remove ( int pos ) [virtual]
+
    
+Removes the field at pos. If pos does not exist, nothing
+happens.
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQSqlCursor.
+
    void TQSqlRecord::setGenerated ( const TQString & name, bool generated ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the generated flag for the field called name to generated. If the field does not exist, nothing happens. Only
+fields that have generated set to TRUE are included in the SQL
+that is generated, e.g. by TQSqlCursor.
+
     
    See also isGenerated().
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQSqlCursor.
+
    void TQSqlRecord::setGenerated ( int i, bool generated ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the generated flag for the field i to generated.
+
     
    See also isGenerated().
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQSqlCursor.
+
    void TQSqlRecord::setNull ( int i ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the value of field i to NULL. If the field does not exist,
+nothing happens.
+
+
    void TQSqlRecord::setNull ( const TQString & name ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the value of the field called name to NULL. If the field
+does not exist, nothing happens.
+
+
    void TQSqlRecord::setValue ( int i, const TQVariant & val ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the value of the field at position i to val. If the
+field does not exist, nothing happens.
+
+
    Examples: sql/overview/insert/main.cpp, sql/overview/insert2/main.cpp, sql/overview/subclass5/main.cpp, sql/overview/update/main.cpp, and sql/sqltable/main.cpp.
+
    void TQSqlRecord::setValue ( const TQString & name, const TQVariant & val ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the value of the field called name to val. If the field
+does not exist, nothing happens.
+
+
    TQString TQSqlRecord::toString ( const TQString & prefix = TQString::null, const TQString & sep = "," ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns a list of all the record's field names as a string
+separated by sep.
+
     Note that fields which are not generated are not included (see
+isGenerated()). The returned string is suitable, for example, for
+generating SQL SELECT statements. If a prefix is specified,
+e.g. a table name, all fields are prefixed in the form:
+
     "prefix.<fieldname>"
+
+
    TQStringList TQSqlRecord::toStringList ( const TQString & prefix = TQString::null ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns a list of all the record's field names, each having the
+prefix prefix.
+
     Note that fields which have generated set to FALSE are not
+included. (See isGenerated()). If prefix is supplied, e.g.
+a table name, all fields are prefixed in the form:
+
     "prefix.<fieldname>"
+
+
    TQVariant TQSqlRecord::value ( int i ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the value of the field located at position i in the
+record. If field i does not exist the resultant behaviour is
+undefined.
+
     This function should be used with TQSqlQuerys. When working
+with a TQSqlCursor the value(const
+    TQString&) overload which uses field names is more
+appropriate.
+
+
    Example: sql/overview/update/main.cpp.
+
    TQVariant TQSqlRecord::value ( const TQString & name ) const [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the value of the field called name in the record. If
+field name does not exist the resultant behaviour is undefined.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsqlresult.html b/doc/html/ntqsqlresult.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c05ad1743
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsqlresult.html
@@ -0,0 +1,260 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSqlResult Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSqlResult Class Reference
    [sql module]
    
+
+
    The TQSqlResult class provides an abstract interface for
+accessing data from SQL databases.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsqlresult.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSqlResult class provides an abstract interface for
+accessing data from SQL databases.
+
     
+
+
     Normally you would use TQSqlQuery instead of TQSqlResult since TQSqlQuery
+provides a generic wrapper for database-specific implementations of
+TQSqlResult.
+
     
    See also TQSql and Database Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSqlResult::TQSqlResult ( const TQSqlDriver * db ) [protected]
+
    
+Protected constructor which creates a TQSqlResult using database db. The object is initialized to an inactive state.
+
+
    TQSqlResult::~TQSqlResult () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
+
+
    int TQSqlResult::at () const [protected]
+
    
+Returns the current (zero-based) position of the result.
+
+
    TQVariant TQSqlResult::data ( int i ) [pure virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the data for field i (zero-based) as a TQVariant. This
+function is only called if the result is in an active state and is
+positioned on a valid record and i is non-negative.
+Derived classes must reimplement this function and return the value
+of field i, or TQVariant() if it cannot be determined.
+
+
    const TQSqlDriver * TQSqlResult::driver () const [protected]
+
    
+Returns the driver associated with the result.
+
+
    bool TQSqlResult::fetch ( int i ) [pure virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     Positions the result to an arbitrary (zero-based) index i. This
+function is only called if the result is in an active state. Derived
+classes must reimplement this function and position the result to the
+index i, and call setAt() with an appropriate value. Return TRUE
+to indicate success, or FALSE to signify failure.
+
+
    bool TQSqlResult::fetchFirst () [pure virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     Positions the result to the first record in the result. This
+function is only called if the result is in an active state.
+Derived classes must reimplement this function and position the result
+to the first record, and call setAt() with an appropriate value.
+Return TRUE to indicate success, or FALSE to signify failure.
+
+
    bool TQSqlResult::fetchLast () [pure virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     Positions the result to the last record in the result. This
+function is only called if the result is in an active state.
+Derived classes must reimplement this function and position the result
+to the last record, and call setAt() with an appropriate value.
+Return TRUE to indicate success, or FALSE to signify failure.
+
+
    bool TQSqlResult::fetchNext () [virtual protected]
+
    
+Positions the result to the next available record in the result.
+This function is only called if the result is in an active state.
+The default implementation calls fetch() with the next index.
+Derived classes can reimplement this function and position the result
+to the next record in some other way, and call setAt() with an
+appropriate value. Return TRUE to indicate success, or FALSE to
+signify failure.
+
+
    bool TQSqlResult::fetchPrev () [virtual protected]
+
    
+Positions the result to the previous available record in the
+result. This function is only called if the result is in an active
+state. The default implementation calls fetch() with the previous
+index. Derived classes can reimplement this function and position the
+result to the next record in some other way, and call setAt() with
+an appropriate value. Return TRUE to indicate success, or FALSE to
+signify failure.
+
+
    bool TQSqlResult::isActive () const [protected]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the result has records to be retrieved; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQSqlResult::isForwardOnly () const [protected]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if you can only scroll forward through a result set;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQSqlResult::isNull ( int i ) [pure virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the field at position i is NULL; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQSqlResult::isSelect () const [protected]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the current result is from a SELECT statement;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQSqlResult::isValid () const [protected]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the result is positioned on a valid record (that
+is, the result is not positioned before the first or after the
+last record); otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    TQSqlError TQSqlResult::lastError () const [protected]
+
    
+Returns the last error associated with the result.
+
+
    TQString TQSqlResult::lastQuery () const [protected]
+
    
+Returns the current SQL query text, or TQString::null if there is none.
+
+
    int TQSqlResult::numRowsAffected () [pure virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of rows affected by the last query executed.
+
+
    bool TQSqlResult::reset ( const TQString & query ) [pure virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     Sets the result to use the SQL statement query for subsequent
+data retrieval. Derived classes must reimplement this function and
+apply the query to the database. This function is called only
+after the result is set to an inactive state and is positioned
+before the first record of the new result. Derived classes should
+return TRUE if the query was successful and ready to be used,
+or FALSE otherwise.
+
+
    void TQSqlResult::setActive ( bool a ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Protected function provided for derived classes to set the
+internal active state to the value of a.
+
     
    See also isActive().
+
+
    void TQSqlResult::setAt ( int at ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Protected function provided for derived classes to set the
+internal (zero-based) result index to at.
+
     
    See also at().
+
+
    void TQSqlResult::setForwardOnly ( bool forward ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Sets forward only mode to forward. If forward is TRUE only
+fetchNext() is allowed for navigating the results. Forward only
+mode needs far less memory since results do not have to be cached.
+forward only mode is off by default.
+
     
    See also fetchNext().
+
+
    void TQSqlResult::setLastError ( const TQSqlError & e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Protected function provided for derived classes to set the last
+error to the value of e.
+
     
    See also lastError().
+
+
    void TQSqlResult::setQuery ( const TQString & query ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Sets the current query for the result to query. The result must
+be reset() in order to execute the query on the database.
+
+
    void TQSqlResult::setSelect ( bool s ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Protected function provided for derived classes to indicate
+whether or not the current statement is a SQL SELECT statement.
+The s parameter should be TRUE if the statement is a SELECT
+statement, or FALSE otherwise.
+
+
    int TQSqlResult::size () [pure virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the size of the result or -1 if it cannot be determined.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsqlselectcursor.html b/doc/html/ntqsqlselectcursor.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e1a943498
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsqlselectcursor.html
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSqlSelectCursor Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSqlSelectCursor Class Reference
    [sql module]
    
+
+
    The TQSqlSelectCursor class provides browsing of general SQL
+SELECT statements.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsqlselectcursor.h>
+
    Inherits TQSqlCursor.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSqlSelectCursor class provides browsing of general SQL
+SELECT statements.
+
     
+
+
     TQSqlSelectCursor is a convenience class that makes it possible to
+display result sets from general SQL SELECT statements in
+data-aware TQt widgets. TQSqlSelectCursor is read-only and does not
+support INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE operations.
+
     Pass the query in at construction time, or use the
+TQSqlSelectCursor::exec() function.
+
     Example:
+
    +    ...
+    TQSqlSelectCursor* cur = new TQSqlSelectCursor( "SELECT id, firstname, lastname FROM author" );
+    TQDataTable* table = new TQDataTable( this );
+    table->setSqlCursor( cur, TRUE, TRUE );
+    table->refresh();
+    ...
+    cur->exec( "SELECT * FROM books" );
+    table->refresh();
+    ...
+    
    
+ 
+
    See also Database Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSqlSelectCursor::TQSqlSelectCursor ( const TQString & query = TQString::null, TQSqlDatabase * db = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a read only cursor on database db using the query query.
+
+
    TQSqlSelectCursor::TQSqlSelectCursor ( const TQSqlSelectCursor & other )
+
     Constructs a copy of other 
+
    TQSqlSelectCursor::~TQSqlSelectCursor ()
+
     Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources 
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqstack.html b/doc/html/ntqstack.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..727f418ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqstack.html
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQStack Class Reference (obsolete)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQStack Class Reference (obsolete)
    
+
+ 
+
     
    +#include <ntqstack.h>
    
+ 
+
     The TQStack class has been renamed  TQPtrStack  in TQt 3.0.
+
+
+
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqstatusbar.html b/doc/html/ntqstatusbar.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..87200b257
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqstatusbar.html
@@ -0,0 +1,217 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQStatusBar Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQStatusBar Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQStatusBar class provides a horizontal bar suitable for
+presenting status information.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqstatusbar.h>
+
    Inherits TQWidget.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
      
+
    • void message ( const TQString & message )
      • 
+
    • void message ( const TQString & message, int ms )
      • 
+
    • void clear ()
      • 
+
    
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • bool sizeGripEnabled - whether the TQSizeGrip in the bottom right of the status bar is enabled
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQStatusBar class provides a horizontal bar suitable for
+presenting status information.
+
     
+
+
+
     Each status indicator falls into one of three categories:
+
     
      
+
    •  Temporary - briefly occupies most of the status bar. Used
+to explain tool tip texts or menu entries, for example.
+
    •  Normal - occupies part of the status bar and may be hidden
+by temporary messages. Used to display the page and line
+number in a word processor, for example.
+
    •  Permanent - is never hidden. Used for important mode
+indications, for example, some applications put a Caps Lock
+indicator in the status bar.
+
    
+
     TQStatusBar lets you display all three types of indicators.
+
     To display a temporary message, call message() (perhaps by
+connecting a suitable signal to it). To remove a temporary
+message, call clear(). There are two variants of message(): one
+that displays the message until the next clear() or message() and
+one that has a time limit:
+
     
    +        connect( loader, SIGNAL(progressMessage(const TQString&)),
+                 statusBar(), SLOT(message(const TQString&)) );
+
+        statusBar()->message("Loading...");  // Initial message
+        loader.loadStuff();                  // Emits progress messages
+        statusBar()->message("Done.", 2000); // Final message for 2 seconds
+    
    
+ 
+
     Normal and Permanent messages are displayed by creating a
+small widget and then adding it to the status bar with
+addWidget(). Widgets like TQLabel, TQProgressBar or even TQToolButton
+are useful for adding to status bars. removeWidget() is used to
+remove widgets.
+
     
    +        statusBar()->addWidget(new MyReadWriteIndication(statusBar()));
+    
    
+ 
+
     By default TQStatusBar provides a TQSizeGrip in the lower-right
+corner. You can disable it with setSizeGripEnabled(FALSE);
+
      
+
     
    See also TQToolBar, TQMainWindow, TQLabel, GUI Design Handbook: Status Bar, Main Window and Related Classes, and Help System.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQStatusBar::TQStatusBar ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a status bar called name with parent parent and
+with a size grip.
+
     
    See also sizeGripEnabled.
+
+
    TQStatusBar::~TQStatusBar () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the status bar and frees any allocated resources and
+child widgets.
+
+
    void TQStatusBar::addWidget ( TQWidget * widget, int stretch = 0, bool permanent = FALSE ) [virtual]
+
    
+Adds widget to this status bar. widget is reparented if it
+isn't already a child of the TQStatusBar.
+
     widget is permanently visible if permanent is TRUE and may
+be obscured by temporary messages if permanent is FALSE. The
+default is FALSE.
+
     If permanent is TRUE, widget is located at the far right of
+the status bar. If permanent is FALSE (the default), widget
+is located just to the left of the first permanent widget.
+
     stretch is used to compute a suitable size for widget as the
+status bar grows and shrinks. The default of 0 uses a minimum of
+space.
+
     This function may cause some flicker.
+
     
    See also removeWidget().
+
+
    void TQStatusBar::clear () [slot]
+
    
+Removes any temporary message being shown.
+
     
    See also message().
+
+
    void TQStatusBar::hideOrShow () [protected]
+
    
+Ensures that the right widgets are visible. Used by message() and
+clear().
+
+
    bool TQStatusBar::isSizeGripEnabled () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the TQSizeGrip in the bottom right of the status bar is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "sizeGripEnabled" property for details.
+
    void TQStatusBar::message ( const TQString & message ) [slot]
+
    
+Hides the normal status indicators and displays message until
+clear() or another message() is called.
+
     
    See also clear().
+
+
    Example: regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
+
    void TQStatusBar::message ( const TQString & message, int ms ) [slot]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Hides the normal status indications and displays message for ms milli-seconds or until clear() or another message() is called,
+whichever occurs first.
+
+
    void TQStatusBar::messageChanged ( const TQString & message ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the temporary status messages
+changes. message is the new temporary message, and is a
+null-string when the message has been removed.
+
     
    See also message() and clear().
+
+
    void TQStatusBar::paintEvent ( TQPaintEvent * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Shows the temporary message, if appropriate.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
+
    void TQStatusBar::reformat () [protected]
+
    
+Changes the status bar's appearance to account for item changes.
+Special subclasses may need this, but geometry management will
+usually take care of any necessary rearrangements.
+
+
    void TQStatusBar::removeWidget ( TQWidget * widget ) [virtual]
+
    
+Removes widget from the status bar.
+
     This function may cause some flicker.
+
     Note that widget is not deleted.
+
     
    See also addWidget().
+
+
    void TQStatusBar::setSizeGripEnabled ( bool )
+
    Sets whether the TQSizeGrip in the bottom right of the status bar is enabled.
+See the "sizeGripEnabled" property for details.
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    bool sizeGripEnabled
    
+
    This property holds whether the TQSizeGrip in the bottom right of the status bar is enabled.
+
    Enables or disables the TQSizeGrip in the bottom right of the
+status bar. By default, the size grip is enabled.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setSizeGripEnabled() and get this property's value with isSizeGripEnabled().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqstring.html b/doc/html/ntqstring.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e6c5edfe8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqstring.html
@@ -0,0 +1,2440 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQString Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQString Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQString class provides an abstraction of Unicode text
+and the classic C '\0'-terminated char array.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqstring.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQString ()
      • 
+
    • TQString ( TQChar ch )
      • 
+
    • TQString ( const TQString & s )
      • 
+
    • TQString ( const TQByteArray & ba )
      • 
+
    • TQString ( const TQChar * unicode, uint length )
      • 
+
    • TQString ( const char * str )
      • 
+
    • TQString ( const std::string & str )
      • 
+
    • ~TQString ()
      • 
+
    • TQString & operator= ( const TQString & s )
      • 
+
    • TQString & operator= ( const char * str )
      • 
+
    • TQString & operator= ( const std::string & s )
      • 
+
    • TQString & operator= ( const TQCString & cstr )
      • 
+
    • TQString & operator= ( TQChar c )
      • 
+
    • TQString & operator= ( char c )
      • 
+
    • bool isNull () const
      • 
+
    • bool isEmpty () const
      • 
+
    • uint length () const
      • 
+
    • void truncate ( uint newLen )
      • 
+
    • TQString & fill ( TQChar c, int len = -1 )
      • 
+
    • TQString copy () const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • TQString arg ( long a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString arg ( ulong a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString arg ( Q_LLONG a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString arg ( Q_ULLONG a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString arg ( int a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString arg ( uint a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString arg ( short a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString arg ( ushort a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString arg ( double a, int fieldWidth = 0, char fmt = 'g', int prec = -1 ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString arg ( char a, int fieldWidth = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString arg ( TQChar a, int fieldWidth = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString arg ( const TQString & a, int fieldWidth = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString arg ( const TQString & a1, const TQString & a2 ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString arg ( const TQString & a1, const TQString & a2, const TQString & a3 ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString arg ( const TQString & a1, const TQString & a2, const TQString & a3, const TQString & a4 ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString & sprintf ( const char * cformat, ... )
      • 
+
    • int find ( TQChar c, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const
      • 
+
    • int find ( char c, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const
      • 
+
    • int find ( const TQString & str, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const
      • 
+
    • int find ( const TQRegExp & rx, int index = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • int find ( const char * str, int index = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • int findRev ( TQChar c, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const
      • 
+
    • int findRev ( char c, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const
      • 
+
    • int findRev ( const TQString & str, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const
      • 
+
    • int findRev ( const TQRegExp & rx, int index = -1 ) const
      • 
+
    • int findRev ( const char * str, int index = -1 ) const
      • 
+
    • int contains ( TQChar c, bool cs = TRUE ) const
      • 
+
    • int contains ( char c, bool cs = TRUE ) const
      • 
+
    • int contains ( const char * str, bool cs = TRUE ) const
      • 
+
    • int contains ( const TQString & str, bool cs = TRUE ) const
      • 
+
    • int contains ( const TQRegExp & rx ) const
      • 
+
    • enum SectionFlags { SectionDefault = 0x00, SectionSkipEmpty = 0x01, SectionIncludeLeadingSep = 0x02, SectionIncludeTrailingSep = 0x04, SectionCaseInsensitiveSeps = 0x08 }
      • 
+
    • TQString section ( TQChar sep, int start, int end = 0xffffffff, int flags = SectionDefault ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString section ( char sep, int start, int end = 0xffffffff, int flags = SectionDefault ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString section ( const char * sep, int start, int end = 0xffffffff, int flags = SectionDefault ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString section ( const TQString & sep, int start, int end = 0xffffffff, int flags = SectionDefault ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString section ( const TQRegExp & reg, int start, int end = 0xffffffff, int flags = SectionDefault ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString left ( uint len ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString right ( uint len ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString mid ( uint index, uint len = 0xffffffff ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString leftJustify ( uint width, TQChar fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString rightJustify ( uint width, TQChar fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString lower () const
      • 
+
    • TQString upper () const
      • 
+
    • TQString stripWhiteSpace () const
      • 
+
    • TQString simplifyWhiteSpace () const
      • 
+
    • TQString & insert ( uint index, const TQString & s )
      • 
+
    • TQString & insert ( uint index, const TQByteArray & s )
      • 
+
    • TQString & insert ( uint index, const char * s )
      • 
+
    • TQString & insert ( uint index, const TQChar * s, uint len )
      • 
+
    • TQString & insert ( uint index, TQChar c )
      • 
+
    • TQString & insert ( uint index, char c )
      • 
+
    • TQString & append ( char ch )
      • 
+
    • TQString & append ( TQChar ch )
      • 
+
    • TQString & append ( const TQString & str )
      • 
+
    • TQString & append ( const TQByteArray & str )
      • 
+
    • TQString & append ( const char * str )
      • 
+
    • TQString & append ( const std::string & str )
      • 
+
    • TQString & prepend ( char ch )
      • 
+
    • TQString & prepend ( TQChar ch )
      • 
+
    • TQString & prepend ( const TQString & s )
      • 
+
    • TQString & prepend ( const TQByteArray & s )
      • 
+
    • TQString & prepend ( const char * s )
      • 
+
    • TQString & prepend ( const std::string & s )
      • 
+
    • TQString & remove ( uint index, uint len )
      • 
+
    • TQString & remove ( const TQString & str, bool cs = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • TQString & remove ( TQChar c )
      • 
+
    • TQString & remove ( char c )
      • 
+
    • TQString & remove ( const char * str )
      • 
+
    • TQString & remove ( const TQRegExp & rx )
      • 
+
    • TQString & replace ( uint index, uint len, const TQString & s )
      • 
+
    • TQString & replace ( uint index, uint len, const TQChar * s, uint slen )
      • 
+
    • TQString & replace ( uint index, uint len, TQChar c )
      • 
+
    • TQString & replace ( uint index, uint len, char c )
      • 
+
    • TQString & replace ( TQChar c, const TQString & after, bool cs = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • TQString & replace ( char c, const TQString & after, bool cs = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • TQString & replace ( const TQString & before, const TQString & after, bool cs = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • TQString & replace ( const TQRegExp & rx, const TQString & after )
      • 
+
    • TQString & replace ( TQChar c1, TQChar c2 )
      • 
+
    • short toShort ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
      • 
+
    • ushort toUShort ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
      • 
+
    • int toInt ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
      • 
+
    • uint toUInt ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
      • 
+
    • long toLong ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
      • 
+
    • ulong toULong ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
      • 
+
    • Q_LLONG toLongLong ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
      • 
+
    • Q_ULLONG toULongLong ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
      • 
+
    • float toFloat ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • double toDouble ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString & setNum ( short n, int base = 10 )
      • 
+
    • TQString & setNum ( ushort n, int base = 10 )
      • 
+
    • TQString & setNum ( int n, int base = 10 )
      • 
+
    • TQString & setNum ( uint n, int base = 10 )
      • 
+
    • TQString & setNum ( long n, int base = 10 )
      • 
+
    • TQString & setNum ( ulong n, int base = 10 )
      • 
+
    • TQString & setNum ( Q_LLONG n, int base = 10 )
      • 
+
    • TQString & setNum ( Q_ULLONG n, int base = 10 )
      • 
+
    • TQString & setNum ( float n, char f = 'g', int prec = 6 )
      • 
+
    • TQString & setNum ( double n, char f = 'g', int prec = 6 )
      • 
+
    • void setExpand ( uint index, TQChar c )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • TQString & operator+= ( const TQString & str )
      • 
+
    • TQString & operator+= ( const TQByteArray & str )
      • 
+
    • TQString & operator+= ( const char * str )
      • 
+
    • TQString & operator+= ( const std::string & str )
      • 
+
    • TQString & operator+= ( TQChar c )
      • 
+
    • TQString & operator+= ( char c )
      • 
+
    • TQChar at ( uint i ) const
      • 
+
    • TQChar operator[] ( int i ) const
      • 
+
    • TQCharRef at ( uint i )
      • 
+
    • TQCharRef operator[] ( int i )
      • 
+
    • TQChar constref ( uint i ) const
      • 
+
    • TQChar & ref ( uint i )
      • 
+
    • const TQChar * unicode () const
      • 
+
    • const char * ascii () const
      • 
+
    • const char * latin1 () const
      • 
+
    • TQCString utf8 () const
      • 
+
    • TQCString local8Bit () const
      • 
+
    • bool operator! () const
      • 
+
    • operator const char * () const
      • 
+
    • operator std::string () const
      • 
+
    • const unsigned short * ucs2 () const
      • 
+
    • TQString & setUnicode ( const TQChar * unicode, uint len )
      • 
+
    • TQString & setUnicodeCodes ( const ushort * unicode_as_ushorts, uint len )
      • 
+
    • TQString & setAscii ( const char * str, int len = -1 )
      • 
+
    • TQString & setLatin1 ( const char * str, int len = -1 )
      • 
+
    • int compare ( const TQString & s ) const
      • 
+
    • int localeAwareCompare ( const TQString & s ) const
      • 
+
    • void compose ()
      • 
+
    • const char * data () const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • bool startsWith ( const TQString & s, bool cs = TRUE ) const
      • 
+
    • bool endsWith ( const TQString & s, bool cs = TRUE ) const
      • 
+
    • void setLength ( uint newLen )
      • 
+
    • uint capacity () const
      • 
+
    • void reserve ( uint minCapacity )
      • 
+
    • void squeeze ()
      • 
+
    
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQString number ( long n, int base = 10 )
      • 
+
    • TQString number ( ulong n, int base = 10 )
      • 
+
    • TQString number ( Q_LLONG n, int base = 10 )
      • 
+
    • TQString number ( Q_ULLONG n, int base = 10 )
      • 
+
    • TQString number ( int n, int base = 10 )
      • 
+
    • TQString number ( uint n, int base = 10 )
      • 
+
    • TQString number ( double n, char f = 'g', int prec = 6 )
      • 
+
    • TQString fromAscii ( const char * ascii, int len = -1 )
      • 
+
    • TQString fromLatin1 ( const char * chars, int len = -1 )
      • 
+
    • TQString fromUtf8 ( const char * utf8, int len = -1 )
      • 
+
    • TQString fromLocal8Bit ( const char * local8Bit, int len = -1 )
      • 
+
    • TQString fromUcs2 ( const unsigned short * str )
      • 
+
    • int compare ( const TQString & s1, const TQString & s2 )
      • 
+
    • int localeAwareCompare ( const TQString & s1, const TQString & s2 )
      • 
+
    
+
    Related Functions
    
+
      
+
    • bool operator== ( const TQString & s1, const TQString & s2 )
      • 
+
    • bool operator== ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )
      • 
+
    • bool operator== ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )
      • 
+
    • bool operator!= ( const TQString & s1, const TQString & s2 )
      • 
+
    • bool operator!= ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )
      • 
+
    • bool operator!= ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )
      • 
+
    • bool operator< ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )
      • 
+
    • bool operator< ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )
      • 
+
    • bool operator<= ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )
      • 
+
    • bool operator<= ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )
      • 
+
    • bool operator> ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )
      • 
+
    • bool operator> ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )
      • 
+
    • bool operator>= ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )
      • 
+
    • bool operator>= ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )
      • 
+
    • const TQString operator+ ( const TQString & s1, const TQString & s2 )
      • 
+
    • const TQString operator+ ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )
      • 
+
    • const TQString operator+ ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )
      • 
+
    • const TQString operator+ ( const TQString & s, char c )
      • 
+
    • const TQString operator+ ( char c, const TQString & s )
      • 
+
    • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQString & str )
      • 
+
    • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQString & str )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
+
     The TQString class provides an abstraction of Unicode text
+and the classic C '\0'-terminated char array.
+
     
+
+
+
+
     TQString uses implicit sharing, which
+makes it very efficient and easy to use.
+
     In all of the TQString methods that take const char *
+parameters, the const char * is interpreted as a classic
+C-style '\0'-terminated ASCII string. It is legal for the const char * parameter to be 0. If the const char * is not
+'\0'-terminated, the results are undefined. Functions that copy
+classic C strings into a TQString will not copy the terminating
+'\0' character. The TQChar array of the TQString (as returned by
+unicode()) is generally not terminated by a '\0'. If you need to
+pass a TQString to a function that requires a C '\0'-terminated
+string use latin1().
+
     A TQString that has not been assigned to anything is null, i.e.
+both the length and data pointer is 0. A TQString that references
+the empty string ("", a single '\0' char) is empty. Both null
+and empty TQStrings are legal parameters to the methods. Assigning
+(const char *) 0 to TQString gives a null TQString. For
+convenience, TQString::null is a null TQString. When sorting,
+empty strings come first, followed by non-empty strings, followed
+by null strings. We recommend using if ( !str.isNull() ) to
+check for a non-null string rather than if ( !str ); see operator!() for an explanation.
+
     Note that if you find that you are mixing usage of TQCString,
+TQString, and TQByteArray, this causes lots of unnecessary
+copying and might indicate that the true nature of the data you
+are dealing with is uncertain. If the data is '\0'-terminated 8-bit
+data, use TQCString; if it is unterminated (i.e. contains '\0's)
+8-bit data, use TQByteArray; if it is text, use TQString.
+
     Lists of strings are handled by the TQStringList class. You can
+split a string into a list of strings using TQStringList::split(),
+and join a list of strings into a single string with an optional
+separator using TQStringList::join(). You can obtain a list of
+strings from a string list that contain a particular substring or
+that match a particular regex using
+TQStringList::grep().
+
     Note for C programmers
+
     Due to C++'s type system and the fact that TQString is implicitly shared, TQStrings can be treated like ints or other simple base
+types. For example:
+
     
    +    TQString boolToString( bool b )
+    {
+        TQString result;
+        if ( b )
+            result = "True";
+        else
+            result = "False";
+        return result;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     The variable, result, is an auto variable allocated on the stack.
+When return is called, because we're returning by value, The copy
+constructor is called and a copy of the string is returned. (No
+actual copying takes place thanks to the implicit sharing, see
+below.)
+
     Throughout TQt's source code you will encounter TQString usages like
+this:
+
    +    TQString func( const TQString& input )
+    {
+        TQString output = input;
+        // process output
+        return output;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     The 'copying' of input to output is almost as fast as copying a
+pointer because behind the scenes copying is achieved by
+incrementing a reference count. TQString (like all TQt's implicitly
+shared classes) operates on a copy-on-write basis, only copying if
+an instance is actually changed.
+
     If you wish to create a deep copy of a TQString without losing any
+Unicode information then you should use TQDeepCopy.
+
     
    See also TQChar, TQCString, TQByteArray, TQConstString, Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes, Text Related Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQString::SectionFlags
    
+
+
      
+
    • TQString::SectionDefault - Empty fields are counted, leading and
+trailing separators are not included, and the separator is
+compared case sensitively.
+
    • TQString::SectionSkipEmpty - Treat empty fields as if they don't exist,
+i.e. they are not considered as far as start and end are
+concerned.
+
    • TQString::SectionIncludeLeadingSep - Include the leading separator (if
+any) in the result string.
+
    • TQString::SectionIncludeTrailingSep - Include the trailing separator
+(if any) in the result string.
+
    • TQString::SectionCaseInsensitiveSeps - Compare the separator
+case-insensitively.
+
     Any of the last four values can be OR-ed together to form a flag.
+
     
    See also section().
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQString::TQString ()
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a null string, i.e. both the length and data pointer
+are 0.
+
     
    See also isNull().
+
+
    TQString::TQString ( TQChar ch )
+
    
+Constructs a string of length one, containing the character ch.
+
+
    TQString::TQString ( const TQString & s )
+
    
+Constructs an implicitly shared copy of s. This is very fast
+since it only involves incrementing a reference count.
+
+
    TQString::TQString ( const TQByteArray & ba )
+
    
+Constructs a string that is a deep copy of ba interpreted as a
+classic C string.
+
+
    TQString::TQString ( const TQChar * unicode, uint length )
+
    
+Constructs a string that is a deep copy of the first length
+characters in the TQChar array.
+
     If unicode and length are 0, then a null string is created.
+
     If only unicode is 0, the string is empty but has length
+characters of space preallocated: TQString expands automatically
+anyway, but this may speed up some cases a little. We recommend
+using the plain constructor and setLength() for this purpose since
+it will result in more readable code.
+
     
    See also isNull() and setLength().
+
+
    TQString::TQString ( const char * str )
+
    
+Constructs a string that is a deep copy of str, interpreted as
+a classic C string. The encoding is assumed to be Latin-1, unless
+you change it using TQTextCodec::setCodecForCStrings().
+
     If str is 0, then a null string is created.
+
     This is a cast constructor, but it is perfectly safe: converting a
+Latin-1 const char * to TQString preserves all the information. You
+can disable this constructor by defining QT_NO_CAST_ASCII when
+you compile your applications. You can also make TQString objects
+by using setLatin1(), fromLatin1(), fromLocal8Bit(), and
+fromUtf8(). Or whatever encoding is appropriate for the 8-bit data
+you have.
+
     
    See also isNull() and fromAscii().
+
+
    TQString::TQString ( const std::string & str )
+
    
+Constructs a string that is a deep copy of str.
+
     This is the same as fromAscii(str).
+
+
    TQString::~TQString ()
+
    
+
+
     Destroys the string and frees the string's data if this is the
+last reference to the string.
+
+
    TQString & TQString::append ( const TQString & str )
+
    
+
+
     Appends str to the string and returns a reference to the
+result.
+
     
    +        string = "Test";
+        string.append( "ing" );        // string == "Testing"
+    
    
+ 
+
     Equivalent to operator+=().
+
+
    Example: dirview/dirview.cpp.
+
    TQString & TQString::append ( char ch )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Appends character ch to the string and returns a reference to
+the result.
+
     Equivalent to operator+=().
+
+
    TQString & TQString::append ( TQChar ch )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Appends character ch to the string and returns a reference to
+the result.
+
     Equivalent to operator+=().
+
+
    TQString & TQString::append ( const TQByteArray & str )
+
     
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Appends str to the string and returns a reference to the result.
+
     Equivalent to operator+=().
+
+
    TQString & TQString::append ( const char * str )
+
     
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Appends str to the string and returns a reference to the result.
+
     Equivalent to operator+=().
+
+
    TQString & TQString::append ( const std::string & str )
+
     
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Appends str to the string and returns a reference to the result.
+
     Equivalent to operator+=().
+
+
    TQString TQString::arg ( const TQString & a, int fieldWidth = 0 ) const
+
    
+This function will return a string that replaces the lowest
+numbered occurrence of %1, %2, ..., %9 with a.
+
     The fieldWidth value specifies the minimum amount of space that
+a is padded to. A positive value will produce right-aligned
+text, whereas a negative value will produce left-aligned text.
+
     The following example shows how we could create a 'status' string
+when processing a list of files:
+
    +    TQString status = TQString( "Processing file %1 of %2: %3" )
+                        .arg( i )         // current file's number
+                        .arg( total )     // number of files to process
+                        .arg( fileName ); // current file's name
+    
    
+ 
+
     It is generally fine to use filenames and numbers as we have done
+in the example above. But note that using arg() to construct
+natural language sentences does not usually translate well into
+other languages because sentence structure and word order often
+differ between languages.
+
     If there is no place marker (%1, %2, etc.), a warning
+message (qWarning()) is output and the result is undefined.
+
     Warning: If any placeholder occurs more than once, the result is undefined.
+
     
+
    TQString TQString::arg ( long a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     The fieldWidth value specifies the minimum amount of space that
+a is padded to. A positive value will produce a right-aligned
+number, whereas a negative value will produce a left-aligned
+number.
+
     a is expressed in base base, which is 10 by default and must
+be between 2 and 36.
+
     The '%' can be followed by an 'L', in which case the sequence is
+replaced with a localized representation of a. The conversion
+uses the default locale. The default locale is determined from the
+system's locale settings at application startup. It can be changed
+using TQLocale::setDefault(). The 'L' flag is ignored if base is
+not 10.
+
     
    +        TQString str;
+        str = TQString( "Decimal 63 is %1 in hexadecimal" )
+                .arg( 63, 0, 16 );
+        // str == "Decimal 63 is 3f in hexadecimal"
+
+        TQLocale::setDefault(TQLocale::English, TQLocale::UnitedStates);
+        str = TQString( "%1 %L2 %L3" )
+                .arg( 12345 )
+                .arg( 12345 )
+                .arg( 12345, 0, 16 );
+        // str == "12345 12,345 3039"
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    TQString TQString::arg ( ulong a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     a is expressed in base base, which is 10 by default and must
+be between 2 and 36. If base is 10, the '%L' syntax can be used
+to produce localized strings.
+
+
    TQString TQString::arg ( Q_LLONG a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     a is expressed in base base, which is 10 by default and must
+be between 2 and 36. If base is 10, the '%L' syntax can be used
+to produce localized strings.
+
+
    TQString TQString::arg ( Q_ULLONG a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     a is expressed in base base, which is 10 by default and must
+be between 2 and 36. If base is 10, the '%L' syntax can be used
+to produce localized strings.
+
+
    TQString TQString::arg ( int a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     a is expressed in base base, which is 10 by default and must
+be between 2 and 36. If base is 10, the '%L' syntax can be used
+to produce localized strings.
+
+
    TQString TQString::arg ( uint a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     a is expressed in base base, which is 10 by default and must
+be between 2 and 36. If base is 10, the '%L' syntax can be used
+to produce localized strings.
+
+
    TQString TQString::arg ( short a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     a is expressed in base base, which is 10 by default and must
+be between 2 and 36. If base is 10, the '%L' syntax can be used
+to produce localized strings.
+
+
    TQString TQString::arg ( ushort a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     a is expressed in base base, which is 10 by default and must
+be between 2 and 36. If base is 10, the '%L' syntax can be used
+to produce localized strings.
+
+
    TQString TQString::arg ( double a, int fieldWidth = 0, char fmt = 'g', int prec = -1 ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Argument a is formatted according to the fmt format specified,
+which is 'g' by default and can be any of the following:
+
     
    
+
     Format Meaning
+
     e format as [-]9.9e[+|-]999
+
     E format as [-]9.9E[+|-]999
+
     f format as [-]9.9
+
     g use e or f format, whichever is the most concise
+
     G use E or f format, whichever is the most concise
+
    
+
     With 'e', 'E', and 'f', prec is the number of digits after the
+decimal point. With 'g' and 'G', prec is the maximum number of
+significant digits (trailing zeroes are omitted).
+
     
    +        double d = 12.34;
+        TQString ds = TQString( "'E' format, precision 3, gives %1" )
+                        .arg( d, 0, 'E', 3 );
+        // ds == "'E' format, precision 3, gives 1.234E+01"
+    
    
+ 
+
     The '%L' syntax can be used to produce localized strings.
+
+
    TQString TQString::arg ( char a, int fieldWidth = 0 ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     a is assumed to be in the Latin-1 character set.
+
+
    TQString TQString::arg ( TQChar a, int fieldWidth = 0 ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
    TQString TQString::arg ( const TQString & a1, const TQString & a2 ) const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This is the same as str.arg(a1).arg(a2), except that
+the strings are replaced in one pass. This can make a difference
+if a1 contains e.g. %1:
+
     
    +    TQString str( "%1 %2" );
+    str.arg( "Hello", "world" );        // returns "Hello world"
+    str.arg( "Hello" ).arg( "world" );  // returns "Hello world"
+
+    str.arg( "(%1)", "Hello" );           // returns "(%1) Hello"
+    str.arg( "(%1)" ).arg( "Hello" );     // returns "(Hello) %2"
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    TQString TQString::arg ( const TQString & a1, const TQString & a2, const TQString & a3 ) const
+
    
+
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This is the same as calling str.arg(a1).arg(a2).arg(a3),
+except that the strings are replaced in one pass.
+
+
    TQString TQString::arg ( const TQString & a1, const TQString & a2, const TQString & a3, const TQString & a4 ) const
+
    
+
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This is the same as calling
+str.arg(a1).arg(a2).arg(a3).arg(a4),
+except that the strings are replaced in one pass.
+
+
    const char * TQString::ascii () const
+
    
+Returns an 8-bit ASCII representation of the string.
+
     If a codec has been set using TQTextCodec::codecForCStrings(),
+it is used to convert Unicode to 8-bit char. Otherwise, this function
+does the same as latin1().
+
     
    See also fromAscii(), latin1(), utf8(), and local8Bit().
+
+
    Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    TQChar TQString::at ( uint i ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the character at index i, or 0 if i is beyond the
+length of the string.
+
     
    +        const TQString string( "abcdefgh" );
+        TQChar ch = string.at( 4 );
+        // ch == 'e'
+    
    
+ 
+
     If the TQString is not const (i.e. const TQString) or const& (i.e.
+const TQString &), then the non-const overload of at() will be used
+instead.
+
+
    TQCharRef TQString::at ( uint i )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     The function returns a reference to the character at index i.
+The resulting reference can then be assigned to, or used
+immediately, but it will become invalid once further modifications
+are made to the original string.
+
     If i is beyond the length of the string then the string is
+expanded with TQChar::null.
+
+
    uint TQString::capacity () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of characters this string can hold
+in the allocated memory.
+
     
    See also reserve() and squeeze().
+
+
    int TQString::compare ( const TQString & s1, const TQString & s2 ) [static]
+
    
+
+
     Lexically compares s1 with s2 and returns an integer less
+than, equal to, or greater than zero if s1 is less than, equal
+to, or greater than s2.
+
     The comparison is based exclusively on the numeric Unicode values
+of the characters and is very fast, but is not what a human would
+expect. Consider sorting user-interface strings with
+TQString::localeAwareCompare().
+
     
    +        int a = TQString::compare( "def", "abc" );   // a > 0
+        int b = TQString::compare( "abc", "def" );   // b < 0
+        int c = TQString::compare( "abc", "abc" );   // c == 0
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    int TQString::compare ( const TQString & s ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Lexically compares this string with s and returns an integer
+less than, equal to, or greater than zero if it is less than, equal
+to, or greater than s.
+
+
    void TQString::compose ()
+
    
+Warning: This function is not supported in TQt 3.x. It is provided
+for experimental and illustrative purposes only. It is mainly of
+interest to those experimenting with Arabic and other
+composition-rich texts.
+
     Applies possible ligatures to a TQString. Useful when
+composition-rich text requires rendering with glyph-poor fonts,
+but it also makes compositions such as TQChar(0x0041) ('A') and
+TQChar(0x0308) (Unicode accent diaresis), giving TQChar(0x00c4)
+(German A Umlaut).
+
+
    TQChar TQString::constref ( uint i ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the TQChar at index i by value.
+
     Equivalent to at(i).
+
     
    See also ref().
+
+
    int TQString::contains ( TQChar c, bool cs = TRUE ) const
+
    
+Returns the number of times the character c occurs in the
+string.
+
     If cs is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive;
+otherwise the search is case insensitive.
+
     
    +    TQString string( "Trolltech and TQt" );
+    int n = string.contains( 't', FALSE );
+    // n == 3
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    Examples: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp and mdi/application.cpp.
+
    int TQString::contains ( char c, bool cs = TRUE ) const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
    int TQString::contains ( const char * str, bool cs = TRUE ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the number of times the string str occurs in the string.
+
     If cs is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive;
+otherwise the search is case insensitive.
+
+
    int TQString::contains ( const TQString & str, bool cs = TRUE ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the number of times str occurs in the string.
+
     If cs is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive;
+otherwise the search is case insensitive.
+
     This function counts overlapping strings, so in the example below,
+there are two instances of "ana" in "bananas".
+
     
    +    TQString str( "bananas" );
+    int i = str.contains( "ana" );  // i == 2
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also findRev().
+
+
    int TQString::contains ( const TQRegExp & rx ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the number of times the regexp, rx, matches in the
+string.
+
     This function counts overlapping matches, so in the example below,
+there are four instances of "ana" or "ama".
+
     
    +        TQString str = "banana and panama";
+        TQRegExp rxp = TQRegExp( "a[nm]a", TRUE, FALSE );
+        int i = str.contains( rxp );    // i == 4
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also find() and findRev().
+
+
    TQString TQString::copy () const
+
    
+
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     In TQt 2.0 and later, all calls to this function are needless. Just
+remove them.
+
+
    const char * TQString::data () const
+
    
+
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Returns a pointer to a '\0'-terminated classic C string.
+
     In TQt 1.x, this returned a char* allowing direct manipulation of the
+string as a sequence of bytes. In TQt 2.x where TQString is a Unicode
+string, char* conversion constructs a temporary string, and hence
+direct character operations are meaningless.
+
+
    bool TQString::endsWith ( const TQString & s, bool cs = TRUE ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the string ends with s; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     If cs is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive;
+otherwise the search is case insensitive.
+
     
    +        TQString str( "Bananas" );
+        str.endsWith( "anas" );         // returns TRUE
+        str.endsWith( "pple" );         // returns FALSE
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also startsWith().
+
+
    Example: chart/main.cpp.
+
    TQString & TQString::fill ( TQChar c, int len = -1 )
+
    
+Fills the string with len characters of value c, and returns
+a reference to the string.
+
     If len is negative (the default), the current string length is
+used.
+
     
    +        TQString str;
+        str.fill( 'g', 5 );      // string == "ggggg"
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    int TQString::find ( const TQRegExp & rx, int index = 0 ) const
+
    
+Finds the first match of the regular expression rx, starting
+from position index. If index is -1, the search starts at
+the last character; if -2, at the next to last character and so
+on. (See findRev() for searching backwards.)
+
     Returns the position of the first match of rx or -1 if no match
+was found.
+
     
    +        TQString string( "bananas" );
+        int i = string.find( TQRegExp("an"), 0 );    // i == 1
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also findRev(), replace(), and contains().
+
+
    Example: network/mail/smtp.cpp.
+
    int TQString::find ( TQChar c, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Finds the first occurrence of the character c, starting at
+position index. If index is -1, the search starts at the
+last character; if -2, at the next to last character and so on.
+(See findRev() for searching backwards.)
+
     If cs is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive;
+otherwise the search is case insensitive.
+
     Returns the position of c or -1 if c could not be found.
+
+
    int TQString::find ( char c, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Find character c starting from position index.
+
     If cs is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive;
+otherwise the search is case insensitive.
+
+
    int TQString::find ( const TQString & str, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Finds the first occurrence of the string str, starting at
+position index. If index is -1, the search starts at the
+last character, if it is -2, at the next to last character and so
+on. (See findRev() for searching backwards.)
+
     If cs is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive;
+otherwise the search is case insensitive.
+
     Returns the position of str or -1 if str could not be found.
+
+
    int TQString::find ( const char * str, int index = 0 ) const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Equivalent to find(TQString(str), index).
+
+
    int TQString::findRev ( const char * str, int index = -1 ) const
+
    
+
+
     Equivalent to findRev(TQString(str), index).
+
+
    int TQString::findRev ( TQChar c, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Finds the first occurrence of the character c, starting at
+position index and searching backwards. If the index is -1, the
+search starts at the last character, if it is -2, at the next to
+last character and so on.
+
     Returns the position of c or -1 if c could not be found.
+
     If cs is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive;
+otherwise the search is case insensitive.
+
     
    +        TQString string( "bananas" );
+        int i = string.findRev( 'a' );      // i == 5
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    int TQString::findRev ( char c, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Find character c starting from position index and working
+backwards.
+
     If cs is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive;
+otherwise the search is case insensitive.
+
+
    int TQString::findRev ( const TQString & str, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Finds the first occurrence of the string str, starting at
+position index and searching backwards. If the index is -1, the
+search starts at the last character, if it is -2, at the next to
+last character and so on.
+
     Returns the position of str or -1 if str could not be found.
+
     If cs is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive;
+otherwise the search is case insensitive.
+
     
    +    TQString string("bananas");
+    int i = string.findRev( "ana" );      // i == 3
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    int TQString::findRev ( const TQRegExp & rx, int index = -1 ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Finds the first match of the regexp rx, starting at position index and searching backwards. If the index is -1, the search
+starts at the last character, if it is -2, at the next to last
+character and so on. (See findRev() for searching backwards.)
+
     Returns the position of the match or -1 if no match was found.
+
     
    +        TQString string( "bananas" );
+        int i = string.findRev( TQRegExp("an") );      // i == 3
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also find().
+
+
    TQString TQString::fromAscii ( const char * ascii, int len = -1 ) [static]
+
    
+Returns the Unicode string decoded from the first len
+bytes of ascii, ignoring the rest of ascii. If len
+is -1 then the length of ascii is used. If len is bigger
+than the length of ascii then it will use the length of ascii.
+
     If a codec has been set using TQTextCodec::codecForCStrings(),
+it is used to convert the string from 8-bit characters to Unicode.
+Otherwise, this function does the same as fromLatin1().
+
     This is the same as the TQString(const char*) constructor, but you
+can make that constructor invisible if you compile with the define
+QT_NO_CAST_ASCII, in which case you can explicitly create a
+TQString from 8-bit ASCII text using this function.
+
     
    +        TQString str = TQString::fromAscii( "123456789", 5 );
+        // str == "12345"
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    TQString TQString::fromLatin1 ( const char * chars, int len = -1 ) [static]
+
    
+Returns the Unicode string decoded from the first len
+bytes of chars, ignoring the rest of chars. If len
+is -1 then the length of chars is used. If len is bigger
+than the length of chars then it will use the length of chars.
+
     
    See also fromAscii().
+
+
    Examples: listbox/listbox.cpp and network/mail/smtp.cpp.
+
    TQString TQString::fromLocal8Bit ( const char * local8Bit, int len = -1 ) [static]
+
    
+Returns the Unicode string decoded from the first len
+bytes of local8Bit, ignoring the rest of local8Bit. If
+len is -1 then the length of local8Bit is used. If len is
+bigger than the length of local8Bit then it will use the length
+of local8Bit.
+
     
    +        TQString str = TQString::fromLocal8Bit( "123456789", 5 );
+        // str == "12345"
+    
    
+ 
+
     local8Bit is assumed to be encoded in a locale-specific format.
+
     See TQTextCodec for more diverse coding/decoding of Unicode strings.
+
+
    TQString TQString::fromUcs2 ( const unsigned short * str ) [static]
+
    
+Constructs a string that is a deep copy of str, interpreted as a
+UCS2 encoded, zero terminated, Unicode string.
+
     If str is 0, then a null string is created.
+
     
    See also isNull().
+
+
    TQString TQString::fromUtf8 ( const char * utf8, int len = -1 ) [static]
+
    
+Returns the Unicode string decoded from the first len
+bytes of utf8, ignoring the rest of utf8. If len is
+-1 then the length of utf8 is used. If len is bigger than
+the length of utf8 then it will use the length of utf8.
+
     
    +        TQString str = TQString::fromUtf8( "123456789", 5 );
+        // str == "12345"
+    
    
+ 
+
     See TQTextCodec for more diverse coding/decoding of Unicode strings.
+
+
    Example: fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp.
+
    TQString & TQString::insert ( uint index, const TQString & s )
+
    
+Inserts s into the string at position index.
+
     If index is beyond the end of the string, the string is
+extended with spaces to length index and s is then appended
+and returns a reference to the string.
+
     
    +        TQString string( "I like fish" );
+        str = string.insert( 2, "don't " );
+        // str == "I don't like fish"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also remove() and replace().
+
+
    Examples: themes/themes.cpp and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    TQString & TQString::insert ( uint index, const TQByteArray & s )
+
     
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts s into the string at position index and returns
+a reference to the string.
+
+
    TQString & TQString::insert ( uint index, const char * s )
+
     
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts s into the string at position index and returns
+a reference to the string.
+
+
    TQString & TQString::insert ( uint index, const TQChar * s, uint len )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts the first len characters in s into the string at
+position index and returns a reference to the string.
+
+
    TQString & TQString::insert ( uint index, TQChar c )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Insert c into the string at position index and returns a
+reference to the string.
+
     If index is beyond the end of the string, the string is
+extended with spaces (ASCII 32) to length index and c is
+then appended.
+
+
    TQString & TQString::insert ( uint index, char c )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Insert character c at position index.
+
+
    bool TQString::isEmpty () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the string is empty, i.e. if length() == 0;
+otherwise returns FALSE. Null strings are also empty.
+
     
    +        TQString a( "" );
+        a.isEmpty();        // TRUE
+        a.isNull();         // FALSE
+
+        TQString b;
+        b.isEmpty();        // TRUE
+        b.isNull();         // TRUE
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also isNull() and length().
+
+
    Examples: addressbook/mainwindow.cpp, chart/chartform.cpp, chart/chartform_canvas.cpp, network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
+
    bool TQString::isNull () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the string is null; otherwise returns FALSE. A
+null string is always empty.
+
     
    +        TQString a;          // a.unicode() == 0, a.length() == 0
+        a.isNull();         // TRUE, because a.unicode() == 0
+        a.isEmpty();        // TRUE, because a.length() == 0
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also isEmpty() and length().
+
+
    Examples: i18n/main.cpp, network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h, and qdir/qdir.cpp.
+
    const char * TQString::latin1 () const
+
    
+Returns a Latin-1 representation of the string. The
+returned value is undefined if the string contains non-Latin-1
+characters. If you want to convert strings into formats other than
+Unicode, see the TQTextCodec classes.
+
     This function is mainly useful for boot-strapping legacy code to
+use Unicode.
+
     The result remains valid so long as one unmodified copy of the
+source string exists.
+
     
    See also fromLatin1(), ascii(), utf8(), and local8Bit().
+
+
    Examples: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp and network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    TQString TQString::left ( uint len ) const
+
    
+Returns a substring that contains the len leftmost characters
+of the string.
+
     The whole string is returned if len exceeds the length of the
+string.
+
     
    +        TQString s = "Pineapple";
+        TQString t = s.left( 4 );    // t == "Pine"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also right(), mid(), and isEmpty().
+
+
    Example: themes/themes.cpp.
+
    TQString TQString::leftJustify ( uint width, TQChar fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const
+
    
+Returns a string of length width that contains this string
+padded by the fill character.
+
     If truncate is FALSE and the length of the string is more than
+width, then the returned string is a copy of the string.
+
     If truncate is TRUE and the length of the string is more than
+width, then any characters in a copy of the string after length
+width are removed, and the copy is returned.
+
     
    +        TQString s( "apple" );
+        TQString t = s.leftJustify( 8, '.' );        // t == "apple..."
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also rightJustify().
+
+
    uint TQString::length () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the length of the string.
+
     Null strings and empty strings have zero length.
+
     
    See also isNull() and isEmpty().
+
+
    Examples: dirview/dirview.cpp, fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp, network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp, rot13/rot13.cpp, and themes/themes.cpp.
+
    TQCString TQString::local8Bit () const
+
    
+Returns the string encoded in a locale-specific format. On X11,
+this is the TQTextCodec::codecForLocale(). On Windows, it is a
+system-defined encoding. On Mac OS X, this always uses UTF-8 as
+the encoding.
+
     See TQTextCodec for more diverse coding/decoding of Unicode
+strings.
+
     
    See also fromLocal8Bit(), ascii(), latin1(), and utf8().
+
+
    int TQString::localeAwareCompare ( const TQString & s1, const TQString & s2 ) [static]
+
    
+
+
     Compares s1 with s2 and returns an integer less than, equal
+to, or greater than zero if s1 is less than, equal to, or
+greater than s2.
+
     The comparison is performed in a locale- and also
+platform-dependent manner. Use this function to present sorted
+lists of strings to the user.
+
     
    See also TQString::compare() and TQTextCodec::locale().
+
+
    int TQString::localeAwareCompare ( const TQString & s ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Compares this string with s.
+
+
    TQString TQString::lower () const
+
    
+Returns a lowercase copy of the string.
+
     
    +        TQString string( "TROlltECH" );
+        str = string.lower();   // str == "trolltech"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also upper().
+
+
    Example: scribble/scribble.cpp.
+
    TQString TQString::mid ( uint index, uint len = 0xffffffff ) const
+
    
+Returns a string that contains the len characters of this
+string, starting at position index.
+
     Returns a null string if the string is empty or index is out of
+range. Returns the whole string from index if index + len
+exceeds the length of the string.
+
     
    +        TQString s( "Five pineapples" );
+        TQString t = s.mid( 5, 4 );                  // t == "pine"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also left() and right().
+
+
    Examples: network/mail/smtp.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, and themes/themes.cpp.
+
    TQString TQString::number ( long n, int base = 10 ) [static]
+
    
+A convenience function that returns a string equivalent of the
+number n to base base, which is 10 by default and must be
+between 2 and 36. The returned string is in "C" locale.
+
     
    +        long a = 63;
+        TQString str = TQString::number( a, 16 );             // str == "3f"
+        TQString str = TQString::number( a, 16 ).upper();     // str == "3F"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also setNum().
+
+
    Examples: application/application.cpp, chart/chartform.cpp, fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, regexptester/regexptester.cpp, and sql/overview/extract/main.cpp.
+
    TQString TQString::number ( ulong n, int base = 10 ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
    See also setNum().
+
+
    TQString TQString::number ( Q_LLONG n, int base = 10 ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
    See also setNum().
+
+
    TQString TQString::number ( Q_ULLONG n, int base = 10 ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
    See also setNum().
+
+
    TQString TQString::number ( int n, int base = 10 ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
    See also setNum().
+
+
    TQString TQString::number ( uint n, int base = 10 ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     A convenience factory function that returns a string
+representation of the number n to the base base, which is 10
+by default and must be between 2 and 36.
+
     
    See also setNum().
+
+
    TQString TQString::number ( double n, char f = 'g', int prec = 6 ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Argument n is formatted according to the f format specified,
+which is g by default, and can be any of the following:
+
     
    
+
     Format Meaning
+
     e format as [-]9.9e[+|-]999
+
     E format as [-]9.9E[+|-]999
+
     f format as [-]9.9
+
     g use e or f format, whichever is the most concise
+
     G use E or f format, whichever is the most concise
+
    
+
     With 'e', 'E', and 'f', prec is the number of digits after the
+decimal point. With 'g' and 'G', prec is the maximum number of
+significant digits (trailing zeroes are omitted).
+
     
    +    double d = 12.34;
+    TQString ds = TQString( "'E' format, precision 3, gives %1" )
+                    .arg( d, 0, 'E', 3 );
+    // ds == "1.234E+001"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also setNum().
+
+
    TQString::operator const char * () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns ascii(). Be sure to see the warnings documented in the
+ascii() function. Note that for new code which you wish to be
+strictly Unicode-clean, you can define the macro QT_NO_ASCII_CAST when compiling your code to hide this function so
+that automatic casts are not done. This has the added advantage
+that you catch the programming error described in operator!().
+
+
    TQString::operator std::string () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns ascii() as a std::string. 
+
     Warning: The function may cause an application to crash if a static C run-time is in use. 
+This can happen in Microsoft Visual C++ if TQt is configured as single-threaded. A safe   
+alternative is to call ascii() directly and construct a std::string manually.    
+
+
    bool TQString::operator! () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if this is a null string; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    +        TQString name = getName();
+        if ( !name )
+            name = "Rodney";
+    
    
+ 
+
     Note that if you say
+
     
    +        TQString name = getName();
+        if ( name )
+            doSomethingWith(name);
+    
    
+ 
+
     It will call "operator const char*()", which is inefficent; you
+may wish to define the macro QT_NO_ASCII_CAST when writing code
+which you wish to remain Unicode-clean.
+
     When you want the above semantics, use:
+
     
    +        TQString name = getName();
+        if ( !name.isNull() )
+            doSomethingWith(name);
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also isEmpty().
+
+
    TQString & TQString::operator+= ( const TQString & str )
+
    
+Appends str to the string and returns a reference to the string.
+
+
    TQString & TQString::operator+= ( const TQByteArray & str )
+
    
+
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Appends str to the string and returns a reference to the string.
+
+
    TQString & TQString::operator+= ( const char * str )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Appends str to the string and returns a reference to the string.
+
+
    TQString & TQString::operator+= ( const std::string & str )
+
    
+
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Appends str to the string and returns a reference to the string.
+
+
    TQString & TQString::operator+= ( TQChar c )
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Appends c to the string and returns a reference to the string.
+
+
    TQString & TQString::operator+= ( char c )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Appends c to the string and returns a reference to the string.
+
+
    TQString & TQString::operator= ( TQChar c )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the string to contain just the single character c.
+
+
    TQString & TQString::operator= ( const TQString & s )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Assigns a shallow copy of s to this string and returns a
+reference to this string. This is very fast because the string
+isn't actually copied.
+
+
    TQString & TQString::operator= ( const char * str )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Assigns a deep copy of str, interpreted as a classic C string
+to this string and returns a reference to this string.
+
     If str is 0, then a null string is created.
+
     
    See also isNull().
+
+
    TQString & TQString::operator= ( const std::string & s )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Makes a deep copy of s and returns a reference to the deep
+copy.
+
+
    TQString & TQString::operator= ( const TQCString & cstr )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Assigns a deep copy of cstr, interpreted as a classic C
+string, to this string. Returns a reference to this string.
+
+
    TQString & TQString::operator= ( char c )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the string to contain just the single character c.
+
+
    TQChar TQString::operator[] ( int i ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the character at index i, or TQChar::null if i is
+beyond the length of the string.
+
     If the TQString is not const (i.e., const TQString) or const&
+(i.e., const TQString&), then the non-const overload of operator[]
+will be used instead.
+
+
    TQCharRef TQString::operator[] ( int i )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     The function returns a reference to the character at index i.
+The resulting reference can then be assigned to, or used
+immediately, but it will become invalid once further modifications
+are made to the original string.
+
     If i is beyond the length of the string then the string is
+expanded with TQChar::nulls, so that the TQCharRef references a
+valid (null) character in the string.
+
     The TQCharRef internal class can be used much like a constant
+TQChar, but if you assign to it, you change the original string
+(which will detach itself because of TQString's copy-on-write
+semantics). You will get compilation errors if you try to use the
+result as anything but a TQChar.
+
+
    TQString & TQString::prepend ( const TQString & s )
+
    
+
+
     Inserts s at the beginning of the string and returns a
+reference to the string.
+
     Equivalent to insert(0, s).
+
     
    +        TQString string = "42";
+        string.prepend( "The answer is " );
+        // string == "The answer is 42"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also insert().
+
+
    TQString & TQString::prepend ( char ch )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts ch at the beginning of the string and returns a
+reference to the string.
+
     Equivalent to insert(0, ch).
+
     
    See also insert().
+
+
    TQString & TQString::prepend ( TQChar ch )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts ch at the beginning of the string and returns a
+reference to the string.
+
     Equivalent to insert(0, ch).
+
     
    See also insert().
+
+
    TQString & TQString::prepend ( const TQByteArray & s )
+
     
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts s at the beginning of the string and returns a reference to the string.
+
     Equivalent to insert(0, s).
+
     
    See also insert().
+
+
    TQString & TQString::prepend ( const char * s )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts s at the beginning of the string and returns a reference to the string.
+
     Equivalent to insert(0, s).
+
     
    See also insert().
+
+
    TQString & TQString::prepend ( const std::string & s )
+
     
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts s at the beginning of the string and returns a reference to the string.
+
     Equivalent to insert(0, s).
+
     
    See also insert().
+
+
    TQChar & TQString::ref ( uint i )
+
    
+
+
     Returns the TQChar at index i by reference, expanding the string
+with TQChar::null if necessary. The resulting reference can be
+assigned to, or otherwise used immediately, but becomes invalid
+once furher modifications are made to the string.
+
     
    +        TQString string("ABCDEF");
+        TQChar ch = string.ref( 3 );         // ch == 'D'
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also constref().
+
+
    TQString & TQString::remove ( uint index, uint len )
+
    
+Removes len characters from the string starting at position index, and returns a reference to the string.
+
     If index is beyond the length of the string, nothing happens.
+If index is within the string, but index + len is beyond
+the end of the string, the string is truncated at position index.
+
     
    +        TQString string( "Montreal" );
+        string.remove( 1, 4 );      // string == "Meal"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also insert() and replace().
+
+
    TQString & TQString::remove ( const TQString & str, bool cs = TRUE )
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Removes every occurrence of str in the string. Returns a
+reference to the string.
+
     If cs is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive;
+otherwise the search is case insensitive.
+
     This is the same as replace(str, "", cs).
+
+
    TQString & TQString::remove ( TQChar c )
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Removes every occurrence of the character c in the string.
+Returns a reference to the string.
+
     This is the same as replace(c, "").
+
+
    TQString & TQString::remove ( char c )
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Removes every occurrence of the character c in the string.
+Returns a reference to the string.
+
     This is the same as replace(c, "").
+
+
    TQString & TQString::remove ( const char * str )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Removes every occurrence of str in the string. Returns a
+reference to the string.
+
+
    TQString & TQString::remove ( const TQRegExp & rx )
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Removes every occurrence of the regular expression rx in the
+string. Returns a reference to the string.
+
     This is the same as replace(rx, "").
+
+
    TQString & TQString::replace ( uint index, uint len, const TQString & s )
+
    
+Replaces len characters from the string with s, starting at
+position index, and returns a reference to the string.
+
     If index is beyond the length of the string, nothing is deleted
+and s is appended at the end of the string. If index is
+valid, but index + len is beyond the end of the string,
+the string is truncated at position index, then s is
+appended at the end.
+
     
    +        TQString string( "Say yes!" );
+        string = string.replace( 4, 3, "NO" );
+        // string == "Say NO!"
+    
    
+ 
+
     Warning: TQt 3.3.3 and earlier had different semantics for the
+case index >= length(), which contradicted the documentation.
+To avoid portability problems between TQt 3 versions and with TQt
+4, we recommend that you never call the function with index >=
+length().
+
     
    See also insert() and remove().
+
+
    Examples: listviews/listviews.cpp, network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, and regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
+
    TQString & TQString::replace ( uint index, uint len, const TQChar * s, uint slen )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Replaces len characters with slen characters of TQChar data
+from s, starting at position index, and returns a reference
+to the string.
+
     
    See also insert() and remove().
+
+
    TQString & TQString::replace ( uint index, uint len, TQChar c )
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This is the same as replace(index, len, TQString(c)).
+
+
    TQString & TQString::replace ( uint index, uint len, char c )
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     This is the same as replace(index, len, TQChar(c)).
+
+
    TQString & TQString::replace ( TQChar c, const TQString & after, bool cs = TRUE )
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Replaces every occurrence of the character c in the string
+with after. Returns a reference to the string.
+
     If cs is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive;
+otherwise the search is case insensitive.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQString s = "a,b,c";
+    s.replace( TQChar(','), " or " );
+    // s == "a or b or c"
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    TQString & TQString::replace ( char c, const TQString & after, bool cs = TRUE )
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Replaces every occurrence of the character c in the string
+with after. Returns a reference to the string.
+
     If cs is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive;
+otherwise the search is case insensitive.
+
+
    TQString & TQString::replace ( const TQString & before, const TQString & after, bool cs = TRUE )
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Replaces every occurrence of the string before in the string
+with the string after. Returns a reference to the string.
+
     If cs is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive;
+otherwise the search is case insensitive.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQString s = "Greek is Greek";
+    s.replace( "Greek", "English" );
+    // s == "English is English"
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    TQString & TQString::replace ( const TQRegExp & rx, const TQString & after )
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Replaces every occurrence of the regexp rx in the string with
+after. Returns a reference to the string. For example:
+
    +    TQString s = "banana";
+    s.replace( TQRegExp("an"), "" );
+    // s == "ba"
+  
    
+ 
+
     For regexps containing capturing
+  parentheses, occurrences of \1, \2, ...,
+in after are replaced with rx.cap(1), cap(2), ...
+
     
    +    TQString t = "A <i>bon mot</i>.";
+    t.replace( TQRegExp("<i>([^<]*)</i>"), "\\emph{\\1}" );
+    // t == "A \\emph{bon mot}."
+  
    
+ 
+
     
    See also find(), findRev(), and TQRegExp::cap().
+
+
    TQString & TQString::replace ( TQChar c1, TQChar c2 )
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Replaces every occurrence of c1 with the char c2. Returns a
+reference to the string.
+
+
    void TQString::reserve ( uint minCapacity )
+
    
+Ensures that at least minCapacity characters are allocated to
+the string.
+
     This function is useful for code that needs to build up a long
+string and wants to avoid repeated reallocation. In this example,
+we want to add to the string until some condition is true, and
+we're fairly sure that size is big enough:
+
    +        TQString result;
+        int len = 0;
+        result.reserve(maxLen);
+        while (...) {
+            result[len++] = ...         // fill part of the space
+        }
+        result.squeeze();
+    
    
+ 
+
     If maxLen is an underestimate, the worst that will happen is
+that the loop will slow down.
+
     If it is not possible to allocate enough memory, the string
+remains unchanged.
+
     
    See also capacity(), squeeze(), and setLength().
+
+
    TQString TQString::right ( uint len ) const
+
    
+Returns a string that contains the len rightmost characters of
+the string.
+
     If len is greater than the length of the string then the whole
+string is returned.
+
     
    +        TQString string( "Pineapple" );
+        TQString t = string.right( 5 );   // t == "apple"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also left(), mid(), and isEmpty().
+
+
    Example: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
+
    TQString TQString::rightJustify ( uint width, TQChar fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const
+
    
+Returns a string of length width that contains the fill
+character followed by the string.
+
     If truncate is FALSE and the length of the string is more than
+width, then the returned string is a copy of the string.
+
     If truncate is TRUE and the length of the string is more than
+width, then the resulting string is truncated at position width.
+
     
    +        TQString string( "apple" );
+        TQString t = string.rightJustify( 8, '.' );  // t == "...apple"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also leftJustify().
+
+
    TQString TQString::section ( TQChar sep, int start, int end = 0xffffffff, int flags = SectionDefault ) const
+
    
+
+
     This function returns a section of the string.
+
     This string is treated as a sequence of fields separated by the
+character, sep. The returned string consists of the fields from
+position start to position end inclusive. If end is not
+specified, all fields from position start to the end of the
+string are included. Fields are numbered 0, 1, 2, etc., counting
+from the left, and -1, -2, etc., counting from right to left.
+
     The flags argument can be used to affect some aspects of the
+function's behaviour, e.g. whether to be case sensitive, whether
+to skip empty fields and how to deal with leading and trailing
+separators; see SectionFlags.
+
     
    +    TQString csv( "forename,middlename,surname,phone" );
+    TQString s = csv.section( ',', 2, 2 );   // s == "surname"
+
+    TQString path( "/usr/local/bin/myapp" ); // First field is empty
+    TQString s = path.section( '/', 3, 4 );  // s == "bin/myapp"
+    TQString s = path.section( '/', 3, 3, SectionSkipEmpty ); // s == "myapp"
+    
    
+ 
+
     If start or end is negative, we count fields from the right
+of the string, the right-most field being -1, the one from
+right-most field being -2, and so on.
+
     
    +    TQString csv( "forename,middlename,surname,phone" );
+    TQString s = csv.section( ',', -3, -2 );  // s == "middlename,surname"
+
+    TQString path( "/usr/local/bin/myapp" ); // First field is empty
+    TQString s = path.section( '/', -1 ); // s == "myapp"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also TQStringList::split().
+
+
    Examples: chart/element.cpp and network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
+
    TQString TQString::section ( char sep, int start, int end = 0xffffffff, int flags = SectionDefault ) const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
    TQString TQString::section ( const char * sep, int start, int end = 0xffffffff, int flags = SectionDefault ) const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
    TQString TQString::section ( const TQString & sep, int start, int end = 0xffffffff, int flags = SectionDefault ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This function returns a section of the string.
+
     This string is treated as a sequence of fields separated by the
+string, sep. The returned string consists of the fields from
+position start to position end inclusive. If end is not
+specified, all fields from position start to the end of the
+string are included. Fields are numbered 0, 1, 2, etc., counting
+from the left, and -1, -2, etc., counting from right to left.
+
     The flags argument can be used to affect some aspects of the
+function's behaviour, e.g. whether to be case sensitive, whether
+to skip empty fields and how to deal with leading and trailing
+separators; see SectionFlags.
+
     
    +    TQString data( "forename**middlename**surname**phone" );
+    TQString s = data.section( "**", 2, 2 ); // s == "surname"
+    
    
+ 
+
     If start or end is negative, we count fields from the right
+of the string, the right-most field being -1, the one from
+right-most field being -2, and so on.
+
     
    +    TQString data( "forename**middlename**surname**phone" );
+    TQString s = data.section( "**", -3, -2 ); // s == "middlename**surname"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also TQStringList::split().
+
+
    TQString TQString::section ( const TQRegExp & reg, int start, int end = 0xffffffff, int flags = SectionDefault ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This function returns a section of the string.
+
     This string is treated as a sequence of fields separated by the
+regular expression, reg. The returned string consists of the
+fields from position start to position end inclusive. If end is not specified, all fields from position start to the end
+of the string are included. Fields are numbered 0, 1, 2, etc., counting
+from the left, and -1, -2, etc., counting from right to left.
+
     The flags argument can be used to affect some aspects of the
+function's behaviour, e.g. whether to be case sensitive, whether
+to skip empty fields and how to deal with leading and trailing
+separators; see SectionFlags.
+
     
    +    TQString line( "forename\tmiddlename  surname \t \t phone" );
+    TQRegExp sep( "\s+" );
+    TQString s = line.section( sep, 2, 2 ); // s == "surname"
+    
    
+ 
+
     If start or end is negative, we count fields from the right
+of the string, the right-most field being -1, the one from
+right-most field being -2, and so on.
+
     
    +    TQString line( "forename\tmiddlename  surname \t \t phone" );
+    TQRegExp sep( "\\s+" );
+    TQString s = line.section( sep, -3, -2 ); // s == "middlename  surname"
+    
    
+ 
+
     Warning: Using this TQRegExp version is much more expensive than
+the overloaded string and character versions.
+
     
    See also TQStringList::split() and simplifyWhiteSpace().
+
+
    TQString & TQString::setAscii ( const char * str, int len = -1 )
+
    
+Sets this string to str, interpreted as a classic 8-bit ASCII C
+string. If len is -1 (the default), then it is set to
+strlen(str).
+
     If str is 0 a null string is created. If str is "", an empty
+string is created.
+
     
    See also isNull() and isEmpty().
+
+
    void TQString::setExpand ( uint index, TQChar c )
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Sets the character at position index to c and expands the
+string if necessary, filling with spaces.
+
     This method is redundant in TQt 3.x, because operator[] will expand
+the string as necessary.
+
+
    TQString & TQString::setLatin1 ( const char * str, int len = -1 )
+
    
+Sets this string to str, interpreted as a classic Latin-1 C
+string. If len is -1 (the default), then it is set to
+strlen(str).
+
     If str is 0 a null string is created. If str is "", an empty
+string is created.
+
     
    See also isNull() and isEmpty().
+
+
    void TQString::setLength ( uint newLen )
+
    
+Ensures that at least newLen characters are allocated to the
+string, and sets the length of the string to newLen. Any new
+space allocated contains arbitrary data.
+
     
    See also reserve() and truncate().
+
+
    TQString & TQString::setNum ( Q_LLONG n, int base = 10 )
+
    
+Sets the string to the printed value of n in base base and
+returns a reference to the string. The returned string is in "C" locale.
+
     The base is 10 by default and must be between 2 and 36.
+
     
    +        TQString string;
+        string = string.setNum( 1234 );     // string == "1234"
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    TQString & TQString::setNum ( short n, int base = 10 )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the string to the printed value of n in base base and
+returns a reference to the string.
+
     The base is 10 by default and must be between 2 and 36.
+
+
    TQString & TQString::setNum ( ushort n, int base = 10 )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the string to the printed value of n in base base and
+returns a reference to the string.
+
     The base is 10 by default and must be between 2 and 36.
+
+
    TQString & TQString::setNum ( int n, int base = 10 )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the string to the printed value of n in base base and
+returns a reference to the string.
+
     The base is 10 by default and must be between 2 and 36.
+
+
    TQString & TQString::setNum ( uint n, int base = 10 )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the string to the printed value of n in base base and
+returns a reference to the string.
+
     The base is 10 by default and must be between 2 and 36.
+
+
    TQString & TQString::setNum ( long n, int base = 10 )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
    TQString & TQString::setNum ( ulong n, int base = 10 )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
    TQString & TQString::setNum ( Q_ULLONG n, int base = 10 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the string to the printed value of n in base base and
+returns a reference to the string.
+
     The base is 10 by default and must be between 2 and 36.
+
+
    TQString & TQString::setNum ( float n, char f = 'g', int prec = 6 )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the string to the printed value of n, formatted in format
+f with precision prec, and returns a reference to the
+string.
+
     The format f can be 'f', 'F', 'e', 'E', 'g' or 'G'. See arg() for an explanation of the formats.
+
+
    TQString & TQString::setNum ( double n, char f = 'g', int prec = 6 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the string to the printed value of n, formatted in format
+f with precision prec, and returns a reference to the
+string.
+
     The format f can be 'f', 'F', 'e', 'E', 'g' or 'G'. See arg() for an explanation of the formats.
+
+
    TQString & TQString::setUnicode ( const TQChar * unicode, uint len )
+
    
+Resizes the string to len characters and copies unicode into
+the string. If unicode is 0, nothing is copied, but the
+string is still resized to len. If len is zero, then the
+string becomes a null string.
+
     
    See also setLatin1() and isNull().
+
+
    TQString & TQString::setUnicodeCodes ( const ushort * unicode_as_ushorts, uint len )
+
    
+Resizes the string to len characters and copies unicode_as_ushorts into the string (on some X11 client platforms
+this will involve a byte-swapping pass).
+
     If unicode_as_ushorts is 0, nothing is copied, but the string
+is still resized to len. If len is zero, the string becomes
+a null string.
+
     
    See also setLatin1() and isNull().
+
+
    TQString TQString::simplifyWhiteSpace () const
+
    
+Returns a string that has whitespace removed from the start and
+the end, and which has each sequence of internal whitespace
+replaced with a single space.
+
     Whitespace means any character for which TQChar::isSpace() returns
+TRUE. This includes Unicode characters with decimal values 9
+(TAB), 10 (LF), 11 (VT), 12 (FF), 13 (CR), and 32 (Space).
+
     
    +        TQString string = "  lots\t of\nwhite    space ";
+        TQString t = string.simplifyWhiteSpace();
+        // t == "lots of white space"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also stripWhiteSpace().
+
+
    TQString & TQString::sprintf ( const char * cformat, ... )
+
    
+Safely builds a formatted string from the format string cformat
+and an arbitrary list of arguments. The format string supports all
+the escape sequences of printf() in the standard C library.
+
     The %s escape sequence expects a utf8() encoded string. The format
+string cformat is expected to be in latin1. If you need a
+Unicode format string, use arg() instead. For typesafe string
+building, with full Unicode support, you can use TQTextOStream like
+this:
+
     
    +        TQString str;
+        TQString s = ...;
+        int x = ...;
+        TQTextOStream( &str ) << s << " : " << x;
+    
    
+ 
+
     For translations, especially if the
+strings contains more than one escape sequence, you should
+consider using the arg() function instead. This allows the order
+of the replacements to be controlled by the translator, and has
+Unicode support.
+
     The %lc escape sequence expects a unicode character of type ushort
+(as returned by TQChar::unicode()).
+The %ls escape sequence expects a pointer to a zero-terminated
+array of unicode characters of type ushort (as returned by
+TQString::ucs2()).
+
     
    See also arg().
+
+
    Examples: dclock/dclock.cpp, forever/forever.cpp, layout/layout.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, tooltip/tooltip.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    void TQString::squeeze ()
+
    
+Squeezes the string's capacity to the current content.
+
     
    See also capacity() and reserve().
+
+
    bool TQString::startsWith ( const TQString & s, bool cs = TRUE ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the string starts with s; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     If cs is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive;
+otherwise the search is case insensitive.
+
     
    +        TQString str( "Bananas" );
+        str.startsWith( "Ban" );     // returns TRUE
+        str.startsWith( "Car" );     // returns FALSE
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also endsWith().
+
+
    TQString TQString::stripWhiteSpace () const
+
    
+Returns a string that has whitespace removed from the start and
+the end.
+
     Whitespace means any character for which TQChar::isSpace() returns
+TRUE. This includes Unicode characters with decimal values 9
+(TAB), 10 (LF), 11 (VT), 12 (FF), 13 (CR) and 32 (Space), and may
+also include other Unicode characters.
+
     
    +        TQString string = "   white space   ";
+        TQString s = string.stripWhiteSpace();       // s == "white space"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also simplifyWhiteSpace().
+
+
    double TQString::toDouble ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns the string converted to a double value.
+
     If ok is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, *ok is set to
+FALSE; otherwise *ok is set to TRUE.
+
     
    +        TQString string( "1234.56" );
+        double a = string.toDouble();   // a == 1234.56
+    
    
+ 
+
     The string-to-number functions:
+
    
+can handle numbers
+represented in various locales. These representations may use different
+characters for the decimal point, thousands group sepearator
+and even individual digits. TQString's functions try to interpret
+the string according to the current locale. The current locale is
+determined from the system at application startup and can be changed
+by calling TQLocale::setDefault(). If the string cannot be interpreted
+according to the current locale, this function falls back
+on the "C" locale.
+
     
    +        bool ok;
+        double d;
+
+        TQLocale::setDefault(TQLocale::C);
+        d = TQString( "1234,56" ).toDouble(&ok); // ok == false
+        d = TQString( "1234.56" ).toDouble(&ok); // ok == true, d == 1234.56
+
+        TQLocale::setDefault(TQLocale::German);
+        d = TQString( "1234,56" ).toDouble(&ok); // ok == true, d == 1234.56
+        d = TQString( "1234.56" ).toDouble(&ok); // ok == true, d == 1234.56
+    
    
+ 
+
     Due to the ambiguity between the decimal point and thousands group
+separator in various locales, these functions do not handle
+thousands group separators. If you need to convert such numbers,
+use the corresponding function in TQLocale.
+
     
    +        bool ok;
+        TQLocale::setDefault(TQLocale::C);
+        double d = TQString( "1,234,567.89" ).toDouble(&ok); // ok == false
+    
    
+ 
+
     Warning: If the string contains trailing whitespace this function
+will fail, and set *ok to false if ok is not 0. Leading
+whitespace is ignored.
+
     
    See also number(), TQLocale::setDefault(), TQLocale::toDouble(), and stripWhiteSpace().
+
+
    float TQString::toFloat ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns the string converted to a float value.
+
     Returns 0.0 if the conversion fails.
+
     If ok is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, *ok is set to
+FALSE; otherwise *ok is set to TRUE.
+
     For information on how string-to-number functions in TQString handle
+localized input, see toDouble().
+
     Warning: If the string contains trailing whitespace this function
+will fail, settings *ok to false if ok is not 0.
+Leading whitespace is ignored.
+
     
    See also number().
+
+
    int TQString::toInt ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
+
    
+Returns the string converted to an int using base base, which is 10 by default and must be between 2 and 36 or 0. If
+base is 0, the base is determined automatically using the
+following rules:
+
      
+
    • If the string begins with "0x", it is assumed to
+be hexadecimal;
+
    • If it begins with "0", it is assumed to be octal;
+
    • Otherwise it is assumed to be decimal.
+
    
+
     Returns 0 if the conversion fails.
+
     If ok is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, *ok is set to
+FALSE; otherwise *ok is set to TRUE.
+
     
    +        TQString str( "FF" );
+        bool ok;
+        int hex = str.toInt( &ok, 16 );     // hex == 255, ok == TRUE
+        int dec = str.toInt( &ok, 10 );     // dec == 0, ok == FALSE
+    
    
+ 
+
     Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored by this function.
+
     For information on how string-to-number functions in TQString handle
+localized input, see toDouble().
+
     
    See also number().
+
+
    long TQString::toLong ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
+
    
+Returns the string converted to a long using base base, which is 10 by default and must be between 2 and 36 or 0. If
+base is 0, the base is determined automatically using the
+following rules:
+
      
+
    • If the string begins with "0x", it is assumed to
+be hexadecimal;
+
    • If it begins with "0", it is assumed to be octal;
+
    • Otherwise it is assumed to be decimal.
+
    
+
     Returns 0 if the conversion fails.
+
     If ok is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, *ok is set to
+FALSE; otherwise *ok is set to TRUE.
+
     Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored by this function.
+
     For information on how string-to-number functions in TQString handle
+localized input, see toDouble().
+
     
    See also number().
+
+
    Q_LLONG TQString::toLongLong ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
+
    
+Returns the string converted to a long long using base base, which is 10 by default and must be between 2 and 36 or 0. If
+base is 0, the base is determined automatically using the
+following rules:
+
      
+
    • If the string begins with "0x", it is assumed to
+be hexadecimal;
+
    • If it begins with "0", it is assumed to be octal;
+
    • Otherwise it is assumed to be decimal.
+
    
+
     Returns 0 if the conversion fails.
+
     If ok is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, *ok is set to
+FALSE; otherwise *ok is set to TRUE.
+
     Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored by this function.
+
     For information on how string-to-number functions in TQString handle
+localized input, see toDouble().
+
     
    See also number().
+
+
    short TQString::toShort ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
+
    
+Returns the string converted to a short using base base, which is 10 by default and must be between 2 and 36 or 0. If
+base is 0, the base is determined automatically using the
+following rules:
+
      
+
    • If the string begins with "0x", it is assumed to
+be hexadecimal;
+
    • If it begins with "0", it is assumed to be octal;
+
    • Otherwise it is assumed to be decimal.
+
    
+
     Returns 0 if the conversion fails.
+
     If ok is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, *ok is set to
+FALSE; otherwise *ok is set to TRUE.
+
     Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored by this function.
+
     For information on how string-to-number functions in TQString handle
+localized input, see toDouble().
+
     
    See also number().
+
+
    uint TQString::toUInt ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
+
    
+Returns the string converted to an unsigned int using base base, which is 10 by default and must be between 2 and 36 or 0. If
+base is 0, the base is determined automatically using the
+following rules:
+
      
+
    • If the string begins with "0x", it is assumed to
+be hexadecimal;
+
    • If it begins with "0", it is assumed to be octal;
+
    • Otherwise it is assumed to be decimal.
+
    
+
     Returns 0 if the conversion fails.
+
     If ok is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, *ok is set to
+FALSE; otherwise *ok is set to TRUE.
+
     Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored by this function.
+
     For information on how string-to-number functions in TQString handle
+localized input, see toDouble().
+
     
    See also number().
+
+
    ulong TQString::toULong ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
+
    
+Returns the string converted to an unsigned long using base base, which is 10 by default and must be between 2 and 36 or 0. If
+base is 0, the base is determined automatically using the
+following rules:
+
      
+
    • If the string begins with "0x", it is assumed to
+be hexadecimal;
+
    • If it begins with "0", it is assumed to be octal;
+
    • Otherwise it is assumed to be decimal.
+
    
+
     Returns 0 if the conversion fails.
+
     If ok is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, *ok is set to
+FALSE; otherwise *ok is set to TRUE.
+
     Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored by this function.
+
     For information on how string-to-number functions in TQString handle
+localized input, see toDouble().
+
     
    See also number().
+
+
    Q_ULLONG TQString::toULongLong ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
+
    
+Returns the string converted to an unsigned long long using base base, which is 10 by default and must be between 2 and 36 or 0. If
+base is 0, the base is determined automatically using the
+following rules:
+
      
+
    • If the string begins with "0x", it is assumed to
+be hexadecimal;
+
    • If it begins with "0", it is assumed to be octal;
+
    • Otherwise it is assumed to be decimal.
+
    
+
     Returns 0 if the conversion fails.
+
     If ok is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, *ok is set to
+FALSE; otherwise *ok is set to TRUE.
+
     Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored by this function.
+
     For information on how string-to-number functions in TQString handle
+localized input, see toDouble().
+
     
    See also number().
+
+
    ushort TQString::toUShort ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
+
    
+Returns the string converted to an unsigned short using base base, which is 10 by default and must be between 2 and 36 or 0. If
+base is 0, the base is determined automatically using the
+following rules:
+
      
+
    • If the string begins with "0x", it is assumed to
+be hexadecimal;
+
    • If it begins with "0", it is assumed to be octal;
+
    • Otherwise it is assumed to be decimal.
+
    
+
     Returns 0 if the conversion fails.
+
     If ok is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, *ok is set to
+FALSE; otherwise *ok is set to TRUE.
+
     Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored by this function.
+
     For information on how string-to-number functions in TQString handle
+localized input, see toDouble().
+
     
    See also number().
+
+
    void TQString::truncate ( uint newLen )
+
    
+If newLen is less than the length of the string, then the
+string is truncated at position newLen. Otherwise nothing
+happens.
+
     
    +        TQString s = "truncate me";
+        s.truncate( 5 );            // s == "trunc"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also setLength().
+
+
    Example: network/mail/smtp.cpp.
+
    const unsigned short * TQString::ucs2 () const
+
    
+Returns the TQString as a zero terminated array of unsigned shorts
+if the string is not null; otherwise returns zero.
+
     The result remains valid so long as one unmodified
+copy of the source string exists.
+
+
    Example: dotnet/wrapper/lib/tools.cpp.
+
    const TQChar * TQString::unicode () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the Unicode representation of the string. The result
+remains valid until the string is modified.
+
+
    TQString TQString::upper () const
+
    
+Returns an uppercase copy of the string.
+
     
    +        TQString string( "TeXt" );
+        str = string.upper();     // t == "TEXT"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also lower().
+
+
    Examples: scribble/scribble.cpp and sql/overview/custom1/main.cpp.
+
    TQCString TQString::utf8 () const
+
    
+Returns the string encoded in UTF-8 format.
+
     See TQTextCodec for more diverse coding/decoding of Unicode strings.
+
     
    See also fromUtf8(), ascii(), latin1(), and local8Bit().
+
+
    Example: network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h.
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    bool operator!= ( const TQString & s1, const TQString & s2 )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if s1 is not equal to s2; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
+
     Equivalent to compare(s1, s2) != 0.
+
     
    See also isNull() and isEmpty().
+
+
    bool operator!= ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if s1 is not equal to s2; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
+
     Equivalent to compare(s1, s2) != 0.
+
     
    See also isNull() and isEmpty().
+
+
    bool operator!= ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if s1 is not equal to s2; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
+
     Equivalent to compare(s1, s2) != 0.
+
     
    See also isNull() and isEmpty().
+
+
    const TQString operator+ ( const TQString & s1, const TQString & s2 )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     Returns a string which is the result of concatenating the string
+s1 and the string s2.
+
     Equivalent to s1.append(s2).
+
+
    const TQString operator+ ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns a string which is the result of concatenating the string
+s1 and character s2.
+
     Equivalent to s1.append(s2).
+
+
    const TQString operator+ ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns a string which is the result of concatenating the
+character s1 and string s2.
+
+
    const TQString operator+ ( const TQString & s, char c )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns a string which is the result of concatenating the string
+s and character c.
+
     Equivalent to s.append(c).
+
+
    const TQString operator+ ( char c, const TQString & s )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns a string which is the result of concatenating the
+character c and string s.
+
     Equivalent to s.prepend(c).
+
+
    bool operator< ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if s1 is lexically less than s2; otherwise returns FALSE.
+The comparison is case sensitive.
+
     Equivalent to compare(s1, s2) < 0.
+
+
    bool operator< ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if s1 is lexically less than s2; otherwise returns FALSE.
+The comparison is case sensitive.
+
     Equivalent to compare(s1, s2) < 0.
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQString & str )
+
    
+
+
     Writes the string str to the stream s.
+
     See also Format of the TQDataStream operators
+
+
    bool operator<= ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if s1 is lexically less than or equal to s2;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+The comparison is case sensitive.
+Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
+
     Equivalent to compare(s1,s2) <= 0.
+
     
    See also isNull() and isEmpty().
+
+
    bool operator<= ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if s1 is lexically less than or equal to s2;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+The comparison is case sensitive.
+Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
+
     Equivalent to compare(s1, s2) <= 0.
+
     
    See also isNull() and isEmpty().
+
+
    bool operator== ( const TQString & s1, const TQString & s2 )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if s1 is equal to s2; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
+
     Equivalent to compare(s1, s2) == 0.
+
     
    See also isNull() and isEmpty().
+
+
    bool operator== ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if s1 is equal to s2; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
+
     Equivalent to compare(s1, s2) == 0.
+
     
    See also isNull() and isEmpty().
+
+
    bool operator== ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if s1 is equal to s2; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
+
     Equivalent to compare(s1, s2) == 0.
+
     
    See also isNull() and isEmpty().
+
+
    bool operator> ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if s1 is lexically greater than s2; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+The comparison is case sensitive.
+
     Equivalent to compare(s1, s2) > 0.
+
+
    bool operator> ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if s1 is lexically greater than s2; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+The comparison is case sensitive.
+
     Equivalent to compare(s1, s2) > 0.
+
+
    bool operator>= ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if s1 is lexically greater than or equal to s2;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+The comparison is case sensitive.
+Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
+
     Equivalent to compare(s1, s2) >= 0.
+
     
    See also isNull() and isEmpty().
+
+
    bool operator>= ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Returns TRUE if s1 is lexically greater than or equal to s2;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+The comparison is case sensitive.
+Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
+
     Equivalent to compare(s1, s2) >= 0.
+
     
    See also isNull() and isEmpty().
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQString & str )
+
    
+
+
     Reads a string from the stream s into string str.
+
     See also Format of the TQDataStream operators
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqstringlist.html b/doc/html/ntqstringlist.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f5f71456d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqstringlist.html
@@ -0,0 +1,309 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQStringList Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQStringList Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQStringList class provides a list of strings.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqstringlist.h>
+
    Inherits TQValueList<TQString>.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQStringList ()
      • 
+
    • TQStringList ( const TQStringList & l )
      • 
+
    • TQStringList ( const TQValueList<TQString> & l )
      • 
+
    • TQStringList ( const TQString & i )
      • 
+
    • TQStringList ( const char * i )
      • 
+
    • void sort ()
      • 
+
    • TQString join ( const TQString & sep ) const
      • 
+
    • TQStringList grep ( const TQString & str, bool cs = TRUE ) const
      • 
+
    • TQStringList grep ( const TQRegExp & rx ) const
      • 
+
    • TQStringList & gres ( const TQString & before, const TQString & after, bool cs = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • TQStringList & gres ( const TQRegExp & rx, const TQString & after )
      • 
+
    
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQStringList fromStrList ( const TQStrList & ascii )
      • 
+
    • TQStringList split ( const TQString & sep, const TQString & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = FALSE )
      • 
+
    • TQStringList split ( const TQChar & sep, const TQString & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = FALSE )
      • 
+
    • TQStringList split ( const TQRegExp & sep, const TQString & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = FALSE )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
+The TQStringList class provides a list of strings.
+
     
+
+
+
+
     It is used to store and manipulate strings that logically belong
+together. Essentially TQStringList is a TQValueList of TQString
+objects. Unlike TQStrList, which stores pointers to characters,
+TQStringList holds real TQString objects. It is the class of choice
+whenever you work with Unicode strings. TQStringList is part of the
+TQt Template Library.
+
     Like TQString itself, TQStringList objects are implicitly shared, so
+passing them around as value-parameters is both fast and safe.
+
     Strings can be added to a list using append(), operator+=() or
+operator<<(), e.g.
+
    +    TQStringList fonts;
+    fonts.append( "Times" );
+    fonts += "Courier";
+    fonts += "Courier New";
+    fonts << "Helvetica [Cronyx]" << "Helvetica [Adobe]";
+    
    
+ 
+
     String lists have an iterator, TQStringList::Iterator(), e.g.
+
    +    for ( TQStringList::Iterator it = fonts.begin(); it != fonts.end(); ++it ) {
+        cout << *it << ":";
+    }
+    cout << endl;
+    // Output:
+    //  Times:Courier:Courier New:Helvetica [Cronyx]:Helvetica [Adobe]:
+    
    
+ 
+
     Many TQt functions return string lists by value; to iterate over
+these you should make a copy and iterate over the copy.
+
     You can concatenate all the strings in a string list into a single
+string (with an optional separator) using join(), e.g.
+
    +    TQString allFonts = fonts.join( ", " );
+    cout << allFonts << endl;
+    // Output:
+    //  Times, Courier, Courier New, Helvetica [Cronyx], Helvetica [Adobe]
+    
    
+ 
+
     You can sort the list with sort(), and extract a new list which
+contains only those strings which contain a particular substring
+(or match a particular regular expression) using the grep()
+functions, e.g.
+
    +    fonts.sort();
+    cout << fonts.join( ", " ) << endl;
+    // Output:
+    //  Courier, Courier New, Helvetica [Adobe], Helvetica [Cronyx], Times
+
+    TQStringList helveticas = fonts.grep( "Helvetica" );
+    cout << helveticas.join( ", " ) << endl;
+    // Output:
+    //  Helvetica [Adobe], Helvetica [Cronyx]
+    
    
+ 
+
     Existing strings can be split into string lists with character,
+string or regular expression separators, e.g.
+
    +    TQString s = "Red\tGreen\tBlue";
+    TQStringList colors = TQStringList::split( "\t", s );
+    cout << colors.join( ", " ) << endl;
+    // Output:
+    //  Red, Green, Blue
+    
    
+ 
+
    See also Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes, Text Related Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQStringList::TQStringList ()
+
    
+
+
     Creates an empty string list.
+
+
    TQStringList::TQStringList ( const TQStringList & l )
+
    
+
+
     Creates a copy of the list l. This function is very fast
+because TQStringList is implicitly shared. In most situations this
+acts like a deep copy, for example, if this list or the original
+one or some other list referencing the same shared data is
+modified, the modifying list first makes a copy, i.e.
+copy-on-write.
+In a threaded environment you may require a real deep copy
+.
+
+
    TQStringList::TQStringList ( const TQValueList<TQString> & l )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a new string list that is a copy of l.
+
+
    TQStringList::TQStringList ( const TQString & i )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a string list consisting of the single string i.
+Longer lists are easily created as follows:
+
     
    +    TQStringList items;
+    items << "Buy" << "Sell" << "Update" << "Value";
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    TQStringList::TQStringList ( const char * i )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a string list consisting of the single Latin-1 string i.
+
+
    TQStringList TQStringList::fromStrList ( const TQStrList & ascii ) [static]
+
    
+Converts from an ASCII-TQStrList ascii to a TQStringList (Unicode).
+
+
    TQStringList TQStringList::grep ( const TQString & str, bool cs = TRUE ) const
+
    
+Returns a list of all the strings containing the substring str.
+
     If cs is TRUE, the grep is done case-sensitively; otherwise
+case is ignored.
+
     
    +    TQStringList list;
+    list << "Bill Gates" << "John Doe" << "Bill Clinton";
+    list = list.grep( "Bill" );
+    // list == ["Bill Gates", "Bill Clinton"]
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also TQString::find().
+
+
    TQStringList TQStringList::grep ( const TQRegExp & rx ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns a list of all the strings that match the regular expression rx.
+
     
    See also TQString::find().
+
+
    TQStringList & TQStringList::gres ( const TQString & before, const TQString & after, bool cs = TRUE )
+
    
+Replaces every occurrence of the string before in the strings
+that constitute the string list with the string after. Returns
+a reference to the string list.
+
     If cs is TRUE, the search is case sensitive; otherwise the
+search is case insensitive.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQStringList list;
+    list << "alpha" << "beta" << "gamma" << "epsilon";
+    list.gres( "a", "o" );
+    // list == ["olpho", "beto", "gommo", "epsilon"]
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also TQString::replace().
+
+
    TQStringList & TQStringList::gres ( const TQRegExp & rx, const TQString & after )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Replaces every occurrence of the regexp rx in the string
+with after. Returns a reference to the string list.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQStringList list;
+    list << "alpha" << "beta" << "gamma" << "epsilon";
+    list.gres( TQRegExp("^a"), "o" );
+    // list == ["olpha", "beta", "gamma", "epsilon"]
+    
    
+ 
+
     For regexps containing capturing parentheses, occurrences of \1,
+\2, ..., in after are replaced with rx.cap(1),
+cap(2), ...
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQStringList list;
+    list << "Bill Clinton" << "Gates, Bill";
+    list.gres( TQRegExp("^(.*), (.*)$"), "\\2 \\1" );
+    // list == ["Bill Clinton", "Bill Gates"]
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also TQString::replace().
+
+
    TQString TQStringList::join ( const TQString & sep ) const
+
    
+Joins the string list into a single string with each element
+separated by the string sep (which can be empty).
+
     
    See also split().
+
+
    Examples: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp and toplevel/options.ui.h.
+
    void TQStringList::sort ()
+
    
+Sorts the list of strings in ascending case-sensitive order.
+
     Sorting is very fast. It uses the TQt Template
+    Library's efficient HeapSort implementation that has a
+time complexity of O(n*log n).
+
     If you want to sort your strings in an arbitrary order consider
+using a TQMap. For example you could use a TQMap<TQString,TQString>
+to create a case-insensitive ordering (e.g. mapping the lowercase
+text to the text), or a TQMap<int,TQString> to sort the strings by
+some integer index, etc.
+
+
    Example: themes/themes.cpp.
+
    TQStringList TQStringList::split ( const TQRegExp & sep, const TQString & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = FALSE ) [static]
+
    
+Splits the string str into strings wherever the regular expression sep occurs, and returns the list of those strings.
+
     If allowEmptyEntries is TRUE, a null string is inserted in
+the list wherever the separator matches twice without intervening
+text.
+
     For example, if you split the string "a,,b,c" on commas, split()
+returns the three-item list "a", "b", "c" if allowEmptyEntries
+is FALSE (the default), and the four-item list "a", "", "b", "c"
+if allowEmptyEntries is TRUE.
+
     If sep does not match anywhere in str, split() returns a
+single element list with the element containing the single string
+str.
+
     
    See also join() and TQString::section().
+
+
    Examples: chart/element.cpp, dirview/dirview.cpp, and network/httpd/httpd.cpp.
+
    TQStringList TQStringList::split ( const TQString & sep, const TQString & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = FALSE ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This version of the function uses a TQString as separator, rather
+than a regular expression.
+
     If sep is an empty string, the return value is a list of
+one-character strings: split( TQString( "" ), "four" ) returns the
+four-item list, "f", "o", "u", "r".
+
     If allowEmptyEntries is TRUE, a null string is inserted in
+the list wherever the separator matches twice without intervening
+text.
+
     
    See also join() and TQString::section().
+
+
    TQStringList TQStringList::split ( const TQChar & sep, const TQString & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = FALSE ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This version of the function uses a TQChar as separator, rather
+than a regular expression.
+
     
    See also join() and TQString::section().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqstrlist.html b/doc/html/ntqstrlist.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1c2db91ab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqstrlist.html
@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQStrList Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQStrList Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQStrList class provides a doubly-linked list of char*.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqstrlist.h>
+
    Inherits TQPtrList<char>.
+
    Inherited by TQStrIList.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQStrList class provides a doubly-linked list of char*.
+
     
+
+
+
     If you want a string list of TQStrings use TQStringList.
+
     This class is a TQPtrList<char> instance (a list of char*).
+
     TQStrList can make deep or shallow copies of the strings that are
+inserted.
+
     A deep copy means that memory is allocated for the string and then
+the string data is copied into that memory. A shallow copy is just
+a copy of the pointer value and not of the string data itself.
+
     The disadvantage of shallow copies is that because a pointer can
+be deleted only once, the program must put all strings in a
+central place and know when it is safe to delete them (i.e. when
+the strings are no longer referenced by other parts of the
+program). This can make the program more complex. The advantage of
+shallow copies is that they consume far less memory than deep
+copies. It is also much faster to copy a pointer (typically 4 or 8
+bytes) than to copy string data.
+
     A TQStrList that operates on deep copies will, by default, turn on
+auto-deletion (see setAutoDelete()). Thus, by default TQStrList
+will deallocate any string copies it allocates.
+
     The virtual compareItems() function is reimplemented and does a
+case-sensitive string comparison. The inSort() function will
+insert strings in sorted order. In general it is fastest to insert
+the strings as they come and sort() at the end; inSort() is useful
+when you just have to add a few extra strings to an already sorted
+list.
+
     The TQStrListIterator class is an iterator for TQStrList.
+
    See also Collection Classes, Text Related Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQStrList::TQStrList ( bool deepCopies = TRUE )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs an empty list of strings. Will make deep copies of all
+inserted strings if deepCopies is TRUE, or use shallow copies
+if deepCopies is FALSE.
+
+
    TQStrList::TQStrList ( const TQStrList & list )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a copy of list.
+
     If list has deep copies, this list will also get deep copies.
+Only the pointers are copied (shallow copy) if the other list does
+not use deep copies.
+
+
    TQStrList::~TQStrList ()
+
    
+
+
     Destroys the list. All strings are removed.
+
+
    TQStrList & TQStrList::operator= ( const TQStrList & list )
+
    
+
+
     Assigns list to this list and returns a reference to this list.
+
     If list has deep copies, this list will also get deep copies.
+Only the pointers are copied (shallow copy) if the other list does
+not use deep copies.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqstyle.html b/doc/html/ntqstyle.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..54201adbe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqstyle.html
@@ -0,0 +1,1220 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQStyle Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQStyle Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQStyle class specifies the look and feel of a GUI.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqstyle.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject.
+
    Inherited by TQCommonStyle.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQStyle ()
      • 
+
    • virtual ~TQStyle ()
      • 
+
    • virtual void polish ( TQWidget * )
      • 
+
    • virtual void unPolish ( TQWidget * )
      • 
+
    • virtual void polish ( TQApplication * )
      • 
+
    • virtual void unPolish ( TQApplication * )
      • 
+
    • virtual void polish ( TQPalette & )
      • 
+
    • virtual void polishPopupMenu ( TQPopupMenu * ) = 0
      • 
+
    • virtual TQRect itemRect ( TQPainter * p, const TQRect & r, int flags, bool enabled, const TQPixmap * pixmap, const TQString & text, int len = -1 ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual void drawItem ( TQPainter * p, const TQRect & r, int flags, const TQColorGroup & g, bool enabled, const TQPixmap * pixmap, const TQString & text, int len = -1, const TQColor * penColor = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • enum PrimitiveElement { PE_ButtonCommand, PE_ButtonDefault, PE_ButtonBevel, PE_ButtonTool, PE_ButtonDropDown, PE_FocusRect, PE_ArrowUp, PE_ArrowDown, PE_ArrowRight, PE_ArrowLeft, PE_SpinWidgetUp, PE_SpinWidgetDown, PE_SpinWidgetPlus, PE_SpinWidgetMinus, PE_Indicator, PE_IndicatorMask, PE_ExclusiveIndicator, PE_ExclusiveIndicatorMask, PE_DockWindowHandle, PE_DockWindowSeparator, PE_DockWindowResizeHandle, PE_Splitter, PE_Panel, PE_PanelPopup, PE_PanelMenuBar, PE_PanelDockWindow, PE_TabBarBase, PE_HeaderSection, PE_HeaderArrow, PE_StatusBarSection, PE_GroupBoxFrame, PE_Separator, PE_SizeGrip, PE_CheckMark, PE_ScrollBarAddLine, PE_ScrollBarSubLine, PE_ScrollBarAddPage, PE_ScrollBarSubPage, PE_ScrollBarSlider, PE_ScrollBarFirst, PE_ScrollBarLast, PE_ProgressBarChunk, PE_PanelLineEdit, PE_PanelTabWidget, PE_WindowFrame, PE_CheckListController, PE_CheckListIndicator, PE_CheckListExclusiveIndicator, PE_PanelGroupBox, PE_RubberBand, PE_CustomBase = 0xf000000 }
      • 
+
    • enum StyleFlags { Style_Default = 0x00000000, Style_Enabled = 0x00000001, Style_Raised = 0x00000002, Style_Sunken = 0x00000004, Style_Off = 0x00000008, Style_NoChange = 0x00000010, Style_On = 0x00000020, Style_Down = 0x00000040, Style_Horizontal = 0x00000080, Style_HasFocus = 0x00000100, Style_Top = 0x00000200, Style_Bottom = 0x00000400, Style_FocusAtBorder = 0x00000800, Style_AutoRaise = 0x00001000, Style_MouseOver = 0x00002000, Style_Up = 0x00004000, Style_Selected = 0x00008000, Style_Active = 0x00010000, Style_ButtonDefault = 0x00020000 }
      • 
+
    • virtual void drawPrimitive ( PrimitiveElement pe, TQPainter * p, const TQRect & r, const TQColorGroup & cg, SFlags flags = Style_Default, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const = 0
      • 
+
    • enum ControlElement { CE_PushButton, CE_PushButtonLabel, CE_CheckBox, CE_CheckBoxLabel, CE_RadioButton, CE_RadioButtonLabel, CE_TabBarTab, CE_TabBarLabel, CE_ProgressBarGroove, CE_ProgressBarContents, CE_ProgressBarLabel, CE_PopupMenuItem, CE_MenuBarItem, CE_ToolButtonLabel, CE_MenuBarEmptyArea, CE_PopupMenuScroller, CE_DockWindowEmptyArea, CE_PopupMenuVerticalExtra, CE_PopupMenuHorizontalExtra, CE_ToolBoxTab, CE_HeaderLabel, CE_CustomBase = 0xf0000000 }
      • 
+
    • virtual void drawControl ( ControlElement element, TQPainter * p, const TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & r, const TQColorGroup & cg, SFlags how = Style_Default, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const = 0
      • 
+
    • virtual void drawControlMask ( ControlElement element, TQPainter * p, const TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & r, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const = 0
      • 
+
    • enum SubRect { SR_PushButtonContents, SR_PushButtonFocusRect, SR_CheckBoxIndicator, SR_CheckBoxContents, SR_CheckBoxFocusRect, SR_RadioButtonIndicator, SR_RadioButtonContents, SR_RadioButtonFocusRect, SR_ComboBoxFocusRect, SR_SliderFocusRect, SR_DockWindowHandleRect, SR_ProgressBarGroove, SR_ProgressBarContents, SR_ProgressBarLabel, SR_ToolButtonContents, SR_DialogButtonAccept, SR_DialogButtonReject, SR_DialogButtonApply, SR_DialogButtonHelp, SR_DialogButtonAll, SR_DialogButtonAbort, SR_DialogButtonIgnore, SR_DialogButtonRetry, SR_DialogButtonCustom, SR_ToolBoxTabContents, SR_CustomBase = 0xf0000000 }
      • 
+
    • virtual TQRect subRect ( SubRect subrect, const TQWidget * widget ) const = 0
      • 
+
    • enum ComplexControl { CC_SpinWidget, CC_ComboBox, CC_ScrollBar, CC_Slider, CC_ToolButton, CC_TitleBar, CC_ListView, CC_CustomBase = 0xf0000000 }
      • 
+
    • enum SubControl { SC_None = 0x00000000, SC_ScrollBarAddLine = 0x00000001, SC_ScrollBarSubLine = 0x00000002, SC_ScrollBarAddPage = 0x00000004, SC_ScrollBarSubPage = 0x00000008, SC_ScrollBarFirst = 0x00000010, SC_ScrollBarLast = 0x00000020, SC_ScrollBarSlider = 0x00000040, SC_ScrollBarGroove = 0x00000080, SC_SpinWidgetUp = 0x00000001, SC_SpinWidgetDown = 0x00000002, SC_SpinWidgetFrame = 0x00000004, SC_SpinWidgetEditField = 0x00000008, SC_SpinWidgetButtonField = 0x00000010, SC_ComboBoxFrame = 0x00000001, SC_ComboBoxEditField = 0x00000002, SC_ComboBoxArrow = 0x00000004, SC_ComboBoxListBoxPopup = 0x00000008, SC_SliderGroove = 0x00000001, SC_SliderHandle = 0x00000002, SC_SliderTickmarks = 0x00000004, SC_ToolButton = 0x00000001, SC_ToolButtonMenu = 0x00000002, SC_TitleBarLabel = 0x00000001, SC_TitleBarSysMenu = 0x00000002, SC_TitleBarMinButton = 0x00000004, SC_TitleBarMaxButton = 0x00000008, SC_TitleBarCloseButton = 0x00000010, SC_TitleBarNormalButton = 0x00000020, SC_TitleBarShadeButton = 0x00000040, SC_TitleBarUnshadeButton = 0x00000080, SC_ListView = 0x00000001, SC_ListViewBranch = 0x00000002, SC_ListViewExpand = 0x00000004, SC_All = 0xffffffff }
      • 
+
    • virtual void drawComplexControl ( ComplexControl control, TQPainter * p, const TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & r, const TQColorGroup & cg, SFlags how = Style_Default, SCFlags sub = SC_All, SCFlags subActive = SC_None, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const = 0
      • 
+
    • virtual void drawComplexControlMask ( ComplexControl control, TQPainter * p, const TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & r, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const = 0
      • 
+
    • virtual TQRect querySubControlMetrics ( ComplexControl control, const TQWidget * widget, SubControl subcontrol, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const = 0
      • 
+
    • virtual SubControl querySubControl ( ComplexControl control, const TQWidget * widget, const TQPoint & pos, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const = 0
      • 
+
    • enum PixelMetric { PM_ButtonMargin, PM_ButtonDefaultIndicator, PM_MenuButtonIndicator, PM_ButtonShiftHorizontal, PM_ButtonShiftVertical, PM_DefaultFrameWidth, PM_SpinBoxFrameWidth, PM_MaximumDragDistance, PM_ScrollBarExtent, PM_ScrollBarSliderMin, PM_SliderThickness, PM_SliderControlThickness, PM_SliderLength, PM_SliderTickmarkOffset, PM_SliderSpaceAvailable, PM_DockWindowSeparatorExtent, PM_DockWindowHandleExtent, PM_DockWindowFrameWidth, PM_MenuBarFrameWidth, PM_TabBarTabOverlap, PM_TabBarTabHSpace, PM_TabBarTabVSpace, PM_TabBarBaseHeight, PM_TabBarBaseOverlap, PM_ProgressBarChunkWidth, PM_SplitterWidth, PM_TitleBarHeight, PM_IndicatorWidth, PM_IndicatorHeight, PM_ExclusiveIndicatorWidth, PM_ExclusiveIndicatorHeight, PM_PopupMenuScrollerHeight, PM_CheckListButtonSize, PM_CheckListControllerSize, PM_PopupMenuFrameHorizontalExtra, PM_PopupMenuFrameVerticalExtra, PM_DialogButtonsSeparator, PM_DialogButtonsButtonWidth, PM_DialogButtonsButtonHeight, PM_MDIFrameWidth, PM_MDIMinimizedWidth, PM_HeaderMargin, PM_HeaderMarkSize, PM_HeaderGripMargin, PM_TabBarTabShiftHorizontal, PM_TabBarTabShiftVertical, PM_TabBarScrollButtonWidth, PM_MenuBarItemSpacing, PM_ToolBarItemSpacing, PM_CustomBase = 0xf0000000 }
      • 
+
    • virtual int pixelMetric ( PixelMetric metric, const TQWidget * widget = 0 ) const = 0
      • 
+
    • enum ContentsType { CT_PushButton, CT_CheckBox, CT_RadioButton, CT_ToolButton, CT_ComboBox, CT_Splitter, CT_DockWindow, CT_ProgressBar, CT_PopupMenuItem, CT_TabBarTab, CT_Slider, CT_Header, CT_LineEdit, CT_MenuBar, CT_SpinBox, CT_SizeGrip, CT_TabWidget, CT_DialogButtons, CT_CustomBase = 0xf0000000 }
      • 
+
    • virtual TQSize sizeFromContents ( ContentsType contents, const TQWidget * widget, const TQSize & contentsSize, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const = 0
      • 
+
    • enum StyleHint { SH_EtchDisabledText, SH_GUIStyle, SH_ScrollBar_BackgroundMode, SH_ScrollBar_MiddleClickAbsolutePosition, SH_ScrollBar_ScrollWhenPointerLeavesControl, SH_TabBar_SelectMouseType, SH_TabBar_Alignment, SH_Header_ArrowAlignment, SH_Slider_SnapToValue, SH_Slider_SloppyKeyEvents, SH_ProgressDialog_CenterCancelButton, SH_ProgressDialog_TextLabelAlignment, SH_PrintDialog_RightAlignButtons, SH_MainWindow_SpaceBelowMenuBar, SH_FontDialog_SelectAssociatedText, SH_PopupMenu_AllowActiveAndDisabled, SH_PopupMenu_SpaceActivatesItem, SH_PopupMenu_SubMenuPopupDelay, SH_ScrollView_FrameOnlyAroundContents, SH_MenuBar_AltKeyNavigation, SH_ComboBox_ListMouseTracking, SH_PopupMenu_MouseTracking, SH_MenuBar_MouseTracking, SH_ItemView_ChangeHighlightOnFocus, SH_Widget_ShareActivation, SH_Workspace_FillSpaceOnMaximize, SH_ComboBox_Popup, SH_TitleBar_NoBorder, SH_ScrollBar_StopMouseOverSlider, SH_BlinkCursorWhenTextSelected, SH_RichText_FullWidthSelection, SH_PopupMenu_Scrollable, SH_GroupBox_TextLabelVerticalAlignment, SH_GroupBox_TextLabelColor, SH_PopupMenu_SloppySubMenus, SH_Table_GridLineColor, SH_LineEdit_PasswordCharacter, SH_DialogButtons_DefaultButton, SH_ToolBox_SelectedPageTitleBold, SH_TabBar_PreferNoArrows, SH_ScrollBar_LeftClickAbsolutePosition, SH_ListViewExpand_SelectMouseType, SH_UnderlineAccelerator, SH_ToolButton_Uses3D, SH_CustomBase = 0xf0000000 }
      • 
+
    • virtual int styleHint ( StyleHint stylehint, const TQWidget * widget = 0, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default, TQStyleHintReturn * returnData = 0 ) const = 0
      • 
+
    • enum StylePixmap { SP_TitleBarMinButton, SP_TitleBarMaxButton, SP_TitleBarCloseButton, SP_TitleBarNormalButton, SP_TitleBarShadeButton, SP_TitleBarUnshadeButton, SP_DockWindowCloseButton, SP_MessageBoxInformation, SP_MessageBoxWarning, SP_MessageBoxCritical, SP_MessageBoxQuestion, SP_CustomBase = 0xf0000000 }
      • 
+
    • virtual TQPixmap stylePixmap ( StylePixmap stylepixmap, const TQWidget * widget = 0, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const = 0
      • 
+
    • int defaultFrameWidth () const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void tabbarMetrics ( const TQWidget * t, int & hf, int & vf, int & ov ) const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • TQSize scrollBarExtent () const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQRect visualRect ( const TQRect & logical, const TQWidget * w )
      • 
+
    • TQRect visualRect ( const TQRect & logical, const TQRect & bounding )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQStyle class specifies the look and feel of a GUI.
+
+
     A large number of GUI elements are common to many widgets. The
+TQStyle class allows the look of these elements to be modified
+across all widgets that use the TQStyle functions. It also
+provides two feel options: Motif and Windows.
+
     Although it is not possible to fully enumerate the look of
+graphical elements and the feel of widgets in a GUI, TQStyle
+provides a considerable amount of control and customisability.
+
     In TQt 1.x the look and feel option for widgets was specified by a
+single value: the GUIStyle. Starting with TQt 2.0, this notion was
+expanded to allow the look to be specified by virtual drawing
+functions.
+
     Derived classes may reimplement some or all of the drawing
+functions to modify the look of all widgets that use those
+functions.
+
     Languages written from right to left (such as Arabic and Hebrew)
+usually also mirror the whole layout of widgets. If you design a
+style, you should take special care when drawing asymmetric
+elements to make sure that they also look correct in a mirrored
+layout. You can start your application with -reverse to check
+the mirrored layout. Also notice, that for a reversed layout, the
+light usually comes from top right instead of top left.
+
     The actual reverse layout is performed automatically when
+possible. However, for the sake of flexibility, the translation
+cannot be performed everywhere. The documentation for each
+function in the TQStyle API states whether the function
+expects/returns logical or screen coordinates. Using logical
+coordinates (in ComplexControls, for example) provides great
+flexibility in controlling the look of a widget. Use visualRect()
+when necessary to translate logical coordinates into screen
+coordinates for drawing.
+
     In TQt versions prior to 3.0, if you wanted a low level route into
+changing the appearance of a widget, you would reimplement
+polish(). With the new 3.0 style engine the recommended approach
+is to reimplement the draw functions, for example drawItem(),
+drawPrimitive(), drawControl(), drawControlMask(),
+drawComplexControl() and drawComplexControlMask(). Each of these
+functions is called with a range of parameters that provide
+information that you can use to determine how to draw them, e.g.
+style flags, rectangle, color group, etc.
+
     For information on changing elements of an existing style or
+creating your own style see the Style
+    overview.
+
     Styles can also be created as plugins.
+
    See also Widget Appearance and Style.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQStyle::ComplexControl
    
+
+
     This enum represents a ComplexControl. ComplexControls have
+different behaviour depending upon where the user clicks on them
+or which keys are pressed.
+
      
+
    • TQStyle::CC_SpinWidget
+
    • TQStyle::CC_ComboBox
+
    • TQStyle::CC_ScrollBar
+
    • TQStyle::CC_Slider
+
    • TQStyle::CC_ToolButton
+
    • TQStyle::CC_TitleBar
+
    • TQStyle::CC_ListView
+
     
      
+
    • TQStyle::CC_CustomBase - base value for custom ControlElements. All
+values above this are reserved for custom use. Therefore,
+custom values must be greater than this value.
+
     
    See also SubControl and drawComplexControl().
+
+
    TQStyle::ContentsType
    
+
+
     This enum represents a ContentsType. It is used to calculate sizes
+for the contents of various widgets.
+
      
+
    • TQStyle::CT_PushButton
+
    • TQStyle::CT_CheckBox
+
    • TQStyle::CT_RadioButton
+
    • TQStyle::CT_ToolButton
+
    • TQStyle::CT_ComboBox
+
    • TQStyle::CT_Splitter
+
    • TQStyle::CT_DockWindow
+
    • TQStyle::CT_ProgressBar
+
    • TQStyle::CT_PopupMenuItem
+
    • TQStyle::CT_TabBarTab
+
    • TQStyle::CT_Slider
+
    • TQStyle::CT_Header
+
    • TQStyle::CT_LineEdit
+
    • TQStyle::CT_MenuBar
+
    • TQStyle::CT_SpinBox
+
    • TQStyle::CT_SizeGrip
+
    • TQStyle::CT_TabWidget
+
    • TQStyle::CT_DialogButtons
+
    • TQStyle::CT_CustomBase - base value for custom ControlElements. All
+values above this are reserved for custom use. Custom values
+must be greater than this value.
+
     
    See also sizeFromContents().
+
+
    TQStyle::ControlElement
    
+
+
     This enum represents a ControlElement. A ControlElement is part of
+a widget that performs some action or displays information to the
+user.
+
      
+
    • TQStyle::CE_PushButton - the bevel and default indicator of a TQPushButton.
+
    • TQStyle::CE_PushButtonLabel - the label (iconset with text or pixmap)
+of a TQPushButton.
+
    • TQStyle::CE_CheckBox - the indicator of a TQCheckBox.
+
    • TQStyle::CE_CheckBoxLabel - the label (text or pixmap) of a TQCheckBox.
+
    • TQStyle::CE_RadioButton - the indicator of a TQRadioButton.
+
    • TQStyle::CE_RadioButtonLabel - the label (text or pixmap) of a TQRadioButton.
+
    • TQStyle::CE_TabBarTab - the tab within a TQTabBar (a TQTab).
+
    • TQStyle::CE_TabBarLabel - the label within a TQTab.
+
    • TQStyle::CE_ProgressBarGroove - the groove where the progress
+indicator is drawn in a TQProgressBar.
+
    • TQStyle::CE_ProgressBarContents - the progress indicator of a TQProgressBar.
+
    • TQStyle::CE_ProgressBarLabel - the text label of a TQProgressBar.
+
    • TQStyle::CE_PopupMenuItem - a menu item in a TQPopupMenu.
+
    • TQStyle::CE_PopupMenuScroller - scrolling areas in a popumenu when the
+style supports scrolling.
+
    • TQStyle::CE_PopupMenuHorizontalExtra - extra frame area set aside with PM_PopupMenuFrameHorizontalExtra
+
    • TQStyle::CE_PopupMenuVerticalExtra - extra frame area set aside with PM_PopupMenuFrameVerticalExtra
+
    • TQStyle::CE_MenuBarItem - a menu item in a TQMenuBar.
+
    • TQStyle::CE_ToolButtonLabel - a tool button's label.
+
    • TQStyle::CE_MenuBarEmptyArea - the empty area of a TQMenuBar.
+
    • TQStyle::CE_DockWindowEmptyArea - the empty area of a TQDockWindow.
+
    • TQStyle::CE_ToolBoxTab - the toolbox's tab area
+
    • TQStyle::CE_HeaderLabel - the header's label
+
    • TQStyle::CE_CustomBase - base value for custom ControlElements. All values above
+this are reserved for custom use. Therefore, custom values must be
+greater than this value.
+
     
    See also drawControl().
+
+
    TQStyle::PixelMetric
    
+
+
     This enum represents a PixelMetric. A PixelMetric is a style
+dependent size represented as a single pixel value.
+
      
+
    • TQStyle::PM_ButtonMargin - amount of whitespace between pushbutton
+labels and the frame.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_ButtonDefaultIndicator - width of the default-button indicator frame.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_MenuButtonIndicator - width of the menu button indicator
+proportional to the widget height.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_ButtonShiftHorizontal - horizontal contents shift of a
+button when the button is down.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_ButtonShiftVertical - vertical contents shift of a button when the
+button is down.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_DefaultFrameWidth - default frame width, usually 2.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_SpinBoxFrameWidth - frame width of a spin box.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_MDIFrameWidth - frame width of an MDI window.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_MDIMinimizedWidth - width of a minimized MSI window.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_MaximumDragDistance - Some feels require the scrollbar or
+other sliders to jump back to the original position when the
+mouse pointer is too far away while dragging. A value of -1
+disables this behavior.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_ScrollBarExtent - width of a vertical scrollbar and the
+height of a horizontal scrollbar.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_ScrollBarSliderMin - the minimum height of a vertical
+scrollbar's slider and the minimum width of a horiztonal
+scrollbar slider.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_SliderThickness - total slider thickness.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_SliderControlThickness - thickness of the slider handle.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_SliderLength - length of the slider.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_SliderTickmarkOffset - the offset between the tickmarks
+and the slider.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_SliderSpaceAvailable - the available space for the slider to move.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_DockWindowSeparatorExtent - width of a separator in a
+horiztonal dock window and the height of a separator in a
+vertical dock window.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_DockWindowHandleExtent - width of the handle in a
+horizontal dock window and the height of the handle in a
+vertical dock window.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_DockWindowFrameWidth - frame width of a dock window.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_MenuBarFrameWidth - frame width of a menubar.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_MenuBarItemSpacing - spacing between menubar items.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_ToolBarItemSpacing - spacing between toolbar items.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_TabBarTabOverlap - number of pixels the tabs should overlap.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_TabBarTabHSpace - extra space added to the tab width.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_TabBarTabVSpace - extra space added to the tab height.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_TabBarBaseHeight - height of the area between the tab bar
+and the tab pages.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_TabBarBaseOverlap - number of pixels the tab bar overlaps
+the tab bar base.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_TabBarScrollButtonWidth
+
    • TQStyle::PM_TabBarTabShiftHorizontal - horizontal pixel shift when a
+tab is selected.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_TabBarTabShiftVertical - vertical pixel shift when a
+tab is selected.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_ProgressBarChunkWidth - width of a chunk in a progress bar indicator.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_SplitterWidth - width of a splitter.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_TitleBarHeight - height of the title bar.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_PopupMenuFrameHorizontalExtra - additional border, e.g. for panels
+
    • TQStyle::PM_PopupMenuFrameVerticalExtra - additional border, e.g. for panels
+
    • TQStyle::PM_IndicatorWidth - width of a check box indicator.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_IndicatorHeight - height of a checkbox indicator.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_ExclusiveIndicatorWidth - width of a radio button indicator.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_ExclusiveIndicatorHeight - height of a radio button indicator.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_PopupMenuScrollerHeight - height of the scroller area in a popupmenu.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_PopupMenuScrollerHeight - height of the scroller area in a popupmenu.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_CheckListButtonSize - area (width/height) of the
+checkbox/radiobutton in a TQCheckListItem
+
    • TQStyle::PM_CheckListControllerSize - area (width/height) of the
+controller in a TQCheckListItem
+
    • TQStyle::PM_DialogButtonsSeparator - distance between buttons in a dialog buttons widget.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_DialogButtonsButtonWidth - minimum width of a button in a dialog buttons widget.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_DialogButtonsButtonHeight - minimum height of a button in a dialog buttons widget.
+
    • TQStyle::PM_HeaderMarkSize
+
    • TQStyle::PM_HeaderGripMargin
+
    • TQStyle::PM_HeaderMargin
+
    • TQStyle::PM_CustomBase - base value for custom ControlElements. All
+values above this are reserved for custom use. Therefore,
+custom values must be greater than this value.
+
     
    See also pixelMetric().
+
+
    TQStyle::PrimitiveElement
    
+
+
     This enum represents the PrimitiveElements of a style. A
+PrimitiveElement is a common GUI element, such as a checkbox
+indicator or pushbutton bevel.
+
      
+
    • TQStyle::PE_ButtonCommand - button used to initiate an action, for
+example, a TQPushButton.
+
    • TQStyle::PE_ButtonDefault - this button is the default button, e.g.
+in a dialog.
+
    • TQStyle::PE_ButtonBevel - generic button bevel.
+
    • TQStyle::PE_ButtonTool - tool button, for example, a TQToolButton.
+
    • TQStyle::PE_ButtonDropDown - drop down button, for example, a tool
+button that displays a popup menu, for example, TQPopupMenu.
+
     
      
+
    • TQStyle::PE_FocusRect - generic focus indicator.
+
     
      
+
    • TQStyle::PE_ArrowUp - up arrow.
+
    • TQStyle::PE_ArrowDown - down arrow.
+
    • TQStyle::PE_ArrowRight - right arrow.
+
    • TQStyle::PE_ArrowLeft - left arrow.
+
     
      
+
    • TQStyle::PE_SpinWidgetUp - up symbol for a spin widget, for example a
+TQSpinBox.
+
    • TQStyle::PE_SpinWidgetDown - down symbol for a spin widget.
+
    • TQStyle::PE_SpinWidgetPlus - increase symbol for a spin widget.
+
    • TQStyle::PE_SpinWidgetMinus - decrease symbol for a spin widget.
+
     
      
+
    • TQStyle::PE_Indicator - on/off indicator, for example, a TQCheckBox.
+
    • TQStyle::PE_IndicatorMask - bitmap mask for an indicator.
+
    • TQStyle::PE_ExclusiveIndicator - exclusive on/off indicator, for
+example, a TQRadioButton.
+
    • TQStyle::PE_ExclusiveIndicatorMask - bitmap mask for an exclusive indicator.
+
     
      
+
    • TQStyle::PE_DockWindowHandle - tear off handle for dock windows and
+toolbars, for example TQDockWindows and TQToolBars.
+
    • TQStyle::PE_DockWindowSeparator - item separator for dock window and
+toolbar contents.
+
    • TQStyle::PE_DockWindowResizeHandle - resize handle for dock windows.
+
    • TQStyle::PE_Splitter - splitter handle; see also TQSplitter.
+
     
      
+
    • TQStyle::PE_Panel - generic panel frame; see also TQFrame.
+
    • TQStyle::PE_PanelPopup - panel frame for popup windows/menus; see also
+TQPopupMenu.
+
    • TQStyle::PE_PanelMenuBar - panel frame for menu bars.
+
    • TQStyle::PE_PanelDockWindow - panel frame for dock windows and toolbars.
+
    • TQStyle::PE_PanelTabWidget - panel frame for tab widgets.
+
    • TQStyle::PE_PanelLineEdit - panel frame for line edits.
+
    • TQStyle::PE_PanelGroupBox - panel frame for group boxes.
+
    • TQStyle::PE_TabBarBase - area below tabs in a tab widget, for example,
+TQTab.
+
     
      
+
    • TQStyle::PE_HeaderSection - section of a list or table header; see also
+TQHeader.
+
    • TQStyle::PE_HeaderArrow - arrow used to indicate sorting on a list or table
+header
+
    • TQStyle::PE_StatusBarSection - section of a status bar; see also
+TQStatusBar.
+
     
      
+
    • TQStyle::PE_GroupBoxFrame - frame around a group box; see also
+TQGroupBox.
+
    • TQStyle::PE_WindowFrame - frame around a MDI window or a docking window
+
     
      
+
    • TQStyle::PE_Separator - generic separator.
+
     
      
+
    • TQStyle::PE_SizeGrip - window resize handle; see also TQSizeGrip.
+
     
      
+
    • TQStyle::PE_CheckMark - generic check mark; see also TQCheckBox.
+
     
      
+
    • TQStyle::PE_ScrollBarAddLine - scrollbar line increase indicator
+(i.e. scroll down); see also TQScrollBar.
+
    • TQStyle::PE_ScrollBarSubLine - scrollbar line decrease indicator (i.e. scroll up).
+
    • TQStyle::PE_ScrollBarAddPage - scolllbar page increase indicator (i.e. page down).
+
    • TQStyle::PE_ScrollBarSubPage - scrollbar page decrease indicator (i.e. page up).
+
    • TQStyle::PE_ScrollBarSlider - scrollbar slider
+
    • TQStyle::PE_ScrollBarFirst - scrollbar first line indicator (i.e. home).
+
    • TQStyle::PE_ScrollBarLast - scrollbar last line indicator (i.e. end).
+
     
      
+
    • TQStyle::PE_ProgressBarChunk - section of a progress bar indicator; see
+also TQProgressBar.
+
    • TQStyle::PE_CheckListController - controller part of a listview item
+
    • TQStyle::PE_CheckListIndicator - checkbox part of a listview item
+
    • TQStyle::PE_CheckListExclusiveIndicator - radiobutton part of a listview item
+
    • TQStyle::PE_RubberBand - rubber band used in such things as iconview
+
    • TQStyle::PE_CustomBase - base value for custom PrimitiveElements.
+All values above this are reserved for custom use. Custom
+values must be greater than this value.
+
     
    See also drawPrimitive().
+
+
    TQStyle::StyleFlags
    
+
+
     This enum represents flags for drawing PrimitiveElements. Not all
+primitives use all of these flags. Note that these flags may mean
+different things to different primitives. For an explanation of
+the relationship between primitives and their flags, as well as
+the different meanings of the flags, see the Style overview.
+
      
+
    • TQStyle::Style_Default
+
    • TQStyle::Style_Enabled
+
    • TQStyle::Style_Raised
+
    • TQStyle::Style_Sunken
+
    • TQStyle::Style_Off
+
    • TQStyle::Style_NoChange
+
    • TQStyle::Style_On
+
    • TQStyle::Style_Down
+
    • TQStyle::Style_Horizontal
+
    • TQStyle::Style_HasFocus
+
    • TQStyle::Style_Top
+
    • TQStyle::Style_Bottom
+
    • TQStyle::Style_FocusAtBorder
+
    • TQStyle::Style_AutoRaise
+
    • TQStyle::Style_MouseOver
+
    • TQStyle::Style_Up
+
    • TQStyle::Style_Selected
+
    • TQStyle::Style_HasFocus
+
    • TQStyle::Style_Active
+
    • TQStyle::Style_ButtonDefault
+
     
    See also drawPrimitive().
+
+
    TQStyle::StyleHint
    
+
+
     This enum represents a StyleHint. A StyleHint is a general look
+and/or feel hint.
+
      
+
    • TQStyle::SH_EtchDisabledText - disabled text is "etched" like Windows.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_GUIStyle - the GUI style to use.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_BackgroundMode - the background mode for a
+TQScrollBar. Possible values are any of those in the BackgroundMode enum.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_MiddleClickAbsolutePosition - a boolean value.
+If TRUE, middle clicking on a scrollbar causes the slider to
+jump to that position. If FALSE, the middle clicking is
+ignored.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_LeftClickAbsolutePosition - a boolean value.
+If TRUE, left clicking on a scrollbar causes the slider to
+jump to that position. If FALSE, the left clicking will
+behave as appropriate for each control.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_ScrollWhenPointerLeavesControl - a boolean
+value. If TRUE, when clicking a scrollbar SubControl, holding
+the mouse button down and moving the pointer outside the
+SubControl, the scrollbar continues to scroll. If FALSE, the
+scollbar stops scrolling when the pointer leaves the
+SubControl.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_TabBar_Alignment - the alignment for tabs in a
+TQTabWidget. Possible values are TQt::AlignLeft, TQt::AlignCenter and TQt::AlignRight.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_Header_ArrowAlignment - the placement of the sorting
+indicator may appear in list or table headers. Possible values
+are TQt::Left or TQt::Right.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_Slider_SnapToValue - sliders snap to values while moving,
+like Windows
+
    • TQStyle::SH_Slider_SloppyKeyEvents - key presses handled in a sloppy
+manner, i.e. left on a vertical slider subtracts a line.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_ProgressDialog_CenterCancelButton - center button on
+progress dialogs, like Motif, otherwise right aligned.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_ProgressDialog_TextLabelAlignment - TQt::AlignmentFlags --
+text label alignment in progress dialogs; Center on windows,
+Auto|VCenter otherwise.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_PrintDialog_RightAlignButtons - right align buttons in
+the print dialog, like Windows.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_MainWindow_SpaceBelowMenuBar - 1 or 2 pixel space between
+the menubar and the dockarea, like Windows.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_FontDialog_SelectAssociatedText - select the text in the
+line edit, or when selecting an item from the listbox, or when
+the line edit receives focus, like Windows.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_AllowActiveAndDisabled - allows disabled menu
+items to be active.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_SpaceActivatesItem - pressing Space activates
+the item, like Motif.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_SubMenuPopupDelay - the number of milliseconds
+to wait before opening a submenu; 256 on windows, 96 on Motif.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_Scrollable - whether popupmenu's must support
+scrolling.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_SloppySubMenus - whether popupmenu's must support
+sloppy submenu; as implemented on Mac OS.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_ScrollView_FrameOnlyAroundContents - whether scrollviews
+draw their frame only around contents (like Motif), or around
+contents, scrollbars and corner widgets (like Windows).
+
    • TQStyle::SH_MenuBar_AltKeyNavigation - menubars items are navigable
+by pressing Alt, followed by using the arrow keys to select
+the desired item.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_ComboBox_ListMouseTracking - mouse tracking in combobox
+dropdown lists.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_MouseTracking - mouse tracking in popup menus.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_MenuBar_MouseTracking - mouse tracking in menubars.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_ItemView_ChangeHighlightOnFocus - gray out selected items
+when losing focus.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_Widget_ShareActivation - turn on sharing activation with
+floating modeless dialogs.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_TabBar_SelectMouseType - which type of mouse event should
+cause a tab to be selected.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_ListViewExpand_SelectMouseType - which type of mouse event should
+cause a listview expansion to be selected.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_TabBar_PreferNoArrows - whether a tabbar should suggest a size
+to prevent scoll arrows.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_ComboBox_Popup - allows popups as a combobox dropdown
+menu.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_Workspace_FillSpaceOnMaximize - the workspace should
+maximize the client area.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_TitleBar_NoBorder - the titlebar has no border
+
    • TQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_StopMouseOverSlider - stops autorepeat when
+slider reaches mouse
+
    • TQStyle::SH_BlinkCursorWhenTextSelected - whether cursor should blink
+when text is selected
+
    • TQStyle::SH_RichText_FullWidthSelection - whether richtext selections
+should extend the full width of the document.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_GroupBox_TextLabelVerticalAlignment - how to vertically align a
+groupbox's text label.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_GroupBox_TextLabelColor - how to paint a groupbox's text label.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_DialogButtons_DefaultButton - which buttons gets the
+default status in a dialog's button widget.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_CustomBase - base value for custom ControlElements. All
+values above this are reserved for custom use. Therefore,
+custom values must be greater than this value.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_ToolButton_Uses3D - indicates whether TQToolButtons should
+use a 3D frame when the mouse is over them
+
    • TQStyle::SH_ToolBox_SelectedPageTitleBold - Boldness of the selected
+page title in a TQToolBox.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_LineEdit_PasswordCharacter - The TQChar Unicode character
+to be used for passwords.
+
    • TQStyle::SH_Table_GridLineColor
+
    • TQStyle::SH_UnderlineAccelerator - whether accelerators are underlined
+
     
    See also styleHint().
+
+
    TQStyle::StylePixmap
    
+
+
     This enum represents a StylePixmap. A StylePixmap is a pixmap that
+can follow some existing GUI style or guideline.
+
     
      
+
    • TQStyle::SP_TitleBarMinButton - minimize button on titlebars. For
+example, in a TQWorkspace.
+
    • TQStyle::SP_TitleBarMaxButton - maximize button on titlebars.
+
    • TQStyle::SP_TitleBarCloseButton - close button on titlebars.
+
    • TQStyle::SP_TitleBarNormalButton - normal (restore) button on titlebars.
+
    • TQStyle::SP_TitleBarShadeButton - shade button on titlebars.
+
    • TQStyle::SP_TitleBarUnshadeButton - unshade button on titlebars.
+
    • TQStyle::SP_MessageBoxInformation - the 'information' icon.
+
    • TQStyle::SP_MessageBoxWarning - the 'warning' icon.
+
    • TQStyle::SP_MessageBoxCritical - the 'critical' icon.
+
    • TQStyle::SP_MessageBoxQuestion - the 'question' icon.
+
     
      
+
    • TQStyle::SP_DockWindowCloseButton - close button on dock windows;
+see also TQDockWindow.
+
     
      
+
    • TQStyle::SP_CustomBase - base value for custom ControlElements. All
+values above this are reserved for custom use. Therefore,
+custom values must be greater than this value.
+
     
    See also stylePixmap().
+
+
    TQStyle::SubControl
    
+
+
     This enum represents a SubControl within a ComplexControl.
+
      
+
    • TQStyle::SC_None - special value that matches no other SubControl.
+
     
      
+
    • TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarAddLine - scrollbar add line (i.e. down/right
+arrow); see also TQScrollbar.
+
    • TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSubLine - scrollbar sub line (i.e. up/left arrow).
+
    • TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarAddPage - scrollbar add page (i.e. page down).
+
    • TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSubPage - scrollbar sub page (i.e. page up).
+
    • TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarFirst - scrollbar first line (i.e. home).
+
    • TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarLast - scrollbar last line (i.e. end).
+
    • TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSlider - scrollbar slider handle.
+
    • TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarGroove - special subcontrol which contains the
+area in which the slider handle may move.
+
     
      
+
    • TQStyle::SC_SpinWidgetUp - spinwidget up/increase; see also TQSpinBox.
+
    • TQStyle::SC_SpinWidgetDown - spinwidget down/decrease.
+
    • TQStyle::SC_SpinWidgetFrame - spinwidget frame.
+
    • TQStyle::SC_SpinWidgetEditField - spinwidget edit field.
+
    • TQStyle::SC_SpinWidgetButtonField - spinwidget button field.
+
     
      
+
    • TQStyle::SC_ComboBoxEditField - combobox edit field; see also TQComboBox.
+
    • TQStyle::SC_ComboBoxArrow - combobox arrow
+
    • TQStyle::SC_ComboBoxFrame - combobox frame
+
    • TQStyle::SC_ComboBoxListBoxPopup - combobox list box
+
    • TQStyle::SC_SliderGroove - special subcontrol which contains the area
+in which the slider handle may move.
+
    • TQStyle::SC_SliderHandle - slider handle.
+
    • TQStyle::SC_SliderTickmarks - slider tickmarks.
+
     
      
+
    • TQStyle::SC_ToolButton - tool button; see also TQToolbutton.
+
    • TQStyle::SC_ToolButtonMenu - subcontrol for opening a popup menu in a
+tool button; see also TQPopupMenu.
+
     
      
+
    • TQStyle::SC_TitleBarSysMenu - system menu button (i.e. restore, close, etc.).
+
    • TQStyle::SC_TitleBarMinButton - minimize button.
+
    • TQStyle::SC_TitleBarMaxButton - maximize button.
+
    • TQStyle::SC_TitleBarCloseButton - close button.
+
    • TQStyle::SC_TitleBarLabel - window title label.
+
    • TQStyle::SC_TitleBarNormalButton - normal (restore) button.
+
    • TQStyle::SC_TitleBarShadeButton - shade button.
+
    • TQStyle::SC_TitleBarUnshadeButton - unshade button.
+
     
      
+
    • TQStyle::SC_ListView - the list view area.
+
    • TQStyle::SC_ListViewBranch - (internal)
+
    • TQStyle::SC_ListViewExpand - expand item (i.e. show/hide child items).
+
     
      
+
    • TQStyle::SC_All - special value that matches all SubControls.
+
     
    See also ComplexControl.
+
+
    TQStyle::SubRect
    
+
+
     This enum represents a sub-area of a widget. Style implementations
+would use these areas to draw the different parts of a widget.
+
      
+
    • TQStyle::SR_PushButtonContents - area containing the label (iconset
+with text or pixmap).
+
    • TQStyle::SR_PushButtonFocusRect - area for the focus rect (usually
+larger than the contents rect).
+
    • TQStyle::SR_CheckBoxIndicator - area for the state indicator (e.g. check mark).
+
    • TQStyle::SR_CheckBoxContents - area for the label (text or pixmap).
+
    • TQStyle::SR_CheckBoxFocusRect - area for the focus indicator.
+
     
      
+
    • TQStyle::SR_RadioButtonIndicator - area for the state indicator.
+
    • TQStyle::SR_RadioButtonContents - area for the label.
+
    • TQStyle::SR_RadioButtonFocusRect - area for the focus indicator.
+
     
      
+
    • TQStyle::SR_ComboBoxFocusRect - area for the focus indicator.
+
     
      
+
    • TQStyle::SR_SliderFocusRect - area for the focus indicator.
+
     
      
+
    • TQStyle::SR_DockWindowHandleRect - area for the tear-off handle.
+
     
      
+
    • TQStyle::SR_ProgressBarGroove - area for the groove.
+
    • TQStyle::SR_ProgressBarContents - area for the progress indicator.
+
    • TQStyle::SR_ProgressBarLabel - area for the text label.
+
     
      
+
    • TQStyle::SR_ToolButtonContents - area for the tool button's label.
+
    • TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonAccept - area for a dialog's accept button.
+
    • TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonReject - area for a dialog's reject button.
+
    • TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonApply - area for a dialog's apply button.
+
    • TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonHelp - area for a dialog's help button.
+
    • TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonAll - area for a dialog's all button.
+
    • TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonRetry - area for a dialog's retry button.
+
    • TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonAbort - area for a dialog's abort button.
+
    • TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonIgnore - area for a dialog's ignore button.
+
    • TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonCustom - area for a dialog's custom widget area (in button row).
+
    • TQStyle::SR_ToolBoxTabContents - area for a toolbox tab's icon and label
+
    • TQStyle::SR_CustomBase - base value for custom ControlElements. All values above
+this are reserved for custom use. Therefore, custom values must be
+greater than this value.
+
     
    See also subRect().
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQStyle::TQStyle ()
+
    
+Constructs a TQStyle.
+
+
    TQStyle::~TQStyle () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the style and frees all allocated resources.
+
+
    int TQStyle::defaultFrameWidth () const
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
    void TQStyle::drawComplexControl ( ComplexControl control, TQPainter * p, const TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & r, const TQColorGroup & cg, SFlags how = Style_Default, SCFlags sub = SC_All, SCFlags subActive = SC_None, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Draws the ComplexControl control using the painter p in the
+area r. Colors are used from the color group cg. The sub
+argument specifies which SubControls to draw. Multiple SubControls
+can be OR'ed together. The subActive argument specifies which
+SubControl is active.
+
     The rect r should be in logical coordinates. Reimplementations
+of this function should use visualRect() to change the logical
+coordinates into screen coordinates when using drawPrimitive() and
+drawControl().
+
     The how argument is used to control how the ComplexControl is
+drawn. Multiple flags can OR'ed together. See the table below for
+an explanation of which flags are used with the various
+ComplexControls.
+
     The widget argument is a pointer to a TQWidget or one of its
+subclasses. The widget can be cast to the appropriate type based
+on the value of control. The opt argument can be used to
+pass extra information required when drawing the ComplexControl.
+Note that opt may be the default value even for ComplexControls
+that can make use of the extra options. See the table below for
+the appropriate widget and opt usage:
+
     
    
+
     ComplexControl
    & Widget Cast
+    		Style Flags
+Notes
+Options
+Notes
+
      CC_SpinWidget(const TQSpinWidget *)
+Style_Enabled Set if the spinwidget is enabled.
+ Unused.
+  
+
     Style_HasFocus Set if the spinwidget has input focus.
+
      CC_ComboBox(const TQComboBox *)
+Style_Enabled Set if the combobox is enabled.
+ Unused.
+  
+
     Style_HasFocus Set if the combobox has input focus.
+
      CC_ScrollBar(const TQScrollBar *)
+Style_Enabled Set if the scrollbar is enabled.
+ Unused.
+  
+
     Style_HasFocus Set if the scrollbar has input focus.
+
      CC_Slider(const TQSlider *)
+Style_Enabled Set if the slider is enabled.
+ Unused.
+  
+
     Style_HasFocus Set if the slider has input focus.
+
      CC_ToolButton(const TQToolButton *)
+Style_Enabled Set if the toolbutton is enabled.
+ TQStyleOption ( ArrowType t )
+
+ When the tool button only contains an arrow, t is the
+arrow's type.
+
     Style_HasFocus Set if the toolbutton has input focus.
+
     Style_Down Set if the toolbutton is down (ie. mouse
+button or space pressed).
+
     Style_On Set if the toolbutton is a toggle button
+and is toggled on.
+
     Style_AutoRaise Set if the toolbutton has auto-raise enabled.
+
     Style_Raised Set if the button is not down, not on and doesn't
+contain the mouse when auto-raise is enabled.
+
     CC_TitleBar(const TQWidget *)
+Style_Enabled Set if the titlebar is enabled.
+Unused.
+ 
+
     CC_ListView(const TQListView *)
+Style_Enabled Set if the titlebar is enabled.
+TQStyleOption ( TQListViewItem *item )
+
+item is the item that needs branches drawn
+
    
+
     
    See also ComplexControl and SubControl.
+
+
    void TQStyle::drawComplexControlMask ( ComplexControl control, TQPainter * p, const TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & r, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Draw a bitmask for the ComplexControl control using the painter
+p in the area r. See drawComplexControl() for an explanation
+of the use of the widget and opt arguments.
+
     The rect r should be in logical coordinates. Reimplementations
+of this function should use visualRect() to change the logical
+corrdinates into screen coordinates when using drawPrimitive() and
+drawControl().
+
     
    See also drawComplexControl() and ComplexControl.
+
+
    void TQStyle::drawControl ( ControlElement element, TQPainter * p, const TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & r, const TQColorGroup & cg, SFlags how = Style_Default, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Draws the ControlElement element using the painter p in the
+area r. Colors are used from the color group cg.
+
     The rect r should be in screen coordinates.
+
     The how argument is used to control how the ControlElement is
+drawn. Multiple flags can be OR'ed together. See the table below
+for an explanation of which flags are used with the various
+ControlElements.
+
     The widget argument is a pointer to a TQWidget or one of its
+subclasses. The widget can be cast to the appropriate type based
+on the value of element. The opt argument can be used to
+pass extra information required when drawing the ControlElement.
+Note that opt may be the default value even for ControlElements
+that can make use of the extra options. See the table below for
+the appropriate widget and opt usage:
+
     
    
+
     ControlElement
    & Widget Cast
+    		Style Flags
+Notes
+Options
+Notes
+
      CE_PushButton(const TQPushButton *)
+
     and
+
     CE_PushButtonLabel(const TQPushButton *)
+
    		Style_Enabled Set if the button is enabled.
+ Unused.
+  
+
     Style_HasFocus Set if the button has input focus.
+
     Style_Raised Set if the button is not down, not on and not flat.
+
     Style_On Set if the button is a toggle button and toggled on.
+
     Style_Down Set if the button is down (i.e., the mouse button or
+space bar is pressed on the button).
+
     Style_ButtonDefault Set if the button is a default button.
+
      CE_CheckBox(const TQCheckBox *)
+
     and
+
     CE_CheckBoxLabel(const TQCheckBox *)
+
     
    		Style_Enabled Set if the checkbox is enabled.
+ Unused.
+  
+
     Style_HasFocus Set if the checkbox has input focus.
+
     Style_On Set if the checkbox is checked.
+
     Style_Off Set if the checkbox is not checked.
+
     Style_NoChange Set if the checkbox is in the NoChange state.
+
     Style_Down Set if the checkbox is down (i.e., the mouse button or
+space bar is pressed on the button).
+
      CE_RadioButton(const TQRadioButton *)
+
     and
+
     CE_RadioButtonLabel(const TQRadioButton *)
+
    		Style_Enabled Set if the radiobutton is enabled.
+ Unused.
+  
+
     Style_HasFocus Set if the radiobutton has input focus.
+
     Style_On Set if the radiobutton is checked.
+
     Style_Off Set if the radiobutton is not checked.
+
     Style_Down Set if the radiobutton is down (i.e., the mouse
+button or space bar is pressed on the radiobutton).
+
      CE_TabBarTab(const TQTabBar *)
+
     and
+
     CE_TabBarLabel(const TQTabBar *)
+
     
    		Style_Enabled Set if the tabbar and tab is enabled.
+ TQStyleOption ( TQTab *t )
+
+ t is the TQTab being drawn.
+
     Style_Selected Set if the tab is the current tab.
+
      CE_ProgressBarGroove(const TQProgressBar *)
+
     and
+
     CE_ProgressBarContents(const TQProgressBar *)
+
     and
+
     CE_ProgressBarLabel(const TQProgressBar *)
+
     
    		Style_Enabled Set if the progressbar is enabled.
+ Unused.
+  
+
     Style_HasFocus Set if the progressbar has input focus.
+
      CE_PopupMenuItem(const TQPopupMenu *)
+Style_Enabled Set if the menuitem is enabled.
+ TQStyleOption ( TQMenuItem *mi, int tabwidth, int maxpmwidth )
+
+mi is the menu item being drawn. TQMenuItem is currently an
+internal class.
+
     Style_Active Set if the menuitem is the current item.
+tabwidth is the width of the tab column where key accelerators
+are drawn.
+
     Style_Down Set if the menuitem is down (i.e., the mouse button
+or space bar is pressed).
+maxpmwidth is the maximum width of the check column where
+checkmarks and iconsets are drawn.
+
      CE_MenuBarItem(const TQMenuBar *)
+Style_Enabled Set if the menuitem is enabled
+ TQStyleOption ( TQMenuItem *mi )
+
+ mi is the menu item being drawn.
+
     Style_Active Set if the menuitem is the current item.
+
     Style_Down Set if the menuitem is down (i.e., a mouse button or
+the space bar is pressed).
+
     Style_HasFocus Set if the menubar has input focus.
+
      CE_ToolButtonLabel(const TQToolButton *)
+Style_Enabled Set if the toolbutton is enabled.
+ TQStyleOption ( ArrowType t )
+
+ When the tool button only contains an arrow, t is the
+arrow's type.
+
     Style_HasFocus Set if the toolbutton has input focus.
+
     Style_Down Set if the toolbutton is down (i.e., a
+mouse button or the space is pressed).
+
     Style_On Set if the toolbutton is a toggle button
+and is toggled on.
+
     Style_AutoRaise Set if the toolbutton has auto-raise enabled.
+
     Style_MouseOver Set if the mouse pointer is over the toolbutton.
+
     Style_Raised Set if the button is not down, not on and doesn't
+contain the mouse when auto-raise is enabled.
+
    
+
     
    See also ControlElement and StyleFlags.
+
+
    void TQStyle::drawControlMask ( ControlElement element, TQPainter * p, const TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & r, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Draw a bitmask for the ControlElement element using the painter
+p in the area r. See drawControl() for an explanation of the
+use of the widget and opt arguments.
+
     The rect r should be in screen coordinates.
+
     
    See also drawControl() and ControlElement.
+
+
    void TQStyle::drawItem ( TQPainter * p, const TQRect & r, int flags, const TQColorGroup & g, bool enabled, const TQPixmap * pixmap, const TQString & text, int len = -1, const TQColor * penColor = 0 ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Draws the text or pixmap in rectangle r using painter p and color group g. The pen color is specified with penColor. The enabled bool indicates whether or not the item is
+enabled; when reimplementing this bool should influence how the
+item is drawn. If len is -1 (the default) all the text is
+drawn; otherwise only the first len characters of text are
+drawn. The text is aligned and wrapped according to the alignment
+flags (see TQt::AlignmentFlags).
+
     By default, if both the text and the pixmap are not null, the
+pixmap is drawn and the text is ignored.
+
+
    void TQStyle::drawPrimitive ( PrimitiveElement pe, TQPainter * p, const TQRect & r, const TQColorGroup & cg, SFlags flags = Style_Default, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Draws the style PrimitiveElement pe using the painter p in
+the area r. Colors are used from the color group cg.
+
     The rect r should be in screen coordinates.
+
     The flags argument is used to control how the PrimitiveElement
+is drawn. Multiple flags can be OR'ed together.
+
     For example, a pressed button would be drawn with the flags Style_Enabled and Style_Down.
+
     The opt argument can be used to control how various
+PrimitiveElements are drawn. Note that opt may be the default
+value even for PrimitiveElements that make use of extra options.
+When opt is non-default, it is used as follows:
+
     
    
+
     PrimitiveElement Options Notes
+
     PE_FocusRect
+TQStyleOption ( const TQColor & bg )
+
+bg is the background color on which the focus rect is being drawn.
+
      PE_Panel
+ TQStyleOption ( int linewidth, int midlinewidth )
+
+linewidth is the line width for drawing the panel.
+
     midlinewidth is the mid-line width for drawing the panel.
+
      PE_PanelPopup
+ TQStyleOption ( int linewidth, int midlinewidth )
+
+linewidth is the line width for drawing the panel.
+
     midlinewidth is the mid-line width for drawing the panel.
+
      PE_PanelMenuBar
+ TQStyleOption ( int linewidth, int midlinewidth )
+
+linewidth is the line width for drawing the panel.
+
     midlinewidth is the mid-line width for drawing the panel.
+
      PE_PanelDockWindow
+ TQStyleOption ( int linewidth, int midlinewidth )
+
+linewidth is the line width for drawing the panel.
+
     midlinewidth is the mid-line width for drawing the panel.
+
      PE_GroupBoxFrame
+ TQStyleOption ( int linewidth, int midlinewidth, int shape, int shadow )
+
+linewidth is the line width for the group box.
+
     midlinewidth is the mid-line width for the group box.
+
     shape is the frame shape
+for the group box.
+
     shadow is the frame shadow
+for the group box.
+
    
+
     For all other PrimitiveElements, opt is unused.
+
     
    See also StyleFlags.
+
+
    Example: themes/wood.cpp.
+
    TQRect TQStyle::itemRect ( TQPainter * p, const TQRect & r, int flags, bool enabled, const TQPixmap * pixmap, const TQString & text, int len = -1 ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the appropriate area (see below) within rectangle r in
+which to draw the text or pixmap using painter p. If len is -1 (the default) all the text is drawn; otherwise only
+the first len characters of text are drawn. The text is
+aligned in accordance with the alignment flags (see
+TQt::AlignmentFlags). The enabled bool indicates whether or
+not the item is enabled.
+
     If r is larger than the area needed to render the text the
+rectangle that is returned will be offset within r in
+accordance with the alignment flags. For example if flags is
+AlignCenter the returned rectangle will be centered within r. If r is smaller than the area needed the rectangle that is
+returned will be larger than r (the smallest rectangle large
+enough to render the text or pixmap).
+
     By default, if both the text and the pixmap are not null, the
+pixmap is drawn and the text is ignored.
+
+
    int TQStyle::pixelMetric ( PixelMetric metric, const TQWidget * widget = 0 ) const [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the pixel metric for metric. The widget argument is
+a pointer to a TQWidget or one of its subclasses. The widget can be
+cast to the appropriate type based on the value of metric. Note
+that widget may be zero even for PixelMetrics that can make use
+of widget. See the table below for the appropriate widget
+casts:
+
     
    
+
     PixelMetric Widget Cast
+
     PM_SliderControlThickness    (const TQSlider *)
+
     PM_SliderLength		    (const TQSlider *)
+
     PM_SliderTickmarkOffset	    (const TQSlider *)
+
     PM_SliderSpaceAvailable	    (const TQSlider *)
+
     PM_TabBarTabOverlap	    (const TQTabBar *)
+
     PM_TabBarTabHSpace	    (const TQTabBar *)
+
     PM_TabBarTabVSpace	    (const TQTabBar *)
+
     PM_TabBarBaseHeight	    (const TQTabBar *)
+
     PM_TabBarBaseOverlap	    (const TQTabBar *)
+
    
+
+
    void TQStyle::polish ( TQWidget * ) [virtual]
+
    
+Initializes the appearance of a widget.
+
     This function is called for every widget at some point after it
+has been fully created but just before it is shown the very
+first time.
+
     Reasonable actions in this function might be to call
+TQWidget::setBackgroundMode() for the widget. An example of highly
+unreasonable use would be setting the geometry! Reimplementing
+this function gives you a back-door through which you can change
+the appearance of a widget. With TQt 3.0's style engine you will
+rarely need to write your own polish(); instead reimplement
+drawItem(), drawPrimitive(), etc.
+
     The TQWidget::inherits() function may provide enough information to
+allow class-specific customizations. But be careful not to
+hard-code things too much because new TQStyle subclasses are
+expected to work reasonably with all current and future
+widgets.
+
     
    See also unPolish().
+
+
    void TQStyle::polish ( TQApplication * ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Late initialization of the TQApplication object.
+
     
    See also unPolish().
+
+
    void TQStyle::polish ( TQPalette & ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     The style may have certain requirements for color palettes. In
+this function it has the chance to change the palette according to
+these requirements.
+
     
    See also TQPalette and TQApplication::setPalette().
+
+
    void TQStyle::polishPopupMenu ( TQPopupMenu * ) [pure virtual]
+
    
+Polishes the popup menu according to the GUI style. This usually
+means setting the mouse tracking
+(TQPopupMenu::setMouseTracking()) and whether the menu is
+checkable by default (TQPopupMenu::setCheckable()).
+
+
    SubControl TQStyle::querySubControl ( ComplexControl control, const TQWidget * widget, const TQPoint & pos, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the SubControl for widget at the point pos. The widget argument is a pointer to a TQWidget or one of its
+subclasses. The widget can be cast to the appropriate type based
+on the value of control. The opt argument can be used to
+pass extra information required when drawing the ComplexControl.
+Note that opt may be the default value even for ComplexControls
+that can make use of the extra options. See drawComplexControl()
+for an explanation of the widget and opt arguments.
+
     Note that pos is passed in screen coordinates. When using
+querySubControlMetrics() to check for hits and misses, use
+visualRect() to change the logical coordinates into screen
+coordinates.
+
     
    See also drawComplexControl(), ComplexControl, SubControl, and querySubControlMetrics().
+
+
    TQRect TQStyle::querySubControlMetrics ( ComplexControl control, const TQWidget * widget, SubControl subcontrol, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the rect for the SubControl subcontrol for widget in
+logical coordinates.
+
     The widget argument is a pointer to a TQWidget or one of its
+subclasses. The widget can be cast to the appropriate type based
+on the value of control. The opt argument can be used to
+pass extra information required when drawing the ComplexControl.
+Note that opt may be the default value even for ComplexControls
+that can make use of the extra options. See drawComplexControl()
+for an explanation of the widget and opt arguments.
+
     
    See also drawComplexControl(), ComplexControl, and SubControl.
+
+
    TQSize TQStyle::scrollBarExtent () const
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
    TQSize TQStyle::sizeFromContents ( ContentsType contents, const TQWidget * widget, const TQSize & contentsSize, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the size of widget based on the contents size contentsSize.
+
     The widget argument is a pointer to a TQWidget or one of its
+subclasses. The widget can be cast to the appropriate type based
+on the value of contents. The opt argument can be used to
+pass extra information required when calculating the size. Note
+that opt may be the default value even for ContentsTypes that
+can make use of the extra options. See the table below for the
+appropriate widget and opt usage:
+
     
    
+
     ContentsType Widget Cast Options Notes
+
     CT_PushButton (const TQPushButton *) Unused.  
+
     CT_CheckBox (const TQCheckBox *) Unused.  
+
     CT_RadioButton (const TQRadioButton *) Unused.  
+
     CT_ToolButton (const TQToolButton *) Unused.  
+
     CT_ComboBox (const TQComboBox *) Unused.  
+
     CT_Splitter (const TQSplitter *) Unused.  
+
     CT_DockWindow (const TQDockWindow *) Unused.  
+
     CT_ProgressBar (const TQProgressBar *) Unused.  
+
     CT_PopupMenuItem (const TQPopupMenu *)
+TQStyleOption ( TQMenuItem *mi )
+
+mi is the menu item to use when calculating the size.
+TQMenuItem is currently an internal class.
+
    
+
+
    int TQStyle::styleHint ( StyleHint stylehint, const TQWidget * widget = 0, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default, TQStyleHintReturn * returnData = 0 ) const [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the style hint stylehint for widget. Currently, widget, opt, and returnData are unused; they're included to
+allow for future enhancements.
+
     For an explanation of the return value see StyleHint.
+
+
    TQPixmap TQStyle::stylePixmap ( StylePixmap stylepixmap, const TQWidget * widget = 0, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Returns a pixmap for stylepixmap.
+
     The opt argument can be used to pass extra information required
+when drawing the ControlElement. Note that opt may be the
+default value even for StylePixmaps that can make use of the extra
+options. Currently, the opt argument is unused.
+
     The widget argument is a pointer to a TQWidget or one of its
+subclasses. The widget can be cast to the appropriate type based
+on the value of stylepixmap. See the table below for the
+appropriate widget casts:
+
     
    
+
     StylePixmap Widget Cast
+
     SP_TitleBarMinButton	(const TQWidget *)
+
     SP_TitleBarMaxButton	(const TQWidget *)
+
     SP_TitleBarCloseButton	(const TQWidget *)
+
     SP_TitleBarNormalButton	(const TQWidget *)
+
     SP_TitleBarShadeButton	(const TQWidget *)
+
     SP_TitleBarUnshadeButton (const TQWidget *)
+
     SP_DockWindowCloseButton (const TQDockWindow *)
+
    
+
     
    See also StylePixmap.
+
+
    TQRect TQStyle::subRect ( SubRect subrect, const TQWidget * widget ) const [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the sub-area subrect for the widget in logical
+coordinates.
+
     The widget argument is a pointer to a TQWidget or one of its
+subclasses. The widget can be cast to the appropriate type based
+on the value of subrect. See the table below for the
+appropriate widget casts:
+
     
    
+
     SubRect Widget Cast
+
     SR_PushButtonContents	(const TQPushButton *)
+
     SR_PushButtonFocusRect	(const TQPushButton *)
+
     SR_CheckBoxIndicator	(const TQCheckBox *)
+
     SR_CheckBoxContents	(const TQCheckBox *)
+
     SR_CheckBoxFocusRect	(const TQCheckBox *)
+
     SR_RadioButtonIndicator	(const TQRadioButton *)
+
     SR_RadioButtonContents	(const TQRadioButton *)
+
     SR_RadioButtonFocusRect	(const TQRadioButton *)
+
     SR_ComboBoxFocusRect	(const TQComboBox *)
+
     SR_DockWindowHandleRect	(const TQWidget *)
+
     SR_ProgressBarGroove	(const TQProgressBar *)
+
     SR_ProgressBarContents	(const TQProgressBar *)
+
     SR_ProgressBarLabel	(const TQProgressBar *)
+
    
+
     The tear-off handle (SR_DockWindowHandleRect) for TQDockWindow
+is a private class. Use TQWidget::parentWidget() to access the
+TQDockWindow:
+
     
    +        if ( !widget->parentWidget() )
+            return;
+        const TQDockWindow *dw = (const TQDockWindow *) widget->parentWidget();
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also SubRect.
+
+
    void TQStyle::tabbarMetrics ( const TQWidget * t, int & hf, int & vf, int & ov ) const
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
    void TQStyle::unPolish ( TQWidget * ) [virtual]
+
    
+Undoes the initialization of a widget's appearance.
+
     This function is the counterpart to polish. It is called for every
+polished widget when the style is dynamically changed. The former
+style has to unpolish its settings before the new style can polish
+them again.
+
     
    See also polish().
+
+
    void TQStyle::unPolish ( TQApplication * ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Undoes the application polish.
+
     
    See also polish().
+
+
    TQRect TQStyle::visualRect ( const TQRect & logical, const TQWidget * w ) [static]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the rect logical in screen coordinates. The bounding
+rect for widget w is used to perform the translation. This
+function is provided to aid style implementors in supporting
+right-to-left mode.
+
     
    See also TQApplication::reverseLayout().
+
+
    TQRect TQStyle::visualRect ( const TQRect & logical, const TQRect & bounding ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the rect logical in screen coordinates. The rect bounding is used to perform the translation. This function is
+provided to aid style implementors in supporting right-to-left
+mode.
+
     
    See also TQApplication::reverseLayout().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqstylefactory.html b/doc/html/ntqstylefactory.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..259ccdb78
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqstylefactory.html
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQStyleFactory Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQStyleFactory Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQStyleFactory class creates TQStyle objects.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqstylefactory.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQStringList keys ()
      • 
+
    • TQStyle * create ( const TQString & key )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQStyleFactory class creates TQStyle objects.
+
     The style factory creates a TQStyle object for a given key with
+TQStyleFactory::create(key).
+
     The styles are either built-in or dynamically loaded from a style
+plugin (see TQStylePlugin).
+
     TQStyleFactory::keys() returns a list of valid keys, typically
+including "Windows", "Motif", "CDE", "MotifPlus", "Platinum",
+"SGI" and "Compact". Depending on the platform, "WindowsXP",
+"Aqua" or "Macintosh" may be available.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQStyle * TQStyleFactory::create ( const TQString & key ) [static]
+
    
+Creates a TQStyle object that matches key case-insensitively.
+This is either a built-in style, or a style from a style plugin.
+
     
    See also keys().
+
+
    Example: themes/wood.cpp.
+
    TQStringList TQStyleFactory::keys () [static]
+
    
+Returns the list of keys this factory can create styles for.
+
     
    See also create().
+
+
    Example: themes/themes.cpp.
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqstyleplugin.html b/doc/html/ntqstyleplugin.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..df73c8771
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqstyleplugin.html
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQStylePlugin Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQStylePlugin Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQStylePlugin class provides an abstract base for custom TQStyle plugins.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqstyleplugin.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQStylePlugin class provides an abstract base for custom TQStyle plugins.
+
     
+
     The style plugin is a simple plugin interface that makes it easy
+to create custom styles that can be loaded dynamically into
+applications with a TQStyleFactory.
+
     Writing a style plugin is achieved by subclassing this base class,
+reimplementing the pure virtual functions keys() and create(), and
+exporting the class with the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN macro. See the
+plugins documentation for an
+example.
+
    See also Plugins.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQStylePlugin::TQStylePlugin ()
+
    
+Constructs a style plugin. This is invoked automatically by the
+Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN macro.
+
+
    TQStylePlugin::~TQStylePlugin ()
+
    
+Destroys the style plugin.
+
     You never have to call this explicitly. TQt destroys a plugin
+automatically when it is no longer used.
+
+
    TQStyle * TQStylePlugin::create ( const TQString & key ) [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Creates and returns a TQStyle object for the style key key. The
+style key is usually the class name of the required style.
+
     
    See also keys().
+
+
    TQStringList TQStylePlugin::keys () const [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the list of style keys this plugin supports.
+
     These keys are usually the class names of the custom styles that
+are implemented in the plugin.
+
     
    See also create().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqstylesheet.html b/doc/html/ntqstylesheet.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e28fccbeb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqstylesheet.html
@@ -0,0 +1,383 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQStyleSheet Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQStyleSheet Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQStyleSheet class is a collection of styles for rich text
+rendering and a generator of tags.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqstylesheet.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQStyleSheet ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • virtual ~TQStyleSheet ()
      • 
+
    • TQStyleSheetItem * item ( const TQString & name )
      • 
+
    • const TQStyleSheetItem * item ( const TQString & name ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual TQTextCustomItem * tag ( const TQString & name, const TQMap<TQString, TQString> & attr, const TQString & context, const TQMimeSourceFactory & factory, bool emptyTag, TQTextDocument * doc ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual void scaleFont ( TQFont & font, int logicalSize ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual void error ( const TQString & msg ) const
      • 
+
    
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
+The TQStyleSheet class is a collection of styles for rich text
+rendering and a generator of tags.
+
     
+
+
     By creating TQStyleSheetItem objects for a style sheet you build a
+definition of a set of tags. This definition will be used by the
+internal rich text rendering system to parse and display text
+documents to which the style sheet applies. Rich text is normally
+visualized in a TQTextEdit or a TQTextBrowser. However, TQLabel,
+TQWhatsThis and TQMessageBox also support it, and other classes are
+likely to follow. With TQSimpleRichText it is possible to use the
+rich text renderer for custom widgets as well.
+
     The default TQStyleSheet object has the following style bindings,
+sorted by structuring bindings, anchors, character style bindings
+(i.e. inline styles), special elements such as horizontal lines or
+images, and other tags. In addition, rich text supports simple
+HTML tables.
+
     The structuring tags are
+
    
+
     Structuring tags Notes
+
     <qt>...</qt>
+A TQt rich text document. It understands the following
+attributes:
+
      
+
    •  title -- The caption of the document. This attribute is
+easily accessible with TQTextEdit::documentTitle().
+
    •  type -- The type of the document. The default type is page. It indicates that the document is displayed in a
+page of its own. Another style is detail, which can be
+used to explain certain expressions in more detail in a
+few sentences. For detail, TQTextBrowser will then keep
+the current page and display the new document in a small
+popup similar to TQWhatsThis. Note that links will not work
+in documents with <qt type="detail">...</qt>.
+
    •  bgcolor -- The background color, for example bgcolor="yellow" or bgcolor="#0000FF".
+
    •  background -- The background pixmap, for example background="granite.xpm". The pixmap name will be resolved
+by a TQMimeSourceFactory().
+
    •  text -- The default text color, for example text="red".
+
    •  link -- The link color, for example link="green".
+
    
+
     <h1>...</h1>
+A top-level heading.
+
     <h2>...</h2>
+A sublevel heading.
+
     <h3>...</h3>
+A sub-sublevel heading.
+
     <h4>...</h4> <h5>...</h5>
+Headings of lesser importance.
+
     <p>...</p>
+A left-aligned paragraph. Adjust the alignment with the align attribute. Possible values are left, right and
+center.
+
     <center>...
    </center>
+    		A centered paragraph.
+
     <blockquote>...
    </blockquote>
+    		An indented paragraph that is useful for quotes.
+
     <ul>...</ul>
+An unordered list. You can also pass a type argument to
+define the bullet style. The default is type=disc;
+other types are circle and square.
+
     <ol>...</ol>
+An ordered list. You can also pass a type argument to
+define the enumeration label style. The default is type="1"; other types are "a" and "A".
+
     <li>...</li>
+A list item. This tag can be used only within the context
+of <ol> or <ul>.
+
     <dl>...</dl>
+A list of definitions, consisting of terms and descriptions.
+
     <dt>...</dt>
+A term in a list of definitions. This tag can be used only
+in the context of <dl>...</dl>.
+
     <dd>...</dd>
+A description in a list of definitions. This tag can be
+used only in the context of <dl>...</dl>.
+
     <pre>...</pre>
+For larger chunks of code. Whitespaces in the contents are
+preserved. For small bits of code use the inline-style code.
+
     <div>...</div> and <span>...</span>
+Block grouping elements. These are used to structure the
+document, and are often used to provide hints about the
+intended presentation of the document.
+
    
+
     Anchors and links are done with a single tag:
+
    
+
     Anchor tags Notes
+
     <a>...</a>
+An anchor or link.
+
      
+
    •  A link is created by using an href
+attribute, for example
+
      <a href="target.qml">Link Text</a>. Links to
+targets within a document are achieved in the same way
+as for HTML, e.g.
+
      <a href="target.qml#subtitle">Link Text</a>.
+
    •  A target is created by using a name
+attribute, for example
+
      <a name="subtitle"><h2>Sub Title</h2></a>.
+
    
+
    
+
     The default character style bindings are
+
    
+
     Style tags Notes
+
     <em>...</em>
+Emphasized. By default this is the same as <i>...</i>
+(italic).
+
     <strong>...</strong>
+Strong. By default this is the same as <b>...</b>
+(bold).
+
     <i>...</i>
+Italic font style.
+
     <b>...</b>
+Bold font style.
+
     <u>...</u>
+Underlined font style.
+
     <s>...</s>
+Strike out font style.
+
     <big>...</big>
+A larger font size.
+
     <small>...</small>
+A smaller font size.
+
     <sub>...</sub>
+Subscripted text
+
     <sup>...</sup>
+Superscripted text
+
     <code>...</code>
+Indicates code. By default this is the same as
+<tt>...</tt> (typewriter). For larger chunks of code
+use the block-tag <pre>.
+
     <tt>...</tt>
+Typewriter font style.
+
     <font>...</font>
+Customizes the font size, family  and text color. The tag
+understands the following  attributes:
+
      
+
    •  color -- The text color, for example color="red" or
+color="#FF0000".
+
    •  size -- The logical size of the font. Logical sizes 1
+to 7 are supported. The value may either be absolute
+(for example, size=3) or relative (size=-2). In
+the latter case the sizes are simply added.
+
    •  face -- The family of the font, for example face=times.
+
    
+
    
+
     Special elements are:
+
    
+
     Special tags Notes
+
     <img>
+An image. The image name for the mime source factory is
+given in the source attribute, for example
+<img src="qt.xpm"> The image tag also understands the
+attributes width and height that determine the size
+of the image. If the pixmap does not fit the specified
+size it will be scaled automatically (by using
+TQImage::smoothScale()).
+
    
+The align attribute determines where the image is
+placed. By default, an image is placed inline just like a
+normal character. Specify left or right to place the
+image at the respective side.
+
     <hr>
+A horizontal line.
+
     <br>
+A line break.
+
     <nobr>...</nobr>
+No break. Prevents word wrap.
+
    
+
     In addition, rich text supports simple HTML tables. A table
+consists of one or more rows each of which contains one or more
+cells. Cells are either data cells or header cells, depending on
+their content. Cells which span rows and columns are supported.
+
     
    
+
     Table tags Notes
+
     <table>...</table>
+A table. Tables support the following attributes:
+
      
+
    •  bgcolor -- The background color.
+
    •  width -- The table width. This is either an absolute
+pixel width or a relative percentage of the table's
+width, for example width=80%.
+
    •  border -- The width of the table border. The default is
+0 (= no border).
+
    •  cellspacing -- Additional space around the table cells.
+The default is 2.
+
    •  cellpadding -- Additional space around the contents of
+table cells. The default is 1.
+
    
+
     <tr>...</tr>
+A table row. This is only valid within a table. Rows
+support the following attribute:
+
      
+
    •  bgcolor -- The background color.
+
    
+
     <th>...</th>
+A table header cell. Similar to td, but defaults to
+center alignment and a bold font.
+
     <td>...</td>
+A table data cell. This is only valid within a tr.
+Cells support the following attributes:
+
      
+
    •  bgcolor -- The background color.
+
    •  width -- The cell width. This is either an absolute
+pixel width or a relative percentage of table's width,
+for example width=50%.
+
    •  colspan -- Specifies how many columns this cell spans.
+The default is 1.
+
    •  rowspan -- Specifies how many rows this cell spans. The
+default is 1.
+
    •  align -- Alignment; possible values are left, right, and center. The default is left.
+
    •  valign -- Vertical alignment; possible values are top, middle, and bottom. The default is middle.
+
    
+
    
+
    See also Graphics Classes, Help System, and Text Related Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQStyleSheet::TQStyleSheet ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Creates a style sheet called name, with parent parent. Like
+any TQObject it will be deleted when its parent is destroyed (if
+the child still exists).
+
     By default the style sheet has the tag definitions defined above.
+
+
    TQStyleSheet::~TQStyleSheet () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the style sheet. All styles inserted into the style sheet
+will be deleted.
+
+
    TQString TQStyleSheet::convertFromPlainText ( const TQString & plain, TQStyleSheetItem::WhiteSpaceMode mode = TQStyleSheetItem::WhiteSpacePre ) [static]
+
      Auxiliary function. Converts the plain text string plain to a
+rich text formatted paragraph while preserving most of its look.
+
     mode defines the whitespace mode. Possible values are TQStyleSheetItem::WhiteSpacePre (no wrapping, all whitespaces
+preserved) and TQStyleSheetItem::WhiteSpaceNormal (wrapping,
+simplified whitespaces).
+
     
    See also escape().
+
+
    Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, and mdi/application.cpp.
+
    TQStyleSheet * TQStyleSheet::defaultSheet () [static]
+
    
+Returns the application-wide default style sheet. This style sheet
+is used by rich text rendering classes such as TQSimpleRichText,
+TQWhatsThis and TQMessageBox to define the rendering style and
+available tags within rich text documents. It also serves as the
+initial style sheet for the more complex render widgets, TQTextEdit
+and TQTextBrowser.
+
     
    See also setDefaultSheet().
+
+
    void TQStyleSheet::error ( const TQString & msg ) const [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     This virtual function is called when an error occurs when
+processing rich text. Reimplement it if you need to catch error
+messages.
+
     Errors might occur if some rich text strings contain tags that are
+not understood by the stylesheet, if some tags are nested
+incorrectly, or if tags are not closed properly.
+
     msg is the error message.
+
+
    TQString TQStyleSheet::escape ( const TQString & plain ) [static]
+
    
+Auxiliary function. Converts the plain text string plain to a
+rich text formatted string with any HTML meta-characters escaped.
+
     
    See also convertFromPlainText().
+
+
    TQStyleSheetItem * TQStyleSheet::item ( const TQString & name )
+
    
+Returns the style called name or 0 if there is no such style.
+
+
    const TQStyleSheetItem * TQStyleSheet::item ( const TQString & name ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the style called name or 0 if there is no such style
+(const version)
+
+
    bool TQStyleSheet::mightBeRichText ( const TQString & text ) [static]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the string text is likely to be rich text;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     This function uses a fast and therefore simple heuristic. It
+mainly checks whether there is something that looks like a tag
+before the first line break. Although the result may be correct
+for common cases, there is no guarantee.
+
+
    void TQStyleSheet::scaleFont ( TQFont & font, int logicalSize ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Scales the font font to the appropriate physical point size
+corresponding to the logical font size logicalSize.
+
     When calling this function, font has a point size corresponding
+to the logical font size 3.
+
     Logical font sizes range from 1 to 7, with 1 being the smallest.
+
     
    See also TQStyleSheetItem::logicalFontSize(), TQStyleSheetItem::logicalFontSizeStep(), and TQFont::setPointSize().
+
+
    void TQStyleSheet::setDefaultSheet ( TQStyleSheet * sheet ) [static]
+
    
+Sets the application-wide default style sheet to sheet,
+deleting any style sheet previously set. The ownership is
+transferred to TQStyleSheet.
+
     
    See also defaultSheet().
+
+
    TQTextCustomItem * TQStyleSheet::tag ( const TQString & name, const TQMap<TQString, TQString> & attr, const TQString & context, const TQMimeSourceFactory & factory, bool emptyTag, TQTextDocument * doc ) const [virtual]
+
    
+
    This function is under development and is subject to change.
+
     Generates an internal object for the tag called name, given the
+attributes attr, and using additional information provided by
+the mime source factory factory.
+
     context is the optional context of the document, i.e. the path
+to look for relative links. This becomes important if the text
+contains relative references, for example within image tags.
+TQSimpleRichText always uses the default mime source factory (see
+TQMimeSourceFactory::defaultFactory()) to resolve these
+references. The context will then be used to calculate the
+absolute path. See TQMimeSourceFactory::makeAbsolute() for details.
+
     emptyTag and doc are for internal use only.
+
     This function should not be used in application code.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqsyntaxhighlighter.html b/doc/html/ntqsyntaxhighlighter.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1f6130a4e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqsyntaxhighlighter.html
@@ -0,0 +1,158 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQSyntaxHighlighter Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQSyntaxHighlighter Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQSyntaxHighlighter class is a base class for
+implementing TQTextEdit syntax highlighters.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqsyntaxhighlighter.h>
+
    Inherits TQt.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQSyntaxHighlighter class is a base class for
+implementing TQTextEdit syntax highlighters.
+
     
+
+
     A syntax highligher automatically highlights parts of the text in
+a TQTextEdit. Syntax highlighters are often used when the user is
+entering text in a specific format (for example, source code) and
+help the user to read the text and identify syntax errors.
+
     To provide your own syntax highlighting for TQTextEdit, you must
+subclass TQSyntaxHighlighter and reimplement highlightParagraph().
+
     When you create an instance of your TQSyntaxHighlighter subclass,
+pass it the TQTextEdit that you want the syntax highlighting to be
+applied to. After this your highlightParagraph() function will be
+called automatically whenever necessary. Use your
+highlightParagraph() function to apply formatting (e.g. setting
+the font and color) to the text that is passed to it.
+
    See also Basic Widgets and Text Related Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQSyntaxHighlighter::TQSyntaxHighlighter ( TQTextEdit * textEdit )
+
    
+Constructs the TQSyntaxHighlighter and installs it on textEdit.
+
     It is the caller's responsibility to delete the
+TQSyntaxHighlighter when it is no longer needed.
+
+
    TQSyntaxHighlighter::~TQSyntaxHighlighter () [virtual]
+
    
+Destructor. Uninstalls this syntax highlighter from the textEdit()
+
+
    int TQSyntaxHighlighter::currentParagraph () const
+
    
+Returns the id of the paragraph which is highlighted, or -1 of no
+paragraph is currently highlighted.
+
     Usually this function is called from within highlightParagraph().
+
+
    int TQSyntaxHighlighter::highlightParagraph ( const TQString & text, int endStateOfLastPara ) [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     This function is called when necessary by the rich text engine,
+i.e. on paragraphs which have changed.
+
     In your reimplementation you should parse the paragraph's text
+and call setFormat() as often as necessary to apply any font and
+color changes that you require. Your function must return a value
+which indicates the paragraph's end state: see below.
+
     Some syntaxes can have constructs that span paragraphs. For
+example, a C++ syntax highlighter should be able to cope with
+/*...*/ comments that span paragraphs. To deal
+with these cases it is necessary to know the end state of the
+previous paragraph (e.g. "in comment").
+
     If your syntax does not have paragraph spanning constructs, simply
+ignore the endStateOfLastPara parameter and always return 0.
+
     Whenever highlightParagraph() is called it is passed a value for
+endStateOfLastPara. For the very first paragraph this value is
+always -2. For any other paragraph the value is the value returned
+by the most recent highlightParagraph() call that applied to the
+preceding paragraph.
+
     The value you return is up to you. We recommend only returning 0
+(to signify that this paragraph's syntax highlighting does not
+affect the following paragraph), or a positive integer (to signify
+that this paragraph has ended in the middle of a paragraph
+spanning construct).
+
     To find out which paragraph is highlighted, call
+currentParagraph().
+
     For example, if you're writing a simple C++ syntax highlighter,
+you might designate 1 to signify "in comment". For a paragraph
+that ended in the middle of a comment you'd return 1, and for
+other paragraphs you'd return 0. In your parsing code if endStateOfLastPara was 1, you would highlight the text as a C++
+comment until you reached the closing */.
+
+
    void TQSyntaxHighlighter::rehighlight ()
+
      Redoes the highlighting of the whole document.
+
+
    void TQSyntaxHighlighter::setFormat ( int start, int count, const TQFont & font, const TQColor & color )
+
    
+This function is applied to the syntax highlighter's current
+paragraph (the text of which is passed to the highlightParagraph()
+function).
+
     The specified font and color are applied to the text from
+position start for count characters. (If count is 0,
+nothing is done.)
+
+
    void TQSyntaxHighlighter::setFormat ( int start, int count, const TQColor & color )
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
+
    void TQSyntaxHighlighter::setFormat ( int start, int count, const TQFont & font )
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
+
    TQTextEdit * TQSyntaxHighlighter::textEdit () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the TQTextEdit on which this syntax highlighter is
+installed
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqt.html b/doc/html/ntqt.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a82ff5f3a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqt.html
@@ -0,0 +1,1026 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQt Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQt Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQt class is a namespace for miscellaneous identifiers
+that need to be global-like.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqnamespace.h>
+
    Inherited by TQObject, TQPixmap, TQBrush, TQCanvasItem, TQCursor, TQPainter, TQEvent, TQIconViewItem, TQKeySequence, TQListViewItem, TQCustomMenuItem, TQPen, TQStyleSheetItem, TQSyntaxHighlighter, TQTab, TQTableItem, TQThread, TQToolTip, and TQWhatsThis.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • enum ButtonState { NoButton = 0x0000, LeftButton = 0x0001, RightButton = 0x0002, MidButton = 0x0004, MouseButtonMask = 0x0007, ShiftButton = 0x0100, ControlButton = 0x0200, AltButton = 0x0400, MetaButton = 0x0800, KeyButtonMask = 0x0f00, Keypad = 0x4000 }
      • 
+
    • enum Orientation { Horizontal = 0, Vertical }
      • 
+
    • enum SortOrder { Ascending, Descending }
      • 
+
    • enum AlignmentFlags { AlignAuto = 0x0000, AlignLeft = 0x0001, AlignRight = 0x0002, AlignHCenter = 0x0004, AlignJustify = 0x0008, AlignHorizontal_Mask = AlignLeft | AlignRight | AlignHCenter | AlignJustify, AlignTop = 0x0010, AlignBottom = 0x0020, AlignVCenter = 0x0040, AlignVertical_Mask = AlignTop | AlignBottom | AlignVCenter, AlignCenter = AlignVCenter | AlignHCenter }
      • 
+
    • enum TextFlags { SingleLine = 0x0080, DontClip = 0x0100, ExpandTabs = 0x0200, ShowPrefix = 0x0400, WordBreak = 0x0800, BreakAnywhere = 0x1000, NoAccel = 0x4000 }
      • 
+
    • enum WidgetState { WState_Created = 0x00000001, WState_Disabled = 0x00000002, WState_Visible = 0x00000004, WState_ForceHide = 0x00000008, WState_OwnCursor = 0x00000010, WState_MouseTracking = 0x00000020, WState_CompressKeys = 0x00000040, WState_BlockUpdates = 0x00000080, WState_InPaintEvent = 0x00000100, WState_Reparented = 0x00000200, WState_ConfigPending = 0x00000400, WState_Resized = 0x00000800, WState_AutoMask = 0x00001000, WState_Polished = 0x00002000, WState_DND = 0x00004000, WState_Reserved0 = 0x00008000, WState_FullScreen = 0x00010000, WState_OwnSizePolicy = 0x00020000, WState_CreatedHidden = 0x00040000, WState_Maximized = 0x00080000, WState_Minimized = 0x00100000, WState_ForceDisabled = 0x00200000, WState_Exposed = 0x00400000, WState_HasMouse = 0x00800000 }
      • 
+
    • enum WidgetFlags { WType_TopLevel = 0x00000001, WType_Dialog = 0x00000002, WType_Popup = 0x00000004, WType_Desktop = 0x00000008, WType_Mask = 0x0000000f, WStyle_Customize = 0x00000010, WStyle_NormalBorder = 0x00000020, WStyle_DialogBorder = 0x00000040, WStyle_NoBorder = 0x00002000, WStyle_Title = 0x00000080, WStyle_SysMenu = 0x00000100, WStyle_Minimize = 0x00000200, WStyle_Maximize = 0x00000400, WStyle_MinMax = WStyle_Minimize | WStyle_Maximize, WStyle_Tool = 0x00000800, WStyle_StaysOnTop = 0x00001000, WStyle_ContextHelp = 0x00004000, WStyle_Reserved = 0x00008000, WStyle_Mask = 0x0000fff0, WDestructiveClose = 0x00010000, WPaintDesktop = 0x00020000, WPaintUnclipped = 0x00040000, WPaintClever = 0x00080000, WResizeNoErase = 0x00100000, WMouseNoMask = 0x00200000, WStaticContents = 0x00400000, WRepaintNoErase = 0x00800000, WX11BypassWM = 0x01000000, WWinOwnDC = 0x00000000, WMacNoSheet = 0x00000000, WMacDrawer = 0x00000000, WX11BypassWM = 0x00000000, WWinOwnDC = 0x01000000, WMacNoSheet = 0x00000000, WMacDrawer = 0x00000000, WGroupLeader = 0x02000000, WShowModal = 0x04000000, WNoMousePropagation = 0x08000000, WSubWindow = 0x10000000, WStyle_Splash = 0x20000000, WNoAutoErase = WRepaintNoErase | WResizeNoErase, WNorthWestGravity = WStaticContents, WType_Modal = WType_Dialog | WShowModal, WStyle_Dialog = WType_Dialog, WStyle_NoBorderEx = WStyle_NoBorder }
      • 
+
    • enum WindowState { WindowNoState = 0x00000000, WindowMinimized = 0x00000001, WindowMaximized = 0x00000002, WindowFullScreen = 0x00000004, WindowActive = 0x00000008 }
      • 
+
    • enum ImageConversionFlags { ColorMode_Mask = 0x00000003, AutoColor = 0x00000000, ColorOnly = 0x00000003, MonoOnly = 0x00000002, AlphaDither_Mask = 0x0000000c, ThresholdAlphaDither = 0x00000000, OrderedAlphaDither = 0x00000004, DiffuseAlphaDither = 0x00000008, NoAlpha = 0x0000000c, Dither_Mask = 0x00000030, DiffuseDither = 0x00000000, OrderedDither = 0x00000010, ThresholdDither = 0x00000020, DitherMode_Mask = 0x000000c0, AutoDither = 0x00000000, PreferDither = 0x00000040, AvoidDither = 0x00000080 }
      • 
+
    • enum BGMode { TransparentMode, OpaqueMode }
      • 
+
    • enum PaintUnit { PixelUnit, LoMetricUnit, HiMetricUnit, LoEnglishUnit, HiEnglishUnit, TwipsUnit }
      • 
+
    • enum GUIStyle { MacStyle, WindowsStyle, Win3Style, PMStyle, MotifStyle }  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • enum SequenceMatch { NoMatch, PartialMatch, Identical }
      • 
+
    • enum Modifier { META = 0x00100000, SHIFT = 0x00200000, CTRL = 0x00400000, ALT = 0x00800000, MODIFIER_MASK = 0x00f00000, UNICODE_ACCEL = 0x10000000, ASCII_ACCEL = UNICODE_ACCEL }
      • 
+
    • enum Key { Key_Escape = 0x1000, Key_Tab = 0x1001, Key_Backtab = 0x1002, Key_BackTab = Key_Backtab, Key_Backspace = 0x1003, Key_BackSpace = Key_Backspace, Key_Return = 0x1004, Key_Enter = 0x1005, Key_Insert = 0x1006, Key_Delete = 0x1007, Key_Pause = 0x1008, Key_Print = 0x1009, Key_SysReq = 0x100a, Key_Clear = 0x100b, Key_Home = 0x1010, Key_End = 0x1011, Key_Left = 0x1012, Key_Up = 0x1013, Key_Right = 0x1014, Key_Down = 0x1015, Key_Prior = 0x1016, Key_PageUp = Key_Prior, Key_Next = 0x1017, Key_PageDown = Key_Next, Key_Shift = 0x1020, Key_Control = 0x1021, Key_Meta = 0x1022, Key_Alt = 0x1023, Key_CapsLock = 0x1024, Key_NumLock = 0x1025, Key_ScrollLock = 0x1026, Key_F1 = 0x1030, Key_F2 = 0x1031, Key_F3 = 0x1032, Key_F4 = 0x1033, Key_F5 = 0x1034, Key_F6 = 0x1035, Key_F7 = 0x1036, Key_F8 = 0x1037, Key_F9 = 0x1038, Key_F10 = 0x1039, Key_F11 = 0x103a, Key_F12 = 0x103b, Key_F13 = 0x103c, Key_F14 = 0x103d, Key_F15 = 0x103e, Key_F16 = 0x103f, Key_F17 = 0x1040, Key_F18 = 0x1041, Key_F19 = 0x1042, Key_F20 = 0x1043, Key_F21 = 0x1044, Key_F22 = 0x1045, Key_F23 = 0x1046, Key_F24 = 0x1047, Key_F25 = 0x1048, Key_F26 = 0x1049, Key_F27 = 0x104a, Key_F28 = 0x104b, Key_F29 = 0x104c, Key_F30 = 0x104d, Key_F31 = 0x104e, Key_F32 = 0x104f, Key_F33 = 0x1050, Key_F34 = 0x1051, Key_F35 = 0x1052, Key_Super_L = 0x1053, Key_Super_R = 0x1054, Key_Menu = 0x1055, Key_Hyper_L = 0x1056, Key_Hyper_R = 0x1057, Key_Help = 0x1058, Key_Direction_L = 0x1059, Key_Direction_R = 0x1060, Key_Space = 0x20, Key_Any = Key_Space, Key_Exclam = 0x21, Key_QuoteDbl = 0x22, Key_NumberSign = 0x23, Key_Dollar = 0x24, Key_Percent = 0x25, Key_Ampersand = 0x26, Key_Apostrophe = 0x27, Key_ParenLeft = 0x28, Key_ParenRight = 0x29, Key_Asterisk = 0x2a, Key_Plus = 0x2b, Key_Comma = 0x2c, Key_Minus = 0x2d, Key_Period = 0x2e, Key_Slash = 0x2f, Key_0 = 0x30, Key_1 = 0x31, Key_2 = 0x32, Key_3 = 0x33, Key_4 = 0x34, Key_5 = 0x35, Key_6 = 0x36, Key_7 = 0x37, Key_8 = 0x38, Key_9 = 0x39, Key_Colon = 0x3a, Key_Semicolon = 0x3b, Key_Less = 0x3c, Key_Equal = 0x3d, Key_Greater = 0x3e, Key_Question = 0x3f, Key_At = 0x40, Key_A = 0x41, Key_B = 0x42, Key_C = 0x43, Key_D = 0x44, Key_E = 0x45, Key_F = 0x46, Key_G = 0x47, Key_H = 0x48, Key_I = 0x49, Key_J = 0x4a, Key_K = 0x4b, Key_L = 0x4c, Key_M = 0x4d, Key_N = 0x4e, Key_O = 0x4f, Key_P = 0x50, Key_Q = 0x51, Key_R = 0x52, Key_S = 0x53, Key_T = 0x54, Key_U = 0x55, Key_V = 0x56, Key_W = 0x57, Key_X = 0x58, Key_Y = 0x59, Key_Z = 0x5a, Key_BracketLeft = 0x5b, Key_Backslash = 0x5c, Key_BracketRight = 0x5d, Key_AsciiCircum = 0x5e, Key_Underscore = 0x5f, Key_QuoteLeft = 0x60, Key_BraceLeft = 0x7b, Key_Bar = 0x7c, Key_BraceRight = 0x7d, Key_AsciiTilde = 0x7e, Key_nobreakspace = 0x0a0, Key_exclamdown = 0x0a1, Key_cent = 0x0a2, Key_sterling = 0x0a3, Key_currency = 0x0a4, Key_yen = 0x0a5, Key_brokenbar = 0x0a6, Key_section = 0x0a7, Key_diaeresis = 0x0a8, Key_copyright = 0x0a9, Key_ordfeminine = 0x0aa, Key_guillemotleft = 0x0ab, Key_notsign = 0x0ac, Key_hyphen = 0x0ad, Key_registered = 0x0ae, Key_macron = 0x0af, Key_degree = 0x0b0, Key_plusminus = 0x0b1, Key_twosuperior = 0x0b2, Key_threesuperior = 0x0b3, Key_acute = 0x0b4, Key_mu = 0x0b5, Key_paragraph = 0x0b6, Key_periodcentered = 0x0b7, Key_cedilla = 0x0b8, Key_onesuperior = 0x0b9, Key_masculine = 0x0ba, Key_guillemotright = 0x0bb, Key_onequarter = 0x0bc, Key_onehalf = 0x0bd, Key_threequarters = 0x0be, Key_questiondown = 0x0bf, Key_Agrave = 0x0c0, Key_Aacute = 0x0c1, Key_Acircumflex = 0x0c2, Key_Atilde = 0x0c3, Key_Adiaeresis = 0x0c4, Key_Aring = 0x0c5, Key_AE = 0x0c6, Key_Ccedilla = 0x0c7, Key_Egrave = 0x0c8, Key_Eacute = 0x0c9, Key_Ecircumflex = 0x0ca, Key_Ediaeresis = 0x0cb, Key_Igrave = 0x0cc, Key_Iacute = 0x0cd, Key_Icircumflex = 0x0ce, Key_Idiaeresis = 0x0cf, Key_ETH = 0x0d0, Key_Ntilde = 0x0d1, Key_Ograve = 0x0d2, Key_Oacute = 0x0d3, Key_Ocircumflex = 0x0d4, Key_Otilde = 0x0d5, Key_Odiaeresis = 0x0d6, Key_multiply = 0x0d7, Key_Ooblique = 0x0d8, Key_Ugrave = 0x0d9, Key_Uacute = 0x0da, Key_Ucircumflex = 0x0db, Key_Udiaeresis = 0x0dc, Key_Yacute = 0x0dd, Key_THORN = 0x0de, Key_ssharp = 0x0df, Key_agrave = 0x0e0, Key_aacute = 0x0e1, Key_acircumflex = 0x0e2, Key_atilde = 0x0e3, Key_adiaeresis = 0x0e4, Key_aring = 0x0e5, Key_ae = 0x0e6, Key_ccedilla = 0x0e7, Key_egrave = 0x0e8, Key_eacute = 0x0e9, Key_ecircumflex = 0x0ea, Key_ediaeresis = 0x0eb, Key_igrave = 0x0ec, Key_iacute = 0x0ed, Key_icircumflex = 0x0ee, Key_idiaeresis = 0x0ef, Key_eth = 0x0f0, Key_ntilde = 0x0f1, Key_ograve = 0x0f2, Key_oacute = 0x0f3, Key_ocircumflex = 0x0f4, Key_otilde = 0x0f5, Key_odiaeresis = 0x0f6, Key_division = 0x0f7, Key_oslash = 0x0f8, Key_ugrave = 0x0f9, Key_uacute = 0x0fa, Key_ucircumflex = 0x0fb, Key_udiaeresis = 0x0fc, Key_yacute = 0x0fd, Key_thorn = 0x0fe, Key_ydiaeresis = 0x0ff, Key_Back = 0x1061, Key_Forward = 0x1062, Key_Stop = 0x1063, Key_Refresh = 0x1064, Key_VolumeDown = 0x1070, Key_VolumeMute = 0x1071, Key_VolumeUp = 0x1072, Key_BassBoost = 0x1073, Key_BassUp = 0x1074, Key_BassDown = 0x1075, Key_TrebleUp = 0x1076, Key_TrebleDown = 0x1077, Key_MediaPlay = 0x1080, Key_MediaStop = 0x1081, Key_MediaPrev = 0x1082, Key_MediaNext = 0x1083, Key_MediaRecord = 0x1084, Key_HomePage = 0x1090, Key_Favorites = 0x1091, Key_Search = 0x1092, Key_Standby = 0x1093, Key_OpenUrl = 0x1094, Key_LaunchMail = 0x10a0, Key_LaunchMedia = 0x10a1, Key_Launch0 = 0x10a2, Key_Launch1 = 0x10a3, Key_Launch2 = 0x10a4, Key_Launch3 = 0x10a5, Key_Launch4 = 0x10a6, Key_Launch5 = 0x10a7, Key_Launch6 = 0x10a8, Key_Launch7 = 0x10a9, Key_Launch8 = 0x10aa, Key_Launch9 = 0x10ab, Key_LaunchA = 0x10ac, Key_LaunchB = 0x10ad, Key_LaunchC = 0x10ae, Key_LaunchD = 0x10af, Key_LaunchE = 0x10b0, Key_LaunchF = 0x10b1, Key_MediaLast = 0x1fff, Key_unknown = 0xffff }
      • 
+
    • enum ArrowType { UpArrow, DownArrow, LeftArrow, RightArrow }
      • 
+
    • enum RasterOp { CopyROP, OrROP, XorROP, NotAndROP, EraseROP = NotAndROP, NotCopyROP, NotOrROP, NotXorROP, AndROP, NotEraseROP = AndROP, NotROP, ClearROP, SetROP, NopROP, AndNotROP, OrNotROP, NandROP, NorROP, LastROP = NorROP }
      • 
+
    • enum PenStyle { NoPen, SolidLine, DashLine, DotLine, DashDotLine, DashDotDotLine, MPenStyle = 0x0f }
      • 
+
    • enum PenCapStyle { FlatCap = 0x00, SquareCap = 0x10, RoundCap = 0x20, MPenCapStyle = 0x30 }
      • 
+
    • enum PenJoinStyle { MiterJoin = 0x00, BevelJoin = 0x40, RoundJoin = 0x80, MPenJoinStyle = 0xc0 }
      • 
+
    • enum BrushStyle { NoBrush, SolidPattern, Dense1Pattern, Dense2Pattern, Dense3Pattern, Dense4Pattern, Dense5Pattern, Dense6Pattern, Dense7Pattern, HorPattern, VerPattern, CrossPattern, BDiagPattern, FDiagPattern, DiagCrossPattern, CustomPattern = 24 }
      • 
+
    • enum MacintoshVersion { MV_Unknown = 0x0000, MV_9 = 0x0001, MV_10_DOT_0 = 0x0002, MV_10_DOT_1 = 0x0003, MV_10_DOT_2 = 0x0004, MV_10_DOT_3 = 0x0005, MV_10_DOT_4 = 0x0006, MV_CHEETAH = MV_10_DOT_0, MV_PUMA = MV_10_DOT_1, MV_JAGUAR = MV_10_DOT_2, MV_PANTHER = MV_10_DOT_3, MV_TIGER = MV_10_DOT_4 }
      • 
+
    • enum WindowsVersion { WV_32s = 0x0001, WV_95 = 0x0002, WV_98 = 0x0003, WV_Me = 0x0004, WV_DOS_based = 0x000f, WV_NT = 0x0010, WV_2000 = 0x0020, WV_XP = 0x0030, WV_2003 = 0x0040, WV_VISTA = 0x0080, WV_NT_based = 0x00f0, WV_CE = 0x0100, WV_CENET = 0x0200, WV_CE_based = 0x0f00 }
      • 
+
    • enum UIEffect { UI_General, UI_AnimateMenu, UI_FadeMenu, UI_AnimateCombo, UI_AnimateTooltip, UI_FadeTooltip, UI_AnimateToolBox }
      • 
+
    • enum CursorShape { ArrowCursor, UpArrowCursor, CrossCursor, WaitCursor, IbeamCursor, SizeVerCursor, SizeHorCursor, SizeBDiagCursor, SizeFDiagCursor, SizeAllCursor, BlankCursor, SplitVCursor, SplitHCursor, PointingHandCursor, ForbiddenCursor, WhatsThisCursor, BusyCursor, LastCursor = BusyCursor, BitmapCursor = 24 }
      • 
+
    • enum TextFormat { PlainText, RichText, AutoText, LogText }
      • 
+
    • enum AnchorAttribute { AnchorName, AnchorHref }
      • 
+
    • enum Dock { DockUnmanaged, DockTornOff, DockTop, DockBottom, DockRight, DockLeft, DockMinimized, Unmanaged = DockUnmanaged, TornOff = DockTornOff, Top = DockTop, Bottom = DockBottom, Right = DockRight, Left = DockLeft, Minimized = DockMinimized }
      • 
+
    • enum DateFormat { TextDate, ISODate, LocalDate }
      • 
+
    • enum TimeSpec { LocalTime, UTC }
      • 
+
    • enum BackgroundMode { FixedColor, FixedPixmap, NoBackground, PaletteForeground, PaletteButton, PaletteLight, PaletteMidlight, PaletteDark, PaletteMid, PaletteText, PaletteBrightText, PaletteBase, PaletteBackground, PaletteShadow, PaletteHighlight, PaletteHighlightedText, PaletteButtonText, PaletteLink, PaletteLinkVisited, X11ParentRelative }
      • 
+
    • enum StringComparisonMode { CaseSensitive = 0x00001, BeginsWith = 0x00002, EndsWith = 0x00004, Contains = 0x00008, ExactMatch = 0x00010 }
      • 
+
    • enum Corner { TopLeft = 0x00000, TopRight = 0x00001, BottomLeft = 0x00002, BottomRight = 0x00003 }
      • 
+
    • typedef void * HANDLE
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
     The TQt class is a namespace for miscellaneous identifiers
+that need to be global-like.
+
     
+
     Normally, you can ignore this class. TQObject and a few other
+classes inherit it, so all the identifiers in the TQt namespace are
+normally usable without qualification.
+
     However, you may occasionally need to say TQt::black instead of
+just black, particularly in static utility functions (such as
+many class factories).
+
     
    See also Miscellaneous Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQt::AlignmentFlags
    
+
+
     This enum type is used to describe alignment. It contains
+horizontal and vertical flags.
+
     The horizontal flags are:
+
      
+
    • TQt::AlignAuto - Aligns according to the language. Left for most,
+right for Arabic and Hebrew.
+
    • TQt::AlignLeft - Aligns with the left edge.
+
    • TQt::AlignRight - Aligns with the right edge.
+
    • TQt::AlignHCenter - Centers horizontally in the available space.
+
    • TQt::AlignJustify - Justifies the text in the available space.
+Does not work for everything and may be interpreted as
+AlignAuto in some cases.
+
     The vertical flags are:
+
      
+
    • TQt::AlignTop - Aligns with the top.
+
    • TQt::AlignBottom - Aligns with the bottom.
+
    • TQt::AlignVCenter - Centers vertically in the available space.
+
     You can use only one of the horizontal flags at a time. There is
+one two-dimensional flag:
+
      
+
    • TQt::AlignCenter - Centers in both dimensions.
+
     You can use at most one horizontal and one vertical flag at a time. AlignCenter counts as both horizontal and vertical.
+
     Masks:
+
      
+
    • TQt::AlignHorizontal_Mask
+
    • TQt::AlignVertical_Mask
+
     Conflicting combinations of flags have undefined meanings.
+
+
    TQt::AnchorAttribute
    
+
+
     An anchor has one or more of the following attributes:
+
      
+
    • TQt::AnchorName - the name attribute of the anchor. This attribute is
+used when scrolling to an anchor in the document.
+
    • TQt::AnchorHref - the href attribute of the anchor. This attribute is
+used when a link is clicked to determine what content to load.
+
    
+
    TQt::ArrowType
    
+
+
      
+
    • TQt::UpArrow
+
    • TQt::DownArrow
+
    • TQt::LeftArrow
+
    • TQt::RightArrow
+
     
+
    TQt::BGMode
    
+
+
     Background mode
+
      
+
    • TQt::TransparentMode
+
    • TQt::OpaqueMode
+
    
+
    TQt::BackgroundMode
    
+
+
     This enum describes how the background of a widget changes, as the
+widget's palette changes.
+
     The background is what the widget contains when paintEvent() is called. To minimize
+flicker, this should be the most common color or pixmap in the
+widget. For PaletteBackground, use colorGroup().brush( TQColorGroup::Background ), and so on.
+
      
+
    • TQt::PaletteForeground
+
    • TQt::PaletteBackground
+
    • TQt::PaletteButton
+
    • TQt::PaletteLight
+
    • TQt::PaletteMidlight
+
    • TQt::PaletteDark
+
    • TQt::PaletteMid
+
    • TQt::PaletteText
+
    • TQt::PaletteBrightText
+
    • TQt::PaletteButtonText
+
    • TQt::PaletteBase
+
    • TQt::PaletteShadow
+
    • TQt::PaletteHighlight
+
    • TQt::PaletteHighlightedText
+
    • TQt::PaletteLink
+
    • TQt::PaletteLinkVisited
+
    • TQt::X11ParentRelative - (internal use only)
+
     The final three values have special meaning:
+
      
+
    • TQt::NoBackground - the widget is not cleared before paintEvent().
+If the widget's paint event always draws on all the pixels, using
+this mode can be both fast and flicker-free.
+
    • TQt::FixedColor - the widget is cleared to a fixed color, normally
+different from all the ones in the palette(). Set using setPaletteBackgroundColor().
+
    • TQt::FixedPixmap - the widget is cleared to a fixed pixmap,
+normally different from all the ones in the palette(). Set using
+setPaletteBackgroundPixmap().
+
     Although FixedColor and FixedPixmap are sometimes just
+right, if you use them, make sure that you test your application
+when the desktop color scheme has been changed. (On X11, a tquick
+way to test this is e.g. "./myapp -bg paleblue". On Windows, you
+must use the control panel.)
+
     
    See also TQWidget::backgroundMode, TQWidget::backgroundMode, TQWidget::setBackgroundPixmap(), and TQWidget::paletteBackgroundColor.
+
+
    TQt::BrushStyle
    
+
+
      
+
    • TQt::NoBrush
+
    • TQt::SolidPattern
+
    • TQt::Dense1Pattern
+
    • TQt::Dense2Pattern
+
    • TQt::Dense3Pattern
+
    • TQt::Dense4Pattern
+
    • TQt::Dense5Pattern
+
    • TQt::Dense6Pattern
+
    • TQt::Dense7Pattern
+
    • TQt::HorPattern
+
    • TQt::VerPattern
+
    • TQt::CrossPattern
+
    • TQt::BDiagPattern
+
    • TQt::FDiagPattern
+
    • TQt::DiagCrossPattern
+
    • TQt::CustomPattern
+
     
    Brush Styles
     
+
     
+
    TQt::ButtonState
    
+
+
     This enum type describes the state of the mouse and the modifier
+buttons.
+
      
+
    • TQt::NoButton - used when the button state does not refer to any
+button (see TQMouseEvent::button()).
+
    • TQt::LeftButton - set if the left button is pressed, or if this
+event refers to the left button. (The left button may be
+the right button on left-handed mice.)
+
    • TQt::RightButton - the right button.
+
    • TQt::MidButton - the middle button.
+
    • TQt::ShiftButton - a Shift key on the keyboard is also pressed.
+
    • TQt::ControlButton - a Ctrl key on the keyboard is also pressed.
+
    • TQt::AltButton - an Alt key on the keyboard is also pressed.
+
    • TQt::MetaButton - a Meta key on the keyboard is also pressed.
+
    • TQt::Keypad - a keypad button is pressed.
+
    • TQt::KeyButtonMask - a mask for ShiftButton, ControlButton,
+AltButton and MetaButton.
+
    • TQt::MouseButtonMask - a mask for LeftButton, RightButton and MidButton.
+
    
+
    TQt::Corner
    
+
+This enum type specifies a corner in a rectangle:
+
      
+
    • TQt::TopLeft - top left corner
+
    • TQt::TopRight - top right corner
+
    • TQt::BottomLeft - bottom left corner
+
    • TQt::BottomRight - bottom right corner
+
    
+
    TQt::CursorShape
    
+
+
     This enum type defines the various cursors that can be used.
+
      
+
    • TQt::ArrowCursor - standard arrow cursor
+
    • TQt::UpArrowCursor - upwards arrow
+
    • TQt::CrossCursor - crosshair
+
    • TQt::WaitCursor - hourglass/watch
+
    • TQt::BusyCursor - standard arrow with hourglass/watch
+
    • TQt::IbeamCursor - ibeam/text entry
+
    • TQt::SizeVerCursor - vertical resize
+
    • TQt::SizeHorCursor - horizontal resize
+
    • TQt::SizeFDiagCursor - diagonal resize (\)
+
    • TQt::SizeBDiagCursor - diagonal resize (/)
+
    • TQt::SizeAllCursor - all directions resize
+
    • TQt::BlankCursor - blank/invisible cursor
+
    • TQt::SplitVCursor - vertical splitting
+
    • TQt::SplitHCursor - horizontal splitting
+
    • TQt::PointingHandCursor - a pointing hand
+
    • TQt::ForbiddenCursor - a slashed circle
+
    • TQt::WhatsThisCursor - an arrow with a question mark
+
    • TQt::BitmapCursor
+
     ArrowCursor is the default for widgets in a normal state.
+
     
    Cursor Shapes
     
+
    TQt::DateFormat
    
+
+
      
+
    • TQt::TextDate - (default) TQt format
+
    • TQt::ISODate - ISO 8601 extended format (YYYY-MM-DD, or with time,
+YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS)
+
    • TQt::LocalDate - locale dependent format
+
    
+
    TQt::Dock
    
+
+
     Each dock window can be in one of the following positions:
+
      
+
    • TQt::DockTop - above the central widget, below the menu bar.
+
    • TQt::DockBottom - below the central widget, above the status bar.
+
    • TQt::DockLeft - to the left of the central widget.
+
    • TQt::DockRight - to the right of the central widget.
+
    • TQt::DockMinimized - the dock window is not shown (this is
+effectively a 'hidden' dock area); the handles of all minimized
+dock windows are drawn in one row below the menu bar.
+
    • TQt::DockTornOff - the dock window floats as its own top level
+window which always stays on top of the main window.
+
    • TQt::DockUnmanaged - not managed by a TQMainWindow.
+
    
+
    TQt::GUIStyle
    
+
+
     This type is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
      
+
    • TQt::WindowsStyle
+
    • TQt::MotifStyle
+
    • TQt::MacStyle
+
    • TQt::Win3Style
+
    • TQt::PMStyle
+
    
+
    TQt::ImageConversionFlags
    
+
+
     The conversion flag is a bitwise-OR of the following values. The
+options marked "(default)" are set if no other values from the
+list are included (since the defaults are zero):
+
     Color/Mono preference (ignored for TQBitmap)
+
      
+
    • TQt::AutoColor - (default) - If the image has depth 1 and contains only
+black and white pixels, the pixmap becomes monochrome.
+
    • TQt::ColorOnly - The pixmap is dithered/converted to the
+native display depth.
+
    • TQt::MonoOnly - The pixmap becomes monochrome. If necessary,
+it is dithered using the chosen dithering algorithm.
+
     Dithering mode preference for RGB channels
+
      
+
    • TQt::DiffuseDither - (default) - A high-quality dither.
+
    • TQt::OrderedDither - A faster, more ordered dither.
+
    • TQt::ThresholdDither - No dithering; closest color is used.
+
     Dithering mode preference for alpha channel
+
      
+
    • TQt::ThresholdAlphaDither - (default) - No dithering.
+
    • TQt::OrderedAlphaDither - A faster, more ordered dither.
+
    • TQt::DiffuseAlphaDither - A high-quality dither.
+
    • TQt::NoAlpha - Not supported.
+
     Color matching versus dithering preference
+
      
+
    • TQt::PreferDither - (default when converting to a pixmap) - Always dither
+32-bit images when the image is converted to 8 bits.
+
    • TQt::AvoidDither - (default when converting for the purpose of saving to
+file) - Dither 32-bit images only if the image has more than 256
+colors and it is being converted to 8 bits.
+
    • TQt::AutoDither - Not supported.
+
     The following are not values that are used directly, but masks for
+the above classes:
+
      
+
    • TQt::ColorMode_Mask - Mask for the color mode.
+
    • TQt::Dither_Mask - Mask for the dithering mode for RGB channels.
+
    • TQt::AlphaDither_Mask - Mask for the dithering mode for the alpha channel.
+
    • TQt::DitherMode_Mask - Mask for the mode that determines the preference of
+color matching versus dithering.
+
     Using 0 as the conversion flag sets all the default options.
+
+
    TQt::Key
    
+
+
     The key names used by TQt.
+
      
+
    • TQt::Key_Escape
+
    • TQt::Key_Tab
+
    • TQt::Key_Backtab
+
    • TQt::Key_Backspace
+
    • TQt::Key_Return
+
    • TQt::Key_Enter
+
    • TQt::Key_Insert
+
    • TQt::Key_Delete
+
    • TQt::Key_Pause
+
    • TQt::Key_Print
+
    • TQt::Key_SysReq
+
    • TQt::Key_Home
+
    • TQt::Key_End
+
    • TQt::Key_Left
+
    • TQt::Key_Up
+
    • TQt::Key_Right
+
    • TQt::Key_Down
+
    • TQt::Key_Prior
+
    • TQt::Key_Next
+
    • TQt::Key_Shift
+
    • TQt::Key_Control
+
    • TQt::Key_Meta
+
    • TQt::Key_Alt
+
    • TQt::Key_CapsLock
+
    • TQt::Key_NumLock
+
    • TQt::Key_ScrollLock
+
    • TQt::Key_Clear
+
    • TQt::Key_F1
+
    • TQt::Key_F2
+
    • TQt::Key_F3
+
    • TQt::Key_F4
+
    • TQt::Key_F5
+
    • TQt::Key_F6
+
    • TQt::Key_F7
+
    • TQt::Key_F8
+
    • TQt::Key_F9
+
    • TQt::Key_F10
+
    • TQt::Key_F11
+
    • TQt::Key_F12
+
    • TQt::Key_F13
+
    • TQt::Key_F14
+
    • TQt::Key_F15
+
    • TQt::Key_F16
+
    • TQt::Key_F17
+
    • TQt::Key_F18
+
    • TQt::Key_F19
+
    • TQt::Key_F20
+
    • TQt::Key_F21
+
    • TQt::Key_F22
+
    • TQt::Key_F23
+
    • TQt::Key_F24
+
    • TQt::Key_F25
+
    • TQt::Key_F26
+
    • TQt::Key_F27
+
    • TQt::Key_F28
+
    • TQt::Key_F29
+
    • TQt::Key_F30
+
    • TQt::Key_F31
+
    • TQt::Key_F32
+
    • TQt::Key_F33
+
    • TQt::Key_F34
+
    • TQt::Key_F35
+
    • TQt::Key_Super_L
+
    • TQt::Key_Super_R
+
    • TQt::Key_Menu
+
    • TQt::Key_Hyper_L
+
    • TQt::Key_Hyper_R
+
    • TQt::Key_Help
+
    • TQt::Key_Space
+
    • TQt::Key_Any
+
    • TQt::Key_Exclam
+
    • TQt::Key_QuoteDbl
+
    • TQt::Key_NumberSign
+
    • TQt::Key_Dollar
+
    • TQt::Key_Percent
+
    • TQt::Key_Ampersand
+
    • TQt::Key_Apostrophe
+
    • TQt::Key_ParenLeft
+
    • TQt::Key_ParenRight
+
    • TQt::Key_Asterisk
+
    • TQt::Key_Plus
+
    • TQt::Key_Comma
+
    • TQt::Key_Minus
+
    • TQt::Key_Period
+
    • TQt::Key_Slash
+
    • TQt::Key_0
+
    • TQt::Key_1
+
    • TQt::Key_2
+
    • TQt::Key_3
+
    • TQt::Key_4
+
    • TQt::Key_5
+
    • TQt::Key_6
+
    • TQt::Key_7
+
    • TQt::Key_8
+
    • TQt::Key_9
+
    • TQt::Key_Colon
+
    • TQt::Key_Semicolon
+
    • TQt::Key_Less
+
    • TQt::Key_Equal
+
    • TQt::Key_Greater
+
    • TQt::Key_Question
+
    • TQt::Key_At
+
    • TQt::Key_A
+
    • TQt::Key_B
+
    • TQt::Key_C
+
    • TQt::Key_D
+
    • TQt::Key_E
+
    • TQt::Key_F
+
    • TQt::Key_G
+
    • TQt::Key_H
+
    • TQt::Key_I
+
    • TQt::Key_J
+
    • TQt::Key_K
+
    • TQt::Key_L
+
    • TQt::Key_M
+
    • TQt::Key_N
+
    • TQt::Key_O
+
    • TQt::Key_P
+
    • TQt::Key_Q
+
    • TQt::Key_R
+
    • TQt::Key_S
+
    • TQt::Key_T
+
    • TQt::Key_U
+
    • TQt::Key_V
+
    • TQt::Key_W
+
    • TQt::Key_X
+
    • TQt::Key_Y
+
    • TQt::Key_Z
+
    • TQt::Key_BracketLeft
+
    • TQt::Key_Backslash
+
    • TQt::Key_BracketRight
+
    • TQt::Key_AsciiCircum
+
    • TQt::Key_Underscore
+
    • TQt::Key_QuoteLeft
+
    • TQt::Key_BraceLeft
+
    • TQt::Key_Bar
+
    • TQt::Key_BraceRight
+
    • TQt::Key_AsciiTilde
+
    • TQt::Key_nobreakspace
+
    • TQt::Key_exclamdown
+
    • TQt::Key_cent
+
    • TQt::Key_sterling
+
    • TQt::Key_currency
+
    • TQt::Key_yen
+
    • TQt::Key_brokenbar
+
    • TQt::Key_section
+
    • TQt::Key_diaeresis
+
    • TQt::Key_copyright
+
    • TQt::Key_ordfeminine
+
    • TQt::Key_guillemotleft
+
    • TQt::Key_notsign
+
    • TQt::Key_hyphen
+
    • TQt::Key_registered
+
    • TQt::Key_macron
+
    • TQt::Key_degree
+
    • TQt::Key_plusminus
+
    • TQt::Key_twosuperior
+
    • TQt::Key_threesuperior
+
    • TQt::Key_acute
+
    • TQt::Key_mu
+
    • TQt::Key_paragraph
+
    • TQt::Key_periodcentered
+
    • TQt::Key_cedilla
+
    • TQt::Key_onesuperior
+
    • TQt::Key_masculine
+
    • TQt::Key_guillemotright
+
    • TQt::Key_onequarter
+
    • TQt::Key_onehalf
+
    • TQt::Key_threequarters
+
    • TQt::Key_questiondown
+
    • TQt::Key_Agrave
+
    • TQt::Key_Aacute
+
    • TQt::Key_Acircumflex
+
    • TQt::Key_Atilde
+
    • TQt::Key_Adiaeresis
+
    • TQt::Key_Aring
+
    • TQt::Key_AE
+
    • TQt::Key_Ccedilla
+
    • TQt::Key_Egrave
+
    • TQt::Key_Eacute
+
    • TQt::Key_Ecircumflex
+
    • TQt::Key_Ediaeresis
+
    • TQt::Key_Igrave
+
    • TQt::Key_Iacute
+
    • TQt::Key_Icircumflex
+
    • TQt::Key_Idiaeresis
+
    • TQt::Key_ETH
+
    • TQt::Key_Ntilde
+
    • TQt::Key_Ograve
+
    • TQt::Key_Oacute
+
    • TQt::Key_Ocircumflex
+
    • TQt::Key_Otilde
+
    • TQt::Key_Odiaeresis
+
    • TQt::Key_multiply
+
    • TQt::Key_Ooblique
+
    • TQt::Key_Ugrave
+
    • TQt::Key_Uacute
+
    • TQt::Key_Ucircumflex
+
    • TQt::Key_Udiaeresis
+
    • TQt::Key_Yacute
+
    • TQt::Key_THORN
+
    • TQt::Key_ssharp
+
    • TQt::Key_agrave
+
    • TQt::Key_aacute
+
    • TQt::Key_acircumflex
+
    • TQt::Key_atilde
+
    • TQt::Key_adiaeresis
+
    • TQt::Key_aring
+
    • TQt::Key_ae
+
    • TQt::Key_ccedilla
+
    • TQt::Key_egrave
+
    • TQt::Key_eacute
+
    • TQt::Key_ecircumflex
+
    • TQt::Key_ediaeresis
+
    • TQt::Key_igrave
+
    • TQt::Key_iacute
+
    • TQt::Key_icircumflex
+
    • TQt::Key_idiaeresis
+
    • TQt::Key_eth
+
    • TQt::Key_ntilde
+
    • TQt::Key_ograve
+
    • TQt::Key_oacute
+
    • TQt::Key_ocircumflex
+
    • TQt::Key_otilde
+
    • TQt::Key_odiaeresis
+
    • TQt::Key_division
+
    • TQt::Key_oslash
+
    • TQt::Key_ugrave
+
    • TQt::Key_uacute
+
    • TQt::Key_ucircumflex
+
    • TQt::Key_udiaeresis
+
    • TQt::Key_yacute
+
    • TQt::Key_thorn
+
    • TQt::Key_ydiaeresis
+
     Multimedia keys
+
      
+
    • TQt::Key_Back
+
    • TQt::Key_Forward
+
    • TQt::Key_Stop
+
    • TQt::Key_Refresh
+
    • TQt::Key_VolumeDown
+
    • TQt::Key_VolumeMute
+
    • TQt::Key_VolumeUp
+
    • TQt::Key_BassBoost
+
    • TQt::Key_BassUp
+
    • TQt::Key_BassDown
+
    • TQt::Key_TrebleUp
+
    • TQt::Key_TrebleDown
+
    • TQt::Key_MediaPlay
+
    • TQt::Key_MediaStop
+
    • TQt::Key_MediaPrev
+
    • TQt::Key_MediaNext
+
    • TQt::Key_MediaRecord
+
    • TQt::Key_HomePage
+
    • TQt::Key_Favorites
+
    • TQt::Key_Search
+
    • TQt::Key_Standby
+
    • TQt::Key_OpenUrl
+
    • TQt::Key_LaunchMail
+
    • TQt::Key_LaunchMedia
+
    • TQt::Key_Launch0
+
    • TQt::Key_Launch1
+
    • TQt::Key_Launch2
+
    • TQt::Key_Launch3
+
    • TQt::Key_Launch4
+
    • TQt::Key_Launch5
+
    • TQt::Key_Launch6
+
    • TQt::Key_Launch7
+
    • TQt::Key_Launch8
+
    • TQt::Key_Launch9
+
    • TQt::Key_LaunchA
+
    • TQt::Key_LaunchB
+
    • TQt::Key_LaunchC
+
    • TQt::Key_LaunchD
+
    • TQt::Key_LaunchE
+
    • TQt::Key_LaunchF
+
    • TQt::Key_MediaLast
+
    • TQt::Key_unknown
+
    • TQt::Key_Direction_L - internal use only
+
    • TQt::Key_Direction_R - internal use only
+
     
+
    TQt::MacintoshVersion
    
+
+
      
+
    • TQt::MV_Unknown - Version cannot be detected
+
    • TQt::MV_9 - Mac OS 9
+
    • TQt::MV_10_DOT_3 - Mac OS X 10.3
+
    • TQt::MV_10_DOT_2 - Mac OS X 10.2
+
    • TQt::MV_10_DOT_1 - Mac OS X 10.1
+
    • TQt::MV_10_DOT_0 - Mac OS X 10.0
+
    • TQt::MV_10_DOT_4 - Mac OS X 10.4
+
    • TQt::MV_CHEETAH - 10.0 Codename
+
    • TQt::MV_PUMA - 10.1 Codename
+
    • TQt::MV_JAGUAR - 10.2 Codename
+
    • TQt::MV_PANTHER - 10.3 Codename
+
    • TQt::MV_TIGER - 10.4 Codename
+
    
+
    TQt::Modifier
    
+
+
     This enum type describes the keyboard modifier keys supported by
+TQt.
+
      
+
    • TQt::SHIFT - the Shift keys provided on all standard keyboards.
+
    • TQt::META - the Meta keys.
+
    • TQt::CTRL - the Ctrl keys.
+
    • TQt::ALT - the normal Alt keys, but not e.g. AltGr.
+
    • TQt::MODIFIER_MASK - is a mask of Shift, Ctrl, Alt and Meta.
+
    • TQt::UNICODE_ACCEL - the accelerator is specified as a Unicode code
+point, not as a TQt Key.
+
    
+
    TQt::Orientation
    
+
+
     This type is used to signify an object's orientation.
+
      
+
    • TQt::Horizontal
+
    • TQt::Vertical
+
     Orientation is used with TQScrollBar for example.
+
+
    TQt::PaintUnit
    
+
+
      
+
    • TQt::PixelUnit
+
    • TQt::LoMetricUnit - obsolete
+
    • TQt::HiMetricUnit - obsolete
+
    • TQt::LoEnglishUnit - obsolete
+
    • TQt::HiEnglishUnit - obsolete
+
    • TQt::TwipsUnit - obsolete
+
    
+
    TQt::PenCapStyle
    
+
+
     This enum type defines the pen cap styles supported by TQt, i.e.
+the line end caps that can be drawn using TQPainter.
+
      
+
    • TQt::FlatCap - a square line end that does not cover the end
+point of the line.
+
    • TQt::SquareCap - a square line end that covers the end point and
+extends beyond it with half the line width.
+
    • TQt::RoundCap - a rounded line end.
+
    • TQt::MPenCapStyle - mask of the pen cap styles.
+
     
    Pen Cap Styles
     
+
    TQt::PenJoinStyle
    
+
+
     This enum type defines the pen join styles supported by TQt, i.e.
+which joins between two connected lines can be drawn using
+TQPainter.
+
      
+
    • TQt::MiterJoin - The outer edges of the lines are extended to
+meet at an angle, and this area is filled.
+
    • TQt::BevelJoin - The triangular notch between the two lines is filled.
+
    • TQt::RoundJoin - A circular arc between the two lines is filled.
+
    • TQt::MPenJoinStyle - mask of the pen join styles.
+
     
    Pen Join Styles
     
+
    TQt::PenStyle
    
+
+
     This enum type defines the pen styles that can be drawn using
+TQPainter. The styles are
+
      
+
    • TQt::NoPen - no line at all. For example, TQPainter::drawRect()
+fills but does not draw any boundary line.
+
    • TQt::SolidLine - a simple line.
+
    • TQt::DashLine - dashes separated by a few pixels.
+
    • TQt::DotLine - dots separated by a few pixels.
+
    • TQt::DashDotLine - alternate dots and dashes.
+
    • TQt::DashDotDotLine - one dash, two dots, one dash, two dots.
+
    • TQt::MPenStyle - mask of the pen styles.
+
     
    Pen Styles
     
+
    TQt::RasterOp
    
+
+
     This enum type is used to describe the way things are written to
+the paint device. Each bit of the src (what you write)
+interacts with the corresponding bit of the dst pixel.
+
      
+
    • TQt::CopyROP - dst = src
+
    • TQt::OrROP - dst = src OR dst
+
    • TQt::XorROP - dst = src XOR dst
+
    • TQt::NotAndROP - dst = (NOT src) AND dst
+
    • TQt::EraseROP - an alias for NotAndROP
+
    • TQt::NotCopyROP - dst = NOT src
+
    • TQt::NotOrROP - dst = (NOT src) OR dst
+
    • TQt::NotXorROP - dst = (NOT src) XOR dst
+
    • TQt::AndROP - dst = src AND dst
+
    • TQt::NotEraseROP - an alias for AndROP
+
    • TQt::NotROP - dst = NOT dst
+
    • TQt::ClearROP - dst = 0
+
    • TQt::SetROP - dst = 1
+
    • TQt::NopROP - dst = dst
+
    • TQt::AndNotROP - dst = src AND (NOT dst)
+
    • TQt::OrNotROP - dst = src OR (NOT dst)
+
    • TQt::NandROP - dst = NOT (src AND dst)
+
    • TQt::NorROP - dst = NOT (src OR dst)
+
     By far the most useful ones are CopyROP and XorROP.
+
     On TQt/Embedded, only CopyROP, XorROP, and NotROP are supported.
+
+
    TQt::SequenceMatch
    
+
+
      
+
    • TQt::NoMatch - Sequences have nothing in common
+
    • TQt::PartialMatch - Sequences match partially, but are not complete
+
    • TQt::Identical - Sequences do not differ
+
    
+
    TQt::SortOrder
    
+
+
     This enum describes how the items in a widget are sorted.
+
      
+
    • TQt::Ascending - The items are sorted ascending e.g. starts with
+'AAA' ends with 'ZZZ' in Latin-1 locales
+
    • TQt::Descending - The items are sorted descending e.g. starts with
+'ZZZ' ends with 'AAA' in Latin-1 locales
+
    
+
    TQt::StringComparisonMode
    
+
+
     This enum type is used to set the string comparison mode when
+searching for an item. It is used by TQListBox, TQListView and
+TQIconView, for example. We'll refer to the string being searched
+as the 'target' string.
+
      
+
    • TQt::CaseSensitive - The strings must match case sensitively.
+
    • TQt::ExactMatch - The target and search strings must match exactly.
+
    • TQt::BeginsWith - The target string begins with the search string.
+
    • TQt::EndsWith - The target string ends with the search string.
+
    • TQt::Contains - The target string contains the search string.
+
     If you OR these flags together (excluding CaseSensitive), the
+search criteria be applied in the following order: ExactMatch,
+BeginsWith, EndsWith, Contains.
+
     Matching is case-insensitive unless CaseSensitive is set. CaseSensitive can be OR-ed with any combination of the other
+flags.
+
     
+
    TQt::TextFlags
    
+
+
     This enum type is used to define some modifier flags. Some of
+these flags only make sense in the context of printing:
+
      
+
    • TQt::SingleLine - Treats all whitespace as spaces and prints just
+one line.
+
    • TQt::DontClip - If it's impossible to stay within the given bounds,
+it prints outside.
+
    • TQt::ExpandTabs - Makes the U+0009 (ASCII tab) character move to
+the next tab stop.
+
    • TQt::ShowPrefix - Displays the string "&P" as P
+(see TQButton for an example). For an ampersand, use "&&".
+
    • TQt::WordBreak - Breaks lines at appropriate points, e.g. at word
+boundaries.
+
    • TQt::BreakAnywhere - Breaks lines anywhere, even within words.
+
    • TQt::NoAccel - Same as ShowPrefix but doesn't draw the underlines.
+
     You can use as many modifier flags as you want, except that SingleLine and WordBreak cannot be combined.
+
     Flags that are inappropriate for a given use (e.g. ShowPrefix to
+TQGridLayout::addWidget()) are generally ignored.
+
     
+
    TQt::TextFormat
    
+
+
     This enum is used in widgets that can display both plain text and
+rich text, e.g. TQLabel. It is used for deciding whether a text
+string should be interpreted as one or the other. This is normally
+done by passing one of the enum values to a setTextFormat()
+function.
+
      
+
    • TQt::PlainText - The text string is interpreted as a plain text
+string.
+
    • TQt::RichText - The text string is interpreted as a rich text
+string using the current TQStyleSheet::defaultSheet().
+
    • TQt::AutoText - The text string is interpreted as for RichText
+if TQStyleSheet::mightBeRichText() returns TRUE, otherwise as
+PlainText.
+
    • TQt::LogText - A special, limited text format which is only used
+by TQTextEdit in an optimized mode.
+
    
+
    TQt::TimeSpec
    
+
+
      
+
    • TQt::LocalTime - Locale dependent time (Timezones and Daylight Savings Time)
+
    • TQt::UTC - Coordinated Universal Time, replaces Greenwich Time
+
    
+
    TQt::UIEffect
    
+
+
      
+
    • TQt::UI_General
+
    • TQt::UI_AnimateMenu
+
    • TQt::UI_FadeMenu
+
    • TQt::UI_AnimateCombo
+
    • TQt::UI_AnimateTooltip
+
    • TQt::UI_FadeTooltip
+
    • TQt::UI_AnimateToolBox - Reserved
+
    
+
    TQt::WidgetFlags
    
+
+
     
+
     This enum type is used to specify various window-system properties
+for the widget. They are fairly unusual but necessary in a few
+cases. Some of these flags depend on whether the underlying window
+manager supports them. (See the toplevel example for an explanation and example of their
+use.)
+
     The main types are
+
      
+
    • TQt::WType_TopLevel - indicates that this widget is a top-level
+widget, usually with a window-system frame and so on.
+
    • TQt::WType_Dialog - indicates that this widget is a top-level
+window that should be decorated as a dialog (i.e. typically no
+maximize or minimize buttons in the title bar). If you want to use
+it as a modal dialog it should be launched from another window, or
+have a parent and this flag should be combined with WShowModal.
+If you make it modal, the dialog will prevent other top-level
+windows in the application from getting any input. WType_Dialog
+implies WType_TopLevel. We refer to a top-level window that has
+a parent as a secondary window. (See also WGroupLeader.)
+
    • TQt::WType_Popup - indicates that this widget is a popup
+top-level window, i.e. that it is modal, but has a window system
+frame appropriate for popup menus. WType_Popup implies
+WType_TopLevel.
+
    • TQt::WType_Desktop - indicates that this widget is the desktop.
+See also WPaintDesktop below. WType_Desktop implies WType_TopLevel.
+
     There are also a number of flags which you can use to customize
+the appearance of top-level windows. These have no effect on other
+windows:
+
      
+
    • TQt::WStyle_Customize - indicates that the WStyle_* flags
+should be used to build the window instead of the default flags.
+
    • TQt::WStyle_NormalBorder - gives the window a normal border.
+This cannot be combined with WStyle_DialogBorder or WStyle_NoBorder.
+
    • TQt::WStyle_DialogBorder - gives the window a thin dialog border.
+This cannot be combined with WStyle_NormalBorder or WStyle_NoBorder.
+
    • TQt::WStyle_NoBorder - produces a borderless window. Note that
+the user cannot move or resize a borderless window via the window
+system. This cannot be combined with WStyle_NormalBorder or WStyle_DialogBorder. On Windows, the flag works fine. On X11, the
+result of the flag is dependent on the window manager and its
+ability to understand MOTIF and/or NETWM hints: most existing
+modern window managers can handle this. With WX11BypassWM, you
+can bypass the window manager completely. This results in a
+borderless window that is not managed at all (i.e. no keyboard
+input unless you call setActiveWindow() manually).
+
    • TQt::WStyle_NoBorderEx - this value is obsolete. It has the same
+effect as using WStyle_NoBorder.
+
    • TQt::WStyle_Title - gives the window a title bar.
+
    • TQt::WStyle_SysMenu - adds a window system menu.
+
    • TQt::WStyle_Minimize - adds a minimize button. Note that on
+Windows this has to be combined with WStyle_SysMenu for it to
+work.
+
    • TQt::WStyle_Maximize - adds a maximize button. Note that on
+Windows this has to be combined with WStyle_SysMenu for it to work.
+
    • TQt::WStyle_MinMax - is equal to WStyle_Minimize|WStyle_Maximize. Note that on Windows this has to
+be combined with WStyle_SysMenu to work.
+
    • TQt::WStyle_ContextHelp - adds a context help button to dialogs.
+
    • TQt::WStyle_Tool - makes the window a tool window. A tool window
+is often a small window with a smaller than usual title bar and
+decoration, typically used for collections of tool buttons. It
+there is a parent, the tool window will always be kept on top of
+it. If there isn't a parent, you may consider passing WStyle_StaysOnTop as well. If the window system supports it, a
+tool window can be decorated with a somewhat lighter frame. It can
+also be combined with WStyle_NoBorder.
+
    • TQt::WStyle_StaysOnTop - informs the window system that the
+window should stay on top of all other windows. Note that on some
+window managers on X11 you also have to pass WX11BypassWM for
+this flag to work correctly.
+
    • TQt::WStyle_Dialog - indicates that the window is a logical
+subwindow of its parent (i.e. a dialog). The window will not get
+its own taskbar entry and will be kept on top of its parent by the
+window system. Usually it will also be minimized when the parent
+is minimized. If not customized, the window is decorated with a
+slightly simpler title bar. This is the flag TQDialog uses.
+
    • TQt::WStyle_Splash - indicates that the window is a splash screen.
+On X11, we try to follow NETWM standard for a splash screen window if the
+window manager supports is otherwise it is equivalent to WX11BypassWM. On
+other platforms, it is equivalent to WStyle_NoBorder | WMacNoSheet |
+WStyle_Tool | WWinOwnDC
+
     Modifier flags:
+
      
+
    • TQt::WDestructiveClose - makes TQt delete this widget when the
+widget has accepted closeEvent(), or when the widget tried to
+ignore closeEvent() but could not.
+
    • TQt::WPaintDesktop - gives this widget paint events for the
+desktop.
+
    • TQt::WPaintUnclipped - makes all painters operating on this
+widget unclipped. Children of this widget or other widgets in
+front of it do not clip the area the painter can paint on.
+
    • TQt::WPaintClever - indicates that TQt should not try to
+optimize repainting for the widget, but instead pass on window
+system repaint events directly. (This tends to produce more events
+and smaller repaint regions.)
+
    • TQt::WMouseNoMask - indicates that even if the widget has a mask,
+it wants mouse events for its entire rectangle.
+
    • TQt::WStaticContents - indicates that the widget contents are
+north-west aligned and static. On resize, such a widget will
+receive paint events only for the newly visible part of itself.
+
    • TQt::WNoAutoErase - indicates that the widget paints all its
+pixels. Updating, resizing, scrolling and focus changes should
+therefore not erase the widget. This allows smart-repainting to
+avoid flicker.
+
    • TQt::WResizeNoErase - this value is obsolete; use WNoAutoErase instead.
+
    • TQt::WRepaintNoErase - this value is obsolete; use WNoAutoErase instead.
+
    • TQt::WGroupLeader - makes this window a group leader. A group
+leader should not have a parent (i.e. it should be a top-level
+window). Any decendant windows (direct or indirect) of a group
+leader are in its group; other windows are not. If you show a
+secondary window from the group (i.e. show a window whose top-most
+parent is a group leader), that window will be modal with respect
+to the other windows in the group, but modeless with respect to
+windows in other groups.
+
     Miscellaneous flags
+
      
+
    • TQt::WShowModal - see WType_Dialog
+
     Internal flags.
+
      
+
    • TQt::WNoMousePropagation
+
    • TQt::WStaticContents
+
    • TQt::WStyle_Reserved
+
    • TQt::WSubWindow
+
    • TQt::WType_Modal
+
    • TQt::WWinOwnDC
+
    • TQt::WX11BypassWM
+
    • TQt::WMacNoSheet
+
    • TQt::WMacDrawer
+
    • TQt::WStyle_Mask
+
    • TQt::WType_Mask
+
     
+
    TQt::WidgetState
    
+
+
     Internal flags.
+
      
+
    • TQt::WState_Created
+
    • TQt::WState_Disabled
+
    • TQt::WState_Visible
+
    • TQt::WState_ForceHide
+
    • TQt::WState_OwnCursor
+
    • TQt::WState_MouseTracking
+
    • TQt::WState_CompressKeys
+
    • TQt::WState_BlockUpdates
+
    • TQt::WState_InPaintEvent
+
    • TQt::WState_Reparented
+
    • TQt::WState_ConfigPending
+
    • TQt::WState_Resized
+
    • TQt::WState_AutoMask
+
    • TQt::WState_Polished
+
    • TQt::WState_DND
+
    • TQt::WState_Reserved0 - internal
+
    • TQt::WState_CreatedHidden
+
    • TQt::WState_Maximized
+
    • TQt::WState_Minimized
+
    • TQt::WState_ForceDisabled
+
    • TQt::WState_Exposed
+
    • TQt::WState_HasMouse
+
    • TQt::WState_CreatedHidden
+
    • TQt::WState_OwnSizePolicy
+
    • TQt::WState_FullScreen
+
    
+
    TQt::WindowState
    
+
+
     
+
     This enum type is used to specify the current state of a top-level
+window.
+
     The states are
+
      
+
    • TQt::WindowNoState - The window has no state set (in normal state).
+
    • TQt::WindowMinimized - The window is minimized (i.e. iconified).
+
    • TQt::WindowMaximized - The window is maximized with a frame around it.
+
    • TQt::WindowFullScreen - The window fills the entire screen without any frame around it.
+
    • TQt::WindowActive - The window is the active window, i.e. it has keyboard focus.
+
     
+
    TQt::WindowsVersion
    
+
+
      
+
    • TQt::WV_32s - Windows 3.1 with Win 32s
+
    • TQt::WV_95 - Windows 95
+
    • TQt::WV_98 - Windows 98
+
    • TQt::WV_Me - Windows Me
+
    • TQt::WV_DOS_based
+
    • TQt::WV_NT - Windows NT
+
    • TQt::WV_2000 - Windows 2000
+
    • TQt::WV_XP - Windows XP
+
    • TQt::WV_2003 - Windows Server 2003
+
    • TQt::WV_NT_based
+
    • TQt::WV_VISTA - Windows Vista
+
    • TQt::WV_CE - Windows CE
+
    • TQt::WV_CENET - Windows CE .NET
+
    • TQt::WV_CE_based
+
    
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqtabbar.html b/doc/html/ntqtabbar.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2875c7b3d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqtabbar.html
@@ -0,0 +1,345 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQTabBar Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQTabBar Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQTabBar class provides a tab bar, e.g. for use in tabbed dialogs.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqtabbar.h>
+
    Inherits TQWidget.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • int count - the number of tabs in the tab bar  (read only)
      • 
+
    • int currentTab - the id of the tab bar's visible tab
      • 
+
    • int keyboardFocusTab - the id of the tab that has the keyboard focus  (read only)
      • 
+
    • Shape shape - the shape of the tabs in the tab bar
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • virtual void paint ( TQPainter * p, TQTab * t, bool selected ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual void paintLabel ( TQPainter * p, const TQRect & br, TQTab * t, bool has_focus ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual void paintEvent ( TQPaintEvent * e )
      • 
+
    • TQPtrList<TQTab> * tabList ()
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQTabBar class provides a tab bar, e.g. for use in tabbed dialogs.
+
     
+
     TQTabBar is straightforward to use; it draws the tabs using one of
+the predefined shapes, and emits a
+signal when a tab is selected. It can be subclassed to tailor the
+look and feel. TQt also provides a ready-made TQTabWidget and a
+TQTabDialog.
+
     The choice of tab shape is a matter of taste, although tab dialogs
+(for preferences and similar) invariably use RoundedAbove;
+nobody uses TriangularAbove. Tab controls in windows other than
+dialogs almost always use either RoundedBelow or TriangularBelow. Many spreadsheets and other tab controls in which
+all the pages are essentially similar use TriangularBelow,
+whereas RoundedBelow is used mostly when the pages are
+different (e.g. a multi-page tool palette).
+
     The most important part of TQTabBar's API is the selected() signal.
+This is emitted whenever the selected page changes (even at
+startup, when the selected page changes from 'none'). There is
+also a slot, setCurrentTab(), which can be used to select a page
+programmatically.
+
     TQTabBar creates automatic accelerator keys in the manner of
+TQButton; e.g. if a tab's label is "&Graphics", Alt+G becomes an
+accelerator key for switching to that tab.
+
     The following virtual functions may need to be reimplemented:
+
      
+
    •  paint() paints a single tab. paintEvent() calls paint() for
+each tab so that any overlap will look right.
+
    •  addTab() creates a new tab and adds it to the bar.
+
    •  selectTab() decides which tab, if any, the user selects with the mouse.
+
    
+
     The index of the current tab is returned by currentTab(). The tab
+with a particular index is returned by tabAt(), the tab with a
+particular id is returned by tab(). The index of a tab is returned
+by indexOf(). The current tab can be set by index or tab pointer
+using one of the setCurrentTab() functions.
+
      
+
    See also Advanced Widgets.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQTabBar::Shape
    
+
+
     This enum type lists the built-in shapes supported by TQTabBar:
+
      
+
    • TQTabBar::RoundedAbove - the normal rounded look above the pages
+
    • TQTabBar::RoundedBelow - the normal rounded look below the pages
+
    • TQTabBar::TriangularAbove - triangular tabs above the pages (very
+unusual; included for completeness)
+
    • TQTabBar::TriangularBelow - triangular tabs similar to those used in
+the Excel spreadsheet, for example
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQTabBar::TQTabBar ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a new, empty tab bar; the parent and name
+arguments are passed on to the TQWidget constructor.
+
+
    TQTabBar::~TQTabBar ()
+
    
+Destroys the tab control, freeing memory used.
+
+
    int TQTabBar::addTab ( TQTab * newTab ) [virtual]
+
    
+Adds the tab, newTab, to the tab control.
+
     Sets newTab's id to a new id and places the tab just to the
+right of the existing tabs. If the tab's label contains an
+ampersand, the letter following the ampersand is used as an
+accelerator for the tab, e.g. if the label is "Bro&wse" then
+Alt+W becomes an accelerator which will move the focus to this
+tab. Returns the id.
+
     
    See also insertTab().
+
+
    int TQTabBar::count () const
+
    Returns the number of tabs in the tab bar.
+See the "count" property for details.
+
    int TQTabBar::currentTab () const
+
    Returns the id of the tab bar's visible tab.
+See the "currentTab" property for details.
+
    int TQTabBar::indexOf ( int id ) const
+
    
+Returns the position index of the tab with id id or -1 if no
+tab has this id.
+
     
    See also tabAt().
+
+
    int TQTabBar::insertTab ( TQTab * newTab, int index = -1 ) [virtual]
+
    
+Inserts the tab, newTab, into the tab control.
+
     If index is not specified, the tab is simply appended.
+Otherwise it's inserted at the specified position.
+
     Sets newTab's id to a new id. If the tab's label contains an
+ampersand, the letter following the ampersand is used as an
+accelerator for the tab, e.g. if the label is "Bro&wse" then
+Alt+W becomes an accelerator which will move the focus to this
+tab. Returns the id.
+
     
    See also addTab().
+
+
    bool TQTabBar::isTabEnabled ( int id ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the tab with id id exists and is enabled;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setTabEnabled().
+
+
    int TQTabBar::keyboardFocusTab () const
+
    Returns the id of the tab that has the keyboard focus.
+See the "keyboardFocusTab" property for details.
+
    void TQTabBar::layoutChanged () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     TQTabBar emits the signal whenever the layout of the tab bar has
+been recalculated, for example when the contents of a tab change.
+
+
    void TQTabBar::layoutTabs () [virtual]
+
    
+Lays out all existing tabs according to their label and their
+iconset.
+
+
    void TQTabBar::paint ( TQPainter * p, TQTab * t, bool selected ) const [virtual protected]
+
    
+Paints the tab t using painter p. If and only if selected
+is TRUE, t is drawn currently selected.
+
     This virtual function may be reimplemented to change the look of
+TQTabBar. If you decide to reimplement it, you may also need to
+reimplement sizeHint().
+
+
    void TQTabBar::paintEvent ( TQPaintEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Repaints the tab row. All the painting is done by paint();
+paintEvent() only decides which tabs need painting and in what
+order. The event is passed in e.
+
     
    See also paint().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
+
    void TQTabBar::paintLabel ( TQPainter * p, const TQRect & br, TQTab * t, bool has_focus ) const [virtual protected]
+
    
+Paints the label of tab t centered in rectangle br using
+painter p. A focus indication is drawn if has_focus is TRUE.
+
+
    void TQTabBar::removeTab ( TQTab * t ) [virtual]
+
    
+Removes tab t from the tab control, and deletes the tab.
+
+
    void TQTabBar::removeToolTip ( int index )
+
    
+Removes the tool tip for the tab at index position index.
+
+
    TQTab * TQTabBar::selectTab ( const TQPoint & p ) const [virtual]
+
    
+This virtual function is called by the mouse event handlers to
+determine which tab is pressed. The default implementation returns
+a pointer to the tab whose bounding rectangle contains p, if
+exactly one tab's bounding rectangle contains p. Otherwise it
+returns 0.
+
     
    See also mousePressEvent() and mouseReleaseEvent().
+
+
    void TQTabBar::selected ( int id ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     TQTabBar emits this signal whenever any tab is selected, whether by
+the program or by the user. The argument id is the id of the
+tab as returned by addTab().
+
     show() is guaranteed to emit this signal; you can display your
+page in a slot connected to this signal.
+
+
    void TQTabBar::setCurrentTab ( int ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the id of the tab bar's visible tab.
+See the "currentTab" property for details.
+
    void TQTabBar::setCurrentTab ( TQTab * tab ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Raises tab and emits the selected() signal unless the tab was
+already current.
+
     
    See also currentTab and selected().
+
+
    void TQTabBar::setShape ( Shape ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the shape of the tabs in the tab bar.
+See the "shape" property for details.
+
    void TQTabBar::setTabEnabled ( int id, bool enabled ) [virtual]
+
    
+Enables tab id if enabled is TRUE or disables it if enabled is FALSE. If id is currently selected,
+setTabEnabled(FALSE) makes another tab selected.
+
     setTabEnabled() updates the display if this causes a change in id's status.
+
     
    See also update() and isTabEnabled().
+
+
    void TQTabBar::setToolTip ( int index, const TQString & tip )
+
    
+Sets the tool tip for the tab at index position index to tip.
+
+
    Shape TQTabBar::shape () const
+
    Returns the shape of the tabs in the tab bar.
+See the "shape" property for details.
+
    TQTab * TQTabBar::tab ( int id ) const
+
    
+Returns the tab with id id or 0 if there is no such tab.
+
     
    See also count.
+
+
    TQTab * TQTabBar::tabAt ( int index ) const
+
    
+Returns the tab at position index.
+
     
    See also indexOf().
+
+
    TQPtrList<TQTab> * TQTabBar::tabList () [protected]
+
    
+The list of TQTab objects in the tab bar.
+
     This list is unlikely to be in the order that the TQTab elements
+appear visually. One way of iterating over the tabs is like this:
+
    +    for ( uint i = 0; i < myTabBar->count(); ++i ) {
+        nextTab = myTabBar->tabAt( i );
+        // do something with nextTab
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    TQString TQTabBar::toolTip ( int index ) const
+
    
+Returns the tool tip for the tab at index position index.
+
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    int count
    
+
    This property holds the number of tabs in the tab bar.
+
    Get this property's value with count().
+
    See also tab().
+
+
    int currentTab
    
+
    This property holds the id of the tab bar's visible tab.
+
    If no tab page is currently visible, the property's value is -1.
+Even if the property's value is not -1, you cannot assume that the
+user can see the relevant page, or that the tab is enabled. When
+you need to display something the value of this property
+represents the best page to display.
+
     When this property is set to id, it will raise the tab with the
+id id and emit the selected() signal.
+
     
    See also selected() and isTabEnabled().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setCurrentTab() and get this property's value with currentTab().
+
    int keyboardFocusTab
    
+
    This property holds the id of the tab that has the keyboard focus.
+
    This property contains the id of the tab that has the keyboard
+focus or -1 if the tab bar does not have the keyboard focus.
+
+
    Get this property's value with keyboardFocusTab().
+
    Shape shape
    
+
    This property holds the shape of the tabs in the tab bar.
+
    The value of this property is one of the following: RoundedAbove (default), RoundedBelow, TriangularAbove or TriangularBelow.
+
     
    See also Shape.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setShape() and get this property's value with shape().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqtabdialog.html b/doc/html/ntqtabdialog.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f82a877c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqtabdialog.html
@@ -0,0 +1,506 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQTabDialog Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQTabDialog Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQTabDialog class provides a stack of tabbed widgets.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqtabdialog.h>
+
    Inherits TQDialog.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
     The TQTabDialog class provides a stack of tabbed widgets.
+
     
+
+
     A tabbed dialog is one in which several "tab pages" are available.
+By clicking on a tab page's tab or by pressing the indicated
+Alt+letter key combination, the user can select which tab page
+they want to use.
+
     TQTabDialog provides a tab bar consisting of single row of tabs at
+the top; each tab has an associated widget which is that tab's
+tab page. In addition, TQTabDialog provides an OK button and the
+following optional buttons: Apply, Cancel, Defaults and Help.
+
     The normal way to use TQTabDialog is to do the following in the
+constructor:
+
      
+
    1.  Create a TQTabDialog.
+
    2.  Create a TQWidget for each of the pages in the tab dialog, insert
+children into it, set up geometry management for it, and use
+addTab() (or insertTab()) to set up a tab and keyboard accelerator
+for it.
+
    3.  Set up the buttons for the tab dialog using setOkButton(),
+setApplyButton(), setDefaultsButton(), setCancelButton() and
+setHelpButton().
+
    4.  Connect to the signals and slots.
+
    
+
     If you don't call addTab() the page you have created will not be
+visible. Don't confuse the object name you supply to the
+TQWidget constructor and the tab label you supply to addTab();
+addTab() takes user-visible name that appears on the widget's tab
+and may identify an accelerator, whereas the widget name is used
+primarily for debugging.
+
     Almost all applications have to connect the applyButtonPressed()
+signal to something. applyButtonPressed() is emitted when either OK
+or Apply is clicked, and your slot must copy the dialog's state into
+the application.
+
     There are also several other signals which may be useful:
+
      
+
    •  cancelButtonPressed() is emitted when the user clicks Cancel.
+
    •  defaultButtonPressed() is emitted when the user clicks Defaults;
+the slot it is connected to should reset the state of the dialog to
+the application defaults.
+
    •  helpButtonPressed() is emitted when the user clicks Help.
+
    •  aboutToShow() is emitted at the start of show(); if there is any
+chance that the state of the application may change between the
+creation of the tab dialog and the time show() is called, you must
+connect this signal to a slot that resets the state of the dialog.
+
    •  currentChanged() is emitted when the user selects a page.
+
    
+
     Each tab is either enabled or disabled at any given time (see
+setTabEnabled()). If a tab is enabled the tab text is drawn in
+black and the user can select that tab. If it is disabled the tab
+is drawn in a different way and the user cannot select that tab.
+Note that even if a tab is disabled, the page can still be visible;
+for example, if all of the tabs happen to be disabled.
+
     You can change a tab's label and iconset using changeTab(). A tab
+page can be removed with removePage() and shown with showPage(). The
+current page is given by currentPage().
+
     TQTabDialog does not support tabs on the sides or bottom, nor can
+you set or retrieve the visible page. If you need more functionality
+than TQTabDialog provides, consider creating a TQDialog and using a
+TQTabBar with TQTabWidgets.
+
     Most of the functionality in TQTabDialog is provided by a TQTabWidget.
+
      
+
     
    See also TQDialog and Dialog Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQTabDialog::TQTabDialog ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a TQTabDialog with only an OK button.
+The parent, name, modal and widget flag, f, arguments
+are passed on to the TQDialog constructor.
+
+
    TQTabDialog::~TQTabDialog ()
+
    
+Destroys the tab dialog.
+
+
    void TQTabDialog::aboutToShow () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted by show() when it is time to set the state of
+the dialog's contents. The dialog should reflect the current state
+of the application when it appears; if there is any possibility that
+the state of the application may change between the time you call
+TQTabDialog::TQTabDialog() and TQTabDialog::show(), you should set the
+dialog's state in a slot and connect this signal to it.
+
     This applies mainly to TQTabDialog objects that are kept around
+hidden, rather than being created, shown, and deleted afterwards.
+
     
    See also applyButtonPressed(), show(), and cancelButtonPressed().
+
+
    void TQTabDialog::addTab ( TQWidget * child, const TQString & label )
+
    
+Adds another tab and page to the tab view.
+
     The new page is child; the tab's label is label.
+Note the difference between the widget name (which you supply to
+widget constructors and to setTabEnabled(), for example) and the tab
+label. The name is internal to the program and invariant, whereas
+the label is shown on-screen and may vary according to language and
+other factors.
+
     If the tab's label contains an ampersand, the letter following
+the ampersand is used as an accelerator for the tab, e.g. if the
+label is "Bro&wse" then Alt+W becomes an accelerator which will
+move the focus to this tab.
+
     If you call addTab() after show() the screen will flicker and the
+user may be confused.
+
     
    See also insertTab().
+
+
    void TQTabDialog::addTab ( TQWidget * child, const TQIconSet & iconset, const TQString & label )
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This version of the function shows the iconset as well as the label on the tab of child.
+
+
    void TQTabDialog::addTab ( TQWidget * child, TQTab * tab )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This is a lower-level method for adding tabs, similar to the other
+addTab() method. It is useful if you are using setTabBar() to set a
+TQTabBar subclass with an overridden TQTabBar::paint() function for a
+subclass of TQTab.
+
     The child is the widget to be placed on the new tab page. The tab is the tab to display on the tab page -- normally this shows a
+label or an icon that identifies the tab page.
+
     
+
    void TQTabDialog::applyButtonPressed () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when either the Apply or OK button is clicked.
+
     It should be connected to a slot (or several slots) that change the
+application's state according to the state of the dialog.
+
     
    See also cancelButtonPressed(), defaultButtonPressed(), and setApplyButton().
+
+
    void TQTabDialog::cancelButtonPressed () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the Cancel button is clicked. It is
+automatically connected to TQDialog::reject(), which will hide the
+dialog.
+
     The Cancel button should not change the application's state at all,
+so you should generally not need to connect it to any slot.
+
     
    See also applyButtonPressed(), defaultButtonPressed(), and setCancelButton().
+
+
    void TQTabDialog::changeTab ( TQWidget * w, const TQIconSet & iconset, const TQString & label )
+
    
+Changes tab page w's iconset to iconset and label to label.
+
     
+
    void TQTabDialog::changeTab ( TQWidget * w, const TQString & label )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Defines a new label for the tab of page w
+
+
    void TQTabDialog::currentChanged ( TQWidget * ) [signal]
+
     
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the current page changes.
+
     
    See also currentPage(), showPage(), and tabLabel().
+
+
    TQWidget * TQTabDialog::currentPage () const
+
      Returns a pointer to the page currently being displayed by the
+tab dialog. The tab dialog does its best to make sure that this value
+is never 0 (but if you try hard enough, it can be).
+
+
    void TQTabDialog::defaultButtonPressed () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the Defaults button is pressed. It
+should reset the dialog (but not the application) to the "factory
+defaults".
+
     The application's state should not be changed until the user clicks
+Apply or OK.
+
     
    See also applyButtonPressed(), cancelButtonPressed(), and setDefaultButton().
+
+
    bool TQTabDialog::hasApplyButton () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the tab dialog has an Apply button; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setApplyButton(), applyButtonPressed(), hasCancelButton(), and hasDefaultButton().
+
+
    bool TQTabDialog::hasCancelButton () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the tab dialog has a Cancel button; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setCancelButton(), cancelButtonPressed(), hasApplyButton(), and hasDefaultButton().
+
+
    bool TQTabDialog::hasDefaultButton () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the tab dialog has a Defaults button; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setDefaultButton(), defaultButtonPressed(), hasApplyButton(), and hasCancelButton().
+
+
    bool TQTabDialog::hasHelpButton () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the tab dialog has a Help button; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     
    See also setHelpButton(), helpButtonPressed(), hasApplyButton(), and hasCancelButton().
+
+
    bool TQTabDialog::hasOkButton () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the tab dialog has an OK button; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     
    See also setOkButton(), hasApplyButton(), hasCancelButton(), and hasDefaultButton().
+
+
    void TQTabDialog::helpButtonPressed () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the Help button is pressed. It
+could be used to present information about how to use the dialog.
+
     
    See also applyButtonPressed(), cancelButtonPressed(), and setHelpButton().
+
+
    void TQTabDialog::insertTab ( TQWidget * child, const TQString & label, int index = -1 )
+
    
+Inserts another tab and page to the tab view.
+
     The new page is child; the tab's label is label.
+Note the difference between the widget name (which you supply to
+widget constructors and to setTabEnabled(), for example) and the tab
+label. The name is internal to the program and invariant, whereas
+the label is shown on-screen and may vary according to language and
+other factors.
+
     If the tab's label contains an ampersand, the letter following
+the ampersand is used as an accelerator for the tab, e.g. if the
+label is "Bro&wse" then Alt+W becomes an accelerator which will
+move the focus to this tab.
+
     If index is not specified, the tab is simply added. Otherwise
+it is inserted at the specified position.
+
     If you call insertTab() after show(), the screen will flicker and the
+user may be confused.
+
     
    See also addTab().
+
+
    void TQTabDialog::insertTab ( TQWidget * child, const TQIconSet & iconset, const TQString & label, int index = -1 )
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This version of the function shows the iconset as well as the label on the tab of child.
+
+
    void TQTabDialog::insertTab ( TQWidget * child, TQTab * tab, int index = -1 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This is a lower-level method for inserting tabs, similar to the other
+insertTab() method. It is useful if you are using setTabBar() to set a
+TQTabBar subclass with an overridden TQTabBar::paint() function for a
+subclass of TQTab.
+
     The child is the widget to be placed on the new tab page. The tab is the tab to display on the tab page -- normally this shows a
+label or an icon that identifies the tab page. The index is the
+position where this tab page should be inserted.
+
     
+
    bool TQTabDialog::isTabEnabled ( TQWidget * w ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the page w is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setTabEnabled() and TQWidget::enabled.
+
+
    bool TQTabDialog::isTabEnabled ( const char * name ) const
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Returns TRUE if the page with object name name is enabled and
+FALSE if it is disabled.
+
     If name is 0 or not the name of any of the pages, isTabEnabled()
+returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setTabEnabled() and TQWidget::enabled.
+
+
    void TQTabDialog::removePage ( TQWidget * w )
+
     Removes page w from this stack of widgets. Does not
+delete w.
+
    See also showPage(), TQTabWidget::removePage(), and TQWidgetStack::removeWidget().
+
+
    void TQTabDialog::selected ( const TQString & ) [signal]
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     This signal is emitted whenever a tab is selected (raised),
+including during the first show().
+
     
    See also raise().
+
+
    void TQTabDialog::setApplyButton ( const TQString & text )
+
    
+Adds an Apply button to the dialog. The button's text is set to text.
+
     The Apply button should apply the current settings in the dialog box
+to the application while keeping the dialog visible.
+
     When Apply is clicked, the applyButtonPressed() signal is emitted.
+
     If text is a
+null string,
+no button is shown.
+
     
    See also setCancelButton(), setDefaultButton(), and applyButtonPressed().
+
+
    void TQTabDialog::setApplyButton ()
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Adds an Apply button to the dialog. The button's text is set to
+a localizable "Apply".
+
+
    void TQTabDialog::setCancelButton ( const TQString & text )
+
    
+Adds a Cancel button to the dialog. The button's text is set to text.
+
     The cancel button should always return the application to the state
+it was in before the tab view popped up, or if the user has clicked
+Apply, back to the state immediately after the last Apply.
+
     When Cancel is clicked, the cancelButtonPressed() signal is emitted.
+The dialog is closed at the same time.
+
     If text is a
+null string,
+no button is shown.
+
     
    See also setApplyButton(), setDefaultButton(), and cancelButtonPressed().
+
+
    void TQTabDialog::setCancelButton ()
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Adds a Cancel button to the dialog. The button's text is set to
+a localizable "Cancel".
+
+
    void TQTabDialog::setDefaultButton ( const TQString & text )
+
    
+Adds a Defaults button to the dialog. The button's text is set to text.
+
     The Defaults button should set the dialog (but not the application)
+back to the application defaults.
+
     When Defaults is clicked, the defaultButtonPressed() signal is emitted.
+
     If text is a
+null string,
+no button is shown.
+
     
    See also setApplyButton(), setCancelButton(), and defaultButtonPressed().
+
+
    void TQTabDialog::setDefaultButton ()
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Adds a Defaults button to the dialog. The button's text is set to
+a localizable "Defaults".
+
+
    void TQTabDialog::setFont ( const TQFont & font ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the font for the tabs to font.
+
     If the widget is visible, the display is updated with the new font
+immediately. There may be some geometry changes, depending on the
+size of the old and new fonts.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
+
    void TQTabDialog::setHelpButton ( const TQString & text )
+
    
+Adds a Help button to the dialog. The button's text is set to text.
+
     When Help is clicked, the helpButtonPressed() signal is emitted.
+
     If text is a
+null string,
+no button is shown.
+
     
    See also setApplyButton(), setCancelButton(), and helpButtonPressed().
+
+
    void TQTabDialog::setHelpButton ()
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Adds a Help button to the dialog. The button's text is set to
+a localizable "Help".
+
+
    void TQTabDialog::setOkButton ( const TQString & text )
+
    
+Adds an OK button to the dialog and sets the button's text to text.
+
     When the OK button is clicked, the applyButtonPressed() signal is emitted,
+and the current settings in the dialog box should be applied to
+the application. The dialog then closes.
+
     If text is a
+null string,
+no button is shown.
+
     
    See also setCancelButton(), setDefaultButton(), and applyButtonPressed().
+
+
    void TQTabDialog::setOkButton ()
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Adds an OK button to the dialog. The button's text is set to
+a localizable "OK".
+
+
    void TQTabDialog::setTabBar ( TQTabBar * tb ) [protected]
+
    
+Replaces the TQTabBar heading the dialog by the given tab bar, tb.
+Note that this must be called before any tabs have been added,
+or the behavior is undefined.
+
    See also tabBar().
+
+
    void TQTabDialog::setTabEnabled ( TQWidget * w, bool enable )
+
    
+If enable is TRUE the page w is enabled; otherwise w is
+disabled. The page's tab is redrawn appropriately.
+
     TQTabWidget uses TQWidget::setEnabled() internally, rather than keeping a
+separate flag.
+
     Note that even a disabled tab and tab page may be visible. If the
+page is already visible TQTabWidget will not hide it; if all the
+pages are disabled TQTabWidget will show one of them.
+
     
    See also isTabEnabled() and TQWidget::enabled.
+
+
    void TQTabDialog::setTabEnabled ( const char * name, bool enable )
+
    This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Finds the page with object name name, enables/disables it
+according to the value of enable and redraws the page's tab
+appropriately.
+
     TQTabDialog uses TQWidget::setEnabled() internally, rather than keeping a
+separate flag.
+
     Note that even a disabled tab/page may be visible. If the page is
+already visible TQTabDialog will not hide it; if all the pages
+are disabled TQTabDialog will show one of them.
+
     The object name is used (rather than the tab label) because the tab
+text may not be invariant in multi-language applications.
+
     
    See also isTabEnabled() and TQWidget::enabled.
+
+
    void TQTabDialog::showPage ( TQWidget * w )
+
      Ensures that widget w is shown. This is mainly useful for accelerators.
+
     Warning: If used carelessly, this function can easily surprise or
+confuse the user.
+
     
    See also TQTabBar::currentTab.
+
+
    TQTabBar * TQTabDialog::tabBar () const [protected]
+
    
+Returns the currently set TQTabBar.
+
    See also setTabBar().
+
+
    TQString TQTabDialog::tabLabel ( TQWidget * w )
+
      Returns the text in the tab for page w.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqtable.html b/doc/html/ntqtable.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a49d68afd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqtable.html
@@ -0,0 +1,1477 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQTable Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQTable Class Reference
    [table module]
    
+
+
    The TQTable class provides a flexible editable table widget.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqtable.h>
+
    Inherits TQScrollView.
+
    Inherited by TQDataTable.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • bool columnMovingEnabled - whether columns can be moved by the user
      • 
+
    • FocusStyle focusStyle - how the current (focus) cell is drawn
      • 
+
    • int numCols - the number of columns in the table
      • 
+
    • int numRows - the number of rows in the table
      • 
+
    • int numSelections - the number of selections  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool readOnly - whether the table is read-only
      • 
+
    • bool rowMovingEnabled - whether rows can be moved by the user
      • 
+
    • SelectionMode selectionMode - the current selection mode
      • 
+
    • bool showGrid - whether the table's grid is displayed
      • 
+
    • bool sorting - whether a click on the header of a column sorts that column
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Protected Slots
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQTable class provides a flexible editable table widget.
+
+
     
+
+
+
     TQTable is easy to use, although it does have a large API because
+of the comprehensive functionality that it provides. TQTable
+includes functions for manipulating headers, rows and columns,
+cells and selections. TQTable also provides in-place editing and
+drag and drop, as well as a useful set of
+signals. TQTable efficiently supports very
+large tables, for example, tables one million by one million cells
+are perfectly possible. TQTable is economical with memory, using
+none for unused cells.
+
     
    +    TQTable *table = new TQTable( 100, 250, this );
+    table->setPixmap( 3, 2, pix );
+    table->setText( 3, 2, "A pixmap" );
+    
    
+ 
+
     The first line constructs the table specifying its size in rows
+and columns. We then insert a pixmap and some text into the same cell, with the pixmap appearing to the
+left of the text. TQTable cells can be populated with
+TQTableItems, TQComboTableItems or by TQCheckTableItems.
+By default a vertical header appears at the left of the table
+showing row numbers and a horizontal header appears at the top of
+the table showing column numbers. (The numbers displayed start at
+1, although row and column numbers within TQTable begin at 0.)
+
     If you want to use mouse tracking call setMouseTracking( TRUE ) on
+the viewport; (see TQScrollView).
+
     
    Table Items
     
+
     
+
     Headers
+
    
+
     TQTable supports a header column, e.g. to display row numbers, and
+a header row, e.g to display column titles. To set row or column
+labels use TQHeader::setLabel() on the pointers returned by
+verticalHeader() and horizontalHeader() respectively. The vertical
+header is displayed within the table's left margin whose width is
+set with setLeftMargin(). The horizontal header is displayed
+within the table's top margin whose height is set with
+setTopMargin(). The table's grid can be switched off with
+setShowGrid(). If you want to hide a horizontal header call
+hide(), and call setTopMargin( 0 ) so that the area the header
+would have occupied is reduced to zero size.
+
     Header labels are indexed via their section numbers. Note that the
+default behavior of TQHeader regarding section numbers is overriden
+for TQTable. See the explanation below in the Rows and Columns
+section in the discussion of moving columns and rows.
+
     
+
     Rows and Columns
+
    
+
     Row and column sizes are set with setRowHeight() and
+setColumnWidth(). If you want a row high enough to show the
+tallest item in its entirety, use adjustRow(). Similarly, to make
+a column wide enough to show the widest item use adjustColumn().
+If you want the row height and column width to adjust
+automatically as the height and width of the table changes use
+setRowStretchable() and setColumnStretchable().
+
     Rows and columns can be hidden and shown with hideRow(),
+hideColumn(), showRow() and showColumn(). New rows and columns are
+inserted using insertRows() and insertColumns(). Additional rows
+and columns are added at the  bottom (rows) or right (columns) if
+you set setNumRows() or setNumCols() to be larger than numRows()
+or numCols(). Existing rows and columns are removed with
+removeRow() and removeColumn(). Multiple rows and columns can be
+removed with removeRows() and removeColumns().
+
     Rows and columns can be set to be moveable using
+rowMovingEnabled() and columnMovingEnabled(). The user can drag
+them to reorder them holding down the Ctrl key and dragging the
+mouse. For performance reasons, the default behavior of TQHeader
+section numbers is overridden by TQTable. Currently in TQTable, when
+a row or column is dragged and reordered, the section number is
+also changed to its new position. Therefore, there is no
+difference between the section and the index fields in TQHeader.
+The TQTable TQHeader classes do not provide a mechanism for indexing
+independently of the user interface ordering.
+
     The table can be sorted using sortColumn(). Users can sort a
+column by clicking its header if setSorting() is set to TRUE. Rows
+can be swapped with swapRows(), columns with swapColumns() and
+cells with swapCells().
+
     For editable tables (see setReadOnly()) you can set the read-only
+property of individual rows and columns with setRowReadOnly() and
+setColumnReadOnly(). (Whether a cell is editable or read-only
+depends on these settings and the cell's TQTableItem::EditType.)
+
     The row and column which have the focus are returned by
+currentRow() and currentColumn() respectively.
+
     Although many TQTable functions operate in terms of rows and
+columns the indexOf() function returns a single integer
+identifying a particular cell.
+
     
+
     Cells
+
    
+
     All of a TQTable's cells are empty when the table is constructed.
+
     There are two approaches to populating the table's cells. The
+first and simplest approach is to use TQTableItems or TQTableItem
+subclasses. The second approach doesn't use TQTableItems at all
+which is useful for very large sparse tables but requires you to
+reimplement a number of functions. We'll look at each approach in
+turn.
+
     To put a string in a cell use setText(). This function will create
+a new TQTableItem for the cell if one doesn't already exist, and
+displays the text in it. By default the table item's widget will
+be a TQLineEdit. A pixmap may be put in a cell with setPixmap(),
+which also creates a table item if required. A cell may contain both a pixmap and text; the pixmap is displayed to the left of the
+text. Another approach is to construct a TQTableItem or TQTableItem
+subclass, set its properties, then insert it into a cell with
+setItem().
+
     If you want cells which contain comboboxes use the TQComboTableItem
+class. Similarly if you require cells containing checkboxes use
+the TQCheckTableItem class. These table items look and behave just
+like the combobox or checkbox widgets but consume far less memory.
+
     
+
+
            for ( int j = 0; j < numRows; ++j )
+            table.setItem( j, 1, new TQCheckTableItem( &table, "Check me" ) );
+
    In the example above we create a column of TQCheckTableItems and
+insert them into the table using setItem().
+
     TQTable takes ownership of its TQTableItems and will delete them
+when the table itself is destroyed. You can take ownership of a
+table item using takeItem() which you use to move a cell's
+contents from one cell to another, either within the same table,
+or from one table to another. (See also, swapCells()).
+
     In-place editing of the text in TQTableItems, and the values in
+TQComboTableItems and TQCheckTableItems works automatically. Cells
+may be editable or read-only, see TQTableItem::EditType. If you
+want fine control over editing see beginEdit() and endEdit().
+
     The contents of a cell can be retrieved as a TQTableItem using
+item(), or as a string with text() or as a pixmap (if there is
+one) with pixmap(). A cell's bounding rectangle is given by
+cellGeometry(). Use updateCell() to repaint a cell, for example to
+clear away a cell's visual representation after it has been
+deleted with clearCell(). The table can be forced to scroll to
+show a particular cell with ensureCellVisible(). The isSelected()
+function indicates if a cell is selected.
+
     It is possible to use your own widget as a cell's widget using
+setCellWidget(), but subclassing TQTableItem might be a simpler
+approach. The cell's widget (if there is one) can be removed with
+clearCellWidget().
+
     
+
     Large tables
+
    
+
     For large, sparse, tables using TQTableItems or other widgets is
+inefficient. The solution is to draw the cell as it should
+appear and to create and destroy cell editors on demand.
+
     This approach requires that you reimplement various functions.
+Reimplement paintCell() to display your data, and createEditor()
+and setCellContentFromEditor() to support in-place editing. It
+is very important to reimplement resizeData() to have no
+functionality, to prevent TQTable from attempting to create a huge
+array. You will also need to reimplement item(), setItem(),
+takeItem(), clearCell(), and insertWidget(), cellWidget() and
+clearCellWidget(). In almost every circumstance (for sorting,
+removing and inserting columns and rows, etc.), you also need
+to reimplement swapRows(), swapCells() and swapColumns(), including
+header handling.
+
     If you represent active cells with a dictionary of TQTableItems and
+TQWidgets, i.e. only store references to cells that are actually
+used, many of the functions can be implemented with a single line
+of code. (See the table/bigtable/main.cpp example.)
+
     For more information on cells see the TQTableItem documenation.
+
     
+
     Selections
+
    
+
     TQTable's support single selection, multi-selection (multiple
+cells) or no selection. The selection mode is set with
+setSelectionMode(). Use isSelected() to determine if a particular
+cell is selected, and isRowSelected() and isColumnSelected() to
+see if a row or column is selected.
+
     TQTable's support many simultaneous selections. You can
+programmatically select cells with addSelection(). The number of
+selections is given by numSelections(). The current selection is
+returned by currentSelection(). You can remove a selection with
+removeSelection() and remove all selections with
+clearSelection(). Selections are TQTableSelection objects.
+
     To easily add a new selection use selectCells(), selectRow() or
+selectColumn().
+
     Alternatively, use addSelection() to add new selections using
+TQTableSelection objects. The advantage of using TQTableSelection
+objects is that you can call TQTableSelection::expandTo() to resize
+the selection and can query and compare them.
+
     The number of selections is given by numSelections(). The current
+selection is returned by currentSelection(). You can remove a
+selection with removeSelection() and remove all selections with
+clearSelection().
+
     
+
     Signals
+
    
+
     When the user clicks a cell the currentChanged() signal is
+emitted. You can also connect to the lower level clicked(),
+doubleClicked() and pressed() signals. If the user changes the
+selection the selectionChanged() signal is emitted; similarly if
+the user changes a cell's value the valueChanged() signal is
+emitted. If the user right-clicks (or presses the appropriate
+platform-specific key sequence) the contextMenuRequested() signal
+is emitted. If the user drops a drag and drop object the dropped()
+signal is emitted with the drop event.
+
    See also Advanced Widgets.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQTable::EditMode
    
+
+
      
+
    • TQTable::NotEditing - No cell is currently being edited.
+
    • TQTable::Editing - A cell is currently being edited. The editor was
+initialised with the cell's contents.
+
    • TQTable::Replacing - A cell is currently being edited. The editor was
+not initialised with the cell's contents.
+
    
+
    TQTable::FocusStyle
    
+
+
     Specifies how the current cell (focus cell) is drawn.
+
      
+
    • TQTable::FollowStyle - The current cell is drawn according to the
+current style and the cell's background is also drawn selected, if
+the current cell is within a selection
+
    • TQTable::SpreadSheet - The current cell is drawn as in a spreadsheet.
+This means, it is signified by a black rectangle around the cell,
+and the background of the current cell is always drawn with the
+widget's base color - even when selected.
+
     
+
    TQTable::SelectionMode
    
+
+
      
+
    • TQTable::NoSelection - No cell can be selected by the user.
+
    • TQTable::Single - The user may only select a single range of cells.
+
    • TQTable::Multi - The user may select multiple ranges of cells.
+
    • TQTable::SingleRow - The user may select one row at once.
+
    • TQTable::MultiRow - The user may select multiple rows.
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQTable::TQTable ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Creates an empty table object called name as a child of parent.
+
     Call setNumRows() and setNumCols() to set the table size before
+populating the table if you're using TQTableItems.
+
     
    See also TQWidget::clearWFlags() and TQt::WidgetFlags.
+
+
    TQTable::TQTable ( int numRows, int numCols, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs an empty table called name with numRows rows and
+numCols columns. The table is a child of parent.
+
     If you're using TQTableItems to populate the table's cells, you
+can create TQTableItem, TQComboTableItem and TQCheckTableItem items
+and insert them into the table using setItem(). (See the notes on large tables for an alternative to using TQTableItems.)
+
     
    See also TQWidget::clearWFlags() and TQt::WidgetFlags.
+
+
    TQTable::~TQTable ()
+
    
+Releases all the resources used by the TQTable object,
+including all TQTableItems and their widgets.
+
+
    void TQTable::activateNextCell () [virtual protected]
+
    
+This function is called to activate the next cell if in-place
+editing was finished by pressing the Enter key.
+
     The default behaviour is to move from top to bottom, i.e. move to
+the cell beneath the cell being edited. Reimplement this function
+if you want different behaviour, e.g. moving from left to right.
+
+
    int TQTable::addSelection ( const TQTableSelection & s ) [virtual]
+
    
+Adds a selection described by s to the table and returns its
+number or -1 if the selection is invalid.
+
     Remember to call TQTableSelection::init() and
+TQTableSelection::expandTo() to make the selection valid (see also
+TQTableSelection::isActive(), or use the
+TQTableSelection(int,int,int,int) constructor).
+
     
    See also numSelections, removeSelection(), and clearSelection().
+
+
    void TQTable::adjustColumn ( int col ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Resizes column col so that the column width is wide enough to
+display the widest item the column contains.
+
     
    See also adjustRow().
+
+
    Example: regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented in TQDataTable.
+
    void TQTable::adjustRow ( int row ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Resizes row row so that the row height is tall enough to
+display the tallest item the row contains.
+
     
    See also adjustColumn().
+
+
    TQWidget * TQTable::beginEdit ( int row, int col, bool replace ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This function is called to start in-place editing of the cell at
+row, col. Editing is achieved by creating an editor
+(createEditor() is called) and setting the cell's editor with
+setCellWidget() to the newly created editor. (After editing is
+complete endEdit() will be called to replace the cell's content
+with the editor's content.) If replace is TRUE the editor will
+start empty; otherwise it will be initialized with the cell's
+content (if any), i.e. the user will be modifying the original
+cell content.
+
     
    See also endEdit().
+
+
    TQRect TQTable::cellGeometry ( int row, int col ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the bounding rectangle of the cell at row, col in
+content coordinates.
+
+
    TQRect TQTable::cellRect ( int row, int col ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the geometry of cell row, col in the cell's
+coordinate system. This is a convenience function useful in
+paintCell(). It is equivalent to TQRect( TQPoint(0,0), cellGeometry(
+row, col).size() );
+
     
    See also cellGeometry().
+
+
    Example: chart/setdataform.cpp.
+
    TQWidget * TQTable::cellWidget ( int row, int col ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the widget that has been set for the cell at row, col, or 0 if no widget has been set.
+
     If you don't use TQTableItems you may need to reimplement this
+function: see the notes on large tables.
+
     
    See also clearCellWidget() and setCellWidget().
+
+
    Example: chart/setdataform.cpp.
+
    void TQTable::clearCell ( int row, int col ) [virtual]
+
    
+Removes the TQTableItem at row, col.
+
     If you don't use TQTableItems you may need to reimplement this
+function: see the notes on large tables.
+
+
    void TQTable::clearCellWidget ( int row, int col ) [virtual]
+
    
+Removes the widget (if there is one) set for the cell at row,
+col.
+
     If you don't use TQTableItems you may need to reimplement this
+function: see the notes on large tables.
+
     This function deletes the widget at row, col. Note that the
+widget is not deleted immediately; instead TQObject::deleteLater()
+is called on the widget to avoid problems with timing issues.
+
     
    See also cellWidget() and setCellWidget().
+
+
    void TQTable::clearSelection ( bool repaint = TRUE ) [slot]
+
    
+Clears all selections and repaints the appropriate regions if repaint is TRUE.
+
     
    See also removeSelection().
+
+
    void TQTable::clicked ( int row, int col, int button, const TQPoint & mousePos ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when mouse button button is clicked. The
+cell where the event took place is at row, col, and the
+mouse's position is in mousePos.
+
     
    See also TQt::ButtonState.
+
+
    Example: chart/setdataform.cpp.
+
    int TQTable::columnAt ( int x ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the number of the column at position x. x must be
+given in content coordinates.
+
     
    See also columnPos() and rowAt().
+
+
    void TQTable::columnClicked ( int col ) [virtual protected slot]
+
    
+This function is called when the column col has been clicked.
+The default implementation sorts this column if sorting() is TRUE.
+
+
    void TQTable::columnIndexChanged ( int section, int fromIndex, int toIndex ) [virtual protected slot]
+
    
+This function is called when column order is to be changed, i.e.
+when the user moved the column header section from fromIndex
+to toIndex.
+
     If you want to change the column order programmatically, call
+swapRows() or swapColumns();
+
     
    See also TQHeader::indexChange() and rowIndexChanged().
+
+
    bool TQTable::columnMovingEnabled () const
+
    Returns TRUE if columns can be moved by the user; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "columnMovingEnabled" property for details.
+
    int TQTable::columnPos ( int col ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the x-coordinate of the column col in content
+coordinates.
+
     
    See also columnAt() and rowPos().
+
+
    int TQTable::columnWidth ( int col ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the width of column col.
+
     
    See also setColumnWidth() and rowHeight().
+
+
    void TQTable::columnWidthChanged ( int col ) [virtual protected slot]
+
    
+This function should be called whenever the column width of col
+has been changed. It updates the geometry of any affected columns
+and repaints the table to reflect the changes it has made.
+
+
    void TQTable::contentsDragEnterEvent ( TQDragEnterEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler is called whenever a TQTable object receives a
+TQDragEnterEvent e, i.e. when the user pressed the mouse
+button to drag something.
+
     The focus is moved to the cell where the TQDragEnterEvent occurred.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQScrollView.
+
    void TQTable::contentsDragLeaveEvent ( TQDragLeaveEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler is called when a drag activity leaves this
+TQTable object with event e.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQScrollView.
+
    void TQTable::contentsDragMoveEvent ( TQDragMoveEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler is called whenever a TQTable object receives a
+TQDragMoveEvent e, i.e. when the user actually drags the
+mouse.
+
     The focus is moved to the cell where the TQDragMoveEvent occurred.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQScrollView.
+
    void TQTable::contentsDropEvent ( TQDropEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler is called when the user ends a drag and drop by
+dropping something onto this TQTable and thus triggers the drop
+event, e.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQScrollView.
+
    void TQTable::contextMenuRequested ( int row, int col, const TQPoint & pos ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user invokes a context menu with
+the right mouse button (or with a system-specific keypress). The
+cell where the event took place is at row, col. pos is
+the position where the context menu will appear in the global
+coordinate system. This signal is always emitted, even if the
+contents of the cell are disabled.
+
+
    TQWidget * TQTable::createEditor ( int row, int col, bool initFromCell ) const [virtual protected]
+
    
+This function returns the widget which should be used as an editor
+for the contents of the cell at row, col.
+
     If initFromCell is TRUE, the editor is used to edit the current
+contents of the cell (so the editor widget should be initialized
+with this content). If initFromCell is FALSE, the content of
+the cell is replaced with the new content which the user entered
+into the widget created by this function.
+
     The default functionality is as follows: if initFromCell is
+TRUE or the cell has a TQTableItem and the table item's
+TQTableItem::isReplaceable() is FALSE then the cell is asked to
+create an appropriate editor (using TQTableItem::createEditor()).
+Otherwise a TQLineEdit is used as the editor.
+
     If you want to create your own editor for certain cells, implement
+a custom TQTableItem subclass and reimplement
+TQTableItem::createEditor().
+
     If you are not using TQTableItems and you don't want to use a
+TQLineEdit as the default editor, subclass TQTable and reimplement
+this function with code like this:
+
    +    TQTableItem *i = item( row, col );
+    if ( initFromCell || ( i && !i->isReplaceable() ) )
+        // If we had a TQTableItem ask the base class to create the editor
+        return TQTable::createEditor( row, col, initFromCell );
+    else
+        return ...(create your own editor)
+    
    
+ 
+Ownership of the editor widget is transferred to the caller.
+
     If you reimplement this function return 0 for read-only cells. You
+will need to reimplement setCellContentFromEditor() to retrieve
+the data the user entered.
+
     
    See also TQTableItem::createEditor().
+
+
    int TQTable::currEditCol () const [protected]
+
    
+Returns the current edited column
+
+
    int TQTable::currEditRow () const [protected]
+
    
+Returns the current edited row
+
+
    void TQTable::currentChanged ( int row, int col ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the current cell has changed to row, col.
+
+
    Example: chart/setdataform.cpp.
+
    int TQTable::currentColumn () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the current column.
+
     
    See also currentRow().
+
+
    Example: chart/setdataform.cpp.
+
    int TQTable::currentRow () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the current row.
+
     
    See also currentColumn().
+
+
    Example: chart/setdataform.cpp.
+
    int TQTable::currentSelection () const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the number of the current selection or -1 if there is no
+current selection.
+
     
    See also numSelections.
+
+
    void TQTable::doubleClicked ( int row, int col, int button, const TQPoint & mousePos ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when mouse button button is
+double-clicked. The cell where the event took place is at row,
+col, and the mouse's position is in mousePos.
+
     
    See also TQt::ButtonState.
+
+
    bool TQTable::dragEnabled () const [slot]
+
    
+If this function returns TRUE, the table supports dragging.
+
     
    See also setDragEnabled().
+
+
    TQDragObject * TQTable::dragObject () [virtual protected]
+
    
+If the user presses the mouse on a selected cell, starts moving
+(i.e. dragging), and dragEnabled() is TRUE, this function is
+called to obtain a drag object. A drag using this object begins
+immediately unless dragObject() returns 0.
+
     By default this function returns 0. You might reimplement it and
+create a TQDragObject depending on the selected items.
+
     
    See also dropped().
+
+
    void TQTable::drawContents ( TQPainter * p, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Draws the table contents on the painter p. This function is
+optimized so that it only draws the cells inside the cw pixels
+wide and ch pixels high clipping rectangle at position cx,
+cy.
+
     Additionally, drawContents() highlights the current cell.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQScrollView.
+
    void TQTable::dropped ( TQDropEvent * e ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when a drop event occurred on the table.
+
     e contains information about the drop.
+
+
    void TQTable::editCell ( int row, int col, bool replace = FALSE ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Starts editing the cell at row, col.
+
     If replace is TRUE the content of this cell will be replaced by
+the content of the editor when editing is finished, i.e. the user
+will be entering new data; otherwise the current content of the
+cell (if any) will be modified in the editor.
+
     
    See also beginEdit().
+
+
    EditMode TQTable::editMode () const [protected]
+
    
+Returns the current edit mode
+
     
    See also TQTable::EditMode.
+
+
    void TQTable::endEdit ( int row, int col, bool accept, bool replace ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This function is called when in-place editing of the cell at row, col is requested to stop.
+
     If the cell is not being edited or accept is FALSE the function
+returns and the cell's contents are left unchanged.
+
     If accept is TRUE the content of the editor must be transferred
+to the relevant cell. If replace is TRUE the current content of
+this cell should be replaced by the content of the editor (this
+means removing the current TQTableItem of the cell and creating a
+new one for the cell). Otherwise (if possible) the content of the
+editor should just be set to the existing TQTableItem of this cell.
+
     setCellContentFromEditor() is called to replace the contents of
+the cell with the contents of the cell's editor.
+
     Finally clearCellWidget() is called to remove the editor widget.
+
     
    See also setCellContentFromEditor() and beginEdit().
+
+
    void TQTable::ensureCellVisible ( int row, int col )
+
    
+Scrolls the table until the cell at row, col becomes
+visible.
+
+
    FocusStyle TQTable::focusStyle () const
+
    Returns how the current (focus) cell is drawn.
+See the "focusStyle" property for details.
+
    void TQTable::hideColumn ( int col ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Hides column col.
+
     
    See also showColumn() and hideRow().
+
+
    void TQTable::hideRow ( int row ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Hides row row.
+
     
    See also showRow() and hideColumn().
+
+
    TQHeader * TQTable::horizontalHeader () const
+
    
+Returns the table's top TQHeader.
+
     This header contains the column labels.
+
     To modify a column label use TQHeader::setLabel(), e.g.
+
+
+
            horizontalHeader()->setLabel( 0, tr( "File" ) );
+
    
+
     
    See also verticalHeader(), setTopMargin(), and TQHeader.
+
+
    Examples: chart/setdataform.cpp, helpsystem/mainwindow.cpp, regexptester/regexptester.cpp, and table/small-table-demo/main.cpp.
+
    int TQTable::indexOf ( int row, int col ) const [protected]
+
    
+Returns a single integer which identifies a particular row and col by mapping the 2D table to a 1D array.
+
     This is useful, for example, if you have a sparse table and want to
+use a TQIntDict to map integers to the cells that are used.
+
+
    void TQTable::insertColumns ( int col, int count = 1 ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Inserts count empty columns at column col.  Also clears the selection(s).
+
     
    See also insertRows() and removeColumn().
+
+
    void TQTable::insertRows ( int row, int count = 1 ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Inserts count empty rows at row row. Also clears the selection(s).
+
     
    See also insertColumns() and removeRow().
+
+
    void TQTable::insertWidget ( int row, int col, TQWidget * w ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Inserts widget w at row, col into the internal
+data structure. See the documentation of setCellWidget() for
+further details.
+
     If you don't use TQTableItems you may need to reimplement this
+function: see the notes on large tables.
+
+
    bool TQTable::isColumnHidden ( int col ) const [slot]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if column col is hidden; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     
    See also hideColumn() and isRowHidden().
+
+
    bool TQTable::isColumnReadOnly ( int col ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if column col is read-only; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     Whether a cell in this column is editable or read-only depends on
+the cell's EditType, and this setting: see TQTableItem::EditType.
+
     
    See also setColumnReadOnly() and isRowReadOnly().
+
+
    bool TQTable::isColumnSelected ( int col, bool full = FALSE ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if column col is selected; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     If full is FALSE (the default), 'column is selected' means that
+at least one cell in the column is selected. If full is TRUE,
+then 'column is selected' means every cell in the column is
+selected.
+
     
    See also isRowSelected() and isSelected().
+
+
    bool TQTable::isColumnStretchable ( int col ) const [slot]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if column col is stretchable; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     
    See also setColumnStretchable() and isRowStretchable().
+
+
    bool TQTable::isEditing () const [protected]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the EditMode is Editing or Replacing;
+otherwise (i.e. the EditMode is NotEditing) returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also TQTable::EditMode.
+
+
    bool TQTable::isReadOnly () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the table is read-only; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "readOnly" property for details.
+
    bool TQTable::isRowHidden ( int row ) const [slot]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if row row is hidden; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     
    See also hideRow() and isColumnHidden().
+
+
    bool TQTable::isRowReadOnly ( int row ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if row row is read-only; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     Whether a cell in this row is editable or read-only depends on the
+cell's EditType, and this
+setting: see TQTableItem::EditType.
+
     
    See also setRowReadOnly() and isColumnReadOnly().
+
+
    bool TQTable::isRowSelected ( int row, bool full = FALSE ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if row row is selected; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     If full is FALSE (the default), 'row is selected' means that at
+least one cell in the row is selected. If full is TRUE, then 'row
+is selected' means every cell in the row is selected.
+
     
    See also isColumnSelected() and isSelected().
+
+
    bool TQTable::isRowStretchable ( int row ) const [slot]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if row row is stretchable; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     
    See also setRowStretchable() and isColumnStretchable().
+
+
    bool TQTable::isSelected ( int row, int col ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the cell at row, col is selected; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also isRowSelected() and isColumnSelected().
+
+
    TQTableItem * TQTable::item ( int row, int col ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the TQTableItem representing the contents of the cell at row, col.
+
     If row or col are out of range or no content has been set
+for this cell, item() returns 0.
+
     If you don't use TQTableItems you may need to reimplement this
+function: see the notes on large tables.
+
     
    See also setItem().
+
+
    Example: regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
+
    int TQTable::numCols () const [virtual]
+
    Returns the number of columns in the table.
+See the "numCols" property for details.
+
    Reimplemented in TQDataTable.
+
    int TQTable::numRows () const [virtual]
+
    Returns the number of rows in the table.
+See the "numRows" property for details.
+
    Reimplemented in TQDataTable.
+
    int TQTable::numSelections () const
+
    Returns the number of selections.
+See the "numSelections" property for details.
+
    void TQTable::paintCell ( TQPainter * p, int row, int col, const TQRect & cr, bool selected, const TQColorGroup & cg ) [virtual]
+
    
+Paints the cell at row, col on the painter p. The painter
+has already been translated to the cell's origin. cr describes
+the cell coordinates in the content coordinate system.
+
     If selected is TRUE the cell is highlighted.
+
     cg is the colorgroup which should be used to draw the cell
+content.
+
     If you want to draw custom cell content, for example right-aligned
+text, you must either reimplement paintCell(), or subclass
+TQTableItem and reimplement TQTableItem::paint() to do the custom
+drawing.
+
     If you're using a TQTableItem subclass, for example, to store a
+data structure, then reimplementing TQTableItem::paint() may be the
+best approach. For data you want to draw immediately, e.g. data
+retrieved from a database, it is probably best to reimplement
+paintCell(). Note that if you reimplement paintCell(), i.e. don't
+use TQTableItems, you must reimplement other functions: see the
+notes on large tables.
+
     Note that the painter is not clipped by default in order to get
+maximum efficiency. If you want clipping, use code like this:
+
     
    +    p->setClipRect( cellRect(row, col), TQPainter::CoordPainter );
+    //... your drawing code
+    p->setClipping( FALSE );
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    void TQTable::paintCell ( TQPainter * p, int row, int col, const TQRect & cr, bool selected ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Use the other paintCell() function. This function is only included
+for backwards compatibilty.
+
+
    void TQTable::paintEmptyArea ( TQPainter * p, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This function fills the cw pixels wide and ch pixels high
+rectangle starting at position cx, cy with the background
+color using the painter p.
+
     paintEmptyArea() is invoked by drawContents() to erase or fill
+unused areas.
+
+
    void TQTable::paintFocus ( TQPainter * p, const TQRect & cr ) [virtual]
+
    
+Draws the focus rectangle of the current cell (see currentRow(),
+currentColumn()).
+
     The painter p is already translated to the cell's origin, while
+cr specifies the cell's geometry in content coordinates.
+
+
    TQPixmap TQTable::pixmap ( int row, int col ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the pixmap set for the cell at row, col, or a
+null-pixmap if the cell contains no pixmap.
+
     
    See also setPixmap().
+
+
    Example: chart/setdataform.cpp.
+
    void TQTable::pressed ( int row, int col, int button, const TQPoint & mousePos ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when mouse button button is pressed. The
+cell where the event took place is at row, col, and the
+mouse's position is in mousePos.
+
     
    See also TQt::ButtonState.
+
+
    void TQTable::removeColumn ( int col ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Removes column col, and deletes all its cells including any
+table items and widgets the cells may contain. Also clears the
+selection(s).
+
     
    See also removeColumns(), hideColumn(), insertColumns(), and removeRow().
+
+
    void TQTable::removeColumns ( const TQMemArray<int> & cols ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Removes the columns listed in the array cols, and deletes all
+their cells including any table items and widgets the cells may
+contain.
+
     The array passed in must only contain valid columns (in the range
+from 0 to numCols() - 1) with no duplicates, and must be sorted in
+ascending order. Also clears the selection(s).
+
     
    See also removeColumn(), insertColumns(), and removeRows().
+
+
    void TQTable::removeRow ( int row ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Removes row row, and deletes all its cells including any table
+items and widgets the cells may contain. Also clears the selection(s).
+
     
    See also hideRow(), insertRows(), removeColumn(), and removeRows().
+
+
    void TQTable::removeRows ( const TQMemArray<int> & rows ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Removes the rows listed in the array rows, and deletes all their
+cells including any table items and widgets the cells may contain.
+
     The array passed in must only contain valid rows (in the range
+from 0 to numRows() - 1) with no duplicates, and must be sorted in
+ascending order. Also clears the selection(s).
+
     
    See also removeRow(), insertRows(), and removeColumns().
+
+
    void TQTable::removeSelection ( const TQTableSelection & s ) [virtual]
+
    
+If the table has a selection, s, this selection is removed from
+the table.
+
     
    See also addSelection() and numSelections.
+
+
    void TQTable::removeSelection ( int num ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Removes selection number num from the table.
+
     
    See also numSelections, addSelection(), and clearSelection().
+
+
    void TQTable::repaintSelections ()
+
    
+Repaints all selections
+
+
    void TQTable::resizeData ( int len ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This is called when TQTable's internal array needs to be resized to
+len elements.
+
     If you don't use TQTableItems you should reimplement this as an
+empty method to avoid wasting memory. See the notes on large tables for further details.
+
+
    int TQTable::rowAt ( int y ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the number of the row at position y. y must be given
+in content coordinates.
+
     
    See also rowPos() and columnAt().
+
+
    int TQTable::rowHeight ( int row ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the height of row row.
+
     
    See also setRowHeight() and columnWidth().
+
+
    Example: table/small-table-demo/main.cpp.
+
    void TQTable::rowHeightChanged ( int row ) [virtual protected slot]
+
    
+This function should be called whenever the row height of row
+has been changed. It updates the geometry of any affected rows and
+repaints the table to reflect the changes it has made.
+
+
    void TQTable::rowIndexChanged ( int section, int fromIndex, int toIndex ) [virtual protected slot]
+
    
+This function is called when the order of the rows is to be
+changed, i.e. the user moved the row header section section
+from fromIndex to toIndex.
+
     If you want to change the order programmatically, call swapRows()
+or swapColumns();
+
     
    See also TQHeader::indexChange() and columnIndexChanged().
+
+
    bool TQTable::rowMovingEnabled () const
+
    Returns TRUE if rows can be moved by the user; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "rowMovingEnabled" property for details.
+
    int TQTable::rowPos ( int row ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the y-coordinate of the row row in content coordinates.
+
     
    See also rowAt() and columnPos().
+
+
    void TQTable::selectCells ( int start_row, int start_col, int end_row, int end_col )
+
     Selects the range starting at start_row and start_col and
+ending at end_row and end_col.
+
     
    See also TQTableSelection.
+
+
    void TQTable::selectColumn ( int col )
+
     Selects the column col.
+
     
    See also TQTableSelection.
+
+
    void TQTable::selectRow ( int row )
+
     Selects the row row.
+
     
    See also TQTableSelection.
+
+
    TQTableSelection TQTable::selection ( int num ) const
+
    
+Returns selection number num, or an inactive TQTableSelection if num is out of range (see TQTableSelection::isActive()).
+
+
    void TQTable::selectionChanged () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever a selection changes.
+
     
    See also TQTableSelection.
+
+
    SelectionMode TQTable::selectionMode () const
+
    Returns the current selection mode.
+See the "selectionMode" property for details.
+
    void TQTable::setCellContentFromEditor ( int row, int col ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This function is called to replace the contents of the cell at row, col with the contents of the cell's editor.
+
     If there already exists a TQTableItem for the cell,
+it calls TQTableItem::setContentFromEditor() on this TQTableItem.
+
     If, for example, you want to create different TQTableItems
+depending on the contents of the editor, you might reimplement
+this function.
+
     If you want to work without TQTableItems, you will need to
+reimplement this function to save the data the user entered into
+your data structure. (See the notes on large tables.)
+
     
    See also TQTableItem::setContentFromEditor() and createEditor().
+
+
    void TQTable::setCellWidget ( int row, int col, TQWidget * e ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the widget e to the cell at row, col and takes care of
+placing and resizing the widget when the cell geometry changes.
+
     By default widgets are inserted into a vector with numRows() *
+numCols() elements. In very large tables you will probably want to
+store the widgets in a data structure that consumes less memory (see
+the notes on large tables). To support the use of your own data
+structure this function calls insertWidget() to add the widget to
+the internal data structure. To use your own data structure
+reimplement insertWidget(), cellWidget() and clearCellWidget().
+
     Cell widgets are created dynamically with the new operator. The
+cell widgets are destroyed automatically once the table is
+destroyed; the table takes ownership of the widget when using
+setCellWidget.
+
     
+
    Example: chart/setdataform.cpp.
+
    void TQTable::setColumnLabels ( const TQStringList & labels ) [slot]
+
     Sets the section labels of the horizontalHeader() to labels 
+
    void TQTable::setColumnMovingEnabled ( bool b ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets whether columns can be moved by the user to b.
+See the "columnMovingEnabled" property for details.
+
    void TQTable::setColumnReadOnly ( int col, bool ro ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+If ro is TRUE, column col is set to be read-only; otherwise
+the column is set to be editable.
+
     Whether a cell in this column is editable or read-only depends on
+the cell's EditType, and this setting:
+see TQTableItem::EditType.
+
     
    See also isColumnReadOnly(), setRowReadOnly(), and readOnly.
+
+
     
+
    Example: chart/setdataform.cpp.
+
    void TQTable::setColumnStretchable ( int col, bool stretch ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+If stretch is TRUE, column col is set to be stretchable;
+otherwise column col is set to be unstretchable.
+
     If the table widget's width decreases or increases stretchable
+columns will grow narrower or wider to fit the space available as
+completely as possible. The user cannot manually resize stretchable
+columns.
+
     
    See also isColumnStretchable(), setRowStretchable(), and adjustColumn().
+
+
    void TQTable::setColumnWidth ( int col, int w ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Resizes column col to be w pixels wide.
+
     
    See also columnWidth() and setRowHeight().
+
+
    Example: chart/setdataform.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented in TQDataTable.
+
    void TQTable::setCurrentCell ( int row, int col ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Moves the focus to the cell at row, col.
+
     
    See also currentRow() and currentColumn().
+
+
    void TQTable::setDragEnabled ( bool b ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+If b is TRUE, the table starts a drag (see dragObject()) when
+the user presses and moves the mouse on a selected cell.
+
+
    void TQTable::setEditMode ( EditMode mode, int row, int col ) [protected]
+
    
+Sets the current edit mode to mode, the current edit row to row and the current edit column to col.
+
     
    See also EditMode.
+
+
    void TQTable::setFocusStyle ( FocusStyle fs ) [virtual]
+
    Sets how the current (focus) cell is drawn to fs.
+See the "focusStyle" property for details.
+
    void TQTable::setItem ( int row, int col, TQTableItem * item ) [virtual]
+
    
+Inserts the table item item into the table at row row,
+column col, and repaints the cell. If a table item already
+exists in this cell it is deleted and replaced with item. The
+table takes ownership of the table item.
+
     If you don't use TQTableItems you may need to reimplement this
+function: see the notes on large tables.
+
     
    See also item() and takeItem().
+
+
    Examples: helpsystem/mainwindow.cpp and table/small-table-demo/main.cpp.
+
    void TQTable::setLeftMargin ( int m ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Sets the left margin to be m pixels wide.
+
     The verticalHeader(), which displays row labels, occupies this
+margin.
+
     In an Arabic or Hebrew localization, the verticalHeader() will
+appear on the right side of the table, and this call will set the
+right margin.
+
     
    See also leftMargin(), setTopMargin(), and verticalHeader().
+
+
    Example: regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
+
    void TQTable::setNumCols ( int r ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the number of columns in the table to r.
+See the "numCols" property for details.
+
    void TQTable::setNumRows ( int r ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the number of rows in the table to r.
+See the "numRows" property for details.
+
    void TQTable::setPixmap ( int row, int col, const TQPixmap & pix ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the pixmap in the cell at row, col to pix.
+
     If the cell does not contain a table item a TQTableItem is created
+with an EditType of OnTyping,
+otherwise the existing table item's pixmap (if any) is replaced
+with pix.
+
     Note that TQComboTableItems and TQCheckTableItems don't show
+pixmaps.
+
     
    See also pixmap(), setText(), setItem(), and TQTableItem::setPixmap().
+
+
    Examples: chart/setdataform.cpp and table/small-table-demo/main.cpp.
+
    void TQTable::setReadOnly ( bool b ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets whether the table is read-only to b.
+See the "readOnly" property for details.
+
    void TQTable::setRowHeight ( int row, int h ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Resizes row row to be h pixels high.
+
     
    See also rowHeight() and setColumnWidth().
+
+
    void TQTable::setRowLabels ( const TQStringList & labels ) [slot]
+
     Sets the section labels of the verticalHeader() to labels 
+
    void TQTable::setRowMovingEnabled ( bool b ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets whether rows can be moved by the user to b.
+See the "rowMovingEnabled" property for details.
+
    void TQTable::setRowReadOnly ( int row, bool ro ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+If ro is TRUE, row row is set to be read-only; otherwise the
+row is set to be editable.
+
     Whether a cell in this row is editable or read-only depends on the
+cell's EditType, and this setting:
+see TQTableItem::EditType.
+
     
    See also isRowReadOnly(), setColumnReadOnly(), and readOnly.
+
+
    void TQTable::setRowStretchable ( int row, bool stretch ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+If stretch is TRUE, row row is set to be stretchable;
+otherwise row row is set to be unstretchable.
+
     If the table widget's height decreases or increases stretchable
+rows will grow shorter or taller to fit the space available as
+completely as possible. The user cannot manually resize
+stretchable rows.
+
     
    See also isRowStretchable() and setColumnStretchable().
+
+
    void TQTable::setSelectionMode ( SelectionMode mode ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the current selection mode to mode.
+See the "selectionMode" property for details.
+
    void TQTable::setShowGrid ( bool b ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets whether the table's grid is displayed to b.
+See the "showGrid" property for details.
+
    void TQTable::setSorting ( bool b ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets whether a click on the header of a column sorts that column to b.
+See the "sorting" property for details.
+
    void TQTable::setText ( int row, int col, const TQString & text ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the text in the cell at row, col to text.
+
     If the cell does not contain a table item a TQTableItem is created
+with an EditType of OnTyping,
+otherwise the existing table item's text (if any) is replaced with
+text.
+
     
    See also text(), setPixmap(), setItem(), and TQTableItem::setText().
+
+
    Examples: chart/setdataform.cpp, helpsystem/mainwindow.cpp, regexptester/regexptester.cpp, and table/small-table-demo/main.cpp.
+
    void TQTable::setTopMargin ( int m ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Sets the top margin to be m pixels high.
+
     The horizontalHeader(), which displays column labels, occupies
+this margin.
+
     
    See also topMargin() and setLeftMargin().
+
+
    Example: regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
+
    void TQTable::showColumn ( int col ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Shows column col.
+
     
    See also hideColumn() and showRow().
+
+
    bool TQTable::showGrid () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the table's grid is displayed; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "showGrid" property for details.
+
    void TQTable::showRow ( int row ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Shows row row.
+
     
    See also hideRow() and showColumn().
+
+
    void TQTable::sortColumn ( int col, bool ascending = TRUE, bool wholeRows = FALSE ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sorts column col. If ascending is TRUE the sort is in
+ascending order, otherwise the sort is in descending order.
+
     If wholeRows is TRUE, entire rows are sorted using swapRows();
+otherwise only cells in the column are sorted using swapCells().
+
     Note that if you are not using TQTableItems you will need to
+reimplement swapRows() and swapCells(). (See the notes on large tables.)
+
     
    See also swapRows().
+
+
    Example: table/statistics/statistics.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented in TQDataTable.
+
    bool TQTable::sorting () const
+
    Returns TRUE if a click on the header of a column sorts that column; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "sorting" property for details.
+
    void TQTable::startDrag () [virtual protected]
+
    
+Starts a drag.
+
     Usually you don't need to call or reimplement this function yourself.
+
     
    See also dragObject().
+
+
    void TQTable::swapCells ( int row1, int col1, int row2, int col2 ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Swaps the contents of the cell at row1, col1 with the
+contents of the cell at row2, col2.
+
     This function is also called when the table is sorted.
+
     If you don't use TQTableItems and want your users to be able to
+swap cells, you will need to reimplement this function. (See the
+notes on large tables.)
+
     
    See also swapColumns() and swapRows().
+
+
    void TQTable::swapColumns ( int col1, int col2, bool swapHeader = FALSE ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Swaps the data in col1 with col2.
+
     This function is used to swap the positions of two columns. It is
+called when the user changes the order of columns (see
+setColumnMovingEnabled(), and when columns are sorted.
+
     If you don't use TQTableItems and want your users to be able to
+swap columns you will need to reimplement this function. (See the
+notes on large tables.)
+
     If swapHeader is TRUE, the columns' header contents is also
+swapped.
+
     
    See also swapCells().
+
+
    void TQTable::swapRows ( int row1, int row2, bool swapHeader = FALSE ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Swaps the data in row1 and row2.
+
     This function is used to swap the positions of two rows. It is
+called when the user changes the order of rows (see
+setRowMovingEnabled()), and when rows are sorted.
+
     If you don't use TQTableItems and want your users to be able to
+swap rows, e.g. for sorting, you will need to reimplement this
+function. (See the notes on large tables.)
+
     If swapHeader is TRUE, the rows' header contents is also
+swapped.
+
     This function will not update the TQTable, you will have to do
+this manually, e.g. by calling updateContents().
+
     
    See also swapColumns() and swapCells().
+
+
    void TQTable::takeItem ( TQTableItem * i ) [virtual]
+
    
+Takes the table item i out of the table. This function does not delete the table item. You must either delete the table item
+yourself or put it into a table (using setItem()) which will then
+take ownership of it.
+
     Use this function if you want to move an item from one cell in a
+table to another, or to move an item from one table to another,
+reinserting the item with setItem().
+
     If you want to exchange two cells use swapCells().
+
+
    TQString TQTable::text ( int row, int col ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the text in the cell at row, col, or TQString::null
+if the relevant item does not exist or has no text.
+
     
    See also setText() and setPixmap().
+
+
    Example: chart/setdataform.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented in TQDataTable.
+
    void TQTable::updateCell ( int row, int col )
+
    
+Repaints the cell at row, col.
+
+
    void TQTable::updateHeaderStates ()
+
    
+This functions updates all the header states to be in sync with
+the current selections. This should be called after
+programatically changing, adding or removing selections, so that
+the headers are updated.
+
+
    void TQTable::valueChanged ( int row, int col ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user changed the value in the cell
+at row, col.
+
+
    Example: chart/setdataform.cpp.
+
    TQHeader * TQTable::verticalHeader () const
+
    
+Returns the table's vertical TQHeader.
+
     This header contains the row labels.
+
     
    See also horizontalHeader(), setLeftMargin(), and TQHeader.
+
+
    Examples: helpsystem/mainwindow.cpp and regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    bool columnMovingEnabled
    
+
    This property holds whether columns can be moved by the user.
+
    The default is FALSE. Columns are moved by dragging whilst holding
+down the Ctrl key.
+
     Warning: If TQTable is used to move header sections as a result of user
+interaction, the mapping between header indexes and section exposed by
+TQHeader will not reflect the order of the headers in the table; i.e.,
+TQTable does not call TQHeader::moveSection() to move sections but handles
+move operations internally.
+
     
    See also rowMovingEnabled.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setColumnMovingEnabled() and get this property's value with columnMovingEnabled().
+
    FocusStyle focusStyle
    
+
    This property holds how the current (focus) cell is drawn.
+
    The default style is SpreadSheet.
+
     
    See also TQTable::FocusStyle.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setFocusStyle() and get this property's value with focusStyle().
+
    int numCols
    
+
    This property holds the number of columns in the table.
+
    Set this property's value with setNumCols() and get this property's value with numCols().
+
    See also numRows.
+
+
    int numRows
    
+
    This property holds the number of rows in the table.
+
    Set this property's value with setNumRows() and get this property's value with numRows().
+
    See also numCols.
+
+
    int numSelections
    
+
    This property holds the number of selections.
+
    Get this property's value with numSelections().
+
    See also currentSelection().
+
+
    bool readOnly
    
+
    This property holds whether the table is read-only.
+
    Whether a cell in the table is editable or read-only depends on
+the cell's EditType, and this setting:
+see TQTableItem::EditType.
+
     
    See also TQWidget::enabled, setColumnReadOnly(), and setRowReadOnly().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setReadOnly() and get this property's value with isReadOnly().
+
    bool rowMovingEnabled
    
+
    This property holds whether rows can be moved by the user.
+
    The default is FALSE. Rows are moved by dragging whilst holding
+down the Ctrl key.
+
     Warning: If TQTable is used to move header sections as a result of user
+interaction, the mapping between header indexes and section exposed by
+TQHeader will not reflect the order of the headers in the table; i.e.,
+TQTable does not call TQHeader::moveSection() to move sections but handles
+move operations internally.
+
     
    See also columnMovingEnabled.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setRowMovingEnabled() and get this property's value with rowMovingEnabled().
+
    SelectionMode selectionMode
    
+
    This property holds the current selection mode.
+
    The default mode is Multi which allows the user to select
+multiple ranges of cells.
+
     
    See also SelectionMode and selectionMode.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setSelectionMode() and get this property's value with selectionMode().
+
    bool showGrid
    
+
    This property holds whether the table's grid is displayed.
+
    The grid is shown by default.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setShowGrid() and get this property's value with showGrid().
+
    bool sorting
    
+
    This property holds whether a click on the header of a column sorts that column.
+
    Set this property's value with setSorting() and get this property's value with sorting().
+
    See also sortColumn().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqtabwidget.html b/doc/html/ntqtabwidget.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..070fa2fc7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqtabwidget.html
@@ -0,0 +1,440 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQTabWidget Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQTabWidget Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQTabWidget class provides a stack of tabbed widgets.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqtabwidget.h>
+
    Inherits TQWidget.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQTabWidget ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
      • 
+
    • virtual void addTab ( TQWidget * child, const TQString & label )
      • 
+
    • virtual void addTab ( TQWidget * child, const TQIconSet & iconset, const TQString & label )
      • 
+
    • virtual void addTab ( TQWidget * child, TQTab * tab )
      • 
+
    • virtual void insertTab ( TQWidget * child, const TQString & label, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • virtual void insertTab ( TQWidget * child, const TQIconSet & iconset, const TQString & label, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • virtual void insertTab ( TQWidget * child, TQTab * tab, int index = -1 )
      • 
+
    • void changeTab ( TQWidget * w, const TQString & label )
      • 
+
    • void changeTab ( TQWidget * w, const TQIconSet & iconset, const TQString & label )
      • 
+
    • bool isTabEnabled ( TQWidget * w ) const
      • 
+
    • void setTabEnabled ( TQWidget * w, bool enable )
      • 
+
    • void setCornerWidget ( TQWidget * w, TQt::Corner corner = TQt::TopRight )
      • 
+
    • TQWidget * cornerWidget ( TQt::Corner corner = TQt::TopRight ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString tabLabel ( TQWidget * w ) const
      • 
+
    • void setTabLabel ( TQWidget * w, const TQString & l )
      • 
+
    • TQIconSet tabIconSet ( TQWidget * w ) const
      • 
+
    • void setTabIconSet ( TQWidget * w, const TQIconSet & iconset )
      • 
+
    • void removeTabToolTip ( TQWidget * w )
      • 
+
    • void setTabToolTip ( TQWidget * w, const TQString & tip )
      • 
+
    • TQString tabToolTip ( TQWidget * w ) const
      • 
+
    • TQWidget * currentPage () const
      • 
+
    • TQWidget * page ( int index ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString label ( int index ) const
      • 
+
    • int currentPageIndex () const
      • 
+
    • int indexOf ( TQWidget * w ) const
      • 
+
    • enum TabPosition { Top, Bottom }
      • 
+
    • TabPosition tabPosition () const
      • 
+
    • void setTabPosition ( TabPosition )
      • 
+
    • enum TabShape { Rounded, Triangular }
      • 
+
    • TabShape tabShape () const
      • 
+
    • void setTabShape ( TabShape s )
      • 
+
    • int margin () const
      • 
+
    • void setMargin ( int )
      • 
+
    • int count () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • bool autoMask - whether the tab widget is automatically masked  (read only)
      • 
+
    • int count - the number of tabs in the tab bar  (read only)
      • 
+
    • int currentPage - the index position of the current tab page
      • 
+
    • int margin - the margin in this tab widget
      • 
+
    • TabPosition tabPosition - the position of the tabs in this tab widget
      • 
+
    • TabShape tabShape - the shape of the tabs in this tab widget
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQTabWidget class provides a stack of tabbed widgets.
+
     
+
+
+
     A tab widget provides a tab bar of tabs and a `page area' below
+(or above, see TabPosition) the tabs. Each tab is associated
+with a different widget (called a `page'). Only the current tab's
+page is shown in the page area; all the other tabs' pages are
+hidden. The user can show a different page by clicking on its tab
+or by pressing its Alt+letter accelerator if it has one.
+
     The normal way to use TQTabWidget is to do the following in the
+constructor:
+
      
+
    1.  Create a TQTabWidget.
+
    2.  Create a TQWidget for each of the pages in the tab dialog,
+insert children into it, set up geometry management for it and use
+addTab() (or insertTab()) to set up a tab and keyboard accelerator
+for it.
+
    3.  Connect to the signals and slots.
+
    
+
     The position of the tabs is set with setTabPosition(), their shape
+with setTabShape(), and their margin with setMargin().
+
     If you don't call addTab() and the TQTabWidget is already visible,
+then the page you have created will not be visible. Don't
+confuse the object name you supply to the TQWidget constructor and
+the tab label you supply to addTab(). addTab() takes a name which
+indicates an accelerator and is meaningful and descriptive to the
+user, whereas the widget name is used primarily for debugging.
+
     The signal currentChanged() is emitted when the user selects a
+page.
+
     The current page is available as an index position with
+currentPageIndex() or as a wiget pointer with currentPage(). You
+can retrieve a pointer to a page with a given index using page(),
+and can find the index position of a page with indexOf(). Use
+setCurrentPage() to show a particular page by index, or showPage()
+to show a page by widget pointer.
+
     You can change a tab's label and iconset using changeTab() or
+setTabLabel() and setTabIconSet(). A tab page can be removed with
+removePage().
+
     Each tab is either enabled or disabled at any given time (see
+setTabEnabled()). If a tab is enabled, the tab text is drawn
+normally and the user can select that tab. If it is disabled, the
+tab is drawn in a different way and the user cannot select that
+tab. Note that even if a tab is disabled, the page can still be
+visible, for example if all of the tabs happen to be disabled.
+
     Although tab widgets can be a very good way to split up a complex
+dialog, it's also very easy to get into a mess. See TQTabDialog for
+some design hints. An alternative is to use a TQWidgetStack for
+which you provide some means of navigating between pages, for
+example, a TQToolBar or a TQListBox.
+
     Most of the functionality in TQTabWidget is provided by a TQTabBar
+(at the top, providing the tabs) and a TQWidgetStack (most of the
+area, organizing the individual pages).
+
      
+
     
    See also TQTabDialog, TQToolBox, Advanced Widgets, and Organizers.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQTabWidget::TabPosition
    
+
+
     This enum type defines where TQTabWidget draws the tab row:
+
      
+
    • TQTabWidget::Top - above the pages
+
    • TQTabWidget::Bottom - below the pages
+
    
+
    TQTabWidget::TabShape
    
+
+
     This enum type defines the shape of the tabs:
+
      
+
    • TQTabWidget::Rounded - rounded look (normal)
+
    • TQTabWidget::Triangular - triangular look (very unusual, included for completeness)
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQTabWidget::TQTabWidget ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a tabbed widget called name with parent parent,
+and widget flags f.
+
+
    void TQTabWidget::addTab ( TQWidget * child, const TQString & label ) [virtual]
+
    
+Adds another tab and page to the tab view.
+
     The new page is child; the tab's label is label. Note the
+difference between the widget name (which you supply to widget
+constructors and to setTabEnabled(), for example) and the tab
+label. The name is internal to the program and invariant, whereas
+the label is shown on-screen and may vary according to language
+and other factors.
+
     If the tab's label contains an ampersand, the letter following
+the ampersand is used as an accelerator for the tab, e.g. if the
+label is "Bro&wse" then Alt+W becomes an accelerator which will
+move the focus to this tab.
+
     If you call addTab() after show() the screen will flicker and the
+user may be confused.
+
     Adding the same child twice will have undefined behavior.
+
     
    See also insertTab().
+
+
    Examples: addressbook/centralwidget.cpp and themes/themes.cpp.
+
    void TQTabWidget::addTab ( TQWidget * child, const TQIconSet & iconset, const TQString & label ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Adds another tab and page to the tab view.
+
     This function is the same as addTab(), but with an additional iconset.
+
+
    void TQTabWidget::addTab ( TQWidget * child, TQTab * tab ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This is a low-level function for adding tabs. It is useful if you
+are using setTabBar() to set a TQTabBar subclass with an overridden
+TQTabBar::paint() function for a subclass of TQTab. The child is
+the new page and tab is the tab to put the child on.
+
+
    void TQTabWidget::changeTab ( TQWidget * w, const TQString & label )
+
    
+Defines a new label for page w's tab.
+
+
    void TQTabWidget::changeTab ( TQWidget * w, const TQIconSet & iconset, const TQString & label )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Defines a new iconset and a new label for page w's tab.
+
+
    TQWidget * TQTabWidget::cornerWidget ( TQt::Corner corner = TQt::TopRight ) const
+
    
+Returns the widget shown in the corner of the tab widget or 0.
+
+
    int TQTabWidget::count () const
+
    Returns the number of tabs in the tab bar.
+See the "count" property for details.
+
    void TQTabWidget::currentChanged ( TQWidget * ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the current page changes. The
+parameter is the new current page.
+
     
    See also currentPage(), showPage(), and tabLabel().
+
+
    TQWidget * TQTabWidget::currentPage () const
+
    
+Returns a pointer to the page currently being displayed by the tab
+dialog. The tab dialog does its best to make sure that this value
+is never 0 (but if you try hard enough, it can be).
+
+
    int TQTabWidget::currentPageIndex () const
+
    Returns the index position of the current tab page.
+See the "currentPage" property for details.
+
    int TQTabWidget::indexOf ( TQWidget * w ) const
+
    
+Returns the index position of page w, or -1 if the widget
+cannot be found.
+
+
    void TQTabWidget::insertTab ( TQWidget * child, const TQString & label, int index = -1 ) [virtual]
+
    
+Inserts another tab and page to the tab view.
+
     The new page is child; the tab's label is label. Note the
+difference between the widget name (which you supply to widget
+constructors and to setTabEnabled(), for example) and the tab
+label. The name is internal to the program and invariant, whereas
+the label is shown on-screen and may vary according to language
+and other factors.
+
     If the tab's label contains an ampersand, the letter following
+the ampersand is used as an accelerator for the tab, e.g. if the
+label is "Bro&wse" then Alt+W becomes an accelerator which will
+move the focus to this tab.
+
     If index is not specified, the tab is simply appended.
+Otherwise it is inserted at the specified position.
+
     If you call insertTab() after show(), the screen will flicker and
+the user may be confused.
+
     
    See also addTab().
+
+
    void TQTabWidget::insertTab ( TQWidget * child, const TQIconSet & iconset, const TQString & label, int index = -1 ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts another tab and page to the tab view.
+
     This function is the same as insertTab(), but with an additional
+iconset.
+
+
    void TQTabWidget::insertTab ( TQWidget * child, TQTab * tab, int index = -1 ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This is a lower-level method for inserting tabs, similar to the
+other insertTab() method. It is useful if you are using
+setTabBar() to set a TQTabBar subclass with an overridden
+TQTabBar::paint() function for a subclass of TQTab. The child is
+the new page, tab is the tab to put the child on and index is the position in the tab bar that this page should occupy.
+
+
    bool TQTabWidget::isTabEnabled ( TQWidget * w ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the page w is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setTabEnabled() and TQWidget::enabled.
+
+
    TQString TQTabWidget::label ( int index ) const
+
    
+Returns the label of the tab at index position index or
+TQString::null if the index is out of range.
+
+
    int TQTabWidget::margin () const
+
    Returns the margin in this tab widget.
+See the "margin" property for details.
+
    TQWidget * TQTabWidget::page ( int index ) const
+
    
+Returns the tab page at index position index or 0 if the index is out of range.
+
+
    void TQTabWidget::removePage ( TQWidget * w ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Removes page w from this stack of widgets. Does not delete w.
+
     
    See also addTab(), showPage(), and TQWidgetStack::removeWidget().
+
+
    void TQTabWidget::removeTabToolTip ( TQWidget * w )
+
    
+Removes the tab tool tip for page w. If the page does not have
+a tip, nothing happens.
+
     
    See also setTabToolTip() and tabToolTip().
+
+
    void TQTabWidget::setCornerWidget ( TQWidget * w, TQt::Corner corner = TQt::TopRight )
+
    
+Sets widget w to be the shown in the specified corner of the
+tab widget.
+
     Only the horizontal element of the corner will be used.
+
     
    See also cornerWidget() and tabPosition.
+
+
    void TQTabWidget::setCurrentPage ( int ) [slot]
+
    Sets the index position of the current tab page.
+See the "currentPage" property for details.
+
    void TQTabWidget::setMargin ( int )
+
    Sets the margin in this tab widget.
+See the "margin" property for details.
+
    void TQTabWidget::setTabBar ( TQTabBar * tb ) [protected]
+
    
+Replaces the dialog's TQTabBar heading with the tab bar tb. Note
+that this must be called before any tabs have been added, or
+the behavior is undefined.
+
     
    See also tabBar().
+
+
    void TQTabWidget::setTabEnabled ( TQWidget * w, bool enable )
+
    
+If enable is TRUE, page w is enabled; otherwise page w is
+disabled. The page's tab is redrawn appropriately.
+
     TQTabWidget uses TQWidget::setEnabled() internally, rather than
+keeping a separate flag.
+
     Note that even a disabled tab/page may be visible. If the page is
+visible already, TQTabWidget will not hide it; if all the pages are
+disabled, TQTabWidget will show one of them.
+
     
    See also isTabEnabled() and TQWidget::enabled.
+
+
    void TQTabWidget::setTabIconSet ( TQWidget * w, const TQIconSet & iconset )
+
    
+Sets the iconset for page w to iconset.
+
+
    void TQTabWidget::setTabLabel ( TQWidget * w, const TQString & l )
+
    
+Sets the tab label for page w to l
+
+
    void TQTabWidget::setTabPosition ( TabPosition )
+
    Sets the position of the tabs in this tab widget.
+See the "tabPosition" property for details.
+
    void TQTabWidget::setTabShape ( TabShape s )
+
    Sets the shape of the tabs in this tab widget to s.
+See the "tabShape" property for details.
+
    void TQTabWidget::setTabToolTip ( TQWidget * w, const TQString & tip )
+
    
+Sets the tab tool tip for page w to tip.
+
     
    See also removeTabToolTip() and tabToolTip().
+
+
    void TQTabWidget::showPage ( TQWidget * w ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Ensures that page w is shown. This is useful mainly for
+accelerators.
+
     Warning: Used carelessly, this function can easily surprise or
+confuse the user.
+
     
    See also TQTabBar::currentTab.
+
+
    TQTabBar * TQTabWidget::tabBar () const [protected]
+
    
+Returns the current TQTabBar.
+
     
    See also setTabBar().
+
+
    TQIconSet TQTabWidget::tabIconSet ( TQWidget * w ) const
+
    
+Returns the iconset of page w or a null iconset if w is not a tab page or does not have an
+iconset.
+
+
    TQString TQTabWidget::tabLabel ( TQWidget * w ) const
+
    
+Returns the label text for the tab on page w.
+
+
    TabPosition TQTabWidget::tabPosition () const
+
    Returns the position of the tabs in this tab widget.
+See the "tabPosition" property for details.
+
    TabShape TQTabWidget::tabShape () const
+
    Returns the shape of the tabs in this tab widget.
+See the "tabShape" property for details.
+
    TQString TQTabWidget::tabToolTip ( TQWidget * w ) const
+
    
+Returns the tab tool tip for page w or TQString::null if no tool
+tip has been set.
+
     
    See also setTabToolTip() and removeTabToolTip().
+
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    bool autoMask
    
+
    This property holds whether the tab widget is automatically masked.
+
    See also TQWidget::autoMask.
+
+
    int count
    
+
    This property holds the number of tabs in the tab bar.
+
    
+
    Get this property's value with count().
+
    int currentPage
    
+
    This property holds the index position of the current tab page.
+
    Set this property's value with setCurrentPage() and get this property's value with currentPageIndex().
+
    See also TQTabBar::currentTab.
+
+
    int margin
    
+
    This property holds the margin in this tab widget.
+
    The margin is the distance between the innermost pixel of the
+frame and the outermost pixel of the pages.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setMargin() and get this property's value with margin().
+
    TabPosition tabPosition
    
+
    This property holds the position of the tabs in this tab widget.
+
    Possible values for this property are TQTabWidget::Top and TQTabWidget::Bottom.
+
     
    See also TabPosition.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setTabPosition() and get this property's value with tabPosition().
+
    TabShape tabShape
    
+
    This property holds the shape of the tabs in this tab widget.
+
    Possible values for this property are TQTabWidget::Rounded
+(default) or TQTabWidget::Triangular.
+
     
    See also TabShape.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setTabShape() and get this property's value with tabShape().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqtextbrowser.html b/doc/html/ntqtextbrowser.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e528b230c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqtextbrowser.html
@@ -0,0 +1,265 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQTextBrowser Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQTextBrowser Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQTextBrowser class provides a rich text browser with hypertext navigation.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqtextbrowser.h>
+
    Inherits TQTextEdit.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQTextBrowser ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQString source () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • bool modified - whether the contents have been modified  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool overwriteMode - this text browser's overwrite mode  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool readOnly - whether the contents are read only  (read only)
      • 
+
    • TQString source - the name of the displayed document
      • 
+
    • int undoDepth - this text browser's undo depth  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool undoRedoEnabled - whether undo and redo are enabled  (read only)
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQTextBrowser class provides a rich text browser with hypertext navigation.
+
     
+
+
+
+
     This class extends TQTextEdit (in read-only mode), adding some
+navigation functionality so that users can follow links in
+hypertext documents. The contents of TQTextEdit is set with
+setText(), but TQTextBrowser has an additional function,
+setSource(), which makes it possible to set the text to a named
+document. The name is looked up in the text view's mime source
+factory. If a document name ends with an anchor (for example, "#anchor"), the text browser automatically scrolls to that position
+(using scrollToAnchor()). When the user clicks on a hyperlink, the
+browser will call setSource() itself, with the link's href
+value as argument. You can track the current source by connetion
+to the sourceChanged() signal.
+
     TQTextBrowser provides backward() and forward() slots which you can
+use to implement Back and Forward buttons. The home() slot sets
+the text to the very first document displayed. The linkClicked()
+signal is emitted when the user clicks a link.
+
     By using TQTextEdit::setMimeSourceFactory() you can provide your
+own subclass of TQMimeSourceFactory. This makes it possible to
+access data from anywhere, for example from a network or from a
+database. See TQMimeSourceFactory::data() for details.
+
     If you intend using the mime factory to read the data directly
+from the file system, you may have to specify the encoding for the
+file extension you are using. For example:
+
    +    mimeSourceFactory()->setExtensionType("qml", "text/utf8");
+    
    
+ 
+This is to ensure that the factory is able to resolve the document
+names.
+
     TQTextBrowser interprets the tags it processes in accordance with
+the default style sheet. Change the style sheet with
+setStyleSheet(); see TQStyleSheet for details.
+
     If you want to provide your users with editable rich text use
+TQTextEdit. If you want a text browser without hypertext navigation
+use TQTextEdit, and use TQTextEdit::setReadOnly() to disable
+editing. If you just need to display a small piece of rich text
+use TQSimpleRichText or TQLabel.
+
      
+
    See also Advanced Widgets, Help System, and Text Related Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQTextBrowser::TQTextBrowser ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs an empty TQTextBrowser called name, with parent parent.
+
+
    void TQTextBrowser::anchorClicked ( const TQString & name, const TQString & link ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user clicks an anchor. The link is
+the value of the href i.e. the name of the target document.  The name
+is the name of the anchor.
+
     
    See also linkClicked().
+
+
    void TQTextBrowser::backward () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Changes the document displayed to the previous document in the
+list of documents built by navigating links. Does nothing if there
+is no previous document.
+
     
    See also forward() and backwardAvailable().
+
+
    Example: helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp.
+
    void TQTextBrowser::backwardAvailable ( bool available ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the availability of backward()
+changes. available is FALSE when the user is at home();
+otherwise it is TRUE.
+
+
    Example: helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp.
+
    void TQTextBrowser::forward () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Changes the document displayed to the next document in the list of
+documents built by navigating links. Does nothing if there is no
+next document.
+
     
    See also backward() and forwardAvailable().
+
+
    Example: helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp.
+
    void TQTextBrowser::forwardAvailable ( bool available ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the availability of forward() changes.
+available is TRUE after the user navigates backward() and FALSE
+when the user navigates or goes forward().
+
+
    Example: helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp.
+
    void TQTextBrowser::highlighted ( const TQString & link ) [signal]
+
      
+
     This signal is emitted when the user has selected but not
+activated a link in the document. link is the value of the href i.e. the name of the target document.
+
+
    Example: helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp.
+
    void TQTextBrowser::home () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Changes the document displayed to be the first document the
+browser displayed.
+
+
    Example: helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp.
+
    void TQTextBrowser::keyPressEvent ( TQKeyEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+The event e is used to provide the following keyboard shortcuts:
+
    
+
     Keypress	    Action
+
     Alt+Left Arrow  backward()
+
     Alt+Right Arrow forward()
+
     Alt+Up Arrow    home()
+
    
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQTextEdit.
+
    void TQTextBrowser::linkClicked ( const TQString & link ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user clicks a link. The link is
+the value of the href i.e. the name of the target document.
+
     The link will be the absolute location of the document, based
+on the value of the anchor's href tag and the current context of
+the document.
+
     
    See also anchorClicked() and context().
+
+
    void TQTextBrowser::reload () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Reloads the current set source.
+
+
    void TQTextBrowser::setSource ( const TQString & name ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the name of the displayed document to name.
+See the "source" property for details.
+
    TQString TQTextBrowser::source () const
+
    Returns the name of the displayed document.
+See the "source" property for details.
+
    void TQTextBrowser::sourceChanged ( const TQString & src ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the mime source has changed, src
+being the new source.
+
     Source changes happen both programmatically when calling
+setSource(), forward(), backword() or home() or when the user
+clicks on links or presses the equivalent key sequences.
+
+
    Example: helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp.
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    bool modified
    
+
    This property holds whether the contents have been modified.
+
    
+
    bool overwriteMode
    
+
    This property holds this text browser's overwrite mode.
+
    
+
    bool readOnly
    
+
    This property holds whether the contents are read only.
+
    
+
    TQString source
    
+
    This property holds the name of the displayed document.
+
    This is a TQString::null if no document is displayed or if the
+source is unknown.
+
     Setting this property uses the mimeSourceFactory() to lookup the
+named document. It also checks for optional anchors and scrolls
+the document accordingly.
+
     If the first tag in the document is <qt type=detail>, the
+document is displayed as a popup rather than as new document in
+the browser window itself. Otherwise, the document is displayed
+normally in the text browser with the text set to the contents of
+the named document with setText().
+
     If you are using the filesystem access capabilities of the mime
+source factory, you must ensure that the factory knows about the
+encoding of specified files; otherwise no data will be available.
+The default factory handles a couple of common file extensions
+such as *.html and *.txt with reasonable defaults. See
+TQMimeSourceFactory::data() for details.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setSource() and get this property's value with source().
+
    int undoDepth
    
+
    This property holds this text browser's undo depth.
+
    
+
    bool undoRedoEnabled
    
+
    This property holds whether undo and redo are enabled.
+
    
+
    
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqtextcodec.html b/doc/html/ntqtextcodec.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d41e9c9d6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqtextcodec.html
@@ -0,0 +1,611 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQTextCodec Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQTextCodec Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQTextCodec class provides conversion between text encodings.
+More...
+
    Almost all the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support. The exceptions are ~TQTextCodec(), setCodecForTr(), setCodecForCStrings(), and TQTextCodec().
+
    #include <ntqtextcodec.h>
+
    Inherited by TQBig5Codec, TQBig5hkscsCodec, TQEucJpCodec, TQEucKrCodec, TQGb18030Codec, TQJisCodec, TQHebrewCodec, TQSjisCodec, and TQTsciiCodec.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • virtual ~TQTextCodec ()
      • 
+
    • virtual const char * name () const = 0
      • 
+
    • virtual const char * mimeName () const
      • 
+
    • virtual int mibEnum () const = 0
      • 
+
    • virtual TQTextDecoder * makeDecoder () const
      • 
+
    • virtual TQTextEncoder * makeEncoder () const
      • 
+
    • virtual TQString toUnicode ( const char * chars, int len ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual TQCString fromUnicode ( const TQString & uc, int & lenInOut ) const
      • 
+
    • TQCString fromUnicode ( const TQString & uc ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString toUnicode ( const TQByteArray & a, int len ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString toUnicode ( const TQByteArray & a ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString toUnicode ( const TQCString & a, int len ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString toUnicode ( const TQCString & a ) const
      • 
+
    • TQString toUnicode ( const char * chars ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual bool canEncode ( TQChar ch ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual bool canEncode ( const TQString & s ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual int heuristicContentMatch ( const char * chars, int len ) const = 0
      • 
+
    • virtual int heuristicNameMatch ( const char * hint ) const
      • 
+
    
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Static Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQTextCodec class provides conversion between text encodings.
+
+
+
     TQt uses Unicode to store, draw and manipulate strings. In many
+situations you may wish to deal with data that uses a different
+encoding. For example, most Japanese documents are still stored in
+Shift-JIS or ISO2022, while Russian users often have their
+documents in KOI8-R or CP1251.
+
     TQt provides a set of TQTextCodec classes to help with converting
+non-Unicode formats to and from Unicode. You can also create your
+own codec classes (see later).
+
     The supported encodings are:
+
      
+
    •  Latin1
+
    •  Big5 -- Chinese
+
    •  Big5-HKSCS -- Chinese
+
    •  eucJP -- Japanese
+
    •  eucKR -- Korean
+
    •  GB2312 -- Chinese
+
    •  GBK -- Chinese
+
    •  GB18030 -- Chinese
+
    •  JIS7 -- Japanese
+
    •  Shift-JIS -- Japanese
+
    •  TSCII -- Tamil
+
    •  utf8 -- Unicode, 8-bit
+
    •  utf16 -- Unicode
+
    •  KOI8-R -- Russian
+
    •  KOI8-U -- Ukrainian
+
    •  ISO8859-1 -- Western
+
    •  ISO8859-2 -- Central European
+
    •  ISO8859-3 -- Central European
+
    •  ISO8859-4 -- Baltic
+
    •  ISO8859-5 -- Cyrillic
+
    •  ISO8859-6 -- Arabic
+
    •  ISO8859-7 -- Greek
+
    •  ISO8859-8 -- Hebrew, visually ordered
+
    •  ISO8859-8-i -- Hebrew, logically ordered
+
    •  ISO8859-9 -- Turkish
+
    •  ISO8859-10
+
    •  ISO8859-13
+
    •  ISO8859-14
+
    •  ISO8859-15 -- Western
+
    •  IBM 850
+
    •  IBM 866
+
    •  CP874
+
    •  CP1250 -- Central European
+
    •  CP1251 -- Cyrillic
+
    •  CP1252 -- Western
+
    •  CP1253 -- Greek
+
    •  CP1254 -- Turkish
+
    •  CP1255 -- Hebrew
+
    •  CP1256 -- Arabic
+
    •  CP1257 -- Baltic
+
    •  CP1258
+
    •  Apple Roman
+
    •  TIS-620 -- Thai
+
    
+
     TQTextCodecs can be used as follows to convert some locally encoded
+string to Unicode. Suppose you have some string encoded in Russian
+KOI8-R encoding, and want to convert it to Unicode. The simple way
+to do this is:
+
     
    +    TQCString locallyEncoded = "..."; // text to convert
+    TQTextCodec *codec = TQTextCodec::codecForName("KOI8-R"); // get the codec for KOI8-R
+    TQString unicodeString = codec->toUnicode( locallyEncoded );
+    
    
+ 
+
     After this, unicodeString holds the text converted to Unicode.
+Converting a string from Unicode to the local encoding is just as
+easy:
+
     
    +    TQString unicodeString = "..."; // any Unicode text
+    TQTextCodec *codec = TQTextCodec::codecForName("KOI8-R"); // get the codec for KOI8-R
+    TQCString locallyEncoded = codec->fromUnicode( unicodeString );
+    
    
+ 
+
     Some care must be taken when trying to convert the data in chunks,
+for example, when receiving it over a network. In such cases it is
+possible that a multi-byte character will be split over two
+chunks. At best this might result in the loss of a character and
+at worst cause the entire conversion to fail.
+
     The approach to use in these situations is to create a TQTextDecoder
+object for the codec and use this TQTextDecoder for the whole
+decoding process, as shown below:
+
     
    +    TQTextCodec *codec = TQTextCodec::codecForName( "Shift-JIS" );
+    TQTextDecoder *decoder = codec->makeDecoder();
+
+    TQString unicodeString;
+    while( receiving_data ) {
+        TQByteArray chunk = new_data;
+        unicodeString += decoder->toUnicode( chunk.data(), chunk.length() );
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     The TQTextDecoder object maintains state between chunks and therefore
+works correctly even if a multi-byte character is split between
+chunks.
+
     
+
     Creating your own Codec class
+
    
+
     Support for new text encodings can be added to TQt by creating
+TQTextCodec subclasses.
+
     Built-in codecs can be overridden by custom codecs since more
+recently created TQTextCodec objects take precedence over earlier
+ones.
+
     You may find it more convenient to make your codec class available
+as a plugin; see the plugin
+    documentation for more details.
+
     The abstract virtual functions describe the encoder to the
+system and the coder is used as required in the different
+text file formats supported by TQTextStream, and under X11, for the
+locale-specific character input and output.
+
     To add support for another 8-bit encoding to TQt, make a subclass
+of TQTextCodec and implement at least the following methods:
+
     
    +    const char* name() const
+    
    
+ 
+Return the official name for the encoding.
+
     
    +    int mibEnum() const
+    
    
+ 
+Return the MIB enum for the encoding if it is listed in the
+IANA character-sets encoding file.
+
     If the encoding is multi-byte then it will have "state"; that is,
+the interpretation of some bytes will be dependent on some preceding
+bytes. For such encodings, you must implement:
+
     
    +    TQTextDecoder* makeDecoder() const
+    
    
+ 
+Return a TQTextDecoder that remembers incomplete multi-byte sequence
+prefixes or other required state.
+
     If the encoding does not require state, you should implement:
+
     
    +    TQString toUnicode(const char* chars, int len) const
+    
    
+ 
+Converts len characters from chars to Unicode.
+
     The base TQTextCodec class has default implementations of the above
+two functions, but they are mutually recursive, so you must
+re-implement at least one of them, or both for improved efficiency.
+
     For conversion from Unicode to 8-bit encodings, it is rarely necessary
+to maintain state. However, two functions similar to the two above
+are used for encoding:
+
     
    +    TQTextEncoder* makeEncoder() const
+    
    
+ 
+Return a TQTextEncoder.
+
     
    +    TQCString fromUnicode(const TQString& uc, int& lenInOut ) const
+    
    
+ 
+Converts lenInOut characters (of type TQChar) from the start of
+the string uc, returning a TQCString result, and also returning
+the length of the result in
+lenInOut.
+
     Again, these are mutually recursive so only one needs to be implemented,
+or both if greater efficiency is possible.
+
     Finally, you must implement:
+
     
    +    int heuristicContentMatch(const char* chars, int len) const
+    
    
+ 
+Gives a value indicating how likely it is that len characters
+from chars are in the encoding.
+
     A good model for this function is the
+TQWindowsLocalCodec::heuristicContentMatch function found in the TQt
+sources.
+
     A TQTextCodec subclass might have improved performance if you also
+re-implement:
+
     
    +    bool canEncode( TQChar ) const
+    
    
+ 
+Test if a Unicode character can be encoded.
+
     
    +    bool canEncode( const TQString& ) const
+    
    
+ 
+Test if a string of Unicode characters can be encoded.
+
     
    +    int heuristicNameMatch(const char* hint) const
+    
    
+ 
+Test if a possibly non-standard name is referring to the codec.
+
     Codecs can also be created as plugins.
+
    See also Internationalization with TQt.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQTextCodec::TQTextCodec () [protected]
+
    Warning: This function is not reentrant.
    
+
+
+
     Constructs a TQTextCodec, and gives it the highest precedence. The
+TQTextCodec should always be constructed on the heap (i.e. with new). TQt takes ownership and will delete it when the application
+terminates.
+
+
    TQTextCodec::~TQTextCodec () [virtual]
+
    Warning: This function is not reentrant.
    
+
+
+
     Destroys the TQTextCodec. Note that you should not delete codecs
+yourself: once created they become TQt's responsibility.
+
+
    bool TQTextCodec::canEncode ( TQChar ch ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the Unicode character ch can be fully encoded
+with this codec; otherwise returns FALSE. The default
+implementation tests if the result of toUnicode(fromUnicode(ch))
+is the original ch. Subclasses may be able to improve the
+efficiency.
+
+
    bool TQTextCodec::canEncode ( const TQString & s ) const [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     s contains the string being tested for encode-ability.
+
+
    TQTextCodec * TQTextCodec::codecForCStrings () [static]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the codec used by TQString to convert to and from const
+char* and TQCStrings. If this function returns 0 (the default),
+TQString assumes Latin-1.
+
     
    See also setCodecForCStrings().
+
+
    TQTextCodec * TQTextCodec::codecForContent ( const char * chars, int len ) [static]
+
    
+Searches all installed TQTextCodec objects, returning the one which
+most recognizes the given content. May return 0.
+
     Note that this is often a poor choice, since character encodings
+often use most of the available character sequences, and so only
+by linguistic analysis could a true match be made.
+
     chars contains the string to check, and len contains the
+number of characters in the string to use.
+
     
    See also heuristicContentMatch().
+
+
    Example: qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
+
    TQTextCodec * TQTextCodec::codecForIndex ( int i ) [static]
+
    
+Returns the TQTextCodec i positions from the most recently
+inserted codec, or 0 if there is no such TQTextCodec. Thus,
+codecForIndex(0) returns the most recently created TQTextCodec.
+
+
    Example: qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
+
    TQTextCodec * TQTextCodec::codecForLocale () [static]
+
     Returns a pointer to the codec most suitable for this locale. 
+
    Example: qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
+
    TQTextCodec * TQTextCodec::codecForMib ( int mib ) [static]
+
    
+Returns the TQTextCodec which matches the MIBenum mib.
+
+
    TQTextCodec * TQTextCodec::codecForName ( const char * name, int accuracy = 0 ) [static]
+
    
+Searches all installed TQTextCodec objects and returns the one
+which best matches name; the match is case-insensitive. Returns
+0 if no codec's heuristicNameMatch() reports a match better than
+accuracy, or if name is a null string.
+
     
    See also heuristicNameMatch().
+
+
    TQTextCodec * TQTextCodec::codecForTr () [static]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the codec used by TQObject::tr() on its argument. If this
+function returns 0 (the default), tr() assumes Latin-1.
+
     
    See also setCodecForTr().
+
+
    void TQTextCodec::deleteAllCodecs () [static]
+
    
+Deletes all the created codecs.
+
     Warning: Do not call this function.
+
     TQApplication calls this function just before exiting to delete
+any TQTextCodec objects that may be lying around. Since various
+other classes hold pointers to TQTextCodec objects, it is not safe
+to call this function earlier.
+
     If you are using the utility classes (like TQString) but not using
+TQApplication, calling this function at the very end of your
+application may be helpful for chasing down memory leaks by
+eliminating any TQTextCodec objects.
+
+
    TQCString TQTextCodec::fromUnicode ( const TQString & uc, int & lenInOut ) const [virtual]
+
    
+TQTextCodec subclasses must reimplement either this function or
+makeEncoder(). It converts the first lenInOut characters of uc from Unicode to the encoding of the subclass. If lenInOut is
+negative or too large, the length of uc is used instead.
+
     Converts lenInOut characters (not bytes) from uc, producing
+a TQCString. lenInOut will be set to the length of the result (in bytes).
+
     The default implementation makes an encoder with makeEncoder() and
+converts the input with that. Note that the default makeEncoder()
+implementation makes an encoder that simply calls this function,
+hence subclasses must reimplement one function or the other to
+avoid infinite recursion.
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQHebrewCodec.
+
    TQCString TQTextCodec::fromUnicode ( const TQString & uc ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     uc is the unicode source string.
+
+
    int TQTextCodec::heuristicContentMatch ( const char * chars, int len ) const [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     TQTextCodec subclasses must reimplement this function. It examines
+the first len bytes of chars and returns a value indicating
+how likely it is that the string is a prefix of text encoded in
+the encoding of the subclass. A negative return value indicates
+that the text is detectably not in the encoding (e.g. it contains
+characters undefined in the encoding). A return value of 0
+indicates that the text should be decoded with this codec rather
+than as ASCII, but there is no particular evidence. The value
+should range up to len. Thus, most decoders will return -1, 0,
+or -len.
+
     The characters are not null terminated.
+
     
    See also codecForContent().
+
+
    int TQTextCodec::heuristicNameMatch ( const char * hint ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns a value indicating how likely it is that this decoder is
+appropriate for decoding some format that has the given name. The
+name is compared with the hint.
+
     A good match returns a positive number around the length of the
+string. A bad match is negative.
+
     The default implementation calls simpleHeuristicNameMatch() with
+the name of the codec.
+
+
    TQTextCodec * TQTextCodec::loadCharmap ( TQIODevice * iod ) [static]
+
    
+Reads a POSIX2 charmap definition from iod.
+The parser recognizes the following lines:
+
     
+  <code_set_name> name
    
+  <escape_char> character
    
+  % alias alias
    
+  CHARMAP
    
+  <token> /xhexbyte <Uunicode> ...
    
+  <token> /ddecbyte <Uunicode> ...
    
+  <token> /octbyte <Uunicode> ...
    
+  <token> /any/any... <Uunicode> ...
    
+  END CHARMAP
    
+    
+
     The resulting TQTextCodec is returned (and also added to the global
+list of codecs). The name() of the result is taken from the
+code_set_name.
+
     Note that a codec constructed in this way uses much more memory
+and is slower than a hand-written TQTextCodec subclass, since
+tables in code are kept in memory shared by all TQt applications.
+
     
    See also loadCharmapFile().
+
+
    Example: qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
+
    TQTextCodec * TQTextCodec::loadCharmapFile ( TQString filename ) [static]
+
    
+A convenience function for loadCharmap() that loads the charmap
+definition from the file filename.
+
+
    const char * TQTextCodec::locale () [static]
+
    
+Returns a string representing the current language and
+sublanguage, e.g. "pt" for Portuguese, or "pt_br" for Portuguese/Brazil.
+
+
    Example: i18n/main.cpp.
+
    TQTextDecoder * TQTextCodec::makeDecoder () const [virtual]
+
    
+Creates a TQTextDecoder which stores enough state to decode chunks
+of char* data to create chunks of Unicode data. The default
+implementation creates a stateless decoder, which is only
+sufficient for the simplest encodings where each byte corresponds
+to exactly one Unicode character.
+
     The caller is responsible for deleting the returned object.
+
+
    TQTextEncoder * TQTextCodec::makeEncoder () const [virtual]
+
    
+Creates a TQTextEncoder which stores enough state to encode chunks
+of Unicode data as char* data. The default implementation creates
+a stateless encoder, which is only sufficient for the simplest
+encodings where each Unicode character corresponds to exactly one
+character.
+
     The caller is responsible for deleting the returned object.
+
+
    int TQTextCodec::mibEnum () const [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Subclasses of TQTextCodec must reimplement this function. It
+returns the MIBenum (see the
+    IANA character-sets encoding file for more information).
+It is important that each TQTextCodec subclass returns the correct
+unique value for this function.
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQEucJpCodec.
+
    const char * TQTextCodec::mimeName () const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the preferred mime name of the encoding as defined in the
+IANA character-sets encoding file.
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQEucJpCodec, TQEucKrCodec, TQJisCodec, TQHebrewCodec, and TQSjisCodec.
+
    const char * TQTextCodec::name () const [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     TQTextCodec subclasses must reimplement this function. It returns
+the name of the encoding supported by the subclass. When choosing
+a name for an encoding, consider these points:
+
      
+
    • 	On X11, heuristicNameMatch( const char * hint )
+is used to test if a the TQTextCodec
+can convert between Unicode and the encoding of a font
+with encoding hint, such as "iso8859-1" for Latin-1 fonts,
+"koi8-r" for Russian KOI8 fonts.
+The default algorithm of heuristicNameMatch() uses name().
+
    • 	Some applications may use this function to present
+encodings to the end user.
+
    
+
+
    Example: qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
+
    void TQTextCodec::setCodecForCStrings ( TQTextCodec * c ) [static]
+
    Warning: This function is not reentrant.
    
+
+
+
+
     Sets the codec used by TQString to convert to and from const char*
+and TQCStrings. If c is 0 (the default), TQString assumes Latin-1.
+
     Warning: Some codecs do not preserve the characters in the ascii
+range (0x00 to 0x7f).  For example, the Japanese Shift-JIS
+encoding maps the backslash character (0x5a) to the Yen character.
+This leads to unexpected results when using the backslash
+character to escape characters in strings used in e.g. regular
+expressions.  Use TQString::fromLatin1() to preserve characters in
+the ascii range when needed.
+
     
    See also codecForCStrings() and setCodecForTr().
+
+
    void TQTextCodec::setCodecForLocale ( TQTextCodec * c ) [static]
+
    
+Set the codec to c; this will be returned by codecForLocale().
+This might be needed for some applications that want to use their
+own mechanism for setting the locale.
+
     
    See also codecForLocale().
+
+
    void TQTextCodec::setCodecForTr ( TQTextCodec * c ) [static]
+
    Warning: This function is not reentrant.
    
+
+
+
+
     Sets the codec used by TQObject::tr() on its argument to c. If
+c is 0 (the default), tr() assumes Latin-1.
+
     If the literal quoted text in the program is not in the Latin-1
+encoding, this function can be used to set the appropriate
+encoding. For example, software developed by Korean programmers
+might use eucKR for all the text in the program, in which case the
+main() function might look like this:
+
     
    +    int main(int argc, char** argv)
+    {
+        TQApplication app(argc, argv);
+        ... install any additional codecs ...
+        TQTextCodec::setCodecForTr( TQTextCodec::codecForName("eucKR") );
+        ...
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     Note that this is not the way to select the encoding that the user has chosen. For example, to convert an application containing
+literal English strings to Korean, all that is needed is for the
+English strings to be passed through tr() and for translation
+files to be loaded. For details of internationalization, see the
+TQt internationalization documentation.
+
     
    See also codecForTr() and setCodecForCStrings().
+
+
    int TQTextCodec::simpleHeuristicNameMatch ( const char * name, const char * hint ) [static protected]
+
    
+A simple utility function for heuristicNameMatch(): it does some
+very minor character-skipping so that almost-exact matches score
+high. name is the text we're matching and hint is used for
+the comparison.
+
+
    TQString TQTextCodec::toUnicode ( const char * chars, int len ) const [virtual]
+
    
+TQTextCodec subclasses must reimplement this function or
+makeDecoder(). It converts the first len characters of chars
+to Unicode.
+
     The default implementation makes a decoder with makeDecoder() and
+converts the input with that. Note that the default makeDecoder()
+implementation makes a decoder that simply calls
+this function, hence subclasses must reimplement one function or
+the other to avoid infinite recursion.
+
+
    TQString TQTextCodec::toUnicode ( const TQByteArray & a, int len ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     a contains the source characters; len contains the number of
+characters in a to use.
+
+
    TQString TQTextCodec::toUnicode ( const TQByteArray & a ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     a contains the source characters.
+
+
    TQString TQTextCodec::toUnicode ( const TQCString & a, int len ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     a contains the source characters; len contains the number of
+characters in a to use.
+
+
    TQString TQTextCodec::toUnicode ( const TQCString & a ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     a contains the source characters.
+
+
    TQString TQTextCodec::toUnicode ( const char * chars ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     chars contains the source characters.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqtextcodecplugin.html b/doc/html/ntqtextcodecplugin.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f6670614a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqtextcodecplugin.html
@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQTextCodecPlugin Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQTextCodecPlugin Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQTextCodecPlugin class provides an abstract base for custom TQTextCodec plugins.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqtextcodecplugin.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQTextCodecPlugin class provides an abstract base for custom TQTextCodec plugins.
+
+
+
     The text codec plugin is a simple plugin interface that makes it
+easy to create custom text codecs that can be loaded dynamically
+into applications.
+
     Writing a text codec plugin is achieved by subclassing this base
+class, reimplementing the pure virtual functions names(),
+createForName(), mibEnums() and createForMib(), and exporting the
+class with the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN macro. See the TQt Plugins documentation for details.
+
     See the IANA
+    character-sets encoding file for more information on mime
+names and mib enums.
+
    See also Plugins.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQTextCodecPlugin::TQTextCodecPlugin ()
+
    
+Constructs a text codec plugin. This is invoked automatically by
+the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN macro.
+
+
    TQTextCodecPlugin::~TQTextCodecPlugin ()
+
    
+Destroys the text codec plugin.
+
     You never have to call this explicitly. TQt destroys a plugin
+automatically when it is no longer used.
+
+
    TQTextCodec * TQTextCodecPlugin::createForMib ( int mib ) [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Creates a TQTextCodec object for the mib enum mib.
+
     (See the
+    IANA character-sets encoding file for more information)
+
     
    See also mibEnums().
+
+
    TQTextCodec * TQTextCodecPlugin::createForName ( const TQString & name ) [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Creates a TQTextCodec object for the codec called name.
+
     
    See also names().
+
+
    TQValueList<int> TQTextCodecPlugin::mibEnums () const [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the list of mib enums supported by this plugin.
+
     
    See also createForMib().
+
+
    TQStringList TQTextCodecPlugin::names () const [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the list of mime names supported by this plugin.
+
     
    See also createForName().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqtextedit.html b/doc/html/ntqtextedit.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f439fbad4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqtextedit.html
@@ -0,0 +1,1626 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQTextEdit Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQTextEdit Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQTextEdit widget provides a powerful single-page rich text editor.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqtextedit.h>
+
    Inherits TQScrollView.
+
    Inherited by TQMultiLineEdit, TQTextBrowser, and TQTextView.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • AutoFormatting autoFormatting - the enabled set of auto formatting features
      • 
+
    • TQString documentTitle - the title of the document parsed from the text  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool hasSelectedText - whether some text is selected in selection 0  (read only)
      • 
+
    • int length - the number of characters in the text  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool linkUnderline - whether hypertext links will be underlined
      • 
+
    • bool modified - whether the document has been modified by the user
      • 
+
    • bool overwriteMode - the text edit's overwrite mode
      • 
+
    • TQBrush paper - the background (paper) brush
      • 
+
    • bool readOnly - whether the text edit is read-only
      • 
+
    • TQString selectedText - the selected text (from selection 0) or an empty string if there is no currently selected text (in selection 0)  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool tabChangesFocus - whether TAB changes focus or is accepted as input
      • 
+
    • int tabStopWidth - the tab stop width in pixels
      • 
+
    • TQString text - the text edit's text
      • 
+
    • TextFormat textFormat - the text format: rich text, plain text, log text or auto text
      • 
+
    • int undoDepth - the depth of the undo history
      • 
+
    • bool undoRedoEnabled - whether undo/redo is enabled
      • 
+
    • WordWrap wordWrap - the word wrap mode
      • 
+
    • int wrapColumnOrWidth - the position (in pixels or columns depending on the wrap mode) where text will be wrapped
      • 
+
    • WrapPolicy wrapPolicy - the word wrap policy, at whitespace or anywhere
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQTextEdit widget provides a powerful single-page rich text editor.
+
     
+
+
+
     
+
    
+
+
+
     
     Introduction and Concepts
+
    
+
     TQTextEdit is an advanced WYSIWYG viewer/editor supporting rich
+text formatting using HTML-style tags. It is optimized to handle
+large documents and to respond tquickly to user input.
+
     TQTextEdit has four modes of operation:
+
    
+
     Mode Command Notes
+
     Plain Text Editor setTextFormat(PlainText)
+Set text with setText(); text() returns plain text. Text
+attributes (e.g. colors) can be set, but plain text is always
+returned.
+
     Rich Text Editor setTextFormat(RichText)
+Set text with setText(); text() returns rich text. Rich
+text editing is fairly limited. You can't set margins or
+insert images for example (although you can read and
+correctly display files that have margins set and that
+include images). This mode is mostly useful for editing small
+amounts of rich text. 1.
+
     Text Viewer setReadOnly(TRUE)
+Set text with setText() or append() (which has no undo
+history so is faster and uses less memory); text() returns
+plain or rich text depending on the textFormat(). This mode
+can correctly display a large subset of HTML tags.
+
     Log Viewer setTextFormat(LogText)
+Append text using append(). The widget is set to be read
+only and rich text support is disabled although a few HTML
+tags (for color, bold, italic and underline) may be used.
+(See LogText mode for details.)
+
    
+
     1.A more complete API that supports setting
+margins, images, etc., is planned for a later TQt release.
+
     TQTextEdit can be used as a syntax highlighting editor when used in
+conjunction with TQSyntaxHighlighter.
+
     We recommend that you always call setTextFormat() to set the mode
+you want to use. If you use AutoText then setText() and
+append() will try to determine whether the text they are given is
+plain text or rich text. If you use RichText then setText() and
+append() will assume that the text they are given is rich text.
+insert() simply inserts the text it is given.
+
     TQTextEdit works on paragraphs and characters. A paragraph is a
+formatted string which is word-wrapped to fit into the width of
+the widget. By default when reading plain text, one newline
+signify a paragraph. A document consists of zero or more
+paragraphs, indexed from 0. Characters are indexed on a
+per-paragraph basis, also indexed from 0. The words in the
+paragraph are aligned in accordance with the paragraph's
+alignment(). Paragraphs are separated by hard line breaks. Each
+character within a paragraph has its own attributes, for example,
+font and color.
+
     The text edit documentation uses the following concepts:
+
      
+
    •  current format --
+this is the format at the current cursor position, and it
+is the format of the selected text if any.
+
    •  current paragraph -- the paragraph which contains the
+cursor.
+
    
+
     TQTextEdit can display images (using TQMimeSourceFactory), lists and
+tables. If the text is too large to view within the text edit's
+viewport, scrollbars will appear. The text edit can load both
+plain text and HTML files (a subset of HTML 3.2 and 4). The
+rendering style and the set of valid tags are defined by a
+styleSheet(). Custom tags can be created and placed in a custom
+style sheet. Change the style sheet with setStyleSheet(); see
+TQStyleSheet for details. The images identified by image tags are
+displayed if they can be interpreted using the text edit's
+TQMimeSourceFactory; see setMimeSourceFactory().
+
     If you want a text browser with more navigation use TQTextBrowser.
+If you just need to display a small piece of rich text use TQLabel
+or TQSimpleRichText.
+
     If you create a new TQTextEdit, and want to allow the user to edit
+rich text, call setTextFormat(TQt::RichText) to ensure that the
+text is treated as rich text. (Rich text uses HTML tags to set
+text formatting attributes. See TQStyleSheet for information on the
+HTML tags that are supported.). If you don't call setTextFormat()
+explicitly the text edit will guess from the text itself whether
+it is rich text or plain text. This means that if the text looks
+like HTML or XML it will probably be interpreted as rich text, so
+you should call setTextFormat(TQt::PlainText) to preserve such
+text.
+
     Note that we do not intend to add a full-featured web browser
+widget to TQt (because that would easily double TQt's size and only
+a few applications would benefit from it). The rich
+text support in TQt is designed to provide a fast, portable and
+efficient way to add reasonable online help facilities to
+applications, and to provide a basis for rich text editors.
+
     
     Using TQTextEdit as a Display Widget
+
    
+
     TQTextEdit can display a large HTML subset, including tables and
+images.
+
     The text is set or replaced using setText() which deletes any
+existing text and replaces it with the text passed in the
+setText() call. If you call setText() with legacy HTML (with
+setTextFormat(RichText) in force), and then call text(), the text
+that is returned may have different markup, but will render the
+same. Text can be inserted with insert(), paste(), pasteSubType()
+and append(). Text that is appended does not go into the undo
+history; this makes append() faster and consumes less memory. Text
+can also be cut(). The entire text is deleted with clear() and the
+selected text is deleted with removeSelectedText(). Selected
+(marked) text can also be deleted with del() (which will delete
+the character to the right of the cursor if no text is selected).
+
     Loading and saving text is achieved using setText() and text(),
+for example:
+
    +    TQFile file( fileName ); // Read the text from a file
+    if ( file.open( IO_ReadOnly ) ) {
+        TQTextStream stream( &file );
+        textEdit->setText( stream.read() );
+    }
+
+    TQFile file( fileName ); // Write the text to a file
+    if ( file.open( IO_WriteOnly ) ) {
+        TQTextStream stream( &file );
+        stream << textEdit->text();
+        textEdit->setModified( FALSE );
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     By default the text edit wraps words at whitespace to fit within
+the text edit widget. The setWordWrap() function is used to
+specify the kind of word wrap you want, or NoWrap if you don't
+want any wrapping. Call setWordWrap() to set a fixed pixel width
+FixedPixelWidth, or character column (e.g. 80 column) FixedColumnWidth with the pixels or columns specified with
+setWrapColumnOrWidth(). If you use word wrap to the widget's width
+WidgetWidth, you can specify whether to break on whitespace or
+anywhere with setWrapPolicy().
+
     The background color is set differently than other widgets, using
+setPaper(). You specify a brush style which could be a plain color
+or a complex pixmap.
+
     Hypertext links are automatically underlined; this can be changed
+with setLinkUnderline(). The tab stop width is set with
+setTabStopWidth().
+
     The zoomIn() and zoomOut() functions can be used to resize the
+text by increasing (decreasing for zoomOut()) the point size used.
+Images are not affected by the zoom functions.
+
     The lines() function returns the number of lines in the text and
+paragraphs() returns the number of paragraphs. The number of lines
+within a particular paragraph is returned by linesOfParagraph().
+The length of the entire text in characters is returned by
+length().
+
     You can scroll to an anchor in the text, e.g.
+<a name="anchor"> with scrollToAnchor(). The find() function
+can be used to find and select a given string within the text.
+
     A read-only TQTextEdit provides the same functionality as the
+(obsolete) TQTextView. (TQTextView is still supplied for
+compatibility with old code.)
+
     
     Read-only key bindings
+
    
+
     When TQTextEdit is used read-only the key-bindings are limited to
+navigation, and text may only be selected with the mouse:
+
    
+
     Keypresses Action
+
     UpArrow	Move one line up
+
     DownArrow	Move one line down
+
     LeftArrow	Move one character left
+
     RightArrow	Move one character right
+
     PageUp	Move one (viewport) page up
+
     PageDown	Move one (viewport) page down
+
     Home	Move to the beginning of the text
+
     End		Move to the end of the text
+
     Shift+Wheel
+Scroll the page horizontally (the Wheel is the mouse wheel)
+
     Ctrl+Wheel	Zoom the text
+
    
+
     The text edit may be able to provide some meta-information. For
+example, the documentTitle() function will return the text from
+within HTML <title> tags.
+
     The text displayed in a text edit has a context. The context is
+a path which the text edit's TQMimeSourceFactory uses to resolve
+the locations of files and images. It is passed to the
+mimeSourceFactory() when quering data. (See TQTextEdit() and
+context().)
+
     
+
     Using TQTextEdit in LogText Mode
+
    
+
     Setting the text format to LogText puts the widget in a special
+mode which is optimized for very large texts. Editing, word wrap,
+and rich text support are disabled in this mode (the widget is
+explicitly made read-only). This allows the text to be stored in a
+different, more memory efficient manner. However, a certain degree
+of text formatting is supported through the use of formatting tags.
+A tag is delimited by < and >. The characters <, >
+and & are escaped by using &lt;, &gt; and &amp;.
+A tag pair consists of a left and a right tag (or open/close tags).
+Left-tags mark the starting point for formatting, while right-tags
+mark the ending point. A right-tag always start with a / before
+the tag keyword. For example <b> and </b> are a tag pair.
+Tags can be nested, but they have to be closed in the same order as
+they are opened. For example, <b><u></u></b> is valid, while <b><u></b></u> will output an error message.
+
     By using tags it is possible to change the color, bold, italic and
+underline settings for a piece of text. A color can be specified
+by using the HTML font tag <font color=colorname>. The color
+name can be one of the color names from the X11 color database, or
+a RGB hex value (e.g #00ff00). Example of valid color tags:
+<font color=red>, <font color="light blue">, <font color="#223344">. Bold, italic and underline settings can be
+specified by the tags <b>, <i> and <u>. Note that a
+tag does not necessarily have to be closed. A valid example:
+
    +    This is <font color=red>red</font> while <b>this</b> is <font color=blue>blue</font>.
+    <font color=green><font color=yellow>Yellow,</font> and <u>green</u>.
+    
    
+ 
+
     Stylesheets can also be used in LogText mode. To create and use a
+custom tag, you could do the following:
+
    +    TQTextEdit * log = new TQTextEdit( this );
+    log->setTextFormat( TQt::LogText );
+    TQStyleSheetItem * item = new TQStyleSheetItem( log->styleSheet(), "mytag" );
+    item->setColor( "red" );
+    item->setFontWeight( TQFont::Bold );
+    item->setFontUnderline( TRUE );
+    log->append( "This is a <mytag>custom tag</mytag>!" );
+    
    
+ 
+Note that only the color, bold, underline and italic attributes of
+a TQStyleSheetItem is used in LogText mode.
+
     Note that you can use setMaxLogLines() to limit the number of
+lines the widget can hold in LogText mode.
+
     There are a few things that you need to be aware of when the
+widget is in this mode:
+
      
+
    •  Functions that deal with rich text formatting and cursor
+movement will not work or return anything valid.
+
    •  Lines are equivalent to paragraphs.
+
    
+
     
     Using TQTextEdit as an Editor
+
    
+
     All the information about using TQTextEdit as a display widget also
+applies here.
+
     The current format's attributes are set with setItalic(),
+setBold(), setUnderline(), setFamily() (font family),
+setPointSize(), setColor() and setCurrentFont(). The current
+paragraph's alignment is set with setAlignment().
+
     Use setSelection() to select text. The setSelectionAttributes()
+function is used to indicate how selected text should be
+displayed. Use hasSelectedText() to find out if any text is
+selected. The currently selected text's position is available
+using getSelection() and the selected text itself is returned by
+selectedText(). The selection can be copied to the clipboard with
+copy(), or cut to the clipboard with cut(). It can be deleted with
+removeSelectedText(). The entire text can be selected (or
+unselected) using selectAll(). TQTextEdit supports multiple
+selections. Most of the selection functions operate on the default
+selection, selection 0. If the user presses a non-selecting key,
+e.g. a cursor key without also holding down Shift, all selections
+are cleared.
+
     Set and get the position of the cursor with setCursorPosition()
+and getCursorPosition() respectively. When the cursor is moved,
+the signals currentFontChanged(), currentColorChanged() and
+currentAlignmentChanged() are emitted to reflect the font, color
+and alignment at the new cursor position.
+
     If the text changes, the textChanged() signal is emitted, and if
+the user inserts a new line by pressing Return or Enter,
+returnPressed() is emitted. The isModified() function will return
+TRUE if the text has been modified.
+
     TQTextEdit provides command-based undo and redo. To set the depth
+of the command history use setUndoDepth() which defaults to 100
+steps. To undo or redo the last operation call undo() or redo().
+The signals undoAvailable() and redoAvailable() indicate whether
+the undo and redo operations can be executed.
+
     The indent() function is used to reindent a paragraph. It is
+useful for code editors, for example in TQt Designer's code editor Ctrl+I invokes the indent()
+function.
+
     
     Editing key bindings
+
    
+
     The list of key-bindings which are implemented for editing:
+
    
+
     Keypresses Action
+
     Backspace Delete the character to the left of the cursor
+
     Delete Delete the character to the right of the cursor
+
     Ctrl+A Move the cursor to the beginning of the line
+
     Ctrl+B Move the cursor one character left
+
     Ctrl+C Copy the marked text to the clipboard (also
+Ctrl+Insert under Windows)
+
     Ctrl+D Delete the character to the right of the cursor
+
     Ctrl+E Move the cursor to the end of the line
+
     Ctrl+F Move the cursor one character right
+
     Ctrl+H Delete the character to the left of the cursor
+
     Ctrl+K Delete to end of line
+
     Ctrl+N Move the cursor one line down
+
     Ctrl+P Move the cursor one line up
+
     Ctrl+V Paste the clipboard text into line edit
+(also Shift+Insert under Windows)
+
     Ctrl+X Cut the marked text, copy to clipboard
+(also Shift+Delete under Windows)
+
     Ctrl+Z Undo the last operation
+
     Ctrl+Y Redo the last operation
+
     LeftArrow	    Move the cursor one character left
+
     Ctrl+LeftArrow  Move the cursor one word left
+
     RightArrow	    Move the cursor one character right
+
     Ctrl+RightArrow Move the cursor one word right
+
     UpArrow	    Move the cursor one line up
+
     Ctrl+UpArrow    Move the cursor one word up
+
     DownArrow	    Move the cursor one line down
+
     Ctrl+Down Arrow Move the cursor one word down
+
     PageUp	    Move the cursor one page up
+
     PageDown	    Move the cursor one page down
+
     Home	    Move the cursor to the beginning of the line
+
     Ctrl+Home	    Move the cursor to the beginning of the text
+
     End		    Move the cursor to the end of the line
+
     Ctrl+End	    Move the cursor to the end of the text
+
     Shift+Wheel	    Scroll the page horizontally
+(the Wheel is the mouse wheel)
+
     Ctrl+Wheel	    Zoom the text
+
    
+
     To select (mark) text hold down the Shift key whilst pressing one
+of the movement keystrokes, for example, Shift+Right Arrow
+will select the character to the right, and Shift+Ctrl+Right Arrow will select the word to the right, etc.
+
     By default the text edit widget operates in insert mode so all
+text that the user enters is inserted into the text edit and any
+text to the right of the cursor is moved out of the way. The mode
+can be changed to overwrite, where new text overwrites any text to
+the right of the cursor, using setOverwriteMode().
+
    See also Basic Widgets and Text Related Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQTextEdit::AutoFormatting
    
+
+
      
+
    • TQTextEdit::AutoNone - Do not perform any automatic formatting
+
    • TQTextEdit::AutoBulletList - Only automatically format bulletted lists
+
    • TQTextEdit::AutoAll - Apply all available autoformatting
+
    
+
    TQTextEdit::CursorAction
    
+
+
     This enum is used by moveCursor() to specify in which direction
+the cursor should be moved:
+
      
+
    • TQTextEdit::MoveBackward - Moves the cursor one character backward
+
    • TQTextEdit::MoveWordBackward - Moves the cursor one word backward
+
    • TQTextEdit::MoveForward - Moves the cursor one character forward
+
    • TQTextEdit::MoveWordForward - Moves the cursor one word forward
+
    • TQTextEdit::MoveUp - Moves the cursor up one line
+
    • TQTextEdit::MoveDown - Moves the cursor down one line
+
    • TQTextEdit::MoveLineStart - Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line
+
    • TQTextEdit::MoveLineEnd - Moves the cursor to the end of the line
+
    • TQTextEdit::MoveHome - Moves the cursor to the beginning of the document
+
    • TQTextEdit::MoveEnd - Moves the cursor to the end of the document
+
    • TQTextEdit::MovePgUp - Moves the cursor one viewport page up
+
    • TQTextEdit::MovePgDown - Moves the cursor one viewport page down
+
    
+
    TQTextEdit::KeyboardAction
    
+
+
     This enum is used by doKeyboardAction() to specify which action
+should be executed:
+
      
+
    • TQTextEdit::ActionBackspace - Delete the character to the left of the
+cursor.
+
    • TQTextEdit::ActionDelete - Delete the character to the right of the
+cursor.
+
    • TQTextEdit::ActionReturn - Split the paragraph at the cursor position.
+
    • TQTextEdit::ActionKill - If the cursor is not at the end of the
+paragraph, delete the text from the cursor position until the end
+of the paragraph. If the cursor is at the end of the paragraph,
+delete the hard line break at the end of the paragraph: this will
+cause this paragraph to be joined with the following paragraph.
+
    • TQTextEdit::ActionWordBackspace - Delete the word to the left of the
+cursor position.
+
    • TQTextEdit::ActionWordDelete - Delete the word to the right of the
+cursor position
+
     
+
    TQTextEdit::VerticalAlignment
    
+
+
     This enum is used to set the vertical alignment of the text.
+
      
+
    • TQTextEdit::AlignNormal - Normal alignment
+
    • TQTextEdit::AlignSuperScript - Superscript
+
    • TQTextEdit::AlignSubScript - Subscript
+
    
+
    TQTextEdit::WordWrap
    
+
+
     This enum defines the TQTextEdit's word wrap modes.
+
      
+
    • TQTextEdit::NoWrap - Do not wrap the text.
+
    • TQTextEdit::WidgetWidth - Wrap the text at the current width of the
+widget (this is the default). Wrapping is at whitespace by
+default; this can be changed with setWrapPolicy().
+
    • TQTextEdit::FixedPixelWidth - Wrap the text at a fixed number of pixels
+from the widget's left side. The number of pixels is set with
+wrapColumnOrWidth().
+
    • TQTextEdit::FixedColumnWidth - Wrap the text at a fixed number of
+character columns from the widget's left side. The number of
+characters is set with wrapColumnOrWidth(). This is useful if you
+need formatted text that can also be displayed gracefully on
+devices with monospaced fonts, for example a standard VT100
+terminal, where you might set wrapColumnOrWidth() to 80.
+
     
    See also wordWrap and wordWrap.
+
+
    TQTextEdit::WrapPolicy
    
+
+
     This enum defines where text can be wrapped in word wrap mode.
+
      
+
    • TQTextEdit::AtWhiteSpace - Don't use this deprecated value (it is a
+synonym for AtWordBoundary which you should use instead).
+
    • TQTextEdit::Anywhere - Break anywhere, including within words.
+
    • TQTextEdit::AtWordBoundary - Break lines at word boundaries, e.g. spaces or
+newlines
+
    • TQTextEdit::AtWordOrDocumentBoundary - Break lines at whitespace, e.g.
+spaces or newlines if possible. Break it anywhere otherwise.
+
     
    See also wrapPolicy.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQTextEdit::TQTextEdit ( const TQString & text, const TQString & context = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a TQTextEdit called name, with parent parent. The
+text edit will display the text text using context context.
+
     The context is a path which the text edit's TQMimeSourceFactory
+uses to resolve the locations of files and images. It is passed to
+the mimeSourceFactory() when quering data.
+
     For example if the text contains an image tag,
+<img src="image.png">, and the context is "path/to/look/in", the
+TQMimeSourceFactory will try to load the image from
+"path/to/look/in/image.png". If the tag was
+<img src="/image.png">, the context will not be used (because
+TQMimeSourceFactory recognizes that we have used an absolute path)
+and will try to load "/image.png". The context is applied in exactly
+the same way to hrefs, for example,
+<a href="target.html">Target</a>, would resolve to
+"path/to/look/in/target.html".
+
+
    TQTextEdit::TQTextEdit ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs an empty TQTextEdit called name, with parent parent.
+
+
    int TQTextEdit::alignment () const
+
    
+Returns the alignment of the current paragraph.
+
     
    See also setAlignment().
+
+
    TQString TQTextEdit::anchorAt ( const TQPoint & pos, AnchorAttribute attr )
+
    
+If there is an anchor at position pos (in contents
+coordinates), the text for attribute attr is returned,
+otherwise TQString::null is returned.
+
+
    TQString TQTextEdit::anchorAt ( const TQPoint & pos )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     If there is an anchor at position pos (in contents
+coordinates), its href is returned, otherwise TQString::null is
+returned.
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::append ( const TQString & text ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Appends a new paragraph with text to the end of the text edit. Note that
+the undo/redo history is cleared by this function, and no undo
+history is kept for appends which makes them faster than
+insert()s. If you want to append text which is added to the
+undo/redo history as well, use insertParagraph().
+
+
    Examples: network/clientserver/client/client.cpp, network/clientserver/server/server.cpp, network/httpd/httpd.cpp, and process/process.cpp.
+
    uint TQTextEdit::autoFormatting () const
+
    Returns the enabled set of auto formatting features.
+See the "autoFormatting" property for details.
+
    bool TQTextEdit::bold () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the current format is bold; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setBold().
+
+
    int TQTextEdit::charAt ( const TQPoint & pos, int * para ) const
+
    
+Returns the index of the character (relative to its paragraph) at
+position pos (in contents coordinates). If para is not 0,
+*para is set to the character's paragraph.
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::clear () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Deletes all the text in the text edit.
+
     
    See also cut(), removeSelectedText(), and text.
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::clearParagraphBackground ( int para ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Clears the background color of the paragraph para, so that the
+default color is used again.
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::clicked ( int para, int pos ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the mouse is clicked on the paragraph
+para at character position pos.
+
     
    See also doubleClicked().
+
+
    TQColor TQTextEdit::color () const
+
    
+Returns the color of the current format.
+
     
    See also setColor() and paper.
+
+
    TQString TQTextEdit::context () const
+
    
+Returns the context of the text edit. The context is a path which
+the text edit's TQMimeSourceFactory uses to resolve the locations
+of files and images.
+
     
    See also text.
+
+
    Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, and qdir/qdir.cpp.
+
    void TQTextEdit::copy () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Copies any selected text (from selection 0) to the clipboard.
+
     
    See also hasSelectedText and copyAvailable().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::copyAvailable ( bool yes ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when text is selected or de-selected in the
+text edit.
+
     When text is selected this signal will be emitted with yes set
+to TRUE. If no text has been selected or if the selected text is
+de-selected this signal is emitted with yes set to FALSE.
+
     If yes is TRUE then copy() can be used to copy the selection to
+the clipboard. If yes is FALSE then copy() does nothing.
+
     
    See also selectionChanged().
+
+
    TQPopupMenu * TQTextEdit::createPopupMenu ( const TQPoint & pos ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This function is called to create a right mouse button popup menu
+at the document position pos. If you want to create a custom
+popup menu, reimplement this function and return the created popup
+menu. Ownership of the popup menu is transferred to the caller.
+
     Warning: The TQPopupMenu ID values 0-7 are reserved, and they map to the
+standard operations. When inserting items into your custom popup menu, be
+sure to specify ID values larger than 7.
+
+
    TQPopupMenu * TQTextEdit::createPopupMenu () [virtual protected]
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     This function is called to create a right mouse button popup menu.
+If you want to create a custom popup menu, reimplement this function
+and return the created popup menu. Ownership of the popup menu is
+transferred to the caller.
+
     This function is only called if createPopupMenu( const TQPoint & )
+returns 0.
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::currentAlignmentChanged ( int a ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted if the alignment of the current paragraph
+has changed.
+
     The new alignment is a.
+
     
    See also setAlignment().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::currentColorChanged ( const TQColor & c ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted if the color of the current format has
+changed.
+
     The new color is c.
+
     
    See also setColor().
+
+
    TQFont TQTextEdit::currentFont () const
+
    
+Returns the font of the current format.
+
     
    See also setCurrentFont(), setFamily(), and setPointSize().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::currentFontChanged ( const TQFont & f ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted if the font of the current format has
+changed.
+
     The new font is f.
+
     
    See also setCurrentFont().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::currentVerticalAlignmentChanged ( VerticalAlignment a ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted if the vertical alignment of the current
+format has changed.
+
     The new vertical alignment is a.
+
     
    See also setVerticalAlignment().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::cursorPositionChanged ( int para, int pos ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted if the position of the cursor has changed.
+para contains the paragraph index and pos contains the
+character position within the paragraph.
+
     
    See also setCursorPosition().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::cut () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Copies the selected text (from selection 0) to the clipboard and
+deletes it from the text edit.
+
     If there is no selected text (in selection 0) nothing happens.
+
     
    See also TQTextEdit::copy(), paste(), and pasteSubType().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::del () [virtual slot]
+
    
+If there is some selected text (in selection 0) it is deleted. If
+there is no selected text (in selection 0) the character to the
+right of the text cursor is deleted.
+
     
    See also removeSelectedText() and cut().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::doKeyboardAction ( KeyboardAction action ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Executes keyboard action action. This is normally called by a
+key event handler.
+
+
    TQString TQTextEdit::documentTitle () const
+
    Returns the title of the document parsed from the text.
+See the "documentTitle" property for details.
+
    void TQTextEdit::doubleClicked ( int para, int pos ) [signal]
+
     
+
     This signal is emitted when the mouse is double-clicked on the
+paragraph para at character position pos.
+
     
    See also clicked().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::ensureCursorVisible () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Ensures that the cursor is visible by scrolling the text edit if
+necessary.
+
     
    See also setCursorPosition().
+
+
    TQString TQTextEdit::family () const
+
    
+Returns the font family of the current format.
+
     
    See also setFamily(), setCurrentFont(), and setPointSize().
+
+
    bool TQTextEdit::find ( const TQString & expr, bool cs, bool wo, bool forward = TRUE, int * para = 0, int * index = 0 ) [virtual]
+
    
+Finds the next occurrence of the string, expr. Returns TRUE if
+expr was found; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     If para and index are both 0 the search begins from the
+current cursor position. If para and index are both not 0,
+the search begins from the *index character position in the
+*para paragraph.
+
     If cs is TRUE the search is case sensitive, otherwise it is
+case insensitive. If wo is TRUE the search looks for whole word
+matches only; otherwise it searches for any matching text. If forward is TRUE (the default) the search works forward from the
+starting position to the end of the text, otherwise it works
+backwards to the beginning of the text.
+
     If expr is found the function returns TRUE. If index and para are not 0, the number of the paragraph in which the first
+character of the match was found is put into *para, and the
+index position of that character within the paragraph is put into
+*index.
+
     If expr is not found the function returns FALSE. If index
+and para are not 0 and expr is not found, *index
+and *para are undefined.
+
     Please note that this function will make the next occurrence of
+the string (if found) the current selection, and will thus
+modify the cursor position.
+
     Using the para and index parameters will not work correctly
+in case the document contains tables.
+
+
    bool TQTextEdit::focusNextPrevChild ( bool n ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Reimplemented to allow tabbing through links. If n is TRUE the
+tab moves the focus to the next child; if n is FALSE the tab
+moves the focus to the previous child. Returns TRUE if the focus
+was moved; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    TQFont TQTextEdit::font () const
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Returns TQScrollView::font()
+
     Warning: In previous versions this function returned the font of
+the current format. This lead to confusion. Please use
+currentFont() instead.
+
+
    Example: qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
+
    void TQTextEdit::getCursorPosition ( int * para, int * index ) const
+
    
+This function sets the *para and *index parameters to the
+current cursor position. para and index must not be 0.
+
     
    See also setCursorPosition().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::getSelection ( int * paraFrom, int * indexFrom, int * paraTo, int * indexTo, int selNum = 0 ) const
+
    
+If there is a selection, *paraFrom is set to the number of the
+paragraph in which the selection begins and *paraTo is set to
+the number of the paragraph in which the selection ends. (They
+could be the same.) *indexFrom is set to the index at which the
+selection begins within *paraFrom, and *indexTo is set to
+the index at which the selection ends within *paraTo.
+
     If there is no selection, *paraFrom, *indexFrom, *paraTo
+and *indexTo are all set to -1.
+
     If paraFrom, indexFrom, paraTo or indexTo is 0 this
+function does nothing.
+
     The selNum is the number of the selection (multiple selections
+are supported). It defaults to 0 (the default selection).
+
     
    See also setSelection() and selectedText.
+
+
    bool TQTextEdit::hasSelectedText () const
+
    Returns TRUE if some text is selected in selection 0; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "hasSelectedText" property for details.
+
    int TQTextEdit::heightForWidth ( int w ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns how many pixels high the text edit needs to be to display
+all the text if the text edit is w pixels wide.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
+
    void TQTextEdit::insert ( const TQString & text, uint insertionFlags = CheckNewLines | RemoveSelected ) [slot]
+
    
+Inserts text at the current cursor position.
+
     The insertionFlags define how the text is inserted. If RedoIndentation is set, the paragraph is re-indented. If CheckNewLines is set, newline characters in text result in hard
+line breaks (i.e. new paragraphs). If checkNewLine is not set,
+the behaviour of the editor is undefined if the text contains
+newlines. (It is not possible to change TQTextEdit's newline handling
+behavior, but you can use TQString::replace() to preprocess text
+before inserting it.) If RemoveSelected is set, any selected
+text (in selection 0) is removed before the text is inserted.
+
     The default flags are CheckNewLines | RemoveSelected.
+
     If the widget is in LogText mode this function will do nothing.
+
     
    See also paste() and pasteSubType().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::insert ( const TQString & text, bool indent, bool checkNewLine = TRUE, bool removeSelected = TRUE ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
    void TQTextEdit::insertAt ( const TQString & text, int para, int index ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Inserts text in the paragraph para at position index.
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::insertParagraph ( const TQString & text, int para ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Inserts text as a new paragraph at position para. If para
+is -1, the text is appended. Use append() if the append operation
+is performance critical.
+
+
    bool TQTextEdit::isModified () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the document has been modified by the user; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "modified" property for details.
+
    bool TQTextEdit::isOverwriteMode () const
+
    Returns the text edit's overwrite mode.
+See the "overwriteMode" property for details.
+
    bool TQTextEdit::isReadOnly () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the text edit is read-only; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "readOnly" property for details.
+
    bool TQTextEdit::isRedoAvailable () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if redo is available; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQTextEdit::isUndoAvailable () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if undo is available; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQTextEdit::isUndoRedoEnabled () const
+
    Returns TRUE if undo/redo is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "undoRedoEnabled" property for details.
+
    bool TQTextEdit::italic () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the current format is italic; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setItalic().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::keyPressEvent ( TQKeyEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Processes the key event, e. By default key events are used to
+provide keyboard navigation and text editing.
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
+
    Reimplemented in TQTextBrowser.
+
    int TQTextEdit::length () const
+
    Returns the number of characters in the text.
+See the "length" property for details.
+
    int TQTextEdit::lineOfChar ( int para, int index )
+
    
+Returns the line number of the line in paragraph para in which
+the character at position index appears. The index position is
+relative to the beginning of the paragraph. If there is no such
+paragraph or no such character at the index position (e.g. the
+index is out of range) -1 is returned.
+
+
    int TQTextEdit::lines () const
+
    
+Returns the number of lines in the text edit; this could be 0.
+
     Warning: This function may be slow. Lines change all the time
+during word wrapping, so this function has to iterate over all the
+paragraphs and get the number of lines from each one individually.
+
+
    int TQTextEdit::linesOfParagraph ( int para ) const
+
    
+Returns the number of lines in paragraph para, or -1 if there
+is no paragraph with index para.
+
+
    bool TQTextEdit::linkUnderline () const
+
    Returns TRUE if hypertext links will be underlined; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "linkUnderline" property for details.
+
    int TQTextEdit::maxLogLines () [slot]
+
    
+Returns the maximum number of lines TQTextEdit can hold in LogText mode. By default the number of lines is unlimited, which
+is signified by a value of -1.
+
+
    TQMimeSourceFactory * TQTextEdit::mimeSourceFactory () const
+
    
+Returns the TQMimeSourceFactory which is being used by this text
+edit.
+
     
    See also setMimeSourceFactory().
+
+
    Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, and qdir/qdir.cpp.
+
    void TQTextEdit::modificationChanged ( bool m ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the modification status of the
+document has changed. If m is TRUE, the document was modified,
+otherwise the modification state has been reset to unmodified.
+
     
    See also modified.
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::moveCursor ( CursorAction action, bool select ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Moves the text cursor according to action. This is normally
+used by some key event handler. select specifies whether the
+text between the current cursor position and the new position
+should be selected.
+
+
    TQBrush TQTextEdit::paper () const
+
    Returns the background (paper) brush.
+See the "paper" property for details.
+
    int TQTextEdit::paragraphAt ( const TQPoint & pos ) const
+
    
+Returns the paragraph which is at position pos (in contents
+coordinates).
+
+
    TQColor TQTextEdit::paragraphBackgroundColor ( int para ) const
+
    
+Returns the background color of the paragraph para or an
+invalid color if para is out of range or the paragraph has no
+background set
+
+
    int TQTextEdit::paragraphLength ( int para ) const
+
    
+Returns the length of the paragraph para (i.e. the number of
+characters), or -1 if there is no paragraph with index para.
+
     This function ignores newlines.
+
+
    TQRect TQTextEdit::paragraphRect ( int para ) const
+
    
+Returns the rectangle of the paragraph para in contents
+coordinates, or an invalid rectangle if para is out of range.
+
+
    int TQTextEdit::paragraphs () const
+
    
+Returns the number of paragraphs in the text; an empty textedit is always
+considered to have one paragraph, so 1 is returned in this case.
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::paste () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Pastes the text from the clipboard into the text edit at the
+current cursor position. Only plain text is pasted.
+
     If there is no text in the clipboard nothing happens.
+
     
    See also pasteSubType(), cut(), and TQTextEdit::copy().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::pasteSubType ( const TQCString & subtype ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Pastes the text with format subtype from the clipboard into the
+text edit at the current cursor position. The subtype can be
+"plain" or "html".
+
     If there is no text with format subtype in the clipboard
+nothing happens.
+
     
    See also paste(), cut(), and TQTextEdit::copy().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::placeCursor ( const TQPoint & pos, TQTextCursor * c = 0 ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Places the cursor c at the character which is closest to position
+pos (in contents coordinates). If c is 0, the default text
+cursor is used.
+
     
    See also setCursorPosition().
+
+
    int TQTextEdit::pointSize () const
+
    
+Returns the point size of the font of the current format.
+
     
    See also setFamily(), setCurrentFont(), and setPointSize().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::redo () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Redoes the last operation.
+
     If there is no operation to redo, i.e. there is no redo step in
+the undo/redo history, nothing happens.
+
     
    See also redoAvailable(), undo(), and undoDepth.
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::redoAvailable ( bool yes ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the availability of redo changes. If
+yes is TRUE, then redo() will work until redoAvailable( FALSE )
+is next emitted.
+
     
    See also redo() and undoDepth.
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::removeParagraph ( int para ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Removes the paragraph para.
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::removeSelectedText ( int selNum = 0 ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Deletes the text of selection selNum (by default, the default
+selection, 0). If there is no selected text nothing happens.
+
     
    See also selectedText and removeSelection().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::removeSelection ( int selNum = 0 ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Removes the selection selNum (by default 0). This does not
+remove the selected text.
+
     
    See also removeSelectedText().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::repaintChanged () [protected]
+
    
+Repaints any paragraphs that have changed.
+
     Although used extensively internally you shouldn't need to call
+this yourself.
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::returnPressed () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted if the user pressed the Return or the Enter
+key.
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::scrollToAnchor ( const TQString & name ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Scrolls the text edit to make the text at the anchor called name visible, if it can be found in the document. If the anchor
+isn't found no scrolling will occur. An anchor is defined using
+the HTML anchor tag, e.g. <a name="target">.
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::scrollToBottom () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Scrolls to the bottom of the document and does formatting if
+required.
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::selectAll ( bool select = TRUE ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+If select is TRUE (the default), all the text is selected as
+selection 0. If select is FALSE any selected text is
+unselected, i.e. the default selection (selection 0) is cleared.
+
     
    See also selectedText.
+
+
    TQString TQTextEdit::selectedText () const
+
    Returns the selected text (from selection 0) or an empty string if there is no currently selected text (in selection 0).
+See the "selectedText" property for details.
+
    void TQTextEdit::selectionChanged () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the selection changes.
+
     
    See also setSelection() and copyAvailable().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::setAlignment ( int a ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Sets the alignment of the current paragraph to a. Valid
+alignments are TQt::AlignLeft, TQt::AlignRight,
+TQt::AlignJustify and TQt::AlignCenter (which centers
+horizontally).
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQMultiLineEdit.
+
    void TQTextEdit::setAutoFormatting ( uint features )
+
    Sets the enabled set of auto formatting features to features.
+See the "autoFormatting" property for details.
+
    void TQTextEdit::setBold ( bool b ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+If b is TRUE sets the current format to bold; otherwise sets
+the current format to non-bold.
+
     
    See also bold().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::setColor ( const TQColor & c ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Sets the color of the current format, i.e. of the text, to c.
+
     
    See also color() and paper.
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::setCurrentFont ( const TQFont & f ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+
+
     Sets the font of the current format to f.
+
     If the widget is in LogText mode this function will do
+nothing. Use setFont() instead.
+
     
    See also currentFont(), setPointSize(), and setFamily().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::setCursorPosition ( int para, int index ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Sets the cursor to position index in paragraph para.
+
     
    See also getCursorPosition().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::setFamily ( const TQString & fontFamily ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Sets the font family of the current format to fontFamily.
+
     
    See also family() and setCurrentFont().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::setItalic ( bool b ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+If b is TRUE sets the current format to italic; otherwise sets
+the current format to non-italic.
+
     
    See also italic().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::setLinkUnderline ( bool ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets whether hypertext links will be underlined.
+See the "linkUnderline" property for details.
+
    void TQTextEdit::setMaxLogLines ( int limit ) [slot]
+
    
+Sets the maximum number of lines a TQTextEdit can hold in LogText mode to limit. If limit is -1 (the default), this
+signifies an unlimited number of lines.
+
     Warning: Never use formatting tags that span more than one line
+when the maximum log lines is set. When lines are removed from the
+top of the buffer it could result in an unbalanced tag pair, i.e.
+the left formatting tag is removed before the right one.
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::setMimeSourceFactory ( TQMimeSourceFactory * factory ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Sets the text edit's mimesource factory to factory. See
+TQMimeSourceFactory for further details.
+
     
    See also mimeSourceFactory().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::setModified ( bool m ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets whether the document has been modified by the user to m.
+See the "modified" property for details.
+
    void TQTextEdit::setOverwriteMode ( bool b ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the text edit's overwrite mode to b.
+See the "overwriteMode" property for details.
+
    void TQTextEdit::setPaper ( const TQBrush & pap ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the background (paper) brush to pap.
+See the "paper" property for details.
+
    void TQTextEdit::setParagraphBackgroundColor ( int para, const TQColor & bg ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Sets the background color of the paragraph para to bg.
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::setPointSize ( int s ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Sets the point size of the current format to s.
+
     Note that if s is zero or negative, the behaviour of this
+function is not defined.
+
     
    See also pointSize(), setCurrentFont(), and setFamily().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::setReadOnly ( bool b ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets whether the text edit is read-only to b.
+See the "readOnly" property for details.
+
    void TQTextEdit::setSelection ( int paraFrom, int indexFrom, int paraTo, int indexTo, int selNum = 0 ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Sets a selection which starts at position indexFrom in
+paragraph paraFrom and ends at position indexTo in paragraph
+paraTo.
+
     Any existing selections which have a different id (selNum) are
+left alone, but if an existing selection has the same id as selNum it is removed and replaced by this selection.
+
     Uses the selection settings of selection selNum. If selNum
+is 0, this is the default selection.
+
     The cursor is moved to the end of the selection if selNum is 0,
+otherwise the cursor position remains unchanged.
+
     
    See also getSelection() and selectedText.
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::setSelectionAttributes ( int selNum, const TQColor & back, bool invertText ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Sets the background color of selection number selNum to back
+and specifies whether the text of this selection should be
+inverted with invertText.
+
     This only works for selNum > 0. The default selection (selNum == 0) gets its attributes from the text edit's
+colorGroup().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::setStyleSheet ( TQStyleSheet * styleSheet ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Sets the stylesheet to use with this text edit to styleSheet.
+Changes will only take effect for new text added with setText() or
+append().
+
     
    See also styleSheet().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::setTabChangesFocus ( bool b ) [slot]
+
    Sets whether TAB changes focus or is accepted as input to b.
+See the "tabChangesFocus" property for details.
+
    void TQTextEdit::setTabStopWidth ( int ts ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the tab stop width in pixels to ts.
+See the "tabStopWidth" property for details.
+
    void TQTextEdit::setText ( const TQString & txt ) [slot]
+
    Sets the text edit's text to txt.
+See the "text" property for details.
+
    void TQTextEdit::setText ( const TQString & text, const TQString & context ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Changes the text of the text edit to the string text and the
+context to context. Any previous text is removed.
+
     text may be interpreted either as plain text or as rich text,
+depending on the textFormat(). The default setting is AutoText,
+i.e. the text edit auto-detects the format from text.
+
     For rich text the rendering style and available tags are defined
+by a styleSheet(); see TQStyleSheet for details.
+
     The optional context is a path which the text edit's
+TQMimeSourceFactory uses to resolve the locations of files and
+images. (See TQTextEdit::TQTextEdit().) It is passed to the text
+edit's TQMimeSourceFactory when quering data.
+
     Note that the undo/redo history is cleared by this function.
+
     
    See also text and textFormat.
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::setTextFormat ( TextFormat f ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the text format: rich text, plain text, log text or auto text to f.
+See the "textFormat" property for details.
+
    void TQTextEdit::setUnderline ( bool b ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+If b is TRUE sets the current format to underline; otherwise
+sets the current format to non-underline.
+
     
    See also underline().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::setUndoDepth ( int d ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the depth of the undo history to d.
+See the "undoDepth" property for details.
+
    void TQTextEdit::setUndoRedoEnabled ( bool b ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets whether undo/redo is enabled to b.
+See the "undoRedoEnabled" property for details.
+
    void TQTextEdit::setVerticalAlignment ( VerticalAlignment a ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Sets the vertical alignment of the current format, i.e. of the
+text, to a.
+
     
    See also color() and paper.
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::setWordWrap ( WordWrap mode ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the word wrap mode to mode.
+See the "wordWrap" property for details.
+
    void TQTextEdit::setWrapColumnOrWidth ( int ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the position (in pixels or columns depending on the wrap mode) where text will be wrapped.
+See the "wrapColumnOrWidth" property for details.
+
    void TQTextEdit::setWrapPolicy ( WrapPolicy policy ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the word wrap policy, at whitespace or anywhere to policy.
+See the "wrapPolicy" property for details.
+
    TQStyleSheet * TQTextEdit::styleSheet () const
+
    
+Returns the TQStyleSheet which is being used by this text edit.
+
     
    See also setStyleSheet().
+
+
    Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, and mdi/application.cpp.
+
    void TQTextEdit::sync () [virtual slot]
+
    
+TQTextEdit is optimized for large amounts text. One of its
+optimizations is to format only the visible text, formatting the rest
+on demand, e.g. as the user scrolls, so you don't usually need to
+call this function.
+
     In some situations you may want to force the whole text
+to be formatted. For example, if after calling setText(), you wanted
+to know the height of the document (using contentsHeight()), you
+would call this function first.
+
+
    TQSyntaxHighlighter * TQTextEdit::syntaxHighlighter () const
+
    
+Returns the TQSyntaxHighlighter set on this TQTextEdit. 0 is
+returned if no syntax highlighter is set.
+
+
    bool TQTextEdit::tabChangesFocus () const
+
    Returns TRUE if TAB changes focus or is accepted as input; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "tabChangesFocus" property for details.
+
    int TQTextEdit::tabStopWidth () const
+
    Returns the tab stop width in pixels.
+See the "tabStopWidth" property for details.
+
    TQString TQTextEdit::text () const
+
    Returns the text edit's text.
+See the "text" property for details.
+
    TQString TQTextEdit::text ( int para ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the text of paragraph para.
+
     If textFormat() is RichText the text will contain HTML
+formatting tags.
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::textChanged () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the text in the text edit changes.
+
     
    See also text and append().
+
+
    Examples: qwerty/qwerty.cpp and rot13/rot13.cpp.
+
    TQTextCursor * TQTextEdit::textCursor () const [protected]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the text edit's text cursor.
+
     Warning: TQTextCursor is not in the public API, but in special
+circumstances you might wish to use it.
+
+
    TextFormat TQTextEdit::textFormat () const
+
    Returns the text format: rich text, plain text, log text or auto text.
+See the "textFormat" property for details.
+
    bool TQTextEdit::underline () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the current format is underlined; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     
    See also setUnderline().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::undo () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Undoes the last operation.
+
     If there is no operation to undo, i.e. there is no undo step in
+the undo/redo history, nothing happens.
+
     
    See also undoAvailable(), redo(), and undoDepth.
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::undoAvailable ( bool yes ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the availability of undo changes. If
+yes is TRUE, then undo() will work until undoAvailable( FALSE )
+is next emitted.
+
     
    See also undo() and undoDepth.
+
+
    int TQTextEdit::undoDepth () const
+
    Returns the depth of the undo history.
+See the "undoDepth" property for details.
+
    WordWrap TQTextEdit::wordWrap () const
+
    Returns the word wrap mode.
+See the "wordWrap" property for details.
+
    int TQTextEdit::wrapColumnOrWidth () const
+
    Returns the position (in pixels or columns depending on the wrap mode) where text will be wrapped.
+See the "wrapColumnOrWidth" property for details.
+
    WrapPolicy TQTextEdit::wrapPolicy () const
+
    Returns the word wrap policy, at whitespace or anywhere.
+See the "wrapPolicy" property for details.
+
    void TQTextEdit::zoomIn ( int range ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Zooms in on the text by making the base font size range
+points larger and recalculating all font sizes to be the new size.
+This does not change the size of any images.
+
     
    See also zoomOut().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::zoomIn () [virtual slot]
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Zooms in on the text by making the base font size one point
+larger and recalculating all font sizes to be the new size. This
+does not change the size of any images.
+
     
    See also zoomOut().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::zoomOut ( int range ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Zooms out on the text by making the base font size range points
+smaller and recalculating all font sizes to be the new size. This
+does not change the size of any images.
+
     
    See also zoomIn().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::zoomOut () [virtual slot]
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Zooms out on the text by making the base font size one point
+smaller and recalculating all font sizes to be the new size. This
+does not change the size of any images.
+
     
    See also zoomIn().
+
+
    void TQTextEdit::zoomTo ( int size ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+Zooms the text by making the base font size size points and
+recalculating all font sizes to be the new size. This does not
+change the size of any images.
+
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    AutoFormatting autoFormatting
    
+
    This property holds the enabled set of auto formatting features.
+
    The value can be any combination of the values in the AutoFormatting enum.  The default is AutoAll. Choose AutoNone
+to disable all automatic formatting.
+
     Currently, the only automatic formatting feature provided is AutoBulletList; future versions of TQt may offer more.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setAutoFormatting() and get this property's value with autoFormatting().
+
    TQString documentTitle
    
+
    This property holds the title of the document parsed from the text.
+
    For PlainText the title will be an empty string. For RichText the title will be the text between the <title> tags,
+if present, otherwise an empty string.
+
+
    Get this property's value with documentTitle().
+
    bool hasSelectedText
    
+
    This property holds whether some text is selected in selection 0.
+
    
+
    Get this property's value with hasSelectedText().
+
    int length
    
+
    This property holds the number of characters in the text.
+
    
+
    Get this property's value with length().
+
    bool linkUnderline
    
+
    This property holds whether hypertext links will be underlined.
+
    If TRUE (the default) hypertext links will be displayed
+underlined. If FALSE links will not be displayed underlined.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setLinkUnderline() and get this property's value with linkUnderline().
+
    bool modified
    
+
    This property holds whether the document has been modified by the user.
+
    
+
    Set this property's value with setModified() and get this property's value with isModified().
+
    bool overwriteMode
    
+
    This property holds the text edit's overwrite mode.
+
    If FALSE (the default) characters entered by the user are inserted
+with any characters to the right being moved out of the way. If
+TRUE, the editor is in overwrite mode, i.e. characters entered by
+the user overwrite any characters to the right of the cursor
+position.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setOverwriteMode() and get this property's value with isOverwriteMode().
+
    TQBrush paper
    
+
    This property holds the background (paper) brush.
+
    The brush that is currently used to draw the background of the
+text edit. The initial setting is an empty brush.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setPaper() and get this property's value with paper().
+
    bool readOnly
    
+
    This property holds whether the text edit is read-only.
+
    In a read-only text edit the user can only navigate through the
+text and select text; modifying the text is not possible.
+
     This property's default is FALSE.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setReadOnly() and get this property's value with isReadOnly().
+
    TQString selectedText
    
+
    This property holds the selected text (from selection 0) or an empty string if there is no currently selected text (in selection 0).
+
    The text is always returned as PlainText if the textFormat() is
+PlainText or AutoText, otherwise it is returned as HTML.
+
     
    See also hasSelectedText.
+
+
    Get this property's value with selectedText().
+
    bool tabChangesFocus
     
    This property holds whether TAB changes focus or is accepted as input.
+
    In some occasions text edits should not allow the user to input
+tabulators or change indentation using the TAB key, as this breaks
+the focus chain. The default is FALSE.
+
     
+
    Set this property's value with setTabChangesFocus() and get this property's value with tabChangesFocus().
+
    int tabStopWidth
    
+
    This property holds the tab stop width in pixels.
+
    
+
    Set this property's value with setTabStopWidth() and get this property's value with tabStopWidth().
+
    TQString text
    
+
    This property holds the text edit's text.
+
    There is no default text.
+
     On setting, any previous text is deleted.
+
     The text may be interpreted either as plain text or as rich text,
+depending on the textFormat(). The default setting is AutoText,
+i.e. the text edit auto-detects the format of the text.
+
     For richtext, calling text() on an editable TQTextEdit will cause
+the text to be regenerated from the textedit. This may mean that
+the TQString returned may not be exactly the same as the one that
+was set.
+
     
    See also textFormat.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setText() and get this property's value with text().
+
    TextFormat textFormat
    
+
    This property holds the text format: rich text, plain text, log text or auto text.
+
    The text format is one of the following:
+
      
+
    •  PlainText - all characters, except newlines, are displayed
+verbatim, including spaces. Whenever a newline appears in the text
+the text edit inserts a hard line break and begins a new
+paragraph.
+
    •  RichText - rich text rendering. The available styles are
+defined in the default stylesheet TQStyleSheet::defaultSheet().
+
    •  LogText -  optimized mode for very large texts. Supports a very
+limited set of formatting tags (color, bold, underline and italic
+settings).
+
    •  AutoText - this is the default. The text edit autodetects which
+rendering style is best, PlainText or RichText. This is done
+by using the TQStyleSheet::mightBeRichText() function.
+
    
+
+
    Set this property's value with setTextFormat() and get this property's value with textFormat().
+
    int undoDepth
    
+
    This property holds the depth of the undo history.
+
    The maximum number of steps in the undo/redo history. The default
+is 100.
+
     
    See also undo() and redo().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setUndoDepth() and get this property's value with undoDepth().
+
    bool undoRedoEnabled
    
+
    This property holds whether undo/redo is enabled.
+
    When changing this property, the undo/redo history is cleared.
+
     The default is TRUE.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setUndoRedoEnabled() and get this property's value with isUndoRedoEnabled().
+
    WordWrap wordWrap
    
+
    This property holds the word wrap mode.
+
    The default mode is WidgetWidth which causes words to be
+wrapped at the right edge of the text edit. Wrapping occurs at
+whitespace, keeping whole words intact. If you want wrapping to
+occur within words use setWrapPolicy(). If you set a wrap mode of
+FixedPixelWidth or FixedColumnWidth you should also call
+setWrapColumnOrWidth() with the width you want.
+
     
    See also WordWrap, wrapColumnOrWidth, and wrapPolicy.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setWordWrap() and get this property's value with wordWrap().
+
    int wrapColumnOrWidth
    
+
    This property holds the position (in pixels or columns depending on the wrap mode) where text will be wrapped.
+
    If the wrap mode is FixedPixelWidth, the value is the number of
+pixels from the left edge of the text edit at which text should be
+wrapped. If the wrap mode is FixedColumnWidth, the value is the
+column number (in character columns) from the left edge of the
+text edit at which text should be wrapped.
+
     
    See also wordWrap.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setWrapColumnOrWidth() and get this property's value with wrapColumnOrWidth().
+
    WrapPolicy wrapPolicy
    
+
    This property holds the word wrap policy, at whitespace or anywhere.
+
    Defines where text can be wrapped when word wrap mode is not NoWrap. The choices are AtWordBoundary (the default), Anywhere and AtWordOrDocumentBoundary
+
     
    See also wordWrap.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setWrapPolicy() and get this property's value with wrapPolicy().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqtextstream.html b/doc/html/ntqtextstream.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d8d9ed90f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqtextstream.html
@@ -0,0 +1,667 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQTextStream Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQTextStream Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQTextStream class provides basic functions for reading
+and writing text using a TQIODevice.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqtextstream.h>
+
    Inherited by TQTextIStream and TQTextOStream.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
+The TQTextStream class provides basic functions for reading
+and writing text using a TQIODevice.
+
     
+
+
+
     The text stream class has a functional interface that is very
+similar to that of the standard C++ iostream class.
+
     TQt provides several global functions similar to the ones in iostream:
+
    
+
     Function Meaning
+
     bin sets the TQTextStream to read/write binary numbers
+
     oct sets the TQTextStream to read/write octal numbers
+
     dec sets the TQTextStream to read/write decimal numbers
+
     hex sets the TQTextStream to read/write hexadecimal numbers
+
     endl forces a line break
+
     flush forces the TQIODevice to flush any buffered data
+
     ws eats any available whitespace (on input)
+
     reset resets the TQTextStream to its default mode (see reset())
+
     qSetW(int) sets the field width
+to the given argument
+
     qSetFill(int) sets the fill character to the given argument
+
     qSetPrecision(int) sets the precision to the given argument
+
    
+
     Warning: By default TQTextStream will automatically detect whether
+integers in the stream are in decimal, octal, hexadecimal or
+binary format when reading from the stream. In particular, a
+leading '0' signifies octal, i.e. the sequence "0100" will be
+interpreted as 64.
+
     The TQTextStream class reads and writes text; it is not appropriate
+for dealing with binary data (but TQDataStream is).
+
     By default, output of Unicode text (i.e. TQString) is done using
+the local 8-bit encoding. This can be changed using the
+setEncoding() method. For input, the TQTextStream will auto-detect
+standard Unicode "byte order marked" text files; otherwise the
+local 8-bit encoding is used.
+
     The TQIODevice is set in the constructor, or later using
+setDevice(). If the end of the input is reached atEnd() returns
+TRUE. Data can be read into variables of the appropriate type
+using the operator>>() overloads, or read in its entirety into a
+single string using read(), or read a line at a time using
+readLine(). Whitespace can be skipped over using skipWhiteSpace().
+You can set flags for the stream using flags() or setf(). The
+stream also supports width(), precision() and fill(); use reset()
+to reset the defaults.
+
     
    See also TQDataStream, Input/Output and Networking, and Text Related Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQTextStream::Encoding
    
+
+
      
+
    • TQTextStream::Locale
+
    • TQTextStream::Latin1
+
    • TQTextStream::Unicode
+
    • TQTextStream::UnicodeNetworkOrder
+
    • TQTextStream::UnicodeReverse
+
    • TQTextStream::RawUnicode
+
    • TQTextStream::UnicodeUTF8
+
     See setEncoding() for an explanation of the encodings.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQTextStream::TQTextStream ()
+
    
+Constructs a data stream that has no IO device.
+
+
    TQTextStream::TQTextStream ( TQIODevice * iod )
+
    
+Constructs a text stream that uses the IO device iod.
+
+
    TQTextStream::TQTextStream ( TQString * str, int filemode )
+
    
+Constructs a text stream that operates on the Unicode TQString, str, through an internal device. The filemode argument is
+passed to the device's open() function; see TQIODevice::mode().
+
     If you set an encoding or codec with setEncoding() or setCodec(),
+this setting is ignored for text streams that operate on TQString.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQString str;
+    TQTextStream ts( &str, IO_WriteOnly );
+    ts << "pi = " << 3.14; // str == "pi = 3.14"
+    
    
+ 
+
     Writing data to the text stream will modify the contents of the
+string. The string will be expanded when data is written beyond
+the end of the string. Note that the string will not be truncated:
+
    +    TQString str = "pi = 3.14";
+    TQTextStream ts( &str, IO_WriteOnly );
+    ts <<  "2+2 = " << 2+2; // str == "2+2 = 414"
+    
    
+ 
+
     Note that because TQString is Unicode, you should not use
+readRawBytes() or writeRawBytes() on such a stream.
+
+
    TQTextStream::TQTextStream ( TQString & str, int filemode )
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     This constructor is equivalent to the constructor taking a TQString*
+parameter.
+
+
    TQTextStream::TQTextStream ( TQByteArray a, int mode )
+
    
+Constructs a text stream that operates on the byte array, a,
+through an internal TQBuffer device. The mode argument is passed
+to the device's open() function; see TQIODevice::mode().
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQByteArray array;
+    TQTextStream ts( array, IO_WriteOnly );
+    ts << "pi = " << 3.14 << '\0'; // array == "pi = 3.14"
+    
    
+ 
+
     Writing data to the text stream will modify the contents of the
+array. The array will be expanded when data is written beyond the
+end of the string.
+
     Same example, using a TQBuffer:
+
    +    TQByteArray array;
+    TQBuffer buf( array );
+    buf.open( IO_WriteOnly );
+    TQTextStream ts( &buf );
+    ts << "pi = " << 3.14 << '\0'; // array == "pi = 3.14"
+    buf.close();
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    TQTextStream::TQTextStream ( FILE * fh, int mode )
+
    
+Constructs a text stream that operates on an existing file handle
+fh through an internal TQFile device. The mode argument is
+passed to the device's open() function; see TQIODevice::mode().
+
     Note that if you create a TQTextStream cout or another name that
+is also used for another variable of a different type, some
+linkers may confuse the two variables, which will often cause
+crashes.
+
+
    TQTextStream::~TQTextStream () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the text stream.
+
     The destructor does not affect the current IO device.
+
+
    bool TQTextStream::atEnd () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the IO device has reached the end position (end of
+the stream or file) or if there is no IO device set; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also TQIODevice::atEnd().
+
+
    Examples: addressbook/centralwidget.cpp and grapher/grapher.cpp.
+
    TQTextCodec * TQTextStream::codec ()
+
    
+Returns the codec actually used for this stream.
+
     If Unicode is automatically detected in input, a codec with name() "ISO-10646-UCS-2" is returned.
+
     
    See also setCodec().
+
+
    TQIODevice * TQTextStream::device () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the IO device currently set.
+
     
    See also setDevice() and unsetDevice().
+
+
    bool TQTextStream::eof () const
+
    
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     This function has been renamed to atEnd().
+
     
    See also TQIODevice::atEnd().
+
+
    Example: chart/chartform_files.cpp.
+
    int TQTextStream::fill () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the fill character. The default value is ' ' (space).
+
+
    int TQTextStream::fill ( int f )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the fill character to f. Returns the previous fill character.
+
+
    int TQTextStream::flags () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the current stream flags. The default value is 0.
+
     
    
+
     Flag Meaning
+
     skipws Not currently used; whitespace always skipped
+
     left Numeric fields are left-aligned
+
     right
+Not currently used (by default, numerics are right-aligned)
+
     internal Puts any padding spaces between +/- and value
+
     bin Output and input only in binary
+
     oct Output and input only in octal
+
     dec Output and input only in decimal
+
     hex Output and input only in hexadecimal
+
     showbase
+Annotates numeric outputs with 0b, 0, or 0x if in bin,
+oct, or hex format
+
     showpoint Not currently used
+
     uppercase Uses 0B and 0X rather than 0b and 0x
+
     showpos Shows + for positive numeric values
+
     scientific Uses scientific notation for floating point values
+
     fixed Uses fixed-point notation for floating point values
+
    
+
     Note that unless bin, oct, dec, or hex is set, the
+input base is octal if the value starts with 0, hexadecimal if it
+starts with 0x, binary if it starts with 0b, and decimal
+otherwise.
+
     
    See also setf() and unsetf().
+
+
    int TQTextStream::flags ( int f )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the stream flags to f. Returns the previous stream flags.
+
     
    See also setf() and unsetf().
+
+
    TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator<< ( TQChar c )
+
    
+Writes character char to the stream and returns a reference to
+the stream.
+
     The character c is assumed to be Latin1 encoded independent of
+the Encoding set for the TQTextStream.
+
+
    TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator<< ( char c )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Writes character c to the stream and returns a reference to the
+stream.
+
+
    TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator<< ( signed short i )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Writes a short integer i to the stream and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
+
    TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator<< ( unsigned short i )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Writes an unsigned short integer i to the stream and
+returns a reference to the stream.
+
+
    TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator<< ( signed int i )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Writes an int i to the stream and returns a reference to the
+stream.
+
+
    TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator<< ( unsigned int i )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Writes an unsigned int i to the stream and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
+
    TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator<< ( signed long i )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Writes a long int i to the stream and returns a reference
+to the stream.
+
+
    TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator<< ( unsigned long i )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Writes an unsigned long int i to the stream and
+returns a reference to the stream.
+
+
    TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator<< ( float f )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Writes a float f to the stream and returns a reference to
+the stream.
+
+
    TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator<< ( double f )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Writes a double f to the stream and returns a reference to
+the stream.
+
+
    TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator<< ( const char * s )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Writes a string to the stream and returns a reference to the
+stream.
+
     The string s is assumed to be Latin1 encoded independent of the
+Encoding set for the TQTextStream.
+
+
    TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator<< ( const TQString & s )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Writes s to the stream and returns a reference to the stream.
+
+
    TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator<< ( const TQCString & s )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Writes s to the stream and returns a reference to the stream.
+
     The string s is assumed to be Latin1 encoded independent of the
+Encoding set for the TQTextStream.
+
+
    TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator<< ( void * ptr )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Writes a pointer to the stream and returns a reference to the
+stream.
+
     The ptr is output as an unsigned long hexadecimal integer.
+
+
    TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator>> ( TQChar & c )
+
    
+Reads a char c from the stream and returns a reference to the
+stream. Note that whitespace is not skipped.
+
+
    TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator>> ( char & c )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Reads a char c from the stream and returns a reference to the
+stream. Note that whitespace is skipped.
+
+
    TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator>> ( signed short & i )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Reads a signed short integer i from the stream and returns a
+reference to the stream. See flags() for an explanation of the
+expected input format.
+
+
    TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator>> ( unsigned short & i )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Reads an unsigned short integer i from the stream and
+returns a reference to the stream. See flags() for an explanation
+of the expected input format.
+
+
    TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator>> ( signed int & i )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Reads a signed int i from the stream and returns a reference
+to the stream. See flags() for an explanation of the expected
+input format.
+
+
    TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator>> ( unsigned int & i )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Reads an unsigned int i from the stream and returns a
+reference to the stream. See flags() for an explanation of the
+expected input format.
+
+
    TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator>> ( signed long & i )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Reads a signed long int i from the stream and returns a
+reference to the stream. See flags() for an explanation of the
+expected input format.
+
+
    TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator>> ( unsigned long & i )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Reads an unsigned long int i from the stream and returns a
+reference to the stream. See flags() for an explanation of the
+expected input format.
+
+
    TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator>> ( float & f )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Reads a float f from the stream and returns a reference to
+the stream. See flags() for an explanation of the expected input
+format.
+
+
    TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator>> ( double & f )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Reads a double f from the stream and returns a reference to
+the stream. See flags() for an explanation of the expected input
+format.
+
+
    TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator>> ( char * s )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Reads a "word" from the stream into s and returns a reference
+to the stream.
+
     A word consists of characters for which isspace() returns FALSE.
+
+
    TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator>> ( TQString & str )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Reads a "word" from the stream into str and returns a reference
+to the stream.
+
     A word consists of characters for which isspace() returns FALSE.
+
+
    TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator>> ( TQCString & str )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Reads a "word" from the stream into str and returns a reference
+to the stream.
+
     A word consists of characters for which isspace() returns FALSE.
+
+
    int TQTextStream::precision () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the precision. The default value is 6.
+
+
    int TQTextStream::precision ( int p )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the precision to p. Returns the previous precision setting.
+
+
    TQString TQTextStream::read ()
+
    
+Reads the entire stream from the current position, and returns a string
+containing the text.
+
     
    See also TQIODevice::readLine().
+
+
    Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, qdir/qdir.cpp, and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
+
    TQString TQTextStream::readLine ()
+
    
+Reads a line from the stream and returns a string containing the
+text.
+
     The returned string does not contain any trailing newline or
+carriage return. Note that this is different from
+TQIODevice::readLine(), which does not strip the newline at the end
+of the line.
+
     On EOF you will get a TQString that is null. On reading an empty
+line the returned TQString is empty but not null.
+
     
    See also TQIODevice::readLine().
+
+
    Examples: addressbook/centralwidget.cpp, chart/element.cpp, and network/clientserver/server/server.cpp.
+
    TQTextStream & TQTextStream::readRawBytes ( char * s, uint len )
+
    
+Reads len bytes from the stream into s and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
     The buffer s must be preallocated.
+
     Note that no encoding is done by this function.
+
     Warning: The behavior of this function is undefined unless the
+stream's encoding is set to Unicode or Latin1.
+
     
    See also TQIODevice::readBlock().
+
+
    void TQTextStream::reset ()
+
    
+Resets the text stream.
+
     
      
+
    •  All flags are set to 0.
+
    •  The field width is set to 0.
+
    •  The fill character is set to ' ' (Space).
+
    •  The precision is set to 6.
+
    
+
     
    See also setf(), width(), fill(), and precision().
+
+
    void TQTextStream::setCodec ( TQTextCodec * codec )
+
    
+Sets the codec for this stream to codec. Will not try to
+autodetect Unicode.
+
     Note that this function should be called before any data is read
+to/written from the stream.
+
     
    See also setEncoding() and codec().
+
+
    Example: qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
+
    void TQTextStream::setDevice ( TQIODevice * iod )
+
    
+Sets the IO device to iod.
+
     
    See also device() and unsetDevice().
+
+
    void TQTextStream::setEncoding ( Encoding e )
+
    
+Sets the encoding of this stream to e, where e is one of the
+following values:
+
    
+
     Encoding Meaning
+
     Locale
+Uses local file format (Latin1 if locale is not set), but
+autodetecting Unicode(utf16) on input.
+
     Unicode
+Uses Unicode(utf16) for input and output. Output will be
+written in the order most efficient for the current platform
+(i.e. the order used internally in TQString).
+
     UnicodeUTF8
+Using Unicode(utf8) for input and output. If you use it for
+input it will autodetect utf16 and use it instead of utf8.
+
     Latin1
+ISO-8859-1. Will not autodetect utf16.
+
     UnicodeNetworkOrder
+Uses network order Unicode(utf16) for input and output.
+Useful when reading Unicode data that does not start with the
+byte order marker.
+
     UnicodeReverse
+Uses reverse network order Unicode(utf16) for input and
+output. Useful when reading Unicode data that does not start
+with the byte order marker or when writing data that should be
+read by buggy Windows applications.
+
     RawUnicode
+Like Unicode, but does not write the byte order marker nor
+does it auto-detect the byte order. Useful only when writing to
+non-persistent storage used by a single process.
+
    
+
     Locale and all Unicode encodings, except RawUnicode, will look
+at the first two bytes in an input stream to determine the byte
+order. The initial byte order marker will be stripped off before
+data is read.
+
     Note that this function should be called before any data is read to
+or written from the stream.
+
     
    See also setCodec().
+
+
    Examples: addressbook/centralwidget.cpp, network/httpd/httpd.cpp, and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
+
    int TQTextStream::setf ( int bits )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the stream flag bits bits. Returns the previous stream
+flags.
+
     Equivalent to flags( flags() | bits ).
+
     
    See also unsetf().
+
+
    int TQTextStream::setf ( int bits, int mask )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the stream flag bits bits with a bit mask mask. Returns
+the previous stream flags.
+
     Equivalent to flags( (flags() & ~mask) | (bits & mask) ).
+
     
    See also unsetf().
+
+
    void TQTextStream::skipWhiteSpace ()
+
    
+Positions the read pointer at the first non-whitespace character.
+
+
    void TQTextStream::unsetDevice ()
+
    
+Unsets the IO device. Equivalent to setDevice( 0 ).
+
     
    See also device() and setDevice().
+
+
    int TQTextStream::unsetf ( int bits )
+
    
+
+
     Clears the stream flag bits bits. Returns the previous stream
+flags.
+
     Equivalent to flags( flags() & ~mask ).
+
     
    See also setf().
+
+
    int TQTextStream::width () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the field width. The default value is 0.
+
+
    int TQTextStream::width ( int w )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the field width to w. Returns the previous field width.
+
+
    TQTextStream & TQTextStream::writeRawBytes ( const char * s, uint len )
+
    
+Writes the len bytes from s to the stream and returns a
+reference to the stream.
+
     Note that no encoding is done by this function.
+
     
    See also TQIODevice::writeBlock().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqtextview.html b/doc/html/ntqtextview.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3666e1e1b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqtextview.html
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQTextView Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQTextView Class Reference
    [obsolete]
    
+
+
    The TQTextView class provides a rich-text viewer.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqtextview.h>
+
    Inherits TQTextEdit.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • bool modified - whether the text view's contents have been modified  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool overwriteMode - whether new text overwrites or pushes aside existing text  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool readOnly - whether the text view's contents are read only  (read only)
      • 
+
    • int undoDepth - the number of undoable steps  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool undoRedoEnabled - whether undo and redo are enabled  (read only)
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+ 
+The TQTextView class provides a rich-text viewer.
+
     This class is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     This class wraps a read-only TQTextEdit.
+Use a TQTextEdit instead, and call setReadOnly(TRUE)
+to disable editing.
+
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    bool modified
    
+
    This property holds whether the text view's contents have been modified.
+
    
+
    bool overwriteMode
    
+
    This property holds whether new text overwrites or pushes aside existing text.
+
    
+
    bool readOnly
    
+
    This property holds whether the text view's contents are read only.
+
    
+
    int undoDepth
    
+
    This property holds the number of undoable steps.
+
    
+
    bool undoRedoEnabled
    
+
    This property holds whether undo and redo are enabled.
+
    
+
    
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqthread.html b/doc/html/ntqthread.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a28028fbe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqthread.html
@@ -0,0 +1,252 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQThread Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQThread Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQThread class provides platform-independent threads.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are thread-safe when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqthread.h>
+
    Inherits TQt.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQThread ( unsigned int stackSize = 0 )
      • 
+
    • virtual ~TQThread ()
      • 
+
    • bool wait ( unsigned long time = ULONG_MAX )
      • 
+
    • enum Priority { IdlePriority, LowestPriority, LowPriority, NormalPriority, HighPriority, HighestPriority, TimeCriticalPriority, InheritPriority }
      • 
+
    • void start ( Priority priority = InheritPriority )
      • 
+
    • void terminate ()
      • 
+
    • bool finished () const
      • 
+
    • bool running () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQt::HANDLE currentThread ()
      • 
+
    • void postEvent ( TQObject * receiver, TQEvent * event )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void exit ()
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • virtual void run () = 0
      • 
+
    
+
    Static Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • void sleep ( unsigned long secs )
      • 
+
    • void msleep ( unsigned long msecs )
      • 
+
    • void usleep ( unsigned long usecs )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
+The TQThread class provides platform-independent threads.
+
     
+
+
     A TQThread represents a separate thread of control within the
+program; it shares data with all the other threads within the
+process but executes independently in the way that a separate
+program does on a multitasking operating system. Instead of
+starting in main(), TQThreads begin executing in run(). You inherit
+run() to include your code. For example:
+
     
    +    class MyThread : public TQThread {
+
+    public:
+
+        virtual void run();
+
+    };
+
+    void MyThread::run()
+    {
+        for( int count = 0; count < 20; count++ ) {
+            sleep( 1 );
+            qDebug( "Ping!" );
+        }
+    }
+
+    int main()
+    {
+        MyThread a;
+        MyThread b;
+        a.start();
+        b.start();
+        a.wait();
+        b.wait();
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     This will start two threads, each of which writes Ping! 20 times
+to the screen and exits. The wait() calls at the end of main() are
+necessary because exiting main() ends the program, unceremoniously
+killing all other threads. Each MyThread stops executing when it
+reaches the end of MyThread::run(), just as an application does
+when it leaves main().
+
     
    See also Thread Support in TQt, Environment Classes, and Threading.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQThread::Priority
    
+
+
     This enum type indicates how the operating system should schedule
+newly created threads.
+
      
+
    • TQThread::IdlePriority - scheduled only when no other threads are
+running.
+
    • TQThread::LowestPriority - scheduled less often than LowPriority.
+
    • TQThread::LowPriority - scheduled less often than NormalPriority.
+
    • TQThread::NormalPriority - the default priority of the operating
+system.
+
    • TQThread::HighPriority - scheduled more often than NormalPriority.
+
    • TQThread::HighestPriority - scheduled more often then HighPriority.
+
    • TQThread::TimeCriticalPriority - scheduled as often as possible.
+
    • TQThread::InheritPriority - use the same priority as the creating
+thread.  This is the default.
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQThread::TQThread ( unsigned int stackSize = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a new thread. The thread does not begin executing until
+start() is called.
+
     If stackSize is greater than zero, the maximum stack size is
+set to stackSize bytes, otherwise the maximum stack size is
+automatically determined by the operating system.
+
     Warning: Most operating systems place minimum and maximum limits
+on thread stack sizes. The thread will fail to start if the stack
+size is outside these limits.
+
+
    TQThread::~TQThread () [virtual]
+
    
+TQThread destructor.
+
     Note that deleting a TQThread object will not stop the execution of
+the thread it represents. Deleting a running TQThread (i.e.
+finished() returns FALSE) will probably result in a program crash.
+You can wait() on a thread to make sure that it has finished.
+
+
    TQt::HANDLE TQThread::currentThread () [static]
+
    
+This returns the thread handle of the currently executing thread.
+
     Warning: The handle returned by this function is used for internal
+purposes and should not be used in any application code. On
+Windows, the returned value is a pseudo handle for the current
+thread, and it cannot be used for numerical comparison.
+
+
    void TQThread::exit () [static]
+
    
+Ends the execution of the calling thread and wakes up any threads
+waiting for its termination.
+
+
    bool TQThread::finished () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the thread is finished; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    void TQThread::msleep ( unsigned long msecs ) [static protected]
+
    
+System independent sleep. This causes the current thread to sleep
+for msecs milliseconds
+
+
    void TQThread::postEvent ( TQObject * receiver, TQEvent * event ) [static]
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Use TQApplication::postEvent() instead.
+
+
    void TQThread::run () [pure virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     This method is pure virtual, and must be implemented in derived
+classes in order to do useful work. Returning from this method
+will end the execution of the thread.
+
     
    See also wait().
+
+
    bool TQThread::running () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the thread is running; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    void TQThread::sleep ( unsigned long secs ) [static protected]
+
    
+System independent sleep. This causes the current thread to sleep
+for secs seconds.
+
+
    void TQThread::start ( Priority priority = InheritPriority )
+
    
+Begins execution of the thread by calling run(), which should be
+reimplemented in a TQThread subclass to contain your code.  The
+operating system will schedule the thread according to the priority argument.
+
     If you try to start a thread that is already running, this
+function will wait until the the thread has finished and then
+restart the thread.
+
     
    See also Priority.
+
+
    void TQThread::terminate ()
+
    
+This function terminates the execution of the thread. The thread
+may or may not be terminated immediately, depending on the
+operating system's scheduling policies. Use TQThread::wait()
+after terminate() for synchronous termination.
+
     When the thread is terminated, all threads waiting for the
+the thread to finish will be woken up.
+
     Warning: This function is dangerous, and its use is discouraged.
+The thread can be terminated at any point in its code path.  Threads
+can be terminated while modifying data.  There is no chance for
+the thread to cleanup after itself, unlock any held mutexes, etc.
+In short, use this function only if absolutely necessary.
+
+
    void TQThread::usleep ( unsigned long usecs ) [static protected]
+
    
+System independent sleep. This causes the current thread to sleep
+for usecs microseconds
+
+
    bool TQThread::wait ( unsigned long time = ULONG_MAX )
+
    
+A thread calling this function will block until either of these
+conditions is met:
+
     
      
+
    •  The thread associated with this TQThread object has finished
+execution (i.e. when it returns from run()). This function
+will return TRUE if the thread has finished. It also returns
+TRUE if the thread has not been started yet.
+
    •  time milliseconds has elapsed. If time is ULONG_MAX (the
+default), then the wait will never timeout (the thread must
+return from run()). This function will return FALSE if the
+wait timed out.
+
    
+
     This provides similar functionality to the POSIX pthread_join() function.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqthreadstorage.html b/doc/html/ntqthreadstorage.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5a71d641f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqthreadstorage.html
@@ -0,0 +1,189 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQThreadStorage Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQThreadStorage Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQThreadStorage class provides per-thread data storage.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are thread-safe when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqthreadstorage.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQThreadStorage class provides per-thread data storage.
+
     
+
+
+
     TQThreadStorage is a template class that provides per-thread data
+storage.
+
     Note that due to compiler limitations, TQThreadStorage can only store pointers.
+
     The setLocalData() function stores a single thread-specific value
+for the calling thread. The data can be accessed later using the
+localData() functions. TQThreadStorage takes ownership of the
+data (which must be created on the heap with new) and deletes
+it when the thread exits (either normally or via termination).
+
     The hasLocalData() function allows the programmer to determine if
+data has previously been set using the setLocalData() function.
+This is useful for lazy initializiation.
+
     For example, the following code uses TQThreadStorage to store a
+single cache for each thread that calls the cacheObject() and
+removeFromCache() functions. The cache is automatically
+deleted when the calling thread exits (either normally or via
+termination).
+
     
    +    TQThreadStorage<TQCache<SomeClass> *> caches;
+
+    void cacheObject( const TQString &key, SomeClass *object )
+    {
+        if ( ! caches.hasLocalData() )
+            caches.setLocalData( new TQCache<SomeClass> );
+
+        caches.localData()->insert( key, object );
+    }
+
+    void removeFromCache( const TQString &key )
+    {
+        if ( ! caches.hasLocalData() )
+            return; // nothing to do
+
+        caches.localData()->remove( key );
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     
     Caveats
+
    
+
     
      
+
       
    •  As noted above, TQThreadStorage can only store pointers due to
+compiler limitations. Support for value-based objects will be
+added when the majority of compilers are able to support partial
+template specialization.
+
       
    •  The destructor does not
+delete per-thread data. TQThreadStorage only deletes per-thread
+data when the thread exits or when setLocalData() is called
+multiple times.
+
       
    •  TQThreadStorage can only be used with threads started with
+TQThread. It cannot be used with threads started with
+platform-specific APIs.
+
       
    •  As a corollary to the above, platform-specific APIs cannot be
+used to exit or terminate a TQThread using TQThreadStorage. Doing so
+will cause all per-thread data to be leaked. See TQThread::exit()
+and TQThread::terminate().
+
       
    •  TQThreadStorage can be used to store data for the main()
+thread after TQApplication has been constructed. TQThreadStorage
+deletes all data set for the main() thread when TQApplication is
+destroyed, regardless of whether or not the main() thread has
+actually finished.
+
       
    •  The implementation of TQThreadStorage limits the total number of
+TQThreadStorage objects to 256. An unlimited number of threads
+can store per-thread data in each TQThreadStorage object.
+
       
    
+
    See also Environment Classes and Threading.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQThreadStorage::TQThreadStorage ()
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a new per-thread data storage object.
+
+
    TQThreadStorage::~TQThreadStorage ()
+
    
+
+
     Destroys the per-thread data storage object.
+
     Note: The per-thread data stored is not deleted. Any data left
+in TQThreadStorage is leaked. Make sure that all threads using
+TQThreadStorage have exited before deleting the TQThreadStorage.
+
     
    See also hasLocalData().
+
+
    bool TQThreadStorage::hasLocalData () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the calling thread has non-zero data available;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also localData().
+
+
    T & TQThreadStorage::localData ()
+
    
+
+
     Returns a reference to the data that was set by the calling
+thread.
+
     Note: TQThreadStorage can only store pointers. This function
+returns a reference to the pointer that was set by the calling
+thread. The value of this reference is 0 if no data was set by
+the calling thread,
+
     
    See also hasLocalData().
+
+
    T TQThreadStorage::localData () const
+
    
+
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns a copy of the data that was set by the calling thread.
+
     Note: TQThreadStorage can only store pointers. This function
+returns a pointer to the data that was set by the calling thread.
+If no data was set by the calling thread, this function returns 0.
+
     
    See also hasLocalData().
+
+
    void TQThreadStorage::setLocalData ( T data )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the local data for the calling thread to data. It can be
+accessed later using the localData() functions.
+
     If data is 0, this function deletes the previous data (if
+any) and returns immediately.
+
     If data is non-zero, TQThreadStorage takes ownership of the data and deletes it automatically either when the thread exits
+(either normally or via termination) or when setLocalData() is
+called again.
+
     Note: TQThreadStorage can only store pointers. The data
+argument must be either a pointer to an object created on the heap
+(i.e. using new) or 0. You should not delete data
+yourself; TQThreadStorage takes ownership and will delete the data itself.
+
     
    See also localData() and hasLocalData().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqtimer.html b/doc/html/ntqtimer.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e0ca0b9d6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqtimer.html
@@ -0,0 +1,199 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQTimer Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQTimer Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQTimer class provides timer signals and single-shot timers.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqtimer.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • void singleShot ( int msec, TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQTimer class provides timer signals and single-shot timers.
+
     
+
+
+
     It uses timer events internally to
+provide a more versatile timer. TQTimer is very easy to use:
+create a TQTimer, call start() to start it and connect its
+timeout() to the appropriate slots. When the time is up it will
+emit the timeout() signal.
+
     Note that a TQTimer object is destroyed automatically when its
+parent object is destroyed.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQTimer *timer = new TQTimer( myObject );
+        connect( timer, SIGNAL(timeout()), myObject, SLOT(timerDone()) );
+        timer->start( 2000, TRUE ); // 2 seconds single-shot timer
+    
    
+ 
+
     You can also use the static singleShot() function to create a
+single shot timer.
+
     As a special case, a TQTimer with timeout 0 times out as soon as
+all the events in the window system's event queue have been
+processed.
+
     This can be used to do heavy work while providing a snappy
+user interface:
+
    +        TQTimer *t = new TQTimer( myObject );
+        connect( t, SIGNAL(timeout()), SLOT(processOneThing()) );
+        t->start( 0, FALSE );
+    
    
+ 
+
     myObject->processOneThing() will be called repeatedly and should
+return tquickly (typically after processing one data item) so that
+TQt can deliver events to widgets and stop the timer as soon as it
+has done all its work. This is the traditional way of
+implementing heavy work in GUI applications; multi-threading is
+now becoming available on more and more platforms, and we expect
+that null events will eventually be replaced by threading.
+
     Note that TQTimer's accuracy depends on the underlying operating
+system and hardware. Most platforms support an accuracy of 20ms;
+some provide more. If TQt is unable to deliver the requested
+number of timer clicks, it will silently discard some.
+
     An alternative to using TQTimer is to call TQObject::startTimer()
+for your object and reimplement the TQObject::timerEvent() event
+handler in your class (which must, of course, inherit TQObject).
+The disadvantage is that timerEvent() does not support such
+high-level features as single-shot timers or signals.
+
     Some operating systems limit the number of timers that may be
+used; TQt tries to work around these limitations.
+
    See also Event Classes and Time and Date.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQTimer::TQTimer ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a timer called name, with the parent parent.
+
     Note that the parent object's destructor will destroy this timer
+object.
+
+
    TQTimer::~TQTimer ()
+
    
+Destroys the timer.
+
+
    void TQTimer::changeInterval ( int msec )
+
    
+Changes the timeout interval to msec milliseconds.
+
     If the timer signal is pending, it will be stopped and restarted;
+otherwise it will be started.
+
     
    See also start() and isActive().
+
+
    bool TQTimer::isActive () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the timer is running (pending); otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
+
    Example: t11/cannon.cpp.
+
    void TQTimer::singleShot ( int msec, TQObject * receiver, const char * member ) [static]
+
    
+This static function calls a slot after a given time interval.
+
     It is very convenient to use this function because you do not need
+to bother with a timerEvent or
+to create a local TQTimer object.
+
     Example:
+
    +        #include <ntqapplication.h>
+        #include <ntqtimer.h>
+
+        int main( int argc, char **argv )
+        {
+            TQApplication a( argc, argv );
+            TQTimer::singleShot( 10*60*1000, &a, SLOT(quit()) );
+                ... // create and show your widgets
+            return a.exec();
+        }
+    
    
+ 
+
     This sample program automatically terminates after 10 minutes (i.e.
+600000 milliseconds).
+
     The receiver is the receiving object and the member is the
+slot. The time interval is msec.
+
+
    int TQTimer::start ( int msec, bool sshot = FALSE )
+
    
+Starts the timer with a msec milliseconds timeout, and returns
+the ID of the timer, or zero when starting the timer failed.
+
     If sshot is TRUE, the timer will be activated only once;
+otherwise it will continue until it is stopped.
+
     Any pending timer will be stopped.
+
     
    See also singleShot(), stop(), changeInterval(), and isActive().
+
+
    Examples: aclock/aclock.cpp, dirview/dirview.cpp, distributor/distributor.ui.h, forever/forever.cpp, hello/hello.cpp, t11/cannon.cpp, and t13/cannon.cpp.
+
    void TQTimer::stop ()
+
    
+Stops the timer.
+
     
    See also start().
+
+
    Examples: dirview/dirview.cpp, t11/cannon.cpp, t12/cannon.cpp, and t13/cannon.cpp.
+
    void TQTimer::timeout () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the timer is activated.
+
+
    Examples: aclock/aclock.cpp, dirview/dirview.cpp, distributor/distributor.ui.h, forever/forever.cpp, hello/hello.cpp, and t11/cannon.cpp.
+
    int TQTimer::timerId () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the ID of the timer if the timer is running; otherwise returns
+-1.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqtl.html b/doc/html/ntqtl.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bc63003ab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqtl.html
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQt Template Library Classes
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQt Template Library Classes
    
+
+ 
+
     The TQt Template Library (TQTL) is a set of templates that provide
+object containers. See the TQt Template
+Library.
+
     
+
    
+
    TQMapValue-based template class that provides a dictionary
+
    TQMapConstIteratorIterator for TQMap
+
    TQMapIteratorIterator for TQMap
+
    TQPairValue-based template class that provides a pair of elements
+
    TQValueListValue-based template class that provides lists
+
    TQValueListConstIteratorConst iterator for TQValueList
+
    TQValueListIteratorIterator for TQValueList
+
    TQValueStackValue-based template class that provides a stack
+
    TQValueVectorValue-based template class that provides a dynamic array
+
    
+
+
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqtoolbar.html b/doc/html/ntqtoolbar.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1a56c3549
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqtoolbar.html
@@ -0,0 +1,197 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQToolBar Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQToolBar Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQToolBar class provides a movable panel containing
+widgets such as tool buttons.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqtoolbar.h>
+
    Inherits TQDockWindow.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQToolBar ( const TQString & label, TQMainWindow *, ToolBarDock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE, const char * name = 0 )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • TQToolBar ( const TQString & label, TQMainWindow * mainWindow, TQWidget * parent, bool newLine = FALSE, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQToolBar ( TQMainWindow * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • void addSeparator ()
      • 
+
    • TQMainWindow * mainWindow () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setStretchableWidget ( TQWidget * w )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setLabel ( const TQString & )
      • 
+
    • TQString label () const
      • 
+
    • virtual void clear ()
      • 
+
    
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • TQString label - the toolbar's label
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQToolBar class provides a movable panel containing
+widgets such as tool buttons.
+
     
+
+
     A toolbar is a panel that contains a set of controls, usually
+represented by small icons. It's purpose is to provide tquick
+access to frequently used commands or options. Within a
+TQMainWindow the user can drag toolbars within and between the
+dock areas. Toolbars can also be dragged
+out of any dock area to float freely as top-level windows.
+
     TQToolBar is a specialization of TQDockWindow, and so provides all
+the functionality of a TQDockWindow.
+
     To use TQToolBar you simply create a TQToolBar as a child of a
+TQMainWindow, create a number of TQToolButton widgets (or other
+widgets) in left to right (or top to bottom) order and call
+addSeparator() when you want a separator. When a toolbar is
+floated the caption used is the label given in the constructor
+call. This can be changed with setLabel().
+
     
+
+
            TQToolBar * fileTools = new TQToolBar( this, "file operations" );
+        fileTools->setLabel( "File Operations" );
+        fileOpenAction->addTo( fileTools );
+        fileSaveAction->addTo( fileTools );
+
    
+
     This extract from the application/application.cpp example shows
+the creation of a new toolbar as a child of a TQMainWindow and
+adding two TQActions.
+
     You may use most widgets within a toolbar, with TQToolButton and
+TQComboBox being the most common.
+
     If you create a new widget on an already visible TQToolBar, this
+widget will automatically become visible without needing a show()
+call. (This differs from every other TQt widget container. We
+recommend calling show() anyway since we hope to fix this anomaly
+in a future release.)
+
     TQToolBars, like TQDockWindows, are located in TQDockAreas or
+float as top-level windows. TQMainWindow provides four TQDockAreas
+(top, left, right and bottom). When you create a new toolbar (as
+in the example above) as a child of a TQMainWindow the toolbar will
+be added to the top dock area. You can move it to another dock
+area (or float it) by calling TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow(). TQDock
+areas lay out their windows in Lines.
+
     If the main window is resized so that the area occupied by the
+toolbar is too small to show all its widgets a little arrow button
+(which looks like a right-pointing chevron, '»') will appear
+at the right or bottom of the toolbar depending on its
+orientation. Clicking this button pops up a menu that shows the
+'overflowing' items. TQToolButtons are represented in the menu using
+their textLabel property, other TQButton subclasses are represented
+using their text property, and TQComboBoxes are represented as submenus,
+with the caption text being used in the submenu item.
+
     Usually a toolbar will get precisely the space it needs. However,
+with setHorizontalStretchable(), setVerticalStretchable() or
+setStretchableWidget() you can tell the main window to expand the
+toolbar to fill all available space in the specified orientation.
+
     The toolbar arranges its buttons either horizontally or vertically
+(see orientation() for details). Generally, TQDockArea will set the
+orientation correctly for you, but you can set it yourself with
+setOrientation() and track any changes by connecting to the
+orientationChanged() signal.
+
     You can use the clear() method to remove all items from a toolbar.
+
     
    Toolbar (dock window)
     
     A floating TQToolbar (dock window)
+
    
+
     
    See also TQToolButton, TQMainWindow, Parts of Isys on Visual Design, GUI Design Handbook: Tool Bar, and Main Window and Related Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQToolBar::TQToolBar ( const TQString & label, TQMainWindow *, ToolBarDock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
    TQToolBar::TQToolBar ( const TQString & label, TQMainWindow * mainWindow, TQWidget * parent, bool newLine = FALSE, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs an empty horizontal toolbar.
+
     The toolbar is called name and is a child of parent and is
+managed by mainWindow. The label and newLine parameters
+are passed straight to TQMainWindow::addDockWindow(). name and
+the widget flags f are passed on to the TQDockWindow constructor.
+
     Use this constructor if you want to create torn-off (undocked,
+floating) toolbars or toolbars in the status
+    bar.
+
+
    TQToolBar::TQToolBar ( TQMainWindow * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Constructs an empty toolbar called name, with parent parent,
+in its parent's top dock area, without any label and without
+retquiring a newline.
+
+
    void TQToolBar::addSeparator ()
+
    
+Adds a separator to the right/bottom of the toolbar.
+
+
    Examples: chart/chartform.cpp, fileiconview/mainwindow.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp, and scribble/scribble.cpp.
+
    void TQToolBar::clear () [virtual]
+
    
+Deletes all the toolbar's child widgets.
+
+
    TQString TQToolBar::label () const
+
    Returns the toolbar's label.
+See the "label" property for details.
+
    TQMainWindow * TQToolBar::mainWindow () const
+
    
+Returns a pointer to the TQMainWindow which manages this toolbar.
+
+
    void TQToolBar::setLabel ( const TQString & ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the toolbar's label.
+See the "label" property for details.
+
    void TQToolBar::setStretchableWidget ( TQWidget * w ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the widget w to be expanded if this toolbar is requested
+to stretch.
+
     The request to stretch might occur because TQMainWindow
+right-justifies the dock area the toolbar is in, or because this
+toolbar's isVerticalStretchable() or isHorizontalStretchable() is
+set to TRUE.
+
     If you call this function and the toolbar is not yet stretchable,
+setStretchable() is called.
+
     
    See also TQMainWindow::rightJustification, setVerticalStretchable(), and setHorizontalStretchable().
+
+
    Examples: fileiconview/mainwindow.cpp and helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp.
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    TQString label
    
+
    This property holds the toolbar's label.
+
    If the toolbar is floated the label becomes the toolbar window's
+caption. There is no default label text.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setLabel() and get this property's value with label().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqtoolbox.html b/doc/html/ntqtoolbox.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f15ae848e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqtoolbox.html
@@ -0,0 +1,248 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQToolBox Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQToolBox Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQToolBox class provides a column of tabbed widget
+items.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqtoolbox.h>
+
    Inherits TQFrame.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQToolBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
      • 
+
    • int addItem ( TQWidget * w, const TQString & label )
      • 
+
    • int addItem ( TQWidget * item, const TQIconSet & iconSet, const TQString & label )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( int index, TQWidget * item, const TQString & label )
      • 
+
    • int insertItem ( int index, TQWidget * item, const TQIconSet & iconSet, const TQString & label )
      • 
+
    • int removeItem ( TQWidget * item )
      • 
+
    • void setItemEnabled ( int index, bool enabled )
      • 
+
    • bool isItemEnabled ( int index ) const
      • 
+
    • void setItemLabel ( int index, const TQString & label )
      • 
+
    • TQString itemLabel ( int index ) const
      • 
+
    • void setItemIconSet ( int index, const TQIconSet & iconSet )
      • 
+
    • TQIconSet itemIconSet ( int index ) const
      • 
+
    • void setItemToolTip ( int index, const TQString & toolTip )
      • 
+
    • TQString itemToolTip ( int index ) const
      • 
+
    • TQWidget * currentItem () const
      • 
+
    • void setCurrentItem ( TQWidget * item )
      • 
+
    • int currentIndex () const
      • 
+
    • TQWidget * item ( int index ) const
      • 
+
    • int indexOf ( TQWidget * item ) const
      • 
+
    • int count () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • int count - the number of items contained in the toolbox  (read only)
      • 
+
    • int currentIndex - the index of the current item, or -1 if the toolbox is empty
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
     The TQToolBox class provides a column of tabbed widget
+items.
+
     
+
+
     A toolbox is a widget that displays a column of tabs one above the
+other, with the current item displayed below the current tab.
+Every tab has an index position within the column of tabs. A tab's
+item is a TQWidget.
+
     Each item has an itemLabel(), an optional icon, itemIconSet(), an
+optional itemToolTip(), and a widget. The
+item's attributes can be changed with setItemLabel(),
+setItemIconSet() and setItemToolTip().
+
     Items are added using addItem(), or inserted at particular
+positions using insertItem(). The total number of items is given
+by count(). Items can be deleted with delete, or removed from the
+toolbox with removeItem(). Combining removeItem() and insertItem()
+allows to move items to different positions.
+
     The current item widget is returned by currentItem() and set with
+setCurrentItem(). If you prefer you can work in terms of indexes
+using currentIndex(), setCurrentIndex(), indexOf() and item().
+
     The currentChanged() signal is emitted when the current item is
+changed.
+
     
    See also TQTabWidget and Advanced Widgets.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQToolBox::TQToolBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a toolbox called name with parent parent and flags f.
+
+
    int TQToolBox::addItem ( TQWidget * item, const TQIconSet & iconSet, const TQString & label )
+
    
+
+Adds the widget item in a new tab at bottom of the toolbox. The
+new tab's label is set to label, and the iconSet is
+displayed to the left of the label.  Returns the new tab's index.
+
+
    int TQToolBox::addItem ( TQWidget * w, const TQString & label )
+
    
+
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Adds the widget w in a new tab at bottom of the toolbox. The
+new tab's label is set to label. Returns the new tab's index.
+
+
    int TQToolBox::count () const
+
    Returns the number of items contained in the toolbox.
+See the "count" property for details.
+
    void TQToolBox::currentChanged ( int index ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the current item changed. The new
+current item's index is passed in index, or -1 if there is no
+current item.
+
+
    int TQToolBox::currentIndex () const
+
    Returns the index of the current item, or -1 if the toolbox is empty.
+See the "currentIndex" property for details.
+
    TQWidget * TQToolBox::currentItem () const
+
    
+Returns the toolbox's current item, or 0 if the toolbox is empty.
+
+
    int TQToolBox::indexOf ( TQWidget * item ) const
+
    
+Returns the index of item item, or -1 if the item does not
+exist.
+
+
    int TQToolBox::insertItem ( int index, TQWidget * item, const TQIconSet & iconSet, const TQString & label )
+
    
+Inserts the widget item at position index, or at the bottom
+of the toolbox if index is out of range. The new item's label
+is set to label, and the iconSet is displayed to the left of
+the label. Returns the new item's index.
+
+
    int TQToolBox::insertItem ( int index, TQWidget * item, const TQString & label )
+
    
+
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts the widget item at position index, or at the bottom
+of the toolbox if index is out of range. The new item's label is
+set to label. Returns the new item's index.
+
+
    bool TQToolBox::isItemEnabled ( int index ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the item at position index is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    TQWidget * TQToolBox::item ( int index ) const
+
    
+Returns the item at position index, or 0 if there is no such
+item.
+
+
    TQIconSet TQToolBox::itemIconSet ( int index ) const
+
    
+Returns the icon of the item at position index, or a null
+icon if index is out of range.
+
+
    void TQToolBox::itemInserted ( int index ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This virtual handler is called after a new item was added or
+inserted at position index.
+
+
    TQString TQToolBox::itemLabel ( int index ) const
+
    
+Returns the label of the item at position index, or a null string if
+index is out of range.
+
+
    void TQToolBox::itemRemoved ( int index ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This virtual handler is called after an item was removed from
+position index.
+
+
    TQString TQToolBox::itemToolTip ( int index ) const
+
    
+Returns the tooltip of the item at position index, or a null
+string if index is out of range.
+
+
    int TQToolBox::removeItem ( TQWidget * item )
+
    
+Removes the widget item from the toolbox. Note that the widget
+is not deleted. Returns the removed widget's index, or -1 if
+the widget was not in this tool box.
+
+
    void TQToolBox::setCurrentIndex ( int index ) [slot]
+
    Sets the index of the current item, or -1 if the toolbox is empty to index.
+See the "currentIndex" property for details.
+
    void TQToolBox::setCurrentItem ( TQWidget * item )
+
    
+Sets the current item to be item.
+
+
    void TQToolBox::setItemEnabled ( int index, bool enabled )
+
    
+If enabled is TRUE then the item at position index is enabled; otherwise item
+index is disabled.
+
+
    void TQToolBox::setItemIconSet ( int index, const TQIconSet & iconSet )
+
    
+Sets the icon of the item at position index to iconSet.
+
+
    void TQToolBox::setItemLabel ( int index, const TQString & label )
+
    
+Sets the label of the item at position index to label.
+
+
    void TQToolBox::setItemToolTip ( int index, const TQString & toolTip )
+
    
+Sets the tooltip of the item at position index to toolTip.
+
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    int count
    
+
    This property holds the number of items contained in the toolbox.
+
    
+
    Get this property's value with count().
+
    int currentIndex
    
+
    This property holds the index of the current item, or -1 if the toolbox is empty.
+
    Set this property's value with setCurrentIndex() and get this property's value with currentIndex().
+
    See also currentItem(), indexOf(), and item().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqtoolbutton.html b/doc/html/ntqtoolbutton.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0b244cde8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqtoolbutton.html
@@ -0,0 +1,392 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQToolButton Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQToolButton Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQToolButton class provides a tquick-access button to
+commands or options, usually used inside a TQToolBar.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqtoolbutton.h>
+
    Inherits TQButton.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • enum TextPosition { BesideIcon, BelowIcon, Right = BesideIcon, Under = BelowIcon }
      • 
+
    • TQToolButton ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQToolButton ( const TQIconSet & iconSet, const TQString & textLabel, const TQString & grouptext, TQObject * receiver, const char * slot, TQToolBar * parent, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQToolButton ( ArrowType type, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • ~TQToolButton ()
      • 
+
    • void setOnIconSet ( const TQIconSet & )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void setOffIconSet ( const TQIconSet & )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void setIconSet ( const TQIconSet & set, bool on )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • TQIconSet onIconSet () const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • TQIconSet offIconSet () const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • TQIconSet iconSet ( bool on ) const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • virtual void setIconSet ( const TQIconSet & )
      • 
+
    • TQIconSet iconSet () const
      • 
+
    • bool usesBigPixmap () const
      • 
+
    • bool usesTextLabel () const
      • 
+
    • TQString textLabel () const
      • 
+
    • void setPopup ( TQPopupMenu * popup )
      • 
+
    • TQPopupMenu * popup () const
      • 
+
    • void setPopupDelay ( int delay )
      • 
+
    • int popupDelay () const
      • 
+
    • void openPopup ()
      • 
+
    • void setAutoRaise ( bool enable )
      • 
+
    • bool autoRaise () const
      • 
+
    • TextPosition textPosition () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • bool autoRaise - whether auto-raising is enabled
      • 
+
    • BackgroundMode backgroundMode - the toolbutton's background mode  (read only)
      • 
+
    • TQIconSet iconSet - the icon set providing the icon shown on the button
      • 
+
    • TQIconSet offIconSet - the icon set that is used when the button is in an "off" state  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • bool on - whether this tool button is on
      • 
+
    • TQIconSet onIconSet - the icon set that is used when the button is in an "on" state  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • TQPixmap pixmap - the pixmap of the button  (read only)
      • 
+
    • int popupDelay - the time delay between pressing the button and the appearance of the associated popup menu in milliseconds
      • 
+
    • TQString textLabel - the label of this button
      • 
+
    • TextPosition textPosition - the position of the text label of this button
      • 
+
    • bool toggleButton - whether this tool button is a toggle button
      • 
+
    • bool usesBigPixmap - whether this toolbutton uses big pixmaps
      • 
+
    • bool usesTextLabel - whether the toolbutton displays a text label below the button pixmap
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQToolButton class provides a tquick-access button to
+commands or options, usually used inside a TQToolBar.
+
     
+
+
     A tool button is a special button that provides tquick-access to
+specific commands or options. As opposed to a normal command
+button, a tool button usually doesn't show a text label, but shows
+an icon instead. Its classic usage is to select tools, for example
+the "pen" tool in a drawing program. This would be implemented
+with a TQToolButton as toggle button (see setToggleButton() ).
+
     TQToolButton supports auto-raising. In auto-raise mode, the button
+draws a 3D frame only when the mouse points at it. The feature is
+automatically turned on when a button is used inside a TQToolBar.
+Change it with setAutoRaise().
+
     A tool button's icon is set as TQIconSet. This makes it possible to
+specify different pixmaps for the disabled and active state. The
+disabled pixmap is used when the button's functionality is not
+available. The active pixmap is displayed when the button is
+auto-raised because the mouse pointer is hovering over it.
+
     The button's look and dimension is adjustable with
+setUsesBigPixmap() and setUsesTextLabel(). When used inside a
+TQToolBar in a TQMainWindow, the button automatically adjusts to
+TQMainWindow's settings (see TQMainWindow::setUsesTextLabel() and
+TQMainWindow::setUsesBigPixmaps()). The pixmap set on a TQToolButton
+will be set to 22x22 if it is bigger than this size. If
+usesBigPixmap() is TRUE, then the pixmap will be set to 32x32.
+
     A tool button can offer additional choices in a popup menu. The
+feature is sometimes used with the "Back" button in a web browser.
+After pressing and holding the button down for a while, a menu
+pops up showing a list of possible pages to jump to. With
+TQToolButton you can set a popup menu using setPopup(). The default
+delay is 600ms; you can adjust it with setPopupDelay().
+
     
    Toolbar with Toolbuttons \caption A floating
     TQToolbar with TQToolbuttons
+
     
    See also TQPushButton, TQToolBar, TQMainWindow, GUI Design Handbook: Push Button, and Basic Widgets.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQToolButton::TextPosition
    
+
+
     The position of the tool button's textLabel in relation to the
+tool button's icon.
+
      
+
    • TQToolButton::BesideIcon - The text appears beside the icon.
+
    • TQToolButton::BelowIcon - The text appears below the icon.
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQToolButton::TQToolButton ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs an empty tool button called name, with parent parent.
+
+
    TQToolButton::TQToolButton ( const TQIconSet & iconSet, const TQString & textLabel, const TQString & grouptext, TQObject * receiver, const char * slot, TQToolBar * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a tool button called name, that is a child of parent (which must be a TQToolBar).
+
     The tool button will display iconSet, with its text label and
+tool tip set to textLabel and its status bar message set to grouptext. It will be connected to the slot in object receiver.
+
+
    TQToolButton::TQToolButton ( ArrowType type, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a tool button as an arrow button. The ArrowType type defines the arrow direction. Possible values are LeftArrow, RightArrow, UpArrow and DownArrow.
+
     An arrow button has auto-repeat turned on by default.
+
     The parent and name arguments are sent to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
+
    TQToolButton::~TQToolButton ()
+
    
+Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
+
+
    bool TQToolButton::autoRaise () const
+
    Returns TRUE if auto-raising is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "autoRaise" property for details.
+
    TQIconSet TQToolButton::iconSet () const
+
    Returns the icon set providing the icon shown on the button.
+See the "iconSet" property for details.
+
    TQIconSet TQToolButton::iconSet ( bool on ) const
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Since TQt 3.0, TQIconSet contains both the On and Off icons.
+
     For ease of porting, this function ignores the on parameter and
+returns the iconSet property. If you relied on the on
+parameter, you probably want to update your code to use the TQIconSet
+On/Off mechanism.
+
+
    TQIconSet TQToolButton::offIconSet () const
+
    Returns the icon set that is used when the button is in an "off" state.
+See the "offIconSet" property for details.
+
    TQIconSet TQToolButton::onIconSet () const
+
    Returns the icon set that is used when the button is in an "on" state.
+See the "onIconSet" property for details.
+
    void TQToolButton::openPopup ()
+
    
+Opens (pops up) the associated popup menu. If there is no such
+menu, this function does nothing. This function does not return
+until the popup menu has been closed by the user.
+
+
    TQPopupMenu * TQToolButton::popup () const
+
    
+Returns the associated popup menu, or 0 if no popup menu has been
+defined.
+
     
    See also setPopup().
+
+
    int TQToolButton::popupDelay () const
+
    Returns the time delay between pressing the button and the appearance of the associated popup menu in milliseconds.
+See the "popupDelay" property for details.
+
    void TQToolButton::setAutoRaise ( bool enable )
+
    Sets whether auto-raising is enabled to enable.
+See the "autoRaise" property for details.
+
    void TQToolButton::setIconSet ( const TQIconSet & ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the icon set providing the icon shown on the button.
+See the "iconSet" property for details.
+
    void TQToolButton::setIconSet ( const TQIconSet & set, bool on )
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Since TQt 3.0, TQIconSet contains both the On and Off icons.
+
     For ease of porting, this function ignores the on parameter and
+sets the iconSet property. If you relied on the on parameter,
+you probably want to update your code to use the TQIconSet On/Off
+mechanism.
+
     
    See also iconSet and TQIconSet::State.
+
+
    void TQToolButton::setOffIconSet ( const TQIconSet & )
+
    Sets the icon set that is used when the button is in an "off" state.
+See the "offIconSet" property for details.
+
    void TQToolButton::setOn ( bool enable ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets whether this tool button is on to enable.
+See the "on" property for details.
+
    void TQToolButton::setOnIconSet ( const TQIconSet & )
+
    Sets the icon set that is used when the button is in an "on" state.
+See the "onIconSet" property for details.
+
    void TQToolButton::setPopup ( TQPopupMenu * popup )
+
    
+Associates the popup menu popup with this tool button.
+
     The popup will be shown each time the tool button has been pressed
+down for a certain amount of time. A typical application example
+is the "back" button in some web browsers's tool bars. If the user
+clicks it, the browser simply browses back to the previous page.
+If the user presses and holds the button down for a while, the
+tool button shows a menu containing the current history list.
+
     Ownership of the popup menu is not transferred to the tool button.
+
     
    See also popup().
+
+
    void TQToolButton::setPopupDelay ( int delay )
+
    Sets the time delay between pressing the button and the appearance of the associated popup menu in milliseconds to delay.
+See the "popupDelay" property for details.
+
    void TQToolButton::setTextLabel ( const TQString & ) [slot]
+
    Sets the label of this button.
+See the "textLabel" property for details.
+
    void TQToolButton::setTextLabel ( const TQString & newLabel, bool tipToo ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the label of this button to newLabel and automatically
+sets it as a tool tip if tipToo is TRUE.
+
+
    void TQToolButton::setTextPosition ( TextPosition pos ) [slot]
+
    Sets the position of the text label of this button to pos.
+See the "textPosition" property for details.
+
    void TQToolButton::setToggleButton ( bool enable ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets whether this tool button is a toggle button to enable.
+See the "toggleButton" property for details.
+
    void TQToolButton::setUsesBigPixmap ( bool enable ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets whether this toolbutton uses big pixmaps to enable.
+See the "usesBigPixmap" property for details.
+
    void TQToolButton::setUsesTextLabel ( bool enable ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets whether the toolbutton displays a text label below the button pixmap to enable.
+See the "usesTextLabel" property for details.
+
    TQString TQToolButton::textLabel () const
+
    Returns the label of this button.
+See the "textLabel" property for details.
+
    TextPosition TQToolButton::textPosition () const
+
    Returns the position of the text label of this button.
+See the "textPosition" property for details.
+
    void TQToolButton::toggle () [slot]
+
    
+Toggles the state of this tool button.
+
     This function has no effect on non-toggling
+    buttons.
+
     
    See also toggleButton and toggled().
+
+
    bool TQToolButton::uses3D () const [protected]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this button should be drawn using raised edges;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also drawButton().
+
+
    bool TQToolButton::usesBigPixmap () const
+
    Returns TRUE if this toolbutton uses big pixmaps; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "usesBigPixmap" property for details.
+
    bool TQToolButton::usesTextLabel () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the toolbutton displays a text label below the button pixmap; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "usesTextLabel" property for details.
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    bool autoRaise
    
+
    This property holds whether auto-raising is enabled.
+
    The default is disabled (i.e. FALSE).
+
+
    Set this property's value with setAutoRaise() and get this property's value with autoRaise().
+
    BackgroundMode backgroundMode
    
+
    This property holds the toolbutton's background mode.
+
    Get this property with backgroundMode().
+
     
    See also TQWidget::backgroundMode.
+
+
    TQIconSet iconSet
    
+
    This property holds the icon set providing the icon shown on the button.
+
    Setting this property sets TQToolButton::pixmap to a null
+pixmap. There is no default iconset.
+
     
    See also pixmap, toggleButton, and on.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setIconSet() and get this property's value with iconSet().
+
    TQIconSet offIconSet
    
+
    This property holds the icon set that is used when the button is in an "off" state.
+
    This property is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Since TQt 3.0, TQIconSet contains both the On and Off icons. There is
+now an TQToolButton::iconSet property that replaces both TQToolButton::onIconSet and TQToolButton::offIconSet.
+
     For ease of porting, this property is a synonym for TQToolButton::iconSet. You probably want to go over your application
+code and use the TQIconSet On/Off mechanism.
+
     
    See also iconSet and TQIconSet::State.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setOffIconSet() and get this property's value with offIconSet().
+
    bool on
    
+
    This property holds whether this tool button is on.
+
    This property has no effect on non-toggling
+    buttons. The default is FALSE (i.e. off).
+
     
    See also toggleButton and toggle().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setOn().
+
    TQIconSet onIconSet
    
+
    This property holds the icon set that is used when the button is in an "on" state.
+
    This property is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Since TQt 3.0, TQIconSet contains both the On and Off icons. There is
+now an TQToolButton::iconSet property that replaces both TQToolButton::onIconSet and TQToolButton::offIconSet.
+
     For ease of porting, this property is a synonym for TQToolButton::iconSet. You probably want to go over your application
+code and use the TQIconSet On/Off mechanism.
+
     
    See also iconSet and TQIconSet::State.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setOnIconSet() and get this property's value with onIconSet().
+
    TQPixmap pixmap
     
    This property holds the pixmap of the button.
+
    The pixmap property has no meaning for tool buttons. Use the
+iconSet property instead.
+
+
    int popupDelay
    
+
    This property holds the time delay between pressing the button and the appearance of the associated popup menu in milliseconds.
+
    Usually this is around half a second. A value of 0 draws the down
+arrow button to the side of the button which can be used to open
+up the popup menu.
+
     
    See also setPopup().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setPopupDelay() and get this property's value with popupDelay().
+
    TQString textLabel
    
+
    This property holds the label of this button.
+
    Setting this property automatically sets the text as a tool tip
+too. There is no default text.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setTextLabel() and get this property's value with textLabel().
+
    TextPosition textPosition
    
+
    This property holds the position of the text label of this button.
+
    
+
    Set this property's value with setTextPosition() and get this property's value with textPosition().
+
    bool toggleButton
    
+
    This property holds whether this tool button is a toggle button.
+
    Toggle buttons have an on/off state similar to check boxes. A tool button is not a toggle button by
+default.
+
     
    See also on and toggle().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setToggleButton().
+
    bool usesBigPixmap
    
+
    This property holds whether this toolbutton uses big pixmaps.
+
    TQToolButton automatically connects this property to the relevant
+signal in the TQMainWindow in which it resides. We strongly
+recommend that you use TQMainWindow::setUsesBigPixmaps() instead.
+
     This property's default is TRUE.
+
     Warning: If you set some buttons (in a TQMainWindow) to have big
+pixmaps and others to have small pixmaps, TQMainWindow may not get
+the geometry right.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setUsesBigPixmap() and get this property's value with usesBigPixmap().
+
    bool usesTextLabel
    
+
    This property holds whether the toolbutton displays a text label below the button pixmap.
+
    The default is FALSE.
+
     TQToolButton automatically connects this slot to the relevant
+signal in the TQMainWindow in which is resides.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setUsesTextLabel() and get this property's value with usesTextLabel().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqtooltip.html b/doc/html/ntqtooltip.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5682679cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqtooltip.html
@@ -0,0 +1,376 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQToolTip Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQToolTip Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQToolTip class provides tool tips (balloon help) for
+any widget or rectangular part of a widget.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqtooltip.h>
+
    Inherits TQt.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQToolTip ( TQWidget * widget, TQToolTipGroup * group = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQWidget * parentWidget () const
      • 
+
    • TQToolTipGroup * group () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • void add ( TQWidget * widget, const TQString & text )
      • 
+
    • void add ( TQWidget * widget, const TQString & text, TQToolTipGroup * group, const TQString & longText )
      • 
+
    • void remove ( TQWidget * widget )
      • 
+
    • void add ( TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & rect, const TQString & text )
      • 
+
    • void add ( TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & rect, const TQString & text, TQToolTipGroup * group, const TQString & groupText )
      • 
+
    • void remove ( TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & rect )
      • 
+
    • TQString textFor ( TQWidget * widget, const TQPoint & pos = TQPoint ( ) )
      • 
+
    • void hide ()
      • 
+
    • TQFont font ()
      • 
+
    • void setFont ( const TQFont & font )
      • 
+
    • TQPalette palette ()
      • 
+
    • void setPalette ( const TQPalette & palette )
      • 
+
    • void setEnabled ( bool enable )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • bool enabled ()  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void setGloballyEnabled ( bool enable )
      • 
+
    • bool isGloballyEnabled ()
      • 
+
    • void setWakeUpDelay ( int i )
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • virtual void maybeTip ( const TQPoint & p ) = 0
      • 
+
    • void tip ( const TQRect & rect, const TQString & text )
      • 
+
    • void tip ( const TQRect & rect, const TQString & text, const TQString & groupText )
      • 
+
    • void tip ( const TQRect & rect, const TQString & text, const TQRect & geometry )
      • 
+
    • void tip ( const TQRect & rect, const TQString & text, const TQString & groupText, const TQRect & geometry )
      • 
+
    • void clear ()
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQToolTip class provides tool tips (balloon help) for
+any widget or rectangular part of a widget.
+
     
+
+
     The tip is a short, single line of text reminding the user of the
+widget's or rectangle's function. It is drawn immediately below
+the region in a distinctive black-on-yellow combination.
+
     The tip can be any Rich-Text formatted string.
+
     TQToolTipGroup provides a way for tool tips to display another text
+elsewhere (most often in a status bar).
+
     At any point in time, TQToolTip is either dormant or active. In
+dormant mode the tips are not shown and in active mode they are.
+The mode is global, not particular to any one widget.
+
     TQToolTip switches from dormant to active mode when the user hovers
+the mouse on a tip-etquipped region for a second or so and remains
+active until the user either clicks a mouse button, presses a key,
+lets the mouse hover for five seconds or moves the mouse outside
+all tip-etquipped regions for at least a second.
+
     The TQToolTip class can be used in three different ways:
+
      
+
    1.  Adding a tip to an entire widget.
+
    2.  Adding a tip to a fixed rectangle within a widget.
+
    3.  Adding a tip to a dynamic rectangle within a widget.
+
    
+
     To add a tip to a widget, call the static function
+TQToolTip::add() with the widget and tip as arguments:
+
     
    +        TQToolTip::add( quitButton, "Leave the application" );
+    
    
+ 
+
     This is the simplest and most common use of TQToolTip. The tip
+will be deleted automatically when quitButton is deleted, but
+you can remove it yourself, too:
+
     
    +        TQToolTip::remove( quitButton );
+    
    
+ 
+
     You can also display another text (typically in a status bar), courtesy of TQToolTipGroup. This example
+assumes that grp is a TQToolTipGroup * and is already
+connected to the appropriate status bar:
+
     
    +        TQToolTip::add( quitButton, "Leave the application", grp,
+                       "Leave the application, prompting to save if necessary" );
+        TQToolTip::add( closeButton, "Close this window", grp,
+                       "Close this window, prompting to save if necessary" );
+    
    
+ 
+
     To add a tip to a fixed rectangle within a widget, call the static
+function TQToolTip::add() with the widget, rectangle and tip as
+arguments. (See the tooltip/tooltip.cpp example.) Again, you
+can supply a TQToolTipGroup * and another text if you want.
+
     Both of these are one-liners and cover the majority of cases. The
+third and most general way to use TQToolTip requires you to
+reimplement a pure virtual function to decide whether to pop up a
+tool tip. The tooltip/tooltip.cpp example demonstrates this
+too. This mode can be used to implement tips for text that can
+move as the user scrolls, for example.
+
     To use TQToolTip like this, you must subclass TQToolTip and
+reimplement maybeTip(). TQToolTip calls maybeTip() when a tip
+should pop up, and maybeTip() decides whether to show a tip.
+
     Tool tips can be globally disabled using
+TQToolTip::setGloballyEnabled() or disabled in groups with
+TQToolTipGroup::setEnabled().
+
     You can retrieve the text of a tooltip for a given position within
+a widget using textFor().
+
     The global tooltip font and palette can be set with the static
+setFont() and setPalette() functions respectively.
+
     
    See also TQStatusBar, TQWhatsThis, TQToolTipGroup, GUI Design Handbook: Tool Tip, and Help System.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQToolTip::TQToolTip ( TQWidget * widget, TQToolTipGroup * group = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a tool tip object. This is only necessary if you need
+tool tips on regions that can move within the widget (most often
+because the widget's contents can scroll).
+
     widget is the widget you want to add dynamic tool tips to and
+group (optional) is the tool tip group they should belong to.
+
     Warning: TQToolTip is not a subclass of TQObject, so the instance of
+TQToolTip is not deleted when widget is deleted.
+
     Warning: If you delete the tool tip before you have deleted
+widget then you need to make sure you call remove() yourself from
+widget in your reimplemented TQToolTip destructor.
+
     
    +        MyToolTip::~MyToolTip()
+        {
+            remove( widget );
+        }
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also maybeTip().
+
+
    void TQToolTip::add ( TQWidget * widget, const TQString & text ) [static]
+
    
+Adds a tool tip to widget. text is the text to be shown in
+the tool tip.
+
     This is the most common entry point to the TQToolTip class; it is
+suitable for adding tool tips to buttons, checkboxes, comboboxes
+and so on.
+
+
    Examples: helpsystem/mainwindow.cpp, qdir/qdir.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, and tooltip/tooltip.cpp.
+
    void TQToolTip::add ( TQWidget * widget, const TQString & text, TQToolTipGroup * group, const TQString & longText ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Adds a tool tip to widget and to tool tip group group.
+
     text is the text shown in the tool tip and longText is the
+text emitted from group.
+
     Normally, longText is shown in a status
+    bar or similar.
+
+
    void TQToolTip::add ( TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & rect, const TQString & text ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Adds a tool tip to a fixed rectangle, rect, within widget.
+text is the text shown in the tool tip.
+
+
    void TQToolTip::add ( TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & rect, const TQString & text, TQToolTipGroup * group, const TQString & groupText ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Adds a tool tip to an entire widget and to tool tip group group. The tooltip will disappear when the mouse leaves the rect.
+
     text is the text shown in the tool tip and groupText is the
+text emitted from group.
+
     Normally, groupText is shown in a status
+    bar or similar.
+
+
    void TQToolTip::clear () [protected]
+
    
+Immediately removes all tool tips for this tooltip's parent
+widget.
+
+
    bool TQToolTip::enabled () [static]
+
    
+
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
    TQFont TQToolTip::font () [static]
+
    
+Returns the font common to all tool tips.
+
     
    See also setFont().
+
+
    TQToolTipGroup * TQToolTip::group () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the tool tip group this TQToolTip is a member of or 0 if it
+isn't a member of any group.
+
     The tool tip group is the object responsible for maintaining
+contact between tool tips and a status
+    bar or something else which can show the longer help text.
+
     
    See also parentWidget() and TQToolTipGroup.
+
+
    void TQToolTip::hide () [static]
+
    
+Hides any tip that is currently being shown.
+
     Normally, there is no need to call this function; TQToolTip takes
+care of showing and hiding the tips as the user moves the mouse.
+
+
    bool TQToolTip::isGloballyEnabled () [static]
+
    
+Returns whether tool tips are enabled globally.
+
     
    See also setGloballyEnabled().
+
+
    void TQToolTip::maybeTip ( const TQPoint & p ) [pure virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     This pure virtual function is half of the most versatile interface
+TQToolTip offers.
+
     It is called when there is a possibility that a tool tip should be
+shown and must decide whether there is a tool tip for the point p in the widget that this TQToolTip object relates to. If so,
+maybeTip() must call tip() with the rectangle the tip applies to,
+the tip's text and optionally the TQToolTipGroup details and the
+geometry in screen coordinates.
+
     p is given in that widget's local coordinates. Most maybeTip()
+implementations will be of the form:
+
     
    +        if ( <something> ) {
+            tip( <something>, <something> );
+        }
+    
    
+ 
+
     The first argument to tip() (a rectangle) must encompass p,
+i.e. the tip must apply to the current mouse position; otherwise
+TQToolTip's operation is undefined.
+
     Note that the tip will disappear once the mouse moves outside the
+rectangle you give to tip(), and will not reappear if the mouse
+moves back in: maybeTip() is called again instead.
+
     
    See also tip().
+
+
    Examples: helpsystem/tooltip.cpp and tooltip/tooltip.cpp.
+
    TQPalette TQToolTip::palette () [static]
+
    
+Returns the palette common to all tool tips.
+
     
    See also setPalette().
+
+
    TQWidget * TQToolTip::parentWidget () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the widget this TQToolTip applies to.
+
     The tool tip is destroyed automatically when the parent widget is
+destroyed.
+
     
    See also group().
+
+
    void TQToolTip::remove ( TQWidget * widget ) [static]
+
    
+Removes the tool tip from widget.
+
     If there is more than one tool tip on widget, only the one
+covering the entire widget is removed.
+
+
    void TQToolTip::remove ( TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & rect ) [static]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Removes any tool tip for rect from widget.
+
     If there is more than one tool tip on widget, only the one
+covering rectangle rect is removed.
+
+
    void TQToolTip::setEnabled ( bool enable ) [static]
+
    
+
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
    void TQToolTip::setFont ( const TQFont & font ) [static]
+
    
+Sets the font for all tool tips to font.
+
     
    See also font().
+
+
    void TQToolTip::setGloballyEnabled ( bool enable ) [static]
+
    
+If enable is TRUE sets all tool tips to be enabled (shown when
+needed); if enable is FALSE sets all tool tips to be disabled
+(never shown).
+
     By default, tool tips are enabled. Note that this function affects
+all tool tips in the entire application.
+
     
    See also TQToolTipGroup::enabled.
+
+
    void TQToolTip::setPalette ( const TQPalette & palette ) [static]
+
    
+Sets the palette for all tool tips to palette.
+
     
    See also palette().
+
+
    void TQToolTip::setWakeUpDelay ( int i ) [static]
+
    
+Sets the wakeup delay for all tooltips to i
+milliseconds.
+
+
    TQString TQToolTip::textFor ( TQWidget * widget, const TQPoint & pos = TQPoint ( ) ) [static]
+
    
+Returns the tool tip text for widget at position pos, or
+TQString::null if there is no tool tip for the given widget and
+position.
+
+
    void TQToolTip::tip ( const TQRect & rect, const TQString & text ) [protected]
+
    
+Immediately pops up a tip saying text and removes the tip once
+the cursor moves out of rectangle rect (which is given in the
+coordinate system of the widget this TQToolTip relates to).
+
     The tip will not reappear if the cursor moves back; your
+maybeTip() must reinstate it each time.
+
+
    void TQToolTip::tip ( const TQRect & rect, const TQString & text, const TQString & groupText ) [protected]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Immediately pops up a tip saying text and removes that tip once
+the cursor moves out of rectangle rect (which is given in the
+coordinate system of the widget this TQToolTip relates to). groupText is the text emitted from the group.
+
     The tip will not reappear if the cursor moves back; your
+maybeTip() must reinstate it each time.
+
+
    void TQToolTip::tip ( const TQRect & rect, const TQString & text, const TQRect & geometry ) [protected]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Immediately pops up a tip within the rectangle geometry, saying
+text and removes the tip once the cursor moves out of rectangle
+rect. Both rectangles are given in the coordinate system of the
+widget this TQToolTip relates to.
+
     The tip will not reappear if the cursor moves back; your
+maybeTip() must reinstate it each time.
+
     If the tip does not fit inside geometry, the tip expands.
+
+
    void TQToolTip::tip ( const TQRect & rect, const TQString & text, const TQString & groupText, const TQRect & geometry ) [protected]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Immediately pops up a tip within the rectangle geometry, saying
+text and removes the tip once the cursor moves out of rectangle
+rect. groupText is the text emitted from the group. Both
+rectangles are given in the coordinate system of the widget this
+TQToolTip relates to.
+
     The tip will not reappear if the cursor moves back; your
+maybeTip() must reinstate it each time.
+
     If the tip does not fit inside geometry, the tip expands.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqtranslator.html b/doc/html/ntqtranslator.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..32b58b9e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqtranslator.html
@@ -0,0 +1,326 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQTranslator Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQTranslator Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQTranslator class provides internationalization support for text
+output.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqtranslator.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQTranslator ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • ~TQTranslator ()
      • 
+
    • TQString find ( const char * context, const char * sourceText, const char * comment = 0 ) const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • virtual TQTranslatorMessage findMessage ( const char * context, const char * sourceText, const char * comment = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • bool load ( const TQString & filename, const TQString & directory = TQString::null, const TQString & search_delimiters = TQString::null, const TQString & suffix = TQString::null )
      • 
+
    • bool load ( const uchar * data, int len )
      • 
+
    • void clear ()
      • 
+
    • enum SaveMode { Everything, Stripped }
      • 
+
    • bool save ( const TQString & filename, SaveMode mode = Everything )
      • 
+
    • void insert ( const TQTranslatorMessage & message )
      • 
+
    • void insert ( const char * context, const char * sourceText, const TQString & translation )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • void remove ( const TQTranslatorMessage & message )
      • 
+
    • void remove ( const char * context, const char * sourceText )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • bool contains ( const char * context, const char * sourceText, const char * comment = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • void squeeze ( SaveMode mode = Everything )
      • 
+
    • void unsqueeze ()
      • 
+
    • TQValueList<TQTranslatorMessage> messages () const
      • 
+
    • bool isEmpty () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
     The TQTranslator class provides internationalization support for text
+output.
+
     
+
+
+
     An object of this class contains a set of TQTranslatorMessage
+objects, each of which specifies a translation from a source
+language to a target language. TQTranslator provides functions to
+look up translations, add new ones, remove them, load and save
+them, etc.
+
     The most common use of TQTranslator is to: load a translator file
+created with TQt Linguist,
+install it using TQApplication::installTranslator(), and use it via
+TQObject::tr(). For example:
+
     
    +    int main( int argc, char ** argv )
+    {
+        TQApplication app( argc, argv );
+
+        TQTranslator translator( 0 );
+        translator.load( "french.qm", "." );
+        app.installTranslator( &translator );
+
+        MyWidget m;
+        app.setMainWidget( &m );
+        m.show();
+
+        return app.exec();
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+Note that the translator must be created before the
+application's main window.
+
     Most applications will never need to do anything else with this
+class. The other functions provided by this class are useful for
+applications that work on translator files.
+
     We call a translation a "messsage". For this reason, translation
+files are sometimes referred to as "message files".
+
     It is possible to lookup a translation using findMessage() (as
+tr() and TQApplication::translate() do) and contains(), to insert a
+new translation messsage using insert(), and to remove one using
+remove().
+
     Translation tools often need more information than the bare source
+text and translation, for example, context information to help
+the translator. But end-user programs that are using translations
+usually only need lookup. To cater for these different needs,
+TQTranslator can use stripped translator files that use the minimum
+of memory and which support little more functionality than
+findMessage().
+
     Thus, load() may not load enough information to make anything more
+than findMessage() work. save() has an argument indicating
+whether to save just this minimum of information or to save
+everything.
+
     "Everything" means that for each translation item the following
+information is kept:
+
     
      
+
    •  The translated text - the return value from tr().
+
    •  The input key:
+
        
+
      •  The source text - usually the argument to tr().
+
      •  The context - usually the class name for the tr() caller.
+
      •  The comment - a comment that helps disambiguate different uses
+of the same text in the same context.
+
      
+
    
+
     The minimum for each item is just the information necessary for
+findMessage() to return the right text. This may include the
+source, context and comment, but usually it is just a hash value
+and the translated text.
+
     For example, the "Cancel" in a dialog might have "Anuluj" when the
+program runs in Polish (in this case the source text would be
+"Cancel"). The context would (normally) be the dialog's class
+name; there would normally be no comment, and the translated text
+would be "Anuluj".
+
     But it's not always so simple. The Spanish version of a printer
+dialog with settings for two-sided printing and binding would
+probably require both "Activado" and "Activada" as translations
+for "Enabled". In this case the source text would be "Enabled" in
+both cases, and the context would be the dialog's class name, but
+the two items would have disambiguating comments such as
+"two-sided printing" for one and "binding" for the other. The
+comment enables the translator to choose the appropriate gender
+for the Spanish version, and enables TQt to distinguish between
+translations.
+
     Note that when TQTranslator loads a stripped file, most functions
+do not work. The functions that do work with stripped files are
+explicitly documented as such.
+
     
    See also TQTranslatorMessage, TQApplication::installTranslator(), TQApplication::removeTranslator(), TQObject::tr(), TQApplication::translate(), Environment Classes, and Internationalization with TQt.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQTranslator::SaveMode
    
+
+
     This enum type defines how TQTranslator writes translation
+files. There are two modes:
+
      
+
    • TQTranslator::Everything - files are saved with all available information
+
    • TQTranslator::Stripped - files are saved with just enough information for
+end-user applications
+
     Note that when TQTranslator loads a stripped file, most functions do
+not work. The functions that do work with stripped files are
+explicitly documented as such.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQTranslator::TQTranslator ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs an empty message file object that is not connected to
+any file. The object is called name with parent parent.
+
+
    TQTranslator::~TQTranslator ()
+
    
+Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
+
+
    void TQTranslator::clear ()
+
    
+Empties this translator of all contents.
+
     This function works with stripped translator files.
+
+
    bool TQTranslator::contains ( const char * context, const char * sourceText, const char * comment = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this message file contains a message with the key
+(context, sourceText, comment); otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     This function works with stripped translator files.
+
     (This is is a one-liner that calls findMessage().)
+
+
    TQString TQTranslator::find ( const char * context, const char * sourceText, const char * comment = 0 ) const
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Please use findMessage() instead.
+
     Returns the translation for the key (context, sourceText,
+comment) or TQString::null if there is none in this translator.
+
+
    TQTranslatorMessage TQTranslator::findMessage ( const char * context, const char * sourceText, const char * comment = 0 ) const [virtual]
+
      Returns the TQTranslatorMessage for the key
+(context, sourceText, comment). If none is found,
+also tries (context, sourceText, "").
+
+
    void TQTranslator::insert ( const TQTranslatorMessage & message )
+
    
+Inserts message into this message file.
+
     This function does not work with stripped translator files. It
+may appear to, but that is not dependable.
+
     
    See also remove().
+
+
    void TQTranslator::insert ( const char * context, const char * sourceText, const TQString & translation )
+
    
+
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
    bool TQTranslator::isEmpty () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this translator is empty, otherwise returns FALSE.
+This function works with stripped and unstripped translation files.
+
+
    bool TQTranslator::load ( const TQString & filename, const TQString & directory = TQString::null, const TQString & search_delimiters = TQString::null, const TQString & suffix = TQString::null )
+
    
+Loads filename, which may be an absolute file name or relative
+to directory. The previous contents of this translator object
+is discarded. Returns TRUE if the file is loaded successfully;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     If the full file name does not exist, other file names are tried
+in the following order:
+
     
      
+
    1.  File name with suffix appended (".qm" if the suffix is
+TQString::null).
+
    2.  File name with text after a character in search_delimiters
+stripped ("_." is the default for search_delimiters if it is
+TQString::null).
+
    3.  File name stripped and suffix appended.
+
    4.  File name stripped further, etc.
+
    
+
     For example, an application running in the fr_CA locale
+(French-speaking Canada) might call load("foo.fr_ca",
+"/opt/foolib"). load() would then try to open the first existing
+readable file from this list:
+
     
      
+
    1.  /opt/foolib/foo.fr_ca
+
    2.  /opt/foolib/foo.fr_ca.qm
+
    3.  /opt/foolib/foo.fr
+
    4.  /opt/foolib/foo.fr.qm
+
    5.  /opt/foolib/foo
+
    6.  /opt/foolib/foo.qm
+
    
+
     
    See also save().
+
+
    Example: i18n/main.cpp.
+
    bool TQTranslator::load ( const uchar * data, int len )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Loads the .qm file data data of length len into the
+translator. Returns TRUE if the data is loaded successfully;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     The data is not copied. The caller must be able to guarantee that data
+will not be deleted or modified.
+
+
    TQValueList<TQTranslatorMessage> TQTranslator::messages () const
+
    
+Returns a list of the messages in the translator. This function is
+rather slow. Because it is seldom called, it's optimized for
+simplicity and small size, rather than speed.
+
     If you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate over a
+copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQValueList<TQTranslatorMessage> list = myTranslator.messages();
+    TQValueList<TQTranslatorMessage>::Iterator it = list.begin();
+    while ( it != list.end() ) {
+        process_message( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+  
    
+ 
+
+
    void TQTranslator::remove ( const TQTranslatorMessage & message )
+
    
+Removes message from this translator.
+
     This function works with stripped translator files.
+
     
    See also insert().
+
+
    void TQTranslator::remove ( const char * context, const char * sourceText )
+
    
+
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Removes the translation associated to the key (context, sourceText,
+"") from this translator.
+
+
    bool TQTranslator::save ( const TQString & filename, SaveMode mode = Everything )
+
    
+Saves this message file to filename, overwriting the previous
+contents of filename. If mode is Everything (the
+default), all the information is preserved. If mode is Stripped, any information that is not necessary for findMessage()
+is stripped away.
+
     
    See also load().
+
+
    void TQTranslator::squeeze ( SaveMode mode = Everything )
+
    
+Converts this message file to the compact format used to store
+message files on disk.
+
     You should never need to call this directly; save() and other
+functions call it as necessary. mode is for internal use.
+
     
    See also save() and unsqueeze().
+
+
    void TQTranslator::unsqueeze ()
+
    
+Converts this message file into an easily modifiable data
+structure, less compact than the format used in the files.
+
     You should never need to call this function; it is called by
+insert() and friends as necessary.
+
     
    See also squeeze().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqtsciicodec.html b/doc/html/ntqtsciicodec.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0f849a86d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqtsciicodec.html
@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQTsciiCodec Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQTsciiCodec Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQTsciiCodec class provides conversion to and from the Tamil TSCII encoding.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqtsciicodec.h>
+
    Inherits TQTextCodec.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Detailed Description
    
+ 
+
+
+
     The TQTsciiCodec class provides conversion to and from the Tamil TSCII encoding.
+
     TSCII, formally the Tamil Standard Code Information Interchange
+specification, is a commonly used charset for Tamils. The
+official page for the standard is at
+http://www.tamil.net/tscii/
+
     This codec uses the mapping table found at
+http://www.geocities.com/Athens/5180/tsciiset.html.
+Tamil uses composed Unicode which might cause some
+problems if you are using Unicode fonts instead of TSCII fonts.
+
     Most of the code here  was written by Hans Petter Bieker
+and is included in TQt with the author's permission and the
+grateful thanks of the Trolltech team.
+Here is the copyright statement for the code as it was at the
+point of contribution. Trolltech's subsequent modifications
+are covered by the usual copyright for TQt.
+
     
+
     Copyright (C) 2000 Hans Petter Bieker. All rights reserved.
+
     Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+are met:
+
      
+
    1.  Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+
    2.  Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+
    
+
     THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSETQUENTIAL
+DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+SUCH DAMAGE.
+
    See also Internationalization with TQt.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqurl.html b/doc/html/ntqurl.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..67e425157
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqurl.html
@@ -0,0 +1,478 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQUrl Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQUrl Class Reference
    [network module]
    
+
+
    The TQUrl class provides a URL parser and simplifies working with URLs.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqurl.h>
+
    Inherited by TQUrlOperator.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
+
    Protected Members
    
+
      
+
    • virtual void reset ()
      • 
+
    • virtual bool parse ( const TQString & url )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
     The TQUrl class provides a URL parser and simplifies working with URLs.
+
+
     
+
+
+
     
+
     The TQUrl class is provided for simple work with URLs. It can
+parse, decode, encode, etc.
+
     TQUrl works with the decoded path and encoded query in turn.
+
     Example:
+
     http://www.trolltech.com:80/cgi-bin/test%20me.pl?cmd=Hello%20you
+
     
    
+
     Function	    Returns
+
     protocol()   "http"
+
     host()	    "www.trolltech.com"
+
     port()	    80
+
     path()	    "/cgi-bin/test me.pl"
+
     fileName()   "test me.pl"
+
     query()	    "cmd=Hello%20you"
+
    
+
     Example:
+
     http://doc.trolltech.com/ntqdockarea.html#lines
+
     
    
+
     Function	    Returns
+
     protocol()   "http"
+
     host()	    "doc.trolltech.com"
+
     fileName()   "ntqdockarea.html"
+
     ref()	    "lines"
+
    
+
     The individual parts of a URL can be set with setProtocol(),
+setHost(), setPort(), setPath(), setFileName(), setRef() and
+setQuery(). A URL could contain, for example, an ftp address which
+requires a user name and password; these can be set with setUser()
+and setPassword().
+
     Because path is always encoded internally you must not use "%00"
+in the path, although this is okay (but not recommended) for the
+query.
+
     TQUrl is normally used like this:
+
     
    +    TQUrl url( "http://www.trolltech.com" );
+    // or
+    TQUrl url( "file:/home/myself/Mail", "Inbox" );
+    
    
+ 
+
     You can then access and manipulate the various parts of the URL.
+
     To make it easy to work with TQUrls and TQStrings, TQUrl implements
+the necessary cast and assignment operators so you can do
+following:
+
     
    +    TQUrl url( "http://www.trolltech.com" );
+    TQString s = url;
+    // or
+    TQString s( "http://www.trolltech.com" );
+    TQUrl url( s );
+    
    
+ 
+
     Use the static functions, encode() and decode() to encode or
+decode a URL in a string. (They operate on the string in-place.)
+The isRelativeUrl() static function returns TRUE if the given
+string is a relative URL.
+
     If you want to use a URL to work on a hierarchical structure (e.g.
+a local or remote filesystem), you might want to use the subclass
+TQUrlOperator.
+
     
    See also TQUrlOperator, Input/Output and Networking, and Miscellaneous Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQUrl::TQUrl ()
+
    
+Constructs an empty URL that is invalid.
+
+
    TQUrl::TQUrl ( const TQString & url )
+
    
+Constructs a URL by parsing the string url.
+
     If you pass a string like "/home/qt", the "file" protocol is
+assumed.
+
+
    TQUrl::TQUrl ( const TQUrl & url )
+
    
+Copy constructor. Copies the data of url.
+
+
    TQUrl::TQUrl ( const TQUrl & url, const TQString & relUrl, bool checkSlash = FALSE )
+
    
+Constructs an URL taking url as the base (context) and
+relUrl as a relative URL to url. If relUrl is not relative,
+relUrl is taken as the new URL.
+
     For example, the path of
+
    +    TQUrl url( "ftp://ftp.trolltech.com/qt/source", "qt-2.1.0.tar.gz" );
+    
    
+ 
+will be "/qt/srource/qt-2.1.0.tar.gz".
+
     On the other hand,
+
    +    TQUrl url( "ftp://ftp.trolltech.com/qt/source", "/usr/local" );
+    
    
+ 
+will result in a new URL, "ftp://ftp.trolltech.com/usr/local",
+because "/usr/local" isn't relative.
+
     Similarly,
+
    +    TQUrl url( "ftp://ftp.trolltech.com/qt/source", "file:/usr/local" );
+    
    
+ 
+will result in a new URL, with "/usr/local" as the path
+and "file" as the protocol.
+
     Normally it is expected that the path of url points to a
+directory, even if the path has no slash at the end. But if you
+want the constructor to handle the last part of the path as a file
+name if there is no slash at the end, and to let it be replaced by
+the file name of relUrl (if it contains one), set checkSlash
+to TRUE.
+
+
    TQUrl::~TQUrl () [virtual]
+
    
+Destructor.
+
+
    void TQUrl::addPath ( const TQString & pa ) [virtual]
+
    
+Adds the path pa to the path of the URL.
+
     
    See also setPath() and hasPath().
+
+
    bool TQUrl::cdUp () [virtual]
+
    
+Changes the directory to one directory up.
+
     
    See also setPath().
+
+
    void TQUrl::decode ( TQString & url ) [static]
+
    
+Decodes the url in-place into UTF-8.  For example
+
     
    +        TQString url = "http%3A//www%20trolltech%20com"
+        TQUrl::decode( url );
+        // url is now "http://www.trolltech.com"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also encode().
+
+
    TQString TQUrl::dirPath () const
+
    
+Returns the directory path of the URL. This is the part of the
+path of the URL without the fileName(). See the documentation of
+fileName() for a discussion of what is handled as file name and
+what is handled as directory path.
+
     
    See also setPath() and hasPath().
+
+
    Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    void TQUrl::encode ( TQString & url ) [static]
+
    
+Encodes the url in-place into UTF-8.  For example
+
     
    +        TQString url = http://www.trolltech.com
+        TQUrl::encode( url );
+        // url is now "http%3A//www%20trolltech%20com"
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also decode().
+
+
    Example: network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h.
+
    TQString TQUrl::encodedPathAndQuery ()
+
    
+Returns the encoded path and query.
+
     
    See also decode().
+
+
    TQString TQUrl::fileName () const
+
    
+Returns the file name of the URL. If the path of the URL doesn't
+have a slash at the end, the part between the last slash and the
+end of the path string is considered to be the file name. If the
+path has a slash at the end, an empty string is returned here.
+
     
    See also setFileName().
+
+
    Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    bool TQUrl::hasHost () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the URL contains a hostname; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     
    See also setHost().
+
+
    bool TQUrl::hasPassword () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the URL contains a password; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     Warning: Passwords passed in URLs are normally insecure; this
+is due to the mechanism, not because of TQt.
+
     
    See also setPassword() and setUser().
+
+
    bool TQUrl::hasPath () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the URL contains a path; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also path() and setPath().
+
+
    bool TQUrl::hasPort () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the URL contains a port; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setPort().
+
+
    bool TQUrl::hasRef () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the URL has a reference; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also setRef().
+
+
    bool TQUrl::hasUser () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the URL contains a username; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     
    See also setUser() and setPassword().
+
+
    TQString TQUrl::host () const
+
    
+Returns the hostname of the URL.
+
     
    See also setHost() and hasHost().
+
+
    Example: network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h.
+
    bool TQUrl::isLocalFile () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the URL is a local file; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    Example: qdir/qdir.cpp.
+
    bool TQUrl::isRelativeUrl ( const TQString & url ) [static]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if url is relative; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQUrl::isValid () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the URL is valid; otherwise returns FALSE. A URL
+is invalid if it cannot be parsed, for example.
+
+
    TQUrl::operator TQString () const
+
    
+Composes a string version of the URL and returns it.
+
     
    See also TQUrl::toString().
+
+
    TQUrl & TQUrl::operator= ( const TQUrl & url )
+
    
+Assigns the data of url to this class.
+
+
    TQUrl & TQUrl::operator= ( const TQString & url )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Parses url and assigns the resulting data to this class.
+
     If you pass a string like "/home/qt" the "file" protocol will be
+assumed.
+
+
    bool TQUrl::operator== ( const TQUrl & url ) const
+
    
+Compares this URL with url and returns TRUE if they are equal;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQUrl::operator== ( const TQString & url ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Compares this URL with url. url is parsed first. Returns
+TRUE if url is equal to this url; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQUrl::parse ( const TQString & url ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Parses the url.
+
+
    TQString TQUrl::password () const
+
    
+Returns the password of the URL.
+
     Warning: Passwords passed in URLs are normally insecure; this
+is due to the mechanism, not because of TQt.
+
     
    See also setPassword() and setUser().
+
+
    TQString TQUrl::path ( bool correct = TRUE ) const
+
    
+Returns the path of the URL. If correct is TRUE, the path is
+cleaned (deals with too many or too few slashes, cleans things
+like "/../..", etc). Otherwise path() returns exactly the path
+that was parsed or set.
+
     
    See also setPath() and hasPath().
+
+
    Example: qdir/qdir.cpp.
+
    int TQUrl::port () const
+
    
+Returns the port of the URL or -1 if no port has been set.
+
     
    See also setPort().
+
+
    TQString TQUrl::protocol () const
+
    
+Returns the protocol of the URL. Typically, "file", "http", "ftp",
+etc.
+
     
    See also setProtocol().
+
+
    TQString TQUrl::query () const
+
    
+Returns the (encoded) query of the URL.
+
     
    See also setQuery() and decode().
+
+
    TQString TQUrl::ref () const
+
    
+Returns the (encoded) reference of the URL.
+
     
    See also setRef(), hasRef(), and decode().
+
+
    void TQUrl::reset () [virtual protected]
+
    
+Resets all parts of the URL to their default values and
+invalidates it.
+
+
    void TQUrl::setEncodedPathAndQuery ( const TQString & pathAndQuery ) [virtual]
+
    
+Parses pathAndQuery for a path and query and sets those values.
+The whole string must be encoded.
+
     
    See also encode().
+
+
    void TQUrl::setFileName ( const TQString & name ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the file name of the URL to name. If this URL contains a
+fileName(), the original file name is replaced by name.
+
     See the documentation of fileName() for a more detailed discussion
+of what is handled as file name and what is handled as a directory
+path.
+
     
    See also fileName().
+
+
    void TQUrl::setHost ( const TQString & host ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the hostname of the URL to host.
+
     
    See also host() and hasHost().
+
+
    void TQUrl::setPassword ( const TQString & pass ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the password of the URL to pass.
+
     Warning: Passwords passed in URLs are normally insecure; this
+is due to the mechanism, not because of TQt.
+
     
    See also password() and setUser().
+
+
    void TQUrl::setPath ( const TQString & path ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the path of the URL to path.
+
     
    See also path() and hasPath().
+
+
    void TQUrl::setPort ( int port ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the port of the URL to port.
+
     
    See also port().
+
+
    void TQUrl::setProtocol ( const TQString & protocol ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the protocol of the URL to protocol. Typically, "file",
+"http", "ftp", etc.
+
     
    See also protocol().
+
+
    void TQUrl::setQuery ( const TQString & txt ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the query of the URL to txt. txt must be encoded.
+
     
    See also query() and encode().
+
+
    void TQUrl::setRef ( const TQString & txt ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the reference of the URL to txt. txt must be encoded.
+
     
    See also ref(), hasRef(), and encode().
+
+
    void TQUrl::setUser ( const TQString & user ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the username of the URL to user.
+
     
    See also user() and setPassword().
+
+
    TQString TQUrl::toString ( bool encodedPath = FALSE, bool forcePrependProtocol = TRUE ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Composes a string version of the URL and returns it. If encodedPath is TRUE the path in the returned string is encoded. If
+forcePrependProtocol is TRUE and encodedPath looks like a
+local filename, the "file:/" protocol is also prepended.
+
     
    See also encode() and decode().
+
+
    TQString TQUrl::user () const
+
    
+Returns the username of the URL.
+
     
    See also setUser() and setPassword().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqurlinfo.html b/doc/html/ntqurlinfo.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ee68d5333
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqurlinfo.html
@@ -0,0 +1,367 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQUrlInfo Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQUrlInfo Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQUrlInfo class stores information about URLs.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqurlinfo.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • enum PermissionSpec { ReadOwner = 00400, WriteOwner = 00200, ExeOwner = 00100, ReadGroup = 00040, WriteGroup = 00020, ExeGroup = 00010, ReadOther = 00004, WriteOther = 00002, ExeOther = 00001 }
      • 
+
    • TQUrlInfo ()
      • 
+
    • TQUrlInfo ( const TQUrlOperator & path, const TQString & file )
      • 
+
    • TQUrlInfo ( const TQUrlInfo & ui )
      • 
+
    • TQUrlInfo ( const TQString & name, int permissions, const TQString & owner, const TQString & group, uint size, const TQDateTime & lastModified, const TQDateTime & lastRead, bool isDir, bool isFile, bool isSymLink, bool isWritable, bool isReadable, bool isExecutable )
      • 
+
    • TQUrlInfo ( const TQUrl & url, int permissions, const TQString & owner, const TQString & group, uint size, const TQDateTime & lastModified, const TQDateTime & lastRead, bool isDir, bool isFile, bool isSymLink, bool isWritable, bool isReadable, bool isExecutable )
      • 
+
    • TQUrlInfo & operator= ( const TQUrlInfo & ui )
      • 
+
    • virtual ~TQUrlInfo ()
      • 
+
    • virtual void setName ( const TQString & name )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setDir ( bool b )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setFile ( bool b )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setSymLink ( bool b )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setOwner ( const TQString & s )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setGroup ( const TQString & s )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setSize ( uint size )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setWritable ( bool b )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setReadable ( bool b )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setPermissions ( int p )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setLastModified ( const TQDateTime & dt )
      • 
+
    • bool isValid () const
      • 
+
    • TQString name () const
      • 
+
    • int permissions () const
      • 
+
    • TQString owner () const
      • 
+
    • TQString group () const
      • 
+
    • uint size () const
      • 
+
    • TQDateTime lastModified () const
      • 
+
    • TQDateTime lastRead () const
      • 
+
    • bool isDir () const
      • 
+
    • bool isFile () const
      • 
+
    • bool isSymLink () const
      • 
+
    • bool isWritable () const
      • 
+
    • bool isReadable () const
      • 
+
    • bool isExecutable () const
      • 
+
    • bool operator== ( const TQUrlInfo & i ) const
      • 
+
    
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • bool greaterThan ( const TQUrlInfo & i1, const TQUrlInfo & i2, int sortBy )
      • 
+
    • bool lessThan ( const TQUrlInfo & i1, const TQUrlInfo & i2, int sortBy )
      • 
+
    • bool equal ( const TQUrlInfo & i1, const TQUrlInfo & i2, int sortBy )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQUrlInfo class stores information about URLs.
+
     
+
+
     This class is just a container for storing information about URLs,
+which is why all information must be passed in the constructor.
+
     Unless you're reimplementing a network protocol you're unlikely to
+create TQUrlInfo objects yourself, but you may receive TQUrlInfo
+objects from functions, e.g. TQUrlOperator::info().
+
     The information that can be retrieved includes name(),
+permissions(), owner(), group(), size(), lastModified(),
+lastRead(), isDir(), isFile(), isSymLink(), isWritable(),
+isReadable() and isExecutable().
+
    See also Input/Output and Networking and Miscellaneous Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQUrlInfo::PermissionSpec
    
+
+
     This enum is used by the permissions() function to report the
+permissions of a file.
+
      
+
    • TQUrlInfo::ReadOwner - The file is readable by the owner of the file.
+
    • TQUrlInfo::WriteOwner - The file is writable by the owner of the file.
+
    • TQUrlInfo::ExeOwner - The file is executable by the owner of the file.
+
    • TQUrlInfo::ReadGroup - The file is readable by the group.
+
    • TQUrlInfo::WriteGroup - The file is writable by the group.
+
    • TQUrlInfo::ExeGroup - The file is executable by the group.
+
    • TQUrlInfo::ReadOther - The file is readable by anyone.
+
    • TQUrlInfo::WriteOther - The file is writable by anyone.
+
    • TQUrlInfo::ExeOther - The file is executable by anyone.
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQUrlInfo::TQUrlInfo ()
+
    
+Constructs an invalid TQUrlInfo object with default values.
+
     
    See also isValid().
+
+
    TQUrlInfo::TQUrlInfo ( const TQUrlOperator & path, const TQString & file )
+
    
+Constructs a TQUrlInfo object with information about the file file in the path. It tries to find the information about the file in the TQUrlOperator path.
+
     If the information is not found, this constructor creates an
+invalid TQUrlInfo, i.e. isValid() returns FALSE. You should always
+check if the URL info is valid before relying on the return values
+of any getter functions.
+
     If file is empty, it defaults to the TQUrlOperator path, i.e.
+to the directory.
+
     
    See also isValid() and TQUrlOperator::info().
+
+
    TQUrlInfo::TQUrlInfo ( const TQUrlInfo & ui )
+
    
+Copy constructor, copies ui to this URL info object.
+
+
    TQUrlInfo::TQUrlInfo ( const TQString & name, int permissions, const TQString & owner, const TQString & group, uint size, const TQDateTime & lastModified, const TQDateTime & lastRead, bool isDir, bool isFile, bool isSymLink, bool isWritable, bool isReadable, bool isExecutable )
+
    
+Constructs a TQUrlInfo object by specifying all the URL's
+information.
+
     The information that is passed is the name, file permissions, owner and group and the file's size. Also
+passed is the lastModified date/time and the lastRead
+date/time. Flags are also passed, specifically, isDir, isFile, isSymLink, isWritable, isReadable and isExecutable.
+
+
    TQUrlInfo::TQUrlInfo ( const TQUrl & url, int permissions, const TQString & owner, const TQString & group, uint size, const TQDateTime & lastModified, const TQDateTime & lastRead, bool isDir, bool isFile, bool isSymLink, bool isWritable, bool isReadable, bool isExecutable )
+
    
+Constructs a TQUrlInfo object by specifying all the URL's
+information.
+
     The information that is passed is the url, file permissions, owner and group and the file's size. Also
+passed is the lastModified date/time and the lastRead
+date/time. Flags are also passed, specifically, isDir, isFile, isSymLink, isWritable, isReadable and isExecutable.
+
+
    TQUrlInfo::~TQUrlInfo () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the URL info object.
+
     The TQUrlOperator object to which this URL referred (if any) is not
+affected.
+
+
    bool TQUrlInfo::equal ( const TQUrlInfo & i1, const TQUrlInfo & i2, int sortBy ) [static]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if i1 equals to i2; otherwise returns FALSE.
+The objects are compared by the value, which is specified by sortBy. This must be one of TQDir::Name, TQDir::Time or TQDir::Size.
+
+
    bool TQUrlInfo::greaterThan ( const TQUrlInfo & i1, const TQUrlInfo & i2, int sortBy ) [static]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if i1 is greater than i2; otherwise returns
+FALSE. The objects are compared by the value, which is specified
+by sortBy. This must be one of TQDir::Name, TQDir::Time or
+TQDir::Size.
+
+
    TQString TQUrlInfo::group () const
+
    
+Returns the group of the URL.
+
     
    See also isValid().
+
+
    bool TQUrlInfo::isDir () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the URL is a directory; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also isValid().
+
+
    Examples: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h and network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    bool TQUrlInfo::isExecutable () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the URL is executable; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also isValid().
+
+
    bool TQUrlInfo::isFile () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the URL is a file; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also isValid().
+
+
    bool TQUrlInfo::isReadable () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the URL is readable; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also isValid().
+
+
    bool TQUrlInfo::isSymLink () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the URL is a symbolic link; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also isValid().
+
+
    bool TQUrlInfo::isValid () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the URL info is valid; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Valid means that the TQUrlInfo contains real information. For
+example, a call to TQUrlOperator::info() might return a an invalid
+TQUrlInfo, if no information about the requested entry is
+available.
+
     You should always check if the URL info is valid before relying on
+the values.
+
+
    bool TQUrlInfo::isWritable () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the URL is writable; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also isValid().
+
+
    TQDateTime TQUrlInfo::lastModified () const
+
    
+Returns the last modification date of the URL.
+
     
    See also isValid().
+
+
    Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
+
    TQDateTime TQUrlInfo::lastRead () const
+
    
+Returns the date when the URL was last read.
+
     
    See also isValid().
+
+
    bool TQUrlInfo::lessThan ( const TQUrlInfo & i1, const TQUrlInfo & i2, int sortBy ) [static]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if i1 is less than i2; otherwise returns FALSE.
+The objects are compared by the value, which is specified by sortBy. This must be one of TQDir::Name, TQDir::Time or TQDir::Size.
+
+
    TQString TQUrlInfo::name () const
+
    
+Returns the file name of the URL.
+
     
    See also isValid().
+
+
    Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
+
    TQUrlInfo & TQUrlInfo::operator= ( const TQUrlInfo & ui )
+
    
+Assigns the values of ui to this TQUrlInfo object.
+
+
    bool TQUrlInfo::operator== ( const TQUrlInfo & i ) const
+
    
+Compares this TQUrlInfo with i and returns TRUE if they are
+equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    TQString TQUrlInfo::owner () const
+
    
+Returns the owner of the URL.
+
     
    See also isValid().
+
+
    int TQUrlInfo::permissions () const
+
    
+Returns the permissions of the URL. You can use the PermissionSpec flags
+to test for certain permissions.
+
     
    See also isValid().
+
+
    void TQUrlInfo::setDir ( bool b ) [virtual]
+
    
+If b is TRUE then the URL is set to be a directory; if \b is
+FALSE then the URL is set not to be a directory (which normally
+means it is a file). (Note that a URL can refer to both a file and
+a directory even though most file systems do not support this.)
+
     If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function
+turns it into a valid one.
+
     
    See also isValid().
+
+
    Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    void TQUrlInfo::setFile ( bool b ) [virtual]
+
    
+If b is TRUE then the URL is set to be a file; if \b is FALSE
+then the URL is set not to be a file (which normally means it is a
+directory). (Note that a URL can refer to both a file and a
+directory even though most file systems do not support this.)
+
     If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function
+turns it into a valid one.
+
     
    See also isValid().
+
+
    Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    void TQUrlInfo::setGroup ( const TQString & s ) [virtual]
+
    
+Specifies that the owning group of the URL is called s.
+
     If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function
+turns it into a valid one.
+
     
    See also isValid().
+
+
    void TQUrlInfo::setLastModified ( const TQDateTime & dt ) [virtual]
+
    
+Specifies that the object the URL refers to was last modified at
+dt.
+
     If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function
+turns it into a valid one.
+
     
    See also isValid().
+
+
    void TQUrlInfo::setName ( const TQString & name ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the name of the URL to name. The name is the full text,
+for example, "http://doc.trolltech.com/ntqurlinfo.html".
+
     If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function
+turns it into a valid one.
+
     
    See also isValid().
+
+
    Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    void TQUrlInfo::setOwner ( const TQString & s ) [virtual]
+
    
+Specifies that the owner of the URL is called s.
+
     If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function
+turns it into a valid one.
+
     
    See also isValid().
+
+
    void TQUrlInfo::setPermissions ( int p ) [virtual]
+
    
+Specifies that the URL has access permisions, p.
+
     If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function
+turns it into a valid one.
+
     
    See also isValid().
+
+
    void TQUrlInfo::setReadable ( bool b ) [virtual]
+
    
+Specifies that the URL is readable if b is TRUE and not
+readable if b is FALSE.
+
     If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function
+turns it into a valid one.
+
     
    See also isValid().
+
+
    Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    void TQUrlInfo::setSize ( uint size ) [virtual]
+
    
+Specifies the size of the URL.
+
     If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function
+turns it into a valid one.
+
     
    See also isValid().
+
+
    void TQUrlInfo::setSymLink ( bool b ) [virtual]
+
    
+Specifies that the URL refers to a symbolic link if b is TRUE
+and that it does not if b is FALSE.
+
     If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function
+turns it into a valid one.
+
     
    See also isValid().
+
+
    Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    void TQUrlInfo::setWritable ( bool b ) [virtual]
+
    
+Specifies that the URL is writable if b is TRUE and not
+writable if b is FALSE.
+
     If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function
+turns it into a valid one.
+
     
    See also isValid().
+
+
    Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
+
    uint TQUrlInfo::size () const
+
    
+Returns the size of the URL.
+
     
    See also isValid().
+
+
    Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqurloperator.html b/doc/html/ntqurloperator.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6a6d4c061
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqurloperator.html
@@ -0,0 +1,513 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQUrlOperator Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQUrlOperator Class Reference
    [network module]
    
+
+
    The TQUrlOperator class provides common operations on URLs.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqurloperator.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject and TQUrl.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQUrlOperator ()
      • 
+
    • TQUrlOperator ( const TQString & url )
      • 
+
    • TQUrlOperator ( const TQUrlOperator & url )
      • 
+
    • TQUrlOperator ( const TQUrlOperator & url, const TQString & relUrl, bool checkSlash = FALSE )
      • 
+
    • virtual ~TQUrlOperator ()
      • 
+
    • virtual const TQNetworkOperation * listChildren ()
      • 
+
    • virtual const TQNetworkOperation * mkdir ( const TQString & dirname )
      • 
+
    • virtual const TQNetworkOperation * remove ( const TQString & filename )
      • 
+
    • virtual const TQNetworkOperation * rename ( const TQString & oldname, const TQString & newname )
      • 
+
    • virtual const TQNetworkOperation * get ( const TQString & location = TQString::null )
      • 
+
    • virtual const TQNetworkOperation * put ( const TQByteArray & data, const TQString & location = TQString::null )
      • 
+
    • virtual TQPtrList<TQNetworkOperation> copy ( const TQString & from, const TQString & to, bool move = FALSE, bool toPath = TRUE )
      • 
+
    • virtual void copy ( const TQStringList & files, const TQString & dest, bool move = FALSE )
      • 
+
    • virtual bool isDir ( bool * ok = 0 )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setNameFilter ( const TQString & nameFilter )
      • 
+
    • TQString nameFilter () const
      • 
+
    • virtual TQUrlInfo info ( const TQString & entry ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual void stop ()
      • 
+
    
+
    Signals
    
+
      
+
    • void newChildren ( const TQValueList<TQUrlInfo> & i, TQNetworkOperation * op )
      • 
+
    • void finished ( TQNetworkOperation * op )
      • 
+
    • void start ( TQNetworkOperation * op )
      • 
+
    • void createdDirectory ( const TQUrlInfo & i, TQNetworkOperation * op )
      • 
+
    • void removed ( TQNetworkOperation * op )
      • 
+
    • void itemChanged ( TQNetworkOperation * op )
      • 
+
    • void data ( const TQByteArray & data, TQNetworkOperation * op )
      • 
+
    • void dataTransferProgress ( int bytesDone, int bytesTotal, TQNetworkOperation * op )
      • 
+
    • void startedNextCopy ( const TQPtrList<TQNetworkOperation> & lst )
      • 
+
    • void connectionStateChanged ( int state, const TQString & data )
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
     The TQUrlOperator class provides common operations on URLs.
+
+
     
+
+
+
     
+
     This class operates on hierarchical structures (such as
+filesystems) using URLs. Its API facilitates all the common
+operations:
+
    
+
     Operation	Function
+
     List files		listChildren()
+
     Make a directory	mkdir()
+
     Remove a file	remove()
+
     Rename a file	rename()
+
     Get a file		get()
+
     Put a file		put()
+
     Copy a file		copy()
+
    
+
     You can obtain additional information about the URL with isDir()
+and info(). If a directory is to be traversed using
+listChildren(), a name filter can be set with setNameFilter().
+
     A TQUrlOperator can be used like this, for example to download a
+file (and assuming that the FTP protocol is registered):
+
    +    TQUrlOperator *op = new TQUrlOperator();
+    op->copy( TQString("ftp://ftp.trolltech.com/qt/source/qt-2.1.0.tar.gz"),
+             "file:/tmp" );
+    
    
+ 
+
     If you want to be notified about success/failure, progress, etc.,
+you can connect to TQUrlOperator's signals, e.g. to start(),
+newChildren(), createdDirectory(), removed(), data(),
+dataTransferProgress(), startedNextCopy(),
+connectionStateChanged(), finished(), etc. A network operation can
+be stopped with stop().
+
     The class uses the functionality of registered network protocols
+to perform these operations. Depending of the protocol of the URL,
+it uses an appropriate network protocol class for the operations.
+Each of the operation functions of TQUrlOperator creates a
+TQNetworkOperation object that describes the operation and puts it
+into the operation queue for the network protocol used. If no
+suitable protocol could be found (because no implementation of the
+necessary network protocol is registered), the URL operator emits
+errors. Not every protocol supports every operation, but error
+handling deals with this problem.
+
     To register the available network protocols, use the
+qInitNetworkProtocols() function. The protocols currently
+supported are:
+
    
+
     For more information about the TQt Network Architecture see the
+TQt Network Documentation.
+
     
    See also TQNetworkProtocol, TQNetworkOperation, Input/Output and Networking, and Miscellaneous Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQUrlOperator::TQUrlOperator ()
+
    
+Constructs a TQUrlOperator with an empty (i.e. invalid) URL.
+
+
    TQUrlOperator::TQUrlOperator ( const TQString & url )
+
    
+Constructs a TQUrlOperator using url and parses this string.
+
     If you pass strings like "/home/qt" the "file" protocol is
+assumed.
+
+
    TQUrlOperator::TQUrlOperator ( const TQUrlOperator & url )
+
    
+Constructs a copy of url.
+
+
    TQUrlOperator::TQUrlOperator ( const TQUrlOperator & url, const TQString & relUrl, bool checkSlash = FALSE )
+
    
+Constructs a TQUrlOperator. The URL on which this TQUrlOperator
+operates is constructed out of the arguments url, relUrl and
+checkSlash: see the corresponding TQUrl constructor for an
+explanation of these arguments.
+
+
    TQUrlOperator::~TQUrlOperator () [virtual]
+
    
+Destructor.
+
+
    void TQUrlOperator::clearEntries () [virtual protected]
+
    
+Clears the cache of children.
+
+
    void TQUrlOperator::connectionStateChanged ( int state, const TQString & data ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever the URL operator's connection
+state changes. state describes the new state, which is a
+TQNetworkProtocol::ConnectionState value.
+
     data is a string that describes the change of the connection.
+This can be used to display a message to the user.
+
+
    TQPtrList<TQNetworkOperation> TQUrlOperator::copy ( const TQString & from, const TQString & to, bool move = FALSE, bool toPath = TRUE ) [virtual]
+
    
+Copies the file from to to. If move is TRUE, the file is
+moved (copied and removed). from must point to a file and to
+must point to a directory (into which from is copied) unless toPath is set to FALSE. If toPath is set to FALSE then the to variable is assumed to be the absolute file path (destination
+file path + file name). The copying is done using the get() and
+put() operations. If you want to be notified about the progress of
+the operation, connect to the dataTransferProgress() signal. Bear
+in mind that the get() and put() operations emit this signal
+through the TQUrlOperator. The number of transferred bytes and the
+total bytes that you receive as arguments in this signal do not
+relate to the the whole copy operation; they relate first to the
+get() and then to the put() operation. Always check what type of
+operation the signal comes from; this is given in the signal's
+last argument.
+
     At the end, finished() (with success or failure) is emitted, so
+check the state of the network operation object to see whether or
+not the operation was successful.
+
     Because a move or copy operation consists of multiple operations
+(get(), put() and maybe remove()), this function doesn't return a
+single TQNetworkOperation, but rather a list of them. They are in
+the order: get(), put() and (if applicable) remove().
+
     
    See also get() and put().
+
+
    void TQUrlOperator::copy ( const TQStringList & files, const TQString & dest, bool move = FALSE ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Copies the files to the directory dest. If move is TRUE
+the files are moved, not copied. dest must point to a
+directory.
+
     This function calls copy() for each entry in files in turn. You
+don't get a result from this function; each time a new copy
+begins, startedNextCopy() is emitted, with a list of
+TQNetworkOperations that describe the new copy operation.
+
+
    void TQUrlOperator::createdDirectory ( const TQUrlInfo & i, TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when mkdir() succeeds and the directory has
+been created. i holds the information about the new directory.
+
     op is a pointer to the operation object, which contains all the
+information about the operation, including the state.
+op->arg(0) holds the new directory's name.
+
     
    See also TQNetworkOperation and TQNetworkProtocol.
+
+
    void TQUrlOperator::data ( const TQByteArray & data, TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when new data has been received after calling
+get() or put().
+op is a pointer to the operation object which contains all
+the information about the operation, including the state.
+op->arg(0) holds the name of the file whose data is retrieved
+and op->rawArg(1) holds the (raw) data.
+
     
    See also TQNetworkOperation and TQNetworkProtocol.
+
+
    void TQUrlOperator::dataTransferProgress ( int bytesDone, int bytesTotal, TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted during data transfer (using put() or
+get()). bytesDone specifies how many bytes of bytesTotal have
+been transferred. More information about the operation is stored in
+op, a pointer to the network operation that is processed.
+bytesTotal may be -1, which means that the total number of bytes
+is not known.
+
     
    See also TQNetworkOperation and TQNetworkProtocol.
+
+
    void TQUrlOperator::deleteNetworkProtocol () [protected]
+
    
+Deletes the currently used network protocol.
+
+
    void TQUrlOperator::finished ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when an operation of some sort finishes,
+whether with success or failure. op is a pointer to the
+operation object, which contains all the information, including
+the state, of the operation which has been finished. Check the
+state and error code of the operation object to see whether or not
+the operation was successful.
+
     
    See also TQNetworkOperation and TQNetworkProtocol.
+
+
    const TQNetworkOperation * TQUrlOperator::get ( const TQString & location = TQString::null ) [virtual]
+
    
+Tells the network protocol to get data from location or, if
+this is TQString::null, to get data from the location to which this
+URL points (see TQUrl::fileName() and TQUrl::encodedPathAndQuery()).
+What happens then depends on the network protocol. The data()
+signal is emitted when data comes in. Because it's unlikely that
+all data will come in at once, it is common for multiple data()
+signals to be emitted. The dataTransferProgress() signal is
+emitted while processing the operation. At the end, finished()
+(with success or failure) is emitted, so check the state of the
+network operation object to see whether or not the operation was
+successful.
+
     If location is TQString::null, the path of this TQUrlOperator
+should point to a file when you use this operation. If location
+is not empty, it can be a relative URL (a child of the path to
+which the TQUrlOperator points) or an absolute URL.
+
     For example, to get a web page you might do something like this:
+
     
    +    TQUrlOperator op( "http://www.whatever.org/cgi-bin/search.pl?cmd=Hello" );
+    op.get();
+    
    
+ 
+
     For most other operations, the path of the TQUrlOperator must point
+to a directory. If you want to download a file you could do the
+following:
+
     
    +    TQUrlOperator op( "ftp://ftp.whatever.org/pub" );
+    // do some other stuff like op.listChildren() or op.mkdir( "new_dir" )
+    op.get( "a_file.txt" );
+    
    
+ 
+
     This will get the data of ftp://ftp.whatever.org/pub/a_file.txt.
+
     Never do anything like this:
+
    +    TQUrlOperator op( "http://www.whatever.org/cgi-bin" );
+    op.get( "search.pl?cmd=Hello" ); // WRONG!
+    
    
+ 
+
     If location is not empty and relative it must not contain any
+queries or references, just the name of a child. So if you need to
+specify a query or reference, do it as shown in the first example
+or specify the full URL (such as
+http://www.whatever.org/cgi-bin/search.pl?cmd=Hello) as location.
+
     
    See also copy().
+
+
    void TQUrlOperator::getNetworkProtocol () [protected]
+
    
+Finds a network protocol for the URL and deletes the old network protocol.
+
+
    TQUrlInfo TQUrlOperator::info ( const TQString & entry ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the URL information for the child entry, or returns an
+empty TQUrlInfo object if there is no information available about
+entry. Information about entry is only available after a successfully
+finished listChildren() operation.
+
+
    bool TQUrlOperator::isDir ( bool * ok = 0 ) [virtual]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the URL is a directory; otherwise returns FALSE.
+This may not always work correctly, if the protocol of the URL is
+something other than file (local filesystem). If you pass a bool
+pointer as the ok argument, *ok is set to TRUE if the result
+of this function is known to be correct, and to FALSE otherwise.
+
+
    void TQUrlOperator::itemChanged ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted whenever a file which is a child of the URL
+has been changed, for example by successfully calling rename().
+op is a pointer to the operation object which contains all the
+information about the operation, including the state.
+op->arg(0) holds the original file name and op->arg(1) holds
+the new file name (if it was changed).
+
     
    See also TQNetworkOperation and TQNetworkProtocol.
+
+
    const TQNetworkOperation * TQUrlOperator::listChildren () [virtual]
+
    
+Starts listing the children of this URL (e.g. the files in the
+directory). The start() signal is emitted before the first entry
+is listed and finished() is emitted after the last one. The
+newChildren() signal is emitted for each list of new entries. If
+an error occurs, the signal finished() is emitted, so be sure to
+check the state of the network operation pointer.
+
     Because the operation may not be executed immediately, a pointer
+to the TQNetworkOperation object created by this function is
+returned. This object contains all the data about the operation
+and is used to refer to this operation later (e.g. in the signals
+that are emitted by the TQUrlOperator). The return value can also
+be 0 if the operation object couldn't be created.
+
     The path of this TQUrlOperator must to point to a directory
+(because the children of this directory will be listed), not to a
+file.
+
+
    const TQNetworkOperation * TQUrlOperator::mkdir ( const TQString & dirname ) [virtual]
+
    
+Tries to create a directory (child) with the name dirname. If
+it is successful, a newChildren() signal with the new child is
+emitted, and the createdDirectory() signal with the information
+about the new child is also emitted. The finished() signal (with
+success or failure) is emitted after the operation has been
+processed, so check the state of the network operation object to
+see whether or not the operation was successful.
+
     Because the operation will not be executed immediately, a pointer
+to the TQNetworkOperation object created by this function is
+returned. This object contains all the data about the operation
+and is used to refer to this operation later (e.g. in the signals
+that are emitted by the TQUrlOperator). The return value can also
+be 0 if the operation object couldn't be created.
+
     The path of this TQUrlOperator must to point to a directory (not a
+file) because the new directory will be created in this path.
+
+
    TQString TQUrlOperator::nameFilter () const
+
    
+Returns the name filter of the URL.
+
     
    See also TQUrlOperator::setNameFilter() and TQDir::nameFilter().
+
+
    void TQUrlOperator::newChildren ( const TQValueList<TQUrlInfo> & i, TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted after listChildren() was called and new
+children (i.e. files) have been read from a list of files. i
+holds the information about the new files. op is a pointer
+to the operation object which contains all the information about
+the operation, including the state.
+
     
    See also TQNetworkOperation and TQNetworkProtocol.
+
+
    const TQNetworkOperation * TQUrlOperator::put ( const TQByteArray & data, const TQString & location = TQString::null ) [virtual]
+
    
+This function tells the network protocol to put data in location. If location is empty (TQString::null), it puts the data in the location to which the URL points. What happens depends
+on the network protocol. Depending on the network protocol, some
+data might come back after putting data, in which case the data()
+signal is emitted. The dataTransferProgress() signal is emitted
+during processing of the operation. At the end, finished() (with
+success or failure) is emitted, so check the state of the network
+operation object to see whether or not the operation was
+successful.
+
     If location is TQString::null, the path of this TQUrlOperator
+should point to a file when you use this operation. If location
+is not empty, it can be a relative (a child of the path to which
+the TQUrlOperator points) or an absolute URL.
+
     For putting some data to a file you can do the following:
+
     
    +    TQUrlOperator op( "ftp://ftp.whatever.com/home/me/filename.dat" );
+    op.put( data );
+    
    
+ 
+
     For most other operations, the path of the TQUrlOperator must point
+to a directory. If you want to upload data to a file you could do
+the following:
+
     
    +    TQUrlOperator op( "ftp://ftp.whatever.com/home/me" );
+    // do some other stuff like op.listChildren() or op.mkdir( "new_dir" )
+    op.put( data, "filename.dat" );
+    
    
+ 
+
     This will upload the data to ftp://ftp.whatever.com/home/me/filename.dat.
+
     
    See also copy().
+
+
    const TQNetworkOperation * TQUrlOperator::remove ( const TQString & filename ) [virtual]
+
    
+Tries to remove the file (child) filename. If it succeeds the
+removed() signal is emitted. finished() (with success or failure)
+is also emitted after the operation has been processed, so check
+the state of the network operation object to see whether or not
+the operation was successful.
+
     Because the operation will not be executed immediately, a pointer
+to the TQNetworkOperation object created by this function is
+returned. This object contains all the data about the operation
+and is used to refer to this operation later (e.g. in the signals
+that are emitted by the TQUrlOperator). The return value can also
+be 0 if the operation object couldn't be created.
+
     The path of this TQUrlOperator must point to a directory; because
+if filename is relative, it will try to remove it in this
+directory.
+
+
    void TQUrlOperator::removed ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when remove() has been succesful and the
+file has been removed.
+
     op is a pointer to the operation object which contains all the
+information about the operation, including the state.
+op->arg(0) holds the name of the file that was removed.
+
     
    See also TQNetworkOperation and TQNetworkProtocol.
+
+
    const TQNetworkOperation * TQUrlOperator::rename ( const TQString & oldname, const TQString & newname ) [virtual]
+
    
+Tries to rename the file (child) called oldname to newname.
+If it succeeds, the itemChanged() signal is emitted. finished()
+(with success or failure) is also emitted after the operation has
+been processed, so check the state of the network operation object
+to see whether or not the operation was successful.
+
     Because the operation may not be executed immediately, a pointer
+to the TQNetworkOperation object created by this function is
+returned. This object contains all the data about the operation
+and is used to refer to this operation later (e.g. in the signals
+that are emitted by the TQUrlOperator). The return value can also
+be 0 if the operation object couldn't be created.
+
     This path of this TQUrlOperator must to point to a directory
+because oldname and newname are handled relative to this
+directory.
+
+
    void TQUrlOperator::setNameFilter ( const TQString & nameFilter ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the name filter of the URL to nameFilter.
+
     
    See also TQDir::setNameFilter().
+
+
    void TQUrlOperator::start ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     Some operations (such as listChildren()) emit this signal when
+they start processing the operation. op is a pointer to the
+operation object which contains all the information about the
+operation, including the state.
+
     
    See also TQNetworkOperation and TQNetworkProtocol.
+
+
    void TQUrlOperator::startedNextCopy ( const TQPtrList<TQNetworkOperation> & lst ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted if copy() starts a new copy operation. lst contains all TQNetworkOperations related to this copy
+operation.
+
     
    See also copy().
+
+
    void TQUrlOperator::stop () [virtual]
+
    
+Stops the current network operation and removes all this
+TQUrlOperator's waiting network operations.
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    void qInitNetworkProtocols ()
+
    
+
+
     This function registers the network protocols for FTP and HTTP.
+You must call this function before you use TQUrlOperator for
+these protocols.
+
     This function is declared in ntqnetwork.h.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntquuid.html b/doc/html/ntquuid.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a5379dc0b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntquuid.html
@@ -0,0 +1,236 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQUuid Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQUuid Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQUuid class defines a Universally Unique Identifier (UUID).
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntquuid.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • enum Variant { VarUnknown = -1, NCS = 0, DCE = 2, Microsoft = 6, Reserved = 7 }
      • 
+
    • enum Version { VerUnknown = -1, Time = 1, EmbeddedPOSIX = 2, Name = 3, Random = 4 }
      • 
+
    • TQUuid ()
      • 
+
    • TQUuid ( uint l, ushort w1, ushort w2, uchar b1, uchar b2, uchar b3, uchar b4, uchar b5, uchar b6, uchar b7, uchar b8 )
      • 
+
    • TQUuid ( const TQUuid & orig )
      • 
+
    • TQUuid ( const TQString & text )
      • 
+
    • TQString toString () const
      • 
+
    • operator TQString () const
      • 
+
    • bool isNull () const
      • 
+
    • TQUuid & operator= ( const TQUuid & uuid )
      • 
+
    • bool operator== ( const TQUuid & other ) const
      • 
+
    • bool operator!= ( const TQUuid & other ) const
      • 
+
    • bool operator< ( const TQUuid & other ) const
      • 
+
    • bool operator> ( const TQUuid & other ) const
      • 
+
    • TQUuid::Variant variant () const
      • 
+
    • TQUuid::Version version () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
      
+
    • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQUuid & id )
      • 
+
    • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQUuid & id )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQUuid class defines a Universally Unique Identifier (UUID).
+
     
+
     For objects or declarations that must be uniquely identified,
+UUIDs (also known as GUIDs) are widely used in order to assign a
+fixed and easy to compare value to the object or declaration. The
+128-bit value of a UUID is generated by an algorithm that
+guarantees that the value is unique.
+
     In TQt, UUIDs are wrapped by the TQUuid struct which provides
+convenience functions for handling UUIDs. Most platforms provide a
+tool to generate new UUIDs, for example, uuidgen and guidgen.
+
     UUIDs generated by TQUuid, are based on the Random version of the
+DCE (Distributed Computing Environment) standard.
+
     UUIDs can be constructed from numeric values or from strings, or
+using the static createUuid() function. They can be converted to a
+string with toString(). UUIDs have a variant() and a version(),
+and null UUIDs return TRUE from isNull().
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQUuid::Variant
    
+
+
     This enum defines the variant of the UUID, which is the scheme
+which defines the layout of the 128-bits value.
+
      
+
    • TQUuid::VarUnknown - Variant is unknown
+
    • TQUuid::NCS - Reserved for NCS (Network Computing System) backward compatibility
+
    • TQUuid::DCE - Distributed Computing Environment, the scheme used by TQUuid
+
    • TQUuid::Microsoft - Reserved for Microsoft backward compatibility (GUID)
+
    • TQUuid::Reserved - Reserved for future definition
+
    
+
    TQUuid::Version
    
+
+
     This enum defines the version of the UUID.
+
      
+
    • TQUuid::VerUnknown - Version is unknown
+
    • TQUuid::Time - Time-based, by using timestamp, clock sequence, and
+MAC network card address (if available) for the node sections
+
    • TQUuid::EmbeddedPOSIX - DCE Security version, with embedded POSIX UUIDs
+
    • TQUuid::Name - Name-based, by using values from a name for all sections
+
    • TQUuid::Random - Random-based, by using random numbers for all sections
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQUuid::TQUuid ()
+
    
+
+
     Creates the null UUID {00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000}.
+
+
    TQUuid::TQUuid ( uint l, ushort w1, ushort w2, uchar b1, uchar b2, uchar b3, uchar b4, uchar b5, uchar b6, uchar b7, uchar b8 )
+
    
+
+
     Creates a UUID with the value specified by the parameters, l,
+w1, w2, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7, b8.
+
     Example:
+
    +    // {67C8770B-44F1-410A-AB9A-F9B5446F13EE}
+    TQUuid IID_MyInterface( 0x67c8770b, 0x44f1, 0x410a, 0xab, 0x9a, 0xf9, 0xb5, 0x44, 0x6f, 0x13, 0xee )
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    TQUuid::TQUuid ( const TQUuid & orig )
+
    
+
+
     Creates a copy of the TQUuid orig.
+
+
    TQUuid::TQUuid ( const TQString & text )
+
    
+Creates a TQUuid object from the string text. The function can
+only convert a string in the format
+{HHHHHHHH-HHHH-HHHH-HHHH-HHHHHHHHHHHH} (where 'H' stands for a hex
+digit). If the conversion fails a null UUID is created.
+
+
    TQUuid TQUuid::createUuid () [static]
+
    
+
+
     Returns a new UUID of DCE variant, and Random type. The
+UUIDs generated are based on the platform specific pseudo-random
+generator, which is usually not a cryptographic-quality random
+number generator. Therefore, a UUID is not guaranteed to be unique
+cross application instances.
+
     On Windows, the new UUID is extremely likely to be unique on the
+same or any other system, networked or not.
+
     
    See also variant() and version().
+
+
    bool TQUuid::isNull () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this is the null UUID
+{00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000}; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    TQUuid::operator TQString () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the string representation of the uuid.
+
     
    See also toString().
+
+
    bool TQUuid::operator!= ( const TQUuid & other ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if this TQUuid and the other TQUuid are different;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQUuid::operator< ( const TQUuid & other ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if this TQUuid is of the same variant,
+and lexicographically before the other TQUuid;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also variant().
+
+
    TQUuid & TQUuid::operator= ( const TQUuid & uuid )
+
    
+
+
     Assigns the value of uuid to this TQUuid object.
+
+
    bool TQUuid::operator== ( const TQUuid & other ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if this TQUuid and the other TQUuid are identical;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQUuid::operator> ( const TQUuid & other ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if this TQUuid is of the same variant,
+and lexicographically after the other TQUuid;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also variant().
+
+
    TQString TQUuid::toString () const
+
    
+TQString TQUuid::toString() const
+
     Returns the string representation of the uuid.
+
+
    TQUuid::Variant TQUuid::variant () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the variant of the UUID.
+The null UUID is considered to be of an unknown variant.
+
     
    See also version().
+
+
    TQUuid::Version TQUuid::version () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the version of the UUID, if the UUID is of the DCE
+variant; otherwise returns VerUnknown.
+
     
    See also variant().
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQUuid & id )
+
    
+
+Writes the uuid id to the datastream s.
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQUuid & id )
+
    
+
+Reads uuid from from the stream s into id.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqvalidator.html b/doc/html/ntqvalidator.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2e61dbd16
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqvalidator.html
@@ -0,0 +1,153 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQValidator Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQValidator Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQValidator class provides validation of input text.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqvalidator.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject.
+
    Inherited by TQIntValidator, TQDoubleValidator, and TQRegExpValidator.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQValidator ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • ~TQValidator ()
      • 
+
    • enum State { Invalid, Intermediate, Valid = Intermediate, Acceptable }
      • 
+
    • virtual State validate ( TQString & input, int & pos ) const = 0
      • 
+
    • virtual void fixup ( TQString & input ) const
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQValidator class provides validation of input text.
+
     
+
+
     The class itself is abstract. Two subclasses, TQIntValidator and
+TQDoubleValidator, provide basic numeric-range checking, and TQRegExpValidator provides general checking using a custom regular expression.
+
     If the built-in validators aren't sufficient, you can subclass
+TQValidator. The class has two virtual functions: validate() and
+fixup().
+
     validate() must be implemented by every subclass. It returns
+Invalid, Intermediate or Acceptable depending on whether
+its argument is valid (for the subclass's definition of valid).
+
     These three states require some explanation. An Invalid string
+is clearly invalid. Intermediate is less obvious: the
+concept of validity is slippery when the string is incomplete
+(still being edited). TQValidator defines Intermediate as the
+property of a string that is neither clearly invalid nor
+acceptable as a final result. Acceptable means that the string
+is acceptable as a final result. One might say that any string
+that is a plausible intermediate state during entry of an Acceptable string is Intermediate.
+
     Here are some examples:
+
     
      
+
       
    •  For a line edit that accepts integers from 0 to 999 inclusive,
+42 and 123 are Acceptable, the empty string and 1114 are Intermediate and asdf is Invalid.
+
       
    •  For an editable combobox that accepts URLs, any well-formed URL
+is Acceptable, "http://www.trolltech.com/," is Intermediate
+(it might be a cut and paste operation that accidentally took in a
+comma at the end), the empty string is Intermediate (the user
+might select and delete all of the text in preparation for entering
+a new URL), and "http:///./" is Invalid.
+
       
    •  For a spin box that accepts lengths, "11cm" and "1in" are Acceptable, "11" and the empty string are Intermediate and
+"http://www.trolltech.com" and "hour" are Invalid.
+
       
    
+
     fixup() is provided for validators that can repair some user
+errors. The default implementation does nothing. TQLineEdit, for
+example, will call fixup() if the user presses Enter (or Return)
+and the content is not currently valid. This allows the fixup()
+function the opportunity of performing some magic to make an Invalid string Acceptable.
+
     TQValidator is typically used with TQLineEdit, TQSpinBox and
+TQComboBox.
+
    See also Miscellaneous Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQValidator::State
    
+
+
     This enum type defines the states in which a validated string can
+exist.
+
      
+
    • TQValidator::Invalid - the string is clearly invalid.
+
    • TQValidator::Intermediate - the string is a plausible intermediate value
+during editing.
+
    • TQValidator::Acceptable - the string is acceptable as a final result,
+i.e. it is valid.
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQValidator::TQValidator ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Sets up the validator. The parent and name parameters are
+passed on to the TQObject constructor.
+
+
    TQValidator::~TQValidator ()
+
    
+Destroys the validator, freeing any storage and other resources
+used.
+
+
    void TQValidator::fixup ( TQString & input ) const [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     This function attempts to change input to be valid according to
+this validator's rules. It need not result in a valid string:
+callers of this function must re-test afterwards; the default does
+nothing.
+
     Reimplementations of this function can change input even if
+they do not produce a valid string. For example, an ISBN validator
+might want to delete every character except digits and "-", even
+if the result is still not a valid ISBN; a surname validator might
+want to remove whitespace from the start and end of the string,
+even if the resulting string is not in the list of accepted
+surnames.
+
+
    State TQValidator::validate ( TQString & input, int & pos ) const [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     This pure virtual function returns Invalid if input is
+invalid according to this validator's rules, Intermediate if it
+is likely that a little more editing will make the input
+acceptable (e.g. the user types '4' into a widget which accepts
+integers between 10 and 99) and Acceptable if the input is
+valid.
+
     The function can change input and pos (the cursor position)
+if it wants to.
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQIntValidator, TQDoubleValidator, and TQRegExpValidator.
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqvaluelist.html b/doc/html/ntqvaluelist.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b6ab42c61
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqvaluelist.html
@@ -0,0 +1,785 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQValueList Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQValueList Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQValueList class is a value-based template class that
+provides lists.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqvaluelist.h>
+
    Inherited by TQCanvasItemList, TQStringList, and TQValueStack.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
      
+
    • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQValueList<T> & l )
      • 
+
    • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQValueList<T> & l )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQValueList class is a value-based template class that
+provides lists.
+
     
+
+
+
+
+
     TQValueList is a TQt implementation of an STL-like list container.
+It can be used in your application if the standard list is not
+available for your target platform(s). TQValueList is part of the
+TQt Template Library.
+
     TQValueList<T> defines a template instance to create a list of
+values that all have the class T. Note that TQValueList does not
+store pointers to the members of the list; it holds a copy of
+every member. This is why these kinds of classes are called "value
+based"; TQPtrList and TQDict are "pointer based".
+
     TQValueList contains and manages a collection of objects of type T
+and provides iterators that allow the contained objects to be
+addressed. TQValueList owns the contained items. For more relaxed
+ownership semantics, see TQPtrCollection and friends which are
+pointer-based containers.
+
     Some classes cannot be used within a TQValueList, for example, all
+classes derived from TQObject and thus all classes that implement
+widgets. Only values can be used in a TQValueList. To qualify as a
+value the class must provide:
+
      
+
    •  a copy constructor;
+
    •  an assignment operator;
+
    •  a default constructor, i.e. a constructor that does not take any arguments.
+
    
+
     Note that C++ defaults to field-by-field assignment operators and
+copy constructors if no explicit version is supplied. In many
+cases this is sufficient.
+
     In addition, some compilers (e.g. Sun CC) might require that the
+class provides an equality operator (operator==()).
+
     TQValueList's function naming is consistent with the other TQt
+classes (e.g. count(), isEmpty()). TQValueList also provides extra
+functions for compatibility with STL algorithms, such as size()
+and empty(). Programmers already familiar with the STL list may
+prefer to use the STL-compatible functions.
+
     Example:
+
    +    class Employee
+    {
+    public:
+        Employee(): sn(0) {}
+        Employee( const TQString& forename, const TQString& surname, int salary )
+            : fn(forename), sn(surname), sal(salary)
+        {}
+
+        TQString forename() const { return fn; }
+        TQString surname() const { return sn; }
+        int salary() const { return sal; }
+        void setSalary( int salary ) { sal = salary; }
+
+    private:
+        TQString fn;
+        TQString sn;
+        int sal;
+    };
+
+    typedef TQValueList<Employee> EmployeeList;
+    EmployeeList list;
+
+    list.append( Employee("John", "Doe", 50000) );
+    list.append( Employee("Jane", "Williams", 80000) );
+    list.append( Employee("Tom", "Jones", 60000) );
+
+    Employee mary( "Mary", "Hawthorne", 90000 );
+    list.append( mary );
+    mary.setSalary( 100000 );
+
+    EmployeeList::iterator it;
+    for ( it = list.begin(); it != list.end(); ++it )
+        cout << (*it).surname().latin1() << ", " <<
+                (*it).forename().latin1() << " earns " <<
+                (*it).salary() << endl;
+
+    // Output:
+    // Doe, John earns 50000
+    // Williams, Jane earns 80000
+    // Hawthorne, Mary earns 90000
+    // Jones, Tom earns 60000
+    
    
+ 
+
     Notice that the latest changes to Mary's salary did not affect the
+value in the list because the list created a copy of Mary's entry.
+
     There are several ways to find items in the list. The begin() and
+end() functions return iterators to the beginning and end of the
+list. The advantage of getting an iterator is that you can move
+forward or backward from this position by
+incrementing/decrementing the iterator. The iterator returned by
+end() points to the item which is one past the last item in the
+container. The past-the-end iterator is still associated with the
+list it belongs to, however it is not dereferenceable;
+operator*() will not return a well-defined value. If the list is
+empty(), the iterator returned by begin() will equal the iterator
+returned by end().
+
     Another way to find an item in the list is by using the qFind() algorithm. For example:
+
     
    +    TQValueList<int> list;
+    ...
+    TQValueList<int>::iterator it = qFind( list.begin(), list.end(), 3 );
+    if ( it != list.end() )
+        // it points to the found item
+    
    
+ 
+
     It is safe to have multiple iterators a the list at the same
+time. If some member of the list is removed, only iterators
+pointing to the removed member become invalid. Inserting into the
+list does not invalidate any iterator. For convenience, the
+function last() returns a reference to the last item in the list,
+and first() returns a reference to the the first item. If the
+list is empty(), both last() and first() have undefined behavior
+(your application will crash or do unpredictable things). Use
+last() and first() with caution, for example:
+
     
    +    TQValueList<int> list;
+    list.append( 1 );
+    list.append( 2 );
+    list.append( 3 );
+    ...
+    if ( !list.empty() ) {
+        // OK, modify the first item
+        int& i = list.first();
+        i = 18;
+    }
+    ...
+    TQValueList<double> dlist;
+    double d = dlist.last(); // undefined
+    
    
+ 
+
     Because TQValueList is value-based there is no need to be careful
+about deleting items in the list. The list holds its own copies
+and will free them if the corresponding member or the list itself
+is deleted. You can force the list to free all of its items with
+clear().
+
     TQValueList is shared implicitly, which means it can be copied in
+constant time, i.e. O(1). If multiple TQValueList instances share
+the same data and one needs to modify its contents, this modifying
+instance makes a copy and modifies its private copy; therefore it
+does not affect the other instances; this takes O(n) time. This is
+often called "copy on write". If a TQValueList is being used in a
+multi-threaded program, you must protect all access to the list.
+See TQMutex.
+
     There are several ways to insert items into the list. The
+prepend() and append() functions insert items at the beginning and
+the end of the list respectively. The insert() function comes in
+several flavors and can be used to add one or more items at
+specific positions within the list.
+
     Items can also be removed from the list in several ways. There
+are several variants of the remove() function, which removes a
+specific item from the list. The remove() function will find and
+remove items according to a specific item value.
+
     Lists can also be sorted using the TQt Template
+    Library. For example with qHeapSort():
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQValueList<int> list;
+    list.append( 5 );
+    list.append( 8 );
+    list.append( 3 );
+    list.append( 4 );
+    qHeapSort( list );
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also TQValueListIterator, TQt Template Library Classes, Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQValueList::ConstIterator
    
+
+
     This iterator is an instantiation of TQValueListConstIterator for
+the same type as this TQValueList. In other words, if you
+instantiate TQValueList, ConstIterator is a
+TQValueListConstIterator. Several member function use it, such
+as TQValueList::begin(), which returns an iterator pointing to the
+first item in the list.
+
     Functionally, this is almost the same as Iterator. The only
+difference is you cannot use ConstIterator for non-const
+operations, and that the compiler can often generate better code
+if you use ConstIterator.
+
     
    See also TQValueListIterator and Iterator.
+
+
    TQValueList::Iterator
    
+
+
     This iterator is an instantiation of TQValueListIterator for the
+same type as this TQValueList. In other words, if you instantiate
+TQValueList, Iterator is a TQValueListIterator. Several
+member function use it, such as TQValueList::begin(), which returns
+an iterator pointing to the first item in the list.
+
     Functionally, this is almost the same as ConstIterator. The only
+difference is that you cannot use ConstIterator for non-const
+operations, and that the compiler can often generate better code
+if you use ConstIterator.
+
     
    See also TQValueListIterator and ConstIterator.
+
+
    TQValueList::const_iterator
     
+The list's const iterator type, TQValueListConstIterator. 
+
    TQValueList::const_pointer
     
+The const pointer to T type. 
+
    TQValueList::const_reference
     
+The const reference to T type. 
+
    TQValueList::iterator
     
+The list's iterator type, TQValueListIterator. 
+
    TQValueList::pointer
     
+The pointer to T type. 
+
    TQValueList::reference
     
+The reference to T type. 
+
    TQValueList::size_type
     
+An unsigned integral type, used to represent various sizes. 
+
    TQValueList::value_type
     
+The type of the object stored in the list, T. 
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQValueList::TQValueList ()
+
    
+
+
     Constructs an empty list.
+
+
    TQValueList::TQValueList ( const TQValueList<T> & l )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a copy of l.
+
     This operation takes O(1) time because TQValueList is implicitly shared.
+
     The first modification to a list will take O(n) time.
+
+
    TQValueList::TQValueList ( const std::list<T> & l )
+
    
+
+
     Contructs a copy of l.
+
     This constructor is provided for compatibility with STL
+containers.
+
+
    TQValueList::~TQValueList ()
+
    
+
+
     Destroys the list. References to the values in the list and all
+iterators of this list become invalidated. Note that it is
+impossible for an iterator to check whether or not it is valid:
+TQValueList is highly tuned for performance, not for error
+checking.
+
+
    iterator TQValueList::append ( const T & x )
+
    
+
+
     Inserts x at the end of the list.
+
     
    See also insert() and prepend().
+
+
    Examples: checklists/checklists.cpp and fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp.
+
    const_iterator TQValueList::at ( size_type i ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns an iterator pointing to the item at position i in the
+list, or an undefined value if the index is out of range.
+
     Warning: This function uses a linear search and can be extremely
+slow for large lists. TQValueList is not optimized for random item
+access. If you need random access use a different container, such
+as TQValueVector.
+
+
    iterator TQValueList::at ( size_type i )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns an iterator pointing to the item at position i in the
+list, or an undefined value if the index is out of range.
+
     
+
    reference TQValueList::back ()
+
    
+
+
     Returns a reference to the last item. If the list contains no last
+item (i.e. empty() returns TRUE), the return value is undefined.
+
     This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent
+to last().
+
     
    See also front().
+
+
    const_reference TQValueList::back () const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
    const_iterator TQValueList::begin () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns an iterator pointing to the first item in the list. This
+iterator equals end() if the list is empty.
+
     
    See also first(), end(), and constBegin().
+
+
    Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp, chart/canvasview.cpp, chart/element.cpp, checklists/checklists.cpp, sql/overview/insert/main.cpp, table/statistics/statistics.cpp, and themes/themes.cpp.
+
    iterator TQValueList::begin ()
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns an iterator pointing to the first item in the list. This
+iterator equals end() if the list is empty.
+
     
    See also first() and end().
+
+
    void TQValueList::clear ()
+
    
+
+
     Removes all items from the list.
+
     
    See also remove().
+
+
    const_iterator TQValueList::constBegin () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns an iterator pointing to the first item in the list. This
+iterator equals constEnd() if the list is empty.
+
     
    See also begin().
+
+
    const_iterator TQValueList::constEnd () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns an iterator pointing past the last item in the list.
+This iterator equals constBegin() if the list is empty.
+
     
    See also end().
+
+
    size_type TQValueList::contains ( const T & x ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of occurrences of the value x in the list.
+
+
    size_type TQValueList::count () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of items in the list.
+
     
    See also isEmpty().
+
+
    Examples: chart/element.cpp, fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp, and table/statistics/statistics.cpp.
+
    bool TQValueList::empty () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the list contains no items; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     
    See also size().
+
+
    iterator TQValueList::end ()
+
    
+
+
     Returns an iterator pointing past the last item in the list.
+This iterator equals begin() if the list is empty.
+
     
    See also last(), begin(), and constEnd().
+
+
    Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp, chart/canvasview.cpp, chart/element.cpp, checklists/checklists.cpp, sql/overview/insert/main.cpp, table/statistics/statistics.cpp, and themes/themes.cpp.
+
    const_iterator TQValueList::end () const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns an iterator pointing past the last item in the list.
+This iterator equals begin() if the list is empty.
+
     
    See also last() and begin().
+
+
    iterator TQValueList::erase ( iterator it )
+
    
+
+
     Removes the item pointed to by it from the list. No iterators
+other than it or other iterators pointing at the same item as
+it are invalidated. Returns an iterator to the next item after
+it, or end() if there is no such item.
+
     This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent
+to remove().
+
+
    iterator TQValueList::erase ( iterator first, iterator last )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Deletes all items from first to last (not including last). No iterators are invalidated, except those pointing to the
+removed items themselves. Returns last.
+
+
    iterator TQValueList::find ( const T & x )
+
    
+
+
     Returns an iterator pointing to the first occurrence of x in
+the list.
+
     Returns end() is no item matched.
+
+
    const_iterator TQValueList::find ( const T & x ) const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns an iterator pointing to the first occurrence of x in
+the list.
+
     Returns end() if no item matched.
+
+
    iterator TQValueList::find ( iterator it, const T & x )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Finds the first occurrence of x in the list starting at the
+position given by it.
+
     Returns end() if no item matched.
+
+
    const_iterator TQValueList::find ( const_iterator it, const T & x ) const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Finds the first occurrence of x in the list starting at the
+position given by it.
+
     Returns end() if no item matched.
+
+
    int TQValueList::findIndex ( const T & x ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the index of the first occurrence of the value x.
+Returns -1 if no item matched.
+
+
    T & TQValueList::first ()
+
    
+
+
     Returns a reference to the first item. If the list contains no
+first item (i.e. isEmpty() returns TRUE), the return value is
+undefined.
+
     
    See also last().
+
+
    Example: network/mail/smtp.cpp.
+
    const T & TQValueList::first () const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
    const_iterator TQValueList::fromLast () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns an iterator to the last item in the list, or end() if
+there is no last item.
+
     Use the end() function instead. For example:
+
     
    +    TQValueList<int> l;
+    ...
+    TQValueList<int>::iterator it = l.end();
+    --it;
+    if ( it != end() )
+        // ...
+    
    
+ 
+
     
+
    iterator TQValueList::fromLast ()
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns an iterator to the last item in the list, or end() if
+there is no last item.
+
     Use the end() function instead. For example:
+
     
    +    TQValueList<int> l;
+    ...
+    TQValueList<int>::iterator it = l.end();
+    --it;
+    if ( it != end() )
+        // ...
+    
    
+ 
+
     
+
    reference TQValueList::front ()
+
    
+
+
     Returns a reference to the first item. If the list contains no
+first item (i.e. empty() returns TRUE), the return value is
+undefined.
+
     This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent
+to first().
+
     
    See also back().
+
+
    const_reference TQValueList::front () const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
    iterator TQValueList::insert ( iterator it, const T & x )
+
    
+
+
     Inserts the value x in front of the item pointed to by the
+iterator, it.
+
     Returns an iterator pointing at the inserted item.
+
     
    See also append() and prepend().
+
+
    Example: themes/themes.cpp.
+
    void TQValueList::insert ( iterator pos, size_type n, const T & x )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts n copies of x before position pos.
+
+
    bool TQValueList::isEmpty () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the list contains no items; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     
    See also count().
+
+
    Examples: fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp and network/mail/smtp.cpp.
+
    T & TQValueList::last ()
+
    
+
+
     Returns a reference to the last item. If the list contains no last
+item (i.e. empty() returns TRUE), the return value is undefined.
+
+
    const T & TQValueList::last () const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
    bool TQValueList::operator!= ( const TQValueList<T> & l ) const
+
    
+
+
     Compares both lists.
+
     Returns TRUE if this list and l are unequal; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
+
    TQValueList<T> TQValueList::operator+ ( const TQValueList<T> & l ) const
+
    
+
+
     Creates a new list and fills it with the items of this list. Then
+the items of l are appended. Returns the new list.
+
+
    TQValueList<T> & TQValueList::operator+= ( const TQValueList<T> & l )
+
    
+
+
     Appends the items of l to this list. Returns a reference to
+this list.
+
+
    TQValueList<T> & TQValueList::operator+= ( const T & x )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Appends the value x to the list. Returns a reference to the
+list.
+
+
    TQValueList<T> & TQValueList::operator<< ( const T & x )
+
    
+
+
     Adds the value x to the end of the list.
+
     Returns a reference to the list.
+
+
    TQValueList<T> & TQValueList::operator= ( const TQValueList<T> & l )
+
    
+
+
     Assigns l to this list and returns a reference to this list.
+
     All iterators of the current list become invalidated by this
+operation. The cost of such an assignment is O(1) since TQValueList
+is implicitly shared.
+
+
    TQValueList<T> & TQValueList::operator= ( const std::list<T> & l )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Assigns the contents of l to the list.
+
     All iterators of the current list become invalidated by this
+operation.
+
+
    bool TQValueList::operator== ( const TQValueList<T> & l ) const
+
    
+
+
     Compares both lists.
+
     Returns TRUE if this list and l are equal; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQValueList::operator== ( const std::list<T> & l ) const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns TRUE if this list and l are equal; otherwise returns
+FALSE.
+
     This operator is provided for compatibility with STL containers.
+
+
    const T & TQValueList::operator[] ( size_type i ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a const reference to the item with index i in the list.
+It is up to you to check whether this item really exists. You can
+do that easily with the count() function. However this operator
+does not check whether i is in range and will deliver undefined
+results if it does not exist.
+
     Warning: This function uses a linear search and can be extremely
+slow for large lists. TQValueList is not optimized for random item
+access. If you need random access use a different container, such
+as TQValueVector.
+
+
    T & TQValueList::operator[] ( size_type i )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns a non-const reference to the item with index i.
+
+
    void TQValueList::pop_back ()
+
    
+
+
     Removes the last item. If there is no last item, this operation is
+undefined.
+
     This function is provided for STL compatibility.
+
+
    void TQValueList::pop_front ()
+
    
+
+
     Removes the first item. If there is no first item, this operation
+is undefined.
+
     This function is provided for STL compatibility.
+
+
    iterator TQValueList::prepend ( const T & x )
+
    
+
+
     Inserts x at the beginning of the list.
+
     
    See also insert() and append().
+
+
    void TQValueList::push_back ( const T & x )
+
    
+
+
     Inserts x at the end of the list.
+
     This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent
+to append().
+
+
    void TQValueList::push_front ( const T & x )
+
    
+
+
     Inserts x at the beginning of the list.
+
     This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent
+to prepend().
+
+
    Example: toplevel/options.ui.h.
+
    iterator TQValueList::remove ( iterator it )
+
    
+
+
     Removes the item pointed to by it from the list. No iterators
+other than it or other iterators pointing at the same item as
+it are invalidated. Returns an iterator to the next item after
+it, or end() if there is no such item.
+
     
    See also clear().
+
+
    uint TQValueList::remove ( const T & x )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Removes all items that have value x and returns the number of
+removed items.
+
+
    size_type TQValueList::size () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of items in the list.
+
     This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent
+to count().
+
     
    See also empty().
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQValueList<T> & l )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
     Writes a list, l, to the stream s. The type T stored in the
+list must implement the streaming operator.
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQValueList<T> & l )
+
    
+
+
     
+
     Reads a list, l, from the stream s. The type T stored in the
+list must implement the streaming operator.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqvaluestack.html b/doc/html/ntqvaluestack.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..23d35a10e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqvaluestack.html
@@ -0,0 +1,158 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQValueStack Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQValueStack Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQValueStack class is a value-based template class that provides a stack.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqvaluestack.h>
+
    Inherits TQValueList<T>.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQValueStack class is a value-based template class that provides a stack.
+
     
+
+
+
+
+
     Define a template instance TQValueStack<X> to create a stack of
+values that all have the class X. TQValueStack is part of the TQt Template Library.
+
     Note that TQValueStack does not store pointers to the members of
+the stack; it holds a copy of every member. That is why these
+kinds of classes are called "value based"; TQPtrStack, TQPtrList,
+TQDict, etc., are "pointer based".
+
     A stack is a last in, first out (LIFO) structure. Items are added
+to the top of the stack with push() and retrieved from the top
+with pop(). The top() function provides access to the topmost item
+without removing it.
+
     Example:
+
    +        TQValueStack<int> stack;
+        stack.push( 1 );
+        stack.push( 2 );
+        stack.push( 3 );
+        while ( ! stack.isEmpty() )
+            cout << "Item: " << stack.pop() << endl;
+
+        // Output:
+        //      Item: 3
+        //      Item: 2
+        //      Item: 1
+    
    
+ 
+
     TQValueStack is a specialized TQValueList provided for convenience.
+All of TQValueList's functionality also applies to TQPtrStack, for
+example the facility to iterate over all elements using
+TQValueStack::Iterator. See TQValueListIterator for further
+details.
+
     Some classes cannot be used within a TQValueStack, for example
+everything derived from TQObject and thus all classes that
+implement widgets. Only values can be used in a TQValueStack. To
+qualify as a value, the class must provide
+
      
+
    •  a copy constructor;
+
    •  an assignment operator;
+
    •  a default constructor, i.e. a constructor that does not take any arguments.
+
    
+
     Note that C++ defaults to field-by-field assignment operators and
+copy constructors if no explicit version is supplied. In many
+cases this is sufficient.
+
    See also TQt Template Library Classes, Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQValueStack::TQValueStack ()
+
    
+
+
     Constructs an empty stack.
+
+
    TQValueStack::~TQValueStack ()
+
    
+
+
     Destroys the stack. References to the values in the stack and all
+iterators of this stack become invalidated. Because TQValueStack is
+highly tuned for performance, you won't see warnings if you use
+invalid iterators because it is impossible for an iterator to
+check whether or not it is valid.
+
+
    T TQValueStack::pop ()
+
    
+
+
     Removes the top item from the stack and returns it.
+
     
    See also top() and push().
+
+
    void TQValueStack::push ( const T & d )
+
    
+
+
     Adds element, d, to the top of the stack. Last in, first out.
+
     This function is equivalent to append().
+
     
    See also pop() and top().
+
+
    T & TQValueStack::top ()
+
    
+
+
     Returns a reference to the top item of the stack or the item
+referenced by end() if no such item exists. Note that you must not
+change the value the end() iterator points to.
+
     This function is equivalent to last().
+
     
    See also pop(), push(), and TQValueList::fromLast().
+
+
    const T & TQValueStack::top () const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns a reference to the top item of the stack or the item
+referenced by end() if no such item exists.
+
     This function is equivalent to last().
+
     
    See also pop(), push(), and TQValueList::fromLast().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqvaluevector.html b/doc/html/ntqvaluevector.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cb7235979
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqvaluevector.html
@@ -0,0 +1,666 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQValueVector Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQValueVector Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQValueVector class is a value-based template class that provides a dynamic array.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqvaluevector.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQValueVector class is a value-based template class that provides a dynamic array.
+
     
+
+
+
+
+
     TQValueVector is a TQt implementation of an STL-like vector
+container. It can be used in your application if the standard vector is not available for your target platforms. TQValueVector is
+part of the TQt Template Library.
+
     TQValueVector<T> defines a template instance to create a vector
+of values that all have the class T. TQValueVector does not store
+pointers to the members of the vector; it holds a copy of every
+member. TQValueVector is said to be value based; in contrast,
+TQPtrList and TQDict are pointer based.
+
     TQValueVector contains and manages a collection of objects of type
+T and provides random access iterators that allow the contained
+objects to be addressed. TQValueVector owns the contained
+elements. For more relaxed ownership semantics, see TQPtrCollection
+and friends, which are pointer-based containers.
+
     TQValueVector provides good performance if you append or remove
+elements from the end of the vector. If you insert or remove
+elements from anywhere but the end, performance is very bad. The
+reason for this is that elements must to be copied into new
+positions.
+
     Some classes cannot be used within a TQValueVector: for example,
+all classes derived from TQObject and thus all classes that
+implement widgets. Only values can be used in a TQValueVector. To
+qualify as a value the class must provide:
+
      
+
    •  a copy constructor;
+
    •  an assignment operator;
+
    •  a default constructor, i.e., a constructor that does not take any arguments.
+
    
+
     Note that C++ defaults to field-by-field assignment operators and
+copy constructors if no explicit version is supplied. In many
+cases this is sufficient.
+
     TQValueVector uses an STL-like syntax to manipulate and address the
+objects it contains. See this document for
+more information.
+
     Example:
+
    +    #include <ntqvaluevector.h>
+    #include <ntqstring.h>
+    #include <stdio.h>
+
+    class Employee
+    {
+    public:
+        Employee(): s(0) {}
+        Employee( const TQString& name, int salary )
+            : n( name ), s( salary )
+        { }
+
+        TQString name()   const          { return n; }
+        int     salary() const          { return s; }
+        void    setSalary( int salary ) { s = salary; }
+    private:
+        TQString n;
+        int     s;
+    };
+
+    int main()
+    {
+        typedef TQValueVector<Employee> EmployeeVector;
+        EmployeeVector vec( 3 );  // vector of 3 Employees
+
+        vec[0] = Employee( "Bill", 50000 );
+        vec[1] = Employee( "Steve", 80000 );
+        vec[2] = Employee( "Ron", 60000 );
+
+        Employee joe( "Joe", 50000 );
+        vec.push_back( joe );  // vector expands to accommodate 4 Employees
+        joe.setSalary( 70000 );
+        
+        EmployeeVector::iterator it;
+        for( it = vec.begin(); it != vec.end(); ++it )
+            printf( "%s earns %d\n", (*it).name().latin1(), (*it).salary() );
+
+        return 0;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     Program output:
+
    +        Bill earns 50000
+        Steve earns 80000
+        Ron earns 60000
+        Joe earns 50000
+    
    
+ 
+
     As you can see, the most recent change to Joe's salary did not
+affect the value in the vector because the vector created a copy
+of Joe's entry.
+
     Many TQt functions return const value vectors; to iterate over
+these you should make a copy and iterate over the copy.
+
     There are several ways to find items in the vector. The begin()
+and end() functions return iterators to the beginning and end of
+the vector. The advantage of getting an iterator is that you can
+move forward or backward from this position by
+incrementing/decrementing the iterator. The iterator returned by
+end() points to the element which is one past the last element in
+the container. The past-the-end iterator is still associated with
+the vector it belongs to, however it is not dereferenceable;
+operator*() will not return a well-defined value. If the vector is
+empty(), the iterator returned by begin() will equal the iterator
+returned by end().
+
     The fastest way to access an element of a vector is by using
+operator[]. This function provides random access and will return
+a reference to the element located at the specified index. Thus,
+you can access every element directly, in constant time, providing
+you know the location of the element. It is undefined to access
+an element that does not exist (your application will probably
+crash). For example:
+
     
    +    TQValueVector<int> vec1;  // an empty vector
+    vec1[10] = 4;  // WARNING: undefined, probably a crash
+
+    TQValueVector<TQString> vec2(25); // initialize with 25 elements
+    vec2[10] = "Dave";  // OK
+    
    
+ 
+
     Whenever inserting, removing or referencing elements in a vector,
+always make sure you are referring to valid positions. For
+example:
+
     
    +    void func( TQValueVector<int>& vec )
+    {
+        if ( vec.size() > 10 ) {
+            vec[9] = 99; // OK
+        }
+    };
+    
    
+ 
+
     The iterators provided by vector are random access iterators,
+therefore you can use them with many generic algorithms, for
+example, algorithms provided by the STL or the TQTL. 
+
     Another way to find an element in the vector is by using the
+std::find() or qFind() algorithms.
+For example:
+
     
    +    TQValueVector<int> vec;
+    ...
+    TQValueVector<int>::const_iterator it = qFind( vec.begin(), vec.end(), 3 );
+    if ( it != vector.end() )
+        // 'it' points to the found element
+    
    
+ 
+
     It is safe to have multiple iterators on the vector at the same
+time. Since TQValueVector manages memory dynamically, all iterators
+can become invalid if a memory reallocation occurs. For example,
+if some member of the vector is removed, iterators that point to
+the removed element and to all following elements become
+invalidated. Inserting into the middle of the vector will
+invalidate all iterators. For convenience, the function back()
+returns a reference to the last element in the vector, and front()
+returns a reference to the first element. If the vector is
+empty(), both back() and front() have undefined behavior (your
+application will crash or do unpredictable things). Use back() and
+front() with caution, for example:
+
     
    +    TQValueVector<int> vec( 3 );
+    vec.push_back( 1 );
+    vec.push_back( 2 );
+    vec.push_back( 3 );
+    ...
+    if ( !vec.empty() ) {
+        // OK: modify the first element
+        int& i = vec.front();
+        i = 18;
+    }
+    ...
+    TQValueVector<double> dvec;
+    double d = dvec.back(); // undefined behavior
+    
    
+ 
+
     Because TQValueVector manages memory dynamically, it is recommended
+that you contruct a vector with an initial size. Inserting and
+removing elements happens fastest when:
+
      
+
    •  Inserting or removing elements happens at the end() of the
+vector;
+
    •  The vector does not need to allocate additional memory.
+
    
+
     By creating a TQValueVector with a sufficiently large initial size,
+there will be less memory allocations. Do not use an initial size
+that is too big, since it will still take time to construct all
+the empty entries, and the extra space will be wasted if it is
+never used.
+
     Because TQValueVector is value-based there is no need to be careful
+about deleting elements in the vector. The vector holds its own
+copies and will free them if the corresponding member or the
+vector itself is deleted. You can force the vector to free all of
+its items with clear().
+
     TQValueVector is shared implicitly, which means it can be copied in
+constant time. If multiple TQValueVector instances share the same
+data and one needs to modify its contents, this modifying instance
+makes a copy and modifies its private copy; it thus does not
+affect the other instances. This is often called "copy on write".
+If a TQValueVector is being used in a multi-threaded program, you
+must protect all access to the vector. See TQMutex.
+
     There are several ways to insert elements into the vector. The
+push_back() function insert elements into the end of the vector,
+and is usually fastest. The insert() function can be used to add
+elements at specific positions within the vector.
+
     Items can be also be removed from the vector in several ways.
+There are several variants of the erase() function which removes a
+specific element, or range of elements, from the vector.
+
     Vectors can be also sorted with various STL algorithms , or it can
+be sorted using the TQt Template Library.
+For example with qHeapSort():
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQValueVector<int> v( 4 );
+    v.push_back( 5 );
+    v.push_back( 8 );
+    v.push_back( 3 );
+    v.push_back( 4 );
+    qHeapSort( v );
+    
    
+ 
+
     TQValueVector stores its elements in contiguous memory. This means
+that you can use a TQValueVector in any situation that requires an
+array. 
+
    See also TQt Template Library Classes, Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQValueVector::ConstIterator
     
+The vector's const iterator type. 
+
    TQValueVector::Iterator
     
+The vector's iterator type. 
+
    TQValueVector::ValueType
     
+The type of the object stored in the vector. 
+
    TQValueVector::const_iterator
     
+The vector's const iterator type. 
+
    TQValueVector::const_pointer
     
+The const pointer to T type. 
+
    TQValueVector::const_reference
     
+The const reference to T type. 
+
    TQValueVector::difference_type
     
+A signed integral type used to represent the distance between two iterators. 
+
    TQValueVector::iterator
     
+The vector's iterator type. 
+
    TQValueVector::pointer
     
+The pointer to T type. 
+
    TQValueVector::reference
     
+The reference to T type. 
+
    TQValueVector::size_type
     
+An unsigned integral type, used to represent various sizes. 
+
    TQValueVector::value_type
     
+The type of the object stored in the vector. 
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQValueVector::TQValueVector ()
+
    
+
+
     Constructs an empty vector without any elements. To create a
+vector which reserves an initial amount of space for elements, use
+TQValueVector(size_type n). 
+
+
    TQValueVector::TQValueVector ( const TQValueVector<T> & v )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a copy of v.
+
     This operation costs O(1) time because TQValueVector is implicitly shared.
+
     The first modification to the vector does takes O(n) time, because
+the elements must be copied.
+
+
    TQValueVector::TQValueVector ( size_type n, const T & val = T ( ) )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a vector with an initial size of n elements. Each
+element is initialized with the value of val.
+
+
    TQValueVector::TQValueVector ( std::vector<T> & v )
+
    
+
+
     Constructs a copy of v.
+
+
    TQValueVector::TQValueVector ( const std::vector<T> & v )
+
    
+
+
     This operation costs O(n) time because v is copied.
+
+
    TQValueVector::~TQValueVector ()
+
    
+
+
     Destroys the vector, destroying all elements and freeing the
+allocated memory. References to the values in the vector and all
+iterators of this vector become invalidated. Note that it is
+impossible for an iterator to check whether or not it is valid:
+TQValueVector is tuned for performance, not for error checking.
+
+
    void TQValueVector::append ( const T & x )
+
    
+
+
     Appends a copy of x to the end of the vector.
+
     
    See also push_back() and insert().
+
+
    reference TQValueVector::at ( size_type i, bool * ok = 0 )
+
    
+
+
     Returns a reference to the element with index i. If ok is
+non-null, and the index i is out of range, *ok is set to
+FALSE and the returned reference is undefined. If the index i
+is within the range of the vector, and ok is non-null, *ok
+is set to TRUE and the returned reference is well defined.
+
+
    const_reference TQValueVector::at ( size_type i, bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns a const reference to the element with index i. If ok
+is non-null, and the index i is out of range, *ok is set to
+FALSE and the returned reference is undefined. If the index i
+is within the range of the vector, and ok is non-null, *ok
+is set to TRUE and the returned reference is well defined.
+
+
    reference TQValueVector::back ()
+
    
+
+
     Returns a reference to the last element in the vector. If there is
+no last element, this function has undefined behavior. 
+
     
    See also empty() and front().
+
+
    const_reference TQValueVector::back () const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns a const reference to the last element in the vector. If
+there is no last element, this function has undefined behavior. 
+
     
    See also empty() and front().
+
+
    iterator TQValueVector::begin ()
+
    
+
+
     Returns an iterator pointing to the beginning of the vector. If
+the vector is empty(), the returned iterator will equal end().
+
+
    const_iterator TQValueVector::begin () const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns a const iterator pointing to the beginning of the vector.
+If the vector is empty(), the returned iterator will equal end().
+
+
    size_type TQValueVector::capacity () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the maximum number of elements that can be stored in the
+vector without forcing memory reallocation. If memory reallocation
+takes place, some or all iterators may become invalidated.
+
+
    void TQValueVector::clear ()
+
    
+
+
     Removes all the elements from the vector.
+
+
    const_iterator TQValueVector::constBegin () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a const iterator pointing to the beginning of the vector.
+If the vector is empty(), the returned iterator will equal end().
+
     
    See also constEnd().
+
+
    const_iterator TQValueVector::constEnd () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns a const iterator pointing behind the last element of the
+vector.
+
     
    See also constBegin().
+
+
    size_type TQValueVector::count () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of items in the vector.
+
     
    See also isEmpty().
+
+
    bool TQValueVector::empty () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the vector is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Equivalent to size()==0, only faster.
+
     This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent
+to isEmpty().
+
     
    See also size().
+
+
    iterator TQValueVector::end ()
+
    
+
+
     Returns an iterator pointing behind the last element of the
+vector.
+
+
    const_iterator TQValueVector::end () const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns a const iterator pointing behind the last element of the
+vector.
+
+
    iterator TQValueVector::erase ( iterator pos )
+
    
+
+
     Removes the element at position pos and returns the position of
+the next element.
+
+
    iterator TQValueVector::erase ( iterator first, iterator last )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Removes all elements from first up to but not including last
+and returns the position of the next element.
+
+
    reference TQValueVector::first ()
+
    
+
+
     Returns a reference to the first item in the vector. If there is
+no first item, this function has undefined behavior.
+
     
    See also empty() and last().
+
+
    const_reference TQValueVector::first () const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
    reference TQValueVector::front ()
+
    
+
+
     Returns a reference to the first element in the vector. If there
+is no first element, this function has undefined behavior. 
+
     
    See also empty() and back().
+
+
    const_reference TQValueVector::front () const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns a const reference to the first element in the vector. If
+there is no first element, this function has undefined behavior. 
+
     
    See also empty() and back().
+
+
    iterator TQValueVector::insert ( iterator pos, const T & x )
+
    
+
+
     Inserts a copy of x at the position immediately before pos.
+
     
    See also push_back().
+
+
    iterator TQValueVector::insert ( iterator pos, size_type n, const T & x )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Inserts n copies of x immediately before position x.
+
     
    See also push_back().
+
+
    bool TQValueVector::isEmpty () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the vector is empty; returns FALSE otherwise.
+
     
    See also count().
+
+
    reference TQValueVector::last ()
+
    
+
+
     Returns a reference to the last item in the vector. If there is no
+last item, this function has undefined behavior.
+
     
    See also empty() and first().
+
+
    const_reference TQValueVector::last () const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
    TQValueVector<T> & TQValueVector::operator= ( const TQValueVector<T> & v )
+
    
+
+
     Assigns v to this vector and returns a reference to this vector.
+
     All iterators of the current vector become invalidated by this
+operation. The cost of such an assignment is O(1) since
+TQValueVector is implicitly shared.
+
+
    TQValueVector<T> & TQValueVector::operator= ( const std::vector<T> & v )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Assigns v to this vector and returns a reference to this vector.
+
     All iterators of the current vector become invalidated by this
+operation. The cost of this assignment is O(n) since v is
+copied.
+
+
    bool TQValueVector::operator== ( const TQValueVector<T> & x ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if each element in this vector equals each
+corresponding element in x; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    bool TQValueVector::operator== ( const TQValueVector<T> & x )
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns TRUE if each element in this vector equals each
+corresponding element in x; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    reference TQValueVector::operator[] ( size_type i )
+
    
+
+
     Returns a reference to the element at index i. If i is out
+of range, this function has undefined behavior.
+
     
    See also at().
+
+
    const_reference TQValueVector::operator[] ( size_type i ) const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns a const reference to the element at index i. If i is
+out of range, this function has undefined behavior.
+
     
    See also at().
+
+
    void TQValueVector::pop_back ()
+
    
+
+
     Removes the last item from the vector.
+
     This function is provided for STL compatibility.
+
+
    void TQValueVector::push_back ( const T & x )
+
    
+
+
     Appends a copy of x to the end of the vector. This is the
+fastest way to add new elements.
+
     This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent
+to append().
+
     
    See also insert().
+
+
    void TQValueVector::reserve ( size_type n )
+
    
+
+
     Increases the vector's capacity. If n is less than or equal to
+capacity(), nothing happens. Otherwise, additional memory is
+allocated so that capacity() will be increased to a value greater
+than or equal to n. All iterators will then become invalidated.
+Note that the vector's size() and the values of existing elements
+remain unchanged.
+
+
    void TQValueVector::resize ( size_type n, const T & val = T ( ) )
+
    
+
+
     Changes the size of the vector to n. If n is greater than
+the current size(), elements are added to the end and initialized
+with the value of val. If n is less than size(), elements
+are removed from the end. If n is equal to size() nothing
+happens.
+
+
    size_type TQValueVector::size () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the number of elements in the vector.
+
     This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent
+to count().
+
     
    See also empty().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqvariant.html b/doc/html/ntqvariant.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8f517bf7f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqvariant.html
@@ -0,0 +1,1149 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQVariant Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQVariant Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQVariant class acts like a union for the most common TQt data types.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqvariant.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQVariant class acts like a union for the most common TQt data types.
+
     
+
+
+
     Because C++ forbids unions from including types that have
+non-default constructors or destructors, most interesting TQt
+classes cannot be used in unions. Without TQVariant, this would be
+a problem for TQObject::property() and for database work, etc.
+
     A TQVariant object holds a single value of a single type() at a
+time. (Some type()s are multi-valued, for example a string list.)
+You can find out what type, T, the variant holds, convert it to a
+different type using one of the asT() functions, e.g. asSize(),
+get its value using one of the toT() functions, e.g. toSize(), and
+check whether the type can be converted to a particular type using
+canCast().
+
     The methods named toT() (for any supported T, see the Type
+documentation for a list) are const. If you ask for the stored
+type, they return a copy of the stored object. If you ask for a
+type that can be generated from the stored type, toT() copies and
+converts and leaves the object itself unchanged. If you ask for a
+type that cannot be generated from the stored type, the result
+depends on the type (see the function documentation for details).
+
     Note that three data types supported by TQVariant are explicitly shared, namely TQImage, TQPointArray, and TQCString, and in these
+cases the toT() methods return a shallow copy. In almost all cases
+you must make a deep copy of the returned values before modifying
+them.
+
     The asT() functions are not const. They do conversion like the
+toT() methods, set the variant to hold the converted value, and
+return a reference to the new contents of the variant.
+
     Here is some example code to demonstrate the use of TQVariant:
+
     
    +    TQDataStream out(...);
+    TQVariant v(123);          // The variant now contains an int
+    int x = v.toInt();        // x = 123
+    out << v;                 // Writes a type tag and an int to out
+    v = TQVariant("hello");    // The variant now contains a TQCString
+    v = TQVariant(tr("hello"));// The variant now contains a TQString
+    int y = v.toInt();        // y = 0 since v cannot be converted to an int
+    TQString s = v.toString(); // s = tr("hello")  (see TQObject::tr())
+    out << v;                 // Writes a type tag and a TQString to out
+    ...
+    TQDataStream in(...);      // (opening the previously written stream)
+    in >> v;                  // Reads an Int variant
+    int z = v.toInt();        // z = 123
+    qDebug("Type is %s",      // prints "Type is int"
+            v.typeName());
+    v.asInt() += 100;         // The variant now hold the value 223.
+    v = TQVariant( TQStringList() );
+    v.asStringList().append( "Hello" );
+    
    
+ 
+
     You can even store TQValueLists and
+TQMaps in a variant, so you can easily construct
+arbitrarily complex data structures of arbitrary types. This is
+very powerful and versatile, but may prove less memory and speed
+efficient than storing specific types in standard data structures.
+
     TQVariant also supports the notion of NULL values, where you have a
+defined type with no value set.
+
    +    TQVariant x, y( TQString() ), z( TQString("") );
+    x.asInt();
+    // x.isNull() == TRUE, y.isNull() == TRUE, z.isNull() == FALSE
+    
    
+ 
+
     See the Collection Classes.
+
    See also Miscellaneous Classes and Object Model.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQVariant::Type
    
+
+
     This enum type defines the types of variable that a TQVariant can
+contain.
+
     Note that TQt's definition of bool depends on the compiler.
+ntqglobal.h has the system-dependent definition of bool.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ()
+
    
+Constructs an invalid variant.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( bool val, int )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with a boolean value, val. The integer
+argument is a dummy, necessary for compatibility with some
+compilers.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( double val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with a floating point value, val.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( TQSizePolicy val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with a size policy value, val.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQVariant & p )
+
    
+Constructs a copy of the variant, p, passed as the argument to
+this constructor. Usually this is a deep copy, but a shallow copy
+is made if the stored data type is explicitly shared, as e.g.
+TQImage is.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( TQDataStream & s )
+
    
+Reads the variant from the data stream, s.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQString & val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with a string value, val.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQCString & val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with a C-string value, val.
+
     If you want to modify the TQCString after you've passed it to this
+constructor, we recommend passing a deep copy (see
+TQCString::copy()).
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( const char * val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with a C-string value of val if val
+is non-null. The variant creates a deep copy of val.
+
     If val is null, the resulting variant has type Invalid.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQStringList & val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with a string list value, val.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQFont & val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with a font value, val.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQPixmap & val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with a pixmap value, val.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQImage & val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with an image value, val.
+
     Because TQImage is explicitly shared, you may need to pass a deep copy to the variant using TQImage::copy(), e.g. if you intend
+changing the image you've passed later on.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQBrush & val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with a brush value, val.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQPoint & val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with a point value, val.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQRect & val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with a rect value, val.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQSize & val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with a size value, val.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQColor & val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with a color value, val.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQPalette & val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with a color palette value, val.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQColorGroup & val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with a color group value, val.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQIconSet & val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with an icon set value, val.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQPointArray & val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with a point array value, val.
+
     Because TQPointArray is explicitly shared, you may need to pass a
+deep copy to the variant using TQPointArray::copy(), e.g. if you
+intend changing the point array you've passed later on.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQRegion & val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with a region value, val.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQBitmap & val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with a bitmap value, val.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQCursor & val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with a cursor value, val.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQDate & val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with a date value, val.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQTime & val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with a time value, val.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQDateTime & val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with a date/time value, val.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQByteArray & val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with a bytearray value, val.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQBitArray & val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with a bitarray value, val.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQKeySequence & val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with a key sequence value, val.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQPen & val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with a pen value, val.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQValueList<TQVariant> & val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with a list value, val.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQMap<TQString, TQVariant> & val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with a map of TQVariants, val.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( int val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with an integer value, val.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( uint val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with an unsigned integer value, val.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( Q_LLONG val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with a long long integer value, val.
+
+
    TQVariant::TQVariant ( Q_ULLONG val )
+
    
+Constructs a new variant with an unsigned long long integer value, val.
+
+
    TQVariant::~TQVariant ()
+
    
+Destroys the TQVariant and the contained object.
+
     Note that subclasses that reimplement clear() should reimplement
+the destructor to call clear(). This destructor calls clear(), but
+because it is the destructor, TQVariant::clear() is called rather
+than a subclass's clear().
+
+
    TQBitArray & TQVariant::asBitArray ()
+
    
+
+
     Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQBitArray value. If that is
+not possible then the variant is set to an empty bitarray.
+
     Returns a reference to the stored bitarray.
+
     
    See also toBitArray().
+
+
    TQBitmap & TQVariant::asBitmap ()
+
    
+
+
     Tries to convert the variant to hold a bitmap value. If that is
+not possible the variant is set to a null bitmap.
+
     Returns a reference to the stored bitmap.
+
     
    See also toBitmap().
+
+
    bool & TQVariant::asBool ()
+
    
+Returns the variant's value as bool reference.
+
+
    TQBrush & TQVariant::asBrush ()
+
    
+
+
     Tries to convert the variant to hold a brush value. If that is not
+possible the variant is set to a default black brush.
+
     Returns a reference to the stored brush.
+
     
    See also toBrush().
+
+
    TQByteArray & TQVariant::asByteArray ()
+
    
+
+
     Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQByteArray value. If that
+is not possible then the variant is set to an empty bytearray.
+
     Returns a reference to the stored bytearray.
+
     
    See also toByteArray().
+
+
    TQCString & TQVariant::asCString ()
+
    
+
+
     Tries to convert the variant to hold a string value. If that is
+not possible the variant is set to an empty string.
+
     Returns a reference to the stored string.
+
     
    See also toCString().
+
+
    TQColor & TQVariant::asColor ()
+
    
+
+
     Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQColor value. If that is
+not possible the variant is set to an invalid color.
+
     Returns a reference to the stored color.
+
     
    See also toColor() and TQColor::isValid().
+
+
    TQColorGroup & TQVariant::asColorGroup ()
+
    
+
+
     Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQColorGroup value. If that
+is not possible the variant is set to a color group of all black
+colors.
+
     Returns a reference to the stored color group.
+
     
    See also toColorGroup().
+
+
    TQCursor & TQVariant::asCursor ()
+
    
+
+
     Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQCursor value. If that is
+not possible the variant is set to a default arrow cursor.
+
     Returns a reference to the stored cursor.
+
     
    See also toCursor().
+
+
    TQDate & TQVariant::asDate ()
+
    
+
+
     Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQDate value. If that is not
+possible then the variant is set to an invalid date.
+
     Returns a reference to the stored date.
+
     
    See also toDate().
+
+
    TQDateTime & TQVariant::asDateTime ()
+
    
+
+
     Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQDateTime value. If that is
+not possible then the variant is set to an invalid date/time.
+
     Returns a reference to the stored date/time.
+
     
    See also toDateTime().
+
+
    double & TQVariant::asDouble ()
+
    
+Returns the variant's value as double reference.
+
+
    TQFont & TQVariant::asFont ()
+
    
+
+
     Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQFont. If that is not
+possible the variant is set to the application's default font.
+
     Returns a reference to the stored font.
+
     
    See also toFont().
+
+
    TQIconSet & TQVariant::asIconSet ()
+
    
+
+
     Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQIconSet value. If that is
+not possible the variant is set to an empty iconset.
+
     Returns a reference to the stored iconset.
+
     
    See also toIconSet().
+
+
    TQImage & TQVariant::asImage ()
+
    
+
+
     Tries to convert the variant to hold an image value. If that is
+not possible the variant is set to a null image.
+
     Returns a reference to the stored image.
+
     
    See also toImage().
+
+
    int & TQVariant::asInt ()
+
    
+Returns the variant's value as int reference.
+
+
    TQKeySequence & TQVariant::asKeySequence ()
+
    
+
+
     Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQKeySequence value. If that
+is not possible then the variant is set to an empty key sequence.
+
     Returns a reference to the stored key sequence.
+
     
    See also toKeySequence().
+
+
    TQValueList<TQVariant> & TQVariant::asList ()
+
    
+Returns the variant's value as variant list reference.
+
     Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
+over a copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQValueList<TQVariant> list = myVariant.asList();
+    TQValueList<TQVariant>::Iterator it = list.begin();
+    while( it != list.end() ) {
+        myProcessing( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    Q_LLONG & TQVariant::asLongLong ()
+
    
+Returns the variant's value as long long reference.
+
+
    TQMap<TQString, TQVariant> & TQVariant::asMap ()
+
    
+Returns the variant's value as variant map reference.
+
     Note that if you want to iterate over the map, you should iterate
+over a copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQMap<TQString, TQVariant> map = myVariant.asMap();
+    TQMap<TQString, TQVariant>::Iterator it = map.begin();
+    while( it != map.end() ) {
+        myProcessing( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    TQPalette & TQVariant::asPalette ()
+
    
+
+
     Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQPalette value. If that is
+not possible the variant is set to a palette of black colors.
+
     Returns a reference to the stored palette.
+
     
    See also toString().
+
+
    TQPen & TQVariant::asPen ()
+
     
+
     Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQPen value. If that
+is not possible then the variant is set to an empty pen.
+
     Returns a reference to the stored pen.
+
     
    See also toPen().
+
+
    TQPixmap & TQVariant::asPixmap ()
+
    
+
+
     Tries to convert the variant to hold a pixmap value. If that is
+not possible the variant is set to a null pixmap.
+
     Returns a reference to the stored pixmap.
+
     
    See also toPixmap().
+
+
    TQPoint & TQVariant::asPoint ()
+
    
+
+
     Tries to convert the variant to hold a point value. If that is not
+possible the variant is set to a (0, 0) point.
+
     Returns a reference to the stored point.
+
     
    See also toPoint().
+
+
    TQPointArray & TQVariant::asPointArray ()
+
    
+
+
     Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQPointArray value. If that
+is not possible the variant is set to an empty point array.
+
     Returns a reference to the stored point array.
+
     
    See also toPointArray().
+
+
    TQRect & TQVariant::asRect ()
+
    
+
+
     Tries to convert the variant to hold a rectangle value. If that is
+not possible the variant is set to an empty rectangle.
+
     Returns a reference to the stored rectangle.
+
     
    See also toRect().
+
+
    TQRegion & TQVariant::asRegion ()
+
    
+
+
     Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQRegion value. If that is
+not possible the variant is set to a null region.
+
     Returns a reference to the stored region.
+
     
    See also toRegion().
+
+
    TQSize & TQVariant::asSize ()
+
    
+
+
     Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQSize value. If that is not
+possible the variant is set to an invalid size.
+
     Returns a reference to the stored size.
+
     
    See also toSize() and TQSize::isValid().
+
+
    TQSizePolicy & TQVariant::asSizePolicy ()
+
    
+
+
     Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQSizePolicy value. If that
+fails, the variant is set to an arbitrary (valid) size policy.
+
+
    TQString & TQVariant::asString ()
+
    
+
+
     Tries to convert the variant to hold a string value. If that is
+not possible the variant is set to an empty string.
+
     Returns a reference to the stored string.
+
     
    See also toString().
+
+
    TQStringList & TQVariant::asStringList ()
+
    
+
+
     Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQStringList value. If that
+is not possible the variant is set to an empty string list.
+
     Returns a reference to the stored string list.
+
     Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should
+iterate over a copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQStringList list = myVariant.asStringList();
+    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
+    while( it != list.end() ) {
+        myProcessing( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also toStringList().
+
+
    TQTime & TQVariant::asTime ()
+
    
+
+
     Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQTime value. If that is not
+possible then the variant is set to an invalid time.
+
     Returns a reference to the stored time.
+
     
    See also toTime().
+
+
    uint & TQVariant::asUInt ()
+
    
+Returns the variant's value as unsigned int reference.
+
+
    Q_ULLONG & TQVariant::asULongLong ()
+
    
+Returns the variant's value as unsigned long long reference.
+
+
    bool TQVariant::canCast ( Type t ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the variant's type can be cast to the requested
+type, t. Such casting is done automatically when calling the
+toInt(), toBool(), ... or asInt(), asBool(), ... methods.
+
     The following casts are done automatically:
+
    
+
     Type Automatically Cast To
+
     Bool Double, Int, UInt, LongLong, ULongLong, String, CString, ByteArray
+
     Color String. CString. ByteArray
+
     Date String, CString, ByteArray, DateTime
+
     DateTime String, CString, ByteArray, Date, Time
+
     Double String, CString, ByteArray, Int, Bool, UInt, LongLong, ULongLong
+
     Font String, CString, ByteArray
+
     Int String, CString, ByteArray, Double, Bool, UInt, LongLong, ULongLong, KeySequence
+
     LongLong String, CString, ByteArray, Double, Bool, UInt, LongLong, ULongLong, KeySequence
+
     ULongLong String, CString, ByteArray, Double, Bool, UInt, LongLong, ULongLong, KeySequence
+
     List StringList (if the list contains only strings or
+something that can be cast to a string)
+
     String CString, ByteArray, CString, Int, UInt, Bool, Double, Date,
+Time, DateTime, KeySequence, Font, Color
+
     CString String, ByteArray, Int, UInt, Bool, Double, Date, ULongLong, LongLong
+
     ByteArray String, CString, Int, UInt, Bool, Double, Date, ULongLong, LongLong
+
     StringList List
+
     Time String
+
     Int String, CString, ByteArray, Double, Bool, UInt, LongLong, ULongLong, KeySequence
+
     KeySequence String, CString, ByteArray, Int, UInt, LongLong, ULongLong
+
    
+
+
    bool TQVariant::cast ( Type t )
+
    
+Casts the variant to the requested type. If the cast cannot be
+done, the variant is set to the default value of the requested
+type (e.g. an empty string if the requested type t is
+TQVariant::String, an empty point array if the requested type t
+is TQVariant::PointArray, etc). Returns TRUE if the current type of
+the variant was successfully cast; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also canCast().
+
+
    void TQVariant::clear ()
+
    
+Convert this variant to type Invalid and free up any resources
+used.
+
+
    bool TQVariant::isNull () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this is a NULL variant, FALSE otherwise.
+
+
    bool TQVariant::isValid () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the storage type of this variant is not
+TQVariant::Invalid; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    TQValueListConstIterator<TQVariant> TQVariant::listBegin () const
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Returns an iterator to the first item in the list if the variant's
+type is appropriate; otherwise returns a null iterator.
+
+
    TQValueListConstIterator<TQVariant> TQVariant::listEnd () const
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Returns the end iterator for the list if the variant's type is
+appropriate; otherwise returns a null iterator.
+
+
    TQMapConstIterator<TQString, TQVariant> TQVariant::mapBegin () const
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Returns an iterator to the first item in the map, if the variant's
+type is appropriate; otherwise returns a null iterator.
+
+
    TQMapConstIterator<TQString, TQVariant> TQVariant::mapEnd () const
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Returns the end iterator for the map, if the variant's type is
+appropriate; otherwise returns a null iterator.
+
+
    TQMapConstIterator<TQString, TQVariant> TQVariant::mapFind ( const TQString & key ) const
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Returns an iterator to the item in the map with key as key, if
+the variant's type is appropriate and key is a valid key;
+otherwise returns a null iterator.
+
+
    Type TQVariant::nameToType ( const char * name ) [static]
+
    
+Converts the string representation of the storage type given in name, to its enum representation.
+
     If the string representation cannot be converted to any enum
+representation, the variant is set to Invalid.
+
+
    bool TQVariant::operator!= ( const TQVariant & v ) const
+
    
+Compares this TQVariant with v and returns TRUE if they are not
+equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    TQVariant & TQVariant::operator= ( const TQVariant & variant )
+
    
+Assigns the value of the variant variant to this variant.
+
     This is a deep copy of the variant, but note that if the variant
+holds an explicitly shared type such as TQImage, a shallow copy is
+performed.
+
+
    bool TQVariant::operator== ( const TQVariant & v ) const
+
    
+Compares this TQVariant with v and returns TRUE if they are
+equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    TQValueListConstIterator<TQString> TQVariant::stringListBegin () const
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Returns an iterator to the first string in the list if the
+variant's type is StringList; otherwise returns a null iterator.
+
+
    TQValueListConstIterator<TQString> TQVariant::stringListEnd () const
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Returns the end iterator for the list if the variant's type is
+StringList; otherwise returns a null iterator.
+
+
    const TQBitArray TQVariant::toBitArray () const
+
    
+Returns the variant as a TQBitArray if the variant has type()
+BitArray; otherwise returns an empty bitarray.
+
     
    See also asBitArray().
+
+
    const TQBitmap TQVariant::toBitmap () const
+
    
+Returns the variant as a TQBitmap if the variant has type() Bitmap;
+otherwise returns a null TQBitmap.
+
     
    See also asBitmap().
+
+
    bool TQVariant::toBool () const
+
    
+Returns the variant as a bool if the variant can be cast to Bool;
+otherWise returns FALSE.
+
     Returns TRUE if the variant has a numeric type and its value is
+non-zero, or if the variant has type String, ByteArray or CString
+and its lower-case content is not empty, "0" or "false"; otherwise
+returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also asBool() and canCast().
+
+
    const TQBrush TQVariant::toBrush () const
+
    
+Returns the variant as a TQBrush if the variant has type() Brush;
+otherwise returns a default brush (with all black colors).
+
     
    See also asBrush().
+
+
    const TQByteArray TQVariant::toByteArray () const
+
    
+Returns the variant as a TQByteArray if the variant can be cast to
+a ByteArray; otherwise returns an empty bytearray.
+
     
    See also asByteArray() and canCast().
+
+
    const TQCString TQVariant::toCString () const
+
    
+Returns the variant as a TQCString if the variant can be cast to a
+CString; otherwise returns 0.
+
     
    See also asCString() and canCast().
+
+
    const TQColor TQVariant::toColor () const
+
    
+Returns the variant as a TQColor if the variant can be cast to Color;
+otherwise returns an invalid color.
+
     
    See also asColor() and canCast().
+
+
    const TQColorGroup TQVariant::toColorGroup () const
+
    
+Returns the variant as a TQColorGroup if the variant has type()
+ColorGroup; otherwise returns a completely black color group.
+
     
    See also asColorGroup().
+
+
    const TQCursor TQVariant::toCursor () const
+
    
+Returns the variant as a TQCursor if the variant has type() Cursor;
+otherwise returns the default arrow cursor.
+
     
    See also asCursor().
+
+
    const TQDate TQVariant::toDate () const
+
    
+Returns the variant as a TQDate if the variant can be cast to Date;
+otherwise returns an invalid date.
+
     Note that if the type() is String, CString or ByteArray an invalid
+date will be returned if the string cannot be parsed as a
+TQt::ISODate format date.
+
     
    See also asDate() and canCast().
+
+
    const TQDateTime TQVariant::toDateTime () const
+
    
+Returns the variant as a TQDateTime if the variant can be cast to
+DateTime; otherwise returns an invalid TQDateTime.
+
     Note that if the type() is String, CString or ByteArray an invalid
+TQDateTime will be returned if the string cannot be parsed as a
+TQt::ISODate format date/time.
+
     
    See also asDateTime().
+
+
    double TQVariant::toDouble ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns the variant as a double if the variant can be cast to
+Double; otherwise returns 0.0.
+
     If ok is non-null: *ok is set to TRUE if the value could be
+converted to a double; otherwise *ok is set to FALSE.
+
     
    See also asDouble() and canCast().
+
+
    const TQFont TQVariant::toFont () const
+
    
+Returns the variant as a TQFont if the variant can be cast to Font;
+otherwise returns the application's default font.
+
     
    See also asFont() and canCast().
+
+
    const TQIconSet TQVariant::toIconSet () const
+
    
+Returns the variant as a TQIconSet if the variant has type()
+IconSet; otherwise returns an icon set of null pixmaps.
+
     
    See also asIconSet().
+
+
    const TQImage TQVariant::toImage () const
+
    
+Returns the variant as a TQImage if the variant has type() Image;
+otherwise returns a null image.
+
     
    See also asImage().
+
+
    int TQVariant::toInt ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns the variant as an int if the variant can be cast to Int;
+otherwise returns 0.
+
     If ok is non-null: *ok is set to TRUE if the value could be
+converted to an int; otherwise *ok is set to FALSE.
+
     
    See also asInt() and canCast().
+
+
    const TQKeySequence TQVariant::toKeySequence () const
+
    
+Returns the variant as a TQKeySequence if the variant can be cast
+to a KeySequence; otherwise returns an empty key sequence.
+
     
    See also asKeySequence() and canCast().
+
+
    const TQValueList<TQVariant> TQVariant::toList () const
+
    
+Returns the variant as a TQValueList if the variant has
+type() List or StringList; otherwise returns an empty list.
+
     Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
+over a copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQValueList<TQVariant> list = myVariant.toList();
+    TQValueList<TQVariant>::Iterator it = list.begin();
+    while( it != list.end() ) {
+        myProcessing( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also asList().
+
+
    Q_LLONG TQVariant::toLongLong ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns the variant as a long long int if the variant can be cast
+to LongLong; otherwise returns 0.
+
     If ok is non-null: *ok is set to TRUE if the value could be
+converted to an int; otherwise *ok is set to FALSE.
+
     
    See also asLongLong() and canCast().
+
+
    const TQMap<TQString, TQVariant> TQVariant::toMap () const
+
    
+Returns the variant as a TQMap if the variant has
+type() Map; otherwise returns an empty map.
+
     Note that if you want to iterate over the map, you should iterate
+over a copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQMap<TQString, TQVariant> map = myVariant.toMap();
+    TQMap<TQString, TQVariant>::Iterator it = map.begin();
+    while( it != map.end() ) {
+        myProcessing( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also asMap().
+
+
    const TQPalette TQVariant::toPalette () const
+
    
+Returns the variant as a TQPalette if the variant has type()
+Palette; otherwise returns a completely black palette.
+
     
    See also asPalette().
+
+
    const TQPen TQVariant::toPen () const
+
    
+Returns the variant as a TQPen if the variant has type()
+Pen; otherwise returns an empty TQPen.
+
     
    See also asPen().
+
+
    const TQPixmap TQVariant::toPixmap () const
+
    
+Returns the variant as a TQPixmap if the variant has type() Pixmap;
+otherwise returns a null pixmap.
+
     
    See also asPixmap().
+
+
    const TQPoint TQVariant::toPoint () const
+
    
+Returns the variant as a TQPoint if the variant has type() Point;
+otherwise returns a point (0, 0).
+
     
    See also asPoint().
+
+
    const TQPointArray TQVariant::toPointArray () const
+
    
+Returns the variant as a TQPointArray if the variant has type()
+PointArray; otherwise returns an empty TQPointArray.
+
     
    See also asPointArray().
+
+
    const TQRect TQVariant::toRect () const
+
    
+Returns the variant as a TQRect if the variant has type() Rect;
+otherwise returns an empty rectangle.
+
     
    See also asRect().
+
+
    const TQRegion TQVariant::toRegion () const
+
    
+Returns the variant as a TQRegion if the variant has type() Region;
+otherwise returns an empty TQRegion.
+
     
    See also asRegion().
+
+
    const TQSize TQVariant::toSize () const
+
    
+Returns the variant as a TQSize if the variant has type() Size;
+otherwise returns an invalid size.
+
     
    See also asSize().
+
+
    TQSizePolicy TQVariant::toSizePolicy () const
+
    
+Returns the variant as a TQSizePolicy if the variant has type()
+SizePolicy; otherwise returns an undefined (but legal) size
+policy.
+
+
    const TQString TQVariant::toString () const
+
    
+Returns the variant as a TQString if the variant can be cast to
+String, otherwise returns TQString::null.
+
     
    See also asString() and canCast().
+
+
    const TQStringList TQVariant::toStringList () const
+
    
+Returns the variant as a TQStringList if the variant has type()
+StringList or List of a type that can be converted to TQString;
+otherwise returns an empty list.
+
     Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
+over a copy, e.g.
+
    +    TQStringList list = myVariant.toStringList();
+    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
+    while( it != list.end() ) {
+        myProcessing( *it );
+        ++it;
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also asStringList().
+
+
    const TQTime TQVariant::toTime () const
+
    
+Returns the variant as a TQTime if the variant can be cast to Time;
+otherwise returns an invalid date.
+
     Note that if the type() is String, CString or ByteArray an invalid
+time will be returned if the string cannot be parsed as a
+TQt::ISODate format time.
+
     
    See also asTime().
+
+
    uint TQVariant::toUInt ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns the variant as an unsigned int if the variant can be cast
+to UInt; otherwise returns 0.
+
     If ok is non-null: *ok is set to TRUE if the value could be
+converted to an unsigned int; otherwise *ok is set to FALSE.
+
     
    See also asUInt() and canCast().
+
+
    Q_ULLONG TQVariant::toULongLong ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns the variant as as an unsigned long long int if the variant
+can be cast to ULongLong; otherwise returns 0.
+
     If ok is non-null: *ok is set to TRUE if the value could be
+converted to an int; otherwise *ok is set to FALSE.
+
     
    See also asULongLong() and canCast().
+
+
    Type TQVariant::type () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the storage type of the value stored in the variant.
+Usually it's best to test with canCast() whether the variant can
+deliver the data type you are interested in.
+
+
    const char * TQVariant::typeName () const
+
    
+Returns the name of the type stored in the variant. The returned
+strings describe the C++ datatype used to store the data: for
+example, "TQFont", "TQString", or "TQValueList". An Invalid
+variant returns 0.
+
+
    const char * TQVariant::typeToName ( Type typ ) [static]
+
    
+Converts the enum representation of the storage type, typ, to
+its string representation.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqvbox.html b/doc/html/ntqvbox.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b38039c93
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqvbox.html
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQVBox Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQVBox Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQVBox widget provides vertical geometry management of
+its child widgets.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqvbox.h>
+
    Inherits TQHBox.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQVBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQVBox widget provides vertical geometry management of
+its child widgets.
+
     
+
+
+
     All its child widgets will be placed vertically and sized
+according to their sizeHint()s.
+
     
    TQVBox
     
+
     
    See also TQHBox, Widget Appearance and Style, Layout Management, and Organizers.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQVBox::TQVBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a vbox widget called name with parent parent and
+widget flags f.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqvbuttongroup.html b/doc/html/ntqvbuttongroup.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a37a95436
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqvbuttongroup.html
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQVButtonGroup Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQVButtonGroup Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQVButtonGroup widget organizes TQButton widgets in a
+vertical column.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqvbuttongroup.h>
+
    Inherits TQButtonGroup.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQVButtonGroup widget organizes TQButton widgets in a
+vertical column.
+
     
+
+
+
     TQVButtonGroup is a convenience class that offers a thin layer on top
+of TQButtonGroup. Think of it as a TQVBox that offers a frame with a
+title and is specifically designed for buttons.
+
     
    TQButtonGroup
     
+
     
    See also TQHButtonGroup, Widget Appearance and Style, Layout Management, and Organizers.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQVButtonGroup::TQVButtonGroup ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a vertical button group with no title.
+
     The parent and name arguments are passed on to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
+
    TQVButtonGroup::TQVButtonGroup ( const TQString & title, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a vertical button group with the title title.
+
     The parent and name arguments are passed on to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
+
    TQVButtonGroup::~TQVButtonGroup ()
+
    
+Destroys the vertical button group, deleting its child widgets.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqvector.html b/doc/html/ntqvector.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e5eca324e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqvector.html
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQVector Class Reference (obsolete)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQVector Class Reference (obsolete)
    
+
+ 
+
     
    +#include <ntqvector.h>
    
+ 
+
     The TQVector class has been renamed  TQPtrVector  in TQt 3.0.
+
+
+
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqvgroupbox.html b/doc/html/ntqvgroupbox.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7c0574760
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqvgroupbox.html
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQVGroupBox Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQVGroupBox Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQVGroupBox widget organizes a group of widgets in a
+vertical column.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqvgroupbox.h>
+
    Inherits TQGroupBox.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQVGroupBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQVGroupBox ( const TQString & title, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • ~TQVGroupBox ()
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQVGroupBox widget organizes a group of widgets in a
+vertical column.
+
     
+
+
+
     TQVGroupBox is a convenience class that offers a thin layer on top of
+TQGroupBox. Think of it as a TQVBox that offers a frame with a title.
+
     
    Group Boxes
     
+
     
    See also TQHGroupBox, Widget Appearance and Style, Layout Management, and Organizers.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQVGroupBox::TQVGroupBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a vertical group box with no title.
+
     The parent and name arguments are passed on to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
+
    TQVGroupBox::TQVGroupBox ( const TQString & title, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a vertical group box with the title title.
+
     The parent and name arguments are passed on to the TQWidget
+constructor.
+
+
    TQVGroupBox::~TQVGroupBox ()
+
    
+Destroys the vertical group box, deleting its child widgets.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqwaitcondition.html b/doc/html/ntqwaitcondition.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c497b58a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqwaitcondition.html
@@ -0,0 +1,197 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQWaitCondition Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQWaitCondition Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQWaitCondition class allows waiting/waking for conditions between threads.
+More...
+
    All the functions in this class are thread-safe when TQt is built with thread support.
    
+
    #include <ntqwaitcondition.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
+The TQWaitCondition class allows waiting/waking for conditions between threads.
+
     
+
+
     TQWaitConditions allow a thread to tell other threads that some
+sort of condition has been met; one or many threads can block
+waiting for a TQWaitCondition to set a condition with wakeOne() or
+wakeAll(). Use wakeOne() to wake one randomly selected event or
+wakeAll() to wake them all. For example, say we have three tasks
+that should be performed every time the user presses a key; each
+task could be split into a thread, each of which would have a
+run() body like this:
+
     
    +    TQWaitCondition key_pressed;
+
+    for (;;) {
+        key_pressed.wait(); // This is a TQWaitCondition global variable
+        // Key was pressed, do something interesting
+        do_something();
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     A fourth thread would read key presses and wake the other three
+threads up every time it receives one, like this:
+
     
    +    TQWaitCondition key_pressed;
+
+    for (;;) {
+        getchar();
+        // Causes any thread in key_pressed.wait() to return from
+        // that method and continue processing
+        key_pressed.wakeAll();
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     Note that the order the three threads are woken up in is
+undefined, and that if some or all of the threads are still in
+do_something() when the key is pressed, they won't be woken up
+(since they're not waiting on the condition variable) and so the
+task will not be performed for that key press. This can be
+avoided by, for example, doing something like this:
+
     
    +    TQMutex mymutex;
+    TQWaitCondition key_pressed;
+    int mycount=0;
+
+    // Worker thread code
+    for (;;) {
+        key_pressed.wait(); // This is a TQWaitCondition global variable
+        mymutex.lock();
+        mycount++;
+        mymutex.unlock();
+        do_something();
+        mymutex.lock();
+        mycount--;
+        mymutex.unlock();
+    }
+
+    // Key reading thread code
+    for (;;) {
+        getchar();
+        mymutex.lock();
+        // Sleep until there are no busy worker threads
+        while( mycount > 0 ) {
+            mymutex.unlock();
+            sleep( 1 );
+            mymutex.lock();
+        }
+        mymutex.unlock();
+        key_pressed.wakeAll();
+    }
+    
    
+ 
+
     The mutexes are necessary because the results of two threads
+attempting to change the value of the same variable simultaneously
+are unpredictable.
+
    See also Environment Classes and Threading.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQWaitCondition::TQWaitCondition ()
+
    
+Constructs a new event signalling, i.e. wait condition, object.
+
+
    TQWaitCondition::~TQWaitCondition () [virtual]
+
    
+Deletes the event signalling, i.e. wait condition, object.
+
+
    bool TQWaitCondition::wait ( unsigned long time = ULONG_MAX )
+
    
+Wait on the thread event object. The thread calling this will
+block until either of these conditions is met:
+
      
+
    •  Another thread signals it using wakeOne() or wakeAll(). This
+function will return TRUE in this case.
+
    •  time milliseconds has elapsed. If time is ULONG_MAX (the
+default), then the wait will never timeout (the event must be
+signalled). This function will return FALSE if the wait timed
+out.
+
    
+
     
    See also wakeOne() and wakeAll().
+
+
    bool TQWaitCondition::wait ( TQMutex * mutex, unsigned long time = ULONG_MAX )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Release the locked mutex and wait on the thread event object.
+The mutex must be initially locked by the calling thread. If mutex is not in a locked state, this function returns immediately.
+If mutex is a recursive mutex, this function returns
+immediately. The mutex will be unlocked, and the calling thread
+will block until either of these conditions is met:
+
      
+
    •  Another thread signals it using wakeOne() or wakeAll(). This
+function will return TRUE in this case.
+
    •  time milliseconds has elapsed. If time is ULONG_MAX (the
+default), then the wait will never timeout (the event must be
+signalled). This function will return FALSE if the wait timed
+out.
+
    
+
     The mutex will be returned to the same locked state. This function
+is provided to allow the atomic transition from the locked state
+to the wait state.
+
     
    See also wakeOne() and wakeAll().
+
+
    void TQWaitCondition::wakeAll ()
+
    
+This wakes all threads waiting on the TQWaitCondition. The order in
+which the threads are woken up depends on the operating system's
+scheduling policies, and cannot be controlled or predicted.
+
     
    See also wakeOne().
+
+
    void TQWaitCondition::wakeOne ()
+
    
+This wakes one thread waiting on the TQWaitCondition. The thread
+that is woken up depends on the operating system's scheduling
+policies, and cannot be controlled or predicted.
+
     
    See also wakeAll().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqwhatsthis.html b/doc/html/ntqwhatsthis.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f60fbbae1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqwhatsthis.html
@@ -0,0 +1,239 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQWhatsThis Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQWhatsThis Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQWhatsThis class provides a simple description of any
+widget, i.e. answering the question "What's this?".
+More...
+
    #include <ntqwhatsthis.h>
+
    Inherits TQt.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • void setFont ( const TQFont & font )
      • 
+
    • void add ( TQWidget * widget, const TQString & text )
      • 
+
    • void remove ( TQWidget * widget )
      • 
+
    • TQString textFor ( TQWidget * w, const TQPoint & pos = TQPoint ( ), bool includeParents = FALSE )
      • 
+
    • TQToolButton * whatsThisButton ( TQWidget * parent )
      • 
+
    • void enterWhatsThisMode ()
      • 
+
    • bool inWhatsThisMode ()
      • 
+
    • void leaveWhatsThisMode ( const TQString & text = TQString::null, const TQPoint & pos = TQCursor::pos ( ), TQWidget * w = 0 )
      • 
+
    • void display ( const TQString & text, const TQPoint & pos = TQCursor::pos ( ), TQWidget * w = 0 )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQWhatsThis class provides a simple description of any
+widget, i.e. answering the question "What's this?".
+
     
+
+
     "What's this?" help is part of an application's online help system
+that provides users with information about functionality, usage,
+background etc., in various levels of detail from short tool tips
+to full text browsing help windows.
+
     TQWhatsThis provides a single window with an explanatory text that
+pops up when the user asks "What's this?". The default way to do
+this is to focus the relevant widget and press Shift+F1. The help
+text appears immediately; it goes away as soon as the user does
+something else.
+
     (Note that if there is an accelerator for Shift+F1, this mechanism
+will not work.)
+
     To add "What's this?" text to a widget you simply call
+TQWhatsThis::add() for the widget. For example, to assign text to a
+menu item, call TQMenuData::setWhatsThis(); for a global
+accelerator key, call TQAccel::setWhatsThis() and If you're using
+actions, use TQAction::setWhatsThis().
+
     The text can be either rich text or plain text. If you specify a
+rich text formatted string, it will be rendered using the default
+stylesheet. This makes it possible to embed images. See
+TQStyleSheet::defaultSheet() for details.
+
     
+
+
            const char * fileOpenText = "<p><img source=\"fileopen\"> "
+                         "Click this button to open a <em>new file</em>. <br>"
+                         "You can also select the <b>Open</b> command "
+                         "from the <b>File</b> menu.</p>";
+        TQMimeSourceFactory::defaultFactory()->setPixmap( "fileopen",
+                              fileOpenAction->iconSet().pixmap() );
+        fileOpenAction->setWhatsThis( fileOpenText );
+
    
+
     An alternative way to enter "What's this?" mode is to use the
+ready-made tool bar tool button from
+TQWhatsThis::whatsThisButton(). By invoking this context help
+button (in the picture below the first one from the right) the
+user switches into "What's this?" mode. If they now click on a
+widget the appropriate help text is shown. The mode is left when
+help is given or when the user presses Esc.
+
     
     
+
     If you are using TQMainWindow you can also use the
+TQMainWindow::whatsThis() slot to invoke the mode from a menu item.
+
     For more control you can create a dedicated TQWhatsThis object for
+a special widget. By subclassing and reimplementing
+TQWhatsThis::text() it is possible to have different help texts,
+depending on the position of the mouse click. By reimplementing
+TQWhatsThis::clicked() it is possible to have hyperlinks inside the
+help texts.
+
     If you wish to control the "What's this?" behavior of a widget
+manually see TQWidget::customWhatsThis().
+
     The What's This object can be removed using TQWhatsThis::remove(),
+although this is rarely necessary because it is automatically
+removed when the widget is destroyed.
+
     
    See also TQToolTip and Help System.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQWhatsThis::TQWhatsThis ( TQWidget * widget )
+
    
+Constructs a dynamic "What's this?" object for widget. The
+object is deleted when the widget is destroyed.
+
     When the widget is queried by the user the text() function of this
+TQWhatsThis will be called to provide the appropriate text, rather
+than using the text assigned by add().
+
+
    TQWhatsThis::~TQWhatsThis () [virtual]
+
    
+Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
+
+
    void TQWhatsThis::add ( TQWidget * widget, const TQString & text ) [static]
+
    
+Adds text as "What's this" help for widget. If the text is
+rich text formatted (i.e. it contains markup) it will be rendered
+with the default stylesheet TQStyleSheet::defaultSheet().
+
     The text is destroyed if the widget is later destroyed, so it need
+not be explicitly removed.
+
     
    See also remove().
+
+
    Examples: application/application.cpp, helpsystem/mainwindow.cpp, and mdi/application.cpp.
+
    bool TQWhatsThis::clicked ( const TQString & href ) [virtual]
+
    
+
+
     This virtual function is called when the user clicks inside the
+"What's this?" window. href is the link the user clicked on, or
+TQString::null if there was no link.
+
     If the function returns TRUE (the default), the "What's this?"
+window is closed, otherwise it remains visible.
+
     The default implementation ignores href and returns TRUE.
+
+
    void TQWhatsThis::display ( const TQString & text, const TQPoint & pos = TQCursor::pos ( ), TQWidget * w = 0 ) [static]
+
    
+Display text in a help window at the global screen position pos.
+
     If widget w is not 0 and has its own dedicated TQWhatsThis
+object, this object will receive clicked() messages when the user
+clicks on hyperlinks inside the help text.
+
     
    See also TQWhatsThis::clicked().
+
+
    void TQWhatsThis::enterWhatsThisMode () [static]
+
    
+Enters "What's this?" mode and returns immediately.
+
     TQt will install a special cursor and take over mouse input until
+the user clicks somewhere. It then shows any help available and
+ends "What's this?" mode. Finally, TQt removes the special cursor
+and help window and then restores ordinary event processing, at
+which point the left mouse button is no longer pressed.
+
     The user can also use the Esc key to leave "What's this?" mode.
+
     
    See also inWhatsThisMode() and leaveWhatsThisMode().
+
+
    bool TQWhatsThis::inWhatsThisMode () [static]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the application is in "What's this?" mode;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also enterWhatsThisMode() and leaveWhatsThisMode().
+
+
    void TQWhatsThis::leaveWhatsThisMode ( const TQString & text = TQString::null, const TQPoint & pos = TQCursor::pos ( ), TQWidget * w = 0 ) [static]
+
    
+Leaves "What's this?" question mode.
+
     This function is used internally by widgets that support
+TQWidget::customWhatsThis(); applications do not usually call it.
+An example of such a widget is TQPopupMenu: menus still work
+normally in "What's this?" mode but also provide help texts for
+individual menu items.
+
     If text is not TQString::null, a "What's this?" help window is
+displayed at the global screen position pos. If widget w is
+not 0 and has its own dedicated TQWhatsThis object, this object
+will receive clicked() messages when the user clicks on hyperlinks
+inside the help text.
+
     
    See also inWhatsThisMode(), enterWhatsThisMode(), and TQWhatsThis::clicked().
+
+
    void TQWhatsThis::remove ( TQWidget * widget ) [static]
+
    
+Removes the "What's this?" help associated with the widget.
+This happens automatically if the widget is destroyed.
+
     
    See also add().
+
+
    void TQWhatsThis::setFont ( const TQFont & font ) [static]
+
    
+Sets the font for all "What's this?" helps to font.
+
+
    TQString TQWhatsThis::text ( const TQPoint & ) [virtual]
+
    
+This virtual function returns the text for position p in the
+widget that this "What's this?" object documents. If there is no
+"What's this?" text for the position, TQString::null is returned.
+
     The default implementation returns TQString::null.
+
+
    TQString TQWhatsThis::textFor ( TQWidget * w, const TQPoint & pos = TQPoint ( ), bool includeParents = FALSE ) [static]
+
    
+Returns the what's this text for widget w or TQString::null if
+there is no "What's this?" help for the widget. pos contains
+the mouse position; this is useful, for example, if you've
+subclassed to make the text that is displayed position dependent.
+
     If includeParents is TRUE, parent widgets are taken into
+consideration as well when looking for what's this help text.
+
     
    See also add().
+
+
    TQToolButton * TQWhatsThis::whatsThisButton ( TQWidget * parent ) [static]
+
    
+Creates a TQToolButton preconfigured to enter "What's this?" mode
+when clicked. You will often use this with a tool bar as parent:
+
    +        (void) TQWhatsThis::whatsThisButton( my_help_tool_bar );
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    Example: helpsystem/mainwindow.cpp.
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqwidget.html b/doc/html/ntqwidget.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f10de98ba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqwidget.html
@@ -0,0 +1,3256 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQWidget Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQWidget Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQWidget class is the base class of all user interface objects.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqwidget.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject and TQPaintDevice.
+
    Inherited by TQAxWidget, TQButton, TQFrame, TQDialog, TQComboBox, TQDataBrowser, TQDataView, TQDateTimeEditBase, TQDateTimeEdit, TQDesktopWidget, TQDial, TQDockArea, TQGLWidget, TQHeader, TQMainWindow, TQMotifWidget, TQNPWidget, TQScrollBar, TQSizeGrip, TQSlider, TQSpinBox, TQSplashScreen, TQStatusBar, TQTabBar, TQTabWidget, TQWorkspace, and TQXtWidget.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • bool acceptDrops - whether drop events are enabled for this widget
      • 
+
    • bool autoMask - whether the auto mask feature is enabled for the widget
      • 
+
    • TQBrush backgroundBrush - the widget's background brush  (read only)
      • 
+
    • BackgroundMode backgroundMode - the color role used for painting the background of the widget
      • 
+
    • BackgroundOrigin backgroundOrigin - the origin of the widget's background
      • 
+
    • TQSize baseSize - the base size of the widget
      • 
+
    • TQString caption - the window caption (title)
      • 
+
    • TQRect childrenRect - the bounding rectangle of the widget's children  (read only)
      • 
+
    • TQRegion childrenRegion - the combined region occupied by the widget's children  (read only)
      • 
+
    • TQColorGroup colorGroup - the current color group of the widget palette  (read only)
      • 
+
    • TQCursor cursor - the cursor shape for this widget
      • 
+
    • bool customWhatsThis - whether the widget wants to handle What's This help manually  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool enabled - whether the widget is enabled
      • 
+
    • bool focus - whether this widget (or its focus proxy) has the keyboard input focus  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool focusEnabled - whether the widget accepts keyboard focus  (read only)
      • 
+
    • FocusPolicy focusPolicy - the way the widget accepts keyboard focus
      • 
+
    • TQFont font - the font currently set for the widget
      • 
+
    • TQRect frameGeometry - geometry of the widget relative to its parent including any window frame  (read only)
      • 
+
    • TQSize frameSize - the size of the widget including any window frame  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool fullScreen - whether the widget is full screen  (read only)
      • 
+
    • TQRect geometry - the geometry of the widget relative to its parent and excluding the window frame
      • 
+
    • int height - the height of the widget excluding any window frame  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool hidden - whether the widget is explicitly hidden
      • 
+
    • TQPixmap icon - the widget's icon
      • 
+
    • TQString iconText - the widget's icon text
      • 
+
    • bool inputMethodEnabled - enables or disables the use of input methods for this widget
      • 
+
    • bool isActiveWindow - whether this widget is the active window  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool isDesktop - whether the widget is a desktop widget, i.e. represents the desktop  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool isDialog - whether the widget is a dialog widget  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool isModal - whether the widget is a modal widget  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool isPopup - whether the widget is a popup widget  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool isTopLevel - whether the widget is a top-level widget  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool maximized - whether this widget is maximized  (read only)
      • 
+
    • int maximumHeight - the widget's maximum height
      • 
+
    • TQSize maximumSize - the widget's maximum size
      • 
+
    • int maximumWidth - the widget's maximum width
      • 
+
    • TQRect microFocusHint - the currently set micro focus hint for this widget  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool minimized - whether this widget is minimized (iconified)  (read only)
      • 
+
    • int minimumHeight - the widget's minimum height
      • 
+
    • TQSize minimumSize - the widget's minimum size
      • 
+
    • TQSize minimumSizeHint - the recommended minimum size for the widget  (read only)
      • 
+
    • int minimumWidth - the widget's minimum width
      • 
+
    • bool mouseTracking - whether mouse tracking is enabled for the widget
      • 
+
    • bool ownCursor - whether the widget uses its own cursor  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool ownFont - whether the widget uses its own font  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool ownPalette - whether the widget uses its own palette  (read only)
      • 
+
    • TQPalette palette - the widget's palette
      • 
+
    • TQColor paletteBackgroundColor - the background color of the widget
      • 
+
    • TQPixmap paletteBackgroundPixmap - the background pixmap of the widget
      • 
+
    • TQColor paletteForegroundColor - the foreground color of the widget
      • 
+
    • TQPoint pos - the position of the widget within its parent widget
      • 
+
    • TQRect rect - the internal geometry of the widget excluding any window frame  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool shown - whether the widget is shown
      • 
+
    • TQSize size - the size of the widget excluding any window frame
      • 
+
    • TQSize sizeHint - the recommended size for the widget  (read only)
      • 
+
    • TQSize sizeIncrement - the size increment of the widget
      • 
+
    • TQSizePolicy sizePolicy - the default layout behavior of the widget
      • 
+
    • bool underMouse - whether the widget is under the mouse cursor  (read only)
      • 
+
    • bool updatesEnabled - whether updates are enabled
      • 
+
    • bool visible - whether the widget is visible  (read only)
      • 
+
    • TQRect visibleRect - the visible rectangle  (read only)  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • int width - the width of the widget excluding any window frame  (read only)
      • 
+
    • double windowOpacity - the level of opacity for the window
      • 
+
    • int x - the x coordinate of the widget relative to its parent including any window frame  (read only)
      • 
+
    • int y - the y coordinate of the widget relative to its parent and including any window frame  (read only)
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQWidget class is the base class of all user interface objects.
+
     
+
+
     The widget is the atom of the user interface: it receives mouse,
+keyboard and other events from the window system, and paints a
+representation of itself on the screen. Every widget is
+rectangular, and they are sorted in a Z-order. A widget is
+clipped by its parent and by the widgets in front of it.
+
     A widget that isn't embedded in a parent widget is called a
+top-level widget. Usually, top-level widgets are windows with a
+frame and a title bar (although it is also possible to create
+top-level widgets without such decoration if suitable widget flags
+are used). In TQt, TQMainWindow and the various subclasses of
+TQDialog are the most common top-level windows.
+
     A widget without a parent widget is always a top-level widget.
+
     Non-top-level widgets are child widgets. These are child windows
+in their parent widgets. You cannot usually distinguish a child
+widget from its parent visually. Most other widgets in TQt are
+useful only as child widgets. (It is possible to make, say, a
+button into a top-level widget, but most people prefer to put
+their buttons inside other widgets, e.g. TQDialog.)
+
     If you want to use a TQWidget to hold child widgets you will
+probably want to add a layout to the parent TQWidget. (See Layouts.)
+
     TQWidget has many member functions, but some of them have little
+direct functionality: for example, TQWidget has a font property,
+but never uses this itself. There are many subclasses which
+provide real functionality, such as TQPushButton, TQListBox and
+TQTabDialog, etc.
+
     
     Groups of functions:
+
    
+
     
    
+
     Context Functions
+
     Window functions 
+show(),
+hide(),
+raise(),
+lower(),
+close().
+
     Top level windows 
+caption(),
+setCaption(),
+icon(),
+setIcon(),
+iconText(),
+setIconText(),
+isActiveWindow(),
+setActiveWindow(),
+showMinimized().
+showMaximized(),
+showFullScreen(),
+showNormal().
+
     Window contents 
+update(),
+repaint(),
+erase(),
+scroll(),
+updateMask().
+
     Geometry 
+pos(),
+size(),
+rect(),
+x(),
+y(),
+width(),
+height(),
+sizePolicy(),
+setSizePolicy(),
+sizeHint(),
+updateGeometry(),
+layout(),
+move(),
+resize(),
+setGeometry(),
+frameGeometry(),
+geometry(),
+childrenRect(),
+adjustSize(),
+mapFromGlobal(),
+mapFromParent()
+mapToGlobal(),
+mapToParent(),
+maximumSize(),
+minimumSize(),
+sizeIncrement(),
+setMaximumSize(),
+setMinimumSize(),
+setSizeIncrement(),
+setBaseSize(),
+setFixedSize()
+
     Mode 
+isVisible(),
+isVisibleTo(),
+isMinimized(),
+isDesktop(),
+isEnabled(),
+isEnabledTo(),
+isModal(),
+isPopup(),
+isTopLevel(),
+setEnabled(),
+hasMouseTracking(),
+setMouseTracking(),
+isUpdatesEnabled(),
+setUpdatesEnabled(),
+clipRegion().
+
     Look and feel 
+style(),
+setStyle(),
+cursor(),
+setCursor()
+font(),
+setFont(),
+palette(),
+setPalette(),
+backgroundMode(),
+setBackgroundMode(),
+colorGroup(),
+fontMetrics(),
+fontInfo().
+
     Keyboard focus
    functions     		
+isFocusEnabled(),
+setFocusPolicy(),
+focusPolicy(),
+hasFocus(),
+setFocus(),
+clearFocus(),
+setTabOrder(),
+setFocusProxy().
+
     Mouse and
    keyboard grabbing     		
+grabMouse(),
+releaseMouse(),
+grabKeyboard(),
+releaseKeyboard(),
+mouseGrabber(),
+keyboardGrabber().
+
     Event handlers 
+event(),
+mousePressEvent(),
+mouseReleaseEvent(),
+mouseDoubleClickEvent(),
+mouseMoveEvent(),
+keyPressEvent(),
+keyReleaseEvent(),
+focusInEvent(),
+focusOutEvent(),
+wheelEvent(),
+enterEvent(),
+leaveEvent(),
+paintEvent(),
+moveEvent(),
+resizeEvent(),
+closeEvent(),
+dragEnterEvent(),
+dragMoveEvent(),
+dragLeaveEvent(),
+dropEvent(),
+childEvent(),
+showEvent(),
+hideEvent(),
+customEvent().
+
     Change handlers 
+enabledChange(),
+fontChange(),
+paletteChange(),
+styleChange(),
+windowActivationChange().
+
     System functions 
+parentWidget(),
+topLevelWidget(),
+reparent(),
+polish(),
+winId(),
+find(),
+metric().
+
     What's this help 
+customWhatsThis()
+
     Internal kernel
    functions     		
+focusNextPrevChild(),
+wmapper(),
+clearWFlags(),
+getWFlags(),
+setWFlags(),
+testWFlags().
+
     
    
+
     Every widget's constructor accepts two or three standard arguments:
+
      
+
    1.  TQWidget *parent = 0 is the parent of the new widget.
+If it is 0 (the default), the new widget will be a top-level window.
+If not, it will be a child of parent, and be constrained by parent's geometry (unless you specify WType_TopLevel as
+widget flag).
+
    2.  const char *name = 0 is the widget name of the new
+widget. You can access it using name(). The widget name is little
+used by programmers but is quite useful with GUI builders such as
+TQt Designer (you can name a widget in TQt Designer, and
+connect() to it using the name in your code). The dumpObjectTree()
+debugging function also uses it.
+
    3.  WFlags f = 0 (where available) sets the widget flags; the
+default is suitable for almost all widgets, but to get, for
+example, a top-level widget without a window system frame, you
+must use special flags.
+
    
+
     The tictac/tictac.cpp example program is good example of a simple
+widget. It contains a few event handlers (as all widgets must), a
+few custom routines that are specific to it (as all useful widgets
+do), and has a few children and connections. Everything it does
+is done in response to an event: this is by far the most common way
+to design GUI applications.
+
     You will need to supply the content for your widgets yourself, but
+here is a brief run-down of the events, starting with the most common
+ones:
+
     
      
+
       
    •  paintEvent() - called whenever the widget needs to be
+repainted. Every widget which displays output must implement it,
+and it is wise not to paint on the screen outside
+paintEvent().
+
       
    •  resizeEvent() - called when the widget has been resized.
+
       
    •  mousePressEvent() - called when a mouse button is pressed.
+There are six mouse-related events, but the mouse press and mouse
+release events are by far the most important. A widget receives
+mouse press events when the mouse is inside it, or when it has
+grabbed the mouse using grabMouse().
+
       
    •  mouseReleaseEvent() - called when a mouse button is released.
+A widget receives mouse release events when it has received the
+corresponding mouse press event. This means that if the user
+presses the mouse inside your widget, then drags the mouse to
+somewhere else, then releases, your widget receives the release
+event. There is one exception: if a popup menu appears while the
+mouse button is held down, this popup immediately steals the mouse
+events.
+
       
    •  mouseDoubleClickEvent() - not quite as obvious as it might seem.
+If the user double-clicks, the widget receives a mouse press event
+(perhaps a mouse move event or two if they don't hold the mouse
+quite steady), a mouse release event and finally this event. It is
+not possible to distinguish a click from a double click until you've
+seen whether the second click arrives. (This is one reason why most GUI
+books recommend that double clicks be an extension of single clicks,
+rather than trigger a different action.)
+
       
    
+
     If your widget only contains child widgets, you probably do not need to
+implement any event handlers. If you want to detect a mouse click in
+a child widget call the child's hasMouse() function inside the
+parent widget's mousePressEvent().
+
     Widgets that accept keyboard input need to reimplement a few more
+event handlers:
+
     
      
+
       
    •  keyPressEvent() - called whenever a key is pressed, and again
+when a key has been held down long enough for it to auto-repeat.
+Note that the Tab and Shift+Tab keys are only passed to the widget
+if they are not used by the focus-change mechanisms. To force those
+keys to be processed by your widget, you must reimplement
+TQWidget::event().
+
       
    •  focusInEvent() - called when the widget gains keyboard focus
+(assuming you have called setFocusPolicy()). Well written widgets
+indicate that they own the keyboard focus in a clear but discreet
+way.
+
       
    •  focusOutEvent() - called when the widget loses keyboard focus.
+
       
    
+
     Some widgets will also need to reimplement some of the less common
+event handlers:
+
     
      
+
       
    •  mouseMoveEvent() - called whenever the mouse moves while a
+button is held down. This is useful for, for example, dragging. If
+you call setMouseTracking(TRUE), you get mouse move events even
+when no buttons are held down. (Note that applications which make
+use of mouse tracking are often not very useful on low-bandwidth X
+connections.) (See also the drag and drop
+information.)
+
       
    •  keyReleaseEvent() - called whenever a key is released, and also
+while it is held down if the key is auto-repeating. In that case
+the widget receives a key release event and immediately a key press
+event for every repeat. Note that the Tab and Shift+Tab keys are
+only passed to the widget if they are not used by the focus-change
+mechanisms. To force those keys to be processed by your widget, you
+must reimplement TQWidget::event().
+
       
    •  wheelEvent() -- called whenever the user turns the mouse wheel
+while the widget has the focus.
+
       
    •  enterEvent() - called when the mouse enters the widget's screen
+space. (This excludes screen space owned by any children of the
+widget.)
+
       
    •  leaveEvent() - called when the mouse leaves the widget's screen
+space.
+
       
    •  moveEvent() - called when the widget has been moved relative to its
+parent.
+
       
    •  closeEvent() - called when the user closes the widget (or when
+close() is called).
+
       
    
+
     There are also some rather obscure events. They are listed in
+ntqevent.h and you need to reimplement event() to handle them.
+The default implementation of event() handles Tab and Shift+Tab
+(to move the keyboard focus), and passes on most other events to
+one of the more specialized handlers above.
+
     When implementing a widget, there are a few more things to
+consider.
+
     
      
+
       
    •  In the constructor, be sure to set up your member variables
+early on, before there's any chance that you might receive an event.
+
       
    •  It is almost always useful to reimplement sizeHint() and to set
+the correct size policy with setSizePolicy(), so users of your class
+can set up layout management more easily. A size policy lets you
+supply good defaults for the layout management handling, so that
+other widgets can contain and manage yours easily. sizeHint()
+indicates a "good" size for the widget.
+
       
    •  If your widget is a top-level window, setCaption() and setIcon() set
+the title bar and icon respectively.
+
       
    
+
     
    See also TQEvent, TQPainter, TQGridLayout, TQBoxLayout, and Abstract Widget Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQWidget::BackgroundOrigin
    
+
+
     This enum defines the origin used to draw a widget's background
+pixmap.
+
     The pixmap is drawn using the:
+
      
+
    • TQWidget::WidgetOrigin - widget's coordinate system.
+
    • TQWidget::ParentOrigin - parent's coordinate system.
+
    • TQWidget::WindowOrigin - top-level window's coordinate system.
+
    • TQWidget::AncestorOrigin - same origin as the parent uses.
+
    
+
    TQWidget::FocusPolicy
    
+
+
     This enum type defines the various policies a widget can have with
+respect to actquiring keyboard focus.
+
      
+
    • TQWidget::TabFocus - the widget accepts focus by tabbing.
+
    • TQWidget::ClickFocus - the widget accepts focus by clicking.
+
    • TQWidget::StrongFocus - the widget accepts focus by both tabbing
+and clicking. On Mac OS X this will also
+be indicate that the widget accepts tab focus
+when in 'Text/List focus mode'.
+
    • TQWidget::WheelFocus - like StrongFocus plus the widget accepts
+focus by using the mouse wheel.
+
    • TQWidget::NoFocus - the widget does not accept focus.
+
     
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    explicit TQWidget::TQWidget ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a widget which is a child of parent, with the name
+name and widget flags set to f.
+
     If parent is 0, the new widget becomes a top-level window. If
+parent is another widget, this widget becomes a child window
+inside parent. The new widget is deleted when its parent is
+deleted.
+
     The name is sent to the TQObject constructor.
+
     The widget flags argument, f, is normally 0, but it can be set
+to customize the window frame of a top-level widget (i.e. parent must be 0). To customize the frame, set the WStyle_Customize flag OR'ed with any of the TQt::WidgetFlags.
+
     If you add a child widget to an already visible widget you must
+explicitly show the child to make it visible.
+
     Note that the X11 version of TQt may not be able to deliver all
+combinations of style flags on all systems. This is because on
+X11, TQt can only ask the window manager, and the window manager
+can override the application's settings. On Windows, TQt can set
+whatever flags you want.
+
     Example:
+
    +    TQLabel *splashScreen = new TQLabel( 0, "mySplashScreen",
+                                WStyle_Customize | WStyle_Splash );
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    TQWidget::~TQWidget ()
+
    
+Destroys the widget.
+
     All this widget's children are deleted first. The application
+exits if this widget is the main widget.
+
+
    bool TQWidget::acceptDrops () const
+
    Returns TRUE if drop events are enabled for this widget; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "acceptDrops" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::adjustSize () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Adjusts the size of the widget to fit the contents.
+
     Uses sizeHint() if valid (i.e if the size hint's width and height
+are >= 0), otherwise sets the size to the children rectangle (the
+union of all child widget geometries).
+
     
    See also sizeHint and childrenRect.
+
+
    Example: xform/xform.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented in TQMessageBox.
+
    bool TQWidget::autoMask () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the auto mask feature is enabled for the widget; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "autoMask" property for details.
+
    const TQBrush & TQWidget::backgroundBrush () const
+
    Returns the widget's background brush.
+See the "backgroundBrush" property for details.
+
    const TQColor & TQWidget::backgroundColor () const
+
    This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+Use paletteBackgroundColor() or eraseColor() instead. 
+
    BackgroundMode TQWidget::backgroundMode () const
+
    Returns the color role used for painting the background of the widget.
+See the "backgroundMode" property for details.
+
    BackgroundOrigin TQWidget::backgroundOrigin () const
+
    Returns the origin of the widget's background.
+See the "backgroundOrigin" property for details.
+
    const TQPixmap * TQWidget::backgroundPixmap () const
+
    This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+Use paletteBackgroundPixmap()  or erasePixmap() instead. 
+
    Examples: themes/metal.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
+
    TQSize TQWidget::baseSize () const
+
    Returns the base size of the widget.
+See the "baseSize" property for details.
+
    TQString TQWidget::caption () const
+
    Returns the window caption (title).
+See the "caption" property for details.
+
    TQWidget * TQWidget::childAt ( int x, int y, bool includeThis = FALSE ) const
+
    
+Returns the visible child widget at pixel position (x, y) in
+the widget's own coordinate system.
+
     If includeThis is TRUE, and there is no child visible at (x, y), the widget itself is returned.
+
+
    TQWidget * TQWidget::childAt ( const TQPoint & p, bool includeThis = FALSE ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the visible child widget at point p in the widget's own
+coordinate system.
+
     If includeThis is TRUE, and there is no child visible at p,
+the widget itself is returned.
+
     
+
    TQRect TQWidget::childrenRect () const
+
    Returns the bounding rectangle of the widget's children.
+See the "childrenRect" property for details.
+
    TQRegion TQWidget::childrenRegion () const
+
    Returns the combined region occupied by the widget's children.
+See the "childrenRegion" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::clearFocus () [slot]
+
    
+Takes keyboard input focus from the widget.
+
     If the widget has active focus, a focus out
+    event is sent to this widget to tell it that it is about
+to lose the focus.
+
     This widget must enable focus setting in order to get the keyboard
+input focus, i.e. it must call setFocusPolicy().
+
     
    See also focus, setFocus(), focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), focusPolicy, and TQApplication::focusWidget().
+
+
    void TQWidget::clearMask ()
+
    
+Removes any mask set by setMask().
+
     
    See also setMask().
+
+
    void TQWidget::clearWFlags ( WFlags f ) [protected]
+
    
+
+
     Clears the widget flags f.
+
     Widget flags are a combination of TQt::WidgetFlags.
+
     
    See also testWFlags(), getWFlags(), and setWFlags().
+
+
    TQRegion TQWidget::clipRegion () const
+
    
+Returns the unobscured region where paint events can occur.
+
     For visible widgets, this is an approximation of the area not
+covered by other widgets; otherwise, this is an empty region.
+
     The repaint() function calls this function if necessary, so in
+general you do not need to call it.
+
     
+
    bool TQWidget::close () [slot]
+
    
+
+
     Closes this widget. Returns TRUE if the widget was closed;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     First it sends the widget a TQCloseEvent. The widget is hidden if it accepts the close event. The default implementation of
+TQWidget::closeEvent() accepts the close event.
+
     The TQApplication::lastWindowClosed() signal is emitted when the
+last visible top level widget is closed.
+
     
+
    Examples: dialog/mainwindow.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, popup/popup.cpp, and toplevel/options.ui.h.
+
    bool TQWidget::close ( bool alsoDelete ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Closes this widget. Returns TRUE if the widget was closed;
+otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     If alsoDelete is TRUE or the widget has the WDestructiveClose widget flag, the widget is also deleted. The
+widget can prevent itself from being closed by rejecting the
+TQCloseEvent it gets. A close events is delivered to the widget
+no matter if the widget is visible or not.
+
     The TQApplication::lastWindowClosed() signal is emitted when the
+last visible top level widget is closed.
+
     Note that closing the TQApplication::mainWidget() terminates the
+application.
+
     
    See also closeEvent(), TQCloseEvent, hide(), TQApplication::quit(), TQApplication::setMainWidget(), and TQApplication::lastWindowClosed().
+
+
    void TQWidget::closeEvent ( TQCloseEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler, for event e, can be reimplemented in a
+subclass to receive widget close events.
+
     The default implementation calls e->accept(), which hides this
+widget. See the TQCloseEvent documentation for more details.
+
     
    See also event(), hide(), close(), and TQCloseEvent.
+
+
    Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, chart/chartform.cpp, i18n/mywidget.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, popup/popup.cpp, and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
+
    const TQColorGroup & TQWidget::colorGroup () const
+
    Returns the current color group of the widget palette.
+See the "colorGroup" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::constPolish () const [slot]
+
    
+
+
     Ensures that the widget is properly initialized by calling
+polish().
+
     Call constPolish() from functions like sizeHint() that depends on
+the widget being initialized, and that may be called before
+show().
+
     Warning: Do not call constPolish() on a widget from inside that
+widget's constructor.
+
     
    See also polish().
+
+
    void TQWidget::contextMenuEvent ( TQContextMenuEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler, for event e, can be reimplemented in a
+subclass to receive widget context menu events.
+
     The default implementation calls e->ignore(), which rejects the
+context event. See the TQContextMenuEvent documentation for
+more details.
+
     
    See also event() and TQContextMenuEvent.
+
+
    Example: menu/menu.cpp.
+
    void TQWidget::create ( WId window = 0, bool initializeWindow = TRUE, bool destroyOldWindow = TRUE ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Creates a new widget window if window is 0, otherwise sets the
+widget's window to window.
+
     Initializes the window (sets the geometry etc.) if initializeWindow is TRUE. If initializeWindow is FALSE, no
+initialization is performed. This parameter only makes sense if window is a valid window.
+
     Destroys the old window if destroyOldWindow is TRUE. If destroyOldWindow is FALSE, you are responsible for destroying the
+window yourself (using platform native code).
+
     The TQWidget constructor calls create(0,TRUE,TRUE) to create a
+window for this widget.
+
+
    const TQCursor & TQWidget::cursor () const
+
    Returns the cursor shape for this widget.
+See the "cursor" property for details.
+
    bool TQWidget::customWhatsThis () const [virtual]
+
    Returns TRUE if the widget wants to handle What's This help manually; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "customWhatsThis" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::destroy ( bool destroyWindow = TRUE, bool destroySubWindows = TRUE ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Frees up window system resources. Destroys the widget window if destroyWindow is TRUE.
+
     destroy() calls itself recursively for all the child widgets,
+passing destroySubWindows for the destroyWindow parameter.
+To have more control over destruction of subwidgets, destroy
+subwidgets selectively first.
+
     This function is usually called from the TQWidget destructor.
+
+
    void TQWidget::dragEnterEvent ( TQDragEnterEvent * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler is called when a drag is in progress and the
+mouse enters this widget.
+
     See the Drag-and-drop documentation for an
+overview of how to provide drag-and-drop in your application.
+
     
    See also TQTextDrag, TQImageDrag, and TQDragEnterEvent.
+
+
    Example: iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp.
+
    void TQWidget::dragLeaveEvent ( TQDragLeaveEvent * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler is called when a drag is in progress and the
+mouse leaves this widget.
+
     See the Drag-and-drop documentation for an
+overview of how to provide drag-and-drop in your application.
+
     
    See also TQTextDrag, TQImageDrag, and TQDragLeaveEvent.
+
+
    void TQWidget::dragMoveEvent ( TQDragMoveEvent * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler is called when a drag is in progress and the
+mouse enters this widget, and whenever it moves within the widget.
+
     See the Drag-and-drop documentation for an
+overview of how to provide drag-and-drop in your application.
+
     
    See also TQTextDrag, TQImageDrag, and TQDragMoveEvent.
+
+
    void TQWidget::drawText ( int x, int y, const TQString & str )
+
    
+Draws the string str at position (x, y).
+
     The y position is the base line position of the text. The text
+is drawn using the default font and the default foreground color.
+
     This function is provided for convenience. You will generally get
+more flexible results and often higher speed by using a a painter instead.
+
     
    See also font, foregroundColor(), and TQPainter::drawText().
+
+
    void TQWidget::drawText ( const TQPoint & pos, const TQString & str )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Draws the string str at position pos.
+
+
    void TQWidget::dropEvent ( TQDropEvent * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler is called when the drag is dropped on this
+widget.
+
     See the Drag-and-drop documentation for an
+overview of how to provide drag-and-drop in your application.
+
     
    See also TQTextDrag, TQImageDrag, and TQDropEvent.
+
+
    Example: iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp.
+
    void TQWidget::enabledChange ( bool oldEnabled ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     This virtual function is called from setEnabled(). oldEnabled
+is the previous setting; you can get the new setting from
+isEnabled().
+
     Reimplement this function if your widget needs to know when it
+becomes enabled or disabled. You will almost certainly need to
+update the widget using update().
+
     The default implementation repaints the visible part of the
+widget.
+
     
    See also enabled, enabled, repaint(), update(), and clipRegion().
+
+
    void TQWidget::enterEvent ( TQEvent * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
+widget enter events.
+
     An event is sent to the widget when the mouse cursor enters the
+widget.
+
     
    See also leaveEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), and event().
+
+
    void TQWidget::erase ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
+
    
+Erases the specified area (x, y, w, h) in the widget without
+generating a paint event.
+
     If w is negative, it is replaced with width() - x. If h
+is negative, it is replaced width height() - y.
+
     Child widgets are not affected.
+
     
    See also repaint().
+
+
    void TQWidget::erase ()
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This version erases the entire widget.
+
+
    void TQWidget::erase ( const TQRect & r )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Erases the specified area r in the widget without generating a
+paint event.
+
+
    void TQWidget::erase ( const TQRegion & reg )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Erases the area defined by reg, without generating a paint event.
+
     Child widgets are not affected.
+
+
    const TQColor & TQWidget::eraseColor () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the erase color of the widget.
+
     
    See also setEraseColor(), setErasePixmap(), and backgroundColor().
+
+
    const TQPixmap * TQWidget::erasePixmap () const
+
    
+Returns the widget's erase pixmap.
+
     
    See also setErasePixmap() and eraseColor().
+
+
    bool TQWidget::event ( TQEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This is the main event handler; it handles event e. You can
+reimplement this function in a subclass, but we recommend using
+one of the specialized event handlers instead.
+
     The main event handler first passes an event through all event filters that have been
+installed. If none of the filters intercept the event, it calls
+one of the specialized event handlers.
+
     Key press and release events are treated differently from other
+events. event() checks for Tab and Shift+Tab and tries to move the
+focus appropriately. If there is no widget to move the focus to
+(or the key press is not Tab or Shift+Tab), event() calls
+keyPressEvent().
+
     This function returns TRUE if it is able to pass the event over to
+someone (i.e. someone wanted the event); otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also closeEvent(), focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), enterEvent(), keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), leaveEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), mousePressEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), moveEvent(), paintEvent(), resizeEvent(), TQObject::event(), and TQObject::timerEvent().
+
+
    Reimplemented from TQObject.
+
    TQWidget * TQWidget::find ( WId id ) [static]
+
    
+Returns a pointer to the widget with window identifer/handle id.
+
     The window identifier type depends on the underlying window
+system, see ntqwindowdefs.h for the actual definition. If there
+is no widget with this identifier, 0 is returned.
+
+
    TQFocusData * TQWidget::focusData () [protected]
+
    
+Returns the focus data for this widget's top-level widget.
+
     Focus data always belongs to the top-level widget. The focus data
+list contains all the widgets in this top-level widget that can
+accept focus, in tab order. An iterator points to the current
+focus widget (focusWidget() returns a pointer to this widget).
+
     This information is useful for implementing advanced versions of
+focusNextPrevChild().
+
+
    void TQWidget::focusInEvent ( TQFocusEvent * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
+keyboard focus events (focus received) for the widget.
+
     A widget normally must setFocusPolicy() to something other than
+NoFocus in order to receive focus events. (Note that the
+application programmer can call setFocus() on any widget, even
+those that do not normally accept focus.)
+
     The default implementation updates the widget (except for toplevel
+widgets that do not specify a focusPolicy() ). It also calls
+setMicroFocusHint(), hinting any system-specific input tools about
+the focus of the user's attention.
+
     
    See also focusOutEvent(), focusPolicy, keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), event(), and TQFocusEvent.
+
+
    bool TQWidget::focusNextPrevChild ( bool next ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Finds a new widget to give the keyboard focus to, as appropriate
+for Tab and Shift+Tab, and returns TRUE if is can find a new
+widget and FALSE if it can't,
+
     If next is TRUE, this function searches "forwards", if next
+is FALSE, it searches "backwards".
+
     Sometimes, you will want to reimplement this function. For
+example, a web browser might reimplement it to move its "current
+active link" forwards or backwards, and call
+TQWidget::focusNextPrevChild() only when it reaches the last or
+first link on the "page".
+
     Child widgets call focusNextPrevChild() on their parent widgets,
+but only the top-level widget decides where to redirect focus. By
+overriding this method for an object, you thus gain control of
+focus traversal for all child widgets.
+
     Warning: TQScrollView uses it own logic for this function, which
+does the right thing in most cases. But if you are using a
+TQScrollView and want complete control of the focus chain you'll
+need to override TQScrollView::focusNextPrevChild() and your
+top-level widgets' focusNextPrevChild() functions.
+
     
    See also focusData().
+
+
    void TQWidget::focusOutEvent ( TQFocusEvent * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
+keyboard focus events (focus lost) for the widget.
+
     A widget normally must setFocusPolicy() to something other than
+NoFocus in order to receive focus events. (Note that the
+application programmer can call setFocus() on any widget, even
+those that do not normally accept focus.)
+
     The default implementation updates the widget (except for toplevel
+widgets that do not specify a focusPolicy() ). It also calls
+setMicroFocusHint(), hinting any system-specific input tools about
+the focus of the user's attention.
+
     
    See also focusInEvent(), focusPolicy, keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), event(), and TQFocusEvent.
+
+
    Example: qmag/qmag.cpp.
+
    FocusPolicy TQWidget::focusPolicy () const
+
    Returns the way the widget accepts keyboard focus.
+See the "focusPolicy" property for details.
+
    TQWidget * TQWidget::focusProxy () const
+
    
+Returns the focus proxy, or 0 if there is no focus proxy.
+
     
    See also setFocusProxy().
+
+
    TQWidget * TQWidget::focusWidget () const
+
    
+Returns the focus widget in this widget's window. This is not the
+same as TQApplication::focusWidget(), which returns the focus
+widget in the currently active window.
+
+
    TQFont TQWidget::font () const
+
    Returns the font currently set for the widget.
+See the "font" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::fontChange ( const TQFont & oldFont ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     This virtual function is called from setFont(). oldFont is the
+previous font; you can get the new font from font().
+
     Reimplement this function if your widget needs to know when its
+font changes. You will almost certainly need to update the widget
+using update().
+
     The default implementation updates the widget including its
+geometry.
+
     
    See also font, font, update(), and updateGeometry().
+
+
    TQFontInfo TQWidget::fontInfo () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the font info for the widget's current font.
+Equivalent to TQFontInto(widget->font()).
+
     
    See also font, fontMetrics(), and font.
+
+
    TQFontMetrics TQWidget::fontMetrics () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the font metrics for the widget's current font.
+Equivalent to TQFontMetrics(widget->font()).
+
     
    See also font, fontInfo(), and font.
+
+
    Examples: drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp and qmag/qmag.cpp.
+
    const TQColor & TQWidget::foregroundColor () const
+
    
+Same as paletteForegroundColor()
+
+
    TQRect TQWidget::frameGeometry () const
+
    Returns geometry of the widget relative to its parent including any window frame.
+See the "frameGeometry" property for details.
+
    TQSize TQWidget::frameSize () const
+
    Returns the size of the widget including any window frame.
+See the "frameSize" property for details.
+
    const TQRect & TQWidget::geometry () const
+
    Returns the geometry of the widget relative to its parent and excluding the window frame.
+See the "geometry" property for details.
+
    WFlags TQWidget::getWFlags () const [protected]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the widget flags for this this widget.
+
     Widget flags are a combination of TQt::WidgetFlags.
+
     
    See also testWFlags(), setWFlags(), and clearWFlags().
+
+
    void TQWidget::grabKeyboard ()
+
    
+Grabs the keyboard input.
+
     This widget reveives all keyboard events until releaseKeyboard()
+is called; other widgets get no keyboard events at all. Mouse
+events are not affected. Use grabMouse() if you want to grab that.
+
     The focus widget is not affected, except that it doesn't receive
+any keyboard events. setFocus() moves the focus as usual, but the
+new focus widget receives keyboard events only after
+releaseKeyboard() is called.
+
     If a different widget is currently grabbing keyboard input, that
+widget's grab is released first.
+
     
    See also releaseKeyboard(), grabMouse(), releaseMouse(), and focusWidget().
+
+
    void TQWidget::grabMouse ()
+
    
+Grabs the mouse input.
+
     This widget receives all mouse events until releaseMouse() is
+called; other widgets get no mouse events at all. Keyboard
+events are not affected. Use grabKeyboard() if you want to grab
+that.
+
     Warning: Bugs in mouse-grabbing applications very often lock the
+terminal. Use this function with extreme caution, and consider
+using the -nograb command line option while debugging.
+
     It is almost never necessary to grab the mouse when using TQt, as
+TQt grabs and releases it sensibly. In particular, TQt grabs the
+mouse when a mouse button is pressed and keeps it until the last
+button is released.
+
     Note that only visible widgets can grab mouse input. If
+isVisible() returns FALSE for a widget, that widget cannot call
+grabMouse().
+
     
    See also releaseMouse(), grabKeyboard(), releaseKeyboard(), grabKeyboard(), and focusWidget().
+
+
    void TQWidget::grabMouse ( const TQCursor & cursor )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Grabs the mouse input and changes the cursor shape.
+
     The cursor will assume shape cursor (for as long as the mouse
+focus is grabbed) and this widget will be the only one to receive
+mouse events until releaseMouse() is called().
+
     Warning: Grabbing the mouse might lock the terminal.
+
     
    See also releaseMouse(), grabKeyboard(), releaseKeyboard(), and cursor.
+
+
    bool TQWidget::hasFocus () const
+
    Returns TRUE if this widget (or its focus proxy) has the keyboard input focus; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "focus" property for details.
+
    bool TQWidget::hasMouse () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the widget is under the mouse cursor; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "underMouse" property for details.
+
    bool TQWidget::hasMouseTracking () const
+
    Returns TRUE if mouse tracking is enabled for the widget; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "mouseTracking" property for details.
+
    int TQWidget::height () const
+
    Returns the height of the widget excluding any window frame.
+See the "height" property for details.
+
    int TQWidget::heightForWidth ( int w ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the preferred height for this widget, given the width w. The default implementation returns 0, indicating that the
+preferred height does not depend on the width.
+
     Warning: Does not look at the widget's layout.
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQMenuBar and TQTextEdit.
+
    void TQWidget::hide () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Hides the widget.
+
     You almost never have to reimplement this function. If you need to
+do something after a widget is hidden, use hideEvent() instead.
+
     
    See also hideEvent(), hidden, show(), showMinimized(), visible, and close().
+
+
    Examples: mdi/application.cpp, popup/popup.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, webbrowser/mainwindow.ui.h, and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented in TQMenuBar.
+
    void TQWidget::hideEvent ( TQHideEvent * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
+widget hide events.
+
     Hide events are sent to widgets immediately after they have been
+hidden.
+
     
    See also event() and TQHideEvent.
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQScrollBar.
+
    const TQPixmap * TQWidget::icon () const
+
    Returns the widget's icon.
+See the "icon" property for details.
+
    TQString TQWidget::iconText () const
+
    Returns the widget's icon text.
+See the "iconText" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::iconify () [slot]
+
     
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     
+
    void TQWidget::imComposeEvent ( TQIMEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler, for event e, can be reimplemented in a
+subclass to receive Input Method composition events. This handler
+is called when the user has entered some text using an Input Method.
+
     The default implementation calls e->ignore(), which rejects the
+Input Method event. See the TQIMEvent documentation for more
+details.
+
     
    See also event() and TQIMEvent.
+
+
    void TQWidget::imEndEvent ( TQIMEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler, for event e, can be reimplemented in a
+subclass to receive Input Method composition events. This handler
+is called when the user has finished inputting text via an Input
+Method.
+
     The default implementation calls e->ignore(), which rejects the
+Input Method event. See the TQIMEvent documentation for more
+details.
+
     
    See also event() and TQIMEvent.
+
+
    void TQWidget::imStartEvent ( TQIMEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler, for event e, can be reimplemented in a
+subclass to receive Input Method composition events. This handler
+is called when the user begins entering text using an Input Method.
+
     The default implementation calls e->ignore(), which rejects the
+Input Method event. See the TQIMEvent documentation for more
+details.
+
     
    See also event() and TQIMEvent.
+
+
    bool TQWidget::isActiveWindow () const
+
    Returns TRUE if this widget is the active window; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "isActiveWindow" property for details.
+
    bool TQWidget::isDesktop () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the widget is a desktop widget, i.e. represents the desktop; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "isDesktop" property for details.
+
    bool TQWidget::isDialog () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the widget is a dialog widget; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "isDialog" property for details.
+
    bool TQWidget::isEnabled () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the widget is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "enabled" property for details.
+
    bool TQWidget::isEnabledTo ( TQWidget * ancestor ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this widget would become enabled if ancestor is
+enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     This is the case if neither the widget itself nor every parent up
+to but excluding ancestor has been explicitly disabled.
+
     isEnabledTo(0) is equivalent to isEnabled().
+
     
    See also enabled and enabled.
+
+
    bool TQWidget::isEnabledToTLW () const
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     This function is deprecated. It is equivalent to isEnabled()
+
+
    bool TQWidget::isFocusEnabled () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the widget accepts keyboard focus; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "focusEnabled" property for details.
+
    bool TQWidget::isFullScreen () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the widget is full screen; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "fullScreen" property for details.
+
    bool TQWidget::isHidden () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the widget is explicitly hidden; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "hidden" property for details.
+
    bool TQWidget::isInputMethodEnabled () const
+
    Returns enables or disables the use of input methods for this widget.
+See the "inputMethodEnabled" property for details.
+
    bool TQWidget::isMaximized () const
+
    Returns TRUE if this widget is maximized; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "maximized" property for details.
+
    bool TQWidget::isMinimized () const
+
    Returns TRUE if this widget is minimized (iconified); otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "minimized" property for details.
+
    bool TQWidget::isModal () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the widget is a modal widget; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "isModal" property for details.
+
    bool TQWidget::isPopup () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the widget is a popup widget; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "isPopup" property for details.
+
    bool TQWidget::isShown () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the widget is shown; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "shown" property for details.
+
    bool TQWidget::isTopLevel () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the widget is a top-level widget; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "isTopLevel" property for details.
+
    bool TQWidget::isUpdatesEnabled () const
+
    Returns TRUE if updates are enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "updatesEnabled" property for details.
+
    bool TQWidget::isVisible () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the widget is visible; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "visible" property for details.
+
    bool TQWidget::isVisibleTo ( TQWidget * ancestor ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this widget would become visible if ancestor is
+shown; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     The TRUE case occurs if neither the widget itself nor any parent
+up to but excluding ancestor has been explicitly hidden.
+
     This function will still return TRUE if the widget is obscured by
+other windows on the screen, but could be physically visible if it
+or they were to be moved.
+
     isVisibleTo(0) is identical to isVisible().
+
     
    See also show(), hide(), and visible.
+
+
    bool TQWidget::isVisibleToTLW () const
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     This function is deprecated. It is equivalent to isVisible()
+
+
    void TQWidget::keyPressEvent ( TQKeyEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler, for event e, can be reimplemented in a
+subclass to receive key press events for the widget.
+
     A widget must call setFocusPolicy() to accept focus initially and
+have focus in order to receive a key press event.
+
     If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you
+explicitly ignore the event
+if you do not understand it, so that the widget's parent can
+interpret it; otherwise, the event will be implicitly accepted.
+Although top-level widgets are able to choose whether to accept
+or ignore unknown events because they have no parent widgets that
+could otherwise handle them, it is good practice to explicitly
+ignore events to make widgets as reusable as possible.
+
     The default implementation closes popup widgets if the user
+presses Esc. Otherwise the event is ignored.
+
     
    See also keyReleaseEvent(), TQKeyEvent::ignore(), focusPolicy, focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), event(), and TQKeyEvent.
+
+
    Example: picture/picture.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented in TQLineEdit and TQTextEdit.
+
    void TQWidget::keyReleaseEvent ( TQKeyEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler, for event e, can be reimplemented in a
+subclass to receive key release events for the widget.
+
     A widget must accept focus
+initially and have focus in order to
+receive a key release event.
+
     If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you
+ignore() the release if you do not
+understand it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it.
+
     The default implementation ignores the event.
+
     
    See also keyPressEvent(), TQKeyEvent::ignore(), focusPolicy, focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), event(), and TQKeyEvent.
+
+
    TQWidget * TQWidget::keyboardGrabber () [static]
+
    
+Returns the widget that is currently grabbing the keyboard input.
+
     If no widget in this application is currently grabbing the
+keyboard, 0 is returned.
+
     
    See also grabMouse() and mouseGrabber().
+
+
    TQLayout * TQWidget::layout () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the layout engine that manages the geometry of this
+widget's children.
+
     If the widget does not have a layout, layout() returns 0.
+
     
    See also sizePolicy.
+
+
    Examples: chart/optionsform.cpp and fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp.
+
    void TQWidget::leaveEvent ( TQEvent * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
+widget leave events.
+
     A leave event is sent to the widget when the mouse cursor leaves
+the widget.
+
     
    See also enterEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), and event().
+
+
    void TQWidget::lower () [slot]
+
    
+Lowers the widget to the bottom of the parent widget's stack.
+
     After this call the widget will be visually behind (and therefore
+obscured by) any overlapping sibling widgets.
+
     
    See also raise() and stackUnder().
+
+
    bool TQWidget::macEvent ( MSG * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This special event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to
+receive native Macintosh events.
+
     In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to stop the
+event being handled by TQt, return TRUE. If you return FALSE, this
+native event is passed back to TQt, which translates the event into
+a TQt event and sends it to the widget.
+
     Warning: This function is not portable.
+
     
    See also TQApplication::macEventFilter().
+
+
    TQPoint TQWidget::mapFrom ( TQWidget * parent, const TQPoint & pos ) const
+
    
+Translates the widget coordinate pos from the coordinate system
+of parent to this widget's coordinate system. The parent
+must not be 0 and must be a parent of the calling widget.
+
     
    See also mapTo(), mapFromParent(), mapFromGlobal(), and underMouse.
+
+
    TQPoint TQWidget::mapFromGlobal ( const TQPoint & pos ) const
+
    
+Translates the global screen coordinate pos to widget
+coordinates.
+
     
    See also mapToGlobal(), mapFrom(), and mapFromParent().
+
+
    TQPoint TQWidget::mapFromParent ( const TQPoint & pos ) const
+
    
+Translates the parent widget coordinate pos to widget
+coordinates.
+
     Same as mapFromGlobal() if the widget has no parent.
+
     
    See also mapToParent(), mapFrom(), mapFromGlobal(), and underMouse.
+
+
    TQPoint TQWidget::mapTo ( TQWidget * parent, const TQPoint & pos ) const
+
    
+Translates the widget coordinate pos to the coordinate system
+of parent. The parent must not be 0 and must be a parent
+of the calling widget.
+
     
    See also mapFrom(), mapToParent(), mapToGlobal(), and underMouse.
+
+
    TQPoint TQWidget::mapToGlobal ( const TQPoint & pos ) const
+
    
+Translates the widget coordinate pos to global screen
+coordinates. For example, mapToGlobal(TQPoint(0,0)) would give
+the global coordinates of the top-left pixel of the widget.
+
     
    See also mapFromGlobal(), mapTo(), and mapToParent().
+
+
    Example: scribble/scribble.cpp.
+
    TQPoint TQWidget::mapToParent ( const TQPoint & pos ) const
+
    
+Translates the widget coordinate pos to a coordinate in the
+parent widget.
+
     Same as mapToGlobal() if the widget has no parent.
+
     
    See also mapFromParent(), mapTo(), mapToGlobal(), and underMouse.
+
+
    int TQWidget::maximumHeight () const
+
    Returns the widget's maximum height.
+See the "maximumHeight" property for details.
+
    TQSize TQWidget::maximumSize () const
+
    Returns the widget's maximum size.
+See the "maximumSize" property for details.
+
    int TQWidget::maximumWidth () const
+
    Returns the widget's maximum width.
+See the "maximumWidth" property for details.
+
    int TQWidget::metric ( int m ) const [virtual protected]
+
    
+Internal implementation of the virtual TQPaintDevice::metric()
+function.
+
     Use the TQPaintDeviceMetrics class instead.
+
     m is the metric to get.
+
+
    TQRect TQWidget::microFocusHint () const
+
    Returns the currently set micro focus hint for this widget.
+See the "microFocusHint" property for details.
+
    int TQWidget::minimumHeight () const
+
    Returns the widget's minimum height.
+See the "minimumHeight" property for details.
+
    TQSize TQWidget::minimumSize () const
+
    Returns the widget's minimum size.
+See the "minimumSize" property for details.
+
    TQSize TQWidget::minimumSizeHint () const [virtual]
+
    Returns the recommended minimum size for the widget.
+See the "minimumSizeHint" property for details.
+
    Reimplemented in TQLineEdit.
+
    int TQWidget::minimumWidth () const
+
    Returns the widget's minimum width.
+See the "minimumWidth" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::mouseDoubleClickEvent ( TQMouseEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler, for event e, can be reimplemented in a
+subclass to receive mouse double click events for the widget.
+
     The default implementation generates a normal mouse press event.
+
     Note that the widgets gets a mousePressEvent() and a
+mouseReleaseEvent() before the mouseDoubleClickEvent().
+
     
    See also mousePressEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), event(), and TQMouseEvent.
+
+
    TQWidget * TQWidget::mouseGrabber () [static]
+
    
+Returns the widget that is currently grabbing the mouse input.
+
     If no widget in this application is currently grabbing the mouse,
+0 is returned.
+
     
    See also grabMouse() and keyboardGrabber().
+
+
    void TQWidget::mouseMoveEvent ( TQMouseEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler, for event e, can be reimplemented in a
+subclass to receive mouse move events for the widget.
+
     If mouse tracking is switched off, mouse move events only occur if
+a mouse button is pressed while the mouse is being moved. If mouse
+tracking is switched on, mouse move events occur even if no mouse
+button is pressed.
+
     TQMouseEvent::pos() reports the position of the mouse cursor,
+relative to this widget. For press and release events, the
+position is usually the same as the position of the last mouse
+move event, but it might be different if the user's hand shakes.
+This is a feature of the underlying window system, not TQt.
+
     
    See also mouseTracking, mousePressEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), event(), and TQMouseEvent.
+
+
    Examples: aclock/aclock.cpp, drawlines/connect.cpp, iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp, life/life.cpp, popup/popup.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, and scribble/scribble.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented in TQSizeGrip.
+
    void TQWidget::mousePressEvent ( TQMouseEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler, for event e, can be reimplemented in a
+subclass to receive mouse press events for the widget.
+
     If you create new widgets in the mousePressEvent() the
+mouseReleaseEvent() may not end up where you expect, depending on
+the underlying window system (or X11 window manager), the widgets'
+location and maybe more.
+
     The default implementation implements the closing of popup widgets
+when you click outside the window. For other widget types it does
+nothing.
+
     
    See also mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), event(), and TQMouseEvent.
+
+
    Examples: biff/biff.cpp, drawlines/connect.cpp, iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp, life/life.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, and tooltip/tooltip.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented in TQSizeGrip.
+
    void TQWidget::mouseReleaseEvent ( TQMouseEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler, for event e, can be reimplemented in a
+subclass to receive mouse release events for the widget.
+
     
    See also mouseDoubleClickEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), event(), and TQMouseEvent.
+
+
    Examples: drawlines/connect.cpp, hello/hello.cpp, popup/popup.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, and t14/cannon.cpp.
+
    void TQWidget::move ( const TQPoint & ) [slot]
+
    Sets the position of the widget within its parent widget.
+See the "pos" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::move ( int x, int y ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This corresponds to move( TQPoint(x, y) ).
+
+
    void TQWidget::moveEvent ( TQMoveEvent * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
+widget move events. When the widget receives this event, it is
+already at the new position.
+
     The old position is accessible through TQMoveEvent::oldPos().
+
     
    See also resizeEvent(), event(), pos, and TQMoveEvent.
+
+
    bool TQWidget::ownCursor () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the widget uses its own cursor; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "ownCursor" property for details.
+
    bool TQWidget::ownFont () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the widget uses its own font; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "ownFont" property for details.
+
    bool TQWidget::ownPalette () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the widget uses its own palette; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "ownPalette" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::paintEvent ( TQPaintEvent * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
+paint events.
+
     A paint event is a request to repaint all or part of the widget.
+It can happen as a result of repaint() or update(), or because the
+widget was obscured and has now been uncovered, or for many other
+reasons.
+
     Many widgets can simply repaint their entire surface when asked
+to, but some slow widgets need to optimize by painting only the
+requested region: TQPaintEvent::region(). This speed optimization
+does not change the result, as painting is clipped to that region
+during event processing. TQListView and TQCanvas do this, for
+example.
+
     TQt also tries to speed up painting by merging multiple paint
+events into one. When update() is called several times or the
+window system sends several paint events, TQt merges these events
+into one event with a larger region (see TQRegion::unite()).
+repaint() does not permit this optimization, so we suggest using
+update() when possible.
+
     When the paint event occurs, the update region has normally been
+erased, so that you're painting on the widget's background. There
+are a couple of exceptions and TQPaintEvent::erased() tells you
+whether the widget has been erased or not.
+
     The background can be set using setBackgroundMode(),
+setPaletteBackgroundColor() or setBackgroundPixmap(). The
+documentation for setBackgroundMode() elaborates on the
+background; we recommend reading it.
+
     
    See also event(), repaint(), update(), TQPainter, TQPixmap, and TQPaintEvent.
+
+
    Examples: drawlines/connect.cpp, forever/forever.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, splitter/splitter.cpp, t8/cannon.cpp, and t9/cannon.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented in TQButton, TQFrame, TQGLWidget, TQSizeGrip, TQStatusBar, and TQTabBar.
+
    const TQPalette & TQWidget::palette () const
+
    Returns the widget's palette.
+See the "palette" property for details.
+
    const TQColor & TQWidget::paletteBackgroundColor () const
+
    Returns the background color of the widget.
+See the "paletteBackgroundColor" property for details.
+
    const TQPixmap * TQWidget::paletteBackgroundPixmap () const
+
    Returns the background pixmap of the widget.
+See the "paletteBackgroundPixmap" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::paletteChange ( const TQPalette & oldPalette ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     This virtual function is called from setPalette(). oldPalette
+is the previous palette; you can get the new palette from
+palette().
+
     Reimplement this function if your widget needs to know when its
+palette changes.
+
     
    See also palette and palette.
+
+
    const TQColor & TQWidget::paletteForegroundColor () const
+
    Returns the foreground color of the widget.
+See the "paletteForegroundColor" property for details.
+
    TQWidget * TQWidget::parentWidget ( bool sameWindow = FALSE ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the parent of this widget, or 0 if it does not have any
+parent widget. If sameWindow is TRUE and the widget is top
+level returns 0; otherwise returns the widget's parent.
+
+
    Example: mdi/application.cpp.
+
    void TQWidget::polish () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Delayed initialization of a widget.
+
     This function will be called after a widget has been fully
+created and before it is shown the very first time.
+
     Polishing is useful for final initialization which depends on
+having an instantiated widget. This is something a constructor
+cannot guarantee since the initialization of the subclasses might
+not be finished.
+
     After this function, the widget has a proper font and palette and
+TQApplication::polish() has been called.
+
     Remember to call TQWidget's implementation first when reimplementing this
+function to ensure that your program does not end up in infinite recursion.
+
     
    See also constPolish() and TQApplication::polish().
+
+
    Example: menu/menu.cpp.
+
    TQPoint TQWidget::pos () const
+
    Returns the position of the widget within its parent widget.
+See the "pos" property for details.
+
    bool TQWidget::qwsEvent ( TQWSEvent * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This special event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to
+receive native TQt/Embedded events.
+
     In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to stop the
+event being handled by TQt, return TRUE. If you return FALSE, this
+native event is passed back to TQt, which translates the event into
+a TQt event and sends it to the widget.
+
     Warning: This function is not portable.
+
     
    See also TQApplication::qwsEventFilter().
+
+
    void TQWidget::raise () [slot]
+
    
+Raises this widget to the top of the parent widget's stack.
+
     After this call the widget will be visually in front of any
+overlapping sibling widgets.
+
     
    See also lower() and stackUnder().
+
+
    Example: showimg/showimg.cpp.
+
    void TQWidget::recreate ( TQWidget * parent, WFlags f, const TQPoint & p, bool showIt = FALSE )
+
    
+
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     This method is provided to aid porting from TQt 1.0 to 2.0. It has
+been renamed reparent() in TQt 2.0.
+
+
    TQRect TQWidget::rect () const
+
    Returns the internal geometry of the widget excluding any window frame.
+See the "rect" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::releaseKeyboard ()
+
    
+Releases the keyboard grab.
+
     
    See also grabKeyboard(), grabMouse(), and releaseMouse().
+
+
    void TQWidget::releaseMouse ()
+
    
+Releases the mouse grab.
+
     
    See also grabMouse(), grabKeyboard(), and releaseKeyboard().
+
+
    void TQWidget::repaint ( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool erase = TRUE ) [slot]
+
    
+Repaints the widget directly by calling paintEvent() immediately,
+unless updates are disabled or the widget is hidden.
+
     If erase is TRUE, TQt erases the area (x, y, w, h) before the
+paintEvent() call.
+
     If w is negative, it is replaced with width() - x, and if
+h is negative, it is replaced width height() - y.
+
     We suggest only using repaint() if you need an immediate repaint,
+for example during animation. In almost all circumstances update()
+is better, as it permits TQt to optimize for speed and minimize
+flicker.
+
     Warning: If you call repaint() in a function which may itself be
+called from paintEvent(), you may get infinite recursion. The
+update() function never causes recursion.
+
     
    See also update(), paintEvent(), updatesEnabled, and erase().
+
+
    Example: qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
+
    void TQWidget::repaint () [slot]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This version erases and repaints the entire widget.
+
+
    void TQWidget::repaint ( bool erase ) [slot]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This version repaints the entire widget.
+
+
    void TQWidget::repaint ( const TQRect & r, bool erase = TRUE ) [slot]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Repaints the widget directly by calling paintEvent() directly,
+unless updates are disabled or the widget is hidden.
+
     Erases the widget region r if erase is TRUE.
+
+
    void TQWidget::repaint ( const TQRegion & reg, bool erase = TRUE ) [slot]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Repaints the widget directly by calling paintEvent() directly,
+unless updates are disabled or the widget is hidden.
+
     Erases the widget region reg if erase is TRUE.
+
     Only use repaint if your widget needs to be repainted immediately,
+for example when doing some animation. In all other cases, use
+update(). Calling update() many times in a row will generate a
+single paint event.
+
     Warning: If you call repaint() in a function which may itself be
+called from paintEvent(), you may get infinite recursion. The
+update() function never causes recursion.
+
     
    See also update(), paintEvent(), updatesEnabled, and erase().
+
+
    void TQWidget::reparent ( TQWidget * parent, WFlags f, const TQPoint & p, bool showIt = FALSE ) [virtual]
+
    
+Reparents the widget. The widget gets a new parent, new widget
+flags (f, but as usual, use 0) at a new position in its new
+parent (p).
+
     If showIt is TRUE, show() is called once the widget has been
+reparented.
+
     If the new parent widget is in a different top-level widget, the
+reparented widget and its children are appended to the end of the
+tab chain of the new parent
+widget, in the same internal order as before. If one of the moved
+widgets had keyboard focus, reparent() calls clearFocus() for that
+widget.
+
     If the new parent widget is in the same top-level widget as the
+old parent, reparent doesn't change the tab order or keyboard
+focus.
+
     Warning: It is extremely unlikely that you will ever need this
+function. If you have a widget that changes its content
+dynamically, it is far easier to use TQWidgetStack or TQWizard.
+
     
    See also getWFlags().
+
+
    Example: toplevel/options.ui.h.
+
    void TQWidget::reparent ( TQWidget * parent, const TQPoint & p, bool showIt = FALSE )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     A convenience version of reparent that does not take widget flags
+as argument.
+
     Calls reparent(parent, getWFlags() & ~WType_Mask, p, showIt).
+
+
    void TQWidget::resetInputContext () [protected]
+
    
+This function is called when the user finishes input composition,
+e.g. changes focus to another widget, moves the cursor, etc.
+
+
    void TQWidget::resize ( const TQSize & ) [slot]
+
    Sets the size of the widget excluding any window frame.
+See the "size" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::resize ( int w, int h ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This corresponds to resize( TQSize(w, h) ).
+
+
    void TQWidget::resizeEvent ( TQResizeEvent * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
+widget resize events. When resizeEvent() is called, the widget
+already has its new geometry. The old size is accessible through
+TQResizeEvent::oldSize().
+
     The widget will be erased and receive a paint event immediately
+after processing the resize event. No drawing need be (or should
+be) done inside this handler.
+
     Widgets that have been created with the WNoAutoErase flag
+will not be erased. Nevertheless, they will receive a paint event
+for their entire area afterwards. Again, no drawing needs to be
+done inside this handler.
+
     The default implementation calls updateMask() if the widget has
+automatic masking enabled.
+
     
    See also moveEvent(), event(), size, TQResizeEvent, and paintEvent().
+
+
    Examples: drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, tooltip/tooltip.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    Reimplemented in TQFrame and TQGLWidget.
+
    void TQWidget::scroll ( int dx, int dy )
+
    
+Scrolls the widget including its children dx pixels to the
+right and dy downwards. Both dx and dy may be negative.
+
     After scrolling, scroll() sends a paint event for the the part
+that is read but not written. For example, when scrolling 10
+pixels rightwards, the leftmost ten pixels of the widget need
+repainting. The paint event may be delivered immediately or later,
+depending on some heuristics (note that you might have to force
+processing of paint events using TQApplication::sendPostedEvents()
+when using scroll() and move() in combination).
+
     
    See also TQScrollView, erase(), and bitBlt().
+
+
    void TQWidget::scroll ( int dx, int dy, const TQRect & r )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This version only scrolls r and does not move the children of
+the widget.
+
     If r is empty or invalid, the result is undefined.
+
     
    See also TQScrollView, erase(), and bitBlt().
+
+
    void TQWidget::setAcceptDrops ( bool on ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether drop events are enabled for this widget to on.
+See the "acceptDrops" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::setActiveWindow () [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the top-level widget containing this widget to be the active
+window.
+
     An active window is a visible top-level window that has the
+keyboard input focus.
+
     This function performs the same operation as clicking the mouse on
+the title bar of a top-level window. On X11, the result depends on
+the Window Manager. If you want to ensure that the window is
+stacked on top as well you should also call raise(). Note that the
+window must be visible, otherwise setActiveWindow() has no effect.
+
     On Windows, if you are calling this when the application is not
+currently the active one then it will not make it the active
+window.  It will flash the task bar entry blue to indicate that
+the window has done something. This is because Microsoft do not
+allow an application to interrupt what the user is currently doing
+in another application.
+
     
    See also isActiveWindow, topLevelWidget(), and show().
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQXtWidget.
+
    void TQWidget::setAutoMask ( bool ) [virtual]
+
    Sets whether the auto mask feature is enabled for the widget.
+See the "autoMask" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::setBackgroundColor ( const TQColor & c ) [virtual]
+
    This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+Use setPaletteBackgroundColor() or setEraseColor() instead. 
+
    Examples: customlayout/main.cpp, desktop/desktop.cpp, hello/main.cpp, movies/main.cpp, and splitter/splitter.cpp.
+
    void TQWidget::setBackgroundMode ( BackgroundMode ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the color role used for painting the background of the widget.
+See the "backgroundMode" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::setBackgroundMode ( BackgroundMode m, BackgroundMode visual )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the widget's own background mode to m and the visual
+background mode to visual. The visual background mode is used
+with the designable properties backgroundColor, foregroundColor and backgroundPixmap.
+
     For complex controls, the logical background mode sometimes
+differs from a widget's own background mode. A spinbox for example
+has PaletteBackground as background mode (typically dark gray),
+while it's embedded lineedit control uses PaletteBase
+(typically white). Since the lineedit covers most of the visual
+area of a spinbox, it defines PaletteBase to be its visual
+background mode. Changing the backgroundColor property thus
+changes the lineedit control's background, which is exactly what
+the user expects in TQt Designer.
+
+
    void TQWidget::setBackgroundOrigin ( BackgroundOrigin ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the origin of the widget's background.
+See the "backgroundOrigin" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::setBackgroundPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pm ) [virtual]
+
    This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+Use setPaletteBackgroundPixmap() or setErasePixmap() instead. 
+
    Example: desktop/desktop.cpp.
+
    void TQWidget::setBaseSize ( const TQSize & )
+
    Sets the base size of the widget.
+See the "baseSize" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::setBaseSize ( int basew, int baseh )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This corresponds to setBaseSize( TQSize(basew, baseh) ). Sets
+the widgets base size to width basew and height baseh.
+
+
    void TQWidget::setCaption ( const TQString & ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the window caption (title).
+See the "caption" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::setCursor ( const TQCursor & ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the cursor shape for this widget.
+See the "cursor" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::setDisabled ( bool disable ) [slot]
+
    
+Disables widget input events if disable is TRUE; otherwise
+enables input events.
+
     See the enabled documentation for more information.
+
     
    See also isEnabledTo(), TQKeyEvent, TQMouseEvent, and enabledChange().
+
+
    void TQWidget::setEnabled ( bool ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets whether the widget is enabled.
+See the "enabled" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::setEraseColor ( const TQColor & color ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the erase color of the widget to color.
+
     The erase color is the color the widget is to be cleared to before
+paintEvent() is called. If there is an erase pixmap (set using
+setErasePixmap()), then this property has an indeterminate value.
+
     
    See also erasePixmap(), backgroundColor(), backgroundMode, and palette.
+
+
    void TQWidget::setErasePixmap ( const TQPixmap & pixmap ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the widget's erase pixmap to pixmap.
+
     This pixmap is used to clear the widget before paintEvent() is
+called.
+
+
    void TQWidget::setFixedHeight ( int h )
+
    
+Sets both the minimum and maximum heights of the widget to h
+without changing the widths. Provided for convenience.
+
     
    See also sizeHint, minimumSize, maximumSize, and setFixedSize().
+
+
    Examples: fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp, layout/layout.cpp, qdir/qdir.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
+
    void TQWidget::setFixedSize ( const TQSize & s )
+
    
+Sets both the minimum and maximum sizes of the widget to s,
+thereby preventing it from ever growing or shrinking.
+
     
    See also maximumSize and minimumSize.
+
+
    void TQWidget::setFixedSize ( int w, int h )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the width of the widget to w and the height to h.
+
+
    void TQWidget::setFixedWidth ( int w )
+
    
+Sets both the minimum and maximum width of the widget to w
+without changing the heights. Provided for convenience.
+
     
    See also sizeHint, minimumSize, maximumSize, and setFixedSize().
+
+
    Examples: progressbar/progressbar.cpp and qdir/qdir.cpp.
+
    void TQWidget::setFocus () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Gives the keyboard input focus to this widget (or its focus
+proxy) if this widget or one of its parents is the active window.
+
     First, a focus out event is sent to the focus widget (if any) to
+tell it that it is about to lose the focus. Then a focus in event
+is sent to this widget to tell it that it just received the focus.
+(Nothing happens if the focus in and focus out widgets are the
+same.)
+
     setFocus() gives focus to a widget regardless of its focus policy,
+but does not clear any keyboard grab (see grabKeyboard()).
+
     Be aware that if the widget is hidden, it will not accept focus.
+
     Warning: If you call setFocus() in a function which may itself be
+called from focusOutEvent() or focusInEvent(), you may get an
+infinite recursion.
+
     
    See also focus, clearFocus(), focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), focusPolicy, TQApplication::focusWidget(), grabKeyboard(), and grabMouse().
+
+
    Examples: addressbook/centralwidget.cpp, lineedits/lineedits.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, popup/popup.cpp, rot13/rot13.cpp, t8/main.cpp, and wizard/wizard.cpp.
+
    void TQWidget::setFocusPolicy ( FocusPolicy ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the way the widget accepts keyboard focus.
+See the "focusPolicy" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::setFocusProxy ( TQWidget * w ) [virtual]
+
    
+Sets the widget's focus proxy to widget w. If w is 0, the
+function resets this widget to have no focus proxy.
+
     Some widgets, such as TQComboBox, can "have focus", but create a
+child widget to actually handle the focus. TQComboBox, for example,
+creates a TQLineEdit which handles the focus.
+
     setFocusProxy() sets the widget which will actually get focus when
+"this widget" gets it. If there is a focus proxy, focusPolicy(),
+setFocusPolicy(), setFocus() and hasFocus() all operate on the
+focus proxy.
+
     
    See also focusProxy().
+
+
    void TQWidget::setFont ( const TQFont & ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the font currently set for the widget.
+See the "font" property for details.
+
    Reimplemented in TQComboBox, TQLabel, and TQTabDialog.
+
    void TQWidget::setFont ( const TQFont & f, bool )
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Use setFont(const TQFont& font) instead.
+
+
    void TQWidget::setGeometry ( const TQRect & ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the geometry of the widget relative to its parent and excluding the window frame.
+See the "geometry" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::setGeometry ( int x, int y, int w, int h ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This corresponds to setGeometry( TQRect(x, y, w, h) ).
+
+
    void TQWidget::setHidden ( bool hide ) [slot]
+
    Sets whether the widget is explicitly hidden to hide.
+See the "hidden" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::setIcon ( const TQPixmap & ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the widget's icon.
+See the "icon" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::setIconText ( const TQString & ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets the widget's icon text.
+See the "iconText" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::setInputMethodEnabled ( bool b )
+
    Sets enables or disables the use of input methods for this widget to b.
+See the "inputMethodEnabled" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::setKeyCompression ( bool compress ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+Enables key event compression, if compress is TRUE, and
+disables it if compress is FALSE.
+
     Key compression is off by default (except for TQLineEdit and
+TQTextEdit), so widgets receive one key press event for each key
+press (or more, since autorepeat is usually on). If you turn it on
+and your program doesn't keep up with key input, TQt may try to
+compress key events so that more than one character can be
+processed in each event.
+
     For example, a word processor widget might receive 2, 3 or more
+characters in each TQKeyEvent::text(), if the layout recalculation
+takes too long for the CPU.
+
     If a widget supports multiple character unicode input, it is
+always safe to turn the compression on.
+
     TQt performs key event compression only for printable characters.
+Modifier keys, cursor movement keys, function keys and
+miscellaneous action keys (e.g. Escape, Enter, Backspace,
+PrintScreen) will stop key event compression, even if there are
+more compressible key events available.
+
     Not all platforms support this compression, in which case turning
+it on will have no effect.
+
     
    See also TQKeyEvent::text().
+
+
    void TQWidget::setMask ( const TQBitmap & bitmap ) [virtual]
+
    
+Causes only the pixels of the widget for which bitmap has a
+corresponding 1 bit to be visible. Use TQt::color0 to draw
+transparent regions and TQt::color1 to draw opaque regions of the
+bitmap.
+
     If the region includes pixels outside the rect() of the widget,
+window system controls in that area may or may not be visible,
+depending on the platform.
+
     Note that this effect can be slow if the region is particularly
+complex.
+
     See examples/tux for an example of masking for transparency.
+
     
    See also clearMask().
+
+
    void TQWidget::setMask ( const TQRegion & region ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Causes only the parts of the widget which overlap region to be
+visible. If the region includes pixels outside the rect() of the
+widget, window system controls in that area may or may not be
+visible, depending on the platform.
+
     Note that this effect can be slow if the region is particularly
+complex.
+
     
    See also clearMask().
+
+
    void TQWidget::setMaximumHeight ( int maxh )
+
    Sets the widget's maximum height to maxh.
+See the "maximumHeight" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::setMaximumSize ( const TQSize & )
+
    Sets the widget's maximum size.
+See the "maximumSize" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::setMaximumSize ( int maxw, int maxh ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This function corresponds to setMaximumSize( TQSize(maxw, maxh) ). Sets the maximum width to maxw and the maximum height
+to maxh.
+
+
    void TQWidget::setMaximumWidth ( int maxw )
+
    Sets the widget's maximum width to maxw.
+See the "maximumWidth" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::setMicroFocusHint ( int x, int y, int width, int height, bool text = TRUE, TQFont * f = 0 ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+When a widget gets focus, it should call setMicroFocusHint() with
+some appropriate position and size, x, y, width and height. This has no visual effect, it just provides hints to
+any system-specific input handling tools.
+
     The text argument should be TRUE if this is a position for text
+input.
+
     In the Windows version of TQt, this method sets the system caret,
+which is used for user Accessibility focus handling.  If text
+is TRUE, it also sets the IME composition window in Far East Asian
+language input systems.
+
     In the X11 version of TQt, if text is TRUE, this method sets the
+XIM "spot" point for complex language input handling.
+
     The font f is a rendering hint to the currently active input method.
+If f is 0 the widget's font is used.
+
     
    See also microFocusHint.
+
+
    void TQWidget::setMinimumHeight ( int minh )
+
    Sets the widget's minimum height to minh.
+See the "minimumHeight" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::setMinimumSize ( const TQSize & )
+
    Sets the widget's minimum size.
+See the "minimumSize" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::setMinimumSize ( int minw, int minh ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This function corresponds to setMinimumSize( TQSize(minw, minh) ).
+Sets the minimum width to minw and the minimum height to minh.
+
+
    void TQWidget::setMinimumWidth ( int minw )
+
    Sets the widget's minimum width to minw.
+See the "minimumWidth" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::setMouseTracking ( bool enable ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets whether mouse tracking is enabled for the widget to enable.
+See the "mouseTracking" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::setPalette ( const TQPalette & ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the widget's palette.
+See the "palette" property for details.
+
    Reimplemented in TQComboBox, TQScrollBar, and TQSlider.
+
    void TQWidget::setPalette ( const TQPalette & p, bool )
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Use setPalette( const TQPalette& p ) instead.
+
+
    void TQWidget::setPaletteBackgroundColor ( const TQColor & ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the background color of the widget.
+See the "paletteBackgroundColor" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::setPaletteBackgroundPixmap ( const TQPixmap & ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the background pixmap of the widget.
+See the "paletteBackgroundPixmap" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::setPaletteForegroundColor ( const TQColor & )
+
    Sets the foreground color of the widget.
+See the "paletteForegroundColor" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::setShown ( bool show ) [slot]
+
    Sets whether the widget is shown to show.
+See the "shown" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::setSizeIncrement ( const TQSize & )
+
    Sets the size increment of the widget.
+See the "sizeIncrement" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::setSizeIncrement ( int w, int h ) [virtual]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the x (width) size increment to w and the y (height) size
+increment to h.
+
+
    void TQWidget::setSizePolicy ( TQSizePolicy ) [virtual]
+
    Sets the default layout behavior of the widget.
+See the "sizePolicy" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::setSizePolicy ( TQSizePolicy::SizeType hor, TQSizePolicy::SizeType ver, bool hfw = FALSE )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the size policy of the widget to hor, ver and hfw
+(height for width).
+
     
    See also TQSizePolicy::TQSizePolicy().
+
+
    void TQWidget::setStyle ( TQStyle * style )
+
    
+Sets the widget's GUI style to style. Ownership of the style
+object is not transferred.
+
     If no style is set, the widget uses the application's style,
+TQApplication::style() instead.
+
     Setting a widget's style has no effect on existing or future child
+widgets.
+
     Warning: This function is particularly useful for demonstration
+purposes, where you want to show TQt's styling capabilities. Real
+applications should avoid it and use one consistent GUI style
+instead.
+
     
    See also style(), TQStyle, TQApplication::style(), and TQApplication::setStyle().
+
+
    Examples: grapher/grapher.cpp and progressbar/progressbar.cpp.
+
    TQStyle * TQWidget::setStyle ( const TQString & style )
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Sets the widget's GUI style to style using the TQStyleFactory.
+
+
    void TQWidget::setTabOrder ( TQWidget * first, TQWidget * second ) [static]
+
    
+Moves the second widget around the ring of focus widgets so
+that keyboard focus moves from the first widget to the second widget when the Tab key is pressed.
+
     Note that since the tab order of the second widget is changed,
+you should order a chain like this:
+
     
    +        setTabOrder( a, b ); // a to b
+        setTabOrder( b, c ); // a to b to c
+        setTabOrder( c, d ); // a to b to c to d
+    
    
+ 
+
     not like this:
+
     
    +        setTabOrder( c, d ); // c to d   WRONG
+        setTabOrder( a, b ); // a to b AND c to d
+        setTabOrder( b, c ); // a to b to c, but not c to d
+    
    
+ 
+
     If first or second has a focus proxy, setTabOrder()
+correctly substitutes the proxy.
+
     
    See also focusPolicy and setFocusProxy().
+
+
    Example: customlayout/main.cpp.
+
    void TQWidget::setUpdatesEnabled ( bool enable ) [virtual slot]
+
    Sets whether updates are enabled to enable.
+See the "updatesEnabled" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::setWFlags ( WFlags f ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     Sets the widget flags f.
+
     Widget flags are a combination of TQt::WidgetFlags.
+
     
    See also testWFlags(), getWFlags(), and clearWFlags().
+
+
    void TQWidget::setWindowOpacity ( double level )
+
    Sets the level of opacity for the window to level.
+See the "windowOpacity" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::setWindowState ( uint windowState )
+
    
+
+
     Sets the window state to windowState. The window state is a OR'ed
+combination of TQt::WindowState: WindowMinimized, WindowMaximized, WindowFullScreen and WindowActive.
+
     If the window is not visible (i.e. isVisible() returns FALSE), the
+window state will take effect when show() is called. For visible
+windows, the change is immediate. For example, to toggle between
+full-screen and mormal mode, use the following code:
+
     
    +        w->setWindowState(w->windowState() ^ WindowFullScreen);
+  
    
+ 
+
     In order to restore and activate a minimized window (while
+preserving its maximized and/or full-screen state), use the following:
+
     
    +        w->setWindowState(w->windowState() & ~WindowMinimized | WindowActive);
+  
    
+ 
+
     Note: On some window systems WindowActive is not immediate, and may be
+ignored in certain cases.
+
     
    See also TQt::WindowState and windowState().
+
+
    void TQWidget::show () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Shows the widget and its child widgets.
+
     If its size or position has changed, TQt guarantees that a widget
+gets move and resize events just before it is shown.
+
     You almost never have to reimplement this function. If you need to
+change some settings before a widget is shown, use showEvent()
+instead. If you need to do some delayed initialization use
+polish().
+
     
    See also showEvent(), hide(), showMinimized(), showMaximized(), showNormal(), visible, and polish().
+
+
    Examples: aclock/main.cpp, life/main.cpp, popup/popup.cpp, t1/main.cpp, t3/main.cpp, t4/main.cpp, and toplevel/options.ui.h.
+
    Reimplemented in TQDialog and TQMenuBar.
+
    void TQWidget::showEvent ( TQShowEvent * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
+widget show events.
+
     Non-spontaneous show events are sent to widgets immediately before
+they are shown. The spontaneous show events of top-level widgets
+are delivered afterwards.
+
     
    See also event() and TQShowEvent.
+
+
    Example: qdir/qdir.cpp.
+
    void TQWidget::showFullScreen () [slot]
+
    
+Shows the widget in full-screen mode.
+
     Calling this function only affects top-level widgets.
+
     To return from full-screen mode, call showNormal().
+
     Full-screen mode works fine under Windows, but has certain
+problems under X. These problems are due to limitations of the
+ICCCM protocol that specifies the communication between X11
+clients and the window manager. ICCCM simply does not understand
+the concept of non-decorated full-screen windows. Therefore, the
+best we can do is to request a borderless window and place and
+resize it to fill the entire screen. Depending on the window
+manager, this may or may not work. The borderless window is
+requested using MOTIF hints, which are at least partially
+supported by virtually all modern window managers.
+
     An alternative would be to bypass the window manager entirely and
+create a window with the WX11BypassWM flag. This has other severe
+problems though, like totally broken keyboard focus and very
+strange effects on desktop changes or when the user raises other
+windows.
+
     X11 window managers that follow modern post-ICCCM specifications
+support full-screen mode properly.
+
     
    See also showNormal(), showMaximized(), show(), hide(), and visible.
+
+
    void TQWidget::showMaximized () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Shows the widget maximized.
+
     Calling this function only affects top-level
+    widgets.
+
     On X11, this function may not work properly with certain window
+managers. See the Window Geometry
+    documentation for an explanation.
+
     
    See also setWindowState(), showNormal(), showMinimized(), show(), hide(), and visible.
+
+
    Examples: canvas/main.cpp, helpviewer/main.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, qwerty/main.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, and scribble/main.cpp.
+
    void TQWidget::showMinimized () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Shows the widget minimized, as an icon.
+
     Calling this function only affects top-level
+    widgets.
+
     
    See also showNormal(), showMaximized(), show(), hide(), visible, and minimized.
+
+
    void TQWidget::showNormal () [virtual slot]
+
    
+Restores the widget after it has been maximized or minimized.
+
     Calling this function only affects top-level
+    widgets.
+
     
    See also setWindowState(), showMinimized(), showMaximized(), show(), hide(), and visible.
+
+
    Example: mdi/application.cpp.
+
    TQSize TQWidget::size () const
+
    Returns the size of the widget excluding any window frame.
+See the "size" property for details.
+
    TQSize TQWidget::sizeHint () const [virtual]
+
    Returns the recommended size for the widget.
+See the "sizeHint" property for details.
+
    Reimplemented in TQSizeGrip.
+
    TQSize TQWidget::sizeIncrement () const
+
    Returns the size increment of the widget.
+See the "sizeIncrement" property for details.
+
    TQSizePolicy TQWidget::sizePolicy () const [virtual]
+
    Returns the default layout behavior of the widget.
+See the "sizePolicy" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::stackUnder ( TQWidget * w ) [slot]
+
    
+Places the widget under w in the parent widget's stack.
+
     To make this work, the widget itself and w must be siblings.
+
     
    See also raise() and lower().
+
+
    TQStyle & TQWidget::style () const
+
    
+Returns the GUI style for this widget
+
     
    See also TQWidget::setStyle(), TQApplication::setStyle(), and TQApplication::style().
+
+
    void TQWidget::styleChange ( TQStyle & oldStyle ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This virtual function is called when the style of the widgets
+changes. oldStyle is the previous GUI style; you can get the
+new style from style().
+
     Reimplement this function if your widget needs to know when its
+GUI style changes. You will almost certainly need to update the
+widget using update().
+
     The default implementation updates the widget including its
+geometry.
+
     
    See also TQApplication::setStyle(), style(), update(), and updateGeometry().
+
+
    void TQWidget::tabletEvent ( TQTabletEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler, for event e, can be reimplemented in a
+subclass to receive tablet events for the widget.
+
     If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you
+ignore() the event if you do not handle
+it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it.
+
     The default implementation ignores the event.
+
     
    See also TQTabletEvent::ignore(), TQTabletEvent::accept(), event(), and TQTabletEvent.
+
+
    WFlags TQWidget::testWFlags ( WFlags f ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the bitwise AND of the widget flags and f.
+
     Widget flags are a combination of TQt::WidgetFlags.
+
     If you want to test for the presence of multiple flags (or
+composite flags such as WStyle_Splash), test the
+return value for equality against the argument. For example:
+
     
    +    int flags = WStyle_Tool | WStyle_NoBorder;
+    if ( testWFlags(flags) )
+        ... // WStyle_Tool or WStyle_NoBorder or both are set
+    if ( testWFlags(flags) == flags )
+        ... // both WStyle_Tool and WStyle_NoBorder are set
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also getWFlags(), setWFlags(), and clearWFlags().
+
+
    TQWidget * TQWidget::topLevelWidget () const
+
    
+Returns the top-level widget for this widget, i.e. the next
+ancestor widget that has (or could have) a window-system frame.
+
     If the widget is a top-level, the widget itself is returned.
+
     Typical usage is changing the window caption:
+
     
    +        aWidget->topLevelWidget()->setCaption( "New Caption" );
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also isTopLevel.
+
+
    void TQWidget::unsetCursor () [virtual]
+
    Resets the cursor shape for this widget.
+See the "cursor" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::unsetFont ()
+
    Resets the font currently set for the widget.
+See the "font" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::unsetPalette ()
+
    Resets the widget's palette.
+See the "palette" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::update () [slot]
+
    
+Updates the widget unless updates are disabled or the widget is
+hidden.
+
     This function does not cause an immediate repaint; instead it
+schedules a paint event for processing when TQt returns to the main
+event loop. This permits TQt to optimize for more speed and less
+flicker than a call to repaint() does.
+
     Calling update() several times normally results in just one
+paintEvent() call.
+
     TQt normally erases the widget's area before the paintEvent() call.
+If the WRepaintNoErase widget flag is set, the widget is
+responsible for painting all its pixels itself.
+
     
    See also repaint(), paintEvent(), updatesEnabled, erase(), and setWFlags().
+
+
    Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp and scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
+
    void TQWidget::update ( int x, int y, int w, int h ) [slot]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Updates a rectangle (x, y, w, h) inside the widget
+unless updates are disabled or the widget is hidden.
+
     This function does not cause an immediate repaint; instead it
+schedules a paint event for processing when TQt returns to the main
+event loop. This permits TQt to optimize for more speed and less
+flicker and a call to repaint() does.
+
     Calling update() several times normally results in just one
+paintEvent() call.
+
     If w is negative, it is replaced with width() - x. If h
+is negative, it is replaced width height() - y.
+
     TQt normally erases the specified area before the paintEvent()
+call. If the WRepaintNoErase widget flag is set, the widget is
+responsible for painting all its pixels itself.
+
     
    See also repaint(), paintEvent(), updatesEnabled, and erase().
+
+
    void TQWidget::update ( const TQRect & r ) [slot]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Updates a rectangle r inside the widget unless updates are
+disabled or the widget is hidden.
+
     This function does not cause an immediate repaint; instead it
+schedules a paint event for processing when TQt returns to the main
+event loop. This permits TQt to optimize for more speed and less
+flicker and a call to repaint() does.
+
     Calling update() several times normally results in just one
+paintEvent() call.
+
+
    void TQWidget::updateGeometry ()
+
    
+Notifies the layout system that this widget has changed and may
+need to change geometry.
+
     Call this function if the sizeHint() or sizePolicy() have changed.
+
     For explicitly hidden widgets, updateGeometry() is a no-op. The
+layout system will be notified as soon as the widget is shown.
+
+
    void TQWidget::updateMask () [virtual protected]
+
    
+This function can be reimplemented in a subclass to support
+transparent widgets. It should be called whenever a widget changes
+state in a way that means that the shape mask must be recalculated.
+
     
    See also autoMask, setMask(), and clearMask().
+
+
    TQRect TQWidget::visibleRect () const
+
    Returns the visible rectangle.
+See the "visibleRect" property for details.
+
    void TQWidget::wheelEvent ( TQWheelEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This event handler, for event e, can be reimplemented in a
+subclass to receive wheel events for the widget.
+
     If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you
+ignore() the event if you do not handle
+it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it.
+
     The default implementation ignores the event.
+
     
    See also TQWheelEvent::ignore(), TQWheelEvent::accept(), event(), and TQWheelEvent.
+
+
    int TQWidget::width () const
+
    Returns the width of the widget excluding any window frame.
+See the "width" property for details.
+
    bool TQWidget::winEvent ( MSG * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This special event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to
+receive native Windows events.
+
     In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to stop the
+event being handled by TQt, return TRUE. If you return FALSE, this
+native event is passed back to TQt, which translates the event into
+a TQt event and sends it to the widget.
+
     Warning: This function is not portable.
+
     
    See also TQApplication::winEventFilter().
+
+
    WId TQWidget::winId () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the window system identifier of the widget.
+
     Portable in principle, but if you use it you are probably about to
+do something non-portable. Be careful.
+
     
    See also find().
+
+
    void TQWidget::windowActivationChange ( bool oldActive ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+
+
     This virtual function is called for a widget when its window is
+activated or deactivated by the window system. oldActive is the
+previous state; you can get the new setting from isActiveWindow().
+
     Reimplement this function if your widget needs to know when its
+window becomes activated or deactivated.
+
     The default implementation updates the visible part of the widget
+if the inactive and the active colorgroup are different for colors
+other than the highlight and link colors.
+
     
    See also setActiveWindow(), isActiveWindow, update(), and palette.
+
+
    double TQWidget::windowOpacity () const
+
    Returns the level of opacity for the window.
+See the "windowOpacity" property for details.
+
    uint TQWidget::windowState () const
+
      Returns the current window state. The window state is a OR'ed
+combination of TQt::WindowState: WindowMinimized, WindowMaximized, WindowFullScreen and WindowActive.
+
     
    See also TQt::WindowState and setWindowState().
+
+
    int TQWidget::x () const
+
    Returns the x coordinate of the widget relative to its parent including any window frame.
+See the "x" property for details.
+
    bool TQWidget::x11Event ( XEvent * ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This special event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to
+receive native X11 events.
+
     In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to stop the
+event being handled by TQt, return TRUE. If you return FALSE, this
+native event is passed back to TQt, which translates the event into
+a TQt event and sends it to the widget.
+
     Warning: This function is not portable.
+
     
    See also TQApplication::x11EventFilter().
+
+
    Reimplemented in TQXtWidget.
+
    int TQWidget::y () const
+
    Returns the y coordinate of the widget relative to its parent and including any window frame.
+See the "y" property for details.
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    bool acceptDrops
    
+
    This property holds whether drop events are enabled for this widget.
+
    Setting this property to TRUE announces to the system that this
+widget may be able to accept drop events.
+
     If the widget is the desktop (TQWidget::isDesktop()), this may
+fail if another application is using the desktop; you can call
+acceptDrops() to test if this occurs.
+
     Warning:
+Do not modify this property in a Drag&Drop event handler.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setAcceptDrops() and get this property's value with acceptDrops().
+
    bool autoMask
    
+
    This property holds whether the auto mask feature is enabled for the widget.
+
    Transparent widgets use a mask to define their visible region.
+TQWidget has some built-in support to make the task of
+recalculating the mask easier. When setting auto mask to TRUE,
+updateMask() will be called whenever the widget is resized or
+changes its focus state. Note that you must reimplement
+updateMask() (which should include a call to setMask()) or nothing
+will happen.
+
     Note: when you re-implement resizeEvent(), focusInEvent() or
+focusOutEvent() in your custom widgets and still want to ensure
+that the auto mask calculation works, you should add:
+
     
    +        if ( autoMask() )
+            updateMask();
+    
    
+ 
+
     at the end of your event handlers. This is true for all member
+functions that change the appearance of the widget in a way that
+requires a recalculation of the mask.
+
     While being a technically appealing concept, masks have a big
+drawback: when using complex masks that cannot be expressed easily
+with relatively simple regions, they can be very slow on some
+window systems. The classic example is a transparent label. The
+complex shape of its contents makes it necessary to represent its
+mask by a bitmap, which consumes both memory and time. If all you
+want is to blend the background of several neighboring widgets
+together seamlessly, you will probably want to use
+setBackgroundOrigin() rather than a mask.
+
     
    See also updateMask(), setMask(), clearMask(), and backgroundOrigin.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setAutoMask() and get this property's value with autoMask().
+
    TQBrush backgroundBrush
    
+
    This property holds the widget's background brush.
+
    The background brush depends on a widget's palette and its
+background mode.
+
     
    See also backgroundColor(), backgroundPixmap(), eraseColor(), palette, and TQApplication::setPalette().
+
+
    Get this property's value with backgroundBrush().
+
    BackgroundMode backgroundMode
    
+
    This property holds the color role used for painting the background of the widget.
+
    setPaletteBackgroundColor() reads this property to determine which
+entry of the palette to set.
+
     For most widgets the default suffices (PaletteBackground,
+typically gray), but some need to use PaletteBase (the
+background color for text output, typically white) or another
+role.
+
     TQListBox, which is "sunken" and uses the base color to contrast
+with its environment, does this in its constructor:
+
     
    +    setBackgroundMode( PaletteBase );
+    
    
+ 
+
     You will never need to set the background mode of a built-in
+widget in TQt, but you might consider setting it in your custom
+widgets, so that setPaletteBackgroundColor() works as expected.
+
     Note that two of the BackgroundMode values make no sense for
+setBackgroundMode(), namely FixedPixmap and FixedColor. You
+must call setBackgroundPixmap() and setPaletteBackgroundColor()
+instead.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setBackgroundMode() and get this property's value with backgroundMode().
+
    BackgroundOrigin backgroundOrigin
    
+
    This property holds the origin of the widget's background.
+
    The origin is either WidgetOrigin (the default), ParentOrigin,
+WindowOrigin or AncestorOrigin.
+
     This only makes a difference if the widget has a background
+pixmap, in which case positioning matters. Using WindowOrigin
+for several neighboring widgets makes the background blend
+together seamlessly. AncestorOrigin allows blending backgrounds
+seamlessly when an ancestor of the widget has an origin other than
+WindowOrigin.
+
     
    See also backgroundPixmap() and backgroundMode.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setBackgroundOrigin() and get this property's value with backgroundOrigin().
+
    TQSize baseSize
    
+
    This property holds the base size of the widget.
+
    The base size is used to calculate a proper widget size if the
+widget defines sizeIncrement().
+
     
    See also sizeIncrement.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setBaseSize() and get this property's value with baseSize().
+
    TQString caption
    
+
    This property holds the window caption (title).
+
    This property only makes sense for top-level widgets. If no
+caption has been set, the caption is TQString::null.
+
     
    See also icon and iconText.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setCaption() and get this property's value with caption().
+
    TQRect childrenRect
    
+
    This property holds the bounding rectangle of the widget's children.
+
    Hidden children are excluded.
+
     
    See also childrenRegion and geometry.
+
+
    Get this property's value with childrenRect().
+
    TQRegion childrenRegion
    
+
    This property holds the combined region occupied by the widget's children.
+
    Hidden children are excluded.
+
     
    See also childrenRect and geometry.
+
+
    Get this property's value with childrenRegion().
+
    TQColorGroup colorGroup
    
+
    This property holds the current color group of the widget palette.
+
    The color group is determined by the state of the widget. A
+disabled widget has the TQPalette::disabled() color group, a widget
+with keyboard focus has the TQPalette::active() color group, and an
+inactive widget has the TQPalette::inactive() color group.
+
     
    See also palette.
+
+
    Get this property's value with colorGroup().
+
    TQCursor cursor
    
+
    This property holds the cursor shape for this widget.
+
    The mouse cursor will assume this shape when it's over this
+widget. See the list of predefined cursor
+    objects for a range of useful shapes.
+
     An editor widget might use an I-beam cursor:
+
    +        setCursor( IbeamCursor );
+    
    
+ 
+
     If no cursor has been set, or after a call to unsetCursor(), the
+parent's cursor is used. The function unsetCursor() has no effect
+on top-level widgets.
+
     
    See also TQApplication::setOverrideCursor().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setCursor(), get this property's value with cursor(), and reset this property's value with unsetCursor().
+
    bool customWhatsThis
    
+
    This property holds whether the widget wants to handle What's This help manually.
+
    The default implementation of customWhatsThis() returns FALSE,
+which means the widget will not receive any events in Whats This
+mode.
+
     The widget may leave What's This mode by calling
+TQWhatsThis::leaveWhatsThisMode(), with or without actually
+displaying any help text.
+
     You can also reimplement customWhatsThis() if your widget is a
+"passive interactor" supposed to work under all circumstances.
+Simply don't call TQWhatsThis::leaveWhatsThisMode() in that case.
+
     
    See also TQWhatsThis::inWhatsThisMode() and TQWhatsThis::leaveWhatsThisMode().
+
+
    Get this property's value with customWhatsThis().
+
    bool enabled
    
+
    This property holds whether the widget is enabled.
+
    An enabled widget receives keyboard and mouse events; a disabled
+widget does not. In fact, an enabled widget only receives keyboard
+events when it is in focus.
+
     Some widgets display themselves differently when they are
+disabled. For example a button might draw its label grayed out. If
+your widget needs to know when it becomes enabled or disabled, you
+can reimplement the enabledChange() function.
+
     Disabling a widget implicitly disables all its children. Enabling
+respectively enables all child widgets unless they have been
+explicitly disabled.
+
     
    See also enabled, isEnabledTo(), TQKeyEvent, TQMouseEvent, and enabledChange().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setEnabled() and get this property's value with isEnabled().
+
    bool focus
    
+
    This property holds whether this widget (or its focus proxy) has the keyboard input focus.
+
    Effectively equivalent to qApp->focusWidget() == this.
+
     
    See also setFocus(), clearFocus(), focusPolicy, and TQApplication::focusWidget().
+
+
    Get this property's value with hasFocus().
+
    bool focusEnabled
    
+
    This property holds whether the widget accepts keyboard focus.
+
    Keyboard focus is initially disabled (i.e. focusPolicy() ==
+TQWidget::NoFocus).
+
     You must enable keyboard focus for a widget if it processes
+keyboard events. This is normally done from the widget's
+constructor. For instance, the TQLineEdit constructor calls
+setFocusPolicy(TQWidget::StrongFocus).
+
     
    See also focusPolicy, focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), and enabled.
+
+
    Get this property's value with isFocusEnabled().
+
    FocusPolicy focusPolicy
    
+
    This property holds the way the widget accepts keyboard focus.
+
    The policy is TQWidget::TabFocus if the widget accepts keyboard
+focus by tabbing, TQWidget::ClickFocus if the widget accepts
+focus by clicking, TQWidget::StrongFocus if it accepts both, and
+TQWidget::NoFocus (the default) if it does not accept focus at
+all.
+
     You must enable keyboard focus for a widget if it processes
+keyboard events. This is normally done from the widget's
+constructor. For instance, the TQLineEdit constructor calls
+setFocusPolicy(TQWidget::StrongFocus).
+
     
    See also focusEnabled, focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), and enabled.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setFocusPolicy() and get this property's value with focusPolicy().
+
    TQFont font
    
+
    This property holds the font currently set for the widget.
+
    The fontInfo() function reports the actual font that is being used
+by the widget.
+
     As long as no special font has been set, or after unsetFont() is
+called, this is either a special font for the widget class, the
+parent's font or (if this widget is a top level widget), the
+default application font.
+
     This code fragment sets a 12 point helvetica bold font:
+
    +    TQFont f( "Helvetica", 12, TQFont::Bold );
+    setFont( f );
+    
    
+ 
+
     In addition to setting the font, setFont() informs all children
+about the change.
+
     
    See also fontChange(), fontInfo(), fontMetrics(), and ownFont.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setFont(), get this property's value with font(), and reset this property's value with unsetFont().
+
    TQRect frameGeometry
    
+
    This property holds geometry of the widget relative to its parent including any window frame.
+
    See the Window Geometry documentation
+for an overview of geometry issues with top-level widgets.
+
     
    See also geometry, x, y, and pos.
+
+
    Get this property's value with frameGeometry().
+
    TQSize frameSize
    
+
    This property holds the size of the widget including any window frame.
+
    
+
    Get this property's value with frameSize().
+
    bool fullScreen
    
+
    This property holds whether the widget is full screen.
+
    Get this property's value with isFullScreen().
+
    See also windowState(), minimized, and maximized.
+
+
    TQRect geometry
    
+
    This property holds the geometry of the widget relative to its parent and excluding the window frame.
+
    When changing the geometry, the widget, if visible, receives a
+move event (moveEvent()) and/or a resize event (resizeEvent())
+immediately. If the widget is not currently visible, it is
+guaranteed to receive appropriate events before it is shown.
+
     The size component is adjusted if it lies outside the range
+defined by minimumSize() and maximumSize().
+
     setGeometry() is virtual, and all other overloaded setGeometry()
+implementations in TQt call it.
+
     Warning: Calling setGeometry() inside resizeEvent() or moveEvent()
+can lead to infinite recursion.
+
     See the Window Geometry documentation
+for an overview of top-level widget geometry.
+
     
    See also frameGeometry, rect, pos, size, moveEvent(), resizeEvent(), minimumSize, and maximumSize.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setGeometry() and get this property's value with geometry().
+
    int height
    
+
    This property holds the height of the widget excluding any window frame.
+
    See the Window Geometry documentation
+for an overview of top-level widget geometry.
+
     
    See also geometry, width, and size.
+
+
    Get this property's value with height().
+
    bool hidden
    
+
    This property holds whether the widget is explicitly hidden.
+
    If FALSE, the widget is visible or would become visible if all its
+ancestors became visible.
+
     
    See also hide(), show(), visible, isVisibleTo(), and shown.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setHidden() and get this property's value with isHidden().
+
    TQPixmap icon
    
+
    This property holds the widget's icon.
+
    This property only makes sense for top-level widgets. If no icon
+has been set, icon() returns 0.
+
     
    See also iconText, caption, and Setting the Application Icon.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setIcon() and get this property's value with icon().
+
    TQString iconText
    
+
    This property holds the widget's icon text.
+
    This property only makes sense for top-level widgets. If no icon
+text has been set, this functions returns TQString::null.
+
     
    See also icon and caption.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setIconText() and get this property's value with iconText().
+
    bool inputMethodEnabled
    
+
    This property holds enables or disables the use of input methods for this widget.
+
    Most Widgets (as eg. buttons) that do not handle text input should have
+the input method disabled if they have focus. This is the default.
+
     If a widget handles text input it should set this property to TRUE.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setInputMethodEnabled() and get this property's value with isInputMethodEnabled().
+
    bool isActiveWindow
    
+
    This property holds whether this widget is the active window.
+
    The active window is the window that contains the widget
+that has keyboard focus.
+
     When popup windows are visible, this property is TRUE for both the
+active window and for the popup.
+
     
    See also setActiveWindow() and TQApplication::activeWindow().
+
+
    Get this property's value with isActiveWindow().
+
    bool isDesktop
    
+
    This property holds whether the widget is a desktop widget, i.e. represents the desktop.
+
    A desktop widget is also a top-level widget.
+
     
    See also isTopLevel and TQApplication::desktop().
+
+
    Get this property's value with isDesktop().
+
    bool isDialog
    
+
    This property holds whether the widget is a dialog widget.
+
    A dialog widget is a secondary top-level widget, i.e. a top-level
+widget with a parent.
+
     
    See also isTopLevel and TQDialog.
+
+
    Get this property's value with isDialog().
+
    bool isModal
    
+
    This property holds whether the widget is a modal widget.
+
    This property only makes sense for top-level widgets. A modal
+widget prevents widgets in all other top-level widgets from
+getting any input.
+
     
    See also isTopLevel, isDialog, and TQDialog.
+
+
    Get this property's value with isModal().
+
    bool isPopup
    
+
    This property holds whether the widget is a popup widget.
+
    A popup widget is created by specifying the widget flag WType_Popup to the widget constructor. A popup widget is also a
+top-level widget.
+
     
    See also isTopLevel.
+
+
    Get this property's value with isPopup().
+
    bool isTopLevel
    
+
    This property holds whether the widget is a top-level widget.
+
    A top-level widget is a widget which usually has a frame and a
+caption (title). Popup and desktop widgets are also top-level widgets.
+
     A top-level widget can have a parent
+    widget. It will then be grouped with its parent and deleted
+when the parent is deleted, minimized when the parent is minimized
+etc. If supported by the window manager, it will also have a
+common taskbar entry with its parent.
+
     TQDialog and TQMainWindow widgets are by default top-level, even if
+a parent widget is specified in the constructor. This behavior is
+specified by the WType_TopLevel widget flag.
+
     
    See also topLevelWidget(), isDialog, isModal, isPopup, isDesktop, and parentWidget().
+
+
    Get this property's value with isTopLevel().
+
    bool maximized
    
+
    This property holds whether this widget is maximized.
+
    This property is only relevant for top-level widgets.
+
     Note that due to limitations in some window-systems, this does not
+always report the expected results (e.g. if the user on X11
+maximizes the window via the window manager, TQt has no way of
+distinguishing this from any other resize). This is expected to
+improve as window manager protocols evolve.
+
     
    See also windowState(), showMaximized(), visible, show(), hide(), showNormal(), and minimized.
+
+
    Get this property's value with isMaximized().
+
    int maximumHeight
    
+
    This property holds the widget's maximum height.
+
    This property corresponds to maximumSize().height().
+
     
    See also maximumSize and maximumWidth.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setMaximumHeight() and get this property's value with maximumHeight().
+
    TQSize maximumSize
    
+
    This property holds the widget's maximum size.
+
    The widget cannot be resized to a larger size than the maximum
+widget size.
+
     
    See also maximumWidth, maximumHeight, maximumSize, minimumSize, and sizeIncrement.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setMaximumSize() and get this property's value with maximumSize().
+
    int maximumWidth
    
+
    This property holds the widget's maximum width.
+
    This property corresponds to maximumSize().width().
+
     
    See also maximumSize and maximumHeight.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setMaximumWidth() and get this property's value with maximumWidth().
+
    TQRect microFocusHint
    
+
    This property holds the currently set micro focus hint for this widget.
+
    See the documentation of setMicroFocusHint() for more information.
+
+
    Get this property's value with microFocusHint().
+
    bool minimized
    
+
    This property holds whether this widget is minimized (iconified).
+
    This property is only relevant for top-level widgets.
+
     
    See also showMinimized(), visible, show(), hide(), showNormal(), and maximized.
+
+
    Get this property's value with isMinimized().
+
    int minimumHeight
    
+
    This property holds the widget's minimum height.
+
    This property corresponds to minimumSize().height().
+
     
    See also minimumSize and minimumWidth.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setMinimumHeight() and get this property's value with minimumHeight().
+
    TQSize minimumSize
    
+
    This property holds the widget's minimum size.
+
    The widget cannot be resized to a smaller size than the minimum
+widget size. The widget's size is forced to the minimum size if
+the current size is smaller.
+
     If you use a layout inside the widget, the minimum size will be
+set by the layout and not by setMinimumSize(), unless you set the
+layout's resize mode to TQLayout::FreeResize.
+
     
    See also minimumWidth, minimumHeight, maximumSize, sizeIncrement, and TQLayout::resizeMode.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setMinimumSize() and get this property's value with minimumSize().
+
    TQSize minimumSizeHint
    
+
    This property holds the recommended minimum size for the widget.
+
    If the value of this property is an invalid size, no minimum size
+is recommended.
+
     The default implementation of minimumSizeHint() returns an invalid
+size if there is no layout for this widget, and returns the
+layout's minimum size otherwise. Most built-in widgets reimplement
+minimumSizeHint().
+
     TQLayout will never resize a widget to a size smaller than
+minimumSizeHint.
+
     
    See also TQSize::isValid(), size, minimumSize, and sizePolicy.
+
+
    Get this property's value with minimumSizeHint().
+
    int minimumWidth
    
+
    This property holds the widget's minimum width.
+
    This property corresponds to minimumSize().width().
+
     
    See also minimumSize and minimumHeight.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setMinimumWidth() and get this property's value with minimumWidth().
+
    bool mouseTracking
    
+
    This property holds whether mouse tracking is enabled for the widget.
+
    If mouse tracking is disabled (the default), the widget only
+receives mouse move events when at least one mouse button is
+pressed while the mouse is being moved.
+
     If mouse tracking is enabled, the widget receives mouse move
+events even if no buttons are pressed.
+
     
    See also mouseMoveEvent() and TQApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setMouseTracking() and get this property's value with hasMouseTracking().
+
    bool ownCursor
    
+
    This property holds whether the widget uses its own cursor.
+
    If FALSE, the widget uses its parent widget's cursor.
+
     
    See also cursor.
+
+
    Get this property's value with ownCursor().
+
    bool ownFont
    
+
    This property holds whether the widget uses its own font.
+
    If FALSE, the widget uses its parent widget's font.
+
     
    See also font.
+
+
    Get this property's value with ownFont().
+
    bool ownPalette
    
+
    This property holds whether the widget uses its own palette.
+
    If FALSE, the widget uses its parent widget's palette.
+
     
    See also palette.
+
+
    Get this property's value with ownPalette().
+
    TQPalette palette
    
+
    This property holds the widget's palette.
+
    As long as no special palette has been set, or after unsetPalette()
+has been called, this is either a special palette for the widget
+class, the parent's palette or (if this widget is a top level
+widget), the default application palette.
+
     Instead of defining an entirely new palette, you can also use the
+paletteBackgroundColor,
+paletteBackgroundPixmap and
+paletteForegroundColor
+convenience properties to change a widget's
+background and foreground appearance only.
+
     
    See also ownPalette, colorGroup, and TQApplication::palette().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setPalette(), get this property's value with palette(), and reset this property's value with unsetPalette().
+
    TQColor paletteBackgroundColor
    
+
    This property holds the background color of the widget.
+
    The palette background color is usually set implicitly by
+setBackgroundMode(), although it can also be set explicitly by
+setPaletteBackgroundColor(). setPaletteBackgroundColor() is a
+convenience function that creates and sets a modified TQPalette
+with setPalette(). The palette is modified according to the
+widget's background mode. For example, if the background mode is
+PaletteButton the color used for the palette's TQColorGroup::Button color entry is set.
+
     If there is a background pixmap (set using
+setPaletteBackgroundPixmap()), then the return value of this
+function is indeterminate.
+
     
    See also paletteBackgroundPixmap, paletteForegroundColor, palette, and colorGroup.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setPaletteBackgroundColor(), get this property's value with paletteBackgroundColor(), and reset this property's value with unsetPalette().
+
    TQPixmap paletteBackgroundPixmap
    
+
    This property holds the background pixmap of the widget.
+
    The palette background pixmap is usually set implicitly by
+setBackgroundMode(), although it can also be set explicitly by
+setPaletteBackgroundPixmap(). setPaletteBackgroundPixmap() is a
+convenience function that creates and sets a modified TQPalette
+with setPalette(). The palette is modified according to the
+widget's background mode. For example, if the background mode is
+PaletteButton the pixmap used for the palette's
+TQColorGroup::Button color entry is set.
+
     If there is a plain background color (set using
+setPaletteBackgroundColor()), then this function returns 0.
+
     
    See also paletteBackgroundColor, paletteForegroundColor, palette, and colorGroup.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setPaletteBackgroundPixmap(), get this property's value with paletteBackgroundPixmap(), and reset this property's value with unsetPalette().
+
    TQColor paletteForegroundColor
    
+
    This property holds the foreground color of the widget.
+
    setPaletteForegroundColor() is a convenience function that creates
+and sets a modified TQPalette with setPalette(). The palette is
+modified according to the widget's background mode. For
+example, if the background mode is PaletteButton the palette entry
+TQColorGroup::ButtonText is set to color.
+
     
    See also palette, TQApplication::setPalette(), backgroundMode, foregroundColor(), backgroundMode, and setEraseColor().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setPaletteForegroundColor(), get this property's value with paletteForegroundColor(), and reset this property's value with unsetPalette().
+
    TQPoint pos
    
+
    This property holds the position of the widget within its parent widget.
+
    If the widget is a top-level widget, the position is that of the
+widget on the desktop, including its frame.
+
     When changing the position, the widget, if visible, receives a
+move event (moveEvent()) immediately. If the widget is not
+currently visible, it is guaranteed to receive an event before it
+is shown.
+
     move() is virtual, and all other overloaded move() implementations
+in TQt call it.
+
     Warning: Calling move() or setGeometry() inside moveEvent() can
+lead to infinite recursion.
+
     See the Window Geometry documentation
+for an overview of top-level widget geometry.
+
     
    See also frameGeometry, size, x, and y.
+
+
    Set this property's value with move() and get this property's value with pos().
+
    TQRect rect
    
+
    This property holds the internal geometry of the widget excluding any window frame.
+
    The rect property equals TQRect(0, 0, width(), height()).
+
     See the Window Geometry documentation
+for an overview of top-level widget geometry.
+
     
    See also size.
+
+
    Get this property's value with rect().
+
    bool shown
    
+
    This property holds whether the widget is shown.
+
    If TRUE, the widget is visible or would become visible if all its
+ancestors became visible.
+
     
    See also hide(), show(), visible, isVisibleTo(), and hidden.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setShown() and get this property's value with isShown().
+
    TQSize size
    
+
    This property holds the size of the widget excluding any window frame.
+
    When resizing, the widget, if visible, receives a resize event
+(resizeEvent()) immediately. If the widget is not currently
+visible, it is guaranteed to receive an event before it is shown.
+
     The size is adjusted if it lies outside the range defined by
+minimumSize() and maximumSize(). Furthermore, the size is always
+at least TQSize(1, 1). For toplevel widgets, the minimum size
+might be larger, depending on the window manager.
+
     If you want a top-level window to have a fixed size, call
+setResizeMode( TQLayout::FreeResize ) on its layout.
+
     resize() is virtual, and all other overloaded resize()
+implementations in TQt call it.
+
     Warning: Calling resize() or setGeometry() inside resizeEvent() can
+lead to infinite recursion.
+
     
    See also pos, geometry, minimumSize, maximumSize, and resizeEvent().
+
+
    Set this property's value with resize() and get this property's value with size().
+
    TQSize sizeHint
    
+
    This property holds the recommended size for the widget.
+
    If the value of this property is an invalid size, no size is
+recommended.
+
     The default implementation of sizeHint() returns an invalid size
+if there is no layout for this widget, and returns the layout's
+preferred size otherwise.
+
     
    See also TQSize::isValid(), minimumSizeHint, sizePolicy, minimumSize, and updateGeometry().
+
+
    Get this property's value with sizeHint().
+
    TQSize sizeIncrement
    
+
    This property holds the size increment of the widget.
+
    When the user resizes the window, the size will move in steps of
+sizeIncrement().width() pixels horizontally and
+sizeIncrement.height() pixels vertically, with baseSize() as the
+basis. Preferred widget sizes are for non-negative integers i
+and j:
+
    +        width = baseSize().width() + i * sizeIncrement().width();
+        height = baseSize().height() + j * sizeIncrement().height();
+    
    
+ 
+
     Note that while you can set the size increment for all widgets, it
+only affects top-level widgets.
+
     Warning: The size increment has no effect under Windows, and may
+be disregarded by the window manager on X.
+
     
    See also size, minimumSize, and maximumSize.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setSizeIncrement() and get this property's value with sizeIncrement().
+
    TQSizePolicy sizePolicy
    
+
    This property holds the default layout behavior of the widget.
+
    If there is a TQLayout that manages this widget's children, the
+size policy specified by that layout is used. If there is no such
+TQLayout, the result of this function is used.
+
     The default policy is Preferred/Preferred, which means that the
+widget can be freely resized, but prefers to be the size
+sizeHint() returns. Button-like widgets set the size policy to
+specify that they may stretch horizontally, but are fixed
+vertically. The same applies to lineedit controls (such as
+TQLineEdit, TQSpinBox or an editable TQComboBox) and other
+horizontally orientated widgets (such as TQProgressBar).
+TQToolButton's are normally square, so they allow growth in both
+directions. Widgets that support different directions (such as
+TQSlider, TQScrollBar or TQHeader) specify stretching in the
+respective direction only. Widgets that can provide scrollbars
+(usually subclasses of TQScrollView) tend to specify that they can
+use additional space, and that they can make do with less than
+sizeHint().
+
     
    See also sizeHint, TQLayout, TQSizePolicy, and updateGeometry().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setSizePolicy() and get this property's value with sizePolicy().
+
    bool underMouse
    
+
    This property holds whether the widget is under the mouse cursor.
+
    This value is not updated properly during drag and drop
+operations.
+
     
    See also TQEvent::Enter and TQEvent::Leave.
+
+
    Get this property's value with hasMouse().
+
    bool updatesEnabled
    
+
    This property holds whether updates are enabled.
+
    Calling update() and repaint() has no effect if updates are
+disabled. Paint events from the window system are processed
+normally even if updates are disabled.
+
     setUpdatesEnabled() is normally used to disable updates for a
+short period of time, for instance to avoid screen flicker during
+large changes.
+
     Example:
+
    +        setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE );
+        bigVisualChanges();
+        setUpdatesEnabled( TRUE );
+        repaint();
+    
    
+ 
+
     
    See also update(), repaint(), and paintEvent().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setUpdatesEnabled() and get this property's value with isUpdatesEnabled().
+
    bool visible
    
+
    This property holds whether the widget is visible.
+
    Calling show() sets the widget to visible status if all its parent
+widgets up to the top-level widget are visible. If an ancestor is
+not visible, the widget won't become visible until all its
+ancestors are shown.
+
     Calling hide() hides a widget explicitly. An explicitly hidden
+widget will never become visible, even if all its ancestors become
+visible, unless you show it.
+
     A widget receives show and hide events when its visibility status
+changes. Between a hide and a show event, there is no need to
+waste CPU cycles preparing or displaying information to the user.
+A video application, for example, might simply stop generating new
+frames.
+
     A widget that happens to be obscured by other windows on the
+screen is considered to be visible. The same applies to iconified
+top-level widgets and windows that exist on another virtual
+desktop (on platforms that support this concept). A widget
+receives spontaneous show and hide events when its mapping status
+is changed by the window system, e.g. a spontaneous hide event
+when the user minimizes the window, and a spontaneous show event
+when the window is restored again.
+
     
    See also show(), hide(), hidden, isVisibleTo(), minimized, showEvent(), and hideEvent().
+
+
    Get this property's value with isVisible().
+
    TQRect visibleRect
    
+
    This property holds the visible rectangle.
+
    This property is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     No longer necessary, you can simply call repaint(). If you do not
+need the rectangle for repaint(), use clipRegion() instead.
+
+
    Get this property's value with visibleRect().
+
    int width
    
+
    This property holds the width of the widget excluding any window frame.
+
    See the Window Geometry documentation
+for an overview of top-level widget geometry.
+
     
    See also geometry, height, and size.
+
+
    Get this property's value with width().
+
    double windowOpacity
    
+
    This property holds the level of opacity for the window.
+
    The valid range of opacity is from 1.0 (completely opaque) to
+0.0 (completely transparent).
+
     By default the value of this property is 1.0.
+
     This feature is only present on Mac OS X and Windows 2000 and up.
+
     Warning: Changing this property from opaque to transparent might issue a
+paint event that needs to be processed before the window is displayed
+correctly. This affects mainly the use of TQPixmap::grabWindow(). Also note
+that semi-transparent windows update and resize significantely slower than
+opaque windows.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setWindowOpacity() and get this property's value with windowOpacity().
+
    int x
     
    This property holds the x coordinate of the widget relative to its parent including any window frame.
+
    See the Window Geometry documentation
+for an overview of top-level widget geometry.
+
     
    See also frameGeometry, y, and pos.
+
+
    Get this property's value with x().
+
    int y
    
+
    This property holds the y coordinate of the widget relative to its parent and including any window frame.
+
    See the Window Geometry documentation
+for an overview of top-level widget geometry.
+
     
    See also frameGeometry, x, and pos.
+
+
    Get this property's value with y().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqwidgetfactory.html b/doc/html/ntqwidgetfactory.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..752e4521f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqwidgetfactory.html
@@ -0,0 +1,168 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQWidgetFactory Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQWidgetFactory Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQWidgetFactory class provides for the dynamic creation of widgets
+from TQt Designer .ui files.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqwidgetfactory.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQWidget * create ( const TQString & uiFile, TQObject * connector = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • TQWidget * create ( TQIODevice * dev, TQObject * connector = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
+
    • void addWidgetFactory ( TQWidgetFactory * factory )
      • 
+
    • void loadImages ( const TQString & dir )
      • 
+
    • TQStringList widgets ()
      • 
+
    • bool supportsWidget ( const TQString & widget )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+
     The TQWidgetFactory class provides for the dynamic creation of widgets
+from TQt Designer .ui files.
+
     This class basically offers two things:
+
     
      
+
       
    •  Dynamically creating widgets from TQt
+  Designer user interface description files.
+You can do this using the static function TQWidgetFactory::create().
+This function also performs signal and slot connections, tab
+ordering, etc., as defined in the .ui file, and returns the
+top-level widget in the .ui file. After creating the widget you can
+use TQObject::child() and TQObject::queryList() to access child
+widgets of this returned widget.
+
       
    •  Adding additional widget factories to be able to create custom
+widgets. See createWidget() for details.
+
       
    
+
     This class is not included in the TQt library itself. To use it you
+must link against libtqui.so (Unix) or tqui.lib (Windows), which is
+built into INSTALL/lib if you built TQt Designer (INSTALL is
+the directory where TQt is installed ).
+
     If you create a TQMainWindow using a TQWidgetFactory, be aware that
+it already has a central widget. Therefore, you need to delete this
+one before setting another one.
+
     See the "Creating Dynamic Dialogs from .ui Files" section of the TQt Designer manual for an example. See
+also the TQWidgetPlugin class and the Plugins documentation.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQWidgetFactory::TQWidgetFactory ()
+
     Constructs a TQWidgetFactory. 
+
    TQWidgetFactory::~TQWidgetFactory () [virtual]
+
     
+Destructor.
+
+
    void TQWidgetFactory::addWidgetFactory ( TQWidgetFactory * factory ) [static]
+
     Installs a widget factory factory, which normally contains
+additional widgets that can then be created using a TQWidgetFactory.
+See createWidget() for further details.
+
+
    TQWidget * TQWidgetFactory::create ( const TQString & uiFile, TQObject * connector = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) [static]
+
    
+
     Loads the TQt Designer user interface description file uiFile
+and returns the top-level widget in that description. parent and
+name are passed to the constructor of the top-level widget.
+
     This function also performs signal and slot connections, tab
+ordering, etc., as described in the .ui file. In TQt Designer it
+is possible to add custom slots to a form and connect to them. If
+you want these connections to be made, you must create a class
+derived from TQObject, which implements all these slots. Then pass an
+instance of the object as connector to this function. If you do
+this, the connections to the custom slots will be done using the connector as slot.
+
     If something fails, 0 is returned.
+
     The ownership of the returned widget is passed to the caller.
+
+
    TQWidget * TQWidgetFactory::create ( TQIODevice * dev, TQObject * connector = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) [static]
+
      This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Loads the user interface description from device dev.
+
+
    TQWidget * TQWidgetFactory::createWidget ( const TQString & className, TQWidget * parent, const char * name ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Creates a widget of the type className passing parent and name to its constructor.
+
     If className is a widget in the TQt library, it is directly
+created by this function. If the widget isn't in the TQt library,
+each of the installed widget plugins is asked, in turn, to create
+the widget. As soon as a plugin says it can create the widget it
+is asked to do so. It may occur that none of the plugins can
+create the widget, in which case each installed widget factory is
+asked to create the widget (see addWidgetFactory()). If the widget
+cannot be created by any of these means, 0 is returned.
+
     If you have a custom widget, and want it to be created using the
+widget factory, there are two approaches you can use:
+
     
      
+
       
    1.  Write a widget plugin. This allows you to use the widget in
+TQt Designer and in this TQWidgetFactory. See the widget plugin
+documentation for further details. (See the "Creating Custom
+Widgets with Plugins" section of the TQt
+    Designer manual for an example.
+
       
    2.  Subclass TQWidgetFactory. Then reimplement this function to
+create and return an instance of your custom widget if className equals the name of your widget, otherwise return 0. Then
+at the beginning of your program where you want to use the widget
+factory to create widgets do a:
+
      +    TQWidgetFactory::addWidgetFactory( new MyWidgetFactory );
+    
      
+ 
+where MyWidgetFactory is your TQWidgetFactory subclass.
+
       
    
+
+
    void TQWidgetFactory::loadImages ( const TQString & dir ) [static]
+
    
+If you use a pixmap collection (which is the default for new
+projects) rather than saving the pixmaps within the .ui XML file,
+you must load the pixmap collection. TQWidgetFactory looks in the
+default TQMimeSourceFactory for the pixmaps. Either add it there
+manually, or call this function and specify the directory where
+the images can be found, as dir. This is normally the
+directory called images in the project's directory.
+
+
    bool TQWidgetFactory::supportsWidget ( const TQString & widget ) [static]
+
     Returns TRUE if the widget factory can create the specified widget;
+otherwise returns FALSE. 
+
    TQStringList TQWidgetFactory::widgets () [static]
+
     Returns the names of the widgets this factory can create. 
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqwidgetplugin.html b/doc/html/ntqwidgetplugin.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..83735618f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqwidgetplugin.html
@@ -0,0 +1,146 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQWidgetPlugin Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQWidgetPlugin Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQWidgetPlugin class provides an abstract base for custom TQWidget plugins.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqwidgetplugin.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQWidgetPlugin ()
      • 
+
    • ~TQWidgetPlugin ()
      • 
+
    • virtual TQStringList keys () const = 0
      • 
+
    • virtual TQWidget * create ( const TQString & key, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) = 0
      • 
+
    • virtual TQString group ( const TQString & key ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual TQIconSet iconSet ( const TQString & key ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual TQString includeFile ( const TQString & key ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual TQString toolTip ( const TQString & key ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual TQString whatsThis ( const TQString & key ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual bool isContainer ( const TQString & key ) const
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQWidgetPlugin class provides an abstract base for custom TQWidget plugins.
+
     
+
     The widget plugin is a simple plugin interface that makes it easy
+to create custom widgets that can be included in forms using TQt Designer and used by applications.
+
     Writing a widget plugin is achieved by subclassing this base
+class, reimplementing the pure virtual functions keys(), create(),
+group(), iconSet(), includeFile(), toolTip(), whatsThis() and
+isContainer(), and exporting the class with the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN
+macro.
+
     See the TQt Designer manual's,
+'Creating Custom Widgets' section in the 'Creating Custom Widgets'
+chapter, for a complete example of a TQWidgetPlugin.
+
     See also the Plugins
+    documentation and the TQWidgetFactory class that is
+supplied with TQt Designer.
+
    See also Plugins.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQWidgetPlugin::TQWidgetPlugin ()
+
    
+Constructs a widget plugin. This is invoked automatically by the
+Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN macro.
+
+
    TQWidgetPlugin::~TQWidgetPlugin ()
+
    
+Destroys the widget plugin.
+
     You never have to call this explicitly. TQt destroys a plugin
+automatically when it is no longer used.
+
+
    TQWidget * TQWidgetPlugin::create ( const TQString & key, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Creates and returns a TQWidget object for the widget key key.
+The widget key is the class name of the required widget. The name and parent arguments are passed to the custom widget's
+constructor.
+
     
    See also keys().
+
+
    TQString TQWidgetPlugin::group ( const TQString & key ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the group (toolbar name) that the custom widget of class
+key should be part of when TQt Designer loads it.
+
     The default implementation returns TQString::null.
+
+
    TQIconSet TQWidgetPlugin::iconSet ( const TQString & key ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the iconset that TQt Designer should use to represent
+the custom widget of class key in the toolbar.
+
     The default implementation returns an null iconset.
+
+
    TQString TQWidgetPlugin::includeFile ( const TQString & key ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the name of the include file that TQt Designer and uic should use to include the custom widget of class key in
+generated code.
+
     The default implementation returns TQString::null.
+
+
    bool TQWidgetPlugin::isContainer ( const TQString & key ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the custom widget of class key can contain
+other widgets, e.g. like TQFrame; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     The default implementation returns FALSE.
+
+
    TQStringList TQWidgetPlugin::keys () const [pure virtual]
+
    
+
+
     Returns the list of widget keys this plugin supports.
+
     These keys must be the class names of the custom widgets that are
+implemented in the plugin.
+
     
    See also create().
+
+
    TQString TQWidgetPlugin::toolTip ( const TQString & key ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the text of the tooltip that TQt Designer should use
+for the custom widget of class key's toolbar button.
+
     The default implementation returns TQString::null.
+
+
    TQString TQWidgetPlugin::whatsThis ( const TQString & key ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Returns the text of the whatsThis text that TQt Designer should
+use when the user requests whatsThis help for the custom widget of
+class key.
+
     The default implementation returns TQString::null.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqwidgetstack.html b/doc/html/ntqwidgetstack.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..372cc7558
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqwidgetstack.html
@@ -0,0 +1,193 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQWidgetStack Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQWidgetStack Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQWidgetStack class provides a stack of widgets of which
+only the top widget is user-visible.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqwidgetstack.h>
+
    Inherits TQFrame.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQWidgetStack class provides a stack of widgets of which
+only the top widget is user-visible.
+
     
+
+
     The application programmer can move any widget to the top of the
+stack at any time using raiseWidget(), and add or remove widgets
+using addWidget() and removeWidget(). It is not sufficient to pass
+the widget stack as parent to a widget which should be inserted into
+the widgetstack.
+
     visibleWidget() is the get equivalent of raiseWidget(); it
+returns a pointer to the widget that is currently at the top of
+the stack.
+
     TQWidgetStack also provides the ability to manipulate widgets
+through application-specified integer IDs. You can also translate
+from widget pointers to IDs using id() and from IDs to widget
+pointers using widget(). These numeric IDs are unique (per
+TQWidgetStack, not globally), but TQWidgetStack does not attach any
+additional meaning to them.
+
     The default widget stack is frameless, but you can use the usual
+TQFrame functions (such as setFrameStyle()) to add a frame.
+
     TQWidgetStack provides a signal, aboutToShow(), which is emitted
+just before a managed widget is shown.
+
     
    See also TQTabDialog, TQTabBar, TQFrame, and Organizers.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQWidgetStack::TQWidgetStack ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs an empty widget stack.
+
     The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQFrame
+constructor.
+
+
    TQWidgetStack::TQWidgetStack ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name, WFlags f )
+
    
+Constructs an empty widget stack.
+
     The parent, name and f arguments are passed to the TQFrame
+constructor.
+
+
    TQWidgetStack::~TQWidgetStack ()
+
    
+Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
+
+
    void TQWidgetStack::aboutToShow ( int ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted just before a managed widget is shown if
+that managed widget has an ID != -1. The argument is the numeric
+ID of the widget.
+
     If you call visibleWidget() in a slot connected to aboutToShow(),
+the widget it returns is the one that is currently visible, not
+the one that is about to be shown.
+
+
    void TQWidgetStack::aboutToShow ( TQWidget * ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     This signal is emitted just before a managed widget is shown. The
+argument is a pointer to the widget.
+
     If you call visibleWidget() in a slot connected to aboutToShow(),
+the widget returned is the one that is currently visible, not the
+one that is about to be shown.
+
+
    int TQWidgetStack::addWidget ( TQWidget * w, int id = -1 )
+
    
+Adds widget w to this stack of widgets, with ID id.
+
     If you pass an id >= 0 this ID is used. If you pass an id of
+-1 (the default), the widgets will be numbered automatically. If
+you pass -2 a unique negative integer will be generated. No widget
+has an ID of -1. Returns the ID or -1 on failure (e.g. w is 0).
+
     If you pass an id that is already used, then a unique negative
+integer will be generated to prevent two widgets having the same
+id.
+
     If w already exists in the stack the widget will be removed first.
+
     If w is not a child of this TQWidgetStack moves it using
+reparent().
+
+
    Example: xform/xform.cpp.
+
    int TQWidgetStack::id ( TQWidget * widget ) const
+
    
+Returns the ID of the widget. Returns -1 if widget is 0 or
+is not being managed by this widget stack.
+
     
    See also widget() and addWidget().
+
+
    void TQWidgetStack::raiseWidget ( int id ) [slot]
+
    
+Raises the widget with ID id to the top of the widget stack.
+
     
    See also visibleWidget().
+
+
    Example: xform/xform.cpp.
+
    void TQWidgetStack::raiseWidget ( TQWidget * w ) [slot]
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Raises widget w to the top of the widget stack.
+
+
    void TQWidgetStack::removeWidget ( TQWidget * w )
+
    
+Removes widget w from this stack of widgets. Does not delete w. If w is the currently visible widget, no other widget is
+substituted.
+
     
    See also visibleWidget() and raiseWidget().
+
+
    void TQWidgetStack::setChildGeometries () [virtual protected]
+
    
+Fixes up the children's geometries.
+
+
    TQWidget * TQWidgetStack::visibleWidget () const
+
    
+Returns the currently visible widget (the one at the top of the
+stack), or 0 if nothing is currently being shown.
+
     
    See also aboutToShow(), id(), and raiseWidget().
+
+
    TQWidget * TQWidgetStack::widget ( int id ) const
+
    
+Returns the widget with ID id. Returns 0 if this widget stack
+does not manage a widget with ID id.
+
     
    See also id() and addWidget().
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqwindowsstyle.html b/doc/html/ntqwindowsstyle.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ae88c0e0c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqwindowsstyle.html
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQWindowsStyle Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQWindowsStyle Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQWindowsStyle class provides a Microsoft Windows-like look and feel.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqwindowsstyle.h>
+
    Inherits TQCommonStyle.
+
    Inherited by TQMacStyle and TQPlatinumStyle.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQWindowsStyle class provides a Microsoft Windows-like look and feel.
+
     
+
     This style is TQt's default GUI style on Windows.
+
    See also Widget Appearance and Style.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQWindowsStyle::TQWindowsStyle ()
+
    
+Constructs a TQWindowsStyle
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqwizard.html b/doc/html/ntqwizard.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fec3c228a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqwizard.html
@@ -0,0 +1,337 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQWizard Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQWizard Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQWizard class provides a framework for wizard dialogs.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqwizard.h>
+
    Inherits TQDialog.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQWizard ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )
      • 
+
    • ~TQWizard ()
      • 
+
    • virtual void addPage ( TQWidget * page, const TQString & title )
      • 
+
    • virtual void insertPage ( TQWidget * page, const TQString & title, int index )
      • 
+
    • virtual void removePage ( TQWidget * page )
      • 
+
    • TQString title ( TQWidget * page ) const
      • 
+
    • void setTitle ( TQWidget * page, const TQString & title )
      • 
+
    • TQFont titleFont () const
      • 
+
    • void setTitleFont ( const TQFont & )
      • 
+
    • virtual void showPage ( TQWidget * page )
      • 
+
    • TQWidget * currentPage () const
      • 
+
    • TQWidget * page ( int index ) const
      • 
+
    • int pageCount () const
      • 
+
    • int indexOf ( TQWidget * page ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual bool appropriate ( TQWidget * page ) const
      • 
+
    • virtual void setAppropriate ( TQWidget * page, bool appropriate )
      • 
+
    • TQPushButton * backButton () const
      • 
+
    • TQPushButton * nextButton () const
      • 
+
    • TQPushButton * finishButton () const
      • 
+
    • TQPushButton * cancelButton () const
      • 
+
    • TQPushButton * helpButton () const
      • 
+
    
+
    Public Slots
    
+
      
+
    • virtual void setBackEnabled ( TQWidget * page, bool enable )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setNextEnabled ( TQWidget * page, bool enable )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setFinishEnabled ( TQWidget * page, bool enable )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setHelpEnabled ( TQWidget * page, bool enable )
      • 
+
    • virtual void setFinish ( TQWidget *, bool )  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
      
+
    • TQFont titleFont - the font used for page titles
      • 
+
    
+
    Protected Members
    
+
+
    Protected Slots
    
+
      
+
    • virtual void back ()
      • 
+
    • virtual void next ()
      • 
+
    • virtual void help ()
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQWizard class provides a framework for wizard dialogs.
+
     
+
+
+
+
     A wizard is a special type of input dialog that consists of a
+sequence of dialog pages. A wizard's purpose is to walk the user
+through a process step by step. Wizards are useful for complex or
+infrequently occurring tasks that people may find difficult to
+learn or do.
+
     TQWizard provides page titles and displays Next, Back, Finish,
+Cancel, and Help push buttons, as appropriate to the current
+position in the page sequence. These buttons can be
+enabled/disabled using setBackEnabled(), setNextEnabled(),
+setFinishEnabled() and setHelpEnabled().
+
     Create and populate dialog pages that inherit from TQWidget and add
+them to the wizard using addPage(). Use insertPage() to add a
+dialog page at a certain position in the page sequence. Use
+removePage() to remove a page from the page sequence.
+
     Use currentPage() to retrieve a pointer to the currently displayed
+page. page() returns a pointer to the page at a certain position
+in the page sequence.
+
     Use pageCount() to retrieve the total number of pages in the page
+sequence. indexOf() will return the index of a page in the page
+sequence.
+
     TQWizard provides functionality to mark pages as appropriate (or
+not) in the current context with setAppropriate(). The idea is
+that a page may be irrelevant and should be skipped depending on
+the data entered by the user on a preceding page.
+
     It is generally considered good design to provide a greater number
+of simple pages with fewer choices rather than a smaller number of
+complex pages.
+
     Example code is available here: wizard/wizard.cpp wizard/wizard.h
+
     
    A TQWizard page
     
     A TQWizard page
+
    
+
     
    See also Abstract Widget Classes, Dialog Classes, and Organizers.
+
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQWizard::TQWizard ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs an empty wizard dialog. The parent, name, modal and f arguments are passed to the TQDialog constructor.
+
+
    TQWizard::~TQWizard ()
+
    
+Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources, including
+all pages and controllers.
+
+
    void TQWizard::addPage ( TQWidget * page, const TQString & title ) [virtual]
+
    
+Adds page to the end of the page sequence, with the title, title.
+
+
    bool TQWizard::appropriate ( TQWidget * page ) const [virtual]
+
    
+Called when the Next button is clicked; this virtual function
+returns TRUE if page is relevant for display in the current
+context; otherwise it is ignored by TQWizard and returns FALSE. The
+default implementation returns the value set using
+setAppropriate(). The ultimate default is TRUE.
+
     Warning: The last page of the wizard will be displayed if no page
+is relevant in the current context.
+
+
    void TQWizard::back () [virtual protected slot]
+
    
+Called when the user clicks the Back button; this function shows
+the preceding relevant page in the sequence.
+
     
    See also appropriate().
+
+
    TQPushButton * TQWizard::backButton () const
+
    
+Returns a pointer to the dialog's Back button
+
     By default, this button is connected to the back() slot, which is
+virtual so you can reimplement it in a TQWizard subclass. Use
+setBackEnabled() to enable/disable this button.
+
+
    TQPushButton * TQWizard::cancelButton () const
+
    
+Returns a pointer to the dialog's Cancel button
+
     By default, this button is connected to the TQDialog::reject()
+slot, which is virtual so you can reimplement it in a TQWizard
+subclass.
+
+
    TQWidget * TQWizard::currentPage () const
+
    
+Returns a pointer to the current page in the sequence. Although
+the wizard does its best to make sure that this value is never 0,
+it can be if you try hard enough.
+
+
    TQPushButton * TQWizard::finishButton () const
+
    
+Returns a pointer to the dialog's Finish button
+
     By default, this button is connected to the TQDialog::accept()
+slot, which is virtual so you can reimplement it in a TQWizard
+subclass. Use setFinishEnabled() to enable/disable this button.
+
+
    void TQWizard::help () [virtual protected slot]
+
    
+Called when the user clicks the Help button, this function emits
+the helpClicked() signal.
+
+
    TQPushButton * TQWizard::helpButton () const
+
    
+Returns a pointer to the dialog's Help button
+
     By default, this button is connected to the help() slot, which is
+virtual so you can reimplement it in a TQWizard subclass. Use
+setHelpEnabled() to enable/disable this button.
+
+
    void TQWizard::helpClicked () [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the user clicks on the Help button.
+
+
    int TQWizard::indexOf ( TQWidget * page ) const
+
    
+Returns the position of page page. If the page is not part of
+the wizard -1 is returned.
+
+
    void TQWizard::insertPage ( TQWidget * page, const TQString & title, int index ) [virtual]
+
    
+Inserts page at position index into the page sequence, with
+title title. If index is -1, the page will be appended to
+the end of the wizard's page sequence.
+
+
    void TQWizard::layOutButtonRow ( TQHBoxLayout * layout ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This virtual function is responsible for adding the buttons below
+the bottom divider.
+
     layout is the horizontal layout of the entire wizard.
+
+
    void TQWizard::layOutTitleRow ( TQHBoxLayout * layout, const TQString & title ) [virtual protected]
+
    
+This virtual function is responsible for laying out the title row.
+
     layout is the horizontal layout for the wizard, and title is the title for this page. This function is called every
+time title changes.
+
+
    void TQWizard::next () [virtual protected slot]
+
    
+Called when the user clicks the Next button, this function shows
+the next relevant page in the sequence.
+
     
    See also appropriate().
+
+
    TQPushButton * TQWizard::nextButton () const
+
    
+Returns a pointer to the dialog's Next button
+
     By default, this button is connected to the next() slot, which is
+virtual so you can reimplement it in a TQWizard subclass. Use
+setNextEnabled() to enable/disable this button.
+
+
    TQWidget * TQWizard::page ( int index ) const
+
    
+Returns a pointer to the page at position index in the
+sequence, or 0 if index is out of range. The first page has
+index 0.
+
+
    int TQWizard::pageCount () const
+
    
+Returns the number of pages in the wizard.
+
+
    void TQWizard::removePage ( TQWidget * page ) [virtual]
+
    
+Removes page from the page sequence but does not delete the
+page. If page is currently being displayed, TQWizard will
+display the page that precedes it, or the first page if this was
+the first page.
+
+
    void TQWizard::selected ( const TQString & ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the current page changes. The
+parameter contains the title of the selected page.
+
+
    void TQWizard::setAppropriate ( TQWidget * page, bool appropriate ) [virtual]
+
    
+If appropriate is TRUE then page page is considered relevant
+in the current context and should be displayed in the page
+sequence; otherwise page should not be displayed in the page
+sequence.
+
     
    See also appropriate().
+
+
    void TQWizard::setBackEnabled ( TQWidget * page, bool enable ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+If enable is TRUE, page page has a Back button; otherwise page has no Back button. By default all pages have this button.
+
+
    void TQWizard::setFinish ( TQWidget *, bool ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Use setFinishEnabled instead
+
+
    void TQWizard::setFinishEnabled ( TQWidget * page, bool enable ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+If enable is TRUE, page page has a Finish button; otherwise
+page has no Finish button. By default no page has this
+button.
+
+
    void TQWizard::setHelpEnabled ( TQWidget * page, bool enable ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+If enable is TRUE, page page has a Help button; otherwise page has no Help button. By default all pages have this button.
+
+
    void TQWizard::setNextEnabled ( TQWidget * page, bool enable ) [virtual slot]
+
    
+If enable is TRUE, page page has a Next button; otherwise
+the Next button on page is disabled. By default all pages have
+this button.
+
+
    void TQWizard::setTitle ( TQWidget * page, const TQString & title )
+
    
+Sets the title for page page to title.
+
+
    void TQWizard::setTitleFont ( const TQFont & )
+
    Sets the font used for page titles.
+See the "titleFont" property for details.
+
    void TQWizard::showPage ( TQWidget * page ) [virtual]
+
    
+Makes page the current page and emits the selected() signal.
+
     This virtual function is called whenever a different page is to
+be shown, including the first time the TQWizard is shown.
+By reimplementing it (and calling TQWizard::showPage()),
+you can prepare each page prior to it being shown.
+
+
    Examples: distributor/distributor.ui.h and wizard/wizard.cpp.
+
    TQString TQWizard::title ( TQWidget * page ) const
+
    
+Returns the title of page page.
+
+
    TQFont TQWizard::titleFont () const
+
    Returns the font used for page titles.
+See the "titleFont" property for details.
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    TQFont titleFont
    
+
    This property holds the font used for page titles.
+
    The default is TQApplication::font().
+
+
    Set this property's value with setTitleFont() and get this property's value with titleFont().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqwmatrix.html b/doc/html/ntqwmatrix.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ef053bd39
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqwmatrix.html
@@ -0,0 +1,449 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQWMatrix Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQWMatrix Class Reference
    
+
+
    The TQWMatrix class specifies 2D transformations of a
+coordinate system.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqwmatrix.h>
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
      
+
    • TQWMatrix ()
      • 
+
    • TQWMatrix ( double m11, double m12, double m21, double m22, double dx, double dy )
      • 
+
    • void setMatrix ( double m11, double m12, double m21, double m22, double dx, double dy )
      • 
+
    • double m11 () const
      • 
+
    • double m12 () const
      • 
+
    • double m21 () const
      • 
+
    • double m22 () const
      • 
+
    • double dx () const
      • 
+
    • double dy () const
      • 
+
    • void map ( int x, int y, int * tx, int * ty ) const
      • 
+
    • void map ( double x, double y, double * tx, double * ty ) const
      • 
+
    • TQRect mapRect ( const TQRect & rect ) const
      • 
+
    • TQPoint map ( const TQPoint & p ) const
      • 
+
    • TQRect map ( const TQRect & r ) const  (obsolete)
      • 
+
    • TQPointArray map ( const TQPointArray & a ) const
      • 
+
    • TQRegion map ( const TQRegion & r ) const
      • 
+
    • TQRegion mapToRegion ( const TQRect & rect ) const
      • 
+
    • TQPointArray mapToPolygon ( const TQRect & rect ) const
      • 
+
    • void reset ()
      • 
+
    • bool isIdentity () const
      • 
+
    • TQWMatrix & translate ( double dx, double dy )
      • 
+
    • TQWMatrix & scale ( double sx, double sy )
      • 
+
    • TQWMatrix & shear ( double sh, double sv )
      • 
+
    • TQWMatrix & rotate ( double a )
      • 
+
    • bool isInvertible () const
      • 
+
    • double det () const
      • 
+
    • TQWMatrix invert ( bool * invertible = 0 ) const
      • 
+
    • bool operator== ( const TQWMatrix & m ) const
      • 
+
    • bool operator!= ( const TQWMatrix & m ) const
      • 
+
    • TQWMatrix & operator*= ( const TQWMatrix & m )
      • 
+
    • enum TransformationMode { Points, Areas }
      • 
+
    
+
    Static Public Members
    
+
+
    Related Functions
    
+
      
+
    • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQWMatrix & m )
      • 
+
    • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQWMatrix & m )
      • 
+
    
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQWMatrix class specifies 2D transformations of a
+coordinate system.
+
     
+
+
     The standard coordinate system of a paint
+    device has the origin located at the top-left position. X
+values increase to the right; Y values increase downward.
+
     This coordinate system is the default for the TQPainter, which
+renders graphics in a paint device. A user-defined coordinate
+system can be specified by setting a TQWMatrix for the painter.
+
     Example:
+
    +        MyWidget::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
+        {
+            TQPainter p;                      // our painter
+            TQWMatrix m;                      // our transformation matrix
+            m.rotate( 22.5 );                // rotated coordinate system
+            p.begin( this );                 // start painting
+            p.setWorldMatrix( m );           // use rotated coordinate system
+            p.drawText( 30,20, "detator" );  // draw rotated text at 30,20
+            p.end();                         // painting done
+        }
+    
    
+ 
+
     A matrix specifies how to translate, scale, shear or rotate the
+graphics; the actual transformation is performed by the drawing
+routines in TQPainter and by TQPixmap::xForm().
+
     The TQWMatrix class contains a 3x3 matrix of the form:
+
+
+
+
+
    m11m12 0 
    m21m22 0 
    dx dy  1 
    
+
     A matrix transforms a point in the plane to another point:
+
    +        x' = m11*x + m21*y + dx
+        y' = m22*y + m12*x + dy
+    
    
+ 
+
     The point (x, y) is the original point, and (x', y') is the
+transformed point. (x', y') can be transformed back to (x, y) by performing the same operation on the inverted matrix.
+
     The elements dx and dy specify horizontal and vertical
+translation. The elements m11 and m22 specify horizontal and
+vertical scaling. The elements m12 and m21 specify
+horizontal and vertical shearing.
+
     The identity matrix has m11 and m22 set to 1; all others are
+set to 0. This matrix maps a point to itself.
+
     Translation is the simplest transformation. Setting dx and dy will move the coordinate system dx units along the X axis
+and dy units along the Y axis.
+
     Scaling can be done by setting m11 and m22. For example,
+setting m11 to 2 and m22 to 1.5 will double the height and
+increase the width by 50%.
+
     Shearing is controlled by m12 and m21. Setting these
+elements to values different from zero will twist the coordinate
+system.
+
     Rotation is achieved by carefully setting both the shearing
+factors and the scaling factors. The TQWMatrix also has a function
+that sets rotation directly.
+
     TQWMatrix lets you combine transformations like this:
+
    +        TQWMatrix m;           // identity matrix
+        m.translate(10, -20); // first translate (10,-20)
+        m.rotate(25);         // then rotate 25 degrees
+        m.scale(1.2, 0.7);    // finally scale it
+    
    
+ 
+
     Here's the same example using basic matrix operations:
+
    +        double a    = pi/180 * 25;         // convert 25 to radians
+        double sina = sin(a);
+        double cosa = cos(a);
+        TQWMatrix m1(1, 0, 0, 1, 10, -20);  // translation matrix
+        TQWMatrix m2( cosa, sina,           // rotation matrix
+                    -sina, cosa, 0, 0 );
+        TQWMatrix m3(1.2, 0, 0, 0.7, 0, 0); // scaling matrix
+        TQWMatrix m;
+        m = m3 * m2 * m1;                  // combine all transformations
+    
    
+ 
+
     TQPainter has functions to translate, scale, shear and rotate the
+coordinate system without using a TQWMatrix. Although these
+functions are very convenient, it can be more efficient to build a
+TQWMatrix and call TQPainter::setWorldMatrix() if you want to perform
+more than a single transform operation.
+
     
    See also TQPainter::setWorldMatrix(), TQPixmap::xForm(), Graphics Classes, and Image Processing Classes.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQWMatrix::TransformationMode
    
+
+
     
+
     TQWMatrix offers two transformation modes. Calculations can either
+be done in terms of points (Points mode, the default), or in
+terms of area (Area mode).
+
     In Points mode the transformation is applied to the points that
+mark out the shape's bounding line. In Areas mode the
+transformation is applied in such a way that the area of the
+contained region is correctly transformed under the matrix.
+
      
+
    • TQWMatrix::Points - transformations are applied to the shape's points.
+
    • TQWMatrix::Areas - transformations are applied (e.g. to the width and
+height) so that the area is transformed.
+
     Example:
+
     Suppose we have a rectangle,
+TQRect( 10, 20, 30, 40 ) and a transformation matrix
+TQWMatrix( 2, 0, 0, 2, 0, 0 ) to double the rectangle's size.
+
     In Points mode, the matrix will transform the top-left (10,20) and
+the bottom-right (39,59) points producing a rectangle with its
+top-left point at (20,40) and its bottom-right point at (78,118),
+i.e. with a width of 59 and a height of 79.
+
     In Areas mode, the matrix will transform the top-left point in
+the same way as in Points mode to (20/40), and double the width
+and height, so the bottom-right will become (69,99), i.e. a width
+of 60 and a height of 80.
+
     Because integer arithmetic is used (for speed), rounding
+differences mean that the modes will produce slightly different
+results given the same shape and the same transformation,
+especially when scaling up. This also means that some operations
+are not commutative.
+
     Under Points mode, matrix * ( region1 | region2 ) is not equal to
+matrix * region1 | matrix * region2. Under Area mode, matrix * (pointarray[i]) is not neccesarily equal to
+(matrix * pointarry)[i].
+
     
    Comparison of Points and Areas TransformationModes
     
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQWMatrix::TQWMatrix ()
+
    
+Constructs an identity matrix. All elements are set to zero except
+m11 and m22 (scaling), which are set to 1.
+
+
    TQWMatrix::TQWMatrix ( double m11, double m12, double m21, double m22, double dx, double dy )
+
    
+Constructs a matrix with the elements, m11, m12, m21, m22, dx and dy.
+
+
    double TQWMatrix::det () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the matrix's determinant.
+
+
    double TQWMatrix::dx () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the horizontal translation.
+
+
    double TQWMatrix::dy () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the vertical translation.
+
+
    TQWMatrix TQWMatrix::invert ( bool * invertible = 0 ) const
+
    
+Returns the inverted matrix.
+
     If the matrix is singular (not invertible), the identity matrix is
+returned.
+
     If invertible is not 0: the value of *invertible is set
+to TRUE if the matrix is invertible; otherwise *invertible is
+set to FALSE.
+
     
    See also isInvertible().
+
+
    Example: t14/cannon.cpp.
+
    bool TQWMatrix::isIdentity () const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if the matrix is the identity matrix; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also reset().
+
+
    bool TQWMatrix::isInvertible () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns TRUE if the matrix is invertible; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
     
    See also invert().
+
+
    double TQWMatrix::m11 () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the X scaling factor.
+
+
    double TQWMatrix::m12 () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the vertical shearing factor.
+
+
    double TQWMatrix::m21 () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the horizontal shearing factor.
+
+
    double TQWMatrix::m22 () const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the Y scaling factor.
+
+
    void TQWMatrix::map ( int x, int y, int * tx, int * ty ) const
+
    
+Transforms ( x, y ) to ( *tx, *ty ) using the formulae:
+
     
    +        *tx = m11*x + m21*y + dx  (rounded to the nearest integer)
+        *ty = m22*y + m12*x + dy  (rounded to the nearest integer)
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    Examples: t14/cannon.cpp and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    void TQWMatrix::map ( double x, double y, double * tx, double * ty ) const
+
    
+This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Transforms ( x, y ) to ( *tx, *ty ) using the
+following formulae:
+
     
    +        *tx = m11*x + m21*y + dx
+        *ty = m22*y + m12*x + dy
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    TQPoint TQWMatrix::map ( const TQPoint & p ) const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Transforms p to using the formulae:
+
     
    +        retx = m11*px + m21*py + dx  (rounded to the nearest integer)
+        rety = m22*py + m12*px + dy  (rounded to the nearest integer)
+    
    
+ 
+
+
    TQRect TQWMatrix::map ( const TQRect & r ) const
+
    
+
+
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     Please use TQWMatrix::mapRect() instead.
+
     Note that this method does return the bounding rectangle of the r, when
+shearing or rotations are used.
+
+
    TQPointArray TQWMatrix::map ( const TQPointArray & a ) const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Returns the point array a transformed by calling map for each point.
+
+
    TQRegion TQWMatrix::map ( const TQRegion & r ) const
+
    
+
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     Transforms the region r.
+
     Calling this method can be rather expensive, if rotations or
+shearing are used.
+
+
    TQRect TQWMatrix::mapRect ( const TQRect & rect ) const
+
    
+Returns the transformed rectangle rect.
+
     The bounding rectangle is returned if rotation or shearing has
+been specified.
+
     If you need to know the exact region rect maps to use operator*().
+
     
    See also operator*().
+
+
    Example: xform/xform.cpp.
+
    TQPointArray TQWMatrix::mapToPolygon ( const TQRect & rect ) const
+
    
+Returns the transformed rectangle rect as a polygon.
+
     Polygons and rectangles behave slightly differently
+when transformed (due to integer rounding), so
+matrix.map( TQPointArray( rect ) ) is not always the same as
+matrix.mapToPolygon( rect ).
+
+
    TQRegion TQWMatrix::mapToRegion ( const TQRect & rect ) const
+
    
+
+
     Returns the transformed rectangle rect.
+
     A rectangle which has been rotated or sheared may result in a
+non-rectangular region being returned.
+
     Calling this method can be expensive, if rotations or shearing are
+used. If you just need to know the bounding rectangle of the
+returned region, use mapRect() which is a lot faster than this
+function.
+
     
    See also TQWMatrix::mapRect().
+
+
    bool TQWMatrix::operator!= ( const TQWMatrix & m ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this matrix is not equal to m; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    TQWMatrix & TQWMatrix::operator*= ( const TQWMatrix & m )
+
    
+Returns the result of multiplying this matrix by matrix m.
+
+
    bool TQWMatrix::operator== ( const TQWMatrix & m ) const
+
    
+Returns TRUE if this matrix is equal to m; otherwise returns FALSE.
+
+
    void TQWMatrix::reset ()
+
    
+Resets the matrix to an identity matrix.
+
     All elements are set to zero, except m11 and m22 (scaling)
+which are set to 1.
+
     
    See also isIdentity().
+
+
    TQWMatrix & TQWMatrix::rotate ( double a )
+
    
+Rotates the coordinate system a degrees counterclockwise.
+
     Returns a reference to the matrix.
+
     
    See also translate(), scale(), and shear().
+
+
    Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp, desktop/desktop.cpp, drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, t14/cannon.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    TQWMatrix & TQWMatrix::scale ( double sx, double sy )
+
    
+Scales the coordinate system unit by sx horizontally and sy
+vertically.
+
     Returns a reference to the matrix.
+
     
    See also translate(), shear(), and rotate().
+
+
    Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp, fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp, movies/main.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    void TQWMatrix::setMatrix ( double m11, double m12, double m21, double m22, double dx, double dy )
+
    
+Sets the matrix elements to the specified values, m11, m12,
+m21, m22, dx and dy.
+
+
    void TQWMatrix::setTransformationMode ( TQWMatrix::TransformationMode m ) [static]
+
    
+Sets the transformation mode that TQWMatrix and painter
+transformations use to m.
+
     
    See also TQWMatrix::TransformationMode.
+
+
    TQWMatrix & TQWMatrix::shear ( double sh, double sv )
+
    
+Shears the coordinate system by sh horizontally and sv
+vertically.
+
     Returns a reference to the matrix.
+
     
    See also translate(), scale(), and rotate().
+
+
    Examples: drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    TransformationMode TQWMatrix::transformationMode () [static]
+
    
+Returns the current transformation mode.
+
     
    See also TQWMatrix::TransformationMode.
+
+
    TQWMatrix & TQWMatrix::translate ( double dx, double dy )
+
    
+Moves the coordinate system dx along the X-axis and dy along
+the Y-axis.
+
     Returns a reference to the matrix.
+
     
    See also scale(), shear(), and rotate().
+
+
    Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp, drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, t14/cannon.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
+
    Related Functions
    
+
    TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQWMatrix & m )
+
    
+
+
     Writes the matrix m to the stream s and returns a reference
+to the stream.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
    TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQWMatrix & m )
+
    
+
+
     Reads the matrix m from the stream s and returns a reference
+to the stream.
+
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
+
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/ntqworkspace.html b/doc/html/ntqworkspace.html
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..331328594
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/html/ntqworkspace.html
@@ -0,0 +1,223 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+TQWorkspace Class
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
    
+ 
+Home
+ | 
+All Classes
+ | 
+Main Classes
+ | 
+Annotated
+ | 
+Grouped Classes
+ | 
+Functions
+
    TQWorkspace Class Reference
    [workspace module]
    
+
+
    The TQWorkspace widget provides a workspace window that can
+contain decorated windows, e.g. for MDI.
+More...
+
    #include <ntqworkspace.h>
+
    Inherits TQWidget.
+
    List of all member functions.
+
    Public Members
    
+
+
    Public Slots
    
+
+
    Signals
    
+
+
    Properties
    
+
+
    Detailed Description
    
+
+
+The TQWorkspace widget provides a workspace window that can
+contain decorated windows, e.g. for MDI.
+
     
+
     
+
+
+
     MDI (multiple document interface) applications typically have one
+main window with a menu bar and toolbar, and a central widget that
+is a TQWorkspace. The workspace itself contains zero, one or more
+document windows, each of which is a widget.
+
     The workspace itself is an ordinary TQt widget. It has a standard
+constructor that takes a parent widget and an object name. The
+parent window is usually a TQMainWindow, but it need not be.
+
     Document windows (i.e. MDI windows) are also ordinary TQt widgets
+which have the workspace as their parent widget. When you call
+show(), hide(), showMaximized(), setCaption(), etc. on a document
+window, it is shown, hidden, etc. with a frame, caption, icon and
+icon text, just as you'd expect. You can provide widget flags
+which will be used for the layout of the decoration or the
+behaviour of the widget itself.
+
     To change or retrieve the geometry of MDI windows you must operate
+on the MDI widget's parentWidget(). (The parentWidget() provides
+access to the decorated window in which the MDI window's widget is
+shown.)
+
     A document window becomes active when it gets the keyboard focus.
+You can also activate a window in code using setFocus(). The user
+can activate a window by moving focus in the usual ways, for
+example by clicking a window or by pressing Tab. The workspace
+emits a signal windowActivated() when it detects the activation
+change, and the function activeWindow() always returns a pointer
+to the active document window.
+
     The convenience function windowList() returns a list of all
+document windows. This is useful to create a popup menu
+"Windows" on the fly, for example.
+
     TQWorkspace provides two built-in layout strategies for child
+windows: cascade() and tile(). Both are slots so you can easily
+connect menu entries to them.
+
     If you want your users to be able to work with document windows
+larger than the actual workspace, set the scrollBarsEnabled
+property to TRUE.
+
     If the top-level window contains a menu bar and a document window
+is maximised, TQWorkspace moves the document window's minimize,
+restore and close buttons from the document window's frame to the
+workspace window's menu bar. It then inserts a window operations
+menu at the far left of the menu bar.
+
    See also Main Window and Related Classes and Organizers.
+
+
    Member Type Documentation
    
+
    TQWorkspace::WindowOrder
    
+
+
     Specifies the order in which windows are returned from windowList().
+
      
+
    • TQWorkspace::CreationOrder - The windows are returned in the order of their creation
+
    • TQWorkspace::StackingOrder - The windows are returned in the order of their stacking
+
    
+
    Member Function Documentation
    
+
    TQWorkspace::TQWorkspace ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    
+Constructs a workspace with a parent and a name.
+
+
    TQWorkspace::~TQWorkspace ()
+
      Destroys the workspace and frees any allocated resources. 
+
    void TQWorkspace::activateNextWindow () [slot]
+
    
+Activates the next window in the child window chain.
+
     
    See also activatePrevWindow().
+
+
    void TQWorkspace::activatePrevWindow () [slot]
+
    
+Activates the previous window in the child window chain.
+
     
    See also activateNextWindow().
+
+
    TQWidget * TQWorkspace::activeWindow () const
+
    
+Returns the active window, or 0 if no window is active.
+
+
    Example: mdi/application.cpp.
+
    void TQWorkspace::cascade () [slot]
+
    
+Arranges all the child windows in a cascade pattern.
+
     
    See also tile().
+
+
    Example: mdi/application.cpp.
+
    void TQWorkspace::closeActiveWindow () [slot]
+
    
+Closes the child window that is currently active.
+
     
    See also closeAllWindows().
+
+
    void TQWorkspace::closeAllWindows () [slot]
+
    
+Closes all child windows.
+
     The windows are closed in random order. The operation stops if a
+window does not accept the close event.
+
     
    See also closeActiveWindow().
+
+
    bool TQWorkspace::scrollBarsEnabled () const
+
    Returns TRUE if the workspace provides scrollbars; otherwise returns FALSE.
+See the "scrollBarsEnabled" property for details.
+
    void TQWorkspace::setScrollBarsEnabled ( bool enable )
+
    Sets whether the workspace provides scrollbars to enable.
+See the "scrollBarsEnabled" property for details.
+
    void TQWorkspace::tile () [slot]
+
    
+Arranges all child windows in a tile pattern.
+
     
    See also cascade().
+
+
    Example: mdi/application.cpp.
+
    void TQWorkspace::windowActivated ( TQWidget * w ) [signal]
+
    
+
+
     This signal is emitted when the window widget w becomes active.
+Note that w can be null, and that more than one signal may be
+emitted for a single activation event.
+
     
    See also activeWindow() and windowList().
+
+
    TQWidgetList TQWorkspace::windowList ( WindowOrder order ) const
+
    
+Returns a list of all windows. If order is CreationOrder
+(the default) the windows are listed in the order in which they
+had been inserted into the workspace. If order is StackingOrder
+the windows are listed in their stacking order, with the topmost window
+being the last window in the list.
+
     TQWidgetList is the same as TQPtrList.
+
     
    See also TQPtrList.
+
+
    Example: mdi/application.cpp.
+
    TQWidgetList TQWorkspace::windowList () const
+
    
+This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
+
     
+
    Property Documentation
    
+
    bool scrollBarsEnabled
    
+
    This property holds whether the workspace provides scrollbars.
+
    If this property is set to TRUE, it is possible to resize child
+windows over the right or the bottom edge out of the visible area
+of the workspace. The workspace shows scrollbars to make it
+possible for the user to access those windows. If this property is
+set to FALSE (the default), resizing windows out of the visible
+area of the workspace is not permitted.
+
+
    Set this property's value with setScrollBarsEnabled() and get this property's value with scrollBarsEnabled().
+
+
    
+This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
+Copyright © 1995-2007
+Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
+
+
    Copyright © 2007
+TrolltechTrademarks
+
    TQt 3.3.8
    
+
    
+
diff --git a/doc/html/object.html b/doc/html/object.html
index f89a61c97..8b395ad44 100644
--- a/doc/html/object.html
+++ b/doc/html/object.html
@@ -53,12 +53,12 @@ that make it possible to elegantly integrate many tasks in an
 event-driven GUI;
 
  •  hierarchical and queryable object
   trees that organize object ownership in a natural way;
-
  •  guarded pointers, TQGuardedPtr, that are automatically
+
  •  guarded pointers, TQGuardedPtr, that are automatically
 set to 0 when the referenced object is destroyed, unlike normal C++
 pointers which become "dangling pointers" when their objects are destroyed.
 
 
     Many of these TQt features are implemented with standard C++
-techniques, based on inheritance from TQObject. Others, like the
+techniques, based on inheritance from TQObject. Others, like the
 object communication mechanism and the dynamic property system,
 require the Meta Object System provided
 by TQt's own Meta Object Compiler (moc). 
diff --git a/doc/html/objectmodel.html b/doc/html/objectmodel.html
index d47865496..41b60855f 100644
--- a/doc/html/objectmodel.html
+++ b/doc/html/objectmodel.html
@@ -35,12 +35,12 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
     These classes form the basis of the TQt Object Model.
 
     
 
    
-
    TQGuardedPtrTemplate class that provides guarded pointers to TQObjects
-
    TQMetaObjectMeta information about TQt objects
+
    TQGuardedPtrTemplate class that provides guarded pointers to TQObjects
+
    TQMetaObjectMeta information about TQt objects
 
    TQMetaPropertyStores meta data about a property
-
    TQObjectThe base class of all TQt objects
-
    TQObjectCleanupHandlerWatches the lifetime of multiple TQObjects
-
    TQVariantActs like a union for the most common TQt data types
+
    TQObjectThe base class of all TQt objects
+
    TQObjectCleanupHandlerWatches the lifetime of multiple TQObjects
+
    TQVariantActs like a union for the most common TQt data types
 
    
 
 
    
diff --git a/doc/html/objecttrees.html b/doc/html/objecttrees.html
index a7ea7c3ac..fb1aa594a 100644
--- a/doc/html/objecttrees.html
+++ b/doc/html/objecttrees.html
@@ -33,16 +33,16 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
 
-
     TQObjects organize themselves in object trees.
-When you create a TQObject with another object as parent, it's added to
-the parent's children() list, and
+
     TQObjects organize themselves in object trees.
+When you create a TQObject with another object as parent, it's added to
+the parent's children() list, and
 is deleted when the parent is. It turns out that this approach fits
-the needs of GUI objects very well. For example, a TQAccel (keyboard
+the needs of GUI objects very well. For example, a TQAccel (keyboard
 accelerator) is a child of the relevant window, so when the user closes
 that window, the accelerator is deleted too.
-
     The static function TQObject::objectTrees() provides access to all
+
     The static function TQObject::objectTrees() provides access to all
 the root objects that currently exist.
-
     TQWidget, the base class of everything that appears on the screen,
+
     TQWidget, the base class of everything that appears on the screen,
 extends the parent-child relationship. A child normally also becomes a
 child widget, i.e. it is displayed in its parent's coordinate system
 and is graphically clipped by its parent's boundaries. For example,
@@ -52,10 +52,10 @@ we'd want, because the buttons and label are children of the message
 box.
 
     You can also delete child objects yourself, and they will remove
 themselves from their parents. For example, when the user removes a
-toolbar it may lead to the application deleting one of its TQToolBar
-objects, in which case the tool bar's TQMainWindow parent would
+toolbar it may lead to the application deleting one of its TQToolBar
+objects, in which case the tool bar's TQMainWindow parent would
 detect the change and reconfigure its screen space accordingly.
-
     The debugging functions TQObject::dumpObjectTree() and TQObject::dumpObjectInfo() are often useful when an application looks or
+
     The debugging functions TQObject::dumpObjectTree() and TQObject::dumpObjectInfo() are often useful when an application looks or
 acts strangely.
 
     
 
diff --git a/doc/html/opengl-overlay-x11-example.html b/doc/html/opengl-overlay-x11-example.html
index 554f6e79b..aed2f05c0 100644
--- a/doc/html/opengl-overlay-x11-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/opengl-overlay-x11-example.html
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ some hints for real application usage:
 can put all kinds of TQt widgets (your own or standard TQt widgets) on
 top of the OpenGL image (widget), e.g. pushbuttons etc., and they can
 be moved, resized, or removed without destroying the OpenGL image.
-
     
  •  Using with geometry management. The TQLayout classes don't permit
+
     
  •  Using with geometry management. The TQLayout classes don't permit
 putting one widget (the overlay) on top of another (the OpenGL
 widget); that would defy the whole purpose of the automatic layout.
 The solution is to add just one of them to the TQLayout object. Have it
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ overlay widget or vice versa). Implement the resizeEvent() method of
 the widget you put in the layout, and make it call setGeometry() on
 the other widget with its own geometry as parameters, thus keeping the
 two widgets' geometries synchronized.
-
     
  •  Using together with TQPalette and TQColorGroup. Instead of the
+
     
  •  Using together with TQPalette and TQColorGroup. Instead of the
 simplistic setBackgroundColor( transparentColor ), you can
 use TQt's TQPalette system to make your overlay widgets use
 transparent color for what you want. This way, the normal TQt widgets
diff --git a/doc/html/opengl-pixmap-example.html b/doc/html/opengl-pixmap-example.html
index d9b1640e0..df307db16 100644
--- a/doc/html/opengl-pixmap-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/opengl-pixmap-example.html
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
    
 
     
 This example program is an extension of the OpenGL Box example.
-
     It demonstrates how to render OpenGL into a TQPixmap.
+
     It demonstrates how to render OpenGL into a TQPixmap.
 
     See $QTDIR/examples/opengl/glpixmap for the source code.
 
     
    See also OpenGL Examples.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/opengl-x11-overlays.html b/doc/html/opengl-x11-overlays.html
index df139e84d..bda83c3c6 100644
--- a/doc/html/opengl-x11-overlays.html
+++ b/doc/html/opengl-x11-overlays.html
@@ -72,19 +72,19 @@ information.
 visual, while all other widgets will use the overlay visual. Thus, we
 can place a normal widget on top of the TQGLWidget, and do drawing on
 it, without destroying the image in the OpenGL window. In other words,
-we can use all the drawing capabilities of TQPainter to draw the
+we can use all the drawing capabilities of TQPainter to draw the
 annotations, rubberbands, etc. For the typical use of overlays,
 this is much easier than using OpenGL for rendering the annotations.
 
     An overlay plane has a specific color called the transparent
 color. Pixels drawn in this color will not be visible; instead the
 underlying OpenGL image will show through. In the example program
 X11 overlay, the file
-main.cpp contains a routine that returns a TQColor containing the
+main.cpp contains a routine that returns a TQColor containing the
 transparent color. For the overlay widget, you will typically want to
 set the background color to the transparent color, so that the OpenGL
 image shows through except where explicitly overpainted.
 
     Note: to use this technique, you must not use the "ManyColor" or
-"TrueColor" ColorSpec for TQApplication, because this will force
+"TrueColor" ColorSpec for TQApplication, because this will force
 the normal TQt widgets to use a TrueColor visual, which will typically
 be in the main plane, not in the overlay plane as desired.
 
     
diff --git a/doc/html/opengl.html b/doc/html/opengl.html
index 5cc85536e..c32b79dc4 100644
--- a/doc/html/opengl.html
+++ b/doc/html/opengl.html
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ the Makefiles to use these library names instead. The easiest way to
 do this is to edit the QMAKE_LIBS_OPENGL line in the config file you
 are using, changing "-lGL -lGLU" to "-lMesaGL -lMesaGLU"; then run
 "configure" again.
-
     
     The TQGL Classes
+
     
     The TQGL Classes
 
    
 
     The OpenGL support classes in TQt are:
 
      
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ widget for rendering OpenGL scenes.
 
    •  TQGLContext: Encapsulates an OpenGL rendering context.
 
    •  TQGLFormat: Specifies the
 display format of a rendering context.
-
    •  TQGLColormap: Handles indexed
+
    •  TQGLColormap: Handles indexed
 colormaps in GL-index mode.
 
    
 
     Many applications only need the high-level TQGLWidget class. The other
diff --git a/doc/html/organizers.html b/doc/html/organizers.html
index 2f35261b5..1c867be99 100644
--- a/doc/html/organizers.html
+++ b/doc/html/organizers.html
@@ -36,19 +36,19 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 complex applications or dialogs.
 
     
 
    
-
    TQButtonGroupOrganizes TQButton widgets in a group
-
    TQGroupBoxGroup box frame with a title
-
    TQHBoxHorizontal geometry management for its child widgets
-
    TQHButtonGroupOrganizes TQButton widgets in a group with one horizontal row
-
    TQHGroupBoxOrganizes widgets in a group with one horizontal row
-
    TQSplitterImplements a splitter widget
-
    TQTabWidgetStack of tabbed widgets
-
    TQVBoxVertical geometry management of its child widgets
-
    TQVButtonGroupOrganizes TQButton widgets in a vertical column
-
    TQVGroupBoxOrganizes a group of widgets in a vertical column
-
    TQWidgetStackStack of widgets of which only the top widget is user-visible
-
    TQWizardFramework for wizard dialogs
-
    TQWorkspaceWorkspace window that can contain decorated windows, e.g. for MDI
+
    TQButtonGroupOrganizes TQButton widgets in a group
+
    TQGroupBoxGroup box frame with a title
+
    TQHBoxHorizontal geometry management for its child widgets
+
    TQHButtonGroupOrganizes TQButton widgets in a group with one horizontal row
+
    TQHGroupBoxOrganizes widgets in a group with one horizontal row
+
    TQSplitterImplements a splitter widget
+
    TQTabWidgetStack of tabbed widgets
+
    TQVBoxVertical geometry management of its child widgets
+
    TQVButtonGroupOrganizes TQButton widgets in a vertical column
+
    TQVGroupBoxOrganizes a group of widgets in a vertical column
+
    TQWidgetStackStack of widgets of which only the top widget is user-visible
+
    TQWizardFramework for wizard dialogs
+
    TQWorkspaceWorkspace window that can contain decorated windows, e.g. for MDI
 
    
 
 
    
diff --git a/doc/html/outliner-example.html b/doc/html/outliner-example.html
index f289fc639..38fe21f56 100644
--- a/doc/html/outliner-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/outliner-example.html
@@ -71,8 +71,8 @@ traverse it.
                 <outline text="Dalheimer: Programming with TQt"/>
                 <outline text="Griffith: KDE 2/TQt Programming Bible"/>
                 <outline text="Hughes: Linux Rapid Application Development"/>
-                <outline text="Solin: TQt Programming in 24 hours"/>
-                <outline text="Ward: TQt 2 Programming for Linux and Windows 2000"/>
+                <outline text="Solin: TQt Programming in 24 hours"/>
+                <outline text="Ward: TQt 2 Programming for Linux and Windows 2000"/>
             </outline>
         </outline>
         <outline text="Shopping list">
@@ -112,15 +112,15 @@ traverse it.
 #ifndef OUTLINETREE_H
 #define OUTLINETREE_H
 
-#include <qlistview.h>
-#include <qdom.h>
+#include <ntqlistview.h>
+#include <ntqdom.h>
 
-class OutlineTree : public TQListView
+class OutlineTree : public TQListView
 {
     Q_OBJECT
 
 public:
-    OutlineTree( const TQString fileName, TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
+    OutlineTree( const TQString fileName, TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
     ~OutlineTree();
 
 private:
@@ -145,33 +145,33 @@ private:
 *****************************************************************************/
 
 #include "outlinetree.h"
-#include <qfile.h>
-#include <qmessagebox.h>
+#include <ntqfile.h>
+#include <ntqmessagebox.h>
 
-OutlineTree::OutlineTree( const TQString fileName, TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQListView( parent, name )
+OutlineTree::OutlineTree( const TQString fileName, TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+    : TQListView( parent, name )
 {
     // div. configuration of the list view
-    addColumn( "Outlines" );
-    setSorting( -1 );
-    setRootIsDecorated( TRUE );
+    addColumn( "Outlines" );
+    setSorting( -1 );
+    setRootIsDecorated( TRUE );
 
     // read the XML file and create DOM tree
-    TQFile opmlFile( fileName );
-    if ( !opmlFile.open( IO_ReadOnly ) ) {
-        TQMessageBox::critical( 0,
-                tr( "Critical Error" ),
-                tr( "Cannot open file %1" ).arg( fileName ) );
+    TQFile opmlFile( fileName );
+    if ( !opmlFile.open( IO_ReadOnly ) ) {
+        TQMessageBox::critical( 0,
+                tr( "Critical Error" ),
+                tr( "Cannot open file %1" ).arg( fileName ) );
         return;
     }
     if ( !domTree.setContent( &opmlFile ) ) {
-        TQMessageBox::critical( 0,
-                tr( "Critical Error" ),
-                tr( "Parsing error for file %1" ).arg( fileName ) );
-        opmlFile.close();
+        TQMessageBox::critical( 0,
+                tr( "Critical Error" ),
+                tr( "Parsing error for file %1" ).arg( fileName ) );
+        opmlFile.close();
         return;
     }
-    opmlFile.close();
+    opmlFile.close();
 
     // get the header information from the DOM
     TQDomElement root = domTree.documentElement();
@@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ void OutlineTree::getHeaderInformation( const nodeName() == "title" ) {
                 TQDomText textChild = node.firstChild().toText();
                 if ( !textChild.isNull() ) {
-                    setColumnText( 0, textChild.nodeValue() );
+                    setColumnText( 0, textChild.nodeValue() );
                 }
             }
         }
@@ -252,18 +252,18 @@ void OutlineTree::buildTree( TQL
 **
 *****************************************************************************/
 
-#include <qapplication.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
 #include "outlinetree.h"
 
 int main( int argc, char **argv )
 {
-    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
+    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
 
     OutlineTree outline( "todos.opml" );
-    a.setMainWidget( &outline );
-    outline.show();
+    a.setMainWidget( &outline );
+    outline.show();
 
-    return a.exec();
+    return a.exec();
 }
 
    • 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/overviews-list.html b/doc/html/overviews-list.html
index fd11ee034..fe81a5261 100644
--- a/doc/html/overviews-list.html
+++ b/doc/html/overviews-list.html
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
  •  Keyboard Focus Overview
 
  •  Standard Accelerators
 
  •  TQt-based LiveConnect Plugins
-
  •  ActiveX support
+
  •  ActiveX support
 
  •  Motif Support Extension
 
  •  OpenGL Overlays (X11)
 
  •  Setting the Application Icon
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
  •  Thread Support in TQt
 
  •  Timers
 
  •  Pictures of Most TQt Widgets
-
  •  Deploying TQt Applications
+
  •  Deploying TQt Applications
 
 
 
     
diff --git a/doc/html/picture-example.html b/doc/html/picture-example.html
index 6734d4a17..1117c1fe8 100644
--- a/doc/html/picture-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/picture-example.html
@@ -47,47 +47,47 @@ a set of drawing commands.
 **
 *****************************************************************************/
 
-#include <qapplication.h>
-#include <qpainter.h>
-#include <qpicture.h>
-#include <qpixmap.h>
-#include <qwidget.h>
-#include <qmessagebox.h>
-#include <qfile.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
+#include <ntqpainter.h>
+#include <ntqpicture.h>
+#include <ntqpixmap.h>
+#include <ntqwidget.h>
+#include <ntqmessagebox.h>
+#include <ntqfile.h>
 #include <ctype.h>
 
 
-void paintCar( TQPainter *p )                    // paint a car
+void paintCar( TQPainter *p )                    // paint a car
 {
-    TQPointArray a;
-    TQBrush brush( TQt::yellow, TQt::SolidPattern );
-    p->setBrush( brush );                       // use solid, yellow brush
+    TQPointArray a;
+    TQBrush brush( TQt::yellow, TQt::SolidPattern );
+    p->setBrush( brush );                       // use solid, yellow brush
 
     a.setPoints( 5, 50,50, 350,50, 450,120, 450,250, 50,250 );
-    p->drawPolygon( a );                        // draw car body
-
-    TQFont f( "courier", 12, TQFont::Bold );
-    p->setFont( f );
-
-    TQColor windowColor( 120, 120, 255 );        // a light blue color
-    brush.setColor( windowColor );              // set this brush color
-    p->setBrush( brush );                       // set brush
-    p->drawRect( 80, 80, 250, 70 );             // car window
-    p->drawText( 180, 80, 150, 70, TQt::AlignCenter, "--  TQt  --\nTrolltech AS" );
-
-    TQPixmap pixmap;
-    if ( pixmap.load("flag.bmp") )              // load and draw image
-        p->drawPixmap( 100, 85, pixmap );
-
-    p->setBackgroundMode( TQt::OpaqueMode );     // set opaque mode
-    p->setBrush( TQt::DiagCrossPattern );        // black diagonal cross pattern
-    p->drawEllipse( 90, 210, 80, 80 );          // back wheel
-    p->setBrush( TQt::CrossPattern );            // black cross fill pattern
-    p->drawEllipse( 310, 210, 80, 80 );         // front wheel
+    p->drawPolygon( a );                        // draw car body
+
+    TQFont f( "courier", 12, TQFont::Bold );
+    p->setFont( f );
+
+    TQColor windowColor( 120, 120, 255 );        // a light blue color
+    brush.setColor( windowColor );              // set this brush color
+    p->setBrush( brush );                       // set brush
+    p->drawRect( 80, 80, 250, 70 );             // car window
+    p->drawText( 180, 80, 150, 70, TQt::AlignCenter, "--  TQt  --\nTrolltech AS" );
+
+    TQPixmap pixmap;
+    if ( pixmap.load("flag.bmp") )              // load and draw image
+        p->drawPixmap( 100, 85, pixmap );
+
+    p->setBackgroundMode( TQt::OpaqueMode );     // set opaque mode
+    p->setBrush( TQt::DiagCrossPattern );        // black diagonal cross pattern
+    p->drawEllipse( 90, 210, 80, 80 );          // back wheel
+    p->setBrush( TQt::CrossPattern );            // black cross fill pattern
+    p->drawEllipse( 310, 210, 80, 80 );         // front wheel
 }
 
 
-class PictureDisplay : public TQWidget           // picture display widget
+class PictureDisplay : public TQWidget           // picture display widget
 {
 public:
     PictureDisplay( const char *fileName );
@@ -96,18 +96,18 @@ protected:
     void        paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * );
     void        keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent * );
 private:
-    TQPicture   *pict;
-    TQString     name;
+    TQPicture   *pict;
+    TQString     name;
 };
 
 PictureDisplay::PictureDisplay( const char *fileName )
 {
-    pict = new TQPicture;
+    pict = new TQPicture;
     name = fileName;
-    if ( !pict->load(fileName) ) {              // cannot load picture
+    if ( !pict->load(fileName) ) {              // cannot load picture
         delete pict;
         pict = 0;
-        name.sprintf( "Not able to load picture: %s", fileName );
+        name.sprintf( "Not able to load picture: %s", fileName );
     }
 }
 
@@ -116,24 +116,24 @@ PictureDisplay::~PictureDisplay()
     delete pict;
 }
 
-void PictureDisplay::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
+void PictureDisplay::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
 {
-    TQPainter paint( this );                     // paint widget
+    TQPainter paint( this );                     // paint widget
     if ( pict )
-        paint.drawPicture( *pict );             // draw picture
+        paint.drawPicture( *pict );             // draw picture
     else
-        paint.drawText( rect(), AlignCenter, name );
+        paint.drawText( rect(), AlignCenter, name );
 }
 
-void PictureDisplay::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *k )
+void PictureDisplay::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *k )
 {
     switch ( tolower(k->ascii()) ) {
         case 'r':                               // reload
-            pict->load( name );
-            update();
+            pict->load( name );
+            update();
             break;
         case 'q':                               // quit
-            TQApplication::exit();
+            TQApplication::exit();
             break;
     }
 }
@@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ void PictureDisplay::paintEvent( TQApplication a( argc, argv );               // TQApplication required!
+    TQApplication a( argc, argv );               // TQApplication required!
 
     const char *fileName = "car.pic";           // default picture file name
 
@@ -149,23 +149,23 @@ int main( int argc, char **argv )
         fileName = argv[1];
 
     if ( !TQFile::exists(fileName) ) {
-        TQPicture pict;                          // our picture
-        TQPainter paint;                         // our painter
+        TQPicture pict;                          // our picture
+        TQPainter paint;                         // our painter
 
-        paint.begin( &pict );                   // begin painting onto picture
+        paint.begin( &pict );                   // begin painting onto picture
         paintCar( &paint );                     // paint!
-        paint.end();                            // painting done
+        paint.end();                            // painting done
 
-        pict.save( fileName );                  // save picture
-        TQMessageBox::information(0, "TQt Example - Picture", "Saved.  Run me again!");
+        pict.save( fileName );                  // save picture
+        TQMessageBox::information(0, "TQt Example - Picture", "Saved.  Run me again!");
         return 0;
     } else {
         PictureDisplay test( fileName );        // create picture display
-        a.setMainWidget( &test);                // set main widget
-        test.setCaption("TQt Example - Picture");
-        test.show();                            // show it
+        a.setMainWidget( &test);                // set main widget
+        test.setCaption("TQt Example - Picture");
+        test.show();                            // show it
 
-        return a.exec();                        // start event loop
+        return a.exec();                        // start event loop
     }
 }
 
    • 
diff --git a/doc/html/pictures.html b/doc/html/pictures.html
index 828db57c1..15e713fa2 100644
--- a/doc/html/pictures.html
+++ b/doc/html/pictures.html
@@ -34,55 +34,55 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
 
     Most of these widgets are shown in either Motif or Windows style. 
-All widgets are supported in both styles (and other styles), but for clarity we just present a selection.
+All widgets are supported in both styles (and other styles), but for clarity we just present a selection.
 
     TQt provides more widgets than the selection shown below. And extra TQt
 are available from third parties, and as add-ons to TQt; see TQt
 Solutions, and User contributed TQt
 additions.
 
     
-
     Below we have three views seperated by TQSplitters. At the
-top-left there's a TQListBox, at the top-right there's a TQListView with a TQHeader and two TQScrollBars. And at the
-bottom there's a TQIconView.
+
     Below we have three views seperated by TQSplitters. At the
+top-left there's a TQListBox, at the top-right there's a TQListView with a TQHeader and two TQScrollBars. And at the
+bottom there's a TQIconView.
 
     
     
-
     Below we present a TQMainWindow which has
-a TQMenuBar and some TQToolBars that contain
-various widgets, e.g. TQToolButtons and TQComboBoxes. The central
-widget is a TQWorkspace which is used for MDI window management and
-which contains an MDI-Window featuring a TQTextEdit. At the bottom
-you see a TQStatusBar and at the bottom-right a TQSizeGrip.
+
     Below we present a TQMainWindow which has
+a TQMenuBar and some TQToolBars that contain
+various widgets, e.g. TQToolButtons and TQComboBoxes. The central
+widget is a TQWorkspace which is used for MDI window management and
+which contains an MDI-Window featuring a TQTextEdit. At the bottom
+you see a TQStatusBar and at the bottom-right a TQSizeGrip.
 
     
     
-
     The image below shows a TQFileDialog. On the Macintosh and Windows
-platforms you can either use a TQFileDialog or the native file
-dialog. This is explained in the TQFileDialog class documentation.
+
     The image below shows a TQFileDialog. On the Macintosh and Windows
+platforms you can either use a TQFileDialog or the native file
+dialog. This is explained in the TQFileDialog class documentation.
 
     
     
 
     Below is a TQPrintDialog. On Macintosh and Windows the native print
 dialog is used, but for other platforms we provide TQPrintDialog. Use
-TQPrinter::setup() for portability instead of the TQPrintDialog if you
+TQPrinter::setup() for portability instead of the TQPrintDialog if you
 need to be platform independent.
 
     
     
-
     Below is a TQFontDialog.
+
     Below is a TQFontDialog.
 
     
     
     Windows
 
    
-
     The screenshot below shows a TQColorDialog.
+
     The screenshot below shows a TQColorDialog.
 
     
     
-
     Messages are presented using TQMessageBoxes, as shown below.
+
     Messages are presented using TQMessageBoxes, as shown below.
 
     
     
-
     The image below shows a TQProgressDialog. The TQProgressBar can
+
     The image below shows a TQProgressDialog. The TQProgressBar can
 also be used as a separate widget.
 
     
     
-
     In the screenshot below we have a TQGroupBox that contains a TQLineEdit, a read-only TQComboBox and an editable TQComboBox.
+
     In the screenshot below we have a TQGroupBox that contains a TQLineEdit, a read-only TQComboBox and an editable TQComboBox.
 
     
     
-
     The screenshot below shows a TQPopupMenu.
+
     The screenshot below shows a TQPopupMenu.
 
     
     
-
     In the screenshot below there's a TQButtonGroup containing four TQRadioButtons and two TQCheckBoxes.
+
     In the screenshot below there's a TQButtonGroup containing four TQRadioButtons and two TQCheckBoxes.
 
     
     
 
     
-
     The screenshot below shows a TQTabDialog. The tabs (TQTabBar) or the
-more convenient class TQTabWidget, which combines a tab bar with
-the pages, can be used separately. In the visible page you see a TQLabel, the range controls TQSlider and TQSpinBox and below a TQLCDNumber. In the bottom row there are some TQPushButtons.
+
     The screenshot below shows a TQTabDialog. The tabs (TQTabBar) or the
+more convenient class TQTabWidget, which combines a tab bar with
+the pages, can be used separately. In the visible page you see a TQLabel, the range controls TQSlider and TQSpinBox and below a TQLCDNumber. In the bottom row there are some TQPushButtons.
 
     
     
-
     In the screenshot below there's a TQTextBrowser displaying a HTML
-page. See also TQTextEdit.
+
     In the screenshot below there's a TQTextBrowser displaying a HTML
+page. See also TQTextEdit.
 
     
     
 
     
 
diff --git a/doc/html/plugins-howto.html b/doc/html/plugins-howto.html
index 6ab263e87..de38704c0 100644
--- a/doc/html/plugins-howto.html
+++ b/doc/html/plugins-howto.html
@@ -46,44 +46,44 @@ by default in the standard plugin directory.
 Base Class
 Default Path
 
-TQImageFormatPlugin
+TQImageFormatPlugin
 pluginsbase/imageformats *
 
-TQSqlDriverPlugin
+TQSqlDriverPlugin
 pluginsbase/sqldrivers *
 
-TQStylePlugin
+TQStylePlugin
 pluginsbase/styles *
 
-TQTextCodecPlugin
+TQTextCodecPlugin
 pluginsbase/codecs *
 
-TQWidgetPlugin
+TQWidgetPlugin
 pluginsbase/designer *
 
 
     But where is the pluginsbase directory? When the application is
 run, TQt will first treat the application's executable directory as the
-pluginsbase. For example if the application is in C:\Program Files\MyApp and has a style plugin, TQt will look in C:\Program Files\MyApp\styles. (See TQApplication::applicationDirPath() for
+pluginsbase. For example if the application is in C:\Program Files\MyApp and has a style plugin, TQt will look in C:\Program Files\MyApp\styles. (See TQApplication::applicationDirPath() for
 how to find out where the application's executable is.) TQt will also
 look in the directory given by qInstallPathPlugins(). If you want
 TQt to look in additional places you can add as many paths as you need
-with calls to TQApplication::addLibraryPath(). And if you want to
+with calls to TQApplication::addLibraryPath(). And if you want to
 set your own path or paths you can use
-TQApplication::setLibraryPaths().
+TQApplication::setLibraryPaths().
 
     Suppose that you have a new style class called 'MyStyle' that you want
 to make available as a plugin. The required code is straightforward:
 
    -    class MyStylePlugin : public TQStylePlugin
+    class MyStylePlugin : public TQStylePlugin
     {
     public:
         MyStylePlugin() {}
         ~MyStylePlugin() {}
 
-        TQStringList keys() const { 
+        TQStringList keys() const { 
             return TQStringList() << "mystyle"; 
         }
 
-        TQStyle* create( const TQString& key ) { 
+        TQStyle* create( const TQString& key ) { 
             if ( key == "mystyle" ) 
                 return new MyStyle;
             return 0;
@@ -93,8 +93,8 @@ to make available as a plugin. The required code is straightforward:
     Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN( MyStylePlugin )
 
    
  
-
     (Note that TQStyleFactory is case-insensitive, and the lower case
-version of the key is used; other factories, e.g. TQWidgetFactory, are
+
     (Note that TQStyleFactory is case-insensitive, and the lower case
+version of the key is used; other factories, e.g. TQWidgetFactory, are
 case sensitive.)
 
     The constructor and destructor do not need to do anything, so are left
 empty. There are only two virtual functions that must be implemented.
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ The first is keys() which returns a string list of the classes
 implemented in the plugin. (We've just implemented one class in the
 example above.) The second is a function that returns an object of the
 required class (or 0 if the plugin is asked to create an object of a
-class that it doesn't implement). For TQStylePlugin, this second
+class that it doesn't implement). For TQStylePlugin, this second
 function is called create(). 
 
     It is possible to implement any number of plugin subclasses in a
 single plugin, providing they are all derived from the same base
@@ -112,15 +112,15 @@ no explicit object creation is required. TQt will find and create them
 as required. Styles are an exception, since you might want to set a
 style explicitly in code. To apply a style, use code like this:
 
    -    TQApplication::setStyle( TQStyleFactory::create( "MyStyle" ) );
+    TQApplication::setStyle( TQStyleFactory::create( "MyStyle" ) );
 
    
  
 
     Some plugin classes require additional functions to be implemented.
 See the TQt Designer manual's,
 'Creating Custom Widgets' section in the 'Creating Custom Widgets'
-chapter, for a complete example of a TQWidgetPlugin, which implements
+chapter, for a complete example of a TQWidgetPlugin, which implements
 extra functions to integrate the plugin into TQt Designer. The
-TQWidgetFactory class provides additional information on
+TQWidgetFactory class provides additional information on
 TQWidgetPlugins.
 
     See the class documentation for details of the virtual functions that
 must be reimplemented for each type of plugin.
@@ -132,8 +132,8 @@ plugins, since TQt handles them automatically.
 with each type of plugin in a subdirectory for that type, e.g. styles. If you want your applications to use plugins and you don't
 want to use the standard plugins path, have your installation process
 determine the path you want to use for the plugins, and save the path,
-e.g. using TQSettings, for the application to read when it runs. The
-application can then call TQApplication::addLibraryPath() with this
+e.g. using TQSettings, for the application to read when it runs. The
+application can then call TQApplication::addLibraryPath() with this
 path and your plugins will be available to the application. Note that
 the final part of the path, i.e. styles, widgets, etc., cannot
 be changed.
diff --git a/doc/html/plugins.html b/doc/html/plugins.html
index 8b7a5501e..ad8df58cd 100644
--- a/doc/html/plugins.html
+++ b/doc/html/plugins.html
@@ -35,19 +35,19 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
     These classes deal with shared libraries, (e.g. .so and DLL files),
 and with TQt plugins. 
 
     See the plugins documentation.
-
     See also the ActiveTQt framework for
+
     See also the ActiveTQt framework for
 Windows.
 
     
 
    
 
    TQGfxDriverPluginAbstract base for TQt/Embedded graphics driver plugins
-
    TQImageFormatPluginAbstract base for custom image format plugins
+
    TQImageFormatPluginAbstract base for custom image format plugins
 
    TQKbdDriverPluginAbstract base for TQt/Embedded keyboard driver plugins
-
    TQLibraryWrapper for handling shared libraries
+
    TQLibraryWrapper for handling shared libraries
 
    TQMouseDriverPluginAbstract base for TQt/Embedded mouse driver plugins
-
    TQSqlDriverPluginAbstract base for custom TQSqlDriver plugins
-
    TQStylePluginAbstract base for custom TQStyle plugins
-
    TQTextCodecPluginAbstract base for custom TQTextCodec plugins
-
    TQWidgetPluginAbstract base for custom TQWidget plugins
+
    TQSqlDriverPluginAbstract base for custom TQSqlDriver plugins
+
    TQStylePluginAbstract base for custom TQStyle plugins
+
    TQTextCodecPluginAbstract base for custom TQTextCodec plugins
+
    TQWidgetPluginAbstract base for custom TQWidget plugins
 
    
 
 
    
diff --git a/doc/html/popup-example.html b/doc/html/popup-example.html
index 4ae586c64..acff96e24 100644
--- a/doc/html/popup-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/popup-example.html
@@ -53,33 +53,33 @@ pop up.
 
 #ifndef POPUP_H
 #define POPUP_H
-#include <qlabel.h>
-#include <qpushbutton.h>
-#include <qlineedit.h>
+#include <ntqlabel.h>
+#include <ntqpushbutton.h>
+#include <ntqlineedit.h>
 
-class FancyPopup : public TQLabel
+class FancyPopup : public TQLabel
 {
     Q_OBJECT
 public:
-    FancyPopup( TQWidget* parent = 0, const char*  name=0);
+    FancyPopup( TQWidget* parent = 0, const char*  name=0);
 
-    void popup( TQWidget* parent = 0);
+    void popup( TQWidget* parent = 0);
 protected:
     virtual void mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
     virtual void mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
     virtual void closeEvent( TQCloseEvent * );
 
 private:
-    TQWidget* popupParent;
+    TQWidget* popupParent;
     int moves;
 };
 
 
- class Frame : public TQFrame
+ class Frame : public TQFrame
  {
      Q_OBJECT
  public:
-     Frame( TQWidget *parent=0, const char*  name=0);
+     Frame( TQWidget *parent=0, const char*  name=0);
 
  protected:
 
@@ -88,10 +88,10 @@ private:
      void button2Pressed();
 
  private:
-     TQPushButton *button1;
-     TQPushButton *button2;
+     TQPushButton *button1;
+     TQPushButton *button2;
 
-     TQFrame* popup1;
+     TQFrame* popup1;
      FancyPopup* popup2;
  };
 
@@ -111,33 +111,33 @@ private:
 *****************************************************************************/
 
 #include "popup.h"
-#include <qapplication.h>
-#include <qlayout.h>
-
-FancyPopup::FancyPopup( TQWidget* parent, const char*  name ):
-    TQLabel( parent, name, WType_Popup ){
-        setFrameStyle( WinPanel|Raised );
-        setAlignment( AlignCenter );
-        resize(150,100);
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
+#include <ntqlayout.h>
+
+FancyPopup::FancyPopup( TQWidget* parent, const char*  name ):
+    TQLabel( parent, name, WType_Popup ){
+        setFrameStyle( WinPanel|Raised );
+        setAlignment( AlignCenter );
+        resize(150,100);
         moves = 0;
-        setMouseTracking( TRUE );
+        setMouseTracking( TRUE );
 }
 
-void FancyPopup::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent * e){
+void FancyPopup::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent * e){
     moves++;
-    TQString s;
-    s.sprintf("%d/%d", e->pos().x(), e->pos().y());
+    TQString s;
+    s.sprintf("%d/%d", e->pos().x(), e->pos().y());
     if (e->state() & TQMouseEvent::LeftButton)
         s += " (down)";
-    setText(s);
+    setText(s);
 }
 
-void FancyPopup::mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * e){
-    if  (rect().contains( e->pos() ) || moves > 5)
-        close();
+void FancyPopup::mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * e){
+    if  (rect().contains( e->pos() ) || moves > 5)
+        close();
 }
 
-void FancyPopup::closeEvent( TQCloseEvent *e ){
+void FancyPopup::closeEvent( TQCloseEvent *e ){
     e->accept();
     moves = 0;
     if (!popupParent)
@@ -149,15 +149,15 @@ private:
     // avoid the button remaining in pressed state we simply send a
     // faked mouse button release event to it.
     TQMouseEvent me( TQEvent::MouseButtonRelease, TQPoint(0,0), TQPoint(0,0), TQMouseEvent::LeftButton, TQMouseEvent::NoButton);
-    TQApplication::sendEvent( popupParent, &me );
+    TQApplication::sendEvent( popupParent, &me );
 }
 
-void FancyPopup::popup( TQWidget* parent) {
+void FancyPopup::popup( TQWidget* parent) {
     popupParent = parent;
     setText("Move the mouse!");
     if (popupParent)
-        move( popupParent->mapToGlobal( popupParent->rect().bottomLeft() ) );
-    show();
+        move( popupParent->mapToGlobal( popupParent->rect().bottomLeft() ) );
+    show();
 }
 
 
@@ -165,36 +165,36 @@ void FancyPopup::popup( TQWidget*
 
 
 
-Frame::Frame(TQWidget* parent, const char* name): TQFrame(parent, name){
-    button1 = new TQPushButton("Simple Popup", this);
-    connect ( button1, SIGNAL( clicked() ), SLOT( button1Clicked() ) );
-    button2 = new TQPushButton("Fancy Popup", this);
-    connect ( button2, SIGNAL( pressed() ), SLOT( button2Pressed() ) );
+Frame::Frame(TQWidget* parent, const char* name): TQFrame(parent, name){
+    button1 = new TQPushButton("Simple Popup", this);
+    connect ( button1, SIGNAL( clicked() ), SLOT( button1Clicked() ) );
+    button2 = new TQPushButton("Fancy Popup", this);
+    connect ( button2, SIGNAL( pressed() ), SLOT( button2Pressed() ) );
 
     TQBoxLayout * l = new TQHBoxLayout( this );
-    button1->setMaximumSize(button1->sizeHint());
-    button2->setMaximumSize(button2->sizeHint());
+    button1->setMaximumSize(button1->sizeHint());
+    button2->setMaximumSize(button2->sizeHint());
     l->addWidget( button1 );
     l->addWidget( button2 );
-    l->activate();
+    l->activate();
 
-//     button1->setGeometry(20,20,100,30);
-//     button2->setGeometry(140,20,100,30);
-    resize(270, 70);
+//     button1->setGeometry(20,20,100,30);
+//     button2->setGeometry(140,20,100,30);
+    resize(270, 70);
 
     //create a very simple popup: it is just composed with other
     //widget and will be shown after clicking on button1
 
-    popup1 = new TQFrame( this ,0, WType_Popup);
-    popup1->setFrameStyle( WinPanel|Raised );
-    popup1->resize(150,100);
-    TQLineEdit *tmpE = new TQLineEdit( popup1 );
-    connect( tmpE, SIGNAL( returnPressed() ), popup1, SLOT( hide() ) );
-    tmpE->setGeometry(10,10, 130, 30);
-    tmpE->setFocus();
-    TQPushButton *tmpB = new TQPushButton("Click me!", popup1);
-    connect( tmpB, SIGNAL( clicked() ), popup1, SLOT( close() ) );
-    tmpB->setGeometry(10, 50, 130, 30);
+    popup1 = new TQFrame( this ,0, WType_Popup);
+    popup1->setFrameStyle( WinPanel|Raised );
+    popup1->resize(150,100);
+    TQLineEdit *tmpE = new TQLineEdit( popup1 );
+    connect( tmpE, SIGNAL( returnPressed() ), popup1, SLOT( hide() ) );
+    tmpE->setGeometry(10,10, 130, 30);
+    tmpE->setFocus();
+    TQPushButton *tmpB = new TQPushButton("Click me!", popup1);
+    connect( tmpB, SIGNAL( clicked() ), popup1, SLOT( close() ) );
+    tmpB->setGeometry(10, 50, 130, 30);
 
     // the fancier version uses its own class. It will be shown when
     // pressing button2, so they behavior is more like a modern menu
@@ -206,16 +206,16 @@ void FancyPopup::popup( TQWidget*
     // it with any other widget.  The next four lines (if not
     // commented out) will for instance add a line edit widget.
 
-//     tmpE = new TQLineEdit( popup2 );
-//     tmpE->setFocus();
-//     connect( tmpE, SIGNAL( returnPressed() ), popup2, SLOT( close() ) );
-//     tmpE->setGeometry(10, 10, 130, 30);
+//     tmpE = new TQLineEdit( popup2 );
+//     tmpE->setFocus();
+//     connect( tmpE, SIGNAL( returnPressed() ), popup2, SLOT( close() ) );
+//     tmpE->setGeometry(10, 10, 130, 30);
 }
 
 
 void Frame::button1Clicked(){
-    popup1->move( mapToGlobal( button1->geometry().bottomLeft() ) );
-    popup1->show();
+    popup1->move( mapToGlobal( button1->geometry().bottomLeft() ) );
+    popup1->show();
 }
 
 void Frame::button2Pressed(){
@@ -225,13 +225,13 @@ void Frame::button2Pressed(){
 
 int main( int argc, char **argv )
 {
-    TQApplication a(argc,argv);
+    TQApplication a(argc,argv);
 
     Frame frame;
-    frame.setCaption("TQt Example - Custom Popups");
-    a.setMainWidget(&frame);
-    frame.show();
-    return a.exec();
+    frame.setCaption("TQt Example - Custom Popups");
+    a.setMainWidget(&frame);
+    frame.show();
+    return a.exec();
 }
 
    
 
diff --git a/doc/html/porting.html b/doc/html/porting.html
index c812b21cf..c5058a8be 100644
--- a/doc/html/porting.html
+++ b/doc/html/porting.html
@@ -163,46 +163,46 @@ set any relevant preprocessor defines in the makefile.
 header files. This speeds up compilation when you don't need those
 nested header files. But in some cases you will find you need to add
 an extra #include to your files.
-
     For example, if you get a message about TQStringList or its functions
-not being defined, then add #include <qstringlist.h> at
+
     For example, if you get a message about TQStringList or its functions
+not being defined, then add #include <ntqstringlist.h> at
 the top of the file giving the error.
 
     Header files that you might need to add #include directives for include:
 
      
-
    •  <qcursor.h>
-
    •  <qpainter.h>
-
    •  <qpen.h>
-
    •  <qstringlist.h>
-
    •  <qregexp.h>
-
    •  <qstrlist.h>
-
    •  <qstyle.h>
-
    •  <qvaluelist.h>
+
    •  <ntqcursor.h>
+
    •  <ntqpainter.h>
+
    •  <ntqpen.h>
+
    •  <ntqstringlist.h>
+
    •  <ntqregexp.h>
+
    •  <ntqstrlist.h>
+
    •  <ntqstyle.h>
+
    •  <ntqvaluelist.h>
 
    
 
     
     Namespace
 
    
 
     TQt 3.x is namespace clean.  A few global identifiers that had been
 left in TQt 2.x have been discarded.
-
     Enumeration TQt::CursorShape and its values are now part of the
-special TQt class defined in qnamespace.h. If you get compilation
+
     Enumeration TQt::CursorShape and its values are now part of the
+special TQt class defined in ntqnamespace.h. If you get compilation
 errors about these being missing (unlikely, since most of your code will
 be in classes that inherit from the TQt namespace class), then apply
 the following changes:
 
     
    
 
     The names of some debugging macro variables have been changed.  We have
 tried not to break source compatibility as much as possible.  If you observe
@@ -269,119 +269,119 @@ rather than the documentation supplied with TQt to obtain the latest
 information regarding obsolete functions and how to replace them in
 new code.
 
     
    
 
     Additionally, these preprocessor directives have been removed:
@@ -405,27 +405,27 @@ and TQVector have been renamed. To ease porting, the old names and the
 old header-file names are still supported.
 
     
    
 
     Old Name New Name New Header File
-
     TQArray TQMemArray <qmemarray.h>
-
     TQCollection TQPtrCollection <qptrcollection.h>
-
     TQList TQPtrList <qptrlist.h>
-
     TQListIterator TQPtrListIterator <qptrlist.h>
-
     TQQueue TQPtrQueue <qptrqueue.h>
-
     TQStack TQPtrStack <qptrstack.h>
-
     TQVector TQPtrVector <qptrvector.h>
+
     TQArray TQMemArray <ntqmemarray.h>
+
     TQCollection TQPtrCollection <ntqptrcollection.h>
+
     TQList TQPtrList <ntqptrlist.h>
+
     TQListIterator TQPtrListIterator <ntqptrlist.h>
+
     TQQueue TQPtrQueue <ntqptrqueue.h>
+
     TQStack TQPtrStack <ntqptrstack.h>
+
     TQVector TQPtrVector <ntqptrvector.h>
 
    
-
     
     TQButtonGroup
+
     
     TQButtonGroup
 
    
-
     In TQt 2.x, the function TQButtonGroup::selected() returns the selected
-radio button (TQRadioButton). In TQt 3.0, it returns the selected toggle button (TQButton::toggleButton), a more general concept.
+
     In TQt 2.x, the function TQButtonGroup::selected() returns the selected
+radio button (TQRadioButton). In TQt 3.0, it returns the selected toggle button (TQButton::toggleButton), a more general concept.
 This might affect programs that use TQButtonGroups that contain a
-mixture of radio buttons and non-radio (e.g. TQCheckBox) toggle buttons.
+mixture of radio buttons and non-radio (e.g. TQCheckBox) toggle buttons.
 
     
     TQDate
 
    
 
     Two TQDate member functions that were virtual in TQt 2.0 are not virtual
 in TQt 3.0. This is only relevant if you subclassed TQDate and
 reimplemented these functions:
 
     
    
 
     In addition to no longer being virtual, TQDate::monthName() and
@@ -433,13 +433,13 @@ TQDate::dayName() have been renamed TQDate::
 TQDate::shortDayName() and have been made static (as they should had
 been in the first place). The old names are still provided for source
 compatibility.
-
     
     TQFileDialog
+
     
     TQFileDialog
 
    
 
     If the mode was not set explicitly, and the user entered a
 non-existent file, the dialog would accept this. In TQt 3.x, you must
 set the mode, e.g. setMode(TQFileDialog::AnyFile), to get the same
 behavior.
-
     
     TQFont
+
     
     TQFont
 
    
 
     The internals of TQFont have changed significantly between TQt 2.2 and
 TQt 3.0, to give better Unicode support and to make developing
@@ -452,23 +452,23 @@ TQFont::charSet() or TQFont::setCharSet(), just remove them from your
 code. There are a few functions that took a TQFont::CharSet as a
 parameter; in these cases simply remove the charset from the
 parameter list.
-
     
     TQInputDialog
+
     
     TQInputDialog
 
    
 
     The two static getText(...) methods in TQInputDialog have been merged. 
 The echo parameter is the third parameter and defaults to 
 TQLineEdit::Normal. 
-
     If you used calls to TQInputDialog::getText(...) that provided more 
+
     If you used calls to TQInputDialog::getText(...) that provided more 
 than the first two required parameters you will must add a value 
 for the echo parameter.
-
     
     TQLayout and Other Abstract Layout Classes
+
     
     TQLayout and Other Abstract Layout Classes
 
    
-
     The definitions of TQGLayoutIterator, TQLayout, TQLayoutItem, TQLayoutIterator, TQSpacerItem and TQWidgetItem have been moved from <qabstractlayout.h> to <qlayout.h>. The header <qabstractlayout.h> now includes <qlayout.h> for compatibility. It
+
     The definitions of TQGLayoutIterator, TQLayout, TQLayoutItem, TQLayoutIterator, TQSpacerItem and TQWidgetItem have been moved from <ntqabstractlayout.h> to <ntqlayout.h>. The header <ntqabstractlayout.h> now includes <ntqlayout.h> for compatibility. It
 might be removed in a future version.
 
     
     TQListViewItem
 
    
 
     The paintBranches() function in TQt 2.x had a GUIStyle parameter; this
 has been dropped for TQt 3.x since GUI style is handled by the new
-style engine (See TQStyle.)
+style engine (See TQStyle.)
 
     
     TQMoveEvent
 
    
 
     In TQt 2.x, the function TQMoveEvent::pos() returned the position of the
@@ -480,7 +480,7 @@ top level widgets.
 
     The TQMultiLineEdit was a simple editor widget in previous TQt versions.
 Since TQt 3.0 includes a new richtext engine, which also supports
 editing, TQMultiLineEdit is obsolete. For the sake of compatibility
-TQMultiLineEdit is still provided. It is now a subclass of TQTextEdit
+TQMultiLineEdit is still provided. It is now a subclass of TQTextEdit
 which wraps the old TQMultiLineEdit so that it is mostly source
 compatible to keep old applications working.
 
     For new applications and when maintaining existing applications we
@@ -504,12 +504,12 @@ been renamed to TQtMultiLineEdit to avoid name clashes. If you really
 need to keep compatibility with the old TQMultiLineEdit, simply include
 this class in your project and rename TQMultiLineEdit to
 TQtMultiLineEdit throughout.
-
     
     TQPrinter
+
     
     TQPrinter
 
    
 
     TQPrinter has undergone some changes, to make it more flexible and
 to ensure it has the same runtime behaviour on both Unix and Windows. In 2.x,
 TQPrinter behaved differently on Windows and Unix, when using view
-transformations on the TQPainter. This has changed now, and TQPrinter
+transformations on the TQPainter. This has changed now, and TQPrinter
 behaves consistently across all platforms. A compatibilty mode has been
 added that forces the old behaviour, to ease porting from TQt 2.x
 to TQt 3.x. This compatibilty mode can be enabled by passing the
@@ -517,13 +517,13 @@ TQPrinter::Compatible flag to the TQPrinter constructor.
 
     On X11, TQPrinter used to generate encapsulated postscript when
 fullPage() was TRUE and only one page was printed. This does not
 happen by default anymore, providing a more consistent printing output.
-
     
     TQRegExp
+
     
     TQRegExp
 
    
-
     The TQRegExp class has been rewritten to support many of the features of Perl
-regular expressions.  Both the regular expression syntax and the TQRegExp
+
     The TQRegExp class has been rewritten to support many of the features of Perl
+regular expressions.  Both the regular expression syntax and the TQRegExp
 interface have been modified.
-
     Be also aware that <qregexp.h> is no longer included
-automatically when you include <qstringlist.h>. See
+
     Be also aware that <ntqregexp.h> is no longer included
+automatically when you include <ntqstringlist.h>. See
 above for details.
 
     
 
     
     New special characters
@@ -535,40 +535,40 @@ of these (actually, \\ in C++ strings), unless it is already
 there.
 
     Example: Old code like
 
    -    TQRegExp rx( "([0-9|]*\\)" );        // works in TQt 2.x
+    TQRegExp rx( "([0-9|]*\\)" );        // works in TQt 2.x
 
    
  
 should be converted into
 
    -    TQRegExp rx( "\\([0-9\\|]*\\)" );      // works in TQt 2.x and 3.x
+    TQRegExp rx( "\\([0-9\\|]*\\)" );      // works in TQt 2.x and 3.x
 
    
  
 (Within character classes, the backslash is not necessary in front of certain
 characters, e.g. |, but it doesn't hurt.)
 
     Wildcard patterns need no conversion.  Here are two examples:
 
    -    TQRegExp wild( "(*.*)" );
-    wild.setWildcard( TRUE );
+    TQRegExp wild( "(*.*)" );
+    wild.setWildcard( TRUE );
 
    
  
 
         // TRUE as third argument means wildcard
-    TQRegExp wild( "(*.*)", FALSE, TRUE );
+    TQRegExp wild( "(*.*)", FALSE, TRUE );
 
    
  
-However, when they are used, make sure to use TQRegExp::exactMatch()
-rather than the obsolete TQRegExp::match(). TQRegExp::match(), like
+However, when they are used, make sure to use TQRegExp::exactMatch()
+rather than the obsolete TQRegExp::match(). TQRegExp::match(), like
 TQRegExp::find(), tries to find a match somewhere in the target
 string, while TQRegExp::exactMatch() tries to match the whole target
 string.
-
     
     TQRegExp::operator=()
+
     
     TQRegExp::operator=()
 
    
-
     This function has been replaced by TQRegExp::setPattern() in TQt 2.2.
+
     This function has been replaced by TQRegExp::setPattern() in TQt 2.2.
 Old code such as
 
    -    TQRegExp rx( "alpha" );
-    rx.setCaseSensitive( FALSE );
-    rx.setWildcard( TRUE );
+    TQRegExp rx( "alpha" );
+    rx.setCaseSensitive( FALSE );
+    rx.setWildcard( TRUE );
     rx = "beta";
 
    
  
@@ -589,17 +589,17 @@ which is what one expects.
 
     The following function is now obsolete, as it has an unwieldy
 parameter list and was poorly named:
 
    
-It will be removed in a future version of TQt. Its documentation explains how to replace it.
+It will be removed in a future version of TQt. Its documentation explains how to replace it.
 
     
     TQRegExp::find()
 
    
 
     This function was removed, after a brief appearance in TQt 2.2.  Its
-name clashed with TQString::find().  Use TQRegExp::search() or TQString::find() instead.
-
     
     TQString::findRev() and TQString::contains()
+name clashed with TQString::find().  Use TQRegExp::search() or TQString::find() instead.
+
     
     TQString::findRev() and TQString::contains()
 
    
-
     TQString::findRev()'s and TQString::contains()'s semantics have changed
+
     TQString::findRev()'s and TQString::contains()'s semantics have changed
 between 2.0 and 3.0 to be more consistent with the other overloads.
 
     For example,
 
    @@ -614,13 +614,13 @@ start of input, so
  
 returns 1, not 13 or 14.
 
     This change affect very few existing programs.
-
     
     TQString::replace()
+
     
     TQString::replace()
 
    
-
     With TQt 1.0 and 2.0, a TQString is converted implicitly into a TQRegExp
+
     With TQt 1.0 and 2.0, a TQString is converted implicitly into a TQRegExp
 as the first argument to TQString::replace():
 
    -    TQString text = fetch_it_from_somewhere();
-    text.replace( TQString("[A-Z]+"), "" );
+    TQString text = fetch_it_from_somewhere();
+    text.replace( TQString("[A-Z]+"), "" );
 
    
  
 With TQt 3.0, the compiler gives an error. The solution is to use a
@@ -638,26 +638,26 @@ without breaking source compatibility.
 modal dialog instead.
 
     
     TQSortedList
 
    
-
     The TQSortedList class is now obsolete. Consider using a TQDict, a TQMap
-or a plain TQPtrList instead.
+
     The TQSortedList class is now obsolete. Consider using a TQDict, a TQMap
+or a plain TQPtrList instead.
 
     
     TQTableView
 
    
 
     The TQTableView class has been obsoleted and is no longer a part of the
-TQt API. Either use the powerful TQTable class or the simplistic
-TQGridView in any new code you create. If you really need the old table
+TQt API. Either use the powerful TQTable class or the simplistic
+TQGridView in any new code you create. If you really need the old table
 view for compatibility you can find it in $QTDIR/src/attic/qttableview.{cpp,h}. Note that the class has been
 renamed from TQTableView to TQtTableView to avoid name clashes. To use
 it, simply include it in your project and rename TQTableView to
 TQtTableView throughout.
-
     
     TQToolButton
+
     
     TQToolButton
 
    
-
     The TQToolButton class used to distinguish between "on" and "off"
-icons. In 3.0, this mechanism was moved into the TQIconSet class
-(see TQIconSet::State).
-
     The old TQToolButton::onIconSet and TQToolButton::offIconSet
+
     The TQToolButton class used to distinguish between "on" and "off"
+icons. In 3.0, this mechanism was moved into the TQIconSet class
+(see TQIconSet::State).
+
     The old TQToolButton::onIconSet and TQToolButton::offIconSet
 properties are still provided so that old source will compile, but
-their semantics have changed: they are now synonyms for TQToolButton::iconSet. If you used that distinction in TQt 2.x, you will
-need to adjust your code to use the TQIconSet On/Off mechanism.
+their semantics have changed: they are now synonyms for TQToolButton::iconSet. If you used that distinction in TQt 2.x, you will
+need to adjust your code to use the TQIconSet On/Off mechanism.
 
     Likewise, the on parameter of these two functions is now ignored:
 
     
    
 
     This is one class of changes that are
@@ -202,10 +202,10 @@ function that is not in a subclass of TQListViewIte
 
     
    Collection classes
    
 
     
     The collection classes include generic
 classes such as TQGDict, TQGList, and
-the subclasses such as TQDict and TQList.
+the subclasses such as TQDict and TQList.
 
     
     The macro-based TQt collection classes are obsolete; use the
-template-based classes instead. Simply remove includes of qgeneric.h and
-replace e.g. Q_DECLARE(TQCache,TQPixmap) with TQCache.
+template-based classes instead. Simply remove includes of ntqgeneric.h and
+replace e.g. Q_DECLARE(TQCache,TQPixmap) with TQCache.
 
     
     The GCI global typedef is replaced by TQCollection::Item.  Only if you
 make your own subclasses of the undocumented generic collection classes
 will you have GCI in your code.
@@ -217,9 +217,9 @@ is not set (i.e. if the QT_NO_CHECK flag is defined).
 
     
    The debug() function now outputs nothing if TQt was compiled with
 the QT_NO_DEBUG macro defined.
 
     
    TQString
    
-
     TQString has undergone major changes internally, and although it is highly
+
     TQString has undergone major changes internally, and although it is highly
 backward compatible, it is worth studying in detail when porting to TQt 2.x.
-The TQt 1.x TQString class has been renamed to TQCString in TQt 2.x, though if
+The TQt 1.x TQString class has been renamed to TQCString in TQt 2.x, though if
 you use that you will incur a performance penalty since all TQt functions
 that took const char* now take const TQString&.
 
     
    
@@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ might indicate that the true nature of the data you are
 dealing with is uncertain.  If the data is NUL-terminated
 8-bit data, use TQCString; if it is unterminated (ie.
 contains NULs) 8-bit data, use TQByteArray; if it is text,
-use TQString.
+use TQString.
 
    
 
  •  Put a breakpoint in 
     TQString::latin1()
    
  
@@ -268,7 +268,7 @@ and ideally you'll only need latin1() or implicit conversion when interfacing
 to facilities that do not have Unicode support.
 
     
    Automatic-expanding
    
 
    
-A big advantage of the new TQString is that it automatically expands
+A big advantage of the new TQString is that it automatically expands
 when you write to an indexed position.
 
     
    TQChar and TQCharRef
    
 
    
@@ -282,11 +282,11 @@ has basically the same functionality as a TQChar, except it is more restricted
 in what you can assign to it and cast it to (to avoid programming errors).
 
     
    Use TQString
    
 
    
-Try to always use TQString.  If you must, use TQCString which is the
+Try to always use TQString.  If you must, use TQCString which is the
 old implementation from TQt 1.x.
 
     
    Unicode vs. ASCII
    
 
    
-Every conversion to and from ASCII is wasted time, so try to use TQString
+Every conversion to and from ASCII is wasted time, so try to use TQString
 as much as possible rather than const char*.  This also ensures you have
 full 16-bit support.
 
     
    Convertion to ASCII
    
@@ -309,11 +309,11 @@ use_sub_string( my_string.mid(index) )
 
    
 The TQString constructor taking a const char* and an integer is removed.
 Use of this constructor was error-prone, since the length included the
-'\0' terminator. Use TQString::left(int) or TQString::fromLatin1( const char*,
+'\0' terminator. Use TQString::left(int) or TQString::fromLatin1( const char*,
 int ) -- in both cases the int parameter signifies the number of characters.
 
     
    TQString(int) is private
    
 
    
-The TQString constructor taking an integer is now private.  This function
+The TQString constructor taking an integer is now private.  This function
 is not meaningful anymore, since TQString does all space allocation
 automatically.  99% of cases can simple be changed to use the
 default constructor, TQString().
@@ -328,9 +328,9 @@ been made safe - you no longer need to pre-allocate space (though for
 other reasons, sprintf is still a poor choice - eg. it doesn't pass Unicode).
 The only remaining common case is conversion of 0 (NULL) to TQString, which
 would usually give expected results in TQt 1.x.  For TQt 2.x the correct
-syntax is to use TQString::null, though note that
+syntax is to use TQString::null, though note that
 the default constructor, TQString(), creates a null string too.
-Assignment of 0 to a TQString is ambiguous - assign
+Assignment of 0 to a TQString is ambiguous - assign
 TQString::null; you'll mainly find these in code that has been converted
 from const char* types to TQString.
 This also prevents a common error case from TQt 1.x - in
@@ -356,28 +356,28 @@ summary of how much your application is doing Unicode and ASCII
 back-and-forth conversions.
 
     
    TQString::detach() is obsolete and removed
    
 
    
-Since TQString is now always shared, this function does nothing.
+Since TQString is now always shared, this function does nothing.
 Remove calls to TQString::detach().
 
     
    TQString::resize(int size) is obsolete and removed
    
 
    
 Code using this to truncate a string should use
-truncate(size-1).
+truncate(size-1).
 Code using qstr.resize(0) should use qstr = TQString::null.
 Code calling resize(n) prior to using
-operator[] up to n just remove
+operator[] up to n just remove
 the resize(n) completely.
 
     
    TQString::size() is obsolete and removed
    
 
    
 Calls to this function must be replaced by
-length()+1.
+length()+1.
 
     
    TQString::setStr(const char*) is removed
    
 
    Try to understand why you were using this.
 If you just meant assignment, use that.  Otherwise,
 you are probably using TQString as an array of bytes, in which case use
-TQByteArray or TQCString instead.
+TQByteArray or TQCString instead.
 
     
    TQString is not an array of bytes
    
 
    
-Code that uses TQString as an array of bytes should use TQByteArray
+Code that uses TQString as an array of bytes should use TQByteArray
 or a char[], then convert that to a TQString if needed.
 
     
    "string = 0"
    
 
    
@@ -406,26 +406,26 @@ where you would have used 0 with char pointers.
 This means that inserting a 0-character
 in the middle of the string does not change the length().  ie.
 
    -   TQString s = "fred";
+   TQString s = "fred";
    s[1] = '\0';
-     // s.length() == 4
+     // s.length() == 4
      // s == "f\0ed"
-     // s.latin1() == "f"
+     // s.latin1() == "f"
    s[1] = 'r';
      // s == "fred"
-     // s.latin1() == "fred"
+     // s.latin1() == "fred"
  
    
  
 Especially look out for this type of code:
 
    -   TQString s(2);
+   TQString s(2);
    s[0] = '?';
    s[1] = 0;
  
    
  
 This creates a string 2 characters long.
 To find these problems while converting, you might like to
-add Q_ASSERT(strlen(d->ascii)==d->len) inside
+add Q_ASSERT(strlen(d->ascii)==d->len) inside
 
     TQString::latin1()
    
  .
 
     
    TQString or Standard C++ string?
    
@@ -436,10 +436,10 @@ to be so (for the small number of platforms where it is defined at all).
 This is the same mistake made over and over
 in the history of C - only when non-8-bit characters are the norm
 do programmers find them usable. Though it is possible to convert between
-string and TQString, it is less efficient than using TQString throughout.
+string and TQString, it is less efficient than using TQString throughout.
 For example, when using:
 
    -    TQLabel::setText( const TQString& )
+    TQLabel::setText( const TQString& )
 
    
  
 if you use string, like this:
@@ -453,13 +453,13 @@ if you use string, like this:
 that will create a (ASCII only) copy of str, stored in mylabel.
 But this:
 
    -    void myclass::dostuffwithtext( const TQString& str )
+    void myclass::dostuffwithtext( const TQString& str )
     {
         mylabel.setText( str );
     }
 
    
  
-will make an implicitly shared reference to str in the TQLabel - no copying
+will make an implicitly shared reference to str in the TQLabel - no copying
 at all.  This function might be 10 nested function calls away from something
 like this:
 
    @@ -470,7 +470,7 @@ like this:
 
    
  
 At this point, in TQt 2.x, the tr() does a very fast dictionary lookup
-through memory-mapped message files, returning some Unicode TQString for
+through memory-mapped message files, returning some Unicode TQString for
 the appropriate language (the default being to just make a TQString out
 of the text, of course - you're not forced to use any of these
 features), and that same memory mapped Unicode will be passed
@@ -505,7 +505,7 @@ darkMagenta,
 and
 darkYellow)
 are in the TQt namespace.
-In members of classes that inherit the TQt namespace-class (eg. TQWidget
+In members of classes that inherit the TQt namespace-class (eg. TQWidget
 subclasses), you can use the unqualified names as before, but in global
 functions (eg. main()), you need to qualify them:  TQt::red, TQt::white, etc.
 See also the TQRgb section below.
@@ -515,13 +515,13 @@ be in the more efficient order (for typical contemporary hardware).  If your
 code made assumptions about the order, you will get blue where you expect
 red and vice versa (you'll not notice the problem if you use shades of
 gray, green, or magenta).  You should port your code to use the
-creator function qRgb(int r,int g,int b) and the
-access functions qRed(TQRgb), qBlue(TQRgb), and qGreen(TQRgb).
+creator function qRgb(int r,int g,int b) and the
+access functions qRed(TQRgb), qBlue(TQRgb), and qGreen(TQRgb).
 If you are using the alpha channel, it hasn't moved, but you should use
-the functions qRgba(int,int,int,int) and qAlpha(TQRgb). Note also that
-TQColor::pixel() does not return a TQRgb (it never did on all platforms,
+the functions qRgba(int,int,int,int) and qAlpha(TQRgb). Note also that
+TQColor::pixel() does not return a TQRgb (it never did on all platforms,
 but your code may have assumed so on your platform) - this may also produce
-strange color results - use TQColor::rgb() if you want a TQRgb.
+strange color results - use TQColor::rgb() if you want a TQRgb.
 
     
    TQDataStream
    
 
     
    The TQDatastream serialization format of most TQt classes is changed
 in TQt 2.x. Use 
     TQDataStream::setVersion( 1 )
    
@@ -532,7 +532,7 @@ compatibility issues:
 
      
 
    • TQString: TQt 1.x has no Unicode support, so strings will be
 serialized by writing the classic C string returned by 
      -        TQString::latin1().
      
+        TQString::latin1().
    • 
  
 
  • TQPoint & al.: Coordinates will be
 truncated to the TQt 1.x 16 bit format.
@@ -540,7 +540,7 @@ truncated to the TQt 1.x 16 bit format.
 
     
    TQWidget
    
 
     
    TQWidget::recreate()
    
 
    
-This function is now called reparent().
+This function is now called reparent().
 
     
    TQWidget::setAcceptFocus(bool)
    
 
    
 This function is removed.
@@ -562,14 +562,14 @@ When processing a paintEvent, painting is only permitted within
 the update region specified in the event. Any painting outside will be
 clipped away. This shouldn't break any code (it was always like this
 on MS-Windows) but makes many explicit calls to
-TQPainter::setClipRegion() superfluous. Apart from the improved
+TQPainter::setClipRegion() superfluous. Apart from the improved
 consistency, the change is likely to reduce flicker and to make TQt
 event slightly faster.
 
     
    TQIODevice
    
 
    
 The protected member TQIODevice::index is renamed to TQIODevice::ioIndex
 to avoid warnings and to allow compilation with bad C libraries that
-#define index to strchr.  If you have made a subclass of TQIODevice,
+#define index to strchr.  If you have made a subclass of TQIODevice,
 check every occurrence of the string "index" in the implementation, since
 a compiler will not always catch cases like 
    (uint)index
    
  
@@ -585,7 +585,7 @@ have been renamed to 
     TQLabel::setIndent()
    
   and
 
     TQLabel::indent()
    
  , respectively. This was done to avoid
-collision with TQFrame::setMargin(), which is now virtual.
+collision with TQFrame::setMargin(), which is now virtual.
 
     
     TQLabel::setMovie()
    
  
    
 
    
@@ -607,24 +607,24 @@ of your application, pass this main window as parent to the dialog's
 constructor. Old code (with 0 pointer) will still run. Old code that
 included TQDialogs as child widgets will no longer work (it never really did).
 If you think you might be doing this, put a breakpoint in
-TQDialog::TQDialog() conditional on parent not being 0.
+TQDialog::TQDialog() conditional on parent not being 0.
 
     
    TQStrList
    
-
     Many methods that took a TQStrList can now instead take a TQStringList,
-which is a real list of TQString values.
+
     Many methods that took a TQStrList can now instead take a TQStringList,
+which is a real list of TQString values.
 
     To use TQStringList rather than TQStrList, change loops that look like this:
 
    -    TQStrList list = ...;
+    TQStrList list = ...;
     const char* s;
-    for ( s = list.first(); s; s = list.next() ) {
+    for ( s = list.first(); s; s = list.next() ) {
         process(s);
     }
 
    
  
 to be like this:
 
    -    TQStringList list = ...;
+    TQStringList list = ...;
     TQStringList::ConstIterator i;
-    for ( i = list.begin(); i != list.end(); ++i ) {
+    for ( i = list.begin(); i != list.end(); ++i ) {
         process(*i);
     }
 
    
@@ -633,14 +633,14 @@ to be like this:
 
     The following functions now use TQStringList rather than TQStrList
 for return types/parameters.
 
     
    
@@ -650,13 +650,13 @@ choose to use encodedEntryList().
 
  • TQListBox::insertStringList(const TQStringList &,int index=-1)
 
 
     The rarely used static function void
-TQFont::listSubstitutions(TQStrList*) is replaced by TQStringList
-TQFont::substitutions().
+TQFont::listSubstitutions(TQStrList*) is replaced by TQStringList
+TQFont::substitutions().
 
     
    TQLayout
    
 
     
     Calling resize(0,0) or resize(1,1) will no longer work magically.
 Remove all such calls. The default size of top level widgets will be their
-sizeHint().
-
     
     The default implementation of TQWidget::sizeHint() will no longer
+sizeHint().
+
     
     The default implementation of TQWidget::sizeHint() will no longer
 return just an invalid size; if the widget has a layout, it will return
 the layout's preferred size.
 
     
     The special maximum MaximumHeight/Width is now TQWIDGETSIZE_MAX,
@@ -667,32 +667,32 @@ non-default alignment now indicates that the widget should not grow to
 fill the available space, but should be sized according to sizeHint().
 If a widget is too small, set the alignment to 0. (Zero indicates no
 alignment, and is the default.)
-
     
     The class TQGManager is removed. Subclasses of TQLayout need to be rewritten
-to use the new, much simpler TQLayout API.
+
     
     The class TQGManager is removed. Subclasses of TQLayout need to be rewritten
+to use the new, much simpler TQLayout API.
 
     
     For typical layouts, all use of
-setMinimumSize()
+setMinimumSize()
 and
-setFixedSize()
+setFixedSize()
 can be removed.
-activate() is no longer necessary.
+activate() is no longer necessary.
 
     
    
-You might like to look at the TQGrid, TQVBox, and TQHBox widgets - they offer
+You might like to look at the TQGrid, TQVBox, and TQHBox widgets - they offer
 a simple way to build nested widget structures.
 
     
    TQListView
    
 
     
    In TQt 1.x mouse events to the viewport where redirected to the
 event handlers for the listview; in TQt 2.x, this functionality is
-in TQScrollView where mouse (and other position-oriented) events are
+in TQScrollView where mouse (and other position-oriented) events are
 redirected to viewportMousePressEvent() etc, which in turn translate
 the event to the coordinate system of the contents and call
 contentsMousePressEvent() etc, thus providing events in the most
 convenient coordinate system.  If you overrode TQListView::MouseButtonPress(),
-TQListView::mouseDoubleClickEvent(), TQListView::mouseMoveEvent(), or
-TQListView::mouseReleaseEvent() you must instead override
+TQListView::mouseDoubleClickEvent(), TQListView::mouseMoveEvent(), or
+TQListView::mouseReleaseEvent() you must instead override
 viewportMousePressEvent(),
 viewportMouseDoubleClickEvent(), viewportMouseMoveEvent(), or
 viewportMouseReleaseEvent() respectively.  New code will usually override
 contentsMousePressEvent() etc.
-
     
    The signal TQListView::selectionChanged(TQListViewItem *) can now be
+
     
    The signal TQListView::selectionChanged(TQListViewItem *) can now be
 emitted with a null pointer as parameter. Programs that use the
 argument without checking for 0, may crash.
 
     
    TQMultiLineEdit
    
@@ -701,45 +701,45 @@ The protected function
 
     TQMultiLineEdit::textWidth(TQString*)
    
  
 changed to
-
     TQMultiLineEdit::textWidth(const TQString&)
    
+
     TQMultiLineEdit::textWidth(const TQString&)
    
  .
 This is unlikely to be a problem, and you'll get a compile error
 if you called it.
 
     
    TQClipboard
    
 
     
    
 
     TQClipboard::pixmap()
    
-  now returns a TQPixmap, not a TQPixmap*.
+  now returns a TQPixmap, not a TQPixmap*.
 The pixmap
-will be null if no pixmap is on the
-clipboard.  TQClipboard now offers powerful MIME-based types on the
+will be null if no pixmap is on the
+clipboard.  TQClipboard now offers powerful MIME-based types on the
 clipboard, just like drag-and-drop (in fact, you can reuse most of your
 drag-and-drop code with clipboard operations).
 
     
    TQDropSite
    
 
     
    
 TQDropSite is obsolete.  If you simply passed this, just remove
 the inheritance of TQDropSite and call
-setAcceptDrops(TRUE) in the class
+setAcceptDrops(TRUE) in the class
 constructor.
 If you passed something other than this,
 your code will not work.  A common case is passing
 the
-viewport() of a TQListView,
+viewport() of a TQListView,
 in which case,
 override the
-contentsDragMoveEvent(),
+contentsDragMoveEvent(),
 etc.
 functions rather than TQListView's dragMoveEvent() etc.  For other
 cases, you will need to use an event filter to act on the drag/drop events
 of another widget (as is the usual way to intercept foreign events).
 
     
    TQScrollView
    
 
     The parameters in the signal
-contentsMoving(int,int)
+contentsMoving(int,int)
 are now positive rather than negative values, coinciding with
-setContentsPos().  Search for
+setContentsPos().  Search for
 connections you make to this signal, and either change the slot they are
 connected to such that it also expects positive rather than negative
 values, or introduce an intermediate slot and signal that negates them.
-
     If you used drag and drop with TQScrollView, you may experience the problem
+
     If you used drag and drop with TQScrollView, you may experience the problem
 described for TQDropSite.
 
     
    TQTextStream
    
 
     
    
@@ -759,7 +759,7 @@ identifiers affected by the Url to Uri change are
 TQUrlDrag::setUrls() and TQUrlDrag::urlToLocalFile().
 
     
    TQPainter
    
 
     
     The GrayText painter flag has been removed. Use
-setPen( palette().disabled().foreground() )
+setPen( palette().disabled().foreground() )
 instead.
 
     
     The RasterOp enum
 (CopyROP,
@@ -782,7 +782,7 @@ NorROP, LastROP)
 is now part of the TQt namespace class, so if you
 use it outside a member function, you'll need to prefix with TQt::.
 
     
    TQPicture
    
-
     
    The binary storage format of TQPicture is changed, but the TQt 2.x
+
     
    The binary storage format of TQPicture is changed, but the TQt 2.x
 TQPicture class can both read and write TQt 1.x format TQPictures. No
 special handling is required for reading; TQPicture will automatically
 detect the version number. In order to write a TQt 1.x format TQPicture,
@@ -794,11 +794,11 @@ href="#TQDataStream">TQDataStream applies.
 1.x. The program will not crash, it will just issue the warning
 "TQPicture::play: Incompatible version 2.x" and refuse to load the
 picture.
-
     
    TQPoint, TQPointArray, TQSize and TQRect
    
+
     
    TQPoint, TQPointArray, TQSize and TQRect
    
 
     
    The basic coordinate datatype in these classes, TQCOORD, is now 32
 bit (int) instead of a 16 bit (short). The const values TQCOORD_MIN and
 TQCOORD_MAX have changed accordingly.
-
     
    TQPointArray is now actually, not only seemingly, a TQArray of TQPoint
+
     
    TQPointArray is now actually, not only seemingly, a TQArray of TQPoint
 objects. The semi-internal workaround classes TQPointData and TQPointVal
 are removed since they are no longer needed; TQPoint is used directly
 instead. The function 
     TQPointArray::shortPoints()
    
@@ -806,7 +806,7 @@ instead. The function 
     TQPointArray::shortPoints()
    
 provides the point array converted to short (16bit) coordinates for
 use with external functions that demand that format.
 
     
    TQImage
    
-
     TQImage uses TQRgb for the colors - see the changes to that.
+
     TQImage uses TQRgb for the colors - see the changes to that.
 
     
    TQPixmap
    
 
     
     TQPixmap::convertToImage()
    
   with bitmaps now guarantees that color0 pixels
@@ -826,10 +826,10 @@ or
 - see the documentation
 to choose which is best for your application.  NormalOptim is most like
 the TQt 1.x "TRUE" optimization.
-
     
    TQMenuData / TQPopupMenu
    
+
     
    TQMenuData / TQPopupMenu
    
 
     In TQt 1.x, new menu items were assigned either an application-wide
 unique identifier or an identifier equal to the index of the item, depending on the
-insertItem(...) function used.
+insertItem(...) function used.
 In TQt 2.x this confusing
 situation has been cleaned up: generated identifiers are always
 unique across the entire application.
@@ -850,27 +850,27 @@ ownership manually.
 locations within one menu structure or be used as both a menubar
 drop-down and as a context popup-menu.  This should make it possible to
 significantly simplify many applications.
-
     Last but not least, TQPopupMenu no longer inherits TQTableView. Instead,
-it directly inherits TQFrame.
-
     
    TQValidator (TQLineEdit, TQComboBox, TQSpinBox) 
    
+
     Last but not least, TQPopupMenu no longer inherits TQTableView. Instead,
+it directly inherits TQFrame.
+
     
    TQValidator (TQLineEdit, TQComboBox, TQSpinBox) 
    
 
     
     TQValidator::validate(...)
    
  
 and
-
     TQValidator::fixup( TQString & )
    
+
     TQValidator::fixup( TQString & )
    
  
 are now const
 functions. If your subclass reimplements validate() as a
 non-const function,
 you will get a compile error (validate was pure virtual).
 
     In TQLineEdit, TQComboBox, and TQSpinBox,
-setValidator(...) now takes a const pointer to a TQValidator, and
+setValidator(...) now takes a const pointer to a TQValidator, and
 validator() returns a const pointer. This change highlights the fact
 that the widgets do not take the ownership of the validator (a validator is
-a TQObject on its own, with its own parent - you can easily set the same validator
+a TQObject on its own, with its own parent - you can easily set the same validator
 object on many different widgets), so changing the state of
 such an object or deleting it is very likely a bug.
-
     
    TQFile, TQFileInfo, TQDir
    
-
     File and directory names are now always Unicode strings (ie. TQString).  If you used TQString
+
     
    TQFile, TQFileInfo, TQDir
    
+
     File and directory names are now always Unicode strings (ie. TQString).  If you used TQString
 in the past for the simplicity it offers, you'll probably have little consequence.  However,
 if you pass filenames to system functions rather than using TQt functions (eg. if you use the
 Unix unlink() function rather than TQFile::remove(), your code will probably
@@ -888,12 +888,12 @@ boundingRect(TQChar), but since
 char auto-converts to TQChar, you're not likely to run into problems
 with this.
 
     
    TQWindow
    
-
     This class (which was just TQWidget under a different name) has been
+
     This class (which was just TQWidget under a different name) has been
 removed.  If you used it, do a global search-and-replace of the word
 "TQWindow" with "TQWidget".
 
     
    TQEvent
    
-
     
     The global #define macros in qevent.h have been replaced by an
-enum in TQEvent.  Use e.g. TQEvent::Paint instead of Event_Paint. Same
+
     
     The global #define macros in ntqevent.h have been replaced by an
+enum in TQEvent.  Use e.g. TQEvent::Paint instead of Event_Paint. Same
 for all of:
 Event_None,
 Event_Timer,
@@ -931,7 +931,7 @@ Event_ActivateControl,
 Event_DeactivateControl,
 and
 Event_User.
-
     
     The Q_*_EVENT macros in qevent.h have been deleted.  Use an
+
     
     The Q_*_EVENT macros in ntqevent.h have been deleted.  Use an
 explicit cast instead. The macros were:
 Q_TIMER_EVENT,
 Q_MOUSE_EVENT,
@@ -951,7 +951,7 @@ much testing of its values.
 
     
    All the removed functions
    
 
     All these functions have been removed in
 TQt 2.x.  Most are simply cases where "const char*" has changed to
-"const TQString&", or when an enumeration type has moved into the TQt::
+"const TQString&", or when an enumeration type has moved into the TQt::
 namespace (which, technically, is a new name, but your code will
 compile just the same anyway).  This list is provided for completeness.
 
     
diff --git a/doc/html/process-example.html b/doc/html/process-example.html
index 565eab304..8949c674a 100644
--- a/doc/html/process-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/process-example.html
@@ -49,17 +49,17 @@ output of the command.
 **
 *****************************************************************************/
 
-#include <qobject.h>
-#include <qprocess.h>
-#include <qvbox.h>
-#include <qtextview.h>
-#include <qpushbutton.h>
-#include <qapplication.h>
-#include <qmessagebox.h>
+#include <ntqobject.h>
+#include <ntqprocess.h>
+#include <ntqvbox.h>
+#include <ntqtextview.h>
+#include <ntqpushbutton.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
+#include <ntqmessagebox.h>
 
 #include <stdlib.h>
 
-class UicManager : public TQVBox
+class UicManager : public TQVBox
 {
     Q_OBJECT
 
@@ -72,42 +72,42 @@ public slots:
     void scrollToTop();
 
 private:
-    TQProcess *proc;
-    TQTextView *output;
-    TQPushButton *quitButton;
+    TQProcess *proc;
+    TQTextView *output;
+    TQPushButton *quitButton;
 };
 
 UicManager::UicManager()
 {
     // Layout
-    output = new TQTextView( this );
-    quitButton = new TQPushButton( tr("Quit"), this );
-    connect( quitButton, SIGNAL(clicked()),
-            qApp, SLOT(quit()) );
-    resize( 500, 500 );
+    output = new TQTextView( this );
+    quitButton = new TQPushButton( tr("Quit"), this );
+    connect( quitButton, SIGNAL(clicked()),
+            qApp, SLOT(quit()) );
+    resize( 500, 500 );
 
     // TQProcess related code
-    proc = new TQProcess( this );
+    proc = new TQProcess( this );
 
     // Set up the command and arguments.
     // On the command line you would do:
     //   uic -tr i18n "small_dialog.ui"
-    proc->addArgument( "uic" );
-    proc->addArgument( "-tr" );
-    proc->addArgument( "i18n" );
-    proc->addArgument( "small_dialog.ui" );
+    proc->addArgument( "uic" );
+    proc->addArgument( "-tr" );
+    proc->addArgument( "i18n" );
+    proc->addArgument( "small_dialog.ui" );
 
-    connect( proc, SIGNAL(readyReadStdout()),
+    connect( proc, SIGNAL(readyReadStdout()),
             this, SLOT(readFromStdout()) );
-    connect( proc, SIGNAL(processExited()),
+    connect( proc, SIGNAL(processExited()),
             this, SLOT(scrollToTop()) );
 
-    if ( !proc->start() ) {
+    if ( !proc->start() ) {
         // error handling
-        TQMessageBox::critical( 0,
-                tr("Fatal error"),
-                tr("Could not start the uic command."),
-                tr("Quit") );
+        TQMessageBox::critical( 0,
+                tr("Fatal error"),
+                tr("Could not start the uic command."),
+                tr("Quit") );
         exit( -1 );
     }
 }
@@ -116,21 +116,21 @@ void UicManager::readFromStdout()
 {
     // Read and process the data.
     // Bear in mind that the data might be output in chunks.
-    output->append( proc->readStdout() );
+    output->append( proc->readStdout() );
 }
 
 void UicManager::scrollToTop()
 {
-    output->setContentsPos( 0, 0 );
+    output->setContentsPos( 0, 0 );
 }
 
 int main( int argc, char **argv )
 {
-    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
+    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
     UicManager manager;
-    a.setMainWidget( &manager );
-    manager.show();
-    return a.exec();
+    a.setMainWidget( &manager );
+    manager.show();
+    return a.exec();
 }
 
 #include "process.moc"
diff --git a/doc/html/progress-example.html b/doc/html/progress-example.html
index e20a0aba9..009b4dab0 100644
--- a/doc/html/progress-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/progress-example.html
@@ -48,17 +48,17 @@ demonstrates simple use of menus.
 **
 *****************************************************************************/
 
-#include <qprogressdialog.h>
-#include <qapplication.h>
-#include <qmenubar.h>
-#include <qpopupmenu.h>
-#include <qpainter.h>
+#include <ntqprogressdialog.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
+#include <ntqmenubar.h>
+#include <ntqpopupmenu.h>
+#include <ntqpainter.h>
 #include <stdlib.h>
 
-class AnimatedThingy : public TQLabel {
+class AnimatedThingy : public TQLabel {
 public:
-    AnimatedThingy( TQWidget* parent, const TQString& s ) :
-        TQLabel(parent),
+    AnimatedThingy( TQWidget* parent, const TQString& s ) :
+        TQLabel(parent),
         label(s),
         step(0)
     {
@@ -77,16 +77,16 @@ public:
     void show()
     {
         if (!isVisible()) startTimer(100);
-        TQWidget::show();
+        TQWidget::show();
     }
 
     void hide()
     {
-        TQWidget::hide();
+        TQWidget::hide();
         killTimers();
     }
 
-    TQSize sizeHint() const
+    TQSize sizeHint() const
     {
         return TQSize(120,100);
     }
@@ -94,15 +94,15 @@ public:
 protected:
     void timerEvent(TQTimerEvent*)
     {
-        TQPainter p(this);
-        TQPen pn=p.pen();
-        pn.setWidth(2);
-        pn.setColor(backgroundColor());
-        p.setPen(pn);
+        TQPainter p(this);
+        TQPen pn=p.pen();
+        pn.setWidth(2);
+        pn.setColor(backgroundColor());
+        p.setPen(pn);
 
         step = (step + 1) % nqix;
 
-        p.drawLine(ox[0][step], oy[0][step], ox[1][step], oy[1][step]);
+        p.drawLine(ox[0][step], oy[0][step], ox[1][step], oy[1][step]);
 
         inc(x0, dx0, width());
         inc(y0, dy0, height());
@@ -113,31 +113,31 @@ protected:
         ox[1][step] = x1;
         oy[1][step] = y1;
 
-        TQColor c;
-        c.setHsv( (step*255)/nqix, 255, 255 ); // rainbow effect
-        pn.setColor(c);
-        p.setPen(pn);
-        p.drawLine(ox[0][step], oy[0][step], ox[1][step], oy[1][step]);
-        p.setPen(colorGroup().text());
-        p.drawText(rect(), AlignCenter, label);
+        TQColor c;
+        c.setHsv( (step*255)/nqix, 255, 255 ); // rainbow effect
+        pn.setColor(c);
+        p.setPen(pn);
+        p.drawLine(ox[0][step], oy[0][step], ox[1][step], oy[1][step]);
+        p.setPen(colorGroup().text());
+        p.drawText(rect(), AlignCenter, label);
     }
 
     void paintEvent(TQPaintEvent* event)
     {
-        TQPainter p(this);
-        TQPen pn=p.pen();
-        pn.setWidth(2);
-        p.setPen(pn);
-        p.setClipRect(event->rect());
+        TQPainter p(this);
+        TQPen pn=p.pen();
+        pn.setWidth(2);
+        p.setPen(pn);
+        p.setClipRect(event->rect());
         for (int i=0; i<nqix; i++) {
-            TQColor c;
-            c.setHsv( (i*255)/nqix, 255, 255 ); // rainbow effect
-            pn.setColor(c);
-            p.setPen(pn);
-            p.drawLine(ox[0][i], oy[0][i], ox[1][i], oy[1][i]);
+            TQColor c;
+            c.setHsv( (i*255)/nqix, 255, 255 ); // rainbow effect
+            pn.setColor(c);
+            p.setPen(pn);
+            p.drawLine(ox[0][i], oy[0][i], ox[1][i], oy[1][i]);
         }
-        p.setPen(colorGroup().text());
-        p.drawText(rect(), AlignCenter, label);
+        p.setPen(colorGroup().text());
+        p.drawText(rect(), AlignCenter, label);
     }
 
 private:
@@ -153,12 +153,12 @@ private:
     int oy[2][nqix];
     int x0,y0,x1,y1;
     int dx0,dy0,dx1,dy1;
-    TQString label;
+    TQString label;
     int step;
 };
 
 
-class CPUWaster : public TQWidget
+class CPUWaster : public TQWidget
 {
     Q_OBJECT
 
@@ -171,10 +171,10 @@ class CPUWaster : public TQWidget
         while (n--) r*=(n%3 ? 5 : 4);
         return r;
     }
-    TQString drawItemText(int id)
+    TQString drawItemText(int id)
     {
-        TQString str;
-        str.sprintf("%d Rectangles", drawItemRects(id));
+        TQString str;
+        str.sprintf("%d Rectangles", drawItemRects(id));
         return str;
     }
 
@@ -182,29 +182,29 @@ public:
     CPUWaster() :
         pb(0)
     {
-        menubar = new TQMenuBar( this, "menu" );
-        Q_CHECK_PTR( menubar );
+        menubar = new TQMenuBar( this, "menu" );
+        Q_CHECK_PTR( menubar );
 
-        TQPopupMenu* file = new TQPopupMenu();
-        Q_CHECK_PTR( file );
-        menubar->insertItem( "&File", file );
+        TQPopupMenu* file = new TQPopupMenu();
+        Q_CHECK_PTR( file );
+        menubar->insertItem( "&File", file );
         for (int i=first_draw_item; i<=last_draw_item; i++)
-            file->insertItem( drawItemText(i), i );
-        connect( menubar, SIGNAL(activated(int)), this, SLOT(doMenuItem(int)) );
-        file->insertSeparator();
-        file->insertItem( "Quit", qApp,  SLOT(quit()) );
-
-        options = new TQPopupMenu();
-        Q_CHECK_PTR( options );
-        menubar->insertItem( "&Options", options );
-        td_id = options->insertItem( "Timer driven", this, SLOT(timerDriven()) );
-        ld_id = options->insertItem( "Loop driven", this, SLOT(loopDriven()) );
-        options->insertSeparator();
-        dl_id = options->insertItem( "Default label", this, SLOT(defaultLabel()) );
-        cl_id = options->insertItem( "Custom label", this, SLOT(customLabel()) );
-        options->insertSeparator();
-        md_id = options->insertItem( "No minimum duration", this, SLOT(toggleMinimumDuration()) );
-        options->setCheckable( TRUE );
+            file->insertItem( drawItemText(i), i );
+        connect( menubar, SIGNAL(activated(int)), this, SLOT(doMenuItem(int)) );
+        file->insertSeparator();
+        file->insertItem( "Quit", qApp,  SLOT(quit()) );
+
+        options = new TQPopupMenu();
+        Q_CHECK_PTR( options );
+        menubar->insertItem( "&Options", options );
+        td_id = options->insertItem( "Timer driven", this, SLOT(timerDriven()) );
+        ld_id = options->insertItem( "Loop driven", this, SLOT(loopDriven()) );
+        options->insertSeparator();
+        dl_id = options->insertItem( "Default label", this, SLOT(defaultLabel()) );
+        cl_id = options->insertItem( "Custom label", this, SLOT(customLabel()) );
+        options->insertSeparator();
+        md_id = options->insertItem( "No minimum duration", this, SLOT(toggleMinimumDuration()) );
+        options->setCheckable( TRUE );
         loopDriven();
         defaultLabel();
 
@@ -225,65 +225,65 @@ public slots:
     void timerDriven()
     {
         timer_driven = TRUE;
-        options->setItemChecked( td_id, TRUE );
-        options->setItemChecked( ld_id, FALSE );
+        options->setItemChecked( td_id, TRUE );
+        options->setItemChecked( ld_id, FALSE );
     }
 
     void loopDriven()
     {
         timer_driven = FALSE;
-        options->setItemChecked( ld_id, TRUE );
-        options->setItemChecked( td_id, FALSE );
+        options->setItemChecked( ld_id, TRUE );
+        options->setItemChecked( td_id, FALSE );
     }
 
     void defaultLabel()
     {
         default_label = TRUE;
-        options->setItemChecked( dl_id, TRUE );
-        options->setItemChecked( cl_id, FALSE );
+        options->setItemChecked( dl_id, TRUE );
+        options->setItemChecked( cl_id, FALSE );
     }
 
     void customLabel()
     {
         default_label = FALSE;
-        options->setItemChecked( dl_id, FALSE );
-        options->setItemChecked( cl_id, TRUE );
+        options->setItemChecked( dl_id, FALSE );
+        options->setItemChecked( cl_id, TRUE );
     }
 
     void toggleMinimumDuration()
     {
-        options->setItemChecked( md_id,
-           !options->isItemChecked( md_id ) );
+        options->setItemChecked( md_id,
+           !options->isItemChecked( md_id ) );
     }
 
 private:
     void timerEvent( TQTimerEvent* )
     {
         if (!got_stop)
-            pb->setProgress( pb->totalSteps() - rects );
+            pb->setProgress( pb->totalSteps() - rects );
         rects--;
 
         {
-            TQPainter p(this);
+            TQPainter p(this);
 
             int ww = width();
             int wh = height();
 
             if ( ww > 8 && wh > 8 ) {
-                TQColor c(rand()%255, rand()%255, rand()%255);
+                TQColor c(rand()%255, rand()%255, rand()%255);
                 int x = rand() % (ww-8);
                 int y = rand() % (wh-8);
                 int w = rand() % (ww-x);
                 int h = rand() % (wh-y);
-                p.fillRect( x, y, w, h, c );
+                p.fillRect( x, y, w, h, c );
             }
         }
 
         if (!rects || got_stop) {
             if (!got_stop)
-                pb->setProgress( pb->totalSteps() );
-            TQPainter p(this);
-            p.fillRect(0, 0, width(), height(), backgroundColor());
+                pb->setProgress( pb->totalSteps() );
+            TQPainter p(this);
+            p.fillRect(0, 0, width(), height(), backgroundColor());
             enableDrawingItems(TRUE);
             killTimers();
             delete pb;
@@ -291,21 +291,21 @@ private:
         }
     }
 
-    TQProgressDialog* newProgressDialog( const char* label, int steps, bool modal )
+    TQProgressDialog* newProgressDialog( const char* label, int steps, bool modal )
     {
-        TQProgressDialog *d = new TQProgressDialog(label, "Cancel", steps, this,
+        TQProgressDialog *d = new TQProgressDialog(label, "Cancel", steps, this,
                                                  "progress", modal);
-        if ( options->isItemChecked( md_id ) )
-            d->setMinimumDuration(0);
+        if ( options->isItemChecked( md_id ) )
+            d->setMinimumDuration(0);
         if ( !default_label )
-            d->setLabel( new AnimatedThingy(d,label) );
+            d->setLabel( new AnimatedThingy(d,label) );
         return d;
     }
 
     void enableDrawingItems(bool yes)
     {
         for (int i=first_draw_item; i<=last_draw_item; i++) {
-            menubar->setItemEnabled(i, yes);
+            menubar->setItemEnabled(i, yes);
         }
     }
 
@@ -313,45 +313,45 @@ private:
     {
         if ( timer_driven ) {
             if ( pb ) {
-                qWarning("This cannot happen!");
+                qWarning("This cannot happen!");
                 return;
             }
             rects = n;
             pb = newProgressDialog("Drawing rectangles.\n"
                                    "Using timer event.", n, FALSE);
-            pb->setCaption("Please Wait");
-            connect(pb, SIGNAL(cancelled()), this, SLOT(stopDrawing()));
+            pb->setCaption("Please Wait");
+            connect(pb, SIGNAL(cancelled()), this, SLOT(stopDrawing()));
             enableDrawingItems(FALSE);
             startTimer(0);
             got_stop = FALSE;
         } else {
-            TQProgressDialog* lpb = newProgressDialog(
+            TQProgressDialog* lpb = newProgressDialog(
                         "Drawing rectangles.\nUsing loop.", n, TRUE);
-            lpb->setCaption("Please Wait");
+            lpb->setCaption("Please Wait");
 
-            TQPainter p(this);
+            TQPainter p(this);
             for (int i=0; i<n; i++) {
-                lpb->setProgress(i);
-                if ( lpb->wasCancelled() )
+                lpb->setProgress(i);
+                if ( lpb->wasCancelled() )
                     break;
 
-                TQColor c(rand()%255, rand()%255, rand()%255);
+                TQColor c(rand()%255, rand()%255, rand()%255);
                 int x = rand()%(width()-8);
                 int y = rand()%(height()-8);
                 int w = rand()%(width()-x);
                 int h = rand()%(height()-y);
-                p.fillRect(x,y,w,h,c);
+                p.fillRect(x,y,w,h,c);
             }
 
-            p.fillRect(0, 0, width(), height(), backgroundColor());
+            p.fillRect(0, 0, width(), height(), backgroundColor());
 
             delete lpb;
         }
     }
 
-    TQMenuBar* menubar;
-    TQProgressDialog* pb;
-    TQPopupMenu* options;
+    TQMenuBar* menubar;
+    TQProgressDialog* pb;
+    TQPopupMenu* options;
     int td_id, ld_id;
     int dl_id, cl_id;
     int md_id;
@@ -363,16 +363,16 @@ private:
 
 int main( int argc, char **argv )
 {
-    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
+    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
 
     int wincount = argc > 1 ? atoi(argv[1]) : 1;
 
     for ( int i=0; i<wincount; i++ ) {
         CPUWaster* cpuw = new CPUWaster;
-        if ( i == 0 ) a.setMainWidget(cpuw);
-        cpuw->show();
+        if ( i == 0 ) a.setMainWidget(cpuw);
+        cpuw->show();
     }
-    return a.exec();
+    return a.exec();
 }
 
 #include "progress.moc"
diff --git a/doc/html/progressbar-example.html b/doc/html/progressbar-example.html
index 99a024dae..dc54be1dd 100644
--- a/doc/html/progressbar-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/progressbar-example.html
@@ -49,25 +49,25 @@ This example shows how to use a progress bar.
 #ifndef PROGRESSBAR_H
 #define PROGRESSBAR_H
 
-#include <qbuttongroup.h>
-#include <qtimer.h>
+#include <ntqbuttongroup.h>
+#include <ntqtimer.h>
 
 class TQRadioButton;
 class TQPushButton;
 class TQProgressBar;
 
-class ProgressBar : public TQButtonGroup
+class ProgressBar : public TQButtonGroup
 {
     Q_OBJECT
 
 public:
-    ProgressBar( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
+    ProgressBar( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
 
 protected:
-    TQRadioButton *slow, *normal, *fast;
-    TQPushButton *start, *pause, *reset;
-    TQProgressBar *progress;
-    TQTimer timer;
+    TQRadioButton *slow, *normal, *fast;
+    TQPushButton *start, *pause, *reset;
+    TQProgressBar *progress;
+    TQTimer timer;
 
 protected slots:
     void slotStart();
@@ -93,12 +93,12 @@ protected slots:
 
 #include "progressbar.h"
 
-#include <qradiobutton.h>
-#include <qpushbutton.h>
-#include <qprogressbar.h>
-#include <qlayout.h>
+#include <ntqradiobutton.h>
+#include <ntqpushbutton.h>
+#include <ntqprogressbar.h>
+#include <ntqlayout.h>
 
-#include <qmotifstyle.h>
+#include <ntqmotifstyle.h>
 
 /*
  * Constructor
@@ -106,21 +106,21 @@ protected slots:
  * Creates child widgets of the ProgressBar widget
  */
 
-ProgressBar::ProgressBar( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQButtonGroup( 0, Horizontal, "Progress Bar", parent, name ), timer()
+ProgressBar::ProgressBar( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+    : TQButtonGroup( 0, Horizontal, "Progress Bar", parent, name ), timer()
 {
-    setMargin( 10 );
+    setMargin( 10 );
 
-    TQGridLayout* toplayout = new TQGridLayout( layout(), 2, 2, 5);
+    TQGridLayout* toplayout = new TQGridLayout( layout(), 2, 2, 5);
 
-    setRadioButtonExclusive( TRUE );
+    setRadioButtonExclusive( TRUE );
 
     // insert three radiobuttons which the user can use
     // to set the speed of the progress and two pushbuttons
     // to start/pause/continue and reset the progress
-    slow = new TQRadioButton( "S&low", this );
-    normal = new TQRadioButton( "&Normal", this );
-    fast = new TQRadioButton( "&Fast", this );
+    slow = new TQRadioButton( "S&low", this );
+    normal = new TQRadioButton( "&Normal", this );
+    fast = new TQRadioButton( "&Fast", this );
     TQVBoxLayout* vb1 = new TQVBoxLayout;
     toplayout->addLayout( vb1, 0, 0 );
     vb1->addWidget( slow );
@@ -128,32 +128,32 @@ protected slots:
     vb1->addWidget( fast );
 
     // two push buttons, one for start, for for reset.
-    start = new TQPushButton( "&Start", this );
-    reset = new TQPushButton( "&Reset", this );
+    start = new TQPushButton( "&Start", this );
+    reset = new TQPushButton( "&Reset", this );
     TQVBoxLayout* vb2 = new TQVBoxLayout;
     toplayout->addLayout( vb2, 0, 1 );
     vb2->addWidget( start );
     vb2->addWidget( reset );
 
     // Create the progressbar
-    progress = new TQProgressBar( 100, this );
-    //    progress->setStyle( new TQMotifStyle() );
+    progress = new TQProgressBar( 100, this );
+    //    progress->setStyle( new TQMotifStyle() );
     toplayout->addMultiCellWidget( progress, 1, 1, 0, 1 );
 
     // connect the clicked() SIGNALs of the pushbuttons to SLOTs
-    connect( start, SIGNAL( clicked() ), this, SLOT( slotStart() ) );
-    connect( reset, SIGNAL( clicked() ), this, SLOT( slotReset() ) );
+    connect( start, SIGNAL( clicked() ), this, SLOT( slotStart() ) );
+    connect( reset, SIGNAL( clicked() ), this, SLOT( slotReset() ) );
 
     // connect the timeout() SIGNAL of the progress-timer to a SLOT
-    connect( &timer, SIGNAL( timeout() ), this, SLOT( slotTimeout() ) );
+    connect( &timer, SIGNAL( timeout() ), this, SLOT( slotTimeout() ) );
 
     // Let's start with normal speed...
-    normal->setChecked( TRUE );
+    normal->setChecked( TRUE );
 
 
     // some contraints
-    start->setFixedWidth( 80 );
-    setMinimumWidth( 300 );
+    start->setFixedWidth( 80 );
+    setMinimumWidth( 300 );
 }
 
 /*
@@ -166,20 +166,20 @@ protected slots:
 void ProgressBar::slotStart()
 {
     // If the progress bar is at the beginning...
-    if ( progress->progress() == -1 ) {
+    if ( progress->progress() == -1 ) {
         // ...set according to the checked speed-radiobutton
         // the number of steps which are needed to complete the process
-        if ( slow->isChecked() )
-            progress->setTotalSteps( 10000 );
-        else if ( normal->isChecked() )
-            progress->setTotalSteps( 1000 );
+        if ( slow->isChecked() )
+            progress->setTotalSteps( 10000 );
+        else if ( normal->isChecked() )
+            progress->setTotalSteps( 1000 );
         else
-            progress->setTotalSteps( 50 );
+            progress->setTotalSteps( 50 );
 
         // disable the speed-radiobuttons
-        slow->setEnabled( FALSE );
-        normal->setEnabled( FALSE );
-        fast->setEnabled( FALSE );
+        slow->setEnabled( FALSE );
+        normal->setEnabled( FALSE );
+        fast->setEnabled( FALSE );
     }
 
     // If the progress is not running...
@@ -187,12 +187,12 @@ void ProgressBar::slotStart()
         // ...start the timer (and so the progress) with a interval of 1 ms...
         timer.start( 1 );
         // ...and rename the start/pause/continue button to Pause
-        start->setText( "&Pause" );
+        start->setText( "&Pause" );
     } else { // if the prgress is running...
         // ...stop the timer (and so the prgress)...
         timer.stop();
         // ...and rename the start/pause/continue button to Continue
-        start->setText( "&Continue" );
+        start->setText( "&Continue" );
     }
 }
 
@@ -208,17 +208,17 @@ void ProgressBar::slotReset()
     timer.stop();
 
     // rename the start/pause/continue button to Start...
-    start->setText( "&Start" );
+    start->setText( "&Start" );
     // ...and enable this button
-    start->setEnabled( TRUE );
+    start->setEnabled( TRUE );
 
     // enable the speed-radiobuttons
-    slow->setEnabled( TRUE );
-    normal->setEnabled( TRUE );
-    fast->setEnabled( TRUE );
+    slow->setEnabled( TRUE );
+    normal->setEnabled( TRUE );
+    fast->setEnabled( TRUE );
 
     // reset the progressbar
-    progress->reset();
+    progress->reset();
 }
 
 /*
@@ -230,22 +230,22 @@ void ProgressBar::slotReset()
 
 void ProgressBar::slotTimeout()
 {
-    int p = progress->progress();
+    int p = progress->progress();
 
 #if 1
     // If the progress is complete...
-    if ( p == progress->totalSteps() )  {
+    if ( p == progress->totalSteps() )  {
         // ...rename the start/pause/continue button to Start...
-        start->setText( "&Start" );
+        start->setText( "&Start" );
         // ...and disable it...
-        start->setEnabled( FALSE );
+        start->setEnabled( FALSE );
         // ...and return
         return;
     }
 #endif
 
     // If the process is not complete increase it
-    progress->setProgress( ++p );
+    progress->setProgress( ++p );
 }
 
    • 
 
@@ -262,18 +262,18 @@ void ProgressBar::slotTimeout()
 *****************************************************************************/
 
 #include "progressbar.h"
-#include <qapplication.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
 
 int main(int argc,char **argv)
 {
-    TQApplication a(argc,argv);
+    TQApplication a(argc,argv);
 
     ProgressBar progressbar;
-    progressbar.setCaption("TQt Example - ProgressBar");
-    a.setMainWidget(&progressbar);
-    progressbar.show();
+    progressbar.setCaption("TQt Example - ProgressBar");
+    a.setMainWidget(&progressbar);
+    progressbar.show();
 
-    return a.exec();
+    return a.exec();
 }
 
    
 
diff --git a/doc/html/properties.html b/doc/html/properties.html
index 45a972779..bba5d99ca 100644
--- a/doc/html/properties.html
+++ b/doc/html/properties.html
@@ -41,31 +41,31 @@ features like __property or [property]. Our solution works wit
 on the meta-object system that also provides object communication
 through signals and slots.
 
     The Q_PROPERTY macro in a class declaration declares a
-property. Properties can only be declared in classes that inherit TQObject. A second macro, Q_OVERRIDE, can be used to override some
+property. Properties can only be declared in classes that inherit TQObject. A second macro, Q_OVERRIDE, can be used to override some
 aspects of an inherited property in a subclass. (See Q_OVERRIDE.)
 
     To the outer world, a property appears to be similar to a data member.
 But properties have several features that distinguish them from
 ordinary data members:
 
     
      
 
    •  A read function. This always exists.
-
       
    •  A write function. This is optional: read-only properties like TQWidget::isDesktop() do not have one.
+
       
    •  A write function. This is optional: read-only properties like TQWidget::isDesktop() do not have one.
 
       
    •  An attribute "stored" that indicates persistence. Most properties
-are stored, but a few virtual properties are not. For example, TQWidget::minimumWidth() isn't stored, since it's just a view of
-TQWidget::minimumSize(), and has no data of its own.
+are stored, but a few virtual properties are not. For example, TQWidget::minimumWidth() isn't stored, since it's just a view of
+TQWidget::minimumSize(), and has no data of its own.
 
       
    •  A reset function to set a property back to its context specific
-default value. This is very rare, but for example, TQWidget::font()
-needs this, since no call to TQWidget::setFont() can mean 'reset to
+default value. This is very rare, but for example, TQWidget::font()
+needs this, since no call to TQWidget::setFont() can mean 'reset to
 the context specific font'.
 
       
    •  An attribute "designable" that indicates whether it makes sense to
 make the property available in a GUI builder (e.g. TQt Designer). For most properties this 
-makes sense, but not for all, e.g. TQButton::isDown(). The user can
+makes sense, but not for all, e.g. TQButton::isDown(). The user can
 press buttons, and the application programmer can make the program
 press its own buttons, but a GUI design tool can't press buttons.
 
       
    
 
     The read, write, and reset functions must be public member functions
 from the class in which the property is defined.
 
     Properties can be read and written through generic functions in
-TQObject without knowing anything about the class in use. These two
+TQObject without knowing anything about the class in use. These two
 function calls are equivalent:
 
     
         // TQButton *b and TQObject *o point to the same button
@@ -76,21 +76,21 @@ function calls are equivalent:
 
     Equivalent, that is, except that the first is faster, and provides
 much better diagnostics at compile time. When practical, the first is
 better. However, since you can get a list of all available properties
-for any TQObject through its TQMetaObject, TQObject::setProperty()
+for any TQObject through its TQMetaObject, TQObject::setProperty()
 can give you control over classes that weren't available at compile
 time.
-
     As well as TQObject::setProperty(), there is a corresponding TQObject::property() function. TQMetaObject::propertyNames() returns
-the names of all available properties. TQMetaObject::property()
+
     As well as TQObject::setProperty(), there is a corresponding TQObject::property() function. TQMetaObject::propertyNames() returns
+the names of all available properties. TQMetaObject::property()
 returns the property data for a named property: a TQMetaProperty
 object.
 
     Here's a simple example that shows the most important property
 functions in use:
 
     
    -    class MyClass : public TQObject
+    class MyClass : public TQObject
     {
         Q_OBJECT
     public:
-        MyClass( TQObject * parent=0, const char * name=0 );
+        MyClass( TQObject * parent=0, const char * name=0 );
         ~MyClass();
 
         enum Priority { High, Low, VeryHigh, VeryLow };
@@ -112,31 +112,31 @@ to return either the type itself, a pointer to it, or a reference to
 it. The optional write function must return void and must take exactly
 one argument, either the type itself, a pointer or a const reference
 to it. The meta object compiler enforces this.
-
     The type of a property can be any TQVariant supported type or an
+
     The type of a property can be any TQVariant supported type or an
 enumeration type declared in the class itself. Since MyClass uses
 the enumeration type Priority for the property, this type must be
 registered with the property system as well.
 
     There are two exceptions to the above: The type of a property can also
-be either TQValueList<TQVariant> or TQMap<TQString,TQVariant>. In
-these cases the type must be specified as TQValueList or as TQMap
+be either TQValueList<TQVariant> or TQMap<TQString,TQVariant>. In
+these cases the type must be specified as TQValueList or as TQMap
 (i.e. without their template parameters).
 
     It is possible to set a value by name, like this:
 
         obj->setProperty( "priority", "VeryHigh" );
 
    
  
-In the case of TQValueList and TQMap properties the value passes
-is a TQVariant whose value is the entire list or map.
+In the case of TQValueList and TQMap properties the value passes
+is a TQVariant whose value is the entire list or map.
 
     Enumeration types are registered with the Q_ENUMS macro. Here's the
 final class declaration including the property related declarations:
 
     
    -    class MyClass : public TQObject
+    class MyClass : public TQObject
     {
         Q_OBJECT
         Q_PROPERTY( Priority priority READ priority WRITE setPriority )
         Q_ENUMS( Priority )
     public:
-        MyClass( TQObject * parent=0, const char * name=0 );
+        MyClass( TQObject * parent=0, const char * name=0 );
         ~MyClass();
 
         enum Priority { High, Low, VeryHigh, VeryLow };
@@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ you can specify a boolean member function.
 
     STORED declares whether the property's value must be remembered
 when storing an object's state. Stored makes only sense for writable
 properties. The default value is TRUE. Technically superfluous
-properties (like TQPoint pos if TQRect geometry is already a property)
+properties (like TQPoint pos if TQRect geometry is already a property)
 define this to be FALSE.
 
     Connected to the property system is an additional macro, "Q_CLASSINFO",
 that can be used to attach additional name/value-pairs to a class'
@@ -173,13 +173,13 @@ meta object, for example:
 
    
  
 
     Like other meta data, class information is accessible at runtime
-through the meta object, see TQMetaObject::classInfo() for details.
+through the meta object, see TQMetaObject::classInfo() for details.
 
     
 
     Q_OVERRIDE
 
    
-
     When you inherit a TQObject subclass you may wish to override some
+
     When you inherit a TQObject subclass you may wish to override some
 aspects of some of the class's properties.
-
     For example, in TQWidget we have the autoMask property defined like
+
     For example, in TQWidget we have the autoMask property defined like
 this:
 
         Q_PROPERTY( bool autoMask READ autoMask WRITE setAutoMask DESIGNABLE false SCRIPTABLE false )
@@ -188,13 +188,13 @@ this:
 
     But we need to make the auto mask property designable in some TQWidget
 subclasses. Similarly some classes will need this property to be
 scriptable (e.g. for TQSA). This is achieved by overriding these
-features of the property in a subclass. In TQCheckBox, for example, we
+features of the property in a subclass. In TQCheckBox, for example, we
 achieve this using the following code:
 
         Q_OVERRIDE( bool autoMask DESIGNABLE true SCRIPTABLE true )
 
    
  
-
     Another example is TQToolButton. By default TQToolButton has a read-only
+
     Another example is TQToolButton. By default TQToolButton has a read-only
 "toggleButton" property, because that's what it inherits from TQButton:
 
         Q_PROPERTY( bool toggleButton READ isToggleButton )
diff --git a/doc/html/propertydocs b/doc/html/propertydocs
index a3404ce69..a49a1efd8 100644
--- a/doc/html/propertydocs
+++ b/doc/html/propertydocs
@@ -1,97 +1,97 @@
 
 
     QAction::accel
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the action's accelerator key.
-<p>The keycodes can be found in <a href="qt.html#Key-enum">Qt::Key</a> and <a href="qt.html#Modifier-enum">Qt::Modifier</a>. There
+<p>The keycodes can be found in <a href="ntqt.html#Key-enum">Qt::Key</a> and <a href="ntqt.html#Modifier-enum">Qt::Modifier</a>. There
 is no default accelerator key.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qaction.html#setAccel">setAccel</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qaction.html#accel">accel</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqaction.html#setAccel">setAccel</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqaction.html#accel">accel</a>().
 
 
 
     QAction::enabled
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the action is enabled.
 <p>Disabled actions can't be chosen by the user. They don't disappear
 from the menu/tool bar but are displayed in a way which indicates
 that they are unavailable, e.g. they might be displayed grayed
 out.
 <p> What's this? help on disabled actions is still available provided
-the <a href="qaction.html#whatsThis-prop">QAction::whatsThis</a> property is set.
+the <a href="ntqaction.html#whatsThis-prop">QAction::whatsThis</a> property is set.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qaction.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qaction.html#isEnabled">isEnabled</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqaction.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqaction.html#isEnabled">isEnabled</a>().
 
 
 
     QAction::iconSet
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the action's icon.
 <p>The icon is used as the tool button icon and in the menu to the
 left of the menu text. There is no default icon.
-<p> If a null icon (<a href="qiconset.html#isNull">QIconSet::isNull</a>() is passed into this function,
+<p> If a null icon (<a href="ntqiconset.html#isNull">QIconSet::isNull</a>() is passed into this function,
 the icon of the action is cleared.
 <p> (See the action/toggleaction/toggleaction.cpp example.)
 <p> 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qaction.html#setIconSet">setIconSet</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qaction.html#iconSet">iconSet</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqaction.html#setIconSet">setIconSet</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqaction.html#iconSet">iconSet</a>().
 
 
 
     QAction::menuText
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the action's menu text.
 <p>If the action is added to a menu the menu option will consist of
 the icon (if there is one), the menu text and the accelerator (if
 there is one). If the menu text is not explicitly set in the
-constructor or by using <a href="qaction.html#setMenuText">setMenuText</a>() the action's description
+constructor or by using <a href="ntqaction.html#setMenuText">setMenuText</a>() the action's description
 text will be used as the menu text. There is no default menu text.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qaction.html#text-prop">text</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqaction.html#text-prop">text</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qaction.html#setMenuText">setMenuText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qaction.html#menuText">menuText</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqaction.html#setMenuText">setMenuText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqaction.html#menuText">menuText</a>().
 
 
 
     QAction::on
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether a toggle action is on.
 <p>This property is always on (TRUE) for command actions and
-<a href="qactiongroup.html">QActionGroup</a>s; <a href="qaction.html#setOn">setOn</a>() has no effect on them. For action's
-where <a href="qaction.html#isToggleAction">isToggleAction</a>() is TRUE, this property's default value is
+<a href="qactiongroup.html">QActionGroup</a>s; <a href="ntqaction.html#setOn">setOn</a>() has no effect on them. For action's
+where <a href="ntqaction.html#isToggleAction">isToggleAction</a>() is TRUE, this property's default value is
 off (FALSE).
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qaction.html#toggleAction-prop">toggleAction</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqaction.html#toggleAction-prop">toggleAction</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qaction.html#setOn">setOn</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qaction.html#isOn">isOn</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqaction.html#setOn">setOn</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqaction.html#isOn">isOn</a>().
 
 
 
     QAction::statusTip
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the action's status tip.
 <p>The statusTip is displayed on all status bars that this action's
 toplevel parent widget provides.
 <p> If no status tip is defined, the action uses the tool tip text.
 <p> There is no default statusTip text.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qaction.html#statusTip-prop">statusTip</a> and <a href="qaction.html#toolTip-prop">toolTip</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqaction.html#statusTip-prop">statusTip</a> and <a href="ntqaction.html#toolTip-prop">toolTip</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qaction.html#setStatusTip">setStatusTip</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qaction.html#statusTip">statusTip</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqaction.html#setStatusTip">setStatusTip</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqaction.html#statusTip">statusTip</a>().
 
 
 
     QAction::text
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the action's descriptive text.
-<p>If <a href="qmainwindow.html#usesTextLabel-prop">QMainWindow::usesTextLabel</a> is TRUE, the text appears as a
+<p>If <a href="ntqmainwindow.html#usesTextLabel-prop">QMainWindow::usesTextLabel</a> is TRUE, the text appears as a
 label in the relevant tool button. It also serves as the default
 text in menus and tool tips if these have not been specifically
 defined. There is no default text.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qaction.html#menuText-prop">menuText</a>, <a href="qaction.html#toolTip-prop">toolTip</a>, and <a href="qaction.html#statusTip-prop">statusTip</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqaction.html#menuText-prop">menuText</a>, <a href="ntqaction.html#toolTip-prop">toolTip</a>, and <a href="ntqaction.html#statusTip-prop">statusTip</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qaction.html#setText">setText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qaction.html#text">text</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqaction.html#setText">setText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqaction.html#text">text</a>().
 
 
 
     QAction::toggleAction
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the action is a toggle action.
 <p>A toggle action is one which has an on/off state. For example a
 Bold toolbar button is either on or off. An action which is not a
@@ -104,12 +104,12 @@ exclusive toggling, add the relevant toggle actions to a
 <a href="qactiongroup.html">QActionGroup</a> with the <a href="qactiongroup.html#exclusive-prop">QActionGroup::exclusive</a> property set to
 TRUE.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qaction.html#setToggleAction">setToggleAction</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qaction.html#isToggleAction">isToggleAction</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqaction.html#setToggleAction">setToggleAction</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqaction.html#isToggleAction">isToggleAction</a>().
 
 
 
     QAction::toolTip
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the action's tool tip.
 <p>This text is used for the tool tip. If no status tip has been set
 the tool tip will be used for the status tip.
@@ -117,14 +117,14 @@ the tool tip will be used for the status tip.
 hasn't been specified the description text is used as the tool tip
 text.
 <p> There is no default tool tip text.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qaction.html#statusTip-prop">statusTip</a> and <a href="qaction.html#accel-prop">accel</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqaction.html#statusTip-prop">statusTip</a> and <a href="ntqaction.html#accel-prop">accel</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qaction.html#setToolTip">setToolTip</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qaction.html#toolTip">toolTip</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqaction.html#setToolTip">setToolTip</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqaction.html#toolTip">toolTip</a>().
 
 
 
     QAction::visible
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the action can be seen (e.g. in menus and toolbars).
 <p>If <em>visible</em> is TRUE the action can be seen (e.g. in menus and
 toolbars) and chosen by the user; if <em>visible</em> is FALSE the
@@ -132,20 +132,20 @@ action cannot be seen or chosen by the user.
 <p> Actions which are not visible are <em>not</em> grayed out; they do not
 appear at all.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qaction.html#setVisible">setVisible</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qaction.html#isVisible">isVisible</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqaction.html#setVisible">setVisible</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqaction.html#isVisible">isVisible</a>().
 
 
 
     QAction::whatsThis
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the action's "What's This?" help text.
 <p>The whats this text is used to provide a brief description of the
 action. The text may contain rich text (HTML-like tags -- see
-<a href="qstylesheet.html">QStyleSheet</a> for the list of supported tags). There is no default
+<a href="ntqstylesheet.html">QStyleSheet</a> for the list of supported tags). There is no default
 "What's This" text.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwhatsthis.html">QWhatsThis</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwhatsthis.html">QWhatsThis</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qaction.html#setWhatsThis">setWhatsThis</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qaction.html#whatsThis">whatsThis</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqaction.html#setWhatsThis">setWhatsThis</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqaction.html#whatsThis">whatsThis</a>().
 
 
 
@@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ action. The text may contain rich text (HTML-like tags -- see
 can ever be active at any one time. If the user chooses another
 toggle action in the group the one they chose becomes active and
 the one that was active becomes inactive.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qaction.html#toggleAction-prop">QAction::toggleAction</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqaction.html#toggleAction-prop">QAction::toggleAction</a>.
 
 <p>Set this property's value with <a href="qactiongroup.html#setExclusive">setExclusive</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qactiongroup.html#isExclusive">isExclusive</a>().
 
@@ -166,16 +166,16 @@ the one that was active becomes inactive.
     
 <p>This property holds whether the group's actions are displayed in a subwidget of the widgets the action group is added to.
 <p>Exclusive action groups added to a toolbar display their actions
-in a combobox with the action's <a href="qaction.html#text-prop">QAction::text</a> and <a href="qaction.html#iconSet-prop">QAction::iconSet</a> properties shown. Non-exclusive groups are
-represented by a tool button showing their <a href="qaction.html#iconSet-prop">QAction::iconSet</a> and
--- depending on <a href="qmainwindow.html#usesTextLabel">QMainWindow::usesTextLabel</a>() -- <a href="qaction.html#text">text</a>()
+in a combobox with the action's <a href="ntqaction.html#text-prop">QAction::text</a> and <a href="ntqaction.html#iconSet-prop">QAction::iconSet</a> properties shown. Non-exclusive groups are
+represented by a tool button showing their <a href="ntqaction.html#iconSet-prop">QAction::iconSet</a> and
+-- depending on <a href="ntqmainwindow.html#usesTextLabel">QMainWindow::usesTextLabel</a>() -- <a href="ntqaction.html#text">text</a>()
 property.
 <p> In a popup menu the member actions are displayed in a submenu.
 <p> Changing usesDropDown only affects <em>subsequent</em> calls to <a href="qactiongroup.html#addTo">addTo</a>().
 <p> Note that setting this property for actions in a combobox causes
-calls to their <a href="qaction.html#setVisible">QAction::setVisible</a>(),
-<a href="qaction.html#setEnabled">QAction::setEnabled</a>(), and
-<a href="qaction.html#setDisabled">QAction::setDisabled</a>() functions to have no effect.
+calls to their <a href="ntqaction.html#setVisible">QAction::setVisible</a>(),
+<a href="ntqaction.html#setEnabled">QAction::setEnabled</a>(), and
+<a href="ntqaction.html#setDisabled">QAction::setDisabled</a>() functions to have no effect.
 <p> This property's default is FALSE.
 <p> 
 <p>Set this property's value with <a href="qactiongroup.html#setUsesDropDown">setUsesDropDown</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qactiongroup.html#usesDropDown">usesDropDown</a>().
@@ -183,10 +183,10 @@ calls to their <a href="qaction.html#setVisible">QAction::setVisible</a
 
 
     QAssistantClient::open
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether Qt Assistant is open.
 <p>
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qassistantclient.html#isOpen">isOpen</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqassistantclient.html#isOpen">isOpen</a>().
 
 
 
@@ -248,84 +248,84 @@ key, and the name of the server, but not including the username, the domain or t
 
 
     QButton::accel
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the accelerator associated with the button.
 <p>This property is 0 if there is no accelerator set. If you set this
 property to 0 then any current accelerator is removed.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qbutton.html#setAccel">setAccel</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qbutton.html#accel">accel</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqbutton.html#setAccel">setAccel</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqbutton.html#accel">accel</a>().
 
 
 
     QButton::autoRepeat
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether autoRepeat is enabled.
-<p>If autoRepeat is enabled then the <a href="qbutton.html#clicked">clicked</a>() signal is emitted at
+<p>If autoRepeat is enabled then the <a href="ntqbutton.html#clicked">clicked</a>() signal is emitted at
 regular intervals if the button is down. This property has no
 effect on toggle buttons. autoRepeat is off by default.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qbutton.html#setAutoRepeat">setAutoRepeat</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qbutton.html#autoRepeat">autoRepeat</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqbutton.html#setAutoRepeat">setAutoRepeat</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqbutton.html#autoRepeat">autoRepeat</a>().
 
 
 
     QButton::autoResize
-     <p>This property holds whether autoResize is enabled.
+     <p>This property holds whether autoResize is enabled.
 <p><b>This property is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 <p> If autoResize is enabled then the button will resize itself
 whenever the contents are changed.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qbutton.html#setAutoResize">setAutoResize</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qbutton.html#autoResize">autoResize</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqbutton.html#setAutoResize">setAutoResize</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqbutton.html#autoResize">autoResize</a>().
 
 
 
     QButton::down
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the button is pressed.
 <p>If this property is TRUE, the button is pressed down. The signals
-<a href="qbutton.html#pressed">pressed</a>() and <a href="qbutton.html#clicked">clicked</a>() are not emitted if you set this property
+<a href="ntqbutton.html#pressed">pressed</a>() and <a href="ntqbutton.html#clicked">clicked</a>() are not emitted if you set this property
 to TRUE. The default is FALSE.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qbutton.html#setDown">setDown</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qbutton.html#isDown">isDown</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqbutton.html#setDown">setDown</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqbutton.html#isDown">isDown</a>().
 
 
 
     QButton::exclusiveToggle
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the button is an exclusive toggle.
-<p>If this property is TRUE and the button is in a <a href="qbuttongroup.html">QButtonGroup</a>, the
+<p>If this property is TRUE and the button is in a <a href="ntqbuttongroup.html">QButtonGroup</a>, the
 button can only be toggled off by another one being toggled on.
 The default is FALSE.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qbutton.html#isExclusiveToggle">isExclusiveToggle</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqbutton.html#isExclusiveToggle">isExclusiveToggle</a>().
 
 
 
     QButton::on
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the button is toggled.
 <p>This property should only be set for toggle buttons.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qbutton.html#isOn">isOn</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqbutton.html#isOn">isOn</a>().
 
 
 
     QButton::pixmap
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the pixmap shown on the button.
-<p>If the pixmap is monochrome (i.e. it is a <a href="qbitmap.html">QBitmap</a> or its <a href="qpixmap.html#depth">depth</a> is 1) and it does not have a mask,
+<p>If the pixmap is monochrome (i.e. it is a <a href="ntqbitmap.html">QBitmap</a> or its <a href="ntqpixmap.html#depth">depth</a> is 1) and it does not have a mask,
 this property will set the pixmap to be its own mask. The purpose
 of this is to draw transparent bitmaps which are important for
 toggle buttons, for example.
-<p> <a href="qbutton.html#pixmap">pixmap</a>() returns 0 if no pixmap was set.
+<p> <a href="ntqbutton.html#pixmap">pixmap</a>() returns 0 if no pixmap was set.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qbutton.html#setPixmap">setPixmap</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qbutton.html#pixmap">pixmap</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqbutton.html#setPixmap">setPixmap</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqbutton.html#pixmap">pixmap</a>().
 
 
 
     QButton::text
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the text shown on the button.
-<p>This property will return a <a href="qstring.html#QString-null">QString::null</a> if the button has no
+<p>This property will return a <a href="ntqstring.html#QString-null">QString::null</a> if the button has no
 text. If the text has an ampersand (&amp;) in it, then an
 accelerator is automatically created for it using the character
 that follows the '&amp;' as the accelerator key. Any previous
@@ -333,144 +333,144 @@ accelerator will be overwritten, or cleared if no accelerator is
 defined by the text.
 <p> There is no default text.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qbutton.html#setText">setText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qbutton.html#text">text</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqbutton.html#setText">setText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqbutton.html#text">text</a>().
 
 
 
     QButton::toggleButton
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the button is a toggle button.
 <p>The default value is FALSE.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qbutton.html#isToggleButton">isToggleButton</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqbutton.html#isToggleButton">isToggleButton</a>().
 
 
 
     QButton::toggleState
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the state of the toggle button.
 <p>If this property is changed then it does not cause the button
 to be repainted.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qbutton.html#state">state</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqbutton.html#state">state</a>().
 
 
 
     QButton::toggleType
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the type of toggle on the button.
-<p>The default toggle type is <a href="qbutton.html#ToggleType-enum">SingleShot</a>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qbutton.html#ToggleType-enum">QButton::ToggleType</a>.
+<p>The default toggle type is <a href="ntqbutton.html#ToggleType-enum">SingleShot</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqbutton.html#ToggleType-enum">QButton::ToggleType</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qbutton.html#toggleType">toggleType</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqbutton.html#toggleType">toggleType</a>().
 
 
 
     QButtonGroup::exclusive
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the button group is exclusive.
 <p>If this property is TRUE, then the buttons in the group are
 toggled, and to untoggle a button you must click on another button
 in the group. The default value is FALSE.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qbuttongroup.html#setExclusive">setExclusive</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qbuttongroup.html#isExclusive">isExclusive</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqbuttongroup.html#setExclusive">setExclusive</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqbuttongroup.html#isExclusive">isExclusive</a>().
 
 
 
     QButtonGroup::radioButtonExclusive
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the radio buttons in the group are exclusive.
-<p>If this property is TRUE (the default), the <a href="qradiobutton.html">radiobuttons</a> in the group are treated exclusively.
+<p>If this property is TRUE (the default), the <a href="ntqradiobutton.html">radiobuttons</a> in the group are treated exclusively.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qbuttongroup.html#setRadioButtonExclusive">setRadioButtonExclusive</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qbuttongroup.html#isRadioButtonExclusive">isRadioButtonExclusive</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqbuttongroup.html#setRadioButtonExclusive">setRadioButtonExclusive</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqbuttongroup.html#isRadioButtonExclusive">isRadioButtonExclusive</a>().
 
 
 
     QButtonGroup::selectedId
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the selected toggle button.
 <p>The toggle button is specified as an ID.
 <p> If no toggle button is selected, this property holds -1.
-<p> If <a href="qbuttongroup.html#setButton">setButton</a>() is called on an exclusive group, the button with
+<p> If <a href="ntqbuttongroup.html#setButton">setButton</a>() is called on an exclusive group, the button with
 the given id will be set to on and all the others will be set to
 off.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qbuttongroup.html#selected">selected</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqbuttongroup.html#selected">selected</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qbuttongroup.html#setButton">setButton</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qbuttongroup.html#selectedId">selectedId</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqbuttongroup.html#setButton">setButton</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqbuttongroup.html#selectedId">selectedId</a>().
 
 
 
     QCheckBox::checked
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the checkbox is checked.
 <p>The default is unchecked, i.e. FALSE.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qcheckbox.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qcheckbox.html#isChecked">isChecked</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqcheckbox.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqcheckbox.html#isChecked">isChecked</a>().
 
 
 
     QCheckBox::tristate
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the checkbox is a tri-state checkbox.
 <p>The default is two-state, i.e. tri-state is FALSE.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qcheckbox.html#setTristate">setTristate</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qcheckbox.html#isTristate">isTristate</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqcheckbox.html#setTristate">setTristate</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqcheckbox.html#isTristate">isTristate</a>().
 
 
 
     QComboBox::autoCompletion
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether auto-completion is enabled.
 <p>This property can only be set for editable comboboxes, for
 non-editable comboboxes it has no effect. It is FALSE by default.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qcombobox.html#setAutoCompletion">setAutoCompletion</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qcombobox.html#autoCompletion">autoCompletion</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqcombobox.html#setAutoCompletion">setAutoCompletion</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqcombobox.html#autoCompletion">autoCompletion</a>().
 
 
 
     QComboBox::autoResize
-     <p>This property holds whether auto resize is enabled.
+     <p>This property holds whether auto resize is enabled.
 <p><b>This property is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 <p> If this property is set to TRUE then the combobox will resize itself
 whenever its contents change. The default is FALSE.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qcombobox.html#setAutoResize">setAutoResize</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qcombobox.html#autoResize">autoResize</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqcombobox.html#setAutoResize">setAutoResize</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqcombobox.html#autoResize">autoResize</a>().
 
 
 
     QComboBox::count
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the number of items in the combobox.
 <p>
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qcombobox.html#count">count</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqcombobox.html#count">count</a>().
 
 
 
     QComboBox::currentItem
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the index of the current item in the combobox.
-<p>Note that the <a href="qcombobox.html#activated">activated</a>() and <a href="qcombobox.html#highlighted">highlighted</a>() signals are only
+<p>Note that the <a href="ntqcombobox.html#activated">activated</a>() and <a href="ntqcombobox.html#highlighted">highlighted</a>() signals are only
 emitted when the user changes the current item, not when it is
 changed programmatically.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qcombobox.html#setCurrentItem">setCurrentItem</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qcombobox.html#currentItem">currentItem</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqcombobox.html#setCurrentItem">setCurrentItem</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqcombobox.html#currentItem">currentItem</a>().
 
 
 
     QComboBox::currentText
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the text of the combobox's current item.
 <p>
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qcombobox.html#setCurrentText">setCurrentText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qcombobox.html#currentText">currentText</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqcombobox.html#setCurrentText">setCurrentText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqcombobox.html#currentText">currentText</a>().
 
 
 
     QComboBox::duplicatesEnabled
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether duplicates are allowed.
 <p>If the combobox is editable and the user enters some text in the
-combobox's lineedit and presses Enter (and the <a href="qcombobox.html#insertionPolicy">insertionPolicy</a>()
-is not <a href="qcombobox.html#Policy-enum">NoInsertion</a>), then what happens is this:
+combobox's lineedit and presses Enter (and the <a href="ntqcombobox.html#insertionPolicy">insertionPolicy</a>()
+is not <a href="ntqcombobox.html#Policy-enum">NoInsertion</a>), then what happens is this:
 <ul>
 <li> If the text is not already in the list, the text is inserted.
 <li> If the text is in the list and this property is TRUE (the
@@ -480,58 +480,58 @@ is <em>not</em> inserted; instead the item which has matching text b
 the current item.
 </ul>
 <p> This property only affects user-interaction. You can use
-<a href="qcombobox.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>() to insert duplicates if you wish regardless of this
+<a href="ntqcombobox.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>() to insert duplicates if you wish regardless of this
 setting.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qcombobox.html#setDuplicatesEnabled">setDuplicatesEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qcombobox.html#duplicatesEnabled">duplicatesEnabled</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqcombobox.html#setDuplicatesEnabled">setDuplicatesEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqcombobox.html#duplicatesEnabled">duplicatesEnabled</a>().
 
 
 
     QComboBox::editable
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the combobox is editable.
 <p>This property's default is FALSE. Note that the combobox will be
 cleared if this property is set to TRUE for a 1.x <a href="motif-extension.html#Motif">Motif</a> style
-combobox. To avoid this, use <a href="qcombobox.html#setEditable">setEditable</a>() before inserting any
+combobox. To avoid this, use <a href="ntqcombobox.html#setEditable">setEditable</a>() before inserting any
 items. Also note that the 1.x version of Motif didn't have any
 editable comboboxes, so the combobox will change it's appearance
 to a 2.0 style Motif combobox is it is set to be editable.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qcombobox.html#setEditable">setEditable</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qcombobox.html#editable">editable</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqcombobox.html#setEditable">setEditable</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqcombobox.html#editable">editable</a>().
 
 
 
     QComboBox::insertionPolicy
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the position of the items inserted by the user.
-<p>The default insertion policy is <a href="qcombobox.html#Policy-enum">AtBottom</a>. See <a href="qcombobox.html#Policy-enum">Policy</a>.
+<p>The default insertion policy is <a href="ntqcombobox.html#Policy-enum">AtBottom</a>. See <a href="ntqcombobox.html#Policy-enum">Policy</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qcombobox.html#setInsertionPolicy">setInsertionPolicy</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qcombobox.html#insertionPolicy">insertionPolicy</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqcombobox.html#setInsertionPolicy">setInsertionPolicy</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqcombobox.html#insertionPolicy">insertionPolicy</a>().
 
 
 
     QComboBox::maxCount
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the maximum number of items allowed in the combobox.
 <p>
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qcombobox.html#setMaxCount">setMaxCount</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qcombobox.html#maxCount">maxCount</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqcombobox.html#setMaxCount">setMaxCount</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqcombobox.html#maxCount">maxCount</a>().
 
 
 
     QComboBox::sizeLimit
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the maximum on-screen size of the combobox.
 <p>This property is ignored for both <a href="motif-extension.html#Motif">Motif</a> 1.x style and non-editable
 comboboxes in Mac style. The default limit is ten
 lines. If the number of items in the combobox is or grows larger
 than lines, a scrollbar is added.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qcombobox.html#setSizeLimit">setSizeLimit</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qcombobox.html#sizeLimit">sizeLimit</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqcombobox.html#setSizeLimit">setSizeLimit</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqcombobox.html#sizeLimit">sizeLimit</a>().
 
 
 
     QDataBrowser::autoEdit
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the browser automatically applies edits.
 <p>The default value for this property is TRUE. When the user begins
 an insertion or an update on a form there are two possible
@@ -541,131 +541,131 @@ outcomes when they navigate to another record:
 <li> the insert or update is discarded -- this occurs if autoEdit is FALSE
 </ul>
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdatabrowser.html#setAutoEdit">setAutoEdit</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdatabrowser.html#autoEdit">autoEdit</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#setAutoEdit">setAutoEdit</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#autoEdit">autoEdit</a>().
 
 
 
     QDataBrowser::boundaryChecking
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether boundary checking is active.
 <p>When boundary checking is active (the default), signals are
 emitted indicating the current position of the default cursor.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qdatabrowser.html#boundary">boundary</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#boundary">boundary</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdatabrowser.html#setBoundaryChecking">setBoundaryChecking</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdatabrowser.html#boundaryChecking">boundaryChecking</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#setBoundaryChecking">setBoundaryChecking</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#boundaryChecking">boundaryChecking</a>().
 
 
 
     QDataBrowser::confirmCancels
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the browser confirms cancel operations.
 <p>If this property is TRUE, all cancels must be confirmed by the
 user through a message box (this behavior can be changed by
-overriding the <a href="qdatabrowser.html#confirmCancel">confirmCancel</a>() function), otherwise all cancels
+overriding the <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmCancel">confirmCancel</a>() function), otherwise all cancels
 occur immediately. The default is FALSE.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qdatabrowser.html#confirmEdits-prop">confirmEdits</a> and <a href="qdatabrowser.html#confirmCancel">confirmCancel</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmEdits-prop">confirmEdits</a> and <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmCancel">confirmCancel</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdatabrowser.html#setConfirmCancels">setConfirmCancels</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdatabrowser.html#confirmCancels">confirmCancels</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#setConfirmCancels">setConfirmCancels</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmCancels">confirmCancels</a>().
 
 
 
     QDataBrowser::confirmDelete
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the browser confirms deletions.
 <p>If this property is TRUE, the browser confirms deletions,
 otherwise deletions happen immediately.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qdatabrowser.html#confirmCancels-prop">confirmCancels</a>, <a href="qdatabrowser.html#confirmEdits-prop">confirmEdits</a>, <a href="qdatabrowser.html#confirmUpdate-prop">confirmUpdate</a>, <a href="qdatabrowser.html#confirmInsert-prop">confirmInsert</a>, and <a href="qdatabrowser.html#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmCancels-prop">confirmCancels</a>, <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmEdits-prop">confirmEdits</a>, <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmUpdate-prop">confirmUpdate</a>, <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmInsert-prop">confirmInsert</a>, and <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdatabrowser.html#setConfirmDelete">setConfirmDelete</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdatabrowser.html#confirmDelete">confirmDelete</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#setConfirmDelete">setConfirmDelete</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmDelete">confirmDelete</a>().
 
 
 
     QDataBrowser::confirmEdits
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the browser confirms edits.
 <p>If this property is TRUE, the browser confirms all edit operations
 (insertions, updates and deletions), otherwise all edit operations
 happen immediately. Confirmation is achieved by presenting the
 user with a message box -- this behavior can be changed by
-reimplementing the <a href="qdatabrowser.html#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>() function,
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qdatabrowser.html#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>(), <a href="qdatabrowser.html#confirmCancels-prop">confirmCancels</a>, <a href="qdatabrowser.html#confirmInsert-prop">confirmInsert</a>, <a href="qdatabrowser.html#confirmUpdate-prop">confirmUpdate</a>, and <a href="qdatabrowser.html#confirmDelete-prop">confirmDelete</a>.
+reimplementing the <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>() function,
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>(), <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmCancels-prop">confirmCancels</a>, <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmInsert-prop">confirmInsert</a>, <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmUpdate-prop">confirmUpdate</a>, and <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmDelete-prop">confirmDelete</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdatabrowser.html#setConfirmEdits">setConfirmEdits</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdatabrowser.html#confirmEdits">confirmEdits</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#setConfirmEdits">setConfirmEdits</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmEdits">confirmEdits</a>().
 
 
 
     QDataBrowser::confirmInsert
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the data browser confirms insertions.
 <p>If this property is TRUE, the browser confirms insertions,
 otherwise insertions happen immediately.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qdatabrowser.html#confirmCancels-prop">confirmCancels</a>, <a href="qdatabrowser.html#confirmEdits-prop">confirmEdits</a>, <a href="qdatabrowser.html#confirmUpdate-prop">confirmUpdate</a>, <a href="qdatabrowser.html#confirmDelete-prop">confirmDelete</a>, and <a href="qdatabrowser.html#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmCancels-prop">confirmCancels</a>, <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmEdits-prop">confirmEdits</a>, <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmUpdate-prop">confirmUpdate</a>, <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmDelete-prop">confirmDelete</a>, and <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdatabrowser.html#setConfirmInsert">setConfirmInsert</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdatabrowser.html#confirmInsert">confirmInsert</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#setConfirmInsert">setConfirmInsert</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmInsert">confirmInsert</a>().
 
 
 
     QDataBrowser::confirmUpdate
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the browser confirms updates.
 <p>If this property is TRUE, the browser confirms updates, otherwise
 updates happen immediately.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qdatabrowser.html#confirmCancels-prop">confirmCancels</a>, <a href="qdatabrowser.html#confirmEdits-prop">confirmEdits</a>, <a href="qdatabrowser.html#confirmInsert-prop">confirmInsert</a>, <a href="qdatabrowser.html#confirmDelete-prop">confirmDelete</a>, and <a href="qdatabrowser.html#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmCancels-prop">confirmCancels</a>, <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmEdits-prop">confirmEdits</a>, <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmInsert-prop">confirmInsert</a>, <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmDelete-prop">confirmDelete</a>, and <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdatabrowser.html#setConfirmUpdate">setConfirmUpdate</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdatabrowser.html#confirmUpdate">confirmUpdate</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#setConfirmUpdate">setConfirmUpdate</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmUpdate">confirmUpdate</a>().
 
 
 
     QDataBrowser::filter
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the data browser's filter.
 <p>The filter applies to the data shown in the browser. Call
-<a href="qdatabrowser.html#refresh">refresh</a>() to apply the new filter. A filter is a string containing
+<a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#refresh">refresh</a>() to apply the new filter. A filter is a string containing
 a SQL WHERE clause without the WHERE keyword, e.g. "id>1000",
 "name LIKE 'A%'", etc.
 <p> There is no default filter.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qdatabrowser.html#sort-prop">sort</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#sort-prop">sort</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdatabrowser.html#setFilter">setFilter</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdatabrowser.html#filter">filter</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#setFilter">setFilter</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#filter">filter</a>().
 
 
 
     QDataBrowser::readOnly
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the browser is read-only.
 <p>The default is FALSE, i.e. data can be edited. If the data browser
 is read-only, no database edits will be allowed.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdatabrowser.html#setReadOnly">setReadOnly</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdatabrowser.html#isReadOnly">isReadOnly</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#setReadOnly">setReadOnly</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#isReadOnly">isReadOnly</a>().
 
 
 
     QDataBrowser::sort
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the data browser's sort.
 <p>The data browser's sort affects the order in which records are
-viewed in the browser. Call <a href="qdatabrowser.html#refresh">refresh</a>() to apply the new sort.
+viewed in the browser. Call <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#refresh">refresh</a>() to apply the new sort.
 <p> When retrieving the sort property, a string list is returned in
 the form 'fieldname order', e.g. 'id ASC', 'surname DESC'.
 <p> There is no default sort.
 <p> Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
 over a copy, e.g.
 <pre>
-    <a href="qstringlist.html">QStringList</a> list = myDataBrowser.sort();
-    QStringList::Iterator it = list.<a href="qvaluelist.html#begin">begin</a>();
-    while( it != list.<a href="qvaluelist.html#end">end</a>() ) {
+    <a href="ntqstringlist.html">QStringList</a> list = myDataBrowser.sort();
+    QStringList::Iterator it = list.<a href="ntqvaluelist.html#begin">begin</a>();
+    while( it != list.<a href="ntqvaluelist.html#end">end</a>() ) {
         myProcessing( *it );
         ++it;
     }
     </pre>
  
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdatabrowser.html#setSort">setSort</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdatabrowser.html#sort">sort</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#setSort">setSort</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdatabrowser.html#sort">sort</a>().
 
 
 
     QDataTable::autoEdit
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the data table automatically applies edits.
 <p>The default value for this property is TRUE. When the user begins
 an insert or update in the table there are two possible outcomes
@@ -675,139 +675,139 @@ when they navigate to another record:
 <li> the insert or update is abandoned -- this occurs if autoEdit is FALSE
 </ol>
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdatatable.html#setAutoEdit">setAutoEdit</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdatatable.html#autoEdit">autoEdit</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdatatable.html#setAutoEdit">setAutoEdit</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdatatable.html#autoEdit">autoEdit</a>().
 
 
 
     QDataTable::confirmCancels
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the data table confirms cancel operations.
 <p>If the confirmCancel property is TRUE, all cancels must be
 confirmed by the user through a message box (this behavior can be
-changed by overriding the <a href="qdatatable.html#confirmCancel">confirmCancel</a>() function), otherwise all
+changed by overriding the <a href="ntqdatatable.html#confirmCancel">confirmCancel</a>() function), otherwise all
 cancels occur immediately. The default is FALSE.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qdatatable.html#confirmEdits-prop">confirmEdits</a> and <a href="qdatatable.html#confirmCancel">confirmCancel</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqdatatable.html#confirmEdits-prop">confirmEdits</a> and <a href="ntqdatatable.html#confirmCancel">confirmCancel</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdatatable.html#setConfirmCancels">setConfirmCancels</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdatatable.html#confirmCancels">confirmCancels</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdatatable.html#setConfirmCancels">setConfirmCancels</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdatatable.html#confirmCancels">confirmCancels</a>().
 
 
 
     QDataTable::confirmDelete
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the data table confirms delete operations.
 <p>If the confirmDelete property is TRUE, all deletions must be
 confirmed by the user through a message box (this behaviour can be
-changed by overriding the <a href="qdatatable.html#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>() function), otherwise all
+changed by overriding the <a href="ntqdatatable.html#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>() function), otherwise all
 delete operations occur immediately.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qdatatable.html#confirmCancels-prop">confirmCancels</a>, <a href="qdatatable.html#confirmEdits-prop">confirmEdits</a>, <a href="qdatatable.html#confirmUpdate-prop">confirmUpdate</a>, and <a href="qdatatable.html#confirmInsert-prop">confirmInsert</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqdatatable.html#confirmCancels-prop">confirmCancels</a>, <a href="ntqdatatable.html#confirmEdits-prop">confirmEdits</a>, <a href="ntqdatatable.html#confirmUpdate-prop">confirmUpdate</a>, and <a href="ntqdatatable.html#confirmInsert-prop">confirmInsert</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdatatable.html#setConfirmDelete">setConfirmDelete</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdatatable.html#confirmDelete">confirmDelete</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdatatable.html#setConfirmDelete">setConfirmDelete</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdatatable.html#confirmDelete">confirmDelete</a>().
 
 
 
     QDataTable::confirmEdits
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the data table confirms edit operations.
 <p>If the confirmEdits property is TRUE, the data table confirms all
 edit operations (inserts, updates and deletes). Finer control of
-edit confirmation can be achieved using <a href="qdatatable.html#confirmCancels-prop">confirmCancels</a>, <a href="qdatatable.html#confirmInsert-prop">confirmInsert</a>, <a href="qdatatable.html#confirmUpdate-prop">confirmUpdate</a> and <a href="qdatatable.html#confirmDelete-prop">confirmDelete</a>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qdatatable.html#confirmCancels-prop">confirmCancels</a>, <a href="qdatatable.html#confirmInsert-prop">confirmInsert</a>, <a href="qdatatable.html#confirmUpdate-prop">confirmUpdate</a>, and <a href="qdatatable.html#confirmDelete-prop">confirmDelete</a>.
+edit confirmation can be achieved using <a href="ntqdatatable.html#confirmCancels-prop">confirmCancels</a>, <a href="ntqdatatable.html#confirmInsert-prop">confirmInsert</a>, <a href="ntqdatatable.html#confirmUpdate-prop">confirmUpdate</a> and <a href="ntqdatatable.html#confirmDelete-prop">confirmDelete</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqdatatable.html#confirmCancels-prop">confirmCancels</a>, <a href="ntqdatatable.html#confirmInsert-prop">confirmInsert</a>, <a href="ntqdatatable.html#confirmUpdate-prop">confirmUpdate</a>, and <a href="ntqdatatable.html#confirmDelete-prop">confirmDelete</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdatatable.html#setConfirmEdits">setConfirmEdits</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdatatable.html#confirmEdits">confirmEdits</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdatatable.html#setConfirmEdits">setConfirmEdits</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdatatable.html#confirmEdits">confirmEdits</a>().
 
 
 
     QDataTable::confirmInsert
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the data table confirms insert operations.
 <p>If the confirmInsert property is TRUE, all insertions must be
 confirmed by the user through a message box (this behaviour can be
-changed by overriding the <a href="qdatatable.html#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>() function), otherwise all
+changed by overriding the <a href="ntqdatatable.html#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>() function), otherwise all
 insert operations occur immediately.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qdatatable.html#confirmCancels-prop">confirmCancels</a>, <a href="qdatatable.html#confirmEdits-prop">confirmEdits</a>, <a href="qdatatable.html#confirmUpdate-prop">confirmUpdate</a>, and <a href="qdatatable.html#confirmDelete-prop">confirmDelete</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqdatatable.html#confirmCancels-prop">confirmCancels</a>, <a href="ntqdatatable.html#confirmEdits-prop">confirmEdits</a>, <a href="ntqdatatable.html#confirmUpdate-prop">confirmUpdate</a>, and <a href="ntqdatatable.html#confirmDelete-prop">confirmDelete</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdatatable.html#setConfirmInsert">setConfirmInsert</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdatatable.html#confirmInsert">confirmInsert</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdatatable.html#setConfirmInsert">setConfirmInsert</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdatatable.html#confirmInsert">confirmInsert</a>().
 
 
 
     QDataTable::confirmUpdate
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the data table confirms update operations.
 <p>If the confirmUpdate property is TRUE, all updates must be
 confirmed by the user through a message box (this behaviour can be
-changed by overriding the <a href="qdatatable.html#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>() function), otherwise all
+changed by overriding the <a href="ntqdatatable.html#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>() function), otherwise all
 update operations occur immediately.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qdatatable.html#confirmCancels-prop">confirmCancels</a>, <a href="qdatatable.html#confirmEdits-prop">confirmEdits</a>, <a href="qdatatable.html#confirmInsert-prop">confirmInsert</a>, and <a href="qdatatable.html#confirmDelete-prop">confirmDelete</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqdatatable.html#confirmCancels-prop">confirmCancels</a>, <a href="ntqdatatable.html#confirmEdits-prop">confirmEdits</a>, <a href="ntqdatatable.html#confirmInsert-prop">confirmInsert</a>, and <a href="ntqdatatable.html#confirmDelete-prop">confirmDelete</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdatatable.html#setConfirmUpdate">setConfirmUpdate</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdatatable.html#confirmUpdate">confirmUpdate</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdatatable.html#setConfirmUpdate">setConfirmUpdate</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdatatable.html#confirmUpdate">confirmUpdate</a>().
 
 
 
     QDataTable::dateFormat
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the format used for displaying date/time values.
 <p>The dateFormat property is used for displaying date/time values in
-the table. The default value is <a href="qt.html#DateFormat-enum">Qt::LocalDate</a>.
+the table. The default value is <a href="ntqt.html#DateFormat-enum">Qt::LocalDate</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdatatable.html#setDateFormat">setDateFormat</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdatatable.html#dateFormat">dateFormat</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdatatable.html#setDateFormat">setDateFormat</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdatatable.html#dateFormat">dateFormat</a>().
 
 
 
     QDataTable::falseText
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the text used to represent false values.
 <p>The falseText property will be used to represent NULL values in
 the table. The default value is "False".
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdatatable.html#setFalseText">setFalseText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdatatable.html#falseText">falseText</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdatatable.html#setFalseText">setFalseText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdatatable.html#falseText">falseText</a>().
 
 
 
     QDataTable::filter
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the data filter for the data table.
 <p>The filter applies to the data shown in the table. To view data
-with a new filter, use <a href="qdatatable.html#refresh">refresh</a>(). A filter string is an SQL WHERE
+with a new filter, use <a href="ntqdatatable.html#refresh">refresh</a>(). A filter string is an SQL WHERE
 clause without the WHERE keyword.
 <p> There is no default filter.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qdatatable.html#sort-prop">sort</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqdatatable.html#sort-prop">sort</a>.
 
 <p> 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdatatable.html#setFilter">setFilter</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdatatable.html#filter">filter</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdatatable.html#setFilter">setFilter</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdatatable.html#filter">filter</a>().
 
 
 
     QDataTable::nullText
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the text used to represent NULL values.
 <p>The nullText property will be used to represent NULL values in the
 table. The default value is provided by the cursor's driver.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdatatable.html#setNullText">setNullText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdatatable.html#nullText">nullText</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdatatable.html#setNullText">setNullText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdatatable.html#nullText">nullText</a>().
 
 
 
     QDataTable::numCols
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the number of columns in the table.
 <p>
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qdatatable.html#numCols">numCols</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqdatatable.html#numCols">numCols</a>().
 
 
 
     QDataTable::numRows
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the number of rows in the table.
 <p>
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qdatatable.html#numRows">numRows</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqdatatable.html#numRows">numRows</a>().
 
 
 
     QDataTable::sort
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the data table's sort.
 <p>The table's sort affects the order in which data records are
-displayed in the table. To apply a sort, use <a href="qdatatable.html#refresh">refresh</a>().
+displayed in the table. To apply a sort, use <a href="ntqdatatable.html#refresh">refresh</a>().
 <p> When examining the sort property, a string list is returned with
 each item having the form 'fieldname order' (e.g., 'id ASC',
 'surname DESC').
@@ -815,27 +815,27 @@ each item having the form 'fieldname order' (e.g., 'id ASC',
 <p> Note that if you want to iterate over the sort list, you should
 iterate over a copy, e.g.
 <pre>
-    <a href="qstringlist.html">QStringList</a> list = myDataTable.sort();
-    QStringList::Iterator it = list.<a href="qvaluelist.html#begin">begin</a>();
-    while( it != list.<a href="qvaluelist.html#end">end</a>() ) {
+    <a href="ntqstringlist.html">QStringList</a> list = myDataTable.sort();
+    QStringList::Iterator it = list.<a href="ntqvaluelist.html#begin">begin</a>();
+    while( it != list.<a href="ntqvaluelist.html#end">end</a>() ) {
         myProcessing( *it );
         ++it;
     }
     </pre>
  
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qdatatable.html#filter-prop">filter</a> and <a href="qdatatable.html#refresh">refresh</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqdatatable.html#filter-prop">filter</a> and <a href="ntqdatatable.html#refresh">refresh</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdatatable.html#setSort">setSort</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdatatable.html#sort">sort</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdatatable.html#setSort">setSort</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdatatable.html#sort">sort</a>().
 
 
 
     QDataTable::trueText
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the text used to represent true values.
 <p>The trueText property will be used to represent NULL values in the
 table. The default value is "True".
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdatatable.html#setTrueText">setTrueText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdatatable.html#trueText">trueText</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdatatable.html#setTrueText">setTrueText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdatatable.html#trueText">trueText</a>().
 
 
 
@@ -900,239 +900,239 @@ date. The default minimum date is 1752-09-14.
 
 
     QDateTimeEdit::dateTime
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the editor's datetime value.
 <p>The datetime edit's datetime which may be an invalid datetime.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdatetimeedit.html#setDateTime">setDateTime</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdatetimeedit.html#dateTime">dateTime</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdatetimeedit.html#setDateTime">setDateTime</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdatetimeedit.html#dateTime">dateTime</a>().
 
 
 
     QDial::lineStep
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the current line step.
-<p>setLineStep() calls the virtual <a href="qrangecontrol.html#stepChange">stepChange</a>() function if the new
+<p>setLineStep() calls the virtual <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#stepChange">stepChange</a>() function if the new
 line step is different from the previous setting.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qrangecontrol.html#setSteps">QRangeControl::setSteps</a>(), <a href="qdial.html#pageStep-prop">pageStep</a>, and <a href="qrangecontrol.html#setRange">setRange</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#setSteps">QRangeControl::setSteps</a>(), <a href="ntqdial.html#pageStep-prop">pageStep</a>, and <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#setRange">setRange</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdial.html#setLineStep">setLineStep</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdial.html#lineStep">lineStep</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdial.html#setLineStep">setLineStep</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdial.html#lineStep">lineStep</a>().
 
 
 
     QDial::maxValue
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the current maximum value.
-<p>When setting this property, the <a href="qdial.html#minValue-prop">QDial::minValue</a> is adjusted if
+<p>When setting this property, the <a href="ntqdial.html#minValue-prop">QDial::minValue</a> is adjusted if
 necessary to ensure that the range remains valid.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qrangecontrol.html#setRange">setRange</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#setRange">setRange</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdial.html#setMaxValue">setMaxValue</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdial.html#maxValue">maxValue</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdial.html#setMaxValue">setMaxValue</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdial.html#maxValue">maxValue</a>().
 
 
 
     QDial::minValue
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the current minimum value.
-<p>When setting this property, the <a href="qdial.html#maxValue-prop">QDial::maxValue</a> is adjusted if
+<p>When setting this property, the <a href="ntqdial.html#maxValue-prop">QDial::maxValue</a> is adjusted if
 necessary to ensure that the range remains valid.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qrangecontrol.html#setRange">setRange</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#setRange">setRange</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdial.html#setMinValue">setMinValue</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdial.html#minValue">minValue</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdial.html#setMinValue">setMinValue</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdial.html#minValue">minValue</a>().
 
 
 
     QDial::notchSize
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the current notch size.
 <p>The notch size is in range control units, not pixels, and if
-possible it is a multiple of <a href="qdial.html#lineStep">lineStep</a>() that results in an
-on-screen notch size near <a href="qdial.html#notchTarget">notchTarget</a>().
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qdial.html#notchTarget-prop">notchTarget</a> and <a href="qdial.html#lineStep-prop">lineStep</a>.
+possible it is a multiple of <a href="ntqdial.html#lineStep">lineStep</a>() that results in an
+on-screen notch size near <a href="ntqdial.html#notchTarget">notchTarget</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqdial.html#notchTarget-prop">notchTarget</a> and <a href="ntqdial.html#lineStep-prop">lineStep</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qdial.html#notchSize">notchSize</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqdial.html#notchSize">notchSize</a>().
 
 
 
     QDial::notchTarget
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the target number of pixels between notches.
 <p>The notch target is the number of pixels QDial attempts to put
 between each notch.
 <p> The actual size may differ from the target size.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdial.html#setNotchTarget">setNotchTarget</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdial.html#notchTarget">notchTarget</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdial.html#setNotchTarget">setNotchTarget</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdial.html#notchTarget">notchTarget</a>().
 
 
 
     QDial::notchesVisible
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the notches are shown.
 <p>If TRUE, the notches are shown. If FALSE (the default) notches are
 not shown.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdial.html#setNotchesVisible">setNotchesVisible</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdial.html#notchesVisible">notchesVisible</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdial.html#setNotchesVisible">setNotchesVisible</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdial.html#notchesVisible">notchesVisible</a>().
 
 
 
     QDial::pageStep
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the current page step.
-<p>setPageStep() calls the virtual <a href="qrangecontrol.html#stepChange">stepChange</a>() function if the new
+<p>setPageStep() calls the virtual <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#stepChange">stepChange</a>() function if the new
 page step is different from the previous setting.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qrangecontrol.html#stepChange">stepChange</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#stepChange">stepChange</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdial.html#setPageStep">setPageStep</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdial.html#pageStep">pageStep</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdial.html#setPageStep">setPageStep</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdial.html#pageStep">pageStep</a>().
 
 
 
     QDial::tracking
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether tracking is enabled.
 <p>If TRUE (the default), tracking is enabled. This means that the
 arrow can be moved using the mouse; otherwise the arrow cannot be
 moved with the mouse.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdial.html#setTracking">setTracking</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdial.html#tracking">tracking</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdial.html#setTracking">setTracking</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdial.html#tracking">tracking</a>().
 
 
 
     QDial::value
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the current dial value.
 <p>This is guaranteed to be within the range
-<a href="qdial.html#minValue-prop">QDial::minValue</a>..<a href="qdial.html#maxValue-prop">QDial::maxValue</a>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qdial.html#minValue-prop">minValue</a> and <a href="qdial.html#maxValue-prop">maxValue</a>.
+<a href="ntqdial.html#minValue-prop">QDial::minValue</a>..<a href="ntqdial.html#maxValue-prop">QDial::maxValue</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqdial.html#minValue-prop">minValue</a> and <a href="ntqdial.html#maxValue-prop">maxValue</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdial.html#setValue">setValue</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdial.html#value">value</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdial.html#setValue">setValue</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdial.html#value">value</a>().
 
 
 
     QDial::wrapping
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether wrapping is enabled.
 <p>If TRUE, wrapping is enabled. This means that the arrow can be
 turned around 360°. Otherwise there is some space at the bottom of
 the dial which is skipped by the arrow.
 <p> This property's default is FALSE.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdial.html#setWrapping">setWrapping</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdial.html#wrapping">wrapping</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdial.html#setWrapping">setWrapping</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdial.html#wrapping">wrapping</a>().
 
 
 
     QDialog::modal
-     <p>This property holds whether <a href="qdialog.html#show">show</a>() should pop up the dialog as modal or modeless.
+     <p>This property holds whether <a href="ntqdialog.html#show">show</a>() should pop up the dialog as modal or modeless.
 <p>By default, this property is false and show() pops up the dialog as
 modeless.
-<p> <a href="qdialog.html#exec">exec</a>() ignores the value of this property and always pops up the
+<p> <a href="ntqdialog.html#exec">exec</a>() ignores the value of this property and always pops up the
 dialog as modal.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qdialog.html#show">show</a>() and <a href="qdialog.html#exec">exec</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqdialog.html#show">show</a>() and <a href="ntqdialog.html#exec">exec</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdialog.html#setModal">setModal</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdialog.html#isModal">isModal</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdialog.html#setModal">setModal</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdialog.html#isModal">isModal</a>().
 
 
 
     QDialog::sizeGripEnabled
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the size grip is enabled.
-<p>A <a href="qsizegrip.html">QSizeGrip</a> is placed in the bottom right corner of the dialog when this
+<p>A <a href="ntqsizegrip.html">QSizeGrip</a> is placed in the bottom right corner of the dialog when this
 property is enabled. By default, the size grip is disabled.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdialog.html#setSizeGripEnabled">setSizeGripEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdialog.html#isSizeGripEnabled">isSizeGripEnabled</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdialog.html#setSizeGripEnabled">setSizeGripEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdialog.html#isSizeGripEnabled">isSizeGripEnabled</a>().
 
 
 
     QDockArea::count
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the number of dock windows in the dock area.
 <p>
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qdockarea.html#count">count</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqdockarea.html#count">count</a>().
 
 
 
     QDockArea::empty
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the dock area is empty.
 <p>
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qdockarea.html#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqdockarea.html#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>().
 
 
 
     QDockArea::handlePosition
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds where the dock window splitter handle is placed in the dock area.
-<p>The default position is <a href="qdockarea.html#HandlePosition-enum">Normal</a>.
+<p>The default position is <a href="ntqdockarea.html#HandlePosition-enum">Normal</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qdockarea.html#handlePosition">handlePosition</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqdockarea.html#handlePosition">handlePosition</a>().
 
 
 
     QDockArea::orientation
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the dock area's orientation.
 <p>There is no default value; the orientation is specified in the
 constructor.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qdockarea.html#orientation">orientation</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqdockarea.html#orientation">orientation</a>().
 
 
 
     QDockWindow::closeMode
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the close mode of a dock window.
 <p>Defines when (if ever) the dock window has a close button. The
-choices are <a href="qdockwindow.html#CloseMode-enum">Never</a>, <a href="qdockwindow.html#CloseMode-enum">Docked</a> (i.e. only when docked), <a href="qdockwindow.html#CloseMode-enum">Undocked</a> (only when undocked, i.e. floated) or <a href="qdockwindow.html#CloseMode-enum">Always</a>.
-<p> The default is <a href="qdockwindow.html#CloseMode-enum">Never</a>.
+choices are <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#CloseMode-enum">Never</a>, <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#CloseMode-enum">Docked</a> (i.e. only when docked), <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#CloseMode-enum">Undocked</a> (only when undocked, i.e. floated) or <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#CloseMode-enum">Always</a>.
+<p> The default is <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#CloseMode-enum">Never</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdockwindow.html#setCloseMode">setCloseMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdockwindow.html#closeMode">closeMode</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#setCloseMode">setCloseMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#closeMode">closeMode</a>().
 
 
 
     QDockWindow::horizontallyStretchable
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the dock window is horizontally stretchable.
 <p>A dock window is horizontally stretchable if you call
-<a href="qdockwindow.html#setHorizontallyStretchable">setHorizontallyStretchable</a>(TRUE) or <a href="qdockwindow.html#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled</a>(TRUE).
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qdockwindow.html#resizeEnabled-prop">resizeEnabled</a>.
+<a href="ntqdockwindow.html#setHorizontallyStretchable">setHorizontallyStretchable</a>(TRUE) or <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled</a>(TRUE).
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#resizeEnabled-prop">resizeEnabled</a>.
 
 <p>Bugs and limitations:
 <ul>
 <li> Strecthability is broken. You must call setResizeEnabled(TRUE) to get
 proper behavior and even then QDockWindow does not limit stretchablilty.
 </ul>
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdockwindow.html#setHorizontallyStretchable">setHorizontallyStretchable</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdockwindow.html#isHorizontallyStretchable">isHorizontallyStretchable</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#setHorizontallyStretchable">setHorizontallyStretchable</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#isHorizontallyStretchable">isHorizontallyStretchable</a>().
 
 
 
     QDockWindow::movingEnabled
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the user can move the dock window within the dock area, move the dock window to another dock area, or float the dock window.
 <p>This property is TRUE by default.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdockwindow.html#setMovingEnabled">setMovingEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdockwindow.html#isMovingEnabled">isMovingEnabled</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#setMovingEnabled">setMovingEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#isMovingEnabled">isMovingEnabled</a>().
 
 
 
     QDockWindow::newLine
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the dock window prefers to start a new line in the dock area.
 <p>The default is FALSE, i.e. the dock window doesn't require a new
 line in the dock area.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdockwindow.html#setNewLine">setNewLine</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdockwindow.html#newLine">newLine</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#setNewLine">setNewLine</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#newLine">newLine</a>().
 
 
 
     QDockWindow::offset
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the dock window's preferred offset from the dock area's left edge (top edge for vertical dock areas).
 <p>The default is 0.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdockwindow.html#setOffset">setOffset</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdockwindow.html#offset">offset</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#setOffset">setOffset</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#offset">offset</a>().
 
 
 
     QDockWindow::opaqueMoving
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the dock window will be shown normally whilst it is being moved.
 <p>If this property is FALSE, (the default), the dock window will be
 represented by an outline rectangle whilst it is being moved.
@@ -1140,54 +1140,54 @@ represented by an outline rectangle whilst it is being moved.
 recommend using it at this time. We expect to fix these problems
 in a future release.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdockwindow.html#setOpaqueMoving">setOpaqueMoving</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdockwindow.html#opaqueMoving">opaqueMoving</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#setOpaqueMoving">setOpaqueMoving</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#opaqueMoving">opaqueMoving</a>().
 
 
 
     QDockWindow::resizeEnabled
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the dock window is resizeable.
 <p>A resizeable dock window can be resized using splitter-like
 handles inside a dock area and like every other top level window
 when floating.
 <p> A dock window is both horizontally and vertically stretchable if
-you call <a href="qdockwindow.html#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled</a>(TRUE).
+you call <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled</a>(TRUE).
 <p> This property is FALSE by default.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qdockwindow.html#verticallyStretchable-prop">verticallyStretchable</a> and <a href="qdockwindow.html#horizontallyStretchable-prop">horizontallyStretchable</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#verticallyStretchable-prop">verticallyStretchable</a> and <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#horizontallyStretchable-prop">horizontallyStretchable</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdockwindow.html#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdockwindow.html#isResizeEnabled">isResizeEnabled</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#isResizeEnabled">isResizeEnabled</a>().
 
 
 
     QDockWindow::stretchable
-    
-<p>This property holds whether the dock window is stretchable in the current <a href="qdockwindow.html#orientation">orientation</a>().
-<p>This property can be set using <a href="qdockwindow.html#setHorizontallyStretchable">setHorizontallyStretchable</a>() and
-<a href="qdockwindow.html#setVerticallyStretchable">setVerticallyStretchable</a>(), or with <a href="qdockwindow.html#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled</a>().
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qdockwindow.html#resizeEnabled-prop">resizeEnabled</a>.
+    
+<p>This property holds whether the dock window is stretchable in the current <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#orientation">orientation</a>().
+<p>This property can be set using <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#setHorizontallyStretchable">setHorizontallyStretchable</a>() and
+<a href="ntqdockwindow.html#setVerticallyStretchable">setVerticallyStretchable</a>(), or with <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#resizeEnabled-prop">resizeEnabled</a>.
 
 <p>Bugs and limitations:
 <ul>
 <li> Strecthability is broken. You must call setResizeEnabled(TRUE) to get
 proper behavior and even then QDockWindow does not limit stretchablilty.
 </ul>
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qdockwindow.html#isStretchable">isStretchable</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#isStretchable">isStretchable</a>().
 
 
 
     QDockWindow::verticallyStretchable
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the dock window is vertically stretchable.
 <p>A dock window is vertically stretchable if you call
-<a href="qdockwindow.html#setVerticallyStretchable">setVerticallyStretchable</a>(TRUE) or <a href="qdockwindow.html#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled</a>(TRUE).
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qdockwindow.html#resizeEnabled-prop">resizeEnabled</a>.
+<a href="ntqdockwindow.html#setVerticallyStretchable">setVerticallyStretchable</a>(TRUE) or <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled</a>(TRUE).
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#resizeEnabled-prop">resizeEnabled</a>.
 
 <p>Bugs and limitations:
 <ul>
 <li> Strecthability is broken. You must call setResizeEnabled(TRUE) to get
 proper behavior and even then QDockWindow does not limit stretchablilty.
 </ul>
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qdockwindow.html#setVerticallyStretchable">setVerticallyStretchable</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qdockwindow.html#isVerticallyStretchable">isVerticallyStretchable</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#setVerticallyStretchable">setVerticallyStretchable</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#isVerticallyStretchable">isVerticallyStretchable</a>().
 
 
 
@@ -1219,325 +1219,325 @@ proper behavior and even then QDockWindow does not limit stretchablilty.
 
 
     QFileDialog::contentsPreview
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the file dialog can provide a contents preview of the currently selected file.
 <p>The default is FALSE.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qfiledialog.html#setContentsPreview">setContentsPreview</a>() and <a href="qfiledialog.html#infoPreview-prop">infoPreview</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#setContentsPreview">setContentsPreview</a>() and <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#infoPreview-prop">infoPreview</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qfiledialog.html#setContentsPreviewEnabled">setContentsPreviewEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qfiledialog.html#isContentsPreviewEnabled">isContentsPreviewEnabled</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#setContentsPreviewEnabled">setContentsPreviewEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#isContentsPreviewEnabled">isContentsPreviewEnabled</a>().
 
 
 
     QFileDialog::dirPath
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the file dialog's working directory.
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qfiledialog.html#dirPath">dirPath</a>().
-<p><p>See also <a href="qfiledialog.html#dir">dir</a>() and <a href="qfiledialog.html#setDir">setDir</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#dirPath">dirPath</a>().
+<p><p>See also <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#dir">dir</a>() and <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#setDir">setDir</a>().
 
 
 
 
     QFileDialog::infoPreview
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the file dialog can provide preview information about the currently selected file.
 <p>The default is FALSE.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qfiledialog.html#setInfoPreviewEnabled">setInfoPreviewEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qfiledialog.html#isInfoPreviewEnabled">isInfoPreviewEnabled</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#setInfoPreviewEnabled">setInfoPreviewEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#isInfoPreviewEnabled">isInfoPreviewEnabled</a>().
 
 
 
     QFileDialog::mode
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the file dialog's mode.
-<p>The default mode is <a href="qfiledialog.html#Mode-enum">ExistingFile</a>.
+<p>The default mode is <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#Mode-enum">ExistingFile</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qfiledialog.html#setMode">setMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qfiledialog.html#mode">mode</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#setMode">setMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#mode">mode</a>().
 
 
 
     QFileDialog::previewMode
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the preview mode for the file dialog.
 <p>If you set the mode to be a mode other than <em>NoPreview</em>, you must
-use <a href="qfiledialog.html#setInfoPreview">setInfoPreview</a>() or <a href="qfiledialog.html#setContentsPreview">setContentsPreview</a>() to set the dialog's
+use <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#setInfoPreview">setInfoPreview</a>() or <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#setContentsPreview">setContentsPreview</a>() to set the dialog's
 preview widget to your preview widget and enable the preview
-widget(s) with <a href="qfiledialog.html#setInfoPreviewEnabled">setInfoPreviewEnabled</a>() or
-<a href="qfiledialog.html#setContentsPreviewEnabled">setContentsPreviewEnabled</a>().
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qfiledialog.html#infoPreview-prop">infoPreview</a>, <a href="qfiledialog.html#contentsPreview-prop">contentsPreview</a>, and <a href="qfiledialog.html#viewMode-prop">viewMode</a>.
+widget(s) with <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#setInfoPreviewEnabled">setInfoPreviewEnabled</a>() or
+<a href="ntqfiledialog.html#setContentsPreviewEnabled">setContentsPreviewEnabled</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#infoPreview-prop">infoPreview</a>, <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#contentsPreview-prop">contentsPreview</a>, and <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#viewMode-prop">viewMode</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qfiledialog.html#setPreviewMode">setPreviewMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qfiledialog.html#previewMode">previewMode</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#setPreviewMode">setPreviewMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#previewMode">previewMode</a>().
 
 
 
     QFileDialog::selectedFile
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the name of the selected file.
 <p>If a file was selected selectedFile contains the file's name including
 its absolute path; otherwise selectedFile is empty.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qstring.html#isEmpty">QString::isEmpty</a>(), <a href="qfiledialog.html#selectedFiles-prop">selectedFiles</a>, and <a href="qfiledialog.html#selectedFilter-prop">selectedFilter</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqstring.html#isEmpty">QString::isEmpty</a>(), <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#selectedFiles-prop">selectedFiles</a>, and <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#selectedFilter-prop">selectedFilter</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qfiledialog.html#selectedFile">selectedFile</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#selectedFile">selectedFile</a>().
 
 
 
     QFileDialog::selectedFiles
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the list of selected files.
 <p>If one or more files are selected, selectedFiles contains their
 names including their absolute paths. If no files are selected or
 the mode isn't ExistingFiles selectedFiles is an empty list.
-<p> It is more convenient to use <a href="qfiledialog.html#selectedFile">selectedFile</a>() if the mode is
-<a href="qfiledialog.html#Mode-enum">ExistingFile</a>, <a href="qfiledialog.html#Mode-enum">Directory</a> or <a href="qfiledialog.html#Mode-enum">DirectoryOnly</a>.
+<p> It is more convenient to use <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#selectedFile">selectedFile</a>() if the mode is
+<a href="ntqfiledialog.html#Mode-enum">ExistingFile</a>, <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#Mode-enum">Directory</a> or <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#Mode-enum">DirectoryOnly</a>.
 <p> Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should
 iterate over a copy, e.g.
 <pre>
-    <a href="qstringlist.html">QStringList</a> list = myFileDialog.selectedFiles();
-    QStringList::Iterator it = list.<a href="qvaluelist.html#begin">begin</a>();
-    while( it != list.<a href="qvaluelist.html#end">end</a>() ) {
+    <a href="ntqstringlist.html">QStringList</a> list = myFileDialog.selectedFiles();
+    QStringList::Iterator it = list.<a href="ntqvaluelist.html#begin">begin</a>();
+    while( it != list.<a href="ntqvaluelist.html#end">end</a>() ) {
         myProcessing( *it );
         ++it;
     }
     </pre>
  
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qfiledialog.html#selectedFile-prop">selectedFile</a>, <a href="qfiledialog.html#selectedFilter-prop">selectedFilter</a>, and <a href="qvaluelist.html#empty">QValueList::empty</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#selectedFile-prop">selectedFile</a>, <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#selectedFilter-prop">selectedFilter</a>, and <a href="ntqvaluelist.html#empty">QValueList::empty</a>().
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qfiledialog.html#selectedFiles">selectedFiles</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#selectedFiles">selectedFiles</a>().
 
 
 
     QFileDialog::selectedFilter
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the filter which the user has selected in the file dialog.
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qfiledialog.html#selectedFilter">selectedFilter</a>().
-<p><p>See also <a href="qfiledialog.html#filterSelected">filterSelected</a>(), <a href="qfiledialog.html#selectedFiles-prop">selectedFiles</a>, and <a href="qfiledialog.html#selectedFile-prop">selectedFile</a>.
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#selectedFilter">selectedFilter</a>().
+<p><p>See also <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#filterSelected">filterSelected</a>(), <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#selectedFiles-prop">selectedFiles</a>, and <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#selectedFile-prop">selectedFile</a>.
 
 
 
 
     QFileDialog::showHiddenFiles
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether hidden files are shown in the file dialog.
 <p>The default is FALSE, i.e. don't show hidden files.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qfiledialog.html#setShowHiddenFiles">setShowHiddenFiles</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qfiledialog.html#showHiddenFiles">showHiddenFiles</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#setShowHiddenFiles">setShowHiddenFiles</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#showHiddenFiles">showHiddenFiles</a>().
 
 
 
     QFileDialog::viewMode
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the file dialog's view mode.
 <p>If you set the view mode to be <em>Detail</em> (the default), then you
 will see the file's details, such as the size of the file and the
 date the file was last modified in addition to the file's name.
 <p> If you set the view mode to be <em>List</em>, then you will just
 see a list of the files and folders.
-<p> See <a href="qfiledialog.html#ViewMode-enum">QFileDialog::ViewMode</a>
+<p> See <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#ViewMode-enum">QFileDialog::ViewMode</a>
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qfiledialog.html#setViewMode">setViewMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qfiledialog.html#viewMode">viewMode</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#setViewMode">setViewMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqfiledialog.html#viewMode">viewMode</a>().
 
 
 
     QFrame::contentsRect
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the rectangle inside the frame.
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qframe.html#contentsRect">contentsRect</a>().
-<p><p>See also <a href="qframe.html#frameRect-prop">frameRect</a> and <a href="qframe.html#drawContents">drawContents</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqframe.html#contentsRect">contentsRect</a>().
+<p><p>See also <a href="ntqframe.html#frameRect-prop">frameRect</a> and <a href="ntqframe.html#drawContents">drawContents</a>().
 
 
 
 
     QFrame::frameRect
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the frame rectangle.
 <p>The frame rectangle is the rectangle the frame is drawn in. By
 default, this is the entire widget. Setting this property does <em>not</em> cause a widget update.
 <p> If this property is set to a null rectangle (for example
 <tt>QRect(0, 0, 0, 0)</tt>), then the frame rectangle is equivalent to
-the <a href="qwidget.html#rect">widget rectangle</a>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qframe.html#contentsRect-prop">contentsRect</a>.
+the <a href="ntqwidget.html#rect">widget rectangle</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqframe.html#contentsRect-prop">contentsRect</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qframe.html#setFrameRect">setFrameRect</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qframe.html#frameRect">frameRect</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqframe.html#setFrameRect">setFrameRect</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqframe.html#frameRect">frameRect</a>().
 
 
 
     QFrame::frameShadow
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the frame shadow value from the frame style.
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qframe.html#setFrameShadow">setFrameShadow</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qframe.html#frameShadow">frameShadow</a>().
-<p><p>See also <a href="qframe.html#frameStyle">frameStyle</a>() and <a href="qframe.html#frameShape-prop">frameShape</a>.
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqframe.html#setFrameShadow">setFrameShadow</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqframe.html#frameShadow">frameShadow</a>().
+<p><p>See also <a href="ntqframe.html#frameStyle">frameStyle</a>() and <a href="ntqframe.html#frameShape-prop">frameShape</a>.
 
 
 
 
     QFrame::frameShape
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the frame shape value from the frame style.
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qframe.html#setFrameShape">setFrameShape</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qframe.html#frameShape">frameShape</a>().
-<p><p>See also <a href="qframe.html#frameStyle">frameStyle</a>() and <a href="qframe.html#frameShadow-prop">frameShadow</a>.
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqframe.html#setFrameShape">setFrameShape</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqframe.html#frameShape">frameShape</a>().
+<p><p>See also <a href="ntqframe.html#frameStyle">frameStyle</a>() and <a href="ntqframe.html#frameShadow-prop">frameShadow</a>.
 
 
 
 
     QFrame::frameWidth
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the width of the frame that is drawn.
-<p>Note that the frame width depends on the <a href="qframe.html#setFrameStyle">frame style</a>, not only the line
-width and the mid-line width. For example, the style <a href="qframe.html#Shape-enum">NoFrame</a>
-always has a frame width of 0, whereas the style <a href="qframe.html#Shape-enum">Panel</a> has a
+<p>Note that the frame width depends on the <a href="ntqframe.html#setFrameStyle">frame style</a>, not only the line
+width and the mid-line width. For example, the style <a href="ntqframe.html#Shape-enum">NoFrame</a>
+always has a frame width of 0, whereas the style <a href="ntqframe.html#Shape-enum">Panel</a> has a
 frame width equivalent to the line width. The frame width also
 includes the margin.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qframe.html#lineWidth-prop">lineWidth</a>, <a href="qframe.html#midLineWidth-prop">midLineWidth</a>, <a href="qframe.html#frameStyle">frameStyle</a>(), and <a href="qframe.html#margin-prop">margin</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqframe.html#lineWidth-prop">lineWidth</a>, <a href="ntqframe.html#midLineWidth-prop">midLineWidth</a>, <a href="ntqframe.html#frameStyle">frameStyle</a>(), and <a href="ntqframe.html#margin-prop">margin</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qframe.html#frameWidth">frameWidth</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqframe.html#frameWidth">frameWidth</a>().
 
 
 
     QFrame::lineWidth
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the line width.
-<p>Note that the <em>total</em> line width for <a href="qframe.html#Shape-enum">HLine</a> and <a href="qframe.html#Shape-enum">VLine</a> is
-given by <a href="qframe.html#frameWidth">frameWidth</a>(), not <a href="qframe.html#lineWidth">lineWidth</a>().
+<p>Note that the <em>total</em> line width for <a href="ntqframe.html#Shape-enum">HLine</a> and <a href="ntqframe.html#Shape-enum">VLine</a> is
+given by <a href="ntqframe.html#frameWidth">frameWidth</a>(), not <a href="ntqframe.html#lineWidth">lineWidth</a>().
 <p> The default value is 1.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qframe.html#midLineWidth-prop">midLineWidth</a> and <a href="qframe.html#frameWidth-prop">frameWidth</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqframe.html#midLineWidth-prop">midLineWidth</a> and <a href="ntqframe.html#frameWidth-prop">frameWidth</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qframe.html#setLineWidth">setLineWidth</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qframe.html#lineWidth">lineWidth</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqframe.html#setLineWidth">setLineWidth</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqframe.html#lineWidth">lineWidth</a>().
 
 
 
     QFrame::margin
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the width of the margin.
 <p>The margin is the distance between the innermost pixel of the
-frame and the outermost pixel of <a href="qframe.html#contentsRect">contentsRect</a>(). It is included in
-<a href="qframe.html#frameWidth">frameWidth</a>().
-<p> The margin is filled according to <a href="qwidget.html#backgroundMode">backgroundMode</a>().
+frame and the outermost pixel of <a href="ntqframe.html#contentsRect">contentsRect</a>(). It is included in
+<a href="ntqframe.html#frameWidth">frameWidth</a>().
+<p> The margin is filled according to <a href="ntqwidget.html#backgroundMode">backgroundMode</a>().
 <p> The default value is 0.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qframe.html#margin-prop">margin</a>, <a href="qframe.html#lineWidth-prop">lineWidth</a>, and <a href="qframe.html#frameWidth-prop">frameWidth</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqframe.html#margin-prop">margin</a>, <a href="ntqframe.html#lineWidth-prop">lineWidth</a>, and <a href="ntqframe.html#frameWidth-prop">frameWidth</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qframe.html#setMargin">setMargin</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qframe.html#margin">margin</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqframe.html#setMargin">setMargin</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqframe.html#margin">margin</a>().
 
 
 
     QFrame::midLineWidth
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the width of the mid-line.
 <p>The default value is 0.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qframe.html#lineWidth-prop">lineWidth</a> and <a href="qframe.html#frameWidth-prop">frameWidth</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqframe.html#lineWidth-prop">lineWidth</a> and <a href="ntqframe.html#frameWidth-prop">frameWidth</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qframe.html#setMidLineWidth">setMidLineWidth</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qframe.html#midLineWidth">midLineWidth</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqframe.html#setMidLineWidth">setMidLineWidth</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqframe.html#midLineWidth">midLineWidth</a>().
 
 
 
     QGridView::cellHeight
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the height of a grid row.
 <p>All rows in a grid view have the same height.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qgridview.html#cellWidth-prop">cellWidth</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqgridview.html#cellWidth-prop">cellWidth</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qgridview.html#setCellHeight">setCellHeight</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qgridview.html#cellHeight">cellHeight</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqgridview.html#setCellHeight">setCellHeight</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqgridview.html#cellHeight">cellHeight</a>().
 
 
 
     QGridView::cellWidth
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the width of a grid column.
 <p>All columns in a grid view have the same width.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qgridview.html#cellHeight-prop">cellHeight</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqgridview.html#cellHeight-prop">cellHeight</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qgridview.html#setCellWidth">setCellWidth</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qgridview.html#cellWidth">cellWidth</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqgridview.html#setCellWidth">setCellWidth</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqgridview.html#cellWidth">cellWidth</a>().
 
 
 
     QGridView::numCols
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the number of columns in the grid.
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qgridview.html#setNumCols">setNumCols</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qgridview.html#numCols">numCols</a>().
-<p><p>See also <a href="qgridview.html#numRows-prop">numRows</a>.
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqgridview.html#setNumCols">setNumCols</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqgridview.html#numCols">numCols</a>().
+<p><p>See also <a href="ntqgridview.html#numRows-prop">numRows</a>.
 
 
 
 
     QGridView::numRows
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the number of rows in the grid.
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qgridview.html#setNumRows">setNumRows</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qgridview.html#numRows">numRows</a>().
-<p><p>See also <a href="qgridview.html#numCols-prop">numCols</a>.
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqgridview.html#setNumRows">setNumRows</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqgridview.html#numRows">numRows</a>().
+<p><p>See also <a href="ntqgridview.html#numCols-prop">numCols</a>.
 
 
 
 
     QGroupBox::alignment
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the alignment of the group box title.
 <p>The title is always placed on the upper frame line. The horizontal
 alignment can be specified by the alignment parameter.
 <p> The alignment is one of the following flags:
 <ul>
-<li> <a href="qt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">AlignAuto</a> aligns the title according to the language,
+<li> <a href="ntqt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">AlignAuto</a> aligns the title according to the language,
 usually to the left.
-<li> <a href="qt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">AlignLeft</a> aligns the title text to the left.
-<li> <a href="qt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">AlignRight</a> aligns the title text to the right.
-<li> <a href="qt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">AlignHCenter</a> aligns the title text centered.
+<li> <a href="ntqt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">AlignLeft</a> aligns the title text to the left.
+<li> <a href="ntqt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">AlignRight</a> aligns the title text to the right.
+<li> <a href="ntqt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">AlignHCenter</a> aligns the title text centered.
 </ul>
-<p> The default alignment is <a href="qt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">AlignAuto</a>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">Qt::AlignmentFlags</a>.
+<p> The default alignment is <a href="ntqt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">AlignAuto</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">Qt::AlignmentFlags</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qgroupbox.html#setAlignment">setAlignment</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qgroupbox.html#alignment">alignment</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqgroupbox.html#setAlignment">setAlignment</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqgroupbox.html#alignment">alignment</a>().
 
 
 
     QGroupBox::checkable
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the group box has a checkbox in its title.
 <p>If this property is TRUE, the group box has a checkbox. If the
 checkbox is checked (which is the default), the group box's
 children are enabled.
-<p> <a href="qgroupbox.html#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>() controls whether or not the group box has a
-checkbox, and <a href="qgroupbox.html#isCheckable">isCheckable</a>() controls whether the checkbox is
+<p> <a href="ntqgroupbox.html#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>() controls whether or not the group box has a
+checkbox, and <a href="ntqgroupbox.html#isCheckable">isCheckable</a>() controls whether the checkbox is
 checked or not.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qgroupbox.html#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qgroupbox.html#isCheckable">isCheckable</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqgroupbox.html#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqgroupbox.html#isCheckable">isCheckable</a>().
 
 
 
     QGroupBox::checked
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the group box's checkbox is checked.
-<p>If the group box has a check box (see <a href="qgroupbox.html#isCheckable">isCheckable</a>()), and the
-check box is checked (see <a href="qgroupbox.html#isChecked">isChecked</a>()), the group box's children
+<p>If the group box has a check box (see <a href="ntqgroupbox.html#isCheckable">isCheckable</a>()), and the
+check box is checked (see <a href="ntqgroupbox.html#isChecked">isChecked</a>()), the group box's children
 are enabled. If the checkbox is unchecked the children are
 disabled.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qgroupbox.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qgroupbox.html#isChecked">isChecked</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqgroupbox.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqgroupbox.html#isChecked">isChecked</a>().
 
 
 
     QGroupBox::columns
-    
-<p>This property holds the number of columns or rows (depending on <a href="qgroupbox.html#orientation-prop">QGroupBox::orientation</a>) in the group box.
+    
+<p>This property holds the number of columns or rows (depending on <a href="ntqgroupbox.html#orientation-prop">QGroupBox::orientation</a>) in the group box.
 <p>Usually it is not a good idea to set this property because it is
 slow (it does a complete layout). It is best to set the number
 of columns directly in the constructor.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qgroupbox.html#setColumns">setColumns</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qgroupbox.html#columns">columns</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqgroupbox.html#setColumns">setColumns</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqgroupbox.html#columns">columns</a>().
 
 
 
     QGroupBox::flat
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the group box is painted flat or has a frame.
 <p>By default a group box has a surrounding frame, with the title
 being placed on the upper frame line. In flat mode the right, left
 and bottom frame lines are omitted, and only the thin line at the
 top is drawn.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qgroupbox.html#title-prop">title</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqgroupbox.html#title-prop">title</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qgroupbox.html#setFlat">setFlat</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qgroupbox.html#isFlat">isFlat</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqgroupbox.html#setFlat">setFlat</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqgroupbox.html#isFlat">isFlat</a>().
 
 
 
     QGroupBox::orientation
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the group box's orientation.
 <p>A horizontal group box arranges it's children in columns, while a
 vertical group box arranges them in rows.
@@ -1545,12 +1545,12 @@ vertical group box arranges them in rows.
 slow (it does a complete layout). It is better to set the
 orientation directly in the constructor.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qgroupbox.html#setOrientation">setOrientation</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qgroupbox.html#orientation">orientation</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqgroupbox.html#setOrientation">setOrientation</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqgroupbox.html#orientation">orientation</a>().
 
 
 
     QGroupBox::title
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the group box title text.
 <p>The group box title text will have a focus-change keyboard
 accelerator if the title contains &amp;, followed by a letter.
@@ -1561,242 +1561,242 @@ accelerator if the title contains &amp;, followed by a letter.
 This produces "<u>U</u>ser information"; Alt+U moves the <a href="focus.html#keyboard-focus">keyboard focus</a> to the group box.
 <p> There is no default title text.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qgroupbox.html#setTitle">setTitle</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qgroupbox.html#title">title</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqgroupbox.html#setTitle">setTitle</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqgroupbox.html#title">title</a>().
 
 
 
     QHeader::count
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the number of sections in the header.
 <p>
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qheader.html#count">count</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqheader.html#count">count</a>().
 
 
 
     QHeader::moving
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the header sections can be moved.
 <p>If this property is TRUE (the default) the user can move sections.
-If the user moves a section the <a href="qheader.html#indexChange">indexChange</a>() signal is emitted.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qheader.html#setClickEnabled">setClickEnabled</a>() and <a href="qheader.html#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled</a>().
+If the user moves a section the <a href="ntqheader.html#indexChange">indexChange</a>() signal is emitted.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqheader.html#setClickEnabled">setClickEnabled</a>() and <a href="ntqheader.html#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qheader.html#setMovingEnabled">setMovingEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qheader.html#isMovingEnabled">isMovingEnabled</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqheader.html#setMovingEnabled">setMovingEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqheader.html#isMovingEnabled">isMovingEnabled</a>().
 
 
 
     QHeader::offset
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the header's left-most (or top-most) visible pixel.
 <p>Setting this property will scroll the header so that <em>offset</em>
 becomes the left-most (or top-most for vertical headers) visible
 pixel.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qheader.html#setOffset">setOffset</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qheader.html#offset">offset</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqheader.html#setOffset">setOffset</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqheader.html#offset">offset</a>().
 
 
 
     QHeader::orientation
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the header's orientation.
-<p>The orientation is either <a href="qt.html#Orientation-enum">Vertical</a> or <a href="qt.html#Orientation-enum">Horizontal</a> (the
+<p>The orientation is either <a href="ntqt.html#Orientation-enum">Vertical</a> or <a href="ntqt.html#Orientation-enum">Horizontal</a> (the
 default).
-<p> Call <a href="qheader.html#setOrientation">setOrientation</a>() before adding labels if you don't provide a
+<p> Call <a href="ntqheader.html#setOrientation">setOrientation</a>() before adding labels if you don't provide a
 size parameter otherwise the sizes will be incorrect.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qheader.html#setOrientation">setOrientation</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qheader.html#orientation">orientation</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqheader.html#setOrientation">setOrientation</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqheader.html#orientation">orientation</a>().
 
 
 
     QHeader::stretching
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the header sections always take up the full width (or height) of the header.
 <p>
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qheader.html#setStretchEnabled">setStretchEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qheader.html#isStretchEnabled">isStretchEnabled</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqheader.html#setStretchEnabled">setStretchEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqheader.html#isStretchEnabled">isStretchEnabled</a>().
 
 
 
     QHeader::tracking
-    
-<p>This property holds whether the <a href="qheader.html#sizeChange">sizeChange</a>() signal is emitted continuously.
+    
+<p>This property holds whether the <a href="ntqheader.html#sizeChange">sizeChange</a>() signal is emitted continuously.
 <p>If tracking is on, the sizeChange() signal is emitted continuously
 while the mouse is moved (i.e. when the header is resized),
 otherwise it is only emitted when the mouse button is released at
 the end of resizing.
 <p> Tracking defaults to FALSE.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qheader.html#setTracking">setTracking</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qheader.html#tracking">tracking</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqheader.html#setTracking">setTracking</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqheader.html#tracking">tracking</a>().
 
 
 
     QIconView::arrangement
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the arrangement mode of the icon view.
-<p>This can be <a href="qiconview.html#Arrangement-enum">LeftToRight</a> or <a href="qiconview.html#Arrangement-enum">TopToBottom</a>. The default is <a href="qiconview.html#Arrangement-enum">LeftToRight</a>.
+<p>This can be <a href="ntqiconview.html#Arrangement-enum">LeftToRight</a> or <a href="ntqiconview.html#Arrangement-enum">TopToBottom</a>. The default is <a href="ntqiconview.html#Arrangement-enum">LeftToRight</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qiconview.html#setArrangement">setArrangement</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qiconview.html#arrangement">arrangement</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqiconview.html#setArrangement">setArrangement</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqiconview.html#arrangement">arrangement</a>().
 
 
 
     QIconView::autoArrange
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the icon view rearranges its items when a new item is inserted.
 <p>The default is TRUE.
 <p> Note that if the icon view is not visible at the time of
 insertion, QIconView defers all position-related work until it is
-shown and then calls <a href="qiconview.html#arrangeItemsInGrid">arrangeItemsInGrid</a>().
+shown and then calls <a href="ntqiconview.html#arrangeItemsInGrid">arrangeItemsInGrid</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qiconview.html#setAutoArrange">setAutoArrange</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qiconview.html#autoArrange">autoArrange</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqiconview.html#setAutoArrange">setAutoArrange</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqiconview.html#autoArrange">autoArrange</a>().
 
 
 
     QIconView::count
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the number of items in the icon view.
 <p>
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qiconview.html#count">count</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqiconview.html#count">count</a>().
 
 
 
     QIconView::gridX
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the horizontal grid of the icon view.
 <p>If the value is -1, (the default), QIconView computes suitable
 column widths based on the icon view's contents.
-<p> Note that setting a grid width overrides <a href="qiconview.html#setMaxItemWidth">setMaxItemWidth</a>().
+<p> Note that setting a grid width overrides <a href="ntqiconview.html#setMaxItemWidth">setMaxItemWidth</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qiconview.html#setGridX">setGridX</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qiconview.html#gridX">gridX</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqiconview.html#setGridX">setGridX</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqiconview.html#gridX">gridX</a>().
 
 
 
     QIconView::gridY
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the vertical grid of the icon view.
 <p>If the value is -1, (the default), QIconView computes suitable
 column heights based on the icon view's contents.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qiconview.html#setGridY">setGridY</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qiconview.html#gridY">gridY</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqiconview.html#setGridY">setGridY</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqiconview.html#gridY">gridY</a>().
 
 
 
     QIconView::itemTextBackground
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the brush to use when drawing the background of an item's text.
 <p>By default this brush is set to NoBrush, meaning that only the
 normal icon view background is used.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qiconview.html#setItemTextBackground">setItemTextBackground</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qiconview.html#itemTextBackground">itemTextBackground</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqiconview.html#setItemTextBackground">setItemTextBackground</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqiconview.html#itemTextBackground">itemTextBackground</a>().
 
 
 
     QIconView::itemTextPos
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the position where the text of each item is drawn.
-<p>Valid values are <a href="qiconview.html#ItemTextPos-enum">Bottom</a> or <a href="qiconview.html#ItemTextPos-enum">Right</a>. The default is <a href="qiconview.html#ItemTextPos-enum">Bottom</a>.
+<p>Valid values are <a href="ntqiconview.html#ItemTextPos-enum">Bottom</a> or <a href="ntqiconview.html#ItemTextPos-enum">Right</a>. The default is <a href="ntqiconview.html#ItemTextPos-enum">Bottom</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qiconview.html#setItemTextPos">setItemTextPos</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qiconview.html#itemTextPos">itemTextPos</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqiconview.html#setItemTextPos">setItemTextPos</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqiconview.html#itemTextPos">itemTextPos</a>().
 
 
 
     QIconView::itemsMovable
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the user is allowed to move items around in the icon view.
 <p>The default is TRUE.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qiconview.html#setItemsMovable">setItemsMovable</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qiconview.html#itemsMovable">itemsMovable</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqiconview.html#setItemsMovable">setItemsMovable</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqiconview.html#itemsMovable">itemsMovable</a>().
 
 
 
     QIconView::maxItemTextLength
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the maximum length (in characters) that an item's text may have.
 <p>The default is 255 characters.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qiconview.html#setMaxItemTextLength">setMaxItemTextLength</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qiconview.html#maxItemTextLength">maxItemTextLength</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqiconview.html#setMaxItemTextLength">setMaxItemTextLength</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqiconview.html#maxItemTextLength">maxItemTextLength</a>().
 
 
 
     QIconView::maxItemWidth
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the maximum width that an item may have.
 <p>The default is 100 pixels.
-<p> Note that if the <a href="qiconview.html#gridX">gridX</a>() value is set QIconView will ignore
+<p> Note that if the <a href="ntqiconview.html#gridX">gridX</a>() value is set QIconView will ignore
 this property.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qiconview.html#setMaxItemWidth">setMaxItemWidth</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qiconview.html#maxItemWidth">maxItemWidth</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqiconview.html#setMaxItemWidth">setMaxItemWidth</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqiconview.html#maxItemWidth">maxItemWidth</a>().
 
 
 
     QIconView::resizeMode
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the resize mode of the icon view.
-<p>This can be <a href="qiconview.html#ResizeMode-enum">Fixed</a> or <a href="qiconview.html#ResizeMode-enum">Adjust</a>. The default is <a href="qiconview.html#ResizeMode-enum">Fixed</a>.
-See <a href="qiconview.html#ResizeMode-enum">ResizeMode</a>.
+<p>This can be <a href="ntqiconview.html#ResizeMode-enum">Fixed</a> or <a href="ntqiconview.html#ResizeMode-enum">Adjust</a>. The default is <a href="ntqiconview.html#ResizeMode-enum">Fixed</a>.
+See <a href="ntqiconview.html#ResizeMode-enum">ResizeMode</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qiconview.html#setResizeMode">setResizeMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qiconview.html#resizeMode">resizeMode</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqiconview.html#setResizeMode">setResizeMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqiconview.html#resizeMode">resizeMode</a>().
 
 
 
     QIconView::selectionMode
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the selection mode of the icon view.
-<p>This can be <a href="qiconview.html#SelectionMode-enum">Single</a> (the default), <a href="qiconview.html#SelectionMode-enum">Extended</a>, <a href="qiconview.html#SelectionMode-enum">Multi</a> or <a href="qiconview.html#SelectionMode-enum">NoSelection</a>.
+<p>This can be <a href="ntqiconview.html#SelectionMode-enum">Single</a> (the default), <a href="ntqiconview.html#SelectionMode-enum">Extended</a>, <a href="ntqiconview.html#SelectionMode-enum">Multi</a> or <a href="ntqiconview.html#SelectionMode-enum">NoSelection</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qiconview.html#setSelectionMode">setSelectionMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qiconview.html#selectionMode">selectionMode</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqiconview.html#setSelectionMode">setSelectionMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqiconview.html#selectionMode">selectionMode</a>().
 
 
 
     QIconView::showToolTips
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the icon view will display a tool tip with the complete text for any truncated item text.
 <p>The default is TRUE. Note that this has no effect if
-<a href="qiconview.html#setWordWrapIconText">setWordWrapIconText</a>() is TRUE, as it is by default.
+<a href="ntqiconview.html#setWordWrapIconText">setWordWrapIconText</a>() is TRUE, as it is by default.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qiconview.html#setShowToolTips">setShowToolTips</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qiconview.html#showToolTips">showToolTips</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqiconview.html#setShowToolTips">setShowToolTips</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqiconview.html#showToolTips">showToolTips</a>().
 
 
 
     QIconView::sortDirection
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the sort direction for inserting new items is ascending;.
 <p>The default is TRUE (i.e. ascending). This sort direction is only
-meaningful if both <a href="qiconview.html#sorting">sorting</a>() and <a href="qiconview.html#autoArrange">autoArrange</a>() are TRUE.
-<p> To set the sort direction, use <a href="qiconview.html#setSorting">setSorting</a>()
+meaningful if both <a href="ntqiconview.html#sorting">sorting</a>() and <a href="ntqiconview.html#autoArrange">autoArrange</a>() are TRUE.
+<p> To set the sort direction, use <a href="ntqiconview.html#setSorting">setSorting</a>()
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qiconview.html#sortDirection">sortDirection</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqiconview.html#sortDirection">sortDirection</a>().
 
 
 
     QIconView::sorting
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the icon view sorts on insertion.
 <p>The default is FALSE, i.e. no sorting on insertion.
-<p> To set the sorting, use <a href="qiconview.html#setSorting">setSorting</a>().
+<p> To set the sorting, use <a href="ntqiconview.html#setSorting">setSorting</a>().
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qiconview.html#sorting">sorting</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqiconview.html#sorting">sorting</a>().
 
 
 
     QIconView::spacing
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the space in pixels between icon view items.
 <p>The default is 5 pixels.
 <p> Negative values for spacing are illegal.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qiconview.html#setSpacing">setSpacing</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qiconview.html#spacing">spacing</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqiconview.html#setSpacing">setSpacing</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqiconview.html#spacing">spacing</a>().
 
 
 
     QIconView::wordWrapIconText
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the item text will be word-wrapped if it is too long.
 <p>The default is TRUE.
 <p> If this property is FALSE, icon text that is too long is
 truncated, and an ellipsis (...) appended to indicate that
 truncation has occurred. The full text can still be seen by the
 user if they hover the mouse because the full text is shown in a
-tooltip; see <a href="qiconview.html#setShowToolTips">setShowToolTips</a>().
+tooltip; see <a href="ntqiconview.html#setShowToolTips">setShowToolTips</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qiconview.html#setWordWrapIconText">setWordWrapIconText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qiconview.html#wordWrapIconText">wordWrapIconText</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqiconview.html#setWordWrapIconText">setWordWrapIconText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqiconview.html#wordWrapIconText">wordWrapIconText</a>().
 
 
 
@@ -1819,7 +1819,7 @@ tooltip; see <a href="qiconview.html#setShowToolTips">setShowToolTips</
 
 
     QLCDNumber::intValue
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the displayed value rounded to the nearest integer.
 <p>This property corresponds to the nearest integer to the current
 value displayed by the LCDNumber. This is the value used for
@@ -1827,148 +1827,148 @@ hexadecimal, octal and binary modes.
 <p> If the displayed value is not a number, the property has a value
 of 0.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlcdnumber.html#display">display</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlcdnumber.html#intValue">intValue</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlcdnumber.html#display">display</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlcdnumber.html#intValue">intValue</a>().
 
 
 
     QLCDNumber::mode
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the current display mode (number base).
-<p>Corresponds to the current display mode, which is one of <a href="qlcdnumber.html#Mode-enum">BIN</a>,
-<a href="qlcdnumber.html#Mode-enum">OCT</a>, <a href="qlcdnumber.html#Mode-enum">DEC</a> (the default) and <a href="qlcdnumber.html#Mode-enum">HEX</a>. <a href="qlcdnumber.html#Mode-enum">DEC</a> mode can display
+<p>Corresponds to the current display mode, which is one of <a href="ntqlcdnumber.html#Mode-enum">BIN</a>,
+<a href="ntqlcdnumber.html#Mode-enum">OCT</a>, <a href="ntqlcdnumber.html#Mode-enum">DEC</a> (the default) and <a href="ntqlcdnumber.html#Mode-enum">HEX</a>. <a href="ntqlcdnumber.html#Mode-enum">DEC</a> mode can display
 floating point values, the other modes display the integer
 equivalent.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qlcdnumber.html#smallDecimalPoint-prop">smallDecimalPoint</a>, <a href="qlcdnumber.html#setHexMode">setHexMode</a>(), <a href="qlcdnumber.html#setDecMode">setDecMode</a>(), <a href="qlcdnumber.html#setOctMode">setOctMode</a>(), and <a href="qlcdnumber.html#setBinMode">setBinMode</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqlcdnumber.html#smallDecimalPoint-prop">smallDecimalPoint</a>, <a href="ntqlcdnumber.html#setHexMode">setHexMode</a>(), <a href="ntqlcdnumber.html#setDecMode">setDecMode</a>(), <a href="ntqlcdnumber.html#setOctMode">setOctMode</a>(), and <a href="ntqlcdnumber.html#setBinMode">setBinMode</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlcdnumber.html#setMode">setMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlcdnumber.html#mode">mode</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlcdnumber.html#setMode">setMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlcdnumber.html#mode">mode</a>().
 
 
 
     QLCDNumber::numDigits
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the current number of digits displayed.
-<p>Corresponds to the current number of digits. If <a href="qlcdnumber.html#smallDecimalPoint-prop">QLCDNumber::smallDecimalPoint</a> is FALSE, the decimal point occupies
+<p>Corresponds to the current number of digits. If <a href="ntqlcdnumber.html#smallDecimalPoint-prop">QLCDNumber::smallDecimalPoint</a> is FALSE, the decimal point occupies
 one digit position.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qlcdnumber.html#smallDecimalPoint-prop">smallDecimalPoint</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqlcdnumber.html#smallDecimalPoint-prop">smallDecimalPoint</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlcdnumber.html#setNumDigits">setNumDigits</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlcdnumber.html#numDigits">numDigits</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlcdnumber.html#setNumDigits">setNumDigits</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlcdnumber.html#numDigits">numDigits</a>().
 
 
 
     QLCDNumber::segmentStyle
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the style of the LCDNumber.
 <p><center><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="2" border="0">
 <tr bgcolor="#a2c511"> <th valign="top">Style <th valign="top">Result
-<tr bgcolor="#f0f0f0"> <td valign="top"><a href="qlcdnumber.html#SegmentStyle-enum">Outline</a>
+<tr bgcolor="#f0f0f0"> <td valign="top"><a href="ntqlcdnumber.html#SegmentStyle-enum">Outline</a>
 <td valign="top">Produces raised segments filled with the background color
 (this is the default).
-<tr bgcolor="#d0d0d0"> <td valign="top"><a href="qlcdnumber.html#SegmentStyle-enum">Filled</a>
+<tr bgcolor="#d0d0d0"> <td valign="top"><a href="ntqlcdnumber.html#SegmentStyle-enum">Filled</a>
 <td valign="top">Produces raised segments filled with the foreground color.
-<tr bgcolor="#f0f0f0"> <td valign="top"><a href="qlcdnumber.html#SegmentStyle-enum">Flat</a>
+<tr bgcolor="#f0f0f0"> <td valign="top"><a href="ntqlcdnumber.html#SegmentStyle-enum">Flat</a>
 <td valign="top">Produces flat segments filled with the foreground color.
 </table></center>
-<p> <a href="qlcdnumber.html#SegmentStyle-enum">Outline</a> and <a href="qlcdnumber.html#SegmentStyle-enum">Filled</a> will additionally use
+<p> <a href="ntqlcdnumber.html#SegmentStyle-enum">Outline</a> and <a href="ntqlcdnumber.html#SegmentStyle-enum">Filled</a> will additionally use
 <a href="qcolorgroup.html#light">QColorGroup::light</a>() and <a href="qcolorgroup.html#dark">QColorGroup::dark</a>() for shadow effects.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlcdnumber.html#setSegmentStyle">setSegmentStyle</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlcdnumber.html#segmentStyle">segmentStyle</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlcdnumber.html#setSegmentStyle">setSegmentStyle</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlcdnumber.html#segmentStyle">segmentStyle</a>().
 
 
 
     QLCDNumber::smallDecimalPoint
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the style of the decimal point.
 <p>If TRUE the decimal point is drawn between two digit positions.
 Otherwise it occupies a digit position of its own, i.e. is drawn
 in a digit position. The default is FALSE.
 <p> The inter-digit space is made slightly wider when the decimal
 point is drawn between the digits.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qlcdnumber.html#mode-prop">mode</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqlcdnumber.html#mode-prop">mode</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlcdnumber.html#setSmallDecimalPoint">setSmallDecimalPoint</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlcdnumber.html#smallDecimalPoint">smallDecimalPoint</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlcdnumber.html#setSmallDecimalPoint">setSmallDecimalPoint</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlcdnumber.html#smallDecimalPoint">smallDecimalPoint</a>().
 
 
 
     QLCDNumber::value
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the displayed value.
 <p>This property corresponds to the current value displayed by the
 LCDNumber.
 <p> If the displayed value is not a number, the property has a value
 of 0.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlcdnumber.html#display">display</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlcdnumber.html#value">value</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlcdnumber.html#display">display</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlcdnumber.html#value">value</a>().
 
 
 
     QLabel::alignment
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the alignment of the label's contents.
-<p>The alignment is a bitwise OR of <a href="qt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">Qt::AlignmentFlags</a> and <a href="qt.html#TextFlags-enum">Qt::TextFlags</a> values. The <a href="qt.html#TextFlags-enum">ExpandTabs</a>, <a href="qt.html#TextFlags-enum">SingleLine</a> and <a href="qt.html#TextFlags-enum">ShowPrefix</a> flags apply only if the label contains plain text;
-otherwise they are ignored. The <a href="qt.html#TextFlags-enum">DontClip</a> flag is always
-ignored. <a href="qt.html#TextFlags-enum">WordBreak</a> applies to both rich text and plain text
-labels. The <a href="qt.html#TextFlags-enum">BreakAnywhere</a> flag is not supported in QLabel.
-<p> If the label has a buddy, the <a href="qt.html#TextFlags-enum">ShowPrefix</a> flag is forced to
+<p>The alignment is a bitwise OR of <a href="ntqt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">Qt::AlignmentFlags</a> and <a href="ntqt.html#TextFlags-enum">Qt::TextFlags</a> values. The <a href="ntqt.html#TextFlags-enum">ExpandTabs</a>, <a href="ntqt.html#TextFlags-enum">SingleLine</a> and <a href="ntqt.html#TextFlags-enum">ShowPrefix</a> flags apply only if the label contains plain text;
+otherwise they are ignored. The <a href="ntqt.html#TextFlags-enum">DontClip</a> flag is always
+ignored. <a href="ntqt.html#TextFlags-enum">WordBreak</a> applies to both rich text and plain text
+labels. The <a href="ntqt.html#TextFlags-enum">BreakAnywhere</a> flag is not supported in QLabel.
+<p> If the label has a buddy, the <a href="ntqt.html#TextFlags-enum">ShowPrefix</a> flag is forced to
 TRUE.
 <p> The default alignment is <tt>AlignAuto | AlignVCenter | ExpandTabs</tt>
 if the label doesn't have a buddy and <tt>AlignAuto | AlignVCenter | ExpandTabs | ShowPrefix</tt> if the label has a buddy. If the label
-contains rich text, additionally <a href="qt.html#TextFlags-enum">WordBreak</a> is turned on.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">Qt::AlignmentFlags</a>, <a href="qlabel.html#setBuddy">setBuddy</a>(), and <a href="qlabel.html#text-prop">text</a>.
+contains rich text, additionally <a href="ntqt.html#TextFlags-enum">WordBreak</a> is turned on.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">Qt::AlignmentFlags</a>, <a href="ntqlabel.html#setBuddy">setBuddy</a>(), and <a href="ntqlabel.html#text-prop">text</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlabel.html#setAlignment">setAlignment</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlabel.html#alignment">alignment</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlabel.html#setAlignment">setAlignment</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlabel.html#alignment">alignment</a>().
 
 
 
     QLabel::indent
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the label's text indent in pixels.
 <p>If a label displays text, the indent applies to the left edge if
-<a href="qlabel.html#alignment">alignment</a>() is <a href="qt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">AlignLeft</a>, to the right edge if alignment() is
-<a href="qt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">AlignRight</a>, to the top edge if alignment() is <a href="qt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">AlignTop</a>, and
-to to the bottom edge if alignment() is <a href="qt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">AlignBottom</a>.
+<a href="ntqlabel.html#alignment">alignment</a>() is <a href="ntqt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">AlignLeft</a>, to the right edge if alignment() is
+<a href="ntqt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">AlignRight</a>, to the top edge if alignment() is <a href="ntqt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">AlignTop</a>, and
+to to the bottom edge if alignment() is <a href="ntqt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">AlignBottom</a>.
 <p> If indent is negative, or if no indent has been set, the label
-computes the effective indent as follows: If <a href="qframe.html#frameWidth">frameWidth</a>() is 0,
+computes the effective indent as follows: If <a href="ntqframe.html#frameWidth">frameWidth</a>() is 0,
 the effective indent becomes 0. If frameWidth() is greater than 0,
 the effective indent becomes half the width of the "x" character
-of the widget's current <a href="qwidget.html#font">font</a>().
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qlabel.html#alignment-prop">alignment</a>, <a href="qframe.html#frameWidth-prop">frameWidth</a>, and <a href="qwidget.html#font-prop">font</a>.
+of the widget's current <a href="ntqwidget.html#font">font</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqlabel.html#alignment-prop">alignment</a>, <a href="ntqframe.html#frameWidth-prop">frameWidth</a>, and <a href="ntqwidget.html#font-prop">font</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlabel.html#setIndent">setIndent</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlabel.html#indent">indent</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlabel.html#setIndent">setIndent</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlabel.html#indent">indent</a>().
 
 
 
     QLabel::pixmap
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the label's pixmap.
 <p>If no pixmap has been set this will return an invalid pixmap.
 <p> Setting the pixmap clears any previous content, and resizes the
-label if <a href="qlabel.html#autoResize">QLabel::autoResize</a>() is TRUE. The buddy accelerator,
+label if <a href="ntqlabel.html#autoResize">QLabel::autoResize</a>() is TRUE. The buddy accelerator,
 if any, is disabled.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlabel.html#setPixmap">setPixmap</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlabel.html#pixmap">pixmap</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlabel.html#setPixmap">setPixmap</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlabel.html#pixmap">pixmap</a>().
 
 
 
     QLabel::scaledContents
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the label will scale its contents to fill all available space.
 <p>When enabled and the label shows a pixmap, it will scale the
 pixmap to fill the available space.
 <p> This property's default is FALSE.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qlabel.html#scaledContents-prop">scaledContents</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqlabel.html#scaledContents-prop">scaledContents</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlabel.html#setScaledContents">setScaledContents</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlabel.html#hasScaledContents">hasScaledContents</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlabel.html#setScaledContents">setScaledContents</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlabel.html#hasScaledContents">hasScaledContents</a>().
 
 
 
     QLabel::text
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the label's text.
 <p>If no text has been set this will return an empty string. Setting
 the text clears any previous content, unless they are the same.
 <p> The text will be interpreted either as a plain text or as a rich
-text, depending on the text format setting; see <a href="qlabel.html#setTextFormat">setTextFormat</a>().
-The default setting is <a href="qt.html#TextFormat-enum">AutoText</a>, i.e. QLabel will try to
+text, depending on the text format setting; see <a href="ntqlabel.html#setTextFormat">setTextFormat</a>().
+The default setting is <a href="ntqt.html#TextFormat-enum">AutoText</a>, i.e. QLabel will try to
 auto-detect the format of the text set.
 <p> If the text is interpreted as a plain text and a buddy has been
 set, the buddy accelerator key is updated from the new text.
@@ -1976,171 +1976,171 @@ set, the buddy accelerator key is updated from the new text.
 <p> Note that Qlabel is well-suited to display small rich text
 documents, i.e. those small documents that get their document
 specific settings (font, text color, link color) from the label's
-palette and font properties. For large documents, use <a href="qtextedit.html">QTextEdit</a>
+palette and font properties. For large documents, use <a href="ntqtextedit.html">QTextEdit</a>
 in read-only mode instead. QTextEdit will flicker less on resize
 and can also provide a scrollbar when necessary.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qlabel.html#textFormat-prop">textFormat</a>, <a href="qlabel.html#setBuddy">setBuddy</a>(), and <a href="qlabel.html#alignment-prop">alignment</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqlabel.html#textFormat-prop">textFormat</a>, <a href="ntqlabel.html#setBuddy">setBuddy</a>(), and <a href="ntqlabel.html#alignment-prop">alignment</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlabel.html#setText">setText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlabel.html#text">text</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlabel.html#setText">setText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlabel.html#text">text</a>().
 
 
 
     QLabel::textFormat
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the label's text format.
-<p>See the <a href="qt.html#TextFormat-enum">Qt::TextFormat</a> enum for an explanation of the possible
+<p>See the <a href="ntqt.html#TextFormat-enum">Qt::TextFormat</a> enum for an explanation of the possible
 options.
-<p> The default format is <a href="qt.html#TextFormat-enum">AutoText</a>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qlabel.html#text-prop">text</a>.
+<p> The default format is <a href="ntqt.html#TextFormat-enum">AutoText</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqlabel.html#text-prop">text</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlabel.html#setTextFormat">setTextFormat</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlabel.html#textFormat">textFormat</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlabel.html#setTextFormat">setTextFormat</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlabel.html#textFormat">textFormat</a>().
 
 
 
     QLayout::margin
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the width of the outside border of the layout.
 <p>For some layout classes this property has an effect only on
 top-level layouts; <a href="qboxlayout.html">QBoxLayout</a> and <a href="qgridlayout.html">QGridLayout</a> support margins for
 child layouts. The default value is 0.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qlayout.html#spacing-prop">spacing</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqlayout.html#spacing-prop">spacing</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlayout.html#setMargin">setMargin</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlayout.html#margin">margin</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlayout.html#setMargin">setMargin</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlayout.html#margin">margin</a>().
 
 
 
     QLayout::resizeMode
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the resize mode of the layout.
-<p>The default mode is <a href="qlayout.html#ResizeMode-enum">Auto</a>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qlayout.html#ResizeMode-enum">QLayout::ResizeMode</a>.
+<p>The default mode is <a href="ntqlayout.html#ResizeMode-enum">Auto</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqlayout.html#ResizeMode-enum">QLayout::ResizeMode</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlayout.html#setResizeMode">setResizeMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlayout.html#resizeMode">resizeMode</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlayout.html#setResizeMode">setResizeMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlayout.html#resizeMode">resizeMode</a>().
 
 
 
     QLayout::spacing
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the spacing between widgets inside the layout.
 <p>The default value is -1, which signifies that the layout's spacing
 should not override the widget's spacing.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qlayout.html#margin-prop">margin</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqlayout.html#margin-prop">margin</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlayout.html#setSpacing">setSpacing</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlayout.html#spacing">spacing</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlayout.html#setSpacing">setSpacing</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlayout.html#spacing">spacing</a>().
 
 
 
     QLineEdit::acceptableInput
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the input satisfies the inputMask and the validator.
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qlineedit.html#hasAcceptableInput">hasAcceptableInput</a>().
-<p><p>See also <a href="qlineedit.html#inputMask-prop">inputMask</a> and <a href="qlineedit.html#setValidator">setValidator</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqlineedit.html#hasAcceptableInput">hasAcceptableInput</a>().
+<p><p>See also <a href="ntqlineedit.html#inputMask-prop">inputMask</a> and <a href="ntqlineedit.html#setValidator">setValidator</a>().
 
 
 
 
     QLineEdit::alignment
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the alignment of the line edit.
-<p>Possible Values are <a href="qt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">Qt::AlignAuto</a>, <a href="qt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">Qt::AlignLeft</a>, <a href="qt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">Qt::AlignRight</a> and <a href="qt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">Qt::AlignHCenter</a>.
+<p>Possible Values are <a href="ntqt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">Qt::AlignAuto</a>, <a href="ntqt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">Qt::AlignLeft</a>, <a href="ntqt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">Qt::AlignRight</a> and <a href="ntqt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">Qt::AlignHCenter</a>.
 <p> Attempting to set the alignment to an illegal flag combination
 does nothing.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">Qt::AlignmentFlags</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">Qt::AlignmentFlags</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlineedit.html#setAlignment">setAlignment</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlineedit.html#alignment">alignment</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlineedit.html#setAlignment">setAlignment</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlineedit.html#alignment">alignment</a>().
 
 
 
     QLineEdit::cursorPosition
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the current cursor position for this line edit.
 <p>Setting the cursor position causes a repaint when appropriate.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlineedit.html#setCursorPosition">setCursorPosition</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlineedit.html#cursorPosition">cursorPosition</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlineedit.html#setCursorPosition">setCursorPosition</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlineedit.html#cursorPosition">cursorPosition</a>().
 
 
 
     QLineEdit::displayText
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the displayed text.
-<p>If <a href="qlineedit.html#EchoMode-enum">EchoMode</a> is <a href="qlineedit.html#EchoMode-enum">Normal</a> this returns the same as <a href="qlineedit.html#text">text</a>(); if
-<a href="qlineedit.html#EchoMode-enum">EchoMode</a> is <a href="qlineedit.html#EchoMode-enum">Password</a> it returns a string of asterisks
-text().length() characters long, e.g. "******"; if <a href="qlineedit.html#EchoMode-enum">EchoMode</a> is
-<a href="qlineedit.html#EchoMode-enum">NoEcho</a> returns an empty string, "".
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qlineedit.html#echoMode-prop">echoMode</a>, <a href="qlineedit.html#text-prop">text</a>, and <a href="qlineedit.html#EchoMode-enum">EchoMode</a>.
+<p>If <a href="ntqlineedit.html#EchoMode-enum">EchoMode</a> is <a href="ntqlineedit.html#EchoMode-enum">Normal</a> this returns the same as <a href="ntqlineedit.html#text">text</a>(); if
+<a href="ntqlineedit.html#EchoMode-enum">EchoMode</a> is <a href="ntqlineedit.html#EchoMode-enum">Password</a> it returns a string of asterisks
+text().length() characters long, e.g. "******"; if <a href="ntqlineedit.html#EchoMode-enum">EchoMode</a> is
+<a href="ntqlineedit.html#EchoMode-enum">NoEcho</a> returns an empty string, "".
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqlineedit.html#echoMode-prop">echoMode</a>, <a href="ntqlineedit.html#text-prop">text</a>, and <a href="ntqlineedit.html#EchoMode-enum">EchoMode</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qlineedit.html#displayText">displayText</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqlineedit.html#displayText">displayText</a>().
 
 
 
     QLineEdit::dragEnabled
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the lineedit starts a drag if the user presses and moves the mouse on some selected text.
 <p>
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlineedit.html#setDragEnabled">setDragEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlineedit.html#dragEnabled">dragEnabled</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlineedit.html#setDragEnabled">setDragEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlineedit.html#dragEnabled">dragEnabled</a>().
 
 
 
     QLineEdit::echoMode
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the line edit's echo mode.
-<p>The initial setting is <a href="qlineedit.html#EchoMode-enum">Normal</a>, but QLineEdit also supports <a href="qlineedit.html#EchoMode-enum">NoEcho</a> and <a href="qlineedit.html#EchoMode-enum">Password</a> modes.
+<p>The initial setting is <a href="ntqlineedit.html#EchoMode-enum">Normal</a>, but QLineEdit also supports <a href="ntqlineedit.html#EchoMode-enum">NoEcho</a> and <a href="ntqlineedit.html#EchoMode-enum">Password</a> modes.
 <p> The widget's display and the ability to copy or drag the text is
 affected by this setting.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qlineedit.html#EchoMode-enum">EchoMode</a> and <a href="qlineedit.html#displayText-prop">displayText</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqlineedit.html#EchoMode-enum">EchoMode</a> and <a href="ntqlineedit.html#displayText-prop">displayText</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlineedit.html#setEchoMode">setEchoMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlineedit.html#echoMode">echoMode</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlineedit.html#setEchoMode">setEchoMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlineedit.html#echoMode">echoMode</a>().
 
 
 
     QLineEdit::edited
-    
+    
 <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 <p> <p>This property holds whether the line edit has been edited. Use modified instead.
 <p>
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlineedit.html#setEdited">setEdited</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlineedit.html#edited">edited</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlineedit.html#setEdited">setEdited</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlineedit.html#edited">edited</a>().
 
 
 
     QLineEdit::frame
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the line edit draws itself with a frame.
 <p>If enabled (the default) the line edit draws itself inside a
 two-pixel frame, otherwise the line edit draws itself without any
 frame.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlineedit.html#setFrame">setFrame</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlineedit.html#frame">frame</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlineedit.html#setFrame">setFrame</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlineedit.html#frame">frame</a>().
 
 
 
     QLineEdit::hasMarkedText
-    
+    
 <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 <p> <p>This property holds whether part of the text has been selected by the user. Use hasSelectedText instead.
 <p>
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qlineedit.html#hasMarkedText">hasMarkedText</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqlineedit.html#hasMarkedText">hasMarkedText</a>().
 
 
 
     QLineEdit::hasSelectedText
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether there is any text selected.
 <p>hasSelectedText() returns TRUE if some or all of the text has been
 selected by the user; otherwise returns FALSE.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qlineedit.html#selectedText-prop">selectedText</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqlineedit.html#selectedText-prop">selectedText</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qlineedit.html#hasSelectedText">hasSelectedText</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqlineedit.html#hasSelectedText">hasSelectedText</a>().
 
 
 
     QLineEdit::inputMask
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the validation input mask.
-<p>If no mask is set, <a href="qlineedit.html#inputMask">inputMask</a>() returns <a href="qstring.html#QString-null">QString::null</a>.
+<p>If no mask is set, <a href="ntqlineedit.html#inputMask">inputMask</a>() returns <a href="ntqstring.html#QString-null">QString::null</a>.
 <p> Sets the QLineEdit's validation mask. Validators can be used
-instead of, or in conjunction with masks; see <a href="qlineedit.html#setValidator">setValidator</a>().
+instead of, or in conjunction with masks; see <a href="ntqlineedit.html#setValidator">setValidator</a>().
 <p> Unset the mask and return to normal QLineEdit operation by passing
-an empty string ("") or just calling <a href="qlineedit.html#setInputMask">setInputMask</a>() with no
+an empty string ("") or just calling <a href="ntqlineedit.html#setInputMask">setInputMask</a>() with no
 arguments.
 <p> The mask format understands these mask characters:
 <center><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="2" border="0">
@@ -2150,7 +2150,7 @@ arguments.
 <tr bgcolor="#f0f0f0"> <td valign="top"><tt>N</tt> <td valign="top">ASCII alphanumeric character required. A-Z, a-z, 0-9.
 <tr bgcolor="#d0d0d0"> <td valign="top"><tt>n</tt> <td valign="top">ASCII alphanumeric character permitted but not required.
 <tr bgcolor="#f0f0f0"> <td valign="top"><tt>X</tt> <td valign="top">Any character required.
-<tr bgcolor="#d0d0d0"> <td valign="top"><a href="qwidget.html#x-prop">x</a> <td valign="top">Any character permitted but not required.
+<tr bgcolor="#d0d0d0"> <td valign="top"><a href="ntqwidget.html#x-prop">x</a> <td valign="top">Any character permitted but not required.
 <tr bgcolor="#f0f0f0"> <td valign="top"><tt>9</tt> <td valign="top">ASCII digit required. 0-9.
 <tr bgcolor="#d0d0d0"> <td valign="top"><tt>0</tt> <td valign="top">ASCII digit permitted but not required.
 <tr bgcolor="#f0f0f0"> <td valign="top"><tt>D</tt> <td valign="top">ASCII digit required. 1-9.
@@ -2177,24 +2177,24 @@ blanks are <tt>-</tt> and all (alphabetic) characters are converted
 uppercase.
 </table></center>
 <p> To get range control (e.g. for an IP address) use masks together
-with <a href="qlineedit.html#setValidator">validators</a>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qlineedit.html#maxLength-prop">maxLength</a>.
+with <a href="ntqlineedit.html#setValidator">validators</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqlineedit.html#maxLength-prop">maxLength</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlineedit.html#setInputMask">setInputMask</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlineedit.html#inputMask">inputMask</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlineedit.html#setInputMask">setInputMask</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlineedit.html#inputMask">inputMask</a>().
 
 
 
     QLineEdit::markedText
-    
+    
 <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 <p> <p>This property holds the text selected by the user. Use selectedText instead.
 <p>
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qlineedit.html#markedText">markedText</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqlineedit.html#markedText">markedText</a>().
 
 
 
     QLineEdit::maxLength
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the maximum permitted length of the text.
 <p>If the text is too long, it is truncated at the limit.
 <p> If truncation occurs any selected text will be unselected, the
@@ -2202,14 +2202,14 @@ cursor position is set to 0 and the first part of the string is
 shown.
 <p> If the line edit has an input mask, the mask defines the maximum
 string length.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qlineedit.html#inputMask-prop">inputMask</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqlineedit.html#inputMask-prop">inputMask</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlineedit.html#setMaxLength">setMaxLength</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlineedit.html#maxLength">maxLength</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlineedit.html#setMaxLength">setMaxLength</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlineedit.html#maxLength">maxLength</a>().
 
 
 
     QLineEdit::modified
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the line edit's contents has been modified by the user.
 <p>The modified flag is never read by QLineEdit; it has a default value
 of FALSE and is changed to TRUE whenever the user changes the line
@@ -2220,178 +2220,178 @@ depends on other fields on the form). Start the line edit without
 the best default, and when the default is known, if modified()
 returns FALSE (the user hasn't entered any text), insert the
 default value.
-<p> Calling <a href="qlineedit.html#clearModified">clearModified</a>() or <a href="qlineedit.html#setText">setText</a>() resets the modified flag to
+<p> Calling <a href="ntqlineedit.html#clearModified">clearModified</a>() or <a href="ntqlineedit.html#setText">setText</a>() resets the modified flag to
 FALSE.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qlineedit.html#isModified">isModified</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqlineedit.html#isModified">isModified</a>().
 
 
 
     QLineEdit::readOnly
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the line edit is read only.
 <p>In read-only mode, the user can still copy the text to the
-clipboard or drag-and-drop the text (if <a href="qlineedit.html#echoMode">echoMode</a>() is <a href="qlineedit.html#EchoMode-enum">Normal</a>),
+clipboard or drag-and-drop the text (if <a href="ntqlineedit.html#echoMode">echoMode</a>() is <a href="ntqlineedit.html#EchoMode-enum">Normal</a>),
 but cannot edit it.
 <p> QLineEdit does not show a cursor in read-only mode.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#enabled-prop">enabled</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#enabled-prop">enabled</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlineedit.html#setReadOnly">setReadOnly</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlineedit.html#isReadOnly">isReadOnly</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlineedit.html#setReadOnly">setReadOnly</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlineedit.html#isReadOnly">isReadOnly</a>().
 
 
 
     QLineEdit::redoAvailable
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether redo is available.
 <p>
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qlineedit.html#isRedoAvailable">isRedoAvailable</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqlineedit.html#isRedoAvailable">isRedoAvailable</a>().
 
 
 
     QLineEdit::selectedText
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the selected text.
 <p>If there is no selected text this property's value is
-<a href="qstring.html#QString-null">QString::null</a>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qlineedit.html#hasSelectedText-prop">hasSelectedText</a>.
+<a href="ntqstring.html#QString-null">QString::null</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqlineedit.html#hasSelectedText-prop">hasSelectedText</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qlineedit.html#selectedText">selectedText</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqlineedit.html#selectedText">selectedText</a>().
 
 
 
     QLineEdit::text
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the line edit's text.
 <p>Note that setting this property clears the selection, clears the
 undo/redo history, moves the cursor to the end of the line and
-resets the <a href="qlineedit.html#modified-prop">modified</a> property to FALSE. The text is not
-validated when inserted with <a href="qlineedit.html#setText">setText</a>().
-<p> The text is truncated to <a href="qlineedit.html#maxLength">maxLength</a>() length.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qlineedit.html#insert">insert</a>().
+resets the <a href="ntqlineedit.html#modified-prop">modified</a> property to FALSE. The text is not
+validated when inserted with <a href="ntqlineedit.html#setText">setText</a>().
+<p> The text is truncated to <a href="ntqlineedit.html#maxLength">maxLength</a>() length.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqlineedit.html#insert">insert</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlineedit.html#setText">setText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlineedit.html#text">text</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlineedit.html#setText">setText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlineedit.html#text">text</a>().
 
 
 
     QLineEdit::undoAvailable
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether undo is available.
 <p>
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qlineedit.html#isUndoAvailable">isUndoAvailable</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqlineedit.html#isUndoAvailable">isUndoAvailable</a>().
 
 
 
     QListBox::columnMode
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the column layout mode for this list box.
 <p>setColumnMode() sets the layout mode and adjusts the number of
-displayed columns. The row layout mode automatically becomes <a href="qlistbox.html#LayoutMode-enum">Variable</a>, unless the column mode is <a href="qlistbox.html#LayoutMode-enum">Variable</a>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qlistbox.html#rowMode-prop">rowMode</a>, <a href="qlistbox.html#rowMode-prop">rowMode</a>, and <a href="qlistbox.html#numColumns-prop">numColumns</a>.
+displayed columns. The row layout mode automatically becomes <a href="ntqlistbox.html#LayoutMode-enum">Variable</a>, unless the column mode is <a href="ntqlistbox.html#LayoutMode-enum">Variable</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqlistbox.html#rowMode-prop">rowMode</a>, <a href="ntqlistbox.html#rowMode-prop">rowMode</a>, and <a href="ntqlistbox.html#numColumns-prop">numColumns</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlistbox.html#setColumnMode">setColumnMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlistbox.html#columnMode">columnMode</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlistbox.html#setColumnMode">setColumnMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlistbox.html#columnMode">columnMode</a>().
 
 
 
     QListBox::count
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the number of items in the list box.
 <p>
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qlistbox.html#count">count</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqlistbox.html#count">count</a>().
 
 
 
     QListBox::currentItem
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the current highlighted item.
 <p>When setting this property, the highlighting is moved to the item
 and the list box scrolled as necessary.
-<p> If no item is current, <a href="qlistbox.html#currentItem">currentItem</a>() returns -1.
+<p> If no item is current, <a href="ntqlistbox.html#currentItem">currentItem</a>() returns -1.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlistbox.html#setCurrentItem">setCurrentItem</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlistbox.html#currentItem">currentItem</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlistbox.html#setCurrentItem">setCurrentItem</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlistbox.html#currentItem">currentItem</a>().
 
 
 
     QListBox::currentText
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the text of the current item.
-<p>This is equivalent to <a href="qlistbox.html#text">text</a>(currentItem()).
+<p>This is equivalent to <a href="ntqlistbox.html#text">text</a>(currentItem()).
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qlistbox.html#currentText">currentText</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqlistbox.html#currentText">currentText</a>().
 
 
 
     QListBox::multiSelection
-    
+    
 <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 <p> <p>This property holds whether or not the list box is in Multi selection mode.
-<p>Consider using the <a href="qlistbox.html#selectionMode-prop">QListBox::selectionMode</a> property instead of
+<p>Consider using the <a href="ntqlistbox.html#selectionMode-prop">QListBox::selectionMode</a> property instead of
 this property.
 <p> When setting this property, Multi selection mode is used if set to TRUE and
 to Single selection mode if set to FALSE.
 <p> When getting this property, TRUE is returned if the list box is in
 Multi selection mode or Extended selection mode, and FALSE if it is
 in Single selection mode or NoSelection mode.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qlistbox.html#selectionMode-prop">selectionMode</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqlistbox.html#selectionMode-prop">selectionMode</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlistbox.html#setMultiSelection">setMultiSelection</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlistbox.html#isMultiSelection">isMultiSelection</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlistbox.html#setMultiSelection">setMultiSelection</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlistbox.html#isMultiSelection">isMultiSelection</a>().
 
 
 
     QListBox::numColumns
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the number of columns in the list box.
-<p>This is normally 1, but can be different if <a href="qlistbox.html#columnMode-prop">QListBox::columnMode</a> or <a href="qlistbox.html#rowMode-prop">QListBox::rowMode</a> has been set.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qlistbox.html#columnMode-prop">columnMode</a>, <a href="qlistbox.html#rowMode-prop">rowMode</a>, and <a href="qlistbox.html#numRows-prop">numRows</a>.
+<p>This is normally 1, but can be different if <a href="ntqlistbox.html#columnMode-prop">QListBox::columnMode</a> or <a href="ntqlistbox.html#rowMode-prop">QListBox::rowMode</a> has been set.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqlistbox.html#columnMode-prop">columnMode</a>, <a href="ntqlistbox.html#rowMode-prop">rowMode</a>, and <a href="ntqlistbox.html#numRows-prop">numRows</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qlistbox.html#numColumns">numColumns</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqlistbox.html#numColumns">numColumns</a>().
 
 
 
     QListBox::numItemsVisible
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the number of visible items.
 <p>Both partially and entirely visible items are counted.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qlistbox.html#numItemsVisible">numItemsVisible</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqlistbox.html#numItemsVisible">numItemsVisible</a>().
 
 
 
     QListBox::numRows
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the number of rows in the list box.
 <p>This is equal to the number of items in the default single-column
 layout, but can be different.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qlistbox.html#columnMode-prop">columnMode</a>, <a href="qlistbox.html#rowMode-prop">rowMode</a>, and <a href="qlistbox.html#numColumns-prop">numColumns</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqlistbox.html#columnMode-prop">columnMode</a>, <a href="ntqlistbox.html#rowMode-prop">rowMode</a>, and <a href="ntqlistbox.html#numColumns-prop">numColumns</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qlistbox.html#numRows">numRows</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqlistbox.html#numRows">numRows</a>().
 
 
 
     QListBox::rowMode
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the row layout mode for this list box.
-<p>This property is normally <a href="qlistbox.html#LayoutMode-enum">Variable</a>.
-<p> <a href="qlistbox.html#setRowMode">setRowMode</a>() sets the layout mode and adjusts the number of
-displayed rows. The column layout mode automatically becomes <a href="qlistbox.html#LayoutMode-enum">Variable</a>, unless the row mode is <a href="qlistbox.html#LayoutMode-enum">Variable</a>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qlistbox.html#columnMode-prop">columnMode</a>.
+<p>This property is normally <a href="ntqlistbox.html#LayoutMode-enum">Variable</a>.
+<p> <a href="ntqlistbox.html#setRowMode">setRowMode</a>() sets the layout mode and adjusts the number of
+displayed rows. The column layout mode automatically becomes <a href="ntqlistbox.html#LayoutMode-enum">Variable</a>, unless the row mode is <a href="ntqlistbox.html#LayoutMode-enum">Variable</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqlistbox.html#columnMode-prop">columnMode</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlistbox.html#setRowMode">setRowMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlistbox.html#rowMode">rowMode</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlistbox.html#setRowMode">setRowMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlistbox.html#rowMode">rowMode</a>().
 
 
 
     QListBox::selectionMode
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the selection mode of the list box.
-<p>Sets the list box's selection mode, which may be one of <a href="qlistbox.html#SelectionMode-enum">Single</a>
-(the default), <a href="qlistbox.html#SelectionMode-enum">Extended</a>, <a href="qlistbox.html#SelectionMode-enum">Multi</a> or <a href="qlistbox.html#SelectionMode-enum">NoSelection</a>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qlistbox.html#SelectionMode-enum">SelectionMode</a>.
+<p>Sets the list box's selection mode, which may be one of <a href="ntqlistbox.html#SelectionMode-enum">Single</a>
+(the default), <a href="ntqlistbox.html#SelectionMode-enum">Extended</a>, <a href="ntqlistbox.html#SelectionMode-enum">Multi</a> or <a href="ntqlistbox.html#SelectionMode-enum">NoSelection</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqlistbox.html#SelectionMode-enum">SelectionMode</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlistbox.html#setSelectionMode">setSelectionMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlistbox.html#selectionMode">selectionMode</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlistbox.html#setSelectionMode">setSelectionMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlistbox.html#selectionMode">selectionMode</a>().
 
 
 
     QListBox::topItem
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the index of an item at the top of the screen.
 <p>When getting this property and the listbox has multiple columns,
 an arbitrary item is selected and returned.
@@ -2399,37 +2399,37 @@ an arbitrary item is selected and returned.
 at position <em>index</em> in the list is displayed in the top row of
 the list box.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlistbox.html#setTopItem">setTopItem</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlistbox.html#topItem">topItem</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlistbox.html#setTopItem">setTopItem</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlistbox.html#topItem">topItem</a>().
 
 
 
     QListBox::variableHeight
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether this list box has variable-height rows.
 <p>When the list box has variable-height rows (the default), each row
 is as high as the highest item in that row. When it has same-sized
 rows, all rows are as high as the highest item in the list box.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qlistbox.html#variableWidth-prop">variableWidth</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqlistbox.html#variableWidth-prop">variableWidth</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlistbox.html#setVariableHeight">setVariableHeight</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlistbox.html#variableHeight">variableHeight</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlistbox.html#setVariableHeight">setVariableHeight</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlistbox.html#variableHeight">variableHeight</a>().
 
 
 
     QListBox::variableWidth
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether this list box has variable-width columns.
 <p>When the list box has variable-width columns, each column is as
 wide as the widest item in that column. When it has same-sized
 columns (the default), all columns are as wide as the widest item
 in the list box.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qlistbox.html#variableHeight-prop">variableHeight</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqlistbox.html#variableHeight-prop">variableHeight</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlistbox.html#setVariableWidth">setVariableWidth</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlistbox.html#variableWidth">variableWidth</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlistbox.html#setVariableWidth">setVariableWidth</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlistbox.html#variableWidth">variableWidth</a>().
 
 
 
     QListView::allColumnsShowFocus
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether items should show <a href="focus.html#keyboard-focus">keyboard focus</a> using all columns.
 <p>If this property is TRUE all columns will show focus and selection
 states, otherwise only column 0 will show focus.
@@ -2437,162 +2437,162 @@ states, otherwise only column 0 will show focus.
 <p> Setting this to TRUE if it's not necessary may cause noticeable
 flicker.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlistview.html#setAllColumnsShowFocus">setAllColumnsShowFocus</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlistview.html#allColumnsShowFocus">allColumnsShowFocus</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlistview.html#setAllColumnsShowFocus">setAllColumnsShowFocus</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlistview.html#allColumnsShowFocus">allColumnsShowFocus</a>().
 
 
 
     QListView::childCount
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the number of parentless (top-level) <a href="qlistviewitem.html">QListViewItem</a> objects in this QListView.
 <p>Holds the current number of parentless (top-level) QListViewItem
 objects in this QListView.
 <p> <p>See also <a href="qlistviewitem.html#childCount">QListViewItem::childCount</a>().
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qlistview.html#childCount">childCount</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqlistview.html#childCount">childCount</a>().
 
 
 
     QListView::columns
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the number of columns in this list view.
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qlistview.html#columns">columns</a>().
-<p><p>See also <a href="qlistview.html#addColumn">addColumn</a>() and <a href="qlistview.html#removeColumn">removeColumn</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqlistview.html#columns">columns</a>().
+<p><p>See also <a href="ntqlistview.html#addColumn">addColumn</a>() and <a href="ntqlistview.html#removeColumn">removeColumn</a>().
 
 
 
 
     QListView::defaultRenameAction
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds what action to perform when the editor loses focus during renaming.
-<p>If this property is <a href="qlistview.html#RenameAction-enum">Accept</a>, and the user renames an item and
+<p>If this property is <a href="ntqlistview.html#RenameAction-enum">Accept</a>, and the user renames an item and
 the editor loses focus (without the user pressing Enter), the
-item will still be renamed. If the property's value is <a href="qlistview.html#RenameAction-enum">Reject</a>,
+item will still be renamed. If the property's value is <a href="ntqlistview.html#RenameAction-enum">Reject</a>,
 the item will not be renamed unless the user presses Enter. The
-default is <a href="qlistview.html#RenameAction-enum">Reject</a>.
+default is <a href="ntqlistview.html#RenameAction-enum">Reject</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlistview.html#setDefaultRenameAction">setDefaultRenameAction</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlistview.html#defaultRenameAction">defaultRenameAction</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlistview.html#setDefaultRenameAction">setDefaultRenameAction</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlistview.html#defaultRenameAction">defaultRenameAction</a>().
 
 
 
     QListView::itemMargin
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the advisory item margin that list items may use.
 <p>The item margin defaults to one pixel and is the margin between
 the item's edges and the area where it draws its contents.
 <a href="qlistviewitem.html#paintFocus">QListViewItem::paintFocus</a>() draws in the margin.
 <p> <p>See also <a href="qlistviewitem.html#paintCell">QListViewItem::paintCell</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlistview.html#setItemMargin">setItemMargin</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlistview.html#itemMargin">itemMargin</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlistview.html#setItemMargin">setItemMargin</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlistview.html#itemMargin">itemMargin</a>().
 
 
 
     QListView::multiSelection
-     <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
+     <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 <p> <p>This property holds whether the list view is in multi-selection or extended-selection mode.
-<p>If you enable multi-selection, <a href="qlistview.html#SelectionMode-enum">Multi</a>, mode, it is possible to
-specify whether or not this mode should be extended. <a href="qlistview.html#SelectionMode-enum">Extended</a>
+<p>If you enable multi-selection, <a href="ntqlistview.html#SelectionMode-enum">Multi</a>, mode, it is possible to
+specify whether or not this mode should be extended. <a href="ntqlistview.html#SelectionMode-enum">Extended</a>
 means that the user can select multiple items only when pressing
 the Shift or Ctrl key at the same time.
-<p> The default selection mode is <a href="qlistview.html#SelectionMode-enum">Single</a>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qlistview.html#selectionMode-prop">selectionMode</a>.
+<p> The default selection mode is <a href="ntqlistview.html#SelectionMode-enum">Single</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqlistview.html#selectionMode-prop">selectionMode</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlistview.html#setMultiSelection">setMultiSelection</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlistview.html#isMultiSelection">isMultiSelection</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlistview.html#setMultiSelection">setMultiSelection</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlistview.html#isMultiSelection">isMultiSelection</a>().
 
 
 
     QListView::resizeMode
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether all, none or the only the last column should be resized.
 <p>Specifies whether all, none or only the last column should be
 resized to fit the full width of the list view. The values for this
-property can be one of: <a href="qlistview.html#ResizeMode-enum">NoColumn</a> (the default), <a href="qlistview.html#ResizeMode-enum">AllColumns</a>
-or <a href="qlistview.html#ResizeMode-enum">LastColumn</a>.
+property can be one of: <a href="ntqlistview.html#ResizeMode-enum">NoColumn</a> (the default), <a href="ntqlistview.html#ResizeMode-enum">AllColumns</a>
+or <a href="ntqlistview.html#ResizeMode-enum">LastColumn</a>.
 <p> <b>Warning:</b> Setting the resize mode should be done after all necessary
 columns have been added to the list view, otherwise the behavior is
 undefined.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qheader.html">QHeader</a> and <a href="qlistview.html#header">header</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqheader.html">QHeader</a> and <a href="ntqlistview.html#header">header</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlistview.html#setResizeMode">setResizeMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlistview.html#resizeMode">resizeMode</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlistview.html#setResizeMode">setResizeMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlistview.html#resizeMode">resizeMode</a>().
 
 
 
     QListView::rootIsDecorated
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the list view shows open/close signs on root items.
 <p>Open/close signs are small <b>+</b> or <b>-</b> symbols in windows
 style, or arrows in <a href="motif-extension.html#Motif">Motif</a> style. The default is FALSE.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlistview.html#setRootIsDecorated">setRootIsDecorated</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlistview.html#rootIsDecorated">rootIsDecorated</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlistview.html#setRootIsDecorated">setRootIsDecorated</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlistview.html#rootIsDecorated">rootIsDecorated</a>().
 
 
 
     QListView::selectionMode
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the list view's selection mode.
-<p>The mode can be <a href="qlistview.html#SelectionMode-enum">Single</a> (the default), <a href="qlistview.html#SelectionMode-enum">Extended</a>, <a href="qlistview.html#SelectionMode-enum">Multi</a> or
-<a href="qlistview.html#SelectionMode-enum">NoSelection</a>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qlistview.html#multiSelection-prop">multiSelection</a>.
+<p>The mode can be <a href="ntqlistview.html#SelectionMode-enum">Single</a> (the default), <a href="ntqlistview.html#SelectionMode-enum">Extended</a>, <a href="ntqlistview.html#SelectionMode-enum">Multi</a> or
+<a href="ntqlistview.html#SelectionMode-enum">NoSelection</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqlistview.html#multiSelection-prop">multiSelection</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlistview.html#setSelectionMode">setSelectionMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlistview.html#selectionMode">selectionMode</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlistview.html#setSelectionMode">setSelectionMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlistview.html#selectionMode">selectionMode</a>().
 
 
 
     QListView::showSortIndicator
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the list view header should display a sort indicator.
 <p>If this property is TRUE, an arrow is drawn in the header of the
 list view to indicate the sort order of the list view contents.
 The arrow will be drawn in the correct column and will point up or
 down, depending on the current sort direction. The default is
 FALSE (don't show an indicator).
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qheader.html#setSortIndicator">QHeader::setSortIndicator</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqheader.html#setSortIndicator">QHeader::setSortIndicator</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlistview.html#setShowSortIndicator">setShowSortIndicator</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlistview.html#showSortIndicator">showSortIndicator</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlistview.html#setShowSortIndicator">setShowSortIndicator</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlistview.html#showSortIndicator">showSortIndicator</a>().
 
 
 
     QListView::showToolTips
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether this list view should show tooltips for truncated column texts.
 <p>The default is TRUE.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlistview.html#setShowToolTips">setShowToolTips</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlistview.html#showToolTips">showToolTips</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlistview.html#setShowToolTips">setShowToolTips</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlistview.html#showToolTips">showToolTips</a>().
 
 
 
     QListView::treeStepSize
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the number of pixels a child is offset from its parent.
 <p>The default is 20 pixels.
 <p> Of course, this property is only meaningful for hierarchical list
 views.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qlistview.html#setTreeStepSize">setTreeStepSize</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qlistview.html#treeStepSize">treeStepSize</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqlistview.html#setTreeStepSize">setTreeStepSize</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqlistview.html#treeStepSize">treeStepSize</a>().
 
 
 
     QMainWindow::dockWindowsMovable
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the dock windows are movable.
 <p>If TRUE (the default), the user will be able to move movable dock
 windows from one QMainWindow dock area to another, including the
 <tt>TearOff</tt> area (i.e. where the dock window floats freely as a
-window in its own right), and the <a href="qt.html#Dock-enum">Minimized</a> area (where only
+window in its own right), and the <a href="ntqt.html#Dock-enum">Minimized</a> area (where only
 the dock window's handle is shown below the menu bar). Moveable
 dock windows can also be moved within QMainWindow dock areas, i.e.
 to rearrange them within a dock area.
 <p> If FALSE the user will not be able to move any dock windows.
 <p> By default dock windows are moved transparently (i.e. only an
 outline rectangle is shown during the drag), but this setting can
-be changed with <a href="qmainwindow.html#setOpaqueMoving">setOpaqueMoving</a>().
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qmainwindow.html#setDockEnabled">setDockEnabled</a>() and <a href="qmainwindow.html#opaqueMoving-prop">opaqueMoving</a>.
+be changed with <a href="ntqmainwindow.html#setOpaqueMoving">setOpaqueMoving</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqmainwindow.html#setDockEnabled">setDockEnabled</a>() and <a href="ntqmainwindow.html#opaqueMoving-prop">opaqueMoving</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qmainwindow.html#setDockWindowsMovable">setDockWindowsMovable</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qmainwindow.html#dockWindowsMovable">dockWindowsMovable</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqmainwindow.html#setDockWindowsMovable">setDockWindowsMovable</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqmainwindow.html#dockWindowsMovable">dockWindowsMovable</a>().
 
 
 
     QMainWindow::opaqueMoving
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether dock windows are moved opaquely.
 <p>If TRUE the dock windows of the main window are shown opaquely
 (i.e. it shows the toolbar as it looks when docked) whilst it is
@@ -2603,12 +2603,12 @@ have several problems. We recommend avoiding the use of this
 feature for the time being. We intend fixing the problems in a
 future release.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qmainwindow.html#setOpaqueMoving">setOpaqueMoving</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qmainwindow.html#opaqueMoving">opaqueMoving</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqmainwindow.html#setOpaqueMoving">setOpaqueMoving</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqmainwindow.html#opaqueMoving">opaqueMoving</a>().
 
 
 
     QMainWindow::rightJustification
-    
+    
 <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 <p> <p>This property holds whether the main window right-justifies its dock windows.
 <p>If disabled (the default), stretchable dock windows are expanded,
@@ -2617,43 +2617,43 @@ need. Since most dock windows are not stretchable, this usually
 results in an unjustified right edge (or unjustified bottom edge
 for a vertical dock area). If enabled, the main window will
 right-justify its dock windows.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qdockwindow.html#setVerticalStretchable">QDockWindow::setVerticalStretchable</a>() and <a href="qdockwindow.html#setHorizontalStretchable">QDockWindow::setHorizontalStretchable</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#setVerticalStretchable">QDockWindow::setVerticalStretchable</a>() and <a href="ntqdockwindow.html#setHorizontalStretchable">QDockWindow::setHorizontalStretchable</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qmainwindow.html#setRightJustification">setRightJustification</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qmainwindow.html#rightJustification">rightJustification</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqmainwindow.html#setRightJustification">setRightJustification</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqmainwindow.html#rightJustification">rightJustification</a>().
 
 
 
     QMainWindow::usesBigPixmaps
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether big pixmaps are enabled.
 <p>If FALSE (the default), the tool buttons will use small pixmaps;
 otherwise big pixmaps will be used.
 <p> Tool buttons and other widgets that wish to respond to this
 setting are responsible for reading the correct state on startup,
 and for connecting to the main window's widget's
-<a href="qmainwindow.html#pixmapSizeChanged">pixmapSizeChanged</a>() signal.
+<a href="ntqmainwindow.html#pixmapSizeChanged">pixmapSizeChanged</a>() signal.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qmainwindow.html#setUsesBigPixmaps">setUsesBigPixmaps</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qmainwindow.html#usesBigPixmaps">usesBigPixmaps</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqmainwindow.html#setUsesBigPixmaps">setUsesBigPixmaps</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqmainwindow.html#usesBigPixmaps">usesBigPixmaps</a>().
 
 
 
     QMainWindow::usesTextLabel
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether text labels for toolbar buttons are enabled.
 <p>If disabled (the default), the tool buttons will not use text
 labels. If enabled, text labels will be used.
 <p> Tool buttons and other widgets that wish to respond to this
 setting are responsible for reading the correct state on startup,
 and for connecting to the main window's widget's
-<a href="qmainwindow.html#usesTextLabelChanged">usesTextLabelChanged</a>() signal.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qtoolbutton.html#usesTextLabel-prop">QToolButton::usesTextLabel</a>.
+<a href="ntqmainwindow.html#usesTextLabelChanged">usesTextLabelChanged</a>() signal.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#usesTextLabel-prop">QToolButton::usesTextLabel</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qmainwindow.html#setUsesTextLabel">setUsesTextLabel</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qmainwindow.html#usesTextLabel">usesTextLabel</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqmainwindow.html#setUsesTextLabel">setUsesTextLabel</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqmainwindow.html#usesTextLabel">usesTextLabel</a>().
 
 
 
     QMenuBar::defaultUp
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the popup orientation.
 <p>The default popup orientation. By default, menus pop "down" the
 screen. By setting the property to TRUE, the menu will pop "up".
@@ -2662,21 +2662,21 @@ which they refer.
 <p> If the menu would not fit on the screen, the other direction is
 used automatically.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qmenubar.html#setDefaultUp">setDefaultUp</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qmenubar.html#isDefaultUp">isDefaultUp</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqmenubar.html#setDefaultUp">setDefaultUp</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqmenubar.html#isDefaultUp">isDefaultUp</a>().
 
 
 
     QMenuBar::separator
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds in which cases a menubar sparator is drawn.
 <p><b>This property is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 <p> 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qmenubar.html#setSeparator">setSeparator</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qmenubar.html#separator">separator</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqmenubar.html#setSeparator">setSeparator</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqmenubar.html#separator">separator</a>().
 
 
 
     QMessageBox::icon
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the message box's icon.
 <p>The icon of the message box can be one of the following predefined
 icons:
@@ -2688,219 +2688,219 @@ icons:
 <li> QMessageBox::Critical
 </ul>
 <p> The actual pixmap used for displaying the icon depends on the
-current <a href="qwidget.html#style">GUI style</a>. You can also set
-a custom pixmap icon using the <a href="qmessagebox.html#iconPixmap-prop">QMessageBox::iconPixmap</a>
+current <a href="ntqwidget.html#style">GUI style</a>. You can also set
+a custom pixmap icon using the <a href="ntqmessagebox.html#iconPixmap-prop">QMessageBox::iconPixmap</a>
 property. The default icon is QMessageBox::NoIcon.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qmessagebox.html#iconPixmap-prop">iconPixmap</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqmessagebox.html#iconPixmap-prop">iconPixmap</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qmessagebox.html#setIcon">setIcon</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qmessagebox.html#icon">icon</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqmessagebox.html#setIcon">setIcon</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqmessagebox.html#icon">icon</a>().
 
 
 
     QMessageBox::iconPixmap
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the current icon.
 <p>The icon currently used by the message box. Note that it's often
 hard to draw one pixmap that looks appropriate in both <a href="motif-extension.html#Motif">Motif</a> and
 Windows GUI styles; you may want to draw two pixmaps.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qmessagebox.html#icon-prop">icon</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqmessagebox.html#icon-prop">icon</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qmessagebox.html#setIconPixmap">setIconPixmap</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qmessagebox.html#iconPixmap">iconPixmap</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqmessagebox.html#setIconPixmap">setIconPixmap</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqmessagebox.html#iconPixmap">iconPixmap</a>().
 
 
 
     QMessageBox::text
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the message box text to be displayed.
 <p>The text will be interpreted either as a plain text or as rich
-text, depending on the text format setting (<a href="qmessagebox.html#textFormat-prop">QMessageBox::textFormat</a>). The default setting is <a href="qt.html#TextFormat-enum">AutoText</a>, i.e.
+text, depending on the text format setting (<a href="ntqmessagebox.html#textFormat-prop">QMessageBox::textFormat</a>). The default setting is <a href="ntqt.html#TextFormat-enum">AutoText</a>, i.e.
 the message box will try to auto-detect the format of the text.
-<p> The default value of this property is <a href="qstring.html#QString-null">QString::null</a>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qmessagebox.html#textFormat-prop">textFormat</a>.
+<p> The default value of this property is <a href="ntqstring.html#QString-null">QString::null</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqmessagebox.html#textFormat-prop">textFormat</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qmessagebox.html#setText">setText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qmessagebox.html#text">text</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqmessagebox.html#setText">setText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqmessagebox.html#text">text</a>().
 
 
 
     QMessageBox::textFormat
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the format of the text displayed by the message box.
-<p>The current text format used by the message box. See the <a href="qt.html#TextFormat-enum">Qt::TextFormat</a> enum for an explanation of the possible options.
-<p> The default format is <a href="qt.html#TextFormat-enum">AutoText</a>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qmessagebox.html#text-prop">text</a>.
+<p>The current text format used by the message box. See the <a href="ntqt.html#TextFormat-enum">Qt::TextFormat</a> enum for an explanation of the possible options.
+<p> The default format is <a href="ntqt.html#TextFormat-enum">AutoText</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqmessagebox.html#text-prop">text</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qmessagebox.html#setTextFormat">setTextFormat</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qmessagebox.html#textFormat">textFormat</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqmessagebox.html#setTextFormat">setTextFormat</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqmessagebox.html#textFormat">textFormat</a>().
 
 
 
     QMultiLineEdit::alignment
-      <p>This property holds the editor's paragraph alignment.
-<p>Sets the alignment to flag, which must be <a href="qt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">AlignLeft</a>, <a href="qt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">AlignHCenter</a> or <a href="qt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">AlignRight</a>.
+      <p>This property holds the editor's paragraph alignment.
+<p>Sets the alignment to flag, which must be <a href="ntqt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">AlignLeft</a>, <a href="ntqt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">AlignHCenter</a> or <a href="ntqt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">AlignRight</a>.
 <p> If flag is an illegal flag nothing happens.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">Qt::AlignmentFlags</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">Qt::AlignmentFlags</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qmultilineedit.html#setAlignment">setAlignment</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qmultilineedit.html#alignment">alignment</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqmultilineedit.html#setAlignment">setAlignment</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqmultilineedit.html#alignment">alignment</a>().
 
 
 
     QMultiLineEdit::atBeginning
-     <p>This property holds whether the cursor is placed at the beginning of the text.
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qmultilineedit.html#atBeginning">atBeginning</a>().
-<p><p>See also <a href="qmultilineedit.html#atEnd-prop">atEnd</a>.
+     <p>This property holds whether the cursor is placed at the beginning of the text.
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqmultilineedit.html#atBeginning">atBeginning</a>().
+<p><p>See also <a href="ntqmultilineedit.html#atEnd-prop">atEnd</a>.
 
 
 
 
     QMultiLineEdit::atEnd
-     <p>This property holds whether the cursor is placed at the end of the text.
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qmultilineedit.html#atEnd">atEnd</a>().
-<p><p>See also <a href="qmultilineedit.html#atBeginning-prop">atBeginning</a>.
+     <p>This property holds whether the cursor is placed at the end of the text.
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqmultilineedit.html#atEnd">atEnd</a>().
+<p><p>See also <a href="ntqmultilineedit.html#atBeginning-prop">atBeginning</a>.
 
 
 
 
     QMultiLineEdit::edited
-      <p>This property holds whether the document has been edited by the user.
-<p>This is the same as <a href="qtextedit.html">QTextEdit</a>'s "modifed" property.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qtextedit.html#modified-prop">QTextEdit::modified</a>.
+      <p>This property holds whether the document has been edited by the user.
+<p>This is the same as <a href="ntqtextedit.html">QTextEdit</a>'s "modifed" property.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqtextedit.html#modified-prop">QTextEdit::modified</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qmultilineedit.html#setEdited">setEdited</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qmultilineedit.html#edited">edited</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqmultilineedit.html#setEdited">setEdited</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqmultilineedit.html#edited">edited</a>().
 
 
 
     QMultiLineEdit::numLines
-     <p>This property holds the number of paragraphs in the editor.
+     <p>This property holds the number of paragraphs in the editor.
 <p>The count includes any empty paragraph at top and bottom, so for an
 empty editor this method returns 1.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qmultilineedit.html#numLines">numLines</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqmultilineedit.html#numLines">numLines</a>().
 
 
 
     QObject::name
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the name of this object.
-<p>You can find an object by name (and type) using <a href="qobject.html#child">child</a>(). You can
-find a set of objects with <a href="qobject.html#queryList">queryList</a>().
-<p> The object name is set by the constructor or by the <a href="qobject.html#setName">setName</a>()
+<p>You can find an object by name (and type) using <a href="ntqobject.html#child">child</a>(). You can
+find a set of objects with <a href="ntqobject.html#queryList">queryList</a>().
+<p> The object name is set by the constructor or by the <a href="ntqobject.html#setName">setName</a>()
 function. The object name is not very useful in the current
 version of Qt, but will become increasingly important in the
 future.
-<p> If the object does not have a name, the <a href="qobject.html#name">name</a>() function returns
-"unnamed", so printf() (used in <a href="qapplication.html#qDebug">qDebug</a>()) will not be asked to
+<p> If the object does not have a name, the <a href="ntqobject.html#name">name</a>() function returns
+"unnamed", so printf() (used in <a href="ntqapplication.html#qDebug">qDebug</a>()) will not be asked to
 output a null pointer. If you want a null pointer to be returned
 for unnamed objects, you can call name( 0 ).
 <p> <pre>
-        <a href="qapplication.html#qDebug">qDebug</a>( "MyClass::setPrecision(): (%s) invalid precision %f",
-                <a href="qobject.html#name">name</a>(), newPrecision );
+        <a href="ntqapplication.html#qDebug">qDebug</a>( "MyClass::setPrecision(): (%s) invalid precision %f",
+                <a href="ntqobject.html#name">name</a>(), newPrecision );
     </pre>
  
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qobject.html#className">className</a>(), <a href="qobject.html#child">child</a>(), and <a href="qobject.html#queryList">queryList</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqobject.html#className">className</a>(), <a href="ntqobject.html#child">child</a>(), and <a href="ntqobject.html#queryList">queryList</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qobject.html#setName">setName</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qobject.html#name">name</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqobject.html#setName">setName</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqobject.html#name">name</a>().
 
 
 
     QPopupMenu::checkable
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the display of check marks on menu items is enabled.
 <p>When TRUE, the display of check marks on menu items is enabled.
 Checking is always enabled when in Windows-style.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qmenudata.html#setItemChecked">QMenuData::setItemChecked</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqmenudata.html#setItemChecked">QMenuData::setItemChecked</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qpopupmenu.html#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qpopupmenu.html#isCheckable">isCheckable</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqpopupmenu.html#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqpopupmenu.html#isCheckable">isCheckable</a>().
 
 
 
     QProgressBar::centerIndicator
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the indicator string should be centered.
-<p>Changing this property sets <a href="qprogressbar.html#indicatorFollowsStyle-prop">QProgressBar::indicatorFollowsStyle</a>
+<p>Changing this property sets <a href="ntqprogressbar.html#indicatorFollowsStyle-prop">QProgressBar::indicatorFollowsStyle</a>
 to FALSE. The default is TRUE.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qprogressbar.html#setCenterIndicator">setCenterIndicator</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qprogressbar.html#centerIndicator">centerIndicator</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqprogressbar.html#setCenterIndicator">setCenterIndicator</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqprogressbar.html#centerIndicator">centerIndicator</a>().
 
 
 
     QProgressBar::indicatorFollowsStyle
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the display of the indicator string should follow the GUI style.
 <p>The default is TRUE.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qprogressbar.html#centerIndicator-prop">centerIndicator</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqprogressbar.html#centerIndicator-prop">centerIndicator</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qprogressbar.html#setIndicatorFollowsStyle">setIndicatorFollowsStyle</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qprogressbar.html#indicatorFollowsStyle">indicatorFollowsStyle</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqprogressbar.html#setIndicatorFollowsStyle">setIndicatorFollowsStyle</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqprogressbar.html#indicatorFollowsStyle">indicatorFollowsStyle</a>().
 
 
 
     QProgressBar::percentageVisible
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the current progress value is displayed.
 <p>The default is TRUE.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qprogressbar.html#centerIndicator-prop">centerIndicator</a> and <a href="qprogressbar.html#indicatorFollowsStyle-prop">indicatorFollowsStyle</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqprogressbar.html#centerIndicator-prop">centerIndicator</a> and <a href="ntqprogressbar.html#indicatorFollowsStyle-prop">indicatorFollowsStyle</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qprogressbar.html#setPercentageVisible">setPercentageVisible</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qprogressbar.html#percentageVisible">percentageVisible</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqprogressbar.html#setPercentageVisible">setPercentageVisible</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqprogressbar.html#percentageVisible">percentageVisible</a>().
 
 
 
     QProgressBar::progress
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the current amount of progress.
 <p>This property is -1 if progress counting has not started.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qprogressbar.html#setProgress">setProgress</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qprogressbar.html#progress">progress</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqprogressbar.html#setProgress">setProgress</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqprogressbar.html#progress">progress</a>().
 
 
 
     QProgressBar::progressString
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the amount of progress as a string.
-<p>This property is <a href="qstring.html#QString-null">QString::null</a> if progress counting has not started.
+<p>This property is <a href="ntqstring.html#QString-null">QString::null</a> if progress counting has not started.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qprogressbar.html#progressString">progressString</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqprogressbar.html#progressString">progressString</a>().
 
 
 
     QProgressBar::totalSteps
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the total number of steps.
 <p>If totalSteps is 0, the progress bar will display a busy
 indicator.
 <p> <p>See also 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qprogressbar.html#setTotalSteps">setTotalSteps</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qprogressbar.html#totalSteps">totalSteps</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqprogressbar.html#setTotalSteps">setTotalSteps</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqprogressbar.html#totalSteps">totalSteps</a>().
 
 
 
     QProgressDialog::autoClose
-    
-<p>This property holds whether the dialog gets hidden by <a href="qprogressdialog.html#reset">reset</a>().
+    
+<p>This property holds whether the dialog gets hidden by <a href="ntqprogressdialog.html#reset">reset</a>().
 <p>The default is TRUE.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qprogressdialog.html#autoReset-prop">autoReset</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqprogressdialog.html#autoReset-prop">autoReset</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qprogressdialog.html#setAutoClose">setAutoClose</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qprogressdialog.html#autoClose">autoClose</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqprogressdialog.html#setAutoClose">setAutoClose</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqprogressdialog.html#autoClose">autoClose</a>().
 
 
 
     QProgressDialog::autoReset
-    
-<p>This property holds whether the progress dialog calls <a href="qprogressdialog.html#reset">reset</a>() as soon as <a href="qprogressdialog.html#progress">progress</a>() equals <a href="qprogressdialog.html#totalSteps">totalSteps</a>().
+    
+<p>This property holds whether the progress dialog calls <a href="ntqprogressdialog.html#reset">reset</a>() as soon as <a href="ntqprogressdialog.html#progress">progress</a>() equals <a href="ntqprogressdialog.html#totalSteps">totalSteps</a>().
 <p>The default is TRUE.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qprogressdialog.html#autoClose-prop">autoClose</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqprogressdialog.html#autoClose-prop">autoClose</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qprogressdialog.html#setAutoReset">setAutoReset</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qprogressdialog.html#autoReset">autoReset</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqprogressdialog.html#setAutoReset">setAutoReset</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqprogressdialog.html#autoReset">autoReset</a>().
 
 
 
     QProgressDialog::labelText
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the label's text.
-<p>The default text is <a href="qstring.html#QString-null">QString::null</a>.
+<p>The default text is <a href="ntqstring.html#QString-null">QString::null</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qprogressdialog.html#setLabelText">setLabelText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qprogressdialog.html#labelText">labelText</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqprogressdialog.html#setLabelText">setLabelText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqprogressdialog.html#labelText">labelText</a>().
 
 
 
     QProgressDialog::minimumDuration
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the time that must pass before the dialog appears.
 <p>If the expected duration of the task is less than the
 minimumDuration, the dialog will not appear at all. This prevents
@@ -2911,58 +2911,58 @@ is set.
 <p> If set to 0, the dialog is always shown as soon as any progress is
 set. The default is 4000 milliseconds.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qprogressdialog.html#setMinimumDuration">setMinimumDuration</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qprogressdialog.html#minimumDuration">minimumDuration</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqprogressdialog.html#setMinimumDuration">setMinimumDuration</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqprogressdialog.html#minimumDuration">minimumDuration</a>().
 
 
 
     QProgressDialog::progress
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the current amount of progress made.
 <p>For the progress dialog to work as expected, you should initially set
 this property to 0 and finally set it to
-<a href="qprogressdialog.html#totalSteps">QProgressDialog::totalSteps</a>(); you can call <a href="qprogressdialog.html#setProgress">setProgress</a>() any number of times
+<a href="ntqprogressdialog.html#totalSteps">QProgressDialog::totalSteps</a>(); you can call <a href="ntqprogressdialog.html#setProgress">setProgress</a>() any number of times
 in-between.
 <p> <b>Warning:</b> If the progress dialog is modal
-(see <a href="qprogressdialog.html#QProgressDialog">QProgressDialog::QProgressDialog</a>()),
-this function calls <a href="qapplication.html#processEvents">QApplication::processEvents</a>(), so take care that
+(see <a href="ntqprogressdialog.html#QProgressDialog">QProgressDialog::QProgressDialog</a>()),
+this function calls <a href="ntqapplication.html#processEvents">QApplication::processEvents</a>(), so take care that
 this does not cause undesirable re-entrancy in your code. For example,
-don't use a QProgressDialog inside a <a href="qwidget.html#paintEvent">paintEvent</a>()!
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qprogressdialog.html#totalSteps-prop">totalSteps</a>.
+don't use a QProgressDialog inside a <a href="ntqwidget.html#paintEvent">paintEvent</a>()!
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqprogressdialog.html#totalSteps-prop">totalSteps</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qprogressdialog.html#setProgress">setProgress</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qprogressdialog.html#progress">progress</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqprogressdialog.html#setProgress">setProgress</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqprogressdialog.html#progress">progress</a>().
 
 
 
     QProgressDialog::totalSteps
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the total number of steps.
 <p>The default is 0.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qprogressdialog.html#setTotalSteps">setTotalSteps</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qprogressdialog.html#totalSteps">totalSteps</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqprogressdialog.html#setTotalSteps">setTotalSteps</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqprogressdialog.html#totalSteps">totalSteps</a>().
 
 
 
     QProgressDialog::wasCanceled
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the dialog was canceled.
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qprogressdialog.html#wasCanceled">wasCanceled</a>().
-<p><p>See also <a href="qprogressdialog.html#progress-prop">progress</a>.
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqprogressdialog.html#wasCanceled">wasCanceled</a>().
+<p><p>See also <a href="ntqprogressdialog.html#progress-prop">progress</a>.
 
 
 
 
     QProgressDialog::wasCancelled
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the dialog was canceled.
 <p><b>This property is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-<p> Use <a href="qprogressdialog.html#wasCanceled-prop">wasCanceled</a> instead.
+<p> Use <a href="ntqprogressdialog.html#wasCanceled-prop">wasCanceled</a> instead.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qprogressdialog.html#wasCancelled">wasCancelled</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqprogressdialog.html#wasCancelled">wasCancelled</a>().
 
 
 
     QPushButton::autoDefault
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the push button is the auto default button.
 <p>If this property is set to TRUE then the push button is the auto
 default button in a dialog.
@@ -2970,25 +2970,25 @@ default button in a dialog.
 around it, up to 3 pixels or more. Qt automatically keeps this
 space free around auto-default buttons, i.e. auto-default buttons
 may have a slightly larger size hint.
-<p> This property's default is TRUE for buttons that have a <a href="qdialog.html">QDialog</a>
+<p> This property's default is TRUE for buttons that have a <a href="ntqdialog.html">QDialog</a>
 parent; otherwise it defaults to FALSE.
-<p> See the <a href="qpushbutton.html#default-prop">default</a> property for details of how <a href="qpushbutton.html#default-prop">default</a> and
+<p> See the <a href="ntqpushbutton.html#default-prop">default</a> property for details of how <a href="ntqpushbutton.html#default-prop">default</a> and
 auto-default interact.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qpushbutton.html#setAutoDefault">setAutoDefault</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qpushbutton.html#autoDefault">autoDefault</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqpushbutton.html#setAutoDefault">setAutoDefault</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqpushbutton.html#autoDefault">autoDefault</a>().
 
 
 
     QPushButton::default
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the push button is the default button.
 <p>If this property is set to TRUE then the push button will be
 pressed if the user presses the Enter (or Return) key in a dialog.
 <p> Regardless of focus, if the user presses Enter: If there is a
 default button the default button is pressed; otherwise, if
-there are one or more <a href="qpushbutton.html#autoDefault-prop">autoDefault</a> buttons the first <a href="qpushbutton.html#autoDefault-prop">autoDefault</a>
+there are one or more <a href="ntqpushbutton.html#autoDefault-prop">autoDefault</a> buttons the first <a href="ntqpushbutton.html#autoDefault-prop">autoDefault</a>
 button that is next in the tab order is pressed. If there are no
-default or <a href="qpushbutton.html#autoDefault-prop">autoDefault</a> buttons only pressing Space on a button
+default or <a href="ntqpushbutton.html#autoDefault-prop">autoDefault</a> buttons only pressing Space on a button
 with focus, mouse clicking, or using an accelerator will press a
 button.
 <p> In a dialog, only one push button at a time can be the default
@@ -2999,169 +2999,169 @@ can always be clicked from the keyboard by pressing Enter (or
 Return) or the Spacebar when the button has focus.
 <p> This property's default is FALSE.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qpushbutton.html#setDefault">setDefault</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qpushbutton.html#isDefault">isDefault</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqpushbutton.html#setDefault">setDefault</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqpushbutton.html#isDefault">isDefault</a>().
 
 
 
     QPushButton::flat
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the border is disabled.
 <p>This property's default is FALSE.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qpushbutton.html#setFlat">setFlat</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qpushbutton.html#isFlat">isFlat</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqpushbutton.html#setFlat">setFlat</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqpushbutton.html#isFlat">isFlat</a>().
 
 
 
     QPushButton::iconSet
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the icon set on the push button.
 <p>This property will return 0 if the push button has no iconset.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qpushbutton.html#setIconSet">setIconSet</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qpushbutton.html#iconSet">iconSet</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqpushbutton.html#setIconSet">setIconSet</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqpushbutton.html#iconSet">iconSet</a>().
 
 
 
     QPushButton::menuButton
-     <p>This property holds whether the push button has a menu button on it.
+     <p>This property holds whether the push button has a menu button on it.
 <p><b>This property is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 <p> If this property is set to TRUE, then a down arrow is drawn on the push
 button to indicate that a menu will pop up if the user clicks on the
 arrow.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qpushbutton.html#isMenuButton">isMenuButton</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqpushbutton.html#isMenuButton">isMenuButton</a>().
 
 
 
     QRadioButton::checked
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the radio button is checked.
 <p>This property will not effect any other radio buttons unless they
-have been placed in the same <a href="qbuttongroup.html">QButtonGroup</a>. The default value is
+have been placed in the same <a href="ntqbuttongroup.html">QButtonGroup</a>. The default value is
 FALSE (unchecked).
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qradiobutton.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qradiobutton.html#isChecked">isChecked</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqradiobutton.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqradiobutton.html#isChecked">isChecked</a>().
 
 
 
     QScrollBar::draggingSlider
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the user has clicked the mouse on the slider and is currently dragging it.
 <p>
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qscrollbar.html#draggingSlider">draggingSlider</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqscrollbar.html#draggingSlider">draggingSlider</a>().
 
 
 
     QScrollBar::lineStep
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the line step.
-<p>When setting lineStep, the virtual <a href="qrangecontrol.html#stepChange">stepChange</a>() function will be
+<p>When setting lineStep, the virtual <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#stepChange">stepChange</a>() function will be
 called if the new line step is different from the previous
 setting.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qrangecontrol.html#setSteps">setSteps</a>(), <a href="qrangecontrol.html#pageStep">QRangeControl::pageStep</a>(), and <a href="qrangecontrol.html#setRange">setRange</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#setSteps">setSteps</a>(), <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#pageStep">QRangeControl::pageStep</a>(), and <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#setRange">setRange</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qscrollbar.html#setLineStep">setLineStep</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qscrollbar.html#lineStep">lineStep</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqscrollbar.html#setLineStep">setLineStep</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqscrollbar.html#lineStep">lineStep</a>().
 
 
 
     QScrollBar::maxValue
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the scroll bar's maximum value.
-<p>When setting this property, the <a href="qscrollbar.html#minValue-prop">QScrollBar::minValue</a> is
+<p>When setting this property, the <a href="ntqscrollbar.html#minValue-prop">QScrollBar::minValue</a> is
 adjusted if necessary to ensure that the range remains valid.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qrangecontrol.html#setRange">setRange</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#setRange">setRange</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qscrollbar.html#setMaxValue">setMaxValue</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qscrollbar.html#maxValue">maxValue</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqscrollbar.html#setMaxValue">setMaxValue</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqscrollbar.html#maxValue">maxValue</a>().
 
 
 
     QScrollBar::minValue
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the scroll bar's minimum value.
-<p>When setting this property, the <a href="qscrollbar.html#maxValue-prop">QScrollBar::maxValue</a> is
+<p>When setting this property, the <a href="ntqscrollbar.html#maxValue-prop">QScrollBar::maxValue</a> is
 adjusted if necessary to ensure that the range remains valid.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qrangecontrol.html#setRange">setRange</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#setRange">setRange</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qscrollbar.html#setMinValue">setMinValue</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qscrollbar.html#minValue">minValue</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqscrollbar.html#setMinValue">setMinValue</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqscrollbar.html#minValue">minValue</a>().
 
 
 
     QScrollBar::orientation
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the orientation of the scroll bar.
-<p>The orientation must be <a href="qt.html#Orientation-enum">Qt::Vertical</a> (the default) or <a href="qt.html#Orientation-enum">Qt::Horizontal</a>.
+<p>The orientation must be <a href="ntqt.html#Orientation-enum">Qt::Vertical</a> (the default) or <a href="ntqt.html#Orientation-enum">Qt::Horizontal</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qscrollbar.html#setOrientation">setOrientation</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qscrollbar.html#orientation">orientation</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqscrollbar.html#setOrientation">setOrientation</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqscrollbar.html#orientation">orientation</a>().
 
 
 
     QScrollBar::pageStep
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the page step.
-<p>When setting pageStep, the virtual <a href="qrangecontrol.html#stepChange">stepChange</a>() function will be
+<p>When setting pageStep, the virtual <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#stepChange">stepChange</a>() function will be
 called if the new page step is different from the previous
 setting.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qrangecontrol.html#setSteps">QRangeControl::setSteps</a>(), <a href="qscrollbar.html#lineStep-prop">lineStep</a>, and <a href="qrangecontrol.html#setRange">setRange</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#setSteps">QRangeControl::setSteps</a>(), <a href="ntqscrollbar.html#lineStep-prop">lineStep</a>, and <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#setRange">setRange</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qscrollbar.html#setPageStep">setPageStep</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qscrollbar.html#pageStep">pageStep</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqscrollbar.html#setPageStep">setPageStep</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqscrollbar.html#pageStep">pageStep</a>().
 
 
 
     QScrollBar::tracking
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether scroll bar tracking is enabled.
 <p>If tracking is enabled (the default), the scroll bar emits the
-<a href="qscrollbar.html#valueChanged">valueChanged</a>() signal while the slider is being dragged. If
+<a href="ntqscrollbar.html#valueChanged">valueChanged</a>() signal while the slider is being dragged. If
 tracking is disabled, the scroll bar emits the valueChanged()
 signal only when the user releases the mouse button after moving
 the slider.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qscrollbar.html#setTracking">setTracking</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qscrollbar.html#tracking">tracking</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqscrollbar.html#setTracking">setTracking</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqscrollbar.html#tracking">tracking</a>().
 
 
 
     QScrollBar::value
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the scroll bar's value.
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qscrollbar.html#setValue">setValue</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qscrollbar.html#value">value</a>().
-<p><p>See also <a href="qrangecontrol.html#value">QRangeControl::value</a>() and <a href="qrangecontrol.html#prevValue">prevValue</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqscrollbar.html#setValue">setValue</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqscrollbar.html#value">value</a>().
+<p><p>See also <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#value">QRangeControl::value</a>() and <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#prevValue">prevValue</a>().
 
 
 
 
     QScrollView::contentsHeight
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the height of the contents area.
 <p>
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qscrollview.html#contentsHeight">contentsHeight</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqscrollview.html#contentsHeight">contentsHeight</a>().
 
 
 
     QScrollView::contentsWidth
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the width of the contents area.
 <p>
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qscrollview.html#contentsWidth">contentsWidth</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqscrollview.html#contentsWidth">contentsWidth</a>().
 
 
 
     QScrollView::contentsX
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the X coordinate of the contents that are at the left edge of the viewport.
 <p>
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qscrollview.html#contentsX">contentsX</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqscrollview.html#contentsX">contentsX</a>().
 
 
 
     QScrollView::contentsY
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the Y coordinate of the contents that are at the top edge of the viewport.
 <p>
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qscrollview.html#contentsY">contentsY</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqscrollview.html#contentsY">contentsY</a>().
 
 
 
     QScrollView::dragAutoScroll
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether autoscrolling in drag move events is enabled.
 <p>If this property is set to TRUE (the default), the QScrollView
 automatically scrolls the contents in drag move events if the user
@@ -3171,217 +3171,217 @@ disables this autoscroll feature.
 <p> <b>Warning:</b> Enabling this property might not be enough to
 effectively turn on autoscrolling. If you put a custom widget in
 the QScrollView, you might need to call QDragEvent::ignore() on
-the event in the <a href="qwidget.html#dragEnterEvent">dragEnterEvent</a>() and <a href="qwidget.html#dragMoveEvent">dragMoveEvent</a>()
+the event in the <a href="ntqwidget.html#dragEnterEvent">dragEnterEvent</a>() and <a href="ntqwidget.html#dragMoveEvent">dragMoveEvent</a>()
 reimplementations.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qscrollview.html#setDragAutoScroll">setDragAutoScroll</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qscrollview.html#dragAutoScroll">dragAutoScroll</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqscrollview.html#setDragAutoScroll">setDragAutoScroll</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqscrollview.html#dragAutoScroll">dragAutoScroll</a>().
 
 
 
     QScrollView::hScrollBarMode
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the mode for the horizontal scroll bar.
-<p>The default mode is <a href="qscrollview.html#ScrollBarMode-enum">QScrollView::Auto</a>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qscrollview.html#vScrollBarMode-prop">vScrollBarMode</a>.
+<p>The default mode is <a href="ntqscrollview.html#ScrollBarMode-enum">QScrollView::Auto</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqscrollview.html#vScrollBarMode-prop">vScrollBarMode</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qscrollview.html#setHScrollBarMode">setHScrollBarMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qscrollview.html#hScrollBarMode">hScrollBarMode</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqscrollview.html#setHScrollBarMode">setHScrollBarMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqscrollview.html#hScrollBarMode">hScrollBarMode</a>().
 
 
 
     QScrollView::resizePolicy
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the resize policy.
-<p>The default is <a href="qscrollview.html#ResizePolicy-enum">Default</a>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qscrollview.html#ResizePolicy-enum">ResizePolicy</a>.
+<p>The default is <a href="ntqscrollview.html#ResizePolicy-enum">Default</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqscrollview.html#ResizePolicy-enum">ResizePolicy</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qscrollview.html#setResizePolicy">setResizePolicy</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qscrollview.html#resizePolicy">resizePolicy</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqscrollview.html#setResizePolicy">setResizePolicy</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqscrollview.html#resizePolicy">resizePolicy</a>().
 
 
 
     QScrollView::vScrollBarMode
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the mode for the vertical scroll bar.
-<p>The default mode is <a href="qscrollview.html#ScrollBarMode-enum">QScrollView::Auto</a>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qscrollview.html#hScrollBarMode-prop">hScrollBarMode</a>.
+<p>The default mode is <a href="ntqscrollview.html#ScrollBarMode-enum">QScrollView::Auto</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqscrollview.html#hScrollBarMode-prop">hScrollBarMode</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qscrollview.html#setVScrollBarMode">setVScrollBarMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qscrollview.html#vScrollBarMode">vScrollBarMode</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqscrollview.html#setVScrollBarMode">setVScrollBarMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqscrollview.html#vScrollBarMode">vScrollBarMode</a>().
 
 
 
     QScrollView::visibleHeight
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the vertical amount of the content that is visible.
 <p>
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qscrollview.html#visibleHeight">visibleHeight</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqscrollview.html#visibleHeight">visibleHeight</a>().
 
 
 
     QScrollView::visibleWidth
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the horizontal amount of the content that is visible.
 <p>
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qscrollview.html#visibleWidth">visibleWidth</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqscrollview.html#visibleWidth">visibleWidth</a>().
 
 
 
     QSlider::lineStep
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the current line step.
-<p>When setting lineStep, the virtual <a href="qrangecontrol.html#stepChange">stepChange</a>() function will be
+<p>When setting lineStep, the virtual <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#stepChange">stepChange</a>() function will be
 called if the new line step is different from the previous
 setting.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qrangecontrol.html#setSteps">setSteps</a>(), <a href="qrangecontrol.html#pageStep">QRangeControl::pageStep</a>(), and <a href="qrangecontrol.html#setRange">setRange</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#setSteps">setSteps</a>(), <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#pageStep">QRangeControl::pageStep</a>(), and <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#setRange">setRange</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qslider.html#setLineStep">setLineStep</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qslider.html#lineStep">lineStep</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqslider.html#setLineStep">setLineStep</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqslider.html#lineStep">lineStep</a>().
 
 
 
     QSlider::maxValue
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the current maximum value of the slider.
-<p>When setting this property, the <a href="qslider.html#minValue-prop">QSlider::minValue</a> is adjusted,
+<p>When setting this property, the <a href="ntqslider.html#minValue-prop">QSlider::minValue</a> is adjusted,
 if necessary, to ensure that the range remains valid.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qrangecontrol.html#setRange">setRange</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#setRange">setRange</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qslider.html#setMaxValue">setMaxValue</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qslider.html#maxValue">maxValue</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqslider.html#setMaxValue">setMaxValue</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqslider.html#maxValue">maxValue</a>().
 
 
 
     QSlider::minValue
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the current minimum value of the slider.
-<p>When setting this property, the <a href="qslider.html#maxValue-prop">QSlider::maxValue</a> is adjusted,
+<p>When setting this property, the <a href="ntqslider.html#maxValue-prop">QSlider::maxValue</a> is adjusted,
 if necessary, to ensure that the range remains valid.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qrangecontrol.html#setRange">setRange</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#setRange">setRange</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qslider.html#setMinValue">setMinValue</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qslider.html#minValue">minValue</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqslider.html#setMinValue">setMinValue</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqslider.html#minValue">minValue</a>().
 
 
 
     QSlider::orientation
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the slider's orientation.
-<p>The orientation must be <a href="qt.html#Orientation-enum">Qt::Vertical</a> (the default) or <a href="qt.html#Orientation-enum">Qt::Horizontal</a>.
+<p>The orientation must be <a href="ntqt.html#Orientation-enum">Qt::Vertical</a> (the default) or <a href="ntqt.html#Orientation-enum">Qt::Horizontal</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qslider.html#setOrientation">setOrientation</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qslider.html#orientation">orientation</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqslider.html#setOrientation">setOrientation</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqslider.html#orientation">orientation</a>().
 
 
 
     QSlider::pageStep
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the current page step.
-<p>When setting pageStep, the virtual <a href="qrangecontrol.html#stepChange">stepChange</a>() function will be
+<p>When setting pageStep, the virtual <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#stepChange">stepChange</a>() function will be
 called if the new page step is different from the previous
 setting.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qrangecontrol.html#setSteps">QRangeControl::setSteps</a>(), <a href="qslider.html#lineStep-prop">lineStep</a>, and <a href="qrangecontrol.html#setRange">setRange</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#setSteps">QRangeControl::setSteps</a>(), <a href="ntqslider.html#lineStep-prop">lineStep</a>, and <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#setRange">setRange</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qslider.html#setPageStep">setPageStep</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qslider.html#pageStep">pageStep</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqslider.html#setPageStep">setPageStep</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqslider.html#pageStep">pageStep</a>().
 
 
 
     QSlider::tickInterval
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the interval between tickmarks.
 <p>This is a value interval, not a pixel interval. If it is 0, the
-slider will choose between <a href="qslider.html#lineStep">lineStep</a>() and <a href="qslider.html#pageStep">pageStep</a>(). The initial
+slider will choose between <a href="ntqslider.html#lineStep">lineStep</a>() and <a href="ntqslider.html#pageStep">pageStep</a>(). The initial
 value of tickInterval is 0.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qrangecontrol.html#lineStep">QRangeControl::lineStep</a>() and <a href="qrangecontrol.html#pageStep">QRangeControl::pageStep</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#lineStep">QRangeControl::lineStep</a>() and <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#pageStep">QRangeControl::pageStep</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qslider.html#setTickInterval">setTickInterval</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qslider.html#tickInterval">tickInterval</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqslider.html#setTickInterval">setTickInterval</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqslider.html#tickInterval">tickInterval</a>().
 
 
 
     QSlider::tickmarks
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the tickmark settings for this slider.
-<p>The valid values are in <a href="qslider.html#TickSetting-enum">QSlider::TickSetting</a>. The default is
-<a href="qslider.html#TickSetting-enum">NoMarks</a>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qslider.html#tickInterval-prop">tickInterval</a>.
+<p>The valid values are in <a href="ntqslider.html#TickSetting-enum">QSlider::TickSetting</a>. The default is
+<a href="ntqslider.html#TickSetting-enum">NoMarks</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqslider.html#tickInterval-prop">tickInterval</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qslider.html#setTickmarks">setTickmarks</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qslider.html#tickmarks">tickmarks</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqslider.html#setTickmarks">setTickmarks</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqslider.html#tickmarks">tickmarks</a>().
 
 
 
     QSlider::tracking
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether slider tracking is enabled.
 <p>If tracking is enabled (the default), the slider emits the
-<a href="qslider.html#valueChanged">valueChanged</a>() signal whenever the slider is being dragged. If
+<a href="ntqslider.html#valueChanged">valueChanged</a>() signal whenever the slider is being dragged. If
 tracking is disabled, the slider emits the valueChanged() signal
 when the user releases the mouse button (unless the value happens
 to be the same as before).
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qslider.html#setTracking">setTracking</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qslider.html#tracking">tracking</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqslider.html#setTracking">setTracking</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqslider.html#tracking">tracking</a>().
 
 
 
     QSlider::value
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the current slider value.
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qslider.html#setValue">setValue</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qslider.html#value">value</a>().
-<p><p>See also <a href="qrangecontrol.html#value">QRangeControl::value</a>() and <a href="qrangecontrol.html#prevValue">prevValue</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqslider.html#setValue">setValue</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqslider.html#value">value</a>().
+<p><p>See also <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#value">QRangeControl::value</a>() and <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#prevValue">prevValue</a>().
 
 
 
 
     QSpinBox::buttonSymbols
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the current button symbol mode.
-<p>The possible values can be either <a href="qspinbox.html#ButtonSymbols-enum">UpDownArrows</a> or <a href="qspinbox.html#ButtonSymbols-enum">PlusMinus</a>.
-The default is <a href="qspinbox.html#ButtonSymbols-enum">UpDownArrows</a>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qspinbox.html#ButtonSymbols-enum">ButtonSymbols</a>.
+<p>The possible values can be either <a href="ntqspinbox.html#ButtonSymbols-enum">UpDownArrows</a> or <a href="ntqspinbox.html#ButtonSymbols-enum">PlusMinus</a>.
+The default is <a href="ntqspinbox.html#ButtonSymbols-enum">UpDownArrows</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqspinbox.html#ButtonSymbols-enum">ButtonSymbols</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qspinbox.html#setButtonSymbols">setButtonSymbols</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qspinbox.html#buttonSymbols">buttonSymbols</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqspinbox.html#setButtonSymbols">setButtonSymbols</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqspinbox.html#buttonSymbols">buttonSymbols</a>().
 
 
 
     QSpinBox::cleanText
-    
-<p>This property holds the spin box's text with no <a href="qspinbox.html#prefix">prefix</a>(), <a href="qspinbox.html#suffix">suffix</a>() or leading or trailing whitespace.
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qspinbox.html#cleanText">cleanText</a>().
-<p><p>See also <a href="qspinbox.html#text-prop">text</a>, <a href="qspinbox.html#prefix-prop">prefix</a>, and <a href="qspinbox.html#suffix-prop">suffix</a>.
+    
+<p>This property holds the spin box's text with no <a href="ntqspinbox.html#prefix">prefix</a>(), <a href="ntqspinbox.html#suffix">suffix</a>() or leading or trailing whitespace.
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqspinbox.html#cleanText">cleanText</a>().
+<p><p>See also <a href="ntqspinbox.html#text-prop">text</a>, <a href="ntqspinbox.html#prefix-prop">prefix</a>, and <a href="ntqspinbox.html#suffix-prop">suffix</a>.
 
 
 
 
     QSpinBox::lineStep
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the line step.
 <p>When the user uses the arrows to change the spin box's value the
 value will be incremented/decremented by the amount of the line
 step.
-<p> The <a href="qspinbox.html#setLineStep">setLineStep</a>() function calls the virtual <a href="qrangecontrol.html#stepChange">stepChange</a>() function
+<p> The <a href="ntqspinbox.html#setLineStep">setLineStep</a>() function calls the virtual <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#stepChange">stepChange</a>() function
 if the new line step is different from the previous setting.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qrangecontrol.html#setSteps">QRangeControl::setSteps</a>() and <a href="qrangecontrol.html#setRange">setRange</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#setSteps">QRangeControl::setSteps</a>() and <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#setRange">setRange</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qspinbox.html#setLineStep">setLineStep</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qspinbox.html#lineStep">lineStep</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqspinbox.html#setLineStep">setLineStep</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqspinbox.html#lineStep">lineStep</a>().
 
 
 
     QSpinBox::maxValue
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the maximum value of the spin box.
-<p>When setting this property, <a href="qspinbox.html#minValue-prop">QSpinBox::minValue</a> is adjusted, if
+<p>When setting this property, <a href="ntqspinbox.html#minValue-prop">QSpinBox::minValue</a> is adjusted, if
 necessary, to ensure that the range remains valid.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qrangecontrol.html#setRange">setRange</a>() and <a href="qspinbox.html#specialValueText-prop">specialValueText</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#setRange">setRange</a>() and <a href="ntqspinbox.html#specialValueText-prop">specialValueText</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qspinbox.html#setMaxValue">setMaxValue</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qspinbox.html#maxValue">maxValue</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqspinbox.html#setMaxValue">setMaxValue</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqspinbox.html#maxValue">maxValue</a>().
 
 
 
     QSpinBox::minValue
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the minimum value of the spin box.
-<p>When setting this property, <a href="qspinbox.html#maxValue-prop">QSpinBox::maxValue</a> is adjusted, if
+<p>When setting this property, <a href="ntqspinbox.html#maxValue-prop">QSpinBox::maxValue</a> is adjusted, if
 necessary, to ensure that the range remains valid.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qrangecontrol.html#setRange">setRange</a>() and <a href="qspinbox.html#specialValueText-prop">specialValueText</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#setRange">setRange</a>() and <a href="ntqspinbox.html#specialValueText-prop">specialValueText</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qspinbox.html#setMinValue">setMinValue</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qspinbox.html#minValue">minValue</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqspinbox.html#setMinValue">setMinValue</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqspinbox.html#minValue">minValue</a>().
 
 
 
     QSpinBox::prefix
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the spin box's prefix.
 <p>The prefix is prepended to the start of the displayed value.
 Typical use is to display a unit of measurement or a currency
@@ -3392,16 +3392,16 @@ symbol. For example:
  
 <p> To turn off the prefix display, set this property to an empty
 string. The default is no prefix. The prefix is not displayed for
-the <a href="qspinbox.html#minValue">minValue</a>() if <a href="qspinbox.html#specialValueText">specialValueText</a>() is not empty.
-<p> If no prefix is set, <a href="qspinbox.html#prefix">prefix</a>() returns <a href="qstring.html#QString-null">QString::null</a>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qspinbox.html#suffix-prop">suffix</a>.
+the <a href="ntqspinbox.html#minValue">minValue</a>() if <a href="ntqspinbox.html#specialValueText">specialValueText</a>() is not empty.
+<p> If no prefix is set, <a href="ntqspinbox.html#prefix">prefix</a>() returns <a href="ntqstring.html#QString-null">QString::null</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqspinbox.html#suffix-prop">suffix</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qspinbox.html#setPrefix">setPrefix</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qspinbox.html#prefix">prefix</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqspinbox.html#setPrefix">setPrefix</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqspinbox.html#prefix">prefix</a>().
 
 
 
     QSpinBox::specialValueText
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the special-value text.
 <p>If set, the spin box will display this text instead of a numeric
 value whenever the current value is equal to minVal(). Typical use
@@ -3412,29 +3412,29 @@ automatically choose a good margin width, you can set up the spin
 box like this:
 <pre>
         QSpinBox marginBox( -1, 20, 1, parent, "marginBox" );
-        marginBox-&gt;<a href="qspinbox.html#setSuffix">setSuffix</a>( " mm" );
-        marginBox-&gt;<a href="qspinbox.html#setSpecialValueText">setSpecialValueText</a>( "Auto" );
+        marginBox-&gt;<a href="ntqspinbox.html#setSuffix">setSuffix</a>( " mm" );
+        marginBox-&gt;<a href="ntqspinbox.html#setSpecialValueText">setSpecialValueText</a>( "Auto" );
     </pre>
  
 The user will then be able to choose a margin width from 0-20
 millimeters or select "Auto" to leave it to the application to
 choose. Your code must then interpret the spin box value of -1 as
 the user requesting automatic margin width.
-<p> All values are displayed with the <a href="qspinbox.html#prefix">prefix</a>() and <a href="qspinbox.html#suffix">suffix</a>() (if set),
+<p> All values are displayed with the <a href="ntqspinbox.html#prefix">prefix</a>() and <a href="ntqspinbox.html#suffix">suffix</a>() (if set),
 <em>except</em> for the special value, which only shows the special
 value text.
 <p> To turn off the special-value text display, call this function
 with an empty string. The default is no special-value text, i.e.
 the numeric value is shown as usual.
-<p> If no special-value text is set, <a href="qspinbox.html#specialValueText">specialValueText</a>() returns
-<a href="qstring.html#QString-null">QString::null</a>.
+<p> If no special-value text is set, <a href="ntqspinbox.html#specialValueText">specialValueText</a>() returns
+<a href="ntqstring.html#QString-null">QString::null</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qspinbox.html#setSpecialValueText">setSpecialValueText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qspinbox.html#specialValueText">specialValueText</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqspinbox.html#setSpecialValueText">setSpecialValueText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqspinbox.html#specialValueText">specialValueText</a>().
 
 
 
     QSpinBox::suffix
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the suffix of the spin box.
 <p>The suffix is appended to the end of the displayed value. Typical
 use is to display a unit of measurement or a currency symbol. For
@@ -3445,35 +3445,35 @@ example:
  
 <p> To turn off the suffix display, set this property to an empty
 string. The default is no suffix. The suffix is not displayed for
-the <a href="qspinbox.html#minValue">minValue</a>() if <a href="qspinbox.html#specialValueText">specialValueText</a>() is not empty.
-<p> If no suffix is set, <a href="qspinbox.html#suffix">suffix</a>() returns a <a href="qstring.html#QString-null">QString::null</a>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qspinbox.html#prefix-prop">prefix</a>.
+the <a href="ntqspinbox.html#minValue">minValue</a>() if <a href="ntqspinbox.html#specialValueText">specialValueText</a>() is not empty.
+<p> If no suffix is set, <a href="ntqspinbox.html#suffix">suffix</a>() returns a <a href="ntqstring.html#QString-null">QString::null</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqspinbox.html#prefix-prop">prefix</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qspinbox.html#setSuffix">setSuffix</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qspinbox.html#suffix">suffix</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqspinbox.html#setSuffix">setSuffix</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqspinbox.html#suffix">suffix</a>().
 
 
 
     QSpinBox::text
-    
-<p>This property holds the spin box's text, including any <a href="qspinbox.html#prefix">prefix</a>() and <a href="qspinbox.html#suffix">suffix</a>().
+    
+<p>This property holds the spin box's text, including any <a href="ntqspinbox.html#prefix">prefix</a>() and <a href="ntqspinbox.html#suffix">suffix</a>().
 <p>There is no default text.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qspinbox.html#value-prop">value</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqspinbox.html#value-prop">value</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qspinbox.html#text">text</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqspinbox.html#text">text</a>().
 
 
 
     QSpinBox::value
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the value of the spin box.
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qspinbox.html#setValue">setValue</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qspinbox.html#value">value</a>().
-<p><p>See also <a href="qrangecontrol.html#setValue">QRangeControl::setValue</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqspinbox.html#setValue">setValue</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqspinbox.html#value">value</a>().
+<p><p>See also <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#setValue">QRangeControl::setValue</a>().
 
 
 
 
     QSpinBox::wrapping
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether it is possible to step the value from the highest value to the lowest value and vice versa.
 <p>By default, wrapping is turned off.
 <p> If you have a range of 0..100 and wrapping is off when the user
@@ -3481,53 +3481,53 @@ reaches 100 and presses the Up Arrow nothing will happen; but if
 wrapping is on the value will change from 100 to 0, then to 1,
 etc. When wrapping is on, navigating past the highest value takes
 you to the lowest and vice versa.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qspinbox.html#minValue-prop">minValue</a>, <a href="qspinbox.html#maxValue-prop">maxValue</a>, and <a href="qrangecontrol.html#setRange">setRange</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqspinbox.html#minValue-prop">minValue</a>, <a href="ntqspinbox.html#maxValue-prop">maxValue</a>, and <a href="ntqrangecontrol.html#setRange">setRange</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qspinbox.html#setWrapping">setWrapping</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qspinbox.html#wrapping">wrapping</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqspinbox.html#setWrapping">setWrapping</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqspinbox.html#wrapping">wrapping</a>().
 
 
 
     QSplitter::childrenCollapsible
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether child widgets can be resized down to size 0 by the user.
 <p>By default, children are collapsible. It is possible to enable
 and disable the collapsing of individual children; see
-<a href="qsplitter.html#setCollapsible">setCollapsible</a>().
+<a href="ntqsplitter.html#setCollapsible">setCollapsible</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qsplitter.html#setChildrenCollapsible">setChildrenCollapsible</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qsplitter.html#childrenCollapsible">childrenCollapsible</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqsplitter.html#setChildrenCollapsible">setChildrenCollapsible</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqsplitter.html#childrenCollapsible">childrenCollapsible</a>().
 
 
 
     QSplitter::handleWidth
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the width of the splitter handle.
 <p>
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qsplitter.html#setHandleWidth">setHandleWidth</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qsplitter.html#handleWidth">handleWidth</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqsplitter.html#setHandleWidth">setHandleWidth</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqsplitter.html#handleWidth">handleWidth</a>().
 
 
 
     QSplitter::opaqueResize
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether resizing is opaque.
 <p>Opaque resizing is off by default.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qsplitter.html#setOpaqueResize">setOpaqueResize</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qsplitter.html#opaqueResize">opaqueResize</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqsplitter.html#setOpaqueResize">setOpaqueResize</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqsplitter.html#opaqueResize">opaqueResize</a>().
 
 
 
     QSplitter::orientation
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the orientation of the splitter.
 <p>By default the orientation is horizontal (the widgets are side by
-side). The possible orientations are <a href="qt.html#Orientation-enum">Horizontal</a> and
-<a href="qt.html#Orientation-enum">Vertical</a>.
+side). The possible orientations are <a href="ntqt.html#Orientation-enum">Horizontal</a> and
+<a href="ntqt.html#Orientation-enum">Vertical</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qsplitter.html#setOrientation">setOrientation</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qsplitter.html#orientation">orientation</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqsplitter.html#setOrientation">setOrientation</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqsplitter.html#orientation">orientation</a>().
 
 
 
     QSqlDatabase::connectOptions
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the database connect options.
 <p>The format of the options string is a semi-colon separated list of
 option names or option = value pairs. The options depend on the
@@ -3606,12 +3606,12 @@ information about the different options. The options will be set
 prior to opening the database connection. Setting new options
 without re-opening the connection does nothing.
 <p> <p>See also 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qsqldatabase.html#setConnectOptions">setConnectOptions</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qsqldatabase.html#connectOptions">connectOptions</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqsqldatabase.html#setConnectOptions">setConnectOptions</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqsqldatabase.html#connectOptions">connectOptions</a>().
 
 
 
     QSqlDatabase::databaseName
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the name of the database.
 <p>Note that the database name is the TNS Service Name for the <a href="sql-driver.html#QOCI8">QOCI8</a>
 (Oracle) driver.
@@ -3622,7 +3622,7 @@ to open a <tt>.mdb</tt> file directly, instead of having to create a
 entry in the ODBC manager:
 <p> <pre>
     ...
-    db = QSqlDatabase::<a href="qsqldatabase.html#addDatabase">addDatabase</a>( "QODBC3" );
+    db = QSqlDatabase::<a href="ntqsqldatabase.html#addDatabase">addDatabase</a>( "QODBC3" );
     db-&gt;setDatabaseName( "DRIVER={Microsoft Access Driver (*.mdb)};FIL={MS Access};DBQ=myaccessfile.mdb" );
     if ( db-&gt;open() ) {
         // success!
@@ -3633,71 +3633,71 @@ entry in the ODBC manager:
 ("FIL" is the required spelling in Microsoft's API.)
 <p> There is no default value.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qsqldatabase.html#setDatabaseName">setDatabaseName</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qsqldatabase.html#databaseName">databaseName</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqsqldatabase.html#setDatabaseName">setDatabaseName</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqsqldatabase.html#databaseName">databaseName</a>().
 
 
 
     QSqlDatabase::hostName
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the host name where the database resides.
 <p>There is no default value.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qsqldatabase.html#setHostName">setHostName</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qsqldatabase.html#hostName">hostName</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqsqldatabase.html#setHostName">setHostName</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqsqldatabase.html#hostName">hostName</a>().
 
 
 
     QSqlDatabase::password
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the password used to connect to the database.
 <p>There is no default value.
 <p> <b>Warning:</b> This function stores the password in plain text within
-Qt. Use the <a href="qsqldatabase.html#open">open</a>() call that takes a password as parameter to
+Qt. Use the <a href="ntqsqldatabase.html#open">open</a>() call that takes a password as parameter to
 avoid this behaviour.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qsqldatabase.html#open">open</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqsqldatabase.html#open">open</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qsqldatabase.html#setPassword">setPassword</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qsqldatabase.html#password">password</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqsqldatabase.html#setPassword">setPassword</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqsqldatabase.html#password">password</a>().
 
 
 
     QSqlDatabase::port
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the port used to connect to the database.
 <p>There is no default value.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qsqldatabase.html#setPort">setPort</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qsqldatabase.html#port">port</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqsqldatabase.html#setPort">setPort</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqsqldatabase.html#port">port</a>().
 
 
 
     QSqlDatabase::userName
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the user name connected to the database.
 <p>There is no default value.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qsqldatabase.html#setUserName">setUserName</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qsqldatabase.html#userName">userName</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqsqldatabase.html#setUserName">setUserName</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqsqldatabase.html#userName">userName</a>().
 
 
 
     QStatusBar::sizeGripEnabled
-    
-<p>This property holds whether the <a href="qsizegrip.html">QSizeGrip</a> in the bottom right of the status bar is enabled.
+    
+<p>This property holds whether the <a href="ntqsizegrip.html">QSizeGrip</a> in the bottom right of the status bar is enabled.
 <p>Enables or disables the QSizeGrip in the bottom right of the
 status bar. By default, the size grip is enabled.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qstatusbar.html#setSizeGripEnabled">setSizeGripEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qstatusbar.html#isSizeGripEnabled">isSizeGripEnabled</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqstatusbar.html#setSizeGripEnabled">setSizeGripEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqstatusbar.html#isSizeGripEnabled">isSizeGripEnabled</a>().
 
 
 
     QTabBar::count
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the number of tabs in the tab bar.
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qtabbar.html#count">count</a>().
-<p><p>See also <a href="qtabbar.html#tab">tab</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqtabbar.html#count">count</a>().
+<p><p>See also <a href="ntqtabbar.html#tab">tab</a>().
 
 
 
 
     QTabBar::currentTab
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the id of the tab bar's visible tab.
 <p>If no tab page is currently visible, the property's value is -1.
 Even if the property's value is not -1, you cannot assume that the
@@ -3705,204 +3705,204 @@ user can see the relevant page, or that the tab is enabled. When
 you need to display something the value of this property
 represents the best page to display.
 <p> When this property is set to <em>id</em>, it will raise the tab with the
-id <em>id</em> and emit the <a href="qtabbar.html#selected">selected</a>() signal.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qtabbar.html#selected">selected</a>() and <a href="qtabbar.html#isTabEnabled">isTabEnabled</a>().
+id <em>id</em> and emit the <a href="ntqtabbar.html#selected">selected</a>() signal.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqtabbar.html#selected">selected</a>() and <a href="ntqtabbar.html#isTabEnabled">isTabEnabled</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtabbar.html#setCurrentTab">setCurrentTab</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtabbar.html#currentTab">currentTab</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtabbar.html#setCurrentTab">setCurrentTab</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtabbar.html#currentTab">currentTab</a>().
 
 
 
     QTabBar::keyboardFocusTab
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the id of the tab that has the <a href="focus.html#keyboard-focus">keyboard focus</a>.
 <p>This property contains the id of the tab that has the keyboard
 focus or -1 if the tab bar does not have the keyboard focus.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qtabbar.html#keyboardFocusTab">keyboardFocusTab</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqtabbar.html#keyboardFocusTab">keyboardFocusTab</a>().
 
 
 
     QTabBar::shape
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the shape of the tabs in the tab bar.
-<p>The value of this property is one of the following: <a href="qtabbar.html#Shape-enum">RoundedAbove</a> (default), <a href="qtabbar.html#Shape-enum">RoundedBelow</a>, <a href="qtabbar.html#Shape-enum">TriangularAbove</a> or <a href="qtabbar.html#Shape-enum">TriangularBelow</a>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qtabbar.html#Shape-enum">Shape</a>.
+<p>The value of this property is one of the following: <a href="ntqtabbar.html#Shape-enum">RoundedAbove</a> (default), <a href="ntqtabbar.html#Shape-enum">RoundedBelow</a>, <a href="ntqtabbar.html#Shape-enum">TriangularAbove</a> or <a href="ntqtabbar.html#Shape-enum">TriangularBelow</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqtabbar.html#Shape-enum">Shape</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtabbar.html#setShape">setShape</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtabbar.html#shape">shape</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtabbar.html#setShape">setShape</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtabbar.html#shape">shape</a>().
 
 
 
     QTabWidget::count
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the number of tabs in the tab bar.
 <p>
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qtabwidget.html#count">count</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqtabwidget.html#count">count</a>().
 
 
 
     QTabWidget::currentPage
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the index position of the current tab page.
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtabwidget.html#setCurrentPage">setCurrentPage</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtabwidget.html#currentPageIndex">currentPageIndex</a>().
-<p><p>See also <a href="qtabbar.html#currentTab-prop">QTabBar::currentTab</a>.
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtabwidget.html#setCurrentPage">setCurrentPage</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtabwidget.html#currentPageIndex">currentPageIndex</a>().
+<p><p>See also <a href="ntqtabbar.html#currentTab-prop">QTabBar::currentTab</a>.
 
 
 
 
     QTabWidget::margin
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the margin in this tab widget.
 <p>The margin is the distance between the innermost pixel of the
 frame and the outermost pixel of the pages.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtabwidget.html#setMargin">setMargin</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtabwidget.html#margin">margin</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtabwidget.html#setMargin">setMargin</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtabwidget.html#margin">margin</a>().
 
 
 
     QTabWidget::tabPosition
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the position of the tabs in this tab widget.
-<p>Possible values for this property are <a href="qtabwidget.html#TabPosition-enum">QTabWidget::Top</a> and <a href="qtabwidget.html#TabPosition-enum">QTabWidget::Bottom</a>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qtabwidget.html#TabPosition-enum">TabPosition</a>.
+<p>Possible values for this property are <a href="ntqtabwidget.html#TabPosition-enum">QTabWidget::Top</a> and <a href="ntqtabwidget.html#TabPosition-enum">QTabWidget::Bottom</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqtabwidget.html#TabPosition-enum">TabPosition</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtabwidget.html#setTabPosition">setTabPosition</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtabwidget.html#tabPosition">tabPosition</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtabwidget.html#setTabPosition">setTabPosition</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtabwidget.html#tabPosition">tabPosition</a>().
 
 
 
     QTabWidget::tabShape
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the shape of the tabs in this tab widget.
-<p>Possible values for this property are <a href="qtabwidget.html#TabShape-enum">QTabWidget::Rounded</a>
-(default) or <a href="qtabwidget.html#TabShape-enum">QTabWidget::Triangular</a>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qtabwidget.html#TabShape-enum">TabShape</a>.
+<p>Possible values for this property are <a href="ntqtabwidget.html#TabShape-enum">QTabWidget::Rounded</a>
+(default) or <a href="ntqtabwidget.html#TabShape-enum">QTabWidget::Triangular</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqtabwidget.html#TabShape-enum">TabShape</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtabwidget.html#setTabShape">setTabShape</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtabwidget.html#tabShape">tabShape</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtabwidget.html#setTabShape">setTabShape</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtabwidget.html#tabShape">tabShape</a>().
 
 
 
     QTable::columnMovingEnabled
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether columns can be moved by the user.
 <p>The default is FALSE. Columns are moved by dragging whilst holding
 down the Ctrl key.
 <p> <b>Warning:</b> If QTable is used to move header sections as a result of user
 interaction, the mapping between header indexes and section exposed by
-<a href="qheader.html">QHeader</a> will not reflect the order of the headers in the table; i.e.,
-QTable does not call <a href="qheader.html#moveSection">QHeader::moveSection</a>() to move sections but handles
+<a href="ntqheader.html">QHeader</a> will not reflect the order of the headers in the table; i.e.,
+QTable does not call <a href="ntqheader.html#moveSection">QHeader::moveSection</a>() to move sections but handles
 move operations internally.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qtable.html#rowMovingEnabled-prop">rowMovingEnabled</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqtable.html#rowMovingEnabled-prop">rowMovingEnabled</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtable.html#setColumnMovingEnabled">setColumnMovingEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtable.html#columnMovingEnabled">columnMovingEnabled</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtable.html#setColumnMovingEnabled">setColumnMovingEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtable.html#columnMovingEnabled">columnMovingEnabled</a>().
 
 
 
     QTable::focusStyle
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds how the current (focus) cell is drawn.
-<p>The default style is <a href="qtable.html#FocusStyle-enum">SpreadSheet</a>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qtable.html#FocusStyle-enum">QTable::FocusStyle</a>.
+<p>The default style is <a href="ntqtable.html#FocusStyle-enum">SpreadSheet</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqtable.html#FocusStyle-enum">QTable::FocusStyle</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtable.html#setFocusStyle">setFocusStyle</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtable.html#focusStyle">focusStyle</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtable.html#setFocusStyle">setFocusStyle</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtable.html#focusStyle">focusStyle</a>().
 
 
 
     QTable::numCols
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the number of columns in the table.
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtable.html#setNumCols">setNumCols</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtable.html#numCols">numCols</a>().
-<p><p>See also <a href="qtable.html#numRows-prop">numRows</a>.
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtable.html#setNumCols">setNumCols</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtable.html#numCols">numCols</a>().
+<p><p>See also <a href="ntqtable.html#numRows-prop">numRows</a>.
 
 
 
 
     QTable::numRows
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the number of rows in the table.
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtable.html#setNumRows">setNumRows</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtable.html#numRows">numRows</a>().
-<p><p>See also <a href="qtable.html#numCols-prop">numCols</a>.
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtable.html#setNumRows">setNumRows</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtable.html#numRows">numRows</a>().
+<p><p>See also <a href="ntqtable.html#numCols-prop">numCols</a>.
 
 
 
 
     QTable::numSelections
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the number of selections.
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qtable.html#numSelections">numSelections</a>().
-<p><p>See also <a href="qtable.html#currentSelection">currentSelection</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqtable.html#numSelections">numSelections</a>().
+<p><p>See also <a href="ntqtable.html#currentSelection">currentSelection</a>().
 
 
 
 
     QTable::readOnly
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the table is read-only.
 <p>Whether a cell in the table is editable or read-only depends on
 the cell's <a href="qtableitem.html#EditType-enum">EditType</a>, and this setting:
 see <a href="qtableitem.html#wheneditable">QTableItem::EditType</a>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#enabled-prop">QWidget::enabled</a>, <a href="qtable.html#setColumnReadOnly">setColumnReadOnly</a>(), and <a href="qtable.html#setRowReadOnly">setRowReadOnly</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#enabled-prop">QWidget::enabled</a>, <a href="ntqtable.html#setColumnReadOnly">setColumnReadOnly</a>(), and <a href="ntqtable.html#setRowReadOnly">setRowReadOnly</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtable.html#setReadOnly">setReadOnly</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtable.html#isReadOnly">isReadOnly</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtable.html#setReadOnly">setReadOnly</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtable.html#isReadOnly">isReadOnly</a>().
 
 
 
     QTable::rowMovingEnabled
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether rows can be moved by the user.
 <p>The default is FALSE. Rows are moved by dragging whilst holding
 down the Ctrl key.
 <p> <b>Warning:</b> If QTable is used to move header sections as a result of user
 interaction, the mapping between header indexes and section exposed by
-<a href="qheader.html">QHeader</a> will not reflect the order of the headers in the table; i.e.,
-QTable does not call <a href="qheader.html#moveSection">QHeader::moveSection</a>() to move sections but handles
+<a href="ntqheader.html">QHeader</a> will not reflect the order of the headers in the table; i.e.,
+QTable does not call <a href="ntqheader.html#moveSection">QHeader::moveSection</a>() to move sections but handles
 move operations internally.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qtable.html#columnMovingEnabled-prop">columnMovingEnabled</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqtable.html#columnMovingEnabled-prop">columnMovingEnabled</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtable.html#setRowMovingEnabled">setRowMovingEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtable.html#rowMovingEnabled">rowMovingEnabled</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtable.html#setRowMovingEnabled">setRowMovingEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtable.html#rowMovingEnabled">rowMovingEnabled</a>().
 
 
 
     QTable::selectionMode
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the current selection mode.
-<p>The default mode is <a href="qtable.html#SelectionMode-enum">Multi</a> which allows the user to select
+<p>The default mode is <a href="ntqtable.html#SelectionMode-enum">Multi</a> which allows the user to select
 multiple ranges of cells.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qtable.html#SelectionMode-enum">SelectionMode</a> and <a href="qtable.html#selectionMode-prop">selectionMode</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqtable.html#SelectionMode-enum">SelectionMode</a> and <a href="ntqtable.html#selectionMode-prop">selectionMode</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtable.html#setSelectionMode">setSelectionMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtable.html#selectionMode">selectionMode</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtable.html#setSelectionMode">setSelectionMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtable.html#selectionMode">selectionMode</a>().
 
 
 
     QTable::showGrid
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the table's grid is displayed.
 <p>The grid is shown by default.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtable.html#setShowGrid">setShowGrid</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtable.html#showGrid">showGrid</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtable.html#setShowGrid">setShowGrid</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtable.html#showGrid">showGrid</a>().
 
 
 
     QTable::sorting
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether a click on the header of a column sorts that column.
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtable.html#setSorting">setSorting</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtable.html#sorting">sorting</a>().
-<p><p>See also <a href="qtable.html#sortColumn">sortColumn</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtable.html#setSorting">setSorting</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtable.html#sorting">sorting</a>().
+<p><p>See also <a href="ntqtable.html#sortColumn">sortColumn</a>().
 
 
 
 
     QTextBrowser::source
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the name of the displayed document.
-<p>This is a <a href="qstring.html#QString-null">QString::null</a> if no document is displayed or if the
+<p>This is a <a href="ntqstring.html#QString-null">QString::null</a> if no document is displayed or if the
 source is unknown.
-<p> Setting this property uses the <a href="qtextedit.html#mimeSourceFactory">mimeSourceFactory</a>() to lookup the
+<p> Setting this property uses the <a href="ntqtextedit.html#mimeSourceFactory">mimeSourceFactory</a>() to lookup the
 named document. It also checks for optional anchors and scrolls
 the document accordingly.
 <p> If the first tag in the document is <tt>&lt;qt type=detail&gt;</tt>, the
 document is displayed as a popup rather than as new document in
 the browser window itself. Otherwise, the document is displayed
 normally in the text browser with the text set to the contents of
-the named document with <a href="qtextedit.html#setText">setText</a>().
+the named document with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#setText">setText</a>().
 <p> If you are using the filesystem access capabilities of the mime
 source factory, you must ensure that the factory knows about the
 encoding of specified files; otherwise no data will be available.
@@ -3910,67 +3910,67 @@ The default factory handles a couple of common file extensions
 such as <tt>*.html</tt> and <tt>*.txt</tt> with reasonable defaults. See
 <a href="qmimesourcefactory.html#data">QMimeSourceFactory::data</a>() for details.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtextbrowser.html#setSource">setSource</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtextbrowser.html#source">source</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtextbrowser.html#setSource">setSource</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtextbrowser.html#source">source</a>().
 
 
 
     QTextEdit::autoFormatting
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the enabled set of auto formatting features.
-<p>The value can be any combination of the values in the <a href="qtextedit.html#AutoFormatting-enum">AutoFormatting</a> enum.  The default is <a href="qtextedit.html#AutoFormatting-enum">AutoAll</a>. Choose <a href="qtextedit.html#AutoFormatting-enum">AutoNone</a>
+<p>The value can be any combination of the values in the <a href="ntqtextedit.html#AutoFormatting-enum">AutoFormatting</a> enum.  The default is <a href="ntqtextedit.html#AutoFormatting-enum">AutoAll</a>. Choose <a href="ntqtextedit.html#AutoFormatting-enum">AutoNone</a>
 to disable all automatic formatting.
-<p> Currently, the only automatic formatting feature provided is <a href="qtextedit.html#AutoFormatting-enum">AutoBulletList</a>; future versions of Qt may offer more.
+<p> Currently, the only automatic formatting feature provided is <a href="ntqtextedit.html#AutoFormatting-enum">AutoBulletList</a>; future versions of Qt may offer more.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#setAutoFormatting">setAutoFormatting</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#autoFormatting">autoFormatting</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#setAutoFormatting">setAutoFormatting</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#autoFormatting">autoFormatting</a>().
 
 
 
     QTextEdit::documentTitle
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the title of the document parsed from the text.
-<p>For <a href="qt.html#TextFormat-enum">PlainText</a> the title will be an empty string. For <a href="qt.html#TextFormat-enum">RichText</a> the title will be the text between the <tt>&lt;title&gt;</tt> tags,
+<p>For <a href="ntqt.html#TextFormat-enum">PlainText</a> the title will be an empty string. For <a href="ntqt.html#TextFormat-enum">RichText</a> the title will be the text between the <tt>&lt;title&gt;</tt> tags,
 if present, otherwise an empty string.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#documentTitle">documentTitle</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#documentTitle">documentTitle</a>().
 
 
 
     QTextEdit::hasSelectedText
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether some text is selected in selection 0.
 <p>
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#hasSelectedText">hasSelectedText</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#hasSelectedText">hasSelectedText</a>().
 
 
 
     QTextEdit::length
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the number of characters in the text.
 <p>
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#length">length</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#length">length</a>().
 
 
 
     QTextEdit::linkUnderline
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether hypertext links will be underlined.
 <p>If TRUE (the default) hypertext links will be displayed
 underlined. If FALSE links will not be displayed underlined.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#setLinkUnderline">setLinkUnderline</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#linkUnderline">linkUnderline</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#setLinkUnderline">setLinkUnderline</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#linkUnderline">linkUnderline</a>().
 
 
 
     QTextEdit::modified
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the document has been modified by the user.
 <p>
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#setModified">setModified</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#isModified">isModified</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#setModified">setModified</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#isModified">isModified</a>().
 
 
 
     QTextEdit::overwriteMode
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the text edit's overwrite mode.
 <p>If FALSE (the default) characters entered by the user are inserted
 with any characters to the right being moved out of the way. If
@@ -3978,80 +3978,80 @@ TRUE, the editor is in overwrite mode, i.e. characters entered by
 the user overwrite any characters to the right of the cursor
 position.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#setOverwriteMode">setOverwriteMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#isOverwriteMode">isOverwriteMode</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#setOverwriteMode">setOverwriteMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#isOverwriteMode">isOverwriteMode</a>().
 
 
 
     QTextEdit::paper
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the background (paper) brush.
 <p>The brush that is currently used to draw the background of the
 text edit. The initial setting is an empty brush.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#setPaper">setPaper</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#paper">paper</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#setPaper">setPaper</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#paper">paper</a>().
 
 
 
     QTextEdit::readOnly
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the text edit is read-only.
 <p>In a read-only text edit the user can only navigate through the
 text and select text; modifying the text is not possible.
 <p> This property's default is FALSE.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#setReadOnly">setReadOnly</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#isReadOnly">isReadOnly</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#setReadOnly">setReadOnly</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#isReadOnly">isReadOnly</a>().
 
 
 
     QTextEdit::selectedText
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the selected text (from selection 0) or an empty string if there is no currently selected text (in selection 0).
-<p>The text is always returned as <a href="qt.html#TextFormat-enum">PlainText</a> if the <a href="qtextedit.html#textFormat">textFormat</a>() is
-<a href="qt.html#TextFormat-enum">PlainText</a> or <a href="qt.html#TextFormat-enum">AutoText</a>, otherwise it is returned as HTML.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qtextedit.html#hasSelectedText-prop">hasSelectedText</a>.
+<p>The text is always returned as <a href="ntqt.html#TextFormat-enum">PlainText</a> if the <a href="ntqtextedit.html#textFormat">textFormat</a>() is
+<a href="ntqt.html#TextFormat-enum">PlainText</a> or <a href="ntqt.html#TextFormat-enum">AutoText</a>, otherwise it is returned as HTML.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqtextedit.html#hasSelectedText-prop">hasSelectedText</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#selectedText">selectedText</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#selectedText">selectedText</a>().
 
 
 
     QTextEdit::tabChangesFocus
-     <p>This property holds whether TAB changes focus or is accepted as input.
+     <p>This property holds whether TAB changes focus or is accepted as input.
 <p>In some occasions text edits should not allow the user to input
 tabulators or change indentation using the TAB key, as this breaks
 the focus chain. The default is FALSE.
 <p> 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#setTabChangesFocus">setTabChangesFocus</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#tabChangesFocus">tabChangesFocus</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#setTabChangesFocus">setTabChangesFocus</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#tabChangesFocus">tabChangesFocus</a>().
 
 
 
     QTextEdit::tabStopWidth
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the tab stop width in pixels.
 <p>
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#setTabStopWidth">setTabStopWidth</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#tabStopWidth">tabStopWidth</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#setTabStopWidth">setTabStopWidth</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#tabStopWidth">tabStopWidth</a>().
 
 
 
     QTextEdit::text
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the text edit's text.
 <p>There is no default text.
 <p> On setting, any previous text is deleted.
 <p> The text may be interpreted either as plain text or as rich text,
-depending on the <a href="qtextedit.html#textFormat">textFormat</a>(). The default setting is <a href="qt.html#TextFormat-enum">AutoText</a>,
+depending on the <a href="ntqtextedit.html#textFormat">textFormat</a>(). The default setting is <a href="ntqt.html#TextFormat-enum">AutoText</a>,
 i.e. the text edit auto-detects the format of the text.
-<p> For richtext, calling <a href="qtextedit.html#text">text</a>() on an editable QTextEdit will cause
+<p> For richtext, calling <a href="ntqtextedit.html#text">text</a>() on an editable QTextEdit will cause
 the text to be regenerated from the textedit. This may mean that
-the <a href="qstring.html">QString</a> returned may not be exactly the same as the one that
+the <a href="ntqstring.html">QString</a> returned may not be exactly the same as the one that
 was set.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qtextedit.html#textFormat-prop">textFormat</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqtextedit.html#textFormat-prop">textFormat</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#setText">setText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#text">text</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#setText">setText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#text">text</a>().
 
 
 
     QTextEdit::textFormat
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the text format: rich text, plain text, log text or auto text.
 <p>The text format is one of the following:
 <ul>
@@ -4060,76 +4060,76 @@ verbatim, including spaces. Whenever a newline appears in the text
 the text edit inserts a hard line break and begins a new
 paragraph.
 <li> RichText - rich text rendering. The available styles are
-defined in the default stylesheet <a href="qstylesheet.html#defaultSheet">QStyleSheet::defaultSheet</a>().
+defined in the default stylesheet <a href="ntqstylesheet.html#defaultSheet">QStyleSheet::defaultSheet</a>().
 <li> LogText -  optimized mode for very large texts. Supports a very
 limited set of formatting tags (color, bold, underline and italic
 settings).
 <li> AutoText - this is the default. The text edit autodetects which
-rendering style is best, <a href="qt.html#TextFormat-enum">PlainText</a> or <a href="qt.html#TextFormat-enum">RichText</a>. This is done
-by using the <a href="qstylesheet.html#mightBeRichText">QStyleSheet::mightBeRichText</a>() function.
+rendering style is best, <a href="ntqt.html#TextFormat-enum">PlainText</a> or <a href="ntqt.html#TextFormat-enum">RichText</a>. This is done
+by using the <a href="ntqstylesheet.html#mightBeRichText">QStyleSheet::mightBeRichText</a>() function.
 </ul>
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#setTextFormat">setTextFormat</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#textFormat">textFormat</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#setTextFormat">setTextFormat</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#textFormat">textFormat</a>().
 
 
 
     QTextEdit::undoDepth
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the depth of the undo history.
 <p>The maximum number of steps in the undo/redo history. The default
 is 100.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qtextedit.html#undo">undo</a>() and <a href="qtextedit.html#redo">redo</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqtextedit.html#undo">undo</a>() and <a href="ntqtextedit.html#redo">redo</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#setUndoDepth">setUndoDepth</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#undoDepth">undoDepth</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#setUndoDepth">setUndoDepth</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#undoDepth">undoDepth</a>().
 
 
 
     QTextEdit::undoRedoEnabled
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether undo/redo is enabled.
 <p>When changing this property, the undo/redo history is cleared.
 <p> The default is TRUE.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#setUndoRedoEnabled">setUndoRedoEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#isUndoRedoEnabled">isUndoRedoEnabled</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#setUndoRedoEnabled">setUndoRedoEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#isUndoRedoEnabled">isUndoRedoEnabled</a>().
 
 
 
     QTextEdit::wordWrap
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the word wrap mode.
-<p>The default mode is <a href="qtextedit.html#WordWrap-enum">WidgetWidth</a> which causes words to be
+<p>The default mode is <a href="ntqtextedit.html#WordWrap-enum">WidgetWidth</a> which causes words to be
 wrapped at the right edge of the text edit. Wrapping occurs at
 whitespace, keeping whole words intact. If you want wrapping to
-occur within words use <a href="qtextedit.html#setWrapPolicy">setWrapPolicy</a>(). If you set a wrap mode of
-<a href="qtextedit.html#WordWrap-enum">FixedPixelWidth</a> or <a href="qtextedit.html#WordWrap-enum">FixedColumnWidth</a> you should also call
-<a href="qtextedit.html#setWrapColumnOrWidth">setWrapColumnOrWidth</a>() with the width you want.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qtextedit.html#WordWrap-enum">WordWrap</a>, <a href="qtextedit.html#wrapColumnOrWidth-prop">wrapColumnOrWidth</a>, and <a href="qtextedit.html#wrapPolicy-prop">wrapPolicy</a>.
+occur within words use <a href="ntqtextedit.html#setWrapPolicy">setWrapPolicy</a>(). If you set a wrap mode of
+<a href="ntqtextedit.html#WordWrap-enum">FixedPixelWidth</a> or <a href="ntqtextedit.html#WordWrap-enum">FixedColumnWidth</a> you should also call
+<a href="ntqtextedit.html#setWrapColumnOrWidth">setWrapColumnOrWidth</a>() with the width you want.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqtextedit.html#WordWrap-enum">WordWrap</a>, <a href="ntqtextedit.html#wrapColumnOrWidth-prop">wrapColumnOrWidth</a>, and <a href="ntqtextedit.html#wrapPolicy-prop">wrapPolicy</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#setWordWrap">setWordWrap</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#wordWrap">wordWrap</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#setWordWrap">setWordWrap</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#wordWrap">wordWrap</a>().
 
 
 
     QTextEdit::wrapColumnOrWidth
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the position (in pixels or columns depending on the wrap mode) where text will be wrapped.
-<p>If the wrap mode is <a href="qtextedit.html#WordWrap-enum">FixedPixelWidth</a>, the value is the number of
+<p>If the wrap mode is <a href="ntqtextedit.html#WordWrap-enum">FixedPixelWidth</a>, the value is the number of
 pixels from the left edge of the text edit at which text should be
-wrapped. If the wrap mode is <a href="qtextedit.html#WordWrap-enum">FixedColumnWidth</a>, the value is the
+wrapped. If the wrap mode is <a href="ntqtextedit.html#WordWrap-enum">FixedColumnWidth</a>, the value is the
 column number (in character columns) from the left edge of the
 text edit at which text should be wrapped.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qtextedit.html#wordWrap-prop">wordWrap</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqtextedit.html#wordWrap-prop">wordWrap</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#setWrapColumnOrWidth">setWrapColumnOrWidth</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#wrapColumnOrWidth">wrapColumnOrWidth</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#setWrapColumnOrWidth">setWrapColumnOrWidth</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#wrapColumnOrWidth">wrapColumnOrWidth</a>().
 
 
 
     QTextEdit::wrapPolicy
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the word wrap policy, at whitespace or anywhere.
-<p>Defines where text can be wrapped when word wrap mode is not <a href="qtextedit.html#WordWrap-enum">NoWrap</a>. The choices are <a href="qtextedit.html#WrapPolicy-enum">AtWordBoundary</a> (the default), <a href="qtextedit.html#WrapPolicy-enum">Anywhere</a> and <a href="qtextedit.html#WrapPolicy-enum">AtWordOrDocumentBoundary</a>
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qtextedit.html#wordWrap-prop">wordWrap</a>.
+<p>Defines where text can be wrapped when word wrap mode is not <a href="ntqtextedit.html#WordWrap-enum">NoWrap</a>. The choices are <a href="ntqtextedit.html#WrapPolicy-enum">AtWordBoundary</a> (the default), <a href="ntqtextedit.html#WrapPolicy-enum">Anywhere</a> and <a href="ntqtextedit.html#WrapPolicy-enum">AtWordOrDocumentBoundary</a>
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqtextedit.html#wordWrap-prop">wordWrap</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#setWrapPolicy">setWrapPolicy</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtextedit.html#wrapPolicy">wrapPolicy</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#setWrapPolicy">setWrapPolicy</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtextedit.html#wrapPolicy">wrapPolicy</a>().
 
 
 
@@ -4189,133 +4189,133 @@ time. The default minimum time is 00:00:00.
 
 
     QToolBar::label
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the toolbar's label.
 <p>If the toolbar is floated the label becomes the toolbar window's
 caption. There is no default label text.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtoolbar.html#setLabel">setLabel</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtoolbar.html#label">label</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtoolbar.html#setLabel">setLabel</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtoolbar.html#label">label</a>().
 
 
 
     QToolBox::count
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the number of items contained in the toolbox.
 <p>
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qtoolbox.html#count">count</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqtoolbox.html#count">count</a>().
 
 
 
     QToolBox::currentIndex
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the index of the current item, or -1 if the toolbox is empty.
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtoolbox.html#setCurrentIndex">setCurrentIndex</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtoolbox.html#currentIndex">currentIndex</a>().
-<p><p>See also <a href="qtoolbox.html#currentItem">currentItem</a>(), <a href="qtoolbox.html#indexOf">indexOf</a>(), and <a href="qtoolbox.html#item">item</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtoolbox.html#setCurrentIndex">setCurrentIndex</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtoolbox.html#currentIndex">currentIndex</a>().
+<p><p>See also <a href="ntqtoolbox.html#currentItem">currentItem</a>(), <a href="ntqtoolbox.html#indexOf">indexOf</a>(), and <a href="ntqtoolbox.html#item">item</a>().
 
 
 
 
     QToolButton::autoRaise
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether auto-raising is enabled.
 <p>The default is disabled (i.e. FALSE).
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtoolbutton.html#setAutoRaise">setAutoRaise</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtoolbutton.html#autoRaise">autoRaise</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#setAutoRaise">setAutoRaise</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#autoRaise">autoRaise</a>().
 
 
 
     QToolButton::iconSet
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the icon set providing the icon shown on the button.
-<p>Setting this property sets <a href="qtoolbutton.html#pixmap-prop">QToolButton::pixmap</a> to a null
+<p>Setting this property sets <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#pixmap-prop">QToolButton::pixmap</a> to a null
 pixmap. There is no default iconset.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qtoolbutton.html#pixmap-prop">pixmap</a>, <a href="qtoolbutton.html#toggleButton-prop">toggleButton</a>, and <a href="qtoolbutton.html#on-prop">on</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#pixmap-prop">pixmap</a>, <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#toggleButton-prop">toggleButton</a>, and <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#on-prop">on</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtoolbutton.html#setIconSet">setIconSet</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtoolbutton.html#iconSet">iconSet</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#setIconSet">setIconSet</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#iconSet">iconSet</a>().
 
 
 
     QToolButton::offIconSet
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the icon set that is used when the button is in an "off" state.
 <p><b>This property is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-<p> Since Qt 3.0, <a href="qiconset.html">QIconSet</a> contains both the On and Off icons. There is
-now an <a href="qtoolbutton.html#iconSet-prop">QToolButton::iconSet</a> property that replaces both <a href="qtoolbutton.html#onIconSet-prop">QToolButton::onIconSet</a> and <a href="qtoolbutton.html#offIconSet-prop">QToolButton::offIconSet</a>.
-<p> For ease of porting, this property is a synonym for <a href="qtoolbutton.html#iconSet-prop">QToolButton::iconSet</a>. You probably want to go over your application
+<p> Since Qt 3.0, <a href="ntqiconset.html">QIconSet</a> contains both the On and Off icons. There is
+now an <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#iconSet-prop">QToolButton::iconSet</a> property that replaces both <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#onIconSet-prop">QToolButton::onIconSet</a> and <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#offIconSet-prop">QToolButton::offIconSet</a>.
+<p> For ease of porting, this property is a synonym for <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#iconSet-prop">QToolButton::iconSet</a>. You probably want to go over your application
 code and use the QIconSet On/Off mechanism.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qtoolbutton.html#iconSet-prop">iconSet</a> and <a href="qiconset.html#State-enum">QIconSet::State</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#iconSet-prop">iconSet</a> and <a href="ntqiconset.html#State-enum">QIconSet::State</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtoolbutton.html#setOffIconSet">setOffIconSet</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtoolbutton.html#offIconSet">offIconSet</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#setOffIconSet">setOffIconSet</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#offIconSet">offIconSet</a>().
 
 
 
     QToolButton::onIconSet
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the icon set that is used when the button is in an "on" state.
 <p><b>This property is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-<p> Since Qt 3.0, <a href="qiconset.html">QIconSet</a> contains both the On and Off icons. There is
-now an <a href="qtoolbutton.html#iconSet-prop">QToolButton::iconSet</a> property that replaces both <a href="qtoolbutton.html#onIconSet-prop">QToolButton::onIconSet</a> and <a href="qtoolbutton.html#offIconSet-prop">QToolButton::offIconSet</a>.
-<p> For ease of porting, this property is a synonym for <a href="qtoolbutton.html#iconSet-prop">QToolButton::iconSet</a>. You probably want to go over your application
+<p> Since Qt 3.0, <a href="ntqiconset.html">QIconSet</a> contains both the On and Off icons. There is
+now an <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#iconSet-prop">QToolButton::iconSet</a> property that replaces both <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#onIconSet-prop">QToolButton::onIconSet</a> and <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#offIconSet-prop">QToolButton::offIconSet</a>.
+<p> For ease of porting, this property is a synonym for <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#iconSet-prop">QToolButton::iconSet</a>. You probably want to go over your application
 code and use the QIconSet On/Off mechanism.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qtoolbutton.html#iconSet-prop">iconSet</a> and <a href="qiconset.html#State-enum">QIconSet::State</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#iconSet-prop">iconSet</a> and <a href="ntqiconset.html#State-enum">QIconSet::State</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtoolbutton.html#setOnIconSet">setOnIconSet</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtoolbutton.html#onIconSet">onIconSet</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#setOnIconSet">setOnIconSet</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#onIconSet">onIconSet</a>().
 
 
 
     QToolButton::popupDelay
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the time delay between pressing the button and the appearance of the associated popup menu in milliseconds.
 <p>Usually this is around half a second. A value of 0 draws the down
 arrow button to the side of the button which can be used to open
 up the popup menu.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qtoolbutton.html#setPopup">setPopup</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#setPopup">setPopup</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtoolbutton.html#setPopupDelay">setPopupDelay</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtoolbutton.html#popupDelay">popupDelay</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#setPopupDelay">setPopupDelay</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#popupDelay">popupDelay</a>().
 
 
 
     QToolButton::textLabel
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the label of this button.
 <p>Setting this property automatically sets the text as a tool tip
 too. There is no default text.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtoolbutton.html#setTextLabel">setTextLabel</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtoolbutton.html#textLabel">textLabel</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#setTextLabel">setTextLabel</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#textLabel">textLabel</a>().
 
 
 
     QToolButton::textPosition
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the position of the text label of this button.
 <p>
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtoolbutton.html#setTextPosition">setTextPosition</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtoolbutton.html#textPosition">textPosition</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#setTextPosition">setTextPosition</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#textPosition">textPosition</a>().
 
 
 
     QToolButton::usesBigPixmap
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether this toolbutton uses big pixmaps.
 <p>QToolButton automatically connects this property to the relevant
-signal in the <a href="qmainwindow.html">QMainWindow</a> in which it resides. We strongly
-recommend that you use <a href="qmainwindow.html#setUsesBigPixmaps">QMainWindow::setUsesBigPixmaps</a>() instead.
+signal in the <a href="ntqmainwindow.html">QMainWindow</a> in which it resides. We strongly
+recommend that you use <a href="ntqmainwindow.html#setUsesBigPixmaps">QMainWindow::setUsesBigPixmaps</a>() instead.
 <p> This property's default is TRUE.
 <p> <b>Warning:</b> If you set some buttons (in a QMainWindow) to have big
 pixmaps and others to have small pixmaps, QMainWindow may not get
 the geometry right.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtoolbutton.html#setUsesBigPixmap">setUsesBigPixmap</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtoolbutton.html#usesBigPixmap">usesBigPixmap</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#setUsesBigPixmap">setUsesBigPixmap</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#usesBigPixmap">usesBigPixmap</a>().
 
 
 
     QToolButton::usesTextLabel
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the toolbutton displays a text label below the button pixmap.
 <p>The default is FALSE.
 <p> QToolButton automatically connects this slot to the relevant
-signal in the <a href="qmainwindow.html">QMainWindow</a> in which is resides.
+signal in the <a href="ntqmainwindow.html">QMainWindow</a> in which is resides.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qtoolbutton.html#setUsesTextLabel">setUsesTextLabel</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qtoolbutton.html#usesTextLabel">usesTextLabel</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#setUsesTextLabel">setUsesTextLabel</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqtoolbutton.html#usesTextLabel">usesTextLabel</a>().
 
 
 
@@ -4340,36 +4340,36 @@ immediately when the cursor enters the widget.
 
 
     QWidget::acceptDrops
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether drop events are enabled for this widget.
 <p>Setting this property to TRUE announces to the system that this
 widget <em>may</em> be able to accept drop events.
-<p> If the widget is the desktop (<a href="qwidget.html#isDesktop">QWidget::isDesktop</a>()), this may
+<p> If the widget is the desktop (<a href="ntqwidget.html#isDesktop">QWidget::isDesktop</a>()), this may
 fail if another application is using the desktop; you can call
-<a href="qwidget.html#acceptDrops">acceptDrops</a>() to test if this occurs.
+<a href="ntqwidget.html#acceptDrops">acceptDrops</a>() to test if this occurs.
 <p> <b>Warning:</b>
 Do not modify this property in a Drag&Drop event handler.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#setAcceptDrops">setAcceptDrops</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#acceptDrops">acceptDrops</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setAcceptDrops">setAcceptDrops</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#acceptDrops">acceptDrops</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::autoMask
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the auto mask feature is enabled for the widget.
 <p>Transparent widgets use a mask to define their visible region.
 QWidget has some built-in support to make the task of
 recalculating the mask easier. When setting auto mask to TRUE,
-<a href="qwidget.html#updateMask">updateMask</a>() will be called whenever the widget is resized or
+<a href="ntqwidget.html#updateMask">updateMask</a>() will be called whenever the widget is resized or
 changes its focus state. Note that you must reimplement
-updateMask() (which should include a call to <a href="qwidget.html#setMask">setMask</a>()) or nothing
+updateMask() (which should include a call to <a href="ntqwidget.html#setMask">setMask</a>()) or nothing
 will happen.
-<p> Note: when you re-implement <a href="qwidget.html#resizeEvent">resizeEvent</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#focusInEvent">focusInEvent</a>() or
-<a href="qwidget.html#focusOutEvent">focusOutEvent</a>() in your custom widgets and still want to ensure
+<p> Note: when you re-implement <a href="ntqwidget.html#resizeEvent">resizeEvent</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#focusInEvent">focusInEvent</a>() or
+<a href="ntqwidget.html#focusOutEvent">focusOutEvent</a>() in your custom widgets and still want to ensure
 that the auto mask calculation works, you should add:
 <p> <pre>
-        if ( <a href="qwidget.html#autoMask">autoMask</a>() )
-            <a href="qwidget.html#updateMask">updateMask</a>();
+        if ( <a href="ntqwidget.html#autoMask">autoMask</a>() )
+            <a href="ntqwidget.html#updateMask">updateMask</a>();
     </pre>
  
 <p> at the end of your event handlers. This is true for all member
@@ -4383,163 +4383,163 @@ complex shape of its contents makes it necessary to represent its
 mask by a bitmap, which consumes both memory and time. If all you
 want is to blend the background of several neighboring widgets
 together seamlessly, you will probably want to use
-<a href="qwidget.html#setBackgroundOrigin">setBackgroundOrigin</a>() rather than a mask.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#updateMask">updateMask</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#setMask">setMask</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#clearMask">clearMask</a>(), and <a href="qwidget.html#backgroundOrigin-prop">backgroundOrigin</a>.
+<a href="ntqwidget.html#setBackgroundOrigin">setBackgroundOrigin</a>() rather than a mask.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#updateMask">updateMask</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#setMask">setMask</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#clearMask">clearMask</a>(), and <a href="ntqwidget.html#backgroundOrigin-prop">backgroundOrigin</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#setAutoMask">setAutoMask</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#autoMask">autoMask</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setAutoMask">setAutoMask</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#autoMask">autoMask</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::backgroundBrush
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the widget's background brush.
 <p>The background brush depends on a widget's palette and its
 background mode.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#backgroundColor">backgroundColor</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#backgroundPixmap">backgroundPixmap</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#eraseColor">eraseColor</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#palette-prop">palette</a>, and <a href="qapplication.html#setPalette">QApplication::setPalette</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#backgroundColor">backgroundColor</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#backgroundPixmap">backgroundPixmap</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#eraseColor">eraseColor</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#palette-prop">palette</a>, and <a href="ntqapplication.html#setPalette">QApplication::setPalette</a>().
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#backgroundBrush">backgroundBrush</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#backgroundBrush">backgroundBrush</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::backgroundMode
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the color role used for painting the background of the widget.
 <p>setPaletteBackgroundColor() reads this property to determine which
-entry of the <a href="qwidget.html#palette-prop">palette</a> to set.
-<p> For most widgets the default suffices (<a href="qt.html#BackgroundMode-enum">PaletteBackground</a>,
-typically gray), but some need to use <a href="qt.html#BackgroundMode-enum">PaletteBase</a> (the
+entry of the <a href="ntqwidget.html#palette-prop">palette</a> to set.
+<p> For most widgets the default suffices (<a href="ntqt.html#BackgroundMode-enum">PaletteBackground</a>,
+typically gray), but some need to use <a href="ntqt.html#BackgroundMode-enum">PaletteBase</a> (the
 background color for text output, typically white) or another
 role.
-<p> <a href="qlistbox.html">QListBox</a>, which is "sunken" and uses the base color to contrast
+<p> <a href="ntqlistbox.html">QListBox</a>, which is "sunken" and uses the base color to contrast
 with its environment, does this in its constructor:
 <p> <pre>
-    <a href="qwidget.html#setBackgroundMode">setBackgroundMode</a>( <a href="qt.html#BackgroundMode-enum">PaletteBase</a> );
+    <a href="ntqwidget.html#setBackgroundMode">setBackgroundMode</a>( <a href="ntqt.html#BackgroundMode-enum">PaletteBase</a> );
     </pre>
  
 <p> You will never need to set the background mode of a built-in
 widget in Qt, but you might consider setting it in your custom
-widgets, so that <a href="qwidget.html#setPaletteBackgroundColor">setPaletteBackgroundColor</a>() works as expected.
+widgets, so that <a href="ntqwidget.html#setPaletteBackgroundColor">setPaletteBackgroundColor</a>() works as expected.
 <p> Note that two of the BackgroundMode values make no sense for
-<a href="qwidget.html#setBackgroundMode">setBackgroundMode</a>(), namely <a href="qt.html#BackgroundMode-enum">FixedPixmap</a> and <a href="qt.html#BackgroundMode-enum">FixedColor</a>. You
-must call <a href="qwidget.html#setBackgroundPixmap">setBackgroundPixmap</a>() and setPaletteBackgroundColor()
+<a href="ntqwidget.html#setBackgroundMode">setBackgroundMode</a>(), namely <a href="ntqt.html#BackgroundMode-enum">FixedPixmap</a> and <a href="ntqt.html#BackgroundMode-enum">FixedColor</a>. You
+must call <a href="ntqwidget.html#setBackgroundPixmap">setBackgroundPixmap</a>() and setPaletteBackgroundColor()
 instead.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#setBackgroundMode">setBackgroundMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#backgroundMode">backgroundMode</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setBackgroundMode">setBackgroundMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#backgroundMode">backgroundMode</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::backgroundOrigin
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the origin of the widget's background.
 <p>The origin is either WidgetOrigin (the default), ParentOrigin,
 WindowOrigin or AncestorOrigin.
 <p> This only makes a difference if the widget has a background
-pixmap, in which case positioning matters. Using <a href="qwidget.html#BackgroundOrigin-enum">WindowOrigin</a>
+pixmap, in which case positioning matters. Using <a href="ntqwidget.html#BackgroundOrigin-enum">WindowOrigin</a>
 for several neighboring widgets makes the background blend
-together seamlessly. <a href="qwidget.html#BackgroundOrigin-enum">AncestorOrigin</a> allows blending backgrounds
+together seamlessly. <a href="ntqwidget.html#BackgroundOrigin-enum">AncestorOrigin</a> allows blending backgrounds
 seamlessly when an ancestor of the widget has an origin other than
-<a href="qwidget.html#BackgroundOrigin-enum">WindowOrigin</a>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#backgroundPixmap">backgroundPixmap</a>() and <a href="qwidget.html#backgroundMode-prop">backgroundMode</a>.
+<a href="ntqwidget.html#BackgroundOrigin-enum">WindowOrigin</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#backgroundPixmap">backgroundPixmap</a>() and <a href="ntqwidget.html#backgroundMode-prop">backgroundMode</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#setBackgroundOrigin">setBackgroundOrigin</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#backgroundOrigin">backgroundOrigin</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setBackgroundOrigin">setBackgroundOrigin</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#backgroundOrigin">backgroundOrigin</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::baseSize
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the base size of the widget.
 <p>The base size is used to calculate a proper widget size if the
-widget defines <a href="qwidget.html#sizeIncrement">sizeIncrement</a>().
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#sizeIncrement-prop">sizeIncrement</a>.
+widget defines <a href="ntqwidget.html#sizeIncrement">sizeIncrement</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#sizeIncrement-prop">sizeIncrement</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#setBaseSize">setBaseSize</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#baseSize">baseSize</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setBaseSize">setBaseSize</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#baseSize">baseSize</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::caption
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the window caption (title).
 <p>This property only makes sense for top-level widgets. If no
-caption has been set, the caption is <a href="qstring.html#QString-null">QString::null</a>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#icon-prop">icon</a> and <a href="qwidget.html#iconText-prop">iconText</a>.
+caption has been set, the caption is <a href="ntqstring.html#QString-null">QString::null</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#icon-prop">icon</a> and <a href="ntqwidget.html#iconText-prop">iconText</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#setCaption">setCaption</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#caption">caption</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setCaption">setCaption</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#caption">caption</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::childrenRect
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the bounding rectangle of the widget's children.
 <p>Hidden children are excluded.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#childrenRegion-prop">childrenRegion</a> and <a href="qwidget.html#geometry-prop">geometry</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#childrenRegion-prop">childrenRegion</a> and <a href="ntqwidget.html#geometry-prop">geometry</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#childrenRect">childrenRect</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#childrenRect">childrenRect</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::childrenRegion
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the combined region occupied by the widget's children.
 <p>Hidden children are excluded.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#childrenRect-prop">childrenRect</a> and <a href="qwidget.html#geometry-prop">geometry</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#childrenRect-prop">childrenRect</a> and <a href="ntqwidget.html#geometry-prop">geometry</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#childrenRegion">childrenRegion</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#childrenRegion">childrenRegion</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::colorGroup
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the current color group of the widget palette.
 <p>The color group is determined by the state of the widget. A
-disabled widget has the <a href="qpalette.html#disabled">QPalette::disabled</a>() color group, a widget
-with <a href="focus.html#keyboard-focus">keyboard focus</a> has the <a href="qpalette.html#active">QPalette::active</a>() color group, and an
-inactive widget has the <a href="qpalette.html#inactive">QPalette::inactive</a>() color group.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#palette-prop">palette</a>.
+disabled widget has the <a href="ntqpalette.html#disabled">QPalette::disabled</a>() color group, a widget
+with <a href="focus.html#keyboard-focus">keyboard focus</a> has the <a href="ntqpalette.html#active">QPalette::active</a>() color group, and an
+inactive widget has the <a href="ntqpalette.html#inactive">QPalette::inactive</a>() color group.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#palette-prop">palette</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#colorGroup">colorGroup</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#colorGroup">colorGroup</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::cursor
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the cursor shape for this widget.
 <p>The mouse cursor will assume this shape when it's over this
-widget. See the <a href="qt.html#CursorShape-enum">list of predefined cursor
+widget. See the <a href="ntqt.html#CursorShape-enum">list of predefined cursor
     objects</a> for a range of useful shapes.
 <p> An editor widget might use an I-beam cursor:
 <pre>
-        <a href="qwidget.html#setCursor">setCursor</a>( <a href="qt.html#CursorShape-enum">IbeamCursor</a> );
+        <a href="ntqwidget.html#setCursor">setCursor</a>( <a href="ntqt.html#CursorShape-enum">IbeamCursor</a> );
     </pre>
  
-<p> If no cursor has been set, or after a call to <a href="qwidget.html#unsetCursor">unsetCursor</a>(), the
+<p> If no cursor has been set, or after a call to <a href="ntqwidget.html#unsetCursor">unsetCursor</a>(), the
 parent's cursor is used. The function unsetCursor() has no effect
 on top-level widgets.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qapplication.html#setOverrideCursor">QApplication::setOverrideCursor</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqapplication.html#setOverrideCursor">QApplication::setOverrideCursor</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#setCursor">setCursor</a>(), get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#cursor">cursor</a>(), and reset this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#unsetCursor">unsetCursor</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setCursor">setCursor</a>(), get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#cursor">cursor</a>(), and reset this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#unsetCursor">unsetCursor</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::customWhatsThis
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the widget wants to handle What's This help manually.
-<p>The default implementation of <a href="qwidget.html#customWhatsThis">customWhatsThis</a>() returns FALSE,
+<p>The default implementation of <a href="ntqwidget.html#customWhatsThis">customWhatsThis</a>() returns FALSE,
 which means the widget will not receive any events in Whats This
 mode.
 <p> The widget may leave What's This mode by calling
-<a href="qwhatsthis.html#leaveWhatsThisMode">QWhatsThis::leaveWhatsThisMode</a>(), with or without actually
+<a href="ntqwhatsthis.html#leaveWhatsThisMode">QWhatsThis::leaveWhatsThisMode</a>(), with or without actually
 displaying any help text.
 <p> You can also reimplement customWhatsThis() if your widget is a
 "passive interactor" supposed to work under all circumstances.
 Simply don't call QWhatsThis::leaveWhatsThisMode() in that case.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwhatsthis.html#inWhatsThisMode">QWhatsThis::inWhatsThisMode</a>() and <a href="qwhatsthis.html#leaveWhatsThisMode">QWhatsThis::leaveWhatsThisMode</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwhatsthis.html#inWhatsThisMode">QWhatsThis::inWhatsThisMode</a>() and <a href="ntqwhatsthis.html#leaveWhatsThisMode">QWhatsThis::leaveWhatsThisMode</a>().
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#customWhatsThis">customWhatsThis</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#customWhatsThis">customWhatsThis</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::enabled
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the widget is enabled.
 <p>An enabled widget receives keyboard and mouse events; a disabled
 widget does not. In fact, an enabled widget only receives keyboard
@@ -4547,264 +4547,264 @@ events when it is in focus.
 <p> Some widgets display themselves differently when they are
 disabled. For example a button might draw its label grayed out. If
 your widget needs to know when it becomes enabled or disabled, you
-can reimplement the <a href="qwidget.html#enabledChange">enabledChange</a>() function.
+can reimplement the <a href="ntqwidget.html#enabledChange">enabledChange</a>() function.
 <p> Disabling a widget implicitly disables all its children. Enabling
 respectively enables all child widgets unless they have been
 explicitly disabled.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#enabled-prop">enabled</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#isEnabledTo">isEnabledTo</a>(), <a href="qkeyevent.html">QKeyEvent</a>, <a href="qmouseevent.html">QMouseEvent</a>, and <a href="qwidget.html#enabledChange">enabledChange</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#enabled-prop">enabled</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#isEnabledTo">isEnabledTo</a>(), <a href="qkeyevent.html">QKeyEvent</a>, <a href="qmouseevent.html">QMouseEvent</a>, and <a href="ntqwidget.html#enabledChange">enabledChange</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#isEnabled">isEnabled</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#isEnabled">isEnabled</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::focus
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether this widget (or its focus proxy) has the keyboard input focus.
 <p>Effectively equivalent to <tt>qApp-&gt;focusWidget() == this</tt>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#setFocus">setFocus</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#clearFocus">clearFocus</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#focusPolicy-prop">focusPolicy</a>, and <a href="qapplication.html#focusWidget">QApplication::focusWidget</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#setFocus">setFocus</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#clearFocus">clearFocus</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#focusPolicy-prop">focusPolicy</a>, and <a href="ntqapplication.html#focusWidget">QApplication::focusWidget</a>().
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#hasFocus">hasFocus</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#hasFocus">hasFocus</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::focusEnabled
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the widget accepts <a href="focus.html#keyboard-focus">keyboard focus</a>.
-<p>Keyboard focus is initially disabled (i.e. <a href="qwidget.html#focusPolicy">focusPolicy</a>() ==
-<a href="qwidget.html#FocusPolicy-enum">QWidget::NoFocus</a>).
+<p>Keyboard focus is initially disabled (i.e. <a href="ntqwidget.html#focusPolicy">focusPolicy</a>() ==
+<a href="ntqwidget.html#FocusPolicy-enum">QWidget::NoFocus</a>).
 <p> You must enable keyboard focus for a widget if it processes
 keyboard events. This is normally done from the widget's
-constructor. For instance, the <a href="qlineedit.html">QLineEdit</a> constructor calls
-<a href="qwidget.html#setFocusPolicy">setFocusPolicy</a>(QWidget::StrongFocus).
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#focusPolicy-prop">focusPolicy</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#focusInEvent">focusInEvent</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#focusOutEvent">focusOutEvent</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#keyPressEvent">keyPressEvent</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#keyReleaseEvent">keyReleaseEvent</a>(), and <a href="qwidget.html#enabled-prop">enabled</a>.
+constructor. For instance, the <a href="ntqlineedit.html">QLineEdit</a> constructor calls
+<a href="ntqwidget.html#setFocusPolicy">setFocusPolicy</a>(QWidget::StrongFocus).
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#focusPolicy-prop">focusPolicy</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#focusInEvent">focusInEvent</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#focusOutEvent">focusOutEvent</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#keyPressEvent">keyPressEvent</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#keyReleaseEvent">keyReleaseEvent</a>(), and <a href="ntqwidget.html#enabled-prop">enabled</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#isFocusEnabled">isFocusEnabled</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#isFocusEnabled">isFocusEnabled</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::focusPolicy
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the way the widget accepts <a href="focus.html#keyboard-focus">keyboard focus</a>.
-<p>The policy is <a href="qwidget.html#FocusPolicy-enum">QWidget::TabFocus</a> if the widget accepts keyboard
-focus by tabbing, <a href="qwidget.html#FocusPolicy-enum">QWidget::ClickFocus</a> if the widget accepts
-focus by clicking, <a href="qwidget.html#FocusPolicy-enum">QWidget::StrongFocus</a> if it accepts both, and
-<a href="qwidget.html#FocusPolicy-enum">QWidget::NoFocus</a> (the default) if it does not accept focus at
+<p>The policy is <a href="ntqwidget.html#FocusPolicy-enum">QWidget::TabFocus</a> if the widget accepts keyboard
+focus by tabbing, <a href="ntqwidget.html#FocusPolicy-enum">QWidget::ClickFocus</a> if the widget accepts
+focus by clicking, <a href="ntqwidget.html#FocusPolicy-enum">QWidget::StrongFocus</a> if it accepts both, and
+<a href="ntqwidget.html#FocusPolicy-enum">QWidget::NoFocus</a> (the default) if it does not accept focus at
 all.
 <p> You must enable keyboard focus for a widget if it processes
 keyboard events. This is normally done from the widget's
-constructor. For instance, the <a href="qlineedit.html">QLineEdit</a> constructor calls
-<a href="qwidget.html#setFocusPolicy">setFocusPolicy</a>(QWidget::StrongFocus).
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#focusEnabled-prop">focusEnabled</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#focusInEvent">focusInEvent</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#focusOutEvent">focusOutEvent</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#keyPressEvent">keyPressEvent</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#keyReleaseEvent">keyReleaseEvent</a>(), and <a href="qwidget.html#enabled-prop">enabled</a>.
+constructor. For instance, the <a href="ntqlineedit.html">QLineEdit</a> constructor calls
+<a href="ntqwidget.html#setFocusPolicy">setFocusPolicy</a>(QWidget::StrongFocus).
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#focusEnabled-prop">focusEnabled</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#focusInEvent">focusInEvent</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#focusOutEvent">focusOutEvent</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#keyPressEvent">keyPressEvent</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#keyReleaseEvent">keyReleaseEvent</a>(), and <a href="ntqwidget.html#enabled-prop">enabled</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#setFocusPolicy">setFocusPolicy</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#focusPolicy">focusPolicy</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setFocusPolicy">setFocusPolicy</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#focusPolicy">focusPolicy</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::font
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the font currently set for the widget.
-<p>The <a href="qwidget.html#fontInfo">fontInfo</a>() function reports the actual font that is being used
+<p>The <a href="ntqwidget.html#fontInfo">fontInfo</a>() function reports the actual font that is being used
 by the widget.
-<p> As long as no special font has been set, or after <a href="qwidget.html#unsetFont">unsetFont</a>() is
+<p> As long as no special font has been set, or after <a href="ntqwidget.html#unsetFont">unsetFont</a>() is
 called, this is either a special font for the widget class, the
 parent's font or (if this widget is a top level widget), the
 default application font.
 <p> This code fragment sets a 12 point helvetica bold font:
 <pre>
-    <a href="qfont.html">QFont</a> f( "Helvetica", 12, QFont::Bold );
-    <a href="qwidget.html#setFont">setFont</a>( f );
+    <a href="ntqfont.html">QFont</a> f( "Helvetica", 12, QFont::Bold );
+    <a href="ntqwidget.html#setFont">setFont</a>( f );
     </pre>
  
-<p> In addition to setting the font, <a href="qwidget.html#setFont">setFont</a>() informs all children
+<p> In addition to setting the font, <a href="ntqwidget.html#setFont">setFont</a>() informs all children
 about the change.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#fontChange">fontChange</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#fontInfo">fontInfo</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#fontMetrics">fontMetrics</a>(), and <a href="qwidget.html#ownFont-prop">ownFont</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#fontChange">fontChange</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#fontInfo">fontInfo</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#fontMetrics">fontMetrics</a>(), and <a href="ntqwidget.html#ownFont-prop">ownFont</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#setFont">setFont</a>(), get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#font">font</a>(), and reset this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#unsetFont">unsetFont</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setFont">setFont</a>(), get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#font">font</a>(), and reset this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#unsetFont">unsetFont</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::frameGeometry
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds geometry of the widget relative to its parent including any window frame.
 <p>See the <a href="geometry.html">Window Geometry documentation</a>
 for an overview of geometry issues with top-level widgets.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#geometry-prop">geometry</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#x-prop">x</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#y-prop">y</a>, and <a href="qwidget.html#pos-prop">pos</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#geometry-prop">geometry</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#x-prop">x</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#y-prop">y</a>, and <a href="ntqwidget.html#pos-prop">pos</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#frameGeometry">frameGeometry</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#frameGeometry">frameGeometry</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::frameSize
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the size of the widget including any window frame.
 <p>
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#frameSize">frameSize</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#frameSize">frameSize</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::fullScreen
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the widget is full screen.
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#isFullScreen">isFullScreen</a>().
-<p><p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#windowState">windowState</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#minimized-prop">minimized</a>, and <a href="qwidget.html#maximized-prop">maximized</a>.
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#isFullScreen">isFullScreen</a>().
+<p><p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#windowState">windowState</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#minimized-prop">minimized</a>, and <a href="ntqwidget.html#maximized-prop">maximized</a>.
 
 
 
 
     QWidget::geometry
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the geometry of the widget relative to its parent and excluding the window frame.
 <p>When changing the geometry, the widget, if visible, receives a
-move event (<a href="qwidget.html#moveEvent">moveEvent</a>()) and/or a resize event (<a href="qwidget.html#resizeEvent">resizeEvent</a>())
+move event (<a href="ntqwidget.html#moveEvent">moveEvent</a>()) and/or a resize event (<a href="ntqwidget.html#resizeEvent">resizeEvent</a>())
 immediately. If the widget is not currently visible, it is
 guaranteed to receive appropriate events before it is shown.
 <p> The size component is adjusted if it lies outside the range
-defined by <a href="qwidget.html#minimumSize">minimumSize</a>() and <a href="qwidget.html#maximumSize">maximumSize</a>().
-<p> <a href="qwidget.html#setGeometry">setGeometry</a>() is virtual, and all other overloaded setGeometry()
+defined by <a href="ntqwidget.html#minimumSize">minimumSize</a>() and <a href="ntqwidget.html#maximumSize">maximumSize</a>().
+<p> <a href="ntqwidget.html#setGeometry">setGeometry</a>() is virtual, and all other overloaded setGeometry()
 implementations in Qt call it.
 <p> <b>Warning:</b> Calling setGeometry() inside resizeEvent() or moveEvent()
 can lead to infinite recursion.
 <p> See the <a href="geometry.html">Window Geometry documentation</a>
 for an overview of top-level widget geometry.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#frameGeometry-prop">frameGeometry</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#rect-prop">rect</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#pos-prop">pos</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#size-prop">size</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#moveEvent">moveEvent</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#resizeEvent">resizeEvent</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#minimumSize-prop">minimumSize</a>, and <a href="qwidget.html#maximumSize-prop">maximumSize</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#frameGeometry-prop">frameGeometry</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#rect-prop">rect</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#pos-prop">pos</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#size-prop">size</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#moveEvent">moveEvent</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#resizeEvent">resizeEvent</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#minimumSize-prop">minimumSize</a>, and <a href="ntqwidget.html#maximumSize-prop">maximumSize</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#setGeometry">setGeometry</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#geometry">geometry</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setGeometry">setGeometry</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#geometry">geometry</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::height
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the height of the widget excluding any window frame.
 <p>See the <a href="geometry.html">Window Geometry documentation</a>
 for an overview of top-level widget geometry.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#geometry-prop">geometry</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#width-prop">width</a>, and <a href="qwidget.html#size-prop">size</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#geometry-prop">geometry</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#width-prop">width</a>, and <a href="ntqwidget.html#size-prop">size</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#height">height</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#height">height</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::hidden
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the widget is explicitly hidden.
 <p>If FALSE, the widget is visible or would become visible if all its
 ancestors became visible.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#hide">hide</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#show">show</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#visible-prop">visible</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#isVisibleTo">isVisibleTo</a>(), and <a href="qwidget.html#shown-prop">shown</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#hide">hide</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#show">show</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#visible-prop">visible</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#isVisibleTo">isVisibleTo</a>(), and <a href="ntqwidget.html#shown-prop">shown</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#setHidden">setHidden</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#isHidden">isHidden</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setHidden">setHidden</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#isHidden">isHidden</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::icon
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the widget's icon.
 <p>This property only makes sense for top-level widgets. If no icon
-has been set, <a href="qwidget.html#icon">icon</a>() returns 0.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#iconText-prop">iconText</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#caption-prop">caption</a>, and <a href="appicon.html">Setting the Application Icon</a>.
+has been set, <a href="ntqwidget.html#icon">icon</a>() returns 0.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#iconText-prop">iconText</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#caption-prop">caption</a>, and <a href="appicon.html">Setting the Application Icon</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#setIcon">setIcon</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#icon">icon</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setIcon">setIcon</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#icon">icon</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::iconText
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the widget's icon text.
 <p>This property only makes sense for top-level widgets. If no icon
-text has been set, this functions returns <a href="qstring.html#QString-null">QString::null</a>.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#icon-prop">icon</a> and <a href="qwidget.html#caption-prop">caption</a>.
+text has been set, this functions returns <a href="ntqstring.html#QString-null">QString::null</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#icon-prop">icon</a> and <a href="ntqwidget.html#caption-prop">caption</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#setIconText">setIconText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#iconText">iconText</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setIconText">setIconText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#iconText">iconText</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::inputMethodEnabled
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds enables or disables the use of input methods for this widget.
 <p>Most Widgets (as eg. buttons) that do not handle text input should have
 the input method disabled if they have focus. This is the default.
 <p> If a widget handles text input it should set this property to TRUE.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#setInputMethodEnabled">setInputMethodEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#isInputMethodEnabled">isInputMethodEnabled</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setInputMethodEnabled">setInputMethodEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#isInputMethodEnabled">isInputMethodEnabled</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::isActiveWindow
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether this widget is the active window.
 <p>The active window is the window that contains the widget
 that has <a href="focus.html#keyboard-focus">keyboard focus</a>.
 <p> When popup windows are visible, this property is TRUE for both the
 active window <em>and</em> for the popup.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#setActiveWindow">setActiveWindow</a>() and <a href="qapplication.html#activeWindow">QApplication::activeWindow</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#setActiveWindow">setActiveWindow</a>() and <a href="ntqapplication.html#activeWindow">QApplication::activeWindow</a>().
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#isActiveWindow">isActiveWindow</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#isActiveWindow">isActiveWindow</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::isDesktop
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the widget is a desktop widget, i.e. represents the desktop.
 <p>A desktop widget is also a top-level widget.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#isTopLevel-prop">isTopLevel</a> and <a href="qapplication.html#desktop">QApplication::desktop</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#isTopLevel-prop">isTopLevel</a> and <a href="ntqapplication.html#desktop">QApplication::desktop</a>().
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#isDesktop">isDesktop</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#isDesktop">isDesktop</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::isDialog
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the widget is a dialog widget.
 <p>A dialog widget is a secondary top-level widget, i.e. a top-level
 widget with a parent.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#isTopLevel-prop">isTopLevel</a> and <a href="qdialog.html">QDialog</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#isTopLevel-prop">isTopLevel</a> and <a href="ntqdialog.html">QDialog</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#isDialog">isDialog</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#isDialog">isDialog</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::isModal
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the widget is a modal widget.
 <p>This property only makes sense for top-level widgets. A modal
 widget prevents widgets in all other top-level widgets from
 getting any input.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#isTopLevel-prop">isTopLevel</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#isDialog-prop">isDialog</a>, and <a href="qdialog.html">QDialog</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#isTopLevel-prop">isTopLevel</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#isDialog-prop">isDialog</a>, and <a href="ntqdialog.html">QDialog</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#isModal">isModal</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#isModal">isModal</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::isPopup
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the widget is a popup widget.
-<p>A popup widget is created by specifying the <a href="qt.html#WidgetFlags">widget flag</a> <a href="qt.html#WidgetFlags-enum">WType_Popup</a> to the widget constructor. A popup widget is also a
+<p>A popup widget is created by specifying the <a href="ntqt.html#WidgetFlags">widget flag</a> <a href="ntqt.html#WidgetFlags-enum">WType_Popup</a> to the widget constructor. A popup widget is also a
 top-level widget.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#isTopLevel-prop">isTopLevel</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#isTopLevel-prop">isTopLevel</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#isPopup">isPopup</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#isPopup">isPopup</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::isTopLevel
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the widget is a top-level widget.
 <p>A top-level widget is a widget which usually has a frame and a
-<a href="qwidget.html#caption-prop">caption (title)</a>. <a href="qwidget.html#isPopup">Popup</a> and <a href="qwidget.html#isDesktop">desktop</a> widgets are also top-level widgets.
-<p> A top-level widget can have a <a href="qwidget.html#parentWidget">parent
+<a href="ntqwidget.html#caption-prop">caption (title)</a>. <a href="ntqwidget.html#isPopup">Popup</a> and <a href="ntqwidget.html#isDesktop">desktop</a> widgets are also top-level widgets.
+<p> A top-level widget can have a <a href="ntqwidget.html#parentWidget">parent
     widget</a>. It will then be grouped with its parent and deleted
 when the parent is deleted, minimized when the parent is minimized
 etc. If supported by the window manager, it will also have a
 common taskbar entry with its parent.
-<p> <a href="qdialog.html">QDialog</a> and <a href="qmainwindow.html">QMainWindow</a> widgets are by default top-level, even if
+<p> <a href="ntqdialog.html">QDialog</a> and <a href="ntqmainwindow.html">QMainWindow</a> widgets are by default top-level, even if
 a parent widget is specified in the constructor. This behavior is
-specified by the <a href="qt.html#WidgetFlags-enum">WType_TopLevel</a> widget flag.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#topLevelWidget">topLevelWidget</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#isDialog-prop">isDialog</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#isModal-prop">isModal</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#isPopup-prop">isPopup</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#isDesktop-prop">isDesktop</a>, and <a href="qwidget.html#parentWidget">parentWidget</a>().
+specified by the <a href="ntqt.html#WidgetFlags-enum">WType_TopLevel</a> widget flag.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#topLevelWidget">topLevelWidget</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#isDialog-prop">isDialog</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#isModal-prop">isModal</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#isPopup-prop">isPopup</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#isDesktop-prop">isDesktop</a>, and <a href="ntqwidget.html#parentWidget">parentWidget</a>().
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#isTopLevel">isTopLevel</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#isTopLevel">isTopLevel</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::maximized
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether this widget is maximized.
 <p>This property is only relevant for top-level widgets.
 <p> Note that due to limitations in some window-systems, this does not
@@ -4812,400 +4812,400 @@ always report the expected results (e.g. if the user on X11
 maximizes the window via the window manager, Qt has no way of
 distinguishing this from any other resize). This is expected to
 improve as window manager protocols evolve.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#windowState">windowState</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#showMaximized">showMaximized</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#visible-prop">visible</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#show">show</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#hide">hide</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#showNormal">showNormal</a>(), and <a href="qwidget.html#minimized-prop">minimized</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#windowState">windowState</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#showMaximized">showMaximized</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#visible-prop">visible</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#show">show</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#hide">hide</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#showNormal">showNormal</a>(), and <a href="ntqwidget.html#minimized-prop">minimized</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#isMaximized">isMaximized</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#isMaximized">isMaximized</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::maximumHeight
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the widget's maximum height.
-<p>This property corresponds to <a href="qwidget.html#maximumSize">maximumSize</a>().<a href="qwidget.html#height">height</a>().
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#maximumSize-prop">maximumSize</a> and <a href="qwidget.html#maximumWidth-prop">maximumWidth</a>.
+<p>This property corresponds to <a href="ntqwidget.html#maximumSize">maximumSize</a>().<a href="ntqwidget.html#height">height</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#maximumSize-prop">maximumSize</a> and <a href="ntqwidget.html#maximumWidth-prop">maximumWidth</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#setMaximumHeight">setMaximumHeight</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#maximumHeight">maximumHeight</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setMaximumHeight">setMaximumHeight</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#maximumHeight">maximumHeight</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::maximumSize
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the widget's maximum size.
 <p>The widget cannot be resized to a larger size than the maximum
 widget size.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#maximumWidth-prop">maximumWidth</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#maximumHeight-prop">maximumHeight</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#maximumSize-prop">maximumSize</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#minimumSize-prop">minimumSize</a>, and <a href="qwidget.html#sizeIncrement-prop">sizeIncrement</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#maximumWidth-prop">maximumWidth</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#maximumHeight-prop">maximumHeight</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#maximumSize-prop">maximumSize</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#minimumSize-prop">minimumSize</a>, and <a href="ntqwidget.html#sizeIncrement-prop">sizeIncrement</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#setMaximumSize">setMaximumSize</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#maximumSize">maximumSize</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setMaximumSize">setMaximumSize</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#maximumSize">maximumSize</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::maximumWidth
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the widget's maximum width.
-<p>This property corresponds to <a href="qwidget.html#maximumSize">maximumSize</a>().<a href="qwidget.html#width">width</a>().
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#maximumSize-prop">maximumSize</a> and <a href="qwidget.html#maximumHeight-prop">maximumHeight</a>.
+<p>This property corresponds to <a href="ntqwidget.html#maximumSize">maximumSize</a>().<a href="ntqwidget.html#width">width</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#maximumSize-prop">maximumSize</a> and <a href="ntqwidget.html#maximumHeight-prop">maximumHeight</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#setMaximumWidth">setMaximumWidth</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#maximumWidth">maximumWidth</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setMaximumWidth">setMaximumWidth</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#maximumWidth">maximumWidth</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::microFocusHint
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the currently set micro focus hint for this widget.
-<p>See the documentation of <a href="qwidget.html#setMicroFocusHint">setMicroFocusHint</a>() for more information.
+<p>See the documentation of <a href="ntqwidget.html#setMicroFocusHint">setMicroFocusHint</a>() for more information.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#microFocusHint">microFocusHint</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#microFocusHint">microFocusHint</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::minimized
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether this widget is minimized (iconified).
 <p>This property is only relevant for top-level widgets.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#showMinimized">showMinimized</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#visible-prop">visible</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#show">show</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#hide">hide</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#showNormal">showNormal</a>(), and <a href="qwidget.html#maximized-prop">maximized</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#showMinimized">showMinimized</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#visible-prop">visible</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#show">show</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#hide">hide</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#showNormal">showNormal</a>(), and <a href="ntqwidget.html#maximized-prop">maximized</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#isMinimized">isMinimized</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#isMinimized">isMinimized</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::minimumHeight
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the widget's minimum height.
-<p>This property corresponds to <a href="qwidget.html#minimumSize">minimumSize</a>().<a href="qwidget.html#height">height</a>().
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#minimumSize-prop">minimumSize</a> and <a href="qwidget.html#minimumWidth-prop">minimumWidth</a>.
+<p>This property corresponds to <a href="ntqwidget.html#minimumSize">minimumSize</a>().<a href="ntqwidget.html#height">height</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#minimumSize-prop">minimumSize</a> and <a href="ntqwidget.html#minimumWidth-prop">minimumWidth</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#setMinimumHeight">setMinimumHeight</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#minimumHeight">minimumHeight</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setMinimumHeight">setMinimumHeight</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#minimumHeight">minimumHeight</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::minimumSize
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the widget's minimum size.
 <p>The widget cannot be resized to a smaller size than the minimum
 widget size. The widget's size is forced to the minimum size if
 the current size is smaller.
 <p> If you use a layout inside the widget, the minimum size will be
-set by the layout and not by <a href="qwidget.html#setMinimumSize">setMinimumSize</a>(), unless you set the
+set by the layout and not by <a href="ntqwidget.html#setMinimumSize">setMinimumSize</a>(), unless you set the
 layout's resize mode to QLayout::FreeResize.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#minimumWidth-prop">minimumWidth</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#minimumHeight-prop">minimumHeight</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#maximumSize-prop">maximumSize</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#sizeIncrement-prop">sizeIncrement</a>, and <a href="qlayout.html#resizeMode-prop">QLayout::resizeMode</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#minimumWidth-prop">minimumWidth</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#minimumHeight-prop">minimumHeight</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#maximumSize-prop">maximumSize</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#sizeIncrement-prop">sizeIncrement</a>, and <a href="ntqlayout.html#resizeMode-prop">QLayout::resizeMode</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#setMinimumSize">setMinimumSize</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#minimumSize">minimumSize</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setMinimumSize">setMinimumSize</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#minimumSize">minimumSize</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::minimumSizeHint
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the recommended minimum size for the widget.
 <p>If the value of this property is an invalid size, no minimum size
 is recommended.
-<p> The default implementation of <a href="qwidget.html#minimumSizeHint">minimumSizeHint</a>() returns an invalid
+<p> The default implementation of <a href="ntqwidget.html#minimumSizeHint">minimumSizeHint</a>() returns an invalid
 size if there is no layout for this widget, and returns the
 layout's minimum size otherwise. Most built-in widgets reimplement
 minimumSizeHint().
-<p> <a href="qlayout.html">QLayout</a> will never resize a widget to a size smaller than
+<p> <a href="ntqlayout.html">QLayout</a> will never resize a widget to a size smaller than
 minimumSizeHint.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qsize.html#isValid">QSize::isValid</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#size-prop">size</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#minimumSize-prop">minimumSize</a>, and <a href="qwidget.html#sizePolicy-prop">sizePolicy</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqsize.html#isValid">QSize::isValid</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#size-prop">size</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#minimumSize-prop">minimumSize</a>, and <a href="ntqwidget.html#sizePolicy-prop">sizePolicy</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#minimumSizeHint">minimumSizeHint</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#minimumSizeHint">minimumSizeHint</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::minimumWidth
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the widget's minimum width.
-<p>This property corresponds to <a href="qwidget.html#minimumSize">minimumSize</a>().<a href="qwidget.html#width">width</a>().
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#minimumSize-prop">minimumSize</a> and <a href="qwidget.html#minimumHeight-prop">minimumHeight</a>.
+<p>This property corresponds to <a href="ntqwidget.html#minimumSize">minimumSize</a>().<a href="ntqwidget.html#width">width</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#minimumSize-prop">minimumSize</a> and <a href="ntqwidget.html#minimumHeight-prop">minimumHeight</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#setMinimumWidth">setMinimumWidth</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#minimumWidth">minimumWidth</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setMinimumWidth">setMinimumWidth</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#minimumWidth">minimumWidth</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::mouseTracking
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether mouse tracking is enabled for the widget.
 <p>If mouse tracking is disabled (the default), the widget only
 receives mouse move events when at least one mouse button is
 pressed while the mouse is being moved.
 <p> If mouse tracking is enabled, the widget receives mouse move
 events even if no buttons are pressed.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#mouseMoveEvent">mouseMoveEvent</a>() and <a href="qapplication.html#setGlobalMouseTracking">QApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#mouseMoveEvent">mouseMoveEvent</a>() and <a href="ntqapplication.html#setGlobalMouseTracking">QApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#setMouseTracking">setMouseTracking</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#hasMouseTracking">hasMouseTracking</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setMouseTracking">setMouseTracking</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#hasMouseTracking">hasMouseTracking</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::ownCursor
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the widget uses its own cursor.
 <p>If FALSE, the widget uses its parent widget's cursor.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#cursor-prop">cursor</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#cursor-prop">cursor</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#ownCursor">ownCursor</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#ownCursor">ownCursor</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::ownFont
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the widget uses its own font.
 <p>If FALSE, the widget uses its parent widget's font.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#font-prop">font</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#font-prop">font</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#ownFont">ownFont</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#ownFont">ownFont</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::ownPalette
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the widget uses its own palette.
 <p>If FALSE, the widget uses its parent widget's palette.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#palette-prop">palette</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#palette-prop">palette</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#ownPalette">ownPalette</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#ownPalette">ownPalette</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::palette
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the widget's palette.
-<p>As long as no special palette has been set, or after <a href="qwidget.html#unsetPalette">unsetPalette</a>()
+<p>As long as no special palette has been set, or after <a href="ntqwidget.html#unsetPalette">unsetPalette</a>()
 has been called, this is either a special palette for the widget
 class, the parent's palette or (if this widget is a top level
 widget), the default application palette.
 <p> Instead of defining an entirely new palette, you can also use the
-<a href="qwidget.html#paletteBackgroundColor-prop">paletteBackgroundColor</a>,
-<a href="qwidget.html#paletteBackgroundPixmap-prop">paletteBackgroundPixmap</a> and
-<a href="qwidget.html#paletteForegroundColor-prop">paletteForegroundColor</a>
+<a href="ntqwidget.html#paletteBackgroundColor-prop">paletteBackgroundColor</a>,
+<a href="ntqwidget.html#paletteBackgroundPixmap-prop">paletteBackgroundPixmap</a> and
+<a href="ntqwidget.html#paletteForegroundColor-prop">paletteForegroundColor</a>
 convenience properties to change a widget's
 background and foreground appearance only.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#ownPalette-prop">ownPalette</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#colorGroup-prop">colorGroup</a>, and <a href="qapplication.html#palette">QApplication::palette</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#ownPalette-prop">ownPalette</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#colorGroup-prop">colorGroup</a>, and <a href="ntqapplication.html#palette">QApplication::palette</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#setPalette">setPalette</a>(), get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#palette">palette</a>(), and reset this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#unsetPalette">unsetPalette</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setPalette">setPalette</a>(), get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#palette">palette</a>(), and reset this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#unsetPalette">unsetPalette</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::paletteBackgroundColor
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the background color of the widget.
 <p>The palette background color is usually set implicitly by
-<a href="qwidget.html#setBackgroundMode">setBackgroundMode</a>(), although it can also be set explicitly by
-<a href="qwidget.html#setPaletteBackgroundColor">setPaletteBackgroundColor</a>(). setPaletteBackgroundColor() is a
-convenience function that creates and sets a modified <a href="qpalette.html">QPalette</a>
-with <a href="qwidget.html#setPalette">setPalette</a>(). The palette is modified according to the
+<a href="ntqwidget.html#setBackgroundMode">setBackgroundMode</a>(), although it can also be set explicitly by
+<a href="ntqwidget.html#setPaletteBackgroundColor">setPaletteBackgroundColor</a>(). setPaletteBackgroundColor() is a
+convenience function that creates and sets a modified <a href="ntqpalette.html">QPalette</a>
+with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setPalette">setPalette</a>(). The palette is modified according to the
 widget's background mode. For example, if the background mode is
-<a href="qt.html#BackgroundMode-enum">PaletteButton</a> the color used for the palette's <a href="qcolorgroup.html#ColorRole-enum">QColorGroup::Button</a> color entry is set.
+<a href="ntqt.html#BackgroundMode-enum">PaletteButton</a> the color used for the palette's <a href="qcolorgroup.html#ColorRole-enum">QColorGroup::Button</a> color entry is set.
 <p> If there is a background pixmap (set using
-<a href="qwidget.html#setPaletteBackgroundPixmap">setPaletteBackgroundPixmap</a>()), then the return value of this
+<a href="ntqwidget.html#setPaletteBackgroundPixmap">setPaletteBackgroundPixmap</a>()), then the return value of this
 function is indeterminate.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#paletteBackgroundPixmap-prop">paletteBackgroundPixmap</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#paletteForegroundColor-prop">paletteForegroundColor</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#palette-prop">palette</a>, and <a href="qwidget.html#colorGroup-prop">colorGroup</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#paletteBackgroundPixmap-prop">paletteBackgroundPixmap</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#paletteForegroundColor-prop">paletteForegroundColor</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#palette-prop">palette</a>, and <a href="ntqwidget.html#colorGroup-prop">colorGroup</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#setPaletteBackgroundColor">setPaletteBackgroundColor</a>(), get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#paletteBackgroundColor">paletteBackgroundColor</a>(), and reset this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#unsetPalette">unsetPalette</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setPaletteBackgroundColor">setPaletteBackgroundColor</a>(), get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#paletteBackgroundColor">paletteBackgroundColor</a>(), and reset this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#unsetPalette">unsetPalette</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::paletteBackgroundPixmap
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the background pixmap of the widget.
 <p>The palette background pixmap is usually set implicitly by
-<a href="qwidget.html#setBackgroundMode">setBackgroundMode</a>(), although it can also be set explicitly by
-<a href="qwidget.html#setPaletteBackgroundPixmap">setPaletteBackgroundPixmap</a>(). setPaletteBackgroundPixmap() is a
-convenience function that creates and sets a modified <a href="qpalette.html">QPalette</a>
-with <a href="qwidget.html#setPalette">setPalette</a>(). The palette is modified according to the
+<a href="ntqwidget.html#setBackgroundMode">setBackgroundMode</a>(), although it can also be set explicitly by
+<a href="ntqwidget.html#setPaletteBackgroundPixmap">setPaletteBackgroundPixmap</a>(). setPaletteBackgroundPixmap() is a
+convenience function that creates and sets a modified <a href="ntqpalette.html">QPalette</a>
+with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setPalette">setPalette</a>(). The palette is modified according to the
 widget's background mode. For example, if the background mode is
-<a href="qt.html#BackgroundMode-enum">PaletteButton</a> the pixmap used for the palette's
+<a href="ntqt.html#BackgroundMode-enum">PaletteButton</a> the pixmap used for the palette's
 <a href="qcolorgroup.html#ColorRole-enum">QColorGroup::Button</a> color entry is set.
 <p> If there is a plain background color (set using
-<a href="qwidget.html#setPaletteBackgroundColor">setPaletteBackgroundColor</a>()), then this function returns 0.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#paletteBackgroundColor-prop">paletteBackgroundColor</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#paletteForegroundColor-prop">paletteForegroundColor</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#palette-prop">palette</a>, and <a href="qwidget.html#colorGroup-prop">colorGroup</a>.
+<a href="ntqwidget.html#setPaletteBackgroundColor">setPaletteBackgroundColor</a>()), then this function returns 0.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#paletteBackgroundColor-prop">paletteBackgroundColor</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#paletteForegroundColor-prop">paletteForegroundColor</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#palette-prop">palette</a>, and <a href="ntqwidget.html#colorGroup-prop">colorGroup</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#setPaletteBackgroundPixmap">setPaletteBackgroundPixmap</a>(), get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#paletteBackgroundPixmap">paletteBackgroundPixmap</a>(), and reset this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#unsetPalette">unsetPalette</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setPaletteBackgroundPixmap">setPaletteBackgroundPixmap</a>(), get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#paletteBackgroundPixmap">paletteBackgroundPixmap</a>(), and reset this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#unsetPalette">unsetPalette</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::paletteForegroundColor
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the foreground color of the widget.
 <p>setPaletteForegroundColor() is a convenience function that creates
-and sets a modified <a href="qpalette.html">QPalette</a> with <a href="qwidget.html#setPalette">setPalette</a>(). The palette is
+and sets a modified <a href="ntqpalette.html">QPalette</a> with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setPalette">setPalette</a>(). The palette is
 modified according to the widget's <em>background mode</em>. For
-example, if the background mode is <a href="qt.html#BackgroundMode-enum">PaletteButton</a> the palette entry
+example, if the background mode is <a href="ntqt.html#BackgroundMode-enum">PaletteButton</a> the palette entry
 <a href="qcolorgroup.html#ColorRole-enum">QColorGroup::ButtonText</a> is set to color.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#palette-prop">palette</a>, <a href="qapplication.html#setPalette">QApplication::setPalette</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#backgroundMode-prop">backgroundMode</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#foregroundColor">foregroundColor</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#backgroundMode-prop">backgroundMode</a>, and <a href="qwidget.html#setEraseColor">setEraseColor</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#palette-prop">palette</a>, <a href="ntqapplication.html#setPalette">QApplication::setPalette</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#backgroundMode-prop">backgroundMode</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#foregroundColor">foregroundColor</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#backgroundMode-prop">backgroundMode</a>, and <a href="ntqwidget.html#setEraseColor">setEraseColor</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#setPaletteForegroundColor">setPaletteForegroundColor</a>(), get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#paletteForegroundColor">paletteForegroundColor</a>(), and reset this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#unsetPalette">unsetPalette</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setPaletteForegroundColor">setPaletteForegroundColor</a>(), get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#paletteForegroundColor">paletteForegroundColor</a>(), and reset this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#unsetPalette">unsetPalette</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::pos
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the position of the widget within its parent widget.
 <p>If the widget is a top-level widget, the position is that of the
 widget on the desktop, including its frame.
 <p> When changing the position, the widget, if visible, receives a
-move event (<a href="qwidget.html#moveEvent">moveEvent</a>()) immediately. If the widget is not
+move event (<a href="ntqwidget.html#moveEvent">moveEvent</a>()) immediately. If the widget is not
 currently visible, it is guaranteed to receive an event before it
 is shown.
-<p> <a href="qwidget.html#move">move</a>() is virtual, and all other overloaded move() implementations
+<p> <a href="ntqwidget.html#move">move</a>() is virtual, and all other overloaded move() implementations
 in Qt call it.
-<p> <b>Warning:</b> Calling move() or <a href="qwidget.html#setGeometry">setGeometry</a>() inside moveEvent() can
+<p> <b>Warning:</b> Calling move() or <a href="ntqwidget.html#setGeometry">setGeometry</a>() inside moveEvent() can
 lead to infinite recursion.
 <p> See the <a href="geometry.html">Window Geometry documentation</a>
 for an overview of top-level widget geometry.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#frameGeometry-prop">frameGeometry</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#size-prop">size</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#x-prop">x</a>, and <a href="qwidget.html#y-prop">y</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#frameGeometry-prop">frameGeometry</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#size-prop">size</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#x-prop">x</a>, and <a href="ntqwidget.html#y-prop">y</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#move">move</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#pos">pos</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#move">move</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#pos">pos</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::rect
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the internal geometry of the widget excluding any window frame.
-<p>The rect property equals <a href="qrect.html">QRect</a>(0, 0, <a href="qwidget.html#width">width</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#height">height</a>()).
+<p>The rect property equals <a href="ntqrect.html">QRect</a>(0, 0, <a href="ntqwidget.html#width">width</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#height">height</a>()).
 <p> See the <a href="geometry.html">Window Geometry documentation</a>
 for an overview of top-level widget geometry.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#size-prop">size</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#size-prop">size</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#rect">rect</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#rect">rect</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::shown
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the widget is shown.
 <p>If TRUE, the widget is visible or would become visible if all its
 ancestors became visible.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#hide">hide</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#show">show</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#visible-prop">visible</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#isVisibleTo">isVisibleTo</a>(), and <a href="qwidget.html#hidden-prop">hidden</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#hide">hide</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#show">show</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#visible-prop">visible</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#isVisibleTo">isVisibleTo</a>(), and <a href="ntqwidget.html#hidden-prop">hidden</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#setShown">setShown</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#isShown">isShown</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setShown">setShown</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#isShown">isShown</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::size
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the size of the widget excluding any window frame.
 <p>When resizing, the widget, if visible, receives a resize event
-(<a href="qwidget.html#resizeEvent">resizeEvent</a>()) immediately. If the widget is not currently
+(<a href="ntqwidget.html#resizeEvent">resizeEvent</a>()) immediately. If the widget is not currently
 visible, it is guaranteed to receive an event before it is shown.
 <p> The size is adjusted if it lies outside the range defined by
-<a href="qwidget.html#minimumSize">minimumSize</a>() and <a href="qwidget.html#maximumSize">maximumSize</a>(). Furthermore, the size is always
-at least <a href="qsize.html">QSize</a>(1, 1). For toplevel widgets, the minimum size
+<a href="ntqwidget.html#minimumSize">minimumSize</a>() and <a href="ntqwidget.html#maximumSize">maximumSize</a>(). Furthermore, the size is always
+at least <a href="ntqsize.html">QSize</a>(1, 1). For toplevel widgets, the minimum size
 might be larger, depending on the window manager.
 <p> If you want a top-level window to have a fixed size, call
 setResizeMode( QLayout::FreeResize ) on its layout.
-<p> <a href="qwidget.html#resize">resize</a>() is virtual, and all other overloaded resize()
+<p> <a href="ntqwidget.html#resize">resize</a>() is virtual, and all other overloaded resize()
 implementations in Qt call it.
-<p> <b>Warning:</b> Calling resize() or <a href="qwidget.html#setGeometry">setGeometry</a>() inside resizeEvent() can
+<p> <b>Warning:</b> Calling resize() or <a href="ntqwidget.html#setGeometry">setGeometry</a>() inside resizeEvent() can
 lead to infinite recursion.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#pos-prop">pos</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#geometry-prop">geometry</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#minimumSize-prop">minimumSize</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#maximumSize-prop">maximumSize</a>, and <a href="qwidget.html#resizeEvent">resizeEvent</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#pos-prop">pos</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#geometry-prop">geometry</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#minimumSize-prop">minimumSize</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#maximumSize-prop">maximumSize</a>, and <a href="ntqwidget.html#resizeEvent">resizeEvent</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#resize">resize</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#size">size</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#resize">resize</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#size">size</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::sizeHint
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the recommended size for the widget.
 <p>If the value of this property is an invalid size, no size is
 recommended.
-<p> The default implementation of <a href="qwidget.html#sizeHint">sizeHint</a>() returns an invalid size
+<p> The default implementation of <a href="ntqwidget.html#sizeHint">sizeHint</a>() returns an invalid size
 if there is no layout for this widget, and returns the layout's
 preferred size otherwise.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qsize.html#isValid">QSize::isValid</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#minimumSizeHint-prop">minimumSizeHint</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#sizePolicy-prop">sizePolicy</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#minimumSize-prop">minimumSize</a>, and <a href="qwidget.html#updateGeometry">updateGeometry</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqsize.html#isValid">QSize::isValid</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#minimumSizeHint-prop">minimumSizeHint</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#sizePolicy-prop">sizePolicy</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#minimumSize-prop">minimumSize</a>, and <a href="ntqwidget.html#updateGeometry">updateGeometry</a>().
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#sizeHint">sizeHint</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#sizeHint">sizeHint</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::sizeIncrement
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the size increment of the widget.
 <p>When the user resizes the window, the size will move in steps of
-<a href="qwidget.html#sizeIncrement">sizeIncrement</a>().<a href="qwidget.html#width">width</a>() pixels horizontally and
-sizeIncrement.<a href="qwidget.html#height">height</a>() pixels vertically, with <a href="qwidget.html#baseSize">baseSize</a>() as the
+<a href="ntqwidget.html#sizeIncrement">sizeIncrement</a>().<a href="ntqwidget.html#width">width</a>() pixels horizontally and
+sizeIncrement.<a href="ntqwidget.html#height">height</a>() pixels vertically, with <a href="ntqwidget.html#baseSize">baseSize</a>() as the
 basis. Preferred widget sizes are for non-negative integers <em>i</em>
 and <em>j</em>:
 <pre>
-        <a href="qwidget.html#width-prop">width</a> = <a href="qwidget.html#baseSize">baseSize</a>().width() + i * sizeIncrement().width();
-        <a href="qwidget.html#height-prop">height</a> = <a href="qwidget.html#baseSize">baseSize</a>().height() + j * sizeIncrement().height();
+        <a href="ntqwidget.html#width-prop">width</a> = <a href="ntqwidget.html#baseSize">baseSize</a>().width() + i * sizeIncrement().width();
+        <a href="ntqwidget.html#height-prop">height</a> = <a href="ntqwidget.html#baseSize">baseSize</a>().height() + j * sizeIncrement().height();
     </pre>
  
 <p> Note that while you can set the size increment for all widgets, it
 only affects top-level widgets.
 <p> <b>Warning:</b> The size increment has no effect under Windows, and may
 be disregarded by the window manager on X.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#size-prop">size</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#minimumSize-prop">minimumSize</a>, and <a href="qwidget.html#maximumSize-prop">maximumSize</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#size-prop">size</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#minimumSize-prop">minimumSize</a>, and <a href="ntqwidget.html#maximumSize-prop">maximumSize</a>.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#setSizeIncrement">setSizeIncrement</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#sizeIncrement">sizeIncrement</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setSizeIncrement">setSizeIncrement</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#sizeIncrement">sizeIncrement</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::sizePolicy
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the default layout behavior of the widget.
-<p>If there is a <a href="qlayout.html">QLayout</a> that manages this widget's children, the
+<p>If there is a <a href="ntqlayout.html">QLayout</a> that manages this widget's children, the
 size policy specified by that layout is used. If there is no such
 QLayout, the result of this function is used.
 <p> The default policy is Preferred/Preferred, which means that the
 widget can be freely resized, but prefers to be the size
-<a href="qwidget.html#sizeHint">sizeHint</a>() returns. Button-like widgets set the size policy to
+<a href="ntqwidget.html#sizeHint">sizeHint</a>() returns. Button-like widgets set the size policy to
 specify that they may stretch horizontally, but are fixed
 vertically. The same applies to lineedit controls (such as
-<a href="qlineedit.html">QLineEdit</a>, <a href="qspinbox.html">QSpinBox</a> or an editable <a href="qcombobox.html">QComboBox</a>) and other
-horizontally orientated widgets (such as <a href="qprogressbar.html">QProgressBar</a>).
-<a href="qtoolbutton.html">QToolButton</a>'s are normally square, so they allow growth in both
+<a href="ntqlineedit.html">QLineEdit</a>, <a href="ntqspinbox.html">QSpinBox</a> or an editable <a href="ntqcombobox.html">QComboBox</a>) and other
+horizontally orientated widgets (such as <a href="ntqprogressbar.html">QProgressBar</a>).
+<a href="ntqtoolbutton.html">QToolButton</a>'s are normally square, so they allow growth in both
 directions. Widgets that support different directions (such as
-<a href="qslider.html">QSlider</a>, <a href="qscrollbar.html">QScrollBar</a> or <a href="qheader.html">QHeader</a>) specify stretching in the
+<a href="ntqslider.html">QSlider</a>, <a href="ntqscrollbar.html">QScrollBar</a> or <a href="ntqheader.html">QHeader</a>) specify stretching in the
 respective direction only. Widgets that can provide scrollbars
-(usually subclasses of <a href="qscrollview.html">QScrollView</a>) tend to specify that they can
+(usually subclasses of <a href="ntqscrollview.html">QScrollView</a>) tend to specify that they can
 use additional space, and that they can make do with less than
 sizeHint().
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#sizeHint-prop">sizeHint</a>, <a href="qlayout.html">QLayout</a>, <a href="qsizepolicy.html">QSizePolicy</a>, and <a href="qwidget.html#updateGeometry">updateGeometry</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#sizeHint-prop">sizeHint</a>, <a href="ntqlayout.html">QLayout</a>, <a href="ntqsizepolicy.html">QSizePolicy</a>, and <a href="ntqwidget.html#updateGeometry">updateGeometry</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#setSizePolicy">setSizePolicy</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#sizePolicy">sizePolicy</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setSizePolicy">setSizePolicy</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#sizePolicy">sizePolicy</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::underMouse
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the widget is under the mouse cursor.
 <p>This value is not updated properly during drag and drop
 operations.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qevent.html#Type-enum">QEvent::Enter</a> and <a href="qevent.html#Type-enum">QEvent::Leave</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqevent.html#Type-enum">QEvent::Enter</a> and <a href="ntqevent.html#Type-enum">QEvent::Leave</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#hasMouse">hasMouse</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#hasMouse">hasMouse</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::updatesEnabled
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether updates are enabled.
-<p>Calling <a href="qwidget.html#update">update</a>() and <a href="qwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>() has no effect if updates are
+<p>Calling <a href="ntqwidget.html#update">update</a>() and <a href="ntqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>() has no effect if updates are
 disabled. Paint events from the window system are processed
 normally even if updates are disabled.
-<p> <a href="qwidget.html#setUpdatesEnabled">setUpdatesEnabled</a>() is normally used to disable updates for a
+<p> <a href="ntqwidget.html#setUpdatesEnabled">setUpdatesEnabled</a>() is normally used to disable updates for a
 short period of time, for instance to avoid screen flicker during
 large changes.
 <p> Example:
 <pre>
-        <a href="qwidget.html#setUpdatesEnabled">setUpdatesEnabled</a>( FALSE );
+        <a href="ntqwidget.html#setUpdatesEnabled">setUpdatesEnabled</a>( FALSE );
         bigVisualChanges();
-        <a href="qwidget.html#setUpdatesEnabled">setUpdatesEnabled</a>( TRUE );
-        <a href="qwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>();
+        <a href="ntqwidget.html#setUpdatesEnabled">setUpdatesEnabled</a>( TRUE );
+        <a href="ntqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>();
     </pre>
  
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#update">update</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>(), and <a href="qwidget.html#paintEvent">paintEvent</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#update">update</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>(), and <a href="ntqwidget.html#paintEvent">paintEvent</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#setUpdatesEnabled">setUpdatesEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#isUpdatesEnabled">isUpdatesEnabled</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setUpdatesEnabled">setUpdatesEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#isUpdatesEnabled">isUpdatesEnabled</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::visible
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the widget is visible.
-<p>Calling <a href="qwidget.html#show">show</a>() sets the widget to visible status if all its parent
+<p>Calling <a href="ntqwidget.html#show">show</a>() sets the widget to visible status if all its parent
 widgets up to the top-level widget are visible. If an ancestor is
 not visible, the widget won't become visible until all its
 ancestors are shown.
-<p> Calling <a href="qwidget.html#hide">hide</a>() hides a widget explicitly. An explicitly hidden
+<p> Calling <a href="ntqwidget.html#hide">hide</a>() hides a widget explicitly. An explicitly hidden
 widget will never become visible, even if all its ancestors become
 visible, unless you show it.
 <p> A widget receives show and hide events when its visibility status
@@ -5221,36 +5221,36 @@ receives spontaneous show and hide events when its mapping status
 is changed by the window system, e.g. a spontaneous hide event
 when the user minimizes the window, and a spontaneous show event
 when the window is restored again.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#show">show</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#hide">hide</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#hidden-prop">hidden</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#isVisibleTo">isVisibleTo</a>(), <a href="qwidget.html#minimized-prop">minimized</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#showEvent">showEvent</a>(), and <a href="qwidget.html#hideEvent">hideEvent</a>().
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#show">show</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#hide">hide</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#hidden-prop">hidden</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#isVisibleTo">isVisibleTo</a>(), <a href="ntqwidget.html#minimized-prop">minimized</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#showEvent">showEvent</a>(), and <a href="ntqwidget.html#hideEvent">hideEvent</a>().
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#isVisible">isVisible</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#isVisible">isVisible</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::visibleRect
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the visible rectangle.
 <p><b>This property is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-<p> No longer necessary, you can simply call <a href="qwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>(). If you do not
-need the rectangle for repaint(), use <a href="qwidget.html#clipRegion">clipRegion</a>() instead.
+<p> No longer necessary, you can simply call <a href="ntqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>(). If you do not
+need the rectangle for repaint(), use <a href="ntqwidget.html#clipRegion">clipRegion</a>() instead.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#visibleRect">visibleRect</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#visibleRect">visibleRect</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::width
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the width of the widget excluding any window frame.
 <p>See the <a href="geometry.html">Window Geometry documentation</a>
 for an overview of top-level widget geometry.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#geometry-prop">geometry</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#height-prop">height</a>, and <a href="qwidget.html#size-prop">size</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#geometry-prop">geometry</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#height-prop">height</a>, and <a href="ntqwidget.html#size-prop">size</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#width">width</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#width">width</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::windowOpacity
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the level of opacity for the window.
 <p>The valid range of opacity is from 1.0 (completely opaque) to
 0.0 (completely transparent).
@@ -5258,46 +5258,46 @@ for an overview of top-level widget geometry.
 <p> This feature is only present on Mac OS X and Windows 2000 and up.
 <p> <b>Warning:</b> Changing this property from opaque to transparent might issue a
 paint event that needs to be processed before the window is displayed
-correctly. This affects mainly the use of <a href="qpixmap.html#grabWindow">QPixmap::grabWindow</a>(). Also note
+correctly. This affects mainly the use of <a href="ntqpixmap.html#grabWindow">QPixmap::grabWindow</a>(). Also note
 that semi-transparent windows update and resize significantely slower than
 opaque windows.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#setWindowOpacity">setWindowOpacity</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#windowOpacity">windowOpacity</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#setWindowOpacity">setWindowOpacity</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#windowOpacity">windowOpacity</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::x
-     <p>This property holds the x coordinate of the widget relative to its parent including any window frame.
+     <p>This property holds the x coordinate of the widget relative to its parent including any window frame.
 <p>See the <a href="geometry.html">Window Geometry documentation</a>
 for an overview of top-level widget geometry.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#frameGeometry-prop">frameGeometry</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#y-prop">y</a>, and <a href="qwidget.html#pos-prop">pos</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#frameGeometry-prop">frameGeometry</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#y-prop">y</a>, and <a href="ntqwidget.html#pos-prop">pos</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#x">x</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#x">x</a>().
 
 
 
     QWidget::y
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the y coordinate of the widget relative to its parent and including any window frame.
 <p>See the <a href="geometry.html">Window Geometry documentation</a>
 for an overview of top-level widget geometry.
-<p> <p>See also <a href="qwidget.html#frameGeometry-prop">frameGeometry</a>, <a href="qwidget.html#x-prop">x</a>, and <a href="qwidget.html#pos-prop">pos</a>.
+<p> <p>See also <a href="ntqwidget.html#frameGeometry-prop">frameGeometry</a>, <a href="ntqwidget.html#x-prop">x</a>, and <a href="ntqwidget.html#pos-prop">pos</a>.
 
-<p>Get this property's value with <a href="qwidget.html#y">y</a>().
+<p>Get this property's value with <a href="ntqwidget.html#y">y</a>().
 
 
 
     QWizard::titleFont
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds the font used for page titles.
-<p>The default is <a href="qapplication.html#font">QApplication::font</a>().
+<p>The default is <a href="ntqapplication.html#font">QApplication::font</a>().
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qwizard.html#setTitleFont">setTitleFont</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qwizard.html#titleFont">titleFont</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqwizard.html#setTitleFont">setTitleFont</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqwizard.html#titleFont">titleFont</a>().
 
 
 
     QWorkspace::scrollBarsEnabled
-    
+    
 <p>This property holds whether the workspace provides scrollbars.
 <p>If this property is set to TRUE, it is possible to resize child
 windows over the right or the bottom edge out of the visible area
@@ -5306,7 +5306,7 @@ possible for the user to access those windows. If this property is
 set to FALSE (the default), resizing windows out of the visible
 area of the workspace is not permitted.
 
-<p>Set this property's value with <a href="qworkspace.html#setScrollBarsEnabled">setScrollBarsEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="qworkspace.html#scrollBarsEnabled">scrollBarsEnabled</a>().
+<p>Set this property's value with <a href="ntqworkspace.html#setScrollBarsEnabled">setScrollBarsEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="ntqworkspace.html#scrollBarsEnabled">scrollBarsEnabled</a>().
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/propertyindex b/doc/html/propertyindex
index c108faa79..37bccdb04 100644
--- a/doc/html/propertyindex
+++ b/doc/html/propertyindex
@@ -1,425 +1,425 @@
-"QAction/accel" qaction.html#accel-prop
-"QAction/enabled" qaction.html#enabled-prop
-"QAction/iconSet" qaction.html#iconSet-prop
-"QAction/menuText" qaction.html#menuText-prop
-"QAction/on" qaction.html#on-prop
-"QAction/statusTip" qaction.html#statusTip-prop
-"QAction/text" qaction.html#text-prop
-"QAction/toggleAction" qaction.html#toggleAction-prop
-"QAction/toolTip" qaction.html#toolTip-prop
-"QAction/visible" qaction.html#visible-prop
-"QAction/whatsThis" qaction.html#whatsThis-prop
+"QAction/accel" ntqaction.html#accel-prop
+"QAction/enabled" ntqaction.html#enabled-prop
+"QAction/iconSet" ntqaction.html#iconSet-prop
+"QAction/menuText" ntqaction.html#menuText-prop
+"QAction/on" ntqaction.html#on-prop
+"QAction/statusTip" ntqaction.html#statusTip-prop
+"QAction/text" ntqaction.html#text-prop
+"QAction/toggleAction" ntqaction.html#toggleAction-prop
+"QAction/toolTip" ntqaction.html#toolTip-prop
+"QAction/visible" ntqaction.html#visible-prop
+"QAction/whatsThis" ntqaction.html#whatsThis-prop
 "QActionGroup/exclusive" qactiongroup.html#exclusive-prop
 "QActionGroup/usesDropDown" qactiongroup.html#usesDropDown-prop
-"QAssistantClient/open" qassistantclient.html#open-prop
+"QAssistantClient/open" ntqassistantclient.html#open-prop
 "QAxBase/control" qaxbase.html#control-prop
-"QButton/accel" qbutton.html#accel-prop
-"QButton/autoRepeat" qbutton.html#autoRepeat-prop
-"QButton/autoResize" qbutton.html#autoResize-prop
-"QButton/down" qbutton.html#down-prop
-"QButton/exclusiveToggle" qbutton.html#exclusiveToggle-prop
-"QButton/on" qbutton.html#on-prop
-"QButton/pixmap" qbutton.html#pixmap-prop
-"QButton/text" qbutton.html#text-prop
-"QButton/toggleButton" qbutton.html#toggleButton-prop
-"QButton/toggleState" qbutton.html#toggleState-prop
-"QButton/toggleType" qbutton.html#toggleType-prop
-"QButtonGroup/exclusive" qbuttongroup.html#exclusive-prop
-"QButtonGroup/radioButtonExclusive" qbuttongroup.html#radioButtonExclusive-prop
-"QButtonGroup/selectedId" qbuttongroup.html#selectedId-prop
-"QCheckBox/checked" qcheckbox.html#checked-prop
-"QCheckBox/tristate" qcheckbox.html#tristate-prop
-"QComboBox/autoCompletion" qcombobox.html#autoCompletion-prop
-"QComboBox/autoResize" qcombobox.html#autoResize-prop
-"QComboBox/count" qcombobox.html#count-prop
-"QComboBox/currentItem" qcombobox.html#currentItem-prop
-"QComboBox/currentText" qcombobox.html#currentText-prop
-"QComboBox/duplicatesEnabled" qcombobox.html#duplicatesEnabled-prop
-"QComboBox/editable" qcombobox.html#editable-prop
-"QComboBox/insertionPolicy" qcombobox.html#insertionPolicy-prop
-"QComboBox/maxCount" qcombobox.html#maxCount-prop
-"QComboBox/sizeLimit" qcombobox.html#sizeLimit-prop
-"QDataBrowser/autoEdit" qdatabrowser.html#autoEdit-prop
-"QDataBrowser/boundaryChecking" qdatabrowser.html#boundaryChecking-prop
-"QDataBrowser/confirmCancels" qdatabrowser.html#confirmCancels-prop
-"QDataBrowser/confirmDelete" qdatabrowser.html#confirmDelete-prop
-"QDataBrowser/confirmEdits" qdatabrowser.html#confirmEdits-prop
-"QDataBrowser/confirmInsert" qdatabrowser.html#confirmInsert-prop
-"QDataBrowser/confirmUpdate" qdatabrowser.html#confirmUpdate-prop
-"QDataBrowser/filter" qdatabrowser.html#filter-prop
-"QDataBrowser/readOnly" qdatabrowser.html#readOnly-prop
-"QDataBrowser/sort" qdatabrowser.html#sort-prop
-"QDataTable/autoEdit" qdatatable.html#autoEdit-prop
-"QDataTable/confirmCancels" qdatatable.html#confirmCancels-prop
-"QDataTable/confirmDelete" qdatatable.html#confirmDelete-prop
-"QDataTable/confirmEdits" qdatatable.html#confirmEdits-prop
-"QDataTable/confirmInsert" qdatatable.html#confirmInsert-prop
-"QDataTable/confirmUpdate" qdatatable.html#confirmUpdate-prop
-"QDataTable/dateFormat" qdatatable.html#dateFormat-prop
-"QDataTable/falseText" qdatatable.html#falseText-prop
-"QDataTable/filter" qdatatable.html#filter-prop
-"QDataTable/nullText" qdatatable.html#nullText-prop
-"QDataTable/numCols" qdatatable.html#numCols-prop
-"QDataTable/numRows" qdatatable.html#numRows-prop
-"QDataTable/sort" qdatatable.html#sort-prop
-"QDataTable/trueText" qdatatable.html#trueText-prop
+"QButton/accel" ntqbutton.html#accel-prop
+"QButton/autoRepeat" ntqbutton.html#autoRepeat-prop
+"QButton/autoResize" ntqbutton.html#autoResize-prop
+"QButton/down" ntqbutton.html#down-prop
+"QButton/exclusiveToggle" ntqbutton.html#exclusiveToggle-prop
+"QButton/on" ntqbutton.html#on-prop
+"QButton/pixmap" ntqbutton.html#pixmap-prop
+"QButton/text" ntqbutton.html#text-prop
+"QButton/toggleButton" ntqbutton.html#toggleButton-prop
+"QButton/toggleState" ntqbutton.html#toggleState-prop
+"QButton/toggleType" ntqbutton.html#toggleType-prop
+"QButtonGroup/exclusive" ntqbuttongroup.html#exclusive-prop
+"QButtonGroup/radioButtonExclusive" ntqbuttongroup.html#radioButtonExclusive-prop
+"QButtonGroup/selectedId" ntqbuttongroup.html#selectedId-prop
+"QCheckBox/checked" ntqcheckbox.html#checked-prop
+"QCheckBox/tristate" ntqcheckbox.html#tristate-prop
+"QComboBox/autoCompletion" ntqcombobox.html#autoCompletion-prop
+"QComboBox/autoResize" ntqcombobox.html#autoResize-prop
+"QComboBox/count" ntqcombobox.html#count-prop
+"QComboBox/currentItem" ntqcombobox.html#currentItem-prop
+"QComboBox/currentText" ntqcombobox.html#currentText-prop
+"QComboBox/duplicatesEnabled" ntqcombobox.html#duplicatesEnabled-prop
+"QComboBox/editable" ntqcombobox.html#editable-prop
+"QComboBox/insertionPolicy" ntqcombobox.html#insertionPolicy-prop
+"QComboBox/maxCount" ntqcombobox.html#maxCount-prop
+"QComboBox/sizeLimit" ntqcombobox.html#sizeLimit-prop
+"QDataBrowser/autoEdit" ntqdatabrowser.html#autoEdit-prop
+"QDataBrowser/boundaryChecking" ntqdatabrowser.html#boundaryChecking-prop
+"QDataBrowser/confirmCancels" ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmCancels-prop
+"QDataBrowser/confirmDelete" ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmDelete-prop
+"QDataBrowser/confirmEdits" ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmEdits-prop
+"QDataBrowser/confirmInsert" ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmInsert-prop
+"QDataBrowser/confirmUpdate" ntqdatabrowser.html#confirmUpdate-prop
+"QDataBrowser/filter" ntqdatabrowser.html#filter-prop
+"QDataBrowser/readOnly" ntqdatabrowser.html#readOnly-prop
+"QDataBrowser/sort" ntqdatabrowser.html#sort-prop
+"QDataTable/autoEdit" ntqdatatable.html#autoEdit-prop
+"QDataTable/confirmCancels" ntqdatatable.html#confirmCancels-prop
+"QDataTable/confirmDelete" ntqdatatable.html#confirmDelete-prop
+"QDataTable/confirmEdits" ntqdatatable.html#confirmEdits-prop
+"QDataTable/confirmInsert" ntqdatatable.html#confirmInsert-prop
+"QDataTable/confirmUpdate" ntqdatatable.html#confirmUpdate-prop
+"QDataTable/dateFormat" ntqdatatable.html#dateFormat-prop
+"QDataTable/falseText" ntqdatatable.html#falseText-prop
+"QDataTable/filter" ntqdatatable.html#filter-prop
+"QDataTable/nullText" ntqdatatable.html#nullText-prop
+"QDataTable/numCols" ntqdatatable.html#numCols-prop
+"QDataTable/numRows" ntqdatatable.html#numRows-prop
+"QDataTable/sort" ntqdatatable.html#sort-prop
+"QDataTable/trueText" ntqdatatable.html#trueText-prop
 "QDateEdit/autoAdvance" qdateedit.html#autoAdvance-prop
 "QDateEdit/date" qdateedit.html#date-prop
 "QDateEdit/maxValue" qdateedit.html#maxValue-prop
 "QDateEdit/minValue" qdateedit.html#minValue-prop
 "QDateEdit/order" qdateedit.html#order-prop
-"QDateTimeEdit/dateTime" qdatetimeedit.html#dateTime-prop
-"QDial/lineStep" qdial.html#lineStep-prop
-"QDial/maxValue" qdial.html#maxValue-prop
-"QDial/minValue" qdial.html#minValue-prop
-"QDial/notchSize" qdial.html#notchSize-prop
-"QDial/notchTarget" qdial.html#notchTarget-prop
-"QDial/notchesVisible" qdial.html#notchesVisible-prop
-"QDial/pageStep" qdial.html#pageStep-prop
-"QDial/tracking" qdial.html#tracking-prop
-"QDial/value" qdial.html#value-prop
-"QDial/wrapping" qdial.html#wrapping-prop
-"QDialog/modal" qdialog.html#modal-prop
-"QDialog/sizeGripEnabled" qdialog.html#sizeGripEnabled-prop
-"QDockArea/count" qdockarea.html#count-prop
-"QDockArea/empty" qdockarea.html#empty-prop
-"QDockArea/handlePosition" qdockarea.html#handlePosition-prop
-"QDockArea/orientation" qdockarea.html#orientation-prop
-"QDockWindow/closeMode" qdockwindow.html#closeMode-prop
-"QDockWindow/horizontallyStretchable" qdockwindow.html#horizontallyStretchable-prop
-"QDockWindow/movingEnabled" qdockwindow.html#movingEnabled-prop
-"QDockWindow/newLine" qdockwindow.html#newLine-prop
-"QDockWindow/offset" qdockwindow.html#offset-prop
-"QDockWindow/opaqueMoving" qdockwindow.html#opaqueMoving-prop
-"QDockWindow/place" qdockwindow.html
-"QDockWindow/resizeEnabled" qdockwindow.html#resizeEnabled-prop
-"QDockWindow/stretchable" qdockwindow.html#stretchable-prop
-"QDockWindow/verticallyStretchable" qdockwindow.html#verticallyStretchable-prop
+"QDateTimeEdit/dateTime" ntqdatetimeedit.html#dateTime-prop
+"QDial/lineStep" ntqdial.html#lineStep-prop
+"QDial/maxValue" ntqdial.html#maxValue-prop
+"QDial/minValue" ntqdial.html#minValue-prop
+"QDial/notchSize" ntqdial.html#notchSize-prop
+"QDial/notchTarget" ntqdial.html#notchTarget-prop
+"QDial/notchesVisible" ntqdial.html#notchesVisible-prop
+"QDial/pageStep" ntqdial.html#pageStep-prop
+"QDial/tracking" ntqdial.html#tracking-prop
+"QDial/value" ntqdial.html#value-prop
+"QDial/wrapping" ntqdial.html#wrapping-prop
+"QDialog/modal" ntqdialog.html#modal-prop
+"QDialog/sizeGripEnabled" ntqdialog.html#sizeGripEnabled-prop
+"QDockArea/count" ntqdockarea.html#count-prop
+"QDockArea/empty" ntqdockarea.html#empty-prop
+"QDockArea/handlePosition" ntqdockarea.html#handlePosition-prop
+"QDockArea/orientation" ntqdockarea.html#orientation-prop
+"QDockWindow/closeMode" ntqdockwindow.html#closeMode-prop
+"QDockWindow/horizontallyStretchable" ntqdockwindow.html#horizontallyStretchable-prop
+"QDockWindow/movingEnabled" ntqdockwindow.html#movingEnabled-prop
+"QDockWindow/newLine" ntqdockwindow.html#newLine-prop
+"QDockWindow/offset" ntqdockwindow.html#offset-prop
+"QDockWindow/opaqueMoving" ntqdockwindow.html#opaqueMoving-prop
+"QDockWindow/place" ntqdockwindow.html
+"QDockWindow/resizeEnabled" ntqdockwindow.html#resizeEnabled-prop
+"QDockWindow/stretchable" ntqdockwindow.html#stretchable-prop
+"QDockWindow/verticallyStretchable" ntqdockwindow.html#verticallyStretchable-prop
 "QDoubleValidator/bottom" qdoublevalidator.html#bottom-prop
 "QDoubleValidator/decimals" qdoublevalidator.html#decimals-prop
 "QDoubleValidator/top" qdoublevalidator.html#top-prop
-"QFileDialog/contentsPreview" qfiledialog.html#contentsPreview-prop
-"QFileDialog/dirPath" qfiledialog.html#dirPath-prop
-"QFileDialog/infoPreview" qfiledialog.html#infoPreview-prop
-"QFileDialog/mode" qfiledialog.html#mode-prop
-"QFileDialog/previewMode" qfiledialog.html#previewMode-prop
-"QFileDialog/selectedFile" qfiledialog.html#selectedFile-prop
-"QFileDialog/selectedFiles" qfiledialog.html#selectedFiles-prop
-"QFileDialog/selectedFilter" qfiledialog.html#selectedFilter-prop
-"QFileDialog/showHiddenFiles" qfiledialog.html#showHiddenFiles-prop
-"QFileDialog/viewMode" qfiledialog.html#viewMode-prop
-"QFrame/contentsRect" qframe.html#contentsRect-prop
-"QFrame/frameRect" qframe.html#frameRect-prop
-"QFrame/frameShadow" qframe.html#frameShadow-prop
-"QFrame/frameShape" qframe.html#frameShape-prop
-"QFrame/frameWidth" qframe.html#frameWidth-prop
-"QFrame/lineWidth" qframe.html#lineWidth-prop
-"QFrame/margin" qframe.html#margin-prop
-"QFrame/midLineWidth" qframe.html#midLineWidth-prop
-"QGridView/cellHeight" qgridview.html#cellHeight-prop
-"QGridView/cellWidth" qgridview.html#cellWidth-prop
-"QGridView/numCols" qgridview.html#numCols-prop
-"QGridView/numRows" qgridview.html#numRows-prop
-"QGroupBox/alignment" qgroupbox.html#alignment-prop
-"QGroupBox/checkable" qgroupbox.html#checkable-prop
-"QGroupBox/checked" qgroupbox.html#checked-prop
-"QGroupBox/columns" qgroupbox.html#columns-prop
-"QGroupBox/flat" qgroupbox.html#flat-prop
-"QGroupBox/orientation" qgroupbox.html#orientation-prop
-"QGroupBox/title" qgroupbox.html#title-prop
-"QHeader/count" qheader.html#count-prop
-"QHeader/moving" qheader.html#moving-prop
-"QHeader/offset" qheader.html#offset-prop
-"QHeader/orientation" qheader.html#orientation-prop
-"QHeader/stretching" qheader.html#stretching-prop
-"QHeader/tracking" qheader.html#tracking-prop
-"QIconView/arrangement" qiconview.html#arrangement-prop
-"QIconView/autoArrange" qiconview.html#autoArrange-prop
-"QIconView/count" qiconview.html#count-prop
-"QIconView/gridX" qiconview.html#gridX-prop
-"QIconView/gridY" qiconview.html#gridY-prop
-"QIconView/itemTextBackground" qiconview.html#itemTextBackground-prop
-"QIconView/itemTextPos" qiconview.html#itemTextPos-prop
-"QIconView/itemsMovable" qiconview.html#itemsMovable-prop
-"QIconView/maxItemTextLength" qiconview.html#maxItemTextLength-prop
-"QIconView/maxItemWidth" qiconview.html#maxItemWidth-prop
-"QIconView/resizeMode" qiconview.html#resizeMode-prop
-"QIconView/selectionMode" qiconview.html#selectionMode-prop
-"QIconView/showToolTips" qiconview.html#showToolTips-prop
-"QIconView/sortDirection" qiconview.html#sortDirection-prop
-"QIconView/sorting" qiconview.html#sorting-prop
-"QIconView/spacing" qiconview.html#spacing-prop
-"QIconView/wordWrapIconText" qiconview.html#wordWrapIconText-prop
+"QFileDialog/contentsPreview" ntqfiledialog.html#contentsPreview-prop
+"QFileDialog/dirPath" ntqfiledialog.html#dirPath-prop
+"QFileDialog/infoPreview" ntqfiledialog.html#infoPreview-prop
+"QFileDialog/mode" ntqfiledialog.html#mode-prop
+"QFileDialog/previewMode" ntqfiledialog.html#previewMode-prop
+"QFileDialog/selectedFile" ntqfiledialog.html#selectedFile-prop
+"QFileDialog/selectedFiles" ntqfiledialog.html#selectedFiles-prop
+"QFileDialog/selectedFilter" ntqfiledialog.html#selectedFilter-prop
+"QFileDialog/showHiddenFiles" ntqfiledialog.html#showHiddenFiles-prop
+"QFileDialog/viewMode" ntqfiledialog.html#viewMode-prop
+"QFrame/contentsRect" ntqframe.html#contentsRect-prop
+"QFrame/frameRect" ntqframe.html#frameRect-prop
+"QFrame/frameShadow" ntqframe.html#frameShadow-prop
+"QFrame/frameShape" ntqframe.html#frameShape-prop
+"QFrame/frameWidth" ntqframe.html#frameWidth-prop
+"QFrame/lineWidth" ntqframe.html#lineWidth-prop
+"QFrame/margin" ntqframe.html#margin-prop
+"QFrame/midLineWidth" ntqframe.html#midLineWidth-prop
+"QGridView/cellHeight" ntqgridview.html#cellHeight-prop
+"QGridView/cellWidth" ntqgridview.html#cellWidth-prop
+"QGridView/numCols" ntqgridview.html#numCols-prop
+"QGridView/numRows" ntqgridview.html#numRows-prop
+"QGroupBox/alignment" ntqgroupbox.html#alignment-prop
+"QGroupBox/checkable" ntqgroupbox.html#checkable-prop
+"QGroupBox/checked" ntqgroupbox.html#checked-prop
+"QGroupBox/columns" ntqgroupbox.html#columns-prop
+"QGroupBox/flat" ntqgroupbox.html#flat-prop
+"QGroupBox/orientation" ntqgroupbox.html#orientation-prop
+"QGroupBox/title" ntqgroupbox.html#title-prop
+"QHeader/count" ntqheader.html#count-prop
+"QHeader/moving" ntqheader.html#moving-prop
+"QHeader/offset" ntqheader.html#offset-prop
+"QHeader/orientation" ntqheader.html#orientation-prop
+"QHeader/stretching" ntqheader.html#stretching-prop
+"QHeader/tracking" ntqheader.html#tracking-prop
+"QIconView/arrangement" ntqiconview.html#arrangement-prop
+"QIconView/autoArrange" ntqiconview.html#autoArrange-prop
+"QIconView/count" ntqiconview.html#count-prop
+"QIconView/gridX" ntqiconview.html#gridX-prop
+"QIconView/gridY" ntqiconview.html#gridY-prop
+"QIconView/itemTextBackground" ntqiconview.html#itemTextBackground-prop
+"QIconView/itemTextPos" ntqiconview.html#itemTextPos-prop
+"QIconView/itemsMovable" ntqiconview.html#itemsMovable-prop
+"QIconView/maxItemTextLength" ntqiconview.html#maxItemTextLength-prop
+"QIconView/maxItemWidth" ntqiconview.html#maxItemWidth-prop
+"QIconView/resizeMode" ntqiconview.html#resizeMode-prop
+"QIconView/selectionMode" ntqiconview.html#selectionMode-prop
+"QIconView/showToolTips" ntqiconview.html#showToolTips-prop
+"QIconView/sortDirection" ntqiconview.html#sortDirection-prop
+"QIconView/sorting" ntqiconview.html#sorting-prop
+"QIconView/spacing" ntqiconview.html#spacing-prop
+"QIconView/wordWrapIconText" ntqiconview.html#wordWrapIconText-prop
 "QIntValidator/bottom" qintvalidator.html#bottom-prop
 "QIntValidator/top" qintvalidator.html#top-prop
-"QLCDNumber/intValue" qlcdnumber.html#intValue-prop
-"QLCDNumber/mode" qlcdnumber.html#mode-prop
-"QLCDNumber/numDigits" qlcdnumber.html#numDigits-prop
-"QLCDNumber/segmentStyle" qlcdnumber.html#segmentStyle-prop
-"QLCDNumber/smallDecimalPoint" qlcdnumber.html#smallDecimalPoint-prop
-"QLCDNumber/value" qlcdnumber.html#value-prop
-"QLabel/alignment" qlabel.html#alignment-prop
-"QLabel/indent" qlabel.html#indent-prop
-"QLabel/pixmap" qlabel.html#pixmap-prop
-"QLabel/scaledContents" qlabel.html#scaledContents-prop
-"QLabel/text" qlabel.html#text-prop
-"QLabel/textFormat" qlabel.html#textFormat-prop
-"QLayout/margin" qlayout.html#margin-prop
-"QLayout/resizeMode" qlayout.html#resizeMode-prop
-"QLayout/spacing" qlayout.html#spacing-prop
-"QLineEdit/acceptableInput" qlineedit.html#acceptableInput-prop
-"QLineEdit/alignment" qlineedit.html#alignment-prop
-"QLineEdit/cursorPosition" qlineedit.html#cursorPosition-prop
-"QLineEdit/displayText" qlineedit.html#displayText-prop
-"QLineEdit/dragEnabled" qlineedit.html#dragEnabled-prop
-"QLineEdit/echoMode" qlineedit.html#echoMode-prop
-"QLineEdit/edited" qlineedit.html#edited-prop
-"QLineEdit/frame" qlineedit.html#frame-prop
-"QLineEdit/hasMarkedText" qlineedit.html#hasMarkedText-prop
-"QLineEdit/hasSelectedText" qlineedit.html#hasSelectedText-prop
-"QLineEdit/inputMask" qlineedit.html#inputMask-prop
-"QLineEdit/markedText" qlineedit.html#markedText-prop
-"QLineEdit/maxLength" qlineedit.html#maxLength-prop
-"QLineEdit/modified" qlineedit.html#modified-prop
-"QLineEdit/readOnly" qlineedit.html#readOnly-prop
-"QLineEdit/redoAvailable" qlineedit.html#redoAvailable-prop
-"QLineEdit/selectedText" qlineedit.html#selectedText-prop
-"QLineEdit/text" qlineedit.html#text-prop
-"QLineEdit/undoAvailable" qlineedit.html#undoAvailable-prop
-"QListBox/columnMode" qlistbox.html#columnMode-prop
-"QListBox/count" qlistbox.html#count-prop
-"QListBox/currentItem" qlistbox.html#currentItem-prop
-"QListBox/currentText" qlistbox.html#currentText-prop
-"QListBox/multiSelection" qlistbox.html#multiSelection-prop
-"QListBox/numColumns" qlistbox.html#numColumns-prop
-"QListBox/numItemsVisible" qlistbox.html#numItemsVisible-prop
-"QListBox/numRows" qlistbox.html#numRows-prop
-"QListBox/rowMode" qlistbox.html#rowMode-prop
-"QListBox/selectionMode" qlistbox.html#selectionMode-prop
-"QListBox/topItem" qlistbox.html#topItem-prop
-"QListBox/variableHeight" qlistbox.html#variableHeight-prop
-"QListBox/variableWidth" qlistbox.html#variableWidth-prop
-"QListView/allColumnsShowFocus" qlistview.html#allColumnsShowFocus-prop
-"QListView/childCount" qlistview.html#childCount-prop
-"QListView/columns" qlistview.html#columns-prop
-"QListView/defaultRenameAction" qlistview.html#defaultRenameAction-prop
-"QListView/itemMargin" qlistview.html#itemMargin-prop
-"QListView/multiSelection" qlistview.html#multiSelection-prop
-"QListView/resizeMode" qlistview.html#resizeMode-prop
-"QListView/rootIsDecorated" qlistview.html#rootIsDecorated-prop
-"QListView/selectionMode" qlistview.html#selectionMode-prop
-"QListView/showSortIndicator" qlistview.html#showSortIndicator-prop
-"QListView/showToolTips" qlistview.html#showToolTips-prop
-"QListView/treeStepSize" qlistview.html#treeStepSize-prop
-"QMainWindow/dockWindowsMovable" qmainwindow.html#dockWindowsMovable-prop
-"QMainWindow/opaqueMoving" qmainwindow.html#opaqueMoving-prop
-"QMainWindow/rightJustification" qmainwindow.html#rightJustification-prop
-"QMainWindow/usesBigPixmaps" qmainwindow.html#usesBigPixmaps-prop
-"QMainWindow/usesTextLabel" qmainwindow.html#usesTextLabel-prop
-"QMenuBar/defaultUp" qmenubar.html#defaultUp-prop
-"QMenuBar/separator" qmenubar.html#separator-prop
-"QMessageBox/icon" qmessagebox.html#icon-prop
-"QMessageBox/iconPixmap" qmessagebox.html#iconPixmap-prop
-"QMessageBox/text" qmessagebox.html#text-prop
-"QMessageBox/textFormat" qmessagebox.html#textFormat-prop
-"QMultiLineEdit/alignment" qmultilineedit.html#alignment-prop
-"QMultiLineEdit/atBeginning" qmultilineedit.html#atBeginning-prop
-"QMultiLineEdit/atEnd" qmultilineedit.html#atEnd-prop
-"QMultiLineEdit/edited" qmultilineedit.html#edited-prop
-"QMultiLineEdit/numLines" qmultilineedit.html#numLines-prop
-"QObject/name" qobject.html#name-prop
-"QPopupMenu/checkable" qpopupmenu.html#checkable-prop
-"QProgressBar/centerIndicator" qprogressbar.html#centerIndicator-prop
-"QProgressBar/indicatorFollowsStyle" qprogressbar.html#indicatorFollowsStyle-prop
-"QProgressBar/percentageVisible" qprogressbar.html#percentageVisible-prop
-"QProgressBar/progress" qprogressbar.html#progress-prop
-"QProgressBar/progressString" qprogressbar.html#progressString-prop
-"QProgressBar/totalSteps" qprogressbar.html#totalSteps-prop
-"QProgressDialog/autoClose" qprogressdialog.html#autoClose-prop
-"QProgressDialog/autoReset" qprogressdialog.html#autoReset-prop
-"QProgressDialog/labelText" qprogressdialog.html#labelText-prop
-"QProgressDialog/minimumDuration" qprogressdialog.html#minimumDuration-prop
-"QProgressDialog/progress" qprogressdialog.html#progress-prop
-"QProgressDialog/totalSteps" qprogressdialog.html#totalSteps-prop
-"QProgressDialog/wasCanceled" qprogressdialog.html#wasCanceled-prop
-"QProgressDialog/wasCancelled" qprogressdialog.html#wasCancelled-prop
-"QPushButton/autoDefault" qpushbutton.html#autoDefault-prop
-"QPushButton/default" qpushbutton.html#default-prop
-"QPushButton/flat" qpushbutton.html#flat-prop
-"QPushButton/iconSet" qpushbutton.html#iconSet-prop
-"QPushButton/menuButton" qpushbutton.html#menuButton-prop
-"QRadioButton/checked" qradiobutton.html#checked-prop
-"QScrollBar/draggingSlider" qscrollbar.html#draggingSlider-prop
-"QScrollBar/lineStep" qscrollbar.html#lineStep-prop
-"QScrollBar/maxValue" qscrollbar.html#maxValue-prop
-"QScrollBar/minValue" qscrollbar.html#minValue-prop
-"QScrollBar/orientation" qscrollbar.html#orientation-prop
-"QScrollBar/pageStep" qscrollbar.html#pageStep-prop
-"QScrollBar/tracking" qscrollbar.html#tracking-prop
-"QScrollBar/value" qscrollbar.html#value-prop
-"QScrollView/contentsHeight" qscrollview.html#contentsHeight-prop
-"QScrollView/contentsWidth" qscrollview.html#contentsWidth-prop
-"QScrollView/contentsX" qscrollview.html#contentsX-prop
-"QScrollView/contentsY" qscrollview.html#contentsY-prop
-"QScrollView/dragAutoScroll" qscrollview.html#dragAutoScroll-prop
-"QScrollView/hScrollBarMode" qscrollview.html#hScrollBarMode-prop
-"QScrollView/resizePolicy" qscrollview.html#resizePolicy-prop
-"QScrollView/vScrollBarMode" qscrollview.html#vScrollBarMode-prop
-"QScrollView/visibleHeight" qscrollview.html#visibleHeight-prop
-"QScrollView/visibleWidth" qscrollview.html#visibleWidth-prop
-"QSlider/lineStep" qslider.html#lineStep-prop
-"QSlider/maxValue" qslider.html#maxValue-prop
-"QSlider/minValue" qslider.html#minValue-prop
-"QSlider/orientation" qslider.html#orientation-prop
-"QSlider/pageStep" qslider.html#pageStep-prop
-"QSlider/tickInterval" qslider.html#tickInterval-prop
-"QSlider/tickmarks" qslider.html#tickmarks-prop
-"QSlider/tracking" qslider.html#tracking-prop
-"QSlider/value" qslider.html#value-prop
-"QSpinBox/buttonSymbols" qspinbox.html#buttonSymbols-prop
-"QSpinBox/cleanText" qspinbox.html#cleanText-prop
-"QSpinBox/lineStep" qspinbox.html#lineStep-prop
-"QSpinBox/maxValue" qspinbox.html#maxValue-prop
-"QSpinBox/minValue" qspinbox.html#minValue-prop
-"QSpinBox/prefix" qspinbox.html#prefix-prop
-"QSpinBox/specialValueText" qspinbox.html#specialValueText-prop
-"QSpinBox/suffix" qspinbox.html#suffix-prop
-"QSpinBox/text" qspinbox.html#text-prop
-"QSpinBox/value" qspinbox.html#value-prop
-"QSpinBox/wrapping" qspinbox.html#wrapping-prop
-"QSplitter/childrenCollapsible" qsplitter.html#childrenCollapsible-prop
-"QSplitter/handleWidth" qsplitter.html#handleWidth-prop
-"QSplitter/opaqueResize" qsplitter.html#opaqueResize-prop
-"QSplitter/orientation" qsplitter.html#orientation-prop
-"QSqlDatabase/connectOptions" qsqldatabase.html#connectOptions-prop
-"QSqlDatabase/databaseName" qsqldatabase.html#databaseName-prop
-"QSqlDatabase/hostName" qsqldatabase.html#hostName-prop
-"QSqlDatabase/password" qsqldatabase.html#password-prop
-"QSqlDatabase/port" qsqldatabase.html#port-prop
-"QSqlDatabase/userName" qsqldatabase.html#userName-prop
-"QStatusBar/sizeGripEnabled" qstatusbar.html#sizeGripEnabled-prop
-"QTabBar/count" qtabbar.html#count-prop
-"QTabBar/currentTab" qtabbar.html#currentTab-prop
-"QTabBar/keyboardFocusTab" qtabbar.html#keyboardFocusTab-prop
-"QTabBar/shape" qtabbar.html#shape-prop
-"QTabWidget/count" qtabwidget.html#count-prop
-"QTabWidget/currentPage" qtabwidget.html#currentPage-prop
-"QTabWidget/margin" qtabwidget.html#margin-prop
-"QTabWidget/tabPosition" qtabwidget.html#tabPosition-prop
-"QTabWidget/tabShape" qtabwidget.html#tabShape-prop
-"QTable/columnMovingEnabled" qtable.html#columnMovingEnabled-prop
-"QTable/focusStyle" qtable.html#focusStyle-prop
-"QTable/numCols" qtable.html#numCols-prop
-"QTable/numRows" qtable.html#numRows-prop
-"QTable/numSelections" qtable.html#numSelections-prop
-"QTable/readOnly" qtable.html#readOnly-prop
-"QTable/rowMovingEnabled" qtable.html#rowMovingEnabled-prop
-"QTable/selectionMode" qtable.html#selectionMode-prop
-"QTable/showGrid" qtable.html#showGrid-prop
-"QTable/sorting" qtable.html#sorting-prop
-"QTextBrowser/source" qtextbrowser.html#source-prop
-"QTextEdit/autoFormatting" qtextedit.html#autoFormatting-prop
-"QTextEdit/documentTitle" qtextedit.html#documentTitle-prop
-"QTextEdit/hasSelectedText" qtextedit.html#hasSelectedText-prop
-"QTextEdit/length" qtextedit.html#length-prop
-"QTextEdit/linkUnderline" qtextedit.html#linkUnderline-prop
-"QTextEdit/modified" qtextedit.html#modified-prop
-"QTextEdit/overwriteMode" qtextedit.html#overwriteMode-prop
-"QTextEdit/paper" qtextedit.html#paper-prop
-"QTextEdit/readOnly" qtextedit.html#readOnly-prop
-"QTextEdit/selectedText" qtextedit.html#selectedText-prop
-"QTextEdit/tabChangesFocus" qtextedit.html#tabChangesFocus-prop
-"QTextEdit/tabStopWidth" qtextedit.html#tabStopWidth-prop
-"QTextEdit/text" qtextedit.html#text-prop
-"QTextEdit/textFormat" qtextedit.html#textFormat-prop
-"QTextEdit/undoDepth" qtextedit.html#undoDepth-prop
-"QTextEdit/undoRedoEnabled" qtextedit.html#undoRedoEnabled-prop
-"QTextEdit/wordWrap" qtextedit.html#wordWrap-prop
-"QTextEdit/wrapColumnOrWidth" qtextedit.html#wrapColumnOrWidth-prop
-"QTextEdit/wrapPolicy" qtextedit.html#wrapPolicy-prop
+"QLCDNumber/intValue" ntqlcdnumber.html#intValue-prop
+"QLCDNumber/mode" ntqlcdnumber.html#mode-prop
+"QLCDNumber/numDigits" ntqlcdnumber.html#numDigits-prop
+"QLCDNumber/segmentStyle" ntqlcdnumber.html#segmentStyle-prop
+"QLCDNumber/smallDecimalPoint" ntqlcdnumber.html#smallDecimalPoint-prop
+"QLCDNumber/value" ntqlcdnumber.html#value-prop
+"QLabel/alignment" ntqlabel.html#alignment-prop
+"QLabel/indent" ntqlabel.html#indent-prop
+"QLabel/pixmap" ntqlabel.html#pixmap-prop
+"QLabel/scaledContents" ntqlabel.html#scaledContents-prop
+"QLabel/text" ntqlabel.html#text-prop
+"QLabel/textFormat" ntqlabel.html#textFormat-prop
+"QLayout/margin" ntqlayout.html#margin-prop
+"QLayout/resizeMode" ntqlayout.html#resizeMode-prop
+"QLayout/spacing" ntqlayout.html#spacing-prop
+"QLineEdit/acceptableInput" ntqlineedit.html#acceptableInput-prop
+"QLineEdit/alignment" ntqlineedit.html#alignment-prop
+"QLineEdit/cursorPosition" ntqlineedit.html#cursorPosition-prop
+"QLineEdit/displayText" ntqlineedit.html#displayText-prop
+"QLineEdit/dragEnabled" ntqlineedit.html#dragEnabled-prop
+"QLineEdit/echoMode" ntqlineedit.html#echoMode-prop
+"QLineEdit/edited" ntqlineedit.html#edited-prop
+"QLineEdit/frame" ntqlineedit.html#frame-prop
+"QLineEdit/hasMarkedText" ntqlineedit.html#hasMarkedText-prop
+"QLineEdit/hasSelectedText" ntqlineedit.html#hasSelectedText-prop
+"QLineEdit/inputMask" ntqlineedit.html#inputMask-prop
+"QLineEdit/markedText" ntqlineedit.html#markedText-prop
+"QLineEdit/maxLength" ntqlineedit.html#maxLength-prop
+"QLineEdit/modified" ntqlineedit.html#modified-prop
+"QLineEdit/readOnly" ntqlineedit.html#readOnly-prop
+"QLineEdit/redoAvailable" ntqlineedit.html#redoAvailable-prop
+"QLineEdit/selectedText" ntqlineedit.html#selectedText-prop
+"QLineEdit/text" ntqlineedit.html#text-prop
+"QLineEdit/undoAvailable" ntqlineedit.html#undoAvailable-prop
+"QListBox/columnMode" ntqlistbox.html#columnMode-prop
+"QListBox/count" ntqlistbox.html#count-prop
+"QListBox/currentItem" ntqlistbox.html#currentItem-prop
+"QListBox/currentText" ntqlistbox.html#currentText-prop
+"QListBox/multiSelection" ntqlistbox.html#multiSelection-prop
+"QListBox/numColumns" ntqlistbox.html#numColumns-prop
+"QListBox/numItemsVisible" ntqlistbox.html#numItemsVisible-prop
+"QListBox/numRows" ntqlistbox.html#numRows-prop
+"QListBox/rowMode" ntqlistbox.html#rowMode-prop
+"QListBox/selectionMode" ntqlistbox.html#selectionMode-prop
+"QListBox/topItem" ntqlistbox.html#topItem-prop
+"QListBox/variableHeight" ntqlistbox.html#variableHeight-prop
+"QListBox/variableWidth" ntqlistbox.html#variableWidth-prop
+"QListView/allColumnsShowFocus" ntqlistview.html#allColumnsShowFocus-prop
+"QListView/childCount" ntqlistview.html#childCount-prop
+"QListView/columns" ntqlistview.html#columns-prop
+"QListView/defaultRenameAction" ntqlistview.html#defaultRenameAction-prop
+"QListView/itemMargin" ntqlistview.html#itemMargin-prop
+"QListView/multiSelection" ntqlistview.html#multiSelection-prop
+"QListView/resizeMode" ntqlistview.html#resizeMode-prop
+"QListView/rootIsDecorated" ntqlistview.html#rootIsDecorated-prop
+"QListView/selectionMode" ntqlistview.html#selectionMode-prop
+"QListView/showSortIndicator" ntqlistview.html#showSortIndicator-prop
+"QListView/showToolTips" ntqlistview.html#showToolTips-prop
+"QListView/treeStepSize" ntqlistview.html#treeStepSize-prop
+"QMainWindow/dockWindowsMovable" ntqmainwindow.html#dockWindowsMovable-prop
+"QMainWindow/opaqueMoving" ntqmainwindow.html#opaqueMoving-prop
+"QMainWindow/rightJustification" ntqmainwindow.html#rightJustification-prop
+"QMainWindow/usesBigPixmaps" ntqmainwindow.html#usesBigPixmaps-prop
+"QMainWindow/usesTextLabel" ntqmainwindow.html#usesTextLabel-prop
+"QMenuBar/defaultUp" ntqmenubar.html#defaultUp-prop
+"QMenuBar/separator" ntqmenubar.html#separator-prop
+"QMessageBox/icon" ntqmessagebox.html#icon-prop
+"QMessageBox/iconPixmap" ntqmessagebox.html#iconPixmap-prop
+"QMessageBox/text" ntqmessagebox.html#text-prop
+"QMessageBox/textFormat" ntqmessagebox.html#textFormat-prop
+"QMultiLineEdit/alignment" ntqmultilineedit.html#alignment-prop
+"QMultiLineEdit/atBeginning" ntqmultilineedit.html#atBeginning-prop
+"QMultiLineEdit/atEnd" ntqmultilineedit.html#atEnd-prop
+"QMultiLineEdit/edited" ntqmultilineedit.html#edited-prop
+"QMultiLineEdit/numLines" ntqmultilineedit.html#numLines-prop
+"QObject/name" ntqobject.html#name-prop
+"QPopupMenu/checkable" ntqpopupmenu.html#checkable-prop
+"QProgressBar/centerIndicator" ntqprogressbar.html#centerIndicator-prop
+"QProgressBar/indicatorFollowsStyle" ntqprogressbar.html#indicatorFollowsStyle-prop
+"QProgressBar/percentageVisible" ntqprogressbar.html#percentageVisible-prop
+"QProgressBar/progress" ntqprogressbar.html#progress-prop
+"QProgressBar/progressString" ntqprogressbar.html#progressString-prop
+"QProgressBar/totalSteps" ntqprogressbar.html#totalSteps-prop
+"QProgressDialog/autoClose" ntqprogressdialog.html#autoClose-prop
+"QProgressDialog/autoReset" ntqprogressdialog.html#autoReset-prop
+"QProgressDialog/labelText" ntqprogressdialog.html#labelText-prop
+"QProgressDialog/minimumDuration" ntqprogressdialog.html#minimumDuration-prop
+"QProgressDialog/progress" ntqprogressdialog.html#progress-prop
+"QProgressDialog/totalSteps" ntqprogressdialog.html#totalSteps-prop
+"QProgressDialog/wasCanceled" ntqprogressdialog.html#wasCanceled-prop
+"QProgressDialog/wasCancelled" ntqprogressdialog.html#wasCancelled-prop
+"QPushButton/autoDefault" ntqpushbutton.html#autoDefault-prop
+"QPushButton/default" ntqpushbutton.html#default-prop
+"QPushButton/flat" ntqpushbutton.html#flat-prop
+"QPushButton/iconSet" ntqpushbutton.html#iconSet-prop
+"QPushButton/menuButton" ntqpushbutton.html#menuButton-prop
+"QRadioButton/checked" ntqradiobutton.html#checked-prop
+"QScrollBar/draggingSlider" ntqscrollbar.html#draggingSlider-prop
+"QScrollBar/lineStep" ntqscrollbar.html#lineStep-prop
+"QScrollBar/maxValue" ntqscrollbar.html#maxValue-prop
+"QScrollBar/minValue" ntqscrollbar.html#minValue-prop
+"QScrollBar/orientation" ntqscrollbar.html#orientation-prop
+"QScrollBar/pageStep" ntqscrollbar.html#pageStep-prop
+"QScrollBar/tracking" ntqscrollbar.html#tracking-prop
+"QScrollBar/value" ntqscrollbar.html#value-prop
+"QScrollView/contentsHeight" ntqscrollview.html#contentsHeight-prop
+"QScrollView/contentsWidth" ntqscrollview.html#contentsWidth-prop
+"QScrollView/contentsX" ntqscrollview.html#contentsX-prop
+"QScrollView/contentsY" ntqscrollview.html#contentsY-prop
+"QScrollView/dragAutoScroll" ntqscrollview.html#dragAutoScroll-prop
+"QScrollView/hScrollBarMode" ntqscrollview.html#hScrollBarMode-prop
+"QScrollView/resizePolicy" ntqscrollview.html#resizePolicy-prop
+"QScrollView/vScrollBarMode" ntqscrollview.html#vScrollBarMode-prop
+"QScrollView/visibleHeight" ntqscrollview.html#visibleHeight-prop
+"QScrollView/visibleWidth" ntqscrollview.html#visibleWidth-prop
+"QSlider/lineStep" ntqslider.html#lineStep-prop
+"QSlider/maxValue" ntqslider.html#maxValue-prop
+"QSlider/minValue" ntqslider.html#minValue-prop
+"QSlider/orientation" ntqslider.html#orientation-prop
+"QSlider/pageStep" ntqslider.html#pageStep-prop
+"QSlider/tickInterval" ntqslider.html#tickInterval-prop
+"QSlider/tickmarks" ntqslider.html#tickmarks-prop
+"QSlider/tracking" ntqslider.html#tracking-prop
+"QSlider/value" ntqslider.html#value-prop
+"QSpinBox/buttonSymbols" ntqspinbox.html#buttonSymbols-prop
+"QSpinBox/cleanText" ntqspinbox.html#cleanText-prop
+"QSpinBox/lineStep" ntqspinbox.html#lineStep-prop
+"QSpinBox/maxValue" ntqspinbox.html#maxValue-prop
+"QSpinBox/minValue" ntqspinbox.html#minValue-prop
+"QSpinBox/prefix" ntqspinbox.html#prefix-prop
+"QSpinBox/specialValueText" ntqspinbox.html#specialValueText-prop
+"QSpinBox/suffix" ntqspinbox.html#suffix-prop
+"QSpinBox/text" ntqspinbox.html#text-prop
+"QSpinBox/value" ntqspinbox.html#value-prop
+"QSpinBox/wrapping" ntqspinbox.html#wrapping-prop
+"QSplitter/childrenCollapsible" ntqsplitter.html#childrenCollapsible-prop
+"QSplitter/handleWidth" ntqsplitter.html#handleWidth-prop
+"QSplitter/opaqueResize" ntqsplitter.html#opaqueResize-prop
+"QSplitter/orientation" ntqsplitter.html#orientation-prop
+"QSqlDatabase/connectOptions" ntqsqldatabase.html#connectOptions-prop
+"QSqlDatabase/databaseName" ntqsqldatabase.html#databaseName-prop
+"QSqlDatabase/hostName" ntqsqldatabase.html#hostName-prop
+"QSqlDatabase/password" ntqsqldatabase.html#password-prop
+"QSqlDatabase/port" ntqsqldatabase.html#port-prop
+"QSqlDatabase/userName" ntqsqldatabase.html#userName-prop
+"QStatusBar/sizeGripEnabled" ntqstatusbar.html#sizeGripEnabled-prop
+"QTabBar/count" ntqtabbar.html#count-prop
+"QTabBar/currentTab" ntqtabbar.html#currentTab-prop
+"QTabBar/keyboardFocusTab" ntqtabbar.html#keyboardFocusTab-prop
+"QTabBar/shape" ntqtabbar.html#shape-prop
+"QTabWidget/count" ntqtabwidget.html#count-prop
+"QTabWidget/currentPage" ntqtabwidget.html#currentPage-prop
+"QTabWidget/margin" ntqtabwidget.html#margin-prop
+"QTabWidget/tabPosition" ntqtabwidget.html#tabPosition-prop
+"QTabWidget/tabShape" ntqtabwidget.html#tabShape-prop
+"QTable/columnMovingEnabled" ntqtable.html#columnMovingEnabled-prop
+"QTable/focusStyle" ntqtable.html#focusStyle-prop
+"QTable/numCols" ntqtable.html#numCols-prop
+"QTable/numRows" ntqtable.html#numRows-prop
+"QTable/numSelections" ntqtable.html#numSelections-prop
+"QTable/readOnly" ntqtable.html#readOnly-prop
+"QTable/rowMovingEnabled" ntqtable.html#rowMovingEnabled-prop
+"QTable/selectionMode" ntqtable.html#selectionMode-prop
+"QTable/showGrid" ntqtable.html#showGrid-prop
+"QTable/sorting" ntqtable.html#sorting-prop
+"QTextBrowser/source" ntqtextbrowser.html#source-prop
+"QTextEdit/autoFormatting" ntqtextedit.html#autoFormatting-prop
+"QTextEdit/documentTitle" ntqtextedit.html#documentTitle-prop
+"QTextEdit/hasSelectedText" ntqtextedit.html#hasSelectedText-prop
+"QTextEdit/length" ntqtextedit.html#length-prop
+"QTextEdit/linkUnderline" ntqtextedit.html#linkUnderline-prop
+"QTextEdit/modified" ntqtextedit.html#modified-prop
+"QTextEdit/overwriteMode" ntqtextedit.html#overwriteMode-prop
+"QTextEdit/paper" ntqtextedit.html#paper-prop
+"QTextEdit/readOnly" ntqtextedit.html#readOnly-prop
+"QTextEdit/selectedText" ntqtextedit.html#selectedText-prop
+"QTextEdit/tabChangesFocus" ntqtextedit.html#tabChangesFocus-prop
+"QTextEdit/tabStopWidth" ntqtextedit.html#tabStopWidth-prop
+"QTextEdit/text" ntqtextedit.html#text-prop
+"QTextEdit/textFormat" ntqtextedit.html#textFormat-prop
+"QTextEdit/undoDepth" ntqtextedit.html#undoDepth-prop
+"QTextEdit/undoRedoEnabled" ntqtextedit.html#undoRedoEnabled-prop
+"QTextEdit/wordWrap" ntqtextedit.html#wordWrap-prop
+"QTextEdit/wrapColumnOrWidth" ntqtextedit.html#wrapColumnOrWidth-prop
+"QTextEdit/wrapPolicy" ntqtextedit.html#wrapPolicy-prop
 "QTimeEdit/autoAdvance" qtimeedit.html#autoAdvance-prop
 "QTimeEdit/display" qtimeedit.html#display-prop
 "QTimeEdit/maxValue" qtimeedit.html#maxValue-prop
 "QTimeEdit/minValue" qtimeedit.html#minValue-prop
 "QTimeEdit/time" qtimeedit.html#time-prop
-"QToolBar/label" qtoolbar.html#label-prop
-"QToolBox/count" qtoolbox.html#count-prop
-"QToolBox/currentIndex" qtoolbox.html#currentIndex-prop
-"QToolButton/autoRaise" qtoolbutton.html#autoRaise-prop
-"QToolButton/iconSet" qtoolbutton.html#iconSet-prop
-"QToolButton/offIconSet" qtoolbutton.html#offIconSet-prop
-"QToolButton/onIconSet" qtoolbutton.html#onIconSet-prop
-"QToolButton/popupDelay" qtoolbutton.html#popupDelay-prop
-"QToolButton/textLabel" qtoolbutton.html#textLabel-prop
-"QToolButton/textPosition" qtoolbutton.html#textPosition-prop
-"QToolButton/usesBigPixmap" qtoolbutton.html#usesBigPixmap-prop
-"QToolButton/usesTextLabel" qtoolbutton.html#usesTextLabel-prop
+"QToolBar/label" ntqtoolbar.html#label-prop
+"QToolBox/count" ntqtoolbox.html#count-prop
+"QToolBox/currentIndex" ntqtoolbox.html#currentIndex-prop
+"QToolButton/autoRaise" ntqtoolbutton.html#autoRaise-prop
+"QToolButton/iconSet" ntqtoolbutton.html#iconSet-prop
+"QToolButton/offIconSet" ntqtoolbutton.html#offIconSet-prop
+"QToolButton/onIconSet" ntqtoolbutton.html#onIconSet-prop
+"QToolButton/popupDelay" ntqtoolbutton.html#popupDelay-prop
+"QToolButton/textLabel" ntqtoolbutton.html#textLabel-prop
+"QToolButton/textPosition" ntqtoolbutton.html#textPosition-prop
+"QToolButton/usesBigPixmap" ntqtoolbutton.html#usesBigPixmap-prop
+"QToolButton/usesTextLabel" ntqtoolbutton.html#usesTextLabel-prop
 "QToolTipGroup/delay" qtooltipgroup.html#delay-prop
 "QToolTipGroup/enabled" qtooltipgroup.html#enabled-prop
-"QWidget/acceptDrops" qwidget.html#acceptDrops-prop
-"QWidget/autoMask" qwidget.html#autoMask-prop
-"QWidget/backgroundBrush" qwidget.html#backgroundBrush-prop
-"QWidget/backgroundMode" qwidget.html#backgroundMode-prop
-"QWidget/backgroundOrigin" qwidget.html#backgroundOrigin-prop
-"QWidget/baseSize" qwidget.html#baseSize-prop
-"QWidget/caption" qwidget.html#caption-prop
-"QWidget/childrenRect" qwidget.html#childrenRect-prop
-"QWidget/childrenRegion" qwidget.html#childrenRegion-prop
-"QWidget/colorGroup" qwidget.html#colorGroup-prop
-"QWidget/cursor" qwidget.html#cursor-prop
-"QWidget/customWhatsThis" qwidget.html#customWhatsThis-prop
-"QWidget/enabled" qwidget.html#enabled-prop
-"QWidget/focus" qwidget.html#focus-prop
-"QWidget/focusEnabled" qwidget.html#focusEnabled-prop
-"QWidget/focusPolicy" qwidget.html#focusPolicy-prop
-"QWidget/font" qwidget.html#font-prop
-"QWidget/frameGeometry" qwidget.html#frameGeometry-prop
-"QWidget/frameSize" qwidget.html#frameSize-prop
-"QWidget/fullScreen" qwidget.html#fullScreen-prop
-"QWidget/geometry" qwidget.html#geometry-prop
-"QWidget/height" qwidget.html#height-prop
-"QWidget/hidden" qwidget.html#hidden-prop
-"QWidget/icon" qwidget.html#icon-prop
-"QWidget/iconText" qwidget.html#iconText-prop
-"QWidget/inputMethodEnabled" qwidget.html#inputMethodEnabled-prop
-"QWidget/isActiveWindow" qwidget.html#isActiveWindow-prop
-"QWidget/isDesktop" qwidget.html#isDesktop-prop
-"QWidget/isDialog" qwidget.html#isDialog-prop
-"QWidget/isModal" qwidget.html#isModal-prop
-"QWidget/isPopup" qwidget.html#isPopup-prop
-"QWidget/isTopLevel" qwidget.html#isTopLevel-prop
-"QWidget/maximized" qwidget.html#maximized-prop
-"QWidget/maximumHeight" qwidget.html#maximumHeight-prop
-"QWidget/maximumSize" qwidget.html#maximumSize-prop
-"QWidget/maximumWidth" qwidget.html#maximumWidth-prop
-"QWidget/microFocusHint" qwidget.html#microFocusHint-prop
-"QWidget/minimized" qwidget.html#minimized-prop
-"QWidget/minimumHeight" qwidget.html#minimumHeight-prop
-"QWidget/minimumSize" qwidget.html#minimumSize-prop
-"QWidget/minimumSizeHint" qwidget.html#minimumSizeHint-prop
-"QWidget/minimumWidth" qwidget.html#minimumWidth-prop
-"QWidget/mouseTracking" qwidget.html#mouseTracking-prop
-"QWidget/ownCursor" qwidget.html#ownCursor-prop
-"QWidget/ownFont" qwidget.html#ownFont-prop
-"QWidget/ownPalette" qwidget.html#ownPalette-prop
-"QWidget/palette" qwidget.html#palette-prop
-"QWidget/paletteBackgroundColor" qwidget.html#paletteBackgroundColor-prop
-"QWidget/paletteBackgroundPixmap" qwidget.html#paletteBackgroundPixmap-prop
-"QWidget/paletteForegroundColor" qwidget.html#paletteForegroundColor-prop
-"QWidget/pos" qwidget.html#pos-prop
-"QWidget/rect" qwidget.html#rect-prop
-"QWidget/shown" qwidget.html#shown-prop
-"QWidget/size" qwidget.html#size-prop
-"QWidget/sizeHint" qwidget.html#sizeHint-prop
-"QWidget/sizeIncrement" qwidget.html#sizeIncrement-prop
-"QWidget/sizePolicy" qwidget.html#sizePolicy-prop
-"QWidget/underMouse" qwidget.html#underMouse-prop
-"QWidget/updatesEnabled" qwidget.html#updatesEnabled-prop
-"QWidget/visible" qwidget.html#visible-prop
-"QWidget/visibleRect" qwidget.html#visibleRect-prop
-"QWidget/width" qwidget.html#width-prop
-"QWidget/windowOpacity" qwidget.html#windowOpacity-prop
-"QWidget/x" qwidget.html#x-prop
-"QWidget/y" qwidget.html#y-prop
-"QWizard/titleFont" qwizard.html#titleFont-prop
-"QWorkspace/scrollBarsEnabled" qworkspace.html#scrollBarsEnabled-prop
+"QWidget/acceptDrops" ntqwidget.html#acceptDrops-prop
+"QWidget/autoMask" ntqwidget.html#autoMask-prop
+"QWidget/backgroundBrush" ntqwidget.html#backgroundBrush-prop
+"QWidget/backgroundMode" ntqwidget.html#backgroundMode-prop
+"QWidget/backgroundOrigin" ntqwidget.html#backgroundOrigin-prop
+"QWidget/baseSize" ntqwidget.html#baseSize-prop
+"QWidget/caption" ntqwidget.html#caption-prop
+"QWidget/childrenRect" ntqwidget.html#childrenRect-prop
+"QWidget/childrenRegion" ntqwidget.html#childrenRegion-prop
+"QWidget/colorGroup" ntqwidget.html#colorGroup-prop
+"QWidget/cursor" ntqwidget.html#cursor-prop
+"QWidget/customWhatsThis" ntqwidget.html#customWhatsThis-prop
+"QWidget/enabled" ntqwidget.html#enabled-prop
+"QWidget/focus" ntqwidget.html#focus-prop
+"QWidget/focusEnabled" ntqwidget.html#focusEnabled-prop
+"QWidget/focusPolicy" ntqwidget.html#focusPolicy-prop
+"QWidget/font" ntqwidget.html#font-prop
+"QWidget/frameGeometry" ntqwidget.html#frameGeometry-prop
+"QWidget/frameSize" ntqwidget.html#frameSize-prop
+"QWidget/fullScreen" ntqwidget.html#fullScreen-prop
+"QWidget/geometry" ntqwidget.html#geometry-prop
+"QWidget/height" ntqwidget.html#height-prop
+"QWidget/hidden" ntqwidget.html#hidden-prop
+"QWidget/icon" ntqwidget.html#icon-prop
+"QWidget/iconText" ntqwidget.html#iconText-prop
+"QWidget/inputMethodEnabled" ntqwidget.html#inputMethodEnabled-prop
+"QWidget/isActiveWindow" ntqwidget.html#isActiveWindow-prop
+"QWidget/isDesktop" ntqwidget.html#isDesktop-prop
+"QWidget/isDialog" ntqwidget.html#isDialog-prop
+"QWidget/isModal" ntqwidget.html#isModal-prop
+"QWidget/isPopup" ntqwidget.html#isPopup-prop
+"QWidget/isTopLevel" ntqwidget.html#isTopLevel-prop
+"QWidget/maximized" ntqwidget.html#maximized-prop
+"QWidget/maximumHeight" ntqwidget.html#maximumHeight-prop
+"QWidget/maximumSize" ntqwidget.html#maximumSize-prop
+"QWidget/maximumWidth" ntqwidget.html#maximumWidth-prop
+"QWidget/microFocusHint" ntqwidget.html#microFocusHint-prop
+"QWidget/minimized" ntqwidget.html#minimized-prop
+"QWidget/minimumHeight" ntqwidget.html#minimumHeight-prop
+"QWidget/minimumSize" ntqwidget.html#minimumSize-prop
+"QWidget/minimumSizeHint" ntqwidget.html#minimumSizeHint-prop
+"QWidget/minimumWidth" ntqwidget.html#minimumWidth-prop
+"QWidget/mouseTracking" ntqwidget.html#mouseTracking-prop
+"QWidget/ownCursor" ntqwidget.html#ownCursor-prop
+"QWidget/ownFont" ntqwidget.html#ownFont-prop
+"QWidget/ownPalette" ntqwidget.html#ownPalette-prop
+"QWidget/palette" ntqwidget.html#palette-prop
+"QWidget/paletteBackgroundColor" ntqwidget.html#paletteBackgroundColor-prop
+"QWidget/paletteBackgroundPixmap" ntqwidget.html#paletteBackgroundPixmap-prop
+"QWidget/paletteForegroundColor" ntqwidget.html#paletteForegroundColor-prop
+"QWidget/pos" ntqwidget.html#pos-prop
+"QWidget/rect" ntqwidget.html#rect-prop
+"QWidget/shown" ntqwidget.html#shown-prop
+"QWidget/size" ntqwidget.html#size-prop
+"QWidget/sizeHint" ntqwidget.html#sizeHint-prop
+"QWidget/sizeIncrement" ntqwidget.html#sizeIncrement-prop
+"QWidget/sizePolicy" ntqwidget.html#sizePolicy-prop
+"QWidget/underMouse" ntqwidget.html#underMouse-prop
+"QWidget/updatesEnabled" ntqwidget.html#updatesEnabled-prop
+"QWidget/visible" ntqwidget.html#visible-prop
+"QWidget/visibleRect" ntqwidget.html#visibleRect-prop
+"QWidget/width" ntqwidget.html#width-prop
+"QWidget/windowOpacity" ntqwidget.html#windowOpacity-prop
+"QWidget/x" ntqwidget.html#x-prop
+"QWidget/y" ntqwidget.html#y-prop
+"QWizard/titleFont" ntqwizard.html#titleFont-prop
+"QWorkspace/scrollBarsEnabled" ntqworkspace.html#scrollBarsEnabled-prop
diff --git a/doc/html/qaccel-h.html b/doc/html/qaccel-h.html
index da828ee15..77cbf04a8 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaccel-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaccel-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qaccel.h Include File
+ntqaccel.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
    TQAccel Class Reference
    
-
-
    The TQAccel class handles keyboard accelerator and shortcut keys.
-More...
-
    #include <qaccel.h>
-
    Inherits TQObject.
-
    List of all member functions.
-
    Public Members
    
-
      
-
    • TQAccel ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
-
    • TQAccel ( TQWidget * watch, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
-
    • ~TQAccel ()
      • 
-
    • bool isEnabled () const
      • 
-
    • void setEnabled ( bool enable )
      • 
-
    • uint count () const
      • 
-
    • int insertItem ( const TQKeySequence & key, int id = -1 )
      • 
-
    • void removeItem ( int id )
      • 
-
    • void clear ()
      • 
-
    • TQKeySequence key ( int id )
      • 
-
    • int findKey ( const TQKeySequence & key ) const
      • 
-
    • bool isItemEnabled ( int id ) const
      • 
-
    • void setItemEnabled ( int id, bool enable )
      • 
-
    • bool connectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
      • 
-
    • bool disconnectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
      • 
-
    • void repairEventFilter ()  (obsolete)
      • 
-
    • void setWhatsThis ( int id, const TQString & text )
      • 
-
    • TQString whatsThis ( int id ) const
      • 
-
    
-
    Signals
    
-
-
    Static Public Members
    
-
      
-
    • TQKeySequence shortcutKey ( const TQString & str )
      • 
-
    • TQString keyToString ( TQKeySequence k )  (obsolete)
      • 
-
    • TQKeySequence stringToKey ( const TQString & s )  (obsolete)
      • 
-
    
-
    Protected Members
    
-
      
-
    • virtual bool eventFilter ( TQObject *, TQEvent * )  (obsolete)
      • 
-
    
-
    Detailed Description
    
-
-
-The TQAccel class handles keyboard accelerator and shortcut keys.
-
     
-
     A keyboard accelerator triggers an action when a certain key
-combination is pressed. The accelerator handles all keyboard
-activity for all the children of one top-level widget, so it is
-not affected by the keyboard focus.
-
     In most cases, you will not need to use this class directly. Use
-the TQAction class to create actions with accelerators that can be
-used in both menus and toolbars. If you're only interested in
-menus use TQMenuData::insertItem() or TQMenuData::setAccel() to make
-accelerators for operations that are also available on menus. Many
-widgets automatically generate accelerators, such as TQButton,
-TQGroupBox, TQLabel (with TQLabel::setBuddy()), TQMenuBar and TQTabBar.
-Example:
-
    -        TQPushButton p( "&Exit", parent ); // automatic shortcut ALT+Key_E
-        TQPopupMenu *fileMenu = new fileMenu( parent );
-        fileMenu->insertItem( "Undo", parent, SLOT(undo()), CTRL+Key_Z );
-    
    
- 
-
     A TQAccel contains a list of accelerator items that can be
-manipulated using insertItem(), removeItem(), clear(), key() and
-findKey().
-
     Each accelerator item consists of an identifier and a TQKeySequence. A single key sequence consists of a keyboard code
-combined with modifiers (SHIFT, CTRL, ALT or UNICODE_ACCEL). For example, CTRL + Key_P could be a shortcut
-for printing a document. The key codes are listed in qnamespace.h. As an alternative, use UNICODE_ACCEL with the
-unicode code point of the character. For example, UNICODE_ACCEL + 'A' gives the same accelerator as Key_A.
-
     When an accelerator key is pressed, the accelerator sends out the
-signal activated() with a number that identifies this particular
-accelerator item. Accelerator items can also be individually
-connected, so that two different keys will activate two different
-slots (see connectItem() and disconnectItem()).
-
     The activated() signal is not emitted when two or more
-accelerators match the same key.  Instead, the first matching
-accelerator sends out the activatedAmbiguously() signal. By
-pressing the key multiple times, users can navigate between all
-matching accelerators. Some standard controls like TQPushButton and
-TQCheckBox connect the activatedAmbiguously() signal to the
-harmless setFocus() slot, whereas activated() is connected to a
-slot invoking the button's action.	Most controls, like TQLabel and
-TQTabBar, treat activated() and activatedAmbiguously() as
-equivalent.
-
     Use setEnabled() to enable or disable all the items in an
-accelerator, or setItemEnabled() to enable or disable individual
-items. An item is active only when both the TQAccel and the item
-itself are enabled.
-
     The function setWhatsThis() specifies a help text that appears
-when the user presses an accelerator key in What's This mode.
-
     The accelerator will be deleted when parent is deleted,
-and will consume relevant key events until then.
-
     Please note that the accelerator
-
    -        accelerator->insertItem( TQKeySequence("M") );
-    
    
- 
-can be triggered with both the 'M' key, and with Shift+M,
-unless a second accelerator is defined for the Shift+M
-combination.
-
     Example:
-
    -        TQAccel *a = new TQAccel( myWindow );        // create accels for myWindow
-        a->connectItem( a->insertItem(Key_P+CTRL), // adds Ctrl+P accelerator
-                        myWindow,                  // connected to myWindow's
-                        SLOT(printDoc()) );        // printDoc() slot
-    
    
- 
-
     
    See also TQKeyEvent, TQWidget::keyPressEvent(), TQMenuData::setAccel(), TQButton::accel, TQLabel::setBuddy(), TQKeySequence, GUI Design Handbook: Keyboard Shortcuts, and Miscellaneous Classes.
-
-
    Member Function Documentation
    
-
    TQAccel::TQAccel ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
-
    
-Constructs a TQAccel object called name, with parent parent.
-The accelerator operates on parent.
-
-
    TQAccel::TQAccel ( TQWidget * watch, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
-
    
-Constructs a TQAccel object called name, that operates on watch, and is a child of parent.
-
     This constructor is not needed for normal application programming.
-
-
    TQAccel::~TQAccel ()
-
    
-Destroys the accelerator object and frees all allocated resources.
-
-
    void TQAccel::activated ( int id ) [signal]
-
    
-
-
     This signal is emitted when an accelerator key is pressed. id
-is a number that identifies this particular accelerator item.
-
     
    See also activatedAmbiguously().
-
-
    void TQAccel::activatedAmbiguously ( int id ) [signal]
-
    
-
-
     This signal is emitted when an accelerator key is pressed. id
-is a number that identifies this particular accelerator item.
-
     
    See also activated().
-
-
    void TQAccel::clear ()
-
    
-Removes all accelerator items.
-
-
    bool TQAccel::connectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
-
    
-Connects the accelerator item id to the slot member of receiver.
-
     
    -        a->connectItem( 201, mainView, SLOT(quit()) );
-    
    
- 
-
     Of course, you can also send a signal as member.
-
     Normally accelerators are connected to slots which then receive
-the activated(int id) signal with the id of the accelerator
-item that was activated. If you choose to connect a specific
-accelerator item using this function, the activated() signal is
-emitted if the associated key sequence is pressed but no activated(int id) signal is emitted.
-
     
    See also disconnectItem().
-
-
    Example: t14/gamebrd.cpp.
-
    uint TQAccel::count () const
-
    
-Returns the number of accelerator items in this accelerator.
-
-
    bool TQAccel::disconnectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
-
    
-Disconnects an accelerator item with id id from the function
-called member in the receiver object.
-
     
    See also connectItem().
-
-
    bool TQAccel::eventFilter ( TQObject *, TQEvent * ) [virtual protected]
-
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-serves no purpose anymore 
-
    Reimplemented from TQObject.
-
    int TQAccel::findKey ( const TQKeySequence & key ) const
-
    
-Returns the identifier of the accelerator item with the key code
-key, or -1 if the item cannot be found.
-
-
    int TQAccel::insertItem ( const TQKeySequence & key, int id = -1 )
-
    
-Inserts an accelerator item and returns the item's identifier.
-
     key is a key code and an optional combination of SHIFT, CTRL
-and ALT. id is the accelerator item id.
-
     If id is negative, then the item will be assigned a unique
-negative identifier less than -1.
-
     
    -        TQAccel *a = new TQAccel( myWindow );        // create accels for myWindow
-        a->insertItem( CTRL + Key_P, 200 );        // Ctrl+P, e.g. to print document
-        a->insertItem( ALT + Key_X, 201 );         // Alt+X, e.g. to quit
-        a->insertItem( UNICODE_ACCEL + 'q', 202 ); // Unicode 'q', e.g. to quit
-        a->insertItem( Key_D );                    // gets a unique negative id < -1
-        a->insertItem( CTRL + SHIFT + Key_P );     // gets a unique negative id < -1
-    
    
- 
-
-
    Example: t14/gamebrd.cpp.
-
    bool TQAccel::isEnabled () const
-
    
-Returns TRUE if the accelerator is enabled; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
     
    See also setEnabled() and isItemEnabled().
-
-
    bool TQAccel::isItemEnabled ( int id ) const
-
    
-Returns TRUE if the accelerator item with the identifier id is
-enabled. Returns FALSE if the item is disabled or cannot be found.
-
     
    See also setItemEnabled() and isEnabled().
-
-
    TQKeySequence TQAccel::key ( int id )
-
    
-Returns the key sequence of the accelerator item with identifier
-id, or an invalid key sequence (0) if the id cannot be found.
-
-
    TQString TQAccel::keyToString ( TQKeySequence k ) [static]
-
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
     Creates an accelerator string for the key k.
-For instance CTRL+Key_O gives "Ctrl+O". The "Ctrl" etc.
-are translated (using TQObject::tr()) in the "TQAccel" context.
-
     The function is superfluous. Cast the TQKeySequence k to a
-TQString for the same effect.
-
-
    void TQAccel::removeItem ( int id )
-
    
-Removes the accelerator item with the identifier id.
-
-
    void TQAccel::repairEventFilter ()
-
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-serves no purpose anymore 
-
    void TQAccel::setEnabled ( bool enable )
-
    
-Enables the accelerator if enable is TRUE, or disables it if enable is FALSE.
-
     Individual keys can also be enabled or disabled using
-setItemEnabled(). To work, a key must be an enabled item in an
-enabled TQAccel.
-
     
    See also isEnabled() and setItemEnabled().
-
-
    void TQAccel::setItemEnabled ( int id, bool enable )
-
    
-Enables the accelerator item with the identifier id if enable is TRUE, and disables item id if enable is FALSE.
-
     To work, an item must be enabled and be in an enabled TQAccel.
-
     
    See also isItemEnabled() and isEnabled().
-
-
    void TQAccel::setWhatsThis ( int id, const TQString & text )
-
    
-Sets a What's This help text for the accelerator item id to text.
-
     The text will be shown when the application is in What's This mode
-and the user hits the accelerator key.
-
     To set What's This help on a menu item (with or without an
-accelerator key), use TQMenuData::setWhatsThis().
-
     
    See also whatsThis(), TQWhatsThis::inWhatsThisMode(), TQMenuData::setWhatsThis(), and TQAction::whatsThis.
-
-
    TQKeySequence TQAccel::shortcutKey ( const TQString & str ) [static]
-
    
-Returns the shortcut key sequence for str, or an invalid key
-sequence (0) if str has no shortcut sequence.
-
     For example, shortcutKey("E&xit") returns ALT+Key_X,
-shortcutKey("&Quit") returns ALT+Key_Q and shortcutKey("Quit")
-returns 0. (In code that does not inherit the TQt namespace class,
-you must write e.g. TQt::ALT+TQt::Key_Q.)
-
     We provide a list of common accelerators in English. At the time of writing, Microsoft and Open
-Group do not appear to have issued equivalent recommendations for
-other languages.
-
-
    TQKeySequence TQAccel::stringToKey ( const TQString & s ) [static]
-
    This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
     Returns an accelerator code for the string s. For example
-"Ctrl+O" gives CTRL+UNICODE_ACCEL+'O'. The strings "Ctrl",
-"Shift", "Alt" are recognized, as well as their translated
-equivalents in the "TQAccel" context (using TQObject::tr()). Returns 0
-if s is not recognized.
-
     This function is typically used with tr(), so that accelerator keys can be replaced in
-translations:
-
     
    -    TQPopupMenu *file = new TQPopupMenu( this );
-    file->insertItem( p1, tr("&Open..."), this, SLOT(open()),
-                      TQAccel::stringToKey(tr("Ctrl+O", "File|Open")) );
-  
    
- 
-
     Notice the "File|Open" translator comment. It is by no means
-necessary, but it provides some context for the human translator.
-
     The function is superfluous. Construct a TQKeySequence from the
-string s for the same effect.
-
     
    See also TQObject::tr() and Internationalization with TQt.
-
-
    Example: i18n/mywidget.cpp.
-
    TQString TQAccel::whatsThis ( int id ) const
-
    
-Returns the What's This help text for the specified item id or
-TQString::null if no text has been specified.
-
     
    See also setWhatsThis().
-
-
-
    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
-
-
    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
    TQt 3.3.8
    
-
    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qaccessible-h.html b/doc/html/qaccessible-h.html
index 4c404054c..eb72d2fe6 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaccessible-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaccessible-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qaccessible.h Include File
+ntqaccessible.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
    TQAccessible Class Reference
    
-
-
    The TQAccessible class provides enums and static functions
-relating to accessibility.
-More...
-
    #include <qaccessible.h>
-
    Inherited by TQAccessibleInterface.
-
    List of all member functions.
-
    Public Members
    
-
      
-
    • enum Event { SoundPlayed = 0x0001, Alert = 0x0002, ForegroundChanged = 0x0003, MenuStart = 0x0004, MenuEnd = 0x0005, PopupMenuStart = 0x0006, PopupMenuEnd = 0x0007, ContextHelpStart = 0x000C, ContextHelpEnd = 0x000D, DragDropStart = 0x000E, DragDropEnd = 0x000F, DialogStart = 0x0010, DialogEnd = 0x0011, ScrollingStart = 0x0012, ScrollingEnd = 0x0013, MenuCommand = 0x0018, ObjectCreated = 0x8000, ObjectDestroyed = 0x8001, ObjectShow = 0x8002, ObjectHide = 0x8003, ObjectReorder = 0x8004, Focus = 0x8005, Selection = 0x8006, SelectionAdd = 0x8007, SelectionRemove = 0x8008, SelectionWithin = 0x8009, StateChanged = 0x800A, LocationChanged = 0x800B, NameChanged = 0x800C, DescriptionChanged = 0x800D, ValueChanged = 0x800E, ParentChanged = 0x800F, HelpChanged = 0x80A0, DefaultActionChanged = 0x80B0, AcceleratorChanged = 0x80C0 }
      • 
-
    • enum State { Normal = 0x00000000, Unavailable = 0x00000001, Selected = 0x00000002, Focused = 0x00000004, Pressed = 0x00000008, Checked = 0x00000010, Mixed = 0x00000020, ReadOnly = 0x00000040, HotTracked = 0x00000080, Default = 0x00000100, Expanded = 0x00000200, Collapsed = 0x00000400, Busy = 0x00000800, Floating = 0x00001000, Marqueed = 0x00002000, Animated = 0x00004000, Invisible = 0x00008000, Offscreen = 0x00010000, Sizeable = 0x00020000, Moveable = 0x00040000, SelfVoicing = 0x00080000, Focusable = 0x00100000, Selectable = 0x00200000, Linked = 0x00400000, Traversed = 0x00800000, MultiSelectable = 0x01000000, ExtSelectable = 0x02000000, AlertLow = 0x04000000, AlertMedium = 0x08000000, AlertHigh = 0x10000000, Protected = 0x20000000, Valid = 0x3fffffff }
      • 
-
    • enum Role { NoRole = 0x00000000, TitleBar = 0x00000001, MenuBar = 0x00000002, ScrollBar = 0x00000003, Grip = 0x00000004, Sound = 0x00000005, Cursor = 0x00000006, Caret = 0x00000007, AlertMessage = 0x00000008, Window = 0x00000009, Client = 0x0000000A, PopupMenu = 0x0000000B, MenuItem = 0x0000000C, ToolTip = 0x0000000D, Application = 0x0000000E, Document = 0x0000000F, Pane = 0x00000010, Chart = 0x00000011, Dialog = 0x00000012, Border = 0x00000013, Grouping = 0x00000014, Separator = 0x00000015, ToolBar = 0x00000016, StatusBar = 0x00000017, Table = 0x00000018, ColumnHeader = 0x00000019, RowHeader = 0x0000001A, Column = 0x0000001B, Row = 0x0000001C, Cell = 0x0000001D, Link = 0x0000001E, HelpBalloon = 0x0000001F, Character = 0x00000020, List = 0x00000021, ListItem = 0x00000022, Outline = 0x00000023, OutlineItem = 0x00000024, PageTab = 0x00000025, PropertyPage = 0x00000026, Indicator = 0x00000027, Graphic = 0x00000028, StaticText = 0x00000029, EditableText = 0x0000002A, PushButton = 0x0000002B, CheckBox = 0x0000002C, RadioButton = 0x0000002D, ComboBox = 0x0000002E, DropLest = 0x0000002F, ProgressBar = 0x00000030, Dial = 0x00000031, HotkeyField = 0x00000032, Slider = 0x00000033, SpinBox = 0x00000034, Diagram = 0x00000035, Animation = 0x00000036, Equation = 0x00000037, ButtonDropDown = 0x00000038, ButtonMenu = 0x00000039, ButtonDropGrid = 0x0000003A, Whitespace = 0x0000003B, PageTabList = 0x0000003C, Clock = 0x0000003D }
      • 
-
    • enum NavDirection { NavUp = 0x00000001, NavDown = 0x00000002, NavLeft = 0x00000003, NavRight = 0x00000004, NavNext = 0x00000005, NavPrevious = 0x00000006, NavFirstChild = 0x00000007, NavLastChild = 0x00000008, NavFocusChild = 0x00000009 }
      • 
-
    • enum Text { Name = 0, Description, Value, Help, Accelerator, DefaultAction }
      • 
-
    
-
    Static Public Members
    
-
-
    Detailed Description
    
-
-
-The TQAccessible class provides enums and static functions
-relating to accessibility.
-
     
-
     Accessibility clients use implementations of the
-TQAccessibleInterface to read the information an accessible object
-exposes, or to call functions to manipulate the accessible object.
-
     
-
     See the plugin documentation for
-more details about how to redistribute TQt plugins.
-
    See also Miscellaneous Classes.
-
-
    Member Type Documentation
    
-
    TQAccessible::Event
    
-
-
     This enum type defines event types when the state of the
-accessible object has changed. The event types are:
-
      
-
    • TQAccessible::SoundPlayed
-
    • TQAccessible::Alert
-
    • TQAccessible::ForegroundChanged
-
    • TQAccessible::MenuStart
-
    • TQAccessible::MenuEnd
-
    • TQAccessible::PopupMenuStart
-
    • TQAccessible::PopupMenuEnd
-
    • TQAccessible::ContextHelpStart
-
    • TQAccessible::ContextHelpEnd
-
    • TQAccessible::DragDropStart
-
    • TQAccessible::DragDropEnd
-
    • TQAccessible::DialogStart
-
    • TQAccessible::DialogEnd
-
    • TQAccessible::ScrollingStart
-
    • TQAccessible::ScrollingEnd
-
    • TQAccessible::ObjectCreated
-
    • TQAccessible::ObjectDestroyed
-
    • TQAccessible::ObjectShow
-
    • TQAccessible::ObjectHide
-
    • TQAccessible::ObjectReorder
-
    • TQAccessible::Focus
-
    • TQAccessible::Selection
-
    • TQAccessible::SelectionAdd
-
    • TQAccessible::SelectionRemove
-
    • TQAccessible::SelectionWithin
-
    • TQAccessible::StateChanged
-
    • TQAccessible::LocationChanged
-
    • TQAccessible::NameChanged
-
    • TQAccessible::DescriptionChanged
-
    • TQAccessible::ValueChanged
-
    • TQAccessible::ParentChanged
-
    • TQAccessible::HelpChanged
-
    • TQAccessible::DefaultActionChanged
-
    • TQAccessible::AcceleratorChanged
-
    • TQAccessible::MenuCommand
-
    
-
    TQAccessible::NavDirection
    
-
-
     This enum specifies which item to move to when navigating.
-
      
-
    • TQAccessible::NavUp - sibling above
-
    • TQAccessible::NavDown - sibling below
-
    • TQAccessible::NavLeft - left sibling
-
    • TQAccessible::NavRight - right sibling
-
    • TQAccessible::NavNext - next sibling
-
    • TQAccessible::NavPrevious - previous sibling
-
    • TQAccessible::NavFirstChild - first child
-
    • TQAccessible::NavLastChild - last child
-
    • TQAccessible::NavFocusChild - child with focus
-
    
-
    TQAccessible::Role
    
-
-
     This enum defines a number of roles an accessible object can have.
-The roles are:
-
      
-
    • TQAccessible::NoRole
-
    • TQAccessible::TitleBar
-
    • TQAccessible::MenuBar
-
    • TQAccessible::ScrollBar
-
    • TQAccessible::Grip
-
    • TQAccessible::Sound
-
    • TQAccessible::Cursor
-
    • TQAccessible::Caret
-
    • TQAccessible::AlertMessage
-
    • TQAccessible::Window
-
    • TQAccessible::Client
-
    • TQAccessible::PopupMenu
-
    • TQAccessible::MenuItem
-
    • TQAccessible::ToolTip
-
    • TQAccessible::Application
-
    • TQAccessible::Document
-
    • TQAccessible::Pane
-
    • TQAccessible::Chart
-
    • TQAccessible::Dialog
-
    • TQAccessible::Border
-
    • TQAccessible::Grouping
-
    • TQAccessible::Separator
-
    • TQAccessible::ToolBar
-
    • TQAccessible::StatusBar
-
    • TQAccessible::Table
-
    • TQAccessible::ColumnHeader
-
    • TQAccessible::RowHeader
-
    • TQAccessible::Column
-
    • TQAccessible::Row
-
    • TQAccessible::Cell
-
    • TQAccessible::Link
-
    • TQAccessible::HelpBalloon
-
    • TQAccessible::Character
-
    • TQAccessible::List
-
    • TQAccessible::ListItem
-
    • TQAccessible::Outline
-
    • TQAccessible::OutlineItem
-
    • TQAccessible::PageTab
-
    • TQAccessible::PropertyPage
-
    • TQAccessible::Indicator
-
    • TQAccessible::Graphic
-
    • TQAccessible::StaticText
-
    • TQAccessible::EditableText
-
    • TQAccessible::PushButton
-
    • TQAccessible::CheckBox
-
    • TQAccessible::RadioButton
-
    • TQAccessible::ComboBox
-
    • TQAccessible::DropLest
-
    • TQAccessible::ProgressBar
-
    • TQAccessible::Dial
-
    • TQAccessible::HotkeyField
-
    • TQAccessible::Slider
-
    • TQAccessible::SpinBox
-
    • TQAccessible::Diagram
-
    • TQAccessible::Animation
-
    • TQAccessible::Equation
-
    • TQAccessible::ButtonDropDown
-
    • TQAccessible::ButtonMenu
-
    • TQAccessible::ButtonDropGrid
-
    • TQAccessible::Whitespace
-
    • TQAccessible::PageTabList
-
    • TQAccessible::Clock
-
    
-
    TQAccessible::State
    
-
-
     This enum type defines bitflags that can be combined to indicate
-the state of the accessible object. The values are:
-
      
-
    • TQAccessible::Normal
-
    • TQAccessible::Unavailable
-
    • TQAccessible::Selected
-
    • TQAccessible::Focused
-
    • TQAccessible::Pressed
-
    • TQAccessible::Checked
-
    • TQAccessible::Mixed
-
    • TQAccessible::ReadOnly
-
    • TQAccessible::HotTracked
-
    • TQAccessible::Default
-
    • TQAccessible::Expanded
-
    • TQAccessible::Collapsed
-
    • TQAccessible::Busy
-
    • TQAccessible::Floating
-
    • TQAccessible::Marqueed
-
    • TQAccessible::Animated
-
    • TQAccessible::Invisible
-
    • TQAccessible::Offscreen
-
    • TQAccessible::Sizeable
-
    • TQAccessible::Moveable
-
    • TQAccessible::SelfVoicing
-
    • TQAccessible::Focusable
-
    • TQAccessible::Selectable
-
    • TQAccessible::Linked
-
    • TQAccessible::Traversed
-
    • TQAccessible::MultiSelectable
-
    • TQAccessible::ExtSelectable
-
    • TQAccessible::AlertLow
-
    • TQAccessible::AlertMedium
-
    • TQAccessible::AlertHigh
-
    • TQAccessible::Protected
-
    • TQAccessible::Valid
-
    
-
    TQAccessible::Text
    
-
-
     This enum specifies string information that an accessible object
-returns.
-
      
-
    • TQAccessible::Name - The name of the object
-
    • TQAccessible::Description - A short text describing the object
-
    • TQAccessible::Value - The value of the object
-
    • TQAccessible::Help - A longer text giving information about how
-to use the object
-
    • TQAccessible::DefaultAction - The default method to interact with the object
-
    • TQAccessible::Accelerator - The keyboard shortcut that executes the
-default action
-
    
-
    Member Function Documentation
    
-
    bool TQAccessible::isActive () [static]
-
    
-Returns TRUE if an accessibility implementation has been requested,
-during the runtime of the application, otherwise returns FALSE. 
-
     Use this function to prevent potentially expensive notifications via
-updateAccessibility().
-
     
-
-
    TQRESULT TQAccessible::queryAccessibleInterface ( TQObject * object, TQAccessibleInterface ** iface ) [static]
-
    
-Sets iface to point to the implementation of the
-TQAccessibleInterface for object, and returns TQS_OK if
-successfull, or sets iface to 0 and returns TQE_NOCOMPONENT if
-no accessibility implementation for object exists.
-
     The function uses the classname of object to find a suitable implementation. If no
-implementation for the object's class is available the function
-tries to find an implementation for the object's parent class.
-
     This function is called to answer an accessibility client's
-request for object information. You should never need to call this
-function yourself.
-
-
    void TQAccessible::updateAccessibility ( TQObject * object, int control, Event reason ) [static]
-
    
-
-
     Notifies accessibility clients about a change in object's
-accessibility information.
-
     reason specifies the cause of the change, for example,
-ValueChange when the position of a slider has been changed. control is the ID of the child element that has changed. When control is 0, the object itself has changed.
-
     Call this function whenever the state of your accessible object or
-one of it's sub-elements has been changed either programmatically
-(e.g. by calling TQLabel::setText()) or by user interaction.
-
     If there are no accessibility tools listening to this event, the
-performance penalty for calling this function is minor, but if determining
-the parameters of the call is expensive you can use isActive() to
-avoid unnecessary performance penalties if no client is listening.
-
-
-
    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
-
-
    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
    TQt 3.3.8
    
-
    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qaccessibleinterface-members.html b/doc/html/qaccessibleinterface-members.html
index 5c70cc112..0dc8ebdbe 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaccessibleinterface-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaccessibleinterface-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -39,10 +39,10 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
  • clearSelection()
 
  • controlAt()
 
  • doDefaultAction()
-
  • isActive()
+
  • isActive()
 
  • isValid()
 
  • navigate()
-
  • queryAccessibleInterface()
+
  • queryAccessibleInterface()
 
  • queryChild()
 
  • queryParent()
 
  • rect()
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
  • setText()
 
  • state()
 
  • text()
-
  • updateAccessibility()
+
  • updateAccessibility()
 
 
 
    
diff --git a/doc/html/qaccessibleinterface.html b/doc/html/qaccessibleinterface.html
index 5b11b16e4..814d12338 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaccessibleinterface.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaccessibleinterface.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
    The TQAccessibleInterface class defines an interface that exposes information about accessible objects.
 More...
-
    #include <qaccessible.h>
-
    Inherits TQAccessible.
+
    #include <ntqaccessible.h>
+
    Inherits TQAccessible.
 
    Inherited by TQAccessibleObject.
 
    List of all member functions.
 
    Public Members
    
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ object itself if control is 0.
 implementation is valid (e.g. all pointers are non-null),
 otherwise returns FALSE.
 
-
    int TQAccessibleInterface::navigate ( NavDirection direction, int startControl ) const [pure virtual]
+
    int TQAccessibleInterface::navigate ( NavDirection direction, int startControl ) const [pure virtual]
 
    
 
 
     This function traverses to another object, or to a sub-element of
@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ no such implementation or object.
 
     All objects provide this information.
 
     
    See also queryChild().
 
-
    TQRect TQAccessibleInterface::rect ( int control ) const [pure virtual]
+
    TQRect TQAccessibleInterface::rect ( int control ) const [pure virtual]
 
    
 
 
     Returns the location of the child specified with control in
@@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ screen coordinates. This function returns the location of the
 object itself if control is 0.
 
     All visual objects provide this information.
 
-
    Role TQAccessibleInterface::role ( int control ) const [pure virtual]
+
    Role TQAccessibleInterface::role ( int control ) const [pure virtual]
 
    
 
 
     Returns the role of the object if control is 0, or the role of
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ the object's sub-element with ID control. The role of an object
 is usually static. All accessible objects have a role.
 
     
    See also text(), state(), and selection().
 
-
    TQMemArray<int> TQAccessibleInterface::selection () const [pure virtual]
+
    TQMemArray<int> TQAccessibleInterface::selection () const [pure virtual]
 
    
 
 
     Returns the list of all the element IDs that are selected.
@@ -171,13 +171,13 @@ item and the specified child object have their selection set to on.
 FALSE.
 
     
    See also setFocus() and clearSelection().
 
-
    void TQAccessibleInterface::setText ( Text t, int control, const TQString & text ) [pure virtual]
+
    void TQAccessibleInterface::setText ( Text t, int control, const TQString & text ) [pure virtual]
 
    
 
 
     Sets the text property t of the child object control to text. If control is 0, the text property of the object itself
 is set.
 
-
    State TQAccessibleInterface::state ( int control ) const [pure virtual]
+
    State TQAccessibleInterface::state ( int control ) const [pure virtual]
 
    
 
 
     Returns the current state of the object if control is 0, or the
@@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ state of the object's sub-element element with ID control. All
 objects have a state.
 
     
    See also text(), role(), and selection().
 
-
    TQString TQAccessibleInterface::text ( Text t, int control ) const [pure virtual]
+
    TQString TQAccessibleInterface::text ( Text t, int control ) const [pure virtual]
 
    
 
 
     Returns a string property t of the child object specified by control, or the string property of the object itself if control
diff --git a/doc/html/qaccessibleobject-members.html b/doc/html/qaccessibleobject-members.html
index 0dc4816fa..f62535db6 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaccessibleobject-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaccessibleobject-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -37,68 +37,68 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
    
 
 
    
diff --git a/doc/html/qaccessibleobject.html b/doc/html/qaccessibleobject.html
index 1f0b420f5..42290321a 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaccessibleobject.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaccessibleobject.html
@@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
    The TQAccessibleObject class implements parts of the
 TQAccessibleInterface for TQObjects.
 More...
-
    #include <qaccessible.h>
-
    Inherits TQObject and TQAccessibleInterface.
+
    #include <ntqaccessible.h>
+
    Inherits TQObject and TQAccessibleInterface.
 
    List of all member functions.
 
    Public Members
    
 
    • 
 
@@ -413,16 +413,16 @@ void ApplicationWindow::aboutTQt()
 **
 *****************************************************************************/
 
-#include <qapplication.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
 #include "application.h"
 
 int main( int argc, char ** argv ) {
-    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
+    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
     ApplicationWindow * mw = new ApplicationWindow();
-    mw->setCaption( "Document 1" );
-    mw->show();
-    a.connect( &a, SIGNAL(lastWindowClosed()), &a, SLOT(quit()) );
-    return a.exec();
+    mw->setCaption( "Document 1" );
+    mw->show();
+    a.connect( &a, SIGNAL(lastWindowClosed()), &a, SLOT(quit()) );
+    return a.exec();
 }
 
    
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qaction-examples.html b/doc/html/qaction-examples.html
index bf8a5b5ff..39cf2a372 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaction-examples.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaction-examples.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
  
 
     The following example programs show how to use the 
-TQAction and TQActionGroup classes.
+TQAction and TQActionGroup classes.
 
     
 
    
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
    
 
    A Complete Application Window with Actions
diff --git a/doc/html/qaction-h.html b/doc/html/qaction-h.html
index 06b32fe11..e08e63881 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaction-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaction-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qaction.h Include File
+ntqaction.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
    TQAction Class Reference
    
-
-
    The TQAction class provides an abstract user interface
-action that can appear both in menus and tool bars.
-More...
-
    #include <qaction.h>
-
    Inherits TQObject.
-
    Inherited by TQActionGroup.
-
    List of all member functions.
-
    Public Members
    
-
      
-
    • TQAction ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
-
    • TQAction ( const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
-
    • TQAction ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
      • 
-
    • TQAction ( const TQString & text, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = FALSE )  (obsolete)
      • 
-
    • TQAction ( const TQString & text, const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = FALSE )  (obsolete)
      • 
-
    • TQAction ( TQObject * parent, const char * name, bool toggle )  (obsolete)
      • 
-
    • ~TQAction ()
      • 
-
    • virtual void setIconSet ( const TQIconSet & )
      • 
-
    • TQIconSet iconSet () const
      • 
-
    • virtual void setText ( const TQString & )
      • 
-
    • TQString text () const
      • 
-
    • virtual void setMenuText ( const TQString & )
      • 
-
    • TQString menuText () const
      • 
-
    • virtual void setToolTip ( const TQString & )
      • 
-
    • TQString toolTip () const
      • 
-
    • virtual void setStatusTip ( const TQString & )
      • 
-
    • TQString statusTip () const
      • 
-
    • virtual void setWhatsThis ( const TQString & )
      • 
-
    • TQString whatsThis () const
      • 
-
    • virtual void setAccel ( const TQKeySequence & key )
      • 
-
    • TQKeySequence accel () const
      • 
-
    • virtual void setToggleAction ( bool )
      • 
-
    • bool isToggleAction () const
      • 
-
    • bool isOn () const
      • 
-
    • bool isEnabled () const
      • 
-
    • bool isVisible () const
      • 
-
    • virtual bool addTo ( TQWidget * w )
      • 
-
    • virtual bool removeFrom ( TQWidget * w )
      • 
-
    
-
    Public Slots
    
-
-
    Signals
    
-
-
    Properties
    
-
      
-
    • TQKeySequence accel - the action's accelerator key
      • 
-
    • bool enabled - whether the action is enabled
      • 
-
    • TQIconSet iconSet - the action's icon
      • 
-
    • TQString menuText - the action's menu text
      • 
-
    • bool on - whether a toggle action is on
      • 
-
    • TQString statusTip - the action's status tip
      • 
-
    • TQString text - the action's descriptive text
      • 
-
    • bool toggleAction - whether the action is a toggle action
      • 
-
    • TQString toolTip - the action's tool tip
      • 
-
    • bool visible - whether the action can be seen (e.g. in menus and toolbars)
      • 
-
    • TQString whatsThis - the action's "What's This?" help text
      • 
-
    
-
    Protected Members
    
-
      
-
    • virtual void addedTo ( TQWidget * actionWidget, TQWidget * container )
      • 
-
    • virtual void addedTo ( int index, TQPopupMenu * menu )
      • 
-
    
-
    Detailed Description
    
-
-
-The TQAction class provides an abstract user interface
-action that can appear both in menus and tool bars.
-
     
-
-
-
     In GUI applications many commands can be invoked via a menu
-option, a toolbar button and a keyboard accelerator. Since the
-same action must be performed regardless of how the action was
-invoked, and since the menu and toolbar should be kept in sync, it
-is useful to represent a command as an action. An action can be
-added to a menu and a toolbar and will automatically keep them in
-sync. For example, if the user presses a Bold toolbar button the
-Bold menu item will automatically be checked.
-
     A TQAction may contain an icon, a menu text, an accelerator, a
-status text, a whats this text and a tool tip. Most of these can
-be set in the constructor. They can also be set independently with
-setIconSet(), setText(), setMenuText(), setToolTip(),
-setStatusTip(), setWhatsThis() and setAccel().
-
     An action may be a toggle action e.g. a Bold toolbar button, or a
-command action, e.g. 'Open File' to invoke an open file dialog.
-Toggle actions emit the toggled() signal when their state changes.
-Both command and toggle actions emit the activated() signal when
-they are invoked. Use setToggleAction() to set an action's toggled
-status. To see if an action is a toggle action use
-isToggleAction(). A toggle action may be "on", isOn() returns
-TRUE, or "off", isOn() returns FALSE.
-
     Actions are added to widgets (menus or toolbars) using addTo(),
-and removed using removeFrom().
-
     Once a TQAction has been created it should be added to the relevant
-menu and toolbar and then connected to the slot which will perform
-the action. For example:
-
     
-
-
            fileOpenAction = new TQAction( TQPixmap( fileopen ), "&Open...",
-                                      CTRL+Key_O, this, "open" );
-        connect( fileOpenAction, SIGNAL( activated() ) , this, SLOT( choose() ) );
-
    
-
     We create a "File Save" action with a menu text of "&Save" and
-Ctrl+S as the keyboard accelerator. We connect the
-fileSaveAction's activated() signal to our own save() slot. Note
-that at this point there is no menu or toolbar action, we'll add
-them next:
-
     
            TQToolBar * fileTools = new TQToolBar( this, "file operations" );
-
            fileSaveAction->addTo( fileTools );
-
            TQPopupMenu * file = new TQPopupMenu( this );
-        menuBar()->insertItem( "&File", file );
-
            fileSaveAction->addTo( file );
-
    
-
     We create a toolbar and add our fileSaveAction to it. Similarly we
-create a menu, add a top-level menu item, and add our
-fileSaveAction.
-
     We recommend that actions are created as children of the window
-that they are used in. In most cases actions will be children of
-the application's main window.
-
     To prevent recursion, don't create an action as a child of a
-widget that the action is later added to.
-
    See also Main Window and Related Classes and Basic Widgets.
-
-
    Member Function Documentation
    
-
    TQAction::TQAction ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
-
    
-Constructs an action called name with parent parent.
-
     If parent is a TQActionGroup, the new action inserts itself into
-parent.
-
     For accelerators and status tips to work, parent must either be
-a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget.
-
     Warning: To prevent recursion, don't create an action as a child
-of a widget that the action is later added to.
-
-
    TQAction::TQAction ( const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
-
    
-This constructor results in an icon-less action with the the menu
-text menuText and keyboard accelerator accel. It is a child
-of parent and called name.
-
     If  parent is a TQActionGroup, the action automatically becomes
-a member of it.
-
     For accelerators and status tips to work, parent must either be
-a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget.
-
     The action uses a stripped version of menuText (e.g. "&Menu
-Option..." becomes "Menu Option") as descriptive text for
-toolbuttons. You can override this by setting a specific
-description with setText(). The same text and accel will be
-used for tool tips and status tips unless you provide text for
-these using setToolTip() and setStatusTip().
-
     Call setToggleAction(TRUE) to make the action a toggle action.
-
     Warning: To prevent recursion, don't create an action as a child
-of a widget that the action is later added to.
-
-
    TQAction::TQAction ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
-
    
-This constructor creates an action with the following properties:
-the icon or iconset icon, the menu text menuText and
-keyboard accelerator accel. It is a child of parent and
-called name.
-
     If parent is a TQActionGroup, the action automatically becomes
-a member of it.
-
     For accelerators and status tips to work, parent must either be
-a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget.
-
     The action uses a stripped version of menuText (e.g. "&Menu
-Option..." becomes "Menu Option") as descriptive text for
-toolbuttons. You can override this by setting a specific
-description with setText(). The same text and accel will be
-used for tool tips and status tips unless you provide text for
-these using setToolTip() and setStatusTip().
-
     Call setToggleAction(TRUE) to make the action a toggle action.
-
     Warning: To prevent recursion, don't create an action as a child
-of a widget that the action is later added to.
-
-
    TQAction::TQAction ( const TQString & text, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = FALSE )
-
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
     This constructor creates an action with the following properties:
-the description text, the icon or iconset icon, the menu
-text menuText and keyboard accelerator accel. It is a child
-of parent and called name. If toggle is TRUE the action
-will be a toggle action, otherwise it will be a command action.
-
     If  parent is a TQActionGroup, the action automatically becomes
-a member of it.
-
     For accelerators and status tips to work, parent must either be
-a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget.
-
     The text and accel will be used for tool tips and status
-tips unless you provide specific text for these using setToolTip()
-and setStatusTip().
-
-
    TQAction::TQAction ( const TQString & text, const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = FALSE )
-
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
     This constructor results in an icon-less action with the
-description text, the menu text menuText and the keyboard
-accelerator accel. Its parent is parent and it is called name. If toggle is TRUE the action will be a toggle action,
-otherwise it will be a command action.
-
     The action automatically becomes a member of parent if parent is a TQActionGroup.
-
     For accelerators and status tips to work, parent must either be
-a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget.
-
     The text and accel will be used for tool tips and status
-tips unless you provide specific text for these using setToolTip()
-and setStatusTip().
-
-
    TQAction::TQAction ( TQObject * parent, const char * name, bool toggle )
-
     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
     Constructs an action called name with parent parent.
-
     If toggle is TRUE the action will be a toggle action, otherwise
-it will be a command action.
-
     If parent is a TQActionGroup, the new action inserts itself into
-parent.
-
     For accelerators and status tips to work, parent must either be
-a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget.
-
-
    TQAction::~TQAction ()
-
    
-Destroys the object and frees allocated resources.
-
-
    TQKeySequence TQAction::accel () const
-
    Returns the action's accelerator key.
-See the "accel" property for details.
-
    void TQAction::activate () [slot]
-
    
-Activates the action and executes all connected slots.
-This only works for actions that are not toggle action.
-
     
    See also toggle().
-
-
    void TQAction::activated () [signal]
-
    
-
-
     This signal is emitted when an action is activated by the user,
-e.g. when the user clicks a menu option or a toolbar button or
-presses an action's accelerator key combination.
-
     Connect to this signal for command actions. Connect to the
-toggled() signal for toggle actions.
-
-
    Examples: action/application.cpp, chart/chartform.cpp, and themes/themes.cpp.
-
    bool TQAction::addTo ( TQWidget * w ) [virtual]
-
    
-Adds this action to widget w.
-
     Currently actions may be added to TQToolBar and TQPopupMenu widgets.
-
     An action added to a tool bar is automatically displayed as a tool
-button; an action added to a pop up menu appears as a menu option.
-
     addTo() returns TRUE if the action was added successfully and
-FALSE otherwise. (If w is not a TQToolBar or TQPopupMenu the
-action will not be added and FALSE will be returned.)
-
     
    See also removeFrom().
-
-
    Examples: action/application.cpp, action/toggleaction/toggleaction.cpp, and chart/chartform.cpp.
-
    Reimplemented in TQActionGroup.
-
    void TQAction::addedTo ( TQWidget * actionWidget, TQWidget * container ) [virtual protected]
-
    
-This function is called from the addTo() function when it has
-created a widget (actionWidget) for the action in the container.
-
-
    void TQAction::addedTo ( int index, TQPopupMenu * menu ) [virtual protected]
-
    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
     This function is called from the addTo() function when it has
-created a menu item at the index position index in the popup
-menu menu.
-
-
    TQIconSet TQAction::iconSet () const
-
    Returns the action's icon.
-See the "iconSet" property for details.
-
    bool TQAction::isEnabled () const
-
    Returns TRUE if the action is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "enabled" property for details.
-
    bool TQAction::isOn () const
-
    Returns TRUE if a toggle action is on; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "on" property for details.
-
    bool TQAction::isToggleAction () const
-
    Returns TRUE if the action is a toggle action; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "toggleAction" property for details.
-
    bool TQAction::isVisible () const
-
    Returns TRUE if the action can be seen (e.g. in menus and toolbars); otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "visible" property for details.
-
    TQString TQAction::menuText () const
-
    Returns the action's menu text.
-See the "menuText" property for details.
-
    bool TQAction::removeFrom ( TQWidget * w ) [virtual]
-
    
-Removes the action from widget w.
-
     Returns TRUE if the action was removed successfully; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
     
    See also addTo().
-
-
    void TQAction::setAccel ( const TQKeySequence & key ) [virtual]
-
    Sets the action's accelerator key to key.
-See the "accel" property for details.
-
    void TQAction::setDisabled ( bool disable ) [slot]
-
    
-Disables the action if disable is TRUE; otherwise
-enables the action.
-
     See the enabled documentation for more information.
-
-
    void TQAction::setEnabled ( bool ) [virtual slot]
-
    Sets whether the action is enabled.
-See the "enabled" property for details.
-
    void TQAction::setIconSet ( const TQIconSet & ) [virtual]
-
    Sets the action's icon.
-See the "iconSet" property for details.
-
    void TQAction::setMenuText ( const TQString & ) [virtual]
-
    Sets the action's menu text.
-See the "menuText" property for details.
-
    void TQAction::setOn ( bool ) [virtual slot]
-
    Sets whether a toggle action is on.
-See the "on" property for details.
-
    void TQAction::setStatusTip ( const TQString & ) [virtual]
-
    Sets the action's status tip.
-See the "statusTip" property for details.
-
    void TQAction::setText ( const TQString & ) [virtual]
-
    Sets the action's descriptive text.
-See the "text" property for details.
-
    void TQAction::setToggleAction ( bool ) [virtual]
-
    Sets whether the action is a toggle action.
-See the "toggleAction" property for details.
-
    void TQAction::setToolTip ( const TQString & ) [virtual]
-
    Sets the action's tool tip.
-See the "toolTip" property for details.
-
    void TQAction::setVisible ( bool ) [slot]
-
    Sets whether the action can be seen (e.g. in menus and toolbars).
-See the "visible" property for details.
-
    void TQAction::setWhatsThis ( const TQString & ) [virtual]
-
    Sets the action's "What's This?" help text.
-See the "whatsThis" property for details.
-
    TQString TQAction::statusTip () const
-
    Returns the action's status tip.
-See the "statusTip" property for details.
-
    TQString TQAction::text () const
-
    Returns the action's descriptive text.
-See the "text" property for details.
-
    void TQAction::toggle () [slot]
-
    
-Toggles the state of a toggle action.
-
     
    See also on, activate(), toggled(), and toggleAction.
-
-
    void TQAction::toggled ( bool on ) [signal]
-
    
-
-
     This signal is emitted when a toggle action changes state; command
-actions and TQActionGroups don't emit toggled().
-
     The on argument denotes the new state: If on is TRUE the
-toggle action is switched on, and if on is FALSE the toggle
-action is switched off.
-
     To trigger a user command depending on whether a toggle action has
-been switched on or off connect it to a slot that takes a bool to
-indicate the state, e.g.
-
     
-
-
            TQMainWindow * window = new TQMainWindow;
-
            TQAction * labelonoffaction = new TQAction( window, "labelonoff" );
-
            TQObject::connect( labelonoffaction, SIGNAL( toggled( bool ) ),
-                          window, SLOT( setUsesTextLabel( bool ) ) );
-
    
-
     
    See also activated(), toggleAction, and on.
-
-
    Example: action/toggleaction/toggleaction.cpp.
-
    TQString TQAction::toolTip () const
-
    Returns the action's tool tip.
-See the "toolTip" property for details.
-
    TQString TQAction::whatsThis () const
-
    Returns the action's "What's This?" help text.
-See the "whatsThis" property for details.
-
    Property Documentation
    
-
    TQKeySequence accel
    
-
    This property holds the action's accelerator key.
-
    The keycodes can be found in TQt::Key and TQt::Modifier. There
-is no default accelerator key.
-
-
    Set this property's value with setAccel() and get this property's value with accel().
-
    bool enabled
    
-
    This property holds whether the action is enabled.
-
    Disabled actions can't be chosen by the user. They don't disappear
-from the menu/tool bar but are displayed in a way which indicates
-that they are unavailable, e.g. they might be displayed grayed
-out.
-
     What's this? help on disabled actions is still available provided
-the TQAction::whatsThis property is set.
-
-
    Set this property's value with setEnabled() and get this property's value with isEnabled().
-
    TQIconSet iconSet
    
-
    This property holds the action's icon.
-
    The icon is used as the tool button icon and in the menu to the
-left of the menu text. There is no default icon.
-
     If a null icon (TQIconSet::isNull() is passed into this function,
-the icon of the action is cleared.
-
     (See the action/toggleaction/toggleaction.cpp example.)
-
     
-
    Set this property's value with setIconSet() and get this property's value with iconSet().
-
    TQString menuText
    
-
    This property holds the action's menu text.
-
    If the action is added to a menu the menu option will consist of
-the icon (if there is one), the menu text and the accelerator (if
-there is one). If the menu text is not explicitly set in the
-constructor or by using setMenuText() the action's description
-text will be used as the menu text. There is no default menu text.
-
     
    See also text.
-
-
    Set this property's value with setMenuText() and get this property's value with menuText().
-
    bool on
    
-
    This property holds whether a toggle action is on.
-
    This property is always on (TRUE) for command actions and
-TQActionGroups; setOn() has no effect on them. For action's
-where isToggleAction() is TRUE, this property's default value is
-off (FALSE).
-
     
    See also toggleAction.
-
-
    Set this property's value with setOn() and get this property's value with isOn().
-
    TQString statusTip
    
-
    This property holds the action's status tip.
-
    The statusTip is displayed on all status bars that this action's
-toplevel parent widget provides.
-
     If no status tip is defined, the action uses the tool tip text.
-
     There is no default statusTip text.
-
     
    See also statusTip and toolTip.
-
-
    Set this property's value with setStatusTip() and get this property's value with statusTip().
-
    TQString text
    
-
    This property holds the action's descriptive text.
-
    If TQMainWindow::usesTextLabel is TRUE, the text appears as a
-label in the relevant tool button. It also serves as the default
-text in menus and tool tips if these have not been specifically
-defined. There is no default text.
-
     
    See also menuText, toolTip, and statusTip.
-
-
    Set this property's value with setText() and get this property's value with text().
-
    bool toggleAction
    
-
    This property holds whether the action is a toggle action.
-
    A toggle action is one which has an on/off state. For example a
-Bold toolbar button is either on or off. An action which is not a
-toggle action is a command action; a command action is simply
-executed, e.g. file save. This property's default is FALSE.
-
     In some situations, the state of one toggle action should depend
-on the state of others. For example, "Left Align", "Center" and
-"Right Align" toggle actions are mutually exclusive. To achieve
-exclusive toggling, add the relevant toggle actions to a
-TQActionGroup with the TQActionGroup::exclusive property set to
-TRUE.
-
-
    Set this property's value with setToggleAction() and get this property's value with isToggleAction().
-
    TQString toolTip
    
-
    This property holds the action's tool tip.
-
    This text is used for the tool tip. If no status tip has been set
-the tool tip will be used for the status tip.
-
     If no tool tip is specified the action's text is used, and if that
-hasn't been specified the description text is used as the tool tip
-text.
-
     There is no default tool tip text.
-
     
    See also statusTip and accel.
-
-
    Set this property's value with setToolTip() and get this property's value with toolTip().
-
    bool visible
    
-
    This property holds whether the action can be seen (e.g. in menus and toolbars).
-
    If visible is TRUE the action can be seen (e.g. in menus and
-toolbars) and chosen by the user; if visible is FALSE the
-action cannot be seen or chosen by the user.
-
     Actions which are not visible are not grayed out; they do not
-appear at all.
-
-
    Set this property's value with setVisible() and get this property's value with isVisible().
-
    TQString whatsThis
    
-
    This property holds the action's "What's This?" help text.
-
    The whats this text is used to provide a brief description of the
-action. The text may contain rich text (HTML-like tags -- see
-TQStyleSheet for the list of supported tags). There is no default
-"What's This" text.
-
     
    See also TQWhatsThis.
-
-
    Set this property's value with setWhatsThis() and get this property's value with whatsThis().
-
-
    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
-
-
    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
    TQt 3.3.8
    
-
    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qactiongroup-members.html b/doc/html/qactiongroup-members.html
index 66a10f50d..2a5422652 100644
--- a/doc/html/qactiongroup-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qactiongroup-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -37,86 +37,86 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
 
    
diff --git a/doc/html/qactiongroup.html b/doc/html/qactiongroup.html
index 4a4ef8d31..21aa9d1b3 100644
--- a/doc/html/qactiongroup.html
+++ b/doc/html/qactiongroup.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
    The TQActionGroup class groups actions together.
 More...
-
    #include <qaction.h>
-
    Inherits TQAction.
+
    #include <ntqaction.h>
+
    Inherits TQAction.
 
    List of all member functions.
 
    Public Members
    
 
      
@@ -77,24 +77,24 @@ appearing as separate menu options and toolbar buttons.
 
 
 
              TQActionGroup *grp = new TQActionGroup( this );
-        connect( grp, SIGNAL( selected( TQAction* ) ), this, SLOT( textAlign( TQAction* ) ) );
+        connect( grp, SIGNAL( selected( TQAction* ) ), this, SLOT( textAlign( TQAction* ) ) );
 
      
 
       Here we create a new action group. Since the action group is exclusive
 by default, only one of the actions in the group is ever active at any
 one time. We then connect the group's selected() signal to our
 textAlign() slot.
-
       
              actionAlignLeft = new TQAction( TQPixmap::fromMimeSource( "textleft.xpm" ), tr( "&Left" ), CTRL + Key_L, grp, "textLeft" );
-        actionAlignLeft->setToggleAction( TRUE );
+
       
              actionAlignLeft = new TQAction( TQPixmap::fromMimeSource( "textleft.xpm" ), tr( "&Left" ), CTRL + Key_L, grp, "textLeft" );
+        actionAlignLeft->setToggleAction( TRUE );
 
      
 
       We create a left align action, add it to the toolbar and the menu
 and make it a toggle action. We create center and right align
 actions in exactly the same way.
 
       
-The actions in an action group emit their activated() (and for
-toggle actions, toggled()) signals as usual.
+The actions in an action group emit their activated() (and for
+toggle actions, toggled()) signals as usual.
 
       The setExclusive() function is used to ensure that only one action
 is active at any one time: it should be used with actions which
-have their toggleAction set to TRUE.
+have their toggleAction set to TRUE.
 
       Action group actions appear as individual menu options and toolbar
 buttons. For exclusive action groups use setUsesDropDown() to
 display the actions in a subwidget of any widget the action group
@@ -107,13 +107,13 @@ parent. Actions can have separators dividing them using
 
      See also Main Window and Related Classes and Basic Widgets.
 
 
      Member Function Documentation
      
-
      TQActionGroup::TQActionGroup ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
      TQActionGroup::TQActionGroup ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
 
      
 Constructs an action group called name, with parent parent.
 
       The action group is exclusive by default. Call setExclusive(FALSE) to make
 the action group non-exclusive.
 
-
      TQActionGroup::TQActionGroup ( TQObject * parent, const char * name, bool exclusive )
+
      TQActionGroup::TQActionGroup ( TQObject * parent, const char * name, bool exclusive )
 
      
 Constructs an action group called name, with parent parent.
 
       If exclusive is TRUE only one toggle action in the group will
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ ever be active.
 
 Destroys the object and frees allocated resources.
 
-
      void TQActionGroup::add ( TQAction * action )
+
      void TQActionGroup::add ( TQAction * action )
 
      
 Adds action action to this group.
 
       Normally an action is added to a group by creating it with the
@@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ group as parent, so this function is not usually used.
 
 Adds a separator to the group.
 
-
      bool TQActionGroup::addTo ( TQWidget * w ) [virtual]
+
      bool TQActionGroup::addTo ( TQWidget * w ) [virtual]
 
      
 Adds this action group to the widget w.
 
       If isExclusive() is FALSE or usesDropDown() is FALSE, the actions within
@@ -149,11 +149,11 @@ submenu (if w is a menu).
 action group is added to the widget. If actions are added to the
 action group after the action group has been added to the
 widget these later actions will not appear.
-
       
      See also exclusive, usesDropDown, and removeFrom().
+
       
      See also exclusive, usesDropDown, and removeFrom().
 
 
      Example: themes/themes.cpp.
-
      Reimplemented from TQAction.
-
      void TQActionGroup::insert ( TQAction * a )
+
      Reimplemented from TQAction.
+
      void TQActionGroup::insert ( TQAction * a )
 
       
 
       This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 
       Use add() instead, or better still create the action with the action
@@ -162,13 +162,13 @@ group as its parent.
 
      bool TQActionGroup::isExclusive () const
 
      Returns TRUE if the action group does exclusive toggling; otherwise returns FALSE.
 See the "exclusive" property for details.
-
      void TQActionGroup::selected ( TQAction * ) [signal]
+
      void TQActionGroup::selected ( TQAction * ) [signal]
 
      
 
 
       This signal is emitted from exclusive groups when toggle actions
 change state.
 
       The argument is the action whose state changed to "on".
-
       
      See also exclusive, on, and TQAction::toggled().
+
       
      See also exclusive, on, and TQAction::toggled().
 
 
      Examples: chart/chartform.cpp and textedit/textedit.cpp.
 
      void TQActionGroup::setExclusive ( bool )
@@ -187,22 +187,22 @@ See the "usesDropDown" propert
 can ever be active at any one time. If the user chooses another
 toggle action in the group the one they chose becomes active and
 the one that was active becomes inactive.
-
       
      See also TQAction::toggleAction.
+
       
      See also TQAction::toggleAction.
 
 
      Set this property's value with setExclusive() and get this property's value with isExclusive().
 
      bool usesDropDown
      
 
      This property holds whether the group's actions are displayed in a subwidget of the widgets the action group is added to.
 
      Exclusive action groups added to a toolbar display their actions
-in a combobox with the action's TQAction::text and TQAction::iconSet properties shown. Non-exclusive groups are
-represented by a tool button showing their TQAction::iconSet and
--- depending on TQMainWindow::usesTextLabel() -- text()
+in a combobox with the action's TQAction::text and TQAction::iconSet properties shown. Non-exclusive groups are
+represented by a tool button showing their TQAction::iconSet and
+-- depending on TQMainWindow::usesTextLabel() -- text()
 property.
 
       In a popup menu the member actions are displayed in a submenu.
 
       Changing usesDropDown only affects subsequent calls to addTo().
 
       Note that setting this property for actions in a combobox causes
-calls to their TQAction::setVisible(),
-TQAction::setEnabled(), and
-TQAction::setDisabled() functions to have no effect.
+calls to their TQAction::setVisible(),
+TQAction::setEnabled(), and
+TQAction::setDisabled() functions to have no effect.
 
       This property's default is FALSE.
 
       
 
      Set this property's value with setUsesDropDown() and get this property's value with usesDropDown().
diff --git a/doc/html/qapplication-h.html b/doc/html/qapplication-h.html
index 23cee48e4..b6fb22705 100644
--- a/doc/html/qapplication-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qapplication-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qapplication.h Include File
+ntqapplication.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
      
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
      TQApplication Class Reference
      
-
-
      The TQApplication class manages the GUI application's control
-flow and main settings.
-More...
-
      #include <qapplication.h>
-
      Inherits TQObject.
-
      List of all member functions.
-
      Public Members
      
-
-
      Public Slots
      
-
-
      Signals
      
-
-
      Static Public Members
      
-
-
      Related Functions
      
-
-
      Detailed Description
      
-
-
-The TQApplication class manages the GUI application's control
-flow and main settings.
-
       
-
-
       It contains the main event loop, where all events from the window
-system and other sources are processed and dispatched. It also
-handles the application's initialization and finalization, and
-provides session management. It also handles most system-wide and
-application-wide settings.
-
       For any GUI application that uses TQt, there is precisely one
-TQApplication object, no matter whether the application has 0, 1, 2
-or more windows at any time.
-
       The TQApplication object is accessible through the global pointer qApp. Its main areas of responsibility are:
-
        
-
         
      •  It initializes the application with the user's desktop settings
-such as palette(), font() and doubleClickInterval(). It keeps track
-of these properties in case the user changes the desktop globally, for
-example through some kind of control panel.
-
         
      •  It performs event handling, meaning that it receives events
-from the underlying window system and dispatches them to the relevant
-widgets. By using sendEvent() and postEvent() you can send your own
-events to widgets.
-
         
      •  It parses common command line arguments and sets its internal
-state accordingly. See the constructor documentation below for more details about this.
-
         
      •  It defines the application's look and feel, which is
-encapsulated in a TQStyle object. This can be changed at runtime
-with setStyle().
-
         
      •  It specifies how the application is to allocate colors.
-See setColorSpec() for details.
-
         
      •  It provides localization of strings that are visible to the user
-via translate().
-
         
      •  It provides some magical objects like the desktop() and the
-clipboard().
-
         
      •  It knows about the application's windows. You can ask which
-widget is at a certain position using widgetAt(), get a list of
-topLevelWidgets() and closeAllWindows(), etc.
-
         
      •  It manages the application's mouse cursor handling,
-see setOverrideCursor() and setGlobalMouseTracking().
-
         
      •  On the X window system, it provides functions to flush and sync
-the communication stream, see flushX() and syncX().
-
         
      •  It provides support for sophisticated session management. This makes it possible
-for applications to terminate gracefully when the user logs out, to
-cancel a shutdown process if termination isn't possible and even to
-preserve the entire application's state for a future session. See
-isSessionRestored(), sessionId() and commitData() and saveState()
-for details.
-
         
      
-
       The Application walk-through
-example contains a typical complete main() that does the usual
-things with TQApplication.
-
       Since the TQApplication object does so much initialization, it
-must be created before any other objects related to the user
-interface are created.
-
       Since it also deals with common command line arguments, it is
-usually a good idea to create it before any interpretation or
-modification of argv is done in the application itself. (Note
-also that for X11, setMainWidget() may change the main widget
-according to the -geometry option. To preserve this
-functionality, you must set your defaults before setMainWidget() and
-any overrides after.)
-
       
      
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
        Groups of functions
-
      System settings
-
-desktopSettingsAware(),
-setDesktopSettingsAware(),
-cursorFlashTime(),
-setCursorFlashTime(),
-doubleClickInterval(),
-setDoubleClickInterval(),
-wheelScrollLines(),
-setWheelScrollLines(),
-palette(),
-setPalette(),
-font(),
-setFont(),
-fontMetrics().
-
      Event handling
-
-exec(),
-processEvents(),
-enter_loop(),
-exit_loop(),
-exit(),
-quit().
-sendEvent(),
-postEvent(),
-sendPostedEvents(),
-removePostedEvents(),
-hasPendingEvents(),
-notify(),
-macEventFilter(),
-qwsEventFilter(),
-x11EventFilter(),
-x11ProcessEvent(),
-winEventFilter().
-
      GUI Styles
-
-style(),
-setStyle(),
-polish().
-
      Color usage
-
-colorSpec(),
-setColorSpec(),
-qwsSetCustomColors().
-
      Text handling
-
-installTranslator(),
-removeTranslator()
-translate().
-
      Widgets
-
-mainWidget(),
-setMainWidget(),
-allWidgets(),
-topLevelWidgets(),
-desktop(),
-activePopupWidget(),
-activeModalWidget(),
-clipboard(),
-focusWidget(),
-winFocus(),
-activeWindow(),
-widgetAt().
-
      Advanced cursor handling
-
-hasGlobalMouseTracking(),
-setGlobalMouseTracking(),
-overrideCursor(),
-setOverrideCursor(),
-restoreOverrideCursor().
-
      X Window System synchronization
-
-flushX(),
-syncX().
-
      Session management
-
-isSessionRestored(),
-sessionId(),
-commitData(),
-saveState().
-
      Threading
-
-lock(), unlock(), locked(), tryLock(),
-wakeUpGuiThread()
-
      Miscellaneous
-
-closeAllWindows(),
-startingUp(),
-closingDown(),
-type().
-
      
-
       Non-GUI programs: While TQt is not optimized or
-designed for writing non-GUI programs, it's possible to use
-some of its classes without creating a
-TQApplication. This can be useful if you wish to share code between
-a non-GUI server and a GUI client.
-
-
-
-
      See also Main Window and Related Classes.
-
-
      Member Type Documentation
      
-
      TQApplication::ColorSpec
      
-
-
        
-
      • TQApplication::NormalColor - the default color allocation policy
-
      • TQApplication::CustomColor - the same as NormalColor for X11; allocates colors
-to a palette on demand under Windows
-
      • TQApplication::ManyColor - the right choice for applications that use thousands of
-colors
-
       See setColorSpec() for full details.
-
-
      TQApplication::Encoding
       
-
       This enum type defines the 8-bit encoding of character string
-arguments to translate():
-
        
-
      • TQApplication::DefaultCodec - the encoding specified by
-TQTextCodec::codecForTr() (Latin-1 if none has been set)
-
      • TQApplication::UnicodeUTF8 - UTF-8
-
       
      See also TQObject::tr(), TQObject::trUtf8(), and TQString::fromUtf8().
-
-
      TQApplication::Type
      
-
-
        
-
      • TQApplication::Tty - a console application
-
      • TQApplication::GuiClient - a GUI client application
-
      • TQApplication::GuiServer - a GUI server application
-
      
-
      Member Function Documentation
      
-
      TQApplication::TQApplication ( int & argc, char ** argv )
-
      
-Initializes the window system and constructs an application object
-with argc command line arguments in argv.
-
       The global qApp pointer refers to this application object. Only
-one application object should be created.
-
       This application object must be constructed before any paint devices (including widgets, pixmaps, bitmaps
-etc.).
-
       Note that argc and argv might be changed. TQt removes command
-line arguments that it recognizes. The modified argc and argv
-can also be accessed later with qApp->argc() and qApp->argv().
-The documentation for argv() contains a detailed description of how
-to process command line arguments.
-
       TQt debugging options (not available if TQt was compiled with the
-QT_NO_DEBUG flag defined):
-
        
-
      •  -nograb, tells TQt that it must never grab the mouse or the keyboard.
-
      •  -dograb (only under X11), running under a debugger can cause
-an implicit -nograb, use -dograb to override.
-
      •  -sync (only under X11), switches to synchronous mode for
-debugging.
-
      
-
       See Debugging Techniques for a more
-detailed explanation.
-
       All TQt programs automatically support the following command line options:
-
        
-
      •  -reverse causes text to be formatted for right-to-left languages
-rather than in the usual left-to-right direction.
-
      •  -style= style, sets the application GUI style. Possible values
-are motif, windows, and platinum. If you compiled TQt
-with additional styles or have additional styles as plugins these
-will be available to the -style command line option.
-
      •  -style style, is the same as listed above.
-
      •  -session= session, restores the application from an earlier
-session.
-
      •  -session session, is the same as listed above.
-
      •  -widgetcount, prints debug message at the end about number of widgets left
-undestroyed and maximum number of widgets existed at the same time
-
      
-
       The X11 version of TQt also supports some traditional X11
-command line options:
-
        
-
      •  -display display, sets the X display (default is $DISPLAY).
-
      •  -geometry geometry, sets the client geometry of the
-main widget.
-
      •  -fn or -font font, defines the application font. The
-font should be specified using an X logical font description.
-
      •  -bg or -background color, sets the default background color
-and an application palette (light and dark shades are calculated).
-
      •  -fg or -foreground color, sets the default foreground color.
-
      •  -btn or -button color, sets the default button color.
-
      •  -name name, sets the application name.
-
      •  -title title, sets the application title (caption).
-
      •  -visual TrueColor, forces the application to use a TrueColor visual
-on an 8-bit display.
-
      •  -ncols count, limits the number of colors allocated in the
-color cube on an 8-bit display, if the application is using the
-TQApplication::ManyColor color specification. If count is
-216 then a 6x6x6 color cube is used (i.e. 6 levels of red, 6 of green,
-and 6 of blue); for other values, a cube
-approximately proportional to a 2x3x1 cube is used.
-
      •  -cmap, causes the application to install a private color map
-on an 8-bit display.
-
      
-
       
      See also argc() and argv().
-
-
      TQApplication::TQApplication ( int & argc, char ** argv, bool GUIenabled )
-
      
-Constructs an application object with argc command line arguments
-in argv. If GUIenabled is TRUE, a GUI application is
-constructed, otherwise a non-GUI (console) application is created.
-
       Set GUIenabled to FALSE for programs without a graphical user
-interface that should be able to run without a window system.
-
       On X11, the window system is initialized if GUIenabled is TRUE.
-If GUIenabled is FALSE, the application does not connect to the
-X-server.
-On Windows and Macintosh, currently the window system is always
-initialized, regardless of the value of GUIenabled. This may change in
-future versions of TQt.
-
       The following example shows how to create an application that
-uses a graphical interface when available.
-
      -  int main( int argc, char **argv )
-  {
-#ifdef Q_WS_X11
-    bool useGUI = getenv( "DISPLAY" ) != 0;
-#else
-    bool useGUI = TRUE;
-#endif
-    TQApplication app(argc, argv, useGUI);
-
-    if ( useGUI ) {
-       //start GUI version
-       ...
-    } else {
-       //start non-GUI version
-       ...
-    }
-    return app.exec();
-  }
-
      
- 
-
-
      TQApplication::TQApplication ( int & argc, char ** argv, Type type )
-
      
-Constructs an application object with argc command line arguments
-in argv.
-
       For TQt/Embedded, passing TQApplication::GuiServer for type
-makes this application the server (equivalent to running with the
--qws option).
-
-
      TQApplication::TQApplication ( Display * dpy, HANDLE visual = 0, HANDLE colormap = 0 )
-
      
-Create an application, given an already open display dpy. If visual and colormap are non-zero, the application will use those as
-the default Visual and Colormap contexts.
-
       Warning: TQt only supports TrueColor visuals at depths higher than 8
-bits-per-pixel.
-
       This is available only on X11.
-
-
      TQApplication::TQApplication ( Display * dpy, int argc, char ** argv, HANDLE visual = 0, HANDLE colormap = 0 )
-
      
-Create an application, given an already open display dpy and using
-argc command line arguments in argv. If visual and colormap are non-zero, the application will use those as
-the default Visual and Colormap contexts.
-
       Warning: TQt only supports TrueColor visuals at depths higher than 8
-bits-per-pixel.
-
       This is available only on X11.
-
       
-
      TQApplication::~TQApplication () [virtual]
-
      
-Cleans up any window system resources that were allocated by this
-application. Sets the global variable qApp to 0.
-
-
      void TQApplication::aboutTQt () [slot]
-
      
-Displays a simple message box about TQt. The message includes the
-version number of TQt being used by the application.
-
       This is useful for inclusion in the Help menu of an application.
-See the examples/menu/menu.cpp example.
-
       This function is a convenience slot for TQMessageBox::aboutTQt().
-
-
      void TQApplication::aboutToQuit () [signal]
-
      
-
-
       This signal is emitted when the application is about to quit the
-main event loop, e.g. when the event loop level drops to zero.
-This may happen either after a call to quit() from inside the
-application or when the users shuts down the entire desktop session.
-
       The signal is particularly useful if your application has to do some
-last-second cleanup. Note that no user interaction is possible in
-this state.
-
       
      See also quit().
-
-
      TQWidget * TQApplication::activeModalWidget () [static]
-
      
-Returns the active modal widget.
-
       A modal widget is a special top level widget which is a subclass of
-TQDialog that specifies the modal parameter of the constructor as
-TRUE. A modal widget must be closed before the user can continue
-with other parts of the program.
-
       Modal widgets are organized in a stack. This function returns
-the active modal widget at the top of the stack.
-
       
      See also activePopupWidget() and topLevelWidgets().
-
-
      TQWidget * TQApplication::activePopupWidget () [static]
-
      
-Returns the active popup widget.
-
       A popup widget is a special top level widget that sets the WType_Popup widget flag, e.g. the TQPopupMenu widget. When the
-application opens a popup widget, all events are sent to the popup.
-Normal widgets and modal widgets cannot be accessed before the popup
-widget is closed.
-
       Only other popup widgets may be opened when a popup widget is shown.
-The popup widgets are organized in a stack. This function returns
-the active popup widget at the top of the stack.
-
       
      See also activeModalWidget() and topLevelWidgets().
-
-
      TQWidget * TQApplication::activeWindow () const
-
      
-
-
       Returns the application top-level window that has the keyboard input
-focus, or 0 if no application window has the focus. Note that
-there might be an activeWindow() even if there is no focusWidget(),
-for example if no widget in that window accepts key events.
-
       
      See also TQWidget::setFocus(), TQWidget::focus, and focusWidget().
-
-
      Example: network/mail/smtp.cpp.
-
      void TQApplication::addLibraryPath ( const TQString & path ) [static]
-
      
-Append path to the end of the library path list. If path is
-empty or already in the path list, the path list is not changed.
-
       The default path list consists of a single entry, the installation
-directory for plugins.  The default installation directory for plugins
-is INSTALL/plugins, where INSTALL is the directory where TQt was
-installed.
-
       
      See also removeLibraryPath(), libraryPaths(), and setLibraryPaths().
-
-
      TQWidgetList * TQApplication::allWidgets () [static]
-
      
-Returns a list of all the widgets in the application.
-
       The list is created using new and must be deleted by the caller.
-
       The list is empty (TQPtrList::isEmpty()) if there are no widgets.
-
       Note that some of the widgets may be hidden.
-
       Example that updates all widgets:
-
      -    TQWidgetList  *list = TQApplication::allWidgets();
-    TQWidgetListIt it( *list );         // iterate over the widgets
-    TQWidget * w;
-    while ( (w=it.current()) != 0 ) {  // for each widget...
-        ++it;
-        w->update();
-    }
-    delete list;                      // delete the list, not the widgets
-  
      
- 
-
       The TQWidgetList class is defined in the qwidgetlist.h header
-file.
-
       Warning: Delete the list as soon as you have finished using it.
-The widgets in the list may be deleted by someone else at any time.
-
       
      See also topLevelWidgets(), TQWidget::visible, and TQPtrList::isEmpty().
-
-
      TQString TQApplication::applicationDirPath ()
-
      
-Returns the directory that contains the application executable.
-
       For example, if you have installed TQt in the C:\Trolltech\TQt
-directory, and you run the demo example, this function will
-return "C:/Trolltech/TQt/examples/demo".
-
       On Mac OS X this will point to the directory actually containing the
-executable, which may be inside of an application bundle (if the
-application is bundled).
-
       Warning: On Unix, this function assumes that argv[0] contains the file
-name of the executable (which it normally does). It also assumes that
-the current directory hasn't been changed by the application.
-
       
      See also applicationFilePath().
-
-
      TQString TQApplication::applicationFilePath ()
-
      
-Returns the file path of the application executable.
-
       For example, if you have installed TQt in the C:\Trolltech\TQt
-directory, and you run the demo example, this function will
-return "C:/Trolltech/TQt/examples/demo/demo.exe".
-
       Warning: On Unix, this function assumes that argv[0] contains the file
-name of the executable (which it normally does). It also assumes that
-the current directory hasn't been changed by the application.
-
       
      See also applicationDirPath().
-
-
      int TQApplication::argc () const
-
      
-
-
       Returns the number of command line arguments.
-
       The documentation for argv() describes how to process command line
-arguments.
-
       
      See also argv() and TQApplication::TQApplication().
-
-
      Examples: chart/main.cpp and scribble/scribble.cpp.
-
      char ** TQApplication::argv () const
-
      
-
-
       Returns the command line argument vector.
-
       argv()[0] is the program name, argv()[1] is the first
-argument and argv()[argc()-1] is the last argument.
-
       A TQApplication object is constructed by passing argc and argv from the main() function. Some of the arguments may be
-recognized as TQt options and removed from the argument vector. For
-example, the X11 version of TQt knows about -display, -font
-and a few more options.
-
       Example:
-
      -        // showargs.cpp - displays program arguments in a list box
-
-        #include <qapplication.h>
-        #include <qlistbox.h>
-
-        int main( int argc, char **argv )
-        {
-            TQApplication a( argc, argv );
-            TQListBox b;
-            a.setMainWidget( &b );
-            for ( int i = 0; i < a.argc(); i++ )  // a.argc() == argc
-                b.insertItem( a.argv()[i] );      // a.argv()[i] == argv[i]
-            b.show();
-            return a.exec();
-        }
-    
      
- 
-
       If you run showargs -display unix:0 -font 9x15bold hello world
-under X11, the list box contains the three strings "showargs",
-"hello" and "world".
-
       TQt provides a global pointer, qApp, that points to the
-TQApplication object, and through which you can access argc() and
-argv() in functions other than main().
-
       
      See also argc() and TQApplication::TQApplication().
-
-
      Examples: chart/main.cpp and scribble/scribble.cpp.
-
      void TQApplication::beep () [static]
-
      
-Sounds the bell, using the default volume and sound.
-
-
      TQClipboard * TQApplication::clipboard () [static]
-
      
-Returns a pointer to the application global clipboard.
-
-
      Examples: regexptester/regexptester.cpp and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-
      void TQApplication::closeAllWindows () [slot]
-
      
-Closes all top-level windows.
-
       This function is particularly useful for applications with many
-top-level windows. It could, for example, be connected to a "Quit"
-entry in the file menu as shown in the following code example:
-
       
      -    // the "Quit" menu entry should try to close all windows
-    TQPopupMenu* file = new TQPopupMenu( this );
-    file->insertItem( "&Quit", qApp, SLOT(closeAllWindows()), CTRL+Key_Q );
-
-    // when the last window is closed, the application should quit
-    connect( qApp, SIGNAL( lastWindowClosed() ), qApp, SLOT( quit() ) );
-  
      
- 
-
       The windows are closed in random order, until one window does not
-accept the close event.
-
       
      See also TQWidget::close(), TQWidget::closeEvent(), lastWindowClosed(), quit(), topLevelWidgets(), and TQWidget::isTopLevel.
-
-
       
-
      Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
-
      bool TQApplication::closingDown () [static]
-
      
-Returns TRUE if the application objects are being destroyed;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
       
      See also startingUp().
-
-
      int TQApplication::colorSpec () [static]
-
      
-Returns the color specification.
-
      See also TQApplication::setColorSpec().
-
-
      Example: showimg/showimg.cpp.
-
      void TQApplication::commitData ( TQSessionManager & sm ) [virtual]
-
      
-
-
       This function deals with session
-  management. It is invoked when the TQSessionManager wants the
-application to commit all its data.
-
       Usually this means saving all open files, after getting
-permission from the user. Furthermore you may want to provide a means
-by which the user can cancel the shutdown.
-
       Note that you should not exit the application within this function.
-Instead, the session manager may or may not do this afterwards,
-depending on the context.
-
       Warning: Within this function, no user interaction is possible, unless you ask the session manager sm for explicit permission.
-See TQSessionManager::allowsInteraction() and
-TQSessionManager::allowsErrorInteraction() for details and example
-usage.
-
       The default implementation requests interaction and sends a close
-event to all visible top level widgets. If any event was
-rejected, the shutdown is canceled.
-
       
      See also isSessionRestored(), sessionId(), saveState(), and the Session Management overview.
-
-
      int TQApplication::cursorFlashTime () [static]
-
      
-Returns the text cursor's flash (blink) time in milliseconds. The
-flash time is the time required to display, invert and restore the
-caret display.
-
       The default value on X11 is 1000 milliseconds. On Windows, the
-control panel value is used.
-
       Widgets should not cache this value since it may be changed at any
-time by the user changing the global desktop settings.
-
       
      See also setCursorFlashTime().
-
-
      TQTextCodec * TQApplication::defaultCodec () const
-
       This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
       Returns TQTextCodec::codecForTr().
-
-
      TQDesktopWidget * TQApplication::desktop () [static]
-
      
-Returns the desktop widget (also called the root window).
-
       The desktop widget is useful for obtaining the size of the screen.
-It may also be possible to draw on the desktop. We recommend against
-assuming that it's possible to draw on the desktop, since this does
-not work on all operating systems.
-
       
      -    TQDesktopWidget *d = TQApplication::desktop();
-    int w = d->width();     // returns desktop width
-    int h = d->height();    // returns desktop height
-  
      
- 
-
-
      Examples: canvas/main.cpp, desktop/desktop.cpp, helpviewer/main.cpp, i18n/main.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, qwerty/main.cpp, and scribble/main.cpp.
-
      bool TQApplication::desktopSettingsAware () [static]
-
      
-Returns the value set by setDesktopSettingsAware(); by default TRUE.
-
       
      See also setDesktopSettingsAware().
-
-
      int TQApplication::doubleClickInterval () [static]
-
      
-Returns the maximum duration for a double click.
-
       The default value on X11 is 400 milliseconds. On Windows, the
-control panel value is used.
-
       
      See also setDoubleClickInterval().
-
-
      int TQApplication::enter_loop ()
-
      
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
       This function enters the main event loop (recursively). Do not call
-it unless you really know what you are doing.
-
       Use TQApplication::eventLoop()->enterLoop() instead.
-
       
-
      TQEventLoop * TQApplication::eventLoop () [static]
-
      
-Returns the application event loop. This function will return
-zero if called during and after destroying TQApplication.
-
       To create your own instance of TQEventLoop or TQEventLoop subclass create
-it before you create the TQApplication object.
-
       
      See also TQEventLoop.
-
-
      Example: distributor/distributor.ui.h.
-
      int TQApplication::exec ()
-
      
-Enters the main event loop and waits until exit() is called or the
-main widget is destroyed, and returns the value that was set to
-exit() (which is 0 if exit() is called via quit()).
-
       It is necessary to call this function to start event handling. The
-main event loop receives events from the window system and
-dispatches these to the application widgets.
-
       Generally speaking, no user interaction can take place before
-calling exec(). As a special case, modal widgets like TQMessageBox
-can be used before calling exec(), because modal widgets call
-exec() to start a local event loop.
-
       To make your application perform idle processing, i.e. executing a
-special function whenever there are no pending events, use a
-TQTimer with 0 timeout. More advanced idle processing schemes can
-be achieved using processEvents().
-
       
      See also quit(), exit(), processEvents(), and setMainWidget().
-
-
      Examples: helpsystem/main.cpp, life/main.cpp, network/archivesearch/main.cpp, network/ftpclient/main.cpp, opengl/main.cpp, t1/main.cpp, and t4/main.cpp.
-
      void TQApplication::exit ( int retcode = 0 ) [static]
-
      
-Tells the application to exit with a return code.
-
       After this function has been called, the application leaves the main
-event loop and returns from the call to exec(). The exec() function
-returns retcode.
-
       By convention, a retcode of 0 means success, and any non-zero
-value indicates an error.
-
       Note that unlike the C library function of the same name, this
-function does return to the caller -- it is event processing that
-stops.
-
       
      See also quit() and exec().
-
-
      Examples: chart/chartform.cpp, extension/mainform.ui.h, and picture/picture.cpp.
-
      void TQApplication::exit_loop ()
-
      
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
       This function exits from a recursive call to the main event loop.
-Do not call it unless you are an expert.
-
       Use TQApplication::eventLoop()->exitLoop() instead.
-
       
-
      void TQApplication::flush () [static]
-
      
-Flushes the window system specific event queues.
-
       If you are doing graphical changes inside a loop that does not
-return to the event loop on asynchronous window systems like X11
-or double buffered window systems like MacOS X, and you want to
-visualize these changes immediately (e.g. Splash Screens), call
-this function.
-
       
      See also flushX(), sendPostedEvents(), and TQPainter::flush().
-
-
      void TQApplication::flushX () [static]
-
      
-Flushes the X event queue in the X11 implementation. This normally
-returns almost immediately. Does nothing on other platforms.
-
       
      See also syncX().
-
-
      Example: xform/xform.cpp.
-
      TQWidget * TQApplication::focusWidget () const
-
      
-
-
       Returns the application widget that has the keyboard input focus, or
-0 if no widget in this application has the focus.
-
       
      See also TQWidget::setFocus(), TQWidget::focus, and activeWindow().
-
-
      TQFont TQApplication::font ( const TQWidget * w = 0 ) [static]
-
      
-Returns the default font for the widget w, or the default
-application font if w is 0.
-
       
      See also setFont(), fontMetrics(), and TQWidget::font.
-
-
      Examples: qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp, themes/metal.cpp, and themes/themes.cpp.
-
      TQFontMetrics TQApplication::fontMetrics () [static]
-
      
-Returns display (screen) font metrics for the application font.
-
       
      See also font(), setFont(), TQWidget::fontMetrics(), and TQPainter::fontMetrics().
-
-
      TQSize TQApplication::globalStrut () [static]
-
      
-
-
       Returns the application's global strut.
-
       The strut is a size object whose dimensions are the minimum that any
-GUI element that the user can interact with should have. For example
-no button should be resized to be smaller than the global strut size.
-
       
      See also setGlobalStrut().
-
-
      void TQApplication::guiThreadAwake () [signal]
-
      
-
-
       This signal is emitted after the event loop returns from a function
-that could block.
-
       
      See also wakeUpGuiThread().
-
-
      bool TQApplication::hasGlobalMouseTracking () [static]
-
      
-
-
       Returns TRUE if global mouse tracking is enabled; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
       
      See also setGlobalMouseTracking().
-
-
      bool TQApplication::hasPendingEvents ()
-
      
-This function returns TRUE if there are pending events; otherwise
-returns FALSE. Pending events can be either from the window system
-or posted events using TQApplication::postEvent().
-
-
      int TQApplication::horizontalAlignment ( int align ) [static]
-
      
-
-
       Strips out vertical alignment flags and transforms an
-alignment align of AlignAuto into AlignLeft or
-AlignRight according to the language used. The other horizontal
-alignment flags are left untouched.
-
-
      void TQApplication::installTranslator ( TQTranslator * mf )
-
      
-Adds the message file mf to the list of message files to be used
-for translations.
-
       Multiple message files can be installed. Translations are searched
-for in the last installed message file, then the one from last, and
-so on, back to the first installed message file. The search stops as
-soon as a matching translation is found.
-
       
      See also removeTranslator(), translate(), and TQTranslator::load().
-
-
      Example: i18n/main.cpp.
-
      bool TQApplication::isEffectEnabled ( TQt::UIEffect effect ) [static]
-
      
-Returns TRUE if effect is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
       By default, TQt will try to use the desktop settings. Call
-setDesktopSettingsAware(FALSE) to prevent this.
-
       Note: All effects are disabled on screens running at less than
-16-bit color depth.
-
       
      See also setEffectEnabled() and TQt::UIEffect.
-
-
      bool TQApplication::isSessionRestored () const
-
      
-
-
       Returns TRUE if the application has been restored from an earlier
-session; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
       
      See also sessionId(), commitData(), and saveState().
-
-
      void TQApplication::lastWindowClosed () [signal]
-
      
-
-
       This signal is emitted when the user has closed the last
-top level window.
-
       The signal is very useful when your application has many top level
-widgets but no main widget. You can then connect it to the quit()
-slot.
-
       For convenience, this signal is not emitted for transient top level
-widgets such as popup menus and dialogs.
-
       
      See also mainWidget(), topLevelWidgets(), TQWidget::isTopLevel, and TQWidget::close().
-
-
      Examples: addressbook/main.cpp, extension/main.cpp, helpviewer/main.cpp, mdi/main.cpp, network/archivesearch/main.cpp, qwerty/main.cpp, and regexptester/main.cpp.
-
      TQStringList TQApplication::libraryPaths () [static]
-
      
-Returns a list of paths that the application will search when
-dynamically loading libraries.
-The installation directory for plugins is the only entry if no
-paths have been set.  The default installation directory for plugins
-is INSTALL/plugins, where INSTALL is the directory where TQt was
-installed. The directory of the application executable (NOT the
-working directory) is also added to the plugin paths.
-
       If you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate over a
-copy, e.g.
-
      -    TQStringList list = app.libraryPaths();
-    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    while( it != list.end() ) {
-        myProcessing( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-    
      
- 
-
       See the plugins documentation for a
-description of how the library paths are used.
-
       
      See also setLibraryPaths(), addLibraryPath(), removeLibraryPath(), and TQLibrary.
-
-
      void TQApplication::lock ()
-
       
-
       Lock the TQt Library Mutex. If another thread has already locked the
-mutex, the calling thread will block until the other thread has
-unlocked the mutex.
-
       
      See also unlock(), locked(), and Thread Support in TQt.
-
-
      bool TQApplication::locked ()
-
       
-
       Returns TRUE if the TQt Library Mutex is locked by a different thread;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
       Warning: Due to different implementations of recursive mutexes on
-the supported platforms, calling this function from the same thread
-that previously locked the mutex will give undefined results.
-
       
      See also lock(), unlock(), and Thread Support in TQt.
-
-
      int TQApplication::loopLevel () const
-
      
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
       Returns the current loop level.
-
       Use TQApplication::eventLoop()->loopLevel() instead.
-
       
-
      bool TQApplication::macEventFilter ( EventHandlerCallRef, EventRef ) [virtual]
-
      
-This virtual function is only implemented under Macintosh.
-
       If you create an application that inherits TQApplication and
-reimplement this function, you get direct access to all Carbon Events
-that are received from the MacOS.
-
       Return TRUE if you want to stop the event from being processed.
-Return FALSE for normal event dispatching.
-
-
      TQWidget * TQApplication::mainWidget () const
-
      
-
-
       Returns the main application widget, or 0 if there is no main
-widget.
-
       
      See also setMainWidget().
-
-
      bool TQApplication::notify ( TQObject * receiver, TQEvent * e ) [virtual]
-
      
-Sends event e to receiver: receiver->event(e).
-Returns the value that is returned from the receiver's event handler.
-
       For certain types of events (e.g. mouse and key events),
-the event will be propagated to the receiver's parent and so on up to
-the top-level object if the receiver is not interested in the event
-(i.e., it returns FALSE).
-
       There are five different ways that events can be processed;
-reimplementing this virtual function is just one of them. All five
-approaches are listed below:
-
        
-
      1.  Reimplementing this function. This is very powerful, providing
-complete control; but only one subclass can be qApp.
-
         
      2.  Installing an event filter on qApp. Such an event filter is able
-to process all events for all widgets, so it's just as powerful as
-reimplementing notify(); furthermore, it's possible to have more
-than one application-global event filter. Global event filters even
-see mouse events for disabled
-  widgets, and if global mouse
-  tracking is enabled, as well as mouse move events for all
-widgets.
-
         
      3.  Reimplementing TQObject::event() (as TQWidget does). If you do
-this you get Tab key presses, and you get to see the events before
-any widget-specific event filters.
-
         
      4.  Installing an event filter on the object. Such an event filter
-gets all the events except Tab and Shift-Tab key presses.
-
         
      5.  Reimplementing paintEvent(), mousePressEvent() and so
-on. This is the commonest, easiest and least powerful way.
-
      
-
       
      See also TQObject::event() and installEventFilter().
-
-
      TQCursor * TQApplication::overrideCursor () [static]
-
      
-
-
       Returns the active application override cursor.
-
       This function returns 0 if no application cursor has been defined
-(i.e. the internal cursor stack is empty).
-
       
      See also setOverrideCursor() and restoreOverrideCursor().
-
-
      TQPalette TQApplication::palette ( const TQWidget * w = 0 ) [static]
-
      
-Returns the application palette.
-
       If a widget is passed in w, the default palette for the
-widget's class is returned. This may or may not be the application
-palette. In most cases there isn't a special palette for certain
-types of widgets, but one notable exception is the popup menu under
-Windows, if the user has defined a special background color for
-menus in the display settings.
-
       
      See also setPalette() and TQWidget::palette.
-
-
      Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp, themes/metal.cpp, and themes/wood.cpp.
-
      void TQApplication::polish ( TQWidget * w ) [virtual]
-
      
-Initialization of the appearance of the widget w before it is first
-shown.
-
       Usually widgets call this automatically when they are polished. It
-may be used to do some style-based central customization of widgets.
-
       Note that you are not limited to the public functions of TQWidget.
-Instead, based on meta information like TQObject::className() you are
-able to customize any kind of widget.
-
       
      See also TQStyle::polish(), TQWidget::polish(), setPalette(), and setFont().
-
-
      void TQApplication::postEvent ( TQObject * receiver, TQEvent * event ) [static]
-
      Note: This function is thread-safe when TQt is built withthread support.
      
-
-Adds the event event with the object receiver as the receiver of the
-event, to an event queue and returns immediately.
-
       The event must be allocated on the heap since the post event queue
-will take ownership of the event and delete it once it has been posted.
-
       When control returns to the main event loop, all events that are
-stored in the queue will be sent using the notify() function.
-
       
-
       
      See also sendEvent() and notify().
-
-
      void TQApplication::processEvents ()
-
      
-Processes pending events, for 3 seconds or until there are no more
-events to process, whichever is shorter.
-
       You can call this function occasionally when your program is busy
-performing a long operation (e.g. copying a file).
-
       
      See also exec(), TQTimer, and TQEventLoop::processEvents().
-
-
      Examples: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp and network/ftpclient/main.cpp.
-
      void TQApplication::processEvents ( int maxtime )
-
      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
       Processes pending events for maxtime milliseconds or until
-there are no more events to process, whichever is shorter.
-
       You can call this function occasionally when you program is busy
-doing a long operation (e.g. copying a file).
-
       
      See also exec(), TQTimer, and TQEventLoop::processEvents().
-
-
      void TQApplication::processOneEvent ()
-
       This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
       Waits for an event to occur, processes it, then returns.
-
       This function is useful for adapting TQt to situations where the
-event processing must be grafted onto existing program loops.
-
       Using this function in new applications may be an indication of design
-problems.
-
       
      See also processEvents(), exec(), and TQTimer.
-
-
      void TQApplication::quit () [slot]
-
      
-Tells the application to exit with return code 0 (success).
-Equivalent to calling TQApplication::exit( 0 ).
-
       It's common to connect the lastWindowClosed() signal to quit(), and
-you also often connect e.g. TQButton::clicked() or signals in
-TQAction, TQPopupMenu or TQMenuBar to it.
-
       Example:
-
      -    TQPushButton *quitButton = new TQPushButton( "Quit" );
-    connect( quitButton, SIGNAL(clicked()), qApp, SLOT(quit()) );
-  
      
- 
-
       
      See also exit(), aboutToQuit(), lastWindowClosed(), and TQAction.
-
-
      Examples: addressbook/main.cpp, mdi/main.cpp, network/archivesearch/main.cpp, regexptester/main.cpp, t2/main.cpp, t4/main.cpp, and t6/main.cpp.
-
      TQWSDecoration & TQApplication::qwsDecoration () [static]
-
      
-Return the TQWSDecoration used for decorating windows.
-
       This method is non-portable. It is available only in TQt/Embedded.
-
       
      See also TQWSDecoration.
-
-
      bool TQApplication::qwsEventFilter ( TQWSEvent * ) [virtual]
-
      
-This virtual function is only implemented under TQt/Embedded.
-
       If you create an application that inherits TQApplication and
-reimplement this function, you get direct access to all TQWS (Q
-Window System) events that the are received from the TQWS master
-process.
-
       Return TRUE if you want to stop the event from being processed.
-Return FALSE for normal event dispatching.
-
-
      void TQApplication::qwsSetCustomColors ( TQRgb * colorTable, int start, int numColors )
-
      
-Set TQt/Embedded custom color table.
-
       TQt/Embedded on 8-bpp displays allocates a standard 216 color cube.
-The remaining 40 colors may be used by setting a custom color
-table in the TQWS master process before any clients connect.
-
       colorTable is an array of up to 40 custom colors. start is
-the starting index (0-39) and numColors is the number of colors
-to be set (1-40).
-
       This method is non-portable. It is available only in
-TQt/Embedded.
-
-
      void TQApplication::qwsSetDecoration ( TQWSDecoration * d ) [static]
-
      
-Set the TQWSDecoration derived class to use for decorating the
-TQt/Embedded windows to d.
-
       This method is non-portable. It is available only in
-TQt/Embedded.
-
       
      See also TQWSDecoration.
-
-
      void TQApplication::removeLibraryPath ( const TQString & path ) [static]
-
      
-Removes path from the library path list. If path is empty or not
-in the path list, the list is not changed.
-
       
      See also addLibraryPath(), libraryPaths(), and setLibraryPaths().
-
-
      void TQApplication::removePostedEvents ( TQObject * receiver ) [static]
-
      Note: This function is thread-safe when TQt is built withthread support.
      
-
-Removes all events posted using postEvent() for receiver.
-
       The events are not dispatched, instead they are removed from the
-queue. You should never need to call this function. If you do call it,
-be aware that killing events may cause receiver to break one or
-more invariants.
-
       
-
-
      void TQApplication::removeTranslator ( TQTranslator * mf )
-
      
-Removes the message file mf from the list of message files used by
-this application. (It does not delete the message file from the file
-system.)
-
       
      See also installTranslator(), translate(), and TQObject::tr().
-
-
      Example: i18n/main.cpp.
-
      void TQApplication::restoreOverrideCursor () [static]
-
      
-Undoes the last setOverrideCursor().
-
       If setOverrideCursor() has been called twice, calling
-restoreOverrideCursor() will activate the first cursor set.
-Calling this function a second time restores the original widgets'
-cursors.
-
       
      See also setOverrideCursor() and overrideCursor().
-
-
      Examples: distributor/distributor.ui.h, network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h, network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-
      bool TQApplication::reverseLayout () [static]
-
      
-Returns TRUE if all dialogs and widgets will be laid out in a
-mirrored (right to left) fashion. Returns FALSE if dialogs and
-widgets will be laid out left to right.
-
       
      See also setReverseLayout().
-
-
      void TQApplication::saveState ( TQSessionManager & sm ) [virtual]
-
      
-
-
       This function deals with session
-  management. It is invoked when the
-session manager wants the application
-to preserve its state for a future session.
-
       For example, a text editor would create a temporary file that
-includes the current contents of its edit buffers, the location of
-the cursor and other aspects of the current editing session.
-
       Note that you should never exit the application within this
-function. Instead, the session manager may or may not do this
-afterwards, depending on the context. Futhermore, most session
-managers will very likely request a saved state immediately after
-the application has been started. This permits the session manager
-to learn about the application's restart policy.
-
       Warning: Within this function, no user interaction is possible, unless you ask the session manager sm for explicit permission.
-See TQSessionManager::allowsInteraction() and
-TQSessionManager::allowsErrorInteraction() for details.
-
       
      See also isSessionRestored(), sessionId(), commitData(), and the Session Management overview.
-
-
      bool TQApplication::sendEvent ( TQObject * receiver, TQEvent * event ) [static]
-
      
-
-
       Sends event event directly to receiver receiver, using the
-notify() function. Returns the value that was returned from the event
-handler.
-
       The event is not deleted when the event has been sent. The normal
-approach is to create the event on the stack, e.g.
-
      -    TQMouseEvent me( TQEvent::MouseButtonPress, pos, 0, 0 );
-    TQApplication::sendEvent( mainWindow, &me );
-    
      
- 
-If you create the event on the heap you must delete it.
-
       
      See also postEvent() and notify().
-
-
      Example: popup/popup.cpp.
-
      void TQApplication::sendPostedEvents ( TQObject * receiver, int event_type ) [static]
-
      
-Immediately dispatches all events which have been previously queued
-with TQApplication::postEvent() and which are for the object receiver
-and have the event type event_type.
-
       Note that events from the window system are not dispatched by this
-function, but by processEvents().
-
       If receiver is null, the events of event_type are sent for all
-objects. If event_type is 0, all the events are sent for receiver.
-
-
      void TQApplication::sendPostedEvents () [static]
-
       This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
       Dispatches all posted events, i.e. empties the event queue.
-
-
      TQString TQApplication::sessionId () const
-
      
-
-
       Returns the current session's identifier.
-
       If the application has been restored from an earlier session, this
-identifier is the same as it was in that previous session.
-
       The session identifier is guaranteed to be unique both for different
-applications and for different instances of the same application.
-
       
      See also isSessionRestored(), sessionKey(), commitData(), and saveState().
-
-
      TQString TQApplication::sessionKey () const
-
      
-
-
       Returns the session key in the current session.
-
       If the application has been restored from an earlier session, this
-key is the same as it was when the previous session ended.
-
       The session key changes with every call of commitData() or
-saveState().
-
       
      See also isSessionRestored(), sessionId(), commitData(), and saveState().
-
-
      void TQApplication::setColorSpec ( int spec ) [static]
-
      
-Sets the color specification for the application to spec.
-
       The color specification controls how the application allocates colors
-when run on a display with a limited amount of colors, e.g. 8 bit / 256
-color displays.
-
       The color specification must be set before you create the TQApplication
-object.
-
       The options are:
-
        
-
      •  TQApplication::NormalColor.
-This is the default color allocation strategy. Use this option if
-your application uses buttons, menus, texts and pixmaps with few
-colors. With this option, the application uses system global
-colors. This works fine for most applications under X11, but on
-Windows machines it may cause dithering of non-standard colors.
-
      •  TQApplication::CustomColor.
-Use this option if your application needs a small number of custom
-colors. On X11, this option is the same as NormalColor. On Windows, TQt
-creates a Windows palette, and allocates colors to it on demand.
-
      •  TQApplication::ManyColor.
-Use this option if your application is very color hungry
-(e.g. it requires thousands of colors).
-Under X11 the effect is:
-
          
-
        •  For 256-color displays which have at best a 256 color true color
-visual, the default visual is used, and colors are allocated
-from a color cube. The color cube is the 6x6x6 (216 color) "Web
-palette"*, but the number of colors can be changed
-by the -ncols option. The user can force the application to
-use the true color visual with the -visual option.
-
        •  For 256-color displays which have a true color visual with more
-than 256 colors, use that visual. Silicon Graphics X servers
-have this feature, for example. They provide an 8 bit visual
-by default but can deliver true color when asked.
-
        
-On Windows, TQt creates a Windows palette, and fills it with a color cube.
-
      
-
       Be aware that the CustomColor and ManyColor choices may lead to colormap
-flashing: The foreground application gets (most) of the available
-colors, while the background windows will look less attractive.
-
       Example:
-
      -  int main( int argc, char **argv )
-  {
-      TQApplication::setColorSpec( TQApplication::ManyColor );
-      TQApplication a( argc, argv );
-      ...
-  }
-  
      
- 
-
       TQColor provides more functionality for controlling color allocation and
-freeing up certain colors. See TQColor::enterAllocContext() for more
-information.
-
       To check what mode you end up with, call TQColor::numBitPlanes() once
-the TQApplication object exists. A value greater than 8 (typically
-16, 24 or 32) means true color.
-
       * The color cube used by TQt has 216 colors whose red,
-green, and blue components always have one of the following values:
-0x00, 0x33, 0x66, 0x99, 0xCC, or 0xFF.
-
       
      See also colorSpec(), TQColor::numBitPlanes(), and TQColor::enterAllocContext().
-
-
      Examples: helpviewer/main.cpp, opengl/main.cpp, showimg/main.cpp, t9/main.cpp, tetrax/tetrax.cpp, tetrix/tetrix.cpp, and themes/main.cpp.
-
      void TQApplication::setCursorFlashTime ( int msecs ) [static]
-
      
-Sets the text cursor's flash (blink) time to msecs
-milliseconds. The flash time is the time required to display,
-invert and restore the caret display. Usually the text cursor is
-displayed for msecs/2 milliseconds, then hidden for msecs/2
-milliseconds, but this may vary.
-
       Note that on Microsoft Windows, calling this function sets the
-cursor flash time for all windows.
-
       
      See also cursorFlashTime().
-
-
      void TQApplication::setDefaultCodec ( TQTextCodec * codec )
-
       This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
       This is the same as TQTextCodec::setCodecForTr().
-
-
      void TQApplication::setDesktopSettingsAware ( bool on ) [static]
-
      
-By default, TQt will try to use the current standard colors, fonts
-etc., from the underlying window system's desktop settings,
-and use them for all relevant widgets. This behavior can be switched off
-by calling this function with on set to FALSE.
-
       This static function must be called before creating the TQApplication
-object, like this:
-
       
      -  int main( int argc, char** argv ) {
-    TQApplication::setDesktopSettingsAware( FALSE ); // I know better than the user
-    TQApplication myApp( argc, argv ); // Use default fonts & colors
-    ...
-  }
-  
      
- 
-
       
      See also desktopSettingsAware().
-
-
      void TQApplication::setDoubleClickInterval ( int ms ) [static]
-
      
-Sets the time limit that distinguishes a double click from two
-consecutive mouse clicks to ms milliseconds.
-
       Note that on Microsoft Windows, calling this function sets the
-double click interval for all windows.
-
       
      See also doubleClickInterval().
-
-
      void TQApplication::setEffectEnabled ( TQt::UIEffect effect, bool enable = TRUE ) [static]
-
      
-Enables the UI effect effect if enable is TRUE, otherwise
-the effect will not be used.
-
       Note: All effects are disabled on screens running at less than
-16-bit color depth.
-
       
      See also isEffectEnabled(), TQt::UIEffect, and setDesktopSettingsAware().
-
-
      void TQApplication::setFont ( const TQFont & font, bool informWidgets = FALSE, const char * className = 0 ) [static]
-
       Changes the default application font to font. If informWidgets is TRUE, then existing widgets are informed about the
-change and may adjust themselves to the new application
-setting. If informWidgets is FALSE, the change only affects newly
-created widgets. If className is passed, the change applies only
-to classes that inherit className (as reported by
-TQObject::inherits()).
-
       On application start-up, the default font depends on the window
-system. It can vary depending on both the window system version and
-the locale. This function lets you override the default font; but
-overriding may be a bad idea because, for example, some locales need
-extra-large fonts to support their special characters.
-
       
      See also font(), fontMetrics(), and TQWidget::font.
-
-
      Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp, themes/metal.cpp, and themes/themes.cpp.
-
      void TQApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking ( bool enable ) [static]
-
      
-Enables global mouse tracking if enable is TRUE, or disables it
-if enable is FALSE.
-
       Enabling global mouse tracking makes it possible for widget event
-filters or application event filters to get all mouse move events,
-even when no button is depressed. This is useful for special GUI
-elements, e.g. tooltips.
-
       Global mouse tracking does not affect widgets and their
-mouseMoveEvent(). For a widget to get mouse move events when no
-button is depressed, it must do TQWidget::setMouseTracking(TRUE).
-
       This function uses an internal counter. Each
-setGlobalMouseTracking(TRUE) must have a corresponding
-setGlobalMouseTracking(FALSE):
-
      -        // at this point global mouse tracking is off
-        TQApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking( TRUE );
-        TQApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking( TRUE );
-        TQApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking( FALSE );
-        // at this point it's still on
-        TQApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking( FALSE );
-        // but now it's off
-    
      
- 
-
       
      See also hasGlobalMouseTracking() and TQWidget::mouseTracking.
-
-
      void TQApplication::setGlobalStrut ( const TQSize & strut ) [static]
-
      
-Sets the application's global strut to strut.
-
       The strut is a size object whose dimensions are the minimum that any
-GUI element that the user can interact with should have. For example
-no button should be resized to be smaller than the global strut size.
-
       The strut size should be considered when reimplementing GUI controls
-that may be used on touch-screens or similar IO-devices.
-
       Example:
-
      -  TQSize& WidgetClass::sizeHint() const
-  {
-      return TQSize( 80, 25 ).expandedTo( TQApplication::globalStrut() );
-  }
-  
      
- 
-
       
      See also globalStrut().
-
-
      void TQApplication::setLibraryPaths ( const TQStringList & paths ) [static]
-
      
-Sets the list of directories to search when loading libraries to paths.
-All existing paths will be deleted and the path list will consist of the
-paths given in paths.
-
       
      See also libraryPaths(), addLibraryPath(), removeLibraryPath(), and TQLibrary.
-
-
      void TQApplication::setMainWidget ( TQWidget * mainWidget ) [virtual]
-
      
-Sets the application's main widget to mainWidget.
-
       In most respects the main widget is like any other widget, except
-that if it is closed, the application exits. Note that
-TQApplication does not take ownership of the mainWidget, so
-if you create your main widget on the heap you must delete it
-yourself.
-
       You need not have a main widget; connecting lastWindowClosed() to
-quit() is an alternative.
-
       For X11, this function also resizes and moves the main widget
-according to the -geometry command-line option, so you should
-set the default geometry (using TQWidget::setGeometry()) before
-calling setMainWidget().
-
       
      See also mainWidget(), exec(), and quit().
-
-
      Examples: chart/main.cpp, helpsystem/main.cpp, life/main.cpp, network/ftpclient/main.cpp, opengl/main.cpp, t1/main.cpp, and t4/main.cpp.
-
      void TQApplication::setOverrideCursor ( const TQCursor & cursor, bool replace = FALSE ) [static]
-
      
-Sets the application override cursor to cursor.
-
       Application override cursors are intended for showing the user
-that the application is in a special state, for example during an
-operation that might take some time.
-
       This cursor will be displayed in all the application's widgets
-until restoreOverrideCursor() or another setOverrideCursor() is
-called.
-
       Application cursors are stored on an internal stack.
-setOverrideCursor() pushes the cursor onto the stack, and
-restoreOverrideCursor() pops the active cursor off the stack.
-Every setOverrideCursor() must eventually be followed by a
-corresponding restoreOverrideCursor(), otherwise the stack will
-never be emptied.
-
       If replace is TRUE, the new cursor will replace the last
-override cursor (the stack keeps its depth). If replace is
-FALSE, the new stack is pushed onto the top of the stack.
-
       Example:
-
      -        TQApplication::setOverrideCursor( TQCursor(TQt::WaitCursor) );
-        calculateHugeMandelbrot();              // lunch time...
-        TQApplication::restoreOverrideCursor();
-    
      
- 
-
       
      See also overrideCursor(), restoreOverrideCursor(), and TQWidget::cursor.
-
-
      Examples: distributor/distributor.ui.h, network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h, network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-
      void TQApplication::setPalette ( const TQPalette & palette, bool informWidgets = FALSE, const char * className = 0 ) [static]
-
      
-Changes the default application palette to palette. If informWidgets is TRUE, then existing widgets are informed about the
-change and may adjust themselves to the new application
-setting. If informWidgets is FALSE, the change only affects newly
-created widgets.
-
       If className is passed, the change applies only to widgets that
-inherit className (as reported by TQObject::inherits()). If
-className is left 0, the change affects all widgets, thus overriding
-any previously set class specific palettes.
-
       The palette may be changed according to the current GUI style in
-TQStyle::polish().
-
       
      See also TQWidget::palette, palette(), and TQStyle::polish().
-
-
      Examples: i18n/main.cpp, themes/metal.cpp, themes/themes.cpp, and themes/wood.cpp.
-
      void TQApplication::setReverseLayout ( bool b ) [static]
-
      
-If b is TRUE, all dialogs and widgets will be laid out in a
-mirrored fashion, as required by right to left languages such as
-Arabic and Hebrew. If b is FALSE, dialogs and widgets are laid
-out left to right.
-
       Changing this flag in runtime does not cause a relayout of already
-instantiated widgets.
-
       
      See also reverseLayout().
-
-
      void TQApplication::setStartDragDistance ( int l ) [static]
-
      
-Sets the distance after which a drag should start to l pixels.
-
       
      See also startDragDistance().
-
-
      void TQApplication::setStartDragTime ( int ms ) [static]
-
      
-Sets the time after which a drag should start to ms ms.
-
       
      See also startDragTime().
-
-
      void TQApplication::setStyle ( TQStyle * style ) [static]
-
      
-Sets the application's GUI style to style. Ownership of the style
-object is transferred to TQApplication, so TQApplication will delete
-the style object on application exit or when a new style is set.
-
       Example usage:
-
      -    TQApplication::setStyle( new TQWindowsStyle );
-  
      
- 
-
       When switching application styles, the color palette is set back to
-the initial colors or the system defaults. This is necessary since
-certain styles have to adapt the color palette to be fully
-style-guide compliant.
-
       
      See also style(), TQStyle, setPalette(), and desktopSettingsAware().
-
-
      Example: themes/themes.cpp.
-
      TQStyle * TQApplication::setStyle ( const TQString & style ) [static]
-
      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
       Requests a TQStyle object for style from the TQStyleFactory.
-
       The string must be one of the TQStyleFactory::keys(), typically one
-of "windows", "motif", "cde", "motifplus", "platinum", "sgi" and
-"compact". Depending on the platform, "windowsxp", "aqua" or
-"macintosh" may be available.
-
       A later call to the TQApplication constructor will override the
-requested style when a "-style" option is passed in as a commandline
-parameter.
-
       Returns 0 if an unknown style is passed, otherwise the TQStyle object
-returned is set as the application's GUI style.
-
-
      void TQApplication::setWheelScrollLines ( int n ) [static]
-
      
-Sets the number of lines to scroll when the mouse wheel is rotated
-to n.
-
       If this number exceeds the number of visible lines in a certain
-widget, the widget should interpret the scroll operation as a
-single page up / page down operation instead.
-
       
      See also wheelScrollLines().
-
-
      void TQApplication::setWinStyleHighlightColor ( const TQColor & c ) [static]
-
      
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
       Sets the color used to mark selections in windows style for all widgets
-in the application. Will repaint all widgets if the color is changed.
-
       The default color is darkBlue.
-
      See also winStyleHighlightColor().
-
-
      int TQApplication::startDragDistance () [static]
-
      
-If you support drag and drop in you application and a drag should
-start after a mouse click and after moving the mouse a certain
-distance, you should use the value which this method returns as the
-distance.
-
       For example, if the mouse position of the click is stored in startPos and the current position (e.g. in the mouse move event) is
-currPos, you can find out if a drag should be started with code
-like this:
-
      -  if ( ( startPos - currPos ).manhattanLength() >
-       TQApplication::startDragDistance() )
-    startTheDrag();
-  
      
- 
-
       TQt uses this value internally, e.g. in TQFileDialog.
-
       The default value is 4 pixels.
-
       
      See also setStartDragDistance(), startDragTime(), and TQPoint::manhattanLength().
-
-
      int TQApplication::startDragTime () [static]
-
      
-If you support drag and drop in you application and a drag should
-start after a mouse click and after a certain time elapsed, you
-should use the value which this method returns as the delay (in ms).
-
       TQt also uses this delay internally, e.g. in TQTextEdit and TQLineEdit,
-for starting a drag.
-
       The default value is 500 ms.
-
       
      See also setStartDragTime() and startDragDistance().
-
-
      bool TQApplication::startingUp () [static]
-
      
-Returns TRUE if an application object has not been created yet;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
       
      See also closingDown().
-
-
      TQStyle & TQApplication::style () [static]
-
      
-Returns the application's style object.
-
       
      See also setStyle() and TQStyle.
-
-
      void TQApplication::syncX () [static]
-
      
-Synchronizes with the X server in the X11 implementation. This
-normally takes some time. Does nothing on other platforms.
-
       
      See also flushX().
-
-
      TQWidgetList * TQApplication::topLevelWidgets () [static]
-
      
-Returns a list of the top level widgets in the application.
-
       The list is created using new and must be deleted by the caller.
-
       The list is empty (TQPtrList::isEmpty()) if there are no top level
-widgets.
-
       Note that some of the top level widgets may be hidden, for example
-the tooltip if no tooltip is currently shown.
-
       Example:
-
      -    // Show all hidden top level widgets.
-    TQWidgetList  *list = TQApplication::topLevelWidgets();
-    TQWidgetListIt it( *list );  // iterate over the widgets
-    TQWidget * w;
-    while ( (w=it.current()) != 0 ) {   // for each top level widget...
-        ++it;
-        if ( !w->isVisible() )
-            w->show();
-    }
-    delete list;                // delete the list, not the widgets
-  
      
- 
-
       Warning: Delete the list as soon you have finished using it.
-The widgets in the list may be deleted by someone else at any time.
-
       
      See also allWidgets(), TQWidget::isTopLevel, TQWidget::visible, and TQPtrList::isEmpty().
-
-
      TQString TQApplication::translate ( const char * context, const char * sourceText, const char * comment = 0, Encoding encoding = DefaultCodec ) const
-
      Note: This function is reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
      
- 
-Returns the translation text for sourceText, by querying the
-installed messages files. The message files are searched from the most
-recently installed message file back to the first installed message
-file.
-
       TQObject::tr() and TQObject::trUtf8() provide this functionality more
-conveniently.
-
       context is typically a class name (e.g., "MyDialog") and
-sourceText is either English text or a short identifying text, if
-the output text will be very long (as for help texts).
-
       comment is a disambiguating comment, for when the same sourceText is used in different roles within the same context. By
-default, it is null. encoding indicates the 8-bit encoding of
-character stings
-
       See the TQTranslator documentation for more information about
-contexts and comments.
-
       If none of the message files contain a translation for sourceText in context, this function returns a TQString
-equivalent of sourceText. The encoding of sourceText is
-specified by encoding; it defaults to DefaultCodec.
-
       This function is not virtual. You can use alternative translation
-techniques by subclassing TQTranslator.
-
       Warning: This method is reentrant only if all translators are
-installed before calling this method.  Installing or removing
-translators while performing translations is not supported.  Doing
-so will most likely result in crashes or other undesirable behavior.
-
       
      See also TQObject::tr(), installTranslator(), and defaultCodec().
-
-
      bool TQApplication::tryLock ()
-
       
-
       Attempts to lock the TQt Library Mutex, and returns immediately. If
-the lock was obtained, this function returns TRUE. If another thread
-has locked the mutex, this function returns FALSE, instead of
-waiting for the lock to become available.
-
       The mutex must be unlocked with unlock() before another thread can
-successfully lock it.
-
       
      See also lock(), unlock(), and Thread Support in TQt.
-
-
      Type TQApplication::type () const
-
      
-Returns the type of application, Tty, GuiClient or GuiServer.
-
-
      void TQApplication::unlock ( bool wakeUpGui = TRUE )
-
       
-
       Unlock the TQt Library Mutex. If wakeUpGui is TRUE (the default),
-then the GUI thread will be woken with TQApplication::wakeUpGuiThread().
-
       
      See also lock(), locked(), and Thread Support in TQt.
-
-
      void TQApplication::wakeUpGuiThread ()
-
      
-
       Wakes up the GUI thread.
-
       
      See also guiThreadAwake() and Thread Support in TQt.
-
-
      int TQApplication::wheelScrollLines () [static]
-
      
-Returns the number of lines to scroll when the mouse wheel is
-rotated.
-
       
      See also setWheelScrollLines().
-
-
      TQWidget * TQApplication::widgetAt ( int x, int y, bool child = FALSE ) [static]
-
      
-Returns a pointer to the widget at global screen position (x, y), or 0 if there is no TQt widget there.
-
       If child is FALSE and there is a child widget at position (x, y), the top-level widget containing it is returned. If child
-is TRUE the child widget at position (x, y) is returned.
-
       This function is normally rather slow.
-
       
      See also TQCursor::pos(), TQWidget::grabMouse(), and TQWidget::grabKeyboard().
-
-
      TQWidget * TQApplication::widgetAt ( const TQPoint & pos, bool child = FALSE ) [static]
-
      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
       Returns a pointer to the widget at global screen position pos,
-or 0 if there is no TQt widget there.
-
       If child is FALSE and there is a child widget at position pos, the top-level widget containing it is returned. If child
-is TRUE the child widget at position pos is returned.
-
-
      bool TQApplication::winEventFilter ( MSG * ) [virtual]
-
      
-This virtual function is only implemented under Windows.
-
       The message procedure calls this function for every message
-received. Reimplement this function if you want to process window
-messages that are not processed by TQt. If you don't want
-the event to be processed by TQt, then return TRUE; otherwise
-return FALSE.
-
-
      void TQApplication::winFocus ( TQWidget * widget, bool gotFocus )
-
      
-This function is available only on Windows.
-
       If gotFocus is TRUE, widget will become the active window.
-Otherwise the active window is reset to NULL.
-
-
      const TQColor & TQApplication::winStyleHighlightColor () [static]
-
      
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
       Returns the color used to mark selections in windows style.
-
       
      See also setWinStyleHighlightColor().
-
-
      bool TQApplication::x11EventFilter ( XEvent * ) [virtual]
-
      
-This virtual function is only implemented under X11.
-
       If you create an application that inherits TQApplication and
-reimplement this function, you get direct access to all X events
-that the are received from the X server.
-
       Return TRUE if you want to stop the event from being processed.
-Return FALSE for normal event dispatching.
-
       
      See also x11ProcessEvent().
-
-
      int TQApplication::x11ProcessEvent ( XEvent * event )
-
      
-This function does the core processing of individual X
-events, normally by dispatching TQt events to the right
-destination.
-
       It returns 1 if the event was consumed by special handling, 0 if
-the event was consumed by normal handling, and -1 if the event was for an unrecognized widget.
-
       
      See also x11EventFilter().
-
-
      Related Functions
      
-
      void Q_ASSERT ( bool test )
-
      
-
-
       
-
       Prints a warning message containing the source code file name and
-line number if test is FALSE.
-
       This is really a macro defined in qglobal.h.
-
       Q_ASSERT is useful for testing pre- and post-conditions.
-
       Example:
-
      -        //
-        // File: div.cpp
-        //
-
-        #include <qglobal.h>
-
-        int divide( int a, int b )
-        {
-            Q_ASSERT( b != 0 );                 // this is line 9
-            return a/b;
-        }
-    
      
- 
-
       If b is zero, the Q_ASSERT statement will output the following
-message using the qWarning() function:
-
      -        ASSERT: "b != 0" in div.cpp (9)
-    
      
- 
-
       
      See also qWarning() and Debugging.
-
-
      void Q_CHECK_PTR ( void * p )
-
      
-
-
       
-
       If p is 0, prints a warning message containing the source code file
-name and line number, saying that the program ran out of memory.
-
       This is really a macro defined in qglobal.h.
-
       Example:
-
      -        int *a;
-
-        Q_CHECK_PTR( a = new int[80] );  // WRONG!
-
-        a = new (nothrow) int[80];       // Right
-        Q_CHECK_PTR( a );
-    
      
- 
-
       
      See also qWarning() and Debugging.
-
-
      void qAddPostRoutine ( TQtCleanUpFunction p )
-
      
-
-
       Adds a global routine that will be called from the TQApplication
-destructor. This function is normally used to add cleanup routines
-for program-wide functionality.
-
       The function given by p should take no arguments and return
-nothing, like this:
-
      -    static int *global_ptr = 0;
-
-    static void cleanup_ptr()
-    {
-        delete [] global_ptr;
-        global_ptr = 0;
-    }
-
-    void init_ptr()
-    {
-        global_ptr = new int[100];      // allocate data
-        qAddPostRoutine( cleanup_ptr ); // delete later
-    }
-  
      
- 
-
       Note that for an application- or module-wide cleanup,
-qAddPostRoutine() is often not suitable. People have a tendency to
-make such modules dynamically loaded, and then unload those modules
-long before the TQApplication destructor is called, for example.
-
       For modules and libraries, using a reference-counted initialization
-manager or TQt' parent-child delete mechanism may be better. Here is
-an example of a private class which uses the parent-child mechanism
-to call a cleanup function at the right time:
-
       
      -    class MyPrivateInitStuff: public TQObject {
-    private:
-        MyPrivateInitStuff( TQObject * parent ): TQObject( parent) {
-            // initialization goes here
-        }
-        MyPrivateInitStuff * p;
-
-    public:
-        static MyPrivateInitStuff * initStuff( TQObject * parent ) {
-            if ( !p )
-                p = new MyPrivateInitStuff( parent );
-            return p;
-        }
-
-        ~MyPrivateInitStuff() {
-            // cleanup (the "post routine") goes here
-        }
-    }
-  
      
- 
-
       By selecting the right parent widget/object, this can often be made
-to clean up the module's data at the exact right moment.
-
-
      void qDebug ( const char * msg, ... )
-
      
-
-
       
-
       Prints a debug message msg, or calls the message handler (if it
-has been installed).
-
       This function takes a format string and a list of arguments,
-similar to the C printf() function.
-
       Example:
-
      -        qDebug( "my window handle = %x", myWidget->id() );
-    
      
- 
-
       Under X11, the text is printed to stderr. Under Windows, the text
-is sent to the debugger.
-
       Warning: The internal buffer is limited to 8196 bytes (including
-the '\0'-terminator).
-
       Warning: Passing (const char *)0 as argument to qDebug might lead
-to crashes on certain platforms due to the platforms printf implementation.
-
       
      See also qWarning(), qFatal(), qInstallMsgHandler(), and Debugging.
-
-
      void qFatal ( const char * msg, ... )
-
      
-
-
       
-
       Prints a fatal error message msg and exits, or calls the
-message handler (if it has been installed).
-
       This function takes a format string and a list of arguments,
-similar to the C printf() function.
-
       Example:
-
      -        int divide( int a, int b )
-        {
-            if ( b == 0 )                               // program error
-                qFatal( "divide: cannot divide by zero" );
-            return a/b;
-        }
-    
      
- 
-
       Under X11, the text is printed to stderr. Under Windows, the text
-is sent to the debugger.
-
       Warning: The internal buffer is limited to 8196 bytes (including
-the '\0'-terminator).
-
       Warning: Passing (const char *)0 as argument to qFatal might lead
-to crashes on certain platforms due to the platforms printf implementation.
-
       
      See also qDebug(), qWarning(), qInstallMsgHandler(), and Debugging.
-
-
      TQtMsgHandler qInstallMsgHandler ( TQtMsgHandler h )
-
      
-
-
       Installs a TQt message handler h. Returns a pointer to the
-message handler previously defined.
-
       The message handler is a function that prints out debug messages,
-warnings and fatal error messages. The TQt library (debug version)
-contains hundreds of warning messages that are printed when
-internal errors (usually invalid function arguments) occur. If you
-implement your own message handler, you get total control of these
-messages.
-
       The default message handler prints the message to the standard
-output under X11 or to the debugger under Windows. If it is a
-fatal message, the application aborts immediately.
-
       Only one message handler can be defined, since this is usually
-done on an application-wide basis to control debug output.
-
       To restore the message handler, call qInstallMsgHandler(0).
-
       Example:
-
      -        #include <qapplication.h>
-        #include <stdio.h>
-        #include <stdlib.h>
-
-        void myMessageOutput( TQtMsgType type, const char *msg )
-        {
-            switch ( type ) {
-                case TQtDebugMsg:
-                    fprintf( stderr, "Debug: %s\n", msg );
-                    break;
-                case TQtWarningMsg:
-                    fprintf( stderr, "Warning: %s\n", msg );
-                    break;
-                case TQtFatalMsg:
-                    fprintf( stderr, "Fatal: %s\n", msg );
-                    abort();                    // deliberately core dump
-            }
-        }
-
-        int main( int argc, char **argv )
-        {
-            qInstallMsgHandler( myMessageOutput );
-            TQApplication a( argc, argv );
-            ...
-            return a.exec();
-        }
-    
      
- 
-
       
      See also qDebug(), qWarning(), qFatal(), and Debugging.
-
-
      bool qSysInfo ( int * wordSize, bool * bigEndian )
-
      
-
-
       Obtains information about the system.
-
       The system's word size in bits (typically 32) is returned in *wordSize. The *bigEndian is set to TRUE if this is a big-endian
-machine, or to FALSE if this is a little-endian machine.
-
       In debug mode, this function calls qFatal() with a message if the
-computer is truly weird (i.e. different endianness for 16 bit and
-32 bit integers); in release mode it returns FALSE.
-
-
      void qSystemWarning ( const char * msg, int code )
-
      
-
-
       Prints the message msg and uses code to get a system specific
-error message. When code is -1 (the default), the system's last
-error code will be used if possible. Use this method to handle
-failures in platform specific API calls.
-
       This function does nothing when TQt is built with QT_NO_DEBUG
-defined.
-
-
      const char * qVersion ()
-
      
-
-
       Returns the TQt version number as a string, for example, "2.3.0" or
-"3.0.5".
-
       The QT_VERSION define has the numeric value in the form:
-0xmmiibb (m = major, i = minor, b = bugfix). For example, TQt
-3.0.5's QT_VERSION is 0x030005.
-
-
      void qWarning ( const char * msg, ... )
-
      
-
-
       
-
       Prints a warning message msg, or calls the message handler (if
-it has been installed).
-
       This function takes a format string and a list of arguments,
-similar to the C printf() function.
-
       Example:
-
      -        void f( int c )
-        {
-            if ( c > 200 )
-                qWarning( "f: bad argument, c == %d", c );
-        }
-    
      
- 
-
       Under X11, the text is printed to stderr. Under Windows, the text
-is sent to the debugger.
-
       Warning: The internal buffer is limited to 8196 bytes (including
-the '\0'-terminator).
-
       Warning: Passing (const char *)0 as argument to qWarning might lead
-to crashes on certain platforms due to the platforms printf implementation.
-
       
      See also qDebug(), qFatal(), qInstallMsgHandler(), and Debugging.
-
-
-
      
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
      
-
-
      Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
      TQt 3.3.8
      
-
      
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qarray.html b/doc/html/qarray.html
deleted file mode 100644
index ba4783685..000000000
--- a/doc/html/qarray.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
-
-
-TQArray Class Reference (obsolete)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
      
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
      TQArray Class Reference (obsolete)
      
-
- 
-
       
      -#include <qarray.h>
      
- 
-
       The TQArray class has been renamed  TQMemArray  in TQt 3.0.
-
-
-
      
-
-
      Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
      TQt 3.3.8
      
-
      
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qasciicache-h.html b/doc/html/qasciicache-h.html
index 70cfb959f..0fabbbd1a 100644
--- a/doc/html/qasciicache-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qasciicache-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qasciicache.h Include File
+ntqasciicache.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
      
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
      TQAsciiCache Class Reference
      
-
-
      The TQAsciiCache class is a template class that provides a cache based on char* keys.
-More...
-
      #include <qasciicache.h>
-
      Inherits TQPtrCollection.
-
      List of all member functions.
-
      Public Members
      
-
        
-
      • TQAsciiCache ( int maxCost = 100, int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE, bool copyKeys = TRUE )
        • 
-
      • ~TQAsciiCache ()
        • 
-
      • int maxCost () const
        • 
-
      • int totalCost () const
        • 
-
      • void setMaxCost ( int m )
        • 
-
      • virtual uint count () const
        • 
-
      • uint size () const
        • 
-
      • bool isEmpty () const
        • 
-
      • virtual void clear ()
        • 
-
      • bool insert ( const char * k, const type * d, int c = 1, int p = 0 )
        • 
-
      • bool remove ( const char * k )
        • 
-
      • type * take ( const char * k )
        • 
-
      • type * find ( const char * k, bool ref = TRUE ) const
        • 
-
      • type * operator[] ( const char * k ) const
        • 
-
      • void statistics () const
        • 
-
      
-
      Detailed Description
      
-
-
-
       The TQAsciiCache class is a template class that provides a cache based on char* keys.
-
       
-
-
       TQAsciiCache is implemented as a template class. Define a template
-instance TQAsciiCache<X> to create a cache that operates on
-pointers to X (X*).
-
       A cache is a least recently used (LRU) list of cache items. The
-cache items are accessed via char* keys. For Unicode keys use
-the TQCache template instead, which uses TQString keys. A TQCache
-has the same performace as a TQAsciiCache.
-
       Each cache item has a cost. The sum of item costs, totalCost(),
-will not exceed the maximum cache cost, maxCost(). If inserting a
-new item would cause the total cost to exceed the maximum cost,
-the least recently used items in the cache are removed.
-
       Apart from insert(), by far the most important function is find()
-(which also exists as operator[]()). This function looks up an
-item, returns it, and by default marks it as being the most
-recently used item.
-
       There are also methods to remove() or take() an object from the
-cache. Calling setAutoDelete(TRUE) tells the cache to delete items that
-are removed. The default is to not delete items when then are
-removed (i.e., remove() and take() are equivalent).
-
       When inserting an item into the cache, only the pointer is copied,
-not the item itself. This is called a shallow copy. It is possible
-to make the cache copy all of the item's data (known as a deep copy) when an item is inserted. insert() calls the virtual
-function TQPtrCollection::newItem() for the item to be inserted.
-Inherit a cache and reimplement newItem() if you want deep copies.
-
       When removing a cache item the virtual function
-TQPtrCollection::deleteItem() is called. Its default implementation
-in TQAsciiCache is to delete the item if auto-deletion is enabled.
-
       There is a TQAsciiCacheIterator which may be used to traverse the
-items in the cache in arbitrary order.
-
       
      See also TQAsciiCacheIterator, TQCache, TQIntCache, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
-
-
      Member Function Documentation
      
-
      TQAsciiCache::TQAsciiCache ( int maxCost = 100, int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE, bool copyKeys = TRUE )
-
      
-
-
       Constructs a cache whose contents will never have a total cost
-greater than maxCost and which is expected to contain less than
-size items.
-
       size is actually the size of an internal hash array; it's
-usually best to make it prime and at least 50% bigger than the
-largest expected number of items in the cache.
-
       Each inserted item has an associated cost. When inserting a new
-item, if the total cost of all items in the cache will exceed maxCost, the cache will start throwing out the older (least
-recently used) items until there is enough room for the new item
-to be inserted.
-
       If caseSensitive is TRUE (the default), the cache keys are case
-sensitive; if it is FALSE, they are case-insensitive.
-Case-insensitive comparison only affects the 26 letters in
-US-ASCII. If copyKeys is TRUE (the default), TQAsciiCache makes
-a copy of the cache keys, otherwise it copies just the const char
-* pointer - slightly faster if you can guarantee that the keys
-will never change, but very risky.
-
-
      TQAsciiCache::~TQAsciiCache ()
-
      
-
-
       Removes all items from the cache and destroys it.
-All iterators that access this cache will be reset.
-
-
      void TQAsciiCache::clear () [virtual]
-
      
-
-
       Removes all items from the cache, and deletes them if auto-deletion has been
-enabled.
-
       All cache iterators that operate on this cache are reset.
-
       
      See also remove() and take().
-
-
      Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
-
      uint TQAsciiCache::count () const [virtual]
-
      
-
-
       Returns the number of items in the cache.
-
       
      See also totalCost() and size().
-
-
      Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
-
      type * TQAsciiCache::find ( const char * k, bool ref = TRUE ) const
-
      
-
-
       Returns the item with key k, or 0 if the key does not exist
-in the cache. If ref is TRUE (the default), the item is moved
-to the front of the least recently used list.
-
       If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was
-inserted last is returned.
-
-
      bool TQAsciiCache::insert ( const char * k, const type * d, int c = 1, int p = 0 )
-
      
-
-
       Inserts the item d into the cache using key k, and with an
-associated cost of c. Returns TRUE if the item is successfully
-inserted. Returns FALSE if the item is not inserted, for example,
-if the cost of the item exceeds maxCost().
-
       The cache's size is limited, and if the total cost is too high,
-TQAsciiCache will remove old, least recently used items until there
-is room for this new item.
-
       Items with duplicate keys can be inserted.
-
       The parameter p is internal and should be left at the default
-value (0).
-
       Warning: If this function returns FALSE, you must delete d
-yourself. Additionally, be very careful about using d after
-calling this function, because any other insertions into the
-cache, from anywhere in the application or within TQt itself, could
-cause the object to be discarded from the cache and the pointer to
-become invalid.
-
-
      bool TQAsciiCache::isEmpty () const
-
      
-
-
       Returns TRUE if the cache is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
      int TQAsciiCache::maxCost () const
-
      
-
-
       Returns the maximum allowed total cost of the cache.
-
       
      See also setMaxCost() and totalCost().
-
-
      type * TQAsciiCache::operator[] ( const char * k ) const
-
      
-
-
       Returns the item with key k, or 0 if k does not exist in
-the cache, and moves the item to the front of the least recently
-used list.
-
       If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was
-inserted last is returned.
-
       This is the same as find( k, TRUE ).
-
       
      See also find().
-
-
      bool TQAsciiCache::remove ( const char * k )
-
      
-
-
       Removes the item with key k and returns TRUE if the item was
-present in the cache; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
       The item is deleted if auto-deletion has been enabled, i.e., if
-you have called setAutoDelete(TRUE).
-
       If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was
-inserted last is removed.
-
       All iterators that refer to the removed item are set to point to
-the next item in the cache's traversal order.
-
       
      See also take() and clear().
-
-
      void TQAsciiCache::setMaxCost ( int m )
-
      
-
-
       Sets the maximum allowed total cost of the cache to m. If the
-current total cost is greater than m, some items are removed
-immediately.
-
       
      See also maxCost() and totalCost().
-
-
      uint TQAsciiCache::size () const
-
      
-
-
       Returns the size of the hash array used to implement the cache.
-This should be a bit bigger than count() is likely to be.
-
-
      void TQAsciiCache::statistics () const
-
      
-
-
       A debug-only utility function. Prints out cache usage, hit/miss,
-and distribution information using qDebug(). This function does
-nothing in the release library.
-
-
      type * TQAsciiCache::take ( const char * k )
-
      
-
-
       Takes the item associated with k out of the cache without
-deleting it and returns a pointer to the item taken out, or 0
-if the key does not exist in the cache.
-
       If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was
-inserted last is taken.
-
       All iterators that refer to the taken item are set to point to the
-next item in the cache's traversal order.
-
       
      See also remove() and clear().
-
-
      int TQAsciiCache::totalCost () const
-
      
-
-
       Returns the total cost of the items in the cache. This is an
-integer in the range 0 to maxCost().
-
       
      See also setMaxCost().
-
-
-
      
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
      
-
-
      Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
      TQt 3.3.8
      
-
      
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qasciicacheiterator-members.html b/doc/html/qasciicacheiterator-members.html
index 20e38a753..e1b541d07 100644
--- a/doc/html/qasciicacheiterator-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qasciicacheiterator-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qasciicacheiterator.html b/doc/html/qasciicacheiterator.html
index 45c5b238f..cf436bd86 100644
--- a/doc/html/qasciicacheiterator.html
+++ b/doc/html/qasciicacheiterator.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
      The TQAsciiCacheIterator class provides an iterator for TQAsciiCache collections.
 More...
-
      #include <qasciicache.h>
+
      #include <ntqasciicache.h>
 
      List of all member functions.
 
      Public Members
      
 
        
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
        Detailed Description
        
 
 
-The TQAsciiCacheIterator class provides an iterator for TQAsciiCache collections.
+The TQAsciiCacheIterator class provides an iterator for TQAsciiCache collections.
 
         
 
 
         Note that the traversal order is arbitrary; you are not guaranteed
@@ -77,10 +77,10 @@ returns TRUE if the cache is empty; and count() returns the
 of items in the cache.
 
         Note that atFirst() and atLast() refer to the iterator's arbitrary
 ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list.
-
         
        See also TQAsciiCache, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
         
        See also TQAsciiCache, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
 
 
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        TQAsciiCacheIterator::TQAsciiCacheIterator ( const TQAsciiCache<type> & cache )
+
        TQAsciiCacheIterator::TQAsciiCacheIterator ( const TQAsciiCache<type> & cache )
 
        
 
 
         Constructs an iterator for cache. The current iterator item is
diff --git a/doc/html/qasciidict-h.html b/doc/html/qasciidict-h.html
index 040a4a031..ccd363f57 100644
--- a/doc/html/qasciidict-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qasciidict-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qasciidict.h Include File
+ntqasciidict.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
        TQAsciiDict Class Reference
        
-
-
        The TQAsciiDict class is a template class that provides a dictionary based on char* keys.
-More...
-
        #include <qasciidict.h>
-
        Inherits TQPtrCollection.
-
        List of all member functions.
-
        Public Members
        
-
          
-
        • TQAsciiDict ( int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE, bool copyKeys = TRUE )
          • 
-
        • TQAsciiDict ( const TQAsciiDict<type> & dict )
          • 
-
        • ~TQAsciiDict ()
          • 
-
        • TQAsciiDict<type> & operator= ( const TQAsciiDict<type> & dict )
          • 
-
        • virtual uint count () const
          • 
-
        • uint size () const
          • 
-
        • bool isEmpty () const
          • 
-
        • void insert ( const char * key, const type * item )
          • 
-
        • void replace ( const char * key, const type * item )
          • 
-
        • bool remove ( const char * key )
          • 
-
        • type * take ( const char * key )
          • 
-
        • type * find ( const char * key ) const
          • 
-
        • type * operator[] ( const char * key ) const
          • 
-
        • virtual void clear ()
          • 
-
        • void resize ( uint newsize )
          • 
-
        • void statistics () const
          • 
-
        
-
        Important Inherited Members
        
-
-
        Protected Members
        
-
          
-
        • virtual TQDataStream & read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item )
          • 
-
        • virtual TQDataStream & write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item ) const
          • 
-
        
-
        Detailed Description
        
-
-
-The TQAsciiDict class is a template class that provides a dictionary based on char* keys.
-
         
-
-
         
-
         TQAsciiDict is implemented as a template class. Define a template
-instance TQAsciiDict<X> to create a dictionary that operates on
-pointers to X (X*).
-
         A dictionary is a collection of key-value pairs. The key is a
-char* used for insertion, removal and lookup. The value is a
-pointer. Dictionaries provide very fast insertion and lookup.
-
         TQAsciiDict cannot handle Unicode keys; use the TQDict template
-instead, which uses TQString keys. A TQDict has the same
-performace as a TQAsciiDict.
-
         Example:
-
        -    TQAsciiDict<TQLineEdit> fields; // char* keys, TQLineEdit* values
-    fields.insert( "forename", new TQLineEdit( this ) );
-    fields.insert( "surname", new TQLineEdit( this ) );
-
-    fields["forename"]->setText( "Homer" );
-    fields["surname"]->setText( "Simpson" );
-
-    TQAsciiDictIterator<TQLineEdit> it( fields ); // See TQAsciiDictIterator
-    for( ; it.current(); ++it )
-        cout << it.currentKey() << ": " << it.current()->text() << endl;
-    cout << endl;
-
-    if ( fields["forename"] && fields["surname"] )
-        cout << fields["forename"]->text() << " " 
-            << fields["surname"]->text() << endl;  // Prints "Homer Simpson"
-
-    fields.remove( "forename" ); // Does not delete the line edit
-    if ( ! fields["forename"] )
-        cout << "forename is not in the dictionary" << endl;
-    
        
- 
-In this example we use a dictionary to keep track of the line
-edits we're using. We insert each line edit into the dictionary
-with a unique name and then access the line edits via the
-dictionary. See TQPtrDict, TQIntDict and TQDict.
-
         See TQDict for full details, including the choice of dictionary
-size, and how deletions are handled. 
-
         
        See also TQAsciiDictIterator, TQDict, TQIntDict, TQPtrDict, Collection Classes, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
-
-
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        TQAsciiDict::TQAsciiDict ( int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE, bool copyKeys = TRUE )
-
        
-
-
         Constructs a dictionary optimized for less than size entries.
-
         We recommend setting size to a suitably large prime number (a
-bit larger than the expected number of entries). This makes the
-hash distribution better and will improve lookup performance.
-
         When caseSensitive is TRUE (the default) TQAsciiDict treats
-"abc" and "Abc" as different keys; when it is FALSE "abc" and
-"Abc" are the same. Case-insensitive comparison only considers the
-26 letters in US-ASCII.
-
         If copyKeys is TRUE (the default), the dictionary copies keys
-using strcpy(); if it is FALSE, the dictionary just copies the
-pointers.
-
-
        TQAsciiDict::TQAsciiDict ( const TQAsciiDict<type> & dict )
-
        
-
-
         Constructs a copy of dict.
-
         Each item in dict is inserted into this dictionary. Only the
-pointers are copied (shallow copy).
-
-
        TQAsciiDict::~TQAsciiDict ()
-
        
-
-
         Removes all items from the dictionary and destroys it.
-
         The items are deleted if auto-delete is enabled.
-
         All iterators that access this dictionary will be reset.
-
         
        See also setAutoDelete().
-
-
        bool TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const
-
        
-
-
         Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE.
-
         
        See also setAutoDelete().
-
-
        void TQAsciiDict::clear () [virtual]
-
        
-
-
         Removes all items from the dictionary.
-
         The removed items are deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
-
         All dictionary iterators that operate on dictionary are reset.
-
         
        See also remove(), take(), and setAutoDelete().
-
-
        Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
-
        uint TQAsciiDict::count () const [virtual]
-
        
-
-
         Returns the number of items in the dictionary.
-
         
        See also isEmpty().
-
-
        Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
-
        type * TQAsciiDict::find ( const char * key ) const
-
        
-
-
         Returns the item associated with key, or 0 if the key does not
-exist in the dictionary.
-
         This function uses an internal hashing algorithm to optimize
-lookup.
-
         If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the item that
-was most recently inserted will be found.
-
         Equivalent to the [] operator.
-
         
        See also operator[]().
-
-
        void TQAsciiDict::insert ( const char * key, const type * item )
-
        
-
-
         Inserts the key with the item into the dictionary.
-
         Multiple items can have the same key, in which case only the last
-item will be accessible using operator[]().
-
         item may not be 0.
-
         
        See also replace().
-
-
        bool TQAsciiDict::isEmpty () const
-
        
-
-
         Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty, i.e. count() == 0;
-otherwise it returns FALSE.
-
         
        See also count().
-
-
        TQAsciiDict<type> & TQAsciiDict::operator= ( const TQAsciiDict<type> & dict )
-
        
-
-
         Assigns dict to this dictionary and returns a reference to this
-dictionary.
-
         This dictionary is first cleared and then each item in dict is
-inserted into this dictionary. Only the pointers are copied
-(shallow copy) unless newItem() has been reimplemented().
-
-
        type * TQAsciiDict::operator[] ( const char * key ) const
-
        
-
-
         Returns the item associated with key, or 0 if the key does
-not exist in the dictionary.
-
         This function uses an internal hashing algorithm to optimize
-lookup.
-
         If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the item that
-was most recently inserted will be found.
-
         Equivalent to the find() function.
-
         
        See also find().
-
-
        TQDataStream & TQAsciiDict::read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item ) [virtual protected]
-
        
-
-
         Reads a dictionary item from the stream s and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
         The default implementation sets item to 0.
-
         
        See also write().
-
-
        bool TQAsciiDict::remove ( const char * key )
-
        
-
-
         Removes the item associated with key from the dictionary.
-Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the key existed in the
-dictionary; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
         If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most
-recently inserted item will be removed.
-
         The removed item is deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
-
         All dictionary iterators that refer to the removed item will be
-set to point to the next item in the dictionary traversal order.
-
         
        See also take(), clear(), and setAutoDelete().
-
-
        void TQAsciiDict::replace ( const char * key, const type * item )
-
        
-
-
         Replaces an item that has a key equal to key with item.
-
         If the item does not already exist, it will be inserted.
-
         item may not be 0.
-
         Equivalent to:
-
        -        TQAsciiDict<char> dict;
-            ...
-        if ( dict.find(key) )
-            dict.remove( key );
-        dict.insert( key, item );
-    
        
- 
-
         If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most
-recently inserted item will be replaced.
-
         
        See also insert().
-
-
        void TQAsciiDict::resize ( uint newsize )
-
        
-
-
         Changes the size of the hashtable to newsize. The contents of
-the dictionary are preserved but all iterators on the dictionary
-become invalid.
-
-
        void TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )
-
        
-
-
         Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if enable is
-TRUE and to never delete them if enable is FALSE.
-
         If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are
-deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient
-if the collection has the only pointer to the items.
-
         The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be
-careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself
-with two collections deleting the same items.
-
         Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions
-in subclasses. For example, a subclass that has a remove()
-function will remove the item from its data structure, and if
-auto-delete is enabled, will also delete the item.
-
         
        See also autoDelete().
-
-
        Examples: grapher/grapher.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, and table/bigtable/main.cpp.
-
        uint TQAsciiDict::size () const
-
        
-
-
         Returns the size of the internal hash array (as specified in the
-constructor).
-
         
        See also count().
-
-
        void TQAsciiDict::statistics () const
-
        
-
-
         Debugging-only function that prints out the dictionary
-distribution using qDebug().
-
-
        type * TQAsciiDict::take ( const char * key )
-
        
-
-
         Takes the item associated with key out of the dictionary
-without deleting it (even if auto-deletion is enabled).
-
         If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most
-recently inserted item will be taken.
-
         Returns a pointer to the item taken out, or 0 if the key does not
-exist in the dictionary.
-
         All dictionary iterators that refer to the taken item will be set
-to point to the next item in the dictionary traversal order.
-
         
        See also remove(), clear(), and setAutoDelete().
-
-
        TQDataStream & TQAsciiDict::write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item ) const [virtual protected]
-
        
-
-
         Writes a dictionary item to the stream s and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
         
        See also read().
-
-
-
        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
        
-
-
        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
        TQt 3.3.8
        
-
        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qasciidictiterator-members.html b/doc/html/qasciidictiterator-members.html
index d7cc87f5a..3bee958c8 100644
--- a/doc/html/qasciidictiterator-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qasciidictiterator-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qasciidictiterator.html b/doc/html/qasciidictiterator.html
index cef5e55b5..d804009c3 100644
--- a/doc/html/qasciidictiterator.html
+++ b/doc/html/qasciidictiterator.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
        The TQAsciiDictIterator class provides an iterator for TQAsciiDict collections.
 More...
-
        #include <qasciidict.h>
+
        #include <ntqasciidict.h>
 
        List of all member functions.
 
        Public Members
        
 
          
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
          Detailed Description
          
 
 
-The TQAsciiDictIterator class provides an iterator for TQAsciiDict collections.
+The TQAsciiDictIterator class provides an iterator for TQAsciiDict collections.
 
           
 
 
           TQAsciiDictIterator is implemented as a template class. Define a
@@ -60,10 +60,10 @@ template instance TQAsciiDictIterator<X> to create a dictionary
 iterator that operates on TQAsciiDict<X> (dictionary of X*).
 
           Example:
 
          -    TQAsciiDict<TQLineEdit> fields;
-    fields.insert( "forename", new TQLineEdit( this ) );
-    fields.insert( "surname", new TQLineEdit( this ) );
-    fields.insert( "age", new TQLineEdit( this ) );
+    TQAsciiDict<TQLineEdit> fields;
+    fields.insert( "forename", new TQLineEdit( this ) );
+    fields.insert( "surname", new TQLineEdit( this ) );
+    fields.insert( "age", new TQLineEdit( this ) );
 
     fields["forename"]->setText( "Homer" );
     fields["surname"]->setText( "Simpson" );
@@ -86,15 +86,15 @@ those line edits.
 
           Note that the traversal order is arbitrary; you are not guaranteed
 any particular order.
 
           Multiple iterators may independently traverse the same dictionary.
-A TQAsciiDict knows about all the iterators that are operating on
+A TQAsciiDict knows about all the iterators that are operating on
 the dictionary. When an item is removed from the dictionary,
 TQAsciiDict updates all the iterators that are referring to the
 removed item to point to the next item in the (arbitrary)
 traversal order.
-
           
          See also TQAsciiDict, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
           
          See also TQAsciiDict, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
 
 
          Member Function Documentation
          
-
          TQAsciiDictIterator::TQAsciiDictIterator ( const TQAsciiDict<type> & dict )
+
          TQAsciiDictIterator::TQAsciiDictIterator ( const TQAsciiDict<type> & dict )
 
          
 
 
           Constructs an iterator for dict. The current iterator item is
diff --git a/doc/html/qassistantclient-h.html b/doc/html/qassistantclient-h.html
index 2803b022a..404392376 100644
--- a/doc/html/qassistantclient-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qassistantclient-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qassistantclient.h Include File
+ntqassistantclient.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
          
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
          TQAssistantClient Class Reference
          
-
-
          The TQAssistantClient class provides a means of using TQt
-Assistant as an application's help tool.
-More...
-
          #include <qassistantclient.h>
-
          Inherits TQObject.
-
          List of all member functions.
-
          Public Members
          
-
-
          Public Slots
          
-
-
          Signals
          
-
-
          Properties
          
-
            
-
          • bool open - whether TQt Assistant is open  (read only)
            • 
-
          
-
          Detailed Description
          
-
-
-The TQAssistantClient class provides a means of using TQt
-Assistant as an application's help tool.
-
           Using TQt Assistant is simple: Create a TQAssistantClient instance,
-then call showPage() as often as necessary to show your help
-pages. When you call showPage(), TQt Assistant will be launched if
-it isn't already running.
-
           The TQAssistantClient instance can open (openAssistant()) or close
-(closeAssistant()) TQt Assistant whenever required. If TQt Assistant
-is open, isOpen() returns TRUE.
-
           One TQAssistantClient instance interacts with one TQt Assistant
-instance, so every time you call openAssistant(), showPage() or
-closeAssistant() they are applied to the particular TQt Assistant
-instance associated with the TQAssistantClient.
-
           When you call openAssistant() the assistantOpened() signal is
-emitted. Similarly when closeAssistant() is called,
-assistantClosed() is emitted. In either case, if an error occurs,
-error() is emitted.
-
           This class is not included in the TQt library itself. To use it you
-must link against libqassistantclient.a (Unix) or qassistantclient.lib (Windows), which is built into INSTALL/lib
-if you built the TQt tools (INSTALL is the directory where TQt is
-installed). If you use qmake, then you can simply add the following
-line to your pro file:
-
           
          -        LIBS += -lqassistantclient
-    
          
- 
-
           See also "Adding Documentation to TQt Assistant" in the TQt Assistant manual.
-
-
          Member Function Documentation
          
-
          TQAssistantClient::TQAssistantClient ( const TQString & path, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
          
-Constructs an assistant client object. The path specifies the
-path to the TQt Assistant executable. If path is an empty
-string the system path (%PATH% or $PATH) is used.
-
           The assistant client object is a child of parent and is called
-name.
-
-
          TQAssistantClient::~TQAssistantClient ()
-
          
-Destroys the assistant client object and frees up all allocated
-resources.
-
-
          void TQAssistantClient::assistantClosed () [signal]
-
          
-
-
           This signal is emitted when the connection to TQt Assistant is
-closed. This happens when the user exits TQt Assistant, or when an
-error in the server or client occurs, or if closeAssistant() is
-called.
-
-
          void TQAssistantClient::assistantOpened () [signal]
-
          
-
-
           This signal is emitted when TQt Assistant is open and the
-client-server communication is set up.
-
-
          void TQAssistantClient::closeAssistant () [virtual slot]
-
          
-Use this function to close TQt Assistant.
-
           
          See also assistantClosed().
-
-
          void TQAssistantClient::error ( const TQString & msg ) [signal]
-
          
-
-
           This signal is emitted if TQt Assistant cannot be started or if an
-error occurs during the initialization of the connection between
-TQt Assistant and the calling application. The msg provides an
-explanation of the error.
-
-
          bool TQAssistantClient::isOpen () const
-
          Returns TRUE if TQt Assistant is open; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "open" property for details.
-
          void TQAssistantClient::openAssistant () [virtual slot]
-
          
-This function opens TQt Assistant and sets up the client-server
-communiction between the application and TQt Assistant. If it is
-already open, this function does nothing. If an error occurs,
-error() is emitted.
-
           
          See also assistantOpened().
-
-
          void TQAssistantClient::setArguments ( const TQStringList & args )
-
          
-Sets the command line arguments used when TQt Assistant is
-started to args.
-
-
          void TQAssistantClient::showPage ( const TQString & page ) [virtual slot]
-
          
-Call this function to make TQt Assistant show a particular page.
-The page is a filename (e.g. myhelpfile.html). See "Adding
-Documentation to TQt Assistant" in the TQt
-    Assistant manual for further information.
-
           If TQt Assistant hasn't been opened
-yet, this function will do nothing. You can use isOpen() to
-determine whether TQt Assistant is up and running, or you can
-connect to the asssistantOpened() signal.
-
           
          See also open and assistantOpened().
-
-
          Example: helpsystem/mainwindow.cpp.
-
          Property Documentation
          
-
          bool open
          
-
          This property holds whether TQt Assistant is open.
-
          
-
          Get this property's value with isOpen().
-
-
          
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
          
-
-
          Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
          TQt 3.3.8
          
-
          
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qasyncimageio-h.html b/doc/html/qasyncimageio-h.html
index 245810f5e..99783715f 100644
--- a/doc/html/qasyncimageio-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qasyncimageio-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qasyncimageio.h Include File
+ntqasyncimageio.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
          
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
          TQAsyncIO Class Reference
          [obsolete]
          
-
-
          The TQAsyncIO class encapsulates I/O asynchronicity.
-More...
-
          #include <qasyncio.h>
-
          Inherited by TQDataSink and TQDataSource.
-
          List of all member functions.
-
          Public Members
          
-
-
          Protected Members
          
-
-
          Detailed Description
          
-
-
-This class is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
           The TQAsyncIO class encapsulates I/O asynchronicity.
-
           The TQt classes for asynchronous input/output provide a simple
-mechanism to allow large files or slow data sources to be processed
-without using large amounts of memory or blocking the user interface.
-
           This facility is used in TQt to drive animated images.  See TQImageConsumer.
-
-
          Member Function Documentation
          
-
          TQAsyncIO::~TQAsyncIO () [virtual]
-
          
-Destroys the async IO object.
-
-
          void TQAsyncIO::connect ( TQObject * obj, const char * member )
-
          
-Ensures that only one object, obj and function, member, can
-respond to changes in readiness.
-
-
          void TQAsyncIO::ready () [protected]
-
          
-Derived classes should call this when they change from being
-unready to ready.
-
-
-
          
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
          
-
-
          Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
          TQt 3.3.8
          
-
          
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qaxaggregated.html b/doc/html/qaxaggregated.html
index f27d564bd..a0b1693c4 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaxaggregated.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaxaggregated.html
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ additional COM interfaces.
 
        • TQObject * object () const
          • 
 
        
 
        Detailed Description
        
-
         This class is defined in the TQt ActiveTQt Extension, which can be found in the qt/extensions directory. It is not included in the main TQt API.
+
         This class is defined in the TQt ActiveTQt Extension, which can be found in the qt/extensions directory. It is not included in the main TQt API.
 
        
 
 The TQAxAggregated class is an abstract base class for implementations of
@@ -62,9 +62,9 @@ multiple inheritance from those COM interfaces. Implement the
 IUnknown interface of those COM interfaces by delegating the calls
 to QueryInterface(), AddRef() and Release() to the interface
 provided by controllingUnknown().
-
         Use the widget() method if you need to make calls to the TQWidget
+
         Use the widget() method if you need to make calls to the TQWidget
 implementing the ActiveX control. You must not store that pointer
-in your subclass (unless you use TQGuardedPtr), as the TQWidget can
+in your subclass (unless you use TQGuardedPtr), as the TQWidget can
 be destroyed by the ActiveTQt framework at any time.
 
 
        Member Function Documentation
        
@@ -95,24 +95,24 @@ provided by this function.
 
         The TQAXAGG_IUNKNOWN macro expands to the code above, and you can
 use it in the class declaration of your subclass.
 
-
        TQObject * TQAxAggregated::object () const [protected]
+
        TQObject * TQAxAggregated::object () const [protected]
 
        
 
-
         Returns a pointer to the TQObject subclass implementing the COM object.
+
         Returns a pointer to the TQObject subclass implementing the COM object.
 This function might return 0.
 
         Warning:
 You must not store the returned pointer, unless you use a
-TQGuardedPtr, since the TQObject can be destroyed by ActiveTQt at any
+TQGuardedPtr, since the TQObject can be destroyed by ActiveTQt at any
 time.
 
-
        long TQAxAggregated::queryInterface ( const TQUuid & iid, void ** iface ) [pure virtual]
+
        long TQAxAggregated::queryInterface ( const TQUuid & iid, void ** iface ) [pure virtual]
 
        
 
 
         Reimplement this pure virtual function to support additional COM
 interfaces. Set the value of iface to point to this object to
 support the interface iid. Note that you must cast the this pointer to the appropriate superclass.
 
         
        -    long AxImpl::queryInterface( const TQUuid &iid, void **iface )
+    long AxImpl::queryInterface( const TQUuid &iid, void **iface )
     {
         *iface = 0;
         if ( iid == IID_ISomeCOMInterface )
@@ -132,14 +132,14 @@ Even though you must implement the IUnknown interface if you
 implement any COM interface you must not support the IUnknown
 interface in your queryInterface() implementation.
 
-
        TQWidget * TQAxAggregated::widget () const [protected]
+
        TQWidget * TQAxAggregated::widget () const [protected]
 
        
 
-
         Returns a pointer to the TQWidget subclass implementing the ActiveX control.
+
         Returns a pointer to the TQWidget subclass implementing the ActiveX control.
 This function might return 0.
 
         Warning:
 You must not store the returned pointer, unless you use a
-TQGuardedPtr, since the TQWidget can be destroyed by ActiveTQt at any
+TQGuardedPtr, since the TQWidget can be destroyed by ActiveTQt at any
 time.
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qaxbase-h.html b/doc/html/qaxbase-h.html
index 2b879af02..d148e8b3a 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaxbase-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaxbase-h.html
@@ -68,8 +68,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 #ifndef TQAXBASE_H
 #define TQAXBASE_H
 
-#include <qvariant.h>
-#include <qobject.h>
+#include <ntqvariant.h>
+#include <ntqobject.h>
 
 struct IUnknown;
 struct TQUuid;
diff --git a/doc/html/qaxbase.html b/doc/html/qaxbase.html
index 41c40da28..85cd20a0a 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaxbase.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaxbase.html
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ to initalize and access a COM object.
 
      • bool initializeActive ( IUnknown ** ptr )
        • 
 
      
 
      Detailed Description
      
-
       This class is defined in the TQt ActiveTQt Extension, which can be found in the qt/extensions directory. It is not included in the main TQt API.
+
       This class is defined in the TQt ActiveTQt Extension, which can be found in the qt/extensions directory. It is not included in the main TQt API.
 
      
 
 
       The TQAxBase class is an abstract class that provides an API
@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ become available as TQt properties and slots.
  
 
       Properties exposed by the object's IDispatch implementation can be
 read and written through the property system provided by the TQt
-Object Model (both subclasses are TQObjects, so you can use setProperty() and property() as with TQObject). Properties
+Object Model (both subclasses are TQObjects, so you can use setProperty() and property() as with TQObject). Properties
 with multiple parameters are not supported.
 
       
           activeX->setProperty( "text", "some text" );
@@ -116,14 +116,14 @@ object's IDispatch implementation can be called directly using
 
       Outgoing events supported by the COM object are emitted as
 standard TQt signals.
 
       
      -    connect( webBrowser, SIGNAL(TitleChanged(const TQString&)),
-             this, SLOT(setCaption(const TQString&)) );
+    connect( webBrowser, SIGNAL(TitleChanged(const TQString&)),
+             this, SLOT(setCaption(const TQString&)) );
     
      
  
 
       TQAxBase transparently converts between COM data types and the
 equivalent TQt data types. Some COM types have no equivalent TQt data structure.
 
       Supported COM datatypes are listed in the first column of following table.
-The second column is the TQt type that can be used with the TQObject property
+The second column is the TQt type that can be used with the TQObject property
 functions. The third column is the TQt type that is used in the prototype of
 generated signals and slots for in-parameters, and the last column is the TQt
 type that is used in the prototype of signals and slots for out-parameters.
@@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ type that is used in the prototype of signals and slots for out-parameters.
 
    
 BSTR
 TQString
-const TQString&
+const TQString&
 TQString&
 
    
 char, short, int, long
@@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ type that is used in the prototype of signals and slots for out-parameters.
 
    
 DATE
 TQDateTime
-const TQDateTime&
+const TQDateTime&
 TQDateTime&
 
    
 CY
@@ -171,12 +171,12 @@ type that is used in the prototype of signals and slots for out-parameters.
 
    
 OLE_COLOR
 TQColor
-const TQColor&
+const TQColor&
 TQColor&
 
    
 SAFEARRAY(VARIANT)
 TQValueList<TQVariant>
-const TQValueList<TQVariant>&
+const TQValueList<TQVariant>&
 TQValueList<TQVariant>&
 
    
 SAFEARRAY(BYTE)
@@ -186,22 +186,22 @@ type that is used in the prototype of signals and slots for out-parameters.
 
    
 SAFEARRAY(BSTR)
 TQStringList
-const TQStringList&
+const TQStringList&
 TQStringList&
 
    
 VARIANT
 type-dependent
-const TQVariant&
+const TQVariant&
 TQVariant&
 
    
 IFontDisp*
 TQFont
-const TQFont&
+const TQFont&
 TQFont&
 
    
 IPictureDisp*
 TQPixmap
-const TQPixmap&
+const TQPixmap&
 TQPixmap&
 
    
 IDispatch*
@@ -240,21 +240,21 @@ use the TQAxBase API like this:
 
         TQAxObject object( "<CLSID>" );
 
-    TQString text = object.property( "text" ).toString();
-    object.setProperty( "font", TQFont( "Times New Roman", 12 ) );
+    TQString text = object.property( "text" ).toString();
+    object.setProperty( "font", TQFont( "Times New Roman", 12 ) );
 
     connect( this, SIGNAL(clicked(int)), &object, SLOT(showColumn(int)) );
-    bool ok = object.dynamicCall( "addColumn(const TQString&)", "Column 1" ).toBool();
+    bool ok = object.dynamicCall( "addColumn(const TQString&)", "Column 1" ).toBool();
 
-    TQValueList<TQVariant> varlist;
-    TQValueList<TQVariant> parameters;
+    TQValueList<TQVariant> varlist;
+    TQValueList<TQVariant> parameters;
     parameters << TQVariant( varlist );
     int n = object.dynamicCall( "fillList(TQValueList<TQVariant>&)", parameters ).toInt();
 
     TQAxObject *item = object.querySubItem( "item(int)", 5 );
     
    
  
-
     Note that the TQValueList the object should fill has to be provided as an
+
     Note that the TQValueList the object should fill has to be provided as an
 element in the parameter list of TQVariants.
 
     If you need to access properties or pass parameters of unsupported
 datatypes you must access the COM object directly through its
@@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ data as provided by the COM event.
 
    Member Type Documentation
    
 
    TQAxBase::PropertyBag
    
 
-
     A TQMap that can store properties as name:value pairs.
+
     A TQMap that can store properties as name:value pairs.
 
 
    Member Function Documentation
    
 
    TQAxBase::TQAxBase ( IUnknown * iface = 0 )
@@ -294,9 +294,9 @@ object.
 Shuts down the COM object and destroys the TQAxBase object.
 
     
    See also clear().
 
-
    TQVariant TQAxBase::asVariant () const
+
    TQVariant TQAxBase::asVariant () const
 
    
-Returns a TQVariant that wraps the COM object. The variant can
+Returns a TQVariant that wraps the COM object. The variant can
 then be used as a parameter in e.g. dynamicCall().
 
 
    void TQAxBase::clear () [virtual]
@@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ Disconnects and destroys the COM object.
 destructor to call clear(), and call this implementation at the
 end of your clear() function.
 
-
    TQString TQAxBase::control () const
+
    TQString TQAxBase::control () const
 
    Returns the name of the COM object wrapped by this TQAxBase object.
 See the "control" property for details.
 
    void TQAxBase::disableClassInfo ()
@@ -344,18 +344,18 @@ the COM interfaces provided by queryInterface().
 construction of the object (without passing an object identifier),
 and before calling TQAxWidget->setControl().
 
-
    TQVariant TQAxBase::dynamicCall ( const TQCString & function, const TQVariant & var1 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var2 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var3 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var4 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var5 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var6 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var7 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var8 = TQVariant ( ) )
+
    TQVariant TQAxBase::dynamicCall ( const TQCString & function, const TQVariant & var1 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var2 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var3 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var4 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var5 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var6 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var7 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var8 = TQVariant ( ) )
 
    
 Calls the COM object's method function, passing the
 parameters var1, var1, var2, var3, var4, var5,
 var6, var7 and var8, and returns the value returned by
-the method, or an invalid TQVariant if the method does not return
+the method, or an invalid TQVariant if the method does not return
 a value or when the function call failed.
 
     If function is a method of the object the string must be provided
 as the full prototype, for example as it would be written in a
-TQObject::connect() call.
+TQObject::connect() call.
 
    -    activeX->dynamicCall( "Navigate(const TQString&)", "www.trolltech.com" );
+    activeX->dynamicCall( "Navigate(const TQString&)", "www.trolltech.com" );
     
    
  
 
     Alternatively a function can be called passing the parameters embedded
@@ -372,14 +372,14 @@ property. The property setter is called when var1 is a valid TQVariant,
 otherwise the getter is called.
 
         activeX->dynamicCall( "Value", 5 );
-    TQString text = activeX->dynamicCall( "Text" ).toString();
+    TQString text = activeX->dynamicCall( "Text" ).toString();
     
    
  
 Note that it is faster to get and set properties using
-TQObject::property() and TQObject::setProperty().
+TQObject::property() and TQObject::setProperty().
 
     It is only possible to call functions through dynamicCall() that
 have parameters or return values of datatypes supported by
-TQVariant. See the TQAxBase class documentation for a list of
+TQVariant. See the TQAxBase class documentation for a list of
 supported and unsupported datatypes. If you want to call functions
 that have unsupported datatypes in the parameter list, use
 queryInterface() to retrieve the appropriate COM interface, and
@@ -396,18 +396,18 @@ use the function directly.
 
     This is also more efficient.
 
 
    Example: qutlook/centralwidget.cpp.
-
    TQVariant TQAxBase::dynamicCall ( const TQCString & function, TQValueList<TQVariant> & vars )
+
    TQVariant TQAxBase::dynamicCall ( const TQCString & function, TQValueList<TQVariant> & vars )
 
    
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 
     Calls the COM object's method function, passing the
 parameters in vars, and returns the value returned by
 the method. If the method does not return a value or when
 the function call failed this function returns an invalid
-TQVariant object.
+TQVariant object.
 
     The TQVariant objects in vars are updated when the method has
 out-parameters.
 
-
    void TQAxBase::exception ( int code, const TQString & source, const TQString & desc, const TQString & help ) [signal]
+
    void TQAxBase::exception ( int code, const TQString & source, const TQString & desc, const TQString & help ) [signal]
 
    
 
 
     This signal is emitted when the COM object throws an exception while called using the OLE automation
@@ -415,12 +415,12 @@ interface IDispatch. code, source, desc and help<
 provided by the COM server and can be used to provide useful feedback to the end user. help includes
 the help file, and the help context ID in brackets, e.g. "filename [id]".
 
-
    TQString TQAxBase::generateDocumentation ()
+
    TQString TQAxBase::generateDocumentation ()
 
    
 
 
     Returns a rich text string with documentation for the
 wrapped COM object. Dump the string to an HTML-file,
-or use it in e.g. a TQTextBrowser widget.
+or use it in e.g. a TQTextBrowser widget.
 
 
    bool TQAxBase::initialize ( IUnknown ** ptr ) [virtual protected]
 
    
@@ -486,7 +486,7 @@ of the COM object returns all properties, or that the properties
 returned are the same as those available through the IDispatch
 interface.
 
-
    void TQAxBase::propertyChanged ( const TQString & name ) [signal]
+
    void TQAxBase::propertyChanged ( const TQString & name ) [signal]
 
    
 
 
     If the COM object supports property notification, this signal gets
@@ -501,7 +501,7 @@ Depending on the control implementation this setting might be
 ignored for some properties.
 
     
    See also setPropertyWritable() and propertyChanged().
 
-
    long TQAxBase::queryInterface ( const TQUuid & uuid, void ** iface ) const
+
    long TQAxBase::queryInterface ( const TQUuid & uuid, void ** iface ) const
 
    
 Requests the interface uuid from the COM object and sets the
 value of iface to the provided interface, or to 0 if the
@@ -509,7 +509,7 @@ requested interface could not be provided.
 
     Returns the result of the QueryInterface implementation of the COM object.
 
     
    See also control.
 
-
    TQAxObject * TQAxBase::querySubObject ( const TQCString & name, const TQVariant & var1 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var2 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var3 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var4 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var5 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var6 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var7 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var8 = TQVariant ( ) )
+
    TQAxObject * TQAxBase::querySubObject ( const TQCString & name, const TQVariant & var1 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var2 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var3 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var4 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var5 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var6 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var7 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var8 = TQVariant ( ) )
 
    
 Returns a pointer to a TQAxObject wrapping the COM object provided
 by the method or property name, passing passing the parameters
@@ -539,7 +539,7 @@ this method to navigate the hierarchy of the object model, e.g.
  
 
 
    Example: qutlook/centralwidget.cpp.
-
    bool TQAxBase::setControl ( const TQString & )
+
    bool TQAxBase::setControl ( const TQString & )
 
    Sets the name of the COM object wrapped by this TQAxBase object.
 See the "control" property for details.
 
    void TQAxBase::setPropertyBag ( const PropertyBag & bag )
@@ -563,7 +563,7 @@ Depending on the control implementation this setting might be
 ignored for some properties.
 
     
    See also propertyWritable() and propertyChanged().
 
-
    void TQAxBase::signal ( const TQString & name, int argc, void * argv ) [signal]
+
    void TQAxBase::signal ( const TQString & name, int argc, void * argv ) [signal]
 
    
 
 
     This generic signal gets emitted when the COM object issues the
@@ -573,10 +573,10 @@ parameter values (DISPPARAMS.rgvarg). Note that the order of parameter
 values is turned around, ie. the last element of the array is the first
 parameter in the function.
 
     
    -    void Receiver::slot( const TQString &name, int argc, void *argv )
+    void Receiver::slot( const TQString &name, int argc, void *argv )
     {
         VARIANTARG *params = (VARIANTARG*)argv;
-        if ( name.startsWith( "BeforeNavigate2(" ) ) {
+        if ( name.startsWith( "BeforeNavigate2(" ) ) {
             IDispatch *pDisp = params[argc-1].pdispVal;
             VARIANTARG URL = *params[argc-2].pvarVal;
             VARIANTARG Flags = *params[argc-3].pvarVal;
@@ -592,7 +592,7 @@ parameter in the function.
 types. Otherwise, connect directly to the signal name.
 
 
    Property Documentation
    
-
    TQString control
    
+
    TQString control
    
 
    This property holds the name of the COM object wrapped by this TQAxBase object.
 
    Setting this property initilializes the COM object. Any COM object
 previously set is shut down.
diff --git a/doc/html/qaxbindable-h.html b/doc/html/qaxbindable-h.html
index b6f933d6e..d20253d13 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaxbindable-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaxbindable-h.html
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 #ifndef TQAXBINDABLE_H
 #define TQAXBINDABLE_H
 
-#include <qwidget.h>
+#include <ntqwidget.h>
 #include <private/qcom_p.h>
 
 struct IAxServerBase;
diff --git a/doc/html/qaxbindable.html b/doc/html/qaxbindable.html
index d0834e192..aa5ec16d3 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaxbindable.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaxbindable.html
@@ -54,11 +54,11 @@ TQWidget and an ActiveX client.
 
  • IUnknown * clientSite () const
    • 
 
 
    Detailed Description
    
-
     This class is defined in the TQt ActiveTQt Extension, which can be found in the qt/extensions directory. It is not included in the main TQt API.
+
     This class is defined in the TQt ActiveTQt Extension, which can be found in the qt/extensions directory. It is not included in the main TQt API.
 
    
 
 The TQAxBindable class provides an interface between a
-TQWidget and an ActiveX client.
+TQWidget and an ActiveX client.
 
 
     
 
@@ -68,12 +68,12 @@ your control class from both TQWidget (directly or indirectly) and
 this class to get access to this class's functions. The meta object compiler requires you to inherit from
 TQWidget first.
 
     
    -    class MyActiveX : public TQWidget, public TQAxBindable
+    class MyActiveX : public TQWidget, public TQAxBindable
     {
         Q_OBJECT
         Q_PROPERTY( int value READ value WRITE setValue )
     public:
-        MyActiveX( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
+        MyActiveX( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
         ...
 
         int value() const;
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ ActiveX control that the property property has been changed.
 function.
 
     
    See also requestPropertyChange().
 
-
    void TQAxBindable::reportError ( int code, const TQString & src, const TQString & desc, const TQString & context = TQString::null ) [static]
+
    void TQAxBindable::reportError ( int code, const TQString & src, const TQString & desc, const TQString & context = TQString::null ) [static]
 
    
 
 
     Reports an error to the client application. code is a
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ Returns TRUE if the client allows the change; otherwise returns
 FALSE.
 
     This function is usually called first in the write function for property, and writing is abandoned if the function returns FALSE.
 
     
    -    void MyActiveTQt::setText( const TQString &text )
+    void MyActiveTQt::setText( const TQString &text )
     {
         if ( !requestPropertyChange( "text" ) )
             return;
diff --git a/doc/html/qaxcontainer-example-qutlook.html b/doc/html/qaxcontainer-example-qutlook.html
index b3ca43ca6..e7261e350 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaxcontainer-example-qutlook.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaxcontainer-example-qutlook.html
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ constructor and a destructor and has a member contact_item of type
     class ABListViewItem : public TQListViewItem
     {
     public:
-        ABListViewItem( TQListView *listview, TQString firstName, TQString lastName, TQString address, TQString eMail, TQAxObject *contact );
+        ABListViewItem( TQListView *listview, TQString firstName, TQString lastName, TQString address, TQString eMail, TQAxObject *contact );
         ~ABListViewItem();
 
         TQAxObject *contactItem() const;
@@ -78,11 +78,11 @@ a new protected slot updateOutlook, and also three members of type  
 
 The implementation of the ABListViewItem class is trivial:
-
        ABListViewItem::ABListViewItem( TQListView *listview,
-                                    TQString firstName,
-                                    TQString lastName,
-                                    TQString address,
-                                    TQString eMail,
+
        ABListViewItem::ABListViewItem( TQListView *listview,
+                                    TQString firstName,
+                                    TQString lastName,
+                                    TQString address,
+                                    TQString eMail,
                                     TQAxObject *contact )
     : TQListViewItem( listview, firstName, lastName, address, eMail ), contact_item( contact )
     {
@@ -100,8 +100,8 @@ The implementation of the ABListViewItem class is trivial:
 
    The ABCentralWidget constructor initializes the TQAxObject pointers to zero and 
 calls the setupOutlook function. The ABCentralWidget destructor calls the
 Logoff method of the outlookSession object.
-
        ABCentralWidget::ABCentralWidget( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-        : TQWidget( parent, name ), outlook( 0 ), outlookSession( 0 ), contactItems( 0 )
+
        ABCentralWidget::ABCentralWidget( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+        : TQWidget( parent, name ), outlook( 0 ), outlookSession( 0 ), contactItems( 0 )
     {
         mainGrid = new TQGridLayout( this, 2, 1, 5, 5 );
 
@@ -144,9 +144,9 @@ to the signals provided by the "Items" COM object. Finally, it calls the
 
            // Get all items
         if ( defFolder ) {
             contactItems = defFolder->querySubObject( "Items" );
-            connect( contactItems, SIGNAL(ItemAdd(IDispatch*)), this, SLOT(updateOutlook()) );
-            connect( contactItems, SIGNAL(ItemChange(IDispatch*)), this, SLOT(updateOutlook()) );
-            connect( contactItems, SIGNAL(ItemRemove()), this, SLOT(updateOutlook()) );
+            connect( contactItems, SIGNAL(ItemAdd(IDispatch*)), this, SLOT(updateOutlook()) );
+            connect( contactItems, SIGNAL(ItemChange(IDispatch*)), this, SLOT(updateOutlook()) );
+            connect( contactItems, SIGNAL(ItemRemove()), this, SLOT(updateOutlook()) );
         }
 
         updateOutlook();
@@ -160,16 +160,16 @@ but the list view item should take ownership to provide a cleaner relation betwe
 entries, so the item has to be removed from its parent object.
 
        void ABCentralWidget::updateOutlook()
     {
-        listView->clear();
+        listView->clear();
         if ( !contactItems )
             return;
 
         TQAxObject *item = contactItems->querySubObject( "GetFirst()" );
         while ( item ) {
-            TQString firstName = item->property( "FirstName" ).toString();
-            TQString lastName = item->property( "LastName" ).toString();
-            TQString address = item->property( "HomeAddress" ).toString();
-            TQString email = item->property( "Email1Address" ).toString();
+            TQString firstName = item->property( "FirstName" ).toString();
+            TQString lastName = item->property( "LastName" ).toString();
+            TQString address = item->property( "HomeAddress" ).toString();
+            TQString email = item->property( "Email1Address" ).toString();
 
             (void)new ABListViewItem( listView, firstName, lastName, address, email, item );
             // the listviewitem takes ownership
@@ -184,48 +184,48 @@ object to create a new contact item, and creates a new ABListViewItem if the cal
 succeeds.
 
        void ABCentralWidget::addEntry()
     {
-        if ( !iFirstName->text().isEmpty() || !iLastName->text().isEmpty() ||
-             !iAddress->text().isEmpty() || !iEMail->text().isEmpty() ) {
+        if ( !iFirstName->text().isEmpty() || !iLastName->text().isEmpty() ||
+             !iAddress->text().isEmpty() || !iEMail->text().isEmpty() ) {
             TQAxObject *contactItem = outlook->querySubObject( "CreateItem(OlItemType)", "olContactItem" );
             if ( contactItem ) {
-                contactItem->setProperty( "FirstName", iFirstName->text() );
-                contactItem->setProperty( "LastName", iLastName->text() );
-                contactItem->setProperty( "HomeAddress", iAddress->text() );
-                contactItem->setProperty( "Email1Address", iEMail->text() );
+                contactItem->setProperty( "FirstName", iFirstName->text() );
+                contactItem->setProperty( "LastName", iLastName->text() );
+                contactItem->setProperty( "HomeAddress", iAddress->text() );
+                contactItem->setProperty( "Email1Address", iEMail->text() );
                 contactItem->dynamicCall( "Save()" );
 
-                new ABListViewItem( listView, iFirstName->text(),
-                    iLastName->text(), iAddress->text(), iEMail->text(), contactItem );
+                new ABListViewItem( listView, iFirstName->text(),
+                    iLastName->text(), iAddress->text(), iEMail->text(), contactItem );
             }
         }
 
-        iFirstName->setText( "" );
-        iLastName->setText( "" );
-        iAddress->setText( "" );
-        iEMail->setText( "" );
+        iFirstName->setText( "" );
+        iLastName->setText( "" );
+        iAddress->setText( "" );
+        iEMail->setText( "" );
     }
 
    
 
     The changeEntry implementation updates the values in the contact item of the current
 listview item as well as the values of the listview item itself.
 
        void ABCentralWidget::changeEntry()
     {
-        ABListViewItem *item = (ABListViewItem*)listView->currentItem();
+        ABListViewItem *item = (ABListViewItem*)listView->currentItem();
 
         if ( item &&
-             ( !iFirstName->text().isEmpty() || !iLastName->text().isEmpty() ||
-               !iAddress->text().isEmpty() || !iEMail->text().isEmpty() ) ) {
+             ( !iFirstName->text().isEmpty() || !iLastName->text().isEmpty() ||
+               !iAddress->text().isEmpty() || !iEMail->text().isEmpty() ) ) {
 
             TQAxObject *contactItem = item->contactItem();
-            contactItem->setProperty( "FirstName", iFirstName->text() );
-            contactItem->setProperty( "LastName", iLastName->text() );
-            contactItem->setProperty( "HomeAddress", iAddress->text() );
-            contactItem->setProperty( "Email1Address", iEMail->text() );
+            contactItem->setProperty( "FirstName", iFirstName->text() );
+            contactItem->setProperty( "LastName", iLastName->text() );
+            contactItem->setProperty( "HomeAddress", iAddress->text() );
+            contactItem->setProperty( "Email1Address", iEMail->text() );
             contactItem->dynamicCall( "Save()" );
 
-            item->setText( 0, iFirstName->text() );
-            item->setText( 1, iLastName->text() );
-            item->setText( 2, iAddress->text() );
-            item->setText( 3, iEMail->text() );
+            item->setText( 0, iFirstName->text() );
+            item->setText( 1, iLastName->text() );
+            item->setText( 2, iAddress->text() );
+            item->setText( 3, iEMail->text() );
         }
     }
 
    
diff --git a/doc/html/qaxcontainer-example-webbrowser.html b/doc/html/qaxcontainer-example-webbrowser.html
index 76f4b3a38..6f60fada9 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaxcontainer-example-webbrowser.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaxcontainer-example-webbrowser.html
@@ -45,13 +45,13 @@ already been set up within TQt Designer.
 
 
        void MainWindow::init()
     {
-        pb = new TQProgressBar( statusBar() );
-        pb->setPercentageVisible( FALSE );
-        pb->hide();
+        pb = new TQProgressBar( statusBar() );
+        pb->setPercentageVisible( FALSE );
+        pb->hide();
         statusBar()->addWidget( pb, 0, TRUE );
 
         connect( WebBrowser, SIGNAL(ProgressChange(int,int)), this, SLOT(setProgress(int,int)) );
-        connect( WebBrowser, SIGNAL(StatusTextChange(const TQString&)), statusBar(), SLOT(message(const TQString&)) );
+        connect( WebBrowser, SIGNAL(StatusTextChange(const TQString&)), statusBar(), SLOT(message(const TQString&)) );
 
         WebBrowser->dynamicCall( "GoHome()" );
     }
@@ -64,11 +64,11 @@ using the TQAxBase::dynamicCall() dynamic
 
     
        void MainWindow::go()
     {
         actionStop->setEnabled( TRUE );
-        WebBrowser->dynamicCall( "Navigate(const TQString&)", addressEdit->text() );
+        WebBrowser->dynamicCall( "Navigate(const TQString&)", addressEdit->text() );
     }
 
    The go() function calls the NavigateTo() function of Internet
 Explorer, passing the text of the address bar as the argument.
-
     
        void MainWindow::setTitle( const TQString &title )
+
     
        void MainWindow::setTitle( const TQString &title )
     {
         setCaption( "TQt WebBrowser - " + title );
     }
@@ -78,12 +78,12 @@ using the provided title string.
 
     
        void MainWindow::setProgress( int a, int b )
     {
         if ( a <= 0 || b <= 0 ) {
-            pb->hide();
+            pb->hide();
             return;
         }
-        pb->show();
-        pb->setTotalSteps( b );
-        pb->setProgress( a );
+        pb->show();
+        pb->setTotalSteps( b );
+        pb->setProgress( a );
     }
 
     void MainWindow::setCommandState( int cmd, bool on )
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ using the provided title string.
 
    The setProgress(), setCommandState(), navigateBegin() and
 navigateComplete() slots are connected to the respective
 signals of Internet Explorer and update the user interface.
-
     The rest of the implementation is not related to ActiveTQt and
+
     The rest of the implementation is not related to ActiveTQt and
 omitted for brevity.
 
     To build the example you must first build the
 TQAxContainer library.
diff --git a/doc/html/qaxcontainer.html b/doc/html/qaxcontainer.html
index 65d0b86ce..d944ac0a5 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaxcontainer.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaxcontainer.html
@@ -72,13 +72,13 @@ parameter n
 
 
     
     Introduction
 
    
-
     The TQAxContainer module provides a library implementing a TQWidget
+
     The TQAxContainer module provides a library implementing a TQWidget
 subclass, TQAxWidget, that acts as a container for ActiveX
-controls, and a TQObject subclass, TQAxObject, that can be used to
+controls, and a TQObject subclass, TQAxObject, that can be used to
 easily access non-visual COM objects. Scripting COM objects embedded
 using these classes is possible through the TQAxScript, TQAxScriptManager
 and TQAxScriptEngine classes.
-
     This module is part of the ActiveTQt
+
     This module is part of the ActiveTQt
     framework. (To make an application into an ActiveX server
 see the TQAxServer module.)
 
     The module consists of six classes
@@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ see the TQAxServer module.)
 
  •  TQAxBase is an abstract class that provides an API to initialize 
 and access a COM/ActiveX object.
 
  •  TQAxObject provides a TQObject that wraps a COM object.
-
  •  TQAxWidget is a TQWidget that wraps an ActiveX control.
+
  •  TQAxWidget is a TQWidget that wraps an ActiveX control.
 
  •  TQAxScriptManager, TQAxScript and TQAxScriptEngine provide an 
 interface to the Windows Script Host.
 
@@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ machine that the object should run on, and can include a license key
 for licensed controls.
 
     
     Accessing the object API
 
    
-
     ActiveTQt provides a TQt API to the COM object, and replaces COM
+
     ActiveTQt provides a TQt API to the COM object, and replaces COM
 datatypes with TQt equivalents. Use the dumpdoc tool to get the 
 documentation of the TQt API for any COM object and it's subobjects.
 
     See the TQAxWidget and TQAxObject API documentation about how to 
diff --git a/doc/html/qaxfactory-h.html b/doc/html/qaxfactory-h.html
index 6ea839e21..47682381e 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaxfactory-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaxfactory-h.html
@@ -64,10 +64,10 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 #ifndef TQAXFACTORY_H
 #define TQAXFACTORY_H
 
-#include <qdict.h>
-#include <quuid.h>
+#include <ntqdict.h>
+#include <ntquuid.h>
 #include <private/qcom_p.h>
-#include <qmetaobject.h>
+#include <ntqmetaobject.h>
 
 // {22B230F6-8722-4051-ADCB-E7C9CE872EB3}
 #ifndef IID_QAxFactory
diff --git a/doc/html/qaxfactory.html b/doc/html/qaxfactory.html
index e3ff0d316..a4e86a330 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaxfactory.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaxfactory.html
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
  • bool stopServer ()
    • 
 
 
    Detailed Description
    
-
     This class is defined in the TQt ActiveTQt Extension, which can be found in the qt/extensions directory. It is not included in the main TQt API.
+
     This class is defined in the TQt ActiveTQt Extension, which can be found in the qt/extensions directory. It is not included in the main TQt API.
 
    
 
 The TQAxFactory class defines a factory for the creation of COM components.
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ yourself. Use the TQAXFACTORY_DEFA
 implementation file (e.g. main.cpp) to instantiate and export the
 default factory:
 
     
    -    #include <qapplication.h>
+    #include <ntqapplication.h>
     #include <qaxfactory.h>
 
     #include "theactivex.h"
@@ -106,14 +106,14 @@ and export it:
 
     
         TQStringList ActiveTQtFactory::featureList() const
     {
-        TQStringList list;
+        TQStringList list;
         list << "ActiveX1";
         list << "ActiveX2";
         ...
         return list;
     }
 
-    TQWidget *ActiveTQtFactory::create( const TQString &key, TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+    TQWidget *ActiveTQtFactory::create( const TQString &key, TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
     {
         if ( key == "ActiveX1" )
             return new ActiveX1( parent, name );
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ and export it:
         return 0;
     }
 
-    TQUuid ActiveTQtFactory::classID( const TQString &key ) const
+    TQUuid ActiveTQtFactory::classID( const TQString &key ) const
     {
         if ( key == "ActiveX1" )
             return "{01234567-89AB-CDEF-0123-456789ABCDEF}";
@@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ and export it:
         return TQUuid();
     }
 
-    TQUuid ActiveTQtFactory::interfaceID( const TQString &key ) const
+    TQUuid ActiveTQtFactory::interfaceID( const TQString &key ) const
     {
         if ( key == "ActiveX1" )
             return "{01234567-89AB-CDEF-0123-456789ABCDEF}";
@@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ and export it:
         return TQUuid();
     }
 
-    TQUuid ActiveTQtFactory::eventsID( const TQString &key ) const
+    TQUuid ActiveTQtFactory::eventsID( const TQString &key ) const
     {
         if ( key == "ActiveX1" )
             return "{01234567-89AB-CDEF-0123-456789ABCDEF}";
@@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ supplied class.
 each supplied class.
 
 
    Member Function Documentation
    
-
    TQAxFactory::TQAxFactory ( const TQUuid & libid, const TQUuid & appid )
+
    TQAxFactory::TQAxFactory ( const TQUuid & libid, const TQUuid & appid )
 
    
 Constructs a TQAxFactory object that returns libid and appid
 in the implementation of the respective interface functions.
@@ -198,40 +198,40 @@ in the implementation of the respective interface functions.
 
    
 Destroys the TQAxFactory object.
 
-
    TQUuid TQAxFactory::appID () const [virtual]
+
    TQUuid TQAxFactory::appID () const [virtual]
 
    
 
 
     Reimplement this function to return the ActiveX server's
 application identifier.
 
-
    TQUuid TQAxFactory::classID ( const TQString & key ) const [virtual]
+
    TQUuid TQAxFactory::classID ( const TQString & key ) const [virtual]
 
    
 Reimplement this function to return the class identifier for each
 key returned by the featureList() implementation, or an empty
-TQUuid if this factory doesn't support the value of key.
+TQUuid if this factory doesn't support the value of key.
 
     The default implementation interprets key as the class name,
 and returns the value of the Q_CLASSINFO entry "ClassID".
 
-
    TQWidget * TQAxFactory::create ( const TQString & key, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) [virtual]
+
    TQWidget * TQAxFactory::create ( const TQString & key, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) [virtual]
 
    
 Reimplement this function to return a new widget for key.
-Propagate parent and name to the TQWidget constructor. Return 
+Propagate parent and name to the TQWidget constructor. Return 
 0 if this factory doesn't support the value of key.
 
     The returned widget will be exposed as an ActiveX control, e.g.
 a COM object that can be embedded as a control into applications.
 
     The default implementation returns 0.
 
-
    TQObject * TQAxFactory::createObject ( const TQString & key, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) [virtual]
+
    TQObject * TQAxFactory::createObject ( const TQString & key, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) [virtual]
 
    
 Reimplement this function to return a new object for key.
-Propagate parent and name to the TQWidget constructor. Return 
+Propagate parent and name to the TQWidget constructor. Return 
 0 if this factory doesn't support the value of key.
 
     If the object returned is a TQWidget it will be exposed as an ActiveX
 control, otherwise the returned object will be exposed as a COM object.
 
     The default implementation returns the result TQAxFactory::create() if 
 parent is 0 or a widget, otherwise returns 0.
 
-
    bool TQAxFactory::createObjectWrapper ( TQObject * object, IDispatch ** wrapper ) [virtual]
+
    bool TQAxFactory::createObjectWrapper ( TQObject * object, IDispatch ** wrapper ) [virtual]
 
    
 
 
     Reimplement this function to provide the COM object for object
@@ -240,16 +240,16 @@ return FALSE.
 
     The default implementation creates a generic automation wrapper based 
 on the meta object information of object.
 
-
    TQUuid TQAxFactory::eventsID ( const TQString & key ) const [virtual]
+
    TQUuid TQAxFactory::eventsID ( const TQString & key ) const [virtual]
 
    
 Reimplement this function to return the identifier of the event
 interface for each key returned by the featureList()
-implementation, or an empty TQUuid if this factory doesn't support
+implementation, or an empty TQUuid if this factory doesn't support
 the value of key.
 
     The default implementation interprets key as the class name,
 and returns the value of the Q_CLASSINFO entry "EventsID".
 
-
    TQString TQAxFactory::exposeToSuperClass ( const TQString & key ) const [virtual]
+
    TQString TQAxFactory::exposeToSuperClass ( const TQString & key ) const [virtual]
 
    
 Reimplement this function to return the name of the super class of
 key up to which methods and properties should be exposed by the
@@ -257,18 +257,18 @@ ActiveX control.
 
     The default implementation interprets key as the class name,
 and returns the value of the Q_CLASSINFO entry "ToSuperClass". If
 no such value is set the null-string is returned, and the functions 
-and properties of all the super classes including TQWidget will be 
+and properties of all the super classes including TQWidget will be 
 exposed.
 
     To only expose the functions and properties of the class itself,
 reimplement this function to return key.
 
-
    TQStringList TQAxFactory::featureList () const [pure virtual]
+
    TQStringList TQAxFactory::featureList () const [pure virtual]
 
    
 
 
     Reimplement this function to return a list of the widgets (class
 names) supported by this factory.
 
-
    bool TQAxFactory::hasStockEvents ( const TQString & key ) const [virtual]
+
    bool TQAxFactory::hasStockEvents ( const TQString & key ) const [virtual]
 
    
 Reimplement this function to return TRUE if the ActiveX control
 key should support the standard ActiveX events
@@ -286,11 +286,11 @@ Reimplement this function to return TRUE if the ActiveX control
 and returns TRUE if the value of the Q_CLASSINFO entry "StockEvents"
 is "yes". Otherwise this function returns FALSE.
 
-
    TQUuid TQAxFactory::interfaceID ( const TQString & key ) const [virtual]
+
    TQUuid TQAxFactory::interfaceID ( const TQString & key ) const [virtual]
 
    
 Reimplement this function to return the interface identifier for
 each key returned by the featureList() implementation, or an
-empty TQUuid if this factory doesn't support the value of key.
+empty TQUuid if this factory doesn't support the value of key.
 
     The default implementation interprets key as the class name,
 and returns the value of the Q_CLASSINFO entry "InterfaceID".
 
@@ -301,13 +301,13 @@ server, otherwise returns FALSE.
 
     
         int main( int argc, char**argv )
     {
-        TQApplication app( argc, argv );
+        TQApplication app( argc, argv );
 
         if ( !TQAxFactory::isServer() ) {
             // initialize for stand-alone execution
         }
 
-        return app.exec() // standard event processing
+        return app.exec() // standard event processing
     }
     
    
  
@@ -319,14 +319,14 @@ running as a persistent service (e.g. an NT service) and should
 not terminate even when all objects provided have been released.
 
     The default implementation returns FALSE.
 
-
    TQMetaObject * TQAxFactory::metaObject ( const TQString & key ) const [virtual]
+
    TQMetaObject * TQAxFactory::metaObject ( const TQString & key ) const [virtual]
 
    
-Reimplement this function to return the TQMetaObject corresponding to
+Reimplement this function to return the TQMetaObject corresponding to
 key, or 0 if this factory doesn't support the value of key.
 
     The default implementation returns the TQMetaObject for the class
 key.
 
-
    void TQAxFactory::registerClass ( const TQString & key, TQSettings * settings ) const [virtual]
+
    void TQAxFactory::registerClass ( const TQString & key, TQSettings * settings ) const [virtual]
 
    
 Registers additional values for the class key in the system
 registry using the settings object. The standard values have
@@ -339,21 +339,21 @@ this function.
  
 
     If you reimplement this function you must also reimplement
 unregisterClass() to remove the additional registry values.
-
     
    See also TQSettings.
+
     
    See also TQSettings.
 
-
    TQString TQAxFactory::serverDirPath () [static]
+
    TQString TQAxFactory::serverDirPath () [static]
 
    
 Returns the directory that contains the server binary.
 
     For out-of-process servers this is the same as 
-TQApplication::applicationDirPath(). For in-process servers
+TQApplication::applicationDirPath(). For in-process servers
 that function returns the directory that contains the hosting
 application.
 
-
    TQString TQAxFactory::serverFilePath () [static]
+
    TQString TQAxFactory::serverFilePath () [static]
 
    
 Returns the file path of the server binary.
 
     For out-of-process servers this is the same as 
-TQApplication::applicationFilePath(). For in-process servers
+TQApplication::applicationFilePath(). For in-process servers
 that function returns the file path of the hosting application.
 
 
    bool TQAxFactory::startServer ( ServerType type = MultipleInstances ) [static]
@@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ in-process server) does nothing and returns TRUE.
 if the server executable has been started with the -activex 
 command line parameter.
 
-
    bool TQAxFactory::stayTopLevel ( const TQString & key ) const [virtual]
+
    bool TQAxFactory::stayTopLevel ( const TQString & key ) const [virtual]
 
    
 Reimplement this function to return TRUE if the ActiveX control key
 should be a top level window, e.g. a dialog. The default implementation
@@ -385,13 +385,13 @@ new objects can be created from the existing server process. Usually
 COM will start a new server process if additional objects are requested.
 
     The server is stopped automatically when the main() function returns.
 
-
    TQUuid TQAxFactory::typeLibID () const [virtual]
+
    TQUuid TQAxFactory::typeLibID () const [virtual]
 
    
 
 
     Reimplement this function to return the ActiveX server's type
 library identifier.
 
-
    void TQAxFactory::unregisterClass ( const TQString & key, TQSettings * settings ) const [virtual]
+
    void TQAxFactory::unregisterClass ( const TQString & key, TQSettings * settings ) const [virtual]
 
    
 Unregisters any additional values for the class key from the
 system registry using the settings object.
@@ -399,9 +399,9 @@ system registry using the settings object.
     settings->removeEntry( "/CLSID/" + classID(key) + "/Implemented Categories/{00000000-0000-0000-000000000000}/." );
     
  
-
     
    See also registerClass() and TQSettings.
+
     
    See also registerClass() and TQSettings.
 
-
    bool TQAxFactory::validateLicenseKey ( const TQString & key, const TQString & licenseKey ) const [virtual]
+
    bool TQAxFactory::validateLicenseKey ( const TQString & key, const TQString & licenseKey ) const [virtual]
 
    
 Reimplement this function to return TRUE if licenseKey is a valid
 license for the class key, or if the current machine is licensed.
diff --git a/doc/html/qaxobject-h.html b/doc/html/qaxobject-h.html
index d2a1b69a6..654a15afc 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaxobject-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaxobject-h.html
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 #define TQAXOBJECT_H
 
 #include "qaxbase.h"
-#include <qobject.h>
+#include <ntqobject.h>
 
 class TQAxObject : public TQObject, public TQAxBase
 {
diff --git a/doc/html/qaxobject-members.html b/doc/html/qaxobject-members.html
index 30759a115..56d60709c 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaxobject-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaxobject-members.html
@@ -38,70 +38,70 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
  • TQAxObject()
 
  • ~TQAxObject()
 
  • asVariant()
-
  • blockSignals()
-
  • checkConnectArgs()
-
  • child()
-
  • childEvent()
-
  • children()
-
  • className()
+
  • blockSignals()
+
  • checkConnectArgs()
+
  • child()
+
  • childEvent()
+
  • children()
+
  • className()
 
  • clear()
-
  • connect()
-
  • connectNotify()
+
  • connect()
+
  • connectNotify()
 
  • control()
-
  • customEvent()
-
  • deleteLater()
-
  • destroyed()
+
  • customEvent()
+
  • deleteLater()
+
  • destroyed()
 
  • disableClassInfo()
 
  • disableEventSink()
 
  • disableMetaObject()
-
  • disconnect()
-
  • disconnectNotify()
-
  • dumpObjectInfo()
-
  • dumpObjectTree()
+
  • disconnect()
+
  • disconnectNotify()
+
  • dumpObjectInfo()
+
  • dumpObjectTree()
 
  • dynamicCall()
-
  • event()
-
  • eventFilter()
+
  • event()
+
  • eventFilter()
 
  • exception()
 
  • generateDocumentation()
-
  • highPriority()
-
  • inherits()
+
  • highPriority()
+
  • inherits()
 
  • initialize()
 
  • initializeActive()
 
  • initializeLicensed()
 
  • initializeRemote()
-
  • insertChild()
-
  • installEventFilter()
-
  • isA()
+
  • insertChild()
+
  • installEventFilter()
+
  • isA()
 
  • isNull()
-
  • isWidgetType()
-
  • killTimer()
-
  • killTimers()
-
  • metaObject()
-
  • name()
-
  • normalizeSignalSlot()
-
  • objectTrees()
-
  • parent()
-
  • property()
+
  • isWidgetType()
+
  • killTimer()
+
  • killTimers()
+
  • metaObject()
+
  • name()
+
  • normalizeSignalSlot()
+
  • objectTrees()
+
  • parent()
+
  • property()
 
  • propertyBag()
 
  • propertyChanged()
 
  • propertyWritable()
 
  • queryInterface()
-
  • queryList()
+
  • queryList()
 
  • querySubObject()
-
  • removeChild()
-
  • removeEventFilter()
-
  • sender()
+
  • removeChild()
+
  • removeEventFilter()
+
  • sender()
 
  • setControl()
-
  • setName()
-
  • setProperty()
+
  • setName()
+
  • setProperty()
 
  • setPropertyBag()
 
  • setPropertyWritable()
 
  • signal()
-
  • signalsBlocked()
-
  • startTimer()
-
  • timerEvent()
-
  • tr()
-
  • trUtf8()
+
  • signalsBlocked()
+
  • startTimer()
+
  • timerEvent()
+
  • tr()
+
  • trUtf8()
 
 
 
    
diff --git a/doc/html/qaxobject.html b/doc/html/qaxobject.html
index eba6c756c..5a2233228 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaxobject.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaxobject.html
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 More...
 
    This class is part of the TQt ActiveTQt Extension.
 
    #include <qaxobject.h>
-
    Inherits TQObject and TQAxBase.
+
    Inherits TQObject and TQAxBase.
 
    Inherited by TQAxScriptEngine.
 
    List of all member functions.
 
    Public Members
    
@@ -52,10 +52,10 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
  • TQAxObject * querySubObject ( const TQCString & name, const TQVariant & var1 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var2 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var3 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var4 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var5 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var6 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var7 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var8 = TQVariant ( ) )
    • 
 
 
    Detailed Description
    
-
     This class is defined in the TQt ActiveTQt Extension, which can be found in the qt/extensions directory. It is not included in the main TQt API.
+
     This class is defined in the TQt ActiveTQt Extension, which can be found in the qt/extensions directory. It is not included in the main TQt API.
 
    
 
-The TQAxObject class provides a TQObject that wraps a COM object.
+The TQAxObject class provides a TQObject that wraps a COM object.
 
 
     
 
@@ -75,23 +75,23 @@ in the subclass (the generated moc-file will not comp
 cannot add further signals, slots or properties. This limitation is 
 due to the metaobject information generated in runtime. 
 To work around this problem, aggregate the TQAxObject as a member of 
-the TQObject subclass.
+the TQObject subclass.
 
     
 
    Member Function Documentation
    
-
    TQAxObject::TQAxObject ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    TQAxObject::TQAxObject ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
 
    
 Creates an empty COM object and propagates parent and name
-to the TQObject constructor. To initialize the object, call setControl.
+to the TQObject constructor. To initialize the object, call setControl.
 
-
    TQAxObject::TQAxObject ( const TQString & c, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    TQAxObject::TQAxObject ( const TQString & c, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
 
    
 Creates a TQAxObject that wraps the COM object c. parent and
-name are propagated to the TQWidget contructor.
+name are propagated to the TQWidget contructor.
 
     
    See also control.
 
-
    TQAxObject::TQAxObject ( IUnknown * iface, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    TQAxObject::TQAxObject ( IUnknown * iface, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
 
    
-Creates a TQAxObject that wraps the COM object referenced by iface. parent and name are propagated to the TQObject
+Creates a TQAxObject that wraps the COM object referenced by iface. parent and name are propagated to the TQObject
 contructor.
 
 
    TQAxObject::~TQAxObject ()
@@ -99,18 +99,18 @@ contructor.
 Releases the COM object and destroys the TQAxObject,
 cleaning up all allocated resources.
 
-
    TQVariant TQAxBase::dynamicCall ( const TQCString & function, const TQVariant & var1 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var2 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var3 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var4 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var5 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var6 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var7 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var8 = TQVariant ( ) )
+
    TQVariant TQAxBase::dynamicCall ( const TQCString & function, const TQVariant & var1 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var2 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var3 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var4 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var5 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var6 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var7 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var8 = TQVariant ( ) )
 
    
 Calls the COM object's method function, passing the
 parameters var1, var1, var2, var3, var4, var5,
 var6, var7 and var8, and returns the value returned by
-the method, or an invalid TQVariant if the method does not return
+the method, or an invalid TQVariant if the method does not return
 a value or when the function call failed.
 
     If function is a method of the object the string must be provided
 as the full prototype, for example as it would be written in a
-TQObject::connect() call.
+TQObject::connect() call.
 
    -    activeX->dynamicCall( "Navigate(const TQString&)", "www.trolltech.com" );
+    activeX->dynamicCall( "Navigate(const TQString&)", "www.trolltech.com" );
     
    
  
 
     Alternatively a function can be called passing the parameters embedded
@@ -127,14 +127,14 @@ property. The property setter is called when var1 is a valid TQVariant,
 otherwise the getter is called.
 
         activeX->dynamicCall( "Value", 5 );
-    TQString text = activeX->dynamicCall( "Text" ).toString();
+    TQString text = activeX->dynamicCall( "Text" ).toString();
     
    
  
 Note that it is faster to get and set properties using
-TQObject::property() and TQObject::setProperty().
+TQObject::property() and TQObject::setProperty().
 
     It is only possible to call functions through dynamicCall() that
 have parameters or return values of datatypes supported by
-TQVariant. See the TQAxBase class documentation for a list of
+TQVariant. See the TQAxBase class documentation for a list of
 supported and unsupported datatypes. If you want to call functions
 that have unsupported datatypes in the parameter list, use
 queryInterface() to retrieve the appropriate COM interface, and
@@ -151,18 +151,18 @@ use the function directly.
 
     This is also more efficient.
 
 
    Example: qutlook/centralwidget.cpp.
-
    TQVariant TQAxBase::dynamicCall ( const TQCString & function, TQValueList<TQVariant> & vars )
+
    TQVariant TQAxBase::dynamicCall ( const TQCString & function, TQValueList<TQVariant> & vars )
 
    
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 
     Calls the COM object's method function, passing the
 parameters in vars, and returns the value returned by
 the method. If the method does not return a value or when
 the function call failed this function returns an invalid
-TQVariant object.
+TQVariant object.
 
     The TQVariant objects in vars are updated when the method has
 out-parameters.
 
-
    TQAxObject * TQAxBase::querySubObject ( const TQCString & name, const TQVariant & var1 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var2 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var3 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var4 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var5 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var6 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var7 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var8 = TQVariant ( ) )
+
    TQAxObject * TQAxBase::querySubObject ( const TQCString & name, const TQVariant & var1 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var2 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var3 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var4 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var5 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var6 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var7 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var8 = TQVariant ( ) )
 
    
 Returns a pointer to a TQAxObject wrapping the COM object provided
 by the method or property name, passing passing the parameters
diff --git a/doc/html/qaxscript-members.html b/doc/html/qaxscript-members.html
index ad4f0b2e2..095459ba8 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaxscript-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaxscript-members.html
@@ -37,58 +37,58 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
 
    
diff --git a/doc/html/qaxscript.html b/doc/html/qaxscript.html
index e098c5a95..f3de7b71c 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaxscript.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaxscript.html
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 More...
 
    This class is part of the TQt ActiveTQt Extension.
 
    #include <qaxscript.h>
-
    Inherits TQObject.
+
    Inherits TQObject.
 
    List of all member functions.
 
    Public Members
    
 
      
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
    • void error ( int code, const TQString & description, int sourcePosition, const TQString & sourceText )
      • 
 
    
 
    Detailed Description
    
-
     This class is defined in the TQt ActiveTQt Extension, which can be found in the qt/extensions directory. It is not included in the main TQt API.
+
     This class is defined in the TQt ActiveTQt Extension, which can be found in the qt/extensions directory. It is not included in the main TQt API.
 
    
 
 The TQAxScript class provides a wrapper around script code.
@@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ compilers.
 
  • TQAxScript::FunctionSignatures - Returns the functions with signatures.
 
 
    Member Function Documentation
    
-
    TQAxScript::TQAxScript ( const TQString & name, TQAxScriptManager * manager )
+
    TQAxScript::TQAxScript ( const TQString & name, TQAxScriptManager * manager )
 
    
 Constructs a TQAxScript object called name and registers
 it with the TQAxScriptManager manager. This is usually done by the
@@ -100,17 +100,17 @@ takes ownership of the object.
 
 Destroys the object, releasing all allocated resources.
 
-
    TQVariant TQAxScript::call ( const TQString & function, const TQVariant & var1 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var2 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var3 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var4 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var5 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var6 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var7 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var8 = TQVariant ( ) )
+
    TQVariant TQAxScript::call ( const TQString & function, const TQVariant & var1 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var2 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var3 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var4 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var5 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var6 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var7 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var8 = TQVariant ( ) )
 
    
 Calls function, passing the parameters var1, var1, 
 var2, var3, var4, var5, var6, var7 and var8
 as arguments and returns the value returned by the function, or an 
-invalid TQVariant if the function does not return a value or when 
+invalid TQVariant if the function does not return a value or when 
 the function call failed.
 
     See TQAxScriptManager::call() for more information about how to call
 script functions.
 
-
    TQVariant TQAxScript::call ( const TQString & function, TQValueList<TQVariant> & arguments )
+
    TQVariant TQAxScript::call ( const TQString & function, TQValueList<TQVariant> & arguments )
 
    
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 
     Calls function passing arguments as parameters, and returns
@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ script functions.
  
 
     This signal is emitted when a script engine has started executing code.
 
-
    void TQAxScript::error ( int code, const TQString & description, int sourcePosition, const TQString & sourceText ) [signal]
+
    void TQAxScript::error ( int code, const TQString & description, int sourcePosition, const TQString & sourceText ) [signal]
 
    
 
 
     This signal is emitted when an execution error occured while
@@ -134,17 +134,17 @@ contain information about the execution error.
  
 
     This signal is emitted when a script engine has finished executing code.
 
-
    void TQAxScript::finished ( const TQVariant & result ) [signal]
+
    void TQAxScript::finished ( const TQVariant & result ) [signal]
 
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 
     result contains the script's result. This will be an invalid
-TQVariant if the script has no return value.
+TQVariant if the script has no return value.
 
-
    void TQAxScript::finished ( int code, const TQString & source, const TQString & description, const TQString & help ) [signal]
+
    void TQAxScript::finished ( int code, const TQString & source, const TQString & description, const TQString & help ) [signal]
 
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 
     code, source, description and help contain exception information
 when the script terminated.
 
-
    TQStringList TQAxScript::functions ( FunctionFlags flags = FunctionNames ) const
+
    TQStringList TQAxScript::functions ( FunctionFlags flags = FunctionNames ) const
 
    
 Returns a list of all the functions in this script if the respective
 script engine supports introspection; otherwise returns an empty list.
@@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ The functions are either provided with full prototypes or only as
 names, depending on the value of flags.
 
     
    See also TQAxScriptEngine::hasIntrospection().
 
-
    bool TQAxScript::load ( const TQString & code, const TQString & language = TQString::null )
+
    bool TQAxScript::load ( const TQString & code, const TQString & language = TQString::null )
 
    
 Loads the script source code written in language language
 into the script engine. Returns TRUE if code was successfully
@@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ TQAxScript::registerEngine().
 
     This function can only be called once for each TQAxScript object,
 which is done automatically when using TQAxScriptManager::load().
 
-
    TQString TQAxScript::scriptCode () const
+
    TQString TQAxScript::scriptCode () const
 
     
 Returns the script's code, or the null-string if no
 code has been loaded yet.
@@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Returns a pointer to the script engine.
 
     You can use the object returned to connect signals to the 
 script functions, or to access the script engine directly.
 
-
    TQString TQAxScript::scriptName () const
+
    TQString TQAxScript::scriptName () const
 
     
 Returns the name of the script.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qaxscriptengine-members.html b/doc/html/qaxscriptengine-members.html
index ba1471860..20aad1d1c 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaxscriptengine-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaxscriptengine-members.html
@@ -39,75 +39,75 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
  • ~TQAxScriptEngine()
 
  • addItem()
 
  • asVariant()
-
  • blockSignals()
-
  • checkConnectArgs()
-
  • child()
-
  • childEvent()
-
  • children()
-
  • className()
+
  • blockSignals()
+
  • checkConnectArgs()
+
  • child()
+
  • childEvent()
+
  • children()
+
  • className()
 
  • clear()
-
  • connect()
-
  • connectNotify()
+
  • connect()
+
  • connectNotify()
 
  • control()
-
  • customEvent()
-
  • deleteLater()
-
  • destroyed()
+
  • customEvent()
+
  • deleteLater()
+
  • destroyed()
 
  • disableClassInfo()
 
  • disableEventSink()
 
  • disableMetaObject()
-
  • disconnect()
-
  • disconnectNotify()
-
  • dumpObjectInfo()
-
  • dumpObjectTree()
+
  • disconnect()
+
  • disconnectNotify()
+
  • dumpObjectInfo()
+
  • dumpObjectTree()
 
  • dynamicCall()
-
  • event()
-
  • eventFilter()
+
  • event()
+
  • eventFilter()
 
  • exception()
 
  • generateDocumentation()
 
  • hasIntrospection()
-
  • highPriority()
-
  • inherits()
+
  • highPriority()
+
  • inherits()
 
  • initialize()
 
  • initializeActive()
 
  • initializeLicensed()
 
  • initializeRemote()
-
  • insertChild()
-
  • installEventFilter()
-
  • isA()
+
  • insertChild()
+
  • installEventFilter()
+
  • isA()
 
  • isNull()
 
  • isValid()
-
  • isWidgetType()
-
  • killTimer()
-
  • killTimers()
-
  • metaObject()
-
  • name()
-
  • normalizeSignalSlot()
-
  • objectTrees()
-
  • parent()
-
  • property()
+
  • isWidgetType()
+
  • killTimer()
+
  • killTimers()
+
  • metaObject()
+
  • name()
+
  • normalizeSignalSlot()
+
  • objectTrees()
+
  • parent()
+
  • property()
 
  • propertyBag()
 
  • propertyChanged()
 
  • propertyWritable()
 
  • queryInterface()
-
  • queryList()
+
  • queryList()
 
  • querySubObject()
-
  • removeChild()
-
  • removeEventFilter()
+
  • removeChild()
+
  • removeEventFilter()
 
  • scriptLanguage()
-
  • sender()
+
  • sender()
 
  • setControl()
-
  • setName()
-
  • setProperty()
+
  • setName()
+
  • setProperty()
 
  • setPropertyBag()
 
  • setPropertyWritable()
 
  • setState()
 
  • signal()
-
  • signalsBlocked()
-
  • startTimer()
+
  • signalsBlocked()
+
  • startTimer()
 
  • state()
-
  • timerEvent()
-
  • tr()
-
  • trUtf8()
+
  • timerEvent()
+
  • tr()
+
  • trUtf8()
 
 
 
    
diff --git a/doc/html/qaxscriptengine.html b/doc/html/qaxscriptengine.html
index 93478a2f4..284ae1a8b 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaxscriptengine.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaxscriptengine.html
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
  • long queryInterface ( const TQUuid & uuid, void ** iface ) const
    • 
 
 
    Detailed Description
    
-
     This class is defined in the TQt ActiveTQt Extension, which can be found in the qt/extensions directory. It is not included in the main TQt API.
+
     This class is defined in the TQt ActiveTQt Extension, which can be found in the qt/extensions directory. It is not included in the main TQt API.
 
    
 
 The TQAxScriptEngine class provides a wrapper around a script engine.
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ event sources
 
  • TQAxScriptEngine::Closed - The script has been closed.
 
 
    Member Function Documentation
    
-
    TQAxScriptEngine::TQAxScriptEngine ( const TQString & language, TQAxScript * script )
+
    TQAxScriptEngine::TQAxScriptEngine ( const TQString & language, TQAxScript * script )
 
    
 Constructs a TQAxScriptEngine object interpreting script code in language
 provided by the code in script. This is usually done by the TQAxScript 
@@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ script.
 Destroys the TQAxScriptEngine object, releasing all allocated
 resources.
 
-
    void TQAxScriptEngine::addItem ( const TQString & name )
+
    void TQAxScriptEngine::addItem ( const TQString & name )
 
    
 Registers an item with the script engine. Script code can
 refer to this item using name.
@@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ otherwise returns FALSE.
 
     Returns TRUE if the script engine has been initialized
 correctly; otherwise returns FALSE.
 
-
    long TQAxScriptEngine::queryInterface ( const TQUuid & uuid, void ** iface ) const
+
    long TQAxScriptEngine::queryInterface ( const TQUuid & uuid, void ** iface ) const
 
    
 Requests the interface uuid from the script engine object and
 sets the value of iface to the provided interface, or to 0 if
@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ the requested interface could not be provided.
 
     Returns the result of the QueryInterface implementation of the COM
 object.
 
-
    TQString TQAxScriptEngine::scriptLanguage () const
+
    TQString TQAxScriptEngine::scriptLanguage () const
 
     
 Returns the scripting language, for example "VBScript",
 or "JScript".
diff --git a/doc/html/qaxscriptmanager-members.html b/doc/html/qaxscriptmanager-members.html
index 3fb5d52e6..9d6aba71f 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaxscriptmanager-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaxscriptmanager-members.html
@@ -38,56 +38,56 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
  • TQAxScriptManager()
 
  • ~TQAxScriptManager()
 
  • addObject()
-
  • blockSignals()
+
  • blockSignals()
 
  • call()
-
  • checkConnectArgs()
-
  • child()
-
  • childEvent()
-
  • children()
-
  • className()
-
  • connect()
-
  • connectNotify()
-
  • customEvent()
-
  • deleteLater()
-
  • destroyed()
-
  • disconnect()
-
  • disconnectNotify()
-
  • dumpObjectInfo()
-
  • dumpObjectTree()
+
  • checkConnectArgs()
+
  • child()
+
  • childEvent()
+
  • children()
+
  • className()
+
  • connect()
+
  • connectNotify()
+
  • customEvent()
+
  • deleteLater()
+
  • destroyed()
+
  • disconnect()
+
  • disconnectNotify()
+
  • dumpObjectInfo()
+
  • dumpObjectTree()
 
  • error()
-
  • event()
-
  • eventFilter()
+
  • event()
+
  • eventFilter()
 
  • functions()
-
  • highPriority()
-
  • inherits()
-
  • insertChild()
-
  • installEventFilter()
-
  • isA()
-
  • isWidgetType()
-
  • killTimer()
-
  • killTimers()
+
  • highPriority()
+
  • inherits()
+
  • insertChild()
+
  • installEventFilter()
+
  • isA()
+
  • isWidgetType()
+
  • killTimer()
+
  • killTimers()
 
  • load()
-
  • metaObject()
-
  • name()
-
  • normalizeSignalSlot()
-
  • objectTrees()
-
  • parent()
-
  • property()
-
  • queryList()
+
  • metaObject()
+
  • name()
+
  • normalizeSignalSlot()
+
  • objectTrees()
+
  • parent()
+
  • property()
+
  • queryList()
 
  • registerEngine()
-
  • removeChild()
-
  • removeEventFilter()
+
  • removeChild()
+
  • removeEventFilter()
 
  • script()
 
  • scriptFileFilter()
 
  • scriptNames()
-
  • sender()
-
  • setName()
-
  • setProperty()
-
  • signalsBlocked()
-
  • startTimer()
-
  • timerEvent()
-
  • tr()
-
  • trUtf8()
+
  • sender()
+
  • setName()
+
  • setProperty()
+
  • signalsBlocked()
+
  • startTimer()
+
  • timerEvent()
+
  • tr()
+
  • trUtf8()
 
 
 
    
diff --git a/doc/html/qaxscriptmanager.html b/doc/html/qaxscriptmanager.html
index 028941751..0c4bcb0fa 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaxscriptmanager.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaxscriptmanager.html
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ and script code.
 More...
 
    This class is part of the TQt ActiveTQt Extension.
 
    #include <qaxscript.h>
-
    Inherits TQObject.
+
    Inherits TQObject.
 
    List of all member functions.
 
    Public Members
    
 
 
    Detailed Description
    
-
     This class is defined in the TQt ActiveTQt Extension, which can be found in the qt/extensions directory. It is not included in the main TQt API.
+
     This class is defined in the TQt ActiveTQt Extension, which can be found in the qt/extensions directory. It is not included in the main TQt API.
 
    
 
 The TQAxScriptManager class provides a bridge between application objects
@@ -81,10 +81,10 @@ functions using call().
 compilers.
 
 
    Member Function Documentation
    
-
    TQAxScriptManager::TQAxScriptManager ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    TQAxScriptManager::TQAxScriptManager ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
 
    
 Creates a TQAxScriptManager object. parent and name are passed
-on to the TQObject constructor.
+on to the TQObject constructor.
 
     It is usual to create one TQAxScriptManager for each document in an
 application.
 
@@ -95,22 +95,22 @@ Destroys the objects, releasing all allocated resources.
 
    void TQAxScriptManager::addObject ( TQAxBase * object )
 
    
 Adds object to the manager. Scripts handled by this
-manager can access the object in the code using the object's name property.
+manager can access the object in the code using the object's name property.
 
     You must add all the necessary objects before loading any scripts.
 
-
    void TQAxScriptManager::addObject ( TQObject * object )
+
    void TQAxScriptManager::addObject ( TQObject * object )
 
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 
     Adds a generic COM wrapper for object to the manager. object
 must be exposed as a COM object using the functionality provided
 by the TQAxServer module.. Applications
 using this function you must link against the qaxserver library.
 
-
    TQVariant TQAxScriptManager::call ( const TQString & function, const TQVariant & var1 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var2 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var3 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var4 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var5 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var6 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var7 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var8 = TQVariant ( ) )
+
    TQVariant TQAxScriptManager::call ( const TQString & function, const TQVariant & var1 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var2 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var3 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var4 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var5 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var6 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var7 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var8 = TQVariant ( ) )
 
    
 Calls function, passing the parameters var1, var1, 
 var2, var3, var4, var5, var6, var7 and var8
 as arguments and returns the value returned by the function, or an 
-invalid TQVariant if the function does not return a value or when 
+invalid TQVariant if the function does not return a value or when 
 the function call failed. The call returns when the script's
 execution has finished.
 
     In most script engines the only supported parameter type is "const
@@ -124,9 +124,9 @@ TQVariant&", for example, to call a JavaScript function
  
 use
 
    -    TQValueList args;
+    TQValueList args;
     args << 5;
-    script->call("setNumber(const TQVariant&)", args);
+    script->call("setNumber(const TQVariant&)", args);
     
    
  
 As with dynamicCall the 
@@ -142,12 +142,12 @@ using TQAxScript::call() on the respective  Note that calling this function can be significantely slower than
 using call() on the respective TQAxScript directly.
 
-
    TQVariant TQAxScriptManager::call ( const TQString & function, TQValueList<TQVariant> & arguments )
+
    TQVariant TQAxScriptManager::call ( const TQString & function, TQValueList<TQVariant> & arguments )
 
     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 
     Calls function passing arguments as parameters, and returns
 the result. Returns when the script's execution has finished.
 
-
    void TQAxScriptManager::error ( TQAxScript * script, int code, const TQString & description, int sourcePosition, const TQString & sourceText ) [signal]
+
    void TQAxScriptManager::error ( TQAxScript * script, int code, const TQString & description, int sourcePosition, const TQString & sourceText ) [signal]
 
    
 
 
     This signal is emitted when an execution error occured while
@@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ running script.
 
     code, description, sourcePosition and sourceText
 contain information about the execution error.
 
-
    TQStringList TQAxScriptManager::functions ( TQAxScript::FunctionFlags flags = TQAxScript::FunctionNames ) const
+
    TQStringList TQAxScriptManager::functions ( TQAxScript::FunctionFlags flags = TQAxScript::FunctionNames ) const
 
    
 Returns a list with all the functions that are available.
 Functions provided by script engines that don't support
@@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ introspection are not included in the list.
 The functions are either provided with full prototypes or 
 only as names, depending on the value of flags.
 
-
    TQAxScript * TQAxScriptManager::load ( const TQString & code, const TQString & name, const TQString & language )
+
    TQAxScript * TQAxScriptManager::load ( const TQString & code, const TQString & name, const TQString & language )
 
    
 Loads the script source code using the script engine for language. The script can later be referred to using its name
 which should not be empty.
@@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ still be available by calling its script
 directly.
 
     
    See also addObject(), scriptNames(), and functions().
 
-
    TQAxScript * TQAxScriptManager::load ( const TQString & file, const TQString & name )
+
    TQAxScript * TQAxScriptManager::load ( const TQString & file, const TQString & name )
 
    
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 
     Loads the source code from the file. The script can later be
@@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ default ".js" files are interpreted as JScript files, and ".vbs"
 and ".dsm" files are interpreted as VBScript. Additional script
 engines can be registered using registerEngine().
 
-
    bool TQAxScriptManager::registerEngine ( const TQString & name, const TQString & extension, const TQString & code = TQString ( ) ) [static]
+
    bool TQAxScriptManager::registerEngine ( const TQString & name, const TQString & extension, const TQString & code = TQString ( ) ) [static]
 
    
 Registers the script engine called name and returns TRUE if the
 engine was found; otherwise does nothing and returns FALSE.
@@ -201,19 +201,19 @@ engine was found; otherwise does nothing and returns FALSE.
 extension, or when loading source code that contains the string
 code.
 
-
    TQAxScript * TQAxScriptManager::script ( const TQString & name ) const
+
    TQAxScript * TQAxScriptManager::script ( const TQString & name ) const
 
    
 Returns the script called name.
 
     You can use the returned pointer to call functions directly 
 through TQAxScript::call(), to access the script engine directly, or
 to delete and thus unload the script.
 
-
    TQString TQAxScriptManager::scriptFileFilter () [static]
+
    TQString TQAxScriptManager::scriptFileFilter () [static]
 
    
 Returns a file filter listing all the supported script languages.
-This filter string is convenient for use with TQFileDialog.
+This filter string is convenient for use with TQFileDialog.
 
-
    TQStringList TQAxScriptManager::scriptNames () const
+
    TQStringList TQAxScriptManager::scriptNames () const
 
    
 Returns a list with the names of all the scripts.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qaxserver-demo-multiple.html b/doc/html/qaxserver-demo-multiple.html
index de91e9239..435171244 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaxserver-demo-multiple.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaxserver-demo-multiple.html
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ function setWidth( form )
 
 
 
    
-This is one TQWidget subclass:
    
+This is one TQWidget subclass:
    
 
 [Object not available! Did you forget to build and register the server?]
diff --git a/doc/html/qaxserver-example-hierarchy.html b/doc/html/qaxserver-example-hierarchy.html
index 1bede5f03..1a1ef5f78 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaxserver-example-hierarchy.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaxserver-example-hierarchy.html
@@ -33,22 +33,22 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
  
 
-The ActiveX control in this example is a TQWidget
+The ActiveX control in this example is a TQWidget
 subclass with child widgets that are accessible as sub types.
 
     
 
-
        class TQParentWidget : public TQWidget
+
        class TQParentWidget : public TQWidget
     {
         Q_OBJECT
     public:
-        TQParentWidget( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0, WFlags f = 0 );
+        TQParentWidget( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0, WFlags f = 0 );
 
-        TQSize sizeHint() const;
+        TQSize sizeHint() const;
 
     public slots:
-        void createSubWidget( const TQString &name );
+        void createSubWidget( const TQString &name );
 
-        TQSubWidget *subWidget( const TQString &name );
+        TQSubWidget *subWidget( const TQString &name );
 
     private:
         TQVBoxLayout *vbox;
@@ -57,64 +57,64 @@ subclass with child widgets that are accessible as sub types.
 with a name, and to return a pointer to a named widget.
 
     
 
-
        TQParentWidget::TQParentWidget( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name, f )
+
        TQParentWidget::TQParentWidget( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f )
+    : TQWidget( parent, name, f )
     {
         vbox = new TQVBoxLayout( this );
-        vbox->setAutoAdd( TRUE );
+        vbox->setAutoAdd( TRUE );
     }
 
    The constructor of TQParentWidget creates a vertical box layout.
 New child widgets are automatically added to the layout.
-
     
        void TQParentWidget::createSubWidget( const TQString &name )
+
     
        void TQParentWidget::createSubWidget( const TQString &name )
     {
         TQSubWidget *sw = new TQSubWidget( this, name );
         sw->setLabel( name );
-        sw->show();
+        sw->show();
     }
 
    The createSubWidget slot creates a new TQSubWidget with
 the name provided in the parameter, and sets the label to that
 name. The widget is also shown explicitly.
-
     
        TQSubWidget *TQParentWidget::subWidget( const TQString &name )
+
     
        TQSubWidget *TQParentWidget::subWidget( const TQString &name )
     {
-        return (TQSubWidget*)child( name, "TQSubWidget" );
+        return (TQSubWidget*)child( name, "TQSubWidget" );
     }
-
    The subWidget slot uses the TQObject::child() function and
+
    The subWidget slot uses the TQObject::child() function and
 returns the first child of type TQSubWidget that has the requested
 name.
 
     
 
-
        class TQSubWidget : public TQWidget
+
        class TQSubWidget : public TQWidget
     {
         Q_OBJECT
         Q_PROPERTY( TQString label READ label WRITE setLabel )
     public:
-        TQSubWidget( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0, WFlags f = 0 );
+        TQSubWidget( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0, WFlags f = 0 );
 
-        void setLabel( const TQString &text );
-        TQString label() const;
+        void setLabel( const TQString &text );
+        TQString label() const;
 
-        TQSize sizeHint() const;
+        TQSize sizeHint() const;
 
     protected:
         void paintEvent( TQPaintEvent *e );
 
     private:
-        TQString lbl;
+        TQString lbl;
     };
 
    The TQSubWidget class has a single string-property label,
 and implements the paintEvent to draw the label.
 
     
 
-
        TQSubWidget::TQSubWidget( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name, f )
+
        TQSubWidget::TQSubWidget( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f )
+    : TQWidget( parent, name, f )
     {
     }
 
-    void TQSubWidget::setLabel( const TQString &text )
+    void TQSubWidget::setLabel( const TQString &text )
     {
         lbl = text;
-        setName( text );
-        update();
+        setName( text );
+        update();
     }
 
     TQString TQSubWidget::label() const
@@ -122,17 +122,17 @@ and implements the paintEvent to draw the label.
         return lbl;
     }
 
-    TQSize TQSubWidget::sizeHint() const
+    TQSize TQSubWidget::sizeHint() const
     {
-        TQFontMetrics fm( font() );
-        return TQSize( fm.width(lbl), fm.height() );
+        TQFontMetrics fm( font() );
+        return TQSize( fm.width(lbl), fm.height() );
     }
 
-    void TQSubWidget::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
+    void TQSubWidget::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
     {
-        TQPainter painter(this);
-        painter.setPen( colorGroup().text() );
-        painter.drawText( rect(), AlignCenter, lbl );
+        TQPainter painter(this);
+        painter.setPen( colorGroup().text() );
+        painter.drawText( rect(), AlignCenter, lbl );
     }
 
    The implementation of the TQSubWidget class is self-explanatory.
 
     
@@ -140,12 +140,12 @@ and implements the paintEvent to draw the label.
 
        class ActiveTQtFactory : public TQAxFactory
     {
     public:
-        ActiveTQtFactory( const TQUuid &lib, const TQUuid &app )
+        ActiveTQtFactory( const TQUuid &lib, const TQUuid &app )
             : TQAxFactory( lib, app )
         {}
-        TQStringList featureList() const
+        TQStringList featureList() const
         {
-            TQStringList list;
+            TQStringList list;
             list << "TQParentWidget";
             list << "TQSubWidget";
             return list;
@@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ and implements the paintEvent to draw the label.
 
    The ActiveTQtFactory class implements a TQAxFactory. It returns
 the class names of all supported types, TQParentWidget and
 TQSubWidget, from the featureList() reimplementation.
-
     
            TQWidget *create( const TQString &key, TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+
     
            TQWidget *create( const TQString &key, TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
         {
             if ( key == "TQParentWidget" )
                 return new TQParentWidget( parent, name );
@@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ the class names of all supported types, TQParentWidget and
 
    The factory can however only create objects of the TQParentWidget
 type directly - objects of subtypes can only be created through the
 interface of TQParentWidget objects.
-
     
            TQUuid classID( const TQString &key ) const
+
     
            TQUuid classID( const TQString &key ) const
         {
             if ( key == "TQParentWidget" )
                 return TQUuid( "{d574a747-8016-46db-a07c-b2b4854ee75c}" );
@@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ interface of TQParentWidget objects.
 
             return TQUuid();
         }
-        TQUuid interfaceID( const TQString &key ) const
+        TQUuid interfaceID( const TQString &key ) const
         {
             if ( key == "TQParentWidget" )
                 return TQUuid( "{4a30719d-d9c2-4659-9d16-67378209f822}" );
@@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ interface of TQParentWidget objects.
 
             return TQUuid();
         }
-        TQUuid eventsID( const TQString &key ) const
+        TQUuid eventsID( const TQString &key ) const
         {
             if ( key == "TQParentWidget" )
                 return TQUuid( "{aac9f855-c3dc-4cae-b747-c77f4d509f4c}" );
@@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ interface of TQParentWidget objects.
         }
 
    COM however requires the IDs for the interfaces of the sub types as
 well to be able to marshal calls correctly.
-
     
            TQString exposeToSuperClass( const TQString &key ) const
+
     
            TQString exposeToSuperClass( const TQString &key ) const
         {
             if ( key == "TQSubWidget" )
                 return key;
@@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ well to be able to marshal calls correctly.
         }
     };
 
    Objects of the TQSubWidget type should not expose the full 
-functionality of e.g. TQWidget. Only those properties and slots
+functionality of e.g. TQWidget. Only those properties and slots
 explicitly declared in the type are accessible.
 
     
        TQAXFACTORY_EXPORT( ActiveTQtFactory, "{9e626211-be62-4d18-9483-9419358fbb03}", "{75c276de-1df5-451f-a004-e4fa1a587df1}" )
 
    The factory is then exported using the TQAXFACTORY_EXPORT
diff --git a/doc/html/qaxserver-example-menus.html b/doc/html/qaxserver-example-menus.html
index b2b4a1cac..555001956 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaxserver-example-menus.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaxserver-example-menus.html
@@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
  
 
 
    This documentation is under development and is subject to change.
-
     This example demonstrates the use of TQMenuBar and TQStatusBar in
-a TQMainWindow to implement an in-place active control.
+
     This example demonstrates the use of TQMenuBar and TQStatusBar in
+a TQMainWindow to implement an in-place active control.
 
     To build the example you must first build the TQAxServer library. Then run qmake and your make tool in 
 examples/menus.
 
     
    
diff --git a/doc/html/qaxserver-example-multiple.html b/doc/html/qaxserver-example-multiple.html
index 0754c6279..1c96259e3 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaxserver-example-multiple.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaxserver-example-multiple.html
@@ -33,15 +33,15 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
  
 
-The ActiveX controls in this example are simple TQWidget
+The ActiveX controls in this example are simple TQWidget
 subclasses reimplementing the paintEvent() method. The classes use
 the Q_CLASSINFO macro to 
 
     The example demonstrates the use of the Q_CLASSINFO macro to set 
-ActiveTQt-specific attributes for TQObject sub classes, and the use of
+ActiveTQt-specific attributes for TQObject sub classes, and the use of
 the TQAXFACTORY_BEGIN, TQAXCLASS and TQAXFACTORY_END macros.
 
     
 
-
        class TQAxWidget1 : public TQWidget
+
        class TQAxWidget1 : public TQWidget
     {
         Q_OBJECT
         Q_CLASSINFO("ClassID", "{1D9928BD-4453-4bdd-903D-E525ED17FDE5}")
@@ -51,16 +51,16 @@ the TQAXFACTORY_BEGIN, TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
-            : TQWidget( parent, name, f ), fill_color( red )
+        TQAxWidget1( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
+            : TQWidget( parent, name, f ), fill_color( red )
         {
         }
 
-        TQColor fillColor() const
+        TQColor fillColor() const
         {
             return fill_color;
         }
-        void setFillColor( const TQColor &fc )
+        void setFillColor( const TQColor &fc )
         {
             fill_color = fc;
             repaint();
@@ -69,20 +69,20 @@ Q_CLASSINFO macro.
     protected:
         void paintEvent( TQPaintEvent *e )
         {
-            TQPainter paint( this );
-            TQRect r = rect();
-            r.addCoords( 10, 10, -10, -10 );
-            paint.fillRect( r, fill_color );
+            TQPainter paint( this );
+            TQRect r = rect();
+            r.addCoords( 10, 10, -10, -10 );
+            paint.fillRect( r, fill_color );
         }
 
     private:
-        TQColor fill_color;
+        TQColor fill_color;
     };
 
    The control draws a filled rectangle. The fill color is exposed as a 
 property using the Q_PROPERTY macro.
 
     
 
-
        class TQAxWidget2 : public TQWidget
+
        class TQAxWidget2 : public TQWidget
     {
         Q_OBJECT
         Q_CLASSINFO("ClassID", "{58139D56-6BE9-4b17-937D-1B1EDEDD5B71}")
@@ -92,12 +92,12 @@ property using the Q_PROPERTY macro.
         Q_CLASSINFO("StockEvents", "yes")
 
    The declaration of the second control class uses the Q_CLASSINFO macro
 to set the COM identifiers as well as additional COM attributes for the
-class. Objects of that class will not expose the TQWidget API, and provide
+class. Objects of that class will not expose the TQWidget API, and provide
 the ActiveX stock events (ie. Click, KeyDown etc.).
 
            Q_PROPERTY( int lineWidth READ lineWidth WRITE setLineWidth )
     public:
-        TQAxWidget2( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
-            : TQWidget( parent, name, f ), line_width( 1 )
+        TQAxWidget2( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
+            : TQWidget( parent, name, f ), line_width( 1 )
         {
         }
 
@@ -114,14 +114,14 @@ the ActiveX stock events (ie. Click, KeyDown etc.).
     protected:
         void paintEvent( TQPaintEvent *e )
         {
-            TQPainter paint( this );
-            TQPen pen = paint.pen();
-            pen.setWidth( line_width );
-            paint.setPen( pen );
-
-            TQRect r = rect();
-            r.addCoords( 10, 10, -10, -10 );
-            paint.drawEllipse( r );
+            TQPainter paint( this );
+            TQPen pen = paint.pen();
+            pen.setWidth( line_width );
+            paint.setPen( pen );
+
+            TQRect r = rect();
+            r.addCoords( 10, 10, -10, -10 );
+            paint.drawEllipse( r );
         }
 
     private:
diff --git a/doc/html/qaxserver-example-opengl.html b/doc/html/qaxserver-example-opengl.html
index 82c694580..1a44d4392 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaxserver-example-opengl.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaxserver-example-opengl.html
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ control.
                         "{2c3c183a-eeda-41a4-896e-3d9c12c3577d}",
                         "{83e16271-6480-45d5-aaf1-3f40b7661ae4}"
                       )
-
    The implementation of main initializes the TQApplication object,
+
    The implementation of main initializes the TQApplication object,
 and uses TQAxFactory::isServer() to determine whether or not it is
 appropriate to create and show the application interface.
 
        /*
@@ -65,22 +65,22 @@ appropriate to create and show the application interface.
 
     int main( int argc, char **argv )
     {
-        TQApplication::setColorSpec( TQApplication::CustomColor );
-        TQApplication a(argc,argv);
+        TQApplication::setColorSpec( TQApplication::CustomColor );
+        TQApplication a(argc,argv);
 
         if ( !TQGLFormat::hasOpenGL() ) {
-            qWarning( "This system has no OpenGL support. Exiting." );
+            qWarning( "This system has no OpenGL support. Exiting." );
             return -1;
         }
 
         if ( !TQAxFactory::isServer() ) {
             GLObjectWindow w;
-            w.resize( 400, 350 );
-            a.setMainWidget( &w );
-            w.show();
-            return a.exec();
+            w.resize( 400, 350 );
+            a.setMainWidget( &w );
+            w.show();
+            return a.exec();
         }
-        return a.exec();
+        return a.exec();
     }
 
    
 
     
@@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ to render OpenGL, and from TQAxBindable.
 to return the pointer to a TQAxAggregated object.
 
        public:
 
-        GLBox( TQWidget* parent, const char* name );
+        GLBox( TQWidget* parent, const char* name );
         ~GLBox();
 
         TQAxAggregated *createAggregate();
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ interface.
 function to support the IObjectSafety interface.
 
            ObjectSafetyImpl() {}
 
-        long queryInterface( const TQUuid &iid, void **iface )
+        long queryInterface( const TQUuid &iid, void **iface )
         {
             *iface = 0;
             if ( iid == IID_IObjectSafety )
diff --git a/doc/html/qaxserver-example-simple.html b/doc/html/qaxserver-example-simple.html
index 7a4caf05d..4917179ba 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaxserver-example-simple.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaxserver-example-simple.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
  
 
-The ActiveX control in this example is a layouted TQWidget
-with a TQSlider, a TQLCDNumber and a TQLineEdit.
+The ActiveX control in this example is a layouted TQWidget
+with a TQSlider, a TQLCDNumber and a TQLineEdit.
 It provides a signal/slot/property interface to change the
 values of the slider and the line edit, and to get notified
 of any property changes.
@@ -44,52 +44,52 @@ and TQAxBindable::propertyChanged
 
     
 
 
     The TQt implementation of the ActiveX for this example is
-
        class TQSimpleAX : public TQWidget, public TQAxBindable
+
        class TQSimpleAX : public TQWidget, public TQAxBindable
     {
         Q_OBJECT
         Q_PROPERTY( TQString text READ text WRITE setText )
         Q_PROPERTY( int value READ value WRITE setValue )
     public:
-        TQSimpleAX( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 )
-        : TQWidget( parent, name )
+        TQSimpleAX( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 )
+        : TQWidget( parent, name )
         {
             TQVBoxLayout *vbox = new TQVBoxLayout( this );
 
-            slider = new TQSlider( 0, 100, 1, 0, TQSlider::Horizontal, this );
-            LCD = new TQLCDNumber( 3, this );
-            edit = new TQLineEdit( this );
+            slider = new TQSlider( 0, 100, 1, 0, TQSlider::Horizontal, this );
+            LCD = new TQLCDNumber( 3, this );
+            edit = new TQLineEdit( this );
 
-            connect( slider, SIGNAL( valueChanged( int ) ), this, SLOT( setValue(int) ) );
-            connect( edit, SIGNAL(textChanged(const TQString&)), this, SLOT(setText(const TQString&)) );
+            connect( slider, SIGNAL( valueChanged( int ) ), this, SLOT( setValue(int) ) );
+            connect( edit, SIGNAL(textChanged(const TQString&)), this, SLOT(setText(const TQString&)) );
 
             vbox->addWidget( slider );
             vbox->addWidget( LCD );
             vbox->addWidget( edit );
         }
 
-        TQString text() const
+        TQString text() const
         {
-            return edit->text();
+            return edit->text();
         }
         int value() const
         {
-            return slider->value();
+            return slider->value();
         }
 
     signals:
         void someSignal();
         void valueChanged(int);
-        void textChanged(const TQString&);
+        void textChanged(const TQString&);
 
     public slots:
-        void setText( const TQString &string )
+        void setText( const TQString &string )
         {
             if ( !requestPropertyChange( "text" ) )
                 return;
 
-            edit->blockSignals( TRUE );
-            edit->setText( string );
-            edit->blockSignals( FALSE );
+            edit->blockSignals( TRUE );
+            edit->setText( string );
+            edit->blockSignals( FALSE );
             emit someSignal();
             emit textChanged( string );
 
@@ -97,26 +97,26 @@ and TQAxBindable::propertyChanged
         }
         void about()
         {
-            TQMessageBox::information( this, "About TQSimpleAX", "This is a TQt widget, and this slot has been\n"
+            TQMessageBox::information( this, "About TQSimpleAX", "This is a TQt widget, and this slot has been\n"
                                                               "called through ActiveX/OLE automation!" );
         }
         void setValue( int i )
         {
             if ( !requestPropertyChange( "value" ) )
                 return;
-            slider->blockSignals( TRUE );
-            slider->setValue( i );
-            slider->blockSignals( FALSE );
-            LCD->display( i );
+            slider->blockSignals( TRUE );
+            slider->setValue( i );
+            slider->blockSignals( FALSE );
+            LCD->display( i );
             emit valueChanged( i );
 
             propertyChanged( "value" );
         }
 
     private:
-        TQSlider *slider;
-        TQLCDNumber *LCD;
-        TQLineEdit *edit;
+        TQSlider *slider;
+        TQLCDNumber *LCD;
+        TQLineEdit *edit;
     };
 
    
 
     The control is exported using the default TQAxFactory
@@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ WebBrowser to support ActiveX controls, and scripting to be enabled.
     [Object not available! Did you forget to build and register the server?]
     </object>
 
    
-
     A simple HTML button is connected to the ActiveTQt's about() slot.
+
     A simple HTML button is connected to the ActiveTQt's about() slot.
 
        <FORM>
         <INPUT TYPE="BUTTON" VALUE="About..." onClick="TQSimpleAX.about()">
     </FORM>
diff --git a/doc/html/qaxserver-example-tetrax.html b/doc/html/qaxserver-example-tetrax.html
index 4f8418d0a..d0e938285 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaxserver-example-tetrax.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaxserver-example-tetrax.html
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ the five unique IDs required by COM to instantiate and communicate with
 the server.
 
        #include "qtetrax.h"
     #include "qdragapp.h"
-    #include "qfont.h"
+    #include "ntqfont.h"
 
     #include <qaxfactory.h>
 
@@ -61,24 +61,24 @@ the server.
                 "{769F4820-9F28-490f-BA50-5545BD381DCB}",
                 "{5753B1A8-53B9-4abe-8690-6F14EC5CA8D0}",
                 "{DE2F7CE3-CFA7-4938-A9FC-867E2FEB63BA}" )
-
    The main entry point method instantiates a TQApplication object, and
+
    The main entry point method instantiates a TQApplication object, and
 creates the GUI only if the program is not running as an ActiveX server (ie.
 the program has been started by the user, not by COM). 
 
        int main( int argc, char **argv )
     {
-        TQApplication::setColorSpec( TQApplication::CustomColor );
+        TQApplication::setColorSpec( TQApplication::CustomColor );
         TQDragApplication a(argc,argv);
 
         TQTetrax *tetrax = 0;
         if ( !TQAxFactory::isServer() ) {
             tetrax = new TQTetrax;
-            tetrax->setCaption("Tetrax");
-            a.setMainWidget(tetrax);
-            tetrax->setCaption("TQt Example - Tetrax");
-            tetrax->show();
+            tetrax->setCaption("Tetrax");
+            a.setMainWidget(tetrax);
+            tetrax->setCaption("TQt Example - Tetrax");
+            tetrax->show();
         }
 
    The server enters the application event loop, and destroys the GUI before exiting.
-
            int res = a.exec();
+
            int res = a.exec();
         delete tetrax;
         return res;
     }
diff --git a/doc/html/qaxserver-example-wrapper.html b/doc/html/qaxserver-example-wrapper.html
index f74c80437..b0a03f7a5 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaxserver-example-wrapper.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaxserver-example-wrapper.html
@@ -34,9 +34,9 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
  
 
 The ActiveX controls in this example are the standard button
-classes TQPushButton, TQCheckBox and TQRadioButton as provided by 
+classes TQPushButton, TQCheckBox and TQRadioButton as provided by 
 TQt.
-
     It demonstrates how to export existing TQWidget classes as ActiveX
+
     It demonstrates how to export existing TQWidget classes as ActiveX
 controls, and the use of TQAxFactory together with the TQAXFACTORY_EXPORT
 macro.
 
     
@@ -44,12 +44,12 @@ macro.
 
        class ActiveTQtFactory : public TQAxFactory
     {
     public:
-        ActiveTQtFactory( const TQUuid &lib, const TQUuid &app )
+        ActiveTQtFactory( const TQUuid &lib, const TQUuid &app )
             : TQAxFactory( lib, app )
         {}
-        TQStringList featureList() const
+        TQStringList featureList() const
         {
-            TQStringList list;
+            TQStringList list;
             list << "TQButton";
             list << "TQCheckBox";
             list << "TQRadioButton";
@@ -57,25 +57,25 @@ macro.
             list << "TQToolButton";
             return list;
         }
-        TQWidget *create( const TQString &key, TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
+        TQWidget *create( const TQString &key, TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
         {
             if ( key == "TQButton" )
-                return new TQButton( parent, name );
+                return new TQButton( parent, name );
             if ( key == "TQCheckBox" )
-                return new TQCheckBox( parent, name );
+                return new TQCheckBox( parent, name );
             if ( key == "TQRadioButton" )
-                return new TQRadioButton( parent, name );
+                return new TQRadioButton( parent, name );
             if ( key == "TQPushButton" )
-                return new TQPushButton( parent, name );
+                return new TQPushButton( parent, name );
             if ( key == "TQToolButton" ) {
-                TQToolButton *tb = new TQToolButton( parent, name );
-                tb->setPixmap( TQPixmap(fileopen) );
+                TQToolButton *tb = new TQToolButton( parent, name );
+                tb->setPixmap( TQPixmap(fileopen) );
                 return tb;
             }
 
             return 0;
         }
-        TQMetaObject *metaObject( const TQString &key ) const
+        TQMetaObject *metaObject( const TQString &key ) const
         {
             if ( key == "TQButton" )
                 return TQButton::staticMetaObject();
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ macro.
 
             return 0;
         }
-        TQUuid classID( const TQString &key ) const
+        TQUuid classID( const TQString &key ) const
         {
             if ( key == "TQButton" )
                 return "{23F5012A-7333-43D3-BCA8-836AABC61B4A}";
@@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ macro.
 
             return TQUuid();
         }
-        TQUuid interfaceID( const TQString &key ) const
+        TQUuid interfaceID( const TQString &key ) const
         {
             if ( key == "TQButton" )
                 return "{6DA689FB-928F-423C-8632-678C3D3606DB}";
@@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ macro.
 
             return TQUuid();
         }
-        TQUuid eventsID( const TQString &key ) const
+        TQUuid eventsID( const TQString &key ) const
         {
             if ( key == "TQButton" )
                 return "{73A5D03F-8ADE-4D84-9AE0-A93B4F85A130}";
diff --git a/doc/html/qaxserver.html b/doc/html/qaxserver.html
index ad20e4c48..514651198 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaxserver.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaxserver.html
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
     The TQAxServer module provides a static library implementing the
 functions required to turn a standard TQt binary into an ActiveX
 control server. 
-
     This module is part of the ActiveTQt
+
     This module is part of the ActiveTQt
     framework. (To incorporate ActiveX controls in a TQt
 application see the TQAxContainer
     module.) 
@@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ implement a custom factory that doesn't require one.
 macro, the TQAxFactory subclass had no appropriate constructor.
 Provide a public class constructor like
 
    -    MyFactory( const TQUuid &, const TQUuid & );
+    MyFactory( const TQUuid &, const TQUuid & );
     
    
  
 for your factory class.
@@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ manager to kill the process (e.g. when a client doesn't release
 the controls properly).
 
     
     Postprocessing and runtime errors
 
    
-
     The ActiveTQt build system performs four commands after the linking
+
     The ActiveTQt build system performs four commands after the linking
 of the binary to make it into an ActiveX server.
 
     
      
 
    •  Call the server to dump the IDL for the controls
@@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ of the binary to make it into an ActiveX server.
 
    
 
     For this to work the server has to meet some requirements:
 
     
      
-
    •  All controls exposed can be created with nothing but a TQApplication
+
    •  All controls exposed can be created with nothing but a TQApplication
 instance being present
 
    •  The initial linking of the server includes a temporary type 
 library resource
@@ -376,12 +376,12 @@ will use the existing process for the next client trying to create
 an ActiveX control.
 
       
       Implementing Controls
 
      
-
       To implement an ActiveX control with TQt, create a subclass of TQWidget
+
       To implement an ActiveX control with TQt, create a subclass of TQWidget
 or any existing TQWidget subclass:
 
       
      -    #include <qwidget.h>
+    #include <ntqwidget.h>
 
-    class MyActiveX : public TQWidget
+    class MyActiveX : public TQWidget
     {
         Q_OBJECT
     
      
@@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ and functions, signals and slots like any normal TQWidget.
 (1) 
 
       
           public:
-        MyActiveX( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 )
+        MyActiveX( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 )
         ...
         
         int value() const;
@@ -502,13 +502,13 @@ slots are:
 
    		• bool&
 [in, out] VARIANT_BOOL*
 
    TQString, const TQString&
+TQString, const TQString&
 [in] BSTR
 
    
 TQString&
 [in, out] BSTR*
 
    TQCString, const TQCString&
+TQCString, const TQCString&
 [in] BSTR
 
    
 TQString&
@@ -532,7 +532,7 @@ slots are:
 double&
 [in, out] double*
 
    TQColor, const TQColor&
+TQColor, const TQColor&
 [in] OLE_COLOR
 
    
 TQColor&
@@ -544,31 +544,31 @@ slots are:
 TQDate&
 [in, out] DATE*
 
    TQDateTime, const TQDateTime&
+TQDateTime, const TQDateTime&
 [in] DATE
 
    
 TQDateTime&
 [in, out] DATE*
 
    TQFont, const TQFont&
+TQFont, const TQFont&
 [in] IFontDisp*
 
    
 TQFont&
 [in, out] IFontDisp**
 
    TQPixmap, const TQPixmap&
+TQPixmap, const TQPixmap&
 [in] IPictureDisp*
 
    
 TQPixmap&
 [in, out] IPictureDisp**
 
    TQValueList<TQVariant>, const TQValueList<TQVariant>&
+TQValueList<TQVariant>, const TQValueList<TQVariant>&
 [in] SAFEARRAY(VARIANT)
 
    
 TQValueList<TQVariant>&
 [in, out] SAFEARRAY(VARIANT)*
 
    TQStringList, const TQStringList&
+TQStringList, const TQStringList&
 [in] SAFEARRAY(BSTR)
 
    
 TQStringList&
@@ -585,13 +585,13 @@ slots are:
 
    
 TQRect&
 (3) 
-[in, out] struct TQRect (user defined)
+[in, out] struct TQRect (user defined)
 
    
 TQSize&
-[in, out] struct TQSize (user defined)
+[in, out] struct TQSize (user defined)
 
    
 TQPoint&
-[in, out] struct TQPoint (user defined)
+[in, out] struct TQPoint (user defined)
 
    
 
     Also supported are exported enums and sets (see Q_ENUMS and Q_SETS).
 The in-parameter types are also supported as return values.
@@ -602,7 +602,7 @@ data types are ignored by the TQActiveX framework.
 
     COM objects can have multiple sub-objects that can represent a sub element
 of the COM object. A COM object representing a multi-document spread sheet 
 application can for example provide one sub-object for each spread sheet.
-
     Any TQObject subclass can be used as the type for a sub object in ActiveX. The
+
     Any TQObject subclass can be used as the type for a sub object in ActiveX. The
 TQAxFactory implementation (see below) needs to return the classname of the
 sub type as one key in the featureList() implementation, as well as the IDs 
 for the COM class, the interface and event interface of that type. Then the
@@ -613,10 +613,10 @@ type can be used as e.g. the return value or paramter of a slot.
 inheritance from the TQAxBindable class:
 
     
     
    -    #include <qwidget.h>
+    #include <ntqwidget.h>
     #include <qaxbindable.h>
 
-    class MyActiveX : public TQWidget, public TQAxBindable
+    class MyActiveX : public TQWidget, public TQAxBindable
     {
         Q_OBJECT
     
    
@@ -654,7 +654,7 @@ the ActiveX control on the target system:
 
     The TQAxFactory class documentation explains 
 how to use this macro, and how to implement and use custom factories.
 
     For out-of-process executable servers you can implement a main()
-function to instantiate a TQApplication object and enter the event
+function to instantiate a TQApplication object and enter the event
 loop just like any normal TQt application. By default the
 application will start as a standard TQt application, but if you
 pass -activex on the command line it will start as an ActiveX
@@ -662,7 +662,7 @@ server. Use TQAxFactory::isServer() to cr
 application interface, or to prevent a stand-alone execution:
 
     
     
    -    #include <qapplication.h>
+    #include <ntqapplication.h>
     #include <qaxfactory.h>
 
     int main( int argc, char **argv )
@@ -815,13 +815,13 @@ following client applications.
 
 
     By default all ActiveX controls expose not only their own methods
 and properties to ActiveX clients, but also those of all super
-classes, including TQWidget.
+classes, including TQWidget.
 
     This can be controlled by reimplementing TQAxFactory's
 exposeToSuperClass() function. Reimplement the function to return
 the last (furthest up the inheritance hierarchy) super class that
 should be exposed:
 
     
    -    TQString MyFactory::exposeToSuperClass( const TQString &key ) const
+    TQString MyFactory::exposeToSuperClass( const TQString &key ) const
     {
         if ( key == "SmallActiveX" )
             return key;
@@ -912,7 +912,7 @@ own API, and is available in the "Insert Objects" dialog of Microsoft
 Office applications.
 
     
     
    -    class MyActiveX : public TQWidget
+    class MyActiveX : public TQWidget
     {
         Q_OBJECT
         Q_CLASSINFO("Version", "2.0")
@@ -943,7 +943,7 @@ control is supposed to run needs to be licensed.
 macro.
 
     
    -    class MyLicensedControl : public TQWidget
+    class MyLicensedControl : public TQWidget
     {
         Q_OBJECT
         Q_CLASSINFO("LicenseKey", "<key string>")
@@ -974,7 +974,7 @@ to subclass additional COM interface classes.
     public:
         AxImpl() {}
 
-        long queryInterface( const TQUuid &iid, void **iface );
+        long queryInterface( const TQUuid &iid, void **iface );
 
         // IUnknown
         TQAXAGG_IUNKNOWN
@@ -987,7 +987,7 @@ to subclass additional COM interface classes.
 
     Reimplement the queryInterface() function to support the additional 
 COM interfaces.
 
     
    -    long AxImpl::queryInterface( const TQUuid &iid, void **iface )
+    long AxImpl::queryInterface( const TQUuid &iid, void **iface )
     {
         *iface = 0;
         if ( iid == IID_ISomeCOMInterface )
@@ -1015,12 +1015,12 @@ interface pointer returned by the controllingUnknown() function, e.g.
 Do not support the IUnknown interface itself in your queryInterface() 
 implementation.
 
     Implement the methods of the COM interfaces, and use TQAxAggregated::Object()
-if you need to make calls to the TQObject subclass implementing the control.
+if you need to make calls to the TQObject subclass implementing the control.
 
     In your TQAxBindable subclass, implement createAggregate() to return
 a new object of the TQAxAggregated subclass.
 
     
     
    -    class MyActiveX : public TQWidget,                       
+    class MyActiveX : public TQWidget,                       
                       public TQAxBindable
     {
     	Q_OBJECT
@@ -1046,7 +1046,7 @@ your implementation of TQAxFactory::create.
  Back... 
  • 
 
 COM cannot marshal IPictureDisp accross process boundaries,
-so TQPixmap properties cannot be called for out-of-process servers. You
+so TQPixmap properties cannot be called for out-of-process servers. You
 can however marshal the image data via e.g. temporary files. See the
 Microsoft 
 KB article 
@@ -1055,7 +1055,7 @@ Microsoft
 
 OLE needs to marshal user defined types by reference (ByRef), and cannot 
 marshal them by value (ByVal). This is why const-references and object
-parameters are not supported for TQRect, TQSize and TQPoint. Also note that
+parameters are not supported for TQRect, TQSize and TQPoint. Also note that
 servers with this datatype require Windows 98 or DCOM 1.2 to be installed.
  Back... 
  • 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qaxwidget-h.html b/doc/html/qaxwidget-h.html
index 63f1d6012..b6fc0135d 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaxwidget-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaxwidget-h.html
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 #define TQAXWIDGET_H
 
 #include "qaxbase.h"
-#include <qwidget.h>
+#include <ntqwidget.h>
 
 class TQAxHostWindow;
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qaxwidget-members.html b/doc/html/qaxwidget-members.html
index bc635194b..45e894206 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaxwidget-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaxwidget-members.html
@@ -37,321 +37,321 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
 
    
diff --git a/doc/html/qaxwidget.html b/doc/html/qaxwidget.html
index 9870c0b4a..2f3c5a838 100644
--- a/doc/html/qaxwidget.html
+++ b/doc/html/qaxwidget.html
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 More...
 
    This class is part of the TQt ActiveTQt Extension.
 
    #include <qaxwidget.h>
-
    Inherits TQWidget and TQAxBase.
+
    Inherits TQWidget and TQAxBase.
 
    List of all member functions.
 
    Public Members
    
 
      
@@ -56,10 +56,10 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
    • virtual bool translateKeyEvent ( int message, int keycode ) const
      • 
 
    
 
    Detailed Description
    
-
     This class is defined in the TQt ActiveTQt Extension, which can be found in the qt/extensions directory. It is not included in the main TQt API.
+
     This class is defined in the TQt ActiveTQt Extension, which can be found in the qt/extensions directory. It is not included in the main TQt API.
 
    
 
-The TQAxWidget class is a TQWidget that wraps an ActiveX control.
+The TQAxWidget class is a TQWidget that wraps an ActiveX control.
 
 
     
 
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ slots and signals. The base class TQAxBase provides a
 access the ActiveX directly through the IUnknown pointer.
 
     TQAxWidget is a TQWidget and can be used as such, e.g. it can be
 organized in a widget hierarchy, receive events or act as an event
-filter. Standard widget properties, e.g. enabled are supported, but it depends on the ActiveX
+filter. Standard widget properties, e.g. enabled are supported, but it depends on the ActiveX
 control to implement support for ambient properties like e.g.
 palette or font. TQAxWidget tries to provide the necessary hints.
 
     Warning:
@@ -80,24 +80,24 @@ in the subclass (the generated moc-file will not comp
 cannot add further signals, slots or properties. This limitation
 is due to the metaobject information generated in runtime. To work
 around this problem, aggregate the TQAxWidget as a member of the
-TQObject subclass.
+TQObject subclass.
 
     
 
    Member Function Documentation
    
-
    TQAxWidget::TQAxWidget ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
+
    TQAxWidget::TQAxWidget ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
 
    
-Creates an empty TQAxWidget widget and propagates parent, name and f to the TQWidget constructor. To initialize a control,
+Creates an empty TQAxWidget widget and propagates parent, name and f to the TQWidget constructor. To initialize a control,
 call setControl.
 
-
    TQAxWidget::TQAxWidget ( const TQString & c, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
+
    TQAxWidget::TQAxWidget ( const TQString & c, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
 
    
 Creates an TQAxWidget widget and initializes the ActiveX control c.
-parent, name and f are propagated to the TQWidget contructor.
+parent, name and f are propagated to the TQWidget contructor.
 
     
    See also control.
 
-
    TQAxWidget::TQAxWidget ( IUnknown * iface, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
+
    TQAxWidget::TQAxWidget ( IUnknown * iface, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
 
    
 Creates a TQAxWidget that wraps the COM object referenced by iface.
-parent, name and f are propagated to the TQWidget contructor.
+parent, name and f are propagated to the TQWidget contructor.
 
 
    TQAxWidget::~TQAxWidget ()
 
    
@@ -116,18 +116,18 @@ reimplementation to have the control embedded by the default client side.
 Creates the client site for the ActiveX control, and returns TRUE if
 the control could be embedded successfully, otherwise returns FALSE.
 
-
    TQVariant TQAxBase::dynamicCall ( const TQCString & function, const TQVariant & var1 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var2 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var3 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var4 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var5 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var6 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var7 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var8 = TQVariant ( ) )
+
    TQVariant TQAxBase::dynamicCall ( const TQCString & function, const TQVariant & var1 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var2 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var3 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var4 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var5 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var6 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var7 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var8 = TQVariant ( ) )
 
    
 Calls the COM object's method function, passing the
 parameters var1, var1, var2, var3, var4, var5,
 var6, var7 and var8, and returns the value returned by
-the method, or an invalid TQVariant if the method does not return
+the method, or an invalid TQVariant if the method does not return
 a value or when the function call failed.
 
     If function is a method of the object the string must be provided
 as the full prototype, for example as it would be written in a
-TQObject::connect() call.
+TQObject::connect() call.
 
    -    activeX->dynamicCall( "Navigate(const TQString&)", "www.trolltech.com" );
+    activeX->dynamicCall( "Navigate(const TQString&)", "www.trolltech.com" );
     
    
  
 
     Alternatively a function can be called passing the parameters embedded
@@ -144,14 +144,14 @@ property. The property setter is called when var1 is a valid TQVariant,
 otherwise the getter is called.
 
         activeX->dynamicCall( "Value", 5 );
-    TQString text = activeX->dynamicCall( "Text" ).toString();
+    TQString text = activeX->dynamicCall( "Text" ).toString();
     
    
  
 Note that it is faster to get and set properties using
-TQObject::property() and TQObject::setProperty().
+TQObject::property() and TQObject::setProperty().
 
     It is only possible to call functions through dynamicCall() that
 have parameters or return values of datatypes supported by
-TQVariant. See the TQAxBase class documentation for a list of
+TQVariant. See the TQAxBase class documentation for a list of
 supported and unsupported datatypes. If you want to call functions
 that have unsupported datatypes in the parameter list, use
 queryInterface() to retrieve the appropriate COM interface, and
@@ -168,18 +168,18 @@ use the function directly.
 
     This is also more efficient.
 
 
    Example: qutlook/centralwidget.cpp.
-
    TQVariant TQAxBase::dynamicCall ( const TQCString & function, TQValueList<TQVariant> & vars )
+
    TQVariant TQAxBase::dynamicCall ( const TQCString & function, TQValueList<TQVariant> & vars )
 
    
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 
     Calls the COM object's method function, passing the
 parameters in vars, and returns the value returned by
 the method. If the method does not return a value or when
 the function call failed this function returns an invalid
-TQVariant object.
+TQVariant object.
 
     The TQVariant objects in vars are updated when the method has
 out-parameters.
 
-
    TQAxObject * TQAxBase::querySubObject ( const TQCString & name, const TQVariant & var1 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var2 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var3 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var4 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var5 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var6 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var7 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var8 = TQVariant ( ) )
+
    TQAxObject * TQAxBase::querySubObject ( const TQCString & name, const TQVariant & var1 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var2 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var3 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var4 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var5 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var6 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var7 = TQVariant ( ), const TQVariant & var8 = TQVariant ( ) )
 
    
 Returns a pointer to a TQAxObject wrapping the COM object provided
 by the method or property name, passing passing the parameters
@@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ the virtual keycode (ie. VK_TAB).
 ActiveX control, which then either processes the event or passes 
 the event on to TQt.
 
     If the function returns FALSE the processing of the key event is
-ignored by ActiveTQt, ie. the ActiveX control might handle it or
+ignored by ActiveTQt, ie. the ActiveX control might handle it or
 not.
 
     The default implementation returns TRUE for the following cases:
 
     
    
diff --git a/doc/html/qbig5codec-h.html b/doc/html/qbig5codec-h.html
index 6e05ce67a..1e299b39c 100644
--- a/doc/html/qbig5codec-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qbig5codec-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
-qbig5codec.h Include File
+ntqbig5codec.h Include File
-
-
-
-
    
 
 
 
 
    
-
-
-
    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
    TQBig5Codec Class Reference
    
-
-
    The TQBig5Codec class provides conversion to and from the Big5 encoding.
-More...
-
    #include <qbig5codec.h>
-
    Inherits TQTextCodec.
-
    List of all member functions.
-
    Detailed Description
    
-
-
-
-
     The TQBig5Codec class provides conversion to and from the Big5 encoding.
-
     TQBig5Codec was originally contributed by Ming-Che Chuang
-<mingche@cobra.ee.ntu.edu.tw> for the Big-5+ encoding, and was
-included in TQt with the author's permission, and the grateful
-thanks of the Trolltech team. (Note: Ming-Che's code is TQPL'd, as
-per an mail to info@trolltech.com.)
-
     However, since Big-5+ was never formally approved, and was never
-used by anyone, the Taiwan Free Software community and the Li18nux
-Big5 Standard Subgroup agree that the de-facto standard Big5-ETen
-(zh_TW.Big5 or zh_TW.TW-Big5) be used instead.
-
     TQBig5Codec is currently implemented as a pure subset of
-TQBig5hkscsCodec, so more fine-tuning is needed to make it
-identical to the standard Big5 mapping as determined by
-Li18nux-Big5.  See http://www.autrijus.org/xml/ for the draft
-Big5 (2002) standard.
-
     James Su <suzhe@turbolinux.com.cn> <suzhe@gnuchina.org>
-generated the Big5-HKSCS<->Unicode tables with a very
-space-efficient algorithm. He generously donated his code to glibc
-in May 2002.  Subsequently, James has kindly allowed Anthony Fok
-<anthony@thizlinux.com> <foka@debian.org> to adapt the code
-for TQt.
-
     
-
     Copyright (C) 2000  Ming-Che Chuang
-Copyright (C) 2002  James Su, Turbolinux Inc.
-Copyright (C) 2002  Anthony Fok, ThizLinux Laboratory Ltd.
-
     Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-are met:
-
      
-
    1.  Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-
    2.  Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-
    
-
     THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSETQUENTIAL
-DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-SUCH DAMAGE.
-
    See also Internationalization with TQt.
-
-
-
    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
-
-
    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
    TQt 3.3.8
    
-
    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qbig5hkscscodec-members.html b/doc/html/qbig5hkscscodec-members.html
index a321f8bb5..5ee1a4b5d 100644
--- a/doc/html/qbig5hkscscodec-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qbig5hkscscodec-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -35,31 +35,31 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 TQBig5hkscsCodec, including inherited members.
 
 
 
 
    
diff --git a/doc/html/qbig5hkscscodec.html b/doc/html/qbig5hkscscodec.html
index a4f3b084d..800431703 100644
--- a/doc/html/qbig5hkscscodec.html
+++ b/doc/html/qbig5hkscscodec.html
@@ -33,13 +33,13 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
    The TQBig5hkscsCodec class provides conversion to and from the Big5-HKSCS encoding.
 More...
-
    #include <qbig5codec.h>
-
    Inherits TQTextCodec.
+
    #include <ntqbig5codec.h>
+
    Inherits TQTextCodec.
 
    List of all member functions.
 
    Detailed Description
    
  
 
     The TQBig5hkscsCodec class provides conversion to and from the Big5-HKSCS encoding.
-
     TQBig5hkscsCodec grew out of the TQBig5Codec originally contributed by
+
     TQBig5hkscsCodec grew out of the TQBig5Codec originally contributed by
 Ming-Che Chuang <mingche@cobra.ee.ntu.edu.tw>.  James Su
 <suzhe@turbolinux.com.cn> <suzhe@gnuchina.org> and Anthony Fok
 <anthony@thizlinux.com> <foka@debian.org> implemented HKSCS-1999
diff --git a/doc/html/qbitarray-h.html b/doc/html/qbitarray-h.html
index e0b4397bc..b87c63dd0 100644
--- a/doc/html/qbitarray-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qbitarray-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qbitarray.h Include File
+ntqbitarray.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
    TQBitArray Class Reference
    
-
-
    The TQBitArray class provides an array of bits.
-More...
-
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
-
    #include <qbitarray.h>
-
    Inherits TQByteArray.
-
    List of all member functions.
-
    Public Members
    
-
-
    Related Functions
    
-
      
-
    • TQBitArray operator& ( const TQBitArray & a1, const TQBitArray & a2 )
      • 
-
    • TQBitArray operator| ( const TQBitArray & a1, const TQBitArray & a2 )
      • 
-
    • TQBitArray operator^ ( const TQBitArray & a1, const TQBitArray & a2 )
      • 
-
    • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQBitArray & a )
      • 
-
    • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQBitArray & a )
      • 
-
    
-
    Detailed Description
    
-
-
-
-The TQBitArray class provides an array of bits.
-
     
-
-
-
     Because TQBitArray is a TQMemArray, it uses explicit sharing with a reference count.
-
     A TQBitArray is a special byte array that can access individual
-bits and perform bit-operations (AND, OR, XOR and NOT) on entire
-arrays or bits.
-
     Bits can be manipulated by the setBit() and clearBit() functions,
-but it is also possible to use the indexing [] operator to test
-and set individual bits. The [] operator is a little slower than
-setBit() and clearBit() because some tricks are required to
-implement single-bit assignments.
-
     Example:
-
    -    TQBitArray a(3);
-    a.setBit( 0 );
-    a.clearBit( 1 );
-    a.setBit( 2 );     // a = [1 0 1]
-
-    TQBitArray b(3);
-    b[0] = 1;
-    b[1] = 1;
-    b[2] = 0;          // b = [1 1 0]
-
-    TQBitArray c;
-    c = ~a & b;        // c = [0 1 0]
-    
    
- 
-
     When a TQBitArray is constructed the bits are uninitialized. Use
-fill() to set all the bits to 0 or 1. The array can be resized
-with resize() and copied with copy(). Bits can be set with
-setBit() and cleared with clearBit(). Bits can be toggled with
-toggleBit(). A bit's value can be obtained with testBit() and with
-at().
-
     TQBitArray supports the & (AND), | (OR), ^ (XOR) and ~ (NOT)
-operators.
-
    See also Collection Classes, Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
-
-
    Member Function Documentation
    
-
    TQBitArray::TQBitArray ()
-
    
-Constructs an empty bit array.
-
-
    TQBitArray::TQBitArray ( uint size )
-
    
-Constructs a bit array of size bits. The bits are uninitialized.
-
     
    See also fill().
-
-
    TQBitArray::TQBitArray ( const TQBitArray & a )
-
    
-
-
     Constructs a shallow copy of a.
-
-
    bool TQBitArray::at ( uint index ) const
-
    
-
-
     Returns the value (0 or 1) of the bit at position index.
-
     
    See also operator[]().
-
-
    void TQBitArray::clearBit ( uint index )
-
    
-Clears the bit at position index, i.e. sets it to 0.
-
     
    See also setBit() and toggleBit().
-
-
    TQBitArray TQBitArray::copy () const
-
    
-Returns a deep copy of the bit array.
-
     
    See also detach().
-
-
    void TQBitArray::detach () [virtual]
-
    
-Detaches from shared bit array data and makes sure that this bit
-array is the only one referring to the data.
-
     If multiple bit arrays share common data, this bit array
-dereferences the data and gets a copy of the data. Nothing happens
-if there is only a single reference.
-
     
    See also copy().
-
-
    Reimplemented from TQMemArray.
-
    bool TQBitArray::fill ( bool v, int size = -1 )
-
    
-Fills the bit array with v (1's if v is TRUE, or 0's if v
-is FALSE).
-
     fill() resizes the bit array to size bits if size is
-nonnegative.
-
     Returns FALSE if a nonnegative size was specified and the bit
-array could not be resized; otherwise returns TRUE.
-
     
    See also resize().
-
-
    TQBitArray & TQBitArray::operator&= ( const TQBitArray & a )
-
    
-Performs the AND operation between all bits in this bit array and
-a. Returns a reference to this bit array.
-
     The result has the length of the longest of the two bit arrays,
-with any missing bits (i.e. if one array is shorter than the
-other), taken to be 0.
-
    -    TQBitArray a( 3 ), b( 2 );
-    a[0] = 1;  a[1] = 0;  a[2] = 1;     // a = [1 0 1]
-    b[0] = 1;  b[1] = 0;                // b = [1 0]
-    a &= b;                             // a = [1 0 0]
-    
    
- 
-
     
    See also operator|=(), operator^=(), and operator~().
-
-
    TQBitArray & TQBitArray::operator= ( const TQBitArray & a )
-
    
-
-
     Assigns a shallow copy of a to this bit array and returns a
-reference to this array.
-
-
    TQBitVal TQBitArray::operator[] ( int index )
-
    
-
-
     Implements the [] operator for bit arrays.
-
     The returned TQBitVal is a context object. It makes it possible to
-get and set a single bit value by its index position.
-
     Example:
-
    -    TQBitArray a( 3 );
-    a[0] = 0;
-    a[1] = 1;
-    a[2] = a[0] ^ a[1];
-    
    
- 
-
     The functions testBit(), setBit() and clearBit() are faster.
-
     
    See also at().
-
-
    bool TQBitArray::operator[] ( int index ) const
-
    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
     Implements the [] operator for constant bit arrays.
-
-
    TQBitArray & TQBitArray::operator^= ( const TQBitArray & a )
-
    
-Performs the XOR operation between all bits in this bit array and
-a. Returns a reference to this bit array.
-
     The result has the length of the longest of the two bit arrays,
-with any missing bits (i.e. if one array is shorter than the
-other), taken to be 0.
-
    -    TQBitArray a( 3 ), b( 2 );
-    a[0] = 1;  a[1] = 0;  a[2] = 1;     // a = [1 0 1]
-    b[0] = 1;  b[1] = 0;                // b = [1 0]
-    a ^= b;                             // a = [0 0 1]
-    
    
- 
-
     
    See also operator&=(), operator|=(), and operator~().
-
-
    TQBitArray & TQBitArray::operator|= ( const TQBitArray & a )
-
    
-Performs the OR operation between all bits in this bit array and
-a. Returns a reference to this bit array.
-
     The result has the length of the longest of the two bit arrays,
-with any missing bits (i.e. if one array is shorter than the
-other), taken to be 0.
-
    -    TQBitArray a( 3 ), b( 2 );
-    a[0] = 1;  a[1] = 0;  a[2] = 1;     // a = [1 0 1]
-    b[0] = 1;  b[1] = 0;                // b = [1 0]
-    a |= b;                             // a = [1 0 1]
-    
    
- 
-
     
    See also operator&=(), operator^=(), and operator~().
-
-
    TQBitArray TQBitArray::operator~ () const
-
    
-Returns a bit array that contains the inverted bits of this bit array.
-
     Example:
-
    -    TQBitArray a( 3 ), b;
-    a[0] = 1;  a[1] = 0; a[2] = 1;      // a = [1 0 1]
-    b = ~a;                             // b = [0 1 0]
-    
    
- 
-
-
    bool TQBitArray::resize ( uint size )
-
    
-Resizes the bit array to size bits and returns TRUE if the bit
-array could be resized; otherwise returns FALSE. The array becomes
-a null array if size == 0.
-
     If the array is expanded, the new bits are set to 0.
-
     
    See also size().
-
-
    void TQBitArray::setBit ( uint index, bool value )
-
    
-
-
     Sets the bit at position index to value.
-
     Equivalent to:
-
    -    if ( value )
-        setBit( index );
-    else
-        clearBit( index );
-    
    
- 
-
     
    See also clearBit() and toggleBit().
-
-
    void TQBitArray::setBit ( uint index )
-
    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
     Sets the bit at position index to 1.
-
     
    See also clearBit() and toggleBit().
-
-
    uint TQBitArray::size () const
-
    
-
-
     Returns the bit array's size (number of bits).
-
     
    See also resize().
-
-
    bool TQBitArray::testBit ( uint index ) const
-
    
-Returns TRUE if the bit at position index is set, i.e. is 1;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
     
    See also setBit() and clearBit().
-
-
    bool TQBitArray::toggleBit ( uint index )
-
    
-Toggles the bit at position index.
-
     If the previous value was 0, the new value will be 1. If the
-previous value was 1, the new value will be 0.
-
     
    See also setBit() and clearBit().
-
-
    Related Functions
    
-
    TQBitArray operator& ( const TQBitArray & a1, const TQBitArray & a2 )
-
    
-
-
     Returns the AND result between the bit arrays a1 and a2.
-
     The result has the length of the longest of the two bit arrays,
-with any missing bits (i.e. if one array is shorter than the
-other), taken to be 0.
-
     
    See also TQBitArray::operator&=().
-
-
    TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQBitArray & a )
-
    
-
-
     Writes bit array a to stream s.
-
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
    TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQBitArray & a )
-
    
-
-
     Reads a bit array into a from stream s.
-
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
    TQBitArray operator^ ( const TQBitArray & a1, const TQBitArray & a2 )
-
    
-
-
     Returns the XOR result between the bit arrays a1 and a2.
-
     The result has the length of the longest of the two bit arrays,
-with any missing bits (i.e. if one array is shorter than the
-other), taken to be 0.
-
     
    See also TQBitArray::operator^().
-
-
    TQBitArray operator| ( const TQBitArray & a1, const TQBitArray & a2 )
-
    
-
-
     Returns the OR result between the bit arrays a1 and a2.
-
     The result has the length of the longest of the two bit arrays,
-with any missing bits (i.e. if one array is shorter than the
-other), taken to be 0.
-
     
    See also TQBitArray::operator|=().
-
-
-
    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
-
-
    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
    TQt 3.3.8
    
-
    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qbitmap-h.html b/doc/html/qbitmap-h.html
index c4b991eb1..10a5ff58d 100644
--- a/doc/html/qbitmap-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qbitmap-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qbitmap.h Include File
+ntqbitmap.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
    TQBitmap Class Reference
    
-
-
    The TQBitmap class provides monochrome (1-bit depth) pixmaps.
-More...
-
    #include <qbitmap.h>
-
    Inherits TQPixmap.
-
    List of all member functions.
-
    Public Members
    
-
      
-
    • TQBitmap ()
      • 
-
    • TQBitmap ( int w, int h, bool clear = FALSE, TQPixmap::Optimization optimization = TQPixmap::DefaultOptim )
      • 
-
    • TQBitmap ( const TQSize & size, bool clear = FALSE, TQPixmap::Optimization optimization = TQPixmap::DefaultOptim )
      • 
-
    • TQBitmap ( int w, int h, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap = FALSE )
      • 
-
    • TQBitmap ( const TQSize & size, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap = FALSE )
      • 
-
    • TQBitmap ( const TQBitmap & bitmap )
      • 
-
    • TQBitmap ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0 )
      • 
-
    • TQBitmap & operator= ( const TQBitmap & bitmap )
      • 
-
    • TQBitmap & operator= ( const TQPixmap & pixmap )
      • 
-
    • TQBitmap & operator= ( const TQImage & image )
      • 
-
    • TQBitmap xForm ( const TQWMatrix & matrix ) const
      • 
-
    
-
    Detailed Description
    
-
-
-The TQBitmap class provides monochrome (1-bit depth) pixmaps.
-
     
-
-
-
     The TQBitmap class is a monochrome off-screen paint device used
-mainly for creating custom TQCursor and TQBrush objects, in
-TQPixmap::setMask() and for TQRegion.
-
     A TQBitmap is a TQPixmap with a depth
-of 1. If a pixmap with a depth greater than 1 is assigned to a
-bitmap, the bitmap will be dithered automatically. A TQBitmap is
-guaranteed to always have the depth 1, unless it is
-TQPixmap::isNull() which has depth 0.
-
     When drawing in a TQBitmap (or TQPixmap with depth 1), we recommend
-using the  TQColor objects TQt::color0 and TQt::color1.
-Painting with color0 sets the bitmap bits to 0, and painting
-with color1 sets the bits to 1. For a bitmap, 0-bits indicate
-background (or transparent) and 1-bits indicate foreground (or
-opaque). Using the black and white TQColor objects make no
-sense because the TQColor::pixel() value is not necessarily 0 for
-black and 1 for white.
-
     The TQBitmap can be transformed (translated, scaled, sheared or
-rotated) using xForm().
-
     Just like the TQPixmap class, TQBitmap is optimized by the use of
-implicit sharing, so it is very
-efficient to pass TQBitmap objects as arguments.
-
     
    See also TQPixmap, TQPainter::drawPixmap(), bitBlt(), Shared Classes, Graphics Classes, Image Processing Classes, and Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes.
-
-
    Member Function Documentation
    
-
    TQBitmap::TQBitmap ()
-
    
-Constructs a null bitmap.
-
     
    See also TQPixmap::isNull().
-
-
    TQBitmap::TQBitmap ( int w, int h, bool clear = FALSE, TQPixmap::Optimization optimization = TQPixmap::DefaultOptim )
-
    
-Constructs a bitmap with width w and height h.
-
     The contents of the bitmap is uninitialized if clear is FALSE;
-otherwise it is filled with pixel value 0 (the TQColor TQt::color0).
-
     The optional optimization argument specifies the optimization
-setting for the bitmap. The default optimization should be used in
-most cases. Games and other pixmap-intensive applications may
-benefit from setting this argument; see TQPixmap::Optimization.
-
     
    See also TQPixmap::setOptimization() and TQPixmap::setDefaultOptimization().
-
-
    TQBitmap::TQBitmap ( const TQSize & size, bool clear = FALSE, TQPixmap::Optimization optimization = TQPixmap::DefaultOptim )
-
    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
     Constructs a bitmap with the size size.
-
     The contents of the bitmap is uninitialized if clear is FALSE;
-otherwise it is filled with pixel value 0 (the TQColor TQt::color0).
-
     The optional optimization argument specifies the optimization
-setting for the bitmap. The default optimization should be used in
-most cases. Games and other pixmap-intensive applications may
-benefit from setting this argument; see TQPixmap::Optimization.
-
-
    TQBitmap::TQBitmap ( int w, int h, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap = FALSE )
-
    
-Constructs a bitmap with width w and height h and sets the
-contents to bits.
-
     The isXbitmap flag should be TRUE if bits was generated by
-the X11 bitmap program. The X bitmap bit order is little endian.
-The TQImage documentation discusses bit order of monochrome images.
-
     Example (creates an arrow bitmap):
-
    -        uchar arrow_bits[] = { 0x3f, 0x1f, 0x0f, 0x1f, 0x3b, 0x71, 0xe0, 0xc0 };
-        TQBitmap bm( 8, 8, arrow_bits, TRUE );
-    
    
- 
-
-
    TQBitmap::TQBitmap ( const TQSize & size, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap = FALSE )
-
    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
     Constructs a bitmap with the size size and sets the contents to
-bits.
-
     The isXbitmap flag should be TRUE if bits was generated by
-the X11 bitmap program. The X bitmap bit order is little endian.
-The TQImage documentation discusses bit order of monochrome images.
-
-
    TQBitmap::TQBitmap ( const TQBitmap & bitmap )
-
    
-Constructs a bitmap that is a copy of bitmap.
-
-
    TQBitmap::TQBitmap ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0 )
-
    
-Constructs a bitmap from the file fileName. If the file does
-not exist or is of an unknown format, the bitmap becomes a null
-bitmap.
-
     The parameters fileName and format are passed on to
-TQPixmap::load(). Dithering will be performed if the file format
-uses more than 1 bit per pixel.
-
     
    See also TQPixmap::isNull(), TQPixmap::load(), TQPixmap::loadFromData(), TQPixmap::save(), and TQPixmap::imageFormat().
-
-
    TQBitmap & TQBitmap::operator= ( const TQBitmap & bitmap )
-
    
-Assigns the bitmap bitmap to this bitmap and returns a
-reference to this bitmap.
-
-
    TQBitmap & TQBitmap::operator= ( const TQPixmap & pixmap )
-
    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
     Assigns the pixmap pixmap to this bitmap and returns a
-reference to this bitmap.
-
     Dithering will be performed if the pixmap has a TQPixmap::depth()
-greater than 1.
-
-
    TQBitmap & TQBitmap::operator= ( const TQImage & image )
-
    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
     Converts the image image to a bitmap and assigns the result to
-this bitmap. Returns a reference to the bitmap.
-
     Dithering will be performed if the image has a TQImage::depth()
-greater than 1.
-
-
    TQBitmap TQBitmap::xForm ( const TQWMatrix & matrix ) const
-
    
-Returns a transformed copy of this bitmap by using matrix.
-
     This function does exactly the same as TQPixmap::xForm(), except
-that it returns a TQBitmap instead of a TQPixmap.
-
     
    See also TQPixmap::xForm().
-
-
-
    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
-
-
    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
    TQt 3.3.8
    
-
    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qbitval-members.html b/doc/html/qbitval-members.html
index ca208f0aa..719779538 100644
--- a/doc/html/qbitval-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qbitval-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qbitval.html b/doc/html/qbitval.html
index 641bdd2dc..f08a50822 100644
--- a/doc/html/qbitval.html
+++ b/doc/html/qbitval.html
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
    The TQBitVal class is an internal class, used with TQBitArray.
 More...
 
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
-
    #include <qbitarray.h>
+
    #include <ntqbitarray.h>
 
    List of all member functions.
 
    Public Members
    
 
 
     Use insertWidget(), insertSpacing(), insertStretch() or
@@ -119,20 +119,20 @@ and set that layout's stretch factor.
 layout.
 
     TQBoxLayout also includes two margin widths:
 
     
      
-
    •  setMargin() sets the width of the outer border. This is the width
+
    •  setMargin() sets the width of the outer border. This is the width
 of the reserved space along each of the TQBoxLayout's four sides.
-
    •  setSpacing() sets the width between neighboring boxes. (You
+
    •  setSpacing() sets the width between neighboring boxes. (You
 can use addSpacing() to get more space at a particular spot.)
 
    
 
     The margin defaults to 0. The spacing defaults to the same as the
 margin width for a top-level layout, or to the same as the parent
 layout. Both are parameters to the constructor.
-
     To remove a widget from a layout, call remove(). Calling
-TQWidget::hide() on a widget also effectively removes the widget
-from the layout until TQWidget::show() is called.
+
     To remove a widget from a layout, call remove(). Calling
+TQWidget::hide() on a widget also effectively removes the widget
+from the layout until TQWidget::show() is called.
 
     You will almost always want to use TQVBoxLayout and TQHBoxLayout
 rather than TQBoxLayout because of their convenient constructors.
-
     
    See also TQGrid, Layout Overview, Widget Appearance and Style, and Layout Management.
+
     
    See also TQGrid, Layout Overview, Widget Appearance and Style, and Layout Management.
 
 
    Member Type Documentation
    
 
    TQBoxLayout::Direction
    
@@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ rather than TQBoxLayout because of their convenient constructors.
 
  • TQBoxLayout::Up - The same as BottomToTop
 
 
    Member Function Documentation
    
-
    TQBoxLayout::TQBoxLayout ( TQWidget * parent, Direction d, int margin = 0, int spacing = -1, const char * name = 0 )
+
    TQBoxLayout::TQBoxLayout ( TQWidget * parent, Direction d, int margin = 0, int spacing = -1, const char * name = 0 )
 
    
 Constructs a new TQBoxLayout with direction d and main widget parent. parent may not be 0.
 
     The margin is the number of pixels between the edge of the
@@ -157,19 +157,19 @@ the value of margin is used for spacing.
 
     name is the internal object name.
 
     
    See also direction().
 
-
    TQBoxLayout::TQBoxLayout ( TQLayout * parentLayout, Direction d, int spacing = -1, const char * name = 0 )
+
    TQBoxLayout::TQBoxLayout ( TQLayout * parentLayout, Direction d, int spacing = -1, const char * name = 0 )
 
    
 Constructs a new TQBoxLayout called name, with direction d,
 and inserts it into parentLayout.
 
     The spacing is the default number of pixels between neighboring
 children. If spacing is -1, the layout will inherit its
-parent's spacing().
+parent's spacing().
 
 
    TQBoxLayout::TQBoxLayout ( Direction d, int spacing = -1, const char * name = 0 )
 
    
 Constructs a new TQBoxLayout called name, with direction d.
 
     If spacing is -1, the layout will inherit its parent's
-spacing(); otherwise spacing is used.
+spacing(); otherwise spacing is used.
 
     You must insert this box into another layout.
 
 
    TQBoxLayout::~TQBoxLayout ()
@@ -182,15 +182,15 @@ Destroys this box layout.
 Adds item to the end of this box layout.
 
 
    Examples: chart/optionsform.cpp and chart/setdataform.cpp.
-
    Reimplemented from TQLayout.
-
    void TQBoxLayout::addLayout ( TQLayout * layout, int stretch = 0 )
+
    Reimplemented from TQLayout.
+
    void TQBoxLayout::addLayout ( TQLayout * layout, int stretch = 0 )
 
    
 Adds layout to the end of the box, with serial stretch factor
 stretch.
 
     When a layout is constructed with another layout as its parent,
 you don't need to call addLayout(); the child layout is
 automatically added to the parent layout as it is constructed.
-
     
    See also insertLayout(), setAutoAdd(), addWidget(), and addSpacing().
+
     
    See also insertLayout(), setAutoAdd(), addWidget(), and addSpacing().
 
 
    Examples: chart/optionsform.cpp, chart/setdataform.cpp, fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp, listbox/listbox.cpp, regexptester/regexptester.cpp, and tictac/tictac.cpp.
 
    void TQBoxLayout::addSpacing ( int size )
@@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ Limits the perpendicular dimension of the box (e.g. height if the
 box is LeftToRight) to a minimum of size. Other constraints may
 increase the limit.
 
-
    void TQBoxLayout::addWidget ( TQWidget * widget, int stretch = 0, int alignment = 0 )
+
    void TQBoxLayout::addWidget ( TQWidget * widget, int stretch = 0, int alignment = 0 )
 
    
 Adds widget to the end of this box layout, with a stretch factor of stretch and alignment alignment.
 
     The stretch factor applies only in the direction of the TQBoxLayout, and is relative to the other boxes and
@@ -224,13 +224,13 @@ factors grow more.
 a stretch factor greater than zero, the space is distributed
 according to the TQWidget:sizePolicy() of each widget that's
 involved.
-
     Alignment is specified by alignment which is a bitwise OR of TQt::AlignmentFlags values. The default alignment is 0, which means
+
     Alignment is specified by alignment which is a bitwise OR of TQt::AlignmentFlags values. The default alignment is 0, which means
 that the widget fills the entire cell.
 
     From TQt 3.0, the alignment parameter is interpreted more
 aggressively than in previous versions of TQt. A non-default
 alignment now indicates that the widget should not grow to fill
 the available space, but should be sized according to sizeHint().
-
     
    See also insertWidget(), setAutoAdd(), addLayout(), and addSpacing().
+
     
    See also insertWidget(), setAutoAdd(), addLayout(), and addSpacing().
 
 
    Examples: chart/optionsform.cpp, checklists/checklists.cpp, layout/layout.cpp, lineedits/lineedits.cpp, listbox/listbox.cpp, t13/gamebrd.cpp, and t13/lcdrange.cpp.
 
    Direction TQBoxLayout::direction () const
@@ -240,15 +240,15 @@ the available space, but should be sized according to sizeHi
 work in this direction; the stretch stretches in this direction.
 
     
    See also TQBoxLayout::Direction, addWidget(), and addSpacing().
 
-
    TQSizePolicy::ExpandData TQBoxLayout::expanding () const [virtual]
+
    TQSizePolicy::ExpandData TQBoxLayout::expanding () const [virtual]
 
    
 Returns whether this layout can make use of more space than
-sizeHint(). A value of Vertical or Horizontal means that it wants
+sizeHint(). A value of Vertical or Horizontal means that it wants
 to grow in only one dimension, whereas BothDirections means that
 it wants to grow in both dimensions.
 
-
    Reimplemented from TQLayout.
-
    int TQBoxLayout::findWidget ( TQWidget * w )
+
    Reimplemented from TQLayout.
+
    int TQBoxLayout::findWidget ( TQWidget * w )
 
    
 Searches for widget w in this layout (not including child
 layouts).
@@ -269,14 +269,14 @@ Returns the layout's preferred height when it is w pixels wide.
 
 Inserts item into this box layout at position index. If index is negative, the item is added at the end.
 
     Warning: Does not call TQLayout::insertChildLayout() if item is
-a TQLayout.
+a TQLayout.
 
     
    See also addItem() and findWidget().
 
-
    void TQBoxLayout::insertLayout ( int index, TQLayout * layout, int stretch = 0 )
+
    void TQBoxLayout::insertLayout ( int index, TQLayout * layout, int stretch = 0 )
 
    
 Inserts layout at position index, with stretch factor stretch. If index is negative, the layout is added at the end.
 
     layout becomes a child of the box layout.
-
     
    See also setAutoAdd(), insertWidget(), and insertSpacing().
+
     
    See also setAutoAdd(), insertWidget(), and insertSpacing().
 
 
    void TQBoxLayout::insertSpacing ( int index, int size )
 
    
@@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ minimum size and stretch factor str
 negative the space is added at the end.
 
     
    See also insertSpacing().
 
-
    void TQBoxLayout::insertWidget ( int index, TQWidget * widget, int stretch = 0, int alignment = 0 )
+
    void TQBoxLayout::insertWidget ( int index, TQWidget * widget, int stretch = 0, int alignment = 0 )
 
    
 Inserts widget at position index, with stretch factor stretch and alignment alignment. If index is negative, the
 widget is added at the end.
@@ -304,52 +304,52 @@ a stretch factor greater than zero, the space is distributed
 according to the TQWidget:sizePolicy() of each widget that's
 involved.
 
     Alignment is specified by alignment, which is a bitwise OR of
-TQt::AlignmentFlags values. The default alignment is 0, which
+TQt::AlignmentFlags values. The default alignment is 0, which
 means that the widget fills the entire cell.
 
     From TQt 3.0, the alignment parameter is interpreted more
 aggressively than in previous versions of TQt. A non-default
 alignment now indicates that the widget should not grow to fill
 the available space, but should be sized according to sizeHint().
-
     
    See also setAutoAdd(), insertLayout(), and insertSpacing().
+
     
    See also setAutoAdd(), insertLayout(), and insertSpacing().
 
 
    void TQBoxLayout::invalidate () [virtual]
 
    
 Resets cached information.
 
-
    Reimplemented from TQLayout.
-
    TQSize TQBoxLayout::maximumSize () const [virtual]
+
    Reimplemented from TQLayout.
+
    TQSize TQBoxLayout::maximumSize () const [virtual]
 
    
 Returns the maximum size needed by this box layout.
 
-
    Reimplemented from TQLayout.
-
    TQSize TQBoxLayout::minimumSize () const [virtual]
+
    Reimplemented from TQLayout.
+
    TQSize TQBoxLayout::minimumSize () const [virtual]
 
    
 Returns the minimum size needed by this box layout.
 
-
    Reimplemented from TQLayout.
+
    Reimplemented from TQLayout.
 
    void TQBoxLayout::setDirection ( Direction direction )
 
    
 Sets the direction of this layout to direction.
 
-
    void TQBoxLayout::setGeometry ( const TQRect & r ) [virtual]
+
    void TQBoxLayout::setGeometry ( const TQRect & r ) [virtual]
 
    
 Resizes managed widgets within the rectangle r.
 
-
    Reimplemented from TQLayout.
-
    bool TQBoxLayout::setStretchFactor ( TQWidget * w, int stretch )
+
    Reimplemented from TQLayout.
+
    bool TQBoxLayout::setStretchFactor ( TQWidget * w, int stretch )
 
    
 Sets the stretch factor for widget w to stretch and returns
 TRUE if w is found in this layout (not including child
 layouts); otherwise returns FALSE.
 
-
    bool TQBoxLayout::setStretchFactor ( TQLayout * l, int stretch )
+
    bool TQBoxLayout::setStretchFactor ( TQLayout * l, int stretch )
 
    
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 
     Sets the stretch factor for the layout l to stretch and
 returns TRUE if l is found in this layout (not including child
 layouts); otherwise returns FALSE.
 
-
    TQSize TQBoxLayout::sizeHint () const [virtual]
+
    TQSize TQBoxLayout::sizeHint () const [virtual]
 
    
 Returns the preferred size of this box layout.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qbrush-h.html b/doc/html/qbrush-h.html
index ca33253c5..7b143b8c0 100644
--- a/doc/html/qbrush-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qbrush-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qbrush.h Include File
+ntqbrush.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
    TQBrush Class Reference
    
-
-
    The TQBrush class defines the fill pattern of shapes drawn by a TQPainter.
-More...
-
    #include <qbrush.h>
-
    Inherits TQt.
-
    List of all member functions.
-
    Public Members
    
-
      
-
    • TQBrush ()
      • 
-
    • TQBrush ( BrushStyle style )
      • 
-
    • TQBrush ( const TQColor & color, BrushStyle style = SolidPattern )
      • 
-
    • TQBrush ( const TQColor & color, const TQPixmap & pixmap )
      • 
-
    • TQBrush ( const TQBrush & b )
      • 
-
    • ~TQBrush ()
      • 
-
    • TQBrush & operator= ( const TQBrush & b )
      • 
-
    • BrushStyle style () const
      • 
-
    • void setStyle ( BrushStyle s )
      • 
-
    • const TQColor & color () const
      • 
-
    • void setColor ( const TQColor & c )
      • 
-
    • TQPixmap * pixmap () const
      • 
-
    • void setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pixmap )
      • 
-
    • bool operator== ( const TQBrush & b ) const
      • 
-
    • bool operator!= ( const TQBrush & b ) const
      • 
-
    
-
    Related Functions
    
-
      
-
    • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQBrush & b )
      • 
-
    • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQBrush & b )
      • 
-
    
-
    Detailed Description
    
-
-
-
     The TQBrush class defines the fill pattern of shapes drawn by a TQPainter.
-
     
-
-
-
     A brush has a style and a color. One of the brush styles is a
-custom pattern, which is defined by a TQPixmap.
-
     The brush style defines the fill pattern. The default brush style
-is NoBrush (depending on how you construct a brush). This style
-tells the painter to not fill shapes. The standard style for
-filling is SolidPattern.
-
     The brush color defines the color of the fill pattern. The TQColor
-documentation lists the predefined colors.
-
     Use the TQPen class for specifying line/outline styles.
-
     Example:
-
    -        TQPainter painter;
-        TQBrush   brush( yellow );           // yellow solid pattern
-        painter.begin( &anyPaintDevice );   // paint something
-        painter.setBrush( brush );          // set the yellow brush
-        painter.setPen( NoPen );            // do not draw outline
-        painter.drawRect( 40,30, 200,100 ); // draw filled rectangle
-        painter.setBrush( NoBrush );        // do not fill
-        painter.setPen( black );            // set black pen, 0 pixel width
-        painter.drawRect( 10,10, 30,20 );   // draw rectangle outline
-        painter.end();                      // painting done
-    
    
- 
-
     See the setStyle() function for a complete list of brush styles.
-
     
    Brush Styles
     
-
     
    See also TQPainter, TQPainter::setBrush(), TQPainter::setBrushOrigin(), Graphics Classes, Image Processing Classes, and Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes.
-
-
    Member Function Documentation
    
-
    TQBrush::TQBrush ()
-
    
-Constructs a default black brush with the style NoBrush (will
-not fill shapes).
-
-
    TQBrush::TQBrush ( BrushStyle style )
-
    
-Constructs a black brush with the style style.
-
     
    See also setStyle().
-
-
    TQBrush::TQBrush ( const TQColor & color, BrushStyle style = SolidPattern )
-
    
-Constructs a brush with the color color and the style style.
-
     
    See also setColor() and setStyle().
-
-
    TQBrush::TQBrush ( const TQColor & color, const TQPixmap & pixmap )
-
    
-Constructs a brush with the color color and a custom pattern
-stored in pixmap.
-
     The color will only have an effect for monochrome pixmaps, i.e.
-for TQPixmap::depth() == 1.
-
     Pixmap brushes are currently not supported when printing on X11.
-
     
    See also setColor() and setPixmap().
-
-
    TQBrush::TQBrush ( const TQBrush & b )
-
    
-Constructs a brush that is a shallow
-    copy of b.
-
-
    TQBrush::~TQBrush ()
-
    
-Destroys the brush.
-
-
    const TQColor & TQBrush::color () const
-
    
-
-
     Returns the brush color.
-
     
    See also setColor().
-
-
    bool TQBrush::operator!= ( const TQBrush & b ) const
-
    
-
-
     Returns TRUE if the brush is different from b; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
     Two brushes are different if they have different styles, colors or
-pixmaps.
-
     
    See also operator==().
-
-
    TQBrush & TQBrush::operator= ( const TQBrush & b )
-
    
-Assigns b to this brush and returns a reference to this brush.
-
-
    bool TQBrush::operator== ( const TQBrush & b ) const
-
    
-Returns TRUE if the brush is equal to b; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
     Two brushes are equal if they have equal styles, colors and
-pixmaps.
-
     
    See also operator!=().
-
-
    TQPixmap * TQBrush::pixmap () const
-
    
-
-
     Returns a pointer to the custom brush pattern, or 0 if no custom
-brush pattern has been set.
-
     
    See also setPixmap().
-
-
    Example: richtext/richtext.cpp.
-
    void TQBrush::setColor ( const TQColor & c )
-
    
-Sets the brush color to c.
-
     
    See also color() and setStyle().
-
-
    Example: picture/picture.cpp.
-
    void TQBrush::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pixmap )
-
    
-Sets the brush pixmap to pixmap. The style is set to CustomPattern.
-
     The current brush color will only have an effect for monochrome
-pixmaps, i.e. for TQPixmap::depth() == 1.
-
     Pixmap brushes are currently not supported when printing on X11.
-
     
    See also pixmap() and color().
-
-
    Example: richtext/richtext.cpp.
-
    void TQBrush::setStyle ( BrushStyle s )
-
    
-Sets the brush style to s.
-
     The brush styles are:
-
    
-
     Pattern Meaning
-
     NoBrush will not fill shapes (default).
-
     SolidPattern  solid (100%) fill pattern.
-
     Dense1Pattern  94% fill pattern.
-
     Dense2Pattern  88% fill pattern.
-
     Dense3Pattern  63% fill pattern.
-
     Dense4Pattern  50% fill pattern.
-
     Dense5Pattern  37% fill pattern.
-
     Dense6Pattern  12% fill pattern.
-
     Dense7Pattern  6% fill pattern.
-
     HorPattern horizontal lines pattern.
-
     VerPattern vertical lines pattern.
-
     CrossPattern crossing lines pattern.
-
     BDiagPattern diagonal lines (directed /) pattern.
-
     FDiagPattern diagonal lines (directed \) pattern.
-
     DiagCrossPattern diagonal crossing lines pattern.
-
     CustomPattern set when a pixmap pattern is being used.
-
    
-
     On Windows, dense and custom patterns cannot be transparent.
-
     See the Detailed Description for a picture
-of all the styles.
-
     
    See also style().
-
-
    BrushStyle TQBrush::style () const
-
    
-
-
     Returns the brush style.
-
     
    See also setStyle().
-
-
    Related Functions
    
-
    TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQBrush & b )
-
    
-
-
     Writes the brush b to the stream s and returns a reference
-to the stream.
-
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
    TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQBrush & b )
-
    
-
-
     Reads the brush b from the stream s and returns a reference
-to the stream.
-
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
-
    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
-
-
    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
    TQt 3.3.8
    
-
    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qbuffer-h.html b/doc/html/qbuffer-h.html
index 5fafba809..fca0dca94 100644
--- a/doc/html/qbuffer-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qbuffer-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qbuffer.h Include File
+ntqbuffer.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
    TQBuffer Class Reference
    
-
-
    The TQBuffer class is an I/O device that operates on a TQByteArray.
-More...
-
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
-
    #include <qbuffer.h>
-
    Inherits TQIODevice.
-
    List of all member functions.
-
    Public Members
    
-
-
    Detailed Description
    
-
-
-
-The TQBuffer class is an I/O device that operates on a TQByteArray.
-
     
-
-
     TQBuffer is used to read and write to a memory buffer. It is
-normally used with a TQTextStream or a TQDataStream. TQBuffer has an
-associated TQByteArray which holds the buffer data. The size() of
-the buffer is automatically adjusted as data is written.
-
     The constructor TQBuffer(TQByteArray) creates a TQBuffer using an
-existing byte array. The byte array can also be set with
-setBuffer(). Writing to the TQBuffer will modify the original byte
-array because TQByteArray is explicitly
-    shared.
-
     Use open() to open the buffer before use and to set the mode
-(read-only, write-only, etc.). close() closes the buffer. The
-buffer must be closed before reopening or calling setBuffer().
-
     A common way to use TQBuffer is through TQDataStream or TQTextStream, which have constructors that take a TQBuffer
-parameter. For convenience, there are also TQDataStream and
-TQTextStream constructors that take a TQByteArray parameter. These
-constructors create and open an internal TQBuffer.
-
     Note that TQTextStream can also operate on a TQString (a Unicode
-string); a TQBuffer cannot.
-
     You can also use TQBuffer directly through the standard TQIODevice
-functions readBlock(), writeBlock() readLine(), at(), getch(),
-putch() and ungetch().
-
     
    See also TQFile, TQDataStream, TQTextStream, TQByteArray, Shared Classes, Collection Classes, and Input/Output and Networking.
-
-
    Member Function Documentation
    
-
    TQBuffer::TQBuffer ()
-
    
-Constructs an empty buffer.
-
-
    TQBuffer::TQBuffer ( TQByteArray buf )
-
    
-Constructs a buffer that operates on buf.
-
     If you open the buffer in write mode (IO_WriteOnly or
-IO_ReadWrite) and write something into the buffer, buf
-will be modified.
-
     Example:
-
    -    TQCString str = "abc";
-    TQBuffer b( str );
-    b.open( IO_WriteOnly );
-    b.at( 3 ); // position at the 4th character (the terminating \0)
-    b.writeBlock( "def", 4 ); // write "def" including the terminating \0
-    b.close();
-    // Now, str == "abcdef" with a terminating \0
-    
    
- 
-
     
    See also setBuffer().
-
-
    TQBuffer::~TQBuffer ()
-
    
-Destroys the buffer.
-
-
    TQByteArray TQBuffer::buffer () const
-
    
-
-
     Returns this buffer's byte array.
-
     
    See also setBuffer().
-
-
    bool TQBuffer::setBuffer ( TQByteArray buf )
-
    
-Replaces the buffer's contents with buf and returns TRUE.
-
     Does nothing (and returns FALSE) if isOpen() is TRUE.
-
     Note that if you open the buffer in write mode (IO_WriteOnly or
-IO_ReadWrite) and write something into the buffer, buf is also
-modified because TQByteArray is an explicitly shared class.
-
     
    See also buffer(), open(), and close().
-
-
    Q_LONG TQBuffer::writeBlock ( const char * p, Q_ULONG len ) [virtual]
-
    
-Writes len bytes from p into the buffer at the current
-index position, overwriting any characters there and extending the
-buffer if necessary. Returns the number of bytes actually written.
-
     Returns -1 if an error occurred.
-
     
    See also readBlock().
-
-
    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
-
    Q_LONG TQBuffer::writeBlock ( const TQByteArray & data )
-
    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
     This convenience function is the same as calling
-writeBlock( data.data(), data.size() ) with data.
-
-
-
    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
-
-
    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
    TQt 3.3.8
    
-
    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qbutton-h.html b/doc/html/qbutton-h.html
index 6476f2e1d..dd76a7f2c 100644
--- a/doc/html/qbutton-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qbutton-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qbutton.h Include File
+ntqbutton.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
    TQButton Class Reference
    
-
-
    The TQButton class is the abstract base class of button
-widgets, providing functionality common to buttons.
-More...
-
    #include <qbutton.h>
-
    Inherits TQWidget.
-
    Inherited by TQCheckBox, TQPushButton, TQRadioButton, and TQToolButton.
-
    List of all member functions.
-
    Public Members
    
-
-
    Public Slots
    
-
-
    Signals
    
-
-
    Properties
    
-
      
-
    • TQKeySequence accel - the accelerator associated with the button
      • 
-
    • bool autoRepeat - whether autoRepeat is enabled
      • 
-
    • bool autoResize - whether autoResize is enabled  (obsolete)
      • 
-
    • bool down - whether the button is pressed
      • 
-
    • bool exclusiveToggle - whether the button is an exclusive toggle  (read only)
      • 
-
    • bool on - whether the button is toggled  (read only)
      • 
-
    • TQPixmap pixmap - the pixmap shown on the button
      • 
-
    • TQString text - the text shown on the button
      • 
-
    • bool toggleButton - whether the button is a toggle button  (read only)
      • 
-
    • ToggleState toggleState - the state of the toggle button  (read only)
      • 
-
    • ToggleType toggleType - the type of toggle on the button  (read only)
      • 
-
    
-
    Protected Members
    
-
-
    Detailed Description
    
-
-
-The TQButton class is the abstract base class of button
-widgets, providing functionality common to buttons.
-
     
-
     If you want to create a button use TQPushButton.
-
     The TQButton class implements an abstract button, and lets
-subclasses specify how to reply to user actions and how to draw
-the button.
-
     TQButton provides both push and toggle buttons. The TQRadioButton
-and TQCheckBox classes provide only toggle buttons; TQPushButton and
-TQToolButton provide both toggle and push buttons.
-
     Any button can have either a text or pixmap label. setText() sets
-the button to be a text button and setPixmap() sets it to be a
-pixmap button. The text/pixmap is manipulated as necessary to
-create the "disabled" appearance when the button is disabled.
-
     TQButton provides most of the states used for buttons:
-
      
-
    •  isDown() indicates whether the button is pressed down.
-
    •  isOn() indicates whether the button is on.
-Only toggle buttons can be switched on and off  (see below).
-
    •  isEnabled() indicates whether the button can be pressed by the
-user.
-
    •  setAutoRepeat() sets whether the button will auto-repeat
-if the user holds it down.
-
    •  setToggleButton() sets whether the button is a toggle
-button or not.
-
    
-
     The difference between isDown() and isOn() is as follows: When the
-user clicks a toggle button to toggle it on, the button is first
-pressed and then released into the on state. When the user
-clicks it again (to toggle it off), the button moves first to the
-pressed state, then to the off state (isOn() and isDown()
-are both FALSE).
-
     Default buttons (as used in many dialogs) are provided by
-TQPushButton::setDefault() and TQPushButton::setAutoDefault().
-
     TQButton provides five signals:
-
      
-
    1.  pressed() is emitted when the button is pressed. E.g. with the mouse
-or when animateClick() is called.
-
    2.  released() is emitted when the button is released. E.g. when the mouse
-is released or the cursor is moved outside the widget.
-
    3.  clicked() is emitted when the button is first pressed and then
-released when the accelerator key is typed, or when
-animateClick() is called.
-
    4.  toggled(bool) is emitted when the state of a toggle button changes.
-
    5.  stateChanged(int) is emitted when the state of a tristate
-toggle button changes.
-
    
-
     If the button is a text button with an ampersand (&) in its text,
-TQButton creates an automatic accelerator key. This code creates a
-push button labelled "Rock & Roll" (where the c is
-underlined). The button gets an automatic accelerator key, Alt+C:
-
     
    -        TQPushButton *p = new TQPushButton( "Ro&ck && Roll", this );
-    
    
- 
-
     In this example, when the user presses Alt+C the button will call
-animateClick().
-
     You can also set a custom accelerator using the setAccel()
-function. This is useful mostly for pixmap buttons because they
-have no automatic accelerator.
-
     
    -        p->setPixmap( TQPixmap("print.png") );
-        p->setAccel( ALT+Key_F7 );
-    
    
- 
-
     All of the buttons provided by TQt (TQPushButton, TQToolButton,
-TQCheckBox and TQRadioButton) can display both text and
-pixmaps.
-
     To subclass TQButton, you must reimplement at least drawButton()
-(to draw the button's outline) and drawButtonLabel() (to draw its
-text or pixmap). It is generally advisable to reimplement
-sizeHint() as well, and sometimes hitButton() (to determine
-whether a button press is within the button).
-
     To reduce flickering, TQButton::paintEvent() sets up a pixmap that
-the drawButton() function draws in. You should not reimplement
-paintEvent() for a subclass of TQButton unless you want to take
-over all drawing.
-
     
    See also TQButtonGroup and Abstract Widget Classes.
-
-
    Member Type Documentation
    
-
    TQButton::ToggleState
    
-
-
     This enum defines the state of a toggle button.
-
      
-
    • TQButton::Off - the button is in the "off" state
-
    • TQButton::NoChange - the button is in the default/unchanged state
-
    • TQButton::On - the button is in the "on" state
-
    
-
    TQButton::ToggleType
    
-
-
     This enum type defines what a button can do in response to a
-mouse/keyboard press:
-
      
-
    • TQButton::SingleShot - pressing the button causes an action, then the
-button returns to the unpressed state.
-
    • TQButton::Toggle - pressing the button toggles it between an On and
-an Off state.
-
    • TQButton::Tristate - pressing the button cycles between the three
-states On, Off and NoChange
-
    
-
    Member Function Documentation
    
-
    TQButton::TQButton ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
-
    
-Constructs a standard button called name with parent parent,
-using the widget flags f.
-
     If parent is a TQButtonGroup, this constructor calls
-TQButtonGroup::insert().
-
-
    TQButton::~TQButton ()
-
    
-Destroys the button.
-
-
    TQKeySequence TQButton::accel () const
-
    Returns the accelerator associated with the button.
-See the "accel" property for details.
-
    void TQButton::animateClick () [slot]
-
    
-Performs an animated click: the button is pressed and released a
-short while later.
-
     The pressed(), released(), clicked(), toggled(), and
-stateChanged() signals are emitted as appropriate.
-
     This function does nothing if the button is disabled.
-
     
    See also accel.
-
-
    bool TQButton::autoRepeat () const
-
    Returns TRUE if autoRepeat is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "autoRepeat" property for details.
-
    bool TQButton::autoResize () const
-
    Returns TRUE if autoResize is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "autoResize" property for details.
-
    void TQButton::clicked () [signal]
-
    
-
-
     This signal is emitted when the button is activated (i.e. first
-pressed down and then released when the mouse cursor is inside the
-button), when the accelerator key is typed or when animateClick()
-is called. This signal is not emitted if you call setDown().
-
     The TQButtonGroup::clicked() signal does the same job, if you want
-to connect several buttons to the same slot.
-
     Warning: Don't launch a model dialog in response to this signal
-for a button that has autoRepeat turned on.
-
     
    See also pressed(), released(), toggled(), autoRepeat, and down.
-
-
    Examples: chart/setdataform.cpp, listbox/listbox.cpp, network/clientserver/client/client.cpp, progressbar/progressbar.cpp, richtext/richtext.cpp, t2/main.cpp, and t4/main.cpp.
-
    void TQButton::drawButton ( TQPainter * ) [virtual protected]
-
    
-Draws the button. The default implementation does nothing.
-
     This virtual function is reimplemented by subclasses to draw real
-buttons. At some point, these reimplementations should call
-drawButtonLabel().
-
     
    See also drawButtonLabel() and paintEvent().
-
-
    void TQButton::drawButtonLabel ( TQPainter * ) [virtual protected]
-
    
-Draws the button text or pixmap.
-
     This virtual function is reimplemented by subclasses to draw real
-buttons. It is invoked by drawButton().
-
     
    See also drawButton() and paintEvent().
-
-
    TQButtonGroup * TQButton::group () const
-
    
-Returns the group that this button belongs to.
-
     If the button is not a member of any TQButtonGroup, this function
-returns 0.
-
     
    See also TQButtonGroup.
-
-
    bool TQButton::hitButton ( const TQPoint & pos ) const [virtual protected]
-
    
-Returns TRUE if pos is inside the clickable button rectangle;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
     By default, the clickable area is the entire widget. Subclasses
-may reimplement it, though.
-
-
    bool TQButton::isDown () const
-
    Returns TRUE if the button is pressed; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "down" property for details.
-
    bool TQButton::isExclusiveToggle () const
-
    Returns TRUE if the button is an exclusive toggle; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "exclusiveToggle" property for details.
-
    bool TQButton::isOn () const
-
    Returns TRUE if the button is toggled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "on" property for details.
-
    bool TQButton::isToggleButton () const
-
    Returns TRUE if the button is a toggle button; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "toggleButton" property for details.
-
    void TQButton::paintEvent ( TQPaintEvent * ) [virtual protected]
-
    
-Handles paint events for buttons. Small and typically complex
-buttons are painted double-buffered to reduce flicker. The
-actually drawing is done in the virtual functions drawButton() and
-drawButtonLabel().
-
     
    See also drawButton() and drawButtonLabel().
-
-
    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
-
    const TQPixmap * TQButton::pixmap () const
-
    Returns the pixmap shown on the button.
-See the "pixmap" property for details.
-
    void TQButton::pressed () [signal]
-
    
-
-
     This signal is emitted when the button is pressed down.
-
     
    See also released() and clicked().
-
-
    Examples: network/httpd/httpd.cpp and popup/popup.cpp.
-
    void TQButton::released () [signal]
-
    
-
-
     This signal is emitted when the button is released.
-
     
    See also pressed(), clicked(), and toggled().
-
-
    void TQButton::setAccel ( const TQKeySequence & ) [virtual]
-
    Sets the accelerator associated with the button.
-See the "accel" property for details.
-
    void TQButton::setAutoRepeat ( bool ) [virtual]
-
    Sets whether autoRepeat is enabled.
-See the "autoRepeat" property for details.
-
    void TQButton::setAutoResize ( bool )
-
    Sets whether autoResize is enabled.
-See the "autoResize" property for details.
-
    void TQButton::setDown ( bool ) [virtual]
-
    Sets whether the button is pressed.
-See the "down" property for details.
-
    void TQButton::setOn ( bool on ) [protected]
-
    
-
-
     Sets the state of this button to On if on is TRUE; otherwise to
-Off.
-
     
    See also toggleState.
-
-
    void TQButton::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & ) [virtual]
-
    Sets the pixmap shown on the button.
-See the "pixmap" property for details.
-
    void TQButton::setState ( ToggleState s ) [virtual protected]
-
    
-Sets the toggle state of the button to s. s can be Off, NoChange or On.
-
-
    void TQButton::setText ( const TQString & ) [virtual]
-
    Sets the text shown on the button.
-See the "text" property for details.
-
    void TQButton::setToggleButton ( bool b ) [protected]
-
    
-
-
     If b is TRUE, this button becomes a toggle button; if b is
-FALSE, this button becomes a command button.
-
     
    See also toggleButton.
-
-
    void TQButton::setToggleType ( ToggleType type ) [virtual protected]
-
    
-Sets the toggle type of the button to type.
-
     type can be set to SingleShot, Toggle and Tristate.
-
-
    ToggleState TQButton::state () const
-
    Returns the state of the toggle button.
-See the "toggleState" property for details.
-
    void TQButton::stateChanged ( int state ) [signal]
-
    
-
-
     This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes state. state is On if the button is on, NoChange if it is in the
-"no change" state or Off
-if the button is off.
-
     This may be the result of a user action, toggle() slot activation,
-setState(), or because setOn() was called.
-
     
    See also clicked() and TQButton::ToggleState.
-
-
    TQString TQButton::text () const
-
    Returns the text shown on the button.
-See the "text" property for details.
-
    void TQButton::toggle () [slot]
-
    
-Toggles the state of a toggle button.
-
     
    See also on, setOn(), toggled(), and toggleButton.
-
-
    ToggleType TQButton::toggleType () const
-
    Returns the type of toggle on the button.
-See the "toggleType" property for details.
-
    void TQButton::toggled ( bool on ) [signal]
-
    
-
-
     This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes status. on is TRUE if the button is on, or FALSE if the button is off.
-
     This may be the result of a user action, toggle() slot activation,
-or because setOn() was called.
-
     
    See also clicked().
-
-
    Example: listbox/listbox.cpp.
-
    Property Documentation
    
-
    TQKeySequence accel
    
-
    This property holds the accelerator associated with the button.
-
    This property is 0 if there is no accelerator set. If you set this
-property to 0 then any current accelerator is removed.
-
-
    Set this property's value with setAccel() and get this property's value with accel().
-
    bool autoRepeat
    
-
    This property holds whether autoRepeat is enabled.
-
    If autoRepeat is enabled then the clicked() signal is emitted at
-regular intervals if the button is down. This property has no
-effect on toggle buttons. autoRepeat is off by default.
-
-
    Set this property's value with setAutoRepeat() and get this property's value with autoRepeat().
-
    bool autoResize
     
    This property holds whether autoResize is enabled.
-
    This property is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
     If autoResize is enabled then the button will resize itself
-whenever the contents are changed.
-
-
    Set this property's value with setAutoResize() and get this property's value with autoResize().
-
    bool down
    
-
    This property holds whether the button is pressed.
-
    If this property is TRUE, the button is pressed down. The signals
-pressed() and clicked() are not emitted if you set this property
-to TRUE. The default is FALSE.
-
-
    Set this property's value with setDown() and get this property's value with isDown().
-
    bool exclusiveToggle
    
-
    This property holds whether the button is an exclusive toggle.
-
    If this property is TRUE and the button is in a TQButtonGroup, the
-button can only be toggled off by another one being toggled on.
-The default is FALSE.
-
-
    Get this property's value with isExclusiveToggle().
-
    bool on
    
-
    This property holds whether the button is toggled.
-
    This property should only be set for toggle buttons.
-
-
    Get this property's value with isOn().
-
    TQPixmap pixmap
    
-
    This property holds the pixmap shown on the button.
-
    If the pixmap is monochrome (i.e. it is a TQBitmap or its depth is 1) and it does not have a mask,
-this property will set the pixmap to be its own mask. The purpose
-of this is to draw transparent bitmaps which are important for
-toggle buttons, for example.
-
     pixmap() returns 0 if no pixmap was set.
-
-
    Set this property's value with setPixmap() and get this property's value with pixmap().
-
    TQString text
    
-
    This property holds the text shown on the button.
-
    This property will return a TQString::null if the button has no
-text. If the text has an ampersand (&) in it, then an
-accelerator is automatically created for it using the character
-that follows the '&' as the accelerator key. Any previous
-accelerator will be overwritten, or cleared if no accelerator is
-defined by the text.
-
     There is no default text.
-
-
    Set this property's value with setText() and get this property's value with text().
-
    bool toggleButton
    
-
    This property holds whether the button is a toggle button.
-
    The default value is FALSE.
-
-
    Get this property's value with isToggleButton().
-
    ToggleState toggleState
    
-
    This property holds the state of the toggle button.
-
    If this property is changed then it does not cause the button
-to be repainted.
-
-
    Get this property's value with state().
-
    ToggleType toggleType
    
-
    This property holds the type of toggle on the button.
-
    The default toggle type is SingleShot.
-
     
    See also TQButton::ToggleType.
-
-
    Get this property's value with toggleType().
-
-
    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
-
-
    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
    TQt 3.3.8
    
-
    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qbuttongroup-h.html b/doc/html/qbuttongroup-h.html
index da29b22c7..1f7e0c5ca 100644
--- a/doc/html/qbuttongroup-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qbuttongroup-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qbuttongroup.h Include File
+ntqbuttongroup.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
    TQButtonGroup Class Reference
    
-
-
    The TQButtonGroup widget organizes TQButton widgets in a group.
-More...
-
    #include <qbuttongroup.h>
-
    Inherits TQGroupBox.
-
    Inherited by TQHButtonGroup and TQVButtonGroup.
-
    List of all member functions.
-
    Public Members
    
-
-
    Signals
    
-
-
    Properties
    
-
-
    Detailed Description
    
-
-
-The TQButtonGroup widget organizes TQButton widgets in a group.
-
     
-
-
-
-
     A button group widget makes it easier to deal with groups of
-buttons. Each button in a button group has a unique identifier.
-The button group emits a clicked() signal with this identifier
-when a button in the group is clicked. This makes a button group
-particularly useful when you have several similar buttons and want
-to connect all their clicked() signals to a single slot.
-
     An exclusive button group switches
-off all toggle buttons except the one that was clicked. A button
-group is, by default, non-exclusive. Note that all radio buttons
-that are inserted into a button group are mutually exclusive even
-if the button group is non-exclusive. (See
-setRadioButtonExclusive().)
-
     There are two ways of using a button group:
-
      
-
    •  The button group is the parent widget of a number of buttons,
-i.e. the button group is the parent argument in the button
-constructor. The buttons are assigned identifiers 0, 1, 2, etc.,
-in the order they are created. A TQButtonGroup can display a frame
-and a title because it inherits TQGroupBox.
-
    •  The button group is an invisible widget and the contained
-buttons have some other parent widget. In this usage, each button
-must be manually inserted, using insert(), into the button group
-and given an identifier.
-
    
-
     A button can be removed from the group with remove(). A pointer to
-a button with a given id can be obtained using find(). The id of a
-button is available using id(). A button can be set on with
-setButton(). The number of buttons in the group is returned by
-count().
-
      
-
     
    See also TQPushButton, TQCheckBox, TQRadioButton, Widget Appearance and Style, Layout Management, and Organizers.
-
-
    Member Function Documentation
    
-
    TQButtonGroup::TQButtonGroup ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
    
-Constructs a button group with no title.
-
     The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
-
    TQButtonGroup::TQButtonGroup ( const TQString & title, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
    
-Constructs a button group with the title title.
-
     The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
-
    TQButtonGroup::TQButtonGroup ( int strips, Orientation orientation, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
    
-Constructs a button group with no title. Child widgets will be
-arranged in strips rows or columns (depending on orientation).
-
     The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
-
    TQButtonGroup::TQButtonGroup ( int strips, Orientation orientation, const TQString & title, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
    
-Constructs a button group with title title. Child widgets will
-be arranged in strips rows or columns (depending on orientation).
-
     The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
-
    void TQButtonGroup::clicked ( int id ) [signal]
-
    
-
-
     This signal is emitted when a button in the group is clicked. The id argument is the
-button's identifier.
-
     
    See also insert().
-
-
    Examples: drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp and xform/xform.cpp.
-
    int TQButtonGroup::count () const
-
    
-Returns the number of buttons in the group.
-
-
    TQButton * TQButtonGroup::find ( int id ) const
-
    
-Returns the button with the specified identifier id, or 0 if
-the button was not found.
-
-
    int TQButtonGroup::id ( TQButton * button ) const
-
    
-Returns the id of button, or -1 if button is not a member of
-this group.
-
     
    See also selectedId.
-
-
    int TQButtonGroup::insert ( TQButton * button, int id = -1 )
-
    
-Inserts the button with the identifier id into the button
-group. Returns the button identifier.
-
     Buttons are normally inserted into a button group automatically by
-passing the button group as the parent when the button is
-constructed. So it is not necessary to manually insert buttons
-that have this button group as their parent widget. An exception
-is when you want custom identifiers instead of the default 0, 1,
-2, etc., or if you want the buttons to have some other parent.
-
     The button is assigned the identifier id or an automatically
-generated identifier. It works as follows: If id >= 0, this
-identifier is assigned. If id == -1 (default), the identifier
-is equal to the number of buttons in the group. If id is any
-other negative integer, for instance -2, a unique identifier
-(negative integer <= -2) is generated. No button has an id of -1.
-
     
    See also find(), remove(), and exclusive.
-
-
    Examples: listbox/listbox.cpp and xform/xform.cpp.
-
    bool TQButtonGroup::isExclusive () const
-
    Returns TRUE if the button group is exclusive; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "exclusive" property for details.
-
    bool TQButtonGroup::isRadioButtonExclusive () const
-
    Returns TRUE if the radio buttons in the group are exclusive; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "radioButtonExclusive" property for details.
-
    void TQButtonGroup::moveFocus ( int key ) [virtual]
-
    
-Moves the keyboard focus according to key, and if appropriate
-checks the new focus item.
-
     This function does nothing unless the keyboard focus points to one
-of the button group members and key is one of Key_Up, Key_Down, Key_Left and Key_Right.
-
-
    void TQButtonGroup::pressed ( int id ) [signal]
-
    
-
-
     This signal is emitted when a button in the group is pressed. The id argument is the
-button's identifier.
-
     
    See also insert().
-
-
    void TQButtonGroup::released ( int id ) [signal]
-
    
-
-
     This signal is emitted when a button in the group is released. The id argument is the
-button's identifier.
-
     
    See also insert().
-
-
    void TQButtonGroup::remove ( TQButton * button )
-
    
-Removes the button from the button group.
-
     
    See also insert().
-
-
    TQButton * TQButtonGroup::selected () const
-
    
-Returns the selected toggle button if exactly one is selected;
-otherwise returns 0.
-
     
    See also selectedId.
-
-
    int TQButtonGroup::selectedId () const
-
    Returns the selected toggle button.
-See the "selectedId" property for details.
-
    void TQButtonGroup::setButton ( int id ) [virtual]
-
    Sets the selected toggle button to id.
-See the "selectedId" property for details.
-
    void TQButtonGroup::setExclusive ( bool ) [virtual]
-
    Sets whether the button group is exclusive.
-See the "exclusive" property for details.
-
    void TQButtonGroup::setRadioButtonExclusive ( bool ) [virtual]
-
    Sets whether the radio buttons in the group are exclusive.
-See the "radioButtonExclusive" property for details.
-
    Property Documentation
    
-
    bool exclusive
    
-
    This property holds whether the button group is exclusive.
-
    If this property is TRUE, then the buttons in the group are
-toggled, and to untoggle a button you must click on another button
-in the group. The default value is FALSE.
-
-
    Set this property's value with setExclusive() and get this property's value with isExclusive().
-
    bool radioButtonExclusive
    
-
    This property holds whether the radio buttons in the group are exclusive.
-
    If this property is TRUE (the default), the radiobuttons in the group are treated exclusively.
-
-
    Set this property's value with setRadioButtonExclusive() and get this property's value with isRadioButtonExclusive().
-
    int selectedId
    
-
    This property holds the selected toggle button.
-
    The toggle button is specified as an ID.
-
     If no toggle button is selected, this property holds -1.
-
     If setButton() is called on an exclusive group, the button with
-the given id will be set to on and all the others will be set to
-off.
-
     
    See also selected().
-
-
    Set this property's value with setButton() and get this property's value with selectedId().
-
-
    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
-
-
    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
    TQt 3.3.8
    
-
    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qbytearray-members.html b/doc/html/qbytearray-members.html
index 9e801ad5d..986c09150 100644
--- a/doc/html/qbytearray-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qbytearray-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -36,33 +36,33 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
 
 
    
diff --git a/doc/html/qbytearray.html b/doc/html/qbytearray.html
index 8df0bb82d..b9aa987c1 100644
--- a/doc/html/qbytearray.html
+++ b/doc/html/qbytearray.html
@@ -34,9 +34,9 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
    The TQByteArray class provides an array of bytes.
 More...
 
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
-
    #include <qcstring.h>
-
    Inherits TQMemArray<char>.
-
    Inherited by TQBitArray and TQCString.
+
    #include <ntqcstring.h>
+
    Inherits TQMemArray<char>.
+
    Inherited by TQBitArray and TQCString.
 
    List of all member functions.
 
    Public Members
    
 
      
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ The TQByteArray class provides an array of bytes.
 
 
       The TQByteArray class provides an explicitly shared array of bytes.
 It is useful for manipulating memory areas with custom data.
-TQByteArray is implemented as a TQMemArray<char>. See the TQMemArray documentation for further information.
+TQByteArray is implemented as a TQMemArray<char>. See the TQMemArray documentation for further information.
 
      See also Collection Classes and Non-GUI Classes.
 
 
      Member Function Documentation
      
diff --git a/doc/html/qcache-h.html b/doc/html/qcache-h.html
index 96a63fe9d..16feebd86 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcache-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcache-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qcache.h Include File
+ntqcache.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
      
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
      TQCache Class Reference
      
-
-
      The TQCache class is a template class that provides a cache based on TQString keys.
-More...
-
      #include <qcache.h>
-
      Inherits TQPtrCollection.
-
      List of all member functions.
-
      Public Members
      
-
        
-
      • TQCache ( int maxCost = 100, int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE )
        • 
-
      • ~TQCache ()
        • 
-
      • int maxCost () const
        • 
-
      • int totalCost () const
        • 
-
      • void setMaxCost ( int m )
        • 
-
      • virtual uint count () const
        • 
-
      • uint size () const
        • 
-
      • bool isEmpty () const
        • 
-
      • virtual void clear ()
        • 
-
      • bool insert ( const TQString & k, const type * d, int c = 1, int p = 0 )
        • 
-
      • bool remove ( const TQString & k )
        • 
-
      • type * take ( const TQString & k )
        • 
-
      • type * find ( const TQString & k, bool ref = TRUE ) const
        • 
-
      • type * operator[] ( const TQString & k ) const
        • 
-
      • void statistics () const
        • 
-
      
-
      Important Inherited Members
      
-
-
      Detailed Description
      
-
-
-The TQCache class is a template class that provides a cache based on TQString keys.
-
       
-
-
       
-
       A cache is a least recently used (LRU) list of cache items. Each
-cache item has a key and a certain cost. The sum of item costs,
-totalCost(), never exceeds the maximum cache cost, maxCost(). If
-inserting a new item would cause the total cost to exceed the
-maximum cost, the least recently used items in the cache are
-removed.
-
       TQCache is a template class. TQCache<X> defines a cache that
-operates on pointers to X, or X*.
-
       Apart from insert(), by far the most important function is find()
-(which also exists as operator[]()). This function looks up an
-item, returns it, and by default marks it as being the most
-recently used item.
-
       There are also methods to remove() or take() an object from the
-cache. Calling setAutoDelete(TRUE) for a cache tells it to delete
-items that are removed. The default is to not delete items when
-they are removed (i.e., remove() and take() are equivalent).
-
       When inserting an item into the cache, only the pointer is copied,
-not the item itself. This is called a shallow copy. It is possible
-to make the cache copy all of the item's data (known as a deep copy) when an item is inserted. insert() calls the virtual
-function TQPtrCollection::newItem() for the item to be inserted.
-Inherit a cache and reimplement newItem() if you want deep copies.
-
       When removing a cache item, the virtual function
-TQPtrCollection::deleteItem() is called. The default
-implementation deletes the item if auto-deletion is enabled, and
-does nothing otherwise.
-
       There is a TQCacheIterator that can be used to traverse the items
-in the cache in arbitrary order.
-
       In TQCache, the cache items are accessed via TQString keys, which
-are Unicode strings. If you want to use non-Unicode, plain 8-bit
-char* keys, use the TQAsciiCache template. A TQCache has the
-same performance as a TQAsciiCache.
-
       
      See also TQCacheIterator, TQAsciiCache, TQIntCache, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
-
-
      Member Function Documentation
      
-
      TQCache::TQCache ( int maxCost = 100, int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE )
-
      
-
-
       Constructs a cache whose contents will never have a total cost
-greater than maxCost and which is expected to contain less than
-size items.
-
       size is actually the size of an internal hash array; it's
-usually best to make it a prime number and at least 50% bigger
-than the largest expected number of items in the cache.
-
       Each inserted item has an associated cost. When inserting a new
-item, if the total cost of all items in the cache will exceed maxCost, the cache will start throwing out the older (least
-recently used) items until there is enough room for the new item
-to be inserted.
-
       If caseSensitive is TRUE (the default), the cache keys are case
-sensitive; if it is FALSE, they are case-insensitive.
-Case-insensitive comparison considers all Unicode letters.
-
-
      TQCache::~TQCache ()
-
      
-
-
       Removes all items from the cache and destroys it. All iterators
-that access this cache will be reset.
-
-
      bool TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const
-
      
-
-
       Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE.
-
       
      See also setAutoDelete().
-
-
      void TQCache::clear () [virtual]
-
      
-
-
       Removes all items from the cache and deletes them if auto-deletion
-has been enabled.
-
       All cache iterators that operate this on cache are reset.
-
       
      See also remove() and take().
-
-
      Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
-
      uint TQCache::count () const [virtual]
-
      
-
-
       Returns the number of items in the cache.
-
       
      See also totalCost().
-
-
      Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
-
      type * TQCache::find ( const TQString & k, bool ref = TRUE ) const
-
      
-
-
       Returns the item associated with key k, or 0 if the key does
-not exist in the cache. If ref is TRUE (the default), the item
-is moved to the front of the least recently used list.
-
       If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was
-inserted last is returned.
-
-
      bool TQCache::insert ( const TQString & k, const type * d, int c = 1, int p = 0 )
-
      
-
-
       Inserts the item d into the cache with key k and associated
-cost, c. Returns TRUE if it is successfully inserted; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
       The cache's size is limited, and if the total cost is too high,
-TQCache will remove old, least recently used items until there is
-room for this new item.
-
       The parameter p is internal and should be left at the default
-value (0).
-
       Warning: If this function returns FALSE (which could happen, e.g.
-if the cost of this item alone exceeds maxCost()) you must delete
-d yourself. Additionally, be very careful about using d
-after calling this function because any other insertions into the
-cache, from anywhere in the application or within TQt itself, could
-cause the object to be discarded from the cache and the pointer to
-become invalid.
-
-
      bool TQCache::isEmpty () const
-
      
-
-
       Returns TRUE if the cache is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
      int TQCache::maxCost () const
-
      
-
-
       Returns the maximum allowed total cost of the cache.
-
       
      See also setMaxCost() and totalCost().
-
-
      type * TQCache::operator[] ( const TQString & k ) const
-
      
-
-
       Returns the item associated with key k, or 0 if k does not
-exist in the cache, and moves the item to the front of the least
-recently used list.
-
       If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was
-inserted last is returned.
-
       This is the same as find( k, TRUE ).
-
       
      See also find().
-
-
      bool TQCache::remove ( const TQString & k )
-
      
-
-
       Removes the item associated with k, and returns TRUE if the
-item was present in the cache; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
       The item is deleted if auto-deletion has been enabled, i.e., if
-you have called setAutoDelete(TRUE).
-
       If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was
-inserted last is removed.
-
       All iterators that refer to the removed item are set to point to
-the next item in the cache's traversal order.
-
       
      See also take() and clear().
-
-
      void TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )
-
      
-
-
       Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if enable is
-TRUE and to never delete them if enable is FALSE.
-
       If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are
-deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient
-if the collection has the only pointer to the items.
-
       The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be
-careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself
-with two collections deleting the same items.
-
       Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions
-in subclasses. For example, a subclass that has a remove()
-function will remove the item from its data structure, and if
-auto-delete is enabled, will also delete the item.
-
       
      See also autoDelete().
-
-
      Examples: grapher/grapher.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, and table/bigtable/main.cpp.
-
      void TQCache::setMaxCost ( int m )
-
      
-
-
       Sets the maximum allowed total cost of the cache to m. If the
-current total cost is greater than m, some items are deleted
-immediately.
-
       
      See also maxCost() and totalCost().
-
-
      uint TQCache::size () const
-
      
-
-
       Returns the size of the hash array used to implement the cache.
-This should be a bit bigger than count() is likely to be.
-
-
      void TQCache::statistics () const
-
      
-
-
       A debug-only utility function. Prints out cache usage, hit/miss,
-and distribution information using qDebug(). This function does
-nothing in the release library.
-
-
      type * TQCache::take ( const TQString & k )
-
      
-
-
       Takes the item associated with k out of the cache without
-deleting it, and returns a pointer to the item taken out, or 0
-if the key does not exist in the cache.
-
       If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was
-inserted last is taken.
-
       All iterators that refer to the taken item are set to point to the
-next item in the cache's traversal order.
-
       
      See also remove() and clear().
-
-
      int TQCache::totalCost () const
-
      
-
-
       Returns the total cost of the items in the cache. This is an
-integer in the range 0 to maxCost().
-
       
      See also setMaxCost().
-
-
-
      
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
      
-
-
      Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
      TQt 3.3.8
      
-
      
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qcacheiterator-members.html b/doc/html/qcacheiterator-members.html
index 2bbd4dcaf..3a7c09eaa 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcacheiterator-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcacheiterator-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qcacheiterator.html b/doc/html/qcacheiterator.html
index a53556e35..d4be3eda3 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcacheiterator.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcacheiterator.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
      The TQCacheIterator class provides an iterator for TQCache collections.
 More...
-
      #include <qcache.h>
+
      #include <ntqcache.h>
 
      List of all member functions.
 
      Public Members
      
 
        
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
        Detailed Description
        
 
 
-The TQCacheIterator class provides an iterator for TQCache collections.
+The TQCacheIterator class provides an iterator for TQCache collections.
 
         
 
 
         Note that the traversal order is arbitrary; you are not guaranteed
@@ -77,10 +77,10 @@ returns TRUE if the cache is empty, and count() returns the
 of items in the cache.
 
         Note that atFirst() and atLast() refer to the iterator's arbitrary
 ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list.
-
         
        See also TQCache, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
         
        See also TQCache, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
 
 
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        TQCacheIterator::TQCacheIterator ( const TQCache<type> & cache )
+
        TQCacheIterator::TQCacheIterator ( const TQCache<type> & cache )
 
        
 
 
         Constructs an iterator for cache. The current iterator item is
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ operates.
 
 
         Returns a pointer to the current iterator item.
 
-
        TQString TQCacheIterator::currentKey () const
+
        TQString TQCacheIterator::currentKey () const
 
        
 
 
         Returns the key for the current iterator item.
diff --git a/doc/html/qcanvas-h.html b/doc/html/qcanvas-h.html
index c6fdf861e..80ff0b831 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcanvas-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcanvas-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qcanvas.h Include File
+ntqcanvas.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
        TQCanvas Class Reference
        [canvas module]
        
-
-
        The TQCanvas class provides a 2D area that can contain TQCanvasItem objects.
-More...
-
        #include <qcanvas.h>
-
        Inherits TQObject.
-
        List of all member functions.
-
        Public Members
        
-
-
        Public Slots
        
-
-
        Signals
        
-
-
        Protected Members
        
-
          
-
        • virtual void drawBackground ( TQPainter & painter, const TQRect & clip )
          • 
-
        • virtual void drawForeground ( TQPainter & painter, const TQRect & clip )
          • 
-
        
-
        Detailed Description
        
-
-
-The TQCanvas class provides a 2D area that can contain TQCanvasItem objects.
-
-
         
-
-
-
-
-
         The TQCanvas class manages its 2D graphic area and all the canvas
-items the area contains. The canvas has no visual appearance of
-its own. Instead, it is displayed on screen using a TQCanvasView.
-Multiple TQCanvasView widgets may be associated with a canvas to
-provide multiple views of the same canvas.
-
         The canvas is optimized for large numbers of items, particularly
-where only a small percentage of the items change at any
-one time. If the entire display changes very frequently, you should
-consider using your own custom TQScrollView subclass.
-
         TQt provides a rich
-set of canvas item classes, e.g. TQCanvasEllipse, TQCanvasLine,
-TQCanvasPolygon, TQCanvasPolygonalItem, TQCanvasRectangle, TQCanvasSpline,
-TQCanvasSprite and TQCanvasText. You can subclass to create your own
-canvas items; TQCanvasPolygonalItem is the most common base class used
-for this purpose.
-
         Items appear on the canvas after their show() function has been called (or setVisible(TRUE)), and after
-update() has been called. The canvas only shows items that are
-visible, and then only if
-update() is called. (By default the canvas is white and so are
-canvas items, so if nothing appears try changing colors.)
-
         If you created the canvas without passing a width and height to
-the constructor you must also call resize().
-
         Although a canvas may appear to be similar to a widget with child
-widgets, there are several notable differences:
-
         
          
-
        •  Canvas items are usually much faster to manipulate and redraw than
-child widgets, with the speed advantage becoming especially great when
-there are many canvas items and non-rectangular items. In most
-situations canvas items are also a lot more memory efficient than child
-widgets.
-
           
        •  It's easy to detect overlapping items (collision detection).
-
           
        •  The canvas can be larger than a widget. A million-by-million canvas
-is perfectly possible. At such a size a widget might be very
-inefficient, and some window systems might not support it at all,
-whereas TQCanvas scales well. Even with a billion pixels and a million
-items, finding a particular canvas item, detecting collisions, etc.,
-is still fast (though the memory consumption may be prohibitive
-at such extremes).
-
           
        •  Two or more TQCanvasView objects can view the same canvas.
-
           
        •  An arbitrary transformation matrix can be set on each TQCanvasView
-which makes it easy to zoom, rotate or shear the viewed canvas.
-
           
        •  Widgets provide a lot more functionality, such as input (TQKeyEvent,
-TQMouseEvent etc.) and layout management (TQGridLayout etc.).
-
           
        
-
         A canvas consists of a background, a number of canvas items organized by
-x, y and z coordinates, and a foreground. A canvas item's z coordinate
-can be treated as a layer number -- canvas items with a higher z
-coordinate appear in front of canvas items with a lower z coordinate.
-
         The background is white by default, but can be set to a different color
-using setBackgroundColor(), or to a repeated pixmap using
-setBackgroundPixmap() or to a mosaic of smaller pixmaps using
-setTiles(). Individual tiles can be set with setTile(). There
-are corresponding get functions, e.g. backgroundColor() and
-backgroundPixmap().
-
         Note that TQCanvas does not inherit from TQWidget, even though it has some
-functions which provide the same functionality as those in TQWidget. One
-of these is setBackgroundPixmap(); some others are resize(), size(),
-width() and height(). TQCanvasView is the widget used to display a
-canvas on the screen.
-
         Canvas items are added to a canvas by constructing them and passing the
-canvas to the canvas item's constructor. An item can be moved to a
-different canvas using TQCanvasItem::setCanvas().
-
         Canvas items are movable (and in the case of TQCanvasSprites, animated)
-objects that inherit TQCanvasItem. Each canvas item has a position on the
-canvas (x, y coordinates) and a height (z coordinate), all of which are
-held as floating-point numbers. Moving canvas items also have x and y
-velocities. It's possible for a canvas item to be outside the canvas
-(for example TQCanvasItem::x() is greater than width()). When a canvas
-item is off the canvas, onCanvas() returns FALSE and the canvas
-disregards the item. (Canvas items off the canvas do not slow down any
-of the common operations on the canvas.)
-
         Canvas items can be moved with TQCanvasItem::move(). The advance()
-function moves all TQCanvasItem::animated() canvas items and
-setAdvancePeriod() makes TQCanvas move them automatically on a periodic
-basis. In the context of the TQCanvas classes, to `animate' a canvas item
-is to set it in motion, i.e. using TQCanvasItem::setVelocity(). Animation
-of a canvas item itself, i.e. items which change over time, is enabled
-by calling TQCanvasSprite::setFrameAnimation(), or more generally by
-subclassing and reimplementing TQCanvasItem::advance(). To detect collisions
-use one of the TQCanvasItem::collisions() functions.
-
         The changed parts of the canvas are redrawn (if they are visible in a
-canvas view) whenever update() is called. You can either call update()
-manually after having changed the contents of the canvas, or force
-periodic updates using setUpdatePeriod(). If you have moving objects on
-the canvas, you must call advance() every time the objects should
-move one step further. Periodic calls to advance() can be forced using
-setAdvancePeriod(). The advance() function will call
-TQCanvasItem::advance() on every item that is animated and trigger an update of the
-affected areas afterwards. (A canvas item that is `animated' is simply
-a canvas item that is in motion.)
-
         TQCanvas organizes its canvas items into chunks; these are areas on
-the canvas that are used to speed up most operations. Many operations
-start by eliminating most chunks (i.e. those which haven't changed)
-and then process only the canvas items that are in the few interesting
-(i.e. changed) chunks. A valid chunk, validChunk(), is one which is on
-the canvas.
-
         The chunk size is a key factor to TQCanvas's speed: if there are too many
-chunks, the speed benefit of grouping canvas items into chunks is
-reduced. If the chunks are too large, it takes too long to process each
-one. The TQCanvas constructor tries to pick a suitable size, but you
-can call retune() to change it at any time. The chunkSize() function
-returns the current chunk size. The canvas items always make sure
-they're in the right chunks; all you need to make sure of is that
-the canvas uses the right chunk size. A good rule of thumb is that
-the size should be a bit smaller than the average canvas item
-size. If you have moving objects, the chunk size should be a bit
-smaller than the average size of the moving items.
-
         The foreground is normally nothing, but if you reimplement
-drawForeground(), you can draw things in front of all the canvas
-items.
-
         Areas can be set as changed with setChanged() and set unchanged with
-setUnchanged(). The entire canvas can be set as changed with
-setAllChanged(). A list of all the items on the canvas is returned by
-allItems().
-
         An area can be copied (painted) to a TQPainter with drawArea().
-
         If the canvas is resized it emits the resized() signal.
-
         The examples/canvas application and the 2D graphics page of the
-examples/demo application demonstrate many of TQCanvas's facilities.
-
         
        See also TQCanvasView, TQCanvasItem, Abstract Widget Classes, Graphics Classes, and Image Processing Classes.
-
-
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        TQCanvas::TQCanvas ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
        
-Create a TQCanvas with no size. parent and name are passed to
-the TQObject superclass.
-
         Warning: You must call resize() at some time after creation to
-be able to use the canvas.
-
-
        TQCanvas::TQCanvas ( int w, int h )
-
        
-Constructs a TQCanvas that is w pixels wide and h pixels high.
-
-
        TQCanvas::TQCanvas ( TQPixmap p, int h, int v, int tilewidth, int tileheight )
-
        
-Constructs a TQCanvas which will be composed of h tiles
-horizontally and v tiles vertically. Each tile will be an image
-tilewidth by tileheight pixels taken from pixmap p.
-
         The pixmap p is a list of tiles, arranged left to right, (and
-in the case of pixmaps that have multiple rows of tiles, top to
-bottom), with tile 0 in the top-left corner, tile 1 next to the
-right, and so on, e.g.
-
         
        
-
         0 1 2 3
-
         4 5 6 7
-
        
-
         The TQCanvas is initially sized to show exactly the given number of
-tiles horizontally and vertically. If it is resized to be larger,
-the entire matrix of tiles will be repeated as often as necessary
-to cover the area. If it is smaller, tiles to the right and bottom
-will not be visible.
-
         
        See also setTiles().
-
-
        TQCanvas::~TQCanvas () [virtual]
-
        
-Destroys the canvas and all the canvas's canvas items.
-
-
        void TQCanvas::advance () [virtual slot]
-
        
-Moves all TQCanvasItem::animated() canvas items on the canvas and
-refreshes all changes to all views of the canvas. (An `animated'
-item is an item that is in motion; see setVelocity().)
-
         The advance takes place in two phases. In phase 0, the
-TQCanvasItem::advance() function of each TQCanvasItem::animated()
-canvas item is called with paramater 0. Then all these canvas
-items are called again, with parameter 1. In phase 0, the canvas
-items should not change position, merely examine other items on
-the canvas for which special processing is required, such as
-collisions between items. In phase 1, all canvas items should
-change positions, ignoring any other items on the canvas. This
-two-phase approach allows for considerations of "fairness",
-although no TQCanvasItem subclasses supplied with TQt do anything
-interesting in phase 0.
-
         The canvas can be configured to call this function periodically
-with setAdvancePeriod().
-
         
        See also update().
-
-
        TQCanvasItemList TQCanvas::allItems ()
-
        
-Returns a list of all the items in the canvas.
-
-
        TQColor TQCanvas::backgroundColor () const
-
        
-Returns the color set by setBackgroundColor(). By default, this is
-white.
-
         This function is not a reimplementation of
-TQWidget::backgroundColor() (TQCanvas is not a subclass of TQWidget),
-but all TQCanvasViews that are viewing the canvas will set their
-backgrounds to this color.
-
         
        See also setBackgroundColor() and backgroundPixmap().
-
-
        TQPixmap TQCanvas::backgroundPixmap () const
-
        
-Returns the pixmap set by setBackgroundPixmap(). By default,
-this is a null pixmap.
-
         
        See also setBackgroundPixmap() and backgroundColor().
-
-
        int TQCanvas::chunkSize () const
-
        
-
-
         Returns the chunk size of the canvas.
-
         
        See also retune().
-
-
        TQCanvasItemList TQCanvas::collisions ( const TQPoint & p ) const
-
        
-Returns a list of canvas items that collide with the point p.
-The list is ordered by z coordinates, from highest z coordinate
-(front-most item) to lowest z coordinate (rear-most item).
-
-
        TQCanvasItemList TQCanvas::collisions ( const TQRect & r ) const
-
        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
         Returns a list of items which collide with the rectangle r. The
-list is ordered by z coordinates, from highest z coordinate
-(front-most item) to lowest z coordinate (rear-most item).
-
-
        TQCanvasItemList TQCanvas::collisions ( const TQPointArray & chunklist, const TQCanvasItem * item, bool exact ) const
-
        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
         Returns a list of canvas items which intersect with the chunks
-listed in chunklist, excluding item. If exact is TRUE,
-only those which actually collide with item are returned; otherwise canvas items
-are included just for being in the chunks.
-
         This is a utility function mainly used to implement the simpler
-TQCanvasItem::collisions() function.
-
-
        void TQCanvas::drawArea ( const TQRect & clip, TQPainter * painter, bool dbuf = FALSE )
-
        
-Paints all canvas items that are in the area clip to painter, using double-buffering if dbuf is TRUE.
-
         e.g. to print the canvas to a printer:
-
        -    TQPrinter pr;
-    if ( pr.setup() ) {
-        TQPainter p(&pr);
-        canvas.drawArea( canvas.rect(), &p );
-    }
-    
        
- 
-
-
        Example: canvas/canvas.cpp.
-
        void TQCanvas::drawBackground ( TQPainter & painter, const TQRect & clip ) [virtual protected]
-
        
-This virtual function is called for all updates of the canvas. It
-renders any background graphics using the painter painter, in
-the area clip. If the canvas has a background pixmap or a tiled
-background, that graphic is used, otherwise the canvas is cleared
-using the background color.
-
         If the graphics for an area change, you must explicitly call
-setChanged(const TQRect&) for the result to be visible when
-update() is next called.
-
         
        See also setBackgroundColor(), setBackgroundPixmap(), and setTiles().
-
-
        void TQCanvas::drawForeground ( TQPainter & painter, const TQRect & clip ) [virtual protected]
-
        
-This virtual function is called for all updates of the canvas. It
-renders any foreground graphics using the painter painter, in
-the area clip.
-
         If the graphics for an area change, you must explicitly call
-setChanged(const TQRect&) for the result to be visible when
-update() is next called.
-
         The default is to draw nothing.
-
-
        int TQCanvas::height () const
-
        
-
-
         Returns the height of the canvas, in pixels.
-
-
        Example: canvas/canvas.cpp.
-
        bool TQCanvas::onCanvas ( int x, int y ) const
-
        
-
-
         Returns TRUE if the pixel position (x, y) is on the canvas;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
         
        See also validChunk().
-
-
        bool TQCanvas::onCanvas ( const TQPoint & p ) const
-
        
-
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
         Returns TRUE if the pixel position p is on the canvas;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
         
        See also validChunk().
-
-
        TQRect TQCanvas::rect () const
-
        
-
-
         Returns a rectangle the size of the canvas.
-
-
        void TQCanvas::resize ( int w, int h ) [virtual]
-
        
-Changes the size of the canvas to have a width of w and a
-height of h. This is a slow operation.
-
-
        Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp and chart/chartform.cpp.
-
        void TQCanvas::resized () [signal]
-
        
-
-
         This signal is emitted whenever the canvas is resized. Each
-TQCanvasView connects to this signal to keep the scrollview's size
-correct.
-
-
        void TQCanvas::retune ( int chunksze, int mxclusters = 100 ) [virtual]
-
        
-Change the efficiency tuning parameters to mxclusters clusters,
-each of size chunksze. This is a slow operation if there are
-many objects on the canvas.
-
         The canvas is divided into chunks which are rectangular areas chunksze wide by chunksze high. Use a chunk size which is about
-the average size of the canvas items. If you choose a chunk size
-which is too small it will increase the amount of calculation
-required when drawing since each change will affect many chunks.
-If you choose a chunk size which is too large the amount of
-drawing required will increase because for each change, a lot of
-drawing will be required since there will be many (unchanged)
-canvas items which are in the same chunk as the changed canvas
-items.
-
         Internally, a canvas uses a low-resolution "chunk matrix" to keep
-track of all the items in the canvas. A 64x64 chunk matrix is the
-default for a 1024x1024 pixel canvas, where each chunk collects
-canvas items in a 16x16 pixel square. This default is also
-affected by setTiles(). You can tune this default using this
-function. For example if you have a very large canvas and want to
-trade off speed for memory then you might set the chunk size to 32
-or 64.
-
         The mxclusters argument is the number of rectangular groups of
-chunks that will be separately drawn. If the canvas has a large
-number of small, dispersed items, this should be about that
-number. Our testing suggests that a large number of clusters is
-almost always best.
-
         
-
        void TQCanvas::setAdvancePeriod ( int ms ) [virtual]
-
        
-Sets the canvas to call advance() every ms milliseconds. Any
-previous setting by setAdvancePeriod() or setUpdatePeriod() is
-overridden.
-
         If ms is less than 0 advancing will be stopped.
-
-
        Example: canvas/main.cpp.
-
        void TQCanvas::setAllChanged () [virtual]
-
        
-Marks the whole canvas as changed.
-All views of the canvas will be entirely redrawn when
-update() is called next.
-
-
        void TQCanvas::setBackgroundColor ( const TQColor & c ) [virtual]
-
        
-Sets the solid background to be the color c.
-
         
        See also backgroundColor(), setBackgroundPixmap(), and setTiles().
-
-
        void TQCanvas::setBackgroundPixmap ( const TQPixmap & p ) [virtual]
-
        
-Sets the solid background to be the pixmap p repeated as
-necessary to cover the entire canvas.
-
         
        See also backgroundPixmap(), setBackgroundColor(), and setTiles().
-
-
        void TQCanvas::setChanged ( const TQRect & area ) [virtual]
-
        
-Marks area as changed. This area will be redrawn in all
-views that are showing it when update() is called next.
-
-
        void TQCanvas::setDoubleBuffering ( bool y ) [virtual]
-
        
-If y is TRUE (the default) double-buffering is switched on;
-otherwise double-buffering is switched off.
-
         Turning off double-buffering causes the redrawn areas to flicker a
-little and also gives a (usually small) performance improvement.
-
-
        Example: canvas/canvas.cpp.
-
        void TQCanvas::setTile ( int x, int y, int tilenum ) [virtual]
-
        
-Sets the tile at (x, y) to use tile number tilenum, which
-is an index into the tile pixmaps. The canvas will update
-appropriately when update() is next called.
-
         The images are taken from the pixmap set by setTiles() and are
-arranged left to right, (and in the case of pixmaps that have
-multiple rows of tiles, top to bottom), with tile 0 in the
-top-left corner, tile 1 next to the right, and so on, e.g.
-
         
        
-
         0 1 2 3
-
         4 5 6 7
-
        
-
         
        See also tile() and setTiles().
-
-
        void TQCanvas::setTiles ( TQPixmap p, int h, int v, int tilewidth, int tileheight ) [virtual]
-
        
-Sets the TQCanvas to be composed of h tiles horizontally and v tiles vertically. Each tile will be an image tilewidth by tileheight pixels from pixmap p.
-
         The pixmap p is a list of tiles, arranged left to right, (and
-in the case of pixmaps that have multiple rows of tiles, top to
-bottom), with tile 0 in the top-left corner, tile 1 next to the
-right, and so on, e.g.
-
         
        
-
         0 1 2 3
-
         4 5 6 7
-
        
-
         If the canvas is larger than the matrix of tiles, the entire
-matrix is repeated as necessary to cover the whole canvas. If it
-is smaller, tiles to the right and bottom are not visible.
-
         The width and height of p must be a multiple of tilewidth
-and tileheight. If they are not the function will do nothing.
-
         If you want to unset any tiling set, then just pass in a null
-pixmap and 0 for h, v, tilewidth, and
-tileheight.
-
-
        void TQCanvas::setUnchanged ( const TQRect & area ) [virtual]
-
        
-Marks area as unchanged. The area will not be redrawn in
-the views for the next update(), unless it is marked or changed
-again before the next call to update().
-
-
        void TQCanvas::setUpdatePeriod ( int ms ) [virtual]
-
        
-Sets the canvas to call update() every ms milliseconds. Any
-previous setting by setAdvancePeriod() or setUpdatePeriod() is
-overridden.
-
         If ms is less than 0 automatic updating will be stopped.
-
-
        TQSize TQCanvas::size () const
-
        
-
-
         Returns the size of the canvas, in pixels.
-
-
        int TQCanvas::tile ( int x, int y ) const
-
        
-
-
         Returns the tile at position (x, y). Initially, all tiles
-are 0.
-
         The parameters must be within range, i.e.
-0 < x < tilesHorizontally() and
-0 < y < tilesVertically().
-
         
        See also setTile().
-
-
        int TQCanvas::tileHeight () const
-
        
-
-
         Returns the height of each tile.
-
-
        int TQCanvas::tileWidth () const
-
        
-
-
         Returns the width of each tile.
-
-
        int TQCanvas::tilesHorizontally () const
-
        
-
-
         Returns the number of tiles horizontally.
-
-
        int TQCanvas::tilesVertically () const
-
        
-
-
         Returns the number of tiles vertically.
-
-
        void TQCanvas::update () [virtual slot]
-
        
-Repaints changed areas in all views of the canvas.
-
         
        See also advance().
-
-
        bool TQCanvas::validChunk ( int x, int y ) const
-
        
-
-
         Returns TRUE if the chunk position (x, y) is on the canvas;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
         
        See also onCanvas().
-
-
        bool TQCanvas::validChunk ( const TQPoint & p ) const
-
        
-
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
         Returns TRUE if the chunk position p is on the canvas; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
         
        See also onCanvas().
-
-
        int TQCanvas::width () const
-
        
-
-
         Returns the width of the canvas, in pixels.
-
-
        Example: canvas/canvas.cpp.
-
-
        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
        
-
-
        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
        TQt 3.3.8
        
-
        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qcanvasellipse-members.html b/doc/html/qcanvasellipse-members.html
index 2a7614c14..f6da46988 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcanvasellipse-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcanvasellipse-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qcanvasellipse.html b/doc/html/qcanvasellipse.html
index 18131f945..65dbef944 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcanvasellipse.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcanvasellipse.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
        The TQCanvasEllipse class provides an ellipse or ellipse segment on a TQCanvas.
 More...
-
        #include <qcanvas.h>
+
        #include <ntqcanvas.h>
 
        Inherits TQCanvasPolygonalItem.
 
        List of all member functions.
 
        Public Members
        
@@ -57,12 +57,12 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
        Detailed Description
        
 
 
-The TQCanvasEllipse class provides an ellipse or ellipse segment on a TQCanvas.
+The TQCanvasEllipse class provides an ellipse or ellipse segment on a TQCanvas.
 
 
         
 
 
-
         A canvas item that paints an ellipse or ellipse segment with a TQBrush.
+
         A canvas item that paints an ellipse or ellipse segment with a TQBrush.
 The ellipse's height, width, start angle and angle length can be set
 at construction time. The size can be changed at runtime with
 setSize(), and the angles can be changed (if you're displaying an
@@ -85,16 +85,16 @@ drawn.
 
        See also Graphics Classes and Image Processing Classes.
 
 
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        TQCanvasEllipse::TQCanvasEllipse ( TQCanvas * canvas )
+
        TQCanvasEllipse::TQCanvasEllipse ( TQCanvas * canvas )
 
        
 Constructs a 32x32 ellipse, centered at (0, 0) on canvas.
 
-
        TQCanvasEllipse::TQCanvasEllipse ( int width, int height, TQCanvas * canvas )
+
        TQCanvasEllipse::TQCanvasEllipse ( int width, int height, TQCanvas * canvas )
 
        
 Constructs a width by height pixel ellipse, centered at
 (0, 0) on canvas.
 
-
        TQCanvasEllipse::TQCanvasEllipse ( int width, int height, int startangle, int angle, TQCanvas * canvas )
+
        TQCanvasEllipse::TQCanvasEllipse ( int width, int height, int startangle, int angle, TQCanvas * canvas )
 
        
 Constructs a width by height pixel ellipse, centered at
 (0, 0) on canvas. Only a segment of the ellipse is drawn,
@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ ellipse).
 this will be 0.
 
         
        See also setAngles() and angleLength().
 
-
        void TQCanvasEllipse::drawShape ( TQPainter & p ) [virtual protected]
+
        void TQCanvasEllipse::drawShape ( TQPainter & p ) [virtual protected]
 
        
 Draws the ellipse, centered at x(), y() using the painter p.
 
         Note that TQCanvasEllipse does not support an outline (the pen is
diff --git a/doc/html/qcanvasitem-members.html b/doc/html/qcanvasitem-members.html
index 69ef1baac..b65da423d 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcanvasitem-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcanvasitem-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qcanvasitem.html b/doc/html/qcanvasitem.html
index aef4e564f..962edc5b9 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcanvasitem.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcanvasitem.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
        The TQCanvasItem class provides an abstract graphic object on a TQCanvas.
 More...
-
        #include <qcanvas.h>
-
        Inherits TQt.
+
        #include <ntqcanvas.h>
+
        Inherits TQt.
 
        Inherited by TQCanvasSprite, TQCanvasPolygonalItem, and TQCanvasText.
 
        List of all member functions.
 
        Public Members
        
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
        Detailed Description
        
 
 
-The TQCanvasItem class provides an abstract graphic object on a TQCanvas.
+The TQCanvasItem class provides an abstract graphic object on a TQCanvas.
 
 
         
 
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ function has been called (or setVisible(TRUE)), and visible,
 and then only if update() is called. If you created the canvas
 without passing a width and height to the constructor you'll also need
-to call resize(). Since the canvas
+to call resize(). Since the canvas
 background defaults to white and canvas items default to white,
 you may need to change colors to see your items.
 
         A TQCanvasItem object can be moved in the x(), y() and z() dimensions
@@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ items which are animated, i.e. which change over time.
 The canvas() function returns a pointer to the canvas which contains the
 canvas item.
 
         TQCanvasItem provides the show() and isVisible() functions like those in
-TQWidget.
+TQWidget.
 
         TQCanvasItem also provides the setEnabled(), setActive() and
 setSelected() functions; these functions set the relevant boolean and
 cause a repaint but the boolean values they set are not used in
@@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ except where noted.
 
      • TQCanvasItem::Rtti_Text
 
       
 
      Member Function Documentation
      
-
      TQCanvasItem::TQCanvasItem ( TQCanvas * canvas )
+
      TQCanvasItem::TQCanvasItem ( TQCanvas * canvas )
 
      
 Constructs a TQCanvasItem on canvas canvas.
 
       
      See also setCanvas().
@@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ nothing if phase is 0.
 
       Note that if you reimplement this function, the reimplementation
 must not change the canvas in any way, for example it must not add
 or remove items.
-
       
      See also TQCanvas::advance() and setVelocity().
+
       
      See also TQCanvas::advance() and setVelocity().
 
 
      Example: canvas/canvas.cpp.
 
      Reimplemented in TQCanvasSprite.
@@ -187,19 +187,19 @@ Returns TRUE if the canvas item is in motion; otherwise returns
 FALSE.
 
       
      See also setVelocity() and setAnimated().
 
-
      TQRect TQCanvasItem::boundingRect () const [pure virtual]
+
      TQRect TQCanvasItem::boundingRect () const [pure virtual]
 
      
 
 
       Returns the bounding rectangle in pixels that the canvas item covers.
 
       
      See also boundingRectAdvanced().
 
 
      Reimplemented in TQCanvasSprite, TQCanvasPolygonalItem, and TQCanvasText.
-
      TQRect TQCanvasItem::boundingRectAdvanced () const [virtual]
+
      TQRect TQCanvasItem::boundingRectAdvanced () const [virtual]
 
      
 Returns the bounding rectangle of pixels that the canvas item will cover after advance(1) is called.
 
       
      See also boundingRect().
 
-
      TQCanvas * TQCanvasItem::canvas () const
+
      TQCanvas * TQCanvasItem::canvas () const
 
      
 
 
       Returns the canvas containing the canvas item.
@@ -246,16 +246,16 @@ doesn't need to actually embed into a "wall" item before a
 collision is detected. For items without velocity, plain
 intersection is used.
 
-
      void TQCanvasItem::draw ( TQPainter & painter ) [pure virtual]
+
      void TQCanvasItem::draw ( TQPainter & painter ) [pure virtual]
 
      
 
 
       This abstract virtual function draws the canvas item using painter.
 
       Warning: When you reimplement this function, make sure that you
 leave the painter in the same state as you found it. For example,
-if you start by calling TQPainter::translate(50, 50), end your
+if you start by calling TQPainter::translate(50, 50), end your
 code by calling TQPainter::translate(-50, -50). Be also aware that
 the painter might already have some transformations set (i.e.,
-don't call TQPainter::resetXForm() when you're done).
+don't call TQPainter::resetXForm() when you're done).
 
 
      Reimplemented in TQCanvasSprite, TQCanvasPolygonalItem, and TQCanvasText.
 
      bool TQCanvasItem::enabled () const
@@ -342,8 +342,8 @@ Use isSelected() instead.
 
      
 Sets the active flag of the item to yes. If this changes the
 item's active state the item will be redrawn when
-TQCanvas::update() is next called.
-
       The TQCanvas, TQCanvasItem and the TQt-supplied TQCanvasItem
+TQCanvas::update() is next called.
+
       The TQCanvas, TQCanvasItem and the TQt-supplied TQCanvasItem
 subclasses do not make use of this value. The setActive() function
 is supplied because many applications need it, but it is up to you
 how you use the isActive() value.
@@ -352,19 +352,19 @@ how you use the isActive() value.
 
 Sets the canvas item to be in motion if y is TRUE, or not if y is FALSE. The speed and direction of the motion is set with
 setVelocity(), or with setXVelocity() and setYVelocity().
-
       
      See also advance() and TQCanvas::advance().
+
       
      See also advance() and TQCanvas::advance().
 
-
      void TQCanvasItem::setCanvas ( TQCanvas * c ) [virtual]
+
      void TQCanvasItem::setCanvas ( TQCanvas * c ) [virtual]
 
      
-Sets the TQCanvas upon which the canvas item is to be drawn to c.
+Sets the TQCanvas upon which the canvas item is to be drawn to c.
 
       
      See also canvas().
 
 
      void TQCanvasItem::setEnabled ( bool yes ) [virtual]
 
      
 Sets the enabled flag of the item to yes. If this changes the
 item's enabled state the item will be redrawn when
-TQCanvas::update() is next called.
-
       The TQCanvas, TQCanvasItem and the TQt-supplied TQCanvasItem
+TQCanvas::update() is next called.
+
       The TQCanvas, TQCanvasItem and the TQt-supplied TQCanvasItem
 subclasses do not make use of this value. The setEnabled()
 function is supplied because many applications need it, but it is
 up to you how you use the isEnabled() value.
@@ -373,8 +373,8 @@ up to you how you use the isEnabled() value.
 
 Sets the selected flag of the item to yes. If this changes the
 item's selected state the item will be redrawn when
-TQCanvas::update() is next called.
-
       The TQCanvas, TQCanvasItem and the TQt-supplied TQCanvasItem
+TQCanvas::update() is next called.
+
       The TQCanvas, TQCanvasItem and the TQt-supplied TQCanvasItem
 subclasses do not make use of this value. The setSelected()
 function is supplied because many applications need it, but it is
 up to you how you use the isSelected() value.
@@ -388,7 +388,7 @@ pixels in the horizontal and vertical directions respectively.
 
      void TQCanvasItem::setVisible ( bool yes ) [virtual]
 
      
 Makes the canvas item visible if yes is TRUE, or invisible if
-yes is FALSE. The change takes effect when TQCanvas::update() is
+yes is FALSE. The change takes effect when TQCanvas::update() is
 next called.
 
 
      void TQCanvasItem::setX ( double x )
diff --git a/doc/html/qcanvasitemlist-members.html b/doc/html/qcanvasitemlist-members.html
index 16973e920..d9e444c66 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcanvasitemlist-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcanvasitemlist-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -35,40 +35,40 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 TQCanvasItemList, including inherited members.
 
 
 
 
      
diff --git a/doc/html/qcanvasitemlist.html b/doc/html/qcanvasitemlist.html
index 5d57c5038..fbe10cce6 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcanvasitemlist.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcanvasitemlist.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
      The TQCanvasItemList class is a list of TQCanvasItems.
 More...
-
      #include <qcanvas.h>
-
      Inherits TQValueList<TQCanvasItem * >.
+
      #include <ntqcanvas.h>
+
      Inherits TQValueList<TQCanvasItem * >.
 
      List of all member functions.
 
      Public Members
      
 
        
@@ -48,10 +48,10 @@ The TQCanvasItemList class is a list of TQCanvasItems.
 
         
 
 
-
         TQCanvasItemList is a TQValueList of pointers to TQCanvasItems.
-This class is used by some methods in TQCanvas that need to return
+
         TQCanvasItemList is a TQValueList of pointers to TQCanvasItems.
+This class is used by some methods in TQCanvas that need to return
 a list of canvas items.
-
         The TQValueList documentation describes how to use this list.
+
         The TQValueList documentation describes how to use this list.
 
        See also Graphics Classes and Image Processing Classes.
 
 
        Member Function Documentation
        
diff --git a/doc/html/qcanvasline-members.html b/doc/html/qcanvasline-members.html
index 30a14929b..2ea70ea1c 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcanvasline-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcanvasline-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qcanvasline.html b/doc/html/qcanvasline.html
index 01c229abd..b216a9223 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcanvasline.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcanvasline.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
        The TQCanvasLine class provides a line on a TQCanvas.
 More...
-
        #include <qcanvas.h>
+
        #include <ntqcanvas.h>
 
        Inherits TQCanvasPolygonalItem.
 
        List of all member functions.
 
        Public Members
        
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
        Detailed Description
        
 
 
-The TQCanvasLine class provides a line on a TQCanvas.
+The TQCanvasLine class provides a line on a TQCanvas.
 
 
         
 
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ coordinates with TQCanvasItem::setX(), See also Graphics Classes and Image Processing Classes.
 
 
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        TQCanvasLine::TQCanvasLine ( TQCanvas * canvas )
+
        TQCanvasLine::TQCanvasLine ( TQCanvas * canvas )
 
        
 Constructs a line from (0,0) to (0,0) on canvas.
 
         
        See also setPoints().
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Constructs a line from (0,0) to (0,0) on canvas.
 
      
 Destroys the line.
 
-
      TQPoint TQCanvasLine::endPoint () const
+
      TQPoint TQCanvasLine::endPoint () const
 
      
 
 
       Returns the end point of the line.
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Sets the line's start point to (xa, ya) and its end point to
 (xb, yb).
 
 
      Example: canvas/canvas.cpp.
-
      TQPoint TQCanvasLine::startPoint () const
+
      TQPoint TQCanvasLine::startPoint () const
 
      
 
 
       Returns the start point of the line.
diff --git a/doc/html/qcanvaspixmap-members.html b/doc/html/qcanvaspixmap-members.html
index d24f2e5b2..8a8d86ac5 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcanvaspixmap-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcanvaspixmap-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -37,69 +37,69 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
      
 
 
      
diff --git a/doc/html/qcanvaspixmap.html b/doc/html/qcanvaspixmap.html
index a86352d45..f110f26cc 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcanvaspixmap.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcanvaspixmap.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
      The TQCanvasPixmap class provides pixmaps for TQCanvasSprites.
 More...
-
      #include <qcanvas.h>
-
      Inherits TQPixmap.
+
      #include <ntqcanvas.h>
+
      Inherits TQPixmap.
 
      List of all member functions.
 
      Public Members
      
 
        
@@ -54,20 +54,20 @@ The TQCanvasPixmap class provides pixmaps for TQCanvasSprites.
 
         
 
 
-
         If you want to show a single pixmap on a TQCanvas use a
+
         If you want to show a single pixmap on a TQCanvas use a
 TQCanvasSprite with just one pixmap.
 
         When pixmaps are inserted into a TQCanvasPixmapArray they are held
 as TQCanvasPixmaps. TQCanvasSprites are used to show pixmaps on
-TQCanvases and hold their pixmaps in a TQCanvasPixmapArray. If
+TQCanvases and hold their pixmaps in a TQCanvasPixmapArray. If
 you retrieve a frame (pixmap) from a TQCanvasSprite it will be
 returned as a TQCanvasPixmap.
-
         The pixmap is a TQPixmap and can only be set in the constructor.
+
         The pixmap is a TQPixmap and can only be set in the constructor.
 There are three different constructors, one taking a TQPixmap, one
-a TQImage and one a file name that refers to a file in any
+a TQImage and one a file name that refers to a file in any
 supported file format (see TQImageIO).
 
         TQCanvasPixmap can have a hotspot which is defined in terms of an (x,
 y) offset. When you create a TQCanvasPixmap from a PNG file or from
-a TQImage that has a TQImage::offset(), the offset() is initialized
+a TQImage that has a TQImage::offset(), the offset() is initialized
 appropriately, otherwise the constructor leaves it at (0, 0). You
 can set it later using setOffset(). When the TQCanvasPixmap is used
 in a TQCanvasSprite, the offset position is the point at
@@ -79,15 +79,15 @@ stays in the same position.
 
         
        See also TQCanvasPixmapArray, TQCanvasItem, TQCanvasSprite, Graphics Classes, and Image Processing Classes.
 
 
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        TQCanvasPixmap::TQCanvasPixmap ( const TQString & datafilename )
+
        TQCanvasPixmap::TQCanvasPixmap ( const TQString & datafilename )
 
        
 Constructs a TQCanvasPixmap that uses the image stored in datafilename.
 
-
        TQCanvasPixmap::TQCanvasPixmap ( const TQImage & image )
+
        TQCanvasPixmap::TQCanvasPixmap ( const TQImage & image )
 
        
 Constructs a TQCanvasPixmap from the image image.
 
-
        TQCanvasPixmap::TQCanvasPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pm, const TQPoint & offset )
+
        TQCanvasPixmap::TQCanvasPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pm, const TQPoint & offset )
 
        
 Constructs a TQCanvasPixmap from the pixmap pm using the offset
 offset.
diff --git a/doc/html/qcanvaspixmaparray-members.html b/doc/html/qcanvaspixmaparray-members.html
index a968724e2..4013a5407 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcanvaspixmaparray-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcanvaspixmaparray-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qcanvaspixmaparray.html b/doc/html/qcanvaspixmaparray.html
index 75d63d418..923141fc2 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcanvaspixmaparray.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcanvaspixmaparray.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
        The TQCanvasPixmapArray class provides an array of TQCanvasPixmaps.
 More...
-
        #include <qcanvas.h>
+
        #include <ntqcanvas.h>
 
        List of all member functions.
 
        Public Members
        
 
          
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Constructs an invalid array (i.e. isValid() will return F
 You must call readPixmaps() before being able to use this
 TQCanvasPixmapArray.
 
-
          TQCanvasPixmapArray::TQCanvasPixmapArray ( const TQString & datafilenamepattern, int fc = 0 )
+
          TQCanvasPixmapArray::TQCanvasPixmapArray ( const TQString & datafilenamepattern, int fc = 0 )
 
          
 Constructs a TQCanvasPixmapArray from files.
 
           The fc parameter sets the number of frames to be loaded for
@@ -96,14 +96,14 @@ the first (and only) frame.
 an image, or some other error occurs, the array ends up empty and
 isValid() returns FALSE.
 
-
          TQCanvasPixmapArray::TQCanvasPixmapArray ( TQPtrList<TQPixmap> list, TQPtrList<TQPoint> hotspots )
+
          TQCanvasPixmapArray::TQCanvasPixmapArray ( TQPtrList<TQPixmap> list, TQPtrList<TQPoint> hotspots )
 
          
 This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
           Use TQCanvasPixmapArray::TQCanvasPixmapArray( TQValueList, TQPointArray )
+
           Use TQCanvasPixmapArray::TQCanvasPixmapArray( TQValueList, TQPointArray )
 instead.
 
           Constructs a TQCanvasPixmapArray from the list of TQPixmaps list. The hotspots list has to be of the same size as list.
 
-
          TQCanvasPixmapArray::TQCanvasPixmapArray ( TQValueList<TQPixmap> list, TQPointArray hotspots = TQPointArray ( ) )
+
          TQCanvasPixmapArray::TQCanvasPixmapArray ( TQValueList<TQPixmap> list, TQPointArray hotspots = TQPointArray ( ) )
 
          
 Constructs a TQCanvasPixmapArray from the list of TQPixmaps in the
 list. Each pixmap will get a hotspot according to the hotspots array. If no hotspots are specified, each one is set to
@@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ FALSE.
 
           Use isValid() instead.
 
           This returns FALSE if the array is valid, and TRUE if it is not.
 
-
          bool TQCanvasPixmapArray::readCollisionMasks ( const TQString & filename )
+
          bool TQCanvasPixmapArray::readCollisionMasks ( const TQString & filename )
 
          
 Reads new collision masks for the array.
 
           By default, TQCanvasSprite uses the image mask of a sprite to
@@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ the array will be flagged as invalid; otherwise this function
 returns TRUE.
 
           
          See also isValid().
 
-
          bool TQCanvasPixmapArray::readPixmaps ( const TQString & filenamepattern, int fc = 0 )
+
          bool TQCanvasPixmapArray::readPixmaps ( const TQString & filenamepattern, int fc = 0 )
 
          
 Reads one or more pixmaps into the pixmap array.
 
           If fc is not 0, filenamepattern should contain "%1", e.g.
diff --git a/doc/html/qcanvaspolygon-members.html b/doc/html/qcanvaspolygon-members.html
index 3cacb5997..bd65dc7fe 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcanvaspolygon-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcanvaspolygon-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qcanvaspolygon.html b/doc/html/qcanvaspolygon.html
index 145892142..68f9636ba 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcanvaspolygon.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcanvaspolygon.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
          The TQCanvasPolygon class provides a polygon on a TQCanvas.
 More...
-
          #include <qcanvas.h>
+
          #include <ntqcanvas.h>
 
          Inherits TQCanvasPolygonalItem.
 
          Inherited by TQCanvasSpline.
 
          List of all member functions.
@@ -53,12 +53,12 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
          Detailed Description
          
 
 
-The TQCanvasPolygon class provides a polygon on a TQCanvas.
+The TQCanvasPolygon class provides a polygon on a TQCanvas.
 
 
           
 
 
-
           Paints a polygon with a TQBrush. The polygon's points can be set in
+
           Paints a polygon with a TQBrush. The polygon's points can be set in
 the constructor or set or changed later using setPoints(). Use
 points() to retrieve the points, or areaPoints() to retrieve the
 points relative to the canvas's origin.
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ coordinates with TQCanvasItem::setX(), See also Graphics Classes and Image Processing Classes.
 
 
          Member Function Documentation
          
-
          TQCanvasPolygon::TQCanvasPolygon ( TQCanvas * canvas )
+
          TQCanvasPolygon::TQCanvasPolygon ( TQCanvas * canvas )
 
          
 Constructs a point-less polygon on the canvas canvas. You
 should call setPoints() before using it further.
@@ -80,21 +80,21 @@ should call setPoints() before using it further.
 
 Destroys the polygon.
 
-
          TQPointArray TQCanvasPolygon::areaPoints () const [virtual]
+
          TQPointArray TQCanvasPolygon::areaPoints () const [virtual]
 
          
 Returns the vertices of the polygon translated by the polygon's
 current x(), y() position, i.e. relative to the canvas's origin.
 
           
          See also setPoints() and points().
 
 
          Reimplemented from TQCanvasPolygonalItem.
-
          void TQCanvasPolygon::drawShape ( TQPainter & p ) [virtual protected]
+
          void TQCanvasPolygon::drawShape ( TQPainter & p ) [virtual protected]
 
          
 Draws the polygon using the painter p.
 
           Note that TQCanvasPolygon does not support an outline (the pen is
 always NoPen).
 
 
          Reimplemented from TQCanvasPolygonalItem.
-
          TQPointArray TQCanvasPolygon::points () const
+
          TQPointArray TQCanvasPolygon::points () const
 
          
 
 
           Returns the vertices of the polygon, not translated by the position.
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Returns 4 (TQCanvasItem::Rtti_Polygon).
 
 
          Reimplemented from TQCanvasPolygonalItem.
 
          Reimplemented in TQCanvasSpline.
-
          void TQCanvasPolygon::setPoints ( TQPointArray pa )
+
          void TQCanvasPolygon::setPoints ( TQPointArray pa )
 
          
 Sets the points of the polygon to be pa. These points will have
 their x and y coordinates automatically translated by x(), y() as
diff --git a/doc/html/qcanvaspolygonalitem-members.html b/doc/html/qcanvaspolygonalitem-members.html
index 9545c840f..d5b92c829 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcanvaspolygonalitem-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcanvaspolygonalitem-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qcanvaspolygonalitem.html b/doc/html/qcanvaspolygonalitem.html
index a24b3024f..093517610 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcanvaspolygonalitem.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcanvaspolygonalitem.html
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
          The TQCanvasPolygonalItem class provides a polygonal canvas item
 on a TQCanvas.
 More...
-
          #include <qcanvas.h>
+
          #include <ntqcanvas.h>
 
          Inherits TQCanvasItem.
 
          Inherited by TQCanvasRectangle, TQCanvasPolygon, TQCanvasLine, and TQCanvasEllipse.
 
          List of all member functions.
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ on a TQCanvas.
 
 
 The TQCanvasPolygonalItem class provides a polygonal canvas item
-on a TQCanvas.
+on a TQCanvas.
 
 
           
 
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ points the polygonal item will have after
 item is visible, call invalidate() before updating with a
 different result from areaPoints().
 
           By default, TQCanvasPolygonalItem objects have a black pen and no
-brush (the default TQPen and TQBrush constructors). You can change
+brush (the default TQPen and TQBrush constructors). You can change
 this with setPen() and setBrush(), but note that some
 TQCanvasPolygonalItem subclasses only use the brush, ignoring the
 pen setting.
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ with TQCanvasItem::setX(), Graphics Classes and Image Processing Classes.
 
 
          Member Function Documentation
          
-
          TQCanvasPolygonalItem::TQCanvasPolygonalItem ( TQCanvas * canvas )
+
          TQCanvasPolygonalItem::TQCanvasPolygonalItem ( TQCanvas * canvas )
 
          
 Constructs a TQCanvasPolygonalItem on the canvas canvas.
 
@@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Constructs a TQCanvasPolygonalItem on the canvas canvas.
 Note that all subclasses must call hide() in their destructor
 since hide() needs to be able to access areaPoints().
 
-
          TQPointArray TQCanvasPolygonalItem::areaPoints () const [pure virtual]
+
          TQPointArray TQCanvasPolygonalItem::areaPoints () const [pure virtual]
 
          
 
 
           This function must be reimplemented by subclasses. It must
@@ -125,32 +125,32 @@ return the points bounding (i.e. outside and not touching) the
 shape or drawing errors will occur.
 
 
          Reimplemented in TQCanvasPolygon.
-
          TQPointArray TQCanvasPolygonalItem::areaPointsAdvanced () const [virtual]
+
          TQPointArray TQCanvasPolygonalItem::areaPointsAdvanced () const [virtual]
 
          
 Returns the points the polygonal item will have after
 TQCanvasItem::advance(1) is called, i.e. what the points are when
 advanced by the current xVelocity() and yVelocity().
 
-
          TQRect TQCanvasPolygonalItem::boundingRect () const [virtual]
+
          TQRect TQCanvasPolygonalItem::boundingRect () const [virtual]
 
          
 Returns the bounding rectangle of the polygonal item, based on
 areaPoints().
 
 
          Reimplemented from TQCanvasItem.
-
          TQBrush TQCanvasPolygonalItem::brush () const
+
          TQBrush TQCanvasPolygonalItem::brush () const
 
          
 
-
           Returns the TQBrush used to fill the item, if filled.
+
           Returns the TQBrush used to fill the item, if filled.
 
           
          See also setBrush().
 
-
          void TQCanvasPolygonalItem::draw ( TQPainter & p ) [virtual protected]
+
          void TQCanvasPolygonalItem::draw ( TQPainter & p ) [virtual protected]
 
          
 Reimplemented from TQCanvasItem, this draws the polygonal item by
 setting the pen and brush for the item on the painter p and
 calling drawShape().
 
 
          Reimplemented from TQCanvasItem.
-
          void TQCanvasPolygonalItem::drawShape ( TQPainter & p ) [pure virtual protected]
+
          void TQCanvasPolygonalItem::drawShape ( TQPainter & p ) [pure virtual protected]
 
          
 
 
           Subclasses must reimplement this function to draw their shape. The
@@ -158,10 +158,10 @@ pen and brush of p are already set to pen() and  Warning: When you reimplement this function, make sure that you
 leave the painter in the same state as you found it. For example,
-if you start by calling TQPainter::translate(50, 50), end your
+if you start by calling TQPainter::translate(50, 50), end your
 code by calling TQPainter::translate(-50, -50). Be also aware that
 the painter might already have some transformations set (i.e.,
-don't call TQPainter::resetXForm() when you're done).
+don't call TQPainter::resetXForm() when you're done).
 
           
          See also draw().
 
 
          Reimplemented in TQCanvasRectangle, TQCanvasPolygon, and TQCanvasEllipse.
@@ -180,10 +180,10 @@ returned by areaPoints()) while the item is visible.
 invalidated; otherwise returns FALSE.
 
           
          See also invalidate().
 
-
          TQPen TQCanvasPolygonalItem::pen () const
+
          TQPen TQCanvasPolygonalItem::pen () const
 
          
 
-
           Returns the TQPen used to draw the outline of the item, if any.
+
           Returns the TQPen used to draw the outline of the item, if any.
 
           
          See also setPen().
 
 
          int TQCanvasPolygonalItem::rtti () const [virtual]
@@ -193,15 +193,15 @@ Returns 2 (TQCanvasItem::Rtti_PolygonalItem).
 
 
          Reimplemented from TQCanvasItem.
 
          Reimplemented in TQCanvasRectangle, TQCanvasPolygon, TQCanvasLine, and TQCanvasEllipse.
-
          void TQCanvasPolygonalItem::setBrush ( TQBrush b ) [virtual]
+
          void TQCanvasPolygonalItem::setBrush ( TQBrush b ) [virtual]
 
          
-Sets the TQBrush used when drawing the polygonal item to the brush b.
+Sets the TQBrush used when drawing the polygonal item to the brush b.
 
           
          See also setPen(), brush(), and drawShape().
 
 
          Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp and chart/chartform_canvas.cpp.
-
          void TQCanvasPolygonalItem::setPen ( TQPen p ) [virtual]
+
          void TQCanvasPolygonalItem::setPen ( TQPen p ) [virtual]
 
          
-Sets the TQPen used when drawing the item to the pen p.
+Sets the TQPen used when drawing the item to the pen p.
 Note that many TQCanvasPolygonalItems do not use the pen value.
 
           
          See also setBrush(), pen(), and drawShape().
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qcanvasrectangle-members.html b/doc/html/qcanvasrectangle-members.html
index 33789415d..3e902585b 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcanvasrectangle-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcanvasrectangle-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qcanvasrectangle.html b/doc/html/qcanvasrectangle.html
index 6ea6ec96a..4db313967 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcanvasrectangle.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcanvasrectangle.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
          The TQCanvasRectangle class provides a rectangle on a TQCanvas.
 More...
-
          #include <qcanvas.h>
+
          #include <ntqcanvas.h>
 
          Inherits TQCanvasPolygonalItem.
 
          List of all member functions.
 
          Public Members
          
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
          Detailed Description
          
 
 
-The TQCanvasRectangle class provides a rectangle on a TQCanvas.
+The TQCanvasRectangle class provides a rectangle on a TQCanvas.
 
 
           
 
@@ -76,16 +76,16 @@ coordinates with TQCanvasItem::setX(),  
          See also Graphics Classes and Image Processing Classes.
 
 
          Member Function Documentation
          
-
          TQCanvasRectangle::TQCanvasRectangle ( TQCanvas * canvas )
+
          TQCanvasRectangle::TQCanvasRectangle ( TQCanvas * canvas )
 
          
 Constructs a rectangle at position (0,0) with both width and
 height set to 32 pixels on canvas.
 
-
          TQCanvasRectangle::TQCanvasRectangle ( const TQRect & r, TQCanvas * canvas )
+
          TQCanvasRectangle::TQCanvasRectangle ( const TQRect & r, TQCanvas * canvas )
 
          
 Constructs a rectangle positioned and sized by r on canvas.
 
-
          TQCanvasRectangle::TQCanvasRectangle ( int x, int y, int width, int height, TQCanvas * canvas )
+
          TQCanvasRectangle::TQCanvasRectangle ( int x, int y, int width, int height, TQCanvas * canvas )
 
          
 Constructs a rectangle at position (x, y) and size width
 by height, on canvas.
@@ -94,11 +94,11 @@ by height, on canvas.
 
 Destroys the rectangle.
 
-
          TQPointArray TQCanvasRectangle::chunks () const [virtual protected]
+
          TQPointArray TQCanvasRectangle::chunks () const [virtual protected]
 
          
 Simply calls TQCanvasItem::chunks().
 
-
          void TQCanvasRectangle::drawShape ( TQPainter & p ) [virtual protected]
+
          void TQCanvasRectangle::drawShape ( TQPainter & p ) [virtual protected]
 
          
 Draws the rectangle on painter p.
 
@@ -108,11 +108,11 @@ Draws the rectangle on painter p.
 
 Returns the height of the rectangle.
 
-
          TQRect TQCanvasRectangle::rect () const
+
          TQRect TQCanvasRectangle::rect () const
 
          
 
 
           Returns the integer-converted x(), y() position and size() of the
-rectangle as a TQRect.
+rectangle as a TQRect.
 
 
          int TQCanvasRectangle::rtti () const [virtual]
 
          
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Returns 5 (TQCanvasItem::Rtti_Rectangle).
 
 Sets the width and height of the rectangle.
 
-
          TQSize TQCanvasRectangle::size () const
+
          TQSize TQCanvasRectangle::size () const
 
          
 
 
           Returns the width() and height() of the rectangle.
diff --git a/doc/html/qcanvasspline-members.html b/doc/html/qcanvasspline-members.html
index 6da3ce495..ba8abf06b 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcanvasspline-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcanvasspline-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qcanvasspline.html b/doc/html/qcanvasspline.html
index 3fafc390d..4bb75b54c 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcanvasspline.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcanvasspline.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
          The TQCanvasSpline class provides multi-bezier splines on a TQCanvas.
 More...
-
          #include <qcanvas.h>
+
          #include <ntqcanvas.h>
 
          Inherits TQCanvasPolygon.
 
          List of all member functions.
 
          Public Members
          
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
          Detailed Description
          
 
 
-The TQCanvasSpline class provides multi-bezier splines on a TQCanvas.
+The TQCanvasSpline class provides multi-bezier splines on a TQCanvas.
 
 
           
 
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ coordinates with TQCanvasItem::setX(),  
          See also Graphics Classes and Image Processing Classes.
 
 
          Member Function Documentation
          
-
          TQCanvasSpline::TQCanvasSpline ( TQCanvas * canvas )
+
          TQCanvasSpline::TQCanvasSpline ( TQCanvas * canvas )
 
          
 Create a spline with no control points on the canvas canvas.
 
           
          See also setControlPoints().
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Destroy the spline.
 Returns TRUE if the control points are a closed set; otherwise
 returns FALSE.
 
-
          TQPointArray TQCanvasSpline::controlPoints () const
+
          TQPointArray TQCanvasSpline::controlPoints () const
 
          
 Returns the current set of control points.
 
           
          See also setControlPoints() and closed().
@@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Returns 8 (TQCanvasItem::Rtti_Spline).
 
           
          See also TQCanvasItem::rtti().
 
 
          Reimplemented from TQCanvasPolygon.
-
          void TQCanvasSpline::setControlPoints ( TQPointArray ctrl, bool close = TRUE )
+
          void TQCanvasSpline::setControlPoints ( TQPointArray ctrl, bool close = TRUE )
 
          
 Set the spline control points to ctrl.
 
           If close is TRUE, then the first point in ctrl will be
diff --git a/doc/html/qcanvassprite-members.html b/doc/html/qcanvassprite-members.html
index da5a8d111..48df960af 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcanvassprite-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcanvassprite-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qcanvassprite.html b/doc/html/qcanvassprite.html
index 8ebff73d7..9cfed2fd9 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcanvassprite.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcanvassprite.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
          The TQCanvasSprite class provides an animated canvas item on a TQCanvas.
 More...
-
          #include <qcanvas.h>
+
          #include <ntqcanvas.h>
 
          Inherits TQCanvasItem.
 
          List of all member functions.
 
          Public Members
          
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
          Detailed Description
          
 
 
-The TQCanvasSprite class provides an animated canvas item on a TQCanvas.
+The TQCanvasSprite class provides an animated canvas item on a TQCanvas.
 
 
           
 
@@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ incremented by 1 up to the frame count then decremented to by 1 to
 0, repeating this sequence forever.
 
        
 
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        TQCanvasSprite::TQCanvasSprite ( TQCanvasPixmapArray * a, TQCanvas * canvas )
+
        TQCanvasSprite::TQCanvasSprite ( TQCanvasPixmapArray * a, TQCanvas * canvas )
 
        
 Constructs a TQCanvasSprite which uses images from the
 TQCanvasPixmapArray a.
@@ -154,14 +154,14 @@ be if the sprite (actually its hotspot) were moved to y-position
 ny.
 
         
        See also leftEdge(), rightEdge(), and topEdge().
 
-
        TQRect TQCanvasSprite::boundingRect () const [virtual]
+
        TQRect TQCanvasSprite::boundingRect () const [virtual]
 
        
 Returns the bounding rectangle for the image in the sprite's
 current frame. This assumes that the images are tightly cropped
 (i.e. do not have transparent pixels all along a side).
 
 
        Reimplemented from TQCanvasItem.
-
        void TQCanvasSprite::draw ( TQPainter & painter ) [virtual]
+
        void TQCanvasSprite::draw ( TQPainter & painter ) [virtual]
 
        
 Draws the current frame's image at the sprite's current position
 on painter painter.
diff --git a/doc/html/qcanvastext-members.html b/doc/html/qcanvastext-members.html
index 4544c1922..4dc99f5d7 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcanvastext-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcanvastext-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qcanvastext.html b/doc/html/qcanvastext.html
index b2f38122b..2a80b61e1 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcanvastext.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcanvastext.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
        The TQCanvasText class provides a text object on a TQCanvas.
 More...
-
        #include <qcanvas.h>
+
        #include <ntqcanvas.h>
 
        Inherits TQCanvasItem.
 
        List of all member functions.
 
        Public Members
        
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
        Detailed Description
        
 
 
-The TQCanvasText class provides a text object on a TQCanvas.
+The TQCanvasText class provides a text object on a TQCanvas.
 
 
         
 
@@ -78,15 +78,15 @@ coordinates with TQCanvasItem::setX(), See also Graphics Classes and Image Processing Classes.
 
 
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        TQCanvasText::TQCanvasText ( TQCanvas * canvas )
+
        TQCanvasText::TQCanvasText ( TQCanvas * canvas )
 
        
 Constructs a TQCanvasText with the text "<text>", on canvas.
 
-
        TQCanvasText::TQCanvasText ( const TQString & t, TQCanvas * canvas )
+
        TQCanvasText::TQCanvasText ( const TQString & t, TQCanvas * canvas )
 
        
 Constructs a TQCanvasText with the text t, on canvas canvas.
 
-
        TQCanvasText::TQCanvasText ( const TQString & t, TQFont f, TQCanvas * canvas )
+
        TQCanvasText::TQCanvasText ( const TQString & t, TQFont f, TQCanvas * canvas )
 
        
 Constructs a TQCanvasText with the text t and font f, on the
 canvas canvas.
@@ -95,22 +95,22 @@ canvas canvas.
 
 Destroys the canvas text item.
 
-
        TQRect TQCanvasText::boundingRect () const [virtual]
+
        TQRect TQCanvasText::boundingRect () const [virtual]
 
        
 Returns the bounding rectangle of the text.
 
 
        Reimplemented from TQCanvasItem.
-
        TQColor TQCanvasText::color () const
+
        TQColor TQCanvasText::color () const
 
        
 Returns the color of the text.
 
         
        See also setColor().
 
-
        void TQCanvasText::draw ( TQPainter & painter ) [virtual protected]
+
        void TQCanvasText::draw ( TQPainter & painter ) [virtual protected]
 
        
 Draws the text using the painter painter.
 
 
        Reimplemented from TQCanvasItem.
-
        TQFont TQCanvasText::font () const
+
        TQFont TQCanvasText::font () const
 
        
 Returns the font in which the text is drawn.
 
         
        See also setFont().
@@ -121,18 +121,18 @@ Returns 3 (TQCanvasItem::Rtti_Text).
 
         
        See also TQCanvasItem::rtti().
 
 
        Reimplemented from TQCanvasItem.
-
        void TQCanvasText::setColor ( const TQColor & c )
+
        void TQCanvasText::setColor ( const TQColor & c )
 
        
 Sets the color of the text to the color c.
 
         
        See also color() and setFont().
 
 
        Example: chart/chartform_canvas.cpp.
-
        void TQCanvasText::setFont ( const TQFont & f )
+
        void TQCanvasText::setFont ( const TQFont & f )
 
        
 Sets the font in which the text is drawn to font f.
 
         
        See also font().
 
-
        void TQCanvasText::setText ( const TQString & t )
+
        void TQCanvasText::setText ( const TQString & t )
 
        
 Sets the text item's text to t. The text may contain newlines.
 
         
        See also text(), setFont(), setColor(), and setTextFlags().
@@ -141,11 +141,11 @@ Sets the text item's text to t. The text may contain newlines.
 
        void TQCanvasText::setTextFlags ( int f )
 
        
 Sets the alignment flags to f. These are a bitwise OR of the
-flags available to TQPainter::drawText() -- see the
-TQt::AlignmentFlags.
+flags available to TQPainter::drawText() -- see the
+TQt::AlignmentFlags.
 
         
        See also setFont() and setColor().
 
-
        TQString TQCanvasText::text () const
+
        TQString TQCanvasText::text () const
 
        
 Returns the text item's text.
 
         
        See also setText().
@@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ Returns the text item's text.
 
 
 
         Returns the currently set alignment flags.
-
         
        See also setTextFlags() and TQt::AlignmentFlags.
+
         
        See also setTextFlags() and TQt::AlignmentFlags.
 
 
 
        
diff --git a/doc/html/qcanvasview-members.html b/doc/html/qcanvasview-members.html
index 587036d62..e2816b8db 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcanvasview-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcanvasview-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -37,387 +37,387 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
        
 
 
        
diff --git a/doc/html/qcanvasview.html b/doc/html/qcanvasview.html
index 6957a7e2b..41662cbd7 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcanvasview.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcanvasview.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
        The TQCanvasView class provides an on-screen view of a TQCanvas.
 More...
-
        #include <qcanvas.h>
-
        Inherits TQScrollView.
+
        #include <ntqcanvas.h>
+
        Inherits TQScrollView.
 
        List of all member functions.
 
        Public Members
        
 
          
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
          Detailed Description
          
 
 
-The TQCanvasView class provides an on-screen view of a TQCanvas.
+The TQCanvasView class provides an on-screen view of a TQCanvas.
 
 
           
 
@@ -63,15 +63,15 @@ The TQCanvasView class provides an on-screen view of a TQ
 
           A TQCanvasView is widget which provides a view of a TQCanvas.
 
           If you want users to be able to interact with a canvas view,
 subclass TQCanvasView. You might then reimplement
-TQScrollView::contentsMousePressEvent(). For example, assuming no
-transformation matrix is set:
+TQScrollView::contentsMousePressEvent(). For example, assuming no
+transformation matrix is set:
 
           
               void MyCanvasView::contentsMousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent* e )
     {
         TQCanvasItemList l = canvas()->collisions(e->pos());
-        for (TQCanvasItemList::Iterator it=l.begin(); it!=l.end(); ++it) {
+        for (TQCanvasItemList::Iterator it=l.begin(); it!=l.end(); ++it) {
             if ( (*it)->rtti() == TQCanvasRectangle::RTTI )
-                qDebug("A TQCanvasRectangle lies somewhere at this point");
+                qDebug("A TQCanvasRectangle lies somewhere at this point");
         }
     }
     
          
@@ -82,11 +82,11 @@ subclass TQCanvasView. You might then reimplement
 canvas in various ways, for example, zooming in or out or rotating.
 For example:
 
           
          -    TQWMatrix wm;
-    wm.scale( 2, 2 );   // Zooms in by 2 times
-    wm.rotate( 90 );    // Rotates 90 degrees counter clockwise
+    TQWMatrix wm;
+    wm.scale( 2, 2 );   // Zooms in by 2 times
+    wm.rotate( 90 );    // Rotates 90 degrees counter clockwise
                         // around the origin.
-    wm.translate( 0, -canvas->height() );
+    wm.translate( 0, -canvas->height() );
                         // moves the canvas down so what was visible
                         // before is still visible.
     myCanvasView->setWorldMatrix( wm );
@@ -100,23 +100,23 @@ with inverseWorldMatrix().
 
           The following code finds the part of the canvas that is visible in
 this view, i.e. the bounding rectangle of the view in canvas coordinates.
 
           
          -    TQRect rc = TQRect( myCanvasView->contentsX(), myCanvasView->contentsY(),
+    TQRect rc = TQRect( myCanvasView->contentsX(), myCanvasView->contentsY(),
                         myCanvasView->visibleWidth(), myCanvasView->visibleHeight() );
-    TQRect canvasRect = myCanvasView->inverseWorldMatrix().mapRect(rc);
+    TQRect canvasRect = myCanvasView->inverseWorldMatrix().mapRect(rc);
     
          
  
-
           
          See also TQWMatrix, TQPainter::setWorldMatrix(), Graphics Classes, and Image Processing Classes.
+
           
          See also TQWMatrix, TQPainter::setWorldMatrix(), Graphics Classes, and Image Processing Classes.
 
 
           
 
          Member Function Documentation
          
-
          TQCanvasView::TQCanvasView ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
+
          TQCanvasView::TQCanvasView ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
 
          
 Constructs a TQCanvasView with parent parent, and name name,
 using the widget flags f. The canvas view is not associated
 with a canvas, so you must to call setCanvas() to view a
 canvas.
 
-
          TQCanvasView::TQCanvasView ( TQCanvas * canvas, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
+
          TQCanvasView::TQCanvasView ( TQCanvas * canvas, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
 
          
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 
           Constructs a TQCanvasView which views canvas canvas, with parent
@@ -126,54 +126,54 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 
 Destroys the canvas view. The associated canvas is not deleted.
 
-
          TQCanvas * TQCanvasView::canvas () const
+
          TQCanvas * TQCanvasView::canvas () const
 
          
 
 
           Returns a pointer to the canvas which the TQCanvasView is currently
 showing.
 
-
          void TQCanvasView::drawContents ( TQPainter * p, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch ) [virtual protected]
+
          void TQCanvasView::drawContents ( TQPainter * p, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch ) [virtual protected]
 
          
-Repaints part of the TQCanvas that the canvas view is showing
+Repaints part of the TQCanvas that the canvas view is showing
 starting at cx by cy, with a width of cw and a height of ch using the painter p.
 
           Warning: When double buffering is enabled, drawContents() will
 not respect the current settings of the painter when setting up
-the painter for the double buffer (e.g., viewport() and
-window()). Also, be aware that TQCanvas::update() bypasses
+the painter for the double buffer (e.g., viewport() and
+window()). Also, be aware that TQCanvas::update() bypasses
 drawContents(), which means any reimplementation of
 drawContents() is not called.
-
           
          See also TQCanvas::setDoubleBuffering().
+
           
          See also TQCanvas::setDoubleBuffering().
 
-
          Reimplemented from TQScrollView.
-
          const TQWMatrix & TQCanvasView::inverseWorldMatrix () const
+
          Reimplemented from TQScrollView.
+
          const TQWMatrix & TQCanvasView::inverseWorldMatrix () const
 
          
 Returns a reference to the inverse of the canvas view's current
-transformation matrix.
+transformation matrix.
 
           
          See also setWorldMatrix() and worldMatrix().
 
-
          void TQCanvasView::setCanvas ( TQCanvas * canvas )
+
          void TQCanvasView::setCanvas ( TQCanvas * canvas )
 
          
 Sets the canvas that the TQCanvasView is showing to the canvas canvas.
 
-
          bool TQCanvasView::setWorldMatrix ( const TQWMatrix & wm )
+
          bool TQCanvasView::setWorldMatrix ( const TQWMatrix & wm )
 
          
-Sets the transformation matrix of the TQCanvasView to wm. The
+Sets the transformation matrix of the TQCanvasView to wm. The
 matrix must be invertible (i.e. if you create a world matrix that
 zooms out by 2 times, then the inverse of this matrix is one that
 will zoom in by 2 times).
 
           When you use this, you should note that the performance of the
 TQCanvasView will decrease considerably.
 
           Returns FALSE if wm is not invertable; otherwise returns TRUE.
-
           
          See also worldMatrix(), inverseWorldMatrix(), and TQWMatrix::isInvertible().
+
           
          See also worldMatrix(), inverseWorldMatrix(), and TQWMatrix::isInvertible().
 
 
          Example: canvas/canvas.cpp.
-
          TQSize TQCanvasView::sizeHint () const [virtual protected]
+
          TQSize TQCanvasView::sizeHint () const [virtual protected]
 
          
 Suggests a size sufficient to view the entire canvas.
 
-
          const TQWMatrix & TQCanvasView::worldMatrix () const
+
          const TQWMatrix & TQCanvasView::worldMatrix () const
 
          
-Returns a reference to the canvas view's current transformation matrix.
+Returns a reference to the canvas view's current transformation matrix.
 
           
          See also setWorldMatrix() and inverseWorldMatrix().
 
 
          Example: canvas/canvas.cpp.
diff --git a/doc/html/qcdestyle-h.html b/doc/html/qcdestyle-h.html
index 0148ce80c..96324f731 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcdestyle-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcdestyle-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qcdestyle.h Include File
+ntqcdestyle.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
          
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
          TQCDEStyle Class Reference
          
-
-
          The TQCDEStyle class provides a CDE look and feel.
-More...
-
          #include <qcdestyle.h>
-
          Inherits TQMotifStyle.
-
          List of all member functions.
-
          Public Members
          
-
-
          Detailed Description
          
-
-
-The TQCDEStyle class provides a CDE look and feel.
-
           
-
           This style provides a slightly improved Motif look similar to some
-versions of the Common Desktop Environment (CDE). The main
-differences are thinner frames and more modern radio buttons and
-checkboxes. Together with a dark background and a bright
-text/foreground color, the style looks quite attractive (at least
-for Motif fans).
-
           Note that the functions provided by TQCDEStyle are
-reimplementations of TQStyle functions; see TQStyle for their
-documentation.
-
          See also Widget Appearance and Style.
-
-
          Member Function Documentation
          
-
          TQCDEStyle::TQCDEStyle ( bool useHighlightCols = FALSE )
-
          
-Constructs a TQCDEStyle.
-
           If useHighlightCols is FALSE (the default), then the style will
-polish the application's color palette to emulate the Motif way of
-highlighting, which is a simple inversion between the base and the
-text color.
-
-
          TQCDEStyle::~TQCDEStyle () [virtual]
-
          
-Destroys the style.
-
-
-
          
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
          
-
-
          Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
          TQt 3.3.8
          
-
          
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qchar-members.html b/doc/html/qchar-members.html
index 5bd901985..2f170a43b 100644
--- a/doc/html/qchar-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qchar-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qchar.html b/doc/html/qchar.html
index f9745c575..ff9db3c67 100644
--- a/doc/html/qchar.html
+++ b/doc/html/qchar.html
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
          The TQChar class provides a lightweight Unicode character.
 More...
 
          Almost all the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support. The exception is decomposition().
-
          #include <qstring.h>
+
          #include <ntqstring.h>
 
          List of all member functions.
 
          Public Members
          
 
            
@@ -152,14 +152,14 @@ changes when the character has a well-defined upper/lower-case
 equivalent. There is no provision for locale-dependent case
 folding rules or comparison; these functions are meant to be fast
 so they can be used unambiguously in data structures. (See
-TQString::localeAwareCompare() though.)
+TQString::localeAwareCompare() though.)
 
             The conversion functions include unicode() (to a scalar), latin1()
 (to scalar, but converts all non-Latin-1 characters to 0), row()
 (gives the Unicode row), cell() (gives the Unicode cell),
 digitValue() (gives the integer value of any of the numerous digit
 characters), and a host of constructors.
 
             More information can be found in the document About Unicode.
-
             
            See also TQString, TQCharRef, and Text Related Classes.
+
             
            See also TQString, TQCharRef, and Text Related Classes.
 
 
            Member Type Documentation
            
 
            TQChar::Category
            
@@ -295,11 +295,11 @@ marks attached to a base character.
 
             The TQt text rendering engine uses this information to correctly
 position non spacing marks around a base character.
 
-
            const TQString & TQChar::decomposition () const
+
            const TQString & TQChar::decomposition () const
 
            Warning: This function is not reentrant.
            
 
 
-
             Decomposes a character into its parts. Returns TQString::null if no
+
             Decomposes a character into its parts. Returns TQString::null if no
 decomposition exists.
 
 
            Decomposition TQChar::decompositionTag () const
@@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ categories); otherwise returns FALSE.
 Returns TRUE if the character is a printable character; otherwise
 returns FALSE. This is any character not of category Cc or Cn.
 
             Note that this gives no indication of whether the character is
-available in a particular font.
+available in a particular font.
 
 
            bool TQChar::isPunct () const
 
            
diff --git a/doc/html/qcharref-members.html b/doc/html/qcharref-members.html
index 582e924c8..2108a73f3 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcharref-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcharref-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qcharref.html b/doc/html/qcharref.html
index 8c614ee48..1cd653fd6 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcharref.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcharref.html
@@ -34,13 +34,13 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
            The TQCharRef class is a helper class for TQString.
 More...
 
            All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
            
-
            #include <qstring.h>
+
            #include <ntqstring.h>
 
            List of all member functions.
 
            Detailed Description
            
 
 
 
-The TQCharRef class is a helper class for TQString.
+The TQCharRef class is a helper class for TQString.
 
             
 
             When you get an object of type TQCharRef, if you can assign to it,
 the assignment will apply to the character in the string from
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ The TQCharRef becomes invalid once modifications are made to the
 string: if you want to keep the character, copy it into a TQChar.
 
             Most of the TQChar member functions also exist in TQCharRef.
 However, they are not explicitly documented here.
-
             
            See also TQString::operator[](), TQString::at(), TQChar, and Text Related Classes.
+
             
            See also TQString::operator[](), TQString::at(), TQChar, and Text Related Classes.
 
 
 
            
diff --git a/doc/html/qcheckbox-h.html b/doc/html/qcheckbox-h.html
index 109f3ee09..88f853373 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcheckbox-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcheckbox-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qcheckbox.h Include File
+ntqcheckbox.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
            
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
            TQCheckBox Class Reference
            
-
-
            The TQCheckBox widget provides a checkbox with a text label.
-More...
-
            #include <qcheckbox.h>
-
            Inherits TQButton.
-
            List of all member functions.
-
            Public Members
            
-
-
            Public Slots
            
-
-
            Important Inherited Members
            
-
-
            Properties
            
-
              
-
            • bool autoMask - whether the checkbox is automatically masked  (read only)
              • 
-
            • bool checked - whether the checkbox is checked
              • 
-
            • bool tristate - whether the checkbox is a tri-state checkbox
              • 
-
            
-
            Detailed Description
            
-
-
-The TQCheckBox widget provides a checkbox with a text label.
-
             
-
-
             TQCheckBox and TQRadioButton are both option buttons. That is, they
-can be switched on (checked) or off (unchecked). The classes
-differ in how the choices for the user are restricted. Radio
-buttons define a "one of many" choice, whereas checkboxes provide
-"many of many" choices.
-
             A TQButtonGroup can be used to group check buttons visually.
-
             Whenever a checkbox is checked or cleared it emits the signal
-toggled(). Connect to this signal if you want to trigger an action
-each time the checkbox changes state. You can use isChecked() to
-query whether or not a checkbox is checked.
-
             Warning: The toggled() signal can not be trusted for tristate
-checkboxes.
-
             In addition to the usual checked and unchecked states, TQCheckBox
-optionally provides a third state to indicate "no change". This
-is useful whenever you need to give the user the option of neither
-checking nor unchecking a checkbox. If you need this third state,
-enable it with setTristate() and use state() to query the current
-toggle state. When a tristate checkbox changes state, it emits the
-stateChanged() signal.
-
             Just like TQPushButton, a checkbox can display text or a pixmap.
-The text can be set in the constructor or with setText(); the
-pixmap is set with setPixmap().
-
             
-
              
-
             
            See also TQButton, TQRadioButton, Fowler: Check Box, and Basic Widgets.
-
-
            Member Function Documentation
            
-
            TQCheckBox::TQCheckBox ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
-
            
-Constructs a checkbox with no text.
-
             The parent and name arguments are sent to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
-
            TQCheckBox::TQCheckBox ( const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
-
            
-Constructs a checkbox with text text.
-
             The parent and name arguments are sent to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
-
            TQKeySequence TQButton::accel () const
-
            Returns the accelerator associated with the button.
-See the "accel" property for details.
-
            bool TQButton::autoRepeat () const
-
            Returns TRUE if autoRepeat is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "autoRepeat" property for details.
-
            void TQButton::clicked () [signal]
-
            
-
-
             This signal is emitted when the button is activated (i.e. first
-pressed down and then released when the mouse cursor is inside the
-button), when the accelerator key is typed or when animateClick()
-is called. This signal is not emitted if you call setDown().
-
             The TQButtonGroup::clicked() signal does the same job, if you want
-to connect several buttons to the same slot.
-
             Warning: Don't launch a model dialog in response to this signal
-for a button that has autoRepeat turned on.
-
             
            See also pressed(), released(), toggled(), autoRepeat, and down.
-
-
            Examples: chart/setdataform.cpp, listbox/listbox.cpp, network/clientserver/client/client.cpp, progressbar/progressbar.cpp, richtext/richtext.cpp, t2/main.cpp, and t4/main.cpp.
-
            TQButtonGroup * TQButton::group () const
-
            
-Returns the group that this button belongs to.
-
             If the button is not a member of any TQButtonGroup, this function
-returns 0.
-
             
            See also TQButtonGroup.
-
-
            bool TQCheckBox::isChecked () const
-
            Returns TRUE if the checkbox is checked; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "checked" property for details.
-
            bool TQButton::isDown () const
-
            Returns TRUE if the button is pressed; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "down" property for details.
-
            bool TQButton::isExclusiveToggle () const
-
            Returns TRUE if the button is an exclusive toggle; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "exclusiveToggle" property for details.
-
            bool TQButton::isOn () const
-
            Returns TRUE if the button is toggled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "on" property for details.
-
            bool TQButton::isToggleButton () const
-
            Returns TRUE if the button is a toggle button; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "toggleButton" property for details.
-
            bool TQCheckBox::isTristate () const
-
            Returns TRUE if the checkbox is a tri-state checkbox; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "tristate" property for details.
-
            const TQPixmap * TQButton::pixmap () const
-
            Returns the pixmap shown on the button.
-See the "pixmap" property for details.
-
            void TQButton::pressed () [signal]
-
            
-
-
             This signal is emitted when the button is pressed down.
-
             
            See also released() and clicked().
-
-
            Examples: network/httpd/httpd.cpp and popup/popup.cpp.
-
            void TQButton::released () [signal]
-
            
-
-
             This signal is emitted when the button is released.
-
             
            See also pressed(), clicked(), and toggled().
-
-
            void TQButton::setAccel ( const TQKeySequence & ) [virtual]
-
            Sets the accelerator associated with the button.
-See the "accel" property for details.
-
            void TQButton::setAutoRepeat ( bool ) [virtual]
-
            Sets whether autoRepeat is enabled.
-See the "autoRepeat" property for details.
-
            void TQCheckBox::setChecked ( bool check ) [slot]
-
            Sets whether the checkbox is checked to check.
-See the "checked" property for details.
-
            void TQButton::setDown ( bool ) [virtual]
-
            Sets whether the button is pressed.
-See the "down" property for details.
-
            void TQCheckBox::setNoChange ()
-
            
-Sets the checkbox to the "no change" state.
-
             
            See also tristate.
-
-
            void TQButton::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & ) [virtual]
-
            Sets the pixmap shown on the button.
-See the "pixmap" property for details.
-
            void TQButton::setText ( const TQString & ) [virtual]
-
            Sets the text shown on the button.
-See the "text" property for details.
-
            void TQCheckBox::setTristate ( bool y = TRUE )
-
            Sets whether the checkbox is a tri-state checkbox to y.
-See the "tristate" property for details.
-
            ToggleState TQButton::state () const
-
            Returns the state of the toggle button.
-See the "toggleState" property for details.
-
            void TQButton::stateChanged ( int state ) [signal]
-
            
-
-
             This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes state. state is On if the button is on, NoChange if it is in the
-"no change" state or Off
-if the button is off.
-
             This may be the result of a user action, toggle() slot activation,
-setState(), or because setOn() was called.
-
             
            See also clicked() and TQButton::ToggleState.
-
-
            TQString TQButton::text () const
-
            Returns the text shown on the button.
-See the "text" property for details.
-
            void TQButton::toggle () [slot]
-
            
-Toggles the state of a toggle button.
-
             
            See also on, setOn(), toggled(), and toggleButton.
-
-
            void TQButton::toggled ( bool on ) [signal]
-
            
-
-
             This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes status. on is TRUE if the button is on, or FALSE if the button is off.
-
             This may be the result of a user action, toggle() slot activation,
-or because setOn() was called.
-
             
            See also clicked().
-
-
            Example: listbox/listbox.cpp.
-
            Property Documentation
            
-
            TQKeySequence accel
            
-
            This property holds the accelerator associated with the button.
-
            This property is 0 if there is no accelerator set. If you set this
-property to 0 then any current accelerator is removed.
-
-
            Set this property's value with setAccel() and get this property's value with accel().
-
            bool autoMask
            
-
            This property holds whether the checkbox is automatically masked.
-
            See also TQWidget::autoMask.
-
-
            bool autoRepeat
            
-
            This property holds whether autoRepeat is enabled.
-
            If autoRepeat is enabled then the clicked() signal is emitted at
-regular intervals if the button is down. This property has no
-effect on toggle buttons. autoRepeat is off by default.
-
-
            Set this property's value with setAutoRepeat() and get this property's value with autoRepeat().
-
            bool checked
            
-
            This property holds whether the checkbox is checked.
-
            The default is unchecked, i.e. FALSE.
-
-
            Set this property's value with setChecked() and get this property's value with isChecked().
-
            TQPixmap pixmap
            
-
            This property holds the pixmap shown on the button.
-
            If the pixmap is monochrome (i.e. it is a TQBitmap or its depth is 1) and it does not have a mask,
-this property will set the pixmap to be its own mask. The purpose
-of this is to draw transparent bitmaps which are important for
-toggle buttons, for example.
-
             pixmap() returns 0 if no pixmap was set.
-
-
            Set this property's value with setPixmap() and get this property's value with pixmap().
-
            TQString text
            
-
            This property holds the text shown on the button.
-
            This property will return a TQString::null if the button has no
-text. If the text has an ampersand (&) in it, then an
-accelerator is automatically created for it using the character
-that follows the '&' as the accelerator key. Any previous
-accelerator will be overwritten, or cleared if no accelerator is
-defined by the text.
-
             There is no default text.
-
-
            Set this property's value with setText() and get this property's value with text().
-
            bool tristate
            
-
            This property holds whether the checkbox is a tri-state checkbox.
-
            The default is two-state, i.e. tri-state is FALSE.
-
-
            Set this property's value with setTristate() and get this property's value with isTristate().
-
-
            
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
            
-
-
            Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
            TQt 3.3.8
            
-
            
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qchecklistitem-members.html b/doc/html/qchecklistitem-members.html
index ca0dd4eba..390cd7b0f 100644
--- a/doc/html/qchecklistitem-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qchecklistitem-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qchecklistitem.html b/doc/html/qchecklistitem.html
index a3ad180ea..eed2dd1c5 100644
--- a/doc/html/qchecklistitem.html
+++ b/doc/html/qchecklistitem.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
            The TQCheckListItem class provides checkable list view items.
 More...
-
            #include <qlistview.h>
+
            #include <ntqlistview.h>
 
            Inherits TQListViewItem.
 
            List of all member functions.
 
            Public Members
            
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 The TQCheckListItem class provides checkable list view items.
 
             
-
             TQCheckListItems are used in TQListViews to provide
+
             TQCheckListItems are used in TQListViews to provide
 TQListViewItems that are checkboxes, radio buttons or
 controllers.
 
             Checkbox and controller check list items may be inserted at any
@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ children of a controller check list item.
 
             The item can be checked or unchecked with setOn(). Its type can be
 retrieved with type() and its text retrieved with text().
 
             
            List View Items
             
-
             
            See also TQListViewItem, TQListView, and Advanced Widgets.
+
             
            See also TQListViewItem, TQListView, and Advanced Widgets.
 
 
            Member Type Documentation
            
 
            TQCheckListItem::ToggleState
            
@@ -103,49 +103,49 @@ retrieved with type() and its text retrieved with TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem ( TQCheckListItem * parent, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )
+
            TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem ( TQCheckListItem * parent, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )
 
            
 Constructs a checkable item with parent parent, text text
 and of type tt. Note that a RadioButton must be the child of a
 RadioButtonController, otherwise it will not toggle.
 
-
            TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem ( TQCheckListItem * parent, TQListViewItem * after, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )
+
            TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem ( TQCheckListItem * parent, TQListViewItem * after, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )
 
            
 Constructs a checkable item with parent parent, which is after
 after in the parent's list of children, and with text text
 and of type tt. Note that a RadioButton must be the child of
 a RadioButtonController, otherwise it will not toggle.
 
-
            TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem ( TQListViewItem * parent, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )
+
            TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem ( TQListViewItem * parent, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )
 
            
 Constructs a checkable item with parent parent, text text
 and of type tt. Note that this item must not be a RadioButton. Radio buttons must be children of a RadioButtonController.
 
-
            TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem ( TQListViewItem * parent, TQListViewItem * after, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )
+
            TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem ( TQListViewItem * parent, TQListViewItem * after, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )
 
            
 Constructs a checkable item with parent parent, which is after
 after in the parent's list of children, with text text and
 of type tt. Note that this item must not be a RadioButton. Radio buttons must be children of a RadioButtonController.
 
-
            TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem ( TQListView * parent, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )
+
            TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem ( TQListView * parent, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )
 
            
 Constructs a checkable item with parent parent, text text
 and of type tt. Note that tt must not be RadioButton.
 Radio buttons must be children of a RadioButtonController.
 
-
            TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem ( TQListView * parent, TQListViewItem * after, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )
+
            TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem ( TQListView * parent, TQListViewItem * after, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )
 
            
 Constructs a checkable item with parent parent, which is after
 after in the parent's list of children, with text text and
 of type tt. Note that tt must not be RadioButton.
 Radio buttons must be children of a RadioButtonController.
 
-
            TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem ( TQListViewItem * parent, const TQString & text, const TQPixmap & p )
+
            TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem ( TQListViewItem * parent, const TQString & text, const TQPixmap & p )
 
            
 Constructs a RadioButtonController item with parent parent,
 text text and pixmap p.
 
-
            TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem ( TQListView * parent, const TQString & text, const TQPixmap & p )
+
            TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem ( TQListView * parent, const TQString & text, const TQPixmap & p )
 
            
 Constructs a RadioButtonController item with parent parent,
 text text and pixmap p.
@@ -170,14 +170,14 @@ Toggle check box or set radio button to on.
 Returns TRUE if the item is tristate; otherwise returns FALSE.
 
             
            See also setTristate().
 
-
            void TQCheckListItem::paintCell ( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg, int column, int width, int align ) [virtual]
+
            void TQCheckListItem::paintCell ( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg, int column, int width, int align ) [virtual]
 
            
 Paints the item using the painter p and the color group cg.
 The item is in column column, has width width and has
 alignment align. (See TQt::AlignmentFlags for valid alignments.)
 
 
            Reimplemented from TQListViewItem.
-
            void TQCheckListItem::paintFocus ( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg, const TQRect & r ) [virtual]
+
            void TQCheckListItem::paintFocus ( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg, const TQRect & r ) [virtual]
 
            
 Draws the focus rectangle r using the color group cg on the
 painter p.
@@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ This virtual function is called when the item changes its state.
 NoChange (if tristate is enabled and the type is either CheckBox or CheckBoxController) reports the same as Off, so
 use state() to determine if the state is actually Off or NoChange.
 
-
            TQString TQCheckListItem::text () const
+
            TQString TQCheckListItem::text () const
 
            
 
 
             Returns the item's text.
diff --git a/doc/html/qchecktableitem-members.html b/doc/html/qchecktableitem-members.html
index e5a000da6..25d7c9303 100644
--- a/doc/html/qchecktableitem-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qchecktableitem-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qchecktableitem.html b/doc/html/qchecktableitem.html
index b2e361608..938aedf68 100644
--- a/doc/html/qchecktableitem.html
+++ b/doc/html/qchecktableitem.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
            The TQCheckTableItem class provides checkboxes in TQTables.
 More...
-
            #include <qtable.h>
+
            #include <ntqtable.h>
 
            Inherits TQTableItem.
 
            List of all member functions.
 
            Public Members
            
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ The TQCheckTableItem class provides checkboxes in TQTables.
 
             A TQCheckTableItem is a table item which looks and behaves like a
 checkbox. The advantage of using TQCheckTableItems rather than real
 checkboxes is that a TQCheckTableItem uses far less resources than
-a real checkbox would in a TQTable. When the cell has the focus
+a real checkbox would in a TQTable. When the cell has the focus
 it displays a real checkbox which the user can interact with. When
 the cell does not have the focus the cell looks like a
 checkbox. Pixmaps may not be used in TQCheckTableItems.
@@ -63,15 +63,15 @@ checkbox. Pixmaps may not be used in TQCheckTableItems.
 checked and unchecked with setChecked() and its state retrieved
 using isChecked().
 
             To populate a table cell with a TQCheckTableItem use
-TQTable::setItem().
+TQTable::setItem().
 
             TQCheckTableItems can be distinguished from TQTableItems and
 TQComboTableItems using their Run Time Type Identification
 (rtti) value.
 
             
            Table Items
             
-
             
            See also rtti(), EditType, TQComboTableItem, TQTableItem, TQCheckBox, and Advanced Widgets.
+
             
            See also rtti(), EditType, TQComboTableItem, TQTableItem, TQCheckBox, and Advanced Widgets.
 
 
            Member Function Documentation
            
-
            TQCheckTableItem::TQCheckTableItem ( TQTable * table, const TQString & txt )
+
            TQCheckTableItem::TQCheckTableItem ( TQTable * table, const TQString & txt )
 
            
 Creates a TQCheckTableItem with an EditType of WhenCurrent
 as a child of table. The checkbox is initially unchecked and
diff --git a/doc/html/qchildevent-members.html b/doc/html/qchildevent-members.html
index 7bd15fb2a..f5fca9cc2 100644
--- a/doc/html/qchildevent-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qchildevent-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -39,8 +39,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
          • child()
 
          • inserted()
 
          • removed()
-
          • spontaneous()
-
          • type()
+
          • spontaneous()
+
          • type()
 
          
 
 
          
diff --git a/doc/html/qchildevent.html b/doc/html/qchildevent.html
index 5a0189660..b18e2546c 100644
--- a/doc/html/qchildevent.html
+++ b/doc/html/qchildevent.html
@@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
          The TQChildEvent class contains event parameters for child object
 events.
 More...
-
          #include <qevent.h>
-
          Inherits TQEvent.
+
          #include <ntqevent.h>
+
          Inherits TQEvent.
 
          List of all member functions.
 
          Public Members
          
 
            
@@ -52,24 +52,24 @@ events.
 
             
 
             Child events are sent to objects when children are inserted or
 removed.
-
             A ChildRemoved event is sent immediately, but a ChildInserted event is posted (with TQApplication::postEvent()).
+
             A ChildRemoved event is sent immediately, but a ChildInserted event is posted (with TQApplication::postEvent()).
 
             Note that if a child is removed immediately after it is inserted,
-the ChildInserted event may be suppressed, but the ChildRemoved event will always be sent. In this case there will be
-a ChildRemoved event without a corresponding ChildInserted
+the ChildInserted event may be suppressed, but the ChildRemoved event will always be sent. In this case there will be
+a ChildRemoved event without a corresponding ChildInserted
 event.
-
             The handler for these events is TQObject::childEvent().
+
             The handler for these events is TQObject::childEvent().
 
            See also Event Classes.
 
 
            Member Function Documentation
            
-
            TQChildEvent::TQChildEvent ( Type type, TQObject * child )
+
            TQChildEvent::TQChildEvent ( Type type, TQObject * child )
 
            
 
 
             Constructs a child event object. The child is the object that
 is to be removed or inserted.
-
             The type parameter must be either TQEvent::ChildInserted or
-TQEvent::ChildRemoved.
+
             The type parameter must be either TQEvent::ChildInserted or
+TQEvent::ChildRemoved.
 
-
            TQObject * TQChildEvent::child () const
+
            TQObject * TQChildEvent::child () const
 
            
 
 
             Returns the child widget that was inserted or removed.
diff --git a/doc/html/qclipboard-h.html b/doc/html/qclipboard-h.html
index 94ea7737e..4b5bf5189 100644
--- a/doc/html/qclipboard-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qclipboard-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qclipboard.h Include File
+ntqclipboard.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
            
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
            TQClipboard Class Reference
            
-
-
            The TQClipboard class provides access to the window system clipboard.
-More...
-
            #include <qclipboard.h>
-
            Inherits TQObject.
-
            List of all member functions.
-
            Public Members
            
-
              
-
            • enum Mode { Clipboard, Selection }
              • 
-
            • void clear ( Mode mode )
              • 
-
            • void clear ()
              • 
-
            • bool supportsSelection () const
              • 
-
            • bool ownsSelection () const
              • 
-
            • bool ownsClipboard () const
              • 
-
            • void setSelectionMode ( bool enable )  (obsolete)
              • 
-
            • bool selectionModeEnabled () const  (obsolete)
              • 
-
            • TQString text ( Mode mode ) const
              • 
-
            • TQString text ( TQCString & subtype, Mode mode ) const
              • 
-
            • void setText ( const TQString & text, Mode mode )
              • 
-
            • TQMimeSource * data ( Mode mode ) const
              • 
-
            • void setData ( TQMimeSource * src, Mode mode )
              • 
-
            • TQImage image ( Mode mode ) const
              • 
-
            • TQPixmap pixmap ( Mode mode ) const
              • 
-
            • void setImage ( const TQImage & image, Mode mode )
              • 
-
            • void setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, Mode mode )
              • 
-
            • TQString text () const
              • 
-
            • TQString text ( TQCString & subtype ) const
              • 
-
            • void setText ( const TQString & text )
              • 
-
            • TQMimeSource * data () const
              • 
-
            • void setData ( TQMimeSource * src )
              • 
-
            • TQImage image () const
              • 
-
            • TQPixmap pixmap () const
              • 
-
            • void setImage ( const TQImage & image )
              • 
-
            • void setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pixmap )
              • 
-
            
-
            Signals
            
-
-
            Detailed Description
            
-
-
-The TQClipboard class provides access to the window system clipboard.
-
             
-
-
-
             The clipboard offers a simple mechanism to copy and paste data
-between applications.
-
             TQClipboard supports the same data types that TQDragObject does, and
-uses similar mechanisms. For advanced clipboard usage
-read the drag-and-drop documentation.
-
             There is a single TQClipboard object in an application, and you can
-access it using TQApplication::clipboard().
-
             Example:
-
            -    TQClipboard *cb = TQApplication::clipboard();
-
-    // Copy text from the clipboard (paste)
-    TQString text = cb->text(TQClipboard::Clipboard);
-    if ( !text.isNull() )
-        qDebug( "The clipboard contains: " + text );
-
-    // Copy text into the clipboard
-    cb->setText( "This text can be pasted by other programs",
-                 TQClipboard::Clipboard );
-    
            
- 
-
             TQClipboard features some convenience functions to access common data
-types: setText() allows the exchange of Unicode text and
-setPixmap() and setImage() allows the exchange of TQPixmaps
-and TQImages between applications. The setData() function is the
-ultimate in flexibility: it allows you to add any TQMimeSource into the
-clipboard. There are corresponding getters for each of these, e.g.
-text(), image() and pixmap().
-
             You can clear the clipboard by calling clear().
-
             
             Platform Specific Information
-
            
-
             
             X11
-
            
-
             
              
-
               
            •  The X11 Window System has the concept of a separate selection
-and clipboard.  When text is selected, it is immediately available
-as the global mouse selection.  The global mouse selection may
-later be copied to the clipboard.  By convention, the middle mouse
-button is used to paste the global mouse selection.
-
               
            •  X11 also has the concept of ownership; if you change the
-selection within a window, X11 will only notify the owner and the
-previous owner of the change, i.e. it will not notify all
-applications that the selection or clipboard data changed.
-
               
            •  Lastly, the X11 clipboard is event driven, i.e. the clipboard
-will not function properly if the event loop is not running.
-Similarly, it is recommended that the contents of the clipboard
-are stored or retrieved in direct response to user-input events,
-e.g. mouse button or key presses and releases.  You should not
-store or retrieve the clipboard contents in response to timer or
-non-user-input events.
-
               
            
-
             
             Windows
-
            
-
             
              
-
               
            •  Microsoft Windows does not support the global mouse selection;
-it only supports the global clipboard, e.g. Windows only adds text
-to the clipboard when an explicit copy or cut is made.
-
               
            •  Windows does not have the concept of ownership; the clipboard
-is a fully global resource so all applications are notified of
-changes.
-
               
            
-
             See the multiclip example in the TQt Designer examples
-directory for an example of a multiplatform clipboard application
-that also demonstrates selection handling.
-
            See also Environment Classes and Input/Output and Networking.
-
-
            Member Type Documentation
            
-
            TQClipboard::Mode
             
-
-
             This enum type is used to control which part of the system clipboard is
-used by TQClipboard::data(), TQClipboard::setData() and related functions.
-
              
-
            • TQClipboard::Clipboard - indicates that data should be stored and retrieved from
-the global clipboard.
-
            • TQClipboard::Selection - indicates that data should be stored and retrieved from
-the global mouse selection.
-
             Note: Support for Selection is provided only on systems with a
-global mouse selection (e.g. X11).
-
             
            See also TQClipboard::supportsSelection().
-
-
            Member Function Documentation
            
-
            void TQClipboard::clear ( Mode mode )
-
             
-Clear the clipboard contents.
-
             The mode argument is used to control which part of the system
-clipboard is used.  If mode is TQClipboard::Clipboard, this
-function clears the the global clipboard contents.  If mode is
-TQClipboard::Selection, this function clears the global mouse
-selection contents.
-
             
            See also TQClipboard::Mode and supportsSelection().
-
-
            void TQClipboard::clear ()
-
            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
             This function uses the TQClipboard::clear() function which takes
-a TQClipboard::Mode argument.  The value of the mode argument is
-determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled().
-If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is
-TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard.
-
-
            TQMimeSource * TQClipboard::data ( Mode mode ) const
-
             
-Returns a reference to a TQMimeSource representation of the current
-clipboard data.
-
             The mode argument is used to control which part of the system
-clipboard is used.  If mode is TQClipboard::Clipboard, the
-data is retrieved from the global clipboard.  If mode is
-TQClipboard::Selection, the data is retrieved from the global
-mouse selection.
-
             
            See also setData().
-
-
            TQMimeSource * TQClipboard::data () const
-
            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
             This function uses the TQClipboard::data() function which takes
-a TQClipboard::Mode argument.  The value of the mode argument is
-determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled().
-If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is
-TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is
-TQClipboard::Clipboard.
-
-
            void TQClipboard::dataChanged () [signal]
-
            
-
-
             This signal is emitted when the clipboard data is changed.
-
-
            TQImage TQClipboard::image ( Mode mode ) const
-
            
-Returns the clipboard image, or returns a null image if the
-clipboard does not contain an image or if it contains an image in
-an unsupported image format.
-
             The mode argument is used to control which part of the system
-clipboard is used.  If mode is TQClipboard::Clipboard, the
-image is retrieved from the global clipboard.  If mode is
-TQClipboard::Selection, the image is retrieved from the global
-mouse selection.
-
             
            See also setImage(), pixmap(), data(), and TQImage::isNull().
-
-
            TQImage TQClipboard::image () const
-
            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
             This function uses the TQClipboard::image() function which takes
-a TQClipboard::Mode argument.  The value of the mode argument is
-determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled().
-If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is
-TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is
-TQClipboard::Clipboard.
-
-
            bool TQClipboard::ownsClipboard () const
-
            
-Returns TRUE if this clipboard object owns the clipboard data;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
            bool TQClipboard::ownsSelection () const
-
            
-Returns TRUE if this clipboard object owns the mouse selection
-data; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
            TQPixmap TQClipboard::pixmap ( Mode mode ) const
-
            
-Returns the clipboard pixmap, or null if the clipboard does not
-contain a pixmap. Note that this can lose information. For
-example, if the image is 24-bit and the display is 8-bit, the
-result is converted to 8 bits, and if the image has an alpha
-channel, the result just has a mask.
-
             The mode argument is used to control which part of the system
-clipboard is used.  If mode is TQClipboard::Clipboard, the
-pixmap is retrieved from the global clipboard.  If mode is
-TQClipboard::Selection, the pixmap is retrieved from the global
-mouse selection.
-
             
            See also setPixmap(), image(), data(), and TQPixmap::convertFromImage().
-
-
            TQPixmap TQClipboard::pixmap () const
-
            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
             This function uses the TQClipboard::pixmap() function which takes
-a TQClipboard::Mode argument.  The value of the mode argument is
-determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled().
-If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is
-TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is
-TQClipboard::Clipboard.
-
-
            void TQClipboard::selectionChanged () [signal]
-
            
-
-
             This signal is emitted when the selection is changed. This only
-applies to windowing systems that support selections, e.g. X11.
-Windows doesn't support selections.
-
-
            bool TQClipboard::selectionModeEnabled () const
-
             This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
             Use the TQClipboard::data(), TQClipboard::setData() and related functions
-which take a TQClipboard::Mode argument.
-
             Returns the selection mode.
-
             
            See also setSelectionMode() and supportsSelection().
-
-
            void TQClipboard::setData ( TQMimeSource * src, Mode mode )
-
             
-Sets the clipboard data to src. Ownership of the data is
-transferred to the clipboard. If you want to remove the data
-either call clear() or call setData() again with new data.
-
             The mode argument is used to control which part of the system
-clipboard is used.  If mode is TQClipboard::Clipboard, the
-data is retrieved from the global clipboard.  If mode is
-TQClipboard::Selection, the data is retrieved from the global
-mouse selection.
-
             The TQDragObject subclasses are reasonable objects to put into the
-clipboard (but do not try to call TQDragObject::drag() on the same
-object). Any TQDragObject placed in the clipboard should have a
-parent of 0. Do not put TQDragMoveEvent or TQDropEvent subclasses in
-the clipboard, as they do not belong to the event handler which
-receives them.
-
             The setText(), setImage() and setPixmap() functions are simpler
-wrappers for setting text, image and pixmap data respectively.
-
             
            See also data().
-
-
            void TQClipboard::setData ( TQMimeSource * src )
-
            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
             This function uses the TQClipboard::setData() function which takes
-a TQClipboard::Mode argument.  The value of the mode argument is
-determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled().
-If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is
-TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is
-TQClipboard::Clipboard.
-
-
            void TQClipboard::setImage ( const TQImage & image, Mode mode )
-
            
-Copies image into the clipboard.
-
             The mode argument is used to control which part of the system
-clipboard is used.  If mode is TQClipboard::Clipboard, the
-image is stored in the global clipboard.  If mode is
-TQClipboard::Selection, the data is stored in the global
-mouse selection.
-
             This is shorthand for:
-
            -        setData( new TQImageDrag(image), mode )
-    
            
- 
-
             
            See also image(), setPixmap(), and setData().
-
-
            void TQClipboard::setImage ( const TQImage & image )
-
            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
             This function uses the TQClipboard::setImage() function which takes
-a TQClipboard::Mode argument.  The value of the mode argument is
-determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled().
-If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is
-TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is
-TQClipboard::Clipboard.
-
-
            void TQClipboard::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, Mode mode )
-
            
-Copies pixmap into the clipboard. Note that this is slower
-than setImage() because it needs to convert the TQPixmap to a
-TQImage first.
-
             The mode argument is used to control which part of the system
-clipboard is used.  If mode is TQClipboard::Clipboard, the
-pixmap is stored in the global clipboard.  If mode is
-TQClipboard::Selection, the pixmap is stored in the global
-mouse selection.
-
             
            See also pixmap(), setImage(), and setData().
-
-
            void TQClipboard::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pixmap )
-
            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
             This function uses the TQClipboard::setPixmap() function which takes
-a TQClipboard::Mode argument.  The value of the mode argument is
-determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled().
-If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is
-TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is
-TQClipboard::Clipboard.
-
-
            void TQClipboard::setSelectionMode ( bool enable )
-
             This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
             Use the TQClipboard::data(), TQClipboard::setData() and related functions
-which take a TQClipboard::Mode argument.
-
             Sets the clipboard selection mode. If enable is TRUE, then
-subsequent calls to TQClipboard::setData() and other functions
-which put data into the clipboard will put the data into the mouse
-selection, otherwise the data will be put into the clipboard.
-
             
            See also supportsSelection() and selectionModeEnabled().
-
-
            void TQClipboard::setText ( const TQString & text, Mode mode )
-
            
-Copies text into the clipboard as plain text.
-
             The mode argument is used to control which part of the system
-clipboard is used.  If mode is TQClipboard::Clipboard, the
-text is stored in the global clipboard.  If mode is
-TQClipboard::Selection, the text is stored in the global
-mouse selection.
-
             
            See also text() and setData().
-
-
            Example: regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
-
            void TQClipboard::setText ( const TQString & text )
-
            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
             This function uses the TQClipboard::setText() function which takes
-a TQClipboard::Mode argument.  The value of the mode argument is
-determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled().
-If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is
-TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is
-TQClipboard::Clipboard.
-
-
            bool TQClipboard::supportsSelection () const
-
            
-Returns TRUE if the clipboard supports mouse selection; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
-
            Example: regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
-
            TQString TQClipboard::text ( Mode mode ) const
-
            
-Returns the clipboard text as plain text, or a null string if the
-clipboard does not contain any text.
-
             The mode argument is used to control which part of the system
-clipboard is used.  If mode is TQClipboard::Clipboard, the
-text is retrieved from the global clipboard.  If mode is
-TQClipboard::Selection, the text is retrieved from the global
-mouse selection.
-
             
            See also setText(), data(), and TQString::operator!().
-
-
            TQString TQClipboard::text ( TQCString & subtype, Mode mode ) const
-
            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
             Returns the clipboard text in subtype subtype, or a null string
-if the clipboard does not contain any text. If subtype is null,
-any subtype is acceptable, and subtype is set to the chosen
-subtype.
-
             The mode argument is used to control which part of the system
-clipboard is used.  If mode is TQClipboard::Clipboard, the
-text is retrieved from the global clipboard.  If mode is
-TQClipboard::Selection, the text is retrieved from the global
-mouse selection.
-
             Common values for subtype are "plain" and "html".
-
             
            See also setText(), data(), and TQString::operator!().
-
-
            TQString TQClipboard::text () const
-
            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
             This function uses the TQClipboard::text() function which takes
-a TQClipboard::Mode argument.  The value of the mode argument is
-determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled().
-If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is
-TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is
-TQClipboard::Clipboard.
-
-
            TQString TQClipboard::text ( TQCString & subtype ) const
-
            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
             Returns the clipboard text in subtype subtype, or a null string
-if the clipboard does not contain any text. This function uses the
-TQClipboard::text() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode
-argument.  The value of the mode argument is determined by the
-return value of selectionModeEnabled(). If selectionModeEnabled()
-returns TRUE, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection,
-otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard.
-
-
-
            
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
            
-
-
            Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
            TQt 3.3.8
            
-
            
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qcloseevent-members.html b/doc/html/qcloseevent-members.html
index a96a1e63c..daf14edfe 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcloseevent-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcloseevent-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -39,8 +39,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
          • accept()
 
          • ignore()
 
          • isAccepted()
-
          • spontaneous()
-
          • type()
+
          • spontaneous()
+
          • type()
 
          
 
 
          
diff --git a/doc/html/qcloseevent.html b/doc/html/qcloseevent.html
index 1674e60b0..3a632cc33 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcloseevent.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcloseevent.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
          The TQCloseEvent class contains parameters that describe a close event.
 More...
-
          #include <qevent.h>
-
          Inherits TQEvent.
+
          #include <ntqevent.h>
+
          Inherits TQEvent.
 
          List of all member functions.
 
          Public Members
          
 
            
@@ -51,20 +51,20 @@ The TQCloseEvent class contains parameters that describe a close event.
 
             Close events are sent to widgets that the user wants to close,
 usually by choosing "Close" from the window menu, or by clicking
 the `X' titlebar button. They are also sent when you call
-TQWidget::close() to close a widget programmatically.
+TQWidget::close() to close a widget programmatically.
 
             Close events contain a flag that indicates whether the receiver
 wants the widget to be closed or not. When a widget accepts the
 close event, it is hidden (and destroyed if it was created with
-the WDestructiveClose flag). If it refuses to accept the close
+the WDestructiveClose flag). If it refuses to accept the close
 event nothing happens. (Under X11 it is possible that the window
 manager will forcibly close the window; but at the time of writing
 we are not aware of any window manager that does this.)
-
             The application's main widget -- TQApplication::mainWidget() --
+
             The application's main widget -- TQApplication::mainWidget() --
 is a special case. When it accepts the close event, TQt leaves the
 main event loop and the application is immediately terminated
-(i.e. it returns from the call to TQApplication::exec() in the
+(i.e. it returns from the call to TQApplication::exec() in the
 main() function).
-
             The event handler TQWidget::closeEvent() receives close events. The
+
             The event handler TQWidget::closeEvent() receives close events. The
 default implementation of this event handler accepts the close
 event. If you do not want your widget to be hidden, or want some
 special handing, you should reimplement the event handler.
@@ -72,16 +72,16 @@ special handing, you should reimplement the event handler.
     Application Walkthrough shows a close event handler that
 asks whether to save a document before closing.
 
             If you want the widget to be deleted when it is closed, create it
-with the WDestructiveClose widget flag. This is very useful for
+with the WDestructiveClose widget flag. This is very useful for
 independent top-level windows in a multi-window application.
-
             TQObjects emits the destroyed() signal when they are deleted.
+
             TQObjects emits the destroyed() signal when they are deleted.
 
             If the last top-level window is closed, the
-TQApplication::lastWindowClosed() signal is emitted.
+TQApplication::lastWindowClosed() signal is emitted.
 
             The isAccepted() function returns TRUE if the event's receiver has
 agreed to close the widget; call accept() to agree to close the
 widget and call ignore() if the receiver of this event does not
 want the widget to be closed.
-
             
            See also TQWidget::close(), TQWidget::hide(), TQObject::destroyed(), TQApplication::setMainWidget(), TQApplication::lastWindowClosed(), TQApplication::exec(), TQApplication::quit(), and Event Classes.
+
             
            See also TQWidget::close(), TQWidget::hide(), TQObject::destroyed(), TQApplication::setMainWidget(), TQApplication::lastWindowClosed(), TQApplication::exec(), TQApplication::quit(), and Event Classes.
 
 
            Member Function Documentation
            
 
            TQCloseEvent::TQCloseEvent ()
@@ -98,10 +98,10 @@ to FALSE.
 
             Setting the accept flag indicates that the receiver of this event
 agrees to close the widget.
 
             The accept flag is not set by default.
-
             If you choose to accept in TQWidget::closeEvent(), the widget will
-be hidden. If the widget's WDestructiveClose flag is set, it
+
             If you choose to accept in TQWidget::closeEvent(), the widget will
+be hidden. If the widget's WDestructiveClose flag is set, it
 will also be destroyed.
-
             
            See also ignore() and TQWidget::hide().
+
             
            See also ignore() and TQWidget::hide().
 
 
            Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, popup/popup.cpp, and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
 
            void TQCloseEvent::ignore ()
diff --git a/doc/html/qcollection.html b/doc/html/qcollection.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 4493c415e..000000000
--- a/doc/html/qcollection.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
-
-
-TQCollection Class Reference (obsolete)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
            
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
            TQCollection Class Reference (obsolete)
            
-
- 
-
             
            -#include <qcollection.h>
            
- 
-
             The TQCollection class has been renamed  TQPtrCollection  in TQt 3.0.
-
-
-
            
-
-
            Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
            TQt 3.3.8
            
-
            
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qcolor-h.html b/doc/html/qcolor-h.html
index 6759c8f95..ccfea5d58 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcolor-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcolor-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qcolor.h Include File
+ntqcolor.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
            
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
            TQColor Class Reference
            
-
-
            The TQColor class provides colors based on RGB or HSV values.
-More...
-
            #include <qcolor.h>
-
            List of all member functions.
-
            Public Members
            
-
              
-
            • enum Spec { Rgb, Hsv }
              • 
-
            • TQColor ()
              • 
-
            • TQColor ( int r, int g, int b )
              • 
-
            • TQColor ( int x, int y, int z, Spec colorSpec )
              • 
-
            • TQColor ( TQRgb rgb, uint pixel = 0xffffffff )
              • 
-
            • TQColor ( const TQString & name )
              • 
-
            • TQColor ( const char * name )
              • 
-
            • TQColor ( const TQColor & c )
              • 
-
            • TQColor & operator= ( const TQColor & c )
              • 
-
            • bool isValid () const
              • 
-
            • TQString name () const
              • 
-
            • void setNamedColor ( const TQString & name )
              • 
-
            • TQRgb rgb () const
              • 
-
            • void setRgb ( int r, int g, int b )
              • 
-
            • void setRgb ( TQRgb rgb )
              • 
-
            • void getRgb ( int * r, int * g, int * b ) const
              • 
-
            • void rgb ( int * r, int * g, int * b ) const  (obsolete)
              • 
-
            • int red () const
              • 
-
            • int green () const
              • 
-
            • int blue () const
              • 
-
            • void setHsv ( int h, int s, int v )
              • 
-
            • void getHsv ( int * h, int * s, int * v ) const
              • 
-
            • void hsv ( int * h, int * s, int * v ) const  (obsolete)
              • 
-
            • void getHsv ( int & h, int & s, int & v ) const  (obsolete)
              • 
-
            • TQColor light ( int factor = 150 ) const
              • 
-
            • TQColor dark ( int factor = 200 ) const
              • 
-
            • bool operator== ( const TQColor & c ) const
              • 
-
            • bool operator!= ( const TQColor & c ) const
              • 
-
            • uint alloc ()
              • 
-
            • uint pixel () const
              • 
-
            • uint pixel ( int screen ) const
              • 
-
            
-
            Static Public Members
            
-
-
            Related Functions
            
-
              
-
            • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQColor & c )
              • 
-
            • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQColor & c )
              • 
-
            • int qRed ( TQRgb rgb )
              • 
-
            • int qGreen ( TQRgb rgb )
              • 
-
            • int qBlue ( TQRgb rgb )
              • 
-
            • int qAlpha ( TQRgb rgba )
              • 
-
            • TQRgb qRgb ( int r, int g, int b )
              • 
-
            • TQRgb qRgba ( int r, int g, int b, int a )
              • 
-
            • int qGray ( int r, int g, int b )
              • 
-
            • int qGray ( qRgb rgb )
              • 
-
            
-
            Detailed Description
            
-
-
-The TQColor class provides colors based on RGB or HSV values.
-
             
-
-
-
             A color is normally specified in terms of RGB (red, green and blue)
-components, but it is also possible to specify HSV (hue, saturation
-and value) or set a color name (the names are copied from from the
-X11 color database).
-
             In addition to the RGB value, a TQColor also has a pixel value and a
-validity. The pixel value is used by the underlying window system
-to refer to a color. It can be thought of as an index into the
-display hardware's color table.
-
             The validity (isValid()) indicates whether the color is legal at
-all. For example, a RGB color with RGB values out of range is
-illegal. For performance reasons, TQColor mostly disregards illegal
-colors. The result of using an invalid color is unspecified and
-will usually be surprising.
-
             There are 19 predefined TQColor objects: white, black, red, darkRed, green, darkGreen, blue, darkBlue, cyan, darkCyan, magenta, darkMagenta, yellow, darkYellow, gray, darkGray, lightGray, color0 and color1, accessible as members of the TQt namespace (ie. TQt::red).
-
             
            TQt Colors
             
-
             The colors color0 (zero pixel value) and color1 (non-zero
-pixel value) are special colors for drawing in bitmaps. Painting with color0 sets the bitmap bits to 0
-(transparent, i.e. background), and painting with color1 sets the
-bits to 1 (opaque, i.e. foreground).
-
             The TQColor class has an efficient, dynamic color allocation
-strategy. A color is normally allocated the first time it is used
-(lazy allocation), that is, whenever the pixel() function is called.
-The following steps are taken to allocate a color. If, at any point,
-a suitable color is found then the appropriate pixel value is
-returned and the subsequent steps are not taken:
-
             
              
-
            1.  Is the pixel value valid? If it is, just return it; otherwise,
-allocate a pixel value.
-
            2.  Check an internal hash table to see if we allocated an equal RGB
-value earlier. If we did, set the corresponding pixel value for the
-color and return it.
-
            3.  Try to allocate the RGB value. If we succeed, we get a pixel value
-that we save in the internal table with the RGB value.
-Return the pixel value.
-
            4.  The color could not be allocated. Find the closest matching
-color, save it in the internal table, and return it.
-
            
-
             A color can be set by passing setNamedColor() an RGB string like
-"#112233", or a color name, e.g. "blue". The names are taken from
-X11's rgb.txt database but can also be used under Windows. To get
-a lighter or darker color use light() and dark() respectively.
-Colors can also be set using setRgb() and setHsv(). The color
-components can be accessed in one go with rgb() and hsv(), or
-individually with red(), green() and blue().
-
             Use maxColors() and numBitPlanes() to determine the maximum number
-of colors and the number of bit planes supported by the underlying
-window system,
-
             If you need to allocate many colors temporarily, for example in an
-image viewer application, enterAllocContext(), leaveAllocContext() and
-destroyAllocContext() will prove useful.
-
             
             HSV Colors
-
            
-
             Because many people don't know the HSV color model very well, we'll
-cover it briefly here.
-
             The RGB model is hardware-oriented. Its representation is close to
-what most monitors show. In contrast, HSV represents color in a way
-more suited to the human perception of color. For example, the
-relationships "stronger than", "darker than" and "the opposite of"
-are easily expressed in HSV but are much harder to express in RGB.
-
             HSV, like RGB, has three components:
-
             
              
-
               
            •  H, for hue, is either 0-359 if the color is chromatic (not
-gray), or meaningless if it is gray. It represents degrees on the
-color wheel familiar to most people. Red is 0 (degrees), green is
-120 and blue is 240.
-
               
            •  S, for saturation, is 0-255, and the bigger it is, the
-stronger the color is. Grayish colors have saturation near 0; very
-strong colors have saturation near 255.
-
               
            •  V, for value, is 0-255 and represents lightness or brightness
-of the color. 0 is black; 255 is as far from black as possible.
-
               
            
-
             Here are some examples: Pure red is H=0, S=255, V=255. A dark red,
-moving slightly towards the magenta, could be H=350 (equivalent to
--10), S=255, V=180. A grayish light red could have H about 0 (say
-350-359 or 0-10), S about 50-100, and S=255.
-
             TQt returns a hue value of -1 for achromatic colors. If you pass a
-too-big hue value, TQt forces it into range. Hue 360 or 720 is
-treated as 0; hue 540 is treated as 180.
-
             
            See also TQPalette, TQColorGroup, TQApplication::setColorSpec(), Color FAQ, Widget Appearance and Style, Graphics Classes, and Image Processing Classes.
-
-
            Member Type Documentation
            
-
            TQColor::Spec
            
-
-
             The type of color specified, either RGB or HSV, e.g. in the
-TQColor::TQColor( x, y, z, colorSpec) constructor.
-
              
-
            • TQColor::Rgb
-
            • TQColor::Hsv
-
            
-
            Member Function Documentation
            
-
            TQColor::TQColor ()
-
            
-
-
             Constructs an invalid color with the RGB value (0, 0, 0). An
-invalid color is a color that is not properly set up for the
-underlying window system.
-
             The alpha value of an invalid color is unspecified.
-
             
            See also isValid().
-
-
            TQColor::TQColor ( int r, int g, int b )
-
            
-
-
             Constructs a color with the RGB value r, g, b, in the
-same way as setRgb().
-
             The color is left invalid if any or the arguments are illegal.
-
             
            See also setRgb().
-
-
            TQColor::TQColor ( int x, int y, int z, Spec colorSpec )
-
            
-Constructs a color with the RGB or HSV value x, y, z.
-
             The arguments are an RGB value if colorSpec is TQColor::Rgb. x (red), y (green), and z (blue). All of them must be in the
-range 0-255.
-
             The arguments are an HSV value if colorSpec is TQColor::Hsv. x (hue) must be -1 for achromatic colors and 0-359 for chromatic
-colors; y (saturation) and z (value) must both be in the
-range 0-255.
-
             
            See also setRgb() and setHsv().
-
-
            TQColor::TQColor ( TQRgb rgb, uint pixel = 0xffffffff )
-
            
-Constructs a color with the RGB value rgb and a custom pixel
-value pixel.
-
             If pixel == 0xffffffff (the default), then the color uses the
-RGB value in a standard way. If pixel is something else, then
-the pixel value is set directly to pixel, skipping the normal
-allocation procedure.
-
-
            TQColor::TQColor ( const TQString & name )
-
            
-Constructs a named color in the same way as setNamedColor() using
-name name.
-
             The color is left invalid if name cannot be parsed.
-
             
            See also setNamedColor().
-
-
            TQColor::TQColor ( const char * name )
-
            
-Constructs a named color in the same way as setNamedColor() using
-name name.
-
             The color is left invalid if name cannot be parsed.
-
             
            See also setNamedColor().
-
-
            TQColor::TQColor ( const TQColor & c )
-
            
-Constructs a color that is a copy of c.
-
-
            uint TQColor::alloc ()
-
            
-Allocates the RGB color and returns the pixel value.
-
             Allocating a color means to obtain a pixel value from the RGB
-specification.  The pixel value is an index into the global color
-table, but should be considered an arbitrary platform-dependent value.
-
             The pixel() function calls alloc() if necessary, so in general you
-don't need to call this function.
-
             
            See also enterAllocContext().
-
-
            int TQColor::blue () const
-
            
-
-
             Returns the B (blue) component of the RGB value.
-
-
            void TQColor::cleanup () [static]
-
            
-Internal clean up required for TQColor.
-This function is called from the TQApplication destructor.
-
             
            See also initialize().
-
-
            TQStringList TQColor::colorNames () [static]
-
            
-
-Returns a TQStringList containing the color names TQt knows about.
-
-
            int TQColor::currentAllocContext () [static]
-
            
-Returns the current color allocation context.
-
             The default context is 0.
-
             
            See also enterAllocContext() and leaveAllocContext().
-
-
            TQColor TQColor::dark ( int factor = 200 ) const
-
            
-Returns a darker (or lighter) color, but does not change this
-object.
-
             Returns a darker color if factor is greater than 100. Setting
-factor to 300 returns a color that has one-third the
-brightness.
-
             Returns a lighter color if factor is less than 100. We
-recommend using lighter() for this purpose. If factor is 0 or
-negative, the return value is unspecified.
-
             (This function converts the current RGB color to HSV, divides V by
-factor and converts back to RGB.)
-
             
            See also light().
-
-
            Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
-
            void TQColor::destroyAllocContext ( int context ) [static]
-
            
-Destroys a color allocation context, context.
-
             This function deallocates all colors that were allocated in the
-specified context. If context == -1, it frees up all colors
-that the application has allocated. If context == -2, it frees
-up all colors that the application has allocated, except those in
-the default context.
-
             The function does nothing for true color displays.
-
             
            See also enterAllocContext() and alloc().
-
-
            Example: showimg/showimg.cpp.
-
            int TQColor::enterAllocContext () [static]
-
            
-Enters a color allocation context and returns a non-zero unique
-identifier.
-
             Color allocation contexts are useful for programs that need to
-allocate many colors and throw them away later, like image
-viewers. The allocation context functions work for true color
-displays as well as for colormap displays, except that
-TQColor::destroyAllocContext() does nothing for true color.
-
             Example:
-
            -    TQPixmap loadPixmap( TQString fileName )
-    {
-        static int alloc_context = 0;
-        if ( alloc_context )
-            TQColor::destroyAllocContext( alloc_context );
-        alloc_context = TQColor::enterAllocContext();
-        TQPixmap pm( fileName );
-        TQColor::leaveAllocContext();
-        return pm;
-    }
-    
            
- 
-
             The example code loads a pixmap from file. It frees up all colors
-that were allocated the last time loadPixmap() was called.
-
             The initial/default context is 0. TQt keeps a list of colors
-associated with their allocation contexts. You can call
-destroyAllocContext() to get rid of all colors that were allocated
-in a specific context.
-
             Calling enterAllocContext() enters an allocation context. The
-allocation context lasts until you call leaveAllocContext().
-TQColor has an internal stack of allocation contexts. Each call to
-enterAllocContex() must have a corresponding leaveAllocContext().
-
             
            -        // context 0 active
-    int c1 = TQColor::enterAllocContext();    // enter context c1
-        // context c1 active
-    int c2 = TQColor::enterAllocContext();    // enter context c2
-        // context c2 active
-    TQColor::leaveAllocContext();             // leave context c2
-        // context c1 active
-    TQColor::leaveAllocContext();             // leave context c1
-        // context 0 active
-        // Now, free all colors that were allocated in context c2
-    TQColor::destroyAllocContext( c2 );
-    
            
- 
-
             You may also want to set the application's color specification.
-See TQApplication::setColorSpec() for more information.
-
             
            See also leaveAllocContext(), currentAllocContext(), destroyAllocContext(), and TQApplication::setColorSpec().
-
-
            Example: showimg/showimg.cpp.
-
            void TQColor::getHsv ( int * h, int * s, int * v ) const
-
              
-
             Returns the current RGB value as HSV. The contents of the h, s and v pointers are set to the HSV values. If any of the three
-pointers are null, the function does nothing.
-
             The hue (which h points to) is set to -1 if the color is
-achromatic.
-
             Warning: Colors are stored internally as RGB values, so getHSv()
-may return slightly different values to those set by setHsv().
-
             
            See also setHsv() and rgb().
-
-
            void TQColor::getHsv ( int & h, int & s, int & v ) const
-
            
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
             
-
            void TQColor::getRgb ( int * r, int * g, int * b ) const
-
             
-
             Sets the contents pointed to by r, g and b to the red,
-green and blue components of the RGB value respectively. The value
-range for a component is 0..255.
-
             
            See also rgb(), setRgb(), and getHsv().
-
-
            int TQColor::green () const
-
            
-
-
             Returns the G (green) component of the RGB value.
-
-
            void TQColor::hsv ( int * h, int * s, int * v ) const
-
             This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-Use getHsv() instead.
-
-
            Example: themes/metal.cpp.
-
            void TQColor::initialize () [static]
-
            
-Internal initialization required for TQColor.
-This function is called from the TQApplication constructor.
-
             
            See also cleanup().
-
-
            bool TQColor::isValid () const
-
            
-
-
             Returns FALSE if the color is invalid, i.e. it was constructed using the
-default constructor; otherwise returns TRUE.
-
-
            Examples: chart/element.cpp, chart/setdataform.cpp, and scribble/scribble.cpp.
-
            void TQColor::leaveAllocContext () [static]
-
            
-Leaves a color allocation context.
-
             See enterAllocContext() for a detailed explanation.
-
             
            See also enterAllocContext() and currentAllocContext().
-
-
            Example: showimg/showimg.cpp.
-
            TQColor TQColor::light ( int factor = 150 ) const
-
            
-Returns a lighter (or darker) color, but does not change this
-object.
-
             Returns a lighter color if factor is greater than 100. Setting
-factor to 150 returns a color that is 50% brighter.
-
             Returns a darker color if factor is less than 100. We recommend
-using dark() for this purpose. If factor is 0 or negative, the
-return value is unspecified.
-
             (This function converts the current RGB color to HSV, multiplies V
-by factor, and converts the result back to RGB.)
-
             
            See also dark().
-
-
            Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
-
            int TQColor::maxColors () [static]
-
            
-Returns the maximum number of colors supported by the underlying
-window system if the window system uses a palette.
-
             Otherwise returns -1. Use numBitPlanes() to calculate the available
-colors in that case.
-
-
            TQString TQColor::name () const
-
            
-Returns the name of the color in the format "#RRGGBB", i.e. a "#"
-character followed by three two-digit hexadecimal numbers.
-
             
            See also setNamedColor().
-
-
            Example: chart/setdataform.cpp.
-
            int TQColor::numBitPlanes () [static]
-
            
-Returns the number of color bit planes for the underlying window
-system.
-
             The returned value is equal to the default pixmap depth.
-
             
            See also TQPixmap::defaultDepth().
-
-
            bool TQColor::operator!= ( const TQColor & c ) const
-
            
-
-Returns TRUE if this color has a different RGB value from c;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
            TQColor & TQColor::operator= ( const TQColor & c )
-
            
-Assigns a copy of the color c and returns a reference to this
-color.
-
-
            bool TQColor::operator== ( const TQColor & c ) const
-
            
-
-
             Returns TRUE if this color has the same RGB value as c;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
            uint TQColor::pixel () const
-
            
-Returns the pixel value.
-
             This value is used by the underlying window system to refer to a
-color. It can be thought of as an index into the display
-hardware's color table, but the value is an arbitrary 32-bit
-value.
-
             
            See also alloc().
-
-
            uint TQColor::pixel ( int screen ) const
-
            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
             Returns the pixel value for screen screen.
-
             This value is used by the underlying window system to refer to a color.
-It can be thought of as an index into the display hardware's color table,
-but the value is an arbitrary 32-bit value.
-
             
            See also alloc().
-
-
            int TQColor::red () const
-
            
-
-
             Returns the R (red) component of the RGB value.
-
-
            TQRgb TQColor::rgb () const
-
            
-
-
             Returns the RGB value.
-
             The return type TQRgb is equivalent to unsigned int.
-
             For an invalid color, the alpha value of the returned color is
-unspecified.
-
             
            See also setRgb(), hsv(), qRed(), qBlue(), qGreen(), and isValid().
-
-
            void TQColor::rgb ( int * r, int * g, int * b ) const
-
             This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-Use getRgb() instead 
-
            void TQColor::setHsv ( int h, int s, int v )
-
            
-Sets a HSV color value. h is the hue, s is the saturation
-and v is the value of the HSV color.
-
             If s or v are not in the range 0-255, or h is < -1, the
-color is not changed.
-
             Warning: Colors are stored internally as RGB values, so getHSv()
-may return slightly different values to those set by setHsv().
-
             
            See also hsv() and setRgb().
-
-
            Examples: drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, grapher/grapher.cpp, and progress/progress.cpp.
-
            void TQColor::setNamedColor ( const TQString & name )
-
            
-Sets the RGB value to name, which may be in one of these
-formats:
-
              
-
            •  #RGB (each of R, G and B is a single hex digit)
-
            •  #RRGGBB
-
            •  #RRRGGGBBB
-
            •  #RRRRGGGGBBBB
-
            •  A name from the X color database (rgb.txt) (e.g.
-"steelblue" or "gainsboro"). These color names also work
-under Windows.
-
            
-
             The color is invalid if name cannot be parsed.
-
-
            void TQColor::setRgb ( int r, int g, int b )
-
            
-Sets the RGB value to r, g, b. The arguments, r, g
-and b must all be in the range 0..255. If any of them are
-outside the legal range, the color is not changed.
-
             
            See also rgb() and setHsv().
-
-
            void TQColor::setRgb ( TQRgb rgb )
-
            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
             Sets the RGB value to rgb.
-
             The type TQRgb is equivalent to unsigned int.
-
             
            See also rgb() and setHsv().
-
-
            Related Functions
            
-
            TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQColor & c )
-
            
-
-Writes a color object, c to the stream, s.
-
             
            See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
            TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQColor & c )
-
            
-
-Reads a color object, c, from the stream, s.
-
             
            See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
            int qAlpha ( TQRgb rgba )
-
            
-
-
-
             Returns the alpha component of the RGBA quadruplet rgba.
-
-
            int qBlue ( TQRgb rgb )
-
            
-
-
-
             Returns the blue component of the RGB triplet rgb.
-
            See also qRgb() and TQColor::blue().
-
-
            int qGray ( int r, int g, int b )
-
            
-
-
-
             Returns a gray value 0..255 from the (r, g, b) triplet.
-
             The gray value is calculated using the formula (r*11 + g*16 +
-b*5)/32.
-
-
            int qGray ( qRgb rgb )
-
            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
             
-
             Returns a gray value 0..255 from the given rgb colour.
-
-
            int qGreen ( TQRgb rgb )
-
            
-
-
-
             Returns the green component of the RGB triplet rgb.
-
            See also qRgb() and TQColor::green().
-
-
            int qRed ( TQRgb rgb )
-
            
-
-
-
             Returns the red component of the RGB triplet rgb.
-
            See also qRgb() and TQColor::red().
-
-
            TQRgb qRgb ( int r, int g, int b )
-
            
-
-
-
             Returns the RGB triplet (r,g,b).
-
             The return type TQRgb is equivalent to unsigned int.
-
             
            See also qRgba(), qRed(), qGreen(), and qBlue().
-
-
            TQRgb qRgba ( int r, int g, int b, int a )
-
            
-
-
-
             Returns the RGBA quadruplet (r,g,b,a).
-
             The return type TQRgba is equivalent to unsigned int.
-
             
            See also qRgb(), qRed(), qGreen(), and qBlue().
-
-
-
            
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
            
-
-
            Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
            TQt 3.3.8
            
-
            
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qcolordialog-h.html b/doc/html/qcolordialog-h.html
index 053666272..38c7d8fb1 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcolordialog-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcolordialog-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qcolordialog.h Include File
+ntqcolordialog.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
            
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
            TQColorDialog Class Reference
            
-
-
            The TQColorDialog class provides a dialog widget for specifying colors.
-More...
-
            #include <qcolordialog.h>
-
            Inherits TQDialog.
-
            List of all member functions.
-
            Static Public Members
            
-
              
-
            • TQColor getColor ( const TQColor & initial = white, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
              • 
-
            • TQRgb getRgba ( TQRgb initial, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
              • 
-
            • int customCount ()
              • 
-
            • TQRgb customColor ( int i )
              • 
-
            • void setCustomColor ( int i, TQRgb c )
              • 
-
            • void setStandardColor ( int i, TQRgb c )
              • 
-
            
-
            Detailed Description
            
-
-
-The TQColorDialog class provides a dialog widget for specifying colors.
-
-
-
-
             The color dialog's function is to allow users to choose colors.
-For example, you might use this in a drawing program to allow the
-user to set the brush color.
-
             The static functions provide modal color dialogs.
-
-
             The static getColor() function shows the dialog and allows the
-user to specify a color. The getRgba() function does the same but
-also allows the user to specify a color with an alpha channel
-(transparency) value.
-
             The user can store customCount() different custom colors. The
-custom colors are shared by all color dialogs, and remembered
-during the execution of the program. Use setCustomColor() to set
-the custom colors, and use customColor() to get them.
-
             
             
            See also Dialog Classes and Graphics Classes.
-
-
            Member Function Documentation
            
-
            TQRgb TQColorDialog::customColor ( int i ) [static]
-
            
-Returns custom color number i as a TQRgb.
-
-
            int TQColorDialog::customCount () [static]
-
            
-Returns the number of custom colors supported by TQColorDialog. All
-color dialogs share the same custom colors.
-
-
            TQColor TQColorDialog::getColor ( const TQColor & initial = white, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) [static]
-
            
-Pops up a modal color dialog, lets the user choose a color, and
-returns that color. The color is initially set to initial. The
-dialog is a child of parent and is called name. It returns
-an invalid (see TQColor::isValid()) color if the user cancels the
-dialog. All colors allocated by the dialog will be deallocated
-before this function returns.
-
-
            Examples: chart/setdataform.cpp and scribble/scribble.cpp.
-
            TQRgb TQColorDialog::getRgba ( TQRgb initial, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) [static]
-
            
-Pops up a modal color dialog to allow the user to choose a color
-and an alpha channel (transparency) value. The color+alpha is
-initially set to initial. The dialog is a child of parent
-and called name.
-
             If ok is non-null, *ok is set to TRUE if the user clicked
-OK, and to FALSE if the user clicked Cancel.
-
             If the user clicks Cancel, the initial value is returned.
-
-
            void TQColorDialog::setCustomColor ( int i, TQRgb c ) [static]
-
            
-Sets custom color number i to the TQRgb value c.
-
-
            void TQColorDialog::setStandardColor ( int i, TQRgb c ) [static]
-
            
-Sets standard color number i to the TQRgb value c.
-
-
-
            
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
            
-
-
            Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
            TQt 3.3.8
            
-
            
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qcolordrag-members.html b/doc/html/qcolordrag-members.html
index 8e7c51718..9bd37020a 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcolordrag-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcolordrag-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -36,65 +36,65 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
 
 
            
diff --git a/doc/html/qcolordrag.html b/doc/html/qcolordrag.html
index 7a555f3b4..a9252566d 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcolordrag.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcolordrag.html
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
            The TQColorDrag class provides a drag and drop object for
 transferring colors.
 More...
-
            #include <qdragobject.h>
+
            #include <ntqdragobject.h>
 
            Inherits TQStoredDrag.
 
            List of all member functions.
 
            Public Members
            
@@ -56,19 +56,19 @@ transferring colors.
 
             
 
             This class provides a drag object which can be used to transfer data
 about colors for drag and drop and in the clipboard. For example, it
-is used in TQColorDialog.
+is used in TQColorDialog.
 
             The color is set in the constructor but can be changed with
 setColor().
-
             For more information about drag and drop, see the TQDragObject class
+
             For more information about drag and drop, see the TQDragObject class
 and the drag and drop documentation.
 
            See also Drag And Drop Classes.
 
 
            Member Function Documentation
            
-
            TQColorDrag::TQColorDrag ( const TQColor & col, TQWidget * dragsource = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
            TQColorDrag::TQColorDrag ( const TQColor & col, TQWidget * dragsource = 0, const char * name = 0 )
 
            
 Constructs a color drag object with the color col. Passes dragsource and name to the TQStoredDrag constructor.
 
-
            TQColorDrag::TQColorDrag ( TQWidget * dragsource = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
            TQColorDrag::TQColorDrag ( TQWidget * dragsource = 0, const char * name = 0 )
 
            
 Constructs a color drag object with a white color. Passes dragsource and name to the TQStoredDrag constructor.
 
@@ -77,11 +77,11 @@ Constructs a color drag object with a white color. Passes dragsource an
 Returns TRUE if the color drag object can decode the mime source
 e; otherwise returns FALSE.
 
-
            bool TQColorDrag::decode ( TQMimeSource * e, TQColor & col ) [static]
+
            bool TQColorDrag::decode ( TQMimeSource * e, TQColor & col ) [static]
 
            
 Decodes the mime source e and sets the decoded values to col.
 
-
            void TQColorDrag::setColor ( const TQColor & col )
+
            void TQColorDrag::setColor ( const TQColor & col )
 
            
 Sets the color of the color drag to col.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qcolorgroup-members.html b/doc/html/qcolorgroup-members.html
index 3cfb96f89..2b8475189 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcolorgroup-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcolorgroup-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qcolorgroup.html b/doc/html/qcolorgroup.html
index 76b466c9d..3821d4b7d 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcolorgroup.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcolorgroup.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
            The TQColorGroup class contains a group of widget colors.
 More...
-
            #include <qpalette.h>
+
            #include <ntqpalette.h>
 
            List of all member functions.
 
            Public Members
            
 
              
@@ -85,10 +85,10 @@ like "red" or "turquoise". The color roles are enumerated and
 defined in the ColorRole documentation.
 
               The most common use of TQColorGroup is like this:
 
               
              -        TQPainter p;
+        TQPainter p;
         ...
-        p.setPen( colorGroup().foreground() );
-        p.drawLine( ... )
+        p.setPen( colorGroup().foreground() );
+        p.drawLine( ... )
     
              
  
 
               It is also possible to modify color groups or create new color
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ color or a pixmap pattern.
 
               There are also corresponding color() and brush() getters, and a
 commonly used convenience function to get each ColorRole:
 background(), foreground(), base(), etc.
-
               
              See also TQColor, TQPalette, TQWidget::colorGroup, Widget Appearance and Style, Graphics Classes, and Image Processing Classes.
+
               
              See also TQColor, TQPalette, TQWidget::colorGroup, Widget Appearance and Style, Graphics Classes, and Image Processing Classes.
 
 
              Member Type Documentation
              
 
              TQColorGroup::ColorRole
              
@@ -165,16 +165,16 @@ common to use the text color roles for lines, icons, etc.
 
 Constructs a color group with all colors set to black.
 
-
              TQColorGroup::TQColorGroup ( const TQColor & foreground, const TQColor & background, const TQColor & light, const TQColor & dark, const TQColor & mid, const TQColor & text, const TQColor & base )
+
              TQColorGroup::TQColorGroup ( const TQColor & foreground, const TQColor & background, const TQColor & light, const TQColor & dark, const TQColor & mid, const TQColor & text, const TQColor & base )
 
              This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 
               Constructs a color group with the specified colors. The button
 color will be set to the background color.
 
-
              TQColorGroup::TQColorGroup ( const TQBrush & foreground, const TQBrush & button, const TQBrush & light, const TQBrush & dark, const TQBrush & mid, const TQBrush & text, const TQBrush & bright_text, const TQBrush & base, const TQBrush & background )
+
              TQColorGroup::TQColorGroup ( const TQBrush & foreground, const TQBrush & button, const TQBrush & light, const TQBrush & dark, const TQBrush & mid, const TQBrush & text, const TQBrush & bright_text, const TQBrush & base, const TQBrush & background )
 
              
 Constructs a color group. You can pass either brushes, pixmaps or
 plain colors for foreground, button, light, dark, mid, text, bright_text, base and background.
-
               
              See also TQBrush.
+
               
              See also TQBrush.
 
 
              TQColorGroup::TQColorGroup ( const TQColorGroup & other )
 
              
@@ -184,103 +184,103 @@ Constructs a color group that is an independent copy of other.
 
 Destroys the color group.
 
-
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::background () const
+
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::background () const
 
              
 
 
               Returns the background color of the color group.
 
               
              See also ColorRole.
 
-
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::base () const
+
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::base () const
 
              
 
 
               Returns the base color of the color group.
 
               
              See also ColorRole.
 
-
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::brightText () const
+
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::brightText () const
 
              
 
 
               Returns the bright text foreground color of the color group.
 
               
              See also ColorRole.
 
 
              Examples: themes/metal.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
-
              const TQBrush & TQColorGroup::brush ( ColorRole r ) const
+
              const TQBrush & TQColorGroup::brush ( ColorRole r ) const
 
              
 Returns the brush that has been set for color role r.
 
               
              See also color(), setBrush(), and ColorRole.
 
 
              Examples: themes/metal.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
-
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::button () const
+
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::button () const
 
              
 
 
               Returns the button color of the color group.
 
               
              See also ColorRole.
 
 
              Examples: themes/metal.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
-
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::buttonText () const
+
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::buttonText () const
 
              
 
 
               Returns the button text foreground color of the color group.
 
               
              See also ColorRole.
 
 
              Examples: themes/metal.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
-
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::color ( ColorRole r ) const
+
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::color ( ColorRole r ) const
 
              
 Returns the color that has been set for color role r.
 
               
              See also brush() and ColorRole.
 
-
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::dark () const
+
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::dark () const
 
              
 
 
               Returns the dark color of the color group.
 
               
              See also ColorRole.
 
 
              Example: themes/wood.cpp.
-
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::foreground () const
+
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::foreground () const
 
              
 
 
               Returns the foreground color of the color group.
 
               
              See also ColorRole.
 
 
              Examples: themes/metal.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
-
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::highlight () const
+
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::highlight () const
 
              
 
 
               Returns the highlight color of the color group.
 
               
              See also ColorRole.
 
-
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::highlightedText () const
+
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::highlightedText () const
 
              
 
 
               Returns the highlighted text color of the color group.
 
               
              See also ColorRole.
 
-
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::light () const
+
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::light () const
 
              
 
 
               Returns the light color of the color group.
 
               
              See also ColorRole.
 
 
              Example: themes/wood.cpp.
-
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::link () const
+
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::link () const
 
              
 
 
               Returns the unvisited link text color of the color group.
 
               
              See also ColorRole.
 
-
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::linkVisited () const
+
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::linkVisited () const
 
              
 
 
               Returns the visited link text color of the color group.
 
               
              See also ColorRole.
 
-
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::mid () const
+
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::mid () const
 
              
 
 
               Returns the mid color of the color group.
 
               
              See also ColorRole.
 
 
              Examples: themes/metal.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
-
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::midlight () const
+
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::midlight () const
 
              
 
 
               Returns the midlight color of the color group.
@@ -301,25 +301,25 @@ Copies the colors of other to this color group.
 Returns TRUE if this color group is equal to g; otherwise
 returns FALSE.
 
               
              See also 
-
              void TQColorGroup::setBrush ( ColorRole r, const TQBrush & b )
+
              void TQColorGroup::setBrush ( ColorRole r, const TQBrush & b )
 
              
 Sets the brush used for color role r to b.
 
               
              See also brush(), setColor(), and ColorRole.
 
 
              Example: themes/wood.cpp.
-
              void TQColorGroup::setColor ( ColorRole r, const TQColor & c )
+
              void TQColorGroup::setColor ( ColorRole r, const TQColor & c )
 
              
 Sets the brush used for color role r to a solid color c.
 
               
              See also brush() and ColorRole.
 
 
              Examples: listviews/listviews.cpp, table/statistics/statistics.cpp, and themes/metal.cpp.
-
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::shadow () const
+
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::shadow () const
 
              
 
 
               Returns the shadow color of the color group.
 
               
              See also ColorRole.
 
-
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::text () const
+
              const TQColor & TQColorGroup::text () const
 
              
 
 
               Returns the text foreground color of the color group.
@@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ Sets the brush used for color role r to a solid color c.
 
 
              Example: listviews/listviews.cpp.
 
              Related Functions
              
-
              TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQColorGroup & g )
+
              TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQColorGroup & g )
 
              
 
 
               Writes color group, g to the stream s.
diff --git a/doc/html/qcombobox-h.html b/doc/html/qcombobox-h.html
index 73f25bea5..4e14c3eb0 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcombobox-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcombobox-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qcombobox.h Include File
+ntqcombobox.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
              
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
              TQComboBox Class Reference
              
-
-
              The TQComboBox widget is a combined button and popup list.
-More...
-
              #include <qcombobox.h>
-
              Inherits TQWidget.
-
              List of all member functions.
-
              Public Members
              
-
-
              Public Slots
              
-
-
              Signals
              
-
-
              Properties
              
-
                
-
              • bool autoCompletion - whether auto-completion is enabled
                • 
-
              • bool autoMask - whether the combobox is automatically masked  (read only)
                • 
-
              • bool autoResize - whether auto resize is enabled  (obsolete)
                • 
-
              • int count - the number of items in the combobox  (read only)
                • 
-
              • int currentItem - the index of the current item in the combobox
                • 
-
              • TQString currentText - the text of the combobox's current item
                • 
-
              • bool duplicatesEnabled - whether duplicates are allowed
                • 
-
              • bool editable - whether the combobox is editable
                • 
-
              • Policy insertionPolicy - the position of the items inserted by the user
                • 
-
              • int maxCount - the maximum number of items allowed in the combobox
                • 
-
              • int sizeLimit - the maximum on-screen size of the combobox
                • 
-
              
-
              Detailed Description
              
-
-
-The TQComboBox widget is a combined button and popup list.
-
               
-
-
               A combobox is a selection widget which displays the current item
-and can pop up a list of items. A combobox may be editable in
-which case the user can enter arbitrary strings.
-
               Comboboxes provide a means of showing the user's current choice
-out of a list of options in a way that takes up the minimum amount
-of screen space.
-
               TQComboBox supports three different display styles: Aqua/Motif 1.x,
-Motif 2.0 and Windows. In Motif 1.x, a combobox was called
-XmOptionMenu. In Motif 2.0, OSF introduced an improved combobox
-and named that XmComboBox. TQComboBox provides both.
-
               TQComboBox provides two different constructors. The simplest
-constructor creates an "old-style" combobox in Motif (or Aqua)
-style:
-
              -        TQComboBox *c = new TQComboBox( this, "read-only combobox" );
-    
              
- 
-
               The other constructor creates a new-style combobox in Motif style,
-and can create both read-only and editable comboboxes:
-
              -        TQComboBox *c1 = new TQComboBox( FALSE, this, "read-only combobox" );
-        TQComboBox *c2 = new TQComboBox( TRUE, this, "editable combobox" );
-    
              
- 
-
               New-style comboboxes use a list box in both Motif and Windows
-styles, and both the content size and the on-screen size of the
-list box can be limited with sizeLimit() and setMaxCount()
-respectively. Old-style comboboxes use a popup in Aqua and Motif
-style, and that popup will happily grow larger than the desktop if
-you put enough data into it.
-
               The two constructors create identical-looking comboboxes in
-Windows style.
-
               Comboboxes can contain pixmaps as well as strings; the
-insertItem() and changeItem() functions are suitably overloaded.
-For editable comboboxes, the function clearEdit() is provided,
-to clear the displayed string without changing the combobox's
-contents.
-
               A combobox emits two signals, activated() and highlighted(), when
-a new item has been activated (selected) or highlighted (made
-current). Both signals exist in two versions, one with a TQString argument and one with an int argument. If the user
-highlights or activates a pixmap, only the int signals are
-emitted. Whenever the text of an editable combobox is changed the
-textChanged() signal is emitted.
-
               When the user enters a new string in an editable combobox, the
-widget may or may not insert it, and it can insert it in several
-locations. The default policy is is AtBottom but you can change
-this using setInsertionPolicy().
-
               It is possible to constrain the input to an editable combobox
-using TQValidator; see setValidator(). By default, any input is
-accepted.
-
               If the combobox is not editable then it has a default
-focusPolicy() of TabFocus, i.e. it will not grab focus if
-clicked. This differs from both Windows and Motif. If the combobox
-is editable then it has a default focusPolicy() of StrongFocus,
-i.e. it will grab focus if clicked.
-
               A combobox can be populated using the insert functions,
-insertStringList() and insertItem() for example. Items can be
-changed with changeItem(). An item can be removed with
-removeItem() and all items can be removed with clear(). The text
-of the current item is returned by currentText(), and the text of
-a numbered item is returned with text(). The current item can be
-set with setCurrentItem() or setCurrentText(). The number of items
-in the combobox is returned by count(); the maximum number of
-items can be set with setMaxCount(). You can allow editing using
-setEditable(). For editable comboboxes you can set auto-completion
-using setAutoCompletion() and whether or not the user can add
-duplicates is set with setDuplicatesEnabled().
-
               (Motif 1, read-only)
              
-(Motif 2, editable)
              
-(Motif 2, read-only)
              
-(Windows style)
-
               Depending on the style, TQComboBox will use a TQListBox or a
-TQPopupMenu to display the list of items. See setListBox() for
-more information.
-
               
              See also TQLineEdit, TQListBox, TQSpinBox, TQRadioButton, TQButtonGroup, GUI Design Handbook: Combo Box, GUI Design Handbook: Drop-Down List Box, and Basic Widgets.
-
-
              Member Type Documentation
              
-
              TQComboBox::Policy
              
-
-
               This enum specifies what the TQComboBox should do when a new string
-is entered by the user.
-
                
-
              • TQComboBox::NoInsertion - the string will not be inserted into the
-combobox.
-
              • TQComboBox::AtTop - insert the string as the first item in the combobox.
-
              • TQComboBox::AtCurrent - replace the previously selected item with the
-string the user has entered.
-
              • TQComboBox::AtBottom - insert the string as the last item in the
-combobox.
-
              • TQComboBox::AfterCurrent - insert the string after the previously
-selected item.
-
              • TQComboBox::BeforeCurrent - insert the string before the previously
-selected item.
-
               activated() is always emitted when the string is entered.
-
               If inserting the new string would cause the combobox to breach its
-content size limit, the item at the other end of the list is
-deleted. The definition of "other end" is
-implementation-dependent.
-
-
              Member Function Documentation
              
-
              TQComboBox::TQComboBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
              
-Constructs a combobox widget with parent parent called name.
-
               This constructor creates a popup list if the program uses Motif
-(or Aqua) look and feel; this is compatible with Motif 1.x and
-Aqua.
-
               Note: If you use this constructor to create your TQComboBox, then
-the pixmap() function will always return 0. To workaround this,
-use the other constructor.
-
               
-
              TQComboBox::TQComboBox ( bool rw, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
              
-Constructs a combobox with a maximum size and either Motif 2.0 or
-Windows look and feel.
-
               The input field can be edited if rw is TRUE, otherwise the user
-may only choose one of the items in the combobox.
-
               The parent and name arguments are passed on to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
-
              TQComboBox::~TQComboBox ()
-
              
-Destroys the combobox.
-
-
              void TQComboBox::activated ( int index ) [signal]
-
              
-
-
               This signal is emitted when a new item has been activated
-(selected). The index is the position of the item in the
-combobox.
-
               This signal is not emitted if the item is changed
-programmatically, e.g. using setCurrentItem().
-
-
              Examples: fileiconview/mainwindow.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, lineedits/lineedits.cpp, listboxcombo/listboxcombo.cpp, and qmag/qmag.cpp.
-
              void TQComboBox::activated ( const TQString & string ) [signal]
-
              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
               This signal is emitted when a new item has been activated
-(selected). string is the selected string.
-
               You can also use the activated(int) signal, but be aware that its
-argument is meaningful only for selected strings, not for user
-entered strings.
-
-
              bool TQComboBox::autoCompletion () const
-
              Returns TRUE if auto-completion is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "autoCompletion" property for details.
-
              bool TQComboBox::autoResize () const
-
              Returns TRUE if auto resize is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "autoResize" property for details.
-
              void TQComboBox::changeItem ( const TQString & t, int index )
-
              
-Replaces the item at position index with the text t.
-
-
              void TQComboBox::changeItem ( const TQPixmap & im, int index )
-
              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
               Replaces the item at position index with the pixmap im,
-unless the combobox is editable.
-
               
              See also insertItem().
-
-
              void TQComboBox::changeItem ( const TQPixmap & im, const TQString & t, int index )
-
              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
               Replaces the item at position index with the pixmap im and
-the text t.
-
               
              See also insertItem().
-
-
              void TQComboBox::clear () [slot]
-
              
-Removes all combobox items.
-
-
              void TQComboBox::clearEdit () [slot]
-
              
-Clears the line edit without changing the combobox's contents.
-Does nothing if the combobox isn't editable.
-
               This is particularly useful when using a combobox as a line edit
-with history. For example you can connect the combobox's
-activated() signal to clearEdit() in order to present the user
-with a new, empty line as soon as Enter is pressed.
-
               
              See also setEditText().
-
-
              void TQComboBox::clearValidator () [slot]
-
              
-This slot is equivalent to setValidator( 0 ).
-
-
              int TQComboBox::count () const
-
              Returns the number of items in the combobox.
-See the "count" property for details.
-
              int TQComboBox::currentItem () const
-
              Returns the index of the current item in the combobox.
-See the "currentItem" property for details.
-
              TQString TQComboBox::currentText () const
-
              Returns the text of the combobox's current item.
-See the "currentText" property for details.
-
              bool TQComboBox::duplicatesEnabled () const
-
              Returns TRUE if duplicates are allowed; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "duplicatesEnabled" property for details.
-
              bool TQComboBox::editable () const
-
              Returns TRUE if the combobox is editable; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "editable" property for details.
-
              void TQComboBox::highlighted ( int index ) [signal]
-
              
-
-
               This signal is emitted when a new item has been set to be the
-current item. The index is the position of the item in the
-combobox.
-
               This signal is not emitted if the item is changed
-programmatically, e.g. using setCurrentItem().
-
-
              void TQComboBox::highlighted ( const TQString & string ) [signal]
-
              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
               This signal is emitted when a new item has been set to be the
-current item. string is the item's text.
-
               You can also use the highlighted(int) signal.
-
-
              void TQComboBox::insertItem ( const TQString & t, int index = -1 )
-
              
-Inserts a text item with text t, at position index. The item
-will be appended if index is negative.
-
-
              Examples: chart/optionsform.cpp, fileiconview/mainwindow.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, lineedits/lineedits.cpp, listboxcombo/listboxcombo.cpp, regexptester/regexptester.cpp, and tictac/tictac.cpp.
-
              void TQComboBox::insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int index = -1 )
-
              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
               Inserts a pixmap item at position index. The item will be
-appended if index is negative.
-
-
              void TQComboBox::insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQString & text, int index = -1 )
-
              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
               Inserts a pixmap item with additional text text at position
-index. The item will be appended if index is negative.
-
-
              void TQComboBox::insertStrList ( const char ** strings, int numStrings = -1, int index = -1 )
-
              
-Inserts the array of char * strings at position index in the
-combobox.
-
               The numStrings argument is the number of strings. If numStrings is -1 (default), the strings array must be
-terminated with 0.
-
               Example:
-
              -        static const char* items[] = { "red", "green", "blue", 0 };
-        combo->insertStrList( items );
-    
              
- 
-
               
              See also insertStringList().
-
-
              Example: qmag/qmag.cpp.
-
              void TQComboBox::insertStrList ( const TQStrList & list, int index = -1 )
-
              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
               Inserts the list of strings at position index in the
-combobox.
-
               This is only for compatibility since it does not support Unicode
-strings. See insertStringList().
-
-
              void TQComboBox::insertStrList ( const TQStrList * list, int index = -1 )
-
              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
               Inserts the list of strings at position index in the
-combobox.
-
               This is only for compatibility since it does not support Unicode
-strings. See insertStringList().
-
-
              void TQComboBox::insertStringList ( const TQStringList & list, int index = -1 )
-
              
-Inserts the list of strings at position index in the
-combobox.
-
-
              Policy TQComboBox::insertionPolicy () const
-
              Returns the position of the items inserted by the user.
-See the "insertionPolicy" property for details.
-
              TQLineEdit * TQComboBox::lineEdit () const
-
              
-Returns the line edit, or 0 if there is no line edit.
-
               Only editable listboxes have a line editor.
-
-
              TQListBox * TQComboBox::listBox () const
-
              
-Returns the current list box, or 0 if there is no list box.
-(TQComboBox can use TQPopupMenu instead of TQListBox.) Provided to
-match setListBox().
-
               
              See also setListBox().
-
-
              Example: listboxcombo/listboxcombo.cpp.
-
              int TQComboBox::maxCount () const
-
              Returns the maximum number of items allowed in the combobox.
-See the "maxCount" property for details.
-
              const TQPixmap * TQComboBox::pixmap ( int index ) const
-
              
-Returns the pixmap item at position index, or 0 if the item is
-not a pixmap.
-
-
              void TQComboBox::popup () [virtual]
-
              
-Pops up the combobox popup list.
-
               If the list is empty, no items appear.
-
-
              void TQComboBox::removeItem ( int index )
-
              
-Removes the item at position index.
-
-
              void TQComboBox::setAutoCompletion ( bool ) [virtual]
-
              Sets whether auto-completion is enabled.
-See the "autoCompletion" property for details.
-
              void TQComboBox::setAutoResize ( bool ) [virtual]
-
              Sets whether auto resize is enabled.
-See the "autoResize" property for details.
-
              void TQComboBox::setCurrentItem ( int index ) [virtual]
-
              Sets the index of the current item in the combobox to index.
-See the "currentItem" property for details.
-
              void TQComboBox::setCurrentText ( const TQString & ) [virtual]
-
              Sets the text of the combobox's current item.
-See the "currentText" property for details.
-
              void TQComboBox::setDuplicatesEnabled ( bool enable )
-
              Sets whether duplicates are allowed to enable.
-See the "duplicatesEnabled" property for details.
-
              void TQComboBox::setEditText ( const TQString & newText ) [virtual slot]
-
              
-Sets the text in the line edit to newText without changing the
-combobox's contents. Does nothing if the combobox isn't editable.
-
               This is useful e.g. for providing a good starting point for the
-user's editing and entering the change in the combobox only when
-the user presses Enter.
-
               
              See also clearEdit() and insertItem().
-
-
              void TQComboBox::setEditable ( bool )
-
              Sets whether the combobox is editable.
-See the "editable" property for details.
-
              void TQComboBox::setFont ( const TQFont & font ) [virtual]
-
              
-Sets the font for both the combobox button and the combobox popup
-list to font.
-
-
              Reimplemented from TQWidget.
-
              void TQComboBox::setInsertionPolicy ( Policy policy ) [virtual]
-
              Sets the position of the items inserted by the user to policy.
-See the "insertionPolicy" property for details.
-
              void TQComboBox::setLineEdit ( TQLineEdit * edit ) [virtual]
-
              
-Sets the line edit to use edit instead of the current line edit.
-
-
              void TQComboBox::setListBox ( TQListBox * newListBox ) [virtual]
-
              
-Sets the combobox to use newListBox instead of the current list
-box or popup. As a side effect, it clears the combobox of its
-current contents.
-
               Warning: TQComboBox assumes that newListBox->text(n) returns
-non-null for 0 <= n < newListbox->count(). This assumption is
-necessary because of the line edit in TQComboBox.
-
-
              void TQComboBox::setMaxCount ( int ) [virtual]
-
              Sets the maximum number of items allowed in the combobox.
-See the "maxCount" property for details.
-
              void TQComboBox::setPalette ( const TQPalette & palette ) [virtual]
-
              
-Sets the palette for both the combobox button and the combobox
-popup list to palette.
-
-
              Reimplemented from TQWidget.
-
              void TQComboBox::setSizeLimit ( int ) [virtual]
-
              Sets the maximum on-screen size of the combobox.
-See the "sizeLimit" property for details.
-
              void TQComboBox::setValidator ( const TQValidator * v ) [virtual]
-
              
-Applies the validator v to the combobox so that only text which
-is valid according to v is accepted.
-
               This function does nothing if the combobox is not editable.
-
               
              See also validator(), clearValidator(), and TQValidator.
-
-
              int TQComboBox::sizeLimit () const
-
              Returns the maximum on-screen size of the combobox.
-See the "sizeLimit" property for details.
-
              TQString TQComboBox::text ( int index ) const
-
              
-Returns the text item at position index, or TQString::null if
-the item is not a string.
-
               
              See also currentText.
-
-
              Examples: fileiconview/mainwindow.cpp and helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp.
-
              void TQComboBox::textChanged ( const TQString & string ) [signal]
-
              
-
-
               This signal is used for editable comboboxes. It is emitted
-whenever the contents of the text entry field changes. string
-contains the new text.
-
-
              const TQValidator * TQComboBox::validator () const
-
              
-Returns the validator which constrains editing for this combobox
-if there is one; otherwise returns 0.
-
               
              See also setValidator(), clearValidator(), and TQValidator.
-
-
              Property Documentation
              
-
              bool autoCompletion
              
-
              This property holds whether auto-completion is enabled.
-
              This property can only be set for editable comboboxes, for
-non-editable comboboxes it has no effect. It is FALSE by default.
-
-
              Set this property's value with setAutoCompletion() and get this property's value with autoCompletion().
-
              bool autoMask
              
-
              This property holds whether the combobox is automatically masked.
-
              See also TQWidget::autoMask.
-
-
              bool autoResize
               
              This property holds whether auto resize is enabled.
-
              This property is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
               If this property is set to TRUE then the combobox will resize itself
-whenever its contents change. The default is FALSE.
-
-
              Set this property's value with setAutoResize() and get this property's value with autoResize().
-
              int count
              
-
              This property holds the number of items in the combobox.
-
              
-
              Get this property's value with count().
-
              int currentItem
              
-
              This property holds the index of the current item in the combobox.
-
              Note that the activated() and highlighted() signals are only
-emitted when the user changes the current item, not when it is
-changed programmatically.
-
-
              Set this property's value with setCurrentItem() and get this property's value with currentItem().
-
              TQString currentText
              
-
              This property holds the text of the combobox's current item.
-
              
-
              Set this property's value with setCurrentText() and get this property's value with currentText().
-
              bool duplicatesEnabled
              
-
              This property holds whether duplicates are allowed.
-
              If the combobox is editable and the user enters some text in the
-combobox's lineedit and presses Enter (and the insertionPolicy()
-is not NoInsertion), then what happens is this:
-
                
-
              •  If the text is not already in the list, the text is inserted.
-
              •  If the text is in the list and this property is TRUE (the
-default), the text is inserted.
-
              •  If the text is in the list and this property is FALSE, the text
-is not inserted; instead the item which has matching text becomes
-the current item.
-
              
-
               This property only affects user-interaction. You can use
-insertItem() to insert duplicates if you wish regardless of this
-setting.
-
-
              Set this property's value with setDuplicatesEnabled() and get this property's value with duplicatesEnabled().
-
              bool editable
              
-
              This property holds whether the combobox is editable.
-
              This property's default is FALSE. Note that the combobox will be
-cleared if this property is set to TRUE for a 1.x Motif style
-combobox. To avoid this, use setEditable() before inserting any
-items. Also note that the 1.x version of Motif didn't have any
-editable comboboxes, so the combobox will change it's appearance
-to a 2.0 style Motif combobox is it is set to be editable.
-
-
              Set this property's value with setEditable() and get this property's value with editable().
-
              Policy insertionPolicy
              
-
              This property holds the position of the items inserted by the user.
-
              The default insertion policy is AtBottom. See Policy.
-
-
              Set this property's value with setInsertionPolicy() and get this property's value with insertionPolicy().
-
              int maxCount
              
-
              This property holds the maximum number of items allowed in the combobox.
-
              
-
              Set this property's value with setMaxCount() and get this property's value with maxCount().
-
              int sizeLimit
              
-
              This property holds the maximum on-screen size of the combobox.
-
              This property is ignored for both Motif 1.x style and non-editable
-comboboxes in Mac style. The default limit is ten
-lines. If the number of items in the combobox is or grows larger
-than lines, a scrollbar is added.
-
-
              Set this property's value with setSizeLimit() and get this property's value with sizeLimit().
-
-
              
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
              
-
-
              Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
              TQt 3.3.8
              
-
              
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qcombotableitem-members.html b/doc/html/qcombotableitem-members.html
index 85a14c52b..d56591411 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcombotableitem-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcombotableitem-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qcombotableitem.html b/doc/html/qcombotableitem.html
index f88fd505b..5b844d99d 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcombotableitem.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcombotableitem.html
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
              The TQComboTableItem class provides a means of using
 comboboxes in TQTables.
 More...
-
              #include <qtable.h>
+
              #include <ntqtable.h>
 
              Inherits TQTableItem.
 
              List of all member functions.
 
              Public Members
              
@@ -63,14 +63,14 @@ comboboxes in TQTables.
 
               A TQComboTableItem is a table item which looks and behaves like a
 combobox. The advantage of using TQComboTableItems rather than real
 comboboxes is that a TQComboTableItem uses far less resources than
-real comboboxes in TQTables. When the cell has the focus it
+real comboboxes in TQTables. When the cell has the focus it
 displays a real combobox which the user can interact with. When
 the cell does not have the focus the cell looks like a
 combobox. Only text items (i.e. no pixmaps) may be used in
 TQComboTableItems.
 
               TQComboTableItem items have the edit type WhenCurrent (see
 EditType). The TQComboTableItem's list of items is provided by
-a TQStringList passed to the constructor.
+a TQStringList passed to the constructor.
 
               The list of items may be changed using setStringList(). The
 current item can be set with setCurrentItem() and retrieved with
 currentItem(). The text of the current item can be obtained with
@@ -81,16 +81,16 @@ to either choose an existing list item, or create a new list item
 by entering their own text; otherwise the user may only choose one
 of the existing list items.
 
               To populate a table cell with a TQComboTableItem use
-TQTable::setItem().
-
               TQComboTableItems may be deleted with TQTable::clearCell().
+TQTable::setItem().
+
               TQComboTableItems may be deleted with TQTable::clearCell().
 
               TQComboTableItems can be distinguished from TQTableItems and
 TQCheckTableItems using their Run Time Type Identification
 number (see rtti()).
 
               
              Table Items
               
-
               
              See also TQCheckTableItem, TQTableItem, TQComboBox, and Advanced Widgets.
+
               
              See also TQCheckTableItem, TQTableItem, TQComboBox, and Advanced Widgets.
 
 
              Member Function Documentation
              
-
              TQComboTableItem::TQComboTableItem ( TQTable * table, const TQStringList & list, bool editable = FALSE )
+
              TQComboTableItem::TQComboTableItem ( TQTable * table, const TQStringList & list, bool editable = FALSE )
 
              
 Creates a combo table item for the table table. The combobox's
 list of items is passed in the list argument. If editable is
@@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ TRUE the user may type in new list items; if editable is FALSE
 the user may only select from the list of items provided.
 
               By default TQComboTableItems cannot be replaced by other table
 items since isReplaceable() returns FALSE by default.
-
               
              See also TQTable::clearCell() and EditType.
+
               
              See also TQTable::clearCell() and EditType.
 
 
              TQComboTableItem::~TQComboTableItem ()
 
              
@@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Returns the total number of list items in the combo table item.
 Returns the index of the combo table item's current list item.
 
               
              See also setCurrentItem().
 
-
              TQString TQComboTableItem::currentText () const
+
              TQString TQComboTableItem::currentText () const
 
              
 Returns the text of the combo table item's current list item.
 
               
              See also currentItem() and text().
@@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ item.
 
               
              See also currentItem().
 
 
              Example: table/small-table-demo/main.cpp.
-
              void TQComboTableItem::setCurrentItem ( const TQString & s ) [virtual]
+
              void TQComboTableItem::setCurrentItem ( const TQString & s ) [virtual]
 
              
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 
               Sets the list item whose text is s to be the combo table item's
@@ -156,12 +156,12 @@ may enter a new text item themselves. If b is FALSE the user may
 may only choose one of the existing items.
 
               
              See also isEditable().
 
-
              void TQComboTableItem::setStringList ( const TQStringList & l ) [virtual]
+
              void TQComboTableItem::setStringList ( const TQStringList & l ) [virtual]
 
              
 Sets the list items of this TQComboTableItem to the strings in the
 string list l.
 
-
              TQString TQComboTableItem::text ( int i ) const
+
              TQString TQComboTableItem::text ( int i ) const
 
              
 Returns the text of the combo's list item at index i.
 
               
              See also currentText().
diff --git a/doc/html/qcommonstyle-h.html b/doc/html/qcommonstyle-h.html
index 1b1a0a6e7..754c54a7b 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcommonstyle-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcommonstyle-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qcommonstyle.h Include File
+ntqcommonstyle.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
              
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
              TQCommonStyle Class Reference
              
-
-
              The TQCommonStyle class encapsulates the common Look and Feel of a GUI.
-More...
-
              #include <qcommonstyle.h>
-
              Inherits TQStyle.
-
              Inherited by TQMotifStyle and TQWindowsStyle.
-
              List of all member functions.
-
              Public Members
              
-
-
              Detailed Description
              
-
-
-The TQCommonStyle class encapsulates the common Look and Feel of a GUI.
-
               
-
               This abstract class implements some of the widget's look and feel
-that is common to all GUI styles provided and shipped as part of
-TQt.
-
               All the functions are documented in TQStyle.
-
              See also Widget Appearance and Style.
-
-
              Member Function Documentation
              
-
              TQCommonStyle::TQCommonStyle ()
-
              
-Constructs a TQCommonStyle.
-
-
-
              
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
              
-
-
              Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
              TQt 3.3.8
              
-
              
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qconststring-members.html b/doc/html/qconststring-members.html
index be13b9203..ad1c676ea 100644
--- a/doc/html/qconststring-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qconststring-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qconststring.html b/doc/html/qconststring.html
index bfea4ef49..659c77e76 100644
--- a/doc/html/qconststring.html
+++ b/doc/html/qconststring.html
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
              The TQConstString class provides string objects using constant Unicode data.
 More...
 
              All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
              
-
              #include <qstring.h>
+
              #include <ntqstring.h>
 
              List of all member functions.
 
              Public Members
              
 
                
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 The TQConstString class provides string objects using constant Unicode data.
 
                 In order to minimize copying, highly optimized applications can
-use TQConstString to provide a TQString-compatible object from
+use TQConstString to provide a TQString-compatible object from
 existing Unicode data. It is then the programmer's responsibility
 to ensure that the Unicode data exists for the entire lifetime of
 the TQConstString object.
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ guarantee that unicode will not be deleted or modified.
 Destroys the TQConstString, creating a copy of the data if other
 strings are still using it.
 
-
                const TQString & TQConstString::string () const
+
                const TQString & TQConstString::string () const
 
                
 
 
                 Returns a constant string referencing the data passed during
diff --git a/doc/html/qcontextmenuevent-members.html b/doc/html/qcontextmenuevent-members.html
index 20204299b..7b168bc4b 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcontextmenuevent-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcontextmenuevent-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -46,9 +46,9 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
              • isConsumed()
 
              • pos()
 
              • reason()
-
              • spontaneous()
+
              • spontaneous()
 
              • state()
-
              • type()
+
              • type()
 
              • x()
 
              • y()
 
              
diff --git a/doc/html/qcontextmenuevent.html b/doc/html/qcontextmenuevent.html
index 509cdc37f..9bf3fd177 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcontextmenuevent.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcontextmenuevent.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
              The TQContextMenuEvent class contains parameters that describe a context menu event.
 More...
-
              #include <qevent.h>
-
              Inherits TQEvent.
+
              #include <ntqevent.h>
+
              Inherits TQEvent.
 
              List of all member functions.
 
              Public Members
              
 
                
@@ -64,13 +64,13 @@ The TQContextMenuEvent class contains parameters that describe a context menu ev
 context menu. What triggers this is platform dependent. For
 example, on Windows, pressing the menu button or releasing the
 right mouse button will cause this event to be sent.
-
                 When this event occurs it is customary to show a TQPopupMenu with a
+
                 When this event occurs it is customary to show a TQPopupMenu with a
 context menu, if this is relevant to the context.
 
                 Context menu events contain a special accept flag that indicates
 whether the receiver accepted the event. If the event handler does
 not accept the event, then whatever triggered the event will be
 handled as a regular input event if possible.
-
                 
                See also TQPopupMenu and Event Classes.
+
                 
                See also TQPopupMenu and Event Classes.
 
 
                Member Type Documentation
                
 
                TQContextMenuEvent::Reason
                
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Windows this means the menu button was pressed.
 the mouse or keyboard).
 
              
 
              Member Function Documentation
              
-
              TQContextMenuEvent::TQContextMenuEvent ( Reason reason, const TQPoint & pos, const TQPoint & globalPos, int state )
+
              TQContextMenuEvent::TQContextMenuEvent ( Reason reason, const TQPoint & pos, const TQPoint & globalPos, int state )
 
              
 
 
               Constructs a context menu event object with the accept parameter
@@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ flag set to FALSE.
 receiving widget. globalPos is the mouse position in absolute
 coordinates. state is the ButtonState at the time of the event.
 
-
              TQContextMenuEvent::TQContextMenuEvent ( Reason reason, const TQPoint & pos, int state )
+
              TQContextMenuEvent::TQContextMenuEvent ( Reason reason, const TQPoint & pos, int state )
 
              
 
 
               Constructs a context menu event object with the accept parameter
@@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ flag set to FALSE.
 
               The pos parameter specifies the mouse position relative to the
 receiving widget. state is the ButtonState at the time of the
 event.
-
               The globalPos() is initialized to TQCursor::pos(), which may not be
+
               The globalPos() is initialized to TQCursor::pos(), which may not be
 appropriate. Use the other constructor to specify the global
 position explicitly.
 
@@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ parent classes.)
 
               The consumed flag is not set by default.
 
               
              See also ignore() and accept().
 
-
              const TQPoint & TQContextMenuEvent::globalPos () const
+
              const TQPoint & TQContextMenuEvent::globalPos () const
 
              
 
 
               Returns the global position of the mouse pointer at the time of
@@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ returns FALSE.
 receiver has blocked the event; otherwise returns FALSE.
 
               
              See also accept(), ignore(), and consume().
 
-
              const TQPoint & TQContextMenuEvent::pos () const
+
              const TQPoint & TQContextMenuEvent::pos () const
 
              
 
 
               Returns the position of the mouse pointer relative to the widget
@@ -187,14 +187,14 @@ that received the event.
 
 
               Returns the reason for this context event.
 
-
              ButtonState TQContextMenuEvent::state () const
+
              ButtonState TQContextMenuEvent::state () const
 
              
 
 
               Returns the button state (a combination of mouse buttons and
 keyboard modifiers), i.e. what buttons and keys were being
 pressed immediately before the event was generated.
-
               The returned value is LeftButton, RightButton, MidButton,
-ShiftButton, ControlButton and AltButton OR'ed together.
+
               The returned value is LeftButton, RightButton, MidButton,
+ShiftButton, ControlButton and AltButton OR'ed together.
 
 
              int TQContextMenuEvent::x () const
 
              
diff --git a/doc/html/qcopchannel-members.html b/doc/html/qcopchannel-members.html
index a5cea093c..856e94f1f 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcopchannel-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcopchannel-members.html
@@ -37,53 +37,53 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
 
              
diff --git a/doc/html/qcopchannel.html b/doc/html/qcopchannel.html
index 4de884fb5..23461cef3 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcopchannel.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcopchannel.html
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 between several clients.
 More...
 
              #include <qcopchannel_qws.h>
-
              Inherits TQObject.
+
              Inherits TQObject.
 
              List of all member functions.
 
              Public Members
              
 
                
@@ -70,14 +70,14 @@ functions usable without an object.
 
                 The channel() function returns the name of the channel.
 
                 In order to listen to the traffic on a channel, you should
 either subclass TQCopChannel and reimplement receive(), or
-connect() to the received() signal.
+connect() to the received() signal.
 
 
                Member Function Documentation
                
-
                TQCopChannel::TQCopChannel ( const TQCString & channel, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
                TQCopChannel::TQCopChannel ( const TQCString & channel, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
 
                
 Constructs a TQCop channel and registers it with the server using
 the name channel. The standard parent and name arguments
-are passed on to the TQObject constructor.
+are passed on to the TQObject constructor.
 
 
                TQCopChannel::~TQCopChannel () [virtual]
 
                
@@ -85,16 +85,16 @@ Destroys the client's end of the channel and notifies the server
 that the client has closed its connection. The server will keep
 the channel open until the last registered client detaches.
 
-
                TQCString TQCopChannel::channel () const
+
                TQCString TQCopChannel::channel () const
 
                
 Returns the name of the channel.
 
-
                bool TQCopChannel::isRegistered ( const TQCString & channel ) [static]
+
                bool TQCopChannel::isRegistered ( const TQCString & channel ) [static]
 
                
 Queries the server for the existence of channel.
 
                 Returns TRUE if channel is registered; otherwise returns FALSE.
 
-
                void TQCopChannel::receive ( const TQCString & msg, const TQByteArray & data ) [virtual]
+
                void TQCopChannel::receive ( const TQCString & msg, const TQByteArray & data ) [virtual]
 
                
 This virtual function allows subclasses of TQCopChannel to process
 data received from their channel.
@@ -103,15 +103,15 @@ data received from their channel.
 extract the information it contains.
 
                 Example:
 
                -    void MyClass::receive( const TQCString &msg, const TQByteArray &data )
+    void MyClass::receive( const TQCString &msg, const TQByteArray &data )
     {
-        TQDataStream stream( data, IO_ReadOnly );
+        TQDataStream stream( data, IO_ReadOnly );
         if ( msg == "execute(TQString,TQString)" ) {
-            TQString cmd, arg;
+            TQString cmd, arg;
             stream >> cmd >> arg;
             ...
         } else if ( msg == "delete(TQString)" ) {
-            TQString filenname;
+            TQString filenname;
             stream >> filename;
             ...
         } else ...
@@ -126,23 +126,23 @@ requirement. Whatever convention you use the sender and receiver
 must agree on the argument types.
 
                 
                See also send().
 
-
                void TQCopChannel::received ( const TQCString & msg, const TQByteArray & data ) [signal]
+
                void TQCopChannel::received ( const TQCString & msg, const TQByteArray & data ) [signal]
 
                
 
 
                 This signal is emitted with the msg and data whenever the
 receive() function gets incoming data.
 
-
                bool TQCopChannel::send ( const TQCString & channel, const TQCString & msg, const TQByteArray & data ) [static]
+
                bool TQCopChannel::send ( const TQCString & channel, const TQCString & msg, const TQByteArray & data ) [static]
 
                
 Send the message msg on channel channel with data data.
 The message will be distributed to all clients subscribed to the
 channel.
-
                 Note that TQDataStream provides a convenient way to fill the byte
+
                 Note that TQDataStream provides a convenient way to fill the byte
 array with auxiliary data.
 
                 Example:
 
                     TQByteArray ba;
-    TQDataStream stream( ba, IO_WriteOnly );
+    TQDataStream stream( ba, IO_WriteOnly );
     stream << TQString("cat") << TQString("file.txt");
     TQCopChannel::send( "System/Shell", "execute(TQString,TQString)", ba );
     
                
@@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ requirement. Whatever convention you use the sender and receiver
 must agree on the argument types.
 
                 
                See also receive().
 
-
                bool TQCopChannel::send ( const TQCString & channel, const TQCString & msg ) [static]
+
                bool TQCopChannel::send ( const TQCString & channel, const TQCString & msg ) [static]
 
                
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 
                 Send the message msg on channel channel. The message will be
diff --git a/doc/html/qcopchannel_qws-h.html b/doc/html/qcopchannel_qws-h.html
index e68bd7d9d..8e220f12e 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcopchannel_qws-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcopchannel_qws-h.html
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 #define TQCOPCHANNEL_QWS_H
 
 #ifndef QT_H
-#include "qobject.h"
+#include "ntqobject.h"
 #endif // QT_H
 
 #ifndef QT_NO_COP
diff --git a/doc/html/qcstring-h.html b/doc/html/qcstring-h.html
index 0d0682d33..dce2fc44a 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcstring-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcstring-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qcstring.h Include File
+ntqcstring.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                TQCString Class Reference
                
-
-
                The TQCString class provides an abstraction of the classic C
-zero-terminated char array (char *).
-More...
-
                All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
                
-
                #include <qcstring.h>
-
                Inherits TQByteArray.
-
                List of all member functions.
-
                Public Members
                
-
                  
-
                • TQCString ()
                  • 
-
                • TQCString ( int size )
                  • 
-
                • TQCString ( const TQCString & s )
                  • 
-
                • TQCString ( const char * str )
                  • 
-
                • TQCString ( const char * str, uint maxsize )
                  • 
-
                • TQCString & operator= ( const TQCString & s )
                  • 
-
                • TQCString & operator= ( const char * str )
                  • 
-
                • bool isNull () const
                  • 
-
                • bool isEmpty () const
                  • 
-
                • uint length () const
                  • 
-
                • bool resize ( uint len )
                  • 
-
                • bool truncate ( uint pos )
                  • 
-
                • bool fill ( char c, int len = -1 )
                  • 
-
                • TQCString copy () const
                  • 
-
                • TQCString & sprintf ( const char * format, ... )
                  • 
-
                • int find ( char c, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const
                  • 
-
                • int find ( const char * str, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const
                  • 
-
                • int find ( const TQRegExp & rx, int index = 0 ) const
                  • 
-
                • int findRev ( char c, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const
                  • 
-
                • int findRev ( const char * str, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const
                  • 
-
                • int findRev ( const TQRegExp & rx, int index = -1 ) const
                  • 
-
                • int contains ( char c, bool cs = TRUE ) const
                  • 
-
                • int contains ( const char * str, bool cs = TRUE ) const
                  • 
-
                • int contains ( const TQRegExp & rx ) const
                  • 
-
                • TQCString left ( uint len ) const
                  • 
-
                • TQCString right ( uint len ) const
                  • 
-
                • TQCString mid ( uint index, uint len = 0xffffffff ) const
                  • 
-
                • TQCString leftJustify ( uint width, char fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const
                  • 
-
                • TQCString rightJustify ( uint width, char fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const
                  • 
-
                • TQCString lower () const
                  • 
-
                • TQCString upper () const
                  • 
-
                • TQCString stripWhiteSpace () const
                  • 
-
                • TQCString simplifyWhiteSpace () const
                  • 
-
                • TQCString & insert ( uint index, const char * s )
                  • 
-
                • TQCString & insert ( uint index, char c )
                  • 
-
                • TQCString & append ( const char * str )
                  • 
-
                • TQCString & prepend ( const char * s )
                  • 
-
                • TQCString & remove ( uint index, uint len )
                  • 
-
                • TQCString & replace ( uint index, uint len, const char * str )
                  • 
-
                • TQCString & replace ( const TQRegExp & rx, const char * str )
                  • 
-
                • TQCString & replace ( char c, const char * after )
                  • 
-
                • TQCString & replace ( const char * before, const char * after )
                  • 
-
                • TQCString & replace ( char c1, char c2 )
                  • 
-
                • short toShort ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
                  • 
-
                • ushort toUShort ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
                  • 
-
                • int toInt ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
                  • 
-
                • uint toUInt ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
                  • 
-
                • long toLong ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
                  • 
-
                • ulong toULong ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
                  • 
-
                • float toFloat ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
                  • 
-
                • double toDouble ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
                  • 
-
                • TQCString & setStr ( const char * str )
                  • 
-
                • TQCString & setNum ( short n )
                  • 
-
                • TQCString & setNum ( ushort n )
                  • 
-
                • TQCString & setNum ( int n )
                  • 
-
                • TQCString & setNum ( uint n )
                  • 
-
                • TQCString & setNum ( long n )
                  • 
-
                • TQCString & setNum ( ulong n )
                  • 
-
                • TQCString & setNum ( float n, char f = 'g', int prec = 6 )
                  • 
-
                • TQCString & setNum ( double n, char f = 'g', int prec = 6 )
                  • 
-
                • bool setExpand ( uint index, char c )
                  • 
-
                • operator const char * () const
                  • 
-
                • TQCString & operator+= ( const char * str )
                  • 
-
                • TQCString & operator+= ( char c )
                  • 
-
                
-
                Related Functions
                
-
                  
-
                • void * qmemmove ( void * dst, const void * src, uint len )
                  • 
-
                • char * qstrdup ( const char * src )
                  • 
-
                • char * qstrcpy ( char * dst, const char * src )
                  • 
-
                • char * qstrncpy ( char * dst, const char * src, uint len )
                  • 
-
                • uint qstrlen ( const char * str )
                  • 
-
                • int qstrcmp ( const char * str1, const char * str2 )
                  • 
-
                • int qstrncmp ( const char * str1, const char * str2, uint len )
                  • 
-
                • int qstricmp ( const char * str1, const char * str2 )
                  • 
-
                • int qstrnicmp ( const char * str1, const char * str2, uint len )
                  • 
-
                • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQCString & str )
                  • 
-
                • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQCString & str )
                  • 
-
                • bool operator== ( const TQCString & s1, const TQCString & s2 )
                  • 
-
                • bool operator== ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )
                  • 
-
                • bool operator== ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )
                  • 
-
                • bool operator!= ( const TQCString & s1, const TQCString & s2 )
                  • 
-
                • bool operator!= ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )
                  • 
-
                • bool operator!= ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )
                  • 
-
                • bool operator< ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )
                  • 
-
                • bool operator< ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )
                  • 
-
                • bool operator<= ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )
                  • 
-
                • bool operator<= ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )
                  • 
-
                • bool operator> ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )
                  • 
-
                • bool operator> ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )
                  • 
-
                • bool operator>= ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )
                  • 
-
                • bool operator>= ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )
                  • 
-
                • const TQCString operator+ ( const TQCString & s1, const TQCString & s2 )
                  • 
-
                • const TQCString operator+ ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )
                  • 
-
                • const TQCString operator+ ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )
                  • 
-
                • const TQCString operator+ ( const TQCString & s, char c )
                  • 
-
                • const TQCString operator+ ( char c, const TQCString & s )
                  • 
-
                
-
                Detailed Description
                
-
-
-
-The TQCString class provides an abstraction of the classic C
-zero-terminated char array (char *).
-
                 
-
-
-
-
                 TQCString inherits TQByteArray, which is defined as
-TQMemArray<char>. Since TQCString is a TQMemArray, it uses explicit sharing with a reference count.
-
                 TQCString tries to behave like a more convenient const char *.
-The price of doing this is that some algorithms will perform
-badly. For example, append() is O(length()) since it scans for a
-null terminator. Although you might use TQCString for text that is
-never exposed to the user, for most purposes, and especially for
-user-visible text, you should use TQString. TQString provides
-implicit sharing, Unicode and other internationalization support,
-and is well optimized.
-
                 Note that for the TQCString methods that take a const char *
-parameter the const char * must either be 0 (null) or not-null
-and '\0' (NUL byte) terminated; otherwise the results are
-undefined.
-
                 A TQCString that has not been assigned to anything is null, i.e.
-both the length and the data pointer is 0. A TQCString that
-references the empty string ("", a single '\0' char) is empty.
-Both null and empty TQCStrings are legal parameters to the methods.
-Assigning const char * 0 to TQCString produces a null TQCString.
-
                 The length() function returns the length of the string; resize()
-resizes the string and truncate() truncates the string. A string
-can be filled with a character using fill(). Strings can be left
-or right padded with characters using leftJustify() and
-rightJustify(). Characters, strings and regular expressions can be
-searched for using find() and findRev(), and counted using
-contains().
-
                 Strings and characters can be inserted with insert() and appended
-with append(). A string can be prepended with prepend().
-Characters can be removed from the string with remove() and
-replaced with replace().
-
                 Portions of a string can be extracted using left(), right() and
-mid(). Whitespace can be removed using stripWhiteSpace() and
-simplifyWhiteSpace(). Strings can be converted to uppercase or
-lowercase with upper() and lower() respectively.
-
                 Strings that contain numbers can be converted to numbers with
-toShort(), toInt(), toLong(), toULong(), toFloat() and toDouble().
-Numbers can be converted to strings with setNum().
-
                 Many operators are overloaded to work with TQCStrings. TQCString
-also supports some more obscure functions, e.g. sprintf(),
-setStr() and setExpand().
-
                 
-
                 Note on Character Comparisons
-
-
                 In TQCString the notion of uppercase and lowercase and of which
-character is greater than or less than another character is locale
-dependent. This affects functions which support a case insensitive
-option or which compare or lowercase or uppercase their arguments.
-Case insensitive operations and comparisons will be accurate if
-both strings contain only ASCII characters. (If $LC_CTYPE is
-set, most Unix systems do "the right thing".) Functions that this
-affects include contains(), find(), findRev(), operator<(), operator<=(), operator>(), operator>=(), lower() and
-upper().
-
                 This issue does not apply to TQStrings since they represent
-characters using Unicode.
-
                
-
                
-
                 Performance note: The TQCString methods for TQRegExp searching are
-implemented by converting the TQCString to a TQString and performing
-the search on that. This implies a deep copy of the TQCString data.
-If you are going to perform many TQRegExp searches on a large
-TQCString, you will get better performance by converting the
-TQCString to a TQString yourself, and then searching in the TQString.
-
                See also Collection Classes, Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes, Text Related Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
-
-
                Member Function Documentation
                
-
                TQCString::TQCString ()
-
                
-
-
                 Constructs a null string.
-
                 
                See also isNull().
-
-
                TQCString::TQCString ( int size )
-
                
-Constructs a string with room for size characters, including
-the '\0'-terminator. Makes a null string if size == 0.
-
                 If size > 0, then the first and last characters in the string
-are initialized to '\0'. All other characters are uninitialized.
-
                 
                See also resize() and isNull().
-
-
                TQCString::TQCString ( const TQCString & s )
-
                
-
-
                 Constructs a shallow copy s.
-
                 
                See also assign().
-
-
                TQCString::TQCString ( const char * str )
-
                
-Constructs a string that is a deep copy of str.
-
                 If str is 0 a null string is created.
-
                 
                See also isNull().
-
-
                TQCString::TQCString ( const char * str, uint maxsize )
-
                
-Constructs a string that is a deep copy of str. The copy will
-be at most maxsize bytes long including the '\0'-terminator.
-
                 Example:
-
                -    TQCString str( "helloworld", 6 ); // assigns "hello" to str
-    
                
- 
-
                 If str contains a 0 byte within the first maxsize bytes, the
-resulting TQCString will be terminated by this 0. If str is 0 a
-null string is created.
-
                 
                See also isNull().
-
-
                TQCString & TQCString::append ( const char * str )
-
                
-
-
                 Appends string str to the string and returns a reference to the
-string. Equivalent to operator+=().
-
-
                int TQCString::contains ( char c, bool cs = TRUE ) const
-
                
-Returns the number of times the character c occurs in the
-string.
-
                 The match is case sensitive if cs is TRUE, or case insensitive
-if cs if FALSE.
-
                 
                See also Note on character comparisons.
-
-
                int TQCString::contains ( const char * str, bool cs = TRUE ) const
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Returns the number of times str occurs in the string.
-
                 The match is case sensitive if cs is TRUE, or case insensitive
-if cs if FALSE.
-
                 This function counts overlapping substrings, for example, "banana"
-contains two occurrences of "ana".
-
                 
                See also findRev() and Note on character comparisons.
-
-
                int TQCString::contains ( const TQRegExp & rx ) const
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Counts the number of overlapping occurrences of rx in the string.
-
                 Example:
-
                -    TQString s = "banana and panama";
-    TQRegExp r = TQRegExp( "a[nm]a", TRUE, FALSE );
-    s.contains( r ); // 4 matches
-    
                
- 
-
                 
                See also find() and findRev().
-
-
                 Warning: If you want to apply this function repeatedly to the same
-string it is more efficient to convert the string to a TQString and
-apply the function to that.
-
-
                TQCString TQCString::copy () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns a deep copy of this string.
-
                 
                See also detach().
-
-
                bool TQCString::fill ( char c, int len = -1 )
-
                
-Fills the string with len bytes of character c, followed by
-a '\0'-terminator.
-
                 If len is negative, then the current string length is used.
-
                 Returns FALSE is len is nonnegative and there is not enough
-memory to resize the string; otherwise returns TRUE.
-
-
                int TQCString::find ( char c, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const
-
                
-Finds the first occurrence of the character c, starting at
-position index.
-
                 The search is case sensitive if cs is TRUE, or case insensitive
-if cs is FALSE.
-
                 Returns the position of c, or -1 if c could not be found.
-
                 
                See also Note on character comparisons.
-
-
                Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                int TQCString::find ( const char * str, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Finds the first occurrence of the string str, starting at
-position index.
-
                 The search is case sensitive if cs is TRUE, or case insensitive
-if cs is FALSE.
-
                 Returns the position of str, or -1 if str could not be
-found.
-
                 
                See also Note on character comparisons.
-
-
                int TQCString::find ( const TQRegExp & rx, int index = 0 ) const
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Finds the first occurrence of the regular expression rx,
-starting at position index.
-
                 Returns the position of the next match, or -1 if rx was not
-found.
-
                 Warning: If you want to apply this function repeatedly to the same
-string it is more efficient to convert the string to a TQString and
-apply the function to that.
-
-
                int TQCString::findRev ( char c, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const
-
                
-Finds the first occurrence of the character c, starting at
-position index and searching backwards.
-
                 The search is case sensitive if cs is TRUE, or case insensitive
-if cs is FALSE.
-
                 Returns the position of c, or -1 if c could not be found.
-
                 
                See also Note on character comparisons.
-
-
                int TQCString::findRev ( const char * str, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Finds the first occurrence of the string str, starting at
-position index and searching backwards.
-
                 The search is case sensitive if cs is TRUE, or case insensitive
-if cs is FALSE.
-
                 Returns the position of str, or -1 if str could not be
-found.
-
                 
                See also Note on character comparisons.
-
-
                int TQCString::findRev ( const TQRegExp & rx, int index = -1 ) const
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Finds the first occurrence of the regular expression rx,
-starting at position index and searching backwards.
-
                 Returns the position of the next match (backwards), or -1 if rx
-was not found.
-
                 Warning: If you want to apply this function repeatedly to the same
-string it is more efficient to convert the string to a TQString and
-apply the function to that.
-
-
                TQCString & TQCString::insert ( uint index, char c )
-
                
-Inserts character c into the string at position index and
-returns a reference to the string.
-
                 If index is beyond the end of the string, the string is
-padded with spaces (ASCII 32) to length index and then c
-is appended.
-
                 Example:
-
                -    TQCString s = "Yes";
-    s.insert( 3, '!');   // s == "Yes!"
-    
                
- 
-
                 
                See also remove() and replace().
-
-
                TQCString & TQCString::insert ( uint index, const char * s )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Inserts string s into the string at position index.
-
                 If index is beyond the end of the string, the string is
-padded with spaces (ASCII 32) to length index and then s
-is appended.
-
                 
                -    TQCString s = "I like fish";
-    s.insert( 2, "don't ");     // s == "I don't like fish"
-
-    s = "x";                    // index 01234
-    s.insert( 3, "yz" );        // s == "x  yz"
-    
                
- 
-
-
                bool TQCString::isEmpty () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns TRUE if the string is empty, i.e. if length() == 0;
-otherwise returns FALSE. An empty string is not always a null
-string.
-
                 See example in isNull().
-
                 
                See also isNull(), length(), and size().
-
-
                bool TQCString::isNull () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns TRUE if the string is null, i.e. if data() == 0; otherwise
-returns FALSE. A null string is also an empty string.
-
                 Example:
-
                -    TQCString a;         // a.data() == 0,  a.size() == 0, a.length() == 0
-    TQCString b == "";   // b.data() == "", b.size() == 1, b.length() == 0
-    a.isNull();         // TRUE  because a.data() == 0
-    a.isEmpty();        // TRUE  because a.length() == 0
-    b.isNull();         // FALSE because b.data() == ""
-    b.isEmpty();        // TRUE  because b.length() == 0
-    
                
- 
-
                 
                See also isEmpty(), length(), and size().
-
-
                TQCString TQCString::left ( uint len ) const
-
                
-Returns a substring that contains the len leftmost characters
-of the string.
-
                 The whole string is returned if len exceeds the length of the
-string.
-
                 Example:
-
                -    TQCString s = "Pineapple";
-    TQCString t = s.left( 4 );  // t == "Pine"
-    
                
- 
-
                 
                See also right() and mid().
-
-
                Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                TQCString TQCString::leftJustify ( uint width, char fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const
-
                
-Returns a string of length width (plus one for the terminating
-'\0') that contains this string padded with the fill character.
-
                 If the length of the string exceeds width and truncate is
-FALSE (the default), then the returned string is a copy of the
-string. If the length of the string exceeds width and truncate is TRUE, then the returned string is a left(width).
-
                 Example:
-
                -    TQCString s("apple");
-    TQCString t = s.leftJustify(8, '.');  // t == "apple..."
-    
                
- 
-
                 
                See also rightJustify().
-
-
                uint TQCString::length () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the length of the string, excluding the '\0'-terminator.
-Equivalent to calling strlen(data()).
-
                 Null strings and empty strings have zero length.
-
                 
                See also size(), isNull(), and isEmpty().
-
-
                Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                TQCString TQCString::lower () const
-
                
-Returns a new string that is a copy of this string converted to lower
-case.
-
                 Example:
-
                -    TQCString s("Credit");
-    TQCString t = s.lower();  // t == "credit"
-    
                
- 
-
                 
                See also upper() and Note on character comparisons.
-
-
                TQCString TQCString::mid ( uint index, uint len = 0xffffffff ) const
-
                
-Returns a substring that contains at most len characters from
-this string, starting at position index.
-
                 Returns a null string if the string is empty or if index is out
-of range. Returns the whole string from index if index+len
-exceeds the length of the string.
-
                 Example:
-
                -    TQCString s = "Two pineapples";
-    TQCString t = s.mid( 4, 3 );     // t == "pin"
-    
                
- 
-
                 
                See also left() and right().
-
-
                Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                TQCString::operator const char * () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the string data.
-
-
                TQCString & TQCString::operator+= ( const char * str )
-
                
-Appends string str to the string and returns a reference to the string.
-
-
                TQCString & TQCString::operator+= ( char c )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Appends character c to the string and returns a reference to the string.
-
-
                TQCString & TQCString::operator= ( const TQCString & s )
-
                
-
-
                 Assigns a shallow copy of s to this string and returns a
-reference to this string.
-
-
                TQCString & TQCString::operator= ( const char * str )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Assigns a deep copy of str to this string and returns a
-reference to this string.
-
                 If str is 0 a null string is created.
-
                 
                See also isNull().
-
-
                TQCString & TQCString::prepend ( const char * s )
-
                
-
-
                 Prepend s to the string. Equivalent to insert(0, s).
-
                 
                See also insert().
-
-
                TQCString & TQCString::remove ( uint index, uint len )
-
                
-Removes len characters from the string, starting at position index, and returns a reference to the string.
-
                 If index is out of range, nothing happens. If index is
-valid, but index + len is larger than the length of the
-string, the string is truncated at position index.
-
                 
                -    TQCString s = "Montreal";
-    s.remove( 1, 4 );         // s == "Meal"
-    
                
- 
-
                 
                See also insert() and replace().
-
-
                Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                TQCString & TQCString::replace ( uint index, uint len, const char * str )
-
                
-Replaces len characters from the string, starting at position
-index, with str, and returns a reference to the string.
-
                 If index is out of range, nothing is removed and str is
-appended at the end of the string. If index is valid, but index + len is larger than the length of the string, str
-replaces the rest of the string from position index.
-
                 
                -    TQCString s = "Say yes!";
-    s.replace( 4, 3, "NO" );  // s == "Say NO!"
-    
                
- 
-
                 
                See also insert() and remove().
-
-
                TQCString & TQCString::replace ( const TQRegExp & rx, const char * str )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Replaces every occurrence of rx in the string with str.
-Returns a reference to the string.
-
                 Example:
-
                -    TQString s = "banana";
-    s.replace( TQRegExp("a.*a"), "" );     // becomes "b"
-
-    s = "banana";
-    s.replace( TQRegExp("^[bn]a"), "X" );  // becomes "Xnana"
-
-    s = "banana";
-    s.replace( TQRegExp("^[bn]a"), "" );   // becomes "nana"
-    
                
- 
-
                 Warning: If you want to apply this function repeatedly to the same
-string it is more efficient to convert the string to a TQString and
-apply the function to that.
-
-
                TQCString & TQCString::replace ( char c, const char * after )
-
                 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Replaces every occurrence of the character c in the string
-with after. Returns a reference to the string.
-
                 Example:
-
                -    TQCString s = "a,b,c";
-    s.replace( ',', " or " );
-    // s == "a or b or c"
-    
                
- 
-
-
                TQCString & TQCString::replace ( const char * before, const char * after )
-
                 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Replaces every occurrence of the string before in the string
-with the string after. Returns a reference to the string.
-
                 Example:
-
                -    TQCString s = "Greek is Greek";
-    s.replace( "Greek", "English" );
-    // s == "English is English"
-    
                
- 
-
-
                TQCString & TQCString::replace ( char c1, char c2 )
-
                 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Replaces every occurrence of c1 with the char c2.
-Returns a reference to the string.
-
-
                bool TQCString::resize ( uint len )
-
                
-Extends or shrinks the string to len bytes, including the
-'\0'-terminator.
-
                 A '\0'-terminator is set at position len - 1 unless
-len == 0.
-
                 Example:
-
                -    TQCString s = "resize this string";
-    s.resize( 7 );                      // s == "resize"
-    
                
- 
-
                 
                See also truncate().
-
-
                Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                TQCString TQCString::right ( uint len ) const
-
                
-Returns a substring that contains the len rightmost characters
-of the string.
-
                 The whole string is returned if len exceeds the length of the
-string.
-
                 Example:
-
                -    TQCString s = "Pineapple";
-    TQCString t = s.right( 5 );  // t == "apple"
-    
                
- 
-
                 
                See also left() and mid().
-
-
                Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                TQCString TQCString::rightJustify ( uint width, char fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const
-
                
-Returns a string of length width (plus one for the terminating
-'\0') that contains zero or more of the fill character followed
-by this string.
-
                 If the length of the string exceeds width and truncate is
-FALSE (the default), then the returned string is a copy of the
-string. If the length of the string exceeds width and truncate is TRUE, then the returned string is a left(width).
-
                 Example:
-
                -    TQCString s("pie");
-    TQCString t = s.rightJustify(8, '.');  // t == ".....pie"
-    
                
- 
-
                 
                See also leftJustify().
-
-
                bool TQCString::setExpand ( uint index, char c )
-
                
-Sets the character at position index to c and expands the
-string if necessary, padding with spaces.
-
                 Returns FALSE if index was out of range and the string could
-not be expanded; otherwise returns TRUE.
-
-
                TQCString & TQCString::setNum ( double n, char f = 'g', int prec = 6 )
-
                
-Sets the string to the string representation of the number n
-and returns a reference to the string.
-
                 The format of the string representation is specified by the format
-character f, and the precision (number of digits after the
-decimal point) is specified with prec.
-
                 The valid formats for f are 'e', 'E', 'f', 'g' and 'G'. The
-formats are the same as for sprintf(); they are explained in TQString::arg().
-
-
                TQCString & TQCString::setNum ( short n )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Sets the string to the string representation of the number n
-and returns a reference to the string.
-
-
                TQCString & TQCString::setNum ( ushort n )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Sets the string to the string representation of the number n
-and returns a reference to the string.
-
-
                TQCString & TQCString::setNum ( int n )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Sets the string to the string representation of the number n
-and returns a reference to the string.
-
-
                TQCString & TQCString::setNum ( uint n )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Sets the string to the string representation of the number n
-and returns a reference to the string.
-
-
                TQCString & TQCString::setNum ( long n )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Sets the string to the string representation of the number n
-and returns a reference to the string.
-
-
                TQCString & TQCString::setNum ( ulong n )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Sets the string to the string representation of the number n
-and returns a reference to the string.
-
-
                TQCString & TQCString::setNum ( float n, char f = 'g', int prec = 6 )
-
                 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
-
                TQCString & TQCString::setStr ( const char * str )
-
                
-Makes a deep copy of str. Returns a reference to the string.
-
-
                TQCString TQCString::simplifyWhiteSpace () const
-
                
-Returns a new string that has white space removed from the start
-and the end, plus any sequence of internal white space replaced
-with a single space (ASCII 32).
-
                 White space means the decimal ASCII codes 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 and
-32.
-
                 
                -    TQCString s = "  lots\t of\nwhite    space ";
-    TQCString t = s.simplifyWhiteSpace(); // t == "lots of white space"
-    
                
- 
-
                 
                See also stripWhiteSpace().
-
-
                TQCString & TQCString::sprintf ( const char * format, ... )
-
                
-Implemented as a call to the native vsprintf() (see the manual for
-your C library).
-
                 If the string is shorter than 256 characters, this sprintf() calls
-resize(256) to decrease the chance of memory corruption. The
-string is resized back to its actual length before sprintf()
-returns.
-
                 Example:
-
                -    TQCString s;
-    s.sprintf( "%d - %s", 1, "first" );         // result < 256 chars
-
-    TQCString big( 25000 );                      // very long string
-    big.sprintf( "%d - %s", 2, longString );    // result < 25000 chars
-    
                
- 
-
                 Warning: All vsprintf() implementations will write past the end of
-the target string (*this) if the format specification and
-arguments happen to be longer than the target string, and some
-will also fail if the target string is longer than some arbitrary
-implementation limit.
-
                 Giving user-supplied arguments to sprintf() is risky: Sooner or
-later someone will paste a huge line into your application.
-
-
                TQCString TQCString::stripWhiteSpace () const
-
                
-Returns a new string that has white space removed from the start
-and the end.
-
                 White space means the decimal ASCII codes 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 and
-32.
-
                 Example:
-
                -    TQCString s = " space ";
-    TQCString t = s.stripWhiteSpace();           // t == "space"
-    
                
- 
-
                 
                See also simplifyWhiteSpace().
-
-
                double TQCString::toDouble ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                
-Returns the string converted to a double value.
-
                 If ok is not 0: *ok is set to FALSE if the string is not a
-number, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise *ok is set to
-TRUE.
-
-
                float TQCString::toFloat ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                
-Returns the string converted to a float value.
-
                 If ok is not 0: *ok is set to FALSE if the string is not a
-number, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise *ok is set to
-TRUE.
-
-
                int TQCString::toInt ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                
-Returns the string converted to a int value.
-
                 If ok is not 0: *ok is set to FALSE if the string is not a
-number, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise *ok is set to
-TRUE.
-
-
                long TQCString::toLong ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                
-Returns the string converted to a long value.
-
                 If ok is not 0: *ok is set to FALSE if the string is not a
-number, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise *ok is set to
-TRUE.
-
-
                short TQCString::toShort ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                
-Returns the string converted to a short value.
-
                 If ok is not 0: *ok is set to FALSE if the string is not a
-number, is out of range, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise
-*ok is set to TRUE.
-
-
                uint TQCString::toUInt ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                
-Returns the string converted to an unsigned int value.
-
                 If ok is not 0: *ok is set to FALSE if the string is not a
-number, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise *ok is set to
-TRUE.
-
-
                ulong TQCString::toULong ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                
-Returns the string converted to an unsigned long value.
-
                 If ok is not 0: *ok is set to FALSE if the string is not a
-number, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise *ok is set to
-TRUE.
-
-
                ushort TQCString::toUShort ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                
-Returns the string converted to an unsigned short value.
-
                 If ok is not 0: *ok is set to FALSE if the string is not a
-number, is out of range, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise
-*ok is set to TRUE.
-
-
                bool TQCString::truncate ( uint pos )
-
                
-
-
                 Truncates the string at position pos.
-
                 Equivalent to calling resize(pos+1).
-
                 Example:
-
                -    TQCString s = "truncate this string";
-    s.truncate( 5 );                      // s == "trunc"
-    
                
- 
-
                 
                See also resize().
-
-
                TQCString TQCString::upper () const
-
                
-Returns a new string that is a copy of this string converted to upper case.
-
                 Example:
-
                -    TQCString s( "Debit" );
-    TQCString t = s.upper();  // t == "DEBIT"
-    
                
- 
-
                 
                See also lower() and Note on character comparisons.
-
-
                Related Functions
                
-
                bool operator!= ( const TQCString & s1, const TQCString & s2 )
-
                
-
-
                 
-
                 Returns TRUE if s1 and s2 are different; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                 Equivalent to qstrcmp(s1, s2) != 0.
-
-
                bool operator!= ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 
-
                 Returns TRUE if s1 and s2 are different; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                 Equivalent to qstrcmp(s1, s2) != 0.
-
-
                bool operator!= ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 
-
                 Returns TRUE if s1 and s2 are different; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                 Equivalent to qstrcmp(s1, s2) != 0.
-
-
                const TQCString operator+ ( const TQCString & s1, const TQCString & s2 )
-
                
-
-
                 
-
                 Returns a string which consists of the concatenation of s1 and
-s2.
-
-
                const TQCString operator+ ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 
-
                 Returns a string which consists of the concatenation of s1 and s2.
-
-
                const TQCString operator+ ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 
-
                 Returns a string which consists of the concatenation of s1 and s2.
-
-
                const TQCString operator+ ( const TQCString & s, char c )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 
-
                 Returns a string which consists of the concatenation of s and c.
-
-
                const TQCString operator+ ( char c, const TQCString & s )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 
-
                 Returns a string which consists of the concatenation of c and s.
-
-
                bool operator< ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )
-
                
-
-
                 
-
                 Returns TRUE if s1 is less than s2; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                 Equivalent to qstrcmp(s1, s2) < 0.
-
                 
                See also Note on character comparisons.
-
-
                bool operator< ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 
-
                 Returns TRUE if s1 is less than s2; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                 Equivalent to qstrcmp(s1, s2) < 0.
-
                 
                See also Note on character comparisons.
-
-
                TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQCString & str )
-
                
-
-
                 Writes string str to the stream s.
-
                 
                See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
                bool operator<= ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )
-
                
-
-
                 
-
                 Returns TRUE if s1 is less than or equal to s2; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                 Equivalent to qstrcmp(s1, s2) <= 0.
-
                 
                See also Note on character comparisons.
-
-
                bool operator<= ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 
-
                 Returns TRUE if s1 is less than or equal to s2; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                 Equivalent to qstrcmp(s1, s2) <= 0.
-
                 
                See also Note on character comparisons.
-
-
                bool operator== ( const TQCString & s1, const TQCString & s2 )
-
                
-
-
                 
-
                 Returns TRUE if s1 and s2 are equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                 Equivalent to qstrcmp(s1, s2) == 0.
-
-
                bool operator== ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 
-
                 Returns TRUE if s1 and s2 are equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                 Equivalent to qstrcmp(s1, s2) == 0.
-
-
                bool operator== ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 
-
                 Returns TRUE if s1 and s2 are equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                 Equivalent to qstrcmp(s1, s2) == 0.
-
-
                bool operator> ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )
-
                
-
-
                 
-
                 Returns TRUE if s1 is greater than s2; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                 Equivalent to qstrcmp(s1, s2) > 0.
-
                 
                See also Note on character comparisons.
-
-
                bool operator> ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 
-
                 Returns TRUE if s1 is greater than s2; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                 Equivalent to qstrcmp(s1, s2) > 0.
-
                 
                See also Note on character comparisons.
-
-
                bool operator>= ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )
-
                
-
-
                 
-
                 Returns TRUE if s1 is greater than or equal to s2; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                 Equivalent to qstrcmp(s1, s2) >= 0.
-
                 
                See also Note on character comparisons.
-
-
                bool operator>= ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 
-
                 Returns TRUE if s1 is greater than or equal to s2; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                 Equivalent to qstrcmp(s1, s2) >= 0.
-
                 
                See also Note on character comparisons.
-
-
                TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQCString & str )
-
                
-
-
                 Reads a string into str from the stream s.
-
                 
                See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
                void * qmemmove ( void * dst, const void * src, uint len )
-
                
-
-
                 This function is normally part of the C library. TQt implements
-memmove() for platforms that do not provide it.
-
                 memmove() copies len bytes from src into dst. The data
-is copied correctly even if src and dst overlap.
-
-
                int qstrcmp ( const char * str1, const char * str2 )
-
                
-
-
                 
-
                 A safe strcmp() function.
-
                 Compares str1 and str2. Returns a negative value if str1
-is less than str2, 0 if str1 is equal to str2 or a
-positive value if str1 is greater than str2.
-
                 Special case I: Returns 0 if str1 and str2 are both 0.
-
                 Special case II: Returns a random nonzero value if str1 is 0
-or str2 is 0 (but not both).
-
                 
                See also qstrncmp(), qstricmp(), qstrnicmp(), and Note on character comparisons.
-
-
                char * qstrcpy ( char * dst, const char * src )
-
                
-
-
                 
-
                 A safe strcpy() function.
-
                 Copies all characters up to and including the '\0' from src
-into dst and returns a pointer to dst.
-
-
                char * qstrdup ( const char * src )
-
                
-
-
                 Returns a duplicate string.
-
                 Allocates space for a copy of src, copies it, and returns a
-pointer to the copy. If src is 0, it immediately returns 0.
-
                 The returned string must be deleted using delete[].
-
-
                int qstricmp ( const char * str1, const char * str2 )
-
                
-
-
                 A safe stricmp() function.
-
                 Compares str1 and str2 ignoring the case.
-
                 Returns a negative value if str1 is less than str2, 0 if str1 is equal to str2 or a positive value if str1 is greater
-than str2.
-
                 Special case I: Returns 0 if str1 and str2 are both 0.
-
                 Special case II: Returns a random nonzero value if str1 is 0
-or str2 is 0 (but not both).
-
                 
                See also qstrcmp(), qstrncmp(), qstrnicmp(), and Note on character comparisons.
-
-
                uint qstrlen ( const char * str )
-
                
-
-
                 
-
                 A safe strlen function.
-
                 Returns the number of characters that precede the terminating '\0'.
-or 0 if str is 0.
-
-
                int qstrncmp ( const char * str1, const char * str2, uint len )
-
                
-
-
                 
-
                 A safe strncmp() function.
-
                 Compares at most len bytes of str1 and str2.
-
                 Returns a negative value if str1 is less than str2, 0 if str1 is equal to str2 or a positive value if str1 is greater
-than str2.
-
                 Special case I: Returns 0 if str1 and str2 are both 0.
-
                 Special case II: Returns a random nonzero value if str1 is 0
-or str2 is 0 (but not both).
-
                 
                See also qstrcmp(), qstricmp(), qstrnicmp(), and Note on character comparisons.
-
-
                char * qstrncpy ( char * dst, const char * src, uint len )
-
                
-
-
                 A safe strncpy() function.
-
                 Copies at most len bytes from src (stopping at len or the
-terminating '\0' whichever comes first) into dst and returns a
-pointer to dst. Guarantees that dst is '\0'-terminated. If
-src or dst is 0, returns 0 immediately.
-
                 
                See also qstrcpy().
-
-
                int qstrnicmp ( const char * str1, const char * str2, uint len )
-
                
-
-
                 A safe strnicmp() function.
-
                 Compares at most len bytes of str1 and str2 ignoring the case.
-
                 Returns a negative value if str1 is less than str2, 0 if str1
-is equal to str2 or a positive value if str1 is greater than str2.
-
                 Special case I: Returns 0 if str1 and str2 are both 0.
-
                 Special case II: Returns a random nonzero value if str1 is 0
-or str2 is 0 (but not both).
-
                 
                See also qstrcmp(), qstrncmp(), qstricmp(), and Note on character comparisons.
-
-
-
                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                
-
-
                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                TQt 3.3.8
                
-
                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qcursor-h.html b/doc/html/qcursor-h.html
index 3adf6a194..0c99af9ed 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcursor-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcursor-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qcursor.h Include File
+ntqcursor.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                TQCursor Class Reference
                
-
-
                The TQCursor class provides a mouse cursor with an arbitrary
-shape.
-More...
-
                #include <qcursor.h>
-
                Inherits TQt.
-
                List of all member functions.
-
                Public Members
                
-
                  
-
                • TQCursor ()
                  • 
-
                • TQCursor ( int shape )
                  • 
-
                • TQCursor ( const TQBitmap & bitmap, const TQBitmap & mask, int hotX = -1, int hotY = -1 )
                  • 
-
                • TQCursor ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int hotX = -1, int hotY = -1 )
                  • 
-
                • TQCursor ( const TQCursor & c )
                  • 
-
                • ~TQCursor ()
                  • 
-
                • TQCursor & operator= ( const TQCursor & c )
                  • 
-
                • int shape () const
                  • 
-
                • void setShape ( int shape )
                  • 
-
                • const TQBitmap * bitmap () const
                  • 
-
                • const TQBitmap * mask () const
                  • 
-
                • TQPoint hotSpot () const
                  • 
-
                • HCURSOR handle () const
                  • 
-
                • TQCursor ( HCURSOR handle )
                  • 
-
                • HANDLE handle () const
                  • 
-
                
-
                Static Public Members
                
-
-
                Related Functions
                
-
                  
-
                • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQCursor & c )
                  • 
-
                • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQCursor & c )
                  • 
-
                
-
                Detailed Description
                
-
-
-
                 The TQCursor class provides a mouse cursor with an arbitrary
-shape.
-
                 
-
-
                 This class is mainly used to create mouse cursors that are
-associated with particular widgets and to get and set the position
-of the mouse cursor.
-
                 TQt has a number of standard cursor shapes, but you can also make
-custom cursor shapes based on a TQBitmap, a mask and a hotspot.
-
                 To associate a cursor with a widget, use TQWidget::setCursor(). To
-associate a cursor with all widgets (normally for a short period
-of time), use TQApplication::setOverrideCursor().
-
                 To set a cursor shape use TQCursor::setShape() or use the TQCursor
-constructor which takes the shape as argument, or you can use one
-of the predefined cursors defined in the CursorShape enum.
-
                 If you want to create a cursor with your own bitmap, either use
-the TQCursor constructor which takes a bitmap and a mask or the
-constructor which takes a pixmap as arguments.
-
                 To set or get the position of the mouse cursor use the static
-methods TQCursor::pos() and TQCursor::setPos().
-
                 
                Cursor Shapes
                 
-
                 
                See also TQWidget, GUI Design Handbook:
- Cursors, Widget Appearance and Style, and Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes.
-
-
                 On X11, TQt supports the Xcursor
-library, which allows for full color icon themes. The table below
-shows the cursor name used for each TQt::CursorShape value. If a
-cursor cannot be found using the name shown below, a standard X11
-cursor will be used instead. Note: X11 does not provide
-appropriate cursors for all possible TQt::CursorShape values. It
-is possible that some cursors will be taken from the Xcursor
-theme, while others will use an internal bitmap cursor.
-
                 
                
-
                 TQt::CursorShape Values   Cursor Names
-
                 TQt::ArrowCursor             left_ptr
-
                 TQt::UpArrowCursor           up_arrow
-
                 TQt::CrossCursor             cross
-
                 TQt::WaitCursor              wait
-
                 TQt::BusyCursor		left_ptr_watch
-
                 TQt::IbeamCursor             ibeam
-
                 TQt::SizeVerCursor           size_ver
-
                 TQt::SizeHorCursor           size_hor
-
                 TQt::SizeBDiagCursor         size_bdiag
-
                 TQt::SizeFDiagCursor         size_fdiag
-
                 TQt::SizeAllCursor           size_all
-
                 TQt::SplitVCursor            split_v
-
                 TQt::SplitHCursor            split_h
-
                 TQt::PointingHandCursor      pointing_hand
-
                 TQt::ForbiddenCursor         forbidden
-
                 TQt::WhatsThisCursor         whats_this
-
                
-
-
                Member Function Documentation
                
-
                TQCursor::TQCursor ()
-
                
-Constructs a cursor with the default arrow shape.
-
-
                TQCursor::TQCursor ( int shape )
-
                
-Constructs a cursor with the specified shape.
-
                 See CursorShape for a list of shapes.
-
                 
                See also setShape().
-
-
                TQCursor::TQCursor ( const TQBitmap & bitmap, const TQBitmap & mask, int hotX = -1, int hotY = -1 )
-
                
-Constructs a custom bitmap cursor.
-
                 bitmap and
-mask make up the bitmap.
-hotX and
-hotY define the cursor's hot spot.
-
                 If hotX is negative, it is set to the bitmap().width()/2.
-If hotY is negative, it is set to the bitmap().height()/2.
-
                 The cursor bitmap (B) and mask (M) bits are combined like this:
-
                  
-
                •  B=1 and M=1 gives black.
-
                •  B=0 and M=1 gives white.
-
                •  B=0 and M=0 gives transparent.
-
                •  B=1 and M=0 gives an undefined result.
-
                
-
                 Use the global TQt color color0 to draw 0-pixels and color1 to
-draw 1-pixels in the bitmaps.
-
                 Valid cursor sizes depend on the display hardware (or the
-underlying window system). We recommend using 32x32 cursors,
-because this size is supported on all platforms. Some platforms
-also support 16x16, 48x48 and 64x64 cursors.
-
                 
                See also TQBitmap::TQBitmap() and TQBitmap::setMask().
-
-
                TQCursor::TQCursor ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int hotX = -1, int hotY = -1 )
-
                
-Constructs a custom pixmap cursor.
-
                 pixmap is the image. It is usual to give it a mask (set using
-TQPixmap::setMask()). hotX and hotY define the cursor's hot
-spot.
-
                 If hotX is negative, it is set to the pixmap().width()/2.
-If hotY is negative, it is set to the pixmap().height()/2.
-
                 Valid cursor sizes depend on the display hardware (or the
-underlying window system). We recommend using 32x32 cursors,
-because this size is supported on all platforms. Some platforms
-also support 16x16, 48x48 and 64x64 cursors.
-
                 Currently, only black-and-white pixmaps can be used.
-
                 
                See also TQPixmap::TQPixmap() and TQPixmap::setMask().
-
-
                TQCursor::TQCursor ( const TQCursor & c )
-
                
-Constructs a copy of the cursor c.
-
-
                TQCursor::TQCursor ( HCURSOR handle )
-
                
-
-
                 Creates a cursor with the specified window system handle handle.
-
                 Warning:
-Portable in principle, but if you use it you are probably about to
-do something non-portable. Be careful.
-
-
                TQCursor::~TQCursor ()
-
                
-Destroys the cursor.
-
-
                const TQBitmap * TQCursor::bitmap () const
-
                
-Returns the cursor bitmap, or 0 if it is one of the standard
-cursors.
-
-
                void TQCursor::cleanup () [static]
-
                
-Internal function that deinitializes the predefined cursors.
-This function is called from the TQApplication destructor.
-
                 
                See also initialize().
-
-
                HANDLE TQCursor::handle () const
-
                
-Returns the window system cursor handle.
-
                 Warning:
-Portable in principle, but if you use it you are probably about to
-do something non-portable. Be careful.
-
-
                TQPoint TQCursor::hotSpot () const
-
                
-Returns the cursor hot spot, or (0, 0) if it is one of the
-standard cursors.
-
-
                void TQCursor::initialize () [static]
-
                
-Internal function that initializes the predefined cursors.
-This function is called from the TQApplication constructor.
-
                 
                See also cleanup().
-
-
                const TQBitmap * TQCursor::mask () const
-
                
-Returns the cursor bitmap mask, or 0 if it is one of the standard
-cursors.
-
-
                TQCursor & TQCursor::operator= ( const TQCursor & c )
-
                
-Assigns c to this cursor and returns a reference to this
-cursor.
-
-
                TQPoint TQCursor::pos () [static]
-
                
-Returns the position of the cursor (hot spot) in global screen
-coordinates.
-
                 You can call TQWidget::mapFromGlobal() to translate it to widget
-coordinates.
-
                 
                See also setPos(), TQWidget::mapFromGlobal(), and TQWidget::mapToGlobal().
-
-
                Examples: chart/canvasview.cpp, fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp, and menu/menu.cpp.
-
                void TQCursor::setPos ( int x, int y ) [static]
-
                
-Moves the cursor (hot spot) to the global screen position (x,
-y).
-
                 You can call TQWidget::mapToGlobal() to translate widget
-coordinates to global screen coordinates.
-
                 
                See also pos(), TQWidget::mapFromGlobal(), and TQWidget::mapToGlobal().
-
-
                void TQCursor::setPos ( const TQPoint & ) [static]
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 
-
                void TQCursor::setShape ( int shape )
-
                
-Sets the cursor to the shape identified by shape.
-
                 See CursorShape for the list of cursor shapes.
-
                 
                See also shape().
-
-
                int TQCursor::shape () const
-
                
-Returns the cursor shape identifier. The return value is one of
-the CursorShape enum values (cast to an int).
-
                 
                See also setShape().
-
-
                Related Functions
                
-
                TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQCursor & c )
-
                
-
-Writes the cursor c to the stream s.
-
                 
                See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
                TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQCursor & c )
-
                
-
-Reads a cursor from the stream s and sets c to the read data.
-
                 
                See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
-
                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                
-
-
                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                TQt 3.3.8
                
-
                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qcustomevent-members.html b/doc/html/qcustomevent-members.html
index a2a867ffb..ed5f7d224 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcustomevent-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcustomevent-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -38,8 +38,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
              • TQCustomEvent()
 
              • data()
 
              • setData()
-
              • spontaneous()
-
              • type()
+
              • spontaneous()
+
              • type()
 
              
 
 
              
diff --git a/doc/html/qcustomevent.html b/doc/html/qcustomevent.html
index 3c727fa22..18ee27c79 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcustomevent.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcustomevent.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
              The TQCustomEvent class provides support for custom events.
 More...
-
              #include <qevent.h>
-
              Inherits TQEvent.
+
              #include <ntqevent.h>
+
              Inherits TQEvent.
 
              List of all member functions.
 
              Public Members
              
 
                
@@ -49,10 +49,10 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 The TQCustomEvent class provides support for custom events.
 
                 
 
                 TQCustomEvent is a generic event class for user-defined events.
-User defined events can be sent to widgets or other TQObject
-instances using TQApplication::postEvent() or
-TQApplication::sendEvent(). Subclasses of TQObject can easily
-receive custom events by implementing the TQObject::customEvent()
+User defined events can be sent to widgets or other TQObject
+instances using TQApplication::postEvent() or
+TQApplication::sendEvent(). Subclasses of TQObject can easily
+receive custom events by implementing the TQObject::customEvent()
 event handler function.
 
                 TQCustomEvent objects should be created with a type ID that
 uniquely identifies the event type. To avoid clashes with the
@@ -72,30 +72,30 @@ suitable for your event type.
     class ColorChangeEvent : public TQCustomEvent
     {
     public:
-        ColorChangeEvent( TQColor color )
+        ColorChangeEvent( TQColor color )
             : TQCustomEvent( 65432 ), c( color ) {}
-        TQColor color() const { return c; }
+        TQColor color() const { return c; }
     private:
-        TQColor c;
+        TQColor c;
     };
 
     // To send an event of this custom event type:
 
     ColorChangeEvent* ce = new ColorChangeEvent( blue );
-    TQApplication::postEvent( receiver, ce );  // TQt will delete it when done
+    TQApplication::postEvent( receiver, ce );  // TQt will delete it when done
 
     // To receive an event of this custom event type:
 
     void MyWidget::customEvent( TQCustomEvent * e )
     {
-        if ( e->type() == 65432 ) {  // It must be a ColorChangeEvent
+        if ( e->type() == 65432 ) {  // It must be a ColorChangeEvent
             ColorChangeEvent* ce = (ColorChangeEvent*)e;
             newColor = ce->color();
         }
     }
     
          
  
-
           
          See also TQWidget::customEvent(), TQApplication::notify(), and Event Classes.
+
           
          See also TQWidget::customEvent(), TQApplication::notify(), and Event Classes.
 
 
          Member Function Documentation
          
 
          TQCustomEvent::TQCustomEvent ( int type )
@@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Constructs a custom event object with event type type. The
 value of type must be at least as large as TQEvent::User. The
 data pointer is set to 0.
 
-
          TQCustomEvent::TQCustomEvent ( Type type, void * data )
+
          TQCustomEvent::TQCustomEvent ( Type type, void * data )
 
          
 
 
           Constructs a custom event object with the event type type and a
diff --git a/doc/html/qcustommenuitem-members.html b/doc/html/qcustommenuitem-members.html
index 8761e6d8b..8841c6454 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcustommenuitem-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcustommenuitem-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qcustommenuitem.html b/doc/html/qcustommenuitem.html
index eab2a03db..ba27be589 100644
--- a/doc/html/qcustommenuitem.html
+++ b/doc/html/qcustommenuitem.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
          The TQCustomMenuItem class is an abstract base class for custom menu items in popup menus.
 More...
-
          #include <qmenudata.h>
-
          Inherits TQt.
+
          #include <ntqmenudata.h>
+
          Inherits TQt.
 
          List of all member functions.
 
          Public Members
          
 
            
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ application specific menu items. Examples are items showing
 different fonts in a word processor or menus that allow the
 selection of drawing utilities in a vector drawing program.
 
             A custom item is inserted into a popup menu with
-TQPopupMenu::insertItem().
+TQPopupMenu::insertItem().
 
             By default, a custom item can also have an icon and a keyboard
 accelerator. You can reimplement fullSpan() to return TRUE if you
 want the item to span the entire popup menu width. This is
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ example how custom menu items can be used.
 recognize shortcut keys that are from text with ampersands. Normal
 accelerators work though.
 
             
-
             
            See also TQMenuData, TQPopupMenu, and Miscellaneous Classes.
+
             
            See also TQMenuData, TQPopupMenu, and Miscellaneous Classes.
 
 
            Member Function Documentation
            
 
            TQCustomMenuItem::TQCustomMenuItem ()
@@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ well.
 Returns TRUE if this item is just a separator; otherwise returns
 FALSE.
 
-
            void TQCustomMenuItem::paint ( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg, bool act, bool enabled, int x, int y, int w, int h ) [pure virtual]
+
            void TQCustomMenuItem::paint ( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg, bool act, bool enabled, int x, int y, int w, int h ) [pure virtual]
 
            
 
 
             Paints this item. When this function is invoked, the painter p
@@ -112,14 +112,14 @@ and enabled if enabled is TRUE. The geometry values x, y Do not draw any background, this has already been done by the
 popup menu according to the current GUI style.
 
-
            void TQCustomMenuItem::setFont ( const TQFont & font ) [virtual]
+
            void TQCustomMenuItem::setFont ( const TQFont & font ) [virtual]
 
            
 Sets the font of the custom menu item to font.
 
             This function is called whenever the font in the popup menu
 changes. For menu items that show their own individual font entry,
 you want to ignore this.
 
-
            TQSize TQCustomMenuItem::sizeHint () [pure virtual]
+
            TQSize TQCustomMenuItem::sizeHint () [pure virtual]
 
            
 
 
             Returns the item's size hint.
diff --git a/doc/html/qdatabrowser-h.html b/doc/html/qdatabrowser-h.html
index cf1108188..14c60cdee 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdatabrowser-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdatabrowser-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qdatabrowser.h Include File
+ntqdatabrowser.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
            
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
            TQDataBrowser Class Reference
            [sql module]
            
-
-
            The TQDataBrowser class provides data manipulation and
-navigation for data entry forms.
-More...
-
            #include <qdatabrowser.h>
-
            Inherits TQWidget.
-
            List of all member functions.
-
            Public Members
            
-
-
            Public Slots
            
-
-
            Signals
            
-
-
            Properties
            
-
              
-
            • bool autoEdit - whether the browser automatically applies edits
              • 
-
            • bool boundaryChecking - whether boundary checking is active
              • 
-
            • bool confirmCancels - whether the browser confirms cancel operations
              • 
-
            • bool confirmDelete - whether the browser confirms deletions
              • 
-
            • bool confirmEdits - whether the browser confirms edits
              • 
-
            • bool confirmInsert - whether the data browser confirms insertions
              • 
-
            • bool confirmUpdate - whether the browser confirms updates
              • 
-
            • TQString filter - the data browser's filter
              • 
-
            • bool readOnly - whether the browser is read-only
              • 
-
            • TQStringList sort - the data browser's sort
              • 
-
            
-
            Protected Members
            
-
-
            Detailed Description
            
-
-
-The TQDataBrowser class provides data manipulation and
-navigation for data entry forms.
-
             
-
-
-
             A high-level API is provided for navigating through data records
-in a cursor, for inserting, updating and deleting records, and for
-refreshing data in the display.
-
             If you want a read-only form to present database data use
-TQDataView; if you want a table-based presentation of your data use
-TQDataTable.
-
             A TQDataBrowser is used to associate a dataset with a form in much
-the same way as a TQDataTable associates a dataset with a table.
-Once the data browser has been constructed it can be associated
-with a dataset with setSqlCursor(), and with a form with
-setForm(). Boundary checking, sorting and filtering can be set
-with setBoundaryChecking(), setSort() and setFilter(),
-respectively.
-
             The insertCurrent() function reads the fields from the default
-form into the default cursor and performs the insert. The
-updateCurrent() and deleteCurrent() functions perform similarly to
-update and delete the current record respectively.
-
             The user can be asked to confirm all edits with setConfirmEdits().
-For more precise control use setConfirmInsert(),
-setConfirmUpdate(), setConfirmDelete() and setConfirmCancels().
-Use setAutoEdit() to control the behaviour of the form when the
-user edits a record and then navigates.
-
             The record set is navigated using first(), next(), prev(), last()
-and seek(). The form's display is updated with refresh(). When
-navigation takes place the firstRecordAvailable(),
-lastRecordAvailable(), nextRecordAvailable() and
-prevRecordAvailable() signals are emitted. When the cursor record
-is changed due to navigation the cursorChanged() signal is
-emitted.
-
             If you want finer control of the insert, update and delete
-processes then you can use the lower level functions to perform
-these operations as described below.
-
             The form is populated with data from the database with
-readFields(). If the user is allowed to edit, (see setReadOnly()),
-write the form's data back to the cursor's edit buffer with
-writeFields(). You can clear the values in the form with
-clearValues(). Editing is performed as follows:
-
              
-
            •  insert When the data browser enters insertion mode it emits the
-primeInsert() signal which you can connect to, for example to
-pre-populate fields. Call writeFields() to write the user's edits to
-the cursor's edit buffer then call insert() to insert the record
-into the database. The beforeInsert() signal is emitted just before
-the cursor's edit buffer is inserted into the database; connect to
-this for example, to populate fields such as an auto-generated
-primary key.
-
            •  update For updates the primeUpdate() signal is emitted when
-the data browser enters update mode. After calling writeFields()
-call update() to update the record and connect to the beforeUpdate()
-signal to manipulate the user's data before the update takes place.
-
            •  delete For deletion the primeDelete() signal is emitted when
-the data browser enters deletion mode. After calling writeFields()
-call del() to delete the record and connect to the beforeDelete()
-signal, for example to record an audit of the deleted record.
-
            
-
             
            See also Database Classes.
-
-
            Member Type Documentation
            
-
            TQDataBrowser::Boundary
            
-
-
             This enum describes where the data browser is positioned.
-
              
-
            • TQDataBrowser::Unknown - the boundary cannot be determined (usually because
-there is no default cursor, or the default cursor is not active).
-
            • TQDataBrowser::None - the browser is not positioned on a boundary, but it is
-positioned on a record somewhere in the middle.
-
            • TQDataBrowser::BeforeBeginning - the browser is positioned before the
-first available record.
-
            • TQDataBrowser::Beginning - the browser is positioned at the first record.
-
            • TQDataBrowser::End - the browser is positioned at the last
-record.
-
            • TQDataBrowser::AfterEnd - the browser is positioned after the last
-available record.
-
            
-
            Member Function Documentation
            
-
            TQDataBrowser::TQDataBrowser ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags fl = 0 )
-
            
-Constructs a data browser which is a child of parent, with the
-name name and widget flags set to fl.
-
-
            TQDataBrowser::~TQDataBrowser ()
-
            
-Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-
-
            bool TQDataBrowser::autoEdit () const
-
            Returns TRUE if the browser automatically applies edits; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "autoEdit" property for details.
-
            void TQDataBrowser::beforeDelete ( TQSqlRecord * buf ) [signal]
-
            
-
-
             This signal is emitted just before the cursor's edit buffer  is
-deleted from the database. The buf parameter points to the edit
-buffer being deleted. You might connect to this signal to capture
-some auditing information about the deletion.
-
-
            void TQDataBrowser::beforeInsert ( TQSqlRecord * buf ) [signal]
-
            
-
-
             This signal is emitted just before the cursor's edit buffer is
-inserted into the database. The buf parameter points to the
-edit buffer being inserted. You might connect to this signal to
-populate a generated primary key for example.
-
-
            void TQDataBrowser::beforeUpdate ( TQSqlRecord * buf ) [signal]
-
            
-
-
             This signal is emitted just before the cursor's edit buffer is
-updated in the database. The buf parameter points to the edit
-buffer being updated. You might connect to this signal to capture
-some auditing information about the update.
-
-
            Boundary TQDataBrowser::boundary ()
-
            
-Returns an enum indicating the boundary status of the browser.
-
             This is achieved by moving the default cursor and checking the
-position, however the current default form values will not be
-altered. After checking for the boundary, the cursor is moved back
-to its former position. See TQDataBrowser::Boundary.
-
             
            See also Boundary.
-
-
            bool TQDataBrowser::boundaryChecking () const
-
            Returns TRUE if boundary checking is active; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "boundaryChecking" property for details.
-
            void TQDataBrowser::clearValues () [virtual slot]
-
            
-Clears all the values in the form.
-
             All the edit buffer field values are set to their 'zero state',
-e.g. 0 for numeric fields and "" for string fields. Then the
-widgets are updated using the property map. For example, a
-combobox that is property-mapped to integers would scroll to the
-first item. See the TQSqlPropertyMap constructor for the default
-mappings of widgets to properties.
-
-
            TQSql::Confirm TQDataBrowser::confirmCancel ( TQSql::Op m ) [virtual protected]
-
            
-Protected virtual function which returns a confirmation for
-cancelling an edit mode m. Derived classes can reimplement this
-function and provide their own confirmation dialog. The default
-implementation uses a message box which prompts the user to
-confirm the edit action.
-
-
            bool TQDataBrowser::confirmCancels () const
-
            Returns TRUE if the browser confirms cancel operations; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "confirmCancels" property for details.
-
            bool TQDataBrowser::confirmDelete () const
-
            Returns TRUE if the browser confirms deletions; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "confirmDelete" property for details.
-
            TQSql::Confirm TQDataBrowser::confirmEdit ( TQSql::Op m ) [virtual protected]
-
            
-Protected virtual function which returns a confirmation for an
-edit of mode m. Derived classes can reimplement this function
-and provide their own confirmation dialog. The default
-implementation uses a message box which prompts the user to
-confirm the edit action.
-
-
            bool TQDataBrowser::confirmEdits () const
-
            Returns TRUE if the browser confirms edits; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "confirmEdits" property for details.
-
            bool TQDataBrowser::confirmInsert () const
-
            Returns TRUE if the data browser confirms insertions; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "confirmInsert" property for details.
-
            bool TQDataBrowser::confirmUpdate () const
-
            Returns TRUE if the browser confirms updates; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "confirmUpdate" property for details.
-
            void TQDataBrowser::currentChanged ( const TQSqlRecord * record ) [signal]
-
            
-
-
             This signal is emitted whenever the current cursor position
-changes. The record parameter points to the contents of the
-current cursor's record.
-
-
            bool TQDataBrowser::currentEdited () [virtual protected]
-
            
-Returns TRUE if the form's edit buffer differs from the current
-cursor buffer; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
            void TQDataBrowser::cursorChanged ( TQSqlCursor::Mode mode ) [signal]
-
            
-
-
             This signal is emitted whenever the cursor record was changed due
-to navigation. The mode parameter is the edit that just took
-place, e.g. Insert, Update or Delete. See TQSqlCursor::Mode.
-
-
            void TQDataBrowser::del () [virtual slot]
-
            
-Performs a delete operation on the data browser's cursor. If there
-is no default cursor or no default form, nothing happens.
-
             Otherwise, the following happens:
-
             The current form's record is deleted from the database, providing
-that the data browser is not in insert mode. If the data browser
-is actively inserting a record (see insert()), the insert action
-is canceled, and the browser navigates to the last valid record
-that was current. If there is an error, handleError() is called.
-
-
            bool TQDataBrowser::deleteCurrent () [virtual protected]
-
            
-Performs a delete on the default cursor using the values from the
-default form and updates the default form. If there is no default
-form or no default cursor, nothing happens. If the deletion was
-successful, the cursor is repositioned to the nearest record and
-TRUE is returned. The nearest record is the next record if there
-is one otherwise the previous record if there is one. If an error
-occurred during the deletion from the database, handleError() is
-called and FALSE is returned.
-
             
            See also cursor, form(), and handleError().
-
-
            TQString TQDataBrowser::filter () const
-
            Returns the data browser's filter.
-See the "filter" property for details.
-
            void TQDataBrowser::first () [virtual slot]
-
            
-Moves the default cursor to the first record and refreshes the
-default form to display this record. If there is no default form
-or no default cursor, nothing happens. If the data browser
-successfully navigated to the first record, the default cursor is
-primed for update and the primeUpdate() signal is emitted.
-
             If the browser is already positioned on the first record nothing
-happens.
-
             
-
            void TQDataBrowser::firstRecordAvailable ( bool available ) [signal]
-
            
-
-
             This signal is emitted whenever the position of the cursor
-changes. The available parameter indicates whether or not the
-first record in the default cursor is available.
-
-
            TQSqlForm * TQDataBrowser::form ()
-
            
-Returns the data browser's default form or 0 if no form has been
-set.
-
-
            void TQDataBrowser::handleError ( const TQSqlError & error ) [virtual protected]
-
            
-Virtual function which handles the error error. The default
-implementation warns the user with a message box.
-
-
            void TQDataBrowser::insert () [virtual slot]
-
            
-Performs an insert operation on the data browser's cursor. If
-there is no default cursor or no default form, nothing happens.
-
             If auto-editing is on (see setAutoEdit()), the following happens:
-
             
              
-
            •  If the browser is already actively inserting a record,
-the current form's data is inserted into the database.
-
            •  If the browser is not inserting a record, but the current record
-was changed by the user, the record is updated in the database with
-the current form's data (i.e. with the changes).
-
            
-
             If there is an error handling any of the above auto-edit actions,
-handleError() is called and no insert or update is performed.
-
             If no error occurred, or auto-editing is not enabled, the data browser
-begins actively inserting a record into the database by performing the
-following actions:
-
             
              
-
            •  The default cursor is primed for insert using TQSqlCursor::primeInsert().
-
            •  The primeInsert() signal is emitted.
-
            •  The form is updated with the values in the default cursor's.
-edit buffer so that the user can fill in the values to be inserted.
-
            
-
             
-
            bool TQDataBrowser::insertCurrent () [virtual protected]
-
            
-Reads the fields from the default form into the default cursor and
-performs an insert on the default cursor. If there is no default
-form or no default cursor, nothing happens. If an error occurred
-during the insert into the database, handleError() is called and
-FALSE is returned. If the insert was successfull, the cursor is
-refreshed and relocated to the newly inserted record, the
-cursorChanged() signal is emitted, and TRUE is returned.
-
             
            See also cursorChanged(), sqlCursor(), form(), and handleError().
-
-
            bool TQDataBrowser::isReadOnly () const
-
            Returns TRUE if the browser is read-only; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "readOnly" property for details.
-
            void TQDataBrowser::last () [virtual slot]
-
            
-Moves the default cursor to the last record and refreshes the
-default form to display this record. If there is no default form
-or no default cursor, nothing happens. If the data browser
-successfully navigated to the last record, the default cursor is
-primed for update and the primeUpdate() signal is emitted.
-
             If the browser is already positioned on the last record nothing
-happens.
-
-
            void TQDataBrowser::lastRecordAvailable ( bool available ) [signal]
-
            
-
-
             This signal is emitted whenever the position of the cursor
-changes. The available parameter indicates whether or not the
-last record in the default cursor is available.
-
-
            void TQDataBrowser::next () [virtual slot]
-
            
-Moves the default cursor to the next record and refreshes the
-default form to display this record. If there is no default form
-or no default cursor, nothing happens. If the data browser
-successfully navigated to the next record, the default cursor is
-primed for update and the primeUpdate() signal is emitted.
-
             If the browser is positioned on the last record nothing happens.
-
-
            void TQDataBrowser::nextRecordAvailable ( bool available ) [signal]
-
            
-
-
             This signal is emitted whenever the position of the cursor
-changes. The available parameter indicates whether or not the
-next record in the default cursor is available.
-
-
            void TQDataBrowser::prev () [virtual slot]
-
            
-Moves the default cursor to the previous record and refreshes the
-default form to display this record. If there is no default form
-or no default cursor, nothing happens. If the data browser
-successfully navigated to the previous record, the default cursor
-is primed for update and the primeUpdate() signal is emitted.
-
             If the browser is positioned on the first record nothing happens.
-
-
            void TQDataBrowser::prevRecordAvailable ( bool available ) [signal]
-
            
-
-
             This signal is emitted whenever the position of the cursor
-changes. The available parameter indicates whether or not the
-previous record in the default cursor is available.
-
-
            void TQDataBrowser::primeDelete ( TQSqlRecord * buf ) [signal]
-
            
-
-
             This signal is emitted when the data browser enters deletion mode.
-The buf parameter points to the record buffer being deleted.
-(Note that TQSqlCursor::primeDelete() is not called on the
-default cursor, as this would corrupt values in the form.)
-Connect to this signal in order to, for example, save a copy of
-the deleted record for auditing purposes.
-
             
            See also del().
-
-
            void TQDataBrowser::primeInsert ( TQSqlRecord * buf ) [signal]
-
            
-
-
             This signal is emitted when the data browser enters insertion
-mode. The buf parameter points to the record buffer that is to
-be inserted. Connect to this signal to, for example, prime the
-record buffer with default data values, auto-numbered fields etc.
-(Note that TQSqlCursor::primeInsert() is not called on the
-default cursor, as this would corrupt values in the form.)
-
             
            See also insert().
-
-
            void TQDataBrowser::primeUpdate ( TQSqlRecord * buf ) [signal]
-
            
-
-
             This signal is emitted when the data browser enters update mode.
-Note that during navigation (first(), last(), next(), prev()),
-each record that is shown in the default form is primed for
-update. The buf parameter points to the record buffer being
-updated. (Note that TQSqlCursor::primeUpdate() is not called on
-the default cursor, as this would corrupt values in the form.)
-Connect to this signal in order to, for example, keep track of
-which records have been updated, perhaps for auditing purposes.
-
             
            See also update().
-
-
            void TQDataBrowser::readFields () [virtual slot]
-
            
-Reads the fields from the default cursor's edit buffer and
-displays them in the form. If there is no default cursor or no
-default form, nothing happens.
-
-
            void TQDataBrowser::refresh () [virtual slot]
-
            
-Refreshes the data browser's data using the default cursor. The
-browser's current filter and sort are applied if they have been
-set.
-
             
            See also filter and sort.
-
-
            bool TQDataBrowser::seek ( int i, bool relative = FALSE ) [virtual]
-
            
-Moves the default cursor to the record specified by the index i
-and refreshes the default form to display this record. If there is
-no default form or no default cursor, nothing happens. If relative is TRUE (the default is FALSE), the cursor is moved
-relative to its current position. If the data browser successfully
-navigated to the desired record, the default cursor is primed for
-update and the primeUpdate() signal is emitted.
-
             If the browser is already positioned on the desired record nothing
-happens.
-
-
            void TQDataBrowser::setAutoEdit ( bool autoEdit ) [virtual]
-
            Sets whether the browser automatically applies edits to autoEdit.
-See the "autoEdit" property for details.
-
            void TQDataBrowser::setBoundaryChecking ( bool active )
-
            Sets whether boundary checking is active to active.
-See the "boundaryChecking" property for details.
-
            void TQDataBrowser::setConfirmCancels ( bool confirm ) [virtual]
-
            Sets whether the browser confirms cancel operations to confirm.
-See the "confirmCancels" property for details.
-
            void TQDataBrowser::setConfirmDelete ( bool confirm ) [virtual]
-
            Sets whether the browser confirms deletions to confirm.
-See the "confirmDelete" property for details.
-
            void TQDataBrowser::setConfirmEdits ( bool confirm ) [virtual]
-
            Sets whether the browser confirms edits to confirm.
-See the "confirmEdits" property for details.
-
            void TQDataBrowser::setConfirmInsert ( bool confirm ) [virtual]
-
            Sets whether the data browser confirms insertions to confirm.
-See the "confirmInsert" property for details.
-
            void TQDataBrowser::setConfirmUpdate ( bool confirm ) [virtual]
-
            Sets whether the browser confirms updates to confirm.
-See the "confirmUpdate" property for details.
-
            void TQDataBrowser::setFilter ( const TQString & filter )
-
            Sets the data browser's filter to filter.
-See the "filter" property for details.
-
            void TQDataBrowser::setForm ( TQSqlForm * form ) [virtual]
-
            
-Sets the browser's default form to form. The cursor and all
-navigation and data manipulation functions that the browser
-provides become available to the form.
-
-
            void TQDataBrowser::setReadOnly ( bool active ) [virtual]
-
            Sets whether the browser is read-only to active.
-See the "readOnly" property for details.
-
            void TQDataBrowser::setSort ( const TQStringList & sort )
-
            Sets the data browser's sort to sort.
-See the "sort" property for details.
-
            void TQDataBrowser::setSort ( const TQSqlIndex & sort )
-
            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
             Sets the data browser's sort to the TQSqlIndex sort. To apply
-the new sort, use refresh().
-
             
-
            void TQDataBrowser::setSqlCursor ( TQSqlCursor * cursor, bool autoDelete = FALSE ) [virtual]
-
            
-Sets the default cursor used by the data browser to cursor. If
-autoDelete is TRUE (the default is FALSE), the data browser
-takes ownership of the cursor pointer, which will be deleted
-when the browser is destroyed, or when setSqlCursor() is called
-again. To activate the cursor use refresh(). The cursor's edit
-buffer is used in the default form to browse and edit records.
-
             
            See also sqlCursor(), form(), and setForm().
-
-
            TQStringList TQDataBrowser::sort () const
-
            Returns the data browser's sort.
-See the "sort" property for details.
-
            TQSqlCursor * TQDataBrowser::sqlCursor () const
-
            
-Returns the default cursor used for navigation, or 0 if there is
-no default cursor.
-
             
            See also setSqlCursor().
-
-
            void TQDataBrowser::update () [virtual slot]
-
            
-Performs an update operation on the data browser's cursor.
-
             If there is no default cursor or no default form, nothing happens.
-Otherwise, the following happens:
-
             If the data browser is actively inserting a record (see insert()),
-that record is inserted into the database using insertCurrent().
-Otherwise, the database is updated with the current form's data
-using updateCurrent(). If there is an error handling either
-action, handleError() is called.
-
-
            void TQDataBrowser::updateBoundary () [slot]
-
            
-If boundaryChecking() is TRUE, checks the boundary of the current
-default cursor and emits signals which indicate the position of
-the cursor.
-
-
            bool TQDataBrowser::updateCurrent () [virtual protected]
-
            
-Reads the fields from the default form into the default cursor and
-performs an update on the default cursor. If there is no default
-form or no default cursor, nothing happens. If an error occurred
-during the update on the database, handleError() is called and
-FALSE is returned. If the update was successfull, the cursor is
-refreshed and relocated to the updated record, the cursorChanged()
-signal is emitted, and TRUE is returned.
-
             
            See also cursor, form(), and handleError().
-
-
            void TQDataBrowser::writeFields () [virtual slot]
-
            
-Writes the form's data to the default cursor's edit buffer. If
-there is no default cursor or no default form, nothing happens.
-
-
            Property Documentation
            
-
            bool autoEdit
            
-
            This property holds whether the browser automatically applies edits.
-
            The default value for this property is TRUE. When the user begins
-an insertion or an update on a form there are two possible
-outcomes when they navigate to another record:
-
             
              
-
            •  the insert or update is is performed -- this occurs if autoEdit is TRUE
-
            •  the insert or update is discarded -- this occurs if autoEdit is FALSE
-
            
-
-
            Set this property's value with setAutoEdit() and get this property's value with autoEdit().
-
            bool boundaryChecking
            
-
            This property holds whether boundary checking is active.
-
            When boundary checking is active (the default), signals are
-emitted indicating the current position of the default cursor.
-
             
            See also boundary().
-
-
            Set this property's value with setBoundaryChecking() and get this property's value with boundaryChecking().
-
            bool confirmCancels
            
-
            This property holds whether the browser confirms cancel operations.
-
            If this property is TRUE, all cancels must be confirmed by the
-user through a message box (this behavior can be changed by
-overriding the confirmCancel() function), otherwise all cancels
-occur immediately. The default is FALSE.
-
             
            See also confirmEdits and confirmCancel().
-
-
            Set this property's value with setConfirmCancels() and get this property's value with confirmCancels().
-
            bool confirmDelete
            
-
            This property holds whether the browser confirms deletions.
-
            If this property is TRUE, the browser confirms deletions,
-otherwise deletions happen immediately.
-
             
            See also confirmCancels, confirmEdits, confirmUpdate, confirmInsert, and confirmEdit().
-
-
            Set this property's value with setConfirmDelete() and get this property's value with confirmDelete().
-
            bool confirmEdits
            
-
            This property holds whether the browser confirms edits.
-
            If this property is TRUE, the browser confirms all edit operations
-(insertions, updates and deletions), otherwise all edit operations
-happen immediately. Confirmation is achieved by presenting the
-user with a message box -- this behavior can be changed by
-reimplementing the confirmEdit() function,
-
             
            See also confirmEdit(), confirmCancels, confirmInsert, confirmUpdate, and confirmDelete.
-
-
            Set this property's value with setConfirmEdits() and get this property's value with confirmEdits().
-
            bool confirmInsert
            
-
            This property holds whether the data browser confirms insertions.
-
            If this property is TRUE, the browser confirms insertions,
-otherwise insertions happen immediately.
-
             
            See also confirmCancels, confirmEdits, confirmUpdate, confirmDelete, and confirmEdit().
-
-
            Set this property's value with setConfirmInsert() and get this property's value with confirmInsert().
-
            bool confirmUpdate
            
-
            This property holds whether the browser confirms updates.
-
            If this property is TRUE, the browser confirms updates, otherwise
-updates happen immediately.
-
             
            See also confirmCancels, confirmEdits, confirmInsert, confirmDelete, and confirmEdit().
-
-
            Set this property's value with setConfirmUpdate() and get this property's value with confirmUpdate().
-
            TQString filter
            
-
            This property holds the data browser's filter.
-
            The filter applies to the data shown in the browser. Call
-refresh() to apply the new filter. A filter is a string containing
-a SQL WHERE clause without the WHERE keyword, e.g. "id>1000",
-"name LIKE 'A%'", etc.
-
             There is no default filter.
-
             
            See also sort.
-
-
            Set this property's value with setFilter() and get this property's value with filter().
-
            bool readOnly
            
-
            This property holds whether the browser is read-only.
-
            The default is FALSE, i.e. data can be edited. If the data browser
-is read-only, no database edits will be allowed.
-
-
            Set this property's value with setReadOnly() and get this property's value with isReadOnly().
-
            TQStringList sort
            
-
            This property holds the data browser's sort.
-
            The data browser's sort affects the order in which records are
-viewed in the browser. Call refresh() to apply the new sort.
-
             When retrieving the sort property, a string list is returned in
-the form 'fieldname order', e.g. 'id ASC', 'surname DESC'.
-
             There is no default sort.
-
             Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
-over a copy, e.g.
-
            -    TQStringList list = myDataBrowser.sort();
-    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    while( it != list.end() ) {
-        myProcessing( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-    
            
- 
-
-
            Set this property's value with setSort() and get this property's value with sort().
-
-
            
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
            
-
-
            Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
            TQt 3.3.8
            
-
            
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qdatapump-members.html b/doc/html/qdatapump-members.html
index 9527cb536..e4bdd1b54 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdatapump-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdatapump-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -36,48 +36,48 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
 
 
            
diff --git a/doc/html/qdatapump.html b/doc/html/qdatapump.html
index d2fa45d49..539726ba5 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdatapump.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdatapump.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
            The TQDataPump class moves data from a TQDataSource to a TQDataSink during event processing.
 More...
-
            #include <qasyncio.h>
-
            Inherits TQObject.
+
            #include <ntqasyncio.h>
+
            Inherits TQObject.
 
            List of all member functions.
 
            Public Members
            
 
              
diff --git a/doc/html/qdatasink-members.html b/doc/html/qdatasink-members.html
index 4eadbc70f..6b9ed4eff 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdatasink-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdatasink-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -35,10 +35,10 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 TQDataSink, including inherited members.
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qdatasink.html b/doc/html/qdatasink.html
index 3ff7aefdb..5d46fabb3 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdatasink.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdatasink.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
              The TQDataSink class is an asynchronous consumer of data.
 More...
-
              #include <qasyncio.h>
-
              Inherits TQAsyncIO.
+
              #include <ntqasyncio.h>
+
              Inherits TQAsyncIO.
 
              List of all member functions.
 
              Public Members
              
 
                
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ asynchronous manner.  This means that at some time not determined by
 the data sink, blocks of data are given to it from processing.  The
 data sink is able to limit the maximum size of such blocks which it
 is currently able to process.
-
                 
                See also TQAsyncIO, TQDataSource, and TQDataPump.
+
                 
                See also TQAsyncIO, TQDataSource, and TQDataPump.
 
 
                Member Function Documentation
                
 
                void TQDataSink::eof () [pure virtual]
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ processing.
 
                void TQDataSink::maybeReady ()
 
                
 This should be called whenever readyToReceive() might have become non-zero.
-It is merely calls TQAsyncIO::ready() if readyToReceive() is non-zero.
+It is merely calls TQAsyncIO::ready() if readyToReceive() is non-zero.
 
 
                int TQDataSink::readyToReceive () [pure virtual]
 
                
diff --git a/doc/html/qdatasource-members.html b/doc/html/qdatasource-members.html
index accce671f..f49cd1019 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdatasource-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdatasource-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -35,10 +35,10 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 TQDataSource, including inherited members.
 
 
                  
-
                • connect()
+
                • connect()
 
                • enableRewind()
 
                • maybeReady()
-
                • ready()
+
                • ready()
 
                • readyToSend()
 
                • rewind()
 
                • rewindable()
diff --git a/doc/html/qdatasource.html b/doc/html/qdatasource.html
index 33e2131e0..42a1c03b3 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdatasource.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdatasource.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                  The TQDataSource class is an asynchronous producer of data.
 More...
-
                  #include <qasyncio.h>
-
                  Inherits TQAsyncIO.
+
                  #include <ntqasyncio.h>
+
                  Inherits TQAsyncIO.
 
                  Inherited by TQIODeviceSource.
 
                  List of all member functions.
 
                  Public Members
                  
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ asynchronous manner.  This means that at some time not determined by
 the data source, blocks of data will be taken from it for processing.
 The data source is able to limit the maximum size of such blocks which
 it is currently able to provide.
-
                   
                  See also TQAsyncIO, TQDataSink, and TQDataPump.
+
                   
                  See also TQAsyncIO, TQDataSink, and TQDataPump.
 
 
                  Member Function Documentation
                  
 
                  void TQDataSource::enableRewind ( bool on ) [virtual]
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ If this function is called with on set to TRUE, and rewind()
 function to subsequently operate as described.  If rewindable() is FALSE,
 the function should call TQDataSource::enableRewind(), which aborts with
-a qFatal() error.
+a qFatal() error.
 
                   For example, a network connection may choose to use a disk cache
 of input only if rewinding is enabled before the first buffer-full of
 data is discarded, returning FALSE in rewindable() if that first buffer
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ is discarded.
 
                  void TQDataSource::maybeReady ()
 
                  
 This should be called whenever readyToSend() might have become non-zero.
-It is merely calls TQAsyncIO::ready() if readyToSend() is non-zero.
+It is merely calls TQAsyncIO::ready() if readyToSend() is non-zero.
 
 
                  int TQDataSource::readyToSend () [pure virtual]
 
                  
diff --git a/doc/html/qdatastream-h.html b/doc/html/qdatastream-h.html
index c37ab7b1b..e1dcdde4b 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdatastream-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdatastream-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qdatastream.h Include File
+ntqdatastream.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                  
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                  TQDataStream Class Reference
                  
-
-
                  The TQDataStream class provides serialization of binary data
-to a TQIODevice.
-More...
-
                  All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
                  
-
                  #include <qdatastream.h>
-
                  List of all member functions.
-
                  Public Members
                  
-
-
                  Detailed Description
                  
-
-
-
-The TQDataStream class provides serialization of binary data
-to a TQIODevice.
-
                   
-
                   A data stream is a binary stream of encoded information which is
-100% independent of the host computer's operating system, CPU or
-byte order. For example, a data stream that is written by a PC
-under Windows can be read by a Sun SPARC running Solaris.
-
                   You can also use a data stream to read/write raw
-    unencoded binary data. If you want a "parsing" input
-stream, see TQTextStream.
-
                   The TQDataStream class implements the serialization of C++'s basic
-data types, like char, short, int, char*, etc.
-Serialization of more complex data is accomplished by breaking up
-the data into primitive units.
-
                   A data stream cooperates closely with a TQIODevice. A TQIODevice
-represents an input/output medium one can read data from and write
-data to. The TQFile class is an example of an IO device.
-
                   Example (write binary data to a stream):
-
                  -    TQFile file( "file.dat" );
-    file.open( IO_WriteOnly );
-    TQDataStream stream( &file ); // we will serialize the data into the file
-    stream << "the answer is";   // serialize a string
-    stream << (Q_INT32)42;       // serialize an integer
-    
                  
- 
-
                   Example (read binary data from a stream):
-
                  -    TQFile file( "file.dat" );
-    file.open( IO_ReadOnly );
-    TQDataStream stream( &file );  // read the data serialized from the file
-    TQString str;
-    Q_INT32 a;
-    stream >> str >> a;           // extract "the answer is" and 42
-    
                  
- 
-
                   Each item written to the stream is written in a predefined binary
-format that varies depending on the item's type. Supported TQt
-types include TQBrush, TQColor, TQDateTime, TQFont, TQPixmap, TQString,
-TQVariant and many others. For the complete list of all TQt types
-supporting data streaming see the Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
                   For integers it is best to always cast to a TQt integer type for
-writing, and to read back into the same TQt integer type. This
-ensures that you get integers of the size you want and insulates
-you from compiler and platform differences.
-
                   To take one example, a char* string is written as a 32-bit
-integer equal to the length of the string including the NUL byte
-('\0'), followed by all the characters of the string including the
-NUL byte. When reading a char* string, 4 bytes are read to
-create the 32-bit length value, then that many characters for the
-char* string including the NUL are read.
-
                   The initial IODevice is usually set in the constructor, but can be
-changed with setDevice(). If you've reached the end of the data
-(or if there is no IODevice set) atEnd() will return TRUE.
-
                   If you want the data to be compatible with an earlier version of
-TQt use setVersion().
-
                   If you want the data to be human-readable, e.g. for debugging, you
-can set the data stream into printable data mode with
-setPrintableData(). The data is then written slower, in a bloated
-but human readable format.
-
                   If you are producing a new binary data format, such as a file
-format for documents created by your application, you could use a
-TQDataStream to write the data in a portable format. Typically, you
-would write a brief header containing a magic string and a version
-number to give yourself room for future expansion. For example:
-
                   
                  -    TQFile file( "file.xxx" );
-    file.open( IO_WriteOnly );
-    TQDataStream stream( &file );
-
-    // Write a header with a "magic number" and a version
-    stream << (Q_UINT32)0xA0B0C0D0;
-    stream << (Q_INT32)123;
-
-    // Write the data
-    stream << [lots of interesting data]
-    
                  
- 
-
                   Then read it in with:
-
                   
                  -    TQFile file( "file.xxx" );
-    file.open( IO_ReadOnly );
-    TQDataStream stream( &file );
-
-    // Read and check the header
-    Q_UINT32 magic;
-    stream >> magic;
-    if ( magic != 0xA0B0C0D0 )
-        return XXX_BAD_FILE_FORMAT;
-
-    // Read the version
-    Q_INT32 version;
-    stream >> version;
-    if ( version < 100 )
-        return XXX_BAD_FILE_TOO_OLD;
-    if ( version > 123 )
-        return XXX_BAD_FILE_TOO_NEW;
-    if ( version <= 110 )
-        stream.setVersion(1);
-
-    // Read the data
-    stream >> [lots of interesting data];
-    if ( version > 120 )
-        stream >> [data new in XXX version 1.2];
-    stream >> [other interesting data];
-    
                  
- 
-
                   You can select which byte order to use when serializing data. The
-default setting is big endian (MSB first). Changing it to little
-endian breaks the portability (unless the reader also changes to
-little endian). We recommend keeping this setting unless you have
-special requirements.
-
                   
-
                   Reading and writing raw binary data
-
                  
-
                   You may wish to read/write your own raw binary data to/from the
-data stream directly. Data may be read from the stream into a
-preallocated char* using readRawBytes(). Similarly data can be
-written to the stream using writeRawBytes(). Notice that any
-encoding/decoding of the data must be done by you.
-
                   A similar pair of functions is readBytes() and writeBytes(). These
-differ from their raw counterparts as follows: readBytes()
-reads a Q_UINT32 which is taken to be the length of the data to be
-read, then that number of bytes is read into the preallocated
-char*; writeBytes() writes a Q_UINT32 containing the length of the
-data, followed by the data. Notice that any encoding/decoding of
-the data (apart from the length Q_UINT32) must be done by you.
-
                   
                  See also TQTextStream, TQVariant, and Input/Output and Networking.
-
-
                  Member Type Documentation
                  
-
                  TQDataStream::ByteOrder
                  
-
-
                   The byte order used for reading/writing the data.
-
                    
-
                  • TQDataStream::BigEndian - the default
-
                  • TQDataStream::LittleEndian
-
                  
-
                  Member Function Documentation
                  
-
                  TQDataStream::TQDataStream ()
-
                  
-Constructs a data stream that has no IO device.
-
                   
                  See also setDevice().
-
-
                  TQDataStream::TQDataStream ( TQIODevice * d )
-
                  
-Constructs a data stream that uses the IO device d.
-
                   Warning: If you use TQSocket or TQSocketDevice as the IO device d
-for reading data, you must make sure that enough data is available
-on the socket for the operation to successfully proceed;
-TQDataStream does not have any means to handle or recover from
-short-reads.
-
                   
                  See also setDevice() and device().
-
-
                  TQDataStream::TQDataStream ( TQByteArray a, int mode )
-
                  
-Constructs a data stream that operates on a byte array, a,
-through an internal TQBuffer device. The mode is a
-TQIODevice::mode(), usually either IO_ReadOnly or IO_WriteOnly.
-
                   Example:
-
                  -    static char bindata[] = { 231, 1, 44, ... };
-    TQByteArray a;
-    a.setRawData( bindata, sizeof(bindata) );   // a points to bindata
-    TQDataStream stream( a, IO_ReadOnly );       // open on a's data
-    stream >> [something];                      // read raw bindata
-    a.resetRawData( bindata, sizeof(bindata) ); // finished
-    
                  
- 
-
                   The TQByteArray::setRawData() function is not for the inexperienced.
-
-
                  TQDataStream::~TQDataStream () [virtual]
-
                  
-Destroys the data stream.
-
                   The destructor will not affect the current IO device, unless it is
-an internal IO device processing a TQByteArray passed in the constructor, in which case the internal IO device is destroyed.
-
-
                  bool TQDataStream::atEnd () const
-
                  
-
-
                   Returns TRUE if the IO device has reached the end position (end of
-the stream or file) or if there is no IO device set; otherwise
-returns FALSE, i.e. if the current position of the IO device is
-before the end position.
-
                   
                  See also TQIODevice::atEnd().
-
-
                  int TQDataStream::byteOrder () const
-
                  
-
-
                   Returns the current byte order setting -- either BigEndian or
-LittleEndian.
-
                   
                  See also setByteOrder().
-
-
                  TQIODevice * TQDataStream::device () const
-
                  
-
-
                   Returns the IO device currently set.
-
                   
                  See also setDevice() and unsetDevice().
-
-
                  bool TQDataStream::eof () const
-
                  
-
                   This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                   Returns TRUE if the IO device has reached the end position (end of
-stream or file) or if there is no IO device set.
-
                   Returns FALSE if the current position of the read/write head of the IO
-device is somewhere before the end position.
-
                   
                  See also TQIODevice::atEnd().
-
-
                  bool TQDataStream::isPrintableData () const
-
                  
-
-
                   Returns TRUE if the printable data flag has been set; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                   
                  See also setPrintableData().
-
-
                  TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator<< ( Q_INT8 i )
-
                  
-Writes a signed byte, i, to the stream and returns a reference
-to the stream.
-
-
                  TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator<< ( Q_UINT8 i )
-
                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                   Writes an unsigned byte, i, to the stream and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
-
                  TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator<< ( Q_INT16 i )
-
                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                   Writes a signed 16-bit integer, i, to the stream and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
-
                  TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator<< ( Q_UINT16 i )
-
                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                   Writes an unsigned 16-bit integer, i, to the stream and returns
-a reference to the stream.
-
-
                  TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator<< ( Q_INT32 i )
-
                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                   Writes a signed 32-bit integer, i, to the stream and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
-
                  TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator<< ( Q_UINT32 i )
-
                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                   Writes an unsigned integer, i, to the stream as a 32-bit
-unsigned integer (Q_UINT32). Returns a reference to the stream.
-
-
                  TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator<< ( Q_INT64 i )
-
                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                   Writes a signed 64-bit integer, i, to the stream and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
-
                  TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator<< ( Q_UINT64 i )
-
                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                   Writes an unsigned 64-bit integer, i, to the stream and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
-
                  TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator<< ( Q_LONG i )
-
                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                   Writes a signed integer i, of the system's word length, to the
-stream and returns a reference to the stream.
-
-
                  TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator<< ( Q_ULONG i )
-
                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                   Writes an unsigned integer i, of the system's word length, to
-the stream and returns a reference to the stream.
-
-
                  TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator<< ( float f )
-
                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                   Writes a 32-bit floating point number, f, to the stream using
-the standard IEEE754 format. Returns a reference to the stream.
-
-
                  TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator<< ( double f )
-
                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                   Writes a 64-bit floating point number, f, to the stream using
-the standard IEEE754 format. Returns a reference to the stream.
-
-
                  TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator<< ( const char * s )
-
                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                   Writes the '\0'-terminated string s to the stream and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
                   The string is serialized using writeBytes().
-
-
                  TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator>> ( Q_INT8 & i )
-
                  
-Reads a signed byte from the stream into i, and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
-
                  TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator>> ( Q_UINT8 & i )
-
                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                   Reads an unsigned byte from the stream into i, and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
-
                  TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator>> ( Q_INT16 & i )
-
                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                   Reads a signed 16-bit integer from the stream into i, and
-returns a reference to the stream.
-
-
                  TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator>> ( Q_UINT16 & i )
-
                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                   Reads an unsigned 16-bit integer from the stream into i, and
-returns a reference to the stream.
-
-
                  TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator>> ( Q_INT32 & i )
-
                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                   Reads a signed 32-bit integer from the stream into i, and
-returns a reference to the stream.
-
-
                  TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator>> ( Q_UINT32 & i )
-
                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                   Reads an unsigned 32-bit integer from the stream into i, and
-returns a reference to the stream.
-
-
                  TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator>> ( Q_INT64 & i )
-
                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                   Reads a signed 64-bit integer from the stream into i, and
-returns a reference to the stream.
-
-
                  TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator>> ( Q_UINT64 & i )
-
                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                   Reads an unsigned 64-bit integer from the stream, into i, and
-returns a reference to the stream.
-
-
                  TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator>> ( Q_LONG & i )
-
                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                   Reads a signed integer of the system's word length from the stream
-into i, and returns a reference to the stream.
-
                   
-
                  TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator>> ( Q_ULONG & i )
-
                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                   Reads an unsigned integer of the system's word length from the
-stream, into i, and returns a reference to the stream.
-
-
                  TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator>> ( float & f )
-
                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                   Reads a 32-bit floating point number from the stream into f,
-using the standard IEEE754 format. Returns a reference to the
-stream.
-
-
                  TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator>> ( double & f )
-
                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                   Reads a 64-bit floating point number from the stream into f,
-using the standard IEEE754 format. Returns a reference to the
-stream.
-
-
                  TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator>> ( char *& s )
-
                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                   Reads the '\0'-terminated string s from the stream and returns
-a reference to the stream.
-
                   Space for the string is allocated using new -- the caller must
-destroy it with delete[].
-
-
                  TQDataStream & TQDataStream::readBytes ( char *& s, uint & l )
-
                  
-Reads the buffer s from the stream and returns a reference to
-the stream.
-
                   The buffer s is allocated using new. Destroy it with the delete[] operator. If the length is zero or s cannot be
-allocated, s is set to 0.
-
                   The l parameter will be set to the length of the buffer.
-
                   The serialization format is a Q_UINT32 length specifier first,
-then l bytes of data. Note that the data is not encoded.
-
                   
                  See also readRawBytes() and writeBytes().
-
-
                  TQDataStream & TQDataStream::readRawBytes ( char * s, uint len )
-
                  
-Reads len bytes from the stream into s and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
                   The buffer s must be preallocated. The data is not encoded.
-
                   
                  See also readBytes(), TQIODevice::readBlock(), and writeRawBytes().
-
-
                  void TQDataStream::setByteOrder ( int bo )
-
                  
-Sets the serialization byte order to bo.
-
                   The bo parameter can be TQDataStream::BigEndian or TQDataStream::LittleEndian.
-
                   The default setting is big endian. We recommend leaving this
-setting unless you have special requirements.
-
                   
                  See also byteOrder().
-
-
                  void TQDataStream::setDevice ( TQIODevice * d )
-
                  
-void TQDataStream::setDevice(TQIODevice *d )
-
                   Sets the IO device to d.
-
                   
                  See also device() and unsetDevice().
-
-
                  void TQDataStream::setPrintableData ( bool enable )
-
                  
-
-
                   If enable is TRUE, data will be output in a human readable
-format. If enable is FALSE, data will be output in a binary
-format.
-
                   If enable is TRUE, the write functions will generate output
-that consists of printable characters (7 bit ASCII). This output
-will typically be a lot larger than the default binary output, and
-consequently slower to write.
-
                   We recommend only enabling printable data for debugging purposes.
-
-
                  void TQDataStream::setVersion ( int v )
-
                  
-
-
                   Sets the version number of the data serialization format to v.
-
                   You don't need to set a version if you are using the current
-version of TQt.
-
                   In order to accommodate new functionality, the datastream
-serialization format of some TQt classes has changed in some
-versions of TQt. If you want to read data that was created by an
-earlier version of TQt, or write data that can be read by a program
-that was compiled with an earlier version of TQt, use this function
-to modify the serialization format of TQDataStream.
-
                   
                  
-
                   TQt Version         TQDataStream Version
-
                   TQt 3.3                 6
-
                   TQt 3.2                 5
-
                   TQt 3.1                 5
-
                   TQt 3.0                 4
-
                   TQt 2.1.x and TQt 2.2.x  3
-
                   TQt 2.0.x               2
-
                   TQt 1.x                 1
-
                  
-
                   
                  See also version().
-
-
                  void TQDataStream::unsetDevice ()
-
                  
-Unsets the IO device. This is the same as calling setDevice( 0 ).
-
                   
                  See also device() and setDevice().
-
-
                  int TQDataStream::version () const
-
                  
-
-
                   Returns the version number of the data serialization format. In TQt
-3.1, this number is 5.
-
                   
                  See also setVersion().
-
-
                  TQDataStream & TQDataStream::writeBytes ( const char * s, uint len )
-
                  
-Writes the length specifier len and the buffer s to the
-stream and returns a reference to the stream.
-
                   The len is serialized as a Q_UINT32, followed by len bytes
-from s. Note that the data is not encoded.
-
                   
                  See also writeRawBytes() and readBytes().
-
-
                  TQDataStream & TQDataStream::writeRawBytes ( const char * s, uint len )
-
                  
-Writes len bytes from s to the stream and returns a
-reference to the stream. The data is not encoded.
-
                   
                  See also writeBytes(), TQIODevice::writeBlock(), and readRawBytes().
-
-
-
                  
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                  
-
-
                  Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                  TQt 3.3.8
                  
-
                  
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qdatatable-h.html b/doc/html/qdatatable-h.html
index be5eb8b75..07a9bd350 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdatatable-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdatatable-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qdatatable.h Include File
+ntqdatatable.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                  
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                  TQDataTable Class Reference
                  [sql module]
                  
-
-
                  The TQDataTable class provides a flexible SQL table widget that supports browsing and editing.
-More...
-
                  #include <qdatatable.h>
-
                  Inherits TQTable.
-
                  List of all member functions.
-
                  Public Members
                  
-
-
                  Public Slots
                  
-
-
                  Signals
                  
-
-
                  Properties
                  
-
                    
-
                  • bool autoEdit - whether the data table automatically applies edits
                    • 
-
                  • bool confirmCancels - whether the data table confirms cancel operations
                    • 
-
                  • bool confirmDelete - whether the data table confirms delete operations
                    • 
-
                  • bool confirmEdits - whether the data table confirms edit operations
                    • 
-
                  • bool confirmInsert - whether the data table confirms insert operations
                    • 
-
                  • bool confirmUpdate - whether the data table confirms update operations
                    • 
-
                  • DateFormat dateFormat - the format used for displaying date/time values
                    • 
-
                  • TQString falseText - the text used to represent false values
                    • 
-
                  • TQString filter - the data filter for the data table
                    • 
-
                  • TQString nullText - the text used to represent NULL values
                    • 
-
                  • int numCols - the number of columns in the table  (read only)
                    • 
-
                  • int numRows - the number of rows in the table  (read only)
                    • 
-
                  • TQStringList sort - the data table's sort
                    • 
-
                  • TQString trueText - the text used to represent true values
                    • 
-
                  
-
                  Protected Members
                  
-
-
                  Detailed Description
                  
-
-
-The TQDataTable class provides a flexible SQL table widget that supports browsing and editing.
-
                   
-
-
-
                   TQDataTable supports various functions for presenting and editing
-SQL data from a TQSqlCursor in a table.
-
                   If you want a to present your data in a form use TQDataBrowser, or
-for read-only forms, TQDataView.
-
                   When displaying data, TQDataTable only retrieves data for visible
-rows. If the driver supports the 'query size' property the
-TQDataTable will have the correct number of rows and the vertical
-scrollbar will accurately reflect the number of rows displayed in
-proportion to the number of rows in the dataset. If the driver
-does not support the 'query size' property, rows are dynamically
-fetched from the database on an as-needed basis with the scrollbar
-becoming more accurate as the user scrolls down through the
-records. This allows extremely large queries to be displayed as
-tquickly as possible, with minimum memory usage.
-
                   TQDataTable inherits TQTable's API and extends it with functions to
-sort and filter the data and sort columns. See setSqlCursor(),
-setFilter(), setSort(), setSorting(), sortColumn() and refresh().
-
                   When displaying editable cursors, cell editing will be enabled.
-(For more information on editable cursors, see TQSqlCursor).
-TQDataTable can be used to modify existing data and to add new
-records. When a user makes changes to a field in the table, the
-cursor's edit buffer is used. The table will not send changes in
-the edit buffer to the database until the user moves to a
-different record in the grid or presses Enter. Cell editing is
-initiated by pressing F2 (or right clicking and then clicking the
-appropriate popup menu item) and canceled by pressing Esc. If
-there is a problem updating or adding data, errors are handled
-automatically (see handleError() to change this behavior). Note
-that if autoEdit() is FALSE navigating to another record will
-cancel the insert or update.
-
                   The user can be asked to confirm all edits with setConfirmEdits().
-For more precise control use setConfirmInsert(),
-setConfirmUpdate(), setConfirmDelete() and setConfirmCancels().
-Use setAutoEdit() to control the behaviour of the table when the
-user edits a record and then navigates. (Note that setAutoDelete()
-is unrelated; it is used to set whether the TQSqlCursor is deleted
-when the table is deleted.)
-
                   Since the data table can perform edits, it must be able to
-uniquely identify every record so that edits are correctly
-applied. Because of this the underlying cursor must have a valid
-primary index to ensure that a unique record is inserted, updated
-or deleted within the database otherwise the database may be
-changed to an inconsistent state.
-
                   TQDataTable creates editors using the default TQSqlEditorFactory.
-Different editor factories can be used by calling
-installEditorFactory(). A property map is used to map between the
-cell's value and the editor. You can use your own property map
-with installPropertyMap().
-
                   The contents of a cell is available as a TQString with text() or as
-a TQVariant with value(). The current record is returned by
-currentRecord(). Use the find() function to search for a string in
-the table.
-
                   Editing actions can be applied programatically. For example, the
-insertCurrent() function reads the fields from the current record
-into the cursor and performs the insert. The updateCurrent() and
-deleteCurrent() functions perform similarly to update and delete
-the current record respectively.
-
                   Columns in the table can be created automatically based on the
-cursor (see setSqlCursor()). Columns can be manipulated manually
-using addColumn(), removeColumn() and setColumn().
-
                   The table automatically copies many of the properties of the
-cursor to format the display of data within cells (alignment,
-visibility, etc.). The cursor can be changed with setSqlCursor().
-The filter (see setFilter()) and sort defined within the table are
-used instead of the filter and sort set on the cursor. For sorting
-options see setSort(), sortColumn(), sortAscending() and
-sortDescending(). Note that sorting operations will not behave as
-expected if you are using a TQSqlSelectCursor because it uses
-user-defined SQL queries to obtain data.
-
                   The text used to represent NULL, TRUE and FALSE values can be
-changed with setNullText(), setTrueText() and setFalseText()
-respectively. You can change the appearance of cells by
-reimplementing paintField().
-
                   Whenever a new row is selected in the table the currentChanged()
-signal is emitted. The primeInsert() signal is emitted when an
-insert is initiated. The primeUpdate() and primeDelete() signals
-are emitted when update and deletion are initiated respectively.
-Just before the database is updated a signal is emitted;
-beforeInsert(), beforeUpdate() or beforeDelete() as appropriate.
-
                   
                  See also Database Classes.
-
-
                  Member Type Documentation
                  
-
                  TQDataTable::Refresh
                  
-
-
                   This enum describes the refresh options.
-
                    
-
                  • TQDataTable::RefreshData - refresh the data, i.e. read it from the database
-
                  • TQDataTable::RefreshColumns - refresh the list of fields, e.g. the column headings
-
                  • TQDataTable::RefreshAll - refresh both the data and the list of fields
-
                  
-
                  Member Function Documentation
                  
-
                  TQDataTable::TQDataTable ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                  
-Constructs a data table which is a child of parent, called
-name name.
-
-
                  TQDataTable::TQDataTable ( TQSqlCursor * cursor, bool autoPopulate = FALSE, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                  
-Constructs a data table which is a child of parent, called name
-name using the cursor cursor.
-
                   If autoPopulate is TRUE (the default is FALSE), columns are
-automatically created based upon the fields in the cursor
-record. Note that autoPopulate only governs the creation of
-columns; to load the cursor's data into the table use refresh().
-
                   If the cursor is read-only, the table also becomes read-only.
-In addition, the table adopts the cursor's driver's definition for
-representing NULL values as strings.
-
-
                  TQDataTable::~TQDataTable ()
-
                  
-Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-
-
                  void TQDataTable::addColumn ( const TQString & fieldName, const TQString & label = TQString::null, int width = -1, const TQIconSet & iconset = TQIconSet ( ) ) [virtual]
-
                  
-Adds the next column to be displayed using the field fieldName,
-column label label, width width and iconset iconset.
-
                   If label is specified, it is used as the column's header label,
-otherwise the field's display label is used when setSqlCursor() is
-called. The iconset is used to set the icon used by the column
-header; by default there is no icon.
-
                   
                  See also setSqlCursor() and refresh().
-
-
                  Examples: sql/overview/subclass1/main.cpp, sql/overview/subclass3/main.cpp, sql/overview/table2/main.cpp, and sql/sqltable/main.cpp.
-
                  void TQDataTable::adjustColumn ( int col ) [virtual slot]
-
                  
-Resizes column col so that the column width is wide enough to
-display the widest item the column contains (including the column
-label). If the table's TQSqlCursor is not currently active, the
-cursor will be refreshed before the column width is calculated. Be
-aware that this function may be slow on tables that contain large
-result sets.
-
-
                  Reimplemented from TQTable.
-
                  bool TQDataTable::autoDelete () const
-
                  
-Returns TRUE if the table will automatically delete the cursor
-specified by setSqlCursor(); otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                  bool TQDataTable::autoEdit () const
-
                  Returns TRUE if the data table automatically applies edits; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "autoEdit" property for details.
-
                  void TQDataTable::beforeDelete ( TQSqlRecord * buf ) [signal]
-
                  
-
-
                   This signal is emitted just before the currently selected record
-is deleted from the database. The buf parameter points to the
-edit buffer being deleted. Connect to this signal to, for example,
-copy some of the fields for later use.
-
-
                  void TQDataTable::beforeInsert ( TQSqlRecord * buf ) [signal]
-
                  
-
-
                   This signal is emitted just before the cursor's edit buffer is
-inserted into the database. The buf parameter points to the
-edit buffer being inserted. Connect to this signal to, for
-example, populate a key field with a unique sequence number.
-
-
                  void TQDataTable::beforeUpdate ( TQSqlRecord * buf ) [signal]
-
                  
-
-
                   This signal is emitted just before the cursor's edit buffer is
-updated in the database. The buf parameter points to the edit
-buffer being updated. Connect to this signal when you want to
-transform the user's data behind-the-scenes.
-
-
                  bool TQDataTable::beginInsert () [virtual protected]
-
                  
-Protected virtual function called when editing is about to begin
-on a new record. If the table is read-only, or if there's no
-cursor or the cursor does not allow inserts, nothing happens.
-
                   Editing takes place using the cursor's edit buffer(see
-TQSqlCursor::editBuffer()).
-
                   When editing begins, a new row is created in the table marked with
-an asterisk '*' in the row's vertical header column, i.e. at the
-left of the row.
-
-
                  TQWidget * TQDataTable::beginUpdate ( int row, int col, bool replace ) [virtual protected]
-
                  
-Protected virtual function called when editing is about to begin
-on an existing row. If the table is read-only, or if there's no
-cursor, nothing happens.
-
                   Editing takes place using the cursor's edit buffer (see
-TQSqlCursor::editBuffer()).
-
                   row and col refer to the row and column in the TQDataTable.
-
                   (replace is provided for reimplementors and reflects the API of
-TQTable::beginEdit().)
-
-
                  TQSql::Confirm TQDataTable::confirmCancel ( TQSql::Op m ) [virtual protected]
-
                  
-Protected virtual function which returns a confirmation for
-cancelling an edit mode of m. Derived classes can reimplement
-this function to provide their own cancel dialog. The default
-implementation uses a message box which prompts the user to
-confirm the cancel.
-
-
                  bool TQDataTable::confirmCancels () const
-
                  Returns TRUE if the data table confirms cancel operations; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "confirmCancels" property for details.
-
                  bool TQDataTable::confirmDelete () const
-
                  Returns TRUE if the data table confirms delete operations; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "confirmDelete" property for details.
-
                  TQSql::Confirm TQDataTable::confirmEdit ( TQSql::Op m ) [virtual protected]
-
                  
-Protected virtual function which returns a confirmation for an
-edit of mode m. Derived classes can reimplement this function
-to provide their own confirmation dialog. The default
-implementation uses a message box which prompts the user to
-confirm the edit action.
-
-
                  bool TQDataTable::confirmEdits () const
-
                  Returns TRUE if the data table confirms edit operations; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "confirmEdits" property for details.
-
                  bool TQDataTable::confirmInsert () const
-
                  Returns TRUE if the data table confirms insert operations; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "confirmInsert" property for details.
-
                  bool TQDataTable::confirmUpdate () const
-
                  Returns TRUE if the data table confirms update operations; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "confirmUpdate" property for details.
-
                  void TQDataTable::currentChanged ( TQSqlRecord * record ) [signal]
-
                  
-
-
                   This signal is emitted whenever a new row is selected in the
-table. The record parameter points to the contents of the newly
-selected record.
-
-
                  TQSqlRecord * TQDataTable::currentRecord () const
-
                  
-Returns the currently selected record, or 0 if there is no current
-selection. The table owns the pointer, so do not delete it or
-otherwise modify it or the cursor it points to.
-
-
                  void TQDataTable::cursorChanged ( TQSql::Op mode ) [signal]
-
                  
-
-
                   This signal is emitted whenever the cursor record was changed due
-to an edit. The mode parameter is the type of edit that just
-took place.
-
-
                  DateFormat TQDataTable::dateFormat () const
-
                  Returns the format used for displaying date/time values.
-See the "dateFormat" property for details.
-
                  bool TQDataTable::deleteCurrent () [virtual protected]
-
                  
-For an editable table, issues a delete on the current cursor's
-primary index using the values of the currently selected row. If
-there is no current cursor or there is no current selection,
-nothing happens. If confirmEdits() or confirmDelete() is TRUE,
-confirmEdit() is called to confirm the delete. Returns TRUE if the
-delete succeeded; otherwise FALSE.
-
                   The underlying cursor must have a valid primary index to ensure
-that a unique record is deleted within the database otherwise the
-database may be changed to an inconsistent state.
-
-
                  TQString TQDataTable::falseText () const
-
                  Returns the text used to represent false values.
-See the "falseText" property for details.
-
                  int TQDataTable::fieldAlignment ( const TQSqlField * field ) [virtual protected]
-
                  
-Returns the alignment for field.
-
-
                  TQString TQDataTable::filter () const
-
                  Returns the data filter for the data table.
-See the "filter" property for details.
-
                  void TQDataTable::find ( const TQString & str, bool caseSensitive, bool backwards ) [virtual slot]
-
                  
-Searches the current cursor for a cell containing the string str starting at the current cell and working forwards (or
-backwards if backwards is TRUE). If the string is found, the
-cell containing the string is set as the current cell. If caseSensitive is FALSE the case of str will be ignored.
-
                   The search will wrap, i.e. if the first (or if backwards is TRUE,
-last) cell is reached without finding str the search will
-continue until it reaches the starting cell. If str is not
-found the search will fail and the current cell will remain
-unchanged.
-
-
                  void TQDataTable::handleError ( const TQSqlError & e ) [virtual protected]
-
                  
-Protected virtual function which is called when an error e has
-occurred on the current cursor(). The default implementation
-displays a warning message to the user with information about the
-error.
-
-
                  int TQDataTable::indexOf ( uint i ) const [protected]
-
                  
-Returns the index of the field within the current SQL query that
-is displayed in column i.
-
-
                  bool TQDataTable::insertCurrent () [virtual protected]
-
                  
-For an editable table, issues an insert on the current cursor
-using the values in the cursor's edit buffer. If there is no
-current cursor or there is no current "insert" row, nothing
-happens. If confirmEdits() or confirmInsert() is TRUE,
-confirmEdit() is called to confirm the insert. Returns TRUE if the
-insert succeeded; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                   The underlying cursor must have a valid primary index to ensure
-that a unique record is inserted within the database otherwise the
-database may be changed to an inconsistent state.
-
-
                  void TQDataTable::installEditorFactory ( TQSqlEditorFactory * f )
-
                  
-Installs a new SQL editor factory f. This enables the user to
-create and instantiate their own editors for use in cell editing.
-Note that TQDataTable takes ownership of this pointer, and will
-delete it when it is no longer needed or when
-installEditorFactory() is called again.
-
                   
                  See also TQSqlEditorFactory.
-
-
                  void TQDataTable::installPropertyMap ( TQSqlPropertyMap * m )
-
                  
-Installs a new property map m. This enables the user to create
-and instantiate their own property maps for use in cell editing.
-Note that TQDataTable takes ownership of this pointer, and will
-delete it when it is no longer needed or when installPropertMap()
-is called again.
-
                   
                  See also TQSqlPropertyMap.
-
-
                  TQString TQDataTable::nullText () const
-
                  Returns the text used to represent NULL values.
-See the "nullText" property for details.
-
                  int TQDataTable::numCols () const [virtual]
-
                  Returns the number of columns in the table.
-See the "numCols" property for details.
-
                  Reimplemented from TQTable.
-
                  int TQDataTable::numRows () const [virtual]
-
                  Returns the number of rows in the table.
-See the "numRows" property for details.
-
                  Reimplemented from TQTable.
-
                  void TQDataTable::paintField ( TQPainter * p, const TQSqlField * field, const TQRect & cr, bool selected ) [virtual protected]
-
                  
-Paints the field on the painter p. The painter has already
-been translated to the appropriate cell's origin where the field is to be rendered. cr describes the cell coordinates in
-the content coordinate system. The selected parameter is
-ignored.
-
                   If you want to draw custom field content you must reimplement
-paintField() to do the custom drawing. The default implementation
-renders the field value as text. If the field is NULL,
-nullText() is displayed in the cell. If the field is Boolean,
-trueText() or falseText() is displayed as appropriate.
-
-
                  Example: sql/overview/table4/main.cpp.
-
                  void TQDataTable::primeDelete ( TQSqlRecord * buf ) [signal]
-
                  
-
-
                   This signal is emitted after the cursor is primed for delete by
-the table, when a delete action is beginning on the table. The buf parameter points to the edit buffer being deleted. Connect to
-this signal in order to, for example, record auditing information
-on deletions.
-
-
                  void TQDataTable::primeInsert ( TQSqlRecord * buf ) [signal]
-
                  
-
-
                   This signal is emitted after the cursor is primed for insert by
-the table, when an insert action is beginning on the table. The buf parameter points to the edit buffer being inserted. Connect to
-this signal in order to, for example, prime the record buffer with
-default data values.
-
-
                  void TQDataTable::primeUpdate ( TQSqlRecord * buf ) [signal]
-
                  
-
-
                   This signal is emitted after the cursor is primed for update by
-the table, when an update action is beginning on the table. The buf parameter points to the edit buffer being updated. Connect to
-this signal in order to, for example, provide some visual feedback
-that the user is in 'edit mode'.
-
-
                  void TQDataTable::refresh () [virtual slot]
-
                  
-Refreshes the table. The cursor is refreshed using the current
-filter, the current sort, and the currently defined columns.
-Equivalent to calling refresh( TQDataTable::RefreshData ).
-
-
                  Examples: sql/overview/subclass1/main.cpp, sql/overview/table1/main.cpp, sql/overview/table2/main.cpp, and sql/sqltable/main.cpp.
-
                  void TQDataTable::refresh ( Refresh mode )
-
                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                   Refreshes the table. If there is no currently defined cursor (see
-setSqlCursor()), nothing happens. The mode parameter determines
-which type of refresh will take place.
-
                   
                  See also Refresh, setSqlCursor(), and addColumn().
-
-
                  void TQDataTable::removeColumn ( uint col ) [virtual]
-
                  
-Removes column col from the list of columns to be displayed. If
-col does not exist, nothing happens.
-
                   
                  See also TQSqlField.
-
-
                  void TQDataTable::reset () [protected]
-
                  
-Resets the table so that it displays no data.
-
                   
                  See also setSqlCursor().
-
-
                  void TQDataTable::setAutoDelete ( bool enable ) [virtual]
-
                  
-Sets the cursor auto-delete flag to enable. If enable is
-TRUE, the table will automatically delete the cursor specified by
-setSqlCursor(). If enable is FALSE (the default), the cursor
-will not be deleted.
-
-
                  void TQDataTable::setAutoEdit ( bool autoEdit ) [virtual]
-
                  Sets whether the data table automatically applies edits to autoEdit.
-See the "autoEdit" property for details.
-
                  void TQDataTable::setColumn ( uint col, const TQString & fieldName, const TQString & label = TQString::null, int width = -1, const TQIconSet & iconset = TQIconSet ( ) ) [virtual]
-
                  
-Sets the col column to display using the field fieldName,
-column label label, width width and iconset iconset.
-
                   If label is specified, it is used as the column's header label,
-otherwise the field's display label is used when setSqlCursor() is
-called. The iconset is used to set the icon used by the column
-header; by default there is no icon.
-
                   
                  See also setSqlCursor() and refresh().
-
-
                  void TQDataTable::setColumnWidth ( int col, int w ) [virtual slot]
-
                  
-Sets the column col to the width w. Note that unlike TQTable
-the TQDataTable is not immediately redrawn, you must call
-refresh(TQDataTable::RefreshColumns)
-yourself.
-
                   
                  See also refresh().
-
-
                  Reimplemented from TQTable.
-
                  void TQDataTable::setConfirmCancels ( bool confirm ) [virtual]
-
                  Sets whether the data table confirms cancel operations to confirm.
-See the "confirmCancels" property for details.
-
                  void TQDataTable::setConfirmDelete ( bool confirm ) [virtual]
-
                  Sets whether the data table confirms delete operations to confirm.
-See the "confirmDelete" property for details.
-
                  void TQDataTable::setConfirmEdits ( bool confirm ) [virtual]
-
                  Sets whether the data table confirms edit operations to confirm.
-See the "confirmEdits" property for details.
-
                  void TQDataTable::setConfirmInsert ( bool confirm ) [virtual]
-
                  Sets whether the data table confirms insert operations to confirm.
-See the "confirmInsert" property for details.
-
                  void TQDataTable::setConfirmUpdate ( bool confirm ) [virtual]
-
                  Sets whether the data table confirms update operations to confirm.
-See the "confirmUpdate" property for details.
-
                  void TQDataTable::setDateFormat ( const DateFormat f ) [virtual]
-
                  Sets the format used for displaying date/time values to f.
-See the "dateFormat" property for details.
-
                  void TQDataTable::setFalseText ( const TQString & falseText ) [virtual]
-
                  Sets the text used to represent false values to falseText.
-See the "falseText" property for details.
-
                  void TQDataTable::setFilter ( const TQString & filter ) [virtual]
-
                  Sets the data filter for the data table to filter.
-See the "filter" property for details.
-
                  void TQDataTable::setNullText ( const TQString & nullText ) [virtual]
-
                  Sets the text used to represent NULL values to nullText.
-See the "nullText" property for details.
-
                  void TQDataTable::setSize ( TQSqlCursor * sql ) [protected]
-
                  
-If the cursor's sql driver supports query sizes, the number of
-rows in the table is set to the size of the query. Otherwise, the
-table dynamically resizes itself as it is scrolled. If sql is
-not active, it is made active by issuing a select() on the cursor
-using the sql cursor's current filter and current sort.
-
-
                  void TQDataTable::setSort ( const TQStringList & sort ) [virtual]
-
                  Sets the data table's sort to sort.
-See the "sort" property for details.
-
                  void TQDataTable::setSort ( const TQSqlIndex & sort ) [virtual]
-
                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                   Sets the sort to be applied to the displayed data to sort. If
-there is no current cursor, nothing happens. A TQSqlIndex contains
-field names and their ordering (ASC or DESC); these are used to
-compose the ORDER BY clause.
-
                   
                  See also sort.
-
-
                  void TQDataTable::setSqlCursor ( TQSqlCursor * cursor = 0, bool autoPopulate = FALSE, bool autoDelete = FALSE ) [virtual]
-
                  
-Sets cursor as the data source for the table. To force the
-display of the data from cursor, use refresh(). If autoPopulate is TRUE, columns are automatically created based upon
-the fields in the cursor record. If autoDelete is TRUE (the
-default is FALSE), the table will take ownership of the cursor
-and delete it when appropriate. If the cursor is read-only, the
-table becomes read-only. The table adopts the cursor's driver's
-definition for representing NULL values as strings.
-
                   
                  See also refresh(), readOnly, setAutoDelete(), and TQSqlDriver::nullText().
-
-
                  void TQDataTable::setTrueText ( const TQString & trueText ) [virtual]
-
                  Sets the text used to represent true values to trueText.
-See the "trueText" property for details.
-
                  TQStringList TQDataTable::sort () const
-
                  Returns the data table's sort.
-See the "sort" property for details.
-
                  void TQDataTable::sortAscending ( int col ) [virtual slot]
-
                  
-Sorts column col in ascending order.
-
                   
                  See also sorting.
-
-
                  void TQDataTable::sortColumn ( int col, bool ascending = TRUE, bool wholeRows = FALSE ) [virtual]
-
                  
-Sorts column col in ascending order if ascending is TRUE
-(the default); otherwise sorts in descending order.
-
                   The wholeRows parameter is ignored; TQDataTable always sorts
-whole rows by the specified column.
-
-
                  Reimplemented from TQTable.
-
                  void TQDataTable::sortDescending ( int col ) [virtual slot]
-
                  
-Sorts column col in descending order.
-
                   
                  See also sorting.
-
-
                  TQSqlCursor * TQDataTable::sqlCursor () const
-
                  
-Returns the cursor used by the data table.
-
-
                  TQString TQDataTable::text ( int row, int col ) const [virtual]
-
                  
-Returns the text in cell row, col, or an empty string if the
-cell is empty. If the cell's value is NULL then nullText() will be
-returned. If the cell does not exist then TQString::null is
-returned.
-
-
                  Reimplemented from TQTable.
-
                  TQString TQDataTable::trueText () const
-
                  Returns the text used to represent true values.
-See the "trueText" property for details.
-
                  bool TQDataTable::updateCurrent () [virtual protected]
-
                  
-For an editable table, issues an update using the cursor's edit
-buffer. If there is no current cursor or there is no current
-selection, nothing happens. If confirmEdits() or confirmUpdate()
-is TRUE, confirmEdit() is called to confirm the update. Returns
-TRUE if the update succeeded; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                   The underlying cursor must have a valid primary index to ensure
-that a unique record is updated within the database otherwise the
-database may be changed to an inconsistent state.
-
-
                  TQVariant TQDataTable::value ( int row, int col ) const
-
                  
-Returns the value in cell row, col, or an invalid value if
-the cell does not exist or has no value.
-
-
                  Property Documentation
                  
-
                  bool autoEdit
                  
-
                  This property holds whether the data table automatically applies edits.
-
                  The default value for this property is TRUE. When the user begins
-an insert or update in the table there are two possible outcomes
-when they navigate to another record:
-
                   
                    
-
                  1.  the insert or update is is performed -- this occurs if autoEdit is TRUE
-
                  2.  the insert or update is abandoned -- this occurs if autoEdit is FALSE
-
                  
-
-
                  Set this property's value with setAutoEdit() and get this property's value with autoEdit().
-
                  bool confirmCancels
                  
-
                  This property holds whether the data table confirms cancel operations.
-
                  If the confirmCancel property is TRUE, all cancels must be
-confirmed by the user through a message box (this behavior can be
-changed by overriding the confirmCancel() function), otherwise all
-cancels occur immediately. The default is FALSE.
-
                   
                  See also confirmEdits and confirmCancel().
-
-
                  Set this property's value with setConfirmCancels() and get this property's value with confirmCancels().
-
                  bool confirmDelete
                  
-
                  This property holds whether the data table confirms delete operations.
-
                  If the confirmDelete property is TRUE, all deletions must be
-confirmed by the user through a message box (this behaviour can be
-changed by overriding the confirmEdit() function), otherwise all
-delete operations occur immediately.
-
                   
                  See also confirmCancels, confirmEdits, confirmUpdate, and confirmInsert.
-
-
                  Set this property's value with setConfirmDelete() and get this property's value with confirmDelete().
-
                  bool confirmEdits
                  
-
                  This property holds whether the data table confirms edit operations.
-
                  If the confirmEdits property is TRUE, the data table confirms all
-edit operations (inserts, updates and deletes). Finer control of
-edit confirmation can be achieved using confirmCancels, confirmInsert, confirmUpdate and confirmDelete.
-
                   
                  See also confirmCancels, confirmInsert, confirmUpdate, and confirmDelete.
-
-
                  Set this property's value with setConfirmEdits() and get this property's value with confirmEdits().
-
                  bool confirmInsert
                  
-
                  This property holds whether the data table confirms insert operations.
-
                  If the confirmInsert property is TRUE, all insertions must be
-confirmed by the user through a message box (this behaviour can be
-changed by overriding the confirmEdit() function), otherwise all
-insert operations occur immediately.
-
                   
                  See also confirmCancels, confirmEdits, confirmUpdate, and confirmDelete.
-
-
                  Set this property's value with setConfirmInsert() and get this property's value with confirmInsert().
-
                  bool confirmUpdate
                  
-
                  This property holds whether the data table confirms update operations.
-
                  If the confirmUpdate property is TRUE, all updates must be
-confirmed by the user through a message box (this behaviour can be
-changed by overriding the confirmEdit() function), otherwise all
-update operations occur immediately.
-
                   
                  See also confirmCancels, confirmEdits, confirmInsert, and confirmDelete.
-
-
                  Set this property's value with setConfirmUpdate() and get this property's value with confirmUpdate().
-
                  DateFormat dateFormat
                  
-
                  This property holds the format used for displaying date/time values.
-
                  The dateFormat property is used for displaying date/time values in
-the table. The default value is TQt::LocalDate.
-
-
                  Set this property's value with setDateFormat() and get this property's value with dateFormat().
-
                  TQString falseText
                  
-
                  This property holds the text used to represent false values.
-
                  The falseText property will be used to represent NULL values in
-the table. The default value is "False".
-
-
                  Set this property's value with setFalseText() and get this property's value with falseText().
-
                  TQString filter
                  
-
                  This property holds the data filter for the data table.
-
                  The filter applies to the data shown in the table. To view data
-with a new filter, use refresh(). A filter string is an SQL WHERE
-clause without the WHERE keyword.
-
                   There is no default filter.
-
                   
                  See also sort.
-
-
                   
-
                  Set this property's value with setFilter() and get this property's value with filter().
-
                  TQString nullText
                  
-
                  This property holds the text used to represent NULL values.
-
                  The nullText property will be used to represent NULL values in the
-table. The default value is provided by the cursor's driver.
-
-
                  Set this property's value with setNullText() and get this property's value with nullText().
-
                  int numCols
                  
-
                  This property holds the number of columns in the table.
-
                  
-
                  Get this property's value with numCols().
-
                  int numRows
                  
-
                  This property holds the number of rows in the table.
-
                  
-
                  Get this property's value with numRows().
-
                  TQStringList sort
                  
-
                  This property holds the data table's sort.
-
                  The table's sort affects the order in which data records are
-displayed in the table. To apply a sort, use refresh().
-
                   When examining the sort property, a string list is returned with
-each item having the form 'fieldname order' (e.g., 'id ASC',
-'surname DESC').
-
                   There is no default sort.
-
                   Note that if you want to iterate over the sort list, you should
-iterate over a copy, e.g.
-
                  -    TQStringList list = myDataTable.sort();
-    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    while( it != list.end() ) {
-        myProcessing( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-    
                  
- 
-
                   
                  See also filter and refresh().
-
-
                  Set this property's value with setSort() and get this property's value with sort().
-
                  TQString trueText
                  
-
                  This property holds the text used to represent true values.
-
                  The trueText property will be used to represent NULL values in the
-table. The default value is "True".
-
-
                  Set this property's value with setTrueText() and get this property's value with trueText().
-
-
                  
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                  
-
-
                  Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                  TQt 3.3.8
                  
-
                  
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qdataview-h.html b/doc/html/qdataview-h.html
index a4b604e15..45a7248c8 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdataview-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdataview-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qdataview.h Include File
+ntqdataview.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                  
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                  TQDataView Class Reference
                  [sql module]
                  
-
-
                  The TQDataView class provides read-only SQL forms.
-More...
-
                  #include <qdataview.h>
-
                  Inherits TQWidget.
-
                  List of all member functions.
-
                  Public Members
                  
-
                    
-
                  • TQDataView ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags fl = 0 )
                    • 
-
                  • ~TQDataView ()
                    • 
-
                  • virtual void setForm ( TQSqlForm * form )
                    • 
-
                  • TQSqlForm * form ()
                    • 
-
                  • virtual void setRecord ( TQSqlRecord * record )
                    • 
-
                  • TQSqlRecord * record ()
                    • 
-
                  
-
                  Public Slots
                  
-
-
                  Detailed Description
                  
-
-
-The TQDataView class provides read-only SQL forms.
-
                   
-
-
-
                   This class provides a form which displays SQL field data from a
-record buffer. Because TQDataView does not support editing it uses
-less resources than a TQDataBrowser. This class is well suited for
-displaying read-only data from a SQL database.
-
                   If you want a to present your data in an editable form use
-TQDataBrowser; if you want a table-based presentation of your data
-use TQDataTable.
-
                   The form is associated with the data view with setForm() and the
-record is associated with setRecord(). You can also pass a
-TQSqlRecord to the refresh() function which will set the record to
-the given record and read the record's fields into the form.
-
                  See also Database Classes.
-
-
                  Member Function Documentation
                  
-
                  TQDataView::TQDataView ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags fl = 0 )
-
                  
-Constructs a data view which is a child of parent, called name, and with widget flags fl.
-
-
                  TQDataView::~TQDataView ()
-
                  
-Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-
-
                  void TQDataView::clearValues () [virtual slot]
-
                  
-Clears the default form's values. If there is no default form,
-nothing happens. All the values are set to their 'zero state',
-e.g. 0 for numeric fields, "" for string fields.
-
-
                  TQSqlForm * TQDataView::form ()
-
                  
-Returns the default form used by the data view, or 0 if there is
-none.
-
                   
                  See also setForm().
-
-
                  void TQDataView::readFields () [virtual slot]
-
                  
-Causes the default form to read its fields from the record buffer.
-If there is no default form, or no record, nothing happens.
-
                   
                  See also setForm().
-
-
                  TQSqlRecord * TQDataView::record ()
-
                  
-Returns the default record used by the data view, or 0 if there is
-none.
-
                   
                  See also setRecord().
-
-
                  void TQDataView::refresh ( TQSqlRecord * buf ) [virtual slot]
-
                  
-Causes the default form to display the contents of buf. If
-there is no default form, nothing happens.The buf also becomes
-the default record for all subsequent calls to readFields() and
-writefields(). This slot is equivalant to calling:
-
                   
                  -    myView.setRecord( record );
-    myView.readFields();
-    
                  
- 
-
                   
                  See also setRecord() and readFields().
-
-
                  void TQDataView::setForm ( TQSqlForm * form ) [virtual]
-
                  
-Sets the form used by the data view to form. If a record has
-already been assigned to the data view, the form will display that
-record's data.
-
                   
                  See also form().
-
-
                  void TQDataView::setRecord ( TQSqlRecord * record ) [virtual]
-
                  
-Sets the record used by the data view to record. If a form has
-already been assigned to the data view, the form will display the
-data from record in that form.
-
                   
                  See also record().
-
-
                  void TQDataView::writeFields () [virtual slot]
-
                  
-Causes the default form to write its fields to the record buffer.
-If there is no default form, or no record, nothing happens.
-
                   
                  See also setForm().
-
-
-
                  
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                  
-
-
                  Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                  TQt 3.3.8
                  
-
                  
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qdate-members.html b/doc/html/qdate-members.html
index d18c96e39..592e357e8 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdate-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdate-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qdate.html b/doc/html/qdate.html
index 76768d112..2a1b5b22c 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdate.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdate.html
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                  The TQDate class provides date functions.
 More...
 
                  All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
                  
-
                  #include <qdatetime.h>
+
                  #include <ntqdatetime.h>
 
                  List of all member functions.
 
                  Public Members
                  
 
                    
@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ September 1752 (hence this is the earliest valid TQDate), and
 subsequently by most other Western countries, until 1923.
 
                     The end of time is reached around the year 8000, by which time we
 expect TQt to be obsolete.
-
                     
                    See also TQTime, TQDateTime, TQDateEdit, TQDateTimeEdit, and Time and Date.
+
                     
                    See also TQTime, TQDateTime, TQDateEdit, TQDateTimeEdit, and Time and Date.
 
 
                    Member Function Documentation
                    
 
                    TQDate::TQDate ()
@@ -158,18 +158,18 @@ Returns a TQDate object containing a date nyears later than the
 date of this object (or earlier if nyears is negative).
 
                     
                    See also addDays() and addMonths().
 
-
                    TQDate TQDate::currentDate ( TQt::TimeSpec ts ) [static]
+
                    TQDate TQDate::currentDate ( TQt::TimeSpec ts ) [static]
 
                    
 Returns the current date, as reported by the system clock, for the
 TimeSpec ts. The default TimeSpec is LocalTime.
-
                     
                    See also TQTime::currentTime(), TQDateTime::currentDateTime(), and TQt::TimeSpec.
+
                     
                    See also TQTime::currentTime(), TQDateTime::currentDateTime(), and TQt::TimeSpec.
 
 
                    Example: dclock/dclock.cpp.
 
                    TQDate TQDate::currentDate () [static]
 
                    
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 
                     Returns the current date, as reported by the system clock.
-
                     
                    See also TQTime::currentTime() and TQDateTime::currentDateTime().
+
                     
                    See also TQTime::currentTime() and TQDateTime::currentDateTime().
 
 
                    int TQDate::day () const
 
                    
@@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Returns the day of the month (1..31) of this date.
 
                     
                    See also year(), month(), and dayOfWeek().
 
 
                    Example: dclock/dclock.cpp.
-
                    TQString TQDate::dayName ( int weekday ) [static]
+
                    TQString TQDate::dayName ( int weekday ) [static]
 
                    
 
 This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
@@ -217,14 +217,14 @@ negative if d is earlier than this date).
  
 
                     
                    See also addDays().
 
-
                    TQDate TQDate::fromString ( const TQString & s, TQt::DateFormat f = TQt::TextDate ) [static]
+
                    TQDate TQDate::fromString ( const TQString & s, TQt::DateFormat f = TQt::TextDate ) [static]
 
                    
 Returns the TQDate represented by the string s, using the format
 f, or an invalid date if the string cannot be parsed.
-
                     Note for TQt::TextDate: It is recommended that you use the
+
                     Note for TQt::TextDate: It is recommended that you use the
 English short month names (e.g. "Jan"). Although localized month
 names can also be used, they depend on the user's locale settings.
-
                     Warning: TQt::LocalDate cannot be used here.
+
                     Warning: TQt::LocalDate cannot be used here.
 
 
                    bool TQDate::isNull () const
 
                    
@@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 Returns TRUE if the specified year y is a leap year; otherwise
 returns FALSE.
 
-
                    TQString TQDate::longDayName ( int weekday ) [static]
+
                    TQString TQDate::longDayName ( int weekday ) [static]
 
                    
 Returns the long name of the weekday.
 
                     1 = "Monday", 2 = "Tuesday", ... 7 = "Sunday"
@@ -268,7 +268,7 @@ Returns the long name of the weekday.
 settings.
 
                     
                    See also toString(), shortDayName(), shortMonthName(), and longMonthName().
 
-
                    TQString TQDate::longMonthName ( int month ) [static]
+
                    TQString TQDate::longMonthName ( int month ) [static]
 
                    
 Returns the long name of the month.
 
                     1 = "January", 2 = "February", ... 12 = "December"
@@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ Returns the month (January=1..December=12) of this date.
 
                     
                    See also year() and day().
 
 
                    Example: dclock/dclock.cpp.
-
                    TQString TQDate::monthName ( int month ) [static]
+
                    TQString TQDate::monthName ( int month ) [static]
 
                    
 
 This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
@@ -329,7 +329,7 @@ Sets the date's year y, month m and day d.
 1900..1999.
 
                     Returns TRUE if the date is valid; otherwise returns FALSE.
 
-
                    TQString TQDate::shortDayName ( int weekday ) [static]
+
                    TQString TQDate::shortDayName ( int weekday ) [static]
 
                    
 Returns the name of the weekday.
 
                     1 = "Mon", 2 = "Tue", ... 7 = "Sun"
@@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ Returns the name of the weekday.
 settings.
 
                     
                    See also toString(), shortMonthName(), longMonthName(), and longDayName().
 
-
                    TQString TQDate::shortMonthName ( int month ) [static]
+
                    TQString TQDate::shortMonthName ( int month ) [static]
 
                    
 Returns the name of the month.
 
                     1 = "Jan", 2 = "Feb", ... 12 = "Dec"
@@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ Returns the name of the month.
 settings.
 
                     
                    See also toString(), longMonthName(), shortDayName(), and longDayName().
 
-
                    TQString TQDate::toString ( const TQString & format ) const
+
                    TQString TQDate::toString ( const TQString & format ) const
 
                    
 Returns the date as a string. The format parameter determines
 the format of the result string.
@@ -379,27 +379,27 @@ Uses TQDate::longMonthName().
  dd.MM.yyyy	   20.07.1969
  ddd MMMM d yy  Sun July 20 69
 
    • 
-
     If the date is an invalid date, then TQString::null will be returned.
-
     
    See also TQDateTime::toString() and TQTime::toString().
+
     If the date is an invalid date, then TQString::null will be returned.
+
     
    See also TQDateTime::toString() and TQTime::toString().
 
 
     
-
    TQString TQDate::toString ( TQt::DateFormat f = TQt::TextDate ) const
+
    TQString TQDate::toString ( TQt::DateFormat f = TQt::TextDate ) const
 
    
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 
     Returns the date as a string. The f parameter determines the
 format of the string.
-
     If f is TQt::TextDate, the string format is "Sat May 20 1995"
+
     If f is TQt::TextDate, the string format is "Sat May 20 1995"
 (using the shortDayName() and shortMonthName() functions to
 generate the string, so the day and month names are locale
 specific).
-
     If f is TQt::ISODate, the string format corresponds to the
+
     If f is TQt::ISODate, the string format corresponds to the
 ISO 8601 specification for representations of dates, which is
 YYYY-MM-DD where YYYY is the year, MM is the month of the year
 (between 01 and 12), and DD is the day of the month between 01 and
 31.
-
     If f is TQt::LocalDate, the string format depends on the
+
     If f is TQt::LocalDate, the string format depends on the
 locale settings of the system.
-
     If the date is an invalid date, then TQString::null will be returned.
+
     If the date is an invalid date, then TQString::null will be returned.
 
     
    See also shortDayName() and shortMonthName().
 
 
    int TQDate::weekNumber ( int * yearNumber = 0 ) const
@@ -434,13 +434,13 @@ Returns the year (1752..8000) of this date.
 
     
    See also month() and day().
 
 
    Related Functions
    
-
    TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQDate & d )
+
    TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQDate & d )
 
    
 
 
     Writes the date, d, to the data stream, s.
 
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
 
-
    TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQDate & d )
+
    TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQDate & d )
 
    
 
 
     Reads a date from the stream s into d.
diff --git a/doc/html/qdateedit-members.html b/doc/html/qdateedit-members.html
index 573e3da20..e31b5e7cf 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdateedit-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdateedit-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -37,316 +37,316 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
    
 
 
    
diff --git a/doc/html/qdateedit.html b/doc/html/qdateedit.html
index 29ac63f63..b4f59d734 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdateedit.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdateedit.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
    The TQDateEdit class provides a date editor.
 More...
-
    #include <qdatetimeedit.h>
+
    #include <ntqdatetimeedit.h>
 
    Inherits TQDateTimeEditBase.
 
    List of all member functions.
 
    Public Members
    
@@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ character using TQDateTimeEditor::setSeparator(), by default the
 separator will be taken from the systems settings. If that is
 not possible, it defaults to "-".
 
     
    Date Time Widgets
     
-
     
    See also TQDate, TQTimeEdit, TQDateTimeEdit, Advanced Widgets, and Time and Date.
+
     
    See also TQDate, TQTimeEdit, TQDateTimeEdit, Advanced Widgets, and Time and Date.
 
 
    Member Type Documentation
    
 
    TQDateEdit::Order
    
@@ -135,12 +135,12 @@ date appear.
 not be used)
 
 
    Member Function Documentation
    
-
    TQDateEdit::TQDateEdit ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    TQDateEdit::TQDateEdit ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
 
    
 Constructs an empty date editor which is a child of parent and
 called name name.
 
-
    TQDateEdit::TQDateEdit ( const TQDate & date, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
    TQDateEdit::TQDateEdit ( const TQDate & date, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
 
    
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 
     Constructs a date editor with the initial value date, parent parent and called name.
@@ -180,14 +180,14 @@ See the "minValue" property for detai
 
    Order TQDateEdit::order () const
 
    Returns the order in which the year, month and day appear.
 See the "order" property for details.
-
    TQString TQDateEdit::sectionFormattedText ( int sec ) [virtual protected]
+
    TQString TQDateEdit::sectionFormattedText ( int sec ) [virtual protected]
 
    
 Returns the formatted number for section sec. This will
 correspond to either the year, month or day section, depending on
 the current display order.
 
     
    See also order.
 
-
    TQString TQDateEdit::separator () const
+
    TQString TQDateEdit::separator () const
 
    
 Returns the editor's separator.
 
@@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ See the "order" property for details.
 Sets the valid input range for the editor to be from min to max inclusive. If min is invalid no minimum date will be set.
 Similarly, if max is invalid no maximum date will be set.
 
-
    void TQDateEdit::setSeparator ( const TQString & s ) [virtual]
+
    void TQDateEdit::setSeparator ( const TQString & s ) [virtual]
 
    
 Sets the separator to s. Note that currently only the first
 character of s is used.
diff --git a/doc/html/qdatetime-h.html b/doc/html/qdatetime-h.html
index 44c382f52..877762691 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdatetime-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdatetime-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qdatetime.h Include File
+ntqdatetime.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
    TQDateTime Class Reference
    
-
-
    The TQDateTime class provides date and time functions.
-More...
-
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
-
    #include <qdatetime.h>
-
    List of all member functions.
-
    Public Members
    
-
      
-
    • TQDateTime ()
      • 
-
    • TQDateTime ( const TQDate & date )
      • 
-
    • TQDateTime ( const TQDate & date, const TQTime & time )
      • 
-
    • bool isNull () const
      • 
-
    • bool isValid () const
      • 
-
    • TQDate date () const
      • 
-
    • TQTime time () const
      • 
-
    • uint toTime_t () const
      • 
-
    • void setDate ( const TQDate & date )
      • 
-
    • void setTime ( const TQTime & time )
      • 
-
    • void setTime_t ( uint secsSince1Jan1970UTC )
      • 
-
    • void setTime_t ( uint secsSince1Jan1970UTC, TQt::TimeSpec ts )
      • 
-
    • TQString toString ( TQt::DateFormat f = TQt::TextDate ) const
      • 
-
    • TQString toString ( const TQString & format ) const
      • 
-
    • TQDateTime addDays ( int ndays ) const
      • 
-
    • TQDateTime addMonths ( int nmonths ) const
      • 
-
    • TQDateTime addYears ( int nyears ) const
      • 
-
    • TQDateTime addSecs ( int nsecs ) const
      • 
-
    • int daysTo ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
      • 
-
    • int secsTo ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
      • 
-
    • bool operator== ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
      • 
-
    • bool operator!= ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
      • 
-
    • bool operator< ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
      • 
-
    • bool operator<= ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
      • 
-
    • bool operator> ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
      • 
-
    • bool operator>= ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
      • 
-
    
-
    Static Public Members
    
-
-
    Related Functions
    
-
      
-
    • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQDateTime & dt )
      • 
-
    • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQDateTime & dt )
      • 
-
    
-
    Detailed Description
    
-
-
-
-The TQDateTime class provides date and time functions.
-
     
-
-
     A TQDateTime object contains a calendar date and a clock time (a
-"datetime"). It is a combination of the TQDate and TQTime classes.
-It can read the current datetime from the system clock. It
-provides functions for comparing datetimes and for manipulating a
-datetime by adding a number of seconds, days, months or years.
-
     A TQDateTime object is typically created either by giving a date
-and time explicitly in the constructor, or by using the static
-function currentDateTime(), which returns a TQDateTime object set
-to the system clock's time. The date and time can be changed with
-setDate() and setTime(). A datetime can also be set using the
-setTime_t() function, which takes a POSIX-standard "number of
-seconds since 00:00:00 on January 1, 1970" value. The fromString()
-function returns a TQDateTime given a string and a date format
-which is used to interpret the date within the string.
-
     The date() and time() functions provide access to the date and
-time parts of the datetime. The same information is provided in
-textual format by the toString() function.
-
     TQDateTime provides a full set of operators to compare two
-TQDateTime objects where smaller means earlier and larger means
-later.
-
     You can increment (or decrement) a datetime by a given number of
-seconds using addSecs() or days using addDays(). Similarly you can
-use addMonths() and addYears(). The daysTo() function returns the
-number of days between two datetimes, and secsTo() returns the
-number of seconds between two datetimes.
-
     The range of a datetime object is constrained to the ranges of the
-TQDate and TQTime objects which it embodies.
-
     
    See also TQDate, TQTime, TQDateTimeEdit, and Time and Date.
-
-
    Member Function Documentation
    
-
    TQDateTime::TQDateTime ()
-
    
-
-
     Constructs a null datetime (i.e. null date and null time). A null
-datetime is invalid, since the date is invalid.
-
     
    See also isValid().
-
-
    TQDateTime::TQDateTime ( const TQDate & date )
-
    
-Constructs a datetime with date date and null (but valid) time
-(00:00:00.000).
-
-
    TQDateTime::TQDateTime ( const TQDate & date, const TQTime & time )
-
    
-Constructs a datetime with date date and time time.
-
-
    TQDateTime TQDateTime::addDays ( int ndays ) const
-
    
-Returns a TQDateTime object containing a datetime ndays days
-later than the datetime of this object (or earlier if ndays is
-negative).
-
     
    See also daysTo(), addMonths(), addYears(), and addSecs().
-
-
    TQDateTime TQDateTime::addMonths ( int nmonths ) const
-
    
-Returns a TQDateTime object containing a datetime nmonths months
-later than the datetime of this object (or earlier if nmonths
-is negative).
-
     
    See also daysTo(), addDays(), addYears(), and addSecs().
-
-
    TQDateTime TQDateTime::addSecs ( int nsecs ) const
-
    
-Returns a TQDateTime object containing a datetime nsecs seconds
-later than the datetime of this object (or earlier if nsecs is
-negative).
-
     
    See also secsTo(), addDays(), addMonths(), and addYears().
-
-
    Example: listviews/listviews.cpp.
-
    TQDateTime TQDateTime::addYears ( int nyears ) const
-
    
-Returns a TQDateTime object containing a datetime nyears years
-later than the datetime of this object (or earlier if nyears is
-negative).
-
     
    See also daysTo(), addDays(), addMonths(), and addSecs().
-
-
    TQDateTime TQDateTime::currentDateTime ( TQt::TimeSpec ts ) [static]
-
    
-Returns the current datetime, as reported by the system clock, for the
-TimeSpec ts. The default TimeSpec is LocalTime.
-
     
    See also TQDate::currentDate(), TQTime::currentTime(), and TQt::TimeSpec.
-
-
    Example: listviews/listviews.cpp.
-
    TQDateTime TQDateTime::currentDateTime () [static]
-
    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
     Returns the current datetime, as reported by the system clock.
-
     
    See also TQDate::currentDate() and TQTime::currentTime().
-
-
    TQDate TQDateTime::date () const
-
    
-
-
     Returns the date part of the datetime.
-
     
    See also setDate() and time().
-
-
    int TQDateTime::daysTo ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
-
    
-Returns the number of days from this datetime to dt (which is
-negative if dt is earlier than this datetime).
-
     
    See also addDays() and secsTo().
-
-
    TQDateTime TQDateTime::fromString ( const TQString & s, TQt::DateFormat f = TQt::TextDate ) [static]
-
    
-Returns the TQDateTime represented by the string s, using the
-format f, or an invalid datetime if this is not possible.
-
     Note for TQt::TextDate: It is recommended that you use the
-English short month names (e.g. "Jan"). Although localized month
-names can also be used, they depend on the user's locale settings.
-
     Warning: Note that TQt::LocalDate cannot be used here.
-
-
    bool TQDateTime::isNull () const
-
    
-
-
     Returns TRUE if both the date and the time are null; otherwise
-returns FALSE. A null datetime is invalid.
-
     
    See also TQDate::isNull() and TQTime::isNull().
-
-
    bool TQDateTime::isValid () const
-
    
-
-
     Returns TRUE if both the date and the time are valid; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
     
    See also TQDate::isValid() and TQTime::isValid().
-
-
    bool TQDateTime::operator!= ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
-
    
-Returns TRUE if this datetime is different from dt; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
     
    See also operator==().
-
-
    bool TQDateTime::operator< ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
-
    
-Returns TRUE if this datetime is earlier than dt; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
-
    bool TQDateTime::operator<= ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
-
    
-Returns TRUE if this datetime is earlier than or equal to dt;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
    bool TQDateTime::operator== ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
-
    
-Returns TRUE if this datetime is equal to dt; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
     
    See also operator!=().
-
-
    bool TQDateTime::operator> ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
-
    
-Returns TRUE if this datetime is later than dt; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
-
    bool TQDateTime::operator>= ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
-
    
-Returns TRUE if this datetime is later than or equal to dt;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
    int TQDateTime::secsTo ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const
-
    
-Returns the number of seconds from this datetime to dt (which
-is negative if dt is earlier than this datetime).
-
     Example:
-
    -    TQDateTime dt = TQDateTime::currentDateTime();
-    TQDateTime xmas( TQDate(dt.date().year(),12,24), TQTime(17,00) );
-    qDebug( "There are %d seconds to Christmas", dt.secsTo(xmas) );
-    
    
- 
-
     
    See also addSecs(), daysTo(), and TQTime::secsTo().
-
-
    void TQDateTime::setDate ( const TQDate & date )
-
    
-
-
     Sets the date part of this datetime to date.
-
     
    See also date() and setTime().
-
-
    void TQDateTime::setTime ( const TQTime & time )
-
    
-
-
     Sets the time part of this datetime to time.
-
     
    See also time() and setDate().
-
-
    void TQDateTime::setTime_t ( uint secsSince1Jan1970UTC, TQt::TimeSpec ts )
-
    
-Sets the date and time to ts time (TQt::LocalTime or TQt::UTC) given the number of seconds that have passed since
-1970-01-01T00:00:00, Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). On systems
-that do not support timezones this function will behave as if
-local time were UTC.
-
     On Windows, only a subset of secsSince1Jan1970UTC values are
-supported, as Windows starts counting from 1980.
-
     
    See also toTime_t().
-
-
    void TQDateTime::setTime_t ( uint secsSince1Jan1970UTC )
-
    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
     Convenience function that sets the date and time to local time
-based on the given UTC time.
-
-
    TQTime TQDateTime::time () const
-
    
-
-
     Returns the time part of the datetime.
-
     
    See also setTime() and date().
-
-
    TQString TQDateTime::toString ( const TQString & format ) const
-
    
-Returns the datetime as a string. The format parameter
-determines the format of the result string.
-
     These expressions may be used for the date:
-
     
    
-
     Expression Output
-
     d the day as number without a leading zero (1-31)
-
     dd the day as number with a leading zero (01-31)
-
     ddd
-the abbreviated localized day name (e.g. 'Mon'..'Sun').
-Uses TQDate::shortDayName().
-
     dddd
-the long localized day name (e.g. 'Monday'..'Sunday').
-Uses TQDate::longDayName().
-
     M the month as number without a leading zero (1-12)
-
     MM the month as number with a leading zero (01-12)
-
     MMM
-the abbreviated localized month name (e.g. 'Jan'..'Dec').
-Uses TQDate::shortMonthName().
-
     MMMM
-the long localized month name (e.g. 'January'..'December').
-Uses TQDate::longMonthName().
-
     yy the year as two digit number (00-99)
-
     yyyy the year as four digit number (1752-8000)
-
    
-
     These expressions may be used for the time:
-
     
    
-
     Expression Output
-
     h
-the hour without a leading zero (0..23 or 1..12 if AM/PM display)
-
     hh
-the hour with a leading zero (00..23 or 01..12 if AM/PM display)
-
     m the minute without a leading zero (0..59)
-
     mm the minute with a leading zero (00..59)
-
     s the second whithout a leading zero (0..59)
-
     ss the second whith a leading zero (00..59)
-
     z the milliseconds without leading zeroes (0..999)
-
     zzz the milliseconds with leading zeroes (000..999)
-
     AP
-use AM/PM display. AP will be replaced by either "AM" or "PM".
-
     ap
-use am/pm display. ap will be replaced by either "am" or "pm".
-
    
-
     All other input characters will be ignored.
-
     Example format strings (assumed that the TQDateTime is
-21st May 2001 14:13:09)
-
     
    
-
     Format Result
-
     dd.MM.yyyy	     21.05.2001
-
     ddd MMMM d yy    Tue May 21 01
-
     hh:mm:ss.zzz     14:13:09.042
-
     h:m:s ap	     2:13:9 pm
-
    
-
     If the datetime is an invalid datetime, then TQString::null will be returned.
-
     
    See also TQDate::toString() and TQTime::toString().
-
-
    TQString TQDateTime::toString ( TQt::DateFormat f = TQt::TextDate ) const
-
    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
     Returns the datetime as a string. The f parameter determines
-the format of the string.
-
     If f is TQt::TextDate, the string format is "Wed May 20
-03:40:13 1998" (using TQDate::shortDayName(), TQDate::shortMonthName(),
-and TQTime::toString() to generate the string, so the day and month
-names will have localized names).
-
     If f is TQt::ISODate, the string format corresponds to the
-ISO 8601 extended specification for representations of dates and
-times, which is YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS.
-
     If f is TQt::LocalDate, the string format depends on the
-locale settings of the system.
-
     If the format f is invalid or the datetime is invalid, toString()
-returns a null string.
-
     
    See also TQDate::toString() and TQTime::toString().
-
-
    uint TQDateTime::toTime_t () const
-
    
-Returns the datetime as the number of seconds that have passed
-since 1970-01-01T00:00:00, Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
-
     On systems that do not support timezones, this function will
-behave as if local time were UTC.
-
     
    See also setTime_t().
-
-
    Related Functions
    
-
    TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQDateTime & dt )
-
    
-
-
     Writes the datetime dt to the stream s.
-
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
    TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQDateTime & dt )
-
    
-
-
     Reads a datetime from the stream s into dt.
-
     
    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
-
    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
-
-
    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
    TQt 3.3.8
    
-
    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qdatetimeedit-h.html b/doc/html/qdatetimeedit-h.html
index dc4d6efd5..9bb291b72 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdatetimeedit-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdatetimeedit-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qdatetimeedit.h Include File
+ntqdatetimeedit.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
    TQDateTimeEdit Class Reference
    
-
-
    The TQDateTimeEdit class combines a TQDateEdit and TQTimeEdit
-widget into a single widget for editing datetimes.
-More...
-
    #include <qdatetimeedit.h>
-
    Inherits TQWidget.
-
    List of all member functions.
-
    Public Members
    
-
-
    Public Slots
    
-
      
-
    • virtual void setDateTime ( const TQDateTime & dt )
      • 
-
    
-
    Signals
    
-
-
    Properties
    
-
      
-
    • TQDateTime dateTime - the editor's datetime value
      • 
-
    
-
    Detailed Description
    
-
-
-The TQDateTimeEdit class combines a TQDateEdit and TQTimeEdit
-widget into a single widget for editing datetimes.
-
     
-
-
-
     TQDateTimeEdit consists of a TQDateEdit and TQTimeEdit widget placed
-side by side and offers the functionality of both. The user can
-edit the date and time by using the keyboard or the arrow keys to
-increase/decrease date or time values. The Tab key can be used to
-move from section to section within the TQDateTimeEdit widget, and
-the user can be moved automatically when they complete a section
-using setAutoAdvance(). The datetime can be set with
-setDateTime().
-
     The date format is read from the system's locale settings. It is
-set to year, month, day order if that is not possible. See
-TQDateEdit::setOrder() to change this. Times appear in the order
-hours, minutes, seconds using the 24 hour clock.
-
     It is recommended that the TQDateTimeEdit is initialised with a
-datetime, e.g.
-
    -    TQDateTimeEdit *dateTimeEdit = new TQDateTimeEdit( TQDateTime::currentDateTime(), this );
-    dateTimeEdit->dateEdit()->setRange( TQDateTime::currentDate(),
-                                        TQDateTime::currentDate().addDays( 7 ) );
-    
    
- 
-Here we've created a new TQDateTimeEdit set to the current date and
-time, and set the date to have a minimum date of now and a maximum
-date of a week from now.
-
     Terminology: A TQDateEdit widget consists of three 'sections', one
-each for the year, month and day. Similarly a TQTimeEdit consists
-of three sections, one each for the hour, minute and second. The
-character that separates each date section is specified with
-setDateSeparator(); similarly setTimeSeparator() is used for the
-time sections.
-
     
    Date Time Widgets
     
-
     
    See also TQDateEdit, TQTimeEdit, Advanced Widgets, and Time and Date.
-
-
    Member Function Documentation
    
-
    TQDateTimeEdit::TQDateTimeEdit ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
    
-Constructs an empty datetime edit with parent parent and called
-name.
-
-
    TQDateTimeEdit::TQDateTimeEdit ( const TQDateTime & datetime, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
     Constructs a datetime edit with the initial value datetime,
-parent parent and called name.
-
-
    TQDateTimeEdit::~TQDateTimeEdit ()
-
    
-Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-
-
    bool TQDateTimeEdit::autoAdvance () const
-
    
-Returns TRUE if auto-advance is enabled, otherwise returns FALSE.
-
     
    See also setAutoAdvance().
-
-
    TQDateEdit * TQDateTimeEdit::dateEdit ()
-
    
-
-
     Returns the internal widget used for editing the date part of the
-datetime.
-
-
    TQDateTime TQDateTimeEdit::dateTime () const
-
    Returns the editor's datetime value.
-See the "dateTime" property for details.
-
    void TQDateTimeEdit::setAutoAdvance ( bool advance ) [virtual]
-
    
-Sets the auto advance property of the editor to advance. If set
-to TRUE, the editor will automatically advance focus to the next
-date or time section if the user has completed a section.
-
-
    void TQDateTimeEdit::setDateTime ( const TQDateTime & dt ) [virtual slot]
-
    Sets the editor's datetime value to dt.
-See the "dateTime" property for details.
-
    TQTimeEdit * TQDateTimeEdit::timeEdit ()
-
    
-
-
     Returns the internal widget used for editing the time part of the
-datetime.
-
-
    void TQDateTimeEdit::valueChanged ( const TQDateTime & datetime ) [signal]
-
    
-
-
     This signal is emitted every time the date or time changes. The datetime argument is the new datetime.
-
-
    Property Documentation
    
-
    TQDateTime dateTime
    
-
    This property holds the editor's datetime value.
-
    The datetime edit's datetime which may be an invalid datetime.
-
-
    Set this property's value with setDateTime() and get this property's value with dateTime().
-
-
    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
-
-
    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
    TQt 3.3.8
    
-
    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qdatetimeeditbase-members.html b/doc/html/qdatetimeeditbase-members.html
index 3517e93f5..81c5c5eb3 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdatetimeeditbase-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdatetimeeditbase-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -35,296 +35,296 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 TQDateTimeEditBase, including inherited members.
 
 
 
 
    
diff --git a/doc/html/qdatetimeeditbase.html b/doc/html/qdatetimeeditbase.html
index 86c838985..1599c158a 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdatetimeeditbase.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdatetimeeditbase.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
    The TQDateTimeEditBase class provides an abstraction for date and edit editors.
 More...
-
    #include <qdatetimeedit.h>
-
    Inherits TQWidget.
+
    #include <ntqdatetimeedit.h>
+
    Inherits TQWidget.
 
    Inherited by TQDateEdit and TQTimeEdit.
 
    List of all member functions.
 
    Detailed Description
    
diff --git a/doc/html/qdeepcopy-h.html b/doc/html/qdeepcopy-h.html
index a0248c391..b8547c4f2 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdeepcopy-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdeepcopy-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qdeepcopy.h Include File
+ntqdeepcopy.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
    TQDeepCopy Class Reference
    
-
-
    The TQDeepCopy class is a template class which ensures that
-implicitly shared and explicitly shared classes reference unique
-data.
-More...
-
    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
    
-
    #include <qdeepcopy.h>
-
    List of all member functions.
-
    Public Members
    
-
-
    Detailed Description
    
-
-
-The TQDeepCopy class is a template class which ensures that
-implicitly shared and explicitly shared classes reference unique
-data.
-
     
-
     
-
-
     Normally, shared copies reference the same data to optimize memory
-use and for maximum speed. In the example below, s1, s2, s3, s4 and s5 share data.
-
     
    -    // all 5 strings share the same data
-    TQString s1 = "abcd";
-    TQString s2 = s1;
-    TQString s3 = s2;
-    TQString s4 = s3;
-    TQString s5 = s2;
-    
    
- 
-
     TQDeepCopy can be used several ways to ensure that an object
-references unique, unshared data. In the example below, s1, s2 and s5 share data, while neither s3 nor s4 share data.
-
    -    // s1, s2 and s5 share the same data, neither s3 nor s4 are shared
-    TQString s1 = "abcd";
-    TQString s2 = s1;
-    TQDeepCopy<TQString> s3 = s2;  // s3 is a deep copy of s2
-    TQString s4 = s3;             // s4 is a deep copy of s3
-    TQString s5 = s2;
-    
    
- 
-
     In the example below, s1, s2 and s5 share data, and s3
-and s4 share data.
-
    -    // s1, s2 and s5 share the same data, s3 and s4 share the same data
-    TQString s1 = "abcd";
-    TQString s2 = s1;
-    TQString s3 = TQDeepCopy<TQString>( s2 );  // s3 is a deep copy of s2
-    TQString s4 = s3;                        // s4 is a shallow copy of s3
-    TQString s5 = s2;
-    
    
- 
-
     TQDeepCopy can also provide safety in multithreaded applications
-that use shared classes. In the example below, the variable global_string is used safely since the data contained in global_string is always a deep copy. This ensures that all threads
-get a unique copy of the data, and that any assignments to global_string will result in a deep copy.
-
     
    -    TQDeepCopy<TQString> global_string;  // global string data
-    TQMutex global_mutex;               // mutex to protext global_string
-
-    ...
-
-    void setGlobalString( const TQString &str )
-    {
-        global_mutex.lock();
-        global_string = str;           // global_string is a deep copy of str
-        global_mutex.unlock();
-    }
-
-    ...
-
-    void MyThread::run()
-    {
-        global_mutex.lock();
-        TQString str = global_string;          // str is a deep copy of global_string
-        global_mutex.unlock();
-
-        // process the string data
-        ...
-
-        // update global_string
-        setGlobalString( str );
-    }
-    
    
- 
-
     Warning: It is the application developer's responsibility to
-protect the object shared across multiple threads.
-
     The examples above use TQString, which is an implicitly shared
-class. The behavior of TQDeepCopy is the same when using explicitly
-shared classes like TQByteArray.
-
     Currently, TQDeepCopy works with the following classes:
-
    
-
     
    See also Thread Support in TQt, Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
-
-
    Member Function Documentation
    
-
    TQDeepCopy::TQDeepCopy ()
-
    
-
-
     Constructs an empty instance of type T.
-
-
    TQDeepCopy::TQDeepCopy ( const T & t )
-
    
-
-
     Constructs a deep copy of t.
-
-
    TQDeepCopy::operator T ()
-
    
-
-
     Returns a deep copy of the encapsulated data.
-
-
    TQDeepCopy<T> & TQDeepCopy::operator= ( const T & t )
-
    
-
-
     Assigns a deep copy of t.
-
-
-
    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
-
-
    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
    TQt 3.3.8
    
-
    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qdesktopwidget-h.html b/doc/html/qdesktopwidget-h.html
index 72ae49755..6f6c8c6a1 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdesktopwidget-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdesktopwidget-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qdesktopwidget.h Include File
+ntqdesktopwidget.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
    TQDesktopWidget Class Reference
    
-
-
    The TQDesktopWidget class provides access to screen information on multi-head systems.
-More...
-
    #include <qdesktopwidget.h>
-
    Inherits TQWidget.
-
    List of all member functions.
-
    Public Members
    
-
-
    Signals
    
-
-
    Detailed Description
    
-
-
-The TQDesktopWidget class provides access to screen information on multi-head systems.
-
     
-
-
     Systems with more than one graphics card and monitor can manage the
-physical screen space available either as multiple desktops, or as a
-large virtual desktop, which usually has the size of the bounding
-rectangle of all the screens (see isVirtualDesktop()). For an
-application, one of the available screens is the primary screen, i.e.
-the screen where the main widget resides (see primaryScreen()). All
-windows opened in the context of the application must be
-constrained to the boundaries of the primary screen; for example,
-it would be inconvenient if a dialog box popped up on a different
-screen, or split over two screens.
-
     The TQDesktopWidget provides information about the geometry of the
-available screens with screenGeometry(). The number of screens
-available is returned by numScreens(). The screen number that a
-particular point or widget is located in is returned by
-screenNumber().
-
     Widgets provided by TQt use this class, for example, to place
-tooltips, menus and dialog boxes according to the parent or
-application widget.
-
     Applications can use this class to save window positions, or to place
-child widgets on one screen.
-
     
    Managing Multiple Screens
     
-
     In the illustration above, Application One's primary screen is
-screen 0, and App Two's primary screen is screen 1.
-
     
    See also Advanced Widgets and Environment Classes.
-
-
    Member Function Documentation
    
-
    TQDesktopWidget::TQDesktopWidget ()
-
    
-Creates the desktop widget.
-
     If the system supports a virtual desktop, this widget will have
-the size of the virtual desktop; otherwise this widget will have
-the size of the primary screen.
-
     Instead of using TQDesktopWidget directly, use
-TQApplication::desktop().
-
-
    TQDesktopWidget::~TQDesktopWidget ()
-
    
-Destroy the object and free allocated resources.
-
-
    const TQRect & TQDesktopWidget::availableGeometry ( int screen = -1 ) const
-
    
-Returns the available geometry of the screen with index screen. What
-is available will be subrect of screenGeometry() based on what the
-platform decides is available (for example excludes the Dock and Menubar
-on Mac OS X, or the taskbar on Windows).
-
     
    See also screenNumber() and screenGeometry().
-
-
    const TQRect & TQDesktopWidget::availableGeometry ( TQWidget * widget ) const
-
    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
     Returns the available geometry of the screen which contains widget.
-
     
    See also screenGeometry().
-
-
    const TQRect & TQDesktopWidget::availableGeometry ( const TQPoint & p ) const
-
    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
     Returns the available geometry of the screen which contains p.
-
     
    See also screenGeometry().
-
-
    bool TQDesktopWidget::isVirtualDesktop () const
-
    
-Returns TRUE if the system manages the available screens in a
-virtual desktop; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
     For virtual desktops, screen() will always return the same widget.
-The size of the virtual desktop is the size of this desktop
-widget.
-
-
    int TQDesktopWidget::numScreens () const
-
    
-Returns the number of available screens.
-
     
    See also primaryScreen().
-
-
    int TQDesktopWidget::primaryScreen () const
-
    
-Returns the index of the primary screen.
-
     
    See also numScreens().
-
-
    void TQDesktopWidget::resized ( int screen ) [signal]
-
     
-This signal is emitted when the size of screen changes.
-
-
    TQWidget * TQDesktopWidget::screen ( int screen = -1 )
-
    
-Returns a widget that represents the screen with index screen.
-This widget can be used to draw directly on the desktop, using an
-unclipped painter like this:
-
     
    -    TQPainter paint( TQApplication::desktop()->screen( 0 ), TRUE );
-    paint.draw...
-    ...
-    paint.end();
-    
    
- 
-
     If the system uses a virtual desktop, the returned widget will
-have the geometry of the entire virtual desktop i.e. bounding
-every screen.
-
     
    See also primaryScreen(), numScreens(), and isVirtualDesktop().
-
-
    const TQRect & TQDesktopWidget::screenGeometry ( int screen = -1 ) const
-
    
-Returns the geometry of the screen with index screen.
-
     
    See also screenNumber().
-
-
    const TQRect & TQDesktopWidget::screenGeometry ( TQWidget * widget ) const
-
    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
     Returns the geometry of the screen which contains widget.
-
-
    const TQRect & TQDesktopWidget::screenGeometry ( const TQPoint & p ) const
-
    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
     Returns the geometry of the screen which contains p.
-
-
    int TQDesktopWidget::screenNumber ( TQWidget * widget = 0 ) const
-
    
-Returns the index of the screen that contains the largest
-part of widget, or -1 if the widget not on a screen.
-
     
    See also primaryScreen().
-
-
    int TQDesktopWidget::screenNumber ( const TQPoint & point ) const
-
    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
     Returns the index of the screen that contains point, or -1 if
-no screen contains the point.
-
     
    See also primaryScreen().
-
-
-
    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
-
-
    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
    TQt 3.3.8
    
-
    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qdial-h.html b/doc/html/qdial-h.html
index 25a4374b7..aa70dbf6b 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdial-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdial-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qdial.h Include File
+ntqdial.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
    TQDial Class Reference
    
-
-
    The TQDial class provides a rounded range control (like a speedometer or potentiometer).
-More...
-
    #include <qdial.h>
-
    Inherits TQWidget and TQRangeControl.
-
    List of all member functions.
-
    Public Members
    
-
-
    Public Slots
    
-
-
    Signals
    
-
-
    Properties
    
-
      
-
    • int lineStep - the current line step
      • 
-
    • int maxValue - the current maximum value
      • 
-
    • int minValue - the current minimum value
      • 
-
    • int notchSize - the current notch size  (read only)
      • 
-
    • double notchTarget - the target number of pixels between notches
      • 
-
    • bool notchesVisible - whether the notches are shown
      • 
-
    • int pageStep - the current page step
      • 
-
    • bool tracking - whether tracking is enabled
      • 
-
    • int value - the current dial value
      • 
-
    • bool wrapping - whether wrapping is enabled
      • 
-
    
-
    Protected Members
    
-
-
    Detailed Description
    
-
-
-
     The TQDial class provides a rounded range control (like a speedometer or potentiometer).
-
     
-
-
     TQDial is used when the user needs to control a value within a
-program-definable range, and the range either wraps around
-(typically, 0..359 degrees) or the dialog layout needs a square
-widget.
-
     Both API- and UI-wise, the dial is very similar to a slider. Indeed, when wrapping() is FALSE (the default)
-there is no real difference between a slider and a dial. They
-have the same signals, slots and member functions, all of which do
-the same things. Which one you use depends only on your taste
-and on the application.
-
     The dial initially emits valueChanged() signals continuously while
-the slider is being moved; you can make it emit the signal less
-often by calling setTracking(FALSE). dialMoved() is emitted
-continuously even when tracking() is FALSE.
-
     The slider also emits dialPressed() and dialReleased() signals
-when the mouse button is pressed and released. But note that the
-dial's value can change without these signals being emitted; the
-keyboard and wheel can be used to change the value.
-
     Unlike the slider, TQDial attempts to draw a "nice" number of
-notches rather than one per lineStep(). If possible, the number
-of notches drawn is one per lineStep(), but if there aren't enough
-pixels to draw every one, TQDial will draw every second, third
-etc., notch. notchSize() returns the number of units per notch,
-hopefully a multiple of lineStep(); setNotchTarget() sets the
-target distance between neighbouring notches in pixels. The
-default is 3.75 pixels.
-
     Like the slider, the dial makes the TQRangeControl functions
-setValue(), addLine(), subtractLine(), addPage() and
-subtractPage() available as slots.
-
     The dial's keyboard interface is fairly simple: The left/up and
-right/down arrow keys move by lineStep(), page up and page down by
-pageStep() and Home and End to minValue() and maxValue().
-
      
-
     
    See also TQScrollBar, TQSpinBox, GUI Design Handbook: Slider, and Basic Widgets.
-
-
    Member Function Documentation
    
-
    TQDial::TQDial ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
-
    
-Constructs a dial called name with parent parent. f is
-propagated to the TQWidget constructor. It has the default range of
-a TQRangeControl.
-
-
    TQDial::TQDial ( int minValue, int maxValue, int pageStep, int value, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
    
-Constructs a dial called name with parent parent. The dial's
-value can never be smaller than minValue or greater than maxValue. Its page step size is pageStep, and its initial value
-is value.
-
     value is forced to be within the legal range.
-
-
    TQDial::~TQDial ()
-
    
-Destroys the dial.
-
-
    void TQDial::addLine () [slot]
-
    
-Increments the dial's value() by one lineStep().
-
-
    void TQDial::addPage () [slot]
-
    
-Increments the dial's value() by one pageStep() of steps.
-
-
    void TQDial::dialMoved ( int value ) [signal]
-
    
-
-
     This signal is emitted whenever the dial value changes. The
-frequency of this signal is not influenced by setTracking().
-
     
    See also valueChanged().
-
-
    void TQDial::dialPressed () [signal]
-
    
-
-
     This signal is emitted when the user begins mouse interaction with
-the dial.
-
     
    See also dialReleased().
-
-
    void TQDial::dialReleased () [signal]
-
    
-
-
     This signal is emitted when the user ends mouse interaction with
-the dial.
-
     
    See also dialPressed().
-
-
    int TQDial::lineStep () const
-
    Returns the current line step.
-See the "lineStep" property for details.
-
    int TQDial::maxValue () const
-
    Returns the current maximum value.
-See the "maxValue" property for details.
-
    int TQDial::minValue () const
-
    Returns the current minimum value.
-See the "minValue" property for details.
-
    int TQDial::notchSize () const
-
    Returns the current notch size.
-See the "notchSize" property for details.
-
    double TQDial::notchTarget () const
-
    Returns the target number of pixels between notches.
-See the "notchTarget" property for details.
-
    bool TQDial::notchesVisible () const
-
    Returns TRUE if the notches are shown; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "notchesVisible" property for details.
-
    int TQDial::pageStep () const
-
    Returns the current page step.
-See the "pageStep" property for details.
-
    void TQDial::rangeChange () [virtual protected]
-
    
-Reimplemented to ensure tick-marks are consistent with the new range.
-
-
    Reimplemented from TQRangeControl.
-
    void TQDial::repaintScreen ( const TQRect * cr = 0 ) [virtual protected]
-
    
-Paints the dial using clip region cr.
-
-
    void TQDial::setLineStep ( int )
-
    Sets the current line step.
-See the "lineStep" property for details.
-
    void TQDial::setMaxValue ( int )
-
    Sets the current maximum value.
-See the "maxValue" property for details.
-
    void TQDial::setMinValue ( int )
-
    Sets the current minimum value.
-See the "minValue" property for details.
-
    void TQDial::setNotchTarget ( double ) [virtual]
-
    Sets the target number of pixels between notches.
-See the "notchTarget" property for details.
-
    void TQDial::setNotchesVisible ( bool b ) [virtual slot]
-
    Sets whether the notches are shown to b.
-See the "notchesVisible" property for details.
-
    void TQDial::setPageStep ( int )
-
    Sets the current page step.
-See the "pageStep" property for details.
-
    void TQDial::setTracking ( bool enable ) [virtual slot]
-
    Sets whether tracking is enabled to enable.
-See the "tracking" property for details.
-
    void TQDial::setValue ( int ) [virtual slot]
-
    Sets the current dial value.
-See the "value" property for details.
-
    void TQDial::setWrapping ( bool on ) [virtual slot]
-
    Sets whether wrapping is enabled to on.
-See the "wrapping" property for details.
-
    void TQDial::subtractLine () [slot]
-
    
-Decrements the dial's value() by one lineStep().
-
-
    void TQDial::subtractPage () [slot]
-
    
-Decrements the dial's value() by one pageStep() of steps.
-
-
    bool TQDial::tracking () const
-
    Returns TRUE if tracking is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "tracking" property for details.
-
    int TQDial::value () const
-
    Returns the current dial value.
-See the "value" property for details.
-
    void TQDial::valueChange () [virtual protected]
-
    
-Reimplemented to ensure the display is correct and to emit the
-valueChanged(int) signal when appropriate.
-
-
    Reimplemented from TQRangeControl.
-
    void TQDial::valueChanged ( int value ) [signal]
-
    
-
-
     This signal is emitted whenever the dial's value changes. The
-frequency of this signal is influenced by setTracking().
-
-
    bool TQDial::wrapping () const
-
    Returns TRUE if wrapping is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "wrapping" property for details.
-
    Property Documentation
    
-
    int lineStep
    
-
    This property holds the current line step.
-
    setLineStep() calls the virtual stepChange() function if the new
-line step is different from the previous setting.
-
     
    See also TQRangeControl::setSteps(), pageStep, and setRange().
-
-
    Set this property's value with setLineStep() and get this property's value with lineStep().
-
    int maxValue
    
-
    This property holds the current maximum value.
-
    When setting this property, the TQDial::minValue is adjusted if
-necessary to ensure that the range remains valid.
-
     
    See also setRange().
-
-
    Set this property's value with setMaxValue() and get this property's value with maxValue().
-
    int minValue
    
-
    This property holds the current minimum value.
-
    When setting this property, the TQDial::maxValue is adjusted if
-necessary to ensure that the range remains valid.
-
     
    See also setRange().
-
-
    Set this property's value with setMinValue() and get this property's value with minValue().
-
    int notchSize
    
-
    This property holds the current notch size.
-
    The notch size is in range control units, not pixels, and if
-possible it is a multiple of lineStep() that results in an
-on-screen notch size near notchTarget().
-
     
    See also notchTarget and lineStep.
-
-
    Get this property's value with notchSize().
-
    double notchTarget
    
-
    This property holds the target number of pixels between notches.
-
    The notch target is the number of pixels TQDial attempts to put
-between each notch.
-
     The actual size may differ from the target size.
-
-
    Set this property's value with setNotchTarget() and get this property's value with notchTarget().
-
    bool notchesVisible
    
-
    This property holds whether the notches are shown.
-
    If TRUE, the notches are shown. If FALSE (the default) notches are
-not shown.
-
-
    Set this property's value with setNotchesVisible() and get this property's value with notchesVisible().
-
    int pageStep
    
-
    This property holds the current page step.
-
    setPageStep() calls the virtual stepChange() function if the new
-page step is different from the previous setting.
-
     
    See also stepChange().
-
-
    Set this property's value with setPageStep() and get this property's value with pageStep().
-
    bool tracking
    
-
    This property holds whether tracking is enabled.
-
    If TRUE (the default), tracking is enabled. This means that the
-arrow can be moved using the mouse; otherwise the arrow cannot be
-moved with the mouse.
-
-
    Set this property's value with setTracking() and get this property's value with tracking().
-
    int value
    
-
    This property holds the current dial value.
-
    This is guaranteed to be within the range
-TQDial::minValue..TQDial::maxValue.
-
     
    See also minValue and maxValue.
-
-
    Set this property's value with setValue() and get this property's value with value().
-
    bool wrapping
    
-
    This property holds whether wrapping is enabled.
-
    If TRUE, wrapping is enabled. This means that the arrow can be
-turned around 360°. Otherwise there is some space at the bottom of
-the dial which is skipped by the arrow.
-
     This property's default is FALSE.
-
-
    Set this property's value with setWrapping() and get this property's value with wrapping().
-
-
    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
-
-
    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
    TQt 3.3.8
    
-
    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qdialog-h.html b/doc/html/qdialog-h.html
index 662001c05..65ad113ac 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdialog-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdialog-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qdialog.h Include File
+ntqdialog.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
    TQDialog Class Reference
    
-
-
    The TQDialog class is the base class of dialog windows.
-More...
-
    #include <qdialog.h>
-
    Inherits TQWidget.
-
    Inherited by TQColorDialog, TQErrorMessage, TQFileDialog, TQFontDialog, TQInputDialog, TQMessageBox, TQMotifDialog, TQProgressDialog, TQTabDialog, and TQWizard.
-
    List of all member functions.
-
    Public Members
    
-
-
    Public Slots
    
-
-
    Properties
    
-
      
-
    • bool modal - whether show() should pop up the dialog as modal or modeless
      • 
-
    • bool sizeGripEnabled - whether the size grip is enabled
      • 
-
    
-
    Protected Members
    
-
-
    Protected Slots
    
-
-
    Detailed Description
    
-
-
-The TQDialog class is the base class of dialog windows.
-
     
-
-
-
     A dialog window is a top-level window mostly used for short-term
-tasks and brief communications with the user. TQDialogs may be
-modal or modeless. TQDialogs support extensibility and can provide a return
-    value. They can have default
-    buttons. TQDialogs can also have a TQSizeGrip in their
-lower-right corner, using setSizeGripEnabled().
-
     Note that TQDialog uses the parent widget slightly differently from
-other classes in TQt. A dialog is always a top-level widget, but if
-it has a parent, its default location is centered on top of the
-parent's top-level widget (if it is not top-level itself). It will
-also share the parent's taskbar entry.
-
     
-
     Modal Dialogs
-
    
-
     A modal dialog is a dialog that blocks input to other
-visible windows in the same application. Users must finish
-interacting with the dialog and close it before they can access
-any other window in the application. Dialogs that are used to
-request a file name from the user or that are used to set
-application preferences are usually modal.
-
     The most common way to display a modal dialog is to call its
-exec() function. When the user closes the dialog, exec() will
-provide a useful return value. Typically we
-connect a default button, e.g. "OK", to the accept() slot and a
-"Cancel" button to the reject() slot, to get the dialog to close
-and return the appropriate value. Alternatively you can connect to
-the done() slot, passing it Accepted or Rejected.
-
     An alternative is to call setModal(TRUE), then show(). Unlike
-exec(), show() returns control to the caller immediately. Calling
-setModal(TRUE) is especially useful for progress dialogs, where
-the user must have the ability to interact with the dialog, e.g.
-to cancel a long running operation. If you use show() and
-setModal(TRUE) together you must call
-TQApplication::processEvents() periodically during processing to
-enable the user to interact with the dialog. (See TQProgressDialog.)
-
     
-
     Modeless Dialogs
-
    
-
     A modeless dialog is a dialog that operates
-independently of other windows in the same application. Find and
-replace dialogs in word-processors are often modeless to allow the
-user to interact with both the application's main window and with
-the dialog.
-
     Modeless dialogs are displayed using show(), which returns control
-to the caller immediately.
-
     
-
     Default button
-
    
-
     A dialog's default button is the button that's pressed when the
-user presses Enter (Return). This button is used to signify that
-the user accepts the dialog's settings and wants to close the
-dialog. Use TQPushButton::setDefault(), TQPushButton::isDefault()
-and TQPushButton::autoDefault() to set and control the dialog's
-default button.
-
     
-
     Escape Key
-
    
-
     If the user presses the Esc key in a dialog, TQDialog::reject()
-will be called. This will cause the window to close: the closeEvent cannot be ignored.
-
     
-
     Extensibility
-
    
-
     Extensibility is the ability to show the dialog in two ways: a
-partial dialog that shows the most commonly used options, and a
-full dialog that shows all the options. Typically an extensible
-dialog will initially appear as a partial dialog, but with a
-"More" toggle button. If the user presses the "More" button down,
-the full dialog will appear. The extension widget will be resized
-to its sizeHint(). If orientation is Horizontal the extension
-widget's height() will be expanded to the height() of the dialog.
-If the orientation is Vertical the extension widget's width()
-will be expanded to the width() of the dialog. Extensibility is
-controlled with setExtension(), setOrientation() and
-showExtension().
-
     
-
     Return value (modal dialogs)
-
    
-
     Modal dialogs are often used in situations where a return value is
-required, e.g. to indicate whether the user pressed "OK" or
-"Cancel". A dialog can be closed by calling the accept() or the
-reject() slots, and exec() will return Accepted or Rejected
-as appropriate. The exec() call returns the result of the dialog.
-The result is also available from result() if the dialog has not
-been destroyed. If the WDestructiveClose flag is set, the
-dialog is deleted after exec() returns.
-
     
-
     Examples
-
    
-
     A modal dialog.
-
     
-
-
            TQFileDialog *dlg = new TQFileDialog( workingDirectory,
-                TQString::null, 0, 0, TRUE );
-        dlg->setCaption( TQFileDialog::tr( "Open" ) );
-        dlg->setMode( TQFileDialog::ExistingFile );
-        TQString result;
-        if ( dlg->exec() == TQDialog::Accepted ) {
-            result = dlg->selectedFile();
-            workingDirectory = dlg->url();
-        }
-        delete dlg;
-        return result;
-
    
-
     A modeless dialog. After the show() call, control returns to the main
-event loop.
-
-
-
        int main( int argc, char **argv )
-    {
-        TQApplication a( argc, argv );
-
            int scale = 10;
-
            LifeDialog *life = new LifeDialog( scale );
-        a.setMainWidget( life );
-        life->setCaption("TQt Example - Life");
-        life->show();
-
            return a.exec();
-    }
-
    
-
     
    See also TQTabDialog, TQWidget, TQProgressDialog, GUI Design Handbook: Dialogs, Standard, Abstract Widget Classes, and Dialog Classes.
-
-
    Member Type Documentation
    
-
    TQDialog::DialogCode
     
-
     The value returned by a modal dialog.
-
      
-
    • TQDialog::Accepted
-
    • TQDialog::Rejected
-
     
-
    Member Function Documentation
    
-
    explicit TQDialog::TQDialog ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )
-
    
-Constructs a dialog called name, with parent parent.
-
     A dialog is always a top-level widget, but if it has a parent, its
-default location is centered on top of the parent. It will also
-share the parent's taskbar entry.
-
     The widget flags f are passed on to the TQWidget constructor.
-If, for example, you don't want a What's This button in the titlebar
-of the dialog, pass WStyle_Customize | WStyle_NormalBorder |
-WStyle_Title | WStyle_SysMenu in f.
-
     Warning: In TQt 3.2, the modal flag is obsolete. There is now a
-setModal() function that can be used for obtaining a modal behavior
-when calling show(). This is rarely needed, because modal dialogs
-are usually invoked using exec(), which ignores the modal flag.
-
     
    See also TQWidget::setWFlags() and TQt::WidgetFlags.
-
-
    TQDialog::~TQDialog ()
-
    
-Destroys the TQDialog, deleting all its children.
-
-
    void TQDialog::accept () [virtual protected slot]
-
    
-Hides the modal dialog and sets the result code to Accepted.
-
     
    See also reject() and done().
-
-
    Examples: chart/setdataform.cpp and distributor/distributor.ui.h.
-
    void TQDialog::done ( int r ) [virtual protected slot]
-
     Closes the dialog and sets its result code to r. If this dialog
-is shown with exec(), done() causes the local event loop to finish,
-and exec() to return r.
-
     As with TQWidget::close(), done() deletes the dialog if the WDestructiveClose flag is set. If the dialog is the application's
-main widget, the application terminates. If the dialog is the
-last window closed, the TQApplication::lastWindowClosed() signal is
-emitted.
-
     
    See also accept(), reject(), TQApplication::mainWidget(), and TQApplication::quit().
-
-
    int TQDialog::exec () [slot]
-
    
-Shows the dialog as a modal dialog,
-blocking until the user closes it. The function returns a DialogCode result.
-
     Users cannot interact with any other window in the same
-application until they close the dialog.
-
     
    See also show() and result().
-
-
    Examples: chart/chartform.cpp, dialog/mainwindow.cpp, i18n/main.cpp, network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h, network/networkprotocol/view.cpp, qdir/qdir.cpp, and wizard/main.cpp.
-
    TQWidget * TQDialog::extension () const
-
    
-Returns the dialog's extension or 0 if no extension has been
-defined.
-
     
    See also setExtension().
-
-
    bool TQDialog::isModal () const
-
    Returns TRUE if show() should pop up the dialog as modal or modeless; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "modal" property for details.
-
    bool TQDialog::isSizeGripEnabled () const
-
    Returns TRUE if the size grip is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "sizeGripEnabled" property for details.
-
    Orientation TQDialog::orientation () const
-
    
-Returns the dialog's extension orientation.
-
     
    See also setOrientation().
-
-
    void TQDialog::reject () [virtual protected slot]
-
    
-Hides the modal dialog and sets the result code to Rejected.
-
     
    See also accept() and done().
-
-
    int TQDialog::result () const
-
    
-
-
     Returns the modal dialog's result code, Accepted or Rejected.
-
     Do not call this function if the dialog was constructed with the WDestructiveClose flag.
-
-
    void TQDialog::setExtension ( TQWidget * extension )
-
    
-Sets the widget, extension, to be the dialog's extension,
-deleting any previous extension. The dialog takes ownership of the
-extension. Note that if 0 is passed any existing extension will be
-deleted.
-
     This function must only be called while the dialog is hidden.
-
     
    See also showExtension(), setOrientation(), and extension().
-
-
    void TQDialog::setModal ( bool modal )
-
    Sets whether show() should pop up the dialog as modal or modeless to modal.
-See the "modal" property for details.
-
    void TQDialog::setOrientation ( Orientation orientation )
-
    
-If orientation is Horizontal, the extension will be displayed
-to the right of the dialog's main area. If orientation is Vertical, the extension will be displayed below the dialog's main
-area.
-
     
    See also orientation() and setExtension().
-
-
    void TQDialog::setResult ( int i ) [protected]
-
    
-
-
     Sets the modal dialog's result code to i.
-
-
    void TQDialog::setSizeGripEnabled ( bool )
-
    Sets whether the size grip is enabled.
-See the "sizeGripEnabled" property for details.
-
    void TQDialog::show () [virtual]
-
    
-Shows the dialog as a modeless dialog.
-Control returns immediately to the calling code.
-
     The dialog will be modal or modeless according to the value
-of the modal property.
-
     
    See also exec() and modal.
-
-
    Examples: movies/main.cpp, regexptester/main.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, and sql/overview/form1/main.cpp.
-
    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
-
    void TQDialog::showExtension ( bool showIt ) [protected slot]
-
    
-If showIt is TRUE, the dialog's extension is shown; otherwise the
-extension is hidden.
-
     This slot is usually connected to the TQButton::toggled() signal
-of a TQPushButton.
-
     A dialog with a visible extension is not resizeable.
-
     
    See also show(), setExtension(), and setOrientation().
-
-
    Property Documentation
    
-
    bool modal
     
    This property holds whether show() should pop up the dialog as modal or modeless.
-
    By default, this property is false and show() pops up the dialog as
-modeless.
-
     exec() ignores the value of this property and always pops up the
-dialog as modal.
-
     
    See also show() and exec().
-
-
    Set this property's value with setModal() and get this property's value with isModal().
-
    bool sizeGripEnabled
    
-
    This property holds whether the size grip is enabled.
-
    A TQSizeGrip is placed in the bottom right corner of the dialog when this
-property is enabled. By default, the size grip is disabled.
-
-
    Set this property's value with setSizeGripEnabled() and get this property's value with isSizeGripEnabled().
-
-
    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
-
-
    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
    TQt 3.3.8
    
-
    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qdict-h.html b/doc/html/qdict-h.html
index 863f7f7f2..c0484d341 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdict-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdict-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qdict.h Include File
+ntqdict.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
    TQDict Class Reference
    
-
-
    The TQDict class is a template class that provides a
-dictionary based on TQString keys.
-More...
-
    #include <qdict.h>
-
    Inherits TQPtrCollection.
-
    List of all member functions.
-
    Public Members
    
-
      
-
    • TQDict ( int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE )
      • 
-
    • TQDict ( const TQDict<type> & dict )
      • 
-
    • ~TQDict ()
      • 
-
    • TQDict<type> & operator= ( const TQDict<type> & dict )
      • 
-
    • virtual uint count () const
      • 
-
    • uint size () const
      • 
-
    • bool isEmpty () const
      • 
-
    • void insert ( const TQString & key, const type * item )
      • 
-
    • void replace ( const TQString & key, const type * item )
      • 
-
    • bool remove ( const TQString & key )
      • 
-
    • type * take ( const TQString & key )
      • 
-
    • type * find ( const TQString & key ) const
      • 
-
    • type * operator[] ( const TQString & key ) const
      • 
-
    • virtual void clear ()
      • 
-
    • void resize ( uint newsize )
      • 
-
    • void statistics () const
      • 
-
    
-
    Important Inherited Members
    
-
-
    Protected Members
    
-
      
-
    • virtual TQDataStream & read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item )
      • 
-
    • virtual TQDataStream & write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item ) const
      • 
-
    
-
    Detailed Description
    
-
-
-The TQDict class is a template class that provides a
-dictionary based on TQString keys.
-
     
-
-
-
     
-
     TQMap is an STL-compatible alternative to this class.
-
     TQDict is implemented as a template class. Define a template
-instance TQDict<X> to create a dictionary that operates on
-pointers to X (X *).
-
     A dictionary is a collection of key-value pairs. The key is a
-TQString used for insertion, removal and lookup. The value is a
-pointer. Dictionaries provide very fast insertion and lookup.
-
     If you want to use non-Unicode, plain 8-bit char* keys, use the
-TQAsciiDict template. A TQDict has the same performance as a
-TQAsciiDict. If you want to have a dictionary that maps TQStrings to
-TQStrings use TQMap.
-
     The size() of the dictionary is very important. In order to get
-good performance, you should use a suitably large prime number.
-Suitable means equal to or larger than the maximum expected number
-of dictionary items. Size is set in the constructor but may be
-changed with resize().
-
     Items are inserted with insert(); 0 pointers cannot be inserted.
-Items are removed with remove(). All the items in a dictionary can
-be removed with clear(). The number of items in the dictionary is
-returned by count(). If the dictionary contains no items isEmpty()
-returns TRUE. You can change an item's value with replace(). Items
-are looked up with operator[](), or with find() which return a
-pointer to the value or 0 if the given key does not exist. You can
-take an item out of the dictionary with take().
-
     Calling setAutoDelete(TRUE) for a dictionary tells it to delete
-items that are removed. The default behaviour is not to delete
-items when they are removed.
-
     When an item is inserted, the key is converted (hashed) to an
-integer index into an internal hash array. This makes lookup very
-fast.
-
     Items with equal keys are allowed. When inserting two items with
-the same key, only the last inserted item will be accessible (last
-in, first out) until it is removed.
-
     The TQDictIterator class can traverse the dictionary, but only in
-an arbitrary order. Multiple iterators may independently traverse
-the same dictionary.
-
     When inserting an item into a dictionary, only the pointer is
-copied, not the item itself, i.e. a shallow copy is made. It is
-possible to make the dictionary copy all of the item's data (a
-deep copy) when an item is inserted. insert() calls the virtual
-function TQPtrCollection::newItem() for the item to be inserted.
-Inherit a dictionary and reimplement newItem() if you want deep
-copies.
-
     When removing a dictionary item, the virtual function
-TQPtrCollection::deleteItem() is called. TQDict's default
-implementation is to delete the item if auto-deletion is enabled.
-
     Example #1:
-
    -    TQDict<TQLineEdit> fields; // TQString keys, TQLineEdit* values
-    fields.insert( "forename", new TQLineEdit( this ) );
-    fields.insert( "surname", new TQLineEdit( this ) );
-
-    fields["forename"]->setText( "Homer" );
-    fields["surname"]->setText( "Simpson" );
-
-    TQDictIterator<TQLineEdit> it( fields ); // See TQDictIterator
-    for( ; it.current(); ++it )
-        cout << it.currentKey() << ": " << it.current()->text() << endl;
-    cout << endl;
-
-    if ( fields["forename"] && fields["surname"] )
-        cout << fields["forename"]->text() << " " 
-            << fields["surname"]->text() << endl;  // Prints "Homer Simpson"
-
-    fields.remove( "forename" ); // Does not delete the line edit
-    if ( ! fields["forename"] )
-        cout << "forename is not in the dictionary" << endl;
-    
    
- 
-In this example we use a dictionary to keep track of the line
-edits we're using. We insert each line edit into the dictionary
-with a unique name and then access the line edits via the
-dictionary. 
-
     Example #2:
-
    -    TQStringList styleList = TQStyleFactory::styles();
-    styleList.sort();
-    TQDict<int> letterDict( 17, FALSE );
-    for ( TQStringList::Iterator it = styleList.begin(); it != styleList.end(); ++it ) {
-        TQString styleName = *it;
-        TQString styleAccel = styleName;
-        if ( letterDict[styleAccel.left(1)] ) {
-            for ( uint i = 0; i < styleAccel.length(); i++ ) {
-                if ( ! letterDict[styleAccel.mid( i, 1 )] ) {
-                    styleAccel = styleAccel.insert( i, '&' );
-                    letterDict.insert(styleAccel.mid( i, 1 ), (const int *)1);
-                    break;
-                }
-            }
-        } else {
-            styleAccel = "&" + styleAccel;
-            letterDict.insert(styleAccel.left(1), (const int *)1);
-        }
-        (void) new TQAction( styleName, TQIconSet(), styleAccel, parent );
-    }
-    
    
- 
-In the example we are using the dictionary to provide fast random
-access to the keys, and we don't care what the values are. The
-example is used to generate a menu of TQStyles, each with a unique
-accelerator key (or no accelerator if there are no unused letters
-left).
-
     We first obtain the list of available styles, then sort them so
-that the menu items will be ordered alphabetically. Next we create
-a dictionary of int pointers. The keys in the dictionary are each
-one character long, representing letters that have been used for
-accelerators. We iterate through our list of style names. If the
-first letter of the style name is in the dictionary, i.e. has been
-used, we iterate over all the characters in the style name to see
-if we can find a letter that hasn't been used. If we find an
-unused letter we put the accelerator ampersand (&) in front of it
-and add that letter to the dictionary. If we can't find an unused
-letter the style will simply have no accelerator. If the first
-letter of the style name is not in the dictionary we use it for
-the accelerator and add it to the dictionary. Finally we create a
-TQAction for each style.
-
     
    See also TQDictIterator, TQAsciiDict, TQIntDict, TQPtrDict, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
-
-
    Member Function Documentation
    
-
    TQDict::TQDict ( int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE )
-
    
-
-
     Constructs a dictionary optimized for less than size entries.
-
     We recommend setting size to a suitably large prime number
-(e.g. a prime that's slightly larger than the expected number of
-entries). This makes the hash distribution better which will lead
-to faster lookup.
-
     If caseSensitive is TRUE (the default), keys which differ only
-by case are considered different.
-
-
    TQDict::TQDict ( const TQDict<type> & dict )
-
    
-
-
     Constructs a copy of dict.
-
     Each item in dict is inserted into this dictionary. Only the
-pointers are copied (shallow copy).
-
-
    TQDict::~TQDict ()
-
    
-
-
     Removes all items from the dictionary and destroys it. If
-setAutoDelete() is TRUE, each value is deleted. All iterators that
-access this dictionary will be reset.
-
     
    See also setAutoDelete().
-
-
    bool TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const
-
    
-
-
     Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE.
-
     
    See also setAutoDelete().
-
-
    void TQDict::clear () [virtual]
-
    
-
-
     Removes all items from the dictionary.
-
     The removed items are deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
-
     All dictionary iterators that operate on the dictionary are reset.
-
     
    See also remove(), take(), and setAutoDelete().
-
-
    Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
-
    uint TQDict::count () const [virtual]
-
    
-
-
     Returns the number of items in the dictionary.
-
     
    See also isEmpty().
-
-
    Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
-
    type * TQDict::find ( const TQString & key ) const
-
    
-
-
     Returns the item with key key, or 0 if the key does not exist
-in the dictionary.
-
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most
-recently inserted item will be found.
-
     Equivalent to the [] operator.
-
     
    See also operator[]().
-
-
    void TQDict::insert ( const TQString & key, const type * item )
-
    
-
-
     Inserts the key key with value item into the dictionary.
-
     Multiple items can have the same key, in which case only the last
-item will be accessible using operator[]().
-
     item may not be 0.
-
     
    See also replace().
-
-
    Example: themes/themes.cpp.
-
    bool TQDict::isEmpty () const
-
    
-
-
     Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty, i.e. count() == 0;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
     
    See also count().
-
-
    TQDict<type> & TQDict::operator= ( const TQDict<type> & dict )
-
    
-
-
     Assigns dict to this dictionary and returns a reference to this
-dictionary.
-
     This dictionary is first cleared, then each item in dict is
-inserted into this dictionary. Only the pointers are copied
-(shallow copy), unless newItem() has been reimplemented.
-
-
    type * TQDict::operator[] ( const TQString & key ) const
-
    
-
-
     Returns the item with key key, or 0 if the key does not
-exist in the dictionary.
-
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most
-recently inserted item will be found.
-
     Equivalent to the find() function.
-
     
    See also find().
-
-
    TQDataStream & TQDict::read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item ) [virtual protected]
-
    
-
-
     Reads a dictionary item from the stream s and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
     The default implementation sets item to 0.
-
     
    See also write().
-
-
    bool TQDict::remove ( const TQString & key )
-
    
-
-
     Removes the item with key from the dictionary. Returns TRUE if
-successful, i.e. if the item is in the dictionary; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the last item
-that was inserted will be removed.
-
     The removed item is deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
-
     All dictionary iterators that refer to the removed item will be
-set to point to the next item in the dictionary's traversal order.
-
     
    See also take(), clear(), and setAutoDelete().
-
-
    void TQDict::replace ( const TQString & key, const type * item )
-
    
-
-
     Replaces the value of the key, key with item.
-
     If the item does not already exist, it will be inserted.
-
     item may not be 0.
-
     Equivalent to:
-
    -        TQDict<char> dict;
-            ...
-        if ( dict.find( key ) )
-            dict.remove( key );
-        dict.insert( key, item );
-    
    
- 
-
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the last item
-that was inserted will be replaced.
-
     
    See also insert().
-
-
    void TQDict::resize ( uint newsize )
-
    
-
-
     Changes the size of the hash table to newsize. The contents of
-the dictionary are preserved, but all iterators on the dictionary
-become invalid.
-
-
    void TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )
-
    
-
-
     Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if enable is
-TRUE and to never delete them if enable is FALSE.
-
     If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are
-deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient
-if the collection has the only pointer to the items.
-
     The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be
-careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself
-with two collections deleting the same items.
-
     Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions
-in subclasses. For example, a subclass that has a remove()
-function will remove the item from its data structure, and if
-auto-delete is enabled, will also delete the item.
-
     
    See also autoDelete().
-
-
    Examples: grapher/grapher.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, and table/bigtable/main.cpp.
-
    uint TQDict::size () const
-
    
-
-
     Returns the size of the internal hash array (as specified in the
-constructor).
-
     
    See also count().
-
-
    void TQDict::statistics () const
-
    
-
-
     Debugging-only function that prints out the dictionary
-distribution using qDebug().
-
-
    type * TQDict::take ( const TQString & key )
-
    
-
-
     Takes the item with key out of the dictionary without deleting
-it (even if auto-deletion is enabled).
-
     If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the last item
-that was inserted will be taken.
-
     Returns a pointer to the item taken out, or 0 if the key does not
-exist in the dictionary.
-
     All dictionary iterators that refer to the taken item will be set
-to point to the next item in the dictionary traversal order.
-
     
    See also remove(), clear(), and setAutoDelete().
-
-
    TQDataStream & TQDict::write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item ) const [virtual protected]
-
    
-
-
     Writes a dictionary item to the stream s and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
     
    See also read().
-
-
-
    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
-
-
    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
    TQt 3.3.8
    
-
    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qdictiterator-members.html b/doc/html/qdictiterator-members.html
index db67d98da..17974617d 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdictiterator-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdictiterator-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qdictiterator.html b/doc/html/qdictiterator.html
index 1cee2bc5d..e4721dca7 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdictiterator.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdictiterator.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
    The TQDictIterator class provides an iterator for TQDict collections.
 More...
-
    #include <qdict.h>
+
    #include <ntqdict.h>
 
    List of all member functions.
 
    Public Members
    
 
      
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
      Detailed Description
      
 
 
-The TQDictIterator class provides an iterator for TQDict collections.
+The TQDictIterator class provides an iterator for TQDict collections.
 
       
 
 
       TQDictIterator is implemented as a template class. Define a
@@ -67,10 +67,10 @@ updates all iterators that are referring to the removed item to
 point to the next item in the (arbitrary) traversal order.
 
       Example:
 
      -    TQDict<TQLineEdit> fields;
-    fields.insert( "forename", new TQLineEdit( this ) );
-    fields.insert( "surname", new TQLineEdit( this ) );
-    fields.insert( "age", new TQLineEdit( this ) );
+    TQDict<TQLineEdit> fields;
+    fields.insert( "forename", new TQLineEdit( this ) );
+    fields.insert( "surname", new TQLineEdit( this ) );
+    fields.insert( "age", new TQLineEdit( this ) );
 
     fields["forename"]->setText( "Homer" );
     fields["surname"]->setText( "Simpson" );
@@ -90,10 +90,10 @@ point to the next item in the (arbitrary) traversal order.
 In the example we insert some pointers to line edits into a
 dictionary, then iterate over the dictionary printing the strings
 associated with the line edits.
-
       
      See also TQDict, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
       
      See also TQDict, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
 
 
      Member Function Documentation
      
-
      TQDictIterator::TQDictIterator ( const TQDict<type> & dict )
+
      TQDictIterator::TQDictIterator ( const TQDict<type> & dict )
 
      
 
 
       Constructs an iterator for dict. The current iterator item is
@@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ iterator is operating.
 
 
       Returns a pointer to the current iterator item's value.
 
-
      TQString TQDictIterator::currentKey () const
+
      TQString TQDictIterator::currentKey () const
 
      
 
 
       Returns the current iterator item's key.
diff --git a/doc/html/qdir-example.html b/doc/html/qdir-example.html
index df2b245f0..45d7982e3 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdir-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdir-example.html
@@ -46,26 +46,26 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 *****************************************************************************/
 
 #include "../dirview/dirview.h"
-#include "qdir.h"
-
-#include <qapplication.h>
-#include <qtextview.h>
-#include <qfileinfo.h>
-#include <qfile.h>
-#include <qtextstream.h>
-#include <qhbox.h>
-#include <qspinbox.h>
-#include <qlabel.h>
-#include <qmultilineedit.h>
-#include <qheader.h>
-#include <qevent.h>
-#include <qpainter.h>
-#include <qpopupmenu.h>
-#include <qpushbutton.h>
-#include <qtoolbutton.h>
-#include <qfile.h>
-#include <qtextstream.h>
-#include <qtooltip.h>
+#include "ntqdir.h"
+
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
+#include <ntqtextview.h>
+#include <ntqfileinfo.h>
+#include <ntqfile.h>
+#include <ntqtextstream.h>
+#include <ntqhbox.h>
+#include <ntqspinbox.h>
+#include <ntqlabel.h>
+#include <ntqmultilineedit.h>
+#include <ntqheader.h>
+#include <ntqevent.h>
+#include <ntqpainter.h>
+#include <ntqpopupmenu.h>
+#include <ntqpushbutton.h>
+#include <ntqtoolbutton.h>
+#include <ntqfile.h>
+#include <ntqtextstream.h>
+#include <ntqtooltip.h>
 
 #include <stdlib.h>
 
@@ -122,201 +122,201 @@ static const char *home[]={
 
 // ****************************************************************************************************
 
-PixmapView::PixmapView( TQWidget *parent )
-    : TQScrollView( parent )
+PixmapView::PixmapView( TQWidget *parent )
+    : TQScrollView( parent )
 {
-    viewport()->setBackgroundMode( PaletteBase );
+    viewport()->setBackgroundMode( PaletteBase );
 }
 
-void PixmapView::setPixmap( const TQPixmap &pix )
+void PixmapView::setPixmap( const TQPixmap &pix )
 {
     pixmap = pix;
-    resizeContents( pixmap.size().width(), pixmap.size().height() );
-    viewport()->repaint( FALSE );
+    resizeContents( pixmap.size().width(), pixmap.size().height() );
+    viewport()->repaint( FALSE );
 }
 
-void PixmapView::drawContents( TQPainter *p, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch )
+void PixmapView::drawContents( TQPainter *p, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch )
 {
-    p->fillRect( cx, cy, cw, ch, colorGroup().brush( TQColorGroup::Base ) );
-    p->drawPixmap( 0, 0, pixmap );
+    p->fillRect( cx, cy, cw, ch, colorGroup().brush( TQColorGroup::Base ) );
+    p->drawPixmap( 0, 0, pixmap );
 }
 
 // ****************************************************************************************************
 
-Preview::Preview( TQWidget *parent )
-    : TQWidgetStack( parent )
+Preview::Preview( TQWidget *parent )
+    : TQWidgetStack( parent )
 {
-    normalText = new TQMultiLineEdit( this );
-    normalText->setReadOnly( TRUE );
-    html = new TQTextView( this );
+    normalText = new TQMultiLineEdit( this );
+    normalText->setReadOnly( TRUE );
+    html = new TQTextView( this );
     pixmap = new PixmapView( this );
-    raiseWidget( normalText );
+    raiseWidget( normalText );
 }
 
-void Preview::showPreview( const TQUrl &u, int size )
+void Preview::showPreview( const TQUrl &u, int size )
 {
-    if ( u.isLocalFile() ) {
-        TQString path = u.path();
-        TQFileInfo fi( path );
-        if ( fi.isFile() && (int)fi.size() > size * 1000 ) {
-            normalText->setText( tr( "The File\n%1\nis too large, so I don't show it!" ).arg( path ) );
-            raiseWidget( normalText );
+    if ( u.isLocalFile() ) {
+        TQString path = u.path();
+        TQFileInfo fi( path );
+        if ( fi.isFile() && (int)fi.size() > size * 1000 ) {
+            normalText->setText( tr( "The File\n%1\nis too large, so I don't show it!" ).arg( path ) );
+            raiseWidget( normalText );
             return;
         }
 
-        TQPixmap pix( path );
-        if ( pix.isNull() ) {
-            if ( fi.isFile() ) {
-                TQFile f( path );
-                if ( f.open( IO_ReadOnly ) ) {
-                    TQTextStream ts( &f );
-                    TQString text = ts.read();
-                    f.close();
-                    if ( fi.extension().lower().contains( "htm" ) ) {
-                        TQString url = html->mimeSourceFactory()->makeAbsolute( path, html->context() );
-                        html->setText( text, url );
+        TQPixmap pix( path );
+        if ( pix.isNull() ) {
+            if ( fi.isFile() ) {
+                TQFile f( path );
+                if ( f.open( IO_ReadOnly ) ) {
+                    TQTextStream ts( &f );
+                    TQString text = ts.read();
+                    f.close();
+                    if ( fi.extension().lower().contains( "htm" ) ) {
+                        TQString url = html->mimeSourceFactory()->makeAbsolute( path, html->context() );
+                        html->setText( text, url );
                         raiseWidget( html );
                         return;
                     } else {
-                        normalText->setText( text );
+                        normalText->setText( text );
                         raiseWidget( normalText );
                         return;
                     }
                 }
             }
-            normalText->setText( TQString::null );
+            normalText->setText( TQString::null );
             raiseWidget( normalText );
         } else {
             pixmap->setPixmap( pix );
             raiseWidget( pixmap );
         }
     } else {
-        normalText->setText( "I only show local files!" );
+        normalText->setText( "I only show local files!" );
         raiseWidget( normalText );
     }
 }
 
 // ****************************************************************************************************
 
-PreviewWidget::PreviewWidget( TQWidget *parent )
-    : TQVBox( parent ), TQFilePreview()
+PreviewWidget::PreviewWidget( TQWidget *parent )
+    : TQVBox( parent ), TQFilePreview()
 {
     setSpacing( 5 );
     setMargin( 5 );
-    TQHBox *row = new TQHBox( this );
-    row->setSpacing( 5 );
-    (void)new TQLabel( tr( "Only show files smaller than: " ), row );
-    sizeSpinBox = new TQSpinBox( 1, 10000, 1, row );
-    sizeSpinBox->setSuffix( " KB" );
-    sizeSpinBox->setValue( 64 );
-    row->setFixedHeight( 10 + sizeSpinBox->sizeHint().height() );
+    TQHBox *row = new TQHBox( this );
+    row->setSpacing( 5 );
+    (void)new TQLabel( tr( "Only show files smaller than: " ), row );
+    sizeSpinBox = new TQSpinBox( 1, 10000, 1, row );
+    sizeSpinBox->setSuffix( " KB" );
+    sizeSpinBox->setValue( 64 );
+    row->setFixedHeight( 10 + sizeSpinBox->sizeHint().height() );
     preview = new Preview( this );
 }
 
-void PreviewWidget::previewUrl( const TQUrl &u )
+void PreviewWidget::previewUrl( const TQUrl &u )
 {
-    preview->showPreview( u, sizeSpinBox->value() );
+    preview->showPreview( u, sizeSpinBox->value() );
 }
 
 // ****************************************************************************************************
 
 CustomFileDialog::CustomFileDialog()
-    :  TQFileDialog( 0, 0, TRUE )
+    :  TQFileDialog( 0, 0, TRUE )
 {
-    setDir( "/" );
+    setDir( "/" );
 
     dirView = new DirectoryView( this, 0, TRUE );
-    dirView->addColumn( "" );
-    dirView->header()->hide();
+    dirView->addColumn( "" );
+    dirView->header()->hide();
     ::Directory *root = new ::Directory( dirView, "/" );
     root->setOpen( TRUE );
-    dirView->setFixedWidth( 150 );
+    dirView->setFixedWidth( 150 );
 
-    addLeftWidget( dirView );
+    addLeftWidget( dirView );
 
-    TQPushButton *p = new TQPushButton( this );
-    p->setPixmap( TQPixmap( bookmarks ) );
-    TQToolTip::add( p, tr( "Bookmarks" ) );
+    TQPushButton *p = new TQPushButton( this );
+    p->setPixmap( TQPixmap( bookmarks ) );
+    TQToolTip::add( p, tr( "Bookmarks" ) );
 
-    bookmarkMenu = new TQPopupMenu( this );
-    connect( bookmarkMenu, SIGNAL( activated( int ) ),
+    bookmarkMenu = new TQPopupMenu( this );
+    connect( bookmarkMenu, SIGNAL( activated( int ) ),
              this, SLOT( bookmarkChosen( int ) ) );
-    addId = bookmarkMenu->insertItem( tr( "Add bookmark" ) );
-    bookmarkMenu->insertSeparator();
+    addId = bookmarkMenu->insertItem( tr( "Add bookmark" ) );
+    bookmarkMenu->insertSeparator();
 
-    TQFile f( ".bookmarks" );
-    if ( f.open( IO_ReadOnly ) ) {
-        TQDataStream ds( &f );
+    TQFile f( ".bookmarks" );
+    if ( f.open( IO_ReadOnly ) ) {
+        TQDataStream ds( &f );
         ds >> bookmarkList;
-        f.close();
+        f.close();
 
         TQStringList::Iterator it = bookmarkList.begin();
         for ( ; it != bookmarkList.end(); ++it ) {
-            bookmarkMenu->insertItem( *it );
+            bookmarkMenu->insertItem( *it );
         }
     }
 
-    p->setPopup( bookmarkMenu );
+    p->setPopup( bookmarkMenu );
 
-    addToolButton( p, TRUE );
+    addToolButton( p, TRUE );
 
-    connect( dirView, SIGNAL( folderSelected( const TQString & ) ),
-             this, SLOT( setDir2( const TQString & ) ) );
-    connect( this, SIGNAL( dirEntered( const TQString & ) ),
-             dirView, SLOT( setDir( const TQString & ) ) );
+    connect( dirView, SIGNAL( folderSelected( const TQString & ) ),
+             this, SLOT( setDir2( const TQString & ) ) );
+    connect( this, SIGNAL( dirEntered( const TQString & ) ),
+             dirView, SLOT( setDir( const TQString & ) ) );
 
-    TQToolButton *b = new TQToolButton( this );
-    TQToolTip::add( b, tr( "Go Home!" ) );
-    b->setPixmap( TQPixmap( home ) );
-    connect( b, SIGNAL( clicked() ),
+    TQToolButton *b = new TQToolButton( this );
+    TQToolTip::add( b, tr( "Go Home!" ) );
+    b->setPixmap( TQPixmap( home ) );
+    connect( b, SIGNAL( clicked() ),
              this, SLOT( goHome() ) );
 
-    addToolButton( b );
+    addToolButton( b );
 
-    resize( width() + width() / 3, height() );
+    resize( width() + width() / 3, height() );
 }
 
 CustomFileDialog::~CustomFileDialog()
 {
     if ( !bookmarkList.isEmpty() ) {
-        TQFile f( ".bookmarks" );
-        if ( f.open( IO_WriteOnly ) ) {
-            TQDataStream ds( &f );
+        TQFile f( ".bookmarks" );
+        if ( f.open( IO_WriteOnly ) ) {
+            TQDataStream ds( &f );
             ds << bookmarkList;
-            f.close();
+            f.close();
         }
     }
 }
 
-void CustomFileDialog::setDir2( const TQString &s )
+void CustomFileDialog::setDir2( const TQString &s )
 {
-    blockSignals( TRUE );
-    setDir( s );
-    blockSignals( FALSE );
+    blockSignals( TRUE );
+    setDir( s );
+    blockSignals( FALSE );
 }
 
-void CustomFileDialog::showEvent( TQShowEvent *e )
+void CustomFileDialog::showEvent( TQShowEvent *e )
 {
-    TQFileDialog::showEvent( e );
-    dirView->setDir( dirPath() );
+    TQFileDialog::showEvent( e );
+    dirView->setDir( dirPath() );
 }
 
 void CustomFileDialog::bookmarkChosen( int i )
 {
     if ( i == addId ) {
         bookmarkList << dirPath();
-        bookmarkMenu->insertItem( dirPath() );
+        bookmarkMenu->insertItem( dirPath() );
     } else {
-        setDir( bookmarkMenu->text( i ) );
+        setDir( bookmarkMenu->text( i ) );
     }
 }
 
 void CustomFileDialog::goHome()
 {
     if ( getenv( "HOME" ) )
-        setDir( getenv( "HOME" ) );
+        setDir( getenv( "HOME" ) );
     else
-        setDir( "/" );
+        setDir( "/" );
 }
 
 // ****************************************************************************************************
@@ -324,14 +324,14 @@ void CustomFileDialog::goHome()
 int main( int argc, char ** argv )
 {
     TQFileDialog::Mode mode = TQFileDialog::ExistingFile;
-    TQString start;
-    TQString filter;
-    TQString caption;
+    TQString start;
+    TQString filter;
+    TQString caption;
     bool preview = FALSE;
     bool custom = FALSE;
-    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
+    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
     for (int i=1; i<argc; i++) {
-        TQString arg = argv[i];
+        TQString arg = argv[i];
         if ( arg == "-any" )
             mode = TQFileDialog::AnyFile;
         else if ( arg == "-dir" )
@@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ int main( int argc, char ** argv )
         else if ( arg == "-custom" )
             custom = TRUE;
         else if ( arg[0] == '-' ) {
-            qDebug("Usage: qdir [-any | -dir | -custom] [-preview] [-default f] {-filter f} [caption ...]\n"
+            qDebug("Usage: qdir [-any | -dir | -custom] [-preview] [-default f] {-filter f} [caption ...]\n"
                    "      -any         Get any filename, need not exist.\n"
                    "      -dir         Return a directory rather than a file.\n"
                    "      -custom      Opens a customized TQFileDialog with \n"
@@ -357,33 +357,33 @@ int main( int argc, char ** argv )
                    );
             return 1;
         } else {
-            if ( !caption.isNull() )
+            if ( !caption.isNull() )
                 caption += ' ';
             caption += arg;
         }
     }
 
     if ( !start )
-        start = TQDir::currentDirPath();
+        start = TQDir::currentDirPath();
 
     if ( !caption )
         caption = mode == TQFileDialog::Directory
                     ? "Choose directory..." : "Choose file...";
 
     if ( !custom ) {
-        TQFileDialog fd( TQString::null, filter, 0, 0, TRUE );
-        fd.setMode( mode );
+        TQFileDialog fd( TQString::null, filter, 0, 0, TRUE );
+        fd.setMode( mode );
         if ( preview ) {
-            fd.setContentsPreviewEnabled( TRUE );
+            fd.setContentsPreviewEnabled( TRUE );
             PreviewWidget *pw = new PreviewWidget( &fd );
-            fd.setContentsPreview( pw, pw );
-            fd.setViewMode( TQFileDialog::List );
-            fd.setPreviewMode( TQFileDialog::Contents );
+            fd.setContentsPreview( pw, pw );
+            fd.setViewMode( TQFileDialog::List );
+            fd.setPreviewMode( TQFileDialog::Contents );
         }
-        fd.setCaption( caption );
-        fd.setSelection( start );
-        if ( fd.exec() == TQDialog::Accepted ) {
-            TQString result = fd.selectedFile();
+        fd.setCaption( caption );
+        fd.setSelection( start );
+        if ( fd.exec() == TQDialog::Accepted ) {
+            TQString result = fd.selectedFile();
             printf("%s\n", (const char*)result);
             return 0;
         } else {
@@ -391,7 +391,7 @@ int main( int argc, char ** argv )
         }
     } else {
         CustomFileDialog fd;
-        fd.exec();
+        fd.exec();
         return 1;
     }
 }
diff --git a/doc/html/qdir-h.html b/doc/html/qdir-h.html
index 1213471ae..25f1cff5b 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdir-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdir-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qdir.h Include File
+ntqdir.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
      
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
      TQDir Class Reference
      
-
-
      The TQDir class provides access to directory structures and their contents in a platform-independent way.
-More...
-
      All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
      
-
      #include <qdir.h>
-
      List of all member functions.
-
      Public Members
      
-
        
-
      • enum FilterSpec { Dirs = 0x001, Files = 0x002, Drives = 0x004, NoSymLinks = 0x008, All = 0x007, TypeMask = 0x00F, Readable = 0x010, Writable = 0x020, Executable = 0x040, RWEMask = 0x070, Modified = 0x080, Hidden = 0x100, System = 0x200, AccessMask = 0x3F0, DefaultFilter = -1 }
        • 
-
      • enum SortSpec { Name = 0x00, Time = 0x01, Size = 0x02, Unsorted = 0x03, SortByMask = 0x03, DirsFirst = 0x04, Reversed = 0x08, IgnoreCase = 0x10, LocaleAware = 0x20, DefaultSort = -1 }
        • 
-
      • TQDir ()
        • 
-
      • TQDir ( const TQString & path, const TQString & nameFilter = TQString::null, int sortSpec = Name | IgnoreCase, int filterSpec = All )
        • 
-
      • TQDir ( const TQDir & d )
        • 
-
      • virtual ~TQDir ()
        • 
-
      • TQDir & operator= ( const TQDir & d )
        • 
-
      • TQDir & operator= ( const TQString & path )
        • 
-
      • virtual void setPath ( const TQString & path )
        • 
-
      • virtual TQString path () const
        • 
-
      • virtual TQString absPath () const
        • 
-
      • virtual TQString canonicalPath () const
        • 
-
      • virtual TQString dirName () const
        • 
-
      • virtual TQString filePath ( const TQString & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const
        • 
-
      • virtual TQString absFilePath ( const TQString & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const
        • 
-
      • virtual bool cd ( const TQString & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE )
        • 
-
      • virtual bool cdUp ()
        • 
-
      • TQString nameFilter () const
        • 
-
      • virtual void setNameFilter ( const TQString & nameFilter )
        • 
-
      • FilterSpec filter () const
        • 
-
      • virtual void setFilter ( int filterSpec )
        • 
-
      • SortSpec sorting () const
        • 
-
      • virtual void setSorting ( int sortSpec )
        • 
-
      • bool matchAllDirs () const
        • 
-
      • virtual void setMatchAllDirs ( bool enable )
        • 
-
      • uint count () const
        • 
-
      • TQString operator[] ( int index ) const
        • 
-
      • virtual TQStrList encodedEntryList ( int filterSpec = DefaultFilter, int sortSpec = DefaultSort ) const  (obsolete)
        • 
-
      • virtual TQStrList encodedEntryList ( const TQString & nameFilter, int filterSpec = DefaultFilter, int sortSpec = DefaultSort ) const  (obsolete)
        • 
-
      • virtual TQStringList entryList ( int filterSpec = DefaultFilter, int sortSpec = DefaultSort ) const
        • 
-
      • virtual TQStringList entryList ( const TQString & nameFilter, int filterSpec = DefaultFilter, int sortSpec = DefaultSort ) const
        • 
-
      • virtual const TQFileInfoList * entryInfoList ( int filterSpec = DefaultFilter, int sortSpec = DefaultSort ) const
        • 
-
      • virtual const TQFileInfoList * entryInfoList ( const TQString & nameFilter, int filterSpec = DefaultFilter, int sortSpec = DefaultSort ) const
        • 
-
      • virtual bool mkdir ( const TQString & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const
        • 
-
      • virtual bool rmdir ( const TQString & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const
        • 
-
      • virtual bool isReadable () const
        • 
-
      • virtual bool exists () const
        • 
-
      • virtual bool isRoot () const
        • 
-
      • virtual bool isRelative () const
        • 
-
      • virtual void convertToAbs ()
        • 
-
      • virtual bool operator== ( const TQDir & d ) const
        • 
-
      • virtual bool operator!= ( const TQDir & d ) const
        • 
-
      • virtual bool remove ( const TQString & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE )
        • 
-
      • virtual bool rename ( const TQString & oldName, const TQString & newName, bool acceptAbsPaths = TRUE )
        • 
-
      • virtual bool exists ( const TQString & name, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE )
        • 
-
      • void refresh () const
        • 
-
      
-
      Static Public Members
      
-
-
      Detailed Description
      
-
-
-
-The TQDir class provides access to directory structures and their contents in a platform-independent way.
-
       
-
-
       A TQDir is used to manipulate path names, access information
-regarding paths and files, and manipulate the underlying file
-system.
-
       A TQDir can point to a file using either a relative or an absolute
-path. Absolute paths begin with the directory separator "/"
-(optionally preceded by a drive specification under Windows). If
-you always use "/" as a directory separator, TQt will translate
-your paths to conform to the underlying operating system. Relative
-file names begin with a directory name or a file name and specify
-a path relative to the current directory.
-
       The "current" path refers to the application's working directory.
-A TQDir's own path is set and retrieved with setPath() and path().
-
       An example of an absolute path is the string "/tmp/quartz", a
-relative path might look like "src/fatlib". You can use the
-function isRelative() to check if a TQDir is using a relative or an
-absolute file path. Call convertToAbs() to convert a relative TQDir
-to an absolute one. For a simplified path use cleanDirPath(). To
-obtain a path which has no symbolic links or redundant ".."
-elements use canonicalPath(). The path can be set with setPath(),
-and changed with cd() and cdUp().
-
       TQDir provides several static functions, for example, setCurrent()
-to set the application's working directory and currentDirPath() to
-retrieve the application's working directory. Access to some
-common paths is provided with the static functions, current(),
-home() and root() which return TQDir objects or currentDirPath(),
-homeDirPath() and rootDirPath() which return the path as a string.
-If you want to know about your application's path use
-TQApplication::applicationDirPath().
-
       The number of entries in a directory is returned by count().
-Obtain a string list of the names of all the files and directories
-in a directory with entryList(). If you prefer a list of TQFileInfo
-pointers use entryInfoList(). Both these functions can apply a
-name filter, an attributes filter (e.g. read-only, files not
-directories, etc.), and a sort order. The filters and sort may be
-set with calls to setNameFilter(), setFilter() and setSorting().
-They may also be specified in the entryList() and
-entryInfoList()'s arguments.
-
       Create a new directory with mkdir(), rename a directory with
-rename() and remove an existing directory with rmdir(). Remove a
-file with remove(). You can interrogate a directory with exists(),
-isReadable() and isRoot().
-
       To get a path with a filename use filePath(), and to get a
-directory name use dirName(); neither of these functions checks
-for the existence of the file or directory.
-
       The list of root directories is provided by drives(); on Unix
-systems this returns a list containing one root directory, "/"; on
-Windows the list will usually contain "C:/", and possibly "D:/",
-etc.
-
       It is easiest to work with "/" separators in TQt code. If you need
-to present a path to the user or need a path in a form suitable
-for a function in the underlying operating system use
-convertSeparators().
-
       Examples:
-
       See if a directory exists.
-
      -    TQDir d( "example" );                        // "./example"
-    if ( !d.exists() )
-        qWarning( "Cannot find the example directory" );
-    
      
- 
-
       Traversing directories and reading a file.
-
      -    TQDir d = TQDir::root();                      // "/"
-    if ( !d.cd("tmp") ) {                       // "/tmp"
-        qWarning( "Cannot find the \"/tmp\" directory" );
-    } else {
-        TQFile f( d.filePath("ex1.txt") );       // "/tmp/ex1.txt"
-        if ( !f.open(IO_ReadWrite) )
-            qWarning( "Cannot create the file %s", f.name() );
-    }
-    
      
- 
-
       A program that lists all the files in the current directory
-(excluding symbolic links), sorted by size, smallest first:
-
      -    #include <stdio.h>
-    #include <qdir.h>
-
-    int main( int argc, char **argv )
-    {
-        TQDir d;
-        d.setFilter( TQDir::Files | TQDir::Hidden | TQDir::NoSymLinks );
-        d.setSorting( TQDir::Size | TQDir::Reversed );
-
-        const TQFileInfoList *list = d.entryInfoList();
-        TQFileInfoListIterator it( *list );
-        TQFileInfo *fi;
-
-        printf( "     Bytes Filename\n" );
-        while ( (fi = it.current()) != 0 ) {
-            printf( "%10li %s\n", fi->size(), fi->fileName().latin1() );
-            ++it;
-        }
-        return 0;
-    }
-    
      
- 
-
       
      See also TQApplication::applicationDirPath() and Input/Output and Networking.
-
-
      Member Type Documentation
      
-
      TQDir::FilterSpec
      
-
-
       This enum describes the filtering options available to TQDir, e.g.
-for entryList() and entryInfoList(). The filter value is specified
-by OR-ing together values from the following list:
-
        
-
      • TQDir::Dirs - List directories only.
-
      • TQDir::Files - List files only.
-
      • TQDir::Drives - List disk drives (ignored under Unix).
-
      • TQDir::NoSymLinks - Do not list symbolic links (ignored by operating
-systems that don't support symbolic links).
-
      • TQDir::All - List directories, files, drives and symlinks (this does not list
-broken symlinks unless you specify System).
-
      • TQDir::TypeMask - A mask for the the Dirs, Files, Drives and
-NoSymLinks flags.
-
      • TQDir::Readable - List files for which the application has read access.
-
      • TQDir::Writable - List files for which the application has write access.
-
      • TQDir::Executable - List files for which the application has execute
-access. Executables needs to be combined with Dirs or Files.
-
      • TQDir::RWEMask - A mask for the Readable, Writable and Executable flags.
-
      • TQDir::Modified - Only list files that have been modified (ignored
-under Unix).
-
      • TQDir::Hidden - List hidden files (on Unix, files starting with a .).
-
      • TQDir::System - List system files (on Unix, FIFOs, sockets and
-device files)
-
      • TQDir::AccessMask - A mask for the Readable, Writable, Executable
-Modified, Hidden and System flags
-
      • TQDir::DefaultFilter - Internal flag.
-
       If you do not set any of Readable, Writable or Executable, TQDir will set all three of them. This makes the
-default easy to write and at the same time useful.
-
       Examples: Readable|Writable means list all files for which the
-application has read access, write access or both. Dirs|Drives
-means list drives, directories, all files that the application can
-read, write or execute, and also symlinks to such
-files/directories.
-
-
      TQDir::SortSpec
      
-
-
       This enum describes the sort options available to TQDir, e.g. for
-entryList() and entryInfoList(). The sort value is specified by
-OR-ing together values from the following list:
-
        
-
      • TQDir::Name - Sort by name.
-
      • TQDir::Time - Sort by time (modification time).
-
      • TQDir::Size - Sort by file size.
-
      • TQDir::Unsorted - Do not sort.
-
      • TQDir::SortByMask - A mask for Name, Time and Size.
-
      • TQDir::DirsFirst - Put the directories first, then the files.
-
      • TQDir::Reversed - Reverse the sort order.
-
      • TQDir::IgnoreCase - Sort case-insensitively.
-
      • TQDir::LocaleAware - Sort names using locale aware compares
-
      • TQDir::DefaultSort - Internal flag.
-
       You can only specify one of the first four.
-
       If you specify both DirsFirst and Reversed, directories are
-still put first, but in reverse order; the files will be listed
-after the directories, again in reverse order.
-
-
      Member Function Documentation
      
-
      TQDir::TQDir ()
-
      
-Constructs a TQDir pointing to the current directory (".").
-
       
      See also currentDirPath().
-
-
      TQDir::TQDir ( const TQString & path, const TQString & nameFilter = TQString::null, int sortSpec = Name | IgnoreCase, int filterSpec = All )
-
      
-Constructs a TQDir with path path, that filters its entries by
-name using nameFilter and by attributes using filterSpec. It
-also sorts the names using sortSpec.
-
       The default nameFilter is an empty string, which excludes
-nothing; the default filterSpec is All, which also means
-exclude nothing. The default sortSpec is Name|IgnoreCase,
-i.e. sort by name case-insensitively.
-
       Example that lists all the files in "/tmp":
-
      -    TQDir d( "/tmp" );
-    for ( int i = 0; i < d.count(); i++ )
-        printf( "%s\n", d[i] );
-    
      
- 
-
       If path is "" or TQString::null, TQDir uses "." (the current
-directory). If nameFilter is "" or TQString::null, TQDir uses the
-name filter "*" (all files).
-
       Note that path need not exist.
-
       
      See also exists(), setPath(), setNameFilter(), setFilter(), and setSorting().
-
-
      TQDir::TQDir ( const TQDir & d )
-
      
-Constructs a TQDir that is a copy of the directory d.
-
       
      See also operator=().
-
-
      TQDir::~TQDir () [virtual]
-
      
-Destroys the TQDir frees up its resources.
-
-
      TQString TQDir::absFilePath ( const TQString & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const [virtual]
-
      
-Returns the absolute path name of a file in the directory. Does not check if the file actually exists in the directory. Redundant
-multiple separators or "." and ".." directories in fileName
-will not be removed (see cleanDirPath()).
-
       If acceptAbsPath is TRUE a fileName starting with a
-separator "/" will be returned without change. If acceptAbsPath
-is FALSE an absolute path will be prepended to the fileName and
-the resultant string returned.
-
       
      See also filePath().
-
-
      TQString TQDir::absPath () const [virtual]
-
      
-Returns the absolute path (a path that starts with "/" or with a
-drive specification), which may contain symbolic links, but never
-contains redundant ".", ".." or multiple separators.
-
       
      See also setPath(), canonicalPath(), exists(), cleanDirPath(), dirName(), and absFilePath().
-
-
      Example: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
-
      TQString TQDir::canonicalPath () const [virtual]
-
      
-Returns the canonical path, i.e. a path without symbolic links or
-redundant "." or ".." elements.
-
       On systems that do not have symbolic links this function will
-always return the same string that absPath() returns. If the
-canonical path does not exist (normally due to dangling symbolic
-links) canonicalPath() returns TQString::null.
-
       
      See also path(), absPath(), exists(), cleanDirPath(), dirName(), absFilePath(), and TQString::isNull().
-
-
      bool TQDir::cd ( const TQString & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) [virtual]
-
      
-Changes the TQDir's directory to dirName.
-
       If acceptAbsPath is TRUE a path starting with separator "/"
-will cause the function to change to the absolute directory. If acceptAbsPath is FALSE any number of separators at the beginning
-of dirName will be removed and the function will descend into
-dirName.
-
       Returns TRUE if the new directory exists and is readable;
-otherwise returns FALSE. Note that the logical cd() operation is
-not performed if the new directory does not exist.
-
       Calling cd( ".." ) is equivalent to calling cdUp().
-
       
      See also cdUp(), isReadable(), exists(), and path().
-
-
      Example: fileiconview/mainwindow.cpp.
-
      bool TQDir::cdUp () [virtual]
-
      
-Changes directory by moving one directory up from the TQDir's
-current directory.
-
       Returns TRUE if the new directory exists and is readable;
-otherwise returns FALSE. Note that the logical cdUp() operation is
-not performed if the new directory does not exist.
-
       
      See also cd(), isReadable(), exists(), and path().
-
-
      TQString TQDir::cleanDirPath ( const TQString & filePath ) [static]
-
      
-Removes all multiple directory separators "/" and resolves any
-"."s or ".."s found in the path, filePath.
-
       Symbolic links are kept. This function does not return the
-canonical path, but rather the simplest version of the input.
-For example, "./local" becomes "local", "local/../bin" becomes
-"bin" and "/local/usr/../bin" becomes "/local/bin".
-
       
      See also absPath() and canonicalPath().
-
-
      TQString TQDir::convertSeparators ( const TQString & pathName ) [static]
-
      
-Returns pathName with the '/' separators converted to
-separators that are appropriate for the underlying operating
-system.
-
       On Windows, convertSeparators("c:/winnt/system32") returns
-"c:\winnt\system32".
-
       The returned string may be the same as the argument on some
-operating systems, for example on Unix.
-
-
      Examples: dirview/dirview.cpp and fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
-
      void TQDir::convertToAbs () [virtual]
-
      
-Converts the directory path to an absolute path. If it is already
-absolute nothing is done.
-
       
      See also isRelative().
-
-
      uint TQDir::count () const
-
      
-Returns the total number of directories and files that were found.
-
       Equivalent to entryList().count().
-
       
      See also operator[]() and entryList().
-
-
      TQDir TQDir::current () [static]
-
      
-Returns the application's current directory.
-
       Use path() to access a TQDir object's path.
-
       
      See also currentDirPath() and TQDir::TQDir().
-
-
      TQString TQDir::currentDirPath () [static]
-
      
-Returns the absolute path of the application's current directory.
-
       
      See also current().
-
-
      Examples: dirview/dirview.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, and qdir/qdir.cpp.
-
      TQString TQDir::dirName () const [virtual]
-
      
-Returns the name of the directory; this is not the same as the
-path, e.g. a directory with the name "mail", might have the path
-"/var/spool/mail". If the directory has no name (e.g. it is the
-root directory) TQString::null is returned.
-
       No check is made to ensure that a directory with this name
-actually exists.
-
       
      See also path(), absPath(), absFilePath(), exists(), and TQString::isNull().
-
-
      const TQFileInfoList * TQDir::drives () [static]
-
      
-Returns a list of the root directories on this system. On Windows
-this returns a number of TQFileInfo objects containing "C:/", "D:/"
-etc. On other operating systems, it returns a list containing just
-one root directory (e.g. "/").
-
       The returned pointer is owned by TQt. Callers should not delete
-or modify it.
-
-
      Example: dirview/main.cpp.
-
      TQStrList TQDir::encodedEntryList ( int filterSpec = DefaultFilter, int sortSpec = DefaultSort ) const [virtual]
-
      
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
       This function is included to easy porting from TQt 1.x to TQt 2.0,
-it is the same as entryList(), but encodes the filenames as 8-bit
-strings using TQFile::encodedName().
-
       It is more efficient to use entryList().
-
-
      TQStrList TQDir::encodedEntryList ( const TQString & nameFilter, int filterSpec = DefaultFilter, int sortSpec = DefaultSort ) const [virtual]
-
      
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
       This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
       This function is included to easy porting from TQt 1.x to TQt 2.0,
-it is the same as entryList(), but encodes the filenames as 8-bit
-strings using TQFile::encodedName().
-
       It is more efficient to use entryList().
-
-
      const TQFileInfoList * TQDir::entryInfoList ( const TQString & nameFilter, int filterSpec = DefaultFilter, int sortSpec = DefaultSort ) const [virtual]
-
      
-Returns a list of TQFileInfo objects for all the files and
-directories in the directory, ordered in accordance with
-setSorting() and filtered in accordance with setFilter() and
-setNameFilter().
-
       The filter and sorting specifications can be overridden using the
-nameFilter, filterSpec and sortSpec arguments.
-
       Returns 0 if the directory is unreadable or does not exist.
-
       The returned pointer is a const pointer to a TQFileInfoList. The
-list is owned by the TQDir object and will be reused on the next
-call to entryInfoList() for the same TQDir instance. If you want to
-keep the entries of the list after a subsequent call to this
-function you must copy them.
-
       Note: TQFileInfoList is really a TQPtrList.
-
       
      See also entryList(), setNameFilter(), setSorting(), and setFilter().
-
-
      Examples: dirview/dirview.cpp and fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
-
      const TQFileInfoList * TQDir::entryInfoList ( int filterSpec = DefaultFilter, int sortSpec = DefaultSort ) const [virtual]
-
      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
       Returns a list of TQFileInfo objects for all the files and
-directories in the directory, ordered in accordance with
-setSorting() and filtered in accordance with setFilter() and
-setNameFilter().
-
       The filter and sorting specifications can be overridden using the
-filterSpec and sortSpec arguments.
-
       Returns 0 if the directory is unreadable or does not exist.
-
       The returned pointer is a const pointer to a TQFileInfoList. The
-list is owned by the TQDir object and will be reused on the next
-call to entryInfoList() for the same TQDir instance. If you want to
-keep the entries of the list after a subsequent call to this
-function you must copy them.
-
       Note: TQFileInfoList is really a TQPtrList.
-
       
      See also entryList(), setNameFilter(), setSorting(), and setFilter().
-
-
      TQStringList TQDir::entryList ( const TQString & nameFilter, int filterSpec = DefaultFilter, int sortSpec = DefaultSort ) const [virtual]
-
      
-Returns a list of the names of all the files and directories in
-the directory, ordered in accordance with setSorting() and
-filtered in accordance with setFilter() and setNameFilter().
-
       The filter and sorting specifications can be overridden using the
-nameFilter, filterSpec and sortSpec arguments.
-
       Returns an empty list if the directory is unreadable or does not
-exist.
-
       
      See also entryInfoList(), setNameFilter(), setSorting(), and setFilter().
-
-
      Example: table/statistics/statistics.cpp.
-
      TQStringList TQDir::entryList ( int filterSpec = DefaultFilter, int sortSpec = DefaultSort ) const [virtual]
-
      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
       Returns a list of the names of all the files and directories in
-the directory, ordered in accordance with setSorting() and
-filtered in accordance with setFilter() and setNameFilter().
-
       The filter and sorting specifications can be overridden using the
-filterSpec and sortSpec arguments.
-
       Returns an empty list if the directory is unreadable or does not
-exist.
-
       
      See also entryInfoList(), setNameFilter(), setSorting(), and setFilter().
-
-
      bool TQDir::exists ( const TQString & name, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) [virtual]
-
      
-Checks for the existence of the file name.
-
       If acceptAbsPath is TRUE a path starting with separator "/"
-will check the file with the absolute path. If acceptAbsPath is
-FALSE any number of separators at the beginning of name will be
-removed and the resultant file name will be checked.
-
       Returns TRUE if the file exists; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
       
      See also TQFileInfo::exists() and TQFile::exists().
-
-
      bool TQDir::exists () const [virtual]
-
      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
       Returns TRUE if the directory exists; otherwise returns FALSE.
-(If a file with the same name is found this function will return
-FALSE).
-
       
      See also TQFileInfo::exists() and TQFile::exists().
-
-
      TQString TQDir::filePath ( const TQString & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const [virtual]
-
      
-Returns the path name of a file in the directory. Does not
-check if the file actually exists in the directory. If the TQDir is
-relative the returned path name will also be relative. Redundant
-multiple separators or "." and ".." directories in fileName
-will not be removed (see cleanDirPath()).
-
       If acceptAbsPath is TRUE a fileName starting with a
-separator "/" will be returned without change. If acceptAbsPath
-is FALSE an absolute path will be prepended to the fileName and
-the resultant string returned.
-
       
      See also absFilePath(), isRelative(), and canonicalPath().
-
-
      FilterSpec TQDir::filter () const
-
      
-
-
       Returns the value set by setFilter()
-
-
      TQDir TQDir::home () [static]
-
      
-Returns the home directory.
-
       Under Windows the HOME environment variable is used. If this
-does not exist the USERPROFILE environment variable is used. If
-that does not exist the path is formed by concatenating the HOMEDRIVE and HOMEPATH environment variables. If they don't
-exist the rootDirPath() is used (this uses the SystemDrive
-environment variable). If none of these exist "C:\" is used.
-
       Under non-Windows operating systems the HOME environment
-variable is used if it exists, otherwise rootDirPath() is used.
-
       
      See also homeDirPath().
-
-
      TQString TQDir::homeDirPath () [static]
-
      
-
-
       Returns the absolute path of the user's home directory.
-
       
      See also home().
-
-
      bool TQDir::isReadable () const [virtual]
-
      
-Returns TRUE if the directory is readable and we can open files
-by name; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
       Warning: A FALSE value from this function is not a guarantee that
-files in the directory are not accessible.
-
       
      See also TQFileInfo::isReadable().
-
-
      Examples: dirview/dirview.cpp and fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
-
      bool TQDir::isRelative () const [virtual]
-
      
-Returns TRUE if the directory path is relative to the current
-directory and returns FALSE if the path is absolute (e.g. under
-UNIX a path is relative if it does not start with a "/").
-
       
      See also convertToAbs().
-
-
      bool TQDir::isRelativePath ( const TQString & path ) [static]
-
      
-Returns TRUE if path is relative; returns FALSE if it is
-absolute.
-
       
      See also isRelative().
-
-
      bool TQDir::isRoot () const [virtual]
-
      
-Returns TRUE if the directory is the root directory; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
       Note: If the directory is a symbolic link to the root directory
-this function returns FALSE. If you want to test for this use
-canonicalPath(), e.g.
-
      -    TQDir d( "/tmp/root_link" );
-    d = d.canonicalPath();
-    if ( d.isRoot() )
-        qWarning( "It is a root link" );
-    
      
- 
-
       
      See also root() and rootDirPath().
-
-
      bool TQDir::match ( const TQString & filter, const TQString & fileName ) [static]
-
      
-Returns TRUE if the fileName matches the wildcard (glob)
-pattern filter; otherwise returns FALSE. The filter may
-contain multiple patterns separated by spaces or semicolons.
-
       (See TQRegExp wildcard
-    matching.)
-
      See also TQRegExp::match().
-
-
      bool TQDir::match ( const TQStringList & filters, const TQString & fileName ) [static]
-
      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
       Returns TRUE if the fileName matches any of the wildcard (glob)
-patterns in the list of filters; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
       (See TQRegExp wildcard
-    matching.)
-
      See also TQRegExp::match().
-
-
      bool TQDir::matchAllDirs () const
-
      
-
-
       Returns the value set by setMatchAllDirs()
-
       
      See also setMatchAllDirs().
-
-
      bool TQDir::mkdir ( const TQString & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const [virtual]
-
      
-Creates a directory.
-
       If acceptAbsPath is TRUE a path starting with a separator ('/')
-will create the absolute directory; if acceptAbsPath is FALSE
-any number of separators at the beginning of dirName will be
-removed.
-
       Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
       
      See also rmdir().
-
-
      TQString TQDir::nameFilter () const
-
      
-
-
       Returns the string set by setNameFilter()
-
-
      bool TQDir::operator!= ( const TQDir & d ) const [virtual]
-
      
-
-
       Returns TRUE if directory d and this directory have different
-paths or different sort or filter settings; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
       Example:
-
      -    // The current directory is "/usr/local"
-    TQDir d1( "/usr/local/bin" );
-    TQDir d2( "bin" );
-    if ( d1 != d2 )
-        qDebug( "They differ" );
-    
      
- 
-
-
      TQDir & TQDir::operator= ( const TQDir & d )
-
      
-Makes a copy of TQDir d and assigns it to this TQDir.
-
-
      TQDir & TQDir::operator= ( const TQString & path )
-
      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
       Sets the directory path to be the given path.
-
-
      bool TQDir::operator== ( const TQDir & d ) const [virtual]
-
      
-Returns TRUE if directory d and this directory have the same
-path and their sort and filter settings are the same; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
       Example:
-
      -    // The current directory is "/usr/local"
-    TQDir d1( "/usr/local/bin" );
-    TQDir d2( "bin" );
-    d2.convertToAbs();
-    if ( d1 == d2 )
-        qDebug( "They're the same" );
-    
      
- 
-
-
      TQString TQDir::operator[] ( int index ) const
-
      
-Returns the file name at position index in the list of file
-names. Equivalent to entryList().at(index).
-
       Returns a TQString::null if the index is out of range or if the
-entryList() function failed.
-
       
      See also count() and entryList().
-
-
      TQString TQDir::path () const [virtual]
-
      
-
-
       Returns the path, this may contain symbolic links, but never
-contains redundant ".", ".." or multiple separators.
-
       The returned path can be either absolute or relative (see
-setPath()).
-
       
      See also setPath(), absPath(), exists(), cleanDirPath(), dirName(), absFilePath(), and convertSeparators().
-
-
      void TQDir::refresh () const
-
      
-Refreshes the directory information.
-
-
      bool TQDir::remove ( const TQString & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) [virtual]
-
      
-Removes the file, fileName.
-
       If acceptAbsPath is TRUE a path starting with separator "/"
-will remove the file with the absolute path. If acceptAbsPath
-is FALSE any number of separators at the beginning of fileName
-will be removed and the resultant file name will be removed.
-
       Returns TRUE if the file is removed successfully; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
-
      bool TQDir::rename ( const TQString & oldName, const TQString & newName, bool acceptAbsPaths = TRUE ) [virtual]
-
      
-Renames a file or directory.
-
       If acceptAbsPaths is TRUE a path starting with a separator
-('/') will rename the file with the absolute path; if acceptAbsPaths is FALSE any number of separators at the beginning
-of the names will be removed.
-
       Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
       On most file systems, rename() fails only if oldName does not
-exist or if newName and oldName are not on the same
-partition. On Windows, rename() will fail if newName already
-exists. However, there are also other reasons why rename() can
-fail. For example, on at least one file system rename() fails if
-newName points to an open file.
-
-
      Example: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
-
      bool TQDir::rmdir ( const TQString & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const [virtual]
-
      
-Removes a directory.
-
       If acceptAbsPath is TRUE a path starting with a separator ('/')
-will remove the absolute directory; if acceptAbsPath is FALSE
-any number of separators at the beginning of dirName will be
-removed.
-
       The directory must be empty for rmdir() to succeed.
-
       Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
       
      See also mkdir().
-
-
      TQDir TQDir::root () [static]
-
      
-Returns the root directory.
-
       
      See also rootDirPath() and drives().
-
-
      TQString TQDir::rootDirPath () [static]
-
      
-Returns the absolute path for the root directory.
-
       For UNIX operating systems this returns "/". For Windows file
-systems this normally returns "c:/".
-
       
      See also root() and drives().
-
-
      char TQDir::separator () [static]
-
      
-Returns the native directory separator; "/" under UNIX (including
-Mac OS X) and "\" under Windows.
-
       You do not need to use this function to build file paths. If you
-always use "/", TQt will translate your paths to conform to the
-underlying operating system.
-
-
      bool TQDir::setCurrent ( const TQString & path ) [static]
-
      
-Sets the application's current working directory to path.
-Returns TRUE if the directory was successfully changed; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
-
      void TQDir::setFilter ( int filterSpec ) [virtual]
-
      
-Sets the filter used by entryList() and entryInfoList() to filterSpec. The filter is used to specify the kind of files that
-should be returned by entryList() and entryInfoList(). See
-TQDir::FilterSpec.
-
       
      See also filter() and setNameFilter().
-
-
      void TQDir::setMatchAllDirs ( bool enable ) [virtual]
-
      
-If enable is TRUE then all directories are included (e.g. in
-entryList()), and the nameFilter() is only applied to the files.
-If enable is FALSE then the nameFilter() is applied to both
-directories and files.
-
       
      See also matchAllDirs().
-
-
      void TQDir::setNameFilter ( const TQString & nameFilter ) [virtual]
-
      
-Sets the name filter used by entryList() and entryInfoList() to nameFilter.
-
       The nameFilter is a wildcard (globbing) filter that understands
-"*" and "?" wildcards. (See TQRegExp wildcard matching.) You may specify several filter
-entries all separated by a single space " " or by a semi-colon
-";".
-
       For example, if you want entryList() and entryInfoList() to list
-all files ending with either ".cpp" or ".h", you would use either
-dir.setNameFilter("*.cpp *.h") or dir.setNameFilter("*.cpp;*.h").
-
       
      See also nameFilter() and setFilter().
-
-
      void TQDir::setPath ( const TQString & path ) [virtual]
-
      
-Sets the path of the directory to path. The path is cleaned of
-redundant ".", ".." and of multiple separators. No check is made
-to ensure that a directory with this path exists.
-
       The path can be either absolute or relative. Absolute paths begin
-with the directory separator "/" (optionally preceded by a drive
-specification under Windows). Relative file names begin with a
-directory name or a file name and specify a path relative to the
-current directory. An example of an absolute path is the string
-"/tmp/quartz", a relative path might look like "src/fatlib".
-
       
      See also path(), absPath(), exists(), cleanDirPath(), dirName(), absFilePath(), isRelative(), and convertToAbs().
-
-
      void TQDir::setSorting ( int sortSpec ) [virtual]
-
      
-Sets the sort order used by entryList() and entryInfoList().
-
       The sortSpec is specified by OR-ing values from the enum
-TQDir::SortSpec.
-
       
      See also sorting() and SortSpec.
-
-
      SortSpec TQDir::sorting () const
-
      
-
-
       Returns the value set by setSorting()
-
       
      See also setSorting() and SortSpec.
-
-
-
      
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
      
-
-
      Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
      TQt 3.3.8
      
-
      
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qdirectpainter-members.html b/doc/html/qdirectpainter-members.html
index b21da1151..013a0da50 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdirectpainter-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdirectpainter-members.html
@@ -37,97 +37,97 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qdirectpainter.html b/doc/html/qdirectpainter.html
index e5689008a..d9eb746bb 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdirectpainter.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdirectpainter.html
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
      The TQDirectPainter class provides direct access to the video hardware.
 More...
 
      #include <qdirectpainter_qws.h>
-
      Inherits TQPainter.
+
      Inherits TQPainter.
 
      List of all member functions.
 
      Public Members
      
 
        
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ operation. For example:
         {
             TQDirectPainter dp( this );
             for ( int i = 0; i < dp.numRects; i++ ) {
-                const TQRect& clip = dp.rect(i);
+                const TQRect& clip = dp.rect(i);
                 ... // platform specific operation
             }
         }
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ very careful to write robust and stable code within its scope.
 
        See also Graphics Classes.
 
 
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        TQDirectPainter::TQDirectPainter ( const TQWidget * w )
+
        TQDirectPainter::TQDirectPainter ( const TQWidget * w )
 
        
 Construct a direct painter on w. The display is locked and the
 mouse cursor is hidden if it is above w.
@@ -134,31 +134,31 @@ next.
 Returns the number of rectangles in the drawable region.
 
         
        See also rect() and region().
 
-
        TQPoint TQDirectPainter::offset () const
+
        TQPoint TQDirectPainter::offset () const
 
        
 Returns the position of the widget relative to the entire display.
 
-
        const TQRect & TQDirectPainter::rect ( int i ) const
+
        const TQRect & TQDirectPainter::rect ( int i ) const
 
        
 Returns a reference to rectangle i of the drawable region.
 Valid values for i are 0..numRects()-1.
 
         
        See also region().
 
-
        TQRegion TQDirectPainter::region () const
+
        TQRegion TQDirectPainter::region () const
 
        
 Returns the region of the framebuffer which represents the exposed
 area of the widget being painted on. Note that this may be a sub-area of
 the clip region, because of child widgets and overlapping cousin widgets.
 
         
        See also numRects() and rect().
 
-
        void TQDirectPainter::setAreaChanged ( const TQRect & r )
+
        void TQDirectPainter::setAreaChanged ( const TQRect & r )
 
        
 Sets the area changed by the transaction to r. By default, the
 entire widget is assumed to have changed. The area changed is only
 used by some graphics drivers, so often calling this function for
 a smaller area will make no difference to performance.
 
-
        TQSize TQDirectPainter::size () const
+
        TQSize TQDirectPainter::size () const
 
        
 Returns the size of the widget drawn upon.
 
         
        See also width() and height().
diff --git a/doc/html/qdirectpainter_qws-h.html b/doc/html/qdirectpainter_qws-h.html
index 31ff6628e..415442460 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdirectpainter_qws-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdirectpainter_qws-h.html
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 #define TQDIRECTPAINTER_QWS_H
 
 #ifndef QT_H
-#include "qpainter.h"
+#include "ntqpainter.h"
 #endif // QT_H
 
 #ifdef Q_WS_QWS
diff --git a/doc/html/qdns-h.html b/doc/html/qdns-h.html
index 99c24e2fd..3641c3218 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdns-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdns-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qdns.h Include File
+ntqdns.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
        TQDns Class Reference
        [network module]
        
-
-
        The TQDns class provides asynchronous DNS lookups.
-More...
-
        #include <qdns.h>
-
        Inherits TQObject.
-
        List of all member functions.
-
        Public Members
        
-
-
        Signals
        
-
-
        Detailed Description
        
-
-
-The TQDns class provides asynchronous DNS lookups.
-
-
         
-
-
         Both Windows and Unix provide synchronous DNS lookups; Windows
-provides some asynchronous support too. At the time of writing
-neither operating system provides asynchronous support for
-anything other than hostname-to-address mapping.
-
         TQDns rectifies this shortcoming, by providing asynchronous caching
-lookups for the record types that we expect modern GUI
-applications to need in the near future.
-
         The class is not straightforward to use (although it is much
-simpler than the native APIs); TQSocket provides much easier to use
-TCP connection facilities. The aim of TQDns is to provide a correct
-and small API to the DNS and nothing more. (We use "correctness"
-to mean that the DNS information is correctly cached, and
-correctly timed out.)
-
         The API comprises a constructor, functions to set the DNS node
-(the domain in DNS terminology) and record type (setLabel() and
-setRecordType()), the corresponding get functions, an isWorking()
-function to determine whether TQDns is working or reading, a
-resultsReady() signal and query functions for the result.
-
         There is one query function for each RecordType, namely
-addresses(), mailServers(), servers(), hostNames() and texts().
-There are also two generic query functions: canonicalName()
-returns the name you'll presumably end up using (the exact meaning
-of this depends on the record type) and qualifiedNames() returns a
-list of the fully qualified names label() maps to.
-
         
        See also TQSocket and Input/Output and Networking.
-
-
        Member Type Documentation
        
-
        TQDns::RecordType
        
-
-
         This enum type defines the record types TQDns can handle. The DNS
-provides many more; these are the ones we've judged to be in
-current use, useful for GUI programs and important enough to
-support right away:
-
          
-
        • TQDns::None - No information. This exists only so that TQDns can
-have a default.
-
        • TQDns::A - IPv4 addresses. By far the most common type.
-
        • TQDns::Aaaa - IPv6 addresses. So far mostly unused.
-
        • TQDns::Mx - Mail eXchanger names. Used for mail delivery.
-
        • TQDns::Srv - SeRVer names. Generic record type for finding
-servers. So far mostly unused.
-
        • TQDns::Cname - Canonical names. Maps from nicknames to the true
-name (the canonical name) for a host.
-
        • TQDns::Ptr - name PoinTeRs. Maps from IPv4 or IPv6 addresses to hostnames.
-
        • TQDns::Txt - arbitrary TeXT for domains.
-
         We expect that some support for the
-RFC-2535
-extensions will be added in future versions.
-
-
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        TQDns::TQDns ()
-
        
-Constructs a DNS query object with invalid settings for both the
-label and the search type.
-
-
        TQDns::TQDns ( const TQString & label, RecordType rr = A )
-
        
-Constructs a DNS query object that will return record type rr
-information about label.
-
         The DNS lookup is started the next time the application enters the
-event loop. When the result is found the signal resultsReady() is
-emitted.
-
         rr defaults to A, IPv4 addresses.
-
-
        TQDns::TQDns ( const TQHostAddress & address, RecordType rr = Ptr )
-
        
-Constructs a DNS query object that will return record type rr
-information about host address address. The label is set to the
-IN-ADDR.ARPA domain name. This is useful in combination with the
-Ptr record type (e.g. if you want to look up a hostname for a
-given address).
-
         The DNS lookup is started the next time the application enters the
-event loop. When the result is found the signal resultsReady() is
-emitted.
-
         rr defaults to Ptr, that maps addresses to hostnames.
-
-
        TQDns::~TQDns () [virtual]
-
        
-Destroys the DNS query object and frees its allocated resources.
-
-
        TQValueList<TQHostAddress> TQDns::addresses () const
-
        
-Returns a list of the addresses for this name if this TQDns object
-has a recordType() of TQDns::A or TQDns::Aaaa and the answer
-is available; otherwise returns an empty list.
-
         As a special case, if label() is a valid numeric IP address, this
-function returns that address.
-
         Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
-over a copy, e.g.
-
        -    TQValueList<TQHostAddress> list = myDns.addresses();
-    TQValueList<TQHostAddress>::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    while( it != list.end() ) {
-        myProcessing( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-    
        
- 
-
         
-
        TQString TQDns::canonicalName () const
-
        
-Returns the canonical name for this DNS node. (This works
-regardless of what recordType() is set to.)
-
         If the canonical name isn't known, this function returns a null
-string.
-
         The canonical name of a DNS node is its full name, or the full
-name of the target of its CNAME. For example, if l.trolltech.com
-is a CNAME to lillian.troll.no, and the search path for TQDns is
-"trolltech.com", then the canonical name for all of "lillian",
-"l", "lillian.troll.no." and "l.trolltech.com" is
-"lillian.troll.no.".
-
-
        TQStringList TQDns::hostNames () const
-
        
-Returns a list of host names if the record type is Ptr.
-
         Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
-over a copy, e.g.
-
        -    TQStringList list = myDns.hostNames();
-    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    while( it != list.end() ) {
-        myProcessing( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-    
        
- 
-
         
-
        bool TQDns::isWorking () const
-
        
-Returns TRUE if TQDns is doing a lookup for this object (i.e. if it
-does not already have the necessary information); otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
         TQDns emits the resultsReady() signal when the status changes to FALSE.
-
-
        Example: network/mail/smtp.cpp.
-
        TQString TQDns::label () const
-
        
-
-
         Returns the domain name for which this object returns information.
-
         
        See also setLabel().
-
-
        TQValueList<MailServer> TQDns::mailServers () const
-
        
-Returns a list of mail servers if the record type is Mx. The
-class TQDns::MailServer contains the following public variables:
-
          
-
        •  TQString TQDns::MailServer::name
-
        •  Q_UINT16 TQDns::MailServer::priority
-
        
-
         Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
-over a copy, e.g.
-
        -    TQValueList<TQDns::MailServer> list = myDns.mailServers();
-    TQValueList<TQDns::MailServer>::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    while( it != list.end() ) {
-        myProcessing( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-    
        
- 
-
         
-
        Example: network/mail/smtp.cpp.
-
        TQStringList TQDns::qualifiedNames () const
-
        
-
-
         Returns a list of the fully qualified names label() maps to.
-
         Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
-over a copy, e.g.
-
        -    TQStringList list = myDns.qualifiedNames();
-    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    while( it != list.end() ) {
-        myProcessing( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-    
        
- 
-
         
-
        RecordType TQDns::recordType () const
-
        
-
-
         Returns the record type of this DNS query object.
-
         
        See also setRecordType() and RecordType.
-
-
        void TQDns::resultsReady () [signal]
-
        
-
-
         This signal is emitted when results are available for one of the
-qualifiedNames().
-
-
        Example: network/mail/smtp.cpp.
-
        TQValueList<Server> TQDns::servers () const
-
        
-Returns a list of servers if the record type is Srv. The class
-TQDns::Server contains the following public variables:
-
          
-
        •  TQString TQDns::Server::name
-
        •  Q_UINT16 TQDns::Server::priority
-
        •  Q_UINT16 TQDns::Server::weight
-
        •  Q_UINT16 TQDns::Server::port
-
        
-
         Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
-over a copy, e.g.
-
        -    TQValueList<TQDns::Server> list = myDns.servers();
-    TQValueList<TQDns::Server>::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    while( it != list.end() ) {
-        myProcessing( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-    
        
- 
-
-
        void TQDns::setLabel ( const TQString & label ) [virtual]
-
        
-Sets this DNS query object to query for information about label.
-
         This does not change the recordType(), but its isWorking() status
-will probably change as a result.
-
         The DNS lookup is started the next time the application enters the
-event loop. When the result is found the signal resultsReady() is
-emitted.
-
-
        void TQDns::setLabel ( const TQHostAddress & address ) [virtual]
-
        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
         Sets this DNS query object to query for information about the host
-address address. The label is set to the IN-ADDR.ARPA domain
-name. This is useful in combination with the Ptr record type
-(e.g. if you want to look up a hostname for a given address).
-
-
        void TQDns::setRecordType ( RecordType rr = A ) [virtual]
-
        
-Sets this object to query for record type rr records.
-
         The DNS lookup is started the next time the application enters the
-event loop. When the result is found the signal resultsReady() is
-emitted.
-
         
        See also RecordType.
-
-
        TQStringList TQDns::texts () const
-
        
-Returns a list of texts if the record type is Txt.
-
         Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
-over a copy, e.g.
-
        -    TQStringList list = myDns.texts();
-    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    while( it != list.end() ) {
-        myProcessing( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-    
        
- 
-
-
-
        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
        
-
-
        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
        TQt 3.3.8
        
-
        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qdockarea-h.html b/doc/html/qdockarea-h.html
index ca9767547..cce144c88 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdockarea-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdockarea-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qdockarea.h Include File
+ntqdockarea.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
        TQDockArea Class Reference
        
-
-
        The TQDockArea class manages and lays out TQDockWindows.
-More...
-
        #include <qdockarea.h>
-
        Inherits TQWidget.
-
        List of all member functions.
-
        Public Members
        
-
-
        Public Slots
        
-
          
-
        • void lineUp ( bool keepNewLines )
          • 
-
        
-
        Properties
        
-
          
-
        • int count - the number of dock windows in the dock area  (read only)
          • 
-
        • bool empty - whether the dock area is empty  (read only)
          • 
-
        • HandlePosition handlePosition - where the dock window splitter handle is placed in the dock area  (read only)
          • 
-
        • Orientation orientation - the dock area's orientation  (read only)
          • 
-
        
-
        Related Functions
        
-
          
-
        • TQTextStream & operator<< ( TQTextStream & ts, const TQDockArea & dockArea )
          • 
-
        • TQTextStream & operator>> ( TQTextStream & ts, TQDockArea & dockArea )
          • 
-
        
-
        Detailed Description
        
-
-
-The TQDockArea class manages and lays out TQDockWindows.
-
         
-
         A TQDockArea is a container which manages a list of
-TQDockWindows which it lays out within its area. In cooperation
-with the TQDockWindows it is responsible for the docking and
-undocking of TQDockWindows and moving them inside the dock
-area. TQDockAreas also handle the wrapping of TQDockWindows to
-fill the available space as compactly as possible. TQDockAreas can
-contain TQToolBars since TQToolBar is a TQDockWindow subclass.
-
         TQMainWindow contains four TQDockAreas which you can use for your
-TQToolBars and TQDockWindows, so in most situations you do not need
-to use the TQDockArea class directly. Although TQMainWindow contains
-support for its own dock areas it isn't convenient for adding new
-TQDockAreas. If you need to create your own dock areas we suggest
-that you create a subclass of TQWidget and add your TQDockAreas to
-your subclass.
-
         
        TQMainWindow's TQDockAreas
         
-
         
-Lines. TQDockArea uses the concept of lines. A line is a
-horizontal region which may contain dock windows side-by-side. A
-dock area may have room for more than one line. When dock windows
-are docked into a dock area they are usually added at the right
-hand side of the top-most line that has room (unless manually
-placed by the user). When users move dock windows they may leave
-empty lines or gaps in non-empty lines. Dock windows can be lined
-up to minimize wasted space using the lineUp() function.
-
         The TQDockArea class maintains a position list of all its child
-dock windows. Dock windows are added to a dock area from position
-0 onwards. Dock windows are laid out sequentially in position
-order from left to right, and in the case of multiple lines of
-dock windows, from top to bottom. If a dock window is floated it
-still retains its position since this is where the window will
-return if the user double clicks its caption. A dock window's
-position can be determined with hasDockWindow(). The position can
-be changed with moveDockWindow().
-
         To dock or undock a dock window use TQDockWindow::dock() and
-TQDockWindow::undock() respectively. If you want to control which
-dock windows can dock in a dock area use setAcceptDockWindow(). To
-see if a dock area contains a particular dock window use
-hasDockWindow(); to see how many dock windows a dock area
-contains use count().
-
         The streaming operators can write the positions of the dock
-windows in the dock area to a TQTextStream. The positions can be
-read back later to restore the saved positions.
-
         Save the positions to a TQTextStream:
-
        -    ts << *myDockArea;
-    
        
- 
-
         Restore the positions from a TQTextStream:
-
        -    ts >> *myDockArea;
-    
        
- 
-
        See also Main Window and Related Classes.
-
-
        Member Type Documentation
        
-
        TQDockArea::HandlePosition
        
-
-
         A dock window has two kinds of handles, the dock window handle
-used for dragging the dock window, and the splitter handle used to
-resize the dock window in relation to other dock windows using a
-splitter. (The splitter handle is only visible for docked
-windows.)
-
         This enum specifies where the dock window splitter handle is
-placed in the dock area.
-
          
-
        • TQDockArea::Normal - The splitter handles of dock windows are placed at
-the right or bottom.
-
        • TQDockArea::Reverse - The splitter handles of dock windows are placed at
-the left or top.
-
        
-
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        TQDockArea::TQDockArea ( Orientation o, HandlePosition h = Normal, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
        
-Constructs a TQDockArea with orientation o, HandlePosition h,
-parent parent and called name.
-
-
        TQDockArea::~TQDockArea ()
-
        
-Destroys the dock area and all the dock windows docked in the dock
-area.
-
         Does not affect any floating dock windows or dock windows in other
-dock areas, even if they first appeared in this dock area.
-Floating dock windows are effectively top level windows and are
-not child windows of the dock area. When a floating dock window is
-docked (dragged into a dock area) its parent becomes the dock
-area.
-
-
        int TQDockArea::count () const
-
        Returns the number of dock windows in the dock area.
-See the "count" property for details.
-
        TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> TQDockArea::dockWindowList () const
-
        
-Returns a list of the dock windows in the dock area.
-
-
        HandlePosition TQDockArea::handlePosition () const
-
        Returns where the dock window splitter handle is placed in the dock area.
-See the "handlePosition" property for details.
-
        bool TQDockArea::hasDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * w, int * index = 0 )
-
        
-Returns TRUE if the dock area contains the dock window w;
-otherwise returns FALSE. If index is not 0 it will be set as
-follows: if the dock area contains the dock window *index is
-set to w's index position; otherwise *index is set to -1.
-
-
        bool TQDockArea::isDockWindowAccepted ( TQDockWindow * dw )
-
        
-Returns TRUE if dock window dw could be docked into the dock
-area; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
         
        See also setAcceptDockWindow().
-
-
        bool TQDockArea::isEmpty () const
-
        Returns TRUE if the dock area is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "empty" property for details.
-
        void TQDockArea::lineUp ( bool keepNewLines ) [slot]
-
        
-Lines up the dock windows in this dock area to minimize wasted
-space. If keepNewLines is TRUE, only space within lines is
-cleaned up. If keepNewLines is FALSE the number of lines might
-be changed.
-
-
        void TQDockArea::moveDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * w, int index = -1 )
-
        
-Moves the TQDockWindow w within the dock area. If w is not
-already docked in this area, w is docked first. If index is
--1 or larger than the number of docked widgets, w is appended
-at the end, otherwise it is inserted at the position index.
-
-
        void TQDockArea::moveDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * w, const TQPoint & p, const TQRect & r, bool swap )
-
        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
         Moves the dock window w inside the dock area where p is the
-new position (in global screen coordinates), r is the suggested
-rectangle of the dock window and swap specifies whether or not
-the orientation of the docked widget needs to be changed.
-
         This function is used internally by TQDockWindow. You shouldn't
-need to call it yourself.
-
-
        Orientation TQDockArea::orientation () const
-
        Returns the dock area's orientation.
-See the "orientation" property for details.
-
        void TQDockArea::removeDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * w, bool makeFloating, bool swap, bool fixNewLines = TRUE )
-
        
-Removes the dock window w from the dock area. If makeFloating is TRUE, w gets floated, and if swap is TRUE,
-the orientation of w gets swapped. If fixNewLines is TRUE
-(the default) newlines in the area will be fixed.
-
         You should never need to call this function yourself. Use
-TQDockWindow::dock() and TQDockWindow::undock() instead.
-
-
        void TQDockArea::setAcceptDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dw, bool accept )
-
        
-If accept is TRUE, dock window dw can be docked in the dock
-area. If accept is FALSE, dock window dw cannot be docked in
-the dock area.
-
         
        See also isDockWindowAccepted().
-
-
        Property Documentation
        
-
        int count
        
-
        This property holds the number of dock windows in the dock area.
-
        
-
        Get this property's value with count().
-
        bool empty
        
-
        This property holds whether the dock area is empty.
-
        
-
        Get this property's value with isEmpty().
-
        HandlePosition handlePosition
        
-
        This property holds where the dock window splitter handle is placed in the dock area.
-
        The default position is Normal.
-
-
        Get this property's value with handlePosition().
-
        Orientation orientation
        
-
        This property holds the dock area's orientation.
-
        There is no default value; the orientation is specified in the
-constructor.
-
-
        Get this property's value with orientation().
-
        Related Functions
        
-
        TQTextStream & operator<< ( TQTextStream & ts, const TQDockArea & dockArea )
-
        
-
-
         Writes the layout of the dock windows in dock area dockArea to
-the text stream ts.
-
         
        See also operator>>().
-
-
        TQTextStream & operator>> ( TQTextStream & ts, TQDockArea & dockArea )
-
        
-
-
         Reads the layout description of the dock windows in dock area dockArea from the text stream ts and restores it. The layout
-description must have been previously written by the operator<<()
-function.
-
         
        See also operator<<().
-
-
-
        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
        
-
-
        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
        TQt 3.3.8
        
-
        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qdockwindow-h.html b/doc/html/qdockwindow-h.html
index f8ba5a47c..d72de1c18 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdockwindow-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdockwindow-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qdockwindow.h Include File
+ntqdockwindow.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
        TQDockWindow Class Reference
        
-
-
        The TQDockWindow class provides a widget which can be docked
-inside a TQDockArea or floated as a top level window on the
-desktop.
-More...
-
        #include <qdockwindow.h>
-
        Inherits TQFrame.
-
        Inherited by TQToolBar.
-
        List of all member functions.
-
        Public Members
        
-
-
        Public Slots
        
-
-
        Signals
        
-
-
        Properties
        
-
          
-
        • int closeMode - the close mode of a dock window
          • 
-
        • bool horizontallyStretchable - whether the dock window is horizontally stretchable
          • 
-
        • bool movingEnabled - whether the user can move the dock window within the dock area, move the dock window to another dock area, or float the dock window
          • 
-
        • bool newLine - whether the dock window prefers to start a new line in the dock area
          • 
-
        • int offset - the dock window's preferred offset from the dock area's left edge (top edge for vertical dock areas)
          • 
-
        • bool opaqueMoving - whether the dock window will be shown normally whilst it is being moved
          • 
-
        • Place place  (read only)
          • 
-
        • bool resizeEnabled - whether the dock window is resizeable
          • 
-
        • bool stretchable - whether the dock window is stretchable in the current orientation()  (read only)
          • 
-
        • bool verticallyStretchable - whether the dock window is vertically stretchable
          • 
-
        
-
        Detailed Description
        
-
-
-The TQDockWindow class provides a widget which can be docked
-inside a TQDockArea or floated as a top level window on the
-desktop.
-
         
-
-
         This class handles moving, resizing, docking and undocking dock
-windows. TQToolBar is a subclass of TQDockWindow so the
-functionality provided for dock windows is available with the same
-API for toolbars.
-
         
        TQDockWindows in a TQDockArea
         
         Two TQDockWindows (TQToolBars) in a TQDockArea
-
        
-
         
        A TQDockWindow
         
         A Floating TQDockWindow
-
        
-
         If the user drags the dock window into the dock area the dock
-window will be docked. If the user drags the dock area outside any
-dock areas the dock window will be undocked (floated) and will
-become a top level window. Double clicking a floating dock
-window's titlebar will dock the dock window to the last dock area
-it was docked in. Double clicking a docked dock window's handle
-will undock (float) the dock window.
-
-If the user clicks the close button (which does not appear on
-dock windows by default - see closeMode) the dock window will
-disappear. You can control whether or not a dock window has a
-close button with setCloseMode().
-
         TQMainWindow provides four dock areas (top, left, right and bottom)
-which can be used by dock windows. For many applications using the
-dock areas provided by TQMainWindow is sufficient. (See the TQDockArea documentation if you want to create your own dock
-areas.) In TQMainWindow a right-click popup menu (the dock window
-menu) is available which lists dock windows and can be used to
-show or hide them. (The popup menu only lists dock windows that
-have a caption.)
-
         When you construct a dock window you must pass it a TQDockArea
-or a TQMainWindow as its parent if you want it docked. Pass 0 for
-the parent if you want it floated.
-
         
        -    TQToolBar *fileTools = new TQToolBar( this, "File Actions" );
-    moveDockWindow( fileTools, Left );
-    
        
- 
-
         In the example above we create a new TQToolBar in the constructor
-of a TQMainWindow subclass (so that the this pointer points to
-the TQMainWindow). By default the toolbar will be added to the Top dock area, but we've moved it to the Left dock area.
-
         A dock window is often used to contain a single widget. In these
-cases the widget can be set by calling setWidget(). If you're
-constructing a dock window that contains multiple widgets, e.g. a
-toolbar, arrange the widgets within a box layout inside the dock
-window. To do this use the boxLayout() function to get a pointer
-to the dock window's box layout, then add widgets to the layout
-using the box layout's TQBoxLayout::addWidget() function. The dock
-window will dynamically set the orientation of the layout to be
-vertical or horizontal as necessary, although you can control this
-yourself with setOrientation().
-
         Although a common use of dock windows is for toolbars, they can be
-used with any widgets. (See the TQt
-    Designer and TQt
-    Linguist applications, for example.) When using larger
-widgets it may make sense for the dock window to be resizable by
-calling setResizeEnabled(). Resizable dock windows are given
-splitter-like handles to allow the user to resize them within
-their dock area. When resizable dock windows are undocked they
-become top level windows and can be resized like any other top
-level windows, e.g. by dragging a corner or edge.
-
         Dock windows can be docked and undocked using dock() and undock().
-A dock window's orientation can be set with setOrientation(). You
-can also use TQDockArea::moveDockWindow(). If you're using a
-TQMainWindow, TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow() and
-TQMainWindow::removeDockWindow() are available.
-
         A dock window can have some preferred settings, for example, you
-can set a preferred offset from the left edge (or top edge for
-vertical dock areas) of the dock area using setOffset(). If you'd
-prefer a dock window to start on a new line when it is docked use setNewLine(). The
-setFixedExtentWidth() and setFixedExtentHeight() functions can be
-used to define the dock window's preferred size, and the
-setHorizontallyStretchable() and setVerticallyStretchable()
-functions set whether the dock window can be stretched or not.
-Dock windows can be moved by default, but this can be changed with
-setMovingEnabled(). When a dock window is moved it is shown as a
-rectangular outline, but it can be shown normally using
-setOpaqueMoving().
-
         When a dock window's visibility changes, i.e. it is shown or
-hidden, the visibilityChanged() signal is emitted. When a dock
-window is docked, undocked or moved inside the dock area the
-placeChanged() signal is emitted.
-
        See also Main Window and Related Classes.
-
-
        Member Type Documentation
        
-
        TQDockWindow::CloseMode
        
-
-
         This enum type specifies when (if ever) a dock window has a close
-button.
-
          
-
        • TQDockWindow::Never - The dock window never has a close button and cannot
-be closed by the user.
-
        • TQDockWindow::Docked - The dock window has a close button only when
-docked.
-
        • TQDockWindow::Undocked - The dock window has a close button only when
-floating.
-
        • TQDockWindow::Always - The dock window always has a close button.
-
-
        
-
        TQDockWindow::Place
        
-
-
         This enum specifies the possible locations for a TQDockWindow:
-
          
-
        • TQDockWindow::InDock - Inside a TQDockArea.
-
        • TQDockWindow::OutsideDock - Floating as a top level window on the desktop.
-
        
-
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        TQDockWindow::TQDockWindow ( Place p = InDock, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
-
        
-Constructs a TQDockWindow with parent parent, called name and
-with widget flags f.
-
         If p is InDock, the dock window is docked into a dock area
-and parent must be a TQDockArea or a TQMainWindow. If the parent is a TQMainWindow the dock window will be docked in the main
-window's Top dock area.
-
         If p is OutsideDock, the dock window is created as a floating
-window.
-
         We recommend creating the dock area InDock with a TQMainWindow
-as parent then calling TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow() to move the
-dock window where you want it.
-
-
        TQDockWindow::TQDockWindow ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
-
        
-Constructs a TQDockWindow with parent parent, called name and
-with widget flags f.
-
-
        TQDockArea * TQDockWindow::area () const
-
        
-
-
         Returns the dock area in which this dock window is docked, or 0 if
-the dock window is floating.
-
-
        TQBoxLayout * TQDockWindow::boxLayout ()
-
        
-Returns the layout which is used for adding widgets to the dock
-window. The layout's orientation is set automatically to match the
-orientation of the dock window. You can add widgets to the layout
-using the box layout's TQBoxLayout::addWidget() function.
-
         If the dock window only needs to contain a single widget use
-setWidget() instead.
-
         
        See also setWidget() and setOrientation().
-
-
        int TQDockWindow::closeMode () const
-
        Returns the close mode of a dock window.
-See the "closeMode" property for details.
-
        void TQDockWindow::dock () [virtual slot]
-
        
-Docks the dock window into the last dock area in which it was
-docked.
-
         If the dock window has no last dock area (e.g. it was created as a
-floating window and has never been docked), or if the last dock
-area it was docked in does not exist (e.g. the dock area has been
-deleted), nothing happens.
-
         The dock window will dock with the dock area regardless of the return value
-of TQDockArea::isDockWindowAccepted().
-
         
        See also undock(), TQDockArea::moveDockWindow(), TQDockArea::removeDockWindow(), TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow(), TQMainWindow::removeDockWindow(), and TQDockArea::isDockWindowAccepted().
-
-
         
-
        TQSize TQDockWindow::fixedExtent () const
-
        
-Returns the dock window's preferred size (fixed extent).
-
         
        See also setFixedExtentWidth() and setFixedExtentHeight().
-
-
        bool TQDockWindow::isCloseEnabled () const
-
        
-Returns TRUE if the dock window has a close button; otherwise
-returns FALSE. The result depends on the dock window's Place
-and its CloseMode.
-
         
        See also closeMode.
-
-
        bool TQDockWindow::isHorizontalStretchable () const
-
        
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
         
-
        bool TQDockWindow::isHorizontallyStretchable () const
-
        Returns TRUE if the dock window is horizontally stretchable; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "horizontallyStretchable" property for details.
-
        bool TQDockWindow::isMovingEnabled () const
-
        Returns TRUE if the user can move the dock window within the dock area, move the dock window to another dock area, or float the dock window; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "movingEnabled" property for details.
-
        bool TQDockWindow::isResizeEnabled () const
-
        Returns TRUE if the dock window is resizeable; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "resizeEnabled" property for details.
-
        bool TQDockWindow::isStretchable () const
-
        Returns TRUE if the dock window is stretchable in the current orientation(); otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "stretchable" property for details.
-
        bool TQDockWindow::isVerticalStretchable () const
-
        
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
         
-
        bool TQDockWindow::isVerticallyStretchable () const
-
        Returns TRUE if the dock window is vertically stretchable; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "verticallyStretchable" property for details.
-
        bool TQDockWindow::newLine () const
-
        Returns TRUE if the dock window prefers to start a new line in the dock area; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "newLine" property for details.
-
        int TQDockWindow::offset () const
-
        Returns the dock window's preferred offset from the dock area's left edge (top edge for vertical dock areas).
-See the "offset" property for details.
-
        bool TQDockWindow::opaqueMoving () const
-
        Returns TRUE if the dock window will be shown normally whilst it is being moved; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "opaqueMoving" property for details.
-
        TQt::Orientation TQDockWindow::orientation () const
-
        
-Returns the orientation of the dock window.
-
         
        See also orientationChanged().
-
-
        void TQDockWindow::orientationChanged ( Orientation o ) [signal]
-
        
-
-
         This signal is emitted when the orientation of the dock window is
-changed. The new orientation is o.
-
-
        Place TQDockWindow::place () const
-
        
-
-
         This function returns where the dock window is placed. This is
-either InDock or OutsideDock.
-
         
        See also TQDockArea::moveDockWindow(), TQDockArea::removeDockWindow(), TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow(), and TQMainWindow::removeDockWindow().
-
-
        void TQDockWindow::placeChanged ( TQDockWindow::Place p ) [signal]
-
        
-
-
         This signal is emitted when the dock window is docked (p is InDock), undocked (p is OutsideDock) or moved inside the
-the dock area.
-
         
        See also TQDockArea::moveDockWindow(), TQDockArea::removeDockWindow(), TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow(), and TQMainWindow::removeDockWindow().
-
-
        void TQDockWindow::setCloseMode ( int m ) [virtual]
-
        Sets the close mode of a dock window to m.
-See the "closeMode" property for details.
-
        void TQDockWindow::setFixedExtentHeight ( int h ) [virtual]
-
        
-Sets the dock window's preferred height for its fixed extent
-(size) to h.
-
         
        See also setFixedExtentWidth().
-
-
        void TQDockWindow::setFixedExtentWidth ( int w ) [virtual]
-
        
-Sets the dock window's preferred width for its fixed extent (size)
-to w.
-
         
        See also setFixedExtentHeight().
-
-
        void TQDockWindow::setHorizontalStretchable ( bool b )
-
        
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
         
-
        void TQDockWindow::setHorizontallyStretchable ( bool b ) [virtual]
-
        Sets whether the dock window is horizontally stretchable to b.
-See the "horizontallyStretchable" property for details.
-
        void TQDockWindow::setMovingEnabled ( bool b ) [virtual]
-
        Sets whether the user can move the dock window within the dock area, move the dock window to another dock area, or float the dock window to b.
-See the "movingEnabled" property for details.
-
        void TQDockWindow::setNewLine ( bool b ) [virtual]
-
        Sets whether the dock window prefers to start a new line in the dock area to b.
-See the "newLine" property for details.
-
        void TQDockWindow::setOffset ( int o ) [virtual]
-
        Sets the dock window's preferred offset from the dock area's left edge (top edge for vertical dock areas) to o.
-See the "offset" property for details.
-
        void TQDockWindow::setOpaqueMoving ( bool b ) [virtual]
-
        Sets whether the dock window will be shown normally whilst it is being moved to b.
-See the "opaqueMoving" property for details.
-
        void TQDockWindow::setOrientation ( Orientation o ) [virtual slot]
-
        
-Sets the orientation of the dock window to o. The orientation
-is propagated to the layout boxLayout().
-
         Warning: All undocked TQToolBars will always have a horizontal orientation.
-
-
        void TQDockWindow::setResizeEnabled ( bool b ) [virtual]
-
        Sets whether the dock window is resizeable to b.
-See the "resizeEnabled" property for details.
-
        void TQDockWindow::setVerticalStretchable ( bool b )
-
        
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
         
-
        void TQDockWindow::setVerticallyStretchable ( bool b ) [virtual]
-
        Sets whether the dock window is vertically stretchable to b.
-See the "verticallyStretchable" property for details.
-
        void TQDockWindow::setWidget ( TQWidget * w ) [virtual]
-
        
-Sets the dock window's main widget to w.
-
         
        See also boxLayout().
-
-
        void TQDockWindow::undock () [virtual slot]
-
        
-
-
         Undocks the TQDockWindow from its current dock area if it is
-docked; otherwise does nothing.
-
         
        See also dock(), TQDockArea::moveDockWindow(), TQDockArea::removeDockWindow(), TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow(), and TQMainWindow::removeDockWindow().
-
-
        void TQDockWindow::visibilityChanged ( bool visible ) [signal]
-
        
-
-
         This signal is emitted when the visibility of the dock window
-relatively to its dock area is changed. If visible is TRUE, the
-TQDockWindow is now visible to the dock area, otherwise it has been
-hidden.
-
         A dock window can be hidden if it has a close button which the
-user has clicked. In the case of a TQMainWindow a dock window can
-have its visibility changed (hidden or shown) by clicking its name
-in the dock window menu that lists the TQMainWindow's dock windows.
-
-
        TQWidget * TQDockWindow::widget () const
-
        
-Returns the dock window's main widget.
-
         
        See also setWidget().
-
-
        Property Documentation
        
-
        int closeMode
        
-
        This property holds the close mode of a dock window.
-
        Defines when (if ever) the dock window has a close button. The
-choices are Never, Docked (i.e. only when docked), Undocked (only when undocked, i.e. floated) or Always.
-
         The default is Never.
-
-
        Set this property's value with setCloseMode() and get this property's value with closeMode().
-
        bool horizontallyStretchable
        
-
        This property holds whether the dock window is horizontally stretchable.
-
        A dock window is horizontally stretchable if you call
-setHorizontallyStretchable(TRUE) or setResizeEnabled(TRUE).
-
         
        See also resizeEnabled.
-
-
        Bugs and limitations:
-
          
-
        •  Strecthability is broken. You must call setResizeEnabled(TRUE) to get
-proper behavior and even then TQDockWindow does not limit stretchablilty.
-
        
-
        Set this property's value with setHorizontallyStretchable() and get this property's value with isHorizontallyStretchable().
-
        bool movingEnabled
        
-
        This property holds whether the user can move the dock window within the dock area, move the dock window to another dock area, or float the dock window.
-
        This property is TRUE by default.
-
-
        Set this property's value with setMovingEnabled() and get this property's value with isMovingEnabled().
-
        bool newLine
        
-
        This property holds whether the dock window prefers to start a new line in the dock area.
-
        The default is FALSE, i.e. the dock window doesn't require a new
-line in the dock area.
-
-
        Set this property's value with setNewLine() and get this property's value with newLine().
-
        int offset
        
-
        This property holds the dock window's preferred offset from the dock area's left edge (top edge for vertical dock areas).
-
        The default is 0.
-
-
        Set this property's value with setOffset() and get this property's value with offset().
-
        bool opaqueMoving
        
-
        This property holds whether the dock window will be shown normally whilst it is being moved.
-
        If this property is FALSE, (the default), the dock window will be
-represented by an outline rectangle whilst it is being moved.
-
         Warning: Currently opaque moving has some problems and we do not
-recommend using it at this time. We expect to fix these problems
-in a future release.
-
-
        Set this property's value with setOpaqueMoving() and get this property's value with opaqueMoving().
-
        bool resizeEnabled
        
-
        This property holds whether the dock window is resizeable.
-
        A resizeable dock window can be resized using splitter-like
-handles inside a dock area and like every other top level window
-when floating.
-
         A dock window is both horizontally and vertically stretchable if
-you call setResizeEnabled(TRUE).
-
         This property is FALSE by default.
-
         
        See also verticallyStretchable and horizontallyStretchable.
-
-
        Set this property's value with setResizeEnabled() and get this property's value with isResizeEnabled().
-
        bool stretchable
        
-
        This property holds whether the dock window is stretchable in the current orientation().
-
        This property can be set using setHorizontallyStretchable() and
-setVerticallyStretchable(), or with setResizeEnabled().
-
         
        See also resizeEnabled.
-
-
        Bugs and limitations:
-
          
-
        •  Strecthability is broken. You must call setResizeEnabled(TRUE) to get
-proper behavior and even then TQDockWindow does not limit stretchablilty.
-
        
-
        Get this property's value with isStretchable().
-
        bool verticallyStretchable
        
-
        This property holds whether the dock window is vertically stretchable.
-
        A dock window is vertically stretchable if you call
-setVerticallyStretchable(TRUE) or setResizeEnabled(TRUE).
-
         
        See also resizeEnabled.
-
-
        Bugs and limitations:
-
          
-
        •  Strecthability is broken. You must call setResizeEnabled(TRUE) to get
-proper behavior and even then TQDockWindow does not limit stretchablilty.
-
        
-
        Set this property's value with setVerticallyStretchable() and get this property's value with isVerticallyStretchable().
-
-
        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
        
-
-
        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
        TQt 3.3.8
        
-
        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qdom-h.html b/doc/html/qdom-h.html
index 4f4d06195..31344d9cd 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdom-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdom-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qdom.h Include File
+ntqdom.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
        TQDragObject Class Reference
        
-
-
        The TQDragObject class encapsulates MIME-based data
-transfer.
-More...
-
        #include <qdragobject.h>
-
        Inherits TQObject and TQMimeSource.
-
        Inherited by TQStoredDrag, TQTextDrag, TQImageDrag, and TQIconDrag.
-
        List of all member functions.
-
        Public Members
        
-
-
        Static Public Members
        
-
-
        Protected Members
        
-
          
-
        • virtual bool drag ( DragMode mode )
          • 
-
        
-
        Detailed Description
        
-
-
-
         The TQDragObject class encapsulates MIME-based data
-transfer.
-
         
-
         TQDragObject is the base class for all data that needs to be
-transferred between and within applications, both for drag and
-drop and for the clipboard.
-
         See the Drag-and-drop documentation for an
-overview of how to provide drag and drop in your application.
-
         See the TQClipboard documentation for an overview of how to provide
-cut-and-paste in your application.
-
         The drag() function is used to start a drag operation. You can
-specify the DragMode in the call or use one of the convenience
-functions dragCopy(), dragMove() or dragLink(). The drag source
-where the data originated is retrieved with source(). If the data
-was dropped on a widget within the application, target() will
-return a pointer to that widget. Specify the pixmap to display
-during the drag with setPixmap().
-
        See also Drag And Drop Classes.
-
-
        Member Type Documentation
        
-
        TQDragObject::DragMode
        
-
-
         This enum describes the possible drag modes.
-
          
-
        • TQDragObject::DragDefault - The mode is determined heuristically.
-
        • TQDragObject::DragCopy - The data is copied, never moved.
-
        • TQDragObject::DragMove - The data is moved, if dragged at all.
-
        • TQDragObject::DragLink - The data is linked, if dragged at all.
-
        • TQDragObject::DragCopyOrMove - The user chooses the mode by using a
-control key to switch from the default.
-
        
-
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        TQDragObject::TQDragObject ( TQWidget * dragSource = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
        
-Constructs a drag object called name, which is a child of dragSource.
-
         Note that the drag object will be deleted when dragSource is
-deleted.
-
-
        TQDragObject::~TQDragObject () [virtual]
-
        
-Destroys the drag object, canceling any drag and drop operation in
-which it is involved, and frees up the storage used.
-
-
        bool TQDragObject::drag ()
-
        
-Starts a drag operation using the contents of this object, using
-DragDefault mode.
-
         The function returns TRUE if the caller should delete the original
-copy of the dragged data (but see target()); otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
         If the drag contains references to information (e.g. file names
-in a TQUriDrag are references) then the return value should always
-be ignored, as the target is expected to manipulate the
-referred-to content directly. On X11 the return value should
-always be correct anyway, but on Windows this is not necessarily
-the case (e.g. the file manager starts a background process to
-move files, so the source must not delete the files!)
-
         Note that on Windows the drag operation will spin a blocking modal
-event loop that will not dispatch any TQTimers.
-
-
        Example: dirview/dirview.cpp.
-
        bool TQDragObject::drag ( DragMode mode ) [virtual protected]
-
        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
         Starts a drag operation using the contents of this object.
-
         At this point, the object becomes owned by TQt, not the
-application. You should not delete the drag object or anything it
-references. The actual transfer of data to the target application
-will be done during future event processing - after that time the
-drag object will be deleted.
-
         Returns TRUE if the dragged data was dragged as a move,
-indicating that the caller should remove the original source of
-the data (the drag object must continue to have a copy); otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
         The mode specifies the drag mode (see
-TQDragObject::DragMode.) Normally one of the simpler drag(),
-dragMove(), or dragCopy() functions would be used instead.
-
-
        void TQDragObject::dragCopy ()
-
        
-Starts a drag operation using the contents of this object, using
-DragCopy mode. Be sure to read the constraints described in
-drag().
-
         
        See also drag(), dragMove(), and dragLink().
-
-
        Example: iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp.
-
        void TQDragObject::dragLink ()
-
        
-Starts a drag operation using the contents of this object, using
-DragLink mode. Be sure to read the constraints described in
-drag().
-
         
        See also drag(), dragCopy(), and dragMove().
-
-
        bool TQDragObject::dragMove ()
-
        
-Starts a drag operation using the contents of this object, using
-DragMove mode. Be sure to read the constraints described in
-drag().
-
         
        See also drag(), dragCopy(), and dragLink().
-
-
        TQPixmap TQDragObject::pixmap () const
-
        
-Returns the currently set pixmap (which isNull() if none is set).
-
-
        TQPoint TQDragObject::pixmapHotSpot () const
-
        
-Returns the currently set pixmap hotspot.
-
-
        void TQDragObject::setPixmap ( TQPixmap pm, const TQPoint & hotspot ) [virtual]
-
        
-Set the pixmap pm to display while dragging the object. The
-platform-specific implementation will use this where it can - so
-provide a small masked pixmap, and do not assume that the user
-will actually see it. For example, cursors on Windows 95 are of
-limited size.
-
         The hotspot is the point on (or off) the pixmap that should be
-under the cursor as it is dragged. It is relative to the top-left
-pixel of the pixmap.
-
         Warning: We have seen problems with drag cursors on different
-graphics hardware and driver software on Windows. Setting the
-graphics acceleration in the display settings down one tick solved
-the problems in all cases.
-
-
        Example: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
-
        void TQDragObject::setPixmap ( TQPixmap pm ) [virtual]
-
        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
         Uses a hotspot that positions the pixmap below and to the right of
-the mouse pointer. This allows the user to clearly see the point
-on the window which they are dragging the data onto.
-
-
        TQWidget * TQDragObject::source ()
-
        
-Returns a pointer to the drag source where this object originated.
-
-
        TQWidget * TQDragObject::target () [static]
-
        
-After the drag completes, this function will return the TQWidget
-which received the drop, or 0 if the data was dropped on another
-application.
-
         This can be useful for detecting the case where drag and drop is
-to and from the same widget.
-
-
-
        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
        
-
-
        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
        TQt 3.3.8
        
-
        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qdrawutil-h.html b/doc/html/qdrawutil-h.html
index a9a3f955b..67d8a68f1 100644
--- a/doc/html/qdrawutil-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qdrawutil-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qdrawutil.h Include File
+ntqdrawutil.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
        TQDropSite Class Reference
        [obsolete]
        
-
-
        The TQDropSite class provides nothing and does nothing.
-More...
-
        #include <qdropsite.h>
-
        List of all member functions.
-
        Public Members
        
-
-
        Detailed Description
        
-
-
-The TQDropSite class provides nothing and does nothing.
-
         This class is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
         If your code uses it, you can safely delete it.
-
         It was used in TQt 1.x to do some drag and drop; that has since been
-folded into TQWidget.
-
         For detailed information about drag-and-drop, see the TQDragObject class.
-
         
        See also TQDragObject, TQTextDrag, and TQImageDrag.
-
-
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        TQDropSite::TQDropSite ( TQWidget * self )
-
        
-Constructs a TQDropSite to handle events for the widget self.
-
         Pass this as the self parameter.
-This enables dropping by calling TQWidget::setAcceptDrops(TRUE).
-
-
        TQDropSite::~TQDropSite () [virtual]
-
        
-Destroys the drop site.
-
-
-
        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
        
-
-
        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
        TQt 3.3.8
        
-
        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qeditorfactory-h.html b/doc/html/qeditorfactory-h.html
index 71d6469b4..cb4d55059 100644
--- a/doc/html/qeditorfactory-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qeditorfactory-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qeditorfactory.h Include File
+ntqeditorfactory.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
        TQEditorFactory Class Reference
        [sql module]
        
-
-
        The TQEditorFactory class is used to create editor widgets
-for TQVariant data types.
-More...
-
        #include <qeditorfactory.h>
-
        Inherits TQObject.
-
        Inherited by TQSqlEditorFactory.
-
        List of all member functions.
-
        Public Members
        
-
-
        Static Public Members
        
-
-
        Detailed Description
        
-
-
-The TQEditorFactory class is used to create editor widgets
-for TQVariant data types.
-
         
-
-
         Each editor factory provides the createEditor() function which
-given a TQVariant will create and return a TQWidget that can edit
-that TQVariant. For example if you have a TQVariant::String type, a
-TQLineEdit would be the default editor returned, whereas a
-TQVariant::Int's default editor would be a TQSpinBox.
-
         If you want to create different editors for fields with the same
-data type, subclass TQEditorFactory and reimplement the
-createEditor() function.
-
        See also Database Classes.
-
-
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        TQEditorFactory::TQEditorFactory ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
        
-Constructs an editor factory with parent parent, called name.
-
-
        TQEditorFactory::~TQEditorFactory ()
-
        
-Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-
-
        TQWidget * TQEditorFactory::createEditor ( TQWidget * parent, const TQVariant & v ) [virtual]
-
        
-Creates and returns the appropriate editor for the TQVariant v.
-If the TQVariant is invalid, 0 is returned. The parent is passed
-to the appropriate editor's constructor.
-
-
        Reimplemented in TQSqlEditorFactory.
-
        TQEditorFactory * TQEditorFactory::defaultFactory () [static]
-
        
-Returns an instance of a default editor factory.
-
-
        void TQEditorFactory::installDefaultFactory ( TQEditorFactory * factory ) [static]
-
        
-Replaces the default editor factory with factory.
-TQEditorFactory takes ownership of factory, and destroys it when it is no longer needed.
-
-
-
        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
        
-
-
        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
        TQt 3.3.8
        
-
        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qembed.html b/doc/html/qembed.html
index 026e24c36..0789aa4a3 100644
--- a/doc/html/qembed.html
+++ b/doc/html/qembed.html
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ of the supplied functions:
 
         
             #include "generated_qembed_file.h"
 
-    TQImage myFindImage(const char* name)
+    TQImage myFindImage(const char* name)
     {
         return qembed_findImage(name);
     }
diff --git a/doc/html/qerrormessage-h.html b/doc/html/qerrormessage-h.html
index d466f0180..3d0f5b4dc 100644
--- a/doc/html/qerrormessage-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qerrormessage-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qerrormessage.h Include File
+ntqerrormessage.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
        TQErrorMessage Class Reference
        
-
-
        The TQErrorMessage class provides an error message display dialog.
-More...
-
        #include <qerrormessage.h>
-
        Inherits TQDialog.
-
        List of all member functions.
-
        Public Members
        
-
-
        Public Slots
        
-
          
-
        • void message ( const TQString & m )
          • 
-
        
-
        Static Public Members
        
-
-
        Detailed Description
        
- 
-
         The TQErrorMessage class provides an error message display dialog.
-
         
-
-
         This is basically a TQLabel and a "show this message again" checkbox which
-remembers what not to show.
-
         There are two ways to use this class:
-
          
-
        1.  For production applications. In this context the class can be used to
-display messages which you don't need the user to see more than once. To use
-TQErrorMessage like this, you create the dialog in the usual way and call the
-message() slot, or connect signals to it.
-
           
        2.  For developers. In this context the static qtHandler() installs
-a message handler using qInstallMsgHandler() and creates a TQErrorMessage
-that displays qDebug(), qWarning() and qFatal() messages.
-
        
-
         In both cases TQErrorMessage will queue pending messages, and display
-them (or not) in order, as soon as the user presses Enter or clicks OK
-after seeing each message.
-
         
         
-
         
        See also TQMessageBox, TQStatusBar::message(), Dialog Classes, and Miscellaneous Classes.
-
-
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        TQErrorMessage::TQErrorMessage ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
-
          Constructs and installs an error handler window.
-The parent parent and name name are passed on to the TQDialog
-constructor.
-
-
        TQErrorMessage::~TQErrorMessage ()
-
         Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.  Notably,
-the list of "do not show again" messages is deleted. 
-
        void TQErrorMessage::message ( const TQString & m ) [slot]
-
         Shows message m and returns immediately.  If the user has requested
-that m not be shown, this function does nothing.
-
         Normally, m is shown at once, but if there are pending messages,
-m is queued for later display.
-
-
        TQErrorMessage * TQErrorMessage::qtHandler () [static]
-
          Returns a pointer to a TQErrorMessage object that outputs the
-default TQt messages.  This function creates such an object, if there
-isn't one already.
-
-
-
        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
        
-
-
        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
        TQt 3.3.8
        
-
        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qeucjpcodec-h.html b/doc/html/qeucjpcodec-h.html
index 3fb006177..f17e98e90 100644
--- a/doc/html/qeucjpcodec-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qeucjpcodec-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qeucjpcodec.h Include File
+ntqeucjpcodec.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
        TQEucJpCodec Class Reference
        
-
-
        The TQEucJpCodec class provides conversion to and from EUC-JP character sets.
-More...
-
        All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
        
-
        #include <qeucjpcodec.h>
-
        Inherits TQTextCodec.
-
        List of all member functions.
-
        Public Members
        
-
-
        Detailed Description
        
- 
-
-
-
         The TQEucJpCodec class provides conversion to and from EUC-JP character sets.
-
         More precisely, the TQEucJpCodec class subclasses TQTextCodec to
-provide support for EUC-JP, the main legacy encoding for Unix
-machines in Japan.
-
         The environment variable UNICODEMAP_JP can be used to fine-tune
-TQJisCodec, TQSjisCodec and TQEucJpCodec. The TQJisCodec
-documentation describes how to use this variable.
-
         Most of the code here was written by Serika Kurusugawa,
-a.k.a. Junji Takagi, and is included in TQt with the author's
-permission and the grateful thanks of the Trolltech team. Here is
-the copyright statement for that code:
-
         
-
         Copyright (C) 1999 Serika Kurusugawa. All rights reserved.
-
         Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-are met:
-
          
-
        1.  Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-
        2.  Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-
        
-
         THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS".
-ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSETQUENTIAL
-DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-SUCH DAMAGE.
-
        See also Internationalization with TQt.
-
-
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        TQEucJpCodec::TQEucJpCodec ()
-
        
-Constructs a TQEucJpCodec.
-
-
        TQEucJpCodec::~TQEucJpCodec ()
-
        
-Destroys the codec.
-
-
        int TQEucJpCodec::mibEnum () const [virtual]
-
        
-Returns 18.
-
-
        Reimplemented from TQTextCodec.
-
        const char * TQEucJpCodec::mimeName () const [virtual]
-
        
-Returns the codec's mime name.
-
-
        Reimplemented from TQTextCodec.
-
-
        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
        
-
-
        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
        TQt 3.3.8
        
-
        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qeuckrcodec-h.html b/doc/html/qeuckrcodec-h.html
index 95e0011b5..0b94b7633 100644
--- a/doc/html/qeuckrcodec-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qeuckrcodec-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qeuckrcodec.h Include File
+ntqeuckrcodec.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
        TQEucKrCodec Class Reference
        
-
-
        The TQEucKrCodec class provides conversion to and from EUC-KR character sets.
-More...
-
        All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
        
-
        #include <qeuckrcodec.h>
-
        Inherits TQTextCodec.
-
        List of all member functions.
-
        Public Members
        
-
          
-
        • virtual const char * mimeName () const
          • 
-
        
-
        Detailed Description
        
- 
-
-
-
         The TQEucKrCodec class provides conversion to and from EUC-KR character sets.
-
         The TQEucKrCodec class subclasses TQTextCodec to provide support for
-EUC-KR, the main legacy encoding for UNIX machines in Korea.
-
         It was largely written by Mizi Research Inc. Here is the copyright
-statement for the code as it was at the point of contribution.
-Trolltech's subsequent modifications are covered by the usual
-copyright for TQt.
-
         
-
         Copyright (C) 1999-2000 Mizi Research Inc. All rights reserved.
-
         Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-are met: 
          
-
        1.  Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-
        2.  Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-
        
-
         THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
-ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSETQUENTIAL
-DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-SUCH DAMAGE.
-
        See also Internationalization with TQt.
-
-
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        const char * TQEucKrCodec::mimeName () const [virtual]
-
        
-Returns the codec's mime name.
-
-
        Reimplemented from TQTextCodec.
-
-
        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
        
-
-
        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
        TQt 3.3.8
        
-
        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qevent-h.html b/doc/html/qevent-h.html
index 2f0e57c7c..92658e8d7 100644
--- a/doc/html/qevent-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qevent-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qevent.h Include File
+ntqevent.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
        TQEvent Class Reference
        
-
-
        The TQEvent class is the base class of all
-event classes. Event objects contain event parameters.
-More...
-
        #include <qevent.h>
-
        Inherits TQt.
-
        Inherited by TQTimerEvent, TQMouseEvent, TQWheelEvent, TQTabletEvent, TQKeyEvent, TQFocusEvent, TQPaintEvent, TQMoveEvent, TQResizeEvent, TQCloseEvent, TQIconDragEvent, TQShowEvent, TQHideEvent, TQContextMenuEvent, TQIMEvent, TQDropEvent, TQDragLeaveEvent, TQChildEvent, and TQCustomEvent.
-
        List of all member functions.
-
        Public Members
        
-
          
-
        • enum Type { None = 0, Timer = 1, MouseButtonPress = 2, MouseButtonRelease = 3, MouseButtonDblClick = 4, MouseMove = 5, KeyPress = 6, KeyRelease = 7, FocusIn = 8, FocusOut = 9, Enter = 10, Leave = 11, Paint = 12, Move = 13, Resize = 14, Create = 15, Destroy = 16, Show = 17, Hide = 18, Close = 19, Quit = 20, Reparent = 21, ShowMinimized = 22, ShowNormal = 23, WindowActivate = 24, WindowDeactivate = 25, ShowToParent = 26, HideToParent = 27, ShowMaximized = 28, ShowFullScreen = 29, Accel = 30, Wheel = 31, AccelAvailable = 32, CaptionChange = 33, IconChange = 34, ParentFontChange = 35, ApplicationFontChange = 36, ParentPaletteChange = 37, ApplicationPaletteChange = 38, PaletteChange = 39, Clipboard = 40, Speech = 42, SockAct = 50, AccelOverride = 51, DeferredDelete = 52, DragEnter = 60, DragMove = 61, DragLeave = 62, Drop = 63, DragResponse = 64, ChildInserted = 70, ChildRemoved = 71, LayoutHint = 72, ShowWindowRequest = 73, WindowBlocked = 74, WindowUnblocked = 75, ActivateControl = 80, DeactivateControl = 81, ContextMenu = 82, IMStart = 83, IMCompose = 84, IMEnd = 85, Accessibility = 86, TabletMove = 87, LocaleChange = 88, LanguageChange = 89, LayoutDirectionChange = 90, Style = 91, TabletPress = 92, TabletRelease = 93, OkRequest = 94, HelpRequest = 95, WindowStateChange = 96, IconDrag = 97, User = 1000, MaxUser = 65535 }
          • 
-
        • TQEvent ( Type type )
          • 
-
        • virtual ~TQEvent ()
          • 
-
        • Type type () const
          • 
-
        • bool spontaneous () const
          • 
-
        
-
        Detailed Description
        
-
-
-The TQEvent class is the base class of all
-event classes. Event objects contain event parameters.
-
         
-
-
         TQt's main event loop (TQApplication::exec()) fetches native window
-system events from the event queue, translates them into TQEvents
-and sends the translated events to TQObjects.
-
         In general, events come from the underlying window system
-(spontaneous() returns TRUE) but it is also possible to manually
-send events using TQApplication::sendEvent() and
-TQApplication::postEvent() (spontaneous() returns FALSE).
-
         TQObjects receive events by having their TQObject::event() function
-called. The function can be reimplemented in subclasses to
-customize event handling and add additional event types;
-TQWidget::event() is a notable example. By default, events are
-dispatched to event handlers like TQObject::timerEvent() and
-TQWidget::mouseMoveEvent(). TQObject::installEventFilter() allows an
-object to intercept events destined for another object.
-
         The basic TQEvent contains only an event type parameter.
-Subclasses of TQEvent contain additional parameters that describe
-the particular event.
-
         
        See also TQObject::event(), TQObject::installEventFilter(), TQWidget::event(), TQApplication::sendEvent(), TQApplication::postEvent(), TQApplication::processEvents(), Environment Classes, and Event Classes.
-
-
        Member Type Documentation
        
-
        TQEvent::Type
        
-
-
         This enum type defines the valid event types in TQt. The event
-types and the specialized classes for each type are these:
-
          
-
        • TQEvent::None - Not an event.
-
        • TQEvent::Accessibility - Accessibility information is requested
-
        • TQEvent::Timer - Regular timer events, TQTimerEvent.
-
        • TQEvent::MouseButtonPress - Mouse press, TQMouseEvent.
-
        • TQEvent::MouseButtonRelease - Mouse release, TQMouseEvent.
-
        • TQEvent::MouseButtonDblClick - Mouse press again, TQMouseEvent.
-
        • TQEvent::MouseMove - Mouse move, TQMouseEvent.
-
        • TQEvent::KeyPress - Key press (including Shift, for example), TQKeyEvent.
-
        • TQEvent::KeyRelease - Key release, TQKeyEvent.
-
        • TQEvent::IMStart - The start of input method composition, TQIMEvent.
-
        • TQEvent::IMCompose - Input method composition is taking place, TQIMEvent.
-
        • TQEvent::IMEnd - The end of input method composition, TQIMEvent.
-
        • TQEvent::FocusIn - Widget gains keyboard focus, TQFocusEvent.
-
        • TQEvent::FocusOut - Widget loses keyboard focus, TQFocusEvent.
-
        • TQEvent::Enter - Mouse enters widget's boundaries.
-
        • TQEvent::Leave - Mouse leaves widget's boundaries.
-
        • TQEvent::Paint - Screen update necessary, TQPaintEvent.
-
        • TQEvent::Move - Widget's position changed, TQMoveEvent.
-
        • TQEvent::Resize - Widget's size changed, TQResizeEvent.
-
        • TQEvent::Show - Widget was shown on screen, TQShowEvent.
-
        • TQEvent::Hide - Widget was hidden, TQHideEvent.
-
        • TQEvent::ShowToParent - A child widget has been shown.
-
        • TQEvent::HideToParent - A child widget has been hidden.
-
        • TQEvent::Close - Widget was closed (permanently), TQCloseEvent.
-
        • TQEvent::ShowNormal - Widget should be shown normally (obsolete).
-
        • TQEvent::ShowMaximized - Widget should be shown maximized (obsolete).
-
        • TQEvent::ShowMinimized - Widget should be shown minimized (obsolete).
-
        • TQEvent::ShowFullScreen - Widget should be shown full-screen (obsolete).
-
        • TQEvent::ShowWindowRequest - Widget's window should be shown (obsolete).
-
        • TQEvent::DeferredDelete - The object will be deleted after it has
-cleaned up.
-
        • TQEvent::Accel - Key press in child for shortcut key handling, TQKeyEvent.
-
        • TQEvent::Wheel - Mouse wheel rolled, TQWheelEvent.
-
        • TQEvent::ContextMenu - Context popup menu, TQContextMenuEvent
-
        • TQEvent::AccelOverride - Key press in child, for overriding shortcut key handling, TQKeyEvent.
-
        • TQEvent::AccelAvailable - internal.
-
        • TQEvent::WindowActivate - Window was activated.
-
        • TQEvent::WindowDeactivate - Window was deactivated.
-
        • TQEvent::CaptionChange - Widget's caption changed.
-
        • TQEvent::IconChange - Widget's icon changed.
-
        • TQEvent::ParentFontChange - Font of the parent widget changed.
-
        • TQEvent::ApplicationFontChange - Default application font changed.
-
        • TQEvent::PaletteChange - Palette of the widget changed.
-
        • TQEvent::ParentPaletteChange - Palette of the parent widget changed.
-
        • TQEvent::ApplicationPaletteChange - Default application palette changed.
-
        • TQEvent::Clipboard - Clipboard contents have changed.
-
        • TQEvent::SockAct - Socket activated, used to implement TQSocketNotifier.
-
        • TQEvent::DragEnter - A drag-and-drop enters widget, TQDragEnterEvent.
-
        • TQEvent::DragMove - A drag-and-drop is in progress, TQDragMoveEvent.
-
        • TQEvent::DragLeave - A drag-and-drop leaves widget, TQDragLeaveEvent.
-
        • TQEvent::Drop - A drag-and-drop is completed, TQDropEvent.
-
        • TQEvent::DragResponse - Internal event used by TQt on some platforms.
-
        • TQEvent::ChildInserted - Object gets a child, TQChildEvent.
-
        • TQEvent::ChildRemoved - Object loses a child, TQChildEvent.
-
        • TQEvent::LayoutHint - Widget child has changed layout properties.
-
        • TQEvent::ActivateControl - Internal event used by TQt on some platforms.
-
        • TQEvent::DeactivateControl - Internal event used by TQt on some platforms.
-
        • TQEvent::LanguageChange - The application translation changed, TQTranslator
-
        • TQEvent::LayoutDirectionChange - The direction of layouts changed
-
        • TQEvent::LocaleChange - The system locale changed
-
        • TQEvent::Quit - Reserved.
-
        • TQEvent::Create - Reserved.
-
        • TQEvent::Destroy - Reserved.
-
        • TQEvent::Reparent - Reserved.
-
        • TQEvent::Speech - Reserved for speech input.
-
        • TQEvent::TabletMove - A Wacom Tablet Move Event.
-
        • TQEvent::Style - Internal use only
-
        • TQEvent::TabletPress - A Wacom Tablet Press Event
-
        • TQEvent::TabletRelease - A Wacom Tablet Release Event
-
        • TQEvent::OkRequest - Internal event used by TQt on some platforms.
-
        • TQEvent::HelpRequest - Internal event used by TQt on some platforms.
-
        • TQEvent::IconDrag - Internal event used by TQt on some platforms when proxy icon is dragged.
-
        • TQEvent::WindowStateChange - The window's state, i.e. minimized,
-maximized or full-screen, has changed. See TQWidget::windowState().
-
        • TQEvent::WindowBlocked - The window is modally blocked
-
        • TQEvent::WindowUnblocked - The window leaves modal blocking
-
        • TQEvent::User - User defined event.
-
        • TQEvent::MaxUser - Last user event id.
-
         User events should have values between User and MaxUser inclusive.
-
-
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        TQEvent::TQEvent ( Type type )
-
        
-
-
         Contructs an event object of type type.
-
-
        TQEvent::~TQEvent () [virtual]
-
        
-Destroys the event. If it was posted,
-it will be removed from the list of events to be posted.
-
-
        bool TQEvent::spontaneous () const
-
        
-
-
         Returns TRUE if the event originated outside the application, i.e.
-it is a system event; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
        Type TQEvent::type () const
-
        
-
-
         Returns the event type.
-
-
-
        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
        
-
-
        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
        TQt 3.3.8
        
-
        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qeventloop-h.html b/doc/html/qeventloop-h.html
index f0c15f054..8c0457951 100644
--- a/doc/html/qeventloop-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qeventloop-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qeventloop.h Include File
+ntqeventloop.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
        TQEventLoop Class Reference
        
-
-
        The TQEventLoop class manages the event queue.
-More...
-
        #include <qeventloop.h>
-
        Inherits TQObject.
-
        Inherited by TQMotif.
-
        List of all member functions.
-
        Public Members
        
-
-
        Signals
        
-
-
        Detailed Description
        
-
-
-The TQEventLoop class manages the event queue.
-
         
-
-
         It receives events from the window system and other sources.  It
-then sends them to TQApplication for processing and delivery.
-
         TQEventLoop allows the application programmer to have more control
-over event delivery.  Programs that perform long operations can
-call either processOneEvent() or processEvents() with various
-ProcessEvent values OR'ed together to control which events should
-be delivered.
-
         TQEventLoop also allows the integration of an external event loop
-with the TQt event loop.  The Motif Extension included with TQt
-includes a reimplementation of TQEventLoop for merging TQt and Motif
-events together.
-
         To use your own instance of TQEventLoop or TQEventLoop subclass create 
-it before you create the TQApplication object.
-
        See also Main Window and Related Classes and Event Classes.
-
-
        Member Type Documentation
        
-
        TQEventLoop::ProcessEvents
         
-
         This enum controls the types of events processed by the
-processEvents() functions.
-
          
-
        • TQEventLoop::AllEvents - All events are processed
-
        • TQEventLoop::ExcludeUserInput - Do not process user input events.
-( ButtonPress, KeyPress, etc. )
-
        • TQEventLoop::ExcludeSocketNotifiers - Do not process socket notifier
-events.
-
        • TQEventLoop::WaitForMore - Wait for events if no pending events
-are available.
-
         
        See also processEvents().
-
-
        TQEventLoop::ProcessEventsFlags
         
-A typedef to allow various ProcessEvents values to be OR'ed together.
-
         
        See also ProcessEvents.
-
-
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        TQEventLoop::TQEventLoop ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
        
-Creates a TQEventLoop object, this object becomes the global event loop object.
-There can only be one event loop object. The TQEventLoop is usually constructed 
-by calling TQApplication::eventLoop(). To create your own event loop object create 
-it before you instantiate the TQApplication object.
-
         The parent and name arguments are passed on to the TQObject constructor.
-
-
        TQEventLoop::~TQEventLoop ()
-
        
-Destructs the TQEventLoop object.
-
-
        void TQEventLoop::aboutToBlock () [signal]
-
         
-
         This signal is emitted before the event loop calls a function that
-could block.
-
         
        See also awake().
-
-
        int TQEventLoop::activateSocketNotifiers ()
-
         
-
         Activates all pending socket notifiers and returns the number of
-socket notifiers that were activated.
-
-
        int TQEventLoop::activateTimers ()
-
         
-
         Activates all TQt timers and returns the number of timers that were
-activated.
-
         TQEventLoop subclasses that do their own timer handling need to
-call this after the time returned by timeToWait() has elapsed.
-
         Note: This function is only useful on systems where select() is
-used to block the eventloop.  On Windows, this function always
-returns 0.  On MacOS X, this function always returns 0 when the
-GUI is enabled.  On MacOS X, this function returns the documented
-value when the GUI is disabled.
-
-
        void TQEventLoop::awake () [signal]
-
         
-
         This signal is emitted after the event loop returns from a
-function that could block.
-
         
        See also wakeUp() and aboutToBlock().
-
-
        int TQEventLoop::enterLoop () [virtual]
-
         
-
         This function enters the main event loop (recursively). Do not call
-it unless you really know what you are doing.
-
-
        int TQEventLoop::exec () [virtual]
-
        
-Enters the main event loop and waits until exit() is called, and
-returns the value that was set to exit().
-
         It is necessary to call this function to start event handling. The
-main event loop receives events from the window system and
-dispatches these to the application widgets.
-
         Generally speaking, no user interaction can take place before
-calling exec(). As a special case, modal widgets like TQMessageBox
-can be used before calling exec(), because modal widgets call
-exec() to start a local event loop.
-
         To make your application perform idle processing, i.e. executing a
-special function whenever there are no pending events, use a
-TQTimer with 0 timeout. More advanced idle processing schemes can
-be achieved using processEvents().
-
         
        See also TQApplication::quit(), exit(), and processEvents().
-
-
        void TQEventLoop::exit ( int retcode = 0 ) [virtual]
-
         
-
         Tells the event loop to exit with a return code.
-
         After this function has been called, the event loop returns from
-the call to exec(). The exec() function returns retcode.
-
         By convention, a retcode of 0 means success, and any non-zero
-value indicates an error.
-
         Note that unlike the C library function of the same name, this
-function does return to the caller -- it is event processing that
-stops.
-
         
        See also TQApplication::quit() and exec().
-
-
        void TQEventLoop::exitLoop () [virtual]
-
         
-
         This function exits from a recursive call to the main event loop.
-Do not call it unless you really know what you are doing.
-
-
        bool TQEventLoop::hasPendingEvents () const [virtual]
-
         
-
         Returns TRUE if there is an event waiting, otherwise it returns FALSE.
-
-
        int TQEventLoop::loopLevel () const [virtual]
-
         
-
         Returns the current loop level.
-
-
        void TQEventLoop::processEvents ( ProcessEventsFlags flags, int maxTime )
-
        
-Process pending events that match flags for a maximum of maxTime milliseconds, or until there are no more events to
-process, which ever is shorter.
-
         This function is especially useful if you have a long running
-operation and want to show its progress without allowing user
-input, i.e. by using the ExcludeUserInput flag.
-
         NOTE: This function will not process events continuously; it
-returns after all available events are processed.
-
         NOTE: Specifying the WaitForMore flag makes no sense and will
-be ignored.
-
-
        bool TQEventLoop::processEvents ( ProcessEventsFlags flags ) [virtual]
-
        
-
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
         Processes pending events that match flags until there are no
-more events to process.
-
         This function is especially useful if you have a long running
-operation and want to show its progress without allowing user
-input, i.e. by using the ExcludeUserInput flag.
-
         If the WaitForMore flag is set in flags, the behavior of
-this function is as follows:
-
         
          
-
           
        •  If events are available, this function returns after processing
-them.
-
           
        •  If no events are available, this function will wait until more
-are available and return after processing newly available events.
-
           
        
-
         If the WaitForMore flag is not set in flags, and no
-events are available, this function will return immediately.
-
         NOTE: This function will not process events continuously; it
-returns after all available events are processed.
-
         This function returns TRUE if an event was processed; otherwise it
-returns FALSE.
-
         
        See also ProcessEvents and hasPendingEvents().
-
-
        void TQEventLoop::registerSocketNotifier ( TQSocketNotifier * notifier ) [virtual]
-
         
-
         Registers notifier with the event loop.  Subclasses need to
-reimplement this method to tie a socket notifier into another
-event loop.  Reimplementations MUST call the base
-implementation.
-
-
        void TQEventLoop::setSocketNotifierPending ( TQSocketNotifier * notifier )
-
         
-
         Marks notifier as pending.  The socket notifier will be
-activated the next time activateSocketNotifiers() is called.
-
-
        int TQEventLoop::timeToWait () const
-
         
-
         Returns the number of milliseconds that TQt needs to handle its
-timers or -1 if there are no timers running.
-
         TQEventLoop subclasses that do their own timer handling need to use
-this to make sure that TQt's timers continue to work.
-
         Note: This function is only useful on systems where select() is
-used to block the eventloop.  On Windows, this function always
-returns -1.  On MacOS X, this function always returns -1 when the
-GUI is enabled.  On MacOS X, this function returns the documented
-value when the GUI is disabled.
-
-
        void TQEventLoop::unregisterSocketNotifier ( TQSocketNotifier * notifier ) [virtual]
-
         
-
         Unregisters notifier from the event loop.  Subclasses need to
-reimplement this method to tie a socket notifier into another
-event loop.  Reimplementations MUST call the base
-implementation.
-
-
        void TQEventLoop::wakeUp () [virtual]
-
        Note: This function is thread-safe when TQt is built withthread support.
        
- 
-
-
         Wakes up the event loop.
-
         
        See also awake().
-
-
-
        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
        
-
-
        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
        TQt 3.3.8
        
-
        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qfd-example.html b/doc/html/qfd-example.html
index 87fc9ad7b..25a4a49b7 100644
--- a/doc/html/qfd-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/qfd-example.html
@@ -49,20 +49,20 @@ This example program displays all characters of a font.
 #ifndef FontDisplayer_H
 #define FontDisplayer_H
 
-#include <qframe.h>
-#include <qmainwindow.h>
+#include <ntqframe.h>
+#include <ntqmainwindow.h>
 
 class TQSlider;
 
-class FontRowTable : public TQFrame {
+class FontRowTable : public TQFrame {
     Q_OBJECT
 public:
-    FontRowTable( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
+    FontRowTable( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
 
-    TQSize sizeHint() const;
+    TQSize sizeHint() const;
 
 signals:
-    void fontInformation(const TQString&);
+    void fontInformation(const TQString&);
 
 public slots:
     void setRow(int);
@@ -70,17 +70,17 @@ public slots:
 
 
 protected:
-    TQSize cellSize() const;
+    TQSize cellSize() const;
     void paintEvent( TQPaintEvent* );
 private:
-    TQFont tablefont;
+    TQFont tablefont;
     int row;
 };
 
-class FontDisplayer : public TQMainWindow {
+class FontDisplayer : public TQMainWindow {
     Q_OBJECT
 public:
-    FontDisplayer( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
+    FontDisplayer( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
 };
 
 #endif
@@ -99,97 +99,97 @@ public:
 *****************************************************************************/
 
 #include "fontdisplayer.h"
-#include <qapplication.h>
-#include <qslider.h>
-#include <qspinbox.h>
-#include <qpainter.h>
-#include <qtoolbar.h>
-#include <qstatusbar.h>
-#include <qlabel.h>
-#include <qpushbutton.h>
-#include <qfontdialog.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
+#include <ntqslider.h>
+#include <ntqspinbox.h>
+#include <ntqpainter.h>
+#include <ntqtoolbar.h>
+#include <ntqstatusbar.h>
+#include <ntqlabel.h>
+#include <ntqpushbutton.h>
+#include <ntqfontdialog.h>
 #include <stdlib.h>
 
 
-FontRowTable::FontRowTable( TQWidget* parent, const char* name ) :
-    TQFrame(parent,name)
+FontRowTable::FontRowTable( TQWidget* parent, const char* name ) :
+    TQFrame(parent,name)
 {
-    setBackgroundMode(PaletteBase);
-    setFrameStyle(Panel|Sunken);
-    setMargin(8);
+    setBackgroundMode(PaletteBase);
+    setFrameStyle(Panel|Sunken);
+    setMargin(8);
     setRow(0);
-    tablefont = TQApplication::font();
+    tablefont = TQApplication::font();
 }
 
-TQSize FontRowTable::sizeHint() const
+TQSize FontRowTable::sizeHint() const
 {
-    return 24*cellSize()+TQSize(2,2)*(margin()+frameWidth());
+    return 24*cellSize()+TQSize(2,2)*(margin()+frameWidth());
 }
 
 TQSize FontRowTable::cellSize() const
 {
-    TQFontMetrics fm = fontMetrics();
-    return TQSize( fm.maxWidth(), fm.lineSpacing()+1 );
+    TQFontMetrics fm = fontMetrics();
+    return TQSize( fm.maxWidth(), fm.lineSpacing()+1 );
 }
 
-void FontRowTable::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent* e )
+void FontRowTable::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent* e )
 {
-    TQFrame::paintEvent(e);
-    TQPainter p(this);
-    p.setClipRegion(e->region());
-    TQRect r = e->rect();
-    TQFontMetrics fm = fontMetrics();
-    int ml = frameWidth()+margin() + 1 + TQMAX(0,-fm.minLeftBearing());
-    int mt = frameWidth()+margin();
-    TQSize cell((width()-15-ml)/16,(height()-15-mt)/16);
-
-    if ( !cell.width() || !cell.height() )
+    TQFrame::paintEvent(e);
+    TQPainter p(this);
+    p.setClipRegion(e->region());
+    TQRect r = e->rect();
+    TQFontMetrics fm = fontMetrics();
+    int ml = frameWidth()+margin() + 1 + TQMAX(0,-fm.minLeftBearing());
+    int mt = frameWidth()+margin();
+    TQSize cell((width()-15-ml)/16,(height()-15-mt)/16);
+
+    if ( !cell.width() || !cell.height() )
         return;
 
-    int mini = r.left() / cell.width();
-    int maxi = (r.right()+cell.width()-1) / cell.width();
-    int minj = r.top() / cell.height();
-    int maxj = (r.bottom()+cell.height()-1) / cell.height();
+    int mini = r.left() / cell.width();
+    int maxi = (r.right()+cell.width()-1) / cell.width();
+    int minj = r.top() / cell.height();
+    int maxj = (r.bottom()+cell.height()-1) / cell.height();
 
-    int h = fm.height();
+    int h = fm.height();
 
-    TQColor body(255,255,192);
-    TQColor negative(255,192,192);
-    TQColor positive(192,192,255);
-    TQColor rnegative(255,128,128);
-    TQColor rpositive(128,128,255);
+    TQColor body(255,255,192);
+    TQColor negative(255,192,192);
+    TQColor positive(192,192,255);
+    TQColor rnegative(255,128,128);
+    TQColor rpositive(128,128,255);
 
     for (int j = minj; j<=maxj; j++) {
         for (int i = mini; i<=maxi; i++) {
             if ( i < 16 && j < 16 ) {
-                int x = i*cell.width();
-                int y = j*cell.height();
+                int x = i*cell.width();
+                int y = j*cell.height();
 
                 TQChar ch = TQChar(j*16+i,row);
 
-                if ( fm.inFont(ch) ) {
-                    int w = fm.width(ch);
-                    int l = fm.leftBearing(ch);
-                    int r = fm.rightBearing(ch);
+                if ( fm.inFont(ch) ) {
+                    int w = fm.width(ch);
+                    int l = fm.leftBearing(ch);
+                    int r = fm.rightBearing(ch);
 
                     x += ml;
                     y += mt+h;
 
-                    p.fillRect(x,y,w,-h,body);
+                    p.fillRect(x,y,w,-h,body);
                     if ( w ) {
                         if ( l ) {
-                            p.fillRect(x+(l>0?0:l), y-h/2, abs(l),-h/2,
+                            p.fillRect(x+(l>0?0:l), y-h/2, abs(l),-h/2,
                                        l < 0 ? negative : positive);
                         }
                         if ( r ) {
-                            p.fillRect(x+w-(r>0?r:0),y+2, abs(r),-h/2,
+                            p.fillRect(x+w-(r>0?r:0),y+2, abs(r),-h/2,
                                        r < 0 ? rnegative : rpositive);
                         }
                     }
-                    TQString s;
+                    TQString s;
                     s += ch;
-                    p.setPen(TQPen(TQt::black));
-                    p.drawText(x,y,s);
+                    p.setPen(TQPen(TQt::black));
+                    p.drawText(x,y,s);
                 }
             }
         }
@@ -200,49 +200,49 @@ void FontRowTable::setRow(int r)
 {
     row = r;
 
-    TQFontMetrics fm = fontMetrics();
-    TQFontInfo fi = fontInfo();
-    TQString str = TQString("%1 %2pt%3%4 mLB=%5 mRB=%6 mW=%7")
-                    .arg(fi.family())
-                    .arg(fi.pointSize())
-                    .arg(fi.bold() ? " bold" : "")
-                    .arg(fi.italic() ? " italic" : "")
-                    .arg(fm.minLeftBearing())
-                    .arg(fm.minRightBearing())
-                    .arg(fm.maxWidth());
+    TQFontMetrics fm = fontMetrics();
+    TQFontInfo fi = fontInfo();
+    TQString str = TQString("%1 %2pt%3%4 mLB=%5 mRB=%6 mW=%7")
+                    .arg(fi.family())
+                    .arg(fi.pointSize())
+                    .arg(fi.bold() ? " bold" : "")
+                    .arg(fi.italic() ? " italic" : "")
+                    .arg(fm.minLeftBearing())
+                    .arg(fm.minRightBearing())
+                    .arg(fm.maxWidth());
 
     emit fontInformation(str);
-    update();
+    update();
 }
 
 void FontRowTable::chooseFont()
 {
     bool ok;
-    TQFont oldfont = tablefont;
-    tablefont = TQFontDialog::getFont(&ok, oldfont, this);
+    TQFont oldfont = tablefont;
+    tablefont = TQFontDialog::getFont(&ok, oldfont, this);
 
     if (ok)
-        setFont(tablefont);
+        setFont(tablefont);
     else
         tablefont = oldfont;
 }
 
-FontDisplayer::FontDisplayer( TQWidget* parent, const char* name ) :
-    TQMainWindow(parent,name)
+FontDisplayer::FontDisplayer( TQWidget* parent, const char* name ) :
+    TQMainWindow(parent,name)
 {
     FontRowTable* table = new FontRowTable(this);
-    TQToolBar* controls = new TQToolBar(this);
-    (void) new TQLabel(tr("Row:"), controls);
-    TQSpinBox *row = new TQSpinBox(0,255,1,controls);
-    controls->addSeparator();
-    TQPushButton *fontbutton = new TQPushButton(tr("Font..."), controls);
-
-    connect(row,SIGNAL(valueChanged(int)),table,SLOT(setRow(int)));
-    connect(fontbutton, SIGNAL(clicked()), table, SLOT(chooseFont()));
-    connect(table,SIGNAL(fontInformation(const TQString&)),
-            statusBar(),SLOT(message(const TQString&)));
+    TQToolBar* controls = new TQToolBar(this);
+    (void) new TQLabel(tr("Row:"), controls);
+    TQSpinBox *row = new TQSpinBox(0,255,1,controls);
+    controls->addSeparator();
+    TQPushButton *fontbutton = new TQPushButton(tr("Font..."), controls);
+
+    connect(row,SIGNAL(valueChanged(int)),table,SLOT(setRow(int)));
+    connect(fontbutton, SIGNAL(clicked()), table, SLOT(chooseFont()));
+    connect(table,SIGNAL(fontInformation(const TQString&)),
+            statusBar(),SLOT(message(const TQString&)));
     table->setRow(0);
-    setCentralWidget(table);
+    setCentralWidget(table);
 }
 
        
 
@@ -260,26 +260,26 @@ void FontRowTable::chooseFont()
 
 #include "fontdisplayer.h"
 
-#include <qapplication.h>
-#include <qslider.h>
-#include <qpainter.h>
-#include <qstatusbar.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
+#include <ntqslider.h>
+#include <ntqpainter.h>
+#include <ntqstatusbar.h>
 
 
 
 int main(int argc, char** argv)
 {
-    TQApplication app(argc,argv);
+    TQApplication app(argc,argv);
 
     FontDisplayer m;
-    TQSize sh = m.centralWidget()->sizeHint();
-    m.resize(sh.width(),
-             sh.height()+3*m.statusBar()->height());
-    app.setMainWidget(&m);
-    m.setCaption("TQt Example - TQFD");
-    m.show();
-
-    return app.exec();
+    TQSize sh = m.centralWidget()->sizeHint();
+    m.resize(sh.width(),
+             sh.height()+3*m.statusBar()->height());
+    app.setMainWidget(&m);
+    m.setCaption("TQt Example - TQFD");
+    m.show();
+
+    return app.exec();
 }
 
      
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qfile-h.html b/doc/html/qfile-h.html
index b871d35a2..51dbff1e2 100644
--- a/doc/html/qfile-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qfile-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qfile.h Include File
+ntqfile.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
      
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
      TQFile Class Reference
      
-
-
      The TQFile class is an I/O device that operates on files.
-More...
-
      Almost all the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support. The exceptions are setEncodingFunction(), setDecodingFunction(), and setErrorString().
-
      #include <qfile.h>
-
      Inherits TQIODevice.
-
      List of all member functions.
-
      Public Members
      
-
        
-
      • TQFile ()
        • 
-
      • TQFile ( const TQString & name )
        • 
-
      • ~TQFile ()
        • 
-
      • TQString name () const
        • 
-
      • void setName ( const TQString & name )
        • 
-
      • typedef TQCString (* EncoderFn ) ( const TQString & fileName )
        • 
-
      • typedef TQString (* DecoderFn ) ( const TQCString & localfileName )
        • 
-
      • bool exists () const
        • 
-
      • bool remove ()
        • 
-
      • virtual bool open ( int m )
        • 
-
      • bool open ( int m, FILE * f )
        • 
-
      • bool open ( int m, int f )
        • 
-
      • virtual void close ()
        • 
-
      • virtual void flush ()
        • 
-
      • virtual Offset size () const
        • 
-
      • virtual bool atEnd () const
        • 
-
      • virtual Q_LONG readLine ( char * p, Q_ULONG maxlen )
        • 
-
      • Q_LONG readLine ( TQString & s, Q_ULONG maxlen )
        • 
-
      • virtual int getch ()
        • 
-
      • virtual int putch ( int ch )
        • 
-
      • virtual int ungetch ( int ch )
        • 
-
      • int handle () const
        • 
-
      • TQString errorString () const
        • 
-
      
-
      Static Public Members
      
-
-
      Important Inherited Members
      
-
-
      Protected Members
      
-
-
      Detailed Description
      
-
-
-
-The TQFile class is an I/O device that operates on files.
-
       
-
-
       TQFile is an I/O device for reading and writing binary and text
-files. A TQFile may be used by itself or more conveniently with a
-TQDataStream or TQTextStream.
-
       The file name is usually passed in the constructor but can be
-changed with setName(). You can check for a file's existence with
-exists() and remove a file with remove().
-
       The file is opened with open(), closed with close() and flushed
-with flush(). Data is usually read and written using TQDataStream
-or TQTextStream, but you can read with readBlock() and readLine()
-and write with writeBlock(). TQFile also supports getch(),
-ungetch() and putch().
-
       The size of the file is returned by size(). You can get the
-current file position or move to a new file position using the
-at() functions. If you've reached the end of the file, atEnd()
-returns TRUE. The file handle is returned by handle().
-
       Here is a code fragment that uses TQTextStream to read a text file
-line by line. It prints each line with a line number.
-
      -    TQStringList lines;
-    TQFile file( "file.txt" );
-    if ( file.open( IO_ReadOnly ) ) {
-        TQTextStream stream( &file );
-        TQString line;
-        int i = 1;
-        while ( !stream.atEnd() ) {
-            line = stream.readLine(); // line of text excluding '\n'
-            printf( "%3d: %s\n", i++, line.latin1() );
-            lines += line;
-        }
-        file.close();
-    }
-    
      
- 
-
       Writing text is just as easy. The following example shows how to
-write the data we read into the string list from the previous
-example:
-
      -    TQFile file( "file.txt" );
-    if ( file.open( IO_WriteOnly ) ) {
-        TQTextStream stream( &file );
-        for ( TQStringList::Iterator it = lines.begin(); it != lines.end(); ++it )
-            stream << *it << "\n";
-        file.close();
-    }
-    
      
- 
-
       The TQFileInfo class holds detailed information about a file, such
-as access permissions, file dates and file types.
-
       The TQDir class manages directories and lists of file names.
-
       TQt uses Unicode file names. If you want to do your own I/O on Unix
-systems you may want to use encodeName() (and decodeName()) to
-convert the file name into the local encoding.
-
       
-
       
      See also TQDataStream, TQTextStream, and Input/Output and Networking.
-
-
      Member Type Documentation
      
-
      TQFile::DecoderFn
      
-
-
       This is used by TQFile::setDecodingFunction().
-
-
      TQFile::EncoderFn
      
-
-
       This is used by TQFile::setEncodingFunction().
-
-
      Member Function Documentation
      
-
      TQFile::TQFile ()
-
      
-Constructs a TQFile with no name.
-
-
      TQFile::TQFile ( const TQString & name )
-
      
-Constructs a TQFile with a file name name.
-
       
      See also setName().
-
-
      TQFile::~TQFile ()
-
      
-Destroys a TQFile. Calls close().
-
-
      bool TQFile::atEnd () const [virtual]
-
      
-Returns TRUE if the end of file has been reached; otherwise returns FALSE.
-If TQFile has not been open()'d, then the behavior is undefined.
-
       
      See also size().
-
-
      Example: distributor/distributor.ui.h.
-
      Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
-
      void TQFile::close () [virtual]
-
      
-Closes an open file.
-
       The file is not closed if it was opened with an existing file handle.
-If the existing file handle is a FILE*, the file is flushed.
-If the existing file handle is an int file descriptor, nothing
-is done to the file.
-
       Some "write-behind" filesystems may report an unspecified error on
-closing the file. These errors only indicate that something may
-have gone wrong since the previous open(). In such a case status()
-reports IO_UnspecifiedError after close(), otherwise IO_Ok.
-
       
      See also open() and flush().
-
-
      Examples: chart/chartform_files.cpp, distributor/distributor.ui.h, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, qdir/qdir.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, and xml/outliner/outlinetree.cpp.
-
      Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
-
      TQString TQFile::decodeName ( const TQCString & localFileName ) [static]
-
      
-This does the reverse of TQFile::encodeName() using localFileName.
-
       
      See also setDecodingFunction().
-
-
      Example: distributor/distributor.ui.h.
-
      TQCString TQFile::encodeName ( const TQString & fileName ) [static]
-
      
-When you use TQFile, TQFileInfo, and TQDir to access the file system
-with TQt, you can use Unicode file names. On Unix, these file names
-are converted to an 8-bit encoding. If you want to do your own
-file I/O on Unix, you should convert the file name using this
-function. On Windows NT/2000, Unicode file names are supported
-directly in the file system and this function should be avoided.
-On Windows 95, non-Latin1 locales are not supported.
-
       By default, this function converts fileName to the local 8-bit
-encoding determined by the user's locale. This is sufficient for
-file names that the user chooses. File names hard-coded into the
-application should only use 7-bit ASCII filename characters.
-
       The conversion scheme can be changed using setEncodingFunction().
-This might be useful if you wish to give the user an option to
-store file names in UTF-8, etc., but be aware that such file names
-would probably then be unrecognizable when seen by other programs.
-
       
      See also decodeName().
-
-
      Example: distributor/distributor.ui.h.
-
      TQString TQFile::errorString () const
-
      
-Returns a human-readable description of the reason of an error that occurred
-on the device. The error described by the string corresponds to changes of
-TQIODevice::status(). If the status is reset, the error string is also reset.
-
       The returned strings are not translated with the TQObject::tr() or
-TQApplication::translate() functions. They are marked as translatable
-strings in the "TQFile" context. Before you show the string to the user you
-should translate it first, for example:
-
       
      -        TQFile f( "address.dat" );
-        if ( !f.open( IO_ReadOnly ) {
-            TQMessageBox::critical(
-                this,
-                tr("Open failed"),
-                tr("Could not open file for reading: %1").arg( qApp->translate("TQFile",f.errorString()) )
-                );
-            return;
-        }
-    
      
- 
-
       
      See also TQIODevice::status(), TQIODevice::resetStatus(), and setErrorString().
-
-
      bool TQFile::exists ( const TQString & fileName ) [static]
-
      
-Returns TRUE if the file given by fileName exists; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
-
      Examples: chart/chartform.cpp, dirview/dirview.cpp, and helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp.
-
      bool TQFile::exists () const
-
      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
       Returns TRUE if this file exists; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
       
      See also name().
-
-
      void TQFile::flush () [virtual]
-
      
-Flushes the file buffer to the disk.
-
       close() also flushes the file buffer.
-
-
      Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
-
      int TQFile::getch () [virtual]
-
      
-Reads a single byte/character from the file.
-
       Returns the byte/character read, or -1 if the end of the file has
-been reached.
-
       
      See also putch() and ungetch().
-
-
      Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
-
      int TQFile::handle () const
-
      
-Returns the file handle of the file.
-
       This is a small positive integer, suitable for use with C library
-functions such as fdopen() and fcntl(). On systems that use file
-descriptors for sockets (ie. Unix systems, but not Windows) the handle
-can be used with TQSocketNotifier as well.
-
       If the file is not open or there is an error, handle() returns -1.
-
       
      See also TQSocketNotifier.
-
-
      TQString TQFile::name () const
-
      
-
-
       Returns the name set by setName().
-
       
      See also setName() and TQFileInfo::fileName().
-
-
      bool TQFile::open ( int m ) [virtual]
-
      
-Opens the file specified by the file name currently set, using the
-mode m. Returns TRUE if successful, otherwise FALSE.
-
       
-
       The mode parameter m must be a combination of the following flags:
-
      
-
       Flag Meaning
-
       IO_Raw
-Raw (non-buffered) file access.
-
       IO_ReadOnly
-Opens the file in read-only mode.
-
       IO_WriteOnly
-Opens the file in write-only mode. If this flag is used
-with another flag, e.g. IO_ReadOnly or IO_Raw or IO_Append, the file is not truncated; but if used on
-its own (or with IO_Truncate), the file is truncated.
-
       IO_ReadWrite
-Opens the file in read/write mode, equivalent to (IO_ReadOnly | IO_WriteOnly).
-
       IO_Append
-Opens the file in append mode. (You must actually use (IO_WriteOnly | IO_Append) to make the file writable and
-to go into append mode.) This mode is very useful when you
-want to write something to a log file. The file index is
-set to the end of the file. Note that the result is
-undefined if you position the file index manually using
-at() in append mode.
-
       IO_Truncate
-Truncates the file.
-
       IO_Translate
-Enables carriage returns and linefeed translation for text
-files under Windows.
-
      
-
       The raw access mode is best when I/O is block-operated using a 4KB
-block size or greater. Buffered access works better when reading
-small portions of data at a time.
-
       Warning: When working with buffered files, data may not be written
-to the file at once. Call flush() to make sure that the data is
-really written.
-
       Warning: If you have a buffered file opened for both reading and
-writing you must not perform an input operation immediately after
-an output operation or vice versa. You should always call flush()
-or a file positioning operation, e.g. at(), between input and
-output operations, otherwise the buffer may contain garbage.
-
       If the file does not exist and IO_WriteOnly or IO_ReadWrite
-is specified, it is created.
-
       Example:
-
      -        TQFile f1( "/tmp/data.bin" );
-        f1.open( IO_Raw | IO_ReadWrite );
-
-        TQFile f2( "readme.txt" );
-        f2.open( IO_ReadOnly | IO_Translate );
-
-        TQFile f3( "audit.log" );
-        f3.open( IO_WriteOnly | IO_Append );
-    
      
- 
-
       
      See also name(), close(), isOpen(), and flush().
-
-
      Examples: application/application.cpp, chart/chartform_files.cpp, distributor/distributor.ui.h, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, qdir/qdir.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, and xml/outliner/outlinetree.cpp.
-
      Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
-
      bool TQFile::open ( int m, FILE * f )
-
      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
       Opens a file in the mode m using an existing file handle f.
-Returns TRUE if successful, otherwise FALSE.
-
       Example:
-
      -    #include <stdio.h>
-
-    void printError( const char* msg )
-    {
-        TQFile f;
-        f.open( IO_WriteOnly, stderr );
-        f.writeBlock( msg, qstrlen(msg) );      // write to stderr
-        f.close();
-    }
-  
      
- 
-
       When a TQFile is opened using this function, close() does not actually
-close the file, only flushes it.
-
       Warning: If f is stdin, stdout, stderr, you may not
-be able to seek.  See TQIODevice::isSequentialAccess() for more
-information.
-
       
      See also close().
-
-
      bool TQFile::open ( int m, int f )
-
      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
       Opens a file in the mode m using an existing file descriptor f.
-Returns TRUE if successful, otherwise FALSE.
-
       When a TQFile is opened using this function, close() does not actually
-close the file.
-
       The TQFile that is opened using this function, is automatically set to be in
-raw mode; this means that the file input/output functions are slow. If you
-run into performance issues, you should try to use one of the other open
-functions.
-
       Warning: If f is one of 0 (stdin), 1 (stdout) or 2 (stderr), you may not
-be able to seek. size() is set to INT_MAX (in limits.h).
-
       
      See also close().
-
-
      int TQFile::putch ( int ch ) [virtual]
-
      
-Writes the character ch to the file.
-
       Returns ch, or -1 if some error occurred.
-
       
      See also getch() and ungetch().
-
-
      Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
-
      TQByteArray TQIODevice::readAll () [virtual]
-
      
-This convenience function returns all of the remaining data in the
-device.
-
-
      Q_LONG TQFile::readLine ( char * p, Q_ULONG maxlen ) [virtual]
-
      
-Reads a line of text.
-
       Reads bytes from the file into the char* p, until end-of-line
-or maxlen bytes have been read, whichever occurs first. Returns
-the number of bytes read, or -1 if there was an error. Any
-terminating newline is not stripped.
-
       This function is only efficient for buffered files. Avoid
-readLine() for files that have been opened with the IO_Raw
-flag.
-
       
      See also readBlock() and TQTextStream::readLine().
-
-
      Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
-
      Q_LONG TQFile::readLine ( TQString & s, Q_ULONG maxlen )
-
      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
       Reads a line of text.
-
       Reads bytes from the file into string s, until end-of-line or
-maxlen bytes have been read, whichever occurs first. Returns
-the number of bytes read, or -1 if there was an error, e.g. end of
-file. Any terminating newline is not stripped.
-
       This function is only efficient for buffered files. Avoid using
-readLine() for files that have been opened with the IO_Raw
-flag.
-
       Note that the string is read as plain Latin1 bytes, not Unicode.
-
       
      See also readBlock() and TQTextStream::readLine().
-
-
      bool TQFile::remove ()
-
      
-Removes the file specified by the file name currently set. Returns
-TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
       The file is closed before it is removed.
-
-
      bool TQFile::remove ( const TQString & fileName ) [static]
-
      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
       Removes the file fileName.
-Returns TRUE if successful, otherwise FALSE.
-
-
      void TQFile::setDecodingFunction ( DecoderFn f ) [static]
-
      Warning: This function is not reentrant.
      
-
-
-
       Sets the function for decoding 8-bit file names to f. The
-default uses the locale-specific 8-bit encoding.
-
       
      See also encodeName() and decodeName().
-
-
      void TQFile::setEncodingFunction ( EncoderFn f ) [static]
-
      Warning: This function is not reentrant.
      
-
-
-
       Sets the function for encoding Unicode file names to f. The
-default encodes in the locale-specific 8-bit encoding.
-
       
      See also encodeName().
-
-
      void TQFile::setErrorString ( const TQString & str ) [protected]
-
      Warning: This function is not reentrant.
      
-
-
-
       Sets the error string returned by the errorString() function to str.
-
       
      See also errorString() and TQIODevice::status().
-
-
      void TQFile::setName ( const TQString & name )
-
      
-Sets the name of the file to name. The name can have no path, a
-relative path or an absolute absolute path.
-
       Do not call this function if the file has already been opened.
-
       If the file name has no path or a relative path, the path used
-will be whatever the application's current directory path is
-at the time of the open() call.
-
       Example:
-
      -        TQFile file;
-        TQDir::setCurrent( "/tmp" );
-        file.setName( "readme.txt" );
-        TQDir::setCurrent( "/home" );
-        file.open( IO_ReadOnly );      // opens "/home/readme.txt" under Unix
-    
      
- 
-
       Note that the directory separator "/" works for all operating
-systems supported by TQt.
-
       
      See also name(), TQFileInfo, and TQDir.
-
-
      Offset TQFile::size () const [virtual]
-
      
-Returns the file size.
-
      See also at().
-
-
      Example: table/statistics/statistics.cpp.
-
      Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
-
      int TQFile::ungetch ( int ch ) [virtual]
-
      
-Puts the character ch back into the file and decrements the
-index if it is not zero.
-
       This function is normally called to "undo" a getch() operation.
-
       Returns ch, or -1 if an error occurred.
-
       
      See also getch() and putch().
-
-
      Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
-
-
      
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
      
-
-
      Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
      TQt 3.3.8
      
-
      
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qfiledialog-h.html b/doc/html/qfiledialog-h.html
index f44db2e82..715f04fc6 100644
--- a/doc/html/qfiledialog-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qfiledialog-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qfiledialog.h Include File
+ntqfiledialog.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
      
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
      TQFileDialog Class Reference
      
-
-
      The TQFileDialog class provides dialogs that allow users to select files or directories.
-More...
-
      #include <qfiledialog.h>
-
      Inherits TQDialog.
-
      List of all member functions.
-
      Public Members
      
-
-
      Public Slots
      
-
        
-
      • void setDir ( const TQString & pathstr )
        • 
-
      • void setUrl ( const TQUrlOperator & url )
        • 
-
      • void setFilter ( const TQString & newFilter )
        • 
-
      • void setFilters ( const TQString & filters )
        • 
-
      • void setFilters ( const char ** types )
        • 
-
      • void setFilters ( const TQStringList & )
        • 
-
      
-
      Signals
      
-
-
      Static Public Members
      
-
        
-
      • TQString getOpenFileName ( const TQString & startWith = TQString::null, const TQString & filter = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, TQString * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE )
        • 
-
      • TQString getSaveFileName ( const TQString & startWith = TQString::null, const TQString & filter = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, TQString * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE )
        • 
-
      • TQString getExistingDirectory ( const TQString & dir = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, bool dirOnly = TRUE, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE )
        • 
-
      • TQStringList getOpenFileNames ( const TQString & filter = TQString::null, const TQString & dir = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, TQString * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE )
        • 
-
      • void setIconProvider ( TQFileIconProvider * provider )
        • 
-
      • TQFileIconProvider * iconProvider ()
        • 
-
      
-
      Properties
      
-
        
-
      • bool contentsPreview - whether the file dialog can provide a contents preview of the currently selected file
        • 
-
      • TQString dirPath - the file dialog's working directory  (read only)
        • 
-
      • bool infoPreview - whether the file dialog can provide preview information about the currently selected file
        • 
-
      • Mode mode - the file dialog's mode
        • 
-
      • PreviewMode previewMode - the preview mode for the file dialog
        • 
-
      • TQString selectedFile - the name of the selected file  (read only)
        • 
-
      • TQStringList selectedFiles - the list of selected files  (read only)
        • 
-
      • TQString selectedFilter - the filter which the user has selected in the file dialog  (read only)
        • 
-
      • bool showHiddenFiles - whether hidden files are shown in the file dialog
        • 
-
      • ViewMode viewMode - the file dialog's view mode
        • 
-
      
-
      Protected Members
      
-
-
      Detailed Description
      
-
-
-The TQFileDialog class provides dialogs that allow users to select files or directories.
-
-
-
       The TQFileDialog class enables a user to traverse their file system in
-order to select one or many files or a directory.
-
       The easiest way to create a TQFileDialog is to use the static
-functions. On Windows, these static functions will call the native
-Windows file dialog and on Mac OS X, these static function will call
-the native Mac OS X file dialog.
-
       
      -    TQString s = TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName(
-                    "/home",
-                    "Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)",
-                    this,
-                    "open file dialog",
-                    "Choose a file" );
-  
      
- 
-
       In the above example, a modal TQFileDialog is created using a static
-function. The startup directory is set to "/home". The file filter
-is set to "Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)". The parent of the file dialog
-is set to this and it is given the identification name - "open file
-dialog". The caption at the top of file dialog is set to "Choose a
-file". If you want to use multiple filters, separate each one with
-two semi-colons, e.g.
-
      -  "Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg);;Text files (*.txt);;XML files (*.xml)"
-  
      
- 
-
       You can create your own TQFileDialog without using the static
-functions. By calling setMode(), you can set what can be returned by
-the TQFileDialog.
-
       
      -    TQFileDialog* fd = new TQFileDialog( this, "file dialog", TRUE );
-    fd->setMode( TQFileDialog::AnyFile );
-  
      
- 
-
       In the above example, the mode of the file dialog is set to AnyFile, meaning that the user can select any file, or even specify a
-file that doesn't exist. This mode is useful for creating a "File Save
-As" file dialog. Use ExistingFile if the user must select an
-existing file or Directory if only a directory may be selected.
-(See the TQFileDialog::Mode enum for the complete list of modes.)
-
       You can retrieve the dialog's mode with mode(). Use setFilter() to set
-the dialog's file filter, e.g.
-
       
      -    fd->setFilter( "Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)" );
-  
      
- 
-
       In the above example, the filter is set to "Images (*.png *.xpm
-*.jpg)", this means that only files with the extension png, xpm
-or jpg will be shown in the TQFileDialog. You can apply
-several filters by using setFilters() and add additional filters with
-addFilter(). Use setSelectedFilter() to select one of the filters
-you've given as the file dialog's default filter. Whenever the user
-changes the filter the filterSelected() signal is emitted.
-
       The file dialog has two view modes, TQFileDialog::List which simply
-lists file and directory names and TQFileDialog::Detail which
-displays additional information alongside each name, e.g. file size,
-modification date, etc. Set the mode with setViewMode().
-
       
      -    fd->setViewMode( TQFileDialog::Detail );
-  
      
- 
-
       The last important function you will need to use when creating your
-own file dialog is selectedFile().
-
       
      -    TQString fileName;
-    if ( fd->exec() == TQDialog::Accepted )
-        fileName = fd->selectedFile();
-  
      
- 
-
       In the above example, a modal file dialog is created and shown. If
-the user clicked OK, then the file they selected is put in fileName.
-
       If you are using the ExistingFiles mode then you will need to use
-selectedFiles() which will return the selected files in a TQStringList.
-
       The dialog's working directory can be set with setDir(). The display
-of hidden files is controlled with setShowHiddenFiles(). The dialog
-can be forced to re-read the directory with rereadDir() and re-sort
-the directory with resortDir(). All the files in the current directory
-can be selected with selectAll().
-
       
       Creating and using preview widgets
-
      
-
       There are two kinds of preview widgets that can be used with
-TQFileDialogs: content preview widgets and information preview
-widgets. They are created and used in the same way except that the
-function names differ, e.g. setContentsPreview() and setInfoPreview().
-
       A preview widget is a widget that is placed inside a TQFileDialog so
-that the user can see either the contents of the file, or information
-about the file.
-
       
      -    class Preview : public TQLabel, public TQFilePreview
-    {
-    public:
-        Preview( TQWidget *parent=0 ) : TQLabel( parent ) {}
-
-        void previewUrl( const TQUrl &u )
-        {
-            TQString path = u.path();
-            TQPixmap pix( path );
-            if ( pix.isNull() )
-                setText( "This is not a pixmap" );
-            else
-                setPixmap( pix );
-        }
-    };
-  
      
- 
-
       In the above snippet, we create a preview widget which inherits from
-TQLabel and TQFilePreview. File preview widgets must inherit from
-TQFilePreview.
-
       Inside the class we reimplement TQFilePreview::previewUrl(), this is
-where we determine what happens when a file is selected. In the
-above example we only show a preview of the file if it is a valid
-pixmap. Here's how to make a file dialog use a preview widget:
-
       
      -    Preview* p = new Preview;
-
-    TQFileDialog* fd = new TQFileDialog( this );
-    fd->setContentsPreviewEnabled( TRUE );
-    fd->setContentsPreview( p, p );
-    fd->setPreviewMode( TQFileDialog::Contents );
-    fd->show();
-  
      
- 
-
       The first line creates an instance of our preview widget. We then
-create our file dialog and call setContentsPreviewEnabled( TRUE ),
-this tell the file dialog to preview the contents of the currently
-selected file. We then call setContentsPreview() -- note that we pass
-the same preview widget twice. Finally, before showing the file
-dialog, we call setPreviewMode() setting the mode to Contents which
-will show the contents preview of the file that the user has selected.
-
       If you create another preview widget that is used for displaying
-information about a file, create it in the same way as the contents
-preview widget and call setInfoPreviewEnabled(), and
-setInfoPreview(). Then the user will be able to switch between the
-two preview modes.
-
       For more information about creating a TQFilePreview widget see
-TQFilePreview.
-
        
-
       
      See also Dialog Classes.
-
-
      Member Type Documentation
      
-
      TQFileDialog::Mode
       
-
       This enum is used to indicate what the user may select in the file
-dialog, i.e. what the dialog will return if the user clicks OK.
-
        
-
      • TQFileDialog::AnyFile - The name of a file, whether it exists or not.
-
      • TQFileDialog::ExistingFile - The name of a single existing file.
-
      • TQFileDialog::Directory - The name of a directory. Both files and directories
-are displayed.
-
      • TQFileDialog::DirectoryOnly - The name of a directory. The file dialog will only display directories.
-
      • TQFileDialog::ExistingFiles - The names of zero or more existing files.
-
       See setMode().
-
-
      TQFileDialog::PreviewMode
      
-
-
       This enum describes the preview mode of the file dialog.
-
        
-
      • TQFileDialog::NoPreview - No preview is shown at all.
-
      • TQFileDialog::Contents - Show a preview of the contents of the current file
-using the contents preview widget.
-
      • TQFileDialog::Info - Show information about the current file using the
-info preview widget.
-
       See setPreviewMode(), setContentsPreview() and setInfoPreview().
-
-
      TQFileDialog::ViewMode
      
-
-
       This enum describes the view mode of the file dialog, i.e. what
-information about each file will be displayed.
-
        
-
      • TQFileDialog::List - Display file and directory names with icons.
-
      • TQFileDialog::Detail - Display file and directory names with icons plus
-additional information, such as file size and modification date.
-
       See setViewMode().
-
-
      Member Function Documentation
      
-
      TQFileDialog::TQFileDialog ( const TQString & dirName, const TQString & filter = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE )
-
      
-Constructs a file dialog called name with the parent, parent.
-If modal is TRUE then the file dialog is modal; otherwise it is
-modeless.
-
       If dirName is specified then it will be used as the dialog's
-working directory, i.e. it will be the directory that is shown when
-the dialog appears. If filter is specified it will be used as the
-dialog's file filter.
-
       
-
      TQFileDialog::TQFileDialog ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE )
-
      
-Constructs a file dialog called name, with the parent, parent.
-If modal is TRUE then the file dialog is modal; otherwise it is
-modeless.
-
-
      TQFileDialog::~TQFileDialog ()
-
      
-Destroys the file dialog.
-
-
      void TQFileDialog::addFilter ( const TQString & filter )
-
      
-Adds the filter filter to the list of filters and makes it the
-current filter.
-
       
      -    TQFileDialog* fd = new TQFileDialog( this );
-    fd->addFilter( "Images (*.png *.jpg *.xpm)" );
-    fd->show();
-  
      
- 
-
       In the above example, a file dialog is created, and the file filter "Images
-(*.png *.jpg *.xpm)" is added and is set as the current filter. The original
-filter, "All Files (*)", is still available.
-
       
      See also setFilter() and setFilters().
-
-
      void TQFileDialog::addLeftWidget ( TQWidget * w ) [protected]
-
      
-Adds the widget w to the left-hand side of the file dialog.
-
       
      See also addRightWidget(), addWidgets(), and addToolButton().
-
-
      void TQFileDialog::addRightWidget ( TQWidget * w ) [protected]
-
      
-Adds the widget w to the right-hand side of the file dialog.
-
       
      See also addLeftWidget(), addWidgets(), and addToolButton().
-
-
      void TQFileDialog::addToolButton ( TQButton * b, bool separator = FALSE ) [protected]
-
      
-Adds the tool button b to the row of tool buttons at the top of the
-file dialog. The button is appended to the right of
-this row. If separator is TRUE, a small space is inserted between the
-last button of the row and the new button b.
-
       
      See also addWidgets(), addLeftWidget(), and addRightWidget().
-
-
      void TQFileDialog::addWidgets ( TQLabel * l, TQWidget * w, TQPushButton * b ) [protected]
-
      
-Adds the specified widgets to the bottom of the file dialog. The
-label l is placed underneath the "file name" and the "file types"
-labels. The widget w is placed underneath the file types combobox.
-The button b is placed underneath the Cancel pushbutton.
-
       
      -    MyFileDialog::MyFileDialog( TQWidget* parent, const char* name ) :
-        TQFileDialog( parent, name )
-    {
-        TQLabel* label = new TQLabel( "Added widgets", this );
-        TQLineEdit* lineedit = new TQLineEdit( this );
-        TQPushButton* pushbutton = new TQPushButton( this );
-
-        addWidgets( label, lineedit, pushbutton );
-    }
-  
      
- 
-
       If you don't want to have one of the widgets added, pass 0 in that
-widget's position.
-
       Every time you call this function, a new row of widgets will be added
-to the bottom of the file dialog.
-
       
      See also addToolButton(), addLeftWidget(), and addRightWidget().
-
-
      const TQDir * TQFileDialog::dir () const
-
      
-Returns the current directory shown in the file dialog.
-
       The ownership of the TQDir pointer is transferred to the caller, so
-it must be deleted by the caller when no longer required.
-
       
      See also setDir().
-
-
      void TQFileDialog::dirEntered ( const TQString & ) [signal]
-
      
-
-
       This signal is emitted when the user enters a directory.
-
       
      See also dir().
-
-
      TQString TQFileDialog::dirPath () const
-
      Returns the file dialog's working directory.
-See the "dirPath" property for details.
-
      void TQFileDialog::fileHighlighted ( const TQString & ) [signal]
-
      
-
-
       This signal is emitted when the user highlights a file, i.e. makes
-it the current file.
-
       
      See also fileSelected() and filesSelected().
-
-
      void TQFileDialog::fileSelected ( const TQString & ) [signal]
-
      
-
-
       This signal is emitted when the user selects a file.
-
       
      See also filesSelected(), fileHighlighted(), and selectedFile.
-
-
      void TQFileDialog::filesSelected ( const TQStringList & ) [signal]
-
      
-
-
       This signal is emitted when the user selects one or more files in ExistingFiles mode.
-
       
      See also fileSelected(), fileHighlighted(), and selectedFiles.
-
-
      void TQFileDialog::filterSelected ( const TQString & ) [signal]
-
      
-
-
       This signal is emitted when the user selects a filter.
-
       
      See also selectedFilter.
-
-
      TQString TQFileDialog::getExistingDirectory ( const TQString & dir = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, bool dirOnly = TRUE, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE ) [static]
-
      
-This is a convenience static function that will return an existing directory
-selected by the user.
-
       
      -    TQString s = TQFileDialog::getExistingDirectory(
-                    "/home",
-                    this,
-                    "get existing directory",
-                    "Choose a directory",
-                    TRUE );
-  
      
- 
-
       This function creates a modal file dialog called name, with
-parent, parent. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown
-centered over the parent.
-
       The dialog's working directory is set to dir, and the caption is
-set to caption. Either of these may be TQString::null in which case
-the current directory and a default caption will be used respectively.
-
       Note on Windows that if dir is TQString::null then the dialog's working
-directory will be set to the user's My Documents directory.
-
       If dirOnly is TRUE, then only directories will be shown in
-the file dialog; otherwise both directories and files will be shown.
-
       Under Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve
-and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp,
-the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp.
-If resolveSymlinks is FALSE, the file dialog will treat
-symlinks as regular directories.
-
       Under Windows and Mac OS X, this static function will use the native
-file dialog and not a TQFileDialog, unless the style of the application
-is set to something other than the native style. (Note that on Windows the
-dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any
-TQTimers and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just under
-the parent's titlebar).
-
       
      See also getOpenFileName(), getOpenFileNames(), and getSaveFileName().
-
-
      TQString TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName ( const TQString & startWith = TQString::null, const TQString & filter = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, TQString * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE ) [static]
-
      
-This is a convenience static function that returns an existing file
-selected by the user. If the user pressed Cancel, it returns a null
-string.
-
       
      -    TQString s = TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName(
-                    "/home",
-                    "Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)",
-                    this,
-                    "open file dialog",
-                    "Choose a file to open" );
-  
      
- 
-
       The function creates a modal file dialog called name, with
-parent, parent. If a parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown
-centered over the parent.
-
       The file dialog's working directory will be set to startWith. If startWith includes a file name, the file will be selected. The filter
-is set to filter so that only those files which match the filter
-are shown. The filter selected is set to selectedFilter. The parameters
-startWith, selectedFilter and filter may be TQString::null.
-
       The dialog's caption is set to caption. If caption is not
-specified then a default caption will be used.
-
       Under Windows and Mac OS X, this static function will use the native
-file dialog and not a TQFileDialog, unless the style of the application
-is set to something other than the native style (Note that on Windows the
-dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any
-TQTimers and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just under
-the parent's titlebar).
-
       Under Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve
-and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp,
-the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp.
-If resolveSymlinks is FALSE, the file dialog will treat
-symlinks as regular directories.
-
       
      See also getOpenFileNames(), getSaveFileName(), and getExistingDirectory().
-
-
      Examples: action/application.cpp, addressbook/mainwindow.cpp, application/application.cpp, distributor/distributor.ui.h, network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-
      TQStringList TQFileDialog::getOpenFileNames ( const TQString & filter = TQString::null, const TQString & dir = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, TQString * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE ) [static]
-
      
-This is a convenience static function that will return one or more
-existing files selected by the user.
-
       
      -    TQStringList files = TQFileDialog::getOpenFileNames(
-                            "Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)",
-                            "/home",
-                            this,
-                            "open files dialog",
-                            "Select one or more files to open" );
-  
      
- 
-
       This function creates a modal file dialog called name, with
-parent parent. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown
-centered over the parent.
-
       The file dialog's working directory will be set to dir. If dir includes a file name, the file will be selected. The filter
-is set to filter so that only those files which match the filter
-are shown. The filter selected is set to selectedFilter. The parameters
-dir, selectedFilter and filter may be TQString::null.
-
       The dialog's caption is set to caption. If caption is not
-specified then a default caption will be used.
-
       Under Windows and Mac OS X, this static function will use the native
-file dialog and not a TQFileDialog, unless the style of the application
-is set to something other than the native style. (Note that on Windows the
-dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any
-TQTimers and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just under
-the parent's titlebar).
-
       Under Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve
-and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp,
-the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp.
-If resolveSymlinks is FALSE, the file dialog will treat
-symlinks as regular directories.
-
       Note that if you want to iterate over the list of files, you should
-iterate over a copy, e.g.
-
      -    TQStringList list = files;
-    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    while( it != list.end() ) {
-        myProcessing( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-    
      
- 
-
       
      See also getOpenFileName(), getSaveFileName(), and getExistingDirectory().
-
-
      TQString TQFileDialog::getSaveFileName ( const TQString & startWith = TQString::null, const TQString & filter = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, TQString * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE ) [static]
-
      
-This is a convenience static function that will return a file name
-selected by the user. The file does not have to exist.
-
       It creates a modal file dialog called name, with parent, parent.
-If a parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the
-parent.
-
       
      -    TQString s = TQFileDialog::getSaveFileName(
-                    "/home",
-                    "Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)",
-                    this,
-                    "save file dialog",
-                    "Choose a filename to save under" );
-  
      
- 
-
       The file dialog's working directory will be set to startWith. If startWith includes a file name, the file will be selected. The filter
-is set to filter so that only those files which match the filter
-are shown. The filter selected is set to selectedFilter. The parameters
-startWith, selectedFilter and filter may be TQString::null.
-
       The dialog's caption is set to caption. If caption is not
-specified then a default caption will be used.
-
       Under Windows and Mac OS X, this static function will use the native
-file dialog and not a TQFileDialog, unless the style of the application
-is set to something other than the native style. (Note that on Windows the
-dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any
-TQTimers and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just under
-the parent's titlebar.
-
       Under Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve
-and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp,
-the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp.
-If resolveSymlinks is FALSE, the file dialog will treat
-symlinks as regular directories.
-
       
      See also getOpenFileName(), getOpenFileNames(), and getExistingDirectory().
-
-
      Examples: action/application.cpp, addressbook/mainwindow.cpp, application/application.cpp, network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h, qmag/qmag.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-
      TQFileIconProvider * TQFileDialog::iconProvider () [static]
-
      
-Returns a pointer to the icon provider currently set on the file dialog.
-By default there is no icon provider, and this function returns 0.
-
       
      See also setIconProvider() and TQFileIconProvider.
-
-
      bool TQFileDialog::isContentsPreviewEnabled () const
-
      Returns TRUE if the file dialog can provide a contents preview of the currently selected file; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "contentsPreview" property for details.
-
      bool TQFileDialog::isInfoPreviewEnabled () const
-
      Returns TRUE if the file dialog can provide preview information about the currently selected file; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "infoPreview" property for details.
-
      Mode TQFileDialog::mode () const
-
      Returns the file dialog's mode.
-See the "mode" property for details.
-
      PreviewMode TQFileDialog::previewMode () const
-
      Returns the preview mode for the file dialog.
-See the "previewMode" property for details.
-
      void TQFileDialog::rereadDir ()
-
      
-Rereads the current directory shown in the file dialog.
-
       The only time you will need to call this function is if the contents of
-the directory change and you wish to refresh the file dialog to reflect
-the change.
-
       
      See also resortDir().
-
-
      void TQFileDialog::resortDir ()
-
      
-Re-sorts the displayed directory.
-
       
      See also rereadDir().
-
-
      void TQFileDialog::selectAll ( bool b )
-
      
-If b is TRUE then all the files in the current directory are selected;
-otherwise, they are deselected.
-
-
      TQString TQFileDialog::selectedFile () const
-
      Returns the name of the selected file.
-See the "selectedFile" property for details.
-
      TQStringList TQFileDialog::selectedFiles () const
-
      Returns the list of selected files.
-See the "selectedFiles" property for details.
-
      TQString TQFileDialog::selectedFilter () const
-
      Returns the filter which the user has selected in the file dialog.
-See the "selectedFilter" property for details.
-
      void TQFileDialog::setContentsPreview ( TQWidget * w, TQFilePreview * preview )
-
      
-Sets the widget to be used for displaying the contents of the file
-to the widget w and a preview of those contents to the
-TQFilePreview preview.
-
       Normally you would create a preview widget that derives from both TQWidget and
-TQFilePreview, so you should pass the same widget twice. If you
-don't, you must remember to delete the preview object in order to
-avoid memory leaks.
-
       
      -    class Preview : public TQLabel, public TQFilePreview
-    {
-    public:
-        Preview( TQWidget *parent=0 ) : TQLabel( parent ) {}
-
-        void previewUrl( const TQUrl &u )
-        {
-            TQString path = u.path();
-            TQPixmap pix( path );
-            if ( pix.isNull() )
-                setText( "This is not a pixmap" );
-            else
-                setPixmap( pix );
-        }
-    };
-
-  //...
-
-  int main( int argc, char** argv )
-  {
-    Preview* p = new Preview;
-
-    TQFileDialog* fd = new TQFileDialog( this );
-    fd->setContentsPreviewEnabled( TRUE );
-    fd->setContentsPreview( p, p );
-    fd->setPreviewMode( TQFileDialog::Contents );
-    fd->show();
-  }
-  
      
- 
-
       
      See also contentsPreview, setInfoPreview(), and previewMode.
-
-
      Example: qdir/qdir.cpp.
-
      void TQFileDialog::setContentsPreviewEnabled ( bool )
-
      Sets whether the file dialog can provide a contents preview of the currently selected file.
-See the "contentsPreview" property for details.
-
      void TQFileDialog::setDir ( const TQDir & dir )
-
      
-Sets the file dialog's working directory to dir.
-
      See also dir().
-
-
      void TQFileDialog::setDir ( const TQString & pathstr ) [slot]
-
       This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
       Sets the file dialog's working directory to pathstr.
-
       
      See also dir().
-
-
      void TQFileDialog::setFilter ( const TQString & newFilter ) [slot]
-
      
-
       Sets the filter used in the file dialog to newFilter.
-
       If newFilter contains a pair of parentheses containing one or more
-of anything*something separated by spaces or by
-semi-colons then only the text contained in the parentheses is used as
-the filter. This means that these calls are all equivalent:
-
       
      -     fd->setFilter( "All C++ files (*.cpp *.cc *.C *.cxx *.c++)" );
-     fd->setFilter( "*.cpp *.cc *.C *.cxx *.c++" );
-     fd->setFilter( "All C++ files (*.cpp;*.cc;*.C;*.cxx;*.c++)" );
-     fd->setFilter( "*.cpp;*.cc;*.C;*.cxx;*.c++" );
-  
      
- 
-
       
      See also setFilters().
-
-
      void TQFileDialog::setFilters ( const TQString & filters ) [slot]
-
      
-Sets the filters used in the file dialog to filters. Each group
-of filters must be separated by ;; (two semi-colons).
-
       
      -    TQString types("Image files (*.png *.xpm *.jpg);;"
-                  "Text files (*.txt);;"
-                  "Any files (*)");
-    TQFileDialog fd = new TQFileDialog( this );
-    fd->setFilters( types );
-    fd->show();
-  
      
- 
-
       
-
      void TQFileDialog::setFilters ( const char ** types ) [slot]
-
      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
       types must be a null-terminated list of strings.
-
       
-
      void TQFileDialog::setFilters ( const TQStringList & ) [slot]
-
       This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
       
-
      void TQFileDialog::setIconProvider ( TQFileIconProvider * provider ) [static]
-
      
-Sets the TQFileIconProvider used by the file dialog to provider.
-
       The default is that there is no TQFileIconProvider and TQFileDialog
-just draws a folder icon next to each directory and nothing next
-to files.
-
       
      See also TQFileIconProvider and iconProvider().
-
-
      Example: showimg/main.cpp.
-
      void TQFileDialog::setInfoPreview ( TQWidget * w, TQFilePreview * preview )
-
      
-Sets the widget to be used for displaying information about the file
-to the widget w and a preview of that information to the
-TQFilePreview preview.
-
       Normally you would create a preview widget that derives from both TQWidget and
-TQFilePreview, so you should pass the same widget twice. If you
-don't, you must remember to delete the preview object in order to
-avoid memory leaks.
-
       
      -    class Preview : public TQLabel, public TQFilePreview
-    {
-    public:
-        Preview( TQWidget *parent=0 ) : TQLabel( parent ) {}
-
-        void previewUrl( const TQUrl &u )
-        {
-            TQString path = u.path();
-            TQPixmap pix( path );
-            if ( pix.isNull() )
-                setText( "This is not a pixmap" );
-            else
-                setText( "This is a pixmap" );
-        }
-    };
-
-  //...
-
-  int main( int argc, char** argv )
-  {
-    Preview* p = new Preview;
-
-    TQFileDialog* fd = new TQFileDialog( this );
-    fd->setInfoPreviewEnabled( TRUE );
-    fd->setInfoPreview( p, p );
-    fd->setPreviewMode( TQFileDialog::Info );
-    fd->show();
-  }
-
-  
      
- 
-
       
      See also setContentsPreview(), infoPreview, and previewMode.
-
-
       
-
      void TQFileDialog::setInfoPreviewEnabled ( bool )
-
      Sets whether the file dialog can provide preview information about the currently selected file.
-See the "infoPreview" property for details.
-
      void TQFileDialog::setMode ( Mode )
-
      Sets the file dialog's mode.
-See the "mode" property for details.
-
      void TQFileDialog::setPreviewMode ( PreviewMode m )
-
      Sets the preview mode for the file dialog to m.
-See the "previewMode" property for details.
-
      void TQFileDialog::setSelectedFilter ( const TQString & mask ) [virtual]
-
      
-Sets the current filter selected in the file dialog to the first
-one that contains the text mask.
-
-
      void TQFileDialog::setSelectedFilter ( int n ) [virtual]
-
       This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
       Sets the current filter selected in the file dialog to the
-n-th filter in the filter list.
-
       
      See also filterSelected(), selectedFilter, selectedFiles, and selectedFile.
-
-
      void TQFileDialog::setSelection ( const TQString & filename )
-
      
-Sets the default selection to filename. If filename is
-absolute, setDir() is also called to set the file dialog's working
-directory to the filename's directory.
-
       
-
-
      Example: qdir/qdir.cpp.
-
      void TQFileDialog::setShowHiddenFiles ( bool s )
-
      Sets whether hidden files are shown in the file dialog to s.
-See the "showHiddenFiles" property for details.
-
      void TQFileDialog::setUrl ( const TQUrlOperator & url ) [slot]
-
      
-Sets the file dialog's working directory to the directory specified at url.
-
       
      See also url().
-
-
      void TQFileDialog::setViewMode ( ViewMode m )
-
      Sets the file dialog's view mode to m.
-See the "viewMode" property for details.
-
      bool TQFileDialog::showHiddenFiles () const
-
      Returns TRUE if hidden files are shown in the file dialog; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "showHiddenFiles" property for details.
-
      TQUrl TQFileDialog::url () const
-
      
-Returns the URL of the current working directory in the file dialog.
-
       
      See also setUrl().
-
-
      Example: network/networkprotocol/view.cpp.
-
      ViewMode TQFileDialog::viewMode () const
-
      Returns the file dialog's view mode.
-See the "viewMode" property for details.
-
      Property Documentation
      
-
      bool contentsPreview
      
-
      This property holds whether the file dialog can provide a contents preview of the currently selected file.
-
      The default is FALSE.
-
       
      See also setContentsPreview() and infoPreview.
-
-
      Set this property's value with setContentsPreviewEnabled() and get this property's value with isContentsPreviewEnabled().
-
      TQString dirPath
      
-
      This property holds the file dialog's working directory.
-
      Get this property's value with dirPath().
-
      See also dir() and setDir().
-
-
      bool infoPreview
      
-
      This property holds whether the file dialog can provide preview information about the currently selected file.
-
      The default is FALSE.
-
-
      Set this property's value with setInfoPreviewEnabled() and get this property's value with isInfoPreviewEnabled().
-
      Mode mode
      
-
      This property holds the file dialog's mode.
-
      The default mode is ExistingFile.
-
-
      Set this property's value with setMode() and get this property's value with mode().
-
      PreviewMode previewMode
      
-
      This property holds the preview mode for the file dialog.
-
      If you set the mode to be a mode other than NoPreview, you must
-use setInfoPreview() or setContentsPreview() to set the dialog's
-preview widget to your preview widget and enable the preview
-widget(s) with setInfoPreviewEnabled() or
-setContentsPreviewEnabled().
-
       
      See also infoPreview, contentsPreview, and viewMode.
-
-
      Set this property's value with setPreviewMode() and get this property's value with previewMode().
-
      TQString selectedFile
      
-
      This property holds the name of the selected file.
-
      If a file was selected selectedFile contains the file's name including
-its absolute path; otherwise selectedFile is empty.
-
       
      See also TQString::isEmpty(), selectedFiles, and selectedFilter.
-
-
      Get this property's value with selectedFile().
-
      TQStringList selectedFiles
      
-
      This property holds the list of selected files.
-
      If one or more files are selected, selectedFiles contains their
-names including their absolute paths. If no files are selected or
-the mode isn't ExistingFiles selectedFiles is an empty list.
-
       It is more convenient to use selectedFile() if the mode is
-ExistingFile, Directory or DirectoryOnly.
-
       Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should
-iterate over a copy, e.g.
-
      -    TQStringList list = myFileDialog.selectedFiles();
-    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    while( it != list.end() ) {
-        myProcessing( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-    
      
- 
-
       
      See also selectedFile, selectedFilter, and TQValueList::empty().
-
-
      Get this property's value with selectedFiles().
-
      TQString selectedFilter
      
-
      This property holds the filter which the user has selected in the file dialog.
-
      Get this property's value with selectedFilter().
-
      See also filterSelected(), selectedFiles, and selectedFile.
-
-
      bool showHiddenFiles
      
-
      This property holds whether hidden files are shown in the file dialog.
-
      The default is FALSE, i.e. don't show hidden files.
-
-
      Set this property's value with setShowHiddenFiles() and get this property's value with showHiddenFiles().
-
      ViewMode viewMode
      
-
      This property holds the file dialog's view mode.
-
      If you set the view mode to be Detail (the default), then you
-will see the file's details, such as the size of the file and the
-date the file was last modified in addition to the file's name.
-
       If you set the view mode to be List, then you will just
-see a list of the files and folders.
-
       See TQFileDialog::ViewMode
-
-
      Set this property's value with setViewMode() and get this property's value with viewMode().
-
-
      
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
      
-
-
      Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
      TQt 3.3.8
      
-
      
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qfileiconprovider-members.html b/doc/html/qfileiconprovider-members.html
index a2040f252..f0bc109b8 100644
--- a/doc/html/qfileiconprovider-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qfileiconprovider-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -36,49 +36,49 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
 
 
      
diff --git a/doc/html/qfileiconprovider.html b/doc/html/qfileiconprovider.html
index ea9656903..a04926b20 100644
--- a/doc/html/qfileiconprovider.html
+++ b/doc/html/qfileiconprovider.html
@@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
      The TQFileIconProvider class provides icons for TQFileDialog to
 use.
 More...
-
      #include <qfiledialog.h>
-
      Inherits TQObject.
+
      #include <ntqfiledialog.h>
+
      Inherits TQObject.
 
      List of all member functions.
 
      Public Members
      
 
        
@@ -44,28 +44,28 @@ use.
 
      
 
      Detailed Description
      
  
-
       The TQFileIconProvider class provides icons for TQFileDialog to
+
       The TQFileIconProvider class provides icons for TQFileDialog to
 use.
 
       
 
       By default TQFileIconProvider is not used, but any application or
 library can subclass it, reimplement pixmap() to return a suitable
 icon, and make all TQFileDialog objects use it by calling the static
-function TQFileDialog::setIconProvider().
+function TQFileDialog::setIconProvider().
 
       It is advisable to make all the icons that TQFileIconProvider returns be
 the same size or at least the same width. This makes the list view
 look much better.
-
       
      See also TQFileDialog and Miscellaneous Classes.
+
       
      See also TQFileDialog and Miscellaneous Classes.
 
 
      Member Function Documentation
      
-
      TQFileIconProvider::TQFileIconProvider ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
      TQFileIconProvider::TQFileIconProvider ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
 
       Constructs an empty file icon provider called name, with the
 parent parent.
 
-
      const TQPixmap * TQFileIconProvider::pixmap ( const TQFileInfo & info ) [virtual]
+
      const TQPixmap * TQFileIconProvider::pixmap ( const TQFileInfo & info ) [virtual]
 
      
 Returns a pointer to a pixmap that should be used to
 signify the file with the information info.
-
       If pixmap() returns 0, TQFileDialog draws the default pixmap.
+
       If pixmap() returns 0, TQFileDialog draws the default pixmap.
 
       The default implementation returns particular icons for files, directories,
 link-files and link-directories. It returns a blank "icon" for other types.
 
       If you return a pixmap here, it should measure 16x16 pixels.
diff --git a/doc/html/qfileinfo-h.html b/doc/html/qfileinfo-h.html
index 2077d6dac..841d7fff4 100644
--- a/doc/html/qfileinfo-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qfileinfo-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qfileinfo.h Include File
+ntqfileinfo.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
      
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
      TQFileInfo Class Reference
      
-
-
      The TQFileInfo class provides system-independent file information.
-More...
-
      All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
      
-
      #include <qfileinfo.h>
-
      List of all member functions.
-
      Public Members
      
-
-
      Detailed Description
      
-
-
-
-The TQFileInfo class provides system-independent file information.
-
       
-
       TQFileInfo provides information about a file's name and position
-(path) in the file system, its access rights and whether it is a
-directory or symbolic link, etc. The file's size and last
-modified/read times are also available.
-
       A TQFileInfo can point to a file with either a relative or an
-absolute file path. Absolute file paths begin with the directory
-separator "/" (or with a drive specification on Windows). Relative
-file names begin with a directory name or a file name and specify
-a path relative to the current working directory. An example of an
-absolute path is the string "/tmp/quartz". A relative path might
-look like "src/fatlib". You can use the function isRelative() to
-check whether a TQFileInfo is using a relative or an absolute file
-path. You can call the function convertToAbs() to convert a
-relative TQFileInfo's path to an absolute path.
-
       The file that the TQFileInfo works on is set in the constructor or
-later with setFile(). Use exists() to see if the file exists and
-size() to get its size.
-
       To speed up performance, TQFileInfo caches information about the
-file. Because files can be changed by other users or programs, or
-even by other parts of the same program, there is a function that
-refreshes the file information: refresh(). If you want to switch
-off a TQFileInfo's caching and force it to access the file system
-every time you request information from it call setCaching(FALSE).
-
       The file's type is obtained with isFile(), isDir() and
-isSymLink(). The readLink() function provides the name of the file
-the symlink points to.
-
       Elements of the file's name can be extracted with dirPath() and
-fileName(). The fileName()'s parts can be extracted with
-baseName() and extension().
-
       The file's dates are returned by created(), lastModified() and
-lastRead(). Information about the file's access permissions is
-obtained with isReadable(), isWritable() and isExecutable(). The
-file's ownership is available from owner(), ownerId(), group() and
-groupId(). You can examine a file's permissions and ownership in a
-single statement using the permission() function.
-
       If you need to read and traverse directories, see the TQDir class.
-
      See also Input/Output and Networking.
-
-
      Member Type Documentation
      
-
      TQFileInfo::PermissionSpec
      
-
-
       This enum is used by the permission() function to report the
-permissions and ownership of a file. The values may be OR-ed
-together to test multiple permissions and ownership values.
-
        
-
      • TQFileInfo::ReadOwner - The file is readable by the owner of the file.
-
      • TQFileInfo::WriteOwner - The file is writable by the owner of the file.
-
      • TQFileInfo::ExeOwner - The file is executable by the owner of the file.
-
      • TQFileInfo::ReadUser - The file is readable by the user.
-
      • TQFileInfo::WriteUser - The file is writable by the user.
-
      • TQFileInfo::ExeUser - The file is executable by the user.
-
      • TQFileInfo::ReadGroup - The file is readable by the group.
-
      • TQFileInfo::WriteGroup - The file is writable by the group.
-
      • TQFileInfo::ExeGroup - The file is executable by the group.
-
      • TQFileInfo::ReadOther - The file is readable by anyone.
-
      • TQFileInfo::WriteOther - The file is writable by anyone.
-
      • TQFileInfo::ExeOther - The file is executable by anyone.
-
       Warning: The semantics of ReadUser, WriteUser and ExeUser are
-unfortunately not platform independent: on Unix, the rights of the owner of
-the file are returned and on Windows the rights of the current user are
-returned. This behavior might change in a future TQt version. If you want to
-find the rights of the owner of the file, you should use the flags ReadOwner, WriteOwner and ExeOwner. If you want to find out the
-rights of the current user, you should use isReadable(), isWritable() and
-isExecutable().
-
-
      Member Function Documentation
      
-
      TQFileInfo::TQFileInfo ()
-
      
-Constructs a new empty TQFileInfo.
-
-
      TQFileInfo::TQFileInfo ( const TQString & file )
-
      
-Constructs a new TQFileInfo that gives information about the given
-file. The file can also include an absolute or relative path.
-
       Warning: Some functions might behave in a counter-intuitive way
-if file has a trailing directory separator.
-
       
      See also setFile(), isRelative(), TQDir::setCurrent(), and TQDir::isRelativePath().
-
-
      TQFileInfo::TQFileInfo ( const TQFile & file )
-
      
-Constructs a new TQFileInfo that gives information about file file.
-
       If the file has a relative path, the TQFileInfo will also have a
-relative path.
-
       
      See also isRelative().
-
-
      TQFileInfo::TQFileInfo ( const TQDir & d, const TQString & fileName )
-
      
-Constructs a new TQFileInfo that gives information about the file
-called fileName in the directory d.
-
       If d has a relative path, the TQFileInfo will also have a
-relative path.
-
       
      See also isRelative().
-
-
      TQFileInfo::TQFileInfo ( const TQFileInfo & fi )
-
      
-Constructs a new TQFileInfo that is a copy of fi.
-
-
      TQFileInfo::~TQFileInfo ()
-
      
-Destroys the TQFileInfo and frees its resources.
-
-
      TQString TQFileInfo::absFilePath () const
-
      
-Returns the absolute path including the file name.
-
       The absolute path name consists of the full path and the file
-name. On Unix this will always begin with the root, '/',
-directory. On Windows this will always begin 'D:/' where D is a
-drive letter, except for network shares that are not mapped to a
-drive letter, in which case the path will begin '//sharename/'.
-
       This function returns the same as filePath(), unless isRelative()
-is TRUE.
-
       If the TQFileInfo is empty it returns TQDir::currentDirPath().
-
       This function can be time consuming under Unix (in the order of
-milliseconds).
-
       
      See also isRelative() and filePath().
-
-
      Examples: biff/biff.cpp and fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
-
      TQString TQFileInfo::baseName ( bool complete = FALSE ) const
-
      
-Returns the base name of the file.
-
       If complete is FALSE (the default) the base name consists of
-all characters in the file name up to (but not including) the first '.' character.
-
       If complete is TRUE the base name consists of all characters in
-the file up to (but not including) the last '.' character.
-
       The path is not included in either case.
-
       Example:
-
      -        TQFileInfo fi( "/tmp/archive.tar.gz" );
-        TQString base = fi.baseName();  // base = "archive"
-        base = fi.baseName( TRUE );    // base = "archive.tar"
-    
      
- 
-
       
      See also fileName() and extension().
-
-
      bool TQFileInfo::caching () const
-
      
-
-
       Returns TRUE if caching is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
       
      See also setCaching() and refresh().
-
-
      bool TQFileInfo::convertToAbs ()
-
      
-Converts the file's path to an absolute path.
-
       If it is already absolute, nothing is done.
-
       
      See also filePath() and isRelative().
-
-
      TQDateTime TQFileInfo::created () const
-
      
-Returns the date and time when the file was created.
-
       On platforms where this information is not available, returns the
-same as lastModified().
-
       
      See also lastModified() and lastRead().
-
-
      TQDir TQFileInfo::dir ( bool absPath = FALSE ) const
-
      
-Returns the file's path as a TQDir object.
-
       If the TQFileInfo is relative and absPath is FALSE, the TQDir
-will be relative; otherwise it will be absolute.
-
       
      See also dirPath(), filePath(), fileName(), and isRelative().
-
-
      Example: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
-
      TQString TQFileInfo::dirPath ( bool absPath = FALSE ) const
-
      
-Returns the file's path.
-
       If absPath is TRUE an absolute path is returned.
-
       
      See also dir(), filePath(), fileName(), and isRelative().
-
-
      Example: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
-
      bool TQFileInfo::exists () const
-
      
-Returns TRUE if the file exists; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
      Examples: biff/biff.cpp, distributor/distributor.ui.h, and i18n/main.cpp.
-
      TQString TQFileInfo::extension ( bool complete = TRUE ) const
-
      
-Returns the file's extension name.
-
       If complete is TRUE (the default), extension() returns the
-string of all characters in the file name after (but not
-including) the first '.'  character.
-
       If complete is FALSE, extension() returns the string of all
-characters in the file name after (but not including) the last '.'
-character.
-
       Example:
-
      -        TQFileInfo fi( "/tmp/archive.tar.gz" );
-        TQString ext = fi.extension();  // ext = "tar.gz"
-        ext = fi.extension( FALSE );   // ext = "gz"
-    
      
- 
-
       
      See also fileName() and baseName().
-
-
      Example: qdir/qdir.cpp.
-
      TQString TQFileInfo::fileName () const
-
      
-Returns the name of the file, excluding the path.
-
       Example:
-
      -        TQFileInfo fi( "/tmp/archive.tar.gz" );
-        TQString name = fi.fileName();           // name = "archive.tar.gz"
-    
      
- 
-
       
      See also isRelative(), filePath(), baseName(), and extension().
-
-
      Examples: dirview/dirview.cpp, fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp, and network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
-
      TQString TQFileInfo::filePath () const
-
      
-Returns the file name, including the path (which may be absolute
-or relative).
-
       
      See also isRelative() and absFilePath().
-
-
      Examples: dirview/main.cpp and fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
-
      TQString TQFileInfo::group () const
-
      
-Returns the group of the file. On Windows, on systems where files
-do not have groups, or if an error occurs, TQString::null is
-returned.
-
       This function can be time consuming under Unix (in the order of
-milliseconds).
-
       
      See also groupId(), owner(), and ownerId().
-
-
      uint TQFileInfo::groupId () const
-
      
-Returns the id of the group the file belongs to.
-
       On Windows and on systems where files do not have groups this
-function always returns (uint) -2.
-
       
      See also group(), owner(), and ownerId().
-
-
      bool TQFileInfo::isDir () const
-
      
-Returns TRUE if this object points to a directory or to a symbolic
-link to a directory; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
       
      See also isFile() and isSymLink().
-
-
      Examples: dirview/dirview.cpp and fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
-
      bool TQFileInfo::isExecutable () const
-
      
-Returns TRUE if the file is executable; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
       
      See also isReadable(), isWritable(), and permission().
-
-
      bool TQFileInfo::isFile () const
-
      
-Returns TRUE if this object points to a file. Returns FALSE if the
-object points to something which isn't a file, e.g. a directory or
-a symlink.
-
       
      See also isDir() and isSymLink().
-
-
      Examples: dirview/dirview.cpp, distributor/distributor.ui.h, fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp, and qdir/qdir.cpp.
-
      bool TQFileInfo::isHidden () const
-
      
-Returns TRUE if the file is hidden; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
       On Unix-like operating systems, including Mac OS X, a file is
-hidden if its name begins with ".". On Windows a file is hidden if
-its hidden attribute is set.
-
-
      bool TQFileInfo::isReadable () const
-
      
-Returns TRUE if the file is readable; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
       
      See also isWritable(), isExecutable(), and permission().
-
-
      Example: distributor/distributor.ui.h.
-
      bool TQFileInfo::isRelative () const
-
      
-Returns TRUE if the file path name is relative. Returns FALSE if
-the path is absolute (e.g. under Unix a path is absolute if it
-begins with a "/").
-
-
      bool TQFileInfo::isSymLink () const
-
      
-Returns TRUE if this object points to a symbolic link (or to a
-shortcut on Windows, or an alias on Mac OS X); otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
       
      See also isFile(), isDir(), and readLink().
-
-
      Examples: dirview/dirview.cpp, distributor/distributor.ui.h, and fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
-
      bool TQFileInfo::isWritable () const
-
      
-Returns TRUE if the file is writable; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
       
      See also isReadable(), isExecutable(), and permission().
-
-
      Example: distributor/distributor.ui.h.
-
      TQDateTime TQFileInfo::lastModified () const
-
      
-Returns the date and time when the file was last modified.
-
       
      See also created() and lastRead().
-
-
      Example: biff/biff.cpp.
-
      TQDateTime TQFileInfo::lastRead () const
-
      
-Returns the date and time when the file was last read (accessed).
-
       On platforms where this information is not available, returns the
-same as lastModified().
-
       
      See also created() and lastModified().
-
-
      Example: biff/biff.cpp.
-
      TQFileInfo & TQFileInfo::operator= ( const TQFileInfo & fi )
-
      
-Makes a copy of fi and assigns it to this TQFileInfo.
-
-
      TQString TQFileInfo::owner () const
-
      
-Returns the owner of the file. On systems where files
-do not have owners, or if an error occurs, TQString::null is
-returned.
-
       This function can be time consuming under Unix (in the order of
-milliseconds).
-
       
      See also ownerId(), group(), and groupId().
-
-
      uint TQFileInfo::ownerId () const
-
      
-Returns the id of the owner of the file.
-
       On Windows and on systems where files do not have owners this
-function returns ((uint) -2).
-
       
      See also owner(), group(), and groupId().
-
-
      bool TQFileInfo::permission ( int permissionSpec ) const
-
      
-Tests for file permissions. The permissionSpec argument can be
-several flags of type PermissionSpec OR-ed together to check
-for permission combinations.
-
       On systems where files do not have permissions this function
-always returns TRUE.
-
       Example:
-
      -        TQFileInfo fi( "/tmp/archive.tar.gz" );
-        if ( fi.permission( TQFileInfo::WriteUser | TQFileInfo::ReadGroup ) )
-            qWarning( "I can change the file; my group can read the file" );
-        if ( fi.permission( TQFileInfo::WriteGroup | TQFileInfo::WriteOther ) )
-            qWarning( "The group or others can change the file" );
-    
      
- 
-
       
      See also isReadable(), isWritable(), and isExecutable().
-
-
      TQString TQFileInfo::readLink () const
-
      
-Returns the name a symlink (or shortcut on Windows) points to, or
-a TQString::null if the object isn't a symbolic link.
-
       This name may not represent an existing file; it is only a string.
-TQFileInfo::exists() returns TRUE if the symlink points to an
-existing file.
-
       
      See also exists(), isSymLink(), isDir(), and isFile().
-
-
      void TQFileInfo::refresh () const
-
      
-Refreshes the information about the file, i.e. reads in information
-from the file system the next time a cached property is fetched.
-
       
      See also setCaching().
-
-
      void TQFileInfo::setCaching ( bool enable )
-
      
-If enable is TRUE, enables caching of file information. If enable is FALSE caching is disabled.
-
       When caching is enabled, TQFileInfo reads the file information from
-the file system the first time it's needed, but generally not
-later.
-
       Caching is enabled by default.
-
       
      See also refresh() and caching().
-
-
      void TQFileInfo::setFile ( const TQString & file )
-
      
-Sets the file that the TQFileInfo provides information about to file.
-
       The file can also include an absolute or relative file path.
-Absolute paths begin with the directory separator (e.g. "/" under
-Unix) or a drive specification (under Windows). Relative file
-names begin with a directory name or a file name and specify a
-path relative to the current directory.
-
       Example:
-
      -    TQString absolute = "/local/bin";
-    TQString relative = "local/bin";
-    TQFileInfo absFile( absolute );
-    TQFileInfo relFile( relative );
-
-    TQDir::setCurrent( TQDir::rootDirPath() );
-    // absFile and relFile now point to the same file
-
-    TQDir::setCurrent( "/tmp" );
-    // absFile now points to "/local/bin",
-    // while relFile points to "/tmp/local/bin"
-    
      
- 
-
       
      See also isRelative(), TQDir::setCurrent(), and TQDir::isRelativePath().
-
-
      Example: biff/biff.cpp.
-
      void TQFileInfo::setFile ( const TQFile & file )
-
      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
       Sets the file that the TQFileInfo provides information about to file.
-
       If file includes a relative path, the TQFileInfo will also have
-a relative path.
-
       
      See also isRelative().
-
-
      void TQFileInfo::setFile ( const TQDir & d, const TQString & fileName )
-
      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
       Sets the file that the TQFileInfo provides information about to fileName in directory d.
-
       If fileName includes a relative path, the TQFileInfo will also
-have a relative path.
-
       
      See also isRelative().
-
-
      uint TQFileInfo::size () const
-
      
-Returns the file size in bytes, or 0 if the file does not exist or
-if the size is 0 or if the size cannot be fetched.
-
-
      Example: qdir/qdir.cpp.
-
-
      
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
      
-
-
      Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
      TQt 3.3.8
      
-
      
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qfilepreview-members.html b/doc/html/qfilepreview-members.html
index dfa326a7b..51d934c9a 100644
--- a/doc/html/qfilepreview-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qfilepreview-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qfilepreview.html b/doc/html/qfilepreview.html
index 9cd42f382..8154a01d4 100644
--- a/doc/html/qfilepreview.html
+++ b/doc/html/qfilepreview.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
      The TQFilePreview class provides file previewing in TQFileDialog.
 More...
-
      #include <qfiledialog.h>
+
      #include <ntqfiledialog.h>
 
      List of all member functions.
 
      Public Members
      
 
        
@@ -44,16 +44,16 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
 
-The TQFilePreview class provides file previewing in TQFileDialog.
+The TQFilePreview class provides file previewing in TQFileDialog.
 
         This class is an abstract base class which is used to implement
 widgets that can display a preview of a file in a TQFileDialog.
-
         You must derive the preview widget from both TQWidget and from this
+
         You must derive the preview widget from both TQWidget and from this
 class. Then you must reimplement this class's previewUrl() function,
 which is called by the file dialog if the preview of a file
 (specified as a URL) should be shown.
-
         See also TQFileDialog::setPreviewMode(), TQFileDialog::setContentsPreview(),
-TQFileDialog::setInfoPreview(), TQFileDialog::setInfoPreviewEnabled(),
-TQFileDialog::setContentsPreviewEnabled().
+
         See also TQFileDialog::setPreviewMode(), TQFileDialog::setContentsPreview(),
+TQFileDialog::setInfoPreview(), TQFileDialog::setInfoPreviewEnabled(),
+TQFileDialog::setContentsPreviewEnabled().
 
         For an example of a preview widget see qt/examples/qdir/qdir.cpp.
 
        See also Miscellaneous Classes.
 
@@ -62,10 +62,10 @@ which is called by the file dialog if the preview of a file
 
 Constructs the TQFilePreview.
 
-
        void TQFilePreview::previewUrl ( const TQUrl & url ) [pure virtual]
+
        void TQFilePreview::previewUrl ( const TQUrl & url ) [pure virtual]
 
        
 
-
         This function is called by TQFileDialog if a preview
+
         This function is called by TQFileDialog if a preview
 for the url should be shown. Reimplement this
 function to provide file previewing.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qfocusdata-h.html b/doc/html/qfocusdata-h.html
index c900dc19d..da9901911 100644
--- a/doc/html/qfocusdata-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qfocusdata-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qfocusdata.h Include File
+ntqfocusdata.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
        TQFocusData Class Reference
        
-
-
        The TQFocusData class maintains the list of widgets in the focus
-chain.
-More...
-
        #include <qfocusdata.h>
-
        List of all member functions.
-
        Public Members
        
-
-
        Detailed Description
        
-
-
-The TQFocusData class maintains the list of widgets in the focus
-chain.
-
         
-
         This read-only list always contains at least one widget (i.e. the
-top-level widget). It provides a simple cursor which can be reset
-to the current focus widget using home(), or moved to its
-neighboring widgets using next() and prev(). You can also retrieve
-the count() of the number of widgets in the list. The list is a
-loop, so if you keep iterating, for example using next(), you will
-never come to the end.
-
         Some widgets in the list may not accept focus. Widgets are added
-to the list as necessary, but not removed from it. This lets
-widgets change focus policy dynamically without disrupting the
-focus chain the user experiences. When a widget disables and
-re-enables tab focus, its position in the focus chain does not
-change.
-
         When reimplementing TQWidget::focusNextPrevChild() to provide
-special focus flow, you will usually call TQWidget::focusData() to
-retrieve the focus data stored at the top-level widget. A
-top-level widget's focus data contains the focus list for its
-hierarchy of widgets.
-
         The cursor may change at any time.
-
         This class is not thread-safe.
-
         
        See also TQWidget::focusNextPrevChild(), TQWidget::setTabOrder(), TQWidget::focusPolicy, and Miscellaneous Classes.
-
-
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        int TQFocusData::count () const
-
        
-
-
         Returns the number of widgets in the focus chain.
-
-
        TQWidget * TQFocusData::first () const
-
        
-Returns the first widget in the focus chain.
-The cursor is not modified.
-
-
        TQWidget * TQFocusData::focusWidget () const
-
        
-
-
         Returns the widgets in the hierarchy that are in the focus chain.
-
-
        TQWidget * TQFocusData::home ()
-
        
-Moves the cursor to the focusWidget() and returns that widget. You
-must call this before next() or prev() to iterate meaningfully.
-
-
        TQWidget * TQFocusData::last () const
-
        
-Returns the last widget in the focus chain.
-The cursor is not modified.
-
-
        TQWidget * TQFocusData::next ()
-
        
-Moves the cursor to the next widget in the focus chain. There is
-always a next widget because the list is a loop.
-
-
        TQWidget * TQFocusData::prev ()
-
        
-Moves the cursor to the previous widget in the focus chain. There
-is always a previous widget because the list is a loop.
-
-
-
        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
        
-
-
        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
        TQt 3.3.8
        
-
        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qfocusevent-members.html b/doc/html/qfocusevent-members.html
index 5ff98d299..3002e5879 100644
--- a/doc/html/qfocusevent-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qfocusevent-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -41,8 +41,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
      • reason()
 
      • resetReason()
 
      • setReason()
-
      • spontaneous()
-
      • type()
+
      • spontaneous()
+
      • type()
 
      
 
 
      
diff --git a/doc/html/qfocusevent.html b/doc/html/qfocusevent.html
index 23e202ba7..eaa0cd81f 100644
--- a/doc/html/qfocusevent.html
+++ b/doc/html/qfocusevent.html
@@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
      The TQFocusEvent class contains event parameters for widget focus
 events.
 More...
-
      #include <qevent.h>
-
      Inherits TQEvent.
+
      #include <ntqevent.h>
+
      Inherits TQEvent.
 
      List of all member functions.
 
      Public Members
      
 
        
@@ -62,12 +62,12 @@ Tab or Backtab), the window system, popup menus, keyboard
 shortcuts or other application specific reasons. The reason for a
 particular focus event is returned by reason() in the appropriate
 event handler.
-
         The event handlers TQWidget::focusInEvent() and
-TQWidget::focusOutEvent() receive focus events.
+
         The event handlers TQWidget::focusInEvent() and
+TQWidget::focusOutEvent() receive focus events.
 
         Use setReason() to set the reason for all focus events, and
 resetReason() to set the reason for all focus events to the reason
 in force before the last setReason() call.
-
         
        See also TQWidget::setFocus(), TQWidget::focusPolicy, and Event Classes.
+
         
        See also TQWidget::setFocus(), TQWidget::focusPolicy, and Event Classes.
 
 
        Member Type Documentation
        
 
        TQFocusEvent::Reason
        
@@ -86,11 +86,11 @@ in force before the last setReason() call.
 about focus.
 
 
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        TQFocusEvent::TQFocusEvent ( Type type )
+
        TQFocusEvent::TQFocusEvent ( Type type )
 
        
 
 
         Constructs a focus event object.
-
         The type parameter must be either TQEvent::FocusIn or TQEvent::FocusOut.
+
         The type parameter must be either TQEvent::FocusIn or TQEvent::FocusOut.
 
 
        bool TQFocusEvent::gotFocus () const
 
        
diff --git a/doc/html/qfont-examples.html b/doc/html/qfont-examples.html
index 165fdf3b3..238c4e676 100644
--- a/doc/html/qfont-examples.html
+++ b/doc/html/qfont-examples.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
  
 
         The following example programs show how to use the 
-classes TQFont, TQFontMetrics, TQFontInfo, and TQFontDatabase. 
+classes TQFont, TQFontMetrics, TQFontInfo, and TQFontDatabase. 
 
         
 
        
 
        A simple demonstration of TQFont member functions
diff --git a/doc/html/qfont-h.html b/doc/html/qfont-h.html
index 00d34475e..d0f5a05f6 100644
--- a/doc/html/qfont-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qfont-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qfont.h Include File
+ntqfont.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
        TQFont Class Reference
        
-
-
        The TQFont class specifies a font used for drawing text.
-More...
-
        #include <qfont.h>
-
        List of all member functions.
-
        Public Members
        
-
          
-
        • enum StyleHint { Helvetica, SansSerif = Helvetica, Times, Serif = Times, Courier, TypeWriter = Courier, OldEnglish, Decorative = OldEnglish, System, AnyStyle }
          • 
-
        • enum StyleStrategy { PreferDefault = 0x0001, PreferBitmap = 0x0002, PreferDevice = 0x0004, PreferOutline = 0x0008, ForceOutline = 0x0010, PreferMatch = 0x0020, PreferQuality = 0x0040, PreferAntialias = 0x0080, NoAntialias = 0x0100, OpenGLCompatible = 0x0200 }
          • 
-
        • enum Weight { Light = 25, Normal = 50, DemiBold = 63, Bold = 75, Black = 87 }
          • 
-
        • enum Stretch { UltraCondensed = 50, ExtraCondensed = 62, Condensed = 75, SemiCondensed = 87, Unstretched = 100, SemiExpanded = 112, Expanded = 125, ExtraExpanded = 150, UltraExpanded = 200 }
          • 
-
        • TQFont ()
          • 
-
        • TQFont ( const TQString & family, int pointSize = 12, int weight = Normal, bool italic = FALSE )
          • 
-
        • TQFont ( const TQFont & font )
          • 
-
        • ~TQFont ()
          • 
-
        • TQString family () const
          • 
-
        • void setFamily ( const TQString & family )
          • 
-
        • int pointSize () const
          • 
-
        • float pointSizeFloat () const
          • 
-
        • void setPointSize ( int pointSize )
          • 
-
        • void setPointSizeFloat ( float pointSize )
          • 
-
        • int pixelSize () const
          • 
-
        • void setPixelSize ( int pixelSize )
          • 
-
        • void setPixelSizeFloat ( float pixelSize )  (obsolete)
          • 
-
        • int weight () const
          • 
-
        • void setWeight ( int weight )
          • 
-
        • bool bold () const
          • 
-
        • void setBold ( bool enable )
          • 
-
        • bool italic () const
          • 
-
        • void setItalic ( bool enable )
          • 
-
        • bool underline () const
          • 
-
        • void setUnderline ( bool enable )
          • 
-
        • bool overline () const
          • 
-
        • void setOverline ( bool enable )
          • 
-
        • bool strikeOut () const
          • 
-
        • void setStrikeOut ( bool enable )
          • 
-
        • bool fixedPitch () const
          • 
-
        • void setFixedPitch ( bool enable )
          • 
-
        • StyleHint styleHint () const
          • 
-
        • StyleStrategy styleStrategy () const
          • 
-
        • void setStyleHint ( StyleHint hint, StyleStrategy strategy = PreferDefault )
          • 
-
        • void setStyleStrategy ( StyleStrategy s )
          • 
-
        • int stretch () const
          • 
-
        • void setStretch ( int factor )
          • 
-
        • bool rawMode () const
          • 
-
        • void setRawMode ( bool enable )
          • 
-
        • bool exactMatch () const
          • 
-
        • TQFont & operator= ( const TQFont & font )
          • 
-
        • bool operator== ( const TQFont & f ) const
          • 
-
        • bool operator!= ( const TQFont & f ) const
          • 
-
        • bool isCopyOf ( const TQFont & f ) const
          • 
-
        • HFONT handle () const
          • 
-
        • void setRawName ( const TQString & name )
          • 
-
        • TQString rawName () const
          • 
-
        • TQString key () const
          • 
-
        • TQString toString () const
          • 
-
        • bool fromString ( const TQString & descrip )
          • 
-
        • void qwsRenderToDisk ( bool all = TRUE )
          • 
-
        • enum Script { Latin, Greek, Cyrillic, Armenian, Georgian, Runic, Ogham, SpacingModifiers, CombiningMarks, Hebrew, Arabic, Syriac, Thaana, Devanagari, Bengali, Gurmukhi, Gujarati, Oriya, Tamil, Telugu, Kannada, Malayalam, Sinhala, Thai, Lao, Tibetan, Myanmar, Khmer, Han, Hiragana, Katakana, Hangul, Bopomofo, Yi, Ethiopic, Cherokee, CanadianAboriginal, Mongolian, CurrencySymbols, LetterlikeSymbols, NumberForms, MathematicalOperators, TechnicalSymbols, GeometricSymbols, MiscellaneousSymbols, EnclosedAndSquare, Braille, Unicode, Tagalog, Hanunoo, Buhid, Tagbanwa, KatakanaHalfWidth, Limbu, TaiLe }
          • 
-
        • TQString defaultFamily () const
          • 
-
        • TQString lastResortFamily () const
          • 
-
        • TQString lastResortFont () const
          • 
-
        • TQFont resolve ( const TQFont & other ) const
          • 
-
        
-
        Static Public Members
        
-
          
-
        • TQString substitute ( const TQString & familyName )
          • 
-
        • TQStringList substitutes ( const TQString & familyName )
          • 
-
        • TQStringList substitutions ()
          • 
-
        • void insertSubstitution ( const TQString & familyName, const TQString & substituteName )
          • 
-
        • void insertSubstitutions ( const TQString & familyName, const TQStringList & substituteNames )
          • 
-
        • void removeSubstitution ( const TQString & familyName )
          • 
-
        • TQFont defaultFont ()  (obsolete)
          • 
-
        • void setDefaultFont ( const TQFont & f )  (obsolete)
          • 
-
        
-
        Protected Members
        
-
-
        Related Functions
        
-
          
-
        • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQFont & font )
          • 
-
        • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQFont & font )
          • 
-
        
-
        Detailed Description
        
-
-
-The TQFont class specifies a font used for drawing text.
-
         
-
-
-
-
         When you create a TQFont object you specify various attributes that
-you want the font to have. TQt will use the font with the specified
-attributes, or if no matching font exists, TQt will use the closest
-matching installed font. The attributes of the font that is
-actually used are retrievable from a TQFontInfo object. If the
-window system provides an exact match exactMatch() returns TRUE.
-Use TQFontMetrics to get measurements, e.g. the pixel length of a
-string using TQFontMetrics::width().
-
         Use TQApplication::setFont() to set the application's default font.
-
         If a choosen X11 font does not include all the characters that
-need to be displayed, TQFont will try to find the characters in the
-nearest equivalent fonts. When a TQPainter draws a character from a
-font the TQFont will report whether or not it has the character; if
-it does not, TQPainter will draw an unfilled square.
-
         Create TQFonts like this:
-
        -    TQFont serifFont( "Times", 10, Bold );
-    TQFont sansFont( "Helvetica [Cronyx]", 12 );
-    
        
- 
-
         The attributes set in the constructor can also be set later, e.g.
-setFamily(), setPointSize(), setPointSizeFloat(), setWeight() and
-setItalic(). The remaining attributes must be set after
-contstruction, e.g. setBold(), setUnderline(), setOverline(),
-setStrikeOut() and setFixedPitch(). TQFontInfo objects should be
-created after the font's attributes have been set. A TQFontInfo
-object will not change, even if you change the font's
-attributes. The corresponding "get" functions, e.g. family(),
-pointSize(), etc., return the values that were set, even though
-the values used may differ. The actual values are available from a
-TQFontInfo object.
-
         If the requested font family is unavailable you can influence the
-font matching algorithm by choosing a
-particular TQFont::StyleHint and TQFont::StyleStrategy with
-setStyleHint(). The default family (corresponding to the current
-style hint) is returned by defaultFamily().
-
         The font-matching algorithm has a lastResortFamily() and
-lastResortFont() in cases where a suitable match cannot be found.
-You can provide substitutions for font family names using
-insertSubstitution() and insertSubstitutions(). Substitutions can
-be removed with removeSubstitution(). Use substitute() to retrieve
-a family's first substitute, or the family name itself if it has
-no substitutes. Use substitutes() to retrieve a list of a family's
-substitutes (which may be empty).
-
         Every TQFont has a key() which you can use, for example, as the key
-in a cache or dictionary. If you want to store a user's font
-preferences you could use TQSettings, writing the font information
-with toString() and reading it back with fromString(). The
-operator<<() and operator>>() functions are also available, but
-they work on a data stream.
-
         It is possible to set the height of characters shown on the screen
-to a specified number of pixels with setPixelSize(); however using
-setPointSize() has a similar effect and provides device
-independence.
-
         Under the X Window System you can set a font using its system
-specific name with setRawName().
-
         Loading fonts can be expensive, especially on X11. TQFont contains
-extensive optimizations to make the copying of TQFont objects fast,
-and to cache the results of the slow window system functions it
-depends upon.
-
         
-The font matching algorithm works as follows:
-
          
-
        1.  The specified font family is searched for.
-
        2.  If not found, the styleHint() is used to select a replacement
-family.
-
        3.  Each replacement font family is searched for.
-
        4.  If none of these are found or there was no styleHint(), "helvetica"
-will be searched for.
-
        5.  If "helvetica" isn't found TQt will try the lastResortFamily().
-
        6.  If the lastResortFamily() isn't found TQt will try the
-lastResortFont() which will always return a name of some kind.
-
        
-
         Once a font is found, the remaining attributes are matched in order of
-priority:
-
          
-
        1.  fixedPitch()
-
        2.  pointSize() (see below)
-
        3.  weight()
-
        4.  italic()
-
        
-
         If you have a font which matches on family, even if none of the
-other attributes match, this font will be chosen in preference to
-a font which doesn't match on family but which does match on the
-other attributes. This is because font family is the dominant
-search criteria.
-
         The point size is defined to match if it is within 20% of the
-requested point size. When several fonts match and are only
-distinguished by point size, the font with the closest point size
-to the one requested will be chosen.
-
         The actual family, font size, weight and other font attributes
-used for drawing text will depend on what's available for the
-chosen family under the window system. A TQFontInfo object can be
-used to determine the actual values used for drawing the text.
-
         Examples:
-
         
        -    TQFont f("Helvetica");
-    
        
- 
-If you had both an Adobe and a Cronyx Helvetica, you might get
-either.
-
         
        -    TQFont f1( "Helvetica [Cronyx]" );  // TQt 3.x
-    TQFont f2( "Cronyx-Helvetica" );    // TQt 2.x compatibility
-    
        
- 
-You can specify the foundry you want in the family name. Both fonts,
-f1 and f2, in the above example will be set to  "Helvetica
-[Cronyx]".
-
         To determine the attributes of the font actually used in the window
-system, use a TQFontInfo object, e.g.
-
        -    TQFontInfo info( f1 );
-    TQString family = info.family();
-    
        
- 
-
         To find out font metrics use a TQFontMetrics object, e.g.
-
        -    TQFontMetrics fm( f1 );
-    int pixelWidth = fm.width( "How many pixels wide is this text?" );
-    int pixelHeight = fm.height();
-    
        
- 
-
         For more general information on fonts, see the
-comp.fonts FAQ.
-Information on encodings can be found from
-Roman Czyborra's page.
-
         
        See also TQFontMetrics, TQFontInfo, TQFontDatabase, TQApplication::setFont(), TQWidget::font, TQPainter::setFont(), TQFont::StyleHint, TQFont::Weight, Widget Appearance and Style, Graphics Classes, and Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes.
-
-
        Member Type Documentation
        
-
        TQFont::Script
        
-
-
         This enum represents Unicode allocated
-scripts. For exhaustive coverage see The
-    Unicode Standard Version 3.0. The following scripts are
-supported:
-
         Modern European alphabetic scripts (left to right):
-
          
-
        • TQFont::Latin - consists of most alphabets based on the original Latin alphabet.
-
        • TQFont::Greek - covers ancient and modern Greek and Coptic.
-
        • TQFont::Cyrillic - covers the Slavic and non-Slavic languages using
-cyrillic alphabets.
-
        • TQFont::Armenian - contains the Armenian alphabet used with the
-Armenian language.
-
        • TQFont::Georgian - covers at least the language Georgian.
-
        • TQFont::Runic - covers the known constituents of the Runic alphabets used
-by the early and medieval societies in the Germanic,
-Scandinavian, and Anglo-Saxon areas.
-
        • TQFont::Ogham - is an alphabetical script used to write a very early
-form of Irish.
-
        • TQFont::SpacingModifiers - are small signs indicating modifications
-to the preceeding letter.
-
        • TQFont::CombiningMarks - consist of diacritical marks not specific to
-a particular alphabet, diacritical marks used in
-combination with mathematical and technical symbols, and
-glyph encodings applied to multiple letterforms.
-
         Middle Eastern scripts (right to left):
-
          
-
        • TQFont::Hebrew - is used for writing Hebrew, Yiddish, and some other languages.
-
        • TQFont::Arabic - covers the Arabic language as well as Persian, Urdu,
-Kurdish and some others.
-
        • TQFont::Syriac - is used to write the active liturgical languages and
-dialects of several Middle Eastern and Southeast Indian
-communities.
-
        • TQFont::Thaana - is used to write the Maledivian Dhivehi language.
-
         South and Southeast Asian scripts (left to right with few historical exceptions):
-
          
-
        • TQFont::Devanagari - covers classical Sanskrit and modern Hindi as
-well as several other languages.
-
        • TQFont::Bengali - is a relative to Devanagari employed to write the
-Bengali language used in West Bengal/India and Bangladesh
-as well as several minority languages.
-
        • TQFont::Gurmukhi - is another Devanagari relative used to write Punjabi.
-
        • TQFont::Gujarati - is closely related to Devanagari and used to write
-the Gujarati language of the Gujarat state in India.
-
        • TQFont::Oriya - is used to write the Oriya language of Orissa state/India.
-
        • TQFont::Tamil - is used to write the Tamil language of Tamil Nadu state/India,
-Sri Lanka, Singapore and parts of Malaysia as well as some
-minority languages.
-
        • TQFont::Telugu - is used to write the Telugu language of Andhra
-Pradesh state/India and some minority languages.
-
        • TQFont::Kannada - is another South Indian script used to write the
-Kannada language of Karnataka state/India and some minority
-languages.
-
        • TQFont::Malayalam - is used to write the Malayalam language of Kerala
-state/India.
-
        • TQFont::Sinhala - is used for Sri Lanka's majority language Sinhala
-and is also employed to write Pali, Sanskrit, and Tamil.
-
        • TQFont::Thai - is used to write Thai and other Southeast Asian languages.
-
        • TQFont::Lao - is a language and script quite similar to Thai.
-
        • TQFont::Tibetan - is the script used to write Tibetan in several
-countries like Tibet, the bordering Indian regions and
-Nepal. It is also used in the Buddist philosophy and
-liturgy of the Mongolian cultural area.
-
        • TQFont::Myanmar - is mainly used to write the Burmese language of
-Myanmar (former Burma).
-
        • TQFont::Khmer - is the official language of Kampuchea.
-
         East Asian scripts (traditionally top-down, right to left, modern
-often horizontal left to right):
-
          
-
        • TQFont::Han - consists of the CJK (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
-idiographic characters.
-
        • TQFont::Hiragana - is a cursive syllabary used to indicate phonetics
-and pronounciation of Japanese words.
-
        • TQFont::Katakana - is a non-cursive syllabic script used to write
-Japanese words with visual emphasis and non-Japanese words
-in a phonetical manner.
-
        • TQFont::Hangul - is a Korean script consisting of alphabetic components.
-
        • TQFont::Bopomofo - is a phonetic alphabet for Chinese (mainly Mandarin).
-
        • TQFont::Yi - (also called Cuan or Wei) is a syllabary used to write
-the Yi language of Southwestern China, Myanmar, Laos, and Vietnam.
-
         Additional scripts that do not fit well into the script categories above:
-
          
-
        • TQFont::Ethiopic - is a syllabary used by several Central East African languages.
-
        • TQFont::Cherokee - is a left-to-right syllabic script used to write
-the Cherokee language.
-
        • TQFont::CanadianAboriginal - consists of the syllabics used by some
-Canadian aboriginal societies.
-
        • TQFont::Mongolian - is the traditional (and recently reintroduced)
-script used to write Mongolian.
-
         Symbols:
-
          
-
        • TQFont::CurrencySymbols - contains currency symbols not encoded in other scripts.
-
        • TQFont::LetterlikeSymbols - consists of symbols derived  from
-ordinary letters of an alphabetical script.
-
        • TQFont::NumberForms - are provided for compatibility with other
-existing character sets.
-
        • TQFont::MathematicalOperators - consists of encodings for operators,
-relations and other symbols like arrows used in a mathematical context.
-
        • TQFont::TechnicalSymbols - contains representations for control
-codes, the space symbol, APL symbols and other symbols
-mainly used in the context of electronic data processing.
-
        • TQFont::GeometricSymbols - covers block elements and geometric shapes.
-
        • TQFont::MiscellaneousSymbols - consists of a heterogeneous collection
-of symbols that do not fit any other Unicode character
-block, e.g. Dingbats.
-
        • TQFont::EnclosedAndSquare - is provided for compatibility with some
-East Asian standards.
-
        • TQFont::Braille - is an international writing system used by blind
-people. This script encodes the 256 eight-dot patterns with
-the 64 six-dot patterns as a subset.
-
        • TQFont::Tagalog
-
        • TQFont::Hanunoo
-
        • TQFont::Buhid
-
        • TQFont::Tagbanwa
-
        • TQFont::KatakanaHalfWidth
-
        • TQFont::Limbu - (Unicode 4.0)
-
        • TQFont::TaiLe - (Unicode 4.0)
-
        • TQFont::Unicode - includes all the above scripts.
-
        
-
        TQFont::Stretch
        
-
-
         Predefined stretch values that follow the CSS naming convention.
-
          
-
        • TQFont::UltraCondensed - 50
-
        • TQFont::ExtraCondensed - 62
-
        • TQFont::Condensed - 75
-
        • TQFont::SemiCondensed - 87
-
        • TQFont::Unstretched - 100
-
        • TQFont::SemiExpanded - 112
-
        • TQFont::Expanded - 125
-
        • TQFont::ExtraExpanded - 150
-
        • TQFont::UltraExpanded - 200
-
         
        See also setStretch() and stretch().
-
-
        TQFont::StyleHint
        
-
-
         Style hints are used by the font
-    matching algorithm to find an appropriate default family
-if a selected font family is not available.
-
          
-
        • TQFont::AnyStyle - leaves the font matching algorithm to choose the
-family. This is the default.
-
        • TQFont::SansSerif - the font matcher prefer sans serif fonts.
-
        • TQFont::Helvetica - is a synonym for SansSerif.
-
        • TQFont::Serif - the font matcher prefers serif fonts.
-
        • TQFont::Times - is a synonym for Serif.
-
        • TQFont::TypeWriter - the font matcher prefers fixed pitch fonts.
-
        • TQFont::Courier - a synonym for TypeWriter.
-
        • TQFont::OldEnglish - the font matcher prefers decorative fonts.
-
        • TQFont::Decorative - is a synonym for OldEnglish.
-
        • TQFont::System - the font matcher prefers system fonts.
-
        
-
        TQFont::StyleStrategy
        
-
-
         The style strategy tells the font
-    matching algorithm what type of fonts should be used to
-find an appropriate default family.
-
         The following strategies are available:
-
          
-
        • TQFont::PreferDefault - the default style strategy. It does not prefer
-any type of font.
-
        • TQFont::PreferBitmap - prefers bitmap fonts (as opposed to outline
-fonts).
-
        • TQFont::PreferDevice - prefers device fonts.
-
        • TQFont::PreferOutline - prefers outline fonts (as opposed to bitmap fonts).
-
        • TQFont::ForceOutline - forces the use of outline fonts.
-
        • TQFont::NoAntialias - don't antialias the fonts.
-
        • TQFont::PreferAntialias - antialias if possible.
-
        • TQFont::OpenGLCompatible - forces the use of OpenGL compatible
-fonts.
-
         Any of these may be OR-ed with one of these flags:
-
          
-
        • TQFont::PreferMatch - prefer an exact match. The font matcher will try to
-use the exact font size that has been specified.
-
        • TQFont::PreferQuality - prefer the best quality font. The font matcher
-will use the nearest standard point size that the font
-supports.
-
        
-
        TQFont::Weight
        
-
-
         TQt uses a weighting scale from 0 to 99 similar to, but not the
-same as, the scales used in Windows or CSS. A weight of 0 is
-ultralight, whilst 99 will be an extremely black.
-
         This enum contains the predefined font weights:
-
          
-
        • TQFont::Light - 25
-
        • TQFont::Normal - 50
-
        • TQFont::DemiBold - 63
-
        • TQFont::Bold - 75
-
        • TQFont::Black - 87
-
        
-
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        TQFont::TQFont ()
-
        
-Constructs a font object that uses the application's default font.
-
         
        See also TQApplication::setFont() and TQApplication::font().
-
-
        TQFont::TQFont ( const TQString & family, int pointSize = 12, int weight = Normal, bool italic = FALSE )
-
        
-Constructs a font object with the specified family, pointSize, weight and italic settings.
-
         If pointSize is <= 0 it is set to 1.
-
         The family name may optionally also include a foundry name,
-e.g. "Helvetica [Cronyx]". (The TQt 2.x syntax, i.e.
-"Cronyx-Helvetica", is also supported.) If the family is
-available from more than one foundry and the foundry isn't
-specified, an arbitrary foundry is chosen. If the family isn't
-available a family will be set using the font
-    matching algorithm.
-
         
        See also Weight, setFamily(), setPointSize(), setWeight(), setItalic(), setStyleHint(), and TQApplication::font().
-
-
        TQFont::TQFont ( const TQFont & font )
-
        
-Constructs a font that is a copy of font.
-
-
        TQFont::~TQFont ()
-
        
-Destroys the font object and frees all allocated resources.
-
-
        bool TQFont::bold () const
-
        
-
-
         Returns TRUE if weight() is a value greater than TQFont::Normal; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
         
        See also weight(), setBold(), and TQFontInfo::bold().
-
-
        Example: chart/optionsform.cpp.
-
        int TQFont::deciPointSize () const [protected]
-
        
-Returns the point size in 1/10ths of a point.
-
         The returned value will be -1 if the font size has been specified
-in pixels.
-
         
        See also pointSize() and pointSizeFloat().
-
-
        TQString TQFont::defaultFamily () const
-
        
-Returns the family name that corresponds to the current style
-hint.
-
         
        See also StyleHint, styleHint(), and setStyleHint().
-
-
        TQFont TQFont::defaultFont () [static]
-
         This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
         Please use TQApplication::font() instead.
-
-
        bool TQFont::dirty () const [protected]
-
        
-Returns TRUE if the font attributes have been changed and the font
-has to be (re)loaded; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
        bool TQFont::exactMatch () const
-
        
-Returns TRUE if a window system font exactly matching the settings
-of this font is available.
-
         
        See also TQFontInfo.
-
-
        TQString TQFont::family () const
-
        
-Returns the requested font family name, i.e. the name set in the
-constructor or the last setFont() call.
-
         
        See also setFamily(), substitutes(), and substitute().
-
-
        Examples: chart/optionsform.cpp and fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp.
-
        bool TQFont::fixedPitch () const
-
        
-Returns TRUE if fixed pitch has been set; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
         
        See also setFixedPitch() and TQFontInfo::fixedPitch().
-
-
        bool TQFont::fromString ( const TQString & descrip )
-
        
-Sets this font to match the description descrip. The description
-is a comma-separated list of the font attributes, as returned by
-toString().
-
         
        See also toString() and operator>>().
-
-
        HFONT TQFont::handle () const
-
        
-Returns the window system handle to the font, for low-level
-access. Using this function is not portable.
-
-
        void TQFont::insertSubstitution ( const TQString & familyName, const TQString & substituteName ) [static]
-
        
-Inserts the family name substituteName into the substitution
-table for familyName.
-
         
        See also insertSubstitutions(), removeSubstitution(), substitutions(), substitute(), and substitutes().
-
-
        Example: fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp.
-
        void TQFont::insertSubstitutions ( const TQString & familyName, const TQStringList & substituteNames ) [static]
-
        
-Inserts the list of families substituteNames into the
-substitution list for familyName.
-
         
        See also insertSubstitution(), removeSubstitution(), substitutions(), and substitute().
-
-
        Example: fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp.
-
        bool TQFont::isCopyOf ( const TQFont & f ) const
-
        
-Returns TRUE if this font and f are copies of each other, i.e.
-one of them was created as a copy of the other and neither has
-been modified since. This is much stricter than equality.
-
         
        See also operator=() and operator==().
-
-
        bool TQFont::italic () const
-
        
-Returns TRUE if italic has been set; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
         
        See also setItalic().
-
-
        Example: chart/optionsform.cpp.
-
        TQString TQFont::key () const
-
        
-Returns the font's key, a textual representation of a font. It is
-typically used as the key for a cache or dictionary of fonts.
-
         
        See also TQMap.
-
-
        TQString TQFont::lastResortFamily () const
-
        
-Returns the "last resort" font family name.
-
         The current implementation tries a wide variety of common fonts,
-returning the first one it finds. Is is possible that no family is
-found in which case a null string is returned.
-
         
        See also lastResortFont().
-
-
        TQString TQFont::lastResortFont () const
-
        
-Returns a "last resort" font name for the font matching algorithm.
-This is used if the last resort family is not available. It will
-always return a name, if necessary returning something like
-"fixed" or "system".
-
         The current implementation tries a wide variety of common fonts,
-returning the first one it finds. The implementation may change
-at any time, but this function will always return a string
-containing something.
-
         It is theoretically possible that there really isn't a
-lastResortFont() in which case TQt will abort with an error
-message. We have not been able to identify a case where this
-happens. Please report it as a bug if
-it does, preferably with a list of the fonts you have installed.
-
         
        See also lastResortFamily() and rawName().
-
-
        bool TQFont::operator!= ( const TQFont & f ) const
-
        
-Returns TRUE if this font is different from f; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
         Two TQFonts are considered to be different if their font attributes
-are different. If rawMode() is enabled for both fonts, only the
-family fields are compared.
-
         
        See also operator==().
-
-
        TQFont & TQFont::operator= ( const TQFont & font )
-
        
-Assigns font to this font and returns a reference to it.
-
-
        bool TQFont::operator== ( const TQFont & f ) const
-
        
-Returns TRUE if this font is equal to f; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
         Two TQFonts are considered equal if their font attributes are
-equal. If rawMode() is enabled for both fonts, only the family
-fields are compared.
-
         
        See also operator!=() and isCopyOf().
-
-
        bool TQFont::overline () const
-
        
-Returns TRUE if overline has been set; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
         
        See also setOverline().
-
-
        int TQFont::pixelSize () const
-
        
-Returns the pixel size of the font if it was set with
-setPixelSize(). Returns -1 if the size was set with setPointSize()
-or setPointSizeFloat().
-
         
        See also setPixelSize(), pointSize(), TQFontInfo::pointSize(), and TQFontInfo::pixelSize().
-
-
        int TQFont::pointSize () const
-
        
-Returns the point size of the font. Returns -1 if the font size
-was specified in pixels.
-
         
        See also setPointSize(), deciPointSize(), and pointSizeFloat().
-
-
        Examples: chart/optionsform.cpp and fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp.
-
        float TQFont::pointSizeFloat () const
-
        
-Returns the point size of the font. Returns -1 if the font size was
-specified in pixels.
-
         
        See also pointSize(), setPointSizeFloat(), pixelSize(), TQFontInfo::pointSize(), and TQFontInfo::pixelSize().
-
-
        void TQFont::qwsRenderToDisk ( bool all = TRUE )
-
        
-Saves the glyphs in the font that have previously been accessed as
-a TQPF file. If all is TRUE (the default), then before saving,
-all glyphs are marked as used.
-
         If the font is large and you are sure that only a subset of
-characters will ever be required on the target device, passing
-FALSE for the all parameter can save a significant amount of
-disk space.
-
         Note that this function is only applicable on TQt/Embedded.
-
-
        bool TQFont::rawMode () const
-
        
-Returns TRUE if raw mode is used for font name matching; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
         
        See also setRawMode() and rawName().
-
-
        TQString TQFont::rawName () const
-
        
-Returns the name of the font within the underlying window system.
-
         On Windows, this is usually just the family name of a TrueType
-font.
-
         On X11, it is an XLFD (X Logical Font Description).  When TQt is
-build with Xft support on X11, the return value can be an Xft
-pattern or an XLFD.
-
         Using the return value of this function is usually not portable.
-
         
        See also setRawName().
-
-
        void TQFont::removeSubstitution ( const TQString & familyName ) [static]
-
        
-Removes all the substitutions for familyName.
-
         
        See also insertSubstitutions(), insertSubstitution(), substitutions(), and substitute().
-
-
        TQFont TQFont::resolve ( const TQFont & other ) const
-
        
-Returns a new TQFont that has attributes copied from other.
-
-
        void TQFont::setBold ( bool enable )
-
        
-
-
         If enable is true sets the font's weight to TQFont::Bold; otherwise sets the weight to TQFont::Normal.
-
         For finer boldness control use setWeight().
-
         
        See also bold() and setWeight().
-
-
        Examples: menu/menu.cpp and themes/metal.cpp.
-
        void TQFont::setDefaultFont ( const TQFont & f ) [static]
-
         This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
         Please use TQApplication::setFont() instead.
-
-
        void TQFont::setFamily ( const TQString & family )
-
        
-Sets the family name of the font. The name is case insensitive and
-may include a foundry name.
-
         The family name may optionally also include a foundry name,
-e.g. "Helvetica [Cronyx]". (The TQt 2.x syntax, i.e.
-"Cronyx-Helvetica", is also supported.) If the family is
-available from more than one foundry and the foundry isn't
-specified, an arbitrary foundry is chosen. If the family isn't
-available a family will be set using the font
-    matching algorithm.
-
         
        See also family(), setStyleHint(), and TQFontInfo.
-
-
        void TQFont::setFixedPitch ( bool enable )
-
        
-If enable is TRUE, sets fixed pitch on; otherwise sets fixed
-pitch off.
-
         
        See also fixedPitch() and TQFontInfo.
-
-
        void TQFont::setItalic ( bool enable )
-
        
-If enable is TRUE, italic is set on; otherwise italic is set
-off.
-
         
        See also italic() and TQFontInfo.
-
-
        Examples: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp, fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp, and themes/metal.cpp.
-
        void TQFont::setOverline ( bool enable )
-
        
-If enable is TRUE, sets overline on; otherwise sets overline off.
-
         
        See also overline() and TQFontInfo.
-
-
        void TQFont::setPixelSize ( int pixelSize )
-
        
-Sets the font size to pixelSize pixels.
-
         Using this function makes the font device dependent. Use
-setPointSize() or setPointSizeFloat() to set the size of the font
-in a device independent manner.
-
         
        See also pixelSize().
-
-
        Example: qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
-
        void TQFont::setPixelSizeFloat ( float pixelSize )
-
         This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
         Sets the logical pixel height of font characters when shown on
-the screen to pixelSize.
-
-
        void TQFont::setPointSize ( int pointSize )
-
        
-Sets the point size to pointSize. The point size must be
-greater than zero.
-
         
        See also pointSize() and setPointSizeFloat().
-
-
        Example: fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp.
-
        void TQFont::setPointSizeFloat ( float pointSize )
-
        
-Sets the point size to pointSize. The point size must be
-greater than zero. The requested precision may not be achieved on
-all platforms.
-
         
        See also pointSizeFloat(), setPointSize(), and setPixelSize().
-
-
        void TQFont::setRawMode ( bool enable )
-
        
-If enable is TRUE, turns raw mode on; otherwise turns raw mode
-off. This function only has an effect under X11.
-
         If raw mode is enabled, TQt will search for an X font with a
-complete font name matching the family name, ignoring all other
-values set for the TQFont. If the font name matches several fonts,
-TQt will use the first font returned by X. TQFontInfo cannot be
-used to fetch information about a TQFont using raw mode (it will
-return the values set in the TQFont for all parameters, including
-the family name).
-
         Warning: Do not use raw mode unless you really, really need it! In
-most (if not all) cases, setRawName() is a much better choice.
-
         
        See also rawMode() and setRawName().
-
-
        void TQFont::setRawName ( const TQString & name )
-
        
-Sets a font by its system specific name. The function is
-particularly useful under X, where system font settings (for
-example X resources) are usually available in XLFD (X Logical Font
-Description) form only. You can pass an XLFD as name to this
-function.
-
         A font set with setRawName() is still a full-featured TQFont. It can
-be queried (for example with italic()) or modified (for example with
-setItalic()) and is therefore also suitable for rendering rich text.
-
         If TQt's internal font database cannot resolve the raw name, the
-font becomes a raw font with name as its family.
-
         Note that the present implementation does not handle wildcards in
-XLFDs well, and that font aliases (file fonts.alias in the font
-directory on X11) are not supported.
-
         
        See also rawName(), setRawMode(), and setFamily().
-
-
        void TQFont::setStretch ( int factor )
-
        
-Sets the stretch factor for the font.
-
         The stretch factor changes the width of all characters in the font
-by factor percent.  For example, setting factor to 150
-results in all characters in the font being 1.5 times ( ie. 150% )
-wider.  The default stretch factor is 100.  The minimum stretch
-factor is 1, and the maximum stretch factor is 4000.
-
         The stretch factor is only applied to outline fonts.  The stretch
-factor is ignored for bitmap fonts.
-
         NOTE: TQFont cannot stretch XLFD fonts.  When loading XLFD fonts on
-X11, the stretch factor is matched against a predefined set of
-values for the SETWIDTH_NAME field of the XLFD.
-
         
        See also stretch() and TQFont::StyleStrategy.
-
-
        void TQFont::setStrikeOut ( bool enable )
-
        
-If enable is TRUE, sets strikeout on; otherwise sets strikeout
-off.
-
         
        See also strikeOut() and TQFontInfo.
-
-
        void TQFont::setStyleHint ( StyleHint hint, StyleStrategy strategy = PreferDefault )
-
        
-Sets the style hint and strategy to hint and strategy,
-respectively.
-
         If these aren't set explicitly the style hint will default to
-AnyStyle and the style strategy to PreferDefault.
-
         TQt does not support style hints on X11 since this information
-is not provided by the window system.
-
         
        See also StyleHint, styleHint(), StyleStrategy, styleStrategy(), and TQFontInfo.
-
-
        Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp and fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp.
-
        void TQFont::setStyleStrategy ( StyleStrategy s )
-
        
-Sets the style strategy for the font to s.
-
         
        See also TQFont::StyleStrategy.
-
-
        void TQFont::setUnderline ( bool enable )
-
        
-If enable is TRUE, sets underline on; otherwise sets underline
-off.
-
         
        See also underline() and TQFontInfo.
-
-
        Examples: fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp and menu/menu.cpp.
-
        void TQFont::setWeight ( int weight )
-
        
-Sets the weight the font to weight, which should be a value
-from the TQFont::Weight enumeration.
-
         
        See also weight() and TQFontInfo.
-
-
        Example: fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp.
-
        int TQFont::stretch () const
-
        
-Returns the stretch factor for the font.
-
         
        See also setStretch().
-
-
        bool TQFont::strikeOut () const
-
        
-Returns TRUE if strikeout has been set; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
         
        See also setStrikeOut().
-
-
        StyleHint TQFont::styleHint () const
-
        
-Returns the StyleHint.
-
         The style hint affects the font
-    matching algorithm. See TQFont::StyleHint for the list
-of strategies.
-
         
        See also setStyleHint(), TQFont::StyleStrategy, and TQFontInfo::styleHint().
-
-
        StyleStrategy TQFont::styleStrategy () const
-
        
-Returns the StyleStrategy.
-
         The style strategy affects the font
-    matching algorithm. See TQFont::StyleStrategy for the
-list of strategies.
-
         
        See also setStyleHint() and TQFont::StyleHint.
-
-
        TQString TQFont::substitute ( const TQString & familyName ) [static]
-
        
-Returns the first family name to be used whenever familyName is
-specified. The lookup is case insensitive.
-
         If there is no substitution for familyName, familyName is
-returned.
-
         To obtain a list of substitutions use substitutes().
-
         
        See also setFamily(), insertSubstitutions(), insertSubstitution(), and removeSubstitution().
-
-
        TQStringList TQFont::substitutes ( const TQString & familyName ) [static]
-
        
-Returns a list of family names to be used whenever familyName
-is specified. The lookup is case insensitive.
-
         If there is no substitution for familyName, an empty list is
-returned.
-
         
        See also substitute(), insertSubstitutions(), insertSubstitution(), and removeSubstitution().
-
-
        Example: fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp.
-
        TQStringList TQFont::substitutions () [static]
-
        
-Returns a sorted list of substituted family names.
-
         
        See also insertSubstitution(), removeSubstitution(), and substitute().
-
-
        TQString TQFont::toString () const
-
        
-Returns a description of the font. The description is a
-comma-separated list of the attributes, perfectly suited for use
-in TQSettings.
-
         
        See also fromString() and operator<<().
-
-
        bool TQFont::underline () const
-
        
-Returns TRUE if underline has been set; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
         
        See also setUnderline().
-
-
        int TQFont::weight () const
-
        
-Returns the weight of the font which is one of the enumerated
-values from TQFont::Weight.
-
         
        See also setWeight(), Weight, and TQFontInfo.
-
-
        Related Functions
        
-
        TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQFont & font )
-
        
-
-
         Writes the font font to the data stream s. (toString()
-writes to a text stream.)
-
         
        See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
        TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQFont & font )
-
        
-
-
         Reads the font font from the data stream s. (fromString()
-reads from a text stream.)
-
         
        See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
-
        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
        
-
-
        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
        TQt 3.3.8
        
-
        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qfontdatabase-h.html b/doc/html/qfontdatabase-h.html
index cc2bbd064..c3a6879b8 100644
--- a/doc/html/qfontdatabase-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qfontdatabase-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qfontdatabase.h Include File
+ntqfontdatabase.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
        TQFontDatabase Class Reference
        
-
-
        The TQFontDatabase class provides information about the fonts available in the underlying window system.
-More...
-
        #include <qfontdatabase.h>
-
        List of all member functions.
-
        Public Members
        
-
          
-
        • TQFontDatabase ()
          • 
-
        • TQStringList families () const
          • 
-
        • TQStringList families ( TQFont::Script script ) const
          • 
-
        • TQStringList styles ( const TQString & family ) const
          • 
-
        • TQValueList<int> pointSizes ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style = TQString::null )
          • 
-
        • TQValueList<int> smoothSizes ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style )
          • 
-
        • TQString styleString ( const TQFont & f )
          • 
-
        • TQFont font ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, int pointSize )
          • 
-
        • bool isBitmapScalable ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style = TQString::null ) const
          • 
-
        • bool isSmoothlyScalable ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style = TQString::null ) const
          • 
-
        • bool isScalable ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style = TQString::null ) const
          • 
-
        • bool isFixedPitch ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style = TQString::null ) const
          • 
-
        • bool italic ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style ) const
          • 
-
        • bool bold ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style ) const
          • 
-
        • int weight ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style ) const
          • 
-
        • TQStringList families ( bool ) const  (obsolete)
          • 
-
        • TQStringList styles ( const TQString & family, const TQString & ) const  (obsolete)
          • 
-
        • TQValueList<int> pointSizes ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & )  (obsolete)
          • 
-
        • TQValueList<int> smoothSizes ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & )  (obsolete)
          • 
-
        • TQFont font ( const TQString & familyName, const TQString & style, int pointSize, const TQString & )  (obsolete)
          • 
-
        • bool isBitmapScalable ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const  (obsolete)
          • 
-
        • bool isSmoothlyScalable ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const  (obsolete)
          • 
-
        • bool isScalable ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const  (obsolete)
          • 
-
        • bool isFixedPitch ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const  (obsolete)
          • 
-
        • bool italic ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const  (obsolete)
          • 
-
        • bool bold ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const  (obsolete)
          • 
-
        • int weight ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const  (obsolete)
          • 
-
        
-
        Static Public Members
        
-
-
        Detailed Description
        
-
-
-The TQFontDatabase class provides information about the fonts available in the underlying window system.
-
         
-
-
         The most common uses of this class are to query the database for
-the list of font families() and for the pointSizes() and styles()
-that are available for each family. An alternative to pointSizes()
-is smoothSizes() which returns the sizes at which a given family
-and style will look attractive.
-
         If the font family is available from two or more foundries the
-foundry name is included in the family name, e.g. "Helvetica
-[Adobe]" and "Helvetica [Cronyx]". When you specify a family you
-can either use the old hyphenated TQt 2.x "foundry-family" format,
-e.g. "Cronyx-Helvetica", or the new bracketed TQt 3.x "family
-[foundry]" format e.g. "Helvetica [Cronyx]". If the family has a
-foundry it is always returned, e.g. by families(), using the
-bracketed format.
-
         The font() function returns a TQFont given a family, style and
-point size.
-
         A family and style combination can be checked to see if it is
-italic() or bold(), and to retrieve its weight(). Similarly we can
-call isBitmapScalable(), isSmoothlyScalable(), isScalable() and
-isFixedPitch().
-
         A text version of a style is given by styleString().
-
         The TQFontDatabase class also supports some static functions, for
-example, standardSizes(). You can retrieve the Unicode 3.0
-description of a script using
-scriptName(), and a sample of characters in a script with
-scriptSample().
-
         Example:
-
        -#include <qapplication.h>
-#include <qfontdatabase.h>
-#include <else.h>
-
-int main( int argc, char **argv )
-{
-    TQApplication app( argc, argv );
-    TQFontDatabase fdb;
-    TQStringList families = fdb.families();
-    for ( TQStringList::Iterator f = families.begin(); f != families.end(); ++f ) {
-        TQString family = *f;
-        qDebug( family );
-        TQStringList styles = fdb.styles( family );
-        for ( TQStringList::Iterator s = styles.begin(); s != styles.end(); ++s ) {
-            TQString style = *s;
-            TQString dstyle = "\t" + style + " (";
-            TQValueList<int> smoothies = fdb.smoothSizes( family, style );
-            for ( TQValueList<int>::Iterator points = smoothies.begin();
-                  points != smoothies.end(); ++points ) {
-                dstyle += TQString::number( *points ) + " ";
-            }
-            dstyle = dstyle.left( dstyle.length() - 1 ) + ")";
-            qDebug( dstyle );
-        }
-    }
-    return 0;
-}
-
        
- 
-This example gets the list of font families, then the list of
-styles for each family and the point sizes that are available for
-each family/style combination.
-
        See also Environment Classes and Graphics Classes.
-
-
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        TQFontDatabase::TQFontDatabase ()
-
        
-Creates a font database object.
-
-
        bool TQFontDatabase::bold ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style ) const
-
        
-Returns TRUE if the font that has family family and style style is bold; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
         
        See also italic() and weight().
-
-
        bool TQFontDatabase::bold ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const
-
        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
         
-
-
        TQStringList TQFontDatabase::families () const
-
         Returns a sorted list of the names of the available font families.
-
         If a family exists in several foundries, the returned name for
-that font is in the form "family [foundry]". Examples: "Times
-[Adobe]", "Times [Cronyx]", "Palatino".
-
-
        TQStringList TQFontDatabase::families ( TQFont::Script script ) const
-
        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
         Returns a sorted list of the available font families which support
-the Unicode script script.
-
         If a family exists in several foundries, the returned name for
-that font is in the form "family [foundry]". Examples: "Times
-[Adobe]", "Times [Cronyx]", "Palatino".
-
-
        TQStringList TQFontDatabase::families ( bool ) const
-
        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
         
-
-
        TQFont TQFontDatabase::font ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, int pointSize )
-
        
-Returns a TQFont object that has family family, style style
-and point size pointSize. If no matching font could be created,
-a TQFont object that uses the application's default font is
-returned.
-
-
        TQFont TQFontDatabase::font ( const TQString & familyName, const TQString & style, int pointSize, const TQString & )
-
        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
         
-
-
        bool TQFontDatabase::isBitmapScalable ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style = TQString::null ) const
-
        
-Returns TRUE if the font that has family family and style style is a scalable bitmap font; otherwise returns FALSE. Scaling
-a bitmap font usually produces an unattractive hardly readable
-result, because the pixels of the font are scaled. If you need to
-scale a bitmap font it is better to scale it to one of the fixed
-sizes returned by smoothSizes().
-
         
        See also isScalable() and isSmoothlyScalable().
-
-
        bool TQFontDatabase::isBitmapScalable ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const
-
        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
         
-
-
        bool TQFontDatabase::isFixedPitch ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style = TQString::null ) const
-
        
-Returns TRUE if the font that has family family and style style is fixed pitch; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
        bool TQFontDatabase::isFixedPitch ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const
-
        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
         
-
-
        bool TQFontDatabase::isScalable ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style = TQString::null ) const
-
        
-Returns TRUE if the font that has family family and style style is scalable; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
         
        See also isBitmapScalable() and isSmoothlyScalable().
-
-
        bool TQFontDatabase::isScalable ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const
-
        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
         
-
-
        bool TQFontDatabase::isSmoothlyScalable ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style = TQString::null ) const
-
        
-Returns TRUE if the font that has family family and style style is smoothly scalable; otherwise returns FALSE. If this
-function returns TRUE, it's safe to scale this font to any size,
-and the result will always look attractive.
-
         
        See also isScalable() and isBitmapScalable().
-
-
        bool TQFontDatabase::isSmoothlyScalable ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const
-
        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
         
-
-
        bool TQFontDatabase::italic ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style ) const
-
        
-Returns TRUE if the font that has family family and style style is italic; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
         
        See also weight() and bold().
-
-
        bool TQFontDatabase::italic ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const
-
        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
         
-
-
        TQValueList<int> TQFontDatabase::pointSizes ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style = TQString::null )
-
        
-Returns a list of the point sizes available for the font that has
-family family and style style. The list may be empty.
-
         
        See also smoothSizes() and standardSizes().
-
-
        TQValueList<int> TQFontDatabase::pointSizes ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & )
-
        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
         
-
-
        TQString TQFontDatabase::scriptName ( TQFont::Script script ) [static]
-
        
-Returns a string that gives a default description of the script
-(e.g. for displaying to the user in a dialog).  The name matches
-the name of the script as defined by the Unicode 3.0 standard.
-
         
        See also TQFont::Script.
-
-
        TQString TQFontDatabase::scriptSample ( TQFont::Script script ) [static]
-
        
-Returns a string with sample characters from script.
-
         
        See also TQFont::Script.
-
-
        TQValueList<int> TQFontDatabase::smoothSizes ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style )
-
        
-Returns the point sizes of a font that has family family and
-style style that will look attractive. The list may be empty.
-For non-scalable fonts and bitmap scalable fonts, this function
-is equivalent to pointSizes().
-
         
        See also pointSizes() and standardSizes().
-
-
        TQValueList<int> TQFontDatabase::smoothSizes ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & )
-
        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
         
-
-
        TQValueList<int> TQFontDatabase::standardSizes () [static]
-
        
-Returns a list of standard font sizes.
-
         
        See also smoothSizes() and pointSizes().
-
-
        TQString TQFontDatabase::styleString ( const TQFont & f )
-
        
-Returns a string that describes the style of the font f. For
-example, "Bold Italic", "Bold", "Italic" or "Normal". An empty
-string may be returned.
-
-
        TQStringList TQFontDatabase::styles ( const TQString & family ) const
-
        
-Returns a list of the styles available for the font family family. Some example styles: "Light", "Light Italic", "Bold",
-"Oblique", "Demi". The list may be empty.
-
-
        TQStringList TQFontDatabase::styles ( const TQString & family, const TQString & ) const
-
        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
         
-
-
        int TQFontDatabase::weight ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style ) const
-
        
-Returns the weight of the font that has family family and style
-style. If there is no such family and style combination,
-returns -1.
-
         
        See also italic() and bold().
-
-
        int TQFontDatabase::weight ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const
-
        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
         
-
-
-
        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
        
-
-
        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
        TQt 3.3.8
        
-
        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qfontdialog-h.html b/doc/html/qfontdialog-h.html
index cc934c433..b154ecbbc 100644
--- a/doc/html/qfontdialog-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qfontdialog-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qfontdialog.h Include File
+ntqfontdialog.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
        TQFontDialog Class Reference
        
-
-
        The TQFontDialog class provides a dialog widget for selecting a font.
-More...
-
        #include <qfontdialog.h>
-
        Inherits TQDialog.
-
        List of all member functions.
-
        Static Public Members
        
-
          
-
        • TQFont getFont ( bool * ok, const TQFont & initial, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
          • 
-
        • TQFont getFont ( bool * ok, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
          • 
-
        
-
        Detailed Description
        
-
-
-
-
-The TQFontDialog class provides a dialog widget for selecting a font.
-
         The usual way to use this class is to call one of the static convenience
-functions, e.g. getFont().
-
         Examples:
-
         
        -    bool ok;
-    TQFont font = TQFontDialog::getFont(
-                    &ok, TQFont( "Helvetica [Cronyx]", 10 ), this );
-    if ( ok ) {
-        // font is set to the font the user selected
-    } else {
-        // the user canceled the dialog; font is set to the initial
-        // value, in this case Helvetica [Cronyx], 10
-    }
-  
        
- 
-
         The dialog can also be used to set a widget's font directly:
-
        -    myWidget.setFont( TQFontDialog::getFont( 0, myWidget.font() ) );
-  
        
- 
-If the user clicks OK the font they chose will be used for myWidget,
-and if they click Cancel the original font is used.
-
         
        See also TQFont, TQFontInfo, TQFontMetrics, and Dialog Classes.
-
-
         
-
-
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        TQFont TQFontDialog::getFont ( bool * ok, const TQFont & initial, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) [static]
-
        
-Executes a modal font dialog and returns a font.
-
         If the user clicks OK, the selected font is returned. If the user
-clicks Cancel, the initial font is returned.
-
         The dialog is called name, with the parent parent.
-initial is the initially selected font.
-If the ok parameter is not-null, *ok is set to TRUE if the
-user clicked OK, and set to FALSE if the user clicked Cancel.
-
         This static function is less flexible than the full TQFontDialog
-object, but is convenient and easy to use.
-
         Examples:
-
        -    bool ok;
-    TQFont font = TQFontDialog::getFont( &ok, TQFont( "Times", 12 ), this );
-    if ( ok ) {
-        // font is set to the font the user selected
-    } else {
-        // the user canceled the dialog; font is set to the initial
-        // value, in this case Times, 12.
-    }
-  
        
- 
-
         The dialog can also be used to set a widget's font directly:
-
        -    myWidget.setFont( TQFontDialog::getFont( 0, myWidget.font() ) );
-  
        
- 
-In this example, if the user clicks OK the font they chose will be
-used, and if they click Cancel the original font is used.
-
-
        Examples: chart/chartform.cpp, chart/optionsform.cpp, qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
-
        TQFont TQFontDialog::getFont ( bool * ok, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) [static]
-
        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
         Executes a modal font dialog and returns a font.
-
         If the user clicks OK, the selected font is returned. If the user
-clicks Cancel, the TQt default font is returned.
-
         The dialog is called name, with parent parent.
-If the ok parameter is not-null, *ok is set to TRUE if the
-user clicked OK, and FALSE if the user clicked Cancel.
-
         This static function is less functional than the full TQFontDialog
-object, but is convenient and easy to use.
-
         Example:
-
        -    bool ok;
-    TQFont font = TQFontDialog::getFont( &ok, this );
-    if ( ok ) {
-        // font is set to the font the user selected
-    } else {
-        // the user canceled the dialog; font is set to the default
-        // application font, TQApplication::font()
-    }
-  
        
- 
-
         
-
-
        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
        
-
-
        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
        TQt 3.3.8
        
-
        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qfontinfo-h.html b/doc/html/qfontinfo-h.html
index e16a52df4..6630344fc 100644
--- a/doc/html/qfontinfo-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qfontinfo-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qfontinfo.h Include File
+ntqfontinfo.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
        TQFontInfo Class Reference
        
-
-
        The TQFontInfo class provides general information about fonts.
-More...
-
        #include <qfontinfo.h>
-
        List of all member functions.
-
        Public Members
        
-
-
        Detailed Description
        
-
-
-
         The TQFontInfo class provides general information about fonts.
-
         
-
-
         The TQFontInfo class provides the same access functions as TQFont,
-e.g. family(), pointSize(), italic(), weight(), fixedPitch(),
-styleHint() etc. But whilst the TQFont access functions return the
-values that were set, a TQFontInfo object returns the values that
-apply to the font that will actually be used to draw the text.
-
         For example, when the program asks for a 25pt Courier font on a
-machine that has a non-scalable 24pt Courier font, TQFont will
-(normally) use the 24pt Courier for rendering. In this case,
-TQFont::pointSize() returns 25 and TQFontInfo::pointSize() returns
-24.
-
         There are three ways to create a TQFontInfo object.
-
          
-
        1.  Calling the TQFontInfo constructor with a TQFont creates a font
-info object for a screen-compatible font, i.e. the font cannot be
-a printer font*. If the font is changed later, the font
-info object is not updated.
-
           
        2.  TQWidget::fontInfo() returns the font info for a widget's font.
-This is equivalent to calling TQFontInfo(widget->font()). If the
-widget's font is changed later, the font info object is not
-updated.
-
           
        3.  TQPainter::fontInfo() returns the font info for a painter's
-current font. If the painter's font is changed later, the font
-info object is not updated.
-
        
-
         * If you use a printer font the values returned may be
-inaccurate. Printer fonts are not always accessible so the nearest
-screen font is used if a printer font is supplied.
-
         
        See also TQFont, TQFontMetrics, TQFontDatabase, Graphics Classes, and Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes.
-
-
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        TQFontInfo::TQFontInfo ( const TQFont & font )
-
        
-Constructs a font info object for font.
-
         The font must be screen-compatible, i.e. a font you use when
-drawing text in widgets or pixmaps, not TQPicture or TQPrinter.
-
         The font info object holds the information for the font that is
-passed in the constructor at the time it is created, and is not
-updated if the font's attributes are changed later.
-
         Use TQPainter::fontInfo() to get the font info when painting.
-This will give correct results also when painting on paint device
-that is not screen-compatible.
-
-
        TQFontInfo::TQFontInfo ( const TQFont & font, TQFont::Script script )
-
        
-Constructs a font info object for font using the specified script.
-
-
        TQFontInfo::TQFontInfo ( const TQFontInfo & fi )
-
        
-Constructs a copy of fi.
-
-
        TQFontInfo::~TQFontInfo ()
-
        
-Destroys the font info object.
-
-
        bool TQFontInfo::bold () const
-
        
-
-
         Returns TRUE if weight() would return a value greater than TQFont::Normal; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
         
        See also weight() and TQFont::bold().
-
-
        Example: qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp.
-
        bool TQFontInfo::exactMatch () const
-
        
-Returns TRUE if the matched window system font is exactly the same
-as the one specified by the font; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
         
        See also TQFont::exactMatch().
-
-
        TQString TQFontInfo::family () const
-
        
-Returns the family name of the matched window system font.
-
         
        See also TQFont::family().
-
-
        Examples: fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp and qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp.
-
        bool TQFontInfo::fixedPitch () const
-
        
-Returns the fixed pitch value of the matched window system font.
-
         
        See also TQFont::fixedPitch().
-
-
        bool TQFontInfo::italic () const
-
        
-Returns the italic value of the matched window system font.
-
         
        See also TQFont::italic().
-
-
        Example: qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp.
-
        TQFontInfo & TQFontInfo::operator= ( const TQFontInfo & fi )
-
        
-Assigns the font info in fi.
-
-
        int TQFontInfo::pixelSize () const
-
        
-Returns the pixel size of the matched window system font.
-
         
        See also TQFont::pointSize().
-
-
        int TQFontInfo::pointSize () const
-
        
-Returns the point size of the matched window system font.
-
         
        See also TQFont::pointSize().
-
-
        Examples: fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp and qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp.
-
        bool TQFontInfo::rawMode () const
-
        
-Returns TRUE if the font is a raw mode font; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
         If it is a raw mode font, all other functions in TQFontInfo will
-return the same values set in the TQFont, regardless of the font
-actually used.
-
         
        See also TQFont::rawMode().
-
-
        TQFont::StyleHint TQFontInfo::styleHint () const
-
        
-Returns the style of the matched window system font.
-
         Currently only returns the style hint set in TQFont.
-
         
        See also TQFont::styleHint() and TQFont::StyleHint.
-
-
        int TQFontInfo::weight () const
-
        
-Returns the weight of the matched window system font.
-
         
        See also TQFont::weight() and bold().
-
-
-
        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
        
-
-
        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
        TQt 3.3.8
        
-
        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qfontmanager_qws-h.html b/doc/html/qfontmanager_qws-h.html
index 05ee1cb08..dcff1863d 100644
--- a/doc/html/qfontmanager_qws-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qfontmanager_qws-h.html
@@ -76,8 +76,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 #define TQFONTMANAGER_QWS_H
 
 #ifndef QT_H
-#include "qfont.h"
-#include "qptrlist.h"
+#include "ntqfont.h"
+#include "ntqptrlist.h"
 #include <private/qtextengine_p.h>
 #endif // QT_H
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qfontmetrics-h.html b/doc/html/qfontmetrics-h.html
index b173fbaed..37fe4acd0 100644
--- a/doc/html/qfontmetrics-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qfontmetrics-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qfontmetrics.h Include File
+ntqfontmetrics.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
        TQFontMetrics Class Reference
        
-
-
        The TQFontMetrics class provides font metrics information.
-More...
-
        #include <qfontmetrics.h>
-
        List of all member functions.
-
        Public Members
        
-
-
        Detailed Description
        
-
-
-The TQFontMetrics class provides font metrics information.
-
         
-
-
         TQFontMetrics functions calculate the size of characters and
-strings for a given font. There are three ways you can create a
-TQFontMetrics object:
-
         
          
-
        1.  Calling the TQFontMetrics constructor with a TQFont creates a
-font metrics object for a screen-compatible font, i.e. the font
-cannot be a printer font*. If the font is changed
-later, the font metrics object is not updated.
-
           
        2.  TQWidget::fontMetrics() returns the font metrics for a widget's
-font. This is equivalent to TQFontMetrics(widget->font()). If the
-widget's font is changed later, the font metrics object is not
-updated.
-
           
        3.  TQPainter::fontMetrics() returns the font metrics for a
-painter's current font. If the painter's font is changed later, the
-font metrics object is not updated.
-
        
-
         * If you use a printer font the values returned may be
-inaccurate. Printer fonts are not always accessible so the nearest
-screen font is used if a printer font is supplied.
-
         Once created, the object provides functions to access the
-individual metrics of the font, its characters, and for strings
-rendered in the font.
-
         There are several functions that operate on the font: ascent(),
-descent(), height(), leading() and lineSpacing() return the basic
-size properties of the font. The underlinePos(), overlinePos(),
-strikeOutPos() and lineWidth() functions, return the properties of
-the line that underlines, overlines or strikes out the
-characters. These functions are all fast.
-
         There are also some functions that operate on the set of glyphs in
-the font: minLeftBearing(), minRightBearing() and maxWidth().
-These are by necessity slow, and we recommend avoiding them if
-possible.
-
         For each character, you can get its width(), leftBearing() and
-rightBearing() and find out whether it is in the font using
-inFont(). You can also treat the character as a string, and use
-the string functions on it.
-
         The string functions include width(), to return the width of a
-string in pixels (or points, for a printer), boundingRect(), to
-return a rectangle large enough to contain the rendered string,
-and size(), to return the size of that rectangle.
-
         Example:
-
        -    TQFont font( "times", 24 );
-    TQFontMetrics fm( font );
-    int pixelsWide = fm.width( "What's the width of this text?" );
-    int pixelsHigh = fm.height();
-    
        
- 
-
         
        See also TQFont, TQFontInfo, TQFontDatabase, Graphics Classes, and Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes.
-
-
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        TQFontMetrics::TQFontMetrics ( const TQFont & font )
-
        
-Constructs a font metrics object for font.
-
         The font must be screen-compatible, i.e. a font you use when
-drawing text in widgets or pixmaps, not TQPicture or TQPrinter.
-
         The font metrics object holds the information for the font that is
-passed in the constructor at the time it is created, and is not
-updated if the font's attributes are changed later.
-
         Use TQPainter::fontMetrics() to get the font metrics when painting.
-This will give correct results also when painting on paint device
-that is not screen-compatible.
-
-
        TQFontMetrics::TQFontMetrics ( const TQFont & font, TQFont::Script script )
-
        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
         Constructs a font metrics object for font using the given script.
-
-
        TQFontMetrics::TQFontMetrics ( const TQFontMetrics & fm )
-
        
-Constructs a copy of fm.
-
-
        TQFontMetrics::~TQFontMetrics ()
-
        
-Destroys the font metrics object and frees all allocated
-resources.
-
-
        int TQFontMetrics::ascent () const
-
        
-Returns the ascent of the font.
-
         The ascent of a font is the distance from the baseline to the
-highest position characters extend to. In practice, some font
-designers break this rule, e.g. when they put more than one accent
-on top of a character, or to accommodate an unusual character in
-an exotic language, so it is possible (though rare) that this
-value will be too small.
-
         
        See also descent().
-
-
        Examples: drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp and scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
-
        TQRect TQFontMetrics::boundingRect ( TQChar ch ) const
-
        
-Returns the rectangle that is covered by ink if the character
-specified by ch were to be drawn at the origin of the coordinate
-system.
-
         Note that the bounding rectangle may extend to the left of (0, 0),
-e.g. for italicized fonts, and that the text output may cover all pixels in the bounding rectangle. For a space character the rectangle
-will usually be empty.
-
         Note that the rectangle usually extends both above and below the
-base line.
-
         Warning: The width of the returned rectangle is not the advance width
-of the character. Use boundingRect(const TQString &) or width() instead.
-
         
        See also width().
-
-
        Example: xform/xform.cpp.
-
        TQRect TQFontMetrics::boundingRect ( const TQString & str, int len = -1 ) const
-
        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
         Returns the bounding rectangle that contains the first len
-characters of string str.
-
-
        TQRect TQFontMetrics::boundingRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int flgs, const TQString & str, int len = -1, int tabstops = 0, int * tabarray = 0, TQTextParag ** intern = 0 ) const
-
        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
         Returns the bounding rectangle of the first len characters of
-str, which is the set of pixels the text would cover if drawn
-at (0, 0). The drawing, and hence the bounding rectangle, is
-constrained to the rectangle (x, y, w, h).
-
         If len is negative (which is the default), the entire string is
-used.
-
         The flgs argument is the bitwise OR of the following flags:
-
          
-
        •  AlignAuto aligns to the left border for all languages except
-Arabic and Hebrew where it aligns to the right.
-
        •  AlignLeft aligns to the left border.
-
        •  AlignRight aligns to the right border.
-
        •  AlignJustify produces justified text.
-
        •  AlignHCenter aligns horizontally centered.
-
        •  AlignTop aligns to the top border.
-
        •  AlignBottom aligns to the bottom border.
-
        •  AlignVCenter aligns vertically centered
-
        •  AlignCenter (== AlignHCenter | AlignVCenter)
-
        •  SingleLine ignores newline characters in the text.
-
        •  ExpandTabs expands tabs (see below)
-
        •  ShowPrefix interprets "&x" as "x", i.e. underlined.
-
        •  WordBreak breaks the text to fit the rectangle.
-
        
-
         Horizontal alignment defaults to AlignAuto and vertical
-alignment defaults to AlignTop.
-
         If several of the horizontal or several of the vertical alignment
-flags are set, the resulting alignment is undefined.
-
         These flags are defined in qnamespace.h.
-
         If ExpandTabs is set in flgs, then: if tabarray is
-non-null, it specifies a 0-terminated sequence of pixel-positions
-for tabs; otherwise if tabstops is non-zero, it is used as the
-tab spacing (in pixels).
-
         Note that the bounding rectangle may extend to the left of (0, 0),
-e.g. for italicized fonts, and that the text output may cover all pixels in the bounding rectangle.
-
         Newline characters are processed as linebreaks.
-
         Despite the different actual character heights, the heights of the
-bounding rectangles of "Yes" and "yes" are the same.
-
         The bounding rectangle given by this function is somewhat larger
-than that calculated by the simpler boundingRect() function. This
-function uses the maximum left and
-right font bearings as is
-necessary for multi-line text to align correctly. Also,
-fontHeight() and lineSpacing() are used to calculate the height,
-rather than individual character heights.
-
         The intern argument should not be used.
-
         
        See also width(), TQPainter::boundingRect(), and TQt::AlignmentFlags.
-
-
        int TQFontMetrics::charWidth ( const TQString & str, int pos ) const
-
         
-Returns the width of the character at position pos in the
-string str.
-
         The whole string is needed, as the glyph drawn may change
-depending on the context (the letter before and after the current
-one) for some languages (e.g. Arabic).
-
         This function also takes non spacing marks and ligatures into
-account.
-
-
        int TQFontMetrics::descent () const
-
        
-Returns the descent of the font.
-
         The descent is the distance from the base line to the lowest point
-characters extend to. (Note that this is different from X, which
-adds 1 pixel.) In practice, some font designers break this rule,
-e.g. to accommodate an unusual character in an exotic language, so
-it is possible (though rare) that this value will be too small.
-
         
        See also ascent().
-
-
        Examples: drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp and hello/hello.cpp.
-
        int TQFontMetrics::height () const
-
        
-Returns the height of the font.
-
         This is always equal to ascent()+descent()+1 (the 1 is for the
-base line).
-
         
        See also leading() and lineSpacing().
-
-
        Examples: grapher/grapher.cpp, hello/hello.cpp, and qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp.
-
        bool TQFontMetrics::inFont ( TQChar ch ) const
-
        
-Returns TRUE if character ch is a valid character in the font;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
        Example: qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp.
-
        int TQFontMetrics::leading () const
-
        
-Returns the leading of the font.
-
         This is the natural inter-line spacing.
-
         
        See also height() and lineSpacing().
-
-
        int TQFontMetrics::leftBearing ( TQChar ch ) const
-
         
-Returns the left bearing of character ch in the font.
-
         The left bearing is the right-ward distance of the left-most pixel
-of the character from the logical origin of the character. This
-value is negative if the pixels of the character extend to the
-left of the logical origin.
-
         See width(TQChar) for a graphical description of this metric.
-
         
        See also rightBearing(), minLeftBearing(), and width().
-
-
        Example: qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp.
-
        int TQFontMetrics::lineSpacing () const
-
        
-Returns the distance from one base line to the next.
-
         This value is always equal to leading()+height().
-
         
        See also height() and leading().
-
-
        Examples: qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, and scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
-
        int TQFontMetrics::lineWidth () const
-
        
-Returns the width of the underline and strikeout lines, adjusted
-for the point size of the font.
-
         
        See also underlinePos(), overlinePos(), and strikeOutPos().
-
-
        int TQFontMetrics::maxWidth () const
-
        
-Returns the width of the widest character in the font.
-
-
        Example: qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp.
-
        int TQFontMetrics::minLeftBearing () const
-
        
-Returns the minimum left bearing of the font.
-
         This is the smallest leftBearing(char) of all characters in the
-font.
-
         Note that this function can be very slow if the font is large.
-
         
        See also minRightBearing() and leftBearing().
-
-
        Example: qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp.
-
        int TQFontMetrics::minRightBearing () const
-
        
-Returns the minimum right bearing of the font.
-
         This is the smallest rightBearing(char) of all characters in the
-font.
-
         Note that this function can be very slow if the font is large.
-
         
        See also minLeftBearing() and rightBearing().
-
-
        Example: qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp.
-
        TQFontMetrics & TQFontMetrics::operator= ( const TQFontMetrics & fm )
-
        
-Assigns the font metrics fm.
-
-
        int TQFontMetrics::overlinePos () const
-
        
-Returns the distance from the base line to where an overline
-should be drawn.
-
         
        See also underlinePos(), strikeOutPos(), and lineWidth().
-
-
        int TQFontMetrics::rightBearing ( TQChar ch ) const
-
         
-Returns the right bearing of character ch in the font.
-
         The right bearing is the left-ward distance of the right-most
-pixel of the character from the logical origin of a subsequent
-character. This value is negative if the pixels of the character
-extend to the right of the width() of the character.
-
         See width() for a graphical description of this metric.
-
         
        See also leftBearing(), minRightBearing(), and width().
-
-
        Example: qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp.
-
        TQSize TQFontMetrics::size ( int flgs, const TQString & str, int len = -1, int tabstops = 0, int * tabarray = 0, TQTextParag ** intern = 0 ) const
-
        
-Returns the size in pixels of the first len characters of str.
-
         If len is negative (the default), the entire string is used.
-
         The flgs argument is the bitwise OR of the following flags:
-
          
-
        •  SingleLine ignores newline characters.
-
        •  ExpandTabs expands tabs (see below)
-
        •  ShowPrefix interprets "&x" as "x", i.e. underlined.
-
        •  WordBreak breaks the text to fit the rectangle.
-
        
-
         These flags are defined in qnamespace.h.
-
         If ExpandTabs is set in flgs, then: if tabarray is
-non-null, it specifies a 0-terminated sequence of pixel-positions
-for tabs; otherwise if tabstops is non-zero, it is used as the
-tab spacing (in pixels).
-
         Newline characters are processed as linebreaks.
-
         Despite the different actual character heights, the heights of the
-bounding rectangles of "Yes" and "yes" are the same.
-
         The intern argument should not be used.
-
         
        See also boundingRect().
-
-
        int TQFontMetrics::strikeOutPos () const
-
        
-Returns the distance from the base line to where the strikeout
-line should be drawn.
-
         
        See also underlinePos(), overlinePos(), and lineWidth().
-
-
        int TQFontMetrics::underlinePos () const
-
        
-Returns the distance from the base line to where an underscore
-should be drawn.
-
         
        See also overlinePos(), strikeOutPos(), and lineWidth().
-
-
        int TQFontMetrics::width ( TQChar ch ) const
-
         
-
         
-
         Returns the logical width of character ch in pixels. This is a
-distance appropriate for drawing a subsequent character after ch.
-
         Some of the metrics are described in the image to the right. The
-central dark rectangles cover the logical width() of each
-character. The outer pale rectangles cover the leftBearing() and
-rightBearing() of each character. Notice that the bearings of "f"
-in this particular font are both negative, while the bearings of
-"o" are both positive.
-
         Warning: This function will produce incorrect results for Arabic
-characters or non spacing marks in the middle of a string, as the
-glyph shaping and positioning of marks that happens when
-processing strings cannot be taken into account. Use charWidth()
-instead if you aren't looking for the width of isolated
-characters.
-
         
        See also boundingRect() and charWidth().
-
-
        Examples: drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, hello/hello.cpp, movies/main.cpp, qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp, and scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
-
        int TQFontMetrics::width ( const TQString & str, int len = -1 ) const
-
        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
         Returns the width of the first len characters of string str.
-
-
        int TQFontMetrics::width ( char c ) const
-
         
-
         This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
         This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
         Provided to aid porting from TQt 1.x.
-
-
-
        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
        
-
-
        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
        TQt 3.3.8
        
-
        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qframe-h.html b/doc/html/qframe-h.html
index 01c1161a7..eddd5cb1f 100644
--- a/doc/html/qframe-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qframe-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qframe.h Include File
+ntqframe.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
        TQFrame Class Reference
        
-
-
        The TQFrame class is the base class of widgets that can have a frame.
-More...
-
        #include <qframe.h>
-
        Inherits TQWidget.
-
        Inherited by TQGroupBox, TQScrollView, TQDockWindow, TQGrid, TQHBox, TQLabel, TQLCDNumber, TQLineEdit, TQMenuBar, TQPopupMenu, TQProgressBar, TQSplitter, TQToolBox, and TQWidgetStack.
-
        List of all member functions.
-
        Public Members
        
-
-
        Properties
        
-
          
-
        • TQRect contentsRect - the rectangle inside the frame  (read only)
          • 
-
        • TQRect frameRect - the frame rectangle
          • 
-
        • Shadow frameShadow - the frame shadow value from the frame style
          • 
-
        • Shape frameShape - the frame shape value from the frame style
          • 
-
        • int frameWidth - the width of the frame that is drawn  (read only)
          • 
-
        • int lineWidth - the line width
          • 
-
        • int margin - the width of the margin
          • 
-
        • int midLineWidth - the width of the mid-line
          • 
-
        
-
        Protected Members
        
-
-
        Detailed Description
        
-
-
-The TQFrame class is the base class of widgets that can have a frame.
-
         
-
         It draws a frame and calls a virtual function, drawContents(), to
-fill in the frame. This function is reimplemented by subclasses.
-There are also two other less useful functions: drawFrame() and
-frameChanged().
-
         TQPopupMenu uses this to "raise" the menu above the surrounding
-screen. TQProgressBar has a "sunken" look. TQLabel has a flat look.
-The frames of widgets like these can be changed.
-
         
        -    TQLabel label(...);
-    label.setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Panel | TQFrame::Raised );
-    label.setLineWidth( 2 );
-
-    TQProgressBar pbar(...);
-    label.setFrameStyle( TQFrame::NoFrame );
-    
        
- 
-
         The TQFrame class can also be used directly for creating simple
-frames without any contents, although usually you would use a
-TQHBox or TQVBox because they automatically lay out the widgets you
-put inside the frame.
-
         A frame widget has four attributes: frameStyle(), lineWidth(),
-midLineWidth(), and margin().
-
         The frame style is specified by a frame
-    shape and a shadow style. The
-frame shapes are NoFrame, Box, Panel, StyledPanel, PopupPanel, WinPanel, ToolBarPanel, MenuBarPanel, HLine and VLine; the shadow styles are Plain, Raised and
-Sunken.
-
         The line width is the width of the frame border.
-
         The mid-line width specifies the width of an extra line in the
-middle of the frame, which uses a third color to obtain a special
-3D effect. Notice that a mid-line is only drawn for Box, HLine and VLine frames that are raised or sunken.
-
         The margin is the gap between the frame and the contents of the
-frame.
-
         
-This table shows the most useful combinations of styles and widths
-(and some rather useless ones):
-
         
        Table of frame styles
         
        See also Abstract Widget Classes.
-
-
        Member Type Documentation
        
-
        TQFrame::Shadow
        
-
-
         This enum type defines the 3D effect used for TQFrame's frame.
-
          
-
        • TQFrame::Plain - the frame and contents appear level with the
-surroundings; draws using the palette foreground color (without
-any 3D effect)
-
        • TQFrame::Raised - the frame and contents appear raised; draws a 3D
-raised line using the light and dark colors of the current color
-group
-
        • TQFrame::Sunken - the frame and contents appear sunken; draws a 3D
-sunken line using the light and dark colors of the current color
-group
-
        • TQFrame::MShadow - internal; mask for the shadow
-
         Shadow interacts with TQFrame::Shape, the lineWidth() and the
-midLineWidth(). See the picture of the frames
-in the class description.
-
         
        See also TQFrame::Shape, lineWidth, and midLineWidth.
-
-
        TQFrame::Shape
        
-
-
         This enum type defines the shapes of a TQFrame's frame.
-
          
-
        • TQFrame::NoFrame - TQFrame draws nothing
-
        • TQFrame::Box - TQFrame draws a box around its contents
-
        • TQFrame::Panel - TQFrame draws a panel to make the contents appear
-raised or sunken
-
        • TQFrame::StyledPanel - draws a rectangular panel with a look that
-depends on the current GUI style. It can be raised or sunken.
-
        • TQFrame::HLine - TQFrame draws a horizontal line that frames nothing
-(useful as separator)
-
        • TQFrame::VLine - TQFrame draws a vertical line that frames nothing
-(useful as separator)
-
        • TQFrame::GroupBoxPanel - draws a rectangular panel
-
        • TQFrame::WinPanel - draws a rectangular panel that can be raised or
-sunken like those in Windows 95. Specifying this shape sets
-the line width to 2 pixels. WinPanel is provided for compatibility.
-For GUI style independence we recommend using StyledPanel instead.
-
        • TQFrame::ToolBarPanel
-
        • TQFrame::MenuBarPanel
-
        • TQFrame::PopupPanel
-
        • TQFrame::LineEditPanel - is used to draw a frame suitable for line edits. The
-look depends upon the current GUI style.
-
        • TQFrame::TabWidgetPanel - is used to draw a frame suitable for tab widgets. The
-look depends upon the current GUI style.
-
        • TQFrame::MShape - internal mask
-
         When it does not call TQStyle, Shape interacts with TQFrame::Shadow,
-the lineWidth() and the midLineWidth() to create the total result.
-See the picture of the frames in the class
-description.
-
         
        See also TQFrame::Shadow, TQFrame::style(), and TQStyle::drawPrimitive().
-
-
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        TQFrame::TQFrame ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
-
        
-Constructs a frame widget with frame style NoFrame and a
-1-pixel frame width.
-
         The parent, name and f arguments are passed to the
-TQWidget constructor.
-
-
        TQRect TQFrame::contentsRect () const
-
        Returns the rectangle inside the frame.
-See the "contentsRect" property for details.
-
        void TQFrame::drawContents ( TQPainter * ) [virtual protected]
-
        
-Virtual function that draws the contents of the frame.
-
         The TQPainter is already open when you get it, and you must leave
-it open. Painter transformations are switched off on entry. If you
-transform the painter, remember to take the frame into account and
-reset transformation before
-returning.
-
         This function is reimplemented by subclasses that draw something
-inside the frame. It should only draw inside contentsRect(). The
-default function does nothing.
-
         
        See also contentsRect and TQPainter::setClipRect().
-
-
        Reimplemented in TQLabel, TQLCDNumber, TQMenuBar, and TQPopupMenu.
-
        void TQFrame::drawFrame ( TQPainter * p ) [virtual protected]
-
        
-Draws the frame using the painter p and the current frame
-attributes and color group. The rectangle inside the frame is not
-affected.
-
         This function is virtual, but in general you do not need to
-reimplement it. If you do, note that the TQPainter is already open
-and must remain open.
-
         
        See also frameRect, contentsRect, drawContents(), frameStyle(), and palette.
-
-
        void TQFrame::frameChanged () [virtual protected]
-
        
-Virtual function that is called when the frame style, line width
-or mid-line width changes.
-
         This function can be reimplemented by subclasses that need to know
-when the frame attributes change.
-
         The default implementation calls update().
-
-
        TQRect TQFrame::frameRect () const
-
        Returns the frame rectangle.
-See the "frameRect" property for details.
-
        Shadow TQFrame::frameShadow () const
-
        Returns the frame shadow value from the frame style.
-See the "frameShadow" property for details.
-
        Shape TQFrame::frameShape () const
-
        Returns the frame shape value from the frame style.
-See the "frameShape" property for details.
-
        int TQFrame::frameStyle () const
-
        
-
-
         Returns the frame style.
-
         The default value is TQFrame::NoFrame.
-
         
        See also setFrameStyle(), frameShape, and frameShadow.
-
-
        Example: scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
-
        int TQFrame::frameWidth () const
-
        Returns the width of the frame that is drawn.
-See the "frameWidth" property for details.
-
        int TQFrame::lineWidth () const
-
        Returns the line width.
-See the "lineWidth" property for details.
-
        int TQFrame::margin () const
-
        Returns the width of the margin.
-See the "margin" property for details.
-
        int TQFrame::midLineWidth () const
-
        Returns the width of the mid-line.
-See the "midLineWidth" property for details.
-
        void TQFrame::paintEvent ( TQPaintEvent * event ) [virtual protected]
-
        
-Processes the paint event event.
-
         Paints the frame and the contents.
-
         Opens the painter on the frame and calls drawFrame(), then
-drawContents().
-
-
        Examples: life/life.cpp and qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp.
-
        Reimplemented from TQWidget.
-
        void TQFrame::resizeEvent ( TQResizeEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
        
-Processes the resize event e.
-
         Adjusts the frame rectangle for the resized widget. The frame
-rectangle is elastic, and the surrounding area is static.
-
         The resulting frame rectangle may be null or invalid. You can use
-setMinimumSize() to avoid those possibilities.
-
         Nothing is done if the frame rectangle is a null rectangle already.
-
-
        Example: life/life.cpp.
-
        Reimplemented from TQWidget.
-
        void TQFrame::setFrameRect ( const TQRect & ) [virtual]
-
        Sets the frame rectangle.
-See the "frameRect" property for details.
-
        void TQFrame::setFrameShadow ( Shadow )
-
        Sets the frame shadow value from the frame style.
-See the "frameShadow" property for details.
-
        void TQFrame::setFrameShape ( Shape )
-
        Sets the frame shape value from the frame style.
-See the "frameShape" property for details.
-
        void TQFrame::setFrameStyle ( int style ) [virtual]
-
        
-Sets the frame style to style.
-
         The style is the bitwise OR between a frame shape and a frame
-shadow style. See the illustration in the
-class documentation.
-
         The frame shapes are given in TQFrame::Shape and the shadow
-styles in TQFrame::Shadow.
-
         If a mid-line width greater than 0 is specified, an additional
-line is drawn for Raised or Sunken Box, HLine, and VLine frames. The mid-color of the current color group is used for
-drawing middle lines.
-
         
        See also Illustration, frameStyle(), colorGroup, and TQColorGroup.
-
-
        Examples: cursor/cursor.cpp, layout/layout.cpp, listboxcombo/listboxcombo.cpp, rangecontrols/rangecontrols.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, tabdialog/tabdialog.cpp, and tictac/tictac.cpp.
-
        void TQFrame::setLineWidth ( int ) [virtual]
-
        Sets the line width.
-See the "lineWidth" property for details.
-
        void TQFrame::setMargin ( int ) [virtual]
-
        Sets the width of the margin.
-See the "margin" property for details.
-
        void TQFrame::setMidLineWidth ( int ) [virtual]
-
        Sets the width of the mid-line.
-See the "midLineWidth" property for details.
-
        Property Documentation
        
-
        TQRect contentsRect
        
-
        This property holds the rectangle inside the frame.
-
        Get this property's value with contentsRect().
-
        See also frameRect and drawContents().
-
-
        TQRect frameRect
        
-
        This property holds the frame rectangle.
-
        The frame rectangle is the rectangle the frame is drawn in. By
-default, this is the entire widget. Setting this property does not cause a widget update.
-
         If this property is set to a null rectangle (for example
-TQRect(0, 0, 0, 0)), then the frame rectangle is equivalent to
-the widget rectangle.
-
         
        See also contentsRect.
-
-
        Set this property's value with setFrameRect() and get this property's value with frameRect().
-
        Shadow frameShadow
        
-
        This property holds the frame shadow value from the frame style.
-
        Set this property's value with setFrameShadow() and get this property's value with frameShadow().
-
        See also frameStyle() and frameShape.
-
-
        Shape frameShape
        
-
        This property holds the frame shape value from the frame style.
-
        Set this property's value with setFrameShape() and get this property's value with frameShape().
-
        See also frameStyle() and frameShadow.
-
-
        int frameWidth
        
-
        This property holds the width of the frame that is drawn.
-
        Note that the frame width depends on the frame style, not only the line
-width and the mid-line width. For example, the style NoFrame
-always has a frame width of 0, whereas the style Panel has a
-frame width equivalent to the line width. The frame width also
-includes the margin.
-
         
        See also lineWidth, midLineWidth, frameStyle(), and margin.
-
-
        Get this property's value with frameWidth().
-
        int lineWidth
        
-
        This property holds the line width.
-
        Note that the total line width for HLine and VLine is
-given by frameWidth(), not lineWidth().
-
         The default value is 1.
-
         
        See also midLineWidth and frameWidth.
-
-
        Set this property's value with setLineWidth() and get this property's value with lineWidth().
-
        int margin
        
-
        This property holds the width of the margin.
-
        The margin is the distance between the innermost pixel of the
-frame and the outermost pixel of contentsRect(). It is included in
-frameWidth().
-
         The margin is filled according to backgroundMode().
-
         The default value is 0.
-
         
        See also margin, lineWidth, and frameWidth.
-
-
        Set this property's value with setMargin() and get this property's value with margin().
-
        int midLineWidth
        
-
        This property holds the width of the mid-line.
-
        The default value is 0.
-
         
        See also lineWidth and frameWidth.
-
-
        Set this property's value with setMidLineWidth() and get this property's value with midLineWidth().
-
-
        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
        
-
-
        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
        TQt 3.3.8
        
-
        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qftp-h.html b/doc/html/qftp-h.html
index 39d08fe04..d52288b9e 100644
--- a/doc/html/qftp-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qftp-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qftp.h Include File
+ntqftp.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
        TQFtp Class Reference
        [network module]
        
-
-
        The TQFtp class provides an implementation of the FTP protocol.
-More...
-
        #include <qftp.h>
-
        Inherits TQNetworkProtocol.
-
        List of all member functions.
-
        Public Members
        
-
          
-
        • TQFtp ()
          • 
-
        • TQFtp ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
          • 
-
        • virtual ~TQFtp ()
          • 
-
        • enum State { Unconnected, HostLookup, Connecting, Connected, LoggedIn, Closing }
          • 
-
        • enum Error { NoError, UnknownError, HostNotFound, ConnectionRefused, NotConnected }
          • 
-
        • enum Command { None, ConnectToHost, Login, Close, List, Cd, Get, Put, Remove, Mkdir, Rmdir, Rename, RawCommand }
          • 
-
        • int connectToHost ( const TQString & host, Q_UINT16 port = 21 )
          • 
-
        • int login ( const TQString & user = TQString::null, const TQString & password = TQString::null )
          • 
-
        • int close ()
          • 
-
        • int list ( const TQString & dir = TQString::null )
          • 
-
        • int cd ( const TQString & dir )
          • 
-
        • int get ( const TQString & file, TQIODevice * dev = 0 )
          • 
-
        • int put ( const TQByteArray & data, const TQString & file )
          • 
-
        • int put ( TQIODevice * dev, const TQString & file )
          • 
-
        • int remove ( const TQString & file )
          • 
-
        • int mkdir ( const TQString & dir )
          • 
-
        • int rmdir ( const TQString & dir )
          • 
-
        • int rename ( const TQString & oldname, const TQString & newname )
          • 
-
        • int rawCommand ( const TQString & command )
          • 
-
        • Q_ULONG bytesAvailable () const
          • 
-
        • Q_LONG readBlock ( char * data, Q_ULONG maxlen )
          • 
-
        • TQByteArray readAll ()
          • 
-
        • int currentId () const
          • 
-
        • TQIODevice * currentDevice () const
          • 
-
        • Command currentCommand () const
          • 
-
        • bool hasPendingCommands () const
          • 
-
        • void clearPendingCommands ()
          • 
-
        • State state () const
          • 
-
        • Error error () const
          • 
-
        • TQString errorString () const
          • 
-
        
-
        Public Slots
        
-
-
        Signals
        
-
-
        Detailed Description
        
-
-
-The TQFtp class provides an implementation of the FTP protocol.
-
-
         
-
-
         This class provides two different interfaces: one is the
-TQNetworkProtocol interface that allows you to use FTP through the
-TQUrlOperator abstraction. The other is a direct interface to FTP
-that gives you lower-level access to the FTP protocol for finer
-control. Using the direct interface you can also execute arbitrary
-FTP commands.
-
         Don't mix the two interfaces, since the behavior is not
-well-defined.
-
         If you want to use TQFtp with the TQNetworkProtocol interface, you
-do not use it directly, but rather through a TQUrlOperator, for
-example:
-
         
        -    TQUrlOperator op( "ftp://ftp.trolltech.com" );
-    op.listChildren(); // Asks the server to provide a directory listing
-    
        
- 
-
         This code will only work if the TQFtp class is registered; to
-register the class, you must call qInitNetworkProtocols() before
-using a TQUrlOperator with TQFtp.
-
         The rest of this descrption describes the direct interface to FTP.
-
         The class works asynchronously, so there are no blocking
-functions. If an operation cannot be executed immediately, the
-function will still return straight away and the operation will be
-scheduled for later execution. The results of scheduled operations
-are reported via signals. This approach depends on the event loop
-being in operation.
-
         The operations that can be scheduled (they are called "commands"
-in the rest of the documentation) are the following:
-connectToHost(), login(), close(), list(), cd(), get(), put(),
-remove(), mkdir(), rmdir(), rename() and rawCommand().
-
         All of these commands return a unique identifier that allows you
-to keep track of the command that is currently being executed.
-When the execution of a command starts, the commandStarted()
-signal with the command's identifier is emitted. When the command
-is finished, the commandFinished() signal is emitted with the
-command's identifier and a bool that indicates whether the command
-finished with an error.
-
         In some cases, you might want to execute a sequence of commands,
-e.g. if you want to connect and login to a FTP server. This is
-simply achieved:
-
         
        -    TQFtp *ftp = new TQFtp( this ); // this is an optional TQObject parent
-    ftp->connectToHost( "ftp.trolltech.com" );
-    ftp->login();
-    
        
- 
-
         In this case two FTP commands have been scheduled. When the last
-scheduled command has finished, a done() signal is emitted with
-a bool argument that tells you whether the sequence finished with
-an error.
-
         If an error occurs during the execution of one of the commands in
-a sequence of commands, all the pending commands (i.e. scheduled,
-but not yet executed commands) are cleared and no signals are
-emitted for them.
-
         Some commands, e.g. list(), emit additional signals to report
-their results.
-
         Example: If you want to download the INSTALL file from Trolltech's
-FTP server, you would write this:
-
         
        -    ftp->connectToHost( "ftp.trolltech.com" );  // id == 1
-    ftp->login();                               // id == 2
-    ftp->cd( "qt" );                            // id == 3
-    ftp->get( "INSTALL" );                      // id == 4
-    ftp->close();                               // id == 5
-    
        
- 
-
         For this example the following sequence of signals is emitted
-(with small variations, depending on network traffic, etc.):
-
         
        -    start( 1 )
-    stateChanged( HostLookup )
-    stateChanged( Connecting )
-    stateChanged( Connected )
-    finished( 1, FALSE )
-
-    start( 2 )
-    stateChanged( LoggedIn )
-    finished( 2, FALSE )
-
-    start( 3 )
-    finished( 3, FALSE )
-
-    start( 4 )
-    dataTransferProgress( 0, 3798 )
-    dataTransferProgress( 2896, 3798 )
-    readyRead()
-    dataTransferProgress( 3798, 3798 )
-    readyRead()
-    finished( 4, FALSE )
-
-    start( 5 )
-    stateChanged( Closing )
-    stateChanged( Unconnected )
-    finished( 5, FALSE )
-
-    done( FALSE )
-    
        
- 
-
         The dataTransferProgress() signal in the above example is useful
-if you want to show a progressbar to
-inform the user about the progress of the download. The
-readyRead() signal tells you that there is data ready to be read.
-The amount of data can be queried then with the bytesAvailable()
-function and it can be read with the readBlock() or readAll()
-function.
-
         If the login fails for the above example, the signals would look
-like this:
-
         
        -    start( 1 )
-    stateChanged( HostLookup )
-    stateChanged( Connecting )
-    stateChanged( Connected )
-    finished( 1, FALSE )
-
-    start( 2 )
-    finished( 2, TRUE )
-
-    done( TRUE )
-    
        
- 
-
         You can then get details about the error with the error() and
-errorString() functions.
-
         The functions currentId() and currentCommand() provide more
-information about the currently executing command.
-
         The functions hasPendingCommands() and clearPendingCommands()
-allow you to query and clear the list of pending commands.
-
         The safest and easiest way to use the FTP protocol is to use
-TQUrlOperator() or the FTP commands described above. If you are an
-experienced network programmer and want to have complete control
-you can use rawCommand() to execute arbitrary FTP commands.
-
         
        See also TQt Network Documentation, TQNetworkProtocol, TQUrlOperator, TQHttp, and Input/Output and Networking.
-
-
        Member Type Documentation
        
-
        TQFtp::Command
        
-
-
         This enum is used as the return value for the currentCommand() function.
-This allows you to perform specific actions for particular
-commands, e.g. in a FTP client, you might want to clear the
-directory view when a list() command is started; in this case you
-can simply check in the slot connected to the start() signal if
-the currentCommand() is List.
-
          
-
        • TQFtp::None - No command is being executed.
-
        • TQFtp::ConnectToHost - connectToHost() is being executed.
-
        • TQFtp::Login - login() is being executed.
-
        • TQFtp::Close - close() is being executed.
-
        • TQFtp::List - list() is being executed.
-
        • TQFtp::Cd - cd() is being executed.
-
        • TQFtp::Get - get() is being executed.
-
        • TQFtp::Put - put() is being executed.
-
        • TQFtp::Remove - remove() is being executed.
-
        • TQFtp::Mkdir - mkdir() is being executed.
-
        • TQFtp::Rmdir - rmdir() is being executed.
-
        • TQFtp::Rename - rename() is being executed.
-
        • TQFtp::RawCommand - rawCommand() is being executed.
-
         
        See also currentCommand().
-
-
        TQFtp::Error
        
-
-
         This enum identifies the error that occurred.
-
          
-
        • TQFtp::NoError - No error occurred.
-
        • TQFtp::HostNotFound - The host name lookup failed.
-
        • TQFtp::ConnectionRefused - The server refused the connection.
-
        • TQFtp::NotConnected - Tried to send a command, but there is no connection to
-a server.
-
        • TQFtp::UnknownError - An error other than those specified above
-occurred.
-
         
        See also error().
-
-
        TQFtp::State
        
-
-
         This enum defines the connection state:
-
          
-
        • TQFtp::Unconnected - There is no connection to the host.
-
        • TQFtp::HostLookup - A host name lookup is in progress.
-
        • TQFtp::Connecting - An attempt to connect to the host is in progress.
-
        • TQFtp::Connected - Connection to the host has been achieved.
-
        • TQFtp::LoggedIn - Connection and user login have been achieved.
-
        • TQFtp::Closing - The connection is closing down, but it is not yet
-closed. (The state will be Unconnected when the connection is
-closed.)
-
         
        See also stateChanged() and state().
-
-
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        TQFtp::TQFtp ()
-
        
-Constructs a TQFtp object.
-
-
        TQFtp::TQFtp ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
-
        
-Constructs a TQFtp object. The parent and name parameters
-are passed to the TQObject constructor.
-
-
        TQFtp::~TQFtp () [virtual]
-
        
-Destructor.
-
-
        void TQFtp::abort () [slot]
-
        
-Aborts the current command and deletes all scheduled commands.
-
         If there is an unfinished command (i.e. a command for which the
-commandStarted() signal has been emitted, but for which the
-commandFinished() signal has not been emitted), this function
-sends an ABORT command to the server. When the server replies
-that the command is aborted, the commandFinished() signal with the
-error argument set to TRUE is emitted for the command. Due
-to timing issues, it is possible that the command had already
-finished before the abort request reached the server, in which
-case, the commandFinished() signal is emitted with the error
-argument set to FALSE.
-
         For all other commands that are affected by the abort(), no
-signals are emitted.
-
         If you don't start further FTP commands directly after the
-abort(), there won't be any scheduled commands and the done()
-signal is emitted.
-
         Warning: Some FTP servers, for example the BSD FTP daemon (version
-0.3), wrongly return a positive reply even when an abort has
-occurred. For these servers the commandFinished() signal has its
-error flag set to FALSE, even though the command did not
-complete successfully.
-
         
        See also clearPendingCommands().
-
-
        Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
-
        Q_ULONG TQFtp::bytesAvailable () const
-
        
-Returns the number of bytes that can be read from the data socket
-at the moment.
-
         
        See also get(), readyRead(), readBlock(), and readAll().
-
-
        int TQFtp::cd ( const TQString & dir )
-
        
-Changes the working directory of the server to dir.
-
         The function does not block and returns immediately. The command
-is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
-function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
-commandStarted() and commandFinished().
-
         When the command is started the commandStarted() signal is
-emitted. When it is finished the commandFinished() signal is
-emitted.
-
         
        See also commandStarted() and commandFinished().
-
-
        Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
-
        void TQFtp::clearPendingCommands ()
-
        
-Deletes all pending commands from the list of scheduled commands.
-This does not affect the command that is being executed. If you
-want to stop this this as well, use abort().
-
         
        See also hasPendingCommands() and abort().
-
-
        int TQFtp::close ()
-
        
-Closes the connection to the FTP server.
-
         The stateChanged() signal is emitted when the state of the
-connecting process changes, e.g. to Closing, then Unconnected.
-
         The function does not block and returns immediately. The command
-is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
-function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
-commandStarted() and commandFinished().
-
         When the command is started the commandStarted() signal is
-emitted. When it is finished the commandFinished() signal is
-emitted.
-
         
        See also stateChanged(), commandStarted(), and commandFinished().
-
-
        Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
-
        void TQFtp::commandFinished ( int id, bool error ) [signal]
-
        
-
-
         This signal is emitted when processing the command identified by
-id has finished. error is TRUE if an error occurred during
-the processing; otherwise error is FALSE.
-
         
        See also commandStarted(), done(), error(), and errorString().
-
-
        Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
-
        void TQFtp::commandStarted ( int id ) [signal]
-
        
-
-
         This signal is emitted when processing the command identified by
-id starts.
-
         
        See also commandFinished() and done().
-
-
        Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
-
        int TQFtp::connectToHost ( const TQString & host, Q_UINT16 port = 21 )
-
        
-Connects to the FTP server host using port port.
-
         The stateChanged() signal is emitted when the state of the
-connecting process changes, e.g. to HostLookup, then Connecting, then Connected.
-
         The function does not block and returns immediately. The command
-is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
-function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
-commandStarted() and commandFinished().
-
         When the command is started the commandStarted() signal is
-emitted. When it is finished the commandFinished() signal is
-emitted.
-
         
        See also stateChanged(), commandStarted(), and commandFinished().
-
-
        Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
-
        Command TQFtp::currentCommand () const
-
        
-Returns the command type of the FTP command being executed or None if there is no command being executed.
-
         
        See also currentId().
-
-
        Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
-
        TQIODevice * TQFtp::currentDevice () const
-
        
-Returns the TQIODevice pointer that is used by the FTP command to read data
-from or store data to. If there is no current FTP command being executed or
-if the command does not use an IO device, this function returns 0.
-
         This function can be used to delete the TQIODevice in the slot connected to
-the commandFinished() signal.
-
         
        See also get() and put().
-
-
        Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
-
        int TQFtp::currentId () const
-
        
-Returns the identifier of the FTP command that is being executed
-or 0 if there is no command being executed.
-
         
        See also currentCommand().
-
-
        void TQFtp::dataTransferProgress ( int done, int total ) [signal]
-
        
-
-
         This signal is emitted in response to a get() or put() request to
-indicate the current progress of the download or upload.
-
         done is the amount of data that has already been transferred
-and total is the total amount of data to be read or written. It
-is possible that the TQFtp class is not able to determine the total
-amount of data that should be transferred, in which case total
-is 0. (If you connect this signal to a TQProgressBar, the progress
-bar shows a busy indicator if the total is 0).
-
         Warning: done and total are not necessarily the size in
-bytes, since for large files these values might need to be
-"scaled" to avoid overflow.
-
         
        See also get(), put(), and TQProgressBar::progress.
-
-
        Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
-
        void TQFtp::done ( bool error ) [signal]
-
        
-
-
         This signal is emitted when the last pending command has finished;
-(it is emitted after the last command's commandFinished() signal).
-error is TRUE if an error occurred during the processing;
-otherwise error is FALSE.
-
         
        See also commandFinished(), error(), and errorString().
-
-
        Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
-
        Error TQFtp::error () const
-
        
-Returns the last error that occurred. This is useful to find out
-what when wrong when receiving a commandFinished() or a done()
-signal with the error argument set to TRUE.
-
         If you start a new command, the error status is reset to NoError.
-
-
        TQString TQFtp::errorString () const
-
        
-Returns a human-readable description of the last error that
-occurred. This is useful for presenting a error message to the
-user when receiving a commandFinished() or a done() signal with
-the error argument set to TRUE.
-
         The error string is often (but not always) the reply from the
-server, so it is not always possible to translate the string. If
-the message comes from TQt, the string has already passed through
-tr().
-
-
        Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
-
        int TQFtp::get ( const TQString & file, TQIODevice * dev = 0 )
-
        
-Downloads the file file from the server.
-
         If dev is 0, then the readyRead() signal is emitted when there
-is data available to read. You can then read the data with the
-readBlock() or readAll() functions.
-
         If dev is not 0, the data is written directly to the device dev. Make sure that the dev pointer is valid for the duration
-of the operation (it is safe to delete it when the
-commandFinished() signal is emitted). In this case the readyRead()
-signal is not emitted and you cannot read data with the
-readBlock() or readAll() functions.
-
         If you don't read the data immediately it becomes available, i.e.
-when the readyRead() signal is emitted, it is still available
-until the next command is started.
-
         For example, if you want to present the data to the user as soon
-as there is something available, connect to the readyRead() signal
-and read the data immediately. On the other hand, if you only want
-to work with the complete data, you can connect to the
-commandFinished() signal and read the data when the get() command
-is finished.
-
         The function does not block and returns immediately. The command
-is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
-function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
-commandStarted() and commandFinished().
-
         When the command is started the commandStarted() signal is
-emitted. When it is finished the commandFinished() signal is
-emitted.
-
         
        See also readyRead(), dataTransferProgress(), commandStarted(), and commandFinished().
-
-
        Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
-
        bool TQFtp::hasPendingCommands () const
-
        
-Returns TRUE if there are any commands scheduled that have not yet
-been executed; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
         The command that is being executed is not considered as a
-scheduled command.
-
         
        See also clearPendingCommands(), currentId(), and currentCommand().
-
-
        int TQFtp::list ( const TQString & dir = TQString::null )
-
        
-Lists the contents of directory dir on the FTP server. If dir is empty, it lists the contents of the current directory.
-
         The listInfo() signal is emitted for each directory entry found.
-
         The function does not block and returns immediately. The command
-is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
-function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
-commandStarted() and commandFinished().
-
         When the command is started the commandStarted() signal is
-emitted. When it is finished the commandFinished() signal is
-emitted.
-
         
        See also listInfo(), commandStarted(), and commandFinished().
-
-
        Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
-
        void TQFtp::listInfo ( const TQUrlInfo & i ) [signal]
-
        
-
-
         This signal is emitted for each directory entry the list() command
-finds. The details of the entry are stored in i.
-
         
        See also list().
-
-
        Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
-
        int TQFtp::login ( const TQString & user = TQString::null, const TQString & password = TQString::null )
-
        
-Logs in to the FTP server with the username user and the
-password password.
-
         The stateChanged() signal is emitted when the state of the
-connecting process changes, e.g. to LoggedIn.
-
         The function does not block and returns immediately. The command
-is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
-function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
-commandStarted() and commandFinished().
-
         When the command is started the commandStarted() signal is
-emitted. When it is finished the commandFinished() signal is
-emitted.
-
         
        See also commandStarted() and commandFinished().
-
-
        Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
-
        int TQFtp::mkdir ( const TQString & dir )
-
        
-Creates a directory called dir on the server.
-
         The function does not block and returns immediately. The command
-is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
-function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
-commandStarted() and commandFinished().
-
         When the command is started the commandStarted() signal is
-emitted. When it is finished the commandFinished() signal is
-emitted.
-
         
        See also commandStarted() and commandFinished().
-
-
        int TQFtp::put ( TQIODevice * dev, const TQString & file )
-
        
-Reads the data from the IO device dev, and writes it to the
-file called file on the server. The data is read in chunks from
-the IO device, so this overload allows you to transmit large
-amounts of data without the need to read all the data into memory
-at once.
-
         Make sure that the dev pointer is valid for the duration of the
-operation (it is safe to delete it when the commandFinished() is
-emitted).
-
-
        Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
-
        int TQFtp::put ( const TQByteArray & data, const TQString & file )
-
        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
         Writes the data data to the file called file on the server.
-The progress of the upload is reported by the
-dataTransferProgress() signal.
-
         The function does not block and returns immediately. The command
-is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
-function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
-commandStarted() and commandFinished().
-
         When the command is started the commandStarted() signal is
-emitted. When it is finished the commandFinished() signal is
-emitted.
-
         
        See also dataTransferProgress(), commandStarted(), and commandFinished().
-
-
        int TQFtp::rawCommand ( const TQString & command )
-
        
-Sends the raw FTP command command to the FTP server. This is
-useful for low-level FTP access. If the operation you wish to
-perform has an equivalent TQFtp function, we recommend using the
-function instead of raw FTP commands since the functions are
-easier and safer.
-
         The function does not block and returns immediately. The command
-is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
-function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
-commandStarted() and commandFinished().
-
         When the command is started the commandStarted() signal is
-emitted. When it is finished the commandFinished() signal is
-emitted.
-
         
        See also rawCommandReply(), commandStarted(), and commandFinished().
-
-
        Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
-
        void TQFtp::rawCommandReply ( int replyCode, const TQString & detail ) [signal]
-
        
-
-
         This signal is emitted in response to the rawCommand() function.
-replyCode is the 3 digit reply code and detail is the text
-that follows the reply code.
-
         
        See also rawCommand().
-
-
        Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
-
        TQByteArray TQFtp::readAll ()
-
        
-Reads all the bytes available from the data socket and returns
-them.
-
         
        See also get(), readyRead(), bytesAvailable(), and readBlock().
-
-
        Q_LONG TQFtp::readBlock ( char * data, Q_ULONG maxlen )
-
        
-Reads maxlen bytes from the data socket into data and
-returns the number of bytes read. Returns -1 if an error occurred.
-
         
        See also get(), readyRead(), bytesAvailable(), and readAll().
-
-
        void TQFtp::readyRead () [signal]
-
        
-
-
         This signal is emitted in response to a get() command when there
-is new data to read.
-
         If you specify a device as the second argument in the get()
-command, this signal is not emitted; instead the data is
-written directly to the device.
-
         You can read the data with the readAll() or readBlock() functions.
-
         This signal is useful if you want to process the data in chunks as
-soon as it becomes available. If you are only interested in the
-complete data, just connect to the commandFinished() signal and
-read the data then instead.
-
         
        See also get(), readBlock(), readAll(), and bytesAvailable().
-
-
        int TQFtp::remove ( const TQString & file )
-
        
-Deletes the file called file from the server.
-
         The function does not block and returns immediately. The command
-is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
-function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
-commandStarted() and commandFinished().
-
         When the command is started the commandStarted() signal is
-emitted. When it is finished the commandFinished() signal is
-emitted.
-
         
        See also commandStarted() and commandFinished().
-
-
        Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
-
        int TQFtp::rename ( const TQString & oldname, const TQString & newname )
-
        
-Renames the file called oldname to newname on the server.
-
         The function does not block and returns immediately. The command
-is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
-function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
-commandStarted() and commandFinished().
-
         When the command is started the commandStarted() signal is
-emitted. When it is finished the commandFinished() signal is
-emitted.
-
         
        See also commandStarted() and commandFinished().
-
-
        int TQFtp::rmdir ( const TQString & dir )
-
        
-Removes the directory called dir from the server.
-
         The function does not block and returns immediately. The command
-is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
-function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
-commandStarted() and commandFinished().
-
         When the command is started the commandStarted() signal is
-emitted. When it is finished the commandFinished() signal is
-emitted.
-
         
        See also commandStarted() and commandFinished().
-
-
        State TQFtp::state () const
-
        
-Returns the current state of the object. When the state changes,
-the stateChanged() signal is emitted.
-
         
        See also State and stateChanged().
-
-
        Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
-
        void TQFtp::stateChanged ( int state ) [signal]
-
        
-
-
         This signal is emitted when the state of the connection changes.
-The argument state is the new state of the connection; it is
-one of the State values.
-
         It is usually emitted in response to a connectToHost() or close()
-command, but it can also be emitted "spontaneously", e.g. when the
-server closes the connection unexpectedly.
-
         
        See also connectToHost(), close(), state(), and State.
-
-
        Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
-
-
        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
        
-
-
        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
        TQt 3.3.8
        
-
        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qgb18030codec-h.html b/doc/html/qgb18030codec-h.html
index c46d0f0ad..cd1ab4d03 100644
--- a/doc/html/qgb18030codec-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qgb18030codec-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qgb18030codec.h Include File
+ntqgb18030codec.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
        TQGb18030Codec Class Reference
        
-
-
        The TQGb18030Codec class provides conversion to and from the Chinese
-GB18030/GBK/GB2312 encoding.
-More...
-
        All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
        
-
        #include <qgb18030codec.h>
-
        Inherits TQTextCodec.
-
        Inherited by TQGbkCodec and TQGb2312Codec.
-
        List of all member functions.
-
        Detailed Description
        
- 
-
-
-
         The TQGb18030Codec class provides conversion to and from the Chinese
-GB18030/GBK/GB2312 encoding.
-
         
-
         GBK, formally the Chinese Internal Code Specification, is a commonly
-used extension of GB 2312-80.  Microsoft Windows uses it under the
-name codepage 936.
-
         GBK has been superceded by the new Chinese national standard
-GB 18030-2000, which added a 4-byte encoding while remaining
-compatible with GB2312 and GBK.  The new GB 18030-2000 may be described
-as a special encoding of Unicode 3.x and ISO-10646-1.
-
         Special thanks to charset gurus Markus Scherer (IBM),
-Dirk Meyer (Adobe Systems) and Ken Lunde (Adobe Systems) for publishing
-an excellent GB 18030-2000 summary and specification on the Internet.
-Some must-read documents are:
-
        
-
         The GBK codec was contributed to TQt by
-Justin Yu <justiny@turbolinux.com.cn> and
-Sean Chen <seanc@turbolinux.com.cn>.  They may also be reached at
-Yu Mingjian <yumj@sun.ihep.ac.cn>, <yumingjian@china.com>
-Chen Xiangyang <chenxy@sun.ihep.ac.cn>
-
         The GB18030 codec TQt functions were contributed to TQt by
-James Su <suzhe@gnuchina.org>, <suzhe@turbolinux.com.cn>
-who pioneered much of GB18030 development on GNU/Linux systems.
-
         The GB18030 codec was contributed to TQt by
-Anthony Fok <anthony@thizlinux.com>, <foka@debian.org>
-using a Perl script to generate C++ tables from gb-18030-2000.xml
-while merging contributions from James Su, Justin Yu and Sean Chen.
-A copy of the source Perl script is available at:
-
         http://people.debian.org/~foka/gb18030/gen-qgb18030codec.pl
-
         The copyright notice for their code follows:
-
         
-
         Copyright (C) 2000 TurboLinux, Inc.  Written by Justin Yu and Sean Chen.
-Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 Turbolinux, Inc.  Written by James Su.
-Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 ThizLinux Laboratory Ltd.  Written by Anthony Fok.
-
         Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-are met:
-
          
-
        1.  Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-
        2.  Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-
        
-
         THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSETQUENTIAL
-DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-SUCH DAMAGE.
-
        See also Internationalization with TQt.
-
-
-
        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
        
-
-
        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
        TQt 3.3.8
        
-
        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qgb2312codec-members.html b/doc/html/qgb2312codec-members.html
index e84b92922..dbc8dcc90 100644
--- a/doc/html/qgb2312codec-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qgb2312codec-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -35,31 +35,31 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 TQGb2312Codec, including inherited members.
 
 
 
 
        
diff --git a/doc/html/qgb2312codec.html b/doc/html/qgb2312codec.html
index 8d8377fba..24fd65609 100644
--- a/doc/html/qgb2312codec.html
+++ b/doc/html/qgb2312codec.html
@@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
        The TQGb2312Codec class provides conversion to and from the Chinese
 GB2312 encoding.
 More...
-
        #include <qgb18030codec.h>
-
        Inherits TQGb18030Codec.
+
        #include <ntqgb18030codec.h>
+
        Inherits TQGb18030Codec.
 
        List of all member functions.
 
        Detailed Description
        
  
diff --git a/doc/html/qgbkcodec-members.html b/doc/html/qgbkcodec-members.html
index 1b600d0f5..e8fd8b873 100644
--- a/doc/html/qgbkcodec-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qgbkcodec-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -32,34 +32,34 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
        Complete Member List for TQGbkCodec
        
 
 
        This is the complete list of member functions for
-TQGbkCodec, including inherited members.
+TQGbkCodec, including inherited members.
 
 
        
 
 
        
diff --git a/doc/html/qgbkcodec.html b/doc/html/qgbkcodec.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 068a5b6b1..000000000
--- a/doc/html/qgbkcodec.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,67 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
-
-
-TQGbkCodec Class
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
        TQGbkCodec Class Reference
        
-
-
        The TQGbkCodec class provides conversion to and from the Chinese
-GBK encoding.
-More...
-
        All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
        
-
        #include <qgb18030codec.h>
-
        Inherits TQGb18030Codec.
-
        List of all member functions.
-
        Detailed Description
        
- 
-
-
-
         The TQGbkCodec class provides conversion to and from the Chinese
-GBK encoding.
-
         GBK, formally the Chinese Internal Code Specification, is a commonly
-used extension of GB 2312-80. Microsoft Windows uses it under the
-name code page 936.
-
         The GBK encoding has been superceded by the GB18030 encoding and
-GB18030 is backward compatible to GBK.  For this reason the TQGbkCodec class
-is implemented in terms of the GB18030 codec and uses its 1-byte and
-2-byte portion for conversion from and to Unicode.
-
         The TQGbkCodec is kept mainly for compatibility reasons with older software.
-
        See also Internationalization with TQt.
-
-
-
        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
        
-
-
        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
        TQt 3.3.8
        
-
        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qgfx_qws-h.html b/doc/html/qgfx_qws-h.html
index 68bcb4b37..857050969 100644
--- a/doc/html/qgfx_qws-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qgfx_qws-h.html
@@ -76,12 +76,12 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 #define TQGFX_QWS_H
 
 #ifndef QT_H
-#include "qwidget.h"
-#include "qnamespace.h"
-#include "qimage.h"
+#include "ntqwidget.h"
+#include "ntqnamespace.h"
+#include "ntqimage.h"
 #include "qfontmanager_qws.h"
 #include "qmemorymanager_qws.h"
-#include "qpoint.h"
+#include "ntqpoint.h"
 #endif // QT_H
 
 #include <private/qtextengine_p.h>
diff --git a/doc/html/qgfxdriverfactory.html b/doc/html/qgfxdriverfactory.html
index 68a0072cf..367e1b269 100644
--- a/doc/html/qgfxdriverfactory.html
+++ b/doc/html/qgfxdriverfactory.html
@@ -53,14 +53,14 @@ currently ships with "LinuxFb".
 
         This class is only available in TQt/Embedded.
 
 
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        TQScreen * TQGfxDriverFactory::create ( const TQString & key, int displayId ) [static]
+
        TQScreen * TQGfxDriverFactory::create ( const TQString & key, int displayId ) [static]
 
        
 Creates a TQScreen object of a type that matches key, and with
 the ID, displayId. The TQScreen object returned may be from a
 built-in driver, or from a driver plugin.
 
         
        See also keys().
 
-
        TQStringList TQGfxDriverFactory::keys () [static]
+
        TQStringList TQGfxDriverFactory::keys () [static]
 
        
 Returns the list of keys this factory can create drivers for.
 
         
        See also create().
diff --git a/doc/html/qgfxdriverfactory_qws-h.html b/doc/html/qgfxdriverfactory_qws-h.html
index b54dcec25..de7f7b1eb 100644
--- a/doc/html/qgfxdriverfactory_qws-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qgfxdriverfactory_qws-h.html
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 #define TQGFXDRIVERFACTORY_QWS_H
 
 #ifndef QT_H
-#include "qstringlist.h"
+#include "ntqstringlist.h"
 #endif // QT_H
 
 class TQString;
diff --git a/doc/html/qgfxdriverplugin.html b/doc/html/qgfxdriverplugin.html
index ead7bb178..34c8336d9 100644
--- a/doc/html/qgfxdriverplugin.html
+++ b/doc/html/qgfxdriverplugin.html
@@ -71,14 +71,14 @@ Destroys the graphics driver plugin.
 
         You never have to call this explicitly. TQt destroys a plugin
 automatically when it is no longer used.
 
-
        TQScreen * TQGfxDriverPlugin::create ( const TQString & driver, int displayId ) [pure virtual]
+
        TQScreen * TQGfxDriverPlugin::create ( const TQString & driver, int displayId ) [pure virtual]
 
        
 
 
         Creates a driver matching the type specified by driver, that
 will use display displayId.
 
         
        See also keys().
 
-
        TQStringList TQGfxDriverPlugin::keys () const [pure virtual]
+
        TQStringList TQGfxDriverPlugin::keys () const [pure virtual]
 
        
 
 
         Returns the list of graphics drivers this plugin supports.
diff --git a/doc/html/qgfxdriverplugin_qws-h.html b/doc/html/qgfxdriverplugin_qws-h.html
index 46078e67c..53391f2bd 100644
--- a/doc/html/qgfxdriverplugin_qws-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qgfxdriverplugin_qws-h.html
@@ -76,8 +76,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 #define TQGFXDRIVERPLUGIN_QWS_H
 
 #ifndef QT_H
-#include "qgplugin.h"
-#include "qstringlist.h"
+#include "ntqgplugin.h"
+#include "ntqstringlist.h"
 #endif // QT_H
 
 #ifndef QT_NO_COMPONENT
diff --git a/doc/html/qgl-h.html b/doc/html/qgl-h.html
index 86ba13ce5..3a6b37518 100644
--- a/doc/html/qgl-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qgl-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qgl.h Include File
+ntqgl.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
        TQGL Class Reference
        [OpenGL module]
        
-
-
        The TQGL class is a namespace for miscellaneous identifiers
-in the TQt OpenGL module.
-More...
-
        #include <qgl.h>
-
        Inherited by TQGLFormat, TQGLContext, and TQGLWidget.
-
        List of all member functions.
-
        Public Members
        
-
          
-
        • enum FormatOption { DoubleBuffer = 0x0001, DepthBuffer = 0x0002, Rgba = 0x0004, AlphaChannel = 0x0008, AccumBuffer = 0x0010, StencilBuffer = 0x0020, StereoBuffers = 0x0040, DirectRendering = 0x0080, HasOverlay = 0x0100, SingleBuffer = DoubleBuffer<<16, NoDepthBuffer = DepthBuffer<<16, ColorIndex = Rgba<<16, NoAlphaChannel = AlphaChannel<<16, NoAccumBuffer = AccumBuffer<<16, NoStencilBuffer = StencilBuffer<<16, NoStereoBuffers = StereoBuffers<<16, IndirectRendering = DirectRendering<<16, NoOverlay = HasOverlay<<16 }
          • 
-
        
-
        Detailed Description
        
-
-
-The TQGL class is a namespace for miscellaneous identifiers
-in the TQt OpenGL module.
-
-
         
-
-
-
         Normally you can ignore this class. TQGLWidget and the other
-OpenGL* module classes inherit it, so when you make your
-own TQGLWidget subclass you can use the identifiers in the TQGL
-namespace without qualification.
-
         However, you may occasionally find yourself in situations where you
-need to refer to these identifiers from outside the TQGL namespace's
-scope, e.g. in static functions. In such cases, simply write e.g. TQGL::DoubleBuffer instead of just DoubleBuffer.
-
         * OpenGL is a trademark of Silicon Graphics, Inc. in the
-United States and other countries.
-
         
        See also Graphics Classes and Image Processing Classes.
-
-
        Member Type Documentation
        
-
        TQGL::FormatOption
        
-
-
         This enum specifies the format options.
-
          
-
        • TQGL::DoubleBuffer
-
        • TQGL::DepthBuffer
-
        • TQGL::Rgba
-
        • TQGL::AlphaChannel
-
        • TQGL::AccumBuffer
-
        • TQGL::StencilBuffer
-
        • TQGL::StereoBuffers
-
        • TQGL::DirectRendering
-
        • TQGL::HasOverlay
-
        • TQGL::SingleBuffer
-
        • TQGL::NoDepthBuffer
-
        • TQGL::ColorIndex
-
        • TQGL::NoAlphaChannel
-
        • TQGL::NoAccumBuffer
-
        • TQGL::NoStencilBuffer
-
        • TQGL::NoStereoBuffers
-
        • TQGL::IndirectRendering
-
        • TQGL::NoOverlay
-
        
-
-
        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
        
-
-
        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
        TQt 3.3.8
        
-
        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qglayoutiterator-members.html b/doc/html/qglayoutiterator-members.html
index 1d4328fee..53d17efb6 100644
--- a/doc/html/qglayoutiterator-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qglayoutiterator-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qglayoutiterator.html b/doc/html/qglayoutiterator.html
index d8501a0f9..0a11b12d2 100644
--- a/doc/html/qglayoutiterator.html
+++ b/doc/html/qglayoutiterator.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
        The TQGLayoutIterator class is an abstract base class of internal layout iterators.
 More...
-
        #include <qlayout.h>
+
        #include <ntqlayout.h>
 
        List of all member functions.
 
        Public Members
        
 
          
@@ -49,11 +49,11 @@ The TQGLayoutIterator class is an abstract base class of internal layout iterato
 
           
 
 
           (This class is not OpenGL related, it just happens to start with
-the letters TQGL...)
+the letters TQGL...)
 
           Subclass this class to create a custom layout. The functions that
 must be implemented are next(), current(), and takeCurrent().
 
           The TQGLayoutIterator implements the functionality of
-TQLayoutIterator. Each subclass of TQLayout needs a
+TQLayoutIterator. Each subclass of TQLayout needs a
 TQGLayoutIterator subclass.
 
          See also Widget Appearance and Style and Layout Management.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qglcolormap-h.html b/doc/html/qglcolormap-h.html
index 81fa6299d..37710a1a3 100644
--- a/doc/html/qglcolormap-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qglcolormap-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qglcolormap.h Include File
+ntqglcolormap.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
          
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
          TQGLColormap Class Reference
          [OpenGL module]
          
-
-
          The TQGLColormap class is used for installing custom colormaps into
-TQGLWidgets.
-More...
-
          #include <qglcolormap.h>
-
          List of all member functions.
-
          Public Members
          
-
-
          Detailed Description
          
-
-
-The TQGLColormap class is used for installing custom colormaps into
-TQGLWidgets.
-
-
           
-
-
-
           TQGLColormap provides a platform independent way of specifying and
-installing indexed colormaps into TQGLWidgets. TQGLColormap is
-especially useful when using the OpenGL
-color-index mode.
-
           Under X11 you must use an X server that supports either a PseudoColor or DirectColor visual class. If your X server
-currently only provides a GrayScale, TrueColor, StaticColor or StaticGray visual, you will not be able to
-allocate colorcells for writing. If this is the case, try setting
-your X server to 8 bit mode. It should then provide you with at
-least a PseudoColor visual. Note that you may experience
-colormap flashing if your X server is running in 8 bit mode.
-
           Under Windows the size of the colormap is always set to 256
-colors. Note that under Windows you can also install colormaps
-in child widgets.
-
           This class uses explicit sharing (see Shared
-    Classes).
-
           Example of use:
-
          -    #include <qapplication.h>
-    #include <qglcolormap.h>
-
-    int main()
-    {
-        TQApplication a( argc, argv );
-
-        MySuperGLWidget widget( 0 ); // A TQGLWidget in color-index mode
-        TQGLColormap colormap;
-
-        // This will fill the colormap with colors ranging from
-        // black to white.
-        for ( int i = 0; i < colormap.size(); i++ )
-            colormap.setEntry( i, qRgb( i, i, i ) );
-
-        widget.setColormap( colormap );
-        widget.show();
-        return a.exec();
-    }
-    
          
- 
-
           
          See also TQGLWidget::setColormap(), TQGLWidget::colormap(), Graphics Classes, and Image Processing Classes.
-
-
          Member Function Documentation
          
-
          TQGLColormap::TQGLColormap ()
-
          
-Construct a TQGLColormap.
-
-
          TQGLColormap::TQGLColormap ( const TQGLColormap & map )
-
          
-Construct a shallow copy of map.
-
-
          TQGLColormap::~TQGLColormap ()
-
          
-Dereferences the TQGLColormap and deletes it if this was the last
-reference to it.
-
-
          void TQGLColormap::detach ()
-
          
-Detaches this TQGLColormap from the shared block.
-
-
          TQColor TQGLColormap::entryColor ( int idx ) const
-
          
-Returns the TQRgb value in the colorcell with index idx.
-
-
          TQRgb TQGLColormap::entryRgb ( int idx ) const
-
          
-Returns the TQRgb value in the colorcell with index idx.
-
-
          int TQGLColormap::find ( TQRgb color ) const
-
          
-Returns the index of the color color. If color is not in the
-map, -1 is returned.
-
-
          int TQGLColormap::findNearest ( TQRgb color ) const
-
          
-Returns the index of the color that is the closest match to color
-color.
-
-
          bool TQGLColormap::isEmpty () const
-
          
-Returns TRUE if the colormap is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. A
-colormap with no color values set is considered to be empty.
-
-
          TQGLColormap & TQGLColormap::operator= ( const TQGLColormap & map )
-
          
-Assign a shallow copy of map to this TQGLColormap.
-
-
          void TQGLColormap::setEntries ( int count, const TQRgb * colors, int base = 0 )
-
          
-Set an array of cells in this colormap. count is the number of
-colors that should be set, colors is the array of colors, and
-base is the starting index.
-
-
          void TQGLColormap::setEntry ( int idx, TQRgb color )
-
          
-Set cell at index idx in the colormap to color color.
-
-
          void TQGLColormap::setEntry ( int idx, const TQColor & color )
-
          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
           Set the cell with index idx in the colormap to color color.
-
-
          int TQGLColormap::size () const
-
          
-Returns the number of colorcells in the colormap.
-
-
-
          
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
          
-
-
          Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
          TQt 3.3.8
          
-
          
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qglcontext-members.html b/doc/html/qglcontext-members.html
index ec83e7a53..4663b982a 100644
--- a/doc/html/qglcontext-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qglcontext-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qglcontext.html b/doc/html/qglcontext.html
index 215ef3d6e..9e4dd8d2d 100644
--- a/doc/html/qglcontext.html
+++ b/doc/html/qglcontext.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
          The TQGLContext class encapsulates an OpenGL rendering context.
 More...
-
          #include <qgl.h>
-
          Inherits TQGL.
+
          #include <ntqgl.h>
+
          Inherits TQGL.
 
          List of all member functions.
 
          Public Members
          
 
            
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ The TQGLContext class encapsulates an OpenGL rendering context.
 
 
             An OpenGL* rendering context is a complete set of
 OpenGL state variables.
-
             The context's format is set in the
+
             The context's format is set in the
 constructor or later with setFormat(). The format options that are
 actually set are returned by format(); the options you asked for
 are returned by requestedFormat(). Note that after a TQGLContext
@@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ United States and other countries.
 
             
            See also Graphics Classes and Image Processing Classes.
 
 
            Member Function Documentation
            
-
            TQGLContext::TQGLContext ( const TQGLFormat & format, TQPaintDevice * device )
+
            TQGLContext::TQGLContext ( const TQGLFormat & format, TQPaintDevice * device )
 
            
 Constructs an OpenGL context for the paint device device, which
 can be a widget or a pixmap. The format specifies several
@@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ commands will currently be directed. Returns 0 if no context is
 current.
 
             
            See also makeCurrent().
 
-
            TQPaintDevice * TQGLContext::device () const
+
            TQPaintDevice * TQGLContext::device () const
 
            
 
 
             Returns the paint device set for this context.
@@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ to call this function; TQGLContext calls it as necessary.
 subset of what was requested).
 
             
            See also requestedFormat().
 
-
            void TQGLContext::generateFontDisplayLists ( const TQFont & font, int listBase ) [protected]
+
            void TQGLContext::generateFontDisplayLists ( const TQFont & font, int listBase ) [protected]
 
            
 
 
             Generates a set of 256 display lists for the 256 first characters
@@ -256,18 +256,18 @@ is made current.
 
             In some very rare cases the underlying call may fail. If this
 occurs an error message is output to stderr.
 
-
            TQColor TQGLContext::overlayTransparentColor () const
+
            TQColor TQGLContext::overlayTransparentColor () const
 
            
 
 
             If this context is a valid context in an overlay plane, returns
-the plane's transparent color. Otherwise returns an invalid color.
-
             The returned color's pixel value is
+the plane's transparent color. Otherwise returns an invalid color.
+
             The returned color's pixel value is
 the index of the transparent color in the colormap of the overlay
 plane. (Naturally, the color's RGB values are meaningless.)
-
             The returned TQColor object will generally work as expected only
+
             The returned TQColor object will generally work as expected only
 when passed as the argument to TQGLWidget::qglColor() or
 TQGLWidget::qglClearColor(). Under certain circumstances it can
-also be used to draw transparent graphics with a TQPainter. See the
+also be used to draw transparent graphics with a TQPainter. See the
 examples/opengl/overlay_x11 example for details.
 
 
            TQGLFormat TQGLContext::requestedFormat () const
diff --git a/doc/html/qglformat-members.html b/doc/html/qglformat-members.html
index 51bc588b4..0770bfcf8 100644
--- a/doc/html/qglformat-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qglformat-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qglformat.html b/doc/html/qglformat.html
index 4eb3057ea..0b970f458 100644
--- a/doc/html/qglformat.html
+++ b/doc/html/qglformat.html
@@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
            The TQGLFormat class specifies the display format of an OpenGL
 rendering context.
 More...
-
            #include <qgl.h>
-
            Inherits TQGL.
+
            #include <ntqgl.h>
+
            Inherits TQGL.
 
            List of all member functions.
 
            Public Members
            
 
              
@@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ requested features the system was able to provide:
     if ( !w->format().stereo() ) {
         // ok, goggles off
         if ( !w->format().hasOverlay() ) {
-            qFatal( "Cool hardware required" );
+            qFatal( "Cool hardware required" );
         }
     }
     
    • 
@@ -161,27 +161,27 @@ Constructs a TQGLFormat object with the factory default settings:
 
 Creates a TQGLFormat object that is a copy of the current application default format.
 
     If options is not 0, this copy is modified by these format
-options. The options parameter should be FormatOption values
+options. The options parameter should be FormatOption values
 OR'ed together.
 
     This constructor makes it easy to specify a certain desired format
 in classes derived from TQGLWidget, for example:
 
         // The rendering in MyGLWidget depends on using
     // stencil buffer and alpha channel
-    MyGLWidget::MyGLWidget( TQWidget* parent, const char* name )
+    MyGLWidget::MyGLWidget( TQWidget* parent, const char* name )
         : TQGLWidget( TQGLFormat( StencilBuffer | AlphaChannel ), parent, name )
     {
         if ( !format().stencil() )
-            qWarning( "Could not get stencil buffer; results will be suboptimal" );
+            qWarning( "Could not get stencil buffer; results will be suboptimal" );
         if ( !format().alphaChannel() )
-            qWarning( "Could not get alpha channel; results will be suboptimal" );
+            qWarning( "Could not get alpha channel; results will be suboptimal" );
         ...
     }
     
    
  
-
     Note that there are FormatOption values to turn format settings
-both on and off, e.g. DepthBuffer and NoDepthBuffer,
-DirectRendering and IndirectRendering, etc.
+
     Note that there are FormatOption values to turn format settings
+both on and off, e.g. DepthBuffer and NoDepthBuffer,
+DirectRendering and IndirectRendering, etc.
 
     The plane parameter defaults to 0 and is the plane which this
 format should be associated with. Not all OpenGL implmentations
 supports overlay/underlay rendering planes.
@@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ FALSE. Double buffering is enabled by default.
 
 
     Returns TRUE if the window system has any OpenGL support;
 otherwise returns FALSE.
-
     Warning: This function must not be called until the TQApplication
+
     Warning: This function must not be called until the TQApplication
 object has been created.
 
 
    bool TQGLFormat::hasOpenGLOverlays () [static]
@@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ object has been created.
 
 
     Returns TRUE if the window system supports OpenGL overlays;
 otherwise returns FALSE.
-
     Warning: This function must not be called until the TQApplication
+
     Warning: This function must not be called until the TQApplication
 object has been created.
 
 
    bool TQGLFormat::hasOverlay () const
@@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ Sets a new default TQGLFormat for the application to f. For
 example, to set single buffering as the default instead of double
 buffering, your main() might contain code like this:
 
    -    TQApplication a(argc, argv);
+    TQApplication a(argc, argv);
     TQGLFormat f;
     f.setDoubleBuffer( FALSE );
     TQGLFormat::setDefaultFormat( f );
@@ -339,7 +339,7 @@ underlying OpenGL system was able to provide the requested
 specification:
 
     
         // ...continued from above
-    MyGLWidget* myWidget = new MyGLWidget( TQGLFormat( TQGL::HasOverlay ), ... );
+    MyGLWidget* myWidget = new MyGLWidget( TQGLFormat( TQGL::HasOverlay ), ... );
     if ( myWidget->format().hasOverlay() ) {
         // Yes, we got an overlay, let's check _its_ format:
         TQGLContext* olContext = myWidget->overlayContext();
@@ -386,7 +386,7 @@ exchange the screen contents with the buffer. The result is
 flicker-free drawing and often better performance.
 
     
    See also doubleBuffer(), TQGLContext::swapBuffers(), and TQGLWidget::swapBuffers().
 
-
    void TQGLFormat::setOption ( FormatOption opt )
+
    void TQGLFormat::setOption ( FormatOption opt )
 
    
 Sets the format option to opt.
 
     
    See also testOption().
@@ -456,7 +456,7 @@ FALSE. The stencil buffer is disabled by default.
 FALSE. Stereo buffering is disabled by default.
 
     
    See also setStereo().
 
-
    bool TQGLFormat::testOption ( FormatOption opt ) const
+
    bool TQGLFormat::testOption ( FormatOption opt ) const
 
    
 Returns TRUE if format option opt is set; otherwise returns FALSE.
 
     
    See also setOption().
diff --git a/doc/html/qglobal-h.html b/doc/html/qglobal-h.html
index 285a4d9b0..99ad5295c 100644
--- a/doc/html/qglobal-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qglobal-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qglobal.h Include File
+ntqglobal.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
    TQGrid Class Reference
    
-
-
    The TQGrid widget provides simple geometry management of its children.
-More...
-
    #include <qgrid.h>
-
    Inherits TQFrame.
-
    List of all member functions.
-
    Public Members
    
-
      
-
    • TQGrid ( int n, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
      • 
-
    • TQGrid ( int n, Orientation orient, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
      • 
-
    • void setSpacing ( int space )
      • 
-
    
-
    Detailed Description
    
-
-
-The TQGrid widget provides simple geometry management of its children.
-
     
-
-
     The grid places its widgets either in columns or in rows depending
-on its orientation.
-
     The number of rows or columns is defined in the constructor.
-All the grid's children will be placed and sized in accordance
-with their sizeHint() and sizePolicy().
-
     Use setMargin() to add space around the grid itself, and
-setSpacing() to add space between the widgets.
-
     
    TQGrid
     
-
     
    See also TQVBox, TQHBox, TQGridLayout, Widget Appearance and Style, and Layout Management.
-
-
    Member Function Documentation
    
-
    TQGrid::TQGrid ( int n, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
-
    
-Constructs a grid widget with parent parent, called name.
-n specifies the number of columns. The widget flags f are
-passed to the TQFrame constructor.
-
-
    TQGrid::TQGrid ( int n, Orientation orient, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
-
    
-Constructs a grid widget with parent parent, called name.
-If orient is Horizontal, n specifies the number of
-columns. If orient is Vertical, n specifies the number of
-rows. The widget flags f are passed to the TQFrame constructor.
-
-
    void TQGrid::setSpacing ( int space )
-
    
-Sets the spacing between the child widgets to space.
-
-
-
    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
    
-
-
    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
    TQt 3.3.8
    
-
    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qgridlayout-members.html b/doc/html/qgridlayout-members.html
index c54fe7a61..4438f3d42 100644
--- a/doc/html/qgridlayout-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qgridlayout-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -37,9 +37,9 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qgridlayout.html b/doc/html/qgridlayout.html
index 98233c487..b13b260a3 100644
--- a/doc/html/qgridlayout.html
+++ b/doc/html/qgridlayout.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
    The TQGridLayout class lays out widgets in a grid.
 More...
-
    #include <qlayout.h>
-
    Inherits TQLayout.
+
    #include <ntqlayout.h>
+
    Inherits TQLayout.
 
    List of all member functions.
 
    Public Members
    
 
      
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
 
       TQGridLayout takes the space made available to it (by its parent
-layout or by the mainWidget()), divides it up into rows and
+layout or by the mainWidget()), divides it up into rows and
 columns, and puts each widget it manages into the correct cell.
 
       Columns and rows behave identically; we will discuss columns, but
 there are equivalent functions for rows.
@@ -98,19 +98,19 @@ minimum width of each widget in that column. The stretch factor is
 set using setColStretch() and determines how much of the available
 space the column will get over and above its necessary minimum.
 
       Normally, each managed widget or layout is put into a cell of its
-own using addWidget(), addLayout() or by the auto-add facility. It is also
+own using addWidget(), addLayout() or by the auto-add facility. It is also
 possible for a widget to occupy multiple cells using
 addMultiCellWidget(). If you do this, TQGridLayout will guess how
 to distribute the size over the columns/rows (based on the stretch
 factors).
-
       To remove a widget from a layout, call remove(). Calling
-TQWidget::hide() on a widget also effectively removes the widget
-from the layout until TQWidget::show() is called.
+
       To remove a widget from a layout, call remove(). Calling
+TQWidget::hide() on a widget also effectively removes the widget
+from the layout until TQWidget::show() is called.
 
       This illustration shows a fragment of a dialog with a five-column,
 three-row grid (the grid is shown overlaid in magenta):
 
       
       
 
       Columns 0, 2 and 4 in this dialog fragment are made up of a
-TQLabel, a TQLineEdit, and a TQListBox. Columns 1 and 3 are
+TQLabel, a TQLineEdit, and a TQListBox. Columns 1 and 3 are
 placeholders made with addColSpacing(). Row 0 consists of three
 TQLabel objects, row 1 of three TQLineEdit objects and row 2 of
 three TQListBox objects. We used placeholder columns (1 and 3) to
@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ of the TQGridLayout's four sides. The spacing is the width of the
 automatically allocated spacing between neighboring boxes.
 
       Both the border and the spacing are parameters of the constructor
 and default to 0.
-
       
      See also TQGrid, Layout Overview, Widget Appearance and Style, and Layout Management.
+
       
      See also TQGrid, Layout Overview, Widget Appearance and Style, and Layout Management.
 
 
      Member Type Documentation
      
 
      TQGridLayout::Corner
      
@@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ layout.
 
    • TQGridLayout::BottomRight - the bottom-right corner
 
    
 
    Member Function Documentation
    
-
    TQGridLayout::TQGridLayout ( TQWidget * parent, int nRows = 1, int nCols = 1, int margin = 0, int space = -1, const char * name = 0 )
+
    TQGridLayout::TQGridLayout ( TQWidget * parent, int nRows = 1, int nCols = 1, int margin = 0, int space = -1, const char * name = 0 )
 
    
 Constructs a new TQGridLayout with nRows rows, nCols columns
 and parent widget, parent. parent may not be 0. The grid
@@ -160,17 +160,17 @@ between cells. If space is -1, the value of margin is used.
 
    
 Constructs a new grid with nRows rows and nCols columns. If
 spacing is -1, this TQGridLayout inherits its parent's
-spacing(); otherwise spacing is used. The grid layout is called
+spacing(); otherwise spacing is used. The grid layout is called
 name.
 
     You must insert this grid into another layout. You can insert
 widgets and layouts into this layout at any time, but laying out
 will not be performed before this is inserted into another layout.
 
-
    TQGridLayout::TQGridLayout ( TQLayout * parentLayout, int nRows = 1, int nCols = 1, int spacing = -1, const char * name = 0 )
+
    TQGridLayout::TQGridLayout ( TQLayout * parentLayout, int nRows = 1, int nCols = 1, int spacing = -1, const char * name = 0 )
 
    
 Constructs a new grid that is placed inside parentLayout with
 nRows rows and nCols columns. If spacing is -1, this
-TQGridLayout inherits its parent's spacing(); otherwise spacing
+TQGridLayout inherits its parent's spacing(); otherwise spacing
 is used. The grid layout is called name.
 
     This grid is placed according to parentLayout's default
 placement rules.
@@ -202,8 +202,8 @@ ownership of the item.
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 
     Adds item to the next free position of this layout.
 
-
    Reimplemented from TQLayout.
-
    void TQGridLayout::addLayout ( TQLayout * layout, int row, int col )
+
    Reimplemented from TQLayout.
+
    void TQGridLayout::addLayout ( TQLayout * layout, int row, int col )
 
    
 Places the layout at position (row, col) in the grid. The
 top-left position is (0, 0).
@@ -218,15 +218,15 @@ automatically added to the parent layout as it is constructed.
 
 Adds the item to the cell grid, spanning multiple rows/columns.
 
     The cell will span from fromRow, fromCol to toRow, toCol. Alignment is specified by alignment, which is a bitwise
-OR of TQt::AlignmentFlags values. The default alignment is 0,
+OR of TQt::AlignmentFlags values. The default alignment is 0,
 which means that the widget fills the entire cell.
 
-
    void TQGridLayout::addMultiCellLayout ( TQLayout * layout, int fromRow, int toRow, int fromCol, int toCol, int alignment = 0 )
+
    void TQGridLayout::addMultiCellLayout ( TQLayout * layout, int fromRow, int toRow, int fromCol, int toCol, int alignment = 0 )
 
    
 Adds the layout layout to the cell grid, spanning multiple
 rows/columns. The cell will span from fromRow, fromCol to toRow, toCol.
 
     Alignment is specified by alignment, which is a bitwise OR of
-TQt::AlignmentFlags values. The default alignment is 0, which
+TQt::AlignmentFlags values. The default alignment is 0, which
 means that the widget fills the entire cell.
 
     A non-zero alignment indicates that the layout should not grow to
 fill the available space but should be sized according to
@@ -234,12 +234,12 @@ fill the available space but should be sized according to
 
     layout becomes a child of the grid layout.
 
     
    See also addLayout().
 
-
    void TQGridLayout::addMultiCellWidget ( TQWidget * w, int fromRow, int toRow, int fromCol, int toCol, int alignment = 0 )
+
    void TQGridLayout::addMultiCellWidget ( TQWidget * w, int fromRow, int toRow, int fromCol, int toCol, int alignment = 0 )
 
    
 Adds the widget w to the cell grid, spanning multiple
 rows/columns. The cell will span from fromRow, fromCol to toRow, toCol.
 
     Alignment is specified by alignment, which is a bitwise OR of
-TQt::AlignmentFlags values. The default alignment is 0, which
+TQt::AlignmentFlags values. The default alignment is 0, which
 means that the widget fills the entire cell.
 
     A non-zero alignment indicates that the widget should not grow to
 fill the available space but should be sized according to
@@ -253,16 +253,16 @@ fill the available space but should be sized according to
 
     Sets the minimum height of row row to minsize pixels.
 
     Use setRowSpacing() instead.
 
-
    void TQGridLayout::addWidget ( TQWidget * w, int row, int col, int alignment = 0 )
+
    void TQGridLayout::addWidget ( TQWidget * w, int row, int col, int alignment = 0 )
 
    
 Adds the widget w to the cell grid at row, col. The
 top-left position is (0, 0) by default.
 
     Alignment is specified by alignment, which is a bitwise OR of
-TQt::AlignmentFlags values. The default alignment is 0, which
+TQt::AlignmentFlags values. The default alignment is 0, which
 means that the widget fills the entire cell.
 
     
      
 
    •  You should not call this if you have enabled the
-auto-add facility of the layout.
+auto-add facility of the layout.
 
       
    •  From TQt 3.0, the alignment parameter is interpreted more
 aggressively than in previous versions of TQt. A non-default
 alignment now indicates that the widget should not grow to fill
@@ -271,14 +271,14 @@ the available space, but should be sized according to sizeHi
 
       
      See also addMultiCellWidget().
 
 
      Examples: addressbook/centralwidget.cpp, layout/layout.cpp, rot13/rot13.cpp, sql/overview/form1/main.cpp, sql/overview/form2/main.cpp, t14/gamebrd.cpp, and t8/main.cpp.
-
      TQRect TQGridLayout::cellGeometry ( int row, int col ) const
+
      TQRect TQGridLayout::cellGeometry ( int row, int col ) const
 
      
 Returns the geometry of the cell with row row and column col
 in the grid. Returns an invalid rectangle if row or col is
 outside the grid.
 
       Warning: in the current version of TQt this function does not
 return valid results until setGeometry() has been called, i.e.
-after the mainWidget() is visible.
+after the mainWidget() is visible.
 
 
      int TQGridLayout::colSpacing ( int col ) const
 
      
@@ -297,15 +297,15 @@ columns. Will not shrink the grid. You should not need to call
 this function because TQGridLayout expands automatically as new
 items are inserted.
 
-
      TQSizePolicy::ExpandData TQGridLayout::expanding () const [virtual]
+
      TQSizePolicy::ExpandData TQGridLayout::expanding () const [virtual]
 
      
 Returns whether this layout can make use of more space than
-sizeHint(). A value of Vertical or Horizontal means that it wants
+sizeHint(). A value of Vertical or Horizontal means that it wants
 to grow in only one dimension, whereas BothDirections means that
 it wants to grow in both dimensions.
 
-
      Reimplemented from TQLayout.
-
      bool TQGridLayout::findWidget ( TQWidget * w, int * row, int * col ) [protected]
+
      Reimplemented from TQLayout.
+
      bool TQGridLayout::findWidget ( TQWidget * w, int * row, int * col ) [protected]
 
      
 Searches for widget w in this layout (not including child
 layouts). If w is found, it sets <em>row</em> and <em>col</em> to
@@ -328,17 +328,17 @@ Returns the layout's preferred height when it is w pixels wide.
 
 Resets cached information.
 
-
      Reimplemented from TQLayout.
-
      TQSize TQGridLayout::maximumSize () const [virtual]
+
      Reimplemented from TQLayout.
+
      TQSize TQGridLayout::maximumSize () const [virtual]
 
      
 Returns the maximum size needed by this grid.
 
-
      Reimplemented from TQLayout.
-
      TQSize TQGridLayout::minimumSize () const [virtual]
+
      Reimplemented from TQLayout.
+
      TQSize TQGridLayout::minimumSize () const [virtual]
 
      
 Returns the minimum size needed by this grid.
 
-
      Reimplemented from TQLayout.
+
      Reimplemented from TQLayout.
 
      int TQGridLayout::numCols () const
 
      
 Returns the number of columns in this grid.
@@ -380,11 +380,11 @@ grow.
 
       
      See also colStretch(), addColSpacing(), and setRowStretch().
 
 
      Examples: layout/layout.cpp, t14/gamebrd.cpp, and t8/main.cpp.
-
      void TQGridLayout::setGeometry ( const TQRect & r ) [virtual]
+
      void TQGridLayout::setGeometry ( const TQRect & r ) [virtual]
 
      
 Resizes managed widgets within the rectangle r.
 
-
      Reimplemented from TQLayout.
+
      Reimplemented from TQLayout.
 
      void TQGridLayout::setOrigin ( Corner c )
 
      
 Sets the grid's origin corner, i.e. position (0, 0), to c.
@@ -406,7 +406,7 @@ other row in this table can grow at all, the row may still grow.
 
       
      See also rowStretch(), setRowSpacing(), and setColStretch().
 
 
      Examples: addressbook/centralwidget.cpp and qutlook/centralwidget.cpp.
-
      TQSize TQGridLayout::sizeHint () const [virtual]
+
      TQSize TQGridLayout::sizeHint () const [virtual]
 
      
 Returns the preferred size of this grid.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qgridview-h.html b/doc/html/qgridview-h.html
index 68921e88f..4338a1dcc 100644
--- a/doc/html/qgridview-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qgridview-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qgridview.h Include File
+ntqgridview.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
      
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
      TQGridView Class Reference
      
-
-
      The TQGridView class provides an abstract base for
-fixed-size grids.
-More...
-
      #include <qgridview.h>
-
      Inherits TQScrollView.
-
      List of all member functions.
-
      Public Members
      
-
-
      Properties
      
-
        
-
      • int cellHeight - the height of a grid row
        • 
-
      • int cellWidth - the width of a grid column
        • 
-
      • int numCols - the number of columns in the grid
        • 
-
      • int numRows - the number of rows in the grid
        • 
-
      
-
      Protected Members
      
-
        
-
      • virtual void paintCell ( TQPainter * p, int row, int col ) = 0
        • 
-
      • virtual void paintEmptyArea ( TQPainter * p, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch )
        • 
-
      • virtual void dimensionChange ( int oldNumRows, int oldNumCols )
        • 
-
      
-
      Detailed Description
      
-
-
-The TQGridView class provides an abstract base for
-fixed-size grids.
-
       
-
       A grid view consists of a number of abstract cells organized in
-rows and columns. The cells have a fixed size and are identified
-with a row index and a column index. The top-left cell is in row
-0, column 0. The bottom-right cell is in row numRows()-1, column
-numCols()-1.
-
       You can define numRows, numCols, cellWidth and cellHeight. Reimplement the pure virtual function paintCell() to
-draw the contents of a cell.
-
       With ensureCellVisible(), you can ensure a certain cell is
-visible. With rowAt() and columnAt() you can find a cell based on
-the given x- and y-coordinates.
-
       If you need to monitor changes to the grid's dimensions (i.e. when
-numRows or numCols is changed), reimplement the dimensionChange()
-change handler.
-
       Note: the row and column indices are always given in the order,
-row (vertical offset) then column (horizontal offset). This order
-is the opposite of all pixel operations, which are given in the
-order x (horizontal offset), y (vertical offset).
-
       TQGridView is a very simple abstract class based on TQScrollView. It
-is designed to simplify the task of drawing many cells of the same
-size in a potentially scrollable canvas. If you need rows and
-columns with different sizes, use a TQTable instead. If you need a
-simple list of items, use a TQListBox. If you need to present
-hierachical data use a TQListView, and if you need random objects
-at random positions, consider using either a TQIconView or a
-TQCanvas.
-
      See also Abstract Widget Classes.
-
-
      Member Function Documentation
      
-
      TQGridView::TQGridView ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
-
      
-Constructs a grid view.
-
       The parent, name and widget flag, f, arguments are passed
-to the TQScrollView constructor.
-
-
      TQGridView::~TQGridView ()
-
      
-Destroys the grid view.
-
-
      TQRect TQGridView::cellGeometry ( int row, int column )
-
      
-Returns the geometry of cell (row, column) in the content
-coordinate system.
-
       
      See also cellRect().
-
-
      int TQGridView::cellHeight () const
-
      Returns the height of a grid row.
-See the "cellHeight" property for details.
-
      TQRect TQGridView::cellRect () const
-
      
-
-
       Returns the geometry of a cell in a cell's coordinate system. This
-is a convenience function useful in paintCell(). It is equivalent
-to TQRect( 0, 0, cellWidth(), cellHeight() ).
-
       
      See also cellGeometry().
-
-
       
-
      int TQGridView::cellWidth () const
-
      Returns the width of a grid column.
-See the "cellWidth" property for details.
-
      int TQGridView::columnAt ( int x ) const
-
      
-
-
       Returns the number of the column at position x. x must be
-given in content coordinates.
-
       
      See also rowAt().
-
-
      void TQGridView::dimensionChange ( int oldNumRows, int oldNumCols ) [virtual protected]
-
      
-
-
       This change handler is called whenever any of the grid's
-dimensions change. oldNumRows and oldNumCols contain the
-old dimensions, numRows() and numCols() contain the new
-dimensions.
-
-
      void TQGridView::ensureCellVisible ( int row, int column )
-
      
-Ensures cell (row, column) is visible, scrolling the grid
-view if necessary.
-
-
      TQSize TQGridView::gridSize () const
-
      
-
-
       Returns the size of the grid in pixels.
-
       
-
      int TQGridView::numCols () const
-
      Returns the number of columns in the grid.
-See the "numCols" property for details.
-
      int TQGridView::numRows () const
-
      Returns the number of rows in the grid.
-See the "numRows" property for details.
-
      void TQGridView::paintCell ( TQPainter * p, int row, int col ) [pure virtual protected]
-
      
-
-
       This pure virtual function is called to paint the single cell at
-(row, col) using painter p. The painter must be open when
-paintCell() is called and must remain open.
-
       The coordinate system is translated so that the origin is at the top-left corner of the cell
-to be painted, i.e. cell coordinates. Do not scale or shear
-the coordinate system (or if you do, restore the transformation matrix before you return).
-
       The painter is not clipped by default in order to get maximum
-efficiency. If you want clipping, use
-
       
      -    p->setClipRect( cellRect(), TQPainter::CoordPainter );
-    //... your drawing code
-    p->setClipping( FALSE );
-
-    
      
- 
-
-
      void TQGridView::paintEmptyArea ( TQPainter * p, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch ) [virtual protected]
-
      
-This function fills the cw pixels wide and ch pixels high
-rectangle starting at position (cx, cy) with the background
-color using the painter p.
-
       paintEmptyArea() is invoked by drawContents() to erase or fill
-unused areas.
-
-
      void TQGridView::repaintCell ( int row, int column, bool erase = TRUE )
-
      
-Repaints cell (row, column).
-
       If erase is TRUE, TQt erases the area of the cell before the
-paintCell() call; otherwise no erasing takes place.
-
       
      See also TQWidget::repaint().
-
-
      int TQGridView::rowAt ( int y ) const
-
      
-
-
       Returns the number of the row at position y. y must be given
-in content coordinates.
-
       
      See also columnAt().
-
-
      void TQGridView::setCellHeight ( int ) [virtual]
-
      Sets the height of a grid row.
-See the "cellHeight" property for details.
-
      void TQGridView::setCellWidth ( int ) [virtual]
-
      Sets the width of a grid column.
-See the "cellWidth" property for details.
-
      void TQGridView::setNumCols ( int ) [virtual]
-
      Sets the number of columns in the grid.
-See the "numCols" property for details.
-
      void TQGridView::setNumRows ( int ) [virtual]
-
      Sets the number of rows in the grid.
-See the "numRows" property for details.
-
      void TQGridView::updateCell ( int row, int column )
-
      
-Updates cell (row, column).
-
       
      See also TQWidget::update().
-
-
      Property Documentation
      
-
      int cellHeight
      
-
      This property holds the height of a grid row.
-
      All rows in a grid view have the same height.
-
       
      See also cellWidth.
-
-
      Set this property's value with setCellHeight() and get this property's value with cellHeight().
-
      int cellWidth
      
-
      This property holds the width of a grid column.
-
      All columns in a grid view have the same width.
-
       
      See also cellHeight.
-
-
      Set this property's value with setCellWidth() and get this property's value with cellWidth().
-
      int numCols
      
-
      This property holds the number of columns in the grid.
-
      Set this property's value with setNumCols() and get this property's value with numCols().
-
      See also numRows.
-
-
      int numRows
      
-
      This property holds the number of rows in the grid.
-
      Set this property's value with setNumRows() and get this property's value with numRows().
-
      See also numCols.
-
-
-
      
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
      
-
-
      Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
      TQt 3.3.8
      
-
      
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qgroupbox-h.html b/doc/html/qgroupbox-h.html
index 1584eb2e6..6598f86bd 100644
--- a/doc/html/qgroupbox-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qgroupbox-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qgroupbox.h Include File
+ntqgroupbox.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
      
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
      TQGroupBox Class Reference
      
-
-
      The TQGroupBox widget provides a group box frame with a title.
-More...
-
      #include <qgroupbox.h>
-
      Inherits TQFrame.
-
      Inherited by TQButtonGroup, TQHGroupBox, and TQVGroupBox.
-
      List of all member functions.
-
      Public Members
      
-
-
      Public Slots
      
-
-
      Signals
      
-
-
      Properties
      
-
        
-
      • Alignment alignment - the alignment of the group box title
        • 
-
      • bool checkable - whether the group box has a checkbox in its title
        • 
-
      • bool checked - whether the group box's checkbox is checked
        • 
-
      • int columns - the number of columns or rows (depending on \l TQGroupBox::orientation) in the group box
        • 
-
      • bool flat - whether the group box is painted flat or has a frame
        • 
-
      • Orientation orientation - the group box's orientation
        • 
-
      • TQString title - the group box title text
        • 
-
      
-
      Detailed Description
      
-
-
-The TQGroupBox widget provides a group box frame with a title.
-
       
-
-
-
-
       A group box provides a frame, a title and a keyboard shortcut, and
-displays various other widgets inside itself. The title is on top,
-the keyboard shortcut moves keyboard focus to one of the group
-box's child widgets, and the child widgets are usually laid out
-horizontally (or vertically) inside the frame.
-
       The simplest way to use it is to create a group box with the
-desired number of columns (or rows) and orientation, and then just
-create widgets with the group box as parent.
-
       It is also possible to change the orientation() and number of
-columns() after construction, or to ignore all the automatic
-layout support and manage the layout yourself. You can add 'empty'
-spaces to the group box with addSpace().
-
       TQGroupBox also lets you set the title() (normally set in the
-constructor) and the title's alignment().
-
       You can change the spacing used by the group box with
-setInsideMargin() and setInsideSpacing(). To minimize space
-consumption, you can remove the right, left and bottom edges of
-the frame with setFlat().
-
       
-
       
      See also TQButtonGroup, Widget Appearance and Style, Layout Management, and Organizers.
-
-
      Member Function Documentation
      
-
      TQGroupBox::TQGroupBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
      
-Constructs a group box widget with no title.
-
       The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
       This constructor does not do automatic layout.
-
-
      TQGroupBox::TQGroupBox ( const TQString & title, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
      
-Constructs a group box with the title title.
-
       The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
       This constructor does not do automatic layout.
-
-
      TQGroupBox::TQGroupBox ( int strips, Orientation orientation, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
      
-Constructs a group box with no title. Child widgets will be
-arranged in strips rows or columns (depending on orientation).
-
       The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
-
      TQGroupBox::TQGroupBox ( int strips, Orientation orientation, const TQString & title, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
      
-Constructs a group box titled title. Child widgets will be
-arranged in strips rows or columns (depending on orientation).
-
       The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
-
      TQGroupBox::~TQGroupBox ()
-
      
-Destroys the group box.
-
-
      void TQGroupBox::addSpace ( int size )
-
      
-Adds an empty cell at the next free position. If size is
-greater than 0, the empty cell takes size to be its fixed width
-(if orientation() is Horizontal) or height (if orientation() is
-Vertical).
-
       Use this method to separate the widgets in the group box or to
-skip the next free cell. For performance reasons, call this method
-after calling setColumnLayout() or by changing the TQGroupBox::columns or TQGroupBox::orientation properties. It is
-generally a good idea to call these methods first (if needed at
-all), and insert the widgets and spaces afterwards.
-
-
      int TQGroupBox::alignment () const
-
      Returns the alignment of the group box title.
-See the "alignment" property for details.
-
      int TQGroupBox::columns () const
-
      Returns the number of columns or rows (depending on TQGroupBox::orientation) in the group box.
-See the "columns" property for details.
-
      int TQGroupBox::insideMargin () const
-
      
-Returns the width of the empty space between the items in the
-group and the frame of the group.
-
       Only applies if the group box has a defined orientation.
-
       The default is usually 11, by may vary depending on the platform
-and style.
-
       
      See also setInsideMargin() and orientation.
-
-
      int TQGroupBox::insideSpacing () const
-
      
-Returns the width of the empty space between each of the items
-in the group.
-
       Only applies if the group box has a defined orientation.
-
       The default is usually 5, by may vary depending on the platform
-and style.
-
       
      See also setInsideSpacing() and orientation.
-
-
      bool TQGroupBox::isCheckable () const
-
      Returns TRUE if the group box has a checkbox in its title; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "checkable" property for details.
-
      bool TQGroupBox::isChecked () const
-
      Returns TRUE if the group box's checkbox is checked; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "checked" property for details.
-
      bool TQGroupBox::isFlat () const
-
      Returns TRUE if the group box is painted flat or has a frame; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "flat" property for details.
-
      Orientation TQGroupBox::orientation () const
-
      Returns the group box's orientation.
-See the "orientation" property for details.
-
      void TQGroupBox::setAlignment ( int ) [virtual]
-
      Sets the alignment of the group box title.
-See the "alignment" property for details.
-
      void TQGroupBox::setCheckable ( bool b )
-
      Sets whether the group box has a checkbox in its title to b.
-See the "checkable" property for details.
-
      void TQGroupBox::setChecked ( bool b ) [slot]
-
      Sets whether the group box's checkbox is checked to b.
-See the "checked" property for details.
-
      void TQGroupBox::setColumnLayout ( int strips, Orientation direction ) [virtual]
-
      
-Changes the layout of the group box. This function is only useful
-in combination with the default constructor that does not take any
-layout information. This function will put all existing children
-in the new layout. It is not good TQt programming style to call
-this function after children have been inserted. Sets the number
-of columns or rows to be strips, depending on direction.
-
       
      See also orientation and columns.
-
-
      Example: chart/optionsform.cpp.
-
      void TQGroupBox::setColumns ( int )
-
      Sets the number of columns or rows (depending on TQGroupBox::orientation) in the group box.
-See the "columns" property for details.
-
      void TQGroupBox::setFlat ( bool b )
-
      Sets whether the group box is painted flat or has a frame to b.
-See the "flat" property for details.
-
      void TQGroupBox::setInsideMargin ( int m )
-
      
-Sets the the width of the inside margin to m pixels.
-
       
      See also insideMargin().
-
-
      void TQGroupBox::setInsideSpacing ( int s )
-
      
-Sets the width of the empty space between each of the items in
-the group to s pixels.
-
       
      See also insideSpacing().
-
-
      void TQGroupBox::setOrientation ( Orientation )
-
      Sets the group box's orientation.
-See the "orientation" property for details.
-
      void TQGroupBox::setTitle ( const TQString & ) [virtual]
-
      Sets the group box title text.
-See the "title" property for details.
-
      TQString TQGroupBox::title () const
-
      Returns the group box title text.
-See the "title" property for details.
-
      void TQGroupBox::toggled ( bool on ) [signal]
-
      
-
-
       If the group box has a check box (see isCheckable()) this signal
-is emitted when the check box is toggled. on is TRUE if the check
-box is checked; otherwise it is FALSE.
-
-
      Property Documentation
      
-
      Alignment alignment
      
-
      This property holds the alignment of the group box title.
-
      The title is always placed on the upper frame line. The horizontal
-alignment can be specified by the alignment parameter.
-
       The alignment is one of the following flags:
-
        
-
      •  AlignAuto aligns the title according to the language,
-usually to the left.
-
      •  AlignLeft aligns the title text to the left.
-
      •  AlignRight aligns the title text to the right.
-
      •  AlignHCenter aligns the title text centered.
-
      
-
       The default alignment is AlignAuto.
-
       
      See also TQt::AlignmentFlags.
-
-
      Set this property's value with setAlignment() and get this property's value with alignment().
-
      bool checkable
      
-
      This property holds whether the group box has a checkbox in its title.
-
      If this property is TRUE, the group box has a checkbox. If the
-checkbox is checked (which is the default), the group box's
-children are enabled.
-
       setCheckable() controls whether or not the group box has a
-checkbox, and isCheckable() controls whether the checkbox is
-checked or not.
-
-
      Set this property's value with setCheckable() and get this property's value with isCheckable().
-
      bool checked
      
-
      This property holds whether the group box's checkbox is checked.
-
      If the group box has a check box (see isCheckable()), and the
-check box is checked (see isChecked()), the group box's children
-are enabled. If the checkbox is unchecked the children are
-disabled.
-
-
      Set this property's value with setChecked() and get this property's value with isChecked().
-
      int columns
      
-
      This property holds the number of columns or rows (depending on TQGroupBox::orientation) in the group box.
-
      Usually it is not a good idea to set this property because it is
-slow (it does a complete layout). It is best to set the number
-of columns directly in the constructor.
-
-
      Set this property's value with setColumns() and get this property's value with columns().
-
      bool flat
      
-
      This property holds whether the group box is painted flat or has a frame.
-
      By default a group box has a surrounding frame, with the title
-being placed on the upper frame line. In flat mode the right, left
-and bottom frame lines are omitted, and only the thin line at the
-top is drawn.
-
       
      See also title.
-
-
      Set this property's value with setFlat() and get this property's value with isFlat().
-
      Orientation orientation
      
-
      This property holds the group box's orientation.
-
      A horizontal group box arranges it's children in columns, while a
-vertical group box arranges them in rows.
-
       Usually it is not a good idea to set this property because it is
-slow (it does a complete layout). It is better to set the
-orientation directly in the constructor.
-
-
      Set this property's value with setOrientation() and get this property's value with orientation().
-
      TQString title
      
-
      This property holds the group box title text.
-
      The group box title text will have a focus-change keyboard
-accelerator if the title contains &, followed by a letter.
-
       
      -        g->setTitle( "&User information" );
-    
      
- 
-This produces "User information"; Alt+U moves the keyboard focus to the group box.
-
       There is no default title text.
-
-
      Set this property's value with setTitle() and get this property's value with title().
-
-
      
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
      
-
-
      Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
      TQt 3.3.8
      
-
      
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qguardedptr-h.html b/doc/html/qguardedptr-h.html
index d35889104..375532fe9 100644
--- a/doc/html/qguardedptr-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qguardedptr-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qguardedptr.h Include File
+ntqguardedptr.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
      
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
      TQGuardedPtr Class Reference
      
-
-
      The TQGuardedPtr class is a template class that provides guarded pointers to TQObjects.
-More...
-
      #include <qguardedptr.h>
-
      List of all member functions.
-
      Public Members
      
-
-
      Detailed Description
      
-
-
-The TQGuardedPtr class is a template class that provides guarded pointers to TQObjects.
-
       
-
-
       A guarded pointer, TQGuardedPtr<X>, behaves like a normal C++
-pointer X*, except that it is automatically set to 0 when
-the referenced object is destroyed (unlike normal C++ pointers,
-which become "dangling pointers" in such cases). X must be a
-subclass of TQObject.
-
       Guarded pointers are useful whenever you need to store a pointer
-to a TQObject that is owned by someone else and therefore might be
-destroyed while you still hold a reference to it. You can safely
-test the pointer for validity.
-
       Example:
-
      -        TQGuardedPtr<TQLabel> label = new TQLabel( 0, "label" );
-        label->setText( "I like guarded pointers" );
-
-        delete (TQLabel*) label; // simulate somebody destroying the label
-
-        if ( label)
-            label->show();
-        else
-            qDebug("The label has been destroyed");
-    
      
- 
-
       The program will output The label has been destroyed rather
-than dereferencing an invalid address in label->show().
-
       The functions and operators available with a TQGuardedPtr are the
-same as those available with a normal unguarded pointer, except
-the pointer arithmetic operators (++, --, -, and +), which are
-normally used only with arrays of objects. Use them like normal
-pointers and you will not need to read this class documentation.
-
       For creating guarded pointers, you can construct or assign to them
-from an X* or from another guarded pointer of the same type. You
-can compare them with each other using operator==() and
-operator!=(), or test for 0 with isNull(). And you can dereference
-them using either the *x or the x->member notation.
-
       A guarded pointer will automatically cast to an X*, so you can
-freely mix guarded and unguarded pointers. This means that if you
-have a TQGuardedPtr, you can pass it to a function that
-requires a TQWidget*. For this reason, it is of little value to
-declare functions to take a TQGuardedPtr as a parameter; just use
-normal pointers. Use a TQGuardedPtr when you are storing a pointer
-over time.
-
       Note again that class X must inherit TQObject, or a compilation
-or link error will result.
-
      See also Object Model.
-
-
      Member Function Documentation
      
-
      TQGuardedPtr::TQGuardedPtr ()
-
      
-
-
       Constructs a 0 guarded pointer.
-
       
      See also isNull().
-
-
      TQGuardedPtr::TQGuardedPtr ( T * p )
-
      
-
-
       Constructs a guarded pointer that points to same object as p
-points to.
-
-
      TQGuardedPtr::TQGuardedPtr ( const TQGuardedPtr<T> & p )
-
      
-
-
       Copy one guarded pointer from another. The constructed guarded
-pointer points to the same object that p points to (which may
-be 0).
-
-
      TQGuardedPtr::~TQGuardedPtr ()
-
      
-
-
       Destroys the guarded pointer. Just like a normal pointer,
-destroying a guarded pointer does not destroy the object being
-pointed to.
-
-
      bool TQGuardedPtr::isNull () const
-
      
-
-
       Returns TRUE if the referenced object has been destroyed or if
-there is no referenced object; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
      TQGuardedPtr::operator T * () const
-
      
-
-
       Cast operator; implements pointer semantics. Because of this
-function you can pass a TQGuardedPtr<X> to a function where an X*
-is required.
-
-
      bool TQGuardedPtr::operator!= ( const TQGuardedPtr<T> & p ) const
-
      
-
-
       Inequality operator; implements pointer semantics, the negation of
-operator==(). Returns TRUE if p and this guarded pointer are
-not pointing to the same object; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
      T & TQGuardedPtr::operator* () const
-
      
-
-
       Dereference operator; implements pointer semantics. Just use this
-operator as you would with a normal C++ pointer.
-
-
      T * TQGuardedPtr::operator-> () const
-
      
-
-
       Overloaded arrow operator; implements pointer semantics. Just use
-this operator as you would with a normal C++ pointer.
-
-
      TQGuardedPtr<T> & TQGuardedPtr::operator= ( const TQGuardedPtr<T> & p )
-
      
-
-
       Assignment operator. This guarded pointer then points to the same
-object as p points to.
-
-
      TQGuardedPtr<T> & TQGuardedPtr::operator= ( T * p )
-
      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
       Assignment operator. This guarded pointer then points to the same
-object as p points to.
-
-
      bool TQGuardedPtr::operator== ( const TQGuardedPtr<T> & p ) const
-
      
-
-
       Equality operator; implements traditional pointer semantics.
-Returns TRUE if both p and this guarded pointer are 0, or if
-both p and this pointer point to the same object; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
       
      See also operator!=().
-
-
-
      
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
      
-
-
      Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
      TQt 3.3.8
      
-
      
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qhbox-h.html b/doc/html/qhbox-h.html
index f83b4ddbe..971aaf393 100644
--- a/doc/html/qhbox-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qhbox-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qhbox.h Include File
+ntqhbox.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
      
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
      TQHBox Class Reference
      
-
-
      The TQHBox widget provides horizontal geometry management
-for its child widgets.
-More...
-
      #include <qhbox.h>
-
      Inherits TQFrame.
-
      Inherited by TQVBox.
-
      List of all member functions.
-
      Public Members
      
-
        
-
      • TQHBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
        • 
-
      • void setSpacing ( int space )
        • 
-
      • bool setStretchFactor ( TQWidget * w, int stretch )
        • 
-
      
-
      Protected Members
      
-
        
-
      • TQHBox ( bool horizontal, TQWidget * parent, const char * name, WFlags f = 0 )
        • 
-
      
-
      Detailed Description
      
-
-
-The TQHBox widget provides horizontal geometry management
-for its child widgets.
-
       
-
-
-
       All the horizontal box's child widgets will be placed alongside
-each other and sized according to their sizeHint()s.
-
       Use setMargin() to add space around the edges, and use
-setSpacing() to add space between the widgets. Use
-setStretchFactor() if you want the widgets to be different sizes
-in proportion to one another. (See Layouts for more information on stretch factors.)
-
       
      TQHBox
       
-
       
      See also TQHBoxLayout, TQVBox, TQGrid, Widget Appearance and Style, Layout Management, and Organizers.
-
-
      Member Function Documentation
      
-
      TQHBox::TQHBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
-
      
-Constructs an hbox widget with parent parent, called name.
-The parent, name and widget flags, f, are passed to the TQFrame
-constructor.
-
-
      TQHBox::TQHBox ( bool horizontal, TQWidget * parent, const char * name, WFlags f = 0 ) [protected]
-
      
-Constructs a horizontal hbox if horizontal is TRUE, otherwise
-constructs a vertical hbox (also known as a vbox).
-
       This constructor is provided for the TQVBox class. You should never
-need to use it directly.
-
       The parent, name and widget flags, f, are passed to the
-TQFrame constructor.
-
-
      void TQHBox::setSpacing ( int space )
-
      
-Sets the spacing between the child widgets to space.
-
-
      Examples: i18n/mywidget.cpp, listboxcombo/listboxcombo.cpp, qdir/qdir.cpp, tabdialog/tabdialog.cpp, wizard/wizard.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
-
      bool TQHBox::setStretchFactor ( TQWidget * w, int stretch )
-
      
-Sets the stretch factor of widget w to stretch. Returns TRUE if
-w is found. Otherwise returns FALSE.
-
       
      See also TQBoxLayout::setStretchFactor() and Layouts.
-
-
-
      
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
      
-
-
      Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
      TQt 3.3.8
      
-
      
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qhboxlayout-members.html b/doc/html/qhboxlayout-members.html
index 0d0ee415d..f276ea420 100644
--- a/doc/html/qhboxlayout-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qhboxlayout-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -37,9 +37,9 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qhboxlayout.html b/doc/html/qhboxlayout.html
index 3b1b9d692..ebc30dc34 100644
--- a/doc/html/qhboxlayout.html
+++ b/doc/html/qhboxlayout.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
      The TQHBoxLayout class lines up widgets horizontally.
 More...
-
      #include <qlayout.h>
+
      #include <ntqlayout.h>
 
      Inherits TQBoxLayout.
 
      List of all member functions.
 
      Public Members
      
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ The TQHBoxLayout class lines up widgets horizontally.
 
       The simplest use of the class is like this:
 
               TQBoxLayout * l = new TQHBoxLayout( widget );
-        l->setAutoAdd( TRUE );
+        l->setAutoAdd( TRUE );
         new TQSomeWidget( widget );
         new TQSomeOtherWidget( widget );
         new TQAnotherWidget( widget );
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ The TQHBoxLayout class lines up widgets horizontally.
 
       
      See also TQVBoxLayout, TQGridLayout, the Layout overview, Widget Appearance and Style, and Layout Management.
 
 
      Member Function Documentation
      
-
      TQHBoxLayout::TQHBoxLayout ( TQWidget * parent, int margin = 0, int spacing = -1, const char * name = 0 )
+
      TQHBoxLayout::TQHBoxLayout ( TQWidget * parent, int margin = 0, int spacing = -1, const char * name = 0 )
 
      
 Constructs a new top-level horizontal box called name, with
 parent parent.
@@ -81,13 +81,13 @@ widget and its managed children. The spacing is the default
 number of pixels between neighboring children. If spacing is -1
 the value of margin is used for spacing.
 
-
      TQHBoxLayout::TQHBoxLayout ( TQLayout * parentLayout, int spacing = -1, const char * name = 0 )
+
      TQHBoxLayout::TQHBoxLayout ( TQLayout * parentLayout, int spacing = -1, const char * name = 0 )
 
      
 Constructs a new horizontal box called name name and adds it to
 parentLayout.
 
       The spacing is the default number of pixels between neighboring
 children. If spacing is -1, this TQHBoxLayout will inherit its
-parent's spacing().
+parent's spacing().
 
 
      TQHBoxLayout::TQHBoxLayout ( int spacing = -1, const char * name = 0 )
 
      
@@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Constructs a new horizontal box called name name. You must add
 it to another layout.
 
       The spacing is the default number of pixels between neighboring
 children. If spacing is -1, this TQHBoxLayout will inherit its
-parent's spacing().
+parent's spacing().
 
 
      TQHBoxLayout::~TQHBoxLayout ()
 
      
diff --git a/doc/html/qhbuttongroup-h.html b/doc/html/qhbuttongroup-h.html
index e79ed3de1..fe10b65fa 100644
--- a/doc/html/qhbuttongroup-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qhbuttongroup-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qhbuttongroup.h Include File
+ntqhbuttongroup.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
      
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
      TQHButtonGroup Class Reference
      
-
-
      The TQHButtonGroup widget organizes TQButton widgets in a
-group with one horizontal row.
-More...
-
      #include <qhbuttongroup.h>
-
      Inherits TQButtonGroup.
-
      List of all member functions.
-
      Public Members
      
-
-
      Detailed Description
      
-
-
-The TQHButtonGroup widget organizes TQButton widgets in a
-group with one horizontal row.
-
       
-
-
-
       TQHButtonGroup is a convenience class that offers a thin layer on
-top of TQButtonGroup. From a layout point of view it is effectively
-a TQHBox that offers a frame with a title and is specifically
-designed for buttons. From a functionality point of view it is a
-TQButtonGroup.
-
       
      TQButtonGroup
       
-
       
      See also TQVButtonGroup, Widget Appearance and Style, Layout Management, and Organizers.
-
-
      Member Function Documentation
      
-
      TQHButtonGroup::TQHButtonGroup ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
      
-Constructs a horizontal button group with no title.
-
       The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
-
      TQHButtonGroup::TQHButtonGroup ( const TQString & title, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
      
-Constructs a horizontal button group with the title title.
-
       The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
-
      TQHButtonGroup::~TQHButtonGroup ()
-
      
-Destroys the horizontal button group, deleting its child widgets.
-
-
-
      
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
      
-
-
      Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
      TQt 3.3.8
      
-
      
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qheader-h.html b/doc/html/qheader-h.html
index 3fecd36e5..95c765a0d 100644
--- a/doc/html/qheader-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qheader-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qheader.h Include File
+ntqheader.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
      
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
      TQHeader Class Reference
      
-
-
      The TQHeader class provides a header row or column, e.g. for
-tables and listviews.
-More...
-
      #include <qheader.h>
-
      Inherits TQWidget.
-
      List of all member functions.
-
      Public Members
      
-
-
      Public Slots
      
-
-
      Signals
      
-
        
-
      • void clicked ( int section )
        • 
-
      • void pressed ( int section )
        • 
-
      • void released ( int section )
        • 
-
      • void sizeChange ( int section, int oldSize, int newSize )
        • 
-
      • void indexChange ( int section, int fromIndex, int toIndex )
        • 
-
      • void sectionClicked ( int index )  (obsolete)
        • 
-
      • void moved ( int fromIndex, int toIndex )  (obsolete)
        • 
-
      • void sectionHandleDoubleClicked ( int section )
        • 
-
      
-
      Properties
      
-
        
-
      • int count - the number of sections in the header  (read only)
        • 
-
      • bool moving - whether the header sections can be moved
        • 
-
      • int offset - the header's left-most (or top-most) visible pixel
        • 
-
      • Orientation orientation - the header's orientation
        • 
-
      • bool stretching - whether the header sections always take up the full width (or height) of the header
        • 
-
      • bool tracking - whether the sizeChange() signal is emitted continuously
        • 
-
      
-
      Protected Members
      
-
        
-
      • TQRect sRect ( int index )
        • 
-
      • virtual void paintSection ( TQPainter * p, int index, const TQRect & fr )
        • 
-
      • virtual void paintSectionLabel ( TQPainter * p, int index, const TQRect & fr )
        • 
-
      
-
      Detailed Description
      
-
-
-The TQHeader class provides a header row or column, e.g. for
-tables and listviews.
-
       
-
       This class provides a header, e.g. a vertical header to display
-row labels, or a horizontal header to display column labels. It is
-used by TQTable and TQListView for example.
-
       A header is composed of one or more sections, each of which can
-display a text label and an iconset. A sort
-indicator (an arrow) can also be displayed using
-setSortIndicator().
-
       Sections are added with addLabel() and removed with removeLabel().
-The label and iconset are set in addLabel() and can be changed
-later with setLabel(). Use count() to retrieve the number of
-sections in the header.
-
       The orientation of the header is set with setOrientation(). If
-setStretchEnabled() is TRUE, the sections will expand to take up
-the full width (height for vertical headers) of the header. The
-user can resize the sections manually if setResizeEnabled() is
-TRUE. Call adjustHeaderSize() to have the sections resize to
-occupy the full width (or height).
-
       A section can be moved with moveSection(). If setMovingEnabled()
-is TRUE (the default)the user may drag a section from one position
-to another. If a section is moved, the index positions at which
-sections were added (with addLabel()), may not be the same after the
-move. You don't have to worry about this in practice because the
-TQHeader API works in terms of section numbers, so it doesn't matter
-where a particular section has been moved to.
-
       If you want the current index position of a section call
-mapToIndex() giving it the section number. (This is the number
-returned by the addLabel() call which created the section.) If you
-want to get the section number of a section at a particular index
-position call mapToSection() giving it the index number.
-
       Here's an example to clarify mapToSection() and mapToIndex():
-
       
      
-
        Index positions
-
       0 1 2 3
-
        Original section ordering
-
       Sect 0 Sect 1 Sect 2 Sect 3
-
        Ordering after the user moves a section
-
       Sect 0 Sect 2 Sect 3 Sect 1
-
      
-
       
      
-
       k mapToSection(k) mapToIndex(k)
-
       0 0 0
-
       1 2 3
-
       2 3 1
-
       3 1 2
-
      
-
       In the example above, if we wanted to find out which section is at
-index position 3 we'd call mapToSection(3) and get a section
-number of 1 since section 1 was moved. Similarly, if we wanted to
-know which index position section 2 occupied we'd call
-mapToIndex(2) and get an index of 1.
-
       TQHeader provides the clicked(), pressed() and released() signals.
-If the user changes the size of a section, the sizeChange() signal
-is emitted. If you want to have a sizeChange() signal emitted
-continuously whilst the user is resizing (rather than just after
-the resizing is finished), use setTracking(). If the user moves a
-section the indexChange() signal is emitted.
-
        
-
       
      See also TQListView, TQTable, and Advanced Widgets.
-
-
      Member Function Documentation
      
-
      TQHeader::TQHeader ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
      
-Constructs a horizontal header called name, with parent parent.
-
-
      TQHeader::TQHeader ( int n, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
      
-Constructs a horizontal header called name, with n sections
-and parent parent.
-
-
      TQHeader::~TQHeader ()
-
      
-Destroys the header and all its sections.
-
-
      int TQHeader::addLabel ( const TQString & s, int size = -1 )
-
      
-Adds a new section with label text s. Returns the index
-position where the section was added (at the right for horizontal
-headers, at the bottom for vertical headers). The section's width
-is set to size. If size < 0, an appropriate size for the
-text s is chosen.
-
-
      int TQHeader::addLabel ( const TQIconSet & iconset, const TQString & s, int size = -1 )
-
      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
       Adds a new section with iconset iconset and label text s.
-Returns the index position where the section was added (at the
-right for horizontal headers, at the bottom for vertical headers).
-The section's width is set to size, unless size is negative in
-which case the size is calculated taking account of the size of
-the text.
-
-
      void TQHeader::adjustHeaderSize ()
-
      
-
-
       Adjusts the size of the sections to fit the size of the header as
-completely as possible. Only sections for which isStretchEnabled()
-is TRUE will be resized.
-
-
      int TQHeader::cellAt ( int pos ) const
-
       
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
       Use sectionAt() instead.
-
       Returns the index at which the section is displayed, which contains
-pos in widget coordinates, or -1 if pos is outside the header
-sections.
-
-
      int TQHeader::cellPos ( int i ) const
-
      
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
       Use sectionPos() instead.
-
       Returns the position in pixels of the section that is displayed at the
-index i. The  position is measured from the start of the header.
-
-
      int TQHeader::cellSize ( int i ) const
-
       
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
       Use sectionSize() instead.
-
       Returns the size in pixels of the section that is displayed at
-the index i.
-
-
      void TQHeader::clicked ( int section ) [signal]
-
      
-
-
       If isClickEnabled() is TRUE, this signal is emitted when the user
-clicks section section.
-
       
      See also pressed() and released().
-
-
      int TQHeader::count () const
-
      Returns the number of sections in the header.
-See the "count" property for details.
-
      int TQHeader::headerWidth () const
-
      
-Returns the total width of all the header columns.
-
-
      TQIconSet * TQHeader::iconSet ( int section ) const
-
      
-Returns the icon set for section section. If the section does
-not exist, 0 is returned.
-
-
      void TQHeader::indexChange ( int section, int fromIndex, int toIndex ) [signal]
-
      
-
-
       This signal is emitted when the user moves section section from
-index position fromIndex, to index position toIndex.
-
-
      bool TQHeader::isClickEnabled ( int section = -1 ) const
-
      
-Returns TRUE if section section is clickable; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
       If section is out of range (negative or larger than count() -
-1): returns TRUE if all sections are clickable; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
       
      See also setClickEnabled().
-
-
      bool TQHeader::isMovingEnabled () const
-
      Returns TRUE if the header sections can be moved; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "moving" property for details.
-
      bool TQHeader::isResizeEnabled ( int section = -1 ) const
-
      
-Returns TRUE if section section is resizeable; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
       If section is -1 then this function applies to all sections,
-i.e. returns TRUE if all sections are resizeable; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
       
      See also setResizeEnabled().
-
-
      bool TQHeader::isStretchEnabled () const
-
      Returns TRUE if the header sections always take up the full width (or height) of the header; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "stretching" property for details.
-
      bool TQHeader::isStretchEnabled ( int section ) const
-
      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
       Returns TRUE if section section will resize to take up the full
-width (or height) of the header; otherwise returns FALSE. If at
-least one section has stretch enabled the sections will always
-take up the full width of the header.
-
       
      See also setStretchEnabled().
-
-
      TQString TQHeader::label ( int section ) const
-
      
-Returns the text for section section. If the section does not
-exist, a TQString::null is returned.
-
-
      Example: helpsystem/tooltip.cpp.
-
      int TQHeader::mapToActual ( int l ) const
-
      
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
       Use mapToIndex() instead.
-
       Translates from logical index l to actual index (index at which the section l is displayed) .
-Returns -1 if l is outside the legal range.
-
       
      See also mapToLogical().
-
-
      int TQHeader::mapToIndex ( int section ) const
-
      
-Returns the index position corresponding to the specified section number.
-
       Warning: If TQTable is used to move header sections as a result of user
-interaction, the mapping exposed by this function will not reflect the
-order of the headers in the table; i.e., TQTable does not call moveSection()
-to move sections but handles move operations internally.
-
       
      See also mapToSection().
-
-
      int TQHeader::mapToLogical ( int a ) const
-
      
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
       Use mapToSection() instead.
-
       Translates from actual index a (index at which the section is displayed)  to
-logical index of the section.  Returns -1 if a is outside the legal range.
-
       
      See also mapToActual().
-
-
      int TQHeader::mapToSection ( int index ) const
-
      
-Returns the number of the section that corresponds to the specified index.
-
       Warning: If TQTable is used to move header sections as a result of user
-interaction, the mapping exposed by this function will not reflect the
-order of the headers in the table; i.e., TQTable does not call moveSection()
-to move sections but handles move operations internally.
-
       
      See also mapToIndex().
-
-
      void TQHeader::moveCell ( int fromIdx, int toIdx ) [virtual]
-
      
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
       Use moveSection() instead.
-
       Moves the section that is currently displayed at index fromIdx
-to index toIdx.
-
-
      void TQHeader::moveSection ( int section, int toIndex )
-
      
-Moves section section to index position toIndex.
-
-
      void TQHeader::moved ( int fromIndex, int toIndex ) [signal]
-
      
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
       Use indexChange() instead.
-
       This signal is emitted when the user has moved the section which
-is displayed at the index fromIndex to the index toIndex.
-
-
      int TQHeader::offset () const
-
      Returns the header's left-most (or top-most) visible pixel.
-See the "offset" property for details.
-
      Orientation TQHeader::orientation () const
-
      Returns the header's orientation.
-See the "orientation" property for details.
-
      void TQHeader::paintSection ( TQPainter * p, int index, const TQRect & fr ) [virtual protected]
-
      
-Paints the section at position index, inside rectangle fr
-(which uses widget coordinates) using painter p.
-
       Calls paintSectionLabel().
-
-
      void TQHeader::paintSectionLabel ( TQPainter * p, int index, const TQRect & fr ) [virtual protected]
-
      
-Paints the label of the section at position index, inside
-rectangle fr (which uses widget coordinates) using painter p.
-
       Called by paintSection()
-
-
      void TQHeader::pressed ( int section ) [signal]
-
      
-
-
       This signal is emitted when the user presses section section
-down.
-
       
      See also released().
-
-
      void TQHeader::released ( int section ) [signal]
-
      
-
-
       This signal is emitted when section section is released.
-
       
      See also pressed().
-
-
      void TQHeader::removeLabel ( int section )
-
      
-Removes section section. If the section does not exist, nothing
-happens.
-
-
      void TQHeader::resizeSection ( int section, int s )
-
      
-Resizes section section to s pixels wide (or high).
-
-
      TQRect TQHeader::sRect ( int index ) [protected]
-
      
-Returns the rectangle covered by the section at index index.
-
-
      int TQHeader::sectionAt ( int pos ) const
-
      
-Returns the index of the section which contains the position pos given in pixels from the left (or top).
-
       
      See also offset.
-
-
      Example: helpsystem/tooltip.cpp.
-
      void TQHeader::sectionClicked ( int index ) [signal]
-
      
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
       Use clicked() instead.
-
       This signal is emitted when a part of the header is clicked. index is the index at which the section is displayed.
-
       In a list view this signal would typically be connected to a slot
-that sorts the specified column (or row).
-
-
      void TQHeader::sectionHandleDoubleClicked ( int section ) [signal]
-
      
-
-
       This signal is emitted when the user doubleclicks on the edge
-(handle) of section section.
-
-
      int TQHeader::sectionPos ( int section ) const
-
      
-Returns the position (in pixels) at which the section starts.
-
       
      See also offset.
-
-
      TQRect TQHeader::sectionRect ( int section ) const
-
      
-Returns the rectangle covered by section section.
-
-
      Example: helpsystem/tooltip.cpp.
-
      int TQHeader::sectionSize ( int section ) const
-
      
-Returns the width (or height) of the section in pixels.
-
-
      void TQHeader::setCellSize ( int section, int s ) [virtual]
-
      
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
       Use resizeSection() instead.
-
       Sets the size of the section section to s pixels.
-
       Warning: does not repaint or send out signals
-
-
      void TQHeader::setClickEnabled ( bool enable, int section = -1 ) [virtual]
-
      
-If enable is TRUE, any clicks on section section will result
-in clicked() signals being emitted; otherwise the section will
-ignore clicks.
-
       If section is -1 (the default) then the enable value is set
-for all existing sections and will be applied to any new sections
-that are added.
-
       
      See also moving and setResizeEnabled().
-
-
      void TQHeader::setLabel ( int section, const TQString & s, int size = -1 ) [virtual]
-
      
-Sets the text of section section to s. The section's width
-is set to size if size >= 0; otherwise it is left
-unchanged. Any icon set that has been set for this section remains
-unchanged.
-
       If the section does not exist, nothing happens.
-
-
      Examples: chart/setdataform.cpp and table/small-table-demo/main.cpp.
-
      void TQHeader::setLabel ( int section, const TQIconSet & iconset, const TQString & s, int size = -1 ) [virtual]
-
      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
       Sets the icon for section section to iconset and the text to
-s. The section's width is set to size if size >= 0;
-otherwise it is left unchanged.
-
       If the section does not exist, nothing happens.
-
-
      void TQHeader::setMovingEnabled ( bool ) [virtual]
-
      Sets whether the header sections can be moved.
-See the "moving" property for details.
-
      void TQHeader::setOffset ( int pos ) [virtual slot]
-
      Sets the header's left-most (or top-most) visible pixel to pos.
-See the "offset" property for details.
-
      void TQHeader::setOrientation ( Orientation ) [virtual]
-
      Sets the header's orientation.
-See the "orientation" property for details.
-
      void TQHeader::setResizeEnabled ( bool enable, int section = -1 ) [virtual]
-
      
-If enable is TRUE the user may resize section section;
-otherwise the section may not be manually resized.
-
       If section is negative (the default) then the enable value
-is set for all existing sections and will be applied to any new
-sections that are added.
-Example:
-
      -    // Allow resizing of all current and future sections
-    header->setResizeEnabled(TRUE);
-    // Disable resizing of section 3, (the fourth section added)
-    header->setResizeEnabled(FALSE, 3);
-    
      
- 
-
       If the user resizes a section, a sizeChange() signal is emitted.
-
       
      See also moving, setClickEnabled(), and tracking.
-
-
      void TQHeader::setSortIndicator ( int section, SortOrder order )
-
      
-
-
       Sets a sort indicator onto the specified section. The indicator's
-order is either Ascending or Descending.
-
       Only one section can show a sort indicator at any one time. If you
-don't want any section to show a sort indicator pass a section
-number of -1.
-
       
      See also sortIndicatorSection() and sortIndicatorOrder().
-
-
      void TQHeader::setSortIndicator ( int section, bool ascending = TRUE )
-
       This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
       This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
       Use the other overload instead.
-
-
      void TQHeader::setStretchEnabled ( bool b, int section ) [virtual]
-
      
-If b is TRUE, section section will be resized when the
-header is resized, so that the sections take up the full width (or
-height for vertical headers) of the header; otherwise section section will be set to be unstretchable and will not resize when
-the header is resized.
-
       If section is -1, and if b is TRUE, then all sections will
-be resized equally when the header is resized so that they take up
-the full width (or height for vertical headers) of the header;
-otherwise all the sections will be set to be unstretchable and
-will not resize when the header is resized.
-
       
      See also adjustHeaderSize().
-
-
      void TQHeader::setStretchEnabled ( bool b )
-
      Sets whether the header sections always take up the full width (or height) of the header to b.
-See the "stretching" property for details.
-
      void TQHeader::setTracking ( bool enable ) [virtual]
-
      Sets whether the sizeChange() signal is emitted continuously to enable.
-See the "tracking" property for details.
-
      void TQHeader::sizeChange ( int section, int oldSize, int newSize ) [signal]
-
      
-
-
       This signal is emitted when the user has changed the size of a section from oldSize to newSize. This signal is typically
-connected to a slot that repaints the table or list that contains
-the header.
-
-
      SortOrder TQHeader::sortIndicatorOrder () const
-
      
-Returns the implied sort order of the TQHeaders sort indicator.
-
       
      See also setSortIndicator() and sortIndicatorSection().
-
-
      int TQHeader::sortIndicatorSection () const
-
      
-Returns the section showing the sort indicator or -1 if there is no sort indicator.
-
       
      See also setSortIndicator() and sortIndicatorOrder().
-
-
      bool TQHeader::tracking () const
-
      Returns TRUE if the sizeChange() signal is emitted continuously; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "tracking" property for details.
-
      Property Documentation
      
-
      int count
      
-
      This property holds the number of sections in the header.
-
      
-
      Get this property's value with count().
-
      bool moving
      
-
      This property holds whether the header sections can be moved.
-
      If this property is TRUE (the default) the user can move sections.
-If the user moves a section the indexChange() signal is emitted.
-
       
      See also setClickEnabled() and setResizeEnabled().
-
-
      Set this property's value with setMovingEnabled() and get this property's value with isMovingEnabled().
-
      int offset
      
-
      This property holds the header's left-most (or top-most) visible pixel.
-
      Setting this property will scroll the header so that offset
-becomes the left-most (or top-most for vertical headers) visible
-pixel.
-
-
      Set this property's value with setOffset() and get this property's value with offset().
-
      Orientation orientation
      
-
      This property holds the header's orientation.
-
      The orientation is either Vertical or Horizontal (the
-default).
-
       Call setOrientation() before adding labels if you don't provide a
-size parameter otherwise the sizes will be incorrect.
-
-
      Set this property's value with setOrientation() and get this property's value with orientation().
-
      bool stretching
      
-
      This property holds whether the header sections always take up the full width (or height) of the header.
-
      
-
      Set this property's value with setStretchEnabled() and get this property's value with isStretchEnabled().
-
      bool tracking
      
-
      This property holds whether the sizeChange() signal is emitted continuously.
-
      If tracking is on, the sizeChange() signal is emitted continuously
-while the mouse is moved (i.e. when the header is resized),
-otherwise it is only emitted when the mouse button is released at
-the end of resizing.
-
       Tracking defaults to FALSE.
-
-
      Set this property's value with setTracking() and get this property's value with tracking().
-
-
      
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
      
-
-
      Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
      TQt 3.3.8
      
-
      
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qhebrewcodec-members.html b/doc/html/qhebrewcodec-members.html
index bb8dcf5c0..1460f7750 100644
--- a/doc/html/qhebrewcodec-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qhebrewcodec-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -35,31 +35,31 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 TQHebrewCodec, including inherited members.
 
 
 
 
      
diff --git a/doc/html/qhebrewcodec.html b/doc/html/qhebrewcodec.html
index f3b9b7558..d36578d7a 100644
--- a/doc/html/qhebrewcodec.html
+++ b/doc/html/qhebrewcodec.html
@@ -35,8 +35,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 visually ordered Hebrew.
 More...
 
      All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
      
-
      #include <qrtlcodec.h>
-
      Inherits TQTextCodec.
+
      #include <ntqrtlcodec.h>
+
      Inherits TQTextCodec.
 
      List of all member functions.
 
      Public Members
      
 
        
@@ -80,9 +80,9 @@ codec, which assumes logical order for the 8-bit string.
 
        See also Internationalization with TQt.
 
 
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        TQCString TQHebrewCodec::fromUnicode ( const TQString & uc, int & lenInOut ) const [virtual]
+
        TQCString TQHebrewCodec::fromUnicode ( const TQString & uc, int & lenInOut ) const [virtual]
 
        
-Transforms the logically ordered TQString, uc, into a visually
+Transforms the logically ordered TQString, uc, into a visually
 ordered string in the 8859-8 encoding. TQt's bidi algorithm is used
 to perform this task. Note that newline characters affect the
 reordering, since reordering is done on a line by line basis.
@@ -95,12 +95,12 @@ the same paragraph.
 one input character is mapped to two output characters). The lenInOut argument specifies the number of TQChars that should be
 converted and is set to the number of characters returned.
 
-
        Reimplemented from TQTextCodec.
+
        Reimplemented from TQTextCodec.
 
        const char * TQHebrewCodec::mimeName () const [virtual]
 
        
 Returns the codec's mime name.
 
-
        Reimplemented from TQTextCodec.
+
        Reimplemented from TQTextCodec.
 
 
        
 This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
diff --git a/doc/html/qhgroupbox-h.html b/doc/html/qhgroupbox-h.html
index 01db686a4..0f88e13c4 100644
--- a/doc/html/qhgroupbox-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qhgroupbox-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qhgroupbox.h Include File
+ntqhgroupbox.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
        TQHGroupBox Class Reference
        
-
-
        The TQHGroupBox widget organizes widgets in a group with one
-horizontal row.
-More...
-
        #include <qhgroupbox.h>
-
        Inherits TQGroupBox.
-
        List of all member functions.
-
        Public Members
        
-
          
-
        • TQHGroupBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
          • 
-
        • TQHGroupBox ( const TQString & title, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
          • 
-
        • ~TQHGroupBox ()
          • 
-
        
-
        Detailed Description
        
-
-
-
         The TQHGroupBox widget organizes widgets in a group with one
-horizontal row.
-
         
-
-
-
         TQHGroupBox is a convenience class that offers a thin layer on top
-of TQGroupBox. Think of it as a TQHBox that offers a frame with a
-title.
-
         
        Group Boxes
         
-
         
        See also TQVGroupBox, Widget Appearance and Style, Layout Management, and Organizers.
-
-
        Member Function Documentation
        
-
        TQHGroupBox::TQHGroupBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
        
-Constructs a horizontal group box with no title.
-
         The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
-
        TQHGroupBox::TQHGroupBox ( const TQString & title, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
        
-Constructs a horizontal group box with the title title.
-
         The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
-
        TQHGroupBox::~TQHGroupBox ()
-
        
-Destroys the horizontal group box, deleting its child widgets.
-
-
-
        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
        
-
-
        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
        TQt 3.3.8
        
-
        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qhideevent-members.html b/doc/html/qhideevent-members.html
index 05fa84001..8ee910093 100644
--- a/doc/html/qhideevent-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qhideevent-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -36,8 +36,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
 
 
        
diff --git a/doc/html/qhideevent.html b/doc/html/qhideevent.html
index 288d37ec6..357e7b90c 100644
--- a/doc/html/qhideevent.html
+++ b/doc/html/qhideevent.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
        The TQHideEvent class provides an event which is sent after a widget is hidden.
 More...
-
        #include <qevent.h>
-
        Inherits TQEvent.
+
        #include <ntqevent.h>
+
        Inherits TQEvent.
 
        List of all member functions.
 
        Public Members
        
 
          
@@ -45,14 +45,14 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 The TQHideEvent class provides an event which is sent after a widget is hidden.
 
           
-
           This event is sent just before TQWidget::hide() returns, and also
+
           This event is sent just before TQWidget::hide() returns, and also
 when a top-level window has been hidden (iconified) by the user.
-
           If spontaneous() is TRUE the event originated outside the
+
           If spontaneous() is TRUE the event originated outside the
 application, i.e. the user hid the window using the window manager
 controls, either by iconifying the window or by switching to
 another virtual desktop where the window isn't visible. The window
 will become hidden but not withdrawn. If the window was iconified,
-TQWidget::isMinimized() returns TRUE.
+TQWidget::isMinimized() returns TRUE.
 
           
          See also TQShowEvent and Event Classes.
 
 
          Member Function Documentation
          
diff --git a/doc/html/qhostaddress-h.html b/doc/html/qhostaddress-h.html
index ffbed3a3c..3bb9fd0c3 100644
--- a/doc/html/qhostaddress-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qhostaddress-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qhostaddress.h Include File
+ntqhostaddress.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
          
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
          TQHostAddress Class Reference
          [network module]
          
-
-
          The TQHostAddress class provides an IP address.
-More...
-
          #include <qhostaddress.h>
-
          List of all member functions.
-
          Public Members
          
-
-
          Detailed Description
          
-
-
-The TQHostAddress class provides an IP address.
-
-
           
-
-
           This class contains an IP address in a platform and protocol
-independent manner. It stores both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses in a
-way that you can easily access on any platform.
-
           TQHostAddress is normally used with the classes TQSocket,
-TQServerSocket and TQSocketDevice to set up a server or to connect
-to a host.
-
           Host addresses may be set with setAddress() and retrieved with
-ip4Addr() or toString().
-
           
          See also TQSocket, TQServerSocket, TQSocketDevice, and Input/Output and Networking.
-
-
          Member Function Documentation
          
-
          TQHostAddress::TQHostAddress ()
-
          
-Creates a host address object with the IP address 0.0.0.0.
-
-
          TQHostAddress::TQHostAddress ( Q_UINT32 ip4Addr )
-
          
-Creates a host address object for the IPv4 address ip4Addr.
-
-
          TQHostAddress::TQHostAddress ( Q_UINT8 * ip6Addr )
-
          
-Creates a host address object with the specified IPv6 address.
-
           ip6Addr must be a 16 byte array in network byte order
-(high-order byte first).
-
-
          TQHostAddress::TQHostAddress ( const Q_IPV6ADDR & ip6Addr )
-
          
-Creates a host address object with the IPv6 address, ip6Addr.
-
-
          TQHostAddress::TQHostAddress ( const TQHostAddress & address )
-
          
-Creates a copy of address.
-
-
          TQHostAddress::~TQHostAddress () [virtual]
-
          
-Destroys the host address object.
-
-
          Q_UINT32 TQHostAddress::ip4Addr () const
-
          
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
           Use toIPv4Address() instead.
-
-
          bool TQHostAddress::isIPv4Address () const
-
          
-Returns TRUE if the host address represents an IPv4 address;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
          bool TQHostAddress::isIPv6Address () const
-
          
-Returns TRUE if the host address represents an IPv6 address;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
          bool TQHostAddress::isIp4Addr () const
-
          
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
           Use isIPv4Address() instead.
-
-
          bool TQHostAddress::isNull () const
-
          
-Returns TRUE if this host address is null (INADDR_ANY or in6addr_any). The
-default constructor creates a null address, and that address isn't valid
-for any particular host or interface.
-
-
          TQHostAddress & TQHostAddress::operator= ( const TQHostAddress & address )
-
          
-Assigns another host address object address to this object and
-returns a reference to this object.
-
-
          bool TQHostAddress::operator== ( const TQHostAddress & other ) const
-
          
-Returns TRUE if this host address is the same as other;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
          void TQHostAddress::setAddress ( Q_UINT32 ip4Addr )
-
          
-Set the IPv4 address specified by ip4Addr.
-
-
          void TQHostAddress::setAddress ( Q_UINT8 * ip6Addr )
-
          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
           Set the IPv6 address specified by ip6Addr.
-
           ip6Addr must be a 16 byte array in network byte order
-(high-order byte first).
-
-
          bool TQHostAddress::setAddress ( const TQString & address )
-
          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
           Sets the IPv4 or IPv6 address specified by the string
-representation address (e.g. "127.0.0.1"). Returns TRUE and
-sets the address if the address was successfully parsed; otherwise
-returns FALSE and leaves the address unchanged.
-
-
          Q_UINT32 TQHostAddress::toIPv4Address () const
-
          
-Returns the IPv4 address as a number.
-
           For example, if the address is 127.0.0.1, the returned value is
-2130706433 (i.e. 0x7f000001).
-
           This value is only valid when isIp4Addr() returns TRUE.
-
           
          See also toString().
-
-
          Q_IPV6ADDR TQHostAddress::toIPv6Address () const
-
          
-Returns the IPv6 address as a Q_IPV6ADDR structure. The structure
-consists of 16 unsigned characters.
-
           
          -        Q_IPV6ADDR addr = hostAddr.ip6Addr();
-        // addr.c[] contains 16 unsigned characters
-
-        for (int i = 0; i < 16; ++i) {
-            // process addr.c[i]
-        }
-    
          
- 
-
           This value is only valid when isIPv6Address() returns TRUE.
-
           
          See also toString().
-
-
          TQString TQHostAddress::toString () const
-
          
-Returns the address as a string.
-
           For example, if the address is the IPv4 address 127.0.0.1, the
-returned string is "127.0.0.1".
-
           
          See also ip4Addr().
-
-
-
          
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
          
-
-
          Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
          TQt 3.3.8
          
-
          
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qhttp-h.html b/doc/html/qhttp-h.html
index 3bb8b34ab..bd361bf82 100644
--- a/doc/html/qhttp-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qhttp-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qhttp.h Include File
+ntqhttp.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
          
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
          TQHttp Class Reference
          [network module]
          
-
-
          The TQHttp class provides an implementation of the HTTP protocol.
-More...
-
          #include <qhttp.h>
-
          Inherits TQNetworkProtocol.
-
          List of all member functions.
-
          Public Members
          
-
            
-
          • TQHttp ()
            • 
-
          • TQHttp ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
            • 
-
          • TQHttp ( const TQString & hostname, Q_UINT16 port = 80, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
            • 
-
          • virtual ~TQHttp ()
            • 
-
          • enum State { Unconnected, HostLookup, Connecting, Sending, Reading, Connected, Closing }
            • 
-
          • enum Error { NoError, UnknownError, HostNotFound, ConnectionRefused, UnexpectedClose, InvalidResponseHeader, WrongContentLength, Aborted }
            • 
-
          • int setHost ( const TQString & hostname, Q_UINT16 port = 80 )
            • 
-
          • int get ( const TQString & path, TQIODevice * to = 0 )
            • 
-
          • int post ( const TQString & path, TQIODevice * data, TQIODevice * to = 0 )
            • 
-
          • int post ( const TQString & path, const TQByteArray & data, TQIODevice * to = 0 )
            • 
-
          • int head ( const TQString & path )
            • 
-
          • int request ( const TQHttpRequestHeader & header, TQIODevice * data = 0, TQIODevice * to = 0 )
            • 
-
          • int request ( const TQHttpRequestHeader & header, const TQByteArray & data, TQIODevice * to = 0 )
            • 
-
          • int closeConnection ()
            • 
-
          • Q_ULONG bytesAvailable () const
            • 
-
          • Q_LONG readBlock ( char * data, Q_ULONG maxlen )
            • 
-
          • TQByteArray readAll ()
            • 
-
          • int currentId () const
            • 
-
          • TQIODevice * currentSourceDevice () const
            • 
-
          • TQIODevice * currentDestinationDevice () const
            • 
-
          • TQHttpRequestHeader currentRequest () const
            • 
-
          • bool hasPendingRequests () const
            • 
-
          • void clearPendingRequests ()
            • 
-
          • State state () const
            • 
-
          • Error error () const
            • 
-
          • TQString errorString () const
            • 
-
          
-
          Public Slots
          
-
-
          Signals
          
-
-
          Detailed Description
          
-
-
-The TQHttp class provides an implementation of the HTTP protocol.
-
-
           
-
-
           This class provides two different interfaces: one is the
-TQNetworkProtocol interface that allows you to use HTTP through the
-TQUrlOperator abstraction. The other is a direct interface to HTTP
-that allows you to have more control over the requests and that
-allows you to access the response header fields.
-
           Don't mix the two interfaces, since the behavior is not
-well-defined.
-
           If you want to use TQHttp with the TQNetworkProtocol interface, you
-do not use it directly, but rather through a TQUrlOperator, for
-example:
-
           
          -    TQUrlOperator op( "http://www.trolltech.com" );
-    op.get( "index.html" );
-    
          
- 
-
           This code will only work if the TQHttp class is registered; to
-register the class, you must call qInitNetworkProtocols() before
-using a TQUrlOperator with HTTP.
-
           The TQNetworkProtocol interface for HTTP only supports the
-operations operationGet() and operationPut(), i.e.
-TQUrlOperator::get() and TQUrlOperator::put(), if you use it with a
-TQUrlOperator.
-
           The rest of this descrption describes the direct interface to
-HTTP.
-
           The class works asynchronously, so there are no blocking
-functions. If an operation cannot be executed immediately, the
-function will still return straight away and the operation will be
-scheduled for later execution. The results of scheduled operations
-are reported via signals. This approach depends on the event loop
-being in operation.
-
           The operations that can be scheduled (they are called "requests"
-in the rest of the documentation) are the following: setHost(),
-get(), post(), head() and request().
-
           All of these requests return a unique identifier that allows you
-to keep track of the request that is currently executed. When the
-execution of a request starts, the requestStarted() signal with
-the identifier is emitted and when the request is finished, the
-requestFinished() signal is emitted with the identifier and a bool
-that indicates if the request finished with an error.
-
           To make an HTTP request you must set up suitable HTTP headers. The
-following example demonstrates, how to request the main HTML page
-from the Trolltech home page (i.e. the URL
-http://www.trolltech.com/index.html):
-
           
          -    TQHttpRequestHeader header( "GET", "/index.html" );
-    header.setValue( "Host", "www.trolltech.com" );
-    http->setHost( "www.trolltech.com" );
-    http->request( header );
-    
          
- 
-
           For the common HTTP requests GET, POST and HEAD, TQHttp
-provides the convenience functions get(), post() and head(). They
-already use a reasonable header and if you don't have to set
-special header fields, they are easier to use. The above example
-can also be written as:
-
           
          -    http->setHost( "www.trolltech.com" ); // id == 1
-    http->get( "/index.html" );           // id == 2
-    
          
- 
-
           For this example the following sequence of signals is emitted
-(with small variations, depending on network traffic, etc.):
-
           
          -    requestStarted( 1 )
-    requestFinished( 1, FALSE )
-
-    requestStarted( 2 )
-    stateChanged( Connecting )
-    stateChanged( Sending )
-    dataSendProgress( 77, 77 )
-    stateChanged( Reading )
-    responseHeaderReceived( responseheader )
-    dataReadProgress( 5388, 0 )
-    readyRead( responseheader )
-    dataReadProgress( 18300, 0 )
-    readyRead( responseheader )
-    stateChanged( Connected )
-    requestFinished( 2, FALSE )
-
-    done( FALSE )
-
-    stateChanged( Closing )
-    stateChanged( Unconnected )
-    
          
- 
-
           The dataSendProgress() and dataReadProgress() signals in the above
-example are useful if you want to show a progressbar to inform the user about the progress of the
-download. The second argument is the total size of data. In
-certain cases it is not possible to know the total amount in
-advance, in which case the second argument is 0. (If you connect
-to a TQProgressBar a total of 0 results in a busy indicator.)
-
           When the response header is read, it is reported with the
-responseHeaderReceived() signal.
-
           The readyRead() signal tells you that there is data ready to be
-read. The amount of data can then be queried with the
-bytesAvailable() function and it can be read with the readBlock()
-or readAll() functions.
-
           If an error occurs during the execution of one of the commands in
-a sequence of commands, all the pending commands (i.e. scheduled,
-but not yet executed commands) are cleared and no signals are
-emitted for them.
-
           For example, if you have the following sequence of reqeusts
-
           
          -    http->setHost( "www.foo.bar" );       // id == 1
-    http->get( "/index.html" );           // id == 2
-    http->post( "register.html", data );  // id == 3
-    
          
- 
-
           and the get() request fails because the host lookup fails, then
-the post() request is never executed and the signals would look
-like this:
-
           
          -    requestStarted( 1 )
-    requestFinished( 1, FALSE )
-
-    requestStarted( 2 )
-    stateChanged( HostLookup )
-    requestFinished( 2, TRUE )
-
-    done( TRUE )
-
-    stateChanged( Unconnected )
-    
          
- 
-
           You can then get details about the error with the error() and
-errorString() functions. Note that only unexpected behaviour, like
-network failure is considered as an error. If the server response
-contains an error status, like a 404 response, this is reported as
-a normal response case. So you should always check the status code of the
-response header.
-
           The functions currentId() and currentRequest() provide more
-information about the currently executing request.
-
           The functions hasPendingRequests() and clearPendingRequests()
-allow you to query and clear the list of pending requests.
-
           
          See also TQt Network Documentation, TQNetworkProtocol, TQUrlOperator, TQFtp, and Input/Output and Networking.
-
-
          Member Type Documentation
          
-
          TQHttp::Error
            
-
           This enum identifies the error that occurred.
-
            
-
          • TQHttp::NoError - No error occurred.
-
          • TQHttp::HostNotFound - The host name lookup failed.
-
          • TQHttp::ConnectionRefused - The server refused the connection.
-
          • TQHttp::UnexpectedClose - The server closed the connection unexpectedly.
-
          • TQHttp::InvalidResponseHeader - The server sent an invalid response header.
-
          • TQHttp::WrongContentLength - The client could not read the content correctly
-because an error with respect to the content length occurred.
-
          • TQHttp::Aborted - The request was aborted with abort().
-
          • TQHttp::UnknownError - An error other than those specified above
-occurred.
-
           
          See also error().
-
-
          TQHttp::State
          
-
-
           This enum is used to specify the state the client is in:
-
            
-
          • TQHttp::Unconnected - There is no connection to the host.
-
          • TQHttp::HostLookup - A host name lookup is in progress.
-
          • TQHttp::Connecting - An attempt to connect to the host is in progress.
-
          • TQHttp::Sending - The client is sending its request to the server.
-
          • TQHttp::Reading - The client's request has been sent and the client
-is reading the server's response.
-
          • TQHttp::Connected - The connection to the host is open, but the client is
-neither sending a request, nor waiting for a response.
-
          • TQHttp::Closing - The connection is closing down, but is not yet
-closed. (The state will be Unconnected when the connection is
-closed.)
-
           
          See also stateChanged() and state().
-
-
          Member Function Documentation
          
-
          TQHttp::TQHttp ()
-
          
-Constructs a TQHttp object.
-
-
          TQHttp::TQHttp ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
-
          
-Constructs a TQHttp object. The parameters parent and name
-are passed on to the TQObject constructor.
-
-
          TQHttp::TQHttp ( const TQString & hostname, Q_UINT16 port = 80, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
          
-Constructs a TQHttp object. Subsequent requests are done by
-connecting to the server hostname on port port. The
-parameters parent and name are passed on to the TQObject
-constructor.
-
           
          See also setHost().
-
-
          TQHttp::~TQHttp () [virtual]
-
          
-Destroys the TQHttp object. If there is an open connection, it is
-closed.
-
-
          void TQHttp::abort () [slot]
-
          
-Aborts the current request and deletes all scheduled requests.
-
           For the current request, the requestFinished() signal with the error argument TRUE is emitted. For all other requests that are
-affected by the abort(), no signals are emitted.
-
           Since this slot also deletes the scheduled requests, there are no
-requests left and the done() signal is emitted (with the error
-argument TRUE).
-
           
          See also clearPendingRequests().
-
-
          Q_ULONG TQHttp::bytesAvailable () const
-
          
-Returns the number of bytes that can be read from the response
-content at the moment.
-
           
          See also get(), post(), request(), readyRead(), readBlock(), and readAll().
-
-
          void TQHttp::clearPendingRequests ()
-
          
-Deletes all pending requests from the list of scheduled requests.
-This does not affect the request that is being executed. If
-you want to stop this this as well, use abort().
-
           
          See also hasPendingRequests() and abort().
-
-
          int TQHttp::closeConnection ()
-
          
-Closes the connection; this is useful if you have a keep-alive
-connection and want to close it.
-
           For the requests issued with get(), post() and head(), TQHttp sets
-the connection to be keep-alive. You can also do this using the
-header you pass to the request() function. TQHttp only closes the
-connection to the HTTP server if the response header requires it
-to do so.
-
           The function does not block and returns immediately. The request
-is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
-function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
-requestStarted() and requestFinished().
-
           When the request is started the requestStarted() signal is
-emitted. When it is finished the requestFinished() signal is
-emitted.
-
           If you want to close the connection immediately, you have to use
-abort() instead.
-
           
          See also stateChanged(), abort(), requestStarted(), requestFinished(), and done().
-
-
          TQIODevice * TQHttp::currentDestinationDevice () const
-
          
-Returns the TQIODevice pointer that is used as to store the data of the HTTP
-request being executed. If there is no current request or if the request
-does not store the data to an IO device, this function returns 0.
-
           This function can be used to delete the TQIODevice in the slot connected to
-the requestFinished() signal.
-
           
          See also get(), post(), and request().
-
-
          int TQHttp::currentId () const
-
          
-Returns the identifier of the HTTP request being executed or 0 if
-there is no request being executed (i.e. they've all finished).
-
           
          See also currentRequest().
-
-
          TQHttpRequestHeader TQHttp::currentRequest () const
-
          
-Returns the request header of the HTTP request being executed. If
-the request is one issued by setHost() or closeConnection(), it
-returns an invalid request header, i.e.
-TQHttpRequestHeader::isValid() returns FALSE.
-
           
          See also currentId().
-
-
          TQIODevice * TQHttp::currentSourceDevice () const
-
          
-Returns the TQIODevice pointer that is used as the data source of the HTTP
-request being executed. If there is no current request or if the request
-does not use an IO device as the data source, this function returns 0.
-
           This function can be used to delete the TQIODevice in the slot connected to
-the requestFinished() signal.
-
           
          See also currentDestinationDevice(), post(), and request().
-
-
          void TQHttp::dataReadProgress ( int done, int total ) [signal]
-
          
-
-
           This signal is emitted when this object reads data from a HTTP
-server to indicate the current progress of the download.
-
           done is the amount of data that has already arrived and total is the total amount of data. It is possible that the total
-amount of data that should be transferred cannot be determined, in
-which case total is 0.(If you connect to a TQProgressBar, the
-progress bar shows a busy indicator if the total is 0).
-
           Warning: done and total are not necessarily the size in
-bytes, since for large files these values might need to be
-"scaled" to avoid overflow.
-
           
          See also dataSendProgress(), get(), post(), request(), and TQProgressBar::progress.
-
-
          void TQHttp::dataSendProgress ( int done, int total ) [signal]
-
          
-
-
           This signal is emitted when this object sends data to a HTTP
-server to inform it about the progress of the upload.
-
           done is the amount of data that has already arrived and total is the total amount of data. It is possible that the total
-amount of data that should be transferred cannot be determined, in
-which case total is 0.(If you connect to a TQProgressBar, the
-progress bar shows a busy indicator if the total is 0).
-
           Warning: done and total are not necessarily the size in
-bytes, since for large files these values might need to be
-"scaled" to avoid overflow.
-
           
          See also dataReadProgress(), post(), request(), and TQProgressBar::progress.
-
-
          void TQHttp::done ( bool error ) [signal]
-
          
-
-
           This signal is emitted when the last pending request has finished;
-(it is emitted after the last request's requestFinished() signal).
-error is TRUE if an error occurred during the processing;
-otherwise error is FALSE.
-
           
          See also requestFinished(), error(), and errorString().
-
-
          Error TQHttp::error () const
-
          
-Returns the last error that occurred. This is useful to find out
-what happened when receiving a requestFinished() or a done()
-signal with the error argument TRUE.
-
           If you start a new request, the error status is reset to NoError.
-
-
          TQString TQHttp::errorString () const
-
          
-Returns a human-readable description of the last error that
-occurred. This is useful to present a error message to the user
-when receiving a requestFinished() or a done() signal with the error argument TRUE.
-
-
          int TQHttp::get ( const TQString & path, TQIODevice * to = 0 )
-
          
-Sends a get request for path to the server set by setHost() or
-as specified in the constructor.
-
           path must be an absolute path like /index.html or an
-absolute URI like http://www.trolltech.com/index.html.
-
           If the IO device to is 0 the readyRead() signal is emitted
-every time new content data is available to read.
-
           If the IO device to is not 0, the content data of the response
-is written directly to the device. Make sure that the to
-pointer is valid for the duration of the operation (it is safe to
-delete it when the requestFinished() signal is emitted).
-
           The function does not block and returns immediately. The request
-is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
-function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
-requestStarted() and requestFinished().
-
           When the request is started the requestStarted() signal is
-emitted. When it is finished the requestFinished() signal is
-emitted.
-
           
          See also setHost(), post(), head(), request(), requestStarted(), requestFinished(), and done().
-
-
          bool TQHttp::hasPendingRequests () const
-
          
-Returns TRUE if there are any requests scheduled that have not yet
-been executed; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
           The request that is being executed is not considered as a
-scheduled request.
-
           
          See also clearPendingRequests(), currentId(), and currentRequest().
-
-
          int TQHttp::head ( const TQString & path )
-
          
-Sends a header request for path to the server set by setHost()
-or as specified in the constructor.
-
           path must be an absolute path like /index.html or an
-absolute URI like http://www.trolltech.com/index.html.
-
           The function does not block and returns immediately. The request
-is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
-function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
-requestStarted() and requestFinished().
-
           When the request is started the requestStarted() signal is
-emitted. When it is finished the requestFinished() signal is
-emitted.
-
           
          See also setHost(), get(), post(), request(), requestStarted(), requestFinished(), and done().
-
-
          int TQHttp::post ( const TQString & path, TQIODevice * data, TQIODevice * to = 0 )
-
          
-Sends a post request for path to the server set by setHost() or
-as specified in the constructor.
-
           path must be an absolute path like /index.html or an
-absolute URI like http://www.trolltech.com/index.html.
-
           The incoming data comes via the data IO device.
-
           If the IO device to is 0 the readyRead() signal is emitted
-every time new content data is available to read.
-
           If the IO device to is not 0, the content data of the response
-is written directly to the device. Make sure that the to
-pointer is valid for the duration of the operation (it is safe to
-delete it when the requestFinished() signal is emitted).
-
           The function does not block and returns immediately. The request
-is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
-function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
-requestStarted() and requestFinished().
-
           When the request is started the requestStarted() signal is
-emitted. When it is finished the requestFinished() signal is
-emitted.
-
           
          See also setHost(), get(), head(), request(), requestStarted(), requestFinished(), and done().
-
-
          int TQHttp::post ( const TQString & path, const TQByteArray & data, TQIODevice * to = 0 )
-
          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
           data is used as the content data of the HTTP request.
-
-
          TQByteArray TQHttp::readAll ()
-
          
-Reads all the bytes from the response content and returns them.
-
           
          See also get(), post(), request(), readyRead(), bytesAvailable(), and readBlock().
-
-
          Q_LONG TQHttp::readBlock ( char * data, Q_ULONG maxlen )
-
          
-Reads maxlen bytes from the response content into data and
-returns the number of bytes read. Returns -1 if an error occurred.
-
           
          See also get(), post(), request(), readyRead(), bytesAvailable(), and readAll().
-
-
          void TQHttp::readyRead ( const TQHttpResponseHeader & resp ) [signal]
-
          
-
-
           This signal is emitted when there is new response data to read.
-
           If you specified a device in the request where the data should be
-written to, then this signal is not emitted; instead the data
-is written directly to the device.
-
           The response header is passed in resp.
-
           You can read the data with the readAll() or readBlock() functions
-
           This signal is useful if you want to process the data in chunks as
-soon as it becomes available. If you are only interested in the
-complete data, just connect to the requestFinished() signal and
-read the data then instead.
-
           
          See also get(), post(), request(), readAll(), readBlock(), and bytesAvailable().
-
-
          int TQHttp::request ( const TQHttpRequestHeader & header, TQIODevice * data = 0, TQIODevice * to = 0 )
-
          
-Sends a request to the server set by setHost() or as specified in
-the constructor. Uses the header as the HTTP request header.
-You are responsible for setting up a header that is appropriate
-for your request.
-
           The incoming data comes via the data IO device.
-
           If the IO device to is 0 the readyRead() signal is emitted
-every time new content data is available to read.
-
           If the IO device to is not 0, the content data of the response
-is written directly to the device. Make sure that the to
-pointer is valid for the duration of the operation (it is safe to
-delete it when the requestFinished() signal is emitted).
-
           The function does not block and returns immediately. The request
-is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
-function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
-requestStarted() and requestFinished().
-
           When the request is started the requestStarted() signal is
-emitted. When it is finished the requestFinished() signal is
-emitted.
-
           
          See also setHost(), get(), post(), head(), requestStarted(), requestFinished(), and done().
-
-
          int TQHttp::request ( const TQHttpRequestHeader & header, const TQByteArray & data, TQIODevice * to = 0 )
-
          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
           data is used as the content data of the HTTP request.
-
-
          void TQHttp::requestFinished ( int id, bool error ) [signal]
-
          
-
-
           This signal is emitted when processing the request identified by
-id has finished. error is TRUE if an error occurred during
-the processing; otherwise error is FALSE.
-
           
          See also requestStarted(), done(), error(), and errorString().
-
-
          void TQHttp::requestStarted ( int id ) [signal]
-
          
-
-
           This signal is emitted when processing the request identified by
-id starts.
-
           
          See also requestFinished() and done().
-
-
          void TQHttp::responseHeaderReceived ( const TQHttpResponseHeader & resp ) [signal]
-
          
-
-
           This signal is emitted when the HTTP header of a server response
-is available. The header is passed in resp.
-
           
          See also get(), post(), head(), request(), and readyRead().
-
-
          int TQHttp::setHost ( const TQString & hostname, Q_UINT16 port = 80 )
-
          
-Sets the HTTP server that is used for requests to hostname on
-port port.
-
           The function does not block and returns immediately. The request
-is scheduled, and its execution is performed asynchronously. The
-function returns a unique identifier which is passed by
-requestStarted() and requestFinished().
-
           When the request is started the requestStarted() signal is
-emitted. When it is finished the requestFinished() signal is
-emitted.
-
           
          See also get(), post(), head(), request(), requestStarted(), requestFinished(), and done().
-
-
          State TQHttp::state () const
-
          
-Returns the current state of the object. When the state changes,
-the stateChanged() signal is emitted.
-
           
          See also State and stateChanged().
-
-
          void TQHttp::stateChanged ( int state ) [signal]
-
          
-
-
           This signal is emitted when the state of the TQHttp object changes.
-The argument state is the new state of the connection; it is
-one of the State values.
-
           This usually happens when a request is started, but it can also
-happen when the server closes the connection or when a call to
-closeConnection() succeeded.
-
           
          See also get(), post(), head(), request(), closeConnection(), state(), and State.
-
-
-
          
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
          
-
-
          Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
          TQt 3.3.8
          
-
          
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qhttpheader-members.html b/doc/html/qhttpheader-members.html
index 72793ecab..40b704445 100644
--- a/doc/html/qhttpheader-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qhttpheader-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qhttpheader.html b/doc/html/qhttpheader.html
index fde3250f0..16a20267c 100644
--- a/doc/html/qhttpheader.html
+++ b/doc/html/qhttpheader.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
          The TQHttpHeader class contains header information for HTTP.
 More...
-
          #include <qhttp.h>
+
          #include <ntqhttp.h>
 
          Inherited by TQHttpResponseHeader and TQHttpRequestHeader.
 
          List of all member functions.
 
          Public Members
          
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ content is called the "value". You can get and set a header
 field's value by using its key with value() and setValue(), e.g.
 
               header.setValue( "content-type", "text/html" );
-    TQString contentType = header.value( "content-type" );
+    TQString contentType = header.value( "content-type" );
     
          
  
 
           Some fields are so common that getters and setters are provided
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Constructs an empty HTTP header.
 
 Constructs a copy of header.
 
-
          TQHttpHeader::TQHttpHeader ( const TQString & str )
+
          TQHttpHeader::TQHttpHeader ( const TQString & str )
 
          
 Constructs a HTTP header for str.
 
           This constructor parses the string str for header fields and
@@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Destructor.
 Returns the value of the special HTTP header field content-length.
 
           
          See also setContentLength() and hasContentLength().
 
-
          TQString TQHttpHeader::contentType () const
+
          TQString TQHttpHeader::contentType () const
 
          
 Returns the value of the special HTTP header field content-type.
 
           
          See also setContentType() and hasContentType().
@@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Returns TRUE if the header has an entry for the the special HTTP
 header field content-type; otherwise returns FALSE.
 
           
          See also contentType() and setContentType().
 
-
          bool TQHttpHeader::hasKey ( const TQString & key ) const
+
          bool TQHttpHeader::hasKey ( const TQString & key ) const
 
          
 Returns TRUE if the HTTP header has an entry with the given key; otherwise returns FALSE.
 
           
          See also value(), setValue(), and keys().
@@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ Returns TRUE if the HTTP header has an entry with the given key; otherw
 Returns TRUE if the HTTP header is valid; otherwise returns FALSE.
 
           A TQHttpHeader is invalid if it was created by parsing a malformed string.
 
-
          TQStringList TQHttpHeader::keys () const
+
          TQStringList TQHttpHeader::keys () const
 
          
 Returns a list of the keys in the HTTP header.
 
           
          See also hasKey().
@@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ Returns a list of the keys in the HTTP header.
 
 Assigns h and returns a reference to this http header.
 
-
          void TQHttpHeader::removeValue ( const TQString & key )
+
          void TQHttpHeader::removeValue ( const TQString & key )
 
          
 Removes the entry with the key key from the HTTP header.
 
           
          See also value() and setValue().
@@ -179,14 +179,14 @@ Sets the value of the special HTTP header field content-length
 to len.
 
           
          See also contentLength() and hasContentLength().
 
-
          void TQHttpHeader::setContentType ( const TQString & type )
+
          void TQHttpHeader::setContentType ( const TQString & type )
 
          
 Sets the value of the special HTTP header field content-type to
 type.
 
           
          See also contentType() and hasContentType().
 
 
          Example: network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h.
-
          void TQHttpHeader::setValue ( const TQString & key, const TQString & value )
+
          void TQHttpHeader::setValue ( const TQString & key, const TQString & value )
 
          
 Sets the value of the entry with the key to value.
 
           If no entry with key exists, a new entry with the given key
@@ -195,14 +195,14 @@ exists, its value is discarded and replaced with the given value.
 
           
          See also value(), hasKey(), and removeValue().
 
 
          Example: network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h.
-
          TQString TQHttpHeader::toString () const [virtual]
+
          TQString TQHttpHeader::toString () const [virtual]
 
          
 Returns a string representation of the HTTP header.
 
           The string is suitable for use by the constructor that takes a
-TQString. It consists of lines with the format: key, colon, space,
+TQString. It consists of lines with the format: key, colon, space,
 value, "\r\n".
 
-
          TQString TQHttpHeader::value ( const TQString & key ) const
+
          TQString TQHttpHeader::value ( const TQString & key ) const
 
          
 Returns the value for the entry with the given key. If no entry
 has this key, an empty string is returned.
diff --git a/doc/html/qhttprequestheader-members.html b/doc/html/qhttprequestheader-members.html
index 7536b9d11..5e9887809 100644
--- a/doc/html/qhttprequestheader-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qhttprequestheader-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qhttprequestheader.html b/doc/html/qhttprequestheader.html
index fcb2ab3a5..cee6b387d 100644
--- a/doc/html/qhttprequestheader.html
+++ b/doc/html/qhttprequestheader.html
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 HTTP.
 More...
-
          #include <qhttp.h>
+
          #include <ntqhttp.h>
 
          Inherits TQHttpHeader.
 
          List of all member functions.
 
          Public Members
          
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ HTTP.
 
 
           
 
-
           This class is used in the TQHttp class to report the header
+
           This class is used in the TQHttp class to report the header
 information if the client requests something from the server.
 
           HTTP requests have a method which describes the request's action.
 The most common requests are "GET" and "POST". In addition to the
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ obtained using method(), path(), minorVersion().
 
           This class is a TQHttpHeader subclass so that class's functions,
 e.g. setValue(), value(), etc. are also available.
-
           
          See also TQHttpResponseHeader, TQHttp, and Input/Output and Networking.
+
           
          See also TQHttpResponseHeader, TQHttp, and Input/Output and Networking.
 
 
           
 
          Member Function Documentation
          
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ e.g. setValue(), TQHttpRequestHeader::TQHttpRequestHeader ( const TQString & method, const TQString & path, int majorVer = 1, int minorVer = 1 )
+
          TQHttpRequestHeader::TQHttpRequestHeader ( const TQString & method, const TQString & path, int majorVer = 1, int minorVer = 1 )
 
          
 Constructs a HTTP request header for the method method, the
 request-URI path and the protocol-version majorVer and minorVer.
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ request-URI path and the protocol-version majorVer and min
 
 Constructs a copy of header.
 
-
          TQHttpRequestHeader::TQHttpRequestHeader ( const TQString & str )
+
          TQHttpRequestHeader::TQHttpRequestHeader ( const TQString & str )
 
          
 Constructs a HTTP request header from the string str. The str should consist of one or more "\r\n" delimited lines; the first line
 should be the request-line (format: method, space, request-URI, space
@@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Returns the major protocol-version of the HTTP request header.
 
           
          See also minorVersion(), method(), path(), and setRequest().
 
 
          Reimplemented from TQHttpHeader.
-
          TQString TQHttpRequestHeader::method () const
+
          TQString TQHttpRequestHeader::method () const
 
          
 Returns the method of the HTTP request header.
 
           
          See also path(), majorVersion(), minorVersion(), and setRequest().
@@ -117,19 +117,19 @@ Returns the minor protocol-version of the HTTP request header.
 
           
          See also majorVersion(), method(), path(), and setRequest().
 
 
          Reimplemented from TQHttpHeader.
-
          TQString TQHttpRequestHeader::path () const
+
          TQString TQHttpRequestHeader::path () const
 
          
 Returns the request-URI of the HTTP request header.
 
           
          See also method(), majorVersion(), minorVersion(), and setRequest().
 
-
          void TQHttpRequestHeader::setRequest ( const TQString & method, const TQString & path, int majorVer = 1, int minorVer = 1 )
+
          void TQHttpRequestHeader::setRequest ( const TQString & method, const TQString & path, int majorVer = 1, int minorVer = 1 )
 
          
 This function sets the request method to method, the
 request-URI to path and the protocol-version to majorVer and
 minorVer.
 
           
          See also method(), path(), majorVersion(), and minorVersion().
 
-
          void TQHttpHeader::setValue ( const TQString & key, const TQString & value )
+
          void TQHttpHeader::setValue ( const TQString & key, const TQString & value )
 
          
 Sets the value of the entry with the key to value.
 
           If no entry with key exists, a new entry with the given key
@@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ exists, its value is discarded and replaced with the given value.
 
           
          See also value(), hasKey(), and removeValue().
 
 
          Example: network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h.
-
          TQString TQHttpHeader::value ( const TQString & key ) const
+
          TQString TQHttpHeader::value ( const TQString & key ) const
 
          
 Returns the value for the entry with the given key. If no entry
 has this key, an empty string is returned.
diff --git a/doc/html/qhttpresponseheader-members.html b/doc/html/qhttpresponseheader-members.html
index 0f2669f7e..e58499064 100644
--- a/doc/html/qhttpresponseheader-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qhttpresponseheader-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qhttpresponseheader.html b/doc/html/qhttpresponseheader.html
index 34baacee6..8653f6bc9 100644
--- a/doc/html/qhttpresponseheader.html
+++ b/doc/html/qhttpresponseheader.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
          The TQHttpResponseHeader class contains response header information for HTTP.
 More...
-
          #include <qhttp.h>
+
          #include <ntqhttp.h>
 
          Inherits TQHttpHeader.
 
          List of all member functions.
 
          Public Members
          
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ The TQHttpResponseHeader class contains response header information for HTTP.
 
 
           
 
-
           This class is used by the TQHttp class to report the header
+
           This class is used by the TQHttp class to report the header
 information that the client received from the server.
 
           HTTP responses have a status code that indicates the status of the
 response. This code is a 3-digit integer result code (for details
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ see to RFC 1945). In addition to the status code, you can also
 specify a human-readable text that describes the reason for the
 code ("reason phrase"). This class allows you to get the status
 code and the reason phrase.
-
           
          See also TQHttpRequestHeader, TQHttp, and Input/Output and Networking.
+
           
          See also TQHttpRequestHeader, TQHttp, and Input/Output and Networking.
 
 
          Member Function Documentation
          
 
          TQHttpResponseHeader::TQHttpResponseHeader ()
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ Returns the minor protocol-version of the HTTP response header.
 
           
          See also majorVersion(), statusCode(), and reasonPhrase().
 
 
          Reimplemented from TQHttpHeader.
-
          TQString TQHttpResponseHeader::reasonPhrase () const
+
          TQString TQHttpResponseHeader::reasonPhrase () const
 
          
 Returns the reason phrase of the HTTP response header.
 
           
          See also statusCode(), majorVersion(), and minorVersion().
diff --git a/doc/html/qicondrag-members.html b/doc/html/qicondrag-members.html
index 758d5613e..66bc75e21 100644
--- a/doc/html/qicondrag-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qicondrag-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -38,62 +38,62 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
        • TQIconDrag()
 
        • ~TQIconDrag()
 
        • append()
-
        • blockSignals()
+
        • blockSignals()
 
        • canDecode()
-
        • checkConnectArgs()
-
        • child()
-
        • childEvent()
-
        • children()
-
        • className()
-
        • connect()
-
        • connectNotify()
-
        • customEvent()
-
        • deleteLater()
-
        • destroyed()
-
        • disconnect()
-
        • disconnectNotify()
-
        • drag()
-
        • dragCopy()
-
        • dragLink()
-
        • dragMove()
-
        • dumpObjectInfo()
-
        • dumpObjectTree()
+
        • checkConnectArgs()
+
        • child()
+
        • childEvent()
+
        • children()
+
        • className()
+
        • connect()
+
        • connectNotify()
+
        • customEvent()
+
        • deleteLater()
+
        • destroyed()
+
        • disconnect()
+
        • disconnectNotify()
+
        • drag()
+
        • dragCopy()
+
        • dragLink()
+
        • dragMove()
+
        • dumpObjectInfo()
+
        • dumpObjectTree()
 
        • encodedData()
-
        • event()
-
        • eventFilter()
+
        • event()
+
        • eventFilter()
 
        • format()
-
        • highPriority()
-
        • inherits()
-
        • insertChild()
-
        • installEventFilter()
-
        • isA()
-
        • isWidgetType()
-
        • killTimer()
-
        • killTimers()
-
        • metaObject()
-
        • name()
-
        • normalizeSignalSlot()
-
        • objectTrees()
-
        • parent()
-
        • pixmap()
-
        • pixmapHotSpot()
-
        • property()
+
        • highPriority()
+
        • inherits()
+
        • insertChild()
+
        • installEventFilter()
+
        • isA()
+
        • isWidgetType()
+
        • killTimer()
+
        • killTimers()
+
        • metaObject()
+
        • name()
+
        • normalizeSignalSlot()
+
        • objectTrees()
+
        • parent()
+
        • pixmap()
+
        • pixmapHotSpot()
+
        • property()
 
        • provides()
-
        • queryList()
-
        • removeChild()
-
        • removeEventFilter()
-
        • sender()
+
        • queryList()
+
        • removeChild()
+
        • removeEventFilter()
+
        • sender()
 
        • serialNumber()
-
        • setName()
-
        • setPixmap()
-
        • setProperty()
-
        • signalsBlocked()
-
        • source()
-
        • startTimer()
-
        • target()
-
        • timerEvent()
-
        • tr()
-
        • trUtf8()
+
        • setName()
+
        • setPixmap()
+
        • setProperty()
+
        • signalsBlocked()
+
        • source()
+
        • startTimer()
+
        • target()
+
        • timerEvent()
+
        • tr()
+
        • trUtf8()
 
        
 
 
        
diff --git a/doc/html/qicondrag.html b/doc/html/qicondrag.html
index d15e6f74e..ecd4c2620 100644
--- a/doc/html/qicondrag.html
+++ b/doc/html/qicondrag.html
@@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
        The TQIconDrag class supports drag and drop operations
 within a TQIconView.
 More...
-
        #include <qiconview.h>
-
        Inherits TQDragObject.
+
        #include <ntqiconview.h>
+
        Inherits TQDragObject.
 
        List of all member functions.
 
        Public Members
        
 
          
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ within a TQIconView.
 
 
 
           The TQIconDrag class supports drag and drop operations
-within a TQIconView.
+within a TQIconView.
 
           
 
 
           A TQIconDrag object is used to maintain information about the
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ TQIconDrag stores the data associated with drag items in
 TQIconDragItem objects.
 
           If you want to use the extended drag-and-drop functionality of
 TQIconView, create a TQIconDrag object in a reimplementation of
-TQIconView::dragObject(). Then create a TQIconDragItem for each item
+TQIconView::dragObject(). Then create a TQIconDragItem for each item
 which should be dragged, set the data it represents with
 TQIconDragItem::setData(), and add each TQIconDragItem to the drag
 object using append().
@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ dragObject(), format(), encodedData() and canDecode(). See the files
 
           
          See also TQMimeSource::format() and Drag And Drop Classes.
 
 
          Member Function Documentation
          
-
          TQIconDrag::TQIconDrag ( TQWidget * dragSource, const char * name = 0 )
+
          TQIconDrag::TQIconDrag ( TQWidget * dragSource, const char * name = 0 )
 
          
 Constructs a drag object called name, which is a child of dragSource.
 
           Note that the drag object will be deleted when dragSource is deleted.
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Constructs a drag object called name, which is a child of dragSourc
 
 Destructor.
 
-
          void TQIconDrag::append ( const TQIconDragItem & i, const TQRect & pr, const TQRect & tr )
+
          void TQIconDrag::append ( const TQIconDragItem & i, const TQRect & pr, const TQRect & tr )
 
          
 Append the TQIconDragItem, i, to the TQIconDrag object's list of
 items. You must also supply the geometry of the pixmap, pr, and
diff --git a/doc/html/qicondragevent-members.html b/doc/html/qicondragevent-members.html
index 60598be33..7e723070b 100644
--- a/doc/html/qicondragevent-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qicondragevent-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -39,8 +39,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
        • accept()
 
        • ignore()
 
        • isAccepted()
-
        • spontaneous()
-
        • type()
+
        • spontaneous()
+
        • type()
 
        
 
 
        
diff --git a/doc/html/qicondragevent.html b/doc/html/qicondragevent.html
index 117a605fa..8455b6cd9 100644
--- a/doc/html/qicondragevent.html
+++ b/doc/html/qicondragevent.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
        The TQIconDragEvent class signals that a main icon drag has begun.
 More...
-
        #include <qevent.h>
-
        Inherits TQEvent.
+
        #include <ntqevent.h>
+
        Inherits TQEvent.
 
        List of all member functions.
 
        Public Members
        
 
          
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ flag set to FALSE.
 
           Setting the accept flag indicates that the receiver of this event
 has started a drag and drop oeration.
 
           The accept flag is not set by default.
-
           
          See also ignore() and TQWidget::hide().
+
           
          See also ignore() and TQWidget::hide().
 
 
          void TQIconDragEvent::ignore ()
 
          
diff --git a/doc/html/qicondragitem-members.html b/doc/html/qicondragitem-members.html
index 151120e84..207788d64 100644
--- a/doc/html/qicondragitem-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qicondragitem-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qicondragitem.html b/doc/html/qicondragitem.html
index 7eb0a820e..a22560f0b 100644
--- a/doc/html/qicondragitem.html
+++ b/doc/html/qicondragitem.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
          The TQIconDragItem class encapsulates a drag item.
 More...
-
          #include <qiconview.h>
+
          #include <ntqiconview.h>
 
          List of all member functions.
 
          Public Members
          
 
            
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ and drop operations.
 from TQIconDragItem) is created for each icon view item which is
 dragged. Each of these TQIconDragItems is stored in a TQIconDrag
 object.
-
             See TQIconView::dragObject() for more information.
+
             See TQIconView::dragObject() for more information.
 
             See the fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp and
 iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp examples.
 
            See also Drag And Drop Classes.
diff --git a/doc/html/qiconfactory-members.html b/doc/html/qiconfactory-members.html
index ff657774f..1101eae6f 100644
--- a/doc/html/qiconfactory-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qiconfactory-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qiconfactory.html b/doc/html/qiconfactory.html
index d8ac8d85a..5677cf87b 100644
--- a/doc/html/qiconfactory.html
+++ b/doc/html/qiconfactory.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
            The TQIconFactory class is used to create pixmaps for a TQIconSet.
 More...
-
            #include <qiconset.h>
+
            #include <ntqiconset.h>
 
            List of all member functions.
 
            Public Members
            
 
              
@@ -51,12 +51,12 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
              Detailed Description
              
  
 
-The TQIconFactory class is used to create pixmaps for a TQIconSet.
+The TQIconFactory class is used to create pixmaps for a TQIconSet.
 
               By reimplementing createPixmap(), you can override TQIconSet's
 default algorithm for computing pixmaps not supplied by the user.
 
               Call setAutoDelete(TRUE) if you want the factory to automatically
 delete itself when it is no longer needed by TQIconSet.
-
               
              See also TQIconSet and Advanced Widgets.
+
               
              See also TQIconSet and Advanced Widgets.
 
 
              Member Function Documentation
              
 
              TQIconFactory::TQIconFactory ()
@@ -73,10 +73,10 @@ Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
 
               Returns TRUE if auto-deletion is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
 
               
              See also setAutoDelete().
 
-
              TQPixmap * TQIconFactory::createPixmap ( const TQIconSet & iconSet, TQIconSet::Size size, TQIconSet::Mode mode, TQIconSet::State state ) [virtual]
+
              TQPixmap * TQIconFactory::createPixmap ( const TQIconSet & iconSet, TQIconSet::Size size, TQIconSet::Mode mode, TQIconSet::State state ) [virtual]
 
              
 Ceates a pixmap for iconSet with a certain size, mode, and
-state. Returns 0 if the default TQIconSet algorithm should be
+state. Returns 0 if the default TQIconSet algorithm should be
 used to create a pixmap that wasn't supplied by the user.
 
               It is the caller's responsibility to delete the returned pixmap.
 
               The default implementation always returns 0.
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Replaces the default icon factory with factory.
 
 
 
               If autoDelete is TRUE, sets the icon factory to automatically
-delete itself when it is no longer referenced by any TQIconSet and
+delete itself when it is no longer referenced by any TQIconSet and
 isn't the default factory. If autoDelete is FALSE (the default)
 auto-deletion is disabled.
 
               
              See also autoDelete() and defaultFactory().
diff --git a/doc/html/qiconset-h.html b/doc/html/qiconset-h.html
index c28ed7ac6..6c977be03 100644
--- a/doc/html/qiconset-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qiconset-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qiconset.h Include File
+ntqiconset.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
              
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
              TQIconSet Class Reference
              
-
-
              The TQIconSet class provides a set of icons with different
-styles and sizes.
-More...
-
              #include <qiconset.h>
-
              List of all member functions.
-
              Public Members
              
-
                
-
              • enum Size { Automatic, Small, Large }
                • 
-
              • enum Mode { Normal, Disabled, Active }
                • 
-
              • enum State { On, Off }
                • 
-
              • TQIconSet ()
                • 
-
              • TQIconSet ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, Size size = Automatic )
                • 
-
              • TQIconSet ( const TQPixmap & smallPix, const TQPixmap & largePix )
                • 
-
              • TQIconSet ( const TQIconSet & other )
                • 
-
              • virtual ~TQIconSet ()
                • 
-
              • void reset ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, Size size )
                • 
-
              • virtual void setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, Size size, Mode mode = Normal, State state = Off )
                • 
-
              • virtual void setPixmap ( const TQString & fileName, Size size, Mode mode = Normal, State state = Off )
                • 
-
              • TQPixmap pixmap ( Size size, Mode mode, State state = Off ) const
                • 
-
              • TQPixmap pixmap ( Size size, bool enabled, State state = Off ) const  (obsolete)
                • 
-
              • TQPixmap pixmap () const
                • 
-
              • bool isGenerated ( Size size, Mode mode, State state = Off ) const
                • 
-
              • void clearGenerated ()
                • 
-
              • void installIconFactory ( TQIconFactory * factory )
                • 
-
              • bool isNull () const
                • 
-
              • void detach ()
                • 
-
              • TQIconSet & operator= ( const TQIconSet & other )
                • 
-
              
-
              Static Public Members
              
-
                
-
              • void setIconSize ( Size which, const TQSize & size )
                • 
-
              • const TQSize & iconSize ( Size which )
                • 
-
              
-
              Detailed Description
              
- 
-
               The TQIconSet class provides a set of icons with different
-styles and sizes.
-
               
-
-
-
-
               A TQIconSet can generate smaller, larger, active, and disabled pixmaps
-from the set of icons it is given. Such pixmaps are used by
-TQToolButton, TQHeader, TQPopupMenu, etc. to show an icon representing a
-particular action.
-
               The simplest use of TQIconSet is to create one from a TQPixmap and then
-use it, allowing TQt to work out all the required icon styles and
-sizes. For example:
-
               
              -    TQToolButton *but = new TQToolButton( TQIconSet( TQPixmap("open.xpm") ), ... );
-  
              
- 
-
               Using whichever pixmaps you specify as a base, TQIconSet provides a
-set of six icons, each with a Size and a Mode: Small Normal,
-Small Disabled, Small Active, Large Normal, Large Disabled, and
-Large Active.
-
               An additional set of six icons can be provided for widgets that have
-an "On" or "Off" state, like checkable menu items or toggleable
-toolbuttons. If you provide pixmaps for the "On" state, but not for
-the "Off" state, the TQIconSet will provide the "Off" pixmaps. You may
-specify icons for both states in you wish.
-
               You can set any of the icons using setPixmap().
-
               When you retrieve a pixmap using pixmap(Size, Mode, State),
-TQIconSet will return the icon that has been set or previously
-generated for that size, mode and state combination. If none is
-available, TQIconSet will ask the icon factory. If the icon factory
-cannot provide any (the default), TQIconSet generates a pixmap based
-on the pixmaps it has been given and returns it.
-
               The Disabled appearance is computed using an algorithm that
-produces results very similar to those used in Microsoft Windows
-95. The Active appearance is identical to the Normal
-appearance unless you use setPixmap() to set it to something
-special.
-
               When scaling icons, TQIconSet uses smooth scaling, which can partially blend the color component
-of pixmaps.  If the results look poor, the best solution
-is to supply pixmaps in both large and small sizes.
-
               You can use the static function setIconSize() to set the preferred
-size of the generated large/small icons. The default small size is
-22 x 22, while the default large size is 32 x 32. These sizes only
-affect generated icons.
-
               The isGenerated() function returns TRUE if an icon was generated by
-TQIconSet or by a factory; clearGenerated() clears all cached
-pixmaps.
-
               
               Making Classes that Use TQIconSet
-
              
-
               If you write your own widgets that have an option to set a small
-pixmap, consider allowing a TQIconSet to be set for that pixmap.  The
-TQt class TQToolButton is an example of such a widget.
-
               Provide a method to set a TQIconSet, and when you draw the icon, choose
-whichever icon is appropriate for the current state of your widget.
-For example:
-
              -    void MyWidget::drawIcon( TQPainter* p, TQPoint pos )
-    {
-        p->drawPixmap( pos, icons->pixmap(
-                                TQIconSet::Small,
-                                isEnabled() ? TQIconSet::Normal :
-                                              TQIconSet::Disabled,
-                                isEnabled() ? TQIconSet::On :
-                                              TQIconSet::Off));
-    }
-  
              
- 
-
               You might also make use of the Active mode, perhaps making your
-widget Active when the mouse is over the widget (see TQWidget::enterEvent()), while the mouse is pressed pending the
-release that will activate the function, or when it is the currently
-selected item. If the widget can be toggled, the "On" mode might be
-used to draw a different icon.
-
               
              TQIconSet
               
-
               
              See also TQIconFactory, TQPixmap, TQMainWindow::usesBigPixmaps, GUI Design Handbook: Iconic Label, Graphics Classes, Image Processing Classes, and Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes.
-
-
              Member Type Documentation
              
-
              TQIconSet::Mode
              
-
-
               This enum type describes the mode for which a pixmap is intended to be
-used.
-The currently defined modes are:
-
                
-
              • TQIconSet::Normal - 
-Display the pixmap when the user is
-not interacting with the icon, but the
-functionality represented by the icon is available.
-
              • TQIconSet::Disabled - 
-Display the pixmap when the
-functionality represented by the icon is not available.
-
              • TQIconSet::Active - 
-Display the pixmap when the
-functionality represented by the icon is available and
-the user is interacting with the icon, for example, moving the
-mouse over it or clicking it.
-
              
-
              TQIconSet::Size
              
-
-
               This enum type describes the size at which a pixmap is intended to be
-used.
-The currently defined sizes are:
-
                
-
              • TQIconSet::Automatic - The size of the pixmap is determined from its
-pixel size. This is a useful default.
-
              • TQIconSet::Small - The pixmap is the smaller of two.
-
              • TQIconSet::Large - The pixmap is the larger of two.
-
               If a Small pixmap is not set by TQIconSet::setPixmap(), the Large
-pixmap will be automatically scaled down to the size of a small pixmap
-to generate the Small pixmap when required.  Similarly, a Small pixmap
-will be automatically scaled up to generate a Large pixmap. The
-preferred sizes for large/small generated icons can be set using
-setIconSize().
-
               
              See also setIconSize(), iconSize(), setPixmap(), pixmap(), and TQMainWindow::usesBigPixmaps.
-
-
              TQIconSet::State
              
-
-
               This enum describes the state for which a pixmap is intended to be
-used. The state can be:
-
                
-
              • TQIconSet::Off - Display the pixmap when the widget is in an "off" state
-
              • TQIconSet::On - Display the pixmap when the widget is in an "on" state
-
               
              See also setPixmap() and pixmap().
-
-
              Member Function Documentation
              
-
              TQIconSet::TQIconSet ()
-
              
-Constructs a null icon set.
-
               
              See also setPixmap() and reset().
-
-
              TQIconSet::TQIconSet ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, Size size = Automatic )
-
              
-Constructs an icon set for which the Normal pixmap is pixmap,
-which is assumed to be of size size.
-
               The default for size is Automatic, which means that TQIconSet
-will determine whether the pixmap is Small or Large from its pixel
-size. Pixmaps less than the width of a small generated icon are
-considered to be Small. You can use setIconSize() to set the
-preferred size of a generated icon.
-
               
              See also setIconSize() and reset().
-
-
              TQIconSet::TQIconSet ( const TQPixmap & smallPix, const TQPixmap & largePix )
-
                Creates an iconset which uses the pixmap smallPix for for
-displaying a small icon, and the pixmap largePix for displaying a
-large icon.
-
-
              TQIconSet::TQIconSet ( const TQIconSet & other )
-
              
-Constructs a copy of other. This is very fast.
-
-
              TQIconSet::~TQIconSet () [virtual]
-
              
-Destroys the icon set and frees any allocated resources.
-
-
              void TQIconSet::clearGenerated ()
-
              
-Clears all cached pixmaps, including those obtained from an
-eventual TQIconFactory.
-
-
              void TQIconSet::detach ()
-
              
-Detaches this icon set from others with which it may share data.
-
               You will never need to call this function; other TQIconSet functions
-call it as necessary.
-
-
              const TQSize & TQIconSet::iconSize ( Size which ) [static]
-
              
-If which is Small, returns the preferred size of a small
-generated icon; if which is Large, returns the preferred size
-of a large generated icon.
-
               
              See also setIconSize().
-
-
              void TQIconSet::installIconFactory ( TQIconFactory * factory )
-
              
-Installs factory as the icon factory for this iconset. The
-icon factory is used to generates pixmaps not set by the user.
-
               If no icon factory is installed, TQIconFactory::defaultFactory()
-is used.
-
-
              bool TQIconSet::isGenerated ( Size size, Mode mode, State state = Off ) const
-
              
-Returns TRUE if the pixmap with size size, mode mode and
-state state is generated from other pixmaps; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
               A pixmap obtained from a TQIconFactory is considered non-generated.
-
-
              bool TQIconSet::isNull () const
-
              
-Returns TRUE if the icon set is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
              TQIconSet & TQIconSet::operator= ( const TQIconSet & other )
-
              
-Assigns other to this icon set and returns a reference to this
-icon set.
-
               
              See also detach().
-
-
              TQPixmap TQIconSet::pixmap ( Size size, Mode mode, State state = Off ) const
-
              
-Returns a pixmap with size size, mode mode and state state, generating one if necessary. Generated pixmaps are cached.
-
-
              TQPixmap TQIconSet::pixmap ( Size size, bool enabled, State state = Off ) const
-
               This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
               This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
               This is the same as pixmap(size, enabled, state).
-
-
              TQPixmap TQIconSet::pixmap () const
-
              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
               Returns the pixmap originally provided to the constructor or to
-reset(). This is the Normal pixmap of unspecified Size.
-
               
              See also reset().
-
-
              void TQIconSet::reset ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, Size size )
-
              
-Sets this icon set to use pixmap pixmap for the Normal pixmap,
-assuming it to be of size size.
-
               This is equivalent to assigning TQIconSet(pixmap, size) to this
-icon set.
-
               This function does nothing if pixmap is a null pixmap.
-
-
              void TQIconSet::setIconSize ( Size which, const TQSize & size ) [static]
-
              
-Set the preferred size for all small or large icons that are
-generated after this call. If which is Small, sets the preferred
-size of small generated icons to size. Similarly, if which is
-Large, sets the preferred size of large generated icons to size.
-
               Note that cached icons will not be regenerated, so it is recommended
-that you set the preferred icon sizes before generating any icon sets.
-Also note that the preferred icon sizes will be ignored for icon sets
-that have been created using both small and large pixmaps.
-
               
              See also iconSize().
-
-
              void TQIconSet::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, Size size, Mode mode = Normal, State state = Off ) [virtual]
-
              
-Sets this icon set to provide pixmap pixmap for size size, mode mode and state state. The icon set may also use pixmap for
-generating other pixmaps if they are not explicitly set.
-
               The size can be one of Automatic, Large or Small.  If Automatic is
-used, TQIconSet will determine if the pixmap is Small or Large from its
-pixel size.
-
               Pixmaps less than the width of a small generated icon are
-considered to be Small. You can use setIconSize() to set the preferred
-size of a generated icon.
-
               This function does nothing if pixmap is a null pixmap.
-
               
              See also reset().
-
-
              void TQIconSet::setPixmap ( const TQString & fileName, Size size, Mode mode = Normal, State state = Off ) [virtual]
-
              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
               The pixmap is loaded from fileName when it becomes necessary.
-
-
-
              
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
              
-
-
              Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
              TQt 3.3.8
              
-
              
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qiconview-h.html b/doc/html/qiconview-h.html
index bf10e5dcd..87b7a0084 100644
--- a/doc/html/qiconview-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qiconview-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qiconview.h Include File
+ntqiconview.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
              
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
              TQIconView Class Reference
              [iconview module]
              
-
-
              The TQIconView class provides an area with movable labelled icons.
-More...
-
              #include <qiconview.h>
-
              Inherits TQScrollView.
-
              List of all member functions.
-
              Public Members
              
-
-
              Public Slots
              
-
-
              Signals
              
-
-
              Properties
              
-
                
-
              • Arrangement arrangement - the arrangement mode of the icon view
                • 
-
              • bool autoArrange - whether the icon view rearranges its items when a new item is inserted
                • 
-
              • uint count - the number of items in the icon view  (read only)
                • 
-
              • int gridX - the horizontal grid of the icon view
                • 
-
              • int gridY - the vertical grid of the icon view
                • 
-
              • TQBrush itemTextBackground - the brush to use when drawing the background of an item's text
                • 
-
              • ItemTextPos itemTextPos - the position where the text of each item is drawn
                • 
-
              • bool itemsMovable - whether the user is allowed to move items around in the icon view
                • 
-
              • int maxItemTextLength - the maximum length (in characters) that an item's text may have
                • 
-
              • int maxItemWidth - the maximum width that an item may have
                • 
-
              • ResizeMode resizeMode - the resize mode of the icon view
                • 
-
              • SelectionMode selectionMode - the selection mode of the icon view
                • 
-
              • bool showToolTips - whether the icon view will display a tool tip with the complete text for any truncated item text
                • 
-
              • bool sortDirection - whether the sort direction for inserting new items is ascending;  (read only)
                • 
-
              • bool sorting - whether the icon view sorts on insertion  (read only)
                • 
-
              • int spacing - the space in pixels between icon view items
                • 
-
              • bool wordWrapIconText - whether the item text will be word-wrapped if it is too long
                • 
-
              
-
              Protected Members
              
-
-
              Protected Slots
              
-
-
              Detailed Description
              
-
-
-The TQIconView class provides an area with movable labelled icons.
-
               
-
-
-
               A TQIconView can display and manage a grid or other 2D layout of
-labelled icons. Each labelled icon is a TQIconViewItem. Items
-(TQIconViewItems) can be added or deleted at any time; items can be
-moved within the TQIconView. Single or multiple items can be
-selected. Items can be renamed in-place. TQIconView also supports
-drag and drop.
-
               Each item contains a label string, a pixmap or picture (the icon
-itself) and optionally a sort key. The sort key is used for
-sorting the items and defaults to the label string. The label
-string can be displayed below or to the right of the icon (see ItemTextPos).
-
               The simplest way to create a TQIconView is to create a TQIconView
-object and create some TQIconViewItems with the TQIconView as their
-parent, set the icon view's geometry and show it.
-For example:
-
              -    TQIconView *iv = new TQIconView( this );
-    TQDir dir( path, "*.xpm" );
-    for ( uint i = 0; i < dir.count(); i++ ) {
-        (void) new TQIconViewItem( iv, dir[i], TQPixmap( path + dir[i] ) );
-    }
-    iv->resize( 600, 400 );
-    iv->show();
-    
              
- 
-
               The TQIconViewItem call passes a pointer to the TQIconView we wish to
-populate, along with the label text and a TQPixmap.
-
               When an item is inserted the TQIconView allocates a position for it.
-Existing items are rearranged if autoArrange() is TRUE. The
-default arrangement is LeftToRight -- the TQIconView fills up
-the left-most column from top to bottom, then moves one column
-right and fills that from top to bottom and so on. The
-arrangement can be modified with any of the following approaches:
-
                
-
              •  Call setArrangement(), e.g. with TopToBottom which will fill
-the top-most row from left to right, then moves one row down
-and fills that row from left to right and so on.
-
              •  Construct each TQIconViewItem using a constructor which allows
-you to specify which item the new one is to follow.
-
              •  Call setSorting() or sort() to sort the items.
-
              
-
               The spacing between items is set with setSpacing(). Items can be
-laid out using a fixed grid using setGridX() and setGridY(); by
-default the TQIconView calculates a grid dynamically. The position
-of items' label text is set with setItemTextPos(). The text's
-background can be set with setItemTextBackground(). The maximum
-width of an item and of its text are set with setMaxItemWidth()
-and setMaxItemTextLength(). The label text will be word-wrapped if
-it is too long; this is controlled by setWordWrapIconText(). If
-the label text is truncated, the user can still see the entire
-text in a tool tip if they hover the mouse over the item. This is
-controlled with setShowToolTips().
-
               Items which are selectable may be selected depending on the SelectionMode;
-the default is Single. Because TQIconView offers multiple
-selection it must display keyboard focus and selection state
-separately. Therefore there are functions to set the selection
-state of an item (setSelected()) and to select which item displays
-keyboard focus (setCurrentItem()). When multiple items may be
-selected the icon view provides a rubberband, too.
-
               When in-place renaming is enabled (it is disabled by default), the
-user may change the item's label. They do this by selecting the item
-(single clicking it or navigating to it with the arrow keys), then
-single clicking it (or pressing F2), and entering their text. If no
-key has been set with TQIconViewItem::setKey() the new text will also
-serve as the key. (See TQIconViewItem::setRenameEnabled().)
-
               You can control whether users can move items themselves with
-setItemsMovable().
-
               Because the internal structure used to store the icon view items is
-linear, no iterator class is needed to iterate over all the items.
-Instead we iterate by getting the first item from the icon view
-and then each subsequent (TQIconViewItem::nextItem()) from each
-item in turn:
-
              -        for ( TQIconViewItem *item = iv->firstItem(); item; item = item->nextItem() )
-            do_something( item );
-    
              
- 
-TQIconView also provides currentItem(). You can search for an item
-using findItem() (searching by position or for label text) and
-with findFirstVisibleItem() and findLastVisibleItem(). The number
-of items is returned by count(). An item can be removed from an
-icon view using takeItem(); to delete an item use delete. All
-the items can be deleted with clear().
-
               The TQIconView emits a wide range of useful signals, including
-selectionChanged(), currentChanged(), clicked(), moved() and
-itemRenamed().
-
               
-
               Drag and Drop
-
              
-
               TQIconView supports the drag and drop of items within the TQIconView
-itself. It also supports the drag and drop of items out of or into
-the TQIconView and drag and drop onto items themselves. The drag and
-drop of items outside the TQIconView can be achieved in a simple way
-with basic functionality, or in a more sophisticated way which
-provides more power and control.
-
               The simple approach to dragging items out of the icon view is to
-subclass TQIconView and reimplement TQIconView::dragObject().
-
               
              -    TQDragObject *MyIconView::dragObject()
-    {
-        return new TQTextDrag( currentItem()->text(), this );
-    }
-    
              
- 
-
               In this example we create a TQTextDrag object, (derived from
-TQDragObject), containing the item's label and return it as the drag
-object. We could just as easily have created a TQImageDrag from the
-item's pixmap and returned that instead.
-
               TQIconViews and their TQIconViewItems can also be the targets of drag
-and drops. To make the TQIconView itself able to accept drops connect
-to the dropped() signal. When a drop occurs this signal will be
-emitted with a TQDragEvent and a TQValueList of TQIconDragItems. To
-make a TQIconViewItem into a drop target subclass TQIconViewItem and
-reimplement TQIconViewItem::acceptDrop() and
-TQIconViewItem::dropped().
-
               
              -    bool MyIconViewItem::acceptDrop( const TQMimeSource *mime ) const
-    {
-        if ( mime->provides( "text/plain" ) )
-            return TRUE;
-        return FALSE;
-    }
-
-    void MyIconViewItem::dropped( TQDropEvent *evt, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem>& )
-    {
-        TQString label;
-        if ( TQTextDrag::decode( evt, label ) )
-            setText( label );
-    }
-    
              
- 
-
               See iconview/simple_dd/main.h and iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp for a simple drag and drop example
-which demonstrates drag and drop between a TQIconView and a
-TQListBox.
-
               If you want to use extended drag-and-drop or have drag shapes drawn
-you must take a more sophisticated approach.
-
               The first part is starting drags -- you should use a TQIconDrag (or a
-class derived from it) for the drag object. In dragObject() create the
-drag object, populate it with TQIconDragItems and return it. Normally
-such a drag should offer each selected item's data. So in dragObject()
-you should iterate over all the items, and create a TQIconDragItem for
-each selected item, and append these items with TQIconDrag::append() to
-the TQIconDrag object. You can use TQIconDragItem::setData() to set the
-data of each item that should be dragged. If you want to offer the
-data in additional mime-types, it's best to use a class derived from
-TQIconDrag, which implements additional encoding and decoding
-functions.
-
               When a drag enters the icon view, there is little to do. Simply
-connect to the dropped() signal and reimplement
-TQIconViewItem::acceptDrop() and TQIconViewItem::dropped(). If you've
-used a TQIconDrag (or a subclass of it) the second argument to the
-dropped signal contains a TQValueList of TQIconDragItems -- you can
-access their data by calling TQIconDragItem::data() on each one.
-
               For an example implementation of complex drag-and-drop look at the
-fileiconview example (qt/examples/fileiconview).
-
               
              See also TQIconViewItem::setDragEnabled(), TQIconViewItem::setDropEnabled(), TQIconViewItem::acceptDrop(), TQIconViewItem::dropped(), and Advanced Widgets.
-
-
                
-
-
              Member Type Documentation
              
-
              TQIconView::Arrangement
              
-
-
               This enum type determines in which direction the items flow when
-the view runs out of space.
-
                
-
              • TQIconView::LeftToRight - Items which don't fit into the view cause the
-viewport to extend vertically (you get a vertical scrollbar).
-
              • TQIconView::TopToBottom - Items which don't fit into the view cause the
-viewport to extend horizontally (you get a horizontal scrollbar).
-
              
-
              TQIconView::ItemTextPos
              
-
-
               This enum type specifies the position of the item text in relation
-to the icon.
-
                
-
              • TQIconView::Bottom - The text is drawn below the icon.
-
              • TQIconView::Right - The text is drawn to the right of the icon.
-
              
-
              TQIconView::ResizeMode
               
-
               This enum type is used to tell TQIconView how it should treat the
-positions of its icons when the widget is resized. The modes are:
-
                
-
              • TQIconView::Fixed - The icons' positions are not changed.
-
              • TQIconView::Adjust - The icons' positions are adjusted to be within the
-new geometry, if possible.
-
              
-
              TQIconView::SelectionMode
              
-
-
               This enumerated type is used by TQIconView to indicate how it
-reacts to selection by the user. It has four values:
-
                
-
              • TQIconView::Single - When the user selects an item, any already-selected
-item becomes unselected and the user cannot unselect the selected
-item. This means that the user can never clear the selection. (The
-application programmer can, using TQIconView::clearSelection().)
-
              • TQIconView::Multi - When the user selects an item, e.g. by navigating
-to it with the keyboard arrow keys or by clicking it, the
-selection status of that item is toggled and the other items are
-left alone. Also, multiple items can be selected by dragging the
-mouse while the left mouse button stays pressed.
-
              • TQIconView::Extended - When the user selects an item the selection is
-cleared and the new item selected. However, if the user presses
-the Ctrl key when clicking on an item, the clicked item gets
-toggled and all other items are left untouched. If the user
-presses the Shift key while clicking on an item, all items between
-the current item and the clicked item get selected or unselected,
-depending on the state of the clicked item. Also, multiple items
-can be selected by dragging the mouse while the left mouse button
-stays pressed.
-
              • TQIconView::NoSelection - Items cannot be selected.
-
               To summarise: Single is a real single-selection icon view; Multi a real multi-selection icon view; Extended is an icon
-view in which users can select multiple items but usually want to
-select either just one or a range of contiguous items; and NoSelection mode is for an icon view where the user can look but
-not touch.
-
-
              Member Function Documentation
              
-
              TQIconView::TQIconView ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
-
              
-Constructs an empty icon view called name, with parent parent and using the widget flags f.
-
-
              TQIconView::~TQIconView () [virtual]
-
              
-Destroys the icon view and deletes all items.
-
-
              void TQIconView::adjustItems () [virtual protected slot]
-
              
-Adjusts the positions of the items to the geometry of the icon
-view.
-
-
              void TQIconView::arrangeItemsInGrid ( const TQSize & grid, bool update = TRUE ) [virtual slot]
-
              
-This variant uses grid instead of (gridX(), gridY()). If grid is invalid (see TQSize::isValid()), arrangeItemsInGrid()
-calculates a valid grid itself and uses that.
-
               If update is TRUE (the default) the viewport is repainted.
-
-
              Example: fileiconview/qfileiconview.h.
-
              void TQIconView::arrangeItemsInGrid ( bool update = TRUE ) [virtual slot]
-
              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
               Arranges all the items in the grid given by gridX() and gridY().
-
               Even if sorting() is enabled, the items are not sorted by this
-function. If you want to sort or rearrange the items, use
-iconview->sort(iconview->sortDirection()).
-
               If update is TRUE (the default), the viewport is repainted as
-well.
-
               
              See also TQIconView::gridX, TQIconView::gridY, and TQIconView::sort().
-
-
              Arrangement TQIconView::arrangement () const
-
              Returns the arrangement mode of the icon view.
-See the "arrangement" property for details.
-
              bool TQIconView::autoArrange () const
-
              Returns TRUE if the icon view rearranges its items when a new item is inserted; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "autoArrange" property for details.
-
              void TQIconView::clear () [virtual]
-
              
-Clears the icon view. All items are deleted.
-
-
              void TQIconView::clearSelection () [virtual]
-
              
-Unselects all the items.
-
-
              void TQIconView::clicked ( TQIconViewItem * item ) [signal]
-
              
-
-
               This signal is emitted when the user clicks any mouse button. If
-item is non-null, the cursor is on item. If item is null,
-the mouse cursor isn't on any item.
-
               
              See also mouseButtonClicked(), rightButtonClicked(), and pressed().
-
-
              void TQIconView::clicked ( TQIconViewItem * item, const TQPoint & pos ) [signal]
-
              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
               This signal is emitted when the user clicks any mouse button on an
-icon view item. item is a pointer to the item that has been
-clicked.
-
               pos is the position of the mouse cursor in the global coordinate
-system (TQMouseEvent::globalPos()). (If the click's press and release
-differ by a pixel or two, pos is the  position at release time.)
-
               
              See also mouseButtonClicked(), rightButtonClicked(), and pressed().
-
-
              void TQIconView::contextMenuRequested ( TQIconViewItem * item, const TQPoint & pos ) [signal]
-
              
-
-
               This signal is emitted when the user invokes a context menu with
-the right mouse button or with special system keys, with item
-being the item under the mouse cursor or the current item,
-respectively.
-
               pos is the position for the context menu in the global
-coordinate system.
-
-
              uint TQIconView::count () const
-
              Returns the number of items in the icon view.
-See the "count" property for details.
-
              void TQIconView::currentChanged ( TQIconViewItem * item ) [signal]
-
              
-
-
               This signal is emitted when a new item becomes current. item is
-the new current item (or 0 if no item is now current).
-
               
              See also currentItem().
-
-
              TQIconViewItem * TQIconView::currentItem () const
-
              
-Returns a pointer to the current item of the icon view, or 0 if no
-item is current.
-
               
              See also setCurrentItem(), firstItem(), and lastItem().
-
-
              void TQIconView::doAutoScroll () [virtual protected slot]
-
              
-Performs autoscrolling when selecting multiple icons with the
-rubber band.
-
-
              void TQIconView::doubleClicked ( TQIconViewItem * item ) [signal]
-
              
-
-
               This signal is emitted when the user double-clicks on item.
-
-
              TQDragObject * TQIconView::dragObject () [virtual protected]
-
              
-Returns the TQDragObject that should be used for drag-and-drop.
-This function is called by the icon view when starting a drag to
-get the dragobject that should be used for the drag. Subclasses
-may reimplement this.
-
               
              See also TQIconDrag.
-
-
              Examples: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp and iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp.
-
              void TQIconView::drawBackground ( TQPainter * p, const TQRect & r ) [virtual protected]
-
              
-This function is called to draw the rectangle r of the
-background using the painter p.
-
               The default implementation fills r with the viewport's
-backgroundBrush(). Subclasses may reimplement this to draw custom
-backgrounds.
-
               
              See also contentsX, contentsY, and drawContents().
-
-
              void TQIconView::drawRubber ( TQPainter * p ) [virtual protected]
-
              
-Draws the rubber band using the painter p.
-
-
              void TQIconView::dropped ( TQDropEvent * e, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem> & lst ) [signal]
-
              
-
-
               This signal is emitted when a drop event occurs in the viewport
-(but not on any icon) which the icon view itself can't handle.
-
               e provides all the information about the drop. If the drag
-object of the drop was a TQIconDrag, lst contains the list of
-the dropped items. You can get the data using
-TQIconDragItem::data() on each item. If the lst is empty, i.e.
-the drag was not a TQIconDrag, you have to decode the data in e
-and work with that.
-
               Note TQIconViewItems may be drop targets; if a drop event occurs on
-an item the item handles the drop.
-
-
              Examples: iconview/main.cpp and iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp.
-
              void TQIconView::emitSelectionChanged ( TQIconViewItem * i = 0 ) [protected]
-
              
-Emits a signal to indicate selection changes. i is the
-TQIconViewItem that was selected or de-selected.
-
               You should never need to call this function.
-
-
              void TQIconView::ensureItemVisible ( TQIconViewItem * item )
-
              
-Makes sure that item is entirely visible. If necessary,
-ensureItemVisible() scrolls the icon view.
-
               
              See also ensureVisible().
-
-
              TQIconViewItem * TQIconView::findFirstVisibleItem ( const TQRect & r ) const
-
              
-Finds the first item whose bounding rectangle overlaps r and
-returns a pointer to that item. r is given in content
-coordinates. Returns 0 if no item overlaps r.
-
               If you want to find all items that touch r, you will need to
-use this function and nextItem() in a loop ending at
-findLastVisibleItem() and test TQIconViewItem::rect() for each of
-these items.
-
               
              See also findLastVisibleItem() and TQIconViewItem::rect().
-
-
              TQIconViewItem * TQIconView::findItem ( const TQPoint & pos ) const
-
              
-Returns a pointer to the item that contains point pos, which is
-given in contents coordinates, or 0 if no item contains point pos.
-
-
              TQIconViewItem * TQIconView::findItem ( const TQString & text, ComparisonFlags compare = BeginsWith ) const
-
              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
               Returns a pointer to the first item whose text begins with text, or 0 if no such item could be found. Use the compare flag
-to control the comparison behaviour. (See TQt::StringComparisonMode.)
-
-
              TQIconViewItem * TQIconView::findLastVisibleItem ( const TQRect & r ) const
-
              
-Finds the last item whose bounding rectangle overlaps r and
-returns a pointer to that item. r is given in content
-coordinates. Returns 0 if no item overlaps r.
-
               
              See also findFirstVisibleItem().
-
-
              TQIconViewItem * TQIconView::firstItem () const
-
              
-Returns a pointer to the first item of the icon view, or 0 if
-there are no items in the icon view.
-
               
              See also lastItem() and currentItem().
-
-
              int TQIconView::gridX () const
-
              Returns the horizontal grid of the icon view.
-See the "gridX" property for details.
-
              int TQIconView::gridY () const
-
              Returns the vertical grid of the icon view.
-See the "gridY" property for details.
-
              int TQIconView::index ( const TQIconViewItem * item ) const
-
              
-Returns the index of item, or -1 if item doesn't exist in
-this icon view.
-
-
              void TQIconView::insertInGrid ( TQIconViewItem * item ) [virtual protected]
-
              
-Inserts the TQIconViewItem item in the icon view's grid. You should never need to call this function. Instead, insert
-TQIconViewItems by creating them with a pointer to the TQIconView
-that they are to be inserted into.
-
-
              void TQIconView::insertItem ( TQIconViewItem * item, TQIconViewItem * after = 0L ) [virtual]
-
              
-Inserts the icon view item item after after. If after is
-0, item is appended after the last item.
-
               You should never need to call this function. Instead create
-TQIconViewItem's and associate them with your icon view like this:
-
               
              -        (void) new TQIconViewItem( myIconview, "The text of the item", aPixmap );
-    
              
- 
-
-
              void TQIconView::invertSelection () [virtual]
-
              
-Inverts the selection. Works only in Multi and Extended selection
-mode.
-
-
              bool TQIconView::isRenaming () const
-
              
-Returns TRUE if an iconview item is being renamed; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
-
              void TQIconView::itemRenamed ( TQIconViewItem * item, const TQString & name ) [signal]
-
              
-
-
               This signal is emitted when item has been renamed to name,
-usually by in-place renaming.
-
               
              See also TQIconViewItem::setRenameEnabled() and TQIconViewItem::rename().
-
-
              void TQIconView::itemRenamed ( TQIconViewItem * item ) [signal]
-
              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
               This signal is emitted when item has been renamed, usually by
-in-place renaming.
-
               
              See also TQIconViewItem::setRenameEnabled() and TQIconViewItem::rename().
-
-
              TQBrush TQIconView::itemTextBackground () const
-
              Returns the brush to use when drawing the background of an item's text.
-See the "itemTextBackground" property for details.
-
              ItemTextPos TQIconView::itemTextPos () const
-
              Returns the position where the text of each item is drawn.
-See the "itemTextPos" property for details.
-
              bool TQIconView::itemsMovable () const
-
              Returns TRUE if the user is allowed to move items around in the icon view; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "itemsMovable" property for details.
-
              TQIconViewItem * TQIconView::lastItem () const
-
              
-Returns a pointer to the last item of the icon view, or 0 if there
-are no items in the icon view.
-
               
              See also firstItem() and currentItem().
-
-
              TQIconViewItem * TQIconView::makeRowLayout ( TQIconViewItem * begin, int & y, bool & changed ) [protected]
-
              
-Lays out a row of icons (if Arrangement == TopToBottom this is
-a column). Starts laying out with the item begin. y is the
-starting coordinate. Returns the last item of the row (column) and
-sets the new starting coordinate to y. The changed parameter
-is used internally.
-
               Warning: This function may be made private in a future version of
-TQt. We do not recommend calling it.
-
-
              int TQIconView::maxItemTextLength () const
-
              Returns the maximum length (in characters) that an item's text may have.
-See the "maxItemTextLength" property for details.
-
              int TQIconView::maxItemWidth () const
-
              Returns the maximum width that an item may have.
-See the "maxItemWidth" property for details.
-
              void TQIconView::mouseButtonClicked ( int button, TQIconViewItem * item, const TQPoint & pos ) [signal]
-
              
-
-
               This signal is emitted when the user clicks mouse button button. If item is non-null, the cursor is on item. If item is null, the mouse cursor isn't on any item.
-
               pos is the position of the mouse cursor in the global
-coordinate system (TQMouseEvent::globalPos()). (If the click's
-press and release differ by a pixel or two, pos is the
-position at release time.)
-
               
              See also mouseButtonPressed(), rightButtonClicked(), and clicked().
-
-
              void TQIconView::mouseButtonPressed ( int button, TQIconViewItem * item, const TQPoint & pos ) [signal]
-
              
-
-
               This signal is emitted when the user presses mouse button button. If item is non-null, the cursor is on item. If item is null, the mouse cursor isn't on any item.
-
               pos is the position of the mouse cursor in the global
-coordinate system (TQMouseEvent::globalPos()).
-
               
              See also rightButtonClicked() and pressed().
-
-
              void TQIconView::moved () [signal]
-
              
-
-
               This signal is emitted after successfully dropping one (or more)
-items of the icon view. If the items should be removed, it's best
-to do so in a slot connected to this signal.
-
-
              Example: iconview/main.cpp.
-
              void TQIconView::onItem ( TQIconViewItem * item ) [signal]
-
              
-
-
               This signal is emitted when the user moves the mouse cursor onto
-an item, similar to the TQWidget::enterEvent() function.
-
-
              void TQIconView::onViewport () [signal]
-
              
-
-
               This signal is emitted when the user moves the mouse cursor from
-an item to an empty part of the icon view.
-
               
              See also onItem().
-
-
              void TQIconView::pressed ( TQIconViewItem * item ) [signal]
-
              
-
-
               This signal is emitted when the user presses any mouse button. If
-item is non-null, the cursor is on item. If item is null,
-the mouse cursor isn't on any item.
-
               
              See also mouseButtonPressed(), rightButtonPressed(), and clicked().
-
-
              void TQIconView::pressed ( TQIconViewItem * item, const TQPoint & pos ) [signal]
-
              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
               This signal is emitted when the user presses any mouse button. If
-item is non-null, the cursor is on item. If item is null,
-the mouse cursor isn't on any item.
-
               pos is the position of the mouse cursor in the global
-coordinate system (TQMouseEvent::globalPos()). (If the click's
-press and release differ by a pixel or two, pos is the
-position at release time.)
-
               
              See also mouseButtonPressed(), rightButtonPressed(), and clicked().
-
-
              void TQIconView::repaintItem ( TQIconViewItem * item ) [virtual]
-
              
-Repaints the item.
-
-
              void TQIconView::repaintSelectedItems ()
-
              
-Repaints the selected items.
-
-
              ResizeMode TQIconView::resizeMode () const
-
              Returns the resize mode of the icon view.
-See the "resizeMode" property for details.
-
              void TQIconView::returnPressed ( TQIconViewItem * item ) [signal]
-
              
-
-
               This signal is emitted if the user presses the Return or Enter
-key. item is the currentItem() at the time of the keypress.
-
-
              void TQIconView::rightButtonClicked ( TQIconViewItem * item, const TQPoint & pos ) [signal]
-
              
-
-
               This signal is emitted when the user clicks the right mouse
-button. If item is non-null, the cursor is on item. If item is null, the mouse cursor isn't on any item.
-
               pos is the position of the mouse cursor in the global
-coordinate system (TQMouseEvent::globalPos()). (If the click's
-press and release differ by a pixel or two, pos is the
-position at release time.)
-
               
              See also rightButtonPressed(), mouseButtonClicked(), and clicked().
-
-
              void TQIconView::rightButtonPressed ( TQIconViewItem * item, const TQPoint & pos ) [signal]
-
              
-
-
               This signal is emitted when the user presses the right mouse
-button. If item is non-null, the cursor is on item. If item is null, the mouse cursor isn't on any item.
-
               pos is the position of the mouse cursor in the global
-coordinate system (TQMouseEvent::globalPos()).
-
-
              void TQIconView::selectAll ( bool select ) [virtual]
-
              
-In Multi and Extended modes, this function sets all items to be
-selected if select is TRUE, and to be unselected if select
-is FALSE.
-
               In Single and NoSelection modes, this function only changes the
-selection status of currentItem().
-
-
              void TQIconView::selectionChanged () [signal]
-
              
-
-
               This signal is emitted when the selection has been changed. It's
-emitted in each selection mode.
-
-
              void TQIconView::selectionChanged ( TQIconViewItem * item ) [signal]
-
              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
               This signal is emitted when the selection changes. item is the
-newly selected item. This signal is emitted only in single
-selection mode.
-
-
              SelectionMode TQIconView::selectionMode () const
-
              Returns the selection mode of the icon view.
-See the "selectionMode" property for details.
-
              void TQIconView::setArrangement ( Arrangement am ) [virtual]
-
              Sets the arrangement mode of the icon view to am.
-See the "arrangement" property for details.
-
              void TQIconView::setAutoArrange ( bool b ) [virtual]
-
              Sets whether the icon view rearranges its items when a new item is inserted to b.
-See the "autoArrange" property for details.
-
              void TQIconView::setCurrentItem ( TQIconViewItem * item ) [virtual]
-
              
-Makes item the new current item of the icon view.
-
-
              void TQIconView::setGridX ( int rx ) [virtual]
-
              Sets the horizontal grid of the icon view to rx.
-See the "gridX" property for details.
-
              void TQIconView::setGridY ( int ry ) [virtual]
-
              Sets the vertical grid of the icon view to ry.
-See the "gridY" property for details.
-
              void TQIconView::setItemTextBackground ( const TQBrush & b ) [virtual]
-
              Sets the brush to use when drawing the background of an item's text to b.
-See the "itemTextBackground" property for details.
-
              void TQIconView::setItemTextPos ( ItemTextPos pos ) [virtual]
-
              Sets the position where the text of each item is drawn to pos.
-See the "itemTextPos" property for details.
-
              void TQIconView::setItemsMovable ( bool b ) [virtual]
-
              Sets whether the user is allowed to move items around in the icon view to b.
-See the "itemsMovable" property for details.
-
              void TQIconView::setMaxItemTextLength ( int w ) [virtual]
-
              Sets the maximum length (in characters) that an item's text may have to w.
-See the "maxItemTextLength" property for details.
-
              void TQIconView::setMaxItemWidth ( int w ) [virtual]
-
              Sets the maximum width that an item may have to w.
-See the "maxItemWidth" property for details.
-
              void TQIconView::setResizeMode ( ResizeMode am ) [virtual]
-
              Sets the resize mode of the icon view to am.
-See the "resizeMode" property for details.
-
              void TQIconView::setSelected ( TQIconViewItem * item, bool s, bool cb = FALSE ) [virtual]
-
              
-Selects or unselects item depending on s, and may also
-unselect other items, depending on TQIconView::selectionMode() and
-cb.
-
               If s is FALSE, item is unselected.
-
               If s is TRUE and TQIconView::selectionMode() is Single, item is selected, and the item which was selected is unselected.
-
               If s is TRUE and TQIconView::selectionMode() is Extended, item is selected. If cb is TRUE, the selection state of the
-icon view's other items is left unchanged. If cb is FALSE (the
-default) all other items are unselected.
-
               If s is TRUE and TQIconView::selectionMode() is Multi item
-is selected.
-
               Note that cb is used only if TQIconView::selectionMode() is Extended. cb defaults to FALSE.
-
               All items whose selection status is changed repaint themselves.
-
-
              void TQIconView::setSelectionMode ( SelectionMode m ) [virtual]
-
              Sets the selection mode of the icon view to m.
-See the "selectionMode" property for details.
-
              void TQIconView::setShowToolTips ( bool b ) [virtual]
-
              Sets whether the icon view will display a tool tip with the complete text for any truncated item text to b.
-See the "showToolTips" property for details.
-
              void TQIconView::setSorting ( bool sort, bool ascending = TRUE )
-
              
-If sort is TRUE, this function sets the icon view to sort items
-when a new item is inserted. If sort is FALSE, the icon view
-will not be sorted.
-
               Note that autoArrange() must be TRUE for sorting to take place.
-
               If ascending is TRUE (the default), items are sorted in
-ascending order. If ascending is FALSE, items are sorted in
-descending order.
-
               TQIconViewItem::compare() is used to compare pairs of items. The
-sorting is based on the items' keys; these default to the items'
-text unless specifically set to something else.
-
               
              See also TQIconView::autoArrange, TQIconView::autoArrange, sortDirection, sort(), and TQIconViewItem::setKey().
-
-
              void TQIconView::setSpacing ( int sp ) [virtual]
-
              Sets the space in pixels between icon view items to sp.
-See the "spacing" property for details.
-
              void TQIconView::setWordWrapIconText ( bool b ) [virtual]
-
              Sets whether the item text will be word-wrapped if it is too long to b.
-See the "wordWrapIconText" property for details.
-
              bool TQIconView::showToolTips () const
-
              Returns TRUE if the icon view will display a tool tip with the complete text for any truncated item text; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "showToolTips" property for details.
-
              void TQIconView::slotUpdate () [virtual protected slot]
-
              
-This slot is used for a slightly-delayed update.
-
               The icon view is not redrawn immediately after inserting a new item
-but after a very small delay using a TQTimer. This means that when
-many items are inserted in a loop the icon view is probably redrawn
-only once at the end of the loop. This makes the insertions both
-flicker-free and faster.
-
-
              void TQIconView::sort ( bool ascending = TRUE ) [virtual]
-
              
-Sorts and rearranges all the items in the icon view. If ascending is TRUE, the items are sorted in increasing order,
-otherwise they are sorted in decreasing order.
-
               TQIconViewItem::compare() is used to compare pairs of items. The
-sorting is based on the items' keys; these default to the items'
-text unless specifically set to something else.
-
               Note that this function sets the sort order to ascending.
-
               
              See also TQIconViewItem::key(), TQIconViewItem::setKey(), TQIconViewItem::compare(), TQIconView::setSorting(), and TQIconView::sortDirection.
-
-
              bool TQIconView::sortDirection () const
-
              Returns TRUE if the sort direction for inserting new items is ascending;; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "sortDirection" property for details.
-
              bool TQIconView::sorting () const
-
              Returns TRUE if the icon view sorts on insertion; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "sorting" property for details.
-
              int TQIconView::spacing () const
-
              Returns the space in pixels between icon view items.
-See the "spacing" property for details.
-
              void TQIconView::startDrag () [virtual protected]
-
              
-Starts a drag.
-
-
              void TQIconView::takeItem ( TQIconViewItem * item ) [virtual]
-
              
-Takes the icon view item item out of the icon view and causes
-an update of the screen display. The item is not deleted. You
-should normally not need to call this function because
-TQIconViewItem::~TQIconViewItem() calls it. The normal way to delete
-an item is to delete it.
-
-
              bool TQIconView::wordWrapIconText () const
-
              Returns TRUE if the item text will be word-wrapped if it is too long; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "wordWrapIconText" property for details.
-
              Property Documentation
              
-
              Arrangement arrangement
              
-
              This property holds the arrangement mode of the icon view.
-
              This can be LeftToRight or TopToBottom. The default is LeftToRight.
-
-
              Set this property's value with setArrangement() and get this property's value with arrangement().
-
              bool autoArrange
              
-
              This property holds whether the icon view rearranges its items when a new item is inserted.
-
              The default is TRUE.
-
               Note that if the icon view is not visible at the time of
-insertion, TQIconView defers all position-related work until it is
-shown and then calls arrangeItemsInGrid().
-
-
              Set this property's value with setAutoArrange() and get this property's value with autoArrange().
-
              uint count
              
-
              This property holds the number of items in the icon view.
-
              
-
              Get this property's value with count().
-
              int gridX
              
-
              This property holds the horizontal grid of the icon view.
-
              If the value is -1, (the default), TQIconView computes suitable
-column widths based on the icon view's contents.
-
               Note that setting a grid width overrides setMaxItemWidth().
-
-
              Set this property's value with setGridX() and get this property's value with gridX().
-
              int gridY
              
-
              This property holds the vertical grid of the icon view.
-
              If the value is -1, (the default), TQIconView computes suitable
-column heights based on the icon view's contents.
-
-
              Set this property's value with setGridY() and get this property's value with gridY().
-
              TQBrush itemTextBackground
              
-
              This property holds the brush to use when drawing the background of an item's text.
-
              By default this brush is set to NoBrush, meaning that only the
-normal icon view background is used.
-
-
              Set this property's value with setItemTextBackground() and get this property's value with itemTextBackground().
-
              ItemTextPos itemTextPos
              
-
              This property holds the position where the text of each item is drawn.
-
              Valid values are Bottom or Right. The default is Bottom.
-
-
              Set this property's value with setItemTextPos() and get this property's value with itemTextPos().
-
              bool itemsMovable
              
-
              This property holds whether the user is allowed to move items around in the icon view.
-
              The default is TRUE.
-
-
              Set this property's value with setItemsMovable() and get this property's value with itemsMovable().
-
              int maxItemTextLength
              
-
              This property holds the maximum length (in characters) that an item's text may have.
-
              The default is 255 characters.
-
-
              Set this property's value with setMaxItemTextLength() and get this property's value with maxItemTextLength().
-
              int maxItemWidth
              
-
              This property holds the maximum width that an item may have.
-
              The default is 100 pixels.
-
               Note that if the gridX() value is set TQIconView will ignore
-this property.
-
-
              Set this property's value with setMaxItemWidth() and get this property's value with maxItemWidth().
-
              ResizeMode resizeMode
              
-
              This property holds the resize mode of the icon view.
-
              This can be Fixed or Adjust. The default is Fixed.
-See ResizeMode.
-
-
              Set this property's value with setResizeMode() and get this property's value with resizeMode().
-
              SelectionMode selectionMode
              
-
              This property holds the selection mode of the icon view.
-
              This can be Single (the default), Extended, Multi or NoSelection.
-
-
              Set this property's value with setSelectionMode() and get this property's value with selectionMode().
-
              bool showToolTips
              
-
              This property holds whether the icon view will display a tool tip with the complete text for any truncated item text.
-
              The default is TRUE. Note that this has no effect if
-setWordWrapIconText() is TRUE, as it is by default.
-
-
              Set this property's value with setShowToolTips() and get this property's value with showToolTips().
-
              bool sortDirection
              
-
              This property holds whether the sort direction for inserting new items is ascending;.
-
              The default is TRUE (i.e. ascending). This sort direction is only
-meaningful if both sorting() and autoArrange() are TRUE.
-
               To set the sort direction, use setSorting()
-
-
              Get this property's value with sortDirection().
-
              bool sorting
              
-
              This property holds whether the icon view sorts on insertion.
-
              The default is FALSE, i.e. no sorting on insertion.
-
               To set the sorting, use setSorting().
-
-
              Get this property's value with sorting().
-
              int spacing
              
-
              This property holds the space in pixels between icon view items.
-
              The default is 5 pixels.
-
               Negative values for spacing are illegal.
-
-
              Set this property's value with setSpacing() and get this property's value with spacing().
-
              bool wordWrapIconText
              
-
              This property holds whether the item text will be word-wrapped if it is too long.
-
              The default is TRUE.
-
               If this property is FALSE, icon text that is too long is
-truncated, and an ellipsis (...) appended to indicate that
-truncation has occurred. The full text can still be seen by the
-user if they hover the mouse because the full text is shown in a
-tooltip; see setShowToolTips().
-
-
              Set this property's value with setWordWrapIconText() and get this property's value with wordWrapIconText().
-
-
              
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
              
-
-
              Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
              TQt 3.3.8
              
-
              
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qiconviewitem-members.html b/doc/html/qiconviewitem-members.html
index 0e1f96236..98d7d5acc 100644
--- a/doc/html/qiconviewitem-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qiconviewitem-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qiconviewitem.html b/doc/html/qiconviewitem.html
index 924c01cdf..3fe8a34ed 100644
--- a/doc/html/qiconviewitem.html
+++ b/doc/html/qiconviewitem.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
              The TQIconViewItem class provides a single item in a TQIconView.
 More...
-
              #include <qiconview.h>
-
              Inherits TQt.
+
              #include <ntqiconview.h>
+
              Inherits TQt.
 
              List of all member functions.
 
              Public Members
              
 
                
@@ -109,12 +109,12 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                Detailed Description
                
 
 
-The TQIconViewItem class provides a single item in a TQIconView.
+The TQIconViewItem class provides a single item in a TQIconView.
 
                 
 
 
                 A TQIconViewItem contains an icon, a string and optionally a sort
 key, and can display itself in a TQIconView.
-The class is designed to be very similar to TQListView and TQListBox
+The class is designed to be very similar to TQListView and TQListBox
 in use, both via instantiation and subclassing.
 
                 The simplest way to create a TQIconViewItem and insert it into a
 TQIconView is to construct the item passing the constructor a
@@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ user but calling setRenameEnabled(TRUE) will all
 perform in-place editing of the item's text.
 
                 When the icon view is deleted all items in it are deleted
 automatically.
-
                 The TQIconView::firstItem() and TQIconViewItem::nextItem() functions
+
                 The TQIconView::firstItem() and TQIconViewItem::nextItem() functions
 provide a means of iterating over all the items in a TQIconView:
 
                 
                     TQIconViewItem *item;
@@ -158,48 +158,48 @@ view item also has functions for drag-and-drop which may be
 reimplemented.
 
                 
 Note: Pixmaps with individual dimensions larger than 300 pixels may
-not be displayed properly, depending on the arrangement in use. For example, pixmaps wider than 300 pixels
+not be displayed properly, depending on the arrangement in use. For example, pixmaps wider than 300 pixels
 will not be arranged correctly if the icon view uses a
-TQIconView::TopToBottom arrangement, and pixmaps taller than 300 pixels
+TQIconView::TopToBottom arrangement, and pixmaps taller than 300 pixels
 will not be arranged correctly if the icon view uses a
-TQIconView::LeftToRight arrangement.
+TQIconView::LeftToRight arrangement.
 
                See also Advanced Widgets.
 
 
                Member Function Documentation
                
-
                TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem ( TQIconView * parent )
+
                TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem ( TQIconView * parent )
 
                
 Constructs a TQIconViewItem and inserts it into icon view parent
 with no text and a default icon.
 
-
                TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem ( TQIconView * parent, TQIconViewItem * after )
+
                TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem ( TQIconView * parent, TQIconViewItem * after )
 
                
 Constructs a TQIconViewItem and inserts it into the icon view parent with no text and a default icon, after the icon view item
 after.
 
-
                TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem ( TQIconView * parent, const TQString & text )
+
                TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem ( TQIconView * parent, const TQString & text )
 
                
 Constructs an icon view item  and inserts it into the icon view parent using text as the text and a default icon.
 
-
                TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem ( TQIconView * parent, TQIconViewItem * after, const TQString & text )
+
                TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem ( TQIconView * parent, TQIconViewItem * after, const TQString & text )
 
                
 Constructs an icon view item and inserts it into the icon view parent using text as the text and a default icon, after the
 icon view item after.
 
-
                TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem ( TQIconView * parent, const TQString & text, const TQPixmap & icon )
+
                TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem ( TQIconView * parent, const TQString & text, const TQPixmap & icon )
 
                
 Constructs an icon view item and inserts it into the icon view parent using text as the text and icon as the icon.
 
-
                TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem ( TQIconView * parent, TQIconViewItem * after, const TQString & text, const TQPixmap & icon )
+
                TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem ( TQIconView * parent, TQIconViewItem * after, const TQString & text, const TQPixmap & icon )
 
                
 Constructs an icon view item and inserts it into the icon view parent using text as the text and icon as the icon, after
 the icon view item after.
 
                 
                See also setPixmap().
 
-
                TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem ( TQIconView * parent, const TQString & text, const TQPicture & picture )
+
                TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem ( TQIconView * parent, const TQString & text, const TQPicture & picture )
 
                
 Constructs an icon view item and inserts it into the icon view parent using text as the text and picture as the icon.
 
-
                TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem ( TQIconView * parent, TQIconViewItem * after, const TQString & text, const TQPicture & picture )
+
                TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem ( TQIconView * parent, TQIconViewItem * after, const TQString & text, const TQPicture & picture )
 
                
 Constructs an icon view item and inserts it into the icon view parent using text as the text and picture as the icon, after
 the icon view item after.
@@ -218,13 +218,13 @@ onto this item; otherwise returns FALSE.
 TQIconViewItem and reimplement acceptDrop() to accept drops.
 
 
                Examples: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp and iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp.
-
                void TQIconViewItem::calcRect ( const TQString & text_ = TQString::null ) [virtual protected]
+
                void TQIconViewItem::calcRect ( const TQString & text_ = TQString::null ) [virtual protected]
 
                
 This virtual function is responsible for calculating the
 rectangles returned by rect(), textRect() and pixmapRect().
 setRect(), setTextRect() and setPixmapRect() are provided mainly
 for reimplementations of this function.
-
                 text_ is an internal parameter which defaults to TQString::null.
+
                 text_ is an internal parameter which defaults to TQString::null.
 
 
                int TQIconViewItem::compare ( TQIconViewItem * i ) const [virtual]
 
                
@@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ Compares this icon view item to i. Returns -1 if this item is
 less than i, 0 if they are equal, and 1 if this icon view item
 is greater than i.
 
                 The default implementation compares the item keys (key()) using
-TQString::localeAwareCompare(). A reimplementation may use
+TQString::localeAwareCompare(). A reimplementation may use
 different values and a different comparison function. Here is a
 reimplementation that uses plain Unicode comparison:
 
                 
                @@ -242,9 +242,9 @@ reimplementation that uses plain Unicode comparison:
         }
     
                
  
-
                 
                See also key(), TQString::localeAwareCompare(), and TQString::compare().
+
                 
                See also key(), TQString::localeAwareCompare(), and TQString::compare().
 
-
                bool TQIconViewItem::contains ( const TQPoint & pnt ) const
+
                bool TQIconViewItem::contains ( const TQPoint & pnt ) const
 
                
 Returns TRUE if the item contains the point pnt (in contents
 coordinates); otherwise returns FALSE.
@@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ Returns TRUE if the user is allowed to drop something onto the
 item; otherwise returns FALSE.
 
                 
                See also setDropEnabled().
 
-
                void TQIconViewItem::dropped ( TQDropEvent * e, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem> & lst ) [virtual protected]
+
                void TQIconViewItem::dropped ( TQDropEvent * e, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem> & lst ) [virtual protected]
 
                
 
 
                 This function is called when something is dropped on the item. e provides all the information about the drop. If the drag object
@@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ reimplement this function.
 
 Returns the height of the item.
 
-
                TQIconView * TQIconViewItem::iconView () const
+
                TQIconView * TQIconViewItem::iconView () const
 
                
 Returns a pointer to this item's icon view parent.
 
@@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ Returns a pointer to this item's icon view parent.
 Returns the index of this item in the icon view, or -1 if an error
 occurred.
 
-
                bool TQIconViewItem::intersects ( const TQRect & r ) const
+
                bool TQIconViewItem::intersects ( const TQRect & r ) const
 
                
 Returns TRUE if the item intersects the rectangle r (in
 contents coordinates); otherwise returns FALSE.
@@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ Returns TRUE if the item is selected; otherwise returns FALSE.
 
                 
                See also setSelected().
 
 
                Example: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
-
                TQString TQIconViewItem::key () const [virtual]
+
                TQString TQIconViewItem::key () const [virtual]
 
                
 Returns the key of the icon view item or text() if no key has been
 explicitly set.
@@ -330,7 +330,7 @@ explicitly set.
 Moves the item to position (x, y) in the icon view (these
 are contents coordinates).
 
-
                bool TQIconViewItem::move ( const TQPoint & pnt ) [virtual]
+
                bool TQIconViewItem::move ( const TQPoint & pnt ) [virtual]
 
                
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 
                 Moves the item to the point pnt.
@@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 Moves the item dx pixels in the x-direction and dy pixels in
 the y-direction.
 
-
                void TQIconViewItem::moveBy ( const TQPoint & pnt ) [virtual]
+
                void TQIconViewItem::moveBy ( const TQPoint & pnt ) [virtual]
 
                
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 
                 Moves the item by the x, y values in point pnt.
@@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 
 Returns a pointer to the next item, or 0 if this is the last item
 in the icon view.
-
                 To find the first item use TQIconView::firstItem().
+
                 To find the first item use TQIconView::firstItem().
 
                 Example:
 
                     TQIconViewItem *item;
@@ -360,12 +360,12 @@ in the icon view.
 
                 
                See also prevItem().
 
 
                Example: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
-
                void TQIconViewItem::paintFocus ( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg ) [virtual protected]
+
                void TQIconViewItem::paintFocus ( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg ) [virtual protected]
 
                
 Paints the focus rectangle of the item using the painter p and
 the color group cg.
 
-
                void TQIconViewItem::paintItem ( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg ) [virtual protected]
+
                void TQIconViewItem::paintItem ( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg ) [virtual protected]
 
                
 Paints the item using the painter p and the color group cg.
 If you want the item to be drawn with a different font or color,
@@ -374,7 +374,7 @@ the painter's font, and then call the TQIconViewItem::paint
 with the changed values.
 
 
                Example: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
-
                TQPicture * TQIconViewItem::picture () const [virtual]
+
                TQPicture * TQIconViewItem::picture () const [virtual]
 
                
 Returns the icon of the icon view item if it is a picture, or 0 if
 it is a pixmap. In the latter case use pixmap() instead. Normally
@@ -385,7 +385,7 @@ pointer to the item's picture. If you do this, you must call
 calcRect() manually each time the size of this picture changes.
 
                 
                See also setPicture().
 
-
                TQPixmap * TQIconViewItem::pixmap () const [virtual]
+
                TQPixmap * TQIconViewItem::pixmap () const [virtual]
 
                
 Returns the icon of the icon view item if it is a pixmap, or 0 if
 it is a picture. In the latter case use picture() instead.
@@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ changes.
 
                 
                See also setPixmap().
 
 
                Example: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
-
                TQRect TQIconViewItem::pixmapRect ( bool relative = TRUE ) const
+
                TQRect TQIconViewItem::pixmapRect ( bool relative = TRUE ) const
 
                
 Returns the bounding rectangle of the item's icon.
 
                 If relative is TRUE, (the default), the rectangle is relative to
@@ -407,7 +407,7 @@ returned rectangle is relative to the origin of the icon view's
 contents coordinate system.
 
 
                Example: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
-
                TQPoint TQIconViewItem::pos () const
+
                TQPoint TQIconViewItem::pos () const
 
                
 Returns the position of the item (in contents coordinates).
 
@@ -415,9 +415,9 @@ Returns the position of the item (in contents coordinates).
 
 Returns a pointer to the previous item, or 0 if this is the first
 item in the icon view.
-
                 
                See also nextItem() and TQIconView::firstItem().
+
                 
                See also nextItem() and TQIconView::firstItem().
 
-
                TQRect TQIconViewItem::rect () const
+
                TQRect TQIconViewItem::rect () const
 
                
 Returns the bounding rectangle of the item (in contents
 coordinates).
@@ -431,7 +431,7 @@ Removes the editbox that is used for in-place renaming.
 Starts in-place renaming of an icon, if allowed.
 
                 This function sets up the icon view so that the user can edit the
 item text, and then returns. When the user is done, setText() will
-be called and TQIconView::itemRenamed() will be emitted (unless the
+be called and TQIconView::itemRenamed() will be emitted (unless the
 user canceled, e.g. by pressing the Escape key).
 
                 
                See also setRenameEnabled().
 
@@ -467,47 +467,47 @@ be dragged.
 If allow is TRUE, the icon view lets the user drop something on
 this icon view item.
 
-
                void TQIconViewItem::setItemRect ( const TQRect & r ) [protected]
+
                void TQIconViewItem::setItemRect ( const TQRect & r ) [protected]
 
                
 Sets the bounding rectangle of the whole item to r. This
 function is provided for subclasses which reimplement calcRect(),
 so that they can set the calculated rectangle. Any other use is discouraged.
 
                 
                See also calcRect(), textRect(), setTextRect(), pixmapRect(), and setPixmapRect().
 
-
                void TQIconViewItem::setKey ( const TQString & k ) [virtual]
+
                void TQIconViewItem::setKey ( const TQString & k ) [virtual]
 
                
 Sets k as the sort key of the icon view item. By default
 text() is used for sorting.
 
                 
                See also compare().
 
 
                Example: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
-
                void TQIconViewItem::setPicture ( const TQPicture & icon ) [virtual]
+
                void TQIconViewItem::setPicture ( const TQPicture & icon ) [virtual]
 
                
 Sets icon as the item's icon in the icon view. This function
 might be a no-op if you reimplement picture().
 
                 
                See also picture().
 
-
                void TQIconViewItem::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & icon ) [virtual]
+
                void TQIconViewItem::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & icon ) [virtual]
 
                
 Sets icon as the item's icon in the icon view. This function
 might be a no-op if you reimplement pixmap().
 
                 Note: Pixmaps with individual dimensions larger than 300 pixels may
-not be displayed properly, depending on the arrangement in use. See the main class
+not be displayed properly, depending on the arrangement in use. See the main class
     documentation for details.
 
                 
                See also pixmap().
 
-
                void TQIconViewItem::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & icon, bool recalc, bool redraw = TRUE ) [virtual]
+
                void TQIconViewItem::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & icon, bool recalc, bool redraw = TRUE ) [virtual]
 
                
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 
                 Sets icon as the item's icon in the icon view. If recalc is
 TRUE, the icon view's layout is recalculated. If redraw is TRUE
 (the default), the icon view is repainted.
 
                 Note: Pixmaps with individual dimensions larger than 300 pixels may
-not be displayed properly, depending on the arrangement in use. See the main class
+not be displayed properly, depending on the arrangement in use. See the main class
     documentation for details.
 
                 
                See also pixmap().
 
-
                void TQIconViewItem::setPixmapRect ( const TQRect & r ) [protected]
+
                void TQIconViewItem::setPixmapRect ( const TQRect & r ) [protected]
 
                
 Sets the bounding rectangle of the item's icon to r. This
 function is provided for subclasses which reimplement calcRect(),
@@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ an item in code regardless of this setting.)
 
                void TQIconViewItem::setSelected ( bool s, bool cb ) [virtual]
 
                
 Selects or unselects the item, depending on s; it may also
-unselect other items, depending on TQIconView::selectionMode() and
+unselect other items, depending on TQIconView::selectionMode() and
 cb.
 
                 If s is FALSE, the item is unselected.
 
                 If s is TRUE and TQIconView::selectionMode() is Single, the
@@ -555,14 +555,14 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 
                 This variant is equivalent to calling the other variant with cb
 set to FALSE.
 
-
                void TQIconViewItem::setText ( const TQString & text ) [virtual]
+
                void TQIconViewItem::setText ( const TQString & text ) [virtual]
 
                
 Sets text as the text of the icon view item. This function
 might be a no-op if you reimplement text().
 
                 
                See also text().
 
 
                Example: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
-
                void TQIconViewItem::setText ( const TQString & text, bool recalc, bool redraw = TRUE ) [virtual]
+
                void TQIconViewItem::setText ( const TQString & text, bool recalc, bool redraw = TRUE ) [virtual]
 
                
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 
                 Sets text as the text of the icon view item. If recalc is
@@ -570,18 +570,18 @@ TRUE, the icon view's layout is recalculated. If redraw is TRUE
 (the default), the icon view is repainted.
 
                 
                See also text().
 
-
                void TQIconViewItem::setTextRect ( const TQRect & r ) [protected]
+
                void TQIconViewItem::setTextRect ( const TQRect & r ) [protected]
 
                
 Sets the bounding rectangle of the item's text to r. This
 function is provided for subclasses which reimplement calcRect(),
 so that they can set the calculated rectangle. Any other use is discouraged.
 
                 
                See also calcRect(), textRect(), setItemRect(), and setPixmapRect().
 
-
                TQSize TQIconViewItem::size () const
+
                TQSize TQIconViewItem::size () const
 
                
 Returns the size of the item.
 
-
                TQString TQIconViewItem::text () const [virtual]
+
                TQString TQIconViewItem::text () const [virtual]
 
                
 Returns the text of the icon view item. Normally you set the text
 of the item with setText(), but sometimes it's inconvenient to
@@ -592,7 +592,7 @@ do this, you must call calcRect() manually each time the
 
                 
                See also setText().
 
 
                Example: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
-
                TQRect TQIconViewItem::textRect ( bool relative = TRUE ) const
+
                TQRect TQIconViewItem::textRect ( bool relative = TRUE ) const
 
                
 Returns the bounding rectangle of the item's text.
 
                 If relative is TRUE, (the default), the returned rectangle is
diff --git a/doc/html/qimage-h.html b/doc/html/qimage-h.html
index adb34b33a..47c358200 100644
--- a/doc/html/qimage-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qimage-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qimage.h Include File
+ntqimage.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                TQImage Class Reference
                
-
-
                The TQImage class provides a hardware-independent pixmap
-representation with direct access to the pixel data.
-More...
-
                #include <qimage.h>
-
                List of all member functions.
-
                Public Members
                
-
                  
-
                • enum Endian { IgnoreEndian, BigEndian, LittleEndian }
                  • 
-
                • TQImage ()
                  • 
-
                • TQImage ( int w, int h, int depth, int numColors = 0, Endian bitOrder = IgnoreEndian )
                  • 
-
                • TQImage ( const TQSize & size, int depth, int numColors = 0, Endian bitOrder = IgnoreEndian )
                  • 
-
                • TQImage ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0 )
                  • 
-
                • TQImage ( const char * const xpm[] )
                  • 
-
                • TQImage ( const TQByteArray & array )
                  • 
-
                • TQImage ( uchar * yourdata, int w, int h, int depth, TQRgb * colortable, int numColors, Endian bitOrder )
                  • 
-
                • TQImage ( uchar * yourdata, int w, int h, int depth, int bpl, TQRgb * colortable, int numColors, Endian bitOrder )
                  • 
-
                • TQImage ( const TQImage & image )
                  • 
-
                • ~TQImage ()
                  • 
-
                • TQImage & operator= ( const TQImage & image )
                  • 
-
                • TQImage & operator= ( const TQPixmap & pixmap )
                  • 
-
                • bool operator== ( const TQImage & i ) const
                  • 
-
                • bool operator!= ( const TQImage & i ) const
                  • 
-
                • void detach ()
                  • 
-
                • TQImage copy () const
                  • 
-
                • TQImage copy ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int conversion_flags = 0 ) const
                  • 
-
                • TQImage copy ( const TQRect & r ) const
                  • 
-
                • bool isNull () const
                  • 
-
                • int width () const
                  • 
-
                • int height () const
                  • 
-
                • TQSize size () const
                  • 
-
                • TQRect rect () const
                  • 
-
                • int depth () const
                  • 
-
                • int numColors () const
                  • 
-
                • Endian bitOrder () const
                  • 
-
                • TQRgb color ( int i ) const
                  • 
-
                • void setColor ( int i, TQRgb c )
                  • 
-
                • void setNumColors ( int numColors )
                  • 
-
                • bool hasAlphaBuffer () const
                  • 
-
                • void setAlphaBuffer ( bool enable )
                  • 
-
                • bool allGray () const
                  • 
-
                • bool isGrayscale () const
                  • 
-
                • uchar * bits () const
                  • 
-
                • uchar * scanLine ( int i ) const
                  • 
-
                • uchar ** jumpTable () const
                  • 
-
                • TQRgb * colorTable () const
                  • 
-
                • int numBytes () const
                  • 
-
                • int bytesPerLine () const
                  • 
-
                • bool create ( int width, int height, int depth, int numColors = 0, Endian bitOrder = IgnoreEndian )
                  • 
-
                • bool create ( const TQSize &, int depth, int numColors = 0, Endian bitOrder = IgnoreEndian )
                  • 
-
                • void reset ()
                  • 
-
                • void fill ( uint pixel )
                  • 
-
                • void invertPixels ( bool invertAlpha = TRUE )
                  • 
-
                • TQImage convertDepth ( int depth ) const
                  • 
-
                • TQImage convertDepthWithPalette ( int d, TQRgb * palette, int palette_count, int conversion_flags = 0 ) const
                  • 
-
                • TQImage convertDepth ( int depth, int conversion_flags ) const
                  • 
-
                • TQImage convertBitOrder ( Endian bitOrder ) const
                  • 
-
                • enum ScaleMode { ScaleFree, ScaleMin, ScaleMax }
                  • 
-
                • TQImage smoothScale ( int w, int h, ScaleMode mode = ScaleFree ) const
                  • 
-
                • TQImage smoothScale ( const TQSize & s, ScaleMode mode = ScaleFree ) const
                  • 
-
                • TQImage scale ( int w, int h, ScaleMode mode = ScaleFree ) const
                  • 
-
                • TQImage scale ( const TQSize & s, ScaleMode mode = ScaleFree ) const
                  • 
-
                • TQImage scaleWidth ( int w ) const
                  • 
-
                • TQImage scaleHeight ( int h ) const
                  • 
-
                • TQImage xForm ( const TQWMatrix & matrix ) const
                  • 
-
                • TQImage createAlphaMask ( int conversion_flags = 0 ) const
                  • 
-
                • TQImage createHeuristicMask ( bool clipTight = TRUE ) const
                  • 
-
                • TQImage mirror () const
                  • 
-
                • TQImage mirror ( bool horizontal, bool vertical ) const
                  • 
-
                • TQImage swapRGB () const
                  • 
-
                • bool load ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0 )
                  • 
-
                • bool loadFromData ( const uchar * buf, uint len, const char * format = 0 )
                  • 
-
                • bool loadFromData ( TQByteArray buf, const char * format = 0 )
                  • 
-
                • bool save ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format, int quality = -1 ) const
                  • 
-
                • bool save ( TQIODevice * device, const char * format, int quality = -1 ) const
                  • 
-
                • bool valid ( int x, int y ) const
                  • 
-
                • int pixelIndex ( int x, int y ) const
                  • 
-
                • TQRgb pixel ( int x, int y ) const
                  • 
-
                • void setPixel ( int x, int y, uint index_or_rgb )
                  • 
-
                • int dotsPerMeterX () const
                  • 
-
                • int dotsPerMeterY () const
                  • 
-
                • void setDotsPerMeterX ( int x )
                  • 
-
                • void setDotsPerMeterY ( int y )
                  • 
-
                • TQPoint offset () const
                  • 
-
                • void setOffset ( const TQPoint & p )
                  • 
-
                • TQValueList<TQImageTextKeyLang> textList () const
                  • 
-
                • TQStringList textLanguages () const
                  • 
-
                • TQStringList textKeys () const
                  • 
-
                • TQString text ( const char * key, const char * lang = 0 ) const
                  • 
-
                • TQString text ( const TQImageTextKeyLang & kl ) const
                  • 
-
                • void setText ( const char * key, const char * lang, const TQString & s )
                  • 
-
                
-
                Static Public Members
                
-
-
                Related Functions
                
-
                  
-
                • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQImage & image )
                  • 
-
                • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQImage & image )
                  • 
-
                • void bitBlt ( TQImage * dst, int dx, int dy, const TQImage * src, int sx, int sy, int sw, int sh, int conversion_flags )
                  • 
-
                
-
                Detailed Description
                
-
-
-The TQImage class provides a hardware-independent pixmap
-representation with direct access to the pixel data.
-
                 
-
-
-
-
                 It is one of the two classes TQt provides for dealing with images,
-the other being TQPixmap. TQImage is designed and optimized for I/O
-and for direct pixel access/manipulation. TQPixmap is designed and
-optimized for drawing. There are (slow) functions to convert
-between TQImage and TQPixmap: TQPixmap::convertToImage() and
-TQPixmap::convertFromImage().
-
                 An image has the parameters width, height and depth (bits per
-pixel, bpp), a color table and the actual pixels. TQImage supports 1-bpp, 8-bpp and 32-bpp image
-data. 1-bpp and 8-bpp images use a color lookup table; the pixel
-value is a color table index.
-
                 32-bpp images encode an RGB value in 24 bits and ignore the color
-table. The most significant byte is used for the alpha buffer.
-
                 An entry in the color table is an RGB triplet encoded as a uint. Use the qRed(), qGreen() and qBlue() functions (qcolor.h) to access the components, and qRgb to make an RGB triplet (see the TQColor class
-documentation).
-
                 1-bpp (monochrome) images have a color table with a most two
-colors. There are two different formats: big endian (MSB first) or
-little endian (LSB first) bit order. To access a single bit you
-will must do some bit shifts:
-
                 
                -    TQImage image;
-    // sets bit at (x,y) to 1
-    if ( image.bitOrder() == TQImage::LittleEndian )
-        *(image.scanLine(y) + (x >> 3)) |= 1 << (x & 7);
-    else
-        *(image.scanLine(y) + (x >> 3)) |= 1 << (7 - (x & 7));
-    
                
- 
-
                 If this looks complicated, it might be a good idea to convert the
-1-bpp image to an 8-bpp image using convertDepth().
-
                 8-bpp images are much easier to work with than 1-bpp images
-because they have a single byte per pixel:
-
                 
                -    TQImage image;
-    // set entry 19 in the color table to yellow
-    image.setColor( 19, qRgb(255,255,0) );
-    // set 8 bit pixel at (x,y) to value yellow (in color table)
-    *(image.scanLine(y) + x) = 19;
-    
                
- 
-
                 32-bpp images ignore the color table; instead, each pixel contains
-the RGB triplet. 24 bits contain the RGB value; the most
-significant byte is reserved for the alpha buffer.
-
                 
                -    TQImage image;
-    // sets 32 bit pixel at (x,y) to yellow.
-    uint *p = (uint *)image.scanLine(y) + x;
-    *p = qRgb(255,255,0);
-    
                
- 
-
                 On TQt/Embedded, scanlines are aligned to the pixel depth and may
-be padded to any degree, while on all other platforms, the
-scanlines are 32-bit aligned for all depths. The constructor
-taking a uchar* argument always expects 32-bit aligned data.
-On TQt/Embedded, an additional constructor allows the number of
-bytes-per-line to be specified.
-
                 TQImage supports a variety of methods for getting information about
-the image, for example, colorTable(), allGray(), isGrayscale(),
-bitOrder(), bytesPerLine(), depth(), dotsPerMeterX() and
-dotsPerMeterY(), hasAlphaBuffer(), numBytes(), numColors(), and
-width() and height().
-
                 Pixel colors are retrieved with pixel() and set with setPixel().
-
                 TQImage also supports a number of functions for creating a new
-image that is a transformed version of the original. For example,
-copy(), convertBitOrder(), convertDepth(), createAlphaMask(),
-createHeuristicMask(), mirror(), scale(), smoothScale(), swapRGB()
-and xForm(). There are also functions for changing attributes of
-an image in-place, for example, setAlphaBuffer(), setColor(),
-setDotsPerMeterX() and setDotsPerMeterY() and setNumColors().
-
                 Images can be loaded and saved in the supported formats. Images
-are saved to a file with save(). Images are loaded from a file
-with load() (or in the constructor) or from an array of data with
-loadFromData(). The lists of supported formats are available from
-inputFormatList() and outputFormatList().
-
                 Strings of text may be added to images using setText().
-
                 The TQImage class uses explicit sharing,
-similar to that used by TQMemArray.
-
                 New image formats can be added as plugins.
-
                 
                See also TQImageIO, TQPixmap, Shared Classes, Graphics Classes, Image Processing Classes, and Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes.
-
-
                Member Type Documentation
                
-
                TQImage::Endian
                
-
-
                 This enum type is used to describe the endianness of the CPU and
-graphics hardware.
-
                  
-
                • TQImage::IgnoreEndian - Endianness does not matter. Useful for some
-operations that are independent of endianness.
-
                • TQImage::BigEndian - Network byte order, as on SPARC and Motorola CPUs.
-
                • TQImage::LittleEndian - PC/Alpha byte order.
-
                
-
                TQImage::ScaleMode
                
-
-
                 The functions scale() and smoothScale() use different modes for
-scaling the image. The purpose of these modes is to retain the
-ratio of the image if this is required.
-
                 
                 
-
                  
-
                • TQImage::ScaleFree - The image is scaled freely: the resulting image
-fits exactly into the specified size; the ratio will not
-necessarily be preserved.
-
                • TQImage::ScaleMin - The ratio of the image is preserved and the
-resulting image is guaranteed to fit into the specified size
-(it is as large as possible within these constraints) - the
-image might be smaller than the requested size.
-
                • TQImage::ScaleMax - The ratio of the image is preserved and the
-resulting image fills the whole specified rectangle (it is as
-small as possible within these constraints) - the image might
-be larger than the requested size.
-
                
-
                Member Function Documentation
                
-
                TQImage::TQImage ()
-
                
-Constructs a null image.
-
                 
                See also isNull().
-
-
                TQImage::TQImage ( int w, int h, int depth, int numColors = 0, Endian bitOrder = IgnoreEndian )
-
                
-Constructs an image with w width, h height, depth bits
-per pixel, numColors colors and bit order bitOrder.
-
                 Using this constructor is the same as first constructing a null
-image and then calling the create() function.
-
                 
                See also create().
-
-
                TQImage::TQImage ( const TQSize & size, int depth, int numColors = 0, Endian bitOrder = IgnoreEndian )
-
                
-Constructs an image with size size pixels, depth depth bits,
-numColors and bitOrder endianness.
-
                 Using this constructor is the same as first constructing a null
-image and then calling the create() function.
-
                 
                See also create().
-
-
                TQImage::TQImage ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0 )
-
                
-Constructs an image and tries to load the image from the file fileName.
-
                 If format is specified, the loader attempts to read the image
-using the specified format. If format is not specified (which
-is the default), the loader reads a few bytes from the header to
-guess the file format.
-
                 If the loading of the image failed, this object is a null image.
-
                 The TQImageIO documentation lists the supported image formats and
-explains how to add extra formats.
-
                 
                See also load(), isNull(), and TQImageIO.
-
-
                TQImage::TQImage ( const char * const xpm[] )
-
                
-Constructs an image from xpm, which must be a valid XPM image.
-
                 Errors are silently ignored.
-
                 Note that it's possible to squeeze the XPM variable a little bit
-by using an unusual declaration:
-
                 
                -        static const char * const start_xpm[]={
-            "16 15 8 1",
-            "a c #cec6bd",
-        ....
-    
                
- 
-
                 The extra const makes the entire definition read-only, which is
-slightly more efficient (e.g. when the code is in a shared
-library) and ROMable when the application is to be stored in ROM.
-
-
                TQImage::TQImage ( const TQByteArray & array )
-
                
-Constructs an image from the binary data array. It tries to
-guess the file format.
-
                 If the loading of the image failed, this object is a null image.
-
                 
                See also loadFromData(), isNull(), and imageFormat().
-
-
                TQImage::TQImage ( uchar * yourdata, int w, int h, int depth, TQRgb * colortable, int numColors, Endian bitOrder )
-
                
-Constructs an image w pixels wide, h pixels high with a
-color depth of depth, that uses an existing memory buffer, yourdata. The buffer must remain valid throughout the life of the
-TQImage. The image does not delete the buffer at destruction.
-
                 If colortable is 0, a color table sufficient for numColors
-will be allocated (and destructed later).
-
                 Note that yourdata must be 32-bit aligned.
-
                 The endianness is given in bitOrder.
-
-
                TQImage::TQImage ( uchar * yourdata, int w, int h, int depth, int bpl, TQRgb * colortable, int numColors, Endian bitOrder )
-
                
-Constructs an image that uses an existing memory buffer. The
-buffer must remain valid for the life of the TQImage. The image
-does not delete the buffer at destruction. The buffer is passed as
-yourdata. The image's width is w and its height is h. The
-color depth is depth. bpl specifies the number of bytes per
-line.
-
                 If colortable is 0, a color table sufficient for numColors
-will be allocated (and destructed later).
-
                 The endianness is specified by bitOrder.
-
                 Warning: This constructor is only available on TQt/Embedded.
-
-
                TQImage::TQImage ( const TQImage & image )
-
                
-Constructs a shallow copy of image.
-
-
                TQImage::~TQImage ()
-
                
-Destroys the image and cleans up.
-
-
                bool TQImage::allGray () const
-
                
-Returns TRUE if all the colors in the image are shades of gray
-(i.e. their red, green and blue components are equal); otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                 This function is slow for large 16-bit (TQt/Embedded only) and 32-bit images.
-
                 
                See also isGrayscale().
-
-
                Endian TQImage::bitOrder () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the bit order for the image.
-
                 If it is a 1-bpp image, this function returns either
-TQImage::BigEndian or TQImage::LittleEndian.
-
                 If it is not a 1-bpp image, this function returns
-TQImage::IgnoreEndian.
-
                 
                See also depth().
-
-
                uchar * TQImage::bits () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns a pointer to the first pixel data. This is equivalent to
-scanLine(0).
-
                 
                See also numBytes(), scanLine(), and jumpTable().
-
-
                Example: opengl/texture/gltexobj.cpp.
-
                int TQImage::bytesPerLine () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the number of bytes per image scanline. This is equivalent
-to numBytes()/height().
-
                 
                See also numBytes() and scanLine().
-
-
                TQRgb TQImage::color ( int i ) const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the color in the color table at index i. The first
-color is at index 0.
-
                 A color value is an RGB triplet. Use the qRed(), qGreen() and qBlue() functions (defined in qcolor.h) to
-get the color value components.
-
                 
                See also setColor(), numColors(), and TQColor.
-
-
                Example: themes/wood.cpp.
-
                TQRgb * TQImage::colorTable () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns a pointer to the color table.
-
                 
                See also numColors().
-
-
                TQImage TQImage::convertBitOrder ( Endian bitOrder ) const
-
                
-Converts the bit order of the image to bitOrder and returns the
-converted image. The original image is not changed.
-
                 Returns *this if the bitOrder is equal to the image bit
-order, or a null image if this image cannot
-be converted.
-
                 
                See also bitOrder(), systemBitOrder(), and isNull().
-
-
                TQImage TQImage::convertDepth ( int depth, int conversion_flags ) const
-
                
-Converts the depth (bpp) of the image to depth and returns the
-converted image. The original image is not changed.
-
                 The depth argument must be 1, 8, 16 (TQt/Embedded only) or 32.
-
                 Returns *this if depth is equal to the image depth, or a
-null image if this image cannot be
-converted.
-
                 If the image needs to be modified to fit in a lower-resolution
-result (e.g. converting from 32-bit to 8-bit), use the conversion_flags to specify how you'd prefer this to happen.
-
                 
                See also TQt::ImageConversionFlags, depth(), and isNull().
-
-
                TQImage TQImage::convertDepth ( int depth ) const
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 
-
                TQImage TQImage::convertDepthWithPalette ( int d, TQRgb * palette, int palette_count, int conversion_flags = 0 ) const
-
                
-Returns an image with depth d, using the palette_count
-colors pointed to by palette. If d is 1 or 8, the returned
-image will have its color table ordered the same as palette.
-
                 If the image needs to be modified to fit in a lower-resolution
-result (e.g. converting from 32-bit to 8-bit), use the conversion_flags to specify how you'd prefer this to happen.
-
                 Note: currently no closest-color search is made. If colors are
-found that are not in the palette, the palette may not be used at
-all. This result should not be considered valid because it may
-change in future implementations.
-
                 Currently inefficient for non-32-bit images.
-
                 
                See also TQt::ImageConversionFlags.
-
-
                TQImage TQImage::copy () const
-
                
-Returns a deep copy of the image.
-
                 
                See also detach().
-
-
                TQImage TQImage::copy ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int conversion_flags = 0 ) const
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Returns a deep copy of a sub-area of
-the image.
-
                 The returned image is always w by h pixels in size, and is
-copied from position x, y in this image. In areas beyond
-this image pixels are filled with pixel 0.
-
                 If the image needs to be modified to fit in a lower-resolution
-result (e.g. converting from 32-bit to 8-bit), use the conversion_flags to specify how you'd prefer this to happen.
-
                 
                See also bitBlt() and TQt::ImageConversionFlags.
-
-
                TQImage TQImage::copy ( const TQRect & r ) const
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Returns a deep copy of a sub-area of
-the image.
-
                 The returned image always has the size of the rectangle r. In
-areas beyond this image pixels are filled with pixel 0.
-
-
                bool TQImage::create ( int width, int height, int depth, int numColors = 0, Endian bitOrder = IgnoreEndian )
-
                
-Sets the image width, height, depth, its number of colors
-(in numColors), and bit order. Returns TRUE if successful, or
-FALSE if the parameters are incorrect or if memory cannot be
-allocated.
-
                 The width and height is limited to 32767. depth must be
-1, 8, or 32. If depth is 1, bitOrder must be set to
-either TQImage::LittleEndian or TQImage::BigEndian. For other depths
-bitOrder must be TQImage::IgnoreEndian.
-
                 This function allocates a color table and a buffer for the image
-data. The image data is not initialized.
-
                 The image buffer is allocated as a single block that consists of a
-table of scanline pointers (jumpTable())
-and the image data (bits()).
-
                 
                See also fill(), width(), height(), depth(), numColors(), bitOrder(), jumpTable(), scanLine(), bits(), bytesPerLine(), and numBytes().
-
-
                bool TQImage::create ( const TQSize &, int depth, int numColors = 0, Endian bitOrder = IgnoreEndian )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 
-
                TQImage TQImage::createAlphaMask ( int conversion_flags = 0 ) const
-
                
-Builds and returns a 1-bpp mask from the alpha buffer in this
-image. Returns a null image if alpha buffer mode is disabled.
-
                 See TQPixmap::convertFromImage() for a description of the conversion_flags argument.
-
                 The returned image has little-endian bit order, which you can
-convert to big-endianness using convertBitOrder().
-
                 
                See also createHeuristicMask(), hasAlphaBuffer(), and setAlphaBuffer().
-
-
                TQImage TQImage::createHeuristicMask ( bool clipTight = TRUE ) const
-
                
-Creates and returns a 1-bpp heuristic mask for this image. It
-works by selecting a color from one of the corners, then chipping
-away pixels of that color starting at all the edges.
-
                 The four corners vote for which color is to be masked away. In
-case of a draw (this generally means that this function is not
-applicable to the image), the result is arbitrary.
-
                 The returned image has little-endian bit order, which you can
-convert to big-endianness using convertBitOrder().
-
                 If clipTight is TRUE the mask is just large enough to cover the
-pixels; otherwise, the mask is larger than the data pixels.
-
                 This function disregards the alpha buffer.
-
                 
                See also createAlphaMask().
-
-
                int TQImage::depth () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the depth of the image.
-
                 The image depth is the number of bits used to encode a single
-pixel, also called bits per pixel (bpp) or bit planes of an image.
-
                 The supported depths are 1, 8, 16 (TQt/Embedded only) and 32.
-
                 
                See also convertDepth().
-
-
                void TQImage::detach ()
-
                
-Detaches from shared image data and makes sure that this image is
-the only one referring to the data.
-
                 If multiple images share common data, this image makes a copy of
-the data and detaches itself from the sharing mechanism.
-Nothing is done if there is just a single reference.
-
                 
                See also copy().
-
-
                Example: themes/wood.cpp.
-
                int TQImage::dotsPerMeterX () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the number of pixels that fit horizontally in a physical
-meter. This and dotsPerMeterY() define the intended scale and
-aspect ratio of the image.
-
                 
                See also setDotsPerMeterX().
-
-
                int TQImage::dotsPerMeterY () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the number of pixels that fit vertically in a physical
-meter. This and dotsPerMeterX() define the intended scale and
-aspect ratio of the image.
-
                 
                See also setDotsPerMeterY().
-
-
                void TQImage::fill ( uint pixel )
-
                
-Fills the entire image with the pixel value pixel.
-
                 If the depth of this image is 1, only the
-lowest bit is used. If you say fill(0), fill(2), etc., the image
-is filled with 0s. If you say fill(1), fill(3), etc., the image is
-filled with 1s. If the depth is 8, the lowest 8 bits are used.
-
                 If the depth is 32 and the image has no alpha buffer, the pixel
-value is written to each pixel in the image. If the image has an
-alpha buffer, only the 24 RGB bits are set and the upper 8 bits
-(alpha value) are left unchanged.
-
                 Note: TQImage::pixel() returns the color of the pixel at the given
-coordinates; TQColor::pixel() returns the pixel value of the
-underlying window system (essentially an index value), so normally
-you will want to use TQImage::pixel() to use a color from an
-existing image or TQColor::rgb() to use a specific color.
-
                 
                See also invertPixels(), depth(), hasAlphaBuffer(), and create().
-
-
                TQImage TQImage::fromMimeSource ( const TQString & abs_name ) [static]
-
                 Convenience function. Gets the data associated with the absolute
-name abs_name from the default mime source factory and decodes it
-to an image.
-
                 
                See also TQMimeSourceFactory, TQImage::fromMimeSource(), and TQImageDrag::decode().
-
-
                bool TQImage::hasAlphaBuffer () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns TRUE if alpha buffer mode is enabled; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                 
                See also setAlphaBuffer().
-
-
                int TQImage::height () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the height of the image.
-
                 
                See also width(), size(), and rect().
-
-
                Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp and opengl/texture/gltexobj.cpp.
-
                const char * TQImage::imageFormat ( const TQString & fileName ) [static]
-
                
-Returns a string that specifies the image format of the file fileName, or 0 if the file cannot be read or if the format is not
-recognized.
-
                 The TQImageIO documentation lists the guaranteed supported image
-formats, or use TQImage::inputFormats() and TQImage::outputFormats()
-to get lists that include the installed formats.
-
                 
                See also load() and save().
-
-
                TQStringList TQImage::inputFormatList () [static]
-
                
-Returns a list of image formats that are supported for image
-input.
-
                 Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
-over a copy, e.g.
-
                -    TQStringList list = myImage.inputFormatList();
-    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    while( it != list.end() ) {
-        myProcessing( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-    
                
- 
-
                 
                See also outputFormatList(), inputFormats(), and TQImageIO.
-
-
                Example: showimg/showimg.cpp.
-
                TQStrList TQImage::inputFormats () [static]
-
                
-Returns a list of image formats that are supported for image
-input.
-
                 
                See also outputFormats(), inputFormatList(), and TQImageIO.
-
-
                void TQImage::invertPixels ( bool invertAlpha = TRUE )
-
                
-Inverts all pixel values in the image.
-
                 If the depth is 32: if invertAlpha is TRUE, the alpha bits are
-also inverted, otherwise they are left unchanged.
-
                 If the depth is not 32, the argument invertAlpha has no
-meaning.
-
                 Note that inverting an 8-bit image means to replace all pixels
-using color index i with a pixel using color index 255 minus i. Similarly for a 1-bit image. The color table is not changed.
-
                 
                See also fill(), depth(), and hasAlphaBuffer().
-
-
                bool TQImage::isGrayscale () const
-
                
-For 16-bit (TQt/Embedded only) and 32-bit images, this function is
-equivalent to allGray().
-
                 For 8-bpp images, this function returns TRUE if color(i) is
-TQRgb(i,i,i) for all indices of the color table; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                 
                See also allGray() and depth().
-
-
                bool TQImage::isNull () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns TRUE if it is a null image; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                 A null image has all parameters set to zero and no allocated data.
-
-
                Example: showimg/showimg.cpp.
-
                uchar ** TQImage::jumpTable () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns a pointer to the scanline pointer table.
-
                 This is the beginning of the data block for the image.
-
                 
                See also bits() and scanLine().
-
-
                bool TQImage::load ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0 )
-
                
-Loads an image from the file fileName. Returns TRUE if the
-image was successfully loaded; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                 If format is specified, the loader attempts to read the image
-using the specified format. If format is not specified (which
-is the default), the loader reads a few bytes from the header to
-guess the file format.
-
                 The TQImageIO documentation lists the supported image formats and
-explains how to add extra formats.
-
                 
                See also loadFromData(), save(), imageFormat(), TQPixmap::load(), and TQImageIO.
-
-
                bool TQImage::loadFromData ( const uchar * buf, uint len, const char * format = 0 )
-
                
-Loads an image from the first len bytes of binary data in buf. Returns TRUE if the image was successfully loaded; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                 If format is specified, the loader attempts to read the image
-using the specified format. If format is not specified (which
-is the default), the loader reads a few bytes from the header to
-guess the file format.
-
                 The TQImageIO documentation lists the supported image formats and
-explains how to add extra formats.
-
                 
                See also load(), save(), imageFormat(), TQPixmap::loadFromData(), and TQImageIO.
-
-
                bool TQImage::loadFromData ( TQByteArray buf, const char * format = 0 )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Loads an image from the TQByteArray buf.
-
-
                TQImage TQImage::mirror () const
-
                
-Returns a TQImage which is a vertically mirrored copy of this
-image. The original TQImage is not changed.
-
-
                TQImage TQImage::mirror ( bool horizontal, bool vertical ) const
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Returns a mirror of the image, mirrored in the horizontal and/or
-the vertical direction depending on whether horizontal and vertical are set to TRUE or FALSE. The original image is not
-changed.
-
                 
                See also smoothScale().
-
-
                int TQImage::numBytes () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the number of bytes occupied by the image data.
-
                 
                See also bytesPerLine() and bits().
-
-
                int TQImage::numColors () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the size of the color table for the image.
-
                 Notice that numColors() returns 0 for 16-bpp (TQt/Embedded only)
-and 32-bpp images because these images do not use color tables,
-but instead encode pixel values as RGB triplets.
-
                 
                See also setNumColors() and colorTable().
-
-
                Example: themes/wood.cpp.
-
                TQPoint TQImage::offset () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the number of pixels by which the image is intended to be
-offset by when positioning relative to other images.
-
-
                bool TQImage::operator!= ( const TQImage & i ) const
-
                
-Returns TRUE if this image and image i have different contents;
-otherwise returns FALSE. The comparison can be slow, unless there
-is some obvious difference, such as different widths, in which
-case the function will return tquickly.
-
                 
                See also operator=().
-
-
                TQImage & TQImage::operator= ( const TQImage & image )
-
                
-Assigns a shallow copy of image to
-this image and returns a reference to this image.
-
                 
                See also copy().
-
-
                TQImage & TQImage::operator= ( const TQPixmap & pixmap )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Sets the image bits to the pixmap contents and returns a
-reference to the image.
-
                 If the image shares data with other images, it will first
-dereference the shared data.
-
                 Makes a call to TQPixmap::convertToImage().
-
-
                bool TQImage::operator== ( const TQImage & i ) const
-
                
-Returns TRUE if this image and image i have the same contents;
-otherwise returns FALSE. The comparison can be slow, unless there
-is some obvious difference, such as different widths, in which
-case the function will return tquickly.
-
                 
                See also operator=().
-
-
                TQStringList TQImage::outputFormatList () [static]
-
                
-Returns a list of image formats that are supported for image
-output.
-
                 Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
-over a copy, e.g.
-
                -    TQStringList list = myImage.outputFormatList();
-    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    while( it != list.end() ) {
-        myProcessing( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-    
                
- 
-
                 
                See also inputFormatList(), outputFormats(), and TQImageIO.
-
-
                TQStrList TQImage::outputFormats () [static]
-
                
-Returns a list of image formats that are supported for image
-output.
-
                 
                See also inputFormats(), outputFormatList(), and TQImageIO.
-
-
                Example: showimg/showimg.cpp.
-
                TQRgb TQImage::pixel ( int x, int y ) const
-
                
-Returns the color of the pixel at the coordinates (x, y).
-
                 If (x, y) is not on the image, the
-results are undefined.
-
                 
                See also setPixel(), qRed(), qGreen(), qBlue(), and valid().
-
-
                Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp and qmag/qmag.cpp.
-
                int TQImage::pixelIndex ( int x, int y ) const
-
                
-Returns the pixel index at the given coordinates.
-
                 If (x, y) is not valid, or if the
-image is not a paletted image (depth() > 8), the results are
-undefined.
-
                 
                See also valid() and depth().
-
-
                TQRect TQImage::rect () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the enclosing rectangle (0, 0, width(), height()) of the
-image.
-
                 
                See also width(), height(), and size().
-
-
                void TQImage::reset ()
-
                
-Resets all image parameters and deallocates the image data.
-
-
                bool TQImage::save ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format, int quality = -1 ) const
-
                
-Saves the image to the file fileName, using the image file
-format format and a quality factor of quality. quality
-must be in the range 0..100 or -1. Specify 0 to obtain small
-compressed files, 100 for large uncompressed files, and -1 (the
-default) to use the default settings.
-
                 Returns TRUE if the image was successfully saved; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                 
                See also load(), loadFromData(), imageFormat(), TQPixmap::save(), and TQImageIO.
-
-
                bool TQImage::save ( TQIODevice * device, const char * format, int quality = -1 ) const
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 This function writes a TQImage to the TQIODevice, device. This
-can be used, for example, to save an image directly into a
-TQByteArray:
-
                -    TQImage image;
-    TQByteArray ba;
-    TQBuffer buffer( ba );
-    buffer.open( IO_WriteOnly );
-    image.save( &buffer, "PNG" ); // writes image into ba in PNG format
-    
                
- 
-
-
                TQImage TQImage::scale ( int w, int h, ScaleMode mode = ScaleFree ) const
-
                
-Returns a copy of the image scaled to a rectangle of width w
-and height h according to the ScaleMode mode.
-
                 
                  
-
                •  If mode is ScaleFree, the image is scaled to (w,
-h).
-
                •  If mode is ScaleMin, the image is scaled to a rectangle
-as large as possible inside (w, h), preserving the aspect
-ratio.
-
                •  If mode is ScaleMax, the image is scaled to a rectangle
-as small as possible outside (w, h), preserving the aspect
-ratio.
-
                
-
                 If either the width w or the height h is 0 or negative, this
-function returns a null image.
-
                 This function uses a simple, fast algorithm. If you need better
-quality, use smoothScale() instead.
-
                 
                See also scaleWidth(), scaleHeight(), smoothScale(), and xForm().
-
-
                TQImage TQImage::scale ( const TQSize & s, ScaleMode mode = ScaleFree ) const
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 The requested size of the image is s.
-
-
                TQImage TQImage::scaleHeight ( int h ) const
-
                
-Returns a scaled copy of the image. The returned image has a
-height of h pixels. This function automatically calculates the
-width of the image so that the ratio of the image is preserved.
-
                 If h is 0 or negative a null image is
-returned.
-
                 
                See also scale(), scaleWidth(), smoothScale(), and xForm().
-
-
                Example: table/small-table-demo/main.cpp.
-
                TQImage TQImage::scaleWidth ( int w ) const
-
                
-Returns a scaled copy of the image. The returned image has a width
-of w pixels. This function automatically calculates the height
-of the image so that the ratio of the image is preserved.
-
                 If w is 0 or negative a null image is
-returned.
-
                 
                See also scale(), scaleHeight(), smoothScale(), and xForm().
-
-
                uchar * TQImage::scanLine ( int i ) const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns a pointer to the pixel data at the scanline with index i. The first scanline is at index 0.
-
                 The scanline data is aligned on a 32-bit boundary.
-
                 Warning: If you are accessing 32-bpp image data, cast the returned
-pointer to TQRgb* (TQRgb has a 32-bit size) and use it to
-read/write the pixel value. You cannot use the uchar* pointer
-directly, because the pixel format depends on the byte order on
-the underlying platform. Hint: use qRed(),
-qGreen() and qBlue(), etc. (qcolor.h) to access the pixels.
-
                 Warning: If you are accessing 16-bpp image data, you must handle
-endianness yourself. (TQt/Embedded only)
-
                 
                See also bytesPerLine(), bits(), and jumpTable().
-
-
                Example: desktop/desktop.cpp.
-
                void TQImage::setAlphaBuffer ( bool enable )
-
                
-Enables alpha buffer mode if enable is TRUE, otherwise disables
-it. The default setting is disabled.
-
                 An 8-bpp image has 8-bit pixels. A pixel is an index into the
-color table, which contains 32-bit color
-values. In a 32-bpp image, the 32-bit pixels are the color values.
-
                 This 32-bit value is encoded as follows: The lower 24 bits are
-used for the red, green, and blue components. The upper 8 bits
-contain the alpha component.
-
                 The alpha component specifies the transparency of a pixel. 0 means
-completely transparent and 255 means opaque. The alpha component
-is ignored if you do not enable alpha buffer mode.
-
                 The alpha buffer is used to set a mask when a TQImage is translated
-to a TQPixmap.
-
                 
                See also hasAlphaBuffer() and createAlphaMask().
-
-
                void TQImage::setColor ( int i, TQRgb c )
-
                
-
-
                 Sets a color in the color table at index i to c.
-
                 A color value is an RGB triplet. Use the qRgb() function (defined in qcolor.h) to make RGB
-triplets.
-
                 
                See also color(), setNumColors(), and numColors().
-
-
                Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
-
                void TQImage::setDotsPerMeterX ( int x )
-
                
-Sets the value returned by dotsPerMeterX() to x.
-
-
                void TQImage::setDotsPerMeterY ( int y )
-
                
-Sets the value returned by dotsPerMeterY() to y.
-
-
                void TQImage::setNumColors ( int numColors )
-
                
-Resizes the color table to numColors colors.
-
                 If the color table is expanded all the extra colors will be set to
-black (RGB 0,0,0).
-
                 
                See also numColors(), color(), setColor(), and colorTable().
-
-
                void TQImage::setOffset ( const TQPoint & p )
-
                
-Sets the value returned by offset() to p.
-
-
                void TQImage::setPixel ( int x, int y, uint index_or_rgb )
-
                
-Sets the pixel index or color at the coordinates (x, y) to
-index_or_rgb.
-
                 If (x, y) is not valid, the result is
-undefined.
-
                 If the image is a paletted image (depth() <= 8) and index_or_rgb >= numColors(), the result is undefined.
-
                 
                See also pixelIndex(), pixel(), qRgb(), qRgba(), and valid().
-
-
                void TQImage::setText ( const char * key, const char * lang, const TQString & s )
-
                
-Records string s for the keyword key. The key should be a
-portable keyword recognizable by other software - some suggested
-values can be found in the PNG specification. s can be any text. lang
-should specify the language code (see
-RFC 1766) or 0.
-
-
                TQSize TQImage::size () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the size of the image, i.e. its width and height.
-
                 
                See also width(), height(), and rect().
-
-
                TQImage TQImage::smoothScale ( int w, int h, ScaleMode mode = ScaleFree ) const
-
                
-Returns a smoothly scaled copy of the image. The returned image
-has a size of width w by height h pixels if mode is ScaleFree. The modes ScaleMin and ScaleMax may be used to
-preserve the ratio of the image: if mode is ScaleMin, the
-returned image is guaranteed to fit into the rectangle specified
-by w and h (it is as large as possible within the
-constraints); if mode is ScaleMax, the returned image fits
-at least into the specified rectangle (it is a small as possible
-within the constraints).
-
                 For 32-bpp images and 1-bpp/8-bpp color images the result will be
-32-bpp, whereas all-gray images
-(including black-and-white 1-bpp) will produce 8-bit grayscale images with the palette spanning
-256 grays from black to white.
-
                 This function uses code based on pnmscale.c by Jef Poskanzer.
-
                 pnmscale.c - read a portable anymap and scale it
-
                 
-
                 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
-
                 Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and
-its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
-granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
-copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission
-notice appear in supporting documentation. This software is
-provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-
                 
                See also scale() and mirror().
-
-
                TQImage TQImage::smoothScale ( const TQSize & s, ScaleMode mode = ScaleFree ) const
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 The requested size of the image is s.
-
-
                TQImage TQImage::swapRGB () const
-
                
-Returns a TQImage in which the values of the red and blue
-components of all pixels have been swapped, effectively converting
-an RGB image to a BGR image. The original TQImage is not changed.
-
-
                Endian TQImage::systemBitOrder () [static]
-
                
-Determines the bit order of the display hardware. Returns
-TQImage::LittleEndian (LSB first) or TQImage::BigEndian (MSB first).
-
                 
                See also systemByteOrder().
-
-
                Endian TQImage::systemByteOrder () [static]
-
                
-Determines the host computer byte order. Returns
-TQImage::LittleEndian (LSB first) or TQImage::BigEndian (MSB first).
-
                 
                See also systemBitOrder().
-
-
                TQString TQImage::text ( const char * key, const char * lang = 0 ) const
-
                
-Returns the string recorded for the keyword key in language lang, or in a default language if lang is 0.
-
-
                TQString TQImage::text ( const TQImageTextKeyLang & kl ) const
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Returns the string recorded for the keyword and language kl.
-
-
                TQStringList TQImage::textKeys () const
-
                
-Returns the keywords for which some texts are recorded.
-
                 Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
-over a copy, e.g.
-
                -    TQStringList list = myImage.textKeys();
-    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    while( it != list.end() ) {
-        myProcessing( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-    
                
- 
-
                 
                See also textList(), text(), setText(), and textLanguages().
-
-
                TQStringList TQImage::textLanguages () const
-
                
-Returns the language identifiers for which some texts are
-recorded.
-
                 Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
-over a copy, e.g.
-
                -    TQStringList list = myImage.textLanguages();
-    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    while( it != list.end() ) {
-        myProcessing( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-    
                
- 
-
                 
                See also textList(), text(), setText(), and textKeys().
-
-
                TQValueList<TQImageTextKeyLang> TQImage::textList () const
-
                
-Returns a list of TQImageTextKeyLang objects that enumerate all the
-texts key/language pairs set by setText() for this image.
-
                 Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
-over a copy, e.g.
-
                -    TQValueList<TQImageTextKeyLang> list = myImage.textList();
-    TQValueList<TQImageTextKeyLang>::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    while( it != list.end() ) {
-        myProcessing( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-    
                
- 
-
-
                bool TQImage::valid ( int x, int y ) const
-
                
-Returns TRUE if ( x, y ) is a valid coordinate in the image;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                 
                See also width(), height(), and pixelIndex().
-
-
                Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp and qmag/qmag.cpp.
-
                int TQImage::width () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the width of the image.
-
                 
                See also height(), size(), and rect().
-
-
                Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp and opengl/texture/gltexobj.cpp.
-
                TQImage TQImage::xForm ( const TQWMatrix & matrix ) const
-
                
-Returns a copy of the image that is transformed using the
-transformation matrix, matrix.
-
                 The transformation matrix is internally adjusted to compensate
-for unwanted translation, i.e. xForm() returns the smallest image
-that contains all the transformed points of the original image.
-
                 
                See also scale(), TQPixmap::xForm(), TQPixmap::trueMatrix(), and TQWMatrix.
-
-
                Related Functions
                
-
                void bitBlt ( TQImage * dst, int dx, int dy, const TQImage * src, int sx, int sy, int sw, int sh, int conversion_flags )
-
                
-
-
                 Copies a block of pixels from src to dst. The pixels
-copied from source (src) are converted according to
-conversion_flags if it is incompatible with the destination
-(dst).
-
                 sx, sy is the top-left pixel in src, dx, dy
-is the top-left position in dst and sw, \sh is the
-size of the copied block.
-
                 The copying is clipped if areas outside src or dst are
-specified.
-
                 If sw is -1, it is adjusted to src->width(). Similarly, if sh is -1, it is adjusted to src->height().
-
                 Currently inefficient for non 32-bit images.
-
-
                TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQImage & image )
-
                
-
-
                 Writes the image image to the stream s as a PNG image, or as a
-BMP image if the stream's version is 1.
-
                 Note that writing the stream to a file will not produce a valid image file.
-
                 
                See also TQImage::save() and Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
                TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQImage & image )
-
                
-
-
                 Reads an image from the stream s and stores it in image.
-
                 
                See also TQImage::load() and Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
-
                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                
-
-
                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                TQt 3.3.8
                
-
                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qimageconsumer-members.html b/doc/html/qimageconsumer-members.html
index 9ebdf555d..3325c5f66 100644
--- a/doc/html/qimageconsumer-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qimageconsumer-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qimageconsumer.html b/doc/html/qimageconsumer.html
index 4d06fb950..c2110357f 100644
--- a/doc/html/qimageconsumer.html
+++ b/doc/html/qimageconsumer.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                The TQImageConsumer class is an abstraction used by TQImageDecoder.
 More...
-
                #include <qasyncimageio.h>
+
                #include <ntqasyncimageio.h>
 
                List of all member functions.
 
                Public Members
                
 
                  
@@ -52,9 +52,9 @@ The TQImageConsumer class is an abstraction used by  
 
 
-
                   The TQMovie class, or TQLabel::setMovie(), are easy to use and for
+
                   The TQMovie class, or TQLabel::setMovie(), are easy to use and for
 most situations do what you want with regards animated images.
-
                   A TQImageConsumer consumes information about changes to the TQImage
+
                   A TQImageConsumer consumes information about changes to the TQImage
 maintained by a TQImageDecoder. Think of the TQImage as the model or
 source of the image data, with the TQImageConsumer as a view of
 that data and the TQImageDecoder being the controller that
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ implementing a web browser with your own image loaders.
 
                   
                  See also TQImageDecoder, Graphics Classes, Image Processing Classes, and Multimedia Classes.
 
 
                  Member Function Documentation
                  
-
                  void TQImageConsumer::changed ( const TQRect & ) [pure virtual]
+
                  void TQImageConsumer::changed ( const TQRect & ) [pure virtual]
 
                  
 
 
                   Called when the given area of the image has changed.
@@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ displayed.
 
                   The decoder will not make any further changes to the image until
 the next call to TQImageFormat::decode().
 
-
                  void TQImageConsumer::frameDone ( const TQPoint & offset, const TQRect & rect ) [pure virtual]
+
                  void TQImageConsumer::frameDone ( const TQPoint & offset, const TQRect & rect ) [pure virtual]
 
                  
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 
                   One of the two frameDone() functions will be called when a frame
diff --git a/doc/html/qimagedecoder-members.html b/doc/html/qimagedecoder-members.html
index 40ecc6188..7777631bd 100644
--- a/doc/html/qimagedecoder-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qimagedecoder-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qimagedecoder.html b/doc/html/qimagedecoder.html
index 25dff3736..bd484b58d 100644
--- a/doc/html/qimagedecoder.html
+++ b/doc/html/qimagedecoder.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                  The TQImageDecoder class is an incremental image decoder for all supported image formats.
 More...
-
                  #include <qasyncimageio.h>
+
                  #include <ntqasyncimageio.h>
 
                  List of all member functions.
 
                  Public Members
                  
 
                    
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ The TQImageDecoder class is an incremental image decoder for all supported image
 
 
 
                     New formats are installed by creating objects of class
-TQImageFormatType; the TQMovie class can be used for all installed
+TQImageFormatType; the TQMovie class can be used for all installed
 incremental image formats. TQImageDecoder is only useful for
 creating new ways of feeding data to an TQImageConsumer.
 
                     A TQImageDecoder is a machine that decodes images. It takes encoded
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ currently-existing TQImageFormatType factory objects.
 need to implement support for additional image formats.
 
                     
 
                     TQt supports GIF reading if it is configured that way during
-installation (see qgif.h). If it is, we are required to state that
+installation (see ntqgif.h). If it is, we are required to state that
 "The Graphics Interchange Format(c) is the Copyright property of
 CompuServe Incorporated. GIF(sm) is a Service Mark property of
 CompuServe Incorporated."
@@ -121,12 +121,12 @@ header. The returned string is statically allocated. The function
 will look at the first length characters in the buffer.
 
                     Returns 0 if the format is not recognized.
 
-
                    const TQImage & TQImageDecoder::image ()
+
                    const TQImage & TQImageDecoder::image ()
 
                    
 
 
                     Returns the image currently being decoded.
 
-
                    TQStrList TQImageDecoder::inputFormats () [static]
+
                    TQStrList TQImageDecoder::inputFormats () [static]
 
                    
 Returns a sorted list of formats for which asynchronous loading is
 supported.
diff --git a/doc/html/qimagedrag-members.html b/doc/html/qimagedrag-members.html
index 4183c9f80..8a561dca2 100644
--- a/doc/html/qimagedrag-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qimagedrag-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -37,64 +37,64 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
 
                    
diff --git a/doc/html/qimagedrag.html b/doc/html/qimagedrag.html
index c150b93c9..d1ed28d65 100644
--- a/doc/html/qimagedrag.html
+++ b/doc/html/qimagedrag.html
@@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                    The TQImageDrag class provides a drag and drop object for
 transferring images.
 More...
-
                    #include <qdragobject.h>
-
                    Inherits TQDragObject.
+
                    #include <ntqdragobject.h>
+
                    Inherits TQDragObject.
 
                    List of all member functions.
 
                    Public Members
                    
 
                      
@@ -57,18 +57,18 @@ transferring images.
 transferring images.
 
                       
 
                       Images are offered to the receiving application in multiple
-formats, determined by TQt's output
+formats, determined by TQt's output
     formats.
-
                       For more information about drag and drop, see the TQDragObject
+
                       For more information about drag and drop, see the TQDragObject
 class and the drag and drop documentation.
 
                      See also Drag And Drop Classes.
 
 
                      Member Function Documentation
                      
-
                      TQImageDrag::TQImageDrag ( TQImage image, TQWidget * dragSource = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
                      TQImageDrag::TQImageDrag ( TQImage image, TQWidget * dragSource = 0, const char * name = 0 )
 
                      
 Constructs an image drag object and sets its data to image. dragSource must be the drag source; name is the object name.
 
-
                      TQImageDrag::TQImageDrag ( TQWidget * dragSource = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
                      TQImageDrag::TQImageDrag ( TQWidget * dragSource = 0, const char * name = 0 )
 
                      
 Constructs a default image drag object. dragSource must be the
 drag source; name is the object name.
@@ -85,24 +85,24 @@ into an image; otherwise returns FALSE.
 
                       
                      See also decode().
 
 
                      Example: desktop/desktop.cpp.
-
                      bool TQImageDrag::decode ( const TQMimeSource * e, TQImage & img ) [static]
+
                      bool TQImageDrag::decode ( const TQMimeSource * e, TQImage & img ) [static]
 
                      
 Attempts to decode the dropped information in mime source e
 into img. Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
 
                       
                      See also canDecode().
 
 
                      Example: desktop/desktop.cpp.
-
                      bool TQImageDrag::decode ( const TQMimeSource * e, TQPixmap & pm ) [static]
+
                      bool TQImageDrag::decode ( const TQMimeSource * e, TQPixmap & pm ) [static]
 
                      
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 
                       Attempts to decode the dropped information in mime source e
 into pixmap pm. Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns
 FALSE.
-
                       This is a convenience function that converts to a TQPixmap via a
-TQImage.
+
                       This is a convenience function that converts to a TQPixmap via a
+TQImage.
 
                       
                      See also canDecode().
 
-
                      void TQImageDrag::setImage ( TQImage image ) [virtual]
+
                      void TQImageDrag::setImage ( TQImage image ) [virtual]
 
                      
 Sets the image to be dragged to image. You will need to call
 this if you did not pass the image during construction.
diff --git a/doc/html/qimageformat-members.html b/doc/html/qimageformat-members.html
index 747780780..f43464a9f 100644
--- a/doc/html/qimageformat-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qimageformat-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qimageformat.html b/doc/html/qimageformat.html
index 0cb57c851..471a24d8e 100644
--- a/doc/html/qimageformat.html
+++ b/doc/html/qimageformat.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                      The TQImageFormat class is an incremental image decoder for a specific image format.
 More...
-
                      #include <qasyncimageio.h>
+
                      #include <ntqasyncimageio.h>
 
                      List of all member functions.
 
                      Public Members
                      
 
                        
@@ -49,8 +49,8 @@ The TQImageFormat class is an incremental image decoder for a specific image for
 
                         By making a derived class of TQImageFormatType, which in turn
 creates objects that are a subclass of TQImageFormat, you can add
 support for more incremental image formats, allowing such formats
-to be sources for a TQMovie or for the first frame of the image
-stream to be loaded as a TQImage or TQPixmap.
+to be sources for a TQMovie or for the first frame of the image
+stream to be loaded as a TQImage or TQPixmap.
 
                         Your new subclass must reimplement the decode() function in order
 to process your new format.
 
                         New TQImageFormat objects are generated by new TQImageFormatType
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ factories.
 
                        See also Graphics Classes, Image Processing Classes, and Multimedia Classes.
 
 
                        Member Function Documentation
                        
-
                        int TQImageFormat::decode ( TQImage & img, TQImageConsumer * consumer, const uchar * buffer, int length ) [pure virtual]
+
                        int TQImageFormat::decode ( TQImage & img, TQImageConsumer * consumer, const uchar * buffer, int length ) [pure virtual]
 
                        
 
 
                         New subclasses must reimplement this method.
diff --git a/doc/html/qimageformatplugin-h.html b/doc/html/qimageformatplugin-h.html
index c0b8e08d6..e6fe8e7f9 100644
--- a/doc/html/qimageformatplugin-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qimageformatplugin-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qimageformatplugin.h Include File
+ntqimageformatplugin.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                        TQImageFormatPlugin Class Reference
                        
-
-
                        The TQImageFormatPlugin class provides an abstract base for custom image format plugins.
-More...
-
                        #include <qimageformatplugin.h>
-
                        List of all member functions.
-
                        Public Members
                        
-
-
                        Detailed Description
                        
-
-
-The TQImageFormatPlugin class provides an abstract base for custom image format plugins.
-
                         
-
                         The image format plugin is a simple plugin interface that makes
-it easy to create custom image formats that can be used
-transparently by applications.
-
                         Writing an image format plugin is achieved by subclassing this
-base class, reimplementing the pure virtual functions keys() and
-installIOHandler(), and exporting the class with the
-Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN macro.  See the Plugins
-    documentation for details.
-
                        See also Plugins.
-
-
                        Member Function Documentation
                        
-
                        TQImageFormatPlugin::TQImageFormatPlugin ()
-
                        
-Constructs an image format plugin. This is invoked automatically
-by the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN macro.
-
-
                        TQImageFormatPlugin::~TQImageFormatPlugin ()
-
                        
-Destroys the image format plugin.
-
                         You never have to call this explicitly. TQt destroys a plugin
-automatically when it is no longer used.
-
-
                        bool TQImageFormatPlugin::installIOHandler ( const TQString & format ) [pure virtual]
-
                        
-
-
                         Installs a TQImageIO image I/O handler for the image format format.
-
                         
                        See also keys().
-
-
                        TQStringList TQImageFormatPlugin::keys () const [pure virtual]
-
                        
-
-
                         Returns the list of image formats this plugin supports.
-
                         
                        See also installIOHandler().
-
-
-
                        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                        
-
-
                        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                        TQt 3.3.8
                        
-
                        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qimageformattype-members.html b/doc/html/qimageformattype-members.html
index dd20e6ca0..5e554335f 100644
--- a/doc/html/qimageformattype-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qimageformattype-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qimageformattype.html b/doc/html/qimageformattype.html
index 0f11ed88a..0a86776b0 100644
--- a/doc/html/qimageformattype.html
+++ b/doc/html/qimageformattype.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                        The TQImageFormatType class is a factory that makes TQImageFormat objects.
 More...
-
                        #include <qasyncimageio.h>
+
                        #include <ntqasyncimageio.h>
 
                        List of all member functions.
 
                        Public Members
                        
 
                          
diff --git a/doc/html/qimageio-members.html b/doc/html/qimageio-members.html
index 0176887fb..f10685839 100644
--- a/doc/html/qimageio-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qimageio-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qimageio.html b/doc/html/qimageio.html
index adae54433..7cace1518 100644
--- a/doc/html/qimageio.html
+++ b/doc/html/qimageio.html
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                          The TQImageIO class contains parameters for loading and
 saving images.
 More...
-
                          #include <qimage.h>
+
                          #include <ntqimage.h>
 
                          List of all member functions.
 
                          Public Members
                          
 
                            
@@ -79,17 +79,17 @@ saving images.
 
                             
 
 
-
                             TQImageIO contains a TQIODevice object that is used for image data
+
                             TQImageIO contains a TQIODevice object that is used for image data
 I/O. The programmer can install new image file formats in addition
 to those that TQt provides.
 
                             TQt currently supports the following image file formats: PNG, BMP,
 XBM, XPM and PNM. It may also support JPEG, MNG and GIF, if
 specially configured during compilation. The different PNM formats
 are: PBM (P1 or P4), PGM (P2 or P5), and PPM (P3 or P6).
-
                             You don't normally need to use this class; TQPixmap::load(),
-TQPixmap::save(), and TQImage contain sufficient functionality.
+
                             You don't normally need to use this class; TQPixmap::load(),
+TQPixmap::save(), and TQImage contain sufficient functionality.
 
                             For image files that contain sequences of images, only the first
-is read. See TQMovie for loading multiple images.
+is read. See TQMovie for loading multiple images.
 
                             PBM, PGM, and PPM format output is always in the more condensed
 raw format. PPM and PGM files with more than 256 levels of
 intensity are scaled down when reading.
@@ -100,19 +100,19 @@ license the technology. Such countries include Canada, Japan, the
 USA, France, Germany, Italy and the UK.
 
                             GIF support may be removed completely in a future version of TQt.
 We recommend using the PNG format.
-
                             
                            See also TQImage, TQPixmap, TQFile, TQMovie, Graphics Classes, Image Processing Classes, and Input/Output and Networking.
+
                             
                            See also TQImage, TQPixmap, TQFile, TQMovie, Graphics Classes, Image Processing Classes, and Input/Output and Networking.
 
 
                            Member Function Documentation
                            
 
                            TQImageIO::TQImageIO ()
 
                            
 Constructs a TQImageIO object with all parameters set to zero.
 
-
                            TQImageIO::TQImageIO ( TQIODevice * ioDevice, const char * format )
+
                            TQImageIO::TQImageIO ( TQIODevice * ioDevice, const char * format )
 
                            
 Constructs a TQImageIO object with the I/O device ioDevice and a
 format tag.
 
-
                            TQImageIO::TQImageIO ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format )
+
                            TQImageIO::TQImageIO ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format )
 
                            
 Constructs a TQImageIO object with the file name fileName and a
 format tag.
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Destroys the object and all related data.
 
 
                            void TQImageIO::defineIOHandler ( const char * format, const char * header, const char * flags, image_io_handler readImage, image_io_handler writeImage ) [static]
 
                            
-Defines an image I/O handler for the image format called format, which is recognized using the regular expression header, read using readImage and
+Defines an image I/O handler for the image format called format, which is recognized using the regular expression header, read using readImage and
 written using writeImage.
 
                             flags is a string of single-character flags for this format.
 The only flag defined currently is T (upper case), so the only
@@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ legal value for flags are "T" and the empty string. The "T"
 flag means that the image file is a text file, and TQt should treat
 all newline conventions as equivalent. (XPM files and some PPM
 files are text files for example.)
-
                             format is used to select a handler to write a TQImage; header
+
                             format is used to select a handler to write a TQImage; header
 is used to select a handler to read an image file.
 
                             If readImage is a null pointer, the TQImageIO will not be able
 to read images in format. If writeImage is a null pointer,
@@ -160,20 +160,20 @@ both are null, the TQImageIO object is valid but useless.
  
 
                             Before the regex test, all the 0 bytes in the file header are
 converted to 1 bytes. This is done because when TQt was
-ASCII-based, TQRegExp could not handle 0 bytes in strings.
+ASCII-based, TQRegExp could not handle 0 bytes in strings.
 
                             The regexp is only applied on the first 14 bytes of the file.
 
                             Note that TQt assumes that there is only one handler per format; if
 two handlers support the same format, TQt will choose one
 arbitrarily. It is not possible to have one handler support
 reading, and another support writing.
 
-
                            TQString TQImageIO::description () const
+
                            TQString TQImageIO::description () const
 
                            
 
 
                             Returns the image description string.
 
                             
                            See also setDescription().
 
-
                            TQString TQImageIO::fileName () const
+
                            TQString TQImageIO::fileName () const
 
                            
 
 
                             Returns the file name currently set.
@@ -190,18 +190,18 @@ explicitly set.
 Returns the gamma value at which the image will be viewed.
 
                             
                            See also setGamma().
 
-
                            const TQImage & TQImageIO::image () const
+
                            const TQImage & TQImageIO::image () const
 
                            
 
 
                             Returns the image currently set.
 
                             
                            See also setImage().
 
-
                            const char * TQImageIO::imageFormat ( const TQString & fileName ) [static]
+
                            const char * TQImageIO::imageFormat ( const TQString & fileName ) [static]
 
                            
 Returns a string that specifies the image format of the file fileName, or null if the file cannot be read or if the format is
 not recognized.
 
-
                            const char * TQImageIO::imageFormat ( TQIODevice * d ) [static]
+
                            const char * TQImageIO::imageFormat ( TQIODevice * d ) [static]
 
                            
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 
                             Returns a string that specifies the image format of the image read
@@ -209,20 +209,20 @@ from IO device d, or 0 if the device cannot be read or if the
 format is not recognized.
 
                             Make sure that d is at the right position in the device (for
 example, at the beginning of the file).
-
                             
                            See also TQIODevice::at().
+
                             
                            See also TQIODevice::at().
 
-
                            TQStrList TQImageIO::inputFormats () [static]
+
                            TQStrList TQImageIO::inputFormats () [static]
 
                            
 Returns a sorted list of image formats that are supported for
 image input.
 
-
                            TQIODevice * TQImageIO::ioDevice () const
+
                            TQIODevice * TQImageIO::ioDevice () const
 
                            
 
 
                             Returns the IO device currently set.
 
                             
                            See also setIODevice().
 
-
                            TQStrList TQImageIO::outputFormats () [static]
+
                            TQStrList TQImageIO::outputFormats () [static]
 
                            
 Returns a sorted list of image formats that are supported for
 image output.
@@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ Returns the image's parameters string.
 
 Returns the quality of the written image, related to the
 compression ratio.
-
                             
                            See also setQuality() and TQImage::save().
+
                             
                            See also setQuality() and TQImage::save().
 
 
                            bool TQImageIO::read ()
 
                            
@@ -252,22 +252,22 @@ information, use the imageFormat() static functions.
 
                             Example:
 
                             
                                     TQImageIO iio;
-        TQPixmap  pixmap;
+        TQPixmap  pixmap;
         iio.setFileName( "vegeburger.bmp" );
         if ( image.read() )        // ok
             pixmap = iio.image();  // convert to pixmap
     
                            
  
-
                             
                            See also setIODevice(), setFileName(), setFormat(), write(), and TQPixmap::load().
+
                             
                            See also setIODevice(), setFileName(), setFormat(), write(), and TQPixmap::load().
 
-
                            void TQImageIO::setDescription ( const TQString & description )
+
                            void TQImageIO::setDescription ( const TQString & description )
 
                            
 Sets the image description string for image handlers that support
 image descriptions to description.
 
                             Currently, no image format supported by TQt uses the description
 string.
 
-
                            void TQImageIO::setFileName ( const TQString & fileName )
+
                            void TQImageIO::setFileName ( const TQString & fileName )
 
                            
 Sets the name of the file to read or write an image from to fileName.
 
                             
                            See also setIODevice().
@@ -292,16 +292,16 @@ modify the image. Setting to 0.0 will disable gamma correction
 
                             The default value is 0.0.
 
                             
                            See also gamma().
 
-
                            void TQImageIO::setIODevice ( TQIODevice * ioDevice )
+
                            void TQImageIO::setIODevice ( TQIODevice * ioDevice )
 
                            
 Sets the IO device to be used for reading or writing an image.
 
                             Setting the IO device allows images to be read/written to any
-block-oriented TQIODevice.
+block-oriented TQIODevice.
 
                             If ioDevice is not null, this IO device will override file name
 settings.
 
                             
                            See also setFileName().
 
-
                            void TQImageIO::setImage ( const TQImage & image )
+
                            void TQImageIO::setImage ( const TQImage & image )
 
                            
 Sets the image to image.
 
                             
                            See also image().
@@ -322,7 +322,7 @@ compression ratio.
 
                             q must be in the range -1..100. Specify 0 to obtain small
 compressed files, 100 for large uncompressed files. (-1 signifies
 the default compression.)
-
                             
                            See also quality() and TQImage::save().
+
                             
                            See also quality() and TQImage::save().
 
 
                            void TQImageIO::setStatus ( int status )
 
                            
@@ -348,7 +348,7 @@ will be used.
 
                             Example:
 
                                     TQImageIO iio;
-        TQImage   im;
+        TQImage   im;
         im = pixmap; // convert to image
         iio.setImage( im );
         iio.setFileName( "vegeburger.bmp" );
@@ -357,7 +357,7 @@ will be used.
             // returned TRUE if written successfully
     
                            
  
-
                             
                            See also setIODevice(), setFileName(), setFormat(), read(), and TQPixmap::save().
+
                             
                            See also setIODevice(), setFileName(), setFormat(), read(), and TQPixmap::save().
 
 
 
                            
diff --git a/doc/html/qimevent-members.html b/doc/html/qimevent-members.html
index b0f78384c..0689ed146 100644
--- a/doc/html/qimevent-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qimevent-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -41,9 +41,9 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                          • ignore()
 
                          • isAccepted()
 
                          • selectionLength()
-
                          • spontaneous()
+
                          • spontaneous()
 
                          • text()
-
                          • type()
+
                          • type()
 
                          
 
 
                          
diff --git a/doc/html/qimevent.html b/doc/html/qimevent.html
index 1b0cfcba0..1f32bb3f8 100644
--- a/doc/html/qimevent.html
+++ b/doc/html/qimevent.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                          The TQIMEvent class provides parameters for input method events.
 More...
-
                          #include <qevent.h>
-
                          Inherits TQEvent.
+
                          #include <ntqevent.h>
+
                          Inherits TQEvent.
 
                          List of all member functions.
 
                          Public Members
                          
 
                            
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ not be Spacebar, Enter and Escape.
 
                             These three stages are represented by three different types of
 events. The IMStartEvent, IMComposeEvent and IMEndEvent. When a
 new input context is created, an IMStartEvent will be sent to the
-widget and delivered to the TQWidget::imStartEvent() function.
+widget and delivered to the TQWidget::imStartEvent() function.
 The widget can then update internal data structures to reflect
 this.
 
                             After this, an IMComposeEvent will be sent to the widget for
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ position within the composition string. This string is temporary
 and can change with every key the user types, so the widget will
 need to store the state before the composition started (the state
 it had when it received the IMStartEvent). IMComposeEvents will be
-delivered to the TQWidget::imComposeEvent() function.
+delivered to the TQWidget::imComposeEvent() function.
 
                             Usually, widgets try to mark the part of the text that is part of
 the current composition in a way that is visible to the user. A
 commonly used visual cue is to use a dotted underline.
@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ be sent to the widget. The event contains the final string the
 user selected, and could be empty if they canceled the
 composition. This string should be accepted as the final text the
 user entered, and the intermediate composition string should be
-cleared. These events are delivered to TQWidget::imEndEvent().
+cleared. These events are delivered to TQWidget::imEndEvent().
 
                             If the user clicks another widget, taking the focus out of the
 widget where the composition is taking place the IMEndEvent will
 be sent and the string it holds will be the result of the
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ composition up to that point (which may be an empty string).
 
                            See also Event Classes.
 
 
                            Member Function Documentation
                            
-
                            TQIMEvent::TQIMEvent ( Type type, const TQString & text, int cursorPosition )
+
                            TQIMEvent::TQIMEvent ( Type type, const TQString & text, int cursorPosition )
 
                            
 
 
                             Constructs a new TQIMEvent with the accept flag set to FALSE. type can be one of TQEvent::IMStartEvent, TQEvent::IMComposeEvent
@@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ starting at cursorPos() ) that should be marked as sele
 input widget receiving the event.
 Will return 0 for IMStartEvent and IMEndEvent.
 
-
                            const TQString & TQIMEvent::text () const
+
                            const TQString & TQIMEvent::text () const
 
                            
 
 
                             Returns the composition text. This is a null string for an
diff --git a/doc/html/qinputdialog-h.html b/doc/html/qinputdialog-h.html
index 91cddceda..8633f5e82 100644
--- a/doc/html/qinputdialog-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qinputdialog-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qinputdialog.h Include File
+ntqinputdialog.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                            
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                            TQInputDialog Class Reference
                            
-
-
                            The TQInputDialog class provides a simple convenience dialog to get a single value from the user.
-More...
-
                            #include <qinputdialog.h>
-
                            Inherits TQDialog.
-
                            List of all member functions.
-
                            Static Public Members
                            
-
                              
-
                            • TQString getText ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, TQLineEdit::EchoMode mode = TQLineEdit::Normal, const TQString & text = TQString::null, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
                              • 
-
                            • int getInteger ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, int value = 0, int minValue = -2147483647, int maxValue = 2147483647, int step = 1, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
                              • 
-
                            • double getDouble ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, double value = 0, double minValue = -2147483647, double maxValue = 2147483647, int decimals = 1, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
                              • 
-
                            • TQString getItem ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, const TQStringList & list, int current = 0, bool editable = TRUE, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
                              • 
-
                            
-
                            Detailed Description
                            
-
-
-The TQInputDialog class provides a simple convenience dialog to get a single value from the user.
-
-
-
                             The input value can be a string, a number or an item from a list. A
-label must be set to tell the user what they should enter.
-
                             Four static convenience functions are provided:
-getText(), getInteger(), getDouble() and getItem(). All the
-functions can be used in a similar way, for example:
-
                            -    bool ok;
-    TQString text = TQInputDialog::getText(
-            "MyApp 3000", "Enter your name:", TQLineEdit::Normal,
-            TQString::null, &ok, this );
-    if ( ok && !text.isEmpty() ) {
-        // user entered something and pressed OK
-    } else {
-        // user entered nothing or pressed Cancel
-    }
-    
                            
- 
-
                             
                            Input Dialogs
                             
                            See also Dialog Classes.
-
-
                            Member Function Documentation
                            
-
                            double TQInputDialog::getDouble ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, double value = 0, double minValue = -2147483647, double maxValue = 2147483647, int decimals = 1, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) [static]
-
                            
-Static convenience function to get a floating point number from
-the user. caption is the text which is displayed in the title
-bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user
-(it should say what should be entered). value is the default
-floating point number that the line edit will be set to. minValue and maxValue are the minimum and maximum values the
-user may choose, and decimals is the maximum number of decimal
-places the number may have.
-
                             If ok is not-null *ok will be set to TRUE if the user
-pressed OK and to FALSE if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's
-parent is parent; the dialog is called name. The dialog will
-be modal.
-
                             This function returns the floating point number which has been
-entered by the user.
-
                             Use this static function like this:
-
                             
                            -    bool ok;
-    double res = TQInputDialog::getDouble(
-            "MyApp 3000", "Enter a decimal number:", 33.7, 0,
-            1000, 2, &ok, this );
-    if ( ok ) {
-        // user entered something and pressed OK
-    } else {
-        // user pressed Cancel
-    }
-    
                            
- 
-
-
                            int TQInputDialog::getInteger ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, int value = 0, int minValue = -2147483647, int maxValue = 2147483647, int step = 1, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) [static]
-
                            
-Static convenience function to get an integer input from the
-user. caption is the text which is displayed in the title bar
-of the dialog.  label is the text which is shown to the user
-(it should say what should be entered). value is the default
-integer which the spinbox will be set to.  minValue and maxValue are the minimum and maximum values the user may choose,
-and step is the amount by which the values change as the user
-presses the arrow buttons to increment or decrement the value.
-
                             If ok is not-null *ok will be set to TRUE if the user
-pressed OK and to FALSE if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's
-parent is parent; the dialog is called name. The dialog will
-be modal.
-
                             This function returns the integer which has been entered by the user.
-
                             Use this static function like this:
-
                             
                            -    bool ok;
-    int res = TQInputDialog::getInteger(
-            "MyApp 3000", "Enter a number:", 22, 0, 1000, 2,
-            &ok, this );
-    if ( ok ) {
-        // user entered something and pressed OK
-    } else {
-        // user pressed Cancel
-    }
-    
                            
- 
-
-
                            TQString TQInputDialog::getItem ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, const TQStringList & list, int current = 0, bool editable = TRUE, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) [static]
-
                            
-Static convenience function to let the user select an item from a
-string list. caption is the text which is displayed in the title
-bar of the dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it
-should say what should be entered). list is the
-string list which is inserted into the combobox, and current is the number
-of the item which should be the current item. If editable is TRUE
-the user can enter their own text; if editable is FALSE the user
-may only select one of the existing items.
-
                             If ok is not-null *ok will be set to TRUE if the user
-pressed OK and to FALSE if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's
-parent is parent; the dialog is called name. The dialog will
-be modal.
-
                             This function returns the text of the current item, or if editable is TRUE, the current text of the combobox.
-
                             Use this static function like this:
-
                             
                            -    TQStringList lst;
-    lst << "First" << "Second" << "Third" << "Fourth" << "Fifth";
-    bool ok;
-    TQString res = TQInputDialog::getItem(
-            "MyApp 3000", "Select an item:", lst, 1, TRUE, &ok,
-            this );
-    if ( ok ) {
-        // user selected an item and pressed OK
-    } else {
-        // user pressed Cancel
-    }
-    
                            
- 
-
-
                            TQString TQInputDialog::getText ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, TQLineEdit::EchoMode mode = TQLineEdit::Normal, const TQString & text = TQString::null, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) [static]
-
                            
-Static convenience function to get a string from the user. caption is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the
-dialog. label is the text which is shown to the user (it should
-say what should be entered). text is the default text which is
-placed in the line edit. The mode is the echo mode the line edit
-will use. If ok is not-null *ok will be set to TRUE if the
-user pressed OK and to FALSE if the user pressed Cancel. The
-dialog's parent is parent; the dialog is called name. The
-dialog will be modal.
-
                             This function returns the text which has been entered in the line
-edit. It will not return an empty string.
-
                             Use this static function like this:
-
                             
                            -    bool ok;
-    TQString text = TQInputDialog::getText(
-            "MyApp 3000", "Enter your name:", TQLineEdit::Normal,
-            TQString::null, &ok, this );
-    if ( ok && !text.isEmpty() ) {
-        // user entered something and pressed OK
-    } else {
-        // user entered nothing or pressed Cancel
-    }
-    
                            
- 
-
-
-
                            
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                            
-
-
                            Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                            TQt 3.3.8
                            
-
                            
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qintcache-h.html b/doc/html/qintcache-h.html
index 82ad55b3c..172342809 100644
--- a/doc/html/qintcache-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qintcache-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qintcache.h Include File
+ntqintcache.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                            
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                            TQIntCache Class Reference
                            
-
-
                            The TQIntCache class is a template class that provides a cache based on long keys.
-More...
-
                            #include <qintcache.h>
-
                            Inherits TQPtrCollection.
-
                            List of all member functions.
-
                            Public Members
                            
-
-
                            Detailed Description
                            
-
-
-The TQIntCache class is a template class that provides a cache based on long keys.
-
                             
-
-
                             TQIntCache is implemented as a template class. Define a template
-instance TQIntCache<X> to create a cache that operates on
-pointers to X, or X*.
-
                             A cache is a least recently used (LRU) list of cache items,
-accessed via long keys. Each cache item has a cost. The sum
-of item costs, totalCost(), will not exceed the maximum cache
-cost, maxCost(). If inserting a new item would cause the total
-cost to exceed the maximum cost, the least recently used items in
-the cache are removed.
-
                             Apart from insert(), by far the most important function is find()
-(which also exists as operator[]). This function looks up an
-item, returns it, and by default marks it as being the most
-recently used item.
-
                             There are also methods to remove() or take() an object from the
-cache. Calling setAutoDelete(TRUE) for a cache tells it to delete
-items that are removed. The default is to not delete items when
-they are removed (i.e. remove() and take() are equivalent).
-
                             When inserting an item into the cache, only the pointer is copied,
-not the item itself. This is called a shallow copy. It is possible
-to make the cache copy all of the item's data (known as a deep copy) when an item is inserted. insert() calls the virtual
-function TQPtrCollection::newItem() for the item to be inserted.
-Inherit a dictionary and reimplement newItem() if you want deep
-copies.
-
                             When removing a cache item, the item will be automatically
-deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
-
                             There is a TQIntCacheIterator which may be used to traverse the
-items in the cache in arbitrary order.
-
                             
                            See also TQIntCacheIterator, TQCache, TQAsciiCache, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
-
-
                            Member Function Documentation
                            
-
                            TQIntCache::TQIntCache ( int maxCost = 100, int size = 17 )
-
                            
-
-
                             Constructs a cache whose contents will never have a total cost
-greater than maxCost and which is expected to contain less than
-size items.
-
                             size is actually the size of an internal hash array; it's
-usually best to make it prime and at least 50% bigger than the
-largest expected number of items in the cache.
-
                             Each inserted item is associated with a cost. When inserting a new
-item, if the total cost of all items in the cache will exceed maxCost, the cache will start throwing out the older (least
-recently used) items until there is enough room for the new item
-to be inserted.
-
-
                            TQIntCache::~TQIntCache ()
-
                            
-
-
                             Removes all items from the cache and then destroys the int cache.
-If auto-deletion is enabled the cache's items are deleted. All
-iterators that access this cache will be reset.
-
-
                            void TQIntCache::clear () [virtual]
-
                            
-
-
                             Removes all items from the cache, and deletes them if
-auto-deletion has been enabled.
-
                             All cache iterators that operate this on cache are reset.
-
                             
                            See also remove() and take().
-
-
                            Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
-
                            uint TQIntCache::count () const [virtual]
-
                            
-
-
                             Returns the number of items in the cache.
-
                             
                            See also totalCost().
-
-
                            Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
-
                            type * TQIntCache::find ( long k, bool ref = TRUE ) const
-
                            
-
-
                             Returns the item associated with k, or 0 if the key does not
-exist in the cache. If ref is TRUE (the default), the item is
-moved to the front of the least recently used list.
-
                             If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was
-inserted most recently is returned.
-
-
                            bool TQIntCache::insert ( long k, const type * d, int c = 1, int p = 0 )
-
                            
-
-
                             Inserts the item d into the cache with key k and assigns it
-a cost of c (default 1). Returns TRUE if it succeeds; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                             The cache's size is limited, and if the total cost is too high,
-TQIntCache will remove old, least-used items until there is room
-for this new item.
-
                             The parameter p is internal and should be left at the default
-value (0).
-
                             Warning: If this function returns FALSE (for example, the cost ,
-exceeds maxCost()), you must delete d yourself. Additionally,
-be very careful about using d after calling this function. Any
-other insertions into the cache, from anywhere in the application
-or within TQt itself, could cause the object to be discarded from
-the cache and the pointer to become invalid.
-
-
                            bool TQIntCache::isEmpty () const
-
                            
-
-
                             Returns TRUE if the cache is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                            int TQIntCache::maxCost () const
-
                            
-
-
                             Returns the maximum allowed total cost of the cache.
-
                             
                            See also setMaxCost() and totalCost().
-
-
                            type * TQIntCache::operator[] ( long k ) const
-
                            
-
-
                             Returns the item associated with k, or 0 if k does not exist
-in the cache, and moves the item to the front of the least
-recently used list.
-
                             If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was
-inserted most recently is returned.
-
                             This is the same as find( k, TRUE ).
-
                             
                            See also find().
-
-
                            bool TQIntCache::remove ( long k )
-
                            
-
-
                             Removes the item associated with k, and returns TRUE if the
-item was present in the cache; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                             The item is deleted if auto-deletion has been enabled, i.e. if you
-have called setAutoDelete(TRUE).
-
                             If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was
-inserted most recently is removed.
-
                             All iterators that refer to the removed item are set to point to
-the next item in the cache's traversal order.
-
                             
                            See also take() and clear().
-
-
                            void TQIntCache::setMaxCost ( int m )
-
                            
-
-
                             Sets the maximum allowed total cost of the cache to m. If the
-current total cost is greater than m, some items are removed
-immediately.
-
                             
                            See also maxCost() and totalCost().
-
-
                            uint TQIntCache::size () const
-
                            
-
-
                             Returns the size of the hash array used to implement the cache.
-This should be a bit larger than count() is likely to be.
-
-
                            void TQIntCache::statistics () const
-
                            
-
-
                             A debug-only utility function. Prints out cache usage, hit/miss,
-and distribution information using qDebug(). This function does
-nothing in the release library.
-
-
                            type * TQIntCache::take ( long k )
-
                            
-
-
                             Takes the item associated with k out of the cache without
-deleting it, and returns a pointer to the item taken out or 0 if
-the key does not exist in the cache.
-
                             If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was
-inserted most recently is taken.
-
                             All iterators that refer to the taken item are set to point to the
-next item in the cache's traversal order.
-
                             
                            See also remove() and clear().
-
-
                            int TQIntCache::totalCost () const
-
                            
-
-
                             Returns the total cost of the items in the cache. This is an
-integer in the range 0 to maxCost().
-
                             
                            See also setMaxCost().
-
-
-
                            
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                            
-
-
                            Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                            TQt 3.3.8
                            
-
                            
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qintcacheiterator-members.html b/doc/html/qintcacheiterator-members.html
index a021ffce2..0c84190b9 100644
--- a/doc/html/qintcacheiterator-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qintcacheiterator-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qintcacheiterator.html b/doc/html/qintcacheiterator.html
index 0af1bfa52..bacc26b04 100644
--- a/doc/html/qintcacheiterator.html
+++ b/doc/html/qintcacheiterator.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                            The TQIntCacheIterator class provides an iterator for TQIntCache collections.
 More...
-
                            #include <qintcache.h>
+
                            #include <ntqintcache.h>
 
                            List of all member functions.
 
                            Public Members
                            
 
                              
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                              Detailed Description
                              
 
 
-The TQIntCacheIterator class provides an iterator for TQIntCache collections.
+The TQIntCacheIterator class provides an iterator for TQIntCache collections.
 
                               
 
 
                               Note that the traversal order is arbitrary; you are not guaranteed
@@ -76,10 +76,10 @@ TRUE if the iterator points to the first/last item in the cache;
 which returns the number of items in the cache.
 
                               Note that atFirst() and atLast() refer to the iterator's arbitrary
 ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list.
-
                               
                              See also TQIntCache, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
                               
                              See also TQIntCache, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
 
 
                              Member Function Documentation
                              
-
                              TQIntCacheIterator::TQIntCacheIterator ( const TQIntCache<type> & cache )
+
                              TQIntCacheIterator::TQIntCacheIterator ( const TQIntCache<type> & cache )
 
                              
 
 
                               Constructs an iterator for cache. The current iterator item is
diff --git a/doc/html/qintdict-h.html b/doc/html/qintdict-h.html
index 744a14129..a9aa853b8 100644
--- a/doc/html/qintdict-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qintdict-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qintdict.h Include File
+ntqintdict.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                              
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                              TQIntDict Class Reference
                              
-
-
                              The TQIntDict class is a template class that provides a dictionary based on long keys.
-More...
-
                              #include <qintdict.h>
-
                              Inherits TQPtrCollection.
-
                              List of all member functions.
-
                              Public Members
                              
-
-
                              Important Inherited Members
                              
-
-
                              Protected Members
                              
-
                                
-
                              • virtual TQDataStream & read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item )
                                • 
-
                              • virtual TQDataStream & write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item ) const
                                • 
-
                              
-
                              Detailed Description
                              
-
-
-The TQIntDict class is a template class that provides a dictionary based on long keys.
-
                               
-
-
                               
-
                               TQMap is an STL-compatible alternative to this class.
-
                               TQIntDict is implemented as a template class. Define a template
-instance TQIntDict<X> to create a dictionary that operates on
-pointers to X (X*).
-
                               A dictionary is a collection of key-value pairs. The key is an long used for insertion, removal and lookup. The value is a
-pointer. Dictionaries provide very fast insertion and lookup.
-
                               Example:
-
                              -    TQIntDict<TQLineEdit> fields; // long int keys, TQLineEdit* values
-    for ( int i = 0; i < 3; i++ )
-        fields.insert( i, new TQLineEdit( this ) );
-
-    fields[0]->setText( "Homer" );
-    fields[1]->setText( "Simpson" );
-    fields[2]->setText( "45" );
-
-    TQIntDictIterator<TQLineEdit> it( fields );
-    for ( ; it.current(); ++it )
-        cout << it.currentKey() << ": " << it.current()->text() << endl;
-
-    for ( int i = 0; i < 3; i++ )
-        cout << fields[i]->text() << " "; // Prints "Homer Simpson 45"
-    cout << endl;
-
-    fields.remove( 1 ); // Does not delete the line edit
-    for ( int i = 0; i < 3; i++ )
-        if ( fields[i] )
-            cout << fields[i]->text() << " "; // Prints "Homer 45"
-    
                              
- 
-
                               See TQDict for full details, including the choice of dictionary
-size, and how deletions are handled. 
-
                               
                              See also TQIntDictIterator, TQDict, TQAsciiDict, TQPtrDict, Collection Classes, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
-
-
                              Member Function Documentation
                              
-
                              TQIntDict::TQIntDict ( int size = 17 )
-
                              
-
-
                               Constructs a dictionary using an internal hash array of size size.
-
                               Setting size to a suitably large prime number (equal to or
-greater than the expected number of entries) makes the hash
-distribution better which leads to faster lookup.
-
-
                              TQIntDict::TQIntDict ( const TQIntDict<type> & dict )
-
                              
-
-
                               Constructs a copy of dict.
-
                               Each item in dict is inserted into this dictionary. Only the
-pointers are copied (shallow copy).
-
-
                              TQIntDict::~TQIntDict ()
-
                              
-
-
                               Removes all items from the dictionary and destroys it.
-
                               All iterators that access this dictionary will be reset.
-
                               
                              See also setAutoDelete().
-
-
                              bool TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const
-
                              
-
-
                               Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE.
-
                               
                              See also setAutoDelete().
-
-
                              void TQIntDict::clear () [virtual]
-
                              
-
-
                               Removes all items from the dictionary.
-
                               The removed items are deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
-
                               All dictionary iterators that access this dictionary will be reset.
-
                               
                              See also remove(), take(), and setAutoDelete().
-
-
                              Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
-
                              uint TQIntDict::count () const [virtual]
-
                              
-
-
                               Returns the number of items in the dictionary.
-
                               
                              See also isEmpty().
-
-
                              Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
-
                              type * TQIntDict::find ( long key ) const
-
                              
-
-
                               Returns the item associated with key, or 0 if the key does not
-exist in the dictionary.
-
                               If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most
-recently inserted item will be found.
-
                               Equivalent to operator[].
-
                               
                              See also operator[]().
-
-
                              Example: table/bigtable/main.cpp.
-
                              void TQIntDict::insert ( long key, const type * item )
-
                              
-
-
                               Insert item item into the dictionary using key key.
-
                               Multiple items can have the same key, in which case only the last
-item will be accessible using operator[]().
-
                               item may not be 0.
-
                               
                              See also replace().
-
-
                              Example: scribble/scribble.cpp.
-
                              bool TQIntDict::isEmpty () const
-
                              
-
-
                               Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                               
                              See also count().
-
-
                              TQIntDict<type> & TQIntDict::operator= ( const TQIntDict<type> & dict )
-
                              
-
-
                               Assigns dict to this dictionary and returns a reference to this
-dictionary.
-
                               This dictionary is first cleared and then each item in dict is
-inserted into this dictionary. Only the pointers are copied
-(shallow copy), unless newItem() has been reimplemented.
-
-
                              type * TQIntDict::operator[] ( long key ) const
-
                              
-
-
                               Returns the item associated with key, or 0 if the key does not
-exist in the dictionary.
-
                               If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most
-recently inserted item will be found.
-
                               Equivalent to the find() function.
-
                               
                              See also find().
-
-
                              TQDataStream & TQIntDict::read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item ) [virtual protected]
-
                              
-
-
                               Reads a dictionary item from the stream s and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
                               The default implementation sets item to 0.
-
                               
                              See also write().
-
-
                              bool TQIntDict::remove ( long key )
-
                              
-
-
                               Removes the item associated with key from the dictionary.
-Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the key is in the
-dictionary; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                               If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most
-recently inserted item will be removed.
-
                               The removed item is deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
-
                               All dictionary iterators that refer to the removed item will be
-set to point to the next item in the dictionary's traversal
-order.
-
                               
                              See also take(), clear(), and setAutoDelete().
-
-
                              Example: table/bigtable/main.cpp.
-
                              void TQIntDict::replace ( long key, const type * item )
-
                              
-
-
                               If the dictionary has key key, this key's item is replaced with
-item. If the dictionary doesn't contain key key, item is
-inserted into the dictionary using key key. 
-
                               item may not be 0.
-
                               Equivalent to:
-
                              -        TQIntDict<char> dict;
-        //      ...
-        if ( dict.find(key) )
-            dict.remove( key );
-        dict.insert( key, item );
-    
                              
- 
-
                               If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most
-recently inserted item will be replaced.
-
                               
                              See also insert().
-
-
                              Example: table/bigtable/main.cpp.
-
                              void TQIntDict::resize ( uint newsize )
-
                              
-
-
                               Changes the size of the hashtable to newsize. The contents of
-the dictionary are preserved, but all iterators on the dictionary
-become invalid.
-
-
                              void TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )
-
                              
-
-
                               Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if enable is
-TRUE and to never delete them if enable is FALSE.
-
                               If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are
-deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient
-if the collection has the only pointer to the items.
-
                               The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be
-careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself
-with two collections deleting the same items.
-
                               Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions
-in subclasses. For example, a subclass that has a remove()
-function will remove the item from its data structure, and if
-auto-delete is enabled, will also delete the item.
-
                               
                              See also autoDelete().
-
-
                              Examples: grapher/grapher.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, and table/bigtable/main.cpp.
-
                              uint TQIntDict::size () const
-
                              
-
-
                               Returns the size of the internal hash array (as specified in the
-constructor).
-
                               
                              See also count().
-
-
                              void TQIntDict::statistics () const
-
                              
-
-
                               Debugging-only function that prints out the dictionary
-distribution using qDebug().
-
-
                              type * TQIntDict::take ( long key )
-
                              
-
-
                               Takes the item associated with key out of the dictionary
-without deleting it (even if auto-deletion is enabled).
-
                               If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most
-recently inserted item will be taken.
-
                               Returns a pointer to the item taken out, or 0 if the key does not
-exist in the dictionary.
-
                               All dictionary iterators that refer to the taken item will be set
-to point to the next item in the dictionary's traversing order.
-
                               
                              See also remove(), clear(), and setAutoDelete().
-
-
                              Example: table/bigtable/main.cpp.
-
                              TQDataStream & TQIntDict::write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item ) const [virtual protected]
-
                              
-
-
                               Writes a dictionary item to the stream s and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
                               
                              See also read().
-
-
-
                              
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                              
-
-
                              Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                              TQt 3.3.8
                              
-
                              
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qintdictiterator-members.html b/doc/html/qintdictiterator-members.html
index 8241ef28b..143bd3a0d 100644
--- a/doc/html/qintdictiterator-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qintdictiterator-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qintdictiterator.html b/doc/html/qintdictiterator.html
index e54682b79..657a4926e 100644
--- a/doc/html/qintdictiterator.html
+++ b/doc/html/qintdictiterator.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                              The TQIntDictIterator class provides an iterator for TQIntDict collections.
 More...
-
                              #include <qintdict.h>
+
                              #include <ntqintdict.h>
 
                              List of all member functions.
 
                              Public Members
                              
 
                                
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                Detailed Description
                                
 
 
-The TQIntDictIterator class provides an iterator for TQIntDict collections.
+The TQIntDictIterator class provides an iterator for TQIntDict collections.
 
                                 
 
 
                                 TQIntDictIterator is implemented as a template class. Define a
@@ -60,9 +60,9 @@ template instance TQIntDictIterator<X> to create a dictionary
 iterator that operates on TQIntDict<X> (dictionary of X*).
 
                                 Example:
 
                                -    TQIntDict<TQLineEdit> fields;
+    TQIntDict<TQLineEdit> fields;
     for ( int i = 0; i < 3; i++ )
-        fields.insert( i, new TQLineEdit( this ) );
+        fields.insert( i, new TQLineEdit( this ) );
 
     fields[0]->setText( "Homer" );
     fields[1]->setText( "Simpson" );
@@ -81,14 +81,14 @@ iterator that operates on TQIntDict<X> (dictionary of X*).
 
                                 Note that the traversal order is arbitrary; you are not guaranteed the
 order shown above.
 
                                 Multiple iterators may independently traverse the same dictionary.
-A TQIntDict knows about all the iterators that are operating on the
+A TQIntDict knows about all the iterators that are operating on the
 dictionary. When an item is removed from the dictionary, TQIntDict
 updates all iterators that refer the removed item to point to the
 next item in the traversal order.
-
                                 
                                See also TQIntDict, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
                                 
                                See also TQIntDict, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
 
 
                                Member Function Documentation
                                
-
                                TQIntDictIterator::TQIntDictIterator ( const TQIntDict<type> & dict )
+
                                TQIntDictIterator::TQIntDictIterator ( const TQIntDict<type> & dict )
 
                                
 
 
                                 Constructs an iterator for dict. The current iterator item is
diff --git a/doc/html/qintvalidator-members.html b/doc/html/qintvalidator-members.html
index 6cf7f8859..13dee571b 100644
--- a/doc/html/qintvalidator-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qintvalidator-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -37,54 +37,54 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qintvalidator.html b/doc/html/qintvalidator.html
index a9a716eb7..aa1d6d60e 100644
--- a/doc/html/qintvalidator.html
+++ b/doc/html/qintvalidator.html
@@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                The TQIntValidator class provides a validator which ensures
 that a string contains a valid integer within a specified range.
 More...
-
                                #include <qvalidator.h>
-
                                Inherits TQValidator.
+
                                #include <ntqvalidator.h>
+
                                Inherits TQValidator.
 
                                List of all member functions.
 
                                Public Members
                                
 
                                  
@@ -62,17 +62,17 @@ that a string contains a valid integer within a specified range.
 
                                   
 
                                   Example of use:
 
                                   
                                  -    TQValidator* validator = new TQIntValidator( 100, 999, this );
-    TQLineEdit* edit = new TQLineEdit( this );
+    TQValidator* validator = new TQIntValidator( 100, 999, this );
+    TQLineEdit* edit = new TQLineEdit( this );
 
     // the edit lineedit will only accept integers between 100 and 999
-    edit->setValidator( validator );
+    edit->setValidator( validator );
     
                                  
  
 
                                   Below we present some examples of validators. In practice they would
 normally be associated with a widget as in the example above.
 
                                   
                                  -    TQString str;
+    TQString str;
     int pos = 0;
     TQIntValidator v( 100, 999, this );
 
@@ -101,12 +101,12 @@ or individually with setBottom() and 
 
                                   
                                  See also TQDoubleValidator, TQRegExpValidator, and Miscellaneous Classes.
 
 
                                  Member Function Documentation
                                  
-
                                  TQIntValidator::TQIntValidator ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
                                  TQIntValidator::TQIntValidator ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
 
                                  
 Constructs a validator called name with parent parent, that
 accepts all integers.
 
-
                                  TQIntValidator::TQIntValidator ( int minimum, int maximum, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
                                  TQIntValidator::TQIntValidator ( int minimum, int maximum, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
 
                                  
 Constructs a validator called name with parent parent, that
 accepts integers from minimum to maximum inclusive.
@@ -131,11 +131,11 @@ See the "top" property for details.
 
                                  int TQIntValidator::top () const
 
                                  Returns the validator's highest acceptable value.
 See the "top" property for details.
-
                                  TQValidator::State TQIntValidator::validate ( TQString & input, int & ) const [virtual]
+
                                  TQValidator::State TQIntValidator::validate ( TQString & input, int & ) const [virtual]
 
                                  
-Returns Acceptable if the input is an integer within the
-valid range, Intermediate if the input is an integer outside
-the valid range and Invalid if the input is not an integer.
+Returns Acceptable if the input is an integer within the
+valid range, Intermediate if the input is an integer outside
+the valid range and Invalid if the input is not an integer.
 
                                   Note: If the valid range consists of just positive integers (e.g. 32 - 100)
 and input is a negative integer then Invalid is returned.
 
                                   
                                  @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ and input is a negative integer then Invalid is returned.
     
                                  
  
 
-
                                  Reimplemented from TQValidator.
+
                                  Reimplemented from TQValidator.
 
                                  Property Documentation
                                  
 
                                  int bottom
                                  
 
                                  This property holds the validator's lowest acceptable value.
diff --git a/doc/html/qiodevice-h.html b/doc/html/qiodevice-h.html
index 249fa9feb..571bdca5e 100644
--- a/doc/html/qiodevice-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qiodevice-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qiodevice.h Include File
+ntqiodevice.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                  
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                  TQIODevice Class Reference
                                  
-
-
                                  The TQIODevice class is the base class of I/O devices.
-More...
-
                                  All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
                                  
-
                                  #include <qiodevice.h>
-
                                  Inherited by TQBuffer, TQFile, TQSocket, and TQSocketDevice.
-
                                  List of all member functions.
-
                                  Public Members
                                  
-
-
                                  Protected Members
                                  
-
-
                                  Detailed Description
                                  
-
-
-
-
                                   The TQIODevice class is the base class of I/O devices.
-
                                   
-
                                   An I/O device represents a medium that one can read bytes from
-and/or write bytes to. The TQIODevice class is the abstract
-superclass of all such devices; classes such as TQFile, TQBuffer and
-TQSocket inherit TQIODevice and implement virtual functions such as
-write() appropriately.
-
                                   Although applications sometimes use TQIODevice directly, it is
-usually better to use TQTextStream and TQDataStream, which provide
-stream operations on any TQIODevice subclass. TQTextStream provides
-text-oriented stream functionality (for human-readable ASCII
-files, for example), whereas TQDataStream deals with binary data in
-a totally platform-independent manner.
-
                                   The public member functions in TQIODevice roughly fall into two
-groups: the action functions and the state access functions. The
-most important action functions are:
-
                                   
                                    
-
                                     
                                  •   open() opens a device for reading and/or writing, depending on
-the mode argument.
-
                                     
                                  •   close() closes the device and tidies up (e.g. flushes buffered
-data)
-
                                     
                                  •   readBlock() reads a block of data from the device.
-
                                     
                                  •   writeBlock() writes a block of data to the device.
-
                                     
                                  •   readLine() reads a line (of text, usually) from the device.
-
                                     
                                  •   flush() ensures that all buffered data are written to the real device.
-
                                     
                                  
-
                                   There are also some other, less used, action functions:
-
                                   
                                    
-
                                     
                                  •   getch() reads a single character.
-
                                     
                                  •   ungetch() forgets the last call to getch(), if possible.
-
                                     
                                  •   putch() writes a single character.
-
                                     
                                  •   size() returns the size of the device, if there is one.
-
                                     
                                  •   at() returns the current read/write pointer's position, if there
-is one for this device, or it moves the pointer if given an offset.
-
                                     
                                  •   atEnd() indicates whether there is more to read, if this is
-meaningful for this device.
-
                                     
                                  •   reset() moves the read/write pointer to the start of the
-device, if that is possible for this device.
-
                                     
                                  
-
                                   The state access are all "get" functions. The TQIODevice subclass
-calls setState() to update the state, and simple access functions
-tell the user of the device what the device's state is. Here are
-the settings, and their associated access functions:
-
                                   
                                    
-
                                     
                                  •   Access type. Some devices are direct access (it is possible
-to read/write anywhere), whereas others are sequential. TQIODevice
-provides the access functions (isDirectAccess(),
-isSequentialAccess(), and isCombinedAccess()) to tell users what a
-given I/O device supports.
-
                                     
                                  •   Buffering. Some devices are accessed in raw mode, whereas
-others are buffered. Buffering usually provides greater
-efficiency, particularly for small read/write operations.
-isBuffered() tells the user whether a given device is buffered.
-(This can often be set by the application in the call to open().)
-
                                     
                                  •   Synchronicity. Synchronous devices work immediately (for
-example, files). When you read from a file, the file delivers its
-data straight away. Other kinds of device, such as a socket
-connected to a HTTP server, may not deliver the data until seconds
-after you ask to read it. isSynchronous() and isAsynchronous()
-tell the user how this device operates.
-
                                     
                                  •   CR/LF translation. For simplicity, applications often like to
-see just a single CR/LF style, and TQIODevice subclasses can
-provide this. isTranslated() returns TRUE if this object
-translates CR/LF to just LF. (This can often be set by the
-application in the call to open().)
-
                                     
                                  •   Permissions. Some files cannot be written. For example,
-isReadable(), isWritable() and isReadWrite() tell the application
-whether it can read from and write to a given device. (This can
-often be set by the application in the call to open().)
-
                                     
                                  •   Finally, isOpen() returns TRUE if the device is open, i.e.
-after an open() call.
-
                                     
                                  
-
                                   TQIODevice provides numerous pure virtual functions that you need
-to implement when subclassing it. Here is a skeleton subclass with
-all the members you are sure to need and some that you will
-probably need:
-
                                   
                                  -    class MyDevice : public TQIODevice
-    {
-    public:
-        MyDevice();
-        ~MyDevice();
-
-        bool open( int mode );
-        void close();
-        void flush();
-
-        uint size() const;
-        int  at() const;        // non-pure virtual
-        bool at( int );         // non-pure virtual
-        bool atEnd() const;     // non-pure virtual
-
-        int readBlock( char *data, uint maxlen );
-        int writeBlock( const char *data, uint len );
-        int readLine( char *data, uint maxlen );
-
-        int getch();
-        int putch( int );
-        int ungetch( int );
-    };
-    
                                  
- 
-
                                   The three non-pure virtual functions need not be reimplemented for
-sequential devices.
-
                                   
                                  See also TQDataStream, TQTextStream, and Input/Output and Networking.
-
-
                                  Member Type Documentation
                                  
-
                                  TQIODevice::Offset
                                  
-
-
                                   The offset within the device.
-
-
                                  Member Function Documentation
                                  
-
                                  TQIODevice::TQIODevice ()
-
                                  
-Constructs an I/O device.
-
-
                                  TQIODevice::~TQIODevice () [virtual]
-
                                  
-Destroys the I/O device.
-
-
                                  Offset TQIODevice::at () const [virtual]
-
                                  
-Virtual function that returns the current I/O device position.
-
                                   This is the position of the data read/write head of the I/O
-device.
-
                                   
                                  See also size().
-
-
                                  Example: distributor/distributor.ui.h.
-
                                  Reimplemented in TQSocket.
-
                                  bool TQIODevice::at ( Offset pos ) [virtual]
-
                                  
-Virtual function that sets the I/O device position to pos.
-Returns TRUE if the position was successfully set, i.e. pos is
-within range and the seek was successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                   
                                  See also size().
-
-
                                  Reimplemented in TQSocket.
-
                                  bool TQIODevice::atEnd () const [virtual]
-
                                  
-Virtual function that returns TRUE if the I/O device position is
-at the end of the input; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                  Reimplemented in TQFile and TQSocket.
-
                                  void TQIODevice::close () [pure virtual]
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Closes the I/O device.
-
                                   This virtual function must be reimplemented by all subclasses.
-
                                   
                                  See also open().
-
-
                                  Example: grapher/grapher.cpp.
-
                                  Reimplemented in TQFile and TQSocket.
-
                                  int TQIODevice::flags () const
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Returns the current I/O device flags setting.
-
                                   Flags consists of mode flags and state flags.
-
                                   
                                  See also mode() and state().
-
-
                                  void TQIODevice::flush () [pure virtual]
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Flushes an open I/O device.
-
                                   This virtual function must be reimplemented by all subclasses.
-
-
                                  Reimplemented in TQFile and TQSocket.
-
                                  int TQIODevice::getch () [pure virtual]
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Reads a single byte/character from the I/O device.
-
                                   Returns the byte/character read, or -1 if the end of the I/O
-device has been reached.
-
                                   This virtual function must be reimplemented by all subclasses.
-
                                   
                                  See also putch() and ungetch().
-
-
                                  Reimplemented in TQFile and TQSocket.
-
                                  bool TQIODevice::isAsynchronous () const
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Returns TRUE if the device is an asynchronous device; otherwise
-returns FALSE, i.e. if the device is a synchronous device.
-
                                   This mode is currently not in use.
-
                                   
                                  See also isSynchronous().
-
-
                                  bool TQIODevice::isBuffered () const
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Returns TRUE if the I/O device is a buffered device; otherwise
-returns FALSE, i.e. the device is a raw device.
-
                                   
                                  See also isRaw().
-
-
                                  bool TQIODevice::isCombinedAccess () const
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Returns TRUE if the I/O device is a combined access (both direct
-and sequential) device; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                   This access method is currently not in use.
-
-
                                  bool TQIODevice::isDirectAccess () const
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Returns TRUE if the I/O device is a direct access device;
-otherwise returns FALSE, i.e. if the device is a sequential access
-device.
-
                                   
                                  See also isSequentialAccess().
-
-
                                  bool TQIODevice::isInactive () const
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Returns TRUE if the I/O device state is 0, i.e. the device is not
-open; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                   
                                  See also isOpen().
-
-
                                  bool TQIODevice::isOpen () const
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Returns TRUE if the I/O device has been opened; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                   
                                  See also isInactive().
-
-
                                  Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                  bool TQIODevice::isRaw () const
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Returns TRUE if the device is a raw device; otherwise returns
-FALSE, i.e. if the device is a buffered device.
-
                                   
                                  See also isBuffered().
-
-
                                  bool TQIODevice::isReadWrite () const
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Returns TRUE if the I/O device was opened using IO_ReadWrite
-mode; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                   
                                  See also isReadable() and isWritable().
-
-
                                  bool TQIODevice::isReadable () const
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Returns TRUE if the I/O device was opened using IO_ReadOnly or
-IO_ReadWrite mode; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                   
                                  See also isWritable() and isReadWrite().
-
-
                                  bool TQIODevice::isSequentialAccess () const
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Returns TRUE if the device is a sequential access device;
-otherwise returns FALSE, i.e. if the device is a direct access
-device.
-
                                   Operations involving size() and at(int) are not valid on
-sequential devices.
-
                                   
                                  See also isDirectAccess().
-
-
                                  bool TQIODevice::isSynchronous () const
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Returns TRUE if the I/O device is a synchronous device; otherwise
-returns FALSE, i.e. the device is an asynchronous device.
-
                                   
                                  See also isAsynchronous().
-
-
                                  bool TQIODevice::isTranslated () const
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Returns TRUE if the I/O device translates carriage-return and
-linefeed characters; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                   A TQFile is translated if it is opened with the IO_Translate
-mode flag.
-
-
                                  bool TQIODevice::isWritable () const
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Returns TRUE if the I/O device was opened using IO_WriteOnly or
-IO_ReadWrite mode; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                   
                                  See also isReadable() and isReadWrite().
-
-
                                  int TQIODevice::mode () const
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Returns bits OR'ed together that specify the current operation
-mode.
-
                                   These are the flags that were given to the open() function.
-
                                   The flags are IO_ReadOnly, IO_WriteOnly, IO_ReadWrite,
-IO_Append, IO_Truncate and IO_Translate.
-
-
                                  bool TQIODevice::open ( int mode ) [pure virtual]
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Opens the I/O device using the specified mode. Returns TRUE if
-the device was successfully opened; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                   The mode parameter mode must be an OR'ed combination of the
-following flags.
-
                                  
-
                                   Mode flags Meaning
-
                                   IO_Raw specifies raw (unbuffered) file access.
-
                                   IO_ReadOnly opens a file in read-only mode.
-
                                   IO_WriteOnly opens a file in write-only mode.
-
                                   IO_ReadWrite opens a file in read/write mode.
-
                                   IO_Append sets the file index to the end of the file.
-
                                   IO_Truncate truncates the file.
-
                                   IO_Translate enables carriage returns and linefeed
-translation for text files under MS-DOS, Windows and Macintosh. On
-Unix systems this flag has no effect. Use with caution as it will
-also transform every linefeed written to the file into a CRLF
-pair. This is likely to corrupt your file if you write write
-binary data. Cannot be combined with IO_Raw.
-
                                  
-
                                   This virtual function must be reimplemented by all subclasses.
-
                                   
                                  See also close().
-
-
                                  Example: grapher/grapher.cpp.
-
                                  Reimplemented in TQFile and TQSocket.
-
                                  int TQIODevice::putch ( int ch ) [pure virtual]
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Writes the character ch to the I/O device.
-
                                   Returns ch, or -1 if an error occurred.
-
                                   This virtual function must be reimplemented by all subclasses.
-
                                   
                                  See also getch() and ungetch().
-
-
                                  Example: grapher/grapher.cpp.
-
                                  Reimplemented in TQFile and TQSocket.
-
                                  TQByteArray TQIODevice::readAll () [virtual]
-
                                  
-This convenience function returns all of the remaining data in the
-device.
-
-
                                  Q_LONG TQIODevice::readBlock ( char * data, Q_ULONG maxlen ) [pure virtual]
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Reads at most maxlen bytes from the I/O device into data and
-returns the number of bytes actually read.
-
                                   This function should return -1 if a fatal error occurs and should
-return 0 if there are no bytes to read.
-
                                   The device must be opened for reading, and data must not be 0.
-
                                   This virtual function must be reimplemented by all subclasses.
-
                                   
                                  See also writeBlock(), isOpen(), and isReadable().
-
-
                                  Example: distributor/distributor.ui.h.
-
                                  Reimplemented in TQSocket and TQSocketDevice.
-
                                  Q_LONG TQIODevice::readLine ( char * data, Q_ULONG maxlen ) [virtual]
-
                                  
-Reads a line of text, (or up to maxlen bytes if a newline isn't
-encountered) plus a terminating '\0' into data. If there is a
-newline at the end if the line, it is not stripped.
-
                                   Returns the number of bytes read including the terminating '\0',
-or -1 if an error occurred.
-
                                   This virtual function can be reimplemented much more efficiently
-by the most subclasses.
-
                                   
                                  See also readBlock() and TQTextStream::readLine().
-
-
                                  Reimplemented in TQFile.
-
                                  bool TQIODevice::reset ()
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Sets the device index position to 0.
-
                                   
                                  See also at().
-
-
                                  void TQIODevice::resetStatus ()
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Sets the I/O device status to IO_Ok.
-
                                   
                                  See also status().
-
-
                                  void TQIODevice::setFlags ( int flags ) [protected]
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Used by subclasses to set the device flags to the flags specified.
-
-
                                  void TQIODevice::setMode ( int mode ) [protected]
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Used by subclasses to set the device mode to the mode specified.
-
-
                                  void TQIODevice::setState ( int state ) [protected]
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Used by subclasses to set the device state to the state specified.
-
-
                                  void TQIODevice::setStatus ( int s ) [protected]
-
                                  
-Used by subclasses to set the device status (not state) to s.
-
-
                                  void TQIODevice::setType ( int type ) [protected]
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Used by subclasses to set the device type to the type specified.
-
-
                                  Offset TQIODevice::size () const [pure virtual]
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Virtual function that returns the size of the I/O device.
-
                                   
                                  See also at().
-
-
                                  Reimplemented in TQFile and TQSocket.
-
                                  int TQIODevice::state () const
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Returns bits OR'ed together that specify the current state.
-
                                   The flags are: IO_Open.
-
                                   Subclasses may define additional flags.
-
-
                                  int TQIODevice::status () const
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Returns the I/O device status.
-
                                   The I/O device status returns an error code. If open() returns
-FALSE or readBlock() or writeBlock() return -1, this function can
-be called to find out the reason why the operation failed.
-
                                   
-
                                   The status codes are:
-
                                  
-
                                   Status code Meaning
-
                                   IO_Ok The operation was successful.
-
                                   IO_ReadError Could not read from the device.
-
                                   IO_WriteError Could not write to the device.
-
                                   IO_FatalError A fatal unrecoverable error occurred.
-
                                   IO_OpenError Could not open the device.
-
                                   IO_ConnectError Could not connect to the device.
-
                                   IO_AbortError The operation was unexpectedly aborted.
-
                                   IO_TimeOutError The operation timed out.
-
                                   IO_UnspecifiedError An unspecified error happened on close.
-
                                  
-
                                   
                                  See also resetStatus().
-
-
                                  int TQIODevice::ungetch ( int ch ) [pure virtual]
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Puts the character ch back into the I/O device and decrements
-the index position if it is not zero.
-
                                   This function is normally called to "undo" a getch() operation.
-
                                   Returns ch, or -1 if an error occurred.
-
                                   This virtual function must be reimplemented by all subclasses.
-
                                   
                                  See also getch() and putch().
-
-
                                  Reimplemented in TQFile and TQSocket.
-
                                  Q_LONG TQIODevice::writeBlock ( const char * data, Q_ULONG len ) [pure virtual]
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Writes len bytes from data to the I/O device and returns the
-number of bytes actually written.
-
                                   This function should return -1 if a fatal error occurs.
-
                                   This virtual function must be reimplemented by all subclasses.
-
                                   
                                  See also readBlock().
-
-
                                  Example: distributor/distributor.ui.h.
-
                                  Reimplemented in TQBuffer, TQSocket, and TQSocketDevice.
-
                                  Q_LONG TQIODevice::writeBlock ( const TQByteArray & data )
-
                                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                   This convenience function is the same as calling writeBlock(
-data.data(), data.size() ).
-
-
-
                                  
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                  
-
-
                                  Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                  TQt 3.3.8
                                  
-
                                  
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qiodevicesource-members.html b/doc/html/qiodevicesource-members.html
index 4d1f8d0e6..7a2b7d37c 100644
--- a/doc/html/qiodevicesource-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qiodevicesource-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -37,10 +37,10 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                    
 
                                  • TQIODeviceSource()
 
                                  • ~TQIODeviceSource()
-
                                  • connect()
+
                                  • connect()
 
                                  • enableRewind()
 
                                  • maybeReady()
-
                                  • ready()
+
                                  • ready()
 
                                  • readyToSend()
 
                                  • rewind()
 
                                  • rewindable()
diff --git a/doc/html/qiodevicesource.html b/doc/html/qiodevicesource.html
index a5d6eef50..5fc222e48 100644
--- a/doc/html/qiodevicesource.html
+++ b/doc/html/qiodevicesource.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                    The TQIODeviceSource class is a TQDataSource that draws data from a TQIODevice.
 More...
-
                                    #include <qasyncio.h>
+
                                    #include <ntqasyncio.h>
 
                                    Inherits TQDataSource.
 
                                    List of all member functions.
 
                                    Public Members
                                    
@@ -50,13 +50,13 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
 This class is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                     The TQIODeviceSource class is a TQDataSource that draws data from a TQIODevice.
-
                                     This class encapsulates retrieving data from a TQIODevice (such as a TQFile).
+
                                     The TQIODeviceSource class is a TQDataSource that draws data from a TQIODevice.
+
                                     This class encapsulates retrieving data from a TQIODevice (such as a TQFile).
 
 
                                    Member Function Documentation
                                    
-
                                    TQIODeviceSource::TQIODeviceSource ( TQIODevice * device, int buffer_size = 4096 )
+
                                    TQIODeviceSource::TQIODeviceSource ( TQIODevice * device, int buffer_size = 4096 )
 
                                    
-Constructs a TQIODeviceSource from the TQIODevice device.  The TQIODevice
+Constructs a TQIODeviceSource from the TQIODevice device.  The TQIODevice
 must be dynamically allocated, becomes owned by the TQIODeviceSource,
 and will be deleted when the TQIODeviceSource is destroyed. buffer_size
 determines the size of buffering to use between asynchronous operations.
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ the operation will be with other processing.
 
 
                                    TQIODeviceSource::~TQIODeviceSource ()
 
                                    
-Destroys the TQIODeviceSource, deleting the TQIODevice from which it was
+Destroys the TQIODeviceSource, deleting the TQIODevice from which it was
 constructed.
 
 
                                    void TQIODeviceSource::enableRewind ( bool on ) [virtual]
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Ready until end-of-file.
 
                                    Reimplemented from TQDataSource.
 
                                    void TQIODeviceSource::rewind () [virtual]
 
                                    
-Calls reset() on the TQIODevice.
+Calls reset() on the TQIODevice.
 
 
                                    Reimplemented from TQDataSource.
 
                                    bool TQIODeviceSource::rewindable () const [virtual]
diff --git a/doc/html/qjiscodec-h.html b/doc/html/qjiscodec-h.html
index 2265e91c3..ce2f0eff2 100644
--- a/doc/html/qjiscodec-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qjiscodec-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qjiscodec.h Include File
+ntqjiscodec.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                    TQJisCodec Class Reference
                                    
-
-
                                    The TQJisCodec class provides conversion to and from JIS character sets.
-More...
-
                                    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
                                    
-
                                    #include <qjiscodec.h>
-
                                    Inherits TQTextCodec.
-
                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                    Public Members
                                    
-
                                      
-
                                    • virtual const char * mimeName () const
                                      • 
-
                                    
-
                                    Detailed Description
                                    
- 
-
-
-
                                     The TQJisCodec class provides conversion to and from JIS character sets.
-
                                     More precisely, the TQJisCodec class subclasses TQTextCodec to
-provide support for JIS X 0201 Latin, JIS X 0201 Kana, JIS X 0208
-and JIS X 0212.
-
                                     The environment variable UNICODEMAP_JP can be used to fine-tune
-TQJisCodec, TQSjisCodec and TQEucJpCodec. The mapping names are as for
-the Japanese XML working group's XML
-  Japanese Profile, because it names and explains all the
-widely used mappings. Here are brief descriptions, written by
-Serika Kurusugawa:
-
                                     
                                      
-
                                       
                                    •  "unicode-0.9" or "unicode-0201" for Unicode style. This assumes
-JISX0201 for 0x00-0x7f. (0.9 is a table version of jisx02xx mapping
-used for Uniocde spec version 1.1.)
-
                                       
                                    •  "unicode-ascii" This assumes US-ASCII for 0x00-0x7f; some
-chars (JISX0208 0x2140 and JISX0212 0x2237) are different from
-Unicode 1.1 to avoid conflict.
-
                                       
                                    •  "open-19970715-0201" ("open-0201" for convenience) or
-"jisx0221-1995" for JISX0221-JISX0201 style. JIS X 0221 is JIS
-version of Unicode, but a few chars (0x5c, 0x7e, 0x2140, 0x216f,
-0x2131) are different from Unicode 1.1. This is used when 0x5c is
-treated as YEN SIGN.
-
                                       
                                    •  "open-19970715-ascii" ("open-ascii" for convenience) for
-JISX0221-ASCII style. This is used when 0x5c is treated as REVERSE
-SOLIDUS.
-
                                       
                                    •  "open-19970715-ms" ("open-ms" for convenience) or "cp932" for
-Microsoft Windows style. Windows Code Page 932. Some chars (0x2140,
-0x2141, 0x2142, 0x215d, 0x2171, 0x2172) are different from Unicode
-1.1.
-
                                       
                                    •  "jdk1.1.7" for Sun's JDK style. Same as Unicode 1.1, except that
-JIS 0x2140 is mapped to UFF3C. Either ASCII or JISX0201 can be used
-for 0x00-0x7f.
-
                                       
                                    
-
                                     In addition, the extensions "nec-vdc", "ibm-vdc" and "udc" are
-supported.
-
                                     For example, if you want to use Unicode style conversion but with
-NEC's extension, set UNICODEMAP_JP to
-unicode-0.9, nec-vdc. (You will probably
-need to quote that in a shell command.)
-
                                     Most of the code here was written by Serika Kurusugawa,
-a.k.a. Junji Takagi, and is included in TQt with the author's
-permission and the grateful thanks of the Trolltech team. Here is
-the copyright statement for that code:
-
                                     
-
                                     Copyright (C) 1999 Serika Kurusugawa. All rights reserved.
-
                                     Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-are met:
-
                                      
-
                                    1.  Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-
                                    2.  Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-
                                    
-
                                     THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS".
-ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSETQUENTIAL
-DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-SUCH DAMAGE.
-
                                    See also Internationalization with TQt.
-
-
                                    Member Function Documentation
                                    
-
                                    const char * TQJisCodec::mimeName () const [virtual]
-
                                    
-Returns the codec's mime name.
-
-
                                    Reimplemented from TQTextCodec.
-
-
                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                    
-
-
                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                    
-
                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qkbddriverfactory.html b/doc/html/qkbddriverfactory.html
index df4fff293..366645089 100644
--- a/doc/html/qkbddriverfactory.html
+++ b/doc/html/qkbddriverfactory.html
@@ -54,14 +54,14 @@ driver plugin (see TQKbdDriverPlugin).
 
                                     TQKbdDriverFactory::keys() returns a list of valid keys.
 
 
                                    Member Function Documentation
                                    
-
                                    TQWSKeyboardHandler * TQKbdDriverFactory::create ( const TQString & key, const TQString & device ) [static]
+
                                    TQWSKeyboardHandler * TQKbdDriverFactory::create ( const TQString & key, const TQString & device ) [static]
 
                                    
 Creates a TQWSKeyboardHandler object that matches key for device
 device. This is either a built-in driver, or a driver from a
 driver plugin.
 
                                     
                                    See also keys().
 
-
                                    TQStringList TQKbdDriverFactory::keys () [static]
+
                                    TQStringList TQKbdDriverFactory::keys () [static]
 
                                    
 Returns the list of keys this factory can create drivers for.
 
                                     
                                    See also create().
diff --git a/doc/html/qkbddriverfactory_qws-h.html b/doc/html/qkbddriverfactory_qws-h.html
index d5e05088e..224b846f1 100644
--- a/doc/html/qkbddriverfactory_qws-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qkbddriverfactory_qws-h.html
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 #define TQKBDDRIVERFACTORY_QWS_H
 
 #ifndef QT_H
-#include "qstringlist.h"
+#include "ntqstringlist.h"
 #endif // QT_H
 
 class TQString;
diff --git a/doc/html/qkbddriverplugin.html b/doc/html/qkbddriverplugin.html
index 9771b19bf..e72719337 100644
--- a/doc/html/qkbddriverplugin.html
+++ b/doc/html/qkbddriverplugin.html
@@ -71,13 +71,13 @@ Destroys the keyboard driver plugin.
 
                                     You never have to call this explicitly. TQt destroys a plugin
 automatically when it is no longer used.
 
-
                                    TQWSKeyboardHandler * TQKbdDriverPlugin::create ( const TQString & driver, const TQString & device ) [pure virtual]
+
                                    TQWSKeyboardHandler * TQKbdDriverPlugin::create ( const TQString & driver, const TQString & device ) [pure virtual]
 
                                    
 
 
                                     Creates a driver matching the type specified by driver and device.
 
                                     
                                    See also keys().
 
-
                                    TQStringList TQKbdDriverPlugin::keys () const [pure virtual]
+
                                    TQStringList TQKbdDriverPlugin::keys () const [pure virtual]
 
                                    
 
 
                                     Returns the list of keyboard drivers this plugin supports.
diff --git a/doc/html/qkbddriverplugin_qws-h.html b/doc/html/qkbddriverplugin_qws-h.html
index 1956d140a..68d5cd91e 100644
--- a/doc/html/qkbddriverplugin_qws-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qkbddriverplugin_qws-h.html
@@ -76,8 +76,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 #define TQKBDDRIVERPLUGIN_QWS_H
 
 #ifndef QT_H
-#include "qgplugin.h"
-#include "qstringlist.h"
+#include "ntqgplugin.h"
+#include "ntqstringlist.h"
 #endif // QT_H
 
 #ifndef QT_NO_COMPONENT
diff --git a/doc/html/qkeyboard_qws-h.html b/doc/html/qkeyboard_qws-h.html
index 19a11c978..e8101b8cd 100644
--- a/doc/html/qkeyboard_qws-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qkeyboard_qws-h.html
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 #define TQKEYBOARD_QWS_H
 
 #ifndef QT_H
-#include "qobject.h"
+#include "ntqobject.h"
 #endif // QT_H
 
 #ifndef QT_NO_QWS_KEYBOARD
diff --git a/doc/html/qkeyevent-members.html b/doc/html/qkeyevent-members.html
index fccc8b86f..1cf380310 100644
--- a/doc/html/qkeyevent-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qkeyevent-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -43,11 +43,11 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                  • isAccepted()
 
                                  • isAutoRepeat()
 
                                  • key()
-
                                  • spontaneous()
+
                                  • spontaneous()
 
                                  • state()
 
                                  • stateAfter()
 
                                  • text()
-
                                  • type()
+
                                  • type()
 
                                  
 
 
                                  
diff --git a/doc/html/qkeyevent.html b/doc/html/qkeyevent.html
index af844331a..eb75051c7 100644
--- a/doc/html/qkeyevent.html
+++ b/doc/html/qkeyevent.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                  The TQKeyEvent class contains describes a key event.
 More...
-
                                  #include <qevent.h>
-
                                  Inherits TQEvent.
+
                                  #include <ntqevent.h>
+
                                  Inherits TQEvent.
 
                                  List of all member functions.
 
                                  Public Members
                                  
 
                                    
@@ -66,16 +66,16 @@ Key events for multi media keys are ignored by default. You should call
 TQKeyEvent::accept() if your widget handles those events.
 
                                     The TQWidget::setEnable() function can be used to enable or disable
 mouse and keyboard events for a widget.
-
                                     The event handlers TQWidget::keyPressEvent() and
-TQWidget::keyReleaseEvent() receive key events.
-
                                     
                                    See also TQFocusEvent, TQWidget::grabKeyboard(), and Event Classes.
+
                                     The event handlers TQWidget::keyPressEvent() and
+TQWidget::keyReleaseEvent() receive key events.
+
                                     
                                    See also TQFocusEvent, TQWidget::grabKeyboard(), and Event Classes.
 
 
                                    Member Function Documentation
                                    
-
                                    TQKeyEvent::TQKeyEvent ( Type type, int key, int ascii, int state, const TQString & text = TQString::null, bool autorep = FALSE, ushort count = 1 )
+
                                    TQKeyEvent::TQKeyEvent ( Type type, int key, int ascii, int state, const TQString & text = TQString::null, bool autorep = FALSE, ushort count = 1 )
 
                                    
 
 
                                     Constructs a key event object.
-
                                     The type parameter must be TQEvent::KeyPress or TQEvent::KeyRelease. If key is 0 the event is not a result of a
+
                                     The type parameter must be TQEvent::KeyPress or TQEvent::KeyRelease. If key is 0 the event is not a result of a
 known key (e.g. it may be the result of a compose sequence or
 keyboard macro). ascii is the ASCII code of the key that was
 pressed or released. state holds the keyboard modifiers. text is the Unicode text that the key generated. If autorep is
@@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ recommend using text() instead.
 
 
                                     Returns the number of single keys for this event. If text() is not
 empty, this is simply the length of the string.
-
                                     
                                    See also TQWidget::setKeyCompression().
+
                                     
                                    See also TQWidget::setKeyCompression().
 
 
                                    void TQKeyEvent::ignore ()
 
                                    
@@ -137,25 +137,25 @@ or FALSE indeterminately.
 
 
 
                                     Returns the code of the key that was pressed or released.
-
                                     See TQt::Key for the list of keyboard codes. These codes are
+
                                     See TQt::Key for the list of keyboard codes. These codes are
 independent of the underlying window system.
 
                                     A value of either 0 or Key_unknown means that the event is not
 the result of a known key (e.g. it may be the result of a compose
 sequence or a keyboard macro, or due to key event compression).
-
                                     
                                    See also TQWidget::setKeyCompression().
+
                                     
                                    See also TQWidget::setKeyCompression().
 
 
                                    Example: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
-
                                    ButtonState TQKeyEvent::state () const
+
                                    ButtonState TQKeyEvent::state () const
 
                                    
 
 
                                     Returns the keyboard modifier flags that existed immediately
 before the event occurred.
-
                                     The returned value is ShiftButton, ControlButton, AltButton
-and MetaButton OR'ed together.
+
                                     The returned value is ShiftButton, ControlButton, AltButton
+and MetaButton OR'ed together.
 
                                     
                                    See also stateAfter().
 
 
                                    Example: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
-
                                    ButtonState TQKeyEvent::stateAfter () const
+
                                    ButtonState TQKeyEvent::stateAfter () const
 
                                    
 
 
                                     Returns the keyboard modifier flags that existed immediately after
@@ -163,14 +163,14 @@ the event occurred.
 
                                     Warning: This function cannot be trusted.
 
                                     
                                    See also state().
 
-
                                    TQString TQKeyEvent::text () const
+
                                    TQString TQKeyEvent::text () const
 
                                    
 
 
                                     Returns the Unicode text that this key generated. The text returned
 migth be empty, which is the case when pressing or
 releasing modifying keys as Shift, Control, Alt and Meta. In these
 cases key() will contain a valid value.
-
                                     
                                    See also TQWidget::setKeyCompression().
+
                                     
                                    See also TQWidget::setKeyCompression().
 
 
 
                                    
diff --git a/doc/html/qkeysequence-h.html b/doc/html/qkeysequence-h.html
index 51a38a823..be0575d3a 100644
--- a/doc/html/qkeysequence-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qkeysequence-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qkeysequence.h Include File
+ntqkeysequence.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                    TQKeySequence Class Reference
                                    
-
-
                                    The TQKeySequence class encapsulates a key sequence as used
-by accelerators.
-More...
-
                                    #include <qkeysequence.h>
-
                                    Inherits TQt.
-
                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                    Public Members
                                    
-
-
                                    Related Functions
                                    
-
                                      
-
                                    • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQKeySequence & keysequence )
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQKeySequence & keysequence )
                                      • 
-
                                    
-
                                    Detailed Description
                                    
-
-
-The TQKeySequence class encapsulates a key sequence as used
-by accelerators.
-
                                     
-
                                     A key sequence consists of up to four keyboard codes, each
-optionally combined with modifiers, e.g. SHIFT, CTRL, ALT, META, or UNICODE_ACCEL. For example, CTRL + Key_P
-might be a sequence used as a shortcut for printing a document.
-The key codes are listed in qnamespace.h. As an alternative,
-use UNICODE_ACCEL with the unicode code point of the character.
-For example, UNICODE_ACCEL + 'A' gives the same key sequence
-as Key_A.
-
                                     Key sequences can be constructed either from an integer key code,
-or from a human readable translatable string such as
-"Ctrl+X,Alt+Space". A key sequence can be cast to a TQString to
-obtain a human readable translated version of the sequence.
-Translations are done in the "TQAccel" context.
-
                                     
                                    See also TQAccel and Miscellaneous Classes.
-
-
                                    Member Function Documentation
                                    
-
                                    TQKeySequence::TQKeySequence ()
-
                                    
-Constructs an empty key sequence.
-
-
                                    TQKeySequence::TQKeySequence ( const TQString & key )
-
                                    
-Creates a key sequence from the string key. For example
-"Ctrl+O" gives CTRL+UNICODE_ACCEL+'O'. The strings "Ctrl",
-"Shift", "Alt" and "Meta" are recognized, as well as their
-translated equivalents in the "TQAccel" context (using
-TQObject::tr()).
-
                                     Multiple key codes (up to four) may be entered by separating them
-with commas, e.g. "Alt+X,Ctrl+S,Q".
-
                                     This contructor is typically used with tr(), so that accelerator keys can be replaced in
-translations:
-
                                     
                                    -        TQPopupMenu *file = new TQPopupMenu( this );
-        file->insertItem( tr("&Open..."), this, SLOT(open()),
-                          TQKeySequence( tr("Ctrl+O", "File|Open") ) );
-    
                                    
- 
-
                                     Note the "File|Open" translator comment. It is by no means
-necessary, but it provides some context for the human translator.
-
-
                                    TQKeySequence::TQKeySequence ( int key )
-
                                    
-Constructs a key sequence that has a single key.
-
                                     The key codes are listed in qnamespace.h and can be
-combined with modifiers, e.g. with SHIFT, CTRL, ALT, META or UNICODE_ACCEL.
-
-
                                    TQKeySequence::TQKeySequence ( int k1, int k2, int k3 = 0, int k4 = 0 )
-
                                    
-Constructs a key sequence with up to 4 keys k1, k2,
-k3 and k4.
-
                                     The key codes are listed in qnamespace.h and can be
-combined with modifiers, e.g. with SHIFT, CTRL, ALT, META or UNICODE_ACCEL.
-
-
                                    TQKeySequence::TQKeySequence ( const TQKeySequence & keysequence )
-
                                    
-Copy constructor. Makes a copy of keysequence.
-
-
                                    TQKeySequence::~TQKeySequence ()
-
                                    
-Destroys the key sequence.
-
-
                                    uint TQKeySequence::count () const
-
                                    
-Returns the number of keys in the key sequence.
-The maximum is 4.
-
-
                                    bool TQKeySequence::isEmpty () const
-
                                    
-Returns TRUE if the key sequence is empty; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
-
                                    TQt::SequenceMatch TQKeySequence::matches ( const TQKeySequence & seq ) const
-
                                    
-Matches the sequence with seq. Returns TQt::Identical if
-successful, TQt::PartialMatch for matching but incomplete seq,
-and TQt::NoMatch if the sequences have nothing in common.
-Returns TQt::NoMatch if seq is shorter.
-
-
                                    TQKeySequence::operator TQString () const
-
                                    
-Creates an accelerator string for the key sequence.
-For instance CTRL+Key_O gives "Ctrl+O". If the key sequence has
-multiple key codes they are returned comma-separated, e.g.
-"Alt+X, Ctrl+Y, Z". The strings, "Ctrl", "Shift", etc. are
-translated (using TQObject::tr()) in the "TQAccel" scope. If the key
-sequence has no keys, TQString::null is returned.
-
                                     On Mac OS X, the string returned resembles the sequence that is shown in
-the menubar.
-
-
                                    TQKeySequence::operator int () const
-
                                    
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                     For backward compatibility: returns the first keycode
-as integer. If the key sequence is empty, 0 is returned.
-
-
                                    bool TQKeySequence::operator!= ( const TQKeySequence & keysequence ) const
-
                                    
-Returns TRUE if keysequence is not equal to this key sequence;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                    TQKeySequence & TQKeySequence::operator= ( const TQKeySequence & keysequence )
-
                                    
-Assignment operator. Assigns keysequence to this
-object.
-
-
                                    bool TQKeySequence::operator== ( const TQKeySequence & keysequence ) const
-
                                    
-Returns TRUE if keysequence is equal to this key
-sequence; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                    int TQKeySequence::operator[] ( uint index ) const
-
                                    
-Returns a reference to the element at position index in the key
-sequence. This can only be used to read an element.
-
-
                                    Related Functions
                                    
-
                                    TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQKeySequence & keysequence )
-
                                    
-
-
                                     Writes the key sequence keysequence to the stream s.
-
                                     
                                    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
                                    TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQKeySequence & keysequence )
-
                                    
-
-
                                     Reads a key sequence from the stream s into the key sequence keysequence.
-
                                     
                                    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
-
                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                    
-
-
                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                    
-
                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qlabel-h.html b/doc/html/qlabel-h.html
index cec59f691..6d34c7fd9 100644
--- a/doc/html/qlabel-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qlabel-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qlabel.h Include File
+ntqlabel.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                    TQLabel Class Reference
                                    
-
-
                                    The TQLabel widget provides a text or image display.
-More...
-
                                    #include <qlabel.h>
-
                                    Inherits TQFrame.
-
                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                    Public Members
                                    
-
                                      
-
                                    • TQLabel ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQLabel ( const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQLabel ( TQWidget * buddy, const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
                                      • 
-
                                    • ~TQLabel ()
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQString text () const
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQPixmap * pixmap () const
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQPicture * picture () const
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQMovie * movie () const
                                      • 
-
                                    • TextFormat textFormat () const
                                      • 
-
                                    • void setTextFormat ( TextFormat )
                                      • 
-
                                    • int alignment () const
                                      • 
-
                                    • virtual void setAlignment ( int )
                                      • 
-
                                    • int indent () const
                                      • 
-
                                    • void setIndent ( int )
                                      • 
-
                                    • bool autoResize () const  (obsolete)
                                      • 
-
                                    • virtual void setAutoResize ( bool enable )  (obsolete)
                                      • 
-
                                    • bool hasScaledContents () const
                                      • 
-
                                    • void setScaledContents ( bool )
                                      • 
-
                                    • virtual void setBuddy ( TQWidget * buddy )
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQWidget * buddy () const
                                      • 
-
                                    • virtual void setFont ( const TQFont & f )
                                      • 
-
                                    
-
                                    Public Slots
                                    
-
                                      
-
                                    • virtual void setText ( const TQString & )
                                      • 
-
                                    • virtual void setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & )
                                      • 
-
                                    • virtual void setPicture ( const TQPicture & picture )
                                      • 
-
                                    • virtual void setMovie ( const TQMovie & movie )
                                      • 
-
                                    • virtual void setNum ( int num )
                                      • 
-
                                    • virtual void setNum ( double num )
                                      • 
-
                                    • void clear ()
                                      • 
-
                                    
-
                                    Properties
                                    
-
                                      
-
                                    • Alignment alignment - the alignment of the label's contents
                                      • 
-
                                    • BackgroundMode backgroundMode - the label's background mode  (read only)
                                      • 
-
                                    • int indent - the label's text indent in pixels
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQPixmap pixmap - the label's pixmap
                                      • 
-
                                    • bool scaledContents - whether the label will scale its contents to fill all available space
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQString text - the label's text
                                      • 
-
                                    • TextFormat textFormat - the label's text format
                                      • 
-
                                    
-
                                    Protected Members
                                    
-
-
                                    Detailed Description
                                    
-
-
-The TQLabel widget provides a text or image display.
-
                                     
-
-
-
                                     TQLabel is used for displaying text or an image. No user
-interaction functionality is provided. The visual appearance of
-the label can be configured in various ways, and it can be used
-for specifying a focus accelerator key for another widget.
-
                                     A TQLabel can contain any of the following content types:
-
                                    
-
                                     Content Setting
-
                                     Plain text
-Pass a TQString to setText().
-
                                     Rich text
-Pass a TQString that contains rich text to setText().
-
                                     A pixmap
-Pass a TQPixmap to setPixmap().
-
                                     A movie
-Pass a TQMovie to setMovie().
-
                                     A number
-Pass an int or a double to setNum(), which converts
-the number to plain text.
-
                                     Nothing
-The same as an empty plain text. This is the default. Set
-by clear().
-
                                    
-
                                     When the content is changed using any of these functions, any
-previous content is cleared.
-
                                     The look of a TQLabel can be tuned in several ways. All the
-settings of TQFrame are available for specifying a widget frame.
-The positioning of the content within the TQLabel widget area can
-be tuned with setAlignment() and setIndent(). For example, this
-code sets up a sunken panel with a two-line text in the bottom
-right corner (both lines being flush with the right side of the
-label):
-
                                    -    TQLabel *label = new TQLabel( this );
-    label->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Panel | TQFrame::Sunken );
-    label->setText( "first line\nsecond line" );
-    label->setAlignment( AlignBottom | AlignRight );
-    
                                    
- 
-
                                     A TQLabel is often used as a label for an interactive widget. For
-this use TQLabel provides a useful mechanism for adding an
-accelerator key (see TQAccel) that will set the keyboard focus to
-the other widget (called the TQLabel's "buddy"). For example:
-
                                    -    TQLineEdit* phoneEdit = new TQLineEdit( this, "phoneEdit" );
-    TQLabel* phoneLabel = new TQLabel( phoneEdit, "&Phone:", this, "phoneLabel" );
-    
                                    
- 
-
                                     In this example, keyboard focus is transferred to the label's
-buddy (the TQLineEdit) when the user presses Alt+P. You can
-also use the setBuddy() function to accomplish the same thing.
-
                                      
-
                                     
                                    See also TQLineEdit, TQTextEdit, TQPixmap, TQMovie, GUI Design Handbook: Label, Basic Widgets, and Text Related Classes.
-
-
                                    Member Function Documentation
                                    
-
                                    TQLabel::TQLabel ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
-
                                    
-Constructs an empty label.
-
                                     The parent, name and widget flag f, arguments are passed
-to the TQFrame constructor.
-
                                     
                                    See also alignment, setFrameStyle(), and indent.
-
-
                                    TQLabel::TQLabel ( const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
-
                                    
-Constructs a label that displays the text, text.
-
                                     The parent, name and widget flag f, arguments are passed
-to the TQFrame constructor.
-
                                     
                                    See also text, alignment, setFrameStyle(), and indent.
-
-
                                    TQLabel::TQLabel ( TQWidget * buddy, const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
-
                                    
-Constructs a label that displays the text text. The label has a
-buddy widget, buddy.
-
                                     If the text contains an underlined letter (a letter preceded by
-an ampersand, &), and the text is in plain text format, when the
-user presses Alt+ the underlined letter, focus is passed to the
-buddy widget.
-
                                     The parent, name and widget flag, f, arguments are passed
-to the TQFrame constructor.
-
                                     
                                    See also text, setBuddy(), alignment, setFrameStyle(), and indent.
-
-
                                    TQLabel::~TQLabel ()
-
                                    
-Destroys the label.
-
-
                                    int TQLabel::alignment () const
-
                                    Returns the alignment of the label's contents.
-See the "alignment" property for details.
-
                                    bool TQLabel::autoResize () const
-
                                    
-
-
                                     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                     Returns TRUE if auto-resizing is enabled, or FALSE if auto-resizing
-is disabled.
-
                                     Auto-resizing is disabled by default.
-
                                     
                                    See also setAutoResize().
-
-
                                    TQWidget * TQLabel::buddy () const
-
                                    
-Returns this label's buddy, or 0 if no buddy is currently set.
-
                                     
                                    See also setBuddy().
-
-
                                    void TQLabel::clear () [slot]
-
                                    
-Clears any label contents. Equivalent to setText( "" ).
-
-
                                    void TQLabel::drawContents ( TQPainter * p ) [virtual protected]
-
                                    
-Draws the label contents using the painter p.
-
-
                                    Reimplemented from TQFrame.
-
                                    bool TQLabel::hasScaledContents () const
-
                                    Returns TRUE if the label will scale its contents to fill all available space; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "scaledContents" property for details.
-
                                    int TQLabel::indent () const
-
                                    Returns the label's text indent in pixels.
-See the "indent" property for details.
-
                                    TQMovie * TQLabel::movie () const
-
                                    
-Returns a pointer to the label's movie, or 0 if no movie has been
-set.
-
                                     
                                    See also setMovie().
-
-
                                    TQPicture * TQLabel::picture () const
-
                                    
-
-
                                     Returns the label's picture or 0 if the label doesn't have a
-picture.
-
-
                                    TQPixmap * TQLabel::pixmap () const
-
                                    Returns the label's pixmap.
-See the "pixmap" property for details.
-
                                    void TQLabel::setAlignment ( int ) [virtual]
-
                                    Sets the alignment of the label's contents.
-See the "alignment" property for details.
-
                                    void TQLabel::setAutoResize ( bool enable ) [virtual]
-
                                     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                     Enables auto-resizing if enable is TRUE, or disables it if enable is FALSE.
-
                                     When auto-resizing is enabled the label will resize itself to fit
-the contents whenever the contents change. The top-left corner is
-not moved. This is useful for TQLabel widgets that are not managed by
-a TQLayout (e.g., top-level widgets).
-
                                     Auto-resizing is disabled by default.
-
                                     
                                    See also autoResize(), adjustSize(), and sizeHint.
-
-
                                    void TQLabel::setBuddy ( TQWidget * buddy ) [virtual]
-
                                    
-Sets this label's buddy to buddy.
-
                                     When the user presses the accelerator key indicated by this label,
-the keyboard focus is transferred to the label's buddy widget.
-
                                     The buddy mechanism is only available for TQLabels that contain
-plain text in which one letter is prefixed with an ampersand, &.
-This letter is set as the accelerator key. The letter is displayed
-underlined, and the '&' is not displayed (i.e. the ShowPrefix
-alignment flag is turned on; see setAlignment()).
-
                                     In a dialog, you might create two data entry widgets and a label
-for each, and set up the geometry layout so each label is just to
-the left of its data entry widget (its "buddy"), for example:
-
                                    -    TQLineEdit *nameEd  = new TQLineEdit( this );
-    TQLabel    *nameLb  = new TQLabel( "&Name:", this );
-    nameLb->setBuddy( nameEd );
-    TQLineEdit *phoneEd = new TQLineEdit( this );
-    TQLabel    *phoneLb = new TQLabel( "&Phone:", this );
-    phoneLb->setBuddy( phoneEd );
-    // ( layout setup not shown )
-    
                                    
- 
-
                                     With the code above, the focus jumps to the Name field when the
-user presses Alt+N, and to the Phone field when the user presses
-Alt+P.
-
                                     To unset a previously set buddy, call this function with buddy
-set to 0.
-
                                     
                                    See also buddy(), text, TQAccel, and alignment.
-
-
                                    Examples: addressbook/centralwidget.cpp, chart/optionsform.cpp, and regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
-
                                    void TQLabel::setFont ( const TQFont & f ) [virtual]
-
                                    
-Sets the font used on the TQLabel to font f.
-
-
                                    Example: menu/menu.cpp.
-
                                    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
-
                                    void TQLabel::setIndent ( int )
-
                                    Sets the label's text indent in pixels.
-See the "indent" property for details.
-
                                    void TQLabel::setMovie ( const TQMovie & movie ) [virtual slot]
-
                                    
-Sets the label contents to movie. Any previous content is
-cleared.
-
                                     The buddy accelerator, if any, is disabled.
-
                                     The label resizes itself if auto-resizing is enabled.
-
                                     
                                    See also movie() and setBuddy().
-
-
                                    void TQLabel::setNum ( int num ) [virtual slot]
-
                                    
-Sets the label contents to plain text containing the textual
-representation of integer num. Any previous content is cleared.
-Does nothing if the integer's string representation is the same as
-the current contents of the label.
-
                                     The buddy accelerator, if any, is disabled.
-
                                     The label resizes itself if auto-resizing is enabled.
-
                                     
                                    See also text, TQString::setNum(), and setBuddy().
-
-
                                    void TQLabel::setNum ( double num ) [virtual slot]
-
                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                     Sets the label contents to plain text containing the textual
-representation of double num. Any previous content is cleared.
-Does nothing if the double's string representation is the same as
-the current contents of the label.
-
                                     The buddy accelerator, if any, is disabled.
-
                                     The label resizes itself if auto-resizing is enabled.
-
                                     
                                    See also text, TQString::setNum(), and setBuddy().
-
-
                                    void TQLabel::setPicture ( const TQPicture & picture ) [virtual slot]
-
                                    
-Sets the label contents to picture. Any previous content is
-cleared.
-
                                     The buddy accelerator, if any, is disabled.
-
                                     
                                    See also picture() and setBuddy().
-
-
                                    void TQLabel::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & ) [virtual slot]
-
                                    Sets the label's pixmap.
-See the "pixmap" property for details.
-
                                    void TQLabel::setScaledContents ( bool )
-
                                    Sets whether the label will scale its contents to fill all available space.
-See the "scaledContents" property for details.
-
                                    void TQLabel::setText ( const TQString & ) [virtual slot]
-
                                    Sets the label's text.
-See the "text" property for details.
-
                                    void TQLabel::setTextFormat ( TextFormat )
-
                                    Sets the label's text format.
-See the "textFormat" property for details.
-
                                    TQString TQLabel::text () const
-
                                    Returns the label's text.
-See the "text" property for details.
-
                                    TextFormat TQLabel::textFormat () const
-
                                    Returns the label's text format.
-See the "textFormat" property for details.
-
                                    Property Documentation
                                    
-
                                    Alignment alignment
                                    
-
                                    This property holds the alignment of the label's contents.
-
                                    The alignment is a bitwise OR of TQt::AlignmentFlags and TQt::TextFlags values. The ExpandTabs, SingleLine and ShowPrefix flags apply only if the label contains plain text;
-otherwise they are ignored. The DontClip flag is always
-ignored. WordBreak applies to both rich text and plain text
-labels. The BreakAnywhere flag is not supported in TQLabel.
-
                                     If the label has a buddy, the ShowPrefix flag is forced to
-TRUE.
-
                                     The default alignment is AlignAuto | AlignVCenter | ExpandTabs
-if the label doesn't have a buddy and AlignAuto | AlignVCenter | ExpandTabs | ShowPrefix if the label has a buddy. If the label
-contains rich text, additionally WordBreak is turned on.
-
                                     
                                    See also TQt::AlignmentFlags, setBuddy(), and text.
-
-
                                    Set this property's value with setAlignment() and get this property's value with alignment().
-
                                    BackgroundMode backgroundMode
                                    
-
                                    This property holds the label's background mode.
-
                                    Get this property with backgroundMode().
-
                                     
                                    See also TQWidget::backgroundMode.
-
-
                                    int indent
                                    
-
                                    This property holds the label's text indent in pixels.
-
                                    If a label displays text, the indent applies to the left edge if
-alignment() is AlignLeft, to the right edge if alignment() is
-AlignRight, to the top edge if alignment() is AlignTop, and
-to to the bottom edge if alignment() is AlignBottom.
-
                                     If indent is negative, or if no indent has been set, the label
-computes the effective indent as follows: If frameWidth() is 0,
-the effective indent becomes 0. If frameWidth() is greater than 0,
-the effective indent becomes half the width of the "x" character
-of the widget's current font().
-
                                     
                                    See also alignment, frameWidth, and font.
-
-
                                    Set this property's value with setIndent() and get this property's value with indent().
-
                                    TQPixmap pixmap
                                    
-
                                    This property holds the label's pixmap.
-
                                    If no pixmap has been set this will return an invalid pixmap.
-
                                     Setting the pixmap clears any previous content, and resizes the
-label if TQLabel::autoResize() is TRUE. The buddy accelerator,
-if any, is disabled.
-
-
                                    Set this property's value with setPixmap() and get this property's value with pixmap().
-
                                    bool scaledContents
                                    
-
                                    This property holds whether the label will scale its contents to fill all available space.
-
                                    When enabled and the label shows a pixmap, it will scale the
-pixmap to fill the available space.
-
                                     This property's default is FALSE.
-
                                     
                                    See also scaledContents.
-
-
                                    Set this property's value with setScaledContents() and get this property's value with hasScaledContents().
-
                                    TQString text
                                    
-
                                    This property holds the label's text.
-
                                    If no text has been set this will return an empty string. Setting
-the text clears any previous content, unless they are the same.
-
                                     The text will be interpreted either as a plain text or as a rich
-text, depending on the text format setting; see setTextFormat().
-The default setting is AutoText, i.e. TQLabel will try to
-auto-detect the format of the text set.
-
                                     If the text is interpreted as a plain text and a buddy has been
-set, the buddy accelerator key is updated from the new text.
-
                                     The label resizes itself if auto-resizing is enabled.
-
                                     Note that Qlabel is well-suited to display small rich text
-documents, i.e. those small documents that get their document
-specific settings (font, text color, link color) from the label's
-palette and font properties. For large documents, use TQTextEdit
-in read-only mode instead. TQTextEdit will flicker less on resize
-and can also provide a scrollbar when necessary.
-
                                     
                                    See also textFormat, setBuddy(), and alignment.
-
-
                                    Set this property's value with setText() and get this property's value with text().
-
                                    TextFormat textFormat
                                    
-
                                    This property holds the label's text format.
-
                                    See the TQt::TextFormat enum for an explanation of the possible
-options.
-
                                     The default format is AutoText.
-
                                     
                                    See also text.
-
-
                                    Set this property's value with setTextFormat() and get this property's value with textFormat().
-
-
                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                    
-
-
                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                    
-
                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qlayout-h.html b/doc/html/qlayout-h.html
index b00bc82cf..d65c21c9e 100644
--- a/doc/html/qlayout-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qlayout-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qlayout.h Include File
+ntqlayout.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                    TQLayout Class Reference
                                    
-
-
                                    The TQLayout class is the base class of geometry managers.
-More...
-
                                    #include <qlayout.h>
-
                                    Inherits TQObject and TQLayoutItem.
-
                                    Inherited by TQGridLayout and TQBoxLayout.
-
                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                    Public Members
                                    
-
-
                                    Properties
                                    
-
                                      
-
                                    • int margin - the width of the outside border of the layout
                                      • 
-
                                    • ResizeMode resizeMode - the resize mode of the layout
                                      • 
-
                                    • int spacing - the spacing between widgets inside the layout
                                      • 
-
                                    
-
                                    Protected Members
                                    
-
-
                                    Detailed Description
                                    
-
-
-The TQLayout class is the base class of geometry managers.
-
                                     
-
-
                                     This is an abstract base class inherited by the concrete classes,
-TQBoxLayout and TQGridLayout.
-
                                     For users of TQLayout subclasses or of TQMainWindow there is seldom
-any need to use the basic functions provided by TQLayout, such as
-setResizeMode() or setMenuBar(). See the layout
-    overview page for more information.
-
                                     To make your own layout manager, subclass TQGLayoutIterator and
-implement the functions addItem(), sizeHint(), setGeometry(), and
-iterator(). You should also implement minimumSize() to ensure your
-layout isn't resized to zero size if there is too little space. To
-support children whose heights depend on their widths, implement
-hasHeightForWidth() and heightForWidth(). See the custom layout page for an in-depth
-description.
-
                                     Geometry management stops when the layout manager is deleted.
-
                                    See also Widget Appearance and Style and Layout Management.
-
-
                                    Member Type Documentation
                                    
-
                                    TQLayout::ResizeMode
                                    
-
-
                                     The possible values are:
-
                                      
-
                                    • TQLayout::Auto - If the main widget is a top-level widget with no
-height-for-width (hasHeightForWidth()), this is
-the same as Minimium; otherwise, this is the
-same as FreeResize.
-
                                    • TQLayout::Fixed - The main widget's size is set to sizeHint(); it
-cannot be resized at all.
-
                                    • TQLayout::Minimum - The main widget's minimum size is set to
-minimumSize(); it cannot be smaller.
-
                                    • TQLayout::FreeResize - The widget is not constrained.
-
                                    
-
                                    Member Function Documentation
                                    
-
                                    TQLayout::TQLayout ( TQWidget * parent, int margin = 0, int spacing = -1, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                    
-Constructs a new top-level TQLayout called name, with main
-widget parent. parent may not be 0.
-
                                     The margin is the number of pixels between the edge of the
-widget and the managed children. The spacing sets the value of
-spacing(), which gives the spacing between the managed widgets. If
-spacing is -1 (the default), spacing is set to the value of margin.
-
                                     There can be only one top-level layout for a widget. It is
-returned by TQWidget::layout()
-
-
                                    TQLayout::TQLayout ( TQLayout * parentLayout, int spacing = -1, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                    
-Constructs a new child TQLayout called name, and places it
-inside parentLayout by using the default placement defined by
-addItem().
-
                                     If spacing is -1, this TQLayout inherits parentLayout's
-spacing(), otherwise the value of spacing is used.
-
-
                                    TQLayout::TQLayout ( int spacing = -1, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                    
-Constructs a new child TQLayout called name. If spacing is
--1, this TQLayout inherits its parent's spacing(); otherwise the
-value of spacing is used.
-
                                     This layout has to be inserted into another layout before geometry
-management will work.
-
-
                                    bool TQLayout::activate ()
-
                                    
-Redoes the layout for mainWidget(). You should generally not need
-to call this because it is automatically called at the most
-appropriate times.
-
                                     However, if you set up a TQLayout for a visible widget without
-resizing that widget, you will need to call this function in order
-to lay it out.
-
                                     
                                    See also TQWidget::updateGeometry().
-
-
                                    Examples: layout/layout.cpp, popup/popup.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, and sql/overview/form1/main.cpp.
-
                                    void TQLayout::add ( TQWidget * w )
-
                                    
-
-
                                     Adds widget w to this layout in a manner specific to the
-layout. This function uses addItem().
-
-
                                    Examples: customlayout/border.cpp and customlayout/main.cpp.
-
                                    void TQLayout::addChildLayout ( TQLayout * l ) [protected]
-
                                    
-This function is called from addLayout() functions in subclasses
-to add layout l as a sub-layout.
-
-
                                    void TQLayout::addItem ( TQLayoutItem * item ) [pure virtual]
-
                                    
-
-
                                     Implemented in subclasses to add an item. How it is added is
-specific to each subclass.
-
                                     The ownership of item is transferred to the layout, and it's
-the layout's responsibility to delete it.
-
-
                                    Examples: customlayout/border.cpp, customlayout/card.cpp, and customlayout/flow.cpp.
-
                                    Reimplemented in TQGridLayout and TQBoxLayout.
-
                                    TQRect TQLayout::alignmentRect ( const TQRect & r ) const [protected]
-
                                    
-Returns the rectangle that should be covered when the geometry of
-this layout is set to r, provided that this layout supports
-setAlignment().
-
                                     The result is derived from sizeHint() and expanding(). It is never
-larger than r.
-
-
                                    bool TQLayout::autoAdd () const
-
                                    
-
-
                                     Returns TRUE if this layout automatically grabs all new
-mainWidget()'s new children and adds them as defined by addItem();
-otherwise returns FALSE. This has effect only for top-level
-layouts, i.e. layouts that are direct children of their
-mainWidget().
-
                                     autoAdd() is disabled by default.
-
                                     Note that a top-level layout is not necessarily associated with
-the top-level widget.
-
                                     
                                    See also setAutoAdd().
-
-
                                    void TQLayout::deleteAllItems () [protected]
-
                                    
-Removes and deletes all items in this layout.
-
-
                                    TQSizePolicy::ExpandData TQLayout::expanding () const [virtual]
-
                                    
-Returns whether this layout can make use of more space than
-sizeHint(). A value of Vertical or Horizontal means that it wants
-to grow in only one dimension, whereas BothDirections means that
-it wants to grow in both dimensions.
-
                                     The default implementation returns BothDirections.
-
-
                                    Examples: customlayout/border.cpp and customlayout/flow.cpp.
-
                                    Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
-
                                    Reimplemented in TQGridLayout and TQBoxLayout.
-
                                    void TQLayout::invalidate () [virtual]
-
                                    
-Invalidates cached information. Reimplementations must call this.
-
-
                                    Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
-
                                    Reimplemented in TQGridLayout and TQBoxLayout.
-
                                    bool TQLayout::isEmpty () const [virtual]
-
                                    
-Returns TRUE if this layout is empty. The default implementation
-returns FALSE.
-
-
                                    Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
-
                                    bool TQLayout::isEnabled () const
-
                                    
-Returns TRUE if the layout is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                     
                                    See also setEnabled().
-
-
                                    bool TQLayout::isTopLevel () const
-
                                    
-
-
                                     Returns TRUE if this layout is a top-level layout, i.e. not a
-child of another layout; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                    TQLayoutIterator TQLayout::iterator () [pure virtual]
-
                                    
-
-
                                     Implemented in subclasses to return an iterator that iterates over
-this layout's children.
-
                                     A typical implementation will be:
-
                                    -        TQLayoutIterator MyLayout::iterator()
-        {
-            TQGLayoutIterator *i = new MyLayoutIterator( internal_data );
-            return TQLayoutIterator( i );
-        }
-    
                                    
- 
-where MyLayoutIterator is a subclass of TQGLayoutIterator.
-
-
                                    Examples: customlayout/border.cpp, customlayout/card.cpp, and customlayout/flow.cpp.
-
                                    Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
-
                                    TQWidget * TQLayout::mainWidget ()
-
                                    
-Returns the main widget (parent widget) of this layout, or 0 if
-this layout is a sub-layout that is not yet inserted.
-
-
                                    int TQLayout::margin () const
-
                                    Returns the width of the outside border of the layout.
-See the "margin" property for details.
-
                                    TQSize TQLayout::maximumSize () const [virtual]
-
                                    
-Returns the maximum size of this layout. This is the largest size
-that the layout can have while still respecting the
-specifications. Does not include what's needed by margin() or
-menuBar().
-
                                     The default implementation allows unlimited resizing.
-
-
                                    Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
-
                                    Reimplemented in TQGridLayout and TQBoxLayout.
-
                                    TQMenuBar * TQLayout::menuBar () const
-
                                    
-
-
                                     Returns the menu bar set for this layout, or 0 if no menu bar is
-set.
-
-
                                    TQSize TQLayout::minimumSize () const [virtual]
-
                                    
-Returns the minimum size of this layout. This is the smallest size
-that the layout can have while still respecting the
-specifications. Does not include what's needed by margin() or
-menuBar().
-
                                     The default implementation allows unlimited resizing.
-
-
                                    Examples: customlayout/border.cpp, customlayout/card.cpp, and customlayout/flow.cpp.
-
                                    Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
-
                                    Reimplemented in TQGridLayout and TQBoxLayout.
-
                                    void TQLayout::remove ( TQWidget * widget )
-
                                    
-Removes the widget widget from the layout. After this call, it
-is the caller's responsibility to give the widget a reasonable
-geometry or to put the widget back into a layout.
-
                                     
                                    See also removeItem(), TQWidget::geometry, and add().
-
-
                                    void TQLayout::removeItem ( TQLayoutItem * item )
-
                                    
-Removes the layout item item from the layout. It is the
-caller's responsibility to delete the item.
-
                                     Notice that item can be a layout (since TQLayout inherits
-TQLayoutItem).
-
                                     
                                    See also remove() and addItem().
-
-
                                    ResizeMode TQLayout::resizeMode () const
-
                                    Returns the resize mode of the layout.
-See the "resizeMode" property for details.
-
                                    void TQLayout::setAutoAdd ( bool b ) [virtual]
-
                                    
-If b is TRUE, auto-add is enabled; otherwise auto-add is
-disabled.
-
                                     Warning: If auto-add is enabled, you cannot set stretch factors
-on the child widgets until the widgets are actually inserted in
-the layout (after control returned to the event loop). We
-therefore recommend that you avoid the auto-add feature in new
-programs.
-
                                     
                                    See also autoAdd().
-
-
                                    Examples: hierarchy/objects.cpp and i18n/main.cpp.
-
                                    void TQLayout::setEnabled ( bool enable )
-
                                    
-Enables this layout if enable is TRUE, otherwise disables it.
-
                                     An enabled layout adjusts dynamically to changes; a disabled
-layout acts as if it did not exist.
-
                                     By default all layouts are enabled.
-
                                     
                                    See also isEnabled().
-
-
                                    void TQLayout::setGeometry ( const TQRect & r ) [pure virtual]
-
                                    
-This function is reimplemented in subclasses to perform layout.
-
                                     The default implementation maintains the geometry() information
-given by rect r. Reimplementors must call this function.
-
-
                                    Examples: customlayout/border.cpp, customlayout/card.cpp, and customlayout/flow.cpp.
-
                                    Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
-
                                    Reimplemented in TQGridLayout and TQBoxLayout.
-
                                    void TQLayout::setMargin ( int ) [virtual]
-
                                    Sets the width of the outside border of the layout.
-See the "margin" property for details.
-
                                    void TQLayout::setMenuBar ( TQMenuBar * w ) [virtual]
-
                                    
-Makes the geometry manager take account of the menu bar w. All
-child widgets are placed below the bottom edge of the menu bar.
-
                                     A menu bar does its own geometry management: never do addWidget()
-on a TQMenuBar.
-
-
                                    Examples: layout/layout.cpp and scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
-
                                    void TQLayout::setResizeMode ( ResizeMode )
-
                                    Sets the resize mode of the layout.
-See the "resizeMode" property for details.
-
                                    void TQLayout::setSpacing ( int ) [virtual]
-
                                    Sets the spacing between widgets inside the layout.
-See the "spacing" property for details.
-
                                    void TQLayout::setSupportsMargin ( bool b ) [protected]
-
                                    
-Sets the value returned by supportsMargin(). If b is TRUE,
-margin() handling is implemented by the subclass. If b is
-FALSE (the default), TQLayout will add margin() around top-level
-layouts.
-
                                     If b is TRUE, margin handling needs to be implemented in
-setGeometry(), maximumSize(), minimumSize(), sizeHint() and
-heightForWidth().
-
                                     
                                    See also supportsMargin().
-
-
                                    int TQLayout::spacing () const
-
                                    Returns the spacing between widgets inside the layout.
-See the "spacing" property for details.
-
                                    bool TQLayout::supportsMargin () const
-
                                    
-
-
                                     Returns TRUE if this layout supports TQLayout::margin on
-non-top-level layouts; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                     
                                    See also margin.
-
-
                                    Property Documentation
                                    
-
                                    int margin
                                    
-
                                    This property holds the width of the outside border of the layout.
-
                                    For some layout classes this property has an effect only on
-top-level layouts; TQBoxLayout and TQGridLayout support margins for
-child layouts. The default value is 0.
-
                                     
                                    See also spacing.
-
-
                                    Set this property's value with setMargin() and get this property's value with margin().
-
                                    ResizeMode resizeMode
                                    
-
                                    This property holds the resize mode of the layout.
-
                                    The default mode is Auto.
-
                                     
                                    See also TQLayout::ResizeMode.
-
-
                                    Set this property's value with setResizeMode() and get this property's value with resizeMode().
-
                                    int spacing
                                    
-
                                    This property holds the spacing between widgets inside the layout.
-
                                    The default value is -1, which signifies that the layout's spacing
-should not override the widget's spacing.
-
                                     
                                    See also margin.
-
-
                                    Set this property's value with setSpacing() and get this property's value with spacing().
-
-
                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                    
-
-
                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                    
-
                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qlayoutitem-members.html b/doc/html/qlayoutitem-members.html
index d65975ec8..e9f569801 100644
--- a/doc/html/qlayoutitem-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qlayoutitem-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qlayoutitem.html b/doc/html/qlayoutitem.html
index 7b76e1cd6..8c6712531 100644
--- a/doc/html/qlayoutitem.html
+++ b/doc/html/qlayoutitem.html
@@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                    The TQLayoutItem class provides an abstract item that a
 TQLayout manipulates.
 More...
-
                                    #include <qlayout.h>
-
                                    Inherited by TQLayout, TQSpacerItem, and TQWidgetItem.
+
                                    #include <ntqlayout.h>
+
                                    Inherited by TQLayout, TQSpacerItem, and TQWidgetItem.
 
                                    List of all member functions.
 
                                    Public Members
                                    
 
                                      
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ TQLayout manipulates.
 
 
 The TQLayoutItem class provides an abstract item that a
-TQLayout manipulates.
+TQLayout manipulates.
 
                                       This is used by custom layouts.
 
                                       Pure virtual functions are provided to return information about
 the layout, including, sizeHint(), minimumSize(), maximumSize()
@@ -74,16 +74,16 @@ and geometry(), and its alignment with alignment().
 
                                       isEmpty() returns whether the layout is empty. iterator() returns
 an iterator for the layout's children. If the concrete item is a
-TQWidget, it can be retrieved using widget(). Similarly for
+TQWidget, it can be retrieved using widget(). Similarly for
 layout() and spacerItem().
-
                                       
                                      See also TQLayout, Widget Appearance and Style, and Layout Management.
+
                                       
                                      See also TQLayout, Widget Appearance and Style, and Layout Management.
 
 
                                      Member Function Documentation
                                      
 
                                      TQLayoutItem::TQLayoutItem ( int alignment = 0 )
 
                                      
 
 
                                       Constructs a layout item with an alignment that is a bitwise OR
-of the TQt::AlignmentFlags. Not all subclasses support
+of the TQt::AlignmentFlags. Not all subclasses support
 alignment.
 
 
                                      TQLayoutItem::~TQLayoutItem () [virtual]
@@ -95,14 +95,14 @@ Destroys the TQLayoutItem.
 
 
                                       Returns the alignment of this item.
 
-
                                      TQSizePolicy::ExpandData TQLayoutItem::expanding () const [pure virtual]
+
                                      TQSizePolicy::ExpandData TQLayoutItem::expanding () const [pure virtual]
 
                                      
 
 
                                       Implemented in subclasses to return the direction(s) this item
 "wants" to expand in (if any).
 
-
                                      Reimplemented in TQLayout, TQSpacerItem, and TQWidgetItem.
-
                                      TQRect TQLayoutItem::geometry () const [pure virtual]
+
                                      Reimplemented in TQLayout, TQSpacerItem, and TQWidgetItem.
+
                                      TQRect TQLayoutItem::geometry () const [pure virtual]
 
                                      
 
 
                                       Returns the rectangle covered by this layout item.
@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ width; otherwise returns FALSE. The default implementation returns
 FALSE.
 
                                       Reimplement this function in layout managers that support height
 for width.
-
                                       
                                      See also heightForWidth() and TQWidget::heightForWidth().
+
                                       
                                      See also heightForWidth() and TQWidget::heightForWidth().
 
 
                                      Examples: customlayout/border.cpp and customlayout/flow.cpp.
 
                                      Reimplemented in TQGridLayout and TQBoxLayout.
@@ -153,53 +153,53 @@ exponential time.
 
 Invalidates any cached information in this layout item.
 
-
                                      Reimplemented in TQLayout.
+
                                      Reimplemented in TQLayout.
 
                                      bool TQLayoutItem::isEmpty () const [pure virtual]
 
                                      
 
 
                                       Implemented in subclasses to return whether this item is empty,
 i.e. whether it contains any widgets.
 
-
                                      Reimplemented in TQLayout, TQSpacerItem, and TQWidgetItem.
+
                                      Reimplemented in TQLayout, TQSpacerItem, and TQWidgetItem.
 
                                      TQLayoutIterator TQLayoutItem::iterator () [virtual]
 
                                      
 Returns an iterator over this item's TQLayoutItem children. The
 default implementation returns an empty iterator.
 
                                       Reimplement this function in subclasses that can have children.
 
-
                                      Reimplemented in TQLayout.
-
                                      TQLayout * TQLayoutItem::layout () [virtual]
+
                                      Reimplemented in TQLayout.
+
                                      TQLayout * TQLayoutItem::layout () [virtual]
 
                                      
-If this item is a TQLayout, it is returned as a TQLayout; otherwise
+If this item is a TQLayout, it is returned as a TQLayout; otherwise
 0 is returned. This function provides type-safe casting.
 
-
                                      TQSize TQLayoutItem::maximumSize () const [pure virtual]
+
                                      TQSize TQLayoutItem::maximumSize () const [pure virtual]
 
                                      
 
 
                                       Implemented in subclasses to return the maximum size of this item.
 
-
                                      Reimplemented in TQLayout, TQSpacerItem, and TQWidgetItem.
-
                                      TQSize TQLayoutItem::minimumSize () const [pure virtual]
+
                                      Reimplemented in TQLayout, TQSpacerItem, and TQWidgetItem.
+
                                      TQSize TQLayoutItem::minimumSize () const [pure virtual]
 
                                      
 
 
                                       Implemented in subclasses to return the minimum size of this item.
 
 
                                      Examples: customlayout/border.cpp, customlayout/card.cpp, and customlayout/flow.cpp.
-
                                      Reimplemented in TQLayout, TQSpacerItem, and TQWidgetItem.
+
                                      Reimplemented in TQLayout, TQSpacerItem, and TQWidgetItem.
 
                                      void TQLayoutItem::setAlignment ( int a ) [virtual]
 
                                      
 Sets the alignment of this item to a, which is a bitwise OR of
-the TQt::AlignmentFlags. Not all subclasses support alignment.
+the TQt::AlignmentFlags. Not all subclasses support alignment.
 
 
                                      Example: chart/optionsform.cpp.
-
                                      void TQLayoutItem::setGeometry ( const TQRect & r ) [pure virtual]
+
                                      void TQLayoutItem::setGeometry ( const TQRect & r ) [pure virtual]
 
                                      
 
 
                                       Implemented in subclasses to set this item's geometry to r.
 
 
                                      Examples: customlayout/border.cpp, customlayout/card.cpp, and customlayout/flow.cpp.
-
                                      Reimplemented in TQLayout, TQSpacerItem, and TQWidgetItem.
-
                                      TQSize TQLayoutItem::sizeHint () const [pure virtual]
+
                                      Reimplemented in TQLayout, TQSpacerItem, and TQWidgetItem.
+
                                      TQSize TQLayoutItem::sizeHint () const [pure virtual]
 
                                      
 
 
                                       Implemented in subclasses to return the preferred size of this item.
@@ -211,9 +211,9 @@ the TQt::AlignmentFlags. Not all subcl
 If this item is a TQSpacerItem, it is returned as a TQSpacerItem;
 otherwise 0 is returned. This function provides type-safe casting.
 
-
                                      TQWidget * TQLayoutItem::widget () [virtual]
+
                                      TQWidget * TQLayoutItem::widget () [virtual]
 
                                      
-If this item is a TQWidget, it is returned as a TQWidget; otherwise
+If this item is a TQWidget, it is returned as a TQWidget; otherwise
 0 is returned. This function provides type-safe casting.
 
 
                                      Reimplemented in TQWidgetItem.
diff --git a/doc/html/qlayoutiterator-members.html b/doc/html/qlayoutiterator-members.html
index 87142f071..4127f649a 100644
--- a/doc/html/qlayoutiterator-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qlayoutiterator-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qlayoutiterator.html b/doc/html/qlayoutiterator.html
index d60423df1..5e36da551 100644
--- a/doc/html/qlayoutiterator.html
+++ b/doc/html/qlayoutiterator.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                      The TQLayoutIterator class provides iterators over TQLayoutItem.
 More...
-
                                      #include <qlayout.h>
+
                                      #include <ntqlayout.h>
 
                                      List of all member functions.
 
                                      Public Members
                                      
 
                                        
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ same layout.
 
                                         The following code will draw a rectangle for each layout item in
 the layout structure of the widget.
 
                                        -    static void paintLayout( TQPainter *p, TQLayoutItem *lay )
+    static void paintLayout( TQPainter *p, TQLayoutItem *lay )
     {
         TQLayoutIterator it = lay->iterator();
         TQLayoutItem *child;
@@ -75,11 +75,11 @@ the layout structure of the widget.
             paintLayout( p, child );
             ++it;
         }
-        p->drawRect( lay->geometry() );
+        p->drawRect( lay->geometry() );
     }
     void ExampleWidget::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
     {
-        TQPainter p( this );
+        TQPainter p( this );
         if ( layout() )
             paintLayout( &p, layout() );
     }
diff --git a/doc/html/qlcdnumber-h.html b/doc/html/qlcdnumber-h.html
index c003ff879..8d67f15d8 100644
--- a/doc/html/qlcdnumber-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qlcdnumber-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qlcdnumber.h Include File
+ntqlcdnumber.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                        TQLCDNumber Class Reference
                                        
-
-
                                        The TQLCDNumber widget displays a number with LCD-like digits.
-More...
-
                                        #include <qlcdnumber.h>
-
                                        Inherits TQFrame.
-
                                        List of all member functions.
-
                                        Public Members
                                        
-
-
                                        Public Slots
                                        
-
-
                                        Signals
                                        
-
-
                                        Properties
                                        
-
                                          
-
                                        • int intValue - the displayed value rounded to the nearest integer
                                          • 
-
                                        • Mode mode - the current display mode (number base)
                                          • 
-
                                        • int numDigits - the current number of digits displayed
                                          • 
-
                                        • SegmentStyle segmentStyle - the style of the LCDNumber
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool smallDecimalPoint - the style of the decimal point
                                          • 
-
                                        • double value - the displayed value
                                          • 
-
                                        
-
                                        Protected Members
                                        
-
-
                                        Detailed Description
                                        
-
-
-
                                         The TQLCDNumber widget displays a number with LCD-like digits.
-
                                         
-
-
                                         It can display a number in just about any size. It can display
-decimal, hexadecimal, octal or binary numbers. It is easy to
-connect to data sources using the display() slot, which is
-overloaded to take any of five argument types.
-
                                         There are also slots to change the base with setMode() and the
-decimal point with setSmallDecimalPoint().
-
                                         TQLCDNumber emits the overflow() signal when it is asked to display
-something beyond its range. The range is set by setNumDigits(),
-but setSmallDecimalPoint() also influences it. If the display is
-set to hexadecimal, octal or binary, the integer equivalent of the
-value is displayed.
-
                                         These digits and other symbols can be shown: 0/O, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5/S,
-6, 7, 8, 9/g, minus, decimal point, A, B, C, D, E, F, h, H, L, o,
-P, r, u, U, Y, colon, degree sign (which is specified as single
-quote in the string) and space. TQLCDNumber substitutes spaces for
-illegal characters.
-
                                         It is not possible to retrieve the contents of a TQLCDNumber
-object, although you can retrieve the numeric value with value().
-If you really need the text, we recommend that you connect the
-signals that feed the display() slot to another slot as well and
-store the value there.
-
                                         Incidentally, TQLCDNumber is the very oldest part of TQt, tracing
-back to a BASIC program on the Sinclair Spectrum.
-
                                          
-
                                         
                                        See also TQLabel, TQFrame, and Basic Widgets.
-
-
                                        Member Type Documentation
                                        
-
                                        TQLCDNumber::Mode
                                        
-
-
                                         This type determines how numbers are shown.
-
                                          
-
                                        • TQLCDNumber::Hex - Hexadecimal
-
                                        • TQLCDNumber::Dec - Decimal
-
                                        • TQLCDNumber::Oct - Octal
-
                                        • TQLCDNumber::Bin - Binary
-
                                         If the display is set to hexadecimal, octal or binary, the integer
-equivalent of the value is displayed.
-
-
                                        TQLCDNumber::SegmentStyle
                                        
-
-
                                         This type determines the visual appearance of the TQLCDNumber
-widget.
-
                                          
-
                                        • TQLCDNumber::Outline - gives raised segments filled with the background brush.
-
                                        • TQLCDNumber::Filled - gives raised segments filled with the foreground brush.
-
                                        • TQLCDNumber::Flat - gives flat segments filled with the foreground brush.
-
                                        
-
                                        Member Function Documentation
                                        
-
                                        TQLCDNumber::TQLCDNumber ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                        
-Constructs an LCD number, sets the number of digits to 5, the base
-to decimal, the decimal point mode to 'small' and the frame style
-to a raised box. The segmentStyle() is set to Outline.
-
                                         The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQFrame
-constructor.
-
                                         
                                        See also numDigits and smallDecimalPoint.
-
-
                                        TQLCDNumber::TQLCDNumber ( uint numDigits, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                        
-Constructs an LCD number, sets the number of digits to numDigits, the base to decimal, the decimal point mode to 'small'
-and the frame style to a raised box. The segmentStyle() is set to
-Outline.
-
                                         The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQFrame
-constructor.
-
                                         
                                        See also numDigits and smallDecimalPoint.
-
-
                                        TQLCDNumber::~TQLCDNumber ()
-
                                        
-Destroys the LCD number.
-
-
                                        bool TQLCDNumber::checkOverflow ( double num ) const
-
                                        
-Returns TRUE if num is too big to be displayed in its entirety;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                         
                                        See also display(), numDigits, and smallDecimalPoint.
-
-
                                        bool TQLCDNumber::checkOverflow ( int num ) const
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         Returns TRUE if num is too big to be displayed in its entirety;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                         
                                        See also display(), numDigits, and smallDecimalPoint.
-
-
                                        void TQLCDNumber::display ( const TQString & s ) [slot]
-
                                        
-Displays the number represented by the string s.
-
                                         This version of the function disregards mode() and
-smallDecimalPoint().
-
                                         These digits and other symbols can be shown: 0/O, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5/S,
-6, 7, 8, 9/g, minus, decimal point, A, B, C, D, E, F, h, H, L, o,
-P, r, u, U, Y, colon, degree sign (which is specified as single
-quote in the string) and space. TQLCDNumber substitutes spaces for
-illegal characters.
-
-
                                        Examples: rangecontrols/rangecontrols.cpp, t12/lcdrange.cpp, t13/gamebrd.cpp, t5/main.cpp, t6/main.cpp, t7/lcdrange.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                                        void TQLCDNumber::display ( int num ) [slot]
-
                                        Sets the displayed value rounded to the nearest integer to num.
-See the "intValue" property for details.
-
                                        void TQLCDNumber::display ( double num ) [slot]
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         Displays the number num.
-
-
                                        void TQLCDNumber::drawContents ( TQPainter * p ) [virtual protected]
-
                                        
-Draws the LCD number using painter p. This function is called
-from TQFrame::paintEvent().
-
-
                                        Reimplemented from TQFrame.
-
                                        int TQLCDNumber::intValue () const
-
                                        Returns the displayed value rounded to the nearest integer.
-See the "intValue" property for details.
-
                                        Mode TQLCDNumber::mode () const
-
                                        Returns the current display mode (number base).
-See the "mode" property for details.
-
                                        int TQLCDNumber::numDigits () const
-
                                        Returns the current number of digits displayed.
-See the "numDigits" property for details.
-
                                        void TQLCDNumber::overflow () [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted whenever the TQLCDNumber is asked to display
-a too-large number or a too-long string.
-
                                         It is never emitted by setNumDigits().
-
-
                                        SegmentStyle TQLCDNumber::segmentStyle () const
-
                                        Returns the style of the LCDNumber.
-See the "segmentStyle" property for details.
-
                                        void TQLCDNumber::setBinMode () [virtual slot]
-
                                        
-Calls setMode( BIN ). Provided for convenience (e.g. for
-connecting buttons to it).
-
                                         
                                        See also mode, setHexMode(), setDecMode(), setOctMode(), and mode.
-
-
                                        void TQLCDNumber::setDecMode () [virtual slot]
-
                                        
-Calls setMode( DEC ). Provided for convenience (e.g. for
-connecting buttons to it).
-
                                         
                                        See also mode, setHexMode(), setOctMode(), setBinMode(), and mode.
-
-
                                        void TQLCDNumber::setHexMode () [virtual slot]
-
                                        
-Calls setMode( HEX ). Provided for convenience (e.g. for
-connecting buttons to it).
-
                                         
                                        See also mode, setDecMode(), setOctMode(), setBinMode(), and mode.
-
-
                                        void TQLCDNumber::setMode ( Mode ) [virtual]
-
                                        Sets the current display mode (number base).
-See the "mode" property for details.
-
                                        void TQLCDNumber::setNumDigits ( int nDigits ) [virtual]
-
                                        Sets the current number of digits displayed to nDigits.
-See the "numDigits" property for details.
-
                                        void TQLCDNumber::setOctMode () [virtual slot]
-
                                        
-Calls setMode( OCT ). Provided for convenience (e.g. for
-connecting buttons to it).
-
                                         
                                        See also mode, setHexMode(), setDecMode(), setBinMode(), and mode.
-
-
                                        void TQLCDNumber::setSegmentStyle ( SegmentStyle ) [virtual]
-
                                        Sets the style of the LCDNumber.
-See the "segmentStyle" property for details.
-
                                        void TQLCDNumber::setSmallDecimalPoint ( bool ) [virtual slot]
-
                                        Sets the style of the decimal point.
-See the "smallDecimalPoint" property for details.
-
                                        bool TQLCDNumber::smallDecimalPoint () const
-
                                        Returns the style of the decimal point.
-See the "smallDecimalPoint" property for details.
-
                                        double TQLCDNumber::value () const
-
                                        Returns the displayed value.
-See the "value" property for details.
-
                                        Property Documentation
                                        
-
                                        int intValue
                                        
-
                                        This property holds the displayed value rounded to the nearest integer.
-
                                        This property corresponds to the nearest integer to the current
-value displayed by the LCDNumber. This is the value used for
-hexadecimal, octal and binary modes.
-
                                         If the displayed value is not a number, the property has a value
-of 0.
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with display() and get this property's value with intValue().
-
                                        Mode mode
                                        
-
                                        This property holds the current display mode (number base).
-
                                        Corresponds to the current display mode, which is one of BIN,
-OCT, DEC (the default) and HEX. DEC mode can display
-floating point values, the other modes display the integer
-equivalent.
-
                                         
                                        See also smallDecimalPoint, setHexMode(), setDecMode(), setOctMode(), and setBinMode().
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setMode() and get this property's value with mode().
-
                                        int numDigits
                                        
-
                                        This property holds the current number of digits displayed.
-
                                        Corresponds to the current number of digits. If TQLCDNumber::smallDecimalPoint is FALSE, the decimal point occupies
-one digit position.
-
                                         
                                        See also smallDecimalPoint.
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setNumDigits() and get this property's value with numDigits().
-
                                        SegmentStyle segmentStyle
                                        
-
                                        This property holds the style of the LCDNumber.
-
                                        
-
                                         Style Result
-
                                         Outline
-Produces raised segments filled with the background color
-(this is the default).
-
                                         Filled
-Produces raised segments filled with the foreground color.
-
                                         Flat
-Produces flat segments filled with the foreground color.
-
                                        
-
                                         Outline and Filled will additionally use
-TQColorGroup::light() and TQColorGroup::dark() for shadow effects.
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setSegmentStyle() and get this property's value with segmentStyle().
-
                                        bool smallDecimalPoint
                                        
-
                                        This property holds the style of the decimal point.
-
                                        If TRUE the decimal point is drawn between two digit positions.
-Otherwise it occupies a digit position of its own, i.e. is drawn
-in a digit position. The default is FALSE.
-
                                         The inter-digit space is made slightly wider when the decimal
-point is drawn between the digits.
-
                                         
                                        See also mode.
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setSmallDecimalPoint() and get this property's value with smallDecimalPoint().
-
                                        double value
                                        
-
                                        This property holds the displayed value.
-
                                        This property corresponds to the current value displayed by the
-LCDNumber.
-
                                         If the displayed value is not a number, the property has a value
-of 0.
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with display() and get this property's value with value().
-
-
                                        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                        
-
-
                                        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                        TQt 3.3.8
                                        
-
                                        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qlibrary-h.html b/doc/html/qlibrary-h.html
index 1dace16f1..0820273fc 100644
--- a/doc/html/qlibrary-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qlibrary-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qlibrary.h Include File
+ntqlibrary.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                        TQLibrary Class Reference
                                        
-
-
                                        The TQLibrary class provides a wrapper for handling shared libraries.
-More...
-
                                        All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
                                        
-
                                        #include <qlibrary.h>
-
                                        List of all member functions.
-
                                        Public Members
                                        
-
-
                                        Static Public Members
                                        
-
                                          
-
                                        • void * resolve ( const TQString & filename, const char * symb )
                                          • 
-
                                        
-
                                        Detailed Description
                                        
-
-
-
-The TQLibrary class provides a wrapper for handling shared libraries.
-
                                         
-
-
                                         An instance of a TQLibrary object can handle a single shared
-library and provide access to the functionality in the library in
-a platform independent way. If the library is a component server,
-TQLibrary provides access to the exported component and can
-directly query this component for interfaces.
-
                                         TQLibrary ensures that the shared library is loaded and stays in
-memory whilst it is in use. TQLibrary can also unload the library
-on destruction and release unused resources.
-
                                         A typical use of TQLibrary is to resolve an exported symbol in a
-shared object, and to call the function that this symbol
-represents. This is called "explicit linking" in contrast to
-"implicit linking", which is done by the link step in the build
-process when linking an executable against a library.
-
                                         The following code snippet loads a library, resolves the symbol
-"mysymbol", and calls the function if everything succeeded. If
-something went wrong, e.g. the library file does not exist or the
-symbol is not defined, the function pointer will be 0 and won't be
-called. When the TQLibrary object is destroyed the library will be
-unloaded, making all references to memory allocated in the library
-invalid.
-
                                         
                                        -    typedef void (*MyPrototype)();
-    MyPrototype myFunction;
-
-    TQLibrary myLib( "mylib" );
-    myFunction = (MyPrototype) myLib.resolve( "mysymbol" );
-    if ( myFunction ) {
-        myFunction();
-    }
-    
                                        
- 
-
                                        See also Plugins.
-
-
                                        Member Function Documentation
                                        
-
                                        TQLibrary::TQLibrary ( const TQString & filename )
-
                                        
-Creates a TQLibrary object for the shared library filename. The
-library will be unloaded in the destructor.
-
                                         Note that filename does not need to include the (platform specific)
-file extension, so calling
-
                                        -    TQLibrary lib( "mylib" );
-    
                                        
- 
-is equivalent to calling
-
                                        -    TQLibrary lib( "mylib.dll" );
-    
                                        
- 
-on Windows, and
-
                                        -    TQLibrary lib( "libmylib.so" );
-    
                                        
- 
-on Unix. Specifying the extension is not recommended, since
-doing so introduces a platform dependency.
-
                                         If filename does not include a path, the library loader will
-look for the file in the platform specific search paths.
-
                                         
                                        See also load(), unload(), and setAutoUnload().
-
-
                                        TQLibrary::~TQLibrary () [virtual]
-
                                        
-Deletes the TQLibrary object.
-
                                         The library will be unloaded if autoUnload() is TRUE (the
-default), otherwise it stays in memory until the application
-exits.
-
                                         
                                        See also unload() and setAutoUnload().
-
-
                                        bool TQLibrary::autoUnload () const
-
                                        
-Returns TRUE if the library will be automatically unloaded when
-this wrapper object is destructed; otherwise returns FALSE. The
-default is TRUE.
-
                                         
                                        See also setAutoUnload().
-
-
                                        bool TQLibrary::isLoaded () const
-
                                        
-Returns TRUE if the library is loaded; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                         
                                        See also unload().
-
-
                                        TQString TQLibrary::library () const
-
                                        
-Returns the filename of the shared library this TQLibrary object
-handles, including the platform specific file extension.
-
                                         For example:
-
                                        -    TQLibrary lib( "mylib" );
-    TQString str = lib.library();
-    
                                        
- 
-will set str to "mylib.dll" on Windows, and "libmylib.so" on Linux.
-
-
                                        bool TQLibrary::load ()
-
                                        
-Loads the library. Since resolve() always calls this function
-before resolving any symbols it is not necessary to call it
-explicitly. In some situations you might want the library loaded
-in advance, in which case you would use this function.
-
                                         On Darwin and Mac OS X this function uses code from dlcompat, part of the
-OpenDarwin project.
-
                                         
-
                                         Copyright (c) 2002 Jorge Acereda and Peter O'Gorman
-
                                         Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
-a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
-"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
-without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
-distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
-permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
-the following conditions:
-
                                         The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
-included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
-
                                         THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
-MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
-NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
-LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
-OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
-WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
-
-
                                        void * TQLibrary::resolve ( const char * symb )
-
                                        
-Returns the address of the exported symbol symb. The library is
-loaded if necessary. The function returns 0 if the symbol could
-not be resolved or the library could not be loaded.
-
                                         
                                        -    typedef int (*avgProc)( int, int );
-
-    avgProc avg = (avgProc) library->resolve( "avg" );
-    if ( avg )
-        return avg( 5, 8 );
-    else
-        return -1;
-    
                                        
- 
-
                                         The symbol must be exported as a C-function from the library. This
-requires the extern "C" notation if the library is compiled
-with a C++ compiler. On Windows you also have to explicitly export
-the function from the DLL using the __declspec(dllexport)
-compiler directive.
-
                                         
                                        -    extern "C" MY_EXPORT_MACRO int avg(int a, int b)
-    {
-        return (a + b) / 2;
-    }
-    
                                        
- 
-
                                         with MY_EXPORT defined as
-
                                         
                                        -    #ifdef Q_WS_WIN
-    # define MY_EXPORT __declspec(dllexport)
-    #else
-    # define MY_EXPORT
-    #endif
-    
                                        
- 
-
                                         On Darwin and Mac OS X this function uses code from dlcompat, part of the
-OpenDarwin project.
-
                                         
-
                                         Copyright (c) 2002 Jorge Acereda and Peter O'Gorman
-
                                         Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
-a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
-"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
-without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
-distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
-permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
-the following conditions:
-
                                         The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
-included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
-
                                         THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
-MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
-NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
-LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
-OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
-WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
-
-
                                        void * TQLibrary::resolve ( const TQString & filename, const char * symb ) [static]
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         Loads the library filename and returns the address of the
-exported symbol symb. Note that like the constructor, filename does not need to include the (platform specific) file
-extension. The library remains loaded until the process exits.
-
                                         The function returns 0 if the symbol could not be resolved or the
-library could not be loaded.
-
                                         This function is useful only if you want to resolve a single
-symbol, e.g. a function pointer from a specific library once:
-
                                         
                                        -    typedef void (*FunctionType)();
-    static FunctionType *ptrFunction = 0;
-    static bool triedResolve = FALSE;
-    if ( !ptrFunction && !triedResolve )
-        ptrFunction = TQLibrary::resolve( "mylib", "mysymb" );
-
-    if ( ptrFunction )
-        ptrFunction();
-    else
-        ...
-    
                                        
- 
-
                                         If you want to resolve multiple symbols, use a TQLibrary object and
-call the non-static version of resolve().
-
                                         
                                        See also 
-
                                        void TQLibrary::setAutoUnload ( bool enabled )
-
                                        
-If enabled is TRUE (the default), the wrapper object is set to
-automatically unload the library upon destruction. If enabled
-is FALSE, the wrapper object is not unloaded unless you explicitly
-call unload().
-
                                         
                                        See also autoUnload().
-
-
                                        bool TQLibrary::unload () [virtual]
-
                                        
-Unloads the library and returns TRUE if the library could be
-unloaded; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                         This function is called by the destructor if autoUnload() is
-enabled.
-
                                         
                                        See also resolve().
-
-
-
                                        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                        
-
-
                                        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                        TQt 3.3.8
                                        
-
                                        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qlineedit-h.html b/doc/html/qlineedit-h.html
index 88d4d6ac6..a7440547c 100644
--- a/doc/html/qlineedit-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qlineedit-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qlineedit.h Include File
+ntqlineedit.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                        TQLineEdit Class Reference
                                        
-
-
                                        The TQLineEdit widget is a one-line text editor.
-More...
-
                                        #include <qlineedit.h>
-
                                        Inherits TQFrame.
-
                                        List of all member functions.
-
                                        Public Members
                                        
-
-
                                        Public Slots
                                        
-
-
                                        Signals
                                        
-
-
                                        Properties
                                        
-
                                          
-
                                        • bool acceptableInput - whether the input satisfies the inputMask and the validator  (read only)
                                          • 
-
                                        • Alignment alignment - the alignment of the line edit
                                          • 
-
                                        • int cursorPosition - the current cursor position for this line edit
                                          • 
-
                                        • TQString displayText - the displayed text  (read only)
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool dragEnabled - whether the lineedit starts a drag if the user presses and moves the mouse on some selected text
                                          • 
-
                                        • EchoMode echoMode - the line edit's echo mode
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool edited - whether the line edit has been edited. Use modified instead  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool frame - whether the line edit draws itself with a frame
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool hasMarkedText - whether part of the text has been selected by the user. Use hasSelectedText instead  (read only)  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool hasSelectedText - whether there is any text selected  (read only)
                                          • 
-
                                        • TQString inputMask - the validation input mask
                                          • 
-
                                        • TQString markedText - the text selected by the user. Use selectedText instead  (read only)  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • int maxLength - the maximum permitted length of the text
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool modified - whether the line edit's contents has been modified by the user  (read only)
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool readOnly - whether the line edit is read only
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool redoAvailable - whether redo is available  (read only)
                                          • 
-
                                        • TQString selectedText - the selected text  (read only)
                                          • 
-
                                        • TQString text - the line edit's text
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool undoAvailable - whether undo is available  (read only)
                                          • 
-
                                        
-
                                        Protected Members
                                        
-
                                          
-
                                        • virtual void keyPressEvent ( TQKeyEvent * e )
                                          • 
-
                                        • virtual TQPopupMenu * createPopupMenu ()
                                          • 
-
                                        • void repaintArea ( int from, int to )  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        
-
                                        Detailed Description
                                        
-
-
-The TQLineEdit widget is a one-line text editor.
-
                                         
-
-
                                         A line edit allows the user to enter and edit a single line of
-plain text with a useful collection of editing functions,
-including undo and redo, cut and paste, and drag and drop.
-
                                         By changing the echoMode() of a line edit, it can also be used as
-a "write-only" field, for inputs such as passwords.
-
                                         The length of the text can be constrained to maxLength(). The text
-can be arbitrarily constrained using a validator() or an
-inputMask(), or both.
-
                                         A related class is TQTextEdit which allows multi-line, rich-text
-editing.
-
                                         You can change the text with setText() or insert(). The text is
-retrieved with text(); the displayed text (which may be different,
-see EchoMode) is retrieved with displayText(). Text can be
-selected with setSelection() or selectAll(), and the selection can
-be cut(), copy()ied and paste()d. The text can be aligned with
-setAlignment().
-
                                         When the text changes the textChanged() signal is emitted; when
-the Return or Enter key is pressed the returnPressed() signal is
-emitted. Note that if there is a validator set on the line edit,
-the returnPressed() signal will only be emitted if the validator
-returns Acceptable.
-
                                         By default, TQLineEdits have a frame as specified by the Windows
-and Motif style guides; you can turn it off by calling
-setFrame(FALSE).
-
                                         The default key bindings are described below. The line edit also
-provides a context menu (usually invoked by a right mouse click)
-that presents some of these editing options.
-
-
                                        
-
                                         Keypress Action
-
                                         Left Arrow Moves the cursor one character to the left.
-
                                         Shift+Left Arrow Moves and selects text one character to the left.
-
                                         Right Arrow Moves the cursor one character to the right.
-
                                         Shift+Right Arrow Moves and selects text one character to the right.
-
                                         Home Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line.
-
                                         End Moves the cursor to the end of the line.
-
                                         Backspace Deletes the character to the left of the cursor.
-
                                         Ctrl+Backspace Deletes the word to the left of the cursor.
-
                                         Delete Deletes the character to the right of the cursor.
-
                                         Ctrl+Delete Deletes the word to the right of the cursor.
-
                                         Ctrl+A Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line.
-
                                         Ctrl+B Moves the cursor one character to the left.
-
                                         Ctrl+C Copies the selected text to the clipboard.
-(Windows also supports Ctrl+Insert for this operation.)
-
                                         Ctrl+D Deletes the character to the right of the cursor.
-
                                         Ctrl+E Moves the cursor to the end of the line.
-
                                         Ctrl+F Moves the cursor one character to the right.
-
                                         Ctrl+H Deletes the character to the left of the cursor.
-
                                         Ctrl+K Deletes to the end of the line.
-
                                         Ctrl+V Pastes the clipboard text into line edit.
-(Windows also supports Shift+Insert for this operation.)
-
                                         Ctrl+X Deletes the selected text and copies it to the clipboard.
-(Windows also supports Shift+Delete for this operation.)
-
                                         Ctrl+Z Undoes the last operation.
-
                                         Ctrl+Y Redoes the last undone operation.
-
                                        
-
                                         Any other key sequence that represents a valid character, will
-cause the character to be inserted into the line edit.
-
                                          
-
                                         
                                        See also TQTextEdit, TQLabel, TQComboBox, GUI Design Handbook: Field, Entry, and Basic Widgets.
-
-
                                        Member Type Documentation
                                        
-
                                        TQLineEdit::EchoMode
                                        
-
-
                                         This enum type describes how a line edit should display its
-contents.
-
                                          
-
                                        • TQLineEdit::Normal - Display characters as they are entered. This is the
-default.
-
                                        • TQLineEdit::NoEcho - Do not display anything. This may be appropriate
-for passwords where even the length of the
-password should be kept secret.
-
                                        • TQLineEdit::Password - Display asterisks instead of the characters
-actually entered.
-
                                         
                                        See also echoMode and echoMode.
-
-
                                        Member Function Documentation
                                        
-
                                        TQLineEdit::TQLineEdit ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                        
-Constructs a line edit with no text.
-
                                         The maximum text length is set to 32767 characters.
-
                                         The parent and name arguments are sent to the TQWidget constructor.
-
                                         
                                        See also text and maxLength.
-
-
                                        TQLineEdit::TQLineEdit ( const TQString & contents, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                        
-Constructs a line edit containing the text contents.
-
                                         The cursor position is set to the end of the line and the maximum
-text length to 32767 characters.
-
                                         The parent and name arguments are sent to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
                                         
                                        See also text and maxLength.
-
-
                                        TQLineEdit::TQLineEdit ( const TQString & contents, const TQString & inputMask, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                        
-Constructs a line edit with an input inputMask and the text contents.
-
                                         The cursor position is set to the end of the line and the maximum
-text length is set to the length of the mask (the number of mask
-characters and separators).
-
                                         The parent and name arguments are sent to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
                                         
                                        See also setMask() and text.
-
-
                                        TQLineEdit::~TQLineEdit ()
-
                                        
-Destroys the line edit.
-
-
                                        int TQLineEdit::alignment () const
-
                                        Returns the alignment of the line edit.
-See the "alignment" property for details.
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::backspace ()
-
                                        
-If no text is selected, deletes the character to the left of the
-text cursor and moves the cursor one position to the left. If any
-text is selected, the cursor is moved to the beginning of the
-selected text and the selected text is deleted.
-
                                         
                                        See also del().
-
-
                                        int TQLineEdit::characterAt ( int xpos, TQChar * chr ) const
-
                                         This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::clear () [virtual slot]
-
                                        
-Clears the contents of the line edit.
-
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::clearModified ()
-
                                        
-Resets the modified flag to FALSE.
-
                                         
                                        See also modified.
-
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::clearValidator () [virtual slot]
-
                                        
-This slot is equivalent to setValidator(0).
-
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::copy () const [virtual slot]
-
                                        
-Copies the selected text to the clipboard, if there is any, and if
-echoMode() is Normal.
-
                                         
                                        See also cut() and paste().
-
-
                                        TQPopupMenu * TQLineEdit::createPopupMenu () [virtual protected]
-
                                        
-This function is called to create the popup menu which is shown
-when the user clicks on the line edit with the right mouse button.
-If you want to create a custom popup menu, reimplement this
-function and return the popup menu you create. The popup menu's
-ownership is transferred to the caller.
-
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::cursorBackward ( bool mark, int steps = 1 )
-
                                        
-Moves the cursor back steps characters. If mark is TRUE each
-character moved over is added to the selection; if mark is
-FALSE the selection is cleared.
-
                                         
                                        See also cursorForward().
-
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::cursorForward ( bool mark, int steps = 1 )
-
                                        
-Moves the cursor forward steps characters. If mark is TRUE
-each character moved over is added to the selection; if mark is
-FALSE the selection is cleared.
-
                                         
                                        See also cursorBackward().
-
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::cursorLeft ( bool mark, int steps = 1 )
-
                                        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         
-For compatibilty with older applications only. Use cursorBackward()
-instead.
-
                                        See also cursorBackward().
-
-
                                        int TQLineEdit::cursorPosition () const
-
                                        Returns the current cursor position for this line edit.
-See the "cursorPosition" property for details.
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::cursorRight ( bool mark, int steps = 1 )
-
                                        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         
-
                                         Use cursorForward() instead.
-
                                         
                                        See also cursorForward().
-
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::cursorWordBackward ( bool mark )
-
                                        
-Moves the cursor one word backward. If mark is TRUE, the word
-is also selected.
-
                                         
                                        See also cursorWordForward().
-
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::cursorWordForward ( bool mark )
-
                                        
-Moves the cursor one word forward. If mark is TRUE, the word is
-also selected.
-
                                         
                                        See also cursorWordBackward().
-
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::cut () [virtual slot]
-
                                        
-Copies the selected text to the clipboard and deletes it, if there
-is any, and if echoMode() is Normal.
-
                                         If the current validator disallows deleting the selected text,
-cut() will copy without deleting.
-
                                         
                                        See also copy(), paste(), and setValidator().
-
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::del ()
-
                                        
-If no text is selected, deletes the character to the right of the
-text cursor. If any text is selected, the cursor is moved to the
-beginning of the selected text and the selected text is deleted.
-
                                         
                                        See also backspace().
-
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::deselect () [virtual slot]
-
                                        
-Deselects any selected text.
-
                                         
                                        See also setSelection() and selectAll().
-
-
                                        TQString TQLineEdit::displayText () const
-
                                        Returns the displayed text.
-See the "displayText" property for details.
-
                                        bool TQLineEdit::dragEnabled () const
-
                                        Returns TRUE if the lineedit starts a drag if the user presses and moves the mouse on some selected text; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "dragEnabled" property for details.
-
                                        EchoMode TQLineEdit::echoMode () const
-
                                        Returns the line edit's echo mode.
-See the "echoMode" property for details.
-
                                        bool TQLineEdit::edited () const
-
                                        Returns TRUE if the line edit has been edited. Use modified instead; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "edited" property for details.
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::end ( bool mark )
-
                                        
-Moves the text cursor to the end of the line unless it is already
-there. If mark is TRUE, text is selected towards the last
-position; otherwise, any selected text is unselected if the cursor
-is moved.
-
                                         
                                        See also home().
-
-
                                        bool TQLineEdit::frame () const
-
                                        Returns TRUE if the line edit draws itself with a frame; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "frame" property for details.
-
                                        bool TQLineEdit::getSelection ( int * start, int * end )
-
                                         This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-use selectedText(), selectionStart() 
-
                                        bool TQLineEdit::hasAcceptableInput () const
-
                                        Returns TRUE if the input satisfies the inputMask and the validator; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "acceptableInput" property for details.
-
                                        bool TQLineEdit::hasMarkedText () const
-
                                        Returns TRUE if part of the text has been selected by the user. Use hasSelectedText instead; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "hasMarkedText" property for details.
-
                                        bool TQLineEdit::hasSelectedText () const
-
                                        Returns TRUE if there is any text selected; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "hasSelectedText" property for details.
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::home ( bool mark )
-
                                        
-Moves the text cursor to the beginning of the line unless it is
-already there. If mark is TRUE, text is selected towards the
-first position; otherwise, any selected text is unselected if the
-cursor is moved.
-
                                         
                                        See also end().
-
-
                                        TQString TQLineEdit::inputMask () const
-
                                        Returns the validation input mask.
-See the "inputMask" property for details.
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::insert ( const TQString & newText ) [virtual slot]
-
                                        
-Deletes any selected text, inserts newText, and validates the
-result. If it is valid, it sets it as the new contents of the line
-edit.
-
-
                                        bool TQLineEdit::isModified () const
-
                                        Returns TRUE if the line edit's contents has been modified by the user; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "modified" property for details.
-
                                        bool TQLineEdit::isReadOnly () const
-
                                        Returns TRUE if the line edit is read only; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "readOnly" property for details.
-
                                        bool TQLineEdit::isRedoAvailable () const
-
                                        Returns TRUE if redo is available; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "redoAvailable" property for details.
-
                                        bool TQLineEdit::isUndoAvailable () const
-
                                        Returns TRUE if undo is available; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "undoAvailable" property for details.
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::keyPressEvent ( TQKeyEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                                        
-Converts key press event e into a line edit action.
-
                                         If Return or Enter is pressed and the current text is valid (or
-can be made valid by the
-validator), the signal returnPressed() is emitted.
-
                                         The default key bindings are listed in the detailed
-    description.
-
-
                                        Reimplemented from TQWidget.
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::lostFocus () [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted when the line edit has lost focus.
-
                                         
                                        See also focus, TQWidget::focusInEvent(), and TQWidget::focusOutEvent().
-
-
                                        TQString TQLineEdit::markedText () const
-
                                        Returns the text selected by the user. Use selectedText instead.
-See the "markedText" property for details.
-
                                        int TQLineEdit::maxLength () const
-
                                        Returns the maximum permitted length of the text.
-See the "maxLength" property for details.
-
                                        TQSize TQLineEdit::minimumSizeHint () const [virtual]
-
                                        
-Returns a minimum size for the line edit.
-
                                         The width returned is enough for at least one character.
-
-
                                        Reimplemented from TQWidget.
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::paste () [virtual slot]
-
                                        
-Inserts the clipboard's text at the cursor position, deleting any
-selected text, providing the line edit is not read-only.
-
                                         If the end result would not be acceptable to the current
-validator, nothing happens.
-
                                         
                                        See also copy() and cut().
-
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::redo () [virtual slot]
-
                                        
-Redoes the last operation if redo is available.
-
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::repaintArea ( int from, int to ) [protected]
-
                                        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         
-Repaints all characters from from to to. If cursorPos is
-between from and to, ensures that cursorPos is visible.
-
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::returnPressed () [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted when the Return or Enter key is pressed.
-Note that if there is a validator() or inputMask() set on the line
-edit, the returnPressed() signal will only be emitted if the input
-follows the inputMask() and the validator() returns Acceptable.
-
-
                                        Example: popup/popup.cpp.
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::selectAll () [virtual slot]
-
                                        
-Selects all the text (i.e. highlights it) and moves the cursor to
-the end. This is useful when a default value has been inserted
-because if the user types before clicking on the widget, the
-selected text will be deleted.
-
                                         
                                        See also setSelection() and deselect().
-
-
                                        TQString TQLineEdit::selectedText () const
-
                                        Returns the selected text.
-See the "selectedText" property for details.
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::selectionChanged () [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted whenever the selection changes.
-
                                         
                                        See also hasSelectedText and selectedText.
-
-
                                        int TQLineEdit::selectionStart () const
-
                                        
-selectionStart() returns the index of the first selected character in the
-line edit or -1 if no text is selected.
-
                                         
                                        See also selectedText.
-
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::setAlignment ( int flag ) [virtual slot]
-
                                        Sets the alignment of the line edit to flag.
-See the "alignment" property for details.
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::setCursorPosition ( int ) [virtual slot]
-
                                        Sets the current cursor position for this line edit.
-See the "cursorPosition" property for details.
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::setDragEnabled ( bool b ) [virtual slot]
-
                                        Sets whether the lineedit starts a drag if the user presses and moves the mouse on some selected text to b.
-See the "dragEnabled" property for details.
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::setEchoMode ( EchoMode ) [virtual slot]
-
                                        Sets the line edit's echo mode.
-See the "echoMode" property for details.
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::setEdited ( bool )
-
                                        Sets whether the line edit has been edited. Use modified instead.
-See the "edited" property for details.
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::setFrame ( bool ) [virtual slot]
-
                                        Sets whether the line edit draws itself with a frame.
-See the "frame" property for details.
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::setInputMask ( const TQString & inputMask )
-
                                        Sets the validation input mask to inputMask.
-See the "inputMask" property for details.
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::setMaxLength ( int ) [virtual slot]
-
                                        Sets the maximum permitted length of the text.
-See the "maxLength" property for details.
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::setReadOnly ( bool ) [virtual slot]
-
                                        Sets whether the line edit is read only.
-See the "readOnly" property for details.
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::setSelection ( int start, int length ) [virtual slot]
-
                                        
-Selects text from position start and for length characters.
-
                                         Note that this function sets the cursor's position to the end of
-the selection regardless of its current position.
-
                                         
                                        See also deselect(), selectAll(), getSelection(), cursorForward(), and cursorBackward().
-
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::setText ( const TQString & ) [virtual slot]
-
                                        Sets the line edit's text.
-See the "text" property for details.
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::setValidator ( const TQValidator * v ) [virtual slot]
-
                                        
-Sets this line edit to only accept input that the validator, v,
-will accept. This allows you to place any arbitrary constraints on
-the text which may be entered.
-
                                         If v == 0, setValidator() removes the current input validator.
-The initial setting is to have no input validator (i.e. any input
-is accepted up to maxLength()).
-
                                         
                                        See also validator(), TQIntValidator, TQDoubleValidator, and TQRegExpValidator.
-
-
                                        Examples: lineedits/lineedits.cpp and wizard/wizard.cpp.
-
                                        TQSize TQLineEdit::sizeHint () const [virtual]
-
                                        
-Returns a recommended size for the widget.
-
                                         The width returned, in pixels, is usually enough for about 15 to
-20 characters.
-
-
                                        Example: addressbook/centralwidget.cpp.
-
                                        TQString TQLineEdit::text () const
-
                                        Returns the line edit's text.
-See the "text" property for details.
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::textChanged ( const TQString & ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted whenever the text changes. The argument is
-the new text.
-
-
                                        Examples: simple/main.cpp, wizard/wizard.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                                        void TQLineEdit::undo () [virtual slot]
-
                                        
-Undoes the last operation if undo is available. Deselects any current
-selection, and updates the selection start to the current cursor
-position.
-
-
                                        bool TQLineEdit::validateAndSet ( const TQString & newText, int newPos, int newMarkAnchor, int newMarkDrag )
-
                                         This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-Use setText(), setCursorPosition() and setSelection() instead.
-
-
                                        const TQValidator * TQLineEdit::validator () const
-
                                        
-Returns a pointer to the current input validator, or 0 if no
-validator has been set.
-
                                         
                                        See also setValidator().
-
-
                                        Example: wizard/wizard.cpp.
-
                                        Property Documentation
                                        
-
                                        bool acceptableInput
                                        
-
                                        This property holds whether the input satisfies the inputMask and the validator.
-
                                        Get this property's value with hasAcceptableInput().
-
                                        See also inputMask and setValidator().
-
-
                                        Alignment alignment
                                        
-
                                        This property holds the alignment of the line edit.
-
                                        Possible Values are TQt::AlignAuto, TQt::AlignLeft, TQt::AlignRight and TQt::AlignHCenter.
-
                                         Attempting to set the alignment to an illegal flag combination
-does nothing.
-
                                         
                                        See also TQt::AlignmentFlags.
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setAlignment() and get this property's value with alignment().
-
                                        int cursorPosition
                                        
-
                                        This property holds the current cursor position for this line edit.
-
                                        Setting the cursor position causes a repaint when appropriate.
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setCursorPosition() and get this property's value with cursorPosition().
-
                                        TQString displayText
                                        
-
                                        This property holds the displayed text.
-
                                        If EchoMode is Normal this returns the same as text(); if
-EchoMode is Password it returns a string of asterisks
-text().length() characters long, e.g. "******"; if EchoMode is
-NoEcho returns an empty string, "".
-
                                         
                                        See also echoMode, text, and EchoMode.
-
-
                                        Get this property's value with displayText().
-
                                        bool dragEnabled
                                        
-
                                        This property holds whether the lineedit starts a drag if the user presses and moves the mouse on some selected text.
-
                                        
-
                                        Set this property's value with setDragEnabled() and get this property's value with dragEnabled().
-
                                        EchoMode echoMode
                                        
-
                                        This property holds the line edit's echo mode.
-
                                        The initial setting is Normal, but TQLineEdit also supports NoEcho and Password modes.
-
                                         The widget's display and the ability to copy or drag the text is
-affected by this setting.
-
                                         
                                        See also EchoMode and displayText.
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setEchoMode() and get this property's value with echoMode().
-
                                        bool edited
                                        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         
                                        This property holds whether the line edit has been edited. Use modified instead.
-
                                        
-
                                        Set this property's value with setEdited() and get this property's value with edited().
-
                                        bool frame
                                        
-
                                        This property holds whether the line edit draws itself with a frame.
-
                                        If enabled (the default) the line edit draws itself inside a
-two-pixel frame, otherwise the line edit draws itself without any
-frame.
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setFrame() and get this property's value with frame().
-
                                        bool hasMarkedText
                                        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         
                                        This property holds whether part of the text has been selected by the user. Use hasSelectedText instead.
-
                                        
-
                                        Get this property's value with hasMarkedText().
-
                                        bool hasSelectedText
                                        
-
                                        This property holds whether there is any text selected.
-
                                        hasSelectedText() returns TRUE if some or all of the text has been
-selected by the user; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                         
                                        See also selectedText.
-
-
                                        Get this property's value with hasSelectedText().
-
                                        TQString inputMask
                                        
-
                                        This property holds the validation input mask.
-
                                        If no mask is set, inputMask() returns TQString::null.
-
                                         Sets the TQLineEdit's validation mask. Validators can be used
-instead of, or in conjunction with masks; see setValidator().
-
                                         Unset the mask and return to normal TQLineEdit operation by passing
-an empty string ("") or just calling setInputMask() with no
-arguments.
-
                                         The mask format understands these mask characters:
-
                                        
-
                                         Character Meaning
-
                                         A ASCII alphabetic character required. A-Z, a-z.
-
                                         a ASCII alphabetic character permitted but not required.
-
                                         N ASCII alphanumeric character required. A-Z, a-z, 0-9.
-
                                         n ASCII alphanumeric character permitted but not required.
-
                                         X Any character required.
-
                                         x Any character permitted but not required.
-
                                         9 ASCII digit required. 0-9.
-
                                         0 ASCII digit permitted but not required.
-
                                         D ASCII digit required. 1-9.
-
                                         d ASCII digit permitted but not required (1-9).
-
                                         # ASCII digit or plus/minus sign permitted but not required.
-
                                         > All following alphabetic characters are uppercased.
-
                                         < All following alphabetic characters are lowercased.
-
                                         ! Switch off case conversion.
-
                                         \ Use \ to escape the special
-characters listed above to use them as
-separators.
-
                                        
-
                                         The mask consists of a string of mask characters and separators,
-optionally followed by a semi-colon and the character used for
-blanks: the blank characters are always removed from the text
-after editing. The default blank character is space.
-
                                         Examples:
-
                                        
-
                                         Mask Notes
-
                                         000.000.000.000;_ IP address; blanks are _.
-
                                         0000-00-00 ISO Date; blanks are space
-
                                         >AAAAA-AAAAA-AAAAA-AAAAA-AAAAA;# License number;
-blanks are - and all (alphabetic) characters are converted to
-uppercase.
-
                                        
-
                                         To get range control (e.g. for an IP address) use masks together
-with validators.
-
                                         
                                        See also maxLength.
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setInputMask() and get this property's value with inputMask().
-
                                        TQString markedText
                                        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         
                                        This property holds the text selected by the user. Use selectedText instead.
-
                                        
-
                                        Get this property's value with markedText().
-
                                        int maxLength
                                        
-
                                        This property holds the maximum permitted length of the text.
-
                                        If the text is too long, it is truncated at the limit.
-
                                         If truncation occurs any selected text will be unselected, the
-cursor position is set to 0 and the first part of the string is
-shown.
-
                                         If the line edit has an input mask, the mask defines the maximum
-string length.
-
                                         
                                        See also inputMask.
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setMaxLength() and get this property's value with maxLength().
-
                                        bool modified
                                        
-
                                        This property holds whether the line edit's contents has been modified by the user.
-
                                        The modified flag is never read by TQLineEdit; it has a default value
-of FALSE and is changed to TRUE whenever the user changes the line
-edit's contents.
-
                                         This is useful for things that need to provide a default value but
-do not start out knowing what the default should be (perhaps it
-depends on other fields on the form). Start the line edit without
-the best default, and when the default is known, if modified()
-returns FALSE (the user hasn't entered any text), insert the
-default value.
-
                                         Calling clearModified() or setText() resets the modified flag to
-FALSE.
-
-
                                        Get this property's value with isModified().
-
                                        bool readOnly
                                        
-
                                        This property holds whether the line edit is read only.
-
                                        In read-only mode, the user can still copy the text to the
-clipboard or drag-and-drop the text (if echoMode() is Normal),
-but cannot edit it.
-
                                         TQLineEdit does not show a cursor in read-only mode.
-
                                         
                                        See also enabled.
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setReadOnly() and get this property's value with isReadOnly().
-
                                        bool redoAvailable
                                        
-
                                        This property holds whether redo is available.
-
                                        
-
                                        Get this property's value with isRedoAvailable().
-
                                        TQString selectedText
                                        
-
                                        This property holds the selected text.
-
                                        If there is no selected text this property's value is
-TQString::null.
-
                                         
                                        See also hasSelectedText.
-
-
                                        Get this property's value with selectedText().
-
                                        TQString text
                                        
-
                                        This property holds the line edit's text.
-
                                        Note that setting this property clears the selection, clears the
-undo/redo history, moves the cursor to the end of the line and
-resets the modified property to FALSE. The text is not
-validated when inserted with setText().
-
                                         The text is truncated to maxLength() length.
-
                                         
                                        See also insert().
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setText() and get this property's value with text().
-
                                        bool undoAvailable
                                        
-
                                        This property holds whether undo is available.
-
                                        
-
                                        Get this property's value with isUndoAvailable().
-
-
                                        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                        
-
-
                                        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                        TQt 3.3.8
                                        
-
                                        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qlist.html b/doc/html/qlist.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 4ea5c3e21..000000000
--- a/doc/html/qlist.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
-
-
-TQList Class Reference (obsolete)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                        TQList Class Reference (obsolete)
                                        
-
- 
-
                                         
                                        -#include <qlist.h>
                                        
- 
-
                                         The TQList class has been renamed  TQPtrList  in TQt 3.0.
-
-
-
                                        
-
-
                                        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                        TQt 3.3.8
                                        
-
                                        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qlistbox-h.html b/doc/html/qlistbox-h.html
index 1e1d6eaf5..3f60e964f 100644
--- a/doc/html/qlistbox-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qlistbox-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qlistbox.h Include File
+ntqlistbox.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                        TQListBox Class Reference
                                        
-
-
                                        The TQListBox widget provides a list of selectable, read-only items.
-More...
-
                                        #include <qlistbox.h>
-
                                        Inherits TQScrollView.
-
                                        List of all member functions.
-
                                        Public Members
                                        
-
                                          
-
                                        • TQListBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
                                          • 
-
                                        • ~TQListBox ()
                                          • 
-
                                        • uint count () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • void insertStringList ( const TQStringList & list, int index = -1 )
                                          • 
-
                                        • void insertStrList ( const TQStrList * list, int index = -1 )
                                          • 
-
                                        • void insertStrList ( const TQStrList & list, int index = -1 )
                                          • 
-
                                        • void insertStrList ( const char ** strings, int numStrings = -1, int index = -1 )
                                          • 
-
                                        • void insertItem ( const TQListBoxItem * lbi, int index = -1 )
                                          • 
-
                                        • void insertItem ( const TQListBoxItem * lbi, const TQListBoxItem * after )
                                          • 
-
                                        • void insertItem ( const TQString & text, int index = -1 )
                                          • 
-
                                        • void insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int index = -1 )
                                          • 
-
                                        • void insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQString & text, int index = -1 )
                                          • 
-
                                        • void removeItem ( int index )
                                          • 
-
                                        • TQString text ( int index ) const
                                          • 
-
                                        • const TQPixmap * pixmap ( int index ) const
                                          • 
-
                                        • void changeItem ( const TQListBoxItem * lbi, int index )
                                          • 
-
                                        • void changeItem ( const TQString & text, int index )
                                          • 
-
                                        • void changeItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int index )
                                          • 
-
                                        • void changeItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQString & text, int index )
                                          • 
-
                                        • void takeItem ( const TQListBoxItem * item )
                                          • 
-
                                        • int numItemsVisible () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • int currentItem () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • TQString currentText () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • virtual void setCurrentItem ( int index )
                                          • 
-
                                        • virtual void setCurrentItem ( TQListBoxItem * i )
                                          • 
-
                                        • void centerCurrentItem ()  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • int topItem () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • virtual void setTopItem ( int index )
                                          • 
-
                                        • virtual void setBottomItem ( int index )
                                          • 
-
                                        • long maxItemWidth () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • enum SelectionMode { Single, Multi, Extended, NoSelection }
                                          • 
-
                                        • virtual void setSelectionMode ( SelectionMode )
                                          • 
-
                                        • SelectionMode selectionMode () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • void setMultiSelection ( bool multi )  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool isMultiSelection () const  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • virtual void setSelected ( TQListBoxItem * item, bool select )
                                          • 
-
                                        • void setSelected ( int index, bool select )
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool isSelected ( int i ) const
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool isSelected ( const TQListBoxItem * i ) const
                                          • 
-
                                        • TQListBoxItem * selectedItem () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • TQListBoxItem * item ( int index ) const
                                          • 
-
                                        • int index ( const TQListBoxItem * lbi ) const
                                          • 
-
                                        • TQListBoxItem * findItem ( const TQString & text, ComparisonFlags compare = BeginsWith ) const
                                          • 
-
                                        • void triggerUpdate ( bool doLayout )
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool itemVisible ( int index )
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool itemVisible ( const TQListBoxItem * item )
                                          • 
-
                                        • enum LayoutMode { FixedNumber, FitToWidth, FitToHeight = FitToWidth, Variable }
                                          • 
-
                                        • virtual void setColumnMode ( LayoutMode )
                                          • 
-
                                        • virtual void setColumnMode ( int )
                                          • 
-
                                        • virtual void setRowMode ( LayoutMode )
                                          • 
-
                                        • virtual void setRowMode ( int )
                                          • 
-
                                        • LayoutMode columnMode () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • LayoutMode rowMode () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • int numColumns () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • int numRows () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool variableWidth () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • virtual void setVariableWidth ( bool )
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool variableHeight () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • virtual void setVariableHeight ( bool )
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool autoScrollBar () const  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • void setAutoScrollBar ( bool enable )  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool scrollBar () const  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • void setScrollBar ( bool enable )  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool autoBottomScrollBar () const  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • void setAutoBottomScrollBar ( bool enable )  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool bottomScrollBar () const  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • void setBottomScrollBar ( bool enable )  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • int inSort ( const TQListBoxItem * lbi )  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • int inSort ( const TQString & text )  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • int cellHeight ( int i ) const  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • int cellHeight () const  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • int cellWidth () const  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • int numCols () const  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • int itemHeight ( int index = 0 ) const
                                          • 
-
                                        • TQListBoxItem * itemAt ( const TQPoint & p ) const
                                          • 
-
                                        • TQRect itemRect ( TQListBoxItem * item ) const
                                          • 
-
                                        • TQListBoxItem * firstItem () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • void sort ( bool ascending = TRUE )
                                          • 
-
                                        
-
                                        Public Slots
                                        
-
-
                                        Signals
                                        
-
-
                                        Properties
                                        
-
                                          
-
                                        • LayoutMode columnMode - the column layout mode for this list box
                                          • 
-
                                        • uint count - the number of items in the list box  (read only)
                                          • 
-
                                        • int currentItem - the current highlighted item
                                          • 
-
                                        • TQString currentText - the text of the current item  (read only)
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool multiSelection - whether or not the list box is in Multi selection mode  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • int numColumns - the number of columns in the list box  (read only)
                                          • 
-
                                        • int numItemsVisible - the number of visible items  (read only)
                                          • 
-
                                        • int numRows - the number of rows in the list box  (read only)
                                          • 
-
                                        • LayoutMode rowMode - the row layout mode for this list box
                                          • 
-
                                        • SelectionMode selectionMode - the selection mode of the list box
                                          • 
-
                                        • int topItem - the index of an item at the top of the screen
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool variableHeight - whether this list box has variable-height rows
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool variableWidth - whether this list box has variable-width columns
                                          • 
-
                                        
-
                                        Protected Members
                                        
-
                                          
-
                                        • void updateItem ( int index )
                                          • 
-
                                        • void updateItem ( TQListBoxItem * i )
                                          • 
-
                                        • int totalWidth () const  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • int totalHeight () const  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • virtual void paintCell ( TQPainter * p, int row, int col )
                                          • 
-
                                        • void toggleCurrentItem ()
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool isRubberSelecting () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • void doLayout () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool itemYPos ( int index, int * yPos ) const  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • int findItem ( int yPos ) const  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        
-
                                        Detailed Description
                                        
-
-
-The TQListBox widget provides a list of selectable, read-only items.
-
                                         
-
-
                                         This is typically a single-column list in which either no item or
-one item is selected, but it can also be used in many other ways.
-
                                         TQListBox will add scroll bars as necessary, but it isn't intended
-for really big lists. If you want more than a few thousand
-items, it's probably better to use a different widget mainly
-because the scroll bars won't provide very good navigation, but
-also because TQListBox may become slow with huge lists. (See
-TQListView and TQTable for possible alternatives.)
-
                                         There are a variety of selection modes described in the
-TQListBox::SelectionMode documentation. The default is Single
-selection mode, but you can change it using setSelectionMode().
-(setMultiSelection() is still provided for compatibility with TQt
-1.x. We recommend using setSelectionMode() in all code.)
-
                                         Because TQListBox offers multiple selection it must display
-keyboard focus and selection state separately. Therefore there are
-functions both to set the selection state of an item, i.e.
-setSelected(), and to set which item displays keyboard focus, i.e.
-setCurrentItem().
-
                                         The list box normally arranges its items in a single column and
-adds a vertical scroll bar if required. It is possible to have a
-different fixed number of columns (setColumnMode()), or as many
-columns as will fit in the list box's assigned screen space
-(setColumnMode(FitToWidth)), or to have a fixed number of rows
-(setRowMode()) or as many rows as will fit in the list box's
-assigned screen space (setRowMode(FitToHeight)). In all these
-cases TQListBox will add scroll bars, as appropriate, in at least
-one direction.
-
                                         If multiple rows are used, each row can be as high as necessary
-(the normal setting), or you can request that all items will have
-the same height by calling setVariableHeight(FALSE). The same
-applies to a column's width, see setVariableWidth().
-
                                         The TQListBox's items are TQListBoxItem objects. TQListBox provides
-methods to insert new items as strings, as pixmaps, and as
-TQListBoxItem * (insertItem() with various arguments), and to
-replace an existing item with a new string, pixmap or TQListBoxItem
-(changeItem() with various arguments). You can also remove items
-singly with removeItem() or clear() the entire list box. Note that
-if you create a TQListBoxItem yourself and insert it, TQListBox
-takes ownership of the item.
-
                                         You can also create a TQListBoxItem, such as TQListBoxText or
-TQListBoxPixmap, with the list box as first parameter. The item
-will then append itself. When you delete an item it is
-automatically removed from the list box.
-
                                         The list of items can be arbitrarily large; TQListBox will add
-scroll bars if necessary. TQListBox can display a single-column
-(the common case) or multiple-columns, and offers both single and
-multiple selection. TQListBox does not support multiple-column
-items (but TQListView and TQTable do), or tree hierarchies (but
-TQListView does).
-
                                         The list box items can be accessed both as TQListBoxItem objects
-(recommended) and using integer indexes (the original TQListBox
-implementation used an array of strings internally, and the API
-still supports this mode of operation). Everything can be done
-using the new objects, and most things can be done using indexes.
-
                                         Each item in a TQListBox contains a TQListBoxItem. One of the items
-can be the current item. The currentChanged() signal and the
-highlighted() signal are emitted when a new item becomes current,
-e.g. because the user clicks on it or TQListBox::setCurrentItem()
-is called. The selected() signal is emitted when the user
-double-clicks on an item or presses Enter on the current item.
-
                                         If the user does not select anything, no signals are emitted and
-currentItem() returns -1.
-
                                         A list box has WheelFocus as a default focusPolicy(), i.e. it
-can get keyboard focus by tabbing, clicking and through the use of
-the mouse wheel.
-
                                         New items can be inserted using insertItem(), insertStrList() or
-insertStringList(). inSort() is obsolete because this method is
-quite inefficient. It's preferable to insert the items normally
-and call sort() afterwards, or to insert a sorted TQStringList().
-
                                         By default, vertical and horizontal scroll bars are added and
-removed as necessary. setHScrollBarMode() and setVScrollBarMode()
-can be used to change this policy.
-
                                         If you need to insert types other than strings and pixmaps, you
-must define new classes which inherit TQListBoxItem.
-
                                         Warning: The list box assumes ownership of all list box items and
-will delete them when it does not need them any more.
-
                                          
-
                                         
                                        See also TQListView, TQComboBox, TQButtonGroup, GUI Design Handbook: List Box (two
- sections), and Advanced Widgets.
-
-
                                        Member Type Documentation
                                        
-
                                        TQListBox::LayoutMode
                                        
-
-
                                         This enum type is used to specify how TQListBox lays out its rows
-and columns.
-
                                          
-
                                        • TQListBox::FixedNumber - There is a fixed number of rows (or columns).
-
                                        • TQListBox::FitToWidth - There are as many columns as will fit
-on-screen.
-
                                        • TQListBox::FitToHeight - There are as many rows as will fit on-screen.
-
                                        • TQListBox::Variable - There are as many rows as are required by the
-column mode. (Or as many columns as required by the row mode.)
-
                                         Example: When you call setRowMode( FitToHeight ), columnMode()
-automatically becomes Variable to accommodate the row mode
-you've set.
-
-
                                        TQListBox::SelectionMode
                                        
-
-
                                         This enumerated type is used by TQListBox to indicate how it reacts
-to selection by the user.
-
                                          
-
                                        • TQListBox::Single - When the user selects an item, any already-selected
-item becomes unselected and the user cannot unselect the selected
-item. This means that the user can never clear the selection, even
-though the selection may be cleared by the application programmer
-using TQListBox::clearSelection().
-
                                        • TQListBox::Multi - When the user selects an item the selection status
-of that item is toggled and the other items are left alone. Also,
-multiple items can be selected by dragging the mouse while the
-left mouse button is kept pressed.
-
                                        • TQListBox::Extended - When the user selects an item the selection is
-cleared and the new item selected. However, if the user presses
-the Ctrl key when clicking on an item, the clicked item gets
-toggled and all other items are left untouched. And if the user
-presses the Shift key while clicking on an item, all items between
-the current item and the clicked item get selected or unselected,
-depending on the state of the clicked item. Also, multiple items
-can be selected by dragging the mouse while the left mouse button
-is kept pressed.
-
                                        • TQListBox::NoSelection - Items cannot be selected.
-
                                         In other words, Single is a real single-selection list box, Multi is a real multi-selection list box, Extended is a list
-box in which users can select multiple items but usually want to
-select either just one or a range of contiguous items, and NoSelection is for a list box where the user can look but not
-touch.
-
-
                                        Member Function Documentation
                                        
-
                                        TQListBox::TQListBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
-
                                        
-Constructs a new empty list box called name and with parent parent.
-
                                         Performance is boosted by modifying the widget flags f so that
-only part of the TQListBoxItem children is redrawn. This may be
-unsuitable for custom TQListBoxItem classes, in which case WStaticContents and WNoAutoErase should be cleared
-immediately after construction.
-
                                         
                                        See also TQWidget::clearWFlags() and TQt::WidgetFlags.
-
-
                                        TQListBox::~TQListBox ()
-
                                        
-Destroys the list box. Deletes all list box items.
-
-
                                        bool TQListBox::autoBottomScrollBar () const
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         Returns TRUE if hScrollBarMode() is Auto; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
-
                                        bool TQListBox::autoScrollBar () const
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         Returns TRUE if vScrollBarMode() is Auto; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
-
                                        bool TQListBox::bottomScrollBar () const
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         Returns FALSE if vScrollBarMode() is AlwaysOff; otherwise
-returns TRUE.
-
-
                                        int TQListBox::cellHeight ( int i ) const
-
                                        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         
-Returns the item height of item i.
-
                                        See also itemHeight().
-
-
                                        int TQListBox::cellHeight () const
-
                                        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         Returns the item height of the first item, item 0.
-
                                        See also itemHeight().
-
-
                                        int TQListBox::cellWidth () const
-
                                        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         
-Returns the maximum item width.
-
                                        See also maxItemWidth().
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::centerCurrentItem ()
-
                                        
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         This function does exactly the same as ensureCurrentVisible()
-
                                         
                                        See also TQListBox::ensureCurrentVisible().
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::changeItem ( const TQListBoxItem * lbi, int index )
-
                                        
-Replaces the item at position index with lbi.	If index is
-negative or too large, changeItem() does nothing.
-
                                         The item that has been changed will become selected.
-
                                         
                                        See also insertItem() and removeItem().
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::changeItem ( const TQString & text, int index )
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         Replaces the item at position index with a new list box text
-item with text text.
-
                                         The operation is ignored if index is out of range.
-
                                         
                                        See also insertItem() and removeItem().
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::changeItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int index )
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         Replaces the item at position index with a new list box pixmap
-item with pixmap pixmap.
-
                                         The operation is ignored if index is out of range.
-
                                         
                                        See also insertItem() and removeItem().
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::changeItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQString & text, int index )
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         Replaces the item at position index with a new list box pixmap
-item with pixmap pixmap and text text.
-
                                         The operation is ignored if index is out of range.
-
                                         
                                        See also insertItem() and removeItem().
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::clear () [slot]
-
                                        
-Deletes all the items in the list.
-
                                         
                                        See also removeItem().
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::clearSelection () [virtual slot]
-
                                        
-Deselects all items, if possible.
-
                                         Note that a Single selection list box will automatically select
-an item if it has keyboard focus.
-
-
                                        Example: listbox/listbox.cpp.
-
                                        void TQListBox::clicked ( TQListBoxItem * item ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted when the user clicks any mouse button. If
-item is not 0, the cursor is on item. If item is 0, the
-mouse cursor isn't on any item.
-
                                         Note that you must not delete any TQListBoxItem objects in slots
-connected to this signal.
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::clicked ( TQListBoxItem * item, const TQPoint & pnt ) [signal]
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         This signal is emitted when the user clicks any mouse button. If
-item is not 0, the cursor is on item. If item is 0, the
-mouse cursor isn't on any item.
-
                                         pnt is the position of the mouse cursor in the global
-coordinate system (TQMouseEvent::globalPos()). (If the click's
-press and release differs by a pixel or two, pnt is the
-position at release time.)
-
                                         Note that you must not delete any TQListBoxItem objects in slots
-connected to this signal.
-
-
                                        LayoutMode TQListBox::columnMode () const
-
                                        Returns the column layout mode for this list box.
-See the "columnMode" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListBox::contextMenuRequested ( TQListBoxItem * item, const TQPoint & pos ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted when the user invokes a context menu with
-the right mouse button or with special system keys, with item
-being the item under the mouse cursor or the current item,
-respectively.
-
                                         pos is the position for the context menu in the global
-coordinate system.
-
-
                                        uint TQListBox::count () const
-
                                        Returns the number of items in the list box.
-See the "count" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListBox::currentChanged ( TQListBoxItem * item ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted when the user makes a new item the current
-item. item is the new current list box item.
-
                                         
                                        See also currentItem and currentItem.
-
-
                                        int TQListBox::currentItem () const
-
                                        Returns the current highlighted item.
-See the "currentItem" property for details.
-
                                        TQString TQListBox::currentText () const
-
                                        Returns the text of the current item.
-See the "currentText" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListBox::doLayout () const [protected]
-
                                        
-This function does the hard layout work. You should never need to
-call it.
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::doubleClicked ( TQListBoxItem * item ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted whenever an item is double-clicked. It's
-emitted on the second button press, not the second button release.
-If item is not 0, the cursor is on item. If item is 0,
-the mouse cursor isn't on any item.
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::ensureCurrentVisible () [virtual slot]
-
                                        
-Ensures that the current item is visible.
-
-
                                        TQListBoxItem * TQListBox::findItem ( const TQString & text, ComparisonFlags compare = BeginsWith ) const
-
                                        
-Finds the first list box item that has the text text and
-returns it, or returns 0 of no such item could be found.
-The search starts from the current item if the current item exists,
-otherwise it starts from the first list box item.
-If ComparisonFlags are specified in compare then these flags
-are used, otherwise the default is a case-insensitive, "begins
-with" search.
-
                                         
                                        See also TQt::StringComparisonMode.
-
-
                                        int TQListBox::findItem ( int yPos ) const [protected]
-
                                        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         
-Returns the index of the item a point (0, yPos).
-
                                        See also index() and itemAt().
-
-
                                        TQListBoxItem * TQListBox::firstItem () const
-
                                        
-Returns the first item in this list box. If the list box is empty,
-returns 0.
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::highlighted ( int index ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted when the user makes a new item the current
-item. index is the index of the new current item.
-
                                         
                                        See also currentChanged(), selected(), currentItem, and selectionChanged().
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::highlighted ( const TQString & ) [signal]
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         This signal is emitted when the user makes a new item the current
-item and the item is (or has) a string. The argument is the text
-of the new current item.
-
                                         
                                        See also currentChanged(), selected(), currentItem, and selectionChanged().
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::highlighted ( TQListBoxItem * ) [signal]
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         This signal is emitted when the user makes a new item the current
-item. The argument is a pointer to the new current item.
-
                                         
                                        See also currentChanged(), selected(), currentItem, and selectionChanged().
-
-
                                        int TQListBox::inSort ( const TQListBoxItem * lbi )
-
                                        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         Using this method is quite inefficient. We suggest to use insertItem()
-for inserting and sort() afterwards.
-
                                         Inserts lbi at its sorted position in the list box and returns the
-position.
-
                                         All items must be inserted with inSort() to maintain the sorting
-order. inSort() treats any pixmap (or user-defined type) as
-lexicographically less than any string.
-
                                         
                                        See also insertItem() and sort().
-
-
                                        int TQListBox::inSort ( const TQString & text )
-
                                        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         Using this method is quite inefficient. We suggest to use insertItem()
-for inserting and sort() afterwards.
-
                                         Inserts a new item of text at its sorted position in the list box and
-returns the position.
-
                                         All items must be inserted with inSort() to maintain the sorting
-order. inSort() treats any pixmap (or user-defined type) as
-lexicographically less than any string.
-
                                         
                                        See also insertItem() and sort().
-
-
                                        int TQListBox::index ( const TQListBoxItem * lbi ) const
-
                                        
-Returns the index of lbi, or -1 if the item is not in this list
-box or lbi is 0.
-
                                         
                                        See also item().
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::insertItem ( const TQListBoxItem * lbi, int index = -1 )
-
                                        
-Inserts the item lbi into the list at position index.
-
                                         If index is negative or larger than the number of items in the
-list box, lbi is inserted at the end of the list.
-
                                         
                                        See also insertStrList().
-
-
                                        Examples: i18n/mywidget.cpp, listbox/listbox.cpp, listboxcombo/listboxcombo.cpp, and tabdialog/tabdialog.cpp.
-
                                        void TQListBox::insertItem ( const TQListBoxItem * lbi, const TQListBoxItem * after )
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         Inserts the item lbi into the list after the item after, or
-at the beginning if after is 0.
-
                                         
                                        See also insertStrList().
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::insertItem ( const TQString & text, int index = -1 )
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         Inserts a new list box text item with the text text into the
-list at position index.
-
                                         If index is negative, text is inserted at the end of the
-list.
-
                                         
                                        See also insertStrList().
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int index = -1 )
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         Inserts a new list box pixmap item with the pixmap pixmap into
-the list at position index.
-
                                         If index is negative, pixmap is inserted at the end of the
-list.
-
                                         
                                        See also insertStrList().
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQString & text, int index = -1 )
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         Inserts a new list box pixmap item with the pixmap pixmap and
-the text text into the list at position index.
-
                                         If index is negative, pixmap is inserted at the end of the
-list.
-
                                         
                                        See also insertStrList().
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::insertStrList ( const TQStrList * list, int index = -1 )
-
                                        
-Inserts the string list list into the list at position index.
-
                                         If index is negative, list is inserted at the end of the
-list. If index is too large, the operation is ignored.
-
                                         Warning: This function uses const char * rather than TQString,
-so we recommend against using it. It is provided so that legacy
-code will continue to work, and so that programs that certainly
-will not need to handle code outside a single 8-bit locale can use
-it. See insertStringList() which uses real TQStrings.
-
                                         Warning: This function is never significantly faster than a loop
-around insertItem().
-
                                         
                                        See also insertItem() and insertStringList().
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::insertStrList ( const TQStrList & list, int index = -1 )
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         Inserts the string list list into the list at position index.
-
                                         If index is negative, list is inserted at the end of the
-list. If index is too large, the operation is ignored.
-
                                         Warning: This function uses const char * rather than TQString,
-so we recommend against using it. It is provided so that legacy
-code will continue to work, and so that programs that certainly
-will not need to handle code outside a single 8-bit locale can use
-it. See insertStringList() which uses real TQStrings.
-
                                         Warning: This function is never significantly faster than a loop
-around insertItem().
-
                                         
                                        See also insertItem() and insertStringList().
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::insertStrList ( const char ** strings, int numStrings = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         Inserts the numStrings strings of the array strings into the
-list at position index.
-
                                         If index is negative, insertStrList() inserts strings at the
-end of the list. If index is too large, the operation is
-ignored.
-
                                         Warning: This function uses const char * rather than TQString,
-so we recommend against using it. It is provided so that legacy
-code will continue to work, and so that programs that certainly
-will not need to handle code outside a single 8-bit locale can use
-it. See insertStringList() which uses real TQStrings.
-
                                         Warning: This function is never significantly faster than a loop
-around insertItem().
-
                                         
                                        See also insertItem() and insertStringList().
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::insertStringList ( const TQStringList & list, int index = -1 )
-
                                        
-Inserts the string list list into the list at position index.
-
                                         If index is negative, list is inserted at the end of the
-list. If index is too large, the operation is ignored.
-
                                         Warning: This function is never significantly faster than a loop
-around insertItem().
-
                                         
                                        See also insertItem() and insertStrList().
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::invertSelection () [virtual slot]
-
                                        
-Inverts the selection. Only works in Multi and Extended
-selection mode.
-
-
                                        bool TQListBox::isMultiSelection () const
-
                                        Returns TRUE if or not the list box is in Multi selection mode; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "multiSelection" property for details.
-
                                        bool TQListBox::isRubberSelecting () const [protected]
-
                                        
-Returns TRUE if the user is selecting items using a rubber band
-rectangle; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                        bool TQListBox::isSelected ( int i ) const
-
                                        
-Returns TRUE if item i is selected; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                        bool TQListBox::isSelected ( const TQListBoxItem * i ) const
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         Returns TRUE if item i is selected; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                        TQListBoxItem * TQListBox::item ( int index ) const
-
                                        
-Returns a pointer to the item at position index, or 0 if index is out of bounds.
-
                                         
                                        See also index().
-
-
                                        Example: listboxcombo/listboxcombo.cpp.
-
                                        TQListBoxItem * TQListBox::itemAt ( const TQPoint & p ) const
-
                                        
-Returns the item at point p, specified in viewport coordinates,
-or a 0 if there is no item at p.
-
                                         Use contentsToViewport() to convert between widget coordinates and
-viewport coordinates.
-
-
                                        int TQListBox::itemHeight ( int index = 0 ) const
-
                                        
-Returns the height in pixels of the item with index index. index defaults to 0.
-
                                         If index is too large, this function returns 0.
-
-
                                        TQRect TQListBox::itemRect ( TQListBoxItem * item ) const
-
                                        
-Returns the rectangle on the screen that item occupies in
-viewport()'s coordinates, or an invalid rectangle if item is 0
-or is not currently visible.
-
-
                                        bool TQListBox::itemVisible ( int index )
-
                                        
-Returns TRUE if the item at position index is at least partly
-visible; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                        bool TQListBox::itemVisible ( const TQListBoxItem * item )
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         Returns TRUE if item is at least partly visible; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
-
                                        bool TQListBox::itemYPos ( int index, int * yPos ) const [protected]
-
                                        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         Returns the vertical pixel-coordinate in *yPos, of the list box
-item at position index in the list. Returns FALSE if the item is
-outside the visible area.
-
-
                                        long TQListBox::maxItemWidth () const
-
                                        
-Returns the width of the widest item in the list box.
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::mouseButtonClicked ( int button, TQListBoxItem * item, const TQPoint & pos ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted when the user clicks mouse button button. If item is not 0, the cursor is on item. If item
-is 0, the mouse cursor isn't on any item.
-
                                         pos is the position of the mouse cursor in the global
-coordinate system (TQMouseEvent::globalPos()). (If the click's
-press and release differs by a pixel or two, pos is the
-position at release time.)
-
                                         Note that you must not delete any TQListBoxItem objects in slots
-connected to this signal.
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::mouseButtonPressed ( int button, TQListBoxItem * item, const TQPoint & pos ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted when the user presses mouse button button. If item is not 0, the cursor is on item. If item
-is 0, the mouse cursor isn't on any item.
-
                                         pos is the position of the mouse cursor in the global
-coordinate system (TQMouseEvent::globalPos()).
-
                                         Note that you must not delete any TQListBoxItem objects in slots
-connected to this signal.
-
-
                                        int TQListBox::numCols () const
-
                                        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         
-Returns the number of columns.
-
                                        See also numColumns.
-
-
                                        int TQListBox::numColumns () const
-
                                        Returns the number of columns in the list box.
-See the "numColumns" property for details.
-
                                        int TQListBox::numItemsVisible () const
-
                                        Returns the number of visible items.
-See the "numItemsVisible" property for details.
-
                                        int TQListBox::numRows () const
-
                                        Returns the number of rows in the list box.
-See the "numRows" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListBox::onItem ( TQListBoxItem * i ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted when the user moves the mouse cursor onto
-an item, similar to the TQWidget::enterEvent() function. i is
-the TQListBoxItem that the mouse has moved on.
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::onViewport () [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted when the user moves the mouse cursor from
-an item to an empty part of the list box.
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::paintCell ( TQPainter * p, int row, int col ) [virtual protected]
-
                                        
-Provided for compatibility with the old TQListBox. We recommend
-using TQListBoxItem::paint() instead.
-
                                         Repaints the cell at row, col using painter p.
-
-
                                        const TQPixmap * TQListBox::pixmap ( int index ) const
-
                                        
-Returns a pointer to the pixmap at position index, or 0 if
-there is no pixmap there.
-
                                         
                                        See also text().
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::pressed ( TQListBoxItem * item ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted when the user presses any mouse button. If
-item is not 0, the cursor is on item. If item is 0, the
-mouse cursor isn't on any item.
-
                                         Note that you must not delete any TQListBoxItem objects in slots
-connected to this signal.
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::pressed ( TQListBoxItem * item, const TQPoint & pnt ) [signal]
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         This signal is emitted when the user presses any mouse button. If
-item is not 0, the cursor is on item. If item is 0, the
-mouse cursor isn't on any item.
-
                                         pnt is the position of the mouse cursor in the global
-coordinate system (TQMouseEvent::globalPos()).
-
                                         Note that you must not delete any TQListBoxItem objects in slots
-connected to this signal.
-
                                         
                                        See also mouseButtonPressed(), rightButtonPressed(), and clicked().
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::removeItem ( int index )
-
                                        
-Removes and deletes the item at position index. If index is
-equal to currentItem(), a new item becomes current and the
-currentChanged() and highlighted() signals are emitted.
-
                                         
                                        See also insertItem() and clear().
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::returnPressed ( TQListBoxItem * ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted when Enter or Return is pressed. The
-argument is currentItem().
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::rightButtonClicked ( TQListBoxItem *, const TQPoint & ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted when the right button is clicked (i.e. when
-it's released at the same point where it was pressed). The
-arguments are the relevant TQListBoxItem (may be 0) and the point
-in global coordinates.
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::rightButtonPressed ( TQListBoxItem *, const TQPoint & ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted when the right button is pressed. The
-arguments are the relevant TQListBoxItem (may be 0) and the point
-in global coordinates.
-
-
                                        LayoutMode TQListBox::rowMode () const
-
                                        Returns the row layout mode for this list box.
-See the "rowMode" property for details.
-
                                        bool TQListBox::scrollBar () const
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         Returns FALSE if vScrollBarMode() is AlwaysOff; otherwise
-returns TRUE.
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::selectAll ( bool select ) [virtual slot]
-
                                        
-In Multi and Extended modes, this function sets all items to
-be selected if select is TRUE, and to be unselected if select is FALSE.
-
                                         In Single and NoSelection modes, this function only changes
-the selection status of currentItem().
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::selected ( int index ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted when the user double-clicks on an item or
-presses Enter on the current item. index is the index of the
-selected item.
-
                                         
                                        See also currentChanged(), highlighted(), and selectionChanged().
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::selected ( const TQString & ) [signal]
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         This signal is emitted when the user double-clicks on an item or
-presses Enter on the current item, and the item is (or has) a
-string. The argument is the text of the selected item.
-
                                         
                                        See also currentChanged(), highlighted(), and selectionChanged().
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::selected ( TQListBoxItem * ) [signal]
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         This signal is emitted when the user double-clicks on an item or
-presses Enter on the current item. The argument is a pointer to
-the new selected item.
-
                                         
                                        See also currentChanged(), highlighted(), and selectionChanged().
-
-
                                        TQListBoxItem * TQListBox::selectedItem () const
-
                                          Returns the selected item if the list box is in
-single-selection mode and an item is selected.
-
                                         If no items are selected or the list box is in another selection mode
-this function returns 0.
-
                                         
                                        See also setSelected() and multiSelection.
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::selectionChanged () [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted when the selection set of a list box
-changes. This signal is emitted in each selection mode. If the
-user selects five items by drag-selecting, TQListBox tries to emit
-just one selectionChanged() signal so the signal can be connected
-to computationally expensive slots.
-
                                         
                                        See also selected() and currentItem.
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::selectionChanged ( TQListBoxItem * item ) [signal]
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         This signal is emitted when the selection in a Single selection
-list box changes. item is the newly selected list box item.
-
                                         
                                        See also selected() and currentItem.
-
-
                                        SelectionMode TQListBox::selectionMode () const
-
                                        Returns the selection mode of the list box.
-See the "selectionMode" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListBox::setAutoBottomScrollBar ( bool enable )
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         If enable is TRUE sets setHScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOn;
-otherwise sets setHScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOff.
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::setAutoScrollBar ( bool enable )
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         If enable is TRUE sets setVScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOn;
-otherwise sets setVScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOff.
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::setBottomItem ( int index ) [virtual]
-
                                        
-Scrolls the list box so the item at position index in the list
-is displayed in the bottom row of the list box.
-
                                         
                                        See also topItem.
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::setBottomScrollBar ( bool enable )
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         If enable is TRUE sets setHScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOn;
-otherwise sets setHScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOff.
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::setColumnMode ( LayoutMode ) [virtual]
-
                                        Sets the column layout mode for this list box.
-See the "columnMode" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListBox::setColumnMode ( int ) [virtual]
-
                                        Sets the column layout mode for this list box.
-See the "columnMode" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListBox::setCurrentItem ( int index ) [virtual]
-
                                        Sets the current highlighted item to index.
-See the "currentItem" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListBox::setCurrentItem ( TQListBoxItem * i ) [virtual]
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         Sets the current item to the TQListBoxItem i.
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::setMultiSelection ( bool multi )
-
                                        Sets whether or not the list box is in Multi selection mode to multi.
-See the "multiSelection" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListBox::setRowMode ( LayoutMode ) [virtual]
-
                                        Sets the row layout mode for this list box.
-See the "rowMode" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListBox::setRowMode ( int ) [virtual]
-
                                        Sets the row layout mode for this list box.
-See the "rowMode" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListBox::setScrollBar ( bool enable )
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         If enable is TRUE sets setVScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOn;
-otherwise sets setVScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOff.
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::setSelected ( TQListBoxItem * item, bool select ) [virtual]
-
                                        
-Selects item if select is TRUE or unselects it if select
-is FALSE, and repaints the item appropriately.
-
                                         If the list box is a Single selection list box and select is
-TRUE, setSelected() calls setCurrentItem().
-
                                         If the list box is a Single selection list box, select is
-FALSE, setSelected() calls clearSelection().
-
                                         
                                        See also multiSelection, currentItem, clearSelection(), and currentItem.
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::setSelected ( int index, bool select )
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         If select is TRUE the item at position index is selected;
-otherwise the item is deselected.
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::setSelectionMode ( SelectionMode ) [virtual]
-
                                        Sets the selection mode of the list box.
-See the "selectionMode" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListBox::setTopItem ( int index ) [virtual]
-
                                        Sets the index of an item at the top of the screen to index.
-See the "topItem" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListBox::setVariableHeight ( bool ) [virtual]
-
                                        Sets whether this list box has variable-height rows.
-See the "variableHeight" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListBox::setVariableWidth ( bool ) [virtual]
-
                                        Sets whether this list box has variable-width columns.
-See the "variableWidth" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListBox::sort ( bool ascending = TRUE )
-
                                        
-If ascending is TRUE sorts the items in ascending order;
-otherwise sorts in descending order.
-
                                         To compare the items, the text (TQListBoxItem::text()) of the items
-is used.
-
-
                                        Example: listbox/listbox.cpp.
-
                                        void TQListBox::takeItem ( const TQListBoxItem * item )
-
                                        
-Removes item from the list box and causes an update of the
-screen display. The item is not deleted. You should normally not
-need to call this function because TQListBoxItem::~TQListBoxItem()
-calls it. The normal way to delete an item is with delete.
-
                                         
                                        See also TQListBox::insertItem().
-
-
                                        TQString TQListBox::text ( int index ) const
-
                                        
-Returns the text at position index, or TQString::null if there
-is no text at that position.
-
                                         
                                        See also pixmap().
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::toggleCurrentItem () [protected]
-
                                        
-Toggles the selection status of currentItem() and repaints if the
-list box is a Multi selection list box.
-
                                         
                                        See also multiSelection.
-
-
                                        int TQListBox::topItem () const
-
                                        Returns the index of an item at the top of the screen.
-See the "topItem" property for details.
-
                                        int TQListBox::totalHeight () const [protected]
-
                                        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         
-Returns contentsHeight().
-
-
                                        int TQListBox::totalWidth () const [protected]
-
                                        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         
-Returns contentsWidth().
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::triggerUpdate ( bool doLayout )
-
                                        
-Ensures that a single paint event will occur at the end of the
-current event loop iteration. If doLayout is TRUE, the layout
-is also redone.
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::updateItem ( int index ) [protected]
-
                                        
-Repaints the item at position index in the list.
-
-
                                        void TQListBox::updateItem ( TQListBoxItem * i ) [protected]
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         Repaints the TQListBoxItem i.
-
-
                                        bool TQListBox::variableHeight () const
-
                                        Returns TRUE if this list box has variable-height rows; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "variableHeight" property for details.
-
                                        bool TQListBox::variableWidth () const
-
                                        Returns TRUE if this list box has variable-width columns; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "variableWidth" property for details.
-
                                        Property Documentation
                                        
-
                                        LayoutMode columnMode
                                        
-
                                        This property holds the column layout mode for this list box.
-
                                        setColumnMode() sets the layout mode and adjusts the number of
-displayed columns. The row layout mode automatically becomes Variable, unless the column mode is Variable.
-
                                         
                                        See also rowMode, rowMode, and numColumns.
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setColumnMode() and get this property's value with columnMode().
-
                                        uint count
                                        
-
                                        This property holds the number of items in the list box.
-
                                        
-
                                        Get this property's value with count().
-
                                        int currentItem
                                        
-
                                        This property holds the current highlighted item.
-
                                        When setting this property, the highlighting is moved to the item
-and the list box scrolled as necessary.
-
                                         If no item is current, currentItem() returns -1.
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setCurrentItem() and get this property's value with currentItem().
-
                                        TQString currentText
                                        
-
                                        This property holds the text of the current item.
-
                                        This is equivalent to text(currentItem()).
-
-
                                        Get this property's value with currentText().
-
                                        bool multiSelection
                                        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         
                                        This property holds whether or not the list box is in Multi selection mode.
-
                                        Consider using the TQListBox::selectionMode property instead of
-this property.
-
                                         When setting this property, Multi selection mode is used if set to TRUE and
-to Single selection mode if set to FALSE.
-
                                         When getting this property, TRUE is returned if the list box is in
-Multi selection mode or Extended selection mode, and FALSE if it is
-in Single selection mode or NoSelection mode.
-
                                         
                                        See also selectionMode.
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setMultiSelection() and get this property's value with isMultiSelection().
-
                                        int numColumns
                                        
-
                                        This property holds the number of columns in the list box.
-
                                        This is normally 1, but can be different if TQListBox::columnMode or TQListBox::rowMode has been set.
-
                                         
                                        See also columnMode, rowMode, and numRows.
-
-
                                        Get this property's value with numColumns().
-
                                        int numItemsVisible
                                        
-
                                        This property holds the number of visible items.
-
                                        Both partially and entirely visible items are counted.
-
-
                                        Get this property's value with numItemsVisible().
-
                                        int numRows
                                        
-
                                        This property holds the number of rows in the list box.
-
                                        This is equal to the number of items in the default single-column
-layout, but can be different.
-
                                         
                                        See also columnMode, rowMode, and numColumns.
-
-
                                        Get this property's value with numRows().
-
                                        LayoutMode rowMode
                                        
-
                                        This property holds the row layout mode for this list box.
-
                                        This property is normally Variable.
-
                                         setRowMode() sets the layout mode and adjusts the number of
-displayed rows. The column layout mode automatically becomes Variable, unless the row mode is Variable.
-
                                         
                                        See also columnMode.
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setRowMode() and get this property's value with rowMode().
-
                                        SelectionMode selectionMode
                                        
-
                                        This property holds the selection mode of the list box.
-
                                        Sets the list box's selection mode, which may be one of Single
-(the default), Extended, Multi or NoSelection.
-
                                         
                                        See also SelectionMode.
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setSelectionMode() and get this property's value with selectionMode().
-
                                        int topItem
                                        
-
                                        This property holds the index of an item at the top of the screen.
-
                                        When getting this property and the listbox has multiple columns,
-an arbitrary item is selected and returned.
-
                                         When setting this property, the list box is scrolled so the item
-at position index in the list is displayed in the top row of
-the list box.
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setTopItem() and get this property's value with topItem().
-
                                        bool variableHeight
                                        
-
                                        This property holds whether this list box has variable-height rows.
-
                                        When the list box has variable-height rows (the default), each row
-is as high as the highest item in that row. When it has same-sized
-rows, all rows are as high as the highest item in the list box.
-
                                         
                                        See also variableWidth.
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setVariableHeight() and get this property's value with variableHeight().
-
                                        bool variableWidth
                                        
-
                                        This property holds whether this list box has variable-width columns.
-
                                        When the list box has variable-width columns, each column is as
-wide as the widest item in that column. When it has same-sized
-columns (the default), all columns are as wide as the widest item
-in the list box.
-
                                         
                                        See also variableHeight.
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setVariableWidth() and get this property's value with variableWidth().
-
-
                                        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                        
-
-
                                        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                        TQt 3.3.8
                                        
-
                                        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qlistboxitem-members.html b/doc/html/qlistboxitem-members.html
index 350a752c2..e1811a0f8 100644
--- a/doc/html/qlistboxitem-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qlistboxitem-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qlistboxitem.html b/doc/html/qlistboxitem.html
index b4213ab49..41bf1a077 100644
--- a/doc/html/qlistboxitem.html
+++ b/doc/html/qlistboxitem.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                        The TQListBoxItem class is the base class of all list box items.
 More...
-
                                        #include <qlistbox.h>
+
                                        #include <ntqlistbox.h>
 
                                        Inherited by TQListBoxText and TQListBoxPixmap.
 
                                        List of all member functions.
 
                                        Public Members
                                        
@@ -67,16 +67,16 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 The TQListBoxItem class is the base class of all list box items.
 
                                         This class is an abstract base class used for all list box items.
-If you need to insert customized items into a TQListBox you must
+If you need to insert customized items into a TQListBox you must
 inherit this class and reimplement paint(), height() and width().
-
                                         
                                        See also TQListBox.
+
                                         
                                        See also TQListBox.
 
 
                                        Member Function Documentation
                                        
-
                                        TQListBoxItem::TQListBoxItem ( TQListBox * listbox = 0 )
+
                                        TQListBoxItem::TQListBoxItem ( TQListBox * listbox = 0 )
 
                                        
 Constructs an empty list box item in the list box listbox.
 
-
                                        TQListBoxItem::TQListBoxItem ( TQListBox * listbox, TQListBoxItem * after )
+
                                        TQListBoxItem::TQListBoxItem ( TQListBox * listbox, TQListBoxItem * after )
 
                                        
 Constructs an empty list box item in the list box listbox and
 inserts it after the item after or at the beginning if after
@@ -91,13 +91,13 @@ Destroys the list box item.
 
 This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 
                                         
-
                                        int TQListBoxItem::height ( const TQListBox * lb ) const [virtual]
+
                                        int TQListBoxItem::height ( const TQListBox * lb ) const [virtual]
 
                                        
 
 
                                         Implement this function to return the height of your item. The lb parameter is the same as listBox() and is provided for
 convenience and compatibility.
 
                                         The default implementation returns
-TQApplication::globalStrut()'s height.
+TQApplication::globalStrut()'s height.
 
                                         
                                        See also paint() and width().
 
 
                                        Reimplemented in TQListBoxText and TQListBoxPixmap.
@@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ convenience and compatibility.
 
 Returns TRUE if the item is the current item; otherwise returns
 FALSE.
-
                                         
                                        See also TQListBox::currentItem, TQListBox::item(), and isSelected().
+
                                         
                                        See also TQListBox::currentItem, TQListBox::item(), and isSelected().
 
 
                                        bool TQListBoxItem::isSelectable () const
 
                                        
@@ -117,10 +117,10 @@ returns FALSE.
 
 
 
                                         Returns TRUE if the item is selected; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                         
                                        See also TQListBox::isSelected() and isCurrent().
+
                                         
                                        See also TQListBox::isSelected() and isCurrent().
 
 
                                        Example: listboxcombo/listboxcombo.cpp.
-
                                        TQListBox * TQListBoxItem::listBox () const
+
                                        TQListBox * TQListBoxItem::listBox () const
 
                                        
 Returns a pointer to the list box containing this item.
 
@@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Returns the item that comes after this in the list box. If this is
 the last item, 0 is returned.
 
                                         
                                        See also prev().
 
-
                                        void TQListBoxItem::paint ( TQPainter * p ) [pure virtual protected]
+
                                        void TQListBoxItem::paint ( TQPainter * p ) [pure virtual protected]
 
                                        
 
 
                                         Implement this function to draw your item. The painter, p, is
@@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ already open for painting.
 
 
                                        Example: listboxcombo/listboxcombo.cpp.
 
                                        Reimplemented in TQListBoxText and TQListBoxPixmap.
-
                                        const TQPixmap * TQListBoxItem::pixmap () const [virtual]
+
                                        const TQPixmap * TQListBoxItem::pixmap () const [virtual]
 
                                        
 Returns the pixmap associated with the item, or 0 if there isn't
 one.
@@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ If b is TRUE (the default) then this item can be selected by
 the user; otherwise this item cannot be selected by the user.
 
                                         
                                        See also isSelectable().
 
-
                                        void TQListBoxItem::setText ( const TQString & text ) [virtual protected]
+
                                        void TQListBoxItem::setText ( const TQString & text ) [virtual protected]
 
                                        
 
 
                                         Sets the text of the TQListBoxItem to text. This text is also
@@ -188,19 +188,19 @@ used for sorting. The text is not shown unless explicitly drawn in
 paint().
 
                                         
                                        See also text().
 
-
                                        TQString TQListBoxItem::text () const [virtual]
+
                                        TQString TQListBoxItem::text () const [virtual]
 
                                        
 Returns the text of the item. This text is also used for sorting.
 
                                         
                                        See also setText().
 
 
                                        Example: listboxcombo/listboxcombo.cpp.
-
                                        int TQListBoxItem::width ( const TQListBox * lb ) const [virtual]
+
                                        int TQListBoxItem::width ( const TQListBox * lb ) const [virtual]
 
                                        
 
 
                                         Reimplement this function to return the width of your item. The lb parameter is the same as listBox() and is provided for
 convenience and compatibility.
 
                                         The default implementation returns
-TQApplication::globalStrut()'s width.
+TQApplication::globalStrut()'s width.
 
                                         
                                        See also paint() and height().
 
 
                                        Reimplemented in TQListBoxText and TQListBoxPixmap.
diff --git a/doc/html/qlistboxpixmap-members.html b/doc/html/qlistboxpixmap-members.html
index 272d759b0..32b7a8d25 100644
--- a/doc/html/qlistboxpixmap-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qlistboxpixmap-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qlistboxpixmap.html b/doc/html/qlistboxpixmap.html
index f1115b449..fe3303b54 100644
--- a/doc/html/qlistboxpixmap.html
+++ b/doc/html/qlistboxpixmap.html
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                        The TQListBoxPixmap class provides list box items with a
 pixmap and optional text.
 More...
-
                                        #include <qlistbox.h>
+
                                        #include <ntqlistbox.h>
 
                                        Inherits TQListBoxItem.
 
                                        List of all member functions.
 
                                        Public Members
                                        
@@ -62,35 +62,35 @@ pixmap and optional text.
 
                                         
 
                                         Items of this class are drawn with the pixmap on the left with the
 optional text to the right of the pixmap.
-
                                         
                                        See also TQListBox, TQListBoxItem, and Advanced Widgets.
+
                                         
                                        See also TQListBox, TQListBoxItem, and Advanced Widgets.
 
 
                                        Member Function Documentation
                                        
-
                                        TQListBoxPixmap::TQListBoxPixmap ( TQListBox * listbox, const TQPixmap & pixmap )
+
                                        TQListBoxPixmap::TQListBoxPixmap ( TQListBox * listbox, const TQPixmap & pixmap )
 
                                        
 Constructs a new list box item in list box listbox showing the
 pixmap pixmap.
 
-
                                        TQListBoxPixmap::TQListBoxPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pixmap )
+
                                        TQListBoxPixmap::TQListBoxPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pixmap )
 
                                        
 Constructs a new list box item showing the pixmap pixmap.
 
-
                                        TQListBoxPixmap::TQListBoxPixmap ( TQListBox * listbox, const TQPixmap & pixmap, TQListBoxItem * after )
+
                                        TQListBoxPixmap::TQListBoxPixmap ( TQListBox * listbox, const TQPixmap & pixmap, TQListBoxItem * after )
 
                                        
 Constructs a new list box item in list box listbox showing the
 pixmap pixmap. The item gets inserted after the item after,
 or at the beginning if after is 0.
 
-
                                        TQListBoxPixmap::TQListBoxPixmap ( TQListBox * listbox, const TQPixmap & pix, const TQString & text )
+
                                        TQListBoxPixmap::TQListBoxPixmap ( TQListBox * listbox, const TQPixmap & pix, const TQString & text )
 
                                        
 Constructs a new list box item in list box listbox showing the
 pixmap pix and the text text.
 
-
                                        TQListBoxPixmap::TQListBoxPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pix, const TQString & text )
+
                                        TQListBoxPixmap::TQListBoxPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pix, const TQString & text )
 
                                        
 Constructs a new list box item showing the pixmap pix and the
 text to text.
 
-
                                        TQListBoxPixmap::TQListBoxPixmap ( TQListBox * listbox, const TQPixmap & pix, const TQString & text, TQListBoxItem * after )
+
                                        TQListBoxPixmap::TQListBoxPixmap ( TQListBox * listbox, const TQPixmap & pix, const TQString & text, TQListBoxItem * after )
 
                                        
 Constructs a new list box item in list box listbox showing the
 pixmap pix and the string text. The item gets inserted after
@@ -100,24 +100,24 @@ the item after, or at the beginning if after is 0.
 
 Destroys the item.
 
-
                                        int TQListBoxPixmap::height ( const TQListBox * lb ) const [virtual]
+
                                        int TQListBoxPixmap::height ( const TQListBox * lb ) const [virtual]
 
                                        
 Returns the height of the pixmap in list box lb.
 
                                         
                                        See also paint() and width().
 
 
                                        Reimplemented from TQListBoxItem.
-
                                        void TQListBoxPixmap::paint ( TQPainter * painter ) [virtual protected]
+
                                        void TQListBoxPixmap::paint ( TQPainter * painter ) [virtual protected]
 
                                        
 Draws the pixmap using painter.
 
 
                                        Reimplemented from TQListBoxItem.
-
                                        const TQPixmap * TQListBoxPixmap::pixmap () const [virtual]
+
                                        const TQPixmap * TQListBoxPixmap::pixmap () const [virtual]
 
                                        
 
 
                                         Returns the pixmap associated with the item.
 
 
                                        Reimplemented from TQListBoxItem.
-
                                        int TQListBoxPixmap::width ( const TQListBox * lb ) const [virtual]
+
                                        int TQListBoxPixmap::width ( const TQListBox * lb ) const [virtual]
 
                                        
 Returns the width of the pixmap plus some margin in list box lb.
 
                                         
                                        See also paint() and height().
diff --git a/doc/html/qlistboxtext-members.html b/doc/html/qlistboxtext-members.html
index eb4ee88dd..90ca1e6de 100644
--- a/doc/html/qlistboxtext-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qlistboxtext-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qlistboxtext.html b/doc/html/qlistboxtext.html
index e4efeb563..b2d21fe8f 100644
--- a/doc/html/qlistboxtext.html
+++ b/doc/html/qlistboxtext.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                        The TQListBoxText class provides list box items that display text.
 More...
-
                                        #include <qlistbox.h>
+
                                        #include <ntqlistbox.h>
 
                                        Inherits TQListBoxItem.
 
                                        List of all member functions.
 
                                        Public Members
                                        
@@ -57,19 +57,19 @@ The TQListBoxText class provides list box items that display text.
 
                                         The text is drawn in the widget's current font. If you need
 several different fonts, you must implement your own subclass of
 TQListBoxItem.
-
                                         
                                        See also TQListBox, TQListBoxItem, and Advanced Widgets.
+
                                         
                                        See also TQListBox, TQListBoxItem, and Advanced Widgets.
 
 
                                        Member Function Documentation
                                        
-
                                        TQListBoxText::TQListBoxText ( TQListBox * listbox, const TQString & text = TQString::null )
+
                                        TQListBoxText::TQListBoxText ( TQListBox * listbox, const TQString & text = TQString::null )
 
                                        
 Constructs a list box item in list box listbox showing the text
 text.
 
-
                                        TQListBoxText::TQListBoxText ( const TQString & text = TQString::null )
+
                                        TQListBoxText::TQListBoxText ( const TQString & text = TQString::null )
 
                                        
 Constructs a list box item showing the text text.
 
-
                                        TQListBoxText::TQListBoxText ( TQListBox * listbox, const TQString & text, TQListBoxItem * after )
+
                                        TQListBoxText::TQListBoxText ( TQListBox * listbox, const TQString & text, TQListBoxItem * after )
 
                                        
 Constructs a list box item in list box listbox showing the text
 text. The item is inserted after the item after, or at the
@@ -79,18 +79,18 @@ beginning if after is 0.
 
 Destroys the item.
 
-
                                        int TQListBoxText::height ( const TQListBox * lb ) const [virtual]
+
                                        int TQListBoxText::height ( const TQListBox * lb ) const [virtual]
 
                                        
 Returns the height of a line of text in list box lb.
 
                                         
                                        See also paint() and width().
 
 
                                        Reimplemented from TQListBoxItem.
-
                                        void TQListBoxText::paint ( TQPainter * painter ) [virtual protected]
+
                                        void TQListBoxText::paint ( TQPainter * painter ) [virtual protected]
 
                                        
 Draws the text using painter.
 
 
                                        Reimplemented from TQListBoxItem.
-
                                        int TQListBoxText::width ( const TQListBox * lb ) const [virtual]
+
                                        int TQListBoxText::width ( const TQListBox * lb ) const [virtual]
 
                                        
 Returns the width of this line in list box lb.
 
                                         
                                        See also paint() and height().
diff --git a/doc/html/qlistiterator.html b/doc/html/qlistiterator.html
index ae63793a7..c75f0689c 100644
--- a/doc/html/qlistiterator.html
+++ b/doc/html/qlistiterator.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
  
 
                                         
                                        -#include <qlist.h>
                                        
+#include <ntqlist.h>
                                        
  
 
                                         The TQListIterator class has been renamed  TQPtrListIterator  in
 TQt 3.0.
diff --git a/doc/html/qlistview-h.html b/doc/html/qlistview-h.html
index b760cc676..d86577f0e 100644
--- a/doc/html/qlistview-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qlistview-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qlistview.h Include File
+ntqlistview.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                        TQListView Class Reference
                                        
-
-
                                        The TQListView class implements a list/tree view.
-More...
-
                                        #include <qlistview.h>
-
                                        Inherits TQScrollView.
-
                                        List of all member functions.
-
                                        Public Members
                                        
-
-
                                        Public Slots
                                        
-
-
                                        Signals
                                        
-
-
                                        Properties
                                        
-
                                          
-
                                        • bool allColumnsShowFocus - whether items should show keyboard focus using all columns
                                          • 
-
                                        • int childCount - the number of parentless (top-level) TQListViewItem objects in this TQListView  (read only)
                                          • 
-
                                        • int columns - the number of columns in this list view  (read only)
                                          • 
-
                                        • RenameAction defaultRenameAction - what action to perform when the editor loses focus during renaming
                                          • 
-
                                        • int itemMargin - the advisory item margin that list items may use
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool multiSelection - whether the list view is in multi-selection or extended-selection mode  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • ResizeMode resizeMode - whether all, none or the only the last column should be resized
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool rootIsDecorated - whether the list view shows open/close signs on root items
                                          • 
-
                                        • SelectionMode selectionMode - the list view's selection mode
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool showSortIndicator - whether the list view header should display a sort indicator
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool showToolTips - whether this list view should show tooltips for truncated column texts
                                          • 
-
                                        • int treeStepSize - the number of pixels a child is offset from its parent
                                          • 
-
                                        
-
                                        Protected Members
                                        
-
-
                                        Protected Slots
                                        
-
-
                                        Detailed Description
                                        
-
-
-The TQListView class implements a list/tree view.
-
                                         
-
-
                                         It can display and control a hierarchy of multi-column items, and
-provides the ability to add new items at any time. The user may
-select one or many items (depending on the SelectionMode) and
-sort the list in increasing or decreasing order by any column.
-
                                         The simplest pattern of use is to create a TQListView, add some
-column headers using addColumn() and create one or more
-TQListViewItem or TQCheckListItem objects with the TQListView as
-parent:
-
                                         
-
-
                                                TQListView * table;
-
                                        
-
-
                                                table->addColumn( "Qualified name" );
-        table->addColumn( "Namespace" );
-
                                                    element = new TQListViewItem( table, qName, namespaceURI );
-
                                        
-
                                         Further nodes can be added to the list view object (the root of the
-tree) or as child nodes to TQListViewItems:
-
                                         
                                                    for ( int i = 0 ; i < attributes.length(); i++ ) {
-                new TQListViewItem( element, attributes.qName(i), attributes.uri(i) );
-            }
-
                                        
-
                                         (From xml/tagreader-with-features/structureparser.cpp)
-
                                         The main setup functions are:
-
                                        
-
                                         Function Action
-
                                         addColumn()
-Adds a column with a text label and perhaps width. Columns
-are counted from the left starting with column 0.
-
                                         setColumnWidthMode()
-Sets the column to be resized automatically or not.
-
                                         setAllColumnsShowFocus()
-Sets whether items should show keyboard focus using all
-columns or just column 0. The default is to show focus
-just using column 0.
-
                                         setRootIsDecorated()
-Sets whether root items should show open/close decoration to their left.
-The default is FALSE.
-
                                         setTreeStepSize()
-Sets how many pixels an item's children are indented
-relative to their parent. The default is 20. This is
-mostly a matter of taste.
-
                                         setSorting()
-Sets whether the items should be sorted, whether it should
-be in ascending or descending order, and by what column
-they should be sorted. By default the list view is sorted
-by the first column; to switch this off call setSorting(-1).
-
                                        
-
                                         To handle events such as mouse presses on the list view, derived
-classes can reimplement the TQScrollView functions:
-contentsMousePressEvent,
-contentsMouseReleaseEvent,
-contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent,
-contentsMouseMoveEvent,
-contentsDragEnterEvent,
-contentsDragMoveEvent,
-contentsDragLeaveEvent,
-contentsDropEvent, and
-contentsWheelEvent.
-
                                         There are also several functions for mapping between items and
-coordinates. itemAt() returns the item at a position on-screen,
-itemRect() returns the rectangle an item occupies on the screen,
-and itemPos() returns the position of any item (whether it is
-on-screen or not). firstChild() returns the list view's first item
-(not necessarily visible on-screen).
-
                                         You can iterate over visible items using
-TQListViewItem::itemBelow(); over a list view's top-level items
-using TQListViewItem::firstChild() and
-TQListViewItem::nextSibling(); or every item using a
-TQListViewItemIterator. See
-the TQListViewItem documentation for examples of traversal.
-
                                         An item can be moved amongst its siblings using
-TQListViewItem::moveItem(). To move an item in the hierarchy use
-takeItem() and insertItem(). Item's (and all their child items)
-are deleted with delete; to delete all the list view's items
-use clear().
-
                                         There are a variety of selection modes described in the
-TQListView::SelectionMode documentation. The default is Single
-selection, which you can change using setSelectionMode().
-
                                         Because TQListView offers multiple selection it must display
-keyboard focus and selection state separately. Therefore there are
-functions both to set the selection state of an item
-(setSelected()) and to set which item displays keyboard focus
-(setCurrentItem()).
-
                                         TQListView emits two groups of signals; one group signals changes
-in selection/focus state and one indicates selection. The first
-group consists of selectionChanged() (applicable to all list
-views), selectionChanged(TQListViewItem*) (applicable only to a
-Single selection list view), and currentChanged(TQListViewItem*).
-The second group consists of doubleClicked(TQListViewItem*),
-returnPressed(TQListViewItem*),
-rightButtonClicked(TQListViewItem*, const TQPoint&, int), etc.
-
                                         Note that changing the state of the list view in a slot connected
-to a list view signal may cause unexpected side effects. If you
-need to change the list view's state in response to a signal, use
-a single shot timer with a
-time out of 0, and connect this timer to a slot that modifies the
-list view's state.
-
                                         In Motif style, TQListView deviates fairly strongly from the look
-and feel of the Motif hierarchical tree view. This is done mostly
-to provide a usable keyboard interface and to make the list view
-look better with a white background.
-
                                         If selectionMode() is Single (the default) the user can select
-one item at a time, e.g. by clicking an item with the mouse, see
-TQListView::SelectionMode for details.
-
                                         The list view can be navigated either using the mouse or the
-keyboard. Clicking a - icon closes an item (hides its
-children) and clicking a + icon opens an item (shows its
-children). The keyboard controls are these:
-
                                        
-
                                         Keypress Action
-
                                         Home
-Make the first item current and visible.
-
                                         End
-Make the last item current and visible.
-
                                         Page Up
-Make the item above the top visible item current and visible.
-
                                         Page Down
-Make the item below the bottom visible item current and visible.
-
                                         Up Arrow
-Make the item above the current item current and visible.
-
                                         Down Arrow
-Make the item below the current item current and visible.
-
                                         Left Arrow
-If the current item is closed (+ icon) or has no
-children, make its parent item current and visible. If the
-current item is open (- icon) close it, i.e. hide its
-children. Exception: if the current item is the first item
-and is closed and the horizontal scrollbar is offset to
-the right the list view will be scrolled left.
-
                                         Right Arrow
-If the current item is closed (+ icon) and has
-children, the item is opened. If the current item is
-opened (- icon) and has children the item's first
-child is made current and visible. If the current item has
-no children the list view is scrolled right.
-
                                        
-
                                         If the user starts typing letters with the focus in the list view
-an incremental search will occur. For example if the user types
-'d' the current item will change to the first item that begins
-with the letter 'd'; if they then type 'a', the current item will
-change to the first item that begins with 'da', and so on. If no
-item begins with the letters they type the current item doesn't
-change.
-
                                         Warning: The list view assumes ownership of all list view items
-and will delete them when it does not need them any more.
-
                                          
-
                                         
                                        See also TQListViewItem, TQCheckListItem, and Advanced Widgets.
-
-
                                        Member Type Documentation
                                        
-
                                        TQListView::RenameAction
                                        
-
-
                                         This enum describes whether a rename operation is accepted if the
-rename editor loses focus without the user pressing Enter.
-
                                          
-
                                        • TQListView::Accept - Rename if Enter is pressed or focus is lost.
-
                                        • TQListView::Reject - Discard the rename operation if focus is lost (and
-Enter has not been pressed).
-
                                        
-
                                        TQListView::ResizeMode
                                        
-
-
                                         This enum describes how the list view's header adjusts to resize
-events which affect the width of the list view.
-
                                          
-
                                        • TQListView::NoColumn - The columns do not get resized in resize events.
-
                                        • TQListView::AllColumns - All columns are resized equally to fit the width
-of the list view.
-
                                        • TQListView::LastColumn - The last column is resized to fit the width of
-the list view.
-
                                        
-
                                        TQListView::SelectionMode
                                        
-
-
                                         This enumerated type is used by TQListView to indicate how it
-reacts to selection by the user.
-
                                          
-
                                        • TQListView::Single - When the user selects an item, any already-selected
-item becomes unselected. The user can unselect the selected
-item by clicking on some empty space within the view.
-
                                        • TQListView::Multi - When the user selects an item in the usual way, the
-selection status of that item is toggled and the other items are
-left alone. Also, multiple items can be selected by dragging the
-mouse while the left mouse button stays pressed.
-
                                        • TQListView::Extended - When the user selects an item in the usual way,
-the selection is cleared and the new item selected. However, if
-the user presses the Ctrl key when clicking on an item, the
-clicked item gets toggled and all other items are left untouched.
-And if the user presses the Shift key while clicking on an item,
-all items between the current item and the clicked item get
-selected or unselected, depending on the state of the clicked
-item. Also, multiple items can be selected by dragging the mouse
-over them.
-
                                        • TQListView::NoSelection - Items cannot be selected.
-
                                         In other words, Single is a real single-selection list view, Multi a real multi-selection list view, Extended is a list view
-where users can select multiple items but usually want to select
-either just one or a range of contiguous items, and NoSelection
-is a list view where the user can look but not touch.
-
-
                                        TQListView::WidthMode
                                        
-
-
                                         This enum type describes how the width of a column in the view
-changes.
-
                                          
-
                                        • TQListView::Manual - the column width does not change automatically.
-
                                        • TQListView::Maximum - the column is automatically sized according to the
-widths of all items in the column. (Note: The column never shrinks
-in this case.) This means that the column is always resized to the
-width of the item with the largest width in the column.
-
                                         
                                        See also setColumnWidth(), setColumnWidthMode(), and columnWidth().
-
-
                                        Member Function Documentation
                                        
-
                                        TQListView::TQListView ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
-
                                        
-Constructs a new empty list view called name with parent parent.
-
                                         Performance is boosted by modifying the widget flags f so that
-only part of the TQListViewItem children is redrawn. This may be
-unsuitable for custom TQListViewItem classes, in which case WStaticContents and WNoAutoErase should be cleared.
-
                                         
                                        See also TQWidget::clearWFlags() and TQt::WidgetFlags.
-
-
                                        TQListView::~TQListView ()
-
                                        
-Destroys the list view, deleting all its items, and frees up all
-allocated resources.
-
-
                                        int TQListView::addColumn ( const TQString & label, int width = -1 ) [virtual]
-
                                        
-Adds a width pixels wide column with the column header label
-to the list view, and returns the index of the new column.
-
                                         All columns apart from the first one are inserted to the right of
-the existing ones.
-
                                         If width is negative, the new column's WidthMode is set to
-Maximum instead of Manual.
-
                                         
                                        See also setColumnText(), setColumnWidth(), and setColumnWidthMode().
-
-
                                        Examples: addressbook/centralwidget.cpp, checklists/checklists.cpp, dirview/main.cpp, fileiconview/mainwindow.cpp, listviews/listviews.cpp, and qdir/qdir.cpp.
-
                                        int TQListView::addColumn ( const TQIconSet & iconset, const TQString & label, int width = -1 ) [virtual]
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         Adds a width pixels wide new column with the header label
-and the iconset to the list view, and returns the index of the
-column.
-
                                         If width is negative, the new column's WidthMode is set to
-Maximum, and to Manual otherwise.
-
                                         
                                        See also setColumnText(), setColumnWidth(), and setColumnWidthMode().
-
-
                                        void TQListView::adjustColumn ( int col ) [slot]
-
                                         Adjusts the column col to its preferred width 
-
                                        bool TQListView::allColumnsShowFocus () const
-
                                        Returns TRUE if items should show keyboard focus using all columns; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "allColumnsShowFocus" property for details.
-
                                        int TQListView::childCount () const
-
                                        Returns the number of parentless (top-level) TQListViewItem objects in this TQListView.
-See the "childCount" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListView::clear () [virtual slot]
-
                                        
-Removes and deletes all the items in this list view and triggers
-an update.
-
                                         Note that the currentChanged() signal is not emitted when this slot is invoked.
-
                                        See also triggerUpdate().
-
-
                                        Examples: addressbook/centralwidget.cpp, checklists/checklists.cpp, listviews/listviews.cpp, and qutlook/centralwidget.cpp.
-
                                        void TQListView::clearSelection () [virtual]
-
                                        
-Sets all the items to be not selected, updates the list view as
-necessary, and emits the selectionChanged() signals. Note that for
-Multi selection list views this function needs to iterate over
-all items.
-
                                         
                                        See also setSelected() and multiSelection.
-
-
                                        Example: addressbook/centralwidget.cpp.
-
                                        void TQListView::clicked ( TQListViewItem * item ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted whenever the user clicks (mouse pressed and mouse released) in the list view. item is the clicked list
-view item, or 0 if the user didn't click on an item.
-
                                         Warning: Do not delete any TQListViewItem objects in slots
-connected to this signal.
-
-
                                        Example: addressbook/centralwidget.cpp.
-
                                        void TQListView::clicked ( TQListViewItem * item, const TQPoint & pnt, int c ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         This signal is emitted whenever the user clicks (mouse pressed and mouse released) in the list view. item is the clicked list
-view item, or 0 if the user didn't click on an item. pnt is the
-position where the user has clicked in global coordinates. If item is not 0, c is the list view column into which the user
-pressed; if item is 0 c's value is undefined.
-
                                         Warning: Do not delete any TQListViewItem objects in slots
-connected to this signal.
-
-
                                        void TQListView::collapsed ( TQListViewItem * item ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted when the item has been collapsed, i.e.
-when the children of item are hidden.
-
                                         
                                        See also setOpen() and expanded().
-
-
                                        int TQListView::columnAlignment ( int column ) const
-
                                        
-Returns the alignment of column column. The default is AlignAuto.
-
                                         
                                        See also TQt::AlignmentFlags.
-
-
                                        TQString TQListView::columnText ( int c ) const
-
                                        
-Returns the text of column c.
-
                                         
                                        See also setColumnText().
-
-
                                        int TQListView::columnWidth ( int c ) const
-
                                        
-Returns the width of column c.
-
                                         
                                        See also setColumnWidth().
-
-
                                        WidthMode TQListView::columnWidthMode ( int c ) const
-
                                        
-Returns the WidthMode for column c.
-
                                         
                                        See also setColumnWidthMode().
-
-
                                        int TQListView::columns () const
-
                                        Returns the number of columns in this list view.
-See the "columns" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListView::contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent ( TQMouseEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                                        
-Processes the mouse double-click event e on behalf of the viewed widget.
-
-
                                        Reimplemented from TQScrollView.
-
                                        void TQListView::contentsMouseMoveEvent ( TQMouseEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                                        
-Processes the mouse move event e on behalf of the viewed widget.
-
-
                                        Example: dirview/dirview.cpp.
-
                                        Reimplemented from TQScrollView.
-
                                        void TQListView::contentsMousePressEvent ( TQMouseEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                                        
-Processes the mouse press event e on behalf of the viewed widget.
-
-
                                        Example: dirview/dirview.cpp.
-
                                        Reimplemented from TQScrollView.
-
                                        void TQListView::contentsMouseReleaseEvent ( TQMouseEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                                        
-Processes the mouse release event e on behalf of the viewed widget.
-
-
                                        Example: dirview/dirview.cpp.
-
                                        Reimplemented from TQScrollView.
-
                                        void TQListView::contextMenuRequested ( TQListViewItem * item, const TQPoint & pos, int col ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted when the user invokes a context menu with
-the right mouse button or with special system keys. If the
-keyboard was used item is the current item; if the mouse was
-used, item is the item under the mouse pointer or 0 if there is
-no item under the mouse pointer. If no item is clicked, the column
-index emitted is -1.
-
                                         pos is the position for the context menu in the global
-coordinate system.
-
                                         col is the column on which the user pressed, or -1 if the
-signal was triggered by a key event.
-
-
                                        Example: listviews/listviews.cpp.
-
                                        void TQListView::currentChanged ( TQListViewItem * ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted whenever the current item has changed
-(normally after the screen update). The current item is the item
-responsible for indicating keyboard focus.
-
                                         The argument is the newly current item, or 0 if the change made no
-item current. This can happen, for example, if all items in the
-list view are deleted.
-
                                         Warning: Do not delete any TQListViewItem objects in slots
-connected to this signal.
-
                                         
                                        See also setCurrentItem() and currentItem().
-
-
                                        Example: listviews/listviews.cpp.
-
                                        TQListViewItem * TQListView::currentItem () const
-
                                        
-Returns the current item, or 0 if there isn't one.
-
                                         
                                        See also setCurrentItem().
-
-
                                        Examples: addressbook/centralwidget.cpp, listviews/listviews.cpp, and qutlook/centralwidget.cpp.
-
                                        RenameAction TQListView::defaultRenameAction () const
-
                                        Returns what action to perform when the editor loses focus during renaming.
-See the "defaultRenameAction" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListView::doAutoScroll () [protected slot]
-
                                        
-This slot handles auto-scrolling when the mouse button is pressed
-and the mouse is outside the widget.
-
-
                                        void TQListView::doubleClicked ( TQListViewItem *, const TQPoint &, int ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted whenever an item is double-clicked. It's
-emitted on the second button press, not the second button release.
-The arguments are the relevant TQListViewItem (may be 0), the point
-in global coordinates and the relevant column (or -1 if the click
-was outside the list).
-
                                         Warning: Do not delete any TQListViewItem objects in slots
-connected to this signal.
-
-
                                        void TQListView::doubleClicked ( TQListViewItem * item ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-(use doubleClicked( TQListViewItem *, const TQPoint&, int ))
-
                                         This signal is emitted whenever an item is double-clicked. It's
-emitted on the second button press, not the second button release.
-item is the list view item on which the user did the
-double-click.
-
-
                                        TQDragObject * TQListView::dragObject () [virtual protected]
-
                                        
-If the user presses the mouse on an item and starts moving the
-mouse, and the item allow dragging (see
-TQListViewItem::setDragEnabled()), this function is called to get a
-drag object and a drag is started unless dragObject() returns 0.
-
                                         By default this function returns 0. You should reimplement it and
-create a TQDragObject depending on the selected items.
-
-
                                        void TQListView::drawContentsOffset ( TQPainter * p, int ox, int oy, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch ) [virtual protected]
-
                                        
-Calls TQListViewItem::paintCell() and
-TQListViewItem::paintBranches() as necessary for all list view
-items that require repainting in the cw pixels wide and ch
-pixels high bounding rectangle starting at position cx, cy
-with offset ox, oy. Uses the painter p.
-
-
                                        Reimplemented from TQScrollView.
-
                                        void TQListView::dropped ( TQDropEvent * e ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted, when a drop event occurred on the
-viewport (not onto an item).
-
                                         e provides all the information about the drop.
-
-
                                        void TQListView::ensureItemVisible ( const TQListViewItem * i )
-
                                        
-Ensures that item i is visible, scrolling the list view
-vertically if necessary and opening (expanding) any parent items
-if this is required to show the item.
-
                                         
                                        See also itemRect() and TQScrollView::ensureVisible().
-
-
                                        bool TQListView::eventFilter ( TQObject * o, TQEvent * e ) [virtual]
-
                                        
-Redirects the event e relating to object o, for the viewport
-to mousePressEvent(), keyPressEvent() and friends.
-
-
                                        Reimplemented from TQScrollView.
-
                                        void TQListView::expanded ( TQListViewItem * item ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted when item has been expanded, i.e. when
-the children of item are shown.
-
                                         
                                        See also setOpen() and collapsed().
-
-
                                        TQListViewItem * TQListView::findItem ( const TQString & text, int column, ComparisonFlags compare = ExactMatch | CaseSensitive ) const
-
                                        
-Finds the first list view item in column column, that matches
-text and returns the item, or returns 0 of no such item could
-be found.
-The search starts from the current item if the current item exists,
-otherwise it starts from the first list view item. After reaching
-the last item the search continues from the first item.
-Pass OR-ed together TQt::StringComparisonMode values
-in the compare flag, to control how the matching is performed.
-The default comparison mode is case-sensitive, exact match.
-
-
                                        TQListViewItem * TQListView::firstChild () const
-
                                        
-Returns the first item in this TQListView. Returns 0 if there is no
-first item.
-
                                         A list view's items can be traversed using firstChild()
-and nextSibling() or using a TQListViewItemIterator.
-
                                         
                                        See also itemAt(), TQListViewItem::itemBelow(), and TQListViewItem::itemAbove().
-
-
                                        Examples: addressbook/centralwidget.cpp and listviews/listviews.cpp.
-
                                        TQHeader * TQListView::header () const
-
                                        
-Returns the TQHeader object that manages this list view's columns.
-Please don't modify the header behind the list view's back.
-
                                         You may safely call TQHeader::setClickEnabled(),
-TQHeader::setResizeEnabled(), TQHeader::setMovingEnabled(),
-TQHeader::hide() and all the const TQHeader functions.
-
-
                                        Examples: listviews/listviews.cpp and qdir/qdir.cpp.
-
                                        void TQListView::hideColumn ( int column )
-
                                        
-Hides the column specified at column. This is a convenience
-function that calls setColumnWidth( column, 0 ).
-
                                         Note: The user may still be able to resize the hidden column using
-the header handles. To prevent this, call setResizeEnabled(FALSE,
-column) on the list views header.
-
                                         
                                        See also setColumnWidth().
-
-
                                        void TQListView::insertItem ( TQListViewItem * i ) [virtual]
-
                                        
-Inserts item i into the list view as a top-level item. You do
-not need to call this unless you've called takeItem(i) or
-TQListViewItem::takeItem(i) and need to reinsert i elsewhere.
-
                                         
                                        See also TQListViewItem::takeItem() and takeItem().
-
-
                                        void TQListView::invertSelection () [virtual slot]
-
                                        
-Inverts the selection. Only works in Multi and Extended
-selection modes.
-
-
                                        bool TQListView::isMultiSelection () const
-
                                        Returns TRUE if the list view is in multi-selection or extended-selection mode; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "multiSelection" property for details.
-
                                        bool TQListView::isOpen ( const TQListViewItem * item ) const
-
                                        
-Identical to item->isOpen(). Provided for completeness.
-
                                         
                                        See also setOpen().
-
-
                                        bool TQListView::isRenaming () const
-
                                        
-Returns TRUE if an item is being renamed; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                        bool TQListView::isSelected ( const TQListViewItem * i ) const
-
                                        
-Returns TRUE if the list view item i is selected; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                                         
                                        See also TQListViewItem::isSelected().
-
-
                                        TQListViewItem * TQListView::itemAt ( const TQPoint & viewPos ) const
-
                                        
-Returns the list view item at viewPos. Note that viewPos is
-in the viewport()'s coordinate system, not in the list view's own,
-much larger, coordinate system.
-
                                         itemAt() returns 0 if there is no such item.
-
                                         Note that you also get the pointer to the item if viewPos
-points to the root decoration (see setRootIsDecorated()) of the
-item. To check whether or not viewPos is on the root decoration
-of the item, you can do something like this:
-
                                         
                                        -    TQListViewItem *i = itemAt( p );
-    if ( i ) {
-        if ( p.x() > header()->sectionPos( header()->mapToIndex( 0 ) ) +
-                treeStepSize() * ( i->depth() + ( rootIsDecorated() ? 1 : 0) ) + itemMargin() ||
-                p.x() < header()->sectionPos( header()->mapToIndex( 0 ) ) ) {
-            ; // p is not on root decoration
-        else
-            ; // p is on the root decoration
-    }
-    
                                        
- 
-
                                         This might be interesting if you use this function to find out
-where the user clicked and if you want to start a drag (which you
-do not want to do if the user clicked onto the root decoration of
-an item).
-
                                         
                                        See also itemPos(), itemRect(), and viewportToContents().
-
-
                                        int TQListView::itemMargin () const
-
                                        Returns the advisory item margin that list items may use.
-See the "itemMargin" property for details.
-
                                        int TQListView::itemPos ( const TQListViewItem * item )
-
                                        
-Returns the y-coordinate of item in the list view's coordinate
-system. This function is normally much slower than itemAt() but it
-works for all items, whereas itemAt() normally works only for
-items on the screen.
-
                                         This is a thin wrapper around TQListViewItem::itemPos().
-
                                         
                                        See also itemAt() and itemRect().
-
-
                                        TQRect TQListView::itemRect ( const TQListViewItem * i ) const
-
                                        
-Returns the rectangle on the screen that item i occupies in
-viewport()'s coordinates, or an invalid rectangle if i is 0 or
-is not currently visible.
-
                                         The rectangle returned does not include any children of the
-rectangle (i.e. it uses TQListViewItem::height(), rather than
-TQListViewItem::totalHeight()). If you want the rectangle to
-include children you can use something like this:
-
                                         
                                        -    TQRect r( listView->itemRect( item ) );
-    r.setHeight( (TQCOORD)(TQMIN( item->totalHeight(),
-                                listView->viewport->height() - r.y() ) ) )
-    
                                        
- 
-
                                         Note the way it avoids too-high rectangles. totalHeight() can be
-much larger than the window system's coordinate system allows.
-
                                         itemRect() is comparatively slow. It's best to call it only for
-items that are probably on-screen.
-
-
                                        void TQListView::itemRenamed ( TQListViewItem * item, int col, const TQString & text ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted when item has been renamed to text,
-e.g. by in in-place renaming, in column col.
-
                                         
                                        See also TQListViewItem::setRenameEnabled().
-
-
                                        void TQListView::itemRenamed ( TQListViewItem * item, int col ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         This signal is emitted when item has been renamed, e.g. by
-in-place renaming, in column col.
-
                                         
                                        See also TQListViewItem::setRenameEnabled().
-
-
                                        TQListViewItem * TQListView::lastItem () const
-
                                        
-Returns the last item in the list view tree. Returns 0 if there
-are no items in the TQListView.
-
                                         This function is slow because it traverses the entire tree to find
-the last item.
-
-
                                        void TQListView::mouseButtonClicked ( int button, TQListViewItem * item, const TQPoint & pos, int c ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted whenever the user clicks (mouse pressed and mouse released) in the list view at position pos. button
-is the mouse button that the user pressed, item is the clicked
-list view item or 0 if the user didn't click on an item. If item is not 0, c is the list view column into which the user
-pressed; if item is 0 c's value is undefined.
-
                                         Warning: Do not delete any TQListViewItem objects in slots
-connected to this signal.
-
-
                                        void TQListView::mouseButtonPressed ( int button, TQListViewItem * item, const TQPoint & pos, int c ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted whenever the user pressed the mouse button
-in the list view at position pos. button is the mouse button
-which the user pressed, item is the pressed list view item or 0
-if the user didn't press on an item. If item is not 0, c is
-the list view column into which the user pressed; if item is 0
-c's value is undefined.
-
                                         Warning: Do not delete any TQListViewItem objects in slots
-connected to this signal.
-
-
                                        void TQListView::onItem ( TQListViewItem * i ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted when the user moves the mouse cursor onto
-item i, similar to the TQWidget::enterEvent() function.
-
-
                                        void TQListView::onViewport () [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted when the user moves the mouse cursor from
-an item to an empty part of the list view.
-
-
                                        void TQListView::paintEmptyArea ( TQPainter * p, const TQRect & rect ) [virtual protected]
-
                                        
-Paints rect so that it looks like empty background using
-painter p. rect is in widget coordinates, ready to be fed to
-p.
-
                                         The default function fills rect with the
-viewport()->backgroundBrush().
-
-
                                        void TQListView::pressed ( TQListViewItem * item ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted whenever the user presses the mouse button
-in a list view. item is the list view item on which the user
-pressed the mouse button, or 0 if the user didn't press the mouse
-on an item.
-
                                         Warning: Do not delete any TQListViewItem objects in slots
-connected to this signal.
-
-
                                        void TQListView::pressed ( TQListViewItem * item, const TQPoint & pnt, int c ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         This signal is emitted whenever the user presses the mouse button
-in a list view. item is the list view item on which the user
-pressed the mouse button, or 0 if the user didn't press the mouse
-on an item. pnt is the position of the mouse cursor in global
-coordinates, and c is the column where the mouse cursor was
-when the user pressed the mouse button.
-
                                         Warning: Do not delete any TQListViewItem objects in slots
-connected to this signal.
-
-
                                        void TQListView::removeColumn ( int index ) [virtual]
-
                                        
-Removes the column at position index.
-
                                         If no columns remain after the column is removed, the
-list view will be cleared.
-
                                         
                                        See also clear().
-
-
                                        void TQListView::removeItem ( TQListViewItem * item ) [virtual]
-
                                        
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         This function has been renamed takeItem().
-
-
                                        void TQListView::repaintItem ( const TQListViewItem * item ) const
-
                                        
-Repaints item on the screen if item is currently visible.
-Takes care to avoid multiple repaints.
-
-
                                        void TQListView::resizeEvent ( TQResizeEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                                        
-Ensures that the header is correctly sized and positioned when the
-resize event e occurs.
-
-
                                        ResizeMode TQListView::resizeMode () const
-
                                        Returns TRUE if all, none or the only the last column should be resized; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "resizeMode" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListView::returnPressed ( TQListViewItem * ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted when Enter or Return is pressed. The
-argument is the currentItem().
-
-
                                        void TQListView::rightButtonClicked ( TQListViewItem *, const TQPoint &, int ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted when the right button is clicked (i.e. when
-it's released). The arguments are the relevant TQListViewItem (may
-be 0), the point in global coordinates and the relevant column (or
--1 if the click was outside the list).
-
-
                                        void TQListView::rightButtonPressed ( TQListViewItem *, const TQPoint &, int ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted when the right button is pressed. The
-arguments are the relevant TQListViewItem (may be 0), the point in
-global coordinates and the relevant column (or -1 if the click was
-outside the list).
-
-
                                        bool TQListView::rootIsDecorated () const
-
                                        Returns TRUE if the list view shows open/close signs on root items; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "rootIsDecorated" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListView::selectAll ( bool select ) [virtual slot]
-
                                        
-If select is TRUE, all the items get selected; otherwise all
-the items get unselected. This only works in the selection modes Multi and Extended. In Single and NoSelection mode the
-selection of the current item is just set to select.
-
-
                                        TQListViewItem * TQListView::selectedItem () const
-
                                        
-Returns the selected item if the list view is in Single
-selection mode and an item is selected.
-
                                         If no items are selected or the list view is not in Single
-selection mode this function returns 0.
-
                                         
                                        See also setSelected() and multiSelection.
-
-
                                        void TQListView::selectionChanged () [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted whenever the set of selected items has
-changed (normally before the screen update). It is available in
-Single, Multi, and Extended selection modes, but is most
-useful in Multi selection mode.
-
                                         Warning: Do not delete any TQListViewItem objects in slots
-connected to this signal.
-
                                         
                                        See also setSelected() and TQListViewItem::setSelected().
-
-
                                        Example: listviews/listviews.cpp.
-
                                        void TQListView::selectionChanged ( TQListViewItem * ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         This signal is emitted whenever the selected item has changed in
-Single selection mode (normally after the screen update). The
-argument is the newly selected item. If the selection is cleared
-(when, for example, the user clicks in the unused area of the list
-view) then this signal will not be emitted.
-
                                         In Multi selection mode, use the no argument overload of this
-signal.
-
                                         Warning: Do not delete any TQListViewItem objects in slots
-connected to this signal.
-
                                         
                                        See also setSelected(), TQListViewItem::setSelected(), and currentChanged().
-
-
                                        SelectionMode TQListView::selectionMode () const
-
                                        Returns the list view's selection mode.
-See the "selectionMode" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListView::setAllColumnsShowFocus ( bool ) [virtual]
-
                                        Sets whether items should show keyboard focus using all columns.
-See the "allColumnsShowFocus" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListView::setColumnAlignment ( int column, int align ) [virtual]
-
                                        
-Sets column column's alignment to align. The alignment is
-ultimately passed to TQListViewItem::paintCell() for each item in
-the list view. For horizontally aligned text with TQt::AlignLeft or
-TQt::AlignHCenter the ellipsis (...) will be to the right, for
-TQt::AlignRight the ellipsis will be to the left.
-
                                         
                                        See also TQt::AlignmentFlags.
-
-
                                        Example: listviews/listviews.cpp.
-
                                        void TQListView::setColumnText ( int column, const TQString & label ) [virtual]
-
                                        
-Sets the heading of column column to label.
-
                                         
                                        See also columnText().
-
-
                                        void TQListView::setColumnText ( int column, const TQIconSet & iconset, const TQString & label ) [virtual]
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         Sets the heading of column column to iconset and label.
-
                                         
                                        See also columnText().
-
-
                                        void TQListView::setColumnWidth ( int column, int w ) [virtual]
-
                                        
-Sets the width of column column to w pixels. Note that if
-the column has a WidthMode other than Manual, this width
-setting may be subsequently overridden.
-
                                         
                                        See also columnWidth().
-
-
                                        void TQListView::setColumnWidthMode ( int c, WidthMode mode ) [virtual]
-
                                        
-Sets column c's width mode to mode. The default depends on
-the original width argument to addColumn().
-
                                         
                                        See also TQListViewItem::width().
-
-
                                        void TQListView::setCurrentItem ( TQListViewItem * i ) [virtual]
-
                                        
-Sets item i to be the current item and repaints appropriately
-(i.e. highlights the item). The current item is used for keyboard
-navigation and focus indication; it is independent of any selected
-items, although a selected item can also be the current item.
-
                                         This function does not set the selection anchor. Use
-setSelectionAnchor() instead.
-
                                         
                                        See also currentItem() and setSelected().
-
-
                                        Example: listviews/listviews.cpp.
-
                                        void TQListView::setDefaultRenameAction ( RenameAction a ) [virtual]
-
                                        Sets what action to perform when the editor loses focus during renaming to a.
-See the "defaultRenameAction" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListView::setItemMargin ( int ) [virtual]
-
                                        Sets the advisory item margin that list items may use.
-See the "itemMargin" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListView::setMultiSelection ( bool enable ) [virtual]
-
                                        Sets whether the list view is in multi-selection or extended-selection mode to enable.
-See the "multiSelection" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListView::setOpen ( TQListViewItem * item, bool open ) [virtual]
-
                                        
-Sets item to be open if open is TRUE and item is
-expandable, and to be closed if open is FALSE. Repaints
-accordingly.
-
                                         
                                        See also TQListViewItem::setOpen() and TQListViewItem::setExpandable().
-
-
                                        void TQListView::setResizeMode ( ResizeMode m ) [virtual]
-
                                        Sets whether all, none or the only the last column should be resized to m.
-See the "resizeMode" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListView::setRootIsDecorated ( bool ) [virtual]
-
                                        Sets whether the list view shows open/close signs on root items.
-See the "rootIsDecorated" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListView::setSelected ( TQListViewItem * item, bool selected ) [virtual]
-
                                        
-If selected is TRUE the item is selected; otherwise it is
-unselected.
-
                                         If the list view is in Single selection mode and selected is
-TRUE, the currently selected item is unselected and item is
-made current. Unlike TQListViewItem::setSelected(), this function
-updates the list view as necessary and emits the
-selectionChanged() signals.
-
                                         
                                        See also isSelected(), multiSelection, multiSelection, setCurrentItem(), and setSelectionAnchor().
-
-
                                        Example: listviews/listviews.cpp.
-
                                        void TQListView::setSelectionAnchor ( TQListViewItem * item )
-
                                        
-Sets the selection anchor to item, if item is selectable.
-
                                         The selection anchor is the item that remains selected when
-Shift-selecting with either mouse or keyboard in Extended
-selection mode.
-
                                         
                                        See also setSelected().
-
-
                                        void TQListView::setSelectionMode ( SelectionMode mode )
-
                                        Sets the list view's selection mode to mode.
-See the "selectionMode" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListView::setShowSortIndicator ( bool show ) [virtual]
-
                                        Sets whether the list view header should display a sort indicator to show.
-See the "showSortIndicator" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListView::setShowToolTips ( bool b ) [virtual]
-
                                        Sets whether this list view should show tooltips for truncated column texts to b.
-See the "showToolTips" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListView::setSortColumn ( int column )
-
                                        
-Sets the sorting column for the list view.
-
                                         If column is -1, sorting is disabled and the user cannot sort
-columns by clicking on the column headers. If column is larger
-than the number of columns the user must click on a column header
-to sort the list view.
-
                                         
                                        See also setSorting().
-
-
                                        void TQListView::setSortOrder ( SortOrder order )
-
                                        
-Sets the sort order for the items in the list view to order.
-
                                         
                                        See also setSorting().
-
-
                                        void TQListView::setSorting ( int column, bool ascending = TRUE ) [virtual]
-
                                        
-Sets the list view to be sorted by column column in ascending
-order if ascending is TRUE or descending order if it is FALSE.
-
                                         If column is -1, sorting is disabled and the user cannot sort
-columns by clicking on the column headers. If column is larger
-than the number of columns the user must click on a column
-header to sort the list view.
-
-
                                        void TQListView::setTreeStepSize ( int ) [virtual]
-
                                        Sets the number of pixels a child is offset from its parent.
-See the "treeStepSize" property for details.
-
                                        bool TQListView::showSortIndicator () const
-
                                        Returns TRUE if the list view header should display a sort indicator; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "showSortIndicator" property for details.
-
                                        bool TQListView::showToolTips () const
-
                                        Returns TRUE if this list view should show tooltips for truncated column texts; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "showToolTips" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListView::sort () [virtual]
-
                                        
-Sorts the list view using the last sorting configuration (sort
-column and ascending/descending).
-
-
                                        int TQListView::sortColumn () const
-
                                        
-Returns the column by which the list view is sorted, or -1 if
-sorting is disabled.
-
                                         
                                        See also sortOrder().
-
-
                                        SortOrder TQListView::sortOrder () const
-
                                        
-Returns the sorting order of the list view items.
-
                                         
                                        See also sortColumn().
-
-
                                        void TQListView::spacePressed ( TQListViewItem * ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted when Space is pressed. The argument is
-the currentItem().
-
-
                                        void TQListView::startDrag () [virtual protected]
-
                                        
-Starts a drag.
-
-
                                        void TQListView::takeItem ( TQListViewItem * i ) [virtual]
-
                                        
-Removes item i from the list view; i must be a top-level
-item. The warnings regarding TQListViewItem::takeItem() apply to
-this function, too.
-
                                         
                                        See also insertItem().
-
-
                                        int TQListView::treeStepSize () const
-
                                        Returns the number of pixels a child is offset from its parent.
-See the "treeStepSize" property for details.
-
                                        void TQListView::triggerUpdate () [slot]
-
                                        
-Triggers a size, geometry and content update during the next
-iteration of the event loop. Ensures that there'll be just one
-update to avoid flicker.
-
-
                                        void TQListView::updateContents () [protected slot]
-
                                        
-Updates the sizes of the viewport, header, scroll bars and so on.
-
                                         Warning: Don't call this directly; call triggerUpdate() instead.
-
-
                                        Property Documentation
                                        
-
                                        bool allColumnsShowFocus
                                        
-
                                        This property holds whether items should show keyboard focus using all columns.
-
                                        If this property is TRUE all columns will show focus and selection
-states, otherwise only column 0 will show focus.
-
                                         The default is FALSE.
-
                                         Setting this to TRUE if it's not necessary may cause noticeable
-flicker.
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setAllColumnsShowFocus() and get this property's value with allColumnsShowFocus().
-
                                        int childCount
                                        
-
                                        This property holds the number of parentless (top-level) TQListViewItem objects in this TQListView.
-
                                        Holds the current number of parentless (top-level) TQListViewItem
-objects in this TQListView.
-
                                         
                                        See also TQListViewItem::childCount().
-
-
                                        Get this property's value with childCount().
-
                                        int columns
                                        
-
                                        This property holds the number of columns in this list view.
-
                                        Get this property's value with columns().
-
                                        See also addColumn() and removeColumn().
-
-
                                        RenameAction defaultRenameAction
                                        
-
                                        This property holds what action to perform when the editor loses focus during renaming.
-
                                        If this property is Accept, and the user renames an item and
-the editor loses focus (without the user pressing Enter), the
-item will still be renamed. If the property's value is Reject,
-the item will not be renamed unless the user presses Enter. The
-default is Reject.
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setDefaultRenameAction() and get this property's value with defaultRenameAction().
-
                                        int itemMargin
                                        
-
                                        This property holds the advisory item margin that list items may use.
-
                                        The item margin defaults to one pixel and is the margin between
-the item's edges and the area where it draws its contents.
-TQListViewItem::paintFocus() draws in the margin.
-
                                         
                                        See also TQListViewItem::paintCell().
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setItemMargin() and get this property's value with itemMargin().
-
                                        bool multiSelection
                                         This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         
                                        This property holds whether the list view is in multi-selection or extended-selection mode.
-
                                        If you enable multi-selection, Multi, mode, it is possible to
-specify whether or not this mode should be extended. Extended
-means that the user can select multiple items only when pressing
-the Shift or Ctrl key at the same time.
-
                                         The default selection mode is Single.
-
                                         
                                        See also selectionMode.
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setMultiSelection() and get this property's value with isMultiSelection().
-
                                        ResizeMode resizeMode
                                        
-
                                        This property holds whether all, none or the only the last column should be resized.
-
                                        Specifies whether all, none or only the last column should be
-resized to fit the full width of the list view. The values for this
-property can be one of: NoColumn (the default), AllColumns
-or LastColumn.
-
                                         Warning: Setting the resize mode should be done after all necessary
-columns have been added to the list view, otherwise the behavior is
-undefined.
-
                                         
                                        See also TQHeader and header().
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setResizeMode() and get this property's value with resizeMode().
-
                                        bool rootIsDecorated
                                        
-
                                        This property holds whether the list view shows open/close signs on root items.
-
                                        Open/close signs are small + or - symbols in windows
-style, or arrows in Motif style. The default is FALSE.
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setRootIsDecorated() and get this property's value with rootIsDecorated().
-
                                        SelectionMode selectionMode
                                        
-
                                        This property holds the list view's selection mode.
-
                                        The mode can be Single (the default), Extended, Multi or
-NoSelection.
-
                                         
                                        See also multiSelection.
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setSelectionMode() and get this property's value with selectionMode().
-
                                        bool showSortIndicator
                                        
-
                                        This property holds whether the list view header should display a sort indicator.
-
                                        If this property is TRUE, an arrow is drawn in the header of the
-list view to indicate the sort order of the list view contents.
-The arrow will be drawn in the correct column and will point up or
-down, depending on the current sort direction. The default is
-FALSE (don't show an indicator).
-
                                         
                                        See also TQHeader::setSortIndicator().
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setShowSortIndicator() and get this property's value with showSortIndicator().
-
                                        bool showToolTips
                                        
-
                                        This property holds whether this list view should show tooltips for truncated column texts.
-
                                        The default is TRUE.
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setShowToolTips() and get this property's value with showToolTips().
-
                                        int treeStepSize
                                        
-
                                        This property holds the number of pixels a child is offset from its parent.
-
                                        The default is 20 pixels.
-
                                         Of course, this property is only meaningful for hierarchical list
-views.
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setTreeStepSize() and get this property's value with treeStepSize().
-
-
                                        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                        
-
-
                                        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                        TQt 3.3.8
                                        
-
                                        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qlistviewitem-members.html b/doc/html/qlistviewitem-members.html
index 200dd12ef..2ddc2b436 100644
--- a/doc/html/qlistviewitem-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qlistviewitem-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qlistviewitem.html b/doc/html/qlistviewitem.html
index ca3eec1a1..0731f840a 100644
--- a/doc/html/qlistviewitem.html
+++ b/doc/html/qlistviewitem.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                        The TQListViewItem class implements a list view item.
 More...
-
                                        #include <qlistview.h>
-
                                        Inherits TQt.
+
                                        #include <ntqlistview.h>
+
                                        Inherits TQt.
 
                                        Inherited by TQCheckListItem.
 
                                        List of all member functions.
 
                                        Public Members
                                        
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 The TQListViewItem class implements a list view item.
 
                                         
 
                                         A list view item is a multi-column object capable of displaying
-itself in a TQListView.
+itself in a TQListView.
 
                                         The easiest way to use TQListViewItem is to construct one with a
 few constant strings, and either a TQListView or another
 TQListViewItem as parent.
@@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ TQListViewItem as parent.
  
 We've discarded the pointers to the items since we can still access
 them via their parent listView. By default, TQListView sorts its
-items; this can be switched off with TQListView::setSorting(-1).
+items; this can be switched off with TQListView::setSorting(-1).
 
                                         The parent must be another TQListViewItem or a TQListView. If the
 parent is a TQListView, the item becomes a top-level item within
 that TQListView. If the parent is another TQListViewItem, the item
@@ -142,12 +142,12 @@ becomes a child of that list view item.
 setSelectable(), setSelected(), setOpen() and setExpandable().
 You'll also be able to change its height using setHeight(), and
 traverse its sub-items. You don't have to keep the pointer since
-you can get a pointer to any TQListViewItem in a TQListView using
-TQListView::selectedItem(), TQListView::currentItem(),
-TQListView::firstChild(), TQListView::lastItem() and
-TQListView::findItem().
+you can get a pointer to any TQListViewItem in a TQListView using
+TQListView::selectedItem(), TQListView::currentItem(),
+TQListView::firstChild(), TQListView::lastItem() and
+TQListView::findItem().
 
                                         If you call delete on a list view item, it will be deleted as
-expected, and as usual for TQObjects, if it has any child items
+expected, and as usual for TQObjects, if it has any child items
 (to any depth), all these will be deleted too.
 
                                         TQCheckListItems are list view items that have a checkbox or
 radio button and can be used in place of plain TQListViewItems.
@@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ particular item, initialize the iterator with the item:
  
 
                                         Note that the order of the children will change when the sorting
 order changes and is undefined if the items are not visible. You
-can, however, call enforceSortOrder() at any time; TQListView will
+can, however, call enforceSortOrder() at any time; TQListView will
 always call it before it needs to show an item.
 
                                         Many programs will need to reimplement TQListViewItem. The most
 commonly reimplemented functions are:
@@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ this on the fly.
  key()
 Used for sorting. The default key() simply calls
 text(), but judicious use of key() can give you fine
-control over sorting; for example, TQFileDialog
+control over sorting; for example, TQFileDialog
 reimplements key() to sort by date.
  setup()
 Called before showing the item and whenever the list
@@ -209,58 +209,58 @@ technique to start up tquickly: The files and subdirectories in a
 directory aren't inserted into the tree until they're actually
 needed.
 
                                         
                                        List View Items
                                         
-
                                         
                                        See also TQCheckListItem, TQListView, and Advanced Widgets.
+
                                         
                                        See also TQCheckListItem, TQListView, and Advanced Widgets.
 
 
                                        Member Function Documentation
                                        
-
                                        TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem ( TQListView * parent )
+
                                        TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem ( TQListView * parent )
 
                                        
-Constructs a new top-level list view item in the TQListView parent.
+Constructs a new top-level list view item in the TQListView parent.
 
 
                                        TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem ( TQListViewItem * parent )
 
                                        
 Constructs a new list view item that is a child of parent and
 first in the parent's list of children.
 
-
                                        TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem ( TQListView * parent, TQListViewItem * after )
+
                                        TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem ( TQListView * parent, TQListViewItem * after )
 
                                        
 Constructs an empty list view item that is a child of parent
 and is after item after in the parent's list of children. Since
-parent is a TQListView the item will be a top-level item.
+parent is a TQListView the item will be a top-level item.
 
 
                                        TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem ( TQListViewItem * parent, TQListViewItem * after )
 
                                        
 Constructs an empty list view item that is a child of parent
 and is after item after in the parent's list of children.
 
-
                                        TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem ( TQListView * parent, TQString label1, TQString label2 = TQString::null, TQString label3 = TQString::null, TQString label4 = TQString::null, TQString label5 = TQString::null, TQString label6 = TQString::null, TQString label7 = TQString::null, TQString label8 = TQString::null )
+
                                        TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem ( TQListView * parent, TQString label1, TQString label2 = TQString::null, TQString label3 = TQString::null, TQString label4 = TQString::null, TQString label5 = TQString::null, TQString label6 = TQString::null, TQString label7 = TQString::null, TQString label8 = TQString::null )
 
                                        
-Constructs a new top-level list view item in the TQListView parent, with up to eight constant strings, label1, label2, label3, label4, label5, label6, label7 and label8
+Constructs a new top-level list view item in the TQListView parent, with up to eight constant strings, label1, label2, label3, label4, label5, label6, label7 and label8
 defining its columns' contents.
 
                                         
                                        See also setText().
 
-
                                        TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem ( TQListViewItem * parent, TQString label1, TQString label2 = TQString::null, TQString label3 = TQString::null, TQString label4 = TQString::null, TQString label5 = TQString::null, TQString label6 = TQString::null, TQString label7 = TQString::null, TQString label8 = TQString::null )
+
                                        TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem ( TQListViewItem * parent, TQString label1, TQString label2 = TQString::null, TQString label3 = TQString::null, TQString label4 = TQString::null, TQString label5 = TQString::null, TQString label6 = TQString::null, TQString label7 = TQString::null, TQString label8 = TQString::null )
 
                                        
 Constructs a new list view item as a child of the TQListViewItem parent with up to eight constant strings, label1, label2, label3, label4, label5, label6, label7 and label8
 as columns' contents.
 
                                         
                                        See also setText().
 
-
                                        TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem ( TQListView * parent, TQListViewItem * after, TQString label1, TQString label2 = TQString::null, TQString label3 = TQString::null, TQString label4 = TQString::null, TQString label5 = TQString::null, TQString label6 = TQString::null, TQString label7 = TQString::null, TQString label8 = TQString::null )
+
                                        TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem ( TQListView * parent, TQListViewItem * after, TQString label1, TQString label2 = TQString::null, TQString label3 = TQString::null, TQString label4 = TQString::null, TQString label5 = TQString::null, TQString label6 = TQString::null, TQString label7 = TQString::null, TQString label8 = TQString::null )
 
                                        
-Constructs a new list view item in the TQListView parent that is
+Constructs a new list view item in the TQListView parent that is
 included after item after and that has up to eight column
 texts, label1, label2, label3, label4, label5, label6, label7 andlabel8.
 
                                         Note that the order is changed according to TQListViewItem::key()
 unless the list view's sorting is disabled using
-TQListView::setSorting(-1).
+TQListView::setSorting(-1).
 
                                         
                                        See also setText().
 
-
                                        TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem ( TQListViewItem * parent, TQListViewItem * after, TQString label1, TQString label2 = TQString::null, TQString label3 = TQString::null, TQString label4 = TQString::null, TQString label5 = TQString::null, TQString label6 = TQString::null, TQString label7 = TQString::null, TQString label8 = TQString::null )
+
                                        TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem ( TQListViewItem * parent, TQListViewItem * after, TQString label1, TQString label2 = TQString::null, TQString label3 = TQString::null, TQString label4 = TQString::null, TQString label5 = TQString::null, TQString label6 = TQString::null, TQString label7 = TQString::null, TQString label8 = TQString::null )
 
                                        
 Constructs a new list view item as a child of the TQListViewItem parent. It is inserted after item after and may contain up to
 eight strings, label1, label2, label3, label4, label5, label6, label7 and label8 as column entries.
 
                                         Note that the order is changed according to TQListViewItem::key()
 unless the list view's sorting is disabled using
-TQListView::setSorting(-1).
+TQListView::setSorting(-1).
 
                                         
                                        See also setText().
 
 
                                        TQListViewItem::~TQListViewItem () [virtual]
@@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ on this item or presses Space on it.
 
                                         
                                        See also activatedPos().
 
 
                                        Reimplemented in TQCheckListItem.
-
                                        bool TQListViewItem::activatedPos ( TQPoint & pos ) [protected]
+
                                        bool TQListViewItem::activatedPos ( TQPoint & pos ) [protected]
 
                                        
 When called from a reimplementation of activate(), this function
 gives information on how the item was activated. Otherwise the
@@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ Compares this list view item to i using the column col in 
 they are equal and > 0 if this item is greater than i.
 
                                         This function is used for sorting.
 
                                         The default implementation compares the item keys (key()) using
-TQString::localeAwareCompare(). A reimplementation can use
+TQString::localeAwareCompare(). A reimplementation can use
 different values and a different comparison function. Here is a
 reimplementation that uses plain Unicode comparison:
 
                                         
                                        @@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ reimplementation that uses plain Unicode comparison:
  
 We don't recommend using ascending so your code can safely
 ignore it.
-
                                         
                                        See also key(), TQString::localeAwareCompare(), and TQString::compare().
+
                                         
                                        See also key(), TQString::localeAwareCompare(), and TQString::compare().
 
 
                                        int TQListViewItem::depth () const
 
                                        
@@ -374,7 +374,7 @@ is already sorted.
 Returns the first (top) child of this item, or 0 if this item has
 no children.
 
                                         Note that the children are not guaranteed to be sorted properly.
-TQListView and TQListViewItem try to postpone or avoid sorting to
+TQListView and TQListViewItem try to postpone or avoid sorting to
 the greatest degree possible, in order to keep the user interface
 snappy.
 
                                         
                                        See also nextSibling() and sortChildItems().
@@ -428,7 +428,7 @@ otherwise returns FALSE
 
 
 
                                         Returns TRUE if this item is selected; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                         
                                        See also setSelected(), TQListView::setSelected(), and TQListView::selectionChanged().
+
                                         
                                        See also setSelected(), TQListView::setSelected(), and TQListView::selectionChanged().
 
 
                                        Example: listviews/listviews.cpp.
 
                                        bool TQListViewItem::isVisible () const
@@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ if there is no item immediately above this item.
 that this item is visible, or can be made visible by scrolling).
 
                                         This function might be relatively slow because of the tree
 traversions needed to find the correct item.
-
                                         
                                        See also itemBelow() and TQListView::itemRect().
+
                                         
                                        See also itemBelow() and TQListView::itemRect().
 
 
                                        TQListViewItem * TQListViewItem::itemBelow ()
 
                                        
@@ -459,18 +459,18 @@ returns 0. Returns 0 if there is no item immediately below this
 item.
 
                                         This function assumes that all parents of this item are open (i.e.
 that this item is visible or can be made visible by scrolling).
-
                                         
                                        See also itemAbove() and TQListView::itemRect().
+
                                         
                                        See also itemAbove() and TQListView::itemRect().
 
 
                                        Example: dirview/dirview.cpp.
 
                                        int TQListViewItem::itemPos () const
 
                                        
 Returns the y coordinate of this item in the list view's
 coordinate system. This function is normally much slower than
-TQListView::itemAt(), but it works for all items whereas
+TQListView::itemAt(), but it works for all items whereas
 TQListView::itemAt() normally only works for items on the screen.
-
                                         
                                        See also TQListView::itemAt(), TQListView::itemRect(), and TQListView::itemPos().
+
                                         
                                        See also TQListView::itemAt(), TQListView::itemRect(), and TQListView::itemPos().
 
-
                                        TQString TQListViewItem::key ( int column, bool ascending ) const [virtual]
+
                                        TQString TQListViewItem::key ( int column, bool ascending ) const [virtual]
 
                                        
 
 
                                         Returns a key that can be used for sorting by column column.
@@ -481,7 +481,7 @@ key, although this is not recommended.
 etc., it is more efficient to reimplement compare().
 
                                         
                                        See also compare() and sortChildItems().
 
-
                                        TQListView * TQListViewItem::listView () const
+
                                        TQListView * TQListViewItem::listView () const
 
                                        
 Returns a pointer to the list view containing this item.
 
                                         Note that this function traverses the items to the root to find the
@@ -507,7 +507,7 @@ columns; otherwise returns FALSE.
 
                                         Returns the sibling item below this item, or 0 if there is no
 sibling item after this item.
 
                                         Note that the siblings are not guaranteed to be sorted properly.
-TQListView and TQListViewItem try to postpone or avoid sorting to
+TQListView and TQListViewItem try to postpone or avoid sorting to
 the greatest degree possible, in order to keep the user interface
 snappy.
 
                                         
                                        See also firstChild() and sortChildItems().
@@ -519,7 +519,7 @@ This function is called if the user presses Enter during in-place
 renaming of the item in column col.
 
                                         
                                        See also cancelRename().
 
-
                                        void TQListViewItem::paintBranches ( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg, int w, int y, int h ) [virtual]
+
                                        void TQListViewItem::paintBranches ( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg, int w, int y, int h ) [virtual]
 
                                        
 Paints a set of branches from this item to (some of) its children.
 
                                         Painter p is set up with clipping and translation so that you
@@ -530,36 +530,36 @@ width w by height h. The top of the rectangle you own is at
 system's allowed coordinate range).
 
                                         The update rectangle is in an undefined state when this function
 is called; this function must draw on all of the pixels.
-
                                         
                                        See also paintCell() and TQListView::drawContentsOffset().
+
                                         
                                        See also paintCell() and TQListView::drawContentsOffset().
 
-
                                        void TQListViewItem::paintCell ( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg, int column, int width, int align ) [virtual]
+
                                        void TQListViewItem::paintCell ( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg, int column, int width, int align ) [virtual]
 
                                        
 This virtual function paints the contents of one column of an item
 and aligns it as described by align.
-
                                         p is a TQPainter open on the relevant paint device. p is
+
                                         p is a TQPainter open on the relevant paint device. p is
 translated so (0, 0) is the top-left pixel in the cell and width-1, height()-1 is the bottom-right pixel in the cell. The
 other properties of p (pen, brush, etc) are undefined. cg is
 the color group to use. column is the logical column number
 within the item that is to be painted; 0 is the column which may
 contain a tree.
-
                                         This function may use TQListView::itemMargin() for readability
+
                                         This function may use TQListView::itemMargin() for readability
 spacing on the left and right sides of data such as text, and
-should honor isSelected() and TQListView::allColumnsShowFocus().
+should honor isSelected() and TQListView::allColumnsShowFocus().
 
                                         If you reimplement this function, you should also reimplement
 width().
 
                                         The rectangle to be painted is in an undefined state when this
 function is called, so you must draw on all the pixels. The
 painter p has the right font on entry.
-
                                         
                                        See also paintBranches() and TQListView::drawContentsOffset().
+
                                         
                                        See also paintBranches() and TQListView::drawContentsOffset().
 
 
                                        Example: listviews/listviews.cpp.
 
                                        Reimplemented in TQCheckListItem.
-
                                        void TQListViewItem::paintFocus ( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg, const TQRect & r ) [virtual]
+
                                        void TQListViewItem::paintFocus ( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg, const TQRect & r ) [virtual]
 
                                        
 Paints a focus indicator on the rectangle r using painter p
 and colors cg.
 
                                         p is already clipped.
-
                                         
                                        See also paintCell(), paintBranches(), and TQListView::allColumnsShowFocus.
+
                                         
                                        See also paintCell(), paintBranches(), and TQListView::allColumnsShowFocus.
 
 
                                        Reimplemented in TQCheckListItem.
 
                                        TQListViewItem * TQListViewItem::parent () const
@@ -568,7 +568,7 @@ Returns the parent of this item, or 0 if this item has no parent.
 
                                         
                                        See also firstChild() and nextSibling().
 
 
                                        Examples: dirview/dirview.cpp and qutlook/centralwidget.cpp.
-
                                        const TQPixmap * TQListViewItem::pixmap ( int column ) const [virtual]
+
                                        const TQPixmap * TQListViewItem::pixmap ( int column ) const [virtual]
 
                                        
 Returns the pixmap for column, or 0 if there is no pixmap for
 column.
@@ -602,7 +602,7 @@ extensions to this class.
 
                                        void TQListViewItem::setDragEnabled ( bool allow ) [virtual]
 
                                        
 If allow is TRUE, the list view starts a drag (see
-TQListView::dragObject()) when the user presses and moves the mouse
+TQListView::dragObject()) when the user presses and moves the mouse
 on this item.
 
 
                                        void TQListViewItem::setDropEnabled ( bool allow ) [virtual]
@@ -626,7 +626,7 @@ the directory and inserts items accordingly. This strategy means
 that dirview can display the entire file system without reading
 very much at startup.
 
                                         Note that root items are not expandable by the user unless
-TQListView::setRootIsDecorated() is set to TRUE.
+TQListView::setRootIsDecorated() is set to TRUE.
 
                                         
                                        See also setSelectable().
 
 
                                        void TQListViewItem::setHeight ( int height ) [virtual protected]
@@ -656,7 +656,7 @@ of the item.
 
                                         
                                        See also height(), totalHeight(), and isOpen().
 
 
                                        Examples: checklists/checklists.cpp, dirview/dirview.cpp, dirview/main.cpp, fileiconview/mainwindow.cpp, and xml/tagreader-with-features/structureparser.cpp.
-
                                        void TQListViewItem::setPixmap ( int column, const TQPixmap & pm ) [virtual]
+
                                        void TQListViewItem::setPixmap ( int column, const TQPixmap & pm ) [virtual]
 
                                        
 Sets the pixmap in column column to pm, if pm is non-null
 and different from the current pixmap, and if column is
@@ -682,11 +682,11 @@ programmer (e.g. setSelected() respects this value).
 
 If s is TRUE this item is selected; otherwise it is deselected.
 
                                         This function does not maintain any invariants or repaint anything
--- TQListView::setSelected() does that.
+-- TQListView::setSelected() does that.
 
                                         
                                        See also height() and totalHeight().
 
 
                                        Example: addressbook/centralwidget.cpp.
-
                                        void TQListViewItem::setText ( int column, const TQString & text ) [virtual]
+
                                        void TQListViewItem::setText ( int column, const TQString & text ) [virtual]
 
                                        
 Sets the text in column column to text, if column is a
 valid column number and text is different from the existing
@@ -704,7 +704,7 @@ return this item, although you still can reach it by using e.g.
 
 
                                        void TQListViewItem::setup () [virtual]
 
                                        
-This virtual function is called before the first time TQListView
+This virtual function is called before the first time TQListView
 needs to know the height or any other graphical attribute of this
 object, and whenever the font, GUI style, or colors of the list
 view change.
@@ -725,7 +725,7 @@ configuration (sort column and direction).
 Sorts this item's children using column column. This is done in
 ascending order if ascending is TRUE and in descending order if
 ascending is FALSE.
-
                                         Asks some of the children to sort their children. (TQListView and
+
                                         Asks some of the children to sort their children. (TQListView and
 TQListViewItem ensure that all on-screen objects are properly
 sorted but may avoid or defer sorting other objects in order to be
 more responsive.)
@@ -759,9 +759,9 @@ functions that work on taken items are explicitly documented as
 such.
 
                                         
                                        See also TQListViewItem::insertItem().
 
-
                                        TQString TQListViewItem::text ( int column ) const [virtual]
+
                                        TQString TQListViewItem::text ( int column ) const [virtual]
 
                                        
-Returns the text in column column, or TQString::null if there is
+Returns the text in column column, or TQString::null if there is
 no text in that column.
 
                                         
                                        See also key() and paintCell().
 
@@ -777,7 +777,7 @@ item's children, and invalidateHeight() to inval
 height.
 
                                         
                                        See also height().
 
-
                                        int TQListViewItem::width ( const TQFontMetrics & fm, const TQListView * lv, int c ) const [virtual]
+
                                        int TQListViewItem::width ( const TQFontMetrics & fm, const TQListView * lv, int c ) const [virtual]
 
                                        
 Returns the number of pixels of width required to draw column c
 of list view lv, using the metrics fm without cropping. The
@@ -785,7 +785,7 @@ list view containing this item may use this information depending
 on the TQListView::WidthMode settings for the column.
 
                                         The default implementation returns the width of the bounding
 rectangle of the text of column c.
-
                                         
                                        See also listView(), widthChanged(), TQListView::setColumnWidthMode(), and TQListView::itemMargin.
+
                                         
                                        See also listView(), widthChanged(), TQListView::setColumnWidthMode(), and TQListView::itemMargin.
 
 
                                        void TQListViewItem::widthChanged ( int c = -1 ) const
 
                                        
diff --git a/doc/html/qlistviewitemiterator-members.html b/doc/html/qlistviewitemiterator-members.html
index 2b58a6fb0..b08ca9a6e 100644
--- a/doc/html/qlistviewitemiterator-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qlistviewitemiterator-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qlistviewitemiterator.html b/doc/html/qlistviewitemiterator.html
index 33c5f7427..907797f9e 100644
--- a/doc/html/qlistviewitemiterator.html
+++ b/doc/html/qlistviewitemiterator.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                        The TQListViewItemIterator class provides an iterator for collections of TQListViewItems.
 More...
-
                                        #include <qlistview.h>
+
                                        #include <ntqlistview.h>
 
                                        List of all member functions.
 
                                        Public Members
                                        
 
                                          
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 The TQListViewItemIterator class provides an iterator for collections of TQListViewItems.
 
                                           
 
                                           Construct an instance of a TQListViewItemIterator, with either a
-TQListView* or a TQListViewItem* as argument, to operate on the tree
+TQListView* or a TQListViewItem* as argument, to operate on the tree
 of TQListViewItems, starting from the argument.
 
                                           A TQListViewItemIterator iterates over all the items from its
 starting point. This means that it always makes the first child of
@@ -72,27 +72,27 @@ sibling, the next sibling of the parent becomes current.
 been selected by the user, storing pointers to the items in a
 TQPtrList:
 
                                          -    TQPtrList<TQListViewItem> lst;
+    TQPtrList<TQListViewItem> lst;
     TQListViewItemIterator it( myListView );
     while ( it.current() ) {
         if ( it.current()->isSelected() )
-            lst.append( it.current() );
+            lst.append( it.current() );
         ++it;
     }
     
                                          
  
 
                                           An alternative approach is to use an IteratorFlag:
 
                                          -    TQPtrList<TQListViewItem> lst;
+    TQPtrList<TQListViewItem> lst;
     TQListViewItemIterator it( myListView, TQListViewItemIterator::Selected );
     while ( it.current() ) {
-        lst.append( it.current() );
+        lst.append( it.current() );
         ++it;
     }
     
                                          
  
 
                                           A TQListViewItemIterator provides a convenient and easy way to
-traverse a hierarchical TQListView.
+traverse a hierarchical TQListView.
 
                                           Multiple TQListViewItemIterators can operate on the tree of
 TQListViewItems. A TQListView knows about all iterators operating on
 its TQListViewItems. So when a TQListViewItem gets removed all
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ iterators that point to this item are updated and point to the
 following item if possible, otherwise to a valid item before the
 current one or to 0. Note however that deleting the parent item of
 an item that an iterator points to is not safe.
-
                                           
                                          See also TQListView, TQListViewItem, and Advanced Widgets.
+
                                           
                                          See also TQListView, TQListViewItem, and Advanced Widgets.
 
 
                                          Member Type Documentation
                                          
 
                                          TQListViewItemIterator::IteratorFlag
                                          
@@ -131,11 +131,11 @@ Constructs an empty iterator.
 
 
                                          TQListViewItemIterator::TQListViewItemIterator ( TQListViewItem * item )
 
                                          
-Constructs an iterator for the TQListView that contains the item. The current iterator item is set to point to the item.
+Constructs an iterator for the TQListView that contains the item. The current iterator item is set to point to the item.
 
 
                                          TQListViewItemIterator::TQListViewItemIterator ( TQListViewItem * item, int iteratorFlags )
 
                                          
-Constructs an iterator for the TQListView that contains the item
+Constructs an iterator for the TQListView that contains the item
 using the flags iteratorFlags. The current iterator item is set
 to point to item or the next matching item if item doesn't
 match the flags.
@@ -143,18 +143,18 @@ match the flags.
 
 
                                          TQListViewItemIterator::TQListViewItemIterator ( const TQListViewItemIterator & it )
 
                                          
-Constructs an iterator for the same TQListView as it. The
+Constructs an iterator for the same TQListView as it. The
 current iterator item is set to point on the current item of it.
 
-
                                          TQListViewItemIterator::TQListViewItemIterator ( TQListView * lv )
+
                                          TQListViewItemIterator::TQListViewItemIterator ( TQListView * lv )
 
                                          
-Constructs an iterator for the TQListView lv. The current
+Constructs an iterator for the TQListView lv. The current
 iterator item is set to point on the first child (TQListViewItem)
 of lv.
 
-
                                          TQListViewItemIterator::TQListViewItemIterator ( TQListView * lv, int iteratorFlags )
+
                                          TQListViewItemIterator::TQListViewItemIterator ( TQListView * lv, int iteratorFlags )
 
                                          
-Constructs an iterator for the TQListView lv with the flags iteratorFlags. The current iterator item is set to point on the
+Constructs an iterator for the TQListView lv with the flags iteratorFlags. The current iterator item is set to point on the
 first child (TQListViewItem) of lv that matches the flags.
 
                                           
                                          See also TQListViewItemIterator::IteratorFlag.
 
@@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ same as current().
 
 Prefix ++. Makes the next item the new current item and returns
 it. Returns 0 if the current item is the last item or the
-TQListView is 0.
+TQListView is 0.
 
 
                                          const TQListViewItemIterator TQListViewItemIterator::operator++ ( int )
 
                                          
@@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ set to 0. Returns the current item.
 
 Prefix --. Makes the previous item the new current item and
 returns it. Returns 0 if the current item is the first item or the
-TQListView is 0.
+TQListView is 0.
 
 
                                          const TQListViewItemIterator TQListViewItemIterator::operator-- ( int )
 
                                          
diff --git a/doc/html/qlocale-h.html b/doc/html/qlocale-h.html
index 5c4681617..8d36eff64 100644
--- a/doc/html/qlocale-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qlocale-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qlocale.h Include File
+ntqlocale.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                          
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                          TQLocale Class Reference
                                          
-
-
                                          The TQLocale class converts between numbers and their
-string representations in various languages.
-More...
-
                                          Almost all the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support. The exception is setDefault().
-
                                          #include <qlocale.h>
-
                                          List of all member functions.
-
                                          Public Members
                                          
-
                                            
-
                                          • enum Language { C = 1, Abkhazian = 2, Afan = 3, Afar = 4, Afrikaans = 5, Albanian = 6, Amharic = 7, Arabic = 8, Armenian = 9, Assamese = 10, Aymara = 11, Azerbaijani = 12, Bashkir = 13, Basque = 14, Bengali = 15, Bhutani = 16, Bihari = 17, Bislama = 18, Breton = 19, Bulgarian = 20, Burmese = 21, Byelorussian = 22, Cambodian = 23, Catalan = 24, Chinese = 25, Corsican = 26, Croatian = 27, Czech = 28, Danish = 29, Dutch = 30, English = 31, Esperanto = 32, Estonian = 33, Faroese = 34, FijiLanguage = 35, Finnish = 36, French = 37, Frisian = 38, Gaelic = 39, Galician = 40, Georgian = 41, German = 42, Greek = 43, Greenlandic = 44, Guarani = 45, Gujarati = 46, Hausa = 47, Hebrew = 48, Hindi = 49, Hungarian = 50, Icelandic = 51, Indonesian = 52, Interlingua = 53, Interlingue = 54, Inuktitut = 55, Inupiak = 56, Irish = 57, Italian = 58, Japanese = 59, Javanese = 60, Kannada = 61, Kashmiri = 62, Kazakh = 63, Kinyarwanda = 64, Kirghiz = 65, Korean = 66, Kurdish = 67, Kurundi = 68, Laothian = 69, Latin = 70, Latvian = 71, Lingala = 72, Lithuanian = 73, Macedonian = 74, Malagasy = 75, Malay = 76, Malayalam = 77, Maltese = 78, Maori = 79, Marathi = 80, Moldavian = 81, Mongolian = 82, NauruLanguage = 83, Nepali = 84, Norwegian = 85, Occitan = 86, Oriya = 87, Pashto = 88, Persian = 89, Polish = 90, Portuguese = 91, Punjabi = 92, Quechua = 93, RhaetoRomance = 94, Romanian = 95, Russian = 96, Samoan = 97, Sangho = 98, Sanskrit = 99, Serbian = 100, SerboCroatian = 101, Sesotho = 102, Setswana = 103, Shona = 104, Sindhi = 105, Singhalese = 106, Siswati = 107, Slovak = 108, Slovenian = 109, Somali = 110, Spanish = 111, Sundanese = 112, Swahili = 113, Swedish = 114, Tagalog = 115, Tajik = 116, Tamil = 117, Tatar = 118, Telugu = 119, Thai = 120, Tibetan = 121, Tigrinya = 122, TongaLanguage = 123, Tsonga = 124, Turkish = 125, Turkmen = 126, Twi = 127, Uigur = 128, Ukrainian = 129, Urdu = 130, Uzbek = 131, Vietnamese = 132, Volapuk = 133, Welsh = 134, Wolof = 135, Xhosa = 136, Yiddish = 137, Yoruba = 138, Zhuang = 139, Zulu = 140, LastLanguage = Zulu }
                                            • 
-
                                          • enum Country { AnyCountry = 0, Afghanistan = 1, Albania = 2, Algeria = 3, AmericanSamoa = 4, Andorra = 5, Angola = 6, Anguilla = 7, Antarctica = 8, AntiguaAndBarbuda = 9, Argentina = 10, Armenia = 11, Aruba = 12, Australia = 13, Austria = 14, Azerbaijan = 15, Bahamas = 16, Bahrain = 17, Bangladesh = 18, Barbados = 19, Belarus = 20, Belgium = 21, Belize = 22, Benin = 23, Bermuda = 24, Bhutan = 25, Bolivia = 26, BosniaAndHerzegowina = 27, Botswana = 28, BouvetIsland = 29, Brazil = 30, BritishIndianOceanTerritory = 31, BruneiDarussalam = 32, Bulgaria = 33, BurkinaFaso = 34, Burundi = 35, Cambodia = 36, Cameroon = 37, Canada = 38, CapeVerde = 39, CaymanIslands = 40, CentralAfricanRepublic = 41, Chad = 42, Chile = 43, China = 44, ChristmasIsland = 45, CocosIslands = 46, Colombia = 47, Comoros = 48, DemocraticRepublicOfCongo = 49, PeoplesRepublicOfCongo = 50, CookIslands = 51, CostaRica = 52, IvoryCoast = 53, Croatia = 54, Cuba = 55, Cyprus = 56, CzechRepublic = 57, Denmark = 58, Djibouti = 59, Dominica = 60, DominicanRepublic = 61, EastTimor = 62, Ecuador = 63, Egypt = 64, ElSalvador = 65, EquatorialGuinea = 66, Eritrea = 67, Estonia = 68, Ethiopia = 69, FalklandIslands = 70, FaroeIslands = 71, FijiCountry = 72, Finland = 73, France = 74, MetropolitanFrance = 75, FrenchGuiana = 76, FrenchPolynesia = 77, FrenchSouthernTerritories = 78, Gabon = 79, Gambia = 80, Georgia = 81, Germany = 82, Ghana = 83, Gibraltar = 84, Greece = 85, Greenland = 86, Grenada = 87, Guadeloupe = 88, Guam = 89, Guatemala = 90, Guinea = 91, GuineaBissau = 92, Guyana = 93, Haiti = 94, HeardAndMcDonaldIslands = 95, Honduras = 96, HongKong = 97, Hungary = 98, Iceland = 99, India = 100, Indonesia = 101, Iran = 102, Iraq = 103, Ireland = 104, Israel = 105, Italy = 106, Jamaica = 107, Japan = 108, Jordan = 109, Kazakhstan = 110, Kenya = 111, Kiribati = 112, DemocraticRepublicOfKorea = 113, RepublicOfKorea = 114, Kuwait = 115, Kyrgyzstan = 116, Lao = 117, Latvia = 118, Lebanon = 119, Lesotho = 120, Liberia = 121, LibyanArabJamahiriya = 122, Liechtenstein = 123, Lithuania = 124, Luxembourg = 125, Macau = 126, Macedonia = 127, Madagascar = 128, Malawi = 129, Malaysia = 130, Maldives = 131, Mali = 132, Malta = 133, MarshallIslands = 134, Martinique = 135, Mauritania = 136, Mauritius = 137, Mayotte = 138, Mexico = 139, Micronesia = 140, Moldova = 141, Monaco = 142, Mongolia = 143, Montserrat = 144, Morocco = 145, Mozambique = 146, Myanmar = 147, Namibia = 148, NauruCountry = 149, Nepal = 150, Netherlands = 151, NetherlandsAntilles = 152, NewCaledonia = 153, NewZealand = 154, Nicaragua = 155, Niger = 156, Nigeria = 157, Niue = 158, NorfolkIsland = 159, NorthernMarianaIslands = 160, Norway = 161, Oman = 162, Pakistan = 163, Palau = 164, PalestinianTerritory = 165, Panama = 166, PapuaNewGuinea = 167, Paraguay = 168, Peru = 169, Philippines = 170, Pitcairn = 171, Poland = 172, Portugal = 173, PuertoRico = 174, Qatar = 175, Reunion = 176, Romania = 177, RussianFederation = 178, Rwanda = 179, SaintKittsAndNevis = 180, StLucia = 181, StVincentAndTheGrenadines = 182, Samoa = 183, SanMarino = 184, SaoTomeAndPrincipe = 185, SaudiArabia = 186, Senegal = 187, Seychelles = 188, SierraLeone = 189, Singapore = 190, Slovakia = 191, Slovenia = 192, SolomonIslands = 193, Somalia = 194, SouthAfrica = 195, SouthGeorgiaAndTheSouthSandwichIslands = 196, Spain = 197, SriLanka = 198, StHelena = 199, StPierreAndMiquelon = 200, Sudan = 201, Suriname = 202, SvalbardAndJanMayenIslands = 203, Swaziland = 204, Sweden = 205, Switzerland = 206, SyrianArabRepublic = 207, Taiwan = 208, Tajikistan = 209, Tanzania = 210, Thailand = 211, Togo = 212, Tokelau = 213, TongaCountry = 214, TrinidadAndTobago = 215, Tunisia = 216, Turkey = 217, Turkmenistan = 218, TurksAndCaicosIslands = 219, Tuvalu = 220, Uganda = 221, Ukraine = 222, UnitedArabEmirates = 223, UnitedKingdom = 224, UnitedStates = 225, UnitedStatesMinorOutlyingIslands = 226, Uruguay = 227, Uzbekistan = 228, Vanuatu = 229, VaticanCityState = 230, Venezuela = 231, VietNam = 232, BritishVirginIslands = 233, USVirginIslands = 234, WallisAndFutunaIslands = 235, WesternSahara = 236, Yemen = 237, Yugoslavia = 238, Zambia = 239, Zimbabwe = 240, LastCountry = Zimbabwe }
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQLocale ()
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQLocale ( const TQString & name )
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQLocale ( Language language, Country country = AnyCountry )
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQLocale ( const TQLocale & other )
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQLocale & operator= ( const TQLocale & other )
                                            • 
-
                                          • Language language () const
                                            • 
-
                                          • Country country () const
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQString name () const
                                            • 
-
                                          • short toShort ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
                                            • 
-
                                          • ushort toUShort ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
                                            • 
-
                                          • int toInt ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
                                            • 
-
                                          • uint toUInt ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
                                            • 
-
                                          • Q_LONG toLong ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
                                            • 
-
                                          • Q_ULONG toULong ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
                                            • 
-
                                          • Q_LLONG toLongLong ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
                                            • 
-
                                          • Q_ULLONG toULongLong ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
                                            • 
-
                                          • float toFloat ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
                                            • 
-
                                          • double toDouble ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQString toString ( short i ) const
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQString toString ( ushort i ) const
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQString toString ( int i ) const
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQString toString ( uint i ) const
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQString toString ( Q_LONG i ) const
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQString toString ( Q_ULONG i ) const
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQString toString ( Q_LLONG i ) const
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQString toString ( Q_ULLONG i ) const
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQString toString ( float i, char f = 'g', int prec = 6 ) const
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQString toString ( double i, char f = 'g', int prec = 6 ) const
                                            • 
-
                                          
-
                                          Static Public Members
                                          
-
-
                                          Detailed Description
                                          
-
-
-The TQLocale class converts between numbers and their
-string representations in various languages.
-
                                           
-
-
                                           It is initialized with a country/language pair in its constructor
-and offers number-to-string and string-to-number conversion
-functions simmilar to those in TQString.
-
                                           
                                          -    TQLocale egyptian(TQLocale::Arabic, TQLocale::Egypt);
-    TQString s1 = egyptian.toString(1.571429E+07, 'e');
-    TQString s2 = egyptian.toString(10);
-
-    double d = egyptian.toDouble(s1);
-    int s2 = egyptian.toInt(s2);
-    
                                          
- 
-
                                           TQLocale supports the concept of a default locale, which is
-determined from the system's locale settings at application
-startup. The default locale can be changed by calling the
-static member setDefault(). The default locale has the
-following effects:
-
                                           
                                            
-
                                          •  If a TQLocale object is constructed with the default constructor,
-it will use the default locale's settings.
-
                                          •  TQString::toDouble() interprets the string according to the default
-locale. If this fails, it falls back on the "C" locale.
-
                                          •  TQString::arg() uses the default locale to format a number when
-its position specifier in the format string contains an 'L',
-e.g. "%L1".
-
                                          
-
                                           
                                          -    TQLocale::setDefault(TQLocale(TQLocale::Hebrew, TQLocale::Israel));
-    TQLocale hebrew; // Constructs a default TQLocale
-    TQString s1 = hebrew.toString(15714.3, 'e');
-
-    bool ok;
-    double d;
-
-    TQLocale::setDefault(TQLocale::C);
-    d = TQString( "1234,56" ).toDouble(&ok); // ok == false
-    d = TQString( "1234.56" ).toDouble(&ok); // ok == true, d == 1234.56
-
-    TQLocale::setDefault(TQLocale::German);
-    d = TQString( "1234,56" ).toDouble(&ok); // ok == true, d == 1234.56
-    d = TQString( "1234.56" ).toDouble(&ok); // ok == true, d == 1234.56
-
-    TQLocale::setDefault(TQLocale(TQLocale::English, TQLocale::UnitedStates));
-    str = TQString( "%1 %L2 %L3" )
-            .arg( 12345 )
-            .arg( 12345 )
-            .arg( 12345, 0, 16 );
-    // str == "12345 12,345 3039"
-    
                                          
- 
-
                                           When a language/country pair is specified in the constructor, one
-of three things can happen:
-
                                           
                                            
-
                                          •  If the language/country pair is found in the database, it is used.
-
                                          •  If the language is found but the country is not, or if the country
-is AnyCountry, the language is used with the most
-appropriate available country (for example, Germany for German),
-
                                          •  If neither the language nor the country are found, TQLocale
-defaults to the default locale (see setDefault()).
-
                                          
-
                                           The "C" locale is identical to English/UnitedStates.
-
                                           Use language() and country() to determine the actual language and
-country values used.
-
                                           An alternative method for constructing a TQLocale object is by
-specifying the locale name.
-
                                           
                                          -    TQLocale korean("ko");
-    TQLocale swiss("de_CH");
-    
                                          
- 
-
                                           This constructor converts the locale name to a language/country
-pair; it does not use the system locale database.
-
                                           All the methods in TQLocale, with the exception of setDefault(),
-are reentrant.
-
                                           
                                          See also TQString::toDouble(), TQString::arg(), and Text Related Classes.
-
-
                                           The double-to-string and string-to-double conversion functions are
-covered by the following licenses:
-
                                           
-
                                           Copyright (c) 1991 by AT&T.
-
                                           Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
-purpose without fee is hereby granted, provided that this entire notice
-is included in all copies of any software which is or includes a copy
-or modification of this software and in all copies of the supporting
-documentation for such software.
-
                                           THIS SOFTWARE IS BEING PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
-WARRANTY.  IN PARTICULAR, NEITHER THE AUTHOR NOR AT&T MAKES ANY
-REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF ANY KIND CONCERNING THE MERCHANTABILITY
-OF THIS SOFTWARE OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-
                                           This product includes software developed by the University of
-California, Berkeley and its contributors.
-
-
                                          Member Type Documentation
                                          
-
                                          TQLocale::Country
                                          
-
-
                                           This enumerated type is used to specify a country.
-
                                            
-
                                          • TQLocale::AnyCountry
-
                                          • TQLocale::Afghanistan
-
                                          • TQLocale::Albania
-
                                          • TQLocale::Algeria
-
                                          • TQLocale::AmericanSamoa
-
                                          • TQLocale::Andorra
-
                                          • TQLocale::Angola
-
                                          • TQLocale::Anguilla
-
                                          • TQLocale::Antarctica
-
                                          • TQLocale::AntiguaAndBarbuda
-
                                          • TQLocale::Argentina
-
                                          • TQLocale::Armenia
-
                                          • TQLocale::Aruba
-
                                          • TQLocale::Australia
-
                                          • TQLocale::Austria
-
                                          • TQLocale::Azerbaijan
-
                                          • TQLocale::Bahamas
-
                                          • TQLocale::Bahrain
-
                                          • TQLocale::Bangladesh
-
                                          • TQLocale::Barbados
-
                                          • TQLocale::Belarus
-
                                          • TQLocale::Belgium
-
                                          • TQLocale::Belize
-
                                          • TQLocale::Benin
-
                                          • TQLocale::Bermuda
-
                                          • TQLocale::Bhutan
-
                                          • TQLocale::Bolivia
-
                                          • TQLocale::BosniaAndHerzegowina
-
                                          • TQLocale::Botswana
-
                                          • TQLocale::BouvetIsland
-
                                          • TQLocale::Brazil
-
                                          • TQLocale::BritishIndianOceanTerritory
-
                                          • TQLocale::BruneiDarussalam
-
                                          • TQLocale::Bulgaria
-
                                          • TQLocale::BurkinaFaso
-
                                          • TQLocale::Burundi
-
                                          • TQLocale::Cambodia
-
                                          • TQLocale::Cameroon
-
                                          • TQLocale::Canada
-
                                          • TQLocale::CapeVerde
-
                                          • TQLocale::CaymanIslands
-
                                          • TQLocale::CentralAfricanRepublic
-
                                          • TQLocale::Chad
-
                                          • TQLocale::Chile
-
                                          • TQLocale::China
-
                                          • TQLocale::ChristmasIsland
-
                                          • TQLocale::CocosIslands
-
                                          • TQLocale::Colombia
-
                                          • TQLocale::Comoros
-
                                          • TQLocale::DemocraticRepublicOfCongo
-
                                          • TQLocale::PeoplesRepublicOfCongo
-
                                          • TQLocale::CookIslands
-
                                          • TQLocale::CostaRica
-
                                          • TQLocale::IvoryCoast
-
                                          • TQLocale::Croatia
-
                                          • TQLocale::Cuba
-
                                          • TQLocale::Cyprus
-
                                          • TQLocale::CzechRepublic
-
                                          • TQLocale::Denmark
-
                                          • TQLocale::Djibouti
-
                                          • TQLocale::Dominica
-
                                          • TQLocale::DominicanRepublic
-
                                          • TQLocale::EastTimor
-
                                          • TQLocale::Ecuador
-
                                          • TQLocale::Egypt
-
                                          • TQLocale::ElSalvador
-
                                          • TQLocale::EquatorialGuinea
-
                                          • TQLocale::Eritrea
-
                                          • TQLocale::Estonia
-
                                          • TQLocale::Ethiopia
-
                                          • TQLocale::FalklandIslands
-
                                          • TQLocale::FaroeIslands
-
                                          • TQLocale::FijiCountry
-
                                          • TQLocale::Finland
-
                                          • TQLocale::France
-
                                          • TQLocale::MetropolitanFrance
-
                                          • TQLocale::FrenchGuiana
-
                                          • TQLocale::FrenchPolynesia
-
                                          • TQLocale::FrenchSouthernTerritories
-
                                          • TQLocale::Gabon
-
                                          • TQLocale::Gambia
-
                                          • TQLocale::Georgia
-
                                          • TQLocale::Germany
-
                                          • TQLocale::Ghana
-
                                          • TQLocale::Gibraltar
-
                                          • TQLocale::Greece
-
                                          • TQLocale::Greenland
-
                                          • TQLocale::Grenada
-
                                          • TQLocale::Guadeloupe
-
                                          • TQLocale::Guam
-
                                          • TQLocale::Guatemala
-
                                          • TQLocale::Guinea
-
                                          • TQLocale::GuineaBissau
-
                                          • TQLocale::Guyana
-
                                          • TQLocale::Haiti
-
                                          • TQLocale::HeardAndMcDonaldIslands
-
                                          • TQLocale::Honduras
-
                                          • TQLocale::HongKong
-
                                          • TQLocale::Hungary
-
                                          • TQLocale::Iceland
-
                                          • TQLocale::India
-
                                          • TQLocale::Indonesia
-
                                          • TQLocale::Iran
-
                                          • TQLocale::Iraq
-
                                          • TQLocale::Ireland
-
                                          • TQLocale::Israel
-
                                          • TQLocale::Italy
-
                                          • TQLocale::Jamaica
-
                                          • TQLocale::Japan
-
                                          • TQLocale::Jordan
-
                                          • TQLocale::Kazakhstan
-
                                          • TQLocale::Kenya
-
                                          • TQLocale::Kiribati
-
                                          • TQLocale::DemocraticRepublicOfKorea
-
                                          • TQLocale::RepublicOfKorea
-
                                          • TQLocale::Kuwait
-
                                          • TQLocale::Kyrgyzstan
-
                                          • TQLocale::Lao
-
                                          • TQLocale::Latvia
-
                                          • TQLocale::Lebanon
-
                                          • TQLocale::Lesotho
-
                                          • TQLocale::Liberia
-
                                          • TQLocale::LibyanArabJamahiriya
-
                                          • TQLocale::Liechtenstein
-
                                          • TQLocale::Lithuania
-
                                          • TQLocale::Luxembourg
-
                                          • TQLocale::Macau
-
                                          • TQLocale::Macedonia
-
                                          • TQLocale::Madagascar
-
                                          • TQLocale::Malawi
-
                                          • TQLocale::Malaysia
-
                                          • TQLocale::Maldives
-
                                          • TQLocale::Mali
-
                                          • TQLocale::Malta
-
                                          • TQLocale::MarshallIslands
-
                                          • TQLocale::Martinique
-
                                          • TQLocale::Mauritania
-
                                          • TQLocale::Mauritius
-
                                          • TQLocale::Mayotte
-
                                          • TQLocale::Mexico
-
                                          • TQLocale::Micronesia
-
                                          • TQLocale::Moldova
-
                                          • TQLocale::Monaco
-
                                          • TQLocale::Mongolia
-
                                          • TQLocale::Montserrat
-
                                          • TQLocale::Morocco
-
                                          • TQLocale::Mozambique
-
                                          • TQLocale::Myanmar
-
                                          • TQLocale::Namibia
-
                                          • TQLocale::NauruCountry
-
                                          • TQLocale::Nepal
-
                                          • TQLocale::Netherlands
-
                                          • TQLocale::NetherlandsAntilles
-
                                          • TQLocale::NewCaledonia
-
                                          • TQLocale::NewZealand
-
                                          • TQLocale::Nicaragua
-
                                          • TQLocale::Niger
-
                                          • TQLocale::Nigeria
-
                                          • TQLocale::Niue
-
                                          • TQLocale::NorfolkIsland
-
                                          • TQLocale::NorthernMarianaIslands
-
                                          • TQLocale::Norway
-
                                          • TQLocale::Oman
-
                                          • TQLocale::Pakistan
-
                                          • TQLocale::Palau
-
                                          • TQLocale::PalestinianTerritory
-
                                          • TQLocale::Panama
-
                                          • TQLocale::PapuaNewGuinea
-
                                          • TQLocale::Paraguay
-
                                          • TQLocale::Peru
-
                                          • TQLocale::Philippines
-
                                          • TQLocale::Pitcairn
-
                                          • TQLocale::Poland
-
                                          • TQLocale::Portugal
-
                                          • TQLocale::PuertoRico
-
                                          • TQLocale::Qatar
-
                                          • TQLocale::Reunion
-
                                          • TQLocale::Romania
-
                                          • TQLocale::RussianFederation
-
                                          • TQLocale::Rwanda
-
                                          • TQLocale::SaintKittsAndNevis
-
                                          • TQLocale::StLucia
-
                                          • TQLocale::StVincentAndTheGrenadines
-
                                          • TQLocale::Samoa
-
                                          • TQLocale::SanMarino
-
                                          • TQLocale::SaoTomeAndPrincipe
-
                                          • TQLocale::SaudiArabia
-
                                          • TQLocale::Senegal
-
                                          • TQLocale::Seychelles
-
                                          • TQLocale::SierraLeone
-
                                          • TQLocale::Singapore
-
                                          • TQLocale::Slovakia
-
                                          • TQLocale::Slovenia
-
                                          • TQLocale::SolomonIslands
-
                                          • TQLocale::Somalia
-
                                          • TQLocale::SouthAfrica
-
                                          • TQLocale::SouthGeorgiaAndTheSouthSandwichIslands
-
                                          • TQLocale::Spain
-
                                          • TQLocale::SriLanka
-
                                          • TQLocale::StHelena
-
                                          • TQLocale::StPierreAndMiquelon
-
                                          • TQLocale::Sudan
-
                                          • TQLocale::Suriname
-
                                          • TQLocale::SvalbardAndJanMayenIslands
-
                                          • TQLocale::Swaziland
-
                                          • TQLocale::Sweden
-
                                          • TQLocale::Switzerland
-
                                          • TQLocale::SyrianArabRepublic
-
                                          • TQLocale::Taiwan
-
                                          • TQLocale::Tajikistan
-
                                          • TQLocale::Tanzania
-
                                          • TQLocale::Thailand
-
                                          • TQLocale::Togo
-
                                          • TQLocale::Tokelau
-
                                          • TQLocale::TongaCountry
-
                                          • TQLocale::TrinidadAndTobago
-
                                          • TQLocale::Tunisia
-
                                          • TQLocale::Turkey
-
                                          • TQLocale::Turkmenistan
-
                                          • TQLocale::TurksAndCaicosIslands
-
                                          • TQLocale::Tuvalu
-
                                          • TQLocale::Uganda
-
                                          • TQLocale::Ukraine
-
                                          • TQLocale::UnitedArabEmirates
-
                                          • TQLocale::UnitedKingdom
-
                                          • TQLocale::UnitedStates
-
                                          • TQLocale::UnitedStatesMinorOutlyingIslands
-
                                          • TQLocale::Uruguay
-
                                          • TQLocale::Uzbekistan
-
                                          • TQLocale::Vanuatu
-
                                          • TQLocale::VaticanCityState
-
                                          • TQLocale::Venezuela
-
                                          • TQLocale::VietNam
-
                                          • TQLocale::BritishVirginIslands
-
                                          • TQLocale::USVirginIslands
-
                                          • TQLocale::WallisAndFutunaIslands
-
                                          • TQLocale::WesternSahara
-
                                          • TQLocale::Yemen
-
                                          • TQLocale::Yugoslavia
-
                                          • TQLocale::Zambia
-
                                          • TQLocale::Zimbabwe
-
                                          
-
                                          TQLocale::Language
                                          
-
-
                                           This enumerated type is used to specify a language.
-
                                            
-
                                          • TQLocale::C - Identical to English/UnitedStates
-
                                          • TQLocale::Abkhazian
-
                                          • TQLocale::Afan
-
                                          • TQLocale::Afar
-
                                          • TQLocale::Afrikaans
-
                                          • TQLocale::Albanian
-
                                          • TQLocale::Amharic
-
                                          • TQLocale::Arabic
-
                                          • TQLocale::Armenian
-
                                          • TQLocale::Assamese
-
                                          • TQLocale::Aymara
-
                                          • TQLocale::Azerbaijani
-
                                          • TQLocale::Bashkir
-
                                          • TQLocale::Basque
-
                                          • TQLocale::Bengali
-
                                          • TQLocale::Bhutani
-
                                          • TQLocale::Bihari
-
                                          • TQLocale::Bislama
-
                                          • TQLocale::Breton
-
                                          • TQLocale::Bulgarian
-
                                          • TQLocale::Burmese
-
                                          • TQLocale::Byelorussian
-
                                          • TQLocale::Cambodian
-
                                          • TQLocale::Catalan
-
                                          • TQLocale::Chinese
-
                                          • TQLocale::Corsican
-
                                          • TQLocale::Croatian
-
                                          • TQLocale::Czech
-
                                          • TQLocale::Danish
-
                                          • TQLocale::Dutch
-
                                          • TQLocale::English
-
                                          • TQLocale::Esperanto
-
                                          • TQLocale::Estonian
-
                                          • TQLocale::Faroese
-
                                          • TQLocale::FijiLanguage
-
                                          • TQLocale::Finnish
-
                                          • TQLocale::French
-
                                          • TQLocale::Frisian
-
                                          • TQLocale::Gaelic
-
                                          • TQLocale::Galician
-
                                          • TQLocale::Georgian
-
                                          • TQLocale::German
-
                                          • TQLocale::Greek
-
                                          • TQLocale::Greenlandic
-
                                          • TQLocale::Guarani
-
                                          • TQLocale::Gujarati
-
                                          • TQLocale::Hausa
-
                                          • TQLocale::Hebrew
-
                                          • TQLocale::Hindi
-
                                          • TQLocale::Hungarian
-
                                          • TQLocale::Icelandic
-
                                          • TQLocale::Indonesian
-
                                          • TQLocale::Interlingua
-
                                          • TQLocale::Interlingue
-
                                          • TQLocale::Inuktitut
-
                                          • TQLocale::Inupiak
-
                                          • TQLocale::Irish
-
                                          • TQLocale::Italian
-
                                          • TQLocale::Japanese
-
                                          • TQLocale::Javanese
-
                                          • TQLocale::Kannada
-
                                          • TQLocale::Kashmiri
-
                                          • TQLocale::Kazakh
-
                                          • TQLocale::Kinyarwanda
-
                                          • TQLocale::Kirghiz
-
                                          • TQLocale::Korean
-
                                          • TQLocale::Kurdish
-
                                          • TQLocale::Kurundi
-
                                          • TQLocale::Laothian
-
                                          • TQLocale::Latin
-
                                          • TQLocale::Latvian
-
                                          • TQLocale::Lingala
-
                                          • TQLocale::Lithuanian
-
                                          • TQLocale::Macedonian
-
                                          • TQLocale::Malagasy
-
                                          • TQLocale::Malay
-
                                          • TQLocale::Malayalam
-
                                          • TQLocale::Maltese
-
                                          • TQLocale::Maori
-
                                          • TQLocale::Marathi
-
                                          • TQLocale::Moldavian
-
                                          • TQLocale::Mongolian
-
                                          • TQLocale::NauruLanguage
-
                                          • TQLocale::Nepali
-
                                          • TQLocale::Norwegian
-
                                          • TQLocale::Occitan
-
                                          • TQLocale::Oriya
-
                                          • TQLocale::Pashto
-
                                          • TQLocale::Persian
-
                                          • TQLocale::Polish
-
                                          • TQLocale::Portuguese
-
                                          • TQLocale::Punjabi
-
                                          • TQLocale::Quechua
-
                                          • TQLocale::RhaetoRomance
-
                                          • TQLocale::Romanian
-
                                          • TQLocale::Russian
-
                                          • TQLocale::Samoan
-
                                          • TQLocale::Sangho
-
                                          • TQLocale::Sanskrit
-
                                          • TQLocale::Serbian
-
                                          • TQLocale::SerboCroatian
-
                                          • TQLocale::Sesotho
-
                                          • TQLocale::Setswana
-
                                          • TQLocale::Shona
-
                                          • TQLocale::Sindhi
-
                                          • TQLocale::Singhalese
-
                                          • TQLocale::Siswati
-
                                          • TQLocale::Slovak
-
                                          • TQLocale::Slovenian
-
                                          • TQLocale::Somali
-
                                          • TQLocale::Spanish
-
                                          • TQLocale::Sundanese
-
                                          • TQLocale::Swahili
-
                                          • TQLocale::Swedish
-
                                          • TQLocale::Tagalog
-
                                          • TQLocale::Tajik
-
                                          • TQLocale::Tamil
-
                                          • TQLocale::Tatar
-
                                          • TQLocale::Telugu
-
                                          • TQLocale::Thai
-
                                          • TQLocale::Tibetan
-
                                          • TQLocale::Tigrinya
-
                                          • TQLocale::TongaLanguage
-
                                          • TQLocale::Tsonga
-
                                          • TQLocale::Turkish
-
                                          • TQLocale::Turkmen
-
                                          • TQLocale::Twi
-
                                          • TQLocale::Uigur
-
                                          • TQLocale::Ukrainian
-
                                          • TQLocale::Urdu
-
                                          • TQLocale::Uzbek
-
                                          • TQLocale::Vietnamese
-
                                          • TQLocale::Volapuk
-
                                          • TQLocale::Welsh
-
                                          • TQLocale::Wolof
-
                                          • TQLocale::Xhosa
-
                                          • TQLocale::Yiddish
-
                                          • TQLocale::Yoruba
-
                                          • TQLocale::Zhuang
-
                                          • TQLocale::Zulu
-
                                          
-
                                          Member Function Documentation
                                          
-
                                          TQLocale::TQLocale ()
-
                                          
-Constructs a TQLocale object initialized with the default locale.
-
                                           
                                          See also setDefault().
-
-
                                          TQLocale::TQLocale ( const TQString & name )
-
                                          
-Constructs a TQLocale object with the specified name,
-which has the format
-"language[_country][.codeset][@modifier]" or "C", where:
-
                                           
                                            
-
                                          •  language is a lowercase, two-letter, ISO 639 language code,
-
                                          •  territory is an uppercase, two-letter, ISO 3166 country code,
-
                                          •  and codeset and modifier are ignored.
-
                                          
-
                                           If the string violates the locale format, or language is not
-a valid ISO 369 code, the "C" locale is used instead. If country
-is not present, or is not a valid ISO 3166 code, the most
-appropriate country is chosen for the specified language.
-
                                           The language and country codes are converted to their respective
-Language and Country enums. After this conversion is
-performed the constructor behaves exactly like TQLocale(Country,
-Language).
-
                                           This constructor is much slower than TQLocale(Country, Language).
-
                                           
                                          See also name().
-
-
                                          TQLocale::TQLocale ( Language language, Country country = AnyCountry )
-
                                          
-Constructs a TQLocale object with the specified language and country.
-
                                           
                                            
-
                                          •  If the language/country pair is found in the database, it is used.
-
                                          •  If the language is found but the country is not, or if the country
-is AnyCountry, the language is used with the most
-appropriate available country (for example, Germany for German),
-
                                          •  If neither the language nor the country are found, TQLocale
-defaults to the default locale (see setDefault()).
-
                                          
-
                                           The language and country that are actually used can be queried
-using language() and country().
-
                                           
                                          See also setDefault(), language(), and country().
-
-
                                          TQLocale::TQLocale ( const TQLocale & other )
-
                                          
-Constructs a TQLocale object as a copy of other.
-
-
                                          TQLocale TQLocale::c () [static]
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Returns a TQLocale object initialized to the "C" locale.
-
                                           
                                          See also system().
-
-
                                          Country TQLocale::country () const
-
                                          
-Returns the country of this locale.
-
                                           
                                          See also TQLocale().
-
-
                                          TQString TQLocale::countryToString ( Country country ) [static]
-
                                          
-Returns a TQString containing the name of country.
-
-
                                          Language TQLocale::language () const
-
                                          
-Returns the language of this locale.
-
                                           
                                          See also TQLocale().
-
-
                                          TQString TQLocale::languageToString ( Language language ) [static]
-
                                          
-Returns a TQString containing the name of language.
-
-
                                          TQString TQLocale::name () const
-
                                          
-Returns the language and country of this locale as a
-string of the form "language_country", where
-language is a lowercase, two-letter ISO 639 language code,
-and country is an uppercase, two-letter ISO 3166 country code.
-
                                           
                                          See also TQLocale().
-
-
                                          TQLocale & TQLocale::operator= ( const TQLocale & other )
-
                                          
-Assigns other to this TQLocale object and returns a reference
-to this TQLocale object.
-
-
                                          void TQLocale::setDefault ( const TQLocale & locale ) [static]
-
                                          Warning: This function is not reentrant.
                                          
-
-
-
                                           Sets the global default locale to locale. These
-values are used when a TQLocale object is constructed with
-no arguments. If this function is not called, the system's
-locale is used.
-
                                           Warning: In a multithreaded application, the default locale
-should be set at application startup, before any non-GUI threads
-are created.
-
                                           
                                          See also system() and c().
-
-
                                          TQLocale TQLocale::system () [static]
-
                                          
-Returns a TQLocale object initialized to the system locale.
-
-
                                          double TQLocale::toDouble ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                                          
-Returns the double represented by the localized string s, or
-0.0 if the conversion failed.
-
                                           If ok is not 0, reports failure by setting
-*ok to false and success by setting *ok to true.
-
                                           Unlike TQString::toDouble(), this function does not fall back to
-the "C" locale if the string cannot be interpreted in this
-locale.
-
                                           
                                          -        bool ok;
-        double d;
-
-        TQLocale c(TQLocale::C);
-        d = c.toDouble( "1234.56", &ok );  // ok == true, d == 1234.56
-        d = c.toDouble( "1,234.56", &ok ); // ok == true, d == 1234.56
-        d = c.toDouble( "1234,56", &ok );  // ok == false
-
-        TQLocale german(TQLocale::German);
-        d = german.toDouble( "1234,56", &ok );  // ok == true, d == 1234.56
-        d = german.toDouble( "1.234,56", &ok ); // ok == true, d == 1234.56
-        d = german.toDouble( "1234.56", &ok );  // ok == false
-
-        d = german.toDouble( "1.234", &ok );    // ok == true, d == 1234.0
-    
                                          
- 
-
                                           Notice that the last conversion returns 1234.0, because '.' is the
-thousands group separator in the German locale.
-
                                           This function ignores leading and trailing whitespace.
-
                                           
                                          See also toString() and TQString::toDouble().
-
-
                                          float TQLocale::toFloat ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                                          
-Returns the float represented by the localized string s, or 0.0
-if the conversion failed.
-
                                           If ok is not 0, reports failure by setting
-*ok to false and success by setting *ok to true.
-
                                           This function ignores leading and trailing whitespace.
-
                                           
                                          See also toString().
-
-
                                          int TQLocale::toInt ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                                          
-Returns the int represented by the localized string s, or 0 if
-the conversion failed.
-
                                           If ok is not 0, reports failure by setting *ok to false and
-success by setting *ok to true.
-
                                           This function ignores leading and trailing whitespace.
-
                                           
                                          See also toString().
-
-
                                          Q_LONG TQLocale::toLong ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                                          
-Returns the long int represented by the localized string s, or
-0 if the conversion failed.
-
                                           If ok is not 0, reports failure by setting
-*ok to false and success by setting *ok to true.
-
                                           This function ignores leading and trailing whitespace.
-
                                           
                                          See also toString().
-
-
                                          Q_LLONG TQLocale::toLongLong ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                                          
-Returns the long long int represented by the localized string s, or 0 if the conversion failed.
-
                                           If ok is not 0, reports failure by setting
-*ok to false and success by setting *ok to true.
-
                                           This function ignores leading and trailing whitespace.
-
                                           
                                          See also toString().
-
-
                                          short TQLocale::toShort ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                                          
-Returns the short int represented by the localized string s, or
-0 if the conversion failed.
-
                                           If ok is not 0, reports failure by setting
-*ok to false and success by setting *ok to true.
-
                                           This function ignores leading and trailing whitespace.
-
                                           
                                          See also toString().
-
-
                                          TQString TQLocale::toString ( Q_LLONG i ) const
-
                                          
-Returns a localized string representation of i.
-
                                           
                                          See also toLongLong().
-
-
                                          TQString TQLocale::toString ( short i ) const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           
                                          See also toShort().
-
-
                                          TQString TQLocale::toString ( ushort i ) const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           
                                          See also toUShort().
-
-
                                          TQString TQLocale::toString ( int i ) const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           
                                          See also toInt().
-
-
                                          TQString TQLocale::toString ( uint i ) const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           
                                          See also toUInt().
-
-
                                          TQString TQLocale::toString ( Q_LONG i ) const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           
                                          See also toLong().
-
-
                                          TQString TQLocale::toString ( Q_ULONG i ) const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           
                                          See also toULong().
-
-
                                          TQString TQLocale::toString ( Q_ULLONG i ) const
-
                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           
                                          See also toULongLong().
-
-
                                          TQString TQLocale::toString ( float i, char f = 'g', int prec = 6 ) const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           f and prec have the same meaning as in TQString::number(double, char, int).
-
                                           
                                          See also toDouble().
-
-
                                          TQString TQLocale::toString ( double i, char f = 'g', int prec = 6 ) const
-
                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           f and prec have the same meaning as in TQString::number(double, char, int).
-
                                           
                                          See also toDouble().
-
-
                                          uint TQLocale::toUInt ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                                          
-Returns the unsigned int represented by the localized string s,
-or 0 if the conversion failed.
-
                                           If ok is not 0, reports failure by setting
-*ok to false and success by setting *ok to true.
-
                                           This function ignores leading and trailing whitespace.
-
                                           
                                          See also toString().
-
-
                                          Q_ULONG TQLocale::toULong ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                                          
-Returns the unsigned long int represented by the localized string
-s, or 0 if the conversion failed.
-
                                           If ok is not 0, reports failure by setting
-*ok to false and success by setting *ok to true.
-
                                           This function ignores leading and trailing whitespace.
-
                                           
                                          See also toString().
-
-
                                          Q_ULLONG TQLocale::toULongLong ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                                          
-Returns the unsigned long long int represented by the localized
-string s, or 0 if the conversion failed.
-
                                           If ok is not 0, reports failure by setting
-*ok to false and success by setting *ok to true.
-
                                           This function ignores leading and trailing whitespace.
-
                                           
                                          See also toString().
-
-
                                          ushort TQLocale::toUShort ( const TQString & s, bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                                          
-Returns the unsigned short int represented by the localized string
-s, or 0 if the conversion failed.
-
                                           If ok is not 0, reports failure by setting
-*ok to false and success by setting *ok to true.
-
                                           This function ignores leading and trailing whitespace.
-
                                           
                                          See also toString().
-
-
-
                                          
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                          
-
-
                                          Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                          TQt 3.3.8
                                          
-
                                          
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qlocalfs-h.html b/doc/html/qlocalfs-h.html
index 577a5916c..772d2e6b2 100644
--- a/doc/html/qlocalfs-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qlocalfs-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qlocalfs.h Include File
+ntqlocalfs.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                          
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                          TQLocalFs Class Reference
                                          [network module]
                                          
-
-
                                          The TQLocalFs class is an implementation of a
-TQNetworkProtocol that works on the local file system.
-More...
-
                                          #include <qlocalfs.h>
-
                                          Inherits TQNetworkProtocol.
-
                                          List of all member functions.
-
                                          Public Members
                                          
-
-
                                          Detailed Description
                                          
-
-
-The TQLocalFs class is an implementation of a
-TQNetworkProtocol that works on the local file system.
-
-
                                           
-
                                           
-
                                           This class is derived from TQNetworkProtocol. TQLocalFs is not
-normally used directly, but rather through a TQUrlOperator, for
-example:
-
                                          -    TQUrlOperator op( "file:///tmp" );
-    op.listChildren(); // Asks the server to provide a directory listing
-    
                                          
- 
-
                                           This code will only work if the TQLocalFs class is registered; to
-register the class, you must call qInitNetworkProtocols() before
-using a TQUrlOperator with TQLocalFs.
-
                                           If you really need to use TQLocalFs directly, don't forget
-to set its TQUrlOperator with setUrl().
-
                                           
                                          See also TQt Network Documentation, TQNetworkProtocol, TQUrlOperator, and Input/Output and Networking.
-
-
                                          Member Function Documentation
                                          
-
                                          TQLocalFs::TQLocalFs ()
-
                                          
-Constructor.
-
-
-
                                          
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                          
-
-
                                          Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                          TQt 3.3.8
                                          
-
                                          
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qmacmime-members.html b/doc/html/qmacmime-members.html
index 5de581a02..4cf1f2cd9 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmacmime-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmacmime-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qmacmime.html b/doc/html/qmacmime.html
index 11d484af1..4ac2d7c66 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmacmime.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmacmime.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                          The TQMacMime class maps open-standard MIME to Mac flavors.
 More...
-
                                          #include <qmime.h>
+
                                          #include <ntqmime.h>
 
                                          List of all member functions.
 
                                          Public Members
                                          
 
                                        
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qmainwindow-h.html b/doc/html/qmainwindow-h.html
index 4f9e52993..c737e8bc3 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmainwindow-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmainwindow-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qmainwindow.h Include File
+ntqmainwindow.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                        TQMainWindow Class Reference
                                        
-
-
                                        The TQMainWindow class provides a main application window,
-with a menu bar, dock windows (e.g. for toolbars), and a status
-bar.
-More...
-
                                        #include <qmainwindow.h>
-
                                        Inherits TQWidget.
-
                                        List of all member functions.
-
                                        Public Members
                                        
-
                                          
-
                                        • TQMainWindow ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = WType_TopLevel )
                                          • 
-
                                        • ~TQMainWindow ()
                                          • 
-
                                        • TQMenuBar * menuBar () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • TQStatusBar * statusBar () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • TQToolTipGroup * toolTipGroup () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • virtual void setCentralWidget ( TQWidget * w )
                                          • 
-
                                        • TQWidget * centralWidget () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • virtual void setDockEnabled ( Dock dock, bool enable )
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool isDockEnabled ( Dock dock ) const
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool isDockEnabled ( TQDockArea * area ) const
                                          • 
-
                                        • virtual void setDockEnabled ( TQDockWindow * dw, Dock dock, bool enable )
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool isDockEnabled ( TQDockWindow * tb, Dock dock ) const
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool isDockEnabled ( TQDockWindow * dw, TQDockArea * area ) const
                                          • 
-
                                        • virtual void addDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, Dock edge = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )
                                          • 
-
                                        • virtual void addDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, const TQString & label, Dock edge = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )
                                          • 
-
                                        • virtual void moveDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, Dock edge = DockTop )
                                          • 
-
                                        • virtual void moveDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, Dock edge, bool nl, int index, int extraOffset = -1 )
                                          • 
-
                                        • virtual void removeDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow )
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool rightJustification () const  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool usesBigPixmaps () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool usesTextLabel () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool dockWindowsMovable () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool opaqueMoving () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool getLocation ( TQDockWindow * dw, Dock & dock, int & index, bool & nl, int & extraOffset ) const
                                          • 
-
                                        • TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> dockWindows ( Dock dock ) const
                                          • 
-
                                        • TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> dockWindows () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • void lineUpDockWindows ( bool keepNewLines = FALSE )
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool isDockMenuEnabled () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool hasDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dw )
                                          • 
-
                                        • void addToolBar ( TQDockWindow *, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • void addToolBar ( TQDockWindow *, const TQString & label, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • void moveToolBar ( TQDockWindow *, Dock = DockTop )  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • void moveToolBar ( TQDockWindow *, Dock, bool nl, int index, int extraOffset = -1 )  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • void removeToolBar ( TQDockWindow * )  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool toolBarsMovable () const  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • TQPtrList<TQToolBar> toolBars ( Dock dock ) const
                                          • 
-
                                        • void lineUpToolBars ( bool keepNewLines = FALSE )  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • TQDockArea * leftDock () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • TQDockArea * rightDock () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • TQDockArea * topDock () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • TQDockArea * bottomDock () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • virtual bool isCustomizable () const
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool appropriate ( TQDockWindow * dw ) const
                                          • 
-
                                        • enum DockWindows { OnlyToolBars, NoToolBars, AllDockWindows }
                                          • 
-
                                        • TQPopupMenu * createDockWindowMenu ( DockWindows dockWindows = AllDockWindows ) const
                                          • 
-
                                        
-
                                        Public Slots
                                        
-
-
                                        Signals
                                        
-
-
                                        Properties
                                        
-
                                          
-
                                        • bool dockWindowsMovable - whether the dock windows are movable
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool opaqueMoving - whether dock windows are moved opaquely
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool rightJustification - whether the main window right-justifies its dock windows  (obsolete)
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool usesBigPixmaps - whether big pixmaps are enabled
                                          • 
-
                                        • bool usesTextLabel - whether text labels for toolbar buttons are enabled
                                          • 
-
                                        
-
                                        Protected Members
                                        
-
                                          
-
                                        • virtual void childEvent ( TQChildEvent * e )
                                          • 
-
                                        
-
                                        Protected Slots
                                        
-
-
                                        Related Functions
                                        
-
                                          
-
                                        • TQTextStream & operator<< ( TQTextStream & ts, const TQMainWindow & mainWindow )
                                          • 
-
                                        • TQTextStream & operator>> ( TQTextStream & ts, TQMainWindow & mainWindow )
                                          • 
-
                                        
-
                                        Detailed Description
                                        
-
-
-The TQMainWindow class provides a main application window,
-with a menu bar, dock windows (e.g. for toolbars), and a status
-bar.
-
                                         
-
-
                                         Main windows are most often used to provide menus, toolbars and a
-status bar around a large central widget, such as a text edit,
-drawing canvas or TQWorkspace (for MDI applications). TQMainWindow
-is usually subclassed since this makes it easier to encapsulate
-the central widget, menus and toolbars as well as the window's
-state. Subclassing makes it possible to create the slots that are
-called when the user clicks menu items or toolbar buttons. You can
-also create main windows using TQt
-    Designer. We'll briefly review adding menu items and
-toolbar buttons then describe the facilities of TQMainWindow
-itself.
-
                                         
                                        -    TQMainWindow *mw = new TQMainWindow;
-    TQTextEdit *edit = new TQTextEdit( mw, "editor" );
-    edit->setFocus();
-    mw->setCaption( "Main Window" );
-    mw->setCentralWidget( edit );
-    mw->show();
-    
                                        
- 
-
                                         TQMainWindows may be created in their own right as shown above.
-The central widget is set with setCentralWidget(). Popup menus can
-be added to the default menu bar, widgets can be added to the
-status bar, toolbars and dock windows can be added to any of the
-dock areas.
-
                                         
-
-
                                                ApplicationWindow *mw = new ApplicationWindow();
-        mw->setCaption( "TQt Example - Application" );
-        mw->show();
-
                                        
-
                                         In the extract above ApplicationWindow is a subclass of
-TQMainWindow that we must write for ourselves; this is the usual
-approach to using TQMainWindow. (The source for the extracts in
-this description are taken from application/main.cpp, application/application.cpp, action/main.cpp, and action/application.cpp )
-
                                         When subclassing we add the menu items and toolbars in the
-subclass's constructor. If we've created a TQMainWindow instance
-directly we can add menu items and toolbars just as easily by
-passing the TQMainWindow instance as the parent instead of the this pointer.
-
                                         
-
-
                                                TQPopupMenu * help = new TQPopupMenu( this );
-        menuBar()->insertItem( "&Help", help );
-
-        help->insertItem( "&About", this, SLOT(about()), Key_F1 );
-
                                        
-
                                         Here we've added a new menu with one menu item. The menu has been
-inserted into the menu bar that TQMainWindow provides by default
-and which is accessible through the menuBar() function. The slot
-will be called when the menu item is clicked.
-
                                         
-
-
                                                TQToolBar * fileTools = new TQToolBar( this, "file operations" );
-        fileTools->setLabel( "File Operations" );
-
                                                TQToolButton * fileOpen
-            = new TQToolButton( openIcon, "Open File", TQString::null,
-                               this, SLOT(choose()), fileTools, "open file" );
-
                                        
-
                                         This extract shows the creation of a toolbar with one toolbar
-button. TQMainWindow supplies four dock areas for toolbars. When a
-toolbar is created as a child of a TQMainWindow (or derived class)
-instance it will be placed in a dock area (the Top dock area by
-default). The slot will be called when the toolbar button is
-clicked. Any dock window can be added to a dock area either using
-addDockWindow(), or by creating a dock window with the TQMainWindow
-as the parent.
-
                                         
-
-
                                                e = new TQTextEdit( this, "editor" );
-        e->setFocus();
-        setCentralWidget( e );
-        statusBar()->message( "Ready", 2000 );
-
                                        
-
                                         Having created the menus and toolbar we create an instance of the
-large central widget, give it the focus and set it as the main
-window's central widget. In the example we've also set the status
-bar, accessed via the statusBar() function, to an initial message
-which will be displayed for two seconds. Note that you can add
-additional widgets to the status bar, for example labels, to show
-further status information. See the TQStatusBar documentation for
-details, particularly the addWidget() function.
-
                                         Often we want to synchronize a toolbar button with a menu item.
-For example, if the user clicks a 'bold' toolbar button we want
-the 'bold' menu item to be checked. This synchronization can be
-achieved automatically by creating actions and adding the actions
-to the toolbar and menu.
-
                                         
-
-
                                                TQAction * fileOpenAction;
-
                                                fileOpenAction = new TQAction( TQPixmap( fileopen ), "&Open...",
-                                      CTRL+Key_O, this, "open" );
-        connect( fileOpenAction, SIGNAL( activated() ) , this, SLOT( choose() ) );
-
                                        
-
                                         Here we create an action with an icon which will be used in any
-menu and toolbar that the action is added to. We've also given the
-action a menu name, '&Open', and a keyboard shortcut. The
-connection that we have made will be used when the user clicks
-either the menu item or the toolbar button.
-
                                         
-
-
                                                TQPopupMenu * file = new TQPopupMenu( this );
-        menuBar()->insertItem( "&File", file );
-
                                                fileOpenAction->addTo( file );
-
                                        
-
                                         The extract above shows the creation of a popup menu. We add the
-menu to the TQMainWindow's menu bar and add our action.
-
                                         
-
-
                                                TQToolBar * fileTools = new TQToolBar( this, "file operations" );
-        fileTools->setLabel( "File Operations" );
-        fileOpenAction->addTo( fileTools );
-
                                        
-
                                         Here we create a new toolbar as a child of the TQMainWindow and add
-our action to the toolbar.
-
                                         We'll now explore the functionality offered by TQMainWindow.
-
                                         The main window will take care of the dock areas, and the geometry
-of the central widget, but all other aspects of the central widget
-are left to you. TQMainWindow automatically detects the creation of
-a menu bar or status bar if you specify the TQMainWindow as parent,
-or you can use the provided menuBar() and statusBar() functions.
-The functions menuBar() and statusBar() create a suitable widget
-if one doesn't exist, and update the window's layout to make
-space.
-
                                         TQMainWindow provides a TQToolTipGroup connected to the status bar.
-The function toolTipGroup() provides access to the default
-TQToolTipGroup. It isn't possible to set a different tool tip
-group.
-
                                         New dock windows and toolbars can be added to a TQMainWindow using
-addDockWindow(). Dock windows can be moved using moveDockWindow()
-and removed with removeDockWindow(). TQMainWindow allows default
-dock window (toolbar) docking in all its dock areas (Top, Left, Right, Bottom). You can use setDockEnabled() to
-enable and disable docking areas for dock windows. When adding or
-moving dock windows you can specify their 'edge' (dock area). The
-currently available edges are: Top, Left, Right, Bottom, Minimized (effectively a 'hidden' dock area) and TornOff (floating). See TQt::Dock for an explanation of these
-areas. Note that the *ToolBar functions are included for backward
-compatibility; all new code should use the *DockWindow functions.
-TQToolbar is a subclass of TQDockWindow so all functions that work
-with dock windows work on toolbars in the same way.
-
                                         
-If the user clicks the close button, then the dock window is
-hidden. A dock window can be hidden or unhidden by the user by
-right clicking a dock area and clicking the name of the relevant
-dock window on the pop up dock window menu. This menu lists the
-names of every dock window; visible dock windows have a tick
-beside their names. The dock window menu is created automatically
-as required by createDockWindowMenu(). Since it may not always be
-appropriate for a dock window to appear on this menu the
-setAppropriate() function is used to inform the main window
-whether or not the dock window menu should include a particular
-dock window. Double clicking a dock window handle (usually on the
-left-hand side of the dock window) undocks (floats) the dock
-window. Double clicking a floating dock window's titlebar will
-dock the floating dock window. (See also
-TQMainWindow::DockWindows.)
-
                                         Some functions change the appearance of a TQMainWindow globally:
-
                                        
-
                                         The user can drag dock windows into any enabled docking area. Dock
-windows can also be dragged within a docking area, for example
-to rearrange the order of some toolbars. Dock windows can also be
-dragged outside any docking area (undocked or 'floated'). Being
-able to drag dock windows can be enabled (the default) and
-disabled using setDockWindowsMovable().
-
                                         The Minimized edge is a hidden dock area. If this dock area is
-enabled the user can hide (minimize) a dock window or show (restore)
-a minimized dock window by clicking the dock window handle. If the
-user hovers the mouse cursor over one of the handles, the caption of
-the dock window is displayed in a tool tip (see
-TQDockWindow::caption() or TQToolBar::label()), so if you enable the
-Minimized dock area, it is best to specify a meaningful caption
-or label for each dock window. To minimize a dock window
-programmatically use moveDockWindow() with an edge of Minimized.
-
                                         Dock windows are moved transparently by default, i.e. during the
-drag an outline rectangle is drawn on the screen representing the
-position of the dock window as it moves. If you want the dock
-window to be shown normally whilst it is moved use
-setOpaqueMoving().
-
                                         The location of a dock window, i.e. its dock area and position
-within the dock area, can be determined by calling getLocation().
-Movable dock windows can be lined up to minimize wasted space with
-lineUpDockWindows(). Pointers to the dock areas are available from
-topDock(), leftDock(), rightDock() and bottomDock(). A customize
-menu item is added to the pop up dock window menu if
-isCustomizable() returns TRUE; it returns FALSE by default.
-Reimplement isCustomizable() and customize() if you want to offer
-this extra menu item, for example, to allow the user to change
-settings relating to the main window and its toolbars and dock
-windows.
-
                                         The main window's menu bar is fixed (at the top) by default. If
-you want a movable menu bar, create a TQMenuBar as a stretchable
-widget inside its own movable dock window and restrict this dock
-window to only live within the Top or Bottom dock:
-
                                         
                                        -    TQToolBar *tb = new TQToolBar( this );
-    addDockWindow( tb, tr( "Menubar" ), Top, FALSE );
-    TQMenuBar *mb = new TQMenuBar( tb );
-    mb->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::NoFrame );
-    tb->setStretchableWidget( mb );
-    setDockEnabled( tb, Left, FALSE );
-    setDockEnabled( tb, Right, FALSE );
-    
                                        
- 
-
                                         An application with multiple dock windows can choose to save the
-current dock window layout in order to restore it later, e.g. in
-the next session. You can do this by using the streaming operators
-for TQMainWindow.
-
                                         To save the layout and positions of all the dock windows do this:
-
                                         
                                        -    TQFile file( filename );
-    if ( file.open( IO_WriteOnly ) ) {
-        TQTextStream stream( &file );
-        stream << *mainWindow;
-        file.close();
-    }
-    
                                        
- 
-
                                         To restore the dock window positions and sizes (normally when the
-application is next started), do following:
-
                                         
                                        -    TQFile file( filename );
-    if ( file.open( IO_ReadOnly ) ) {
-        TQTextStream stream( &file );
-        stream >> *mainWindow;
-        file.close();
-    }
-    
                                        
- 
-
                                         The TQSettings class can be used in conjunction with the streaming
-operators to store the application's settings.
-
                                         TQMainWindow's management of dock windows and toolbars is done
-transparently behind-the-scenes by TQDockArea.
-
                                         For multi-document interfaces (MDI), use a TQWorkspace as the
-central widget.
-
                                         Adding dock windows, e.g. toolbars, to TQMainWindow's dock areas is
-straightforward. If the supplied dock areas are not sufficient for
-your application we suggest that you create a TQWidget subclass and
-add your own dock areas (see TQDockArea) to the subclass since
-TQMainWindow provides functionality specific to the standard dock
-areas it provides.
-
                                          
-
                                         
                                        See also TQToolBar, TQDockWindow, TQStatusBar, TQAction, TQMenuBar, TQPopupMenu, TQToolTipGroup, TQDialog, and Main Window and Related Classes.
-
-
                                        Member Type Documentation
                                        
-
                                        TQMainWindow::DockWindows
                                        
-
-
                                         Right-clicking a dock area will pop-up the dock window menu
-(createDockWindowMenu() is called automatically). When called in
-code you can specify what items should appear on the menu with
-this enum.
-
                                          
-
                                        • TQMainWindow::OnlyToolBars - The menu will list all the toolbars, but not
-any other dock windows.
-
                                        • TQMainWindow::NoToolBars - The menu will list dock windows but not
-toolbars.
-
                                        • TQMainWindow::AllDockWindows - The menu will list all toolbars and other
-dock windows. (This is the default.)
-
                                        
-
                                        Member Function Documentation
                                        
-
                                        TQMainWindow::TQMainWindow ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = WType_TopLevel )
-
                                        
-Constructs an empty main window. The parent, name and widget
-flags f, are passed on to the TQWidget constructor.
-
                                         By default, the widget flags are set to WType_TopLevel rather
-than 0 as they are with TQWidget. If you don't want your
-TQMainWindow to be a top level widget then you will need to set f to 0.
-
-
                                        TQMainWindow::~TQMainWindow ()
-
                                        
-Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::addDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, Dock edge = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE ) [virtual]
-
                                        
-Adds dockWindow to the edge dock area.
-
                                         If newLine is FALSE (the default) then the dockWindow is
-added at the end of the edge. For vertical edges the end is at
-the bottom, for horizontal edges (including Minimized) the end
-is at the right. If newLine is TRUE a new line of dock windows
-is started with dockWindow as the first (left-most and
-top-most) dock window.
-
                                         If dockWindow is managed by another main window, it is first
-removed from that window.
-
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::addDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, const TQString & label, Dock edge = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE ) [virtual]
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         Adds dockWindow to the dock area with label label.
-
                                         If newLine is FALSE (the default) the dockWindow is added at
-the end of the edge. For vertical edges the end is at the
-bottom, for horizontal edges (including Minimized) the end is
-at the right. If newLine is TRUE a new line of dock windows is
-started with dockWindow as the first (left-most and top-most)
-dock window.
-
                                         If dockWindow is managed by another main window, it is first
-removed from that window.
-
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::addToolBar ( TQDockWindow *, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )
-
                                        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         
-
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::addToolBar ( TQDockWindow *, const TQString & label, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )
-
                                        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         
-
                                        bool TQMainWindow::appropriate ( TQDockWindow * dw ) const
-
                                        
-Returns TRUE if it is appropriate to include a menu item for the
-dw dock window in the dock window menu; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                         The user is able to change the state (show or hide) a dock window
-that has a menu item by clicking the item.
-
                                         Call setAppropriate() to indicate whether or not a particular dock
-window should appear on the popup menu.
-
                                         
                                        See also setAppropriate().
-
-
                                        TQDockArea * TQMainWindow::bottomDock () const
-
                                        
-Returns a pointer the Bottom dock area
-
                                         
                                        See also topDock(), leftDock(), and rightDock().
-
-
                                        TQWidget * TQMainWindow::centralWidget () const
-
                                        
-Returns a pointer to the main window's central widget.
-
                                         The central widget is surrounded by the left, top, right and
-bottom dock areas. The menu bar is above the top dock area.
-
                                         
                                        See also setCentralWidget().
-
-
                                        Example: qfd/qfd.cpp.
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::childEvent ( TQChildEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                                        
-Monitors events, recieved in e, to ensure the layout is updated.
-
-
                                        Reimplemented from TQObject.
-
                                        TQPopupMenu * TQMainWindow::createDockWindowMenu ( DockWindows dockWindows = AllDockWindows ) const
-
                                        
-Creates the dock window menu which contains all toolbars (if dockWindows is OnlyToolBars ), all dock windows (if dockWindows is NoToolBars) or all toolbars and dock windows (if
-dockWindows is AllDockWindows - the default).
-
                                         This function is called internally when necessary, e.g. when the
-user right clicks a dock area (providing isDockMenuEnabled()
-returns TRUE).
-
-
                                         The menu items representing the toolbars and dock windows are
-checkable. The visible dock windows are checked and the hidden
-dock windows are unchecked. The user can click a menu item to
-change its state (show or hide the dock window).
-
                                         The list and the state are always kept up-to-date.
-
                                         Toolbars and dock windows which are not appropriate in the current
-context (see setAppropriate()) are not listed in the menu.
-
                                         The menu also has a menu item for lining up the dock windows.
-
                                         If isCustomizable() returns TRUE, a Customize menu item is added
-to the menu, which if clicked will call customize(). The
-isCustomizable() function we provide returns FALSE and customize()
-does nothing, so they must be reimplemented in a subclass to be
-useful.
-
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::customize () [virtual slot]
-
                                        
-This function is called when the user clicks the Customize menu
-item on the dock window menu.
-
                                         The customize menu item will only appear if isCustomizable()
-returns TRUE (it returns FALSE by default).
-
                                         The function is intended, for example, to provide the user with a
-means of telling the application that they wish to customize the
-main window, dock windows or dock areas.
-
                                         The default implementation does nothing and the Customize menu
-item is not shown on the right-click menu by default. If you want
-the item to appear then reimplement isCustomizable() to return
-TRUE, and reimplement this function to do whatever you want.
-
                                         
                                        See also isCustomizable().
-
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::dockWindowPositionChanged ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted when the dockWindow has changed its
-position. A change in position occurs when a dock window is moved
-within its dock area or moved to another dock area (including the
-Minimized and TearOff dock areas).
-
                                         
                                        See also getLocation().
-
-
                                        TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> TQMainWindow::dockWindows ( Dock dock ) const
-
                                        
-Returns a list of all the dock windows which are in the dock
-dock area, regardless of their state.
-
                                         For example, the DockTornOff dock area may contain closed dock
-windows but these are returned along with the visible dock
-windows.
-
-
                                        TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> TQMainWindow::dockWindows () const
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         Returns the list of dock windows which belong to this main window,
-regardless of which dock area they are in or what their state is,
-(e.g. irrespective of whether they are visible or not).
-
-
                                        bool TQMainWindow::dockWindowsMovable () const
-
                                        Returns TRUE if the dock windows are movable; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "dockWindowsMovable" property for details.
-
                                        bool TQMainWindow::getLocation ( TQDockWindow * dw, Dock & dock, int & index, bool & nl, int & extraOffset ) const
-
                                        
-Finds the location of the dock window dw.
-
                                         If the dw dock window is found in the main window the function
-returns TRUE and populates the dock variable with the dw's dock
-area and the index with the dw's position within the dock area.
-It also sets nl to TRUE if the dw begins a new line
-(otherwise FALSE), and extraOffset with the dock window's offset.
-
                                         If the dw dock window is not found then the function returns
-FALSE and the state of dock, index, nl and extraOffset
-is undefined.
-
                                         If you want to save and restore dock window positions then use
-operator>>() and operator<<().
-
                                         
                                        See also operator>>() and operator<<().
-
-
                                        bool TQMainWindow::hasDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dw )
-
                                        
-Returns TRUE if dw is a dock window known to the main window;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                        bool TQMainWindow::isCustomizable () const [virtual]
-
                                        
-Returns TRUE if the dock area dock window menu includes the
-Customize menu item (which calls customize() when clicked).
-Returns FALSE by default, i.e. the popup menu will not contain a
-Customize menu item. You will need to reimplement this function
-and set it to return TRUE if you wish the user to be able to see
-the dock window menu.
-
                                         
                                        See also customize().
-
-
                                        bool TQMainWindow::isDockEnabled ( Dock dock ) const
-
                                        
-Returns TRUE if the dock dock area is enabled, i.e. it can
-accept user dragged dock windows; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                         
                                        See also setDockEnabled().
-
-
                                        bool TQMainWindow::isDockEnabled ( TQDockArea * area ) const
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         Returns TRUE if dock area area is enabled, i.e. it can accept
-user dragged dock windows; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                         
                                        See also setDockEnabled().
-
-
                                        bool TQMainWindow::isDockEnabled ( TQDockWindow * tb, Dock dock ) const
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         Returns TRUE if dock area dock is enabled for the dock window
-tb; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                         
                                        See also setDockEnabled().
-
-
                                        bool TQMainWindow::isDockEnabled ( TQDockWindow * dw, TQDockArea * area ) const
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         Returns TRUE if dock area area is enabled for the dock window
-dw; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                         
                                        See also setDockEnabled().
-
-
                                        bool TQMainWindow::isDockMenuEnabled () const
-
                                        
-Returns TRUE, if the dock window menu is enabled; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                                         The menu lists the (appropriate()) dock windows (which may be
-shown or hidden), and has a "Line Up Dock Windows" menu item. It
-will also have a "Customize" menu item if isCustomizable() returns
-TRUE.
-
                                         
                                        See also setDockEnabled(), lineUpDockWindows(), appropriate(), and setAppropriate().
-
-
                                        TQDockArea * TQMainWindow::leftDock () const
-
                                        
-Returns the Left dock area
-
                                         
                                        See also rightDock(), topDock(), and bottomDock().
-
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::lineUpDockWindows ( bool keepNewLines = FALSE )
-
                                        
-This function will line up dock windows within the visible dock
-areas (Top, Left, Right and Bottom) as compactly as
-possible.
-
                                         If keepNewLines is TRUE, all dock windows stay on their
-original lines. If keepNewLines is FALSE then newlines may be
-removed to achieve the most compact layout possible.
-
                                         The method only works if dockWindowsMovable() returns TRUE.
-
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::lineUpToolBars ( bool keepNewLines = FALSE )
-
                                        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         
-
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::menuAboutToShow () [protected slot]
-
                                        
-This slot is called from the aboutToShow() signal of the default
-dock menu of the mainwindow. The default implementation
-initializes the menu with all dock windows and toolbars in this
-slot.
-
-
-
                                        TQMenuBar * TQMainWindow::menuBar () const
-
                                        
-Returns the menu bar for this window.
-
                                         If there isn't one, then menuBar() creates an empty menu bar.
-
                                         
                                        See also statusBar().
-
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, Dock edge = DockTop ) [virtual]
-
                                        
-Moves dockWindow to the end of the edge.
-
                                         For vertical edges the end is at the bottom, for horizontal edges
-(including Minimized) the end is at the right.
-
                                         If dockWindow is managed by another main window, it is first
-removed from that window.
-
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, Dock edge, bool nl, int index, int extraOffset = -1 ) [virtual]
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         Moves dockWindow to position index within the edge dock
-area.
-
                                         Any dock windows with positions index or higher have their
-position number incremented and any of these on the same line are
-moved right (down for vertical dock areas) to make room.
-
                                         If nl is TRUE, a new dock window line is created below the line
-in which the moved dock window appears and the moved dock window,
-with any others with higher positions on the same line, is moved
-to this new line.
-
                                         The extraOffset is the space to put between the left side of
-the dock area (top side for vertical dock areas) and the dock
-window. (This is mostly used for restoring dock windows to the
-positions the user has dragged them to.)
-
                                         If dockWindow is managed by another main window, it is first
-removed from that window.
-
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::moveToolBar ( TQDockWindow *, Dock = DockTop )
-
                                        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         
-
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::moveToolBar ( TQDockWindow *, Dock, bool nl, int index, int extraOffset = -1 )
-
                                        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         
-
                                        bool TQMainWindow::opaqueMoving () const
-
                                        Returns TRUE if dock windows are moved opaquely; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "opaqueMoving" property for details.
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::pixmapSizeChanged ( bool ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted whenever the setUsesBigPixmaps() is called
-with a value different to the current setting. All widgets that
-should respond to such changes, e.g. toolbar buttons, must connect
-to this signal.
-
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::removeDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow ) [virtual]
-
                                        
-Removes dockWindow from the main window's docking area,
-provided dockWindow is non-null and managed by this main
-window.
-
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::removeToolBar ( TQDockWindow * )
-
                                        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         
-
-
                                        TQDockArea * TQMainWindow::rightDock () const
-
                                        
-Returns the Right dock area
-
                                         
                                        See also leftDock(), topDock(), and bottomDock().
-
-
                                        bool TQMainWindow::rightJustification () const
-
                                        Returns TRUE if the main window right-justifies its dock windows; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "rightJustification" property for details.
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::setAppropriate ( TQDockWindow * dw, bool a ) [virtual slot]
-
                                        
-Use this function to control whether or not the dw dock
-window's caption should appear as a menu item on the dock window
-menu that lists the dock windows.
-
                                         If a is TRUE then the dw will appear as a menu item on the
-dock window menu. The user is able to change the state (show or
-hide) a dock window that has a menu item by clicking the item;
-depending on the state of your application, this may or may not be
-appropriate. If a is FALSE the dw will not appear on the
-popup menu.
-
                                         
                                        See also showDockMenu(), isCustomizable(), and customize().
-
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::setCentralWidget ( TQWidget * w ) [virtual]
-
                                        
-Sets the central widget for this main window to w.
-
                                         The central widget is surrounded by the left, top, right and
-bottom dock areas. The menu bar is above the top dock area.
-
                                         
                                        See also centralWidget().
-
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::setDockEnabled ( Dock dock, bool enable ) [virtual]
-
                                        
-If enable is TRUE then users can dock windows in the dock
-area. If enable is FALSE users cannot dock windows in the dock dock area.
-
                                         Users can dock (drag) dock windows into any enabled dock area.
-
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::setDockEnabled ( TQDockWindow * dw, Dock dock, bool enable ) [virtual]
-
                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                         If enable is TRUE then users can dock the dw dock window in
-the dock area. If enable is FALSE users cannot dock the dw dock window in the dock area.
-
                                         In general users can dock (drag) dock windows into any enabled
-dock area. Using this function particular dock areas can be
-enabled (or disabled) as docking points for particular dock
-windows.
-
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::setDockMenuEnabled ( bool b ) [virtual slot]
-
                                        
-If b is TRUE, then right clicking on a dock window or dock area
-will pop up the dock window menu. If b is FALSE, right clicking
-a dock window or dock area will not pop up the menu.
-
                                         The menu lists the (appropriate()) dock windows (which may be
-shown or hidden), and has a "Line Up Dock Windows" item. It will
-also have a "Customize" menu item if isCustomizable() returns
-TRUE.
-
                                         
                                        See also lineUpDockWindows() and isDockMenuEnabled().
-
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::setDockWindowsMovable ( bool ) [virtual slot]
-
                                        Sets whether the dock windows are movable.
-See the "dockWindowsMovable" property for details.
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::setOpaqueMoving ( bool ) [virtual slot]
-
                                        Sets whether dock windows are moved opaquely.
-See the "opaqueMoving" property for details.
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::setRightJustification ( bool ) [virtual slot]
-
                                        Sets whether the main window right-justifies its dock windows.
-See the "rightJustification" property for details.
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::setToolBarsMovable ( bool ) [slot]
-
                                        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         
-
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::setUpLayout () [virtual protected slot]
-
                                        
-Sets up the geometry management of the window. It is called
-automatically when needed, so you shouldn't need to call it.
-
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::setUsesBigPixmaps ( bool ) [virtual slot]
-
                                        Sets whether big pixmaps are enabled.
-See the "usesBigPixmaps" property for details.
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::setUsesTextLabel ( bool ) [virtual slot]
-
                                        Sets whether text labels for toolbar buttons are enabled.
-See the "usesTextLabel" property for details.
-
                                        bool TQMainWindow::showDockMenu ( const TQPoint & globalPos ) [virtual protected slot]
-
                                        
-Shows the dock menu at the position globalPos. The menu lists
-the dock windows so that they can be shown (or hidden), lined up,
-and possibly customized. Returns TRUE if the menu is shown;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                         If you want a custom menu, reimplement this function. You can
-create the menu from scratch or call createDockWindowMenu() and
-modify the result.
-
-
-
                                        TQStatusBar * TQMainWindow::statusBar () const
-
                                        
-Returns this main window's status bar. If there isn't one,
-statusBar() creates an empty status bar, and if necessary a tool
-tip group too.
-
                                         
                                        See also menuBar() and toolTipGroup().
-
-
                                        Example: qfd/qfd.cpp.
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::toolBarPositionChanged ( TQToolBar * ) [signal]
-
                                        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         
-
-
                                        TQPtrList<TQToolBar> TQMainWindow::toolBars ( Dock dock ) const
-
                                        
-Returns a list of all the toolbars which are in the dock dock
-area, regardless of their state.
-
                                         For example, the TornOff dock area may contain closed toolbars
-but these are returned along with the visible toolbars.
-
                                         
                                        See also dockWindows().
-
-
                                        bool TQMainWindow::toolBarsMovable () const
-
                                        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         
-
-
                                        TQToolTipGroup * TQMainWindow::toolTipGroup () const
-
                                        
-Returns this main window's tool tip group. If there isn't one,
-toolTipGroup() creates an empty tool tip group.
-
                                         
                                        See also menuBar() and statusBar().
-
-
                                        TQDockArea * TQMainWindow::topDock () const
-
                                        
-Returns the Top dock area
-
                                         
                                        See also bottomDock(), leftDock(), and rightDock().
-
-
                                        bool TQMainWindow::usesBigPixmaps () const
-
                                        Returns TRUE if big pixmaps are enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "usesBigPixmaps" property for details.
-
                                        bool TQMainWindow::usesTextLabel () const
-
                                        Returns TRUE if text labels for toolbar buttons are enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "usesTextLabel" property for details.
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::usesTextLabelChanged ( bool ) [signal]
-
                                        
-
-
                                         This signal is emitted whenever the setUsesTextLabel() is called
-with a value different to the current setting. All widgets that
-should respond to such changes, e.g. toolbar buttons, must connect
-to this signal.
-
-
                                        void TQMainWindow::whatsThis () [virtual slot]
-
                                        
-Enters 'What's This?' mode and returns immediately.
-
                                         This is the same as TQWhatsThis::enterWhatsThisMode(), but
-implemented as a main window object's slot. This way it can easily
-be used for popup menus, for example:
-
                                         
                                        -    TQPopupMenu * help = new TQPopupMenu( this );
-    help->insertItem( "What's &This", this , SLOT(whatsThis()), SHIFT+Key_F1);
-    
                                        
- 
-
                                         
                                        See also TQWhatsThis::enterWhatsThisMode().
-
-
                                        Property Documentation
                                        
-
                                        bool dockWindowsMovable
                                        
-
                                        This property holds whether the dock windows are movable.
-
                                        If TRUE (the default), the user will be able to move movable dock
-windows from one TQMainWindow dock area to another, including the
-TearOff area (i.e. where the dock window floats freely as a
-window in its own right), and the Minimized area (where only
-the dock window's handle is shown below the menu bar). Moveable
-dock windows can also be moved within TQMainWindow dock areas, i.e.
-to rearrange them within a dock area.
-
                                         If FALSE the user will not be able to move any dock windows.
-
                                         By default dock windows are moved transparently (i.e. only an
-outline rectangle is shown during the drag), but this setting can
-be changed with setOpaqueMoving().
-
                                         
                                        See also setDockEnabled() and opaqueMoving.
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setDockWindowsMovable() and get this property's value with dockWindowsMovable().
-
                                        bool opaqueMoving
                                        
-
                                        This property holds whether dock windows are moved opaquely.
-
                                        If TRUE the dock windows of the main window are shown opaquely
-(i.e. it shows the toolbar as it looks when docked) whilst it is
-being moved. If FALSE (the default) they are shown transparently,
-(i.e. as an outline rectangle).
-
                                         Warning: Opaque moving of toolbars and dockwindows is known to
-have several problems. We recommend avoiding the use of this
-feature for the time being. We intend fixing the problems in a
-future release.
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setOpaqueMoving() and get this property's value with opaqueMoving().
-
                                        bool rightJustification
                                        
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                         
                                        This property holds whether the main window right-justifies its dock windows.
-
                                        If disabled (the default), stretchable dock windows are expanded,
-and non-stretchable dock windows are given the minimum space they
-need. Since most dock windows are not stretchable, this usually
-results in an unjustified right edge (or unjustified bottom edge
-for a vertical dock area). If enabled, the main window will
-right-justify its dock windows.
-
                                         
                                        See also TQDockWindow::setVerticalStretchable() and TQDockWindow::setHorizontalStretchable().
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setRightJustification() and get this property's value with rightJustification().
-
                                        bool usesBigPixmaps
                                        
-
                                        This property holds whether big pixmaps are enabled.
-
                                        If FALSE (the default), the tool buttons will use small pixmaps;
-otherwise big pixmaps will be used.
-
                                         Tool buttons and other widgets that wish to respond to this
-setting are responsible for reading the correct state on startup,
-and for connecting to the main window's widget's
-pixmapSizeChanged() signal.
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setUsesBigPixmaps() and get this property's value with usesBigPixmaps().
-
                                        bool usesTextLabel
                                        
-
                                        This property holds whether text labels for toolbar buttons are enabled.
-
                                        If disabled (the default), the tool buttons will not use text
-labels. If enabled, text labels will be used.
-
                                         Tool buttons and other widgets that wish to respond to this
-setting are responsible for reading the correct state on startup,
-and for connecting to the main window's widget's
-usesTextLabelChanged() signal.
-
                                         
                                        See also TQToolButton::usesTextLabel.
-
-
                                        Set this property's value with setUsesTextLabel() and get this property's value with usesTextLabel().
-
                                        Related Functions
                                        
-
                                        TQTextStream & operator<< ( TQTextStream & ts, const TQMainWindow & mainWindow )
-
                                        
-
-
                                         Writes the layout (sizes and positions) of the dock windows in the
-dock areas of the TQMainWindow mainWindow, including Minimized and TornOff dock windows, to the text stream ts.
-
                                         This can be used, for example, in conjunction with TQSettings to
-save the user's layout when the \mainWindow receives a closeEvent.
-
                                         
                                        See also operator>>() and closeEvent().
-
-
                                        TQTextStream & operator>> ( TQTextStream & ts, TQMainWindow & mainWindow )
-
                                        
-
-
                                         Reads the layout (sizes and positions) of the dock windows in the
-dock areas of the TQMainWindow mainWindow from the text stream,
-ts, including Minimized and TornOff dock windows.
-Restores the dock windows and dock areas to these sizes and
-positions. The layout information must be in the format produced
-by operator<<().
-
                                         This can be used, for example, in conjunction with TQSettings to
-restore the user's layout.
-
                                         
                                        See also operator<<().
-
-
-
                                        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                        
-
-
                                        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                        TQt 3.3.8
                                        
-
                                        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qmake-manual-7.html b/doc/html/qmake-manual-7.html
index 8c71e939f..2fd24c8af 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmake-manual-7.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmake-manual-7.html
@@ -56,9 +56,9 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
         #include <stdlib>
         #include <iostream>
         #include <vector>
-        #include <qapplication.h> // TQt includes
-        #include <qpushbutton.h>
-        #include <qlabel.h>
+        #include <ntqapplication.h> // TQt includes
+        #include <ntqpushbutton.h>
+        #include <ntqlabel.h>
         #include "thirdparty/include/libmain.h"
         #include "my_stable_class.h"
         ...
@@ -121,15 +121,15 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
     /* Add C++ includes here */
 
     # include <iostream>
-    # include <qapplication.h>
-    # include <qpushbutton.h>
-    # include <qlabel.h>
+    # include <ntqapplication.h>
+    # include <ntqpushbutton.h>
+    # include <ntqlabel.h>
     #endif
 
                                  
  
                                  myobject.h
                                  
-
                                      #include <qobject.h>
+
                                      #include <ntqobject.h>
 
-    class MyObject : public TQObject
+    class MyObject : public TQObject
     {
     public:
         MyObject();
@@ -138,11 +138,11 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                  
  
                                  myobject.cpp
                                  
 
                                      #include <iostream>
-    #include <qobject.h>
+    #include <ntqobject.h>
     #include "myobject.h"
 
     MyObject::MyObject()
-        : TQObject()
+        : TQObject()
     {
         std::cout << "MyObject::MyObject()\n";
     }
@@ -156,23 +156,23 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
     }
 
                                  
  
                                  main.cpp
                                  
-
                                      #include <qapplication.h>
-    #include <qpushbutton.h>
-    #include <qlabel.h>
+
                                      #include <ntqapplication.h>
+    #include <ntqpushbutton.h>
+    #include <ntqlabel.h>
     #include "myobject.h"
     #include "mydialog.h"
 
     int main(int argc, char **argv)
     {
-        TQApplication app(argc, argv);
+        TQApplication app(argc, argv);
 
         MyObject obj;
         MyDialog dia;
-        app.setMainWidget( &dia );
-        dia.connect( dia.aButton, SIGNAL(clicked()), SLOT(close()) );
+        app.setMainWidget( &dia );
+        dia.connect( dia.aButton, SIGNAL(clicked()), SLOT(close()) );
         dia.show();
 
-        return app.exec();
+        return app.exec();
     }
 
                                  
  
                                  precompile.pro
                                  
diff --git a/doc/html/qmap-h.html b/doc/html/qmap-h.html
index 40f53682d..2ff20da0d 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmap-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmap-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qmap.h Include File
+ntqmap.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                  
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                  TQMap Class Reference
                                  
-
-
                                  The TQMap class is a value-based template class that
-provides a dictionary.
-More...
-
                                  #include <qmap.h>
-
                                  List of all member functions.
-
                                  Public Members
                                  
-
                                    
-
                                  • typedef Key key_type
                                    • 
-
                                  • typedef T mapped_type
                                    • 
-
                                  • typedef TQPair<const key_type, mapped_type> value_type
                                    • 
-
                                  • typedef value_type * pointer
                                    • 
-
                                  • typedef const value_type * const_pointer
                                    • 
-
                                  • typedef value_type & reference
                                    • 
-
                                  • typedef const value_type & const_reference
                                    • 
-
                                  • typedef size_t size_type
                                    • 
-
                                  • typedef TQMapIterator<Key, T> iterator
                                    • 
-
                                  • typedef TQMapConstIterator<Key, T> const_iterator
                                    • 
-
                                  • typedef TQPair<iterator, bool> insert_pair
                                    • 
-
                                  • typedef TQMapIterator<Key, T> Iterator
                                    • 
-
                                  • typedef TQMapConstIterator<Key, T> ConstIterator
                                    • 
-
                                  • typedef T ValueType
                                    • 
-
                                  • TQMap ()
                                    • 
-
                                  • TQMap ( const TQMap<Key, T> & m )
                                    • 
-
                                  • TQMap ( const std::map<Key, T> & m )
                                    • 
-
                                  • ~TQMap ()
                                    • 
-
                                  • TQMap<Key, T> & operator= ( const TQMap<Key, T> & m )
                                    • 
-
                                  • TQMap<Key, T> & operator= ( const std::map<Key, T> & m )
                                    • 
-
                                  • iterator begin ()
                                    • 
-
                                  • iterator end ()
                                    • 
-
                                  • const_iterator begin () const
                                    • 
-
                                  • const_iterator end () const
                                    • 
-
                                  • const_iterator constBegin () const
                                    • 
-
                                  • const_iterator constEnd () const
                                    • 
-
                                  • iterator replace ( const Key & k, const T & v )
                                    • 
-
                                  • size_type size () const
                                    • 
-
                                  • bool empty () const
                                    • 
-
                                  • TQPair<iterator, bool> insert ( const value_type & x )
                                    • 
-
                                  • void erase ( iterator it )
                                    • 
-
                                  • void erase ( const key_type & k )
                                    • 
-
                                  • size_type count ( const key_type & k ) const
                                    • 
-
                                  • T & operator[] ( const Key & k )
                                    • 
-
                                  • void clear ()
                                    • 
-
                                  • iterator find ( const Key & k )
                                    • 
-
                                  • const_iterator find ( const Key & k ) const
                                    • 
-
                                  • const T & operator[] ( const Key & k ) const
                                    • 
-
                                  • bool contains ( const Key & k ) const
                                    • 
-
                                  • size_type count () const
                                    • 
-
                                  • TQValueList<Key> keys () const
                                    • 
-
                                  • TQValueList<T> values () const
                                    • 
-
                                  • bool isEmpty () const
                                    • 
-
                                  • iterator insert ( const Key & key, const T & value, bool overwrite = TRUE )
                                    • 
-
                                  • void remove ( iterator it )
                                    • 
-
                                  • void remove ( const Key & k )
                                    • 
-
                                  
-
                                  Protected Members
                                  
-
-
                                  Related Functions
                                  
-
                                    
-
                                  • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQMap<Key, T> & m )
                                    • 
-
                                  • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQMap<Key, T> & m )
                                    • 
-
                                  
-
                                  Detailed Description
                                  
-
-
-The TQMap class is a value-based template class that
-provides a dictionary.
-
                                   
-
-
-
-
                                   TQMap is a TQt implementation of an STL-like map container. It can
-be used in your application if the standard map is not
-available on all your target platforms. TQMap is part of the TQt Template Library.
-
                                   TQMap<Key, Data> defines a template instance to create a
-dictionary with keys of type Key and values of type Data. TQMap
-does not store pointers to the members of the map; instead, it
-holds a copy of every member. For this reason, TQMap is
-value-based, whereas TQPtrList and TQDict are pointer-based.
-
                                   TQMap contains and manages a collection of objects of type Data
-with associated key values of type Key and provides iterators that
-allow the contained objects to be addressed. TQMap owns the
-contained items.
-
                                   Some classes cannot be used within a TQMap. For example everything
-derived from TQObject and thus all classes that implement widgets.
-Only values can be used in a TQMap. To qualify as a value, the
-class must provide
-
                                   
                                    
-
                                  •  A copy constructor
-
                                  •  An assignment operator
-
                                  •  A default constructor, i.e. a constructor that does not take
-any arguments.
-
                                  
-
                                   Note that C++ defaults to field-by-field assignment operators and
-copy constructors if no explicit version is supplied. In many
-cases, this is sufficient.
-
                                   The class used for the key requires that the operator< is
-implemented to define ordering of the keys.
-
                                   TQMap's function naming is consistent with the other TQt classes
-(e.g., count(), isEmpty()). TQMap also provides extra functions for
-compatibility with STL algorithms, such as size() and empty().
-Programmers already familiar with the STL map can use these
-the STL-like functions if preferred.
-
                                   Example:
-
-
                                  -    #include <qstring.h>
-    #include <qmap.h>
-    #include <qstring.h>
-
-    class Employee
-    {
-    public:
-        Employee(): sn(0) {}
-        Employee( const TQString& forename, const TQString& surname, int salary )
-            : fn(forename), sn(surname), sal(salary)
-        { }
-
-        TQString forename() const { return fn; }
-        TQString surname() const { return sn; }
-        int salary() const { return sal; }
-        void setSalary( int salary ) { sal = salary; }
-
-    private:
-        TQString fn;
-        TQString sn;
-        int sal;
-    };
-
-    int main(int argc, char **argv)
-    {
-        TQApplication app( argc, argv );
-
-        typedef TQMap<TQString, Employee> EmployeeMap;
-        EmployeeMap map;
-
-        map["JD001"] = Employee("John", "Doe", 50000);
-        map["JW002"] = Employee("Jane", "Williams", 80000);
-        map["TJ001"] = Employee("Tom", "Jones", 60000);
-
-        Employee sasha( "Sasha", "Hind", 50000 );
-        map["SH001"] = sasha;
-        sasha.setSalary( 40000 );
-
-        EmployeeMap::Iterator it;
-        for ( it = map.begin(); it != map.end(); ++it ) {
-            printf( "%s: %s, %s earns %d\n",
-                    it.key().latin1(),
-                    it.data().surname().latin1(),
-                    it.data().forename().latin1(),
-                    it.data().salary() );
-        }
-        return 0;
-    }
-    
                                  
- 
-
                                   Program output:
-
                                  -    JD001: Doe, John earns 50000
-    JW002: Williams, Jane earns 80000
-    SH001: Hind, Sasha earns 50000
-    TJ001: Jones, Tom earns 60000
-    
                                  
- 
-
                                   The latest changes to Sasha's salary did not affect the value in
-the list because the map created a copy of Sasha's entry. In
-addition, notice that the items are sorted alphabetically (by key)
-when iterating over the map.
-
                                   There are several ways to find items in a map. The begin() and
-end() functions return iterators to the beginning and end of the
-map. The advantage of using an iterator is that you can move
-forward or backward by incrementing/decrementing the iterator.
-The iterator returned by end() points to the element which is one
-past the last element in the container. The past-the-end iterator
-is still associated with the map it belongs to, however it is not dereferenceable; operator*() will not return a well-defined
-value. If the map is empty, the iterator returned by begin() will
-equal the iterator returned by end().
-
                                   Another way to find an element in the map is by using the find()
-function. This returns an iterator pointing to the desired item or
-to the end() iterator if no such element exists.
-
                                   Another approach uses the operator[]. But be warned: if the map
-does not contain an entry for the element you are looking for,
-operator[] inserts a default value. If you do not know that the
-element you are searching for is really in the list, you should
-not use operator[]. The following example illustrates this:
-
                                   
                                  -        TQMap<TQString,TQString> map;
-        map["Clinton"] = "Bill";
-        str << map["Clinton"] << map["Bush"] << endl;
-    
                                  
- 
-
                                   The code fragment will print out "Clinton", "". Since the value
-associated with the "Bush" key did not exist, the map inserted a
-default value (in this case, an empty string). If you are not
-sure whether a certain element is in the map, you should use
-find() and iterators instead.
-
                                   If you just want to know whether a certain key is contained in the
-map, use the contains() function. In addition, count() tells you
-how many keys are in the map.
-
                                   It is safe to have multiple iterators at the same time. If some
-member of the map is removed, only iterators pointing to the
-removed member become invalid; inserting in the map does not
-invalidate any iterators.
-
                                   Since TQMap is value-based, there is no need to be concerned about
-deleting items in the map. The map holds its own copies and will
-free them if the corresponding member or the map itself is
-deleted.
-
                                   TQMap is implicitly shared. This means you can just make copies of
-the map in time O(1). If multiple TQMap instances share the same
-data and one is modifying the map's data, this modifying instance
-makes a copy and modifies its private copy: so it does not affect
-other instances. If a TQMap is being used in a multi-threaded
-program, you must protect all access to the map. See TQMutex.
-
                                   There are a couple of ways of inserting new items into the map.
-One uses the insert() method; the other uses operator[]:
-
                                  -    TQMap<TQString, TQString> map;
-    map["Clinton"] = "Bill";
-    map.insert( "Bush", "George" );
-    
                                  
- 
-
                                   Items can also be removed from the map in several ways. One way is
-to pass an iterator to remove(). Another way is to pass a key
-value to remove(), which will delete the entry with the requested
-key. In addition you can clear the entire map using the clear()
-method.
-
                                   
                                  See also TQMapIterator, TQt Template Library Classes, Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
-
-
                                  Member Type Documentation
                                  
-
                                  TQMap::ConstIterator
                                   
-The map's const iterator type, TQt style.
-
                                  TQMap::Iterator
                                   
-The map's iterator type, TQt style. 
-
                                  TQMap::ValueType
                                   
-Corresponds to TQPair<key_type, mapped_type>, TQt style.
-
                                  TQMap::const_iterator
                                   
-The map's const iterator type.
-
                                  TQMap::const_pointer
                                   
-Const pointer to value_type.
-
                                  TQMap::const_reference
                                   
-Const reference to value_type.
-
                                  TQMap::iterator
                                   
-The map's iterator type.
-
                                  TQMap::key_type
                                   
-The map's key type. 
-
                                  TQMap::mapped_type
                                   
-The map's data type. 
-
                                  TQMap::pointer
                                   
-Pointer to value_type.
-
                                  TQMap::reference
                                   
-Reference to value_type.
-
                                  TQMap::size_type
                                   
-An unsigned integral type, used to represent various sizes. 
-
                                  TQMap::value_type
                                   
-Corresponds to TQPair<key_type, mapped_type>. 
-
                                  Member Function Documentation
                                  
-
                                  TQMap::TQMap ()
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Constructs an empty map.
-
-
                                  TQMap::TQMap ( const TQMap<Key, T> & m )
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Constructs a copy of m.
-
                                   This operation costs O(1) time because TQMap is implicitly shared.
-This makes returning a TQMap from a function very fast. If a shared
-instance is modified, it will be copied (copy-on-write), and this
-takes O(n) time.
-
-
                                  TQMap::TQMap ( const std::map<Key, T> & m )
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Constructs a copy of m.
-
-
                                  TQMap::~TQMap ()
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Destroys the map. References to the values in the map and all
-iterators of this map become invalidated. Since TQMap is highly
-tuned for performance you won't see warnings if you use invalid
-iterators, because it is not possible for an iterator to check
-whether it is valid or not.
-
-
                                  iterator TQMap::begin ()
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Returns an iterator pointing to the first element in the map. This
-iterator equals end() if the map is empty.
-
                                   The items in the map are traversed in the order defined by
-operator<(Key, Key).
-
                                   
                                  See also end() and TQMapIterator.
-
-
                                  const_iterator TQMap::begin () const
-
                                  
-
-
                                   This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                   
                                  See also end() and TQMapConstIterator.
-
-
                                  void TQMap::clear ()
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Removes all items from the map.
-
                                   
                                  See also remove().
-
-
                                  const_iterator TQMap::constBegin () const
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Returns an iterator pointing to the first element in the map. This
-iterator equals end() if the map is empty.
-
                                   The items in the map are traversed in the order defined by
-operator<(Key, Key).
-
                                   
                                  See also constEnd() and TQMapConstIterator.
-
-
                                  const_iterator TQMap::constEnd () const
-
                                  
-
-
                                   The iterator returned by end() points to the element which is one
-past the last element in the container. The past-the-end iterator
-is still associated with the map it belongs to, but it is not
-dereferenceable; operator*() will not return a well-defined value.
-
                                   This iterator equals constBegin() if the map is empty.
-
                                   
                                  See also constBegin() and TQMapConstIterator.
-
-
                                  bool TQMap::contains ( const Key & k ) const
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Returns TRUE if the map contains an item with key k; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
-
                                  size_type TQMap::count ( const key_type & k ) const
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Returns the number of items whose key is k. Since TQMap does not
-allow duplicate keys, the return value is always 0 or 1.
-
                                   This function is provided for STL compatibility.
-
-
                                  size_type TQMap::count () const
-
                                  
-
-
                                   This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                   Returns the number of items in the map.
-
                                   
                                  See also isEmpty().
-
-
                                  void TQMap::detach () [protected]
-
                                  
-
-
                                   If the map does not share its data with another TQMap instance,
-nothing happens; otherwise the function creates a new copy of this
-map and detaches from the shared one. This function is called
-whenever the map is modified. The implicit sharing mechanism is
-implemented this way.
-
-
                                  bool TQMap::empty () const
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Returns TRUE if the map contains no items; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                   This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent
-to isEmpty().
-
                                   
                                  See also size().
-
-
                                  iterator TQMap::end ()
-
                                  
-
-
                                   The iterator returned by end() points to the element which is one
-past the last element in the container. The past-the-end iterator
-is still associated with the map it belongs to, but it is not
-dereferenceable; operator*() will not return a well-defined value.
-
                                   This iterator equals begin() if the map is empty.
-
                                   
                                  See also begin() and TQMapIterator.
-
-
                                  const_iterator TQMap::end () const
-
                                  
-
-
                                   This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                   
-
                                  void TQMap::erase ( iterator it )
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Removes the item associated with the iterator it from the map.
-
                                   This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent
-to remove().
-
                                   
                                  See also clear().
-
-
                                  void TQMap::erase ( const key_type & k )
-
                                  
-
-
                                   This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                   Removes the item with the key k from the map.
-
-
                                  iterator TQMap::find ( const Key & k )
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Returns an iterator pointing to the element with key k in the
-map.
-
                                   Returns end() if no key matched.
-
                                   
                                  See also TQMapIterator.
-
-
                                  const_iterator TQMap::find ( const Key & k ) const
-
                                  
-
-
                                   This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                   Returns an iterator pointing to the element with key k in the
-map.
-
                                   Returns end() if no key matched.
-
                                   
                                  See also TQMapConstIterator.
-
-
                                  iterator TQMap::insert ( const Key & key, const T & value, bool overwrite = TRUE )
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Inserts a new item with the key, key, and a value of value.
-If there is already an item whose key is key, that item's value
-is replaced with value, unless overwrite is FALSE (it is
-TRUE by default). In this case an iterator to this item is
-returned, else an iterator to the new item is returned.
-
                                   
-
                                  TQPair<iterator, bool> TQMap::insert ( const value_type & x )
-
                                  
-
-
                                   This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                   Inserts the (key, value) pair x into the map. x is a TQPair
-whose first element is a key to be inserted and whose second
-element is the associated value to be inserted. Returns a pair
-whose first element is an iterator pointing to the inserted
-item and whose second element is a bool indicating TRUE if x
-was inserted and FALSE if it was not inserted, e.g. because it was
-already present.
-
                                   
                                  See also replace().
-
-
                                  bool TQMap::isEmpty () const
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Returns TRUE if the map contains no items; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                   
                                  See also count().
-
-
                                  TQValueList<Key> TQMap::keys () const
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Returns a list of all the keys in the map, in order.
-
-
                                  TQMap<Key, T> & TQMap::operator= ( const TQMap<Key, T> & m )
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Assigns m to this map and returns a reference to this map.
-
                                   All iterators of the current map become invalidated by this
-operation. The cost of such an assignment is O(1), because TQMap is
-implicitly shared.
-
-
                                  TQMap<Key, T> & TQMap::operator= ( const std::map<Key, T> & m )
-
                                  
-
-
                                   This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                   Assigns m to this map and returns a reference to this map.
-
                                   All iterators of the current map become invalidated by this
-operation.
-
-
                                  T & TQMap::operator[] ( const Key & k )
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Returns the value associated with the key k. If no such key is
-present, an empty item is inserted with this key and a reference
-to the empty item is returned.
-
                                   You can use this operator both for reading and writing:
-
                                  -    TQMap<TQString, TQString> map;
-    map["Clinton"] = "Bill";
-    stream << map["Clinton"];
-    
                                  
- 
-
-
                                  const T & TQMap::operator[] ( const Key & k ) const
-
                                  
-
-
                                   This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                   Warning: This function differs from the non-const version of the
-same function. It will not insert an empty value if the key k does not exist. This may lead to logic errors in your program.
-You should check if the element exists before calling this
-function.
-
                                   Returns the value associated with the key k. If no such key is
-present, a reference to an empty item is returned.
-
-
                                  void TQMap::remove ( iterator it )
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Removes the item associated with the iterator it from the map.
-
                                   
                                  See also clear().
-
-
                                  void TQMap::remove ( const Key & k )
-
                                  
-
-
                                   This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                   Removes the item with the key k from the map.
-
-
                                  iterator TQMap::replace ( const Key & k, const T & v )
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Replaces the value of the element with key k, with the value v.
-
                                   
                                  See also insert() and remove().
-
-
                                  size_type TQMap::size () const
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Returns the number of items in the map.
-
                                   This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent
-to count().
-
                                   
                                  See also empty().
-
-
                                  TQValueList<T> TQMap::values () const
-
                                  
-
-
                                   Returns a list of all the values in the map, in key order.
-
-
                                  Related Functions
                                  
-
                                  TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQMap<Key, T> & m )
-
                                  
-
-
                                   
-
                                   Writes the map m to the stream s. The types Key and T
-must implement the streaming operator as well.
-
-
                                  TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQMap<Key, T> & m )
-
                                  
-
-
                                   
-
                                   Reads the map m from the stream s. The types Key and T
-must implement the streaming operator as well.
-
-
-
                                  
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                  
-
-
                                  Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                  TQt 3.3.8
                                  
-
                                  
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qmapconstiterator-members.html b/doc/html/qmapconstiterator-members.html
index b2274b8bf..b8ef30575 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmapconstiterator-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmapconstiterator-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qmapconstiterator.html b/doc/html/qmapconstiterator.html
index 661fd3f41..564e0358e 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmapconstiterator.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmapconstiterator.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                  The TQMapConstIterator class provides an iterator for TQMap.
 More...
-
                                  #include <qmap.h>
+
                                  #include <ntqmap.h>
 
                                  List of all member functions.
 
                                  Public Members
                                  
 
                                    
@@ -58,15 +58,15 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                    Detailed Description
                                    
 
 
-The TQMapConstIterator class provides an iterator for TQMap.
+The TQMapConstIterator class provides an iterator for TQMap.
 
                                     
 
 
                                     In contrast to TQMapIterator, this class is used to iterate over a
 const map. It does not allow you to modify the values of the map
 because this would break the const semantics.
 
                                     For more information on TQMap iterators, see TQMapIterator and
-the TQMap example.
-
                                     
                                    See also TQMap, TQMapIterator, TQt Template Library Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+the TQMap example.
+
                                     
                                    See also TQMap, TQMapIterator, TQt Template Library Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
 
 
                                    Member Type Documentation
                                    
 
                                    TQMapConstIterator::iterator_category
                                     
diff --git a/doc/html/qmapiterator-members.html b/doc/html/qmapiterator-members.html
index 3eae66269..306fabd2f 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmapiterator-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmapiterator-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qmapiterator.html b/doc/html/qmapiterator.html
index 2c5d6c73a..c01c59102 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmapiterator.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmapiterator.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                    The TQMapIterator class provides an iterator for TQMap.
 More...
-
                                    #include <qmap.h>
+
                                    #include <ntqmap.h>
 
                                    List of all member functions.
 
                                    Public Members
                                    
 
                                      
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                      Detailed Description
                                      
 
 
-The TQMapIterator class provides an iterator for TQMap.
+The TQMapIterator class provides an iterator for TQMap.
 
                                       
 
 
                                       You cannot create an iterator by yourself. Instead, you must ask a
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ map to give you one. An iterator is as big as a pointer; on 32-bit
 machines that means 4 bytes, on 64-bit machines, 8 bytes. That
 makes copying iterators very fast. Iterators behave in a similar
 way to pointers, and they are almost as fast as pointers. See the
-TQMap example.
+TQMap example.
 
                                       TQMap is highly optimized for performance and memory usage, but the
 trade-off is that you must be more careful. The only way to
 traverse a map is to use iterators. TQMap does not know about its
@@ -77,11 +77,11 @@ up to you to make sure that the iterators you are using are still
 valid. TQDictIterator will be able to give warnings, whereas
 TQMapIterator may end up in an undefined state.
 
                                       For every Iterator there is also a ConstIterator. You must use the
-ConstIterator to access a TQMap in a const environment or if the
+ConstIterator to access a TQMap in a const environment or if the
 reference or pointer to the map is itself const. Its semantics are
 the same, but it only returns const references to the item it
 points to.
-
                                       
                                      See also TQMap, TQMapConstIterator, TQt Template Library Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
                                       
                                      See also TQMap, TQMapConstIterator, TQt Template Library Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
 
 
                                      Member Type Documentation
                                      
 
                                      TQMapIterator::iterator_category
                                       
diff --git a/doc/html/qmemarray-h.html b/doc/html/qmemarray-h.html
index f65d67a7b..e8555bc02 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmemarray-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmemarray-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qmemarray.h Include File
+ntqmemarray.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                      
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                      TQMemArray Class Reference
                                      
-
-
                                      The TQMemArray class is a template class that provides arrays of simple types.
-More...
-
                                      All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
                                      
-
                                      #include <qmemarray.h>
-
                                      Inherited by TQByteArray and TQPointArray.
-
                                      List of all member functions.
-
                                      Public Members
                                      
-
                                        
-
                                      • typedef type * Iterator
                                        • 
-
                                      • typedef const type * ConstIterator
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQMemArray ()
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQMemArray ( int size )
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQMemArray ( const TQMemArray<type> & a )
                                        • 
-
                                      • ~TQMemArray ()
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQMemArray<type> & operator= ( const TQMemArray<type> & a )
                                        • 
-
                                      • type * data () const
                                        • 
-
                                      • uint nrefs () const
                                        • 
-
                                      • uint size () const
                                        • 
-
                                      • uint count () const
                                        • 
-
                                      • bool isEmpty () const
                                        • 
-
                                      • bool isNull () const
                                        • 
-
                                      • bool resize ( uint size )
                                        • 
-
                                      • bool resize ( uint size, Optimization optim )
                                        • 
-
                                      • bool truncate ( uint pos )
                                        • 
-
                                      • bool fill ( const type & v, int size = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • virtual void detach ()
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQMemArray<type> copy () const
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQMemArray<type> & assign ( const TQMemArray<type> & a )
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQMemArray<type> & assign ( const type * data, uint size )
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQMemArray<type> & duplicate ( const TQMemArray<type> & a )
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQMemArray<type> & duplicate ( const type * data, uint size )
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQMemArray<type> & setRawData ( const type * data, uint size )
                                        • 
-
                                      • void resetRawData ( const type * data, uint size )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int find ( const type & v, uint index = 0 ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • int contains ( const type & v ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • void sort ()
                                        • 
-
                                      • int bsearch ( const type & v ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • type & operator[] ( int index ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • type & at ( uint index ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • operator const type * () const
                                        • 
-
                                      • bool operator== ( const TQMemArray<type> & a ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • bool operator!= ( const TQMemArray<type> & a ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • Iterator begin ()
                                        • 
-
                                      • Iterator end ()
                                        • 
-
                                      • ConstIterator begin () const
                                        • 
-
                                      • ConstIterator end () const
                                        • 
-
                                      
-
                                      Protected Members
                                      
-
-
                                      Related Functions
                                      
-
                                        
-
                                      • Q_UINT16 qChecksum ( const char * data, uint len )
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQByteArray & a )
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQByteArray & a )
                                        • 
-
                                      
-
                                      Detailed Description
                                      
-
-
-
-The TQMemArray class is a template class that provides arrays of simple types.
-
                                       
-
                                       TQMemArray is implemented as a template class. Define a template
-instance TQMemArray<X> to create an array that contains X items.
-
                                       TQMemArray stores the array elements directly in the array. It can
-only deal with simple types (i.e. C++ types, structs, and classes
-that have no constructors, destructors, or virtual functions).
-TQMemArray uses bitwise operations to copy and compare array
-elements. 
-
                                       The TQPtrVector collection class is also a kind of array. Like most
-collection classes, it uses pointers
-to the contained items.
-
                                       TQMemArray uses explicit sharing with a
-reference count. If more than one array shares common data and one
-of the arrays is modified, all the arrays are modified.
-
                                       The benefit of sharing is that a program does not need to duplicate
-data when it is not required, which results in lower memory use
-and less copying of data.
-
                                       An alternative to TQMemArray is TQValueVector. The TQValueVector class
-also provides an array of objects, but can deal with objects that
-have constructors (specifically a copy constructor and a default
-constructor). TQValueVector provides an STL-compatible syntax and is
-implicitly shared.
-
                                       Example:
-
                                      -    #include <qmemarray.h>
-    #include <stdio.h>
-
-    TQMemArray<int> fib( int num ) // returns fibonacci array
-    {
-        Q_ASSERT( num > 2 );
-        TQMemArray<int> f( num ); // array of ints
-
-        f[0] = f[1] = 1;
-        for ( int i = 2; i < num; i++ )
-            f[i] = f[i-1] + f[i-2];
-
-        return f;
-    }
-
-    int main()
-    {
-        TQMemArray<int> a = fib( 6 ); // get first 6 fibonaccis
-        for ( int i = 0; i < a.size(); i++ )
-            qDebug( "%d: %d", i, a[i] );
-
-        qDebug( "1 is found %d times", a.contains(1) );
-        qDebug( "5 is found at index %d", a.find(5) );
-
-        return 0;
-    }
-    
                                      
- 
-
                                       Program output:
-
                                      -    0: 1
-    1: 1
-    2: 2
-    3: 3
-    4: 5
-    5: 8
-    1 is found 2 times
-    5 is found at index 4
-    
                                      
- 
-
                                       Note concerning the use of TQMemArray for manipulating structs or
-classes: Compilers will often pad the size of structs of odd sizes
-up to the nearest word boundary. This will then be the size
-TQMemArray will use for its bitwise element comparisons. Because
-the remaining bytes will typically be uninitialized, this can
-cause find() etc. to fail to find the element. Example:
-
                                       
                                      -    // MyStruct may be padded to 4 or 8 bytes
-    struct MyStruct
-    {
-        short i; // 2 bytes
-        char c;  // 1 byte
-    };
-
-    TQMemArray<MyStruct> a(1);
-    a[0].i = 5;
-    a[0].c = 't';
-
-    MyStruct x;
-    x.i = '5';
-    x.c = 't';
-    int i = a.find( x ); // may return -1 if the pad bytes differ
-    
                                      
- 
-
                                       To work around this, make sure that you use a struct where
-sizeof() returns the same as the sum of the sizes of the members
-either by changing the types of the struct members or by adding
-dummy members.
-
                                       TQMemArray data can be traversed by iterators (see begin() and
-end()). The number of items is returned by count(). The array can
-be resized with resize() and filled using fill().
-
                                       You can make a shallow copy of the array with assign() (or
-operator=()) and a deep copy with duplicate().
-
                                       Search for values in the array with find() and contains(). For
-sorted arrays (see sort()) you can search using bsearch().
-
                                       You can set the data directly using setRawData() and
-resetRawData(), although this requires care.
-
                                       
                                      See also Shared Classes and Non-GUI Classes.
-
-
                                      Member Type Documentation
                                      
-
                                      TQMemArray::ConstIterator
                                       
-A const TQMemArray iterator.
-
                                      See also begin() and end().
-
-
                                      TQMemArray::Iterator
                                       
-A TQMemArray iterator.
-
                                      See also begin() and end().
-
-
                                      Member Function Documentation
                                      
-
                                      TQMemArray::TQMemArray ( int, int ) [protected]
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Constructs an array without allocating array space. The
-arguments should be (0, 0). Use at your own risk.
-
-
                                      TQMemArray::TQMemArray ()
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Constructs a null array.
-
                                       
                                      See also isNull().
-
-
                                      TQMemArray::TQMemArray ( int size )
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Constructs an array with room for size elements. Makes a null
-array if size == 0.
-
                                       The elements are left uninitialized.
-
                                       
                                      See also resize() and isNull().
-
-
                                      TQMemArray::TQMemArray ( const TQMemArray<type> & a )
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Constructs a shallow copy of a.
-
                                       
                                      See also assign().
-
-
                                      TQMemArray::~TQMemArray ()
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Dereferences the array data and deletes it if this was the last
-reference.
-
-
                                      TQMemArray<type> & TQMemArray::assign ( const TQMemArray<type> & a )
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Shallow copy. Dereferences the current array and references the
-data contained in a instead. Returns a reference to this array.
-
                                       
                                      See also operator=().
-
-
                                      TQMemArray<type> & TQMemArray::assign ( const type * data, uint size )
-
                                      
-
-
                                       This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Shallow copy. Dereferences the current array and references the
-array data data, which contains size elements. Returns a
-reference to this array.
-
                                       Do not delete data later; TQMemArray will call free() on it
-at the right time.
-
-
                                      type & TQMemArray::at ( uint index ) const
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Returns a reference to the element at position index in the array.
-
                                       This can be used to both read and set an element.
-
                                       
                                      See also operator[]().
-
-
                                      Iterator TQMemArray::begin ()
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Returns an iterator pointing at the beginning of this array. This
-iterator can be used in the same way as the iterators of
-TQValueList and TQMap, for example.
-
-
                                      ConstIterator TQMemArray::begin () const
-
                                      
-
-
                                       This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Returns a const iterator pointing at the beginning of this array.
-This iterator can be used in the same way as the iterators of
-TQValueList and TQMap, for example.
-
-
                                      int TQMemArray::bsearch ( const type & v ) const
-
                                      
-
-
                                       In a sorted array (as sorted by sort()), finds the first
-occurrence of v by using a binary search. For a sorted
-array this is generally much faster than find(), which does
-a linear search.
-
                                       Returns the position of v, or -1 if v could not be found.
-
                                       
                                      See also sort() and find().
-
-
                                      int TQMemArray::contains ( const type & v ) const
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Returns the number of times v occurs in the array.
-
                                       
                                      See also find().
-
-
                                      TQMemArray<type> TQMemArray::copy () const
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Returns a deep copy of this array.
-
                                       
                                      See also detach() and duplicate().
-
-
                                      uint TQMemArray::count () const
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Returns the same as size().
-
                                       
                                      See also size().
-
-
                                      Example: scribble/scribble.cpp.
-
                                      type * TQMemArray::data () const
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Returns a pointer to the actual array data.
-
                                       The array is a null array if data() == 0 (null pointer).
-
                                       
                                      See also isNull().
-
-
                                      Examples: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp and network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                      void TQMemArray::detach () [virtual]
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Detaches this array from shared array data; i.e. it makes a
-private, deep copy of the data.
-
                                       Copying will be performed only if the reference
-    count is greater than one.
-
                                       
                                      See also copy().
-
-
                                      Reimplemented in TQBitArray.
-
                                      TQMemArray<type> & TQMemArray::duplicate ( const TQMemArray<type> & a )
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Deep copy. Dereferences the current array and obtains a copy of
-the data contained in a instead. Returns a reference to this
-array.
-
                                       
                                      See also copy().
-
-
                                      TQMemArray<type> & TQMemArray::duplicate ( const type * data, uint size )
-
                                      
-
-
                                       This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Deep copy. Dereferences the current array and obtains a copy of
-the array data data instead. Returns a reference to this array.
-The size of the array is given by size.
-
                                       
                                      See also copy().
-
-
                                      Iterator TQMemArray::end ()
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Returns an iterator pointing behind the last element of this
-array. This iterator can be used in the same way as the iterators
-of TQValueList and TQMap, for example.
-
-
                                      ConstIterator TQMemArray::end () const
-
                                      
-
-
                                       This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Returns a const iterator pointing behind the last element of this
-array. This iterator can be used in the same way as the iterators
-of TQValueList and TQMap, for example. 
-
-
                                      bool TQMemArray::fill ( const type & v, int size = -1 )
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Fills the array with the value v. If size is specified as
-different from -1, then the array will be resized before being
-filled.
-
                                       Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if size is -1, or size is
-!= -1 and the memory can be allocated; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                       
                                      See also resize().
-
-
                                      int TQMemArray::find ( const type & v, uint index = 0 ) const
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Finds the first occurrence of v, starting at position index.
-
                                       Returns the position of v, or -1 if v could not be found.
-
                                       
                                      See also contains().
-
-
                                      bool TQMemArray::isEmpty () const
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Returns TRUE if the array is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                       isEmpty() is equivalent to isNull() for TQMemArray (unlike
-TQString).
-
-
                                      bool TQMemArray::isNull () const
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Returns TRUE if the array is null; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                       A null array has size() == 0 and data() == 0.
-
-
                                      uint TQMemArray::nrefs () const
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Returns the reference count for the shared array data. This
-reference count is always greater than zero.
-
-
                                      TQMemArray::operator const type * () const
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Cast operator. Returns a pointer to the array.
-
                                       
                                      See also data().
-
-
                                      bool TQMemArray::operator!= ( const TQMemArray<type> & a ) const
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Returns TRUE if this array is different from a; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                                       The two arrays are compared bitwise.
-
                                       
                                      See also operator==().
-
-
                                      TQMemArray<type> & TQMemArray::operator= ( const TQMemArray<type> & a )
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Assigns a shallow copy of a to this array and returns a
-reference to this array.
-
                                       Equivalent to assign( a ).
-
-
                                      bool TQMemArray::operator== ( const TQMemArray<type> & a ) const
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Returns TRUE if this array is equal to a; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                       The two arrays are compared bitwise.
-
                                       
                                      See also operator!=().
-
-
                                      type & TQMemArray::operator[] ( int index ) const
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Returns a reference to the element at position index in the
-array.
-
                                       This can be used to both read and set an element. Equivalent to
-at().
-
                                       
                                      See also at().
-
-
                                      void TQMemArray::resetRawData ( const type * data, uint size )
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Removes internal references to the raw data that was set using
-setRawData(). This means that TQMemArray no longer has access to
-the data, so you are free to manipulate data as you wish.
-You can now use the TQMemArray without affecting the original data, for example by calling setRawData() with a pointer to some
-other data.
-
                                       The arguments must be the data and length, size, that were
-passed to setRawData(). This is for consistency checking.
-
                                       
                                      See also setRawData().
-
-
                                      bool TQMemArray::resize ( uint size, Optimization optim )
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Resizes (expands or shrinks) the array to size elements. The
-array becomes a null array if size == 0.
-
                                       Returns TRUE if successful, or FALSE if the memory cannot be
-allocated.
-
                                       New elements are not initialized.
-
                                       optim is either TQGArray::MemOptim (the default) or
-TQGArray::SpeedOptim.
-
                                       Note: By default, SpeedOptim is not available for general
-use since it is only available if TQt is built in a particular
-configuration.
-
                                       
                                      See also size().
-
-
                                      Example: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
-
                                      bool TQMemArray::resize ( uint size )
-
                                      
-
-
                                       This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Resizes (expands or shrinks) the array to size elements. The
-array becomes a null array if size == 0.
-
                                       Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the memory can be allocated;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                       New elements are not initialized.
-
                                       
                                      See also size().
-
-
                                      TQMemArray<type> & TQMemArray::setRawData ( const type * data, uint size )
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Sets raw data and returns a reference to the array.
-
                                       Dereferences the current array and sets the new array data to data and the new array size to size. Do not attempt to resize
-or re-assign the array data when raw data has been set. Call
-resetRawData(data, size) to reset the array.
-
                                       Setting raw data is useful because it sets TQMemArray data without
-allocating memory or copying data.
-
                                       Example I (intended use):
-
                                      -    static char bindata[] = { 231, 1, 44, ... };
-    TQByteArray  a;
-    a.setRawData( bindata, sizeof(bindata) );   // a points to bindata
-    TQDataStream s( a, IO_ReadOnly );            // open on a's data
-    s >> <something>;                           // read raw bindata
-    a.resetRawData( bindata, sizeof(bindata) ); // finished
-    
                                      
- 
-
                                       Example II (you don't want to do this):
-
                                      -    static char bindata[] = { 231, 1, 44, ... };
-    TQByteArray  a, b;
-    a.setRawData( bindata, sizeof(bindata) );   // a points to bindata
-    a.resize( 8 );                              // will crash
-    b = a;                                      // will crash
-    a[2] = 123;                                 // might crash
-    // forget to resetRawData: will crash
-    
                                      
- 
-
                                       Warning: If you do not call resetRawData(), TQMemArray will attempt
-to deallocate or reallocate the raw data, which might not be too
-good. Be careful.
-
                                       
                                      See also resetRawData().
-
-
                                      uint TQMemArray::size () const
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Returns the size of the array (maximum number of elements).
-
                                       The array is a null array if size() == 0.
-
                                       
                                      See also isNull() and resize().
-
-
                                      void TQMemArray::sort ()
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Sorts the array elements in ascending order, using bitwise
-comparison (memcmp()).
-
                                       
                                      See also bsearch().
-
-
                                      bool TQMemArray::truncate ( uint pos )
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Truncates the array at position pos.
-
                                       Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the memory can be allocated;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                       Equivalent to resize(pos).
-
                                       
                                      See also resize().
-
-
                                      Related Functions
                                      
-
                                      TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQByteArray & a )
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Writes byte array a to the stream s and returns a reference
-to the stream.
-
                                       
                                      See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
                                      TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQByteArray & a )
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Reads a byte array into a from the stream s and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
                                       
                                      See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
                                      Q_UINT16 qChecksum ( const char * data, uint len )
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Returns the CRC-16 checksum of len bytes starting at data.
-
                                       The checksum is independent of the byte order (endianness).
-
-
-
                                      
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                      
-
-
                                      Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                      TQt 3.3.8
                                      
-
                                      
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qmenubar-h.html b/doc/html/qmenubar-h.html
index a29e644cc..8e9690482 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmenubar-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmenubar-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qmenubar.h Include File
+ntqmenubar.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                      
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                      TQMenuBar Class Reference
                                      
-
-
                                      The TQMenuBar class provides a horizontal menu bar.
-More...
-
                                      #include <qmenubar.h>
-
                                      Inherits TQFrame and TQMenuData.
-
                                      List of all member functions.
-
                                      Public Members
                                      
-
                                        
-
                                      • TQMenuBar ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • ~TQMenuBar ()
                                        • 
-
                                      • virtual void show ()
                                        • 
-
                                      • virtual void hide ()
                                        • 
-
                                      • virtual int heightForWidth ( int max_width ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • enum Separator { Never = 0, InWindowsStyle = 1 }
                                        • 
-
                                      • Separator separator () const  (obsolete)
                                        • 
-
                                      • virtual void setSeparator ( Separator when )  (obsolete)
                                        • 
-
                                      • void setDefaultUp ( bool )
                                        • 
-
                                      • bool isDefaultUp () const
                                        • 
-
                                      
-
                                      Signals
                                      
-
-
                                      Important Inherited Members
                                      
-
                                        
-
                                      • int insertItem ( const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int insertItem ( const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int insertItem ( const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int insertItem ( TQWidget * widget, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, TQCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int insertItem ( TQCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int insertSeparator ( int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • void removeItem ( int id )
                                        • 
-
                                      • void clear ()
                                        • 
-
                                      • bool isItemEnabled ( int id ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • void setItemEnabled ( int id, bool enable )
                                        • 
-
                                      • bool isItemVisible ( int id ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • void setItemVisible ( int id, bool visible )
                                        • 
-
                                      
-
                                      Properties
                                      
-
                                        
-
                                      • bool defaultUp - the popup orientation
                                        • 
-
                                      • Separator separator - in which cases a menubar sparator is drawn  (obsolete)
                                        • 
-
                                      
-
                                      Protected Members
                                      
-
-
                                      Detailed Description
                                      
-
-
-The TQMenuBar class provides a horizontal menu bar.
-
                                       
-
-
                                       A menu bar consists of a list of pull-down menu items. You add
-menu items with insertItem(). For example, asuming that menubar is a
-pointer to a TQMenuBar and filemenu is a pointer to a
-TQPopupMenu, the following statement inserts the menu into the menu
-bar:
-
                                      -    menubar->insertItem( "&File", filemenu );
-    
                                      
- 
-The ampersand in the menu item's text sets Alt+F as a shortcut for
-this menu. (You can use "&&" to get a real ampersand in the menu
-bar.)
-
                                       Items are either enabled or disabled. You toggle their state with
-setItemEnabled().
-
                                       There is no need to lay out a menu bar. It automatically sets its
-own geometry to the top of the parent widget and changes it
-appropriately whenever the parent is resized.
-
                                       
-
                                       Example of creating a menu bar with menu items (from menu/menu.cpp):
-
-
-
                                              TQPopupMenu *file = new TQPopupMenu( this );
-
                                              file->insertItem( p1, "&Open",  this, SLOT(open()), CTRL+Key_O );
-        file->insertItem( p2, "&New", this, SLOT(news()), CTRL+Key_N );
-
                                              menu = new TQMenuBar( this );
-
                                              menu->insertItem( "&File", file );
-
                                      
-
                                       In most main window style applications you would use the menuBar()
-provided in TQMainWindow, adding TQPopupMenus to the menu bar
-and adding TQActions to the popup menus.
-
                                       Example (from action/application.cpp):
-
-
-
                                              TQPopupMenu * file = new TQPopupMenu( this );
-        menuBar()->insertItem( "&File", file );
-        fileNewAction->addTo( file );
-
                                      
-
                                       Menu items can have text and pixmaps (or iconsets), see the
-various insertItem()
-overloads, as well as separators, see insertSeparator(). You can
-also add custom menu items that are derived from
-TQCustomMenuItem.
-
                                       Menu items may be removed with removeItem() and enabled or
-disabled with setItemEnabled().
-
                                        
-
                                       
                                       TQMenuBar on TQt/Mac
-
                                      
-
                                       TQMenuBar on TQt/Mac is a wrapper for using the system-wide menubar.
-If you have multiple menubars in one dialog the outermost menubar
-(normally inside a widget with widget flag WType_TopLevel) will
-be used for the system-wide menubar.
-
                                       Note that arbitrary TQt widgets cannot be inserted into a
-TQMenuBar on the Mac because TQt uses Mac's native menus which don't
-support this functionality. This limitation does not apply to
-stand-alone TQPopupMenus.
-
                                       TQt/Mac also provides a menubar merging feature to make TQMenuBar
-conform more closely to accepted Mac OS X menubar layout. The
-merging functionality is based on string matching the title of a
-TQPopupMenu entry. These strings are translated (using
-TQObject::tr()) in the "TQMenuBar" context. If an entry is moved its
-slots will still fire as if it was in the original place. The
-table below outlines the strings looked for and where the entry is
-placed if matched:
-
                                       
                                      
-
                                       String matches Placement Notes
-
                                       about.*
-Application Menu | About 
-If this entry is not found no About item will appear in
-the Application Menu
-
                                       config, options, setup, settings or preferences
-Application Menu | Preferences
-If this entry is not found the Settings item will be disabled
-
                                       quit or exit
-Application Menu | Quit 
-If this entry is not found a default Quit item will be
-created to call TQApplication::quit()
-
                                      
-
                                       menu/menu.cpp is an example of
-TQMenuBar and TQPopupMenu use.
-
                                       
                                      See also TQPopupMenu, TQAccel, TQAction, Aqua Style Guidelines, GUI Design Handbook: Menu Bar, and Main Window and Related Classes.
-
-
                                      Member Type Documentation
                                      
-
                                      TQMenuBar::Separator
                                      
-
-
                                       This enum type is used to decide whether TQMenuBar should draw a
-separator line at its bottom.
-
                                        
-
                                      • TQMenuBar::Never - In many applications there is already a separator,
-and having two looks wrong.
-
                                      • TQMenuBar::InWindowsStyle - In some other applications a separator looks
-good in Windows style, but nowhere else.
-
                                      
-
                                      Member Function Documentation
                                      
-
                                      TQMenuBar::TQMenuBar ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                      
-Constructs a menu bar called name with parent parent.
-
-
                                      TQMenuBar::~TQMenuBar ()
-
                                      
-Destroys the menu bar.
-
-
                                      void TQMenuBar::activated ( int id ) [signal]
-
                                      
-
-
                                       This signal is emitted when a menu item is selected; id is the
-id of the selected item.
-
                                       Normally you will connect each menu item to a single slot using
-TQMenuData::insertItem(), but sometimes you will want to connect
-several items to a single slot (most often if the user selects
-from an array). This signal is useful in such cases.
-
                                       
                                      See also highlighted() and TQMenuData::insertItem().
-
-
                                      Example: progress/progress.cpp.
-
                                      void TQMenuData::clear ()
-
                                      
-Removes all menu items.
-
                                       
                                      See also removeItem() and removeItemAt().
-
-
                                      Examples: mdi/application.cpp and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
-
                                      void TQMenuBar::drawContents ( TQPainter * p ) [virtual protected]
-
                                      
-Called from TQFrame::paintEvent(). Draws the menu bar contents
-using painter p.
-
-
                                      Reimplemented from TQFrame.
-
                                      int TQMenuBar::heightForWidth ( int max_width ) const [virtual]
-
                                      
-Returns the height that the menu would resize itself to if its
-parent (and hence itself) resized to the given max_width. This
-can be useful for simple layout tasks in which the height of the
-menu bar is needed after items have been inserted. See showimg/showimg.cpp for an example of the usage.
-
-
                                      Example: showimg/showimg.cpp.
-
                                      Reimplemented from TQWidget.
-
                                      void TQMenuBar::hide () [virtual]
-
                                      
-Reimplements TQWidget::hide() in order to deselect any selected
-item, and calls setUpLayout() for the main window.
-
-
                                      Example: grapher/grapher.cpp.
-
                                      Reimplemented from TQWidget.
-
                                      void TQMenuBar::highlighted ( int id ) [signal]
-
                                      
-
-
                                       This signal is emitted when a menu item is highlighted; id is
-the id of the highlighted item.
-
                                       Normally, you will connect each menu item to a single slot using
-TQMenuData::insertItem(), but sometimes you will want to connect
-several items to a single slot (most often if the user selects
-from an array). This signal is useful in such cases.
-
                                       
                                      See also activated() and TQMenuData::insertItem().
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-The family of insertItem() functions inserts menu items into a
-popup menu or a menu bar.
-
                                       A menu item is usually either a text string or a pixmap, both with
-an optional icon or keyboard accelerator. For special cases it is
-also possible to insert custom items (see TQCustomMenuItem) or
-even widgets into popup menus.
-
                                       Some insertItem() members take a popup menu as an additional
-argument. Use this to insert submenus into existing menus or
-pulldown menus into a menu bar.
-
                                       The number of insert functions may look confusing, but they are
-actually quite simple to use.
-
                                       This default version inserts a menu item with the text text,
-the accelerator key accel, an id and an optional index and
-connects it to the slot member in the object receiver.
-
                                       Example:
-
                                      -        TQMenuBar   *mainMenu = new TQMenuBar;
-        TQPopupMenu *fileMenu = new TQPopupMenu;
-        fileMenu->insertItem( "New",  myView, SLOT(newFile()), CTRL+Key_N );
-        fileMenu->insertItem( "Open", myView, SLOT(open()),    CTRL+Key_O );
-        mainMenu->insertItem( "File", fileMenu );
-    
                                      
- 
-
                                       Not all insert functions take an object/slot parameter or an
-accelerator key. Use connectItem() and setAccel() on those items.
-
                                       If you need to translate accelerators, use tr() with the text and
-accelerator. (For translations use a string key
-    sequence.):
-
                                      -        fileMenu->insertItem( tr("Open"), myView, SLOT(open()),
-                              tr("Ctrl+O") );
-    
                                      
- 
-
                                       In the example above, pressing Ctrl+O or selecting "Open" from the
-menu activates the myView->open() function.
-
                                       Some insert functions take a TQIconSet parameter to specify the
-little menu item icon. Note that you can always pass a TQPixmap
-object instead.
-
                                       The id specifies the identification number associated with the
-menu item. Note that only positive values are valid, as a negative
-value will make TQt select a unique id for the item.
-
                                       The index specifies the position in the menu. The menu item is
-appended at the end of the list if index is negative.
-
                                       Note that keyboard accelerators in TQt are not application-global,
-instead they are bound to a certain top-level window. For example,
-accelerators in TQPopupMenu items only work for menus that are
-associated with a certain window. This is true for popup menus
-that live in a menu bar since their accelerators will then be
-installed in the menu bar itself. This also applies to stand-alone
-popup menus that have a top-level widget in their parentWidget()
-chain. The menu will then install its accelerator object on that
-top-level widget. For all other cases use an independent TQAccel
-object.
-
                                       Warning: Be careful when passing a literal 0 to insertItem()
-because some C++ compilers choose the wrong overloaded function.
-Cast the 0 to what you mean, e.g. (TQObject*)0.
-
                                       Warning: On Mac OS X, items that connect to a slot that are inserted into a
-menubar will not function as we use the native menubar that knows nothing
-about signals or slots. Instead insert the items into a popup menu and
-insert the popup menu into the menubar. This may be fixed in a future TQt
-version.
-
                                       Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                       
                                      See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem(), TQAccel, and qnamespace.h.
-
-
                                      Examples: addressbook/mainwindow.cpp, canvas/canvas.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, and sound/sound.cpp.
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Inserts a menu item with icon icon, text text, accelerator
-accel, optional id id, and optional index position. The
-menu item is connected it to the receiver's member slot. The
-icon will be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
-
                                       Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                       
                                      See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem(), TQAccel, and qnamespace.h.
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Inserts a menu item with pixmap pixmap, accelerator accel,
-optional id id, and optional index position. The menu item
-is connected it to the receiver's member slot. The icon will
-be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
-
                                       To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap
-should provide a mask (see TQPixmap::mask()).
-
                                       Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                       
                                      See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Inserts a menu item with icon icon, pixmap pixmap,
-accelerator accel, optional id id, and optional index
-position. The icon will be displayed to the left of the pixmap in
-the item. The item is connected to the member slot in the receiver object.
-
                                       To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap
-should provide a mask (see TQPixmap::mask()).
-
                                       Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                       
                                      See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem(), TQAccel, and qnamespace.h.
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Inserts a menu item with text text, optional id id, and
-optional index position.
-
                                       Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                       
                                      See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Inserts a menu item with icon icon, text text, optional id
-id, and optional index position. The icon will be displayed
-to the left of the text in the item.
-
                                       Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                       
                                      See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Inserts a menu item with text text, submenu popup, optional
-id id, and optional index position.
-
                                       The popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent
-widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when
-the menu is deleted.
-
                                       Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                       
                                      See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Inserts a menu item with icon icon, text text, submenu popup, optional id id, and optional index position. The icon
-will be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
-
                                       The popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent
-widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when
-the menu is deleted.
-
                                       Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                       
                                      See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Inserts a menu item with pixmap pixmap, optional id id, and
-optional index position.
-
                                       To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap
-should provide a mask (see TQPixmap::mask()).
-
                                       Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                       
                                      See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Inserts a menu item with icon icon, pixmap pixmap, optional
-id id, and optional index position. The icon will be
-displayed to the left of the pixmap in the item.
-
                                       Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                       
                                      See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Inserts a menu item with pixmap pixmap, submenu popup,
-optional id id, and optional index position.
-
                                       The popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent
-widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when
-the menu is deleted.
-
                                       Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                       
                                      See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Inserts a menu item with icon icon, pixmap pixmap submenu popup, optional id id, and optional index position. The icon
-will be displayed to the left of the pixmap in the item.
-
                                       The popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent
-widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when
-the menu is deleted.
-
                                       Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                       
                                      See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertItem ( TQWidget * widget, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Inserts a menu item that consists of the widget widget with
-optional id id, and optional index position.
-
                                       Ownership of widget is transferred to the popup menu or to the
-menu bar.
-
                                       Theoretically, any widget can be inserted into a popup menu. In
-practice, this only makes sense with certain widgets.
-
                                       If a widget is not focus-enabled (see
-TQWidget::isFocusEnabled()), the menu treats it as a separator;
-this means that the item is not selectable and will never get
-focus. In this way you can, for example, simply insert a TQLabel if
-you need a popup menu with a title.
-
                                       If the widget is focus-enabled it will get focus when the user
-traverses the popup menu with the arrow keys. If the widget does
-not accept ArrowUp and ArrowDown in its key event handler,
-the focus will move back to the menu when the respective arrow key
-is hit one more time. This works with a TQLineEdit, for example. If
-the widget accepts the arrow key itself, it must also provide the
-possibility to put the focus back on the menu again by calling
-TQWidget::focusNextPrevChild(). Futhermore, if the embedded widget
-closes the menu when the user made a selection, this can be done
-safely by calling:
-
                                      -        if ( isVisible() &&
-             parentWidget() &&
-             parentWidget()->inherits("TQPopupMenu") )
-            parentWidget()->close();
-    
                                      
- 
-
                                       Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                       
                                      See also removeItem().
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, TQCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Inserts a custom menu item custom with an icon and with
-optional id id, and optional index position.
-
                                       This only works with popup menus. It is not supported for menu
-bars. Ownership of custom is transferred to the popup menu.
-
                                       If you want to connect a custom item to a slot, use connectItem().
-
                                       Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                       
                                      See also connectItem(), removeItem(), and TQCustomMenuItem.
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertItem ( TQCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Inserts a custom menu item custom with optional id id, and
-optional index position.
-
                                       This only works with popup menus. It is not supported for menu
-bars. Ownership of custom is transferred to the popup menu.
-
                                       If you want to connect a custom item to a slot, use connectItem().
-
                                       Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                       
                                      See also connectItem(), removeItem(), and TQCustomMenuItem.
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertSeparator ( int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-Inserts a separator at position index, and returns the menu identifier
-number allocated to it. The separator becomes the last menu item if
-index is negative.
-
                                       In a popup menu a separator is rendered as a horizontal line. In a
-Motif menu bar a separator is spacing, so the rest of the items
-(normally just "Help") are drawn right-justified. In a Windows
-menu bar separators are ignored (to comply with the Windows style
-guidelines).
-
-
                                      Examples: addressbook/mainwindow.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, and sound/sound.cpp.
-
                                      bool TQMenuBar::isDefaultUp () const
-
                                      Returns the popup orientation.
-See the "defaultUp" property for details.
-
                                      bool TQMenuData::isItemEnabled ( int id ) const
-
                                      
-Returns TRUE if the item with identifier id is enabled;
-otherwise returns FALSE
-
                                       
                                      See also setItemEnabled() and isItemVisible().
-
-
                                      bool TQMenuData::isItemVisible ( int id ) const
-
                                      
-Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id id is  visible;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                       
                                      See also setItemVisible().
-
-
                                      void TQMenuBar::menuContentsChanged () [virtual protected]
-
                                      
-Recomputes the menu bar's display data according to the new
-contents.
-
                                       You should never need to call this; it is called automatically by
-TQMenuData whenever it needs to be called.
-
-
                                      Reimplemented from TQMenuData.
-
                                      void TQMenuBar::menuStateChanged () [virtual protected]
-
                                      
-Recomputes the menu bar's display data according to the new state.
-
                                       You should never need to call this; it is called automatically by
-TQMenuData whenever it needs to be called.
-
-
                                      Reimplemented from TQMenuData.
-
                                      void TQMenuData::removeItem ( int id )
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Removes the menu item that has the identifier id.
-
                                       
                                      See also removeItemAt() and clear().
-
-
                                      Example: chart/chartform.cpp.
-
                                      Separator TQMenuBar::separator () const
-
                                      Returns in which cases a menubar sparator is drawn.
-See the "separator" property for details.
-
                                      void TQMenuBar::setDefaultUp ( bool )
-
                                      Sets the popup orientation.
-See the "defaultUp" property for details.
-
                                      void TQMenuData::setItemEnabled ( int id, bool enable )
-
                                      
-If enable is TRUE, enables the menu item with identifier id;
-otherwise disables the menu item with identifier id.
-
                                       
                                      See also isItemEnabled().
-
-
                                      Examples: mdi/application.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-
                                      void TQMenuData::setItemVisible ( int id, bool visible )
-
                                      
-If visible is TRUE, shows the menu item with id id; otherwise
-hides the menu item with id id.
-
                                       
                                      See also isItemVisible() and isItemEnabled().
-
-
                                      void TQMenuBar::setSeparator ( Separator when ) [virtual]
-
                                      Sets in which cases a menubar sparator is drawn to when.
-See the "separator" property for details.
-
                                      void TQMenuBar::show () [virtual]
-
                                      
-Reimplements TQWidget::show() in order to set up the correct
-keyboard accelerators and to raise itself to the top of the widget
-stack.
-
-
                                      Example: grapher/grapher.cpp.
-
                                      Reimplemented from TQWidget.
-
                                      Property Documentation
                                      
-
                                      bool defaultUp
                                      
-
                                      This property holds the popup orientation.
-
                                      The default popup orientation. By default, menus pop "down" the
-screen. By setting the property to TRUE, the menu will pop "up".
-You might call this for menus that are below the document to
-which they refer.
-
                                       If the menu would not fit on the screen, the other direction is
-used automatically.
-
-
                                      Set this property's value with setDefaultUp() and get this property's value with isDefaultUp().
-
                                      Separator separator
                                      
-
                                      This property holds in which cases a menubar sparator is drawn.
-
                                      This property is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                       
-
                                      Set this property's value with setSeparator() and get this property's value with separator().
-
-
                                      
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                      
-
-
                                      Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                      TQt 3.3.8
                                      
-
                                      
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qmenudata-h.html b/doc/html/qmenudata-h.html
index 5a6ca703f..648c179fa 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmenudata-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmenudata-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qmenudata.h Include File
+ntqmenudata.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                      
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                      TQMenuData Class Reference
                                      
-
-
                                      The TQMenuData class is a base class for TQMenuBar and TQPopupMenu.
-More...
-
                                      #include <qmenudata.h>
-
                                      Inherited by TQMenuBar and TQPopupMenu.
-
                                      List of all member functions.
-
                                      Public Members
                                      
-
                                        
-
                                      • TQMenuData ()
                                        • 
-
                                      • virtual ~TQMenuData ()
                                        • 
-
                                      • uint count () const
                                        • 
-
                                      • int insertItem ( const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int insertItem ( const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int insertItem ( const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int insertItem ( TQWidget * widget, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, TQCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int insertItem ( TQCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int insertSeparator ( int index = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • void removeItem ( int id )
                                        • 
-
                                      • void removeItemAt ( int index )
                                        • 
-
                                      • void clear ()
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQKeySequence accel ( int id ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • void setAccel ( const TQKeySequence & key, int id )
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQIconSet * iconSet ( int id ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQString text ( int id ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQPixmap * pixmap ( int id ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • void setWhatsThis ( int id, const TQString & text )
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQString whatsThis ( int id ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • void changeItem ( int id, const TQString & text )
                                        • 
-
                                      • void changeItem ( int id, const TQPixmap & pixmap )
                                        • 
-
                                      • void changeItem ( int id, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text )
                                        • 
-
                                      • void changeItem ( int id, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap )
                                        • 
-
                                      • void changeItem ( const TQString & text, int id )  (obsolete)
                                        • 
-
                                      • void changeItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int id )  (obsolete)
                                        • 
-
                                      • void changeItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, int id )  (obsolete)
                                        • 
-
                                      • bool isItemActive ( int id ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • bool isItemEnabled ( int id ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • void setItemEnabled ( int id, bool enable )
                                        • 
-
                                      • bool isItemChecked ( int id ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • void setItemChecked ( int id, bool check )
                                        • 
-
                                      • bool isItemVisible ( int id ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • void setItemVisible ( int id, bool visible )
                                        • 
-
                                      • virtual void updateItem ( int id )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int indexOf ( int id ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • int idAt ( int index ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • virtual void setId ( int index, int id )
                                        • 
-
                                      • bool connectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
                                        • 
-
                                      • bool disconnectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
                                        • 
-
                                      • bool setItemParameter ( int id, int param )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int itemParameter ( int id ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQMenuItem * findItem ( int id ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQMenuItem * findItem ( int id, TQMenuData ** parent ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • virtual void activateItemAt ( int index )
                                        • 
-
                                      
-
                                      Protected Members
                                      
-
-
                                      Detailed Description
                                      
-
-
-The TQMenuData class is a base class for TQMenuBar and TQPopupMenu.
-
                                       
-
                                       TQMenuData has an internal list of menu items. A menu item can have
-a text(), an accelerator, a pixmap(), an
-iconSet(), a whatsThis() text and a popup menu (unless it is a
-separator). Menu items may optionally be checked (except for separators).
-
                                       The menu item sends out an activated() signal when it is chosen and a highlighted() signal when it
-receives the user input focus.
-
                                       
-
                                       Menu items are assigned the menu identifier id that is passed
-in insertItem() or an automatically generated identifier if id
-is < 0 (the default). The generated identifiers (negative
-integers) are guaranteed to be unique within the entire
-application. The identifier is used to access the menu item in
-other functions.
-
                                       Menu items can be removed with removeItem() and removeItemAt(), or
-changed with changeItem(). All menu items can be removed with
-clear(). Accelerators can be changed or set with setAccel().
-Checkable items can be checked or unchecked with setItemChecked().
-Items can be enabled or disabled using setItemEnabled() and
-connected and disconnected with connectItem() and disconnectItem()
-respectively. By default, newly created menu items are visible.
-They can be hidden (and shown again) with setItemVisible().
-
                                       Menu items are stored in a list. Use findItem() to find an item by
-its list position or by its menu identifier. (See also indexOf()
-and idAt().)
-
                                       
                                      See also TQAccel, TQPopupMenu, TQAction, and Miscellaneous Classes.
-
-
                                      Member Function Documentation
                                      
-
                                      TQMenuData::TQMenuData ()
-
                                      
-Constructs an empty menu data list.
-
-
                                      TQMenuData::~TQMenuData () [virtual]
-
                                      
-Removes all menu items and disconnects any signals that have been
-connected.
-
-
                                      TQKeySequence TQMenuData::accel ( int id ) const
-
                                      
-Returns the accelerator key that has been defined for the menu
-item id, or 0 if it has no accelerator key or if there is no
-such menu item.
-
                                       
                                      See also setAccel(), TQAccel, and qnamespace.h.
-
-
                                      void TQMenuData::activateItemAt ( int index ) [virtual]
-
                                      
-Activates the menu item at position index.
-
                                       If the index is invalid (for example, -1), the object itself is
-deactivated.
-
-
                                      void TQMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const TQString & text )
-
                                      
-Changes the text of the menu item id to text. If the item
-has an icon, the icon remains unchanged.
-
                                       
                                      See also text().
-
-
                                      void TQMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const TQPixmap & pixmap )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Changes the pixmap of the menu item id to the pixmap pixmap.
-If the item has an icon, the icon is unchanged.
-
                                       
                                      See also pixmap().
-
-
                                      void TQMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Changes the iconset and text of the menu item id to the icon
-and text respectively.
-
                                       
                                      See also pixmap().
-
-
                                      void TQMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Changes the iconset and pixmap of the menu item id to icon
-and pixmap respectively.
-
                                       
                                      See also pixmap().
-
-
                                      void TQMenuData::changeItem ( const TQString & text, int id )
-
                                      
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                       Changes the text of the menu item id. If the item has an icon,
-the icon remains unchanged.
-
                                       
                                      See also text().
-
-
                                      void TQMenuData::changeItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int id )
-
                                      
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                       Changes the pixmap of the menu item id. If the item has an icon,
-the icon remains unchanged.
-
                                       
                                      See also pixmap().
-
-
                                      void TQMenuData::changeItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, int id )
-
                                      
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                       Changes the icon and text of the menu item id.
-
                                       
                                      See also pixmap().
-
-
                                      void TQMenuData::clear ()
-
                                      
-Removes all menu items.
-
                                       
                                      See also removeItem() and removeItemAt().
-
-
                                      Examples: mdi/application.cpp and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
-
                                      bool TQMenuData::connectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
-
                                      
-Connects the menu item with identifier id to receiver's member slot or signal.
-
                                       The receiver's slot (or signal) is activated when the menu item is
-activated.
-
                                       
                                      See also disconnectItem() and setItemParameter().
-
-
                                      Example: menu/menu.cpp.
-
                                      uint TQMenuData::count () const
-
                                      
-Returns the number of items in the menu.
-
-
                                      bool TQMenuData::disconnectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
-
                                      
-Disconnects the receiver's member from the menu item with
-identifier id.
-
                                       All connections are removed when the menu data object is
-destroyed.
-
                                       
                                      See also connectItem() and setItemParameter().
-
-
                                      TQMenuItem * TQMenuData::findItem ( int id ) const
-
                                      
-Returns the menu item with identifier id, or 0 if there is no
-item with this identifier.
-
                                       Note that TQMenuItem is an internal class, and that you should not
-need to call this function. Use the higher level functions like
-text(), pixmap() and changeItem() to get and modify menu item
-attributes instead.
-
                                       
                                      See also indexOf().
-
-
                                      Example: chart/chartform.cpp.
-
                                      TQMenuItem * TQMenuData::findItem ( int id, TQMenuData ** parent ) const
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Returns the menu item with identifier id, or 0 if there is no
-item with this identifier. Changes *parent to point to the
-parent of the return value.
-
                                       Note that TQMenuItem is an internal class, and that you should not
-need to call this function. Use the higher level functions like
-text(), pixmap() and changeItem() to get and modify menu item
-attributes instead.
-
                                       
                                      See also indexOf().
-
-
                                      TQIconSet * TQMenuData::iconSet ( int id ) const
-
                                      
-Returns the icon set that has been set for menu item id, or 0
-if no icon set has been set.
-
                                       
                                      See also changeItem(), text(), and pixmap().
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::idAt ( int index ) const
-
                                      
-Returns the identifier of the menu item at position index in
-the internal list, or -1 if index is out of range.
-
                                       
                                      See also setId() and indexOf().
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::indexOf ( int id ) const
-
                                      
-Returns the index of the menu item with identifier id, or -1 if
-there is no item with this identifier.
-
                                       
                                      See also idAt() and findItem().
-
-
                                      Example: scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-The family of insertItem() functions inserts menu items into a
-popup menu or a menu bar.
-
                                       A menu item is usually either a text string or a pixmap, both with
-an optional icon or keyboard accelerator. For special cases it is
-also possible to insert custom items (see TQCustomMenuItem) or
-even widgets into popup menus.
-
                                       Some insertItem() members take a popup menu as an additional
-argument. Use this to insert submenus into existing menus or
-pulldown menus into a menu bar.
-
                                       The number of insert functions may look confusing, but they are
-actually quite simple to use.
-
                                       This default version inserts a menu item with the text text,
-the accelerator key accel, an id and an optional index and
-connects it to the slot member in the object receiver.
-
                                       Example:
-
                                      -        TQMenuBar   *mainMenu = new TQMenuBar;
-        TQPopupMenu *fileMenu = new TQPopupMenu;
-        fileMenu->insertItem( "New",  myView, SLOT(newFile()), CTRL+Key_N );
-        fileMenu->insertItem( "Open", myView, SLOT(open()),    CTRL+Key_O );
-        mainMenu->insertItem( "File", fileMenu );
-    
                                      
- 
-
                                       Not all insert functions take an object/slot parameter or an
-accelerator key. Use connectItem() and setAccel() on those items.
-
                                       If you need to translate accelerators, use tr() with the text and
-accelerator. (For translations use a string key
-    sequence.):
-
                                      -        fileMenu->insertItem( tr("Open"), myView, SLOT(open()),
-                              tr("Ctrl+O") );
-    
                                      
- 
-
                                       In the example above, pressing Ctrl+O or selecting "Open" from the
-menu activates the myView->open() function.
-
                                       Some insert functions take a TQIconSet parameter to specify the
-little menu item icon. Note that you can always pass a TQPixmap
-object instead.
-
                                       The id specifies the identification number associated with the
-menu item. Note that only positive values are valid, as a negative
-value will make TQt select a unique id for the item.
-
                                       The index specifies the position in the menu. The menu item is
-appended at the end of the list if index is negative.
-
                                       Note that keyboard accelerators in TQt are not application-global,
-instead they are bound to a certain top-level window. For example,
-accelerators in TQPopupMenu items only work for menus that are
-associated with a certain window. This is true for popup menus
-that live in a menu bar since their accelerators will then be
-installed in the menu bar itself. This also applies to stand-alone
-popup menus that have a top-level widget in their parentWidget()
-chain. The menu will then install its accelerator object on that
-top-level widget. For all other cases use an independent TQAccel
-object.
-
                                       Warning: Be careful when passing a literal 0 to insertItem()
-because some C++ compilers choose the wrong overloaded function.
-Cast the 0 to what you mean, e.g. (TQObject*)0.
-
                                       Warning: On Mac OS X, items that connect to a slot that are inserted into a
-menubar will not function as we use the native menubar that knows nothing
-about signals or slots. Instead insert the items into a popup menu and
-insert the popup menu into the menubar. This may be fixed in a future TQt
-version.
-
                                       Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                       
                                      See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem(), TQAccel, and qnamespace.h.
-
-
                                      Examples: addressbook/mainwindow.cpp, canvas/canvas.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, and sound/sound.cpp.
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Inserts a menu item with icon icon, text text, accelerator
-accel, optional id id, and optional index position. The
-menu item is connected it to the receiver's member slot. The
-icon will be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
-
                                       Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                       
                                      See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem(), TQAccel, and qnamespace.h.
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Inserts a menu item with pixmap pixmap, accelerator accel,
-optional id id, and optional index position. The menu item
-is connected it to the receiver's member slot. The icon will
-be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
-
                                       To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap
-should provide a mask (see TQPixmap::mask()).
-
                                       Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                       
                                      See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Inserts a menu item with icon icon, pixmap pixmap,
-accelerator accel, optional id id, and optional index
-position. The icon will be displayed to the left of the pixmap in
-the item. The item is connected to the member slot in the receiver object.
-
                                       To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap
-should provide a mask (see TQPixmap::mask()).
-
                                       Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                       
                                      See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem(), TQAccel, and qnamespace.h.
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Inserts a menu item with text text, optional id id, and
-optional index position.
-
                                       Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                       
                                      See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Inserts a menu item with icon icon, text text, optional id
-id, and optional index position. The icon will be displayed
-to the left of the text in the item.
-
                                       Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                       
                                      See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Inserts a menu item with text text, submenu popup, optional
-id id, and optional index position.
-
                                       The popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent
-widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when
-the menu is deleted.
-
                                       Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                       
                                      See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Inserts a menu item with icon icon, text text, submenu popup, optional id id, and optional index position. The icon
-will be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
-
                                       The popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent
-widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when
-the menu is deleted.
-
                                       Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                       
                                      See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Inserts a menu item with pixmap pixmap, optional id id, and
-optional index position.
-
                                       To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap
-should provide a mask (see TQPixmap::mask()).
-
                                       Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                       
                                      See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Inserts a menu item with icon icon, pixmap pixmap, optional
-id id, and optional index position. The icon will be
-displayed to the left of the pixmap in the item.
-
                                       Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                       
                                      See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Inserts a menu item with pixmap pixmap, submenu popup,
-optional id id, and optional index position.
-
                                       The popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent
-widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when
-the menu is deleted.
-
                                       Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                       
                                      See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Inserts a menu item with icon icon, pixmap pixmap submenu popup, optional id id, and optional index position. The icon
-will be displayed to the left of the pixmap in the item.
-
                                       The popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent
-widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when
-the menu is deleted.
-
                                       Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                       
                                      See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertItem ( TQWidget * widget, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Inserts a menu item that consists of the widget widget with
-optional id id, and optional index position.
-
                                       Ownership of widget is transferred to the popup menu or to the
-menu bar.
-
                                       Theoretically, any widget can be inserted into a popup menu. In
-practice, this only makes sense with certain widgets.
-
                                       If a widget is not focus-enabled (see
-TQWidget::isFocusEnabled()), the menu treats it as a separator;
-this means that the item is not selectable and will never get
-focus. In this way you can, for example, simply insert a TQLabel if
-you need a popup menu with a title.
-
                                       If the widget is focus-enabled it will get focus when the user
-traverses the popup menu with the arrow keys. If the widget does
-not accept ArrowUp and ArrowDown in its key event handler,
-the focus will move back to the menu when the respective arrow key
-is hit one more time. This works with a TQLineEdit, for example. If
-the widget accepts the arrow key itself, it must also provide the
-possibility to put the focus back on the menu again by calling
-TQWidget::focusNextPrevChild(). Futhermore, if the embedded widget
-closes the menu when the user made a selection, this can be done
-safely by calling:
-
                                      -        if ( isVisible() &&
-             parentWidget() &&
-             parentWidget()->inherits("TQPopupMenu") )
-            parentWidget()->close();
-    
                                      
- 
-
                                       Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                       
                                      See also removeItem().
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, TQCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Inserts a custom menu item custom with an icon and with
-optional id id, and optional index position.
-
                                       This only works with popup menus. It is not supported for menu
-bars. Ownership of custom is transferred to the popup menu.
-
                                       If you want to connect a custom item to a slot, use connectItem().
-
                                       Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                       
                                      See also connectItem(), removeItem(), and TQCustomMenuItem.
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertItem ( TQCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Inserts a custom menu item custom with optional id id, and
-optional index position.
-
                                       This only works with popup menus. It is not supported for menu
-bars. Ownership of custom is transferred to the popup menu.
-
                                       If you want to connect a custom item to a slot, use connectItem().
-
                                       Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                       
                                      See also connectItem(), removeItem(), and TQCustomMenuItem.
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::insertSeparator ( int index = -1 )
-
                                      
-Inserts a separator at position index, and returns the menu identifier
-number allocated to it. The separator becomes the last menu item if
-index is negative.
-
                                       In a popup menu a separator is rendered as a horizontal line. In a
-Motif menu bar a separator is spacing, so the rest of the items
-(normally just "Help") are drawn right-justified. In a Windows
-menu bar separators are ignored (to comply with the Windows style
-guidelines).
-
-
                                      Examples: addressbook/mainwindow.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, and sound/sound.cpp.
-
                                      bool TQMenuData::isItemActive ( int id ) const
-
                                      
-Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id id is currently
-active; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                      bool TQMenuData::isItemChecked ( int id ) const
-
                                      
-Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id id has been checked;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                       
                                      See also setItemChecked().
-
-
                                      Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-
                                      bool TQMenuData::isItemEnabled ( int id ) const
-
                                      
-Returns TRUE if the item with identifier id is enabled;
-otherwise returns FALSE
-
                                       
                                      See also setItemEnabled() and isItemVisible().
-
-
                                      bool TQMenuData::isItemVisible ( int id ) const
-
                                      
-Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id id is  visible;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                       
                                      See also setItemVisible().
-
-
                                      int TQMenuData::itemParameter ( int id ) const
-
                                      
-Returns the parameter of the activation signal of item id.
-
                                       If no parameter has been specified for this item with
-setItemParameter(), the value defaults to id.
-
                                       
                                      See also connectItem(), disconnectItem(), and setItemParameter().
-
-
                                      void TQMenuData::menuContentsChanged () [virtual protected]
-
                                      
-Virtual function; notifies subclasses that one or more items have
-been inserted or removed.
-
-
                                      Reimplemented in TQMenuBar.
-
                                      void TQMenuData::menuDelPopup ( TQPopupMenu * ) [virtual protected]
-
                                      
-Virtual function; notifies subclasses that a popup menu item has
-been removed.
-
-
                                      void TQMenuData::menuInsPopup ( TQPopupMenu * ) [virtual protected]
-
                                      
-Virtual function; notifies subclasses that a popup menu item has
-been inserted.
-
-
                                      void TQMenuData::menuStateChanged () [virtual protected]
-
                                      
-Virtual function; notifies subclasses that one or more items have
-changed state (enabled/disabled or checked/unchecked).
-
-
                                      Reimplemented in TQMenuBar.
-
                                      TQPixmap * TQMenuData::pixmap ( int id ) const
-
                                      
-Returns the pixmap that has been set for menu item id, or 0 if
-no pixmap has been set.
-
                                       
                                      See also changeItem(), text(), and iconSet().
-
-
                                      void TQMenuData::removeItem ( int id )
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Removes the menu item that has the identifier id.
-
                                       
                                      See also removeItemAt() and clear().
-
-
                                      Example: chart/chartform.cpp.
-
                                      void TQMenuData::removeItemAt ( int index )
-
                                      
-Removes the menu item at position index.
-
                                       
                                      See also removeItem() and clear().
-
-
                                      void TQMenuData::setAccel ( const TQKeySequence & key, int id )
-
                                      
-Sets the accelerator key for the menu item id to key.
-
                                       An accelerator key consists of a key code and a combination of the
-modifiers SHIFT, CTRL, ALT or UNICODE_ACCEL (OR'ed or
-added). The header file qnamespace.h contains a list of key
-codes.
-
                                       Defining an accelerator key produces a text that is added to the
-menu item; for instance, CTRL + Key_O produces "Ctrl+O". The
-text is formatted differently for different platforms.
-
                                       Note that keyboard accelerators in TQt are not application-global,
-instead they are bound to a certain top-level window. For example,
-accelerators in TQPopupMenu items only work for menus that are
-associated with a certain window. This is true for popup menus
-that live in a menu bar since their accelerators will then be
-installed in the menu bar itself. This also applies to stand-alone
-popup menus that have a top-level widget in their parentWidget()
-chain. The menu will then install its accelerator object on that
-top-level widget. For all other cases use an independent TQAccel
-object.
-
                                       Example:
-
                                      -        TQMenuBar *mainMenu = new TQMenuBar;
-        TQPopupMenu *fileMenu = new TQPopupMenu;       // file sub menu
-        fileMenu->insertItem( "Open Document", 67 ); // add "Open" item
-        fileMenu->setAccel( CTRL + Key_O, 67 );      // Ctrl+O to open
-        fileMenu->insertItem( "Quit", 69 );          // add "Quit" item
-        fileMenu->setAccel( CTRL + ALT + Key_Delete, 69 ); // add Alt+Del to quit
-        mainMenu->insertItem( "File", fileMenu );    // add the file menu
-    
                                      
- 
-
                                       If you need to translate accelerators, use tr() with a string:
-
                                      -        fileMenu->setAccel( tr("Ctrl+O"), 67 );
-    
                                      
- 
-
                                       You can also specify the accelerator in the insertItem() function.
-You may prefer to use TQAction to associate accelerators with menu
-items.
-
                                       
                                      See also accel(), insertItem(), TQAccel, and TQAction.
-
-
                                      Example: menu/menu.cpp.
-
                                      void TQMenuData::setId ( int index, int id ) [virtual]
-
                                      
-Sets the menu identifier of the item at index to id.
-
                                       If index is out of range, the operation is ignored.
-
                                       
                                      See also idAt().
-
-
                                      void TQMenuData::setItemChecked ( int id, bool check )
-
                                      
-If check is TRUE, checks the menu item with id id; otherwise
-unchecks the menu item with id id. Calls
-TQPopupMenu::setCheckable( TRUE ) if necessary.
-
                                       
                                      See also isItemChecked().
-
-
                                      Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp, grapher/grapher.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-
                                      void TQMenuData::setItemEnabled ( int id, bool enable )
-
                                      
-If enable is TRUE, enables the menu item with identifier id;
-otherwise disables the menu item with identifier id.
-
                                       
                                      See also isItemEnabled().
-
-
                                      Examples: mdi/application.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-
                                      bool TQMenuData::setItemParameter ( int id, int param )
-
                                      
-Sets the parameter of the activation signal of item id to param.
-
                                       If any receiver takes an integer parameter, this value is passed.
-
                                       
                                      See also connectItem(), disconnectItem(), and itemParameter().
-
-
                                      Example: mdi/application.cpp.
-
                                      void TQMenuData::setItemVisible ( int id, bool visible )
-
                                      
-If visible is TRUE, shows the menu item with id id; otherwise
-hides the menu item with id id.
-
                                       
                                      See also isItemVisible() and isItemEnabled().
-
-
                                      void TQMenuData::setWhatsThis ( int id, const TQString & text )
-
                                      
-Sets text as What's This help for the menu item with identifier
-id.
-
                                       
                                      See also whatsThis().
-
-
                                      Examples: application/application.cpp, helpsystem/mainwindow.cpp, and mdi/application.cpp.
-
                                      TQString TQMenuData::text ( int id ) const
-
                                      
-Returns the text that has been set for menu item id, or
-TQString::null if no text has been set.
-
                                       
                                      See also changeItem(), pixmap(), and iconSet().
-
-
                                      Examples: qdir/qdir.cpp and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-
                                      void TQMenuData::updateItem ( int id ) [virtual]
-
                                      
-Virtual function; notifies subclasses about an item with id
-that has been changed.
-
-
                                      Reimplemented in TQPopupMenu.
-
                                      TQString TQMenuData::whatsThis ( int id ) const
-
                                      
-Returns the What's This help text for the item with identifier id or TQString::null if no text has yet been defined.
-
                                       
                                      See also setWhatsThis().
-
-
-
                                      
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                      
-
-
                                      Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                      TQt 3.3.8
                                      
-
                                      
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qmessagebox-h.html b/doc/html/qmessagebox-h.html
index 31197dbc1..e61718999 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmessagebox-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmessagebox-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qmessagebox.h Include File
+ntqmessagebox.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                      
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                      TQMessageBox Class Reference
                                      
-
-
                                      The TQMessageBox class provides a modal dialog with a short message, an icon, and some buttons.
-More...
-
                                      #include <qmessagebox.h>
-
                                      Inherits TQDialog.
-
                                      List of all member functions.
-
                                      Public Members
                                      
-
                                        
-
                                      • enum Icon { NoIcon = 0, Information = 1, Warning = 2, Critical = 3, Question = 4 }
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQMessageBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQMessageBox ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, Icon icon, int button0, int button1, int button2, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = TRUE, WFlags f = WStyle_DialogBorder )
                                        • 
-
                                      • ~TQMessageBox ()
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQString text () const
                                        • 
-
                                      • void setText ( const TQString & )
                                        • 
-
                                      • Icon icon () const
                                        • 
-
                                      • void setIcon ( Icon )
                                        • 
-
                                      • const TQPixmap * iconPixmap () const
                                        • 
-
                                      • void setIconPixmap ( const TQPixmap & )
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQString buttonText ( int button ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • void setButtonText ( int button, const TQString & text )
                                        • 
-
                                      • virtual void adjustSize ()
                                        • 
-
                                      • TextFormat textFormat () const
                                        • 
-
                                      • void setTextFormat ( TextFormat )
                                        • 
-
                                      
-
                                      Static Public Members
                                      
-
                                        
-
                                      • int information ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, int button0, int button1 = 0, int button2 = 0 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int information ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, const TQString & button0Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button1Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button2Text = TQString::null, int defaultButtonNumber = 0, int escapeButtonNumber = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int question ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, int button0, int button1 = 0, int button2 = 0 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int question ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, const TQString & button0Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button1Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button2Text = TQString::null, int defaultButtonNumber = 0, int escapeButtonNumber = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int warning ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, int button0, int button1, int button2 = 0 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int warning ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, const TQString & button0Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button1Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button2Text = TQString::null, int defaultButtonNumber = 0, int escapeButtonNumber = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int critical ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, int button0, int button1, int button2 = 0 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int critical ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, const TQString & button0Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button1Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button2Text = TQString::null, int defaultButtonNumber = 0, int escapeButtonNumber = -1 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • void about ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text )
                                        • 
-
                                      • void aboutTQt ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption = TQString::null )
                                        • 
-
                                      • int message ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, const TQString & buttonText = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * = 0 )  (obsolete)
                                        • 
-
                                      • bool query ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, const TQString & yesButtonText = TQString::null, const TQString & noButtonText = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * = 0 )  (obsolete)
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQPixmap standardIcon ( Icon icon, GUIStyle style )  (obsolete)
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQPixmap standardIcon ( Icon icon )
                                        • 
-
                                      
-
                                      Properties
                                      
-
                                        
-
                                      • Icon icon - the message box's icon
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQPixmap iconPixmap - the current icon
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQString text - the message box text to be displayed
                                        • 
-
                                      • TextFormat textFormat - the format of the text displayed by the message box
                                        • 
-
                                      
-
                                      Detailed Description
                                      
-
-
-The TQMessageBox class provides a modal dialog with a short message, an icon, and some buttons.
-
-
-
                                       Message boxes are used to provide informative messages and to ask
-simple questions.
-
                                       TQMessageBox provides a range of different messages, arranged
-roughly along two axes: severity and complexity.
-
                                       Severity is
-
                                      
-
-
-
-
-
                                                                             		Question
-For message boxes that ask a question as part of normal
-operation. Some style guides recommend using Information for this
-purpose.
-
                                                                             		Information
-For message boxes that are part of normal operation.
-
                                                                             		Warning
-For message boxes that tell the user about unusual errors.
-
                                                                             		Critical
-For message boxes that tell the user about critical errors.
-
                                      
-
                                       The message box has a different icon for each of the severity levels.
-
                                       Complexity is one button (OK) for simple messages, or two or even
-three buttons for questions.
-
                                       There are static functions for the most common cases.
-
                                       Examples:
-
                                       If a program is unable to find a supporting file, but can do perfectly
-well without it:
-
                                       
                                      -    TQMessageBox::information( this, "Application name",
-    "Unable to find the user preferences file.\n"
-    "The factory default will be used instead." );
-    
                                      
- 
-
                                       question() is useful for simple yes/no questions:
-
                                       
                                      -    if ( TQFile::exists( filename ) &&
-        TQMessageBox::question(
-            this,
-            tr("Overwrite File? -- Application Name"),
-            tr("A file called %1 already exists."
-                "Do you want to overwrite it?")
-                .arg( filename ),
-            tr("&Yes"), tr("&No"),
-            TQString::null, 0, 1 ) )
-        return false;
-    
                                      
- 
-
                                       warning() can be used to tell the user about unusual errors, or
-errors which can't be easily fixed:
-
                                       
                                      -    switch( TQMessageBox::warning( this, "Application name",
-        "Could not connect to the <mumble> server.\n"
-        "This program can't function correctly "
-        "without the server.\n\n",
-        "Retry",
-        "Quit", 0, 0, 1 ) ) {
-    case 0: // The user clicked the Retry again button or pressed Enter
-        // try again
-        break;
-    case 1: // The user clicked the Quit or pressed Escape
-        // exit
-        break;
-    }
-    
                                      
- 
-
                                       The text part of all message box messages can be either rich text
-or plain text. If you specify a rich text formatted string, it
-will be rendered using the default stylesheet. See
-TQStyleSheet::defaultSheet() for details. With certain strings that
-contain XML meta characters, the auto-rich text detection may
-fail, interpreting plain text incorrectly as rich text. In these
-rare cases, use TQStyleSheet::convertFromPlainText() to convert
-your plain text string to a visually equivalent rich text string
-or set the text format explicitly with setTextFormat().
-
                                       Note that the Microsoft Windows User Interface Guidelines
-recommend using the application name as the window's caption.
-
                                       Below are more examples of how to use the static member functions.
-After these examples you will find an overview of the non-static
-member functions.
-
                                       Exiting a program is part of its normal operation. If there is
-unsaved data the user probably should be asked if they want to
-save the data. For example:
-
                                       
                                      -    switch( TQMessageBox::information( this, "Application name here",
-        "The document contains unsaved changes\n"
-        "Do you want to save the changes before exiting?",
-        "&Save", "&Discard", "Cancel",
-        0,      // Enter == button 0
-        2 ) ) { // Escape == button 2
-    case 0: // Save clicked or Alt+S pressed or Enter pressed.
-        // save
-        break;
-    case 1: // Discard clicked or Alt+D pressed
-        // don't save but exit
-        break;
-    case 2: // Cancel clicked or Escape pressed
-        // don't exit
-        break;
-    }
-    
                                      
- 
-
                                       The Escape button cancels the entire exit operation, and pressing
-Enter causes the changes to be saved before the exit occurs.
-
                                       Disk full errors are unusual and they certainly can be hard to
-correct. This example uses predefined buttons instead of
-hard-coded button texts:
-
                                       
                                      -    switch( TQMessageBox::warning( this, "Application name here",
-        "Could not save the user preferences,\n"
-        "because the disk is full. You can delete\n"
-        "some files and press Retry, or you can\n"
-        "abort the Save Preferences operation.",
-        TQMessageBox::Retry | TQMessageBox::Default,
-        TQMessageBox::Abort | TQMessageBox::Escape )) {
-    case TQMessageBox::Retry: // Retry clicked or Enter pressed
-        // try again
-        break;
-    case TQMessageBox::Abort: // Abort clicked or Escape pressed
-        // abort
-        break;
-    }
-    
                                      
- 
-
                                       The critical() function should be reserved for critical errors. In
-this example errorDetails is a TQString or const char*, and TQString
-is used to concatenate several strings:
-
                                       
                                      -    TQMessageBox::critical( 0, "Application name here",
-        TQString("An internal error occurred. Please ") +
-        "call technical support at 1234-56789 and report\n"+
-        "these numbers:\n\n" + errorDetails +
-        "\n\nApplication will now exit." );
-    
                                      
- 
-
                                       In this example an OK button is displayed.
-
                                       TQMessageBox provides a very simple About box which displays an
-appropriate icon and the string you provide:
-
                                       
                                      -    TQMessageBox::about( this, "About <Application>",
-        "<Application> is a <one-paragraph blurb>\n\n"
-        "Copyright 1991-2003 Such-and-such. "
-        "<License words here.>\n\n"
-        "For technical support, call 1234-56789 or see\n"
-        "http://www.such-and-such.com/Application/\n" );
-    
                                      
- 
-
                                       See about() for more information.
-
                                       If you want your users to know that the application is built using
-TQt (so they know that you use high quality tools) you might like
-to add an "About TQt" menu option under the Help menu to invoke
-aboutTQt().
-
                                       If none of the standard message boxes is suitable, you can create a
-TQMessageBox from scratch and use custom button texts:
-
                                       
                                      -    TQMessageBox mb( "Application name here",
-        "Saving the file will overwrite the original file on the disk.\n"
-        "Do you really want to save?",
-        TQMessageBox::Information,
-        TQMessageBox::Yes | TQMessageBox::Default,
-        TQMessageBox::No,
-        TQMessageBox::Cancel | TQMessageBox::Escape );
-    mb.setButtonText( TQMessageBox::Yes, "Save" );
-    mb.setButtonText( TQMessageBox::No, "Discard" );
-    switch( mb.exec() ) {
-    case TQMessageBox::Yes:
-        // save and exit
-        break;
-    case TQMessageBox::No:
-        // exit without saving
-        break;
-    case TQMessageBox::Cancel:
-        // don't save and don't exit
-        break;
-    }
-    
                                      
- 
-
                                       TQMessageBox defines two enum types: Icon and an unnamed button type.
-Icon defines the Question, Information, Warning, and Critical icons for each GUI style. It is used by the constructor
-and by the static member functions question(), information(),
-warning() and critical(). A function called standardIcon() gives
-you access to the various icons.
-
                                       The button types are:
-
                                        
-
                                      •  Ok - the default for single-button message boxes
-
                                      •  Cancel - note that this is not automatically Escape
-
                                      •  Yes
-
                                      •  No
-
                                      •  Abort
-
                                      •  Retry
-
                                      •  Ignore
-
                                      •  YesAll
-
                                      •  NoAll
-
                                      
-
                                       Button types can be combined with two modifiers by using OR, '|':
-
                                        
-
                                      •  Default - makes pressing Enter equivalent to
-clicking this button. Normally used with Ok, Yes or similar.
-
                                      •  Escape - makes pressing Escape equivalent to clicking this button.
-Normally used with Abort, Cancel or similar.
-
                                      
-
                                       The text(), icon() and iconPixmap() functions provide access to the
-current text and pixmap of the message box. The setText(), setIcon()
-and setIconPixmap() let you change it. The difference between
-setIcon() and setIconPixmap() is that the former accepts a
-TQMessageBox::Icon and can be used to set standard icons, whereas the
-latter accepts a TQPixmap and can be used to set custom icons.
-
                                       setButtonText() and buttonText() provide access to the buttons.
-
                                       TQMessageBox has no signals or slots.
-
                                        
-
                                       
                                      See also TQDialog, Isys on error messages, GUI Design Handbook: Message Box, and Dialog Classes.
-
-
                                      Member Type Documentation
                                      
-
                                      TQMessageBox::Icon
                                      
-
-
                                       This enum has the following values:
-
                                        
-
                                      • TQMessageBox::NoIcon - the message box does not have any icon.
-
                                      • TQMessageBox::Question - an icon indicating that
-the message is asking a question.
-
                                      • TQMessageBox::Information - an icon indicating that
-the message is nothing out of the ordinary.
-
                                      • TQMessageBox::Warning - an icon indicating that the
-message is a warning, but can be dealt with.
-
                                      • TQMessageBox::Critical - an icon indicating that
-the message represents a critical problem.
-
                                       
-
                                      Member Function Documentation
                                      
-
                                      TQMessageBox::TQMessageBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                      
-Constructs a message box with no text and a button with the label
-"OK".
-
                                       If parent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global
-modal dialog box. If parent is a widget, the message box
-becomes modal relative to parent.
-
                                       The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQDialog
-constructor.
-
-
                                      TQMessageBox::TQMessageBox ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, Icon icon, int button0, int button1, int button2, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = TRUE, WFlags f = WStyle_DialogBorder )
-
                                      
-Constructs a message box with a caption, a text, an icon,
-and up to three buttons.
-
                                       The icon must be one of the following:
-
                                        
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::NoIcon
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Question
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Information
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Warning
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Critical
-
                                      
-
                                       Each button, button0, button1 and button2, can have one
-of the following values:
-
                                        
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::NoButton
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Ok
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Cancel
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Yes
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::No
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Abort
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Retry
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Ignore
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::YesAll
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::NoAll
-
                                      
-
                                       Use TQMessageBox::NoButton for the later parameters to have fewer
-than three buttons in your message box. If you don't specify any
-buttons at all, TQMessageBox will provide an Ok button.
-
                                       One of the buttons can be OR-ed with the TQMessageBox::Default
-flag to make it the default button (clicked when Enter is
-pressed).
-
                                       One of the buttons can be OR-ed with the TQMessageBox::Escape
-flag to make it the cancel or close button (clicked when Escape is
-pressed).
-
                                       Example:
-
                                      -    TQMessageBox mb( "Application Name",
-        "Hardware failure.\n\nDisk error detected\nDo you want to stop?",
-        TQMessageBox::Question,
-        TQMessageBox::Yes | TQMessageBox::Default,
-        TQMessageBox::No  | TQMessageBox::Escape,
-        TQMessageBox::NoButton );
-    if ( mb.exec() == TQMessageBox::No )
-        // try again
-    
                                      
- 
-
                                       If parent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global
-modal dialog box. If parent is a widget, the message box
-becomes modal relative to parent.
-
                                       If modal is TRUE the message box is modal; otherwise it
-is modeless.
-
                                       The parent, name, modal, and f arguments are passed to
-the TQDialog constructor.
-
                                       
                                      See also caption, text, and icon.
-
-
                                      TQMessageBox::~TQMessageBox ()
-
                                      
-Destroys the message box.
-
-
                                      void TQMessageBox::about ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text ) [static]
-
                                      
-Displays a simple about box with caption caption and text text. The about box's parent is parent.
-
                                       about() looks for a suitable icon in four locations:
-
                                        
-
                                      1.  It prefers parent->icon() if that exists.
-
                                      2.  If not, it tries the top-level widget containing parent.
-
                                      3.  If that fails, it tries the main widget.
-
                                      4.  As a last resort it uses the Information icon.
-
                                      
-
                                       The about box has a single button labelled "OK".
-
                                       
                                      See also TQWidget::icon and TQApplication::mainWidget().
-
-
                                      Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, chart/chartform.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, and themes/themes.cpp.
-
                                      void TQMessageBox::aboutTQt ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption = TQString::null ) [static]
-
                                      
-Displays a simple message box about TQt, with caption caption
-and centered over parent (if parent is not 0). The message
-includes the version number of TQt being used by the application.
-
                                       This is useful for inclusion in the Help menu of an application.
-See the examples/menu/menu.cpp example.
-
                                       TQApplication provides this functionality as a slot.
-
                                       
                                      See also TQApplication::aboutTQt().
-
-
                                      Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, chart/chartform.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, themes/themes.cpp, and trivial/trivial.cpp.
-
                                      void TQMessageBox::adjustSize () [virtual]
-
                                      
-Adjusts the size of the message box to fit the contents just before
-TQDialog::exec() or TQDialog::show() is called.
-
                                       This function will not be called if the message box has been explicitly
-resized before showing it.
-
-
                                      Reimplemented from TQWidget.
-
                                      TQString TQMessageBox::buttonText ( int button ) const
-
                                      
-Returns the text of the message box button button, or
-TQString::null if the message box does not contain the button.
-
                                       
                                      See also setButtonText().
-
-
                                      int TQMessageBox::critical ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, int button0, int button1, int button2 = 0 ) [static]
-
                                      
-Opens a critical message box with the caption caption and the
-text text. The dialog may have up to three buttons. Each of the
-button parameters, button0, button1 and button2 may be
-set to one of the following values:
-
                                       
                                        
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::NoButton
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Ok
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Cancel
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Yes
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::No
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Abort
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Retry
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Ignore
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::YesAll
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::NoAll
-
                                      
-
                                       If you don't want all three buttons, set the last button, or last
-two buttons to TQMessageBox::NoButton.
-
                                       One button can be OR-ed with TQMessageBox::Default, and one
-button can be OR-ed with TQMessageBox::Escape.
-
                                       Returns the identity (TQMessageBox::Ok, or TQMessageBox::No, etc.)
-of the button that was clicked.
-
                                       If parent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global
-modal dialog box. If parent is a widget, the message box
-becomes modal relative to parent.
-
                                       
                                      See also information(), question(), and warning().
-
-
                                      Examples: network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h, network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h, process/process.cpp, and xml/outliner/outlinetree.cpp.
-
                                      int TQMessageBox::critical ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, const TQString & button0Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button1Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button2Text = TQString::null, int defaultButtonNumber = 0, int escapeButtonNumber = -1 ) [static]
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Displays a critical error message box with a caption, a text, and
-1, 2 or 3 buttons. Returns the number of the button that was
-clicked (0, 1 or 2).
-
                                       button0Text is the text of the first button, and is optional.
-If button0Text is not supplied, "OK" (translated) will be used.
-button1Text is the text of the second button, and is optional,
-and button2Text is the text of the third button, and is
-optional. defaultButtonNumber (0, 1 or 2) is the index of the
-default button; pressing Return or Enter is the same as clicking
-the default button. It defaults to 0 (the first button). escapeButtonNumber is the index of the Escape button; pressing
-Escape is the same as clicking this button. It defaults to -1;
-supply 0, 1, or 2 to make pressing Escape equivalent to clicking
-the relevant button.
-
                                       If parent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global
-modal dialog box. If parent is a widget, the message box
-becomes modal relative to parent.
-
                                       
                                      See also information(), question(), and warning().
-
-
                                      Icon TQMessageBox::icon () const
-
                                      Returns the message box's icon.
-See the "icon" property for details.
-
                                      const TQPixmap * TQMessageBox::iconPixmap () const
-
                                      Returns the current icon.
-See the "iconPixmap" property for details.
-
                                      int TQMessageBox::information ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, int button0, int button1 = 0, int button2 = 0 ) [static]
-
                                      
-Opens an information message box with the caption caption and
-the text text. The dialog may have up to three buttons. Each of
-the buttons, button0, button1 and button2 may be set to
-one of the following values:
-
                                       
                                        
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::NoButton
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Ok
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Cancel
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Yes
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::No
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Abort
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Retry
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Ignore
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::YesAll
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::NoAll
-
                                      
-
                                       If you don't want all three buttons, set the last button, or last
-two buttons to TQMessageBox::NoButton.
-
                                       One button can be OR-ed with TQMessageBox::Default, and one
-button can be OR-ed with TQMessageBox::Escape.
-
                                       Returns the identity (TQMessageBox::Ok, or TQMessageBox::No, etc.)
-of the button that was clicked.
-
                                       If parent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global
-modal dialog box. If parent is a widget, the message box
-becomes modal relative to parent.
-
                                       
                                      See also question(), warning(), and critical().
-
-
                                      Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, dirview/dirview.cpp, fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp, picture/picture.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, and simple/main.cpp.
-
                                      int TQMessageBox::information ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, const TQString & button0Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button1Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button2Text = TQString::null, int defaultButtonNumber = 0, int escapeButtonNumber = -1 ) [static]
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Displays an information message box with caption caption, text
-text and one, two or three buttons. Returns the index of the
-button that was clicked (0, 1 or 2).
-
                                       button0Text is the text of the first button, and is optional.
-If button0Text is not supplied, "OK" (translated) will be used.
-button1Text is the text of the second button, and is optional.
-button2Text is the text of the third button, and is optional.
-defaultButtonNumber (0, 1 or 2) is the index of the default
-button; pressing Return or Enter is the same as clicking the
-default button. It defaults to 0 (the first button). escapeButtonNumber is the index of the Escape button; pressing
-Escape is the same as clicking this button. It defaults to -1;
-supply 0, 1 or 2 to make pressing Escape equivalent to clicking
-the relevant button.
-
                                       If parent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global
-modal dialog box. If parent is a widget, the message box
-becomes modal relative to parent.
-
                                       Note: If you do not specify an Escape button then if the Escape
-button is pressed then -1 will be returned.  It is suggested that
-you specify an Escape button to prevent this from happening.
-
                                       
                                      See also question(), warning(), and critical().
-
-
                                      int TQMessageBox::message ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, const TQString & buttonText = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * = 0 ) [static]
-
                                      
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                       Opens a modal message box directly using the specified parameters.
-
                                       Please use information(), warning(), question(), or critical() instead.
-
-
                                      Example: grapher/grapher.cpp.
-
                                      bool TQMessageBox::query ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, const TQString & yesButtonText = TQString::null, const TQString & noButtonText = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * = 0 ) [static]
-
                                       
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                       Queries the user using a modal message box with two buttons.
-Note that caption is not always shown, it depends on the window manager.
-
                                       Please use information(), question(), warning(), or critical() instead.
-
-
                                      int TQMessageBox::question ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, int button0, int button1 = 0, int button2 = 0 ) [static]
-
                                      
-Opens a question message box with the caption caption and the
-text text. The dialog may have up to three buttons. Each of the
-buttons, button0, button1 and button2 may be set to one
-of the following values:
-
                                       
                                        
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::NoButton
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Ok
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Cancel
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Yes
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::No
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Abort
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Retry
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Ignore
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::YesAll
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::NoAll
-
                                      
-
                                       If you don't want all three buttons, set the last button, or last
-two buttons to TQMessageBox::NoButton.
-
                                       One button can be OR-ed with TQMessageBox::Default, and one
-button can be OR-ed with TQMessageBox::Escape.
-
                                       Returns the identity (TQMessageBox::Yes, or TQMessageBox::No, etc.)
-of the button that was clicked.
-
                                       If parent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global
-modal dialog box. If parent is a widget, the message box
-becomes modal relative to parent.
-
                                       
                                      See also information(), warning(), and critical().
-
-
                                      int TQMessageBox::question ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, const TQString & button0Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button1Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button2Text = TQString::null, int defaultButtonNumber = 0, int escapeButtonNumber = -1 ) [static]
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Displays a question message box with caption caption, text text and one, two or three buttons. Returns the index of the
-button that was clicked (0, 1 or 2).
-
                                       button0Text is the text of the first button, and is optional.
-If button0Text is not supplied, "OK" (translated) will be used.
-button1Text is the text of the second button, and is optional.
-button2Text is the text of the third button, and is optional.
-defaultButtonNumber (0, 1 or 2) is the index of the default
-button; pressing Return or Enter is the same as clicking the
-default button. It defaults to 0 (the first button). escapeButtonNumber is the index of the Escape button; pressing
-Escape is the same as clicking this button. It defaults to -1;
-supply 0, 1 or 2 to make pressing Escape equivalent to clicking
-the relevant button.
-
                                       If parent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global
-modal dialog box. If parent is a widget, the message box
-becomes modal relative to parent.
-
                                       Note: If you do not specify an Escape button then if the Escape
-button is pressed then -1 will be returned.  It is suggested that
-you specify an Escape button to prevent this from happening.
-
                                       
                                      See also information(), warning(), and critical().
-
-
                                      void TQMessageBox::setButtonText ( int button, const TQString & text )
-
                                      
-Sets the text of the message box button button to text.
-Setting the text of a button that is not in the message box is
-silently ignored.
-
                                       
                                      See also buttonText().
-
-
                                      void TQMessageBox::setIcon ( Icon )
-
                                      Sets the message box's icon.
-See the "icon" property for details.
-
                                      void TQMessageBox::setIconPixmap ( const TQPixmap & )
-
                                      Sets the current icon.
-See the "iconPixmap" property for details.
-
                                      void TQMessageBox::setText ( const TQString & )
-
                                      Sets the message box text to be displayed.
-See the "text" property for details.
-
                                      void TQMessageBox::setTextFormat ( TextFormat )
-
                                      Sets the format of the text displayed by the message box.
-See the "textFormat" property for details.
-
                                      TQPixmap TQMessageBox::standardIcon ( Icon icon ) [static]
-
                                      
-Returns the pixmap used for a standard icon. This allows the
-pixmaps to be used in more complex message boxes. icon
-specifies the required icon, e.g. TQMessageBox::Question,
-TQMessageBox::Information, TQMessageBox::Warning or
-TQMessageBox::Critical.
-
-
                                      TQPixmap TQMessageBox::standardIcon ( Icon icon, GUIStyle style ) [static]
-
                                      
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                       Returns the pixmap used for a standard icon. This
-allows the pixmaps to be used in more complex message boxes.
-icon specifies the required icon, e.g. TQMessageBox::Information,
-TQMessageBox::Warning or TQMessageBox::Critical.
-
                                       style is unused.
-
-
                                      TQString TQMessageBox::text () const
-
                                      Returns the message box text to be displayed.
-See the "text" property for details.
-
                                      TextFormat TQMessageBox::textFormat () const
-
                                      Returns the format of the text displayed by the message box.
-See the "textFormat" property for details.
-
                                      int TQMessageBox::warning ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, int button0, int button1, int button2 = 0 ) [static]
-
                                      
-Opens a warning message box with the caption caption and the
-text text. The dialog may have up to three buttons. Each of the
-button parameters, button0, button1 and button2 may be
-set to one of the following values:
-
                                       
                                        
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::NoButton
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Ok
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Cancel
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Yes
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::No
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Abort
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Retry
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Ignore
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::YesAll
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::NoAll
-
                                      
-
                                       If you don't want all three buttons, set the last button, or last
-two buttons to TQMessageBox::NoButton.
-
                                       One button can be OR-ed with TQMessageBox::Default, and one
-button can be OR-ed with TQMessageBox::Escape.
-
                                       Returns the identity (TQMessageBox::Ok, or TQMessageBox::No, etc.)
-of the button that was clicked.
-
                                       If parent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global
-modal dialog box. If parent is a widget, the message box
-becomes modal relative to parent.
-
                                       
                                      See also information(), question(), and critical().
-
-
                                      Examples: chart/chartform.cpp, i18n/main.cpp, network/mail/smtp.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, and sound/sound.cpp.
-
                                      int TQMessageBox::warning ( TQWidget * parent, const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, const TQString & button0Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button1Text = TQString::null, const TQString & button2Text = TQString::null, int defaultButtonNumber = 0, int escapeButtonNumber = -1 ) [static]
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Displays a warning message box with a caption, a text, and 1, 2 or
-3 buttons. Returns the number of the button that was clicked (0,
-1, or 2).
-
                                       button0Text is the text of the first button, and is optional.
-If button0Text is not supplied, "OK" (translated) will be used.
-button1Text is the text of the second button, and is optional,
-and button2Text is the text of the third button, and is
-optional. defaultButtonNumber (0, 1 or 2) is the index of the
-default button; pressing Return or Enter is the same as clicking
-the default button. It defaults to 0 (the first button). escapeButtonNumber is the index of the Escape button; pressing
-Escape is the same as clicking this button. It defaults to -1;
-supply 0, 1, or 2 to make pressing Escape equivalent to clicking
-the relevant button.
-
                                       If parent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global
-modal dialog box. If parent is a widget, the message box
-becomes modal relative to parent.
-
                                       Note: If you do not specify an Escape button then if the Escape
-button is pressed then -1 will be returned.  It is suggested that
-you specify an Escape button to prevent this from happening.
-
                                       
                                      See also information(), question(), and critical().
-
-
                                      Property Documentation
                                      
-
                                      Icon icon
                                      
-
                                      This property holds the message box's icon.
-
                                      The icon of the message box can be one of the following predefined
-icons:
-
                                        
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::NoIcon
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Question
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Information
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Warning
-
                                      •  TQMessageBox::Critical
-
                                      
-
                                       The actual pixmap used for displaying the icon depends on the
-current GUI style. You can also set
-a custom pixmap icon using the TQMessageBox::iconPixmap
-property. The default icon is TQMessageBox::NoIcon.
-
                                       
                                      See also iconPixmap.
-
-
                                      Set this property's value with setIcon() and get this property's value with icon().
-
                                      TQPixmap iconPixmap
                                      
-
                                      This property holds the current icon.
-
                                      The icon currently used by the message box. Note that it's often
-hard to draw one pixmap that looks appropriate in both Motif and
-Windows GUI styles; you may want to draw two pixmaps.
-
                                       
                                      See also icon.
-
-
                                      Set this property's value with setIconPixmap() and get this property's value with iconPixmap().
-
                                      TQString text
                                      
-
                                      This property holds the message box text to be displayed.
-
                                      The text will be interpreted either as a plain text or as rich
-text, depending on the text format setting (TQMessageBox::textFormat). The default setting is AutoText, i.e.
-the message box will try to auto-detect the format of the text.
-
                                       The default value of this property is TQString::null.
-
                                       
                                      See also textFormat.
-
-
                                      Set this property's value with setText() and get this property's value with text().
-
                                      TextFormat textFormat
                                      
-
                                      This property holds the format of the text displayed by the message box.
-
                                      The current text format used by the message box. See the TQt::TextFormat enum for an explanation of the possible options.
-
                                       The default format is AutoText.
-
                                       
                                      See also text.
-
-
                                      Set this property's value with setTextFormat() and get this property's value with textFormat().
-
-
                                      
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                      
-
-
                                      Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                      TQt 3.3.8
                                      
-
                                      
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qmetaobject-h.html b/doc/html/qmetaobject-h.html
index 705658b40..50632a832 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmetaobject-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmetaobject-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qmetaobject.h Include File
+ntqmetaobject.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                      
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                      TQMetaObject Class Reference
                                      
-
-
                                      The TQMetaObject class contains meta information about TQt objects.
-More...
-
                                      #include <qmetaobject.h>
-
                                      List of all member functions.
-
                                      Public Members
                                      
-
                                        
-
                                      • const char * className () const
                                        • 
-
                                      • const char * superClassName () const
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQMetaObject * superClass () const
                                        • 
-
                                      • bool inherits ( const char * clname ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • int numSlots ( bool super = FALSE ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • int numSignals ( bool super = FALSE ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQStrList slotNames ( bool super = FALSE ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQStrList signalNames ( bool super = FALSE ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • int numClassInfo ( bool super = FALSE ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • const TQClassInfo * classInfo ( int index, bool super = FALSE ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • const char * classInfo ( const char * name, bool super = FALSE ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • const TQMetaProperty * property ( int index, bool super = FALSE ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • int findProperty ( const char * name, bool super = FALSE ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQStrList propertyNames ( bool super = FALSE ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • int numProperties ( bool super = FALSE ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      
-
                                      Detailed Description
                                      
-
-
-The TQMetaObject class contains meta information about TQt objects.
-
                                       
-
                                       The Meta Object System in TQt is responsible for the signals and
-slots inter-object communication mechanism, runtime type
-information and the property system. All meta information in TQt is
-kept in a single instance of TQMetaObject per class.
-
                                       This class is not normally required for application programming.
-But if you write meta applications, such as scripting engines or
-GUI builders, you might find these functions useful:
-
                                      
-
                                       Classes may have a list of name-value pairs of class information.
-The number of pairs is returned by numClassInfo(), and values are
-returned by classInfo().
-
                                       
                                      See also moc (Meta Object Compiler) and Object Model.
-
-
                                       
-
                                      Member Function Documentation
                                      
-
                                      const TQClassInfo * TQMetaObject::classInfo ( int index, bool super = FALSE ) const
-
                                      
-Returns the class information with index index or 0 if no such
-information exists.
-
                                       If super is TRUE,  inherited class information is included.
-
-
                                      const char * TQMetaObject::classInfo ( const char * name, bool super = FALSE ) const
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       Returns the class information with name name or 0 if no such
-information exists.
-
                                       If super is TRUE, inherited class information is included.
-
-
                                      const char * TQMetaObject::className () const
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Returns the class name.
-
                                       
                                      See also TQObject::className() and superClassName().
-
-
                                      int TQMetaObject::findProperty ( const char * name, bool super = FALSE ) const
-
                                      
-Returns the index for the property with name name or -1 if no
-such property exists.
-
                                       If super is TRUE, inherited properties are included.
-
                                       
                                      See also property() and propertyNames().
-
-
                                      bool TQMetaObject::inherits ( const char * clname ) const
-
                                      
-Returns TRUE if this class inherits clname within the meta object inheritance chain; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                       (A class is considered to inherit itself.)
-
-
                                      int TQMetaObject::numClassInfo ( bool super = FALSE ) const
-
                                      
-Returns the number of items of class information available for
-this class.
-
                                       If super is TRUE, inherited class information is included.
-
-
                                      int TQMetaObject::numProperties ( bool super = FALSE ) const
-
                                      
-Returns the number of properties for this class.
-
                                       If super is TRUE, inherited properties are included.
-
                                       
                                      See also propertyNames().
-
-
                                      int TQMetaObject::numSignals ( bool super = FALSE ) const
-
                                      
-Returns the number of signals for this class.
-
                                       If super is TRUE, inherited signals are included.
-
                                       
                                      See also signalNames().
-
-
                                      int TQMetaObject::numSlots ( bool super = FALSE ) const
-
                                      
-Returns the number of slots for this class.
-
                                       If super is TRUE, inherited slots are included.
-
                                       
                                      See also slotNames().
-
-
                                      const TQMetaProperty * TQMetaObject::property ( int index, bool super = FALSE ) const
-
                                      
-Returns the property meta data for the property at index index
-or 0 if no such property exists.
-
                                       If super is TRUE, inherited properties are included.
-
                                       
                                      See also propertyNames().
-
-
                                      TQStrList TQMetaObject::propertyNames ( bool super = FALSE ) const
-
                                      
-Returns a list with the names of all this class's properties.
-
                                       If super is TRUE, inherited properties are included.
-
                                       
                                      See also property().
-
-
                                      TQStrList TQMetaObject::signalNames ( bool super = FALSE ) const
-
                                      
-Returns a list with the names of all this class's signals.
-
                                       If super is TRUE, inherited signals are included.
-
-
                                      TQStrList TQMetaObject::slotNames ( bool super = FALSE ) const
-
                                      
-Returns a list with the names of all this class's slots.
-
                                       If super is TRUE, inherited slots are included.
-
                                       
                                      See also numSlots().
-
-
                                      TQMetaObject * TQMetaObject::superClass () const
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Returns the meta object of the super class or 0 if there is no
-such object.
-
-
                                      const char * TQMetaObject::superClassName () const
-
                                      
-
-
                                       Returns the class name of the superclass or 0 if there is no
-superclass in the TQObject hierachy.
-
                                       
                                      See also className().
-
-
-
                                      
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                      
-
-
                                      Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                      TQt 3.3.8
                                      
-
                                      
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qmetaproperty-members.html b/doc/html/qmetaproperty-members.html
index 7a52e87d9..48e1a30c6 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmetaproperty-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmetaproperty-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qmetaproperty.html b/doc/html/qmetaproperty.html
index 8cdf4a9db..33b2ea28a 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmetaproperty.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmetaproperty.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                      The TQMetaProperty class stores meta data about a property.
 More...
-
                                      #include <qmetaobject.h>
+
                                      #include <ntqmetaobject.h>
 
                                      List of all member functions.
 
                                      Public Members
                                      
 
                                        
@@ -64,22 +64,22 @@ further information about a property's type. The conversion
 functions keyToValue(), valueToKey(), keysToValue() and
 valueToKeys() allow conversion between the integer representation
 of an enumeration or set value and its literal representation.
-
                                         Actual property values are set and received through TQObject's set
-and get functions. See TQObject::setProperty() and
-TQObject::property() for details.
+
                                         Actual property values are set and received through TQObject's set
+and get functions. See TQObject::setProperty() and
+TQObject::property() for details.
 
                                         You receive meta property data through an object's meta object.
-See TQMetaObject::property() and TQMetaObject::propertyNames() for
+See TQMetaObject::property() and TQMetaObject::propertyNames() for
 details.
 
                                        See also Object Model.
 
 
                                        Member Function Documentation
                                        
-
                                        bool TQMetaProperty::designable ( TQObject * o = 0 ) const
+
                                        bool TQMetaProperty::designable ( TQObject * o = 0 ) const
 
                                          Returns TRUE if the property is designable for object o;
 otherwise returns FALSE.
 
                                         If no object o is given, the function returns a static
 approximation.
 
-
                                        TQStrList TQMetaProperty::enumKeys () const
+
                                        TQStrList TQMetaProperty::enumKeys () const
 
                                        
 Returns the possible enumeration keys if this property is an
 enumeration type (or a set type).
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Converts the enumeration key key to its integer value.
 
                                         For set types, use keysToValue().
 
                                         
                                        See also valueToKey(), isSetType(), and keysToValue().
 
-
                                        int TQMetaProperty::keysToValue ( const TQStrList & keys ) const
+
                                        int TQMetaProperty::keysToValue ( const TQStrList & keys ) const
 
                                        
 Converts the list of keys keys to their combined (OR-ed)
 integer value.
@@ -118,21 +118,21 @@ integer value.
 
 
                                         Returns the name of the property.
 
-
                                        bool TQMetaProperty::reset ( TQObject * o ) const
+
                                        bool TQMetaProperty::reset ( TQObject * o ) const
 
                                        
 Tries to reset the property for object o with a reset method.
 On success, returns TRUE; otherwise returns FALSE.
 
                                         Reset methods are optional, usually only a few properties support
 them.
 
-
                                        bool TQMetaProperty::scriptable ( TQObject * o = 0 ) const
+
                                        bool TQMetaProperty::scriptable ( TQObject * o = 0 ) const
 
                                        
 Returns TRUE if the property is scriptable for object o;
 otherwise returns FALSE.
 
                                         If no object o is given, the function returns a static
 approximation.
 
-
                                        bool TQMetaProperty::stored ( TQObject * o = 0 ) const
+
                                        bool TQMetaProperty::stored ( TQObject * o = 0 ) const
 
                                        
 Returns TRUE if the property shall be stored for object o;
 otherwise returns FALSE.
@@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Converts the enumeration value value to its literal key.
 
                                         For set types, use valueToKeys().
 
                                         
                                        See also isSetType() and valueToKeys().
 
-
                                        TQStrList TQMetaProperty::valueToKeys ( int value ) const
+
                                        TQStrList TQMetaProperty::valueToKeys ( int value ) const
 
                                        
 Converts the set value value to a list of keys.
 
                                         
                                        See also isSetType() and valueToKey().
diff --git a/doc/html/qmime-h.html b/doc/html/qmime-h.html
index a9e83a892..5c8e9a901 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmime-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmime-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qmime.h Include File
+ntqmime.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                        TQMotifPlusStyle Class Reference
                                        
-
-
                                        The TQMotifPlusStyle class provides a more sophisticated Motif-ish look and feel.
-More...
-
                                        #include <qmotifplusstyle.h>
-
                                        Inherits TQMotifStyle.
-
                                        List of all member functions.
-
                                        Public Members
                                        
-
-
                                        Detailed Description
                                        
-
-
-The TQMotifPlusStyle class provides a more sophisticated Motif-ish look and feel.
-
                                         
-
                                         This class implements a Motif-ish look and feel with the more
-sophisticated bevelling as used by the GIMP Toolkit (GTK+) for
-Unix/X11.
-
                                        See also Widget Appearance and Style.
-
-
                                        Member Function Documentation
                                        
-
                                        TQMotifPlusStyle::TQMotifPlusStyle ( bool hoveringHighlight = TRUE )
-
                                        
-Constructs a TQMotifPlusStyle
-
                                         If hoveringHighlight is TRUE (the default), then the style will
-not highlight push buttons, checkboxes, radiobuttons, comboboxes,
-scrollbars or sliders.
-
-
-
                                        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                        
-
-
                                        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                        TQt 3.3.8
                                        
-
                                        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qmotifstyle-h.html b/doc/html/qmotifstyle-h.html
index 7e00b37ec..66f6fec02 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmotifstyle-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmotifstyle-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qmotifstyle.h Include File
+ntqmotifstyle.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                        TQMotifStyle Class Reference
                                        
-
-
                                        The TQMotifStyle class provides Motif look and feel.
-More...
-
                                        #include <qmotifstyle.h>
-
                                        Inherits TQCommonStyle.
-
                                        Inherited by TQCDEStyle, TQMotifPlusStyle, and TQSGIStyle.
-
                                        List of all member functions.
-
                                        Public Members
                                        
-
-
                                        Detailed Description
                                        
-
-
-The TQMotifStyle class provides Motif look and feel.
-
                                         
-
                                         This class implements the Motif look and feel. It closely
-resembles the original Motif look as defined by the Open Group,
-but with some minor improvements. The Motif style is TQt's default
-GUI style on UNIX platforms.
-
                                        See also Widget Appearance and Style.
-
-
                                        Member Function Documentation
                                        
-
                                        TQMotifStyle::TQMotifStyle ( bool useHighlightCols = FALSE )
-
                                        
-Constructs a TQMotifStyle.
-
                                         If useHighlightCols is FALSE (the default), the style will
-polish the application's color palette to emulate the Motif way of
-highlighting, which is a simple inversion between the base and the
-text color.
-
-
                                        void TQMotifStyle::setUseHighlightColors ( bool arg )
-
                                        
-If arg is FALSE, the style will polish the application's color
-palette to emulate the Motif way of highlighting, which is a
-simple inversion between the base and the text color.
-
                                         The effect will show up the next time an application palette is
-set via TQApplication::setPalette(). The current color palette of
-the application remains unchanged.
-
                                         
                                        See also TQStyle::polish().
-
-
                                        bool TQMotifStyle::useHighlightColors () const
-
                                        
-Returns TRUE if the style treats the highlight colors of the
-palette in a Motif-like manner, which is a simple inversion
-between the base and the text color; otherwise returns FALSE. The
-default is FALSE.
-
-
-
                                        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                        
-
-
                                        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                        TQt 3.3.8
                                        
-
                                        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qmotifwidget-h.html b/doc/html/qmotifwidget-h.html
index bb302420d..b9cc6cbe0 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmotifwidget-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmotifwidget-h.html
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 #ifndef TQMOTIFWIDGET_H
 #define TQMOTIFWIDGET_H
 
-#include <qwidget.h>
+#include <ntqwidget.h>
 
 #include <X11/Intrinsic.h>
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qmotifwidget-members.html b/doc/html/qmotifwidget-members.html
index 2c3c7bc82..1731fce74 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmotifwidget-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmotifwidget-members.html
@@ -37,297 +37,297 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
 
                                        
diff --git a/doc/html/qmotifwidget.html b/doc/html/qmotifwidget.html
index ac6b8d7c3..113392189 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmotifwidget.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmotifwidget.html
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 More...
 
                                        This class is part of the TQt Motif Extension.
 
                                        #include <qmotifwidget.h>
-
                                        Inherits TQWidget.
+
                                        Inherits TQWidget.
 
                                        List of all member functions.
 
                                        Public Members
                                        
 
                                          
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                           This class is defined in the TQt Motif Extension, which can be found in the qt/extensions directory. It is not included in the main TQt API.
 
                                          
 
-The TQMotifWidget class provides the TQWidget API for Xt/Motif widgets.
+The TQMotifWidget class provides the TQWidget API for Xt/Motif widgets.
 
 
                                           
 
                                           TQMotifWidget exists to provide a TQWidget that can act as a parent
@@ -72,12 +72,12 @@ these custom widgets as TQMotifWidget with TQWidget parents. This
 allows the application's interface to be replaced gradually.
 
                                           Warning: TQMotifWidget uses the X11 window ID of the Motif widget
 directly, instead of creating its own.  Because ot this,
-TQWidget::reparent() will not work.  This includes the functions
-TQWidget::showFullScreen() and TQWidget::showNormal(), which use
+TQWidget::reparent() will not work.  This includes the functions
+TQWidget::showFullScreen() and TQWidget::showNormal(), which use
 TQWidget::reparent().
 
 
                                          Member Function Documentation
                                          
-
                                          TQMotifWidget::TQMotifWidget ( TQWidget * parent, WidgetClass widgetclass, ArgList args = NULL, Cardinal argcount = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags flags = 0 )
+
                                          TQMotifWidget::TQMotifWidget ( TQWidget * parent, WidgetClass widgetclass, ArgList args = NULL, Cardinal argcount = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags flags = 0 )
 
                                          
 Creates a TQMotifWidget of the given widgetclass as a child of
 parent, with the name name and widget flags flags.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ XtCreateWidget.
 This widget can be used as a parent for any other Xt/Motif widget.
 
                                           If parent is a TQMotifWidget, the Xt/Motif widget is created as
 a child of the parent's motifWidget(). If \ parent is 0 or a
-normal TQWidget, the Xt/Motif widget is created as a child of a
+normal TQWidget, the Xt/Motif widget is created as a child of a
 special TopLevelShell widget. Xt/Motif widgets can use this
 special TopLevelShell parent as the parent for existing
 Xt/Motif dialogs or TQMotifDialogs.
diff --git a/doc/html/qmouse_qws-h.html b/doc/html/qmouse_qws-h.html
index 95f09bd01..e241bfcaf 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmouse_qws-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmouse_qws-h.html
@@ -76,8 +76,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 #define TQMOUSE_QWS_H
 
 #ifndef QT_H
-#include "qobject.h"
-#include "qpointarray.h"
+#include "ntqobject.h"
+#include "ntqpointarray.h"
 #endif // QT_H
 
 class TQWSPointerCalibrationData
diff --git a/doc/html/qmousedriverfactory.html b/doc/html/qmousedriverfactory.html
index b4d70012b..e93f71141 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmousedriverfactory.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmousedriverfactory.html
@@ -54,14 +54,14 @@ driver plugin (see TQMouseDriverPlugin).
 
                                           TQMouseDriverFactory::keys() returns a list of valid keys.
 
 
                                          Member Function Documentation
                                          
-
                                          TQWSMouseHandler * TQMouseDriverFactory::create ( const TQString & key, const TQString & device ) [static]
+
                                          TQWSMouseHandler * TQMouseDriverFactory::create ( const TQString & key, const TQString & device ) [static]
 
                                          
 Creates a TQWSMouseHandler object that matches key and uses
 device device. This is either a built-in driver, or a driver
 from a driver plugin.
 
                                           
                                          See also keys().
 
-
                                          TQStringList TQMouseDriverFactory::keys () [static]
+
                                          TQStringList TQMouseDriverFactory::keys () [static]
 
                                          
 Returns the list of keys this factory can create drivers for.
 
                                           
                                          See also create().
diff --git a/doc/html/qmousedriverfactory_qws-h.html b/doc/html/qmousedriverfactory_qws-h.html
index d51c1644d..f6560af8a 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmousedriverfactory_qws-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmousedriverfactory_qws-h.html
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 #define TQMOUSEDRIVERFACTORY_QWS_H
 
 #ifndef QT_H
-#include "qstringlist.h"
+#include "ntqstringlist.h"
 #endif // QT_H
 
 class TQString;
diff --git a/doc/html/qmousedriverplugin.html b/doc/html/qmousedriverplugin.html
index d24317d21..70fc956b9 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmousedriverplugin.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmousedriverplugin.html
@@ -71,14 +71,14 @@ Destroys the mouse driver plugin.
 
                                           You never have to call this explicitly. TQt destroys a plugin
 automatically when it is no longer used.
 
-
                                          TQWSMouseHandler * TQMouseDriverPlugin::create ( const TQString & driver, const TQString & device ) [pure virtual]
+
                                          TQWSMouseHandler * TQMouseDriverPlugin::create ( const TQString & driver, const TQString & device ) [pure virtual]
 
                                          
 
 
                                           Creates a driver matching the type specified by driver and
 which uses device device.
 
                                           
                                          See also keys().
 
-
                                          TQStringList TQMouseDriverPlugin::keys () const [pure virtual]
+
                                          TQStringList TQMouseDriverPlugin::keys () const [pure virtual]
 
                                          
 
 
                                           Returns the list of mouse drivers this plugin supports.
diff --git a/doc/html/qmousedriverplugin_qws-h.html b/doc/html/qmousedriverplugin_qws-h.html
index 2596efc01..2e86338f5 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmousedriverplugin_qws-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmousedriverplugin_qws-h.html
@@ -76,8 +76,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 #define TQMOUSEDRIVERPLUGIN_QWS_H
 
 #ifndef QT_H
-#include "qgplugin.h"
-#include "qstringlist.h"
+#include "ntqgplugin.h"
+#include "ntqstringlist.h"
 #endif // QT_H
 
 #ifndef QT_NO_COMPONENT
diff --git a/doc/html/qmouseevent-members.html b/doc/html/qmouseevent-members.html
index 8eb2daf67..dba223f9b 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmouseevent-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmouseevent-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                        • ignore()
 
                                        • isAccepted()
 
                                        • pos()
-
                                        • spontaneous()
+
                                        • spontaneous()
 
                                        • state()
 
                                        • stateAfter()
-
                                        • type()
+
                                        • type()
 
                                        • x()
 
                                        • y()
 
                                        
diff --git a/doc/html/qmouseevent.html b/doc/html/qmouseevent.html
index 2f076db98..b2bbafe59 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmouseevent.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmouseevent.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                        The TQMouseEvent class contains parameters that describe a mouse event.
 More...
-
                                        #include <qevent.h>
-
                                        Inherits TQEvent.
+
                                        #include <ntqevent.h>
+
                                        Inherits TQEvent.
 
                                        List of all member functions.
 
                                        Public Members
                                        
 
 
 
                                        
diff --git a/doc/html/qmoveevent.html b/doc/html/qmoveevent.html
index 45956cce4..16c92889c 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmoveevent.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmoveevent.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                        The TQMoveEvent class contains event parameters for move events.
 More...
-
                                        #include <qevent.h>
-
                                        Inherits TQEvent.
+
                                        #include <ntqevent.h>
+
                                        Inherits TQEvent.
 
                                        List of all member functions.
 
                                        Public Members
                                        
 
                                          
@@ -49,21 +49,21 @@ The TQMoveEvent class contains event parameters for move events.
 
                                           
 
                                           Move events are sent to widgets that have been moved to a new position
 relative to their parent.
-
                                           The event handler TQWidget::moveEvent() receives move events.
-
                                           
                                          See also TQWidget::pos, TQWidget::geometry, and Event Classes.
+
                                           The event handler TQWidget::moveEvent() receives move events.
+
                                           
                                          See also TQWidget::pos, TQWidget::geometry, and Event Classes.
 
 
                                          Member Function Documentation
                                          
-
                                          TQMoveEvent::TQMoveEvent ( const TQPoint & pos, const TQPoint & oldPos )
+
                                          TQMoveEvent::TQMoveEvent ( const TQPoint & pos, const TQPoint & oldPos )
 
                                          
 
 
                                           Constructs a move event with the new and old widget positions, pos and oldPos respectively.
 
-
                                          const TQPoint & TQMoveEvent::oldPos () const
+
                                          const TQPoint & TQMoveEvent::oldPos () const
 
                                          
 
 
                                           Returns the old position of the widget.
 
-
                                          const TQPoint & TQMoveEvent::pos () const
+
                                          const TQPoint & TQMoveEvent::pos () const
 
                                          
 
 
                                           Returns the new position of the widget. This excludes the window
diff --git a/doc/html/qmovie-h.html b/doc/html/qmovie-h.html
index d92cef913..f7838ce70 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmovie-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmovie-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qmovie.h Include File
+ntqmovie.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                          
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                          TQMovie Class Reference
                                          
-
-
                                          The TQMovie class provides incremental loading of animations or images, signalling as it progresses.
-More...
-
                                          #include <qmovie.h>
-
                                          List of all member functions.
-
                                          Public Members
                                          
-
-
                                          Detailed Description
                                          
-
-
-The TQMovie class provides incremental loading of animations or images, signalling as it progresses.
-
                                           
-
-
-
-
                                           The simplest way to display a TQMovie is to use a TQLabel and
-TQLabel::setMovie().
-
                                           A TQMovie provides a TQPixmap as the framePixmap(); connections can
-be made via connectResize() and connectUpdate() to receive
-notification of size and pixmap changes. All decoding is driven
-by the normal event-processing mechanisms.
-
                                           The movie begins playing as soon as the TQMovie is created
-(actually, once control returns to the event loop). When the last
-frame in the movie has been played, it may loop back to the start
-if such looping is defined in the input source.
-
                                           TQMovie objects are explicitly shared. This means that a TQMovie
-copied from another TQMovie will be displaying the same frame at
-all times. If one shared movie pauses, all pause. To make independent movies, they must be constructed separately.
-
                                           The set of data formats supported by TQMovie is determined by the
-decoder factories that have been installed; the format of the
-input is determined as the input is decoded.
-
                                           The supported formats are MNG (if TQt is configured with MNG
-support enabled) and GIF (if TQt is configured with GIF support
-enabled, see qgif.h).
-
                                           If TQt is configured to support GIF reading, we are required to
-state that "The Graphics Interchange Format(c) is the Copyright
-property of CompuServe Incorporated. GIF(sm) is a Service Mark
-property of CompuServe Incorporated.
-
                                           Warning: If you are in a country that recognizes software patents
-and in which Unisys holds a patent on LZW compression and/or
-decompression and you want to use GIF, Unisys may require you to
-license that technology. Such countries include Canada, Japan,
-the USA, France, Germany, Italy and the UK.
-
                                           GIF support may be removed completely in a future version of TQt.
-We recommend using the MNG or PNG format.
-
                                           
                                          TQMovie
                                           
-
                                           
                                          See also TQLabel::setMovie(), Graphics Classes, Image Processing Classes, and Multimedia Classes.
-
-
                                          Member Type Documentation
                                          
-
                                          TQMovie::Status
                                          
-
-
                                            
-
                                          • TQMovie::SourceEmpty
-
                                          • TQMovie::UnrecognizedFormat
-
                                          • TQMovie::Paused
-
                                          • TQMovie::EndOfFrame
-
                                          • TQMovie::EndOfLoop
-
                                          • TQMovie::EndOfMovie
-
                                          • TQMovie::SpeedChanged
-
                                          
-
                                          Member Function Documentation
                                          
-
                                          TQMovie::TQMovie ()
-
                                          
-Constructs a null TQMovie. The only interesting thing to do with
-such a movie is to assign another movie to it.
-
                                           
                                          See also isNull().
-
-
                                          TQMovie::TQMovie ( int bufsize )
-
                                          
-Constructs a TQMovie with an external data source. You should later
-call pushData() to send incoming animation data to the movie.
-
                                           The bufsize argument sets the maximum amount of data the movie
-will transfer from the data source per event loop. The lower this
-value, the better interleaved the movie playback will be with
-other event processing, but the slower the overall processing will
-be.
-
                                           
                                          See also pushData().
-
-
                                          TQMovie::TQMovie ( TQDataSource * src, int bufsize = 1024 )
-
                                          
-Constructs a TQMovie that reads an image sequence from the given
-data source, src. The source must be allocated dynamically,
-because TQMovie will take ownership of it and will destroy it when
-the movie is destroyed. The movie starts playing as soon as event
-processing continues.
-
                                           The bufsize argument sets the maximum amount of data the movie
-will transfer from the data source per event loop. The lower this
-value, the better interleaved the movie playback will be with
-other event processing, but the slower the overall processing will
-be.
-
-
                                          TQMovie::TQMovie ( const TQString & fileName, int bufsize = 1024 )
-
                                          
-Constructs a TQMovie that reads an image sequence from the file, fileName.
-
                                           The bufsize argument sets the maximum amount of data the movie
-will transfer from the data source per event loop. The lower this
-value, the better interleaved the movie playback will be with
-other event processing, but the slower the overall processing will
-be.
-
-
                                          TQMovie::TQMovie ( TQByteArray data, int bufsize = 1024 )
-
                                          
-Constructs a TQMovie that reads an image sequence from the byte
-array, data.
-
                                           The bufsize argument sets the maximum amount of data the movie
-will transfer from the data source per event loop. The lower this
-value, the better interleaved the movie playback will be with
-other event processing, but the slower the overall processing will
-be.
-
-
                                          TQMovie::TQMovie ( const TQMovie & movie )
-
                                          
-Constructs a movie that uses the same data as movie movie.
-TQMovies use explicit sharing, so operations on the copy will
-affect both.
-
-
                                          TQMovie::~TQMovie ()
-
                                          
-Destroys the TQMovie. If this is the last reference to the data of
-the movie, the data is deallocated.
-
-
                                          const TQColor & TQMovie::backgroundColor () const
-
                                          
-Returns the background color of the movie set by
-setBackgroundColor().
-
-
                                          void TQMovie::connectResize ( TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
-
                                          
-Connects the receiver's member of type void member(const TQSize&) so that it is signalled when the movie changes size.
-
                                           Note that due to the explicit sharing of TQMovie objects, these
-connections persist until they are explicitly disconnected with
-disconnectResize() or until every shared copy of the movie is
-deleted.
-
-
                                          Example: movies/main.cpp.
-
                                          void TQMovie::connectStatus ( TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
-
                                          
-Connects the receiver's member, of type void member(int) so that it is signalled when the movie changes
-status. The status codes are negative for errors and positive for
-information.
-
                                           
                                          
-
                                           Status Code Meaning
-
                                           TQMovie::SourceEmpty
-signalled if the input cannot be read.
-
                                           TQMovie::UnrecognizedFormat
-signalled if the input data is unrecognized.
-
                                           TQMovie::Paused
-signalled when the movie is paused by a call to paused()
-or by after stepping pauses.
-
                                           TQMovie::EndOfFrame
-signalled at end-of-frame after any update and Paused signals.
-
                                           TQMovie::EndOfLoop
-signalled at end-of-loop, after any update signals,
-EndOfFrame - but before EndOfMovie.
-
                                           TQMovie::EndOfMovie
-signalled when the movie completes and is not about to loop.
-
                                          
-
                                           More status messages may be added in the future, so a general test
-for errors would test for negative.
-
                                           Note that due to the explicit sharing of TQMovie objects, these
-connections persist until they are explicitly disconnected with
-disconnectStatus() or until every shared copy of the movie is
-deleted.
-
-
                                          Example: movies/main.cpp.
-
                                          void TQMovie::connectUpdate ( TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
-
                                          
-Connects the receiver's member of type void member(const TQRect&) so that it is signalled when an area of the framePixmap()
-has changed since the previous frame.
-
                                           Note that due to the explicit sharing of TQMovie objects, these
-connections persist until they are explicitly disconnected with
-disconnectUpdate() or until every shared copy of the movie is
-deleted.
-
-
                                          Example: movies/main.cpp.
-
                                          void TQMovie::disconnectResize ( TQObject * receiver, const char * member = 0 )
-
                                          
-Disconnects the receiver's member (or all members if member is zero) that were previously connected by connectResize().
-
-
                                          void TQMovie::disconnectStatus ( TQObject * receiver, const char * member = 0 )
-
                                          
-Disconnects the receiver's member (or all members if member is zero) that were previously connected by connectStatus().
-
-
                                          void TQMovie::disconnectUpdate ( TQObject * receiver, const char * member = 0 )
-
                                          
-Disconnects the receiver's member (or all members if \q
-member is zero) that were previously connected by connectUpdate().
-
-
                                          bool TQMovie::finished () const
-
                                          
-Returns TRUE if the image is no longer playing: this happens when
-all loops of all frames are complete; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                          Example: movies/main.cpp.
-
                                          const TQImage & TQMovie::frameImage () const
-
                                          
-Returns the current frame of the movie, as a TQImage. It is not
-generally useful to keep a copy of this image. Also note that you
-must not call this function if the movie is finished(), since by
-then the image will not be available.
-
                                           
                                          See also framePixmap().
-
-
                                          int TQMovie::frameNumber () const
-
                                          
-Returns the number of times EndOfFrame has been emitted since the
-start of the current loop of the movie. Thus, before any
-EndOfFrame has been emitted the value will be 0; within slots
-processing the first signal, frameNumber() will be 1, and so on.
-
-
                                          const TQPixmap & TQMovie::framePixmap () const
-
                                          
-Returns the current frame of the movie, as a TQPixmap. It is not
-generally useful to keep a copy of this pixmap. It is better to
-keep a copy of the TQMovie and get the framePixmap() only when
-needed for drawing.
-
                                           
                                          See also frameImage().
-
-
                                          Example: movies/main.cpp.
-
                                          const TQRect & TQMovie::getValidRect () const
-
                                          
-Returns the area of the pixmap for which pixels have been
-generated.
-
-
                                          bool TQMovie::isNull () const
-
                                          
-Returns TRUE if the movie is null; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                          TQMovie & TQMovie::operator= ( const TQMovie & movie )
-
                                          
-Makes this movie use the same data as movie movie. TQMovies use
-explicit sharing.
-
-
                                          void TQMovie::pause ()
-
                                          
-Pauses the progress of the animation.
-
                                           
                                          See also unpause().
-
-
                                          Example: movies/main.cpp.
-
                                          bool TQMovie::paused () const
-
                                          
-Returns TRUE if the image is paused; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                          Example: movies/main.cpp.
-
                                          void TQMovie::pushData ( const uchar * data, int length )
-
                                          
-Pushes length bytes from data into the movie. length must
-be no more than the amount returned by pushSpace() since the
-previous call to pushData().
-
-
                                          int TQMovie::pushSpace () const
-
                                          
-Returns the maximum amount of data that can currently be pushed
-into the movie by a call to pushData(). This is affected by the
-initial buffer size, but varies as the movie plays and data is
-consumed.
-
-
                                          void TQMovie::restart ()
-
                                          
-Rewinds the movie to the beginning. If the movie has not been
-paused, it begins playing again.
-
-
                                          Example: movies/main.cpp.
-
                                          bool TQMovie::running () const
-
                                          
-Returns TRUE if the image is not single-stepping, not paused, and
-not finished; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                          void TQMovie::setBackgroundColor ( const TQColor & c )
-
                                          
-Sets the background color of the pixmap to c. If the background
-color isValid(), the pixmap will never have a mask because the
-background color will be used in transparent regions of the image.
-
                                           
                                          See also backgroundColor().
-
-
                                          void TQMovie::setSpeed ( int percent )
-
                                          
-Sets the movie's play speed as a percentage, to percent. This
-is a percentage of the speed dictated by the input data format.
-The default is 100 percent.
-
-
                                          int TQMovie::speed () const
-
                                          
-Returns the movie's play speed as a percentage. The default is 100
-percent.
-
                                           
                                          See also setSpeed().
-
-
                                          void TQMovie::step ()
-
                                          
-Steps forward 1 frame and then pauses.
-
-
                                          Example: movies/main.cpp.
-
                                          void TQMovie::step ( int steps )
-
                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           Steps forward, showing steps frames, and then pauses.
-
-
                                          int TQMovie::steps () const
-
                                          
-Returns the number of steps remaining after a call to step(). If
-the movie is paused, steps() returns 0. If it's running normally
-or is finished, steps() returns a negative number.
-
-
                                          Example: movies/main.cpp.
-
                                          void TQMovie::unpause ()
-
                                          
-Unpauses the progress of the animation.
-
                                           
                                          See also pause().
-
-
                                          Example: movies/main.cpp.
-
-
                                          
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                          
-
-
                                          Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                          TQt 3.3.8
                                          
-
                                          
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qmultilineedit-h.html b/doc/html/qmultilineedit-h.html
index db13f1874..10ff44e9d 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmultilineedit-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmultilineedit-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qmultilineedit.h Include File
+ntqmultilineedit.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                          
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                          TQMultiLineEdit Class Reference
                                          [obsolete]
                                          
-
-
                                          The TQMultiLineEdit widget is a simple editor for inputting text.
-More...
-
                                          #include <qmultilineedit.h>
-
                                          Inherits TQTextEdit.
-
                                          List of all member functions.
-
                                          Public Members
                                          
-
                                            
-
                                          • TQMultiLineEdit ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQString textLine ( int line ) const
                                            • 
-
                                          • int numLines () const
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void insertLine ( const TQString & txt, int line = -1 )
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void insertAt ( const TQString & s, int line, int col, bool mark )
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void removeLine ( int paragraph )
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void setCursorPosition ( int line, int col, bool mark )
                                            • 
-
                                          • bool atBeginning () const
                                            • 
-
                                          • bool atEnd () const
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void setAlignment ( int flags )
                                            • 
-
                                          • int alignment () const
                                            • 
-
                                          • void setEdited ( bool )
                                            • 
-
                                          • bool edited () const
                                            • 
-
                                          • bool hasMarkedText () const
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQString markedText () const
                                            • 
-
                                          • void cursorWordForward ( bool mark )
                                            • 
-
                                          • void cursorWordBackward ( bool mark )
                                            • 
-
                                          • bool autoUpdate () const  (obsolete)
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void setAutoUpdate ( bool )  (obsolete)
                                            • 
-
                                          • int totalWidth () const  (obsolete)
                                            • 
-
                                          • int totalHeight () const  (obsolete)
                                            • 
-
                                          • int maxLines () const  (obsolete)
                                            • 
-
                                          • void setMaxLines ( int )  (obsolete)
                                            • 
-
                                          
-
                                          Public Slots
                                          
-
                                            
-
                                          • void deselect ()  (obsolete)
                                            • 
-
                                          
-
                                          Properties
                                          
-
                                            
-
                                          • Alignment alignment - the editor's paragraph alignment
                                            • 
-
                                          • bool atBeginning - whether the cursor is placed at the beginning of the text  (read only)
                                            • 
-
                                          • bool atEnd - whether the cursor is placed at the end of the text  (read only)
                                            • 
-
                                          • bool edited - whether the document has been edited by the user
                                            • 
-
                                          • int numLines - the number of paragraphs in the editor  (read only)
                                            • 
-
                                          
-
                                          Protected Members
                                          
-
                                            
-
                                          • TQPoint cursorPoint () const
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void insertAndMark ( const TQString & str, bool mark )
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void newLine ()
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void killLine ()
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void pageUp ( bool mark = FALSE )
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void pageDown ( bool mark = FALSE )
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void cursorLeft ( bool mark = FALSE, bool wrap = TRUE )
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void cursorRight ( bool mark = FALSE, bool wrap = TRUE )
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void cursorUp ( bool mark = FALSE )
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void cursorDown ( bool mark = FALSE )
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void backspace ()
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void home ( bool mark = FALSE )
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void end ( bool mark = FALSE )
                                            • 
-
                                          • bool getMarkedRegion ( int * line1, int * col1, int * line2, int * col2 ) const
                                            • 
-
                                          • int lineLength ( int row ) const
                                            • 
-
                                          
-
                                          Detailed Description
                                          
-
-
-This class is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                           The TQMultiLineEdit widget is a simple editor for inputting text.
-
                                           
-
                                           The TQMultiLineEdit was a simple editor widget in former TQt versions.  TQt
-3.0 includes a new richtext engine which obsoletes TQMultiLineEdit. It is
-still included for compatibility reasons. It is now a subclass of
-TQTextEdit, and provides enough of the old TQMultiLineEdit API to keep old
-applications working.
-
                                           If you implement something new with TQMultiLineEdit, we suggest using
-TQTextEdit instead and call TQTextEdit::setTextFormat(TQt::PlainText).
-
                                           Although most of the old TQMultiLineEdit API is still available, there is
-a few difference. The old TQMultiLineEdit operated on lines, not on
-paragraphs.  As lines change all the time during wordwrap, the new
-richtext engine uses paragraphs as basic elements in the data structure.
-All functions (numLines(), textLine(), etc.) that operated on lines, now
-operate on paragraphs. Further, getString() has been removed completely.
-It revealed too much of the internal data structure.
-
                                           Applications which made normal and reasonable use of TQMultiLineEdit
-should still work without problems. Some odd usage will require some
-porting. In these cases, it may be better to use TQTextEdit now.
-
                                            
-
                                           
                                          See also TQTextEdit and Advanced Widgets.
-
-
                                          Member Function Documentation
                                          
-
                                          TQMultiLineEdit::TQMultiLineEdit ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                          
-Constructs a new, empty, TQMultiLineEdit with parent parent called
-name.
-
-
                                          int TQMultiLineEdit::alignment () const
-
                                          Returns the editor's paragraph alignment.
-See the "alignment" property for details.
-
                                          bool TQMultiLineEdit::atBeginning () const
-
                                          Returns TRUE if the cursor is placed at the beginning of the text; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "atBeginning" property for details.
-
                                          bool TQMultiLineEdit::atEnd () const
-
                                          Returns TRUE if the cursor is placed at the end of the text; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "atEnd" property for details.
-
                                          bool TQMultiLineEdit::autoUpdate () const
-
                                          
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                           
-
                                          void TQMultiLineEdit::backspace () [virtual protected]
-
                                            Deletes the character on the left side of the text cursor and
-moves the cursor one position to the left. If a text has been selected
-by the user (e.g. by clicking and dragging) the cursor is put at the
-beginning of the selected text and the selected text is removed.  
-del()
-
-
                                          void TQMultiLineEdit::cursorDown ( bool mark = FALSE ) [virtual protected]
-
                                          
-Moves the cursor one line down.  If mark is TRUE, the text
-is selected.
-
                                          See also cursorUp(), cursorLeft(), and cursorRight().
-
-
                                          void TQMultiLineEdit::cursorLeft ( bool mark = FALSE, bool wrap = TRUE ) [virtual protected]
-
                                            Moves the cursor one character to the left. If mark is TRUE,
-the text is selected.
-The wrap parameter is currently ignored.
-
                                           
                                          See also cursorRight(), cursorUp(), and cursorDown().
-
-
                                          TQPoint TQMultiLineEdit::cursorPoint () const [protected]
-
                                            Returns the top center point where the cursor is drawn.
-
-
                                          void TQMultiLineEdit::cursorRight ( bool mark = FALSE, bool wrap = TRUE ) [virtual protected]
-
                                            Moves the cursor one character to the right.  If mark is TRUE,
-the text is selected.
-The wrap parameter is currently ignored.
-
                                           
                                          See also cursorLeft(), cursorUp(), and cursorDown().
-
-
                                          void TQMultiLineEdit::cursorUp ( bool mark = FALSE ) [virtual protected]
-
                                            Moves the cursor up one line.  If mark is TRUE, the text is
-selected.
-
                                           
                                          See also cursorDown(), cursorLeft(), and cursorRight().
-
-
                                          void TQMultiLineEdit::cursorWordBackward ( bool mark )
-
                                            Moves the cursor one word to the left.  If mark is TRUE, the
-text is selected.
-
                                           
                                          See also cursorWordForward().
-
-
                                          void TQMultiLineEdit::cursorWordForward ( bool mark )
-
                                            Moves the cursor one word to the right.  If mark is TRUE, the text
-is selected.
-
                                           
                                          See also cursorWordBackward().
-
-
                                          void TQMultiLineEdit::deselect () [slot]
-
                                          
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                           
-
                                          bool TQMultiLineEdit::edited () const
-
                                          Returns TRUE if the document has been edited by the user; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "edited" property for details.
-
                                          void TQMultiLineEdit::end ( bool mark = FALSE ) [virtual protected]
-
                                            Moves the text cursor to the right end of the line. If mark is
-TRUE, text is selected toward the last position.  If it is FALSE and the
-cursor is moved, all selected text is unselected.
-
                                           
                                          See also home().
-
-
                                          bool TQMultiLineEdit::getMarkedRegion ( int * line1, int * col1, int * line2, int * col2 ) const [protected]
-
                                          
-If there is selected text, sets line1, col1, line2 and col2
-to the start and end of the selected region and returns TRUE. Returns
-FALSE if there is no selected text.
-
-
                                          bool TQMultiLineEdit::hasMarkedText () const
-
                                          
-Returns TRUE if there is selected text.
-
-
                                          void TQMultiLineEdit::home ( bool mark = FALSE ) [virtual protected]
-
                                            Moves the text cursor to the left end of the line. If mark is
-TRUE, text is selected toward the first position. If it is FALSE and the
-cursor is moved, all selected text is unselected.
-
                                           
                                          See also end().
-
-
                                          void TQMultiLineEdit::insertAndMark ( const TQString & str, bool mark ) [virtual protected]
-
                                            Inserts str at the current cursor position and selects the
-text if mark is TRUE.
-
-
                                          void TQMultiLineEdit::insertAt ( const TQString & s, int line, int col, bool mark ) [virtual]
-
                                            Inserts string s at paragraph number line, after character
-number col in the paragraph.  If s contains newline
-characters, new lines are inserted.
-If mark is TRUE the inserted string will be selected.
-
                                           The cursor position is adjusted.
-
-
                                          void TQMultiLineEdit::insertLine ( const TQString & txt, int line = -1 ) [virtual]
-
                                            Inserts txt at paragraph number line. If line is less
-than zero, or larger than the number of paragraphs, the new text is
-put at the end.  If txt contains newline characters, several
-paragraphs are inserted.
-
                                           The cursor position is not changed.
-
-
                                          void TQMultiLineEdit::killLine () [virtual protected]
-
                                            Deletes text from the current cursor position to the end of the
-line. (Note that this function still operates on lines, not paragraphs.)
-
-
                                          int TQMultiLineEdit::lineLength ( int row ) const [protected]
-
                                            Returns the number of characters at paragraph number row. If
-row is out of range, -1 is returned.
-
-
                                          TQString TQMultiLineEdit::markedText () const
-
                                          
-Returns a copy of the selected text.
-
-
                                          int TQMultiLineEdit::maxLines () const
-
                                          
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                           
-
                                          void TQMultiLineEdit::newLine () [virtual protected]
-
                                            Splits the paragraph at the current cursor position.
-
-
                                          int TQMultiLineEdit::numLines () const
-
                                          Returns the number of paragraphs in the editor.
-See the "numLines" property for details.
-
                                          void TQMultiLineEdit::pageDown ( bool mark = FALSE ) [virtual protected]
-
                                          
-Moves the cursor one page down.  If mark is TRUE, the text
-is selected.
-
-
                                          void TQMultiLineEdit::pageUp ( bool mark = FALSE ) [virtual protected]
-
                                          
-Moves the cursor one page up.  If mark is TRUE, the text
-is selected.
-
-
                                          void TQMultiLineEdit::removeLine ( int paragraph ) [virtual]
-
                                            Deletes the paragraph at paragraph number paragraph. If paragraph is less than zero or larger than the number of paragraphs,
-nothing is deleted.
-
-
                                          void TQMultiLineEdit::setAlignment ( int flags ) [virtual]
-
                                          Sets the editor's paragraph alignment to flags.
-See the "alignment" property for details.
-
                                          Reimplemented from TQTextEdit.
-
                                          void TQMultiLineEdit::setAutoUpdate ( bool ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                           
-
                                          Example: qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
-
                                          void TQMultiLineEdit::setCursorPosition ( int line, int col, bool mark ) [virtual]
-
                                            Sets the cursor position to character number col in paragraph
-number line.  The parameters are adjusted to lie within the legal
-range.
-
                                           If mark is FALSE, the selection is cleared. otherwise it is extended.
-
                                           
-
                                          void TQMultiLineEdit::setEdited ( bool )
-
                                          Sets whether the document has been edited by the user.
-See the "edited" property for details.
-
                                          void TQMultiLineEdit::setMaxLines ( int )
-
                                          
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                           
-
                                          TQString TQMultiLineEdit::textLine ( int line ) const
-
                                            Returns the text at line number line (possibly the empty
-string), or a null string if line is invalid.
-
-
                                          Example: qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
-
                                          int TQMultiLineEdit::totalHeight () const
-
                                          
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                           
-
                                          int TQMultiLineEdit::totalWidth () const
-
                                          
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                           
-
                                          Property Documentation
                                          
-
                                          Alignment alignment
                                            
                                          This property holds the editor's paragraph alignment.
-
                                          Sets the alignment to flag, which must be AlignLeft, AlignHCenter or AlignRight.
-
                                           If flag is an illegal flag nothing happens.
-
                                           
                                          See also TQt::AlignmentFlags.
-
-
                                          Set this property's value with setAlignment() and get this property's value with alignment().
-
                                          bool atBeginning
                                           
                                          This property holds whether the cursor is placed at the beginning of the text.
-
                                          Get this property's value with atBeginning().
-
                                          See also atEnd.
-
-
                                          bool atEnd
                                           
                                          This property holds whether the cursor is placed at the end of the text.
-
                                          Get this property's value with atEnd().
-
                                          See also atBeginning.
-
-
                                          bool edited
                                            
                                          This property holds whether the document has been edited by the user.
-
                                          This is the same as TQTextEdit's "modifed" property.
-
                                           
                                          See also TQTextEdit::modified.
-
-
                                          Set this property's value with setEdited() and get this property's value with edited().
-
                                          int numLines
                                           
                                          This property holds the number of paragraphs in the editor.
-
                                          The count includes any empty paragraph at top and bottom, so for an
-empty editor this method returns 1.
-
-
                                          Get this property's value with numLines().
-
-
                                          
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                          
-
-
                                          Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                          TQt 3.3.8
                                          
-
                                          
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qmutex-h.html b/doc/html/qmutex-h.html
index 507b0efc0..1f293d43a 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmutex-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmutex-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qmutex.h Include File
+ntqmutex.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                          
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                          TQMutex Class Reference
                                          
-
-
                                          The TQMutex class provides access serialization between threads.
-More...
-
                                          All the functions in this class are thread-safe when TQt is built with thread support.
                                          
-
                                          #include <qmutex.h>
-
                                          List of all member functions.
-
                                          Public Members
                                          
-
-
                                          Detailed Description
                                          
-
-
-
-The TQMutex class provides access serialization between threads.
-
                                           
-
-
                                           The purpose of a TQMutex is to protect an object, data structure or
-section of code so that only one thread can access it at a time
-(This is similar to the Java synchronized keyword). For
-example, say there is a method which prints a message to the user
-on two lines:
-
                                           
                                          -    int number = 6;
-
-    void method1()
-    {
-        number *= 5;
-        number /= 4;
-    }
-
-    void method2()
-    {
-        number *= 3;
-        number /= 2;
-    }
-    
                                          
- 
-
                                           If these two methods are called in succession, the following happens:
-
                                           
                                          -    // method1()
-    number *= 5;        // number is now 30
-    number /= 4;        // number is now 7
-
-    // method2()
-    number *= 3;        // nubmer is now 21
-    number /= 2;        // number is now 10
-    
                                          
- 
-
                                           If these two methods are called simultaneously from two threads then the
-following sequence could result:
-
                                           
                                          -    // Thread 1 calls method1()
-    number *= 5;        // number is now 30
-
-    // Thread 2 calls method2().
-    //
-    // Most likely Thread 1 has been put to sleep by the operating
-    // system to allow Thread 2 to run.
-    number *= 3;        // number is now 90
-    number /= 2;        // number is now 45
-
-    // Thread 1 finishes executing.
-    number /= 4;        // number is now 11, instead of 10
-    
                                          
- 
-
                                           If we add a mutex, we should get the result we want:
-
                                           
                                          -    TQMutex mutex;
-    int number = 6;
-
-    void method1()
-    {
-        mutex.lock();
-        number *= 5;
-        number /= 4;
-        mutex.unlock();
-    }
-
-    void method2()
-    {
-        mutex.lock();
-        number *= 3;
-        number /= 2;
-        mutex.unlock();
-    }
-    
                                          
- 
-
                                           Then only one thread can modify number at any given time and
-the result is correct. This is a trivial example, of course, but
-applies to any other case where things need to happen in a
-particular sequence.
-
                                           When you call lock() in a thread, other threads that try to call
-lock() in the same place will block until the thread that got the
-lock calls unlock(). A non-blocking alternative to lock() is
-tryLock().
-
                                          See also Environment Classes and Threading.
-
-
                                          Member Function Documentation
                                          
-
                                          TQMutex::TQMutex ( bool recursive = FALSE )
-
                                          
-Constructs a new mutex. The mutex is created in an unlocked state.
-A recursive mutex is created if recursive is TRUE; a normal
-mutex is created if recursive is FALSE (the default). With a
-recursive mutex, a thread can lock the same mutex multiple times
-and it will not be unlocked until a corresponding number of
-unlock() calls have been made.
-
-
                                          TQMutex::~TQMutex () [virtual]
-
                                          
-Destroys the mutex.
-
                                           Warning: If you destroy a mutex that still holds a lock the
-resultant behavior is undefined.
-
-
                                          void TQMutex::lock ()
-
                                          
-Attempt to lock the mutex. If another thread has locked the mutex
-then this call will block until that thread has unlocked it.
-
                                           
                                          See also unlock() and locked().
-
-
                                          bool TQMutex::locked ()
-
                                          
-Returns TRUE if the mutex is locked by another thread; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                                           Warning: Due to differing implementations of recursive mutexes on
-various platforms, calling this function from the same thread that
-previously locked the mutex will return undefined results.
-
                                           
                                          See also lock() and unlock().
-
-
                                          bool TQMutex::tryLock ()
-
                                          
-Attempt to lock the mutex. If the lock was obtained, this function
-returns TRUE. If another thread has locked the mutex, this
-function returns FALSE, instead of waiting for the mutex to become
-available, i.e. it does not block.
-
                                           If the lock was obtained, the mutex must be unlocked with unlock()
-before another thread can successfully lock it.
-
                                           
                                          See also lock(), unlock(), and locked().
-
-
                                          void TQMutex::unlock ()
-
                                          
-Unlocks the mutex. Attempting to unlock a mutex in a different
-thread to the one that locked it results in an error. Unlocking a
-mutex that is not locked results in undefined behaviour (varies
-between different Operating Systems' thread implementations).
-
                                           
                                          See also lock() and locked().
-
-
-
                                          
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                          
-
-
                                          Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                          TQt 3.3.8
                                          
-
                                          
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qmutexlocker-members.html b/doc/html/qmutexlocker-members.html
index 67f382062..236d9586f 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmutexlocker-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmutexlocker-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qmutexlocker.html b/doc/html/qmutexlocker.html
index 4c550c4e0..d14309c36 100644
--- a/doc/html/qmutexlocker.html
+++ b/doc/html/qmutexlocker.html
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                          The TQMutexLocker class simplifies locking and unlocking TQMutexes.
 More...
 
                                          All the functions in this class are thread-safe when TQt is built with thread support.
                                          
-
                                          #include <qmutex.h>
+
                                          #include <ntqmutex.h>
 
                                          List of all member functions.
 
                                          Public Members
                                          
 
                                            
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ The TQMutexLocker class simplifies locking and unlocking TQMutexes.
 
                                             
 
                                             
 
-
                                             The purpose of TQMutexLocker is to simplify TQMutex locking and
+
                                             The purpose of TQMutexLocker is to simplify TQMutex locking and
 unlocking. Locking and unlocking a TQMutex in complex functions and
 statements or in exception handling code is error prone and
 difficult to debug. TQMutexLocker should be used in such situations
@@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ exception is passed up the stack to the calling function.
 
                                             TQMutexLocker also provides a mutex() member function that returns
 the mutex on which the TQMutexLocker is operating. This is useful
 for code that needs access to the mutex, such as
-TQWaitCondition::wait(). For example:
+TQWaitCondition::wait(). For example:
 
                                             
                                                 class SignalWaiter
     {
@@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ for code that needs access to the mutex, such as
         TQMutexLocker locker;
 
     public:
-        SignalWaiter( TQMutex *mutex )
+        SignalWaiter( TQMutex *mutex )
             : locker( mutex )
         {
         }
@@ -182,25 +182,25 @@ for code that needs access to the mutex, such as
     };
     
                                            
  
-
                                             
                                            See also TQMutex, TQWaitCondition, Environment Classes, and Threading.
+
                                             
                                            See also TQMutex, TQWaitCondition, Environment Classes, and Threading.
 
 
                                            Member Function Documentation
                                            
-
                                            TQMutexLocker::TQMutexLocker ( TQMutex * mutex )
+
                                            TQMutexLocker::TQMutexLocker ( TQMutex * mutex )
 
                                            
 
 
                                             Constructs a TQMutexLocker and locks mutex. The mutex will be
 unlocked when the TQMutexLocker is destroyed. If mutex is zero,
 TQMutexLocker does nothing.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQMutex::lock().
+
                                             
                                            See also TQMutex::lock().
 
 
                                            TQMutexLocker::~TQMutexLocker ()
 
                                            
 
 
                                             Destroys the TQMutexLocker and unlocks the mutex which was locked
 in the constructor.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQMutexLocker::TQMutexLocker() and TQMutex::unlock().
+
                                             
                                            See also TQMutexLocker::TQMutexLocker() and TQMutex::unlock().
 
-
                                            TQMutex * TQMutexLocker::mutex () const
+
                                            TQMutex * TQMutexLocker::mutex () const
 
                                            
 
 
                                             Returns a pointer to the mutex which was locked in the
diff --git a/doc/html/qnamespace-h.html b/doc/html/qnamespace-h.html
index 91fa4ef37..607117d26 100644
--- a/doc/html/qnamespace-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qnamespace-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qnamespace.h Include File
+ntqnamespace.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                            
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                            TQNetworkProtocol Class Reference
                                            [network module]
                                            
-
-
                                            The TQNetworkProtocol class provides a common API for network protocols.
-More...
-
                                            #include <qnetworkprotocol.h>
-
                                            Inherits TQObject.
-
                                            Inherited by TQFtp, TQHttp, and TQLocalFs.
-
                                            List of all member functions.
-
                                            Public Members
                                            
-
                                              
-
                                            • enum State { StWaiting = 0, StInProgress, StDone, StFailed, StStopped }
                                              • 
-
                                            • enum Operation { OpListChildren = 1, OpMkDir = 2, OpMkdir = OpMkDir, OpRemove = 4, OpRename = 8, OpGet = 32, OpPut = 64 }
                                              • 
-
                                            • enum ConnectionState { ConHostFound, ConConnected, ConClosed }
                                              • 
-
                                            • enum Error { NoError = 0, ErrValid, ErrUnknownProtocol, ErrUnsupported, ErrParse, ErrLoginIncorrect, ErrHostNotFound, ErrListChildren, ErrListChlidren = ErrListChildren, ErrMkDir, ErrMkdir = ErrMkDir, ErrRemove, ErrRename, ErrGet, ErrPut, ErrFileNotExisting, ErrPermissionDenied }
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQNetworkProtocol ()
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual ~TQNetworkProtocol ()
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual void setUrl ( TQUrlOperator * u )
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual void setAutoDelete ( bool b, int i = 10000 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool autoDelete () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual int supportedOperations () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual void addOperation ( TQNetworkOperation * op )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQUrlOperator * url () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQNetworkOperation * operationInProgress () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual void clearOperationQueue ()
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual void stop ()
                                              • 
-
                                            
-
                                            Signals
                                            
-
                                              
-
                                            • void data ( const TQByteArray & data, TQNetworkOperation * op )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void connectionStateChanged ( int state, const TQString & data )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void finished ( TQNetworkOperation * op )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void start ( TQNetworkOperation * op )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void newChildren ( const TQValueList<TQUrlInfo> & i, TQNetworkOperation * op )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void newChild ( const TQUrlInfo & i, TQNetworkOperation * op )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void createdDirectory ( const TQUrlInfo & i, TQNetworkOperation * op )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void removed ( TQNetworkOperation * op )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void itemChanged ( TQNetworkOperation * op )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void dataTransferProgress ( int bytesDone, int bytesTotal, TQNetworkOperation * op )
                                              • 
-
                                            
-
                                            Static Public Members
                                            
-
-
                                            Protected Members
                                            
-
-
                                            Detailed Description
                                            
-
-
-The TQNetworkProtocol class provides a common API for network protocols.
-
-
                                             
-
-
-
-
                                             This is a base class which should be used for network protocols
-implementations that can then be used in TQt (e.g. in the file
-dialog) together with the TQUrlOperator.
-
                                             The easiest way to implement a new network protocol is to
-reimplement the operation*() methods, e.g. operationGet(), etc.
-Only the supported operations should be reimplemented. To specify
-which operations are supported, also reimplement
-supportedOperations() and return an int that is OR'd together
-using the supported operations from the TQNetworkProtocol::Operation enum.
-
                                             When you implement a network protocol this way, it is important to
-emit the correct signals. Also, always emit the finished() signal
-when an operation is done (on success and on failure). TQt
-relies on correctly emitted finished() signals.
-
                                             For a detailed description of the TQt Network Architecture and how
-to implement and use network protocols in TQt, see the TQt Network Documentation.
-
                                            See also Input/Output and Networking.
-
-
                                            Member Type Documentation
                                            
-
                                            TQNetworkProtocol::ConnectionState
                                            
-
-
                                             When the connection state of a network protocol changes it emits
-the signal connectionStateChanged(). The first argument is one of
-the following values:
-
                                              
-
                                            • TQNetworkProtocol::ConHostFound - Host has been found.
-
                                            • TQNetworkProtocol::ConConnected - Connection to the host has been established.
-
                                            • TQNetworkProtocol::ConClosed - Connection has been closed.
-
                                            
-
                                            TQNetworkProtocol::Error
                                            
-
-
                                             When an operation fails (finishes unsuccessfully), the
-TQNetworkOperation of the operation returns an error code which has
-one of the following values:
-
                                              
-
                                            • TQNetworkProtocol::NoError - No error occurred.
-
                                            • TQNetworkProtocol::ErrValid - The URL you are operating on is not valid.
-
                                            • TQNetworkProtocol::ErrUnknownProtocol - There is no protocol implementation
-available for the protocol of the URL you are operating on (e.g.
-if the protocol is http and no http implementation has been
-registered).
-
                                            • TQNetworkProtocol::ErrUnsupported - The operation is not supported by the
-protocol.
-
                                            • TQNetworkProtocol::ErrParse - The URL could not be parsed correctly.
-
                                            • TQNetworkProtocol::ErrLoginIncorrect - You needed to login but the username
-or password is wrong.
-
                                            • TQNetworkProtocol::ErrHostNotFound - The specified host (in the URL) couldn't
-be found.
-
                                            • TQNetworkProtocol::ErrListChildren - An error occurred while listing the
-children (files).
-
                                            • TQNetworkProtocol::ErrMkDir - An error occurred when creating a directory.
-
                                            • TQNetworkProtocol::ErrRemove - An error occurred when removing a child (file).
-
                                            • TQNetworkProtocol::ErrRename - An error occurred when renaming a child (file).
-
                                            • TQNetworkProtocol::ErrGet - An error occurred while getting (retrieving) data.
-
                                            • TQNetworkProtocol::ErrPut - An error occurred while putting (uploading) data.
-
                                            • TQNetworkProtocol::ErrFileNotExisting - A file which is needed by the operation
-doesn't exist.
-
                                            • TQNetworkProtocol::ErrPermissionDenied - Permission for doing the operation has
-been denied.
-
                                             You should also use these error codes when implementing custom
-network protocols. If this is not possible, you can define your own
-error codes by using integer values that don't conflict with any
-of these values.
-
-
                                            TQNetworkProtocol::Operation
                                            
-
-
                                             This enum lists the possible operations that a network protocol
-can support. supportedOperations() returns an int of these that is
-OR'd together. Also, the type() of a TQNetworkOperation is always
-one of these values.
-
                                              
-
                                            • TQNetworkProtocol::OpListChildren - List the children of a URL, e.g. of a directory.
-
                                            • TQNetworkProtocol::OpMkDir - Create a directory.
-
                                            • TQNetworkProtocol::OpRemove - Remove a child (e.g. a file).
-
                                            • TQNetworkProtocol::OpRename - Rename a child (e.g. a file).
-
                                            • TQNetworkProtocol::OpGet - Get data from a location.
-
                                            • TQNetworkProtocol::OpPut - Put data to a location.
-
                                            
-
                                            TQNetworkProtocol::State
                                            
-
-
                                             This enum contains the state that a TQNetworkOperation can have.
-
                                              
-
                                            • TQNetworkProtocol::StWaiting - The operation is in the TQNetworkProtocol's queue
-waiting to be prcessed.
-
                                            • TQNetworkProtocol::StInProgress - The operation is being processed.
-
                                            • TQNetworkProtocol::StDone - The operation has been processed succesfully.
-
                                            • TQNetworkProtocol::StFailed - The operation has been processed but an error occurred.
-
                                            • TQNetworkProtocol::StStopped - The operation has been processed but has been
-stopped before it finished, and is waiting to be processed.
-
                                             
-
                                            Member Function Documentation
                                            
-
                                            TQNetworkProtocol::TQNetworkProtocol ()
-
                                            
-Constructor of the network protocol base class. Does some
-initialization and connecting of signals and slots.
-
-
                                            TQNetworkProtocol::~TQNetworkProtocol () [virtual]
-
                                            
-Destructor.
-
-
                                            void TQNetworkProtocol::addOperation ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [virtual]
-
                                            
-Adds the operation op to the operation queue. The operation
-will be processed as soon as possible. This method returns
-immediately.
-
-
                                            bool TQNetworkProtocol::autoDelete () const
-
                                            
-Returns TRUE if auto-deleting is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQNetworkProtocol::setAutoDelete().
-
-
                                            bool TQNetworkProtocol::checkConnection ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [virtual protected]
-
                                            
-For processing operations the network protocol base class calls
-this method quite often. This should be reimplemented by new
-network protocols. It should return TRUE if the connection is OK
-(open); otherwise it should return FALSE. If the connection is not
-open the protocol should open it.
-
                                             If the connection can't be opened (e.g. because you already tried
-but the host couldn't be found), set the state of op to
-TQNetworkProtocol::StFailed and emit the finished() signal with
-this TQNetworkOperation as argument.
-
                                             op is the operation that needs an open connection.
-
-
                                            Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                            void TQNetworkProtocol::clearOperationQueue () [virtual]
-
                                            
-Clears the operation queue.
-
-
                                            void TQNetworkProtocol::connectionStateChanged ( int state, const TQString & data ) [signal]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             This signal is emitted whenever the state of the connection of the
-network protocol is changed. state describes the new state,
-which is one of, ConHostFound, ConConnected or ConClosed.
-data is a message text.
-
-
                                            void TQNetworkProtocol::createdDirectory ( const TQUrlInfo & i, TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             This signal is emitted when mkdir() has been succesful and the
-directory has been created. i holds the information about the
-new directory. op is the pointer to the operation object which
-contains all the information about the operation, including the
-state, etc. Using op->arg( 0 ), you can get the file name of the
-new directory.
-
                                             When a protocol emits this signal, TQNetworkProtocol is smart
-enough to let the TQUrlOperator, which is used by the network
-protocol, emit its corresponding signal.
-
-
                                            void TQNetworkProtocol::data ( const TQByteArray & data, TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             This signal is emitted when new data has been received after
-calling get() or put(). op holds the name of the file from
-which data is retrieved or uploaded in its first argument, and the
-(raw) data in its second argument. You can get them with
-op->arg( 0 ) and op->rawArg( 1 ). op is the pointer to the
-operation object, which contains all the information about the
-operation, including the state, etc.
-
                                             When a protocol emits this signal, TQNetworkProtocol is smart
-enough to let the TQUrlOperator (which is used by the network
-protocol) emit its corresponding signal.
-
-
                                            void TQNetworkProtocol::dataTransferProgress ( int bytesDone, int bytesTotal, TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             This signal is emitted during the transfer of data (using put() or
-get()). bytesDone is how many bytes of bytesTotal have been
-transferred. bytesTotal may be -1, which means that the total
-number of bytes is not known. op is the pointer to the
-operation object which contains all the information about the
-operation, including the state, etc.
-
                                             When a protocol emits this signal, TQNetworkProtocol is smart
-enough to let the TQUrlOperator, which is used by the network
-protocol, emit its corresponding signal.
-
-
                                            void TQNetworkProtocol::finished ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             This signal is emitted when an operation finishes. This signal is
-always emitted, for both success and failure. op is the pointer
-to the operation object which contains all the information about
-the operation, including the state, etc. Check the state and error
-code of the operation object to determine whether or not the
-operation was successful.
-
                                             When a protocol emits this signal, TQNetworkProtocol is smart
-enough to let the TQUrlOperator, which is used by the network
-protocol, emit its corresponding signal.
-
-
                                            TQNetworkProtocol * TQNetworkProtocol::getNetworkProtocol ( const TQString & protocol ) [static]
-
                                            
-Static method to get a new instance of the network protocol protocol. For example, if you need to do some FTP operations, do
-the following:
-
                                            -    TQFtp *ftp = TQNetworkProtocol::getNetworkProtocol( "ftp" );
-    
                                            
- 
-This returns a pointer to a new instance of an ftp implementation
-or null if no protocol for ftp was registered. The ownership of
-the pointer is transferred to you, so you must delete it if you
-don't need it anymore.
-
                                             Normally you should not work directly with network protocols, so
-you will not need to call this method yourself. Instead, use
-TQUrlOperator, which makes working with network protocols much more
-convenient.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQUrlOperator.
-
-
                                            bool TQNetworkProtocol::hasOnlyLocalFileSystem () [static]
-
                                            
-Returns TRUE if the only protocol registered is for working on the
-local filesystem; returns FALSE if other network protocols are
-also registered.
-
-
                                            void TQNetworkProtocol::itemChanged ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             This signal is emitted whenever a file which is a child of this
-URL has been changed, e.g. by successfully calling rename(). op
-holds the original and the new file names in the first and second
-arguments, accessible with op->arg( 0 ) and op->arg( 1 )
-respectively. op is the pointer to the operation object which
-contains all the information about the operation, including the
-state, etc.
-
                                             When a protocol emits this signal, TQNetworkProtocol is smart
-enough to let the TQUrlOperator, which is used by the network
-protocol, emit its corresponding signal.
-
-
                                            void TQNetworkProtocol::newChild ( const TQUrlInfo & i, TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             This signal is emitted if a new child (file) has been read.
-TQNetworkProtocol automatically connects it to a slot which creates
-a list of TQUrlInfo objects (with just one TQUrlInfo i) and emits
-the newChildren() signal with this list. op is the pointer to
-the operation object which contains all the information about the
-operation that has finished, including the state, etc.
-
                                             This is just a convenience signal useful for implementing your own
-network protocol. In all other cases connect to the newChildren()
-signal with its list of TQUrlInfo objects.
-
-
                                            void TQNetworkProtocol::newChildren ( const TQValueList<TQUrlInfo> & i, TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             This signal is emitted after listChildren() was called and new
-children (files) have been read from the list of files. i holds
-the information about the new children. op is the pointer to
-the operation object which contains all the information about the
-operation, including the state, etc.
-
                                             When a protocol emits this signal, TQNetworkProtocol is smart
-enough to let the TQUrlOperator, which is used by the network
-protocol, emit its corresponding signal.
-
                                             When implementing your own network protocol and reading children,
-you usually don't read one child at once, but rather a list of
-them. That's why this signal takes a list of TQUrlInfo objects. If
-you prefer to read just one child at a time you can use the
-convenience signal newChild(), which takes a single TQUrlInfo
-object.
-
-
                                            void TQNetworkProtocol::operationGet ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [virtual protected]
-
                                            
-When implementing a new network protocol, this method should be
-reimplemented if the protocol supports getting data; this method
-should then process the TQNetworkOperation.
-
                                             When you reimplement this method it's very important that you emit
-the correct signals at the correct time (especially the finished()
-signal after processing an operation). Take a look at the TQt Network Documentation which describes in
-detail how to reimplement this method. You may also want to look
-at the example implementation in
-examples/network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                             op is the pointer to the operation object which contains all
-the information on the operation that has finished, including the
-state, etc.
-
-
                                            Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                            TQNetworkOperation * TQNetworkProtocol::operationInProgress () const
-
                                            
-Returns the operation, which is being processed, or 0 of no
-operation is being processed at the moment.
-
-
                                            void TQNetworkProtocol::operationListChildren ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [virtual protected]
-
                                            
-When implementing a new network protocol, this method should be
-reimplemented if the protocol supports listing children (files);
-this method should then process this TQNetworkOperation.
-
                                             When you reimplement this method it's very important that you emit
-the correct signals at the correct time (especially the finished()
-signal after processing an operation). Take a look at the TQt Network Documentation which describes in
-detail how to reimplement this method. You may also want to look
-at the example implementation in
-examples/network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                             op is the pointer to the operation object which contains all
-the information on the operation that has finished, including the
-state, etc.
-
-
                                            Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                            void TQNetworkProtocol::operationMkDir ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [virtual protected]
-
                                            
-When implementing a new network protocol, this method should be
-reimplemented if the protocol supports making directories; this
-method should then process this TQNetworkOperation.
-
                                             When you reimplement this method it's very important that you emit
-the correct signals at the correct time (especially the finished()
-signal after processing an operation). Take a look at the TQt Network Documentation which describes in
-detail how to reimplement this method. You may also want to look
-at the example implementation in
-examples/network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                             op is the pointer to the operation object which contains all
-the information on the operation that has finished, including the
-state, etc.
-
-
                                            void TQNetworkProtocol::operationPut ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [virtual protected]
-
                                            
-When implementing a new network protocol, this method should be
-reimplemented if the protocol supports putting (uploading) data;
-this method should then process the TQNetworkOperation.
-
                                             When you reimplement this method it's very important that you emit
-the correct signals at the correct time (especially the finished()
-signal after processing an operation). Take a look at the TQt Network Documentation which describes in
-detail how to reimplement this method. You may also want to look
-at the example implementation in
-examples/network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                             op is the pointer to the operation object which contains all
-the information on the operation that has finished, including the
-state, etc.
-
-
                                            void TQNetworkProtocol::operationRemove ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [virtual protected]
-
                                            
-When implementing a new network protocol, this method should be
-reimplemented if the protocol supports removing children (files);
-this method should then process this TQNetworkOperation.
-
                                             When you reimplement this method it's very important that you emit
-the correct signals at the correct time (especially the finished()
-signal after processing an operation). Take a look at the TQt Network Documentation which is describes
-in detail how to reimplement this method. You may also want to
-look at the example implementation in
-examples/network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                             op is the pointer to the operation object which contains all
-the information on the operation that has finished, including the
-state, etc.
-
-
                                            void TQNetworkProtocol::operationRename ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [virtual protected]
-
                                            
-When implementing a new newtork protocol, this method should be
-reimplemented if the protocol supports renaming children (files);
-this method should then process this TQNetworkOperation.
-
                                             When you reimplement this method it's very important that you emit
-the correct signals at the correct time (especially the finished()
-signal after processing an operation). Take a look at the TQt Network Documentation which describes in
-detail how to reimplement this method. You may also want to look
-at the example implementation in
-examples/network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                             op is the pointer to the operation object which contains all
-the information on the operation that has finished, including the
-state, etc.
-
-
                                            void TQNetworkProtocol::registerNetworkProtocol ( const TQString & protocol, TQNetworkProtocolFactoryBase * protocolFactory ) [static]
-
                                            
-Static method to register a network protocol for TQt. For example,
-if you have an implementation of NNTP (called Nntp) which is
-derived from TQNetworkProtocol, call:
-
                                            -    TQNetworkProtocol::registerNetworkProtocol( "nntp", new TQNetworkProtocolFactory<Nntp> );
-    
                                            
- 
-after which your implementation is registered for future nntp
-operations.
-
                                             The name of the protocol is given in protocol and a pointer to
-the protocol factory is given in protocolFactory.
-
-
                                            void TQNetworkProtocol::removed ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             This signal is emitted when remove() has been succesful and the
-file has been removed. op holds the file name of the removed
-file in the first argument, accessible with op->arg( 0 ). op is
-the pointer to the operation object which contains all the
-information about the operation, including the state, etc.
-
                                             When a protocol emits this signal, TQNetworkProtocol is smart
-enough to let the TQUrlOperator, which is used by the network
-protocol, emit its corresponding signal.
-
-
                                            void TQNetworkProtocol::setAutoDelete ( bool b, int i = 10000 ) [virtual]
-
                                            
-Because it's sometimes hard to take care of removing network
-protocol instances, TQNetworkProtocol provides an auto-delete
-mechanism. If you set b to TRUE, the network protocol instance
-is removed after it has been inactive for i milliseconds (i.e.
-i milliseconds after the last operation has been processed).
-If you set b to FALSE the auto-delete mechanism is switched
-off.
-
                                             If you switch on auto-delete, the TQNetworkProtocol also deletes
-its TQUrlOperator.
-
-
                                            void TQNetworkProtocol::setUrl ( TQUrlOperator * u ) [virtual]
-
                                            
-Sets the TQUrlOperator, on which the protocol works, to u.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQUrlOperator.
-
-
                                            void TQNetworkProtocol::start ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Some operations (such as listChildren()) emit this signal when
-they start processing the operation. op is the pointer to the
-operation object which contains all the information about the
-operation, including the state, etc.
-
                                             When a protocol emits this signal, TQNetworkProtocol is smart
-enough to let the TQUrlOperator, which is used by the network
-protocol, emit its corresponding signal.
-
-
                                            void TQNetworkProtocol::stop () [virtual]
-
                                            
-Stops the current operation that is being processed and clears all
-waiting operations.
-
-
                                            int TQNetworkProtocol::supportedOperations () const [virtual]
-
                                            
-Returns an int that is OR'd together using the enum values of
-TQNetworkProtocol::Operation, which describes which operations
-are supported by the network protocol. Should be reimplemented by
-new network protocols.
-
-
                                            Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                            TQUrlOperator * TQNetworkProtocol::url () const
-
                                            
-Returns the TQUrlOperator on which the protocol works.
-
-
-
                                            
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                            
-
-
                                            Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                            TQt 3.3.8
                                            
-
                                            
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qnp-h.html b/doc/html/qnp-h.html
index 8d00984b4..f93836676 100644
--- a/doc/html/qnp-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qnp-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qnp.h Include File
+ntqnp.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                            
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                            TQObject Class Reference
                                            
-
-
                                            The TQObject class is the base class of all TQt objects.
-More...
-
                                            All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
                                            
-
                                            #include <qobject.h>
-
                                            Inherits TQt.
-
                                            Inherited by TQAccel, TQAccessibleObject, TQAction, TQApplication, TQAssistantClient, TQDataPump, TQAxObject, TQAxScript, TQAxScriptManager, TQWidget, TQCanvas, TQStyle, TQClipboard, TQCopChannel, TQDns, TQLayout, TQDragObject, TQEditorFactory, TQEventLoop, TQFileIconProvider, TQNetworkProtocol, TQWSKeyboardHandler, TQNetworkOperation, TQNPInstance, TQObjectCleanupHandler, TQProcess, TQServerSocket, TQSessionManager, TQSignal, TQSignalMapper, TQSocket, TQSocketNotifier, TQSound, TQSqlDatabase, TQSqlDriver, TQSqlForm, TQStyleSheet, TQTimer, TQToolTipGroup, TQTranslator, TQUrlOperator, and TQValidator.
-
                                            List of all member functions.
-
                                            Public Members
                                            
-
                                              
-
                                            • TQObject ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual ~TQObject ()
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual const char * className () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual TQMetaObject * metaObject () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual bool event ( TQEvent * e )
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual bool eventFilter ( TQObject * watched, TQEvent * e )
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool isA ( const char * clname ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool inherits ( const char * clname ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • const char * name () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • const char * name ( const char * defaultName ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual void setName ( const char * name )
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool isWidgetType () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool highPriority () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool signalsBlocked () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void blockSignals ( bool block )
                                              • 
-
                                            • int startTimer ( int interval )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void killTimer ( int id )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void killTimers ()
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQObject * child ( const char * objName, const char * inheritsClass = 0, bool recursiveSearch = TRUE )
                                              • 
-
                                            • const TQObjectList * children () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQObjectList * queryList ( const char * inheritsClass = 0, const char * objName = 0, bool regexpMatch = TRUE, bool recursiveSearch = TRUE ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual void insertChild ( TQObject * obj )
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual void removeChild ( TQObject * obj )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void installEventFilter ( const TQObject * filterObj )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void removeEventFilter ( const TQObject * obj )
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool connect ( const TQObject * sender, const char * signal, const char * member ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool disconnect ( const char * signal = 0, const TQObject * receiver = 0, const char * member = 0 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool disconnect ( const TQObject * receiver, const char * member = 0 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void dumpObjectTree ()
                                              • 
-
                                            • void dumpObjectInfo ()
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual bool setProperty ( const char * name, const TQVariant & value )
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual TQVariant property ( const char * name ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQObject * parent () const
                                              • 
-
                                            
-
                                            Public Slots
                                            
-
-
                                            Signals
                                            
-
-
                                            Static Public Members
                                            
-
                                              
-
                                            • TQString tr ( const char * sourceText, const char * comment )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQString trUtf8 ( const char * sourceText, const char * comment )
                                              • 
-
                                            • const TQObjectList * objectTrees ()
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool connect ( const TQObject * sender, const char * signal, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool disconnect ( const TQObject * sender, const char * signal, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
                                              • 
-
                                            
-
                                            Properties
                                            
-
                                              
-
                                            • TQCString name - the name of this object
                                              • 
-
                                            
-
                                            Protected Members
                                            
-
-
                                            Static Protected Members
                                            
-
-
                                            Related Functions
                                            
-
                                              
-
                                            • void * qt_find_obj_child ( TQObject * parent, const char * type, const char * name )
                                              • 
-
                                            
-
                                            Detailed Description
                                            
-
-
-The TQObject class is the base class of all TQt objects.
-
                                             
-
-
-
                                             TQObject is the heart of the TQt object model. The central feature in this model is a very powerful
-mechanism for seamless object communication called signals and slots. You can
-connect a signal to a slot with connect() and destroy the
-connection with disconnect(). To avoid never ending notification
-loops you can temporarily block signals with blockSignals(). The
-protected functions connectNotify() and disconnectNotify() make it
-possible to track connections.
-
                                             TQObjects organize themselves in object trees. When you create a
-TQObject with another object as parent, the object will
-automatically do an insertChild() on the parent and thus show up
-in the parent's children() list. The parent takes ownership of the
-object i.e. it will automatically delete its children in its
-destructor. You can look for an object by name and optionally type
-using child() or queryList(), and get the list of tree roots using
-objectTrees().
-
                                             Every object has an object name() and can report its className()
-and whether it inherits() another class in the TQObject inheritance
-hierarchy.
-
                                             When an object is deleted, it emits a destroyed() signal. You can
-catch this signal to avoid dangling references to TQObjects. The
-TQGuardedPtr class provides an elegant way to use this feature.
-
                                             TQObjects can receive events through event() and filter the events
-of other objects. See installEventFilter() and eventFilter() for
-details. A convenience handler, childEvent(), can be reimplemented
-to catch child events.
-
                                             Last but not least, TQObject provides the basic timer support in
-TQt; see TQTimer for high-level support for timers.
-
                                             Notice that the Q_OBJECT macro is mandatory for any object that
-implements signals, slots or properties. You also need to run the
-moc program (Meta Object Compiler) on the
-source file. We strongly recommend the use of this macro in all
-subclasses of TQObject regardless of whether or not they actually
-use signals, slots and properties, since failure to do so may lead
-certain functions to exhibit undefined behaviour.
-
                                             All TQt widgets inherit TQObject. The convenience function
-isWidgetType() returns whether an object is actually a widget. It
-is much faster than inherits( "TQWidget" ).
-
                                             Some TQObject functions, e.g. children(), objectTrees() and
-queryList() return a TQObjectList. A TQObjectList is a TQPtrList of
-TQObjects. TQObjectLists support the same operations as TQPtrLists
-and have an iterator class, TQObjectListIt.
-
                                            See also Object Model.
-
-
                                            Member Function Documentation
                                            
-
                                            TQObject::TQObject ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                            
-Constructs an object called name with parent object, parent.
-
                                             The parent of an object may be viewed as the object's owner. For
-instance, a dialog box is the parent of the
-"OK" and "Cancel" buttons it contains.
-
                                             The destructor of a parent object destroys all child objects.
-
                                             Setting parent to 0 constructs an object with no parent. If the
-object is a widget, it will become a top-level window.
-
                                             The object name is some text that can be used to identify a
-TQObject. It's particularly useful in conjunction with TQt Designer. You can find an
-object by name (and type) using child(). To find several objects
-use queryList().
-
                                             
                                            See also parent(), name, child(), and queryList().
-
-
                                            TQObject::~TQObject () [virtual]
-
                                            
-Destroys the object, deleting all its child objects.
-
                                             All signals to and from the object are automatically disconnected.
-
                                             Warning: All child objects are deleted. If any of these objects
-are on the stack or global, sooner or later your program will
-crash. We do not recommend holding pointers to child objects from
-outside the parent. If you still do, the TQObject::destroyed()
-signal gives you an opportunity to detect when an object is
-destroyed.
-
                                             Warning: Deleting a TQObject while pending events are waiting to be
-delivered can cause a crash.  You must not delete the TQObject
-directly from a thread that is not the GUI thread.  Use the
-TQObject::deleteLater() method instead, which will cause the event
-loop to delete the object after all pending events have been
-delivered to the object.
-
-
                                            void TQObject::blockSignals ( bool block )
-
                                            
-Blocks signals if block is TRUE, or unblocks signals if block is FALSE.
-
                                             Emitted signals disappear into hyperspace if signals are blocked.
-Note that the destroyed() signals will be emitted even if the signals
-for this object have been blocked.
-
-
                                            Examples: rot13/rot13.cpp and simple/main.cpp.
-
                                            bool TQObject::checkConnectArgs ( const char * signal, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member ) [virtual protected]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns TRUE if the signal and the member arguments are
-compatible; otherwise returns FALSE. (The receiver argument is
-currently ignored.)
-
                                             Warning: We recommend that you use the default implementation and
-do not reimplement this function.
-
                                             
-
-
                                            TQObject * TQObject::child ( const char * objName, const char * inheritsClass = 0, bool recursiveSearch = TRUE )
-
                                            
-Searches the children and optionally grandchildren of this object,
-and returns a child that is called objName that inherits inheritsClass. If inheritsClass is 0 (the default), any class
-matches.
-
                                             If recursiveSearch is TRUE (the default), child() performs a
-depth-first search of the object's children.
-
                                             If there is no such object, this function returns 0. If there are
-more than one, the first one found is retured; if you need all of
-them, use queryList().
-
-
                                            void TQObject::childEvent ( TQChildEvent * ) [virtual protected]
-
                                            
-This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
-child events.
-
                                             Child events are sent to objects when children are inserted or
-removed.
-
                                             Note that events with TQEvent::type() TQEvent::ChildInserted are
-posted (with TQApplication::postEvent()) to make sure that the
-child's construction is completed before this function is called.
-
                                             If a child is removed immediately after it is inserted, the ChildInserted event may be suppressed, but the ChildRemoved
-event will always be sent. In such cases it is possible that there
-will be a ChildRemoved event without a corresponding ChildInserted event.
-
                                             If you change state based on ChildInserted events, call
-TQWidget::constPolish(), or do
-
                                            -        TQApplication::sendPostedEvents( this, TQEvent::ChildInserted );
-    
                                            
- 
-in functions that depend on the state. One notable example is
-TQWidget::sizeHint().
-
                                             
                                            See also event() and TQChildEvent.
-
-
                                            Reimplemented in TQMainWindow and TQSplitter.
-
                                            const TQObjectList * TQObject::children () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns a list of child objects, or 0 if this object has no
-children.
-
                                             The TQObjectList class is defined in the qobjectlist.h header
-file.
-
                                             The first child added is the first
-object in the list and the last child added is the last object in the list, i.e. new
-children are appended at the end.
-
                                             Note that the list order changes when TQWidget children are raised or lowered. A widget that is raised becomes the last object
-in the list, and a widget that is lowered becomes the first object
-in the list.
-
                                             
                                            See also child(), queryList(), parent(), insertChild(), and removeChild().
-
-
                                            const char * TQObject::className () const [virtual]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the class name of this object.
-
                                             This function is generated by the Meta
-    Object Compiler.
-
                                             Warning: This function will return the wrong name if the class
-definition lacks the Q_OBJECT macro.
-
                                             
                                            See also name, inherits(), isA(), and isWidgetType().
-
-
                                            Example: sql/overview/custom1/main.cpp.
-
                                            bool TQObject::connect ( const TQObject * sender, const char * signal, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member ) [static]
-
                                            
-Connects signal from the sender object to member in object
-receiver, and returns TRUE if the connection succeeds; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                                             You must use the SIGNAL() and SLOT() macros when specifying the signal
-and the member, for example:
-
                                            -    TQLabel     *label  = new TQLabel;
-    TQScrollBar *scroll = new TQScrollBar;
-    TQObject::connect( scroll, SIGNAL(valueChanged(int)),
-                      label,  SLOT(setNum(int)) );
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             This example ensures that the label always displays the current
-scroll bar value. Note that the signal and slots parameters must not
-contain any variable names, only the type. E.g. the following would
-not work and return FALSE:
-TQObject::connect( scroll, SIGNAL(valueChanged(int v)),
-label,  SLOT(setNum(int v)) );
-
                                             A signal can also be connected to another signal:
-
                                             
                                            -    class MyWidget : public TQWidget
-    {
-        Q_OBJECT
-    public:
-        MyWidget();
-
-    signals:
-        void myUsefulSignal();
-
-    private:
-        TQPushButton *aButton;
-    };
-
-    MyWidget::MyWidget()
-    {
-        aButton = new TQPushButton( this );
-        connect( aButton, SIGNAL(clicked()), SIGNAL(myUsefulSignal()) );
-    }
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             In this example, the MyWidget constructor relays a signal from a
-private member variable, and makes it available under a name that
-relates to MyWidget.
-
                                             A signal can be connected to many slots and signals. Many signals
-can be connected to one slot.
-
                                             If a signal is connected to several slots, the slots are activated
-in an arbitrary order when the signal is emitted.
-
                                             The function returns TRUE if it successfully connects the signal
-to the slot. It will return FALSE if it cannot create the
-connection, for example, if TQObject is unable to verify the
-existence of either signal or member, or if their signatures
-aren't compatible.
-
                                             A signal is emitted for every connection you make, so if you
-duplicate a connection, two signals will be emitted. You can
-always break a connection using disconnect().
-
                                             
                                            See also disconnect().
-
-
                                            Examples: action/main.cpp, application/main.cpp, extension/main.cpp, iconview/main.cpp, network/archivesearch/main.cpp, regexptester/main.cpp, and t2/main.cpp.
-
                                            bool TQObject::connect ( const TQObject * sender, const char * signal, const char * member ) const
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Connects signal from the sender object to this object's member.
-
                                             Equivalent to: TQObject::connect(sender, signal, this, member).
-
                                             
                                            See also disconnect().
-
-
                                            void TQObject::connectNotify ( const char * signal ) [virtual protected]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             This virtual function is called when something has been connected
-to signal in this object.
-
                                             Warning: This function violates the object-oriented principle of
-modularity. However, it might be useful when you need to perform
-expensive initialization only if something is connected to a
-signal.
-
                                             
                                            See also connect() and disconnectNotify().
-
-
                                            void TQObject::customEvent ( TQCustomEvent * ) [virtual protected]
-
                                            
-This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
-custom events. Custom events are user-defined events with a type
-value at least as large as the "User" item of the TQEvent::Type
-enum, and is typically a TQCustomEvent or TQCustomEvent subclass.
-
                                             
                                            See also event() and TQCustomEvent.
-
-
                                            void TQObject::deleteLater () [slot]
-
                                            
-Performs a deferred deletion of this object.
-
                                             Instead of an immediate deletion this function schedules a
-deferred delete event for processing when TQt returns to the main
-event loop.
-
-
                                            Example: table/bigtable/main.cpp.
-
                                            void TQObject::destroyed () [signal]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             This signal is emitted when the object is being destroyed.
-
                                             Note that the signal is emitted by the TQObject destructor, so
-the object's virtual table is already degenerated at this point,
-and it is not safe to call any functions on the object emitting
-the signal. This signal can not be blocked.
-
                                             All the objects's children are destroyed immediately after this
-signal is emitted.
-
-
                                            void TQObject::destroyed ( TQObject * obj ) [signal]
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             This signal is emitted immediately before the object obj is
-destroyed, and can not be blocked.
-
                                             All the objects's children are destroyed immediately after this
-signal is emitted.
-
-
                                            bool TQObject::disconnect ( const TQObject * sender, const char * signal, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member ) [static]
-
                                            
-Disconnects signal in object sender from member in object
-receiver.
-
                                             A signal-slot connection is removed when either of the objects
-involved are destroyed.
-
                                             disconnect() is typically used in three ways, as the following
-examples demonstrate.
-
                                              
-
                                            1.  Disconnect everything connected to an object's signals:
-
                                              -       disconnect( myObject, 0, 0, 0 );
-       
                                              
- 
-equivalent to the non-static overloaded function
-
                                              -       myObject->disconnect();
-       
                                              
- 
-
                                            2.  Disconnect everything connected to a specific signal:
-
                                              -       disconnect( myObject, SIGNAL(mySignal()), 0, 0 );
-       
                                              
- 
-equivalent to the non-static overloaded function
-
                                              -       myObject->disconnect( SIGNAL(mySignal()) );
-       
                                              
- 
-
                                            3.  Disconnect a specific receiver:
-
                                              -       disconnect( myObject, 0, myReceiver, 0 );
-       
                                              
- 
-equivalent to the non-static overloaded function
-
                                              -       myObject->disconnect(  myReceiver );
-       
                                              
- 
-
                                            
-
                                             0 may be used as a wildcard, meaning "any signal", "any receiving
-object", or "any slot in the receiving object", respectively.
-
                                             The sender may never be 0. (You cannot disconnect signals from
-more than one object in a single call.)
-
                                             If signal is 0, it disconnects receiver and member from
-any signal. If not, only the specified signal is disconnected.
-
                                             If receiver is 0, it disconnects anything connected to signal. If not, slots in objects other than receiver are not
-disconnected.
-
                                             If member is 0, it disconnects anything that is connected to receiver. If not, only slots named member will be disconnected,
-and all other slots are left alone. The member must be 0 if receiver is left out, so you cannot disconnect a
-specifically-named slot on all objects.
-
                                             
                                            See also connect().
-
-
                                            bool TQObject::disconnect ( const char * signal = 0, const TQObject * receiver = 0, const char * member = 0 )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Disconnects signal from member of receiver.
-
                                             A signal-slot connection is removed when either of the objects
-involved are destroyed.
-
-
                                            bool TQObject::disconnect ( const TQObject * receiver, const char * member = 0 )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Disconnects all signals in this object from receiver's member.
-
                                             A signal-slot connection is removed when either of the objects
-involved are destroyed.
-
-
                                            void TQObject::disconnectNotify ( const char * signal ) [virtual protected]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             This virtual function is called when something has been
-disconnected from signal in this object.
-
                                             Warning: This function violates the object-oriented principle of
-modularity. However, it might be useful for optimizing access to
-expensive resources.
-
                                             
                                            See also disconnect() and connectNotify().
-
-
                                            void TQObject::dumpObjectInfo ()
-
                                            
-Dumps information about signal connections, etc. for this object
-to the debug output.
-
                                             This function is useful for debugging, but does nothing if the
-library has been compiled in release mode (i.e. without debugging
-information).
-
-
                                            void TQObject::dumpObjectTree ()
-
                                            
-Dumps a tree of children to the debug output.
-
                                             This function is useful for debugging, but does nothing if the
-library has been compiled in release mode (i.e. without debugging
-information).
-
-
                                            bool TQObject::event ( TQEvent * e ) [virtual]
-
                                            
-This virtual function receives events to an object and should
-return TRUE if the event e was recognized and processed.
-
                                             The event() function can be reimplemented to customize the
-behavior of an object.
-
                                             
                                            See also installEventFilter(), timerEvent(), TQApplication::sendEvent(), TQApplication::postEvent(), and TQWidget::event().
-
-
                                            Reimplemented in TQWidget.
-
                                            bool TQObject::eventFilter ( TQObject * watched, TQEvent * e ) [virtual]
-
                                            
-Filters events if this object has been installed as an event
-filter for the watched object.
-
                                             In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to filter
-the event e, out, i.e. stop it being handled further, return
-TRUE; otherwise return FALSE.
-
                                             Example:
-
                                            -    class MyMainWindow : public TQMainWindow
-    {
-    public:
-        MyMainWindow( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
-
-    protected:
-        bool eventFilter( TQObject *obj, TQEvent *ev );
-
-    private:
-        TQTextEdit *textEdit;
-    };
-
-    MyMainWindow::MyMainWindow( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-        : TQMainWindow( parent, name )
-    {
-        textEdit = new TQTextEdit( this );
-        setCentralWidget( textEdit );
-        textEdit->installEventFilter( this );
-    }
-
-    bool MyMainWindow::eventFilter( TQObject *obj, TQEvent *ev )
-    {
-        if ( obj == textEdit ) {
-            if ( e->type() == TQEvent::KeyPress ) {
-                TQKeyEvent *k = (TQKeyEvent*)ev;
-                qDebug( "Ate key press %d", k->key() );
-                return TRUE;
-            } else {
-                return FALSE;
-            }
-        } else {
-            // pass the event on to the parent class
-            return TQMainWindow::eventFilter( obj, ev );
-        }
-    }
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             Notice in the example above that unhandled events are passed to
-the base class's eventFilter() function, since the base class
-might have reimplemented eventFilter() for its own internal
-purposes.
-
                                             Warning: If you delete the receiver object in this function, be
-sure to return TRUE. Otherwise, TQt will forward the event to the
-deleted object and the program might crash.
-
                                             
                                            See also installEventFilter().
-
-
                                            Reimplemented in TQAccel, TQScrollView, and TQSpinBox.
-
                                            bool TQObject::highPriority () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns TRUE if the object is a high-priority object, or FALSE if
-it is a standard-priority object.
-
                                             High-priority objects are placed first in TQObject's list of
-children on the assumption that they will be referenced very
-often.
-
-
                                            bool TQObject::inherits ( const char * clname ) const
-
                                            
-Returns TRUE if this object is an instance of a class that
-inherits clname, and clname inherits TQObject; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                                             A class is considered to inherit itself.
-
                                             Example:
-
                                            -        TQTimer *t = new TQTimer;         // TQTimer inherits TQObject
-        t->inherits( "TQTimer" );        // returns TRUE
-        t->inherits( "TQObject" );       // returns TRUE
-        t->inherits( "TQButton" );       // returns FALSE
-
-        // TQScrollBar inherits TQWidget and TQRangeControl
-        TQScrollBar *s = new TQScrollBar( 0 );
-        s->inherits( "TQWidget" );       // returns TRUE
-        s->inherits( "TQRangeControl" ); // returns FALSE
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             (TQRangeControl is not a TQObject.)
-
                                             
                                            See also isA() and metaObject().
-
-
                                            Examples: table/statistics/statistics.cpp, themes/metal.cpp, and themes/wood.cpp.
-
                                            void TQObject::insertChild ( TQObject * obj ) [virtual]
-
                                            
-Inserts an object obj into the list of child objects.
-
                                             Warning: This function cannot be used to make one widget the child
-widget of another widget. Child widgets can only be created by
-setting the parent widget in the constructor or by calling
-TQWidget::reparent().
-
                                             
                                            See also removeChild() and TQWidget::reparent().
-
-
                                            void TQObject::installEventFilter ( const TQObject * filterObj )
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Installs an event filter filterObj on this object. For example:
-
                                            -    monitoredObj->installEventFilter( filterObj );
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             An event filter is an object that receives all events that are
-sent to this object. The filter can either stop the event or
-forward it to this object. The event filter filterObj receives
-events via its eventFilter() function. The eventFilter() function
-must return TRUE if the event should be filtered, (i.e. stopped);
-otherwise it must return FALSE.
-
                                             If multiple event filters are installed on a single object, the
-filter that was installed last is activated first.
-
                                             Here's a KeyPressEater class that eats the key presses of its
-monitored objects:
-
                                            -    class KeyPressEater : public TQObject
-    {
-        ...
-    protected:
-        bool eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *e );
-    };
-
-    bool KeyPressEater::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *e )
-    {
-        if ( e->type() == TQEvent::KeyPress ) {
-            // special processing for key press
-            TQKeyEvent *k = (TQKeyEvent *)e;
-            qDebug( "Ate key press %d", k->key() );
-            return TRUE; // eat event
-        } else {
-            // standard event processing
-            return FALSE;
-        }
-    }
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             And here's how to install it on two widgets:
-
                                            -        KeyPressEater *keyPressEater = new KeyPressEater( this );
-        TQPushButton *pushButton = new TQPushButton( this );
-        TQListView *listView = new TQListView( this );
-
-        pushButton->installEventFilter( keyPressEater );
-        listView->installEventFilter( keyPressEater );
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             The TQAccel class, for example, uses this technique to intercept
-accelerator key presses.
-
                                             Warning: If you delete the receiver object in your eventFilter()
-function, be sure to return TRUE. If you return FALSE, TQt sends
-the event to the deleted object and the program will crash.
-
                                             
                                            See also removeEventFilter(), eventFilter(), and event().
-
-
                                            bool TQObject::isA ( const char * clname ) const
-
                                            
-Returns TRUE if this object is an instance of the class clname;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                             Example:
-
                                            -    TQTimer *t = new TQTimer; // TQTimer inherits TQObject
-    t->isA( "TQTimer" );     // returns TRUE
-    t->isA( "TQObject" );    // returns FALSE
-  
                                            
- 
-
                                             
                                            See also inherits() and metaObject().
-
-
                                            bool TQObject::isWidgetType () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns TRUE if the object is a widget; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                             Calling this function is equivalent to calling
-inherits("TQWidget"), except that it is much faster.
-
-
                                            void TQObject::killTimer ( int id )
-
                                            
-Kills the timer with timer identifier, id.
-
                                             The timer identifier is returned by startTimer() when a timer
-event is started.
-
                                             
                                            See also timerEvent(), startTimer(), and killTimers().
-
-
                                            void TQObject::killTimers ()
-
                                            
-Kills all timers that this object has started.
-
                                             Warning: Using this function can cause hard-to-find bugs: it kills
-timers started by sub- and superclasses as well as those started
-by you, which is often not what you want. We recommend using a
-TQTimer or perhaps killTimer().
-
                                             
                                            See also timerEvent(), startTimer(), and killTimer().
-
-
                                            TQMetaObject * TQObject::metaObject () const [virtual]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns a pointer to the meta object of this object.
-
                                             A meta object contains information about a class that inherits
-TQObject, e.g. class name, superclass name, properties, signals and
-slots. Every class that contains the Q_OBJECT macro will also have
-a meta object.
-
                                             The meta object information is required by the signal/slot
-connection mechanism and the property system. The functions isA()
-and inherits() also make use of the meta object.
-
-
                                            const char * TQObject::name () const
-
                                            Returns the name of this object.
-See the "name" property for details.
-
                                            const char * TQObject::name ( const char * defaultName ) const
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Returns the name of this object, or defaultName if the object
-does not have a name.
-
-
                                            TQCString TQObject::normalizeSignalSlot ( const char * signalSlot ) [static protected]
-
                                            
-Normlizes the signal or slot definition signalSlot by removing
-unnecessary whitespace.
-
-
                                            const TQObjectList * TQObject::objectTrees () [static]
-
                                            
-Returns a pointer to the list of all object trees (their root
-objects), or 0 if there are no objects.
-
                                             The TQObjectList class is defined in the qobjectlist.h header
-file.
-
                                             The most recent root object created is the first object in the list and the first root object added
-is the last object in the list.
-
                                             
                                            See also children(), parent(), insertChild(), and removeChild().
-
-
                                            TQObject * TQObject::parent () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns a pointer to the parent object.
-
                                             
                                            See also children().
-
-
                                            TQVariant TQObject::property ( const char * name ) const [virtual]
-
                                            
-Returns the value of the object's name property.
-
                                             If no such property exists, the returned variant is invalid.
-
                                             Information about all available properties are provided through
-the metaObject().
-
                                             
                                            See also setProperty(), TQVariant::isValid(), metaObject(), TQMetaObject::propertyNames(), and TQMetaObject::property().
-
-
                                            Example: qutlook/centralwidget.cpp.
-
                                            TQObjectList * TQObject::queryList ( const char * inheritsClass = 0, const char * objName = 0, bool regexpMatch = TRUE, bool recursiveSearch = TRUE ) const
-
                                            
-Searches the children and optionally grandchildren of this object,
-and returns a list of those objects that are named or that match
-objName and inherit inheritsClass. If inheritsClass is 0
-(the default), all classes match. If objName is 0 (the
-default), all object names match.
-
                                             If regexpMatch is TRUE (the default), objName is a regular expression that the objects's names must match. The syntax is that
-of a TQRegExp. If regexpMatch is FALSE, objName is a string
-and object names must match it exactly.
-
                                             Note that inheritsClass uses single inheritance from TQObject,
-the way inherits() does. According to inherits(), TQMenuBar
-inherits TQWidget but not TQMenuData. This does not quite match
-reality, but is the best that can be done on the wide variety of
-compilers TQt supports.
-
                                             Finally, if recursiveSearch is TRUE (the default), queryList()
-searches nth-generation as well as first-generation children.
-
                                             If all this seems a bit complex for your needs, the simpler
-child() function may be what you want.
-
                                             This somewhat contrived example disables all the buttons in this
-window:
-
                                            -    TQObjectList *l = topLevelWidget()->queryList( "TQButton" );
-    TQObjectListIt it( *l ); // iterate over the buttons
-    TQObject *obj;
-
-    while ( (obj = it.current()) != 0 ) {
-        // for each found object...
-        ++it;
-        ((TQButton*)obj)->setEnabled( FALSE );
-    }
-    delete l; // delete the list, not the objects
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             The TQObjectList class is defined in the qobjectlist.h header
-file.
-
                                             Warning: Delete the list as soon you have finished using it. The
-list contains pointers that may become invalid at almost any time
-without notice (as soon as the user closes a window you may have
-dangling pointers, for example).
-
                                             
                                            See also child(), children(), parent(), inherits(), name, and TQRegExp.
-
-
                                            void TQObject::removeChild ( TQObject * obj ) [virtual]
-
                                            
-Removes the child object obj from the list of children.
-
                                             Warning: This function will not remove a child widget from the
-screen. It will only remove it from the parent widget's list of
-children.
-
                                             
                                            See also insertChild() and TQWidget::reparent().
-
-
                                            void TQObject::removeEventFilter ( const TQObject * obj )
-
                                            
-Removes an event filter object obj from this object. The
-request is ignored if such an event filter has not been installed.
-
                                             All event filters for this object are automatically removed when
-this object is destroyed.
-
                                             It is always safe to remove an event filter, even during event
-filter activation (i.e. from the eventFilter() function).
-
                                             
                                            See also installEventFilter(), eventFilter(), and event().
-
-
                                            const TQObject * TQObject::sender () [protected]
-
                                            
-Returns a pointer to the object that sent the signal, if called in
-a slot activated by a signal; otherwise it returns 0. The pointer
-is valid only during the execution of the slot that calls this
-function.
-
                                             The pointer returned by this function becomes invalid if the
-sender is destroyed, or if the slot is disconnected from the
-sender's signal.
-
                                             Warning: This function violates the object-oriented principle of
-modularity. However, getting access to the sender might be useful
-when many signals are connected to a single slot. The sender is
-undefined if the slot is called as a normal C++ function.
-
-
                                            void TQObject::setName ( const char * name ) [virtual]
-
                                            
-Sets the object's name to name.
-
-
                                            bool TQObject::setProperty ( const char * name, const TQVariant & value ) [virtual]
-
                                            
-Sets the value of the object's name property to value.
-
                                             Returns TRUE if the operation was successful; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                             Information about all available properties is provided through the
-metaObject().
-
                                             
                                            See also property(), metaObject(), TQMetaObject::propertyNames(), and TQMetaObject::property().
-
-
                                            Example: qutlook/centralwidget.cpp.
-
                                            bool TQObject::signalsBlocked () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns TRUE if signals are blocked; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                             Signals are not blocked by default.
-
                                             
                                            See also blockSignals().
-
-
                                            int TQObject::startTimer ( int interval )
-
                                            
-Starts a timer and returns a timer identifier, or returns zero if
-it could not start a timer.
-
                                             A timer event will occur every interval milliseconds until
-killTimer() or killTimers() is called. If interval is 0, then
-the timer event occurs once every time there are no more window
-system events to process.
-
                                             The virtual timerEvent() function is called with the TQTimerEvent
-event parameter class when a timer event occurs. Reimplement this
-function to get timer events.
-
                                             If multiple timers are running, the TQTimerEvent::timerId() can be
-used to find out which timer was activated.
-
                                             Example:
-
                                            -    class MyObject : public TQObject
-    {
-        Q_OBJECT
-    public:
-        MyObject( TQObject *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 );
-
-    protected:
-        void timerEvent( TQTimerEvent * );
-    };
-
-    MyObject::MyObject( TQObject *parent, const char *name )
-        : TQObject( parent, name )
-    {
-        startTimer( 50 );    // 50-millisecond timer
-        startTimer( 1000 );  // 1-second timer
-        startTimer( 60000 ); // 1-minute timer
-    }
-
-    void MyObject::timerEvent( TQTimerEvent *e )
-    {
-        qDebug( "timer event, id %d", e->timerId() );
-    }
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             Note that TQTimer's accuracy depends on the underlying operating
-system and hardware. Most platforms support an accuracy of 20 ms;
-some provide more. If TQt is unable to deliver the requested
-number of timer clicks, it will silently discard some.
-
                                             The TQTimer class provides a high-level programming interface with
-one-shot timers and timer signals instead of events.
-
                                             
                                            See also timerEvent(), killTimer(), killTimers(), TQEventLoop::awake(), and TQEventLoop::aboutToBlock().
-
-
                                            void TQObject::timerEvent ( TQTimerEvent * ) [virtual protected]
-
                                            
-This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
-timer events for the object.
-
                                             TQTimer provides a higher-level interface to the timer
-functionality, and also more general information about timers.
-
                                             
                                            See also startTimer(), killTimer(), killTimers(), and event().
-
-
                                            Examples: biff/biff.cpp, dclock/dclock.cpp, forever/forever.cpp, grapher/grapher.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                                            TQString TQObject::tr ( const char * sourceText, const char * comment ) [static]
-
                                            
-
-
-
                                             Returns a translated version of sourceText, or sourceText
-itself if there is no appropriate translated version. The
-translation context is TQObject with comment (0 by default).
-All TQObject subclasses using the Q_OBJECT macro automatically have
-a reimplementation of this function with the subclass name as
-context.
-
                                             Warning: This method is reentrant only if all translators are
-installed before calling this method. Installing or removing
-translators while performing translations is not supported. Doing
-so will probably result in crashes or other undesirable behavior.
-
                                             
                                            See also trUtf8(), TQApplication::translate(), and Internationalization with TQt.
-
-
                                            Example: network/networkprotocol/view.cpp.
-
                                            TQString TQObject::trUtf8 ( const char * sourceText, const char * comment ) [static]
-
                                            
-
-
-
                                             Returns a translated version of sourceText, or
-TQString::fromUtf8(sourceText) if there is no appropriate
-version. It is otherwise identical to tr(sourceText, comment).
-
                                             Warning: This method is reentrant only if all translators are
-installed before calling this method. Installing or removing
-translators while performing translations is not supported. Doing
-so will probably result in crashes or other undesirable behavior.
-
                                             
                                            See also tr() and TQApplication::translate().
-
-
                                            Property Documentation
                                            
-
                                            TQCString name
                                            
-
                                            This property holds the name of this object.
-
                                            You can find an object by name (and type) using child(). You can
-find a set of objects with queryList().
-
                                             The object name is set by the constructor or by the setName()
-function. The object name is not very useful in the current
-version of TQt, but will become increasingly important in the
-future.
-
                                             If the object does not have a name, the name() function returns
-"unnamed", so printf() (used in qDebug()) will not be asked to
-output a null pointer. If you want a null pointer to be returned
-for unnamed objects, you can call name( 0 ).
-
                                             
                                            -        qDebug( "MyClass::setPrecision(): (%s) invalid precision %f",
-                name(), newPrecision );
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             
                                            See also className(), child(), and queryList().
-
-
                                            Set this property's value with setName() and get this property's value with name().
-
                                            Related Functions
                                            
-
                                            void * qt_find_obj_child ( TQObject * parent, const char * type, const char * name )
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns a pointer to the object named name that inherits type and with a given parent.
-
                                             Returns 0 if there is no such child.
-
                                             
                                            -        TQListBox *c = (TQListBox *) qt_find_obj_child( myWidget, "TQListBox",
-                                                      "my list box" );
-        if ( c )
-            c->insertItem( "another string" );
-    
                                            
- 
-
-
-
                                            
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                            
-
-
                                            Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                            TQt 3.3.8
                                            
-
                                            
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qobjectcleanuphandler-h.html b/doc/html/qobjectcleanuphandler-h.html
index e1a4128f8..a94368351 100644
--- a/doc/html/qobjectcleanuphandler-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qobjectcleanuphandler-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qobjectcleanuphandler.h Include File
+ntqobjectcleanuphandler.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                            
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                            TQObjectCleanupHandler Class Reference
                                            
-
-
                                            The TQObjectCleanupHandler class watches the lifetime of multiple TQObjects.
-More...
-
                                            #include <qobjectcleanuphandler.h>
-
                                            Inherits TQObject.
-
                                            List of all member functions.
-
                                            Public Members
                                            
-
-
                                            Detailed Description
                                            
-
-
-The TQObjectCleanupHandler class watches the lifetime of multiple TQObjects.
-
                                             
-
                                             A TQObjectCleanupHandler is useful whenever you need to know when a
-number of TQObjects that are owned by someone else have been
-deleted. This is important, for example, when referencing memory
-in an application that has been allocated in a shared library.
-
                                             Example:
-
                                             
                                            -    class FactoryComponent : public FactoryInterface, public TQLibraryInterface
-    {
-    public:
-        ...
-
-        TQObject *createObject();
-
-        bool init();
-        void cleanup();
-        bool canUnload() const;
-
-    private:
-        TQObjectCleanupHandler objects;
-    };
-
-    // allocate a new object, and add it to the cleanup handler
-    TQObject *FactoryComponent::createObject()
-    {
-        return objects.add( new TQObject() );
-    }
-
-    // TQLibraryInterface implementation
-    bool FactoryComponent::init()
-    {
-        return TRUE;
-    }
-
-    void FactoryComponent::cleanup()
-    {
-    }
-
-    // it is only safe to unload the library when all TQObject's have been destroyed
-    bool FactoryComponent::canUnload() const
-    {
-        return objects.isEmpty();
-    }
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                            See also Object Model.
-
-
                                            Member Function Documentation
                                            
-
                                            TQObjectCleanupHandler::TQObjectCleanupHandler ()
-
                                            
-Constructs an empty TQObjectCleanupHandler.
-
-
                                            TQObjectCleanupHandler::~TQObjectCleanupHandler ()
-
                                            
-Destroys the cleanup handler. All objects in this cleanup handler
-will be deleted.
-
-
                                            TQObject * TQObjectCleanupHandler::add ( TQObject * object )
-
                                            
-Adds object to this cleanup handler and returns the pointer to
-the object.
-
-
                                            void TQObjectCleanupHandler::clear ()
-
                                            
-Deletes all objects in this cleanup handler. The cleanup handler
-becomes empty.
-
-
                                            bool TQObjectCleanupHandler::isEmpty () const
-
                                            
-Returns TRUE if this cleanup handler is empty or if all objects in
-this cleanup handler have been destroyed; otherwise return FALSE.
-
-
                                            void TQObjectCleanupHandler::remove ( TQObject * object )
-
                                            
-Removes the object from this cleanup handler. The object will
-not be destroyed.
-
-
-
                                            
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                            
-
-
                                            Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                            TQt 3.3.8
                                            
-
                                            
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qobjectlist-h.html b/doc/html/qobjectlist-h.html
index 65dc92f39..248ba94b3 100644
--- a/doc/html/qobjectlist-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qobjectlist-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qobjectlist.h Include File
+ntqobjectlist.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                            
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                            TQObjectList Class Reference
                                            
-
-
                                            The TQObjectList class is a TQPtrList of TQObjects.
-More...
-
                                            #include <qobjectlist.h>
-
                                            Inherits TQPtrList<TQObject>.
-
                                            List of all member functions.
-
                                            Public Members
                                            
-
-
                                            Detailed Description
                                            
-
-
-The TQObjectList class is a TQPtrList of TQObjects.
-
                                             
-
-
                                             A TQObjectList is a TQPtrList<TQObject>. The list can be traversed using
-inherited functions, e.g. getFirst(), next(), etc., or using a
-TQObjectListIterator iterator.
-
                                             See TQObject::queryList() for an example of use.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQObjectListIterator, TQObject, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
-
-
                                            Member Function Documentation
                                            
-
                                            TQObjectList::TQObjectList ()
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Constructs an empty TQObject list.
-
-
                                            TQObjectList::TQObjectList ( const TQObjectList & list )
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Constructs a copy of list.
-
                                             Each item in list is appended to this
-list. Only the pointers are copied (shallow copy).
-
-
                                            TQObjectList::~TQObjectList ()
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Removes all the object pointers from the list and destroys the
-list.
-
                                             All list iterators that access this list will be reset.
-
                                             
                                            See also setAutoDelete().
-
-
                                            TQObjectList & TQObjectList::operator= ( const TQObjectList & list )
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Assigns list to this list and returns a reference to this list.
-
                                             This list is first cleared and then each item in list is appended to this list. Only the pointers are
-copied (shallow copy) unless newItem() has been reimplemented().
-
-
-
                                            
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                            
-
-
                                            Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                            TQt 3.3.8
                                            
-
                                            
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qobjectlistiterator-members.html b/doc/html/qobjectlistiterator-members.html
index e61570a38..ba8ffa2e8 100644
--- a/doc/html/qobjectlistiterator-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qobjectlistiterator-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qobjectlistiterator.html b/doc/html/qobjectlistiterator.html
index 8c624dbbb..7a7e31efd 100644
--- a/doc/html/qobjectlistiterator.html
+++ b/doc/html/qobjectlistiterator.html
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                            The TQObjectListIterator class provides an iterator for
 TQObjectLists.
 More...
-
                                            #include <qobjectlist.h>
+
                                            #include <ntqobjectlist.h>
 
                                            Inherits TQPtrListIterator<TQObject>.
 
                                            List of all member functions.
 
                                            Public Members
                                            
@@ -50,11 +50,11 @@ TQObjectLists.
 
                                             
 
 
                                             A TQObjectListIterator iterator is a TQPtrListIterator<TQObject>.
-
                                             See TQObject::queryList() for an example of use.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQObjectList, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
                                             See TQObject::queryList() for an example of use.
+
                                             
                                            See also TQObjectList, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
 
 
                                            Member Function Documentation
                                            
-
                                            TQObjectListIterator::TQObjectListIterator ( const TQObjectList & list )
+
                                            TQObjectListIterator::TQObjectListIterator ( const TQObjectList & list )
 
                                            
 
 
                                             Constructs an iterator for list. The current iterator item is
diff --git a/doc/html/qpaintdevice-h.html b/doc/html/qpaintdevice-h.html
index 1ddd57dba..5acf3a69a 100644
--- a/doc/html/qpaintdevice-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qpaintdevice-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qpaintdevice.h Include File
+ntqpaintdevice.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                            
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                            TQPaintDevice Class Reference
                                            
-
-
                                            The TQPaintDevice class is the base class of objects that
-can be painted.
-More...
-
                                            #include <qpaintdevice.h>
-
                                            Inherited by TQWidget, TQPixmap, TQPicture, and TQPrinter.
-
                                            List of all member functions.
-
                                            Public Members
                                            
-
-
                                            Static Public Members
                                            
-
-
                                            Protected Members
                                            
-
                                              
-
                                            • TQPaintDevice ( uint devflags )
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual bool cmd ( int, TQPainter *, TQPDevCmdParam * )
                                              • 
-
                                            
-
                                            Related Functions
                                            
-
                                              
-
                                            • void bitBlt ( TQPaintDevice * dst, int dx, int dy, const TQPaintDevice * src, int sx, int sy, int sw, int sh, TQt::RasterOp rop, bool ignoreMask )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void bitBlt ( TQPaintDevice * dst, const TQPoint & dp, const TQPaintDevice * src, const TQRect & sr, RasterOp rop )
                                              • 
-
                                            
-
                                            Detailed Description
                                            
-
-
-The TQPaintDevice class is the base class of objects that
-can be painted.
-
                                             
-
-
                                             A paint device is an abstraction of a two-dimensional space that
-can be drawn using a TQPainter. The drawing capabilities are
-implemented by the subclasses TQWidget, TQPixmap, TQPicture and
-TQPrinter.
-
                                             The default coordinate system of a paint device has its origin
-located at the top-left position. X increases to the right and Y
-increases downward. The unit is one pixel. There are several ways
-to set up a user-defined coordinate system using the painter, for
-example, using TQPainter::setWorldMatrix().
-
                                             Example (draw on a paint device):
-
                                            -    void MyWidget::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
-    {
-        TQPainter p;                       // our painter
-        p.begin( this );                  // start painting the widget
-        p.setPen( red );                  // red outline
-        p.setBrush( yellow );             // yellow fill
-        p.drawEllipse( 10, 20, 100,100 ); // 100x100 ellipse at position (10, 20)
-        p.end();                          // painting done
-    }
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             The bit block transfer is an extremely useful operation for
-copying pixels from one paint device to another (or to itself). It
-is implemented as the global function bitBlt().
-
                                             Example (scroll widget contents 10 pixels to the right):
-
                                            -    bitBlt( myWidget, 10, 0, myWidget );
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             Warning: TQt requires that a TQApplication object exists before
-any paint devices can be created. Paint devices access window
-system resources, and these resources are not initialized before
-an application object is created.
-
                                            See also Graphics Classes and Image Processing Classes.
-
-
                                            Member Function Documentation
                                            
-
                                            TQPaintDevice::TQPaintDevice ( uint devflags ) [protected]
-
                                            
-Constructs a paint device with internal flags devflags. This
-constructor can be invoked only from TQPaintDevice subclasses.
-
-
                                            TQPaintDevice::~TQPaintDevice () [virtual]
-
                                            
-Destroys the paint device and frees window system resources.
-
-
                                            bool TQPaintDevice::cmd ( int, TQPainter *, TQPDevCmdParam * ) [virtual protected]
-
                                            
-Internal virtual function that interprets drawing commands from
-the painter.
-
                                             Implemented by subclasses that have no direct support for drawing
-graphics (external paint devices, for example, TQPicture).
-
-
                                            TQt::HANDLE TQPaintDevice::handle () const [virtual]
-
                                            
-Returns the window system handle of the paint device, for
-low-level access. Using this function is not portable.
-
                                             The HANDLE type varies with platform; see qpaintdevice.h and
-qwindowdefs.h for details.
-
                                             
                                            See also x11Display().
-
-
                                            bool TQPaintDevice::isExtDev () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns TRUE if the device is an external paint device; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                                             External paint devices cannot be bitBlt()'ed from. TQPicture and
-TQPrinter are external paint devices.
-
-
                                            bool TQPaintDevice::paintingActive () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns TRUE if the device is being painted, i.e. someone has
-called TQPainter::begin() but not yet called TQPainter::end() for
-this device; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQPainter::isActive().
-
-
                                            int TQPaintDevice::x11AppCells () [static]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the number of entries in the colormap for the default
-screen of the X display global to the application (X11
-only). Using this function is not portable.
-
                                             
                                            See also x11Colormap().
-
-
                                            int TQPaintDevice::x11AppCells ( int screen ) [static]
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             
-
                                             Returns the number of entries in the colormap for screen screen
-of the X display global to the application (X11 only). Using this
-function is not portable.
-
                                             
                                            See also x11Colormap().
-
-
                                            TQt::HANDLE TQPaintDevice::x11AppColormap () [static]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the colormap for the default screen of the X display
-global to the application (X11 only). Using this function is not
-portable.
-
                                             
                                            See also x11Cells().
-
-
                                            TQt::HANDLE TQPaintDevice::x11AppColormap ( int screen ) [static]
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             
-
                                             Returns the colormap for screen screen of the X display global
-to the application (X11 only). Using this function is not
-portable.
-
                                             
                                            See also x11Cells().
-
-
                                            bool TQPaintDevice::x11AppDefaultColormap () [static]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the default colormap for the default screen of the X
-display global to the application (X11 only). Using this function
-is not portable.
-
                                             
                                            See also x11Cells().
-
-
                                            bool TQPaintDevice::x11AppDefaultColormap ( int screen ) [static]
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             
-
                                             Returns the default colormap for screen screen of the X display
-global to the application (X11 only). Using this function is not
-portable.
-
                                             
                                            See also x11Cells().
-
-
                                            bool TQPaintDevice::x11AppDefaultVisual () [static]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns TRUE if the Visual used is the default for the default
-screen of the X display global to the application (X11 only);
-otherwise returns FALSE. Using this function is not portable.
-
-
                                            bool TQPaintDevice::x11AppDefaultVisual ( int screen ) [static]
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             
-
                                             Returns TRUE if the Visual used is the default for screen
-screen of the X display global to the application (X11 only);
-otherwise returns FALSE. Using this function is not portable.
-
-
                                            int TQPaintDevice::x11AppDepth ( int screen ) [static]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the depth for screen screen of the X display global to
-the application (X11 only). Using this function is not portable.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQPixmap::defaultDepth().
-
-
                                            int TQPaintDevice::x11AppDepth () [static]
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             
-
                                             Returns the depth for the default screen of the X display global
-to the application (X11 only). Using this function is not
-portable.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQPixmap::defaultDepth().
-
-
                                            Display * TQPaintDevice::x11AppDisplay () [static]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns a pointer to the X display global to the application (X11
-only). Using this function is not portable.
-
                                             
                                            See also handle().
-
-
                                            int TQPaintDevice::x11AppDpiX ( int screen ) [static]
-
                                            
-Returns the horizontal DPI of the X display (X11 only) for screen
-screen. Using this function is not portable. See
-TQPaintDeviceMetrics for portable access to related information.
-Using this function is not portable.
-
                                             
                                            See also x11AppDpiY(), x11SetAppDpiX(), and TQPaintDeviceMetrics::logicalDpiX().
-
-
                                            int TQPaintDevice::x11AppDpiX () [static]
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Returns the horizontal DPI of the X display (X11 only) for the
-default screen. Using this function is not portable. See
-TQPaintDeviceMetrics for portable access to related information.
-Using this function is not portable.
-
-
                                            int TQPaintDevice::x11AppDpiY ( int screen ) [static]
-
                                            
-Returns the vertical DPI of the X11 display (X11 only) for screen
-screen.  Using this function is not portable. See
-TQPaintDeviceMetrics for portable access to related information.
-Using this function is not portable.
-
                                             
                                            See also x11AppDpiX(), x11SetAppDpiY(), and TQPaintDeviceMetrics::logicalDpiY().
-
-
                                            int TQPaintDevice::x11AppDpiY () [static]
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Returns the vertical DPI of the X11 display (X11 only) for the
-default screen.  Using this function is not portable. See
-TQPaintDeviceMetrics for portable access to related information.
-Using this function is not portable.
-
                                             
                                            See also x11AppDpiX(), x11SetAppDpiY(), and TQPaintDeviceMetrics::logicalDpiY().
-
-
                                            TQt::HANDLE TQPaintDevice::x11AppRootWindow () [static]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the root window for the default screen of the X display
-global to the applicatoin (X11 only). Using this function is not
-portable.
-
-
                                            TQt::HANDLE TQPaintDevice::x11AppRootWindow ( int screen ) [static]
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             
-
                                             Returns the root window for screen screen of the X display
-global to the applicatoin (X11 only). Using this function is not
-portable.
-
-
                                            int TQPaintDevice::x11AppScreen () [static]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the screen number on the X display global to the
-application (X11 only). Using this function is not portable.
-
-
                                            void * TQPaintDevice::x11AppVisual () [static]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the Visual for the default screen of the X display global
-to the application (X11 only). Using this function is not
-portable.
-
-
                                            void * TQPaintDevice::x11AppVisual ( int screen ) [static]
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             
-
                                             Returns the Visual for screen screen of the X display global to
-the application (X11 only). Using this function is not portable.
-
-
                                            int TQPaintDevice::x11Cells () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the number of entries in the colormap of the X display for
-the paint device (X11 only). Using this function is not portable.
-
                                             
                                            See also x11Colormap().
-
-
                                            TQt::HANDLE TQPaintDevice::x11Colormap () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the colormap of the X display for the paint device (X11
-only). Using this function is not portable.
-
                                             
                                            See also x11Cells().
-
-
                                            bool TQPaintDevice::x11DefaultColormap () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the default colormap of the X display for the paint device
-(X11 only). Using this function is not portable.
-
                                             
                                            See also x11Cells().
-
-
                                            bool TQPaintDevice::x11DefaultVisual () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the default Visual of the X display for the paint device
-(X11 only). Using this function is not portable.
-
-
                                            int TQPaintDevice::x11Depth () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the depth of the X display for the paint device (X11
-only). Using this function is not portable.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQPixmap::defaultDepth().
-
-
                                            Display * TQPaintDevice::x11Display () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns a pointer to the X display for the paint device (X11
-only). Using this function is not portable.
-
                                             
                                            See also handle().
-
-
                                            int TQPaintDevice::x11Screen () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the screen number on the X display for the paint device
-(X11 only). Using this function is not portable.
-
-
                                            void TQPaintDevice::x11SetAppDpiX ( int dpi, int screen ) [static]
-
                                            
-Sets the value returned by x11AppDpiX() to dpi for screen
-screen. The default is determined by the display configuration.
-Changing this value will alter the scaling of fonts and many other
-metrics and is not recommended. Using this function is not
-portable.
-
                                             
                                            See also x11SetAppDpiY().
-
-
                                            void TQPaintDevice::x11SetAppDpiX ( int dpi ) [static]
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Sets the value returned by x11AppDpiX() to dpi for the default
-screen. The default is determined by the display configuration.
-Changing this value will alter the scaling of fonts and many other
-metrics and is not recommended. Using this function is not
-portable.
-
                                             
-
                                            void TQPaintDevice::x11SetAppDpiY ( int dpi, int screen ) [static]
-
                                            
-Sets the value returned by x11AppDpiY() to dpi for screen
-screen. The default is determined by the display configuration.
-Changing this value will alter the scaling of fonts and many other
-metrics and is not recommended. Using this function is not
-portable.
-
                                             
                                            See also x11SetAppDpiX().
-
-
                                            void TQPaintDevice::x11SetAppDpiY ( int dpi ) [static]
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Sets the value returned by x11AppDpiY() to dpi for the default
-screen.  The default is determined by the display configuration.
-Changing this value will alter the scaling of fonts and many other
-metrics and is not recommended. Using this function is not
-portable.
-
-
                                            void * TQPaintDevice::x11Visual () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the Visual of the X display for the paint device (X11
-only). Using this function is not portable.
-
-
                                            Related Functions
                                            
-
                                            void bitBlt ( TQPaintDevice * dst, int dx, int dy, const TQPaintDevice * src, int sx, int sy, int sw, int sh, TQt::RasterOp rop, bool ignoreMask )
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Copies a block of pixels from src to dst, perhaps merging
-each pixel according to the raster operation
-rop. sx, sy
-is the top-left pixel in src (0, 0) by default, dx, dy is
-the top-left position in dst and sw, sh is the size of
-the copied block (all of src by default).
-
                                             The most common values for rop are CopyROP and XorROP; the TQt::RasterOp documentation defines all the possible values.
-
                                             If ignoreMask is FALSE (the default) and src is a
-masked TQPixmap, the entire blit is masked by src->mask().
-
                                             If src, dst, sw or sh is 0, bitBlt() does nothing. If
-sw or sh is negative bitBlt() copies starting at sx (and
-respectively, sy) and ending at the right end (respectively,
-bottom) of src.
-
                                             src must be a TQWidget or TQPixmap. You cannot blit from a
-TQPrinter, for example. bitBlt() does nothing if you attempt to
-blit from an unsupported device.
-
                                             bitBlt() does nothing if src has a greater depth than dst.
-If you need to for example, draw a 24-bit pixmap on an 8-bit
-widget, you must use drawPixmap().
-
-
                                            void bitBlt ( TQPaintDevice * dst, const TQPoint & dp, const TQPaintDevice * src, const TQRect & sr, RasterOp rop )
-
                                            
-
-
                                             This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Overloaded bitBlt() with the destination point dp and source
-rectangle sr.
-
-
-
                                            
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                            
-
-
                                            Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                            TQt 3.3.8
                                            
-
                                            
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qpaintdevicemetrics-h.html b/doc/html/qpaintdevicemetrics-h.html
index 9c79231d0..10039d5da 100644
--- a/doc/html/qpaintdevicemetrics-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qpaintdevicemetrics-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qpaintdevicemetrics.h Include File
+ntqpaintdevicemetrics.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                            
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                            TQPaintDeviceMetrics Class Reference
                                            
-
-
                                            The TQPaintDeviceMetrics class provides information about a
-paint device.
-More...
-
                                            #include <qpaintdevicemetrics.h>
-
                                            List of all member functions.
-
                                            Public Members
                                            
-
-
                                            Detailed Description
                                            
-
-
-The TQPaintDeviceMetrics class provides information about a
-paint device.
-
                                             
-
-
                                             Sometimes when drawing graphics it is necessary to obtain
-information about the physical characteristics of a paint device.
-This class provides the information. For example, to compute the
-aspect ratio of a paint device:
-
                                             
                                            -        TQPaintDeviceMetrics pdm( myWidget );
-        double aspect = (double)pdm.widthMM() / (double)pdm.heightMM();
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             TQPaintDeviceMetrics contains methods to provide the width and
-height of a device in both pixels (width() and height()) and
-millimeters (widthMM() and heightMM()), the number of colors the
-device supports (numColors()), the number of bit planes (depth()),
-and the resolution of the device (logicalDpiX() and
-logicalDpiY()).
-
                                             It is not always possible for TQPaintDeviceMetrics to compute the
-values you ask for, particularly for external devices. The
-ultimate example is asking for the resolution of of a TQPrinter
-that is set to "print to file": who knows what printer that file
-will end up on?
-
                                            See also Graphics Classes and Image Processing Classes.
-
-
                                            Member Function Documentation
                                            
-
                                            TQPaintDeviceMetrics::TQPaintDeviceMetrics ( const TQPaintDevice * pd )
-
                                            
-Constructs a metric for the paint device pd.
-
-
                                            int TQPaintDeviceMetrics::depth () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the bit depth (number of bit planes) of the paint device.
-
-
                                            int TQPaintDeviceMetrics::height () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the height of the paint device in default coordinate
-system units (e.g. pixels for TQPixmap and TQWidget).
-
-
                                            Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
-
                                            int TQPaintDeviceMetrics::heightMM () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the height of the paint device, measured in millimeters.
-
-
                                            int TQPaintDeviceMetrics::logicalDpiX () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the horizontal resolution of the device in dots per inch,
-which is used when computing font sizes. For X, this is usually
-the same as could be computed from widthMM(), but it varies on
-Windows.
-
-
                                            Example: qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
-
                                            int TQPaintDeviceMetrics::logicalDpiY () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the vertical resolution of the device in dots per inch,
-which is used when computing font sizes. For X, this is usually
-the same as could be computed from heightMM(), but it varies on
-Windows.
-
-
                                            Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, and mdi/application.cpp.
-
                                            int TQPaintDeviceMetrics::numColors () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the number of different colors available for the paint
-device. Since this value is an int will not be sufficient to represent
-the number of colors on 32 bit displays, in which case INT_MAX is
-returned instead.
-
-
                                            int TQPaintDeviceMetrics::width () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the width of the paint device in default coordinate system
-units (e.g. pixels for TQPixmap and TQWidget).
-
-
                                            Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
-
                                            int TQPaintDeviceMetrics::widthMM () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the width of the paint device, measured in millimeters.
-
-
-
                                            
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                            
-
-
                                            Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                            TQt 3.3.8
                                            
-
                                            
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qpainter-h.html b/doc/html/qpainter-h.html
index bf2b985e8..cb642b7a5 100644
--- a/doc/html/qpainter-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qpainter-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qpainter.h Include File
+ntqpainter.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                            
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                            TQPainter Class Reference
                                            
-
-
                                            The TQPainter class does low-level painting e.g. on widgets.
-More...
-
                                            #include <qpainter.h>
-
                                            Inherits TQt.
-
                                            Inherited by TQDirectPainter.
-
                                            List of all member functions.
-
                                            Public Members
                                            
-
                                              
-
                                            • enum CoordinateMode { CoordDevice, CoordPainter }
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPainter ()
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPainter ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, bool unclipped = FALSE )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPainter ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, const TQWidget * copyAttributes, bool unclipped = FALSE )
                                              • 
-
                                            • ~TQPainter ()
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool begin ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, bool unclipped = FALSE )
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool begin ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, const TQWidget * copyAttributes, bool unclipped = FALSE )
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool end ()
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPaintDevice * device () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool isActive () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void flush ( const TQRegion & region, CoordinateMode cm = CoordDevice )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void flush ()
                                              • 
-
                                            • void save ()
                                              • 
-
                                            • void restore ()
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQFontMetrics fontMetrics () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQFontInfo fontInfo () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • const TQFont & font () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setFont ( const TQFont & font )
                                              • 
-
                                            • const TQPen & pen () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setPen ( const TQPen & pen )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setPen ( PenStyle style )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setPen ( const TQColor & color )
                                              • 
-
                                            • const TQBrush & brush () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setBrush ( const TQBrush & brush )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setBrush ( BrushStyle style )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setBrush ( const TQColor & color )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPoint pos () const  (obsolete)
                                              • 
-
                                            • const TQColor & backgroundColor () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setBackgroundColor ( const TQColor & c )
                                              • 
-
                                            • BGMode backgroundMode () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setBackgroundMode ( BGMode m )
                                              • 
-
                                            • RasterOp rasterOp () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setRasterOp ( RasterOp r )
                                              • 
-
                                            • const TQPoint & brushOrigin () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setBrushOrigin ( int x, int y )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setBrushOrigin ( const TQPoint & p )
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool hasViewXForm () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool hasWorldXForm () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setViewXForm ( bool enable )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQRect window () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setWindow ( const TQRect & r )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setWindow ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQRect viewport () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setViewport ( const TQRect & r )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setViewport ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setWorldXForm ( bool enable )
                                              • 
-
                                            • const TQWMatrix & worldMatrix () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setWorldMatrix ( const TQWMatrix & m, bool combine = FALSE )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void saveWorldMatrix ()  (obsolete)
                                              • 
-
                                            • void restoreWorldMatrix ()  (obsolete)
                                              • 
-
                                            • void scale ( double sx, double sy )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void shear ( double sh, double sv )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void rotate ( double a )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void translate ( double dx, double dy )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void resetXForm ()
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPoint xForm ( const TQPoint & pv ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQRect xForm ( const TQRect & rv ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPointArray xForm ( const TQPointArray & av ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPointArray xForm ( const TQPointArray & av, int index, int npoints ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPoint xFormDev ( const TQPoint & pd ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQRect xFormDev ( const TQRect & rd ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPointArray xFormDev ( const TQPointArray & ad ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPointArray xFormDev ( const TQPointArray & ad, int index, int npoints ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setClipping ( bool enable )
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool hasClipping () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQRegion clipRegion ( CoordinateMode m = CoordDevice ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setClipRect ( const TQRect & r, CoordinateMode m = CoordDevice )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setClipRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h, CoordinateMode m = CoordDevice )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setClipRegion ( const TQRegion & rgn, CoordinateMode m = CoordDevice )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawPoint ( int x, int y )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawPoint ( const TQPoint & p )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawPoints ( const TQPointArray & a, int index = 0, int npoints = -1 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void moveTo ( int x, int y )  (obsolete)
                                              • 
-
                                            • void moveTo ( const TQPoint & p )  (obsolete)
                                              • 
-
                                            • void lineTo ( int x, int y )  (obsolete)
                                              • 
-
                                            • void lineTo ( const TQPoint & p )  (obsolete)
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawLine ( int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawLine ( const TQPoint & p1, const TQPoint & p2 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawRect ( const TQRect & r )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawWinFocusRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawWinFocusRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColor & bgColor )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawWinFocusRect ( const TQRect & r )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawWinFocusRect ( const TQRect & r, const TQColor & bgColor )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawRoundRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int xRnd = 25, int yRnd = 25 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawRoundRect ( const TQRect & r, int xRnd = 25, int yRnd = 25 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawEllipse ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawEllipse ( const TQRect & r )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawArc ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int a, int alen )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawArc ( const TQRect & r, int a, int alen )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawPie ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int a, int alen )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawPie ( const TQRect & r, int a, int alen )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawChord ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int a, int alen )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawChord ( const TQRect & r, int a, int alen )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawLineSegments ( const TQPointArray & a, int index = 0, int nlines = -1 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawPolyline ( const TQPointArray & a, int index = 0, int npoints = -1 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawPolygon ( const TQPointArray & a, bool winding = FALSE, int index = 0, int npoints = -1 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawConvexPolygon ( const TQPointArray & pa, int index = 0, int npoints = -1 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawCubicBezier ( const TQPointArray & a, int index = 0 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawPixmap ( int x, int y, const TQPixmap & pixmap, int sx = 0, int sy = 0, int sw = -1, int sh = -1 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawPixmap ( const TQPoint & p, const TQPixmap & pm, const TQRect & sr )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawPixmap ( const TQPoint & p, const TQPixmap & pm )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawPixmap ( const TQRect & r, const TQPixmap & pm )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawImage ( int x, int y, const TQImage & image, int sx = 0, int sy = 0, int sw = -1, int sh = -1, int conversionFlags = 0 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawImage ( const TQPoint &, const TQImage &, const TQRect & sr, int conversionFlags = 0 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawImage ( const TQPoint & p, const TQImage & i, int conversion_flags = 0 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawImage ( const TQRect & r, const TQImage & i )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawTiledPixmap ( int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQPixmap & pixmap, int sx = 0, int sy = 0 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawTiledPixmap ( const TQRect & r, const TQPixmap & pm, const TQPoint & sp )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawTiledPixmap ( const TQRect & r, const TQPixmap & pm )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawPicture ( const TQPicture & pic )  (obsolete)
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawPicture ( int x, int y, const TQPicture & pic )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawPicture ( const TQPoint & p, const TQPicture & pic )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void fillRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQBrush & brush )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void fillRect ( const TQRect & r, const TQBrush & brush )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void eraseRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void eraseRect ( const TQRect & r )
                                              • 
-
                                            • enum TextDirection { Auto, RTL, LTR }
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawText ( int x, int y, const TQString &, int len = -1, TextDirection dir = Auto )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawText ( const TQPoint &, const TQString &, int len = -1, TextDirection dir = Auto )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawText ( int x, int y, const TQString &, int pos, int len, TextDirection dir = Auto )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawText ( const TQPoint & p, const TQString &, int pos, int len, TextDirection dir = Auto )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawText ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int flags, const TQString &, int len = -1, TQRect * br = 0, TQTextParag ** internal = 0 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawText ( const TQRect & r, int tf, const TQString & str, int len = -1, TQRect * brect = 0, TQTextParag ** internal = 0 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQRect boundingRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int flags, const TQString &, int len = -1, TQTextParag ** intern = 0 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQRect boundingRect ( const TQRect & r, int flags, const TQString & str, int len = -1, TQTextParag ** internal = 0 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • int tabStops () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setTabStops ( int ts )
                                              • 
-
                                            • int * tabArray () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setTabArray ( int * ta )
                                              • 
-
                                            • HDC handle () const
                                              • 
-
                                            
-
                                            Static Public Members
                                            
-
                                              
-
                                            • void redirect ( TQPaintDevice * pdev, TQPaintDevice * replacement )
                                              • 
-
                                            
-
                                            Related Functions
                                            
-
                                              
-
                                            • void qDrawShadeLine ( TQPainter * p, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2, const TQColorGroup & g, bool sunken, int lineWidth, int midLineWidth )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void qDrawShadeRect ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColorGroup & g, bool sunken, int lineWidth, int midLineWidth, const TQBrush * fill )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void qDrawShadePanel ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColorGroup & g, bool sunken, int lineWidth, const TQBrush * fill )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void qDrawWinButton ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColorGroup & g, bool sunken, const TQBrush * fill )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void qDrawWinPanel ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColorGroup & g, bool sunken, const TQBrush * fill )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void qDrawPlainRect ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColor & c, int lineWidth, const TQBrush * fill )
                                              • 
-
                                            
-
                                            Detailed Description
                                            
-
-
-The TQPainter class does low-level painting e.g. on widgets.
-
                                             
-
-
-
                                             The painter provides highly optimized functions to do most of the
-drawing GUI programs require. TQPainter can draw everything from
-simple lines to complex shapes like pies and chords. It can also
-draw aligned text and pixmaps. Normally, it draws in a "natural"
-coordinate system, but it can also do view and world
-transformation.
-
                                             The typical use of a painter is:
-
                                             
                                              
-
                                            •  Construct a painter.
-
                                            •  Set a pen, a brush etc.
-
                                            •  Draw.
-
                                            •  Destroy the painter.
-
                                            
-
                                             Mostly, all this is done inside a paint event. (In fact, 99% of
-all TQPainter use is in a reimplementation of
-TQWidget::paintEvent(), and the painter is heavily optimized for
-such use.) Here's one very simple example:
-
                                             
                                            -    void SimpleExampleWidget::paintEvent()
-    {
-        TQPainter paint( this );
-        paint.setPen( TQt::blue );
-        paint.drawText( rect(), AlignCenter, "The Text" );
-    }
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             Usage is simple, and there are many settings you can use:
-
                                             
                                              
-
                                               
                                            •  font() is the currently set font. If you set a font that isn't
-available, TQt finds a close match. In fact font() returns what
-you set using setFont() and fontInfo() returns the font actually
-being used (which may be the same).
-
                                               
                                            •  brush() is the currently set brush; the color or pattern that's
-used for filling e.g. circles.
-
                                               
                                            •  pen() is the currently set pen; the color or stipple that's
-used for drawing lines or boundaries.
-
                                               
                                            •  backgroundMode() is Opaque or Transparent, i.e. whether
-backgroundColor() is used or not.
-
                                               
                                            •  backgroundColor() only applies when backgroundMode() is Opaque
-and pen() is a stipple. In that case, it describes the color of
-the background pixels in the stipple.
-
                                               
                                            •  rasterOp() is how pixels drawn interact with the pixels already
-there.
-
                                               
                                            •  brushOrigin() is the origin of the tiled brushes, normally the
-origin of the window.
-
                                               
                                            •  viewport(), window(), worldMatrix() and many more make up the
-painter's coordinate transformation system. See The Coordinate System for an explanation of
-this, or see below for a very brief overview of the functions.
-
                                               
                                            •  hasClipping() is whether the painter clips at all. (The paint
-device clips, too.) If the painter clips, it clips to clipRegion().
-
                                               
                                            •  pos() is the current position, set by moveTo() and used by
-lineTo().
-
                                               
                                            
-
                                             Note that some of these settings mirror settings in some paint
-devices, e.g. TQWidget::font(). TQPainter::begin() (or the TQPainter
-constructor) copies these attributes from the paint device.
-Calling, for example, TQWidget::setFont() doesn't take effect until
-the next time a painter begins painting on it.
-
                                             save() saves all of these settings on an internal stack, restore()
-pops them back.
-
                                             The core functionality of TQPainter is drawing, and there are
-functions to draw most primitives: drawPoint(), drawPoints(),
-drawLine(), drawRect(), drawWinFocusRect(), drawRoundRect(),
-drawEllipse(), drawArc(), drawPie(), drawChord(),
-drawLineSegments(), drawPolyline(), drawPolygon(),
-drawConvexPolygon() and drawCubicBezier(). All of these functions
-take integer coordinates; there are no floating-point versions
-since we want drawing to be as fast as possible.
-
                                             There are functions to draw pixmaps/images, namely drawPixmap(),
-drawImage() and drawTiledPixmap(). drawPixmap() and drawImage()
-produce the same result, except that drawPixmap() is faster
-on-screen and drawImage() faster and sometimes better on TQPrinter
-and TQPicture.
-
                                             Text drawing is done using drawText(), and when you need
-fine-grained positioning, boundingRect() tells you where a given
-drawText() command would draw.
-
                                             There is a drawPicture() function that draws the contents of an
-entire TQPicture using this painter. drawPicture() is the only
-function that disregards all the painter's settings: the TQPicture
-has its own settings.
-
                                             Normally, the TQPainter operates on the device's own coordinate
-system (usually pixels), but TQPainter has good support for
-coordinate transformation. See The Coordinate
-    System for a more general overview and a simple example.
-
                                             The most common functions used are scale(), rotate(), translate()
-and shear(), all of which operate on the worldMatrix().
-setWorldMatrix() can replace or add to the currently set
-worldMatrix().
-
                                             setViewport() sets the rectangle on which TQPainter operates. The
-default is the entire device, which is usually fine, except on
-printers. setWindow() sets the coordinate system, that is, the
-rectangle that maps to viewport(). What's drawn inside the
-window() ends up being inside the viewport(). The window's
-default is the same as the viewport, and if you don't use the
-transformations, they are optimized away, gaining another little
-bit of speed.
-
                                             After all the coordinate transformation is done, TQPainter can clip
-the drawing to an arbitrary rectangle or region. hasClipping() is
-TRUE if TQPainter clips, and clipRegion() returns the clip region.
-You can set it using either setClipRegion() or setClipRect().
-Note that the clipping can be slow. It's all system-dependent,
-but as a rule of thumb, you can assume that drawing speed is
-inversely proportional to the number of rectangles in the clip
-region.
-
                                             After TQPainter's clipping, the paint device may also clip. For
-example, most widgets clip away the pixels used by child widgets,
-and most printers clip away an area near the edges of the paper.
-This additional clipping is not reflected by the return value of
-clipRegion() or hasClipping().
-
                                             TQPainter also includes some less-used functions that are very
-useful on those occasions when they're needed.
-
                                             isActive() indicates whether the painter is active. begin() (and
-the most usual constructor) makes it active. end() (and the
-destructor) deactivates it. If the painter is active, device()
-returns the paint device on which the painter paints.
-
                                             Sometimes it is desirable to make someone else paint on an unusual
-TQPaintDevice. TQPainter supports a static function to do this,
-redirect(). We recommend not using it, but for some hacks it's
-perfect.
-
                                             setTabStops() and setTabArray() can change where the tab stops
-are, but these are very seldomly used.
-
                                             Warning: Note that TQPainter does not attempt to work around
-coordinate limitations in the underlying window system. Some
-platforms may behave incorrectly with coordinates as small as
-+/-4000.
-
-
                                             
                                            See also TQPaintDevice, TQWidget, TQPixmap, TQPrinter, TQPicture, Application Walkthrough, Coordinate System Overview, Graphics Classes, and Image Processing Classes.
-
-
                                            Member Type Documentation
                                            
-
                                            TQPainter::CoordinateMode
                                            
-
-
                                              
-
                                            • TQPainter::CoordDevice
-
                                            • TQPainter::CoordPainter
-
                                             
                                            See also clipRegion().
-
-
                                            TQPainter::TextDirection
                                            
-
-
                                              
-
                                            • TQPainter::Auto
-
                                            • TQPainter::RTL - right to left
-
                                            • TQPainter::LTR - left to right
-
                                             
                                            See also drawText().
-
-
                                            Member Function Documentation
                                            
-
                                            TQPainter::TQPainter ()
-
                                            
-Constructs a painter.
-
                                             Notice that all painter settings (setPen, setBrush etc.) are reset
-to default values when begin() is called.
-
                                             
                                            See also begin() and end().
-
-
                                            TQPainter::TQPainter ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, bool unclipped = FALSE )
-
                                            
-Constructs a painter that begins painting the paint device pd
-immediately. Depending on the underlying graphic system the
-painter will paint over children of the paintdevice if unclipped is TRUE.
-
                                             This constructor is convenient for short-lived painters, e.g. in a
-paint event and should be used
-only once. The constructor calls begin() for you and the TQPainter
-destructor automatically calls end().
-
                                             Here's an example using begin() and end():
-
                                            -        void MyWidget::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
-        {
-            TQPainter p;
-            p.begin( this );
-            p.drawLine( ... );  // drawing code
-            p.end();
-        }
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             The same example using this constructor:
-
                                            -        void MyWidget::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
-        {
-            TQPainter p( this );
-            p.drawLine( ... );  // drawing code
-        }
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             Since the constructor cannot provide feedback when the initialization
-of the painter failed you should rather use begin() and end() to paint
-on external devices, e.g. printers.
-
                                             
                                            See also begin() and end().
-
-
                                            TQPainter::TQPainter ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, const TQWidget * copyAttributes, bool unclipped = FALSE )
-
                                            
-Constructs a painter that begins painting the paint device pd
-immediately, with the default arguments taken from copyAttributes. The painter will paint over children of the paint
-device if unclipped is TRUE (although this is not supported on
-all platforms).
-
                                             
                                            See also begin().
-
-
                                            TQPainter::~TQPainter ()
-
                                            
-Destroys the painter.
-
-
                                            const TQColor & TQPainter::backgroundColor () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the current background color.
-
                                             
                                            See also setBackgroundColor() and TQColor.
-
-
                                            BGMode TQPainter::backgroundMode () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the current background mode.
-
                                             
                                            See also setBackgroundMode() and BGMode.
-
-
                                            bool TQPainter::begin ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, bool unclipped = FALSE )
-
                                            
-Begins painting the paint device pd and returns TRUE if
-successful; otherwise returns FALSE. If unclipped is TRUE, the
-painting will not be clipped at the paint device's boundaries,
-(although this is not supported by all platforms).
-
                                             The errors that can occur are serious problems, such as these:
-
                                             
                                            -        p->begin( 0 ); // impossible - paint device cannot be 0
-
-        TQPixmap pm( 0, 0 );
-        p->begin( pm ); // impossible - pm.isNull();
-
-        p->begin( myWidget );
-        p2->begin( myWidget ); // impossible - only one painter at a time
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             Note that most of the time, you can use one of the constructors
-instead of begin(), and that end() is automatically done at
-destruction.
-
                                             Warning: A paint device can only be painted by one painter at a
-time.
-
                                             
                                            See also end() and flush().
-
-
                                            Examples: aclock/aclock.cpp, desktop/desktop.cpp, drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, hello/hello.cpp, picture/picture.cpp, t10/cannon.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                                            bool TQPainter::begin ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, const TQWidget * copyAttributes, bool unclipped = FALSE )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             This version opens the painter on a paint device pd and sets
-the initial pen, background color and font from copyAttributes,
-painting over the paint device's children when unclipped is
-TRUE. This is equivalent to:
-
                                             
                                            -        TQPainter p;
-        p.begin( pd );
-        p.setPen( copyAttributes->foregroundColor() );
-        p.setBackgroundColor( copyAttributes->backgroundColor() );
-        p.setFont( copyAttributes->font() );
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             This begin function is convenient for double buffering. When you
-draw in a pixmap instead of directly in a widget (to later bitBlt
-the pixmap into the widget) you will need to set the widget's
-font etc. This function does exactly that.
-
                                             Example:
-
                                            -        void MyWidget::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
-        {
-            TQPixmap pm(size());
-            TQPainter p;
-            p.begin(&pm, this);
-            // ... potentially flickering paint operation ...
-            p.end();
-            bitBlt(this, 0, 0, &pm);
-        }
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             
                                            See also end().
-
-
                                            TQRect TQPainter::boundingRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int flags, const TQString &, int len = -1, TQTextParag ** intern = 0 )
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the bounding rectangle of the aligned text that would be
-printed with the corresponding drawText() function using the first
-len characters of the string if len is > -1, or the whole of
-the string if len is -1. The drawing, and hence the bounding
-rectangle, is constrained to the rectangle that begins at point (x, y) with width w and hight h, or to the
-rectangle required to draw the text, whichever is the larger.
-
                                             The flags argument is
-the bitwise OR of the following flags:
-
                                            
-
                                             Flag Meaning
-
                                             AlignAuto aligns according to the language, usually left.
-
                                             AlignLeft aligns to the left border.
-
                                             AlignRight aligns to the right border.
-
                                             AlignHCenter aligns horizontally centered.
-
                                             AlignTop aligns to the top border.
-
                                             AlignBottom aligns to the bottom border.
-
                                             AlignVCenter aligns vertically centered.
-
                                             AlignCenter (== AlignHCenter | AlignVCenter).
-
                                             SingleLine ignores newline characters in the text.
-
                                             ExpandTabs expands tabs.
-
                                             ShowPrefix interprets "&x" as "x".
-
                                             WordBreak breaks the text to fit the rectangle.
-
                                            
-
                                             Horizontal alignment defaults to AlignLeft and vertical
-alignment defaults to AlignTop.
-
                                             If several of the horizontal or several of the vertical alignment flags
-are set, the resulting alignment is undefined.
-
                                             The intern parameter should not be used.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQt::TextFlags.
-
-
                                            TQRect TQPainter::boundingRect ( const TQRect & r, int flags, const TQString & str, int len = -1, TQTextParag ** internal = 0 )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Returns the bounding rectangle of the aligned text that would be
-printed with the corresponding drawText() function using the first
-len characters from str if len is > -1, or the whole of
-str if len is -1. The drawing, and hence the bounding
-rectangle, is constrained to the rectangle r, or to the
-rectangle required to draw the text, whichever is the larger.
-
                                             The internal parameter should not be used.
-
                                             
                                            See also drawText(), fontMetrics(), TQFontMetrics::boundingRect(), and TQt::TextFlags.
-
-
                                            const TQBrush & TQPainter::brush () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the painter's current brush.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQPainter::setBrush().
-
-
                                            Examples: themes/metal.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
-
                                            const TQPoint & TQPainter::brushOrigin () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the brush origin currently set.
-
                                             
                                            See also setBrushOrigin().
-
-
                                            TQRegion TQPainter::clipRegion ( CoordinateMode m = CoordDevice ) const
-
                                            
-Returns the currently set clip region. Note that the clip region
-is given in physical device coordinates and not subject to any
-coordinate transformation if m is
-equal to CoordDevice (the default). If m equals CoordPainter the returned region is in model coordinates.
-
                                             
                                            See also setClipRegion(), setClipRect(), setClipping(), and TQPainter::CoordinateMode.
-
-
                                            Example: themes/wood.cpp.
-
                                            TQPaintDevice * TQPainter::device () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the paint device on which this painter is currently
-painting, or 0 if the painter is not active.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQPaintDevice::paintingActive().
-
-
                                            Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, listboxcombo/listboxcombo.cpp, and mdi/application.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawArc ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int a, int alen )
-
                                            
-Draws an arc defined by the rectangle (x, y, w, h), the start
-angle a and the arc length alen.
-
                                             The angles a and alen are 1/16th of a degree, i.e. a full
-circle equals 5760 (16*360). Positive values of a and alen
-mean counter-clockwise while negative values mean the clockwise
-direction. Zero degrees is at the 3 o'clock position.
-
                                             Example:
-
                                            -        TQPainter p( myWidget );
-        p.drawArc( 10,10, 70,100, 100*16, 160*16 ); // draws a "(" arc
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             
                                            See also drawPie() and drawChord().
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawArc ( const TQRect & r, int a, int alen )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Draws the arc that fits inside the rectangle r with start angle
-a and arc length alen.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawChord ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int a, int alen )
-
                                            
-Draws a chord defined by the rectangle (x, y, w, h), the start
-angle a and the arc length alen.
-
                                             The chord is filled with the current brush().
-
                                             The angles a and alen are 1/16th of a degree, i.e. a full
-circle equals 5760 (16*360). Positive values of a and alen
-mean counter-clockwise while negative values mean the clockwise
-direction. Zero degrees is at the 3 o'clock position.
-
                                             
                                            See also drawArc() and drawPie().
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawChord ( const TQRect & r, int a, int alen )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Draws a chord that fits inside the rectangle r with start angle
-a and arc length alen.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawConvexPolygon ( const TQPointArray & pa, int index = 0, int npoints = -1 )
-
                                            
-Draws the convex polygon defined by the npoints points in pa
-starting at pa[index] (index defaults to 0).
-
                                             If the supplied polygon is not convex, the results are undefined.
-
                                             On some platforms (e.g. X Window), this is faster than
-drawPolygon().
-
                                             Warning: On X11, coordinates that do not fit into 16-bit signed
-values are truncated. This limitation is expected to go away in
-TQt 4.
-
-
                                            Example: aclock/aclock.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawCubicBezier ( const TQPointArray & a, int index = 0 )
-
                                            
-Draws a cubic Bezier curve defined by the control points in a,
-starting at a[index] (index defaults to 0).
-
                                             Control points after a[index + 3] are ignored. Nothing happens
-if there aren't enough control points.
-
                                             Warning: On X11, coordinates that do not fit into 16-bit signed
-values are truncated. This limitation is expected to go away in
-TQt 4.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawEllipse ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
-
                                            
-Draws an ellipse with center at (x + w/2, y + h/2) and size (w, h).
-
-
                                            Examples: drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, multiple/ax2.h, picture/picture.cpp, and tictac/tictac.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawEllipse ( const TQRect & r )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Draws the ellipse that fits inside rectangle r.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawImage ( int x, int y, const TQImage & image, int sx = 0, int sy = 0, int sw = -1, int sh = -1, int conversionFlags = 0 )
-
                                            
-Draws at (x, y) the sw by sh area of pixels from (sx, sy) in image, using conversionFlags if the image
-needs to be converted to a pixmap. The default value for conversionFlags is 0; see convertFromImage() for information about
-what other values do.
-
                                             This function may convert image to a pixmap and then draw it,
-if device() is a TQPixmap or a TQWidget, or else draw it directly,
-if device() is a TQPrinter or TQPicture.
-
                                             Currently alpha masks of the image are ignored when painting on a TQPrinter.
-
                                             
                                            See also drawPixmap() and TQPixmap::convertFromImage().
-
-
                                            Example: canvas/canvas.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawImage ( const TQPoint &, const TQImage &, const TQRect & sr, int conversionFlags = 0 )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Draws the rectangle sr from the image at the given point.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawImage ( const TQPoint & p, const TQImage & i, int conversion_flags = 0 )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Draws the image i at point p.
-
                                             If the image needs to be modified to fit in a lower-resolution
-result (e.g. converting from 32-bit to 8-bit), use the conversion_flags to specify how you'd prefer this to happen.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQt::ImageConversionFlags.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawImage ( const TQRect & r, const TQImage & i )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Draws the image i into the rectangle r. The image will be
-scaled to fit the rectangle if image and rectangle dimensions
-differ.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawLine ( int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2 )
-
                                            
-Draws a line from (x1, y1) to (x2, y2) and sets the
-current pen position to (x2, y2).
-
                                             
                                            See also pen().
-
-
                                            Examples: aclock/aclock.cpp, drawlines/connect.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, splitter/splitter.cpp, themes/metal.cpp, and themes/wood.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawLine ( const TQPoint & p1, const TQPoint & p2 )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Draws a line from point p1 to point p2.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawLineSegments ( const TQPointArray & a, int index = 0, int nlines = -1 )
-
                                            
-Draws nlines separate lines from points defined in a,
-starting at a[index] (index defaults to 0). If nlines is
--1 (the default) all points until the end of the array are used
-(i.e. (a.size()-index)/2 lines are drawn).
-
                                             Draws the 1st line from a[index] to a[index+1]. Draws the
-2nd line from a[index+2] to a[index+3] etc.
-
                                             Warning: On X11, coordinates that do not fit into 16-bit signed
-values are truncated. This limitation is expected to go away in
-TQt 4.
-
                                             
                                            See also drawPolyline(), drawPolygon(), and TQPen.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawPicture ( int x, int y, const TQPicture & pic )
-
                                            
-Replays the picture pic translated by (x, y).
-
                                             This function does exactly the same as TQPicture::play() when
-called with (x, y) = (0, 0).
-
-
                                            Examples: picture/picture.cpp and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawPicture ( const TQPicture & pic )
-
                                            
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                             Use one of the other TQPainter::drawPicture() functions with a (0, 0)
-offset instead.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawPicture ( const TQPoint & p, const TQPicture & pic )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Draws picture pic at point p.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawPie ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int a, int alen )
-
                                            
-Draws a pie defined by the rectangle (x, y, w, h), the start
-angle a and the arc length alen.
-
                                             The pie is filled with the current brush().
-
                                             The angles a and alen are 1/16th of a degree, i.e. a full
-circle equals 5760 (16*360). Positive values of a and alen
-mean counter-clockwise while negative values mean the clockwise
-direction. Zero degrees is at the 3 o'clock position.
-
                                             
                                            See also drawArc() and drawChord().
-
-
                                            Examples: drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, grapher/grapher.cpp, t10/cannon.cpp, and t9/cannon.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawPie ( const TQRect & r, int a, int alen )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Draws a pie segment that fits inside the rectangle r with start
-angle a and arc length alen.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawPixmap ( int x, int y, const TQPixmap & pixmap, int sx = 0, int sy = 0, int sw = -1, int sh = -1 )
-
                                            
-Draws a pixmap at (x, y) by copying a part of pixmap into
-the paint device.
-
                                             (x, y) specifies the top-left point in the paint device that is
-to be drawn onto. (sx, sy) specifies the top-left point in pixmap that is to be drawn. The default is (0, 0).
-
                                             (sw, sh) specifies the size of the pixmap that is to be drawn.
-The default, (-1, -1), means all the way to the bottom right of
-the pixmap.
-
                                             Currently the mask of the pixmap or it's alpha channel are ignored
-when painting on a TQPrinter.
-
                                             
                                            See also bitBlt() and TQPixmap::setMask().
-
-
                                            Examples: grapher/grapher.cpp, picture/picture.cpp, qdir/qdir.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, t10/cannon.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawPixmap ( const TQPoint & p, const TQPixmap & pm, const TQRect & sr )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Draws the rectangle sr of pixmap pm with its origin at point
-p.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawPixmap ( const TQPoint & p, const TQPixmap & pm )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Draws the pixmap pm with its origin at point p.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawPixmap ( const TQRect & r, const TQPixmap & pm )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Draws the pixmap pm into the rectangle r. The pixmap is
-scaled to fit the rectangle, if image and rectangle size disagree.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawPoint ( int x, int y )
-
                                            
-Draws/plots a single point at (x, y) using the current pen.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQPen.
-
-
                                            Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp and drawlines/connect.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawPoint ( const TQPoint & p )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Draws the point p.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawPoints ( const TQPointArray & a, int index = 0, int npoints = -1 )
-
                                            
-Draws/plots an array of points, a, using the current pen.
-
                                             If index is non-zero (the default is zero) only points from index are drawn. If npoints is negative (the default) the rest
-of the points from index are drawn. If npoints is zero or
-greater, npoints points are drawn.
-
                                             Warning: On X11, coordinates that do not fit into 16-bit signed
-values are truncated. This limitation is expected to go away in
-TQt 4.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawPolygon ( const TQPointArray & a, bool winding = FALSE, int index = 0, int npoints = -1 )
-
                                            
-Draws the polygon defined by the npoints points in a
-starting at a[index]. (index defaults to 0.)
-
                                             If npoints is -1 (the default) all points until the end of the
-array are used (i.e. a.size()-index line segments define the
-polygon).
-
                                             The first point is always connected to the last point.
-
                                             The polygon is filled with the current brush(). If winding is
-TRUE, the polygon is filled using the winding fill algorithm. If
-winding is FALSE, the polygon is filled using the even-odd
-(alternative) fill algorithm.
-
                                             Warning: On X11, coordinates that do not fit into 16-bit signed
-values are truncated. This limitation is expected to go away in
-TQt 4.
-
                                             
                                            See also drawLineSegments(), drawPolyline(), and TQPen.
-
-
                                            Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp and picture/picture.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawPolyline ( const TQPointArray & a, int index = 0, int npoints = -1 )
-
                                            
-Draws the polyline defined by the npoints points in a
-starting at a[index]. (index defaults to 0.)
-
                                             If npoints is -1 (the default) all points until the end of the
-array are used (i.e. a.size()-index-1 line segments are drawn).
-
                                             Warning: On X11, coordinates that do not fit into 16-bit signed
-values are truncated. This limitation is expected to go away in
-TQt 4.
-
                                             
                                            See also drawLineSegments(), drawPolygon(), and TQPen.
-
-
                                            Examples: scribble/scribble.cpp and themes/metal.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
-
                                            
-Draws a rectangle with upper left corner at (x, y) and with
-width w and height h.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQPen and drawRoundRect().
-
-
                                            Examples: drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, picture/picture.cpp, t10/cannon.cpp, t11/cannon.cpp, t9/cannon.cpp, tooltip/tooltip.cpp, and trivial/trivial.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawRect ( const TQRect & r )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Draws the rectangle r.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawRoundRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int xRnd = 25, int yRnd = 25 )
-
                                            
-Draws a rectangle with rounded corners at (x, y), with width w and height h.
-
                                             The xRnd and yRnd arguments specify how rounded the corners
-should be. 0 is angled corners, 99 is maximum roundedness.
-
                                             The width and height include all of the drawn lines.
-
                                             
                                            See also drawRect() and TQPen.
-
-
                                            Examples: drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawRoundRect ( const TQRect & r, int xRnd = 25, int yRnd = 25 )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Draws a rounded rectangle r, rounding to the x position xRnd
-and the y position yRnd on each corner.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawText ( const TQPoint & p, const TQString &, int pos, int len, TextDirection dir = Auto )
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Draws the text from position pos, at point p. If len is
--1 the entire string is drawn, otherwise just the first len
-characters. The text's direction is specified by dir.
-
                                             Note that the meaning of y is not the same for the two
-drawText() varieties. For overloads that take a simple x, y
-pair (or a point), the y value is the text's baseline; for
-overloads that take a rectangle, rect.y() is the top of the
-rectangle and the text is aligned within that rectangle in
-accordance with the alignment flags.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQPainter::TextDirection.
-
-
                                            Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp, drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, grapher/grapher.cpp, picture/picture.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, t8/cannon.cpp, and trivial/trivial.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawText ( int x, int y, const TQString &, int len = -1, TextDirection dir = Auto )
-
                                            
-
-
                                             This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Draws the given text at position x, y. If len is -1 (the
-default) all the text is drawn, otherwise the first len
-characters are drawn. The text's direction is given by dir.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQPainter::TextDirection.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawText ( const TQPoint &, const TQString &, int len = -1, TextDirection dir = Auto )
-
                                            
-
-
                                             This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Draws the text at the given point.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQPainter::TextDirection.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawText ( int x, int y, const TQString &, int pos, int len, TextDirection dir = Auto )
-
                                            
-
-
                                             This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Draws the text from position pos, at point (x, y). If len is
--1 the entire string is drawn, otherwise just the first len
-characters. The text's direction is specified by dir.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawText ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int flags, const TQString &, int len = -1, TQRect * br = 0, TQTextParag ** internal = 0 )
-
                                            
-
-
                                             This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Draws the given text within the rectangle starting at x, y,
-with width w and height h. If len is -1 (the default) all
-the text is drawn, otherwise the first len characters are
-drawn. The text's flags that are given in the flags parameter
-are TQt::AlignmentFlags and TQt::TextFlags OR'd together. br (if not null) is set to the actual bounding rectangle of the
-output. The internal parameter is for internal use only.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawText ( const TQRect & r, int tf, const TQString & str, int len = -1, TQRect * brect = 0, TQTextParag ** internal = 0 )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Draws at most len characters from str in the rectangle r.
-
                                             This function draws formatted text. The tf text format is
-really of type TQt::AlignmentFlags and TQt::TextFlags OR'd
-together.
-
                                             Horizontal alignment defaults to AlignAuto and vertical alignment
-defaults to AlignTop.
-
                                             brect (if not null) is set to the actual bounding rectangle of
-the output. internal is, yes, internal.
-
                                             
                                            See also boundingRect().
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawTiledPixmap ( int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQPixmap & pixmap, int sx = 0, int sy = 0 )
-
                                            
-Draws a tiled pixmap in the specified rectangle.
-
                                             (x, y) specifies the top-left point in the paint device that is
-to be drawn onto; with the width and height given by w and h. (sx, sy) specifies the top-left point in pixmap that is
-to be drawn. The default is (0, 0).
-
                                             Calling drawTiledPixmap() is similar to calling drawPixmap()
-several times to fill (tile) an area with a pixmap, but is
-potentially much more efficient depending on the underlying window
-system.
-
                                             
                                            See also drawPixmap().
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawTiledPixmap ( const TQRect & r, const TQPixmap & pm, const TQPoint & sp )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Draws a tiled pixmap, pm, inside rectangle r with its origin
-at point sp.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawTiledPixmap ( const TQRect & r, const TQPixmap & pm )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Draws a tiled pixmap, pm, inside rectangle r.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawWinFocusRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColor & bgColor )
-
                                            
-Draws a Windows focus rectangle with upper left corner at (x,
-y) and with width w and height h using a pen color that
-contrasts with bgColor.
-
                                             This function draws a stippled rectangle (XOR is not used) that is
-used to indicate keyboard focus (when the TQApplication::style() is
-WindowStyle).
-
                                             The pen color used to draw the rectangle is either white or black
-depending on the color of bgColor (see TQColor::gray()).
-
                                             Warning: This function draws nothing if the coordinate system has
-been rotated or sheared.
-
                                             
                                            See also drawRect() and TQApplication::style().
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawWinFocusRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Draws a Windows focus rectangle with upper left corner at (x,
-y) and with width w and height h.
-
                                             This function draws a stippled XOR rectangle that is used to
-indicate keyboard focus (when TQApplication::style() is WindowStyle).
-
                                             Warning: This function draws nothing if the coordinate system has
-been rotated or sheared.
-
                                             
                                            See also drawRect() and TQApplication::style().
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawWinFocusRect ( const TQRect & r )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Draws rectangle r as a window focus rectangle.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::drawWinFocusRect ( const TQRect & r, const TQColor & bgColor )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Draws rectangle r as a window focus rectangle using background
-color bgColor.
-
-
                                            bool TQPainter::end ()
-
                                            
-Ends painting. Any resources used while painting are released.
-
                                             Note that while you mostly don't need to call end(), the
-destructor will do it, there is at least one common case when it
-is needed, namely double buffering.
-
                                             
                                            -        TQPainter p( myPixmap, this )
-        // ...
-        p.end(); // stops drawing on myPixmap
-        p.begin( this );
-        p.drawPixmap( 0, 0, myPixmap );
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             Since you can't draw a TQPixmap while it is being painted, it is
-necessary to close the active painter.
-
                                             
                                            See also begin() and isActive().
-
-
                                            Examples: aclock/aclock.cpp, desktop/desktop.cpp, hello/hello.cpp, picture/picture.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, t10/cannon.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::eraseRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Erases the area inside x, y, w, h. Equivalent to
-fillRect( x, y, w, h, backgroundColor() ).
-
-
                                            Examples: listboxcombo/listboxcombo.cpp and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::eraseRect ( const TQRect & r )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Erases the area inside the rectangle r.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::fillRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQBrush & brush )
-
                                            
-Fills the rectangle (x, y, w, h) with the brush.
-
                                             You can specify a TQColor as brush, since there is a TQBrush
-constructor that takes a TQColor argument and creates a solid
-pattern brush.
-
                                             
                                            See also drawRect().
-
-
                                            Examples: listboxcombo/listboxcombo.cpp, multiple/ax1.h, progress/progress.cpp, qdir/qdir.cpp, qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp, themes/metal.cpp, and themes/wood.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::fillRect ( const TQRect & r, const TQBrush & brush )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Fills the rectangle r using brush brush.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::flush ( const TQRegion & region, CoordinateMode cm = CoordDevice )
-
                                            
-Flushes any buffered drawing operations inside the region region using clipping mode cm.
-
                                             The flush may update the whole device if the platform does not
-support flushing to a specified region.
-
                                             
                                            See also CoordinateMode.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::flush ()
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Flushes any buffered drawing operations.
-
-
                                            const TQFont & TQPainter::font () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the currently set painter font.
-
                                             
                                            See also setFont() and TQFont.
-
-
                                            Example: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
-
                                            TQFontInfo TQPainter::fontInfo () const
-
                                            
-Returns the font info for the painter, if the painter is active.
-It is not possible to obtain font information for an inactive
-painter, so the return value is undefined if the painter is not
-active.
-
                                             
                                            See also fontMetrics() and isActive().
-
-
                                            TQFontMetrics TQPainter::fontMetrics () const
-
                                            
-Returns the font metrics for the painter, if the painter is
-active. It is not possible to obtain metrics for an inactive
-painter, so the return value is undefined if the painter is not
-active.
-
                                             
                                            See also fontInfo() and isActive().
-
-
                                            Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, desktop/desktop.cpp, drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
-
                                            HDC TQPainter::handle () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the platform-dependent handle used for drawing. Using this
-function is not portable.
-
-
                                            bool TQPainter::hasClipping () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns TRUE if clipping has been set; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                             
                                            See also setClipping().
-
-
                                            Example: themes/wood.cpp.
-
                                            bool TQPainter::hasViewXForm () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns TRUE if view transformation is enabled; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                             
                                            See also setViewXForm() and xForm().
-
-
                                            bool TQPainter::hasWorldXForm () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns TRUE if world transformation is enabled; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                             
                                            See also setWorldXForm().
-
-
                                            bool TQPainter::isActive () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns TRUE if the painter is active painting, i.e. begin() has
-been called and end() has not yet been called; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQPaintDevice::paintingActive().
-
-
                                            Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp and helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::lineTo ( int x, int y )
-
                                             This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                             Use drawLine() instead.
-
                                             Draws a line from the current pen position to (x, y) and sets
-(x, y) to be the new current pen position.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQPen, moveTo(), drawLine(), and pos().
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::lineTo ( const TQPoint & p )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Draws a line to the point p.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::moveTo ( int x, int y )
-
                                             This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                             Sets the current pen position to (x, y)
-
                                             
                                            See also lineTo() and pos().
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::moveTo ( const TQPoint & p )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Moves to the point p.
-
-
                                            const TQPen & TQPainter::pen () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the painter's current pen.
-
                                             
                                            See also setPen().
-
-
                                            Examples: multiple/ax2.h, progress/progress.cpp, and themes/wood.cpp.
-
                                            TQPoint TQPainter::pos () const
-
                                            
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                             Returns the current position of the  pen.
-
                                             
                                            See also moveTo().
-
-
                                            RasterOp TQPainter::rasterOp () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the current raster operation.
-
                                             
                                            See also setRasterOp() and RasterOp.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::redirect ( TQPaintDevice * pdev, TQPaintDevice * replacement ) [static]
-
                                            
-Redirects all paint commands for a paint device, pdev, to
-another paint device, replacement, unless replacement is 0.
-If replacement is 0, the redirection for pdev is removed.
-
                                             In general, you'll probably find calling TQPixmap::grabWidget() or
-TQPixmap::grabWindow() is an easier solution.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::resetXForm ()
-
                                            
-Resets any transformations that were made using translate(), scale(),
-shear(), rotate(), setWorldMatrix(), setViewport() and
-setWindow().
-
                                             
                                            See also worldMatrix(), viewport(), and window().
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::restore ()
-
                                            
-Restores the current painter state (pops a saved state off the
-stack).
-
                                             
                                            See also save().
-
-
                                            Example: aclock/aclock.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::restoreWorldMatrix ()
-
                                             This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                             We recommend using restore() instead.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::rotate ( double a )
-
                                            
-Rotates the coordinate system a degrees counterclockwise.
-
                                             
                                            See also translate(), scale(), shear(), resetXForm(), setWorldMatrix(), and xForm().
-
-
                                            Examples: aclock/aclock.cpp, t10/cannon.cpp, and t9/cannon.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::save ()
-
                                            
-Saves the current painter state (pushes the state onto a stack). A
-save() must be followed by a corresponding restore(). end()
-unwinds the stack.
-
                                             
                                            See also restore().
-
-
                                            Example: aclock/aclock.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::saveWorldMatrix ()
-
                                             This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                             We recommend using save() instead.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::scale ( double sx, double sy )
-
                                            
-Scales the coordinate system by (sx, sy).
-
                                             
                                            See also translate(), shear(), rotate(), resetXForm(), setWorldMatrix(), and xForm().
-
-
                                            Example: xform/xform.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::setBackgroundColor ( const TQColor & c )
-
                                            
-Sets the background color of the painter to c.
-
                                             The background color is the color that is filled in when drawing
-opaque text, stippled lines and bitmaps. The background color has
-no effect in transparent background mode (which is the default).
-
                                             
                                            See also backgroundColor(), setBackgroundMode(), and BackgroundMode.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::setBackgroundMode ( BGMode m )
-
                                            
-Sets the background mode of the painter to m, which must be
-either TransparentMode (the default) or OpaqueMode.
-
                                             Transparent mode draws stippled lines and text without setting the
-background pixels. Opaque mode fills these space with the current
-background color.
-
                                             Note that in order to draw a bitmap or pixmap transparently, you
-must use TQPixmap::setMask().
-
                                             
                                            See also backgroundMode() and setBackgroundColor().
-
-
                                            Example: picture/picture.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::setBrush ( BrushStyle style )
-
                                            
-Sets the painter's brush to black color and the specified style.
-
                                             
                                            See also brush() and TQBrush.
-
-
                                            Examples: aclock/aclock.cpp, drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, picture/picture.cpp, t10/cannon.cpp, t9/cannon.cpp, themes/wood.cpp, and tooltip/tooltip.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::setBrush ( const TQBrush & brush )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Sets the painter's brush to brush.
-
                                             The brush defines how shapes are filled.
-
                                             
                                            See also brush().
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::setBrush ( const TQColor & color )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Sets the painter's brush to have style SolidPattern and the
-specified color.
-
                                             
                                            See also brush() and TQBrush.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::setBrushOrigin ( int x, int y )
-
                                            
-Sets the brush origin to (x, y).
-
                                             The brush origin specifies the (0, 0) coordinate of the painter's
-brush. This setting only applies to pattern brushes and pixmap
-brushes.
-
                                             
                                            See also brushOrigin().
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::setBrushOrigin ( const TQPoint & p )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Sets the brush origin to point p.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::setClipRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h, CoordinateMode m = CoordDevice )
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Sets the clip region to the rectangle x, y, w, h and
-enables clipping. The clip mode is set to m.
-
                                             If m is CoordDevice (the default), the coordinates given for
-the clip region are taken to be physical device coordinates and
-are not subject to any coordinate
-    transformations. If m is CoordPainter, the
-coordinates given for the clip region are taken to be model
-coordinates.
-
                                             
                                            See also setClipRegion(), clipRegion(), setClipping(), and TQPainter::CoordinateMode.
-
-
                                            Examples: grapher/grapher.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, splitter/splitter.cpp, and trivial/trivial.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::setClipRect ( const TQRect & r, CoordinateMode m = CoordDevice )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Sets the clip region to the rectangle r and enables clipping.
-The clip mode is set to m.
-
                                             
                                            See also CoordinateMode.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::setClipRegion ( const TQRegion & rgn, CoordinateMode m = CoordDevice )
-
                                            
-Sets the clip region to rgn and enables clipping. The clip mode
-is set to m.
-
                                             Note that the clip region is given in physical device coordinates
-and not subject to any coordinate
-    transformation.
-
                                             
                                            See also setClipRect(), clipRegion(), setClipping(), and CoordinateMode.
-
-
                                            Examples: qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::setClipping ( bool enable )
-
                                            
-Enables clipping if enable is TRUE, or disables clipping if enable is FALSE.
-
                                             
                                            See also hasClipping(), setClipRect(), and setClipRegion().
-
-
                                            Example: themes/wood.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::setFont ( const TQFont & font )
-
                                            
-Sets the painter's font to font.
-
                                             This font is used by subsequent drawText() functions. The text
-color is the same as the pen color.
-
                                             
                                            See also font() and drawText().
-
-
                                            Examples: drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, grapher/grapher.cpp, hello/hello.cpp, picture/picture.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, t13/cannon.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::setPen ( const TQPen & pen )
-
                                            
-Sets a new painter pen.
-
                                             The pen defines how to draw lines and outlines, and it also
-defines the text color.
-
                                             
                                            See also pen().
-
-
                                            Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp, drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, multiple/ax2.h, progress/progress.cpp, t9/cannon.cpp, themes/metal.cpp, and themes/wood.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::setPen ( PenStyle style )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Sets the painter's pen to have style style, width 0 and black
-color.
-
                                             
                                            See also pen() and TQPen.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::setPen ( const TQColor & color )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Sets the painter's pen to have style SolidLine, width 0 and the
-specified color.
-
                                             
                                            See also pen() and TQPen.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::setRasterOp ( RasterOp r )
-
                                            
-Sets the raster operation to r.
-The default is CopyROP.
-
                                             
                                            See also rasterOp() and TQt::RasterOp.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::setTabArray ( int * ta )
-
                                            
-Sets the tab stop array to ta. This puts tab stops at ta[0],
-ta[1] and so on. The array is null-terminated.
-
                                             If both a tab array and a tab top size is set, the tab array wins.
-
                                             
                                            See also tabArray(), setTabStops(), drawText(), and fontMetrics().
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::setTabStops ( int ts )
-
                                            
-Set the tab stop width to ts, i.e. locates tab stops at ts,
-2*ts, 3*ts and so on.
-
                                             Tab stops are used when drawing formatted text with ExpandTabs
-set. This fixed tab stop value is used only if no tab array is set
-(which is the default case).
-
                                             A value of 0 (the default) implies a tabstop setting of 8 times the width of the
-character 'x' in the font currently set on the painter.
-
                                             
                                            See also tabStops(), setTabArray(), drawText(), and fontMetrics().
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::setViewXForm ( bool enable )
-
                                            
-Enables view transformations if enable is TRUE, or disables
-view transformations if enable is FALSE.
-
                                             
                                            See also hasViewXForm(), setWindow(), setViewport(), setWorldMatrix(), setWorldXForm(), and xForm().
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::setViewport ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
-
                                            
-Sets the viewport rectangle view transformation for the painter
-and enables view transformation.
-
                                             The viewport rectangle is part of the view transformation. The
-viewport specifies the device coordinate system and is specified
-by the x, y, w width and h height parameters. Its
-sister, the window(), specifies the logical coordinate system.
-
                                             The default viewport rectangle is the same as the device's
-rectangle. See the Coordinate System Overview for an overview of coordinate transformation.
-
                                             
                                            See also viewport(), setWindow(), setViewXForm(), setWorldMatrix(), setWorldXForm(), and xForm().
-
-
                                            Example: aclock/aclock.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::setViewport ( const TQRect & r )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Sets the painter's viewport to rectangle r.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::setWindow ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
-
                                            
-Sets the window rectangle view transformation for the painter and
-enables view transformation.
-
                                             The window rectangle is part of the view transformation. The
-window specifies the logical coordinate system and is specified by
-the x, y, w width and h height parameters. Its sister,
-the viewport(), specifies the device coordinate system.
-
                                             The default window rectangle is the same as the device's
-rectangle. See the Coordinate System Overview for an overview of coordinate transformation.
-
                                             
                                            See also window(), setViewport(), setViewXForm(), setWorldMatrix(), and setWorldXForm().
-
-
                                            Examples: aclock/aclock.cpp and drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::setWindow ( const TQRect & r )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Sets the painter's window to rectangle r.
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::setWorldMatrix ( const TQWMatrix & m, bool combine = FALSE )
-
                                            
-Sets the world transformation matrix to m and enables world
-transformation.
-
                                             If combine is TRUE, then m is combined with the current
-transformation matrix, otherwise m replaces the current
-transformation matrix.
-
                                             If m is the identity matrix and combine is FALSE, this
-function calls setWorldXForm(FALSE). (The identity matrix is the
-matrix where TQWMatrix::m11() and TQWMatrix::m22() are 1.0 and the
-rest are 0.0.)
-
                                             World transformations are applied after the view transformations
-(i.e. window and viewport).
-
                                             The following functions can transform the coordinate system without using
-a TQWMatrix:
-
                                            
-
                                             They operate on the painter's worldMatrix() and are implemented like this:
-
                                             
                                            -        void TQPainter::rotate( double a )
-        {
-            TQWMatrix m;
-            m.rotate( a );
-            setWorldMatrix( m, TRUE );
-        }
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             Note that you should always use combine when you are drawing
-into a TQPicture. Otherwise it may not be possible to replay the
-picture with additional transformations. Using translate(),
-scale(), etc., is safe.
-
                                             For a brief overview of coordinate transformation, see the Coordinate System Overview.
-
                                             
                                            See also worldMatrix(), setWorldXForm(), setWindow(), setViewport(), setViewXForm(), xForm(), and TQWMatrix.
-
-
                                            Examples: drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPainter::setWorldXForm ( bool enable )
-
                                            
-Enables world transformations if enable is TRUE, or disables
-world transformations if enable is FALSE. The world
-transformation matrix is not changed.
-
                                             
                                            See also setWorldMatrix(), setWindow(), setViewport(), setViewXForm(), and xForm().
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::shear ( double sh, double sv )
-
                                            
-Shears the coordinate system by (sh, sv).
-
                                             
                                            See also translate(), scale(), rotate(), resetXForm(), setWorldMatrix(), and xForm().
-
-
                                            int * TQPainter::tabArray () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the currently set tab stop array.
-
                                             
                                            See also setTabArray().
-
-
                                            int TQPainter::tabStops () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the tab stop setting.
-
                                             
                                            See also setTabStops().
-
-
                                            void TQPainter::translate ( double dx, double dy )
-
                                            
-Translates the coordinate system by (dx, dy). After this call,
-(dx, dy) is added to points.
-
                                             For example, the following code draws the same point twice:
-
                                            -        void MyWidget::paintEvent()
-        {
-            TQPainter paint( this );
-
-            paint.drawPoint( 0, 0 );
-
-            paint.translate( 100.0, 40.0 );
-            paint.drawPoint( -100, -40 );
-        }
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             
                                            See also scale(), shear(), rotate(), resetXForm(), setWorldMatrix(), and xForm().
-
-
                                            Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, t10/cannon.cpp, t9/cannon.cpp, themes/metal.cpp, themes/wood.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                                            TQRect TQPainter::viewport () const
-
                                            
-Returns the viewport rectangle.
-
                                             
                                            See also setViewport() and setViewXForm().
-
-
                                            Example: aclock/aclock.cpp.
-
                                            TQRect TQPainter::window () const
-
                                            
-Returns the window rectangle.
-
                                             
                                            See also setWindow() and setViewXForm().
-
-
                                            const TQWMatrix & TQPainter::worldMatrix () const
-
                                            
-Returns the world transformation matrix.
-
                                             
                                            See also setWorldMatrix().
-
-
                                            TQPoint TQPainter::xForm ( const TQPoint & pv ) const
-
                                            
-Returns the point pv transformed from model coordinates to
-device coordinates.
-
                                             
                                            See also xFormDev() and TQWMatrix::map().
-
-
                                            TQRect TQPainter::xForm ( const TQRect & rv ) const
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Returns the rectangle rv transformed from model coordinates to
-device coordinates.
-
                                             If world transformation is enabled and rotation or shearing has
-been specified, then the bounding rectangle is returned.
-
                                             
                                            See also xFormDev() and TQWMatrix::map().
-
-
                                            TQPointArray TQPainter::xForm ( const TQPointArray & av ) const
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Returns the point array av transformed from model coordinates
-to device coordinates.
-
                                             
                                            See also xFormDev() and TQWMatrix::map().
-
-
                                            TQPointArray TQPainter::xForm ( const TQPointArray & av, int index, int npoints ) const
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Returns the point array av transformed from model coordinates
-to device coordinates. The index is the first point in the
-array and npoints denotes the number of points to be
-transformed. If npoints is negative, all points from av[index] until the last point in the array are transformed.
-
                                             The returned point array consists of the number of points that
-were transformed.
-
                                             Example:
-
                                            -        TQPointArray a(10);
-        TQPointArray b;
-        b = painter.xForm(a, 2, 4);  // b.size() == 4
-        b = painter.xForm(a, 2, -1); // b.size() == 8
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             
                                            See also xFormDev() and TQWMatrix::map().
-
-
                                            TQRect TQPainter::xFormDev ( const TQRect & rd ) const
-
                                            
-Returns the rectangle rd transformed from device coordinates to
-model coordinates.
-
                                             If world transformation is enabled and rotation or shearing is
-used, then the bounding rectangle is returned.
-
                                             
                                            See also xForm() and TQWMatrix::map().
-
-
                                            TQPoint TQPainter::xFormDev ( const TQPoint & pd ) const
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Returns the point pd transformed from device coordinates to
-model coordinates.
-
                                             
                                            See also xForm() and TQWMatrix::map().
-
-
                                            TQPointArray TQPainter::xFormDev ( const TQPointArray & ad ) const
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Returns the point array ad transformed from device coordinates
-to model coordinates.
-
                                             
                                            See also xForm() and TQWMatrix::map().
-
-
                                            TQPointArray TQPainter::xFormDev ( const TQPointArray & ad, int index, int npoints ) const
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Returns the point array ad transformed from device coordinates
-to model coordinates. The index is the first point in the array
-and npoints denotes the number of points to be transformed. If
-npoints is negative, all points from ad[index] until the
-last point in the array are transformed.
-
                                             The returned point array consists of the number of points that
-were transformed.
-
                                             Example:
-
                                            -        TQPointArray a(10);
-        TQPointArray b;
-        b = painter.xFormDev(a, 1, 3);  // b.size() == 3
-        b = painter.xFormDev(a, 1, -1); // b.size() == 9
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             
                                            See also xForm() and TQWMatrix::map().
-
-
                                            Related Functions
                                            
-
                                            void qDrawPlainRect ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColor & c, int lineWidth, const TQBrush * fill )
-
                                            
-
-
                                             #include <qdrawutil.h>
-
                                             Draws the plain rectangle specified by (x, y, w, h)
-using the painter p.
-
                                             The color argument c specifies the line color.
-
                                             The lineWidth argument specifies the line width.
-
                                             The rectangle's interior is filled with the fill brush unless
-fill is 0.
-
                                             If you want to use a TQFrame widget instead, you can make it
-display a plain rectangle, for example TQFrame::setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Box | TQFrame::Plain ).
-
                                             Warning: This function does not look at TQWidget::style() or
-TQApplication::style(). Use the drawing functions in TQStyle to make
-widgets that follow the current GUI style.
-
                                             
                                            See also qDrawShadeRect() and TQStyle::drawPrimitive().
-
-
                                            void qDrawShadeLine ( TQPainter * p, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2, const TQColorGroup & g, bool sunken, int lineWidth, int midLineWidth )
-
                                            
-
-
                                             #include <qdrawutil.h>
-
                                             Draws a horizontal (y1 == y2) or vertical (x1 == x2)
-shaded line using the painter p.
-
                                             Nothing is drawn if y1 != y2 and x1 != x2 (i.e. the
-line is neither horizontal nor vertical).
-
                                             The color group argument g specifies the shading colors (light, dark and middle colors).
-
                                             The line appears sunken if sunken is TRUE, or raised if sunken is FALSE.
-
                                             The lineWidth argument specifies the line width for each of the
-lines. It is not the total line width.
-
                                             The midLineWidth argument specifies the width of a middle line
-drawn in the TQColorGroup::mid() color.
-
                                             If you want to use a TQFrame widget instead, you can make it
-display a shaded line, for example TQFrame::setFrameStyle( TQFrame::HLine | TQFrame::Sunken ).
-
                                             Warning: This function does not look at TQWidget::style() or
-TQApplication::style(). Use the drawing functions in TQStyle to make
-widgets that follow the current GUI style.
-
                                             
                                            See also qDrawShadeRect(), qDrawShadePanel(), and TQStyle::drawPrimitive().
-
-
                                            void qDrawShadePanel ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColorGroup & g, bool sunken, int lineWidth, const TQBrush * fill )
-
                                            
-
-
                                             #include <qdrawutil.h>
-
                                             Draws the shaded panel specified by (x, y, w, h) using
-the painter p.
-
                                             The color group argument g specifies the shading colors (light, dark and middle colors).
-
                                             The panel appears sunken if sunken is TRUE, or raised if sunken is FALSE.
-
                                             The lineWidth argument specifies the line width.
-
                                             The panel's interior is filled with the fill brush unless fill is 0.
-
                                             If you want to use a TQFrame widget instead, you can make it
-display a shaded panel, for example TQFrame::setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Panel | TQFrame::Sunken ).
-
                                             Warning: This function does not look at TQWidget::style() or
-TQApplication::style(). Use the drawing functions in TQStyle to make
-widgets that follow the current GUI style.
-
                                             
                                            See also qDrawWinPanel(), qDrawShadeLine(), qDrawShadeRect(), and TQStyle::drawPrimitive().
-
-
                                            void qDrawShadeRect ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColorGroup & g, bool sunken, int lineWidth, int midLineWidth, const TQBrush * fill )
-
                                            
-
-
                                             #include <qdrawutil.h>
-
                                             Draws the shaded rectangle specified by (x, y, w, h)
-using the painter p.
-
                                             The color group argument g specifies the shading colors (light, dark and middle colors).
-
                                             The rectangle appears sunken if sunken is TRUE, or raised if sunken is FALSE.
-
                                             The lineWidth argument specifies the line width for each of the
-lines. It is not the total line width.
-
                                             The midLineWidth argument specifies the width of a middle line
-drawn in the TQColorGroup::mid() color.
-
                                             The rectangle's interior is filled with the fill brush unless
-fill is 0.
-
                                             If you want to use a TQFrame widget instead, you can make it
-display a shaded rectangle, for example TQFrame::setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Box | TQFrame::Raised ).
-
                                             Warning: This function does not look at TQWidget::style() or
-TQApplication::style(). Use the drawing functions in TQStyle to make
-widgets that follow the current GUI style.
-
                                             
                                            See also qDrawShadeLine(), qDrawShadePanel(), qDrawPlainRect(), TQStyle::drawItem(), TQStyle::drawControl(), and TQStyle::drawComplexControl().
-
-
                                            void qDrawWinButton ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColorGroup & g, bool sunken, const TQBrush * fill )
-
                                            
-
-
                                             #include <qdrawutil.h>
-
                                             Draws the Windows-style button specified by (x, y, w, h) using the painter p.
-
                                             The color group argument g specifies the shading colors (light, dark and middle colors).
-
                                             The button appears sunken if sunken is TRUE, or raised if sunken is FALSE.
-
                                             The line width is 2 pixels.
-
                                             The button's interior is filled with the *fill brush unless fill is 0.
-
                                             Warning: This function does not look at TQWidget::style() or
-TQApplication::style(). Use the drawing functions in TQStyle to make
-widgets that follow the current GUI style.
-
                                             
                                            See also qDrawWinPanel() and TQStyle::drawControl().
-
-
                                            void qDrawWinPanel ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColorGroup & g, bool sunken, const TQBrush * fill )
-
                                            
-
-
                                             #include <qdrawutil.h>
-
                                             Draws the Windows-style panel specified by (x, y, w, h) using the painter p.
-
                                             The color group argument g specifies the shading colors.
-
                                             The panel appears sunken if sunken is TRUE, or raised if sunken is FALSE.
-
                                             The line width is 2 pixels.
-
                                             The button's interior is filled with the fill brush unless fill is 0.
-
                                             If you want to use a TQFrame widget instead, you can make it
-display a shaded panel, for example TQFrame::setFrameStyle( TQFrame::WinPanel | TQFrame::Raised ).
-
                                             Warning: This function does not look at TQWidget::style() or
-TQApplication::style(). Use the drawing functions in TQStyle to make
-widgets that follow the current GUI style.
-
                                             
                                            See also qDrawShadePanel(), qDrawWinButton(), and TQStyle::drawPrimitive().
-
-
-
                                            
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                            
-
-
                                            Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                            TQt 3.3.8
                                            
-
                                            
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qpaintevent-members.html b/doc/html/qpaintevent-members.html
index 45a26e421..e0a48dbbb 100644
--- a/doc/html/qpaintevent-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qpaintevent-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -39,8 +39,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                          • erased()
 
                                          • rect()
 
                                          • region()
-
                                          • spontaneous()
-
                                          • type()
+
                                          • spontaneous()
+
                                          • type()
 
                                          
 
 
                                          
diff --git a/doc/html/qpaintevent.html b/doc/html/qpaintevent.html
index d32d1836d..da4f9c50e 100644
--- a/doc/html/qpaintevent.html
+++ b/doc/html/qpaintevent.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                          The TQPaintEvent class contains event parameters for paint events.
 More...
-
                                          #include <qevent.h>
-
                                          Inherits TQEvent.
+
                                          #include <ntqevent.h>
+
                                          Inherits TQEvent.
 
                                          List of all member functions.
 
                                          Public Members
                                          
 
                                            
@@ -60,26 +60,26 @@ rect() can be much faster than region().boundingRect(). Painting
 is clipped to region() during processing of a paint event.
 
                                             The erased() function returns TRUE if the region() has been
 cleared to the widget's background (see
-TQWidget::backgroundMode()), and FALSE if the region's contents are
+TQWidget::backgroundMode()), and FALSE if the region's contents are
 arbitrary.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQPainter, TQWidget::update(), TQWidget::repaint(), TQWidget::paintEvent(), TQWidget::backgroundMode, TQRegion, and Event Classes.
+
                                             
                                            See also TQPainter, TQWidget::update(), TQWidget::repaint(), TQWidget::paintEvent(), TQWidget::backgroundMode, TQRegion, and Event Classes.
 
 
                                            Member Function Documentation
                                            
-
                                            TQPaintEvent::TQPaintEvent ( const TQRegion & paintRegion, bool erased = TRUE )
+
                                            TQPaintEvent::TQPaintEvent ( const TQRegion & paintRegion, bool erased = TRUE )
 
                                            
 
 
                                             Constructs a paint event object with the region that should be
 updated. The region is given by paintRegion. If erased is
 TRUE the region will be cleared before repainting.
 
-
                                            TQPaintEvent::TQPaintEvent ( const TQRect & paintRect, bool erased = TRUE )
+
                                            TQPaintEvent::TQPaintEvent ( const TQRect & paintRect, bool erased = TRUE )
 
                                            
 
 
                                             Constructs a paint event object with the rectangle that should be
 updated. The region is also given by paintRect. If erased is
 TRUE the region will be cleared before repainting.
 
-
                                            TQPaintEvent::TQPaintEvent ( const TQRegion & paintRegion, const TQRect & paintRect, bool erased = TRUE )
+
                                            TQPaintEvent::TQPaintEvent ( const TQRegion & paintRegion, const TQRect & paintRect, bool erased = TRUE )
 
                                            
 
 
                                             Constructs a paint event object with the rectangle paintRect
@@ -92,18 +92,18 @@ that should be updated. The region is given by paintRegion. If
 
                                             Returns TRUE if the paint event region (or rectangle) has been
 erased with the widget's background; otherwise returns FALSE.
 
-
                                            const TQRect & TQPaintEvent::rect () const
+
                                            const TQRect & TQPaintEvent::rect () const
 
                                            
 
 
                                             Returns the rectangle that should be updated.
-
                                             
                                            See also region() and TQPainter::setClipRect().
+
                                             
                                            See also region() and TQPainter::setClipRect().
 
 
                                            Examples: life/life.cpp, qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, t10/cannon.cpp, t11/cannon.cpp, t13/cannon.cpp, and tooltip/tooltip.cpp.
-
                                            const TQRegion & TQPaintEvent::region () const
+
                                            const TQRegion & TQPaintEvent::region () const
 
                                            
 
 
                                             Returns the region that should be updated.
-
                                             
                                            See also rect() and TQPainter::setClipRegion().
+
                                             
                                            See also rect() and TQPainter::setClipRegion().
 
 
                                            Examples: qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp and scribble/scribble.cpp.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qpair-h.html b/doc/html/qpair-h.html
index 71e643e29..615108d77 100644
--- a/doc/html/qpair-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qpair-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qpair.h Include File
+ntqpair.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                            
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                            TQPair Class Reference
                                            
-
-
                                            The TQPair class is a value-based template class that provides a pair of elements.
-More...
-
                                            #include <qpair.h>
-
                                            List of all member functions.
-
                                            Public Members
                                            
-
                                              
-
                                            • typedef T1 first_type
                                              • 
-
                                            • typedef T2 second_type
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPair ()
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPair ( const T1 & t1, const T2 & t2 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPair<T1, T2> & operator= ( const TQPair<T1, T2> & other )
                                              • 
-
                                            
-
                                            Related Functions
                                            
-
-
                                            Detailed Description
                                            
-
-
-The TQPair class is a value-based template class that provides a pair of elements.
-
                                             
-
-
-
                                             TQPair is a TQt implementation of an STL-like pair. It can be used
-in your application if the standard pair<> is not available on
-your target platforms.
-
                                             TQPair<T1, T2> defines a template instance to create a pair of
-values that contains two values of type T1 and T2. Please note
-that TQPair does not store pointers to the two elements; it holds a
-copy of every member. This is why these kinds of classes are
-called value based. If you're interested in pointer based
-classes see, for example, TQPtrList and TQDict.
-
                                             TQPair holds one copy of type T1 and one copy of type T2, but does
-not provide iterators to access these elements. Instead, the two
-elements (first and second) are public member variables of
-the pair. TQPair owns the contained elements. For more relaxed
-ownership semantics, see TQPtrCollection and friends which are
-pointer-based containers.
-
                                             Some classes cannot be used within a TQPair: for example, all
-classes derived from TQObject and thus all classes that implement
-widgets. Only "values" can be used in a TQPair. To qualify as a
-value the class must provide:
-
                                             
                                              
-
                                            •  A copy constructor
-
                                            •  An assignment operator
-
                                            •  A constructor that takes no arguments
-
                                            
-
                                             Note that C++ defaults to field-by-field assignment operators and
-copy constructors if no explicit version is supplied. In many
-cases this is sufficient.
-
                                             TQPair uses an STL-like syntax to manipulate and address the
-objects it contains. See the TQTL
-    documentation for more information.
-
                                             Functions that need to return two values can use a TQPair.
-
                                            See also TQt Template Library Classes, Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
-
-
                                            Member Type Documentation
                                            
-
                                            TQPair::first_type
                                             
-The type of the first element in the pair. 
-
                                            TQPair::second_type
                                             
-The type of the second element in the pair. 
-
                                            Member Function Documentation
                                            
-
                                            TQPair::TQPair ()
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Constructs an empty pair. The first and second elements are
-default constructed. 
-
-
                                            TQPair::TQPair ( const T1 & t1, const T2 & t2 )
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Constructs a pair and initializes the first element with t1
-and the second element with t2.
-
-
                                            Related Functions
                                            
-
                                            TQPair qMakePair ( T1 t1, T2 t2 )
-
                                            
-
-
                                             
-
                                             This is a template convenience function. It is used to create a
-TQPair<> object that contains t1 and t2.
-
-
-
                                            
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                            
-
-
                                            Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                            TQt 3.3.8
                                            
-
                                            
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qpalette-h.html b/doc/html/qpalette-h.html
index 4629ad8b0..90efbc5f3 100644
--- a/doc/html/qpalette-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qpalette-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qpalette.h Include File
+ntqpalette.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                            
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                            TQPalette Class Reference
                                            
-
-
                                            The TQPalette class contains color groups for each widget state.
-More...
-
                                            #include <qpalette.h>
-
                                            List of all member functions.
-
                                            Public Members
                                            
-
                                              
-
                                            • TQPalette ()
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPalette ( const TQColor & button )  (obsolete)
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPalette ( const TQColor & button, const TQColor & background )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPalette ( const TQColorGroup & active, const TQColorGroup & disabled, const TQColorGroup & inactive )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPalette ( const TQPalette & p )
                                              • 
-
                                            • ~TQPalette ()
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPalette & operator= ( const TQPalette & p )
                                              • 
-
                                            • enum ColorGroup { Disabled, Active, Inactive, NColorGroups, Normal = Active }
                                              • 
-
                                            • const TQColor & color ( ColorGroup gr, TQColorGroup::ColorRole r ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • const TQBrush & brush ( ColorGroup gr, TQColorGroup::ColorRole r ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setColor ( ColorGroup gr, TQColorGroup::ColorRole r, const TQColor & c )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setBrush ( ColorGroup gr, TQColorGroup::ColorRole r, const TQBrush & b )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setColor ( TQColorGroup::ColorRole r, const TQColor & c )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setBrush ( TQColorGroup::ColorRole r, const TQBrush & b )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPalette copy () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • const TQColorGroup & active () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • const TQColorGroup & disabled () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • const TQColorGroup & inactive () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • const TQColorGroup & normal () const  (obsolete)
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setActive ( const TQColorGroup & g )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setDisabled ( const TQColorGroup & g )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setInactive ( const TQColorGroup & g )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setNormal ( const TQColorGroup & cg )  (obsolete)
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool operator== ( const TQPalette & p ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool operator!= ( const TQPalette & p ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool isCopyOf ( const TQPalette & p )
                                              • 
-
                                            • int serialNumber () const
                                              • 
-
                                            
-
                                            Related Functions
                                            
-
                                              
-
                                            • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQPalette & p )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQPalette & p )
                                              • 
-
                                            
-
                                            Detailed Description
                                            
-
-
-
                                             The TQPalette class contains color groups for each widget state.
-
                                             
-
-
-
-
-
                                             A palette consists of three color groups: active, disabled,
-and inactive. All widgets contain a palette, and all widgets in
-TQt use their palette to draw themselves. This makes the user
-interface easily configurable and easier to keep consistent.
-
                                             If you create a new widget we strongly recommend that you use the
-colors in the palette rather than hard-coding specific colors.
-
                                             The color groups:
-
                                              
-
                                            •  The active() group is used for the window that has keyboard focus.
-
                                            •  The inactive() group is used for other windows.
-
                                            •  The disabled() group is used for widgets (not windows) that are
-disabled for some reason.
-
                                            
-
                                             Both active and inactive windows can contain disabled widgets.
-(Disabled widgets are often called inaccessible or grayed out.)
-
                                             In Motif style, active() and inactive() look the same. In Windows
-2000 style and Macintosh Platinum style, the two styles look
-slightly different.
-
                                             There are setActive(), setInactive(), and setDisabled() functions
-to modify the palette. (TQt also supports a normal() group; this is
-an obsolete alias for active(), supported for backwards
-compatibility.)
-
                                             Colors and brushes can be set for particular roles in any of a
-palette's color groups with setColor() and setBrush().
-
                                             You can copy a palette using the copy constructor and test to see
-if two palettes are identical using isCopyOf().
-
                                             
                                            See also TQApplication::setPalette(), TQWidget::palette, TQColorGroup, TQColor, Widget Appearance and Style, Graphics Classes, Image Processing Classes, and Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes.
-
-
                                            Member Type Documentation
                                            
-
                                            TQPalette::ColorGroup
                                            
-
-
                                              
-
                                            • TQPalette::Disabled
-
                                            • TQPalette::Active
-
                                            • TQPalette::Inactive
-
                                            • TQPalette::NColorGroups
-
                                            • TQPalette::Normal - synonym for Active
-
                                            
-
                                            Member Function Documentation
                                            
-
                                            TQPalette::TQPalette ()
-
                                            
-Constructs a palette that consists of color groups with only black
-colors.
-
-
                                            TQPalette::TQPalette ( const TQColor & button )
-
                                            This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                             Constructs a palette from the button color. The other colors are
-automatically calculated, based on this color. Background will be
-the button color as well.
-
-
                                            TQPalette::TQPalette ( const TQColor & button, const TQColor & background )
-
                                            
-Constructs a palette from a button color and a background.
-The other colors are automatically calculated, based on these
-colors.
-
-
                                            TQPalette::TQPalette ( const TQColorGroup & active, const TQColorGroup & disabled, const TQColorGroup & inactive )
-
                                            
-Constructs a palette that consists of the three color groups active, disabled and inactive. See the Detailed Description for definitions of the color groups
-and TQColorGroup::ColorRole for definitions of each color role
-in the three groups.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQColorGroup and TQColorGroup::ColorRole.
-
-
                                            TQPalette::TQPalette ( const TQPalette & p )
-
                                            
-Constructs a copy of p.
-
                                             This constructor is fast (it uses copy-on-write).
-
-
                                            TQPalette::~TQPalette ()
-
                                            
-Destroys the palette.
-
-
                                            const TQColorGroup & TQPalette::active () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the active color group of this palette.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQColorGroup, setActive(), inactive(), and disabled().
-
-
                                            Examples: themes/metal.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
-
                                            const TQBrush & TQPalette::brush ( ColorGroup gr, TQColorGroup::ColorRole r ) const
-
                                            
-Returns the brush in color group gr, used for color role r.
-
                                             
                                            See also color(), setBrush(), and TQColorGroup::ColorRole.
-
-
                                            const TQColor & TQPalette::color ( ColorGroup gr, TQColorGroup::ColorRole r ) const
-
                                            
-Returns the color in color group gr, used for color role r.
-
                                             
                                            See also brush(), setColor(), and TQColorGroup::ColorRole.
-
-
                                            TQPalette TQPalette::copy () const
-
                                            
-Returns a deep copy of this palette.
-
                                             Warning: This is slower than the copy constructor and assignment
-operator and offers no benefits.
-
-
                                            const TQColorGroup & TQPalette::disabled () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the disabled color group of this palette.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQColorGroup, setDisabled(), active(), and inactive().
-
-
                                            Examples: themes/metal.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
-
                                            const TQColorGroup & TQPalette::inactive () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the inactive color group of this palette.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQColorGroup, setInactive(), active(), and disabled().
-
-
                                            bool TQPalette::isCopyOf ( const TQPalette & p )
-
                                            
-Returns TRUE if this palette and p are copies of each other,
-i.e. one of them was created as a copy of the other and neither
-was subsequently modified; otherwise returns FALSE. This is much
-stricter than equality.
-
                                             
                                            See also operator=() and operator==().
-
-
                                            const TQColorGroup & TQPalette::normal () const
-
                                            
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                             
-
                                             Returns the active color group. Use active() instead.
-
                                             
                                            See also setActive() and active().
-
-
                                            bool TQPalette::operator!= ( const TQPalette & p ) const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns TRUE (slowly) if this palette is different from p;
-otherwise returns FALSE (usually tquickly).
-
-
                                            TQPalette & TQPalette::operator= ( const TQPalette & p )
-
                                            
-Assigns p to this palette and returns a reference to this
-palette.
-
                                             This is fast (it uses copy-on-write).
-
                                             
                                            See also copy().
-
-
                                            bool TQPalette::operator== ( const TQPalette & p ) const
-
                                            
-Returns TRUE (usually tquickly) if this palette is equal to p;
-otherwise returns FALSE (slowly).
-
-
                                            int TQPalette::serialNumber () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns a number that uniquely identifies this TQPalette object.
-The serial number is intended for caching. Its value may not be
-used for anything other than equality testing.
-
                                             Note that TQPalette uses copy-on-write, and the serial number
-changes during the lazy copy operation (detach()), not during a
-shallow copy (copy constructor or assignment).
-
                                             
                                            See also TQPixmap, TQPixmapCache, and TQCache.
-
-
                                            void TQPalette::setActive ( const TQColorGroup & g )
-
                                            
-Sets the Active color group to g.
-
                                             
                                            See also active(), setDisabled(), setInactive(), and TQColorGroup.
-
-
                                            void TQPalette::setBrush ( ColorGroup gr, TQColorGroup::ColorRole r, const TQBrush & b )
-
                                            
-Sets the brush in color group gr, used for color role r, to
-b.
-
                                             
                                            See also brush(), setColor(), and TQColorGroup::ColorRole.
-
-
                                            void TQPalette::setBrush ( TQColorGroup::ColorRole r, const TQBrush & b )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Sets the brush in for color role r in all three color groups to
-b.
-
                                             
                                            See also brush(), setColor(), TQColorGroup::ColorRole, active(), inactive(), and disabled().
-
-
                                            void TQPalette::setColor ( ColorGroup gr, TQColorGroup::ColorRole r, const TQColor & c )
-
                                            
-Sets the brush in color group gr, used for color role r, to
-the solid color c.
-
                                             
                                            See also setBrush(), color(), and TQColorGroup::ColorRole.
-
-
                                            Example: themes/themes.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPalette::setColor ( TQColorGroup::ColorRole r, const TQColor & c )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Sets the brush color used for color role r to color c in all
-three color groups.
-
                                             
                                            See also color(), setBrush(), and TQColorGroup::ColorRole.
-
-
                                            void TQPalette::setDisabled ( const TQColorGroup & g )
-
                                            
-Sets the Disabled color group to g.
-
                                             
                                            See also disabled(), setActive(), and setInactive().
-
-
                                            void TQPalette::setInactive ( const TQColorGroup & g )
-
                                            
-Sets the Inactive color group to g.
-
                                             
                                            See also active(), setDisabled(), setActive(), and TQColorGroup.
-
-
                                            void TQPalette::setNormal ( const TQColorGroup & cg )
-
                                            
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                             
-
                                             Sets the active color group to cg. Use setActive() instead.
-
                                             
                                            See also setActive() and active().
-
-
                                            Related Functions
                                            
-
                                            TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQPalette & p )
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Writes the palette, p to the stream s and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
                                             
                                            See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
                                            TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQPalette & p )
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Reads a palette from the stream, s into the palette p, and
-returns a reference to the stream.
-
                                             
                                            See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
-
                                            
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                            
-
-
                                            Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                            TQt 3.3.8
                                            
-
                                            
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qpen-h.html b/doc/html/qpen-h.html
index 05cde7e00..9081d7082 100644
--- a/doc/html/qpen-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qpen-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qpen.h Include File
+ntqpen.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                            
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                            TQPen Class Reference
                                            
-
-
                                            The TQPen class defines how a TQPainter should draw lines and outlines
-of shapes.
-More...
-
                                            #include <qpen.h>
-
                                            Inherits TQt.
-
                                            List of all member functions.
-
                                            Public Members
                                            
-
                                              
-
                                            • TQPen ()
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPen ( PenStyle style )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPen ( const TQColor & color, uint width = 0, PenStyle style = SolidLine )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPen ( const TQColor & cl, uint w, PenStyle s, PenCapStyle c, PenJoinStyle j )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPen ( const TQPen & p )
                                              • 
-
                                            • ~TQPen ()
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPen & operator= ( const TQPen & p )
                                              • 
-
                                            • PenStyle style () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setStyle ( PenStyle s )
                                              • 
-
                                            • uint width () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setWidth ( uint w )
                                              • 
-
                                            • const TQColor & color () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setColor ( const TQColor & c )
                                              • 
-
                                            • PenCapStyle capStyle () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setCapStyle ( PenCapStyle c )
                                              • 
-
                                            • PenJoinStyle joinStyle () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setJoinStyle ( PenJoinStyle j )
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool operator== ( const TQPen & p ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool operator!= ( const TQPen & p ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            
-
                                            Related Functions
                                            
-
                                              
-
                                            • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQPen & p )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQPen & p )
                                              • 
-
                                            
-
                                            Detailed Description
                                            
-
-
-The TQPen class defines how a TQPainter should draw lines and outlines
-of shapes.
-
                                             
-
-
-
-
                                             A pen has a style, width, color, cap style and join style.
-
                                             The pen style defines the line type. The default pen style is TQt::SolidLine. Setting the style to NoPen tells the painter to
-not draw lines or outlines.
-
                                             When drawing 1 pixel wide diagonal lines you can either use a very
-fast algorithm (specified by a line width of 0, which is the
-default), or a slower but more accurate algorithm (specified by a
-line width of 1). For horizontal and vertical lines a line width
-of 0 is the same as a line width of 1. The cap and join style have
-no effect on 0-width lines.
-
                                             The pen color defines the color of lines and text. The default
-line color is black. The TQColor documentation lists predefined
-colors.
-
                                             The cap style defines how the end points of lines are drawn. The
-join style defines how the joins between two lines are drawn when
-multiple connected lines are drawn (TQPainter::drawPolyline()
-etc.). The cap and join styles only apply to wide lines, i.e. when
-the width is 1 or greater.
-
                                             Use the TQBrush class to specify fill styles.
-
                                             Example:
-
                                            -    TQPainter painter;
-    TQPen     pen( red, 2 );             // red solid line, 2 pixels wide
-    painter.begin( &anyPaintDevice );   // paint something
-    painter.setPen( pen );              // set the red, wide pen
-    painter.drawRect( 40,30, 200,100 ); // draw a rectangle
-    painter.setPen( blue );             // set blue pen, 0 pixel width
-    painter.drawLine( 40,30, 240,130 ); // draw a diagonal in rectangle
-    painter.end();                      // painting done
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             See the TQt::PenStyle enum type for a complete list of pen
-styles.
-
                                             With reference to the end points of lines, for wide (non-0-width)
-pens it depends on the cap style whether the end point is drawn or
-not. TQPainter will try to make sure that the end point is drawn
-for 0-width pens, but this cannot be absolutely guaranteed because
-the underlying drawing engine is free to use any (typically
-accelerated) algorithm for drawing 0-width lines. On all tested
-systems, however, the end point of at least all non-diagonal lines
-are drawn.
-
                                             A pen's color(), width(), style(), capStyle() and joinStyle() can
-be set in the constructor or later with setColor(), setWidth(),
-setStyle(), setCapStyle() and setJoinStyle(). Pens may also be
-compared and streamed.
-
                                             
                                            Pen styles
                                             
-
                                             
                                            See also TQPainter, TQPainter::setPen(), Graphics Classes, Image Processing Classes, and Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes.
-
-
                                            Member Function Documentation
                                            
-
                                            TQPen::TQPen ()
-
                                            
-Constructs a default black solid line pen with 0 width, which
-renders lines 1 pixel wide (fast diagonals).
-
-
                                            TQPen::TQPen ( PenStyle style )
-
                                            
-Constructs a black pen with 0 width (fast diagonals) and style style.
-
                                             
                                            See also setStyle().
-
-
                                            TQPen::TQPen ( const TQColor & color, uint width = 0, PenStyle style = SolidLine )
-
                                            
-Constructs a pen with the specified color, width and style.
-
                                             
                                            See also setWidth(), setStyle(), and setColor().
-
-
                                            TQPen::TQPen ( const TQColor & cl, uint w, PenStyle s, PenCapStyle c, PenJoinStyle j )
-
                                            
-Constructs a pen with the specified color cl and width w.
-The pen style is set to s, the pen cap style to c and the
-pen join style to j.
-
                                             A line width of 0 will produce a 1 pixel wide line using a fast
-algorithm for diagonals. A line width of 1 will also produce a 1
-pixel wide line, but uses a slower more accurate algorithm for
-diagonals. For horizontal and vertical lines a line width of 0 is
-the same as a line width of 1. The cap and join style have no
-effect on 0-width lines.
-
                                             
                                            See also setWidth(), setStyle(), and setColor().
-
-
                                            TQPen::TQPen ( const TQPen & p )
-
                                            
-Constructs a pen that is a copy of p.
-
-
                                            TQPen::~TQPen ()
-
                                            
-Destroys the pen.
-
-
                                            PenCapStyle TQPen::capStyle () const
-
                                            
-Returns the pen's cap style.
-
                                             
                                            See also setCapStyle().
-
-
                                            const TQColor & TQPen::color () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the pen color.
-
                                             
                                            See also setColor().
-
-
                                            Example: scribble/scribble.h.
-
                                            PenJoinStyle TQPen::joinStyle () const
-
                                            
-Returns the pen's join style.
-
                                             
                                            See also setJoinStyle().
-
-
                                            bool TQPen::operator!= ( const TQPen & p ) const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns TRUE if the pen is different from p; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                             Two pens are different if they have different styles, widths or
-colors.
-
                                             
                                            See also operator==().
-
-
                                            TQPen & TQPen::operator= ( const TQPen & p )
-
                                            
-Assigns p to this pen and returns a reference to this pen.
-
-
                                            bool TQPen::operator== ( const TQPen & p ) const
-
                                            
-Returns TRUE if the pen is equal to p; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                             Two pens are equal if they have equal styles, widths and colors.
-
                                             
                                            See also operator!=().
-
-
                                            void TQPen::setCapStyle ( PenCapStyle c )
-
                                            
-Sets the pen's cap style to c.
-
                                             The default value is FlatCap. The cap style has no effect on
-0-width pens.
-
                                             
                                            Pen Cap Styles
                                             
-
                                             Warning: On Windows 95/98 and Macintosh, the cap style setting has
-no effect. Wide lines are rendered as if the cap style was SquareCap.
-
                                             
                                            See also capStyle().
-
-
                                            Example: themes/wood.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPen::setColor ( const TQColor & c )
-
                                            
-Sets the pen color to c.
-
                                             
                                            See also color().
-
-
                                            Examples: progress/progress.cpp and scribble/scribble.h.
-
                                            void TQPen::setJoinStyle ( PenJoinStyle j )
-
                                            
-Sets the pen's join style to j.
-
                                             The default value is MiterJoin. The join style has no effect on
-0-width pens.
-
                                             
                                            Pen Join Styles
                                             
-
                                             Warning: On Windows 95/98 and Macintosh, the join style setting
-has no effect. Wide lines are rendered as if the join style was BevelJoin.
-
                                             
                                            See also joinStyle().
-
-
                                            Example: themes/wood.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPen::setStyle ( PenStyle s )
-
                                            
-Sets the pen style to s.
-
                                             See the TQt::PenStyle documentation for a list of all the
-styles.
-
                                             Warning: On Mac OS X the style setting (other than NoPen and SolidLine) have no effect as they are not implemented by the
-underlying system.
-
                                             Warning: On Windows 95/98, the style setting (other than NoPen
-and SolidLine) has no effect for lines with width greater than
-1.
-
                                             
                                            See also style().
-
-
                                            Example: chart/chartform_canvas.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPen::setWidth ( uint w )
-
                                            
-Sets the pen width to w.
-
                                             A line width of 0 will produce a 1 pixel wide line using a fast
-algorithm for diagonals. A line width of 1 will also produce a 1
-pixel wide line, but uses a slower more accurate algorithm for
-diagonals. For horizontal and vertical lines a line width of 0 is
-the same as a line width of 1. The cap and join style have no
-effect on 0-width lines.
-
                                             
                                            See also width().
-
-
                                            Examples: multiple/ax2.h, progress/progress.cpp, and scribble/scribble.h.
-
                                            PenStyle TQPen::style () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the pen style.
-
                                             
                                            See also setStyle().
-
-
                                            uint TQPen::width () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the pen width.
-
                                             
                                            See also setWidth().
-
-
                                            Example: scribble/scribble.h.
-
                                            Related Functions
                                            
-
                                            TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQPen & p )
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Writes the pen p to the stream s and returns a reference to
-the stream.
-
                                             
                                            See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
                                            TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQPen & p )
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Reads a pen from the stream s into p and returns a reference
-to the stream.
-
                                             
                                            See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
-
                                            
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                            
-
-
                                            Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                            TQt 3.3.8
                                            
-
                                            
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qpicture-h.html b/doc/html/qpicture-h.html
index d68d36ff8..ebcfba189 100644
--- a/doc/html/qpicture-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qpicture-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qpicture.h Include File
+ntqpicture.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                            
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                            TQPicture Class Reference
                                            
-
-
                                            The TQPicture class is a paint device that records and
-replays TQPainter commands.
-More...
-
                                            #include <qpicture.h>
-
                                            Inherits TQPaintDevice.
-
                                            List of all member functions.
-
                                            Public Members
                                            
-
                                              
-
                                            • TQPicture ( int formatVersion = -1 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPicture ( const TQPicture & pic )
                                              • 
-
                                            • ~TQPicture ()
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool isNull () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • uint size () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • const char * data () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual void setData ( const char * data, uint size )
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool play ( TQPainter * painter )
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool load ( TQIODevice * dev, const char * format = 0 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool load ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool save ( TQIODevice * dev, const char * format = 0 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool save ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQRect boundingRect () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setBoundingRect ( const TQRect & r )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPicture & operator= ( const TQPicture & p )
                                              • 
-
                                            
-
                                            Protected Members
                                            
-
                                              
-
                                            • virtual int metric ( int m ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void detach ()
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPicture copy () const
                                              • 
-
                                            
-
                                            Related Functions
                                            
-
                                              
-
                                            • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQPicture & r )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQPicture & r )
                                              • 
-
                                            
-
                                            Detailed Description
                                            
-
-
-The TQPicture class is a paint device that records and
-replays TQPainter commands.
-
                                             
-
-
-
                                             A picture serializes painter commands to an IO device in a
-platform-independent format. For example, a picture created under
-Windows can be read on a Sun SPARC.
-
                                             Pictures are called meta-files on some platforms.
-
                                             TQt pictures use a proprietary binary format. Unlike native picture
-(meta-file) formats on many window systems, TQt pictures have no
-limitations regarding their contents. Everything that can be
-painted can also be stored in a picture, e.g. fonts, pixmaps,
-regions, transformed graphics, etc.
-
                                             TQPicture is an implicitly shared class.
-
                                             Example of how to record a picture:
-
                                            -    TQPicture  pic;
-    TQPainter  p;
-    p.begin( &pic );               // paint in picture
-    p.drawEllipse( 10,20, 80,70 ); // draw an ellipse
-    p.end();                       // painting done
-    pic.save( "drawing.pic" );     // save picture
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             Example of how to replay a picture:
-
                                            -    TQPicture  pic;
-    pic.load( "drawing.pic" );     // load picture
-    TQPainter  p;
-    p.begin( &myWidget );          // paint in myWidget
-    p.drawPicture( pic );          // draw the picture
-    p.end();                       // painting done
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             Pictures can also be drawn using play(). Some basic data about a
-picture is available, for example, size(), isNull() and
-boundingRect().
-
                                             
                                            See also Graphics Classes, Image Processing Classes, and Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes.
-
-
                                            Member Function Documentation
                                            
-
                                            TQPicture::TQPicture ( int formatVersion = -1 )
-
                                            
-Constructs an empty picture.
-
                                             The formatVersion parameter may be used to create a TQPicture
-that can be read by applications that are compiled with earlier
-versions of TQt.
-
                                              
-
                                            •  formatVersion == 1 is binary compatible with TQt 1.x and later.
-
                                            •  formatVersion == 2 is binary compatible with TQt 2.0.x and later.
-
                                            •  formatVersion == 3 is binary compatible with TQt 2.1.x and later.
-
                                            •  formatVersion == 4 is binary compatible with TQt 3.0.x and later.
-
                                            •  formatVersion == 5 is binary compatible with TQt 3.1.
-
                                            
-
                                             Note that the default formatVersion is -1 which signifies the
-current release, i.e. for TQt 3.1 a formatVersion of 5 is the same
-as the default formatVersion of -1.
-
                                             Reading pictures generated by earlier versions of TQt is supported
-and needs no special coding; the format is automatically detected.
-
-
                                            TQPicture::TQPicture ( const TQPicture & pic )
-
                                            
-Constructs a shallow copy of pic.
-
-
                                            TQPicture::~TQPicture ()
-
                                            
-Destroys the picture.
-
-
                                            TQRect TQPicture::boundingRect () const
-
                                            
-Returns the picture's bounding rectangle or an invalid rectangle
-if the picture contains no data.
-
-
                                            TQPicture TQPicture::copy () const [protected]
-
                                            
-Returns a deep copy of the picture.
-
-
                                            const char * TQPicture::data () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns a pointer to the picture data. The pointer is only valid
-until the next non-const function is called on this picture. The
-returned pointer is 0 if the picture contains no data.
-
                                             
                                            See also size() and isNull().
-
-
                                            void TQPicture::detach () [protected]
-
                                            
-Detaches from shared picture data and makes sure that this picture
-is the only one referring to the data.
-
                                             If multiple pictures share common data, this picture makes a copy
-of the data and detaches itself from the sharing mechanism.
-Nothing is done if there is just a single reference.
-
-
                                            bool TQPicture::isNull () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns TRUE if the picture contains no data; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
-
                                            bool TQPicture::load ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0 )
-
                                            
-Loads a picture from the file specified by fileName and returns
-TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                             By default, the file will be interpreted as being in the native
-TQPicture format. Specifying the format string is optional and
-is only needed for importing picture data stored in a different
-format.
-
                                             Currently, the only external format supported is the W3C SVG format which
-requires the TQt XML module. The
-corresponding format string is "svg".
-
                                             
                                            See also save().
-
-
                                            Examples: picture/picture.cpp and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                                            bool TQPicture::load ( TQIODevice * dev, const char * format = 0 )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             dev is the device to use for loading.
-
-
                                            int TQPicture::metric ( int m ) const [virtual protected]
-
                                            
-Internal implementation of the virtual TQPaintDevice::metric()
-function.
-
                                             Use the TQPaintDeviceMetrics class instead.
-
                                             A picture has the following hard-coded values: dpi=72,
-numcolors=16777216 and depth=24.
-
                                             m is the metric to get.
-
-
                                            TQPicture & TQPicture::operator= ( const TQPicture & p )
-
                                            
-Assigns a shallow copy of p to this
-picture and returns a reference to this picture.
-
-
                                            bool TQPicture::play ( TQPainter * painter )
-
                                            
-Replays the picture using painter, and returns TRUE if
-successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                             This function does exactly the same as TQPainter::drawPicture()
-with (x, y) = (0, 0).
-
-
                                            bool TQPicture::save ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0 )
-
                                            
-Saves a picture to the file specified by fileName and returns
-TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                             Specifying the file format string is optional. It's not
-recommended unless you intend to export the picture data for
-use by a third party reader. By default the data will be saved in
-the native TQPicture file format.
-
                                             Currently, the only external format supported is the W3C SVG format which
-requires the TQt XML module. The
-corresponding format string is "svg".
-
                                             
                                            See also load().
-
-
                                            Example: picture/picture.cpp.
-
                                            bool TQPicture::save ( TQIODevice * dev, const char * format = 0 )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             dev is the device to use for saving.
-
-
                                            void TQPicture::setBoundingRect ( const TQRect & r )
-
                                            
-Sets the picture's bounding rectangle to r. The automatically
-calculated value is overriden.
-
-
                                            void TQPicture::setData ( const char * data, uint size ) [virtual]
-
                                            
-Sets the picture data directly from data and size. This
-function copies the input data.
-
                                             
                                            See also data() and size().
-
-
                                            uint TQPicture::size () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the size of the picture data.
-
                                             
                                            See also data().
-
-
                                            Related Functions
                                            
-
                                            TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQPicture & r )
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Writes picture r to the stream s and returns a reference to
-the stream.
-
-
                                            TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQPicture & r )
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Reads a picture from the stream s into picture r and returns
-a reference to the stream.
-
-
-
                                            
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                            
-
-
                                            Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                            TQt 3.3.8
                                            
-
                                            
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qpixmap-h.html b/doc/html/qpixmap-h.html
index e72d2b28a..bdf236a2e 100644
--- a/doc/html/qpixmap-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qpixmap-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qpixmap.h Include File
+ntqpixmap.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                            
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                            TQPixmap Class Reference
                                            
-
-
                                            The TQPixmap class is an off-screen, pixel-based paint device.
-More...
-
                                            #include <qpixmap.h>
-
                                            Inherits TQPaintDevice and TQt.
-
                                            Inherited by TQBitmap and TQCanvasPixmap.
-
                                            List of all member functions.
-
                                            Public Members
                                            
-
                                              
-
                                            • enum ColorMode { Auto, Color, Mono }
                                              • 
-
                                            • enum Optimization { DefaultOptim, NoOptim, MemoryOptim = NoOptim, NormalOptim, BestOptim }
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPixmap ()
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPixmap ( const TQImage & image )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPixmap ( int w, int h, int depth = -1, Optimization optimization = DefaultOptim )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPixmap ( const TQSize & size, int depth = -1, Optimization optimization = DefaultOptim )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPixmap ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0, ColorMode mode = Auto )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPixmap ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format, int conversion_flags )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPixmap ( const char * xpm[] )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPixmap ( const TQByteArray & img_data )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pixmap )
                                              • 
-
                                            • ~TQPixmap ()
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPixmap & operator= ( const TQPixmap & pixmap )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPixmap & operator= ( const TQImage & image )
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool isNull () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • int width () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • int height () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQSize size () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQRect rect () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • int depth () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void fill ( const TQColor & fillColor = TQt::white )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void fill ( const TQWidget * widget, int xofs, int yofs )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void fill ( const TQWidget * widget, const TQPoint & ofs )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void resize ( int w, int h )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void resize ( const TQSize & size )
                                              • 
-
                                            • const TQBitmap * mask () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setMask ( const TQBitmap & newmask )
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool selfMask () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool hasAlpha () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool hasAlphaChannel () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQBitmap createHeuristicMask ( bool clipTight = TRUE ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPixmap xForm ( const TQWMatrix & matrix ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQImage convertToImage () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool convertFromImage ( const TQImage & image, ColorMode mode = Auto )
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool convertFromImage ( const TQImage & img, int conversion_flags )
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool load ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0, ColorMode mode = Auto )
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool load ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format, int conversion_flags )
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool loadFromData ( const uchar * buf, uint len, const char * format = 0, ColorMode mode = Auto )
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool loadFromData ( const uchar * buf, uint len, const char * format, int conversion_flags )
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool loadFromData ( const TQByteArray & buf, const char * format = 0, int conversion_flags = 0 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool save ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format, int quality = -1 ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool save ( TQIODevice * device, const char * format, int quality = -1 ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • int serialNumber () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • Optimization optimization () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setOptimization ( Optimization optimization )
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual void detach ()
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool isTQBitmap () const
                                              • 
-
                                            
-
                                            Static Public Members
                                            
-
-
                                            Protected Members
                                            
-
                                              
-
                                            • TQPixmap ( int w, int h, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap )
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual int metric ( int m ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            
-
                                            Related Functions
                                            
-
                                              
-
                                            • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQPixmap & pixmap )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQPixmap & pixmap )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void copyBlt ( TQPixmap * dst, int dx, int dy, const TQPixmap * src, int sx, int sy, int sw, int sh )
                                              • 
-
                                            
-
                                            Detailed Description
                                            
-
-
-The TQPixmap class is an off-screen, pixel-based paint device.
-
                                             
-
-
-
-
                                             TQPixmap is one of the two classes TQt provides for dealing with
-images; the other is TQImage. TQPixmap is designed and optimized
-for drawing; TQImage is designed and optimized for I/O and for
-direct pixel access/manipulation. There are (slow) functions to
-convert between TQImage and TQPixmap: convertToImage() and
-convertFromImage().
-
                                             One common use of the TQPixmap class is to enable smooth updating
-of widgets. Whenever something complex needs to be drawn, you can
-use a pixmap to obtain flicker-free drawing, like this:
-
                                             
                                              
-
                                            1.  Create a pixmap with the same size as the widget.
-
                                            2.  Fill the pixmap with the widget background color.
-
                                            3.  Paint the pixmap.
-
                                            4.  bitBlt() the pixmap contents onto the widget.
-
                                            
-
                                             Pixel data in a pixmap is internal and is managed by the
-underlying window system. Pixels can be accessed only through
-TQPainter functions, through bitBlt(), and by converting the
-TQPixmap to a TQImage.
-
                                             You can easily display a TQPixmap on the screen using
-TQLabel::setPixmap(). For example, all the TQButton subclasses
-support pixmap use.
-
                                             The TQPixmap class uses copy-on-write,
-so it is practical to pass TQPixmap objects by value.
-
                                             You can retrieve the width(), height(), depth() and size() of a
-pixmap. The enclosing rectangle is given by rect(). Pixmaps can be
-filled with fill() and resized with resize(). You can create and
-set a mask with createHeuristicMask() and setMask(). Use
-selfMask() to see if the pixmap is identical to its mask.
-
                                             In addition to loading a pixmap from file using load() you can
-also loadFromData(). You can control optimization with
-setOptimization() and obtain a transformed version of the pixmap
-using xForm()
-
                                             Note regarding Windows 95 and 98: on Windows 9x the system crashes
-if you create more than about 1000 pixmaps, independent of the
-size of the pixmaps or installed RAM. Windows NT-systems (including
-2000, XP and following versions) do not have the same limitation,
-but depending on the graphics etquipment the system will fail to
-allocate pixmap objects at some point (due to system running out of
-GDI resources).
-
                                             TQt tries to work around the resource limitation. If you set the
-pixmap optimization to TQPixmap::MemoryOptim and the width of
-your pixmap is less than or equal to 128 pixels, TQt stores the
-pixmap in a way that is very memory-efficient when there are many
-pixmaps.
-
                                             If your application uses dozens or hundreds of pixmaps (for
-example on tool bar buttons and in popup menus), and you plan to
-run it on Windows 95 or Windows 98, we recommend using code like
-this:
-
                                             
                                            -        TQPixmap::setDefaultOptimization( TQPixmap::MemoryOptim );
-        while ( ... ) {
-            // load tool bar pixmaps etc.
-            TQPixmap *pixmap = new TQPixmap(fileName);
-        }
-        TQPixmap::setDefaultOptimization( TQPixmap::NormalOptim );
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             In general it is recommended to make as much use of TQPixmap's
-implicit sharing and the TQPixmapCache as possible.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQBitmap, TQImage, TQImageIO, Shared Classes, Graphics Classes, Image Processing Classes, and Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes.
-
-
                                            Member Type Documentation
                                            
-
                                            TQPixmap::ColorMode
                                            
-
-
                                             This enum type defines the color modes that exist for converting
-TQImage objects to TQPixmap.
-
                                              
-
                                            • TQPixmap::Auto - Select Color or Mono on a case-by-case basis.
-
                                            • TQPixmap::Color - Always create colored pixmaps.
-
                                            • TQPixmap::Mono - Always create bitmaps.
-
                                            
-
                                            TQPixmap::Optimization
                                            
-
-
                                             TQPixmap has the choice of optimizing for speed or memory in a few
-places; the best choice varies from pixmap to pixmap but can
-generally be derived heuristically. This enum type defines a
-number of optimization modes that you can set for any pixmap to
-tweak the speed/memory tradeoffs:
-
                                              
-
                                            • TQPixmap::DefaultOptim - Whatever TQPixmap::defaultOptimization()
-returns. A pixmap with this optimization will have whatever
-the current default optimization is. If the default
-optimization is changed using setDefaultOptimization(), then
-this will not effect any pixmaps that have already been
-created.
-
                                            • TQPixmap::NoOptim - No optimization (currently the same as MemoryOptim).
-
                                            • TQPixmap::MemoryOptim - Optimize for minimal memory use on Windows
-9x and X11 systems.
-
                                            • TQPixmap::NormalOptim - Optimize for typical usage. Often uses more
-memory than MemoryOptim, and is often faster.
-
                                            • TQPixmap::BestOptim - Optimize for pixmaps that are drawn very often
-and where performance is critical. Generally uses more memory
-than NormalOptim and may provide a little more speed.
-
                                             We recommend using DefaultOptim.
-
                                             
-
                                            Member Function Documentation
                                            
-
                                            TQPixmap::TQPixmap ()
-
                                            
-Constructs a null pixmap.
-
                                             
                                            See also isNull().
-
-
                                            TQPixmap::TQPixmap ( const TQImage & image )
-
                                            
-Constructs a pixmap from the TQImage image.
-
                                             
                                            See also convertFromImage().
-
-
                                            TQPixmap::TQPixmap ( int w, int h, int depth = -1, Optimization optimization = DefaultOptim )
-
                                            
-Constructs a pixmap with w width, h height and depth bits
-per pixel. The pixmap is optimized in accordance with the optimization value.
-
                                             The contents of the pixmap is uninitialized.
-
                                             The depth can be either 1 (monochrome) or the depth of the
-current video mode. If depth is negative, then the hardware
-depth of the current video mode will be used.
-
                                             If either w or h is zero, a null pixmap is constructed.
-
                                             
                                            See also isNull() and TQPixmap::Optimization.
-
-
                                            TQPixmap::TQPixmap ( const TQSize & size, int depth = -1, Optimization optimization = DefaultOptim )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Constructs a pixmap of size size, depth bits per pixel,
-optimized in accordance with the optimization value.
-
-
                                            TQPixmap::TQPixmap ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0, ColorMode mode = Auto )
-
                                            
-Constructs a pixmap from the file fileName. If the file does
-not exist or is of an unknown format, the pixmap becomes a null
-pixmap.
-
                                             The fileName, format and mode parameters are passed on to
-load(). This means that the data in fileName is not compiled
-into the binary. If fileName contains a relative path (e.g. the
-filename only) the relevant file must be found relative to the
-runtime working directory.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQPixmap::ColorMode, isNull(), load(), loadFromData(), save(), and imageFormat().
-
-
                                            TQPixmap::TQPixmap ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format, int conversion_flags )
-
                                            
-Constructs a pixmap from the file fileName. If the file does
-not exist or is of an unknown format, the pixmap becomes a null
-pixmap.
-
                                             The fileName, format and conversion_flags parameters are
-passed on to load(). This means that the data in fileName is
-not compiled into the binary. If fileName contains a relative
-path (e.g. the filename only) the relevant file must be found
-relative to the runtime working directory.
-
                                             If the image needs to be modified to fit in a lower-resolution
-result (e.g. converting from 32-bit to 8-bit), use the conversion_flags to specify how you'd prefer this to happen.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQt::ImageConversionFlags, isNull(), load(), loadFromData(), save(), and imageFormat().
-
-
                                            TQPixmap::TQPixmap ( const char * xpm[] )
-
                                            
-Constructs a pixmap from xpm, which must be a valid XPM image.
-
                                             Errors are silently ignored.
-
                                             Note that it's possible to squeeze the XPM variable a little bit
-by using an unusual declaration:
-
                                             
                                            -        static const char * const start_xpm[]={
-            "16 15 8 1",
-            "a c #cec6bd",
-        ....
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             The extra const makes the entire definition read-only, which is
-slightly more efficient (for example, when the code is in a shared
-library) and ROMable when the application is to be stored in ROM.
-
                                             In order to use that sort of declaration you must cast the
-variable back to const char ** when you create the TQPixmap.
-
-
                                            TQPixmap::TQPixmap ( const TQByteArray & img_data )
-
                                            
-Constructs a pixmaps by loading from img_data. The data can be
-in any image format supported by TQt.
-
                                             
                                            See also loadFromData().
-
-
                                            TQPixmap::TQPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pixmap )
-
                                            
-Constructs a pixmap that is a copy of pixmap.
-
-
                                            TQPixmap::TQPixmap ( int w, int h, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap ) [protected]
-
                                            
-Constructs a monochrome pixmap, with width w and height h,
-that is initialized with the data in bits. The isXbitmap
-indicates whether the data is an X bitmap and defaults to FALSE.
-This constructor is protected and used by the TQBitmap class.
-
-
                                            TQPixmap::~TQPixmap ()
-
                                            
-Destroys the pixmap.
-
-
                                            bool TQPixmap::convertFromImage ( const TQImage & img, int conversion_flags )
-
                                            
-Converts image img and sets this pixmap. Returns TRUE if
-successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                             The conversion_flags argument is a bitwise-OR of the
-TQt::ImageConversionFlags. Passing 0 for conversion_flags
-sets all the default options.
-
                                             Note that even though a TQPixmap with depth 1 behaves much like a
-TQBitmap, isTQBitmap() returns FALSE.
-
                                             If a pixmap with depth 1 is painted with color0 and color1 and
-converted to an image, the pixels painted with color0 will produce
-pixel index 0 in the image and those painted with color1 will
-produce pixel index 1.
-
                                             
                                            See also convertToImage(), isTQBitmap(), TQImage::convertDepth(), defaultDepth(), and TQImage::hasAlphaBuffer().
-
-
                                            Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
-
                                            bool TQPixmap::convertFromImage ( const TQImage & image, ColorMode mode = Auto )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Converts image and sets this pixmap using color mode mode.
-Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQPixmap::ColorMode.
-
-
                                            TQImage TQPixmap::convertToImage () const
-
                                            
-Converts the pixmap to a TQImage. Returns a null image if it fails.
-
                                             If the pixmap has 1-bit depth, the returned image will also be 1
-bit deep. If the pixmap has 2- to 8-bit depth, the returned image
-has 8-bit depth. If the pixmap has greater than 8-bit depth, the
-returned image has 32-bit depth.
-
                                             Note that for the moment, alpha masks on monochrome images are
-ignored.
-
                                             
                                            See also convertFromImage().
-
-
                                            Example: qmag/qmag.cpp.
-
                                            TQBitmap TQPixmap::createHeuristicMask ( bool clipTight = TRUE ) const
-
                                            
-Creates and returns a heuristic mask for this pixmap. It works by
-selecting a color from one of the corners and then chipping away
-pixels of that color, starting at all the edges.
-
                                             The mask may not be perfect but it should be reasonable, so you
-can do things such as the following:
-
                                            -    pm->setMask( pm->createHeuristicMask() );
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             This function is slow because it involves transformation to a
-TQImage, non-trivial computations and a transformation back to a
-TQBitmap.
-
                                             If clipTight is TRUE the mask is just large enough to cover the
-pixels; otherwise, the mask is larger than the data pixels.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQImage::createHeuristicMask().
-
-
                                            int TQPixmap::defaultDepth () [static]
-
                                            
-Returns the default pixmap depth, i.e. the depth a pixmap gets if
--1 is specified.
-
                                             
                                            See also depth().
-
-
                                            Optimization TQPixmap::defaultOptimization () [static]
-
                                            
-Returns the default pixmap optimization setting.
-
                                             
                                            See also setDefaultOptimization(), setOptimization(), and optimization().
-
-
                                            int TQPixmap::depth () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the depth of the pixmap.
-
                                             The pixmap depth is also called bits per pixel (bpp) or bit planes
-of a pixmap. A null pixmap has depth 0.
-
                                             
                                            See also defaultDepth(), isNull(), and TQImage::convertDepth().
-
-
                                            void TQPixmap::detach () [virtual]
-
                                            
-This is a special-purpose function that detaches the pixmap from
-shared pixmap data.
-
                                             A pixmap is automatically detached by TQt whenever its contents is
-about to change. This is done in all TQPixmap member functions
-that modify the pixmap (fill(), resize(), convertFromImage(),
-load(), etc.), in bitBlt() for the destination pixmap and in
-TQPainter::begin() on a pixmap.
-
                                             It is possible to modify a pixmap without letting TQt know. You can
-first obtain the system-dependent handle() and then call
-system-specific functions (for instance, BitBlt under Windows)
-that modify the pixmap contents. In such cases, you can call
-detach() to cut the pixmap loose from other pixmaps that share
-data with this one.
-
                                             detach() returns immediately if there is just a single reference
-or if the pixmap has not been initialized yet.
-
-
                                            void TQPixmap::fill ( const TQColor & fillColor = TQt::white )
-
                                            
-Fills the pixmap with the color fillColor.
-
-
                                            Examples: chart/setdataform.cpp, desktop/desktop.cpp, grapher/grapher.cpp, hello/hello.cpp, t10/cannon.cpp, themes/metal.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPixmap::fill ( const TQWidget * widget, int xofs, int yofs )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Fills the pixmap with the widget's background color or pixmap.
-If the background is empty, nothing is done. xofs, yofs is
-an offset in the widget.
-
-
                                            void TQPixmap::fill ( const TQWidget * widget, const TQPoint & ofs )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Fills the pixmap with the widget's background color or pixmap.
-If the background is empty, nothing is done.
-
                                             The ofs point is an offset in the widget.
-
                                             The point ofs is a point in the widget's coordinate system. The
-pixmap's top-left pixel will be mapped to the point ofs in the
-widget. This is significant if the widget has a background pixmap;
-otherwise the pixmap will simply be filled with the background
-color of the widget.
-
                                             Example:
-
                                            -    void CuteWidget::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent *e )
-    {
-        TQRect ur = e->rect();            // rectangle to update
-        TQPixmap pix( ur.size() );        // Pixmap for double-buffering
-        pix.fill( this, ur.topLeft() );  // fill with widget background
-
-        TQPainter p( &pix );
-        p.translate( -ur.x(), -ur.y() ); // use widget coordinate system
-                                         // when drawing on pixmap
-        //    ... draw on pixmap ...
-
-        p.end();
-
-        bitBlt( this, ur.topLeft(), &pix );
-    }
-    
                                            
- 
-
-
                                            TQPixmap TQPixmap::fromMimeSource ( const TQString & abs_name ) [static]
-
                                             Convenience function. Gets the data associated with the absolute
-name abs_name from the default mime source factory and decodes it
-to a pixmap.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQMimeSourceFactory, TQImage::fromMimeSource(), and TQImageDrag::decode().
-
-
                                            Example: textedit/textedit.cpp.
-
                                            TQPixmap TQPixmap::grabWidget ( TQWidget * widget, int x = 0, int y = 0, int w = -1, int h = -1 ) [static]
-
                                            
-Creates a pixmap and paints widget in it.
-
                                             If the widget has any children, then they are also painted in
-the appropriate positions.
-
                                             If you specify x, y, w or h, only the rectangle you
-specify is painted. The defaults are 0, 0 (top-left corner) and
--1,-1 (which means the entire widget).
-
                                             (If w is negative, the function copies everything to the right
-border of the window. If h is negative, the function copies
-everything to the bottom of the window.)
-
                                             If widget is 0, or if the rectangle defined by x, y, the
-modified w and the modified h does not overlap the widget->rect(), this function will return a null TQPixmap.
-
                                             This function actually asks widget to paint itself (and its
-children to paint themselves). TQPixmap::grabWindow() grabs pixels
-off the screen, which is a bit faster and picks up exactly
-what's on-screen. This function works by calling paintEvent() with
-painter redirection turned on. If there are overlaying windows,
-grabWindow() will see them, but not this function.
-
                                             If there is overlap, it returns a pixmap of the size you want,
-containing a rendering of widget. If the rectangle you ask for
-is a superset of widget, the areas outside widget are
-covered with the widget's background.
-
                                             If an error occurs when trying to grab the widget, such as the
-size of the widget being too large to fit in memory, an isNull()
-pixmap is returned.
-
                                             
                                            See also grabWindow(), TQPainter::redirect(), and TQWidget::paintEvent().
-
-
                                            TQPixmap TQPixmap::grabWindow ( WId window, int x = 0, int y = 0, int w = -1, int h = -1 ) [static]
-
                                            
-Grabs the contents of the window window and makes a pixmap out
-of it. Returns the pixmap.
-
                                             The arguments (x, y) specify the offset in the window, whereas
-(w, h) specify the width and height of the area to be copied.
-
                                             If w is negative, the function copies everything to the right
-border of the window. If h is negative, the function copies
-everything to the bottom of the window.
-
                                             Note that grabWindow() grabs pixels from the screen, not from the
-window. If there is another window partially or entirely over the
-one you grab, you get pixels from the overlying window, too.
-
                                             Note also that the mouse cursor is generally not grabbed.
-
                                             The reason we use a window identifier and not a TQWidget is to
-enable grabbing of windows that are not part of the application,
-window system frames, and so on.
-
                                             Warning: Grabbing an area outside the screen is not safe in
-general. This depends on the underlying window system.
-
                                             Warning: X11 only: If window is not the same depth as the root
-window and another window partially or entirely obscures the one
-you grab, you will not get pixels from the overlying window.
-The contests of the obscured areas in the pixmap are undefined and
-uninitialized.
-
                                             
                                            See also grabWidget().
-
-
                                            Example: qmag/qmag.cpp.
-
                                            bool TQPixmap::hasAlpha () const
-
                                            
-Returns TRUE this pixmap has an alpha channel or a mask.
-
                                             
                                            See also hasAlphaChannel() and mask().
-
-
                                            bool TQPixmap::hasAlphaChannel () const
-
                                            
-Returns TRUE if the pixmap has an alpha channel; otherwise it
-returns FALSE.
-
                                             NOTE: If the pixmap has a mask but not alpha channel, this
-function returns FALSE.
-
                                             
                                            See also hasAlpha() and mask().
-
-
                                            int TQPixmap::height () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the height of the pixmap.
-
                                             
                                            See also width(), size(), and rect().
-
-
                                            Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp, movies/main.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, t10/cannon.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                                            const char * TQPixmap::imageFormat ( const TQString & fileName ) [static]
-
                                            
-Returns a string that specifies the image format of the file fileName, or 0 if the file cannot be read or if the format cannot
-be recognized.
-
                                             The TQImageIO documentation lists the supported image formats.
-
                                             
                                            See also load() and save().
-
-
                                            bool TQPixmap::isNull () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns TRUE if this is a null pixmap; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                             A null pixmap has zero width, zero height and no contents. You
-cannot draw in a null pixmap or bitBlt() anything to it.
-
                                             Resizing an existing pixmap to (0, 0) makes a pixmap into a null
-pixmap.
-
                                             
                                            See also resize().
-
-
                                            Examples: movies/main.cpp, qdir/qdir.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, and scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
-
                                            bool TQPixmap::isTQBitmap () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns TRUE if this is a TQBitmap; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                            bool TQPixmap::load ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format, int conversion_flags )
-
                                            
-Loads a pixmap from the file fileName at runtime. Returns TRUE
-if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                             If format is specified, the loader attempts to read the pixmap
-using the specified format. If format is not specified
-(default), the loader reads a few bytes from the header to guess
-the file's format.
-
                                             See the convertFromImage() documentation for a description of the
-conversion_flags argument.
-
                                             The TQImageIO documentation lists the supported image formats and
-explains how to add extra formats.
-
                                             
                                            See also loadFromData(), save(), imageFormat(), TQImage::load(), and TQImageIO.
-
-
                                            Examples: picture/picture.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                                            bool TQPixmap::load ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0, ColorMode mode = Auto )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Loads a pixmap from the file fileName at runtime.
-
                                             If format is specified, the loader attempts to read the pixmap
-using the specified format. If format is not specified
-(default), the loader reads a few bytes from the header to guess
-the file's format.
-
                                             The mode is used to specify the color mode of the pixmap.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQPixmap::ColorMode.
-
-
                                            bool TQPixmap::loadFromData ( const uchar * buf, uint len, const char * format, int conversion_flags )
-
                                            
-Loads a pixmap from the binary data in buf (len bytes).
-Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                             If format is specified, the loader attempts to read the pixmap
-using the specified format. If format is not specified
-(default), the loader reads a few bytes from the header to guess
-the file's format.
-
                                             See the convertFromImage() documentation for a description of the
-conversion_flags argument.
-
                                             The TQImageIO documentation lists the supported image formats and
-explains how to add extra formats.
-
                                             
                                            See also load(), save(), imageFormat(), TQImage::loadFromData(), and TQImageIO.
-
-
                                            bool TQPixmap::loadFromData ( const uchar * buf, uint len, const char * format = 0, ColorMode mode = Auto )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Loads a pixmap from the binary data in buf (len bytes) using
-color mode mode. Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                             If format is specified, the loader attempts to read the pixmap
-using the specified format. If format is not specified
-(default), the loader reads a few bytes from the header to guess
-the file's format.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQPixmap::ColorMode.
-
-
                                            bool TQPixmap::loadFromData ( const TQByteArray & buf, const char * format = 0, int conversion_flags = 0 )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             
-
                                            const TQBitmap * TQPixmap::mask () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the mask bitmap, or 0 if no mask has been set.
-
                                             
                                            See also setMask(), TQBitmap, and hasAlpha().
-
-
                                            int TQPixmap::metric ( int m ) const [virtual protected]
-
                                            
-Internal implementation of the virtual TQPaintDevice::metric() function.
-
                                             Use the TQPaintDeviceMetrics class instead.
-
                                             m is the metric to get.
-
-
                                            TQPixmap & TQPixmap::operator= ( const TQPixmap & pixmap )
-
                                            
-Assigns the pixmap pixmap to this pixmap and returns a
-reference to this pixmap.
-
-
                                            TQPixmap & TQPixmap::operator= ( const TQImage & image )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Converts the image image to a pixmap that is assigned to this
-pixmap. Returns a reference to the pixmap.
-
                                             
                                            See also convertFromImage().
-
-
                                            Optimization TQPixmap::optimization () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the optimization setting for this pixmap.
-
                                             The default optimization setting is TQPixmap::NormalOptim. You
-can change this setting in two ways:
-
                                            
-
                                             
                                            See also setOptimization(), setDefaultOptimization(), and defaultOptimization().
-
-
                                            TQRect TQPixmap::rect () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the enclosing rectangle (0,0,width(),height()) of the pixmap.
-
                                             
                                            See also width(), height(), and size().
-
-
                                            void TQPixmap::resize ( int w, int h )
-
                                            
-Resizes the pixmap to w width and h height. If either w
-or h is 0, the pixmap becomes a null pixmap.
-
                                             If both w and h are greater than 0, a valid pixmap is
-created. New pixels will be uninitialized (random) if the pixmap
-is expanded.
-
-
                                            Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp and grapher/grapher.cpp.
-
                                            void TQPixmap::resize ( const TQSize & size )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Resizes the pixmap to size size.
-
-
                                            bool TQPixmap::save ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format, int quality = -1 ) const
-
                                            
-Saves the pixmap to the file fileName using the image file
-format format and a quality factor quality. quality must
-be in the range [0,100] or -1. Specify 0 to obtain small
-compressed files, 100 for large uncompressed files, and -1 to use
-the default settings. Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                                             
                                            See also load(), loadFromData(), imageFormat(), TQImage::save(), and TQImageIO.
-
-
                                            Example: qmag/qmag.cpp.
-
                                            bool TQPixmap::save ( TQIODevice * device, const char * format, int quality = -1 ) const
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             This function writes a TQPixmap to the TQIODevice, device. This
-can be used, for example, to save a pixmap directly into a
-TQByteArray:
-
                                            -    TQPixmap pixmap;
-    TQByteArray ba;
-    TQBuffer buffer( ba );
-    buffer.open( IO_WriteOnly );
-    pixmap.save( &buffer, "PNG" ); // writes pixmap into ba in PNG format
-    
                                            
- 
-
-
                                            bool TQPixmap::selfMask () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns TRUE if the pixmap's mask is identical to the pixmap
-itself; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                             
                                            See also mask().
-
-
                                            int TQPixmap::serialNumber () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns a number that uniquely identifies the contents of this
-TQPixmap object. This means that multiple TQPixmap objects can have
-the same serial number as long as they refer to the same contents.
-
                                             An example of where this is useful is for caching TQPixmaps.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQPixmapCache.
-
-
                                            void TQPixmap::setDefaultOptimization ( Optimization optimization ) [static]
-
                                            
-Sets the default pixmap optimization.
-
                                             All new pixmaps that are created will use this default
-optimization. You may also set optimization for individual pixmaps
-using the setOptimization() function.
-
                                             The initial default optimization setting is TQPixmap::Normal.
-
                                             
                                            See also defaultOptimization(), setOptimization(), and optimization().
-
-
                                            void TQPixmap::setMask ( const TQBitmap & newmask )
-
                                            
-Sets a mask bitmap.
-
                                             The newmask bitmap defines the clip mask for this pixmap. Every
-pixel in newmask corresponds to a pixel in this pixmap. Pixel
-value 1 means opaque and pixel value 0 means transparent. The mask
-must have the same size as this pixmap.
-
                                             Warning: Setting the mask on a pixmap will cause any alpha channel
-data to be cleared. For example:
-
                                            -        TQPixmap alpha( "image-with-alpha.png" );
-        TQPixmap alphacopy = alpha;
-        alphacopy.setMask( *alphacopy.mask() );
-    
                                            
- 
-Now, alpha and alphacopy are visually different.
-
                                             Setting a null mask resets the mask.
-
                                             
                                            See also mask(), createHeuristicMask(), and TQBitmap.
-
-
                                            void TQPixmap::setOptimization ( Optimization optimization )
-
                                            
-Sets pixmap drawing optimization for this pixmap.
-
                                             The optimization setting affects pixmap operations, in
-particular drawing of transparent pixmaps (bitBlt() a pixmap with
-a mask set) and pixmap transformations (the xForm() function).
-
                                             Pixmap optimization involves keeping intermediate results in a
-cache buffer and using the cache to speed up bitBlt() and xForm().
-The cost is more memory consumption, up to twice as much as an
-unoptimized pixmap.
-
                                             Use the setDefaultOptimization() to change the default
-optimization for all new pixmaps.
-
                                             
                                            See also optimization(), setDefaultOptimization(), and defaultOptimization().
-
-
                                            Example: desktop/desktop.cpp.
-
                                            TQSize TQPixmap::size () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the size of the pixmap.
-
                                             
                                            See also width(), height(), and rect().
-
-
                                            Example: movies/main.cpp.
-
                                            TQWMatrix TQPixmap::trueMatrix ( const TQWMatrix & matrix, int w, int h ) [static]
-
                                            
-Returns the actual matrix used for transforming a pixmap with w
-width and h height and matrix matrix.
-
                                             When transforming a pixmap with xForm(), the transformation matrix
-is internally adjusted to compensate for unwanted translation,
-i.e. xForm() returns the smallest pixmap containing all
-transformed points of the original pixmap.
-
                                             This function returns the modified matrix, which maps points
-correctly from the original pixmap into the new pixmap.
-
                                             
                                            See also xForm() and TQWMatrix.
-
-
                                            int TQPixmap::width () const
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the width of the pixmap.
-
                                             
                                            See also height(), size(), and rect().
-
-
                                            Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp, movies/main.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                                            TQPixmap TQPixmap::xForm ( const TQWMatrix & matrix ) const
-
                                            
-Returns a copy of the pixmap that is transformed using matrix.
-The original pixmap is not changed.
-
                                             The transformation matrix is internally adjusted to compensate
-for unwanted translation, i.e. xForm() returns the smallest image
-that contains all the transformed points of the original image.
-
                                             This function is slow because it involves transformation to a
-TQImage, non-trivial computations and a transformation back to a
-TQPixmap.
-
                                             
                                            See also trueMatrix(), TQWMatrix, TQPainter::setWorldMatrix(), and TQImage::xForm().
-
-
                                            Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp, fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp, movies/main.cpp, and qmag/qmag.cpp.
-
                                            Related Functions
                                            
-
                                            void copyBlt ( TQPixmap * dst, int dx, int dy, const TQPixmap * src, int sx, int sy, int sw, int sh )
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Copies a block of pixels from src to dst.  The alpha channel
-and mask data (if any) is also copied from src.  NOTE: src
-is not alpha blended or masked when copied to dst.  Use
-bitBlt() or TQPainter::drawPixmap() to perform alpha blending or
-masked drawing.
-
                                             sx, sy is the top-left pixel in src (0, 0 by default), dx, dy is the top-left position in dst and sw, \sh is the
-size of the copied block (all of src by default).
-
                                             If src, dst, sw or sh is 0 (zero), copyBlt() does
-nothing.  If sw or sh is negative, copyBlt() copies starting
-at sx (and respectively, sy) and ending at the right edge
-(and respectively, the bottom edge) of src.
-
                                             copyBlt() does nothing if src and dst have different depths.
-
-
                                            TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQPixmap & pixmap )
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Writes the pixmap pixmap to the stream s as a PNG image.
-
                                             Note that writing the stream to a file will not produce a valid image file.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQPixmap::save() and Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
                                            TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQPixmap & pixmap )
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Reads a pixmap from the stream s into the pixmap pixmap.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQPixmap::load() and Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
-
                                            
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                            
-
-
                                            Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                            TQt 3.3.8
                                            
-
                                            
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qpixmapcache-h.html b/doc/html/qpixmapcache-h.html
index 7e15ac6da..9a349f64a 100644
--- a/doc/html/qpixmapcache-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qpixmapcache-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qpixmapcache.h Include File
+ntqpixmapcache.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                            
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                            TQPixmapCache Class Reference
                                            
-
-
                                            The TQPixmapCache class provides an application-global cache for
-pixmaps.
-More...
-
                                            #include <qpixmapcache.h>
-
                                            List of all member functions.
-
                                            Static Public Members
                                            
-
                                              
-
                                            • int cacheLimit ()
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setCacheLimit ( int n )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQPixmap * find ( const TQString & key )
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool find ( const TQString & key, TQPixmap & pm )
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool insert ( const TQString & key, TQPixmap * pm )  (obsolete)
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool insert ( const TQString & key, const TQPixmap & pm )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void remove ( const TQString & key )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void clear ()
                                              • 
-
                                            
-
                                            Detailed Description
                                            
-
-
-
                                             The TQPixmapCache class provides an application-global cache for
-pixmaps.
-
                                             
-
-
-
                                             This class is a tool for optimized drawing with TQPixmap. You can
-use it to store temporary pixmaps that are expensive to generate
-without using more storage space than cacheLimit(). Use insert()
-to insert pixmaps, find() to find them and clear() to empty the
-cache.
-
                                             For example, TQRadioButton has a non-trivial visual representation
-so we don't want to regenerate a pixmap whenever a radio button is
-displayed or changes state. In the function
-TQRadioButton::drawButton(), we do not draw the radio button
-directly. Instead, we first check the global pixmap cache for a
-pixmap with the key "$qt_radio_nnn_", where nnn is a numerical
-value that specifies the the radio button state. If a pixmap is
-found, we bitBlt() it onto the widget and return. Otherwise, we
-create a new pixmap, draw the radio button in the pixmap, and
-finally insert the pixmap in the global pixmap cache, using the
-key above. The bitBlt() is ten times faster than drawing the
-radio button. All radio buttons in the program share the cached
-pixmap since TQPixmapCache is application-global.
-
                                             TQPixmapCache contains no member data, only static functions to
-access the global pixmap cache. It creates an internal TQCache for
-caching the pixmaps.
-
                                             The cache associates a pixmap with a string (key). If two pixmaps
-are inserted into the cache using equal keys, then the last pixmap
-will hide the first pixmap. The TQDict and TQCache classes do
-exactly the same.
-
                                             The cache becomes full when the total size of all pixmaps in the
-cache exceeds cacheLimit(). The initial cache limit is 1024 KByte
-(1 MByte); it is changed with setCacheLimit(). A pixmap takes
-roughly width*height*depth/8 bytes of memory.
-
                                             See the TQCache documentation for more details about the cache
-mechanism.
-
                                            See also Environment Classes, Graphics Classes, and Image Processing Classes.
-
-
                                            Member Function Documentation
                                            
-
                                            int TQPixmapCache::cacheLimit () [static]
-
                                            
-Returns the cache limit (in kilobytes).
-
                                             The default setting is 1024 kilobytes.
-
                                             
                                            See also setCacheLimit().
-
-
                                            void TQPixmapCache::clear () [static]
-
                                            
-Removes all pixmaps from the cache.
-
-
                                            TQPixmap * TQPixmapCache::find ( const TQString & key ) [static]
-
                                            
-Returns the pixmap associated with the key in the cache, or
-null if there is no such pixmap.
-
                                             Warning: If valid, you should copy the pixmap immediately (this is
-fast). Subsequent insertions into the cache could cause the
-pointer to become invalid. For this reason, we recommend you use
-find(const TQString&, TQPixmap&) instead.
-
                                             Example:
-
                                            -        TQPixmap* pp;
-        TQPixmap p;
-        if ( (pp=TQPixmapCache::find("my_big_image", pm)) ) {
-            p = *pp;
-        } else {
-            p.load("bigimage.png");
-            TQPixmapCache::insert("my_big_image", new TQPixmap(p));
-        }
-        painter->drawPixmap(0, 0, p);
-    
                                            
- 
-
-
                                            bool TQPixmapCache::find ( const TQString & key, TQPixmap & pm ) [static]
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Looks for a cached pixmap associated with the key in the cache.
-If a pixmap is found, the function sets pm to that pixmap and
-returns TRUE; otherwise leaves pm alone and returns FALSE.
-
                                             Example:
-
                                            -        TQPixmap p;
-        if ( !TQPixmapCache::find("my_big_image", pm) ) {
-            pm.load("bigimage.png");
-            TQPixmapCache::insert("my_big_image", pm);
-        }
-        painter->drawPixmap(0, 0, p);
-    
                                            
- 
-
-
                                            bool TQPixmapCache::insert ( const TQString & key, const TQPixmap & pm ) [static]
-
                                            
-Inserts a copy of the pixmap pm associated with the key into
-the cache.
-
                                             All pixmaps inserted by the TQt library have a key starting with
-"$qt", so your own pixmap keys should never begin "$qt".
-
                                             When a pixmap is inserted and the cache is about to exceed its
-limit, it removes pixmaps until there is enough room for the
-pixmap to be inserted.
-
                                             The oldest pixmaps (least recently accessed in the cache) are
-deleted when more space is needed.
-
                                             
                                            See also setCacheLimit().
-
-
                                            bool TQPixmapCache::insert ( const TQString & key, TQPixmap * pm ) [static]
-
                                            
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                             Inserts the pixmap pm associated with key into the cache.
-Returns TRUE if successful, or FALSE if the pixmap is too big for the cache.
-
                                             
-Note: pm must be allocated on the heap (using new).
-
                                             If this function returns FALSE, you must delete pm yourself.
-
                                             If this function returns TRUE, do not use pm afterwards or
-keep references to it because any other insertions into the cache,
-whether from anywhere in the application or within TQt itself, could cause
-the pixmap to be discarded from the cache and the pointer to
-become invalid.
-
                                             Due to these dangers, we strongly recommend that you use
-insert(const TQString&, const TQPixmap&) instead.
-
-
-
                                            void TQPixmapCache::remove ( const TQString & key ) [static]
-
                                            
-Removes the pixmap associated with key from the cache.
-
-
                                            void TQPixmapCache::setCacheLimit ( int n ) [static]
-
                                            
-Sets the cache limit to n kilobytes.
-
                                             The default setting is 1024 kilobytes.
-
                                             
                                            See also cacheLimit().
-
-
-
                                            
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                            
-
-
                                            Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                            TQt 3.3.8
                                            
-
                                            
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qplatinumstyle-h.html b/doc/html/qplatinumstyle-h.html
index 4b08fed69..5a30c560b 100644
--- a/doc/html/qplatinumstyle-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qplatinumstyle-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qplatinumstyle.h Include File
+ntqplatinumstyle.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                            
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                            TQPlatinumStyle Class Reference
                                            
-
-
                                            The TQPlatinumStyle class provides Mac/Platinum look and feel.
-More...
-
                                            #include <qplatinumstyle.h>
-
                                            Inherits TQWindowsStyle.
-
                                            List of all member functions.
-
                                            Public Members
                                            
-
-
                                            Protected Members
                                            
-
                                              
-
                                            • TQColor mixedColor ( const TQColor & c1, const TQColor & c2 ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void drawRiffles ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColorGroup & g, bool horizontal ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            
-
                                            Detailed Description
                                            
-
-
-The TQPlatinumStyle class provides Mac/Platinum look and feel.
-
                                             
-
                                             This class implements the Platinum look and feel. It's an
-experimental class that tries to resemble a Macinosh-like GUI
-style with the TQStyle system. The emulation is currently far from
-perfect.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQAquaStyle and Widget Appearance and Style.
-
-
                                            Member Function Documentation
                                            
-
                                            TQPlatinumStyle::TQPlatinumStyle ()
-
                                            
-Constructs a TQPlatinumStyle
-
-
                                            void TQPlatinumStyle::drawRiffles ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColorGroup & g, bool horizontal ) const [protected]
-
                                            
-Draws the nifty Macintosh decoration used on sliders using painter
-p and colorgroup g. x, y, w, h and horizontal
-specify the geometry and orientation of the riffles.
-
-
                                            TQColor TQPlatinumStyle::mixedColor ( const TQColor & c1, const TQColor & c2 ) const [protected]
-
                                            
-Mixes two colors c1 and c2 to a new color.
-
-
-
                                            
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                            
-
-
                                            Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                            TQt 3.3.8
                                            
-
                                            
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qpngimagepacker-members.html b/doc/html/qpngimagepacker-members.html
index b4cb8977c..f50edcc1f 100644
--- a/doc/html/qpngimagepacker-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qpngimagepacker-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qpngimagepacker.html b/doc/html/qpngimagepacker.html
index 1b6ed2603..4797264be 100644
--- a/doc/html/qpngimagepacker.html
+++ b/doc/html/qpngimagepacker.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                            The TQPNGImagePacker class creates well-compressed PNG animations.
 More...
-
                                            #include <qpngio.h>
+
                                            #include <ntqpngio.h>
 
                                            List of all member functions.
 
                                            Public Members
                                            
 
                                              
@@ -53,16 +53,16 @@ image from a sequence of TQImages.
 
                                              See also Graphics Classes and Image Processing Classes.
 
 
                                              Member Function Documentation
                                              
-
                                              TQPNGImagePacker::TQPNGImagePacker ( TQIODevice * iod, int storage_depth, int conversionflags )
+
                                              TQPNGImagePacker::TQPNGImagePacker ( TQIODevice * iod, int storage_depth, int conversionflags )
 
                                              
 Creates an image packer that writes PNG data to IO device iod
 using a storage_depth bit encoding (use 8 or 32, depending on
 the desired quality and compression requirements).
 
                                               If the image needs to be modified to fit in a lower-resolution
 result (e.g. converting from 32-bit to 8-bit), use the conversionflags to specify how you'd prefer this to happen.
-
                                               
                                              See also TQt::ImageConversionFlags.
+
                                               
                                              See also TQt::ImageConversionFlags.
 
-
                                              bool TQPNGImagePacker::packImage ( const TQImage & img )
+
                                              bool TQPNGImagePacker::packImage ( const TQImage & img )
 
                                              
 Adds the image img to the PNG animation, analyzing the
 differences between this and the previous image to improve
diff --git a/doc/html/qpngio-h.html b/doc/html/qpngio-h.html
index f6f1aa26f..3dd8321f4 100644
--- a/doc/html/qpngio-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qpngio-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qpngio.h Include File
+ntqpngio.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                              
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                              TQPoint Class Reference
                                              
-
-
                                              The TQPoint class defines a point in the plane.
-More...
-
                                              #include <qpoint.h>
-
                                              List of all member functions.
-
                                              Public Members
                                              
-
-
                                              Related Functions
                                              
-
                                                
-
                                              • bool operator== ( const TQPoint & p1, const TQPoint & p2 )
                                                • 
-
                                              • bool operator!= ( const TQPoint & p1, const TQPoint & p2 )
                                                • 
-
                                              • const TQPoint operator+ ( const TQPoint & p1, const TQPoint & p2 )
                                                • 
-
                                              • const TQPoint operator- ( const TQPoint & p1, const TQPoint & p2 )
                                                • 
-
                                              • const TQPoint operator* ( const TQPoint & p, int c )
                                                • 
-
                                              • const TQPoint operator* ( int c, const TQPoint & p )
                                                • 
-
                                              • const TQPoint operator* ( const TQPoint & p, double c )
                                                • 
-
                                              • const TQPoint operator* ( double c, const TQPoint & p )
                                                • 
-
                                              • const TQPoint operator- ( const TQPoint & p )
                                                • 
-
                                              • const TQPoint operator/ ( const TQPoint & p, int c )
                                                • 
-
                                              • const TQPoint operator/ ( const TQPoint & p, double c )
                                                • 
-
                                              • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQPoint & p )
                                                • 
-
                                              • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQPoint & p )
                                                • 
-
                                              
-
                                              Detailed Description
                                              
-
-
-The TQPoint class defines a point in the plane.
-
                                               
-
-
-
                                               A point is specified by an x coordinate and a y coordinate.
-
                                               The coordinate type is TQCOORD (a 32-bit integer). The minimum
-value of TQCOORD is TQCOORD_MIN (-2147483648) and the maximum
-value is  TQCOORD_MAX (2147483647).
-
                                               The coordinates are accessed by the functions x() and y(); they
-can be set by setX() and setY() or by the reference functions rx()
-and ry().
-
                                               Given a point p, the following statements are all equivalent:
-
                                              -        p.setX( p.x() + 1 );
-        p += TQPoint( 1, 0 );
-        p.rx()++;
-    
                                              
- 
-
                                               A TQPoint can also be used as a vector. Addition and subtraction
-of TQPoints are defined as for vectors (each component is added
-separately). You can divide or multiply a TQPoint by an int or a
-double. The function manhattanLength() gives an inexpensive
-approximation of the length of the TQPoint interpreted as a vector.
-
                                               Example:
-
                                              -        //TQPoint oldPos is defined somewhere else
-        MyWidget::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-        {
-            TQPoint vector = e->pos() - oldPos;
-            if ( vector.manhattanLength() > 3 )
-            ... //mouse has moved more than 3 pixels since oldPos
-        }
-    
                                              
- 
-
                                               TQPoints can be compared for equality or inequality, and they can
-be written to and read from a TQStream.
-
                                               
                                              See also TQPointArray, TQSize, TQRect, Graphics Classes, and Image Processing Classes.
-
-
                                              Member Function Documentation
                                              
-
                                              TQPoint::TQPoint ()
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Constructs a point with coordinates (0, 0) (isNull() returns TRUE).
-
-
                                              TQPoint::TQPoint ( int xpos, int ypos )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Constructs a point with x value xpos and y value ypos.
-
-
                                              bool TQPoint::isNull () const
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Returns TRUE if both the x value and the y value are 0; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
-
                                              int TQPoint::manhattanLength () const
-
                                              
-Returns the sum of the absolute values of x() and y(),
-traditionally known as the "Manhattan length" of the vector from
-the origin to the point. The tradition arises because such
-distances apply to travelers who can only travel on a rectangular
-grid, like the streets of Manhattan.
-
                                               This is a useful, and tquick to calculate, approximation to the
-true length: sqrt(pow(x(),2)+pow(y(),2)).
-
-
                                              TQPoint & TQPoint::operator*= ( int c )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Multiplies this point's x and y by c, and returns a reference
-to this point.
-
                                               Example:
-
                                              -        TQPoint p( -1, 4 );
-        p *= 2;            // p becomes (-2,8)
-    
                                              
- 
-
-
                                              TQPoint & TQPoint::operator*= ( double c )
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               Multiplies this point's x and y by c, and returns a reference
-to this point.
-
                                               Example:
-
                                              -        TQPoint p( -1, 4 );
-        p *= 2.5;          // p becomes (-3,10)
-    
                                              
- 
-
                                               Note that the result is truncated because points are held as
-integers.
-
-
                                              TQPoint & TQPoint::operator+= ( const TQPoint & p )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Adds point p to this point and returns a reference to this
-point.
-
                                               Example:
-
                                              -        TQPoint p(  3, 7 );
-        TQPoint q( -1, 4 );
-        p += q;            // p becomes (2,11)
-    
                                              
- 
-
-
                                              TQPoint & TQPoint::operator-= ( const TQPoint & p )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Subtracts point p from this point and returns a reference to
-this point.
-
                                               Example:
-
                                              -        TQPoint p(  3, 7 );
-        TQPoint q( -1, 4 );
-        p -= q;            // p becomes (4,3)
-    
                                              
- 
-
-
                                              TQPoint & TQPoint::operator/= ( int c )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Divides both x and y by c, and returns a reference to this
-point.
-
                                               Example:
-
                                              -        TQPoint p( -2, 8 );
-        p /= 2;            // p becomes (-1,4)
-    
                                              
- 
-
-
                                              TQPoint & TQPoint::operator/= ( double c )
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               Divides both x and y by c, and returns a reference to this
-point.
-
                                               Example:
-
                                              -        TQPoint p( -3, 10 );
-        p /= 2.5;           // p becomes (-1,4)
-    
                                              
- 
-
                                               Note that the result is truncated because points are held as
-integers.
-
-
                                              TQCOORD & TQPoint::rx ()
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Returns a reference to the x coordinate of the point.
-
                                               Using a reference makes it possible to directly manipulate x.
-
                                               Example:
-
                                              -        TQPoint p( 1, 2 );
-        p.rx()--;         // p becomes (0, 2)
-    
                                              
- 
-
                                               
                                              See also ry().
-
-
                                              TQCOORD & TQPoint::ry ()
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Returns a reference to the y coordinate of the point.
-
                                               Using a reference makes it possible to directly manipulate y.
-
                                               Example:
-
                                              -        TQPoint p( 1, 2 );
-        p.ry()++;         // p becomes (1, 3)
-    
                                              
- 
-
                                               
                                              See also rx().
-
-
                                              void TQPoint::setX ( int x )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Sets the x coordinate of the point to x.
-
                                               
                                              See also x() and setY().
-
-
                                              Example: t14/cannon.cpp.
-
                                              void TQPoint::setY ( int y )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Sets the y coordinate of the point to y.
-
                                               
                                              See also y() and setX().
-
-
                                              Example: t14/cannon.cpp.
-
                                              int TQPoint::x () const
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Returns the x coordinate of the point.
-
                                               
                                              See also setX() and y().
-
-
                                              Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp, chart/canvasview.cpp, dirview/dirview.cpp, fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp, helpsystem/tooltip.cpp, life/life.cpp, and t14/cannon.cpp.
-
                                              int TQPoint::y () const
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Returns the y coordinate of the point.
-
                                               
                                              See also setY() and x().
-
-
                                              Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp, chart/canvasview.cpp, fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp, helpsystem/tooltip.cpp, life/life.cpp, t14/cannon.cpp, and themes/wood.cpp.
-
                                              Related Functions
                                              
-
                                              bool operator!= ( const TQPoint & p1, const TQPoint & p2 )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               
-
                                               Returns TRUE if p1 and p2 are not equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                              const TQPoint operator* ( const TQPoint & p, int c )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               
-
                                               Returns the TQPoint formed by multiplying both components of p
-by c.
-
-
                                              const TQPoint operator* ( int c, const TQPoint & p )
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               
-
                                               Returns the TQPoint formed by multiplying both components of p
-by c.
-
-
                                              const TQPoint operator* ( const TQPoint & p, double c )
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               
-
                                               Returns the TQPoint formed by multiplying both components of p
-by c.
-
                                               Note that the result is truncated because points are held as
-integers.
-
-
                                              const TQPoint operator* ( double c, const TQPoint & p )
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               
-
                                               Returns the TQPoint formed by multiplying both components of p
-by c.
-
                                               Note that the result is truncated because points are held as
-integers.
-
-
                                              const TQPoint operator+ ( const TQPoint & p1, const TQPoint & p2 )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               
-
                                               Returns the sum of p1 and p2; each component is added separately.
-
-
                                              const TQPoint operator- ( const TQPoint & p1, const TQPoint & p2 )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               
-
                                               Returns p2 subtracted from p1; each component is subtracted
-separately.
-
-
                                              const TQPoint operator- ( const TQPoint & p )
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               
-
                                               Returns the TQPoint formed by changing the sign of both components
-of p, equivalent to TQPoint(0,0) - p.
-
-
                                              const TQPoint operator/ ( const TQPoint & p, int c )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               
-
                                               Returns the TQPoint formed by dividing both components of p by
-c.
-
-
                                              const TQPoint operator/ ( const TQPoint & p, double c )
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               
-
                                               Returns the TQPoint formed by dividing both components of p
-by c.
-
                                               Note that the result is truncated because points are held as
-integers.
-
-
                                              TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQPoint & p )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Writes point p to the stream s and returns a reference to
-the stream.
-
                                               
                                              See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
                                              bool operator== ( const TQPoint & p1, const TQPoint & p2 )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               
-
                                               Returns TRUE if p1 and p2 are equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                              TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQPoint & p )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Reads a TQPoint from the stream s into point p and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
                                               
                                              See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
-
                                              
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                              
-
-
                                              Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                              TQt 3.3.8
                                              
-
                                              
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qpointarray-h.html b/doc/html/qpointarray-h.html
index 106a6050a..79941c3e8 100644
--- a/doc/html/qpointarray-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qpointarray-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qpointarray.h Include File
+ntqpointarray.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                              
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                              TQPointArray Class Reference
                                              
-
-
                                              The TQPointArray class provides an array of points.
-More...
-
                                              #include <qpointarray.h>
-
                                              Inherits TQMemArray<TQPoint>.
-
                                              List of all member functions.
-
                                              Public Members
                                              
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQPointArray ()
                                                • 
-
                                              • ~TQPointArray ()
                                                • 
-
                                              • TQPointArray ( int size )
                                                • 
-
                                              • TQPointArray ( const TQPointArray & a )
                                                • 
-
                                              • TQPointArray ( const TQRect & r, bool closed = FALSE )
                                                • 
-
                                              • TQPointArray & operator= ( const TQPointArray & a )
                                                • 
-
                                              • TQPointArray copy () const
                                                • 
-
                                              • void translate ( int dx, int dy )
                                                • 
-
                                              • TQRect boundingRect () const
                                                • 
-
                                              • void point ( uint index, int * x, int * y ) const
                                                • 
-
                                              • TQPoint point ( uint index ) const
                                                • 
-
                                              • void setPoint ( uint index, int x, int y )
                                                • 
-
                                              • void setPoint ( uint i, const TQPoint & p )
                                                • 
-
                                              • bool putPoints ( int index, int nPoints, int firstx, int firsty, ... )
                                                • 
-
                                              • bool putPoints ( int index, int nPoints, const TQPointArray & from, int fromIndex = 0 )
                                                • 
-
                                              • void makeArc ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int a1, int a2 )
                                                • 
-
                                              • void makeEllipse ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
                                                • 
-
                                              • void makeArc ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int a1, int a2, const TQWMatrix & xf )
                                                • 
-
                                              • TQPointArray cubicBezier () const
                                                • 
-
                                              
-
                                              Related Functions
                                              
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQPointArray & a )
                                                • 
-
                                              • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQPointArray & a )
                                                • 
-
                                              
-
                                              Detailed Description
                                              
-
-
-The TQPointArray class provides an array of points.
-
                                               
-
-
-
                                               A TQPointArray is an array of TQPoint objects. In addition to the
-functions provided by TQMemArray, TQPointArray provides some
-point-specific functions.
-
                                               For convenient reading and writing of the point data use
-setPoints(), putPoints(), point(), and setPoint().
-
                                               For geometry operations use boundingRect() and translate(). There
-is also the TQWMatrix::map() function for more general
-transformations of TQPointArrays. You can also create arcs and
-ellipses with makeArc() and makeEllipse().
-
                                               Among others, TQPointArray is used by TQPainter::drawLineSegments(),
-TQPainter::drawPolyline(), TQPainter::drawPolygon() and
-TQPainter::drawCubicBezier().
-
                                               Note that because this class is a TQMemArray, copying an array and
-modifying the copy modifies the original as well, i.e. a shallow copy. If you need a deep copy use copy() or detach(), for example:
-
                                               
                                              -        void drawGiraffe( const TQPointArray & r, TQPainter * p )
-        {
-            TQPointArray tmp = r;
-            tmp.detach();
-            // some code that modifies tmp
-            p->drawPoints( tmp );
-        }
-    
                                              
- 
-
                                               If you forget the tmp.detach(), the const array will be modified.
-
                                               
                                              See also TQPainter, TQWMatrix, TQMemArray, Graphics Classes, Image Processing Classes, and Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes.
-
-
                                              Member Function Documentation
                                              
-
                                              TQPointArray::TQPointArray ()
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Constructs a null point array.
-
                                               
                                              See also isNull().
-
-
                                              TQPointArray::TQPointArray ( int size )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Constructs a point array with room for size points. Makes a
-null array if size == 0.
-
                                               
                                              See also resize() and isNull().
-
-
                                              TQPointArray::TQPointArray ( const TQPointArray & a )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Constructs a shallow copy of the point array a.
-
                                               
                                              See also copy() and detach().
-
-
                                              TQPointArray::TQPointArray ( const TQRect & r, bool closed = FALSE )
-
                                              
-Constructs a point array from the rectangle r.
-
                                               If closed is FALSE, then the point array just contains the
-following four points in the listed order: r.topLeft(),
-r.topRight(), r.bottomRight() and r.bottomLeft().
-
                                               If closed is TRUE, then a fifth point is set to r.topLeft().
-
-
                                              TQPointArray::~TQPointArray ()
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Destroys the point array.
-
-
                                              TQRect TQPointArray::boundingRect () const
-
                                              
-Returns the bounding rectangle of the points in the array, or
-TQRect(0,0,0,0) if the array is empty.
-
-
                                              TQPointArray TQPointArray::copy () const
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Creates a deep copy of the array.
-
                                               
                                              See also detach().
-
-
                                              TQPointArray TQPointArray::cubicBezier () const
-
                                              
-Returns the Bezier points for the four control points in this
-array.
-
-
                                              void TQPointArray::makeArc ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int a1, int a2 )
-
                                              
-Sets the points of the array to those describing an arc of an
-ellipse with size, width w by height h, and position (x,
-y), starting from angle a1 and spanning by angle a2. The
-resulting array has sufficient resolution for pixel accuracy (see
-the overloaded function which takes an additional TQWMatrix
-parameter).
-
                                               Angles are specified in 16ths of a degree, i.e. a full circle
-equals 5760 (16*360). Positive values mean counter-clockwise,
-whereas negative values mean the clockwise direction. Zero degrees
-is at the 3 o'clock position.
-
                                               See the angle diagram.
-
-
                                              void TQPointArray::makeArc ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int a1, int a2, const TQWMatrix & xf )
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               Sets the points of the array to those describing an arc of an
-ellipse with width w and height h and position (x, y),
-starting from angle a1, and spanning angle by a2, and
-transformed by the matrix xf. The resulting array has
-sufficient resolution for pixel accuracy.
-
                                               Angles are specified in 16ths of a degree, i.e. a full circle
-equals 5760 (16*360). Positive values mean counter-clockwise,
-whereas negative values mean the clockwise direction. Zero degrees
-is at the 3 o'clock position.
-
                                               See the angle diagram.
-
-
                                              void TQPointArray::makeEllipse ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
-
                                              
-Sets the points of the array to those describing an ellipse with
-size, width w by height h, and position (x, y).
-
                                               The returned array has sufficient resolution for use as pixels.
-
-
                                              TQPointArray & TQPointArray::operator= ( const TQPointArray & a )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Assigns a shallow copy of a to this point array and returns a
-reference to this point array.
-
                                               Equivalent to assign(a).
-
                                               
                                              See also copy() and detach().
-
-
                                              void TQPointArray::point ( uint index, int * x, int * y ) const
-
                                              
-Reads the coordinates of the point at position index within the
-array and writes them into *x and *y.
-
-
                                              TQPoint TQPointArray::point ( uint index ) const
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               Returns the point at position index within the array.
-
-
                                              bool TQPointArray::putPoints ( int index, int nPoints, int firstx, int firsty, ... )
-
                                              
-Copies nPoints points from the variable argument list into this
-point array from position index, and resizes the point array if
-index+nPoints exceeds the size of the array.
-
                                               Returns TRUE if successful, or FALSE if the array could not be
-resized (typically due to lack of memory).
-
                                               The example code creates an array with three points (4,5), (6,7)
-and (8,9), by expanding the array from 1 to 3 points:
-
                                               
                                              -        TQPointArray a( 1 );
-        a[0] = TQPoint( 4, 5 );
-        a.putPoints( 1, 2, 6,7, 8,9 ); // index == 1, points == 2
-    
                                              
- 
-
                                               This has the same result, but here putPoints overwrites rather
-than extends:
-
                                              -        TQPointArray a( 3 );
-        a.putPoints( 0, 3, 4,5, 0,0, 8,9 );
-        a.putPoints( 1, 1, 6,7 );
-    
                                              
- 
-
                                               The points are given as a sequence of integers, starting with firstx then firsty, and so on.
-
                                               
                                              See also resize().
-
-
                                              bool TQPointArray::putPoints ( int index, int nPoints, const TQPointArray & from, int fromIndex = 0 )
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               This version of the function copies nPoints from from into
-this array, starting at index in this array and fromIndex in
-from. fromIndex is 0 by default.
-
                                               
                                              -        TQPointArray a;
-        a.putPoints( 0, 3, 1,2, 0,0, 5,6 );
-        // a is now the three-point array ( 1,2, 0,0, 5,6 );
-        TQPointArray b;
-        b.putPoints( 0, 3, 4,4, 5,5, 6,6 );
-        // b is now ( 4,4, 5,5, 6,6 );
-        a.putPoints( 2, 3, b );
-        // a is now ( 1,2, 0,0, 4,4, 5,5, 6,6 );
-    
                                              
- 
-
-
                                              void TQPointArray::setPoint ( uint index, int x, int y )
-
                                              
-Sets the point at position index in the array to (x, y).
-
-
                                              Example: themes/wood.cpp.
-
                                              void TQPointArray::setPoint ( uint i, const TQPoint & p )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               Sets the point at array index i to p.
-
-
                                              void TQPointArray::translate ( int dx, int dy )
-
                                              
-Translates all points in the array by (dx, dy).
-
-
                                              Related Functions
                                              
-
                                              TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQPointArray & a )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Writes the point array, a to the stream s and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
                                               
                                              See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
                                              TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQPointArray & a )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Reads a point array, a from the stream s and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
                                               
                                              See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
-
                                              
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                              
-
-
                                              Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                              TQt 3.3.8
                                              
-
                                              
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qpopupmenu-h.html b/doc/html/qpopupmenu-h.html
index 9a5ddb108..22715bdfc 100644
--- a/doc/html/qpopupmenu-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qpopupmenu-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qpopupmenu.h Include File
+ntqpopupmenu.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                              
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                              TQPopupMenu Class Reference
                                              
-
-
                                              The TQPopupMenu class provides a popup menu widget.
-More...
-
                                              #include <qpopupmenu.h>
-
                                              Inherits TQFrame and TQMenuData.
-
                                              List of all member functions.
-
                                              Public Members
                                              
-
-
                                              Signals
                                              
-
-
                                              Important Inherited Members
                                              
-
                                                
-
                                              • int insertItem ( const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                                • 
-
                                              • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                                • 
-
                                              • int insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                                • 
-
                                              • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                                • 
-
                                              • int insertItem ( const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                                • 
-
                                              • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                                • 
-
                                              • int insertItem ( const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                                • 
-
                                              • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                                • 
-
                                              • int insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                                • 
-
                                              • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                                • 
-
                                              • int insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                                • 
-
                                              • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                                • 
-
                                              • int insertItem ( TQWidget * widget, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                                • 
-
                                              • int insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, TQCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                                • 
-
                                              • int insertItem ( TQCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
                                                • 
-
                                              • int insertSeparator ( int index = -1 )
                                                • 
-
                                              • void removeItem ( int id )
                                                • 
-
                                              • void removeItemAt ( int index )
                                                • 
-
                                              • void clear ()
                                                • 
-
                                              • TQKeySequence accel ( int id ) const
                                                • 
-
                                              • void setAccel ( const TQKeySequence & key, int id )
                                                • 
-
                                              • TQIconSet * iconSet ( int id ) const
                                                • 
-
                                              • TQString text ( int id ) const
                                                • 
-
                                              • TQPixmap * pixmap ( int id ) const
                                                • 
-
                                              • void setWhatsThis ( int id, const TQString & text )
                                                • 
-
                                              • TQString whatsThis ( int id ) const
                                                • 
-
                                              • void changeItem ( int id, const TQString & text )
                                                • 
-
                                              • void changeItem ( int id, const TQPixmap & pixmap )
                                                • 
-
                                              • void changeItem ( int id, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text )
                                                • 
-
                                              • void changeItem ( int id, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap )
                                                • 
-
                                              • bool isItemEnabled ( int id ) const
                                                • 
-
                                              • void setItemEnabled ( int id, bool enable )
                                                • 
-
                                              • bool isItemChecked ( int id ) const
                                                • 
-
                                              • void setItemChecked ( int id, bool check )
                                                • 
-
                                              • bool isItemVisible ( int id ) const
                                                • 
-
                                              • void setItemVisible ( int id, bool visible )
                                                • 
-
                                              • bool connectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
                                                • 
-
                                              • bool disconnectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
                                                • 
-
                                              • bool setItemParameter ( int id, int param )
                                                • 
-
                                              • int itemParameter ( int id ) const
                                                • 
-
                                              
-
                                              Properties
                                              
-
                                                
-
                                              • bool checkable - whether the display of check marks on menu items is enabled
                                                • 
-
                                              
-
                                              Protected Members
                                              
-
                                                
-
                                              • int itemHeight ( int row ) const
                                                • 
-
                                              • int itemHeight ( TQMenuItem * mi ) const
                                                • 
-
                                              • void drawItem ( TQPainter * p, int tab_, TQMenuItem * mi, bool act, int x, int y, int w, int h )
                                                • 
-
                                              • virtual void drawContents ( TQPainter * p )
                                                • 
-
                                              • int columns () const
                                                • 
-
                                              
-
                                              Detailed Description
                                              
-
-
-The TQPopupMenu class provides a popup menu widget.
-
                                               
-
-
-
                                               A popup menu widget is a selection menu. It can be either a
-pull-down menu in a menu bar or a standalone context (popup) menu.
-Pull-down menus are shown by the menu bar when the user clicks on
-the respective item or presses the specified shortcut key. Use
-TQMenuBar::insertItem() to insert a popup menu into a menu bar.
-Show a context menu either asynchronously with popup() or
-synchronously with exec().
-
                                               Technically, a popup menu consists of a list of menu items. You
-add items with insertItem(). An item is either a string, a pixmap
-or a custom item that provides its own drawing function (see
-TQCustomMenuItem). In addition, items can have an optional icon
-drawn on the very left side and an accelerator key such as
-"Ctrl+X".
-
                                               There are three kinds of menu items: separators, menu items that
-perform an action and menu items that show a submenu. Separators
-are inserted with insertSeparator(). For submenus, you pass a
-pointer to a TQPopupMenu in your call to insertItem(). All other
-items are considered action items.
-
                                               When inserting action items you usually specify a receiver and a
-slot. The receiver will be notifed whenever the item is selected.
-In addition, TQPopupMenu provides two signals, activated() and
-highlighted(), which signal the identifier of the respective menu
-item. It is sometimes practical to connect several items to one
-slot. To distinguish between them, specify a slot that takes an
-integer argument and use setItemParameter() to associate a unique
-value with each item.
-
                                               You clear a popup menu with clear() and remove single items with
-removeItem() or removeItemAt().
-
                                               A popup menu can display check marks for certain items when
-enabled with setCheckable(TRUE). You check or uncheck items with
-setItemChecked().
-
                                               Items are either enabled or disabled. You toggle their state with
-setItemEnabled(). Just before a popup menu becomes visible, it
-emits the aboutToShow() signal. You can use this signal to set the
-correct enabled/disabled states of all menu items before the user
-sees it. The corresponding aboutToHide() signal is emitted when
-the menu hides again.
-
                                               You can provide What's This? help for single menu items with
-setWhatsThis(). See TQWhatsThis for general information about this
-kind of lightweight online help.
-
                                               For ultimate flexibility, you can also add entire widgets as items
-into a popup menu (for example, a color selector).
-
                                               A TQPopupMenu can also provide a tear-off menu. A tear-off menu is
-a top-level window that contains a copy of the menu. This makes it
-possible for the user to "tear off" frequently used menus and
-position them in a convenient place on the screen. If you want
-that functionality for a certain menu, insert a tear-off handle
-with insertTearOffHandle(). When using tear-off menus, bear in
-mind that the concept isn't typically used on Microsoft Windows so
-users may not be familiar with it. Consider using a TQToolBar
-instead. Tear-off menus cannot contain custom widgets; if the
-original menu contains a custom widget item, this item is omitted.
-
                                               menu/menu.cpp is an example of
-TQMenuBar and TQPopupMenu use.
-
                                               
-
                                                
-
                                               
                                              See also TQMenuBar, GUI Design Handbook: Menu, Drop-Down and
- Pop-Up, Main Window and Related Classes, and Basic Widgets.
-
-
                                              Member Function Documentation
                                              
-
                                              TQPopupMenu::TQPopupMenu ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                              
-Constructs a popup menu called name with parent parent.
-
                                               Although a popup menu is always a top-level widget, if a parent is
-passed the popup menu will be deleted when that parent is
-destroyed (as with any other TQObject).
-
-
                                              TQPopupMenu::~TQPopupMenu ()
-
                                              
-Destroys the popup menu.
-
-
                                              void TQPopupMenu::aboutToHide () [signal]
-
                                              
-
-
                                               This signal is emitted just before the popup menu is hidden after
-it has been displayed.
-
                                               Warning: Do not open a widget in a slot connected to this signal.
-
                                               
                                              See also aboutToShow(), setItemEnabled(), setItemChecked(), insertItem(), and removeItem().
-
-
                                              void TQPopupMenu::aboutToShow () [signal]
-
                                              
-
-
                                               This signal is emitted just before the popup menu is displayed.
-You can connect it to any slot that sets up the menu contents
-(e.g. to ensure that the right items are enabled).
-
                                               
                                              See also aboutToHide(), setItemEnabled(), setItemChecked(), insertItem(), and removeItem().
-
-
                                              Example: mdi/application.cpp.
-
                                              TQKeySequence TQMenuData::accel ( int id ) const
-
                                              
-Returns the accelerator key that has been defined for the menu
-item id, or 0 if it has no accelerator key or if there is no
-such menu item.
-
                                               
                                              See also setAccel(), TQAccel, and qnamespace.h.
-
-
                                              void TQPopupMenu::activated ( int id ) [signal]
-
                                              
-
-
                                               This signal is emitted when a menu item is selected; id is the
-id of the selected item.
-
                                               Normally, you connect each menu item to a single slot using
-TQMenuData::insertItem(), but sometimes you will want to connect
-several items to a single slot (most often if the user selects
-from an array). This signal is useful in such cases.
-
                                               
                                              See also highlighted() and TQMenuData::insertItem().
-
-
                                              Examples: grapher/grapher.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, qdir/qdir.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-
                                              void TQMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const TQString & text )
-
                                              
-Changes the text of the menu item id to text. If the item
-has an icon, the icon remains unchanged.
-
                                               
                                              See also text().
-
-
                                              void TQMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const TQPixmap & pixmap )
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               Changes the pixmap of the menu item id to the pixmap pixmap.
-If the item has an icon, the icon is unchanged.
-
                                               
                                              See also pixmap().
-
-
                                              void TQMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text )
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               Changes the iconset and text of the menu item id to the icon
-and text respectively.
-
                                               
                                              See also pixmap().
-
-
                                              void TQMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap )
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               Changes the iconset and pixmap of the menu item id to icon
-and pixmap respectively.
-
                                               
                                              See also pixmap().
-
-
                                              void TQMenuData::clear ()
-
                                              
-Removes all menu items.
-
                                               
                                              See also removeItem() and removeItemAt().
-
-
                                              Examples: mdi/application.cpp and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
-
                                              int TQPopupMenu::columns () const [protected]
-
                                              
-If a popup menu does not fit on the screen it lays itself out so
-that it does fit. It is style dependent what layout means (for
-example, on Windows it will use multiple columns).
-
                                               This functions returns the number of columns necessary.
-
                                               
                                              See also sizeHint.
-
-
                                              bool TQMenuData::connectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
-
                                              
-Connects the menu item with identifier id to receiver's member slot or signal.
-
                                               The receiver's slot (or signal) is activated when the menu item is
-activated.
-
                                               
                                              See also disconnectItem() and setItemParameter().
-
-
                                              Example: menu/menu.cpp.
-
                                              bool TQMenuData::disconnectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
-
                                              
-Disconnects the receiver's member from the menu item with
-identifier id.
-
                                               All connections are removed when the menu data object is
-destroyed.
-
                                               
                                              See also connectItem() and setItemParameter().
-
-
                                              void TQPopupMenu::drawContents ( TQPainter * p ) [virtual protected]
-
                                              
-Draws all menu items using painter p.
-
-
                                              Reimplemented from TQFrame.
-
                                              void TQPopupMenu::drawItem ( TQPainter * p, int tab_, TQMenuItem * mi, bool act, int x, int y, int w, int h ) [protected]
-
                                              
-Draws menu item mi in the area x, y, w, h, using
-painter p. The item is drawn active if act is TRUE or drawn
-inactive if act is FALSE. The rightmost tab_ pixels are used
-for accelerator text.
-
                                               
                                              See also TQStyle::drawControl().
-
-
                                              int TQPopupMenu::exec ()
-
                                              
-Executes this popup synchronously.
-
                                               This is equivalent to exec(mapToGlobal(TQPoint(0,0))). In most
-situations you'll want to specify the position yourself, for
-example at the current mouse position:
-
                                              -        exec(TQCursor::pos());
-    
                                              
- 
-or aligned to a widget:
-
                                              -        exec(somewidget.mapToGlobal(TQPoint(0,0)));
-    
                                              
- 
-
-
                                              Examples: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, and scribble/scribble.cpp.
-
                                              int TQPopupMenu::exec ( const TQPoint & pos, int indexAtPoint = 0 )
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               Executes this popup synchronously.
-
                                               Opens the popup menu so that the item number indexAtPoint will
-be at the specified global position pos. To translate a
-widget's local coordinates into global coordinates, use
-TQWidget::mapToGlobal().
-
                                               The return code is the id of the selected item in either the popup
-menu or one of its submenus, or -1 if no item is selected
-(normally because the user pressed Esc).
-
                                               Note that all signals are emitted as usual. If you connect a menu
-item to a slot and call the menu's exec(), you get the result both
-via the signal-slot connection and in the return value of exec().
-
                                               Common usage is to position the popup at the current mouse
-position:
-
                                              -        exec( TQCursor::pos() );
-    
                                              
- 
-or aligned to a widget:
-
                                              -        exec( somewidget.mapToGlobal(TQPoint(0, 0)) );
-    
                                              
- 
-
                                               When positioning a popup with exec() or popup(), bear in mind that
-you cannot rely on the popup menu's current size(). For
-performance reasons, the popup adapts its size only when
-necessary. So in many cases, the size before and after the show is
-different. Instead, use sizeHint(). It calculates the proper size
-depending on the menu's current contents.
-
                                               
                                              See also popup() and sizeHint.
-
-
                                              void TQPopupMenu::highlighted ( int id ) [signal]
-
                                              
-
-
                                               This signal is emitted when a menu item is highlighted; id is
-the id of the highlighted item.
-
                                               
                                              See also activated() and TQMenuData::insertItem().
-
-
                                              TQIconSet * TQMenuData::iconSet ( int id ) const
-
                                              
-Returns the icon set that has been set for menu item id, or 0
-if no icon set has been set.
-
                                               
                                              See also changeItem(), text(), and pixmap().
-
-
                                              int TQPopupMenu::idAt ( int index ) const
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Returns the identifier of the menu item at position index in
-the internal list, or -1 if index is out of range.
-
                                               
                                              See also TQMenuData::setId() and TQMenuData::indexOf().
-
-
                                              Example: scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
-
                                              int TQPopupMenu::idAt ( const TQPoint & pos ) const
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               Returns the id of the item at pos, or -1 if there is no item
-there or if it is a separator.
-
-
                                              int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                              
-The family of insertItem() functions inserts menu items into a
-popup menu or a menu bar.
-
                                               A menu item is usually either a text string or a pixmap, both with
-an optional icon or keyboard accelerator. For special cases it is
-also possible to insert custom items (see TQCustomMenuItem) or
-even widgets into popup menus.
-
                                               Some insertItem() members take a popup menu as an additional
-argument. Use this to insert submenus into existing menus or
-pulldown menus into a menu bar.
-
                                               The number of insert functions may look confusing, but they are
-actually quite simple to use.
-
                                               This default version inserts a menu item with the text text,
-the accelerator key accel, an id and an optional index and
-connects it to the slot member in the object receiver.
-
                                               Example:
-
                                              -        TQMenuBar   *mainMenu = new TQMenuBar;
-        TQPopupMenu *fileMenu = new TQPopupMenu;
-        fileMenu->insertItem( "New",  myView, SLOT(newFile()), CTRL+Key_N );
-        fileMenu->insertItem( "Open", myView, SLOT(open()),    CTRL+Key_O );
-        mainMenu->insertItem( "File", fileMenu );
-    
                                              
- 
-
                                               Not all insert functions take an object/slot parameter or an
-accelerator key. Use connectItem() and setAccel() on those items.
-
                                               If you need to translate accelerators, use tr() with the text and
-accelerator. (For translations use a string key
-    sequence.):
-
                                              -        fileMenu->insertItem( tr("Open"), myView, SLOT(open()),
-                              tr("Ctrl+O") );
-    
                                              
- 
-
                                               In the example above, pressing Ctrl+O or selecting "Open" from the
-menu activates the myView->open() function.
-
                                               Some insert functions take a TQIconSet parameter to specify the
-little menu item icon. Note that you can always pass a TQPixmap
-object instead.
-
                                               The id specifies the identification number associated with the
-menu item. Note that only positive values are valid, as a negative
-value will make TQt select a unique id for the item.
-
                                               The index specifies the position in the menu. The menu item is
-appended at the end of the list if index is negative.
-
                                               Note that keyboard accelerators in TQt are not application-global,
-instead they are bound to a certain top-level window. For example,
-accelerators in TQPopupMenu items only work for menus that are
-associated with a certain window. This is true for popup menus
-that live in a menu bar since their accelerators will then be
-installed in the menu bar itself. This also applies to stand-alone
-popup menus that have a top-level widget in their parentWidget()
-chain. The menu will then install its accelerator object on that
-top-level widget. For all other cases use an independent TQAccel
-object.
-
                                               Warning: Be careful when passing a literal 0 to insertItem()
-because some C++ compilers choose the wrong overloaded function.
-Cast the 0 to what you mean, e.g. (TQObject*)0.
-
                                               Warning: On Mac OS X, items that connect to a slot that are inserted into a
-menubar will not function as we use the native menubar that knows nothing
-about signals or slots. Instead insert the items into a popup menu and
-insert the popup menu into the menubar. This may be fixed in a future TQt
-version.
-
                                               Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                               
                                              See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem(), TQAccel, and qnamespace.h.
-
-
                                              Examples: addressbook/mainwindow.cpp, canvas/canvas.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, and sound/sound.cpp.
-
                                              int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               Inserts a menu item with icon icon, text text, accelerator
-accel, optional id id, and optional index position. The
-menu item is connected it to the receiver's member slot. The
-icon will be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
-
                                               Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                               
                                              See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem(), TQAccel, and qnamespace.h.
-
-
                                              int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               Inserts a menu item with pixmap pixmap, accelerator accel,
-optional id id, and optional index position. The menu item
-is connected it to the receiver's member slot. The icon will
-be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
-
                                               To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap
-should provide a mask (see TQPixmap::mask()).
-
                                               Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                               
                                              See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-
-
                                              int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const TQKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               Inserts a menu item with icon icon, pixmap pixmap,
-accelerator accel, optional id id, and optional index
-position. The icon will be displayed to the left of the pixmap in
-the item. The item is connected to the member slot in the receiver object.
-
                                               To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap
-should provide a mask (see TQPixmap::mask()).
-
                                               Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                               
                                              See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem(), TQAccel, and qnamespace.h.
-
-
                                              int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               Inserts a menu item with text text, optional id id, and
-optional index position.
-
                                               Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                               
                                              See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-
-
                                              int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               Inserts a menu item with icon icon, text text, optional id
-id, and optional index position. The icon will be displayed
-to the left of the text in the item.
-
                                               Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                               
                                              See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-
-
                                              int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               Inserts a menu item with text text, submenu popup, optional
-id id, and optional index position.
-
                                               The popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent
-widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when
-the menu is deleted.
-
                                               Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                               
                                              See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-
-
                                              int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               Inserts a menu item with icon icon, text text, submenu popup, optional id id, and optional index position. The icon
-will be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
-
                                               The popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent
-widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when
-the menu is deleted.
-
                                               Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                               
                                              See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-
-
                                              int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               Inserts a menu item with pixmap pixmap, optional id id, and
-optional index position.
-
                                               To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap
-should provide a mask (see TQPixmap::mask()).
-
                                               Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                               
                                              See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-
-
                                              int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               Inserts a menu item with icon icon, pixmap pixmap, optional
-id id, and optional index position. The icon will be
-displayed to the left of the pixmap in the item.
-
                                               Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                               
                                              See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-
-
                                              int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               Inserts a menu item with pixmap pixmap, submenu popup,
-optional id id, and optional index position.
-
                                               The popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent
-widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when
-the menu is deleted.
-
                                               Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                               
                                              See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-
-
                                              int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               Inserts a menu item with icon icon, pixmap pixmap submenu popup, optional id id, and optional index position. The icon
-will be displayed to the left of the pixmap in the item.
-
                                               The popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent
-widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when
-the menu is deleted.
-
                                               Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                               
                                              See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-
-
                                              int TQMenuData::insertItem ( TQWidget * widget, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               Inserts a menu item that consists of the widget widget with
-optional id id, and optional index position.
-
                                               Ownership of widget is transferred to the popup menu or to the
-menu bar.
-
                                               Theoretically, any widget can be inserted into a popup menu. In
-practice, this only makes sense with certain widgets.
-
                                               If a widget is not focus-enabled (see
-TQWidget::isFocusEnabled()), the menu treats it as a separator;
-this means that the item is not selectable and will never get
-focus. In this way you can, for example, simply insert a TQLabel if
-you need a popup menu with a title.
-
                                               If the widget is focus-enabled it will get focus when the user
-traverses the popup menu with the arrow keys. If the widget does
-not accept ArrowUp and ArrowDown in its key event handler,
-the focus will move back to the menu when the respective arrow key
-is hit one more time. This works with a TQLineEdit, for example. If
-the widget accepts the arrow key itself, it must also provide the
-possibility to put the focus back on the menu again by calling
-TQWidget::focusNextPrevChild(). Futhermore, if the embedded widget
-closes the menu when the user made a selection, this can be done
-safely by calling:
-
                                              -        if ( isVisible() &&
-             parentWidget() &&
-             parentWidget()->inherits("TQPopupMenu") )
-            parentWidget()->close();
-    
                                              
- 
-
                                               Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                               
                                              See also removeItem().
-
-
                                              int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, TQCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               Inserts a custom menu item custom with an icon and with
-optional id id, and optional index position.
-
                                               This only works with popup menus. It is not supported for menu
-bars. Ownership of custom is transferred to the popup menu.
-
                                               If you want to connect a custom item to a slot, use connectItem().
-
                                               Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                               
                                              See also connectItem(), removeItem(), and TQCustomMenuItem.
-
-
                                              int TQMenuData::insertItem ( TQCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               Inserts a custom menu item custom with optional id id, and
-optional index position.
-
                                               This only works with popup menus. It is not supported for menu
-bars. Ownership of custom is transferred to the popup menu.
-
                                               If you want to connect a custom item to a slot, use connectItem().
-
                                               Returns the allocated menu identifier number (id if id >= 0).
-
                                               
                                              See also connectItem(), removeItem(), and TQCustomMenuItem.
-
-
                                              int TQMenuData::insertSeparator ( int index = -1 )
-
                                              
-Inserts a separator at position index, and returns the menu identifier
-number allocated to it. The separator becomes the last menu item if
-index is negative.
-
                                               In a popup menu a separator is rendered as a horizontal line. In a
-Motif menu bar a separator is spacing, so the rest of the items
-(normally just "Help") are drawn right-justified. In a Windows
-menu bar separators are ignored (to comply with the Windows style
-guidelines).
-
-
                                              Examples: addressbook/mainwindow.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, and sound/sound.cpp.
-
                                              int TQPopupMenu::insertTearOffHandle ( int id = -1, int index = -1 )
-
                                              
-Inserts a tear-off handle into the menu. A tear-off handle is a
-special menu item that creates a copy of the menu when the menu is
-selected. This "torn-off" copy lives in a separate window. It
-contains the same menu items as the original menu, with the
-exception of the tear-off handle.
-
                                               The handle item is assigned the identifier id or an
-automatically generated identifier if id is < 0. The generated
-identifiers (negative integers) are guaranteed to be unique within
-the entire application.
-
                                               The index specifies the position in the menu. The tear-off
-handle is appended at the end of the list if index is negative.
-
-
                                              Example: menu/menu.cpp.
-
                                              bool TQPopupMenu::isCheckable () const
-
                                              Returns TRUE if the display of check marks on menu items is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "checkable" property for details.
-
                                              bool TQMenuData::isItemChecked ( int id ) const
-
                                              
-Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id id has been checked;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                               
                                              See also setItemChecked().
-
-
                                              Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-
                                              bool TQMenuData::isItemEnabled ( int id ) const
-
                                              
-Returns TRUE if the item with identifier id is enabled;
-otherwise returns FALSE
-
                                               
                                              See also setItemEnabled() and isItemVisible().
-
-
                                              bool TQMenuData::isItemVisible ( int id ) const
-
                                              
-Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id id is  visible;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                               
                                              See also setItemVisible().
-
-
                                              int TQPopupMenu::itemHeight ( int row ) const [protected]
-
                                              
-Calculates the height in pixels of the item in row row.
-
-
                                              int TQPopupMenu::itemHeight ( TQMenuItem * mi ) const [protected]
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               Calculates the height in pixels of the menu item mi.
-
-
                                              int TQMenuData::itemParameter ( int id ) const
-
                                              
-Returns the parameter of the activation signal of item id.
-
                                               If no parameter has been specified for this item with
-setItemParameter(), the value defaults to id.
-
                                               
                                              See also connectItem(), disconnectItem(), and setItemParameter().
-
-
                                              TQPixmap * TQMenuData::pixmap ( int id ) const
-
                                              
-Returns the pixmap that has been set for menu item id, or 0 if
-no pixmap has been set.
-
                                               
                                              See also changeItem(), text(), and iconSet().
-
-
                                              void TQPopupMenu::popup ( const TQPoint & pos, int indexAtPoint = -1 )
-
                                              
-Displays the popup menu so that the item number indexAtPoint
-will be at the specified global position pos. To translate a
-widget's local coordinates into global coordinates, use
-TQWidget::mapToGlobal().
-
                                               When positioning a popup with exec() or popup(), bear in mind that
-you cannot rely on the popup menu's current size(). For
-performance reasons, the popup adapts its size only when
-necessary, so in many cases, the size before and after the show is
-different. Instead, use sizeHint(). It calculates the proper size
-depending on the menu's current contents.
-
-
                                              Example: listviews/listviews.cpp.
-
                                              void TQMenuData::removeItem ( int id )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Removes the menu item that has the identifier id.
-
                                               
                                              See also removeItemAt() and clear().
-
-
                                              Example: chart/chartform.cpp.
-
                                              void TQMenuData::removeItemAt ( int index )
-
                                              
-Removes the menu item at position index.
-
                                               
                                              See also removeItem() and clear().
-
-
                                              void TQMenuData::setAccel ( const TQKeySequence & key, int id )
-
                                              
-Sets the accelerator key for the menu item id to key.
-
                                               An accelerator key consists of a key code and a combination of the
-modifiers SHIFT, CTRL, ALT or UNICODE_ACCEL (OR'ed or
-added). The header file qnamespace.h contains a list of key
-codes.
-
                                               Defining an accelerator key produces a text that is added to the
-menu item; for instance, CTRL + Key_O produces "Ctrl+O". The
-text is formatted differently for different platforms.
-
                                               Note that keyboard accelerators in TQt are not application-global,
-instead they are bound to a certain top-level window. For example,
-accelerators in TQPopupMenu items only work for menus that are
-associated with a certain window. This is true for popup menus
-that live in a menu bar since their accelerators will then be
-installed in the menu bar itself. This also applies to stand-alone
-popup menus that have a top-level widget in their parentWidget()
-chain. The menu will then install its accelerator object on that
-top-level widget. For all other cases use an independent TQAccel
-object.
-
                                               Example:
-
                                              -        TQMenuBar *mainMenu = new TQMenuBar;
-        TQPopupMenu *fileMenu = new TQPopupMenu;       // file sub menu
-        fileMenu->insertItem( "Open Document", 67 ); // add "Open" item
-        fileMenu->setAccel( CTRL + Key_O, 67 );      // Ctrl+O to open
-        fileMenu->insertItem( "Quit", 69 );          // add "Quit" item
-        fileMenu->setAccel( CTRL + ALT + Key_Delete, 69 ); // add Alt+Del to quit
-        mainMenu->insertItem( "File", fileMenu );    // add the file menu
-    
                                              
- 
-
                                               If you need to translate accelerators, use tr() with a string:
-
                                              -        fileMenu->setAccel( tr("Ctrl+O"), 67 );
-    
                                              
- 
-
                                               You can also specify the accelerator in the insertItem() function.
-You may prefer to use TQAction to associate accelerators with menu
-items.
-
                                               
                                              See also accel(), insertItem(), TQAccel, and TQAction.
-
-
                                              Example: menu/menu.cpp.
-
                                              void TQPopupMenu::setActiveItem ( int i ) [virtual]
-
                                              
-Sets the currently active item to index i and repaints as necessary.
-
-
                                              void TQPopupMenu::setCheckable ( bool ) [virtual]
-
                                              Sets whether the display of check marks on menu items is enabled.
-See the "checkable" property for details.
-
                                              void TQMenuData::setItemChecked ( int id, bool check )
-
                                              
-If check is TRUE, checks the menu item with id id; otherwise
-unchecks the menu item with id id. Calls
-TQPopupMenu::setCheckable( TRUE ) if necessary.
-
                                               
                                              See also isItemChecked().
-
-
                                              Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp, grapher/grapher.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-
                                              void TQMenuData::setItemEnabled ( int id, bool enable )
-
                                              
-If enable is TRUE, enables the menu item with identifier id;
-otherwise disables the menu item with identifier id.
-
                                               
                                              See also isItemEnabled().
-
-
                                              Examples: mdi/application.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-
                                              bool TQMenuData::setItemParameter ( int id, int param )
-
                                              
-Sets the parameter of the activation signal of item id to param.
-
                                               If any receiver takes an integer parameter, this value is passed.
-
                                               
                                              See also connectItem(), disconnectItem(), and itemParameter().
-
-
                                              Example: mdi/application.cpp.
-
                                              void TQMenuData::setItemVisible ( int id, bool visible )
-
                                              
-If visible is TRUE, shows the menu item with id id; otherwise
-hides the menu item with id id.
-
                                               
                                              See also isItemVisible() and isItemEnabled().
-
-
                                              void TQMenuData::setWhatsThis ( int id, const TQString & text )
-
                                              
-Sets text as What's This help for the menu item with identifier
-id.
-
                                               
                                              See also whatsThis().
-
-
                                              Examples: application/application.cpp, helpsystem/mainwindow.cpp, and mdi/application.cpp.
-
                                              TQString TQMenuData::text ( int id ) const
-
                                              
-Returns the text that has been set for menu item id, or
-TQString::null if no text has been set.
-
                                               
                                              See also changeItem(), pixmap(), and iconSet().
-
-
                                              Examples: qdir/qdir.cpp and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-
                                              void TQPopupMenu::updateItem ( int id ) [virtual]
-
                                              
-Updates the item with identity id.
-
-
                                              Reimplemented from TQMenuData.
-
                                              TQString TQMenuData::whatsThis ( int id ) const
-
                                              
-Returns the What's This help text for the item with identifier id or TQString::null if no text has yet been defined.
-
                                               
                                              See also setWhatsThis().
-
-
                                              Property Documentation
                                              
-
                                              bool checkable
                                              
-
                                              This property holds whether the display of check marks on menu items is enabled.
-
                                              When TRUE, the display of check marks on menu items is enabled.
-Checking is always enabled when in Windows-style.
-
                                               
                                              See also TQMenuData::setItemChecked().
-
-
                                              Set this property's value with setCheckable() and get this property's value with isCheckable().
-
-
                                              
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                              
-
-
                                              Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                              TQt 3.3.8
                                              
-
                                              
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qprinter-h.html b/doc/html/qprinter-h.html
index fe7a02d5c..574f410c9 100644
--- a/doc/html/qprinter-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qprinter-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qprinter.h Include File
+ntqprinter.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                              
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                              TQPrinter Class Reference
                                              
-
-
                                              The TQPrinter class is a paint device that paints on a printer.
-More...
-
                                              #include <qprinter.h>
-
                                              Inherits TQPaintDevice.
-
                                              List of all member functions.
-
                                              Public Members
                                              
-
-
                                              Detailed Description
                                              
-
-
-The TQPrinter class is a paint device that paints on a printer.
-
                                               
-
-
-
                                               On Windows it uses the built-in printer drivers. On X11 it
-generates postscript and sends that to lpr, lp, or another print
-command.
-
                                               TQPrinter is used in much the same way as TQWidget and TQPixmap are
-used. The big difference is that you must keep track of the pages.
-
                                               TQPrinter supports a number of settable parameters, most of which
-can be changed by the end user when the application calls
-TQPrinter::setup().
-
                                               The most important parameters are:
-
                                                
-
                                              •  setOrientation() tells TQPrinter which page orientation to use (virtual).
-
                                              •  setPageSize() tells TQPrinter what page size to expect from the
-printer.
-
                                              •  setResolution() tells TQPrinter what resolution you wish the
-printer to provide (in dpi).
-
                                              •  setFullPage() tells TQPrinter whether you want to deal with the
-full page or just with the part the printer can draw on. The
-default is FALSE, so that by default you should be able to paint
-on (0,0). If TRUE the origin of the coordinate system will be in
-the top left corner of the paper and most probably the printer
-will not be able to paint something there due to it's physical
-margins.
-
                                              •  setNumCopies() tells TQPrinter how many copies of the document
-it should print.
-
                                              •  setMinMax() tells TQPrinter and TQPrintDialog what the allowed
-range for fromPage() and toPage() are.
-
                                              
-
                                               Except where noted, you can only call the set functions before
-setup(), or between TQPainter::end() and setup(). (Some may take
-effect between setup() and begin(), or between begin() and end(),
-but that's strictly undocumented and such behaviour may differ
-depending on platform.)
-
                                               There are also some settings that the user sets (through the
-printer dialog) and that applications are expected to obey:
-
                                               
                                                
-
                                                 
                                              •  pageOrder() tells the application program whether to print
-first-page-first or last-page-first.
-
                                                 
                                              •  colorMode() tells the application program whether to print in
-color or grayscale. (If you print in color and the printer does
-not support color, TQt will try to approximate. The document may
-take longer to print, but the quality should not be made visibly
-poorer.)
-
                                                 
                                              •  fromPage() and toPage() indicate what pages the application
-program should print.
-
                                                 
                                              •  paperSource() tells the application progam which paper source
-to print from.
-
                                                 
                                              
-
                                               You can of course call these functions to establish defaults
-before you ask the user through TQPrinter::setup().
-
                                               Once you start printing, calling newPage() is essential. You will
-probably also need to look at the TQPaintDeviceMetrics for the
-printer (see the print
-    function in the Application walk-through). In previous versions,
-paint device metrics were valid only after the TQPrinter has been set
-up, i.e. after setup() has returned successfully. This is no longer
-the case and paint device metrics can be requested safely before set up.
-
                                               If you want to abort the print job, abort() will try its best to
-stop printing. It may cancel the entire job or just some of it.
-
                                               
-
                                               If your current locale converts "," to ".", you will need to set
-a locale (via the standard C setlocale() function) that doen't do this
-before using TQPrinter. The "C" locale works well for this.
-
                                               The TrueType font embedding for TQt's postscript driver uses code
-by David Chappell of Trinity College Computing Center.
-
                                               
-
                                               Copyright 1995, Trinity College Computing Center.
-Written by David Chappell.
-
                                               Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and
-its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
-granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
-copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission
-notice appear in supporting documentation. This software is
-provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-
                                               TrueType font support. These functions allow PPR to generate
-PostScript fonts from Microsoft compatible TrueType font files.
-
                                               The functions in this file do most of the work to convert a
-TrueType font to a type 3 PostScript font.
-
                                               Most of the material in this file is derived from a program called
-"ttf2ps" which L. S. Ng posted to the usenet news group
-"comp.sources.postscript". The author did not provide a copyright
-notice or indicate any restrictions on use.
-
                                               Last revised 11 July 1995.
-
                                               
                                              See also Graphics Classes and Image Processing Classes.
-
-
                                              Member Type Documentation
                                              
-
                                              TQPrinter::ColorMode
                                              
-
-
                                               This enum type is used to indicate whether TQPrinter should print
-in color or not.
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQPrinter::Color - print in color if available, otherwise in grayscale.
-
                                              • TQPrinter::GrayScale - print in grayscale, even on color printers.
-Might be a little faster than Color. This is the default.
-
                                              
-
                                              TQPrinter::Orientation
                                              
-
-
                                               This enum type (not to be confused with TQt::Orientation) is used
-to specify each page's orientation.
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQPrinter::Portrait - the page's height is greater than its width (the
-default).
-
                                              • TQPrinter::Landscape - the page's width is greater than its height.
-
                                               This type interacts with TQPrinter::PageSize and
-TQPrinter::setFullPage() to determine the final size of the page
-available to the application.
-
-
                                              TQPrinter::PageOrder
                                              
-
-
                                               This enum type is used by TQPrinter to tell the application program
-how to print.
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQPrinter::FirstPageFirst - the lowest-numbered page should be printed
-first.
-
                                              • TQPrinter::LastPageFirst - the highest-numbered page should be printed
-first.
-
                                              
-
                                              TQPrinter::PageSize
                                              
-
-
                                               This enum type specifies what paper size TQPrinter should use.
-TQPrinter does not check that the paper size is available; it just
-uses this information, together with TQPrinter::Orientation and
-TQPrinter::setFullPage(), to determine the printable area (see
-TQPaintDeviceMetrics).
-
                                               The defined sizes (with setFullPage(TRUE)) are:
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQPrinter::A0 - 841 x 1189 mm This value is not supported on windows.
-
                                              • TQPrinter::A1 - 594 x 841 mm This value is not supported on windows.
-
                                              • TQPrinter::A2 - 420 x 594 mm
-
                                              • TQPrinter::A3 - 297 x 420 mm
-
                                              • TQPrinter::A4 - 210 x 297 mm, 8.26 x 11.7 inches
-
                                              • TQPrinter::A5 - 148 x 210 mm
-
                                              • TQPrinter::A6 - 105 x 148 mm
-
                                              • TQPrinter::A7 - 74 x 105 mm
-
                                              • TQPrinter::A8 - 52 x 74 mm
-
                                              • TQPrinter::A9 - 37 x 52 mm
-
                                              • TQPrinter::B0 - 1030 x 1456 mm
-
                                              • TQPrinter::B1 - 728 x 1030 mm
-
                                              • TQPrinter::B10 - 32 x 45 mm
-
                                              • TQPrinter::B2 - 515 x 728 mm
-
                                              • TQPrinter::B3 - 364 x 515 mm
-
                                              • TQPrinter::B4 - 257 x 364 mm
-
                                              • TQPrinter::B5 - 182 x 257 mm, 7.17 x 10.13 inches
-
                                              • TQPrinter::B6 - 128 x 182 mm
-
                                              • TQPrinter::B7 - 91 x 128 mm
-
                                              • TQPrinter::B8 - 64 x 91 mm
-
                                              • TQPrinter::B9 - 45 x 64 mm
-
                                              • TQPrinter::C5E - 163 x 229 mm
-
                                              • TQPrinter::Comm10E - 105 x 241 mm, US Common #10 Envelope
-
                                              • TQPrinter::DLE - 110 x 220 mm
-
                                              • TQPrinter::Executive - 7.5 x 10 inches, 191 x 254 mm
-
                                              • TQPrinter::Folio - 210 x 330 mm
-
                                              • TQPrinter::Ledger - 432 x 279 mm
-
                                              • TQPrinter::Legal - 8.5 x 14 inches, 216 x 356 mm
-
                                              • TQPrinter::Letter - 8.5 x 11 inches, 216 x 279 mm
-
                                              • TQPrinter::Tabloid - 279 x 432 mm
-
                                              • TQPrinter::Custom
-
                                              • TQPrinter::NPageSize - (internal)
-
                                               With setFullPage(FALSE) (the default), the metrics will be a bit
-smaller; how much depends on the printer in use.
-
-
                                              TQPrinter::PaperSource
                                              
-
-
                                               This enum type specifies what paper source TQPrinter is to use.
-TQPrinter does not check that the paper source is available; it
-just uses this information to try and set the paper source.
-Whether it will set the paper source depends on whether the
-printer has that particular source.
-
                                               Note: this is currently only implemented for Windows.
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQPrinter::OnlyOne
-
                                              • TQPrinter::Lower
-
                                              • TQPrinter::Middle
-
                                              • TQPrinter::Manual
-
                                              • TQPrinter::Envelope
-
                                              • TQPrinter::EnvelopeManual
-
                                              • TQPrinter::Auto
-
                                              • TQPrinter::Tractor
-
                                              • TQPrinter::SmallFormat
-
                                              • TQPrinter::LargeFormat
-
                                              • TQPrinter::LargeCapacity
-
                                              • TQPrinter::Cassette
-
                                              • TQPrinter::FormSource
-
                                              
-
                                              TQPrinter::PrintRange
                                              
-
-
                                               This enum is used to specify which print range the application
-should use to print.
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQPrinter::AllPages - All pages should be printed
-
                                              • TQPrinter::Selection - Only the selection should be printed.
-
                                              • TQPrinter::PageRange - From page, to page option.
-
                                               
                                              See also setPrintRange() and printRange().
-
-
                                              TQPrinter::PrinterMode
                                              
-
-
                                               This enum describes the mode the printer should work in. It
-basically presets a certain resolution and working mode.
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQPrinter::ScreenResolution - Sets the resolution of the print device to
-the screen resolution. This has the big advantage that the results
-obtained when painting on the printer will match more or less
-exactly the visible output on the screen. It is the easiest to
-use, as font metrics on the screen and on the printer are the
-same. This is the default value. ScreenResolution will produce a
-lower quality output than HighResolution and should only be used
-for drafts.
-
                                              • TQPrinter::PrinterResolution - Use the physical resolution of the
-printer on Windows. On Unix, set the postscript resolution to 72
-dpi.
-
                                              • TQPrinter::HighResolution - Use printer resolution on windows, set the
-resolution of the postscript driver to 600dpi.
-
                                              • TQPrinter::Compatible - Almost the same as PrinterResolution, but keeps
-some peculiarities of the TQt 2.x printer driver. This is useful
-for applications ported from TQt 2.x to TQt 3.x.
-
                                              
-
                                              TQPrinter::PrinterOption
                                              
-
-
                                               This enum describes various printer options that appear in the
-printer setup dialog. It is used to enable and disable these
-options in the setup dialog.
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQPrinter::PrintToFile - Describes if print to file should be enabled.
-
                                              • TQPrinter::PrintSelection - Describes if printing selections should be enabled.
-
                                              • TQPrinter::PrintPageRange - Describes if printing page ranges (from, to) should
-be enabled
-
                                               
                                              See also setOptionEnabled() and isOptionEnabled().
-
-
                                              Member Function Documentation
                                              
-
                                              TQPrinter::TQPrinter ( PrinterMode m = ScreenResolution )
-
                                              
-Constructs a printer paint device with mode m.
-
                                               
                                              See also TQPrinter::PrinterMode.
-
-
                                              TQPrinter::~TQPrinter ()
-
                                              
-Destroys the printer paint device and cleans up.
-
-
                                              bool TQPrinter::abort ()
-
                                              
-Aborts the print job. Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                                               
                                              See also aborted().
-
-
                                              bool TQPrinter::aborted () const
-
                                              
-Returns TRUE if the print job was aborted; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                               
                                              See also abort().
-
-
                                              ColorMode TQPrinter::colorMode () const
-
                                              
-Returns the current color mode. The default color mode is Color.
-
                                               
                                              See also setColorMode().
-
-
                                              TQString TQPrinter::creator () const
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Returns the name of the application that created the document.
-
                                               
                                              See also setCreator().
-
-
                                              TQString TQPrinter::docName () const
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Returns the document name.
-
                                               
                                              See also setDocName().
-
-
                                              int TQPrinter::fromPage () const
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Returns the from-page setting. The default value is 0.
-
                                               If fromPage() and toPage() both return 0 this signifies 'print the
-whole document'.
-
                                               The programmer is responsible for reading this setting and
-printing accordingly.
-
                                               
                                              See also setFromTo() and toPage().
-
-
                                              bool TQPrinter::fullPage () const
-
                                              
-Returns TRUE if the origin of the printer's coordinate system is
-at the corner of the sheet and FALSE if it is at the edge of the
-printable area.
-
                                               See setFullPage() for details and caveats.
-
                                               
                                              See also setFullPage(), PageSize, and TQPaintDeviceMetrics.
-
-
                                              bool TQPrinter::isOptionEnabled ( PrinterOption option )
-
                                              
-Returns TRUE if the printer option with identifier option is enabled;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                               
                                              See also setOptionEnabled().
-
-
                                              TQSize TQPrinter::margins () const
-
                                              
-Returns the width of the left margin and the height of the top
-margin of the printer. On Unix, this is a best-effort guess, not
-based on perfect knowledge.
-
                                               If you have called setFullPage( TRUE ), margins().width() may be
-treated as the smallest sane left margin you can use, and
-margins().height() as the smallest sane top margin you can
-use.
-
                                               If you have called setFullPage( FALSE ) (this is the default),
-margins() is automatically subtracted from the pageSize() by
-TQPrinter.
-
                                               
                                              See also setFullPage(), TQPaintDeviceMetrics, and PageSize.
-
-
                                              void TQPrinter::margins ( uint * top, uint * left, uint * bottom, uint * right ) const
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               Sets top, left, bottom and right to the margins of the
-printer.  On Unix, this is a best-effort guess, not based on
-perfect knowledge.
-
                                               If you have called setFullPage( TRUE ), the four values specify
-the smallest sane margins you can use.
-
                                               If you have called setFullPage( FALSE ) (this is the default),
-the margins are automatically subtracted from the pageSize() by
-TQPrinter.
-
                                               
                                              See also setFullPage(), TQPaintDeviceMetrics, and PageSize.
-
-
                                              int TQPrinter::maxPage () const
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Returns the max-page setting. A user can't choose a higher page
-number than maxPage() when they select a print range. The default
-value is 0.
-
                                               
                                              See also minPage(), setMinMax(), and setFromTo().
-
-
                                              int TQPrinter::minPage () const
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Returns the min-page setting, i.e. the lowest page number a user
-is allowed to choose. The default value is 0.
-
                                               
                                              See also maxPage(), setMinMax(), and setFromTo().
-
-
                                              bool TQPrinter::newPage ()
-
                                              
-Advances to a new page on the printer. Returns TRUE if successful;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                              Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, and mdi/application.cpp.
-
                                              int TQPrinter::numCopies () const
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Returns the number of copies to be printed. The default value is 1.
-
                                               This value will return the number of times the application is
-required to print in order to match the number specified in the
-printer setup dialog. This has been done since some printer
-drivers are not capable of buffering up the copies and the
-application in those cases have to make an explicit call to the
-print code for each copy.
-
                                               
                                              See also setNumCopies().
-
-
                                              Orientation TQPrinter::orientation () const
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Returns the orientation setting. The default value is TQPrinter::Portrait.
-
                                               
                                              See also setOrientation().
-
-
                                              TQString TQPrinter::outputFileName () const
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Returns the name of the output file. There is no default file
-name.
-
                                               
                                              See also setOutputFileName() and setOutputToFile().
-
-
                                              bool TQPrinter::outputToFile () const
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Returns TRUE if the output should be written to a file, or FALSE
-if the output should be sent directly to the printer. The default
-setting is FALSE.
-
                                               This function is currently only supported under X11 and Mac OS X.
-
                                               
                                              See also setOutputToFile() and setOutputFileName().
-
-
                                              PageOrder TQPrinter::pageOrder () const
-
                                              
-Returns the current page order.
-
                                               The default page order is FirstPageFirst.
-
                                              Bugs and limitations:
-
                                                
-
                                              •  This value is not kept in sync with the Windows or Mac OS X printer
-dialogs.
-
                                              
-
                                              PageSize TQPrinter::pageSize () const
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Returns the printer page size. The default value is system-dependent.
-
                                               
                                              See also setPageSize().
-
-
                                              PaperSource TQPrinter::paperSource () const
-
                                              
-Returns the currently set paper source of the printer.
-
                                               
                                              See also setPaperSource().
-
-
                                              TQString TQPrinter::printProgram () const
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Returns the name of the program that sends the print output to the
-printer.
-
                                               The default is to return a null string; meaning that TQPrinter will
-try to be smart in a system-dependent way. On X11 only, you can
-set it to something different to use a specific print program.
-
                                               On Windows, this function returns the name of the printer device
-driver.
-
                                               
                                              See also setPrintProgram() and setPrinterSelectionOption().
-
-
                                              PrintRange TQPrinter::printRange () const
-
                                              
-Returns the PageRange of the TQPrinter. After the print setup dialog
-has been opened, this function returns the value selected by the user.
-
                                               
                                              See also setPrintRange().
-
-
                                              TQString TQPrinter::printerName () const
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Returns the printer name. This value is initially set to the name
-of the default printer.
-
                                               
                                              See also setPrinterName().
-
-
                                              TQString TQPrinter::printerSelectionOption () const
-
                                              
-Returns the printer options selection string. This is useful only
-if the print command has been explicitly set.
-
                                               The default value (a null string) implies that the printer should
-be selected in a system-dependent manner.
-
                                               Any other value implies that the given value should be used.
-
                                               
                                              See also setPrinterSelectionOption().
-
-
                                              int TQPrinter::resolution () const [virtual]
-
                                              
-Returns the current assumed resolution of the printer, as set by
-setResolution() or by the printer subsystem.
-
                                               
                                              See also setResolution().
-
-
                                              void TQPrinter::setColorMode ( ColorMode newColorMode ) [virtual]
-
                                              
-Sets the printer's color mode to newColorMode, which can be
-either Color or GrayScale (the default).
-
                                               
                                              See also colorMode().
-
-
                                              void TQPrinter::setCreator ( const TQString & creator ) [virtual]
-
                                              
-Sets the name of the application that created the document to creator.
-
                                               This function is only applicable to the X11 version of TQt. If no
-creator name is specified, the creator will be set to "TQt"
-followed by some version number.
-
                                               
                                              See also creator().
-
-
                                              void TQPrinter::setDocName ( const TQString & name ) [virtual]
-
                                              
-Sets the document name to name.
-
-
                                              void TQPrinter::setFromTo ( int fromPage, int toPage ) [virtual]
-
                                              
-Sets the from-page and to-page settings to fromPage and toPage respectively.
-
                                               The from-page and to-page settings specify what pages to print.
-
                                               If fromPage() and toPage() both return 0 this signifies 'print the
-whole document'.
-
                                               This function is useful mostly to set a default value that the
-user can override in the print dialog when you call setup().
-
                                               
                                              See also fromPage(), toPage(), setMinMax(), and setup().
-
-
                                              void TQPrinter::setFullPage ( bool fp ) [virtual]
-
                                              
-Sets TQPrinter to have the origin of the coordinate system at the
-top-left corner of the paper if fp is TRUE, or where it thinks
-the top-left corner of the printable area is if fp is FALSE.
-
                                               The default is FALSE. You can (probably) print on (0,0), and
-TQPaintDeviceMetrics will report something smaller than the size
-indicated by PageSize. (Note that TQPrinter may be wrong on Unix
-systems - it does not have perfect knowledge of the physical
-printer.)
-
                                               If you set fp to TRUE, TQPaintDeviceMetrics will report the
-exact same size as indicated by PageSize, but you cannot print
-on all of that - you must take care of the output margins
-yourself.
-
                                               
                                              See also PageSize, setPageSize(), TQPaintDeviceMetrics, and fullPage().
-
-
                                              Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, and mdi/application.cpp.
-
                                              void TQPrinter::setMargins ( uint top, uint left, uint bottom, uint right )
-
                                              
-Sets the printer margins to the sizes specified in top, left,
-bottom and right.
-
                                               This function currently only has an effect on Unix systems.
-
                                               
                                              See also margins().
-
-
                                              void TQPrinter::setMinMax ( int minPage, int maxPage ) [virtual]
-
                                              
-Sets the min-page and max-page settings to minPage and maxPage respectively.
-
                                               The min-page and max-page restrict the from-page and to-page
-settings. When the printer setup dialog appears, the user cannot
-select a from page or a to page that are outside the range
-specified by min and max pages.
-
                                               
                                              See also minPage(), maxPage(), setFromTo(), and setup().
-
-
                                              void TQPrinter::setNumCopies ( int numCopies ) [virtual]
-
                                              
-Sets the number of copies to be printed to numCopies.
-
                                               The printer driver reads this setting and prints the specified
-number of copies.
-
                                               
                                              See also numCopies() and setup().
-
-
                                              void TQPrinter::setOptionEnabled ( PrinterOption option, bool enable )
-
                                              
-Enables the printer option with the identifier option if enable is TRUE, and disables option option if enable is FALSE.
-
                                               
                                              See also isOptionEnabled().
-
-
                                              void TQPrinter::setOrientation ( Orientation orientation ) [virtual]
-
                                              
-Sets the print orientation to orientation.
-
                                               The orientation can be either TQPrinter::Portrait or TQPrinter::Landscape.
-
                                               The printer driver reads this setting and prints using the
-specified orientation. On Windows this setting won't take effect
-until the printer dialog is shown (using TQPrinter::setup()).
-
                                               Windows only! This option can be changed while printing and will
-take effect from the next call to newPage()
-
                                               
                                              See also orientation().
-
-
                                              void TQPrinter::setOutputFileName ( const TQString & fileName ) [virtual]
-
                                              
-Sets the name of the output file to fileName.
-
                                               Setting a null or empty name (0 or "") disables output to a file,
-i.e. calls setOutputToFile(FALSE). Setting a non-empty name
-enables output to a file, i.e. calls setOutputToFile(TRUE).
-
                                               This function is currently only supported under X11.
-
                                               
                                              See also outputFileName() and setOutputToFile().
-
-
                                              void TQPrinter::setOutputToFile ( bool enable ) [virtual]
-
                                              
-Specifies whether the output should be written to a file or sent
-directly to the printer.
-
                                               Will output to a file if enable is TRUE, or will output
-directly to the printer if enable is FALSE.
-
                                               This function is currently only supported under X11 and Mac OS X.
-
                                               
                                              See also outputToFile() and setOutputFileName().
-
-
                                              void TQPrinter::setPageOrder ( PageOrder newPageOrder ) [virtual]
-
                                              
-Sets the page order to newPageOrder.
-
                                               The page order can be TQPrinter::FirstPageFirst or TQPrinter::LastPageFirst. The application programmer is responsible
-for reading the page order and printing accordingly.
-
                                               This function is useful mostly for setting a default value that
-the user can override in the print dialog when you call setup().
-
                                              Bugs and limitations:
-
                                                
-
                                              •  This value is not kept in sync with the Windows or Mac OS X printer
-dialogs.
-
                                              
-
                                              void TQPrinter::setPageSize ( PageSize newPageSize ) [virtual]
-
                                              
-Sets the printer page size to newPageSize if that size is
-supported. The result if undefined if newPageSize is not
-supported.
-
                                               The default page size is system-dependent.
-
                                               This function is useful mostly for setting a default value that
-the user can override in the print dialog when you call setup().
-
                                               
                                              See also pageSize(), PageSize, setFullPage(), and setResolution().
-
-
                                              void TQPrinter::setPaperSource ( PaperSource source ) [virtual]
-
                                              
-Sets the paper source setting to source.
-
                                               Windows only! This option can be changed while printing and will
-take effect from the next call to newPage()
-
                                               
                                              See also paperSource().
-
-
                                              void TQPrinter::setPrintProgram ( const TQString & printProg ) [virtual]
-
                                              
-Sets the name of the program that should do the print job to printProg.
-
                                               On X11, this function sets the program to call with the PostScript
-output. On other platforms, it has no effect.
-
                                               
                                              See also printProgram().
-
-
                                              void TQPrinter::setPrintRange ( PrintRange range )
-
                                              
-Sets the default selected page range to be used when the print setup
-dialog is opened to range. If the PageRange specified by range is
-currently disabled the function does nothing.
-
                                               
                                              See also printRange().
-
-
                                              void TQPrinter::setPrinterName ( const TQString & name ) [virtual]
-
                                              
-Sets the printer name to name.
-
                                               The default printer will be used if no printer name is set.
-
                                               Under X11, the PRINTER environment variable defines the default
-printer.  Under any other window system, the window system defines
-the default printer.
-
                                               
                                              See also printerName().
-
-
                                              void TQPrinter::setPrinterSelectionOption ( const TQString & option ) [virtual]
-
                                              
-Sets the printer to use option to select the printer. option
-is null by default (which implies that TQt should be smart enough
-to guess correctly), but it can be set to other values to use a
-specific printer selection option.
-
                                               If the printer selection option is changed while the printer is
-active, the current print job may or may not be affected.
-
                                               
                                              See also printerSelectionOption().
-
-
                                              void TQPrinter::setResolution ( int dpi ) [virtual]
-
                                              
-Requests that the printer prints at dpi or as near to dpi as
-possible.
-
                                               This setting affects the coordinate system as returned by, for
-example, TQPaintDeviceMetrics and TQPainter::viewport().
-
                                               The value depends on the PrintingMode used in the TQPrinter
-constructor. By default, the dpi value of the screen is used.
-
                                               This function must be called before setup() to have an effect on
-all platforms.
-
                                               
                                              See also resolution() and setPageSize().
-
-
                                              void TQPrinter::setWinPageSize ( short winPageSize )
-
                                              
-Windows only, using this function is not portable!
-Sets the windows page size value that is used by the DEVMODE
-struct. The winPageSize value must be one of the DMPAPER_ defines
-from wingdi.h.
-
-
                                              bool TQPrinter::setup ( TQWidget * parent = 0 )
-
                                              
-Opens a printer setup dialog, with parent parent, and asks the
-user to specify which printer they wish to use and what settings
-it should have.
-
                                               Returns TRUE if the user pressed "OK" to print, or FALSE if the
-user canceled the operation.
-
-
                                              Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, and mdi/application.cpp.
-
                                              int TQPrinter::toPage () const
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Returns the to-page setting. The default value is 0.
-
                                               If fromPage() and toPage() both return 0 this signifies 'print the
-whole document'.
-
                                               The programmer is responsible for reading this setting and
-printing accordingly.
-
                                               
                                              See also setFromTo() and fromPage().
-
-
                                              short TQPrinter::winPageSize () const
-
                                              
-Returns the Windows page size value as used by the DEVMODE
-struct (Windows only). Using this function is not portable.
-
                                               Use pageSize() to get the PageSize, e.g. 'A4', 'Letter', etc.
-
-
-
                                              
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                              
-
-
                                              Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                              TQt 3.3.8
                                              
-
                                              
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qprocess-examples.html b/doc/html/qprocess-examples.html
index cee394265..a23418483 100644
--- a/doc/html/qprocess-examples.html
+++ b/doc/html/qprocess-examples.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
  
 
                                               The following example programs show how to use the 
-TQProcess class.
+TQProcess class.
 
                                               
 
                                              
 
                                              Starting processes with IO redirection
diff --git a/doc/html/qprocess-h.html b/doc/html/qprocess-h.html
index 5d025c377..7a150577a 100644
--- a/doc/html/qprocess-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qprocess-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qprocess.h Include File
+ntqprocess.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                              
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                              TQProcess Class Reference
                                              
-
-
                                              The TQProcess class is used to start external programs and
-to communicate with them.
-More...
-
                                              #include <qprocess.h>
-
                                              Inherits TQObject.
-
                                              List of all member functions.
-
                                              Public Members
                                              
-
-
                                              Public Slots
                                              
-
-
                                              Signals
                                              
-
-
                                              Detailed Description
                                              
-
-
-
                                               The TQProcess class is used to start external programs and
-to communicate with them.
-
                                               
-
-
-
                                               You can write to the started program's standard input, and can
-read the program's standard output and standard error. You can
-pass command line arguments to the program either in the
-constructor or with setArguments() or addArgument(). The program's
-working directory can be set with setWorkingDirectory(). If you
-need to set up environment variables pass them to the start() or
-launch() functions (see below). The processExited() signal is
-emitted if the program exits. The program's exit status is
-available from exitStatus(), although you could simply call
-normalExit() to see if the program terminated normally.
-
                                               There are two different ways to start a process. If you just want
-to run a program, optionally passing data to its standard input at
-the beginning, use one of the launch() functions. If you want full
-control of the program's standard input (especially if you don't
-know all the data you want to send to standard input at the
-beginning), use the start() function.
-
                                               If you use start() you can write to the program's standard input
-using writeToStdin() and you can close the standard input with
-closeStdin(). The wroteToStdin() signal is emitted if the data
-sent to standard input has been written. You can read from the
-program's standard output using readStdout() or readLineStdout().
-These functions return an empty TQByteArray if there is no data to
-read. The readyReadStdout() signal is emitted when there is data
-available to be read from standard output. Standard error has a
-set of functions that correspond to the standard output functions,
-i.e. readStderr(), readLineStderr() and readyReadStderr().
-
                                               If you use one of the launch() functions the data you pass will be
-sent to the program's standard input which will be closed once all
-the data has been written. You should not use writeToStdin() or
-closeStdin() if you use launch(). If you need to send data to the
-program's standard input after it has started running use start()
-instead of launch().
-
                                               Both start() and launch() can accept a string list of strings each
-of which has the format, key=value, where the keys are the names
-of environment variables.
-
                                               You can test to see if a program is running with isRunning(). The
-program's process identifier is available from
-processIdentifier(). If you want to terminate a running program
-use tryTerminate(), but note that the program may ignore this. If
-you really want to terminate the program, without it having any
-chance to clean up, you can use kill().
-
                                               As an example, suppose we want to start the uic command (a TQt
-command line tool used with TQt Designer) and perform some
-operations on the output (the uic outputs the code it generates
-to standard output by default). Suppose further that we want to
-run the program on the file "small_dialog.ui" with the command
-line options "-tr i18n". On the command line we would write:
-
                                              -    uic -tr i18n small_dialog.ui
-    
                                              
- 
-
                                               
-
-
                                               A code snippet for this with the TQProcess class might look like
-this:
-
                                               
                                                  UicManager::UicManager()
-    {
-
                                                      proc = new TQProcess( this );
-
                                                      proc->addArgument( "uic" );
-        proc->addArgument( "-tr" );
-        proc->addArgument( "i18n" );
-        proc->addArgument( "small_dialog.ui" );
-
-        connect( proc, SIGNAL(readyReadStdout()),
-                this, SLOT(readFromStdout()) );
-
                                                      if ( !proc->start() ) {
-            // error handling
-
                                                      }
-    }
-
                                              
-
                                               
                                                  void UicManager::readFromStdout()
-    {
-        // Read and process the data.
-        // Bear in mind that the data might be output in chunks.
-
                                                  }
-
                                              
-
                                               Although you may need quotes for a file named on the command line
-(e.g. if it contains spaces) you shouldn't use extra quotes for
-arguments passed to addArgument() or setArguments().
-
                                               The readyReadStdout() signal is emitted when there is new data on
-standard output. This happens asynchronously: you don't know if
-more data will arrive later.
-
                                               In the above example you could connect the processExited() signal
-to the slot UicManager::readFromStdout() instead. If you do so,
-you will be certain that all the data is available when the slot
-is called. On the other hand, you must wait until the process has
-finished before doing any processing.
-
                                               Note that if you are expecting a lot of output from the process,
-you may hit platform-dependent limits to the pipe buffer size. The
-solution is to make sure you connect to the output, e.g. the
-readyReadStdout() and readyReadStderr() signals and read the data
-as soon as it becomes available.
-
                                               Please note that TQProcess does not emulate a shell. This means that
-TQProcess does not do any expansion of arguments: a '*' is passed as a '*'
-to the program and is not replaced by all the files, a '$HOME' is also
-passed literally and is not replaced by the environment variable HOME
-and the special characters for IO redirection ('>', '|', etc.) are also
-passed literally and do not have the special meaning as they have in a
-shell.
-
                                               Also note that TQProcess does not emulate a terminal. This means that
-certain programs which need direct terminal control, do not work as
-expected with TQProcess. Such programs include console email programs (like
-pine and mutt) but also programs which require the user to enter a password
-(like su and ssh).
-
                                               
                                               Notes for Windows users
-
                                              
-
                                               Some Windows commands, for example, dir, are not provided by
-separate applications, but by the command interpreter.
-If you attempt to use TQProcess to execute these commands directly
-it won't work. One possible solution is to execute the command
-interpreter itself (cmd.exe on some Windows systems), and ask
-the interpreter to execute the desired command.
-
                                               Under Windows there are certain problems starting 16-bit applications
-and capturing their output. Microsoft recommends using an intermediate
-application to start 16-bit applications.
-
                                               
                                              See also TQSocket, Input/Output and Networking, and Miscellaneous Classes.
-
-
                                              Member Type Documentation
                                              
-
                                              TQProcess::Communication
                                              
-
-
                                               This enum type defines the communication channels connected to the
-process.
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQProcess::Stdin - Data can be written to the process's standard input.
-
                                              • TQProcess::Stdout - Data can be read from the process's standard
-output.
-
                                              • TQProcess::Stderr - Data can be read from the process's standard error.
-
                                              • TQProcess::DupStderr - Both the process's standard error output and
-its standard output are written to its standard output. (Like
-Unix's dup2().) This means that nothing is sent to the standard
-error output. This is especially useful if your application
-requires that the output on standard output and on standard error
-must be read in the same order that they are produced. This is a
-flag, so to activate it you must pass Stdout|Stderr|DupStderr,
-or Stdin|Stdout|Stderr|DupStderr if you want to provide input,
-to the setCommunication() call.
-
                                               
                                              See also setCommunication() and communication().
-
-
                                              Member Function Documentation
                                              
-
                                              TQProcess::TQProcess ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                              
-Constructs a TQProcess object. The parent and name parameters
-are passed to the TQObject constructor.
-
                                               
                                              See also setArguments(), addArgument(), and start().
-
-
                                              TQProcess::TQProcess ( const TQString & arg0, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                              
-Constructs a TQProcess with arg0 as the command to be executed.
-The parent and name parameters are passed to the TQObject
-constructor.
-
                                               The process is not started. You must call start() or launch() to
-start the process.
-
                                               
                                              See also setArguments(), addArgument(), and start().
-
-
                                              TQProcess::TQProcess ( const TQStringList & args, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                              
-Constructs a TQProcess with args as the arguments of the
-process. The first element in the list is the command to be
-executed. The other elements in the list are the arguments to this
-command. The parent and name parameters are passed to the
-TQObject constructor.
-
                                               The process is not started. You must call start() or launch() to
-start the process.
-
                                               
                                              See also setArguments(), addArgument(), and start().
-
-
                                              TQProcess::~TQProcess ()
-
                                              
-Destroys the instance.
-
                                               If the process is running, it is not terminated! The
-standard input, standard output and standard error of the process
-are closed.
-
                                               You can connect the destroyed() signal to the kill() slot, if you
-want the process to be terminated automatically when the instance
-is destroyed.
-
                                               
                                              See also tryTerminate() and kill().
-
-
                                              void TQProcess::addArgument ( const TQString & arg ) [virtual]
-
                                              
-Adds arg to the end of the list of arguments.
-
                                               The first element in the list of arguments is the command to be
-executed; the following elements are the command's arguments.
-
                                               
                                              See also arguments() and setArguments().
-
-
                                              Example: process/process.cpp.
-
                                              TQStringList TQProcess::arguments () const
-
                                              
-Returns the list of arguments that are set for the process.
-Arguments can be specified with the constructor or with the
-functions setArguments() and addArgument().
-
                                               Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
-over a copy, e.g.
-
                                              -    TQStringList list = myProcess.arguments();
-    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    while( it != list.end() ) {
-        myProcessing( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-    
                                              
- 
-
                                               
                                              See also setArguments() and addArgument().
-
-
                                              bool TQProcess::canReadLineStderr () const
-
                                              
-Returns TRUE if it's possible to read an entire line of text from
-standard error at this time; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                               
                                              See also readLineStderr() and canReadLineStdout().
-
-
                                              bool TQProcess::canReadLineStdout () const
-
                                              
-Returns TRUE if it's possible to read an entire line of text from
-standard output at this time; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                               
                                              See also readLineStdout() and canReadLineStderr().
-
-
                                              void TQProcess::clearArguments ()
-
                                              
-Clears the list of arguments that are set for the process.
-
                                               
                                              See also setArguments() and addArgument().
-
-
                                              void TQProcess::closeStdin () [virtual slot]
-
                                              
-Closes the process's standard input.
-
                                               This function also deletes any pending data that has not been
-written to standard input.
-
                                               
                                              See also wroteToStdin().
-
-
                                              int TQProcess::communication () const
-
                                              
-Returns the communication required with the process, i.e. some
-combination of the Communication flags.
-
                                               
                                              See also setCommunication().
-
-
                                              int TQProcess::exitStatus () const
-
                                              
-Returns the exit status of the process or 0 if the process is
-still running. This function returns immediately and does not wait
-until the process is finished.
-
                                               If normalExit() is FALSE (e.g. if the program was killed or
-crashed), this function returns 0, so you should check the return
-value of normalExit() before relying on this value.
-
                                               
                                              See also normalExit() and processExited().
-
-
                                              bool TQProcess::isRunning () const
-
                                              
-Returns TRUE if the process is running; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                               
                                              See also normalExit(), exitStatus(), and processExited().
-
-
                                              void TQProcess::kill () const [slot]
-
                                              
-Terminates the process. This is not a safe way to end a process
-since the process will not be able to do any cleanup.
-tryTerminate() is safer, but processes can ignore a
-tryTerminate().
-
                                               The nice way to end a process and to be sure that it is finished,
-is to do something like this:
-
                                              -        process->tryTerminate();
-        TQTimer::singleShot( 5000, process, SLOT( kill() ) );
-    
                                              
- 
-
                                               This tries to terminate the process the nice way. If the process
-is still running after 5 seconds, it terminates the process the
-hard way. The timeout should be chosen depending on the time the
-process needs to do all its cleanup: use a higher value if the
-process is likely to do a lot of computation or I/O on cleanup.
-
                                               The slot returns immediately: it does not wait until the process
-has finished. When the process terminates, the processExited()
-signal is emitted.
-
                                               
                                              See also tryTerminate() and processExited().
-
-
                                              bool TQProcess::launch ( const TQByteArray & buf, TQStringList * env = 0 ) [virtual]
-
                                              
-Runs the process and writes the data buf to the process's
-standard input. If all the data is written to standard input,
-standard input is closed. The command is searched for in the path
-for executable programs; you can also use an absolute path in the
-command itself.
-
                                               If env is null, then the process is started with the same
-environment as the starting process. If env is non-null, then
-the values in the string list are interpreted as environment
-setttings of the form key=value and the process is started
-with these environment settings. For convenience, there is a small
-exception to this rule under Unix: if env does not contain any
-settings for the environment variable LD_LIBRARY_PATH, then
-this variable is inherited from the starting process.
-
                                               Returns TRUE if the process could be started; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                               Note that you should not use the slots writeToStdin() and
-closeStdin() on processes started with launch(), since the result
-is not well-defined. If you need these slots, use start() instead.
-
                                               The process may or may not read the buf data sent to its
-standard input.
-
                                               You can call this function even when a process that was started
-with this instance is still running. Be aware that if you do this
-the standard input of the process that was launched first will be
-closed, with any pending data being deleted, and the process will
-be left to run out of your control. Similarly, if the process
-could not be started the standard input will be closed and the
-pending data deleted. (On operating systems that have zombie
-processes, TQt will also wait() on the old process.)
-
                                               The object emits the signal launchFinished() when this function
-call is finished. If the start was successful, this signal is
-emitted after all the data has been written to standard input. If
-the start failed, then this signal is emitted immediately.
-
                                               
                                              See also start() and launchFinished().
-
-
                                              bool TQProcess::launch ( const TQString & buf, TQStringList * env = 0 ) [virtual]
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               The data buf is written to standard input with writeToStdin()
-using the TQString::local8Bit() representation of the strings.
-
-
                                              void TQProcess::launchFinished () [signal]
-
                                              
-
-
                                               This signal is emitted when the process was started with launch().
-If the start was successful, this signal is emitted after all the
-data has been written to standard input. If the start failed, then
-this signal is emitted immediately.
-
                                               This signal is especially useful if you want to know when you can
-safely delete the TQProcess object when you are not interested in
-reading from standard output or standard error.
-
                                               
                                              See also launch() and TQObject::deleteLater().
-
-
                                              bool TQProcess::normalExit () const
-
                                              
-Returns TRUE if the process has exited normally; otherwise returns
-FALSE. This implies that this function returns FALSE if the
-process is still running.
-
                                               
                                              See also isRunning(), exitStatus(), and processExited().
-
-
                                              void TQProcess::processExited () [signal]
-
                                              
-
-
                                               This signal is emitted when the process has exited.
-
                                               
                                              See also isRunning(), normalExit(), exitStatus(), start(), and launch().
-
-
                                              Example: process/process.cpp.
-
                                              PID TQProcess::processIdentifier ()
-
                                              
-Returns platform dependent information about the process. This can
-be used together with platform specific system calls.
-
                                               Under Unix the return value is the PID of the process, or -1 if no
-process belongs to this object.
-
                                               Under Windows it is a pointer to the PROCESS_INFORMATION
-struct, or 0 if no process is belongs to this object.
-
                                               Use of this function's return value is likely to be non-portable.
-
-
                                              TQString TQProcess::readLineStderr () [virtual]
-
                                              
-Reads a line of text from standard error, excluding any trailing
-newline or carriage return characters and returns it. Returns
-TQString::null if canReadLineStderr() returns FALSE.
-
                                               By default, the text is interpreted to be in Latin-1 encoding. If you need
-other codecs, you can set a different codec with
-TQTextCodec::setCodecForCStrings().
-
                                               
                                              See also canReadLineStderr(), readyReadStderr(), readStderr(), and readLineStdout().
-
-
                                              TQString TQProcess::readLineStdout () [virtual]
-
                                              
-Reads a line of text from standard output, excluding any trailing
-newline or carriage return characters, and returns it. Returns
-TQString::null if canReadLineStdout() returns FALSE.
-
                                               By default, the text is interpreted to be in Latin-1 encoding. If you need
-other codecs, you can set a different codec with
-TQTextCodec::setCodecForCStrings().
-
                                               
                                              See also canReadLineStdout(), readyReadStdout(), readStdout(), and readLineStderr().
-
-
                                              TQByteArray TQProcess::readStderr () [virtual]
-
                                              
-Reads the data that the process has written to standard error.
-When new data is written to standard error, the class emits the
-signal readyReadStderr().
-
                                               If there is no data to read, this function returns a TQByteArray of
-size 0: it does not wait until there is something to read.
-
                                               
                                              See also readyReadStderr(), readLineStderr(), readStdout(), and writeToStdin().
-
-
                                              TQByteArray TQProcess::readStdout () [virtual]
-
                                              
-Reads the data that the process has written to standard output.
-When new data is written to standard output, the class emits the
-signal readyReadStdout().
-
                                               If there is no data to read, this function returns a TQByteArray of
-size 0: it does not wait until there is something to read.
-
                                               
                                              See also readyReadStdout(), readLineStdout(), readStderr(), and writeToStdin().
-
-
                                              Example: process/process.cpp.
-
                                              void TQProcess::readyReadStderr () [signal]
-
                                              
-
-
                                               This signal is emitted when the process has written data to
-standard error. You can read the data with readStderr().
-
                                               Note that this signal is only emitted when there is new data and
-not when there is old, but unread data. In the slot connected to
-this signal, you should always read everything that is available
-at that moment to make sure that you don't lose any data.
-
                                               
                                              See also readStderr(), readLineStderr(), and readyReadStdout().
-
-
                                              void TQProcess::readyReadStdout () [signal]
-
                                              
-
-
                                               This signal is emitted when the process has written data to
-standard output. You can read the data with readStdout().
-
                                               Note that this signal is only emitted when there is new data and
-not when there is old, but unread data. In the slot connected to
-this signal, you should always read everything that is available
-at that moment to make sure that you don't lose any data.
-
                                               
                                              See also readStdout(), readLineStdout(), and readyReadStderr().
-
-
                                              Example: process/process.cpp.
-
                                              void TQProcess::setArguments ( const TQStringList & args ) [virtual]
-
                                              
-Sets args as the arguments for the process. The first element
-in the list is the command to be executed. The other elements in
-the list are the arguments to the command. Any previous arguments
-are deleted.
-
                                               TQProcess does not perform argument substitutions; for example, if you
-specify "*" or "$DISPLAY", these values are passed to the process
-literally. If you want to have the same behavior as the shell
-provides, you must do the substitutions yourself; i.e. instead of
-specifying a "*" you must specify the list of all the filenames in
-the current directory, and instead of "$DISPLAY" you must specify
-the value of the environment variable DISPLAY.
-
                                               Note for Windows users. The standard Windows shells, e.g. command.com and cmd.exe, do not perform file globbing, i.e.
-they do not convert a "*" on the command line into a list of files
-in the current directory. For this reason most Windows
-applications implement their own file globbing, and as a result of
-this, specifying an argument of "*" for a Windows application is
-likely to result in the application performing a file glob and
-ending up with a list of filenames.
-
                                               
                                              See also arguments() and addArgument().
-
-
                                              void TQProcess::setCommunication ( int commFlags )
-
                                              
-Sets commFlags as the communication required with the process.
-
                                               commFlags is a bitwise OR of the flags defined by the Communication enum.
-
                                               The default is Stdin|Stdout|Stderr.
-
                                               
                                              See also communication().
-
-
                                              void TQProcess::setWorkingDirectory ( const TQDir & dir ) [virtual]
-
                                              
-Sets dir as the working directory for processes. This does not
-affect running processes; only processes that are started
-afterwards are affected.
-
                                               Setting the working directory is especially useful for processes
-that try to access files with relative paths.
-
                                               
                                              See also workingDirectory() and start().
-
-
                                              bool TQProcess::start ( TQStringList * env = 0 ) [virtual]
-
                                              
-Tries to run a process for the command and arguments that were
-specified with setArguments(), addArgument() or that were
-specified in the constructor. The command is searched for in the
-path for executable programs; you can also use an absolute path in
-the command itself.
-
                                               If env is null, then the process is started with the same
-environment as the starting process. If env is non-null, then
-the values in the stringlist are interpreted as environment
-setttings of the form key=value and the process is started in
-these environment settings. For convenience, there is a small
-exception to this rule: under Unix, if env does not contain any
-settings for the environment variable LD_LIBRARY_PATH, then
-this variable is inherited from the starting process; under
-Windows the same applies for the environment variable PATH.
-
                                               Returns TRUE if the process could be started; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                               You can write data to the process's standard input with
-writeToStdin(). You can close standard input with closeStdin() and
-you can terminate the process with tryTerminate(), or with kill().
-
                                               You can call this function even if you've used this instance to
-create a another process which is still running. In such cases,
-TQProcess closes the old process's standard input and deletes
-pending data, i.e., you lose all control over the old process, but
-the old process is not terminated. This applies also if the
-process could not be started. (On operating systems that have
-zombie processes, TQt will also wait() on the old process.)
-
                                               
                                              See also launch() and closeStdin().
-
-
                                              Example: process/process.cpp.
-
                                              void TQProcess::tryTerminate () const [slot]
-
                                              
-Asks the process to terminate. Processes can ignore this if they
-wish. If you want to be certain that the process really
-terminates, you can use kill() instead.
-
                                               The slot returns immediately: it does not wait until the process
-has finished. When the process terminates, the processExited()
-signal is emitted.
-
                                               
                                              See also kill() and processExited().
-
-
                                              TQDir TQProcess::workingDirectory () const
-
                                              
-Returns the working directory that was set with
-setWorkingDirectory(), or the current directory if none has been
-explicitly set.
-
                                               
                                              See also setWorkingDirectory() and TQDir::current().
-
-
                                              void TQProcess::writeToStdin ( const TQByteArray & buf ) [virtual slot]
-
                                              
-Writes the data buf to the process's standard input. The
-process may or may not read this data.
-
                                               This function always returns immediately. The data you
-pass to writeToStdin() is copied into an internal memory buffer in
-TQProcess, and when control goes back to the event loop, TQProcess will
-starting transferring data from this buffer to the running process.  
-Sometimes the data will be transferred in several payloads, depending on
-how much data is read at a time by the process itself. When TQProcess has
-transferred all the data from its memory buffer to the running process, it
-emits wroteToStdin().
-
                                               Note that some operating systems use a buffer to transfer
-the data. As a result, wroteToStdin() may be emitted before the
-running process has actually read all the data.
-
                                               
                                              See also wroteToStdin(), closeStdin(), readStdout(), and readStderr().
-
-
                                              void TQProcess::writeToStdin ( const TQString & buf ) [virtual slot]
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               The string buf is handled as text using the
-TQString::local8Bit() representation.
-
-
                                              void TQProcess::wroteToStdin () [signal]
-
                                              
-
-
                                               This signal is emitted if the data sent to standard input (via
-writeToStdin()) was actually written to the process. This does not
-imply that the process really read the data, since this class only
-detects when it was able to write the data to the operating
-system. But it is now safe to close standard input without losing
-pending data.
-
                                               
                                              See also writeToStdin() and closeStdin().
-
-
-
                                              
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                              
-
-
                                              Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                              TQt 3.3.8
                                              
-
                                              
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qprogressbar-h.html b/doc/html/qprogressbar-h.html
index 328d511da..d7dcfd3df 100644
--- a/doc/html/qprogressbar-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qprogressbar-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qprogressbar.h Include File
+ntqprogressbar.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                              
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                              TQProgressBar Class Reference
                                              
-
-
                                              The TQProgressBar widget provides a horizontal progress bar.
-More...
-
                                              #include <qprogressbar.h>
-
                                              Inherits TQFrame.
-
                                              List of all member functions.
-
                                              Public Members
                                              
-
-
                                              Public Slots
                                              
-
-
                                              Properties
                                              
-
-
                                              Protected Members
                                              
-
                                                
-
                                              • virtual bool setIndicator ( TQString & indicator, int progress, int totalSteps )
                                                • 
-
                                              
-
                                              Detailed Description
                                              
-
-
-The TQProgressBar widget provides a horizontal progress bar.
-
                                               
-
-
                                               A progress bar is used to give the user an indication of the
-progress of an operation and to reassure them that the application
-is still running.
-
                                               The progress bar uses the concept of steps; you give it the
-total number of steps and the number of steps completed so far and
-it will display the percentage of steps that have been completed.
-You can specify the total number of steps in the constructor or
-later with setTotalSteps(). The current number of steps is set
-with setProgress(). The progress bar can be rewound to the
-beginning with reset().
-
                                               If the total is given as 0 the progress bar shows a busy indicator
-instead of a percentage of steps. This is useful, for example,
-when using TQFtp or TQHttp to download items when they are unable to
-determine the size of the item being downloaded.
-
                                               
                                              See also TQProgressDialog, GUI Design Handbook: Progress Indicator, and Advanced Widgets.
-
-
                                                
-
                                               
                                              See also TQProgressDialog, GUI Design Handbook: Progress Indicator, and Advanced Widgets.
-
-
                                              Member Function Documentation
                                              
-
                                              TQProgressBar::TQProgressBar ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
-
                                              
-Constructs a progress bar.
-
                                               The total number of steps is set to 100 by default.
-
                                               The parent, name and widget flags, f, are passed on to
-the TQFrame::TQFrame() constructor.
-
                                               
                                              See also totalSteps.
-
-
                                              TQProgressBar::TQProgressBar ( int totalSteps, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
-
                                              
-Constructs a progress bar.
-
                                               The totalSteps is the total number of steps that need to be
-completed for the operation which this progress bar represents.
-For example, if the operation is to examine 50 files, this value
-would be 50. Before examining the first file, call setProgress(0);
-call setProgress(50) after examining the last file.
-
                                               The parent, name and widget flags, f, are passed to the
-TQFrame::TQFrame() constructor.
-
                                               
                                              See also totalSteps and progress.
-
-
                                              bool TQProgressBar::centerIndicator () const
-
                                              Returns TRUE if the indicator string should be centered; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "centerIndicator" property for details.
-
                                              bool TQProgressBar::indicatorFollowsStyle () const
-
                                              Returns TRUE if the display of the indicator string should follow the GUI style; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "indicatorFollowsStyle" property for details.
-
                                              bool TQProgressBar::percentageVisible () const
-
                                              Returns TRUE if the current progress value is displayed; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "percentageVisible" property for details.
-
                                              int TQProgressBar::progress () const
-
                                              Returns the current amount of progress.
-See the "progress" property for details.
-
                                              const TQString & TQProgressBar::progressString () const
-
                                              Returns the amount of progress as a string.
-See the "progressString" property for details.
-
                                              void TQProgressBar::reset () [slot]
-
                                              
-Reset the progress bar. The progress bar "rewinds" and shows no
-progress.
-
-
                                              Examples: fileiconview/mainwindow.cpp and progressbar/progressbar.cpp.
-
                                              void TQProgressBar::setCenterIndicator ( bool on )
-
                                              Sets whether the indicator string should be centered to on.
-See the "centerIndicator" property for details.
-
                                              bool TQProgressBar::setIndicator ( TQString & indicator, int progress, int totalSteps ) [virtual protected]
-
                                              
-This method is called to generate the text displayed in the center
-(or in some styles, to the left) of the progress bar.
-
                                               The progress may be negative, indicating that the progress bar
-is in the "reset" state before any progress is set.
-
                                               The default implementation is the percentage of completion or
-blank in the reset state. The percentage is calculated based on
-the progress and totalSteps. You can set the indicator
-text if you wish.
-
                                               To allow efficient repainting of the progress bar, this method
-should return FALSE if the string is unchanged from the last call
-to this function.
-
-
                                              void TQProgressBar::setIndicatorFollowsStyle ( bool )
-
                                              Sets whether the display of the indicator string should follow the GUI style.
-See the "indicatorFollowsStyle" property for details.
-
                                              void TQProgressBar::setPercentageVisible ( bool )
-
                                              Sets whether the current progress value is displayed.
-See the "percentageVisible" property for details.
-
                                              void TQProgressBar::setProgress ( int progress ) [virtual slot]
-
                                              Sets the current amount of progress to progress.
-See the "progress" property for details.
-
                                              void TQProgressBar::setProgress ( int progress, int totalSteps ) [slot]
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               Sets the amount of progress to progress and the total number of
-steps to totalSteps.
-
                                               
                                              See also totalSteps.
-
-
                                              void TQProgressBar::setTotalSteps ( int totalSteps ) [virtual slot]
-
                                              Sets the total number of steps to totalSteps.
-See the "totalSteps" property for details.
-
                                              int TQProgressBar::totalSteps () const
-
                                              Returns the total number of steps.
-See the "totalSteps" property for details.
-
                                              Property Documentation
                                              
-
                                              bool centerIndicator
                                              
-
                                              This property holds whether the indicator string should be centered.
-
                                              Changing this property sets TQProgressBar::indicatorFollowsStyle
-to FALSE. The default is TRUE.
-
-
                                              Set this property's value with setCenterIndicator() and get this property's value with centerIndicator().
-
                                              bool indicatorFollowsStyle
                                              
-
                                              This property holds whether the display of the indicator string should follow the GUI style.
-
                                              The default is TRUE.
-
                                               
                                              See also centerIndicator.
-
-
                                              Set this property's value with setIndicatorFollowsStyle() and get this property's value with indicatorFollowsStyle().
-
                                              bool percentageVisible
                                              
-
                                              This property holds whether the current progress value is displayed.
-
                                              The default is TRUE.
-
                                               
                                              See also centerIndicator and indicatorFollowsStyle.
-
-
                                              Set this property's value with setPercentageVisible() and get this property's value with percentageVisible().
-
                                              int progress
                                              
-
                                              This property holds the current amount of progress.
-
                                              This property is -1 if progress counting has not started.
-
-
                                              Set this property's value with setProgress() and get this property's value with progress().
-
                                              TQString progressString
                                              
-
                                              This property holds the amount of progress as a string.
-
                                              This property is TQString::null if progress counting has not started.
-
-
                                              Get this property's value with progressString().
-
                                              int totalSteps
                                              
-
                                              This property holds the total number of steps.
-
                                              If totalSteps is 0, the progress bar will display a busy
-indicator.
-
                                               
                                              See also 
-
                                              Set this property's value with setTotalSteps() and get this property's value with totalSteps().
-
-
                                              
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                              
-
-
                                              Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                              TQt 3.3.8
                                              
-
                                              
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qprogressdialog-h.html b/doc/html/qprogressdialog-h.html
index 0d21569c8..bfeac1d94 100644
--- a/doc/html/qprogressdialog-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qprogressdialog-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qprogressdialog.h Include File
+ntqprogressdialog.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                              
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                              TQProgressDialog Class Reference
                                              
-
-
                                              The TQProgressDialog class provides feedback on the progress of a slow operation.
-More...
-
                                              #include <qprogressdialog.h>
-
                                              Inherits TQDialog.
-
                                              List of all member functions.
-
                                              Public Members
                                              
-
-
                                              Public Slots
                                              
-
-
                                              Signals
                                              
-
                                                
-
                                              • void cancelled ()  (obsolete)
                                                • 
-
                                              • void canceled ()
                                                • 
-
                                              
-
                                              Properties
                                              
-
                                                
-
                                              • bool autoClose - whether the dialog gets hidden by reset()
                                                • 
-
                                              • bool autoReset - whether the progress dialog calls reset() as soon as progress() equals totalSteps()
                                                • 
-
                                              • TQString labelText - the label's text
                                                • 
-
                                              • int minimumDuration - the time that must pass before the dialog appears
                                                • 
-
                                              • int progress - the current amount of progress made
                                                • 
-
                                              • int totalSteps - the total number of steps
                                                • 
-
                                              • bool wasCanceled - whether the dialog was canceled  (read only)
                                                • 
-
                                              • bool wasCancelled - whether the dialog was canceled  (read only)  (obsolete)
                                                • 
-
                                              
-
                                              Protected Slots
                                              
-
-
                                              Detailed Description
                                              
-
-
-The TQProgressDialog class provides feedback on the progress of a slow operation.
-
-
-
                                               A progress dialog is used to give the user an indication of how long
-an operation is going to take, and to demonstrate that the
-application has not frozen. It can also give the user an opportunity
-to abort the operation.
-
                                               A common problem with progress dialogs is that it is difficult to know
-when to use them; operations take different amounts of time on different
-hardware.  TQProgressDialog offers a solution to this problem:
-it estimates the time the operation will take (based on time for
-steps), and only shows itself if that estimate is beyond minimumDuration()
-(4 seconds by default).
-
                                               Use setTotalSteps() (or the constructor) to set the number of
-"steps" in the operation and call setProgress() as the operation
-progresses. The step value can be chosen arbitrarily. It can be the
-number of files copied, the number of bytes received, the number of
-iterations through the main loop of your algorithm, or some other
-suitable unit.  Progress starts at 0, and the progress dialog shows
-that the operation has finished when you call setProgress() with
-totalSteps() as its argument.
-
                                               The dialog automatically resets and hides itself at the end of the
-operation. Use setAutoReset() and setAutoClose() to change this
-behavior.
-
                                               There are two ways of using TQProgressDialog: modal and modeless.
-
                                               Using a modal TQProgressDialog is simpler for the programmer, but you
-must call TQApplication::processEvents() or
-TQEventLoop::processEvents(ExcludeUserInput) to keep the event loop
-running to ensure that the application doesn't freeze. Do the
-operation in a loop, call setProgress() at intervals, and check
-for cancellation with wasCanceled(). For example:
-
                                              -TQProgressDialog progress( "Copying files...", "Abort Copy", numFiles,
-                          this, "progress", TRUE );
-for ( int i = 0; i < numFiles; i++ ) {
-    progress.setProgress( i );
-    qApp->processEvents();
-
-    if ( progress.wasCanceled() )
-        break;
-    //... copy one file
-}
-progress.setProgress( numFiles );
-
                                              
- 
-
                                               A modeless progress dialog is suitable for operations that take
-place in the background, where the user is able to interact with the
-application. Such operations are typically based on TQTimer (or
-TQObject::timerEvent()), TQSocketNotifier, or TQUrlOperator; or performed
-in a separate thread. A TQProgressBar in the status bar of your main window
-is often an alternative to a modeless progress dialog.
-
                                               You need to have an event loop to be running, connect the
-canceled() signal to a slot that stops the operation, and call setProgress() at intervals. For example:
-
                                              -Operation::Operation( TQObject *parent = 0 )
-    : TQObject( parent ), steps( 0 )
-{
-    pd = new TQProgressDialog( "Operation in progress.", "Cancel", 100 );
-    connect( pd, SIGNAL(canceled()), this, SLOT(cancel()) );
-    t = new TQTimer( this );
-    connect( t, SIGNAL(timeout()), this, SLOT(perform()) );
-    t->start( 0 );
-}
-
-void Operation::perform()
-{
-    pd->setProgress( steps );
-    //... perform one percent of the operation
-    steps++;
-    if ( steps > pd->totalSteps() )
-        t->stop();
-}
-
-void Operation::cancel()
-{
-    t->stop();
-    //... cleanup
-}
-
                                              
- 
-
                                               In both modes the progress dialog may be customized by
-replacing the child widgets with custom widgets by using setLabel(),
-setBar(), and setCancelButton().
-The functions setLabelText() and setCancelButtonText()
-set the texts shown.
-
                                                
-
                                               
                                              See also TQDialog, TQProgressBar, GUI Design Handbook: Progress Indicator, and Dialog Classes.
-
-
                                              Member Function Documentation
                                              
-
                                              TQProgressDialog::TQProgressDialog ( TQWidget * creator = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )
-
                                              
-Constructs a progress dialog.
-
                                               Default settings:
-
                                                
-
                                              •  The label text is empty.
-
                                              •  The cancel button text is (translated) "Cancel".
-
                                              •  The total number of steps is 100.
-
                                              
-
                                               The creator argument is the widget to use as the dialog's parent.
-The name, modal, and the widget flags, f, are
-passed to the TQDialog::TQDialog() constructor. If modal is FALSE (the
-default), you must have an event loop proceeding for any redrawing
-of the dialog to occur. If modal is TRUE, the dialog ensures that
-events are processed when needed.
-
                                               
                                              See also labelText, setLabel(), setCancelButtonText(), setCancelButton(), and totalSteps.
-
-
                                              TQProgressDialog::TQProgressDialog ( const TQString & labelText, const TQString & cancelButtonText, int totalSteps, TQWidget * creator = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )
-
                                              
-Constructs a progress dialog.
-
                                               The labelText is text used to remind the user what is progressing.
-
                                               The cancelButtonText is the text to display on the cancel button,
-or 0 if no cancel button is to be shown.
-
                                               The totalSteps is the total number of steps in the operation for
-which this progress dialog shows progress.  For example, if the
-operation is to examine 50 files, this value would be 50. Before
-examining the first file, call setProgress(0). As each file is
-processed call setProgress(1), setProgress(2), etc., finally
-calling setProgress(50) after examining the last file.
-
                                               The creator argument is the widget to use as the dialog's parent.
-The name, modal, and widget flags, f, are passed to the
-TQDialog::TQDialog() constructor. If modal is FALSE (the default),
-you will must have an event loop proceeding for any redrawing of
-the dialog to occur. If modal is TRUE, the dialog ensures that
-events are processed when needed.
-
                                               
                                              See also labelText, setLabel(), setCancelButtonText(), setCancelButton(), and totalSteps.
-
-
                                              TQProgressDialog::~TQProgressDialog ()
-
                                              
-Destroys the progress dialog.
-
-
                                              bool TQProgressDialog::autoClose () const
-
                                              Returns TRUE if the dialog gets hidden by reset(); otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "autoClose" property for details.
-
                                              bool TQProgressDialog::autoReset () const
-
                                              Returns TRUE if the progress dialog calls reset() as soon as progress() equals totalSteps(); otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "autoReset" property for details.
-
                                              void TQProgressDialog::cancel () [slot]
-
                                              
-Resets the progress dialog. wasCanceled() becomes TRUE until
-the progress dialog is reset.
-The progress dialog becomes hidden.
-
-
                                              void TQProgressDialog::canceled () [signal]
-
                                              
-
-
                                               This signal is emitted when the cancel button is clicked.
-It is connected to the cancel() slot by default.
-
                                               
                                              See also wasCanceled.
-
-
                                              void TQProgressDialog::cancelled () [signal]
-
                                              
-
-
                                               This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                               Use canceled() instead.
-
-
                                              Examples: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h and progress/progress.cpp.
-
                                              void TQProgressDialog::forceShow () [protected slot]
-
                                              
-Shows the dialog if it is still hidden after the algorithm has been started
-and minimumDuration milliseconds have passed.
-
                                               
                                              See also minimumDuration.
-
-
                                              TQString TQProgressDialog::labelText () const
-
                                              Returns the label's text.
-See the "labelText" property for details.
-
                                              int TQProgressDialog::minimumDuration () const
-
                                              Returns the time that must pass before the dialog appears.
-See the "minimumDuration" property for details.
-
                                              int TQProgressDialog::progress () const
-
                                              Returns the current amount of progress made.
-See the "progress" property for details.
-
                                              void TQProgressDialog::reset () [slot]
-
                                              
-Resets the progress dialog.
-The progress dialog becomes hidden if autoClose() is TRUE.
-
                                               
                                              See also autoClose and autoReset.
-
-
                                              Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
-
                                              void TQProgressDialog::setAutoClose ( bool b )
-
                                              Sets whether the dialog gets hidden by reset() to b.
-See the "autoClose" property for details.
-
                                              void TQProgressDialog::setAutoReset ( bool b )
-
                                              Sets whether the progress dialog calls reset() as soon as progress() equals totalSteps() to b.
-See the "autoReset" property for details.
-
                                              void TQProgressDialog::setBar ( TQProgressBar * bar )
-
                                              
-Sets the progress bar widget to bar. The progress dialog resizes to
-fit. The progress dialog takes ownership of the progress bar which
-will be deleted when necessary, so do not use a progress bar
-allocated on the stack.
-
-
                                              void TQProgressDialog::setCancelButton ( TQPushButton * cancelButton )
-
                                              
-Sets the cancel button to the push button, cancelButton. The
-progress dialog takes ownership of this button which will be deleted
-when necessary, so do not pass the address of an object that is on
-the stack, i.e. use new() to create the button.
-
                                               
                                              See also setCancelButtonText().
-
-
                                              void TQProgressDialog::setCancelButtonText ( const TQString & cancelButtonText ) [slot]
-
                                              
-Sets the cancel button's text to cancelButtonText.
-
                                              See also setCancelButton().
-
-
                                              void TQProgressDialog::setLabel ( TQLabel * label )
-
                                              
-Sets the label to label. The progress dialog resizes to fit. The
-label becomes owned by the progress dialog and will be deleted when
-necessary, so do not pass the address of an object on the stack.
-
                                               
                                              See also labelText.
-
-
                                              Example: progress/progress.cpp.
-
                                              void TQProgressDialog::setLabelText ( const TQString & ) [slot]
-
                                              Sets the label's text.
-See the "labelText" property for details.
-
                                              void TQProgressDialog::setMinimumDuration ( int ms ) [slot]
-
                                              Sets the time that must pass before the dialog appears to ms.
-See the "minimumDuration" property for details.
-
                                              void TQProgressDialog::setProgress ( int progress ) [slot]
-
                                              Sets the current amount of progress made to progress.
-See the "progress" property for details.
-
                                              void TQProgressDialog::setProgress ( int progress, int totalSteps ) [slot]
-
                                              
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                               Sets the current amount of progress to progress and the total number of
-steps to totalSteps.
-
                                               
                                              See also totalSteps.
-
-
                                              void TQProgressDialog::setTotalSteps ( int totalSteps ) [slot]
-
                                              Sets the total number of steps to totalSteps.
-See the "totalSteps" property for details.
-
                                              TQSize TQProgressDialog::sizeHint () const [virtual]
-
                                              
-Returns a size that fits the contents of the progress dialog.
-The progress dialog resizes itself as required, so you should not
-need to call this yourself.
-
-
                                              int TQProgressDialog::totalSteps () const
-
                                              Returns the total number of steps.
-See the "totalSteps" property for details.
-
                                              bool TQProgressDialog::wasCanceled () const
-
                                              Returns TRUE if the dialog was canceled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "wasCanceled" property for details.
-
                                              bool TQProgressDialog::wasCancelled () const
-
                                              Returns TRUE if the dialog was canceled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "wasCancelled" property for details.
-
                                              Property Documentation
                                              
-
                                              bool autoClose
                                              
-
                                              This property holds whether the dialog gets hidden by reset().
-
                                              The default is TRUE.
-
                                               
                                              See also autoReset.
-
-
                                              Set this property's value with setAutoClose() and get this property's value with autoClose().
-
                                              bool autoReset
                                              
-
                                              This property holds whether the progress dialog calls reset() as soon as progress() equals totalSteps().
-
                                              The default is TRUE.
-
                                               
                                              See also autoClose.
-
-
                                              Set this property's value with setAutoReset() and get this property's value with autoReset().
-
                                              TQString labelText
                                              
-
                                              This property holds the label's text.
-
                                              The default text is TQString::null.
-
-
                                              Set this property's value with setLabelText() and get this property's value with labelText().
-
                                              int minimumDuration
                                              
-
                                              This property holds the time that must pass before the dialog appears.
-
                                              If the expected duration of the task is less than the
-minimumDuration, the dialog will not appear at all. This prevents
-the dialog popping up for tasks that are tquickly over. For tasks
-that are expected to exceed the minimumDuration, the dialog will
-pop up after the minimumDuration time or as soon as any progress
-is set.
-
                                               If set to 0, the dialog is always shown as soon as any progress is
-set. The default is 4000 milliseconds.
-
-
                                              Set this property's value with setMinimumDuration() and get this property's value with minimumDuration().
-
                                              int progress
                                              
-
                                              This property holds the current amount of progress made.
-
                                              For the progress dialog to work as expected, you should initially set
-this property to 0 and finally set it to
-TQProgressDialog::totalSteps(); you can call setProgress() any number of times
-in-between.
-
                                               Warning: If the progress dialog is modal
-(see TQProgressDialog::TQProgressDialog()),
-this function calls TQApplication::processEvents(), so take care that
-this does not cause undesirable re-entrancy in your code. For example,
-don't use a TQProgressDialog inside a paintEvent()!
-
                                               
                                              See also totalSteps.
-
-
                                              Set this property's value with setProgress() and get this property's value with progress().
-
                                              int totalSteps
                                              
-
                                              This property holds the total number of steps.
-
                                              The default is 0.
-
-
                                              Set this property's value with setTotalSteps() and get this property's value with totalSteps().
-
                                              bool wasCanceled
                                              
-
                                              This property holds whether the dialog was canceled.
-
                                              Get this property's value with wasCanceled().
-
                                              See also progress.
-
-
                                              bool wasCancelled
                                              
-
                                              This property holds whether the dialog was canceled.
-
                                              This property is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                               Use wasCanceled instead.
-
-
                                              Get this property's value with wasCancelled().
-
-
                                              
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                              
-
-
                                              Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                              TQt 3.3.8
                                              
-
                                              
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qptrcollection-h.html b/doc/html/qptrcollection-h.html
index 5b5002c86..fc95314b3 100644
--- a/doc/html/qptrcollection-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qptrcollection-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qptrcollection.h Include File
+ntqptrcollection.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                              
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                              TQPtrCollection Class Reference
                                              
-
-
                                              The TQPtrCollection class is the base class of most pointer-based TQt collections.
-More...
-
                                              All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
                                              
-
                                              #include <qptrcollection.h>
-
                                              Inherited by TQAsciiCache, TQAsciiDict, TQCache, TQDict, TQIntCache, TQIntDict, TQPtrList, TQPtrDict, and TQPtrVector.
-
                                              List of all member functions.
-
                                              Public Members
                                              
-
-
                                              Protected Members
                                              
-
-
                                              Detailed Description
                                              
-
-
-
-The TQPtrCollection class is the base class of most pointer-based TQt collections.
-
                                               
-
-
                                               The TQPtrCollection class is an abstract base class for the TQt
-collection classes TQDict, TQPtrList,
-etc. TQt also includes value based collections, e.g. TQValueList,
-TQMap, etc.
-
                                               A TQPtrCollection only knows about the number of objects in the
-collection and the deletion strategy (see setAutoDelete()).
-
                                               A collection is implemented using the Item (generic collection
-item) type, which is a void*. The template classes that create
-the real collections cast the Item to the required type.
-
                                              See also Collection Classes and Non-GUI Classes.
-
-
                                              Member Type Documentation
                                              
-
                                              TQPtrCollection::Item
                                              
-
-
                                               This type is the generic "item" in a TQPtrCollection.
-
-
                                              Member Function Documentation
                                              
-
                                              TQPtrCollection::TQPtrCollection () [protected]
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Constructs a collection. The constructor is protected because
-TQPtrCollection is an abstract class.
-
-
                                              TQPtrCollection::TQPtrCollection ( const TQPtrCollection & source ) [protected]
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Constructs a copy of source with autoDelete() set to FALSE. The
-constructor is protected because TQPtrCollection is an abstract
-class.
-
                                               Note that if source has autoDelete turned on, copying it will
-risk memory leaks, reading freed memory, or both.
-
-
                                              TQPtrCollection::~TQPtrCollection () [virtual protected]
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Destroys the collection. The destructor is protected because
-TQPtrCollection is an abstract class.
-
-
                                              bool TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE.
-
                                               
                                              See also setAutoDelete().
-
-
                                              void TQPtrCollection::clear () [pure virtual]
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Removes all objects from the collection. The objects will be
-deleted if auto-delete has been enabled.
-
                                               
                                              See also setAutoDelete().
-
-
                                              Reimplemented in TQAsciiCache, TQAsciiDict, TQCache, TQDict, TQIntCache, TQIntDict, TQPtrList, TQPtrDict, and TQPtrVector.
-
                                              uint TQPtrCollection::count () const [pure virtual]
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Returns the number of objects in the collection.
-
-
                                              Reimplemented in TQAsciiCache, TQAsciiDict, TQCache, TQDict, TQIntCache, TQIntDict, TQPtrList, TQPtrDict, and TQPtrVector.
-
                                              void TQPtrCollection::deleteItem ( Item d ) [pure virtual protected]
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Reimplement this function if you want to be able to delete items.
-
                                               Deletes an item that is about to be removed from the collection.
-
                                               This function has to reimplemented in the collection template
-classes, and should only delete item d if auto-delete has
-been enabled.
-
                                               Warning: If you reimplement this function you must also
-reimplement the destructor and call the virtual function clear()
-from your destructor. This is due to the way virtual functions and
-destructors work in C++: Virtual functions in derived classes
-cannot be called from a destructor. If you do not do this, your
-deleteItem() function will not be called when the container is
-destroyed.
-
                                               
                                              See also newItem() and setAutoDelete().
-
-
                                              Item TQPtrCollection::newItem ( Item d ) [virtual protected]
-
                                              
-Virtual function that creates a copy of an object that is about to
-be inserted into the collection.
-
                                               The default implementation returns the d pointer, i.e. no copy
-is made.
-
                                               This function is seldom reimplemented in the collection template
-classes. It is not common practice to make a copy of something
-that is being inserted.
-
                                               
                                              See also deleteItem().
-
-
                                              void TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if enable is
-TRUE and to never delete them if enable is FALSE.
-
                                               If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are
-deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient
-if the collection has the only pointer to the items.
-
                                               The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be
-careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself
-with two collections deleting the same items.
-
                                               Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions
-in subclasses. For example, a subclass that has a remove()
-function will remove the item from its data structure, and if
-auto-delete is enabled, will also delete the item.
-
                                               
                                              See also autoDelete().
-
-
                                              Examples: grapher/grapher.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, and table/bigtable/main.cpp.
-
-
                                              
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                              
-
-
                                              Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                              TQt 3.3.8
                                              
-
                                              
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qptrdict-h.html b/doc/html/qptrdict-h.html
index fc68fed30..0d8efdcb0 100644
--- a/doc/html/qptrdict-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qptrdict-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qptrdict.h Include File
+ntqptrdict.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                              
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                              TQPtrDict Class Reference
                                              
-
-
                                              The TQPtrDict class is a template class that provides a dictionary based on void* keys.
-More...
-
                                              #include <qptrdict.h>
-
                                              Inherits TQPtrCollection.
-
                                              List of all member functions.
-
                                              Public Members
                                              
-
-
                                              Important Inherited Members
                                              
-
-
                                              Protected Members
                                              
-
                                                
-
                                              • virtual TQDataStream & read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item )
                                                • 
-
                                              • virtual TQDataStream & write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item ) const
                                                • 
-
                                              
-
                                              Detailed Description
                                              
-
-
-The TQPtrDict class is a template class that provides a dictionary based on void* keys.
-
                                               
-
-
                                               
-
                                               TQPtrDict is implemented as a template class. Define a template
-instance TQPtrDict<X> to create a dictionary that operates on
-pointers to X (X*).
-
                                               A dictionary is a collection of key-value pairs. The key is a
-void* used for insertion, removal and lookup. The value is a
-pointer. Dictionaries provide very fast insertion and lookup.
-
                                               Example:
-
                                              -    TQPtrDict<char> fields; // void* keys, char* values
-
-    TQLineEdit *le1 = new TQLineEdit( this );
-    le1->setText( "Simpson" );
-    TQLineEdit *le2 = new TQLineEdit( this );
-    le2->setText( "Homer" );
-    TQLineEdit *le3 = new TQLineEdit( this );
-    le3->setText( "45" );
-
-    fields.insert( le1, "Surname" );
-    fields.insert( le2, "Forename" );
-    fields.insert( le3, "Age" );
-
-    TQPtrDictIterator<char> it( fields );
-    for( ; it.current(); ++it )
-        cout << it.current() << endl;
-    cout << endl;
-
-    if ( fields[le1] ) // Prints "Surname: Simpson"
-        cout << fields[le1] << ": " << le1->text() << endl; 
-    if ( fields[le2] ) // Prints "Forename: Homer"
-        cout << fields[le2] << ": " << le2->text() << endl; 
-
-    fields.remove( le1 ); // Removes le1 from the dictionary
-    cout << le1->text() << endl; // Prints "Simpson"
-    
                                              
- 
-In this example we use a dictionary to add an extra property (a
-char*) to the line edits we're using. 
-
                                               See TQDict for full details, including the choice of dictionary
-size, and how deletions are handled. 
-
                                               
                                              See also TQPtrDictIterator, TQDict, TQAsciiDict, TQIntDict, Collection Classes, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
-
-
                                              Member Function Documentation
                                              
-
                                              TQPtrDict::TQPtrDict ( int size = 17 )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Constructs a dictionary using an internal hash array with the size
-size.
-
                                               Setting size to a suitably large prime number (equal to or
-greater than the expected number of entries) makes the hash
-distribution better and improves lookup performance.
-
-
                                              TQPtrDict::TQPtrDict ( const TQPtrDict<type> & dict )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Constructs a copy of dict.
-
                                               Each item in dict is inserted into this dictionary. Only the
-pointers are copied (shallow copy).
-
-
                                              TQPtrDict::~TQPtrDict ()
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Removes all items from the dictionary and destroys it.
-
                                               All iterators that access this dictionary will be reset.
-
                                               
                                              See also setAutoDelete().
-
-
                                              bool TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE.
-
                                               
                                              See also setAutoDelete().
-
-
                                              void TQPtrDict::clear () [virtual]
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Removes all items from the dictionary.
-
                                               The removed items are deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
-
                                               All dictionary iterators that access this dictionary will be
-reset.
-
                                               
                                              See also remove(), take(), and setAutoDelete().
-
-
                                              Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
-
                                              uint TQPtrDict::count () const [virtual]
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Returns the number of items in the dictionary.
-
                                               
                                              See also isEmpty().
-
-
                                              Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
-
                                              type * TQPtrDict::find ( void * key ) const
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Returns the item associated with key, or 0 if the key does not
-exist in the dictionary.
-
                                               If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most
-recently inserted item will be found.
-
                                               Equivalent to operator[].
-
                                               
                                              See also operator[]().
-
-
                                              void TQPtrDict::insert ( void * key, const type * item )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Inserts the key with the item into the dictionary.
-
                                               Multiple items can have the same key, in which case only the last
-item will be accessible using operator[]().
-
                                               item may not be 0.
-
                                               
                                              See also replace().
-
-
                                              bool TQPtrDict::isEmpty () const
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                               
                                              See also count().
-
-
                                              TQPtrDict<type> & TQPtrDict::operator= ( const TQPtrDict<type> & dict )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Assigns dict to this dictionary and returns a reference to this
-dictionary.
-
                                               This dictionary is first cleared and then each item in dict is
-inserted into the dictionary. Only the pointers are copied
-(shallow copy), unless newItem() has been reimplemented.
-
-
                                              type * TQPtrDict::operator[] ( void * key ) const
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Returns the item associated with key, or 0 if the key does not
-exist in the dictionary.
-
                                               If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most
-recently inserted item will be found.
-
                                               Equivalent to the find() function.
-
                                               
                                              See also find().
-
-
                                              TQDataStream & TQPtrDict::read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item ) [virtual protected]
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Reads a dictionary item from the stream s and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
                                               The default implementation sets item to 0.
-
                                               
                                              See also write().
-
-
                                              bool TQPtrDict::remove ( void * key )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Removes the item associated with key from the dictionary.
-Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if key is in the dictionary;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                               If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most
-recently inserted item will be removed.
-
                                               The removed item is deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
-
                                               All dictionary iterators that refer to the removed item will be
-set to point to the next item in the dictionary traversal order.
-
                                               
                                              See also take(), clear(), and setAutoDelete().
-
-
                                              void TQPtrDict::replace ( void * key, const type * item )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               If the dictionary has key key, this key's item is replaced with
-item. If the dictionary doesn't contain key key, item is
-inserted into the dictionary using key key. 
-
                                               item may not be 0.
-
                                               Equivalent to
-
                                              -        TQPtrDict<ItemType> dict;
-            ...
-        if ( dict.find( key ) )
-            dict.remove( key );
-        dict.insert( key, item );
-    
                                              
- 
-
                                               If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most
-recently inserted item will be replaced.
-
                                               
                                              See also insert().
-
-
                                              void TQPtrDict::resize ( uint newsize )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Changes the size of the hash table to newsize. The contents of
-the dictionary are preserved, but all iterators on the dictionary
-become invalid.
-
-
                                              void TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if enable is
-TRUE and to never delete them if enable is FALSE.
-
                                               If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are
-deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient
-if the collection has the only pointer to the items.
-
                                               The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be
-careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself
-with two collections deleting the same items.
-
                                               Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions
-in subclasses. For example, a subclass that has a remove()
-function will remove the item from its data structure, and if
-auto-delete is enabled, will also delete the item.
-
                                               
                                              See also autoDelete().
-
-
                                              Examples: grapher/grapher.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, and table/bigtable/main.cpp.
-
                                              uint TQPtrDict::size () const
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Returns the size of the internal hash table (as specified in the
-constructor).
-
                                               
                                              See also count().
-
-
                                              void TQPtrDict::statistics () const
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Debugging-only function that prints out the dictionary
-distribution using qDebug().
-
-
                                              type * TQPtrDict::take ( void * key )
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Takes the item associated with key out of the dictionary
-without deleting it (even if auto-deletion is enabled).
-
                                               If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most
-recently inserted item will be removed.
-
                                               Returns a pointer to the item taken out, or 0 if the key does not
-exist in the dictionary.
-
                                               All dictionary iterators that refer to the taken item will be set
-to point to the next item in the dictionary traversal order.
-
                                               
                                              See also remove(), clear(), and setAutoDelete().
-
-
                                              TQDataStream & TQPtrDict::write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item ) const [virtual protected]
-
                                              
-
-
                                               Writes a dictionary item to the stream s and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
                                               
                                              See also read().
-
-
-
                                              
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                              
-
-
                                              Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                              TQt 3.3.8
                                              
-
                                              
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qptrdictiterator-members.html b/doc/html/qptrdictiterator-members.html
index 910f39592..d6806314e 100644
--- a/doc/html/qptrdictiterator-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qptrdictiterator-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qptrdictiterator.html b/doc/html/qptrdictiterator.html
index 1ae2100f3..8e4f56d1c 100644
--- a/doc/html/qptrdictiterator.html
+++ b/doc/html/qptrdictiterator.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                              The TQPtrDictIterator class provides an iterator for TQPtrDict collections.
 More...
-
                                              #include <qptrdict.h>
+
                                              #include <ntqptrdict.h>
 
                                              List of all member functions.
 
                                              Public Members
                                              
 
                                                
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                                Detailed Description
                                                
 
 
-The TQPtrDictIterator class provides an iterator for TQPtrDict collections.
+The TQPtrDictIterator class provides an iterator for TQPtrDict collections.
 
                                                 
 
 
                                                 TQPtrDictIterator is implemented as a template class. Define a
@@ -60,23 +60,23 @@ template instance TQPtrDictIterator<X> to create a dictionary
 iterator that operates on TQPtrDict<X> (dictionary of X*).
 
                                                 Example:
 
                                                -    TQPtrDict<char> fields;
+    TQPtrDict<char> fields;
 
-    TQLineEdit *le1 = new TQLineEdit( this );
-    le1->setText( "Simpson" );
-    TQLineEdit *le2 = new TQLineEdit( this );
-    le2->setText( "Homer" );
-    TQLineEdit *le3 = new TQLineEdit( this );
-    le3->setText( "45" );
+    TQLineEdit *le1 = new TQLineEdit( this );
+    le1->setText( "Simpson" );
+    TQLineEdit *le2 = new TQLineEdit( this );
+    le2->setText( "Homer" );
+    TQLineEdit *le3 = new TQLineEdit( this );
+    le3->setText( "45" );
 
-    fields.insert( le1, "Surname" );
-    fields.insert( le2, "Forename" );
-    fields.insert( le3, "Age" );
+    fields.insert( le1, "Surname" );
+    fields.insert( le2, "Forename" );
+    fields.insert( le3, "Age" );
 
     TQPtrDictIterator<char> it( fields );
     for( ; it.current(); ++it ) {
-        TQLineEdit *le = (TQLineEdit)it.currentKey();
-        cout << it.current() << ": " << le->text() << endl;
+        TQLineEdit *le = (TQLineEdit)it.currentKey();
+        cout << it.current() << ": " << le->text() << endl;
     }
     cout << endl;
 
@@ -90,14 +90,14 @@ In the example we insert some line edits into a dictionary,
 associating a string with each. We then iterate over the
 dictionary printing the associated strings.
 
                                                 Multiple iterators may independently traverse the same dictionary.
-A TQPtrDict knows about all the iterators that are operating on the
+A TQPtrDict knows about all the iterators that are operating on the
 dictionary. When an item is removed from the dictionary, TQPtrDict
 updates all iterators that refer the removed item to point to the
 next item in the traversing order.
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQPtrDict, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
                                                 
                                                See also TQPtrDict, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
 
 
                                                Member Function Documentation
                                                
-
                                                TQPtrDictIterator::TQPtrDictIterator ( const TQPtrDict<type> & dict )
+
                                                TQPtrDictIterator::TQPtrDictIterator ( const TQPtrDict<type> & dict )
 
                                                
 
 
                                                 Constructs an iterator for dict. The current iterator item is
diff --git a/doc/html/qptrlist-h.html b/doc/html/qptrlist-h.html
index 9dfdcf97e..73e6f053c 100644
--- a/doc/html/qptrlist-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qptrlist-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qptrlist.h Include File
+ntqptrlist.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                TQPtrList Class Reference
                                                
-
-
                                                The TQPtrList class is a template class that provides a list.
-More...
-
                                                #include <qptrlist.h>
-
                                                Inherits TQPtrCollection.
-
                                                Inherited by TQObjectList, TQSortedList, and TQStrList.
-
                                                List of all member functions.
-
                                                Public Members
                                                
-
-
                                                Important Inherited Members
                                                
-
-
                                                Protected Members
                                                
-
                                                  
-
                                                • virtual int compareItems ( TQPtrCollection::Item item1, TQPtrCollection::Item item2 )
                                                  • 
-
                                                • virtual TQDataStream & read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item )
                                                  • 
-
                                                • virtual TQDataStream & write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item item ) const
                                                  • 
-
                                                
-
                                                Detailed Description
                                                
-
-
-The TQPtrList class is a template class that provides a list.
-
                                                 
-
-
                                                 
-
                                                 TQValueList is an STL-compatible alternative to this class.
-
                                                 Define a template instance TQPtrList<X> to create a list that
-operates on pointers to X (X*).
-
                                                 The list class is indexable and has a current
-    index and a current item. The
-first item corresponds to index position 0. The current index is
--1 if the current item is 0.
-
                                                 Items are inserted with prepend(), insert() or append(). Items are
-removed with remove(), removeRef(), removeFirst() and
-removeLast(). You can search for an item using find(), findNext(),
-findRef() or findNextRef(). The list can be sorted with sort().
-You can count the number of occurrences of an item with contains()
-or containsRef(). You can get a pointer to the current item with
-current(), to an item at a particular index position in the list
-with at() or to the first or last item with getFirst() and
-getLast(). You can also iterate over the list with first(),
-last(), next() and prev() (which all update current()). The list's
-deletion property is set with setAutoDelete().
-
                                                 
-Example:
-
                                                -    class Employee
-    {
-    public:
-        Employee() : sn( 0 ) { }
-        Employee( const TQString& forename, const TQString& surname, int salary )
-            : fn( forename ), sn( surname ), sal( salary )
-        { }
-
-        void setSalary( int salary ) { sal = salary; }
-
-        TQString forename() const { return fn; }
-        TQString surname() const { return sn; }
-        int salary() const { return sal; }
-
-    private:
-        TQString fn;
-        TQString sn;
-        int sal;
-    };
-
-    TQPtrList<Employee> list;
-    list.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); // the list owns the objects
-
-    list.append( new Employee("John", "Doe", 50000) );
-    list.append( new Employee("Jane", "Williams", 80000) );
-    list.append( new Employee("Tom", "Jones", 60000) );
-
-    Employee *employee;
-    for ( employee = list.first(); employee; employee = list.next() )
-        cout << employee->surname().latin1() << ", " <<
-                employee->forename().latin1() << " earns " <<
-                employee->salary() << endl;
-    cout << endl;
-
-    // very inefficient for big lists
-    for ( uint i = 0; i < list.count(); ++i )
-        if ( list.at(i) )
-            cout << list.at( i )->surname().latin1() << endl;
-    
                                                
- 
-
                                                 The output is
-
                                                -    Doe, John earns 50000
-    Williams, Jane earns 80000
-    Jones, Tom earns 60000
-
-    Doe
-    Williams
-    Jones
-    
                                                
- 
-
                                                 TQPtrList has several member functions for traversing the list, but
-using a TQPtrListIterator can be more practical. Multiple list
-iterators may traverse the same list, independently of each other
-and of the current list item.
-
                                                 In the example above we make the call setAutoDelete(TRUE).
-Enabling auto-deletion tells the list to delete items that are
-removed. The default is to not delete items when they are removed
-but this would cause a memory leak in the example because there
-are no other references to the list items.
-
                                                 When inserting an item into a list only the pointer is copied, not
-the item itself, i.e. a shallow copy. It is possible to make the
-list copy all of the item's data (deep copy) when an item is
-inserted. insert(), inSort() and append() call the virtual
-function TQPtrCollection::newItem() for the item to be inserted.
-Inherit a list and reimplement newItem() to have deep copies.
-
                                                 When removing an item from a list, the virtual function
-TQPtrCollection::deleteItem() is called. TQPtrList's default
-implementation is to delete the item if auto-deletion is enabled.
-
                                                 The virtual function compareItems() can be reimplemented to
-compare two list items. This function is called from all list
-functions that need to compare list items, for instance
-remove(const type*). If you only want to deal with pointers, there
-are functions that compare pointers instead, for instance
-removeRef(const type*). These functions are somewhat faster than
-those that call compareItems().
-
                                                 List items are stored as void* in an internal TQLNode, which
-also holds pointers to the next and previous list items. The
-functions currentNode(), removeNode(), and takeNode() operate
-directly on the TQLNode, but they should be used with care. The
-data component of the node is available through TQLNode::getData().
-
                                                 The TQStrList class defined in qstrlist.h is a list of char*.
-It reimplements newItem(), deleteItem() and compareItems(). (But
-see TQStringList for a list of Unicode TQStrings.)
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQPtrListIterator, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
-
-
                                                Member Function Documentation
                                                
-
                                                TQPtrList::TQPtrList ()
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Constructs an empty list.
-
-
                                                TQPtrList::TQPtrList ( const TQPtrList<type> & list )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Constructs a copy of list.
-
                                                 Each item in list is appended to this
-list. Only the pointers are copied (shallow copy).
-
-
                                                TQPtrList::~TQPtrList ()
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Removes all items from the list and destroys the list.
-
                                                 All list iterators that access this list will be reset.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setAutoDelete().
-
-
                                                void TQPtrList::append ( const type * item )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Inserts the item at the end of the list.
-
                                                 The inserted item becomes the current list item. This is
-equivalent to insert( count(), item ).
-
                                                 item must not be 0.
-
                                                 
                                                See also insert(), current(), and prepend().
-
-
                                                Examples: customlayout/border.cpp, customlayout/card.cpp, customlayout/flow.cpp, grapher/grapher.cpp, listviews/listviews.cpp, listviews/listviews.h, and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
-
                                                type * TQPtrList::at ( uint index )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns a pointer to the item at position index in the list, or
-0 if the index is out of range.
-
                                                 Sets the current list item to this item if index is valid. The
-valid range is 0..(count() - 1) inclusive.
-
                                                 This function is very efficient. It starts scanning from the first
-item, last item, or current item, whichever is closest to index.
-
                                                 
                                                See also current().
-
-
                                                Examples: customlayout/border.cpp, customlayout/card.cpp, customlayout/flow.cpp, dirview/dirview.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
-
                                                int TQPtrList::at () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                 Returns the index of the current list item. The returned value is
--1 if the current item is 0.
-
                                                 
                                                See also current().
-
-
                                                bool TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setAutoDelete().
-
-
                                                void TQPtrList::clear () [virtual]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Removes all items from the list.
-
                                                 The removed items are deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
-
                                                 All list iterators that access this list will be reset.
-
                                                 
                                                See also remove(), take(), and setAutoDelete().
-
-
                                                Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
-
                                                int TQPtrList::compareItems ( TQPtrCollection::Item item1, TQPtrCollection::Item item2 ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This virtual function compares two list items.
-
                                                 Returns:
-
                                                  
-
                                                •  zero if item1 == item2
-
                                                •  nonzero if item1 != item2
-
                                                
-
                                                 This function returns int rather than bool so that
-reimplementations can return three values and use it to sort by:
-
                                                 
                                                  
-
                                                •  0 if item1 == item2
-
                                                •  > 0 (positive integer) if item1 > item2
-
                                                •  < 0 (negative integer) if item1 < item2
-
                                                
-
                                                 inSort() requires that compareItems() is implemented as described
-here.
-
                                                 This function should not modify the list because some const
-functions call compareItems().
-
                                                 The default implementation compares the pointers.
-
-
                                                uint TQPtrList::contains ( const type * item ) const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the number of occurrences of item in the list.
-
                                                 The compareItems() function is called when looking for the item
-in the list. If compareItems() is not reimplemented, it is more
-efficient to call containsRef().
-
                                                 This function does not affect the current list item.
-
                                                 
                                                See also containsRef() and compareItems().
-
-
                                                uint TQPtrList::containsRef ( const type * item ) const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the number of occurrences of item in the list.
-
                                                 Calling this function is much faster than contains() because
-contains() compares item with each list item using
-compareItems(), whereas his function only compares the pointers.
-
                                                 This function does not affect the current list item.
-
                                                 
                                                See also contains().
-
-
                                                uint TQPtrList::count () const [virtual]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the number of items in the list.
-
                                                 
                                                See also isEmpty().
-
-
                                                Examples: customlayout/border.cpp, customlayout/card.cpp, customlayout/flow.cpp, dirview/dirview.cpp, grapher/grapher.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
-
                                                Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
-
                                                type * TQPtrList::current () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns a pointer to the current list item. The current item may
-be 0 (implies that the current index is -1). 
-
                                                 
                                                See also at().
-
-
                                                TQLNode * TQPtrList::currentNode () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns a pointer to the current list node.
-
                                                 The node can be kept and removed later using removeNode(). The
-advantage is that the item can be removed directly without
-searching the list.
-
                                                 Warning: Do not call this function unless you are an expert.
-
                                                 
                                                See also removeNode(), takeNode(), and current().
-
-
                                                int TQPtrList::find ( const type * item )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Finds the first occurrence of item in the list.
-
                                                 If the item is found, the list sets the current item to point to
-the found item and returns the index of this item. If the item is
-not found, the list sets the current item to 0, the current
-index to -1, and returns -1.
-
                                                 The compareItems() function is called when searching for the item
-in the list. If compareItems() is not reimplemented, it is more
-efficient to call findRef().
-
                                                 
                                                See also findNext(), findRef(), compareItems(), and current().
-
-
                                                int TQPtrList::findNext ( const type * item )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Finds the next occurrence of item in the list, starting from
-the current list item.
-
                                                 If the item is found, the list sets the current item to point to
-the found item and returns the index of this item. If the item is
-not found, the list sets the current item to 0, the current
-index to -1, and returns -1.
-
                                                 The compareItems() function is called when searching for the item
-in the list. If compareItems() is not reimplemented, it is more
-efficient to call findNextRef().
-
                                                 
                                                See also find(), findNextRef(), compareItems(), and current().
-
-
                                                int TQPtrList::findNextRef ( const type * item )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Finds the next occurrence of item in the list, starting from
-the current list item.
-
                                                 If the item is found, the list sets the current item to point to
-the found item and returns the index of this item. If the item is
-not found, the list sets the current item to 0, the current
-index to -1, and returns -1.
-
                                                 Calling this function is much faster than findNext() because
-findNext() compares item with each list item using
-compareItems(), whereas this function only compares the pointers.
-
                                                 
                                                See also findRef(), findNext(), and current().
-
-
                                                int TQPtrList::findRef ( const type * item )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Finds the first occurrence of item in the list.
-
                                                 If the item is found, the list sets the current item to point to
-the found item and returns the index of this item. If the item is
-not found, the list sets the current item to 0, the current
-index to -1, and returns -1.
-
                                                 Calling this function is much faster than find() because find()
-compares item with each list item using compareItems(), whereas
-this function only compares the pointers.
-
                                                 
                                                See also findNextRef(), find(), and current().
-
-
                                                type * TQPtrList::first ()
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns a pointer to the first item in the list and makes this the
-current list item; returns 0 if the list is empty.
-
                                                 
                                                See also getFirst(), last(), next(), prev(), and current().
-
-
                                                Examples: grapher/grapher.cpp, listviews/listviews.h, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-
                                                type * TQPtrList::getFirst () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns a pointer to the first item in the list, or 0 if the list
-is empty.
-
                                                 This function does not affect the current list item.
-
                                                 
                                                See also first() and getLast().
-
-
                                                type * TQPtrList::getLast () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns a pointer to the last item in the list, or 0 if the list
-is empty.
-
                                                 This function does not affect the current list item.
-
                                                 
                                                See also last() and getFirst().
-
-
                                                void TQPtrList::inSort ( const type * item )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Inserts the item at its sorted position in the list.
-
                                                 The sort order depends on the virtual compareItems() function. All
-items must be inserted with inSort() to maintain the sorting
-order.
-
                                                 The inserted item becomes the current list item.
-
                                                 item must not be 0.
-
                                                 Warning: Using inSort() is slow. An alternative, especially if you
-have lots of items, is to simply append() or insert() them and
-then use sort(). inSort() takes up to O(n) compares. That means
-inserting n items in your list will need O(n^2) compares whereas
-sort() only needs O(n*log n) for the same task. So use inSort()
-only if you already have a presorted list and want to insert just
-a few additional items.
-
                                                 
                                                See also insert(), compareItems(), current(), and sort().
-
-
                                                bool TQPtrList::insert ( uint index, const type * item )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Inserts the item at position index in the list.
-
                                                 Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if index is in range;
-otherwise returns FALSE. The valid range is 0 to count()
-(inclusively). The item is appended if index == count().
-
                                                 The inserted item becomes the current list item.
-
                                                 item must not be 0.
-
                                                 
                                                See also append(), current(), and replace().
-
-
                                                bool TQPtrList::isEmpty () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns TRUE if the list is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also count().
-
-
                                                type * TQPtrList::last ()
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns a pointer to the last item in the list and makes this the
-current list item; returns 0 if the list is empty.
-
                                                 
                                                See also getLast(), first(), next(), prev(), and current().
-
-
                                                type * TQPtrList::next ()
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns a pointer to the item succeeding the current item. Returns
-0 if the current item is 0 or equal to the last item.
-
                                                 Makes the succeeding item current. If the current item before this
-function call was the last item, the current item will be set to
-0. If the current item was 0, this function does nothing.
-
                                                 
                                                See also first(), last(), prev(), and current().
-
-
                                                Examples: grapher/grapher.cpp, listviews/listviews.h, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-
                                                bool TQPtrList::operator!= ( const TQPtrList<type> & list ) const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Compares this list with list. Returns TRUE if the lists contain
-different data; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                TQPtrList<type> & TQPtrList::operator= ( const TQPtrList<type> & list )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Assigns list to this list and returns a reference to this list.
-
                                                 This list is first cleared and then each item in list is appended to this list. Only the pointers are
-copied (shallow copy) unless newItem() has been reimplemented.
-
-
                                                bool TQPtrList::operator== ( const TQPtrList<type> & list ) const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Compares this list with list. Returns TRUE if the lists contain
-the same data; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                void TQPtrList::prepend ( const type * item )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Inserts the item at the start of the list.
-
                                                 The inserted item becomes the current list item. This is
-equivalent to insert( 0, item ).
-
                                                 item must not be 0.
-
                                                 
                                                See also append(), insert(), and current().
-
-
                                                type * TQPtrList::prev ()
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns a pointer to the item preceding the current item. Returns
-0 if the current item is 0 or equal to the first item.
-
                                                 Makes the preceding item current. If the current item before this
-function call was the first item, the current item will be set to
-0. If the current item was 0, this function does nothing.
-
                                                 
                                                See also first(), last(), next(), and current().
-
-
                                                TQDataStream & TQPtrList::read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Reads a list item from the stream s and returns a reference to
-the stream.
-
                                                 The default implementation sets item to 0.
-
                                                 
                                                See also write().
-
-
                                                bool TQPtrList::remove ( uint index )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Removes the item at position index in the list.
-
                                                 Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if index is in range;
-otherwise returns FALSE. The valid range is 0..(count() - 1)
-inclusive.
-
                                                 The removed item is deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
-
                                                 The item after the removed item becomes the new current list item
-if the removed item is not the last item in the list. If the last
-item is removed, the new last item becomes the current item.
-
                                                 All list iterators that refer to the removed item will be set to
-point to the new current item.
-
                                                 
                                                See also take(), clear(), setAutoDelete(), current(), and removeRef().
-
-
                                                bool TQPtrList::remove ()
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                 Removes the current list item.
-
                                                 Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the current item isn't 0;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                 The removed item is deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
-
                                                 The item after the removed item becomes the new current list item
-if the removed item is not the last item in the list. If the last
-item is removed, the new last item becomes the current item. The
-current item is set to 0 if the list becomes empty.
-
                                                 All list iterators that refer to the removed item will be set to
-point to the new current item.
-
                                                 
                                                See also take(), clear(), setAutoDelete(), current(), and removeRef().
-
-
                                                bool TQPtrList::remove ( const type * item )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                 Removes the first occurrence of item from the list.
-
                                                 Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if item is in the list;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                 The removed item is deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
-
                                                 The compareItems() function is called when searching for the item
-in the list. If compareItems() is not reimplemented, it is more
-efficient to call removeRef().
-
                                                 If item is NULL then the current item is removed from the list.
-
                                                 The item after the removed item becomes the new current list item
-if the removed item is not the last item in the list. If the last
-item is removed, the new last item becomes the current item. The
-current item is set to 0 if the list becomes empty.
-
                                                 All list iterators that refer to the removed item will be set to
-point to the new current item.
-
                                                 
                                                See also removeRef(), take(), clear(), setAutoDelete(), compareItems(), and current().
-
-
                                                bool TQPtrList::removeFirst ()
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Removes the first item from the list. Returns TRUE if successful,
-i.e. if the list isn't empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                 The removed item is deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
-
                                                 The first item in the list becomes the new current list item. The
-current item is set to 0 if the list becomes empty.
-
                                                 All list iterators that refer to the removed item will be set to
-point to the new current item.
-
                                                 
                                                See also removeLast(), setAutoDelete(), current(), and remove().
-
-
                                                bool TQPtrList::removeLast ()
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Removes the last item from the list. Returns TRUE if successful,
-i.e. if the list isn't empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                 The removed item is deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
-
                                                 The last item in the list becomes the new current list item. The
-current item is set to 0 if the list becomes empty.
-
                                                 All list iterators that refer to the removed item will be set to
-point to the new current item.
-
                                                 
                                                See also removeFirst(), setAutoDelete(), and current().
-
-
                                                void TQPtrList::removeNode ( TQLNode * node )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Removes the node from the list.
-
                                                 This node must exist in the list, otherwise the program may crash.
-
                                                 The removed item is deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
-
                                                 The first item in the list will become the new current list item.
-The current item is set to 0 if the list becomes empty.
-
                                                 All list iterators that refer to the removed item will be set to
-point to the item succeeding this item or to the preceding item if
-the removed item was the last item.
-
                                                 Warning: Do not call this function unless you are an expert.
-
                                                 
                                                See also takeNode(), currentNode(), remove(), and removeRef().
-
-
                                                bool TQPtrList::removeRef ( const type * item )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Removes the first occurrence of item from the list.
-
                                                 Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if item is in the list;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                 The removed item is deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
-
                                                 Equivalent to:
-
                                                -        if ( list.findRef( item ) != -1 )
-            list.remove();
-    
                                                
- 
-
                                                 The item after the removed item becomes the new current list item
-if the removed item is not the last item in the list. If the last
-item is removed, the new last item becomes the current item. The
-current item is set to 0 if the list becomes empty.
-
                                                 All list iterators that refer to the removed item will be set to
-point to the new current item.
-
                                                 
                                                See also remove(), clear(), setAutoDelete(), and current().
-
-
                                                bool TQPtrList::replace ( uint index, const type * item )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Replaces the item at position index with the new item. 
-
                                                 Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. index is in the range 0 to
-count()-1.
-
                                                 
                                                See also append(), current(), and insert().
-
-
                                                void TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if enable is
-TRUE and to never delete them if enable is FALSE.
-
                                                 If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are
-deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient
-if the collection has the only pointer to the items.
-
                                                 The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be
-careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself
-with two collections deleting the same items.
-
                                                 Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions
-in subclasses. For example, a subclass that has a remove()
-function will remove the item from its data structure, and if
-auto-delete is enabled, will also delete the item.
-
                                                 
                                                See also autoDelete().
-
-
                                                Examples: grapher/grapher.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, and table/bigtable/main.cpp.
-
                                                void TQPtrList::sort ()
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Sorts the list by the result of the virtual compareItems()
-function.
-
                                                 The heap sort algorithm is used for sorting. It sorts n items with
-O(n*log n) comparisons. This is the asymptotic optimal solution of
-the sorting problem.
-
                                                 If the items in your list support operator<() and operator==(),
-you might be better off with TQSortedList because it implements the
-compareItems() function for you using these two operators.
-
                                                 
                                                See also inSort().
-
-
                                                type * TQPtrList::take ( uint index )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Takes the item at position index out of the list without
-deleting it (even if auto-deletion
-is enabled).
-
                                                 Returns a pointer to the item taken out of the list, or 0 if the
-index is out of range. The valid range is 0..(count() - 1)
-inclusive.
-
                                                 The item after the removed item becomes the new current list item
-if the removed item is not the last item in the list. If the last
-item is removed, the new last item becomes the current item. The
-current item is set to 0 if the list becomes empty.
-
                                                 All list iterators that refer to the taken item will be set to
-point to the new current item.
-
                                                 
                                                See also remove(), clear(), and current().
-
-
                                                Examples: customlayout/border.cpp, customlayout/card.cpp, and customlayout/flow.cpp.
-
                                                type * TQPtrList::take ()
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                 Takes the current item out of the list without deleting it (even
-if auto-deletion is enabled).
-
                                                 Returns a pointer to the item taken out of the list, or 0 if
-the current item is 0.
-
                                                 The item after the removed item becomes the new current list item
-if the removed item is not the last item in the list. If the last
-item is removed, the new last item becomes the current item. The
-current item is set to 0 if the list becomes empty.
-
                                                 All list iterators that refer to the taken item will be set to
-point to the new current item.
-
                                                 
                                                See also remove(), clear(), and current().
-
-
                                                type * TQPtrList::takeNode ( TQLNode * node )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Takes the node out of the list without deleting its item (even
-if auto-deletion is enabled).
-Returns a pointer to the item taken out of the list.
-
                                                 This node must exist in the list, otherwise the program may crash.
-
                                                 The first item in the list becomes the new current list item.
-
                                                 All list iterators that refer to the taken item will be set to
-point to the item succeeding this item or to the preceding item if
-the taken item was the last item.
-
                                                 Warning: Do not call this function unless you are an expert.
-
                                                 
                                                See also removeNode() and currentNode().
-
-
                                                void TQPtrList::toVector ( TQGVector * vec ) const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Stores all list items in the vector vec.
-
                                                 The vector must be of the same item type, otherwise the result
-will be undefined.
-
-
                                                TQDataStream & TQPtrList::write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item item ) const [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Writes a list item, item to the stream s and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
                                                 The default implementation does nothing.
-
                                                 
                                                See also read().
-
-
-
                                                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                
-
-
                                                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                TQt 3.3.8
                                                
-
                                                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qptrlistiterator-members.html b/doc/html/qptrlistiterator-members.html
index 875806e0c..468b6fd14 100644
--- a/doc/html/qptrlistiterator-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qptrlistiterator-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qptrlistiterator.html b/doc/html/qptrlistiterator.html
index 15485115b..dc98f3c9b 100644
--- a/doc/html/qptrlistiterator.html
+++ b/doc/html/qptrlistiterator.html
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                                The TQPtrListIterator class provides an iterator for
 TQPtrList collections.
 More...
-
                                                #include <qptrlist.h>
+
                                                #include <ntqptrlist.h>
 
                                                Inherited by TQObjectListIterator and TQStrListIterator.
 
                                                List of all member functions.
 
                                                Public Members
                                                
@@ -61,19 +61,19 @@ TQPtrList collections.
 
 
 The TQPtrListIterator class provides an iterator for
-TQPtrList collections.
+TQPtrList collections.
 
                                                 
 
 
                                                 Define a template instance TQPtrListIterator<X> to create a list
 iterator that operates on TQPtrList<X> (list of X*).
-
                                                 The following example is similar to the example in the TQPtrList class documentation, but it uses TQPtrListIterator. The class Employee is
+
                                                 The following example is similar to the example in the TQPtrList class documentation, but it uses TQPtrListIterator. The class Employee is
 defined there.
 
                                                 
                                                -    TQPtrList<Employee> list;
+    TQPtrList<Employee> list;
 
-    list.append( new Employee("John", "Doe", 50000) );
-    list.append( new Employee("Jane", "Williams", 80000) );
-    list.append( new Employee("Tom", "Jones", 60000) );
+    list.append( new Employee("John", "Doe", 50000) );
+    list.append( new Employee("Jane", "Williams", 80000) );
+    list.append( new Employee("Tom", "Jones", 60000) );
 
     TQPtrListIterator<Employee> it( list );
     Employee *employee;
@@ -93,17 +93,17 @@ defined there.
     
                                                
  
 
                                                 Using a list iterator is a more robust way of traversing the list
-than using the TQPtrList member functions first(), next(), current(), etc., as many iterators can
+than using the TQPtrList member functions first(), next(), current(), etc., as many iterators can
 traverse the same list independently.
 
                                                 An iterator has its own current list item and can get the next and
 previous list items. It doesn't modify the list in any way.
 
                                                 When an item is removed from the list, all iterators that point to
-that item are updated to point to TQPtrList::current() instead to
+that item are updated to point to TQPtrList::current() instead to
 avoid dangling references.
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQPtrList, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
                                                 
                                                See also TQPtrList, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
 
 
                                                Member Function Documentation
                                                
-
                                                TQPtrListIterator::TQPtrListIterator ( const TQPtrList<type> & list )
+
                                                TQPtrListIterator::TQPtrListIterator ( const TQPtrList<type> & list )
 
                                                
 
 
                                                 Constructs an iterator for list. The current iterator item is
diff --git a/doc/html/qptrqueue-h.html b/doc/html/qptrqueue-h.html
index 17cab99eb..9b5b49781 100644
--- a/doc/html/qptrqueue-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qptrqueue-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qptrqueue.h Include File
+ntqptrqueue.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                TQPtrQueue Class Reference
                                                
-
-
                                                The TQPtrQueue class is a template class that provides a queue.
-More...
-
                                                #include <qptrqueue.h>
-
                                                List of all member functions.
-
                                                Public Members
                                                
-
-
                                                Protected Members
                                                
-
                                                  
-
                                                • virtual TQDataStream & read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item )
                                                  • 
-
                                                • virtual TQDataStream & write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item item ) const
                                                  • 
-
                                                
-
                                                Detailed Description
                                                
-
-
-The TQPtrQueue class is a template class that provides a queue.
-
                                                 
-
-
                                                 TQValueVector can be used as an STL-compatible alternative to this
-class.
-
                                                 A template instance TQPtrQueue<X> is a queue that operates on
-pointers to X (X*).
-
                                                 A queue is a first in, first out structure. Items are added to the
-tail of the queue with enqueue() and retrieved from the head with
-dequeue(). You can peek at the head item without dequeing it using
-head().
-
                                                 You can control the queue's deletion policy with setAutoDelete().
-
                                                 For compatibility with the TQPtrCollection classes, current() and
-remove() are provided; both operate on the head().
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQPtrList, TQPtrStack, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
-
-
                                                Member Function Documentation
                                                
-
                                                TQPtrQueue::TQPtrQueue ()
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Creates an empty queue with autoDelete() set to FALSE.
-
-
                                                TQPtrQueue::TQPtrQueue ( const TQPtrQueue<type> & queue )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Creates a queue from queue.
-
                                                 Only the pointers are copied; the items are not. The autoDelete()
-flag is set to FALSE.
-
-
                                                TQPtrQueue::~TQPtrQueue ()
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Destroys the queue. Items in the queue are deleted if autoDelete()
-is TRUE.
-
-
                                                bool TQPtrQueue::autoDelete () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is
-FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setAutoDelete().
-
-
                                                void TQPtrQueue::clear ()
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Removes all items from the queue, and deletes them if autoDelete()
-is TRUE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also remove().
-
-
                                                uint TQPtrQueue::count () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the number of items in the queue.
-
                                                 
                                                See also isEmpty().
-
-
                                                type * TQPtrQueue::current () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns a pointer to the head item in the queue. The queue is not
-changed. Returns 0 if the queue is empty.
-
                                                 
                                                See also dequeue() and isEmpty().
-
-
                                                type * TQPtrQueue::dequeue ()
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Takes the head item from the queue and returns a pointer to it.
-Returns 0 if the queue is empty.
-
                                                 
                                                See also enqueue() and count().
-
-
                                                void TQPtrQueue::enqueue ( const type * d )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Adds item d to the tail of the queue.
-
                                                 
                                                See also count() and dequeue().
-
-
                                                type * TQPtrQueue::head () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns a pointer to the head item in the queue. The queue is not
-changed. Returns 0 if the queue is empty.
-
                                                 
                                                See also dequeue() and isEmpty().
-
-
                                                bool TQPtrQueue::isEmpty () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns TRUE if the queue is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also count(), dequeue(), and head().
-
-
                                                TQPtrQueue::operator type * () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns a pointer to the head item in the queue. The queue is not
-changed. Returns 0 if the queue is empty.
-
                                                 
                                                See also dequeue() and isEmpty().
-
-
                                                TQPtrQueue<type> & TQPtrQueue::operator= ( const TQPtrQueue<type> & queue )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Assigns queue to this queue and returns a reference to this
-queue.
-
                                                 This queue is first cleared and then each item in queue is
-enqueued to this queue. Only the pointers are copied.
-
                                                 Warning: The autoDelete() flag is not modified. If it it TRUE for
-both queue and this queue, deleting the two lists will cause double-deletion of the items.
-
-
                                                TQDataStream & TQPtrQueue::read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Reads a queue item, item, from the stream s and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
                                                 The default implementation sets item to 0.
-
                                                 
                                                See also write().
-
-
                                                bool TQPtrQueue::remove ()
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Removes the head item from the queue, and returns TRUE if there
-was an item, i.e. the queue wasn't empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                 The item is deleted if autoDelete() is TRUE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also head(), isEmpty(), and dequeue().
-
-
                                                void TQPtrQueue::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Sets the queue to auto-delete its contents if enable is TRUE
-and not to delete them if enable is FALSE.
-
                                                 If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a queue are
-deleted when the queue itself is deleted. This can be quite
-convenient if the queue has the only pointer to the items.
-
                                                 The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be
-careful about copying the queue: you might find yourself with two
-queues deleting the same items.
-
                                                 
                                                See also autoDelete().
-
-
                                                TQDataStream & TQPtrQueue::write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item item ) const [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Writes a queue item, item, to the stream s and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
                                                 The default implementation does nothing.
-
                                                 
                                                See also read().
-
-
-
                                                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                
-
-
                                                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                TQt 3.3.8
                                                
-
                                                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qptrstack-h.html b/doc/html/qptrstack-h.html
index 7ea917619..740557d88 100644
--- a/doc/html/qptrstack-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qptrstack-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qptrstack.h Include File
+ntqptrstack.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                TQPtrStack Class Reference
                                                
-
-
                                                The TQPtrStack class is a template class that provides a stack.
-More...
-
                                                #include <qptrstack.h>
-
                                                List of all member functions.
-
                                                Public Members
                                                
-
-
                                                Protected Members
                                                
-
                                                  
-
                                                • virtual TQDataStream & read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item )
                                                  • 
-
                                                • virtual TQDataStream & write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item item ) const
                                                  • 
-
                                                
-
                                                Detailed Description
                                                
-
-
-The TQPtrStack class is a template class that provides a stack.
-
                                                 
-
                                                 TQValueStack is an STL-compatible alternative to this class.
-
                                                 Define a template instance TQPtrStack<X> to create a stack that
-operates on pointers to X, (X*). 
-
                                                 A stack is a last in, first out (LIFO) structure. Items are added
-to the top of the stack with push() and retrieved from the top
-with pop(). Use top() to get a reference to the top element
-without changing the stack.
-
                                                 You can control the stack's deletion policy with setAutoDelete().
-
                                                 For compatibility with the TQPtrCollection classes current() and
-remove() are provided; they both operate on the top().
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQPtrList, TQPtrQueue, and Non-GUI Classes.
-
-
                                                Member Function Documentation
                                                
-
                                                TQPtrStack::TQPtrStack ()
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Creates an empty stack.
-
-
                                                TQPtrStack::TQPtrStack ( const TQPtrStack<type> & s )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Creates a stack by making a shallow copy of another stack s.
-
-
                                                TQPtrStack::~TQPtrStack ()
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Destroys the stack. All items will be deleted if autoDelete() is
-TRUE.
-
-
                                                bool TQPtrStack::autoDelete () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 The same as TQPtrCollection::autoDelete().
-
                                                 
                                                See also setAutoDelete().
-
-
                                                void TQPtrStack::clear ()
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Removes all items from the stack, deleting them if autoDelete() is
-TRUE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also remove().
-
-
                                                uint TQPtrStack::count () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the number of items in the stack.
-
                                                 
                                                See also isEmpty().
-
-
                                                type * TQPtrStack::current () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns a pointer to the top item on the stack (most recently
-pushed). The stack is not changed. Returns 0 if the stack is
-empty.
-
-
                                                bool TQPtrStack::isEmpty () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns TRUE if the stack contains no elements; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
-
                                                TQPtrStack::operator type * () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns a pointer to the top item on the stack (most recently
-pushed). The stack is not changed. Returns 0 if the stack is
-empty.
-
-
                                                TQPtrStack<type> & TQPtrStack::operator= ( const TQPtrStack<type> & s )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Sets the contents of this stack by making a shallow copy of
-another stack s. Elements currently in this stack will be
-deleted if autoDelete() is TRUE.
-
-
                                                type * TQPtrStack::pop ()
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Removes the top item from the stack and returns it. The stack must
-not be empty.
-
-
                                                void TQPtrStack::push ( const type * d )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Adds an element d to the top of the stack. Last in, first out.
-
-
                                                TQDataStream & TQPtrStack::read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Reads a stack item, item, from the stream s and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
                                                 The default implementation sets item to 0.
-
                                                 
                                                See also write().
-
-
                                                bool TQPtrStack::remove ()
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Removes the top item from the stack and deletes it if autoDelete()
-is TRUE. Returns TRUE if there was an item to pop; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also clear().
-
-
                                                void TQPtrStack::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Defines whether this stack auto-deletes its contents. The same as
-TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete().
-
                                                 If enable is TRUE the stack auto-deletes its contents; if enable is FALSE the stack does not delete its contents.
-
                                                 
                                                See also autoDelete().
-
-
                                                type * TQPtrStack::top () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns a pointer to the top item on the stack (most recently
-pushed). The stack is not changed. Returns 0 if the stack is
-empty.
-
-
                                                TQDataStream & TQPtrStack::write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item item ) const [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Writes a stack item, item, to the stream s and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
                                                 The default implementation does nothing.
-
                                                 
                                                See also read().
-
-
-
                                                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                
-
-
                                                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                TQt 3.3.8
                                                
-
                                                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qptrvector-h.html b/doc/html/qptrvector-h.html
index dd19b566e..2e49044b2 100644
--- a/doc/html/qptrvector-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qptrvector-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qptrvector.h Include File
+ntqptrvector.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                TQPtrVector Class Reference
                                                
-
-
                                                The TQPtrVector class is a template collection class that
-provides a vector (array).
-More...
-
                                                #include <qptrvector.h>
-
                                                Inherits TQPtrCollection.
-
                                                List of all member functions.
-
                                                Public Members
                                                
-
-
                                                Important Inherited Members
                                                
-
-
                                                Protected Members
                                                
-
                                                  
-
                                                • virtual int compareItems ( TQPtrCollection::Item d1, TQPtrCollection::Item d2 )
                                                  • 
-
                                                • virtual TQDataStream & read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item )
                                                  • 
-
                                                • virtual TQDataStream & write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item item ) const
                                                  • 
-
                                                
-
                                                Detailed Description
                                                
-
-
-The TQPtrVector class is a template collection class that
-provides a vector (array).
-
                                                 
-
                                                 
-
                                                 TQValueVector is an STL-compatible alternative to this class.
-
                                                 TQPtrVector is implemented as a template class. Defines a template
-instance TQPtrVector<X> to create a vector that contains pointers
-to X (X*).
-
                                                 A vector is the same as an array. The main difference between
-TQPtrVector and TQMemArray is that TQPtrVector stores pointers to the
-elements, whereas TQMemArray stores the elements themselves (i.e.
-TQMemArray is value-based and TQPtrVector is pointer-based).
-
                                                 Items are added to the vector using insert() or fill(). Items are
-removed with remove(). You can get a pointer to an item at a
-particular index position using at().
-
                                                 Unless otherwise stated, all functions that remove items from the
-vector will also delete the element pointed to if auto-deletion is enabled. By default,
-auto-deletion is disabled; see setAutoDelete(). This behaviour can
-be changed in a subclass by reimplementing the virtual function
-deleteItem().
-
                                                 Functions that compare items (find() and sort() for example) will
-do so using the virtual function compareItems(). The default
-implementation of this function only compares the pointer values.
-Reimplement compareItems() in a subclass to get searching and
-sorting based on the item contents. You can perform a linear
-search for a pointer in the vector using findRef(), or a binary
-search (of a sorted vector) using bsearch(). You can count the
-number of times an item appears in the vector with contains() or
-containsRef().
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQMemArray and Non-GUI Classes.
-
-
                                                Member Function Documentation
                                                
-
                                                TQPtrVector::TQPtrVector ()
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Constructs a null vector.
-
                                                 
                                                See also isNull().
-
-
                                                TQPtrVector::TQPtrVector ( uint size )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Constructs an vector with room for size items. Makes a null
-vector if size == 0.
-
                                                 All size positions in the vector are initialized to 0.
-
                                                 
                                                See also size(), resize(), and isNull().
-
-
                                                TQPtrVector::TQPtrVector ( const TQPtrVector<type> & v )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Constructs a copy of v. Only the pointers are copied (i.e.
-shallow copy).
-
-
                                                TQPtrVector::~TQPtrVector ()
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Removes all items from the vector, and destroys the vector itself.
-
                                                 
                                                See also clear().
-
-
                                                type * TQPtrVector::at ( uint i ) const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the item at position i, or 0 if there is no item at
-that position. i must be less than size().
-
-
                                                bool TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setAutoDelete().
-
-
                                                int TQPtrVector::bsearch ( const type * d ) const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 In a sorted array, finds the first occurrence of d using a
-binary search. For a sorted array, this is generally much faster
-than find(), which performs a linear search.
-
                                                 Returns the position of d, or -1 if d could not be found. d must not be 0.
-
                                                 Compares items using the virtual function compareItems().
-
                                                 
                                                See also sort() and find().
-
-
                                                void TQPtrVector::clear () [virtual]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Removes all items from the vector, and destroys the vector itself.
-
                                                 The vector becomes a null vector.
-
                                                 
                                                See also isNull().
-
-
                                                Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
-
                                                int TQPtrVector::compareItems ( TQPtrCollection::Item d1, TQPtrCollection::Item d2 ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This virtual function compares two list items.
-
                                                 Returns:
-
                                                  
-
                                                •  zero if d1 == d2
-
                                                •  nonzero if d1 != d2
-
                                                
-
                                                 This function returns int rather than bool so that
-reimplementations can return one of three values and use it to
-sort by:
-
                                                  
-
                                                •  0 if d1 == d2
-
                                                •  > 0 (positive integer) if d1 > d2
-
                                                •  < 0 (negative integer) if d1 < d2
-
                                                
-
                                                 The sort() and bsearch() functions require compareItems() to be
-implemented as described here.
-
                                                 This function should not modify the vector because some const
-functions call compareItems().
-
-
                                                uint TQPtrVector::contains ( const type * d ) const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the number of occurrences of item d in the vector.
-
                                                 Compares items using the virtual function compareItems().
-
                                                 
                                                See also containsRef().
-
-
                                                uint TQPtrVector::containsRef ( const type * d ) const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the number of occurrences of the item pointer d in the
-vector.
-
                                                 This function does not use compareItems() to compare items.
-
                                                 
                                                See also findRef().
-
-
                                                uint TQPtrVector::count () const [virtual]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the number of items in the vector. The vector is empty if
-count() == 0.
-
                                                 
                                                See also isEmpty(), size(), and isNull().
-
-
                                                Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
-
                                                type ** TQPtrVector::data () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns a pointer to the actual vector data, which is an array of
-type*.
-
                                                 The vector is a null vector if data() == 0 (null pointer).
-
                                                 
                                                See also isNull().
-
-
                                                bool TQPtrVector::fill ( const type * d, int size = -1 )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Inserts item d in all positions in the vector. Any existing
-items are removed. If d is 0, the vector becomes empty.
-
                                                 If size >= 0, the vector is first resized to size. By
-default, size is -1.
-
                                                 Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. size is the same as the
-current size, or size is larger and the memory has successfully
-been allocated; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also resize(), insert(), and isEmpty().
-
-
                                                int TQPtrVector::find ( const type * d, uint i = 0 ) const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Finds the first occurrence of item d in the vector using a
-linear search. The search starts at position i, which must be
-less than size(). i is by default 0; i.e. the search starts at
-the start of the vector.
-
                                                 Returns the position of d, or -1 if d could not be found.
-
                                                 Compares items using the virtual function compareItems().
-
                                                 Use the much faster bsearch() to search a sorted vector.
-
                                                 
                                                See also findRef() and bsearch().
-
-
                                                int TQPtrVector::findRef ( const type * d, uint i = 0 ) const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Finds the first occurrence of the item pointer d in the vector
-using a linear search. The search starts at position i, which
-must be less than size(). i is by default 0; i.e. the search
-starts at the start of the vector.
-
                                                 Returns the position of d, or -1 if d could not be found.
-
                                                 This function does not use compareItems() to compare items.
-
                                                 Use the much faster bsearch() to search a sorted vector.
-
                                                 
                                                See also find() and bsearch().
-
-
                                                bool TQPtrVector::insert ( uint i, const type * d )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Sets position i in the vector to contain the item d. i
-must be less than size(). Any previous element in position i is
-removed.
-
                                                 
                                                See also at().
-
-
                                                bool TQPtrVector::isEmpty () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns TRUE if the vector is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also count().
-
-
                                                bool TQPtrVector::isNull () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns TRUE if the vector is null; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                 A null vector has size() == 0 and data() == 0.
-
                                                 
                                                See also size().
-
-
                                                TQPtrVector<type> & TQPtrVector::operator= ( const TQPtrVector<type> & v )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Assigns v to this vector and returns a reference to this
-vector.
-
                                                 This vector is first cleared and then all the items from v are
-copied into the vector. Only the pointers are copied (i.e. shallow copy).
-
                                                 
                                                See also clear().
-
-
                                                bool TQPtrVector::operator== ( const TQPtrVector<type> & v ) const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns TRUE if this vector and v are equal; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
-
                                                type * TQPtrVector::operator[] ( int i ) const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the item at position i, or 0 if there is no item at
-that position. i must be less than size().
-
                                                 Equivalent to at( i ).
-
                                                 
                                                See also at().
-
-
                                                TQDataStream & TQPtrVector::read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Reads a vector item, item, from the stream s and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
                                                 The default implementation sets item to 0.
-
                                                 
                                                See also write().
-
-
                                                bool TQPtrVector::remove ( uint i )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Removes the item at position i in the vector, if there is one.
-i must be less than size().
-
                                                 Returns TRUE if i is within range; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also take() and at().
-
-
                                                bool TQPtrVector::resize ( uint size )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Resizes (expands or shrinks) the vector to size elements. The
-vector becomes a null vector if size == 0.
-
                                                 Any items at position size or beyond in the vector are removed.
-New positions are initialized to 0.
-
                                                 Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the memory was successfully
-allocated; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also size() and isNull().
-
-
                                                void TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if enable is
-TRUE and to never delete them if enable is FALSE.
-
                                                 If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are
-deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient
-if the collection has the only pointer to the items.
-
                                                 The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be
-careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself
-with two collections deleting the same items.
-
                                                 Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions
-in subclasses. For example, a subclass that has a remove()
-function will remove the item from its data structure, and if
-auto-delete is enabled, will also delete the item.
-
                                                 
                                                See also autoDelete().
-
-
                                                Examples: grapher/grapher.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, and table/bigtable/main.cpp.
-
                                                uint TQPtrVector::size () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the size of the vector, i.e. the number of vector
-positions. This is also the maximum number of items the vector can
-hold.
-
                                                 The vector is a null vector if size() == 0.
-
                                                 
                                                See also isNull(), resize(), and count().
-
-
                                                void TQPtrVector::sort ()
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Sorts the items in ascending order. Any empty positions will be
-put last.
-
                                                 Compares items using the virtual function compareItems().
-
                                                 
                                                See also bsearch().
-
-
                                                type * TQPtrVector::take ( uint i )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the item at position i in the vector, and removes that
-item from the vector. i must be less than size(). If there is
-no item at position i, 0 is returned.
-
                                                 Unlike remove(), this function does not call deleteItem() for
-the removed item.
-
                                                 
                                                See also remove() and at().
-
-
                                                TQDataStream & TQPtrVector::write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item item ) const [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Writes a vector item, item, to the stream s and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
                                                 The default implementation does nothing.
-
                                                 
                                                See also read().
-
-
-
                                                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                
-
-
                                                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                TQt 3.3.8
                                                
-
                                                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qpushbutton-h.html b/doc/html/qpushbutton-h.html
index 3fe4802f2..924311a36 100644
--- a/doc/html/qpushbutton-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qpushbutton-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qpushbutton.h Include File
+ntqpushbutton.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                TQPushButton Class Reference
                                                
-
-
                                                The TQPushButton widget provides a command button.
-More...
-
                                                #include <qpushbutton.h>
-
                                                Inherits TQButton.
-
                                                List of all member functions.
-
                                                Public Members
                                                
-
-
                                                Public Slots
                                                
-
                                                  
-
                                                • virtual void setOn ( bool )
                                                  • 
-
                                                
-
                                                Important Inherited Members
                                                
-
-
                                                Properties
                                                
-
                                                  
-
                                                • bool autoDefault - whether the push button is the auto default button
                                                  • 
-
                                                • bool autoMask - whether the button is automatically masked  (read only)
                                                  • 
-
                                                • bool default - whether the push button is the default button
                                                  • 
-
                                                • bool flat - whether the border is disabled
                                                  • 
-
                                                • TQIconSet iconSet - the icon set on the push button
                                                  • 
-
                                                • bool menuButton - whether the push button has a menu button on it  (read only)  (obsolete)
                                                  • 
-
                                                • bool on - whether the push button is toggled
                                                  • 
-
                                                • bool toggleButton - whether the button is a toggle button
                                                  • 
-
                                                
-
                                                Detailed Description
                                                
-
-
-The TQPushButton widget provides a command button.
-
                                                 
-
-
                                                 The push button, or command button, is perhaps the most commonly
-used widget in any graphical user interface. Push (click) a button
-to command the computer to perform some action, or to answer a
-question. Typical buttons are OK, Apply, Cancel, Close, Yes, No
-and Help.
-
                                                 A command button is rectangular and typically displays a text
-label describing its action. An underlined character in the label
-(signified by preceding it with an ampersand in the text)
-indicates an accelerator key, e.g.
-
                                                -        TQPushButton *pb = new TQPushButton( "&Download", this );
-    
                                                
- 
-In this example the accelerator is Alt+D, and the label text
-will be displayed as Download.
-
                                                 Push buttons can display a textual label or a pixmap, and
-optionally a small icon. These can be set using the constructors
-and changed later using setText(), setPixmap() and setIconSet().
-If the button is disabled the appearance of the text or pixmap and
-iconset will be manipulated with respect to the GUI style to make
-the button look "disabled".
-
                                                 A push button emits the signal clicked() when it is activated by
-the mouse, the Spacebar or by a keyboard accelerator. Connect to
-this signal to perform the button's action. Push buttons also
-provide less commonly used signals, for example, pressed() and
-released().
-
                                                 Command buttons in dialogs are by default auto-default buttons,
-i.e. they become the default push button automatically when they
-receive the keyboard input focus. A default button is a push
-button that is activated when the user presses the Enter or Return
-key in a dialog. You can change this with setAutoDefault(). Note
-that auto-default buttons reserve a little extra space which is
-necessary to draw a default-button indicator. If you do not want
-this space around your buttons, call setAutoDefault(FALSE).
-
                                                 Being so central, the button widget has grown to accommodate a
-great many variations in the past decade. The Microsoft style
-guide now shows about ten different states of Windows push buttons
-and the text implies that there are dozens more when all the
-combinations of features are taken into consideration.
-
                                                 The most important modes or states are:
-
                                                  
-
                                                •  Available or not (grayed out, disabled).
-
                                                •  Standard push button, toggling push button or menu button.
-
                                                •  On or off (only for toggling push buttons).
-
                                                •  Default or normal. The default button in a dialog can generally
-be "clicked" using the Enter or Return key.
-
                                                •  Auto-repeat or not.
-
                                                •  Pressed down or not.
-
                                                
-
                                                 As a general rule, use a push button when the application or
-dialog window performs an action when the user clicks on it (such
-as Apply, Cancel, Close and Help) and when the widget is
-supposed to have a wide, rectangular shape with a text label.
-Small, typically square buttons that change the state of the
-window rather than performing an action (such as the buttons in
-the top-right corner of the TQFileDialog) are not command buttons,
-but tool buttons. TQt provides a special class (TQToolButton) for
-these buttons.
-
                                                 If you need toggle behavior (see setToggleButton()) or a button
-that auto-repeats the activation signal when being pushed down
-like the arrows in a scroll bar (see setAutoRepeat()), a command
-button is probably not what you want. When in doubt, use a tool
-button.
-
                                                 A variation of a command button is a menu button. These provide
-not just one command, but several, since when they are clicked
-they pop up a menu of options. Use the method setPopup() to
-associate a popup menu with a push button.
-
                                                 Other classes of buttons are option buttons (see TQRadioButton) and
-check boxes (see TQCheckBox).
-
                                                  
-
                                                 In TQt, the TQButton abstract base class provides most of the modes
-and other API, and TQPushButton provides GUI logic. See TQButton for
-more information about the API.
-
                                                 
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQToolButton, TQRadioButton, TQCheckBox, GUI Design Handbook: Push Button, and Basic Widgets.
-
-
                                                Member Function Documentation
                                                
-
                                                TQPushButton::TQPushButton ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                
-Constructs a push button with no text.
-
                                                 The parent and name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
-
                                                TQPushButton::TQPushButton ( const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                
-Constructs a push button called name with the parent parent
-and the text text.
-
-
                                                TQPushButton::TQPushButton ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                
-Constructs a push button with an icon and a text.
-
                                                 Note that you can also pass a TQPixmap object as an icon (thanks to
-the implicit type conversion provided by C++).
-
                                                 The parent and name arguments are sent to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
-
                                                TQPushButton::~TQPushButton ()
-
                                                
-Destroys the push button.
-
-
                                                TQKeySequence TQButton::accel () const
-
                                                Returns the accelerator associated with the button.
-See the "accel" property for details.
-
                                                bool TQPushButton::autoDefault () const
-
                                                Returns TRUE if the push button is the auto default button; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "autoDefault" property for details.
-
                                                bool TQButton::autoRepeat () const
-
                                                Returns TRUE if autoRepeat is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "autoRepeat" property for details.
-
                                                void TQButton::clicked () [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted when the button is activated (i.e. first
-pressed down and then released when the mouse cursor is inside the
-button), when the accelerator key is typed or when animateClick()
-is called. This signal is not emitted if you call setDown().
-
                                                 The TQButtonGroup::clicked() signal does the same job, if you want
-to connect several buttons to the same slot.
-
                                                 Warning: Don't launch a model dialog in response to this signal
-for a button that has autoRepeat turned on.
-
                                                 
                                                See also pressed(), released(), toggled(), autoRepeat, and down.
-
-
                                                Examples: chart/setdataform.cpp, listbox/listbox.cpp, network/clientserver/client/client.cpp, progressbar/progressbar.cpp, richtext/richtext.cpp, t2/main.cpp, and t4/main.cpp.
-
                                                TQButtonGroup * TQButton::group () const
-
                                                
-Returns the group that this button belongs to.
-
                                                 If the button is not a member of any TQButtonGroup, this function
-returns 0.
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQButtonGroup.
-
-
                                                TQIconSet * TQPushButton::iconSet () const
-
                                                Returns the icon set on the push button.
-See the "iconSet" property for details.
-
                                                bool TQPushButton::isDefault () const
-
                                                Returns TRUE if the push button is the default button; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "default" property for details.
-
                                                bool TQButton::isDown () const
-
                                                Returns TRUE if the button is pressed; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "down" property for details.
-
                                                bool TQButton::isExclusiveToggle () const
-
                                                Returns TRUE if the button is an exclusive toggle; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "exclusiveToggle" property for details.
-
                                                bool TQPushButton::isFlat () const
-
                                                Returns TRUE if the border is disabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "flat" property for details.
-
                                                bool TQPushButton::isMenuButton () const
-
                                                Returns TRUE if the push button has a menu button on it; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "menuButton" property for details.
-
                                                bool TQButton::isOn () const
-
                                                Returns TRUE if the button is toggled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "on" property for details.
-
                                                bool TQButton::isToggleButton () const
-
                                                Returns TRUE if the button is a toggle button; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "toggleButton" property for details.
-
                                                const TQPixmap * TQButton::pixmap () const
-
                                                Returns the pixmap shown on the button.
-See the "pixmap" property for details.
-
                                                TQPopupMenu * TQPushButton::popup () const
-
                                                
-Returns the button's associated popup menu or 0 if no popup menu
-has been set.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setPopup().
-
-
                                                void TQButton::pressed () [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted when the button is pressed down.
-
                                                 
                                                See also released() and clicked().
-
-
                                                Examples: network/httpd/httpd.cpp and popup/popup.cpp.
-
                                                void TQButton::released () [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted when the button is released.
-
                                                 
                                                See also pressed(), clicked(), and toggled().
-
-
                                                void TQButton::setAccel ( const TQKeySequence & ) [virtual]
-
                                                Sets the accelerator associated with the button.
-See the "accel" property for details.
-
                                                void TQPushButton::setAutoDefault ( bool autoDef ) [virtual]
-
                                                Sets whether the push button is the auto default button to autoDef.
-See the "autoDefault" property for details.
-
                                                void TQButton::setAutoRepeat ( bool ) [virtual]
-
                                                Sets whether autoRepeat is enabled.
-See the "autoRepeat" property for details.
-
                                                void TQPushButton::setDefault ( bool def ) [virtual]
-
                                                Sets whether the push button is the default button to def.
-See the "default" property for details.
-
                                                void TQButton::setDown ( bool ) [virtual]
-
                                                Sets whether the button is pressed.
-See the "down" property for details.
-
                                                void TQPushButton::setFlat ( bool )
-
                                                Sets whether the border is disabled.
-See the "flat" property for details.
-
                                                void TQPushButton::setIconSet ( const TQIconSet & )
-
                                                Sets the icon set on the push button.
-See the "iconSet" property for details.
-
                                                void TQPushButton::setIsMenuButton ( bool enable ) [virtual]
-
                                                
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                                 
-
-
                                                void TQPushButton::setOn ( bool ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                Sets whether the push button is toggled.
-See the "on" property for details.
-
                                                void TQButton::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & ) [virtual]
-
                                                Sets the pixmap shown on the button.
-See the "pixmap" property for details.
-
                                                void TQPushButton::setPopup ( TQPopupMenu * popup )
-
                                                
-Associates the popup menu popup with this push button. This
-turns the button into a menu button.
-
                                                 Ownership of the popup menu is not transferred to the push
-button.
-
                                                 
                                                See also popup().
-
-
                                                Examples: buttongroups/buttongroups.cpp and qdir/qdir.cpp.
-
                                                void TQButton::setText ( const TQString & ) [virtual]
-
                                                Sets the text shown on the button.
-See the "text" property for details.
-
                                                void TQPushButton::setToggleButton ( bool )
-
                                                Sets whether the button is a toggle button.
-See the "toggleButton" property for details.
-
                                                ToggleState TQButton::state () const
-
                                                Returns the state of the toggle button.
-See the "toggleState" property for details.
-
                                                void TQButton::stateChanged ( int state ) [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes state. state is On if the button is on, NoChange if it is in the
-"no change" state or Off
-if the button is off.
-
                                                 This may be the result of a user action, toggle() slot activation,
-setState(), or because setOn() was called.
-
                                                 
                                                See also clicked() and TQButton::ToggleState.
-
-
                                                TQString TQButton::text () const
-
                                                Returns the text shown on the button.
-See the "text" property for details.
-
                                                void TQButton::toggle () [slot]
-
                                                
-Toggles the state of a toggle button.
-
                                                 
                                                See also on, on, toggled(), and toggleButton.
-
-
                                                void TQButton::toggled ( bool on ) [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes status. on is TRUE if the button is on, or FALSE if the button is off.
-
                                                 This may be the result of a user action, toggle() slot activation,
-or because setOn() was called.
-
                                                 
                                                See also clicked().
-
-
                                                Example: listbox/listbox.cpp.
-
                                                Property Documentation
                                                
-
                                                TQKeySequence accel
                                                
-
                                                This property holds the accelerator associated with the button.
-
                                                This property is 0 if there is no accelerator set. If you set this
-property to 0 then any current accelerator is removed.
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setAccel() and get this property's value with accel().
-
                                                bool autoDefault
                                                
-
                                                This property holds whether the push button is the auto default button.
-
                                                If this property is set to TRUE then the push button is the auto
-default button in a dialog.
-
                                                 In some GUI styles a default button is drawn with an extra frame
-around it, up to 3 pixels or more. TQt automatically keeps this
-space free around auto-default buttons, i.e. auto-default buttons
-may have a slightly larger size hint.
-
                                                 This property's default is TRUE for buttons that have a TQDialog
-parent; otherwise it defaults to FALSE.
-
                                                 See the default property for details of how default and
-auto-default interact.
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setAutoDefault() and get this property's value with autoDefault().
-
                                                bool autoMask
                                                
-
                                                This property holds whether the button is automatically masked.
-
                                                See also TQWidget::autoMask.
-
-
                                                bool autoRepeat
                                                
-
                                                This property holds whether autoRepeat is enabled.
-
                                                If autoRepeat is enabled then the clicked() signal is emitted at
-regular intervals if the button is down. This property has no
-effect on toggle buttons. autoRepeat is off by default.
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setAutoRepeat() and get this property's value with autoRepeat().
-
                                                bool default
                                                
-
                                                This property holds whether the push button is the default button.
-
                                                If this property is set to TRUE then the push button will be
-pressed if the user presses the Enter (or Return) key in a dialog.
-
                                                 Regardless of focus, if the user presses Enter: If there is a
-default button the default button is pressed; otherwise, if
-there are one or more autoDefault buttons the first autoDefault
-button that is next in the tab order is pressed. If there are no
-default or autoDefault buttons only pressing Space on a button
-with focus, mouse clicking, or using an accelerator will press a
-button.
-
                                                 In a dialog, only one push button at a time can be the default
-button. This button is then displayed with an additional frame
-(depending on the GUI style).
-
                                                 The default button behavior is provided only in dialogs. Buttons
-can always be clicked from the keyboard by pressing Enter (or
-Return) or the Spacebar when the button has focus.
-
                                                 This property's default is FALSE.
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setDefault() and get this property's value with isDefault().
-
                                                bool flat
                                                
-
                                                This property holds whether the border is disabled.
-
                                                This property's default is FALSE.
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setFlat() and get this property's value with isFlat().
-
                                                TQIconSet iconSet
                                                
-
                                                This property holds the icon set on the push button.
-
                                                This property will return 0 if the push button has no iconset.
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setIconSet() and get this property's value with iconSet().
-
                                                bool menuButton
                                                 
                                                This property holds whether the push button has a menu button on it.
-
                                                This property is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                                 If this property is set to TRUE, then a down arrow is drawn on the push
-button to indicate that a menu will pop up if the user clicks on the
-arrow.
-
-
                                                Get this property's value with isMenuButton().
-
                                                bool on
                                                
-
                                                This property holds whether the push button is toggled.
-
                                                This property should only be set for toggle push buttons. The
-default value is FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also on, toggle(), toggled(), and toggleButton.
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setOn().
-
                                                TQPixmap pixmap
                                                
-
                                                This property holds the pixmap shown on the button.
-
                                                If the pixmap is monochrome (i.e. it is a TQBitmap or its depth is 1) and it does not have a mask,
-this property will set the pixmap to be its own mask. The purpose
-of this is to draw transparent bitmaps which are important for
-toggle buttons, for example.
-
                                                 pixmap() returns 0 if no pixmap was set.
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setPixmap() and get this property's value with pixmap().
-
                                                TQString text
                                                
-
                                                This property holds the text shown on the button.
-
                                                This property will return a TQString::null if the button has no
-text. If the text has an ampersand (&) in it, then an
-accelerator is automatically created for it using the character
-that follows the '&' as the accelerator key. Any previous
-accelerator will be overwritten, or cleared if no accelerator is
-defined by the text.
-
                                                 There is no default text.
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setText() and get this property's value with text().
-
                                                bool toggleButton
                                                
-
                                                This property holds whether the button is a toggle button.
-
                                                Toggle buttons have an on/off state similar to check boxes. A push button is initially not a toggle
-button.
-
                                                 
                                                See also on, toggle(), toggleButton, and toggled().
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setToggleButton().
-
-
                                                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                
-
-
                                                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                TQt 3.3.8
                                                
-
                                                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qqueue.html b/doc/html/qqueue.html
deleted file mode 100644
index bae21df45..000000000
--- a/doc/html/qqueue.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
-
-
-TQQueue Class Reference (obsolete)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                TQQueue Class Reference (obsolete)
                                                
-
- 
-
                                                 
                                                -#include <qqueue.h>
                                                
- 
-
                                                 The TQQueue class has been renamed  TQPtrQueue  in TQt 3.0.
-
-
-
                                                
-
-
                                                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                TQt 3.3.8
                                                
-
                                                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qradiobutton-h.html b/doc/html/qradiobutton-h.html
index 3ba89a139..4bd7638b2 100644
--- a/doc/html/qradiobutton-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qradiobutton-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qradiobutton.h Include File
+ntqradiobutton.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                TQRadioButton Class Reference
                                                
-
-
                                                The TQRadioButton widget provides a radio button with a text or pixmap label.
-More...
-
                                                #include <qradiobutton.h>
-
                                                Inherits TQButton.
-
                                                List of all member functions.
-
                                                Public Members
                                                
-
                                                  
-
                                                • TQRadioButton ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
                                                  • 
-
                                                • TQRadioButton ( const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
                                                  • 
-
                                                • bool isChecked () const
                                                  • 
-
                                                
-
                                                Public Slots
                                                
-
-
                                                Important Inherited Members
                                                
-
-
                                                Properties
                                                
-
                                                  
-
                                                • bool autoMask - whether the radio button is automatically masked  (read only)
                                                  • 
-
                                                • bool checked - whether the radio button is checked
                                                  • 
-
                                                
-
                                                Detailed Description
                                                
-
-
-The TQRadioButton widget provides a radio button with a text or pixmap label.
-
                                                 
-
-
                                                 TQRadioButton and TQCheckBox are both option buttons. That is, they
-can be switched on (checked) or off (unchecked). The classes
-differ in how the choices for the user are restricted. Check boxes
-define "many of many" choices, whereas radio buttons provide a
-"one of many" choice. In a group of radio buttons only one radio
-button at a time can be checked; if the user selects another
-button, the previously selected button is switched off.
-
                                                 The easiest way to implement a "one of many" choice is simply to
-put the radio buttons into TQButtonGroup.
-
                                                 Whenever a button is switched on or off it emits the signal
-toggled(). Connect to this signal if you want to trigger an action
-each time the button changes state. Otherwise, use isChecked() to
-see if a particular button is selected.
-
                                                 Just like TQPushButton, a radio button can display text or a
-pixmap. The text can be set in the constructor or with setText();
-the pixmap is set with setPixmap().
-
                                                  
-
                                                 
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQPushButton, TQToolButton, GUI Design Handbook: Radio Button, and Basic Widgets.
-
-
                                                Member Function Documentation
                                                
-
                                                TQRadioButton::TQRadioButton ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                
-Constructs a radio button with no text.
-
                                                 The parent and name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
-
                                                TQRadioButton::TQRadioButton ( const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                
-Constructs a radio button with the text text.
-
                                                 The parent and name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
-
                                                TQKeySequence TQButton::accel () const
-
                                                Returns the accelerator associated with the button.
-See the "accel" property for details.
-
                                                bool TQButton::autoRepeat () const
-
                                                Returns TRUE if autoRepeat is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "autoRepeat" property for details.
-
                                                void TQButton::clicked () [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted when the button is activated (i.e. first
-pressed down and then released when the mouse cursor is inside the
-button), when the accelerator key is typed or when animateClick()
-is called. This signal is not emitted if you call setDown().
-
                                                 The TQButtonGroup::clicked() signal does the same job, if you want
-to connect several buttons to the same slot.
-
                                                 Warning: Don't launch a model dialog in response to this signal
-for a button that has autoRepeat turned on.
-
                                                 
                                                See also pressed(), released(), toggled(), autoRepeat, and down.
-
-
                                                Examples: chart/setdataform.cpp, listbox/listbox.cpp, network/clientserver/client/client.cpp, progressbar/progressbar.cpp, richtext/richtext.cpp, t2/main.cpp, and t4/main.cpp.
-
                                                TQButtonGroup * TQButton::group () const
-
                                                
-Returns the group that this button belongs to.
-
                                                 If the button is not a member of any TQButtonGroup, this function
-returns 0.
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQButtonGroup.
-
-
                                                bool TQRadioButton::isChecked () const
-
                                                Returns TRUE if the radio button is checked; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "checked" property for details.
-
                                                bool TQButton::isDown () const
-
                                                Returns TRUE if the button is pressed; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "down" property for details.
-
                                                bool TQButton::isExclusiveToggle () const
-
                                                Returns TRUE if the button is an exclusive toggle; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "exclusiveToggle" property for details.
-
                                                bool TQButton::isOn () const
-
                                                Returns TRUE if the button is toggled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "on" property for details.
-
                                                bool TQButton::isToggleButton () const
-
                                                Returns TRUE if the button is a toggle button; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "toggleButton" property for details.
-
                                                const TQPixmap * TQButton::pixmap () const
-
                                                Returns the pixmap shown on the button.
-See the "pixmap" property for details.
-
                                                void TQButton::pressed () [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted when the button is pressed down.
-
                                                 
                                                See also released() and clicked().
-
-
                                                Examples: network/httpd/httpd.cpp and popup/popup.cpp.
-
                                                void TQButton::released () [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted when the button is released.
-
                                                 
                                                See also pressed(), clicked(), and toggled().
-
-
                                                void TQButton::setAccel ( const TQKeySequence & ) [virtual]
-
                                                Sets the accelerator associated with the button.
-See the "accel" property for details.
-
                                                void TQButton::setAutoRepeat ( bool ) [virtual]
-
                                                Sets whether autoRepeat is enabled.
-See the "autoRepeat" property for details.
-
                                                void TQRadioButton::setChecked ( bool check ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                Sets whether the radio button is checked to check.
-See the "checked" property for details.
-
                                                void TQButton::setDown ( bool ) [virtual]
-
                                                Sets whether the button is pressed.
-See the "down" property for details.
-
                                                void TQButton::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & ) [virtual]
-
                                                Sets the pixmap shown on the button.
-See the "pixmap" property for details.
-
                                                void TQButton::setText ( const TQString & ) [virtual]
-
                                                Sets the text shown on the button.
-See the "text" property for details.
-
                                                ToggleState TQButton::state () const
-
                                                Returns the state of the toggle button.
-See the "toggleState" property for details.
-
                                                void TQButton::stateChanged ( int state ) [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes state. state is On if the button is on, NoChange if it is in the
-"no change" state or Off
-if the button is off.
-
                                                 This may be the result of a user action, toggle() slot activation,
-setState(), or because setOn() was called.
-
                                                 
                                                See also clicked() and TQButton::ToggleState.
-
-
                                                TQString TQButton::text () const
-
                                                Returns the text shown on the button.
-See the "text" property for details.
-
                                                void TQButton::toggle () [slot]
-
                                                
-Toggles the state of a toggle button.
-
                                                 
                                                See also on, setOn(), toggled(), and toggleButton.
-
-
                                                void TQButton::toggled ( bool on ) [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes status. on is TRUE if the button is on, or FALSE if the button is off.
-
                                                 This may be the result of a user action, toggle() slot activation,
-or because setOn() was called.
-
                                                 
                                                See also clicked().
-
-
                                                Example: listbox/listbox.cpp.
-
                                                Property Documentation
                                                
-
                                                TQKeySequence accel
                                                
-
                                                This property holds the accelerator associated with the button.
-
                                                This property is 0 if there is no accelerator set. If you set this
-property to 0 then any current accelerator is removed.
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setAccel() and get this property's value with accel().
-
                                                bool autoMask
                                                
-
                                                This property holds whether the radio button is automatically masked.
-
                                                See also TQWidget::autoMask.
-
-
                                                bool autoRepeat
                                                
-
                                                This property holds whether autoRepeat is enabled.
-
                                                If autoRepeat is enabled then the clicked() signal is emitted at
-regular intervals if the button is down. This property has no
-effect on toggle buttons. autoRepeat is off by default.
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setAutoRepeat() and get this property's value with autoRepeat().
-
                                                bool checked
                                                
-
                                                This property holds whether the radio button is checked.
-
                                                This property will not effect any other radio buttons unless they
-have been placed in the same TQButtonGroup. The default value is
-FALSE (unchecked).
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setChecked() and get this property's value with isChecked().
-
                                                TQPixmap pixmap
                                                
-
                                                This property holds the pixmap shown on the button.
-
                                                If the pixmap is monochrome (i.e. it is a TQBitmap or its depth is 1) and it does not have a mask,
-this property will set the pixmap to be its own mask. The purpose
-of this is to draw transparent bitmaps which are important for
-toggle buttons, for example.
-
                                                 pixmap() returns 0 if no pixmap was set.
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setPixmap() and get this property's value with pixmap().
-
                                                TQString text
                                                
-
                                                This property holds the text shown on the button.
-
                                                This property will return a TQString::null if the button has no
-text. If the text has an ampersand (&) in it, then an
-accelerator is automatically created for it using the character
-that follows the '&' as the accelerator key. Any previous
-accelerator will be overwritten, or cleared if no accelerator is
-defined by the text.
-
                                                 There is no default text.
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setText() and get this property's value with text().
-
-
                                                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                
-
-
                                                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                TQt 3.3.8
                                                
-
                                                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qrangecontrol-h.html b/doc/html/qrangecontrol-h.html
index 683ce3886..0af0ee7c5 100644
--- a/doc/html/qrangecontrol-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qrangecontrol-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qrangecontrol.h Include File
+ntqrangecontrol.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                TQRangeControl Class Reference
                                                
-
-
                                                The TQRangeControl class provides an integer value within a range.
-More...
-
                                                #include <qrangecontrol.h>
-
                                                Inherited by TQDial, TQScrollBar, TQSlider, and TQSpinBox.
-
                                                List of all member functions.
-
                                                Public Members
                                                
-
-
                                                Protected Members
                                                
-
-
                                                Detailed Description
                                                
-
-
-The TQRangeControl class provides an integer value within a range.
-
                                                 
-
                                                 Although originally designed for the TQScrollBar widget, the
-TQRangeControl can also be used in conjunction with other widgets
-such as TQSlider and TQSpinBox. Here are the five main concepts in
-the class:
-
                                                 
                                                  
-
                                                   
                                                1.  Current value The bounded integer that
-TQRangeControl maintains. value() returns it, and several
-functions, including setValue(), set it.
-
                                                   
                                                2.  Minimum The lowest value that value() can ever
-return. Returned by minValue() and set by setRange() or one of the
-constructors.
-
                                                   
                                                3.  Maximum The highest value that value() can ever
-return. Returned by maxValue() and set by setRange() or one of the
-constructors.
-
                                                   
                                                4.  Line step The smaller of two natural steps that
-TQRangeControl provides and typically corresponds to the user
-pressing an arrow key. The line step is returned by lineStep()
-and set using setSteps(). The functions addLine() and
-subtractLine() respectively increment and decrement the current
-value by lineStep().
-
                                                   
                                                5.  Page step The larger of two natural steps that
-TQRangeControl provides and typically corresponds to the user
-pressing PageUp or PageDown. The page step is returned by
-pageStep() and set using setSteps(). The functions addPage() and
-substractPage() respectively increment and decrement the current
-value by pageStep().
-
                                                   
                                                
-
                                                 Unity (1) may be viewed as a third step size. setValue() lets you
-set the current value to any integer in the allowed range, not
-just minValue() + n * lineStep() for integer values of n.
-Some widgets may allow the user to set any value at all; others
-may just provide multiples of lineStep() or pageStep().
-
                                                 TQRangeControl provides three virtual functions that are well
-suited for updating the on-screen representation of range controls
-and emitting signals: valueChange(), rangeChange() and
-stepChange().
-
                                                 TQRangeControl also provides a function called bound() which lets
-you force arbitrary integers to be within the allowed range of the
-range control.
-
                                                 We recommend that all widgets that inherit TQRangeControl provide
-at least a signal called valueChanged(); many widgets will want to
-provide addStep(), addPage(), substractStep() and substractPage()
-as slots.
-
                                                 Note that you must use multiple inheritance if you plan to
-implement a widget using TQRangeControl because TQRangeControl is
-not derived from TQWidget.
-
                                                See also Miscellaneous Classes.
-
-
                                                Member Function Documentation
                                                
-
                                                TQRangeControl::TQRangeControl ()
-
                                                
-Constructs a range control with a minimum value of 0, maximum
-value of 99, line step of 1, page step of 10 and initial value 0.
-
-
                                                TQRangeControl::TQRangeControl ( int minValue, int maxValue, int lineStep, int pageStep, int value )
-
                                                
-Constructs a range control whose value can never be smaller than
-minValue or greater than maxValue, whose line step size is
-lineStep and page step size is pageStep and whose value is
-initially value (which is guaranteed to be in range using
-bound()).
-
-
                                                TQRangeControl::~TQRangeControl () [virtual]
-
                                                
-Destroys the range control
-
-
                                                void TQRangeControl::addLine ()
-
                                                
-Equivalent to setValue( value() + lineStep() ).
-
                                                 If the value is changed, then valueChange() is called.
-
                                                 
                                                See also subtractLine(), addPage(), and setValue().
-
-
                                                void TQRangeControl::addPage ()
-
                                                
-Equivalent to setValue( value() + pageStep() ).
-
                                                 If the value is changed, then valueChange() is called.
-
                                                 
                                                See also subtractPage(), addLine(), and setValue().
-
-
                                                int TQRangeControl::bound ( int v ) const
-
                                                
-Forces the value v to be within the range from minValue() to
-maxValue() inclusive, and returns the result.
-
                                                 This function is provided so that you can easily force other
-numbers than value() into the allowed range. You do not need to
-call it in order to use TQRangeControl itself.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setValue(), value(), minValue(), and maxValue().
-
-
                                                void TQRangeControl::directSetValue ( int value ) [protected]
-
                                                
-Sets the range control value directly without calling
-valueChange().
-
                                                 Forces the new value to be within the legal range.
-
                                                 You will rarely have to call this function. However, if you want
-to change the range control's value inside the overloaded method
-valueChange(), setValue() would call the function valueChange()
-again. To avoid this recursion you must use directSetValue()
-instead.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setValue().
-
-
                                                int TQRangeControl::lineStep () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the line step.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setSteps() and pageStep().
-
-
                                                int TQRangeControl::maxValue () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the maximum value of the range.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setMaxValue(), setRange(), and minValue().
-
-
                                                int TQRangeControl::minValue () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the minimum value of the range.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setMinValue(), setRange(), and maxValue().
-
-
                                                int TQRangeControl::pageStep () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the page step.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setSteps() and lineStep().
-
-
                                                int TQRangeControl::positionFromValue ( int logical_val, int span ) const [protected]
-
                                                
-Converts logical_val to a pixel position. minValue() maps to 0,
-maxValue() maps to span and other values are distributed evenly
-in-between.
-
                                                 This function can handle the entire integer range without
-overflow, providing span is <= 4096.
-
                                                 Calling this method is useful when actually drawing a range
-control such as a TQScrollBar on-screen.
-
                                                 
                                                See also valueFromPosition().
-
-
                                                int TQRangeControl::prevValue () const [protected]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the previous value of the range control. "Previous value"
-means the value before the last change occurred. Setting a new
-range may affect the value, too, because the value is forced to be
-inside the specified range. When the range control is initially
-created, this is the same as value().
-
                                                 prevValue() can be outside the current legal range if a call to
-setRange() causes the current value to change. For example, if the
-range was [0, 1000] and the current value is 500, setRange(0, 400)
-makes value() return 400 and prevValue() return 500.
-
                                                 
                                                See also value() and setRange().
-
-
                                                void TQRangeControl::rangeChange () [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-This virtual function is called whenever the range control's range
-changes. You can reimplement it if you want to be notified when
-the range changes. The default implementation does nothing.
-
                                                 Note that this method is called after the range has changed.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setRange(), valueChange(), and stepChange().
-
-
                                                Reimplemented in TQDial, TQSlider, and TQSpinBox.
-
                                                void TQRangeControl::setMaxValue ( int maxVal )
-
                                                
-Sets the minimum value of the range to maxVal.
-
                                                 If necessary, the minValue() is adjusted so that the range remains
-valid.
-
                                                 
                                                See also maxValue() and setMinValue().
-
-
                                                void TQRangeControl::setMinValue ( int minVal )
-
                                                
-Sets the minimum value of the range to minVal.
-
                                                 If necessary, the maxValue() is adjusted so that the range remains
-valid.
-
                                                 
                                                See also minValue() and setMaxValue().
-
-
                                                void TQRangeControl::setRange ( int minValue, int maxValue )
-
                                                
-Sets the range control's minimum value to minValue and its
-maximum value to maxValue.
-
                                                 Calls the virtual rangeChange() function if one or both of the new
-minimum and maximum values are different from the previous
-setting. Calls the virtual valueChange() function if the current
-value is adjusted because it was outside the new range.
-
                                                 If maxValue is smaller than minValue, minValue becomes
-the only legal value.
-
                                                 
                                                See also minValue() and maxValue().
-
-
                                                Examples: listbox/listbox.cpp, t12/lcdrange.cpp, t5/main.cpp, t6/main.cpp, t8/lcdrange.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                                                void TQRangeControl::setSteps ( int lineStep, int pageStep )
-
                                                
-Sets the range's line step to lineStep and page step to pageStep.
-
                                                 Calls the virtual stepChange() function if the new line step
-or page step are different from the previous settings.
-
                                                 
                                                See also lineStep(), pageStep(), and setRange().
-
-
                                                void TQRangeControl::setValue ( int value )
-
                                                
-Sets the range control's value to value and forces it to be
-within the legal range.
-
                                                 Calls the virtual valueChange() function if the new value is
-different from the previous value. The old value can still be
-retrieved using prevValue().
-
                                                 
                                                See also value().
-
-
                                                void TQRangeControl::stepChange () [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-This virtual function is called whenever the range control's
-line or page step settings change. You can reimplement it if you
-want to be notified when the step changes. The default
-implementation does nothing.
-
                                                 Note that this method is called after a step setting has changed.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setSteps(), rangeChange(), and valueChange().
-
-
                                                void TQRangeControl::subtractLine ()
-
                                                
-Equivalent to setValue( value() - lineStep() ).
-
                                                 If the value is changed, then valueChange() is called.
-
                                                 
                                                See also addLine(), subtractPage(), and setValue().
-
-
                                                void TQRangeControl::subtractPage ()
-
                                                
-Equivalent to setValue( value() - pageStep() ).
-
                                                 If the value is changed, then valueChange() is called.
-
                                                 
                                                See also addPage(), subtractLine(), and setValue().
-
-
                                                int TQRangeControl::value () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the current range control value. This is guaranteed to be
-within the range [minValue(), maxValue()].
-
                                                 
                                                See also setValue() and prevValue().
-
-
                                                void TQRangeControl::valueChange () [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-This virtual function is called whenever the range control value
-changes. You can reimplement it if you want to be notified when
-the value changes. The default implementation does nothing.
-
                                                 Note that this method is called after the value has changed. The
-previous value can be retrieved using prevValue().
-
                                                 
                                                See also setValue(), addPage(), subtractPage(), addLine(), subtractLine(), rangeChange(), and stepChange().
-
-
                                                Reimplemented in TQDial, TQSlider, and TQSpinBox.
-
                                                int TQRangeControl::valueFromPosition ( int pos, int span ) const [protected]
-
                                                
-Converts the pixel position pos to a value. 0 maps to
-minValue(), span maps to maxValue() and other values are
-distributed evenly in-between.
-
                                                 This function can handle the entire integer range without
-overflow.
-
                                                 Calling this method is useful if you actually implemented a range
-control widget such as TQScrollBar and want to handle mouse press
-events. This function then maps screen coordinates to the logical
-values.
-
                                                 
                                                See also positionFromValue().
-
-
-
                                                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                
-
-
                                                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                TQt 3.3.8
                                                
-
                                                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qrect-h.html b/doc/html/qrect-h.html
index a2ead42bb..6f8f181e7 100644
--- a/doc/html/qrect-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qrect-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qrect.h Include File
+ntqrect.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                TQRect Class Reference
                                                
-
-
                                                The TQRect class defines a rectangle in the plane.
-More...
-
                                                #include <qrect.h>
-
                                                List of all member functions.
-
                                                Public Members
                                                
-
-
                                                Related Functions
                                                
-
                                                  
-
                                                • bool operator== ( const TQRect & r1, const TQRect & r2 )
                                                  • 
-
                                                • bool operator!= ( const TQRect & r1, const TQRect & r2 )
                                                  • 
-
                                                • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQRect & r )
                                                  • 
-
                                                • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQRect & r )
                                                  • 
-
                                                
-
                                                Detailed Description
                                                
-
-
-The TQRect class defines a rectangle in the plane.
-
                                                 
-
-
-
                                                 A rectangle is internally represented as an upper-left corner and
-a bottom-right corner, but it is normally expressed as an
-upper-left corner and a size.
-
                                                 The coordinate type is TQCOORD (defined in qwindowdefs.h as int). The minimum value of TQCOORD is TQCOORD_MIN (-2147483648) and
-the maximum value is  TQCOORD_MAX (2147483647).
-
                                                 Note that the size (width and height) of a rectangle might be
-different from what you are used to. If the top-left corner and
-the bottom-right corner are the same, the height and the width of
-the rectangle will both be 1.
-
                                                 Generally, width = right - left + 1 and height = bottom - top + 1. We designed it this way to make it correspond to
-rectangular spaces used by drawing functions in which the width
-and height denote a number of pixels. For example, drawing a
-rectangle with width and height 1 draws a single pixel.
-
                                                 The default coordinate system has origin (0, 0) in the top-left
-corner. The positive direction of the y axis is down, and the
-positive x axis is from left to right.
-
                                                 A TQRect can be constructed with a set of left, top, width and
-height integers, from two TQPoints or from a TQPoint and a TQSize.
-After creation the dimensions can be changed, e.g. with setLeft(),
-setRight(), setTop() and setBottom(), or by setting sizes, e.g.
-setWidth(), setHeight() and setSize(). The dimensions can also be
-changed with the move functions, e.g. moveBy(), moveCenter(),
-moveBottomRight(), etc. You can also add coordinates to a
-rectangle with addCoords().
-
                                                 You can test to see if a TQRect contains a specific point with
-contains(). You can also test to see if two TQRects intersect with
-intersects() (see also intersect()). To get the bounding rectangle
-of two TQRects use unite().
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQPoint, TQSize, Graphics Classes, and Image Processing Classes.
-
-
                                                Member Function Documentation
                                                
-
                                                TQRect::TQRect ()
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Constructs an invalid rectangle.
-
-
                                                TQRect::TQRect ( const TQPoint & topLeft, const TQPoint & bottomRight )
-
                                                
-Constructs a rectangle with topLeft as the top-left corner and
-bottomRight as the bottom-right corner.
-
-
                                                TQRect::TQRect ( const TQPoint & topLeft, const TQSize & size )
-
                                                
-Constructs a rectangle with topLeft as the top-left corner and
-size as the rectangle size.
-
-
                                                TQRect::TQRect ( int left, int top, int width, int height )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Constructs a rectangle with the top, left corner and width and height.
-
                                                 Example (creates three identical rectangles):
-
                                                -        TQRect r1( TQPoint(100,200), TQPoint(110,215) );
-        TQRect r2( TQPoint(100,200), TQSize(11,16) );
-        TQRect r3( 100, 200, 11, 16 );
-    
                                                
- 
-
-
                                                void TQRect::addCoords ( int xp1, int yp1, int xp2, int yp2 )
-
                                                
-Adds xp1, yp1, xp2 and yp2 respectively to the
-existing coordinates of the rectangle.
-
-
                                                Examples: multiple/ax1.h and multiple/ax2.h.
-
                                                int TQRect::bottom () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the bottom coordinate of the rectangle.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setBottom(), top(), bottomLeft(), and bottomRight().
-
-
                                                Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, desktop/desktop.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, and themes/wood.cpp.
-
                                                TQPoint TQRect::bottomLeft () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the bottom-left position of the rectangle.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setBottomLeft(), moveBottomLeft(), topRight(), bottom(), and left().
-
-
                                                Example: tictac/tictac.cpp.
-
                                                TQPoint TQRect::bottomRight () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the bottom-right position of the rectangle.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setBottomRight(), moveBottomRight(), topLeft(), right(), and bottom().
-
-
                                                Example: tictac/tictac.cpp.
-
                                                TQPoint TQRect::center () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the center point of the rectangle.
-
                                                 
                                                See also moveCenter(), topLeft(), bottomRight(), topRight(), and bottomLeft().
-
-
                                                Example: tooltip/tooltip.cpp.
-
                                                bool TQRect::contains ( const TQPoint & p, bool proper = FALSE ) const
-
                                                
-Returns TRUE if the point p is inside or on the edge of the
-rectangle; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                 If proper is TRUE, this function returns TRUE only if p is
-inside (not on the edge).
-
-
                                                Example: t14/cannon.cpp.
-
                                                bool TQRect::contains ( int x, int y ) const
-
                                                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                 Returns TRUE if the point x, y is inside this rectangle;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                bool TQRect::contains ( int x, int y, bool proper ) const
-
                                                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                 Returns TRUE if the point x, y is inside this rectangle;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                 If proper is TRUE, this function returns TRUE only if the point
-is entirely inside (not on the edge).
-
-
                                                bool TQRect::contains ( const TQRect & r, bool proper = FALSE ) const
-
                                                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                 Returns TRUE if the rectangle r is inside this rectangle;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                 If proper is TRUE, this function returns TRUE only if r is
-entirely inside (not on the edge).
-
                                                 
                                                See also unite(), intersect(), and intersects().
-
-
                                                void TQRect::coords ( int * xp1, int * yp1, int * xp2, int * yp2 ) const
-
                                                
-Extracts the rectangle parameters as the top-left point *xp1,
-*yp1 and the bottom-right point *xp2, *yp2.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setCoords() and rect().
-
-
                                                Examples: themes/metal.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
-
                                                int TQRect::height () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the height of the rectangle. The height includes both the
-top and bottom edges, i.e. height = bottom - top + 1.
-
                                                 
                                                See also width(), size(), and setHeight().
-
-
                                                Examples: aclock/aclock.cpp, desktop/desktop.cpp, movies/main.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, themes/metal.cpp, themes/wood.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                                                TQRect TQRect::intersect ( const TQRect & r ) const
-
                                                
-Returns the intersection of this rectangle and rectangle r.
-r.intersect(s) is equivalent to r&s.
-
-
                                                bool TQRect::intersects ( const TQRect & r ) const
-
                                                
-Returns TRUE if this rectangle intersects with rectangle r
-(there is at least one pixel that is within both rectangles);
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also intersect() and contains().
-
-
                                                Examples: t11/cannon.cpp, t12/cannon.cpp, t13/cannon.cpp, and t14/cannon.cpp.
-
                                                bool TQRect::isEmpty () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns TRUE if the rectangle is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                 An empty rectangle has a left() > right() or top() > bottom().
-
                                                 An empty rectangle is not valid. isEmpty() == !isValid()
-
                                                 
                                                See also isNull(), isValid(), and normalize().
-
-
                                                bool TQRect::isNull () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns TRUE if the rectangle is a null rectangle; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                                                 A null rectangle has both the width and the height set to 0, that
-is right() == left() - 1 and bottom() == top() - 1.
-
                                                 Note that if right() == left() and bottom() == top(), then the
-rectangle has width 1 and height 1.
-
                                                 A null rectangle is also empty.
-
                                                 A null rectangle is not valid.
-
                                                 
                                                See also isEmpty() and isValid().
-
-
                                                bool TQRect::isValid () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns TRUE if the rectangle is valid; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                 A valid rectangle has a left() <= right() and top() <= bottom().
-
                                                 Note that non-trivial operations like intersections are not defined
-for invalid rectangles.
-
                                                 isValid() == !isEmpty()
-
                                                 
                                                See also isNull(), isEmpty(), and normalize().
-
-
                                                Examples: themes/metal.cpp and tooltip/tooltip.cpp.
-
                                                int TQRect::left () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the left coordinate of the rectangle. Identical to x().
-
                                                 
                                                See also setLeft(), right(), topLeft(), and bottomLeft().
-
-
                                                Examples: aclock/aclock.cpp, desktop/desktop.cpp, i18n/main.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, tictac/tictac.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                                                void TQRect::moveBottom ( int pos )
-
                                                
-Sets the bottom position of the rectangle to pos, leaving the
-size unchanged.
-
                                                 
                                                See also bottom(), setBottom(), moveLeft(), moveTop(), and moveRight().
-
-
                                                void TQRect::moveBottomLeft ( const TQPoint & p )
-
                                                
-Sets the bottom-left position of the rectangle to p, leaving
-the size unchanged.
-
                                                 
                                                See also bottomLeft(), setBottomLeft(), moveTopLeft(), moveBottomRight(), and moveTopRight().
-
-
                                                Example: t10/cannon.cpp.
-
                                                void TQRect::moveBottomRight ( const TQPoint & p )
-
                                                
-Sets the bottom-right position of the rectangle to p, leaving
-the size unchanged.
-
                                                 
                                                See also bottomRight(), setBottomRight(), moveTopLeft(), moveTopRight(), and moveBottomLeft().
-
-
                                                void TQRect::moveBy ( int dx, int dy )
-
                                                
-Moves the rectangle dx along the x axis and dy along the y
-axis, relative to the current position. Positive values move the
-rectangle to the right and down.
-
                                                 
                                                See also moveTopLeft().
-
-
                                                Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, themes/wood.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                                                void TQRect::moveCenter ( const TQPoint & p )
-
                                                
-Sets the center point of the rectangle to p, leaving the size
-unchanged.
-
                                                 
                                                See also center(), moveTopLeft(), moveBottomRight(), moveTopRight(), and moveBottomLeft().
-
-
                                                Examples: t11/cannon.cpp and t12/cannon.cpp.
-
                                                void TQRect::moveLeft ( int pos )
-
                                                
-Sets the left position of the rectangle to pos, leaving the
-size unchanged.
-
                                                 
                                                See also left(), setLeft(), moveTop(), moveRight(), and moveBottom().
-
-
                                                void TQRect::moveRight ( int pos )
-
                                                
-Sets the right position of the rectangle to pos, leaving the
-size unchanged.
-
                                                 
                                                See also right(), setRight(), moveLeft(), moveTop(), and moveBottom().
-
-
                                                void TQRect::moveTop ( int pos )
-
                                                
-Sets the top position of the rectangle to pos, leaving the
-size unchanged.
-
                                                 
                                                See also top(), setTop(), moveLeft(), moveRight(), and moveBottom().
-
-
                                                void TQRect::moveTopLeft ( const TQPoint & p )
-
                                                
-Sets the top-left position of the rectangle to p, leaving the
-size unchanged.
-
                                                 
                                                See also topLeft(), setTopLeft(), moveBottomRight(), moveTopRight(), and moveBottomLeft().
-
-
                                                Examples: helpsystem/tooltip.cpp and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                                                void TQRect::moveTopRight ( const TQPoint & p )
-
                                                
-Sets the top-right position of the rectangle to p, leaving the
-size unchanged.
-
                                                 
                                                See also topRight(), setTopRight(), moveTopLeft(), moveBottomRight(), and moveBottomLeft().
-
-
                                                TQRect TQRect::normalize () const
-
                                                
-Returns a normalized rectangle, i.e. a rectangle that has a
-non-negative width and height.
-
                                                 It swaps left and right if left() > right(), and swaps top and
-bottom if top() > bottom().
-
                                                 
                                                See also isValid().
-
-
                                                Example: scribble/scribble.cpp.
-
                                                TQRect TQRect::operator& ( const TQRect & r ) const
-
                                                
-Returns the intersection of this rectangle and rectangle r.
-
                                                 Returns an empty rectangle if there is no intersection.
-
                                                 
                                                See also operator&=(), operator|(), isEmpty(), intersects(), and contains().
-
-
                                                TQRect & TQRect::operator&= ( const TQRect & r )
-
                                                
-Intersects this rectangle with rectangle r.
-
-
                                                TQRect TQRect::operator| ( const TQRect & r ) const
-
                                                
-Returns the bounding rectangle of this rectangle and rectangle r.
-
                                                 The bounding rectangle of a nonempty rectangle and an empty or
-invalid rectangle is defined to be the nonempty rectangle.
-
                                                 
                                                See also operator|=(), operator&(), intersects(), and contains().
-
-
                                                TQRect & TQRect::operator|= ( const TQRect & r )
-
                                                
-Unites this rectangle with rectangle r.
-
-
                                                TQCOORD & TQRect::rBottom ()
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns a reference to the bottom coordinate of the rectangle.
-
                                                 
                                                See also rLeft(), rTop(), and rRight().
-
-
                                                TQCOORD & TQRect::rLeft ()
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns a reference to the left coordinate of the rectangle.
-
                                                 
                                                See also rTop(), rRight(), and rBottom().
-
-
                                                TQCOORD & TQRect::rRight ()
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns a reference to the right coordinate of the rectangle.
-
                                                 
                                                See also rLeft(), rTop(), and rBottom().
-
-
                                                TQCOORD & TQRect::rTop ()
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns a reference to the top coordinate of the rectangle.
-
                                                 
                                                See also rLeft(), rRight(), and rBottom().
-
-
                                                void TQRect::rect ( int * x, int * y, int * w, int * h ) const
-
                                                
-Extracts the rectangle parameters as the position *x, *y and
-width *w and height *h.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setRect() and coords().
-
-
                                                Examples: themes/metal.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
-
                                                int TQRect::right () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the right coordinate of the rectangle.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setRight(), left(), topRight(), and bottomRight().
-
-
                                                Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, customlayout/flow.cpp, desktop/desktop.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, t11/cannon.cpp, and themes/wood.cpp.
-
                                                void TQRect::setBottom ( int pos )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Sets the bottom edge of the rectangle to pos. May change the
-height, but will never change the top edge of the rectangle.
-
                                                 
                                                See also bottom(), setTop(), and setHeight().
-
-
                                                Example: scribble/scribble.cpp.
-
                                                void TQRect::setBottomLeft ( const TQPoint & p )
-
                                                
-Set the bottom-left corner of the rectangle to p. May change
-the size, but will the never change the top-right corner of
-the rectangle.
-
                                                 
                                                See also bottomLeft(), moveBottomLeft(), setTopLeft(), setBottomRight(), and setTopRight().
-
-
                                                void TQRect::setBottomRight ( const TQPoint & p )
-
                                                
-Set the bottom-right corner of the rectangle to p. May change
-the size, but will the never change the top-left corner of
-the rectangle.
-
                                                 
                                                See also bottomRight(), moveBottomRight(), setTopLeft(), setTopRight(), and setBottomLeft().
-
-
                                                void TQRect::setCoords ( int xp1, int yp1, int xp2, int yp2 )
-
                                                
-Sets the coordinates of the rectangle's top-left corner to (xp1, yp1), and the coordinates of its bottom-right corner to (xp2, yp2).
-
                                                 
                                                See also coords() and setRect().
-
-
                                                void TQRect::setHeight ( int h )
-
                                                
-Sets the height of the rectangle to h. The top edge is not
-moved, but the bottom edge may be moved.
-
                                                 
                                                See also height(), setTop(), setBottom(), and setSize().
-
-
                                                Example: desktop/desktop.cpp.
-
                                                void TQRect::setLeft ( int pos )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Sets the left edge of the rectangle to pos. May change the
-width, but will never change the right edge of the rectangle.
-
                                                 Identical to setX().
-
                                                 
                                                See also left(), setTop(), and setWidth().
-
-
                                                Example: scribble/scribble.cpp.
-
                                                void TQRect::setRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
-
                                                
-Sets the coordinates of the rectangle's top-left corner to (x, y), and its size to (w, h).
-
                                                 
                                                See also rect() and setCoords().
-
-
                                                Example: themes/wood.cpp.
-
                                                void TQRect::setRight ( int pos )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Sets the right edge of the rectangle to pos. May change the
-width, but will never change the left edge of the rectangle.
-
                                                 
                                                See also right(), setLeft(), and setWidth().
-
-
                                                Example: scribble/scribble.cpp.
-
                                                void TQRect::setSize ( const TQSize & s )
-
                                                
-Sets the size of the rectangle to s. The top-left corner is not
-moved.
-
                                                 
                                                See also size(), setWidth(), and setHeight().
-
-
                                                Example: xform/xform.cpp.
-
                                                void TQRect::setTop ( int pos )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Sets the top edge of the rectangle to pos. May change the
-height, but will never change the bottom edge of the rectangle.
-
                                                 Identical to setY().
-
                                                 
                                                See also top(), setBottom(), and setHeight().
-
-
                                                Example: scribble/scribble.cpp.
-
                                                void TQRect::setTopLeft ( const TQPoint & p )
-
                                                
-Set the top-left corner of the rectangle to p. May change
-the size, but will the never change the bottom-right corner of
-the rectangle.
-
                                                 
                                                See also topLeft(), moveTopLeft(), setBottomRight(), setTopRight(), and setBottomLeft().
-
-
                                                void TQRect::setTopRight ( const TQPoint & p )
-
                                                
-Set the top-right corner of the rectangle to p. May change
-the size, but will the never change the bottom-left corner of
-the rectangle.
-
                                                 
                                                See also topRight(), moveTopRight(), setTopLeft(), setBottomRight(), and setBottomLeft().
-
-
                                                void TQRect::setWidth ( int w )
-
                                                
-Sets the width of the rectangle to w. The right edge is
-changed, but not the left edge.
-
                                                 
                                                See also width(), setLeft(), setRight(), and setSize().
-
-
                                                Example: desktop/desktop.cpp.
-
                                                void TQRect::setX ( int x )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Sets the x position of the rectangle (its left end) to x. May
-change the width, but will never change the right edge of the
-rectangle.
-
                                                 Identical to setLeft().
-
                                                 
                                                See also x() and setY().
-
-
                                                void TQRect::setY ( int y )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Sets the y position of the rectangle (its top) to y. May change
-the height, but will never change the bottom edge of the
-rectangle.
-
                                                 Identical to setTop().
-
                                                 
                                                See also y() and setX().
-
-
                                                TQSize TQRect::size () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the size of the rectangle.
-
                                                 
                                                See also width() and height().
-
-
                                                Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp, movies/main.cpp, and t10/cannon.cpp.
-
                                                int TQRect::top () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the top coordinate of the rectangle. Identical to y().
-
                                                 
                                                See also setTop(), bottom(), topLeft(), and topRight().
-
-
                                                Examples: aclock/aclock.cpp, desktop/desktop.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, themes/wood.cpp, tictac/tictac.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                                                TQPoint TQRect::topLeft () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the top-left position of the rectangle.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setTopLeft(), moveTopLeft(), bottomRight(), left(), and top().
-
-
                                                Examples: helpsystem/tooltip.cpp, t10/cannon.cpp, and tictac/tictac.cpp.
-
                                                TQPoint TQRect::topRight () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the top-right position of the rectangle.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setTopRight(), moveTopRight(), bottomLeft(), top(), and right().
-
-
                                                Example: tictac/tictac.cpp.
-
                                                TQRect TQRect::unite ( const TQRect & r ) const
-
                                                
-Returns the bounding rectangle of this rectangle and rectangle r. r.unite(s) is equivalent to r|s.
-
-
                                                Examples: t11/cannon.cpp, t12/cannon.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                                                int TQRect::width () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the width of the rectangle. The width includes both the
-left and right edges, i.e. width = right - left + 1.
-
                                                 
                                                See also height(), size(), and setHeight().
-
-
                                                Examples: aclock/aclock.cpp, customlayout/border.cpp, desktop/desktop.cpp, movies/main.cpp, themes/metal.cpp, themes/wood.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                                                int TQRect::x () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the left coordinate of the rectangle. Identical to left().
-
                                                 
                                                See also left(), y(), and setX().
-
-
                                                Examples: customlayout/border.cpp, desktop/desktop.cpp, movies/main.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, t12/cannon.cpp, themes/metal.cpp, and themes/wood.cpp.
-
                                                int TQRect::y () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the top coordinate of the rectangle. Identical to top().
-
                                                 
                                                See also top(), x(), and setY().
-
-
                                                Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp, movies/main.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, t12/cannon.cpp, t14/cannon.cpp, themes/metal.cpp, and themes/wood.cpp.
-
                                                Related Functions
                                                
-
                                                bool operator!= ( const TQRect & r1, const TQRect & r2 )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns TRUE if r1 and r2 are different; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQRect & r )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Writes the TQRect, r, to the stream s, and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
                                                 
                                                See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
                                                bool operator== ( const TQRect & r1, const TQRect & r2 )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns TRUE if r1 and r2 are equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQRect & r )
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Reads a TQRect from the stream s into rect r and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
                                                 
                                                See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
-
                                                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                
-
-
                                                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                TQt 3.3.8
                                                
-
                                                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qregexp-h.html b/doc/html/qregexp-h.html
index 1748f6bf8..b6946ae90 100644
--- a/doc/html/qregexp-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qregexp-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qregexp.h Include File
+ntqregexp.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                TQRegExp Class Reference
                                                
-
-
                                                The TQRegExp class provides pattern matching using regular expressions.
-More...
-
                                                All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
                                                
-
                                                #include <qregexp.h>
-
                                                List of all member functions.
-
                                                Public Members
                                                
-
-
                                                Static Public Members
                                                
-
                                                  
-
                                                • TQString escape ( const TQString & str )
                                                  • 
-
                                                
-
                                                Detailed Description
                                                
-
-
-
-The TQRegExp class provides pattern matching using regular expressions.
-
                                                 
-
-
-
-
-
                                                 Regular expressions, or "regexps", provide a way to find patterns
-within text. This is useful in many contexts, for example:
-
                                                 
                                                
-
                                                 Validation
-A regexp can be used to check whether a piece of text
-meets some criteria, e.g. is an integer or contains no
-whitespace.
-
                                                 Searching
-Regexps provide a much more powerful means of searching
-text than simple string matching does. For example we can
-create a regexp which says "find one of the words 'mail',
-'letter' or 'correspondence' but not any of the words
-'email', 'mailman' 'mailer', 'letterbox' etc."
-
                                                 Search and Replace
-A regexp can be used to replace a pattern with a piece of
-text, for example replace all occurrences of '&' with
-'&amp;' except where the '&' is already followed by 'amp;'.
-
                                                 String Splitting
-A regexp can be used to identify where a string should be
-split into its component fields, e.g. splitting tab-delimited
-strings.
-
                                                
-
                                                 We present a very brief introduction to regexps, a description of
-TQt's regexp language, some code examples, and finally the function
-documentation itself. TQRegExp is modeled on Perl's regexp
-language, and also fully supports Unicode. TQRegExp can also be
-used in the weaker 'wildcard' (globbing) mode which works in a
-similar way to command shells. A good text on regexps is Mastering Regular Expressions: Powerful Techniques for Perl and Other Tools by Jeffrey E. Friedl, ISBN 1565922573.
-
                                                 Experienced regexp users may prefer to skip the introduction and
-go directly to the relevant information.
-
                                                 In case of multi-threaded programming, note that TQRegExp depends on
-TQThreadStorage internally. For that reason, TQRegExp should only be
-used with threads started with TQThread, i.e. not with threads
-started with platform-specific APIs.
-
                                                 
-
                                                
-
-
-
                                                 
                                                 Introduction
-
                                                
-
                                                 Regexps are built up from expressions, quantifiers, and assertions.
-The simplest form of expression is simply a character, e.g.
-x or 5. An expression can also be a set of
-characters. For example, [ABCD], will match an A or
-a B or a C or a D. As a shorthand we could
-write this as [A-D]. If we want to match any of the
-captital letters in the English alphabet we can write
-[A-Z]. A quantifier tells the regexp engine how many
-occurrences of the expression we want, e.g. x{1,1} means
-match an x which occurs at least once and at most once.
-We'll look at assertions and more complex expressions later.
-
                                                 Note that in general regexps cannot be used to check for balanced
-brackets or tags. For example if you want to match an opening html
-<b> and its closing </b> you can only use a regexp if you
-know that these tags are not nested; the html fragment, <b>bold <b>bolder</b></b> will not match as expected. If you know the
-maximum level of nesting it is possible to create a regexp that
-will match correctly, but for an unknown level of nesting, regexps
-will fail.
-
                                                 We'll start by writing a regexp to match integers in the range 0
-to 99. We will require at least one digit so we will start with
-[0-9]{1,1} which means match a digit exactly once. This
-regexp alone will match integers in the range 0 to 9. To match one
-or two digits we can increase the maximum number of occurrences so
-the regexp becomes [0-9]{1,2} meaning match a digit at
-least once and at most twice. However, this regexp as it stands
-will not match correctly. This regexp will match one or two digits
-within a string. To ensure that we match against the whole
-string we must use the anchor assertions. We need ^ (caret)
-which when it is the first character in the regexp means that the
-regexp must match from the beginning of the string. And we also
-need $ (dollar) which when it is the last character in the
-regexp means that the regexp must match until the end of the
-string. So now our regexp is ^[0-9]{1,2}$. Note that
-assertions, such as ^ and $, do not match any
-characters.
-
                                                 If you've seen regexps elsewhere they may have looked different from
-the ones above. This is because some sets of characters and some
-quantifiers are so common that they have special symbols to
-represent them. [0-9] can be replaced with the symbol
-\d. The quantifier to match exactly one occurrence,
-{1,1}, can be replaced with the expression itself. This means
-that x{1,1} is exactly the same as x alone. So our 0
-to 99 matcher could be written ^\d{1,2}$. Another way of
-writing it would be ^\d\d{0,1}$, i.e. from the start of the
-string match a digit followed by zero or one digits. In practice
-most people would write it ^\d\d?$. The ? is a
-shorthand for the quantifier {0,1}, i.e. a minimum of no
-occurrences a maximum of one occurrence. This is used to make an
-expression optional. The regexp ^\d\d?$ means "from the
-beginning of the string match one digit followed by zero or one
-digits and then the end of the string".
-
                                                 Our second example is matching the words 'mail', 'letter' or
-'correspondence' but without matching 'email', 'mailman',
-'mailer', 'letterbox' etc. We'll start by just matching 'mail'. In
-full the regexp is, m{1,1}a{1,1}i{1,1}l{1,1}, but since
-each expression itself is automatically quantified by {1,1}
-we can simply write this as mail; an 'm' followed by an 'a'
-followed by an 'i' followed by an 'l'. The symbol '|' (bar) is
-used for alternation, so our regexp now becomes
-mail|letter|correspondence which means match 'mail' or
-'letter' or 'correspondence'. Whilst this regexp will find the
-words we want it will also find words we don't want such as
-'email'. We will start by putting our regexp in parentheses,
-(mail|letter|correspondence). Parentheses have two effects,
-firstly they group expressions together and secondly they identify
-parts of the regexp that we wish to capture. Our regexp still matches any of the three words but now
-they are grouped together as a unit. This is useful for building
-up more complex regexps. It is also useful because it allows us to
-examine which of the words actually matched. We need to use
-another assertion, this time \b "word boundary":
-\b(mail|letter|correspondence)\b. This regexp means "match
-a word boundary followed by the expression in parentheses followed
-by another word boundary". The \b assertion matches at a position in the regexp not a character in the regexp. A word
-boundary is any non-word character such as a space a newline or
-the beginning or end of the string.
-
                                                 For our third example we want to replace ampersands with the HTML
-entity '&amp;'. The regexp to match is simple: &, i.e.
-match one ampersand. Unfortunately this will mess up our text if
-some of the ampersands have already been turned into HTML
-entities. So what we really want to say is replace an ampersand
-providing it is not followed by 'amp;'. For this we need the
-negative lookahead assertion and our regexp becomes:
-&(?!amp;). The negative lookahead assertion is introduced
-with '(?!' and finishes at the ')'. It means that the text it
-contains, 'amp;' in our example, must not follow the expression
-that preceeds it.
-
                                                 Regexps provide a rich language that can be used in a variety of
-ways. For example suppose we want to count all the occurrences of
-'Eric' and 'Eirik' in a string. Two valid regexps to match these
-are \b(Eric|Eirik)\b and \bEi?ri[ck]\b. We need
-the word boundary '\b' so we don't get 'Ericsson' etc. The second
-regexp actually matches more than we want, 'Eric', 'Erik', 'Eiric'
-and 'Eirik'.
-
                                                 We will implement some the examples above in the
-code examples section.
-
                                                 
-
                                                 Characters and Abbreviations for Sets of Characters
-
                                                
-
                                                 
                                                
-
                                                 Element Meaning
-
                                                 c
-Any character represents itself unless it has a special
-regexp meaning. Thus c matches the character c.
-
                                                 \c
-A character that follows a backslash matches the character
-itself except where mentioned below. For example if you
-wished to match a literal caret at the beginning of a string
-you would write \^.
-
                                                 \a
-This matches the ASCII bell character (BEL, 0x07).
-
                                                 \f
-This matches the ASCII form feed character (FF, 0x0C).
-
                                                 \n
-This matches the ASCII line feed character (LF, 0x0A, Unix newline).
-
                                                 \r
-This matches the ASCII carriage return character (CR, 0x0D).
-
                                                 \t
-This matches the ASCII horizontal tab character (HT, 0x09).
-
                                                 \v
-This matches the ASCII vertical tab character (VT, 0x0B).
-
                                                 \xhhhh
-This matches the Unicode character corresponding to the
-hexadecimal number hhhh (between 0x0000 and 0xFFFF). \0ooo
-(i.e., \zero ooo) matches the ASCII/Latin-1 character
-corresponding to the octal number ooo (between 0 and 0377).
-
                                                 . (dot)
-This matches any character (including newline).
-
                                                 \d
-This matches a digit (TQChar::isDigit()).
-
                                                 \D
-This matches a non-digit.
-
                                                 \s
-This matches a whitespace (TQChar::isSpace()).
-
                                                 \S
-This matches a non-whitespace.
-
                                                 \w
-This matches a word character (TQChar::isLetterOrNumber() or '_').
-
                                                 \W
-This matches a non-word character.
-
                                                 \n
-The n-th backreference,
-e.g. \1, \2, etc.
-
                                                
-
                                                 Note that the C++ compiler transforms backslashes in strings so to include a \ in a regexp you will need to enter it twice, i.e. \\.
-
                                                 
-
                                                 Sets of Characters
-
                                                
-
                                                 Square brackets are used to match any character in the set of
-characters contained within the square brackets. All the character
-set abbreviations described above can be used within square
-brackets. Apart from the character set abbreviations and the
-following two exceptions no characters have special meanings in
-square brackets.
-
                                                 
                                                
-
                                                 ^
-The caret negates the character set if it occurs as the
-first character, i.e. immediately after the opening square
-bracket. For example, [abc] matches 'a' or 'b' or 'c',
-but [^abc] matches anything except 'a' or 'b' or
-'c'.
-
                                                 -
-The dash is used to indicate a range of characters, for
-example [W-Z] matches 'W' or 'X' or 'Y' or 'Z'.
-
                                                
-
                                                 Using the predefined character set abbreviations is more portable
-than using character ranges across platforms and languages. For
-example, [0-9] matches a digit in Western alphabets but
-\d matches a digit in any alphabet.
-
                                                 Note that in most regexp literature sets of characters are called
-"character classes".
-
                                                 
-
                                                 Quantifiers
-
                                                
-
                                                 By default an expression is automatically quantified by
-{1,1}, i.e. it should occur exactly once. In the following
-list E stands for any expression. An expression is a
-character or an abbreviation for a set of characters or a set of
-characters in square brackets or any parenthesised expression.
-
                                                 
                                                
-
                                                 E?
-Matches zero or one occurrence of E. This quantifier
-means "the previous expression is optional" since it will
-match whether or not the expression occurs in the string. It
-is the same as E{0,1}. For example dents?
-will match 'dent' and 'dents'.
-
                                                 E+
-Matches one or more occurrences of E. This is the same
-as E{1,MAXINT}. For example, 0+ will match
-'0', '00', '000', etc.
-
                                                 E*
-Matches zero or more occurrences of E. This is the same
-as E{0,MAXINT}. The * quantifier is often
-used by a mistake. Since it matches zero or more
-occurrences it will match no occurrences at all. For example
-if we want to match strings that end in whitespace and use
-the regexp \s*$ we would get a match on every string.
-This is because we have said find zero or more whitespace
-followed by the end of string, so even strings that don't end
-in whitespace will match. The regexp we want in this case is
-\s+$ to match strings that have at least one
-whitespace at the end.
-
                                                 E{n}
-Matches exactly n occurrences of the expression. This
-is the same as repeating the expression n times. For
-example, x{5} is the same as xxxxx. It is also
-the same as E{n,n}, e.g. x{5,5}.
-
                                                 E{n,}
-Matches at least n occurrences of the expression. This
-is the same as E{n,MAXINT}.
-
                                                 E{,m}
-Matches at most m occurrences of the expression. This
-is the same as E{0,m}.
-
                                                 E{n,m}
-Matches at least n occurrences of the expression and at
-most m occurrences of the expression.
-
                                                
-
                                                 (MAXINT is implementation dependent but will not be smaller than
-1024.)
-
                                                 If we wish to apply a quantifier to more than just the preceding
-character we can use parentheses to group characters together in
-an expression. For example, tag+ matches a 't' followed by
-an 'a' followed by at least one 'g', whereas (tag)+ matches
-at least one occurrence of 'tag'.
-
                                                 Note that quantifiers are "greedy". They will match as much text
-as they can. For example, 0+ will match as many zeros as it
-can from the first zero it finds, e.g. '2.0005'.
-Quantifiers can be made non-greedy, see setMinimal().
-
                                                 
-
                                                 Capturing Text
-
                                                
-
                                                 Parentheses allow us to group elements together so that we can
-quantify and capture them. For example if we have the expression
-mail|letter|correspondence that matches a string we know
-that one of the words matched but not which one. Using
-parentheses allows us to "capture" whatever is matched within
-their bounds, so if we used (mail|letter|correspondence)
-and matched this regexp against the string "I sent you some email"
-we can use the cap() or capturedTexts() functions to extract the
-matched characters, in this case 'mail'.
-
                                                 We can use captured text within the regexp itself. To refer to the
-captured text we use backreferences which are indexed from 1,
-the same as for cap(). For example we could search for duplicate
-words in a string using \b(\w+)\W+\1\b which means match a
-word boundary followed by one or more word characters followed by
-one or more non-word characters followed by the same text as the
-first parenthesised expression followed by a word boundary.
-
                                                 If we want to use parentheses purely for grouping and not for
-capturing we can use the non-capturing syntax, e.g.
-(?:green|blue). Non-capturing parentheses begin '(?:' and
-end ')'. In this example we match either 'green' or 'blue' but we
-do not capture the match so we only know whether or not we matched
-but not which color we actually found. Using non-capturing
-parentheses is more efficient than using capturing parentheses
-since the regexp engine has to do less book-keeping.
-
                                                 Both capturing and non-capturing parentheses may be nested.
-
                                                 
-
                                                 Assertions
-
                                                
-
                                                 Assertions make some statement about the text at the point where
-they occur in the regexp but they do not match any characters. In
-the following list E stands for any expression.
-
                                                 
                                                
-
                                                 ^
-The caret signifies the beginning of the string. If you
-wish to match a literal ^ you must escape it by
-writing \^. For example, ^#include will only
-match strings which begin with the characters '#include'.
-(When the caret is the first character of a character set it
-has a special meaning, see Sets of
-	 Characters.)
-
                                                 $
-The dollar signifies the end of the string. For example
-\d\s*$ will match strings which end with a digit
-optionally followed by whitespace. If you wish to match a
-literal $ you must escape it by writing
-\$.
-
                                                 \b
-A word boundary. For example the regexp
-\bOK\b means match immediately after a word
-boundary (e.g. start of string or whitespace) the letter 'O'
-then the letter 'K' immediately before another word boundary
-(e.g. end of string or whitespace). But note that the
-assertion does not actually match any whitespace so if we
-write (\bOK\b) and we have a match it will only
-contain 'OK' even if the string is "Its OK now".
-
                                                 \B
-A non-word boundary. This assertion is true wherever
-\b is false. For example if we searched for
-\Bon\B in "Left on" the match would fail (space
-and end of string aren't non-word boundaries), but it would
-match in "tonne".
-
                                                 (?=E)
-Positive lookahead. This assertion is true if the
-expression matches at this point in the regexp. For example,
-const(?=\s+char) matches 'const' whenever it is
-followed by 'char', as in 'static const char *'.
-(Compare with const\s+char, which matches 'static
-const char *'.)
-
                                                 (?!E)
-Negative lookahead. This assertion is true if the
-expression does not match at this point in the regexp. For
-example, const(?!\s+char) matches 'const' except
-when it is followed by 'char'.
-
                                                
-
                                                 
-
                                                 Wildcard Matching (globbing)
-
                                                
-
                                                 Most command shells such as bash or cmd.exe support "file
-globbing", the ability to identify a group of files by using
-wildcards. The setWildcard() function is used to switch between
-regexp and wildcard mode. Wildcard matching is much simpler than
-full regexps and has only four features:
-
                                                 
                                                
-
                                                 c
-Any character represents itself apart from those mentioned
-below. Thus c matches the character c.
-
                                                 ?
-This matches any single character. It is the same as
-. in full regexps.
-
                                                 *
-This matches zero or more of any characters. It is the
-same as .* in full regexps.
-
                                                 [...]
-Sets of characters can be represented in square brackets,
-similar to full regexps. Within the character class, like
-outside, backslash has no special meaning.
-
                                                
-
                                                 For example if we are in wildcard mode and have strings which
-contain filenames we could identify HTML files with *.html.
-This will match zero or more characters followed by a dot followed
-by 'h', 't', 'm' and 'l'.
-
                                                 
-
                                                 Notes for Perl Users
-
                                                
-
                                                 Most of the character class abbreviations supported by Perl are
-supported by TQRegExp, see characters
-    and abbreviations for sets of characters.
-
                                                 In TQRegExp, apart from within character classes, ^ always
-signifies the start of the string, so carets must always be
-escaped unless used for that purpose. In Perl the meaning of caret
-varies automagically depending on where it occurs so escaping it
-is rarely necessary. The same applies to $ which in
-TQRegExp always signifies the end of the string.
-
                                                 TQRegExp's quantifiers are the same as Perl's greedy quantifiers.
-Non-greedy matching cannot be applied to individual quantifiers,
-but can be applied to all the quantifiers in the pattern. For
-example, to match the Perl regexp ro+?m requires:
-
                                                -    TQRegExp rx( "ro+m" );
-    rx.setMinimal( TRUE );
-    
                                                
- 
-
                                                 The equivalent of Perl's /i option is
-setCaseSensitive(FALSE).
-
                                                 Perl's /g option can be emulated using a loop.
-
                                                 In TQRegExp . matches any character, therefore all TQRegExp
-regexps have the equivalent of Perl's /s option. TQRegExp
-does not have an equivalent to Perl's /m option, but this
-can be emulated in various ways for example by splitting the input
-into lines or by looping with a regexp that searches for newlines.
-
                                                 Because TQRegExp is string oriented there are no \A, \Z or \z
-assertions. The \G assertion is not supported but can be emulated
-in a loop.
-
                                                 Perl's $& is cap(0) or capturedTexts()[0]. There are no TQRegExp
-equivalents for $`, $' or $+. Perl's capturing variables, $1, $2,
-... correspond to cap(1) or capturedTexts()[1], cap(2) or
-capturedTexts()[2], etc.
-
                                                 To substitute a pattern use TQString::replace().
-
                                                 Perl's extended /x syntax is not supported, nor are
-directives, e.g. (?i), or regexp comments, e.g. (?#comment). On
-the other hand, C++'s rules for literal strings can be used to
-achieve the same:
-
                                                -    TQRegExp mark( "\\b" // word boundary
-                  "[Mm]ark" // the word we want to match
-                );
-    
                                                
- 
-
                                                 Both zero-width positive and zero-width negative lookahead
-assertions (?=pattern) and (?!pattern) are supported with the same
-syntax as Perl. Perl's lookbehind assertions, "independent"
-subexpressions and conditional expressions are not supported.
-
                                                 Non-capturing parentheses are also supported, with the same
-(?:pattern) syntax.
-
                                                 See TQStringList::split() and TQStringList::join() for equivalents
-to Perl's split and join functions.
-
                                                 Note: because C++ transforms \'s they must be written twice in
-code, e.g. \b must be written \\b.
-
                                                 
-
                                                 Code Examples
-
                                                
-
                                                 
                                                -    TQRegExp rx( "^\\d\\d?$" );  // match integers 0 to 99
-    rx.search( "123" );         // returns -1 (no match)
-    rx.search( "-6" );          // returns -1 (no match)
-    rx.search( "6" );           // returns 0 (matched as position 0)
-    
                                                
- 
-
                                                 The third string matches '6'. This is a simple validation
-regexp for integers in the range 0 to 99.
-
                                                 
                                                -    TQRegExp rx( "^\\S+$" );     // match strings without whitespace
-    rx.search( "Hello world" ); // returns -1 (no match)
-    rx.search( "This_is-OK" );  // returns 0 (matched at position 0)
-    
                                                
- 
-
                                                 The second string matches 'This_is-OK'. We've used the
-character set abbreviation '\S' (non-whitespace) and the anchors
-to match strings which contain no whitespace.
-
                                                 In the following example we match strings containing 'mail' or
-'letter' or 'correspondence' but only match whole words i.e. not
-'email'
-
                                                 
                                                -    TQRegExp rx( "\\b(mail|letter|correspondence)\\b" );
-    rx.search( "I sent you an email" );     // returns -1 (no match)
-    rx.search( "Please write the letter" ); // returns 17
-    
                                                
- 
-
                                                 The second string matches "Please write the letter". The
-word 'letter' is also captured (because of the parentheses). We
-can see what text we've captured like this:
-
                                                 
                                                -    TQString captured = rx.cap( 1 ); // captured == "letter"
-    
                                                
- 
-
                                                 This will capture the text from the first set of capturing
-parentheses (counting capturing left parentheses from left to
-right). The parentheses are counted from 1 since cap( 0 ) is the
-whole matched regexp (equivalent to '&' in most regexp engines).
-
                                                 
                                                -    TQRegExp rx( "&(?!amp;)" );      // match ampersands but not &amp;
-    TQString line1 = "This & that";
-    line1.replace( rx, "&amp;" );
-    // line1 == "This &amp; that"
-    TQString line2 = "His &amp; hers & theirs";
-    line2.replace( rx, "&amp;" );
-    // line2 == "His &amp; hers &amp; theirs"
-    
                                                
- 
-
                                                 Here we've passed the TQRegExp to TQString's replace() function to
-replace the matched text with new text.
-
                                                 
                                                -    TQString str = "One Eric another Eirik, and an Ericsson."
-                    " How many Eiriks, Eric?";
-    TQRegExp rx( "\\b(Eric|Eirik)\\b" ); // match Eric or Eirik
-    int pos = 0;    // where we are in the string
-    int count = 0;  // how many Eric and Eirik's we've counted
-    while ( pos >= 0 ) {
-        pos = rx.search( str, pos );
-        if ( pos >= 0 ) {
-            pos++;      // move along in str
-            count++;    // count our Eric or Eirik
-        }
-    }
-    
                                                
- 
-
                                                 We've used the search() function to repeatedly match the regexp in
-the string. Note that instead of moving forward by one character
-at a time pos++ we could have written pos += rx.matchedLength() to skip over the already matched string. The
-count will equal 3, matching 'One Eric another
-Eirik, and an Ericsson. How many Eiriks, Eric?'; it
-doesn't match 'Ericsson' or 'Eiriks' because they are not bounded
-by non-word boundaries.
-
                                                 One common use of regexps is to split lines of delimited data into
-their component fields.
-
                                                 
                                                -    str = "Trolltech AS\twww.trolltech.com\tNorway";
-    TQString company, web, country;
-    rx.setPattern( "^([^\t]+)\t([^\t]+)\t([^\t]+)$" );
-    if ( rx.search( str ) != -1 ) {
-        company = rx.cap( 1 );
-        web = rx.cap( 2 );
-        country = rx.cap( 3 );
-    }
-    
                                                
- 
-
                                                 In this example our input lines have the format company name, web
-address and country. Unfortunately the regexp is rather long and
-not very versatile -- the code will break if we add any more
-fields. A simpler and better solution is to look for the
-separator, '\t' in this case, and take the surrounding text. The
-TQStringList split() function can take a separator string or regexp
-as an argument and split a string accordingly.
-
                                                 
                                                -    TQStringList field = TQStringList::split( "\t", str );
-    
                                                
- 
-
                                                 Here field[0] is the company, field[1] the web address and so on.
-
                                                 To imitate the matching of a shell we can use wildcard mode.
-
                                                 
                                                -    TQRegExp rx( "*.html" );         // invalid regexp: * doesn't quantify anything
-    rx.setWildcard( TRUE );         // now it's a valid wildcard regexp
-    rx.exactMatch( "index.html" );  // returns TRUE
-    rx.exactMatch( "default.htm" ); // returns FALSE
-    rx.exactMatch( "readme.txt" );  // returns FALSE
-    
                                                
- 
-
                                                 Wildcard matching can be convenient because of its simplicity, but
-any wildcard regexp can be defined using full regexps, e.g.
-.*\.html$. Notice that we can't match both .html and .htm files with a wildcard unless we use *.htm* which will
-also match 'test.html.bak'. A full regexp gives us the precision
-we need, .*\.html?$.
-
                                                 TQRegExp can match case insensitively using setCaseSensitive(), and
-can use non-greedy matching, see setMinimal(). By default TQRegExp
-uses full regexps but this can be changed with setWildcard().
-Searching can be forward with search() or backward with
-searchRev(). Captured text can be accessed using capturedTexts()
-which returns a string list of all captured strings, or using
-cap() which returns the captured string for the given index. The
-pos() function takes a match index and returns the position in the
-string where the match was made (or -1 if there was no match).
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQRegExpValidator, TQString, TQStringList, Miscellaneous Classes, Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
-
-
                                                 
-
-
                                                Member Type Documentation
                                                
-
                                                TQRegExp::CaretMode
                                                
-
-
                                                 The CaretMode enum defines the different meanings of the caret
-(^) in a regular expression. The possible values are:
-
                                                  
-
                                                • TQRegExp::CaretAtZero - 
-The caret corresponds to index 0 in the searched string.
-
                                                • TQRegExp::CaretAtOffset - 
-The caret corresponds to the start offset of the search.
-
                                                • TQRegExp::CaretWontMatch - 
-The caret never matches.
-
                                                
-
                                                Member Function Documentation
                                                
-
                                                TQRegExp::TQRegExp ()
-
                                                
-Constructs an empty regexp.
-
                                                 
                                                See also isValid() and errorString().
-
-
                                                TQRegExp::TQRegExp ( const TQString & pattern, bool caseSensitive = TRUE, bool wildcard = FALSE )
-
                                                
-Constructs a regular expression object for the given pattern
-string. The pattern must be given using wildcard notation if wildcard is TRUE (default is FALSE). The pattern is case
-sensitive, unless caseSensitive is FALSE. Matching is greedy
-(maximal), but can be changed by calling setMinimal().
-
                                                 
                                                See also setPattern(), setCaseSensitive(), setWildcard(), and setMinimal().
-
-
                                                TQRegExp::TQRegExp ( const TQRegExp & rx )
-
                                                
-Constructs a regular expression as a copy of rx.
-
                                                 
                                                See also operator=().
-
-
                                                TQRegExp::~TQRegExp ()
-
                                                
-Destroys the regular expression and cleans up its internal data.
-
-
                                                TQString TQRegExp::cap ( int nth = 0 )
-
                                                
-Returns the text captured by the nth subexpression. The entire
-match has index 0 and the parenthesized subexpressions have
-indices starting from 1 (excluding non-capturing parentheses).
-
                                                 
                                                -    TQRegExp rxlen( "(\\d+)(?:\\s*)(cm|inch)" );
-    int pos = rxlen.search( "Length: 189cm" );
-    if ( pos > -1 ) {
-        TQString value = rxlen.cap( 1 ); // "189"
-        TQString unit = rxlen.cap( 2 );  // "cm"
-        // ...
-    }
-    
                                                
- 
-
                                                 The order of elements matched by cap() is as follows. The first
-element, cap(0), is the entire matching string. Each subsequent
-element corresponds to the next capturing open left parentheses.
-Thus cap(1) is the text of the first capturing parentheses, cap(2)
-is the text of the second, and so on.
-
                                                 
-Some patterns may lead to a number of matches which cannot be
-determined in advance, for example:
-
                                                 
                                                -    TQRegExp rx( "(\\d+)" );
-    str = "Offsets: 12 14 99 231 7";
-    TQStringList list;
-    pos = 0;
-    while ( pos >= 0 ) {
-        pos = rx.search( str, pos );
-        if ( pos > -1 ) {
-            list += rx.cap( 1 );
-            pos  += rx.matchedLength();
-        }
-    }
-    // list contains "12", "14", "99", "231", "7"
-    
                                                
- 
-
                                                 
                                                See also capturedTexts(), pos(), exactMatch(), search(), and searchRev().
-
-
                                                Examples: network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h and regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
-
                                                TQStringList TQRegExp::capturedTexts ()
-
                                                
-Returns a list of the captured text strings.
-
                                                 The first string in the list is the entire matched string. Each
-subsequent list element contains a string that matched a
-(capturing) subexpression of the regexp.
-
                                                 For example:
-
                                                -        TQRegExp rx( "(\\d+)(\\s*)(cm|inch(es)?)" );
-        int pos = rx.search( "Length: 36 inches" );
-        TQStringList list = rx.capturedTexts();
-        // list is now ( "36 inches", "36", " ", "inches", "es" )
-    
                                                
- 
-
                                                 The above example also captures elements that may be present but
-which we have no interest in. This problem can be solved by using
-non-capturing parentheses:
-
                                                 
                                                -        TQRegExp rx( "(\\d+)(?:\\s*)(cm|inch(?:es)?)" );
-        int pos = rx.search( "Length: 36 inches" );
-        TQStringList list = rx.capturedTexts();
-        // list is now ( "36 inches", "36", "inches" )
-    
                                                
- 
-
                                                 Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
-over a copy, e.g.
-
                                                -        TQStringList list = rx.capturedTexts();
-        TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
-        while( it != list.end() ) {
-            myProcessing( *it );
-            ++it;
-        }
-    
                                                
- 
-
                                                 Some regexps can match an indeterminate number of times. For
-example if the input string is "Offsets: 12 14 99 231 7" and the
-regexp, rx, is (\d+)+, we would hope to get a list of
-all the numbers matched. However, after calling
-rx.search(str), capturedTexts() will return the list ( "12",
-"12" ), i.e. the entire match was "12" and the first subexpression
-matched was "12". The correct approach is to use cap() in a loop.
-
                                                 The order of elements in the string list is as follows. The first
-element is the entire matching string. Each subsequent element
-corresponds to the next capturing open left parentheses. Thus
-capturedTexts()[1] is the text of the first capturing parentheses,
-capturedTexts()[2] is the text of the second and so on
-(corresponding to $1, $2, etc., in some other regexp languages).
-
                                                 
                                                See also cap(), pos(), exactMatch(), search(), and searchRev().
-
-
                                                bool TQRegExp::caseSensitive () const
-
                                                
-Returns TRUE if case sensitivity is enabled; otherwise returns
-FALSE. The default is TRUE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setCaseSensitive().
-
-
                                                TQString TQRegExp::errorString ()
-
                                                
-Returns a text string that explains why a regexp pattern is
-invalid the case being; otherwise returns "no error occurred".
-
                                                 
                                                See also isValid().
-
-
                                                Example: regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
-
                                                TQString TQRegExp::escape ( const TQString & str ) [static]
-
                                                
-Returns the string str with every regexp special character
-escaped with a backslash. The special characters are $, (, ), *, +,
-., ?, [, \, ], ^, {, | and }.
-
                                                 Example:
-
                                                -     s1 = TQRegExp::escape( "bingo" );   // s1 == "bingo"
-     s2 = TQRegExp::escape( "f(x)" );    // s2 == "f\\(x\\)"
-  
                                                
- 
-
                                                 This function is useful to construct regexp patterns dynamically:
-
                                                 
                                                -    TQRegExp rx( "(" + TQRegExp::escape(name) +
-                "|" + TQRegExp::escape(alias) + ")" );
-  
                                                
- 
-
-
                                                bool TQRegExp::exactMatch ( const TQString & str ) const
-
                                                
-Returns TRUE if str is matched exactly by this regular expression; otherwise returns FALSE. You can determine how much of
-the string was matched by calling matchedLength().
-
                                                 For a given regexp string, R, exactMatch("R") is the equivalent of
-search("^R$") since exactMatch() effectively encloses the regexp
-in the start of string and end of string anchors, except that it
-sets matchedLength() differently.
-
                                                 For example, if the regular expression is blue, then
-exactMatch() returns TRUE only for input blue. For inputs bluebell, blutak and lightblue, exactMatch() returns FALSE
-and matchedLength() will return 4, 3 and 0 respectively.
-
                                                 Although const, this function sets matchedLength(),
-capturedTexts() and pos().
-
                                                 
                                                See also search(), searchRev(), and TQRegExpValidator.
-
-
                                                bool TQRegExp::isEmpty () const
-
                                                
-Returns TRUE if the pattern string is empty; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                                 If you call exactMatch() with an empty pattern on an empty string
-it will return TRUE; otherwise it returns FALSE since it operates
-over the whole string. If you call search() with an empty pattern
-on any string it will return the start offset (0 by default)
-because the empty pattern matches the 'emptiness' at the start of
-the string. In this case the length of the match returned by
-matchedLength() will be 0.
-
                                                 See TQString::isEmpty().
-
-
                                                bool TQRegExp::isValid () const
-
                                                
-Returns TRUE if the regular expression is valid; otherwise returns
-FALSE. An invalid regular expression never matches.
-
                                                 The pattern [a-z is an example of an invalid pattern, since
-it lacks a closing square bracket.
-
                                                 Note that the validity of a regexp may also depend on the setting
-of the wildcard flag, for example *.html is a valid
-wildcard regexp but an invalid full regexp.
-
                                                 
                                                See also errorString().
-
-
                                                Example: regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
-
                                                int TQRegExp::match ( const TQString & str, int index = 0, int * len = 0, bool indexIsStart = TRUE ) const
-
                                                 This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                                 Attempts to match in str, starting from position index.
-Returns the position of the match, or -1 if there was no match.
-
                                                 The length of the match is stored in *len, unless len is a
-null pointer.
-
                                                 If indexIsStart is TRUE (the default), the position index in
-the string will match the start of string anchor, ^, in the
-regexp, if present. Otherwise, position 0 in str will match.
-
                                                 Use search() and matchedLength() instead of this function.
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQString::mid() and TQConstString.
-
-
                                                Example: qmag/qmag.cpp.
-
                                                int TQRegExp::matchedLength () const
-
                                                
-Returns the length of the last matched string, or -1 if there was
-no match.
-
                                                 
                                                See also exactMatch(), search(), and searchRev().
-
-
                                                Examples: network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h and regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
-
                                                bool TQRegExp::minimal () const
-
                                                
-Returns TRUE if minimal (non-greedy) matching is enabled;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setMinimal().
-
-
                                                int TQRegExp::numCaptures () const
-
                                                
-Returns the number of captures contained in the regular expression.
-
-
                                                Example: regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
-
                                                bool TQRegExp::operator!= ( const TQRegExp & rx ) const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns TRUE if this regular expression is not equal to rx;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also operator==().
-
-
                                                TQRegExp & TQRegExp::operator= ( const TQRegExp & rx )
-
                                                
-Copies the regular expression rx and returns a reference to the
-copy. The case sensitivity, wildcard and minimal matching options
-are also copied.
-
-
                                                bool TQRegExp::operator== ( const TQRegExp & rx ) const
-
                                                
-Returns TRUE if this regular expression is equal to rx;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                 Two TQRegExp objects are equal if they have the same pattern
-strings and the same settings for case sensitivity, wildcard and
-minimal matching.
-
-
                                                TQString TQRegExp::pattern () const
-
                                                
-Returns the pattern string of the regular expression. The pattern
-has either regular expression syntax or wildcard syntax, depending
-on wildcard().
-
                                                 
                                                See also setPattern().
-
-
                                                int TQRegExp::pos ( int nth = 0 )
-
                                                
-Returns the position of the nth captured text in the searched
-string. If nth is 0 (the default), pos() returns the position
-of the whole match.
-
                                                 Example:
-
                                                -    TQRegExp rx( "/([a-z]+)/([a-z]+)" );
-    rx.search( "Output /dev/null" );    // returns 7 (position of /dev/null)
-    rx.pos( 0 );                        // returns 7 (position of /dev/null)
-    rx.pos( 1 );                        // returns 8 (position of dev)
-    rx.pos( 2 );                        // returns 12 (position of null)
-    
                                                
- 
-
                                                 For zero-length matches, pos() always returns -1. (For example, if
-cap(4) would return an empty string, pos(4) returns -1.) This is
-due to an implementation tradeoff.
-
                                                 
                                                See also capturedTexts(), exactMatch(), search(), and searchRev().
-
-
                                                int TQRegExp::search ( const TQString & str, int offset = 0, CaretMode caretMode = CaretAtZero ) const
-
                                                
-Attempts to find a match in str from position offset (0 by
-default). If offset is -1, the search starts at the last
-character; if -2, at the next to last character; etc.
-
                                                 Returns the position of the first match, or -1 if there was no
-match.
-
                                                 The caretMode parameter can be used to instruct whether ^
-should match at index 0 or at offset.
-
                                                 You might prefer to use TQString::find(), TQString::contains() or
-even TQStringList::grep(). To replace matches use
-TQString::replace().
-
                                                 Example:
-
                                                -        TQString str = "offsets: 1.23 .50 71.00 6.00";
-        TQRegExp rx( "\\d*\\.\\d+" );    // primitive floating point matching
-        int count = 0;
-        int pos = 0;
-        while ( (pos = rx.search(str, pos)) != -1 ) {
-            count++;
-            pos += rx.matchedLength();
-        }
-        // pos will be 9, 14, 18 and finally 24; count will end up as 4
-    
                                                
- 
-
                                                 Although const, this function sets matchedLength(),
-capturedTexts() and pos().
-
                                                 
                                                See also searchRev() and exactMatch().
-
-
                                                Examples: network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h and regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
-
                                                int TQRegExp::searchRev ( const TQString & str, int offset = -1, CaretMode caretMode = CaretAtZero ) const
-
                                                
-Attempts to find a match backwards in str from position offset. If offset is -1 (the default), the search starts at the
-last character; if -2, at the next to last character; etc.
-
                                                 Returns the position of the first match, or -1 if there was no
-match.
-
                                                 The caretMode parameter can be used to instruct whether ^
-should match at index 0 or at offset.
-
                                                 Although const, this function sets matchedLength(),
-capturedTexts() and pos().
-
                                                 Warning: Searching backwards is much slower than searching
-forwards.
-
                                                 
                                                See also search() and exactMatch().
-
-
                                                void TQRegExp::setCaseSensitive ( bool sensitive )
-
                                                
-Sets case sensitive matching to sensitive.
-
                                                 If sensitive is TRUE, \.txt$ matches readme.txt but
-not README.TXT.
-
                                                 
                                                See also caseSensitive().
-
-
                                                Example: regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
-
                                                void TQRegExp::setMinimal ( bool minimal )
-
                                                
-Enables or disables minimal matching. If minimal is FALSE,
-matching is greedy (maximal) which is the default.
-
                                                 For example, suppose we have the input string "We must be
-<b>bold</b>, very <b>bold</b>!" and the pattern
-<b>.*</b>. With the default greedy (maximal) matching,
-the match is "We must be <b>bold</b>, very
-<b>bold</b>!". But with minimal (non-greedy) matching the
-first match is: "We must be <b>bold</b>, very
-<b>bold</b>!" and the second match is "We must be <b>bold</b>,
-very <b>bold</b>!". In practice we might use the pattern
-<b>[^<]+</b> instead, although this will still fail for
-nested tags.
-
                                                 
                                                See also minimal().
-
-
                                                Examples: network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h and regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
-
                                                void TQRegExp::setPattern ( const TQString & pattern )
-
                                                
-Sets the pattern string to pattern. The case sensitivity,
-wildcard and minimal matching options are not changed.
-
                                                 
                                                See also pattern().
-
-
                                                void TQRegExp::setWildcard ( bool wildcard )
-
                                                
-Sets the wildcard mode for the regular expression. The default is
-FALSE.
-
                                                 Setting wildcard to TRUE enables simple shell-like wildcard
-matching. (See wildcard matching
-    (globbing).)
-
                                                 For example, r*.txt matches the string readme.txt in
-wildcard mode, but does not match readme.
-
                                                 
                                                See also wildcard().
-
-
                                                Example: regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
-
                                                bool TQRegExp::wildcard () const
-
                                                
-Returns TRUE if wildcard mode is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-The default is FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setWildcard().
-
-
-
                                                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                
-
-
                                                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                TQt 3.3.8
                                                
-
                                                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qregexpvalidator-members.html b/doc/html/qregexpvalidator-members.html
index 7293badda..139a88ce1 100644
--- a/doc/html/qregexpvalidator-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qregexpvalidator-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -37,51 +37,51 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qregexpvalidator.html b/doc/html/qregexpvalidator.html
index 928dce732..c6c22b15b 100644
--- a/doc/html/qregexpvalidator.html
+++ b/doc/html/qregexpvalidator.html
@@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                                The TQRegExpValidator class is used to check a string
 against a regular expression.
 More...
-
                                                #include <qvalidator.h>
-
                                                Inherits TQValidator.
+
                                                #include <ntqvalidator.h>
+
                                                Inherits TQValidator.
 
                                                List of all member functions.
 
                                                Public Members
                                                
 
                                                  
@@ -50,54 +50,54 @@ against a regular expression.
 
 
 The TQRegExpValidator class is used to check a string
-against a regular expression.
+against a regular expression.
 
                                                   
 
                                                   TQRegExpValidator contains a regular expression, "regexp", used to
-determine whether an input string is Acceptable, Intermediate or Invalid.
+determine whether an input string is Acceptable, Intermediate or Invalid.
 
                                                   The regexp is treated as if it begins with the start of string
 assertion, ^, and ends with the end of string assertion
 $ so the match is against the entire input string, or from
 the given position if a start position greater than zero is given.
-
                                                   For a brief introduction to TQt's regexp engine see TQRegExp.
+
                                                   For a brief introduction to TQt's regexp engine see TQRegExp.
 
                                                   Example of use:
 
                                                       // regexp: optional '-' followed by between 1 and 3 digits
-    TQRegExp rx( "-?\\d{1,3}" );
-    TQValidator* validator = new TQRegExpValidator( rx, this );
+    TQRegExp rx( "-?\\d{1,3}" );
+    TQValidator* validator = new TQRegExpValidator( rx, this );
 
-    TQLineEdit* edit = new TQLineEdit( this );
-    edit->setValidator( validator );
+    TQLineEdit* edit = new TQLineEdit( this );
+    edit->setValidator( validator );
     
                                                  
  
 
                                                   Below we present some examples of validators. In practice they would
 normally be associated with a widget as in the example above.
 
                                                   
                                                       // integers 1 to 9999
-    TQRegExp rx( "[1-9]\\d{0,3}" );
+    TQRegExp rx( "[1-9]\\d{0,3}" );
     // the validator treats the regexp as "^[1-9]\\d{0,3}$"
     TQRegExpValidator v( rx, 0 );
-    TQString s;
+    TQString s;
     int pos = 0;
 
     s = "0";     v.validate( s, pos );    // returns Invalid
     s = "12345"; v.validate( s, pos );    // returns Invalid
     s = "1";     v.validate( s, pos );    // returns Acceptable
 
-    rx.setPattern( "\\S+" );            // one or more non-whitespace characters
+    rx.setPattern( "\\S+" );            // one or more non-whitespace characters
     v.setRegExp( rx );
     s = "myfile.txt";  v.validate( s, pos ); // Returns Acceptable
     s = "my file.txt"; v.validate( s, pos ); // Returns Invalid
 
     // A, B or C followed by exactly five digits followed by W, X, Y or Z
-    rx.setPattern( "[A-C]\\d{5}[W-Z]" );
+    rx.setPattern( "[A-C]\\d{5}[W-Z]" );
     v.setRegExp( rx );
     s = "a12345Z"; v.validate( s, pos );        // Returns Invalid
     s = "A12345Z"; v.validate( s, pos );        // Returns Acceptable
     s = "B12";     v.validate( s, pos );        // Returns Intermediate
 
     // match most 'readme' files
-    rx.setPattern( "read\\S?me(\.(txt|asc|1st))?" );
-    rx.setCaseSensitive( FALSE );
+    rx.setPattern( "read\\S?me(\.(txt|asc|1st))?" );
+    rx.setCaseSensitive( FALSE );
     v.setRegExp( rx );
     s = "readme";      v.validate( s, pos ); // Returns Acceptable
     s = "README.1ST";  v.validate( s, pos ); // Returns Acceptable
@@ -105,18 +105,18 @@ normally be associated with a widget as in the example above.
     s = "readm";       v.validate( s, pos ); // Returns Intermediate
     
                                                  
  
-
                                                   
                                                  See also TQRegExp, TQIntValidator, TQDoubleValidator, and Miscellaneous Classes.
+
                                                   
                                                  See also TQRegExp, TQIntValidator, TQDoubleValidator, and Miscellaneous Classes.
 
 
                                                  Member Function Documentation
                                                  
-
                                                  TQRegExpValidator::TQRegExpValidator ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
                                                  TQRegExpValidator::TQRegExpValidator ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
 
                                                  
 Constructs a validator that accepts any string (including an empty
 one) as valid. The object's parent is parent and its name is name.
 
-
                                                  TQRegExpValidator::TQRegExpValidator ( const TQRegExp & rx, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
                                                  TQRegExpValidator::TQRegExpValidator ( const TQRegExp & rx, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
 
                                                  
 Constructs a validator which accepts all strings that match the
-regular expression rx. The object's parent is parent and its
+regular expression rx. The object's parent is parent and its
 name is name.
 
                                                   The match is made against the entire string, e.g. if the regexp is
 [A-Fa-f0-9]+ it will be treated as ^[A-Fa-f0-9]+$.
@@ -125,29 +125,29 @@ name is name.
 
 Destroys the validator, freeing any resources allocated.
 
-
                                                  const TQRegExp & TQRegExpValidator::regExp () const
+
                                                  const TQRegExp & TQRegExpValidator::regExp () const
 
                                                  
 
-
                                                   Returns the regular expression used for validation.
+
                                                   Returns the regular expression used for validation.
 
                                                   
                                                  See also setRegExp().
 
-
                                                  void TQRegExpValidator::setRegExp ( const TQRegExp & rx )
+
                                                  void TQRegExpValidator::setRegExp ( const TQRegExp & rx )
 
                                                  
-Sets the regular expression used for validation to rx.
+Sets the regular expression used for validation to rx.
 
                                                   
                                                  See also regExp().
 
-
                                                  TQValidator::State TQRegExpValidator::validate ( TQString & input, int & pos ) const [virtual]
+
                                                  TQValidator::State TQRegExpValidator::validate ( TQString & input, int & pos ) const [virtual]
 
                                                  
-Returns Acceptable if input is matched by the regular expression for this validator, Intermediate if it has matched
+Returns Acceptable if input is matched by the regular expression for this validator, Intermediate if it has matched
 partially (i.e. could be a valid match if additional valid
-characters are added), and Invalid if input is not matched.
+characters are added), and Invalid if input is not matched.
 
                                                   The pos parameter is set to the length of the input parameter.
 
                                                   For example, if the regular expression is \w\d\d (that
-is, word-character, digit, digit) then "A57" is Acceptable,
-"E5" is Intermediate and "+9" is Invalid.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also TQRegExp::match() and TQRegExp::search().
+is, word-character, digit, digit) then "A57" is Acceptable,
+"E5" is Intermediate and "+9" is Invalid.
+
                                                   
                                                  See also TQRegExp::match() and TQRegExp::search().
 
-
                                                  Reimplemented from TQValidator.
+
                                                  Reimplemented from TQValidator.
 
 
                                                  
 This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
diff --git a/doc/html/qregion-h.html b/doc/html/qregion-h.html
index 3387e74e6..c7aee76dc 100644
--- a/doc/html/qregion-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qregion-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qregion.h Include File
+ntqregion.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                  
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                  TQRegion Class Reference
                                                  
-
-
                                                  The TQRegion class specifies a clip region for a painter.
-More...
-
                                                  #include <qregion.h>
-
                                                  List of all member functions.
-
                                                  Public Members
                                                  
-
                                                    
-
                                                  • enum RegionType { Rectangle, Ellipse }
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • TQRegion ()
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • TQRegion ( int x, int y, int w, int h, RegionType t = Rectangle )
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • TQRegion ( const TQRect & r, RegionType t = Rectangle )
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • TQRegion ( const TQPointArray & a, bool winding = FALSE )
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • TQRegion ( const TQRegion & r )
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • TQRegion ( const TQBitmap & bm )
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • ~TQRegion ()
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • TQRegion & operator= ( const TQRegion & r )
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • bool isNull () const
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • bool isEmpty () const
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • bool contains ( const TQPoint & p ) const
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • bool contains ( const TQRect & r ) const
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • void translate ( int dx, int dy )
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • TQRegion unite ( const TQRegion & r ) const
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • TQRegion intersect ( const TQRegion & r ) const
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • TQRegion subtract ( const TQRegion & r ) const
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • TQRegion eor ( const TQRegion & r ) const
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • TQRect boundingRect () const
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • TQMemArray<TQRect> rects () const
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • const TQRegion operator| ( const TQRegion & r ) const
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • const TQRegion operator+ ( const TQRegion & r ) const
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • const TQRegion operator& ( const TQRegion & r ) const
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • const TQRegion operator- ( const TQRegion & r ) const
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • const TQRegion operator^ ( const TQRegion & r ) const
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • TQRegion & operator|= ( const TQRegion & r )
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • TQRegion & operator+= ( const TQRegion & r )
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • TQRegion & operator&= ( const TQRegion & r )
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • TQRegion & operator-= ( const TQRegion & r )
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • TQRegion & operator^= ( const TQRegion & r )
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • bool operator== ( const TQRegion & r ) const
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • bool operator!= ( const TQRegion & r ) const
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • HRGN handle () const
                                                    • 
-
                                                  
-
                                                  Related Functions
                                                  
-
                                                    
-
                                                  • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQRegion & r )
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQRegion & r )
                                                    • 
-
                                                  
-
                                                  Detailed Description
                                                  
-
-
-The TQRegion class specifies a clip region for a painter.
-
                                                   
-
-
                                                   TQRegion is used with TQPainter::setClipRegion() to limit the paint
-area to what needs to be painted. There is also a
-TQWidget::repaint() that takes a TQRegion parameter. TQRegion is the
-best tool for reducing flicker.
-
                                                   A region can be created from a rectangle, an ellipse, a polygon or
-a bitmap. Complex regions may be created by combining simple
-regions using unite(), intersect(), subtract() or eor() (exclusive
-or). You can move a region using translate().
-
                                                   You can test whether a region isNull(), isEmpty() or if it
-contains() a TQPoint or TQRect. The bounding rectangle is given by
-boundingRect().
-
                                                   The function rects() gives a decomposition of the region into
-rectangles.
-
                                                   Example of using complex regions:
-
                                                  -        void MyWidget::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
-        {
-            TQPainter p;                         // our painter
-            TQRegion r1( TQRect(100,100,200,80),  // r1 = elliptic region
-                        TQRegion::Ellipse );
-            TQRegion r2( TQRect(100,120,90,30) ); // r2 = rectangular region
-            TQRegion r3 = r1.intersect( r2 );    // r3 = intersection
-            p.begin( this );                    // start painting widget
-            p.setClipRegion( r3 );              // set clip region
-            ...                                 // paint clipped graphics
-            p.end();                            // painting done
-        }
-    
                                                  
- 
-
                                                   TQRegion is an implicitly shared class.
-
                                                   Warning: Due to window system limitations, the whole coordinate
-space for a region is limited to the points between -32767 and
-32767 on Mac OS X and Windows 95/98/ME.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also TQPainter::setClipRegion(), TQPainter::setClipRect(), Graphics Classes, and Image Processing Classes.
-
-
                                                  Member Type Documentation
                                                  
-
                                                  TQRegion::RegionType
                                                  
-
-
                                                   Specifies the shape of the region to be created.
-
                                                    
-
                                                  • TQRegion::Rectangle - the region covers the entire rectangle.
-
                                                  • TQRegion::Ellipse - the region is an ellipse inside the rectangle.
-
                                                  
-
                                                  Member Function Documentation
                                                  
-
                                                  TQRegion::TQRegion ()
-
                                                  
-Constructs a null region.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also isNull().
-
-
                                                  TQRegion::TQRegion ( int x, int y, int w, int h, RegionType t = Rectangle )
-
                                                  
-Constructs a rectangular or elliptic region.
-
                                                   If t is Rectangle, the region is the filled rectangle (x,
-y, w, h). If t is Ellipse, the region is the filled
-ellipse with center at (x + w / 2, y + h / 2) and size
-(w ,h ).
-
-
                                                  TQRegion::TQRegion ( const TQRect & r, RegionType t = Rectangle )
-
                                                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                   Create a region based on the rectange r with region type t.
-
                                                   If the rectangle is invalid a null region will be created.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also TQRegion::RegionType.
-
-
                                                  TQRegion::TQRegion ( const TQPointArray & a, bool winding = FALSE )
-
                                                  
-Constructs a polygon region from the point array a.
-
                                                   If winding is TRUE, the polygon region is filled using the
-winding algorithm, otherwise the default even-odd fill algorithm
-is used.
-
                                                   This constructor may create complex regions that will slow down
-painting when used.
-
-
                                                  TQRegion::TQRegion ( const TQRegion & r )
-
                                                  
-Constructs a new region which is equal to region r.
-
-
                                                  TQRegion::TQRegion ( const TQBitmap & bm )
-
                                                  
-Constructs a region from the bitmap bm.
-
                                                   The resulting region consists of the pixels in bitmap bm that
-are color1, as if each pixel was a 1 by 1 rectangle.
-
                                                   This constructor may create complex regions that will slow down
-painting when used. Note that drawing masked pixmaps can be done
-much faster using TQPixmap::setMask().
-
-
                                                  TQRegion::~TQRegion ()
-
                                                  
-Destroys the region.
-
-
                                                  TQRect TQRegion::boundingRect () const
-
                                                  
-Returns the bounding rectangle of this region. An empty region
-gives a rectangle that is TQRect::isNull().
-
-
                                                  bool TQRegion::contains ( const TQPoint & p ) const
-
                                                  
-Returns TRUE if the region contains the point p; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                  bool TQRegion::contains ( const TQRect & r ) const
-
                                                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                   Returns TRUE if the region overlaps the rectangle r; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                  TQRegion TQRegion::eor ( const TQRegion & r ) const
-
                                                  
-Returns a region which is the exclusive or (XOR) of this region
-and r.
-
                                                   
                                                  Region XORed
                                                   
-
                                                   The figure shows the exclusive or of two elliptical regions.
-
-
                                                  HRGN TQRegion::handle () const
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   Returns the region's handle.
-
-
                                                  TQRegion TQRegion::intersect ( const TQRegion & r ) const
-
                                                  
-Returns a region which is the intersection of this region and r.
-
                                                   
                                                  Region Intersection
                                                   
-
                                                   The figure shows the intersection of two elliptical regions.
-
-
                                                  bool TQRegion::isEmpty () const
-
                                                  
-Returns TRUE if the region is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. An
-empty region is a region that contains no points.
-
                                                   Example:
-
                                                  -        TQRegion r1( 10, 10, 20, 20 );
-        TQRegion r2( 40, 40, 20, 20 );
-        TQRegion r3;
-        r1.isNull();             // FALSE
-        r1.isEmpty();            // FALSE
-        r3.isNull();             // TRUE
-        r3.isEmpty();            // TRUE
-        r3 = r1.intersect( r2 ); // r3 = intersection of r1 and r2
-        r3.isNull();             // FALSE
-        r3.isEmpty();            // TRUE
-        r3 = r1.unite( r2 );     // r3 = union of r1 and r2
-        r3.isNull();             // FALSE
-        r3.isEmpty();            // FALSE
-    
                                                  
- 
-
                                                   
                                                  See also isNull().
-
-
                                                  bool TQRegion::isNull () const
-
                                                  
-Returns TRUE if the region is a null region; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                                   A null region is a region that has not been initialized. A null
-region is always empty.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also isEmpty().
-
-
                                                  bool TQRegion::operator!= ( const TQRegion & r ) const
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   Returns TRUE if the region is different from r; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                  const TQRegion TQRegion::operator& ( const TQRegion & r ) const
-
                                                  
-Applies the intersect() function to this region and r. r1&r2
-is equivalent to r1.intersect(r2)
-
                                                   
                                                  See also intersect().
-
-
                                                  TQRegion & TQRegion::operator&= ( const TQRegion & r )
-
                                                  
-Applies the intersect() function to this region and r and
-assigns the result to this region. r1&=r2 is equivalent to r1=r1.intersect(r2)
-
                                                   
                                                  See also intersect().
-
-
                                                  const TQRegion TQRegion::operator+ ( const TQRegion & r ) const
-
                                                  
-Applies the unite() function to this region and r. r1+r2 is
-equivalent to r1.unite(r2)
-
                                                   
                                                  See also unite() and operator|().
-
-
                                                  TQRegion & TQRegion::operator+= ( const TQRegion & r )
-
                                                  
-Applies the unite() function to this region and r and assigns
-the result to this region. r1+=r2 is equivalent to r1=r1.unite(r2)
-
                                                   
                                                  See also intersect().
-
-
                                                  const TQRegion TQRegion::operator- ( const TQRegion & r ) const
-
                                                  
-Applies the subtract() function to this region and r. r1-r2
-is equivalent to r1.subtract(r2)
-
                                                   
                                                  See also subtract().
-
-
                                                  TQRegion & TQRegion::operator-= ( const TQRegion & r )
-
                                                  
-Applies the subtract() function to this region and r and
-assigns the result to this region. r1-=r2 is equivalent to r1=r1.subtract(r2)
-
                                                   
                                                  See also subtract().
-
-
                                                  TQRegion & TQRegion::operator= ( const TQRegion & r )
-
                                                  
-Assigns r to this region and returns a reference to the region.
-
-
                                                  bool TQRegion::operator== ( const TQRegion & r ) const
-
                                                  
-Returns TRUE if the region is equal to r; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
-
                                                  const TQRegion TQRegion::operator^ ( const TQRegion & r ) const
-
                                                  
-Applies the eor() function to this region and r. r1^r2 is
-equivalent to r1.eor(r2)
-
                                                   
                                                  See also eor().
-
-
                                                  TQRegion & TQRegion::operator^= ( const TQRegion & r )
-
                                                  
-Applies the eor() function to this region and r and
-assigns the result to this region. r1^=r2 is equivalent to r1=r1.eor(r2)
-
                                                   
                                                  See also eor().
-
-
                                                  const TQRegion TQRegion::operator| ( const TQRegion & r ) const
-
                                                  
-Applies the unite() function to this region and r. r1|r2 is
-equivalent to r1.unite(r2)
-
                                                   
                                                  See also unite() and operator+().
-
-
                                                  TQRegion & TQRegion::operator|= ( const TQRegion & r )
-
                                                  
-Applies the unite() function to this region and r and assigns
-the result to this region. r1|=r2 is equivalent to r1=r1.unite(r2)
-
                                                   
                                                  See also unite().
-
-
                                                  TQMemArray<TQRect> TQRegion::rects () const
-
                                                  
-Returns an array of non-overlapping rectangles that make up the
-region.
-
                                                   The union of all the rectangles is equal to the original region.
-
-
                                                  TQRegion TQRegion::subtract ( const TQRegion & r ) const
-
                                                  
-Returns a region which is r subtracted from this region.
-
                                                   
                                                  Region Subtraction
                                                   
-
                                                   The figure shows the result when the ellipse on the right is
-subtracted from the ellipse on the left. (left-right )
-
-
                                                  void TQRegion::translate ( int dx, int dy )
-
                                                  
-Translates (moves) the region dx along the X axis and dy
-along the Y axis.
-
-
                                                  TQRegion TQRegion::unite ( const TQRegion & r ) const
-
                                                  
-Returns a region which is the union of this region and r.
-
                                                   
                                                  Region Union
                                                   
-
                                                   The figure shows the union of two elliptical regions.
-
-
                                                  Related Functions
                                                  
-
                                                  TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQRegion & r )
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   Writes the region r to the stream s and returns a reference
-to the stream.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
                                                  TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQRegion & r )
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   Reads a region from the stream s into r and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
-
                                                  
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                  
-
-
                                                  Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                  TQt 3.3.8
                                                  
-
                                                  
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qresizeevent-members.html b/doc/html/qresizeevent-members.html
index 08651f01a..163c05c9b 100644
--- a/doc/html/qresizeevent-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qresizeevent-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -38,8 +38,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                                • TQResizeEvent()
 
                                                • oldSize()
 
                                                • size()
-
                                                • spontaneous()
-
                                                • type()
+
                                                • spontaneous()
+
                                                • type()
 
                                                
 
 
                                                
diff --git a/doc/html/qresizeevent.html b/doc/html/qresizeevent.html
index 20cb9e7d7..24b0d77d2 100644
--- a/doc/html/qresizeevent.html
+++ b/doc/html/qresizeevent.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                                The TQResizeEvent class contains event parameters for resize events.
 More...
-
                                                #include <qevent.h>
-
                                                Inherits TQEvent.
+
                                                #include <ntqevent.h>
+
                                                Inherits TQEvent.
 
                                                List of all member functions.
 
                                                Public Members
                                                
 
                                                  
@@ -48,25 +48,25 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 The TQResizeEvent class contains event parameters for resize events.
 
                                                   
 
                                                   Resize events are sent to widgets that have been resized.
-
                                                   The event handler TQWidget::resizeEvent() receives resize events.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also TQWidget::size, TQWidget::geometry, and Event Classes.
+
                                                   The event handler TQWidget::resizeEvent() receives resize events.
+
                                                   
                                                  See also TQWidget::size, TQWidget::geometry, and Event Classes.
 
 
                                                  Member Function Documentation
                                                  
-
                                                  TQResizeEvent::TQResizeEvent ( const TQSize & size, const TQSize & oldSize )
+
                                                  TQResizeEvent::TQResizeEvent ( const TQSize & size, const TQSize & oldSize )
 
                                                  
 
 
                                                   Constructs a resize event with the new and old widget sizes, size and oldSize respectively.
 
-
                                                  const TQSize & TQResizeEvent::oldSize () const
+
                                                  const TQSize & TQResizeEvent::oldSize () const
 
                                                  
 
 
                                                   Returns the old size of the widget.
 
-
                                                  const TQSize & TQResizeEvent::size () const
+
                                                  const TQSize & TQResizeEvent::size () const
 
                                                  
 
 
                                                   Returns the new size of the widget, which is the same as
-TQWidget::size().
+TQWidget::size().
 
 
                                                  Examples: chart/canvasview.cpp and life/life.cpp.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qrtlcodec-h.html b/doc/html/qrtlcodec-h.html
index 69bd34d34..d281fa4a9 100644
--- a/doc/html/qrtlcodec-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qrtlcodec-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qrtlcodec.h Include File
+ntqrtlcodec.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                  
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                  TQScrollBar Class Reference
                                                  
-
-
                                                  The TQScrollBar widget provides a vertical or horizontal scroll bar.
-More...
-
                                                  #include <qscrollbar.h>
-
                                                  Inherits TQWidget and TQRangeControl.
-
                                                  List of all member functions.
-
                                                  Public Members
                                                  
-
-
                                                  Public Slots
                                                  
-
-
                                                  Signals
                                                  
-
-
                                                  Properties
                                                  
-
                                                    
-
                                                  • bool draggingSlider - whether the user has clicked the mouse on the slider and is currently dragging it  (read only)
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • int lineStep - the line step
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • int maxValue - the scroll bar's maximum value
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • int minValue - the scroll bar's minimum value
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • Orientation orientation - the orientation of the scroll bar
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • int pageStep - the page step
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • bool tracking - whether scroll bar tracking is enabled
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • int value - the scroll bar's value
                                                    • 
-
                                                  
-
                                                  Protected Members
                                                  
-
-
                                                  Detailed Description
                                                  
-
-
-The TQScrollBar widget provides a vertical or horizontal scroll bar.
-
                                                   
-
                                                   A scroll bar allows the user to control a value within a
-program-definable range and gives users a visible indication of
-the current value of a range control.
-
                                                   Scroll bars include four separate controls:
-
                                                   
                                                    
-
                                                     
                                                  •  The line-up and line-down controls are little buttons
-which the user can use to move one "line" up or down. The meaning
-of line is configurable. In editors and list boxes it means one
-line of text; in an image viewer it might mean 20 pixels.
-
                                                     
                                                  •  The slider is the handle that indicates the current value of
-the scroll bar, which the user can drag to change the value. This
-part of the scroll bar is sometimes called the "thumb".
-
                                                     
                                                  •  The page-up/page-down control is the area on which the
-slider slides (the scroll bar's background). Clicking here moves
-the scroll bar towards the click. The meaning of "page" is also
-configurable: in editors and list boxes it means as many lines as
-there is space for in the widget.
-
                                                     
                                                  
-
                                                   TQScrollBar has very few of its own functions; it mostly relies on
-TQRangeControl. The most useful functions are setValue() to set the
-scroll bar directly to some value; addPage(), addLine(),
-subtractPage(), and subtractLine() to simulate the effects of
-clicking (useful for accelerator keys); setSteps() to define the
-values of pageStep() and lineStep(); and setRange() to set the
-minValue() and maxValue() of the scroll bar. TQScrollBar has a
-convenience constructor with which you can set most of these
-properties.
-
                                                   Some GUI styles (for example, the Windows and Motif styles
-provided with TQt), also use the pageStep() value to calculate the
-size of the slider.
-
                                                   In addition to the access functions from TQRangeControl, TQScrollBar
-provides a comprehensive set of signals:
-
                                                  
-
                                                   Signal Emitted when
-
                                                   valueChanged()
-the scroll bar's value has changed. The tracking()
-determines whether this signal is emitted during user
-interaction.
-
                                                   sliderPressed()
-the user starts to drag the slider.
-
                                                   sliderMoved()
-the user drags the slider.
-
                                                   sliderReleased()
-the user releases the slider.
-
                                                   nextLine()
-the scroll bar has moved one line down or right. Line is
-defined in TQRangeControl.
-
                                                   prevLine()
-the scroll bar has moved one line up or left.
-
                                                   nextPage()
-the scroll bar has moved one page down or right.
-
                                                   prevPage()
-the scroll bar has moved one page up or left.
-
                                                  
-
                                                   TQScrollBar only provides integer ranges. Note that although
-TQScrollBar handles very large numbers, scroll bars on current
-screens cannot usefully control ranges above about 100,000 pixels.
-Beyond that, it becomes difficult for the user to control the
-scroll bar using either the keyboard or the mouse.
-
                                                   A scroll bar can be controlled by the keyboard, but it has a
-default focusPolicy() of NoFocus. Use setFocusPolicy() to
-enable keyboard focus. See keyPressEvent() for a list of key
-bindings.
-
                                                   If you need to add scroll bars to an interface, consider using the
-TQScrollView class, which encapsulates the common uses for scroll
-bars.
-
                                                    
-
                                                   
                                                  See also TQSlider, TQSpinBox, TQScrollView, GUI Design Handbook: Scroll Bar, and Basic Widgets.
-
-
                                                  Member Function Documentation
                                                  
-
                                                  TQScrollBar::TQScrollBar ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                  
-Constructs a vertical scroll bar.
-
                                                   The parent and name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
                                                   The minValue defaults to 0, the maxValue to 99, with a lineStep size of 1 and a pageStep size of 10, and an initial
-value of 0.
-
-
                                                  TQScrollBar::TQScrollBar ( Orientation orientation, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                  
-Constructs a scroll bar.
-
                                                   The orientation must be TQt::Vertical or TQt::Horizontal.
-
                                                   The parent and name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
                                                   The minValue defaults to 0, the maxValue to 99, with a lineStep size of 1 and a pageStep size of 10, and an initial
-value of 0.
-
-
                                                  TQScrollBar::TQScrollBar ( int minValue, int maxValue, int lineStep, int pageStep, int value, Orientation orientation, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                  
-Constructs a scroll bar whose value can never be smaller than minValue or greater than maxValue, whose line step size is lineStep and page step size is pageStep and whose value is
-initially value (which is guaranteed to be in range using
-bound()).
-
                                                   If orientation is Vertical the scroll bar is vertical and if
-it is Horizontal the scroll bar is horizontal.
-
                                                   The parent and name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
-
                                                  TQScrollBar::~TQScrollBar ()
-
                                                  
-Destructor.
-
-
                                                  bool TQScrollBar::draggingSlider () const
-
                                                  Returns TRUE if the user has clicked the mouse on the slider and is currently dragging it; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "draggingSlider" property for details.
-
                                                  void TQScrollBar::hideEvent ( TQHideEvent * ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                  
-This function is called when the scrollbar is hidden.
-
-
                                                  Reimplemented from TQWidget.
-
                                                  int TQScrollBar::lineStep () const
-
                                                  Returns the line step.
-See the "lineStep" property for details.
-
                                                  int TQScrollBar::maxValue () const
-
                                                  Returns the scroll bar's maximum value.
-See the "maxValue" property for details.
-
                                                  int TQScrollBar::minValue () const
-
                                                  Returns the scroll bar's minimum value.
-See the "minValue" property for details.
-
                                                  void TQScrollBar::nextLine () [signal]
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   This signal is emitted when the scroll bar scrolls one line down
-or right.
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollBar::nextPage () [signal]
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   This signal is emitted when the scroll bar scrolls one page down
-or right.
-
-
                                                  Orientation TQScrollBar::orientation () const
-
                                                  Returns the orientation of the scroll bar.
-See the "orientation" property for details.
-
                                                  int TQScrollBar::pageStep () const
-
                                                  Returns the page step.
-See the "pageStep" property for details.
-
                                                  void TQScrollBar::prevLine () [signal]
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   This signal is emitted when the scroll bar scrolls one line up or
-left.
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollBar::prevPage () [signal]
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   This signal is emitted when the scroll bar scrolls one page up or
-left.
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollBar::setLineStep ( int )
-
                                                  Sets the line step.
-See the "lineStep" property for details.
-
                                                  void TQScrollBar::setMaxValue ( int )
-
                                                  Sets the scroll bar's maximum value.
-See the "maxValue" property for details.
-
                                                  void TQScrollBar::setMinValue ( int )
-
                                                  Sets the scroll bar's minimum value.
-See the "minValue" property for details.
-
                                                  void TQScrollBar::setOrientation ( Orientation ) [virtual]
-
                                                  Sets the orientation of the scroll bar.
-See the "orientation" property for details.
-
                                                  void TQScrollBar::setPageStep ( int )
-
                                                  Sets the page step.
-See the "pageStep" property for details.
-
                                                  void TQScrollBar::setPalette ( const TQPalette & p ) [virtual]
-
                                                  
-Reimplements the virtual function TQWidget::setPalette().
-
                                                   Sets the background color to the mid color for Motif style scroll
-bars using palette p.
-
-
                                                  Reimplemented from TQWidget.
-
                                                  void TQScrollBar::setTracking ( bool enable ) [virtual]
-
                                                  Sets whether scroll bar tracking is enabled to enable.
-See the "tracking" property for details.
-
                                                  void TQScrollBar::setValue ( int ) [slot]
-
                                                  Sets the scroll bar's value.
-See the "value" property for details.
-
                                                  void TQScrollBar::sliderMoved ( int value ) [signal]
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   This signal is emitted when the slider is dragged by the user, with
-the new scroll bar value as an argument.
-
                                                   This signal is emitted even when tracking is turned off.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also tracking, valueChanged(), nextLine(), prevLine(), nextPage(), and prevPage().
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollBar::sliderPressed () [signal]
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   This signal is emitted when the user presses the slider with the
-mouse.
-
-
                                                  TQRect TQScrollBar::sliderRect () const
-
                                                  
-Returns the scroll bar slider rectangle.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also sliderStart().
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollBar::sliderReleased () [signal]
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   This signal is emitted when the user releases the slider with the
-mouse.
-
-
                                                  int TQScrollBar::sliderStart () const
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   Returns the pixel position where the scroll bar slider starts.
-
                                                   This is equivalent to sliderRect().y() for vertical scroll bars or
-sliderRect().x() for horizontal scroll bars.
-
-
                                                  bool TQScrollBar::tracking () const
-
                                                  Returns TRUE if scroll bar tracking is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "tracking" property for details.
-
                                                  int TQScrollBar::value () const
-
                                                  Returns the scroll bar's value.
-See the "value" property for details.
-
                                                  void TQScrollBar::valueChanged ( int value ) [signal]
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   This signal is emitted when the scroll bar value has changed, with
-the new scroll bar value as an argument.
-
-
                                                  Property Documentation
                                                  
-
                                                  bool draggingSlider
                                                  
-
                                                  This property holds whether the user has clicked the mouse on the slider and is currently dragging it.
-
                                                  
-
                                                  Get this property's value with draggingSlider().
-
                                                  int lineStep
                                                  
-
                                                  This property holds the line step.
-
                                                  When setting lineStep, the virtual stepChange() function will be
-called if the new line step is different from the previous
-setting.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also setSteps(), TQRangeControl::pageStep(), and setRange().
-
-
                                                  Set this property's value with setLineStep() and get this property's value with lineStep().
-
                                                  int maxValue
                                                  
-
                                                  This property holds the scroll bar's maximum value.
-
                                                  When setting this property, the TQScrollBar::minValue is
-adjusted if necessary to ensure that the range remains valid.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also setRange().
-
-
                                                  Set this property's value with setMaxValue() and get this property's value with maxValue().
-
                                                  int minValue
                                                  
-
                                                  This property holds the scroll bar's minimum value.
-
                                                  When setting this property, the TQScrollBar::maxValue is
-adjusted if necessary to ensure that the range remains valid.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also setRange().
-
-
                                                  Set this property's value with setMinValue() and get this property's value with minValue().
-
                                                  Orientation orientation
                                                  
-
                                                  This property holds the orientation of the scroll bar.
-
                                                  The orientation must be TQt::Vertical (the default) or TQt::Horizontal.
-
-
                                                  Set this property's value with setOrientation() and get this property's value with orientation().
-
                                                  int pageStep
                                                  
-
                                                  This property holds the page step.
-
                                                  When setting pageStep, the virtual stepChange() function will be
-called if the new page step is different from the previous
-setting.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also TQRangeControl::setSteps(), lineStep, and setRange().
-
-
                                                  Set this property's value with setPageStep() and get this property's value with pageStep().
-
                                                  bool tracking
                                                  
-
                                                  This property holds whether scroll bar tracking is enabled.
-
                                                  If tracking is enabled (the default), the scroll bar emits the
-valueChanged() signal while the slider is being dragged. If
-tracking is disabled, the scroll bar emits the valueChanged()
-signal only when the user releases the mouse button after moving
-the slider.
-
-
                                                  Set this property's value with setTracking() and get this property's value with tracking().
-
                                                  int value
                                                  
-
                                                  This property holds the scroll bar's value.
-
                                                  Set this property's value with setValue() and get this property's value with value().
-
                                                  See also TQRangeControl::value() and prevValue().
-
-
-
                                                  
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                  
-
-
                                                  Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                  TQt 3.3.8
                                                  
-
                                                  
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qscrollview-h.html b/doc/html/qscrollview-h.html
index 54bea1d44..7bcf26e1b 100644
--- a/doc/html/qscrollview-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qscrollview-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qscrollview.h Include File
+ntqscrollview.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                  
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                  TQScrollView Class Reference
                                                  
-
-
                                                  The TQScrollView widget provides a scrolling area with on-demand scroll bars.
-More...
-
                                                  #include <qscrollview.h>
-
                                                  Inherits TQFrame.
-
                                                  Inherited by TQCanvasView, TQTable, TQGridView, TQIconView, TQListBox, TQListView, and TQTextEdit.
-
                                                  List of all member functions.
-
                                                  Public Members
                                                  
-
-
                                                  Public Slots
                                                  
-
-
                                                  Signals
                                                  
-
-
                                                  Properties
                                                  
-
                                                    
-
                                                  • int contentsHeight - the height of the contents area  (read only)
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • int contentsWidth - the width of the contents area  (read only)
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • int contentsX - the X coordinate of the contents that are at the left edge of the viewport  (read only)
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • int contentsY - the Y coordinate of the contents that are at the top edge of the viewport  (read only)
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • bool dragAutoScroll - whether autoscrolling in drag move events is enabled
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • ScrollBarMode hScrollBarMode - the mode for the horizontal scroll bar
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • ResizePolicy resizePolicy - the resize policy
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • ScrollBarMode vScrollBarMode - the mode for the vertical scroll bar
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • int visibleHeight - the vertical amount of the content that is visible  (read only)
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • int visibleWidth - the horizontal amount of the content that is visible  (read only)
                                                    • 
-
                                                  
-
                                                  Protected Members
                                                  
-
-
                                                  Detailed Description
                                                  
-
-
-The TQScrollView widget provides a scrolling area with on-demand scroll bars.
-
                                                   
-
-
                                                   The TQScrollView is a large canvas - potentially larger than the
-coordinate system normally supported by the underlying window
-system. This is important because it is quite easy to go beyond
-these limitations (e.g. many web pages are more than 32000 pixels
-high). Additionally, the TQScrollView can have TQWidgets positioned
-on it that scroll around with the drawn content. These sub-widgets
-can also have positions outside the normal coordinate range (but
-they are still limited in size).
-
                                                   To provide content for the widget, inherit from TQScrollView,
-reimplement drawContents() and use resizeContents() to set the
-size of the viewed area. Use addChild() and moveChild() to
-position widgets on the view.
-
                                                   To use TQScrollView effectively it is important to understand its
-widget structure in the three styles of use: a single large child
-widget, a large panning area with some widgets and a large panning
-area with many widgets.
-
                                                   
                                                   Using One Big Widget
-
                                                  
-
                                                   
                                                   
-
                                                   The first, simplest usage of TQScrollView (depicted above), is
-appropriate for scrolling areas that are never more than about
-4000 pixels in either dimension (this is about the maximum
-reliable size on X11 servers). In this usage, you just make one
-large child in the TQScrollView. The child should be a child of the
-viewport() of the scrollview and be added with addChild():
-
                                                  -        TQScrollView* sv = new TQScrollView(...);
-        TQVBox* big_box = new TQVBox(sv->viewport());
-        sv->addChild(big_box);
-    
                                                  
- 
-You can go on to add arbitrary child widgets to the single child
-in the scrollview as you would with any widget:
-
                                                  -        TQLabel* child1 = new TQLabel("CHILD", big_box);
-        TQLabel* child2 = new TQLabel("CHILD", big_box);
-        TQLabel* child3 = new TQLabel("CHILD", big_box);
-        ...
-    
                                                  
- 
-
                                                   Here the TQScrollView has four children: the viewport(), the
-verticalScrollBar(), the horizontalScrollBar() and a small
-cornerWidget(). The viewport() has one child: the big TQVBox. The
-TQVBox has the three TQLabel objects as child widgets. When the view
-is scrolled, the TQVBox is moved; its children move with it as
-child widgets normally do.
-
                                                   
                                                   Using a Very Big View with Some Widgets
-
                                                  
-
                                                   
                                                   
-
                                                   The second usage of TQScrollView (depicted above) is appropriate
-when few, if any, widgets are on a very large scrolling area that
-is potentially larger than 4000 pixels in either dimension. In
-this usage you call resizeContents() to set the size of the area
-and reimplement drawContents() to paint the contents. You may also
-add some widgets by making them children of the viewport() and
-adding them with addChild() (this is the same as the process for
-the single large widget in the previous example):
-
                                                  -        TQScrollView* sv = new TQScrollView(...);
-        TQLabel* child1 = new TQLabel("CHILD", sv->viewport());
-        sv->addChild(child1);
-        TQLabel* child2 = new TQLabel("CHILD", sv->viewport());
-        sv->addChild(child2);
-        TQLabel* child3 = new TQLabel("CHILD", sv->viewport());
-        sv->addChild(child3);
-    
                                                  
- 
-Here, the TQScrollView has the same four children: the viewport(),
-the verticalScrollBar(), the horizontalScrollBar() and a small
-cornerWidget(). The viewport() has the three TQLabel objects as
-child widgets. When the view is scrolled, the scrollview moves the
-child widgets individually.
-
                                                   
                                                   Using a Very Big View with Many Widgets
-
                                                  
-
                                                   
-
                                                   
-
                                                   The final usage of TQScrollView (depicted above) is appropriate
-when many widgets are on a very large scrolling area that is
-potentially larger than 4000 pixels in either dimension. In this
-usage you call resizeContents() to set the size of the area and
-reimplement drawContents() to paint the contents. You then call
-enableClipper(TRUE) and add widgets, again by making them children
-of the viewport(), and adding them with addChild():
-
                                                  -        TQScrollView* sv = new TQScrollView(...);
-        sv->enableClipper(TRUE);
-        TQLabel* child1 = new TQLabel("CHILD", sv->viewport());
-        sv->addChild(child1);
-        TQLabel* child2 = new TQLabel("CHILD", sv->viewport());
-        sv->addChild(child2);
-        TQLabel* child3 = new TQLabel("CHILD", sv->viewport());
-        sv->addChild(child3);
-    
                                                  
- 
-
                                                   Here, the TQScrollView has four children:  the clipper() (not the
-viewport() this time), the verticalScrollBar(), the
-horizontalScrollBar() and a small cornerWidget(). The clipper()
-has one child: the viewport(). The viewport() has the same three
-labels as child widgets. When the view is scrolled the viewport()
-is moved; its children move with it as child widgets normally do.
-
                                                   
-
                                                   Details Relevant for All Views
-
                                                  
-
                                                   Normally you will use the first or third method if you want any
-child widgets in the view.
-
                                                   Note that the widget you see in the scrolled area is the
-viewport() widget, not the TQScrollView itself. So to turn mouse
-tracking on, for example, use viewport()->setMouseTracking(TRUE).
-
                                                   To enable drag-and-drop, you would setAcceptDrops(TRUE) on the
-TQScrollView (because drag-and-drop events propagate to the
-parent). But to work out the logical position in the view, you
-would need to map the drop co-ordinate from being relative to the
-TQScrollView to being relative to the contents; use the function
-viewportToContents() for this.
-
                                                   To handle mouse events on the scrolling area, subclass scrollview
-as you would subclass other widgets, but rather than
-reimplementing mousePressEvent(), reimplement
-contentsMousePressEvent() instead. The contents specific event
-handlers provide translated events in the coordinate system of the
-scrollview. If you reimplement mousePressEvent(), you'll get
-called only when part of the TQScrollView is clicked: and the only
-such part is the "corner" (if you don't set a cornerWidget()) and
-the frame; everything else is covered up by the viewport, clipper
-or scroll bars.
-
                                                   When you construct a TQScrollView, some of the widget flags apply
-to the viewport() instead of being sent to the TQWidget constructor
-for the TQScrollView. This applies to WNoAutoErase, WStaticContents, and WPaintClever. See TQt::WidgetFlags for
-documentation about these flags. Here are some examples:
-
                                                   
                                                    
-
                                                     
                                                  •  An image-manipulation widget would use WNoAutoErase|WStaticContents because the widget draws all pixels
-itself, and when its size increases, it only needs a paint event
-for the new part because the old part remains unchanged.
-
                                                     
                                                  •  A scrolling game widget in which the background scrolls as the
-characters move might use WNoAutoErase (in addition to WStaticContents) so that the window system background does not
-flash in and out during scrolling.
-
                                                     
                                                  •  A word processing widget might use WNoAutoErase and repaint
-itself line by line to get a less-flickery resizing. If the widget
-is in a mode in which no text justification can take place, it
-might use WStaticContents too, so that it would only get a
-repaint for the newly visible parts.
-
                                                     
                                                  
-
                                                   Child widgets may be moved using addChild() or moveChild(). Use
-childX() and childY() to get the position of a child widget.
-
                                                   A widget may be placed in the corner between the vertical and
-horizontal scrollbars with setCornerWidget(). You can get access
-to the scrollbars using horizontalScrollBar() and
-verticalScrollBar(), and to the viewport with viewport(). The
-scroll view can be scrolled using scrollBy(), ensureVisible(),
-setContentsPos() or center().
-
                                                   The visible area is given by visibleWidth() and visibleHeight(),
-and the contents area by contentsWidth() and contentsHeight(). The
-contents may be repainted using one of the repaintContents() or
-updateContents() functions.
-
                                                   Coordinate conversion is provided by contentsToViewport() and
-viewportToContents().
-
                                                   The contentsMoving() signal is emitted just before the contents
-are moved to a new position.
-
                                                   Warning: TQScrollView currently does not erase the background when
-resized, i.e. you must always clear the background manually in
-scrollview subclasses. This will change in a future version of TQt
-and we recommend specifying the WNoAutoErase flag explicitly.
-
                                                    
-
                                                  See also Abstract Widget Classes.
-
-
                                                  Member Type Documentation
                                                  
-
                                                  TQScrollView::ResizePolicy
                                                  
-
-
                                                   This enum type is used to control a TQScrollView's reaction to
-resize events.
-
                                                    
-
                                                  • TQScrollView::Default - the TQScrollView selects one of the other settings
-automatically when it has to. In this version of TQt, TQScrollView
-changes to Manual if you resize the contents with
-resizeContents() and to AutoOne if a child is added.
-
                                                  • TQScrollView::Manual - the contents stays the size set by resizeContents().
-
                                                  • TQScrollView::AutoOne - if there is only one child widget the contents stays
-the size of that widget. Otherwise the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                  • TQScrollView::AutoOneFit - if there is only one child widget the contents stays
-the size of that widget's sizeHint(). If the scrollview is resized
-larger than the child's sizeHint(), the child will be resized to
-fit. If there is more than one child, the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                   
-
                                                  TQScrollView::ScrollBarMode
                                                  
-
-
                                                   This enum type describes the various modes of TQScrollView's scroll
-bars.
-
                                                    
-
                                                  • TQScrollView::Auto - TQScrollView shows a scroll bar when the content is
-too large to fit and not otherwise. This is the default.
-
                                                  • TQScrollView::AlwaysOff - TQScrollView never shows a scroll bar.
-
                                                  • TQScrollView::AlwaysOn - TQScrollView always shows a scroll bar.
-
                                                   (The modes for the horizontal and vertical scroll bars are
-independent.)
-
-
                                                  Member Function Documentation
                                                  
-
                                                  TQScrollView::TQScrollView ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
-
                                                  
-Constructs a TQScrollView called name with parent parent and
-widget flags f.
-
                                                   The widget flags WStaticContents, WNoAutoErase and WPaintClever are propagated to the viewport() widget. The other
-widget flags are propagated to the parent constructor as usual.
-
-
                                                  TQScrollView::~TQScrollView ()
-
                                                  
-Destroys the TQScrollView. Any children added with addChild() will
-be deleted.
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::addChild ( TQWidget * child, int x = 0, int y = 0 ) [virtual]
-
                                                  
-Inserts the widget, child, into the scrolled area positioned at
-(x, y). The position defaults to (0, 0). If the child is
-already in the view, it is just moved.
-
                                                   You may want to call enableClipper(TRUE) if you add a large number
-of widgets.
-
-
                                                  Example: scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
-
                                                  int TQScrollView::bottomMargin () const [protected]
-
                                                  
-Returns the bottom margin.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also setMargins().
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::center ( int x, int y ) [slot]
-
                                                  
-Scrolls the content so that the point (x, y) is in the center
-of visible area.
-
-
                                                  Example: scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::center ( int x, int y, float xmargin, float ymargin ) [slot]
-
                                                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                   Scrolls the content so that the point (x, y) is visible with
-the xmargin and ymargin margins (as fractions of visible
-the area).
-
                                                   For example:
-
                                                    
-
                                                  •  Margin 0.0 allows (x, y) to be on the edge of the visible area.
-
                                                  •  Margin 0.5 ensures that (x, y) is in middle 50% of the visible area.
-
                                                  •  Margin 1.0 ensures that (x, y) is in the center of the the visible area.
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                  bool TQScrollView::childIsVisible ( TQWidget * child )
-
                                                   
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                                   Returns TRUE if child is visible. This is equivalent
-to child->isVisible().
-
-
                                                  int TQScrollView::childX ( TQWidget * child )
-
                                                  
-Returns the X position of the given child widget. Use this
-rather than TQWidget::x() for widgets added to the view.
-
                                                   This function returns 0 if child has not been added to the view.
-
-
                                                  int TQScrollView::childY ( TQWidget * child )
-
                                                  
-Returns the Y position of the given child widget. Use this
-rather than TQWidget::y() for widgets added to the view.
-
                                                   This function returns 0 if child has not been added to the view.
-
-
                                                  TQWidget * TQScrollView::clipper () const
-
                                                  
-Returns the clipper widget. Contents in the scrollview are
-ultimately clipped to be inside the clipper widget.
-
                                                   You should not need to use this function.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also visibleWidth and visibleHeight.
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::contentsContextMenuEvent ( TQContextMenuEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                  
-This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a
-contextMenuEvent() in e: the mouse position is translated to
-be a point on the contents.
-
-
                                                  Example: chart/canvasview.cpp.
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::contentsDragEnterEvent ( TQDragEnterEvent * ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                  
-This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a
-dragEnterEvent(): the drag position is translated to be a point
-on the contents.
-
-
                                                  Reimplemented in TQTable.
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::contentsDragLeaveEvent ( TQDragLeaveEvent * ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                  
-This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a
-dragLeaveEvent(): the drag position is translated to be a point
-on the contents.
-
-
                                                  Reimplemented in TQTable.
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::contentsDragMoveEvent ( TQDragMoveEvent * ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                  
-This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a
-dragMoveEvent(): the drag position is translated to be a point on
-the contents.
-
-
                                                  Reimplemented in TQTable.
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::contentsDropEvent ( TQDropEvent * ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                  
-This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a
-dropEvent(): the drop position is translated to be a point on the
-contents.
-
-
                                                  Reimplemented in TQTable.
-
                                                  int TQScrollView::contentsHeight () const
-
                                                  Returns the height of the contents area.
-See the "contentsHeight" property for details.
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent ( TQMouseEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                  
-This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a
-mouseDoubleClickEvent(): the click position in e is translated to be a
-point on the contents.
-
                                                   The default implementation generates a normal mouse press event.
-
-
                                                  Reimplemented in TQListView.
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::contentsMouseMoveEvent ( TQMouseEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                  
-This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a
-mouseMoveEvent(): the mouse position in e is translated to be a point
-on the contents.
-
-
                                                  Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp and chart/canvasview.cpp.
-
                                                  Reimplemented in TQListView.
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::contentsMousePressEvent ( TQMouseEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                  
-This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a
-mousePressEvent(): the press position in e is translated to be a point
-on the contents.
-
-
                                                  Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp and chart/canvasview.cpp.
-
                                                  Reimplemented in TQListView.
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::contentsMouseReleaseEvent ( TQMouseEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                  
-This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a
-mouseReleaseEvent(): the release position in e is translated to be a
-point on the contents.
-
-
                                                  Reimplemented in TQListView.
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::contentsMoving ( int x, int y ) [signal]
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   This signal is emitted just before the contents are moved to
-position (x, y).
-
                                                   
                                                  See also contentsX and contentsY.
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::contentsToViewport ( int x, int y, int & vx, int & vy ) const
-
                                                  
-Translates a point (x, y) in the contents to a point (vx,
-vy) on the viewport() widget.
-
-
                                                  TQPoint TQScrollView::contentsToViewport ( const TQPoint & p ) const
-
                                                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                   Returns the point p translated to a point on the viewport()
-widget.
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::contentsWheelEvent ( TQWheelEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                  
-This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a
-wheelEvent() in e: the mouse position is translated to be a
-point on the contents.
-
-
                                                  int TQScrollView::contentsWidth () const
-
                                                  Returns the width of the contents area.
-See the "contentsWidth" property for details.
-
                                                  int TQScrollView::contentsX () const
-
                                                  Returns the X coordinate of the contents that are at the left edge of the viewport.
-See the "contentsX" property for details.
-
                                                  int TQScrollView::contentsY () const
-
                                                  Returns the Y coordinate of the contents that are at the top edge of the viewport.
-See the "contentsY" property for details.
-
                                                  TQWidget * TQScrollView::cornerWidget () const
-
                                                  
-Returns the widget in the corner between the two scroll bars.
-
                                                   By default, no corner widget is present.
-
-
                                                  Example: scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
-
                                                  bool TQScrollView::dragAutoScroll () const
-
                                                  Returns TRUE if autoscrolling in drag move events is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "dragAutoScroll" property for details.
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::drawContents ( TQPainter * p, int clipx, int clipy, int clipw, int cliph ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   Reimplement this function if you are viewing a drawing area rather
-than a widget.
-
                                                   The function should draw the rectangle (clipx, clipy, clipw, cliph) of the contents using painter p. The clip
-rectangle is in the scrollview's coordinates.
-
                                                   For example:
-
                                                  -    {
-        // Fill a 40000 by 50000 rectangle at (100000,150000)
-
-        // Calculate the coordinates...
-        int x1 = 100000, y1 = 150000;
-        int x2 = x1+40000-1, y2 = y1+50000-1;
-
-        // Clip the coordinates so X/Windows will not have problems...
-        if (x1 < clipx) x1=clipx;
-        if (y1 < clipy) y1=clipy;
-        if (x2 > clipx+clipw-1) x2=clipx+clipw-1;
-        if (y2 > clipy+cliph-1) y2=clipy+cliph-1;
-
-        // Paint using the small coordinates...
-        if ( x2 >= x1 && y2 >= y1 )
-            p->fillRect(x1, y1, x2-x1+1, y2-y1+1, red);
-    }
-    
                                                  
- 
-
                                                   The clip rectangle and translation of the painter p is already
-set appropriately.
-
-
                                                  Example: qdir/qdir.cpp.
-
                                                  Reimplemented in TQCanvasView and TQTable.
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::drawContentsOffset ( TQPainter * p, int offsetx, int offsety, int clipx, int clipy, int clipw, int cliph ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                  
-For backward-compatibility only. It is easier to use
-drawContents(TQPainter*,int,int,int,int).
-
                                                   The default implementation translates the painter appropriately
-and calls drawContents(TQPainter*,int,int,int,int). See
-drawContents() for an explanation of the parameters p, offsetx, offsety, clipx, clipy, clipw and cliph.
-
-
                                                  Reimplemented in TQListView.
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::enableClipper ( bool y )
-
                                                  
-When a large numbers of child widgets are in a scrollview,
-especially if they are close together, the scrolling performance
-can suffer greatly. If y is TRUE the scrollview will use an
-extra widget to group child widgets.
-
                                                   Note that you may only call enableClipper() prior to adding
-widgets.
-
                                                   For a full discussion, see this class's detailed description.
-
-
                                                  Example: scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::ensureVisible ( int x, int y ) [slot]
-
                                                  
-Scrolls the content so that the point (x, y) is visible with at
-least 50-pixel margins (if possible, otherwise centered).
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::ensureVisible ( int x, int y, int xmargin, int ymargin ) [slot]
-
                                                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                   Scrolls the content so that the point (x, y) is visible with at
-least the xmargin and ymargin margins (if possible,
-otherwise centered).
-
-
                                                  bool TQScrollView::eventFilter ( TQObject * obj, TQEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                  
-This event filter ensures the scroll bars are updated when a
-single contents widget is resized, shown, hidden or destroyed; it
-passes mouse events to the TQScrollView. The event is in e and
-the object is in obj.
-
-
                                                  Reimplemented from TQObject.
-
                                                  Reimplemented in TQListView.
-
                                                  ScrollBarMode TQScrollView::hScrollBarMode () const
-
                                                  Returns the mode for the horizontal scroll bar.
-See the "hScrollBarMode" property for details.
-
                                                  bool TQScrollView::hasStaticBackground () const
-
                                                  
-Returns TRUE if TQScrollView uses a static background; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also setStaticBackground().
-
-
                                                  TQScrollBar * TQScrollView::horizontalScrollBar () const
-
                                                  
-Returns the component horizontal scroll bar. It is made available
-to allow accelerators, autoscrolling, etc.
-
                                                   It should not be used for other purposes.
-
                                                   This function never returns 0.
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::horizontalSliderPressed () [signal]
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   This signal is emitted whenever the user presses the horizontal slider.
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::horizontalSliderReleased () [signal]
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   This signal is emitted whenever the user releases the horizontal slider.
-
-
                                                  bool TQScrollView::isHorizontalSliderPressed ()
-
                                                  
-Returns TRUE if horizontal slider is pressed by user; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                  bool TQScrollView::isVerticalSliderPressed ()
-
                                                  
-Returns TRUE if vertical slider is pressed by user; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                  int TQScrollView::leftMargin () const [protected]
-
                                                  
-Returns the left margin.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also setMargins().
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::moveChild ( TQWidget * child, int x, int y ) [virtual]
-
                                                  
-Repositions the child widget to (x, y). This function is
-the same as addChild().
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::removeChild ( TQWidget * child )
-
                                                  
-Removes the child widget from the scrolled area. Note that this
-happens automatically if the child is deleted.
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::repaintContents ( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool erase = TRUE )
-
                                                  
-Calls repaint() on a rectangle defined by x, y, w, h,
-translated appropriately. If the rectangle is not visible, nothing
-is repainted. If erase is TRUE the background is cleared using
-the background color.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also updateContents().
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::repaintContents ( const TQRect & r, bool erase = TRUE )
-
                                                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                   Repaints the contents of rectangle r. If erase is TRUE the
-background is cleared using the background color.
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::repaintContents ( bool erase = TRUE )
-
                                                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                   Repaints the contents. If erase is TRUE the background is
-cleared using the background color.
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::resizeContents ( int w, int h ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                  
-Sets the size of the contents area to w pixels wide and h
-pixels high and updates the viewport accordingly.
-
-
                                                  ResizePolicy TQScrollView::resizePolicy () const
-
                                                  Returns the resize policy.
-See the "resizePolicy" property for details.
-
                                                  int TQScrollView::rightMargin () const [protected]
-
                                                  
-Returns the right margin.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also setMargins().
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::scrollBy ( int dx, int dy ) [slot]
-
                                                  
-Scrolls the content by dx to the left and dy upwards.
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::setContentsPos ( int x, int y ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                  
-Scrolls the content so that the point (x, y) is in the top-left
-corner.
-
-
                                                  Example: process/process.cpp.
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::setCornerWidget ( TQWidget * corner ) [virtual]
-
                                                  
-Sets the widget in the corner between the two scroll bars.
-
                                                   You will probably also want to set at least one of the scroll bar
-modes to AlwaysOn.
-
                                                   Passing 0 shows no widget in the corner.
-
                                                   Any previous corner widget is hidden.
-
                                                   You may call setCornerWidget() with the same widget at different
-times.
-
                                                   All widgets set here will be deleted by the TQScrollView when it is
-destroyed unless you separately reparent the widget after setting
-some other corner widget (or 0).
-
                                                   Any newly set widget should have no current parent.
-
                                                   By default, no corner widget is present.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also vScrollBarMode and hScrollBarMode.
-
-
                                                  Example: scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::setDragAutoScroll ( bool b ) [virtual]
-
                                                  Sets whether autoscrolling in drag move events is enabled to b.
-See the "dragAutoScroll" property for details.
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::setHBarGeometry ( TQScrollBar & hbar, int x, int y, int w, int h ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                  
-Called when the horizontal scroll bar geometry changes. This is
-provided as a protected function so that subclasses can do
-interesting things such as providing extra buttons in some of the
-space normally used by the scroll bars.
-
                                                   The default implementation simply gives all the space to hbar.
-The new geometry is given by x, y, w and h.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also setVBarGeometry().
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::setHScrollBarMode ( ScrollBarMode ) [virtual]
-
                                                  Sets the mode for the horizontal scroll bar.
-See the "hScrollBarMode" property for details.
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::setMargins ( int left, int top, int right, int bottom ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                  
-Sets the margins around the scrolling area to left, top, right and bottom. This is useful for applications such as
-spreadsheets with "locked" rows and columns. The marginal space is
-inside the frameRect() and is left blank; reimplement
-drawFrame() or put widgets in the unused area.
-
                                                   By default all margins are zero.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also frameChanged().
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::setResizePolicy ( ResizePolicy ) [virtual]
-
                                                  Sets the resize policy.
-See the "resizePolicy" property for details.
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::setStaticBackground ( bool y )
-
                                                  
-Sets the scrollview to have a static background if y is TRUE,
-or a scrolling background if y is FALSE. By default, the
-background is scrolling.
-
                                                   Be aware that this mode is quite slow, as a full repaint of the
-visible area has to be triggered on every contents move.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also hasStaticBackground().
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::setVBarGeometry ( TQScrollBar & vbar, int x, int y, int w, int h ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                  
-Called when the vertical scroll bar geometry changes. This is
-provided as a protected function so that subclasses can do
-interesting things such as providing extra buttons in some of the
-space normally used by the scroll bars.
-
                                                   The default implementation simply gives all the space to vbar.
-The new geometry is given by x, y, w and h.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also setHBarGeometry().
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::setVScrollBarMode ( ScrollBarMode ) [virtual]
-
                                                  Sets the mode for the vertical scroll bar.
-See the "vScrollBarMode" property for details.
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::showChild ( TQWidget * child, bool y = TRUE )
-
                                                   
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                                   Sets the visibility of child. Equivalent to
-TQWidget::show() or TQWidget::hide().
-
-
                                                  int TQScrollView::topMargin () const [protected]
-
                                                  
-Returns the top margin.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also setMargins().
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::updateContents ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
-
                                                  
-Calls update() on a rectangle defined by x, y, w, h,
-translated appropriately. If the rectangle is not visible, nothing
-is repainted.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also repaintContents().
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::updateContents ( const TQRect & r )
-
                                                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                   Updates the contents in rectangle r
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::updateContents ()
-
                                                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                   
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::updateScrollBars () [slot]
-
                                                  
-Updates scroll bars: all possibilities are considered. You should
-never need to call this in your code.
-
-
                                                  ScrollBarMode TQScrollView::vScrollBarMode () const
-
                                                  Returns the mode for the vertical scroll bar.
-See the "vScrollBarMode" property for details.
-
                                                  TQScrollBar * TQScrollView::verticalScrollBar () const
-
                                                  
-Returns the component vertical scroll bar. It is made available to
-allow accelerators, autoscrolling, etc.
-
                                                   It should not be used for other purposes.
-
                                                   This function never returns 0.
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::verticalSliderPressed () [signal]
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   This signal is emitted whenever the user presses the vertical slider.
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::verticalSliderReleased () [signal]
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   This signal is emitted whenever the user releases the vertical slider.
-
-
                                                  TQWidget * TQScrollView::viewport () const
-
                                                  
-Returns the viewport widget of the scrollview. This is the widget
-containing the contents widget or which is the drawing area.
-
-
                                                  Examples: helpsystem/tooltip.cpp and scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::viewportPaintEvent ( TQPaintEvent * pe ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                  
-This is a low-level painting routine that draws the viewport
-contents. Reimplement this if drawContents() is too high-level
-(for example, if you don't want to open a TQPainter on the
-viewport). The paint event is passed in pe.
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::viewportResizeEvent ( TQResizeEvent * ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                  
-To provide simple processing of events on the contents, this
-function receives all resize events sent to the viewport.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also TQWidget::resizeEvent().
-
-
                                                  Example: chart/canvasview.cpp.
-
                                                  TQSize TQScrollView::viewportSize ( int x, int y ) const
-
                                                  
-Returns the viewport size for size (x, y).
-
                                                   The viewport size depends on (x, y) (the size of the contents),
-the size of this widget and the modes of the horizontal and
-vertical scroll bars.
-
                                                   This function permits widgets that can trade vertical and
-horizontal space for each other to control scroll bar appearance
-better. For example, a word processor or web browser can control
-the width of the right margin accurately, whether or not there
-needs to be a vertical scroll bar.
-
-
                                                  void TQScrollView::viewportToContents ( int vx, int vy, int & x, int & y ) const
-
                                                  
-Translates a point (vx, vy) on the viewport() widget to a
-point (x, y) in the contents.
-
-
                                                  TQPoint TQScrollView::viewportToContents ( const TQPoint & vp ) const
-
                                                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                   Returns the point on the viewport vp translated to a point in
-the contents.
-
-
                                                  int TQScrollView::visibleHeight () const
-
                                                  Returns the vertical amount of the content that is visible.
-See the "visibleHeight" property for details.
-
                                                  int TQScrollView::visibleWidth () const
-
                                                  Returns the horizontal amount of the content that is visible.
-See the "visibleWidth" property for details.
-
                                                  Property Documentation
                                                  
-
                                                  int contentsHeight
                                                  
-
                                                  This property holds the height of the contents area.
-
                                                  
-
                                                  Get this property's value with contentsHeight().
-
                                                  int contentsWidth
                                                  
-
                                                  This property holds the width of the contents area.
-
                                                  
-
                                                  Get this property's value with contentsWidth().
-
                                                  int contentsX
                                                  
-
                                                  This property holds the X coordinate of the contents that are at the left edge of the viewport.
-
                                                  
-
                                                  Get this property's value with contentsX().
-
                                                  int contentsY
                                                  
-
                                                  This property holds the Y coordinate of the contents that are at the top edge of the viewport.
-
                                                  
-
                                                  Get this property's value with contentsY().
-
                                                  bool dragAutoScroll
                                                  
-
                                                  This property holds whether autoscrolling in drag move events is enabled.
-
                                                  If this property is set to TRUE (the default), the TQScrollView
-automatically scrolls the contents in drag move events if the user
-moves the cursor close to a border of the view. Of course this
-works only if the viewport accepts drops. Specifying FALSE
-disables this autoscroll feature.
-
                                                   Warning: Enabling this property might not be enough to
-effectively turn on autoscrolling. If you put a custom widget in
-the TQScrollView, you might need to call TQDragEvent::ignore() on
-the event in the dragEnterEvent() and dragMoveEvent()
-reimplementations.
-
-
                                                  Set this property's value with setDragAutoScroll() and get this property's value with dragAutoScroll().
-
                                                  ScrollBarMode hScrollBarMode
                                                  
-
                                                  This property holds the mode for the horizontal scroll bar.
-
                                                  The default mode is TQScrollView::Auto.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also vScrollBarMode.
-
-
                                                  Set this property's value with setHScrollBarMode() and get this property's value with hScrollBarMode().
-
                                                  ResizePolicy resizePolicy
                                                  
-
                                                  This property holds the resize policy.
-
                                                  The default is Default.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also ResizePolicy.
-
-
                                                  Set this property's value with setResizePolicy() and get this property's value with resizePolicy().
-
                                                  ScrollBarMode vScrollBarMode
                                                  
-
                                                  This property holds the mode for the vertical scroll bar.
-
                                                  The default mode is TQScrollView::Auto.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also hScrollBarMode.
-
-
                                                  Set this property's value with setVScrollBarMode() and get this property's value with vScrollBarMode().
-
                                                  int visibleHeight
                                                  
-
                                                  This property holds the vertical amount of the content that is visible.
-
                                                  
-
                                                  Get this property's value with visibleHeight().
-
                                                  int visibleWidth
                                                  
-
                                                  This property holds the horizontal amount of the content that is visible.
-
                                                  
-
                                                  Get this property's value with visibleWidth().
-
-
                                                  
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                  
-
-
                                                  Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                  TQt 3.3.8
                                                  
-
                                                  
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsemaphore-h.html b/doc/html/qsemaphore-h.html
index c132cbb23..88d9014cf 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsemaphore-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsemaphore-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsemaphore.h Include File
+ntqsemaphore.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                  
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                  TQSemaphore Class Reference
                                                  
-
-
                                                  The TQSemaphore class provides a robust integer semaphore.
-More...
-
                                                  All the functions in this class are thread-safe when TQt is built with thread support.
                                                  
-
                                                  #include <qsemaphore.h>
-
                                                  List of all member functions.
-
                                                  Public Members
                                                  
-
-
                                                  Detailed Description
                                                  
-
-
-
-The TQSemaphore class provides a robust integer semaphore.
-
                                                   
-
-
                                                   A TQSemaphore can be used to serialize thread execution, in a
-similar way to a TQMutex. A semaphore differs from a mutex, in
-that a semaphore can be accessed by more than one thread at a
-time.
-
                                                   For example, suppose we have an application that stores data in a
-large tree structure. The application creates 10 threads
-(commonly called a thread pool) to perform searches on the tree.
-When the application searches the tree for some piece of data, it
-uses one thread per base node to do the searching. A semaphore
-could be used to make sure that two threads don't try to search
-the same branch of the tree at the same time.
-
                                                   A non-computing example of a semaphore would be dining at a
-restuarant. A semaphore is initialized to have a maximum count
-equal to the number of chairs in the restuarant. As people
-arrive, they want a seat. As seats are filled, the semaphore is
-accessed, once per person. As people leave, the access is
-released, allowing more people to enter. If a party of 10 people
-want to be seated, but there are only 9 seats, those 10 people
-will wait, but a party of 4 people would be seated (taking the
-available seats to 5, making the party of 10 people wait longer).
-
                                                   When a semaphore is created it is given a number which is the
-maximum number of concurrent accesses it will permit. Accesses to
-the sempahore are gained using operator++() or operator+=(), and
-released with operator--() or operator-=(). The number of
-accesses allowed is retrieved with available(), and the total
-number with total(). Note that the incrementing functions will
-block if there aren't enough available accesses. Use tryAccess()
-if you want to actquire accesses without blocking.
-
                                                  See also Environment Classes and Threading.
-
-
                                                  Member Function Documentation
                                                  
-
                                                  TQSemaphore::TQSemaphore ( int maxcount )
-
                                                  
-Creates a new semaphore. The semaphore can be concurrently
-accessed at most maxcount times.
-
-
                                                  TQSemaphore::~TQSemaphore () [virtual]
-
                                                  
-Destroys the semaphore.
-
                                                   Warning: If you destroy a semaphore that has accesses in use the
-resultant behavior is undefined.
-
-
                                                  int TQSemaphore::available () const
-
                                                  
-Returns the number of accesses currently available to the
-semaphore.
-
-
                                                  int TQSemaphore::operator++ ( int )
-
                                                  
-Postfix ++ operator.
-
                                                   Try to get access to the semaphore. If available() == 0, this
-call will block until it can get access, i.e. until available() >
-0.
-
-
                                                  int TQSemaphore::operator+= ( int n )
-
                                                  
-Try to get access to the semaphore. If available() < n, this
-call will block until it can get all the accesses it wants, i.e.
-until available() >= n.
-
-
                                                  int TQSemaphore::operator-- ( int )
-
                                                  
-Postfix -- operator.
-
                                                   Release access of the semaphore. This wakes all threads waiting
-for access to the semaphore.
-
-
                                                  int TQSemaphore::operator-= ( int n )
-
                                                  
-Release n accesses to the semaphore.
-
-
                                                  int TQSemaphore::total () const
-
                                                  
-Returns the total number of accesses to the semaphore.
-
-
                                                  bool TQSemaphore::tryAccess ( int n )
-
                                                  
-Try to get access to the semaphore. If available() < n, this
-function will return FALSE immediately. If available() >= n,
-this function will take n accesses and return TRUE. This
-function does not block.
-
-
-
                                                  
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                  
-
-
                                                  Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                  TQt 3.3.8
                                                  
-
                                                  
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qserversocket-h.html b/doc/html/qserversocket-h.html
index 23ffaecf4..bf9dd9aa0 100644
--- a/doc/html/qserversocket-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qserversocket-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qserversocket.h Include File
+ntqserversocket.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                  
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                  TQServerSocket Class Reference
                                                  [network module]
                                                  
-
-
                                                  The TQServerSocket class provides a TCP-based server.
-More...
-
                                                  #include <qserversocket.h>
-
                                                  Inherits TQObject.
-
                                                  List of all member functions.
-
                                                  Public Members
                                                  
-
                                                    
-
                                                  • TQServerSocket ( Q_UINT16 port, int backlog = 1, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • TQServerSocket ( const TQHostAddress & address, Q_UINT16 port, int backlog = 1, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • TQServerSocket ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • virtual ~TQServerSocket ()
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • bool ok () const
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • Q_UINT16 port () const
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • int socket () const
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • virtual void setSocket ( int socket )
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • TQHostAddress address () const
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • virtual void newConnection ( int socket ) = 0
                                                    • 
-
                                                  
-
                                                  Protected Members
                                                  
-
-
                                                  Detailed Description
                                                  
-
-
-The TQServerSocket class provides a TCP-based server.
-
-
                                                   
-
-
                                                   This class is a convenience class for accepting incoming TCP
-connections. You can specify the port or have TQServerSocket pick
-one, and listen on just one address or on all the machine's
-addresses.
-
                                                   Using the API is very simple: subclass TQServerSocket, call the
-constructor of your choice, and implement newConnection() to
-handle new incoming connections. There is nothing more to do.
-
                                                   (Note that due to lack of support in the underlying APIs,
-TQServerSocket cannot accept or reject connections conditionally.)
-
                                                   
                                                  See also TQSocket, TQSocketDevice, TQHostAddress, TQSocketNotifier, and Input/Output and Networking.
-
-
                                                  Member Function Documentation
                                                  
-
                                                  TQServerSocket::TQServerSocket ( Q_UINT16 port, int backlog = 1, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                  
-Creates a server socket object, that will serve the given port
-on all the addresses of this host. If port is 0, TQServerSocket
-will pick a suitable port in a system-dependent manner. Use backlog to specify how many pending connections the server can
-have.
-
                                                   The parent and name arguments are passed on to the TQObject
-constructor.
-
                                                   Warning: On Tru64 Unix systems a value of 0 for backlog means
-that you don't accept any connections at all; you should specify a
-value larger than 0.
-
-
                                                  TQServerSocket::TQServerSocket ( const TQHostAddress & address, Q_UINT16 port, int backlog = 1, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                  
-Creates a server socket object, that will serve the given port
-only on the given address. Use backlog to specify how many
-pending connections the server can have.
-
                                                   The parent and name arguments are passed on to the TQObject
-constructor.
-
                                                   Warning: On Tru64 Unix systems a value of 0 for backlog means
-that you don't accept any connections at all; you should specify a
-value larger than 0.
-
-
                                                  TQServerSocket::TQServerSocket ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                  
-Construct an empty server socket.
-
                                                   This constructor, in combination with setSocket(), allows us to
-use the TQServerSocket class as a wrapper for other socket types
-(e.g. Unix Domain Sockets under Unix).
-
                                                   The parent and name arguments are passed on to the TQObject
-constructor.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also setSocket().
-
-
                                                  TQServerSocket::~TQServerSocket () [virtual]
-
                                                  
-Destroys the socket.
-
                                                   This causes any backlogged connections (connections that have
-reached the host, but not yet been completely set up by calling
-TQSocketDevice::accept()) to be severed.
-
                                                   Existing connections continue to exist; this only affects the
-acceptance of new connections.
-
-
                                                  TQHostAddress TQServerSocket::address () const
-
                                                  
-Returns the address on which this object listens, or 0.0.0.0 if
-this object listens on more than one address. ok() must be TRUE
-before calling this function.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also port() and TQSocketDevice::address().
-
-
                                                  void TQServerSocket::newConnection ( int socket ) [pure virtual]
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   This pure virtual function is responsible for setting up a new
-incoming connection. socket is the fd (file descriptor) for the
-newly accepted connection.
-
-
                                                  bool TQServerSocket::ok () const
-
                                                  
-Returns TRUE if the construction succeeded; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                  Q_UINT16 TQServerSocket::port () const
-
                                                  
-Returns the port number on which this server socket listens. This
-is always non-zero; if you specify 0 in the constructor,
-TQServerSocket will pick a non-zero port itself. ok() must be TRUE
-before calling this function.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also address() and TQSocketDevice::port().
-
-
                                                  Example: network/httpd/httpd.cpp.
-
                                                  void TQServerSocket::setSocket ( int socket ) [virtual]
-
                                                  
-Sets the socket to use socket. bind() and listen() should
-already have been called for socket.
-
                                                   This allows us to use the TQServerSocket class as a wrapper for
-other socket types (e.g. Unix Domain Sockets).
-
-
                                                  int TQServerSocket::socket () const
-
                                                  
-Returns the operating system socket.
-
-
                                                  TQSocketDevice * TQServerSocket::socketDevice () [protected]
-
                                                  
-Returns a pointer to the internal socket device. The returned
-pointer is 0 if there is no connection or pending connection.
-
                                                   There is normally no need to manipulate the socket device directly
-since this class does all the necessary setup for most client or
-server socket applications.
-
-
-
                                                  
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                  
-
-
                                                  Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                  TQt 3.3.8
                                                  
-
                                                  
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsessionmanager-h.html b/doc/html/qsessionmanager-h.html
index 64c7b6da8..a5ff2a002 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsessionmanager-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsessionmanager-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsessionmanager.h Include File
+ntqsessionmanager.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                  
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                  TQSessionManager Class Reference
                                                  
-
-
                                                  The TQSessionManager class provides access to the session manager.
-More...
-
                                                  #include <qsessionmanager.h>
-
                                                  Inherits TQObject.
-
                                                  List of all member functions.
-
                                                  Public Members
                                                  
-
-
                                                  Detailed Description
                                                  
-
-
-The TQSessionManager class provides access to the session manager.
-
                                                   
-
-
                                                   The session manager is responsible for session management, most
-importantly for interruption and resumption. A "session" is a kind
-of record of the state of the system, e.g. which applications were
-run at start up and which applications are currently running. The
-session manager is used to save the session, e.g. when the machine
-is shut down; and to restore a session, e.g. when the machine is
-started up. Use TQSettings to save and restore an individual
-application's settings, e.g. window positions, recently used files,
-etc.
-
                                                   TQSessionManager provides an interface between the application and
-the session manager so that the program can work well with the
-session manager. In TQt, session management requests for action
-are handled by the two virtual functions TQApplication::commitData()
-and TQApplication::saveState(). Both provide a reference to
-a session manager object as argument, to allow the application
-to communicate with the session manager.
-
                                                   During a session management action (i.e. within commitData() and
-saveState()), no user interaction is possible unless the
-application got explicit permission from the session manager. You
-ask for permission by calling allowsInteraction() or, if it's really
-urgent, allowsErrorInteraction(). TQt does not enforce this, but the
-session manager may.
-
                                                   You can try to abort the shutdown process by calling cancel(). The
-default commitData() function does this if some top-level window
-rejected its closeEvent().
-
                                                   For sophisticated session managers provided on Unix/X11, TQSessionManager
-offers further possibilites to fine-tune an application's session
-management behavior: setRestartCommand(), setDiscardCommand(),
-setRestartHint(), setProperty(), requestPhase2(). See the respective
-function descriptions for further details.
-
                                                  See also Main Window and Related Classes and Environment Classes.
-
-
                                                  Member Type Documentation
                                                  
-
                                                  TQSessionManager::RestartHint
                                                   
-
                                                   This enum type defines the circumstances under which this
-application wants to be restarted by the session manager. The
-current values are
-
                                                    
-
                                                  • TQSessionManager::RestartIfRunning - if the application is still running when
-the session is shut down, it wants to be restarted at the start of
-the next session.
-
                                                  • TQSessionManager::RestartAnyway - the application wants to be started at the
-start of the next session, no matter what. (This is useful for
-utilities that run just after startup and then quit.)
-
                                                  • TQSessionManager::RestartImmediately - the application wants to be started
-immediately whenever it is not running.
-
                                                  • TQSessionManager::RestartNever - the application does not want to be restarted
-automatically.
-
                                                   The default hint is RestartIfRunning.
-
-
                                                  Member Function Documentation
                                                  
-
                                                  bool TQSessionManager::allowsErrorInteraction ()
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   This is similar to allowsInteraction(), but also tells the session
-manager that an error occurred. Session managers may give error
-interaction request higher priority, which means that it is more likely
-that an error interaction is permitted. However, you are still not
-guaranteed that the session manager will allow interaction.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also allowsInteraction(), release(), and cancel().
-
-
                                                  bool TQSessionManager::allowsInteraction ()
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   Asks the session manager for permission to interact with the
-user. Returns TRUE if interaction is permitted; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                                                   The rationale behind this mechanism is to make it possible to
-synchronize user interaction during a shutdown. Advanced session
-managers may ask all applications simultaneously to commit their
-data, resulting in a much faster shutdown.
-
                                                   When the interaction is completed we strongly recommend releasing the
-user interaction semaphore with a call to release(). This way, other
-applications may get the chance to interact with the user while your
-application is still busy saving data. (The semaphore is implicitly
-released when the application exits.)
-
                                                   If the user decides to cancel the shutdown process during the
-interaction phase, you must tell the session manager that this has
-happened by calling cancel().
-
                                                   Here's an example of how an application's TQApplication::commitData()
-might be implemented:
-
                                                   
                                                  -void MyApplication::commitData( TQSessionManager& sm ) {
-    if ( sm.allowsInteraction() ) {
-        switch ( TQMessageBox::warning(
-                    yourMainWindow,
-                    tr("Application Name"),
-                    tr("Save changes to document Foo?"),
-                    tr("&Yes"),
-                    tr("&No"),
-                    tr("Cancel"),
-                    0, 2) ) {
-        case 0: // yes
-            sm.release();
-            // save document here; if saving fails, call sm.cancel()
-            break;
-        case 1: // continue without saving
-            break;
-        default: // cancel
-            sm.cancel();
-            break;
-        }
-    } else {
-        // we did not get permission to interact, then
-        // do something reasonable instead.
-    }
-}
-
                                                  
- 
-
                                                   If an error occurred within the application while saving its data,
-you may want to try allowsErrorInteraction() instead.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also TQApplication::commitData(), release(), and cancel().
-
-
                                                  void TQSessionManager::cancel ()
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   Tells the session manager to cancel the shutdown process.  Applications
-should not call this function without first asking the user.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also allowsInteraction() and allowsErrorInteraction().
-
-
                                                   
-
                                                  TQStringList TQSessionManager::discardCommand () const
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   Returns the currently set discard command.
-
                                                   Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should
-iterate over a copy, e.g.
-
                                                  -    TQStringList list = mySession.discardCommand();
-    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    while( it != list.end() ) {
-        myProcessing( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-    
                                                  
- 
-
                                                   
                                                  See also setDiscardCommand(), restartCommand(), and setRestartCommand().
-
-
                                                  void * TQSessionManager::handle () const
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   X11 only: returns a handle to the current SmcConnection.
-
-
                                                  bool TQSessionManager::isPhase2 () const
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   Returns TRUE if the session manager is currently performing a second
-session management phase; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also requestPhase2().
-
-
                                                  void TQSessionManager::release ()
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   Releases the session manager's interaction semaphore after an
-interaction phase.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also allowsInteraction() and allowsErrorInteraction().
-
-
                                                  void TQSessionManager::requestPhase2 ()
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   Requests a second session management phase for the application. The
-application may then return immediately from the
-TQApplication::commitData() or TQApplication::saveState() function,
-and they will be called again once most or all other applications have
-finished their session management.
-
                                                   The two phases are useful for applications such as the X11 window manager
-that need to store information about another application's windows
-and therefore have to wait until these applications have completed their
-respective session management tasks.
-
                                                   Note that if another application has requested a second phase it
-may get called before, simultaneously with, or after your
-application's second phase.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also isPhase2().
-
-
                                                  TQStringList TQSessionManager::restartCommand () const
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   Returns the currently set restart command.
-
                                                   Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should
-iterate over a copy, e.g.
-
                                                  -    TQStringList list = mySession.restartCommand();
-    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    while( it != list.end() ) {
-        myProcessing( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-    
                                                  
- 
-
                                                   
                                                  See also setRestartCommand() and restartHint().
-
-
                                                  RestartHint TQSessionManager::restartHint () const
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   Returns the application's current restart hint. The default is
-RestartIfRunning.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also setRestartHint().
-
-
                                                  TQString TQSessionManager::sessionId () const
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   Returns the identifier of the current session.
-
                                                   If the application has been restored from an earlier session, this
-identifier is the same as it was in that earlier session.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also sessionKey() and TQApplication::sessionId().
-
-
                                                  TQString TQSessionManager::sessionKey () const
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   Returns the session key in the current session.
-
                                                   If the application has been restored from an earlier session, this
-key is the same as it was when the previous session ended.
-
                                                   The session key changes with every call of commitData() or
-saveState().
-
                                                   
                                                  See also sessionId() and TQApplication::sessionKey().
-
-
                                                  void TQSessionManager::setDiscardCommand ( const TQStringList & )
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   
                                                  See also discardCommand() and setRestartCommand().
-
-
                                                  void TQSessionManager::setManagerProperty ( const TQString & name, const TQStringList & value )
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   Low-level write access to the application's identification and state
-record are kept in the session manager.
-
                                                   The property called name has its value set to the string list value.
-
-
                                                  void TQSessionManager::setManagerProperty ( const TQString & name, const TQString & value )
-
                                                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                   Low-level write access to the application's identification and state
-records are kept in the session manager.
-
                                                   The property called name has its value set to the string value.
-
-
                                                  void TQSessionManager::setRestartCommand ( const TQStringList & command )
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   If the session manager is capable of restoring sessions it will
-execute command in order to restore the application. The command
-defaults to
-
                                                   
                                                  -        appname -session id
-  
                                                  
- 
-
                                                   The -session option is mandatory; otherwise TQApplication cannot
-tell whether it has been restored or what the current session
-identifier is. See TQApplication::isSessionRestored() and
-TQApplication::sessionId() for details.
-
                                                   If your application is very simple, it may be possible to store the
-entire application state in additional command line options. This
-is usually a very bad idea because command lines are often limited
-to a few hundred bytes. Instead, use TQSettings, or temporary files
-or a database for this purpose. By marking the data with the unique
-sessionId(), you will be able to restore the application in a future
-session.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also restartCommand(), setDiscardCommand(), and setRestartHint().
-
-
                                                  void TQSessionManager::setRestartHint ( RestartHint hint )
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   Sets the application's restart hint to hint. On application
-startup the hint is set to RestartIfRunning.
-
                                                   Note that these flags are only hints, a session manager may or may
-not respect them.
-
                                                   We recommend setting the restart hint in TQApplication::saveState()
-because most session managers perform a checkpoint shortly after an
-application's startup.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also restartHint().
-
-
-
                                                  
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                  
-
-
                                                  Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                  TQt 3.3.8
                                                  
-
                                                  
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsettings-h.html b/doc/html/qsettings-h.html
index a30c7625c..55c613038 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsettings-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsettings-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsettings.h Include File
+ntqsettings.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                  
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                  TQSettings Class Reference
                                                  
-
-
                                                  The TQSettings class provides persistent platform-independent application settings.
-More...
-
                                                  #include <qsettings.h>
-
                                                  List of all member functions.
-
                                                  Public Members
                                                  
-
                                                    
-
                                                  • enum Format { Native = 0, Ini }
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • enum System { Unix = 0, Windows, Mac }
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • enum Scope { User, Global }
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • TQSettings ()
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • TQSettings ( Format format )
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • ~TQSettings ()
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • bool writeEntry ( const TQString & key, bool value )
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • bool writeEntry ( const TQString & key, double value )
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • bool writeEntry ( const TQString & key, int value )
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • bool writeEntry ( const TQString & key, const TQString & value )
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • bool writeEntry ( const TQString & key, const TQStringList & value )
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • bool writeEntry ( const TQString & key, const TQStringList & value, const TQChar & separator )  (obsolete)
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • TQStringList entryList ( const TQString & key ) const
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • TQStringList subkeyList ( const TQString & key ) const
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • TQStringList readListEntry ( const TQString & key, bool * ok = 0 ) const
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • TQStringList readListEntry ( const TQString & key, const TQChar & separator, bool * ok = 0 ) const  (obsolete)
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • TQString readEntry ( const TQString & key, const TQString & def = TQString::null, bool * ok = 0 ) const
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • int readNumEntry ( const TQString & key, int def = 0, bool * ok = 0 ) const
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • double readDoubleEntry ( const TQString & key, double def = 0, bool * ok = 0 ) const
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • bool readBoolEntry ( const TQString & key, bool def = FALSE, bool * ok = 0 ) const
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • bool removeEntry ( const TQString & key )
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • void insertSearchPath ( System s, const TQString & path )
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • void removeSearchPath ( System s, const TQString & path )
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • void setPath ( const TQString & domain, const TQString & product, Scope scope = Global )
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • void beginGroup ( const TQString & group )
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • void endGroup ()
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • void resetGroup ()
                                                    • 
-
                                                  • TQString group () const
                                                    • 
-
                                                  
-
                                                  Detailed Description
                                                  
-
-
-The TQSettings class provides persistent platform-independent application settings.
-
                                                   
-
-
-
                                                   On Unix systems, TQSettings uses text files to store settings. On Windows
-systems, TQSettings uses the system registry.  On Mac OS X, TQSettings uses
-the Carbon preferences API.
-
                                                   Each setting comprises an identifying key and the data associated with
-the key. A key is a unicode string which consists of two or more
-subkeys. A subkey is a slash, '/', followed by one or more unicode
-characters (excluding slashes, newlines, carriage returns and equals,
-'=', signs). The associated data, called the entry or value, may be a
-boolean, an integer, a double, a string or a list of strings. Entry
-strings may contain any unicode characters.
-
                                                   If you want to save and restore the entire desktop's settings, i.e.
-which applications are running, use TQSettings to save the settings
-for each individual application and TQSessionManager to save the
-desktop's session.
-
                                                   Example settings:
-
                                                  -    /MyCompany/MyApplication/background color
-    /MyCompany/MyApplication/foreground color
-    /MyCompany/MyApplication/geometry/x
-    /MyCompany/MyApplication/geometry/y
-    /MyCompany/MyApplication/geometry/width
-    /MyCompany/MyApplication/geometry/height
-    /MyCompany/MyApplication/recent files/1
-    /MyCompany/MyApplication/recent files/2
-    /MyCompany/MyApplication/recent files/3
-    
                                                  
- 
-Each line above is a complete key, made up of subkeys.
-
                                                   A typical usage pattern for reading settings at application
-startup:
-
                                                  -    TQSettings settings;
-    settings.setPath( "MyCompany.com", "MyApplication" );
-
-    TQString bgColor = settings.readEntry( "/colors/background", "white" );
-    int width = settings.readNumEntry( "/geometry/width", 640 );
-    // ...
-    
                                                  
- 
-
                                                   A typical usage pattern for saving settings at application exit or
-'save preferences':
-
                                                  -    TQSettings settings;
-    settings.setPath( "MyCompany.com", "MyApplication" );
-
-    settings.writeEntry( "/colors/background", bgColor );
-    settings.writeEntry( "/geometry/width", width );
-    // ...
-    
                                                  
- 
-
                                                   A key prefix can be prepended to all keys using beginGroup(). The
-application of the prefix is stopped using endGroup(). For
-example:
-
                                                  -    TQSettings settings;
-
-    settings.beginGroup( "/MainWindow" );
-        settings.beginGroup( "/Geometry" );
-            int x = settings.readEntry( "/x" );
-            // ...
-        settings.endGroup();
-        settings.beginGroup( "/Toolbars" );
-            // ...
-        settings.endGroup();
-    settings.endGroup();
-    
                                                  
- 
-
                                                   You can get a list of entry-holding keys by calling entryList(), and
-a list of key-holding keys using subkeyList().
-
                                                   
                                                  -    TQStringList keys = settings.entryList( "/MyApplication" );
-    // keys contains 'background color' and 'foreground color'.
-
-    TQStringList keys = settings.entryList( "/MyApplication/recent files" );
-    // keys contains '1', '2' and '3'.
-
-    TQStringList subkeys = settings.subkeyList( "/MyApplication" );
-    // subkeys contains 'geometry' and 'recent files'
-
-    TQStringList subkeys = settings.subkeyList( "/MyApplication/recent files" );
-    // subkeys is empty.
-    
                                                  
- 
-
                                                   Since settings for Windows are stored in the registry there are
-some size limitations as follows:
-
                                                    
-
                                                  •  A subkey may not exceed 255 characters.
-
                                                  •  An entry's value may not exceed 16,300 characters.
-
                                                  •  All the values of a key (for example, all the 'recent files'
-subkeys values), may not exceed 65,535 characters.
-
                                                  
-
                                                   These limitations are not enforced on Unix or Mac OS X.
-
                                                   Warning: Creating multiple, simultaneous instances of TQSettings writing
-to a text file may lead to data loss! This is a known issue which will
-be fixed in a future release of TQt.
-
                                                   
                                                   Notes for Mac OS X Applications
-
                                                  
-
                                                   The location where settings are stored is not formally defined by
-the CFPreferences API.
-
                                                   At the time of writing settings are stored (either on a global or
-user basis, preferring locally) into a plist file in $ROOT/System/Library/Preferences (in XML format). TQSettings will
-create an appropriate plist file (com.<first group name>.plist)
-out of the full path to a key.
-
                                                   For further information on CFPreferences see
-Apple's Specifications
-
                                                   
                                                   Notes for Unix Applications
-
                                                  
-
                                                   There is no universally accepted place for storing application
-settings under Unix. In the examples the settings file will be
-searched for in the following directories:
-
                                                    
-
                                                  1.  SYSCONF - the default value is INSTALL/etc/settings
-
                                                  2.  /opt/MyCompany/share/etc
-
                                                  3.  /opt/MyCompany/share/MyApplication/etc
-
                                                  4.  $HOME/.qt
-
                                                  
-When reading settings the files are searched in the order shown
-above, with later settings overriding earlier settings. Files for
-which the user doesn't have read permission are ignored. When saving
-settings TQSettings works in the order shown above, writing
-to the first settings file for which the user has write permission.
-(INSTALL is the directory where TQt was installed.  This can be
-modified by using the configure script's -prefix argument )
-
                                                   If you want to put the settings in a particular place in the
-filesystem you could do this:
-
                                                  -    settings.insertSearchPath( TQSettings::Unix, "/opt/MyCompany/share" );
-    
                                                  
- 
-
                                                   But in practice you may prefer not to use a search path for Unix.
-For example the following code:
-
                                                  -    settings.writeEntry( "/MyApplication/geometry/width", width );
-    
                                                  
- 
-will end up writing the "geometry/width" setting to the file
-$HOME/.qt/myapplicationrc (assuming that the application is
-being run by an ordinary user, i.e. not by root).
-
                                                   For cross-platform applications you should ensure that the
-Windows size limitations are not exceeded.
-
                                                   Warning: TQSettings doesn't write the settings until it is destroyed so
-you should construct the TQSettings object on the stack.
-
                                                  See also Input/Output and Networking and Miscellaneous Classes.
-
-
                                                  Member Type Documentation
                                                  
-
                                                  TQSettings::Format
                                                  
-
-
                                                    
-
                                                  • TQSettings::Native - Store the settings in a platform dependent location
-
                                                  • TQSettings::Ini - Store the settings in a text file
-
                                                  
-
                                                  TQSettings::Scope
                                                  
-
-
                                                    
-
                                                  • TQSettings::Global - Save settings as global as possible
-
                                                  • TQSettings::User - Save settings in user space
-
                                                  
-
                                                  TQSettings::System
                                                  
-
-
                                                    
-
                                                  • TQSettings::Mac - Macintosh execution environments
-
                                                  • TQSettings::Unix - Mac OS X, Unix, Linux and Unix-like execution environments
-
                                                  • TQSettings::Windows - Windows execution environments
-
                                                  
-
                                                  Member Function Documentation
                                                  
-
                                                  TQSettings::TQSettings ()
-
                                                  
-Creates a settings object.
-
                                                   Be aware that you must call setPath() or insertSearchPath() before
-you can use the TQSettings object.
-
-
                                                  TQSettings::TQSettings ( Format format )
-
                                                  
-Creates a settings object. If format is 'Ini' the settings will
-be stored in a text file, using the Unix strategy (see above). If format
-is 'Native', the settings will be stored in a platform specific way
-(ie. the Windows registry).
-
                                                   Be aware that you must call setPath() or insertSearchPath() before
-you can use the TQSettings object.
-
-
                                                  TQSettings::~TQSettings ()
-
                                                  
-Destroys the settings object.  All modifications made to the settings
-will automatically be saved.
-
                                                   
-
                                                  void TQSettings::beginGroup ( const TQString & group )
-
                                                  
-Appends group to the current key prefix.
-
                                                   
                                                  -    TQSettings settings;
-    settings.beginGroup( "/MainWindow" );
-    // read values
-    settings.endGroup();
-    
                                                  
- 
-
-
                                                  void TQSettings::endGroup ()
-
                                                  
-Undo previous calls to beginGroup(). Note that a single beginGroup("a/b/c") is undone
-by a single call to endGroup().
-
                                                   
                                                  -    TQSettings settings;
-    settings.beginGroup( "/MainWindow/Geometry" );
-    // read values
-    settings.endGroup();
-    
                                                  
- 
-
-
                                                  TQStringList TQSettings::entryList ( const TQString & key ) const
-
                                                  
-Returns a list of the keys which contain entries under key. Does not return any keys that contain subkeys.
-
                                                   Example settings:
-
                                                  -    /MyCompany/MyApplication/background color
-    /MyCompany/MyApplication/foreground color
-    /MyCompany/MyApplication/geometry/x
-    /MyCompany/MyApplication/geometry/y
-    /MyCompany/MyApplication/geometry/width
-    /MyCompany/MyApplication/geometry/height
-    
                                                  
- 
-
                                                  -    TQStringList keys = settings.entryList( "/MyCompany/MyApplication" );
-    
                                                  
- 
-
                                                   In the above example, keys will contain 'background color' and
-'foreground color'. It will not contain 'geometry' because this key
-contains subkeys not entries.
-
                                                   To access the geometry values, you could either use subkeyList()
-to read the keys then read each entry, or simply read each entry
-directly by specifying its full key, e.g.
-"/MyCompany/MyApplication/geometry/y".
-
                                                   
                                                  See also subkeyList().
-
-
                                                  TQString TQSettings::group () const
-
                                                  
-Returns the current key prefix, or a null string if there is no key prefix set.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also beginGroup().
-
-
                                                  void TQSettings::insertSearchPath ( System s, const TQString & path )
-
                                                  
-Inserts path into the settings search path. The semantics of path depends on the system s. It is usually easier and better to
-use setPath() instead of this function.
-
                                                   When s is Windows and the execution environment is not
-Windows the function does nothing. Similarly when s is Unix and
-the execution environment is not Unix the function does nothing.
-
                                                   When s is Windows, and the execution environment is Windows, the
-search path list will be used as the first subfolder of the "Software"
-folder in the registry.
-
                                                   When reading settings the folders are searched forwards from the
-first folder (listed below) to the last, returning the first
-settings found, and ignoring any folders for which the user doesn't
-have read permission.
-
                                                    
-
                                                  1.  HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/MyCompany/MyApplication
-
                                                  2.  HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/Software/MyCompany/MyApplication
-
                                                  3.  HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/MyApplication
-
                                                  4.  HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/Software/MyApplication
-
                                                  
-
                                                   
                                                  -  TQSettings settings;
-  settings.insertSearchPath( TQSettings::Windows, "/MyCompany" );
-  settings.writeEntry( "/MyApplication/Tip of the day", TRUE );
-  
                                                  
- 
-The code above will write the subkey "Tip of the day" into the first of the registry folders listed below that is found and for
-which the user has write permission.
-
                                                    
-
                                                  1.  HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/Software/MyCompany/MyApplication
-
                                                  2.  HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/MyCompany/MyApplication
-
                                                  3.  HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/Software/MyApplication
-
                                                  4.  HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/MyApplication
-
                                                  
-If a setting is found in the HKEY_CURRENT_USER space, this setting
-is overwritten independently of write permissions in the
-HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE space.
-
                                                   When s is Unix, and the execution environment is Unix, the
-search path list will be used when trying to determine a suitable
-filename for reading and writing settings files. By default, there are
-two entries in the search path:
-
                                                   
                                                    
-
                                                  1.  SYSCONF - where SYSCONF is a directory specified when
-configuring TQt; by default it is INSTALL/etc/settings.
-
                                                  2.  $HOME/.qt/ - where $HOME is the user's home directory.
-
                                                  
-
                                                   All insertions into the search path will go before $HOME/.qt/.
-For example:
-
                                                  -  TQSettings settings;
-  settings.insertSearchPath( TQSettings::Unix, "/opt/MyCompany/share/etc" );
-  settings.insertSearchPath( TQSettings::Unix, "/opt/MyCompany/share/MyApplication/etc" );
-  // ...
-  
                                                  
- 
-Will result in a search path of:
-
                                                    
-
                                                  1.  SYSCONF
-
                                                  2.  /opt/MyCompany/share/etc
-
                                                  3.  /opt/MyCompany/share/MyApplication/etc
-
                                                  4.  $HOME/.qt
-
                                                  
-When reading settings the files are searched in the order shown
-above, with later settings overriding earlier settings. Files for
-which the user doesn't have read permission are ignored. When saving
-settings TQSettings works in the order shown above, writing
-to the first settings file for which the user has write permission.
-
                                                   Note that paths in the file system are not created by this
-function, so they must already exist to be useful.
-
                                                   Settings under Unix are stored in files whose names are based on the
-first subkey of the key (not including the search path). The algorithm
-for creating names is essentially: lowercase the first subkey, replace
-spaces with underscores and add 'rc', e.g.
-/MyCompany/MyApplication/background color will be stored in
-myapplicationrc (assuming that /MyCompany is part of
-the search path).
-
                                                   
                                                  See also removeSearchPath().
-
-
                                                   
-
                                                  Example: chart/chartform.cpp.
-
                                                  bool TQSettings::readBoolEntry ( const TQString & key, bool def = FALSE, bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   Reads the entry specified by key, and returns a bool, or the
-default value, def, if the entry couldn't be read.
-If ok is non-null, *ok is set to TRUE if the key was read, FALSE
-otherwise.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also readEntry(), readNumEntry(), readDoubleEntry(), writeEntry(), and removeEntry().
-
-
                                                  double TQSettings::readDoubleEntry ( const TQString & key, double def = 0, bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   Reads the entry specified by key, and returns a double, or the
-default value, def, if the entry couldn't be read.
-If ok is non-null, *ok is set to TRUE if the key was read, FALSE
-otherwise.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also readEntry(), readNumEntry(), readBoolEntry(), writeEntry(), and removeEntry().
-
-
                                                  TQString TQSettings::readEntry ( const TQString & key, const TQString & def = TQString::null, bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   Reads the entry specified by key, and returns a TQString, or the
-default value, def, if the entry couldn't be read.
-If ok is non-null, *ok is set to TRUE if the key was read, FALSE
-otherwise.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also readListEntry(), readNumEntry(), readDoubleEntry(), readBoolEntry(), writeEntry(), and removeEntry().
-
-
                                                  TQStringList TQSettings::readListEntry ( const TQString & key, bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                                                  
-
-Reads the entry specified by key as a string. If ok is not
-0, *ok is set to TRUE if the key was read, otherwise *ok is
-set to FALSE.
-
                                                   Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
-over a copy, e.g.
-
                                                  -    TQStringList list = mySettings.readListEntry( "recentfiles" );
-    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    while( it != list.end() ) {
-        myProcessing( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-    
                                                  
- 
-
                                                   
                                                  See also readEntry(), readDoubleEntry(), readBoolEntry(), writeEntry(), removeEntry(), and TQStringList::split().
-
-
                                                  TQStringList TQSettings::readListEntry ( const TQString & key, const TQChar & separator, bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                                                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                   This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                                   Reads the entry specified by key as a string. The separator
-is used to create a TQStringList by calling TQStringList::split(separator, entry). If ok is not 0: *ok is set to TRUE
-if the key was read, otherwise *ok is set to FALSE.
-
                                                   Warning: As the documentation states, TQStringList::split() will
-omit empty strings from the list.  Because of this, it is
-impossible to retrieve identical list data with this function.  We
-recommend using the readListEntry() and writeEntry() overloads
-that do not take a separator argument.
-
                                                   Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
-over a copy, e.g.
-
                                                  -    TQStringList list = mySettings.readListEntry( "size", " " );
-    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    while( it != list.end() ) {
-        myProcessing( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-    
                                                  
- 
-
                                                   
                                                  See also readEntry(), readDoubleEntry(), readBoolEntry(), writeEntry(), removeEntry(), and TQStringList::split().
-
-
                                                  int TQSettings::readNumEntry ( const TQString & key, int def = 0, bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                                                  
-
-
                                                   Reads the entry specified by key, and returns an integer, or the
-default value, def, if the entry couldn't be read.
-If ok is non-null, *ok is set to TRUE if the key was read, FALSE
-otherwise.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also readEntry(), readDoubleEntry(), readBoolEntry(), writeEntry(), and removeEntry().
-
-
                                                  bool TQSettings::removeEntry ( const TQString & key )
-
                                                  
-Removes the entry specified by key.
-
                                                   Returns true if the entry was successfully removed; otherwise
-returns false. Note that removing the last entry in any given
-folder, will also remove the folder.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also readEntry() and writeEntry().
-
-
                                                  void TQSettings::removeSearchPath ( System s, const TQString & path )
-
                                                  
-Removes all occurrences of path (using exact matching) from the
-settings search path for system s. Note that the default search
-paths cannot be removed.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also insertSearchPath().
-
-
                                                  void TQSettings::resetGroup ()
-
                                                  
-Set the current key prefix to the empty string.
-
-
                                                  void TQSettings::setPath ( const TQString & domain, const TQString & product, Scope scope = Global )
-
                                                  
-Insert platform-dependent paths from platform-independent information.
-
                                                   The domain should be an Internet domain name
-controlled by the producer of the software, eg. Trolltech products
-use "trolltech.com".
-
                                                   The product should be the official name of the product.
-
                                                   The scope should be
-TQSettings::User for user-specific settings, or
-TQSettings::Global for system-wide settings (generally
-these will be read-only to many users).
-
                                                   Not all information is relevant on all systems.
-
-
                                                  TQStringList TQSettings::subkeyList ( const TQString & key ) const
-
                                                  
-Returns a list of the keys which contain subkeys under key. Does not return any keys that contain entries.
-
                                                   Example settings:
-
                                                  -    /MyCompany/MyApplication/background color
-    /MyCompany/MyApplication/foreground color
-    /MyCompany/MyApplication/geometry/x
-    /MyCompany/MyApplication/geometry/y
-    /MyCompany/MyApplication/geometry/width
-    /MyCompany/MyApplication/geometry/height
-    /MyCompany/MyApplication/recent files/1
-    /MyCompany/MyApplication/recent files/2
-    /MyCompany/MyApplication/recent files/3
-    
                                                  
- 
-
                                                  -    TQStringList keys = settings.subkeyList( "/MyCompany/MyApplication" );
-    
                                                  
- 
-
                                                   In the above example, keys will contain 'geometry' and
-'recent files'. It will not contain 'background color' or
-'foreground color' because those keys contain entries not
-subkeys. To get a list of keys that contain entries rather than
-subkeys use entryList() instead.
-
                                                   Warning: In the above example, if TQSettings is writing to an Ini file,
-then a call to
-
                                                   subkeyList("/MyCompany") 
                                                  
- 
-will return an empty list. This happens because a key like
-
                                                   /MyCompany/MyApplication/background color 
                                                  
- 
-is written to the file "mycompanyrc", under the section [MyApplication].
-This call is therefore a request to list the sections in an ini file, which
-is not supported in this version of TQSettings. This is a known issue which
-will be fixed in TQt-4.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also entryList().
-
-
                                                  bool TQSettings::writeEntry ( const TQString & key, bool value )
-
                                                  
-Writes the boolean entry value into key key. The key is
-created if it doesn't exist. Any previous value is overwritten by value.
-
                                                   If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and FALSE is
-returned; otherwise TRUE is returned.
-
                                                   Warning: On certain platforms, keys are required to contain at least
-two components (e.g., "/foo/bar"). This limitation does not apply to
-TQt 4.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also readListEntry(), readNumEntry(), readDoubleEntry(), readBoolEntry(), and removeEntry().
-
-
                                                  Example: chart/chartform.cpp.
-
                                                  bool TQSettings::writeEntry ( const TQString & key, double value )
-
                                                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                   Writes the double entry value into key key. The key is
-created if it doesn't exist. Any previous value is overwritten by value.
-
                                                   If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and FALSE is
-returned; otherwise TRUE is returned.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also readListEntry(), readNumEntry(), readDoubleEntry(), readBoolEntry(), and removeEntry().
-
-
                                                  bool TQSettings::writeEntry ( const TQString & key, int value )
-
                                                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                   Writes the integer entry value into key key. The key is
-created if it doesn't exist. Any previous value is overwritten by value.
-
                                                   If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and FALSE is
-returned; otherwise TRUE is returned.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also readListEntry(), readNumEntry(), readDoubleEntry(), readBoolEntry(), and removeEntry().
-
-
                                                  bool TQSettings::writeEntry ( const TQString & key, const TQString & value )
-
                                                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                   Writes the string entry value into key key. The key is
-created if it doesn't exist. Any previous value is overwritten by value. If value is an empty string or a null string the key's
-value will be an empty string.
-
                                                   If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and FALSE is
-returned; otherwise TRUE is returned.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also readListEntry(), readNumEntry(), readDoubleEntry(), readBoolEntry(), and removeEntry().
-
-
                                                  bool TQSettings::writeEntry ( const TQString & key, const TQStringList & value )
-
                                                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                   Writes the string list entry value into key key. The key
-is created if it doesn't exist. Any previous value is overwritten
-by value.
-
                                                   If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and FALSE is
-returned; otherwise returns TRUE.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also readListEntry(), readNumEntry(), readDoubleEntry(), readBoolEntry(), and removeEntry().
-
-
                                                  bool TQSettings::writeEntry ( const TQString & key, const TQStringList & value, const TQChar & separator )
-
                                                  
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                   This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                                   Writes the string list entry value into key key. The key
-is created if it doesn't exist. Any previous value is overwritten
-by value. The list is stored as a sequence of strings separated
-by separator (using TQStringList::join()), so none of the
-strings in the list should contain the separator. If the list is
-empty or null the key's value will be an empty string.
-
                                                   Warning: The list should not contain empty or null strings, as
-readListEntry() will use TQStringList::split() to recreate the
-list.  As the documentation states, TQStringList::split() will omit
-empty strings from the list.  Because of this, it is impossible to
-retrieve identical list data that is stored with this function.
-We recommend using the writeEntry() and readListEntry() overloads
-that do not take a separator argument.
-
                                                   If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and FALSE is
-returned; otherwise returns TRUE.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also readListEntry(), readNumEntry(), readDoubleEntry(), readBoolEntry(), removeEntry(), and TQStringList::join().
-
-
-
                                                  
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                  
-
-
                                                  Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                  TQt 3.3.8
                                                  
-
                                                  
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsgistyle-h.html b/doc/html/qsgistyle-h.html
index 304d59a1a..a2a46d01d 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsgistyle-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsgistyle-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsgistyle.h Include File
+ntqsgistyle.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                  
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                  TQSGIStyle Class Reference
                                                  
-
-
                                                  The TQSGIStyle class provides SGI/Irix look and feel.
-More...
-
                                                  #include <qsgistyle.h>
-
                                                  Inherits TQMotifStyle.
-
                                                  List of all member functions.
-
                                                  Public Members
                                                  
-
-
                                                  Detailed Description
                                                  
-
-
-The TQSGIStyle class provides SGI/Irix look and feel.
-
                                                   
-
                                                   This class implements the SGI look and feel. It resembles the
-SGI/Irix Motif GUI style as closely as TQStyle allows.
-
                                                  See also Widget Appearance and Style.
-
-
                                                  Member Function Documentation
                                                  
-
                                                  TQSGIStyle::TQSGIStyle ( bool useHighlightCols = FALSE )
-
                                                  
-Constructs a TQSGIStyle.
-
                                                   If useHighlightCols is FALSE (default value), the style will
-polish the application's color palette to emulate the Motif way of
-highlighting, which is a simple inversion between the base and the
-text color.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also TQMotifStyle::useHighlightColors().
-
-
                                                  TQSGIStyle::~TQSGIStyle () [virtual]
-
                                                  
-Destroys the style.
-
-
-
                                                  
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                  
-
-
                                                  Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                  TQt 3.3.8
                                                  
-
                                                  
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qshowevent-members.html b/doc/html/qshowevent-members.html
index 1099670a3..0e0153737 100644
--- a/doc/html/qshowevent-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qshowevent-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -36,8 +36,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
 
 
                                                  
diff --git a/doc/html/qshowevent.html b/doc/html/qshowevent.html
index 91ab3f8a9..6c1bcb960 100644
--- a/doc/html/qshowevent.html
+++ b/doc/html/qshowevent.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                                  The TQShowEvent class provides an event which is sent when a widget is shown.
 More...
-
                                                  #include <qevent.h>
-
                                                  Inherits TQEvent.
+
                                                  #include <ntqevent.h>
+
                                                  Inherits TQEvent.
 
                                                  List of all member functions.
 
                                                  Public Members
                                                  
 
                                                    
diff --git a/doc/html/qsignal-h.html b/doc/html/qsignal-h.html
index 6fa1569ed..80622b022 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsignal-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsignal-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsignal.h Include File
+ntqsignal.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                    TQSignal Class Reference
                                                    
-
-
                                                    The TQSignal class can be used to send signals for classes
-that don't inherit TQObject.
-More...
-
                                                    #include <qsignal.h>
-
                                                    Inherits TQObject.
-
                                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                                    Public Members
                                                    
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • TQSignal ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • ~TQSignal ()
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • bool connect ( const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • bool disconnect ( const TQObject * receiver, const char * member = 0 )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • void activate ()
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • bool isBlocked () const  (obsolete)
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • void block ( bool b )  (obsolete)
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • void setParameter ( int value )  (obsolete)
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • int parameter () const  (obsolete)
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • void setValue ( const TQVariant & value )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQVariant value () const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    
-
                                                    Detailed Description
                                                    
-
-
-The TQSignal class can be used to send signals for classes
-that don't inherit TQObject.
-
                                                     
-
-
                                                     If you want to send signals from a class that does not inherit
-TQObject, you can create an internal TQSignal object to emit the
-signal. You must also provide a function that connects the signal
-to an outside object slot.  This is how we have implemented
-signals in the TQMenuData class, which is not a TQObject.
-
                                                     In general, we recommend inheriting TQObject instead. TQObject
-provides much more functionality.
-
                                                     You can set a single TQVariant parameter for the signal with
-setValue().
-
                                                     Note that TQObject is a private base class of TQSignal, i.e. you
-cannot call any TQObject member functions from a TQSignal object.
-
                                                     Example:
-
                                                    -        #include <qsignal.h>
-
-        class MyClass
-        {
-        public:
-            MyClass();
-            ~MyClass();
-
-            void doSomething();
-
-            void connect( TQObject *receiver, const char *member );
-
-        private:
-            TQSignal *sig;
-        };
-
-        MyClass::MyClass()
-        {
-            sig = new TQSignal;
-        }
-
-        MyClass::~MyClass()
-        {
-            delete sig;
-        }
-
-        void MyClass::doSomething()
-        {
-            // ... does something
-            sig->activate(); // emits the signal
-        }
-
-        void MyClass::connect( TQObject *receiver, const char *member )
-        {
-            sig->connect( receiver, member );
-        }
-    
                                                    
- 
-
                                                    See also Input/Output and Networking and Miscellaneous Classes.
-
-
                                                    Member Function Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSignal::TQSignal ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                    
-Constructs a signal object called name, with the parent object
-parent. These arguments are passed directly to TQObject.
-
-
                                                    TQSignal::~TQSignal ()
-
                                                    
-Destroys the signal. All connections are removed, as is the case
-with all TQObjects.
-
-
                                                    void TQSignal::activate ()
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Emits the signal. If the platform supports TQVariant and a
-parameter has been set with setValue(), this value is passed in
-the signal.
-
-
                                                    void TQSignal::block ( bool b )
-
                                                    
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                                     Blocks the signal if b is TRUE, or unblocks the signal if b is FALSE.
-
                                                     An activated signal disappears into hyperspace if it is blocked.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also isBlocked(), activate(), and TQObject::blockSignals().
-
-
                                                    bool TQSignal::connect ( const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
-
                                                    
-Connects the signal to member in object receiver.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also disconnect() and TQObject::connect().
-
-
                                                    bool TQSignal::disconnect ( const TQObject * receiver, const char * member = 0 )
-
                                                    
-Disonnects the signal from member in object receiver.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also connect() and TQObject::disconnect().
-
-
                                                    bool TQSignal::isBlocked () const
-
                                                    
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                                     Returns TRUE if the signal is blocked, or FALSE if it is not blocked.
-
                                                     The signal is not blocked by default.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also block() and TQObject::signalsBlocked().
-
-
                                                    int TQSignal::parameter () const
-
                                                     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
-
                                                    void TQSignal::setParameter ( int value )
-
                                                     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
-
                                                    void TQSignal::setValue ( const TQVariant & value )
-
                                                    
-Sets the signal's parameter to value
-
-
                                                    TQVariant TQSignal::value () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the signal's parameter
-
-
-
                                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                                    
-
                                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsignalmapper-h.html b/doc/html/qsignalmapper-h.html
index 6ce2e7190..799aab1c6 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsignalmapper-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsignalmapper-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsignalmapper.h Include File
+ntqsignalmapper.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                    TQSignalMapper Class Reference
                                                    
-
-
                                                    The TQSignalMapper class bundles signals from identifiable senders.
-More...
-
                                                    #include <qsignalmapper.h>
-
                                                    Inherits TQObject.
-
                                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                                    Public Members
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Public Slots
                                                    
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • void map ()
                                                      • 
-
                                                    
-
                                                    Signals
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Detailed Description
                                                    
-
-
-The TQSignalMapper class bundles signals from identifiable senders.
-
                                                     
-
                                                     This class collects a set of parameterless signals, and re-emits
-them with integer or string parameters corresponding to the object
-that sent the signal.
-
                                                    See also Input/Output and Networking.
-
-
                                                    Member Function Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSignalMapper::TQSignalMapper ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                    
-Constructs a TQSignalMapper called name, with parent parent.
-Like all TQObjects, it will be deleted when the parent is deleted.
-
-
                                                    TQSignalMapper::~TQSignalMapper ()
-
                                                    
-Destroys the TQSignalMapper.
-
-
                                                    void TQSignalMapper::map () [slot]
-
                                                    
-This slot emits signals based on which object sends signals to it.
-
-
                                                    Examples: i18n/main.cpp and themes/themes.cpp.
-
                                                    void TQSignalMapper::mapped ( int ) [signal]
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This signal is emitted when map() is signaled from an object that
-has an integer mapping set.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setMapping().
-
-
                                                    Examples: i18n/main.cpp and themes/themes.cpp.
-
                                                    void TQSignalMapper::mapped ( const TQString & ) [signal]
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     This signal is emitted when map() is signaled from an object that
-has a string mapping set.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setMapping().
-
-
                                                    void TQSignalMapper::removeMappings ( const TQObject * sender )
-
                                                    
-Removes all mappings for sender. This is done automatically
-when mapped objects are destroyed.
-
-
                                                    void TQSignalMapper::setMapping ( const TQObject * sender, int identifier ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Adds a mapping so that when map() is signaled from the given sender, the signal mapped(identifier) is emitted.
-
                                                     There may be at most one integer identifier for each object.
-
-
                                                    Examples: i18n/main.cpp and themes/themes.cpp.
-
                                                    void TQSignalMapper::setMapping ( const TQObject * sender, const TQString & identifier ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     Adds a mapping so that when map() is signaled from the given sender, the signal mapper(identifier) is emitted.
-
                                                     There may be at most one string identifier for each object, and it
-may not be empty.
-
-
-
                                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                                    
-
                                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsimplerichtext-h.html b/doc/html/qsimplerichtext-h.html
index 6622ad40a..3f388c3a7 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsimplerichtext-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsimplerichtext-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsimplerichtext.h Include File
+ntqsimplerichtext.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                    TQSimpleRichText Class Reference
                                                    
-
-
                                                    The TQSimpleRichText class provides a small displayable piece of rich text.
-More...
-
                                                    #include <qsimplerichtext.h>
-
                                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                                    Public Members
                                                    
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • TQSimpleRichText ( const TQString & text, const TQFont & fnt, const TQString & context = TQString::null, const TQStyleSheet * sheet = 0 )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQSimpleRichText ( const TQString & text, const TQFont & fnt, const TQString & context, const TQStyleSheet * sheet, const TQMimeSourceFactory * factory, int pageBreak = -1, const TQColor & linkColor = TQt::blue, bool linkUnderline = TRUE )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • ~TQSimpleRichText ()
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • void setWidth ( int w )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • void setWidth ( TQPainter * p, int w )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • void setDefaultFont ( const TQFont & f )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • int width () const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • int widthUsed () const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • int height () const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • void adjustSize ()
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • void draw ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, const TQRect & clipRect, const TQColorGroup & cg, const TQBrush * paper = 0 ) const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • void draw ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, const TQRegion & clipRegion, const TQColorGroup & cg, const TQBrush * paper = 0 ) const  (obsolete)
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQString context () const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQString anchorAt ( const TQPoint & pos ) const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • bool inText ( const TQPoint & pos ) const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    
-
                                                    Detailed Description
                                                    
-
-
-The TQSimpleRichText class provides a small displayable piece of rich text.
-
                                                     
-
-
                                                     This class encapsulates simple rich text usage in which a string
-is interpreted as rich text and can be drawn. This is particularly
-useful if you want to display some rich text in a custom widget. A
-TQStyleSheet is needed to interpret the tags and format the rich
-text. TQt provides a default HTML-like style sheet, but you may
-define custom style sheets.
-
                                                     Once created, the rich text object can be queried for its width(),
-height(), and the actual width used (see widthUsed()). Most
-importantly, it can be drawn on any given TQPainter with draw().
-TQSimpleRichText can also be used to implement hypertext or active
-text facilities by using anchorAt(). A hit test through inText()
-makes it possible to use simple rich text for text objects in
-editable drawing canvases.
-
                                                     Once constructed from a string the contents cannot be changed,
-only resized. If the contents change, just throw the rich text
-object away and make a new one with the new contents.
-
                                                     For large documents use TQTextEdit or TQTextBrowser. For very small
-items of rich text you can use a TQLabel.
-
                                                     If you are using TQSimpleRichText to print in high resolution you
-should call setWidth(TQPainter, int) so that the content will be
-laid out properly on the page.
-
                                                    See also Text Related Classes.
-
-
                                                    Member Function Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSimpleRichText::TQSimpleRichText ( const TQString & text, const TQFont & fnt, const TQString & context = TQString::null, const TQStyleSheet * sheet = 0 )
-
                                                    
-Constructs a TQSimpleRichText from the rich text string text and
-the font fnt.
-
                                                     The font is used as a basis for the text rendering. When using
-rich text rendering on a widget w, you would normally specify
-the widget's font, for example:
-
                                                     
                                                    -    TQSimpleRichText myrichtext( contents, mywidget->font() );
-    
                                                    
- 
-
                                                     context is the optional context of the rich text object. This
-becomes important if text contains relative references, for
-example within image tags. TQSimpleRichText always uses the default
-mime source factory (see TQMimeSourceFactory::defaultFactory())
-to resolve those references. The context will then be used to
-calculate the absolute path. See
-TQMimeSourceFactory::makeAbsolute() for details.
-
                                                     The sheet is an optional style sheet. If it is 0, the default
-style sheet will be used (see TQStyleSheet::defaultSheet()).
-
-
                                                    TQSimpleRichText::TQSimpleRichText ( const TQString & text, const TQFont & fnt, const TQString & context, const TQStyleSheet * sheet, const TQMimeSourceFactory * factory, int pageBreak = -1, const TQColor & linkColor = TQt::blue, bool linkUnderline = TRUE )
-
                                                    
-Constructs a TQSimpleRichText from the rich text string text and
-the font fnt.
-
                                                     This is a slightly more complex constructor for TQSimpleRichText
-that takes an additional mime source factory factory, a page
-break parameter pageBreak and a bool linkUnderline. linkColor is only provided for compatibility, but has no effect,
-as TQColorGroup's TQColorGroup::link() color is used now.
-
                                                     context is the optional context of the rich text object. This
-becomes important if text contains relative references, for
-example within image tags. TQSimpleRichText always uses the default
-mime source factory (see TQMimeSourceFactory::defaultFactory())
-to resolve those references. The context will then be used to
-calculate the absolute path. See
-TQMimeSourceFactory::makeAbsolute() for details.
-
                                                     The sheet is an optional style sheet. If it is 0, the default
-style sheet will be used (see TQStyleSheet::defaultSheet()).
-
                                                     This constructor is useful for creating a TQSimpleRichText object
-suitable for printing. Set pageBreak to be the height of the
-contents area of the pages.
-
-
                                                    TQSimpleRichText::~TQSimpleRichText ()
-
                                                    
-Destroys the rich text object, freeing memory.
-
-
                                                    void TQSimpleRichText::adjustSize ()
-
                                                    
-Adjusts the richt text object to a reasonable size.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setWidth().
-
-
                                                    TQString TQSimpleRichText::anchorAt ( const TQPoint & pos ) const
-
                                                    
-Returns the anchor at the requested position, pos. An empty
-string is returned if no anchor is specified for this position.
-
-
                                                    TQString TQSimpleRichText::context () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the context of the rich text object. If no context has
-been specified in the constructor, a null string is returned. The
-context is the path to use to look up relative links, such as
-image tags and anchor references.
-
-
                                                    void TQSimpleRichText::draw ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, const TQRect & clipRect, const TQColorGroup & cg, const TQBrush * paper = 0 ) const
-
                                                    
-Draws the formatted text with painter p, at position (x, y), clipped to clipRect. The clipping rectangle is given in the
-rich text object's coordinates translated by (x, y). Passing
-an null rectangle results in no clipping. Colors from the color
-group cg are used as needed, and if not 0, *paper is used as
-the background brush.
-
                                                     Note that the display code is highly optimized to reduce flicker,
-so passing a brush for paper is preferable to simply clearing
-the area to be painted and then calling this without a brush.
-
-
                                                    Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, and mdi/application.cpp.
-
                                                    void TQSimpleRichText::draw ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, const TQRegion & clipRegion, const TQColorGroup & cg, const TQBrush * paper = 0 ) const
-
                                                     
-
                                                     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                                     Use the version with clipRect instead. The region version has
-problems with larger documents on some platforms (on X11 regions
-internally are represented with 16bit coordinates).
-
-
                                                    int TQSimpleRichText::height () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the height of the rich text object in pixels.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setWidth().
-
-
                                                    Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, and mdi/application.cpp.
-
                                                    bool TQSimpleRichText::inText ( const TQPoint & pos ) const
-
                                                    
-Returns TRUE if pos is within a text line of the rich text
-object; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                    void TQSimpleRichText::setDefaultFont ( const TQFont & f )
-
                                                    
-Sets the default font for the rich text object to f
-
-
                                                    void TQSimpleRichText::setWidth ( TQPainter * p, int w )
-
                                                    
-Sets the width of the rich text object to w pixels,
-recalculating the layout as if it were to be drawn with painter p.
-
                                                     Passing a painter is useful when you intend drawing on devices
-other than the screen, for example a TQPrinter.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also height() and adjustSize().
-
-
                                                    Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, and mdi/application.cpp.
-
                                                    void TQSimpleRichText::setWidth ( int w )
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     Sets the width of the rich text object to w pixels.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also height() and adjustSize().
-
-
                                                    int TQSimpleRichText::width () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the set width of the rich text object in pixels.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also widthUsed().
-
-
                                                    int TQSimpleRichText::widthUsed () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the width in pixels that is actually used by the rich text
-object. This can be smaller or wider than the set width.
-
                                                     It may be wider, for example, if the text contains images or
-non-breakable words that are already wider than the available
-space. It's smaller when the object only consists of lines that do
-not fill the width completely.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also width().
-
-
-
                                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                                    
-
                                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsize-h.html b/doc/html/qsize-h.html
index bcbe551bc..2484d3abd 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsize-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsize-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsize.h Include File
+ntqsize.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                    TQSize Class Reference
                                                    
-
-
                                                    The TQSize class defines the size of a two-dimensional object.
-More...
-
                                                    #include <qsize.h>
-
                                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                                    Public Members
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Related Functions
                                                    
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • bool operator== ( const TQSize & s1, const TQSize & s2 )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • bool operator!= ( const TQSize & s1, const TQSize & s2 )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • const TQSize operator+ ( const TQSize & s1, const TQSize & s2 )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • const TQSize operator- ( const TQSize & s1, const TQSize & s2 )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • const TQSize operator* ( const TQSize & s, int c )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • const TQSize operator* ( int c, const TQSize & s )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • const TQSize operator* ( const TQSize & s, double c )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • const TQSize operator* ( double c, const TQSize & s )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • const TQSize operator/ ( const TQSize & s, int c )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • const TQSize operator/ ( const TQSize & s, double c )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQSize & sz )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQSize & sz )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    
-
                                                    Detailed Description
                                                    
-
-
-The TQSize class defines the size of a two-dimensional object.
-
                                                     
-
-
                                                     A size is specified by a width and a height.
-
                                                     The coordinate type is TQCOORD (defined in <qwindowdefs.h> as int).
-The minimum value of TQCOORD is TQCOORD_MIN (-2147483648) and the maximum
-value is TQCOORD_MAX (2147483647).
-
                                                     The size can be set in the constructor and changed with setWidth()
-and setHeight(), or using operator+=(), operator-=(), operator*=()
-and operator/=(), etc. You can swap the width and height with
-transpose(). You can get a size which holds the maximum height and
-width of two sizes using expandedTo(), and the minimum height and
-width of two sizes using boundedTo().
-
                                                     
                                                    See also TQPoint, TQRect, Graphics Classes, and Image Processing Classes.
-
-
                                                    Member Type Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSize::ScaleMode
                                                     
-
                                                     This enum type defines the different ways of scaling a size.
-
                                                     
                                                     
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • TQSize::ScaleFree - The size is scaled freely. The ratio is not preserved.
-
                                                    • TQSize::ScaleMin - The size is scaled to a rectangle as large as possible
-inside a given rectangle, preserving the aspect ratio.
-
                                                    • TQSize::ScaleMax - The size is scaled to a rectangle as small as possible
-outside a given rectangle, preserving the aspect ratio.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also TQSize::scale(), TQImage::scale(), and TQImage::smoothScale().
-
-
                                                    Member Function Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSize::TQSize ()
-
                                                    
-
-Constructs a size with invalid (negative) width and height.
-
-
                                                    TQSize::TQSize ( int w, int h )
-
                                                    
-
-Constructs a size with width w and height h.
-
-
                                                    TQSize TQSize::boundedTo ( const TQSize & otherSize ) const
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Returns a size with the minimum width and height of this size and
-otherSize.
-
-
                                                    TQSize TQSize::expandedTo ( const TQSize & otherSize ) const
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Returns a size with the maximum width and height of this size and
-otherSize.
-
-
                                                    Examples: customlayout/card.cpp and customlayout/flow.cpp.
-
                                                    int TQSize::height () const
-
                                                    
-
-Returns the height.
-
                                                    See also width().
-
-
                                                    Examples: movies/main.cpp, qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp, and qfd/qfd.cpp.
-
                                                    bool TQSize::isEmpty () const
-
                                                    
-
-Returns TRUE if the width is less than or equal to 0, or the height is
-less than or equal to 0; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                    bool TQSize::isNull () const
-
                                                    
-
-Returns TRUE if the width is 0 and the height is 0; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                    bool TQSize::isValid () const
-
                                                    
-
-Returns TRUE if the width is equal to or greater than 0 and the height is
-equal to or greater than 0; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                    TQSize & TQSize::operator*= ( int c )
-
                                                    
-
-Multiplies both the width and height by c and returns a reference to
-the size.
-
-
                                                    TQSize & TQSize::operator*= ( double c )
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     Multiplies both the width and height by c and returns a reference to
-the size.
-
                                                     Note that the result is truncated.
-
-
                                                    TQSize & TQSize::operator+= ( const TQSize & s )
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Adds s to the size and returns a reference to this size.
-
                                                     Example:
-
                                                    -    TQSize s(  3, 7 );
-    TQSize r( -1, 4 );
-    s += r;                     // s becomes (2,11)
-
                                                    
- 
-
-
                                                    TQSize & TQSize::operator-= ( const TQSize & s )
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Subtracts s from the size and returns a reference to this size.
-
                                                     Example:
-
                                                    -    TQSize s(  3, 7 );
-    TQSize r( -1, 4 );
-    s -= r;                     // s becomes (4,3)
-  
                                                    
- 
-
-
                                                    TQSize & TQSize::operator/= ( int c )
-
                                                    
-
-Divides both the width and height by c and returns a reference to the
-size.
-
-
                                                    TQSize & TQSize::operator/= ( double c )
-
                                                    
-
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     Divides both the width and height by c and returns a reference to the
-size.
-
                                                     Note that the result is truncated.
-
-
                                                    TQCOORD & TQSize::rheight ()
-
                                                    
-
-Returns a reference to the height.
-
                                                     Using a reference makes it possible to directly manipulate the height.
-
                                                     Example:
-
                                                    -    TQSize s( 100, 10 );
-    s.rheight() += 5;           // s becomes (100,15)
-  
                                                    
- 
-
                                                     
                                                    See also rwidth().
-
-
                                                    TQCOORD & TQSize::rwidth ()
-
                                                    
-
-Returns a reference to the width.
-
                                                     Using a reference makes it possible to directly manipulate the width.
-
                                                     Example:
-
                                                    -    TQSize s( 100, 10 );
-    s.rwidth() += 20;           // s becomes (120,10)
-  
                                                    
- 
-
                                                     
                                                    See also rheight().
-
-
                                                    void TQSize::scale ( int w, int h, ScaleMode mode )
-
                                                    
-Scales the size to a rectangle of width w and height h according
-to the ScaleMode mode.
-
                                                     
                                                      
-
                                                    •  If mode is ScaleFree, the size is set to (w, h).
-
                                                    •  If mode is ScaleMin, the current size is scaled to a rectangle
-as large as possible inside (w, h), preserving the aspect ratio.
-
                                                    •  If mode is ScaleMax, the current size is scaled to a rectangle
-as small as possible outside (w, h), preserving the aspect ratio.
-
                                                    
-
                                                     Example:
-
                                                    -    TQSize t1( 10, 12 );
-    t1.scale( 60, 60, TQSize::ScaleFree );
-    // t1 is (60, 60)
-
-    TQSize t2( 10, 12 );
-    t2.scale( 60, 60, TQSize::ScaleMin );
-    // t2 is (50, 60)
-
-    TQSize t3( 10, 12 );
-    t3.scale( 60, 60, TQSize::ScaleMax );
-    // t3 is (60, 72)
-    
                                                    
- 
-
-
                                                    void TQSize::scale ( const TQSize & s, ScaleMode mode )
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     Equivalent to scale(s.width(), s.height(), mode).
-
-
                                                    void TQSize::setHeight ( int h )
-
                                                    
-
-Sets the height to h.
-
                                                    See also height() and setWidth().
-
-
                                                    void TQSize::setWidth ( int w )
-
                                                    
-
-Sets the width to w.
-
                                                    See also width() and setHeight().
-
-
                                                    void TQSize::transpose ()
-
                                                    
-Swaps the values of width and height.
-
-
                                                    int TQSize::width () const
-
                                                    
-
-Returns the width.
-
                                                    See also height().
-
-
                                                    Examples: movies/main.cpp, qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp, and qfd/qfd.cpp.
-
                                                    Related Functions
                                                    
-
                                                    bool operator!= ( const TQSize & s1, const TQSize & s2 )
-
                                                    
-
-
-Returns TRUE if s1 and s2 are different; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                    const TQSize operator* ( const TQSize & s, int c )
-
                                                    
-
-
-Multiplies s by c and returns the result.
-
-
                                                    const TQSize operator* ( int c, const TQSize & s )
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     
-Multiplies s by c and returns the result.
-
-
                                                    const TQSize operator* ( const TQSize & s, double c )
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     
-Multiplies s by c and returns the result.
-
-
                                                    const TQSize operator* ( double c, const TQSize & s )
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     
-Multiplies s by c and returns the result.
-
-
                                                    const TQSize operator+ ( const TQSize & s1, const TQSize & s2 )
-
                                                    
-
-
-Returns the sum of s1 and s2; each component is added separately.
-
-
                                                    const TQSize operator- ( const TQSize & s1, const TQSize & s2 )
-
                                                    
-
-
-Returns s2 subtracted from s1; each component is
-subtracted separately.
-
-
                                                    const TQSize operator/ ( const TQSize & s, int c )
-
                                                    
-
-
-Divides s by c and returns the result.
-
-
                                                    const TQSize operator/ ( const TQSize & s, double c )
-
                                                    
-
-
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     Divides s by c and returns the result.
-
                                                     Note that the result is truncated.
-
-
                                                    TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQSize & sz )
-
                                                    
-
-Writes the size sz to the stream s and returns a reference to
-the stream.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
                                                    bool operator== ( const TQSize & s1, const TQSize & s2 )
-
                                                    
-
-
-Returns TRUE if s1 and s2 are equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                    TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQSize & sz )
-
                                                    
-
-Reads the size from the stream s into size sz and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
-
                                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                                    
-
                                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsizegrip-h.html b/doc/html/qsizegrip-h.html
index 9a44d0f0d..8b52e351e 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsizegrip-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsizegrip-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsizegrip.h Include File
+ntqsizegrip.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                    TQSizeGrip Class Reference
                                                    
-
-
                                                    The TQSizeGrip class provides a corner-grip for resizing a top-level window.
-More...
-
                                                    #include <qsizegrip.h>
-
                                                    Inherits TQWidget.
-
                                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                                    Public Members
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Protected Members
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Detailed Description
                                                    
-
-
-
                                                     The TQSizeGrip class provides a corner-grip for resizing a top-level window.
-
                                                     
-
-
-
                                                     This widget works like the standard Windows resize handle. In the
-X11 version this resize handle generally works differently from
-the one provided by the system; we hope to reduce this difference
-in the future.
-
                                                     Put this widget anywhere in a widget tree and the user can use it
-to resize the top-level window. Generally, this should be in the
-lower right-hand corner. Note that TQStatusBar already uses this
-widget, so if you have a status bar (e.g. you are using
-TQMainWindow), then you don't need to use this widget explicitly.
-
                                                      
-
                                                     
                                                    See also TQStatusBar, Widget Appearance and Style, Main Window and Related Classes, and Basic Widgets.
-
-
                                                    Member Function Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSizeGrip::TQSizeGrip ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                    
-Constructs a resize corner called name, as a child widget of parent.
-
-
                                                    TQSizeGrip::~TQSizeGrip ()
-
                                                    
-Destroys the size grip.
-
-
                                                    void TQSizeGrip::mouseMoveEvent ( TQMouseEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                    
-Resizes the top-level widget containing this widget. The event is
-in e.
-
-
                                                    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
-
                                                    void TQSizeGrip::mousePressEvent ( TQMouseEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                    
-Primes the resize operation. The event is in e.
-
-
                                                    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
-
                                                    void TQSizeGrip::paintEvent ( TQPaintEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                    
-Paints the resize grip. Resize grips are usually rendered as small
-diagonal textured lines in the lower-right corner. The event is in
-e.
-
-
                                                    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
-
                                                    TQSize TQSizeGrip::sizeHint () const [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Returns the size grip's size hint; this is a small size.
-
-
                                                    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
-
-
                                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                                    
-
                                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsizepolicy-h.html b/doc/html/qsizepolicy-h.html
index 7110f27c3..6298cde47 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsizepolicy-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsizepolicy-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsizepolicy.h Include File
+ntqsizepolicy.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                    TQSizePolicy Class Reference
                                                    
-
-
                                                    The TQSizePolicy class is a layout attribute describing horizontal
-and vertical resizing policy.
-More...
-
                                                    #include <qsizepolicy.h>
-
                                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                                    Public Members
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Detailed Description
                                                    
-
-
-The TQSizePolicy class is a layout attribute describing horizontal
-and vertical resizing policy.
-
                                                     
-
-
                                                     The size policy of a widget is an expression of its willingness to
-be resized in various ways.
-
                                                     Widgets that reimplement TQWidget::sizePolicy() return a TQSizePolicy
-that describes the horizontal and vertical resizing policy they
-prefer when being laid out. Only one of the
-    constructors is of interest in most applications.
-
                                                     TQSizePolicy contains two independent SizeType objects; one describes
-the widgets's horizontal size policy, and the other describes its
-vertical size policy. It also contains a flag to indicate whether the
-height and width of its preferred size are related.
-
                                                     The horizontal and vertical SizeTypes are set in the usual constructor
-and can be queried using a variety of functions.
-
                                                     The hasHeightForWidth() flag indicates whether the widget's sizeHint()
-is width-dependent (such as a word-wrapping label) or not.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also TQSizePolicy::SizeType, Widget Appearance and Style, and Layout Management.
-
-
                                                    Member Type Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSizePolicy::ExpandData
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This enum type describes in which directions a widget can make use
-of extra space. There are four possible values:
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • TQSizePolicy::NoDirection - the widget cannot make use of extra space in
-any direction.
-
                                                    • TQSizePolicy::Horizontally - the widget can usefully be wider than the
-sizeHint().
-
                                                    • TQSizePolicy::Vertically - the widget can usefully be taller than the
-sizeHint().
-
                                                    • TQSizePolicy::BothDirections - the widget can usefully be both wider and
-taller than the sizeHint().
-
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSizePolicy::SizeType
                                                    
-
-
                                                     The per-dimension sizing types used when constructing a
-TQSizePolicy are:
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • TQSizePolicy::Fixed - The TQWidget::sizeHint() is the only acceptable
-alternative, so the widget can never grow or shrink (e.g. the
-vertical direction of a push button).
-
                                                    • TQSizePolicy::Minimum - The sizeHint() is minimal, and sufficient. The
-widget can be expanded, but there is no advantage to it being
-larger (e.g. the horizontal direction of a push button).
-It cannot be smaller than the size provided by sizeHint().
-
                                                    • TQSizePolicy::Maximum - The sizeHint() is a maximum. The widget can be
-shrunk any amount without detriment if other widgets need the
-space (e.g. a separator line).
-It cannot be larger than the size provided by sizeHint().
-
                                                    • TQSizePolicy::Preferred - The sizeHint() is best, but the widget can be
-shrunk and still be useful. The widget can be expanded, but there
-is no advantage to it being larger than sizeHint() (the default
-TQWidget policy).
-
                                                    • TQSizePolicy::Expanding - The sizeHint() is a sensible size, but the
-widget can be shrunk and still be useful. The widget can make use
-of extra space, so it should get as much space as possible (e.g.
-the horizontal direction of a slider).
-
                                                    • TQSizePolicy::MinimumExpanding - The sizeHint() is minimal, and sufficient.
-The widget can make use of extra space, so it should get as much
-space as possible (e.g. the horizontal direction of a slider).
-
                                                    • TQSizePolicy::Ignored - the sizeHint() is ignored. The widget will get as
-much space as possible.
-
                                                    
-
                                                    Member Function Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSizePolicy::TQSizePolicy ()
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Constructs a minimally initialized TQSizePolicy.
-
-
                                                    TQSizePolicy::TQSizePolicy ( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, bool hfw = FALSE )
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     
-This is the constructor normally used to return a value in the
-overridden TQWidget::sizePolicy() function of a TQWidget
-subclass.
-
                                                     It constructs a TQSizePolicy with independent horizontal and
-vertical sizing types, hor and ver respectively. These sizing types affect how the widget
-is treated by the layout engine.
-
                                                     If hfw is TRUE, the preferred height of the widget is dependent
-on the width of the widget (for example, a TQLabel with line
-wrapping).
-
                                                     
                                                    See also horData(), verData(), and hasHeightForWidth().
-
-
                                                    TQSizePolicy::TQSizePolicy ( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, uchar horStretch, uchar verStretch, bool hfw = FALSE )
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Constructs a TQSizePolicy with independent horizontal and vertical
-sizing types hor and ver, and stretch factors horStretch
-and verStretch.
-
                                                     If hfw is TRUE, the preferred height of the widget is dependent on the
-width of the widget.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also horStretch() and verStretch().
-
-
                                                    ExpandData TQSizePolicy::expanding () const
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Returns whether this layout can make use of more space than
-sizeHint(). A value of Vertical or Horizontal means that it wants
-to grow in only one dimension, whereas BothDirections means that
-it wants to grow in both dimensions.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also mayShrinkHorizontally(), mayGrowHorizontally(), mayShrinkVertically(), and mayGrowVertically().
-
-
                                                    bool TQSizePolicy::hasHeightForWidth () const
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Returns TRUE if the widget's preferred height depends on its
-width; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setHeightForWidth().
-
-
                                                    SizeType TQSizePolicy::horData () const
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Returns the horizontal component of the size policy.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setHorData(), verData(), and horStretch().
-
-
                                                    uint TQSizePolicy::horStretch () const
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Returns the horizontal stretch factor of the size policy.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setHorStretch() and verStretch().
-
-
                                                    bool TQSizePolicy::mayGrowHorizontally () const
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Returns TRUE if the widget can sensibly be wider than its
-sizeHint(); otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also mayGrowVertically() and mayShrinkHorizontally().
-
-
                                                    bool TQSizePolicy::mayGrowVertically () const
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Returns TRUE if the widget can sensibly be taller than its
-sizeHint(); otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also mayGrowHorizontally() and mayShrinkVertically().
-
-
                                                    bool TQSizePolicy::mayShrinkHorizontally () const
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Returns TRUE if the widget can sensibly be narrower than its
-sizeHint(); otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also mayShrinkVertically() and mayGrowHorizontally().
-
-
                                                    bool TQSizePolicy::mayShrinkVertically () const
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Returns TRUE if the widget can sensibly be shorter than its
-sizeHint(); otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also mayShrinkHorizontally() and mayGrowVertically().
-
-
                                                    bool TQSizePolicy::operator!= ( const TQSizePolicy & s ) const
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Returns TRUE if this policy is different from s; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also operator==().
-
-
                                                    bool TQSizePolicy::operator== ( const TQSizePolicy & s ) const
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Returns TRUE if this policy is equal to s; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also operator!=().
-
-
                                                    void TQSizePolicy::setHeightForWidth ( bool b )
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Sets the hasHeightForWidth() flag to b.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also hasHeightForWidth().
-
-
                                                    void TQSizePolicy::setHorData ( SizeType d )
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Sets the horizontal component of the size policy to size type d.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also horData() and setVerData().
-
-
                                                    void TQSizePolicy::setHorStretch ( uchar sf )
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Sets the horizontal stretch factor of the size policy to sf.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also horStretch() and setVerStretch().
-
-
                                                    void TQSizePolicy::setVerData ( SizeType d )
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Sets the vertical component of the size policy to size type d.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also verData() and setHorData().
-
-
                                                    void TQSizePolicy::setVerStretch ( uchar sf )
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Sets the vertical stretch factor of the size policy to sf.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also verStretch() and setHorStretch().
-
-
                                                    void TQSizePolicy::transpose ()
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Swaps the horizontal and vertical policies and stretches.
-
-
                                                    SizeType TQSizePolicy::verData () const
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Returns the vertical component of the size policy.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setVerData(), horData(), and verStretch().
-
-
                                                    uint TQSizePolicy::verStretch () const
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Returns the vertical stretch factor of the size policy.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setVerStretch() and horStretch().
-
-
-
                                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                                    
-
                                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsjiscodec-h.html b/doc/html/qsjiscodec-h.html
index d669b1f93..9bce4468b 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsjiscodec-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsjiscodec-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsjiscodec.h Include File
+ntqsjiscodec.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                    TQSjisCodec Class Reference
                                                    
-
-
                                                    The TQSjisCodec class provides conversion to and from Shift-JIS.
-More...
-
                                                    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
                                                    
-
                                                    #include <qsjiscodec.h>
-
                                                    Inherits TQTextCodec.
-
                                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                                    Public Members
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Detailed Description
                                                    
- 
-
-
-The TQSjisCodec class provides conversion to and from Shift-JIS.
-
                                                     More precisely, the TQSjisCodec class subclasses TQTextCodec to
-provide support for Shift-JIS, an encoding of JIS X 0201 Latin, JIS
-X 0201 Kana or JIS X 0208.
-
                                                     The environment variable UNICODEMAP_JP can be used to fine-tune
-TQJisCodec, TQSjisCodec and TQEucJpCodec. The TQJisCodec
-documentation describes how to use this variable.
-
                                                     Most of the code here was written by Serika Kurusugawa,
-a.k.a. Junji Takagi, and is included in TQt with the author's
-permission and the grateful thanks of the Trolltech team.
-Here is the copyright statement for the code as it was at the
-point of contribution. Trolltech's subsequent modifications
-are covered by the usual copyright for TQt.
-
                                                     
-
                                                     Copyright (C) 1999 Serika Kurusugawa. All rights reserved.
-
                                                     Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-are met:
-
                                                      
-
                                                    1.  Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-
                                                    2.  Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-
                                                    
-
                                                     THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS".
-ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSETQUENTIAL
-DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-SUCH DAMAGE.
-
                                                    See also Internationalization with TQt.
-
-
                                                    Member Function Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSjisCodec::TQSjisCodec ()
-
                                                    
-Creates a Shift-JIS codec. Note that this is done automatically by
-the TQApplication, you do not need construct your own.
-
-
                                                    TQSjisCodec::~TQSjisCodec ()
-
                                                    
-Destroys the Shift-JIS codec.
-
-
                                                    const char * TQSjisCodec::mimeName () const [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Returns the codec's mime name.
-
-
                                                    Reimplemented from TQTextCodec.
-
-
                                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                                    
-
                                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qslider-h.html b/doc/html/qslider-h.html
index 7520b1460..e2af29936 100644
--- a/doc/html/qslider-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qslider-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qslider.h Include File
+ntqslider.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                    TQSlider Class Reference
                                                    
-
-
                                                    The TQSlider widget provides a vertical or horizontal slider.
-More...
-
                                                    #include <qslider.h>
-
                                                    Inherits TQWidget and TQRangeControl.
-
                                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                                    Public Members
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Public Slots
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Signals
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Important Inherited Members
                                                    
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • void setRange ( int minValue, int maxValue )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    
-
                                                    Properties
                                                    
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • int lineStep - the current line step
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • int maxValue - the current maximum value of the slider
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • int minValue - the current minimum value of the slider
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • Orientation orientation - the slider's orientation
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • int pageStep - the current page step
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • int tickInterval - the interval between tickmarks
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TickSetting tickmarks - the tickmark settings for this slider
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • bool tracking - whether slider tracking is enabled
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • int value - the current slider value
                                                      • 
-
                                                    
-
                                                    Protected Members
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Detailed Description
                                                    
-
-
-The TQSlider widget provides a vertical or horizontal slider.
-
                                                     
-
-
                                                     The slider is the classic widget for controlling a bounded value.
-It lets the user move a slider along a horizontal or vertical
-groove and translates the slider's position into an integer value
-within the legal range.
-
                                                     TQSlider inherits TQRangeControl, which provides the "integer" side
-of the slider. setRange() and value() are likely to be used by
-practically all slider users; see the TQRangeControl
-documentation for information about the many other functions that
-class provides.
-
                                                     The main functions offered by the slider itself are tickmark and
-orientation control; you can use setTickmarks() to indicate where
-you want the tickmarks to be, setTickInterval() to indicate how
-many of them you want and setOrientation() to indicate whether the
-slider is to be horizontal or vertical.
-
                                                     A slider accepts focus on Tab and uses the mouse wheel and a
-suitable keyboard interface.
-
                                                      
-
                                                     
-
                                                     
                                                    See also TQScrollBar, TQSpinBox, GUI Design Handbook: Slider, and Basic Widgets.
-
-
                                                    Member Type Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSlider::TickSetting
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This enum specifies where the tickmarks are to be drawn relative
-to the slider's groove and the handle the user moves.
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • TQSlider::NoMarks - do not draw any tickmarks.
-
                                                    • TQSlider::Both - draw tickmarks on both sides of the groove.
-
                                                    • TQSlider::Above - draw tickmarks above the (horizontal) slider
-
                                                    • TQSlider::Below - draw tickmarks below the (horizontal) slider
-
                                                    • TQSlider::Left - draw tickmarks to the left of the (vertical) slider
-
                                                    • TQSlider::Right - draw tickmarks to the right of the (vertical) slider
-
                                                    
-
                                                    Member Function Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSlider::TQSlider ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                    
-Constructs a vertical slider.
-
                                                     The parent and name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
-
                                                    TQSlider::TQSlider ( Orientation orientation, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                    
-Constructs a slider.
-
                                                     The orientation must be TQt::Vertical or TQt::Horizontal.
-
                                                     The parent and name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
-
                                                    TQSlider::TQSlider ( int minValue, int maxValue, int pageStep, int value, Orientation orientation, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                    
-Constructs a slider whose value can never be smaller than minValue or greater than maxValue, whose page step size is pageStep and whose value is initially value (which is
-guaranteed to be in range using bound()).
-
                                                     If orientation is TQt::Vertical the slider is vertical and if it
-is TQt::Horizontal the slider is horizontal.
-
                                                     The parent and name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
-
                                                    TQSlider::~TQSlider ()
-
                                                    
-Destructor.
-
-
                                                    void TQSlider::addStep () [slot]
-
                                                    
-Moves the slider one pageStep() up or right.
-
-
                                                    int TQSlider::lineStep () const
-
                                                    Returns the current line step.
-See the "lineStep" property for details.
-
                                                    int TQSlider::maxValue () const
-
                                                    Returns the current maximum value of the slider.
-See the "maxValue" property for details.
-
                                                    int TQSlider::minValue () const
-
                                                    Returns the current minimum value of the slider.
-See the "minValue" property for details.
-
                                                    Orientation TQSlider::orientation () const
-
                                                    Returns the slider's orientation.
-See the "orientation" property for details.
-
                                                    int TQSlider::pageStep () const
-
                                                    Returns the current page step.
-See the "pageStep" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSlider::rangeChange () [virtual protected]
-
                                                    
-Implements the virtual TQRangeControl function.
-
-
                                                    Reimplemented from TQRangeControl.
-
                                                    void TQSlider::setLineStep ( int )
-
                                                    Sets the current line step.
-See the "lineStep" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSlider::setMaxValue ( int )
-
                                                    Sets the current maximum value of the slider.
-See the "maxValue" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSlider::setMinValue ( int )
-
                                                    Sets the current minimum value of the slider.
-See the "minValue" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSlider::setOrientation ( Orientation ) [virtual]
-
                                                    Sets the slider's orientation.
-See the "orientation" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSlider::setPageStep ( int )
-
                                                    Sets the current page step.
-See the "pageStep" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSlider::setPalette ( const TQPalette & p ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Reimplements the virtual function TQWidget::setPalette().
-
                                                     Sets the background color to the mid color for Motif style sliders
-using palette p.
-
-
                                                    Reimplemented from TQWidget.
-
                                                    void TQRangeControl::setRange ( int minValue, int maxValue )
-
                                                    
-Sets the range control's minimum value to minValue and its
-maximum value to maxValue.
-
                                                     Calls the virtual rangeChange() function if one or both of the new
-minimum and maximum values are different from the previous
-setting. Calls the virtual valueChange() function if the current
-value is adjusted because it was outside the new range.
-
                                                     If maxValue is smaller than minValue, minValue becomes
-the only legal value.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also minValue and maxValue.
-
-
                                                    Examples: listbox/listbox.cpp, t12/lcdrange.cpp, t5/main.cpp, t6/main.cpp, t8/lcdrange.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                                                    void TQSlider::setTickInterval ( int ) [virtual]
-
                                                    Sets the interval between tickmarks.
-See the "tickInterval" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSlider::setTickmarks ( TickSetting ) [virtual]
-
                                                    Sets the tickmark settings for this slider.
-See the "tickmarks" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSlider::setTracking ( bool enable ) [virtual]
-
                                                    Sets whether slider tracking is enabled to enable.
-See the "tracking" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSlider::setValue ( int ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                    Sets the current slider value.
-See the "value" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSlider::sliderMoved ( int value ) [signal]
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This signal is emitted when the slider is dragged, with the new
-slider value as its argument.
-
-
                                                    void TQSlider::sliderPressed () [signal]
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This signal is emitted when the user presses the slider with the
-mouse.
-
-
                                                    TQRect TQSlider::sliderRect () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the slider handle rectangle. (This is the visual marker
-that the user can move.)
-
-
                                                    void TQSlider::sliderReleased () [signal]
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This signal is emitted when the user releases the slider with the mouse.
-
-
                                                    int TQSlider::sliderStart () const
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Returns the start position of the slider.
-
-
                                                    void TQSlider::subtractStep () [slot]
-
                                                    
-Moves the slider one pageStep() down or left.
-
-
                                                    int TQSlider::tickInterval () const
-
                                                    Returns the interval between tickmarks.
-See the "tickInterval" property for details.
-
                                                    TickSetting TQSlider::tickmarks () const
-
                                                    Returns the tickmark settings for this slider.
-See the "tickmarks" property for details.
-
                                                    bool TQSlider::tracking () const
-
                                                    Returns TRUE if slider tracking is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "tracking" property for details.
-
                                                    int TQSlider::value () const
-
                                                    Returns the current slider value.
-See the "value" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSlider::valueChange () [virtual protected]
-
                                                    
-Implements the virtual TQRangeControl function.
-
-
                                                    Reimplemented from TQRangeControl.
-
                                                    void TQSlider::valueChanged ( int value ) [signal]
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This signal is emitted when the slider value is changed, with the
-new slider value as its argument.
-
-
                                                    Examples: rangecontrols/rangecontrols.cpp, simple/main.cpp, t12/lcdrange.cpp, t5/main.cpp, t6/main.cpp, t7/lcdrange.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                                                    Property Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    int lineStep
                                                    
-
                                                    This property holds the current line step.
-
                                                    When setting lineStep, the virtual stepChange() function will be
-called if the new line step is different from the previous
-setting.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setSteps(), TQRangeControl::pageStep(), and setRange().
-
-
                                                    Set this property's value with setLineStep() and get this property's value with lineStep().
-
                                                    int maxValue
                                                    
-
                                                    This property holds the current maximum value of the slider.
-
                                                    When setting this property, the TQSlider::minValue is adjusted,
-if necessary, to ensure that the range remains valid.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setRange().
-
-
                                                    Set this property's value with setMaxValue() and get this property's value with maxValue().
-
                                                    int minValue
                                                    
-
                                                    This property holds the current minimum value of the slider.
-
                                                    When setting this property, the TQSlider::maxValue is adjusted,
-if necessary, to ensure that the range remains valid.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setRange().
-
-
                                                    Set this property's value with setMinValue() and get this property's value with minValue().
-
                                                    Orientation orientation
                                                    
-
                                                    This property holds the slider's orientation.
-
                                                    The orientation must be TQt::Vertical (the default) or TQt::Horizontal.
-
-
                                                    Set this property's value with setOrientation() and get this property's value with orientation().
-
                                                    int pageStep
                                                    
-
                                                    This property holds the current page step.
-
                                                    When setting pageStep, the virtual stepChange() function will be
-called if the new page step is different from the previous
-setting.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also TQRangeControl::setSteps(), lineStep, and setRange().
-
-
                                                    Set this property's value with setPageStep() and get this property's value with pageStep().
-
                                                    int tickInterval
                                                    
-
                                                    This property holds the interval between tickmarks.
-
                                                    This is a value interval, not a pixel interval. If it is 0, the
-slider will choose between lineStep() and pageStep(). The initial
-value of tickInterval is 0.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also TQRangeControl::lineStep() and TQRangeControl::pageStep().
-
-
                                                    Set this property's value with setTickInterval() and get this property's value with tickInterval().
-
                                                    TickSetting tickmarks
                                                    
-
                                                    This property holds the tickmark settings for this slider.
-
                                                    The valid values are in TQSlider::TickSetting. The default is
-NoMarks.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also tickInterval.
-
-
                                                    Set this property's value with setTickmarks() and get this property's value with tickmarks().
-
                                                    bool tracking
                                                    
-
                                                    This property holds whether slider tracking is enabled.
-
                                                    If tracking is enabled (the default), the slider emits the
-valueChanged() signal whenever the slider is being dragged. If
-tracking is disabled, the slider emits the valueChanged() signal
-when the user releases the mouse button (unless the value happens
-to be the same as before).
-
-
                                                    Set this property's value with setTracking() and get this property's value with tracking().
-
                                                    int value
                                                    
-
                                                    This property holds the current slider value.
-
                                                    Set this property's value with setValue() and get this property's value with value().
-
                                                    See also TQRangeControl::value() and prevValue().
-
-
-
                                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                                    
-
                                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsocket-h.html b/doc/html/qsocket-h.html
index cfe9a6830..a27e3d597 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsocket-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsocket-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsocket.h Include File
+ntqsocket.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                    TQSocket Class Reference
                                                    [network module]
                                                    
-
-
                                                    The TQSocket class provides a buffered TCP connection.
-More...
-
                                                    #include <qsocket.h>
-
                                                    Inherits TQObject and TQIODevice.
-
                                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                                    Public Members
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Signals
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Detailed Description
                                                    
-
-
-The TQSocket class provides a buffered TCP connection.
-
-
                                                     
-
-
                                                     It provides a totally non-blocking TQIODevice, and modifies and
-extends the API of TQIODevice with socket-specific code.
-
                                                     Note that a TQApplication must have been constructed before this
-class can be used.
-
                                                     The functions you're likely to call most are connectToHost(),
-bytesAvailable(), canReadLine() and the ones it inherits from
-TQIODevice.
-
                                                     connectToHost() is the most-used function. As its name implies,
-it opens a connection to a named host.
-
                                                     Most network protocols are either packet-oriented or
-line-oriented. canReadLine() indicates whether a connection
-contains an entire unread line or not, and bytesAvailable()
-returns the number of bytes available for reading.
-
                                                     The signals error(), connected(), readyRead() and
-connectionClosed() inform you of the progress of the connection.
-There are also some less commonly used signals. hostFound() is
-emitted when connectToHost() has finished its DNS lookup and is
-starting its TCP connection. delayedCloseFinished() is emitted
-when close() succeeds. bytesWritten() is emitted when TQSocket
-moves data from its "to be written" queue into the TCP
-implementation.
-
                                                     There are several access functions for the socket: state() returns
-whether the object is idle, is doing a DNS lookup, is connecting,
-has an operational connection, etc. address() and port() return
-the IP address and port used for the connection. The peerAddress()
-and peerPort() functions return the IP address and port used by
-the peer, and peerName() returns the name of the peer (normally
-the name that was passed to connectToHost()). socketDevice()
-returns a pointer to the TQSocketDevice used for this socket.
-
                                                     TQSocket inherits TQIODevice, and reimplements some functions. In
-general, you can treat it as a TQIODevice for writing, and mostly
-also for reading. The match isn't perfect, since the TQIODevice
-API is designed for devices that are controlled by the same
-machine, and an asynchronous peer-to-peer network connection isn't
-quite like that. For example, there is nothing that matches
-TQIODevice::size() exactly. The documentation for open(), close(),
-flush(), size(), at(), atEnd(), readBlock(), writeBlock(),
-getch(), putch(), ungetch() and readLine() describes the
-differences in detail.
-
                                                     Warning: TQSocket is not suitable for use in threads. If you need
-to uses sockets in threads use the lower-level TQSocketDevice class.
-
                                                     Warning: Because TQt doesn't use the native socketstream
-implementation on Mac OS X, TQSocket has an implicit transfer
-latency of 100ms. You can achieve lower latency on Mac OS X by
-using TQSocketDevice instead.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also TQSocketDevice, TQHostAddress, TQSocketNotifier, and Input/Output and Networking.
-
-
                                                    Member Type Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSocket::Error
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This enum specifies the possible errors:
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • TQSocket::ErrConnectionRefused - if the connection was refused
-
                                                    • TQSocket::ErrHostNotFound - if the host was not found
-
                                                    • TQSocket::ErrSocketRead - if a read from the socket failed
-
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSocket::State
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This enum defines the connection states:
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • TQSocket::Idle - if there is no connection
-
                                                    • TQSocket::HostLookup - during a DNS lookup
-
                                                    • TQSocket::Connecting - during TCP connection establishment
-
                                                    • TQSocket::Connected - when there is an operational connection
-
                                                    • TQSocket::Closing - if the socket is closing down, but is not yet closed.
-
                                                    
-
                                                    Member Function Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSocket::TQSocket ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                    
-Creates a TQSocket object in TQSocket::Idle state.
-
                                                     The parent and name arguments are passed on to the TQObject
-constructor.
-
                                                     Note that a TQApplication must have been constructed before sockets
-can be used.
-
-
                                                    TQSocket::~TQSocket () [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Destroys the socket. Closes the connection if necessary.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also close().
-
-
                                                    TQHostAddress TQSocket::address () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the host address of this socket. (This is normally the
-main IP address of the host, but can be e.g. 127.0.0.1 for
-connections to localhost.)
-
-
                                                    Offset TQSocket::at () const [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Returns the current read index. Since TQSocket is a sequential
-device, the current read index is always zero.
-
-
                                                    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
-
                                                    bool TQSocket::at ( Offset index ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     Moves the read index forward to index and returns TRUE if the
-operation was successful; otherwise returns FALSE. Moving the
-index forward means skipping incoming data.
-
-
                                                    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
-
                                                    bool TQSocket::atEnd () const [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Returns TRUE if there is no more data to read; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
-
                                                    Q_ULONG TQSocket::bytesAvailable () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the number of incoming bytes that can be read, i.e. the
-size of the input buffer. Equivalent to size().
-
                                                     This function can trigger the readyRead() signal, if more data has
-arrived on the socket.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also bytesToWrite().
-
-
                                                    Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                                    Q_ULONG TQSocket::bytesToWrite () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the number of bytes that are waiting to be written, i.e.
-the size of the output buffer.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also bytesAvailable() and clearPendingData().
-
-
                                                    void TQSocket::bytesWritten ( int nbytes ) [signal]
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This signal is emitted when data has been written to the network.
-The nbytes parameter specifies how many bytes were written.
-
                                                     The bytesToWrite() function is often used in the same context; it
-indicates how many buffered bytes there are left to write.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also writeBlock() and bytesToWrite().
-
-
                                                    bool TQSocket::canReadLine () const
-
                                                    
-Returns TRUE if it's possible to read an entire line of text from
-this socket at this time; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                     Note that if the peer closes the connection unexpectedly, this
-function returns FALSE. This means that loops such as this won't
-work:
-
                                                     
                                                    -        while( !socket->canReadLine() ) // WRONG
-            ;
-    
                                                    
- 
-
                                                     
                                                    See also readLine().
-
-
                                                    Examples: network/clientserver/client/client.cpp, network/httpd/httpd.cpp, network/mail/smtp.cpp, and network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                                    void TQSocket::clearPendingData ()
-
                                                    
-Deletes the data that is waiting to be written. This is useful if you want
-to close the socket without waiting for all the data to be written.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also bytesToWrite(), close(), and delayedCloseFinished().
-
-
                                                    void TQSocket::close () [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Closes the socket.
-
                                                     The read buffer is cleared.
-
                                                     If the output buffer is empty, the state is set to TQSocket::Idle and the connection is terminated immediately. If the
-output buffer still contains data to be written, TQSocket goes into
-the TQSocket::Closing state and the rest of the data will be
-written. When all of the outgoing data have been written, the
-state is set to TQSocket::Idle and the connection is terminated.
-At this point, the delayedCloseFinished() signal is emitted.
-
                                                     If you don't want that the data of the output buffer is written, call
-clearPendingData() before you call close().
-
                                                     
                                                    See also state(), bytesToWrite(), and clearPendingData().
-
-
                                                    Examples: network/clientserver/client/client.cpp, network/httpd/httpd.cpp, and network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                                    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
-
                                                    void TQSocket::connectToHost ( const TQString & host, Q_UINT16 port ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Attempts to make a connection to host on the specified port
-and return immediately.
-
                                                     Any connection or pending connection is closed immediately, and
-TQSocket goes into the HostLookup state. When the lookup
-succeeds, it emits hostFound(), starts a TCP connection and goes
-into the Connecting state. Finally, when the connection
-succeeds, it emits connected() and goes into the Connected
-state. If there is an error at any point, it emits error().
-
                                                     host may be an IP address in string form, or it may be a DNS
-name. TQSocket will do a normal DNS lookup if required. Note that
-port is in native byte order, unlike some other libraries.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also state().
-
-
                                                    Examples: network/clientserver/client/client.cpp, network/mail/smtp.cpp, and network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                                    void TQSocket::connected () [signal]
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This signal is emitted after connectToHost() has been called and a
-connection has been successfully established.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also connectToHost() and connectionClosed().
-
-
                                                    Examples: network/clientserver/client/client.cpp, network/mail/smtp.cpp, and network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                                    void TQSocket::connectionClosed () [signal]
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This signal is emitted when the other end has closed the
-connection. The read buffers may contain buffered input data which
-you can read after the connection was closed.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also connectToHost() and close().
-
-
                                                    Examples: network/clientserver/client/client.cpp, network/clientserver/server/server.cpp, and network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                                    void TQSocket::delayedCloseFinished () [signal]
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This signal is emitted when a delayed close is finished.
-
                                                     If you call close() and there is buffered output data to be
-written, TQSocket goes into the TQSocket::Closing state and
-returns immediately. It will then keep writing to the socket until
-all the data has been written. Then, the delayedCloseFinished()
-signal is emitted.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also close().
-
-
                                                    Examples: network/clientserver/client/client.cpp and network/httpd/httpd.cpp.
-
                                                    void TQSocket::error ( int ) [signal]
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This signal is emitted after an error occurred. The parameter is
-the Error value.
-
-
                                                    Examples: network/clientserver/client/client.cpp and network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                                    void TQSocket::flush () [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Implementation of the abstract virtual TQIODevice::flush() function.
-
-
                                                    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
-
                                                    int TQSocket::getch () [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Reads a single byte/character from the internal read buffer.
-Returns the byte/character read, or -1 if there is nothing to be
-read.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also bytesAvailable() and putch().
-
-
                                                    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
-
                                                    void TQSocket::hostFound () [signal]
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This signal is emitted after connectToHost() has been called and
-the host lookup has succeeded.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also connected().
-
-
                                                    Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                                    bool TQSocket::open ( int m ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Opens the socket using the specified TQIODevice file mode m.
-This function is called automatically when needed and you should
-not call it yourself.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also close().
-
-
                                                    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
-
                                                    TQHostAddress TQSocket::peerAddress () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the address of the connected peer if the socket is in
-Connected state; otherwise an empty TQHostAddress is returned.
-
-
                                                    TQString TQSocket::peerName () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the host name as specified to the connectToHost()
-function. An empty string is returned if none has been set.
-
-
                                                    Example: network/mail/smtp.cpp.
-
                                                    Q_UINT16 TQSocket::peerPort () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the peer's host port number, normally as specified to the
-connectToHost() function. If none has been set, this function
-returns 0.
-
                                                     Note that TQt always uses native byte order, i.e. 67 is 67 in TQt;
-there is no need to call htons().
-
-
                                                    Q_UINT16 TQSocket::port () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the host port number of this socket, in native byte order.
-
-
                                                    int TQSocket::putch ( int ch ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Writes the character ch to the output buffer.
-
                                                     Returns ch, or -1 if an error occurred.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also getch().
-
-
                                                    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
-
                                                    Q_LONG TQSocket::readBlock ( char * data, Q_ULONG maxlen ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Reads maxlen bytes from the socket into data and returns the
-number of bytes read. Returns -1 if an error occurred.
-
-
                                                    Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                                    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
-
                                                    Q_ULONG TQSocket::readBufferSize () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the size of the read buffer.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setReadBufferSize().
-
-
                                                    TQString TQSocket::readLine () [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Returns a line of text including a terminating newline character
-(\n). Returns "" if canReadLine() returns FALSE.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also canReadLine().
-
-
                                                    Examples: network/clientserver/client/client.cpp, network/httpd/httpd.cpp, network/mail/smtp.cpp, and network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                                    void TQSocket::readyRead () [signal]
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This signal is emitted every time there is new incoming data.
-
                                                     Bear in mind that new incoming data is only reported once; if you do not
-read all the data, this class buffers the data and you can read it later,
-but no signal is emitted unless new data arrives. A good practice is to
-read all data in the slot connected to this signal unless you are sure that
-you need to receive more data to be able to process it.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also readBlock(), readLine(), and bytesAvailable().
-
-
                                                    Examples: network/clientserver/client/client.cpp, network/httpd/httpd.cpp, network/mail/smtp.cpp, and network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                                    void TQSocket::setReadBufferSize ( Q_ULONG bufSize )
-
                                                    
-Sets the size of the TQSocket's internal read buffer to bufSize.
-
                                                     Usually TQSocket reads all data that is available from the operating
-system's socket. If the buffer size is limited to a certain size, this
-means that the TQSocket class doesn't buffer more than this size of data.
-
                                                     If the size of the read buffer is 0, the read buffer is unlimited and all
-incoming data is buffered. This is the default.
-
                                                     If you read the data in the readyRead() signal, you shouldn't use this
-option since it might slow down your program unnecessary. This option is
-useful if you only need to read the data at certain points in time, like in
-a realtime streaming application.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also readBufferSize().
-
-
                                                    void TQSocket::setSocket ( int socket ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Sets the socket to use socket and the state() to Connected.
-The socket must already be connected.
-
                                                     This allows us to use the TQSocket class as a wrapper for other
-socket types (e.g. Unix Domain Sockets).
-
-
                                                    Example: network/httpd/httpd.cpp.
-
                                                    void TQSocket::setSocketDevice ( TQSocketDevice * device ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Sets the internal socket device to device. Passing a device
-of 0 will cause the internal socket device to be used. Any
-existing connection will be disconnected before using the new device.
-
                                                     The new device should not be connected before being associated
-with a TQSocket; after setting the socket call connectToHost() to
-make the connection.
-
                                                     This function is useful if you need to subclass TQSocketDevice and
-want to use the TQSocket API, for example, to implement Unix domain
-sockets.
-
-
                                                    Offset TQSocket::size () const [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Returns the number of incoming bytes that can be read right now
-(like bytesAvailable()).
-
-
                                                    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
-
                                                    int TQSocket::socket () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the socket number, or -1 if there is no socket at the moment.
-
-
                                                    TQSocketDevice * TQSocket::socketDevice ()
-
                                                    
-Returns a pointer to the internal socket device.
-
                                                     There is normally no need to manipulate the socket device directly
-since this class does the necessary setup for most applications.
-
-
                                                    State TQSocket::state () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the current state of the socket connection.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also TQSocket::State.
-
-
                                                    Examples: network/clientserver/client/client.cpp and network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                                    int TQSocket::ungetch ( int ch ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-This implementation of the virtual function TQIODevice::ungetch()
-prepends the character ch to the read buffer so that the next
-read returns this character as the first character of the output.
-
-
                                                    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
-
                                                    Q_ULONG TQSocket::waitForMore ( int msecs, bool * timeout ) const
-
                                                    
-Wait up to msecs milliseconds for more data to be available.
-
                                                     If msecs is -1 the call will block indefinitely.
-
                                                     Returns the number of bytes available.
-
                                                     If timeout is non-null and no error occurred (i.e. it does not
-return -1): this function sets *timeout to TRUE, if the reason
-for returning was that the timeout was reached; otherwise it sets
-*timeout to FALSE. This is useful to find out if the peer
-closed the connection.
-
                                                     Warning: This is a blocking call and should be avoided in event
-driven applications.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also bytesAvailable().
-
-
                                                    Q_ULONG TQSocket::waitForMore ( int msecs ) const
-
                                                     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     
-
                                                    Q_LONG TQSocket::writeBlock ( const char * data, Q_ULONG len ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Writes len bytes to the socket from data and returns the
-number of bytes written. Returns -1 if an error occurred.
-
-
                                                    Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                                    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
-
-
                                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                                    
-
                                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsocketdevice-h.html b/doc/html/qsocketdevice-h.html
index 89cf9fe50..15a85dff6 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsocketdevice-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsocketdevice-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsocketdevice.h Include File
+ntqsocketdevice.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                    TQSocketDevice Class Reference
                                                    [network module]
                                                    
-
-
                                                    The TQSocketDevice class provides a platform-independent low-level socket API.
-More...
-
                                                    #include <qsocketdevice.h>
-
                                                    Inherits TQIODevice.
-
                                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                                    Public Members
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Protected Members
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Detailed Description
                                                    
-
-
-The TQSocketDevice class provides a platform-independent low-level socket API.
-
-
                                                     
-
-
                                                     This class provides a low level API for working with sockets.  Users of
-this class are assumed to have networking experience. For most users the
-TQSocket class provides a much easier and high level alternative, but
-certain things (like UDP) can't be done with TQSocket and if you need a
-platform-independent API for those, TQSocketDevice is the right choice.
-
                                                     The essential purpose of the class is to provide a TQIODevice that
-works on sockets, wrapped in a platform-independent API.
-
                                                     When calling connect() or bind(), TQSocketDevice detects the
-protocol family (IPv4, IPv6) automatically. Passing the protocol
-family to TQSocketDevice's constructor or to setSocket() forces
-creation of a socket device of a specific protocol. If not set, the
-protocol will be detected at the first call to connect() or bind().
-
                                                     
                                                    See also TQSocket, TQSocketNotifier, TQHostAddress, and Input/Output and Networking.
-
-
                                                    Member Type Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSocketDevice::Error
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This enum type describes the error states of TQSocketDevice.
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • TQSocketDevice::NoError - No error has occurred.
-
                                                    • TQSocketDevice::AlreadyBound - The device is already bound, according to bind().
-
                                                    • TQSocketDevice::Inaccessible - The operating system or firewall prohibited
-the action.
-
                                                    • TQSocketDevice::NoResources - The operating system ran out of a resource.
-
                                                    • TQSocketDevice::InternalError - An internal error occurred in TQSocketDevice.
-
                                                    • TQSocketDevice::Impossible - An attempt was made to do something which makes
-no sense. For example:
-
                                                      -    ::close( sd->socket() );
-    sd->writeBlock( someData, 42 );
-    
                                                      
- 
-The libc ::close() closes the socket, but TQSocketDevice is not aware
-of this. So when you call writeBlock(), the impossible happens.
-
                                                    • TQSocketDevice::NoFiles - The operating system will not let TQSocketDevice open
-another file.
-
                                                    • TQSocketDevice::ConnectionRefused - A connection attempt was rejected by the
-peer.
-
                                                    • TQSocketDevice::NetworkFailure - There is a network failure.
-
                                                    • TQSocketDevice::UnknownError - The operating system did something
-unexpected.
-
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSocketDevice::Protocol
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This enum type describes the protocol family of the socket. Possible values
-are:
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • TQSocketDevice::IPv4 - The socket is an IPv4 socket.
-
                                                    • TQSocketDevice::IPv6 - The socket is an IPv6 socket.
-
                                                    • TQSocketDevice::Unknown - The protocol family of the socket is not known. This can
-happen if you use TQSocketDevice with an already existing socket; it
-tries to determine the protocol family, but this can fail if the
-protocol family is not known to TQSocketDevice.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also protocol() and setSocket().
-
-
                                                    TQSocketDevice::Type
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This enum type describes the type of the socket:
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • TQSocketDevice::Stream - a stream socket (TCP, usually)
-
                                                    • TQSocketDevice::Datagram - a datagram socket (UDP, usually)
-
                                                    
-
                                                    Member Function Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSocketDevice::TQSocketDevice ( Type type = Stream )
-
                                                    
-Creates a TQSocketDevice object for a stream or datagram socket.
-
                                                     The type argument must be either TQSocketDevice::Stream for a
-reliable, connection-oriented TCP socket, or TQSocketDevice::Datagram for an unreliable UDP socket.
-
                                                     The socket is created as an IPv4 socket.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also blocking() and protocol().
-
-
                                                    TQSocketDevice::TQSocketDevice ( Type type, Protocol protocol, int dummy )
-
                                                    
-Creates a TQSocketDevice object for a stream or datagram socket.
-
                                                     The type argument must be either TQSocketDevice::Stream for a
-reliable, connection-oriented TCP socket, or TQSocketDevice::Datagram for an unreliable UDP socket.
-
                                                     The protocol indicates whether the socket should be of type IPv4
-or IPv6. Passing Unknown is not meaningful in this context and you
-should avoid using (it creates an IPv4 socket, but your code is not easily
-readable).
-
                                                     The argument dummy is necessary for compatibility with some
-compilers.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also blocking() and protocol().
-
-
                                                    TQSocketDevice::TQSocketDevice ( int socket, Type type )
-
                                                    
-Creates a TQSocketDevice object for the existing socket socket.
-
                                                     The type argument must match the actual socket type; use TQSocketDevice::Stream for a reliable, connection-oriented TCP
-socket, or TQSocketDevice::Datagram for an unreliable,
-connectionless UDP socket.
-
-
                                                    TQSocketDevice::~TQSocketDevice () [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Destroys the socket device and closes the socket if it is open.
-
-
                                                    int TQSocketDevice::accept () [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Extracts the first connection from the queue of pending
-connections for this socket and returns a new socket identifier.
-Returns -1 if the operation failed.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also bind() and listen().
-
-
                                                    TQHostAddress TQSocketDevice::address () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the address of this socket device. This may be 0.0.0.0 for
-a while, but is set to something sensible as soon as a sensible
-value is available.
-
-
                                                    bool TQSocketDevice::addressReusable () const
-
                                                    
-Returns TRUE if the address of this socket can be used by other
-sockets at the same time, and FALSE if this socket claims
-exclusive ownership.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setAddressReusable().
-
-
                                                    bool TQSocketDevice::bind ( const TQHostAddress & address, Q_UINT16 port ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Assigns a name to an unnamed socket. The name is the host address
-address and the port number port. If the operation succeeds,
-bind() returns TRUE; otherwise it returns FALSE without changing
-what port() and address() return.
-
                                                     bind() is used by servers for setting up incoming connections.
-Call bind() before listen().
-
-
                                                    bool TQSocketDevice::blocking () const
-
                                                    
-Returns TRUE if the socket is valid and in blocking mode;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                     Note that this function does not set error().
-
                                                     Warning: On Windows, this function always returns TRUE since the
-ioctlsocket() function is broken.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setBlocking() and isValid().
-
-
                                                    Q_LONG TQSocketDevice::bytesAvailable () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the number of bytes available for reading, or -1 if an
-error occurred.
-
                                                     Warning: On Microsoft Windows, we use the ioctlsocket() function
-to determine the number of bytes queued on the socket. According
-to Microsoft (KB Q125486), ioctlsocket() sometimes returns an
-incorrect number. The only safe way to determine the amount of
-data on the socket is to read it using readBlock(). TQSocket has
-workarounds to deal with this problem.
-
-
                                                    bool TQSocketDevice::connect ( const TQHostAddress & addr, Q_UINT16 port ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Connects to the IP address and port specified by addr and port. Returns TRUE if it establishes a connection; otherwise returns FALSE.
-If it returns FALSE, error() explains why.
-
                                                     Note that error() commonly returns NoError for non-blocking
-sockets; this just means that you can call connect() again in a
-little while and it'll probably succeed.
-
-
                                                    Error TQSocketDevice::error () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the first error seen.
-
-
                                                    bool TQSocketDevice::isValid () const
-
                                                    
-Returns TRUE if this is a valid socket; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also socket().
-
-
                                                    bool TQSocketDevice::listen ( int backlog ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Specifies how many pending connections a server socket can have.
-Returns TRUE if the operation was successful; otherwise returns
-FALSE. A backlog value of 50 is quite common.
-
                                                     The listen() call only applies to sockets where type() is Stream, i.e. not to Datagram sockets. listen() must not be
-called before bind() or after accept().
-
                                                     
                                                    See also bind() and accept().
-
-
                                                    TQHostAddress TQSocketDevice::peerAddress () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the address of the port this socket device is connected
-to. This may be 0.0.0.0 for a while, but is set to something
-sensible as soon as a sensible value is available.
-
                                                     Note that for Datagram sockets, this is the source port of the
-last packet received.
-
-
                                                    Q_UINT16 TQSocketDevice::peerPort () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the port number of the port this socket device is
-connected to. This may be 0 for a while, but is set to something
-sensible as soon as a sensible value is available.
-
                                                     Note that for Datagram sockets, this is the source port of the
-last packet received, and that it is in native byte order.
-
-
                                                    Q_UINT16 TQSocketDevice::port () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the port number of this socket device. This may be 0 for a
-while, but is set to something sensible as soon as a sensible
-value is available.
-
                                                     Note that TQt always uses native byte order, i.e. 67 is 67 in TQt;
-there is no need to call htons().
-
-
                                                    Protocol TQSocketDevice::protocol () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the socket's protocol family, which is one of Unknown, IPv4,
-or IPv6.
-
                                                     TQSocketDevice either creates a socket with a well known protocol family or
-it uses an already existing socket. In the first case, this function
-returns the protocol family it was constructed with. In the second case, it
-tries to determine the protocol family of the socket; if this fails, it
-returns Unknown.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also Protocol and setSocket().
-
-
                                                    Q_LONG TQSocketDevice::readBlock ( char * data, Q_ULONG maxlen ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Reads maxlen bytes from the socket into data and returns the
-number of bytes read. Returns -1 if an error occurred. Returning 0
-is not an error. For Stream sockets, 0 is returned when the remote
-host closes the connection. For Datagram sockets, 0 is a valid
-datagram size.
-
-
                                                    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
-
                                                    int TQSocketDevice::receiveBufferSize () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the size of the operating system receive buffer.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setReceiveBufferSize().
-
-
                                                    int TQSocketDevice::sendBufferSize () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the size of the operating system send buffer.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setSendBufferSize().
-
-
                                                    void TQSocketDevice::setAddressReusable ( bool enable ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Sets the address of this socket to be usable by other sockets too
-if enable is TRUE, and to be used exclusively by this socket if
-enable is FALSE.
-
                                                     When a socket is reusable, other sockets can use the same port
-number (and IP address), which is generally useful. Of course
-other sockets cannot use the same
-(address,port,peer-address,peer-port) 4-tuple as this socket, so
-there is no risk of confusing the two TCP connections.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also addressReusable().
-
-
                                                    void TQSocketDevice::setBlocking ( bool enable ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Makes the socket blocking if enable is TRUE or nonblocking if
-enable is FALSE.
-
                                                     Sockets are blocking by default, but we recommend using
-nonblocking socket operations, especially for GUI programs that
-need to be responsive.
-
                                                     Warning: On Windows, this function should be used with care since
-whenever you use a TQSocketNotifier on Windows, the socket is
-immediately made nonblocking.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also blocking() and isValid().
-
-
                                                    void TQSocketDevice::setError ( Error err ) [protected]
-
                                                    
-Allows subclasses to set the error state to err.
-
-
                                                    void TQSocketDevice::setReceiveBufferSize ( uint size ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Sets the size of the operating system receive buffer to size.
-
                                                     The operating system receive buffer size effectively limits two
-things: how much data can be in transit at any one moment, and how
-much data can be received in one iteration of the main event loop.
-
                                                     The default is operating system-dependent. A socket that receives
-large amounts of data is probably best with a buffer size of
-49152.
-
-
                                                    void TQSocketDevice::setSendBufferSize ( uint size ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Sets the size of the operating system send buffer to size.
-
                                                     The operating system send buffer size effectively limits how much
-data can be in transit at any one moment.
-
                                                     The default is operating system-dependent. A socket that sends
-large amounts of data is probably best with a buffer size of
-49152.
-
-
                                                    void TQSocketDevice::setSocket ( int socket, Type type ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Sets the socket device to operate on the existing socket socket.
-
                                                     The type argument must match the actual socket type; use TQSocketDevice::Stream for a reliable, connection-oriented TCP
-socket, or TQSocketDevice::Datagram for an unreliable,
-connectionless UDP socket.
-
                                                     Any existing socket is closed.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also isValid() and close().
-
-
                                                    int TQSocketDevice::socket () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the socket number, or -1 if it is an invalid socket.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also isValid() and type().
-
-
                                                    Type TQSocketDevice::type () const
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Returns the socket type which is either TQSocketDevice::Stream
-or TQSocketDevice::Datagram.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also socket().
-
-
                                                    Q_LONG TQSocketDevice::waitForMore ( int msecs, bool * timeout = 0 ) const
-
                                                    
-Wait up to msecs milliseconds for more data to be available. If
-msecs is -1 the call will block indefinitely.
-
                                                     Returns the number of bytes available for reading, or -1 if an
-error occurred.
-
                                                     If timeout is non-null and no error occurred (i.e. it does not
-return -1): this function sets *timeout to TRUE, if the reason
-for returning was that the timeout was reached; otherwise it sets
-*timeout to FALSE. This is useful to find out if the peer
-closed the connection.
-
                                                     Warning: This is a blocking call and should be avoided in event
-driven applications.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also bytesAvailable().
-
-
                                                    Q_LONG TQSocketDevice::writeBlock ( const char * data, Q_ULONG len ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Writes len bytes to the socket from data and returns the
-number of bytes written. Returns -1 if an error occurred.
-
                                                     This is used for TQSocketDevice::Stream sockets.
-
-
                                                    Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
-
                                                    Q_LONG TQSocketDevice::writeBlock ( const char * data, Q_ULONG len, const TQHostAddress & host, Q_UINT16 port ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     Writes len bytes to the socket from data and returns the
-number of bytes written. Returns -1 if an error occurred.
-
                                                     This is used for TQSocketDevice::Datagram sockets. You must
-specify the host and port of the destination of the data.
-
-
-
                                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                                    
-
                                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsocketnotifier-h.html b/doc/html/qsocketnotifier-h.html
index ed1130e5a..8a3e1ce20 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsocketnotifier-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsocketnotifier-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsocketnotifier.h Include File
+ntqsocketnotifier.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                    TQSocketNotifier Class Reference
                                                    
-
-
                                                    The TQSocketNotifier class provides support for socket callbacks.
-More...
-
                                                    #include <qsocketnotifier.h>
-
                                                    Inherits TQObject.
-
                                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                                    Public Members
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Signals
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Detailed Description
                                                    
-
-
-The TQSocketNotifier class provides support for socket callbacks.
-
                                                     
-
                                                     This class makes it possible to write asynchronous socket-based
-code in TQt. Using synchronous socket operations blocks the
-program, which is clearly not acceptable for an event-driven GUI
-program.
-
                                                     Once you have opened a non-blocking socket (whether for TCP, UDP,
-a UNIX-domain socket, or any other protocol family your operating
-system supports), you can create a socket notifier to monitor the
-socket. Then you connect the activated() signal to the slot you
-want to be called when a socket event occurs.
-
                                                     Note for Windows users: the socket passed to TQSocketNotifier will
-become non-blocking, even if it was created as a blocking socket.
-
                                                     There are three types of socket notifiers (read, write and
-exception); you must specify one of these in the constructor.
-
                                                     The type specifies when the activated() signal is to be emitted:
-
                                                      
-
                                                    1.  TQSocketNotifier::Read - There is data to be read (socket read event).
-
                                                    2.  TQSocketNotifier::Write - Data can be written (socket write event).
-
                                                    3.  TQSocketNofifier::Exception - An exception has occurred (socket
-exception event). We recommend against using this.
-
                                                    
-
                                                     For example, if you need to monitor both reads and writes for the
-same socket you must create two socket notifiers.
-
                                                     For read notifiers it makes little sense to connect the
-activated() signal to more than one slot because the data can be
-read from the socket only once.
-
                                                     Also observe that if you do not read all the available data when
-the read notifier fires, it fires again and again.
-
                                                     For write notifiers, immediately disable the notifier after the
-activated() signal has been received and you have sent the data to
-be written on the socket. When you have more data to be written,
-enable it again to get a new activated() signal. The exception is
-if the socket data writing operation (send() or equivalent) fails
-with a "would block" error, which means that some buffer is full
-and you must wait before sending more data. In that case you do
-not need to disable and re-enable the write notifier; it will fire
-again as soon as the system allows more data to be sent.
-
                                                     The behavior of a write notifier that is left in enabled state
-after having emitting the first activated() signal (and no "would
-block" error has occurred) is undefined. Depending on the
-operating system, it may fire on every pass of the event loop or
-not at all.
-
                                                     If you need a time-out for your sockets you can use either timer events or the TQTimer class.
-
                                                     Socket action is detected in the main
-    event loop of TQt. The X11 version of TQt has a single UNIX
-select() call that incorporates all socket notifiers and the X
-socket.
-
                                                     Note that on XFree86 for OS/2, select() works only in the thread
-in which main() is running; you should therefore use that thread
-for GUI operations.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also TQSocket, TQServerSocket, TQSocketDevice, TQFile::handle(), and Input/Output and Networking.
-
-
                                                    Member Type Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSocketNotifier::Type
                                                    
-
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • TQSocketNotifier::Read
-
                                                    • TQSocketNotifier::Write
-
                                                    • TQSocketNotifier::Exception
-
                                                    
-
                                                    Member Function Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSocketNotifier::TQSocketNotifier ( int socket, Type type, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                    
-Constructs a socket notifier called name, with the parent, parent. It watches socket for type events, and enables it.
-
                                                     It is generally advisable to explicitly enable or disable the
-socket notifier, especially for write notifiers.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setEnabled() and isEnabled().
-
-
                                                    TQSocketNotifier::~TQSocketNotifier ()
-
                                                    
-Destroys the socket notifier.
-
-
                                                    void TQSocketNotifier::activated ( int socket ) [signal]
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This signal is emitted under certain conditions specified by the
-notifier type():
-
                                                      
-
                                                    1.  TQSocketNotifier::Read - There is data to be read (socket read event).
-
                                                    2.  TQSocketNotifier::Write - Data can be written (socket write event).
-
                                                    3.  TQSocketNofifier::Exception - An exception has occurred (socket
-exception event).
-
                                                    
-
                                                     The socket argument is the socket identifier.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also type() and socket().
-
-
                                                    bool TQSocketNotifier::isEnabled () const
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Returns TRUE if the notifier is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setEnabled().
-
-
                                                    void TQSocketNotifier::setEnabled ( bool enable ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Enables the notifier if enable is TRUE or disables it if enable is FALSE.
-
                                                     The notifier is enabled by default.
-
                                                     If the notifier is enabled, it emits the activated() signal
-whenever a socket event corresponding to its type occurs. If it is disabled, it ignores socket events
-(the same effect as not creating the socket notifier).
-
                                                     Write notifiers should normally be disabled immediately after the
-activated() signal has been emitted; see discussion of write
-notifiers in the class description above.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also isEnabled() and activated().
-
-
                                                    int TQSocketNotifier::socket () const
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Returns the socket identifier specified to the constructor.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also type().
-
-
                                                    Type TQSocketNotifier::type () const
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Returns the socket event type specified to the constructor: TQSocketNotifier::Read, TQSocketNotifier::Write, or TQSocketNotifier::Exception.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also socket().
-
-
-
                                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                                    
-
                                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsortedlist-h.html b/doc/html/qsortedlist-h.html
index af771ff47..9acb1a10a 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsortedlist-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsortedlist-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsortedlist.h Include File
+ntqsortedlist.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                    TQSortedList Class Reference
                                                    [obsolete]
                                                    
-
-
                                                    The TQSortedList class provides a list sorted by operator< and operator==.
-More...
-
                                                    #include <qsortedlist.h>
-
                                                    Inherits TQPtrList<type>.
-
                                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                                    Public Members
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Detailed Description
                                                    
-
-
-The TQSortedList class provides a list sorted by operator< and operator==.
-
                                                     This class is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                                     If you want to sort a TQPtrList you have to reimplement the
-TQGList::compareItems() method.  If the elements of your list support
-operator<() and operator==(), you can use TQSortedList instead.
-Its compareItems() calls operator<() and operator==() and returns an
-appropriate result.
-
                                                     Otherwise, this is as TQPtrList.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also TQPtrList.
-
-
                                                    Member Function Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSortedList::TQSortedList ()
-
                                                    
-
-Constructs an empty list.
-
-
                                                    TQSortedList::TQSortedList ( const TQSortedList<type> & list )
-
                                                    
-
-Constructs a copy of list.
-
                                                     Each item in list is copied to this new list.
-
-
                                                    TQSortedList::~TQSortedList ()
-
                                                    
-
-Removes all items from the list and destroys the list.
-
                                                     All list iterators that access this list will be reset.
-
-
                                                    TQSortedList<type> & TQSortedList::operator= ( const TQSortedList<type> & list )
-
                                                    
-
-Assigns list to this list and returns a reference to this list.
-
                                                     This list is first cleared; each item in list is then
-appended to this list.  Only the pointers are copied
-(shallow copy) unless newItem() has been reimplemented().
-
-
-
                                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                                    
-
                                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsound-h.html b/doc/html/qsound-h.html
index b77b93348..e4181f50d 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsound-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsound-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsound.h Include File
+ntqsound.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                    TQSound Class Reference
                                                    
-
-
                                                    The TQSound class provides access to the platform audio facilities.
-More...
-
                                                    #include <qsound.h>
-
                                                    Inherits TQObject.
-
                                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                                    Public Members
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Public Slots
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Static Public Members
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Detailed Description
                                                    
-
-
-The TQSound class provides access to the platform audio facilities.
-
                                                     
-
-
                                                     TQt provides the most commonly required audio operation in GUI
-applications: asynchronously playing a sound file. This is most
-easily accomplished with a single call:
-
                                                    -        TQSound::play("mysounds/bells.wav");
-    
                                                    
- 
-
                                                     A second API is provided in which a TQSound object is created from
-a sound file and is played later:
-
                                                    -        TQSound bells("mysounds/bells.wav");
-
-        bells.play();
-    
                                                    
- 
-
                                                     Sounds played using the second model may use more memory but play
-more immediately than sounds played using the first model,
-depending on the underlying platform audio facilities.
-
                                                     On Microsoft Windows the underlying multimedia system is used;
-only WAVE format sound files are supported.
-
                                                     On X11 the Network Audio
-    System is used if available, otherwise all operations work
-silently. NAS supports WAVE and AU files.
-
                                                     On Macintosh, ironically, we use QT (QuickTime) for sound, this
-means all QuickTime formats are supported by TQt/Mac.
-
                                                     On TQt/Embedded, a built-in mixing sound server is used, which
-accesses /dev/dsp directly. Only the WAVE format is supported.
-
                                                     The availability of sound can be tested with
-TQSound::isAvailable().
-
                                                    See also Multimedia Classes.
-
-
                                                    Member Function Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSound::TQSound ( const TQString & filename, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                    
-Constructs a TQSound that can tquickly play the sound in a file
-named filename.
-
                                                     This may use more memory than the static play function.
-
                                                     The parent and name arguments (default 0) are passed on to
-the TQObject constructor.
-
-
                                                    TQSound::~TQSound ()
-
                                                    
-Destroys the sound object. If the sound is not finished playing stop() is called on it.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also stop() and isFinished().
-
-
                                                    bool TQSound::available () [static]
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Returns TRUE if sound support is available; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                    TQString TQSound::fileName () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the filename associated with the sound.
-
-
                                                    bool TQSound::isAvailable () [static]
-
                                                    
-Returns TRUE if sound facilities exist on the platform; otherwise
-returns FALSE. An application may choose either to notify the user
-if sound is crucial to the application or to operate silently
-without bothering the user.
-
                                                     If no sound is available, all TQSound operations work silently and
-tquickly.
-
-
                                                    bool TQSound::isFinished () const
-
                                                    
-Returns TRUE if the sound has finished playing; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                     Warning: On Windows this function always returns TRUE for unlooped sounds.
-
-
                                                    int TQSound::loops () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the number of times the sound will play.
-
-
                                                    int TQSound::loopsRemaining () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the number of times the sound will loop. This value
-decreases each time the sound loops.
-
-
                                                    void TQSound::play ( const TQString & filename ) [static]
-
                                                    
-Plays the sound in a file called filename.
-
-
                                                    Example: sound/sound.cpp.
-
                                                    void TQSound::play () [slot]
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     Starts the sound playing. The function returns immediately.
-Depending on the platform audio facilities, other sounds may stop
-or may be mixed with the new sound.
-
                                                     The sound can be played again at any time, possibly mixing or
-replacing previous plays of the sound.
-
-
                                                    void TQSound::setLoops ( int l )
-
                                                    
-Sets the sound to repeat l times when it is played. Passing the
-value -1 will cause the sound to loop indefinitely.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also loops().
-
-
                                                    void TQSound::stop () [slot]
-
                                                    
-Stops the sound playing.
-
                                                     On Windows the current loop will finish if a sound is played
-in a loop.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also play().
-
-
-
                                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                                    
-
                                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qspaceritem-members.html b/doc/html/qspaceritem-members.html
index bc1558095..107eab555 100644
--- a/doc/html/qspaceritem-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qspaceritem-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qspaceritem.html b/doc/html/qspaceritem.html
index 602b22d00..11181417f 100644
--- a/doc/html/qspaceritem.html
+++ b/doc/html/qspaceritem.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                                    The TQSpacerItem class provides blank space in a layout.
 More...
-
                                                    #include <qlayout.h>
+
                                                    #include <ntqlayout.h>
 
                                                    Inherits TQLayoutItem.
 
                                                    List of all member functions.
 
                                                    Public Members
                                                    
@@ -54,10 +54,10 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 The TQSpacerItem class provides blank space in a layout.
 
                                                     This class is used by custom layouts.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also TQLayout, TQLayout::spacerItem(), Widget Appearance and Style, and Layout Management.
+
                                                     
                                                    See also TQLayout, TQLayout::spacerItem(), Widget Appearance and Style, and Layout Management.
 
 
                                                    Member Function Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSpacerItem::TQSpacerItem ( int w, int h, TQSizePolicy::SizeType hData = TQSizePolicy::Minimum, TQSizePolicy::SizeType vData = TQSizePolicy::Minimum )
+
                                                    TQSpacerItem::TQSpacerItem ( int w, int h, TQSizePolicy::SizeType hData = TQSizePolicy::Minimum, TQSizePolicy::SizeType vData = TQSizePolicy::Minimum )
 
                                                    
 
 
                                                     Constructs a spacer item with preferred width w, preferred
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ policy vData.
 
                                                     The default values provide a gap that is able to stretch if
 nothing else wants the space.
 
-
                                                    void TQSpacerItem::changeSize ( int w, int h, TQSizePolicy::SizeType hData = TQSizePolicy::Minimum, TQSizePolicy::SizeType vData = TQSizePolicy::Minimum )
+
                                                    void TQSpacerItem::changeSize ( int w, int h, TQSizePolicy::SizeType hData = TQSizePolicy::Minimum, TQSizePolicy::SizeType vData = TQSizePolicy::Minimum )
 
                                                    
 Changes this spacer item to have preferred width w, preferred
 height h, horizontal size policy hData and vertical size
@@ -74,10 +74,10 @@ policy vData.
 
                                                     The default values provide a gap that is able to stretch if
 nothing else wants the space.
 
-
                                                    TQSizePolicy::ExpandData TQSpacerItem::expanding () const [virtual]
+
                                                    TQSizePolicy::ExpandData TQSpacerItem::expanding () const [virtual]
 
                                                    
 Returns the direction in which this spacer item will expand.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also TQSizePolicy::ExpandData.
+
                                                     
                                                    See also TQSizePolicy::ExpandData.
 
 
                                                    Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
 
                                                    bool TQSpacerItem::isEmpty () const [virtual]
@@ -85,23 +85,23 @@ Returns the direction in which this spacer item will expand.
 Returns TRUE because a spacer item never contains widgets.
 
 
                                                    Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
-
                                                    TQSize TQSpacerItem::maximumSize () const [virtual]
+
                                                    TQSize TQSpacerItem::maximumSize () const [virtual]
 
                                                    
 Returns the maximum size of this spacer item.
 
 
                                                    Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
-
                                                    TQSize TQSpacerItem::minimumSize () const [virtual]
+
                                                    TQSize TQSpacerItem::minimumSize () const [virtual]
 
                                                    
 Returns the minimum size of this spacer item.
 
 
                                                    Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
-
                                                    void TQSpacerItem::setGeometry ( const TQRect & r ) [virtual]
+
                                                    void TQSpacerItem::setGeometry ( const TQRect & r ) [virtual]
 
                                                    
 Stores the spacer item's rect r so that it can be returned by
 geometry().
 
 
                                                    Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
-
                                                    TQSize TQSpacerItem::sizeHint () const [virtual]
+
                                                    TQSize TQSpacerItem::sizeHint () const [virtual]
 
                                                    
 Returns the preferred size of this spacer item.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qspinbox-h.html b/doc/html/qspinbox-h.html
index 8a99aea07..b329d71a3 100644
--- a/doc/html/qspinbox-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qspinbox-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qspinbox.h Include File
+ntqspinbox.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                    TQSpinBox Class Reference
                                                    
-
-
                                                    The TQSpinBox class provides a spin box widget (spin button).
-More...
-
                                                    #include <qspinbox.h>
-
                                                    Inherits TQWidget and TQRangeControl.
-
                                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                                    Public Members
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Public Slots
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Signals
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Properties
                                                    
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • ButtonSymbols buttonSymbols - the current button symbol mode
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQString cleanText - the spin box's text with no prefix(), suffix() or leading or trailing whitespace  (read only)
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • int lineStep - the line step
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • int maxValue - the maximum value of the spin box
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • int minValue - the minimum value of the spin box
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQString prefix - the spin box's prefix
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQString specialValueText - the special-value text
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQString suffix - the suffix of the spin box
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQString text - the spin box's text, including any prefix() and suffix()  (read only)
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • int value - the value of the spin box
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • bool wrapping - whether it is possible to step the value from the highest value to the lowest value and vice versa
                                                      • 
-
                                                    
-
                                                    Protected Members
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Protected Slots
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Detailed Description
                                                    
-
-
-The TQSpinBox class provides a spin box widget (spin button).
-
                                                     
-
-
                                                     TQSpinBox allows the user to choose a value either by clicking the
-up/down buttons to increase/decrease the value currently displayed
-or by typing the value directly into the spin box. If the value is
-entered directly into the spin box, Enter (or Return) must be
-pressed to apply the new value. The value is usually an integer.
-
                                                     Every time the value changes TQSpinBox emits the valueChanged()
-signal. The current value can be fetched with value() and set
-with setValue().
-
                                                     The spin box keeps the value within a numeric range, and to
-multiples of the lineStep() size (see TQRangeControl for details).
-Clicking the up/down buttons or using the keyboard accelerator's
-up and down arrows will increase or decrease the current value in
-steps of size lineStep(). The minimum and maximum value and the
-step size can be set using one of the constructors, and can be
-changed later with setMinValue(), setMaxValue() and setLineStep().
-
                                                     Most spin boxes are directional, but TQSpinBox can also operate as
-a circular spin box, i.e. if the range is 0-99 and the current
-value is 99, clicking "up" will give 0. Use setWrapping() if you
-want circular behavior.
-
                                                     The displayed value can be prepended and appended with arbitrary
-strings indicating, for example, currency or the unit of
-measurement. See setPrefix() and setSuffix(). The text in the spin
-box is retrieved with text() (which includes any prefix() and
-suffix()), or with cleanText() (which has no prefix(), no suffix()
-and no leading or trailing whitespace). currentValueText() returns
-the spin box's current value as text.
-
                                                     Normally the spin box displays up and down arrows in the buttons.
-You can use setButtonSymbols() to change the display to show
-+ and - symbols if you prefer. In either case the up
-and down arrow keys work as expected.
-
                                                     It is often desirable to give the user a special (often default)
-choice in addition to the range of numeric values. See
-setSpecialValueText() for how to do this with TQSpinBox.
-
                                                     The default TQWidget::focusPolicy() is StrongFocus.
-
                                                     If using prefix(), suffix() and specialValueText() don't provide
-enough control, you can ignore them and subclass TQSpinBox instead.
-
                                                     TQSpinBox can easily be subclassed to allow the user to input
-things other than an integer value as long as the allowed input
-can be mapped to a range of integers. This can be done by
-overriding the virtual functions mapValueToText() and
-mapTextToValue(), and setting another suitable validator using
-setValidator().
-
                                                     For example, these functions could be changed so that the user
-provided values from 0.0 to 10.0, or -1 to signify 'Auto', while
-the range of integers used inside the program would be -1 to 100:
-
                                                     
                                                    -        class MySpinBox : public TQSpinBox
-        {
-            Q_OBJECT
-        public:
-            ...
-
-            TQString mapValueToText( int value )
-            {
-                if ( value == -1 ) // special case
-                    return TQString( "Auto" );
-
-                return TQString( "%1.%2" ) // 0.0 to 10.0
-                    .arg( value / 10 ).arg( value % 10 );
-            }
-
-            int mapTextToValue( bool *ok )
-            {
-                if ( text() == "Auto" ) // special case
-                    return -1;
-
-                return (int) ( 10 * text().toFloat() ); // 0 to 100
-            }
-        };
-    
                                                    
- 
-
                                                      
-
                                                     
                                                    See also TQScrollBar, TQSlider, GUI Design Handbook: Spin Box, and Basic Widgets.
-
-
                                                    Member Type Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSpinBox::ButtonSymbols
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This enum type determines what the buttons in a spin box show.
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • TQSpinBox::UpDownArrows - the buttons show little arrows in the classic
-style.
-
                                                    • TQSpinBox::PlusMinus - the buttons show + and - symbols.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also TQSpinBox::buttonSymbols.
-
-
                                                    Member Function Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSpinBox::TQSpinBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                    
-Constructs a spin box with the default TQRangeControl range and
-step values. It is called name and has parent parent.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also minValue, maxValue, setRange(), lineStep, and setSteps().
-
-
                                                    TQSpinBox::TQSpinBox ( int minValue, int maxValue, int step = 1, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                    
-Constructs a spin box that allows values from minValue to maxValue inclusive, with step amount step. The value is
-initially set to minValue.
-
                                                     The spin box is called name and has parent parent.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also minValue, maxValue, setRange(), lineStep, and setSteps().
-
-
                                                    TQSpinBox::~TQSpinBox ()
-
                                                    
-Destroys the spin box, freeing all memory and other resources.
-
-
                                                    ButtonSymbols TQSpinBox::buttonSymbols () const
-
                                                    Returns the current button symbol mode.
-See the "buttonSymbols" property for details.
-
                                                    TQString TQSpinBox::cleanText () const [virtual]
-
                                                    Returns the spin box's text with no prefix(), suffix() or leading or trailing whitespace.
-See the "cleanText" property for details.
-
                                                    TQString TQSpinBox::currentValueText () [protected]
-
                                                    
-Returns the full text calculated from the current value, including
-any prefix and suffix. If there is special value text and the
-value is minValue() the specialValueText() is returned.
-
-
                                                    TQRect TQSpinBox::downRect () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the geometry of the "down" button.
-
-
                                                    TQLineEdit * TQSpinBox::editor () const [protected]
-
                                                    
-Returns a pointer to the embedded TQLineEdit.
-
-
                                                    bool TQSpinBox::eventFilter ( TQObject * o, TQEvent * ev ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                    
-Intercepts and handles the events coming to the embedded TQLineEdit
-that have special meaning for the TQSpinBox. The object is passed
-as o and the event is passed as ev.
-
-
                                                    Reimplemented from TQObject.
-
                                                    void TQSpinBox::interpretText () [virtual protected]
-
                                                    
-TQSpinBox calls this after the user has manually edited the
-contents of the spin box (i.e. by typing in the embedded
-TQLineEdit, rather than using the up/down buttons/keys).
-
                                                     The default implementation of this function interprets the new
-text using mapTextToValue(). If mapTextToValue() is successful, it
-changes the spin box's value; if not, the value is left unchanged.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also editor().
-
-
                                                    int TQSpinBox::lineStep () const
-
                                                    Returns the line step.
-See the "lineStep" property for details.
-
                                                    int TQSpinBox::mapTextToValue ( bool * ok ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                    
-This virtual function is used by the spin box whenever it needs to
-interpret text entered by the user as a value. The text is
-available as text() and as cleanText(), and this function must
-parse it if possible. If ok is not 0: if it parses the text
-successfully, *ok is set to TRUE; otherwise *ok is set to
-FALSE.
-
                                                     Subclasses that need to display spin box values in a non-numeric
-way need to reimplement this function.
-
                                                     Note that TQt handles specialValueText() separately; this function
-is only concerned with the other values.
-
                                                     The default implementation tries to interpret the text() as an
-integer in the standard way and returns the integer value.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also interpretText() and mapValueToText().
-
-
                                                    TQString TQSpinBox::mapValueToText ( int v ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                    
-This virtual function is used by the spin box whenever it needs to
-display value v. The default implementation returns a string
-containing v printed in the standard way. Reimplementations may
-return anything. (See the example in the detailed description.)
-
                                                     Note that TQt does not call this function for specialValueText()
-and that neither prefix() nor suffix() are included in the return
-value.
-
                                                     If you reimplement this, you may also need to reimplement
-mapTextToValue().
-
                                                     
                                                    See also updateDisplay() and mapTextToValue().
-
-
                                                    int TQSpinBox::maxValue () const
-
                                                    Returns the maximum value of the spin box.
-See the "maxValue" property for details.
-
                                                    int TQSpinBox::minValue () const
-
                                                    Returns the minimum value of the spin box.
-See the "minValue" property for details.
-
                                                    TQString TQSpinBox::prefix () const [virtual]
-
                                                    Returns the spin box's prefix.
-See the "prefix" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSpinBox::rangeChange () [virtual protected]
-
                                                    
-This virtual function is called by TQRangeControl whenever the
-range has changed. It adjusts the default validator and updates
-the display; if you need additional processing, you can
-reimplement this function.
-
-
                                                    Reimplemented from TQRangeControl.
-
                                                    void TQSpinBox::selectAll () [virtual slot]
-
                                                    
-Selects all the text in the spin box's editor.
-
-
                                                    void TQSpinBox::setButtonSymbols ( ButtonSymbols ) [virtual]
-
                                                    Sets the current button symbol mode.
-See the "buttonSymbols" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSpinBox::setLineStep ( int )
-
                                                    Sets the line step.
-See the "lineStep" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSpinBox::setMaxValue ( int )
-
                                                    Sets the maximum value of the spin box.
-See the "maxValue" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSpinBox::setMinValue ( int )
-
                                                    Sets the minimum value of the spin box.
-See the "minValue" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSpinBox::setPrefix ( const TQString & text ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                    Sets the spin box's prefix to text.
-See the "prefix" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSpinBox::setSpecialValueText ( const TQString & text ) [virtual]
-
                                                    Sets the special-value text to text.
-See the "specialValueText" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSpinBox::setSuffix ( const TQString & text ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                    Sets the suffix of the spin box to text.
-See the "suffix" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSpinBox::setValidator ( const TQValidator * v ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Sets the validator to v. The validator controls what keyboard
-input is accepted when the user is editing in the value field. The
-default is to use a suitable TQIntValidator.
-
                                                     Use setValidator(0) to turn off input validation (entered input
-will still be kept within the spin box's range).
-
-
                                                    void TQSpinBox::setValue ( int value ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                    Sets the value of the spin box to value.
-See the "value" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSpinBox::setWrapping ( bool on ) [virtual]
-
                                                    Sets whether it is possible to step the value from the highest value to the lowest value and vice versa to on.
-See the "wrapping" property for details.
-
                                                    TQString TQSpinBox::specialValueText () const
-
                                                    Returns the special-value text.
-See the "specialValueText" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSpinBox::stepDown () [virtual slot]
-
                                                    
-Decreases the spin box's value one lineStep(), wrapping as
-necessary if wrapping() is TRUE. This is the same as clicking on
-the pointing-down button and can be used for keyboard
-accelerators, for example.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also stepUp(), subtractLine(), lineStep, setSteps(), value, and value.
-
-
                                                    void TQSpinBox::stepUp () [virtual slot]
-
                                                    
-Increases the spin box's value by one lineStep(), wrapping as
-necessary if wrapping() is TRUE. This is the same as clicking on
-the pointing-up button and can be used for keyboard accelerators,
-for example.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also stepDown(), addLine(), lineStep, setSteps(), value, and value.
-
-
                                                    TQString TQSpinBox::suffix () const [virtual]
-
                                                    Returns the suffix of the spin box.
-See the "suffix" property for details.
-
                                                    TQString TQSpinBox::text () const
-
                                                    Returns the spin box's text, including any prefix() and suffix().
-See the "text" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSpinBox::textChanged () [protected slot]
-
                                                    
-This slot is called whenever the user edits the spin box's text.
-
-
                                                    TQRect TQSpinBox::upRect () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the geometry of the "up" button.
-
-
                                                    void TQSpinBox::updateDisplay () [virtual protected]
-
                                                    
-Updates the contents of the embedded TQLineEdit to reflect the
-current value using mapValueToText(). Also enables/disables the
-up/down push buttons accordingly.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also mapValueToText().
-
-
                                                    const TQValidator * TQSpinBox::validator () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the validator that constrains editing for this spin box if
-there is any; otherwise returns 0.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setValidator() and TQValidator.
-
-
                                                    int TQSpinBox::value () const
-
                                                    Returns the value of the spin box.
-See the "value" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSpinBox::valueChange () [virtual protected]
-
                                                    
-This virtual function is called by TQRangeControl whenever the
-value has changed. The TQSpinBox reimplementation updates the
-display and emits the valueChanged() signals; if you need
-additional processing, either reimplement this or connect to one
-of the valueChanged() signals.
-
-
                                                    Reimplemented from TQRangeControl.
-
                                                    void TQSpinBox::valueChanged ( int value ) [signal]
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This signal is emitted every time the value of the spin box
-changes; the new value is passed in value. This signal will be
-emitted as a result of a call to setValue(), or because the user
-changed the value by using a keyboard accelerator or mouse click,
-etc.
-
                                                     Note that the valueChanged() signal is emitted every time, not
-just for the "last" step; i.e. if the user clicks "up" three
-times, this signal is emitted three times.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also value.
-
-
                                                    Examples: listbox/listbox.cpp, qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp, and scribble/scribble.cpp.
-
                                                    void TQSpinBox::valueChanged ( const TQString & valueText ) [signal]
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     This signal is emitted whenever the valueChanged( int ) signal is
-emitted, i.e. every time the value of the spin box changes
-(whatever the cause, e.g. by setValue(), by a keyboard
-accelerator, by mouse clicks, etc.).
-
                                                     The valueText parameter is the same string that is displayed in
-the edit field of the spin box.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also value, prefix, suffix, and specialValueText.
-
-
                                                    bool TQSpinBox::wrapping () const
-
                                                    Returns TRUE if it is possible to step the value from the highest value to the lowest value and vice versa; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "wrapping" property for details.
-
                                                    Property Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    ButtonSymbols buttonSymbols
                                                    
-
                                                    This property holds the current button symbol mode.
-
                                                    The possible values can be either UpDownArrows or PlusMinus.
-The default is UpDownArrows.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also ButtonSymbols.
-
-
                                                    Set this property's value with setButtonSymbols() and get this property's value with buttonSymbols().
-
                                                    TQString cleanText
                                                    
-
                                                    This property holds the spin box's text with no prefix(), suffix() or leading or trailing whitespace.
-
                                                    Get this property's value with cleanText().
-
                                                    See also text, prefix, and suffix.
-
-
                                                    int lineStep
                                                    
-
                                                    This property holds the line step.
-
                                                    When the user uses the arrows to change the spin box's value the
-value will be incremented/decremented by the amount of the line
-step.
-
                                                     The setLineStep() function calls the virtual stepChange() function
-if the new line step is different from the previous setting.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also TQRangeControl::setSteps() and setRange().
-
-
                                                    Set this property's value with setLineStep() and get this property's value with lineStep().
-
                                                    int maxValue
                                                    
-
                                                    This property holds the maximum value of the spin box.
-
                                                    When setting this property, TQSpinBox::minValue is adjusted, if
-necessary, to ensure that the range remains valid.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setRange() and specialValueText.
-
-
                                                    Set this property's value with setMaxValue() and get this property's value with maxValue().
-
                                                    int minValue
                                                    
-
                                                    This property holds the minimum value of the spin box.
-
                                                    When setting this property, TQSpinBox::maxValue is adjusted, if
-necessary, to ensure that the range remains valid.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setRange() and specialValueText.
-
-
                                                    Set this property's value with setMinValue() and get this property's value with minValue().
-
                                                    TQString prefix
                                                    
-
                                                    This property holds the spin box's prefix.
-
                                                    The prefix is prepended to the start of the displayed value.
-Typical use is to display a unit of measurement or a currency
-symbol. For example:
-
                                                     
                                                    -        sb->setPrefix( "$" );
-    
                                                    
- 
-
                                                     To turn off the prefix display, set this property to an empty
-string. The default is no prefix. The prefix is not displayed for
-the minValue() if specialValueText() is not empty.
-
                                                     If no prefix is set, prefix() returns TQString::null.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also suffix.
-
-
                                                    Set this property's value with setPrefix() and get this property's value with prefix().
-
                                                    TQString specialValueText
                                                    
-
                                                    This property holds the special-value text.
-
                                                    If set, the spin box will display this text instead of a numeric
-value whenever the current value is equal to minVal(). Typical use
-is to indicate that this choice has a special (default) meaning.
-
                                                     For example, if your spin box allows the user to choose the margin
-width in a print dialog and your application is able to
-automatically choose a good margin width, you can set up the spin
-box like this:
-
                                                    -        TQSpinBox marginBox( -1, 20, 1, parent, "marginBox" );
-        marginBox->setSuffix( " mm" );
-        marginBox->setSpecialValueText( "Auto" );
-    
                                                    
- 
-The user will then be able to choose a margin width from 0-20
-millimeters or select "Auto" to leave it to the application to
-choose. Your code must then interpret the spin box value of -1 as
-the user requesting automatic margin width.
-
                                                     All values are displayed with the prefix() and suffix() (if set),
-except for the special value, which only shows the special
-value text.
-
                                                     To turn off the special-value text display, call this function
-with an empty string. The default is no special-value text, i.e.
-the numeric value is shown as usual.
-
                                                     If no special-value text is set, specialValueText() returns
-TQString::null.
-
-
                                                    Set this property's value with setSpecialValueText() and get this property's value with specialValueText().
-
                                                    TQString suffix
                                                    
-
                                                    This property holds the suffix of the spin box.
-
                                                    The suffix is appended to the end of the displayed value. Typical
-use is to display a unit of measurement or a currency symbol. For
-example:
-
                                                     
                                                    -        sb->setSuffix( " km" );
-    
                                                    
- 
-
                                                     To turn off the suffix display, set this property to an empty
-string. The default is no suffix. The suffix is not displayed for
-the minValue() if specialValueText() is not empty.
-
                                                     If no suffix is set, suffix() returns a TQString::null.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also prefix.
-
-
                                                    Set this property's value with setSuffix() and get this property's value with suffix().
-
                                                    TQString text
                                                    
-
                                                    This property holds the spin box's text, including any prefix() and suffix().
-
                                                    There is no default text.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also value.
-
-
                                                    Get this property's value with text().
-
                                                    int value
                                                    
-
                                                    This property holds the value of the spin box.
-
                                                    Set this property's value with setValue() and get this property's value with value().
-
                                                    See also TQRangeControl::setValue().
-
-
                                                    bool wrapping
                                                    
-
                                                    This property holds whether it is possible to step the value from the highest value to the lowest value and vice versa.
-
                                                    By default, wrapping is turned off.
-
                                                     If you have a range of 0..100 and wrapping is off when the user
-reaches 100 and presses the Up Arrow nothing will happen; but if
-wrapping is on the value will change from 100 to 0, then to 1,
-etc. When wrapping is on, navigating past the highest value takes
-you to the lowest and vice versa.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also minValue, maxValue, and setRange().
-
-
                                                    Set this property's value with setWrapping() and get this property's value with wrapping().
-
-
                                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                                    
-
                                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsplashscreen-h.html b/doc/html/qsplashscreen-h.html
index 430e0f38d..d5eb7df67 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsplashscreen-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsplashscreen-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsplashscreen.h Include File
+ntqsplashscreen.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                    TQSplashScreen Class Reference
                                                    
-
-
                                                    The TQSplashScreen widget provides a splash screen that can
-be shown during application startup.
-More...
-
                                                    #include <qsplashscreen.h>
-
                                                    Inherits TQWidget.
-
                                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                                    Public Members
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Public Slots
                                                    
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • void message ( const TQString & message, int alignment = AlignLeft, const TQColor & color = black )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • void clear ()
                                                      • 
-
                                                    
-
                                                    Signals
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Protected Members
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Detailed Description
                                                    
-
-
-The TQSplashScreen widget provides a splash screen that can
-be shown during application startup.
-
                                                     
-
-
                                                     A splash screen is a widget that is usually displayed when an
-application is being started. Splash screens are often used for
-applications that have long start up times (e.g. database or
-networking applications that take time to establish connections) to
-provide the user with feedback that the application is loading.
-
                                                     The splash screen appears centered on the screen. It may be useful to add
-the WStyle_StaysOnTop if you desire to keep above all the windows in the
-GUI.
-
                                                     Some X11 window managers do not support the "stays on top" flag. A
-solution is to set up a timer that periodically calls raise() on
-the splash screen to simulate the "stays on top" effect.
-
                                                     The most common usage is to show a splash screen before the main
-widget is displayed on the screen. This is illustrated in the
-following code snippet.
-
                                                     
                                                    -   int main( int argc, char **argv )
-   {
-       TQApplication app( argc, argv );
-       TQPixmap pixmap( "splash.png" );
-       TQSplashScreen *splash = new TQSplashScreen( pixmap );
-       splash->show();
-       TQMainWindow *mainWin = new TQMainWindow;
-       ...
-       app.setMainWidget( mainWin );
-       mainWin->show();
-       splash->finish( mainWin );
-       delete splash;
-       return app.exec();
-   }
-   
                                                    
- 
-
                                                     It is sometimes useful to update the splash screen with messages,
-for example, announcing connections established or modules loaded
-as the application starts up. TQSplashScreen supports this with the
-message() function. If you wish to do your own drawing you can
-get a pointer to the pixmap used in the splash screen with pixmap().
-Alternatively, you can subclass TQSplashScreen and reimplement
-drawContents().
-
                                                     The user can hide the splash screen by clicking on it with the
-mouse. Since the splash screen is typically displayed before the
-event loop has started running, it is necessary to periodically
-call TQApplication::processEvents() to receive the mouse clicks.
-
                                                     
                                                    -   TQPixmap pixmap( "splash.png" );
-   TQSplashScreen *splash = new TQSplashScreen( pixmap );
-   splash->show();
-   ... // Loading some items
-   splash->message( "Loaded modules" );
-   qApp->processEvents();
-   ... // Establishing connections
-   splash->message( "Established connections" );
-   qApp->processEvents();
-   
                                                    
- 
-
                                                     
                                                    See also Miscellaneous Classes.
-
-
                                                    Member Function Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSplashScreen::TQSplashScreen ( const TQPixmap & pixmap = TQPixmap ( ), WFlags f = 0 )
-
                                                    
-Construct a splash screen that will display the pixmap.
-
                                                     There should be no need to set the widget flags, f, except
-perhaps WDestructiveClose or WStyle_StaysOnTop.
-
-
                                                    TQSplashScreen::~TQSplashScreen () [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Destructor.
-
-
                                                    void TQSplashScreen::clear () [slot]
-
                                                    
-Removes the message being displayed on the splash screen
-
                                                     
                                                    See also message().
-
-
                                                    void TQSplashScreen::drawContents ( TQPainter * painter ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                    
-Draw the contents of the splash screen using painter painter.
-The default implementation draws the message passed by message().
-Reimplement this function if you want to do your own drawing on
-the splash screen.
-
-
                                                    void TQSplashScreen::finish ( TQWidget * mainWin )
-
                                                    
-Makes the splash screen wait until the widget mainWin is displayed
-before calling close() on itself.
-
-
                                                    void TQSplashScreen::message ( const TQString & message, int alignment = AlignLeft, const TQColor & color = black ) [slot]
-
                                                    
-Draws the message text onto the splash screen with color color and aligns the text according to the flags in alignment.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also TQt::AlignmentFlags and clear().
-
-
                                                    void TQSplashScreen::messageChanged ( const TQString & message ) [signal]
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This signal is emitted when the message on the splash screen
-changes. message is the new message and is a null-string
-when the message has been removed.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also message() and clear().
-
-
                                                    TQPixmap * TQSplashScreen::pixmap () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the pixmap that is used in the splash screen. The image
-does not have any of the text drawn by message() calls.
-
-
                                                    void TQSplashScreen::repaint ()
-
                                                    
-This overrides TQWidget::repaint(). It differs from the standard
-repaint function in that it also calls TQApplication::flush() to
-ensure the updates are displayed, even when there is no event loop
-present.
-
-
                                                    void TQSplashScreen::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pixmap )
-
                                                    
-Sets the pixmap that will be used as the splash screen's image to
-pixmap.
-
-
-
                                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                                    
-
                                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsplitter-h.html b/doc/html/qsplitter-h.html
index 29e87af8b..1ff93f0ac 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsplitter-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsplitter-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsplitter.h Include File
+ntqsplitter.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                    TQSplitter Class Reference
                                                    
-
-
                                                    The TQSplitter class implements a splitter widget.
-More...
-
                                                    #include <qsplitter.h>
-
                                                    Inherits TQFrame.
-
                                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                                    Public Members
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Properties
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Protected Members
                                                    
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • virtual void childEvent ( TQChildEvent * c )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • int idAfter ( TQWidget * w ) const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • void moveSplitter ( TQCOORD p, int id )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual void drawSplitter ( TQPainter * p, TQCOORD x, TQCOORD y, TQCOORD w, TQCOORD h )  (obsolete)
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • int adjustPos ( int pos, int id )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual void setRubberband ( int p )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • void getRange ( int id, int * min, int * max )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    
-
                                                    Related Functions
                                                    
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • TQTextStream & operator<< ( TQTextStream & ts, const TQSplitter & splitter )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQTextStream & operator>> ( TQTextStream & ts, TQSplitter & splitter )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    
-
                                                    Detailed Description
                                                    
-
-
-The TQSplitter class implements a splitter widget.
-
                                                     
-
-
                                                     A splitter lets the user control the size of child widgets by
-dragging the boundary between the children. Any number of widgets
-may be controlled by a single splitter.
-
                                                     To show a TQListBox, a TQListView and a TQTextEdit side by side:
-
                                                    -        TQSplitter *split = new TQSplitter( parent );
-        TQListBox *lb = new TQListBox( split );
-        TQListView *lv = new TQListView( split );
-        TQTextEdit *ed = new TQTextEdit( split );
-    
                                                    
- 
-
                                                     TQSplitter lays out its children horizontally (side by side); you
-can use setOrientation(TQSplitter::Vertical) to lay out the
-children vertically.
-
                                                     By default, all widgets can be as large or as small as the user
-wishes, between the minimumSizeHint() (or minimumSize())
-and maximumSize() of the widgets. Use setResizeMode() to
-specify that a widget should keep its size when the splitter is
-resized, or set the stretch component of the sizePolicy.
-
                                                     Although TQSplitter normally resizes the children only at the end
-of a resize operation, if you call setOpaqueResize(TRUE) the
-widgets are resized as often as possible.
-
                                                     The initial distribution of size between the widgets is determined
-by the initial size of each widget. You can also use setSizes() to
-set the sizes of all the widgets. The function sizes() returns the
-sizes set by the user.
-
                                                     If you hide() a child its space will be distributed among the
-other children. It will be reinstated when you show() it again. It
-is also possible to reorder the widgets within the splitter using
-moveToFirst() and moveToLast().
-
                                                      
-
                                                     
                                                    See also TQTabBar and Organizers.
-
-
                                                    Member Type Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSplitter::ResizeMode
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This enum type describes how TQSplitter will resize each of its
-child widgets.
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • TQSplitter::Auto - The widget will be resized according to the stretch
-factors set in its sizePolicy().
-
                                                    • TQSplitter::Stretch - The widget will be resized when the splitter
-itself is resized.
-
                                                    • TQSplitter::KeepSize - TQSplitter will try to keep the widget's size
-unchanged.
-
                                                    • TQSplitter::FollowSizeHint - TQSplitter will resize the widget when the
-widget's size hint changes.
-
                                                    
-
                                                    Member Function Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSplitter::TQSplitter ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                    
-Constructs a horizontal splitter with the parent and name
-arguments being passed on to the TQFrame constructor.
-
-
                                                    TQSplitter::TQSplitter ( Orientation o, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                    
-Constructs a splitter with orientation o with the parent and
-name arguments being passed on to the TQFrame constructor.
-
-
                                                    TQSplitter::~TQSplitter ()
-
                                                    
-Destroys the splitter and any children.
-
-
                                                    int TQSplitter::adjustPos ( int pos, int id ) [protected]
-
                                                    
-Returns the closest legal position to pos of the widget with ID
-id.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also idAfter().
-
-
                                                    void TQSplitter::childEvent ( TQChildEvent * c ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                    
-Tells the splitter that the child widget described by c has
-been inserted or removed.
-
-
                                                    Reimplemented from TQObject.
-
                                                    bool TQSplitter::childrenCollapsible () const
-
                                                    Returns TRUE if child widgets can be resized down to size 0 by the user; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "childrenCollapsible" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSplitter::drawSplitter ( TQPainter * p, TQCOORD x, TQCOORD y, TQCOORD w, TQCOORD h ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                    
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                                     Draws the splitter handle in the rectangle described by x, y,
-w, h using painter p.
-
                                                    See also TQStyle::drawPrimitive().
-
-
                                                    void TQSplitter::getRange ( int id, int * min, int * max ) [protected]
-
                                                    
-Returns the valid range of the splitter with ID id in *min
-and *max if min and max are not 0.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also idAfter().
-
-
                                                    int TQSplitter::handleWidth () const
-
                                                    Returns the width of the splitter handle.
-See the "handleWidth" property for details.
-
                                                    int TQSplitter::idAfter ( TQWidget * w ) const [protected]
-
                                                    
-Returns the ID of the widget to the right of or below the widget
-w, or 0 if there is no such widget (i.e. it is either not in
-this TQSplitter or w is at the end).
-
-
                                                    void TQSplitter::moveSplitter ( TQCOORD p, int id ) [protected]
-
                                                    
-Moves the left/top edge of the splitter handle with ID id as
-close as possible to position p, which is the distance from the
-left (or top) edge of the widget.
-
                                                     For Arabic, Hebrew and other right-to-left languages the layout is
-reversed.  p is then the distance from the right (or top) edge
-of the widget.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also idAfter().
-
-
                                                    void TQSplitter::moveToFirst ( TQWidget * w )
-
                                                    
-Moves widget w to the leftmost/top position.
-
-
                                                    Example: splitter/splitter.cpp.
-
                                                    void TQSplitter::moveToLast ( TQWidget * w )
-
                                                    
-Moves widget w to the rightmost/bottom position.
-
-
                                                    bool TQSplitter::opaqueResize () const
-
                                                    Returns TRUE if resizing is opaque; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "opaqueResize" property for details.
-
                                                    Orientation TQSplitter::orientation () const
-
                                                    Returns the orientation of the splitter.
-See the "orientation" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSplitter::refresh ()
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Updates the splitter's state. You should not need to call this
-function.
-
-
                                                    void TQSplitter::setChildrenCollapsible ( bool )
-
                                                    Sets whether child widgets can be resized down to size 0 by the user.
-See the "childrenCollapsible" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSplitter::setCollapsible ( TQWidget * w, bool collapse )
-
                                                    
-Sets whether the child widget w is collapsible to collapse.
-
                                                     By default, children are collapsible, meaning that the user can
-resize them down to size 0, even if they have a non-zero
-minimumSize() or minimumSizeHint(). This behavior can be changed
-on a per-widget basis by calling this function, or globally for
-all the widgets in the splitter by setting the childrenCollapsible property.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also childrenCollapsible.
-
-
                                                    void TQSplitter::setHandleWidth ( int )
-
                                                    Sets the width of the splitter handle.
-See the "handleWidth" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSplitter::setOpaqueResize ( bool = TRUE ) [virtual]
-
                                                    Sets whether resizing is opaque.
-See the "opaqueResize" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSplitter::setOrientation ( Orientation ) [virtual]
-
                                                    Sets the orientation of the splitter.
-See the "orientation" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSplitter::setResizeMode ( TQWidget * w, ResizeMode mode ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Sets resize mode of widget w to mode. (The default is Auto.)
-
-
                                                    Examples: fileiconview/mainwindow.cpp, listviews/listviews.cpp, and splitter/splitter.cpp.
-
                                                    void TQSplitter::setRubberband ( int p ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                    
-Displays a rubber band at position p. If p is negative, the
-rubber band is removed.
-
-
                                                    void TQSplitter::setSizes ( TQValueList<int> list )
-
                                                    
-Sets the size parameters to the values given in the list. If
-the splitter is horizontal, the values set the widths of each
-widget going from left to right. If the splitter is vertical, the
-values set the heights of each widget going from top to bottom.
-Extra values in the list are ignored.
-
                                                     If list contains too few values, the result is undefined but
-the program will still be well-behaved.
-
                                                     Note that the values in list should be the height/width that
-the widgets should be resized to.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also sizes().
-
-
                                                    TQValueList<int> TQSplitter::sizes () const
-
                                                    
-Returns a list of the size parameters of all the widgets in this
-splitter.
-
                                                     If the splitter's orientation is horizontal, the list is a list of
-widget widths; if the orientation is vertical, the list is a list
-of widget heights.
-
                                                     Giving the values to another splitter's setSizes() function will
-produce a splitter with the same layout as this one.
-
                                                     Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
-over a copy, e.g.
-
                                                    -    TQValueList<int> list = mySplitter.sizes();
-    TQValueList<int>::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    while( it != list.end() ) {
-        myProcessing( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-    
                                                    
- 
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setSizes().
-
-
                                                    Property Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    bool childrenCollapsible
                                                    
-
                                                    This property holds whether child widgets can be resized down to size 0 by the user.
-
                                                    By default, children are collapsible. It is possible to enable
-and disable the collapsing of individual children; see
-setCollapsible().
-
-
                                                    Set this property's value with setChildrenCollapsible() and get this property's value with childrenCollapsible().
-
                                                    int handleWidth
                                                    
-
                                                    This property holds the width of the splitter handle.
-
                                                    
-
                                                    Set this property's value with setHandleWidth() and get this property's value with handleWidth().
-
                                                    bool opaqueResize
                                                    
-
                                                    This property holds whether resizing is opaque.
-
                                                    Opaque resizing is off by default.
-
-
                                                    Set this property's value with setOpaqueResize() and get this property's value with opaqueResize().
-
                                                    Orientation orientation
                                                    
-
                                                    This property holds the orientation of the splitter.
-
                                                    By default the orientation is horizontal (the widgets are side by
-side). The possible orientations are Horizontal and
-Vertical.
-
-
                                                    Set this property's value with setOrientation() and get this property's value with orientation().
-
                                                    Related Functions
                                                    
-
                                                    TQTextStream & operator<< ( TQTextStream & ts, const TQSplitter & splitter )
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Writes the sizes and the hidden state of the widgets in the
-splitter splitter to the text stream ts.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also operator>>(), sizes(), and TQWidget::hidden.
-
-
                                                    TQTextStream & operator>> ( TQTextStream & ts, TQSplitter & splitter )
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Reads the sizes and the hidden state of the widgets in the
-splitter splitter from the text stream ts. The sizes must
-have been previously written by the operator<<() function.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also operator<<(), setSizes(), and TQWidget::hide().
-
-
-
                                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                                    
-
                                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsql-h.html b/doc/html/qsql-h.html
index ddfb32156..7e2799230 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsql-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsql-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsql.h Include File
+ntqsql.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                    TQSql Class Reference
                                                    [sql module]
                                                    
-
-
                                                    The TQSql class is a namespace for TQt SQL identifiers that
-need to be global-like.
-More...
-
                                                    #include <qsql.h>
-
                                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                                    Public Members
                                                    
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • TQSql ()
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • enum Op { None = -1, Insert = 0, Update = 1, Delete = 2 }
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • enum Location { BeforeFirst = -1, AfterLast = -2 }
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • enum Confirm { Cancel = -1, No = 0, Yes = 1 }
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • enum ParameterType { In = 1, Out = 2, InOut = 3 }
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • enum TableType { Tables = 0x01, SystemTables = 0x02, Views = 0x04, AllTables = 0xff }
                                                      • 
-
                                                    
-
                                                    Detailed Description
                                                    
-
-
-The TQSql class is a namespace for TQt SQL identifiers that
-need to be global-like.
-
                                                     
-
-
-
                                                     Normally, you can ignore this class. Several TQt SQL classes
-inherit it, so all the identifiers in the TQt SQL namespace are
-visible without qualification.
-
                                                    See also Database Classes.
-
-
                                                    Member Type Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSql::Confirm
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This enum type describes edit confirmations.
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • TQSql::Yes
-
                                                    • TQSql::No
-
                                                    • TQSql::Cancel
-
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSql::Location
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This enum type describes SQL navigation locations.
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • TQSql::BeforeFirst
-
                                                    • TQSql::AfterLast
-
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSql::Op
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This enum type describes edit operations.
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • TQSql::None
-
                                                    • TQSql::Insert
-
                                                    • TQSql::Update
-
                                                    • TQSql::Delete
-
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSql::ParameterType
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This enum is used to set the type of a bind parameter
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • TQSql::In - the bind parameter is used to put data into the database
-
                                                    • TQSql::Out - the bind parameter is used to receive data from the database
-
                                                    • TQSql::InOut - the bind parameter is used to put data into the
-database; it will be overwritten with output data on executing
-a query.
-
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSql::TableType
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This enum type describes types of tables
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • TQSql::Tables - All the tables visible to the user
-
                                                    • TQSql::SystemTables - Internal tables used by the DBMS
-
                                                    • TQSql::Views - All the views visible to the user
-
                                                    • TQSql::AllTables - All of the above
-
                                                    
-
                                                    Member Function Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSql::TQSql ()
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Constructs a TQt SQL namespace class
-
-
-
                                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                                    
-
                                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsqlcursor-h.html b/doc/html/qsqlcursor-h.html
index 6d1e46d24..b90513695 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsqlcursor-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsqlcursor-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsqlcursor.h Include File
+ntqsqlcursor.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                    TQSqlCursor Class Reference
                                                    [sql module]
                                                    
-
-
                                                    The TQSqlCursor class provides browsing and editing of SQL
-tables and views.
-More...
-
                                                    #include <qsqlcursor.h>
-
                                                    Inherits TQSqlRecord and TQSqlQuery.
-
                                                    Inherited by TQSqlSelectCursor.
-
                                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                                    Public Members
                                                    
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • TQSqlCursor ( const TQString & name = TQString::null, bool autopopulate = TRUE, TQSqlDatabase * db = 0 )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQSqlCursor ( const TQSqlCursor & other )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQSqlCursor & operator= ( const TQSqlCursor & other )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • ~TQSqlCursor ()
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • enum Mode { ReadOnly = 0, Insert = 1, Update = 2, Delete = 4, Writable = 7 }
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual TQSqlIndex primaryIndex ( bool setFromCursor = TRUE ) const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual TQSqlIndex index ( const TQStringList & fieldNames ) const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQSqlIndex index ( const TQString & fieldName ) const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQSqlIndex index ( const char * fieldName ) const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual void setPrimaryIndex ( const TQSqlIndex & idx )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual void append ( const TQSqlFieldInfo & fieldInfo )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual void insert ( int pos, const TQSqlFieldInfo & fieldInfo )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual void remove ( int pos )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual void clear ()
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual void setGenerated ( const TQString & name, bool generated )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual void setGenerated ( int i, bool generated )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual TQSqlRecord * editBuffer ( bool copy = FALSE )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual TQSqlRecord * primeInsert ()
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual TQSqlRecord * primeUpdate ()
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual TQSqlRecord * primeDelete ()
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual int insert ( bool invalidate = TRUE )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual int update ( bool invalidate = TRUE )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual int del ( bool invalidate = TRUE )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual void setMode ( int mode )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • int mode () const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual void setCalculated ( const TQString & name, bool calculated )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • bool isCalculated ( const TQString & name ) const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual void setTrimmed ( const TQString & name, bool trim )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • bool isTrimmed ( const TQString & name ) const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • bool isReadOnly () const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • bool canInsert () const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • bool canUpdate () const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • bool canDelete () const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • bool select ()
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • bool select ( const TQSqlIndex & sort )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • bool select ( const TQSqlIndex & filter, const TQSqlIndex & sort )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual bool select ( const TQString & filter, const TQSqlIndex & sort = TQSqlIndex ( ) )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual void setSort ( const TQSqlIndex & sort )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQSqlIndex sort () const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual void setFilter ( const TQString & filter )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQString filter () const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual void setName ( const TQString & name, bool autopopulate = TRUE )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQString name () const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • bool isNull ( int i ) const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • bool isNull ( const TQString & name ) const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    
-
                                                    Protected Members
                                                    
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • virtual TQVariant calculateField ( const TQString & name )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual int update ( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate = TRUE )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual int del ( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate = TRUE )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual TQString toString ( const TQString & prefix, TQSqlField * field, const TQString & fieldSep ) const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual TQString toString ( TQSqlRecord * rec, const TQString & prefix, const TQString & fieldSep, const TQString & sep ) const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual TQString toString ( const TQSqlIndex & i, TQSqlRecord * rec, const TQString & prefix, const TQString & fieldSep, const TQString & sep ) const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    
-
                                                    Detailed Description
                                                    
-
-
-The TQSqlCursor class provides browsing and editing of SQL
-tables and views.
-
                                                     
-
-
                                                     A TQSqlCursor is a database record (see TQSqlRecord) that
-corresponds to a table or view within an SQL database (see TQSqlDatabase). There are two buffers in a cursor, one used for
-browsing and one used for editing records. Each buffer contains a
-list of fields which correspond to the fields in the table or
-view.
-
                                                     When positioned on a valid record, the browse buffer contains the
-values of the current record's fields from the database. The edit
-buffer is separate, and is used for editing existing records and
-inserting new records.
-
                                                     For browsing data, a cursor must first select() data from the
-database. After a successful select() the cursor is active
-(isActive() returns TRUE), but is initially not positioned on a
-valid record (isValid() returns FALSE). To position the cursor on
-a valid record, use one of the navigation functions, next(),
-prev(), first(), last(), or seek(). Once positioned on a valid
-record, data can be retrieved from the browse buffer using
-value(). If a navigation function is not successful, it returns
-FALSE, the cursor will no longer be positioned on a valid record
-and the values returned by value() are undefined.
-
                                                     For example:
-
                                                     
-
-
                                                                TQSqlCursor cur( "staff" ); // Specify the table/view name
-            cur.select(); // We'll retrieve every record
-            while ( cur.next() ) {
-                qDebug( cur.value( "id" ).toString() + ": " +
-                        cur.value( "surname" ).toString() + " " +
-                        cur.value( "salary" ).toString() );
-            }
-
                                                    
-
                                                     In the above example, a cursor is created specifying a table or
-view name in the database. Then, select() is called, which can be
-optionally parameterised to filter and order the records
-retrieved. Each record in the cursor is retrieved using next().
-When next() returns FALSE, there are no more records to process,
-and the loop terminates.
-
                                                     For editing records (rows of data), a cursor contains a separate
-edit buffer which is independent of the fields used when browsing.
-The functions insert(), update() and del() operate on the edit
-buffer. This allows the cursor to be repositioned to other
-records while simultaneously maintaining a separate buffer for
-edits. You can get a pointer to the edit buffer using
-editBuffer(). The primeInsert(), primeUpdate() and primeDelete()
-functions also return a pointer to the edit buffer and prepare it
-for insert, update and delete respectively. Edit operations only
-affect a single row at a time. Note that update() and del()
-require that the table or view contain a primaryIndex() to ensure
-that edit operations affect a unique record within the database.
-
                                                     For example:
-
                                                     
-
-
                                                                TQSqlCursor cur( "prices" );
-            cur.select( "id=202" );
-            if ( cur.next() ) {
-                TQSqlRecord *buffer = cur.primeUpdate();
-                double price = buffer->value( "price" ).toDouble();
-                double newprice = price * 1.05;
-                buffer->setValue( "price", newprice );
-                cur.update();
-            }
-
                                                    
-
                                                     To edit an existing database record, first move to the record you
-wish to update. Call primeUpdate() to get the pointer to the
-cursor's edit buffer. Then use this pointer to modify the values
-in the edit buffer. Finally, call update() to save the changes to
-the database. The values in the edit buffer will be used to
-locate the appropriate record when updating the database (see
-primaryIndex()).
-
                                                     Similarly, when deleting an existing database record, first move
-to the record you wish to delete. Then, call primeDelete() to get
-the pointer to the edit buffer. Finally, call del() to delete the
-record from the database. Again, the values in the edit buffer
-will be used to locate and delete the appropriate record.
-
                                                     To insert a new record, call primeInsert() to get the pointer to
-the edit buffer. Use this pointer to populate the edit buffer
-with new values and then insert() the record into the database.
-
                                                     After calling insert(), update() or del(), the cursor is no longer
-positioned on a valid record and can no longer be navigated
-(isValid() return FALSE). The reason for this is that any changes
-made to the database will not be visible until select() is called
-to refresh the cursor. You can change this behavior by passing
-FALSE to insert(), update() or del() which will prevent the cursor
-from becoming invalid. The edits will still not be visible when
-navigating the cursor until select() is called.
-
                                                     TQSqlCursor contains virtual methods which allow editing behavior
-to be customized by subclasses. This allows custom cursors to be
-created that encapsulate the editing behavior of a database table
-for an entire application. For example, a cursor can be customized
-to always auto-number primary index fields, or provide fields with
-suitable default values, when inserting new records. TQSqlCursor
-generates SQL statements which are sent to the database engine;
-you can control which fields are included in these statements
-using setGenerated().
-
                                                     Note that TQSqlCursor does not inherit from TQObject. This means
-that you are responsible for destroying instances of this class
-yourself. However if you create a TQSqlCursor and use it in a
-TQDataTable, TQDataBrowser or a TQDataView these classes will
-usually take ownership of the cursor and destroy it when they
-don't need it anymore. The documentation for TQDataTable,
-TQDataBrowser and TQDataView explicitly states which calls take
-ownership of the cursor.
-
                                                    See also Database Classes.
-
-
                                                    Member Type Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSqlCursor::Mode
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This enum type describes how TQSqlCursor operates on records in the
-database.
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • TQSqlCursor::ReadOnly - the cursor can only SELECT records from the
-database.
-
                                                    • TQSqlCursor::Insert - the cursor can INSERT records into the database.
-
                                                    • TQSqlCursor::Update - the cursor can UPDATE records in the database.
-
                                                    • TQSqlCursor::Delete - the cursor can DELETE records from the database.
-
                                                    • TQSqlCursor::Writable - the cursor can INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE records
-in the database.
-
                                                    
-
                                                    Member Function Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSqlCursor::TQSqlCursor ( const TQString & name = TQString::null, bool autopopulate = TRUE, TQSqlDatabase * db = 0 )
-
                                                    
-Constructs a cursor on database db using table or view name.
-
                                                     If autopopulate is TRUE (the default), the name of the
-cursor must correspond to an existing table or view name in the
-database so that field information can be automatically created.
-If the table or view does not exist, the cursor will not be
-functional.
-
                                                     The cursor is created with an initial mode of TQSqlCursor::Writable
-(meaning that records can be inserted, updated or deleted using
-the cursor). If the cursor does not have a unique primary index,
-update and deletes cannot be performed.
-
                                                     Note that autopopulate refers to populating the cursor with
-meta-data, e.g. the names of the table's fields, not with
-retrieving data. The select() function is used to populate the
-cursor with data.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setName() and setMode().
-
-
                                                    TQSqlCursor::TQSqlCursor ( const TQSqlCursor & other )
-
                                                    
-Constructs a copy of other.
-
-
                                                    TQSqlCursor::~TQSqlCursor ()
-
                                                    
-Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-
-
                                                    void TQSqlCursor::append ( const TQSqlFieldInfo & fieldInfo ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Append a copy of field fieldInfo to the end of the cursor. Note
-that all references to the cursor edit buffer become invalidated.
-
-
                                                    TQVariant TQSqlCursor::calculateField ( const TQString & name ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                    
-Protected virtual function which is called whenever a field needs
-to be calculated. If calculated fields are being used, derived
-classes must reimplement this function and return the appropriate
-value for field name. The default implementation returns an
-invalid TQVariant.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setCalculated().
-
-
                                                    Examples: sql/overview/subclass3/main.cpp and sql/overview/subclass4/main.cpp.
-
                                                    bool TQSqlCursor::canDelete () const
-
                                                    
-Returns TRUE if the cursor will perform deletes; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setMode().
-
-
                                                    bool TQSqlCursor::canInsert () const
-
                                                    
-Returns TRUE if the cursor will perform inserts; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setMode().
-
-
                                                    bool TQSqlCursor::canUpdate () const
-
                                                    
-Returns TRUE if the cursor will perform updates; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setMode().
-
-
                                                    void TQSqlCursor::clear () [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Removes all fields from the cursor. Note that all references to
-the cursor edit buffer become invalidated.
-
-
                                                    Reimplemented from TQSqlRecord.
-
                                                    int TQSqlCursor::del ( bool invalidate = TRUE ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Deletes a record from the database using the cursor's primary
-index and the contents of the cursor edit buffer. Returns the
-number of records which were deleted.
-For error information, use lastError().
-
                                                     Only records which meet the filter criteria specified by the
-cursor's primary index are deleted. If the cursor does not contain
-a primary index, no delete is performed and 0 is returned. If invalidate is TRUE (the default), the current cursor can no longer
-be navigated. A new select() call must be made before you can move
-to a valid record. For example:
-
                                                     
-
-
                                                                TQSqlCursor cur( "prices" );
-            cur.select( "id=999" );
-            if ( cur.next() ) {
-                cur.primeDelete();
-                cur.del();
-            }
-
                                                    
-
                                                     In the above example, a cursor is created on the 'prices' table
-and positioned to the record to be deleted. First primeDelete() is
-called to populate the edit buffer with the current cursor values,
-e.g. with an id of 999, and then del() is called to actually
-delete the record from the database. Remember: all edit operations
-(insert(), update() and delete()) operate on the contents of the
-cursor edit buffer and not on the contents of the cursor itself.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also primeDelete(), setMode(), and lastError().
-
-
                                                    Example: sql/overview/delete/main.cpp.
-
                                                    int TQSqlCursor::del ( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate = TRUE ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     Deletes the current cursor record from the database using the
-filter filter. Only records which meet the filter criteria are
-deleted. Returns the number of records which were deleted. If invalidate is TRUE (the default), the current cursor can no longer
-be navigated. A new select() call must be made before you can move
-to a valid record. For error information, use lastError().
-
                                                     The filter is an SQL WHERE clause, e.g. id=500.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setMode() and lastError().
-
-
                                                    TQSqlRecord * TQSqlCursor::editBuffer ( bool copy = FALSE ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Returns the current internal edit buffer. If copy is TRUE (the
-default is FALSE), the current cursor field values are first
-copied into the edit buffer. The edit buffer is valid as long as
-the cursor remains valid. The cursor retains ownership of the
-returned pointer, so it must not be deleted or modified.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also primeInsert(), primeUpdate(), and primeDelete().
-
-
                                                    TQString TQSqlCursor::filter () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the current filter, or an empty string if there is no
-current filter.
-
-
                                                    TQSqlIndex TQSqlCursor::index ( const TQStringList & fieldNames ) const [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Returns an index composed of fieldNames, all in ASCending
-order. Note that all field names must exist in the cursor,
-otherwise an empty index is returned.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also TQSqlIndex.
-
-
                                                    Examples: sql/overview/extract/main.cpp, sql/overview/order1/main.cpp, sql/overview/order2/main.cpp, and sql/overview/table3/main.cpp.
-
                                                    TQSqlIndex TQSqlCursor::index ( const TQString & fieldName ) const
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     Returns an index based on fieldName.
-
-
                                                    TQSqlIndex TQSqlCursor::index ( const char * fieldName ) const
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     Returns an index based on fieldName.
-
-
                                                    void TQSqlCursor::insert ( int pos, const TQSqlFieldInfo & fieldInfo ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Insert a copy of fieldInfo at position pos. If a field
-already exists at pos, it is removed. Note that all references
-to the cursor edit buffer become invalidated.
-
-
                                                    Examples: sql/overview/insert/main.cpp and sql/overview/insert2/main.cpp.
-
                                                    int TQSqlCursor::insert ( bool invalidate = TRUE ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     Inserts the current contents of the cursor's edit record buffer
-into the database, if the cursor allows inserts. Returns the
-number of rows affected by the insert. For error information, use
-lastError().
-
                                                     If invalidate is TRUE (the default), the cursor will no longer
-be positioned on a valid record and can no longer be navigated. A
-new select() call must be made before navigating to a valid
-record.
-
                                                     
-
-
                                                                TQSqlCursor cur( "prices" );
-            TQSqlRecord *buffer = cur.primeInsert();
-            buffer->setValue( "id",    53981 );
-            buffer->setValue( "name",  "Thingy" );
-            buffer->setValue( "price", 105.75 );
-            cur.insert();
-
                                                    
-
                                                     In the above example, a cursor is created on the 'prices' table
-and a pointer to the insert buffer is atquired using primeInsert().
-Each field's value is set to the desired value and then insert()
-is called to insert the data into the database. Remember: all edit
-operations (insert(), update() and delete()) operate on the
-contents of the cursor edit buffer and not on the contents of the
-cursor itself.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setMode() and lastError().
-
-
                                                    bool TQSqlCursor::isCalculated ( const TQString & name ) const
-
                                                    
-Returns TRUE if the field name exists and is calculated;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setCalculated().
-
-
                                                    bool TQSqlCursor::isNull ( int i ) const
-
                                                    
-Returns TRUE if the field i is NULL or if there is no field at
-position i; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                     This is the same as calling TQSqlRecord::isNull( i )
-
-
                                                    bool TQSqlCursor::isNull ( const TQString & name ) const
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     Returns TRUE if the field called name is NULL or if there is no
-field called name; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                     This is the same as calling TQSqlRecord::isNull( name )
-
-
                                                    bool TQSqlCursor::isReadOnly () const
-
                                                    
-Returns TRUE if the cursor is read-only; otherwise returns FALSE.
-The default is FALSE. Read-only cursors cannot be edited using
-insert(), update() or del().
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setMode().
-
-
                                                    bool TQSqlCursor::isTrimmed ( const TQString & name ) const
-
                                                    
-Returns TRUE if the field name exists and is trimmed; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                                                     When a trimmed field of type string or cstring is read from the
-database any trailing (right-most) spaces are removed.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setTrimmed().
-
-
                                                    int TQSqlCursor::mode () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the current cursor mode.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setMode().
-
-
                                                    TQString TQSqlCursor::name () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the name of the cursor.
-
-
                                                    TQSqlCursor & TQSqlCursor::operator= ( const TQSqlCursor & other )
-
                                                    
-Sets the cursor equal to other.
-
-
                                                    TQSqlIndex TQSqlCursor::primaryIndex ( bool setFromCursor = TRUE ) const [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Returns the primary index associated with the cursor as defined in
-the database, or an empty index if there is no primary index. If
-setFromCursor is TRUE (the default), the index fields are
-populated with the corresponding values in the cursor's current
-record.
-
-
                                                    TQSqlRecord * TQSqlCursor::primeDelete () [virtual]
-
                                                    
-This function primes the edit buffer's field values for delete and
-returns the edit buffer. The default implementation copies the
-field values from the current cursor record into the edit buffer
-(therefore, this function is equivalent to calling editBuffer(
-TRUE ) ). The cursor retains ownership of the returned pointer, so
-it must not be deleted or modified.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also editBuffer() and del().
-
-
                                                    Example: sql/overview/delete/main.cpp.
-
                                                    TQSqlRecord * TQSqlCursor::primeInsert () [virtual]
-
                                                    
-This function primes the edit buffer's field values for insert and
-returns the edit buffer. The default implementation clears all
-field values in the edit buffer. The cursor retains ownership of
-the returned pointer, so it must not be deleted or modified.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also editBuffer() and insert().
-
-
                                                    Examples: sql/overview/insert/main.cpp, sql/overview/insert2/main.cpp, sql/overview/subclass5/main.cpp, and sql/sqltable/main.cpp.
-
                                                    TQSqlRecord * TQSqlCursor::primeUpdate () [virtual]
-
                                                    
-This function primes the edit buffer's field values for update and
-returns the edit buffer. The default implementation copies the
-field values from the current cursor record into the edit buffer
-(therefore, this function is equivalent to calling editBuffer(
-TRUE ) ). The cursor retains ownership of the returned pointer, so
-it must not be deleted or modified.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also editBuffer() and update().
-
-
                                                    Examples: sql/overview/custom1/main.cpp, sql/overview/form1/main.cpp, and sql/overview/update/main.cpp.
-
                                                    void TQSqlCursor::remove ( int pos ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Removes the field at pos. If pos does not exist, nothing
-happens. Note that all references to the cursor edit buffer become
-invalidated.
-
-
                                                    Reimplemented from TQSqlRecord.
-
                                                    bool TQSqlCursor::select ( const TQString & filter, const TQSqlIndex & sort = TQSqlIndex ( ) ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Selects all fields in the cursor from the database matching the
-filter criteria filter. The data is returned in the order
-specified by the index sort. Returns TRUE if the data was
-successfully selected; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                     The filter is a string containing a SQL WHERE clause but
-without the 'WHERE' keyword. The cursor is initially positioned at
-an invalid row after this function is called. To move to a valid
-row, use seek(), first(), last(), prev() or next().
-
                                                     Example:
-
                                                    -    TQSqlCursor cur( "Employee" ); // Use the Employee table or view
-    cur.select( "deptno=10" ); // select all records in department 10
-    while( cur.next() ) {
-        ... // process data
-    }
-    ...
-    // select records in other departments, ordered by department number
-    cur.select( "deptno>10", cur.index( "deptno" ) );
-    ...
-    
                                                    
- 
-
                                                     The filter will apply to any subsequent select() calls that do not
-explicitly specify another filter. Similarly the sort will apply
-to any subsequent select() calls that do not explicitly specify
-another sort.
-
                                                     
                                                    -    TQSqlCursor cur( "Employee" );
-    cur.select( "deptno=10" ); // select all records in department 10
-    while( cur.next() ) {
-        ... // process data
-    }
-    ...
-    cur.select(); // re-selects all records in department 10
-    ...
-    
                                                    
- 
-
                                                     
-
                                                    Examples: sql/overview/delete/main.cpp, sql/overview/extract/main.cpp, sql/overview/order1/main.cpp, sql/overview/order2/main.cpp, sql/overview/retrieve2/main.cpp, sql/overview/table3/main.cpp, and sql/overview/update/main.cpp.
-
                                                    bool TQSqlCursor::select ()
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     Selects all fields in the cursor from the database. The rows are
-returned in the order specified by the last call to setSort() or
-the last call to select() that specified a sort, whichever is the
-most recent. If there is no current sort, the order in which the
-rows are returned is undefined. The records are filtered according
-to the filter specified by the last call to setFilter() or the
-last call to select() that specified a filter, whichever is the
-most recent. If there is no current filter, all records are
-returned. The cursor is initially positioned at an invalid row. To
-move to a valid row, use seek(), first(), last(), prev() or
-next().
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setSort() and setFilter().
-
-
                                                    bool TQSqlCursor::select ( const TQSqlIndex & sort )
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     Selects all fields in the cursor from the database. The data is
-returned in the order specified by the index sort. The records
-are filtered according to the filter specified by the last call to
-setFilter() or the last call to select() that specified a filter,
-whichever is the most recent. The cursor is initially positioned
-at an invalid row. To move to a valid row, use seek(), first(),
-last(), prev() or next().
-
-
                                                    bool TQSqlCursor::select ( const TQSqlIndex & filter, const TQSqlIndex & sort )
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     Selects all fields in the cursor matching the filter index filter. The data is returned in the order specified by the index
-sort. The filter index works by constructing a WHERE clause
-using the names of the fields from the filter and their values
-from the current cursor record. The cursor is initially positioned
-at an invalid row. To move to a valid row, use seek(), first(),
-last(), prev() or next(). This function is useful, for example,
-for retrieving data based upon a table's primary index:
-
                                                     
                                                    -    TQSqlCursor cur( "Employee" );
-    TQSqlIndex pk = cur.primaryIndex();
-    cur.setValue( "id", 10 );
-    cur.select( pk, pk ); // generates "SELECT ... FROM Employee WHERE id=10 ORDER BY id"
-    ...
-    
                                                    
- 
-
                                                     In this example the TQSqlIndex, pk, is used for two different
-purposes. When used as the filter (first) argument, the field
-names it contains are used to construct the WHERE clause, each set
-to the current cursor value, WHERE id=10, in this case. When
-used as the sort (second) argument the field names it contains are
-used for the ORDER BY clause, ORDER BY id in this example.
-
-
                                                    void TQSqlCursor::setCalculated ( const TQString & name, bool calculated ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Sets field name to calculated. If the field name does not
-exist, nothing happens. The value of a calculated field is set by
-the calculateField() virtual function which you must reimplement
-(or the field value will be an invalid TQVariant). Calculated
-fields do not appear in generated SQL statements sent to the
-database.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also calculateField() and TQSqlRecord::setGenerated().
-
-
                                                    void TQSqlCursor::setFilter ( const TQString & filter ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Sets the current filter to filter. Note that no new records are
-selected. To select new records, use select(). The filter will
-apply to any subsequent select() calls that do not explicitly
-specify a filter.
-
                                                     The filter is a SQL WHERE clause without the keyword 'WHERE',
-e.g. name='Dave' which will be processed by the DBMS.
-
-
                                                    void TQSqlCursor::setGenerated ( const TQString & name, bool generated ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Sets the generated flag for the field name to generated. If
-the field does not exist, nothing happens. Only fields that have
-generated set to TRUE are included in the SQL that is
-generated by insert(), update() or del().
-
                                                     
                                                    See also isGenerated().
-
-
                                                    Reimplemented from TQSqlRecord.
-
                                                    void TQSqlCursor::setGenerated ( int i, bool generated ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     Sets the generated flag for the field i to generated.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also isGenerated().
-
-
                                                    Reimplemented from TQSqlRecord.
-
                                                    void TQSqlCursor::setMode ( int mode ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Sets the cursor mode to mode. This value can be an OR'ed
-combination of TQSqlCursor::Mode values. The default mode for a
-cursor is TQSqlCursor::Writable.
-
                                                     
                                                    -    TQSqlCursor cur( "Employee" );
-    cur.setMode( TQSqlCursor::Writable ); // allow insert/update/delete
-    ...
-    cur.setMode( TQSqlCursor::Insert | TQSqlCursor::Update ); // allow inserts and updates only
-    ...
-    cur.setMode( TQSqlCursor::ReadOnly ); // no inserts/updates/deletes allowed
-
-    
                                                    
- 
-
-
                                                    void TQSqlCursor::setName ( const TQString & name, bool autopopulate = TRUE ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Sets the name of the cursor to name. If autopopulate is TRUE
-(the default), the name must correspond to a valid table or
-view name in the database. Also, note that all references to the
-cursor edit buffer become invalidated when fields are
-auto-populated. See the TQSqlCursor constructor documentation for
-more information.
-
-
                                                    void TQSqlCursor::setPrimaryIndex ( const TQSqlIndex & idx ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Sets the primary index associated with the cursor to the index idx. Note that this index must contain a field or set of fields
-which identify a unique record within the underlying database
-table or view so that update() and del() will execute as expected.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also update() and del().
-
-
                                                    void TQSqlCursor::setSort ( const TQSqlIndex & sort ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Sets the current sort to sort. Note that no new records are
-selected. To select new records, use select(). The sort will
-apply to any subsequent select() calls that do not explicitly
-specify a sort.
-
-
                                                    void TQSqlCursor::setTrimmed ( const TQString & name, bool trim ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Sets field name's trimmed status to trim. If the field name does not exist, nothing happens.
-
                                                     When a trimmed field of type string or cstring is read from the
-database any trailing (right-most) spaces are removed.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also isTrimmed() and TQVariant.
-
-
                                                    TQSqlIndex TQSqlCursor::sort () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the current sort, or an empty index if there is no current
-sort.
-
-
                                                    TQString TQSqlCursor::toString ( TQSqlRecord * rec, const TQString & prefix, const TQString & fieldSep, const TQString & sep ) const [virtual protected]
-
                                                    
-Returns a formatted string composed of all the fields in rec.
-Each field is composed of the prefix (e.g. table or view name),
-".", the field name, the fieldSep and the field value. If the
-prefix is empty then each field will begin with the field name.
-The fields are then joined together separated by sep. Fields
-where isGenerated() returns FALSE are not included. This function
-is useful for generating SQL statements.
-
-
                                                    TQString TQSqlCursor::toString ( const TQString & prefix, TQSqlField * field, const TQString & fieldSep ) const [virtual protected]
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     Returns a formatted string composed of the prefix (e.g. table
-or view name), ".", the field name, the fieldSep and the
-field value. If the prefix is empty then the string will begin
-with the field name. This function is useful for generating SQL
-statements.
-
-
                                                    TQString TQSqlCursor::toString ( const TQSqlIndex & i, TQSqlRecord * rec, const TQString & prefix, const TQString & fieldSep, const TQString & sep ) const [virtual protected]
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     Returns a formatted string composed of all the fields in the index
-i. Each field is composed of the prefix (e.g. table or view
-name), ".", the field name, the fieldSep and the field value.
-If the prefix is empty then each field will begin with the field
-name. The field values are taken from rec. The fields are then
-joined together separated by sep. Fields where isGenerated()
-returns FALSE are ignored. This function is useful for generating
-SQL statements.
-
-
                                                    int TQSqlCursor::update ( bool invalidate = TRUE ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Updates the database with the current contents of the edit buffer.
-Returns the number of records which were updated.
-For error information, use lastError().
-
                                                     Only records which meet the filter criteria specified by the
-cursor's primary index are updated. If the cursor does not contain
-a primary index, no update is performed and 0 is returned.
-
                                                     If invalidate is TRUE (the default), the current cursor can no
-longer be navigated. A new select() call must be made before you
-can move to a valid record. For example:
-
                                                     
-
-
                                                                TQSqlCursor cur( "prices" );
-            cur.select( "id=202" );
-            if ( cur.next() ) {
-                TQSqlRecord *buffer = cur.primeUpdate();
-                double price = buffer->value( "price" ).toDouble();
-                double newprice = price * 1.05;
-                buffer->setValue( "price", newprice );
-                cur.update();
-            }
-
                                                    
-
                                                     In the above example, a cursor is created on the 'prices' table
-and is positioned on the record to be updated. Then a pointer to
-the cursor's edit buffer is actquired using primeUpdate(). A new
-value is calculated and placed into the edit buffer with the
-setValue() call. Finally, an update() call is made on the cursor
-which uses the tables's primary index to update the record in the
-database with the contents of the cursor's edit buffer. Remember:
-all edit operations (insert(), update() and delete()) operate on
-the contents of the cursor edit buffer and not on the contents of
-the cursor itself.
-
                                                     Note that if the primary index does not uniquely distinguish
-records the database may be changed into an inconsistent state.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setMode() and lastError().
-
-
                                                    Example: sql/overview/update/main.cpp.
-
                                                    int TQSqlCursor::update ( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate = TRUE ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     Updates the database with the current contents of the cursor edit
-buffer using the specified filter. Returns the number of
-records which were updated.
-For error information, use lastError().
-
                                                     Only records which meet the filter criteria are updated, otherwise
-all records in the table are updated.
-
                                                     If invalidate is TRUE (the default), the cursor can no longer
-be navigated. A new select() call must be made before you can move
-to a valid record.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also primeUpdate(), setMode(), and lastError().
-
-
-
                                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                                    
-
                                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsqldatabase-h.html b/doc/html/qsqldatabase-h.html
index 903cd495b..655ece56e 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsqldatabase-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsqldatabase-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsqldatabase.h Include File
+ntqsqldatabase.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                    TQSqlDatabase Class Reference
                                                    [sql module]
                                                    
-
-
                                                    The TQSqlDatabase class is used to create SQL database
-connections and to provide transaction handling.
-More...
-
                                                    #include <qsqldatabase.h>
-
                                                    Inherits TQObject.
-
                                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                                    Public Members
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Static Public Members
                                                    
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • TQSqlDatabase * addDatabase ( const TQString & type, const TQString & connectionName = defaultConnection )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQSqlDatabase * addDatabase ( TQSqlDriver * driver, const TQString & connectionName = defaultConnection )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQSqlDatabase * database ( const TQString & connectionName = defaultConnection, bool open = TRUE )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • void removeDatabase ( const TQString & connectionName )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • void removeDatabase ( TQSqlDatabase * db )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • bool contains ( const TQString & connectionName = defaultConnection )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQStringList drivers ()
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • void registerSqlDriver ( const TQString & name, const TQSqlDriverCreatorBase * creator )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • bool isDriverAvailable ( const TQString & name )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    
-
                                                    Properties
                                                    
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • TQString connectOptions - the database connect options
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQString databaseName - the name of the database
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQString hostName - the host name where the database resides
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQString password - the password used to connect to the database
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • int port - the port used to connect to the database
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQString userName - the user name connected to the database
                                                      • 
-
                                                    
-
                                                    Protected Members
                                                    
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • TQSqlDatabase ( const TQString & type, const TQString & name, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * objname = 0 )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQSqlDatabase ( TQSqlDriver * driver, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * objname = 0 )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    
-
                                                    Detailed Description
                                                    
-
-
-The TQSqlDatabase class is used to create SQL database
-connections and to provide transaction handling.
-
                                                     
-
-
-
                                                     Note that transaction handling is not supported by every SQL
-database. You can find out whether transactions are supported
-using TQSqlDriver::hasFeature().
-
                                                     The TQSqlDatabase class provides an abstract interface for
-accessing many types of database backends. Database-specific
-drivers are used internally to actually access and manipulate
-data, (see TQSqlDriver). Result set objects provide the interface
-for executing and manipulating SQL queries (see TQSqlQuery).
-
                                                    See also Database Classes.
-
-
                                                    Member Function Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSqlDatabase::TQSqlDatabase ( const TQString & type, const TQString & name, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * objname = 0 ) [protected]
-
                                                    
-Creates a TQSqlDatabase connection called name that uses the
-driver referred to by type, with the parent parent and the
-object name objname. If the type is not recognized, the
-database connection will have no functionality.
-
                                                     The currently available drivers are:
-
                                                     
                                                    
-
                                                     Driver Type Description
-
                                                     TQODBC3 ODBC Driver (includes Microsoft SQL Server)
-
                                                     TQOCI8 Oracle Call Interface Driver
-
                                                     TQPSQL7 PostgreSQL v6.x and v7.x Driver
-
                                                     TQTDS7 Sybase Adaptive Server
-
                                                     TQMYSQL3 MySQL Driver
-
                                                     TQDB2 IBM DB2, v7.1 and higher
-
                                                     TQSQLITE SQLite Driver
-
                                                     TQIBASE Borland Interbase Driver
-
                                                    
-
                                                     Additional third party drivers, including your own custom drivers,
-can be loaded dynamically.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also registerSqlDriver().
-
-
                                                    TQSqlDatabase::TQSqlDatabase ( TQSqlDriver * driver, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * objname = 0 ) [protected]
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     Creates a database connection using the driver driver, with
-the parent parent and the object name objname.
-
                                                     Warning: The framework takes ownership of the driver pointer,
-so it should not be deleted.
-
-
                                                    TQSqlDatabase::~TQSqlDatabase ()
-
                                                    
-Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-
-
                                                    TQSqlDatabase * TQSqlDatabase::addDatabase ( const TQString & type, const TQString & connectionName = defaultConnection ) [static]
-
                                                    
-Adds a database to the list of database connections using the
-driver type and the connection name connectionName.
-
                                                     The database connection is referred to by connectionName. The
-newly added database connection is returned. This pointer is owned
-by TQSqlDatabase and will be deleted on program exit or when
-removeDatabase() is called.
-
                                                     If connectionName is not specified, the newly added database
-connection becomes the default database connection for the
-application, and subsequent calls to database() (without a
-database name parameter) will return a pointer to it. If connectionName is given, use database(connectionName) to retrieve a pointer to the
-database connection.
-
                                                     Warning: If you add a database with the same name as an
-existing database, the new database will replace the old one.
-This will happen automatically if you call this function more
-than once without specifying connectionName.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also database() and removeDatabase().
-
-
                                                    Examples: sql/overview/connect1/main.cpp, sql/overview/connection.cpp, and sql/sqltable/main.cpp.
-
                                                    TQSqlDatabase * TQSqlDatabase::addDatabase ( TQSqlDriver * driver, const TQString & connectionName = defaultConnection ) [static]
-
                                                     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     This function is useful if you need to set up the database
-connection and instantiate the driver yourself. If you do this, it
-is recommended that you include the driver code in your own
-application. For example, setting up a custom PostgreSQL
-connection and instantiating the TQPSQL7 driver can be done the
-following way:
-
                                                     
                                                    -    #include "qtdir/src/sql/drivers/psql/qsql_psql.cpp"
-    
                                                    
- 
-(We assume that qtdir is the directory where TQt is installed.)
-This will pull in the code that is needed to use the PostgreSQL
-client library and to instantiate a TQPSQLDriver object, assuming
-that you have the PostgreSQL headers somewhere in your include
-search path.
-
                                                     
                                                    -    PGconn* con = PQconnectdb( "host=server user=bart password=simpson dbname=springfield" );
-    TQPSQLDriver* drv =  new TQPSQLDriver( con );
-    TQSqlDatabase* db = TQSqlDatabase::addDatabase( drv ); // becomes the new default connection
-    TQSqlQuery q;
-    q.exec( "SELECT * FROM people" );
-    ...
-    
                                                    
- 
-
                                                     The above code sets up a PostgreSQL connection and instantiates a
-TQPSQLDriver object. Next, addDatabase() is called to add the
-connection to the known connections so that it can be used by the
-TQt SQL classes. When a driver is instantiated with a connection
-handle (or set of handles), TQt assumes that you have already
-opened the database connection.
-
                                                     Remember that you must link your application against the database
-client library as well. The simplest way to do this is to add
-lines like those below to your .pro file:
-
                                                     
                                                    -    unix:LIBS += -lpq
-    win32:LIBS += libpqdll.lib
-    
                                                    
- 
-
                                                     You will need to have the client library in your linker's search
-path.
-
                                                     The method described above will work for all the drivers, the only
-difference is the arguments the driver constructors take. Below is
-an overview of the drivers and their constructor arguments.
-
                                                     
                                                    
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                     Driver Class name Constructor arguments File to include
-
                                                    TQPSQL7
-TQPSQLDriver
-PGconn* connection
-qsql_psql.cpp
-
                                                    TQMYSQL3
-TQMYSQLDriver
-MYSQL* connection
-qsql_mysql.cpp
-
                                                    TQOCI8
-TQOCIDriver
-OCIEnv* environment, OCIError* error, OCISvcCtx* serviceContext
-qsql_oci.cpp
-
                                                    TQODBC3
-TQODBCDriver
-SQLHANDLE environment, SQLHANDLE connection
-qsql_odbc.cpp
-
                                                    TQDB2
-TQDB2
-SQLHANDLE environment, SQLHANDLE connection
-qsql_db2.cpp
-
                                                    TQTDS7
-TQTDSDriver
-LOGINREC* loginRecord, DBPROCESS* dbProcess, const TQString& hostName
-qsql_tds.cpp
-
                                                    TQSQLITE
-TQSQLiteDriver
-sqlite* connection
-qsql_sqlite.cpp
-
                                                    TQIBASE
-TQIBaseDriver
-isc_db_handle connection
-qsql_ibase.cpp
-
                                                    
-
                                                     Note: The host name (or service name) is needed when constructing
-the TQTDSDriver for creating new connections for internal
-queries. This is to prevent the simultaneous usage of several
-TQSqlQuery/TQSqlCursor objects from blocking each other.
-
                                                     Warning: The SQL framework takes ownership of the driver pointer,
-and it should not be deleted. The returned TQSqlDatabase object is
-owned by the framework and must not be deleted. If you want to
-explicitly remove the connection, use removeDatabase()
-
                                                     
                                                    See also drivers().
-
-
                                                    void TQSqlDatabase::close ()
-
                                                    
-Closes the database connection, freeing any resources actquired.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also removeDatabase().
-
-
                                                    bool TQSqlDatabase::commit ()
-
                                                    
-Commits a transaction to the database if the driver supports
-transactions. Returns TRUE if the operation succeeded; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also TQSqlDriver::hasFeature() and rollback().
-
-
                                                    TQString TQSqlDatabase::connectOptions () const
-
                                                    Returns the database connect options.
-See the "connectOptions" property for details.
-
                                                    bool TQSqlDatabase::contains ( const TQString & connectionName = defaultConnection ) [static]
-
                                                    
-Returns TRUE if the list of database connections contains connectionName; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                    TQSqlDatabase * TQSqlDatabase::database ( const TQString & connectionName = defaultConnection, bool open = TRUE ) [static]
-
                                                    
-Returns the database connection called connectionName. The
-database connection must have been previously added with
-addDatabase(). If open is TRUE (the default) and the database
-connection is not already open it is opened now. If no connectionName is specified the default connection is used. If connectionName does not exist in the list of databases, 0 is
-returned. The pointer returned is owned by TQSqlDatabase and should
-not be deleted.
-
                                                     Warning: There are restrictions on the use of database connections
-in threaded applications. Please see the Thread Support in TQt document for more information about
-threading and SQL databases.
-
-
                                                    Examples: sql/overview/basicbrowsing/main.cpp and sql/overview/create_connections/main.cpp.
-
                                                    TQString TQSqlDatabase::databaseName () const
-
                                                    Returns the name of the database.
-See the "databaseName" property for details.
-
                                                    TQSqlDriver * TQSqlDatabase::driver () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the database driver used to access the database
-connection.
-
-
                                                    TQString TQSqlDatabase::driverName () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the name of the driver used by the database connection.
-
-
                                                    TQStringList TQSqlDatabase::drivers () [static]
-
                                                    
-Returns a list of all the available database drivers.
-
                                                     Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
-over a copy, e.g.
-
                                                    -    TQStringList list = TQSqlDatabase::drivers();
-    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    while( it != list.end() ) {
-        myProcessing( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-    
                                                    
- 
-
-
                                                    TQSqlQuery TQSqlDatabase::exec ( const TQString & query = TQString::null ) const
-
                                                    
-Executes a SQL statement (e.g. an INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE statement) on the database, and returns a TQSqlQuery object.
-Use lastError() to retrieve error information. If query is
-TQString::null, an empty, invalid query is returned and lastError()
-is not affected.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also TQSqlQuery and lastError().
-
-
                                                    TQString TQSqlDatabase::hostName () const
-
                                                    Returns the host name where the database resides.
-See the "hostName" property for details.
-
                                                    bool TQSqlDatabase::isDriverAvailable ( const TQString & name ) [static]
-
                                                    
-Returns TRUE if a driver called name is available; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also drivers().
-
-
                                                    bool TQSqlDatabase::isOpen () const
-
                                                    
-Returns TRUE if the database connection is currently open;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                    bool TQSqlDatabase::isOpenError () const
-
                                                    
-Returns TRUE if there was an error opening the database
-connection; otherwise returns FALSE. Error information can be
-retrieved using the lastError() function.
-
-
                                                    TQSqlError TQSqlDatabase::lastError () const
-
                                                    
-Returns information about the last error that occurred on the
-database. See TQSqlError for more information.
-
-
                                                    Examples: sql/overview/connection.cpp and sql/sqltable/main.cpp.
-
                                                    bool TQSqlDatabase::open ()
-
                                                    
-Opens the database connection using the current connection values.
-Returns TRUE on success; otherwise returns FALSE. Error
-information can be retrieved using the lastError() function.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also lastError().
-
-
                                                    Examples: sql/overview/connect1/main.cpp, sql/overview/connection.cpp, and sql/sqltable/main.cpp.
-
                                                    bool TQSqlDatabase::open ( const TQString & user, const TQString & password )
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     Opens the database connection using the given user name and password. Returns TRUE on success; otherwise returns FALSE. Error
-information can be retrieved using the lastError() function.
-
                                                     This function does not store the password it is given. Instead,
-the password is passed directly to the driver for opening a
-connection and is then discarded.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also lastError().
-
-
                                                    TQString TQSqlDatabase::password () const
-
                                                    Returns the password used to connect to the database.
-See the "password" property for details.
-
                                                    int TQSqlDatabase::port () const
-
                                                    Returns the port used to connect to the database.
-See the "port" property for details.
-
                                                    TQSqlIndex TQSqlDatabase::primaryIndex ( const TQString & tablename ) const
-
                                                    
-Returns the primary index for table tablename. If no primary
-index exists an empty TQSqlIndex will be returned.
-
-
                                                    TQSqlRecord TQSqlDatabase::record ( const TQString & tablename ) const
-
                                                    
-Returns a TQSqlRecord populated with the names of all the fields in
-the table (or view) called tablename. The order in which the
-fields appear in the record is undefined. If no such table (or
-view) exists, an empty record is returned.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also recordInfo().
-
-
                                                    TQSqlRecord TQSqlDatabase::record ( const TQSqlQuery & query ) const
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     Returns a TQSqlRecord populated with the names of all the fields
-used in the SQL query. If the query is a "SELECT *" the order
-in which fields appear in the record is undefined.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also recordInfo().
-
-
                                                    TQSqlRecordInfo TQSqlDatabase::recordInfo ( const TQString & tablename ) const
-
                                                    
-Returns a TQSqlRecordInfo populated with meta data about the table
-or view tablename. If no such table (or view) exists, an empty
-record is returned.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also TQSqlRecordInfo, TQSqlFieldInfo, and record().
-
-
                                                    TQSqlRecordInfo TQSqlDatabase::recordInfo ( const TQSqlQuery & query ) const
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     Returns a TQSqlRecordInfo object with meta data for the TQSqlQuery
-query. Note that this overloaded function may return less
-information than the recordInfo() function which takes the name of
-a table as parameter.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also TQSqlRecordInfo, TQSqlFieldInfo, and record().
-
-
                                                    void TQSqlDatabase::registerSqlDriver ( const TQString & name, const TQSqlDriverCreatorBase * creator ) [static]
-
                                                    
-This function registers a new SQL driver called name, within
-the SQL framework. This is useful if you have a custom SQL driver
-and don't want to compile it as a plugin.
-
                                                     Example usage:
-
                                                     
                                                    -    TQSqlDatabase::registerSqlDriver( "MYDRIVER", new TQSqlDriverCreator<MyDatabaseDriver> );
-    TQSqlDatabase* db = TQSqlDatabase::addDatabase( "MYDRIVER" );
-    ...
-    
                                                    
- 
-
                                                     Warning: The framework takes ownership of the creator pointer,
-so it should not be deleted.
-
-
                                                    void TQSqlDatabase::removeDatabase ( const TQString & connectionName ) [static]
-
                                                    
-Removes the database connection connectionName from the list of
-database connections.
-
                                                     Warning: There should be no open queries on the database
-connection when this function is called, otherwise a resource leak
-will occur.
-
-
                                                    void TQSqlDatabase::removeDatabase ( TQSqlDatabase * db ) [static]
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     Removes the database connection db from the list of database
-connections. The TQSqlDatabase object is destroyed when it is removed
-from the list.
-
                                                     Warning: The db pointer is not valid after this function has
-been called. There should be no open queries on the database
-connection when this function is called, otherwise a resource leak
-will occur.
-
-
                                                    bool TQSqlDatabase::rollback ()
-
                                                    
-Rolls a transaction back on the database if the driver supports
-transactions. Returns TRUE if the operation succeeded; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also TQSqlDriver::hasFeature(), commit(), and transaction().
-
-
                                                    void TQSqlDatabase::setConnectOptions ( const TQString & options = TQString::null )
-
                                                    Sets the database connect options to options.
-See the "connectOptions" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSqlDatabase::setDatabaseName ( const TQString & name ) [virtual]
-
                                                    Sets the name of the database to name.
-See the "databaseName" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSqlDatabase::setHostName ( const TQString & host ) [virtual]
-
                                                    Sets the host name where the database resides to host.
-See the "hostName" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSqlDatabase::setPassword ( const TQString & password ) [virtual]
-
                                                    Sets the password used to connect to the database to password.
-See the "password" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSqlDatabase::setPort ( int p ) [virtual]
-
                                                    Sets the port used to connect to the database to p.
-See the "port" property for details.
-
                                                    void TQSqlDatabase::setUserName ( const TQString & name ) [virtual]
-
                                                    Sets the user name connected to the database to name.
-See the "userName" property for details.
-
                                                    TQStringList TQSqlDatabase::tables ( TQSql::TableType type ) const
-
                                                    
-Returns a list of the database's tables, system tables and views,
-as specified by the parameter type.
-
                                                     Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
-over a copy, e.g.
-
                                                    -    TQStringList list = myDatabase.tables( TQSql::Tables | TQSql::Views );
-    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    while( it != list.end() ) {
-        myProcessing( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-    
                                                    
- 
-
-
                                                    Example: sql/sqltable/main.cpp.
-
                                                    TQStringList TQSqlDatabase::tables () const
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     Returns a list of the database's tables that are visible to the
-user. To include views or system tables, use the version of this
-function that takes a table type parameter.
-
                                                     Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
-over a copy, e.g.
-
                                                    -    TQStringList list = myDatabase.tables();
-    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    while( it != list.end() ) {
-        myProcessing( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-    
                                                    
- 
-
-
                                                    bool TQSqlDatabase::transaction ()
-
                                                    
-Begins a transaction on the database if the driver supports
-transactions. Returns TRUE if the operation succeeded; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also TQSqlDriver::hasFeature(), commit(), and rollback().
-
-
                                                    TQString TQSqlDatabase::userName () const
-
                                                    Returns the user name connected to the database.
-See the "userName" property for details.
-
                                                    Property Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQString connectOptions
                                                    
-
                                                    This property holds the database connect options.
-
                                                    The format of the options string is a semi-colon separated list of
-option names or option = value pairs. The options depend on the
-database client used:
-
                                                     
                                                    
-
-
                                                     
                                                    
-
                                                     
                                                     ODBC MySQL PostgreSQL
-
                                                    
-
                                                      
-
                                                    •  SQL_ATTR_ACCESS_MODE
-
                                                    •  SQL_ATTR_LOGIN_TIMEOUT
-
                                                    •  SQL_ATTR_CONNECTION_TIMEOUT
-
                                                    •  SQL_ATTR_CURRENT_CATALOG
-
                                                    •  SQL_ATTR_METADATA_ID
-
                                                    •  SQL_ATTR_PACKET_SIZE
-
                                                    •  SQL_ATTR_TRACEFILE
-
                                                    •  SQL_ATTR_TRACE
-
                                                    
-
                                                     
                                                    		
-
                                                      
-
                                                    •  CLIENT_COMPRESS
-
                                                    •  CLIENT_FOUND_ROWS
-
                                                    •  CLIENT_IGNORE_SPACE
-
                                                    •  CLIENT_SSL
-
                                                    •  CLIENT_ODBC
-
                                                    •  CLIENT_NO_SCHEMA
-
                                                    •  CLIENT_INTERACTIVE
-
                                                    
-
                                                     
                                                    		
-
                                                      
-
                                                    •  connect_timeout
-
                                                    •  options
-
                                                    •  tty
-
                                                    •  requiressl
-
                                                    •  service
-
                                                    
-
                                                     DB2 OCI TDS
-
                                                    
-
                                                      
-
                                                    •  SQL_ATTR_ACCESS_MODE
-
                                                    •  SQL_ATTR_LOGIN_TIMEOUT
-
                                                    
-
                                                     
                                                    		
-none
-
                                                     
                                                    		
-none
-
                                                     
                                                    
-
                                                     Example of usage:
-
                                                    -    ...
-    // MySQL connection
-    db->setConnectOptions( "CLIENT_SSL;CLIENT_IGNORE_SPACE" ); // use an SSL connection to the server
-    if ( !db->open() ) {
-        db->setConnectOptions(); // clears the connect option string
-        ...
-    }
-    ...
-    // PostgreSQL connection
-    db->setConnectOptions( "requiressl=1" ); // enable PostgreSQL SSL connections
-    if ( !db->open() ) {
-        db->setConnectOptions(); // clear options
-        ...
-    }
-    ...
-    // ODBC connection
-    db->setConnectOptions( "SQL_ATTR_ACCESS_MODE=SQL_MODE_READ_ONLY;SQL_ATTR_TRACE=SQL_OPT_TRACE_ON" ); // set ODBC options
-    if ( !db->open() ) {
-        db->setConnectOptions(); // don't try to set this option
-        ...
-    }
-    
                                                    
- 
-
                                                     Please refer to the client library documentation for more
-information about the different options. The options will be set
-prior to opening the database connection. Setting new options
-without re-opening the connection does nothing.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also 
-
                                                    Set this property's value with setConnectOptions() and get this property's value with connectOptions().
-
                                                    TQString databaseName
                                                    
-
                                                    This property holds the name of the database.
-
                                                    Note that the database name is the TNS Service Name for the TQOCI8
-(Oracle) driver.
-
                                                     For the TQODBC3 driver it can either be a DSN, a DSN filename (the
-file must have a .dsn extension), or a connection string. MS
-Access users can for example use the following connection string
-to open a .mdb file directly, instead of having to create a DSN
-entry in the ODBC manager:
-
                                                     
                                                    -    ...
-    db = TQSqlDatabase::addDatabase( "TQODBC3" );
-    db->setDatabaseName( "DRIVER={Microsoft Access Driver (*.mdb)};FIL={MS Access};DBQ=myaccessfile.mdb" );
-    if ( db->open() ) {
-        // success!
-    }
-    ...
-    
                                                    
- 
-("FIL" is the required spelling in Microsoft's API.)
-
                                                     There is no default value.
-
-
                                                    Set this property's value with setDatabaseName() and get this property's value with databaseName().
-
                                                    TQString hostName
                                                    
-
                                                    This property holds the host name where the database resides.
-
                                                    There is no default value.
-
-
                                                    Set this property's value with setHostName() and get this property's value with hostName().
-
                                                    TQString password
                                                    
-
                                                    This property holds the password used to connect to the database.
-
                                                    There is no default value.
-
                                                     Warning: This function stores the password in plain text within
-TQt. Use the open() call that takes a password as parameter to
-avoid this behaviour.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also open().
-
-
                                                    Set this property's value with setPassword() and get this property's value with password().
-
                                                    int port
                                                    
-
                                                    This property holds the port used to connect to the database.
-
                                                    There is no default value.
-
-
                                                    Set this property's value with setPort() and get this property's value with port().
-
                                                    TQString userName
                                                    
-
                                                    This property holds the user name connected to the database.
-
                                                    There is no default value.
-
-
                                                    Set this property's value with setUserName() and get this property's value with userName().
-
-
                                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                                    
-
                                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsqldriver-h.html b/doc/html/qsqldriver-h.html
index ee6a15b71..6b8f34582 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsqldriver-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsqldriver-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsqldriver.h Include File
+ntqsqldriver.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                    TQSqlDriver Class Reference
                                                    [sql module]
                                                    
-
-
                                                    The TQSqlDriver class is an abstract base class for accessing
-SQL databases.
-More...
-
                                                    #include <qsqldriver.h>
-
                                                    Inherits TQObject.
-
                                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                                    Public Members
                                                    
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • enum DriverFeature { Transactions, QuerySize, BLOB, Unicode, PreparedQueries, NamedPlaceholders, PositionalPlaceholders }
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQSqlDriver ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • ~TQSqlDriver ()
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • bool isOpen () const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • bool isOpenError () const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual bool beginTransaction ()
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual bool commitTransaction ()
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual bool rollbackTransaction ()
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual TQStringList tables ( const TQString & tableType ) const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual TQSqlIndex primaryIndex ( const TQString & tableName ) const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual TQSqlRecord record ( const TQString & tableName ) const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual TQSqlRecord record ( const TQSqlQuery & query ) const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual TQSqlRecordInfo recordInfo ( const TQString & tablename ) const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual TQSqlRecordInfo recordInfo ( const TQSqlQuery & query ) const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual TQString nullText () const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual TQString formatValue ( const TQSqlField * field, bool trimStrings = FALSE ) const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQSqlError lastError () const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual bool hasFeature ( DriverFeature f ) const = 0
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual bool open ( const TQString & db, const TQString & user = TQString::null, const TQString & password = TQString::null, const TQString & host = TQString::null, int port = -1 ) = 0
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual void close () = 0
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual TQSqlQuery createQuery () const = 0
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • bool open ( const TQString & db, const TQString & user, const TQString & password, const TQString & host, int port, const TQString & connOpts )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    
-
                                                    Protected Members
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Detailed Description
                                                    
-
-
-The TQSqlDriver class is an abstract base class for accessing
-SQL databases.
-
                                                     
-
-
                                                     This class should not be used directly. Use TQSqlDatabase instead.
-
                                                    See also Database Classes.
-
-
                                                    Member Type Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSqlDriver::DriverFeature
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This enum contains a list of features a driver may support. Use
-hasFeature() to query whether a feature is supported or not.
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • TQSqlDriver::Transactions - whether the driver supports SQL transactions
-
                                                    • TQSqlDriver::QuerySize - whether the database is capable of reporting the size
-of a query. Note that some databases do not support returning the size
-(i.e. number of rows returned) of a query, in which case
-TQSqlQuery::size() will return -1
-
                                                    • TQSqlDriver::BLOB - whether the driver supports Binary Large Object fields
-
                                                    • TQSqlDriver::Unicode - whether the driver supports Unicode strings if the
-database server does
-
                                                    • TQSqlDriver::PreparedQueries - whether the driver supports prepared query execution
-
                                                    • TQSqlDriver::NamedPlaceholders - whether the driver supports usage of named placeholders
-
                                                    • TQSqlDriver::PositionalPlaceholders - whether the driver supports usage of positional placeholders
-
                                                     More information about supported features can be found in the
-TQt SQL driver documentation.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also hasFeature().
-
-
                                                    Member Function Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSqlDriver::TQSqlDriver ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                    
-Default constructor. Creates a new driver with parent parent,
-called name.
-
                                                     
-
                                                    TQSqlDriver::~TQSqlDriver ()
-
                                                    
-Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-
-
                                                    bool TQSqlDriver::beginTransaction () [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Protected function which derived classes can reimplement to begin
-a transaction. If successful, return TRUE, otherwise return FALSE.
-The default implementation returns FALSE.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also commitTransaction() and rollbackTransaction().
-
-
                                                    void TQSqlDriver::close () [pure virtual]
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Derived classes must reimplement this abstract virtual function in
-order to close the database connection. Return TRUE on success,
-FALSE on failure.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setOpen().
-
-
                                                     
-
                                                    bool TQSqlDriver::commitTransaction () [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Protected function which derived classes can reimplement to commit
-a transaction. If successful, return TRUE, otherwise return FALSE.
-The default implementation returns FALSE.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also beginTransaction() and rollbackTransaction().
-
-
                                                    TQSqlQuery TQSqlDriver::createQuery () const [pure virtual]
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Creates an empty SQL result on the database. Derived classes must
-reimplement this function and return a TQSqlQuery object
-appropriate for their database to the caller.
-
                                                     
-
                                                    TQString TQSqlDriver::formatValue ( const TQSqlField * field, bool trimStrings = FALSE ) const [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Returns a string representation of the field value for the
-database. This is used, for example, when constructing INSERT and
-UPDATE statements.
-
                                                     The default implementation returns the value formatted as a string
-according to the following rules:
-
                                                     
                                                      
-
                                                       
                                                    •  If field is NULL, nullText() is returned.
-
                                                       
                                                    •  If field is character data, the value is returned enclosed
-in single quotation marks, which is appropriate for many SQL
-databases. Any embedded single-quote characters are escaped
-(replaced with two single-quote characters). If trimStrings is
-TRUE (the default is FALSE), all trailing whitespace is trimmed
-from the field.
-
                                                       
                                                    •  If field is date/time data, the value is formatted in ISO
-format and enclosed in single quotation marks. If the date/time
-data is invalid, nullText() is returned.
-
                                                       
                                                    •  If field is bytearray data, and the driver can edit binary
-fields, the value is formatted as a hexadecimal string.
-
                                                       
                                                    •  For any other field type toString() will be called on its value
-and the result returned.
-
                                                       
                                                    
-
                                                     
                                                    See also TQVariant::toString().
-
-
                                                     
-
                                                    bool TQSqlDriver::hasFeature ( DriverFeature f ) const [pure virtual]
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Returns TRUE if the driver supports feature f; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                                                     Note that some databases need to be open() before this can be
-determined.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also DriverFeature.
-
-
                                                    bool TQSqlDriver::isOpen () const
-
                                                    
-Returns TRUE if the database connection is open; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
-
                                                    bool TQSqlDriver::isOpenError () const
-
                                                    
-Returns TRUE if the there was an error opening the database
-connection; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                    TQSqlError TQSqlDriver::lastError () const
-
                                                    
-Returns a TQSqlError object which contains information about the
-last error that occurred on the database.
-
-
                                                    TQString TQSqlDriver::nullText () const [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Returns a string representation of the NULL value for the
-database. This is used, for example, when constructing INSERT and
-UPDATE statements. The default implementation returns the string
-"NULL".
-
-
                                                    bool TQSqlDriver::open ( const TQString & db, const TQString & user = TQString::null, const TQString & password = TQString::null, const TQString & host = TQString::null, int port = -1 ) [pure virtual]
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Derived classes must reimplement this abstract virtual function in
-order to open a database connection on database db, using user
-name user, password password, host host and port port.
-
                                                     The function must return TRUE on success and FALSE on failure.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setOpen().
-
-
                                                     
-
                                                    bool TQSqlDriver::open ( const TQString & db, const TQString & user, const TQString & password, const TQString & host, int port, const TQString & connOpts )
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     Open a database connection on database db, using user name user, password password, host host, port port and
-connection options connOpts.
-
                                                     Returns TRUE on success and FALSE on failure.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setOpen().
-
-
                                                    TQSqlIndex TQSqlDriver::primaryIndex ( const TQString & tableName ) const [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Returns the primary index for table tableName. Returns an empty
-TQSqlIndex if the table doesn't have a primary index. The default
-implementation returns an empty index.
-
-
                                                    TQSqlRecord TQSqlDriver::record ( const TQString & tableName ) const [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Returns a TQSqlRecord populated with the names of the fields in
-table tableName. If no such table exists, an empty record is
-returned. The default implementation returns an empty record.
-
-
                                                    TQSqlRecord TQSqlDriver::record ( const TQSqlQuery & query ) const [virtual]
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     Returns a TQSqlRecord populated with the names of the fields in the
-SQL query. The default implementation returns an empty record.
-
-
                                                    TQSqlRecordInfo TQSqlDriver::recordInfo ( const TQString & tablename ) const [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Returns a TQSqlRecordInfo object with meta data about the table tablename.
-
-
                                                    TQSqlRecordInfo TQSqlDriver::recordInfo ( const TQSqlQuery & query ) const [virtual]
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     Returns a TQSqlRecordInfo object with meta data for the TQSqlQuery
-query. Note that this overloaded function may return less
-information than the recordInfo() function which takes the name of
-a table as parameter.
-
-
                                                    bool TQSqlDriver::rollbackTransaction () [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Protected function which derived classes can reimplement to
-rollback a transaction. If successful, return TRUE, otherwise
-return FALSE. The default implementation returns FALSE.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also beginTransaction() and commitTransaction().
-
-
                                                    void TQSqlDriver::setLastError ( const TQSqlError & e ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                    
-Protected function which allows derived classes to set the value
-of the last error, e, that occurred on the database.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also lastError().
-
-
                                                    void TQSqlDriver::setOpen ( bool o ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                    
-Protected function which sets the open state of the database to o. Derived classes can use this function to report the status of
-open().
-
                                                     
                                                    See also open() and setOpenError().
-
-
                                                    void TQSqlDriver::setOpenError ( bool e ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                    
-Protected function which sets the open error state of the database
-to e. Derived classes can use this function to report the
-status of open(). Note that if e is TRUE the open state of the
-database is set to closed (i.e. isOpen() returns FALSE).
-
                                                     
                                                    See also open().
-
-
                                                    TQStringList TQSqlDriver::tables ( const TQString & tableType ) const [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Returns a list of tables in the database. The default
-implementation returns an empty list.
-
                                                     The tableType argument describes what types of tables
-should be returned. Due to binary compatibility, the string
-contains the value of the enum TQSql::TableTypes as text.
-An empty string should be treated as TQSql::Tables for
-downward compatibility.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also TQSql::TableType.
-
-
-
                                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                                    
-
                                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsqldriverplugin-h.html b/doc/html/qsqldriverplugin-h.html
index d6eb3d277..5d0f3a3b2 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsqldriverplugin-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsqldriverplugin-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsqldriverplugin.h Include File
+ntqsqldriverplugin.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                    TQSqlDriverPlugin Class Reference
                                                    
-
-
                                                    The TQSqlDriverPlugin class provides an abstract base for custom TQSqlDriver plugins.
-More...
-
                                                    #include <qsqldriverplugin.h>
-
                                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                                    Public Members
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Detailed Description
                                                    
-
-
-The TQSqlDriverPlugin class provides an abstract base for custom TQSqlDriver plugins.
-
                                                     
-
-
                                                     The SQL driver plugin is a simple plugin interface that makes it
-easy to create your own SQL driver plugins that can be loaded
-dynamically by TQt.
-
                                                     Writing a SQL plugin is achieved by subclassing this base class,
-reimplementing the pure virtual functions keys() and create(), and
-exporting the class with the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN macro. See the SQL
-plugins that come with TQt for example implementations (in the
-plugins/src/sqldrivers subdirectory of the source
-distribution). Read the plugins
-    documentation for more information on plugins.
-
                                                    See also Plugins.
-
-
                                                    Member Function Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSqlDriverPlugin::TQSqlDriverPlugin ()
-
                                                    
-Constructs a SQL driver plugin. This is invoked automatically by
-the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN macro.
-
-
                                                    TQSqlDriverPlugin::~TQSqlDriverPlugin ()
-
                                                    
-Destroys the SQL driver plugin.
-
                                                     You never have to call this explicitly. TQt destroys a plugin
-automatically when it is no longer used.
-
-
                                                    TQSqlDriver * TQSqlDriverPlugin::create ( const TQString & key ) [pure virtual]
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Creates and returns a TQSqlDriver object for the driver key key.
-The driver key is usually the class name of the required driver.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also keys().
-
-
                                                    TQStringList TQSqlDriverPlugin::keys () const [pure virtual]
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Returns the list of drivers (keys) this plugin supports.
-
                                                     These keys are usually the class names of the custom drivers that
-are implemented in the plugin.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also create().
-
-
-
                                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                                    
-
                                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsqleditorfactory-h.html b/doc/html/qsqleditorfactory-h.html
index 69f864b83..100e42629 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsqleditorfactory-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsqleditorfactory-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsqleditorfactory.h Include File
+ntqsqleditorfactory.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                    TQSqlEditorFactory Class Reference
                                                    [sql module]
                                                    
-
-
                                                    The TQSqlEditorFactory class is used to create the editors
-used by TQDataTable and TQSqlForm.
-More...
-
                                                    #include <qsqleditorfactory.h>
-
                                                    Inherits TQEditorFactory.
-
                                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                                    Public Members
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Static Public Members
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Detailed Description
                                                    
-
-
-The TQSqlEditorFactory class is used to create the editors
-used by TQDataTable and TQSqlForm.
-
                                                     
-
-
                                                     TQSqlEditorFactory is used by TQDataTable and TQSqlForm to
-automatically create appropriate editors for a given TQSqlField.
-For example if the field is a TQVariant::String a TQLineEdit would
-be the default editor, whereas a TQVariant::Int's default editor
-would be a TQSpinBox.
-
                                                     If you want to create different editors for fields with the same
-data type, subclass TQSqlEditorFactory and reimplement the
-createEditor() function.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also TQDataTable, TQSqlForm, and Database Classes.
-
-
                                                    Member Function Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSqlEditorFactory::TQSqlEditorFactory ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                    
-Constructs a SQL editor factory with parent parent, called name.
-
-
                                                    TQSqlEditorFactory::~TQSqlEditorFactory ()
-
                                                    
-Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-
-
                                                    TQWidget * TQSqlEditorFactory::createEditor ( TQWidget * parent, const TQVariant & variant ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Creates and returns the appropriate editor widget for the TQVariant
-variant.
-
                                                     The widget that is returned has the parent parent (which may be
-zero). If variant is invalid, 0 is returned.
-
-
                                                    Reimplemented from TQEditorFactory.
-
                                                    TQWidget * TQSqlEditorFactory::createEditor ( TQWidget * parent, const TQSqlField * field ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                     Creates and returns the appropriate editor for the TQSqlField field.
-
-
                                                    TQSqlEditorFactory * TQSqlEditorFactory::defaultFactory () [static]
-
                                                    
-Returns an instance of a default editor factory.
-
-
                                                    void TQSqlEditorFactory::installDefaultFactory ( TQSqlEditorFactory * factory ) [static]
-
                                                    
-Replaces the default editor factory with factory. All
-TQDataTable and TQSqlForm instantiations will use this new factory
-for creating field editors. TQSqlEditorFactory takes ownership of \a factory, and destroys it when it is no longer needed.
-
-
-
                                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                                    
-
                                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsqlerror-h.html b/doc/html/qsqlerror-h.html
index 3254db8e4..2fa14d434 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsqlerror-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsqlerror-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsqlerror.h Include File
+ntqsqlerror.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                    TQSqlError Class Reference
                                                    [sql module]
                                                    
-
-
                                                    The TQSqlError class provides SQL database error information.
-More...
-
                                                    #include <qsqlerror.h>
-
                                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                                    Public Members
                                                    
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • enum Type { None, Connection, Statement, Transaction, Unknown }
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQSqlError ( const TQString & driverText = TQString::null, const TQString & databaseText = TQString::null, int type = TQSqlError::None, int number = -1 )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQSqlError ( const TQSqlError & other )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQSqlError & operator= ( const TQSqlError & other )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual ~TQSqlError ()
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQString driverText () const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual void setDriverText ( const TQString & driverText )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQString databaseText () const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual void setDatabaseText ( const TQString & databaseText )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • int type () const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual void setType ( int type )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • int number () const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual void setNumber ( int number )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQString text () const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • void showMessage ( const TQString & msg = TQString::null ) const  (obsolete)
                                                      • 
-
                                                    
-
                                                    Detailed Description
                                                    
-
-
-The TQSqlError class provides SQL database error information.
-
                                                     
-
-
                                                     This class is used to report database-specific errors. An error
-description and (if appropriate) a database-specific error number
-can be obtained using this class.
-
                                                    See also Database Classes.
-
-
                                                    Member Type Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSqlError::Type
                                                    
-
-
                                                     This enum type describes the type of SQL error that occurred.
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • TQSqlError::None - no error occurred
-
                                                    • TQSqlError::Connection - connection error
-
                                                    • TQSqlError::Statement - SQL statement syntax error
-
                                                    • TQSqlError::Transaction - transaction failed error
-
                                                    • TQSqlError::Unknown - unknown error
-
                                                    
-
                                                    Member Function Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSqlError::TQSqlError ( const TQString & driverText = TQString::null, const TQString & databaseText = TQString::null, int type = TQSqlError::None, int number = -1 )
-
                                                    
-Constructs an error containing the driver error text driverText, the database-specific error text databaseText, the
-type type and the optional error number number.
-
-
                                                    TQSqlError::TQSqlError ( const TQSqlError & other )
-
                                                    
-Creates a copy of other.
-
-
                                                    TQSqlError::~TQSqlError () [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-
-
                                                    TQString TQSqlError::databaseText () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the text of the error as reported by the database. This
-may contain database-specific descriptions.
-
-
                                                    TQString TQSqlError::driverText () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the text of the error as reported by the driver. This may
-contain database-specific descriptions.
-
-
                                                    int TQSqlError::number () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the database-specific error number, or -1 if it cannot be
-determined.
-
-
                                                    TQSqlError & TQSqlError::operator= ( const TQSqlError & other )
-
                                                    
-Sets the error equal to other.
-
-
                                                    void TQSqlError::setDatabaseText ( const TQString & databaseText ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Sets the database error text to the value of databaseText.
-
-
                                                    void TQSqlError::setDriverText ( const TQString & driverText ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Sets the driver error text to the value of driverText.
-
-
                                                    void TQSqlError::setNumber ( int number ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Sets the database-specific error number to number.
-
-
                                                    void TQSqlError::setType ( int type ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Sets the error type to the value of type.
-
-
                                                    void TQSqlError::showMessage ( const TQString & msg = TQString::null ) const
-
                                                    
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                                     This is a convenience function that pops up a TQMessageBox
-containing the message returned by text(). An additional string
-can be passed in via the msg parameter, which will be
-concatenated with the text() message.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also text(), driverText(), and databaseText().
-
-
                                                    TQString TQSqlError::text () const
-
                                                    
-This is a convenience function that returns databaseText() and
-driverText() concatenated into a single string.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also showMessage(), driverText(), and databaseText().
-
-
                                                    int TQSqlError::type () const
-
                                                    
-Returns the error type, or -1 if the type cannot be determined.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also TQSqlError::Type.
-
-
-
                                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                                    
-
                                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsqlfield-h.html b/doc/html/qsqlfield-h.html
index 3a838e14f..315b49493 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsqlfield-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsqlfield-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsqlfield.h Include File
+ntqsqlfield.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                    TQSqlField Class Reference
                                                    [sql module]
                                                    
-
-
                                                    The TQSqlField class manipulates the fields in SQL database tables
-and views.
-More...
-
                                                    #include <qsqlfield.h>
-
                                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                                    Public Members
                                                    
-
                                                      
-
                                                    • TQSqlField ( const TQString & fieldName = TQString::null, TQVariant::Type type = TQVariant::Invalid )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQSqlField ( const TQSqlField & other )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQSqlField & operator= ( const TQSqlField & other )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • bool operator== ( const TQSqlField & other ) const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual ~TQSqlField ()
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual void setValue ( const TQVariant & value )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual TQVariant value () const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual void setName ( const TQString & name )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQString name () const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual void setNull ()
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • bool isNull () const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • virtual void setReadOnly ( bool readOnly )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • bool isReadOnly () const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • void clear ( bool nullify = TRUE )
                                                      • 
-
                                                    • TQVariant::Type type () const
                                                      • 
-
                                                    
-
                                                    Detailed Description
                                                    
-
-
-The TQSqlField class manipulates the fields in SQL database tables
-and views.
-
                                                     
-
-
                                                     TQSqlField represents the characteristics of a single column in a
-database table or view, such as the data type and column name. A
-field also contains the value of the database column, which can be
-viewed or changed.
-
                                                     Field data values are stored as TQVariants. Using an incompatible
-type is not permitted. For example:
-
                                                     
                                                    -    TQSqlField f( "myfield", TQVariant::Int );
-    f.setValue( TQPixmap() );  // will not work
-    
                                                    
- 
-
                                                     However, the field will attempt to cast certain data types to the
-field data type where possible:
-
                                                     
                                                    -    TQSqlField f( "myfield", TQVariant::Int );
-    f.setValue( TQString("123") ); // casts TQString to int
-    
                                                    
- 
-
                                                     TQSqlField objects are rarely created explicitly in application
-code. They are usually accessed indirectly through TQSqlRecord
-or TQSqlCursor which already contain a list of fields. For
-example:
-
                                                     
                                                    -    TQSqlCursor cur( "Employee" );        // create cursor using the 'Employee' table
-    TQSqlField* f = cur.field( "name" );  // use the 'name' field
-    f->setValue( "Dave" );               // set field value
-    ...
-    
                                                    
- 
-
                                                     In practice we rarely need to extract a pointer to a field at all.
-The previous example would normally be written:
-
                                                     
                                                    -    TQSqlCursor cur( "Employee" );
-    cur.setValue( "name", "Dave" );
-    ...
-    
                                                    
- 
-
                                                    See also Database Classes.
-
-
                                                    Member Function Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQSqlField::TQSqlField ( const TQString & fieldName = TQString::null, TQVariant::Type type = TQVariant::Invalid )
-
                                                    
-Constructs an empty field called fieldName of type type.
-
-
                                                    TQSqlField::TQSqlField ( const TQSqlField & other )
-
                                                    
-Constructs a copy of other.
-
-
                                                    TQSqlField::~TQSqlField () [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-
-
                                                    void TQSqlField::clear ( bool nullify = TRUE )
-
                                                    
-Clears the value of the field. If the field is read-only, nothing
-happens. If nullify is TRUE (the default), the field is set to
-NULL.
-
-
                                                    bool TQSqlField::isNull () const
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Returns TRUE if the field is currently NULL; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
-
                                                    bool TQSqlField::isReadOnly () const
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Returns TRUE if the field's value is read only; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
-
                                                    TQString TQSqlField::name () const
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Returns the name of the field.
-
-
                                                    Example: sql/overview/table4/main.cpp.
-
                                                    TQSqlField & TQSqlField::operator= ( const TQSqlField & other )
-
                                                    
-Sets the field equal to other.
-
-
                                                    bool TQSqlField::operator== ( const TQSqlField & other ) const
-
                                                    
-Returns TRUE if the field is equal to other; otherwise returns
-FALSE. Fields are considered equal when the following field
-properties are the same:
-
                                                     
                                                    
-
                                                     
-
                                                    void TQSqlField::setName ( const TQString & name ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Sets the name of the field to name.
-
-
                                                    void TQSqlField::setNull () [virtual]
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Sets the field to NULL and clears the value using clear(). If the
-field is read-only, nothing happens.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also isReadOnly() and clear().
-
-
                                                    void TQSqlField::setReadOnly ( bool readOnly ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Sets the read only flag of the field's value to readOnly.
-
                                                     
                                                    See also setValue().
-
-
                                                    void TQSqlField::setValue ( const TQVariant & value ) [virtual]
-
                                                    
-Sets the value of the field to value. If the field is read-only
-(isReadOnly() returns TRUE), nothing happens. If the data type of
-value differs from the field's current data type, an attempt is
-made to cast it to the proper type. This preserves the data type
-of the field in the case of assignment, e.g. a TQString to an
-integer data type. For example:
-
                                                     
                                                    -    TQSqlCursor cur( "Employee" );                 // 'Employee' table
-    TQSqlField* f = cur.field( "student_count" );  // an integer field
-    ...
-    f->setValue( myLineEdit->text() );            // cast the line edit text to an integer
-    
                                                    
- 
-
                                                     
                                                    See also isReadOnly().
-
-
                                                    TQVariant::Type TQSqlField::type () const
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Returns the field's type as stored in the database.
-Note that the actual value might have a different type,
-Numerical values that are too large to store in a long
-int or double are usually stored as strings to prevent
-precision loss.
-
-
                                                    TQVariant TQSqlField::value () const [virtual]
-
                                                    
-
-
                                                     Returns the value of the field as a TQVariant.
-
-
                                                    Example: sql/overview/table4/main.cpp.
-
-
                                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                    
-
-
                                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                                    
-
                                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsqlfieldinfo-members.html b/doc/html/qsqlfieldinfo-members.html
index cadae9ea8..7782c4aa3 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsqlfieldinfo-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsqlfieldinfo-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qsqlfieldinfo.html b/doc/html/qsqlfieldinfo.html
index 72e3f93f4..19e834a56 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsqlfieldinfo.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsqlfieldinfo.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                                    The TQSqlFieldInfo class stores meta data associated with a SQL field.
 More...
-
                                                    #include <qsqlfield.h>
+
                                                    #include <ntqsqlfield.h>
 
                                                    List of all member functions.
 
                                                    Public Members
                                                    
 
                                                      
@@ -65,19 +65,19 @@ The TQSqlFieldInfo class stores meta data associated with a SQL field.
 
                                                       
 
 
                                                       TQSqlFieldInfo objects only store meta data; field values are
-stored in TQSqlField objects.
+stored in TQSqlField objects.
 
                                                       All values must be set in the constructor, and may be retrieved
 using isRequired(), type(), length(), precision(), defaultValue(),
 name(), isGenerated() and typeID().
 
                                                      See also Database Classes.
 
 
                                                      Member Function Documentation
                                                      
-
                                                      TQSqlFieldInfo::TQSqlFieldInfo ( const TQString & name = TQString::null, TQVariant::Type typ = TQVariant::Invalid, int required = -1, int len = -1, int prec = -1, const TQVariant & defValue = TQVariant ( ), int typeID = 0, bool generated = TRUE, bool trim = FALSE, bool calculated = FALSE )
+
                                                      TQSqlFieldInfo::TQSqlFieldInfo ( const TQString & name = TQString::null, TQVariant::Type typ = TQVariant::Invalid, int required = -1, int len = -1, int prec = -1, const TQVariant & defValue = TQVariant ( ), int typeID = 0, bool generated = TRUE, bool trim = FALSE, bool calculated = FALSE )
 
                                                      
 Constructs a TQSqlFieldInfo with the following parameters:
 
                                                      
 
                                                       name  the name of the field.
-
                                                       typ   the field's type in a TQVariant.
+
                                                       typ   the field's type in a TQVariant.
 
                                                       required  greater than 0 if the field is required, 0
 if its value can be NULL and less than 0 if it cannot be
 determined whether the field is required or not.
@@ -93,33 +93,33 @@ no default value or it cannot be determined.
 
                                                       typeID  the internal typeID of the database system
 (only useful for low-level programming). 0 if unknown.
 
                                                       generated  TRUE indicates that this field should be
-included in auto-generated SQL statments, e.g. in TQSqlCursor.
+included in auto-generated SQL statments, e.g. in TQSqlCursor.
 
                                                       trim  TRUE indicates that widgets should remove
 trailing whitespace from character fields. This does not affect
 the field value but only its representation inside widgets.
 
                                                       calculated  TRUE indicates that the value of this
 field is calculated. The value of calculated fields can by
 modified by subclassing TQSqlCursor and overriding
-TQSqlCursor::calculateField().
+TQSqlCursor::calculateField().
 
                                                      
 
 
                                                      TQSqlFieldInfo::TQSqlFieldInfo ( const TQSqlFieldInfo & other )
 
                                                      
 Constructs a copy of other.
 
-
                                                      TQSqlFieldInfo::TQSqlFieldInfo ( const TQSqlField & other, bool generated = TRUE )
+
                                                      TQSqlFieldInfo::TQSqlFieldInfo ( const TQSqlField & other, bool generated = TRUE )
 
                                                      
 Creates a TQSqlFieldInfo object with the type and the name of the
-TQSqlField other. If generated is TRUE this field will be
-included in auto-generated SQL statments, e.g. in TQSqlCursor.
+TQSqlField other. If generated is TRUE this field will be
+included in auto-generated SQL statments, e.g. in TQSqlCursor.
 
 
                                                      TQSqlFieldInfo::~TQSqlFieldInfo () [virtual]
 
                                                      
 Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
 
-
                                                      TQVariant TQSqlFieldInfo::defaultValue () const
+
                                                      TQVariant TQSqlFieldInfo::defaultValue () const
 
                                                      
-Returns the field's default value or an empty TQVariant if the
+Returns the field's default value or an empty TQVariant if the
 field has no default value or the value couldn't be determined.
 The default value is the value inserted in the database when it
 is not explicitly specified by the user.
@@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Returns TRUE if the field is calculated; otherwise returns FALSE.
 
                                                      bool TQSqlFieldInfo::isGenerated () const
 
                                                      
 Returns TRUE if the field should be included in auto-generated
-SQL statments, e.g. in TQSqlCursor; otherwise returns FALSE.
+SQL statments, e.g. in TQSqlCursor; otherwise returns FALSE.
 
                                                       
                                                      See also setGenerated().
 
 
                                                      int TQSqlFieldInfo::isRequired () const
@@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ non-character fields some database systems return the number of
 bytes needed or the number of digits allowed. If the length cannot
 be determined -1 is returned.
 
-
                                                      TQString TQSqlFieldInfo::name () const
+
                                                      TQString TQSqlFieldInfo::name () const
 
                                                      
 Returns the name of the field in the SQL table.
 
@@ -181,13 +181,13 @@ or it cannot be determined.
 
 calc set to TRUE indicates that this field is a calculated
 field. The value of calculated fields can by modified by subclassing
-TQSqlCursor and overriding TQSqlCursor::calculateField().
+TQSqlCursor and overriding TQSqlCursor::calculateField().
 
                                                       
                                                      See also isCalculated().
 
 
                                                      void TQSqlFieldInfo::setGenerated ( bool gen ) [virtual]
 
                                                      
 gen set to FALSE indicates that this field should not appear
-in auto-generated SQL statements (for example in TQSqlCursor).
+in auto-generated SQL statements (for example in TQSqlCursor).
 
                                                       
                                                      See also isGenerated().
 
 
                                                      void TQSqlFieldInfo::setTrim ( bool trim ) [virtual]
@@ -197,12 +197,12 @@ character fields. This does not affect the field value but only
 its representation inside widgets.
 
                                                       
                                                      See also isTrim().
 
-
                                                      TQSqlField TQSqlFieldInfo::toField () const
+
                                                      TQSqlField TQSqlFieldInfo::toField () const
 
                                                      
-Returns an empty TQSqlField based on the information in this
+Returns an empty TQSqlField based on the information in this
 TQSqlFieldInfo.
 
-
                                                      TQVariant::Type TQSqlFieldInfo::type () const
+
                                                      TQVariant::Type TQSqlFieldInfo::type () const
 
                                                      
 Returns the field's type or TQVariant::Invalid if the type is
 unknown.
diff --git a/doc/html/qsqlform-h.html b/doc/html/qsqlform-h.html
index 4011d871e..bcc08398b 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsqlform-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsqlform-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsqlform.h Include File
+ntqsqlform.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                      
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                      TQSqlForm Class Reference
                                                      [sql module]
                                                      
-
-
                                                      The TQSqlForm class creates and manages data entry forms
-tied to SQL databases.
-More...
-
                                                      #include <qsqlform.h>
-
                                                      Inherits TQObject.
-
                                                      List of all member functions.
-
                                                      Public Members
                                                      
-
                                                        
-
                                                      • TQSqlForm ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • ~TQSqlForm ()
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual void insert ( TQWidget * widget, const TQString & field )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual void remove ( const TQString & field )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • uint count () const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • TQWidget * widget ( uint i ) const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • TQSqlField * widgetToField ( TQWidget * widget ) const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • TQWidget * fieldToWidget ( TQSqlField * field ) const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • void installPropertyMap ( TQSqlPropertyMap * pmap )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual void setRecord ( TQSqlRecord * buf )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      
-
                                                      Public Slots
                                                      
-
-
                                                      Protected Members
                                                      
-
                                                        
-
                                                      • virtual void insert ( TQWidget * widget, TQSqlField * field )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual void remove ( TQWidget * widget )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      
-
                                                      Detailed Description
                                                      
-
-
-The TQSqlForm class creates and manages data entry forms
-tied to SQL databases.
-
                                                       
-
-
-
                                                       Typical use of a TQSqlForm consists of the following steps:
-
                                                        
-
                                                      •  Create the widgets you want to appear in the form.
-
                                                      •  Create a cursor and navigate to the record to be edited.
-
                                                      •  Create the TQSqlForm.
-
                                                      •  Set the form's record buffer to the cursor's update buffer.
-
                                                      •  Insert each widget and the field it is to edit into the form.
-
                                                      •  Use readFields() to update the editor widgets with values from
-the database's fields.
-
                                                      •  Display the form and let the user edit values etc.
-
                                                      •  Use writeFields() to update the database's field values with
-the values in the editor widgets.
-
                                                      
-
                                                       Note that a TQSqlForm does not access the database directly, but
-most often via TQSqlFields which are part of a TQSqlCursor. A
-TQSqlCursor::insert(), TQSqlCursor::update() or TQSqlCursor::del()
-call is needed to actually write values to the database.
-
                                                       Some sample code to initialize a form successfully:
-
                                                       
                                                      -    TQLineEdit  myEditor( this );
-    TQSqlForm   myForm( this );
-    TQSqlCursor myCursor( "mytable" );
-
-    // Execute a query to make the cursor valid
-    myCursor.select();
-    // Move the cursor to a valid record (the first record)
-    myCursor.next();
-    // Set the form's record pointer to the cursor's edit buffer (which
-    // contains the current record's values)
-    myForm.setRecord( myCursor.primeUpdate() );
-
-    // Insert a field into the form that uses myEditor to edit the
-    // field 'somefield' in 'mytable'
-    myForm.insert( &myEditor, "somefield" );
-
-    // Update myEditor with the value from the mapped database field
-    myForm.readFields();
-    ...
-    // Let the user edit the form
-    ...
-    // Update the database
-    myForm.writeFields();  // Update the cursor's edit buffer from the form
-    myCursor.update();  // Update the database from the cursor's buffer
-    
                                                      
- 
-
                                                       If you want to use custom editors for displaying and editing data
-fields, you must install a custom TQSqlPropertyMap. The form
-uses this object to get or set the value of a widget.
-
                                                       Note that TQt Designer provides
-a visual means of creating data-aware forms.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also installPropertyMap(), TQSqlPropertyMap, and Database Classes.
-
-
                                                      Member Function Documentation
                                                      
-
                                                      TQSqlForm::TQSqlForm ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                      
-Constructs a TQSqlForm with parent parent and called name.
-
-
                                                      TQSqlForm::~TQSqlForm ()
-
                                                      
-Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-
-
                                                      void TQSqlForm::clear () [virtual slot]
-
                                                      
-Removes every widget, and the fields they're mapped to, from the form.
-
-
                                                      void TQSqlForm::clearValues ( bool nullify = FALSE ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                      
-Clears the values in all the widgets, and the fields they are
-mapped to, in the form. If nullify is TRUE (the default is
-FALSE), each field is also set to NULL.
-
-
                                                      uint TQSqlForm::count () const
-
                                                      
-Returns the number of widgets in the form.
-
-
                                                      TQWidget * TQSqlForm::fieldToWidget ( TQSqlField * field ) const
-
                                                      
-Returns the widget that field field is mapped to.
-
-
                                                      void TQSqlForm::insert ( TQWidget * widget, const TQString & field ) [virtual]
-
                                                      
-Inserts a widget, and the name of the field it is to be
-mapped to, into the form. To actually associate inserted widgets
-with an edit buffer, use setRecord().
-
                                                       
                                                      See also setRecord().
-
-
                                                      Examples: sql/overview/form1/main.cpp and sql/overview/form2/main.cpp.
-
                                                      void TQSqlForm::insert ( TQWidget * widget, TQSqlField * field ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Inserts a widget, and the field it is to be mapped to, into
-the form.
-
-
                                                      void TQSqlForm::installPropertyMap ( TQSqlPropertyMap * pmap )
-
                                                      
-Installs a custom TQSqlPropertyMap. This is useful if you plan to
-create your own custom editor widgets.
-
                                                       TQSqlForm takes ownership of pmap, so pmap is deleted when
-TQSqlForm goes out of scope.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also TQDataTable::installEditorFactory().
-
-
                                                      Example: sql/overview/custom1/main.cpp.
-
                                                      void TQSqlForm::readField ( TQWidget * widget ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                      
-Updates the widget widget with the value from the SQL field it
-is mapped to. Nothing happens if no SQL field is mapped to the widget.
-
-
                                                      void TQSqlForm::readFields () [virtual slot]
-
                                                      
-Updates the widgets in the form with current values from the SQL
-fields they are mapped to.
-
-
                                                      Examples: sql/overview/form1/main.cpp and sql/overview/form2/main.cpp.
-
                                                      void TQSqlForm::remove ( TQWidget * widget ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                      
-Removes a widget, and hence the field it's mapped to, from the
-form.
-
-
                                                      void TQSqlForm::remove ( const TQString & field ) [virtual]
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Removes field from the form.
-
-
                                                      void TQSqlForm::setRecord ( TQSqlRecord * buf ) [virtual]
-
                                                      
-Sets buf as the record buffer for the form. To force the
-display of the data from buf, use readFields().
-
                                                       
                                                      See also readFields() and writeFields().
-
-
                                                      Examples: sql/overview/custom1/main.cpp, sql/overview/form1/main.cpp, and sql/overview/form2/main.cpp.
-
                                                      TQWidget * TQSqlForm::widget ( uint i ) const
-
                                                      
-Returns the i-th widget in the form. Useful for traversing
-the widgets in the form.
-
-
                                                      TQSqlField * TQSqlForm::widgetToField ( TQWidget * widget ) const
-
                                                      
-Returns the SQL field that widget widget is mapped to.
-
-
                                                      void TQSqlForm::writeField ( TQWidget * widget ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                      
-Updates the SQL field with the value from the widget it is
-mapped to. Nothing happens if no SQL field is mapped to the widget.
-
-
                                                      void TQSqlForm::writeFields () [virtual slot]
-
                                                      
-Updates the SQL fields with values from the widgets they are
-mapped to. To actually update the database with the contents of
-the record buffer, use TQSqlCursor::insert(), TQSqlCursor::update()
-or TQSqlCursor::del() as appropriate.
-
-
                                                      Example: sql/overview/form2/main.cpp.
-
-
                                                      
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                      
-
-
                                                      Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                      TQt 3.3.8
                                                      
-
                                                      
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsqlindex-h.html b/doc/html/qsqlindex-h.html
index d54869c96..6bc90c436 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsqlindex-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsqlindex-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsqlindex.h Include File
+ntqsqlindex.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                      
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                      TQSqlIndex Class Reference
                                                      [sql module]
                                                      
-
-
                                                      The TQSqlIndex class provides functions to manipulate and
-describe TQSqlCursor and TQSqlDatabase indexes.
-More...
-
                                                      #include <qsqlindex.h>
-
                                                      Inherits TQSqlRecord.
-
                                                      List of all member functions.
-
                                                      Public Members
                                                      
-
                                                        
-
                                                      • TQSqlIndex ( const TQString & cursorname = TQString::null, const TQString & name = TQString::null )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • TQSqlIndex ( const TQSqlIndex & other )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • ~TQSqlIndex ()
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • TQSqlIndex & operator= ( const TQSqlIndex & other )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual void setCursorName ( const TQString & cursorName )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • TQString cursorName () const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual void setName ( const TQString & name )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • TQString name () const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual void append ( const TQSqlField & field )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual void append ( const TQSqlField & field, bool desc )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • bool isDescending ( int i ) const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual void setDescending ( int i, bool desc )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      
-
                                                      Static Public Members
                                                      
-
                                                        
-
                                                      • TQSqlIndex fromStringList ( const TQStringList & l, const TQSqlCursor * cursor )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      
-
                                                      Detailed Description
                                                      
-
-
-The TQSqlIndex class provides functions to manipulate and
-describe TQSqlCursor and TQSqlDatabase indexes.
-
                                                       
-
-
                                                       This class is used to describe and manipulate TQSqlCursor and
-TQSqlDatabase indexes. An index refers to a single table or view
-in a database. Information about the fields that comprise the
-index can be used to generate SQL statements, or to affect the
-behavior of a TQSqlCursor object.
-
                                                       Normally, TQSqlIndex objects are created by TQSqlDatabase or
-TQSqlCursor.
-
                                                      See also Database Classes.
-
-
                                                      Member Function Documentation
                                                      
-
                                                      TQSqlIndex::TQSqlIndex ( const TQString & cursorname = TQString::null, const TQString & name = TQString::null )
-
                                                      
-Constructs an empty index using the cursor name cursorname and
-index name name.
-
-
                                                      TQSqlIndex::TQSqlIndex ( const TQSqlIndex & other )
-
                                                      
-Constructs a copy of other.
-
-
                                                      TQSqlIndex::~TQSqlIndex ()
-
                                                      
-Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-
-
                                                      void TQSqlIndex::append ( const TQSqlField & field ) [virtual]
-
                                                      
-Appends the field field to the list of indexed fields. The
-field is appended with an ascending sort order.
-
-
                                                      Reimplemented from TQSqlRecord.
-
                                                      void TQSqlIndex::append ( const TQSqlField & field, bool desc ) [virtual]
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Appends the field field to the list of indexed fields. The
-field is appended with an ascending sort order, unless desc is
-TRUE.
-
-
                                                      TQString TQSqlIndex::cursorName () const
-
                                                      
-
-
                                                       Returns the name of the cursor which the index is associated with.
-
-
                                                      TQSqlIndex TQSqlIndex::fromStringList ( const TQStringList & l, const TQSqlCursor * cursor ) [static]
-
                                                      
-Returns an index based on the field descriptions in l and the
-cursor cursor. The field descriptions should be in the same
-format that toStringList() produces, for example, a surname field
-in the people table might be in one of these forms: "surname",
-"surname DESC" or "people.surname ASC".
-
                                                       
                                                      See also toStringList().
-
-
                                                      bool TQSqlIndex::isDescending ( int i ) const
-
                                                      
-Returns TRUE if field i in the index is sorted in descending
-order; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                      TQString TQSqlIndex::name () const
-
                                                      
-
-
                                                       Returns the name of the index.
-
-
                                                      TQSqlIndex & TQSqlIndex::operator= ( const TQSqlIndex & other )
-
                                                      
-Sets the index equal to other.
-
-
                                                      void TQSqlIndex::setCursorName ( const TQString & cursorName ) [virtual]
-
                                                      
-Sets the name of the cursor that the index is associated with to
-cursorName.
-
-
                                                      void TQSqlIndex::setDescending ( int i, bool desc ) [virtual]
-
                                                      
-If desc is TRUE, field i is sorted in descending order.
-Otherwise, field i is sorted in ascending order (the default).
-If the field does not exist, nothing happens.
-
-
                                                      void TQSqlIndex::setName ( const TQString & name ) [virtual]
-
                                                      
-Sets the name of the index to name.
-
-
-
                                                      
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                      
-
-
                                                      Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                      TQt 3.3.8
                                                      
-
                                                      
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsqlpropertymap-h.html b/doc/html/qsqlpropertymap-h.html
index 33977c94b..838f695c6 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsqlpropertymap-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsqlpropertymap-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsqlpropertymap.h Include File
+ntqsqlpropertymap.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                      
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                      TQSqlPropertyMap Class Reference
                                                      [sql module]
                                                      
-
-
                                                      The TQSqlPropertyMap class is used to map widgets to SQL fields.
-More...
-
                                                      #include <qsqlpropertymap.h>
-
                                                      List of all member functions.
-
                                                      Public Members
                                                      
-
-
                                                      Static Public Members
                                                      
-
-
                                                      Detailed Description
                                                      
-
-
-The TQSqlPropertyMap class is used to map widgets to SQL fields.
-
                                                       
-
-
                                                       The SQL module uses TQt object
-    properties to insert and extract values from editor
-widgets.
-
                                                       This class is used to map editors to SQL fields. This works by
-associating SQL editor class names to the properties used to
-insert and extract values to/from the editor.
-
                                                       For example, a TQLineEdit can be used to edit text strings and
-other data types in TQDataTables or TQSqlForms. Several properties
-are defined in TQLineEdit, but only the text property is used to
-insert and extract text from a TQLineEdit. Both TQDataTable and
-TQSqlForm use the global TQSqlPropertyMap for inserting and
-extracting values to and from an editor widget. The global
-property map defines several common widgets and properties that
-are suitable for many applications. You can add and remove widget
-properties to suit your specific needs.
-
                                                       If you want to use custom editors with your TQDataTable or
-TQSqlForm, you must install your own TQSqlPropertyMap for that table
-or form. Example:
-
                                                       
                                                      -    TQSqlPropertyMap *myMap  = new TQSqlPropertyMap();
-    TQSqlForm        *myForm = new TQSqlForm( this );
-    MyEditor myEditor( this );
-
-    // Set the TQSqlForm's record buffer to the update buffer of
-    // a pre-existing TQSqlCursor called 'cur'.
-    myForm->setRecord( cur->primeUpdate() );
-
-    // Install the customized map
-    myMap->insert( "MyEditor", "content" );
-    myForm->installPropertyMap( myMap ); // myForm now owns myMap
-    ...
-    // Insert a field into the form that uses a myEditor to edit the
-    // field 'somefield'
-    myForm->insert( &myEditor, "somefield" );
-
-    // Update myEditor with the value from the mapped database field
-    myForm->readFields();
-    ...
-    // Let the user edit the form
-    ...
-    // Update the database fields with the values in the form
-    myForm->writeFields();
-    ...
-    
                                                      
- 
-
                                                       You can also replace the global TQSqlPropertyMap that is used by
-default. (Bear in mind that TQSqlPropertyMap takes ownership of the
-new default map.)
-
                                                       
                                                      -    TQSqlPropertyMap *myMap = new TQSqlPropertyMap;
-
-    myMap->insert( "MyEditor", "content" );
-    TQSqlPropertyMap::installDefaultMap( myMap );
-    ...
-    
                                                      
- 
-
                                                       
                                                      See also TQDataTable, TQSqlForm, TQSqlEditorFactory, and Database Classes.
-
-
                                                      Member Function Documentation
                                                      
-
                                                      TQSqlPropertyMap::TQSqlPropertyMap ()
-
                                                      
-
                                                       Constructs a TQSqlPropertyMap.
-
                                                       The default property mappings used by TQt widgets are:
-
                                                      
-
                                                       Widgets Property
-
                                                       TQCheckBox,
-TQRadioButton
-checked
-
                                                       TQComboBox,
-TQListBox
-currentItem
-
                                                       TQDateEdit
-date
-
                                                       TQDateTimeEdit
-dateTime
-
                                                       TQTextBrowser
-source
-
                                                       TQButton,
-TQDial,
-TQLabel,
-TQLineEdit,
-TQMultiLineEdit,
-TQPushButton,
-TQTextEdit,
-text
-
                                                       TQTimeEdit
-time
-
                                                       TQLCDNumber,
-TQScrollBar
-TQSlider,
-TQSpinBox
-value
-
                                                      
-
-
                                                      TQSqlPropertyMap::~TQSqlPropertyMap () [virtual]
-
                                                      
-Destroys the TQSqlPropertyMap.
-
                                                       Note that if the TQSqlPropertyMap is installed with
-installPropertyMap() the object it was installed into, e.g. the
-TQSqlForm, takes ownership and will delete the TQSqlPropertyMap when
-necessary.
-
-
                                                      TQSqlPropertyMap * TQSqlPropertyMap::defaultMap () [static]
-
                                                      
-Returns the application global TQSqlPropertyMap.
-
-
                                                      void TQSqlPropertyMap::insert ( const TQString & classname, const TQString & property )
-
                                                      
-Insert a new classname/property pair, which is used for custom SQL
-field editors. There must be a Q_PROPERTY clause in the classname class declaration for the property.
-
-
                                                      Example: sql/overview/custom1/main.cpp.
-
                                                      void TQSqlPropertyMap::installDefaultMap ( TQSqlPropertyMap * map ) [static]
-
                                                      
-Replaces the global default property map with map. All
-TQDataTable and TQSqlForm instantiations will use this new map for
-inserting and extracting values to and from editors.
-TQSqlPropertyMap takes ownership of \a map, and destroys it when it is no longer needed.
-
-
                                                      TQVariant TQSqlPropertyMap::property ( TQWidget * widget )
-
                                                      
-Returns the mapped property of widget as a TQVariant.
-
-
                                                      void TQSqlPropertyMap::remove ( const TQString & classname )
-
                                                      
-Removes classname from the map.
-
-
                                                      void TQSqlPropertyMap::setProperty ( TQWidget * widget, const TQVariant & value ) [virtual]
-
                                                      
-Sets the property of widget to value.
-
-
-
                                                      
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                      
-
-
                                                      Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                      TQt 3.3.8
                                                      
-
                                                      
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsqlquery-h.html b/doc/html/qsqlquery-h.html
index b9a52bbd4..f732c211f 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsqlquery-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsqlquery-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsqlquery.h Include File
+ntqsqlquery.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                      
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                      TQSqlQuery Class Reference
                                                      [sql module]
                                                      
-
-
                                                      The TQSqlQuery class provides a means of executing and
-manipulating SQL statements.
-More...
-
                                                      #include <qsqlquery.h>
-
                                                      Inherited by TQSqlCursor.
-
                                                      List of all member functions.
-
                                                      Public Members
                                                      
-
                                                        
-
                                                      • TQSqlQuery ( TQSqlResult * r )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • TQSqlQuery ( const TQString & query = TQString::null, TQSqlDatabase * db = 0 )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • explicit TQSqlQuery ( TQSqlDatabase * db )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • TQSqlQuery ( const TQSqlQuery & other )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • TQSqlQuery & operator= ( const TQSqlQuery & other )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual ~TQSqlQuery ()
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • bool isValid () const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • bool isActive () const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • bool isNull ( int field ) const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • int at () const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • TQString lastQuery () const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • int numRowsAffected () const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • TQSqlError lastError () const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • bool isSelect () const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • int size () const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • const TQSqlDriver * driver () const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • const TQSqlResult * result () const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • bool isForwardOnly () const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • void setForwardOnly ( bool forward )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual bool exec ( const TQString & query )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual TQVariant value ( int i ) const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual bool seek ( int i, bool relative = FALSE )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual bool next ()
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual bool prev ()
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual bool first ()
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual bool last ()
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • bool exec ()
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • bool prepare ( const TQString & query )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • void bindValue ( const TQString & placeholder, const TQVariant & val )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • void bindValue ( int pos, const TQVariant & val )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • void addBindValue ( const TQVariant & val )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • void bindValue ( const TQString & placeholder, const TQVariant & val, TQSql::ParameterType type )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • void bindValue ( int pos, const TQVariant & val, TQSql::ParameterType type )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • void addBindValue ( const TQVariant & val, TQSql::ParameterType type )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • TQVariant boundValue ( const TQString & placeholder ) const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • TQVariant boundValue ( int pos ) const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • TQMap<TQString, TQVariant> boundValues () const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • TQString executedQuery () const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      
-
                                                      Protected Members
                                                      
-
-
                                                      Detailed Description
                                                      
-
-
-The TQSqlQuery class provides a means of executing and
-manipulating SQL statements.
-
                                                       
-
-
-
                                                       TQSqlQuery encapsulates the functionality involved in creating,
-navigating and retrieving data from SQL queries which are executed
-on a TQSqlDatabase. It can be used to execute DML (data
-manipulation language) statements, e.g. SELECT, INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE, and also DDL (data definition language)
-statements, e.g. CREATE TABLE. It can also be used to
-execute database-specific commands which are not standard SQL
-(e.g. SET DATESTYLE=ISO for PostgreSQL).
-
                                                       Successfully executed SQL statements set the query's state to
-active (isActive() returns TRUE); otherwise the query's state is
-set to inactive. In either case, when executing a new SQL
-statement, the query is positioned on an invalid record; an active
-query must be navigated to a valid record (so that isValid()
-returns TRUE) before values can be retrieved.
-
                                                       Navigating records is performed with the following functions:
-
                                                       
                                                      
-
                                                       These functions allow the programmer to move forward, backward or
-arbitrarily through the records returned by the query. If you only
-need to move forward through the results, e.g. using next() or
-using seek() with a positive offset, you can use setForwardOnly()
-and save a significant amount of memory overhead. Once an active
-query is positioned on a valid record, data can be retrieved using
-value(). All data is transferred from the SQL backend using
-TQVariants.
-
                                                       For example:
-
                                                       
                                                      -    TQSqlQuery query( "SELECT name FROM customer" );
-    while ( query.next() ) {
-        TQString name = query.value(0).toString();
-        doSomething( name );
-    }
-    
                                                      
- 
-
                                                       To access the data returned by a query, use the value() method.
-Each field in the data returned by a SELECT statement is accessed
-by passing the field's position in the statement, starting from 0.
-Information about the fields can be obtained via TQSqlDatabase::record().
-For the sake of efficiency there are no functions to access a field
-by name. (The TQSqlCursor class provides a higher-level interface
-with field access by name and automatic SQL generation.)
-
                                                       TQSqlQuery supports prepared query execution and the binding of
-parameter values to placeholders. Some databases don't support
-these features, so for them TQt emulates the required
-functionality. For example, the Oracle and ODBC drivers have
-proper prepared query support, and TQt makes use of it; but for
-databases that don't have this support, TQt implements the feature
-itself, e.g. by replacing placeholders with actual values when a
-query is executed. The exception is positional binding using named
-placeholders, which requires that the database supports prepared
-queries.
-
                                                       Oracle databases identify placeholders by using a colon-name
-syntax, e.g :name. ODBC simply uses ? characters. TQt
-supports both syntaxes (although you can't mix them in the same
-query).
-
                                                       Below we present the same example using each of the four different
-binding approaches.
-
                                                       Named binding using named placeholders
-
                                                      -    TQSqlQuery query;
-    query.prepare( "INSERT INTO atable (id, forename, surname) "
-                   "VALUES (:id, :forename, :surname)" );
-    query.bindValue( ":id", 1001 );
-    query.bindValue( ":forename", "Bart" );
-    query.bindValue( ":surname", "Simpson" );
-    query.exec();
-    
                                                      
- 
-
                                                       Positional binding using named placeholders
-
                                                      -    TQSqlQuery query;
-    query.prepare( "INSERT INTO atable (id, forename, surname) "
-                   "VALUES (:id, :forename, :surname)" );
-    query.bindValue( 0, 1001 );
-    query.bindValue( 1, "Bart" );
-    query.bindValue( 2, "Simpson" );
-    query.exec();
-    
                                                      
- 
-Note: Using positional binding with named placeholders will
-only work if the database supports prepared queries. This can be
-checked with TQSqlDriver::hasFeature() using TQSqlDriver::PreparedQueries
-as argument for driver feature.
-
                                                       Binding values using positional placeholders #1
-
                                                      -    TQSqlQuery query;
-    query.prepare( "INSERT INTO atable (id, forename, surname) "
-                   "VALUES (?, ?, ?)" );
-    query.bindValue( 0, 1001 );
-    query.bindValue( 1, "Bart" );
-    query.bindValue( 2, "Simpson" );
-    query.exec();
-    
                                                      
- 
-
                                                       Binding values using positional placeholders #2
-
                                                      -    query.prepare( "INSERT INTO atable (id, forename, surname) "
-                   "VALUES (?, ?, ?)" );
-    query.addBindValue( 1001 );
-    query.addBindValue( "Bart" );
-    query.addBindValue( "Simpson" );
-    query.exec();
-    
                                                      
- 
-
                                                       Binding values to a stored procedure
-This code calls a stored procedure called AsciiToInt(), passing
-it a character through its in parameter, and taking its result in
-the out parameter.
-
                                                      -    TQSqlQuery query;
-    query.prepare( "call AsciiToInt(?, ?)" );
-    query.bindValue( 0, "A" );
-    query.bindValue( 1, 0, TQSql::Out );
-    query.exec();
-    int i = query.boundValue( 1 ).toInt(); // i is 65.
-    
                                                      
- 
-
                                                       
                                                      See also TQSqlDatabase, TQSqlCursor, TQVariant, and Database Classes.
-
-
                                                      Member Function Documentation
                                                      
-
                                                      TQSqlQuery::TQSqlQuery ( TQSqlResult * r )
-
                                                      
-Creates a TQSqlQuery object which uses the TQSqlResult r to
-communicate with a database.
-
-
                                                      TQSqlQuery::TQSqlQuery ( const TQString & query = TQString::null, TQSqlDatabase * db = 0 )
-
                                                      
-Creates a TQSqlQuery object using the SQL query and the database
-db. If db is 0, (the default), the application's default
-database is used. If query is not a null string, it will be
-executed.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also TQSqlDatabase.
-
-
                                                      explicit TQSqlQuery::TQSqlQuery ( TQSqlDatabase * db )
-
                                                      
-Creates a TQSqlQuery object using the database db. If db is
-0, the application's default database is used.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also TQSqlDatabase.
-
-
                                                      TQSqlQuery::TQSqlQuery ( const TQSqlQuery & other )
-
                                                      
-Constructs a copy of other.
-
-
                                                      TQSqlQuery::~TQSqlQuery () [virtual]
-
                                                      
-Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-
-
                                                      void TQSqlQuery::addBindValue ( const TQVariant & val, TQSql::ParameterType type )
-
                                                      
-Adds the value val to the list of values when using positional
-value binding. The order of the addBindValue() calls determines
-which placeholder a value will be bound to in the prepared query.
-If type is TQSql::Out or TQSql::InOut, the placeholder will
-be overwritten with data from the database after the exec() call.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also bindValue(), prepare(), and exec().
-
-
                                                      void TQSqlQuery::addBindValue ( const TQVariant & val )
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Binds the placeholder with type TQSql::In.
-
-
                                                      void TQSqlQuery::afterSeek () [virtual protected]
-
                                                      
-Protected virtual function called after the internal record
-pointer is moved to a new record. The default implementation does
-nothing.
-
-
                                                      int TQSqlQuery::at () const
-
                                                      
-Returns the current internal position of the query. The first
-record is at position zero. If the position is invalid, a
-TQSql::Location will be returned indicating the invalid position.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also prev(), next(), first(), last(), seek(), isActive(), and isValid().
-
-
                                                      Example: sql/overview/navigating/main.cpp.
-
                                                      void TQSqlQuery::beforeSeek () [virtual protected]
-
                                                      
-Protected virtual function called before the internal record
-pointer is moved to a new record. The default implementation does
-nothing.
-
-
                                                      void TQSqlQuery::bindValue ( const TQString & placeholder, const TQVariant & val, TQSql::ParameterType type )
-
                                                      
-Set the placeholder placeholder to be bound to value val in
-the prepared statement. Note that the placeholder mark (e.g :)
-must be included when specifying the placeholder name. If type
-is TQSql::Out or TQSql::InOut, the placeholder will be
-overwritten with data from the database after the exec() call.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also addBindValue(), prepare(), and exec().
-
-
                                                      void TQSqlQuery::bindValue ( const TQString & placeholder, const TQVariant & val )
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Binds the placeholder with type TQSql::In.
-
-
                                                      void TQSqlQuery::bindValue ( int pos, const TQVariant & val )
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Binds the placeholder at position pos with type TQSql::In.
-
-
                                                      void TQSqlQuery::bindValue ( int pos, const TQVariant & val, TQSql::ParameterType type )
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Set the placeholder in position pos to be bound to value val
-in the prepared statement. Field numbering starts at 0. If type
-is TQSql::Out or TQSql::InOut, the placeholder will be
-overwritten with data from the database after the exec() call.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also addBindValue(), prepare(), and exec().
-
-
                                                      TQVariant TQSqlQuery::boundValue ( const TQString & placeholder ) const
-
                                                      
-Returns the value for the placeholder.
-
-
                                                      TQVariant TQSqlQuery::boundValue ( int pos ) const
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Returns the value for the placeholder at position pos.
-
-
                                                      TQMap<TQString, TQVariant> TQSqlQuery::boundValues () const
-
                                                      
-Returns a map of the bound values.
-
                                                       The bound values can be examined in the following way:
-
                                                      -    TQSqlQuery query;
-    ...
-    // Examine the bound values - bound using named binding
-    TQMap<TQString, TQVariant>::ConstIterator it;
-    TQMap<TQString, TQVariant> vals = query.boundValues();
-    for ( it = vals.begin(); it != vals.end(); ++it )
-        qWarning( "Placeholder: " + it.key() + ", Value: " + (*it).toString() );
-    ...
-
-    // Examine the bound values - bound using positional binding
-    TQValueList<TQVariant>::ConstIterator it;
-    TQValueList<TQVariant> list = query.boundValues().values();
-    int i = 0;
-    for ( it = list.begin(); it != list.end(); ++it )
-        qWarning( "Placeholder pos: %d, Value: " + (*it).toString(), i++ );
-    ...
-
-    
                                                      
- 
-
-
                                                      const TQSqlDriver * TQSqlQuery::driver () const
-
                                                      
-Returns the database driver associated with the query.
-
-
                                                      bool TQSqlQuery::exec ( const TQString & query ) [virtual]
-
                                                      
-Executes the SQL in query. Returns TRUE and sets the query
-state to active if the query was successful; otherwise returns
-FALSE and sets the query state to inactive. The query string
-must use syntax appropriate for the SQL database being queried,
-for example, standard SQL.
-
                                                       After the query is executed, the query is positioned on an invalid record, and must be navigated to a valid record before
-data values can be retrieved, e.g. using next().
-
                                                       Note that the last error for this query is reset when exec() is
-called.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also isActive(), isValid(), next(), prev(), first(), last(), and seek().
-
-
                                                      Examples: sql/overview/basicbrowsing/main.cpp, sql/overview/basicbrowsing2/main.cpp, sql/overview/basicdatamanip/main.cpp, and sql/overview/connection.cpp.
-
                                                      bool TQSqlQuery::exec ()
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Executes a previously prepared SQL query. Returns TRUE if the
-query executed successfully; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also prepare(), bindValue(), and addBindValue().
-
-
                                                      TQString TQSqlQuery::executedQuery () const
-
                                                      
-Returns the last query that was executed.
-
                                                       In most cases this function returns the same as lastQuery(). If a
-prepared query with placeholders is executed on a DBMS that does
-not support it, the preparation of this query is emulated. The
-placeholders in the original query are replaced with their bound
-values to form a new query. This function returns the modified
-query. Useful for debugging purposes.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also lastQuery().
-
-
                                                      bool TQSqlQuery::first () [virtual]
-
                                                      
-Retrieves the first record in the result, if available, and
-positions the query on the retrieved record. Note that the result
-must be in an active state and isSelect() must return TRUE before
-calling this function or it will do nothing and return FALSE.
-Returns TRUE if successful. If unsuccessful the query position is
-set to an invalid position and FALSE is returned.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also next(), prev(), last(), seek(), at(), isActive(), and isValid().
-
-
                                                      Example: sql/overview/navigating/main.cpp.
-
                                                      bool TQSqlQuery::isActive () const
-
                                                      
-Returns TRUE if the query is currently active; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
-
                                                      Examples: sql/overview/basicbrowsing/main.cpp, sql/overview/basicbrowsing2/main.cpp, sql/overview/basicdatamanip/main.cpp, sql/overview/navigating/main.cpp, and sql/overview/retrieve1/main.cpp.
-
                                                      bool TQSqlQuery::isForwardOnly () const
-
                                                      
-Returns TRUE if you can only scroll forward through a result
-set; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also setForwardOnly().
-
-
                                                      bool TQSqlQuery::isNull ( int field ) const
-
                                                      
-Returns TRUE if the query is active and positioned on a valid
-record and the field is NULL; otherwise returns FALSE. Note
-that for some drivers isNull() will not return accurate
-information until after an attempt is made to retrieve data.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also isActive(), isValid(), and value().
-
-
                                                      bool TQSqlQuery::isSelect () const
-
                                                      
-Returns TRUE if the current query is a SELECT statement;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                      bool TQSqlQuery::isValid () const
-
                                                      
-Returns TRUE if the query is currently positioned on a valid
-record; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                      bool TQSqlQuery::last () [virtual]
-
                                                      
-Retrieves the last record in the result, if available, and
-positions the query on the retrieved record. Note that the result
-must be in an active state and isSelect() must return TRUE before
-calling this function or it will do nothing and return FALSE.
-Returns TRUE if successful. If unsuccessful the query position is
-set to an invalid position and FALSE is returned.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also next(), prev(), first(), seek(), at(), isActive(), and isValid().
-
-
                                                      Example: sql/overview/navigating/main.cpp.
-
                                                      TQSqlError TQSqlQuery::lastError () const
-
                                                      
-Returns error information about the last error (if any) that
-occurred.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also TQSqlError.
-
-
                                                      TQString TQSqlQuery::lastQuery () const
-
                                                      
-Returns the text of the current query being used, or TQString::null
-if there is no current query text.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also executedQuery().
-
-
                                                      bool TQSqlQuery::next () [virtual]
-
                                                      
-Retrieves the next record in the result, if available, and
-positions the query on the retrieved record. Note that the result
-must be in an active state and isSelect() must return TRUE before
-calling this function or it will do nothing and return FALSE.
-
                                                       The following rules apply:
-
                                                       
                                                        
-
                                                      •  If the result is currently located before the first
-record, e.g. immediately after a query is executed, an attempt is
-made to retrieve the first record.
-
                                                         
                                                      •  If the result is currently located after the last record,
-there is no change and FALSE is returned.
-
                                                         
                                                      •  If the result is located somewhere in the middle, an attempt
-is made to retrieve the next record.
-
                                                      
-
                                                       If the record could not be retrieved, the result is positioned after
-the last record and FALSE is returned. If the record is successfully
-retrieved, TRUE is returned.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also prev(), first(), last(), seek(), at(), isActive(), and isValid().
-
-
                                                      Examples: sql/overview/basicbrowsing/main.cpp, sql/overview/basicbrowsing2/main.cpp, sql/overview/delete/main.cpp, sql/overview/order1/main.cpp, sql/overview/retrieve1/main.cpp, sql/overview/subclass4/main.cpp, and sql/overview/subclass5/main.cpp.
-
                                                      int TQSqlQuery::numRowsAffected () const
-
                                                      
-Returns the number of rows affected by the result's SQL statement,
-or -1 if it cannot be determined. Note that for SELECT
-statements, the value is undefined; see size() instead. If the
-query is not active (isActive() returns FALSE), -1 is returned.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also size() and TQSqlDriver::hasFeature().
-
-
                                                      Examples: sql/overview/basicbrowsing2/main.cpp and sql/overview/basicdatamanip/main.cpp.
-
                                                      TQSqlQuery & TQSqlQuery::operator= ( const TQSqlQuery & other )
-
                                                      
-Assigns other to the query.
-
-
                                                      bool TQSqlQuery::prepare ( const TQString & query )
-
                                                      
-Prepares the SQL query query for execution. The query may
-contain placeholders for binding values. Both Oracle style
-colon-name (e.g. :surname), and ODBC style (e.g. ?)
-placeholders are supported; but they cannot be mixed in the same
-query. See the Description for examples.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also exec(), bindValue(), and addBindValue().
-
-
                                                      bool TQSqlQuery::prev () [virtual]
-
                                                      
-Retrieves the previous record in the result, if available, and
-positions the query on the retrieved record. Note that the result
-must be in an active state and isSelect() must return TRUE before
-calling this function or it will do nothing and return FALSE.
-
                                                       The following rules apply:
-
                                                       
                                                        
-
                                                      •  If the result is currently located before the first record,
-there is no change and FALSE is returned.
-
                                                         
                                                      •  If the result is currently located after the last record, an
-attempt is made to retrieve the last record.
-
                                                         
                                                      •  If the result is somewhere in the middle, an attempt is made
-to retrieve the previous record.
-
                                                      
-
                                                       If the record could not be retrieved, the result is positioned
-before the first record and FALSE is returned. If the record is
-successfully retrieved, TRUE is returned.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also next(), first(), last(), seek(), at(), isActive(), and isValid().
-
-
                                                      const TQSqlResult * TQSqlQuery::result () const
-
                                                      
-Returns the result associated with the query.
-
-
                                                      bool TQSqlQuery::seek ( int i, bool relative = FALSE ) [virtual]
-
                                                      
-Retrieves the record at position (offset) i, if available, and
-positions the query on the retrieved record. The first record is
-at position 0. Note that the query must be in an active state and
-isSelect() must return TRUE before calling this function.
-
                                                       If relative is FALSE (the default), the following rules apply:
-
                                                       
                                                        
-
                                                      •  If i is negative, the result is positioned before the
-first record and FALSE is returned.
-
                                                      •  Otherwise, an attempt is made to move to the record at position
-i. If the record at position i could not be retrieved, the
-result is positioned after the last record and FALSE is returned. If
-the record is successfully retrieved, TRUE is returned.
-
                                                      
-
                                                       If relative is TRUE, the following rules apply:
-
                                                       
                                                        
-
                                                      •  If the result is currently positioned before the first
-record or on the first record, and i is negative, there is no
-change, and FALSE is returned.
-
                                                      •  If the result is currently located after the last record, and
-i is positive, there is no change, and FALSE is returned.
-
                                                      •  If the result is currently located somewhere in the middle,
-and the relative offset i moves the result below zero, the
-result is positioned before the first record and FALSE is
-returned.
-
                                                      •  Otherwise, an attempt is made to move to the record i
-records ahead of the current record (or i records behind the
-current record if i is negative). If the record at offset i
-could not be retrieved, the result is positioned after the last
-record if i >= 0, (or before the first record if i is
-negative), and FALSE is returned. If the record is successfully
-retrieved, TRUE is returned.
-
                                                      
-
                                                       
                                                      See also next(), prev(), first(), last(), at(), isActive(), and isValid().
-
-
                                                      Example: sql/overview/navigating/main.cpp.
-
                                                      void TQSqlQuery::setForwardOnly ( bool forward )
-
                                                      
-Sets forward only mode to forward. If forward is TRUE only
-next(), and seek() with positive values, are allowed for
-navigating the results. Forward only mode needs far less memory
-since results do not need to be cached.
-
                                                       Forward only mode is off by default.
-
                                                       Forward only mode cannot be used with data aware widgets like
-TQDataTable, since they must to be able to scroll backward as well
-as forward.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also isForwardOnly(), next(), and seek().
-
-
                                                      int TQSqlQuery::size () const
-
                                                      
-Returns the size of the result, (number of rows returned), or -1
-if the size cannot be determined or if the database does not
-support reporting information about query sizes. Note that for
-non-SELECT statements (isSelect() returns FALSE), size() will
-return -1. If the query is not active (isActive() returns FALSE),
--1 is returned.
-
                                                       To determine the number of rows affected by a non-SELECT
-statement, use numRowsAffected().
-
                                                       
                                                      See also isActive(), numRowsAffected(), and TQSqlDriver::hasFeature().
-
-
                                                      Example: sql/overview/navigating/main.cpp.
-
                                                      TQVariant TQSqlQuery::value ( int i ) const [virtual]
-
                                                      
-Returns the value of the i-th field in the query (zero based).
-
                                                       The fields are numbered from left to right using the text of the
-SELECT statement, e.g. in SELECT forename, surname FROM people,
-field 0 is forename and field 1 is surname. Using SELECT *
-is not recommended because the order of the fields in the query is
-undefined.
-
                                                       An invalid TQVariant is returned if field i does not exist, if
-the query is inactive, or if the query is positioned on an invalid
-record.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also prev(), next(), first(), last(), seek(), isActive(), and isValid().
-
-
                                                      Examples: sql/overview/basicbrowsing/main.cpp, sql/overview/basicbrowsing2/main.cpp, sql/overview/retrieve1/main.cpp, sql/overview/subclass3/main.cpp, sql/overview/subclass4/main.cpp, sql/overview/subclass5/main.cpp, and sql/overview/table4/main.cpp.
-
-
                                                      
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                      
-
-
                                                      Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                      TQt 3.3.8
                                                      
-
                                                      
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsqlrecord-h.html b/doc/html/qsqlrecord-h.html
index 9fb20a03d..69917fcc3 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsqlrecord-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsqlrecord-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsqlrecord.h Include File
+ntqsqlrecord.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                      
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                      TQSqlRecord Class Reference
                                                      [sql module]
                                                      
-
-
                                                      The TQSqlRecord class encapsulates a database record, i.e. a
-set of database fields.
-More...
-
                                                      #include <qsqlrecord.h>
-
                                                      Inherited by TQSqlCursor and TQSqlIndex.
-
                                                      List of all member functions.
-
                                                      Public Members
                                                      
-
                                                        
-
                                                      • TQSqlRecord ()
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • TQSqlRecord ( const TQSqlRecord & other )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • TQSqlRecord & operator= ( const TQSqlRecord & other )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual ~TQSqlRecord ()
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual TQVariant value ( int i ) const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual TQVariant value ( const TQString & name ) const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual void setValue ( int i, const TQVariant & val )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual void setValue ( const TQString & name, const TQVariant & val )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • bool isGenerated ( int i ) const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • bool isGenerated ( const TQString & name ) const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual void setGenerated ( const TQString & name, bool generated )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual void setGenerated ( int i, bool generated )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual void setNull ( int i )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual void setNull ( const TQString & name )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • bool isNull ( int i ) const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • bool isNull ( const TQString & name ) const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • int position ( const TQString & name ) const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • TQString fieldName ( int i ) const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • TQSqlField * field ( int i )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • TQSqlField * field ( const TQString & name )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • const TQSqlField * field ( int i ) const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • const TQSqlField * field ( const TQString & name ) const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual void append ( const TQSqlField & field )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual void insert ( int pos, const TQSqlField & field )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual void remove ( int pos )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • bool isEmpty () const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • bool contains ( const TQString & name ) const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual void clear ()
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual void clearValues ( bool nullify = FALSE )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • uint count () const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual TQString toString ( const TQString & prefix = TQString::null, const TQString & sep = "," ) const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual TQStringList toStringList ( const TQString & prefix = TQString::null ) const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      
-
                                                      Detailed Description
                                                      
-
-
-The TQSqlRecord class encapsulates a database record, i.e. a
-set of database fields.
-
                                                       
-
-
                                                       The TQSqlRecord class encapsulates the functionality and
-characteristics of a database record (usually a table or view within
-the database). TQSqlRecords support adding and removing fields as
-well as setting and retrieving field values.
-
                                                       TQSqlRecord is implicitly shared. This means you can make copies of
-the record in time O(1). If multiple TQSqlRecord instances share
-the same data and one is modifying the record's data then this
-modifying instance makes a copy and modifies its private copy -
-thus it does not affect other instances.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also TQSqlRecordInfo and Database Classes.
-
-
                                                      Member Function Documentation
                                                      
-
                                                      TQSqlRecord::TQSqlRecord ()
-
                                                      
-Constructs an empty record.
-
-
                                                      TQSqlRecord::TQSqlRecord ( const TQSqlRecord & other )
-
                                                      
-Constructs a copy of other.
-
-
                                                      TQSqlRecord::~TQSqlRecord () [virtual]
-
                                                      
-Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-
-
                                                      void TQSqlRecord::append ( const TQSqlField & field ) [virtual]
-
                                                      
-Append a copy of field field to the end of the record.
-
-
                                                      Reimplemented in TQSqlIndex.
-
                                                      void TQSqlRecord::clear () [virtual]
-
                                                      
-Removes all the record's fields.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also clearValues().
-
-
                                                      Reimplemented in TQSqlCursor.
-
                                                      void TQSqlRecord::clearValues ( bool nullify = FALSE ) [virtual]
-
                                                      
-Clears the value of all fields in the record. If nullify is
-TRUE, (the default is FALSE), each field is set to NULL.
-
-
                                                      bool TQSqlRecord::contains ( const TQString & name ) const
-
                                                      
-Returns TRUE if there is a field in the record called name;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                      uint TQSqlRecord::count () const
-
                                                      
-Returns the number of fields in the record.
-
-
                                                      TQSqlField * TQSqlRecord::field ( int i )
-
                                                      
-Returns the field at position i within the record, or 0 if it
-cannot be found.
-
-
                                                      TQSqlField * TQSqlRecord::field ( const TQString & name )
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Returns the field called name within the record, or 0 if it
-cannot be found. Field names are not case-sensitive.
-
-
                                                      const TQSqlField * TQSqlRecord::field ( int i ) const
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       
-
                                                      const TQSqlField * TQSqlRecord::field ( const TQString & name ) const
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Returns the field called name within the record, or 0 if it
-cannot be found. Field names are not case-sensitive.
-
-
                                                      TQString TQSqlRecord::fieldName ( int i ) const
-
                                                      
-Returns the name of the field at position i. If the field does
-not exist, TQString::null is returned.
-
-
                                                      void TQSqlRecord::insert ( int pos, const TQSqlField & field ) [virtual]
-
                                                      
-Insert a copy of field at position pos. If a field already
-exists at pos, it is removed.
-
-
                                                      bool TQSqlRecord::isEmpty () const
-
                                                      
-Returns TRUE if there are no fields in the record; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                      bool TQSqlRecord::isGenerated ( const TQString & name ) const
-
                                                      
-Returns TRUE if the record has a field called name and this
-field is to be generated (the default); otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also setGenerated().
-
-
                                                      bool TQSqlRecord::isGenerated ( int i ) const
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Returns TRUE if the record has a field at position i and this
-field is to be generated (the default); otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also setGenerated().
-
-
                                                      bool TQSqlRecord::isNull ( const TQString & name ) const
-
                                                      
-Returns TRUE if the field called name is NULL or if there is no
-field called name; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also position().
-
-
                                                      bool TQSqlRecord::isNull ( int i ) const
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Returns TRUE if the field i is NULL or if there is no field at
-position i; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also fieldName().
-
-
                                                      TQSqlRecord & TQSqlRecord::operator= ( const TQSqlRecord & other )
-
                                                      
-Sets the record equal to other.
-
-
                                                      int TQSqlRecord::position ( const TQString & name ) const
-
                                                      
-Returns the position of the field called name within the
-record, or -1 if it cannot be found. Field names are not
-case-sensitive. If more than one field matches, the first one is
-returned.
-
-
                                                      void TQSqlRecord::remove ( int pos ) [virtual]
-
                                                      
-Removes the field at pos. If pos does not exist, nothing
-happens.
-
-
                                                      Reimplemented in TQSqlCursor.
-
                                                      void TQSqlRecord::setGenerated ( const TQString & name, bool generated ) [virtual]
-
                                                      
-Sets the generated flag for the field called name to generated. If the field does not exist, nothing happens. Only
-fields that have generated set to TRUE are included in the SQL
-that is generated, e.g. by TQSqlCursor.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also isGenerated().
-
-
                                                      Reimplemented in TQSqlCursor.
-
                                                      void TQSqlRecord::setGenerated ( int i, bool generated ) [virtual]
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Sets the generated flag for the field i to generated.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also isGenerated().
-
-
                                                      Reimplemented in TQSqlCursor.
-
                                                      void TQSqlRecord::setNull ( int i ) [virtual]
-
                                                      
-Sets the value of field i to NULL. If the field does not exist,
-nothing happens.
-
-
                                                      void TQSqlRecord::setNull ( const TQString & name ) [virtual]
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Sets the value of the field called name to NULL. If the field
-does not exist, nothing happens.
-
-
                                                      void TQSqlRecord::setValue ( int i, const TQVariant & val ) [virtual]
-
                                                      
-Sets the value of the field at position i to val. If the
-field does not exist, nothing happens.
-
-
                                                      Examples: sql/overview/insert/main.cpp, sql/overview/insert2/main.cpp, sql/overview/subclass5/main.cpp, sql/overview/update/main.cpp, and sql/sqltable/main.cpp.
-
                                                      void TQSqlRecord::setValue ( const TQString & name, const TQVariant & val ) [virtual]
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Sets the value of the field called name to val. If the field
-does not exist, nothing happens.
-
-
                                                      TQString TQSqlRecord::toString ( const TQString & prefix = TQString::null, const TQString & sep = "," ) const [virtual]
-
                                                      
-Returns a list of all the record's field names as a string
-separated by sep.
-
                                                       Note that fields which are not generated are not included (see
-isGenerated()). The returned string is suitable, for example, for
-generating SQL SELECT statements. If a prefix is specified,
-e.g. a table name, all fields are prefixed in the form:
-
                                                       "prefix.<fieldname>"
-
-
                                                      TQStringList TQSqlRecord::toStringList ( const TQString & prefix = TQString::null ) const [virtual]
-
                                                      
-Returns a list of all the record's field names, each having the
-prefix prefix.
-
                                                       Note that fields which have generated set to FALSE are not
-included. (See isGenerated()). If prefix is supplied, e.g.
-a table name, all fields are prefixed in the form:
-
                                                       "prefix.<fieldname>"
-
-
                                                      TQVariant TQSqlRecord::value ( int i ) const [virtual]
-
                                                      
-Returns the value of the field located at position i in the
-record. If field i does not exist the resultant behaviour is
-undefined.
-
                                                       This function should be used with TQSqlQuerys. When working
-with a TQSqlCursor the value(const
-    TQString&) overload which uses field names is more
-appropriate.
-
-
                                                      Example: sql/overview/update/main.cpp.
-
                                                      TQVariant TQSqlRecord::value ( const TQString & name ) const [virtual]
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Returns the value of the field called name in the record. If
-field name does not exist the resultant behaviour is undefined.
-
-
-
                                                      
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                      
-
-
                                                      Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                      TQt 3.3.8
                                                      
-
                                                      
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsqlrecordinfo-members.html b/doc/html/qsqlrecordinfo-members.html
index 03c75e871..c9bf79395 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsqlrecordinfo-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsqlrecordinfo-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qsqlrecordinfo.html b/doc/html/qsqlrecordinfo.html
index ee2c7c354..f6b5820c1 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsqlrecordinfo.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsqlrecordinfo.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                                      The TQSqlRecordInfo class encapsulates a set of database field meta data.
 More...
-
                                                      #include <qsqlrecord.h>
+
                                                      #include <ntqsqlrecord.h>
 
                                                      List of all member functions.
 
                                                      Public Members
                                                      
 
                                                        
@@ -50,11 +50,11 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 The TQSqlRecordInfo class encapsulates a set of database field meta data.
 
                                                         
 
-
                                                         This class is a TQValueList that holds a set of database field meta
+
                                                         This class is a TQValueList that holds a set of database field meta
 data. Use contains() to see if a given field name exists in the
 record, and use find() to get a TQSqlFieldInfo record for a named
 field.
-
                                                         
                                                        See also TQValueList, TQSqlFieldInfo, and Database Classes.
+
                                                         
                                                        See also TQValueList, TQSqlFieldInfo, and Database Classes.
 
 
                                                        Member Function Documentation
                                                        
 
                                                        TQSqlRecordInfo::TQSqlRecordInfo ()
@@ -67,25 +67,25 @@ field.
 
 
                                                         Constructs a copy of other.
 
-
                                                        TQSqlRecordInfo::TQSqlRecordInfo ( const TQSqlRecord & other )
+
                                                        TQSqlRecordInfo::TQSqlRecordInfo ( const TQSqlRecord & other )
 
                                                        
 Constructs a TQSqlRecordInfo object based on the fields in the
-TQSqlRecord other.
+TQSqlRecord other.
 
-
                                                        size_type TQSqlRecordInfo::contains ( const TQString & fieldName ) const
+
                                                        size_type TQSqlRecordInfo::contains ( const TQString & fieldName ) const
 
                                                        
 Returns the number of times a field called fieldName occurs in
 the record. Returns 0 if no field by that name could be found.
 
-
                                                        TQSqlFieldInfo TQSqlRecordInfo::find ( const TQString & fieldName ) const
+
                                                        TQSqlFieldInfo TQSqlRecordInfo::find ( const TQString & fieldName ) const
 
                                                        
 Returns a TQSqlFieldInfo object for the first field in the record
 which has the field name fieldName. If no matching field is
 found then an empty TQSqlFieldInfo object is returned.
 
-
                                                        TQSqlRecord TQSqlRecordInfo::toRecord () const
+
                                                        TQSqlRecord TQSqlRecordInfo::toRecord () const
 
                                                        
-Returns an empty TQSqlRecord based on the field information
+Returns an empty TQSqlRecord based on the field information
 in this TQSqlRecordInfo.
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qsqlresult-h.html b/doc/html/qsqlresult-h.html
index e94d332e1..5de045787 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsqlresult-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsqlresult-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsqlresult.h Include File
+ntqsqlresult.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                        TQSqlResult Class Reference
                                                        [sql module]
                                                        
-
-
                                                        The TQSqlResult class provides an abstract interface for
-accessing data from SQL databases.
-More...
-
                                                        #include <qsqlresult.h>
-
                                                        List of all member functions.
-
                                                        Public Members
                                                        
-
-
                                                        Protected Members
                                                        
-
-
                                                        Detailed Description
                                                        
-
-
-The TQSqlResult class provides an abstract interface for
-accessing data from SQL databases.
-
                                                         
-
-
                                                         Normally you would use TQSqlQuery instead of TQSqlResult since TQSqlQuery
-provides a generic wrapper for database-specific implementations of
-TQSqlResult.
-
                                                         
                                                        See also TQSql and Database Classes.
-
-
                                                        Member Function Documentation
                                                        
-
                                                        TQSqlResult::TQSqlResult ( const TQSqlDriver * db ) [protected]
-
                                                        
-Protected constructor which creates a TQSqlResult using database db. The object is initialized to an inactive state.
-
-
                                                        TQSqlResult::~TQSqlResult () [virtual]
-
                                                        
-Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-
-
                                                        int TQSqlResult::at () const [protected]
-
                                                        
-Returns the current (zero-based) position of the result.
-
-
                                                        TQVariant TQSqlResult::data ( int i ) [pure virtual protected]
-
                                                        
-
-
                                                         Returns the data for field i (zero-based) as a TQVariant. This
-function is only called if the result is in an active state and is
-positioned on a valid record and i is non-negative.
-Derived classes must reimplement this function and return the value
-of field i, or TQVariant() if it cannot be determined.
-
-
                                                        const TQSqlDriver * TQSqlResult::driver () const [protected]
-
                                                        
-Returns the driver associated with the result.
-
-
                                                        bool TQSqlResult::fetch ( int i ) [pure virtual protected]
-
                                                        
-
-
                                                         Positions the result to an arbitrary (zero-based) index i. This
-function is only called if the result is in an active state. Derived
-classes must reimplement this function and position the result to the
-index i, and call setAt() with an appropriate value. Return TRUE
-to indicate success, or FALSE to signify failure.
-
-
                                                        bool TQSqlResult::fetchFirst () [pure virtual protected]
-
                                                        
-
-
                                                         Positions the result to the first record in the result. This
-function is only called if the result is in an active state.
-Derived classes must reimplement this function and position the result
-to the first record, and call setAt() with an appropriate value.
-Return TRUE to indicate success, or FALSE to signify failure.
-
-
                                                        bool TQSqlResult::fetchLast () [pure virtual protected]
-
                                                        
-
-
                                                         Positions the result to the last record in the result. This
-function is only called if the result is in an active state.
-Derived classes must reimplement this function and position the result
-to the last record, and call setAt() with an appropriate value.
-Return TRUE to indicate success, or FALSE to signify failure.
-
-
                                                        bool TQSqlResult::fetchNext () [virtual protected]
-
                                                        
-Positions the result to the next available record in the result.
-This function is only called if the result is in an active state.
-The default implementation calls fetch() with the next index.
-Derived classes can reimplement this function and position the result
-to the next record in some other way, and call setAt() with an
-appropriate value. Return TRUE to indicate success, or FALSE to
-signify failure.
-
-
                                                        bool TQSqlResult::fetchPrev () [virtual protected]
-
                                                        
-Positions the result to the previous available record in the
-result. This function is only called if the result is in an active
-state. The default implementation calls fetch() with the previous
-index. Derived classes can reimplement this function and position the
-result to the next record in some other way, and call setAt() with
-an appropriate value. Return TRUE to indicate success, or FALSE to
-signify failure.
-
-
                                                        bool TQSqlResult::isActive () const [protected]
-
                                                        
-Returns TRUE if the result has records to be retrieved; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                        bool TQSqlResult::isForwardOnly () const [protected]
-
                                                        
-Returns TRUE if you can only scroll forward through a result set;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                        bool TQSqlResult::isNull ( int i ) [pure virtual protected]
-
                                                        
-
-
                                                         Returns TRUE if the field at position i is NULL; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                        bool TQSqlResult::isSelect () const [protected]
-
                                                        
-Returns TRUE if the current result is from a SELECT statement;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                        bool TQSqlResult::isValid () const [protected]
-
                                                        
-Returns TRUE if the result is positioned on a valid record (that
-is, the result is not positioned before the first or after the
-last record); otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                        TQSqlError TQSqlResult::lastError () const [protected]
-
                                                        
-Returns the last error associated with the result.
-
-
                                                        TQString TQSqlResult::lastQuery () const [protected]
-
                                                        
-Returns the current SQL query text, or TQString::null if there is none.
-
-
                                                        int TQSqlResult::numRowsAffected () [pure virtual protected]
-
                                                        
-
-
                                                         Returns the number of rows affected by the last query executed.
-
-
                                                        bool TQSqlResult::reset ( const TQString & query ) [pure virtual protected]
-
                                                        
-
-
                                                         Sets the result to use the SQL statement query for subsequent
-data retrieval. Derived classes must reimplement this function and
-apply the query to the database. This function is called only
-after the result is set to an inactive state and is positioned
-before the first record of the new result. Derived classes should
-return TRUE if the query was successful and ready to be used,
-or FALSE otherwise.
-
-
                                                        void TQSqlResult::setActive ( bool a ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                        
-Protected function provided for derived classes to set the
-internal active state to the value of a.
-
                                                         
                                                        See also isActive().
-
-
                                                        void TQSqlResult::setAt ( int at ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                        
-Protected function provided for derived classes to set the
-internal (zero-based) result index to at.
-
                                                         
                                                        See also at().
-
-
                                                        void TQSqlResult::setForwardOnly ( bool forward ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                        
-Sets forward only mode to forward. If forward is TRUE only
-fetchNext() is allowed for navigating the results. Forward only
-mode needs far less memory since results do not have to be cached.
-forward only mode is off by default.
-
                                                         
                                                        See also fetchNext().
-
-
                                                        void TQSqlResult::setLastError ( const TQSqlError & e ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                        
-Protected function provided for derived classes to set the last
-error to the value of e.
-
                                                         
                                                        See also lastError().
-
-
                                                        void TQSqlResult::setQuery ( const TQString & query ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                        
-Sets the current query for the result to query. The result must
-be reset() in order to execute the query on the database.
-
-
                                                        void TQSqlResult::setSelect ( bool s ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                        
-Protected function provided for derived classes to indicate
-whether or not the current statement is a SQL SELECT statement.
-The s parameter should be TRUE if the statement is a SELECT
-statement, or FALSE otherwise.
-
-
                                                        int TQSqlResult::size () [pure virtual protected]
-
                                                        
-
-
                                                         Returns the size of the result or -1 if it cannot be determined.
-
-
-
                                                        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                        
-
-
                                                        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                        TQt 3.3.8
                                                        
-
                                                        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qsqlselectcursor-h.html b/doc/html/qsqlselectcursor-h.html
index cfee37b38..da3a1d4d7 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsqlselectcursor-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsqlselectcursor-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsqlselectcursor.h Include File
+ntqsqlselectcursor.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                        TQSqlSelectCursor Class Reference
                                                        [sql module]
                                                        
-
-
                                                        The TQSqlSelectCursor class provides browsing of general SQL
-SELECT statements.
-More...
-
                                                        #include <qsqlselectcursor.h>
-
                                                        Inherits TQSqlCursor.
-
                                                        List of all member functions.
-
                                                        Public Members
                                                        
-
-
                                                        Detailed Description
                                                        
-
-
-The TQSqlSelectCursor class provides browsing of general SQL
-SELECT statements.
-
                                                         
-
-
                                                         TQSqlSelectCursor is a convenience class that makes it possible to
-display result sets from general SQL SELECT statements in
-data-aware TQt widgets. TQSqlSelectCursor is read-only and does not
-support INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE operations.
-
                                                         Pass the query in at construction time, or use the
-TQSqlSelectCursor::exec() function.
-
                                                         Example:
-
                                                        -    ...
-    TQSqlSelectCursor* cur = new TQSqlSelectCursor( "SELECT id, firstname, lastname FROM author" );
-    TQDataTable* table = new TQDataTable( this );
-    table->setSqlCursor( cur, TRUE, TRUE );
-    table->refresh();
-    ...
-    cur->exec( "SELECT * FROM books" );
-    table->refresh();
-    ...
-    
                                                        
- 
-
                                                        See also Database Classes.
-
-
                                                        Member Function Documentation
                                                        
-
                                                        TQSqlSelectCursor::TQSqlSelectCursor ( const TQString & query = TQString::null, TQSqlDatabase * db = 0 )
-
                                                        
-Constructs a read only cursor on database db using the query query.
-
-
                                                        TQSqlSelectCursor::TQSqlSelectCursor ( const TQSqlSelectCursor & other )
-
                                                         Constructs a copy of other 
-
                                                        TQSqlSelectCursor::~TQSqlSelectCursor ()
-
                                                         Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources 
-
-
                                                        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                        
-
-
                                                        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                        TQt 3.3.8
                                                        
-
                                                        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qstack.html b/doc/html/qstack.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 89a26d2cd..000000000
--- a/doc/html/qstack.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
-
-
-TQStack Class Reference (obsolete)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                        TQStack Class Reference (obsolete)
                                                        
-
- 
-
                                                         
                                                        -#include <qstack.h>
                                                        
- 
-
                                                         The TQStack class has been renamed  TQPtrStack  in TQt 3.0.
-
-
-
                                                        
-
-
                                                        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                        TQt 3.3.8
                                                        
-
                                                        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qstatusbar-h.html b/doc/html/qstatusbar-h.html
index 09173a0c2..d1a5eb537 100644
--- a/doc/html/qstatusbar-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qstatusbar-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qstatusbar.h Include File
+ntqstatusbar.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                        TQStatusBar Class Reference
                                                        
-
-
                                                        The TQStatusBar class provides a horizontal bar suitable for
-presenting status information.
-More...
-
                                                        #include <qstatusbar.h>
-
                                                        Inherits TQWidget.
-
                                                        List of all member functions.
-
                                                        Public Members
                                                        
-
-
                                                        Public Slots
                                                        
-
                                                          
-
                                                        • void message ( const TQString & message )
                                                          • 
-
                                                        • void message ( const TQString & message, int ms )
                                                          • 
-
                                                        • void clear ()
                                                          • 
-
                                                        
-
                                                        Signals
                                                        
-
-
                                                        Properties
                                                        
-
                                                          
-
                                                        • bool sizeGripEnabled - whether the TQSizeGrip in the bottom right of the status bar is enabled
                                                          • 
-
                                                        
-
                                                        Protected Members
                                                        
-
-
                                                        Detailed Description
                                                        
-
-
-The TQStatusBar class provides a horizontal bar suitable for
-presenting status information.
-
                                                         
-
-
-
                                                         Each status indicator falls into one of three categories:
-
                                                         
                                                          
-
                                                        •  Temporary - briefly occupies most of the status bar. Used
-to explain tool tip texts or menu entries, for example.
-
                                                        •  Normal - occupies part of the status bar and may be hidden
-by temporary messages. Used to display the page and line
-number in a word processor, for example.
-
                                                        •  Permanent - is never hidden. Used for important mode
-indications, for example, some applications put a Caps Lock
-indicator in the status bar.
-
                                                        
-
                                                         TQStatusBar lets you display all three types of indicators.
-
                                                         To display a temporary message, call message() (perhaps by
-connecting a suitable signal to it). To remove a temporary
-message, call clear(). There are two variants of message(): one
-that displays the message until the next clear() or message() and
-one that has a time limit:
-
                                                         
                                                        -        connect( loader, SIGNAL(progressMessage(const TQString&)),
-                 statusBar(), SLOT(message(const TQString&)) );
-
-        statusBar()->message("Loading...");  // Initial message
-        loader.loadStuff();                  // Emits progress messages
-        statusBar()->message("Done.", 2000); // Final message for 2 seconds
-    
                                                        
- 
-
                                                         Normal and Permanent messages are displayed by creating a
-small widget and then adding it to the status bar with
-addWidget(). Widgets like TQLabel, TQProgressBar or even TQToolButton
-are useful for adding to status bars. removeWidget() is used to
-remove widgets.
-
                                                         
                                                        -        statusBar()->addWidget(new MyReadWriteIndication(statusBar()));
-    
                                                        
- 
-
                                                         By default TQStatusBar provides a TQSizeGrip in the lower-right
-corner. You can disable it with setSizeGripEnabled(FALSE);
-
                                                          
-
                                                         
                                                        See also TQToolBar, TQMainWindow, TQLabel, GUI Design Handbook: Status Bar, Main Window and Related Classes, and Help System.
-
-
                                                        Member Function Documentation
                                                        
-
                                                        TQStatusBar::TQStatusBar ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                        
-Constructs a status bar called name with parent parent and
-with a size grip.
-
                                                         
                                                        See also sizeGripEnabled.
-
-
                                                        TQStatusBar::~TQStatusBar () [virtual]
-
                                                        
-Destroys the status bar and frees any allocated resources and
-child widgets.
-
-
                                                        void TQStatusBar::addWidget ( TQWidget * widget, int stretch = 0, bool permanent = FALSE ) [virtual]
-
                                                        
-Adds widget to this status bar. widget is reparented if it
-isn't already a child of the TQStatusBar.
-
                                                         widget is permanently visible if permanent is TRUE and may
-be obscured by temporary messages if permanent is FALSE. The
-default is FALSE.
-
                                                         If permanent is TRUE, widget is located at the far right of
-the status bar. If permanent is FALSE (the default), widget
-is located just to the left of the first permanent widget.
-
                                                         stretch is used to compute a suitable size for widget as the
-status bar grows and shrinks. The default of 0 uses a minimum of
-space.
-
                                                         This function may cause some flicker.
-
                                                         
                                                        See also removeWidget().
-
-
                                                        void TQStatusBar::clear () [slot]
-
                                                        
-Removes any temporary message being shown.
-
                                                         
                                                        See also message().
-
-
                                                        void TQStatusBar::hideOrShow () [protected]
-
                                                        
-Ensures that the right widgets are visible. Used by message() and
-clear().
-
-
                                                        bool TQStatusBar::isSizeGripEnabled () const
-
                                                        Returns TRUE if the TQSizeGrip in the bottom right of the status bar is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "sizeGripEnabled" property for details.
-
                                                        void TQStatusBar::message ( const TQString & message ) [slot]
-
                                                        
-Hides the normal status indicators and displays message until
-clear() or another message() is called.
-
                                                         
                                                        See also clear().
-
-
                                                        Example: regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
-
                                                        void TQStatusBar::message ( const TQString & message, int ms ) [slot]
-
                                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                         Hides the normal status indications and displays message for ms milli-seconds or until clear() or another message() is called,
-whichever occurs first.
-
-
                                                        void TQStatusBar::messageChanged ( const TQString & message ) [signal]
-
                                                        
-
-
                                                         This signal is emitted when the temporary status messages
-changes. message is the new temporary message, and is a
-null-string when the message has been removed.
-
                                                         
                                                        See also message() and clear().
-
-
                                                        void TQStatusBar::paintEvent ( TQPaintEvent * ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                        
-Shows the temporary message, if appropriate.
-
-
                                                        Reimplemented from TQWidget.
-
                                                        void TQStatusBar::reformat () [protected]
-
                                                        
-Changes the status bar's appearance to account for item changes.
-Special subclasses may need this, but geometry management will
-usually take care of any necessary rearrangements.
-
-
                                                        void TQStatusBar::removeWidget ( TQWidget * widget ) [virtual]
-
                                                        
-Removes widget from the status bar.
-
                                                         This function may cause some flicker.
-
                                                         Note that widget is not deleted.
-
                                                         
                                                        See also addWidget().
-
-
                                                        void TQStatusBar::setSizeGripEnabled ( bool )
-
                                                        Sets whether the TQSizeGrip in the bottom right of the status bar is enabled.
-See the "sizeGripEnabled" property for details.
-
                                                        Property Documentation
                                                        
-
                                                        bool sizeGripEnabled
                                                        
-
                                                        This property holds whether the TQSizeGrip in the bottom right of the status bar is enabled.
-
                                                        Enables or disables the TQSizeGrip in the bottom right of the
-status bar. By default, the size grip is enabled.
-
-
                                                        Set this property's value with setSizeGripEnabled() and get this property's value with isSizeGripEnabled().
-
-
                                                        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                        
-
-
                                                        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                        TQt 3.3.8
                                                        
-
                                                        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qstoreddrag-members.html b/doc/html/qstoreddrag-members.html
index a0edb457a..acdc21493 100644
--- a/doc/html/qstoreddrag-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qstoreddrag-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -37,62 +37,62 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
 
                                                        
diff --git a/doc/html/qstoreddrag.html b/doc/html/qstoreddrag.html
index 71dbdc315..9c96bb56e 100644
--- a/doc/html/qstoreddrag.html
+++ b/doc/html/qstoreddrag.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                                        The TQStoredDrag class provides a simple stored-value drag object for arbitrary MIME data.
 More...
-
                                                        #include <qdragobject.h>
-
                                                        Inherits TQDragObject.
+
                                                        #include <ntqdragobject.h>
+
                                                        Inherits TQDragObject.
 
                                                        Inherited by TQUriDrag and TQColorDrag.
 
                                                        List of all member functions.
 
                                                        Public Members
                                                        
@@ -51,15 +51,15 @@ The TQStoredDrag class provides a simple stored-value drag object for arbitrary
 
                                                         
 
                                                         When a block of data has only one representation, you can use a
 TQStoredDrag to hold it.
-
                                                         For more information about drag and drop, see the TQDragObject
+
                                                         For more information about drag and drop, see the TQDragObject
 class and the drag and drop documentation.
 
                                                        See also Drag And Drop Classes.
 
 
                                                        Member Function Documentation
                                                        
-
                                                        TQStoredDrag::TQStoredDrag ( const char * mimeType, TQWidget * dragSource = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
                                                        TQStoredDrag::TQStoredDrag ( const char * mimeType, TQWidget * dragSource = 0, const char * name = 0 )
 
                                                        
 Constructs a TQStoredDrag. The dragSource and name are passed
-to the TQDragObject constructor, and the format is set to mimeType.
+to the TQDragObject constructor, and the format is set to mimeType.
 
                                                         The data will be unset. Use setEncodedData() to set it.
 
 
                                                        TQStoredDrag::~TQStoredDrag ()
diff --git a/doc/html/qstrilist-members.html b/doc/html/qstrilist-members.html
index 6b4fc2ede..2a58e291d 100644
--- a/doc/html/qstrilist-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qstrilist-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -37,48 +37,48 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
 
                                                        
diff --git a/doc/html/qstrilist.html b/doc/html/qstrilist.html
index 8c95d07b8..417f7c6be 100644
--- a/doc/html/qstrilist.html
+++ b/doc/html/qstrilist.html
@@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                                        The TQStrIList class provides a doubly-linked list of char*
 with case-insensitive comparison.
 More...
-
                                                        #include <qstrlist.h>
-
                                                        Inherits TQStrList.
+
                                                        #include <ntqstrlist.h>
+
                                                        Inherits TQStrList.
 
                                                        List of all member functions.
 
                                                        Public Members
                                                        
 
                                                          
@@ -49,15 +49,15 @@ The TQStrIList class provides a doubly-linked list of char*
 with case-insensitive comparison.
 
                                                           
 
-
                                                           This class is a TQPtrList<char> instance (a list of char*).
-
                                                           TQStrIList is identical to TQStrList except that the virtual
-compareItems() function is reimplemented to compare strings
-case-insensitively. The inSort() function inserts strings in a
+
                                                           This class is a TQPtrList<char> instance (a list of char*).
+
                                                           TQStrIList is identical to TQStrList except that the virtual
+compareItems() function is reimplemented to compare strings
+case-insensitively. The inSort() function inserts strings in a
 sorted order. In general it is fastest to insert the strings as
-they come and sort() at the end; inSort() is useful when you just
+they come and sort() at the end; inSort() is useful when you just
 have to add a few extra strings to an already sorted list.
 
                                                           The TQStrListIterator class works for TQStrIList.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also TQStringList, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
                                                           
                                                          See also TQStringList, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
 
 
                                                          Member Function Documentation
                                                          
 
                                                          TQStrIList::TQStrIList ( bool deepCopies = TRUE )
diff --git a/doc/html/qstring-h.html b/doc/html/qstring-h.html
index 529258b2f..b4027ea30 100644
--- a/doc/html/qstring-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qstring-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qstring.h Include File
+ntqstring.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                          
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                          TQString Class Reference
                                                          
-
-
                                                          The TQString class provides an abstraction of Unicode text
-and the classic C '\0'-terminated char array.
-More...
-
                                                          All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
                                                          
-
                                                          #include <qstring.h>
-
                                                          List of all member functions.
-
                                                          Public Members
                                                          
-
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQString ()
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString ( TQChar ch )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString ( const TQString & s )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString ( const TQByteArray & ba )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString ( const TQChar * unicode, uint length )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString ( const char * str )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString ( const std::string & str )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • ~TQString ()
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & operator= ( const TQString & s )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & operator= ( const char * str )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & operator= ( const std::string & s )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & operator= ( const TQCString & cstr )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & operator= ( TQChar c )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & operator= ( char c )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • bool isNull () const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • bool isEmpty () const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • uint length () const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • void truncate ( uint newLen )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & fill ( TQChar c, int len = -1 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString copy () const  (obsolete)
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString arg ( long a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString arg ( ulong a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString arg ( Q_LLONG a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString arg ( Q_ULLONG a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString arg ( int a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString arg ( uint a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString arg ( short a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString arg ( ushort a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString arg ( double a, int fieldWidth = 0, char fmt = 'g', int prec = -1 ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString arg ( char a, int fieldWidth = 0 ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString arg ( TQChar a, int fieldWidth = 0 ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString arg ( const TQString & a, int fieldWidth = 0 ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString arg ( const TQString & a1, const TQString & a2 ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString arg ( const TQString & a1, const TQString & a2, const TQString & a3 ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString arg ( const TQString & a1, const TQString & a2, const TQString & a3, const TQString & a4 ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & sprintf ( const char * cformat, ... )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • int find ( TQChar c, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • int find ( char c, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • int find ( const TQString & str, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • int find ( const TQRegExp & rx, int index = 0 ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • int find ( const char * str, int index = 0 ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • int findRev ( TQChar c, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • int findRev ( char c, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • int findRev ( const TQString & str, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • int findRev ( const TQRegExp & rx, int index = -1 ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • int findRev ( const char * str, int index = -1 ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • int contains ( TQChar c, bool cs = TRUE ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • int contains ( char c, bool cs = TRUE ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • int contains ( const char * str, bool cs = TRUE ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • int contains ( const TQString & str, bool cs = TRUE ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • int contains ( const TQRegExp & rx ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • enum SectionFlags { SectionDefault = 0x00, SectionSkipEmpty = 0x01, SectionIncludeLeadingSep = 0x02, SectionIncludeTrailingSep = 0x04, SectionCaseInsensitiveSeps = 0x08 }
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString section ( TQChar sep, int start, int end = 0xffffffff, int flags = SectionDefault ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString section ( char sep, int start, int end = 0xffffffff, int flags = SectionDefault ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString section ( const char * sep, int start, int end = 0xffffffff, int flags = SectionDefault ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString section ( const TQString & sep, int start, int end = 0xffffffff, int flags = SectionDefault ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString section ( const TQRegExp & reg, int start, int end = 0xffffffff, int flags = SectionDefault ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString left ( uint len ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString right ( uint len ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString mid ( uint index, uint len = 0xffffffff ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString leftJustify ( uint width, TQChar fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString rightJustify ( uint width, TQChar fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString lower () const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString upper () const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString stripWhiteSpace () const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString simplifyWhiteSpace () const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & insert ( uint index, const TQString & s )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & insert ( uint index, const TQByteArray & s )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & insert ( uint index, const char * s )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & insert ( uint index, const TQChar * s, uint len )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & insert ( uint index, TQChar c )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & insert ( uint index, char c )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & append ( char ch )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & append ( TQChar ch )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & append ( const TQString & str )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & append ( const TQByteArray & str )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & append ( const char * str )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & append ( const std::string & str )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & prepend ( char ch )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & prepend ( TQChar ch )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & prepend ( const TQString & s )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & prepend ( const TQByteArray & s )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & prepend ( const char * s )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & prepend ( const std::string & s )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & remove ( uint index, uint len )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & remove ( const TQString & str, bool cs = TRUE )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & remove ( TQChar c )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & remove ( char c )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & remove ( const char * str )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & remove ( const TQRegExp & rx )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & replace ( uint index, uint len, const TQString & s )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & replace ( uint index, uint len, const TQChar * s, uint slen )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & replace ( uint index, uint len, TQChar c )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & replace ( uint index, uint len, char c )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & replace ( TQChar c, const TQString & after, bool cs = TRUE )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & replace ( char c, const TQString & after, bool cs = TRUE )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & replace ( const TQString & before, const TQString & after, bool cs = TRUE )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & replace ( const TQRegExp & rx, const TQString & after )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & replace ( TQChar c1, TQChar c2 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • short toShort ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • ushort toUShort ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • int toInt ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • uint toUInt ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • long toLong ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • ulong toULong ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • Q_LLONG toLongLong ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • Q_ULLONG toULongLong ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • float toFloat ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • double toDouble ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & setNum ( short n, int base = 10 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & setNum ( ushort n, int base = 10 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & setNum ( int n, int base = 10 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & setNum ( uint n, int base = 10 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & setNum ( long n, int base = 10 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & setNum ( ulong n, int base = 10 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & setNum ( Q_LLONG n, int base = 10 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & setNum ( Q_ULLONG n, int base = 10 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & setNum ( float n, char f = 'g', int prec = 6 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & setNum ( double n, char f = 'g', int prec = 6 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • void setExpand ( uint index, TQChar c )  (obsolete)
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & operator+= ( const TQString & str )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & operator+= ( const TQByteArray & str )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & operator+= ( const char * str )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & operator+= ( const std::string & str )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & operator+= ( TQChar c )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & operator+= ( char c )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQChar at ( uint i ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQChar operator[] ( int i ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQCharRef at ( uint i )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQCharRef operator[] ( int i )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQChar constref ( uint i ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQChar & ref ( uint i )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • const TQChar * unicode () const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • const char * ascii () const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • const char * latin1 () const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQCString utf8 () const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQCString local8Bit () const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • bool operator! () const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • operator const char * () const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • operator std::string () const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • const unsigned short * ucs2 () const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & setUnicode ( const TQChar * unicode, uint len )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & setUnicodeCodes ( const ushort * unicode_as_ushorts, uint len )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & setAscii ( const char * str, int len = -1 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString & setLatin1 ( const char * str, int len = -1 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • int compare ( const TQString & s ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • int localeAwareCompare ( const TQString & s ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • void compose ()
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • const char * data () const  (obsolete)
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • bool startsWith ( const TQString & s, bool cs = TRUE ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • bool endsWith ( const TQString & s, bool cs = TRUE ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • void setLength ( uint newLen )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • uint capacity () const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • void reserve ( uint minCapacity )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • void squeeze ()
                                                            • 
-
                                                          
-
                                                          Static Public Members
                                                          
-
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQString number ( long n, int base = 10 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString number ( ulong n, int base = 10 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString number ( Q_LLONG n, int base = 10 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString number ( Q_ULLONG n, int base = 10 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString number ( int n, int base = 10 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString number ( uint n, int base = 10 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString number ( double n, char f = 'g', int prec = 6 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString fromAscii ( const char * ascii, int len = -1 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString fromLatin1 ( const char * chars, int len = -1 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString fromUtf8 ( const char * utf8, int len = -1 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString fromLocal8Bit ( const char * local8Bit, int len = -1 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString fromUcs2 ( const unsigned short * str )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • int compare ( const TQString & s1, const TQString & s2 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • int localeAwareCompare ( const TQString & s1, const TQString & s2 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          
-
                                                          Related Functions
                                                          
-
                                                            
-
                                                          • bool operator== ( const TQString & s1, const TQString & s2 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • bool operator== ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • bool operator== ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • bool operator!= ( const TQString & s1, const TQString & s2 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • bool operator!= ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • bool operator!= ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • bool operator< ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • bool operator< ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • bool operator<= ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • bool operator<= ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • bool operator> ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • bool operator> ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • bool operator>= ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • bool operator>= ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • const TQString operator+ ( const TQString & s1, const TQString & s2 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • const TQString operator+ ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • const TQString operator+ ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • const TQString operator+ ( const TQString & s, char c )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • const TQString operator+ ( char c, const TQString & s )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQString & str )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQString & str )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          
-
                                                          Detailed Description
                                                          
-
-
-
-
                                                           The TQString class provides an abstraction of Unicode text
-and the classic C '\0'-terminated char array.
-
                                                           
-
-
-
-
                                                           TQString uses implicit sharing, which
-makes it very efficient and easy to use.
-
                                                           In all of the TQString methods that take const char *
-parameters, the const char * is interpreted as a classic
-C-style '\0'-terminated ASCII string. It is legal for the const char * parameter to be 0. If the const char * is not
-'\0'-terminated, the results are undefined. Functions that copy
-classic C strings into a TQString will not copy the terminating
-'\0' character. The TQChar array of the TQString (as returned by
-unicode()) is generally not terminated by a '\0'. If you need to
-pass a TQString to a function that requires a C '\0'-terminated
-string use latin1().
-
                                                           A TQString that has not been assigned to anything is null, i.e.
-both the length and data pointer is 0. A TQString that references
-the empty string ("", a single '\0' char) is empty. Both null
-and empty TQStrings are legal parameters to the methods. Assigning
-(const char *) 0 to TQString gives a null TQString. For
-convenience, TQString::null is a null TQString. When sorting,
-empty strings come first, followed by non-empty strings, followed
-by null strings. We recommend using if ( !str.isNull() ) to
-check for a non-null string rather than if ( !str ); see operator!() for an explanation.
-
                                                           Note that if you find that you are mixing usage of TQCString,
-TQString, and TQByteArray, this causes lots of unnecessary
-copying and might indicate that the true nature of the data you
-are dealing with is uncertain. If the data is '\0'-terminated 8-bit
-data, use TQCString; if it is unterminated (i.e. contains '\0's)
-8-bit data, use TQByteArray; if it is text, use TQString.
-
                                                           Lists of strings are handled by the TQStringList class. You can
-split a string into a list of strings using TQStringList::split(),
-and join a list of strings into a single string with an optional
-separator using TQStringList::join(). You can obtain a list of
-strings from a string list that contain a particular substring or
-that match a particular regex using
-TQStringList::grep().
-
                                                           Note for C programmers
-
                                                           Due to C++'s type system and the fact that TQString is implicitly shared, TQStrings can be treated like ints or other simple base
-types. For example:
-
                                                           
                                                          -    TQString boolToString( bool b )
-    {
-        TQString result;
-        if ( b )
-            result = "True";
-        else
-            result = "False";
-        return result;
-    }
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           The variable, result, is an auto variable allocated on the stack.
-When return is called, because we're returning by value, The copy
-constructor is called and a copy of the string is returned. (No
-actual copying takes place thanks to the implicit sharing, see
-below.)
-
                                                           Throughout TQt's source code you will encounter TQString usages like
-this:
-
                                                          -    TQString func( const TQString& input )
-    {
-        TQString output = input;
-        // process output
-        return output;
-    }
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           The 'copying' of input to output is almost as fast as copying a
-pointer because behind the scenes copying is achieved by
-incrementing a reference count. TQString (like all TQt's implicitly
-shared classes) operates on a copy-on-write basis, only copying if
-an instance is actually changed.
-
                                                           If you wish to create a deep copy of a TQString without losing any
-Unicode information then you should use TQDeepCopy.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also TQChar, TQCString, TQByteArray, TQConstString, Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes, Text Related Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
-
-
                                                          Member Type Documentation
                                                          
-
                                                          TQString::SectionFlags
                                                          
-
-
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQString::SectionDefault - Empty fields are counted, leading and
-trailing separators are not included, and the separator is
-compared case sensitively.
-
                                                          • TQString::SectionSkipEmpty - Treat empty fields as if they don't exist,
-i.e. they are not considered as far as start and end are
-concerned.
-
                                                          • TQString::SectionIncludeLeadingSep - Include the leading separator (if
-any) in the result string.
-
                                                          • TQString::SectionIncludeTrailingSep - Include the trailing separator
-(if any) in the result string.
-
                                                          • TQString::SectionCaseInsensitiveSeps - Compare the separator
-case-insensitively.
-
                                                           Any of the last four values can be OR-ed together to form a flag.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also section().
-
-
                                                          Member Function Documentation
                                                          
-
                                                          TQString::TQString ()
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Constructs a null string, i.e. both the length and data pointer
-are 0.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also isNull().
-
-
                                                          TQString::TQString ( TQChar ch )
-
                                                          
-Constructs a string of length one, containing the character ch.
-
-
                                                          TQString::TQString ( const TQString & s )
-
                                                          
-Constructs an implicitly shared copy of s. This is very fast
-since it only involves incrementing a reference count.
-
-
                                                          TQString::TQString ( const TQByteArray & ba )
-
                                                          
-Constructs a string that is a deep copy of ba interpreted as a
-classic C string.
-
-
                                                          TQString::TQString ( const TQChar * unicode, uint length )
-
                                                          
-Constructs a string that is a deep copy of the first length
-characters in the TQChar array.
-
                                                           If unicode and length are 0, then a null string is created.
-
                                                           If only unicode is 0, the string is empty but has length
-characters of space preallocated: TQString expands automatically
-anyway, but this may speed up some cases a little. We recommend
-using the plain constructor and setLength() for this purpose since
-it will result in more readable code.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also isNull() and setLength().
-
-
                                                          TQString::TQString ( const char * str )
-
                                                          
-Constructs a string that is a deep copy of str, interpreted as
-a classic C string. The encoding is assumed to be Latin-1, unless
-you change it using TQTextCodec::setCodecForCStrings().
-
                                                           If str is 0, then a null string is created.
-
                                                           This is a cast constructor, but it is perfectly safe: converting a
-Latin-1 const char * to TQString preserves all the information. You
-can disable this constructor by defining QT_NO_CAST_ASCII when
-you compile your applications. You can also make TQString objects
-by using setLatin1(), fromLatin1(), fromLocal8Bit(), and
-fromUtf8(). Or whatever encoding is appropriate for the 8-bit data
-you have.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also isNull() and fromAscii().
-
-
                                                          TQString::TQString ( const std::string & str )
-
                                                          
-Constructs a string that is a deep copy of str.
-
                                                           This is the same as fromAscii(str).
-
-
                                                          TQString::~TQString ()
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Destroys the string and frees the string's data if this is the
-last reference to the string.
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::append ( const TQString & str )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Appends str to the string and returns a reference to the
-result.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        string = "Test";
-        string.append( "ing" );        // string == "Testing"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           Equivalent to operator+=().
-
-
                                                          Example: dirview/dirview.cpp.
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::append ( char ch )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Appends character ch to the string and returns a reference to
-the result.
-
                                                           Equivalent to operator+=().
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::append ( TQChar ch )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Appends character ch to the string and returns a reference to
-the result.
-
                                                           Equivalent to operator+=().
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::append ( const TQByteArray & str )
-
                                                           
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Appends str to the string and returns a reference to the result.
-
                                                           Equivalent to operator+=().
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::append ( const char * str )
-
                                                           
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Appends str to the string and returns a reference to the result.
-
                                                           Equivalent to operator+=().
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::append ( const std::string & str )
-
                                                           
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Appends str to the string and returns a reference to the result.
-
                                                           Equivalent to operator+=().
-
-
                                                          TQString TQString::arg ( const TQString & a, int fieldWidth = 0 ) const
-
                                                          
-This function will return a string that replaces the lowest
-numbered occurrence of %1, %2, ..., %9 with a.
-
                                                           The fieldWidth value specifies the minimum amount of space that
-a is padded to. A positive value will produce right-aligned
-text, whereas a negative value will produce left-aligned text.
-
                                                           The following example shows how we could create a 'status' string
-when processing a list of files:
-
                                                          -    TQString status = TQString( "Processing file %1 of %2: %3" )
-                        .arg( i )         // current file's number
-                        .arg( total )     // number of files to process
-                        .arg( fileName ); // current file's name
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           It is generally fine to use filenames and numbers as we have done
-in the example above. But note that using arg() to construct
-natural language sentences does not usually translate well into
-other languages because sentence structure and word order often
-differ between languages.
-
                                                           If there is no place marker (%1, %2, etc.), a warning
-message (qWarning()) is output and the result is undefined.
-
                                                           Warning: If any placeholder occurs more than once, the result is undefined.
-
                                                           
-
                                                          TQString TQString::arg ( long a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           The fieldWidth value specifies the minimum amount of space that
-a is padded to. A positive value will produce a right-aligned
-number, whereas a negative value will produce a left-aligned
-number.
-
                                                           a is expressed in base base, which is 10 by default and must
-be between 2 and 36.
-
                                                           The '%' can be followed by an 'L', in which case the sequence is
-replaced with a localized representation of a. The conversion
-uses the default locale. The default locale is determined from the
-system's locale settings at application startup. It can be changed
-using TQLocale::setDefault(). The 'L' flag is ignored if base is
-not 10.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString str;
-        str = TQString( "Decimal 63 is %1 in hexadecimal" )
-                .arg( 63, 0, 16 );
-        // str == "Decimal 63 is 3f in hexadecimal"
-
-        TQLocale::setDefault(TQLocale::English, TQLocale::UnitedStates);
-        str = TQString( "%1 %L2 %L3" )
-                .arg( 12345 )
-                .arg( 12345 )
-                .arg( 12345, 0, 16 );
-        // str == "12345 12,345 3039"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
-
                                                          TQString TQString::arg ( ulong a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           a is expressed in base base, which is 10 by default and must
-be between 2 and 36. If base is 10, the '%L' syntax can be used
-to produce localized strings.
-
-
                                                          TQString TQString::arg ( Q_LLONG a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           a is expressed in base base, which is 10 by default and must
-be between 2 and 36. If base is 10, the '%L' syntax can be used
-to produce localized strings.
-
-
                                                          TQString TQString::arg ( Q_ULLONG a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           a is expressed in base base, which is 10 by default and must
-be between 2 and 36. If base is 10, the '%L' syntax can be used
-to produce localized strings.
-
-
                                                          TQString TQString::arg ( int a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           a is expressed in base base, which is 10 by default and must
-be between 2 and 36. If base is 10, the '%L' syntax can be used
-to produce localized strings.
-
-
                                                          TQString TQString::arg ( uint a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           a is expressed in base base, which is 10 by default and must
-be between 2 and 36. If base is 10, the '%L' syntax can be used
-to produce localized strings.
-
-
                                                          TQString TQString::arg ( short a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           a is expressed in base base, which is 10 by default and must
-be between 2 and 36. If base is 10, the '%L' syntax can be used
-to produce localized strings.
-
-
                                                          TQString TQString::arg ( ushort a, int fieldWidth = 0, int base = 10 ) const
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           a is expressed in base base, which is 10 by default and must
-be between 2 and 36. If base is 10, the '%L' syntax can be used
-to produce localized strings.
-
-
                                                          TQString TQString::arg ( double a, int fieldWidth = 0, char fmt = 'g', int prec = -1 ) const
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           
-
                                                           Argument a is formatted according to the fmt format specified,
-which is 'g' by default and can be any of the following:
-
                                                           
                                                          
-
                                                           Format Meaning
-
                                                           e format as [-]9.9e[+|-]999
-
                                                           E format as [-]9.9E[+|-]999
-
                                                           f format as [-]9.9
-
                                                           g use e or f format, whichever is the most concise
-
                                                           G use E or f format, whichever is the most concise
-
                                                          
-
                                                           With 'e', 'E', and 'f', prec is the number of digits after the
-decimal point. With 'g' and 'G', prec is the maximum number of
-significant digits (trailing zeroes are omitted).
-
                                                           
                                                          -        double d = 12.34;
-        TQString ds = TQString( "'E' format, precision 3, gives %1" )
-                        .arg( d, 0, 'E', 3 );
-        // ds == "'E' format, precision 3, gives 1.234E+01"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           The '%L' syntax can be used to produce localized strings.
-
-
                                                          TQString TQString::arg ( char a, int fieldWidth = 0 ) const
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           a is assumed to be in the Latin-1 character set.
-
-
                                                          TQString TQString::arg ( TQChar a, int fieldWidth = 0 ) const
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           
-
                                                          TQString TQString::arg ( const TQString & a1, const TQString & a2 ) const
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           This is the same as str.arg(a1).arg(a2), except that
-the strings are replaced in one pass. This can make a difference
-if a1 contains e.g. %1:
-
                                                           
                                                          -    TQString str( "%1 %2" );
-    str.arg( "Hello", "world" );        // returns "Hello world"
-    str.arg( "Hello" ).arg( "world" );  // returns "Hello world"
-
-    str.arg( "(%1)", "Hello" );           // returns "(%1) Hello"
-    str.arg( "(%1)" ).arg( "Hello" );     // returns "(Hello) %2"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
-
                                                          TQString TQString::arg ( const TQString & a1, const TQString & a2, const TQString & a3 ) const
-
                                                          
-
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           This is the same as calling str.arg(a1).arg(a2).arg(a3),
-except that the strings are replaced in one pass.
-
-
                                                          TQString TQString::arg ( const TQString & a1, const TQString & a2, const TQString & a3, const TQString & a4 ) const
-
                                                          
-
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           This is the same as calling
-str.arg(a1).arg(a2).arg(a3).arg(a4),
-except that the strings are replaced in one pass.
-
-
                                                          const char * TQString::ascii () const
-
                                                          
-Returns an 8-bit ASCII representation of the string.
-
                                                           If a codec has been set using TQTextCodec::codecForCStrings(),
-it is used to convert Unicode to 8-bit char. Otherwise, this function
-does the same as latin1().
-
                                                           
                                                          See also fromAscii(), latin1(), utf8(), and local8Bit().
-
-
                                                          Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                                          TQChar TQString::at ( uint i ) const
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Returns the character at index i, or 0 if i is beyond the
-length of the string.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        const TQString string( "abcdefgh" );
-        TQChar ch = string.at( 4 );
-        // ch == 'e'
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           If the TQString is not const (i.e. const TQString) or const& (i.e.
-const TQString &), then the non-const overload of at() will be used
-instead.
-
-
                                                          TQCharRef TQString::at ( uint i )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           The function returns a reference to the character at index i.
-The resulting reference can then be assigned to, or used
-immediately, but it will become invalid once further modifications
-are made to the original string.
-
                                                           If i is beyond the length of the string then the string is
-expanded with TQChar::null.
-
-
                                                          uint TQString::capacity () const
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Returns the number of characters this string can hold
-in the allocated memory.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also reserve() and squeeze().
-
-
                                                          int TQString::compare ( const TQString & s1, const TQString & s2 ) [static]
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Lexically compares s1 with s2 and returns an integer less
-than, equal to, or greater than zero if s1 is less than, equal
-to, or greater than s2.
-
                                                           The comparison is based exclusively on the numeric Unicode values
-of the characters and is very fast, but is not what a human would
-expect. Consider sorting user-interface strings with
-TQString::localeAwareCompare().
-
                                                           
                                                          -        int a = TQString::compare( "def", "abc" );   // a > 0
-        int b = TQString::compare( "abc", "def" );   // b < 0
-        int c = TQString::compare( "abc", "abc" );   // c == 0
-    
                                                          
- 
-
-
                                                          int TQString::compare ( const TQString & s ) const
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Lexically compares this string with s and returns an integer
-less than, equal to, or greater than zero if it is less than, equal
-to, or greater than s.
-
-
                                                          void TQString::compose ()
-
                                                          
-Warning: This function is not supported in TQt 3.x. It is provided
-for experimental and illustrative purposes only. It is mainly of
-interest to those experimenting with Arabic and other
-composition-rich texts.
-
                                                           Applies possible ligatures to a TQString. Useful when
-composition-rich text requires rendering with glyph-poor fonts,
-but it also makes compositions such as TQChar(0x0041) ('A') and
-TQChar(0x0308) (Unicode accent diaresis), giving TQChar(0x00c4)
-(German A Umlaut).
-
-
                                                          TQChar TQString::constref ( uint i ) const
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Returns the TQChar at index i by value.
-
                                                           Equivalent to at(i).
-
                                                           
                                                          See also ref().
-
-
                                                          int TQString::contains ( TQChar c, bool cs = TRUE ) const
-
                                                          
-Returns the number of times the character c occurs in the
-string.
-
                                                           If cs is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive;
-otherwise the search is case insensitive.
-
                                                           
                                                          -    TQString string( "Trolltech and TQt" );
-    int n = string.contains( 't', FALSE );
-    // n == 3
-    
                                                          
- 
-
-
                                                          Examples: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp and mdi/application.cpp.
-
                                                          int TQString::contains ( char c, bool cs = TRUE ) const
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           
-
                                                          int TQString::contains ( const char * str, bool cs = TRUE ) const
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Returns the number of times the string str occurs in the string.
-
                                                           If cs is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive;
-otherwise the search is case insensitive.
-
-
                                                          int TQString::contains ( const TQString & str, bool cs = TRUE ) const
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Returns the number of times str occurs in the string.
-
                                                           If cs is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive;
-otherwise the search is case insensitive.
-
                                                           This function counts overlapping strings, so in the example below,
-there are two instances of "ana" in "bananas".
-
                                                           
                                                          -    TQString str( "bananas" );
-    int i = str.contains( "ana" );  // i == 2
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also findRev().
-
-
                                                          int TQString::contains ( const TQRegExp & rx ) const
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Returns the number of times the regexp, rx, matches in the
-string.
-
                                                           This function counts overlapping matches, so in the example below,
-there are four instances of "ana" or "ama".
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString str = "banana and panama";
-        TQRegExp rxp = TQRegExp( "a[nm]a", TRUE, FALSE );
-        int i = str.contains( rxp );    // i == 4
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also find() and findRev().
-
-
                                                          TQString TQString::copy () const
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                                           In TQt 2.0 and later, all calls to this function are needless. Just
-remove them.
-
-
                                                          const char * TQString::data () const
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                                           Returns a pointer to a '\0'-terminated classic C string.
-
                                                           In TQt 1.x, this returned a char* allowing direct manipulation of the
-string as a sequence of bytes. In TQt 2.x where TQString is a Unicode
-string, char* conversion constructs a temporary string, and hence
-direct character operations are meaningless.
-
-
                                                          bool TQString::endsWith ( const TQString & s, bool cs = TRUE ) const
-
                                                          
-Returns TRUE if the string ends with s; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                                           If cs is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive;
-otherwise the search is case insensitive.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString str( "Bananas" );
-        str.endsWith( "anas" );         // returns TRUE
-        str.endsWith( "pple" );         // returns FALSE
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also startsWith().
-
-
                                                          Example: chart/main.cpp.
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::fill ( TQChar c, int len = -1 )
-
                                                          
-Fills the string with len characters of value c, and returns
-a reference to the string.
-
                                                           If len is negative (the default), the current string length is
-used.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString str;
-        str.fill( 'g', 5 );      // string == "ggggg"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
-
                                                          int TQString::find ( const TQRegExp & rx, int index = 0 ) const
-
                                                          
-Finds the first match of the regular expression rx, starting
-from position index. If index is -1, the search starts at
-the last character; if -2, at the next to last character and so
-on. (See findRev() for searching backwards.)
-
                                                           Returns the position of the first match of rx or -1 if no match
-was found.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString string( "bananas" );
-        int i = string.find( TQRegExp("an"), 0 );    // i == 1
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also findRev(), replace(), and contains().
-
-
                                                          Example: network/mail/smtp.cpp.
-
                                                          int TQString::find ( TQChar c, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Finds the first occurrence of the character c, starting at
-position index. If index is -1, the search starts at the
-last character; if -2, at the next to last character and so on.
-(See findRev() for searching backwards.)
-
                                                           If cs is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive;
-otherwise the search is case insensitive.
-
                                                           Returns the position of c or -1 if c could not be found.
-
-
                                                          int TQString::find ( char c, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Find character c starting from position index.
-
                                                           If cs is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive;
-otherwise the search is case insensitive.
-
-
                                                          int TQString::find ( const TQString & str, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Finds the first occurrence of the string str, starting at
-position index. If index is -1, the search starts at the
-last character, if it is -2, at the next to last character and so
-on. (See findRev() for searching backwards.)
-
                                                           If cs is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive;
-otherwise the search is case insensitive.
-
                                                           Returns the position of str or -1 if str could not be found.
-
-
                                                          int TQString::find ( const char * str, int index = 0 ) const
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Equivalent to find(TQString(str), index).
-
-
                                                          int TQString::findRev ( const char * str, int index = -1 ) const
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Equivalent to findRev(TQString(str), index).
-
-
                                                          int TQString::findRev ( TQChar c, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Finds the first occurrence of the character c, starting at
-position index and searching backwards. If the index is -1, the
-search starts at the last character, if it is -2, at the next to
-last character and so on.
-
                                                           Returns the position of c or -1 if c could not be found.
-
                                                           If cs is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive;
-otherwise the search is case insensitive.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString string( "bananas" );
-        int i = string.findRev( 'a' );      // i == 5
-    
                                                          
- 
-
-
                                                          int TQString::findRev ( char c, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Find character c starting from position index and working
-backwards.
-
                                                           If cs is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive;
-otherwise the search is case insensitive.
-
-
                                                          int TQString::findRev ( const TQString & str, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Finds the first occurrence of the string str, starting at
-position index and searching backwards. If the index is -1, the
-search starts at the last character, if it is -2, at the next to
-last character and so on.
-
                                                           Returns the position of str or -1 if str could not be found.
-
                                                           If cs is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive;
-otherwise the search is case insensitive.
-
                                                           
                                                          -    TQString string("bananas");
-    int i = string.findRev( "ana" );      // i == 3
-    
                                                          
- 
-
-
                                                          int TQString::findRev ( const TQRegExp & rx, int index = -1 ) const
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Finds the first match of the regexp rx, starting at position index and searching backwards. If the index is -1, the search
-starts at the last character, if it is -2, at the next to last
-character and so on. (See findRev() for searching backwards.)
-
                                                           Returns the position of the match or -1 if no match was found.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString string( "bananas" );
-        int i = string.findRev( TQRegExp("an") );      // i == 3
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also find().
-
-
                                                          TQString TQString::fromAscii ( const char * ascii, int len = -1 ) [static]
-
                                                          
-Returns the Unicode string decoded from the first len
-bytes of ascii, ignoring the rest of ascii. If len
-is -1 then the length of ascii is used. If len is bigger
-than the length of ascii then it will use the length of ascii.
-
                                                           If a codec has been set using TQTextCodec::codecForCStrings(),
-it is used to convert the string from 8-bit characters to Unicode.
-Otherwise, this function does the same as fromLatin1().
-
                                                           This is the same as the TQString(const char*) constructor, but you
-can make that constructor invisible if you compile with the define
-QT_NO_CAST_ASCII, in which case you can explicitly create a
-TQString from 8-bit ASCII text using this function.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString str = TQString::fromAscii( "123456789", 5 );
-        // str == "12345"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
-
                                                          TQString TQString::fromLatin1 ( const char * chars, int len = -1 ) [static]
-
                                                          
-Returns the Unicode string decoded from the first len
-bytes of chars, ignoring the rest of chars. If len
-is -1 then the length of chars is used. If len is bigger
-than the length of chars then it will use the length of chars.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also fromAscii().
-
-
                                                          Examples: listbox/listbox.cpp and network/mail/smtp.cpp.
-
                                                          TQString TQString::fromLocal8Bit ( const char * local8Bit, int len = -1 ) [static]
-
                                                          
-Returns the Unicode string decoded from the first len
-bytes of local8Bit, ignoring the rest of local8Bit. If
-len is -1 then the length of local8Bit is used. If len is
-bigger than the length of local8Bit then it will use the length
-of local8Bit.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString str = TQString::fromLocal8Bit( "123456789", 5 );
-        // str == "12345"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           local8Bit is assumed to be encoded in a locale-specific format.
-
                                                           See TQTextCodec for more diverse coding/decoding of Unicode strings.
-
-
                                                          TQString TQString::fromUcs2 ( const unsigned short * str ) [static]
-
                                                          
-Constructs a string that is a deep copy of str, interpreted as a
-UCS2 encoded, zero terminated, Unicode string.
-
                                                           If str is 0, then a null string is created.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also isNull().
-
-
                                                          TQString TQString::fromUtf8 ( const char * utf8, int len = -1 ) [static]
-
                                                          
-Returns the Unicode string decoded from the first len
-bytes of utf8, ignoring the rest of utf8. If len is
--1 then the length of utf8 is used. If len is bigger than
-the length of utf8 then it will use the length of utf8.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString str = TQString::fromUtf8( "123456789", 5 );
-        // str == "12345"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           See TQTextCodec for more diverse coding/decoding of Unicode strings.
-
-
                                                          Example: fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp.
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::insert ( uint index, const TQString & s )
-
                                                          
-Inserts s into the string at position index.
-
                                                           If index is beyond the end of the string, the string is
-extended with spaces to length index and s is then appended
-and returns a reference to the string.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString string( "I like fish" );
-        str = string.insert( 2, "don't " );
-        // str == "I don't like fish"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also remove() and replace().
-
-
                                                          Examples: themes/themes.cpp and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::insert ( uint index, const TQByteArray & s )
-
                                                           
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Inserts s into the string at position index and returns
-a reference to the string.
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::insert ( uint index, const char * s )
-
                                                           
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Inserts s into the string at position index and returns
-a reference to the string.
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::insert ( uint index, const TQChar * s, uint len )
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Inserts the first len characters in s into the string at
-position index and returns a reference to the string.
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::insert ( uint index, TQChar c )
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Insert c into the string at position index and returns a
-reference to the string.
-
                                                           If index is beyond the end of the string, the string is
-extended with spaces (ASCII 32) to length index and c is
-then appended.
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::insert ( uint index, char c )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Insert character c at position index.
-
-
                                                          bool TQString::isEmpty () const
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Returns TRUE if the string is empty, i.e. if length() == 0;
-otherwise returns FALSE. Null strings are also empty.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString a( "" );
-        a.isEmpty();        // TRUE
-        a.isNull();         // FALSE
-
-        TQString b;
-        b.isEmpty();        // TRUE
-        b.isNull();         // TRUE
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also isNull() and length().
-
-
                                                          Examples: addressbook/mainwindow.cpp, chart/chartform.cpp, chart/chartform_canvas.cpp, network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
-
                                                          bool TQString::isNull () const
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Returns TRUE if the string is null; otherwise returns FALSE. A
-null string is always empty.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString a;          // a.unicode() == 0, a.length() == 0
-        a.isNull();         // TRUE, because a.unicode() == 0
-        a.isEmpty();        // TRUE, because a.length() == 0
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also isEmpty() and length().
-
-
                                                          Examples: i18n/main.cpp, network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h, and qdir/qdir.cpp.
-
                                                          const char * TQString::latin1 () const
-
                                                          
-Returns a Latin-1 representation of the string. The
-returned value is undefined if the string contains non-Latin-1
-characters. If you want to convert strings into formats other than
-Unicode, see the TQTextCodec classes.
-
                                                           This function is mainly useful for boot-strapping legacy code to
-use Unicode.
-
                                                           The result remains valid so long as one unmodified copy of the
-source string exists.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also fromLatin1(), ascii(), utf8(), and local8Bit().
-
-
                                                          Examples: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp and network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                                          TQString TQString::left ( uint len ) const
-
                                                          
-Returns a substring that contains the len leftmost characters
-of the string.
-
                                                           The whole string is returned if len exceeds the length of the
-string.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString s = "Pineapple";
-        TQString t = s.left( 4 );    // t == "Pine"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also right(), mid(), and isEmpty().
-
-
                                                          Example: themes/themes.cpp.
-
                                                          TQString TQString::leftJustify ( uint width, TQChar fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const
-
                                                          
-Returns a string of length width that contains this string
-padded by the fill character.
-
                                                           If truncate is FALSE and the length of the string is more than
-width, then the returned string is a copy of the string.
-
                                                           If truncate is TRUE and the length of the string is more than
-width, then any characters in a copy of the string after length
-width are removed, and the copy is returned.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString s( "apple" );
-        TQString t = s.leftJustify( 8, '.' );        // t == "apple..."
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also rightJustify().
-
-
                                                          uint TQString::length () const
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Returns the length of the string.
-
                                                           Null strings and empty strings have zero length.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also isNull() and isEmpty().
-
-
                                                          Examples: dirview/dirview.cpp, fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp, network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp, rot13/rot13.cpp, and themes/themes.cpp.
-
                                                          TQCString TQString::local8Bit () const
-
                                                          
-Returns the string encoded in a locale-specific format. On X11,
-this is the TQTextCodec::codecForLocale(). On Windows, it is a
-system-defined encoding. On Mac OS X, this always uses UTF-8 as
-the encoding.
-
                                                           See TQTextCodec for more diverse coding/decoding of Unicode
-strings.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also fromLocal8Bit(), ascii(), latin1(), and utf8().
-
-
                                                          int TQString::localeAwareCompare ( const TQString & s1, const TQString & s2 ) [static]
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Compares s1 with s2 and returns an integer less than, equal
-to, or greater than zero if s1 is less than, equal to, or
-greater than s2.
-
                                                           The comparison is performed in a locale- and also
-platform-dependent manner. Use this function to present sorted
-lists of strings to the user.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also TQString::compare() and TQTextCodec::locale().
-
-
                                                          int TQString::localeAwareCompare ( const TQString & s ) const
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Compares this string with s.
-
-
                                                          TQString TQString::lower () const
-
                                                          
-Returns a lowercase copy of the string.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString string( "TROlltECH" );
-        str = string.lower();   // str == "trolltech"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also upper().
-
-
                                                          Example: scribble/scribble.cpp.
-
                                                          TQString TQString::mid ( uint index, uint len = 0xffffffff ) const
-
                                                          
-Returns a string that contains the len characters of this
-string, starting at position index.
-
                                                           Returns a null string if the string is empty or index is out of
-range. Returns the whole string from index if index + len
-exceeds the length of the string.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString s( "Five pineapples" );
-        TQString t = s.mid( 5, 4 );                  // t == "pine"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also left() and right().
-
-
                                                          Examples: network/mail/smtp.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, and themes/themes.cpp.
-
                                                          TQString TQString::number ( long n, int base = 10 ) [static]
-
                                                          
-A convenience function that returns a string equivalent of the
-number n to base base, which is 10 by default and must be
-between 2 and 36. The returned string is in "C" locale.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        long a = 63;
-        TQString str = TQString::number( a, 16 );             // str == "3f"
-        TQString str = TQString::number( a, 16 ).upper();     // str == "3F"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also setNum().
-
-
                                                          Examples: application/application.cpp, chart/chartform.cpp, fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, regexptester/regexptester.cpp, and sql/overview/extract/main.cpp.
-
                                                          TQString TQString::number ( ulong n, int base = 10 ) [static]
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also setNum().
-
-
                                                          TQString TQString::number ( Q_LLONG n, int base = 10 ) [static]
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also setNum().
-
-
                                                          TQString TQString::number ( Q_ULLONG n, int base = 10 ) [static]
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also setNum().
-
-
                                                          TQString TQString::number ( int n, int base = 10 ) [static]
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also setNum().
-
-
                                                          TQString TQString::number ( uint n, int base = 10 ) [static]
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           A convenience factory function that returns a string
-representation of the number n to the base base, which is 10
-by default and must be between 2 and 36.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also setNum().
-
-
                                                          TQString TQString::number ( double n, char f = 'g', int prec = 6 ) [static]
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Argument n is formatted according to the f format specified,
-which is g by default, and can be any of the following:
-
                                                           
                                                          
-
                                                           Format Meaning
-
                                                           e format as [-]9.9e[+|-]999
-
                                                           E format as [-]9.9E[+|-]999
-
                                                           f format as [-]9.9
-
                                                           g use e or f format, whichever is the most concise
-
                                                           G use E or f format, whichever is the most concise
-
                                                          
-
                                                           With 'e', 'E', and 'f', prec is the number of digits after the
-decimal point. With 'g' and 'G', prec is the maximum number of
-significant digits (trailing zeroes are omitted).
-
                                                           
                                                          -    double d = 12.34;
-    TQString ds = TQString( "'E' format, precision 3, gives %1" )
-                    .arg( d, 0, 'E', 3 );
-    // ds == "1.234E+001"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also setNum().
-
-
                                                          TQString::operator const char * () const
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Returns ascii(). Be sure to see the warnings documented in the
-ascii() function. Note that for new code which you wish to be
-strictly Unicode-clean, you can define the macro QT_NO_ASCII_CAST when compiling your code to hide this function so
-that automatic casts are not done. This has the added advantage
-that you catch the programming error described in operator!().
-
-
                                                          TQString::operator std::string () const
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Returns ascii() as a std::string. 
-
                                                           Warning: The function may cause an application to crash if a static C run-time is in use. 
-This can happen in Microsoft Visual C++ if TQt is configured as single-threaded. A safe   
-alternative is to call ascii() directly and construct a std::string manually.    
-
-
                                                          bool TQString::operator! () const
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Returns TRUE if this is a null string; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString name = getName();
-        if ( !name )
-            name = "Rodney";
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           Note that if you say
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString name = getName();
-        if ( name )
-            doSomethingWith(name);
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           It will call "operator const char*()", which is inefficent; you
-may wish to define the macro QT_NO_ASCII_CAST when writing code
-which you wish to remain Unicode-clean.
-
                                                           When you want the above semantics, use:
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString name = getName();
-        if ( !name.isNull() )
-            doSomethingWith(name);
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also isEmpty().
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::operator+= ( const TQString & str )
-
                                                          
-Appends str to the string and returns a reference to the string.
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::operator+= ( const TQByteArray & str )
-
                                                          
-
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Appends str to the string and returns a reference to the string.
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::operator+= ( const char * str )
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Appends str to the string and returns a reference to the string.
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::operator+= ( const std::string & str )
-
                                                          
-
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Appends str to the string and returns a reference to the string.
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::operator+= ( TQChar c )
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Appends c to the string and returns a reference to the string.
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::operator+= ( char c )
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Appends c to the string and returns a reference to the string.
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::operator= ( TQChar c )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Sets the string to contain just the single character c.
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::operator= ( const TQString & s )
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Assigns a shallow copy of s to this string and returns a
-reference to this string. This is very fast because the string
-isn't actually copied.
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::operator= ( const char * str )
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Assigns a deep copy of str, interpreted as a classic C string
-to this string and returns a reference to this string.
-
                                                           If str is 0, then a null string is created.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also isNull().
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::operator= ( const std::string & s )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Makes a deep copy of s and returns a reference to the deep
-copy.
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::operator= ( const TQCString & cstr )
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Assigns a deep copy of cstr, interpreted as a classic C
-string, to this string. Returns a reference to this string.
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::operator= ( char c )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Sets the string to contain just the single character c.
-
-
                                                          TQChar TQString::operator[] ( int i ) const
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Returns the character at index i, or TQChar::null if i is
-beyond the length of the string.
-
                                                           If the TQString is not const (i.e., const TQString) or const&
-(i.e., const TQString&), then the non-const overload of operator[]
-will be used instead.
-
-
                                                          TQCharRef TQString::operator[] ( int i )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           The function returns a reference to the character at index i.
-The resulting reference can then be assigned to, or used
-immediately, but it will become invalid once further modifications
-are made to the original string.
-
                                                           If i is beyond the length of the string then the string is
-expanded with TQChar::nulls, so that the TQCharRef references a
-valid (null) character in the string.
-
                                                           The TQCharRef internal class can be used much like a constant
-TQChar, but if you assign to it, you change the original string
-(which will detach itself because of TQString's copy-on-write
-semantics). You will get compilation errors if you try to use the
-result as anything but a TQChar.
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::prepend ( const TQString & s )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Inserts s at the beginning of the string and returns a
-reference to the string.
-
                                                           Equivalent to insert(0, s).
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString string = "42";
-        string.prepend( "The answer is " );
-        // string == "The answer is 42"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also insert().
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::prepend ( char ch )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Inserts ch at the beginning of the string and returns a
-reference to the string.
-
                                                           Equivalent to insert(0, ch).
-
                                                           
                                                          See also insert().
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::prepend ( TQChar ch )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Inserts ch at the beginning of the string and returns a
-reference to the string.
-
                                                           Equivalent to insert(0, ch).
-
                                                           
                                                          See also insert().
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::prepend ( const TQByteArray & s )
-
                                                           
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Inserts s at the beginning of the string and returns a reference to the string.
-
                                                           Equivalent to insert(0, s).
-
                                                           
                                                          See also insert().
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::prepend ( const char * s )
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Inserts s at the beginning of the string and returns a reference to the string.
-
                                                           Equivalent to insert(0, s).
-
                                                           
                                                          See also insert().
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::prepend ( const std::string & s )
-
                                                           
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Inserts s at the beginning of the string and returns a reference to the string.
-
                                                           Equivalent to insert(0, s).
-
                                                           
                                                          See also insert().
-
-
                                                          TQChar & TQString::ref ( uint i )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Returns the TQChar at index i by reference, expanding the string
-with TQChar::null if necessary. The resulting reference can be
-assigned to, or otherwise used immediately, but becomes invalid
-once furher modifications are made to the string.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString string("ABCDEF");
-        TQChar ch = string.ref( 3 );         // ch == 'D'
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also constref().
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::remove ( uint index, uint len )
-
                                                          
-Removes len characters from the string starting at position index, and returns a reference to the string.
-
                                                           If index is beyond the length of the string, nothing happens.
-If index is within the string, but index + len is beyond
-the end of the string, the string is truncated at position index.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString string( "Montreal" );
-        string.remove( 1, 4 );      // string == "Meal"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also insert() and replace().
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::remove ( const TQString & str, bool cs = TRUE )
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Removes every occurrence of str in the string. Returns a
-reference to the string.
-
                                                           If cs is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive;
-otherwise the search is case insensitive.
-
                                                           This is the same as replace(str, "", cs).
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::remove ( TQChar c )
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Removes every occurrence of the character c in the string.
-Returns a reference to the string.
-
                                                           This is the same as replace(c, "").
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::remove ( char c )
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           
-
                                                           Removes every occurrence of the character c in the string.
-Returns a reference to the string.
-
                                                           This is the same as replace(c, "").
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::remove ( const char * str )
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Removes every occurrence of str in the string. Returns a
-reference to the string.
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::remove ( const TQRegExp & rx )
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Removes every occurrence of the regular expression rx in the
-string. Returns a reference to the string.
-
                                                           This is the same as replace(rx, "").
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::replace ( uint index, uint len, const TQString & s )
-
                                                          
-Replaces len characters from the string with s, starting at
-position index, and returns a reference to the string.
-
                                                           If index is beyond the length of the string, nothing is deleted
-and s is appended at the end of the string. If index is
-valid, but index + len is beyond the end of the string,
-the string is truncated at position index, then s is
-appended at the end.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString string( "Say yes!" );
-        string = string.replace( 4, 3, "NO" );
-        // string == "Say NO!"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           Warning: TQt 3.3.3 and earlier had different semantics for the
-case index >= length(), which contradicted the documentation.
-To avoid portability problems between TQt 3 versions and with TQt
-4, we recommend that you never call the function with index >=
-length().
-
                                                           
                                                          See also insert() and remove().
-
-
                                                          Examples: listviews/listviews.cpp, network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, and regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::replace ( uint index, uint len, const TQChar * s, uint slen )
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Replaces len characters with slen characters of TQChar data
-from s, starting at position index, and returns a reference
-to the string.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also insert() and remove().
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::replace ( uint index, uint len, TQChar c )
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           This is the same as replace(index, len, TQString(c)).
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::replace ( uint index, uint len, char c )
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           
-
                                                           This is the same as replace(index, len, TQChar(c)).
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::replace ( TQChar c, const TQString & after, bool cs = TRUE )
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Replaces every occurrence of the character c in the string
-with after. Returns a reference to the string.
-
                                                           If cs is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive;
-otherwise the search is case insensitive.
-
                                                           Example:
-
                                                          -    TQString s = "a,b,c";
-    s.replace( TQChar(','), " or " );
-    // s == "a or b or c"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::replace ( char c, const TQString & after, bool cs = TRUE )
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           
-
                                                           Replaces every occurrence of the character c in the string
-with after. Returns a reference to the string.
-
                                                           If cs is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive;
-otherwise the search is case insensitive.
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::replace ( const TQString & before, const TQString & after, bool cs = TRUE )
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Replaces every occurrence of the string before in the string
-with the string after. Returns a reference to the string.
-
                                                           If cs is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive;
-otherwise the search is case insensitive.
-
                                                           Example:
-
                                                          -    TQString s = "Greek is Greek";
-    s.replace( "Greek", "English" );
-    // s == "English is English"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::replace ( const TQRegExp & rx, const TQString & after )
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Replaces every occurrence of the regexp rx in the string with
-after. Returns a reference to the string. For example:
-
                                                          -    TQString s = "banana";
-    s.replace( TQRegExp("an"), "" );
-    // s == "ba"
-  
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           For regexps containing capturing
-  parentheses, occurrences of \1, \2, ...,
-in after are replaced with rx.cap(1), cap(2), ...
-
                                                           
                                                          -    TQString t = "A <i>bon mot</i>.";
-    t.replace( TQRegExp("<i>([^<]*)</i>"), "\\emph{\\1}" );
-    // t == "A \\emph{bon mot}."
-  
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also find(), findRev(), and TQRegExp::cap().
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::replace ( TQChar c1, TQChar c2 )
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Replaces every occurrence of c1 with the char c2. Returns a
-reference to the string.
-
-
                                                          void TQString::reserve ( uint minCapacity )
-
                                                          
-Ensures that at least minCapacity characters are allocated to
-the string.
-
                                                           This function is useful for code that needs to build up a long
-string and wants to avoid repeated reallocation. In this example,
-we want to add to the string until some condition is true, and
-we're fairly sure that size is big enough:
-
                                                          -        TQString result;
-        int len = 0;
-        result.reserve(maxLen);
-        while (...) {
-            result[len++] = ...         // fill part of the space
-        }
-        result.squeeze();
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           If maxLen is an underestimate, the worst that will happen is
-that the loop will slow down.
-
                                                           If it is not possible to allocate enough memory, the string
-remains unchanged.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also capacity(), squeeze(), and setLength().
-
-
                                                          TQString TQString::right ( uint len ) const
-
                                                          
-Returns a string that contains the len rightmost characters of
-the string.
-
                                                           If len is greater than the length of the string then the whole
-string is returned.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString string( "Pineapple" );
-        TQString t = string.right( 5 );   // t == "apple"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also left(), mid(), and isEmpty().
-
-
                                                          Example: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
-
                                                          TQString TQString::rightJustify ( uint width, TQChar fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const
-
                                                          
-Returns a string of length width that contains the fill
-character followed by the string.
-
                                                           If truncate is FALSE and the length of the string is more than
-width, then the returned string is a copy of the string.
-
                                                           If truncate is TRUE and the length of the string is more than
-width, then the resulting string is truncated at position width.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString string( "apple" );
-        TQString t = string.rightJustify( 8, '.' );  // t == "...apple"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also leftJustify().
-
-
                                                          TQString TQString::section ( TQChar sep, int start, int end = 0xffffffff, int flags = SectionDefault ) const
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This function returns a section of the string.
-
                                                           This string is treated as a sequence of fields separated by the
-character, sep. The returned string consists of the fields from
-position start to position end inclusive. If end is not
-specified, all fields from position start to the end of the
-string are included. Fields are numbered 0, 1, 2, etc., counting
-from the left, and -1, -2, etc., counting from right to left.
-
                                                           The flags argument can be used to affect some aspects of the
-function's behaviour, e.g. whether to be case sensitive, whether
-to skip empty fields and how to deal with leading and trailing
-separators; see SectionFlags.
-
                                                           
                                                          -    TQString csv( "forename,middlename,surname,phone" );
-    TQString s = csv.section( ',', 2, 2 );   // s == "surname"
-
-    TQString path( "/usr/local/bin/myapp" ); // First field is empty
-    TQString s = path.section( '/', 3, 4 );  // s == "bin/myapp"
-    TQString s = path.section( '/', 3, 3, SectionSkipEmpty ); // s == "myapp"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           If start or end is negative, we count fields from the right
-of the string, the right-most field being -1, the one from
-right-most field being -2, and so on.
-
                                                           
                                                          -    TQString csv( "forename,middlename,surname,phone" );
-    TQString s = csv.section( ',', -3, -2 );  // s == "middlename,surname"
-
-    TQString path( "/usr/local/bin/myapp" ); // First field is empty
-    TQString s = path.section( '/', -1 ); // s == "myapp"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also TQStringList::split().
-
-
                                                          Examples: chart/element.cpp and network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
-
                                                          TQString TQString::section ( char sep, int start, int end = 0xffffffff, int flags = SectionDefault ) const
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           
-
                                                          TQString TQString::section ( const char * sep, int start, int end = 0xffffffff, int flags = SectionDefault ) const
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           
-
                                                          TQString TQString::section ( const TQString & sep, int start, int end = 0xffffffff, int flags = SectionDefault ) const
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           This function returns a section of the string.
-
                                                           This string is treated as a sequence of fields separated by the
-string, sep. The returned string consists of the fields from
-position start to position end inclusive. If end is not
-specified, all fields from position start to the end of the
-string are included. Fields are numbered 0, 1, 2, etc., counting
-from the left, and -1, -2, etc., counting from right to left.
-
                                                           The flags argument can be used to affect some aspects of the
-function's behaviour, e.g. whether to be case sensitive, whether
-to skip empty fields and how to deal with leading and trailing
-separators; see SectionFlags.
-
                                                           
                                                          -    TQString data( "forename**middlename**surname**phone" );
-    TQString s = data.section( "**", 2, 2 ); // s == "surname"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           If start or end is negative, we count fields from the right
-of the string, the right-most field being -1, the one from
-right-most field being -2, and so on.
-
                                                           
                                                          -    TQString data( "forename**middlename**surname**phone" );
-    TQString s = data.section( "**", -3, -2 ); // s == "middlename**surname"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also TQStringList::split().
-
-
                                                          TQString TQString::section ( const TQRegExp & reg, int start, int end = 0xffffffff, int flags = SectionDefault ) const
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           This function returns a section of the string.
-
                                                           This string is treated as a sequence of fields separated by the
-regular expression, reg. The returned string consists of the
-fields from position start to position end inclusive. If end is not specified, all fields from position start to the end
-of the string are included. Fields are numbered 0, 1, 2, etc., counting
-from the left, and -1, -2, etc., counting from right to left.
-
                                                           The flags argument can be used to affect some aspects of the
-function's behaviour, e.g. whether to be case sensitive, whether
-to skip empty fields and how to deal with leading and trailing
-separators; see SectionFlags.
-
                                                           
                                                          -    TQString line( "forename\tmiddlename  surname \t \t phone" );
-    TQRegExp sep( "\s+" );
-    TQString s = line.section( sep, 2, 2 ); // s == "surname"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           If start or end is negative, we count fields from the right
-of the string, the right-most field being -1, the one from
-right-most field being -2, and so on.
-
                                                           
                                                          -    TQString line( "forename\tmiddlename  surname \t \t phone" );
-    TQRegExp sep( "\\s+" );
-    TQString s = line.section( sep, -3, -2 ); // s == "middlename  surname"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           Warning: Using this TQRegExp version is much more expensive than
-the overloaded string and character versions.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also TQStringList::split() and simplifyWhiteSpace().
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::setAscii ( const char * str, int len = -1 )
-
                                                          
-Sets this string to str, interpreted as a classic 8-bit ASCII C
-string. If len is -1 (the default), then it is set to
-strlen(str).
-
                                                           If str is 0 a null string is created. If str is "", an empty
-string is created.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also isNull() and isEmpty().
-
-
                                                          void TQString::setExpand ( uint index, TQChar c )
-
                                                           This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                                           Sets the character at position index to c and expands the
-string if necessary, filling with spaces.
-
                                                           This method is redundant in TQt 3.x, because operator[] will expand
-the string as necessary.
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::setLatin1 ( const char * str, int len = -1 )
-
                                                          
-Sets this string to str, interpreted as a classic Latin-1 C
-string. If len is -1 (the default), then it is set to
-strlen(str).
-
                                                           If str is 0 a null string is created. If str is "", an empty
-string is created.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also isNull() and isEmpty().
-
-
                                                          void TQString::setLength ( uint newLen )
-
                                                          
-Ensures that at least newLen characters are allocated to the
-string, and sets the length of the string to newLen. Any new
-space allocated contains arbitrary data.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also reserve() and truncate().
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::setNum ( Q_LLONG n, int base = 10 )
-
                                                          
-Sets the string to the printed value of n in base base and
-returns a reference to the string. The returned string is in "C" locale.
-
                                                           The base is 10 by default and must be between 2 and 36.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString string;
-        string = string.setNum( 1234 );     // string == "1234"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::setNum ( short n, int base = 10 )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Sets the string to the printed value of n in base base and
-returns a reference to the string.
-
                                                           The base is 10 by default and must be between 2 and 36.
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::setNum ( ushort n, int base = 10 )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Sets the string to the printed value of n in base base and
-returns a reference to the string.
-
                                                           The base is 10 by default and must be between 2 and 36.
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::setNum ( int n, int base = 10 )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Sets the string to the printed value of n in base base and
-returns a reference to the string.
-
                                                           The base is 10 by default and must be between 2 and 36.
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::setNum ( uint n, int base = 10 )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Sets the string to the printed value of n in base base and
-returns a reference to the string.
-
                                                           The base is 10 by default and must be between 2 and 36.
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::setNum ( long n, int base = 10 )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::setNum ( ulong n, int base = 10 )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::setNum ( Q_ULLONG n, int base = 10 )
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Sets the string to the printed value of n in base base and
-returns a reference to the string.
-
                                                           The base is 10 by default and must be between 2 and 36.
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::setNum ( float n, char f = 'g', int prec = 6 )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Sets the string to the printed value of n, formatted in format
-f with precision prec, and returns a reference to the
-string.
-
                                                           The format f can be 'f', 'F', 'e', 'E', 'g' or 'G'. See arg() for an explanation of the formats.
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::setNum ( double n, char f = 'g', int prec = 6 )
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Sets the string to the printed value of n, formatted in format
-f with precision prec, and returns a reference to the
-string.
-
                                                           The format f can be 'f', 'F', 'e', 'E', 'g' or 'G'. See arg() for an explanation of the formats.
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::setUnicode ( const TQChar * unicode, uint len )
-
                                                          
-Resizes the string to len characters and copies unicode into
-the string. If unicode is 0, nothing is copied, but the
-string is still resized to len. If len is zero, then the
-string becomes a null string.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also setLatin1() and isNull().
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::setUnicodeCodes ( const ushort * unicode_as_ushorts, uint len )
-
                                                          
-Resizes the string to len characters and copies unicode_as_ushorts into the string (on some X11 client platforms
-this will involve a byte-swapping pass).
-
                                                           If unicode_as_ushorts is 0, nothing is copied, but the string
-is still resized to len. If len is zero, the string becomes
-a null string.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also setLatin1() and isNull().
-
-
                                                          TQString TQString::simplifyWhiteSpace () const
-
                                                          
-Returns a string that has whitespace removed from the start and
-the end, and which has each sequence of internal whitespace
-replaced with a single space.
-
                                                           Whitespace means any character for which TQChar::isSpace() returns
-TRUE. This includes Unicode characters with decimal values 9
-(TAB), 10 (LF), 11 (VT), 12 (FF), 13 (CR), and 32 (Space).
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString string = "  lots\t of\nwhite    space ";
-        TQString t = string.simplifyWhiteSpace();
-        // t == "lots of white space"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also stripWhiteSpace().
-
-
                                                          TQString & TQString::sprintf ( const char * cformat, ... )
-
                                                          
-Safely builds a formatted string from the format string cformat
-and an arbitrary list of arguments. The format string supports all
-the escape sequences of printf() in the standard C library.
-
                                                           The %s escape sequence expects a utf8() encoded string. The format
-string cformat is expected to be in latin1. If you need a
-Unicode format string, use arg() instead. For typesafe string
-building, with full Unicode support, you can use TQTextOStream like
-this:
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString str;
-        TQString s = ...;
-        int x = ...;
-        TQTextOStream( &str ) << s << " : " << x;
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           For translations, especially if the
-strings contains more than one escape sequence, you should
-consider using the arg() function instead. This allows the order
-of the replacements to be controlled by the translator, and has
-Unicode support.
-
                                                           The %lc escape sequence expects a unicode character of type ushort
-(as returned by TQChar::unicode()).
-The %ls escape sequence expects a pointer to a zero-terminated
-array of unicode characters of type ushort (as returned by
-TQString::ucs2()).
-
                                                           
                                                          See also arg().
-
-
                                                          Examples: dclock/dclock.cpp, forever/forever.cpp, layout/layout.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, tooltip/tooltip.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                                                          void TQString::squeeze ()
-
                                                          
-Squeezes the string's capacity to the current content.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also capacity() and reserve().
-
-
                                                          bool TQString::startsWith ( const TQString & s, bool cs = TRUE ) const
-
                                                          
-Returns TRUE if the string starts with s; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                                           If cs is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive;
-otherwise the search is case insensitive.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString str( "Bananas" );
-        str.startsWith( "Ban" );     // returns TRUE
-        str.startsWith( "Car" );     // returns FALSE
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also endsWith().
-
-
                                                          TQString TQString::stripWhiteSpace () const
-
                                                          
-Returns a string that has whitespace removed from the start and
-the end.
-
                                                           Whitespace means any character for which TQChar::isSpace() returns
-TRUE. This includes Unicode characters with decimal values 9
-(TAB), 10 (LF), 11 (VT), 12 (FF), 13 (CR) and 32 (Space), and may
-also include other Unicode characters.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString string = "   white space   ";
-        TQString s = string.stripWhiteSpace();       // s == "white space"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also simplifyWhiteSpace().
-
-
                                                          double TQString::toDouble ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                                                          
-Returns the string converted to a double value.
-
                                                           If ok is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, *ok is set to
-FALSE; otherwise *ok is set to TRUE.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString string( "1234.56" );
-        double a = string.toDouble();   // a == 1234.56
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           The string-to-number functions:
-
                                                          
-can handle numbers
-represented in various locales. These representations may use different
-characters for the decimal point, thousands group sepearator
-and even individual digits. TQString's functions try to interpret
-the string according to the current locale. The current locale is
-determined from the system at application startup and can be changed
-by calling TQLocale::setDefault(). If the string cannot be interpreted
-according to the current locale, this function falls back
-on the "C" locale.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        bool ok;
-        double d;
-
-        TQLocale::setDefault(TQLocale::C);
-        d = TQString( "1234,56" ).toDouble(&ok); // ok == false
-        d = TQString( "1234.56" ).toDouble(&ok); // ok == true, d == 1234.56
-
-        TQLocale::setDefault(TQLocale::German);
-        d = TQString( "1234,56" ).toDouble(&ok); // ok == true, d == 1234.56
-        d = TQString( "1234.56" ).toDouble(&ok); // ok == true, d == 1234.56
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           Due to the ambiguity between the decimal point and thousands group
-separator in various locales, these functions do not handle
-thousands group separators. If you need to convert such numbers,
-use the corresponding function in TQLocale.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        bool ok;
-        TQLocale::setDefault(TQLocale::C);
-        double d = TQString( "1,234,567.89" ).toDouble(&ok); // ok == false
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           Warning: If the string contains trailing whitespace this function
-will fail, and set *ok to false if ok is not 0. Leading
-whitespace is ignored.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also number(), TQLocale::setDefault(), TQLocale::toDouble(), and stripWhiteSpace().
-
-
                                                          float TQString::toFloat ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                                                          
-Returns the string converted to a float value.
-
                                                           Returns 0.0 if the conversion fails.
-
                                                           If ok is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, *ok is set to
-FALSE; otherwise *ok is set to TRUE.
-
                                                           For information on how string-to-number functions in TQString handle
-localized input, see toDouble().
-
                                                           Warning: If the string contains trailing whitespace this function
-will fail, settings *ok to false if ok is not 0.
-Leading whitespace is ignored.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also number().
-
-
                                                          int TQString::toInt ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
-
                                                          
-Returns the string converted to an int using base base, which is 10 by default and must be between 2 and 36 or 0. If
-base is 0, the base is determined automatically using the
-following rules:
-
                                                            
-
                                                          • If the string begins with "0x", it is assumed to
-be hexadecimal;
-
                                                          • If it begins with "0", it is assumed to be octal;
-
                                                          • Otherwise it is assumed to be decimal.
-
                                                          
-
                                                           Returns 0 if the conversion fails.
-
                                                           If ok is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, *ok is set to
-FALSE; otherwise *ok is set to TRUE.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString str( "FF" );
-        bool ok;
-        int hex = str.toInt( &ok, 16 );     // hex == 255, ok == TRUE
-        int dec = str.toInt( &ok, 10 );     // dec == 0, ok == FALSE
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored by this function.
-
                                                           For information on how string-to-number functions in TQString handle
-localized input, see toDouble().
-
                                                           
                                                          See also number().
-
-
                                                          long TQString::toLong ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
-
                                                          
-Returns the string converted to a long using base base, which is 10 by default and must be between 2 and 36 or 0. If
-base is 0, the base is determined automatically using the
-following rules:
-
                                                            
-
                                                          • If the string begins with "0x", it is assumed to
-be hexadecimal;
-
                                                          • If it begins with "0", it is assumed to be octal;
-
                                                          • Otherwise it is assumed to be decimal.
-
                                                          
-
                                                           Returns 0 if the conversion fails.
-
                                                           If ok is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, *ok is set to
-FALSE; otherwise *ok is set to TRUE.
-
                                                           Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored by this function.
-
                                                           For information on how string-to-number functions in TQString handle
-localized input, see toDouble().
-
                                                           
                                                          See also number().
-
-
                                                          Q_LLONG TQString::toLongLong ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
-
                                                          
-Returns the string converted to a long long using base base, which is 10 by default and must be between 2 and 36 or 0. If
-base is 0, the base is determined automatically using the
-following rules:
-
                                                            
-
                                                          • If the string begins with "0x", it is assumed to
-be hexadecimal;
-
                                                          • If it begins with "0", it is assumed to be octal;
-
                                                          • Otherwise it is assumed to be decimal.
-
                                                          
-
                                                           Returns 0 if the conversion fails.
-
                                                           If ok is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, *ok is set to
-FALSE; otherwise *ok is set to TRUE.
-
                                                           Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored by this function.
-
                                                           For information on how string-to-number functions in TQString handle
-localized input, see toDouble().
-
                                                           
                                                          See also number().
-
-
                                                          short TQString::toShort ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
-
                                                          
-Returns the string converted to a short using base base, which is 10 by default and must be between 2 and 36 or 0. If
-base is 0, the base is determined automatically using the
-following rules:
-
                                                            
-
                                                          • If the string begins with "0x", it is assumed to
-be hexadecimal;
-
                                                          • If it begins with "0", it is assumed to be octal;
-
                                                          • Otherwise it is assumed to be decimal.
-
                                                          
-
                                                           Returns 0 if the conversion fails.
-
                                                           If ok is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, *ok is set to
-FALSE; otherwise *ok is set to TRUE.
-
                                                           Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored by this function.
-
                                                           For information on how string-to-number functions in TQString handle
-localized input, see toDouble().
-
                                                           
                                                          See also number().
-
-
                                                          uint TQString::toUInt ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
-
                                                          
-Returns the string converted to an unsigned int using base base, which is 10 by default and must be between 2 and 36 or 0. If
-base is 0, the base is determined automatically using the
-following rules:
-
                                                            
-
                                                          • If the string begins with "0x", it is assumed to
-be hexadecimal;
-
                                                          • If it begins with "0", it is assumed to be octal;
-
                                                          • Otherwise it is assumed to be decimal.
-
                                                          
-
                                                           Returns 0 if the conversion fails.
-
                                                           If ok is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, *ok is set to
-FALSE; otherwise *ok is set to TRUE.
-
                                                           Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored by this function.
-
                                                           For information on how string-to-number functions in TQString handle
-localized input, see toDouble().
-
                                                           
                                                          See also number().
-
-
                                                          ulong TQString::toULong ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
-
                                                          
-Returns the string converted to an unsigned long using base base, which is 10 by default and must be between 2 and 36 or 0. If
-base is 0, the base is determined automatically using the
-following rules:
-
                                                            
-
                                                          • If the string begins with "0x", it is assumed to
-be hexadecimal;
-
                                                          • If it begins with "0", it is assumed to be octal;
-
                                                          • Otherwise it is assumed to be decimal.
-
                                                          
-
                                                           Returns 0 if the conversion fails.
-
                                                           If ok is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, *ok is set to
-FALSE; otherwise *ok is set to TRUE.
-
                                                           Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored by this function.
-
                                                           For information on how string-to-number functions in TQString handle
-localized input, see toDouble().
-
                                                           
                                                          See also number().
-
-
                                                          Q_ULLONG TQString::toULongLong ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
-
                                                          
-Returns the string converted to an unsigned long long using base base, which is 10 by default and must be between 2 and 36 or 0. If
-base is 0, the base is determined automatically using the
-following rules:
-
                                                            
-
                                                          • If the string begins with "0x", it is assumed to
-be hexadecimal;
-
                                                          • If it begins with "0", it is assumed to be octal;
-
                                                          • Otherwise it is assumed to be decimal.
-
                                                          
-
                                                           Returns 0 if the conversion fails.
-
                                                           If ok is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, *ok is set to
-FALSE; otherwise *ok is set to TRUE.
-
                                                           Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored by this function.
-
                                                           For information on how string-to-number functions in TQString handle
-localized input, see toDouble().
-
                                                           
                                                          See also number().
-
-
                                                          ushort TQString::toUShort ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const
-
                                                          
-Returns the string converted to an unsigned short using base base, which is 10 by default and must be between 2 and 36 or 0. If
-base is 0, the base is determined automatically using the
-following rules:
-
                                                            
-
                                                          • If the string begins with "0x", it is assumed to
-be hexadecimal;
-
                                                          • If it begins with "0", it is assumed to be octal;
-
                                                          • Otherwise it is assumed to be decimal.
-
                                                          
-
                                                           Returns 0 if the conversion fails.
-
                                                           If ok is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, *ok is set to
-FALSE; otherwise *ok is set to TRUE.
-
                                                           Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored by this function.
-
                                                           For information on how string-to-number functions in TQString handle
-localized input, see toDouble().
-
                                                           
                                                          See also number().
-
-
                                                          void TQString::truncate ( uint newLen )
-
                                                          
-If newLen is less than the length of the string, then the
-string is truncated at position newLen. Otherwise nothing
-happens.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString s = "truncate me";
-        s.truncate( 5 );            // s == "trunc"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also setLength().
-
-
                                                          Example: network/mail/smtp.cpp.
-
                                                          const unsigned short * TQString::ucs2 () const
-
                                                          
-Returns the TQString as a zero terminated array of unsigned shorts
-if the string is not null; otherwise returns zero.
-
                                                           The result remains valid so long as one unmodified
-copy of the source string exists.
-
-
                                                          Example: dotnet/wrapper/lib/tools.cpp.
-
                                                          const TQChar * TQString::unicode () const
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Returns the Unicode representation of the string. The result
-remains valid until the string is modified.
-
-
                                                          TQString TQString::upper () const
-
                                                          
-Returns an uppercase copy of the string.
-
                                                           
                                                          -        TQString string( "TeXt" );
-        str = string.upper();     // t == "TEXT"
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also lower().
-
-
                                                          Examples: scribble/scribble.cpp and sql/overview/custom1/main.cpp.
-
                                                          TQCString TQString::utf8 () const
-
                                                          
-Returns the string encoded in UTF-8 format.
-
                                                           See TQTextCodec for more diverse coding/decoding of Unicode strings.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also fromUtf8(), ascii(), latin1(), and local8Bit().
-
-
                                                          Example: network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h.
-
                                                          Related Functions
                                                          
-
                                                          bool operator!= ( const TQString & s1, const TQString & s2 )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           
-
                                                           Returns TRUE if s1 is not equal to s2; otherwise returns FALSE.
-Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
-
                                                           Equivalent to compare(s1, s2) != 0.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also isNull() and isEmpty().
-
-
                                                          bool operator!= ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           
-
                                                           Returns TRUE if s1 is not equal to s2; otherwise returns FALSE.
-Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
-
                                                           Equivalent to compare(s1, s2) != 0.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also isNull() and isEmpty().
-
-
                                                          bool operator!= ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           
-
                                                           Returns TRUE if s1 is not equal to s2; otherwise returns FALSE.
-Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
-
                                                           Equivalent to compare(s1, s2) != 0.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also isNull() and isEmpty().
-
-
                                                          const TQString operator+ ( const TQString & s1, const TQString & s2 )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           
-
                                                           Returns a string which is the result of concatenating the string
-s1 and the string s2.
-
                                                           Equivalent to s1.append(s2).
-
-
                                                          const TQString operator+ ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           
-
                                                           Returns a string which is the result of concatenating the string
-s1 and character s2.
-
                                                           Equivalent to s1.append(s2).
-
-
                                                          const TQString operator+ ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           
-
                                                           Returns a string which is the result of concatenating the
-character s1 and string s2.
-
-
                                                          const TQString operator+ ( const TQString & s, char c )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           
-
                                                           Returns a string which is the result of concatenating the string
-s and character c.
-
                                                           Equivalent to s.append(c).
-
-
                                                          const TQString operator+ ( char c, const TQString & s )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           
-
                                                           Returns a string which is the result of concatenating the
-character c and string s.
-
                                                           Equivalent to s.prepend(c).
-
-
                                                          bool operator< ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           
-
                                                           Returns TRUE if s1 is lexically less than s2; otherwise returns FALSE.
-The comparison is case sensitive.
-
                                                           Equivalent to compare(s1, s2) < 0.
-
-
                                                          bool operator< ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           
-
                                                           Returns TRUE if s1 is lexically less than s2; otherwise returns FALSE.
-The comparison is case sensitive.
-
                                                           Equivalent to compare(s1, s2) < 0.
-
-
                                                          TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQString & str )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Writes the string str to the stream s.
-
                                                           See also Format of the TQDataStream operators
-
-
                                                          bool operator<= ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           
-
                                                           Returns TRUE if s1 is lexically less than or equal to s2;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-The comparison is case sensitive.
-Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
-
                                                           Equivalent to compare(s1,s2) <= 0.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also isNull() and isEmpty().
-
-
                                                          bool operator<= ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           
-
                                                           Returns TRUE if s1 is lexically less than or equal to s2;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-The comparison is case sensitive.
-Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
-
                                                           Equivalent to compare(s1, s2) <= 0.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also isNull() and isEmpty().
-
-
                                                          bool operator== ( const TQString & s1, const TQString & s2 )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           
-
                                                           Returns TRUE if s1 is equal to s2; otherwise returns FALSE.
-Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
-
                                                           Equivalent to compare(s1, s2) == 0.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also isNull() and isEmpty().
-
-
                                                          bool operator== ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           
-
                                                           Returns TRUE if s1 is equal to s2; otherwise returns FALSE.
-Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
-
                                                           Equivalent to compare(s1, s2) == 0.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also isNull() and isEmpty().
-
-
                                                          bool operator== ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           
-
                                                           Returns TRUE if s1 is equal to s2; otherwise returns FALSE.
-Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
-
                                                           Equivalent to compare(s1, s2) == 0.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also isNull() and isEmpty().
-
-
                                                          bool operator> ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           
-
                                                           Returns TRUE if s1 is lexically greater than s2; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-The comparison is case sensitive.
-
                                                           Equivalent to compare(s1, s2) > 0.
-
-
                                                          bool operator> ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           
-
                                                           Returns TRUE if s1 is lexically greater than s2; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-The comparison is case sensitive.
-
                                                           Equivalent to compare(s1, s2) > 0.
-
-
                                                          bool operator>= ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           
-
                                                           Returns TRUE if s1 is lexically greater than or equal to s2;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-The comparison is case sensitive.
-Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
-
                                                           Equivalent to compare(s1, s2) >= 0.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also isNull() and isEmpty().
-
-
                                                          bool operator>= ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           
-
                                                           Returns TRUE if s1 is lexically greater than or equal to s2;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-The comparison is case sensitive.
-Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
-
                                                           Equivalent to compare(s1, s2) >= 0.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also isNull() and isEmpty().
-
-
                                                          TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQString & str )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Reads a string from the stream s into string str.
-
                                                           See also Format of the TQDataStream operators
-
-
-
                                                          
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                          
-
-
                                                          Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                          TQt 3.3.8
                                                          
-
                                                          
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qstringlist-h.html b/doc/html/qstringlist-h.html
index ac1cdc402..1ef2b1942 100644
--- a/doc/html/qstringlist-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qstringlist-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qstringlist.h Include File
+ntqstringlist.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                          
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                          TQStringList Class Reference
                                                          
-
-
                                                          The TQStringList class provides a list of strings.
-More...
-
                                                          All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
                                                          
-
                                                          #include <qstringlist.h>
-
                                                          Inherits TQValueList<TQString>.
-
                                                          List of all member functions.
-
                                                          Public Members
                                                          
-
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStringList ()
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQStringList ( const TQStringList & l )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQStringList ( const TQValueList<TQString> & l )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQStringList ( const TQString & i )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQStringList ( const char * i )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • void sort ()
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQString join ( const TQString & sep ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQStringList grep ( const TQString & str, bool cs = TRUE ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQStringList grep ( const TQRegExp & rx ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQStringList & gres ( const TQString & before, const TQString & after, bool cs = TRUE )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQStringList & gres ( const TQRegExp & rx, const TQString & after )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          
-
                                                          Static Public Members
                                                          
-
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStringList fromStrList ( const TQStrList & ascii )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQStringList split ( const TQString & sep, const TQString & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = FALSE )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQStringList split ( const TQChar & sep, const TQString & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = FALSE )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQStringList split ( const TQRegExp & sep, const TQString & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = FALSE )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          
-
                                                          Detailed Description
                                                          
-
-
-
-The TQStringList class provides a list of strings.
-
                                                           
-
-
-
-
                                                           It is used to store and manipulate strings that logically belong
-together. Essentially TQStringList is a TQValueList of TQString
-objects. Unlike TQStrList, which stores pointers to characters,
-TQStringList holds real TQString objects. It is the class of choice
-whenever you work with Unicode strings. TQStringList is part of the
-TQt Template Library.
-
                                                           Like TQString itself, TQStringList objects are implicitly shared, so
-passing them around as value-parameters is both fast and safe.
-
                                                           Strings can be added to a list using append(), operator+=() or
-operator<<(), e.g.
-
                                                          -    TQStringList fonts;
-    fonts.append( "Times" );
-    fonts += "Courier";
-    fonts += "Courier New";
-    fonts << "Helvetica [Cronyx]" << "Helvetica [Adobe]";
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           String lists have an iterator, TQStringList::Iterator(), e.g.
-
                                                          -    for ( TQStringList::Iterator it = fonts.begin(); it != fonts.end(); ++it ) {
-        cout << *it << ":";
-    }
-    cout << endl;
-    // Output:
-    //  Times:Courier:Courier New:Helvetica [Cronyx]:Helvetica [Adobe]:
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           Many TQt functions return string lists by value; to iterate over
-these you should make a copy and iterate over the copy.
-
                                                           You can concatenate all the strings in a string list into a single
-string (with an optional separator) using join(), e.g.
-
                                                          -    TQString allFonts = fonts.join( ", " );
-    cout << allFonts << endl;
-    // Output:
-    //  Times, Courier, Courier New, Helvetica [Cronyx], Helvetica [Adobe]
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           You can sort the list with sort(), and extract a new list which
-contains only those strings which contain a particular substring
-(or match a particular regular expression) using the grep()
-functions, e.g.
-
                                                          -    fonts.sort();
-    cout << fonts.join( ", " ) << endl;
-    // Output:
-    //  Courier, Courier New, Helvetica [Adobe], Helvetica [Cronyx], Times
-
-    TQStringList helveticas = fonts.grep( "Helvetica" );
-    cout << helveticas.join( ", " ) << endl;
-    // Output:
-    //  Helvetica [Adobe], Helvetica [Cronyx]
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           Existing strings can be split into string lists with character,
-string or regular expression separators, e.g.
-
                                                          -    TQString s = "Red\tGreen\tBlue";
-    TQStringList colors = TQStringList::split( "\t", s );
-    cout << colors.join( ", " ) << endl;
-    // Output:
-    //  Red, Green, Blue
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                          See also Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes, Text Related Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
-
-
                                                          Member Function Documentation
                                                          
-
                                                          TQStringList::TQStringList ()
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Creates an empty string list.
-
-
                                                          TQStringList::TQStringList ( const TQStringList & l )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Creates a copy of the list l. This function is very fast
-because TQStringList is implicitly shared. In most situations this
-acts like a deep copy, for example, if this list or the original
-one or some other list referencing the same shared data is
-modified, the modifying list first makes a copy, i.e.
-copy-on-write.
-In a threaded environment you may require a real deep copy
-.
-
-
                                                          TQStringList::TQStringList ( const TQValueList<TQString> & l )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Constructs a new string list that is a copy of l.
-
-
                                                          TQStringList::TQStringList ( const TQString & i )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Constructs a string list consisting of the single string i.
-Longer lists are easily created as follows:
-
                                                           
                                                          -    TQStringList items;
-    items << "Buy" << "Sell" << "Update" << "Value";
-    
                                                          
- 
-
-
                                                          TQStringList::TQStringList ( const char * i )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Constructs a string list consisting of the single Latin-1 string i.
-
-
                                                          TQStringList TQStringList::fromStrList ( const TQStrList & ascii ) [static]
-
                                                          
-Converts from an ASCII-TQStrList ascii to a TQStringList (Unicode).
-
-
                                                          TQStringList TQStringList::grep ( const TQString & str, bool cs = TRUE ) const
-
                                                          
-Returns a list of all the strings containing the substring str.
-
                                                           If cs is TRUE, the grep is done case-sensitively; otherwise
-case is ignored.
-
                                                           
                                                          -    TQStringList list;
-    list << "Bill Gates" << "John Doe" << "Bill Clinton";
-    list = list.grep( "Bill" );
-    // list == ["Bill Gates", "Bill Clinton"]
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also TQString::find().
-
-
                                                          TQStringList TQStringList::grep ( const TQRegExp & rx ) const
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Returns a list of all the strings that match the regular expression rx.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also TQString::find().
-
-
                                                          TQStringList & TQStringList::gres ( const TQString & before, const TQString & after, bool cs = TRUE )
-
                                                          
-Replaces every occurrence of the string before in the strings
-that constitute the string list with the string after. Returns
-a reference to the string list.
-
                                                           If cs is TRUE, the search is case sensitive; otherwise the
-search is case insensitive.
-
                                                           Example:
-
                                                          -    TQStringList list;
-    list << "alpha" << "beta" << "gamma" << "epsilon";
-    list.gres( "a", "o" );
-    // list == ["olpho", "beto", "gommo", "epsilon"]
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also TQString::replace().
-
-
                                                          TQStringList & TQStringList::gres ( const TQRegExp & rx, const TQString & after )
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Replaces every occurrence of the regexp rx in the string
-with after. Returns a reference to the string list.
-
                                                           Example:
-
                                                          -    TQStringList list;
-    list << "alpha" << "beta" << "gamma" << "epsilon";
-    list.gres( TQRegExp("^a"), "o" );
-    // list == ["olpha", "beta", "gamma", "epsilon"]
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           For regexps containing capturing parentheses, occurrences of \1,
-\2, ..., in after are replaced with rx.cap(1),
-cap(2), ...
-
                                                           Example:
-
                                                          -    TQStringList list;
-    list << "Bill Clinton" << "Gates, Bill";
-    list.gres( TQRegExp("^(.*), (.*)$"), "\\2 \\1" );
-    // list == ["Bill Clinton", "Bill Gates"]
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also TQString::replace().
-
-
                                                          TQString TQStringList::join ( const TQString & sep ) const
-
                                                          
-Joins the string list into a single string with each element
-separated by the string sep (which can be empty).
-
                                                           
                                                          See also split().
-
-
                                                          Examples: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp and toplevel/options.ui.h.
-
                                                          void TQStringList::sort ()
-
                                                          
-Sorts the list of strings in ascending case-sensitive order.
-
                                                           Sorting is very fast. It uses the TQt Template
-    Library's efficient HeapSort implementation that has a
-time complexity of O(n*log n).
-
                                                           If you want to sort your strings in an arbitrary order consider
-using a TQMap. For example you could use a TQMap<TQString,TQString>
-to create a case-insensitive ordering (e.g. mapping the lowercase
-text to the text), or a TQMap<int,TQString> to sort the strings by
-some integer index, etc.
-
-
                                                          Example: themes/themes.cpp.
-
                                                          TQStringList TQStringList::split ( const TQRegExp & sep, const TQString & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = FALSE ) [static]
-
                                                          
-Splits the string str into strings wherever the regular expression sep occurs, and returns the list of those strings.
-
                                                           If allowEmptyEntries is TRUE, a null string is inserted in
-the list wherever the separator matches twice without intervening
-text.
-
                                                           For example, if you split the string "a,,b,c" on commas, split()
-returns the three-item list "a", "b", "c" if allowEmptyEntries
-is FALSE (the default), and the four-item list "a", "", "b", "c"
-if allowEmptyEntries is TRUE.
-
                                                           If sep does not match anywhere in str, split() returns a
-single element list with the element containing the single string
-str.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also join() and TQString::section().
-
-
                                                          Examples: chart/element.cpp, dirview/dirview.cpp, and network/httpd/httpd.cpp.
-
                                                          TQStringList TQStringList::split ( const TQString & sep, const TQString & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = FALSE ) [static]
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           This version of the function uses a TQString as separator, rather
-than a regular expression.
-
                                                           If sep is an empty string, the return value is a list of
-one-character strings: split( TQString( "" ), "four" ) returns the
-four-item list, "f", "o", "u", "r".
-
                                                           If allowEmptyEntries is TRUE, a null string is inserted in
-the list wherever the separator matches twice without intervening
-text.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also join() and TQString::section().
-
-
                                                          TQStringList TQStringList::split ( const TQChar & sep, const TQString & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = FALSE ) [static]
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           This version of the function uses a TQChar as separator, rather
-than a regular expression.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also join() and TQString::section().
-
-
-
                                                          
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                          
-
-
                                                          Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                          TQt 3.3.8
                                                          
-
                                                          
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qstrlist-h.html b/doc/html/qstrlist-h.html
index 980d5e07b..49a3e7e09 100644
--- a/doc/html/qstrlist-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qstrlist-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qstrlist.h Include File
+ntqstrlist.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                          
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                          TQStrList Class Reference
                                                          
-
-
                                                          The TQStrList class provides a doubly-linked list of char*.
-More...
-
                                                          #include <qstrlist.h>
-
                                                          Inherits TQPtrList<char>.
-
                                                          Inherited by TQStrIList.
-
                                                          List of all member functions.
-
                                                          Public Members
                                                          
-
-
                                                          Detailed Description
                                                          
-
-
-The TQStrList class provides a doubly-linked list of char*.
-
                                                           
-
-
-
                                                           If you want a string list of TQStrings use TQStringList.
-
                                                           This class is a TQPtrList<char> instance (a list of char*).
-
                                                           TQStrList can make deep or shallow copies of the strings that are
-inserted.
-
                                                           A deep copy means that memory is allocated for the string and then
-the string data is copied into that memory. A shallow copy is just
-a copy of the pointer value and not of the string data itself.
-
                                                           The disadvantage of shallow copies is that because a pointer can
-be deleted only once, the program must put all strings in a
-central place and know when it is safe to delete them (i.e. when
-the strings are no longer referenced by other parts of the
-program). This can make the program more complex. The advantage of
-shallow copies is that they consume far less memory than deep
-copies. It is also much faster to copy a pointer (typically 4 or 8
-bytes) than to copy string data.
-
                                                           A TQStrList that operates on deep copies will, by default, turn on
-auto-deletion (see setAutoDelete()). Thus, by default TQStrList
-will deallocate any string copies it allocates.
-
                                                           The virtual compareItems() function is reimplemented and does a
-case-sensitive string comparison. The inSort() function will
-insert strings in sorted order. In general it is fastest to insert
-the strings as they come and sort() at the end; inSort() is useful
-when you just have to add a few extra strings to an already sorted
-list.
-
                                                           The TQStrListIterator class is an iterator for TQStrList.
-
                                                          See also Collection Classes, Text Related Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
-
-
                                                          Member Function Documentation
                                                          
-
                                                          TQStrList::TQStrList ( bool deepCopies = TRUE )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Constructs an empty list of strings. Will make deep copies of all
-inserted strings if deepCopies is TRUE, or use shallow copies
-if deepCopies is FALSE.
-
-
                                                          TQStrList::TQStrList ( const TQStrList & list )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Constructs a copy of list.
-
                                                           If list has deep copies, this list will also get deep copies.
-Only the pointers are copied (shallow copy) if the other list does
-not use deep copies.
-
-
                                                          TQStrList::~TQStrList ()
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Destroys the list. All strings are removed.
-
-
                                                          TQStrList & TQStrList::operator= ( const TQStrList & list )
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Assigns list to this list and returns a reference to this list.
-
                                                           If list has deep copies, this list will also get deep copies.
-Only the pointers are copied (shallow copy) if the other list does
-not use deep copies.
-
-
-
                                                          
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                          
-
-
                                                          Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                          TQt 3.3.8
                                                          
-
                                                          
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qstrlistiterator-members.html b/doc/html/qstrlistiterator-members.html
index f61ef8f14..c4f095fc8 100644
--- a/doc/html/qstrlistiterator-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qstrlistiterator-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qstrlistiterator.html b/doc/html/qstrlistiterator.html
index 3d2197161..77fb6185c 100644
--- a/doc/html/qstrlistiterator.html
+++ b/doc/html/qstrlistiterator.html
@@ -34,13 +34,13 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                                          The TQStrListIterator class is an iterator for the TQStrList
 and TQStrIList classes.
 More...
-
                                                          #include <qstrlist.h>
+
                                                          #include <ntqstrlist.h>
 
                                                          Inherits TQPtrListIterator<char>.
 
                                                          List of all member functions.
 
                                                          Detailed Description
                                                          
 
 
-The TQStrListIterator class is an iterator for the TQStrList
+The TQStrListIterator class is an iterator for the TQStrList
 and TQStrIList classes.
 
                                                           
 
                                                           This class is a TQPtrListIterator<char> instance. It can traverse
diff --git a/doc/html/qstyle-h.html b/doc/html/qstyle-h.html
index d8baefa54..19a737072 100644
--- a/doc/html/qstyle-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qstyle-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qstyle.h Include File
+ntqstyle.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                          
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                          TQStyle Class Reference
                                                          
-
-
                                                          The TQStyle class specifies the look and feel of a GUI.
-More...
-
                                                          #include <qstyle.h>
-
                                                          Inherits TQObject.
-
                                                          Inherited by TQCommonStyle.
-
                                                          List of all member functions.
-
                                                          Public Members
                                                          
-
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle ()
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • virtual ~TQStyle ()
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • virtual void polish ( TQWidget * )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • virtual void unPolish ( TQWidget * )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • virtual void polish ( TQApplication * )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • virtual void unPolish ( TQApplication * )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • virtual void polish ( TQPalette & )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • virtual void polishPopupMenu ( TQPopupMenu * ) = 0
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • virtual TQRect itemRect ( TQPainter * p, const TQRect & r, int flags, bool enabled, const TQPixmap * pixmap, const TQString & text, int len = -1 ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • virtual void drawItem ( TQPainter * p, const TQRect & r, int flags, const TQColorGroup & g, bool enabled, const TQPixmap * pixmap, const TQString & text, int len = -1, const TQColor * penColor = 0 ) const
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • enum PrimitiveElement { PE_ButtonCommand, PE_ButtonDefault, PE_ButtonBevel, PE_ButtonTool, PE_ButtonDropDown, PE_FocusRect, PE_ArrowUp, PE_ArrowDown, PE_ArrowRight, PE_ArrowLeft, PE_SpinWidgetUp, PE_SpinWidgetDown, PE_SpinWidgetPlus, PE_SpinWidgetMinus, PE_Indicator, PE_IndicatorMask, PE_ExclusiveIndicator, PE_ExclusiveIndicatorMask, PE_DockWindowHandle, PE_DockWindowSeparator, PE_DockWindowResizeHandle, PE_Splitter, PE_Panel, PE_PanelPopup, PE_PanelMenuBar, PE_PanelDockWindow, PE_TabBarBase, PE_HeaderSection, PE_HeaderArrow, PE_StatusBarSection, PE_GroupBoxFrame, PE_Separator, PE_SizeGrip, PE_CheckMark, PE_ScrollBarAddLine, PE_ScrollBarSubLine, PE_ScrollBarAddPage, PE_ScrollBarSubPage, PE_ScrollBarSlider, PE_ScrollBarFirst, PE_ScrollBarLast, PE_ProgressBarChunk, PE_PanelLineEdit, PE_PanelTabWidget, PE_WindowFrame, PE_CheckListController, PE_CheckListIndicator, PE_CheckListExclusiveIndicator, PE_PanelGroupBox, PE_RubberBand, PE_CustomBase = 0xf000000 }
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • enum StyleFlags { Style_Default = 0x00000000, Style_Enabled = 0x00000001, Style_Raised = 0x00000002, Style_Sunken = 0x00000004, Style_Off = 0x00000008, Style_NoChange = 0x00000010, Style_On = 0x00000020, Style_Down = 0x00000040, Style_Horizontal = 0x00000080, Style_HasFocus = 0x00000100, Style_Top = 0x00000200, Style_Bottom = 0x00000400, Style_FocusAtBorder = 0x00000800, Style_AutoRaise = 0x00001000, Style_MouseOver = 0x00002000, Style_Up = 0x00004000, Style_Selected = 0x00008000, Style_Active = 0x00010000, Style_ButtonDefault = 0x00020000 }
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • virtual void drawPrimitive ( PrimitiveElement pe, TQPainter * p, const TQRect & r, const TQColorGroup & cg, SFlags flags = Style_Default, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const = 0
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • enum ControlElement { CE_PushButton, CE_PushButtonLabel, CE_CheckBox, CE_CheckBoxLabel, CE_RadioButton, CE_RadioButtonLabel, CE_TabBarTab, CE_TabBarLabel, CE_ProgressBarGroove, CE_ProgressBarContents, CE_ProgressBarLabel, CE_PopupMenuItem, CE_MenuBarItem, CE_ToolButtonLabel, CE_MenuBarEmptyArea, CE_PopupMenuScroller, CE_DockWindowEmptyArea, CE_PopupMenuVerticalExtra, CE_PopupMenuHorizontalExtra, CE_ToolBoxTab, CE_HeaderLabel, CE_CustomBase = 0xf0000000 }
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • virtual void drawControl ( ControlElement element, TQPainter * p, const TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & r, const TQColorGroup & cg, SFlags how = Style_Default, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const = 0
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • virtual void drawControlMask ( ControlElement element, TQPainter * p, const TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & r, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const = 0
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • enum SubRect { SR_PushButtonContents, SR_PushButtonFocusRect, SR_CheckBoxIndicator, SR_CheckBoxContents, SR_CheckBoxFocusRect, SR_RadioButtonIndicator, SR_RadioButtonContents, SR_RadioButtonFocusRect, SR_ComboBoxFocusRect, SR_SliderFocusRect, SR_DockWindowHandleRect, SR_ProgressBarGroove, SR_ProgressBarContents, SR_ProgressBarLabel, SR_ToolButtonContents, SR_DialogButtonAccept, SR_DialogButtonReject, SR_DialogButtonApply, SR_DialogButtonHelp, SR_DialogButtonAll, SR_DialogButtonAbort, SR_DialogButtonIgnore, SR_DialogButtonRetry, SR_DialogButtonCustom, SR_ToolBoxTabContents, SR_CustomBase = 0xf0000000 }
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • virtual TQRect subRect ( SubRect subrect, const TQWidget * widget ) const = 0
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • enum ComplexControl { CC_SpinWidget, CC_ComboBox, CC_ScrollBar, CC_Slider, CC_ToolButton, CC_TitleBar, CC_ListView, CC_CustomBase = 0xf0000000 }
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • enum SubControl { SC_None = 0x00000000, SC_ScrollBarAddLine = 0x00000001, SC_ScrollBarSubLine = 0x00000002, SC_ScrollBarAddPage = 0x00000004, SC_ScrollBarSubPage = 0x00000008, SC_ScrollBarFirst = 0x00000010, SC_ScrollBarLast = 0x00000020, SC_ScrollBarSlider = 0x00000040, SC_ScrollBarGroove = 0x00000080, SC_SpinWidgetUp = 0x00000001, SC_SpinWidgetDown = 0x00000002, SC_SpinWidgetFrame = 0x00000004, SC_SpinWidgetEditField = 0x00000008, SC_SpinWidgetButtonField = 0x00000010, SC_ComboBoxFrame = 0x00000001, SC_ComboBoxEditField = 0x00000002, SC_ComboBoxArrow = 0x00000004, SC_ComboBoxListBoxPopup = 0x00000008, SC_SliderGroove = 0x00000001, SC_SliderHandle = 0x00000002, SC_SliderTickmarks = 0x00000004, SC_ToolButton = 0x00000001, SC_ToolButtonMenu = 0x00000002, SC_TitleBarLabel = 0x00000001, SC_TitleBarSysMenu = 0x00000002, SC_TitleBarMinButton = 0x00000004, SC_TitleBarMaxButton = 0x00000008, SC_TitleBarCloseButton = 0x00000010, SC_TitleBarNormalButton = 0x00000020, SC_TitleBarShadeButton = 0x00000040, SC_TitleBarUnshadeButton = 0x00000080, SC_ListView = 0x00000001, SC_ListViewBranch = 0x00000002, SC_ListViewExpand = 0x00000004, SC_All = 0xffffffff }
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • virtual void drawComplexControl ( ComplexControl control, TQPainter * p, const TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & r, const TQColorGroup & cg, SFlags how = Style_Default, SCFlags sub = SC_All, SCFlags subActive = SC_None, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const = 0
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • virtual void drawComplexControlMask ( ComplexControl control, TQPainter * p, const TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & r, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const = 0
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • virtual TQRect querySubControlMetrics ( ComplexControl control, const TQWidget * widget, SubControl subcontrol, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const = 0
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • virtual SubControl querySubControl ( ComplexControl control, const TQWidget * widget, const TQPoint & pos, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const = 0
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • enum PixelMetric { PM_ButtonMargin, PM_ButtonDefaultIndicator, PM_MenuButtonIndicator, PM_ButtonShiftHorizontal, PM_ButtonShiftVertical, PM_DefaultFrameWidth, PM_SpinBoxFrameWidth, PM_MaximumDragDistance, PM_ScrollBarExtent, PM_ScrollBarSliderMin, PM_SliderThickness, PM_SliderControlThickness, PM_SliderLength, PM_SliderTickmarkOffset, PM_SliderSpaceAvailable, PM_DockWindowSeparatorExtent, PM_DockWindowHandleExtent, PM_DockWindowFrameWidth, PM_MenuBarFrameWidth, PM_TabBarTabOverlap, PM_TabBarTabHSpace, PM_TabBarTabVSpace, PM_TabBarBaseHeight, PM_TabBarBaseOverlap, PM_ProgressBarChunkWidth, PM_SplitterWidth, PM_TitleBarHeight, PM_IndicatorWidth, PM_IndicatorHeight, PM_ExclusiveIndicatorWidth, PM_ExclusiveIndicatorHeight, PM_PopupMenuScrollerHeight, PM_CheckListButtonSize, PM_CheckListControllerSize, PM_PopupMenuFrameHorizontalExtra, PM_PopupMenuFrameVerticalExtra, PM_DialogButtonsSeparator, PM_DialogButtonsButtonWidth, PM_DialogButtonsButtonHeight, PM_MDIFrameWidth, PM_MDIMinimizedWidth, PM_HeaderMargin, PM_HeaderMarkSize, PM_HeaderGripMargin, PM_TabBarTabShiftHorizontal, PM_TabBarTabShiftVertical, PM_TabBarScrollButtonWidth, PM_MenuBarItemSpacing, PM_ToolBarItemSpacing, PM_CustomBase = 0xf0000000 }
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • virtual int pixelMetric ( PixelMetric metric, const TQWidget * widget = 0 ) const = 0
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • enum ContentsType { CT_PushButton, CT_CheckBox, CT_RadioButton, CT_ToolButton, CT_ComboBox, CT_Splitter, CT_DockWindow, CT_ProgressBar, CT_PopupMenuItem, CT_TabBarTab, CT_Slider, CT_Header, CT_LineEdit, CT_MenuBar, CT_SpinBox, CT_SizeGrip, CT_TabWidget, CT_DialogButtons, CT_CustomBase = 0xf0000000 }
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • virtual TQSize sizeFromContents ( ContentsType contents, const TQWidget * widget, const TQSize & contentsSize, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const = 0
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • enum StyleHint { SH_EtchDisabledText, SH_GUIStyle, SH_ScrollBar_BackgroundMode, SH_ScrollBar_MiddleClickAbsolutePosition, SH_ScrollBar_ScrollWhenPointerLeavesControl, SH_TabBar_SelectMouseType, SH_TabBar_Alignment, SH_Header_ArrowAlignment, SH_Slider_SnapToValue, SH_Slider_SloppyKeyEvents, SH_ProgressDialog_CenterCancelButton, SH_ProgressDialog_TextLabelAlignment, SH_PrintDialog_RightAlignButtons, SH_MainWindow_SpaceBelowMenuBar, SH_FontDialog_SelectAssociatedText, SH_PopupMenu_AllowActiveAndDisabled, SH_PopupMenu_SpaceActivatesItem, SH_PopupMenu_SubMenuPopupDelay, SH_ScrollView_FrameOnlyAroundContents, SH_MenuBar_AltKeyNavigation, SH_ComboBox_ListMouseTracking, SH_PopupMenu_MouseTracking, SH_MenuBar_MouseTracking, SH_ItemView_ChangeHighlightOnFocus, SH_Widget_ShareActivation, SH_Workspace_FillSpaceOnMaximize, SH_ComboBox_Popup, SH_TitleBar_NoBorder, SH_ScrollBar_StopMouseOverSlider, SH_BlinkCursorWhenTextSelected, SH_RichText_FullWidthSelection, SH_PopupMenu_Scrollable, SH_GroupBox_TextLabelVerticalAlignment, SH_GroupBox_TextLabelColor, SH_PopupMenu_SloppySubMenus, SH_Table_GridLineColor, SH_LineEdit_PasswordCharacter, SH_DialogButtons_DefaultButton, SH_ToolBox_SelectedPageTitleBold, SH_TabBar_PreferNoArrows, SH_ScrollBar_LeftClickAbsolutePosition, SH_ListViewExpand_SelectMouseType, SH_UnderlineAccelerator, SH_ToolButton_Uses3D, SH_CustomBase = 0xf0000000 }
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • virtual int styleHint ( StyleHint stylehint, const TQWidget * widget = 0, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default, TQStyleHintReturn * returnData = 0 ) const = 0
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • enum StylePixmap { SP_TitleBarMinButton, SP_TitleBarMaxButton, SP_TitleBarCloseButton, SP_TitleBarNormalButton, SP_TitleBarShadeButton, SP_TitleBarUnshadeButton, SP_DockWindowCloseButton, SP_MessageBoxInformation, SP_MessageBoxWarning, SP_MessageBoxCritical, SP_MessageBoxQuestion, SP_CustomBase = 0xf0000000 }
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • virtual TQPixmap stylePixmap ( StylePixmap stylepixmap, const TQWidget * widget = 0, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const = 0
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • int defaultFrameWidth () const  (obsolete)
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • void tabbarMetrics ( const TQWidget * t, int & hf, int & vf, int & ov ) const  (obsolete)
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQSize scrollBarExtent () const  (obsolete)
                                                            • 
-
                                                          
-
                                                          Static Public Members
                                                          
-
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQRect visualRect ( const TQRect & logical, const TQWidget * w )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQRect visualRect ( const TQRect & logical, const TQRect & bounding )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          
-
                                                          Detailed Description
                                                          
-
-
-The TQStyle class specifies the look and feel of a GUI.
-
-
                                                           A large number of GUI elements are common to many widgets. The
-TQStyle class allows the look of these elements to be modified
-across all widgets that use the TQStyle functions. It also
-provides two feel options: Motif and Windows.
-
                                                           Although it is not possible to fully enumerate the look of
-graphical elements and the feel of widgets in a GUI, TQStyle
-provides a considerable amount of control and customisability.
-
                                                           In TQt 1.x the look and feel option for widgets was specified by a
-single value: the GUIStyle. Starting with TQt 2.0, this notion was
-expanded to allow the look to be specified by virtual drawing
-functions.
-
                                                           Derived classes may reimplement some or all of the drawing
-functions to modify the look of all widgets that use those
-functions.
-
                                                           Languages written from right to left (such as Arabic and Hebrew)
-usually also mirror the whole layout of widgets. If you design a
-style, you should take special care when drawing asymmetric
-elements to make sure that they also look correct in a mirrored
-layout. You can start your application with -reverse to check
-the mirrored layout. Also notice, that for a reversed layout, the
-light usually comes from top right instead of top left.
-
                                                           The actual reverse layout is performed automatically when
-possible. However, for the sake of flexibility, the translation
-cannot be performed everywhere. The documentation for each
-function in the TQStyle API states whether the function
-expects/returns logical or screen coordinates. Using logical
-coordinates (in ComplexControls, for example) provides great
-flexibility in controlling the look of a widget. Use visualRect()
-when necessary to translate logical coordinates into screen
-coordinates for drawing.
-
                                                           In TQt versions prior to 3.0, if you wanted a low level route into
-changing the appearance of a widget, you would reimplement
-polish(). With the new 3.0 style engine the recommended approach
-is to reimplement the draw functions, for example drawItem(),
-drawPrimitive(), drawControl(), drawControlMask(),
-drawComplexControl() and drawComplexControlMask(). Each of these
-functions is called with a range of parameters that provide
-information that you can use to determine how to draw them, e.g.
-style flags, rectangle, color group, etc.
-
                                                           For information on changing elements of an existing style or
-creating your own style see the Style
-    overview.
-
                                                           Styles can also be created as plugins.
-
                                                          See also Widget Appearance and Style.
-
-
                                                          Member Type Documentation
                                                          
-
                                                          TQStyle::ComplexControl
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This enum represents a ComplexControl. ComplexControls have
-different behaviour depending upon where the user clicks on them
-or which keys are pressed.
-
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CC_SpinWidget
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CC_ComboBox
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CC_ScrollBar
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CC_Slider
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CC_ToolButton
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CC_TitleBar
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CC_ListView
-
                                                           
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CC_CustomBase - base value for custom ControlElements. All
-values above this are reserved for custom use. Therefore,
-custom values must be greater than this value.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also SubControl and drawComplexControl().
-
-
                                                          TQStyle::ContentsType
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This enum represents a ContentsType. It is used to calculate sizes
-for the contents of various widgets.
-
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CT_PushButton
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CT_CheckBox
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CT_RadioButton
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CT_ToolButton
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CT_ComboBox
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CT_Splitter
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CT_DockWindow
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CT_ProgressBar
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CT_PopupMenuItem
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CT_TabBarTab
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CT_Slider
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CT_Header
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CT_LineEdit
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CT_MenuBar
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CT_SpinBox
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CT_SizeGrip
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CT_TabWidget
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CT_DialogButtons
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CT_CustomBase - base value for custom ControlElements. All
-values above this are reserved for custom use. Custom values
-must be greater than this value.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also sizeFromContents().
-
-
                                                          TQStyle::ControlElement
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This enum represents a ControlElement. A ControlElement is part of
-a widget that performs some action or displays information to the
-user.
-
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CE_PushButton - the bevel and default indicator of a TQPushButton.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CE_PushButtonLabel - the label (iconset with text or pixmap)
-of a TQPushButton.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CE_CheckBox - the indicator of a TQCheckBox.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CE_CheckBoxLabel - the label (text or pixmap) of a TQCheckBox.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CE_RadioButton - the indicator of a TQRadioButton.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CE_RadioButtonLabel - the label (text or pixmap) of a TQRadioButton.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CE_TabBarTab - the tab within a TQTabBar (a TQTab).
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CE_TabBarLabel - the label within a TQTab.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CE_ProgressBarGroove - the groove where the progress
-indicator is drawn in a TQProgressBar.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CE_ProgressBarContents - the progress indicator of a TQProgressBar.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CE_ProgressBarLabel - the text label of a TQProgressBar.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CE_PopupMenuItem - a menu item in a TQPopupMenu.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CE_PopupMenuScroller - scrolling areas in a popumenu when the
-style supports scrolling.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CE_PopupMenuHorizontalExtra - extra frame area set aside with PM_PopupMenuFrameHorizontalExtra
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CE_PopupMenuVerticalExtra - extra frame area set aside with PM_PopupMenuFrameVerticalExtra
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CE_MenuBarItem - a menu item in a TQMenuBar.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CE_ToolButtonLabel - a tool button's label.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CE_MenuBarEmptyArea - the empty area of a TQMenuBar.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CE_DockWindowEmptyArea - the empty area of a TQDockWindow.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CE_ToolBoxTab - the toolbox's tab area
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CE_HeaderLabel - the header's label
-
                                                          • TQStyle::CE_CustomBase - base value for custom ControlElements. All values above
-this are reserved for custom use. Therefore, custom values must be
-greater than this value.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also drawControl().
-
-
                                                          TQStyle::PixelMetric
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This enum represents a PixelMetric. A PixelMetric is a style
-dependent size represented as a single pixel value.
-
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_ButtonMargin - amount of whitespace between pushbutton
-labels and the frame.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_ButtonDefaultIndicator - width of the default-button indicator frame.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_MenuButtonIndicator - width of the menu button indicator
-proportional to the widget height.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_ButtonShiftHorizontal - horizontal contents shift of a
-button when the button is down.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_ButtonShiftVertical - vertical contents shift of a button when the
-button is down.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_DefaultFrameWidth - default frame width, usually 2.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_SpinBoxFrameWidth - frame width of a spin box.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_MDIFrameWidth - frame width of an MDI window.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_MDIMinimizedWidth - width of a minimized MSI window.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_MaximumDragDistance - Some feels require the scrollbar or
-other sliders to jump back to the original position when the
-mouse pointer is too far away while dragging. A value of -1
-disables this behavior.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_ScrollBarExtent - width of a vertical scrollbar and the
-height of a horizontal scrollbar.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_ScrollBarSliderMin - the minimum height of a vertical
-scrollbar's slider and the minimum width of a horiztonal
-scrollbar slider.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_SliderThickness - total slider thickness.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_SliderControlThickness - thickness of the slider handle.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_SliderLength - length of the slider.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_SliderTickmarkOffset - the offset between the tickmarks
-and the slider.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_SliderSpaceAvailable - the available space for the slider to move.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_DockWindowSeparatorExtent - width of a separator in a
-horiztonal dock window and the height of a separator in a
-vertical dock window.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_DockWindowHandleExtent - width of the handle in a
-horizontal dock window and the height of the handle in a
-vertical dock window.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_DockWindowFrameWidth - frame width of a dock window.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_MenuBarFrameWidth - frame width of a menubar.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_MenuBarItemSpacing - spacing between menubar items.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_ToolBarItemSpacing - spacing between toolbar items.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_TabBarTabOverlap - number of pixels the tabs should overlap.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_TabBarTabHSpace - extra space added to the tab width.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_TabBarTabVSpace - extra space added to the tab height.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_TabBarBaseHeight - height of the area between the tab bar
-and the tab pages.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_TabBarBaseOverlap - number of pixels the tab bar overlaps
-the tab bar base.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_TabBarScrollButtonWidth
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_TabBarTabShiftHorizontal - horizontal pixel shift when a
-tab is selected.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_TabBarTabShiftVertical - vertical pixel shift when a
-tab is selected.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_ProgressBarChunkWidth - width of a chunk in a progress bar indicator.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_SplitterWidth - width of a splitter.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_TitleBarHeight - height of the title bar.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_PopupMenuFrameHorizontalExtra - additional border, e.g. for panels
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_PopupMenuFrameVerticalExtra - additional border, e.g. for panels
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_IndicatorWidth - width of a check box indicator.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_IndicatorHeight - height of a checkbox indicator.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_ExclusiveIndicatorWidth - width of a radio button indicator.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_ExclusiveIndicatorHeight - height of a radio button indicator.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_PopupMenuScrollerHeight - height of the scroller area in a popupmenu.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_PopupMenuScrollerHeight - height of the scroller area in a popupmenu.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_CheckListButtonSize - area (width/height) of the
-checkbox/radiobutton in a TQCheckListItem
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_CheckListControllerSize - area (width/height) of the
-controller in a TQCheckListItem
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_DialogButtonsSeparator - distance between buttons in a dialog buttons widget.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_DialogButtonsButtonWidth - minimum width of a button in a dialog buttons widget.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_DialogButtonsButtonHeight - minimum height of a button in a dialog buttons widget.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_HeaderMarkSize
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_HeaderGripMargin
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_HeaderMargin
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PM_CustomBase - base value for custom ControlElements. All
-values above this are reserved for custom use. Therefore,
-custom values must be greater than this value.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also pixelMetric().
-
-
                                                          TQStyle::PrimitiveElement
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This enum represents the PrimitiveElements of a style. A
-PrimitiveElement is a common GUI element, such as a checkbox
-indicator or pushbutton bevel.
-
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_ButtonCommand - button used to initiate an action, for
-example, a TQPushButton.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_ButtonDefault - this button is the default button, e.g.
-in a dialog.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_ButtonBevel - generic button bevel.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_ButtonTool - tool button, for example, a TQToolButton.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_ButtonDropDown - drop down button, for example, a tool
-button that displays a popup menu, for example, TQPopupMenu.
-
                                                           
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_FocusRect - generic focus indicator.
-
                                                           
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_ArrowUp - up arrow.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_ArrowDown - down arrow.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_ArrowRight - right arrow.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_ArrowLeft - left arrow.
-
                                                           
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_SpinWidgetUp - up symbol for a spin widget, for example a
-TQSpinBox.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_SpinWidgetDown - down symbol for a spin widget.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_SpinWidgetPlus - increase symbol for a spin widget.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_SpinWidgetMinus - decrease symbol for a spin widget.
-
                                                           
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_Indicator - on/off indicator, for example, a TQCheckBox.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_IndicatorMask - bitmap mask for an indicator.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_ExclusiveIndicator - exclusive on/off indicator, for
-example, a TQRadioButton.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_ExclusiveIndicatorMask - bitmap mask for an exclusive indicator.
-
                                                           
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_DockWindowHandle - tear off handle for dock windows and
-toolbars, for example TQDockWindows and TQToolBars.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_DockWindowSeparator - item separator for dock window and
-toolbar contents.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_DockWindowResizeHandle - resize handle for dock windows.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_Splitter - splitter handle; see also TQSplitter.
-
                                                           
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_Panel - generic panel frame; see also TQFrame.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_PanelPopup - panel frame for popup windows/menus; see also
-TQPopupMenu.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_PanelMenuBar - panel frame for menu bars.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_PanelDockWindow - panel frame for dock windows and toolbars.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_PanelTabWidget - panel frame for tab widgets.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_PanelLineEdit - panel frame for line edits.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_PanelGroupBox - panel frame for group boxes.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_TabBarBase - area below tabs in a tab widget, for example,
-TQTab.
-
                                                           
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_HeaderSection - section of a list or table header; see also
-TQHeader.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_HeaderArrow - arrow used to indicate sorting on a list or table
-header
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_StatusBarSection - section of a status bar; see also
-TQStatusBar.
-
                                                           
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_GroupBoxFrame - frame around a group box; see also
-TQGroupBox.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_WindowFrame - frame around a MDI window or a docking window
-
                                                           
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_Separator - generic separator.
-
                                                           
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_SizeGrip - window resize handle; see also TQSizeGrip.
-
                                                           
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_CheckMark - generic check mark; see also TQCheckBox.
-
                                                           
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_ScrollBarAddLine - scrollbar line increase indicator
-(i.e. scroll down); see also TQScrollBar.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_ScrollBarSubLine - scrollbar line decrease indicator (i.e. scroll up).
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_ScrollBarAddPage - scolllbar page increase indicator (i.e. page down).
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_ScrollBarSubPage - scrollbar page decrease indicator (i.e. page up).
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_ScrollBarSlider - scrollbar slider
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_ScrollBarFirst - scrollbar first line indicator (i.e. home).
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_ScrollBarLast - scrollbar last line indicator (i.e. end).
-
                                                           
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_ProgressBarChunk - section of a progress bar indicator; see
-also TQProgressBar.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_CheckListController - controller part of a listview item
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_CheckListIndicator - checkbox part of a listview item
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_CheckListExclusiveIndicator - radiobutton part of a listview item
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_RubberBand - rubber band used in such things as iconview
-
                                                          • TQStyle::PE_CustomBase - base value for custom PrimitiveElements.
-All values above this are reserved for custom use. Custom
-values must be greater than this value.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also drawPrimitive().
-
-
                                                          TQStyle::StyleFlags
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This enum represents flags for drawing PrimitiveElements. Not all
-primitives use all of these flags. Note that these flags may mean
-different things to different primitives. For an explanation of
-the relationship between primitives and their flags, as well as
-the different meanings of the flags, see the Style overview.
-
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::Style_Default
-
                                                          • TQStyle::Style_Enabled
-
                                                          • TQStyle::Style_Raised
-
                                                          • TQStyle::Style_Sunken
-
                                                          • TQStyle::Style_Off
-
                                                          • TQStyle::Style_NoChange
-
                                                          • TQStyle::Style_On
-
                                                          • TQStyle::Style_Down
-
                                                          • TQStyle::Style_Horizontal
-
                                                          • TQStyle::Style_HasFocus
-
                                                          • TQStyle::Style_Top
-
                                                          • TQStyle::Style_Bottom
-
                                                          • TQStyle::Style_FocusAtBorder
-
                                                          • TQStyle::Style_AutoRaise
-
                                                          • TQStyle::Style_MouseOver
-
                                                          • TQStyle::Style_Up
-
                                                          • TQStyle::Style_Selected
-
                                                          • TQStyle::Style_HasFocus
-
                                                          • TQStyle::Style_Active
-
                                                          • TQStyle::Style_ButtonDefault
-
                                                           
                                                          See also drawPrimitive().
-
-
                                                          TQStyle::StyleHint
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This enum represents a StyleHint. A StyleHint is a general look
-and/or feel hint.
-
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_EtchDisabledText - disabled text is "etched" like Windows.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_GUIStyle - the GUI style to use.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_BackgroundMode - the background mode for a
-TQScrollBar. Possible values are any of those in the BackgroundMode enum.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_MiddleClickAbsolutePosition - a boolean value.
-If TRUE, middle clicking on a scrollbar causes the slider to
-jump to that position. If FALSE, the middle clicking is
-ignored.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_LeftClickAbsolutePosition - a boolean value.
-If TRUE, left clicking on a scrollbar causes the slider to
-jump to that position. If FALSE, the left clicking will
-behave as appropriate for each control.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_ScrollWhenPointerLeavesControl - a boolean
-value. If TRUE, when clicking a scrollbar SubControl, holding
-the mouse button down and moving the pointer outside the
-SubControl, the scrollbar continues to scroll. If FALSE, the
-scollbar stops scrolling when the pointer leaves the
-SubControl.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_TabBar_Alignment - the alignment for tabs in a
-TQTabWidget. Possible values are TQt::AlignLeft, TQt::AlignCenter and TQt::AlignRight.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_Header_ArrowAlignment - the placement of the sorting
-indicator may appear in list or table headers. Possible values
-are TQt::Left or TQt::Right.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_Slider_SnapToValue - sliders snap to values while moving,
-like Windows
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_Slider_SloppyKeyEvents - key presses handled in a sloppy
-manner, i.e. left on a vertical slider subtracts a line.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_ProgressDialog_CenterCancelButton - center button on
-progress dialogs, like Motif, otherwise right aligned.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_ProgressDialog_TextLabelAlignment - TQt::AlignmentFlags --
-text label alignment in progress dialogs; Center on windows,
-Auto|VCenter otherwise.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_PrintDialog_RightAlignButtons - right align buttons in
-the print dialog, like Windows.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_MainWindow_SpaceBelowMenuBar - 1 or 2 pixel space between
-the menubar and the dockarea, like Windows.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_FontDialog_SelectAssociatedText - select the text in the
-line edit, or when selecting an item from the listbox, or when
-the line edit receives focus, like Windows.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_AllowActiveAndDisabled - allows disabled menu
-items to be active.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_SpaceActivatesItem - pressing Space activates
-the item, like Motif.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_SubMenuPopupDelay - the number of milliseconds
-to wait before opening a submenu; 256 on windows, 96 on Motif.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_Scrollable - whether popupmenu's must support
-scrolling.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_SloppySubMenus - whether popupmenu's must support
-sloppy submenu; as implemented on Mac OS.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_ScrollView_FrameOnlyAroundContents - whether scrollviews
-draw their frame only around contents (like Motif), or around
-contents, scrollbars and corner widgets (like Windows).
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_MenuBar_AltKeyNavigation - menubars items are navigable
-by pressing Alt, followed by using the arrow keys to select
-the desired item.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_ComboBox_ListMouseTracking - mouse tracking in combobox
-dropdown lists.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_MouseTracking - mouse tracking in popup menus.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_MenuBar_MouseTracking - mouse tracking in menubars.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_ItemView_ChangeHighlightOnFocus - gray out selected items
-when losing focus.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_Widget_ShareActivation - turn on sharing activation with
-floating modeless dialogs.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_TabBar_SelectMouseType - which type of mouse event should
-cause a tab to be selected.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_ListViewExpand_SelectMouseType - which type of mouse event should
-cause a listview expansion to be selected.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_TabBar_PreferNoArrows - whether a tabbar should suggest a size
-to prevent scoll arrows.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_ComboBox_Popup - allows popups as a combobox dropdown
-menu.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_Workspace_FillSpaceOnMaximize - the workspace should
-maximize the client area.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_TitleBar_NoBorder - the titlebar has no border
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_StopMouseOverSlider - stops autorepeat when
-slider reaches mouse
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_BlinkCursorWhenTextSelected - whether cursor should blink
-when text is selected
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_RichText_FullWidthSelection - whether richtext selections
-should extend the full width of the document.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_GroupBox_TextLabelVerticalAlignment - how to vertically align a
-groupbox's text label.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_GroupBox_TextLabelColor - how to paint a groupbox's text label.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_DialogButtons_DefaultButton - which buttons gets the
-default status in a dialog's button widget.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_CustomBase - base value for custom ControlElements. All
-values above this are reserved for custom use. Therefore,
-custom values must be greater than this value.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_ToolButton_Uses3D - indicates whether TQToolButtons should
-use a 3D frame when the mouse is over them
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_ToolBox_SelectedPageTitleBold - Boldness of the selected
-page title in a TQToolBox.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_LineEdit_PasswordCharacter - The TQChar Unicode character
-to be used for passwords.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_Table_GridLineColor
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SH_UnderlineAccelerator - whether accelerators are underlined
-
                                                           
                                                          See also styleHint().
-
-
                                                          TQStyle::StylePixmap
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This enum represents a StylePixmap. A StylePixmap is a pixmap that
-can follow some existing GUI style or guideline.
-
                                                           
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SP_TitleBarMinButton - minimize button on titlebars. For
-example, in a TQWorkspace.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SP_TitleBarMaxButton - maximize button on titlebars.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SP_TitleBarCloseButton - close button on titlebars.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SP_TitleBarNormalButton - normal (restore) button on titlebars.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SP_TitleBarShadeButton - shade button on titlebars.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SP_TitleBarUnshadeButton - unshade button on titlebars.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SP_MessageBoxInformation - the 'information' icon.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SP_MessageBoxWarning - the 'warning' icon.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SP_MessageBoxCritical - the 'critical' icon.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SP_MessageBoxQuestion - the 'question' icon.
-
                                                           
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SP_DockWindowCloseButton - close button on dock windows;
-see also TQDockWindow.
-
                                                           
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SP_CustomBase - base value for custom ControlElements. All
-values above this are reserved for custom use. Therefore,
-custom values must be greater than this value.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also stylePixmap().
-
-
                                                          TQStyle::SubControl
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This enum represents a SubControl within a ComplexControl.
-
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_None - special value that matches no other SubControl.
-
                                                           
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarAddLine - scrollbar add line (i.e. down/right
-arrow); see also TQScrollbar.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSubLine - scrollbar sub line (i.e. up/left arrow).
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarAddPage - scrollbar add page (i.e. page down).
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSubPage - scrollbar sub page (i.e. page up).
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarFirst - scrollbar first line (i.e. home).
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarLast - scrollbar last line (i.e. end).
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSlider - scrollbar slider handle.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarGroove - special subcontrol which contains the
-area in which the slider handle may move.
-
                                                           
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_SpinWidgetUp - spinwidget up/increase; see also TQSpinBox.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_SpinWidgetDown - spinwidget down/decrease.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_SpinWidgetFrame - spinwidget frame.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_SpinWidgetEditField - spinwidget edit field.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_SpinWidgetButtonField - spinwidget button field.
-
                                                           
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_ComboBoxEditField - combobox edit field; see also TQComboBox.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_ComboBoxArrow - combobox arrow
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_ComboBoxFrame - combobox frame
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_ComboBoxListBoxPopup - combobox list box
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_SliderGroove - special subcontrol which contains the area
-in which the slider handle may move.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_SliderHandle - slider handle.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_SliderTickmarks - slider tickmarks.
-
                                                           
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_ToolButton - tool button; see also TQToolbutton.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_ToolButtonMenu - subcontrol for opening a popup menu in a
-tool button; see also TQPopupMenu.
-
                                                           
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_TitleBarSysMenu - system menu button (i.e. restore, close, etc.).
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_TitleBarMinButton - minimize button.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_TitleBarMaxButton - maximize button.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_TitleBarCloseButton - close button.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_TitleBarLabel - window title label.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_TitleBarNormalButton - normal (restore) button.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_TitleBarShadeButton - shade button.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_TitleBarUnshadeButton - unshade button.
-
                                                           
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_ListView - the list view area.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_ListViewBranch - (internal)
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_ListViewExpand - expand item (i.e. show/hide child items).
-
                                                           
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SC_All - special value that matches all SubControls.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also ComplexControl.
-
-
                                                          TQStyle::SubRect
                                                          
-
-
                                                           This enum represents a sub-area of a widget. Style implementations
-would use these areas to draw the different parts of a widget.
-
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SR_PushButtonContents - area containing the label (iconset
-with text or pixmap).
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SR_PushButtonFocusRect - area for the focus rect (usually
-larger than the contents rect).
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SR_CheckBoxIndicator - area for the state indicator (e.g. check mark).
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SR_CheckBoxContents - area for the label (text or pixmap).
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SR_CheckBoxFocusRect - area for the focus indicator.
-
                                                           
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SR_RadioButtonIndicator - area for the state indicator.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SR_RadioButtonContents - area for the label.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SR_RadioButtonFocusRect - area for the focus indicator.
-
                                                           
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SR_ComboBoxFocusRect - area for the focus indicator.
-
                                                           
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SR_SliderFocusRect - area for the focus indicator.
-
                                                           
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SR_DockWindowHandleRect - area for the tear-off handle.
-
                                                           
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SR_ProgressBarGroove - area for the groove.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SR_ProgressBarContents - area for the progress indicator.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SR_ProgressBarLabel - area for the text label.
-
                                                           
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SR_ToolButtonContents - area for the tool button's label.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonAccept - area for a dialog's accept button.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonReject - area for a dialog's reject button.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonApply - area for a dialog's apply button.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonHelp - area for a dialog's help button.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonAll - area for a dialog's all button.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonRetry - area for a dialog's retry button.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonAbort - area for a dialog's abort button.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonIgnore - area for a dialog's ignore button.
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonCustom - area for a dialog's custom widget area (in button row).
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SR_ToolBoxTabContents - area for a toolbox tab's icon and label
-
                                                          • TQStyle::SR_CustomBase - base value for custom ControlElements. All values above
-this are reserved for custom use. Therefore, custom values must be
-greater than this value.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also subRect().
-
-
                                                          Member Function Documentation
                                                          
-
                                                          TQStyle::TQStyle ()
-
                                                          
-Constructs a TQStyle.
-
-
                                                          TQStyle::~TQStyle () [virtual]
-
                                                          
-Destroys the style and frees all allocated resources.
-
-
                                                          int TQStyle::defaultFrameWidth () const
-
                                                          
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                                           
-
                                                          void TQStyle::drawComplexControl ( ComplexControl control, TQPainter * p, const TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & r, const TQColorGroup & cg, SFlags how = Style_Default, SCFlags sub = SC_All, SCFlags subActive = SC_None, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const [pure virtual]
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Draws the ComplexControl control using the painter p in the
-area r. Colors are used from the color group cg. The sub
-argument specifies which SubControls to draw. Multiple SubControls
-can be OR'ed together. The subActive argument specifies which
-SubControl is active.
-
                                                           The rect r should be in logical coordinates. Reimplementations
-of this function should use visualRect() to change the logical
-coordinates into screen coordinates when using drawPrimitive() and
-drawControl().
-
                                                           The how argument is used to control how the ComplexControl is
-drawn. Multiple flags can OR'ed together. See the table below for
-an explanation of which flags are used with the various
-ComplexControls.
-
                                                           The widget argument is a pointer to a TQWidget or one of its
-subclasses. The widget can be cast to the appropriate type based
-on the value of control. The opt argument can be used to
-pass extra information required when drawing the ComplexControl.
-Note that opt may be the default value even for ComplexControls
-that can make use of the extra options. See the table below for
-the appropriate widget and opt usage:
-
                                                           
                                                          
-
                                                           ComplexControl
                                                          & Widget Cast
-                                                          		Style Flags
-Notes
-Options
-Notes
-
                                                            CC_SpinWidget(const TQSpinWidget *)
-Style_Enabled Set if the spinwidget is enabled.
- Unused.
-  
-
                                                           Style_HasFocus Set if the spinwidget has input focus.
-
                                                            CC_ComboBox(const TQComboBox *)
-Style_Enabled Set if the combobox is enabled.
- Unused.
-  
-
                                                           Style_HasFocus Set if the combobox has input focus.
-
                                                            CC_ScrollBar(const TQScrollBar *)
-Style_Enabled Set if the scrollbar is enabled.
- Unused.
-  
-
                                                           Style_HasFocus Set if the scrollbar has input focus.
-
                                                            CC_Slider(const TQSlider *)
-Style_Enabled Set if the slider is enabled.
- Unused.
-  
-
                                                           Style_HasFocus Set if the slider has input focus.
-
                                                            CC_ToolButton(const TQToolButton *)
-Style_Enabled Set if the toolbutton is enabled.
- TQStyleOption ( ArrowType t )
-
- When the tool button only contains an arrow, t is the
-arrow's type.
-
                                                           Style_HasFocus Set if the toolbutton has input focus.
-
                                                           Style_Down Set if the toolbutton is down (ie. mouse
-button or space pressed).
-
                                                           Style_On Set if the toolbutton is a toggle button
-and is toggled on.
-
                                                           Style_AutoRaise Set if the toolbutton has auto-raise enabled.
-
                                                           Style_Raised Set if the button is not down, not on and doesn't
-contain the mouse when auto-raise is enabled.
-
                                                           CC_TitleBar(const TQWidget *)
-Style_Enabled Set if the titlebar is enabled.
-Unused.
- 
-
                                                           CC_ListView(const TQListView *)
-Style_Enabled Set if the titlebar is enabled.
-TQStyleOption ( TQListViewItem *item )
-
-item is the item that needs branches drawn
-
                                                          
-
                                                           
                                                          See also ComplexControl and SubControl.
-
-
                                                          void TQStyle::drawComplexControlMask ( ComplexControl control, TQPainter * p, const TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & r, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const [pure virtual]
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Draw a bitmask for the ComplexControl control using the painter
-p in the area r. See drawComplexControl() for an explanation
-of the use of the widget and opt arguments.
-
                                                           The rect r should be in logical coordinates. Reimplementations
-of this function should use visualRect() to change the logical
-corrdinates into screen coordinates when using drawPrimitive() and
-drawControl().
-
                                                           
                                                          See also drawComplexControl() and ComplexControl.
-
-
                                                          void TQStyle::drawControl ( ControlElement element, TQPainter * p, const TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & r, const TQColorGroup & cg, SFlags how = Style_Default, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const [pure virtual]
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Draws the ControlElement element using the painter p in the
-area r. Colors are used from the color group cg.
-
                                                           The rect r should be in screen coordinates.
-
                                                           The how argument is used to control how the ControlElement is
-drawn. Multiple flags can be OR'ed together. See the table below
-for an explanation of which flags are used with the various
-ControlElements.
-
                                                           The widget argument is a pointer to a TQWidget or one of its
-subclasses. The widget can be cast to the appropriate type based
-on the value of element. The opt argument can be used to
-pass extra information required when drawing the ControlElement.
-Note that opt may be the default value even for ControlElements
-that can make use of the extra options. See the table below for
-the appropriate widget and opt usage:
-
                                                           
                                                          
-
                                                           ControlElement
                                                          & Widget Cast
-                                                          		Style Flags
-Notes
-Options
-Notes
-
                                                            CE_PushButton(const TQPushButton *)
-
                                                           and
-
                                                           CE_PushButtonLabel(const TQPushButton *)
-
                                                          		Style_Enabled Set if the button is enabled.
- Unused.
-  
-
                                                           Style_HasFocus Set if the button has input focus.
-
                                                           Style_Raised Set if the button is not down, not on and not flat.
-
                                                           Style_On Set if the button is a toggle button and toggled on.
-
                                                           Style_Down Set if the button is down (i.e., the mouse button or
-space bar is pressed on the button).
-
                                                           Style_ButtonDefault Set if the button is a default button.
-
                                                            CE_CheckBox(const TQCheckBox *)
-
                                                           and
-
                                                           CE_CheckBoxLabel(const TQCheckBox *)
-
                                                           
                                                          		Style_Enabled Set if the checkbox is enabled.
- Unused.
-  
-
                                                           Style_HasFocus Set if the checkbox has input focus.
-
                                                           Style_On Set if the checkbox is checked.
-
                                                           Style_Off Set if the checkbox is not checked.
-
                                                           Style_NoChange Set if the checkbox is in the NoChange state.
-
                                                           Style_Down Set if the checkbox is down (i.e., the mouse button or
-space bar is pressed on the button).
-
                                                            CE_RadioButton(const TQRadioButton *)
-
                                                           and
-
                                                           CE_RadioButtonLabel(const TQRadioButton *)
-
                                                          		Style_Enabled Set if the radiobutton is enabled.
- Unused.
-  
-
                                                           Style_HasFocus Set if the radiobutton has input focus.
-
                                                           Style_On Set if the radiobutton is checked.
-
                                                           Style_Off Set if the radiobutton is not checked.
-
                                                           Style_Down Set if the radiobutton is down (i.e., the mouse
-button or space bar is pressed on the radiobutton).
-
                                                            CE_TabBarTab(const TQTabBar *)
-
                                                           and
-
                                                           CE_TabBarLabel(const TQTabBar *)
-
                                                           
                                                          		Style_Enabled Set if the tabbar and tab is enabled.
- TQStyleOption ( TQTab *t )
-
- t is the TQTab being drawn.
-
                                                           Style_Selected Set if the tab is the current tab.
-
                                                            CE_ProgressBarGroove(const TQProgressBar *)
-
                                                           and
-
                                                           CE_ProgressBarContents(const TQProgressBar *)
-
                                                           and
-
                                                           CE_ProgressBarLabel(const TQProgressBar *)
-
                                                           
                                                          		Style_Enabled Set if the progressbar is enabled.
- Unused.
-  
-
                                                           Style_HasFocus Set if the progressbar has input focus.
-
                                                            CE_PopupMenuItem(const TQPopupMenu *)
-Style_Enabled Set if the menuitem is enabled.
- TQStyleOption ( TQMenuItem *mi, int tabwidth, int maxpmwidth )
-
-mi is the menu item being drawn. TQMenuItem is currently an
-internal class.
-
                                                           Style_Active Set if the menuitem is the current item.
-tabwidth is the width of the tab column where key accelerators
-are drawn.
-
                                                           Style_Down Set if the menuitem is down (i.e., the mouse button
-or space bar is pressed).
-maxpmwidth is the maximum width of the check column where
-checkmarks and iconsets are drawn.
-
                                                            CE_MenuBarItem(const TQMenuBar *)
-Style_Enabled Set if the menuitem is enabled
- TQStyleOption ( TQMenuItem *mi )
-
- mi is the menu item being drawn.
-
                                                           Style_Active Set if the menuitem is the current item.
-
                                                           Style_Down Set if the menuitem is down (i.e., a mouse button or
-the space bar is pressed).
-
                                                           Style_HasFocus Set if the menubar has input focus.
-
                                                            CE_ToolButtonLabel(const TQToolButton *)
-Style_Enabled Set if the toolbutton is enabled.
- TQStyleOption ( ArrowType t )
-
- When the tool button only contains an arrow, t is the
-arrow's type.
-
                                                           Style_HasFocus Set if the toolbutton has input focus.
-
                                                           Style_Down Set if the toolbutton is down (i.e., a
-mouse button or the space is pressed).
-
                                                           Style_On Set if the toolbutton is a toggle button
-and is toggled on.
-
                                                           Style_AutoRaise Set if the toolbutton has auto-raise enabled.
-
                                                           Style_MouseOver Set if the mouse pointer is over the toolbutton.
-
                                                           Style_Raised Set if the button is not down, not on and doesn't
-contain the mouse when auto-raise is enabled.
-
                                                          
-
                                                           
                                                          See also ControlElement and StyleFlags.
-
-
                                                          void TQStyle::drawControlMask ( ControlElement element, TQPainter * p, const TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & r, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const [pure virtual]
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Draw a bitmask for the ControlElement element using the painter
-p in the area r. See drawControl() for an explanation of the
-use of the widget and opt arguments.
-
                                                           The rect r should be in screen coordinates.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also drawControl() and ControlElement.
-
-
                                                          void TQStyle::drawItem ( TQPainter * p, const TQRect & r, int flags, const TQColorGroup & g, bool enabled, const TQPixmap * pixmap, const TQString & text, int len = -1, const TQColor * penColor = 0 ) const [virtual]
-
                                                          
-Draws the text or pixmap in rectangle r using painter p and color group g. The pen color is specified with penColor. The enabled bool indicates whether or not the item is
-enabled; when reimplementing this bool should influence how the
-item is drawn. If len is -1 (the default) all the text is
-drawn; otherwise only the first len characters of text are
-drawn. The text is aligned and wrapped according to the alignment
-flags (see TQt::AlignmentFlags).
-
                                                           By default, if both the text and the pixmap are not null, the
-pixmap is drawn and the text is ignored.
-
-
                                                          void TQStyle::drawPrimitive ( PrimitiveElement pe, TQPainter * p, const TQRect & r, const TQColorGroup & cg, SFlags flags = Style_Default, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const [pure virtual]
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Draws the style PrimitiveElement pe using the painter p in
-the area r. Colors are used from the color group cg.
-
                                                           The rect r should be in screen coordinates.
-
                                                           The flags argument is used to control how the PrimitiveElement
-is drawn. Multiple flags can be OR'ed together.
-
                                                           For example, a pressed button would be drawn with the flags Style_Enabled and Style_Down.
-
                                                           The opt argument can be used to control how various
-PrimitiveElements are drawn. Note that opt may be the default
-value even for PrimitiveElements that make use of extra options.
-When opt is non-default, it is used as follows:
-
                                                           
                                                          
-
                                                           PrimitiveElement Options Notes
-
                                                           PE_FocusRect
-TQStyleOption ( const TQColor & bg )
-
-bg is the background color on which the focus rect is being drawn.
-
                                                            PE_Panel
- TQStyleOption ( int linewidth, int midlinewidth )
-
-linewidth is the line width for drawing the panel.
-
                                                           midlinewidth is the mid-line width for drawing the panel.
-
                                                            PE_PanelPopup
- TQStyleOption ( int linewidth, int midlinewidth )
-
-linewidth is the line width for drawing the panel.
-
                                                           midlinewidth is the mid-line width for drawing the panel.
-
                                                            PE_PanelMenuBar
- TQStyleOption ( int linewidth, int midlinewidth )
-
-linewidth is the line width for drawing the panel.
-
                                                           midlinewidth is the mid-line width for drawing the panel.
-
                                                            PE_PanelDockWindow
- TQStyleOption ( int linewidth, int midlinewidth )
-
-linewidth is the line width for drawing the panel.
-
                                                           midlinewidth is the mid-line width for drawing the panel.
-
                                                            PE_GroupBoxFrame
- TQStyleOption ( int linewidth, int midlinewidth, int shape, int shadow )
-
-linewidth is the line width for the group box.
-
                                                           midlinewidth is the mid-line width for the group box.
-
                                                           shape is the frame shape
-for the group box.
-
                                                           shadow is the frame shadow
-for the group box.
-
                                                          
-
                                                           For all other PrimitiveElements, opt is unused.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also StyleFlags.
-
-
                                                          Example: themes/wood.cpp.
-
                                                          TQRect TQStyle::itemRect ( TQPainter * p, const TQRect & r, int flags, bool enabled, const TQPixmap * pixmap, const TQString & text, int len = -1 ) const [virtual]
-
                                                          
-Returns the appropriate area (see below) within rectangle r in
-which to draw the text or pixmap using painter p. If len is -1 (the default) all the text is drawn; otherwise only
-the first len characters of text are drawn. The text is
-aligned in accordance with the alignment flags (see
-TQt::AlignmentFlags). The enabled bool indicates whether or
-not the item is enabled.
-
                                                           If r is larger than the area needed to render the text the
-rectangle that is returned will be offset within r in
-accordance with the alignment flags. For example if flags is
-AlignCenter the returned rectangle will be centered within r. If r is smaller than the area needed the rectangle that is
-returned will be larger than r (the smallest rectangle large
-enough to render the text or pixmap).
-
                                                           By default, if both the text and the pixmap are not null, the
-pixmap is drawn and the text is ignored.
-
-
                                                          int TQStyle::pixelMetric ( PixelMetric metric, const TQWidget * widget = 0 ) const [pure virtual]
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Returns the pixel metric for metric. The widget argument is
-a pointer to a TQWidget or one of its subclasses. The widget can be
-cast to the appropriate type based on the value of metric. Note
-that widget may be zero even for PixelMetrics that can make use
-of widget. See the table below for the appropriate widget
-casts:
-
                                                           
                                                          
-
                                                           PixelMetric Widget Cast
-
                                                           PM_SliderControlThickness    (const TQSlider *)
-
                                                           PM_SliderLength		    (const TQSlider *)
-
                                                           PM_SliderTickmarkOffset	    (const TQSlider *)
-
                                                           PM_SliderSpaceAvailable	    (const TQSlider *)
-
                                                           PM_TabBarTabOverlap	    (const TQTabBar *)
-
                                                           PM_TabBarTabHSpace	    (const TQTabBar *)
-
                                                           PM_TabBarTabVSpace	    (const TQTabBar *)
-
                                                           PM_TabBarBaseHeight	    (const TQTabBar *)
-
                                                           PM_TabBarBaseOverlap	    (const TQTabBar *)
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                          void TQStyle::polish ( TQWidget * ) [virtual]
-
                                                          
-Initializes the appearance of a widget.
-
                                                           This function is called for every widget at some point after it
-has been fully created but just before it is shown the very
-first time.
-
                                                           Reasonable actions in this function might be to call
-TQWidget::setBackgroundMode() for the widget. An example of highly
-unreasonable use would be setting the geometry! Reimplementing
-this function gives you a back-door through which you can change
-the appearance of a widget. With TQt 3.0's style engine you will
-rarely need to write your own polish(); instead reimplement
-drawItem(), drawPrimitive(), etc.
-
                                                           The TQWidget::inherits() function may provide enough information to
-allow class-specific customizations. But be careful not to
-hard-code things too much because new TQStyle subclasses are
-expected to work reasonably with all current and future
-widgets.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also unPolish().
-
-
                                                          void TQStyle::polish ( TQApplication * ) [virtual]
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Late initialization of the TQApplication object.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also unPolish().
-
-
                                                          void TQStyle::polish ( TQPalette & ) [virtual]
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           The style may have certain requirements for color palettes. In
-this function it has the chance to change the palette according to
-these requirements.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also TQPalette and TQApplication::setPalette().
-
-
                                                          void TQStyle::polishPopupMenu ( TQPopupMenu * ) [pure virtual]
-
                                                          
-Polishes the popup menu according to the GUI style. This usually
-means setting the mouse tracking
-(TQPopupMenu::setMouseTracking()) and whether the menu is
-checkable by default (TQPopupMenu::setCheckable()).
-
-
                                                          SubControl TQStyle::querySubControl ( ComplexControl control, const TQWidget * widget, const TQPoint & pos, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const [pure virtual]
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Returns the SubControl for widget at the point pos. The widget argument is a pointer to a TQWidget or one of its
-subclasses. The widget can be cast to the appropriate type based
-on the value of control. The opt argument can be used to
-pass extra information required when drawing the ComplexControl.
-Note that opt may be the default value even for ComplexControls
-that can make use of the extra options. See drawComplexControl()
-for an explanation of the widget and opt arguments.
-
                                                           Note that pos is passed in screen coordinates. When using
-querySubControlMetrics() to check for hits and misses, use
-visualRect() to change the logical coordinates into screen
-coordinates.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also drawComplexControl(), ComplexControl, SubControl, and querySubControlMetrics().
-
-
                                                          TQRect TQStyle::querySubControlMetrics ( ComplexControl control, const TQWidget * widget, SubControl subcontrol, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const [pure virtual]
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Returns the rect for the SubControl subcontrol for widget in
-logical coordinates.
-
                                                           The widget argument is a pointer to a TQWidget or one of its
-subclasses. The widget can be cast to the appropriate type based
-on the value of control. The opt argument can be used to
-pass extra information required when drawing the ComplexControl.
-Note that opt may be the default value even for ComplexControls
-that can make use of the extra options. See drawComplexControl()
-for an explanation of the widget and opt arguments.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also drawComplexControl(), ComplexControl, and SubControl.
-
-
                                                          TQSize TQStyle::scrollBarExtent () const
-
                                                          
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                                           
-
                                                          TQSize TQStyle::sizeFromContents ( ContentsType contents, const TQWidget * widget, const TQSize & contentsSize, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const [pure virtual]
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Returns the size of widget based on the contents size contentsSize.
-
                                                           The widget argument is a pointer to a TQWidget or one of its
-subclasses. The widget can be cast to the appropriate type based
-on the value of contents. The opt argument can be used to
-pass extra information required when calculating the size. Note
-that opt may be the default value even for ContentsTypes that
-can make use of the extra options. See the table below for the
-appropriate widget and opt usage:
-
                                                           
                                                          
-
                                                           ContentsType Widget Cast Options Notes
-
                                                           CT_PushButton (const TQPushButton *) Unused.  
-
                                                           CT_CheckBox (const TQCheckBox *) Unused.  
-
                                                           CT_RadioButton (const TQRadioButton *) Unused.  
-
                                                           CT_ToolButton (const TQToolButton *) Unused.  
-
                                                           CT_ComboBox (const TQComboBox *) Unused.  
-
                                                           CT_Splitter (const TQSplitter *) Unused.  
-
                                                           CT_DockWindow (const TQDockWindow *) Unused.  
-
                                                           CT_ProgressBar (const TQProgressBar *) Unused.  
-
                                                           CT_PopupMenuItem (const TQPopupMenu *)
-TQStyleOption ( TQMenuItem *mi )
-
-mi is the menu item to use when calculating the size.
-TQMenuItem is currently an internal class.
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                          int TQStyle::styleHint ( StyleHint stylehint, const TQWidget * widget = 0, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default, TQStyleHintReturn * returnData = 0 ) const [pure virtual]
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Returns the style hint stylehint for widget. Currently, widget, opt, and returnData are unused; they're included to
-allow for future enhancements.
-
                                                           For an explanation of the return value see StyleHint.
-
-
                                                          TQPixmap TQStyle::stylePixmap ( StylePixmap stylepixmap, const TQWidget * widget = 0, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const [pure virtual]
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Returns a pixmap for stylepixmap.
-
                                                           The opt argument can be used to pass extra information required
-when drawing the ControlElement. Note that opt may be the
-default value even for StylePixmaps that can make use of the extra
-options. Currently, the opt argument is unused.
-
                                                           The widget argument is a pointer to a TQWidget or one of its
-subclasses. The widget can be cast to the appropriate type based
-on the value of stylepixmap. See the table below for the
-appropriate widget casts:
-
                                                           
                                                          
-
                                                           StylePixmap Widget Cast
-
                                                           SP_TitleBarMinButton	(const TQWidget *)
-
                                                           SP_TitleBarMaxButton	(const TQWidget *)
-
                                                           SP_TitleBarCloseButton	(const TQWidget *)
-
                                                           SP_TitleBarNormalButton	(const TQWidget *)
-
                                                           SP_TitleBarShadeButton	(const TQWidget *)
-
                                                           SP_TitleBarUnshadeButton (const TQWidget *)
-
                                                           SP_DockWindowCloseButton (const TQDockWindow *)
-
                                                          
-
                                                           
                                                          See also StylePixmap.
-
-
                                                          TQRect TQStyle::subRect ( SubRect subrect, const TQWidget * widget ) const [pure virtual]
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Returns the sub-area subrect for the widget in logical
-coordinates.
-
                                                           The widget argument is a pointer to a TQWidget or one of its
-subclasses. The widget can be cast to the appropriate type based
-on the value of subrect. See the table below for the
-appropriate widget casts:
-
                                                           
                                                          
-
                                                           SubRect Widget Cast
-
                                                           SR_PushButtonContents	(const TQPushButton *)
-
                                                           SR_PushButtonFocusRect	(const TQPushButton *)
-
                                                           SR_CheckBoxIndicator	(const TQCheckBox *)
-
                                                           SR_CheckBoxContents	(const TQCheckBox *)
-
                                                           SR_CheckBoxFocusRect	(const TQCheckBox *)
-
                                                           SR_RadioButtonIndicator	(const TQRadioButton *)
-
                                                           SR_RadioButtonContents	(const TQRadioButton *)
-
                                                           SR_RadioButtonFocusRect	(const TQRadioButton *)
-
                                                           SR_ComboBoxFocusRect	(const TQComboBox *)
-
                                                           SR_DockWindowHandleRect	(const TQWidget *)
-
                                                           SR_ProgressBarGroove	(const TQProgressBar *)
-
                                                           SR_ProgressBarContents	(const TQProgressBar *)
-
                                                           SR_ProgressBarLabel	(const TQProgressBar *)
-
                                                          
-
                                                           The tear-off handle (SR_DockWindowHandleRect) for TQDockWindow
-is a private class. Use TQWidget::parentWidget() to access the
-TQDockWindow:
-
                                                           
                                                          -        if ( !widget->parentWidget() )
-            return;
-        const TQDockWindow *dw = (const TQDockWindow *) widget->parentWidget();
-    
                                                          
- 
-
                                                           
                                                          See also SubRect.
-
-
                                                          void TQStyle::tabbarMetrics ( const TQWidget * t, int & hf, int & vf, int & ov ) const
-
                                                          
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                                           
-
                                                          void TQStyle::unPolish ( TQWidget * ) [virtual]
-
                                                          
-Undoes the initialization of a widget's appearance.
-
                                                           This function is the counterpart to polish. It is called for every
-polished widget when the style is dynamically changed. The former
-style has to unpolish its settings before the new style can polish
-them again.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also polish().
-
-
                                                          void TQStyle::unPolish ( TQApplication * ) [virtual]
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Undoes the application polish.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also polish().
-
-
                                                          TQRect TQStyle::visualRect ( const TQRect & logical, const TQWidget * w ) [static]
-
                                                          
-
-
                                                           Returns the rect logical in screen coordinates. The bounding
-rect for widget w is used to perform the translation. This
-function is provided to aid style implementors in supporting
-right-to-left mode.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also TQApplication::reverseLayout().
-
-
                                                          TQRect TQStyle::visualRect ( const TQRect & logical, const TQRect & bounding ) [static]
-
                                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                           Returns the rect logical in screen coordinates. The rect bounding is used to perform the translation. This function is
-provided to aid style implementors in supporting right-to-left
-mode.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also TQApplication::reverseLayout().
-
-
-
                                                          
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                          
-
-
                                                          Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                          TQt 3.3.8
                                                          
-
                                                          
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qstylefactory-h.html b/doc/html/qstylefactory-h.html
index b29e34152..8d53bab19 100644
--- a/doc/html/qstylefactory-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qstylefactory-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qstylefactory.h Include File
+ntqstylefactory.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                          
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                          TQStyleFactory Class Reference
                                                          
-
-
                                                          The TQStyleFactory class creates TQStyle objects.
-More...
-
                                                          #include <qstylefactory.h>
-
                                                          List of all member functions.
-
                                                          Static Public Members
                                                          
-
                                                            
-
                                                          • TQStringList keys ()
                                                            • 
-
                                                          • TQStyle * create ( const TQString & key )
                                                            • 
-
                                                          
-
                                                          Detailed Description
                                                          
-
-
-The TQStyleFactory class creates TQStyle objects.
-
                                                           The style factory creates a TQStyle object for a given key with
-TQStyleFactory::create(key).
-
                                                           The styles are either built-in or dynamically loaded from a style
-plugin (see TQStylePlugin).
-
                                                           TQStyleFactory::keys() returns a list of valid keys, typically
-including "Windows", "Motif", "CDE", "MotifPlus", "Platinum",
-"SGI" and "Compact". Depending on the platform, "WindowsXP",
-"Aqua" or "Macintosh" may be available.
-
-
                                                          Member Function Documentation
                                                          
-
                                                          TQStyle * TQStyleFactory::create ( const TQString & key ) [static]
-
                                                          
-Creates a TQStyle object that matches key case-insensitively.
-This is either a built-in style, or a style from a style plugin.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also keys().
-
-
                                                          Example: themes/wood.cpp.
-
                                                          TQStringList TQStyleFactory::keys () [static]
-
                                                          
-Returns the list of keys this factory can create styles for.
-
                                                           
                                                          See also create().
-
-
                                                          Example: themes/themes.cpp.
-
-
                                                          
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                          
-
-
                                                          Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                          TQt 3.3.8
                                                          
-
                                                          
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qstyleoption-members.html b/doc/html/qstyleoption-members.html
index 48af1beba..0a8c9e097 100644
--- a/doc/html/qstyleoption-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qstyleoption-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qstyleoption.html b/doc/html/qstyleoption.html
index 3575890ae..874141c84 100644
--- a/doc/html/qstyleoption.html
+++ b/doc/html/qstyleoption.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                                          The TQStyleOption class specifies optional parameters for TQStyle functions.
 More...
-
                                                          #include <qstyle.h>
+
                                                          #include <ntqstyle.h>
 
                                                          List of all member functions.
 
                                                          Public Members
                                                          
 
                                                            
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                                            Detailed Description
                                                            
 
 
-The TQStyleOption class specifies optional parameters for TQStyle functions.
+The TQStyleOption class specifies optional parameters for TQStyle functions.
 
 
                                                             Some TQStyle functions take an optional argument specifying extra
 information that is required for a paritical primitive or control.
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ leaves the optional integer argument uninitialized.
 
                                                             When subclassing TQStyle, you must similarly only expect the
 default or documented arguments. The other arguments will have
 uninitialized values.
-
                                                             If you make your own TQStyle subclasses and your own widgets, you
+
                                                             If you make your own TQStyle subclasses and your own widgets, you
 can make a subclass of TQStyleOption to pass additional arguments
 to your TQStyle subclass. You will need to cast the "const
 TQStyleOption&" argument to your subclass, so be sure your style
@@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ has been called from your widget.
 
                                                            TQStyleOption::StyleOptionDefault
                                                            
 
 
                                                             This enum value can be passed as the optional argument to any
-TQStyle function.
+TQStyle function.
 
                                                              
 
                                                            • TQStyleOption::Default
 
                                                            
@@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ has been called from your widget.
 
                                                        
 
 
                                                         The default option. This can always be passed as the optional
-argument to TQStyle functions.
+argument to TQStyle functions.
 
 
                                                        TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption ( int in1 )
 
                                                        
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ midlinewidth.
 
 
                                                         Pass a menu item and two integers, m, in1 and in2.
 
-
                                                        TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption ( const TQColor & c )
+
                                                        TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption ( const TQColor & c )
 
                                                        
 
 
                                                         Pass a color, c.
@@ -166,22 +166,22 @@ midlinewidth.
 
 
                                                         Pass a TQCheckListItem, i.
 
-
                                                        TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption ( TQt::ArrowType a )
+
                                                        TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption ( TQt::ArrowType a )
 
                                                        
 
 
                                                         Pass an TQt::ArrowType, a.
 
-
                                                        TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption ( const TQRect & r )
+
                                                        TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption ( const TQRect & r )
 
                                                        
 
-
                                                         Pass a TQRect, r.
+
                                                         Pass a TQRect, r.
 
-
                                                        TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption ( TQWidget * w )
+
                                                        TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption ( TQWidget * w )
 
                                                        
 
-
                                                         Pass a TQWidget, w.
+
                                                         Pass a TQWidget, w.
 
-
                                                        TQt::ArrowType TQStyleOption::arrowType () const
+
                                                        TQt::ArrowType TQStyleOption::arrowType () const
 
                                                        
 
 
                                                         Returns an arrow type if the appropriate constructor was called;
@@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ otherwise the return value is undefined.
 
                                                         Returns a check list item if the appropriate constructor was
 called; otherwise the return value is undefined.
 
-
                                                        const TQColor & TQStyleOption::color () const
+
                                                        const TQColor & TQStyleOption::color () const
 
                                                        
 
 
                                                         Returns a color if the appropriate constructor was called;
@@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ otherwise the return value is undefined.
 
                                                        TQListViewItem * TQStyleOption::listViewItem () const
 
                                                        
 
-
                                                         Returns a TQListView item if the appropriate constructor was
+
                                                         Returns a TQListView item if the appropriate constructor was
 called; otherwise the return value is undefined.
 
 
                                                        int TQStyleOption::maxIconWidth () const
@@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ otherwise the return value is undefined.
 
                                                         Returns the mid-line width if the appropriate constructor was
 called; otherwise the return value is undefined.
 
-
                                                        TQRect TQStyleOption::rect () const
+
                                                        TQRect TQStyleOption::rect () const
 
                                                        
 
 
                                                         Returns a rectangle if the appropriate constructor was called;
@@ -269,7 +269,7 @@ otherwise the return value is undefined.
 
                                                        TQTab * TQStyleOption::tab () const
 
                                                        
 
-
                                                         Returns a TQTabBar tab if the appropriate constructor was called;
+
                                                         Returns a TQTabBar tab if the appropriate constructor was called;
 otherwise the return value is undefined.
 
 
                                                        int TQStyleOption::tabWidth () const
@@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ otherwise the return value is undefined.
 
                                                         Returns the tab indent width if the appropriate constructor was
 called; otherwise the return value is undefined.
 
-
                                                        TQWidget * TQStyleOption::widget () const
+
                                                        TQWidget * TQStyleOption::widget () const
 
                                                        
 
 
                                                         Returns a pointer to a widget if the appropriate constructor was called;
diff --git a/doc/html/qstyleplugin-h.html b/doc/html/qstyleplugin-h.html
index 9d7c45f25..9bc86be58 100644
--- a/doc/html/qstyleplugin-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qstyleplugin-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qstyleplugin.h Include File
+ntqstyleplugin.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                        TQStylePlugin Class Reference
                                                        
-
-
                                                        The TQStylePlugin class provides an abstract base for custom TQStyle plugins.
-More...
-
                                                        #include <qstyleplugin.h>
-
                                                        List of all member functions.
-
                                                        Public Members
                                                        
-
-
                                                        Detailed Description
                                                        
-
-
-The TQStylePlugin class provides an abstract base for custom TQStyle plugins.
-
                                                         
-
                                                         The style plugin is a simple plugin interface that makes it easy
-to create custom styles that can be loaded dynamically into
-applications with a TQStyleFactory.
-
                                                         Writing a style plugin is achieved by subclassing this base class,
-reimplementing the pure virtual functions keys() and create(), and
-exporting the class with the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN macro. See the
-plugins documentation for an
-example.
-
                                                        See also Plugins.
-
-
                                                        Member Function Documentation
                                                        
-
                                                        TQStylePlugin::TQStylePlugin ()
-
                                                        
-Constructs a style plugin. This is invoked automatically by the
-Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN macro.
-
-
                                                        TQStylePlugin::~TQStylePlugin ()
-
                                                        
-Destroys the style plugin.
-
                                                         You never have to call this explicitly. TQt destroys a plugin
-automatically when it is no longer used.
-
-
                                                        TQStyle * TQStylePlugin::create ( const TQString & key ) [pure virtual]
-
                                                        
-
-
                                                         Creates and returns a TQStyle object for the style key key. The
-style key is usually the class name of the required style.
-
                                                         
                                                        See also keys().
-
-
                                                        TQStringList TQStylePlugin::keys () const [pure virtual]
-
                                                        
-
-
                                                         Returns the list of style keys this plugin supports.
-
                                                         These keys are usually the class names of the custom styles that
-are implemented in the plugin.
-
                                                         
                                                        See also create().
-
-
-
                                                        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                        
-
-
                                                        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                        TQt 3.3.8
                                                        
-
                                                        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qstylesheet-h.html b/doc/html/qstylesheet-h.html
index 8651b4356..bb9e8a4f5 100644
--- a/doc/html/qstylesheet-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qstylesheet-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qstylesheet.h Include File
+ntqstylesheet.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                        TQStyleSheet Class Reference
                                                        
-
-
                                                        The TQStyleSheet class is a collection of styles for rich text
-rendering and a generator of tags.
-More...
-
                                                        #include <qstylesheet.h>
-
                                                        Inherits TQObject.
-
                                                        List of all member functions.
-
                                                        Public Members
                                                        
-
                                                          
-
                                                        • TQStyleSheet ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
                                                          • 
-
                                                        • virtual ~TQStyleSheet ()
                                                          • 
-
                                                        • TQStyleSheetItem * item ( const TQString & name )
                                                          • 
-
                                                        • const TQStyleSheetItem * item ( const TQString & name ) const
                                                          • 
-
                                                        • virtual TQTextCustomItem * tag ( const TQString & name, const TQMap<TQString, TQString> & attr, const TQString & context, const TQMimeSourceFactory & factory, bool emptyTag, TQTextDocument * doc ) const
                                                          • 
-
                                                        • virtual void scaleFont ( TQFont & font, int logicalSize ) const
                                                          • 
-
                                                        • virtual void error ( const TQString & msg ) const
                                                          • 
-
                                                        
-
                                                        Static Public Members
                                                        
-
-
                                                        Detailed Description
                                                        
-
-
-
-The TQStyleSheet class is a collection of styles for rich text
-rendering and a generator of tags.
-
                                                         
-
-
                                                         By creating TQStyleSheetItem objects for a style sheet you build a
-definition of a set of tags. This definition will be used by the
-internal rich text rendering system to parse and display text
-documents to which the style sheet applies. Rich text is normally
-visualized in a TQTextEdit or a TQTextBrowser. However, TQLabel,
-TQWhatsThis and TQMessageBox also support it, and other classes are
-likely to follow. With TQSimpleRichText it is possible to use the
-rich text renderer for custom widgets as well.
-
                                                         The default TQStyleSheet object has the following style bindings,
-sorted by structuring bindings, anchors, character style bindings
-(i.e. inline styles), special elements such as horizontal lines or
-images, and other tags. In addition, rich text supports simple
-HTML tables.
-
                                                         The structuring tags are
-
                                                        
-
                                                         Structuring tags Notes
-
                                                         <qt>...</qt>
-A TQt rich text document. It understands the following
-attributes:
-
                                                          
-
                                                        •  title -- The caption of the document. This attribute is
-easily accessible with TQTextEdit::documentTitle().
-
                                                        •  type -- The type of the document. The default type is page. It indicates that the document is displayed in a
-page of its own. Another style is detail, which can be
-used to explain certain expressions in more detail in a
-few sentences. For detail, TQTextBrowser will then keep
-the current page and display the new document in a small
-popup similar to TQWhatsThis. Note that links will not work
-in documents with <qt type="detail">...</qt>.
-
                                                        •  bgcolor -- The background color, for example bgcolor="yellow" or bgcolor="#0000FF".
-
                                                        •  background -- The background pixmap, for example background="granite.xpm". The pixmap name will be resolved
-by a TQMimeSourceFactory().
-
                                                        •  text -- The default text color, for example text="red".
-
                                                        •  link -- The link color, for example link="green".
-
                                                        
-
                                                         <h1>...</h1>
-A top-level heading.
-
                                                         <h2>...</h2>
-A sublevel heading.
-
                                                         <h3>...</h3>
-A sub-sublevel heading.
-
                                                         <h4>...</h4> <h5>...</h5>
-Headings of lesser importance.
-
                                                         <p>...</p>
-A left-aligned paragraph. Adjust the alignment with the align attribute. Possible values are left, right and
-center.
-
                                                         <center>...
                                                        </center>
-                                                        		A centered paragraph.
-
                                                         <blockquote>...
                                                        </blockquote>
-                                                        		An indented paragraph that is useful for quotes.
-
                                                         <ul>...</ul>
-An unordered list. You can also pass a type argument to
-define the bullet style. The default is type=disc;
-other types are circle and square.
-
                                                         <ol>...</ol>
-An ordered list. You can also pass a type argument to
-define the enumeration label style. The default is type="1"; other types are "a" and "A".
-
                                                         <li>...</li>
-A list item. This tag can be used only within the context
-of <ol> or <ul>.
-
                                                         <dl>...</dl>
-A list of definitions, consisting of terms and descriptions.
-
                                                         <dt>...</dt>
-A term in a list of definitions. This tag can be used only
-in the context of <dl>...</dl>.
-
                                                         <dd>...</dd>
-A description in a list of definitions. This tag can be
-used only in the context of <dl>...</dl>.
-
                                                         <pre>...</pre>
-For larger chunks of code. Whitespaces in the contents are
-preserved. For small bits of code use the inline-style code.
-
                                                         <div>...</div> and <span>...</span>
-Block grouping elements. These are used to structure the
-document, and are often used to provide hints about the
-intended presentation of the document.
-
                                                        
-
                                                         Anchors and links are done with a single tag:
-
                                                        
-
                                                         Anchor tags Notes
-
                                                         <a>...</a>
-An anchor or link.
-
                                                          
-
                                                        •  A link is created by using an href
-attribute, for example
-
                                                          <a href="target.qml">Link Text</a>. Links to
-targets within a document are achieved in the same way
-as for HTML, e.g.
-
                                                          <a href="target.qml#subtitle">Link Text</a>.
-
                                                        •  A target is created by using a name
-attribute, for example
-
                                                          <a name="subtitle"><h2>Sub Title</h2></a>.
-
                                                        
-
                                                        
-
                                                         The default character style bindings are
-
                                                        
-
                                                         Style tags Notes
-
                                                         <em>...</em>
-Emphasized. By default this is the same as <i>...</i>
-(italic).
-
                                                         <strong>...</strong>
-Strong. By default this is the same as <b>...</b>
-(bold).
-
                                                         <i>...</i>
-Italic font style.
-
                                                         <b>...</b>
-Bold font style.
-
                                                         <u>...</u>
-Underlined font style.
-
                                                         <s>...</s>
-Strike out font style.
-
                                                         <big>...</big>
-A larger font size.
-
                                                         <small>...</small>
-A smaller font size.
-
                                                         <sub>...</sub>
-Subscripted text
-
                                                         <sup>...</sup>
-Superscripted text
-
                                                         <code>...</code>
-Indicates code. By default this is the same as
-<tt>...</tt> (typewriter). For larger chunks of code
-use the block-tag <pre>.
-
                                                         <tt>...</tt>
-Typewriter font style.
-
                                                         <font>...</font>
-Customizes the font size, family  and text color. The tag
-understands the following  attributes:
-
                                                          
-
                                                        •  color -- The text color, for example color="red" or
-color="#FF0000".
-
                                                        •  size -- The logical size of the font. Logical sizes 1
-to 7 are supported. The value may either be absolute
-(for example, size=3) or relative (size=-2). In
-the latter case the sizes are simply added.
-
                                                        •  face -- The family of the font, for example face=times.
-
                                                        
-
                                                        
-
                                                         Special elements are:
-
                                                        
-
                                                         Special tags Notes
-
                                                         <img>
-An image. The image name for the mime source factory is
-given in the source attribute, for example
-<img src="qt.xpm"> The image tag also understands the
-attributes width and height that determine the size
-of the image. If the pixmap does not fit the specified
-size it will be scaled automatically (by using
-TQImage::smoothScale()).
-
                                                        
-The align attribute determines where the image is
-placed. By default, an image is placed inline just like a
-normal character. Specify left or right to place the
-image at the respective side.
-
                                                         <hr>
-A horizontal line.
-
                                                         <br>
-A line break.
-
                                                         <nobr>...</nobr>
-No break. Prevents word wrap.
-
                                                        
-
                                                         In addition, rich text supports simple HTML tables. A table
-consists of one or more rows each of which contains one or more
-cells. Cells are either data cells or header cells, depending on
-their content. Cells which span rows and columns are supported.
-
                                                         
                                                        
-
                                                         Table tags Notes
-
                                                         <table>...</table>
-A table. Tables support the following attributes:
-
                                                          
-
                                                        •  bgcolor -- The background color.
-
                                                        •  width -- The table width. This is either an absolute
-pixel width or a relative percentage of the table's
-width, for example width=80%.
-
                                                        •  border -- The width of the table border. The default is
-0 (= no border).
-
                                                        •  cellspacing -- Additional space around the table cells.
-The default is 2.
-
                                                        •  cellpadding -- Additional space around the contents of
-table cells. The default is 1.
-
                                                        
-
                                                         <tr>...</tr>
-A table row. This is only valid within a table. Rows
-support the following attribute:
-
                                                          
-
                                                        •  bgcolor -- The background color.
-
                                                        
-
                                                         <th>...</th>
-A table header cell. Similar to td, but defaults to
-center alignment and a bold font.
-
                                                         <td>...</td>
-A table data cell. This is only valid within a tr.
-Cells support the following attributes:
-
                                                          
-
                                                        •  bgcolor -- The background color.
-
                                                        •  width -- The cell width. This is either an absolute
-pixel width or a relative percentage of table's width,
-for example width=50%.
-
                                                        •  colspan -- Specifies how many columns this cell spans.
-The default is 1.
-
                                                        •  rowspan -- Specifies how many rows this cell spans. The
-default is 1.
-
                                                        •  align -- Alignment; possible values are left, right, and center. The default is left.
-
                                                        •  valign -- Vertical alignment; possible values are top, middle, and bottom. The default is middle.
-
                                                        
-
                                                        
-
                                                        See also Graphics Classes, Help System, and Text Related Classes.
-
-
                                                        Member Function Documentation
                                                        
-
                                                        TQStyleSheet::TQStyleSheet ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                        
-Creates a style sheet called name, with parent parent. Like
-any TQObject it will be deleted when its parent is destroyed (if
-the child still exists).
-
                                                         By default the style sheet has the tag definitions defined above.
-
-
                                                        TQStyleSheet::~TQStyleSheet () [virtual]
-
                                                        
-Destroys the style sheet. All styles inserted into the style sheet
-will be deleted.
-
-
                                                        TQString TQStyleSheet::convertFromPlainText ( const TQString & plain, TQStyleSheetItem::WhiteSpaceMode mode = TQStyleSheetItem::WhiteSpacePre ) [static]
-
                                                          Auxiliary function. Converts the plain text string plain to a
-rich text formatted paragraph while preserving most of its look.
-
                                                         mode defines the whitespace mode. Possible values are TQStyleSheetItem::WhiteSpacePre (no wrapping, all whitespaces
-preserved) and TQStyleSheetItem::WhiteSpaceNormal (wrapping,
-simplified whitespaces).
-
                                                         
                                                        See also escape().
-
-
                                                        Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, and mdi/application.cpp.
-
                                                        TQStyleSheet * TQStyleSheet::defaultSheet () [static]
-
                                                        
-Returns the application-wide default style sheet. This style sheet
-is used by rich text rendering classes such as TQSimpleRichText,
-TQWhatsThis and TQMessageBox to define the rendering style and
-available tags within rich text documents. It also serves as the
-initial style sheet for the more complex render widgets, TQTextEdit
-and TQTextBrowser.
-
                                                         
                                                        See also setDefaultSheet().
-
-
                                                        void TQStyleSheet::error ( const TQString & msg ) const [virtual]
-
                                                        
-
-
                                                         This virtual function is called when an error occurs when
-processing rich text. Reimplement it if you need to catch error
-messages.
-
                                                         Errors might occur if some rich text strings contain tags that are
-not understood by the stylesheet, if some tags are nested
-incorrectly, or if tags are not closed properly.
-
                                                         msg is the error message.
-
-
                                                        TQString TQStyleSheet::escape ( const TQString & plain ) [static]
-
                                                        
-Auxiliary function. Converts the plain text string plain to a
-rich text formatted string with any HTML meta-characters escaped.
-
                                                         
                                                        See also convertFromPlainText().
-
-
                                                        TQStyleSheetItem * TQStyleSheet::item ( const TQString & name )
-
                                                        
-Returns the style called name or 0 if there is no such style.
-
-
                                                        const TQStyleSheetItem * TQStyleSheet::item ( const TQString & name ) const
-
                                                        
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                         Returns the style called name or 0 if there is no such style
-(const version)
-
-
                                                        bool TQStyleSheet::mightBeRichText ( const TQString & text ) [static]
-
                                                        
-Returns TRUE if the string text is likely to be rich text;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                         This function uses a fast and therefore simple heuristic. It
-mainly checks whether there is something that looks like a tag
-before the first line break. Although the result may be correct
-for common cases, there is no guarantee.
-
-
                                                        void TQStyleSheet::scaleFont ( TQFont & font, int logicalSize ) const [virtual]
-
                                                        
-Scales the font font to the appropriate physical point size
-corresponding to the logical font size logicalSize.
-
                                                         When calling this function, font has a point size corresponding
-to the logical font size 3.
-
                                                         Logical font sizes range from 1 to 7, with 1 being the smallest.
-
                                                         
                                                        See also TQStyleSheetItem::logicalFontSize(), TQStyleSheetItem::logicalFontSizeStep(), and TQFont::setPointSize().
-
-
                                                        void TQStyleSheet::setDefaultSheet ( TQStyleSheet * sheet ) [static]
-
                                                        
-Sets the application-wide default style sheet to sheet,
-deleting any style sheet previously set. The ownership is
-transferred to TQStyleSheet.
-
                                                         
                                                        See also defaultSheet().
-
-
                                                        TQTextCustomItem * TQStyleSheet::tag ( const TQString & name, const TQMap<TQString, TQString> & attr, const TQString & context, const TQMimeSourceFactory & factory, bool emptyTag, TQTextDocument * doc ) const [virtual]
-
                                                        
-
                                                        This function is under development and is subject to change.
-
                                                         Generates an internal object for the tag called name, given the
-attributes attr, and using additional information provided by
-the mime source factory factory.
-
                                                         context is the optional context of the document, i.e. the path
-to look for relative links. This becomes important if the text
-contains relative references, for example within image tags.
-TQSimpleRichText always uses the default mime source factory (see
-TQMimeSourceFactory::defaultFactory()) to resolve these
-references. The context will then be used to calculate the
-absolute path. See TQMimeSourceFactory::makeAbsolute() for details.
-
                                                         emptyTag and doc are for internal use only.
-
                                                         This function should not be used in application code.
-
-
-
                                                        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                        
-
-
                                                        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                        TQt 3.3.8
                                                        
-
                                                        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qstylesheetitem-members.html b/doc/html/qstylesheetitem-members.html
index 8ebc8fccb..d156b3f3e 100644
--- a/doc/html/qstylesheetitem-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qstylesheetitem-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qstylesheetitem.html b/doc/html/qstylesheetitem.html
index b6150acf4..a435f73b1 100644
--- a/doc/html/qstylesheetitem.html
+++ b/doc/html/qstylesheetitem.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                                        The TQStyleSheetItem class provides an encapsulation of a set of text styles.
 More...
-
                                                        #include <qstylesheet.h>
-
                                                        Inherits TQt.
+
                                                        #include <ntqstylesheet.h>
+
                                                        Inherits TQt.
 
                                                        List of all member functions.
 
                                                        Public Members
                                                        
 
                                                          
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 The TQStyleSheetItem class provides an encapsulation of a set of text styles.
 
                                                           
 
                                                           A style sheet item consists of a name and a set of attributes that
-specifiy its font, color, etc. When used in a style sheet (see styleSheet()), items define the name() of
+specifiy its font, color, etc. When used in a style sheet (see styleSheet()), items define the name() of
 a rich text tag and the display property changes associated with
 it.
 
                                                           The display mode
@@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ baseline of the parent
 
                                                         
 
                                                        TQStyleSheetItem::WhiteSpaceMode
                                                        
 
-
                                                         This enum defines the ways in which TQStyleSheet can treat
+
                                                         This enum defines the ways in which TQStyleSheet can treat
 whitespace.
 
                                                          
 
                                                        • TQStyleSheetItem::WhiteSpaceNormal - any sequence of whitespace (including
@@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ WhiteSpaceNormal, but no automatic line-breaks occur. To break
 lines manually, use the <br> tag.
 
                                                         
 
                                                        Member Function Documentation
                                                        
-
                                                        TQStyleSheetItem::TQStyleSheetItem ( TQStyleSheet * parent, const TQString & name )
+
                                                        TQStyleSheetItem::TQStyleSheetItem ( TQStyleSheet * parent, const TQString & name )
 
                                                        
 Constructs a new style called name for the stylesheet parent.
 
                                                         All properties in TQStyleSheetItem are initially in the "do not
@@ -194,12 +194,12 @@ to any style sheet.
 
                                                        TQStyleSheetItem::~TQStyleSheetItem ()
 
                                                        
 Destroys the style. Note that TQStyleSheetItem objects become
-owned by TQStyleSheet when they are created.
+owned by TQStyleSheet when they are created.
 
 
                                                        int TQStyleSheetItem::alignment () const
 
                                                        
-Returns the alignment of this style. Possible values are AlignAuto, AlignLeft, AlignRight, AlignCenter or AlignJustify.
-
                                                         
                                                        See also setAlignment() and TQt::AlignmentFlags.
+Returns the alignment of this style. Possible values are AlignAuto, AlignLeft, AlignRight, AlignCenter or AlignJustify.
+
                                                         
                                                        See also setAlignment() and TQt::AlignmentFlags.
 
 
                                                        bool TQStyleSheetItem::allowedInContext ( const TQStyleSheetItem * s ) const
 
                                                        
@@ -207,13 +207,13 @@ Returns TRUE if this style can be nested into an element of style
 s; otherwise returns FALSE.
 
                                                         
                                                        See also contexts() and setContexts().
 
-
                                                        TQColor TQStyleSheetItem::color () const
+
                                                        TQColor TQStyleSheetItem::color () const
 
                                                        
 Returns the text color of this style or an invalid color if no
 color has been set.
-
                                                         
                                                        See also setColor() and TQColor::isValid().
+
                                                         
                                                        See also setColor() and TQColor::isValid().
 
-
                                                        TQString TQStyleSheetItem::contexts () const
+
                                                        TQString TQStyleSheetItem::contexts () const
 
                                                        
 Returns a space-separated list of names of styles that may contain
 elements of this style. If nothing has been set, contexts()
@@ -248,11 +248,11 @@ Returns the display
     mode of the style.
 
                                                         
                                                        See also setDisplayMode().
 
-
                                                        TQString TQStyleSheetItem::fontFamily () const
+
                                                        TQString TQStyleSheetItem::fontFamily () const
 
                                                        
 Returns the font family setting of the style. This is either a
-valid font family or TQString::null if no family has been set.
-
                                                         
                                                        See also setFontFamily(), TQFont::family(), and TQFont::setFamily().
+valid font family or TQString::null if no family has been set.
+
                                                         
                                                        See also setFontFamily(), TQFont::family(), and TQFont::setFamily().
 
 
                                                        bool TQStyleSheetItem::fontItalic () const
 
                                                        
@@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ FALSE.
 
 Returns the font size setting of the style. This is either a valid
 point size or TQStyleSheetItem::Undefined.
-
                                                         
                                                        See also setFontSize(), TQFont::pointSize(), and TQFont::setPointSize().
+
                                                         
                                                        See also setFontSize(), TQFont::pointSize(), and TQFont::setPointSize().
 
 
                                                        bool TQStyleSheetItem::fontStrikeOut () const
 
                                                        
@@ -281,8 +281,8 @@ returns FALSE.
 
                                                        int TQStyleSheetItem::fontWeight () const
 
                                                        
 Returns the font weight setting of the style. This is either a
-valid TQFont::Weight or the value TQStyleSheetItem::Undefined.
-
                                                         
                                                        See also setFontWeight() and TQFont.
+valid TQFont::Weight or the value TQStyleSheetItem::Undefined.
+
                                                         
                                                        See also setFontWeight() and TQFont.
 
 
                                                        bool TQStyleSheetItem::isAnchor () const
 
                                                        
@@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ Returns the list style of the style.
 
 Returns the logical font size setting of the style. This is either
 a valid size between 1 and 7 or TQStyleSheetItem::Undefined.
-
                                                         
                                                        See also setLogicalFontSize(), setLogicalFontSizeStep(), TQFont::pointSize(), and TQFont::setPointSize().
+
                                                         
                                                        See also setLogicalFontSize(), setLogicalFontSizeStep(), TQFont::pointSize(), and TQFont::setPointSize().
 
 
                                                        int TQStyleSheetItem::logicalFontSizeStep () const
 
                                                        
@@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ Returns the width of margin m in pixels.
 
                                                         The margin, m, can be MarginLeft, MarginRight, MarginTop, MarginBottom, or MarginFirstLine.
 
                                                         
                                                        See also setMargin() and Margin.
 
-
                                                        TQString TQStyleSheetItem::name () const
+
                                                        TQString TQStyleSheetItem::name () const
 
                                                        
 Returns the name of the style item.
 
@@ -343,9 +343,9 @@ returns FALSE.
 
 Sets the alignment to f. This only makes sense for styles with
 a display mode of
-DisplayBlock. Possible values are AlignAuto, AlignLeft,
-AlignRight, AlignCenter or AlignJustify.
-
                                                         
                                                        See also alignment(), displayMode(), and TQt::AlignmentFlags.
+DisplayBlock. Possible values are AlignAuto, AlignLeft,
+AlignRight, AlignCenter or AlignJustify.
+
                                                         
                                                        See also alignment(), displayMode(), and TQt::AlignmentFlags.
 
 
                                                        void TQStyleSheetItem::setAnchor ( bool anc )
 
                                                        
@@ -354,12 +354,12 @@ link); otherwise sets it to not be an anchor. Elements in this
 style link to other documents or anchors.
 
                                                         
                                                        See also isAnchor().
 
-
                                                        void TQStyleSheetItem::setColor ( const TQColor & c )
+
                                                        void TQStyleSheetItem::setColor ( const TQColor & c )
 
                                                        
 Sets the text color of this style to c.
 
                                                         
                                                        See also color().
 
-
                                                        void TQStyleSheetItem::setContexts ( const TQString & c )
+
                                                        void TQStyleSheetItem::setContexts ( const TQString & c )
 
                                                        
 Sets a space-separated list of names of styles that may contain
 elements of this style. If c is empty, the style can be nested
@@ -371,10 +371,10 @@ everywhere.
 Sets the display mode of the style to m.
 
                                                         
                                                        See also displayMode().
 
-
                                                        void TQStyleSheetItem::setFontFamily ( const TQString & fam )
+
                                                        void TQStyleSheetItem::setFontFamily ( const TQString & fam )
 
                                                        
 Sets the font family setting of the style to fam.
-
                                                         
                                                        See also fontFamily(), TQFont::family(), and TQFont::setFamily().
+
                                                         
                                                        See also fontFamily(), TQFont::family(), and TQFont::setFamily().
 
 
                                                        void TQStyleSheetItem::setFontItalic ( bool italic )
 
                                                        
@@ -385,7 +385,7 @@ upright.
 
                                                        void TQStyleSheetItem::setFontSize ( int s )
 
                                                        
 Sets the font size setting of the style to s points.
-
                                                         
                                                        See also fontSize(), TQFont::pointSize(), and TQFont::setPointSize().
+
                                                         
                                                        See also fontSize(), TQFont::pointSize(), and TQFont::setPointSize().
 
 
                                                        void TQStyleSheetItem::setFontStrikeOut ( bool strikeOut )
 
                                                        
@@ -402,8 +402,8 @@ sets no underline.
 
                                                        void TQStyleSheetItem::setFontWeight ( int w )
 
                                                        
 Sets the font weight setting of the style to w. Valid values
-are those defined by TQFont::Weight.
-
                                                         
                                                        See also TQFont and fontWeight().
+are those defined by TQFont::Weight.
+
                                                         
                                                        See also TQFont and fontWeight().
 
 
                                                        void TQStyleSheetItem::setListStyle ( ListStyle s )
 
                                                        
@@ -415,7 +415,7 @@ Sets the list style of the style to s.
 
 Sets the logical font size setting of the style to s. Valid
 logical sizes are 1 to 7.
-
                                                         
                                                        See also logicalFontSize(), TQFont::pointSize(), and TQFont::setPointSize().
+
                                                         
                                                        See also logicalFontSize(), TQFont::pointSize(), and TQFont::setPointSize().
 
 
                                                        void TQStyleSheetItem::setLogicalFontSizeStep ( int s )
 
                                                        
@@ -458,11 +458,11 @@ Sets the vertical alignment to valign. Possible values are
 Sets the whitespace mode to m.
 
                                                         
                                                        See also WhiteSpaceMode.
 
-
                                                        TQStyleSheet * TQStyleSheetItem::styleSheet ()
+
                                                        TQStyleSheet * TQStyleSheetItem::styleSheet ()
 
                                                        
 Returns the style sheet this item is in.
 
-
                                                        const TQStyleSheet * TQStyleSheetItem::styleSheet () const
+
                                                        const TQStyleSheet * TQStyleSheetItem::styleSheet () const
 
                                                        
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 
                                                         Returns the style sheet this item is in.
diff --git a/doc/html/qsyntaxhighlighter-h.html b/doc/html/qsyntaxhighlighter-h.html
index cf89657ff..7c67186a6 100644
--- a/doc/html/qsyntaxhighlighter-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qsyntaxhighlighter-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qsyntaxhighlighter.h Include File
+ntqsyntaxhighlighter.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                        TQSyntaxHighlighter Class Reference
                                                        
-
-
                                                        The TQSyntaxHighlighter class is a base class for
-implementing TQTextEdit syntax highlighters.
-More...
-
                                                        #include <qsyntaxhighlighter.h>
-
                                                        Inherits TQt.
-
                                                        List of all member functions.
-
                                                        Public Members
                                                        
-
-
                                                        Detailed Description
                                                        
-
-
-The TQSyntaxHighlighter class is a base class for
-implementing TQTextEdit syntax highlighters.
-
                                                         
-
-
                                                         A syntax highligher automatically highlights parts of the text in
-a TQTextEdit. Syntax highlighters are often used when the user is
-entering text in a specific format (for example, source code) and
-help the user to read the text and identify syntax errors.
-
                                                         To provide your own syntax highlighting for TQTextEdit, you must
-subclass TQSyntaxHighlighter and reimplement highlightParagraph().
-
                                                         When you create an instance of your TQSyntaxHighlighter subclass,
-pass it the TQTextEdit that you want the syntax highlighting to be
-applied to. After this your highlightParagraph() function will be
-called automatically whenever necessary. Use your
-highlightParagraph() function to apply formatting (e.g. setting
-the font and color) to the text that is passed to it.
-
                                                        See also Basic Widgets and Text Related Classes.
-
-
                                                        Member Function Documentation
                                                        
-
                                                        TQSyntaxHighlighter::TQSyntaxHighlighter ( TQTextEdit * textEdit )
-
                                                        
-Constructs the TQSyntaxHighlighter and installs it on textEdit.
-
                                                         It is the caller's responsibility to delete the
-TQSyntaxHighlighter when it is no longer needed.
-
-
                                                        TQSyntaxHighlighter::~TQSyntaxHighlighter () [virtual]
-
                                                        
-Destructor. Uninstalls this syntax highlighter from the textEdit()
-
-
                                                        int TQSyntaxHighlighter::currentParagraph () const
-
                                                        
-Returns the id of the paragraph which is highlighted, or -1 of no
-paragraph is currently highlighted.
-
                                                         Usually this function is called from within highlightParagraph().
-
-
                                                        int TQSyntaxHighlighter::highlightParagraph ( const TQString & text, int endStateOfLastPara ) [pure virtual]
-
                                                        
-
-
                                                         This function is called when necessary by the rich text engine,
-i.e. on paragraphs which have changed.
-
                                                         In your reimplementation you should parse the paragraph's text
-and call setFormat() as often as necessary to apply any font and
-color changes that you require. Your function must return a value
-which indicates the paragraph's end state: see below.
-
                                                         Some syntaxes can have constructs that span paragraphs. For
-example, a C++ syntax highlighter should be able to cope with
-/*...*/ comments that span paragraphs. To deal
-with these cases it is necessary to know the end state of the
-previous paragraph (e.g. "in comment").
-
                                                         If your syntax does not have paragraph spanning constructs, simply
-ignore the endStateOfLastPara parameter and always return 0.
-
                                                         Whenever highlightParagraph() is called it is passed a value for
-endStateOfLastPara. For the very first paragraph this value is
-always -2. For any other paragraph the value is the value returned
-by the most recent highlightParagraph() call that applied to the
-preceding paragraph.
-
                                                         The value you return is up to you. We recommend only returning 0
-(to signify that this paragraph's syntax highlighting does not
-affect the following paragraph), or a positive integer (to signify
-that this paragraph has ended in the middle of a paragraph
-spanning construct).
-
                                                         To find out which paragraph is highlighted, call
-currentParagraph().
-
                                                         For example, if you're writing a simple C++ syntax highlighter,
-you might designate 1 to signify "in comment". For a paragraph
-that ended in the middle of a comment you'd return 1, and for
-other paragraphs you'd return 0. In your parsing code if endStateOfLastPara was 1, you would highlight the text as a C++
-comment until you reached the closing */.
-
-
                                                        void TQSyntaxHighlighter::rehighlight ()
-
                                                          Redoes the highlighting of the whole document.
-
-
                                                        void TQSyntaxHighlighter::setFormat ( int start, int count, const TQFont & font, const TQColor & color )
-
                                                        
-This function is applied to the syntax highlighter's current
-paragraph (the text of which is passed to the highlightParagraph()
-function).
-
                                                         The specified font and color are applied to the text from
-position start for count characters. (If count is 0,
-nothing is done.)
-
-
                                                        void TQSyntaxHighlighter::setFormat ( int start, int count, const TQColor & color )
-
                                                         This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
-
                                                        void TQSyntaxHighlighter::setFormat ( int start, int count, const TQFont & font )
-
                                                         This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
-
                                                        TQTextEdit * TQSyntaxHighlighter::textEdit () const
-
                                                        
-
-
                                                         Returns the TQTextEdit on which this syntax highlighter is
-installed
-
-
-
                                                        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                        
-
-
                                                        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                        TQt 3.3.8
                                                        
-
                                                        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qt-members.html b/doc/html/qt-members.html
index 803ce4822..c1e3db1b3 100644
--- a/doc/html/qt-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qt-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                              Complete Member List for TQt
                                              
 
 
                                              This is the complete list of member functions for
-TQt, including inherited members.
+TQt, including inherited members.
 
 
                                                
 
                                              
diff --git a/doc/html/qt-template-lib.html b/doc/html/qt-template-lib.html
index 68f443778..f76eb0496 100644
--- a/doc/html/qt-template-lib.html
+++ b/doc/html/qt-template-lib.html
@@ -51,11 +51,11 @@ of the STL container API. Compared with the STL, TQTL has no platform
 differences, but is often a little slower and often expands to less
 object code.
 
                                               If you cannot make copies of the objects you want to store you should
-use TQPtrCollection and friends, all of which operate on pointers
+use TQPtrCollection and friends, all of which operate on pointers
 rather than values. This applies, for example, to all classes derived
-from TQObject. A TQObject does not have a copy constructor, so using
+from TQObject. A TQObject does not have a copy constructor, so using
 it as value is impossible. You may choose to store pointers to
-TQObjects in a TQValueList, but using TQPtrList directly seems to be the
+TQObjects in a TQValueList, but using TQPtrList directly seems to be the
 better choice for this kind of application domain. TQPtrList, like all
 other TQPtrCollection based containers, provides far more sanity
 checking than a speed-optimized value based container.
@@ -70,13 +70,13 @@ instead. Value semantics require at least:
 
                                               Note that a fast copy constructor is absolutely crucial to achieve
 good overall performance of the container, since many copy operations
 will occur.
-
                                               If you intend sorting your data you must implement operator<() for
+
                                               If you intend sorting your data you must implement operator<() for
 your data's class.
-
                                               Good candidates for value based classes are TQRect, TQPoint, TQSize,
-TQString and all simple C++ types, such as int, bool or double.
+
                                               Good candidates for value based classes are TQRect, TQPoint, TQSize,
+TQString and all simple C++ types, such as int, bool or double.
 
                                               The TQt Template Library is designed for speed. Iterators are extremely
 fast. To achieve this performance, less error checking is done than in
-the TQPtrCollection based containers. A TQTL container, for example,
+the TQPtrCollection based containers. A TQTL container, for example,
 does not track any associated iterators. This makes certain validity
 checks, for example when removing items, impossible to perform
 automatically, but does lead to extremely good performance.
@@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ like this:
 those elements that fall between the two iterators, i.e. 100, 1234 and
 12. The third example shows that iterators act like pointers and can
 be treated as such.
-
                                               If using your own data types you must implement operator<() for
+
                                               If using your own data types you must implement operator<() for
 your data's class.
 
                                               Naturally, the sorting templates won't work with const iterators.
 
                                               
@@ -160,8 +160,8 @@ your data's class.
 
 
                                               qSwap() exchanges the values of two variables:
 
                                              -    TQString second( "Einstein" );
-    TQString name( "Albert" );
+    TQString second( "Einstein" );
+    TQString name( "Albert" );
     qSwap( second, name );
 
                                              
  
@@ -171,13 +171,13 @@ your data's class.
 
                                               The qCount() template function counts the number of occurrences of a
 value within a container. For example:
 
                                              -    TQValueList<int> list;
-    list.push_back( 1 );               
-    list.push_back( 1 );               
-    list.push_back( 1 );               
-    list.push_back( 2 );               
+    TQValueList<int> list;
+    list.push_back( 1 );               
+    list.push_back( 1 );               
+    list.push_back( 1 );               
+    list.push_back( 2 );               
     int c = 0;
-    qCount( list.begin(), list.end(), 1, c ); // c == 3
+    qCount( list.begin(), list.end(), 1, c ); // c == 3
 
                                              
  	
 
                                               
@@ -186,12 +186,12 @@ value within a container. For example:
 
                                               The qFind() template function finds the first occurrence of a value
 within a container. For example:
 
                                              -    TQValueList<int> list;
-    list.push_back( 1 );               
-    list.push_back( 1 );               
-    list.push_back( 1 );               
-    list.push_back( 2 );               
-    TQValueListIterator<int> it = qFind( list.begin(), list.end(), 2 );
+    TQValueList<int> list;
+    list.push_back( 1 );               
+    list.push_back( 1 );               
+    list.push_back( 1 );               
+    list.push_back( 2 );               
+    TQValueListIterator<int> it = qFind( list.begin(), list.end(), 2 );
 
                                              
  	
 
                                               
@@ -200,8 +200,8 @@ within a container. For example:
 
                                               The qFill() template function fills a range with copies of a value.
 For example:
 
                                              -    TQValueVector<int> vec(3);
-    qFill( vec.begin(), vec.end(), 99 ); // vec contains 99, 99, 99
+    TQValueVector<int> vec(3);
+    qFill( vec.begin(), vec.end(), 99 ); // vec contains 99, 99, 99
 
                                              
  
 
                                               
@@ -213,19 +213,19 @@ considered, only if the elements in the first range are equal to the
 corresponding elements in the second range (consequently, both ranges
 must be valid). For example:
 
                                              -    TQValueVector<int> v1(3);
+    TQValueVector<int> v1(3);
     v1[0] = 1;
     v1[2] = 2;
     v1[3] = 3;
 
-    TQValueVector<int> v2(5);
+    TQValueVector<int> v2(5);
     v2[0] = 1;
     v2[2] = 2;
     v2[3] = 3;
     v2[4] = 4;
     v2[5] = 5;
 
-    bool b = qEqual( v1.begin(), v2.end(), v2.begin() );
+    bool b = qEqual( v1.begin(), v2.end(), v2.begin() );
     // b == TRUE
 
                                              
  
@@ -235,12 +235,12 @@ must be valid). For example:
 
                                               The qCopy() template function copies a range of elements to an
 OutputIterator, in this case a TQTextOStreamIterator:
 
                                              -    TQValueList<int> list;
-    list.push_back( 100 );
-    list.push_back( 200 );
-    list.push_back( 300 );
+    TQValueList<int> list;
+    list.push_back( 100 );
+    list.push_back( 200 );
+    list.push_back( 300 );
     TQTextOStream str( stdout );
-    qCopy( list.begin(), list.end(), TQTextOStreamIterator(str) );
+    qCopy( list.begin(), list.end(), TQTextOStreamIterator(str) );
 
                                              
  
 
                                               
@@ -250,12 +250,12 @@ OutputIterator, in this case a TQTextOStreamIterator:
 
                                               The qCopyBackward() template function copies a container or a slice of
 a container to an OutputIterator, but in reverse order, for example:
 
                                              -    TQValueVector<int> vec(3);
-    vec.push_back( 100 );
-    vec.push_back( 200 );
-    vec.push_back( 300 );
-    TQValueVector<int> another;
-    qCopyBackward( vec.begin(), vec.end(), another.begin() );
+    TQValueVector<int> vec(3);
+    vec.push_back( 100 );
+    vec.push_back( 200 );
+    vec.push_back( 300 );
+    TQValueVector<int> another;
+    qCopyBackward( vec.begin(), vec.end(), another.begin() );
     // 'another' now contains 100, 200, 300
     // however the elements are copied one at a time 
     // in reverse order (300, 200, then 100)
@@ -268,13 +268,13 @@ Just make sure that the right hand of the iterator has as many
 elements present as you want to insert. The following example
 illustrates this:
 
                                               
                                              -    TQStringList list1, list2;
+    TQStringList list1, list2;
     list1 << "Weis" << "Ettrich" << "Arnt" << "Sue";
     list2 << "Torben" << "Matthias";
-    qCopy( list2.begin(), list2.end(), list1.begin() );
+    qCopy( list2.begin(), list2.end(), list1.begin() );
 
-    TQValueVector<TQString> vec( list1.size(), "Dave" );
-    qCopy( list2.begin(), list2.end(), vec.begin() );
+    TQValueVector<TQString> vec( list1.size(), "Dave" );
+    qCopy( list2.begin(), list2.end(), vec.begin() );
 
                                              
  
 
                                               At the end of this code fragment, the list list1 contains "Torben",
@@ -296,19 +296,19 @@ a standard C++ array with qCopy():
 
                                               All the containers we've mentioned can be serialized with the
 appropriate streaming operators. Here is an example.
 
                                               
                                              -    TQDataStream str(...);
-    TQValueList<TQRect> list;
+    TQDataStream str(...);
+    TQValueList<TQRect> list;
     // ... fill the list here
     str << list;
 
                                              
  
 
                                               The container can be read in again with:
 
                                               
                                              -    TQValueList<TQRect> list;
+    TQValueList<TQRect> list;
     str >> list;
 
                                              
  
-
                                               The same applies to TQStringList, TQValueStack and TQMap.
+
                                               The same applies to TQStringList, TQValueStack and TQMap.
 
 
 
                                              
diff --git a/doc/html/qt.dcf b/doc/html/qt.dcf
index cf14d5774..a879ee7d5 100644
--- a/doc/html/qt.dcf
+++ b/doc/html/qt.dcf
@@ -1,38 +1,38 @@
 
 
-
                                              
-    QAccel
-    activated
-    activatedAmbiguously
-    clear
-    connectItem
-    count
-    disconnectItem
-    findKey
-    insertItem
-    isEnabled
-    isItemEnabled
-    key
-    removeItem
-    setEnabled
-    setItemEnabled
-    setWhatsThis
-    shortcutKey
-    whatsThis
-    ~QAccel
+
                                              
+    QAccel
+    activated
+    activatedAmbiguously
+    clear
+    connectItem
+    count
+    disconnectItem
+    findKey
+    insertItem
+    isEnabled
+    isItemEnabled
+    key
+    removeItem
+    setEnabled
+    setItemEnabled
+    setWhatsThis
+    shortcutKey
+    whatsThis
+    ~QAccel
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QAccessible
-    Event
-    NavDirection
-    Role
-    State
-    Text
-    isActive
-    queryAccessibleInterface
-    updateAccessibility
+
                                              
+    QAccessible
+    Event
+    NavDirection
+    Role
+    State
+    Text
+    isActive
+    queryAccessibleInterface
+    updateAccessibility
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -64,53 +64,53 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QAction
-    accel
-    accel
-    activate
-    activated
-    addTo
-    addedTo
-    clearStatusText
-    enabled
-    iconSet
-    iconSet
-    isEnabled
-    isOn
-    isToggleAction
-    isVisible
-    menuStatusText
-    menuText
-    menuText
-    on
-    removeFrom
-    setAccel
-    setDisabled
-    setEnabled
-    setIconSet
-    setMenuText
-    setOn
-    setStatusTip
-    setText
-    setToggleAction
-    setToolTip
-    setVisible
-    setWhatsThis
-    showStatusText
-    statusTip
-    statusTip
-    text
-    text
-    toggle
-    toggleAction
-    toggled
-    toolTip
-    toolTip
-    visible
-    whatsThis
-    whatsThis
-    ~QAction
+
                                              
+    QAction
+    accel
+    accel
+    activate
+    activated
+    addTo
+    addedTo
+    clearStatusText
+    enabled
+    iconSet
+    iconSet
+    isEnabled
+    isOn
+    isToggleAction
+    isVisible
+    menuStatusText
+    menuText
+    menuText
+    on
+    removeFrom
+    setAccel
+    setDisabled
+    setEnabled
+    setIconSet
+    setMenuText
+    setOn
+    setStatusTip
+    setText
+    setToggleAction
+    setToolTip
+    setVisible
+    setWhatsThis
+    showStatusText
+    statusTip
+    statusTip
+    text
+    text
+    toggle
+    toggleAction
+    toggled
+    toolTip
+    toolTip
+    visible
+    whatsThis
+    whatsThis
+    ~QAction
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -130,141 +130,141 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QApplication
-    ColorSpec
-    Encoding
-    Type
-    aboutTQt
-    aboutToQuit
-    activeModalWidget
-    activePopupWidget
-    activeWindow
-    addLibraryPath
-    allWidgets
-    applicationDirPath
-    applicationFilePath
-    argc
-    argv
-    beep
-    clipboard
-    closeAllWindows
-    closingDown
-    colorSpec
-    commitData
-    cursorFlashTime
-    desktop
-    desktopSettingsAware
-    doubleClickInterval
-    eventLoop
-    exec
-    exit
-    flush
-    flushX
-    focusWidget
-    font
-    fontMetrics
-    globalStrut
-    guiThreadAwake
-    hasGlobalMouseTracking
-    hasPendingEvents
-    horizontalAlignment
-    initialize
-    installTranslator
-    isEffectEnabled
-    isSessionRestored
-    lastWindowClosed
-    libraryPaths
-    lock
-    locked
-    macEventFilter
-    mainWidget
-    notify
-    overrideCursor
-    palette
-    polish
-    postEvent
-    processEvents
-    quit
-    qwsDecoration
-    qwsEventFilter
-    qwsSetCustomColors
-    qwsSetDecoration
-    removeLibraryPath
-    removePostedEvent
-    removePostedEvents
-    removeTranslator
-    restoreOverrideCursor
-    reverseLayout
-    saveState
-    sendEvent
-    sendPostedEvents
-    sessionId
-    sessionKey
-    setColorSpec
-    setCursorFlashTime
-    setDesktopSettingsAware
-    setDoubleClickInterval
-    setEffectEnabled
-    setFont
-    setGlobalMouseTracking
-    setGlobalStrut
-    setLibraryPaths
-    setMainWidget
-    setOverrideCursor
-    setPalette
-    setReverseLayout
-    setStartDragDistance
-    setStartDragTime
-    setStyle
-    setWheelScrollLines
-    startDragDistance
-    startDragTime
-    startingUp
-    style
-    syncX
-    topLevelWidgets
-    translate
-    tryLock
-    type
-    unlock
-    wakeUpGuiThread
-    wheelScrollLines
-    widgetAt
-    winEventFilter
-    winFocus
-    x11EventFilter
-    x11ProcessEvent
-    ~QApplication
-    Q_ASSERT
-    Q_CHECK_PTR
-    qAddPostRoutine
-    qDebug
-    qFatal
-    qInstallMsgHandler
-    qSysInfo
-    qSystemWarning
-    qVersion
-    qWarning
+
                                              
+    QApplication
+    ColorSpec
+    Encoding
+    Type
+    aboutTQt
+    aboutToQuit
+    activeModalWidget
+    activePopupWidget
+    activeWindow
+    addLibraryPath
+    allWidgets
+    applicationDirPath
+    applicationFilePath
+    argc
+    argv
+    beep
+    clipboard
+    closeAllWindows
+    closingDown
+    colorSpec
+    commitData
+    cursorFlashTime
+    desktop
+    desktopSettingsAware
+    doubleClickInterval
+    eventLoop
+    exec
+    exit
+    flush
+    flushX
+    focusWidget
+    font
+    fontMetrics
+    globalStrut
+    guiThreadAwake
+    hasGlobalMouseTracking
+    hasPendingEvents
+    horizontalAlignment
+    initialize
+    installTranslator
+    isEffectEnabled
+    isSessionRestored
+    lastWindowClosed
+    libraryPaths
+    lock
+    locked
+    macEventFilter
+    mainWidget
+    notify
+    overrideCursor
+    palette
+    polish
+    postEvent
+    processEvents
+    quit
+    qwsDecoration
+    qwsEventFilter
+    qwsSetCustomColors
+    qwsSetDecoration
+    removeLibraryPath
+    removePostedEvent
+    removePostedEvents
+    removeTranslator
+    restoreOverrideCursor
+    reverseLayout
+    saveState
+    sendEvent
+    sendPostedEvents
+    sessionId
+    sessionKey
+    setColorSpec
+    setCursorFlashTime
+    setDesktopSettingsAware
+    setDoubleClickInterval
+    setEffectEnabled
+    setFont
+    setGlobalMouseTracking
+    setGlobalStrut
+    setLibraryPaths
+    setMainWidget
+    setOverrideCursor
+    setPalette
+    setReverseLayout
+    setStartDragDistance
+    setStartDragTime
+    setStyle
+    setWheelScrollLines
+    startDragDistance
+    startDragTime
+    startingUp
+    style
+    syncX
+    topLevelWidgets
+    translate
+    tryLock
+    type
+    unlock
+    wakeUpGuiThread
+    wheelScrollLines
+    widgetAt
+    winEventFilter
+    winFocus
+    x11EventFilter
+    x11ProcessEvent
+    ~QApplication
+    Q_ASSERT
+    Q_CHECK_PTR
+    qAddPostRoutine
+    qDebug
+    qFatal
+    qInstallMsgHandler
+    qSysInfo
+    qSystemWarning
+    qVersion
+    qWarning
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QAsciiCache
-    clear
-    count
-    find
-    insert
-    isEmpty
-    maxCost
-    operator[]
-    remove
-    setMaxCost
-    size
-    statistics
-    take
-    totalCost
-    ~QAsciiCache
+
                                              
+    QAsciiCache
+    clear
+    count
+    find
+    insert
+    isEmpty
+    maxCost
+    operator[]
+    remove
+    setMaxCost
+    size
+    statistics
+    take
+    totalCost
+    ~QAsciiCache
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -288,24 +288,24 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QAsciiDict
-    clear
-    count
-    find
-    insert
-    isEmpty
-    operator=
-    operator[]
-    read
-    remove
-    replace
-    resize
-    size
-    statistics
-    take
-    write
-    ~QAsciiDict
+
                                              
+    QAsciiDict
+    clear
+    count
+    find
+    insert
+    isEmpty
+    operator=
+    operator[]
+    read
+    remove
+    replace
+    resize
+    size
+    statistics
+    take
+    write
+    ~QAsciiDict
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -324,25 +324,25 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QAssistantClient
-    assistantClosed
-    assistantOpened
-    closeAssistant
-    error
-    isOpen
-    open
-    openAssistant
-    setArguments
-    showPage
-    ~QAssistantClient
+
                                              
+    QAssistantClient
+    assistantClosed
+    assistantOpened
+    closeAssistant
+    error
+    isOpen
+    open
+    openAssistant
+    setArguments
+    showPage
+    ~QAssistantClient
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    connect
-    ready
-    ~QAsyncIO
+
                                              
+    connect
+    ready
+    ~QAsyncIO
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -486,8 +486,8 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QBig5Codec
+
                                              
+    QBig5Codec
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -496,37 +496,37 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QBitArray
-    at
-    clearBit
-    copy
-    detach
-    fill
-    operator&=
-    operator=
-    operator[]
-    operator^=
-    operator|=
-    operator~
-    pad0
-    resize
-    setBit
-    size
-    testBit
-    toggleBit
-    operator&
-    operator<<
-    operator>>
-    operator^
-    operator|
+
                                              
+    QBitArray
+    at
+    clearBit
+    copy
+    detach
+    fill
+    operator&=
+    operator=
+    operator[]
+    operator^=
+    operator|=
+    operator~
+    pad0
+    resize
+    setBit
+    size
+    testBit
+    toggleBit
+    operator&
+    operator<<
+    operator>>
+    operator^
+    operator|
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QBitmap
-    operator=
-    xForm
+
                                              
+    QBitmap
+    operator=
+    xForm
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -567,107 +567,107 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QBrush
-    color
-    copy
-    detach
-    operator!=
-    operator=
-    operator==
-    pixmap
-    setColor
-    setPixmap
-    setStyle
-    style
-    ~QBrush
-    operator<<
-    operator>>
+
                                              
+    QBrush
+    color
+    copy
+    detach
+    operator!=
+    operator=
+    operator==
+    pixmap
+    setColor
+    setPixmap
+    setStyle
+    style
+    ~QBrush
+    operator<<
+    operator>>
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QBuffer
-    buffer
-    setBuffer
-    writeBlock
-    ~QBuffer
+
                                              
+    QBuffer
+    buffer
+    setBuffer
+    writeBlock
+    ~QBuffer
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QButton
-    ToggleState
-    ToggleType
-    accel
-    accel
-    animateClick
-    animateTimeout
-    autoRepeat
-    autoRepeat
-    autoRepeatTimeout
-    clicked
-    down
-    drawButton
-    drawButtonLabel
-    exclusiveToggle
-    group
-    hitButton
-    isDown
-    isExclusiveToggle
-    isOn
-    isToggleButton
-    on
-    paintEvent
-    pixmap
-    pixmap
-    pressed
-    released
-    setAccel
-    setAutoRepeat
-    setDown
-    setOn
-    setPixmap
-    setState
-    setText
-    setToggleButton
-    setToggleType
-    state
-    stateChanged
-    text
-    text
-    toggle
-    toggleButton
-    toggleState
-    toggleType
-    toggleType
-    toggled
-    ~QButton
+
                                              
+    QButton
+    ToggleState
+    ToggleType
+    accel
+    accel
+    animateClick
+    animateTimeout
+    autoRepeat
+    autoRepeat
+    autoRepeatTimeout
+    clicked
+    down
+    drawButton
+    drawButtonLabel
+    exclusiveToggle
+    group
+    hitButton
+    isDown
+    isExclusiveToggle
+    isOn
+    isToggleButton
+    on
+    paintEvent
+    pixmap
+    pixmap
+    pressed
+    released
+    setAccel
+    setAutoRepeat
+    setDown
+    setOn
+    setPixmap
+    setState
+    setText
+    setToggleButton
+    setToggleType
+    state
+    stateChanged
+    text
+    text
+    toggle
+    toggleButton
+    toggleState
+    toggleType
+    toggleType
+    toggled
+    ~QButton
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QButtonGroup
-    clicked
-    count
-    exclusive
-    find
-    id
-    init
-    insert
-    isExclusive
-    isRadioButtonExclusive
-    moveFocus
-    pressed
-    radioButtonExclusive
-    released
-    remove
-    selected
-    selectedId
-    selectedId
-    setButton
-    setExclusive
-    setRadioButtonExclusive
+
                                              
+    QButtonGroup
+    clicked
+    count
+    exclusive
+    find
+    id
+    init
+    insert
+    isExclusive
+    isRadioButtonExclusive
+    moveFocus
+    pressed
+    radioButtonExclusive
+    released
+    remove
+    selected
+    selectedId
+    selectedId
+    setButton
+    setExclusive
+    setRadioButtonExclusive
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -678,22 +678,22 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QCache
-    clear
-    count
-    find
-    insert
-    isEmpty
-    maxCost
-    operator[]
-    remove
-    setMaxCost
-    size
-    statistics
-    take
-    totalCost
-    ~QCache
+
                                              
+    QCache
+    clear
+    count
+    find
+    insert
+    isEmpty
+    maxCost
+    operator[]
+    remove
+    setMaxCost
+    size
+    statistics
+    take
+    totalCost
+    ~QCache
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -717,43 +717,43 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QCanvas
-    advance
-    allItems
-    backgroundColor
-    backgroundPixmap
-    chunkSize
-    collisions
-    drawArea
-    drawBackground
-    drawForeground
-    height
-    onCanvas
-    rect
-    resize
-    resized
-    retune
-    setAdvancePeriod
-    setAllChanged
-    setBackgroundColor
-    setBackgroundPixmap
-    setChanged
-    setDoubleBuffering
-    setTile
-    setTiles
-    setUnchanged
-    setUpdatePeriod
-    size
-    tile
-    tileHeight
-    tileWidth
-    tilesHorizontally
-    tilesVertically
-    update
-    validChunk
-    width
-    ~QCanvas
+
                                              
+    QCanvas
+    advance
+    allItems
+    backgroundColor
+    backgroundPixmap
+    chunkSize
+    collisions
+    drawArea
+    drawBackground
+    drawForeground
+    height
+    onCanvas
+    rect
+    resize
+    resized
+    retune
+    setAdvancePeriod
+    setAllChanged
+    setBackgroundColor
+    setBackgroundPixmap
+    setChanged
+    setDoubleBuffering
+    setTile
+    setTiles
+    setUnchanged
+    setUpdatePeriod
+    size
+    tile
+    tileHeight
+    tileWidth
+    tilesHorizontally
+    tilesVertically
+    update
+    validChunk
+    width
+    ~QCanvas
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -963,9 +963,9 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QCDEStyle
-    ~QCDEStyle
+
                                              
+    QCDEStyle
+    ~QCDEStyle
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -1016,16 +1016,16 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QCheckBox
-    autoMask
-    checked
-    isChecked
-    isTristate
-    setChecked
-    setNoChange
-    setTristate
-    tristate
+
                                              
+    QCheckBox
+    autoMask
+    checked
+    isChecked
+    isTristate
+    setChecked
+    setNoChange
+    setTristate
+    tristate
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -1067,23 +1067,23 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QClipboard
-    Mode
-    clear
-    data
-    dataChanged
-    image
-    ownsClipboard
-    ownsSelection
-    pixmap
-    selectionChanged
-    setData
-    setImage
-    setPixmap
-    setText
-    supportsSelection
-    text
+
                                              
+    QClipboard
+    Mode
+    clear
+    data
+    dataChanged
+    image
+    ownsClipboard
+    ownsSelection
+    pixmap
+    selectionChanged
+    setData
+    setImage
+    setPixmap
+    setText
+    supportsSelection
+    text
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -1095,63 +1095,63 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QColor
-    Spec
-    alloc
-    blue
-    cleanup
-    colorNames
-    currentAllocContext
-    dark
-    destroyAllocContext
-    enterAllocContext
-    getHsv
-    getRgb
-    green
-    initGlobalColors
-    initialize
-    isValid
-    leaveAllocContext
-    light
-    maxColors
-    name
-    numBitPlanes
-    operator!=
-    operator=
-    operator==
-    pixel
-    red
-    rgb
-    setHsv
-    setNamedColor
-    setRgb
-    operator<<
-    operator>>
-    qAlpha
-    qBlue
-    qGray
-    qGreen
-    qRed
-    qRgb
-    qRgba
+
                                              
+    QColor
+    Spec
+    alloc
+    blue
+    cleanup
+    colorNames
+    currentAllocContext
+    dark
+    destroyAllocContext
+    enterAllocContext
+    getHsv
+    getRgb
+    green
+    initGlobalColors
+    initialize
+    isValid
+    leaveAllocContext
+    light
+    maxColors
+    name
+    numBitPlanes
+    operator!=
+    operator=
+    operator==
+    pixel
+    red
+    rgb
+    setHsv
+    setNamedColor
+    setRgb
+    operator<<
+    operator>>
+    qAlpha
+    qBlue
+    qGray
+    qGreen
+    qRed
+    qRgb
+    qRgba
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QColorDialog
-    color
-    customColor
-    customCount
-    getColor
-    getRgba
-    selectColor
-    selectedAlpha
-    setColor
-    setCustomColor
-    setSelectedAlpha
-    setStandardColor
-    ~QColorDialog
+
                                              
+    QColorDialog
+    color
+    customColor
+    customCount
+    getColor
+    getRgba
+    selectColor
+    selectedAlpha
+    setColor
+    setCustomColor
+    setSelectedAlpha
+    setStandardColor
+    ~QColorDialog
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -1194,62 +1194,62 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QComboBox
-    Policy
-    activated
-    autoCompletion
-    autoCompletion
-    autoMask
-    changeItem
-    clear
-    clearEdit
-    clearValidator
-    completionIndex
-    count
-    count
-    currentItem
-    currentItem
-    currentText
-    currentText
-    duplicatesEnabled
-    duplicatesEnabled
-    editable
-    editable
-    highlighted
-    insertItem
-    insertStrList
-    insertStringList
-    insertionPolicy
-    insertionPolicy
-    lineEdit
-    listBox
-    maxCount
-    maxCount
-    pixmap
-    popup
-    removeItem
-    returnPressed
-    setAutoCompletion
-    setCurrentItem
-    setCurrentText
-    setDuplicatesEnabled
-    setEditText
-    setEditable
-    setFont
-    setInsertionPolicy
-    setLineEdit
-    setListBox
-    setMaxCount
-    setPalette
-    setSizeLimit
-    setValidator
-    sizeLimit
-    sizeLimit
-    text
-    textChanged
-    validator
-    ~QComboBox
+
                                              
+    QComboBox
+    Policy
+    activated
+    autoCompletion
+    autoCompletion
+    autoMask
+    changeItem
+    clear
+    clearEdit
+    clearValidator
+    completionIndex
+    count
+    count
+    currentItem
+    currentItem
+    currentText
+    currentText
+    duplicatesEnabled
+    duplicatesEnabled
+    editable
+    editable
+    highlighted
+    insertItem
+    insertStrList
+    insertStringList
+    insertionPolicy
+    insertionPolicy
+    lineEdit
+    listBox
+    maxCount
+    maxCount
+    pixmap
+    popup
+    removeItem
+    returnPressed
+    setAutoCompletion
+    setCurrentItem
+    setCurrentText
+    setDuplicatesEnabled
+    setEditText
+    setEditable
+    setFont
+    setInsertionPolicy
+    setLineEdit
+    setListBox
+    setMaxCount
+    setPalette
+    setSizeLimit
+    setValidator
+    sizeLimit
+    sizeLimit
+    text
+    textChanged
+    validator
+    ~QComboBox
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -1268,8 +1268,8 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QCommonStyle
+
                                              
+    QCommonStyle
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -1310,84 +1310,84 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QCString
-    append
-    contains
-    copy
-    fill
-    find
-    findRev
-    insert
-    isEmpty
-    isNull
-    left
-    leftJustify
-    length
-    lower
-    mid
-    operator const char *
-    operator+=
-    operator=
-    prepend
-    remove
-    replace
-    resize
-    right
-    rightJustify
-    setExpand
-    setNum
-    setStr
-    simplifyWhiteSpace
-    sprintf
-    stripWhiteSpace
-    toDouble
-    toFloat
-    toInt
-    toLong
-    toShort
-    toUInt
-    toULong
-    toUShort
-    truncate
-    upper
-    operator!=
-    operator+
-    operator<
-    operator<<
-    operator<=
-    operator==
-    operator>
-    operator>=
-    operator>>
-    qmemmove
-    qstrcmp
-    qstrcpy
-    qstrdup
-    qstricmp
-    qstrlen
-    qstrncmp
-    qstrncpy
-    qstrnicmp
+
                                              
+    QCString
+    append
+    contains
+    copy
+    fill
+    find
+    findRev
+    insert
+    isEmpty
+    isNull
+    left
+    leftJustify
+    length
+    lower
+    mid
+    operator const char *
+    operator+=
+    operator=
+    prepend
+    remove
+    replace
+    resize
+    right
+    rightJustify
+    setExpand
+    setNum
+    setStr
+    simplifyWhiteSpace
+    sprintf
+    stripWhiteSpace
+    toDouble
+    toFloat
+    toInt
+    toLong
+    toShort
+    toUInt
+    toULong
+    toUShort
+    truncate
+    upper
+    operator!=
+    operator+
+    operator<
+    operator<<
+    operator<=
+    operator==
+    operator>
+    operator>=
+    operator>>
+    qmemmove
+    qstrcmp
+    qstrcpy
+    qstrdup
+    qstricmp
+    qstrlen
+    qstrncmp
+    qstrncpy
+    qstrnicmp
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QCursor
-    bitmap
-    cleanup
-    handle
-    hotSpot
-    initialize
-    mask
-    operator=
-    pos
-    setPos
-    setShape
-    shape
-    ~QCursor
-    operator<<
-    operator>>
+
                                              
+    QCursor
+    bitmap
+    cleanup
+    handle
+    hotSpot
+    initialize
+    mask
+    operator=
+    pos
+    setPos
+    setShape
+    shape
+    ~QCursor
+    operator<<
+    operator>>
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -1409,77 +1409,77 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QDataBrowser
-    Boundary
-    autoEdit
-    autoEdit
-    beforeDelete
-    beforeInsert
-    beforeUpdate
-    boundary
-    boundaryChecking
-    boundaryChecking
-    clearValues
-    confirmCancel
-    confirmCancels
-    confirmCancels
-    confirmDelete
-    confirmDelete
-    confirmEdit
-    confirmEdits
-    confirmEdits
-    confirmInsert
-    confirmInsert
-    confirmUpdate
-    confirmUpdate
-    currentChanged
-    currentEdited
-    cursorChanged
-    del
-    deleteCurrent
-    filter
-    filter
-    first
-    firstRecordAvailable
-    form
-    handleError
-    insert
-    insertCurrent
-    isReadOnly
-    last
-    lastRecordAvailable
-    next
-    nextRecordAvailable
-    prev
-    prevRecordAvailable
-    primeDelete
-    primeInsert
-    primeUpdate
-    readFields
-    readOnly
-    refresh
-    seek
-    setAutoEdit
-    setBoundaryChecking
-    setConfirmCancels
-    setConfirmDelete
-    setConfirmEdits
-    setConfirmInsert
-    setConfirmUpdate
-    setFilter
-    setForm
-    setReadOnly
-    setSort
-    setSqlCursor
-    sort
-    sort
-    sqlCursor
-    update
-    updateBoundary
-    updateCurrent
-    writeFields
-    ~QDataBrowser
+
                                              
+    QDataBrowser
+    Boundary
+    autoEdit
+    autoEdit
+    beforeDelete
+    beforeInsert
+    beforeUpdate
+    boundary
+    boundaryChecking
+    boundaryChecking
+    clearValues
+    confirmCancel
+    confirmCancels
+    confirmCancels
+    confirmDelete
+    confirmDelete
+    confirmEdit
+    confirmEdits
+    confirmEdits
+    confirmInsert
+    confirmInsert
+    confirmUpdate
+    confirmUpdate
+    currentChanged
+    currentEdited
+    cursorChanged
+    del
+    deleteCurrent
+    filter
+    filter
+    first
+    firstRecordAvailable
+    form
+    handleError
+    insert
+    insertCurrent
+    isReadOnly
+    last
+    lastRecordAvailable
+    next
+    nextRecordAvailable
+    prev
+    prevRecordAvailable
+    primeDelete
+    primeInsert
+    primeUpdate
+    readFields
+    readOnly
+    refresh
+    seek
+    setAutoEdit
+    setBoundaryChecking
+    setConfirmCancels
+    setConfirmDelete
+    setConfirmEdits
+    setConfirmInsert
+    setConfirmUpdate
+    setFilter
+    setForm
+    setReadOnly
+    setSort
+    setSqlCursor
+    sort
+    sort
+    sqlCursor
+    update
+    updateBoundary
+    updateCurrent
+    writeFields
+    ~QDataBrowser
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -1505,127 +1505,127 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QDataStream
-    ByteOrder
-    atEnd
-    byteOrder
-    device
-    isPrintableData
-    operator<<
-    operator>>
-    readBytes
-    readRawBytes
-    setByteOrder
-    setDevice
-    setPrintableData
-    setVersion
-    unsetDevice
-    version
-    writeBytes
-    writeRawBytes
-    ~QDataStream
+
                                              
+    QDataStream
+    ByteOrder
+    atEnd
+    byteOrder
+    device
+    isPrintableData
+    operator<<
+    operator>>
+    readBytes
+    readRawBytes
+    setByteOrder
+    setDevice
+    setPrintableData
+    setVersion
+    unsetDevice
+    version
+    writeBytes
+    writeRawBytes
+    ~QDataStream
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QDataTable
-    Refresh
-    addColumn
-    adjustColumn
-    autoDelete
-    autoEdit
-    autoEdit
-    beforeDelete
-    beforeInsert
-    beforeUpdate
-    beginInsert
-    beginUpdate
-    confirmCancel
-    confirmCancels
-    confirmCancels
-    confirmDelete
-    confirmDelete
-    confirmEdit
-    confirmEdits
-    confirmEdits
-    confirmInsert
-    confirmInsert
-    confirmUpdate
-    confirmUpdate
-    currentChanged
-    currentRecord
-    cursorChanged
-    dateFormat
-    dateFormat
-    deleteCurrent
-    falseText
-    falseText
-    fieldAlignment
-    filter
-    filter
-    find
-    handleError
-    indexOf
-    insertCurrent
-    installEditorFactory
-    installPropertyMap
-    nullText
-    nullText
-    numCols
-    numCols
-    numRows
-    numRows
-    paintField
-    primeDelete
-    primeInsert
-    primeUpdate
-    refresh
-    removeColumn
-    reset
-    setAutoDelete
-    setAutoEdit
-    setColumn
-    setColumnWidth
-    setConfirmCancels
-    setConfirmDelete
-    setConfirmEdits
-    setConfirmInsert
-    setConfirmUpdate
-    setDateFormat
-    setFalseText
-    setFilter
-    setNullText
-    setSize
-    setSort
-    setSqlCursor
-    setTrueText
-    sort
-    sort
-    sortAscending
-    sortColumn
-    sortDescending
-    sqlCursor
-    text
-    trueText
-    trueText
-    updateCurrent
-    value
-    ~QDataTable
+
                                              
+    QDataTable
+    Refresh
+    addColumn
+    adjustColumn
+    autoDelete
+    autoEdit
+    autoEdit
+    beforeDelete
+    beforeInsert
+    beforeUpdate
+    beginInsert
+    beginUpdate
+    confirmCancel
+    confirmCancels
+    confirmCancels
+    confirmDelete
+    confirmDelete
+    confirmEdit
+    confirmEdits
+    confirmEdits
+    confirmInsert
+    confirmInsert
+    confirmUpdate
+    confirmUpdate
+    currentChanged
+    currentRecord
+    cursorChanged
+    dateFormat
+    dateFormat
+    deleteCurrent
+    falseText
+    falseText
+    fieldAlignment
+    filter
+    filter
+    find
+    handleError
+    indexOf
+    insertCurrent
+    installEditorFactory
+    installPropertyMap
+    nullText
+    nullText
+    numCols
+    numCols
+    numRows
+    numRows
+    paintField
+    primeDelete
+    primeInsert
+    primeUpdate
+    refresh
+    removeColumn
+    reset
+    setAutoDelete
+    setAutoEdit
+    setColumn
+    setColumnWidth
+    setConfirmCancels
+    setConfirmDelete
+    setConfirmEdits
+    setConfirmInsert
+    setConfirmUpdate
+    setDateFormat
+    setFalseText
+    setFilter
+    setNullText
+    setSize
+    setSort
+    setSqlCursor
+    setTrueText
+    sort
+    sort
+    sortAscending
+    sortColumn
+    sortDescending
+    sqlCursor
+    text
+    trueText
+    trueText
+    updateCurrent
+    value
+    ~QDataTable
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QDataView
-    clearValues
-    form
-    readFields
-    record
-    refresh
-    setForm
-    setRecord
-    writeFields
-    ~QDataView
+
                                              
+    QDataView
+    clearValues
+    form
+    readFields
+    record
+    refresh
+    setForm
+    setRecord
+    writeFields
+    ~QDataView
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -1699,47 +1699,47 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QDateTime
-    addDays
-    addMonths
-    addSecs
-    addYears
-    currentDateTime
-    date
-    daysTo
-    fromString
-    isNull
-    isValid
-    operator!=
-    operator<
-    operator<=
-    operator==
-    operator>
-    operator>=
-    secsTo
-    setDate
-    setTime
-    setTime_t
-    time
-    toString
-    toTime_t
-    operator<<
-    operator>>
+
                                              
+    QDateTime
+    addDays
+    addMonths
+    addSecs
+    addYears
+    currentDateTime
+    date
+    daysTo
+    fromString
+    isNull
+    isValid
+    operator!=
+    operator<
+    operator<=
+    operator==
+    operator>
+    operator>=
+    secsTo
+    setDate
+    setTime
+    setTime_t
+    time
+    toString
+    toTime_t
+    operator<<
+    operator>>
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QDateTimeEdit
-    autoAdvance
-    dateEdit
-    dateTime
-    dateTime
-    setAutoAdvance
-    setDateTime
-    timeEdit
-    valueChanged
-    ~QDateTimeEdit
+
                                              
+    QDateTimeEdit
+    autoAdvance
+    dateEdit
+    dateTime
+    dateTime
+    setAutoAdvance
+    setDateTime
+    timeEdit
+    valueChanged
+    ~QDateTimeEdit
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -1748,116 +1748,116 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QDeepCopy
-    operator T
-    operator=
+
                                              
+    QDeepCopy
+    operator T
+    operator=
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QDesktopWidget
-    availableGeometry
-    isVirtualDesktop
-    numScreens
-    primaryScreen
-    resized
-    screen
-    screenGeometry
-    screenNumber
-    ~QDesktopWidget
+
                                              
+    QDesktopWidget
+    availableGeometry
+    isVirtualDesktop
+    numScreens
+    primaryScreen
+    resized
+    screen
+    screenGeometry
+    screenNumber
+    ~QDesktopWidget
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QDial
-    addLine
-    addPage
-    dialMoved
-    dialPressed
-    dialReleased
-    lineStep
-    lineStep
-    maxValue
-    maxValue
-    minValue
-    minValue
-    notchSize
-    notchSize
-    notchTarget
-    notchTarget
-    notchesVisible
-    notchesVisible
-    pageStep
-    pageStep
-    rangeChange
-    repaintScreen
-    setLineStep
-    setMaxValue
-    setMinValue
-    setNotchTarget
-    setNotchesVisible
-    setPageStep
-    setTracking
-    setValue
-    setWrapping
-    subtractLine
-    subtractPage
-    tracking
-    tracking
-    value
-    value
-    valueChange
-    valueChanged
-    wrapping
-    wrapping
-    ~QDial
+
                                              
+    QDial
+    addLine
+    addPage
+    dialMoved
+    dialPressed
+    dialReleased
+    lineStep
+    lineStep
+    maxValue
+    maxValue
+    minValue
+    minValue
+    notchSize
+    notchSize
+    notchTarget
+    notchTarget
+    notchesVisible
+    notchesVisible
+    pageStep
+    pageStep
+    rangeChange
+    repaintScreen
+    setLineStep
+    setMaxValue
+    setMinValue
+    setNotchTarget
+    setNotchesVisible
+    setPageStep
+    setTracking
+    setValue
+    setWrapping
+    subtractLine
+    subtractPage
+    tracking
+    tracking
+    value
+    value
+    valueChange
+    valueChanged
+    wrapping
+    wrapping
+    ~QDial
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QDialog
-    DialogCode
-    accept
-    done
-    exec
-    extension
-    isModal
-    isSizeGripEnabled
-    modal
-    orientation
-    reject
-    result
-    setExtension
-    setModal
-    setOrientation
-    setResult
-    setSizeGripEnabled
-    show
-    showExtension
-    sizeGripEnabled
-    ~QDialog
+
                                              
+    QDialog
+    DialogCode
+    accept
+    done
+    exec
+    extension
+    isModal
+    isSizeGripEnabled
+    modal
+    orientation
+    reject
+    result
+    setExtension
+    setModal
+    setOrientation
+    setResult
+    setSizeGripEnabled
+    show
+    showExtension
+    sizeGripEnabled
+    ~QDialog
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QDict
-    clear
-    count
-    find
-    insert
-    isEmpty
-    operator=
-    operator[]
-    read
-    remove
-    replace
-    resize
-    size
-    statistics
-    take
-    write
-    ~QDict
+
                                              
+    QDict
+    clear
+    count
+    find
+    insert
+    isEmpty
+    operator=
+    operator[]
+    read
+    remove
+    replace
+    resize
+    size
+    statistics
+    take
+    write
+    ~QDict
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -1875,58 +1875,58 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QDir
-    FilterSpec
-    SortSpec
-    absFilePath
-    absPath
-    canonicalPath
-    cd
-    cdUp
-    cleanDirPath
-    convertSeparators
-    convertToAbs
-    count
-    current
-    currentDirPath
-    dirName
-    drives
-    entryInfoList
-    entryList
-    exists
-    filePath
-    filter
-    home
-    homeDirPath
-    isReadable
-    isRelative
-    isRelativePath
-    isRoot
-    match
-    matchAllDirs
-    mkdir
-    nameFilter
-    operator!=
-    operator=
-    operator==
-    operator[]
-    path
-    refresh
-    remove
-    rename
-    rmdir
-    root
-    rootDirPath
-    separator
-    setCurrent
-    setFilter
-    setMatchAllDirs
-    setNameFilter
-    setPath
-    setSorting
-    sorting
-    ~QDir
+
                                              
+    QDir
+    FilterSpec
+    SortSpec
+    absFilePath
+    absPath
+    canonicalPath
+    cd
+    cdUp
+    cleanDirPath
+    convertSeparators
+    convertToAbs
+    count
+    current
+    currentDirPath
+    dirName
+    drives
+    entryInfoList
+    entryList
+    exists
+    filePath
+    filter
+    home
+    homeDirPath
+    isReadable
+    isRelative
+    isRelativePath
+    isRoot
+    match
+    matchAllDirs
+    mkdir
+    nameFilter
+    operator!=
+    operator=
+    operator==
+    operator[]
+    path
+    refresh
+    remove
+    rename
+    rmdir
+    root
+    rootDirPath
+    separator
+    setCurrent
+    setFilter
+    setMatchAllDirs
+    setNameFilter
+    setPath
+    setSorting
+    sorting
+    ~QDir
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -1950,97 +1950,97 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QDns
-    RecordType
-    addresses
-    canonicalName
-    hostNames
-    isWorking
-    label
-    mailServers
-    qualifiedNames
-    recordType
-    resultsReady
-    servers
-    setLabel
-    setRecordType
-    setStartQueryTimer
-    texts
-    ~QDns
+
                                              
+    QDns
+    RecordType
+    addresses
+    canonicalName
+    hostNames
+    isWorking
+    label
+    mailServers
+    qualifiedNames
+    recordType
+    resultsReady
+    servers
+    setLabel
+    setRecordType
+    setStartQueryTimer
+    texts
+    ~QDns
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QDockArea
-    HandlePosition
-    count
-    count
-    dockWindowList
-    empty
-    handlePosition
-    handlePosition
-    hasDockWindow
-    isDockWindowAccepted
-    isEmpty
-    lineUp
-    moveDockWindow
-    orientation
-    orientation
-    removeDockWindow
-    setAcceptDockWindow
-    ~QDockArea
-    operator<<
-    operator>>
+
                                              
+    QDockArea
+    HandlePosition
+    count
+    count
+    dockWindowList
+    empty
+    handlePosition
+    handlePosition
+    hasDockWindow
+    isDockWindowAccepted
+    isEmpty
+    lineUp
+    moveDockWindow
+    orientation
+    orientation
+    removeDockWindow
+    setAcceptDockWindow
+    ~QDockArea
+    operator<<
+    operator>>
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QDockWindow
-    CloseMode
-    Place
-    area
-    boxLayout
-    closeMode
-    closeMode
-    dock
-    fixedExtent
-    horizontallyStretchable
-    isCloseEnabled
-    isHorizontallyStretchable
-    isMovingEnabled
-    isResizeEnabled
-    isStretchable
-    isVerticallyStretchable
-    movingEnabled
-    newLine
-    newLine
-    offset
-    offset
-    opaqueMoving
-    opaqueMoving
-    orientation
-    orientationChanged
-    place
-    placeChanged
-    resizeEnabled
-    setCloseMode
-    setFixedExtentHeight
-    setFixedExtentWidth
-    setHorizontallyStretchable
-    setMovingEnabled
-    setNewLine
-    setOffset
-    setOpaqueMoving
-    setOrientation
-    setResizeEnabled
-    setVerticallyStretchable
-    setWidget
-    stretchable
-    undock
-    verticallyStretchable
-    visibilityChanged
-    widget
+
                                              
+    QDockWindow
+    CloseMode
+    Place
+    area
+    boxLayout
+    closeMode
+    closeMode
+    dock
+    fixedExtent
+    horizontallyStretchable
+    isCloseEnabled
+    isHorizontallyStretchable
+    isMovingEnabled
+    isResizeEnabled
+    isStretchable
+    isVerticallyStretchable
+    movingEnabled
+    newLine
+    newLine
+    offset
+    offset
+    opaqueMoving
+    opaqueMoving
+    orientation
+    orientationChanged
+    place
+    placeChanged
+    resizeEnabled
+    setCloseMode
+    setFixedExtentHeight
+    setFixedExtentWidth
+    setHorizontallyStretchable
+    setMovingEnabled
+    setNewLine
+    setOffset
+    setOpaqueMoving
+    setOrientation
+    setResizeEnabled
+    setVerticallyStretchable
+    setWidget
+    stretchable
+    undock
+    verticallyStretchable
+    visibilityChanged
+    widget
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -2374,19 +2374,19 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QDragObject
-    DragMode
-    drag
-    dragCopy
-    dragLink
-    dragMove
-    pixmap
-    pixmapHotSpot
-    setPixmap
-    source
-    target
-    ~QDragObject
+
                                              
+    QDragObject
+    DragMode
+    drag
+    dragCopy
+    dragLink
+    dragMove
+    pixmap
+    pixmapHotSpot
+    setPixmap
+    source
+    target
+    ~QDragObject
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -2409,173 +2409,173 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    ~QDropSite
+
                                              
+    ~QDropSite
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QEditorFactory
-    createEditor
-    defaultFactory
-    installDefaultFactory
-    ~QEditorFactory
+
                                              
+    QEditorFactory
+    createEditor
+    defaultFactory
+    installDefaultFactory
+    ~QEditorFactory
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QErrorMessage
-    message
-    qtHandler
-    ~QErrorMessage
+
                                              
+    QErrorMessage
+    message
+    qtHandler
+    ~QErrorMessage
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QEucJpCodec
-    mibEnum
-    mimeName
-    ~QEucJpCodec
+
                                              
+    QEucJpCodec
+    mibEnum
+    mimeName
+    ~QEucJpCodec
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QEucKrCodec
-    mimeName
+
                                              
+    QEucKrCodec
+    mimeName
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QEvent
-    Type
-    spontaneous
-    type
-    ~QEvent
+
                                              
+    QEvent
+    Type
+    spontaneous
+    type
+    ~QEvent
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QEventLoop
-    ProcessEvents
-    ProcessEventsFlags
-    aboutToBlock
-    activateSocketNotifiers
-    activateTimers
-    awake
-    enterLoop
-    exec
-    exit
-    exitLoop
-    hasPendingEvents
-    loopLevel
-    processEvents
-    registerSocketNotifier
-    setSocketNotifierPending
-    timeToWait
-    unregisterSocketNotifier
-    wakeUp
-    ~QEventLoop
+
                                              
+    QEventLoop
+    ProcessEvents
+    ProcessEventsFlags
+    aboutToBlock
+    activateSocketNotifiers
+    activateTimers
+    awake
+    enterLoop
+    exec
+    exit
+    exitLoop
+    hasPendingEvents
+    loopLevel
+    processEvents
+    registerSocketNotifier
+    setSocketNotifierPending
+    timeToWait
+    unregisterSocketNotifier
+    wakeUp
+    ~QEventLoop
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QFile
-    DecoderFn
-    EncoderFn
-    at
-    atEnd
-    close
-    decodeName
-    encodeName
-    errorString
-    exists
-    flush
-    getch
-    handle
-    name
-    open
-    putch
-    readLine
-    remove
-    setDecodingFunction
-    setEncodingFunction
-    setErrorString
-    setName
-    size
-    ungetch
-    writeBlock
-    ~QFile
+
                                              
+    QFile
+    DecoderFn
+    EncoderFn
+    at
+    atEnd
+    close
+    decodeName
+    encodeName
+    errorString
+    exists
+    flush
+    getch
+    handle
+    name
+    open
+    putch
+    readLine
+    remove
+    setDecodingFunction
+    setEncodingFunction
+    setErrorString
+    setName
+    size
+    ungetch
+    writeBlock
+    ~QFile
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QFileDialog
-    Mode
-    PreviewMode
-    ViewMode
-    addFilter
-    addLeftWidget
-    addRightWidget
-    addToolButton
-    addWidgets
-    contentsPreview
-    dir
-    dirEntered
-    dirPath
-    dirPath
-    fileHighlighted
-    fileNameEditDone
-    fileSelected
-    filesSelected
-    filterSelected
-    fixupNameEdit
-    getExistingDirectory
-    getOpenFileName
-    getOpenFileNames
-    getSaveFileName
-    iconProvider
-    infoPreview
-    isContentsPreviewEnabled
-    isInfoPreviewEnabled
-    mode
-    mode
-    modeButtonsDestroyed
-    previewMode
-    previewMode
-    rereadDir
-    resortDir
-    selectAll
-    selectDirectoryOrFile
-    selectedFile
-    selectedFile
-    selectedFiles
-    selectedFiles
-    selectedFilter
-    selectedFilter
-    setContentsPreview
-    setContentsPreviewEnabled
-    setDir
-    setFilter
-    setFilters
-    setIconProvider
-    setInfoPreview
-    setInfoPreviewEnabled
-    setMode
-    setPreviewMode
-    setSelectedFilter
-    setSelection
-    setShowHiddenFiles
-    setUrl
-    setViewMode
-    showHiddenFiles
-    showHiddenFiles
-    stopCopy
-    updateFileNameEdit
-    updateGeometries
-    url
-    viewMode
-    viewMode
-    ~QFileDialog
+
                                              
+    QFileDialog
+    Mode
+    PreviewMode
+    ViewMode
+    addFilter
+    addLeftWidget
+    addRightWidget
+    addToolButton
+    addWidgets
+    contentsPreview
+    dir
+    dirEntered
+    dirPath
+    dirPath
+    fileHighlighted
+    fileNameEditDone
+    fileSelected
+    filesSelected
+    filterSelected
+    fixupNameEdit
+    getExistingDirectory
+    getOpenFileName
+    getOpenFileNames
+    getSaveFileName
+    iconProvider
+    infoPreview
+    isContentsPreviewEnabled
+    isInfoPreviewEnabled
+    mode
+    mode
+    modeButtonsDestroyed
+    previewMode
+    previewMode
+    rereadDir
+    resortDir
+    selectAll
+    selectDirectoryOrFile
+    selectedFile
+    selectedFile
+    selectedFiles
+    selectedFiles
+    selectedFilter
+    selectedFilter
+    setContentsPreview
+    setContentsPreviewEnabled
+    setDir
+    setFilter
+    setFilters
+    setIconProvider
+    setInfoPreview
+    setInfoPreviewEnabled
+    setMode
+    setPreviewMode
+    setSelectedFilter
+    setSelection
+    setShowHiddenFiles
+    setUrl
+    setViewMode
+    showHiddenFiles
+    showHiddenFiles
+    stopCopy
+    updateFileNameEdit
+    updateGeometries
+    url
+    viewMode
+    viewMode
+    ~QFileDialog
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -2585,42 +2585,42 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QFileInfo
-    PermissionSpec
-    absFilePath
-    baseName
-    caching
-    convertToAbs
-    created
-    dir
-    dirPath
-    exists
-    extension
-    fileName
-    filePath
-    group
-    groupId
-    isDir
-    isExecutable
-    isFile
-    isHidden
-    isReadable
-    isRelative
-    isSymLink
-    isWritable
-    lastModified
-    lastRead
-    operator=
-    owner
-    ownerId
-    permission
-    readLink
-    refresh
-    setCaching
-    setFile
-    size
-    ~QFileInfo
+
                                              
+    QFileInfo
+    PermissionSpec
+    absFilePath
+    baseName
+    caching
+    convertToAbs
+    created
+    dir
+    dirPath
+    exists
+    extension
+    fileName
+    filePath
+    group
+    groupId
+    isDir
+    isExecutable
+    isFile
+    isHidden
+    isReadable
+    isRelative
+    isSymLink
+    isWritable
+    lastModified
+    lastRead
+    operator=
+    owner
+    ownerId
+    permission
+    readLink
+    refresh
+    setCaching
+    setFile
+    size
+    ~QFileInfo
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -2630,15 +2630,15 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QFocusData
-    count
-    first
-    focusWidget
-    home
-    last
-    next
-    prev
+
                                              
+    QFocusData
+    count
+    first
+    focusWidget
+    home
+    last
+    next
+    prev
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -2653,114 +2653,114 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QFont
-    Script
-    Stretch
-    StyleHint
-    StyleStrategy
-    Weight
-    bold
-    deciPointSize
-    defaultFamily
-    dirty
-    exactMatch
-    family
-    fixedPitch
-    fromString
-    handle
-    insertSubstitution
-    insertSubstitutions
-    isCopyOf
-    italic
-    key
-    lastResortFamily
-    lastResortFont
-    operator!=
-    operator=
-    operator==
-    overline
-    pixelSize
-    pointSize
-    pointSizeFloat
-    qwsRenderToDisk
-    rawMode
-    rawName
-    removeSubstitution
-    resolve
-    setBold
-    setFamily
-    setFixedPitch
-    setItalic
-    setOverline
-    setPixelSize
-    setPointSize
-    setPointSizeFloat
-    setRawMode
-    setRawName
-    setStretch
-    setStrikeOut
-    setStyleHint
-    setStyleStrategy
-    setUnderline
-    setWeight
-    stretch
-    strikeOut
-    styleHint
-    styleStrategy
-    substitute
-    substitutes
-    substitutions
-    toString
-    underline
-    weight
-    ~QFont
-    operator<<
-    operator>>
+
                                              
+    QFont
+    Script
+    Stretch
+    StyleHint
+    StyleStrategy
+    Weight
+    bold
+    deciPointSize
+    defaultFamily
+    dirty
+    exactMatch
+    family
+    fixedPitch
+    fromString
+    handle
+    insertSubstitution
+    insertSubstitutions
+    isCopyOf
+    italic
+    key
+    lastResortFamily
+    lastResortFont
+    operator!=
+    operator=
+    operator==
+    overline
+    pixelSize
+    pointSize
+    pointSizeFloat
+    qwsRenderToDisk
+    rawMode
+    rawName
+    removeSubstitution
+    resolve
+    setBold
+    setFamily
+    setFixedPitch
+    setItalic
+    setOverline
+    setPixelSize
+    setPointSize
+    setPointSizeFloat
+    setRawMode
+    setRawName
+    setStretch
+    setStrikeOut
+    setStyleHint
+    setStyleStrategy
+    setUnderline
+    setWeight
+    stretch
+    strikeOut
+    styleHint
+    styleStrategy
+    substitute
+    substitutes
+    substitutions
+    toString
+    underline
+    weight
+    ~QFont
+    operator<<
+    operator>>
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QFontDatabase
-    bold
-    families
-    font
-    isBitmapScalable
-    isFixedPitch
-    isScalable
-    isSmoothlyScalable
-    italic
-    pointSizes
-    scriptName
-    scriptSample
-    smoothSizes
-    standardSizes
-    styleString
-    styles
-    weight
+
                                              
+    QFontDatabase
+    bold
+    families
+    font
+    isBitmapScalable
+    isFixedPitch
+    isScalable
+    isSmoothlyScalable
+    italic
+    pointSizes
+    scriptName
+    scriptSample
+    smoothSizes
+    standardSizes
+    styleString
+    styles
+    weight
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QFontDialog
-    getFont
+
                                              
+    QFontDialog
+    getFont
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QFontInfo
-    bold
-    exactMatch
-    family
-    fixedPitch
-    italic
-    operator=
-    pixelSize
-    pointSize
-    rawMode
-    styleHint
-    weight
-    ~QFontInfo
+
                                              
+    QFontInfo
+    bold
+    exactMatch
+    family
+    fixedPitch
+    italic
+    operator=
+    pixelSize
+    pointSize
+    rawMode
+    styleHint
+    weight
+    ~QFontInfo
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -2773,111 +2773,111 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QFontMetrics
-    ascent
-    boundingRect
-    charWidth
-    descent
-    height
-    inFont
-    leading
-    leftBearing
-    lineSpacing
-    lineWidth
-    maxWidth
-    minLeftBearing
-    minRightBearing
-    operator=
-    overlinePos
-    rightBearing
-    size
-    strikeOutPos
-    underlinePos
-    width
-    ~QFontMetrics
+
                                              
+    QFontMetrics
+    ascent
+    boundingRect
+    charWidth
+    descent
+    height
+    inFont
+    leading
+    leftBearing
+    lineSpacing
+    lineWidth
+    maxWidth
+    minLeftBearing
+    minRightBearing
+    operator=
+    overlinePos
+    rightBearing
+    size
+    strikeOutPos
+    underlinePos
+    width
+    ~QFontMetrics
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QFrame
-    Shadow
-    Shape
-    contentsRect
-    contentsRect
-    drawContents
-    drawFrame
-    frameChanged
-    frameRect
-    frameRect
-    frameShadow
-    frameShadow
-    frameShape
-    frameShape
-    frameStyle
-    frameWidth
-    frameWidth
-    lineWidth
-    lineWidth
-    margin
-    margin
-    midLineWidth
-    midLineWidth
-    paintEvent
-    resizeEvent
-    setFrameRect
-    setFrameShadow
-    setFrameShape
-    setFrameStyle
-    setLineWidth
-    setMargin
-    setMidLineWidth
+
                                              
+    QFrame
+    Shadow
+    Shape
+    contentsRect
+    contentsRect
+    drawContents
+    drawFrame
+    frameChanged
+    frameRect
+    frameRect
+    frameShadow
+    frameShadow
+    frameShape
+    frameShape
+    frameStyle
+    frameWidth
+    frameWidth
+    lineWidth
+    lineWidth
+    margin
+    margin
+    midLineWidth
+    midLineWidth
+    paintEvent
+    resizeEvent
+    setFrameRect
+    setFrameShadow
+    setFrameShape
+    setFrameStyle
+    setLineWidth
+    setMargin
+    setMidLineWidth
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QFtp
-    Command
-    Error
-    State
-    abort
-    bytesAvailable
-    cd
-    clearPendingCommands
-    close
-    commandFinished
-    commandStarted
-    connectToHost
-    currentCommand
-    currentDevice
-    currentId
-    dataTransferProgress
-    done
-    error
-    errorString
-    get
-    hasPendingCommands
-    list
-    listInfo
-    login
-    mkdir
-    put
-    rawCommand
-    rawCommandReply
-    readAll
-    readBlock
-    readyRead
-    remove
-    rename
-    rmdir
-    state
-    stateChanged
-    ~QFtp
+
                                              
+    QFtp
+    Command
+    Error
+    State
+    abort
+    bytesAvailable
+    cd
+    clearPendingCommands
+    close
+    commandFinished
+    commandStarted
+    connectToHost
+    currentCommand
+    currentDevice
+    currentId
+    dataTransferProgress
+    done
+    error
+    errorString
+    get
+    hasPendingCommands
+    list
+    listInfo
+    login
+    mkdir
+    put
+    rawCommand
+    rawCommandReply
+    readAll
+    readBlock
+    readyRead
+    remove
+    rename
+    rmdir
+    state
+    stateChanged
+    ~QFtp
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QGb18030Codec
+
                                              
+    QGb18030Codec
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -2886,8 +2886,8 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QGbkCodec
+
                                              
+    QGbkCodec
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -2906,9 +2906,9 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QGL
-    FormatOption
+
                                              
+    QGL
+    FormatOption
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -2921,19 +2921,19 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QGLColormap
-    detach
-    entryColor
-    entryRgb
-    find
-    findNearest
-    isEmpty
-    operator=
-    setEntries
-    setEntry
-    size
-    ~QGLColormap
+
                                              
+    QGLColormap
+    detach
+    entryColor
+    entryRgb
+    find
+    findNearest
+    isEmpty
+    operator=
+    setEntries
+    setEntry
+    size
+    ~QGLColormap
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -3037,9 +3037,9 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QGrid
-    setSpacing
+
                                              
+    QGrid
+    setSpacing
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -3081,86 +3081,86 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QGridView
-    cellGeometry
-    cellHeight
-    cellHeight
-    cellRect
-    cellWidth
-    cellWidth
-    columnAt
-    dimensionChange
-    ensureCellVisible
-    gridSize
-    numCols
-    numCols
-    numRows
-    numRows
-    paintCell
-    paintEmptyArea
-    repaintCell
-    rowAt
-    setCellHeight
-    setCellWidth
-    setNumCols
-    setNumRows
-    updateCell
-    ~QGridView
+
                                              
+    QGridView
+    cellGeometry
+    cellHeight
+    cellHeight
+    cellRect
+    cellWidth
+    cellWidth
+    columnAt
+    dimensionChange
+    ensureCellVisible
+    gridSize
+    numCols
+    numCols
+    numRows
+    numRows
+    paintCell
+    paintEmptyArea
+    repaintCell
+    rowAt
+    setCellHeight
+    setCellWidth
+    setNumCols
+    setNumRows
+    updateCell
+    ~QGridView
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QGroupBox
-    addSpace
-    alignment
-    alignment
-    checkable
-    checked
-    columns
-    columns
-    flat
-    insideMargin
-    insideSpacing
-    isCheckable
-    isChecked
-    isFlat
-    orientation
-    orientation
-    setAlignment
-    setCheckable
-    setChecked
-    setColumnLayout
-    setColumns
-    setFlat
-    setInsideMargin
-    setInsideSpacing
-    setOrientation
-    setTitle
-    title
-    title
-    toggled
-    ~QGroupBox
+
                                              
+    QGroupBox
+    addSpace
+    alignment
+    alignment
+    checkable
+    checked
+    columns
+    columns
+    flat
+    insideMargin
+    insideSpacing
+    isCheckable
+    isChecked
+    isFlat
+    orientation
+    orientation
+    setAlignment
+    setCheckable
+    setChecked
+    setColumnLayout
+    setColumns
+    setFlat
+    setInsideMargin
+    setInsideSpacing
+    setOrientation
+    setTitle
+    title
+    title
+    toggled
+    ~QGroupBox
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QGuardedPtr
-    isNull
-    operator T *
-    operator!=
-    operator*
-    operator->
-    operator=
-    operator==
-    ~QGuardedPtr
+
                                              
+    QGuardedPtr
+    isNull
+    operator T *
+    operator!=
+    operator*
+    operator->
+    operator=
+    operator==
+    ~QGuardedPtr
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QHBox
-    setSpacing
-    setStretchFactor
+
                                              
+    QHBox
+    setSpacing
+    setStretchFactor
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -3170,65 +3170,65 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QHButtonGroup
-    ~QHButtonGroup
+
                                              
+    QHButtonGroup
+    ~QHButtonGroup
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QHeader
-    addLabel
-    adjustHeaderSize
-    clicked
-    count
-    count
-    handleAt
-    handleColumnMove
-    headerWidth
-    iconSet
-    indexChange
-    isClickEnabled
-    isMovingEnabled
-    isResizeEnabled
-    isStretchEnabled
-    label
-    mapToIndex
-    mapToSection
-    moveSection
-    moving
-    offset
-    offset
-    orientation
-    orientation
-    paintSection
-    paintSectionLabel
-    pressed
-    released
-    removeLabel
-    resizeSection
-    sRect
-    sectionAt
-    sectionHandleDoubleClicked
-    sectionPos
-    sectionRect
-    sectionSize
-    setClickEnabled
-    setLabel
-    setMovingEnabled
-    setOffset
-    setOrientation
-    setResizeEnabled
-    setSortIndicator
-    setStretchEnabled
-    setTracking
-    sizeChange
-    sortIndicatorOrder
-    sortIndicatorSection
-    stretching
-    tracking
-    tracking
-    ~QHeader
+
                                              
+    QHeader
+    addLabel
+    adjustHeaderSize
+    clicked
+    count
+    count
+    handleAt
+    handleColumnMove
+    headerWidth
+    iconSet
+    indexChange
+    isClickEnabled
+    isMovingEnabled
+    isResizeEnabled
+    isStretchEnabled
+    label
+    mapToIndex
+    mapToSection
+    moveSection
+    moving
+    offset
+    offset
+    orientation
+    orientation
+    paintSection
+    paintSectionLabel
+    pressed
+    released
+    removeLabel
+    resizeSection
+    sRect
+    sectionAt
+    sectionHandleDoubleClicked
+    sectionPos
+    sectionRect
+    sectionSize
+    setClickEnabled
+    setLabel
+    setMovingEnabled
+    setOffset
+    setOrientation
+    setResizeEnabled
+    setSortIndicator
+    setStretchEnabled
+    setTracking
+    sizeChange
+    sortIndicatorOrder
+    sortIndicatorSection
+    stretching
+    tracking
+    tracking
+    ~QHeader
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -3239,9 +3239,9 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QHGroupBox
-    ~QHGroupBox
+
                                              
+    QHGroupBox
+    ~QHGroupBox
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -3250,53 +3250,53 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QHostAddress
-    isIPv4Address
-    isIPv6Address
-    isNull
-    operator=
-    operator==
-    setAddress
-    toIPv4Address
-    toIPv6Address
-    toString
-    ~QHostAddress
+
                                              
+    QHostAddress
+    isIPv4Address
+    isIPv6Address
+    isNull
+    operator=
+    operator==
+    setAddress
+    toIPv4Address
+    toIPv6Address
+    toString
+    ~QHostAddress
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QHttp
-    Error
-    State
-    abort
-    bytesAvailable
-    clearPendingRequests
-    closeConnection
-    currentDestinationDevice
-    currentId
-    currentRequest
-    currentSourceDevice
-    dataReadProgress
-    dataSendProgress
-    done
-    error
-    errorString
-    get
-    hasPendingRequests
-    head
-    post
-    readAll
-    readBlock
-    readyRead
-    request
-    requestFinished
-    requestStarted
-    responseHeaderReceived
-    setHost
-    state
-    stateChanged
-    ~QHttp
+
                                              
+    QHttp
+    Error
+    State
+    abort
+    bytesAvailable
+    clearPendingRequests
+    closeConnection
+    currentDestinationDevice
+    currentId
+    currentRequest
+    currentSourceDevice
+    dataReadProgress
+    dataSendProgress
+    done
+    error
+    errorString
+    get
+    hasPendingRequests
+    head
+    post
+    readAll
+    readBlock
+    readyRead
+    request
+    requestFinished
+    requestStarted
+    responseHeaderReceived
+    setHost
+    state
+    stateChanged
+    ~QHttp
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -3378,133 +3378,133 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QIconSet
-    Mode
-    Size
-    State
-    clearGenerated
-    createDisabled
-    createScaled
-    detach
-    iconSize
-    installIconFactory
-    isGenerated
-    isNull
-    operator=
-    pixmap
-    reset
-    setIconSize
-    setPixmap
-    ~QIconSet
+
                                              
+    QIconSet
+    Mode
+    Size
+    State
+    clearGenerated
+    createDisabled
+    createScaled
+    detach
+    iconSize
+    installIconFactory
+    isGenerated
+    isNull
+    operator=
+    pixmap
+    reset
+    setIconSize
+    setPixmap
+    ~QIconSet
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QIconView
-    Arrangement
-    ItemTextPos
-    ResizeMode
-    SelectionMode
-    adjustItems
-    arrangeItemsInGrid
-    arrangement
-    arrangement
-    autoArrange
-    autoArrange
-    clear
-    clearSelection
-    clicked
-    contextMenuRequested
-    count
-    count
-    currentChanged
-    currentItem
-    doAutoScroll
-    doubleClicked
-    dragObject
-    drawBackground
-    drawDragShapes
-    drawRubber
-    dropped
-    emitSelectionChanged
-    ensureItemVisible
-    findFirstVisibleItem
-    findItem
-    findLastVisibleItem
-    firstItem
-    gridX
-    gridX
-    gridY
-    gridY
-    index
-    initDragEnter
-    insertInGrid
-    insertItem
-    invertSelection
-    isRenaming
-    itemRenamed
-    itemTextBackground
-    itemTextBackground
-    itemTextPos
-    itemTextPos
-    itemsMovable
-    itemsMovable
-    lastItem
-    makeRowLayout
-    maxItemTextLength
-    maxItemTextLength
-    maxItemWidth
-    maxItemWidth
-    mouseButtonClicked
-    mouseButtonPressed
-    moved
-    onItem
-    onViewport
-    pressed
-    repaintItem
-    repaintSelectedItems
-    resizeMode
-    resizeMode
-    returnPressed
-    rightButtonClicked
-    rightButtonPressed
-    selectAll
-    selectionChanged
-    selectionMode
-    selectionMode
-    setArrangement
-    setAutoArrange
-    setCurrentItem
-    setGridX
-    setGridY
-    setItemTextBackground
-    setItemTextPos
-    setItemsMovable
-    setMaxItemTextLength
-    setMaxItemWidth
-    setResizeMode
-    setSelected
-    setSelectionMode
-    setShowToolTips
-    setSorting
-    setSpacing
-    setWordWrapIconText
-    showToolTips
-    showToolTips
-    slotUpdate
-    sort
-    sortDirection
-    sortDirection
-    sorting
-    sorting
-    spacing
-    spacing
-    startDrag
-    takeItem
-    wordWrapIconText
-    wordWrapIconText
-    ~QIconView
+
                                              
+    QIconView
+    Arrangement
+    ItemTextPos
+    ResizeMode
+    SelectionMode
+    adjustItems
+    arrangeItemsInGrid
+    arrangement
+    arrangement
+    autoArrange
+    autoArrange
+    clear
+    clearSelection
+    clicked
+    contextMenuRequested
+    count
+    count
+    currentChanged
+    currentItem
+    doAutoScroll
+    doubleClicked
+    dragObject
+    drawBackground
+    drawDragShapes
+    drawRubber
+    dropped
+    emitSelectionChanged
+    ensureItemVisible
+    findFirstVisibleItem
+    findItem
+    findLastVisibleItem
+    firstItem
+    gridX
+    gridX
+    gridY
+    gridY
+    index
+    initDragEnter
+    insertInGrid
+    insertItem
+    invertSelection
+    isRenaming
+    itemRenamed
+    itemTextBackground
+    itemTextBackground
+    itemTextPos
+    itemTextPos
+    itemsMovable
+    itemsMovable
+    lastItem
+    makeRowLayout
+    maxItemTextLength
+    maxItemTextLength
+    maxItemWidth
+    maxItemWidth
+    mouseButtonClicked
+    mouseButtonPressed
+    moved
+    onItem
+    onViewport
+    pressed
+    repaintItem
+    repaintSelectedItems
+    resizeMode
+    resizeMode
+    returnPressed
+    rightButtonClicked
+    rightButtonPressed
+    selectAll
+    selectionChanged
+    selectionMode
+    selectionMode
+    setArrangement
+    setAutoArrange
+    setCurrentItem
+    setGridX
+    setGridY
+    setItemTextBackground
+    setItemTextPos
+    setItemsMovable
+    setMaxItemTextLength
+    setMaxItemWidth
+    setResizeMode
+    setSelected
+    setSelectionMode
+    setShowToolTips
+    setSorting
+    setSpacing
+    setWordWrapIconText
+    showToolTips
+    showToolTips
+    slotUpdate
+    sort
+    sortDirection
+    sortDirection
+    sorting
+    sorting
+    spacing
+    spacing
+    startDrag
+    takeItem
+    wordWrapIconText
+    wordWrapIconText
+    ~QIconView
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -3567,82 +3567,82 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QImage
-    Endian
-    ScaleMode
-    allGray
-    bitOrder
-    bits
-    bytesPerLine
-    color
-    colorTable
-    convertBitOrder
-    convertDepth
-    convertDepthWithPalette
-    copy
-    create
-    createAlphaMask
-    createHeuristicMask
-    depth
-    detach
-    dotsPerMeterX
-    dotsPerMeterY
-    fill
-    fromMimeSource
-    hasAlphaBuffer
-    height
-    imageFormat
-    inputFormatList
-    inputFormats
-    invertPixels
-    isGrayscale
-    isNull
-    jumpTable
-    load
-    loadFromData
-    mirror
-    numBytes
-    numColors
-    offset
-    operator!=
-    operator=
-    operator==
-    outputFormatList
-    outputFormats
-    pixel
-    pixelIndex
-    rect
-    reset
-    save
-    scale
-    scaleHeight
-    scaleWidth
-    scanLine
-    setAlphaBuffer
-    setColor
-    setDotsPerMeterX
-    setDotsPerMeterY
-    setNumColors
-    setOffset
-    setPixel
-    setText
-    size
-    smoothScale
-    swapRGB
-    systemBitOrder
-    systemByteOrder
-    text
-    textKeys
-    textLanguages
-    textList
-    valid
-    width
-    xForm
-    ~QImage
-    bitBlt
-    operator<<
-    operator>>
+
                                              
+    QImage
+    Endian
+    ScaleMode
+    allGray
+    bitOrder
+    bits
+    bytesPerLine
+    color
+    colorTable
+    convertBitOrder
+    convertDepth
+    convertDepthWithPalette
+    copy
+    create
+    createAlphaMask
+    createHeuristicMask
+    depth
+    detach
+    dotsPerMeterX
+    dotsPerMeterY
+    fill
+    fromMimeSource
+    hasAlphaBuffer
+    height
+    imageFormat
+    inputFormatList
+    inputFormats
+    invertPixels
+    isGrayscale
+    isNull
+    jumpTable
+    load
+    loadFromData
+    mirror
+    numBytes
+    numColors
+    offset
+    operator!=
+    operator=
+    operator==
+    outputFormatList
+    outputFormats
+    pixel
+    pixelIndex
+    rect
+    reset
+    save
+    scale
+    scaleHeight
+    scaleWidth
+    scanLine
+    setAlphaBuffer
+    setColor
+    setDotsPerMeterX
+    setDotsPerMeterY
+    setNumColors
+    setOffset
+    setPixel
+    setText
+    size
+    smoothScale
+    swapRGB
+    systemBitOrder
+    systemByteOrder
+    text
+    textKeys
+    textLanguages
+    textList
+    valid
+    width
+    xForm
+    ~QImage
+    bitBlt
+    operator<<
+    operator>>
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -3685,11 +3685,11 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QImageFormatPlugin
-    installIOHandler
-    keys
-    ~QImageFormatPlugin
+
                                              
+    QImageFormatPlugin
+    installIOHandler
+    keys
+    ~QImageFormatPlugin
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -3743,39 +3743,39 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QInputDialog
-    Type
-    comboBox
-    editableComboBox
-    getDouble
-    getInteger
-    getItem
-    getText
-    lineEdit
-    setType
-    spinBox
-    type
-    ~QInputDialog
+
                                              
+    QInputDialog
+    Type
+    comboBox
+    editableComboBox
+    getDouble
+    getInteger
+    getItem
+    getText
+    lineEdit
+    setType
+    spinBox
+    type
+    ~QInputDialog
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QIntCache
-    clear
-    count
-    find
-    insert
-    isEmpty
-    maxCost
-    operator[]
-    remove
-    setMaxCost
-    size
-    statistics
-    take
-    totalCost
-    ~QIntCache
+
                                              
+    QIntCache
+    clear
+    count
+    find
+    insert
+    isEmpty
+    maxCost
+    operator[]
+    remove
+    setMaxCost
+    size
+    statistics
+    take
+    totalCost
+    ~QIntCache
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -3799,24 +3799,24 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QIntDict
-    clear
-    count
-    find
-    insert
-    isEmpty
-    operator=
-    operator[]
-    read
-    remove
-    replace
-    resize
-    size
-    statistics
-    take
-    write
-    ~QIntDict
+
                                              
+    QIntDict
+    clear
+    count
+    find
+    insert
+    isEmpty
+    operator=
+    operator[]
+    read
+    remove
+    replace
+    resize
+    size
+    statistics
+    take
+    write
+    ~QIntDict
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -3849,47 +3849,47 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QIODevice
-    Offset
-    at
-    atEnd
-    close
-    flags
-    flush
-    getch
-    isAsynchronous
-    isBuffered
-    isCombinedAccess
-    isDirectAccess
-    isInactive
-    isOpen
-    isRaw
-    isReadWrite
-    isReadable
-    isSequentialAccess
-    isSynchronous
-    isTranslated
-    isWritable
-    mode
-    open
-    putch
-    readAll
-    readBlock
-    readLine
-    reset
-    resetStatus
-    setFlags
-    setMode
-    setState
-    setStatus
-    setType
-    size
-    state
-    status
-    ungetch
-    writeBlock
-    ~QIODevice
+
                                              
+    QIODevice
+    Offset
+    at
+    atEnd
+    close
+    flags
+    flush
+    getch
+    isAsynchronous
+    isBuffered
+    isCombinedAccess
+    isDirectAccess
+    isInactive
+    isOpen
+    isRaw
+    isReadWrite
+    isReadable
+    isSequentialAccess
+    isSynchronous
+    isTranslated
+    isWritable
+    mode
+    open
+    putch
+    readAll
+    readBlock
+    readLine
+    reset
+    resetStatus
+    setFlags
+    setMode
+    setState
+    setStatus
+    setType
+    size
+    state
+    status
+    ungetch
+    writeBlock
+    ~QIODevice
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -3903,9 +3903,9 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QJisCodec
-    mimeName
+
                                              
+    QJisCodec
+    mimeName
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -3939,100 +3939,100 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QKeySequence
-    assign
-    count
-    decodeString
-    encodeString
-    isEmpty
-    matches
-    operator QString
-    operator!=
-    operator=
-    operator==
-    operator[]
-    ~QKeySequence
-    operator<<
-    operator>>
+
                                              
+    QKeySequence
+    assign
+    count
+    decodeString
+    encodeString
+    isEmpty
+    matches
+    operator QString
+    operator!=
+    operator=
+    operator==
+    operator[]
+    ~QKeySequence
+    operator<<
+    operator>>
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QLabel
-    alignment
-    alignment
-    backgroundMode
-    buddy
-    clear
-    drawContents
-    hasScaledContents
-    indent
-    indent
-    movie
-    picture
-    pixmap
-    pixmap
-    scaledContents
-    setAlignment
-    setBuddy
-    setFont
-    setIndent
-    setMovie
-    setNum
-    setPicture
-    setPixmap
-    setScaledContents
-    setText
-    setTextFormat
-    sizeForWidth
-    text
-    text
-    textFormat
-    textFormat
-    updateLabel
-    ~QLabel
+
                                              
+    QLabel
+    alignment
+    alignment
+    backgroundMode
+    buddy
+    clear
+    drawContents
+    hasScaledContents
+    indent
+    indent
+    movie
+    picture
+    pixmap
+    pixmap
+    scaledContents
+    setAlignment
+    setBuddy
+    setFont
+    setIndent
+    setMovie
+    setNum
+    setPicture
+    setPixmap
+    setScaledContents
+    setText
+    setTextFormat
+    sizeForWidth
+    text
+    text
+    textFormat
+    textFormat
+    updateLabel
+    ~QLabel
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QLayout
-    ResizeMode
-    activate
-    add
-    addChildLayout
-    addItem
-    alignmentRect
-    autoAdd
-    deleteAllItems
-    expanding
-    invalidate
-    isEmpty
-    isEnabled
-    isTopLevel
-    iterator
-    mainWidget
-    margin
-    margin
-    maximumSize
-    menuBar
-    minimumSize
-    remove
-    removeItem
-    resizeMode
-    resizeMode
-    setAutoAdd
-    setEnabled
-    setGeometry
-    setMargin
-    setMenuBar
-    setResizeMode
-    setSpacing
-    setSupportsMargin
-    setWidgetLayout
-    spacing
-    spacing
-    supportsMargin
+
                                              
+    QLayout
+    ResizeMode
+    activate
+    add
+    addChildLayout
+    addItem
+    alignmentRect
+    autoAdd
+    deleteAllItems
+    expanding
+    invalidate
+    isEmpty
+    isEnabled
+    isTopLevel
+    iterator
+    mainWidget
+    margin
+    margin
+    maximumSize
+    menuBar
+    minimumSize
+    remove
+    removeItem
+    resizeMode
+    resizeMode
+    setAutoAdd
+    setEnabled
+    setGeometry
+    setMargin
+    setMenuBar
+    setResizeMode
+    setSpacing
+    setSupportsMargin
+    setWidgetLayout
+    spacing
+    spacing
+    supportsMargin
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -4069,220 +4069,220 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QLCDNumber
-    Mode
-    SegmentStyle
-    checkOverflow
-    display
-    drawContents
-    intValue
-    intValue
-    mode
-    mode
-    numDigits
-    numDigits
-    overflow
-    segmentStyle
-    segmentStyle
-    setBinMode
-    setDecMode
-    setHexMode
-    setMode
-    setNumDigits
-    setOctMode
-    setSegmentStyle
-    setSmallDecimalPoint
-    smallDecimalPoint
-    smallDecimalPoint
-    value
-    value
-    ~QLCDNumber
+
                                              
+    QLCDNumber
+    Mode
+    SegmentStyle
+    checkOverflow
+    display
+    drawContents
+    intValue
+    intValue
+    mode
+    mode
+    numDigits
+    numDigits
+    overflow
+    segmentStyle
+    segmentStyle
+    setBinMode
+    setDecMode
+    setHexMode
+    setMode
+    setNumDigits
+    setOctMode
+    setSegmentStyle
+    setSmallDecimalPoint
+    smallDecimalPoint
+    smallDecimalPoint
+    value
+    value
+    ~QLCDNumber
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QLibrary
-    autoUnload
-    isLoaded
-    library
-    load
-    resolve
-    setAutoUnload
-    unload
-    ~QLibrary
+
                                              
+    QLibrary
+    autoUnload
+    isLoaded
+    library
+    load
+    resolve
+    setAutoUnload
+    unload
+    ~QLibrary
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QLineEdit
-    EchoMode
-    acceptableInput
-    alignment
-    alignment
-    backspace
-    clear
-    clearModified
-    clearValidator
-    copy
-    createPopupMenu
-    cursorBackward
-    cursorForward
-    cursorPosition
-    cursorPosition
-    cursorWordBackward
-    cursorWordForward
-    cut
-    del
-    deselect
-    displayText
-    displayText
-    dragEnabled
-    dragEnabled
-    echoMode
-    echoMode
-    end
-    frame
-    frame
-    hasAcceptableInput
-    hasSelectedText
-    hasSelectedText
-    home
-    inputMask
-    inputMask
-    insert
-    isModified
-    isReadOnly
-    isRedoAvailable
-    isUndoAvailable
-    keyPressEvent
-    lostFocus
-    maxLength
-    maxLength
-    minimumSizeHint
-    modified
-    paste
-    readOnly
-    redo
-    redoAvailable
-    returnPressed
-    selectAll
-    selectedText
-    selectedText
-    selectionChanged
-    selectionStart
-    setAlignment
-    setCursorPosition
-    setDragEnabled
-    setEchoMode
-    setFrame
-    setInputMask
-    setMaxLength
-    setReadOnly
-    setSelection
-    setText
-    setValidator
-    sizeHint
-    text
-    text
-    textChanged
-    undo
-    undoAvailable
-    validator
-    ~QLineEdit
+
                                              
+    QLineEdit
+    EchoMode
+    acceptableInput
+    alignment
+    alignment
+    backspace
+    clear
+    clearModified
+    clearValidator
+    copy
+    createPopupMenu
+    cursorBackward
+    cursorForward
+    cursorPosition
+    cursorPosition
+    cursorWordBackward
+    cursorWordForward
+    cut
+    del
+    deselect
+    displayText
+    displayText
+    dragEnabled
+    dragEnabled
+    echoMode
+    echoMode
+    end
+    frame
+    frame
+    hasAcceptableInput
+    hasSelectedText
+    hasSelectedText
+    home
+    inputMask
+    inputMask
+    insert
+    isModified
+    isReadOnly
+    isRedoAvailable
+    isUndoAvailable
+    keyPressEvent
+    lostFocus
+    maxLength
+    maxLength
+    minimumSizeHint
+    modified
+    paste
+    readOnly
+    redo
+    redoAvailable
+    returnPressed
+    selectAll
+    selectedText
+    selectedText
+    selectionChanged
+    selectionStart
+    setAlignment
+    setCursorPosition
+    setDragEnabled
+    setEchoMode
+    setFrame
+    setInputMask
+    setMaxLength
+    setReadOnly
+    setSelection
+    setText
+    setValidator
+    sizeHint
+    text
+    text
+    textChanged
+    undo
+    undoAvailable
+    validator
+    ~QLineEdit
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QListBox
-    LayoutMode
-    SelectionMode
-    changeItem
-    clear
-    clearSelection
-    clicked
-    columnAt
-    columnMode
-    columnMode
-    contextMenuRequested
-    count
-    count
-    currentChanged
-    currentColumn
-    currentItem
-    currentItem
-    currentRow
-    currentText
-    currentText
-    doLayout
-    doubleClicked
-    ensureCurrentVisible
-    findItem
-    firstItem
-    highlighted
-    index
-    insertItem
-    insertStrList
-    insertStringList
-    invertSelection
-    isRubberSelecting
-    isSelected
-    item
-    itemAt
-    itemHeight
-    itemRect
-    itemVisible
-    maxItemWidth
-    mouseButtonClicked
-    mouseButtonPressed
-    numColumns
-    numColumns
-    numItemsVisible
-    numItemsVisible
-    numRows
-    numRows
-    onItem
-    onViewport
-    paintCell
-    pixmap
-    pressed
-    refreshSlot
-    removeItem
-    returnPressed
-    rightButtonClicked
-    rightButtonPressed
-    rowAt
-    rowMode
-    rowMode
-    selectAll
-    selected
-    selectedItem
-    selectionChanged
-    selectionMode
-    selectionMode
-    setBottomItem
-    setColumnMode
-    setCurrentItem
-    setRowMode
-    setSelected
-    setSelectionMode
-    setTopItem
-    setVariableHeight
-    setVariableWidth
-    sort
-    takeItem
-    text
-    toggleCurrentItem
-    topItem
-    topItem
-    triggerUpdate
-    tryGeometry
-    updateItem
-    variableHeight
-    variableHeight
-    variableWidth
-    variableWidth
-    ~QListBox
+
                                              
+    QListBox
+    LayoutMode
+    SelectionMode
+    changeItem
+    clear
+    clearSelection
+    clicked
+    columnAt
+    columnMode
+    columnMode
+    contextMenuRequested
+    count
+    count
+    currentChanged
+    currentColumn
+    currentItem
+    currentItem
+    currentRow
+    currentText
+    currentText
+    doLayout
+    doubleClicked
+    ensureCurrentVisible
+    findItem
+    firstItem
+    highlighted
+    index
+    insertItem
+    insertStrList
+    insertStringList
+    invertSelection
+    isRubberSelecting
+    isSelected
+    item
+    itemAt
+    itemHeight
+    itemRect
+    itemVisible
+    maxItemWidth
+    mouseButtonClicked
+    mouseButtonPressed
+    numColumns
+    numColumns
+    numItemsVisible
+    numItemsVisible
+    numRows
+    numRows
+    onItem
+    onViewport
+    paintCell
+    pixmap
+    pressed
+    refreshSlot
+    removeItem
+    returnPressed
+    rightButtonClicked
+    rightButtonPressed
+    rowAt
+    rowMode
+    rowMode
+    selectAll
+    selected
+    selectedItem
+    selectionChanged
+    selectionMode
+    selectionMode
+    setBottomItem
+    setColumnMode
+    setCurrentItem
+    setRowMode
+    setSelected
+    setSelectionMode
+    setTopItem
+    setVariableHeight
+    setVariableWidth
+    sort
+    takeItem
+    text
+    toggleCurrentItem
+    topItem
+    topItem
+    triggerUpdate
+    tryGeometry
+    updateItem
+    variableHeight
+    variableHeight
+    variableWidth
+    variableWidth
+    ~QListBox
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -4326,121 +4326,121 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QListView
-    RenameAction
-    ResizeMode
-    SelectionMode
-    WidthMode
-    addColumn
-    adjustColumn
-    allColumnsShowFocus
-    allColumnsShowFocus
-    changeSortColumn
-    childCount
-    childCount
-    clear
-    clearSelection
-    clicked
-    collapsed
-    columnAlignment
-    columnText
-    columnWidth
-    columnWidthMode
-    columns
-    columns
-    contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent
-    contentsMouseMoveEvent
-    contentsMousePressEvent
-    contentsMouseReleaseEvent
-    contextMenuRequested
-    currentChanged
-    currentItem
-    defaultRenameAction
-    defaultRenameAction
-    doAutoScroll
-    doubleClicked
-    dragObject
-    drawContentsOffset
-    dropped
-    ensureItemVisible
-    eventFilter
-    expanded
-    findItem
-    firstChild
-    handleSizeChange
-    header
-    hideColumn
-    insertItem
-    invertSelection
-    isOpen
-    isRenaming
-    isSelected
-    itemAt
-    itemMargin
-    itemMargin
-    itemPos
-    itemRect
-    itemRenamed
-    lastItem
-    mouseButtonClicked
-    mouseButtonPressed
-    onItem
-    onViewport
-    paintEmptyArea
-    pressed
-    reconfigureItems
-    removeColumn
-    repaintItem
-    resizeEvent
-    resizeMode
-    resizeMode
-    returnPressed
-    rightButtonClicked
-    rightButtonPressed
-    rootIsDecorated
-    rootIsDecorated
-    selectAll
-    selectedItem
-    selectionChanged
-    selectionMode
-    selectionMode
-    setAllColumnsShowFocus
-    setColumnAlignment
-    setColumnText
-    setColumnWidth
-    setColumnWidthMode
-    setCurrentItem
-    setDefaultRenameAction
-    setItemMargin
-    setOpen
-    setResizeMode
-    setRootIsDecorated
-    setSelected
-    setSelectionAnchor
-    setSelectionMode
-    setShowSortIndicator
-    setShowToolTips
-    setSortColumn
-    setSortOrder
-    setSorting
-    setTreeStepSize
-    showSortIndicator
-    showSortIndicator
-    showToolTips
-    showToolTips
-    sort
-    sortColumn
-    sortOrder
-    spacePressed
-    startDrag
-    takeItem
-    treeStepSize
-    treeStepSize
-    triggerUpdate
-    updateContents
-    widthChanged
-    ~QListView
+
                                              
+    QListView
+    RenameAction
+    ResizeMode
+    SelectionMode
+    WidthMode
+    addColumn
+    adjustColumn
+    allColumnsShowFocus
+    allColumnsShowFocus
+    changeSortColumn
+    childCount
+    childCount
+    clear
+    clearSelection
+    clicked
+    collapsed
+    columnAlignment
+    columnText
+    columnWidth
+    columnWidthMode
+    columns
+    columns
+    contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent
+    contentsMouseMoveEvent
+    contentsMousePressEvent
+    contentsMouseReleaseEvent
+    contextMenuRequested
+    currentChanged
+    currentItem
+    defaultRenameAction
+    defaultRenameAction
+    doAutoScroll
+    doubleClicked
+    dragObject
+    drawContentsOffset
+    dropped
+    ensureItemVisible
+    eventFilter
+    expanded
+    findItem
+    firstChild
+    handleSizeChange
+    header
+    hideColumn
+    insertItem
+    invertSelection
+    isOpen
+    isRenaming
+    isSelected
+    itemAt
+    itemMargin
+    itemMargin
+    itemPos
+    itemRect
+    itemRenamed
+    lastItem
+    mouseButtonClicked
+    mouseButtonPressed
+    onItem
+    onViewport
+    paintEmptyArea
+    pressed
+    reconfigureItems
+    removeColumn
+    repaintItem
+    resizeEvent
+    resizeMode
+    resizeMode
+    returnPressed
+    rightButtonClicked
+    rightButtonPressed
+    rootIsDecorated
+    rootIsDecorated
+    selectAll
+    selectedItem
+    selectionChanged
+    selectionMode
+    selectionMode
+    setAllColumnsShowFocus
+    setColumnAlignment
+    setColumnText
+    setColumnWidth
+    setColumnWidthMode
+    setCurrentItem
+    setDefaultRenameAction
+    setItemMargin
+    setOpen
+    setResizeMode
+    setRootIsDecorated
+    setSelected
+    setSelectionAnchor
+    setSelectionMode
+    setShowSortIndicator
+    setShowToolTips
+    setSortColumn
+    setSortOrder
+    setSorting
+    setTreeStepSize
+    showSortIndicator
+    showSortIndicator
+    showToolTips
+    showToolTips
+    sort
+    sortColumn
+    sortOrder
+    spacePressed
+    startDrag
+    takeItem
+    treeStepSize
+    treeStepSize
+    triggerUpdate
+    updateContents
+    widthChanged
+    ~QListView
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -4527,35 +4527,35 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QLocale
-    Country
-    Language
-    c
-    country
-    countryToString
-    language
-    languageToString
-    name
-    operator=
-    setDefault
-    system
-    toDouble
-    toFloat
-    toInt
-    toLong
-    toLongLong
-    toShort
-    toString
-    toUInt
-    toULong
-    toULongLong
-    toUShort
+
                                              
+    QLocale
+    Country
+    Language
+    c
+    country
+    countryToString
+    language
+    languageToString
+    name
+    operator=
+    setDefault
+    system
+    toDouble
+    toFloat
+    toInt
+    toLong
+    toLongLong
+    toShort
+    toString
+    toUInt
+    toULong
+    toULongLong
+    toUShort
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QLocalFs
+
                                              
+    QLocalFs
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -4588,102 +4588,102 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QMainWindow
-    DockWindows
-    addDockWindow
-    appropriate
-    bottomDock
-    centralWidget
-    childEvent
-    createDockWindowMenu
-    customize
-    dockWindowPositionChanged
-    dockWindows
-    dockWindowsMovable
-    dockWindowsMovable
-    getLocation
-    hasDockWindow
-    isCustomizable
-    isDockEnabled
-    isDockMenuEnabled
-    leftDock
-    lineUpDockWindows
-    menuAboutToShow
-    menuBar
-    moveDockWindow
-    opaqueMoving
-    opaqueMoving
-    pixmapSizeChanged
-    removeDockWindow
-    rightDock
-    setAppropriate
-    setCentralWidget
-    setDockEnabled
-    setDockMenuEnabled
-    setDockWindowsMovable
-    setMenuBar
-    setOpaqueMoving
-    setStatusBar
-    setToolTipGroup
-    setUpLayout
-    setUsesBigPixmaps
-    setUsesTextLabel
-    showDockMenu
-    statusBar
-    toolBars
-    toolTipGroup
-    topDock
-    usesBigPixmaps
-    usesBigPixmaps
-    usesTextLabel
-    usesTextLabel
-    usesTextLabelChanged
-    whatsThis
-    ~QMainWindow
-    operator<<
-    operator>>
+
                                              
+    QMainWindow
+    DockWindows
+    addDockWindow
+    appropriate
+    bottomDock
+    centralWidget
+    childEvent
+    createDockWindowMenu
+    customize
+    dockWindowPositionChanged
+    dockWindows
+    dockWindowsMovable
+    dockWindowsMovable
+    getLocation
+    hasDockWindow
+    isCustomizable
+    isDockEnabled
+    isDockMenuEnabled
+    leftDock
+    lineUpDockWindows
+    menuAboutToShow
+    menuBar
+    moveDockWindow
+    opaqueMoving
+    opaqueMoving
+    pixmapSizeChanged
+    removeDockWindow
+    rightDock
+    setAppropriate
+    setCentralWidget
+    setDockEnabled
+    setDockMenuEnabled
+    setDockWindowsMovable
+    setMenuBar
+    setOpaqueMoving
+    setStatusBar
+    setToolTipGroup
+    setUpLayout
+    setUsesBigPixmaps
+    setUsesTextLabel
+    showDockMenu
+    statusBar
+    toolBars
+    toolTipGroup
+    topDock
+    usesBigPixmaps
+    usesBigPixmaps
+    usesTextLabel
+    usesTextLabel
+    usesTextLabelChanged
+    whatsThis
+    ~QMainWindow
+    operator<<
+    operator>>
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QMap
-    ConstIterator
-    Iterator
-    ValueType
-    begin
-    clear
-    constBegin
-    constEnd
-    const_iterator
-    const_pointer
-    const_reference
-    contains
-    count
-    detach
-    empty
-    end
-    erase
-    find
-    insert
-    isEmpty
-    iterator
-    key_type
-    keys
-    mapped_type
-    operator=
-    operator[]
-    pointer
-    reference
-    remove
-    replace
-    size
-    size_type
-    value_type
-    values
-    ~QMap
-    operator<<
-    operator>>
+
                                              
+    QMap
+    ConstIterator
+    Iterator
+    ValueType
+    begin
+    clear
+    constBegin
+    constEnd
+    const_iterator
+    const_pointer
+    const_reference
+    contains
+    count
+    detach
+    empty
+    end
+    erase
+    find
+    insert
+    isEmpty
+    iterator
+    key_type
+    keys
+    mapped_type
+    operator=
+    operator[]
+    pointer
+    reference
+    remove
+    replace
+    size
+    size_type
+    value_type
+    values
+    ~QMap
+    operator<<
+    operator>>
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -4719,150 +4719,150 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QMemArray
-    ConstIterator
-    Iterator
-    assign
-    at
-    begin
-    bsearch
-    contains
-    copy
-    count
-    data
-    detach
-    duplicate
-    end
-    fill
-    find
-    isEmpty
-    isNull
-    nrefs
-    operator const type *
-    operator!=
-    operator=
-    operator==
-    operator[]
-    resetRawData
-    resize
-    setRawData
-    size
-    sort
-    truncate
-    ~QMemArray
-    operator<<
-    operator>>
-    qChecksum
+
                                              
+    QMemArray
+    ConstIterator
+    Iterator
+    assign
+    at
+    begin
+    bsearch
+    contains
+    copy
+    count
+    data
+    detach
+    duplicate
+    end
+    fill
+    find
+    isEmpty
+    isNull
+    nrefs
+    operator const type *
+    operator!=
+    operator=
+    operator==
+    operator[]
+    resetRawData
+    resize
+    setRawData
+    size
+    sort
+    truncate
+    ~QMemArray
+    operator<<
+    operator>>
+    qChecksum
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QMenuBar
-    Separator
-    activated
-    defaultUp
-    drawContents
-    heightForWidth
-    hide
-    highlighted
-    isDefaultUp
-    menuContentsChanged
-    menuStateChanged
-    setDefaultUp
-    setupAccelerators
-    show
-    ~QMenuBar
+
                                              
+    QMenuBar
+    Separator
+    activated
+    defaultUp
+    drawContents
+    heightForWidth
+    hide
+    highlighted
+    isDefaultUp
+    menuContentsChanged
+    menuStateChanged
+    setDefaultUp
+    setupAccelerators
+    show
+    ~QMenuBar
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QMenuData
-    accel
-    activateItemAt
-    changeItem
-    changeItemIconSet
-    clear
-    connectItem
-    count
-    disconnectItem
-    findItem
-    iconSet
-    idAt
-    indexOf
-    insertItem
-    insertSeparator
-    isItemActive
-    isItemChecked
-    isItemEnabled
-    isItemVisible
-    itemParameter
-    menuContentsChanged
-    menuDelPopup
-    menuInsPopup
-    menuStateChanged
-    pixmap
-    removeItem
-    removeItemAt
-    setAccel
-    setId
-    setItemChecked
-    setItemEnabled
-    setItemParameter
-    setItemVisible
-    setWhatsThis
-    text
-    updateItem
-    whatsThis
-    ~QMenuData
+
                                              
+    QMenuData
+    accel
+    activateItemAt
+    changeItem
+    changeItemIconSet
+    clear
+    connectItem
+    count
+    disconnectItem
+    findItem
+    iconSet
+    idAt
+    indexOf
+    insertItem
+    insertSeparator
+    isItemActive
+    isItemChecked
+    isItemEnabled
+    isItemVisible
+    itemParameter
+    menuContentsChanged
+    menuDelPopup
+    menuInsPopup
+    menuStateChanged
+    pixmap
+    removeItem
+    removeItemAt
+    setAccel
+    setId
+    setItemChecked
+    setItemEnabled
+    setItemParameter
+    setItemVisible
+    setWhatsThis
+    text
+    updateItem
+    whatsThis
+    ~QMenuData
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QMessageBox
-    Icon
-    about
-    aboutTQt
-    adjustSize
-    buttonText
-    critical
-    icon
-    icon
-    iconPixmap
-    iconPixmap
-    information
-    question
-    setButtonText
-    setIcon
-    setIconPixmap
-    setText
-    setTextFormat
-    standardIcon
-    text
-    text
-    textFormat
-    textFormat
-    warning
-    ~QMessageBox
+
                                              
+    QMessageBox
+    Icon
+    about
+    aboutTQt
+    adjustSize
+    buttonText
+    critical
+    icon
+    icon
+    iconPixmap
+    iconPixmap
+    information
+    question
+    setButtonText
+    setIcon
+    setIconPixmap
+    setText
+    setTextFormat
+    standardIcon
+    text
+    text
+    textFormat
+    textFormat
+    warning
+    ~QMessageBox
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QMetaObject
-    classInfo
-    className
-    findProperty
-    inherits
-    numClassInfo
-    numProperties
-    numSignals
-    numSlots
-    property
-    propertyNames
-    signalNames
-    slotNames
-    superClass
-    superClassName
+
                                              
+    QMetaObject
+    classInfo
+    className
+    findProperty
+    inherits
+    numClassInfo
+    numProperties
+    numSignals
+    numSlots
+    property
+    propertyNames
+    signalNames
+    slotNames
+    superClass
+    superClassName
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -4934,15 +4934,15 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QMotifPlusStyle
+
                                              
+    QMotifPlusStyle
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QMotifStyle
-    setUseHighlightColors
-    useHighlightColors
+
                                              
+    QMotifStyle
+    setUseHighlightColors
+    useHighlightColors
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -4992,86 +4992,86 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QMovie
-    Status
-    backgroundColor
-    connectResize
-    connectStatus
-    connectUpdate
-    disconnectResize
-    disconnectStatus
-    disconnectUpdate
-    finished
-    frameImage
-    frameNumber
-    framePixmap
-    getValidRect
-    isNull
-    operator=
-    pause
-    paused
-    pushData
-    pushSpace
-    restart
-    running
-    setBackgroundColor
-    setSpeed
-    speed
-    step
-    steps
-    unpause
-    ~QMovie
+
                                              
+    QMovie
+    Status
+    backgroundColor
+    connectResize
+    connectStatus
+    connectUpdate
+    disconnectResize
+    disconnectStatus
+    disconnectUpdate
+    finished
+    frameImage
+    frameNumber
+    framePixmap
+    getValidRect
+    isNull
+    operator=
+    pause
+    paused
+    pushData
+    pushSpace
+    restart
+    running
+    setBackgroundColor
+    setSpeed
+    speed
+    step
+    steps
+    unpause
+    ~QMovie
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    alignment
-    alignment
-    atBeginning
-    atBeginning
-    atEnd
-    atEnd
-    backspace
-    cursorDown
-    cursorLeft
-    cursorPoint
-    cursorRight
-    cursorUp
-    cursorWordBackward
-    cursorWordForward
-    edited
-    edited
-    end
-    getMarkedRegion
-    hasMarkedText
-    home
-    insertAndMark
-    insertAt
-    insertLine
-    killLine
-    lineLength
-    markedText
-    newLine
-    numLines
-    numLines
-    pageDown
-    pageUp
-    removeLine
-    setAlignment
-    setCursorPosition
-    setEdited
-    textLine
+
                                              
+    alignment
+    alignment
+    atBeginning
+    atBeginning
+    atEnd
+    atEnd
+    backspace
+    cursorDown
+    cursorLeft
+    cursorPoint
+    cursorRight
+    cursorUp
+    cursorWordBackward
+    cursorWordForward
+    edited
+    edited
+    end
+    getMarkedRegion
+    hasMarkedText
+    home
+    insertAndMark
+    insertAt
+    insertLine
+    killLine
+    lineLength
+    markedText
+    newLine
+    numLines
+    numLines
+    pageDown
+    pageUp
+    removeLine
+    setAlignment
+    setCursorPosition
+    setEdited
+    textLine
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QMutex
-    lock
-    locked
-    tryLock
-    unlock
-    ~QMutex
+
                                              
+    QMutex
+    lock
+    locked
+    tryLock
+    unlock
+    ~QMutex
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -5100,42 +5100,42 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QNetworkProtocol
-    ConnectionState
-    Error
-    Operation
-    State
-    addOperation
-    autoDelete
-    checkConnection
-    clearOperationQueue
-    connectionStateChanged
-    createdDirectory
-    data
-    dataTransferProgress
-    finished
-    getNetworkProtocol
-    hasOnlyLocalFileSystem
-    itemChanged
-    newChild
-    newChildren
-    operationGet
-    operationInProgress
-    operationListChildren
-    operationMkDir
-    operationPut
-    operationRemove
-    operationRename
-    registerNetworkProtocol
-    removed
-    setAutoDelete
-    setUrl
-    start
-    stop
-    supportedOperations
-    url
-    ~QNetworkProtocol
+
                                              
+    QNetworkProtocol
+    ConnectionState
+    Error
+    Operation
+    State
+    addOperation
+    autoDelete
+    checkConnection
+    clearOperationQueue
+    connectionStateChanged
+    createdDirectory
+    data
+    dataTransferProgress
+    finished
+    getNetworkProtocol
+    hasOnlyLocalFileSystem
+    itemChanged
+    newChild
+    newChildren
+    operationGet
+    operationInProgress
+    operationListChildren
+    operationMkDir
+    operationPut
+    operationRemove
+    operationRename
+    registerNetworkProtocol
+    removed
+    setAutoDelete
+    setUrl
+    start
+    stop
+    supportedOperations
+    url
+    ~QNetworkProtocol
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -5211,72 +5211,72 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QObject
-    activate_signal
-    blockSignals
-    checkConnectArgs
-    child
-    childEvent
-    children
-    className
-    cleanupEventFilter
-    connect
-    connectNotify
-    customEvent
-    deleteLater
-    destroyed
-    disconnect
-    disconnectNotify
-    dumpObjectInfo
-    dumpObjectTree
-    event
-    eventFilter
-    highPriority
-    inherits
-    insertChild
-    installEventFilter
-    isA
-    isWidgetType
-    killTimer
-    killTimers
-    metaObject
-    name
-    name
-    normalizeSignalSlot
-    objectTrees
-    parent
-    property
-    queryList
-    removeChild
-    removeEventFilter
-    sender
-    setName
-    setProperty
-    signalsBlocked
-    startTimer
-    timerEvent
-    tr
-    trUtf8
-    ~QObject
-    qt_find_obj_child
+
                                              
+    QObject
+    activate_signal
+    blockSignals
+    checkConnectArgs
+    child
+    childEvent
+    children
+    className
+    cleanupEventFilter
+    connect
+    connectNotify
+    customEvent
+    deleteLater
+    destroyed
+    disconnect
+    disconnectNotify
+    dumpObjectInfo
+    dumpObjectTree
+    event
+    eventFilter
+    highPriority
+    inherits
+    insertChild
+    installEventFilter
+    isA
+    isWidgetType
+    killTimer
+    killTimers
+    metaObject
+    name
+    name
+    normalizeSignalSlot
+    objectTrees
+    parent
+    property
+    queryList
+    removeChild
+    removeEventFilter
+    sender
+    setName
+    setProperty
+    signalsBlocked
+    startTimer
+    timerEvent
+    tr
+    trUtf8
+    ~QObject
+    qt_find_obj_child
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QObjectCleanupHandler
-    add
-    clear
-    isEmpty
-    remove
-    ~QObjectCleanupHandler
+
                                              
+    QObjectCleanupHandler
+    add
+    clear
+    isEmpty
+    remove
+    ~QObjectCleanupHandler
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QObjectList
-    operator=
-    ~QObjectList
+
                                              
+    QObjectList
+    operator=
+    ~QObjectList
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -5286,138 +5286,138 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QPaintDevice
-    cmd
-    handle
-    isExtDev
-    paintingActive
-    x11AppCells
-    x11AppColormap
-    x11AppDefaultColormap
-    x11AppDefaultVisual
-    x11AppDepth
-    x11AppDisplay
-    x11AppDpiX
-    x11AppDpiY
-    x11AppRootWindow
-    x11AppScreen
-    x11AppVisual
-    x11Cells
-    x11Colormap
-    x11DefaultColormap
-    x11DefaultVisual
-    x11Depth
-    x11Display
-    x11Screen
-    x11SetAppDpiX
-    x11SetAppDpiY
-    x11Visual
-    ~QPaintDevice
-    bitBlt
+
                                              
+    QPaintDevice
+    cmd
+    handle
+    isExtDev
+    paintingActive
+    x11AppCells
+    x11AppColormap
+    x11AppDefaultColormap
+    x11AppDefaultVisual
+    x11AppDepth
+    x11AppDisplay
+    x11AppDpiX
+    x11AppDpiY
+    x11AppRootWindow
+    x11AppScreen
+    x11AppVisual
+    x11Cells
+    x11Colormap
+    x11DefaultColormap
+    x11DefaultVisual
+    x11Depth
+    x11Display
+    x11Screen
+    x11SetAppDpiX
+    x11SetAppDpiY
+    x11Visual
+    ~QPaintDevice
+    bitBlt
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QPaintDeviceMetrics
-    depth
-    height
-    heightMM
-    logicalDpiX
-    logicalDpiY
-    numColors
-    width
-    widthMM
+
                                              
+    QPaintDeviceMetrics
+    depth
+    height
+    heightMM
+    logicalDpiX
+    logicalDpiY
+    numColors
+    width
+    widthMM
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QPainter
-    CoordinateMode
-    TextDirection
-    backgroundColor
-    backgroundMode
-    begin
-    boundingRect
-    brush
-    brushOrigin
-    clipRegion
-    device
-    drawArc
-    drawChord
-    drawConvexPolygon
-    drawCubicBezier
-    drawEllipse
-    drawImage
-    drawLine
-    drawLineSegments
-    drawPicture
-    drawPie
-    drawPixmap
-    drawPoint
-    drawPoints
-    drawPolygon
-    drawPolyline
-    drawRect
-    drawRoundRect
-    drawText
-    drawTiledPixmap
-    drawWinFocusRect
-    end
-    eraseRect
-    fillRect
-    flush
-    font
-    fontInfo
-    fontMetrics
-    handle
-    hasClipping
-    hasViewXForm
-    hasWorldXForm
-    isActive
-    lineTo
-    moveTo
-    pen
-    rasterOp
-    redirect
-    resetXForm
-    restore
-    rotate
-    save
-    scale
-    setBackgroundColor
-    setBackgroundMode
-    setBrush
-    setBrushOrigin
-    setClipRect
-    setClipRegion
-    setClipping
-    setFont
-    setPen
-    setRasterOp
-    setTabArray
-    setTabStops
-    setViewXForm
-    setViewport
-    setWindow
-    setWorldMatrix
-    setWorldXForm
-    shear
-    tabArray
-    tabStops
-    translate
-    viewport
-    window
-    worldMatrix
-    xForm
-    xFormDev
-    ~QPainter
-    qDrawPlainRect
-    qDrawShadeLine
-    qDrawShadePanel
-    qDrawShadeRect
-    qDrawWinButton
-    qDrawWinPanel
+
                                              
+    QPainter
+    CoordinateMode
+    TextDirection
+    backgroundColor
+    backgroundMode
+    begin
+    boundingRect
+    brush
+    brushOrigin
+    clipRegion
+    device
+    drawArc
+    drawChord
+    drawConvexPolygon
+    drawCubicBezier
+    drawEllipse
+    drawImage
+    drawLine
+    drawLineSegments
+    drawPicture
+    drawPie
+    drawPixmap
+    drawPoint
+    drawPoints
+    drawPolygon
+    drawPolyline
+    drawRect
+    drawRoundRect
+    drawText
+    drawTiledPixmap
+    drawWinFocusRect
+    end
+    eraseRect
+    fillRect
+    flush
+    font
+    fontInfo
+    fontMetrics
+    handle
+    hasClipping
+    hasViewXForm
+    hasWorldXForm
+    isActive
+    lineTo
+    moveTo
+    pen
+    rasterOp
+    redirect
+    resetXForm
+    restore
+    rotate
+    save
+    scale
+    setBackgroundColor
+    setBackgroundMode
+    setBrush
+    setBrushOrigin
+    setClipRect
+    setClipRegion
+    setClipping
+    setFont
+    setPen
+    setRasterOp
+    setTabArray
+    setTabStops
+    setViewXForm
+    setViewport
+    setWindow
+    setWorldMatrix
+    setWorldXForm
+    shear
+    tabArray
+    tabStops
+    translate
+    viewport
+    window
+    worldMatrix
+    xForm
+    xFormDev
+    ~QPainter
+    qDrawPlainRect
+    qDrawShadeLine
+    qDrawShadePanel
+    qDrawShadeRect
+    qDrawWinButton
+    qDrawWinPanel
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -5429,146 +5429,146 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QPair
-    first_type
-    second_type
-    qMakePair
+
                                              
+    QPair
+    first_type
+    second_type
+    qMakePair
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QPalette
-    ColorGroup
-    active
-    brush
-    color
-    copy
-    detach
-    disabled
-    inactive
-    isCopyOf
-    operator!=
-    operator=
-    operator==
-    serialNumber
-    setActive
-    setBrush
-    setColor
-    setDisabled
-    setInactive
-    ~QPalette
-    operator<<
-    operator>>
+
                                              
+    QPalette
+    ColorGroup
+    active
+    brush
+    color
+    copy
+    detach
+    disabled
+    inactive
+    isCopyOf
+    operator!=
+    operator=
+    operator==
+    serialNumber
+    setActive
+    setBrush
+    setColor
+    setDisabled
+    setInactive
+    ~QPalette
+    operator<<
+    operator>>
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QPen
-    capStyle
-    color
-    copy
-    detach
-    joinStyle
-    operator!=
-    operator=
-    operator==
-    setCapStyle
-    setColor
-    setJoinStyle
-    setStyle
-    setWidth
-    style
-    width
-    ~QPen
-    operator<<
-    operator>>
+
                                              
+    QPen
+    capStyle
+    color
+    copy
+    detach
+    joinStyle
+    operator!=
+    operator=
+    operator==
+    setCapStyle
+    setColor
+    setJoinStyle
+    setStyle
+    setWidth
+    style
+    width
+    ~QPen
+    operator<<
+    operator>>
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QPicture
-    boundingRect
-    copy
-    data
-    detach
-    isNull
-    load
-    metric
-    operator=
-    play
-    save
-    setBoundingRect
-    setData
-    size
-    ~QPicture
-    operator<<
-    operator>>
+
                                              
+    QPicture
+    boundingRect
+    copy
+    data
+    detach
+    isNull
+    load
+    metric
+    operator=
+    play
+    save
+    setBoundingRect
+    setData
+    size
+    ~QPicture
+    operator<<
+    operator>>
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QPixmap
-    ColorMode
-    Optimization
-    convertFromImage
-    convertToImage
-    copy
-    createHeuristicMask
-    defaultDepth
-    defaultOptimization
-    depth
-    detach
-    fill
-    fromMimeSource
-    grabWidget
-    grabWindow
-    hasAlpha
-    hasAlphaChannel
-    height
-    imageFormat
-    isNull
-    isQBitmap
-    load
-    loadFromData
-    mask
-    metric
-    operator=
-    optimization
-    rect
-    resize
-    save
-    selfMask
-    serialNumber
-    setDefaultOptimization
-    setMask
-    setOptimization
-    size
-    trueMatrix
-    width
-    xForm
-    ~QPixmap
-    copyBlt
-    operator<<
-    operator>>
+
                                              
+    QPixmap
+    ColorMode
+    Optimization
+    convertFromImage
+    convertToImage
+    copy
+    createHeuristicMask
+    defaultDepth
+    defaultOptimization
+    depth
+    detach
+    fill
+    fromMimeSource
+    grabWidget
+    grabWindow
+    hasAlpha
+    hasAlphaChannel
+    height
+    imageFormat
+    isNull
+    isQBitmap
+    load
+    loadFromData
+    mask
+    metric
+    operator=
+    optimization
+    rect
+    resize
+    save
+    selfMask
+    serialNumber
+    setDefaultOptimization
+    setMask
+    setOptimization
+    size
+    trueMatrix
+    width
+    xForm
+    ~QPixmap
+    copyBlt
+    operator<<
+    operator>>
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QPixmapCache
-    cacheLimit
-    clear
-    find
-    insert
-    remove
-    setCacheLimit
+
                                              
+    QPixmapCache
+    cacheLimit
+    clear
+    find
+    insert
+    remove
+    setCacheLimit
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QPlatinumStyle
-    drawRiffles
-    mixedColor
+
                                              
+    QPlatinumStyle
+    drawRiffles
+    mixedColor
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -5579,263 +5579,263 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QPoint
-    isNull
-    manhattanLength
-    operator*=
-    operator+=
-    operator-=
-    operator/=
-    rx
-    ry
-    setX
-    setY
-    x
-    y
-    operator!=
-    operator*
-    operator+
-    operator-
-    operator/
-    operator<<
-    operator==
-    operator>>
+
                                              
+    QPoint
+    isNull
+    manhattanLength
+    operator*=
+    operator+=
+    operator-=
+    operator/=
+    rx
+    ry
+    setX
+    setY
+    x
+    y
+    operator!=
+    operator*
+    operator+
+    operator-
+    operator/
+    operator<<
+    operator==
+    operator>>
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QPointArray
-    boundingRect
-    copy
-    cubicBezier
-    makeArc
-    makeEllipse
-    operator=
-    point
-    putPoints
-    setPoint
-    setPoints
-    translate
-    ~QPointArray
-    operator<<
-    operator>>
+
                                              
+    QPointArray
+    boundingRect
+    copy
+    cubicBezier
+    makeArc
+    makeEllipse
+    operator=
+    point
+    putPoints
+    setPoint
+    setPoints
+    translate
+    ~QPointArray
+    operator<<
+    operator>>
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QPopupMenu
-    aboutToHide
-    aboutToShow
-    activated
-    checkable
-    columns
-    drawContents
-    drawItem
-    exec
-    highlighted
-    idAt
-    insertTearOffHandle
-    isCheckable
-    itemHeight
-    popup
-    setActiveItem
-    setCheckable
-    updateItem
-    ~QPopupMenu
+
                                              
+    QPopupMenu
+    aboutToHide
+    aboutToShow
+    activated
+    checkable
+    columns
+    drawContents
+    drawItem
+    exec
+    highlighted
+    idAt
+    insertTearOffHandle
+    isCheckable
+    itemHeight
+    popup
+    setActiveItem
+    setCheckable
+    updateItem
+    ~QPopupMenu
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QPrinter
-    ColorMode
-    Orientation
-    PageOrder
-    PageSize
-    PaperSource
-    PrintRange
-    PrinterMode
-    PrinterOption
-    abort
-    aborted
-    colorMode
-    creator
-    docName
-    fromPage
-    fullPage
-    isOptionEnabled
-    margins
-    maxPage
-    minPage
-    newPage
-    numCopies
-    orientation
-    outputFileName
-    outputToFile
-    pageOrder
-    pageSize
-    paperSource
-    printProgram
-    printRange
-    printerName
-    printerSelectionOption
-    resolution
-    setColorMode
-    setCreator
-    setDocName
-    setFromTo
-    setFullPage
-    setMargins
-    setMinMax
-    setNumCopies
-    setOptionEnabled
-    setOrientation
-    setOutputFileName
-    setOutputToFile
-    setPageOrder
-    setPageSize
-    setPaperSource
-    setPrintProgram
-    setPrintRange
-    setPrinterName
-    setPrinterSelectionOption
-    setResolution
-    setWinPageSize
-    setup
-    toPage
-    winPageSize
-    ~QPrinter
+
                                              
+    QPrinter
+    ColorMode
+    Orientation
+    PageOrder
+    PageSize
+    PaperSource
+    PrintRange
+    PrinterMode
+    PrinterOption
+    abort
+    aborted
+    colorMode
+    creator
+    docName
+    fromPage
+    fullPage
+    isOptionEnabled
+    margins
+    maxPage
+    minPage
+    newPage
+    numCopies
+    orientation
+    outputFileName
+    outputToFile
+    pageOrder
+    pageSize
+    paperSource
+    printProgram
+    printRange
+    printerName
+    printerSelectionOption
+    resolution
+    setColorMode
+    setCreator
+    setDocName
+    setFromTo
+    setFullPage
+    setMargins
+    setMinMax
+    setNumCopies
+    setOptionEnabled
+    setOrientation
+    setOutputFileName
+    setOutputToFile
+    setPageOrder
+    setPageSize
+    setPaperSource
+    setPrintProgram
+    setPrintRange
+    setPrinterName
+    setPrinterSelectionOption
+    setResolution
+    setWinPageSize
+    setup
+    toPage
+    winPageSize
+    ~QPrinter
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QProcess
-    Communication
-    addArgument
-    arguments
-    canReadLineStderr
-    canReadLineStdout
-    clearArguments
-    closeStdin
-    communication
-    exitStatus
-    isRunning
-    kill
-    launch
-    launchFinished
-    normalExit
-    processExited
-    processIdentifier
-    readLineStderr
-    readLineStdout
-    readStderr
-    readStdout
-    readyReadStderr
-    readyReadStdout
-    setArguments
-    setCommunication
-    setWorkingDirectory
-    start
-    tryTerminate
-    workingDirectory
-    writeToStdin
-    wroteToStdin
-    ~QProcess
+
                                              
+    QProcess
+    Communication
+    addArgument
+    arguments
+    canReadLineStderr
+    canReadLineStdout
+    clearArguments
+    closeStdin
+    communication
+    exitStatus
+    isRunning
+    kill
+    launch
+    launchFinished
+    normalExit
+    processExited
+    processIdentifier
+    readLineStderr
+    readLineStdout
+    readStderr
+    readStdout
+    readyReadStderr
+    readyReadStdout
+    setArguments
+    setCommunication
+    setWorkingDirectory
+    start
+    tryTerminate
+    workingDirectory
+    writeToStdin
+    wroteToStdin
+    ~QProcess
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QProgressBar
-    centerIndicator
-    centerIndicator
-    indicatorFollowsStyle
-    indicatorFollowsStyle
-    percentageVisible
-    percentageVisible
-    progress
-    progress
-    progressString
-    progressString
-    reset
-    setCenterIndicator
-    setIndicator
-    setIndicatorFollowsStyle
-    setPercentageVisible
-    setProgress
-    setTotalSteps
-    totalSteps
-    totalSteps
+
                                              
+    QProgressBar
+    centerIndicator
+    centerIndicator
+    indicatorFollowsStyle
+    indicatorFollowsStyle
+    percentageVisible
+    percentageVisible
+    progress
+    progress
+    progressString
+    progressString
+    reset
+    setCenterIndicator
+    setIndicator
+    setIndicatorFollowsStyle
+    setPercentageVisible
+    setProgress
+    setTotalSteps
+    totalSteps
+    totalSteps
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QProgressDialog
-    autoClose
-    autoClose
-    autoReset
-    autoReset
-    bar
-    cancel
-    canceled
-    forceShow
-    label
-    labelText
-    labelText
-    minimumDuration
-    minimumDuration
-    progress
-    progress
-    reset
-    setAutoClose
-    setAutoReset
-    setBar
-    setCancelButton
-    setCancelButtonText
-    setLabel
-    setLabelText
-    setMinimumDuration
-    setProgress
-    setTotalSteps
-    sizeHint
-    totalSteps
-    totalSteps
-    wasCanceled
-    wasCanceled
-    ~QProgressDialog
+
                                              
+    QProgressDialog
+    autoClose
+    autoClose
+    autoReset
+    autoReset
+    bar
+    cancel
+    canceled
+    forceShow
+    label
+    labelText
+    labelText
+    minimumDuration
+    minimumDuration
+    progress
+    progress
+    reset
+    setAutoClose
+    setAutoReset
+    setBar
+    setCancelButton
+    setCancelButtonText
+    setLabel
+    setLabelText
+    setMinimumDuration
+    setProgress
+    setTotalSteps
+    sizeHint
+    totalSteps
+    totalSteps
+    wasCanceled
+    wasCanceled
+    ~QProgressDialog
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QPtrCollection
-    Item
-    autoDelete
-    clear
-    count
-    deleteItem
-    newItem
-    setAutoDelete
-    ~QPtrCollection
+
                                              
+    QPtrCollection
+    Item
+    autoDelete
+    clear
+    count
+    deleteItem
+    newItem
+    setAutoDelete
+    ~QPtrCollection
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QPtrDict
-    clear
-    count
-    find
-    insert
-    isEmpty
-    operator=
-    operator[]
-    read
-    remove
-    replace
-    resize
-    size
-    statistics
-    take
-    write
-    ~QPtrDict
+
                                              
+    QPtrDict
+    clear
+    count
+    find
+    insert
+    isEmpty
+    operator=
+    operator[]
+    read
+    remove
+    replace
+    resize
+    size
+    statistics
+    take
+    write
+    ~QPtrDict
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -5854,47 +5854,47 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QPtrList
-    append
-    at
-    clear
-    compareItems
-    contains
-    containsRef
-    count
-    current
-    currentNode
-    find
-    findNext
-    findNextRef
-    findRef
-    first
-    getFirst
-    getLast
-    inSort
-    insert
-    isEmpty
-    last
-    next
-    operator!=
-    operator=
-    operator==
-    prepend
-    prev
-    read
-    remove
-    removeFirst
-    removeLast
-    removeNode
-    removeRef
-    replace
-    sort
-    take
-    takeNode
-    toVector
-    write
-    ~QPtrList
+
                                              
+    QPtrList
+    append
+    at
+    clear
+    compareItems
+    contains
+    containsRef
+    count
+    current
+    currentNode
+    find
+    findNext
+    findNextRef
+    findRef
+    first
+    getFirst
+    getLast
+    inSort
+    insert
+    isEmpty
+    last
+    next
+    operator!=
+    operator=
+    operator==
+    prepend
+    prev
+    read
+    remove
+    removeFirst
+    removeLast
+    removeNode
+    removeRef
+    replace
+    sort
+    take
+    takeNode
+    toVector
+    write
+    ~QPtrList
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -5919,232 +5919,232 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QPtrQueue
-    autoDelete
-    clear
-    count
-    current
-    dequeue
-    enqueue
-    head
-    isEmpty
-    operator type *
-    operator=
-    read
-    remove
-    setAutoDelete
-    write
-    ~QPtrQueue
+
                                              
+    QPtrQueue
+    autoDelete
+    clear
+    count
+    current
+    dequeue
+    enqueue
+    head
+    isEmpty
+    operator type *
+    operator=
+    read
+    remove
+    setAutoDelete
+    write
+    ~QPtrQueue
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QPtrStack
-    autoDelete
-    clear
-    count
-    current
-    isEmpty
-    operator type *
-    operator=
-    pop
-    push
-    read
-    remove
-    setAutoDelete
-    top
-    write
-    ~QPtrStack
+
                                              
+    QPtrStack
+    autoDelete
+    clear
+    count
+    current
+    isEmpty
+    operator type *
+    operator=
+    pop
+    push
+    read
+    remove
+    setAutoDelete
+    top
+    write
+    ~QPtrStack
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QPtrVector
-    at
-    bsearch
-    clear
-    compareItems
-    contains
-    containsRef
-    count
-    data
-    fill
-    find
-    findRef
-    insert
-    isEmpty
-    isNull
-    operator=
-    operator==
-    operator[]
-    read
-    remove
-    resize
-    size
-    sort
-    take
-    write
-    ~QPtrVector
+
                                              
+    QPtrVector
+    at
+    bsearch
+    clear
+    compareItems
+    contains
+    containsRef
+    count
+    data
+    fill
+    find
+    findRef
+    insert
+    isEmpty
+    isNull
+    operator=
+    operator==
+    operator[]
+    read
+    remove
+    resize
+    size
+    sort
+    take
+    write
+    ~QPtrVector
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QPushButton
-    autoDefault
-    autoDefault
-    autoMask
-    default
-    flat
-    iconSet
-    iconSet
-    isDefault
-    isFlat
-    on
-    popup
-    setAutoDefault
-    setDefault
-    setFlat
-    setIconSet
-    setOn
-    setPopup
-    setToggleButton
-    toggleButton
-    ~QPushButton
+
                                              
+    QPushButton
+    autoDefault
+    autoDefault
+    autoMask
+    default
+    flat
+    iconSet
+    iconSet
+    isDefault
+    isFlat
+    on
+    popup
+    setAutoDefault
+    setDefault
+    setFlat
+    setIconSet
+    setOn
+    setPopup
+    setToggleButton
+    toggleButton
+    ~QPushButton
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QRadioButton
-    autoMask
-    checked
-    isChecked
-    setChecked
+
                                              
+    QRadioButton
+    autoMask
+    checked
+    isChecked
+    setChecked
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QRangeControl
-    addLine
-    addPage
-    bound
-    directSetValue
-    lineStep
-    maxValue
-    minValue
-    pageStep
-    positionFromValue
-    prevValue
-    rangeChange
-    setMaxValue
-    setMinValue
-    setRange
-    setSteps
-    setValue
-    stepChange
-    subtractLine
-    subtractPage
-    value
-    valueChange
-    valueFromPosition
-    ~QRangeControl
+
                                              
+    QRangeControl
+    addLine
+    addPage
+    bound
+    directSetValue
+    lineStep
+    maxValue
+    minValue
+    pageStep
+    positionFromValue
+    prevValue
+    rangeChange
+    setMaxValue
+    setMinValue
+    setRange
+    setSteps
+    setValue
+    stepChange
+    subtractLine
+    subtractPage
+    value
+    valueChange
+    valueFromPosition
+    ~QRangeControl
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QRect
-    addCoords
-    bottom
-    bottomLeft
-    bottomRight
-    center
-    contains
-    coords
-    height
-    intersect
-    intersects
-    isEmpty
-    isNull
-    isValid
-    left
-    moveBottom
-    moveBottomLeft
-    moveBottomRight
-    moveBy
-    moveCenter
-    moveLeft
-    moveRight
-    moveTop
-    moveTopLeft
-    moveTopRight
-    normalize
-    operator&
-    operator&=
-    operator|
-    operator|=
-    rBottom
-    rLeft
-    rRight
-    rTop
-    rect
-    right
-    setBottom
-    setBottomLeft
-    setBottomRight
-    setCoords
-    setHeight
-    setLeft
-    setRect
-    setRight
-    setSize
-    setTop
-    setTopLeft
-    setTopRight
-    setWidth
-    setX
-    setY
-    size
-    top
-    topLeft
-    topRight
-    unite
-    width
-    x
-    y
-    operator!=
-    operator<<
-    operator==
-    operator>>
+
                                              
+    QRect
+    addCoords
+    bottom
+    bottomLeft
+    bottomRight
+    center
+    contains
+    coords
+    height
+    intersect
+    intersects
+    isEmpty
+    isNull
+    isValid
+    left
+    moveBottom
+    moveBottomLeft
+    moveBottomRight
+    moveBy
+    moveCenter
+    moveLeft
+    moveRight
+    moveTop
+    moveTopLeft
+    moveTopRight
+    normalize
+    operator&
+    operator&=
+    operator|
+    operator|=
+    rBottom
+    rLeft
+    rRight
+    rTop
+    rect
+    right
+    setBottom
+    setBottomLeft
+    setBottomRight
+    setCoords
+    setHeight
+    setLeft
+    setRect
+    setRight
+    setSize
+    setTop
+    setTopLeft
+    setTopRight
+    setWidth
+    setX
+    setY
+    size
+    top
+    topLeft
+    topRight
+    unite
+    width
+    x
+    y
+    operator!=
+    operator<<
+    operator==
+    operator>>
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QRegExp
-    CaretMode
-    cap
-    capturedTexts
-    caseSensitive
-    errorString
-    escape
-    exactMatch
-    isEmpty
-    isValid
-    matchedLength
-    minimal
-    numCaptures
-    operator!=
-    operator=
-    operator==
-    pattern
-    pos
-    search
-    searchRev
-    setCaseSensitive
-    setMinimal
-    setPattern
-    setWildcard
-    wildcard
-    ~QRegExp
+
                                              
+    QRegExp
+    CaretMode
+    cap
+    capturedTexts
+    caseSensitive
+    errorString
+    escape
+    exactMatch
+    isEmpty
+    isValid
+    matchedLength
+    minimal
+    numCaptures
+    operator!=
+    operator=
+    operator==
+    pattern
+    pos
+    search
+    searchRev
+    setCaseSensitive
+    setMinimal
+    setPattern
+    setWildcard
+    wildcard
+    ~QRegExp
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -6157,38 +6157,38 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QRegion
-    RegionType
-    boundingRect
-    contains
-    copy
-    detach
-    eor
-    handle
-    intersect
-    isEmpty
-    isNull
-    operator!=
-    operator&
-    operator&=
-    operator+
-    operator+=
-    operator-
-    operator-=
-    operator=
-    operator==
-    operator^
-    operator^=
-    operator|
-    operator|=
-    rects
-    subtract
-    translate
-    unite
-    ~QRegion
-    operator<<
-    operator>>
+
                                              
+    QRegion
+    RegionType
+    boundingRect
+    contains
+    copy
+    detach
+    eor
+    handle
+    intersect
+    isEmpty
+    isNull
+    operator!=
+    operator&
+    operator&=
+    operator+
+    operator+=
+    operator-
+    operator-=
+    operator=
+    operator==
+    operator^
+    operator^=
+    operator|
+    operator|=
+    rects
+    subtract
+    translate
+    unite
+    ~QRegion
+    operator<<
+    operator>>
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -6245,213 +6245,213 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QScrollBar
-    doAutoRepeat
-    draggingSlider
-    draggingSlider
-    hideEvent
-    lineStep
-    lineStep
-    maxValue
-    maxValue
-    minValue
-    minValue
-    nextLine
-    nextPage
-    orientation
-    orientation
-    pageStep
-    pageStep
-    prevLine
-    prevPage
-    setLineStep
-    setMaxValue
-    setMinValue
-    setOrientation
-    setPageStep
-    setPalette
-    setTracking
-    setValue
-    sliderMoved
-    sliderPressed
-    sliderRect
-    sliderReleased
-    sliderStart
-    startAutoRepeat
-    stopAutoRepeat
-    tracking
-    tracking
-    value
-    value
-    valueChanged
-    ~QScrollBar
+
                                              
+    QScrollBar
+    doAutoRepeat
+    draggingSlider
+    draggingSlider
+    hideEvent
+    lineStep
+    lineStep
+    maxValue
+    maxValue
+    minValue
+    minValue
+    nextLine
+    nextPage
+    orientation
+    orientation
+    pageStep
+    pageStep
+    prevLine
+    prevPage
+    setLineStep
+    setMaxValue
+    setMinValue
+    setOrientation
+    setPageStep
+    setPalette
+    setTracking
+    setValue
+    sliderMoved
+    sliderPressed
+    sliderRect
+    sliderReleased
+    sliderStart
+    startAutoRepeat
+    stopAutoRepeat
+    tracking
+    tracking
+    value
+    value
+    valueChanged
+    ~QScrollBar
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QScrollView
-    ResizePolicy
-    ScrollBarMode
-    addChild
-    bottomMargin
-    center
-    childX
-    childY
-    clipper
-    contentsContextMenuEvent
-    contentsDragEnterEvent
-    contentsDragLeaveEvent
-    contentsDragMoveEvent
-    contentsDropEvent
-    contentsHeight
-    contentsHeight
-    contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent
-    contentsMouseMoveEvent
-    contentsMousePressEvent
-    contentsMouseReleaseEvent
-    contentsMoving
-    contentsToViewport
-    contentsWheelEvent
-    contentsWidth
-    contentsWidth
-    contentsX
-    contentsX
-    contentsY
-    contentsY
-    cornerWidget
-    dragAutoScroll
-    dragAutoScroll
-    drawContents
-    drawContentsOffset
-    enableClipper
-    ensureVisible
-    eventFilter
-    hScrollBarMode
-    hScrollBarMode
-    hasStaticBackground
-    horizontalScrollBar
-    horizontalSliderPressed
-    horizontalSliderReleased
-    isHorizontalSliderPressed
-    isVerticalSliderPressed
-    leftMargin
-    moveChild
-    moveContents
-    removeChild
-    repaintContents
-    resizeContents
-    resizePolicy
-    resizePolicy
-    rightMargin
-    scrollBy
-    setContentsPos
-    setCornerWidget
-    setDragAutoScroll
-    setHBarGeometry
-    setHScrollBarMode
-    setMargins
-    setResizePolicy
-    setStaticBackground
-    setVBarGeometry
-    setVScrollBarMode
-    topMargin
-    updateContents
-    updateScrollBars
-    vScrollBarMode
-    vScrollBarMode
-    verticalScrollBar
-    verticalSliderPressed
-    verticalSliderReleased
-    viewport
-    viewportPaintEvent
-    viewportResizeEvent
-    viewportSize
-    viewportToContents
-    visibleHeight
-    visibleHeight
-    visibleWidth
-    visibleWidth
-    ~QScrollView
+
                                              
+    QScrollView
+    ResizePolicy
+    ScrollBarMode
+    addChild
+    bottomMargin
+    center
+    childX
+    childY
+    clipper
+    contentsContextMenuEvent
+    contentsDragEnterEvent
+    contentsDragLeaveEvent
+    contentsDragMoveEvent
+    contentsDropEvent
+    contentsHeight
+    contentsHeight
+    contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent
+    contentsMouseMoveEvent
+    contentsMousePressEvent
+    contentsMouseReleaseEvent
+    contentsMoving
+    contentsToViewport
+    contentsWheelEvent
+    contentsWidth
+    contentsWidth
+    contentsX
+    contentsX
+    contentsY
+    contentsY
+    cornerWidget
+    dragAutoScroll
+    dragAutoScroll
+    drawContents
+    drawContentsOffset
+    enableClipper
+    ensureVisible
+    eventFilter
+    hScrollBarMode
+    hScrollBarMode
+    hasStaticBackground
+    horizontalScrollBar
+    horizontalSliderPressed
+    horizontalSliderReleased
+    isHorizontalSliderPressed
+    isVerticalSliderPressed
+    leftMargin
+    moveChild
+    moveContents
+    removeChild
+    repaintContents
+    resizeContents
+    resizePolicy
+    resizePolicy
+    rightMargin
+    scrollBy
+    setContentsPos
+    setCornerWidget
+    setDragAutoScroll
+    setHBarGeometry
+    setHScrollBarMode
+    setMargins
+    setResizePolicy
+    setStaticBackground
+    setVBarGeometry
+    setVScrollBarMode
+    topMargin
+    updateContents
+    updateScrollBars
+    vScrollBarMode
+    vScrollBarMode
+    verticalScrollBar
+    verticalSliderPressed
+    verticalSliderReleased
+    viewport
+    viewportPaintEvent
+    viewportResizeEvent
+    viewportSize
+    viewportToContents
+    visibleHeight
+    visibleHeight
+    visibleWidth
+    visibleWidth
+    ~QScrollView
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSemaphore
-    available
-    operator++
-    operator+=
-    operator--
-    operator-=
-    total
-    tryAccess
-    ~QSemaphore
+
                                              
+    QSemaphore
+    available
+    operator++
+    operator+=
+    operator--
+    operator-=
+    total
+    tryAccess
+    ~QSemaphore
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QServerSocket
-    address
-    newConnection
-    ok
-    port
-    setSocket
-    socket
-    socketDevice
-    ~QServerSocket
+
                                              
+    QServerSocket
+    address
+    newConnection
+    ok
+    port
+    setSocket
+    socket
+    socketDevice
+    ~QServerSocket
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSessionManager
-    RestartHint
-    allowsErrorInteraction
-    allowsInteraction
-    cancel
-    discardCommand
-    handle
-    isPhase2
-    release
-    requestPhase2
-    restartCommand
-    restartHint
-    sessionId
-    sessionKey
-    setDiscardCommand
-    setManagerProperty
-    setRestartCommand
-    setRestartHint
+
                                              
+    QSessionManager
+    RestartHint
+    allowsErrorInteraction
+    allowsInteraction
+    cancel
+    discardCommand
+    handle
+    isPhase2
+    release
+    requestPhase2
+    restartCommand
+    restartHint
+    sessionId
+    sessionKey
+    setDiscardCommand
+    setManagerProperty
+    setRestartCommand
+    setRestartHint
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSettings
-    Format
-    Scope
-    System
-    beginGroup
-    endGroup
-    entryList
-    group
-    insertSearchPath
-    readBoolEntry
-    readDoubleEntry
-    readEntry
-    readListEntry
-    readNumEntry
-    removeEntry
-    removeSearchPath
-    resetGroup
-    setPath
-    subkeyList
-    writeEntry
-    ~QSettings
+
                                              
+    QSettings
+    Format
+    Scope
+    System
+    beginGroup
+    endGroup
+    entryList
+    group
+    insertSearchPath
+    readBoolEntry
+    readDoubleEntry
+    readEntry
+    readListEntry
+    readNumEntry
+    removeEntry
+    removeSearchPath
+    resetGroup
+    setPath
+    subkeyList
+    writeEntry
+    ~QSettings
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSGIStyle
-    ~QSGIStyle
+
                                              
+    QSGIStyle
+    ~QSGIStyle
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -6460,280 +6460,280 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSignal
-    activate
-    connect
-    disconnect
-    setValue
-    value
-    ~QSignal
+
                                              
+    QSignal
+    activate
+    connect
+    disconnect
+    setValue
+    value
+    ~QSignal
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSignalMapper
-    map
-    mapped
-    removeMappings
-    setMapping
-    ~QSignalMapper
+
                                              
+    QSignalMapper
+    map
+    mapped
+    removeMappings
+    setMapping
+    ~QSignalMapper
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSimpleRichText
-    adjustSize
-    anchorAt
-    context
-    draw
-    height
-    inText
-    setDefaultFont
-    setWidth
-    width
-    widthUsed
-    ~QSimpleRichText
+
                                              
+    QSimpleRichText
+    adjustSize
+    anchorAt
+    context
+    draw
+    height
+    inText
+    setDefaultFont
+    setWidth
+    width
+    widthUsed
+    ~QSimpleRichText
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSize
-    ScaleMode
-    boundedTo
-    expandedTo
-    height
-    isEmpty
-    isNull
-    isValid
-    operator*=
-    operator+=
-    operator-=
-    operator/=
-    rheight
-    rwidth
-    scale
-    setHeight
-    setWidth
-    transpose
-    width
-    operator!=
-    operator*
-    operator+
-    operator-
-    operator/
-    operator<<
-    operator==
-    operator>>
+
                                              
+    QSize
+    ScaleMode
+    boundedTo
+    expandedTo
+    height
+    isEmpty
+    isNull
+    isValid
+    operator*=
+    operator+=
+    operator-=
+    operator/=
+    rheight
+    rwidth
+    scale
+    setHeight
+    setWidth
+    transpose
+    width
+    operator!=
+    operator*
+    operator+
+    operator-
+    operator/
+    operator<<
+    operator==
+    operator>>
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSizeGrip
-    mouseMoveEvent
-    mousePressEvent
-    paintEvent
-    sizeHint
-    ~QSizeGrip
+
                                              
+    QSizeGrip
+    mouseMoveEvent
+    mousePressEvent
+    paintEvent
+    sizeHint
+    ~QSizeGrip
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSizePolicy
-    ExpandData
-    SizeType
-    expanding
-    hasHeightForWidth
-    horData
-    horStretch
-    mayGrowHorizontally
-    mayGrowVertically
-    mayShrinkHorizontally
-    mayShrinkVertically
-    operator!=
-    operator==
-    setHeightForWidth
-    setHorData
-    setHorStretch
-    setVerData
-    setVerStretch
-    transpose
-    verData
-    verStretch
+
                                              
+    QSizePolicy
+    ExpandData
+    SizeType
+    expanding
+    hasHeightForWidth
+    horData
+    horStretch
+    mayGrowHorizontally
+    mayGrowVertically
+    mayShrinkHorizontally
+    mayShrinkVertically
+    operator!=
+    operator==
+    setHeightForWidth
+    setHorData
+    setHorStretch
+    setVerData
+    setVerStretch
+    transpose
+    verData
+    verStretch
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSjisCodec
-    mimeName
-    ~QSjisCodec
+
                                              
+    QSjisCodec
+    mimeName
+    ~QSjisCodec
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSlider
-    TickSetting
-    addStep
-    lineStep
-    lineStep
-    maxValue
-    maxValue
-    minValue
-    minValue
-    moveSlider
-    orientation
-    orientation
-    pageStep
-    pageStep
-    rangeChange
-    setLineStep
-    setMaxValue
-    setMinValue
-    setOrientation
-    setPageStep
-    setPalette
-    setTickInterval
-    setTickmarks
-    setTracking
-    setValue
-    sliderMoved
-    sliderPressed
-    sliderRect
-    sliderReleased
-    sliderStart
-    subtractStep
-    tickInterval
-    tickInterval
-    tickmarks
-    tickmarks
-    tracking
-    tracking
-    value
-    value
-    valueChange
-    valueChanged
-    ~QSlider
+
                                              
+    QSlider
+    TickSetting
+    addStep
+    lineStep
+    lineStep
+    maxValue
+    maxValue
+    minValue
+    minValue
+    moveSlider
+    orientation
+    orientation
+    pageStep
+    pageStep
+    rangeChange
+    setLineStep
+    setMaxValue
+    setMinValue
+    setOrientation
+    setPageStep
+    setPalette
+    setTickInterval
+    setTickmarks
+    setTracking
+    setValue
+    sliderMoved
+    sliderPressed
+    sliderRect
+    sliderReleased
+    sliderStart
+    subtractStep
+    tickInterval
+    tickInterval
+    tickmarks
+    tickmarks
+    tracking
+    tracking
+    value
+    value
+    valueChange
+    valueChanged
+    ~QSlider
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSocket
-    Error
-    State
-    address
-    at
-    atEnd
-    bytesAvailable
-    bytesToWrite
-    bytesWritten
-    canReadLine
-    clearPendingData
-    close
-    connectToHost
-    connected
-    connectionClosed
-    consumeWriteBuf
-    delayedCloseFinished
-    error
-    flush
-    getch
-    hostFound
-    open
-    peerAddress
-    peerName
-    peerPort
-    port
-    putch
-    readBlock
-    readBufferSize
-    readLine
-    readyRead
-    setReadBufferSize
-    setSocket
-    setSocketDevice
-    setSocketIntern
-    size
-    socket
-    socketDevice
-    state
-    tryConnecting
-    ungetch
-    waitForMore
-    writeBlock
-    ~QSocket
+
                                              
+    QSocket
+    Error
+    State
+    address
+    at
+    atEnd
+    bytesAvailable
+    bytesToWrite
+    bytesWritten
+    canReadLine
+    clearPendingData
+    close
+    connectToHost
+    connected
+    connectionClosed
+    consumeWriteBuf
+    delayedCloseFinished
+    error
+    flush
+    getch
+    hostFound
+    open
+    peerAddress
+    peerName
+    peerPort
+    port
+    putch
+    readBlock
+    readBufferSize
+    readLine
+    readyRead
+    setReadBufferSize
+    setSocket
+    setSocketDevice
+    setSocketIntern
+    size
+    socket
+    socketDevice
+    state
+    tryConnecting
+    ungetch
+    waitForMore
+    writeBlock
+    ~QSocket
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSocketDevice
-    Error
-    Protocol
-    Type
-    accept
-    address
-    addressReusable
-    bind
-    blocking
-    bytesAvailable
-    connect
-    createNewSocket
-    error
-    fetchConnectionParameters
-    isValid
-    listen
-    option
-    peerAddress
-    peerPort
-    port
-    protocol
-    readBlock
-    receiveBufferSize
-    sendBufferSize
-    setAddressReusable
-    setBlocking
-    setError
-    setOption
-    setReceiveBufferSize
-    setSendBufferSize
-    setSocket
-    socket
-    type
-    waitForMore
-    writeBlock
-    ~QSocketDevice
+
                                              
+    QSocketDevice
+    Error
+    Protocol
+    Type
+    accept
+    address
+    addressReusable
+    bind
+    blocking
+    bytesAvailable
+    connect
+    createNewSocket
+    error
+    fetchConnectionParameters
+    isValid
+    listen
+    option
+    peerAddress
+    peerPort
+    port
+    protocol
+    readBlock
+    receiveBufferSize
+    sendBufferSize
+    setAddressReusable
+    setBlocking
+    setError
+    setOption
+    setReceiveBufferSize
+    setSendBufferSize
+    setSocket
+    socket
+    type
+    waitForMore
+    writeBlock
+    ~QSocketDevice
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSocketNotifier
-    Type
-    activated
-    isEnabled
-    setEnabled
-    socket
-    type
-    ~QSocketNotifier
+
                                              
+    QSocketNotifier
+    Type
+    activated
+    isEnabled
+    setEnabled
+    socket
+    type
+    ~QSocketNotifier
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    operator=
-    ~QSortedList
+
                                              
+    operator=
+    ~QSortedList
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSound
-    available
-    fileName
-    isAvailable
-    isFinished
-    loops
-    loopsRemaining
-    play
-    setLoops
-    stop
-    ~QSound
+
                                              
+    QSound
+    available
+    fileName
+    isAvailable
+    isFinished
+    loops
+    loopsRemaining
+    play
+    setLoops
+    stop
+    ~QSound
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -6749,284 +6749,284 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSpinBox
-    ButtonSymbols
-    buttonSymbols
-    buttonSymbols
-    cleanText
-    cleanText
-    currentValueText
-    downRect
-    editor
-    eventFilter
-    interpretText
-    lineStep
-    lineStep
-    mapTextToValue
-    mapValueToText
-    maxValue
-    maxValue
-    minValue
-    minValue
-    prefix
-    prefix
-    rangeChange
-    selectAll
-    setButtonSymbols
-    setLineStep
-    setMaxValue
-    setMinValue
-    setPrefix
-    setSpecialValueText
-    setSuffix
-    setValidator
-    setValue
-    setWrapping
-    specialValueText
-    specialValueText
-    stepDown
-    stepUp
-    suffix
-    suffix
-    text
-    text
-    textChanged
-    upRect
-    updateDisplay
-    validator
-    value
-    value
-    valueChange
-    valueChanged
-    wrapping
-    wrapping
-    ~QSpinBox
+
                                              
+    QSpinBox
+    ButtonSymbols
+    buttonSymbols
+    buttonSymbols
+    cleanText
+    cleanText
+    currentValueText
+    downRect
+    editor
+    eventFilter
+    interpretText
+    lineStep
+    lineStep
+    mapTextToValue
+    mapValueToText
+    maxValue
+    maxValue
+    minValue
+    minValue
+    prefix
+    prefix
+    rangeChange
+    selectAll
+    setButtonSymbols
+    setLineStep
+    setMaxValue
+    setMinValue
+    setPrefix
+    setSpecialValueText
+    setSuffix
+    setValidator
+    setValue
+    setWrapping
+    specialValueText
+    specialValueText
+    stepDown
+    stepUp
+    suffix
+    suffix
+    text
+    text
+    textChanged
+    upRect
+    updateDisplay
+    validator
+    value
+    value
+    valueChange
+    valueChanged
+    wrapping
+    wrapping
+    ~QSpinBox
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSplashScreen
-    clear
-    drawContents
-    finish
-    message
-    messageChanged
-    pixmap
-    repaint
-    setPixmap
-    ~QSplashScreen
+
                                              
+    QSplashScreen
+    clear
+    drawContents
+    finish
+    message
+    messageChanged
+    pixmap
+    repaint
+    setPixmap
+    ~QSplashScreen
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSplitter
-    ResizeMode
-    adjustPos
-    childEvent
-    childrenCollapsible
-    childrenCollapsible
-    getRange
-    handleWidth
-    handleWidth
-    idAfter
-    moveSplitter
-    moveToFirst
-    moveToLast
-    opaqueResize
-    opaqueResize
-    orientation
-    orientation
-    processChildEvents
-    refresh
-    setChildrenCollapsible
-    setCollapsible
-    setHandleWidth
-    setOpaqueResize
-    setOrientation
-    setResizeMode
-    setRubberband
-    setSizes
-    sizes
-    ~QSplitter
-    operator<<
-    operator>>
+
                                              
+    QSplitter
+    ResizeMode
+    adjustPos
+    childEvent
+    childrenCollapsible
+    childrenCollapsible
+    getRange
+    handleWidth
+    handleWidth
+    idAfter
+    moveSplitter
+    moveToFirst
+    moveToLast
+    opaqueResize
+    opaqueResize
+    orientation
+    orientation
+    processChildEvents
+    refresh
+    setChildrenCollapsible
+    setCollapsible
+    setHandleWidth
+    setOpaqueResize
+    setOrientation
+    setResizeMode
+    setRubberband
+    setSizes
+    sizes
+    ~QSplitter
+    operator<<
+    operator>>
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSql
-    Confirm
-    Location
-    Op
-    ParameterType
-    TableType
+
                                              
+    QSql
+    Confirm
+    Location
+    Op
+    ParameterType
+    TableType
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSqlCursor
-    Mode
-    append
-    calculateField
-    canDelete
-    canInsert
-    canUpdate
-    clear
-    del
-    editBuffer
-    filter
-    index
-    insert
-    isCalculated
-    isNull
-    isReadOnly
-    isTrimmed
-    mode
-    name
-    operator=
-    primaryIndex
-    primeDelete
-    primeInsert
-    primeUpdate
-    remove
-    select
-    setCalculated
-    setFilter
-    setGenerated
-    setMode
-    setName
-    setPrimaryIndex
-    setSort
-    setTrimmed
-    sort
-    toString
-    update
-    ~QSqlCursor
+
                                              
+    QSqlCursor
+    Mode
+    append
+    calculateField
+    canDelete
+    canInsert
+    canUpdate
+    clear
+    del
+    editBuffer
+    filter
+    index
+    insert
+    isCalculated
+    isNull
+    isReadOnly
+    isTrimmed
+    mode
+    name
+    operator=
+    primaryIndex
+    primeDelete
+    primeInsert
+    primeUpdate
+    remove
+    select
+    setCalculated
+    setFilter
+    setGenerated
+    setMode
+    setName
+    setPrimaryIndex
+    setSort
+    setTrimmed
+    sort
+    toString
+    update
+    ~QSqlCursor
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSqlDatabase
-    addDatabase
-    close
-    commit
-    connectOptions
-    connectOptions
-    contains
-    database
-    databaseName
-    databaseName
-    driver
-    driverName
-    drivers
-    exec
-    hostName
-    hostName
-    isDriverAvailable
-    isOpen
-    isOpenError
-    lastError
-    open
-    password
-    password
-    port
-    port
-    primaryIndex
-    record
-    recordInfo
-    registerSqlDriver
-    removeDatabase
-    rollback
-    setConnectOptions
-    setDatabaseName
-    setHostName
-    setPassword
-    setPort
-    setUserName
-    tables
-    transaction
-    userName
-    userName
-    ~QSqlDatabase
+
                                              
+    QSqlDatabase
+    addDatabase
+    close
+    commit
+    connectOptions
+    connectOptions
+    contains
+    database
+    databaseName
+    databaseName
+    driver
+    driverName
+    drivers
+    exec
+    hostName
+    hostName
+    isDriverAvailable
+    isOpen
+    isOpenError
+    lastError
+    open
+    password
+    password
+    port
+    port
+    primaryIndex
+    record
+    recordInfo
+    registerSqlDriver
+    removeDatabase
+    rollback
+    setConnectOptions
+    setDatabaseName
+    setHostName
+    setPassword
+    setPort
+    setUserName
+    tables
+    transaction
+    userName
+    userName
+    ~QSqlDatabase
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSqlDriver
-    DriverFeature
-    beginTransaction
-    close
-    commitTransaction
-    createQuery
-    formatValue
-    hasFeature
-    isOpen
-    isOpenError
-    lastError
-    nullText
-    open
-    primaryIndex
-    record
-    recordInfo
-    rollbackTransaction
-    setLastError
-    setOpen
-    setOpenError
-    tables
-    ~QSqlDriver
+
                                              
+    QSqlDriver
+    DriverFeature
+    beginTransaction
+    close
+    commitTransaction
+    createQuery
+    formatValue
+    hasFeature
+    isOpen
+    isOpenError
+    lastError
+    nullText
+    open
+    primaryIndex
+    record
+    recordInfo
+    rollbackTransaction
+    setLastError
+    setOpen
+    setOpenError
+    tables
+    ~QSqlDriver
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSqlDriverPlugin
-    create
-    keys
-    ~QSqlDriverPlugin
+
                                              
+    QSqlDriverPlugin
+    create
+    keys
+    ~QSqlDriverPlugin
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSqlEditorFactory
-    createEditor
-    defaultFactory
-    installDefaultFactory
-    ~QSqlEditorFactory
+
                                              
+    QSqlEditorFactory
+    createEditor
+    defaultFactory
+    installDefaultFactory
+    ~QSqlEditorFactory
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSqlError
-    Type
-    databaseText
-    driverText
-    number
-    operator=
-    setDatabaseText
-    setDriverText
-    setNumber
-    setType
-    text
-    type
-    ~QSqlError
+
                                              
+    QSqlError
+    Type
+    databaseText
+    driverText
+    number
+    operator=
+    setDatabaseText
+    setDriverText
+    setNumber
+    setType
+    text
+    type
+    ~QSqlError
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSqlField
-    clear
-    isNull
-    isReadOnly
-    name
-    operator=
-    operator==
-    setName
-    setNull
-    setReadOnly
-    setValue
-    type
-    value
-    ~QSqlField
+
                                              
+    QSqlField
+    clear
+    isNull
+    isReadOnly
+    name
+    operator=
+    operator==
+    setName
+    setNull
+    setReadOnly
+    setValue
+    type
+    value
+    ~QSqlField
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -7052,111 +7052,111 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSqlForm
-    clear
-    clearValues
-    count
-    fieldToWidget
-    insert
-    installPropertyMap
-    readField
-    readFields
-    remove
-    setRecord
-    widget
-    widgetToField
-    writeField
-    writeFields
-    ~QSqlForm
+
                                              
+    QSqlForm
+    clear
+    clearValues
+    count
+    fieldToWidget
+    insert
+    installPropertyMap
+    readField
+    readFields
+    remove
+    setRecord
+    widget
+    widgetToField
+    writeField
+    writeFields
+    ~QSqlForm
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSqlIndex
-    append
-    cursorName
-    fromStringList
-    isDescending
-    name
-    operator=
-    setCursorName
-    setDescending
-    setName
-    ~QSqlIndex
+
                                              
+    QSqlIndex
+    append
+    cursorName
+    fromStringList
+    isDescending
+    name
+    operator=
+    setCursorName
+    setDescending
+    setName
+    ~QSqlIndex
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSqlPropertyMap
-    defaultMap
-    insert
-    installDefaultMap
-    property
-    remove
-    setProperty
-    ~QSqlPropertyMap
+
                                              
+    QSqlPropertyMap
+    defaultMap
+    insert
+    installDefaultMap
+    property
+    remove
+    setProperty
+    ~QSqlPropertyMap
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSqlQuery
-    addBindValue
-    afterSeek
-    at
-    beforeSeek
-    bindValue
-    boundValue
-    boundValues
-    driver
-    exec
-    executedQuery
-    first
-    isActive
-    isForwardOnly
-    isNull
-    isSelect
-    isValid
-    last
-    lastError
-    lastQuery
-    next
-    numRowsAffected
-    operator=
-    prepare
-    prev
-    result
-    seek
-    setForwardOnly
-    size
-    value
-    ~QSqlQuery
+
                                              
+    QSqlQuery
+    addBindValue
+    afterSeek
+    at
+    beforeSeek
+    bindValue
+    boundValue
+    boundValues
+    driver
+    exec
+    executedQuery
+    first
+    isActive
+    isForwardOnly
+    isNull
+    isSelect
+    isValid
+    last
+    lastError
+    lastQuery
+    next
+    numRowsAffected
+    operator=
+    prepare
+    prev
+    result
+    seek
+    setForwardOnly
+    size
+    value
+    ~QSqlQuery
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSqlRecord
-    append
-    clear
-    clearValues
-    contains
-    count
-    field
-    fieldName
-    insert
-    isEmpty
-    isGenerated
-    isNull
-    operator=
-    position
-    remove
-    setGenerated
-    setNull
-    setValue
-    toString
-    toStringList
-    value
-    ~QSqlRecord
+
                                              
+    QSqlRecord
+    append
+    clear
+    clearValues
+    contains
+    count
+    field
+    fieldName
+    insert
+    isEmpty
+    isGenerated
+    isNull
+    operator=
+    position
+    remove
+    setGenerated
+    setNull
+    setValue
+    toString
+    toStringList
+    value
+    ~QSqlRecord
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -7168,56 +7168,56 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSqlResult
-    at
-    data
-    driver
-    fetch
-    fetchFirst
-    fetchLast
-    fetchNext
-    fetchPrev
-    isActive
-    isForwardOnly
-    isNull
-    isSelect
-    isValid
-    lastError
-    lastQuery
-    numRowsAffected
-    reset
-    setActive
-    setAt
-    setForwardOnly
-    setLastError
-    setQuery
-    setSelect
-    size
-    ~QSqlResult
+
                                              
+    QSqlResult
+    at
+    data
+    driver
+    fetch
+    fetchFirst
+    fetchLast
+    fetchNext
+    fetchPrev
+    isActive
+    isForwardOnly
+    isNull
+    isSelect
+    isValid
+    lastError
+    lastQuery
+    numRowsAffected
+    reset
+    setActive
+    setAt
+    setForwardOnly
+    setLastError
+    setQuery
+    setSelect
+    size
+    ~QSqlResult
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSqlSelectCursor
-    ~QSqlSelectCursor
+
                                              
+    QSqlSelectCursor
+    ~QSqlSelectCursor
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QStatusBar
-    addWidget
-    clear
-    hideOrShow
-    isSizeGripEnabled
-    message
-    messageChanged
-    paintEvent
-    reformat
-    removeWidget
-    setSizeGripEnabled
-    sizeGripEnabled
-    ~QStatusBar
+
                                              
+    QStatusBar
+    addWidget
+    clear
+    hideOrShow
+    isSizeGripEnabled
+    message
+    messageChanged
+    paintEvent
+    reformat
+    removeWidget
+    setSizeGripEnabled
+    sizeGripEnabled
+    ~QStatusBar
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -7235,111 +7235,111 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QString
-    SectionFlags
-    append
-    arg
-    ascii
-    at
-    capacity
-    compare
-    compose
-    constref
-    contains
-    detach
-    endsWith
-    fill
-    find
-    findRev
-    fromAscii
-    fromLatin1
-    fromLocal8Bit
-    fromUcs2
-    fromUtf8
-    insert
-    isEmpty
-    isNull
-    latin1
-    latin1ToUnicode
-    left
-    leftJustify
-    length
-    local8Bit
-    localeAwareCompare
-    lower
-    mid
-    number
-    operator const char *
-    string
-    operator!
-    operator+=
-    operator=
-    operator[]
-    prepend
-    real_detach
-    ref
-    remove
-    replace
-    reserve
-    right
-    rightJustify
-    section
-    setAscii
-    setLatin1
-    setLength
-    setNum
-    setUnicode
-    setUnicodeCodes
-    simplifyWhiteSpace
-    sprintf
-    squeeze
-    startsWith
-    stripWhiteSpace
-    toDouble
-    toFloat
-    toInt
-    toLong
-    toLongLong
-    toShort
-    toUInt
-    toULong
-    toULongLong
-    toUShort
-    truncate
-    ucs2
-    unicode
-    unicodeToLatin1
-    upper
-    utf8
-    ~QString
-    operator!=
-    operator+
-    operator<
-    operator<<
-    operator<=
-    operator==
-    operator>
-    operator>=
-    operator>>
+
                                              
+    QString
+    SectionFlags
+    append
+    arg
+    ascii
+    at
+    capacity
+    compare
+    compose
+    constref
+    contains
+    detach
+    endsWith
+    fill
+    find
+    findRev
+    fromAscii
+    fromLatin1
+    fromLocal8Bit
+    fromUcs2
+    fromUtf8
+    insert
+    isEmpty
+    isNull
+    latin1
+    latin1ToUnicode
+    left
+    leftJustify
+    length
+    local8Bit
+    localeAwareCompare
+    lower
+    mid
+    number
+    operator const char *
+    string
+    operator!
+    operator+=
+    operator=
+    operator[]
+    prepend
+    real_detach
+    ref
+    remove
+    replace
+    reserve
+    right
+    rightJustify
+    section
+    setAscii
+    setLatin1
+    setLength
+    setNum
+    setUnicode
+    setUnicodeCodes
+    simplifyWhiteSpace
+    sprintf
+    squeeze
+    startsWith
+    stripWhiteSpace
+    toDouble
+    toFloat
+    toInt
+    toLong
+    toLongLong
+    toShort
+    toUInt
+    toULong
+    toULongLong
+    toUShort
+    truncate
+    ucs2
+    unicode
+    unicodeToLatin1
+    upper
+    utf8
+    ~QString
+    operator!=
+    operator+
+    operator<
+    operator<<
+    operator<=
+    operator==
+    operator>
+    operator>=
+    operator>>
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QStringList
-    fromStrList
-    grep
-    gres
-    join
-    sort
-    split
+
                                              
+    QStringList
+    fromStrList
+    grep
+    gres
+    join
+    sort
+    split
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QStrList
-    operator=
-    ~QStrList
+
                                              
+    QStrList
+    operator=
+    ~QStrList
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -7348,44 +7348,44 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QStyle
-    ComplexControl
-    ContentsType
-    ControlElement
-    PixelMetric
-    PrimitiveElement
-    StyleFlags
-    StyleHint
-    StylePixmap
-    SubControl
-    SubRect
-    drawComplexControl
-    drawComplexControlMask
-    drawControl
-    drawControlMask
-    drawItem
-    drawPrimitive
-    itemRect
-    pixelMetric
-    polish
-    polishPopupMenu
-    querySubControl
-    querySubControlMetrics
-    sizeFromContents
-    styleHint
-    stylePixmap
-    subRect
-    unPolish
-    visualRect
-    ~QStyle
+
                                              
+    QStyle
+    ComplexControl
+    ContentsType
+    ControlElement
+    PixelMetric
+    PrimitiveElement
+    StyleFlags
+    StyleHint
+    StylePixmap
+    SubControl
+    SubRect
+    drawComplexControl
+    drawComplexControlMask
+    drawControl
+    drawControlMask
+    drawItem
+    drawPrimitive
+    itemRect
+    pixelMetric
+    polish
+    polishPopupMenu
+    querySubControl
+    querySubControlMetrics
+    sizeFromContents
+    styleHint
+    stylePixmap
+    subRect
+    unPolish
+    visualRect
+    ~QStyle
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QStyleFactory
-    create
-    keys
+
                                              
+    QStyleFactory
+    create
+    keys
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -7412,26 +7412,26 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QStylePlugin
-    create
-    keys
-    ~QStylePlugin
+
                                              
+    QStylePlugin
+    create
+    keys
+    ~QStylePlugin
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QStyleSheet
-    convertFromPlainText
-    defaultSheet
-    error
-    escape
-    item
-    mightBeRichText
-    scaleFont
-    setDefaultSheet
-    tag
-    ~QStyleSheet
+
                                              
+    QStyleSheet
+    convertFromPlainText
+    defaultSheet
+    error
+    escape
+    item
+    mightBeRichText
+    scaleFont
+    setDefaultSheet
+    tag
+    ~QStyleSheet
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -7489,51 +7489,51 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QSyntaxHighlighter
-    currentParagraph
-    highlightParagraph
-    rehighlight
-    setFormat
-    textEdit
-    ~QSyntaxHighlighter
+
                                              
+    QSyntaxHighlighter
+    currentParagraph
+    highlightParagraph
+    rehighlight
+    setFormat
+    textEdit
+    ~QSyntaxHighlighter
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    Qt
-    AlignmentFlags
-    AnchorAttribute
-    ArrowType
-    BGMode
-    BackgroundMode
-    BrushStyle
-    ButtonState
-    Corner
-    CursorShape
-    DateFormat
-    Dock
-    ImageConversionFlags
-    Key
-    MacintoshVersion
-    Modifier
-    Orientation
-    PaintUnit
-    PenCapStyle
-    PenJoinStyle
-    PenStyle
-    RasterOp
-    SequenceMatch
-    SortOrder
-    StringComparisonMode
-    TextFlags
-    TextFormat
-    TimeSpec
-    UIEffect
-    WidgetFlags
-    WidgetState
-    WindowState
-    WindowsVersion
+
                                              
+    Qt
+    AlignmentFlags
+    AnchorAttribute
+    ArrowType
+    BGMode
+    BackgroundMode
+    BrushStyle
+    ButtonState
+    Corner
+    CursorShape
+    DateFormat
+    Dock
+    ImageConversionFlags
+    Key
+    MacintoshVersion
+    Modifier
+    Orientation
+    PaintUnit
+    PenCapStyle
+    PenJoinStyle
+    PenStyle
+    RasterOp
+    SequenceMatch
+    SortOrder
+    StringComparisonMode
+    TextFlags
+    TextFormat
+    TimeSpec
+    UIEffect
+    WidgetFlags
+    WidgetState
+    WindowState
+    WindowsVersion
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -7553,226 +7553,226 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QTabBar
-    Shape
-    addTab
-    count
-    count
-    currentTab
-    currentTab
-    indexOf
-    insertTab
-    isTabEnabled
-    keyboardFocusTab
-    keyboardFocusTab
-    layoutChanged
-    layoutTabs
-    paint
-    paintEvent
-    paintLabel
-    removeTab
-    removeToolTip
-    selectTab
-    selected
-    setCurrentTab
-    setShape
-    setTabEnabled
-    setToolTip
-    shape
-    shape
-    tab
-    tabAt
-    tabList
-    toolTip
-    ~QTabBar
+
                                              
+    QTabBar
+    Shape
+    addTab
+    count
+    count
+    currentTab
+    currentTab
+    indexOf
+    insertTab
+    isTabEnabled
+    keyboardFocusTab
+    keyboardFocusTab
+    layoutChanged
+    layoutTabs
+    paint
+    paintEvent
+    paintLabel
+    removeTab
+    removeToolTip
+    selectTab
+    selected
+    setCurrentTab
+    setShape
+    setTabEnabled
+    setToolTip
+    shape
+    shape
+    tab
+    tabAt
+    tabList
+    toolTip
+    ~QTabBar
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QTabDialog
-    aboutToShow
-    addTab
-    applyButtonPressed
-    cancelButtonPressed
-    changeTab
-    currentChanged
-    currentPage
-    defaultButtonPressed
-    hasApplyButton
-    hasCancelButton
-    hasDefaultButton
-    hasHelpButton
-    hasOkButton
-    helpButtonPressed
-    insertTab
-    isTabEnabled
-    removePage
-    setApplyButton
-    setCancelButton
-    setDefaultButton
-    setFont
-    setHelpButton
-    setOkButton
-    setSizes
-    setTabBar
-    setTabEnabled
-    setUpLayout
-    showPage
-    showTab
-    tabBar
-    tabLabel
-    ~QTabDialog
+
                                              
+    QTabDialog
+    aboutToShow
+    addTab
+    applyButtonPressed
+    cancelButtonPressed
+    changeTab
+    currentChanged
+    currentPage
+    defaultButtonPressed
+    hasApplyButton
+    hasCancelButton
+    hasDefaultButton
+    hasHelpButton
+    hasOkButton
+    helpButtonPressed
+    insertTab
+    isTabEnabled
+    removePage
+    setApplyButton
+    setCancelButton
+    setDefaultButton
+    setFont
+    setHelpButton
+    setOkButton
+    setSizes
+    setTabBar
+    setTabEnabled
+    setUpLayout
+    showPage
+    showTab
+    tabBar
+    tabLabel
+    ~QTabDialog
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QTable
-    EditMode
-    FocusStyle
-    SelectionMode
-    activateNextCell
-    addSelection
-    adjustColumn
-    adjustRow
-    beginEdit
-    cellGeometry
-    cellRect
-    cellWidget
-    clearCell
-    clearCellWidget
-    clearSelection
-    clicked
-    columnAt
-    columnClicked
-    columnIndexChanged
-    columnMovingEnabled
-    columnMovingEnabled
-    columnPos
-    columnWidth
-    columnWidthChanged
-    contentsDragEnterEvent
-    contentsDragLeaveEvent
-    contentsDragMoveEvent
-    contentsDropEvent
-    contextMenuRequested
-    createEditor
-    currEditCol
-    currEditRow
-    currentChanged
-    currentColumn
-    currentRow
-    currentSelection
-    doubleClicked
-    dragEnabled
-    dragObject
-    drawContents
-    dropped
-    editCell
-    editMode
-    endEdit
-    ensureCellVisible
-    focusStyle
-    focusStyle
-    hideColumn
-    hideRow
-    horizontalHeader
-    indexOf
-    insertColumns
-    insertRows
-    insertWidget
-    isColumnHidden
-    isColumnReadOnly
-    isColumnSelected
-    isColumnStretchable
-    isEditing
-    isReadOnly
-    isRowHidden
-    isRowReadOnly
-    isRowSelected
-    isRowStretchable
-    isSelected
-    item
-    numCols
-    numCols
-    numRows
-    numRows
-    numSelections
-    numSelections
-    paintCell
-    paintEmptyArea
-    paintFocus
-    pixmap
-    pressed
-    readOnly
-    removeColumn
-    removeColumns
-    removeRow
-    removeRows
-    removeSelection
-    repaintSelections
-    resizeData
-    rowAt
-    rowHeight
-    rowHeightChanged
-    rowIndexChanged
-    rowMovingEnabled
-    rowMovingEnabled
-    rowPos
-    selectCells
-    selectColumn
-    selectRow
-    selection
-    selectionChanged
-    selectionMode
-    selectionMode
-    setCellContentFromEditor
-    setCellWidget
-    setColumnLabels
-    setColumnMovingEnabled
-    setColumnReadOnly
-    setColumnStretchable
-    setColumnWidth
-    setCurrentCell
-    setDragEnabled
-    setEditMode
-    setFocusStyle
-    setItem
-    setLeftMargin
-    setNumCols
-    setNumRows
-    setPixmap
-    setReadOnly
-    setRowHeight
-    setRowLabels
-    setRowMovingEnabled
-    setRowReadOnly
-    setRowStretchable
-    setSelectionMode
-    setShowGrid
-    setSorting
-    setText
-    setTopMargin
-    showColumn
-    showGrid
-    showGrid
-    showRow
-    sortColumn
-    sorting
-    sorting
-    startDrag
-    swapCells
-    swapColumns
-    swapRows
-    tableSize
-    takeItem
-    text
-    updateCell
-    updateGeometries
-    updateHeaderStates
-    valueChanged
-    verticalHeader
-    ~QTable
+
                                              
+    QTable
+    EditMode
+    FocusStyle
+    SelectionMode
+    activateNextCell
+    addSelection
+    adjustColumn
+    adjustRow
+    beginEdit
+    cellGeometry
+    cellRect
+    cellWidget
+    clearCell
+    clearCellWidget
+    clearSelection
+    clicked
+    columnAt
+    columnClicked
+    columnIndexChanged
+    columnMovingEnabled
+    columnMovingEnabled
+    columnPos
+    columnWidth
+    columnWidthChanged
+    contentsDragEnterEvent
+    contentsDragLeaveEvent
+    contentsDragMoveEvent
+    contentsDropEvent
+    contextMenuRequested
+    createEditor
+    currEditCol
+    currEditRow
+    currentChanged
+    currentColumn
+    currentRow
+    currentSelection
+    doubleClicked
+    dragEnabled
+    dragObject
+    drawContents
+    dropped
+    editCell
+    editMode
+    endEdit
+    ensureCellVisible
+    focusStyle
+    focusStyle
+    hideColumn
+    hideRow
+    horizontalHeader
+    indexOf
+    insertColumns
+    insertRows
+    insertWidget
+    isColumnHidden
+    isColumnReadOnly
+    isColumnSelected
+    isColumnStretchable
+    isEditing
+    isReadOnly
+    isRowHidden
+    isRowReadOnly
+    isRowSelected
+    isRowStretchable
+    isSelected
+    item
+    numCols
+    numCols
+    numRows
+    numRows
+    numSelections
+    numSelections
+    paintCell
+    paintEmptyArea
+    paintFocus
+    pixmap
+    pressed
+    readOnly
+    removeColumn
+    removeColumns
+    removeRow
+    removeRows
+    removeSelection
+    repaintSelections
+    resizeData
+    rowAt
+    rowHeight
+    rowHeightChanged
+    rowIndexChanged
+    rowMovingEnabled
+    rowMovingEnabled
+    rowPos
+    selectCells
+    selectColumn
+    selectRow
+    selection
+    selectionChanged
+    selectionMode
+    selectionMode
+    setCellContentFromEditor
+    setCellWidget
+    setColumnLabels
+    setColumnMovingEnabled
+    setColumnReadOnly
+    setColumnStretchable
+    setColumnWidth
+    setCurrentCell
+    setDragEnabled
+    setEditMode
+    setFocusStyle
+    setItem
+    setLeftMargin
+    setNumCols
+    setNumRows
+    setPixmap
+    setReadOnly
+    setRowHeight
+    setRowLabels
+    setRowMovingEnabled
+    setRowReadOnly
+    setRowStretchable
+    setSelectionMode
+    setShowGrid
+    setSorting
+    setText
+    setTopMargin
+    showColumn
+    showGrid
+    showGrid
+    showRow
+    sortColumn
+    sorting
+    sorting
+    startDrag
+    swapCells
+    swapColumns
+    swapRows
+    tableSize
+    takeItem
+    text
+    updateCell
+    updateGeometries
+    updateHeaderStates
+    valueChanged
+    verticalHeader
+    ~QTable
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -7848,115 +7848,115 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QTabWidget
-    TabPosition
-    TabShape
-    addTab
-    autoMask
-    changeTab
-    cornerWidget
-    count
-    count
-    currentChanged
-    currentPage
-    currentPage
-    currentPageIndex
-    indexOf
-    insertTab
-    isTabEnabled
-    label
-    margin
-    margin
-    page
-    removePage
-    removeTabToolTip
-    setCornerWidget
-    setCurrentPage
-    setMargin
-    setTabBar
-    setTabEnabled
-    setTabIconSet
-    setTabLabel
-    setTabPosition
-    setTabShape
-    setTabToolTip
-    showPage
-    showTab
-    tabBar
-    tabIconSet
-    tabLabel
-    tabPosition
-    tabPosition
-    tabShape
-    tabShape
-    tabToolTip
+
                                              
+    QTabWidget
+    TabPosition
+    TabShape
+    addTab
+    autoMask
+    changeTab
+    cornerWidget
+    count
+    count
+    currentChanged
+    currentPage
+    currentPage
+    currentPageIndex
+    indexOf
+    insertTab
+    isTabEnabled
+    label
+    margin
+    margin
+    page
+    removePage
+    removeTabToolTip
+    setCornerWidget
+    setCurrentPage
+    setMargin
+    setTabBar
+    setTabEnabled
+    setTabIconSet
+    setTabLabel
+    setTabPosition
+    setTabShape
+    setTabToolTip
+    showPage
+    showTab
+    tabBar
+    tabIconSet
+    tabLabel
+    tabPosition
+    tabPosition
+    tabShape
+    tabShape
+    tabToolTip
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QTextBrowser
-    anchorClicked
-    backward
-    backwardAvailable
-    forward
-    forwardAvailable
-    highlighted
-    home
-    keyPressEvent
-    linkClicked
-    modified
-    overwriteMode
-    readOnly
-    reload
-    setSource
-    setText
-    source
-    source
-    sourceChanged
-    undoDepth
-    undoRedoEnabled
+
                                              
+    QTextBrowser
+    anchorClicked
+    backward
+    backwardAvailable
+    forward
+    forwardAvailable
+    highlighted
+    home
+    keyPressEvent
+    linkClicked
+    modified
+    overwriteMode
+    readOnly
+    reload
+    setSource
+    setText
+    source
+    source
+    sourceChanged
+    undoDepth
+    undoRedoEnabled
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QTextCodec
-    canEncode
-    codecForCStrings
-    codecForContent
-    codecForIndex
-    codecForLocale
-    codecForMib
-    codecForName
-    codecForTr
-    deleteAllCodecs
-    fromUnicode
-    heuristicContentMatch
-    heuristicNameMatch
-    loadCharmap
-    loadCharmapFile
-    locale
-    makeDecoder
-    makeEncoder
-    mibEnum
-    mimeName
-    name
-    setCodecForCStrings
-    setCodecForLocale
-    setCodecForTr
-    simpleHeuristicNameMatch
-    toUnicode
-    ~QTextCodec
+
                                              
+    QTextCodec
+    canEncode
+    codecForCStrings
+    codecForContent
+    codecForIndex
+    codecForLocale
+    codecForMib
+    codecForName
+    codecForTr
+    deleteAllCodecs
+    fromUnicode
+    heuristicContentMatch
+    heuristicNameMatch
+    loadCharmap
+    loadCharmapFile
+    locale
+    makeDecoder
+    makeEncoder
+    mibEnum
+    mimeName
+    name
+    setCodecForCStrings
+    setCodecForLocale
+    setCodecForTr
+    simpleHeuristicNameMatch
+    toUnicode
+    ~QTextCodec
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QTextCodecPlugin
-    createForMib
-    createForName
-    mibEnums
-    names
-    ~QTextCodecPlugin
+
                                              
+    QTextCodecPlugin
+    createForMib
+    createForName
+    mibEnums
+    names
+    ~QTextCodecPlugin
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -7977,160 +7977,160 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QTextEdit
-    AutoFormatting
-    CursorAction
-    KeyboardAction
-    VerticalAlignment
-    WordWrap
-    WrapPolicy
-    alignment
-    anchorAt
-    append
-    autoFormatting
-    autoFormatting
-    bold
-    charAt
-    clear
-    clearParagraphBackground
-    clicked
-    color
-    context
-    copy
-    copyAvailable
-    createPopupMenu
-    currentAlignmentChanged
-    currentColorChanged
-    currentFont
-    currentFontChanged
-    currentVerticalAlignmentChanged
-    cursorPositionChanged
-    cut
-    del
-    doKeyboardAction
-    documentTitle
-    documentTitle
-    doubleClicked
-    ensureCursorVisible
-    family
-    find
-    focusNextPrevChild
-    getCursorPosition
-    getSelection
-    hasSelectedText
-    hasSelectedText
-    heightForWidth
-    insert
-    insertAt
-    insertParagraph
-    isModified
-    isOverwriteMode
-    isReadOnly
-    isRedoAvailable
-    isUndoAvailable
-    isUndoRedoEnabled
-    italic
-    keyPressEvent
-    length
-    length
-    lineOfChar
-    lines
-    linesOfParagraph
-    linkUnderline
-    linkUnderline
-    maxLogLines
-    mimeSourceFactory
-    modificationChanged
-    modified
-    moveCursor
-    optimCheckLimit
-    overwriteMode
-    paper
-    paper
-    paragraphAt
-    paragraphBackgroundColor
-    paragraphLength
-    paragraphRect
-    paragraphs
-    paste
-    pasteSpecial
-    pasteSubType
-    placeCursor
-    pointSize
-    readOnly
-    redo
-    redoAvailable
-    removeParagraph
-    removeSelectedText
-    removeSelection
-    repaintChanged
-    returnPressed
-    scrollToAnchor
-    scrollToBottom
-    selectAll
-    selectedText
-    selectedText
-    selectionChanged
-    setAlignment
-    setAutoFormatting
-    setBold
-    setColor
-    setCurrentFont
-    setCursorPosition
-    setFamily
-    setItalic
-    setLinkUnderline
-    setMaxLogLines
-    setMimeSourceFactory
-    setModified
-    setOverwriteMode
-    setPaper
-    setParagraphBackgroundColor
-    setPointSize
-    setReadOnly
-    setSelection
-    setSelectionAttributes
-    setStyleSheet
-    setTabChangesFocus
-    setTabStopWidth
-    setText
-    setTextFormat
-    setUnderline
-    setUndoDepth
-    setUndoRedoEnabled
-    setVerticalAlignment
-    setWordWrap
-    setWrapColumnOrWidth
-    setWrapPolicy
-    styleSheet
-    sync
-    syntaxHighlighter
-    tabChangesFocus
-    tabChangesFocus
-    tabStopWidth
-    tabStopWidth
-    text
-    text
-    textChanged
-    textCursor
-    textFormat
-    textFormat
-    underline
-    undo
-    undoAvailable
-    undoDepth
-    undoDepth
-    undoRedoEnabled
-    wordWrap
-    wordWrap
-    wrapColumnOrWidth
-    wrapColumnOrWidth
-    wrapPolicy
-    wrapPolicy
-    zoomIn
-    zoomOut
-    zoomTo
+
                                              
+    QTextEdit
+    AutoFormatting
+    CursorAction
+    KeyboardAction
+    VerticalAlignment
+    WordWrap
+    WrapPolicy
+    alignment
+    anchorAt
+    append
+    autoFormatting
+    autoFormatting
+    bold
+    charAt
+    clear
+    clearParagraphBackground
+    clicked
+    color
+    context
+    copy
+    copyAvailable
+    createPopupMenu
+    currentAlignmentChanged
+    currentColorChanged
+    currentFont
+    currentFontChanged
+    currentVerticalAlignmentChanged
+    cursorPositionChanged
+    cut
+    del
+    doKeyboardAction
+    documentTitle
+    documentTitle
+    doubleClicked
+    ensureCursorVisible
+    family
+    find
+    focusNextPrevChild
+    getCursorPosition
+    getSelection
+    hasSelectedText
+    hasSelectedText
+    heightForWidth
+    insert
+    insertAt
+    insertParagraph
+    isModified
+    isOverwriteMode
+    isReadOnly
+    isRedoAvailable
+    isUndoAvailable
+    isUndoRedoEnabled
+    italic
+    keyPressEvent
+    length
+    length
+    lineOfChar
+    lines
+    linesOfParagraph
+    linkUnderline
+    linkUnderline
+    maxLogLines
+    mimeSourceFactory
+    modificationChanged
+    modified
+    moveCursor
+    optimCheckLimit
+    overwriteMode
+    paper
+    paper
+    paragraphAt
+    paragraphBackgroundColor
+    paragraphLength
+    paragraphRect
+    paragraphs
+    paste
+    pasteSpecial
+    pasteSubType
+    placeCursor
+    pointSize
+    readOnly
+    redo
+    redoAvailable
+    removeParagraph
+    removeSelectedText
+    removeSelection
+    repaintChanged
+    returnPressed
+    scrollToAnchor
+    scrollToBottom
+    selectAll
+    selectedText
+    selectedText
+    selectionChanged
+    setAlignment
+    setAutoFormatting
+    setBold
+    setColor
+    setCurrentFont
+    setCursorPosition
+    setFamily
+    setItalic
+    setLinkUnderline
+    setMaxLogLines
+    setMimeSourceFactory
+    setModified
+    setOverwriteMode
+    setPaper
+    setParagraphBackgroundColor
+    setPointSize
+    setReadOnly
+    setSelection
+    setSelectionAttributes
+    setStyleSheet
+    setTabChangesFocus
+    setTabStopWidth
+    setText
+    setTextFormat
+    setUnderline
+    setUndoDepth
+    setUndoRedoEnabled
+    setVerticalAlignment
+    setWordWrap
+    setWrapColumnOrWidth
+    setWrapPolicy
+    styleSheet
+    sync
+    syntaxHighlighter
+    tabChangesFocus
+    tabChangesFocus
+    tabStopWidth
+    tabStopWidth
+    text
+    text
+    textChanged
+    textCursor
+    textFormat
+    textFormat
+    underline
+    undo
+    undoAvailable
+    undoDepth
+    undoDepth
+    undoRedoEnabled
+    wordWrap
+    wordWrap
+    wrapColumnOrWidth
+    wrapColumnOrWidth
+    wrapPolicy
+    wrapPolicy
+    zoomIn
+    zoomOut
+    zoomTo
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -8151,70 +8151,70 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QTextStream
-    Encoding
-    atEnd
-    codec
-    device
-    fill
-    flags
-    operator<<
-    operator>>
-    precision
-    read
-    readLine
-    readRawBytes
-    reset
-    setCodec
-    setDevice
-    setEncoding
-    setf
-    skipWhiteSpace
-    ts_getbuf
-    ts_getline
-    ts_putc
-    unsetDevice
-    unsetf
-    width
-    writeRawBytes
-    ~QTextStream
+
                                              
+    QTextStream
+    Encoding
+    atEnd
+    codec
+    device
+    fill
+    flags
+    operator<<
+    operator>>
+    precision
+    read
+    readLine
+    readRawBytes
+    reset
+    setCodec
+    setDevice
+    setEncoding
+    setf
+    skipWhiteSpace
+    ts_getbuf
+    ts_getline
+    ts_putc
+    unsetDevice
+    unsetf
+    width
+    writeRawBytes
+    ~QTextStream
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    modified
-    overwriteMode
-    readOnly
-    undoDepth
-    undoRedoEnabled
+
                                              
+    modified
+    overwriteMode
+    readOnly
+    undoDepth
+    undoRedoEnabled
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QThread
-    Priority
-    currentThread
-    exit
-    finished
-    msleep
-    run
-    running
-    sleep
-    start
-    terminate
-    usleep
-    wait
-    ~QThread
+
                                              
+    QThread
+    Priority
+    currentThread
+    exit
+    finished
+    msleep
+    run
+    running
+    sleep
+    start
+    terminate
+    usleep
+    wait
+    ~QThread
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QThreadStorage
-    hasLocalData
-    localData
-    setLocalData
-    ~QThreadStorage
+
                                              
+    QThreadStorage
+    hasLocalData
+    localData
+    setLocalData
+    ~QThreadStorage
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -8278,16 +8278,16 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QTimer
-    changeInterval
-    isActive
-    singleShot
-    start
-    stop
-    timeout
-    timerId
-    ~QTimer
+
                                              
+    QTimer
+    changeInterval
+    isActive
+    singleShot
+    start
+    stop
+    timeout
+    timerId
+    ~QTimer
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -8297,103 +8297,103 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QToolBar
-    addSeparator
-    clear
-    label
-    label
-    mainWindow
-    setLabel
-    setStretchableWidget
+
                                              
+    QToolBar
+    addSeparator
+    clear
+    label
+    label
+    mainWindow
+    setLabel
+    setStretchableWidget
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QToolBox
-    addItem
-    count
-    count
-    currentChanged
-    currentIndex
-    currentIndex
-    currentItem
-    indexOf
-    insertItem
-    isItemEnabled
-    item
-    itemIconSet
-    itemInserted
-    itemLabel
-    itemRemoved
-    itemToolTip
-    removeItem
-    setCurrentIndex
-    setCurrentItem
-    setItemEnabled
-    setItemIconSet
-    setItemLabel
-    setItemToolTip
+
                                              
+    QToolBox
+    addItem
+    count
+    count
+    currentChanged
+    currentIndex
+    currentIndex
+    currentItem
+    indexOf
+    insertItem
+    isItemEnabled
+    item
+    itemIconSet
+    itemInserted
+    itemLabel
+    itemRemoved
+    itemToolTip
+    removeItem
+    setCurrentIndex
+    setCurrentItem
+    setItemEnabled
+    setItemIconSet
+    setItemLabel
+    setItemToolTip
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QToolButton
-    TextPosition
-    autoRaise
-    autoRaise
-    backgroundMode
-    iconSet
-    iconSet
-    on
-    openPopup
-    pixmap
-    popup
-    popupDelay
-    popupDelay
-    setAutoRaise
-    setIconSet
-    setOn
-    setPopup
-    setPopupDelay
-    setTextLabel
-    setTextPosition
-    setToggleButton
-    setUsesBigPixmap
-    setUsesTextLabel
-    textLabel
-    textLabel
-    textPosition
-    textPosition
-    toggle
-    toggleButton
-    uses3D
-    usesBigPixmap
-    usesBigPixmap
-    usesTextLabel
-    usesTextLabel
-    ~QToolButton
+
                                              
+    QToolButton
+    TextPosition
+    autoRaise
+    autoRaise
+    backgroundMode
+    iconSet
+    iconSet
+    on
+    openPopup
+    pixmap
+    popup
+    popupDelay
+    popupDelay
+    setAutoRaise
+    setIconSet
+    setOn
+    setPopup
+    setPopupDelay
+    setTextLabel
+    setTextPosition
+    setToggleButton
+    setUsesBigPixmap
+    setUsesTextLabel
+    textLabel
+    textLabel
+    textPosition
+    textPosition
+    toggle
+    toggleButton
+    uses3D
+    usesBigPixmap
+    usesBigPixmap
+    usesTextLabel
+    usesTextLabel
+    ~QToolButton
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QToolTip
-    add
-    clear
-    font
-    group
-    hide
-    isGloballyEnabled
-    maybeTip
-    palette
-    parentWidget
-    remove
-    setFont
-    setGloballyEnabled
-    setPalette
-    setWakeUpDelay
-    textFor
-    tip
+
                                              
+    QToolTip
+    add
+    clear
+    font
+    group
+    hide
+    isGloballyEnabled
+    maybeTip
+    palette
+    parentWidget
+    remove
+    setFont
+    setGloballyEnabled
+    setPalette
+    setWakeUpDelay
+    textFor
+    tip
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -8411,21 +8411,21 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QTranslator
-    SaveMode
-    clear
-    contains
-    findMessage
-    insert
-    isEmpty
-    load
-    messages
-    remove
-    save
-    squeeze
-    unsqueeze
-    ~QTranslator
+
                                              
+    QTranslator
+    SaveMode
+    clear
+    contains
+    findMessage
+    insert
+    isEmpty
+    load
+    messages
+    remove
+    save
+    squeeze
+    unsqueeze
+    ~QTranslator
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -8450,8 +8450,8 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QTsciiCodec
+
                                              
+    QTsciiCodec
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -8472,201 +8472,201 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QUrl
-    addPath
-    cdUp
-    decode
-    dirPath
-    encode
-    encodedPathAndQuery
-    fileName
-    hasHost
-    hasPassword
-    hasPath
-    hasPort
-    hasRef
-    hasUser
-    host
-    isLocalFile
-    isRelativeUrl
-    isValid
-    operator QString
-    operator=
-    operator==
-    parse
-    password
-    path
-    port
-    protocol
-    query
-    ref
-    reset
-    setEncodedPathAndQuery
-    setFileName
-    setHost
-    setPassword
-    setPath
-    setPort
-    setProtocol
-    setQuery
-    setRef
-    setUser
-    toString
-    user
-    ~QUrl
+
                                              
+    QUrl
+    addPath
+    cdUp
+    decode
+    dirPath
+    encode
+    encodedPathAndQuery
+    fileName
+    hasHost
+    hasPassword
+    hasPath
+    hasPort
+    hasRef
+    hasUser
+    host
+    isLocalFile
+    isRelativeUrl
+    isValid
+    operator QString
+    operator=
+    operator==
+    parse
+    password
+    path
+    port
+    protocol
+    query
+    ref
+    reset
+    setEncodedPathAndQuery
+    setFileName
+    setHost
+    setPassword
+    setPath
+    setPort
+    setProtocol
+    setQuery
+    setRef
+    setUser
+    toString
+    user
+    ~QUrl
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QUrlInfo
-    PermissionSpec
-    equal
-    greaterThan
-    group
-    isDir
-    isExecutable
-    isFile
-    isReadable
-    isSymLink
-    isValid
-    isWritable
-    lastModified
-    lastRead
-    lessThan
-    name
-    operator=
-    operator==
-    owner
-    permissions
-    setDir
-    setFile
-    setGroup
-    setLastModified
-    setName
-    setOwner
-    setPermissions
-    setReadable
-    setSize
-    setSymLink
-    setWritable
-    size
-    ~QUrlInfo
+
                                              
+    QUrlInfo
+    PermissionSpec
+    equal
+    greaterThan
+    group
+    isDir
+    isExecutable
+    isFile
+    isReadable
+    isSymLink
+    isValid
+    isWritable
+    lastModified
+    lastRead
+    lessThan
+    name
+    operator=
+    operator==
+    owner
+    permissions
+    setDir
+    setFile
+    setGroup
+    setLastModified
+    setName
+    setOwner
+    setPermissions
+    setReadable
+    setSize
+    setSymLink
+    setWritable
+    size
+    ~QUrlInfo
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QUrlOperator
-    addEntry
-    clearEntries
-    connectionStateChanged
-    copy
-    createdDirectory
-    data
-    dataTransferProgress
-    deleteNetworkProtocol
-    finished
-    get
-    getNetworkProtocol
-    info
-    isDir
-    itemChanged
-    listChildren
-    mkdir
-    nameFilter
-    newChildren
-    put
-    remove
-    removed
-    rename
-    setNameFilter
-    start
-    startOperation
-    startedNextCopy
-    stop
-    ~QUrlOperator
-    qInitNetworkProtocols
+
                                              
+    QUrlOperator
+    addEntry
+    clearEntries
+    connectionStateChanged
+    copy
+    createdDirectory
+    data
+    dataTransferProgress
+    deleteNetworkProtocol
+    finished
+    get
+    getNetworkProtocol
+    info
+    isDir
+    itemChanged
+    listChildren
+    mkdir
+    nameFilter
+    newChildren
+    put
+    remove
+    removed
+    rename
+    setNameFilter
+    start
+    startOperation
+    startedNextCopy
+    stop
+    ~QUrlOperator
+    qInitNetworkProtocols
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QUuid
-    Variant
-    Version
-    createUuid
-    isNull
-    operator QString
-    operator!=
-    operator<
-    operator=
-    operator==
-    operator>
-    toString
-    variant
-    version
-    operator<<
-    operator>>
+
                                              
+    QUuid
+    Variant
+    Version
+    createUuid
+    isNull
+    operator QString
+    operator!=
+    operator<
+    operator=
+    operator==
+    operator>
+    toString
+    variant
+    version
+    operator<<
+    operator>>
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QValidator
-    State
-    fixup
-    validate
-    ~QValidator
+
                                              
+    QValidator
+    State
+    fixup
+    validate
+    ~QValidator
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QValueList
-    ConstIterator
-    Iterator
-    append
-    at
-    back
-    begin
-    clear
-    constBegin
-    constEnd
-    const_iterator
-    const_pointer
-    const_reference
-    contains
-    count
-    empty
-    end
-    erase
-    find
-    findIndex
-    first
-    fromLast
-    front
-    insert
-    isEmpty
-    iterator
-    last
-    operator!=
-    operator+
-    operator+=
-    operator<<
-    operator=
-    operator==
-    operator[]
-    pointer
-    pop_back
-    pop_front
-    prepend
-    push_back
-    push_front
-    reference
-    remove
-    size
-    size_type
-    value_type
-    ~QValueList
-    operator<<
-    operator>>
+
                                              
+    QValueList
+    ConstIterator
+    Iterator
+    append
+    at
+    back
+    begin
+    clear
+    constBegin
+    constEnd
+    const_iterator
+    const_pointer
+    const_reference
+    contains
+    count
+    empty
+    end
+    erase
+    find
+    findIndex
+    first
+    fromLast
+    front
+    insert
+    isEmpty
+    iterator
+    last
+    operator!=
+    operator+
+    operator+=
+    operator<<
+    operator=
+    operator==
+    operator[]
+    pointer
+    pop_back
+    pop_front
+    prepend
+    push_back
+    push_front
+    reference
+    remove
+    size
+    size_type
+    value_type
+    ~QValueList
+    operator<<
+    operator>>
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -8698,147 +8698,147 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QValueStack
-    pop
-    push
-    top
-    ~QValueStack
+
                                              
+    QValueStack
+    pop
+    push
+    top
+    ~QValueStack
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QValueVector
-    ConstIterator
-    Iterator
-    ValueType
-    append
-    at
-    back
-    begin
-    capacity
-    clear
-    constBegin
-    constEnd
-    const_iterator
-    const_pointer
-    const_reference
-    count
-    difference_type
-    empty
-    end
-    erase
-    first
-    front
-    insert
-    isEmpty
-    iterator
-    last
-    operator=
-    operator==
-    operator[]
-    pointer
-    pop_back
-    push_back
-    reference
-    reserve
-    resize
-    size
-    size_type
-    value_type
-    ~QValueVector
+
                                              
+    QValueVector
+    ConstIterator
+    Iterator
+    ValueType
+    append
+    at
+    back
+    begin
+    capacity
+    clear
+    constBegin
+    constEnd
+    const_iterator
+    const_pointer
+    const_reference
+    count
+    difference_type
+    empty
+    end
+    erase
+    first
+    front
+    insert
+    isEmpty
+    iterator
+    last
+    operator=
+    operator==
+    operator[]
+    pointer
+    pop_back
+    push_back
+    reference
+    reserve
+    resize
+    size
+    size_type
+    value_type
+    ~QValueVector
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QVariant
-    Type
-    asBitArray
-    asBitmap
-    asBool
-    asBrush
-    asByteArray
-    asCString
-    asColor
-    asColorGroup
-    asCursor
-    asDate
-    asDateTime
-    asDouble
-    asFont
-    asIconSet
-    asImage
-    asInt
-    asKeySequence
-    asList
-    asLongLong
-    asMap
-    asPalette
-    asPen
-    asPixmap
-    asPoint
-    asPointArray
-    asRect
-    asRegion
-    asSize
-    asSizePolicy
-    asString
-    asStringList
-    asTime
-    asUInt
-    asULongLong
-    canCast
-    cast
-    clear
-    isNull
-    isValid
-    nameToType
-    operator!=
-    operator=
-    operator==
-    toBitArray
-    toBitmap
-    toBool
-    toBrush
-    toByteArray
-    toCString
-    toColor
-    toColorGroup
-    toCursor
-    toDate
-    toDateTime
-    toDouble
-    toFont
-    toIconSet
-    toImage
-    toInt
-    toKeySequence
-    toList
-    toLongLong
-    toMap
-    toPalette
-    toPen
-    toPixmap
-    toPoint
-    toPointArray
-    toRect
-    toRegion
-    toSize
-    toSizePolicy
-    toString
-    toStringList
-    toTime
-    toUInt
-    toULongLong
-    type
-    typeName
-    typeToName
-    ~QVariant
+
                                              
+    QVariant
+    Type
+    asBitArray
+    asBitmap
+    asBool
+    asBrush
+    asByteArray
+    asCString
+    asColor
+    asColorGroup
+    asCursor
+    asDate
+    asDateTime
+    asDouble
+    asFont
+    asIconSet
+    asImage
+    asInt
+    asKeySequence
+    asList
+    asLongLong
+    asMap
+    asPalette
+    asPen
+    asPixmap
+    asPoint
+    asPointArray
+    asRect
+    asRegion
+    asSize
+    asSizePolicy
+    asString
+    asStringList
+    asTime
+    asUInt
+    asULongLong
+    canCast
+    cast
+    clear
+    isNull
+    isValid
+    nameToType
+    operator!=
+    operator=
+    operator==
+    toBitArray
+    toBitmap
+    toBool
+    toBrush
+    toByteArray
+    toCString
+    toColor
+    toColorGroup
+    toCursor
+    toDate
+    toDateTime
+    toDouble
+    toFont
+    toIconSet
+    toImage
+    toInt
+    toKeySequence
+    toList
+    toLongLong
+    toMap
+    toPalette
+    toPen
+    toPixmap
+    toPoint
+    toPointArray
+    toRect
+    toRegion
+    toSize
+    toSizePolicy
+    toString
+    toStringList
+    toTime
+    toUInt
+    toULongLong
+    type
+    typeName
+    typeToName
+    ~QVariant
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QVBox
+
                                              
+    QVBox
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -8848,41 +8848,41 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QVButtonGroup
-    ~QVButtonGroup
+
                                              
+    QVButtonGroup
+    ~QVButtonGroup
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QVGroupBox
-    ~QVGroupBox
+
                                              
+    QVGroupBox
+    ~QVGroupBox
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QWaitCondition
-    wait
-    wakeAll
-    wakeOne
-    ~QWaitCondition
+
                                              
+    QWaitCondition
+    wait
+    wakeAll
+    wakeOne
+    ~QWaitCondition
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QWhatsThis
-    add
-    clicked
-    display
-    enterWhatsThisMode
-    inWhatsThisMode
-    leaveWhatsThisMode
-    remove
-    setFont
-    text
-    textFor
-    whatsThisButton
-    ~QWhatsThis
+
                                              
+    QWhatsThis
+    add
+    clicked
+    display
+    enterWhatsThisMode
+    inWhatsThisMode
+    leaveWhatsThisMode
+    remove
+    setFont
+    text
+    textFor
+    whatsThisButton
+    ~QWhatsThis
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -8903,303 +8903,303 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QWidget
-    BackgroundOrigin
-    FocusPolicy
-    acceptDrops
-    acceptDrops
-    adjustSize
-    autoMask
-    autoMask
-    backgroundBrush
-    backgroundBrush
-    backgroundMode
-    backgroundMode
-    backgroundOrigin
-    backgroundOrigin
-    baseSize
-    baseSize
-    caption
-    caption
-    childAt
-    childrenRect
-    childrenRect
-    childrenRegion
-    childrenRegion
-    clearFocus
-    clearMask
-    clearWFlags
-    clipRegion
-    close
-    closeEvent
-    colorGroup
-    colorGroup
-    constPolish
-    contextMenuEvent
-    create
-    cursor
-    cursor
-    customWhatsThis
-    customWhatsThis
-    destroy
-    dragEnterEvent
-    dragLeaveEvent
-    dragMoveEvent
-    drawText
-    dropEvent
-    enabled
-    enabledChange
-    enterEvent
-    erase
-    eraseColor
-    erasePixmap
-    event
-    find
-    focus
-    focusData
-    focusEnabled
-    focusInEvent
-    focusNextPrevChild
-    focusOutEvent
-    focusPolicy
-    focusPolicy
-    focusProxy
-    focusWidget
-    font
-    font
-    fontChange
-    fontInfo
-    fontMetrics
-    foregroundColor
-    frameGeometry
-    frameGeometry
-    frameSize
-    frameSize
-    fullScreen
-    geometry
-    geometry
-    getWFlags
-    grabKeyboard
-    grabMouse
-    hasFocus
-    hasMouse
-    hasMouseTracking
-    height
-    height
-    heightForWidth
-    hidden
-    hide
-    hideEvent
-    icon
-    icon
-    iconText
-    iconText
-    imComposeEvent
-    imEndEvent
-    imStartEvent
-    inputMethodEnabled
-    isActiveWindow
-    isActiveWindow
-    isDesktop
-    isDesktop
-    isDialog
-    isDialog
-    isEnabled
-    isEnabledTo
-    isFocusEnabled
-    isFullScreen
-    isHidden
-    isInputMethodEnabled
-    isMaximized
-    isMinimized
-    isModal
-    isModal
-    isPopup
-    isPopup
-    isShown
-    isTopLevel
-    isTopLevel
-    isUpdatesEnabled
-    isVisible
-    isVisibleTo
-    keyPressEvent
-    keyReleaseEvent
-    keyboardGrabber
-    layout
-    leaveEvent
-    lower
-    macEvent
-    mapFrom
-    mapFromGlobal
-    mapFromParent
-    mapTo
-    mapToGlobal
-    mapToParent
-    maximized
-    maximumHeight
-    maximumHeight
-    maximumSize
-    maximumSize
-    maximumWidth
-    maximumWidth
-    metric
-    microFocusHint
-    microFocusHint
-    minimized
-    minimumHeight
-    minimumHeight
-    minimumSize
-    minimumSize
-    minimumSizeHint
-    minimumSizeHint
-    minimumWidth
-    minimumWidth
-    mouseDoubleClickEvent
-    mouseGrabber
-    mouseMoveEvent
-    mousePressEvent
-    mouseReleaseEvent
-    mouseTracking
-    move
-    moveEvent
-    ownCursor
-    ownCursor
-    ownFont
-    ownFont
-    ownPalette
-    ownPalette
-    paintEvent
-    palette
-    palette
-    paletteBackgroundColor
-    paletteBackgroundColor
-    paletteBackgroundPixmap
-    paletteBackgroundPixmap
-    paletteChange
-    paletteForegroundColor
-    paletteForegroundColor
-    parentWidget
-    polish
-    pos
-    pos
-    qwsEvent
-    raise
-    rect
-    rect
-    releaseKeyboard
-    releaseMouse
-    repaint
-    reparent
-    resetInputContext
-    resize
-    resizeEvent
-    scroll
-    setAcceptDrops
-    setActiveWindow
-    setAutoMask
-    setBackgroundEmpty
-    setBackgroundMode
-    setBackgroundOrigin
-    setBaseSize
-    setCaption
-    setCursor
-    setDisabled
-    setEnabled
-    setEraseColor
-    setErasePixmap
-    setFixedHeight
-    setFixedSize
-    setFixedWidth
-    setFocus
-    setFocusPolicy
-    setFocusProxy
-    setFont
-    setGeometry
-    setHidden
-    setIcon
-    setIconText
-    setInputMethodEnabled
-    setKeyCompression
-    setMask
-    setMaximumHeight
-    setMaximumSize
-    setMaximumWidth
-    setMicroFocusHint
-    setMinimumHeight
-    setMinimumSize
-    setMinimumWidth
-    setMouseTracking
-    setPalette
-    setPaletteBackgroundColor
-    setPaletteBackgroundPixmap
-    setPaletteForegroundColor
-    setShown
-    setSizeIncrement
-    setSizePolicy
-    setStyle
-    setTabOrder
-    setUpdatesEnabled
-    setWFlags
-    setWindowOpacity
-    setWindowState
-    show
-    showEvent
-    showFullScreen
-    showMaximized
-    showMinimized
-    showNormal
-    shown
-    size
-    size
-    sizeHint
-    sizeHint
-    sizeIncrement
-    sizeIncrement
-    sizePolicy
-    sizePolicy
-    stackUnder
-    style
-    styleChange
-    tabletEvent
-    testWFlags
-    topLevelWidget
-    underMouse
-    unsetCursor
-    unsetFont
-    unsetPalette
-    update
-    updateGeometry
-    updateMask
-    updatesEnabled
-    visible
-    wheelEvent
-    width
-    width
-    winEvent
-    winId
-    windowActivationChange
-    windowOpacity
-    windowOpacity
-    windowState
-    x
-    x
-    x11Event
-    y
-    y
-    ~QWidget
+
                                              
+    QWidget
+    BackgroundOrigin
+    FocusPolicy
+    acceptDrops
+    acceptDrops
+    adjustSize
+    autoMask
+    autoMask
+    backgroundBrush
+    backgroundBrush
+    backgroundMode
+    backgroundMode
+    backgroundOrigin
+    backgroundOrigin
+    baseSize
+    baseSize
+    caption
+    caption
+    childAt
+    childrenRect
+    childrenRect
+    childrenRegion
+    childrenRegion
+    clearFocus
+    clearMask
+    clearWFlags
+    clipRegion
+    close
+    closeEvent
+    colorGroup
+    colorGroup
+    constPolish
+    contextMenuEvent
+    create
+    cursor
+    cursor
+    customWhatsThis
+    customWhatsThis
+    destroy
+    dragEnterEvent
+    dragLeaveEvent
+    dragMoveEvent
+    drawText
+    dropEvent
+    enabled
+    enabledChange
+    enterEvent
+    erase
+    eraseColor
+    erasePixmap
+    event
+    find
+    focus
+    focusData
+    focusEnabled
+    focusInEvent
+    focusNextPrevChild
+    focusOutEvent
+    focusPolicy
+    focusPolicy
+    focusProxy
+    focusWidget
+    font
+    font
+    fontChange
+    fontInfo
+    fontMetrics
+    foregroundColor
+    frameGeometry
+    frameGeometry
+    frameSize
+    frameSize
+    fullScreen
+    geometry
+    geometry
+    getWFlags
+    grabKeyboard
+    grabMouse
+    hasFocus
+    hasMouse
+    hasMouseTracking
+    height
+    height
+    heightForWidth
+    hidden
+    hide
+    hideEvent
+    icon
+    icon
+    iconText
+    iconText
+    imComposeEvent
+    imEndEvent
+    imStartEvent
+    inputMethodEnabled
+    isActiveWindow
+    isActiveWindow
+    isDesktop
+    isDesktop
+    isDialog
+    isDialog
+    isEnabled
+    isEnabledTo
+    isFocusEnabled
+    isFullScreen
+    isHidden
+    isInputMethodEnabled
+    isMaximized
+    isMinimized
+    isModal
+    isModal
+    isPopup
+    isPopup
+    isShown
+    isTopLevel
+    isTopLevel
+    isUpdatesEnabled
+    isVisible
+    isVisibleTo
+    keyPressEvent
+    keyReleaseEvent
+    keyboardGrabber
+    layout
+    leaveEvent
+    lower
+    macEvent
+    mapFrom
+    mapFromGlobal
+    mapFromParent
+    mapTo
+    mapToGlobal
+    mapToParent
+    maximized
+    maximumHeight
+    maximumHeight
+    maximumSize
+    maximumSize
+    maximumWidth
+    maximumWidth
+    metric
+    microFocusHint
+    microFocusHint
+    minimized
+    minimumHeight
+    minimumHeight
+    minimumSize
+    minimumSize
+    minimumSizeHint
+    minimumSizeHint
+    minimumWidth
+    minimumWidth
+    mouseDoubleClickEvent
+    mouseGrabber
+    mouseMoveEvent
+    mousePressEvent
+    mouseReleaseEvent
+    mouseTracking
+    move
+    moveEvent
+    ownCursor
+    ownCursor
+    ownFont
+    ownFont
+    ownPalette
+    ownPalette
+    paintEvent
+    palette
+    palette
+    paletteBackgroundColor
+    paletteBackgroundColor
+    paletteBackgroundPixmap
+    paletteBackgroundPixmap
+    paletteChange
+    paletteForegroundColor
+    paletteForegroundColor
+    parentWidget
+    polish
+    pos
+    pos
+    qwsEvent
+    raise
+    rect
+    rect
+    releaseKeyboard
+    releaseMouse
+    repaint
+    reparent
+    resetInputContext
+    resize
+    resizeEvent
+    scroll
+    setAcceptDrops
+    setActiveWindow
+    setAutoMask
+    setBackgroundEmpty
+    setBackgroundMode
+    setBackgroundOrigin
+    setBaseSize
+    setCaption
+    setCursor
+    setDisabled
+    setEnabled
+    setEraseColor
+    setErasePixmap
+    setFixedHeight
+    setFixedSize
+    setFixedWidth
+    setFocus
+    setFocusPolicy
+    setFocusProxy
+    setFont
+    setGeometry
+    setHidden
+    setIcon
+    setIconText
+    setInputMethodEnabled
+    setKeyCompression
+    setMask
+    setMaximumHeight
+    setMaximumSize
+    setMaximumWidth
+    setMicroFocusHint
+    setMinimumHeight
+    setMinimumSize
+    setMinimumWidth
+    setMouseTracking
+    setPalette
+    setPaletteBackgroundColor
+    setPaletteBackgroundPixmap
+    setPaletteForegroundColor
+    setShown
+    setSizeIncrement
+    setSizePolicy
+    setStyle
+    setTabOrder
+    setUpdatesEnabled
+    setWFlags
+    setWindowOpacity
+    setWindowState
+    show
+    showEvent
+    showFullScreen
+    showMaximized
+    showMinimized
+    showNormal
+    shown
+    size
+    size
+    sizeHint
+    sizeHint
+    sizeIncrement
+    sizeIncrement
+    sizePolicy
+    sizePolicy
+    stackUnder
+    style
+    styleChange
+    tabletEvent
+    testWFlags
+    topLevelWidget
+    underMouse
+    unsetCursor
+    unsetFont
+    unsetPalette
+    update
+    updateGeometry
+    updateMask
+    updatesEnabled
+    visible
+    wheelEvent
+    width
+    width
+    winEvent
+    winId
+    windowActivationChange
+    windowOpacity
+    windowOpacity
+    windowState
+    x
+    x
+    x11Event
+    y
+    y
+    ~QWidget
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QWidgetFactory
-    addWidgetFactory
-    create
-    createWidget
-    loadImages
-    supportsWidget
-    widgets
-    ~QWidgetFactory
+
                                              
+    QWidgetFactory
+    addWidgetFactory
+    create
+    createWidget
+    loadImages
+    supportsWidget
+    widgets
+    ~QWidgetFactory
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -9215,31 +9215,31 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QWidgetPlugin
-    create
-    group
-    iconSet
-    includeFile
-    isContainer
-    keys
-    toolTip
-    whatsThis
-    ~QWidgetPlugin
+
                                              
+    QWidgetPlugin
+    create
+    group
+    iconSet
+    includeFile
+    isContainer
+    keys
+    toolTip
+    whatsThis
+    ~QWidgetPlugin
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QWidgetStack
-    aboutToShow
-    addWidget
-    id
-    raiseWidget
-    removeWidget
-    setChildGeometries
-    visibleWidget
-    widget
-    ~QWidgetStack
+
                                              
+    QWidgetStack
+    aboutToShow
+    addWidget
+    id
+    raiseWidget
+    removeWidget
+    setChildGeometries
+    visibleWidget
+    widget
+    ~QWidgetStack
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -9261,98 +9261,98 @@
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QWindowsStyle
+
                                              
+    QWindowsStyle
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QWizard
-    addPage
-    appropriate
-    back
-    backButton
-    cancelButton
-    currentPage
-    finishButton
-    help
-    helpButton
-    helpClicked
-    indexOf
-    insertPage
-    layOutButtonRow
-    layOutTitleRow
-    next
-    nextButton
-    page
-    pageCount
-    removePage
-    selected
-    setAppropriate
-    setBackEnabled
-    setFinishEnabled
-    setHelpEnabled
-    setNextEnabled
-    setTitle
-    setTitleFont
-    showPage
-    title
-    titleFont
-    titleFont
-    ~QWizard
+
                                              
+    QWizard
+    addPage
+    appropriate
+    back
+    backButton
+    cancelButton
+    currentPage
+    finishButton
+    help
+    helpButton
+    helpClicked
+    indexOf
+    insertPage
+    layOutButtonRow
+    layOutTitleRow
+    next
+    nextButton
+    page
+    pageCount
+    removePage
+    selected
+    setAppropriate
+    setBackEnabled
+    setFinishEnabled
+    setHelpEnabled
+    setNextEnabled
+    setTitle
+    setTitleFont
+    showPage
+    title
+    titleFont
+    titleFont
+    ~QWizard
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QWMatrix
-    TransformationMode
-    det
-    dx
-    dy
-    invert
-    isIdentity
-    isInvertible
-    m11
-    m12
-    m21
-    m22
-    map
-    mapRect
-    mapToPolygon
-    mapToRegion
-    operator!=
-    operator*=
-    operator==
-    reset
-    rotate
-    scale
-    setMatrix
-    setTransformationMode
-    shear
-    transformationMode
-    translate
-    operator*
-    operator<<
-    operator>>
+
                                              
+    QWMatrix
+    TransformationMode
+    det
+    dx
+    dy
+    invert
+    isIdentity
+    isInvertible
+    m11
+    m12
+    m21
+    m22
+    map
+    mapRect
+    mapToPolygon
+    mapToRegion
+    operator!=
+    operator*=
+    operator==
+    reset
+    rotate
+    scale
+    setMatrix
+    setTransformationMode
+    shear
+    transformationMode
+    translate
+    operator*
+    operator<<
+    operator>>
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QWorkspace
-    WindowOrder
-    activateNextWindow
-    activatePrevWindow
-    activeWindow
-    cascade
-    closeActiveWindow
-    closeAllWindows
-    scrollBarsEnabled
-    scrollBarsEnabled
-    setScrollBarsEnabled
-    tile
-    windowActivated
-    windowList
-    ~QWorkspace
+
                                              
+    QWorkspace
+    WindowOrder
+    activateNextWindow
+    activatePrevWindow
+    activeWindow
+    cascade
+    closeActiveWindow
+    closeAllWindows
+    scrollBarsEnabled
+    scrollBarsEnabled
+    setScrollBarsEnabled
+    tile
+    windowActivated
+    windowList
+    ~QWorkspace
     
                                              
     
                                              
 
                                              
@@ -9696,8 +9696,8 @@
 
                                              
     About Modules
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    About Qt
+
                                              
+    About Qt
 
                                              
 
                                              
     About the Visual Studio Integration Plugin
@@ -9807,8 +9807,8 @@
 
                                              
     Demonstration of SAX2 features
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    Deploying Qt Applications
+
                                              
+    Deploying Qt Applications
 
                                              
 
                                              
     dialogs
@@ -9891,8 +9891,8 @@
 
                                              
     How to create a large, sparse QTable
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    How to Learn Qt
+
                                              
+    How to Learn Qt
 
                                              
 
                                              
     How to Report A Bug
@@ -10104,11 +10104,11 @@
 
                                              
     qaction-examples
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QArray Class Reference (obsolete)
+
                                              
+    QArray Class Reference (obsolete)
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QCollection Class Reference (obsolete)
+
                                              
+    QCollection Class Reference (obsolete)
 
                                              
 
                                              
     QDir
@@ -10119,8 +10119,8 @@
 
                                              
     qfont-examples
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QList Class Reference (obsolete)
+
                                              
+    QList Class Reference (obsolete)
 
                                              
 
                                              
     QListIterator Class Reference (obsolete)
@@ -10134,11 +10134,11 @@
 
                                              
     qprocess-examples
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QQueue Class Reference (obsolete)
+
                                              
+    QQueue Class Reference (obsolete)
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QStack Class Reference (obsolete)
+
                                              
+    QStack Class Reference (obsolete)
 
                                              
 
                                              
     Qt Commercial Editions
@@ -10185,8 +10185,8 @@
 
                                              
     Qt Template Library
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    qtl
+
                                              
+    qtl
 
                                              
 
                                              
     Qt Tutorial #1 - The 14 Steps
@@ -10278,8 +10278,8 @@
 
                                              
     Qt/Mac Issues
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    QVector Class Reference (obsolete)
+
                                              
+    QVector Class Reference (obsolete)
 
                                              
 
                                              
     Range controls
@@ -10410,8 +10410,8 @@
 
                                              
     The 'Big Picture'
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    The ActiveQt framework
+
                                              
+    The ActiveQt framework
 
                                              
 
                                              
     The Coordinate System
@@ -10611,8 +10611,8 @@
 
                                              
     main.h
 
                                              
-
                                              
-    qnetwork.h
+
                                              
+    ntqnetwork.h
 
                                              
 
                                              
     main.cpp
diff --git a/doc/html/qt.html b/doc/html/qt.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 1833b2634..000000000
--- a/doc/html/qt.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1026 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
-
-
-TQt Class
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                              
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                              TQt Class Reference
                                              
-
-
                                              The TQt class is a namespace for miscellaneous identifiers
-that need to be global-like.
-More...
-
                                              #include <qnamespace.h>
-
                                              Inherited by TQObject, TQPixmap, TQBrush, TQCanvasItem, TQCursor, TQPainter, TQEvent, TQIconViewItem, TQKeySequence, TQListViewItem, TQCustomMenuItem, TQPen, TQStyleSheetItem, TQSyntaxHighlighter, TQTab, TQTableItem, TQThread, TQToolTip, and TQWhatsThis.
-
                                              List of all member functions.
-
                                              Public Members
                                              
-
                                                
-
                                              • enum ButtonState { NoButton = 0x0000, LeftButton = 0x0001, RightButton = 0x0002, MidButton = 0x0004, MouseButtonMask = 0x0007, ShiftButton = 0x0100, ControlButton = 0x0200, AltButton = 0x0400, MetaButton = 0x0800, KeyButtonMask = 0x0f00, Keypad = 0x4000 }
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum Orientation { Horizontal = 0, Vertical }
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum SortOrder { Ascending, Descending }
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum AlignmentFlags { AlignAuto = 0x0000, AlignLeft = 0x0001, AlignRight = 0x0002, AlignHCenter = 0x0004, AlignJustify = 0x0008, AlignHorizontal_Mask = AlignLeft | AlignRight | AlignHCenter | AlignJustify, AlignTop = 0x0010, AlignBottom = 0x0020, AlignVCenter = 0x0040, AlignVertical_Mask = AlignTop | AlignBottom | AlignVCenter, AlignCenter = AlignVCenter | AlignHCenter }
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum TextFlags { SingleLine = 0x0080, DontClip = 0x0100, ExpandTabs = 0x0200, ShowPrefix = 0x0400, WordBreak = 0x0800, BreakAnywhere = 0x1000, NoAccel = 0x4000 }
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum WidgetState { WState_Created = 0x00000001, WState_Disabled = 0x00000002, WState_Visible = 0x00000004, WState_ForceHide = 0x00000008, WState_OwnCursor = 0x00000010, WState_MouseTracking = 0x00000020, WState_CompressKeys = 0x00000040, WState_BlockUpdates = 0x00000080, WState_InPaintEvent = 0x00000100, WState_Reparented = 0x00000200, WState_ConfigPending = 0x00000400, WState_Resized = 0x00000800, WState_AutoMask = 0x00001000, WState_Polished = 0x00002000, WState_DND = 0x00004000, WState_Reserved0 = 0x00008000, WState_FullScreen = 0x00010000, WState_OwnSizePolicy = 0x00020000, WState_CreatedHidden = 0x00040000, WState_Maximized = 0x00080000, WState_Minimized = 0x00100000, WState_ForceDisabled = 0x00200000, WState_Exposed = 0x00400000, WState_HasMouse = 0x00800000 }
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum WidgetFlags { WType_TopLevel = 0x00000001, WType_Dialog = 0x00000002, WType_Popup = 0x00000004, WType_Desktop = 0x00000008, WType_Mask = 0x0000000f, WStyle_Customize = 0x00000010, WStyle_NormalBorder = 0x00000020, WStyle_DialogBorder = 0x00000040, WStyle_NoBorder = 0x00002000, WStyle_Title = 0x00000080, WStyle_SysMenu = 0x00000100, WStyle_Minimize = 0x00000200, WStyle_Maximize = 0x00000400, WStyle_MinMax = WStyle_Minimize | WStyle_Maximize, WStyle_Tool = 0x00000800, WStyle_StaysOnTop = 0x00001000, WStyle_ContextHelp = 0x00004000, WStyle_Reserved = 0x00008000, WStyle_Mask = 0x0000fff0, WDestructiveClose = 0x00010000, WPaintDesktop = 0x00020000, WPaintUnclipped = 0x00040000, WPaintClever = 0x00080000, WResizeNoErase = 0x00100000, WMouseNoMask = 0x00200000, WStaticContents = 0x00400000, WRepaintNoErase = 0x00800000, WX11BypassWM = 0x01000000, WWinOwnDC = 0x00000000, WMacNoSheet = 0x00000000, WMacDrawer = 0x00000000, WX11BypassWM = 0x00000000, WWinOwnDC = 0x01000000, WMacNoSheet = 0x00000000, WMacDrawer = 0x00000000, WGroupLeader = 0x02000000, WShowModal = 0x04000000, WNoMousePropagation = 0x08000000, WSubWindow = 0x10000000, WStyle_Splash = 0x20000000, WNoAutoErase = WRepaintNoErase | WResizeNoErase, WNorthWestGravity = WStaticContents, WType_Modal = WType_Dialog | WShowModal, WStyle_Dialog = WType_Dialog, WStyle_NoBorderEx = WStyle_NoBorder }
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum WindowState { WindowNoState = 0x00000000, WindowMinimized = 0x00000001, WindowMaximized = 0x00000002, WindowFullScreen = 0x00000004, WindowActive = 0x00000008 }
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum ImageConversionFlags { ColorMode_Mask = 0x00000003, AutoColor = 0x00000000, ColorOnly = 0x00000003, MonoOnly = 0x00000002, AlphaDither_Mask = 0x0000000c, ThresholdAlphaDither = 0x00000000, OrderedAlphaDither = 0x00000004, DiffuseAlphaDither = 0x00000008, NoAlpha = 0x0000000c, Dither_Mask = 0x00000030, DiffuseDither = 0x00000000, OrderedDither = 0x00000010, ThresholdDither = 0x00000020, DitherMode_Mask = 0x000000c0, AutoDither = 0x00000000, PreferDither = 0x00000040, AvoidDither = 0x00000080 }
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum BGMode { TransparentMode, OpaqueMode }
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum PaintUnit { PixelUnit, LoMetricUnit, HiMetricUnit, LoEnglishUnit, HiEnglishUnit, TwipsUnit }
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum GUIStyle { MacStyle, WindowsStyle, Win3Style, PMStyle, MotifStyle }  (obsolete)
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum SequenceMatch { NoMatch, PartialMatch, Identical }
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum Modifier { META = 0x00100000, SHIFT = 0x00200000, CTRL = 0x00400000, ALT = 0x00800000, MODIFIER_MASK = 0x00f00000, UNICODE_ACCEL = 0x10000000, ASCII_ACCEL = UNICODE_ACCEL }
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum Key { Key_Escape = 0x1000, Key_Tab = 0x1001, Key_Backtab = 0x1002, Key_BackTab = Key_Backtab, Key_Backspace = 0x1003, Key_BackSpace = Key_Backspace, Key_Return = 0x1004, Key_Enter = 0x1005, Key_Insert = 0x1006, Key_Delete = 0x1007, Key_Pause = 0x1008, Key_Print = 0x1009, Key_SysReq = 0x100a, Key_Clear = 0x100b, Key_Home = 0x1010, Key_End = 0x1011, Key_Left = 0x1012, Key_Up = 0x1013, Key_Right = 0x1014, Key_Down = 0x1015, Key_Prior = 0x1016, Key_PageUp = Key_Prior, Key_Next = 0x1017, Key_PageDown = Key_Next, Key_Shift = 0x1020, Key_Control = 0x1021, Key_Meta = 0x1022, Key_Alt = 0x1023, Key_CapsLock = 0x1024, Key_NumLock = 0x1025, Key_ScrollLock = 0x1026, Key_F1 = 0x1030, Key_F2 = 0x1031, Key_F3 = 0x1032, Key_F4 = 0x1033, Key_F5 = 0x1034, Key_F6 = 0x1035, Key_F7 = 0x1036, Key_F8 = 0x1037, Key_F9 = 0x1038, Key_F10 = 0x1039, Key_F11 = 0x103a, Key_F12 = 0x103b, Key_F13 = 0x103c, Key_F14 = 0x103d, Key_F15 = 0x103e, Key_F16 = 0x103f, Key_F17 = 0x1040, Key_F18 = 0x1041, Key_F19 = 0x1042, Key_F20 = 0x1043, Key_F21 = 0x1044, Key_F22 = 0x1045, Key_F23 = 0x1046, Key_F24 = 0x1047, Key_F25 = 0x1048, Key_F26 = 0x1049, Key_F27 = 0x104a, Key_F28 = 0x104b, Key_F29 = 0x104c, Key_F30 = 0x104d, Key_F31 = 0x104e, Key_F32 = 0x104f, Key_F33 = 0x1050, Key_F34 = 0x1051, Key_F35 = 0x1052, Key_Super_L = 0x1053, Key_Super_R = 0x1054, Key_Menu = 0x1055, Key_Hyper_L = 0x1056, Key_Hyper_R = 0x1057, Key_Help = 0x1058, Key_Direction_L = 0x1059, Key_Direction_R = 0x1060, Key_Space = 0x20, Key_Any = Key_Space, Key_Exclam = 0x21, Key_QuoteDbl = 0x22, Key_NumberSign = 0x23, Key_Dollar = 0x24, Key_Percent = 0x25, Key_Ampersand = 0x26, Key_Apostrophe = 0x27, Key_ParenLeft = 0x28, Key_ParenRight = 0x29, Key_Asterisk = 0x2a, Key_Plus = 0x2b, Key_Comma = 0x2c, Key_Minus = 0x2d, Key_Period = 0x2e, Key_Slash = 0x2f, Key_0 = 0x30, Key_1 = 0x31, Key_2 = 0x32, Key_3 = 0x33, Key_4 = 0x34, Key_5 = 0x35, Key_6 = 0x36, Key_7 = 0x37, Key_8 = 0x38, Key_9 = 0x39, Key_Colon = 0x3a, Key_Semicolon = 0x3b, Key_Less = 0x3c, Key_Equal = 0x3d, Key_Greater = 0x3e, Key_Question = 0x3f, Key_At = 0x40, Key_A = 0x41, Key_B = 0x42, Key_C = 0x43, Key_D = 0x44, Key_E = 0x45, Key_F = 0x46, Key_G = 0x47, Key_H = 0x48, Key_I = 0x49, Key_J = 0x4a, Key_K = 0x4b, Key_L = 0x4c, Key_M = 0x4d, Key_N = 0x4e, Key_O = 0x4f, Key_P = 0x50, Key_Q = 0x51, Key_R = 0x52, Key_S = 0x53, Key_T = 0x54, Key_U = 0x55, Key_V = 0x56, Key_W = 0x57, Key_X = 0x58, Key_Y = 0x59, Key_Z = 0x5a, Key_BracketLeft = 0x5b, Key_Backslash = 0x5c, Key_BracketRight = 0x5d, Key_AsciiCircum = 0x5e, Key_Underscore = 0x5f, Key_QuoteLeft = 0x60, Key_BraceLeft = 0x7b, Key_Bar = 0x7c, Key_BraceRight = 0x7d, Key_AsciiTilde = 0x7e, Key_nobreakspace = 0x0a0, Key_exclamdown = 0x0a1, Key_cent = 0x0a2, Key_sterling = 0x0a3, Key_currency = 0x0a4, Key_yen = 0x0a5, Key_brokenbar = 0x0a6, Key_section = 0x0a7, Key_diaeresis = 0x0a8, Key_copyright = 0x0a9, Key_ordfeminine = 0x0aa, Key_guillemotleft = 0x0ab, Key_notsign = 0x0ac, Key_hyphen = 0x0ad, Key_registered = 0x0ae, Key_macron = 0x0af, Key_degree = 0x0b0, Key_plusminus = 0x0b1, Key_twosuperior = 0x0b2, Key_threesuperior = 0x0b3, Key_acute = 0x0b4, Key_mu = 0x0b5, Key_paragraph = 0x0b6, Key_periodcentered = 0x0b7, Key_cedilla = 0x0b8, Key_onesuperior = 0x0b9, Key_masculine = 0x0ba, Key_guillemotright = 0x0bb, Key_onequarter = 0x0bc, Key_onehalf = 0x0bd, Key_threequarters = 0x0be, Key_questiondown = 0x0bf, Key_Agrave = 0x0c0, Key_Aacute = 0x0c1, Key_Acircumflex = 0x0c2, Key_Atilde = 0x0c3, Key_Adiaeresis = 0x0c4, Key_Aring = 0x0c5, Key_AE = 0x0c6, Key_Ccedilla = 0x0c7, Key_Egrave = 0x0c8, Key_Eacute = 0x0c9, Key_Ecircumflex = 0x0ca, Key_Ediaeresis = 0x0cb, Key_Igrave = 0x0cc, Key_Iacute = 0x0cd, Key_Icircumflex = 0x0ce, Key_Idiaeresis = 0x0cf, Key_ETH = 0x0d0, Key_Ntilde = 0x0d1, Key_Ograve = 0x0d2, Key_Oacute = 0x0d3, Key_Ocircumflex = 0x0d4, Key_Otilde = 0x0d5, Key_Odiaeresis = 0x0d6, Key_multiply = 0x0d7, Key_Ooblique = 0x0d8, Key_Ugrave = 0x0d9, Key_Uacute = 0x0da, Key_Ucircumflex = 0x0db, Key_Udiaeresis = 0x0dc, Key_Yacute = 0x0dd, Key_THORN = 0x0de, Key_ssharp = 0x0df, Key_agrave = 0x0e0, Key_aacute = 0x0e1, Key_acircumflex = 0x0e2, Key_atilde = 0x0e3, Key_adiaeresis = 0x0e4, Key_aring = 0x0e5, Key_ae = 0x0e6, Key_ccedilla = 0x0e7, Key_egrave = 0x0e8, Key_eacute = 0x0e9, Key_ecircumflex = 0x0ea, Key_ediaeresis = 0x0eb, Key_igrave = 0x0ec, Key_iacute = 0x0ed, Key_icircumflex = 0x0ee, Key_idiaeresis = 0x0ef, Key_eth = 0x0f0, Key_ntilde = 0x0f1, Key_ograve = 0x0f2, Key_oacute = 0x0f3, Key_ocircumflex = 0x0f4, Key_otilde = 0x0f5, Key_odiaeresis = 0x0f6, Key_division = 0x0f7, Key_oslash = 0x0f8, Key_ugrave = 0x0f9, Key_uacute = 0x0fa, Key_ucircumflex = 0x0fb, Key_udiaeresis = 0x0fc, Key_yacute = 0x0fd, Key_thorn = 0x0fe, Key_ydiaeresis = 0x0ff, Key_Back = 0x1061, Key_Forward = 0x1062, Key_Stop = 0x1063, Key_Refresh = 0x1064, Key_VolumeDown = 0x1070, Key_VolumeMute = 0x1071, Key_VolumeUp = 0x1072, Key_BassBoost = 0x1073, Key_BassUp = 0x1074, Key_BassDown = 0x1075, Key_TrebleUp = 0x1076, Key_TrebleDown = 0x1077, Key_MediaPlay = 0x1080, Key_MediaStop = 0x1081, Key_MediaPrev = 0x1082, Key_MediaNext = 0x1083, Key_MediaRecord = 0x1084, Key_HomePage = 0x1090, Key_Favorites = 0x1091, Key_Search = 0x1092, Key_Standby = 0x1093, Key_OpenUrl = 0x1094, Key_LaunchMail = 0x10a0, Key_LaunchMedia = 0x10a1, Key_Launch0 = 0x10a2, Key_Launch1 = 0x10a3, Key_Launch2 = 0x10a4, Key_Launch3 = 0x10a5, Key_Launch4 = 0x10a6, Key_Launch5 = 0x10a7, Key_Launch6 = 0x10a8, Key_Launch7 = 0x10a9, Key_Launch8 = 0x10aa, Key_Launch9 = 0x10ab, Key_LaunchA = 0x10ac, Key_LaunchB = 0x10ad, Key_LaunchC = 0x10ae, Key_LaunchD = 0x10af, Key_LaunchE = 0x10b0, Key_LaunchF = 0x10b1, Key_MediaLast = 0x1fff, Key_unknown = 0xffff }
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum ArrowType { UpArrow, DownArrow, LeftArrow, RightArrow }
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum RasterOp { CopyROP, OrROP, XorROP, NotAndROP, EraseROP = NotAndROP, NotCopyROP, NotOrROP, NotXorROP, AndROP, NotEraseROP = AndROP, NotROP, ClearROP, SetROP, NopROP, AndNotROP, OrNotROP, NandROP, NorROP, LastROP = NorROP }
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum PenStyle { NoPen, SolidLine, DashLine, DotLine, DashDotLine, DashDotDotLine, MPenStyle = 0x0f }
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum PenCapStyle { FlatCap = 0x00, SquareCap = 0x10, RoundCap = 0x20, MPenCapStyle = 0x30 }
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum PenJoinStyle { MiterJoin = 0x00, BevelJoin = 0x40, RoundJoin = 0x80, MPenJoinStyle = 0xc0 }
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum BrushStyle { NoBrush, SolidPattern, Dense1Pattern, Dense2Pattern, Dense3Pattern, Dense4Pattern, Dense5Pattern, Dense6Pattern, Dense7Pattern, HorPattern, VerPattern, CrossPattern, BDiagPattern, FDiagPattern, DiagCrossPattern, CustomPattern = 24 }
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum MacintoshVersion { MV_Unknown = 0x0000, MV_9 = 0x0001, MV_10_DOT_0 = 0x0002, MV_10_DOT_1 = 0x0003, MV_10_DOT_2 = 0x0004, MV_10_DOT_3 = 0x0005, MV_10_DOT_4 = 0x0006, MV_CHEETAH = MV_10_DOT_0, MV_PUMA = MV_10_DOT_1, MV_JAGUAR = MV_10_DOT_2, MV_PANTHER = MV_10_DOT_3, MV_TIGER = MV_10_DOT_4 }
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum WindowsVersion { WV_32s = 0x0001, WV_95 = 0x0002, WV_98 = 0x0003, WV_Me = 0x0004, WV_DOS_based = 0x000f, WV_NT = 0x0010, WV_2000 = 0x0020, WV_XP = 0x0030, WV_2003 = 0x0040, WV_VISTA = 0x0080, WV_NT_based = 0x00f0, WV_CE = 0x0100, WV_CENET = 0x0200, WV_CE_based = 0x0f00 }
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum UIEffect { UI_General, UI_AnimateMenu, UI_FadeMenu, UI_AnimateCombo, UI_AnimateTooltip, UI_FadeTooltip, UI_AnimateToolBox }
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum CursorShape { ArrowCursor, UpArrowCursor, CrossCursor, WaitCursor, IbeamCursor, SizeVerCursor, SizeHorCursor, SizeBDiagCursor, SizeFDiagCursor, SizeAllCursor, BlankCursor, SplitVCursor, SplitHCursor, PointingHandCursor, ForbiddenCursor, WhatsThisCursor, BusyCursor, LastCursor = BusyCursor, BitmapCursor = 24 }
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum TextFormat { PlainText, RichText, AutoText, LogText }
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum AnchorAttribute { AnchorName, AnchorHref }
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum Dock { DockUnmanaged, DockTornOff, DockTop, DockBottom, DockRight, DockLeft, DockMinimized, Unmanaged = DockUnmanaged, TornOff = DockTornOff, Top = DockTop, Bottom = DockBottom, Right = DockRight, Left = DockLeft, Minimized = DockMinimized }
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum DateFormat { TextDate, ISODate, LocalDate }
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum TimeSpec { LocalTime, UTC }
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum BackgroundMode { FixedColor, FixedPixmap, NoBackground, PaletteForeground, PaletteButton, PaletteLight, PaletteMidlight, PaletteDark, PaletteMid, PaletteText, PaletteBrightText, PaletteBase, PaletteBackground, PaletteShadow, PaletteHighlight, PaletteHighlightedText, PaletteButtonText, PaletteLink, PaletteLinkVisited, X11ParentRelative }
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum StringComparisonMode { CaseSensitive = 0x00001, BeginsWith = 0x00002, EndsWith = 0x00004, Contains = 0x00008, ExactMatch = 0x00010 }
                                                • 
-
                                              • enum Corner { TopLeft = 0x00000, TopRight = 0x00001, BottomLeft = 0x00002, BottomRight = 0x00003 }
                                                • 
-
                                              • typedef void * HANDLE
                                                • 
-
                                              
-
                                              Detailed Description
                                              
-
-
-
                                               The TQt class is a namespace for miscellaneous identifiers
-that need to be global-like.
-
                                               
-
                                               Normally, you can ignore this class. TQObject and a few other
-classes inherit it, so all the identifiers in the TQt namespace are
-normally usable without qualification.
-
                                               However, you may occasionally need to say TQt::black instead of
-just black, particularly in static utility functions (such as
-many class factories).
-
                                               
                                              See also Miscellaneous Classes.
-
-
                                              Member Type Documentation
                                              
-
                                              TQt::AlignmentFlags
                                              
-
-
                                               This enum type is used to describe alignment. It contains
-horizontal and vertical flags.
-
                                               The horizontal flags are:
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::AlignAuto - Aligns according to the language. Left for most,
-right for Arabic and Hebrew.
-
                                              • TQt::AlignLeft - Aligns with the left edge.
-
                                              • TQt::AlignRight - Aligns with the right edge.
-
                                              • TQt::AlignHCenter - Centers horizontally in the available space.
-
                                              • TQt::AlignJustify - Justifies the text in the available space.
-Does not work for everything and may be interpreted as
-AlignAuto in some cases.
-
                                               The vertical flags are:
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::AlignTop - Aligns with the top.
-
                                              • TQt::AlignBottom - Aligns with the bottom.
-
                                              • TQt::AlignVCenter - Centers vertically in the available space.
-
                                               You can use only one of the horizontal flags at a time. There is
-one two-dimensional flag:
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::AlignCenter - Centers in both dimensions.
-
                                               You can use at most one horizontal and one vertical flag at a time. AlignCenter counts as both horizontal and vertical.
-
                                               Masks:
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::AlignHorizontal_Mask
-
                                              • TQt::AlignVertical_Mask
-
                                               Conflicting combinations of flags have undefined meanings.
-
-
                                              TQt::AnchorAttribute
                                              
-
-
                                               An anchor has one or more of the following attributes:
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::AnchorName - the name attribute of the anchor. This attribute is
-used when scrolling to an anchor in the document.
-
                                              • TQt::AnchorHref - the href attribute of the anchor. This attribute is
-used when a link is clicked to determine what content to load.
-
                                              
-
                                              TQt::ArrowType
                                              
-
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::UpArrow
-
                                              • TQt::DownArrow
-
                                              • TQt::LeftArrow
-
                                              • TQt::RightArrow
-
                                               
-
                                              TQt::BGMode
                                              
-
-
                                               Background mode
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::TransparentMode
-
                                              • TQt::OpaqueMode
-
                                              
-
                                              TQt::BackgroundMode
                                              
-
-
                                               This enum describes how the background of a widget changes, as the
-widget's palette changes.
-
                                               The background is what the widget contains when paintEvent() is called. To minimize
-flicker, this should be the most common color or pixmap in the
-widget. For PaletteBackground, use colorGroup().brush( TQColorGroup::Background ), and so on.
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::PaletteForeground
-
                                              • TQt::PaletteBackground
-
                                              • TQt::PaletteButton
-
                                              • TQt::PaletteLight
-
                                              • TQt::PaletteMidlight
-
                                              • TQt::PaletteDark
-
                                              • TQt::PaletteMid
-
                                              • TQt::PaletteText
-
                                              • TQt::PaletteBrightText
-
                                              • TQt::PaletteButtonText
-
                                              • TQt::PaletteBase
-
                                              • TQt::PaletteShadow
-
                                              • TQt::PaletteHighlight
-
                                              • TQt::PaletteHighlightedText
-
                                              • TQt::PaletteLink
-
                                              • TQt::PaletteLinkVisited
-
                                              • TQt::X11ParentRelative - (internal use only)
-
                                               The final three values have special meaning:
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::NoBackground - the widget is not cleared before paintEvent().
-If the widget's paint event always draws on all the pixels, using
-this mode can be both fast and flicker-free.
-
                                              • TQt::FixedColor - the widget is cleared to a fixed color, normally
-different from all the ones in the palette(). Set using setPaletteBackgroundColor().
-
                                              • TQt::FixedPixmap - the widget is cleared to a fixed pixmap,
-normally different from all the ones in the palette(). Set using
-setPaletteBackgroundPixmap().
-
                                               Although FixedColor and FixedPixmap are sometimes just
-right, if you use them, make sure that you test your application
-when the desktop color scheme has been changed. (On X11, a tquick
-way to test this is e.g. "./myapp -bg paleblue". On Windows, you
-must use the control panel.)
-
                                               
                                              See also TQWidget::backgroundMode, TQWidget::backgroundMode, TQWidget::setBackgroundPixmap(), and TQWidget::paletteBackgroundColor.
-
-
                                              TQt::BrushStyle
                                              
-
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::NoBrush
-
                                              • TQt::SolidPattern
-
                                              • TQt::Dense1Pattern
-
                                              • TQt::Dense2Pattern
-
                                              • TQt::Dense3Pattern
-
                                              • TQt::Dense4Pattern
-
                                              • TQt::Dense5Pattern
-
                                              • TQt::Dense6Pattern
-
                                              • TQt::Dense7Pattern
-
                                              • TQt::HorPattern
-
                                              • TQt::VerPattern
-
                                              • TQt::CrossPattern
-
                                              • TQt::BDiagPattern
-
                                              • TQt::FDiagPattern
-
                                              • TQt::DiagCrossPattern
-
                                              • TQt::CustomPattern
-
                                               
                                              Brush Styles
                                               
-
                                               
-
                                              TQt::ButtonState
                                              
-
-
                                               This enum type describes the state of the mouse and the modifier
-buttons.
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::NoButton - used when the button state does not refer to any
-button (see TQMouseEvent::button()).
-
                                              • TQt::LeftButton - set if the left button is pressed, or if this
-event refers to the left button. (The left button may be
-the right button on left-handed mice.)
-
                                              • TQt::RightButton - the right button.
-
                                              • TQt::MidButton - the middle button.
-
                                              • TQt::ShiftButton - a Shift key on the keyboard is also pressed.
-
                                              • TQt::ControlButton - a Ctrl key on the keyboard is also pressed.
-
                                              • TQt::AltButton - an Alt key on the keyboard is also pressed.
-
                                              • TQt::MetaButton - a Meta key on the keyboard is also pressed.
-
                                              • TQt::Keypad - a keypad button is pressed.
-
                                              • TQt::KeyButtonMask - a mask for ShiftButton, ControlButton,
-AltButton and MetaButton.
-
                                              • TQt::MouseButtonMask - a mask for LeftButton, RightButton and MidButton.
-
                                              
-
                                              TQt::Corner
                                              
-
-This enum type specifies a corner in a rectangle:
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::TopLeft - top left corner
-
                                              • TQt::TopRight - top right corner
-
                                              • TQt::BottomLeft - bottom left corner
-
                                              • TQt::BottomRight - bottom right corner
-
                                              
-
                                              TQt::CursorShape
                                              
-
-
                                               This enum type defines the various cursors that can be used.
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::ArrowCursor - standard arrow cursor
-
                                              • TQt::UpArrowCursor - upwards arrow
-
                                              • TQt::CrossCursor - crosshair
-
                                              • TQt::WaitCursor - hourglass/watch
-
                                              • TQt::BusyCursor - standard arrow with hourglass/watch
-
                                              • TQt::IbeamCursor - ibeam/text entry
-
                                              • TQt::SizeVerCursor - vertical resize
-
                                              • TQt::SizeHorCursor - horizontal resize
-
                                              • TQt::SizeFDiagCursor - diagonal resize (\)
-
                                              • TQt::SizeBDiagCursor - diagonal resize (/)
-
                                              • TQt::SizeAllCursor - all directions resize
-
                                              • TQt::BlankCursor - blank/invisible cursor
-
                                              • TQt::SplitVCursor - vertical splitting
-
                                              • TQt::SplitHCursor - horizontal splitting
-
                                              • TQt::PointingHandCursor - a pointing hand
-
                                              • TQt::ForbiddenCursor - a slashed circle
-
                                              • TQt::WhatsThisCursor - an arrow with a question mark
-
                                              • TQt::BitmapCursor
-
                                               ArrowCursor is the default for widgets in a normal state.
-
                                               
                                              Cursor Shapes
                                               
-
                                              TQt::DateFormat
                                              
-
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::TextDate - (default) TQt format
-
                                              • TQt::ISODate - ISO 8601 extended format (YYYY-MM-DD, or with time,
-YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS)
-
                                              • TQt::LocalDate - locale dependent format
-
                                              
-
                                              TQt::Dock
                                              
-
-
                                               Each dock window can be in one of the following positions:
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::DockTop - above the central widget, below the menu bar.
-
                                              • TQt::DockBottom - below the central widget, above the status bar.
-
                                              • TQt::DockLeft - to the left of the central widget.
-
                                              • TQt::DockRight - to the right of the central widget.
-
                                              • TQt::DockMinimized - the dock window is not shown (this is
-effectively a 'hidden' dock area); the handles of all minimized
-dock windows are drawn in one row below the menu bar.
-
                                              • TQt::DockTornOff - the dock window floats as its own top level
-window which always stays on top of the main window.
-
                                              • TQt::DockUnmanaged - not managed by a TQMainWindow.
-
                                              
-
                                              TQt::GUIStyle
                                              
-
-
                                               This type is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                               
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::WindowsStyle
-
                                              • TQt::MotifStyle
-
                                              • TQt::MacStyle
-
                                              • TQt::Win3Style
-
                                              • TQt::PMStyle
-
                                              
-
                                              TQt::ImageConversionFlags
                                              
-
-
                                               The conversion flag is a bitwise-OR of the following values. The
-options marked "(default)" are set if no other values from the
-list are included (since the defaults are zero):
-
                                               Color/Mono preference (ignored for TQBitmap)
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::AutoColor - (default) - If the image has depth 1 and contains only
-black and white pixels, the pixmap becomes monochrome.
-
                                              • TQt::ColorOnly - The pixmap is dithered/converted to the
-native display depth.
-
                                              • TQt::MonoOnly - The pixmap becomes monochrome. If necessary,
-it is dithered using the chosen dithering algorithm.
-
                                               Dithering mode preference for RGB channels
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::DiffuseDither - (default) - A high-quality dither.
-
                                              • TQt::OrderedDither - A faster, more ordered dither.
-
                                              • TQt::ThresholdDither - No dithering; closest color is used.
-
                                               Dithering mode preference for alpha channel
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::ThresholdAlphaDither - (default) - No dithering.
-
                                              • TQt::OrderedAlphaDither - A faster, more ordered dither.
-
                                              • TQt::DiffuseAlphaDither - A high-quality dither.
-
                                              • TQt::NoAlpha - Not supported.
-
                                               Color matching versus dithering preference
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::PreferDither - (default when converting to a pixmap) - Always dither
-32-bit images when the image is converted to 8 bits.
-
                                              • TQt::AvoidDither - (default when converting for the purpose of saving to
-file) - Dither 32-bit images only if the image has more than 256
-colors and it is being converted to 8 bits.
-
                                              • TQt::AutoDither - Not supported.
-
                                               The following are not values that are used directly, but masks for
-the above classes:
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::ColorMode_Mask - Mask for the color mode.
-
                                              • TQt::Dither_Mask - Mask for the dithering mode for RGB channels.
-
                                              • TQt::AlphaDither_Mask - Mask for the dithering mode for the alpha channel.
-
                                              • TQt::DitherMode_Mask - Mask for the mode that determines the preference of
-color matching versus dithering.
-
                                               Using 0 as the conversion flag sets all the default options.
-
-
                                              TQt::Key
                                              
-
-
                                               The key names used by TQt.
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Escape
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Tab
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Backtab
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Backspace
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Return
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Enter
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Insert
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Delete
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Pause
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Print
-
                                              • TQt::Key_SysReq
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Home
-
                                              • TQt::Key_End
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Left
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Up
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Right
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Down
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Prior
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Next
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Shift
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Control
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Meta
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Alt
-
                                              • TQt::Key_CapsLock
-
                                              • TQt::Key_NumLock
-
                                              • TQt::Key_ScrollLock
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Clear
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F1
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F2
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F3
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F4
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F5
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F6
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F7
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F8
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F9
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F10
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F11
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F12
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F13
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F14
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F15
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F16
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F17
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F18
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F19
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F20
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F21
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F22
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F23
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F24
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F25
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F26
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F27
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F28
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F29
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F30
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F31
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F32
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F33
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F34
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F35
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Super_L
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Super_R
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Menu
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Hyper_L
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Hyper_R
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Help
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Space
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Any
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Exclam
-
                                              • TQt::Key_QuoteDbl
-
                                              • TQt::Key_NumberSign
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Dollar
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Percent
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Ampersand
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Apostrophe
-
                                              • TQt::Key_ParenLeft
-
                                              • TQt::Key_ParenRight
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Asterisk
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Plus
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Comma
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Minus
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Period
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Slash
-
                                              • TQt::Key_0
-
                                              • TQt::Key_1
-
                                              • TQt::Key_2
-
                                              • TQt::Key_3
-
                                              • TQt::Key_4
-
                                              • TQt::Key_5
-
                                              • TQt::Key_6
-
                                              • TQt::Key_7
-
                                              • TQt::Key_8
-
                                              • TQt::Key_9
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Colon
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Semicolon
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Less
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Equal
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Greater
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Question
-
                                              • TQt::Key_At
-
                                              • TQt::Key_A
-
                                              • TQt::Key_B
-
                                              • TQt::Key_C
-
                                              • TQt::Key_D
-
                                              • TQt::Key_E
-
                                              • TQt::Key_F
-
                                              • TQt::Key_G
-
                                              • TQt::Key_H
-
                                              • TQt::Key_I
-
                                              • TQt::Key_J
-
                                              • TQt::Key_K
-
                                              • TQt::Key_L
-
                                              • TQt::Key_M
-
                                              • TQt::Key_N
-
                                              • TQt::Key_O
-
                                              • TQt::Key_P
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Q
-
                                              • TQt::Key_R
-
                                              • TQt::Key_S
-
                                              • TQt::Key_T
-
                                              • TQt::Key_U
-
                                              • TQt::Key_V
-
                                              • TQt::Key_W
-
                                              • TQt::Key_X
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Y
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Z
-
                                              • TQt::Key_BracketLeft
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Backslash
-
                                              • TQt::Key_BracketRight
-
                                              • TQt::Key_AsciiCircum
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Underscore
-
                                              • TQt::Key_QuoteLeft
-
                                              • TQt::Key_BraceLeft
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Bar
-
                                              • TQt::Key_BraceRight
-
                                              • TQt::Key_AsciiTilde
-
                                              • TQt::Key_nobreakspace
-
                                              • TQt::Key_exclamdown
-
                                              • TQt::Key_cent
-
                                              • TQt::Key_sterling
-
                                              • TQt::Key_currency
-
                                              • TQt::Key_yen
-
                                              • TQt::Key_brokenbar
-
                                              • TQt::Key_section
-
                                              • TQt::Key_diaeresis
-
                                              • TQt::Key_copyright
-
                                              • TQt::Key_ordfeminine
-
                                              • TQt::Key_guillemotleft
-
                                              • TQt::Key_notsign
-
                                              • TQt::Key_hyphen
-
                                              • TQt::Key_registered
-
                                              • TQt::Key_macron
-
                                              • TQt::Key_degree
-
                                              • TQt::Key_plusminus
-
                                              • TQt::Key_twosuperior
-
                                              • TQt::Key_threesuperior
-
                                              • TQt::Key_acute
-
                                              • TQt::Key_mu
-
                                              • TQt::Key_paragraph
-
                                              • TQt::Key_periodcentered
-
                                              • TQt::Key_cedilla
-
                                              • TQt::Key_onesuperior
-
                                              • TQt::Key_masculine
-
                                              • TQt::Key_guillemotright
-
                                              • TQt::Key_onequarter
-
                                              • TQt::Key_onehalf
-
                                              • TQt::Key_threequarters
-
                                              • TQt::Key_questiondown
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Agrave
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Aacute
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Acircumflex
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Atilde
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Adiaeresis
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Aring
-
                                              • TQt::Key_AE
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Ccedilla
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Egrave
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Eacute
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Ecircumflex
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Ediaeresis
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Igrave
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Iacute
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Icircumflex
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Idiaeresis
-
                                              • TQt::Key_ETH
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Ntilde
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Ograve
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Oacute
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Ocircumflex
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Otilde
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Odiaeresis
-
                                              • TQt::Key_multiply
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Ooblique
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Ugrave
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Uacute
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Ucircumflex
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Udiaeresis
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Yacute
-
                                              • TQt::Key_THORN
-
                                              • TQt::Key_ssharp
-
                                              • TQt::Key_agrave
-
                                              • TQt::Key_aacute
-
                                              • TQt::Key_acircumflex
-
                                              • TQt::Key_atilde
-
                                              • TQt::Key_adiaeresis
-
                                              • TQt::Key_aring
-
                                              • TQt::Key_ae
-
                                              • TQt::Key_ccedilla
-
                                              • TQt::Key_egrave
-
                                              • TQt::Key_eacute
-
                                              • TQt::Key_ecircumflex
-
                                              • TQt::Key_ediaeresis
-
                                              • TQt::Key_igrave
-
                                              • TQt::Key_iacute
-
                                              • TQt::Key_icircumflex
-
                                              • TQt::Key_idiaeresis
-
                                              • TQt::Key_eth
-
                                              • TQt::Key_ntilde
-
                                              • TQt::Key_ograve
-
                                              • TQt::Key_oacute
-
                                              • TQt::Key_ocircumflex
-
                                              • TQt::Key_otilde
-
                                              • TQt::Key_odiaeresis
-
                                              • TQt::Key_division
-
                                              • TQt::Key_oslash
-
                                              • TQt::Key_ugrave
-
                                              • TQt::Key_uacute
-
                                              • TQt::Key_ucircumflex
-
                                              • TQt::Key_udiaeresis
-
                                              • TQt::Key_yacute
-
                                              • TQt::Key_thorn
-
                                              • TQt::Key_ydiaeresis
-
                                               Multimedia keys
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Back
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Forward
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Stop
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Refresh
-
                                              • TQt::Key_VolumeDown
-
                                              • TQt::Key_VolumeMute
-
                                              • TQt::Key_VolumeUp
-
                                              • TQt::Key_BassBoost
-
                                              • TQt::Key_BassUp
-
                                              • TQt::Key_BassDown
-
                                              • TQt::Key_TrebleUp
-
                                              • TQt::Key_TrebleDown
-
                                              • TQt::Key_MediaPlay
-
                                              • TQt::Key_MediaStop
-
                                              • TQt::Key_MediaPrev
-
                                              • TQt::Key_MediaNext
-
                                              • TQt::Key_MediaRecord
-
                                              • TQt::Key_HomePage
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Favorites
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Search
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Standby
-
                                              • TQt::Key_OpenUrl
-
                                              • TQt::Key_LaunchMail
-
                                              • TQt::Key_LaunchMedia
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Launch0
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Launch1
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Launch2
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Launch3
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Launch4
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Launch5
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Launch6
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Launch7
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Launch8
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Launch9
-
                                              • TQt::Key_LaunchA
-
                                              • TQt::Key_LaunchB
-
                                              • TQt::Key_LaunchC
-
                                              • TQt::Key_LaunchD
-
                                              • TQt::Key_LaunchE
-
                                              • TQt::Key_LaunchF
-
                                              • TQt::Key_MediaLast
-
                                              • TQt::Key_unknown
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Direction_L - internal use only
-
                                              • TQt::Key_Direction_R - internal use only
-
                                               
-
                                              TQt::MacintoshVersion
                                              
-
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::MV_Unknown - Version cannot be detected
-
                                              • TQt::MV_9 - Mac OS 9
-
                                              • TQt::MV_10_DOT_3 - Mac OS X 10.3
-
                                              • TQt::MV_10_DOT_2 - Mac OS X 10.2
-
                                              • TQt::MV_10_DOT_1 - Mac OS X 10.1
-
                                              • TQt::MV_10_DOT_0 - Mac OS X 10.0
-
                                              • TQt::MV_10_DOT_4 - Mac OS X 10.4
-
                                              • TQt::MV_CHEETAH - 10.0 Codename
-
                                              • TQt::MV_PUMA - 10.1 Codename
-
                                              • TQt::MV_JAGUAR - 10.2 Codename
-
                                              • TQt::MV_PANTHER - 10.3 Codename
-
                                              • TQt::MV_TIGER - 10.4 Codename
-
                                              
-
                                              TQt::Modifier
                                              
-
-
                                               This enum type describes the keyboard modifier keys supported by
-TQt.
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::SHIFT - the Shift keys provided on all standard keyboards.
-
                                              • TQt::META - the Meta keys.
-
                                              • TQt::CTRL - the Ctrl keys.
-
                                              • TQt::ALT - the normal Alt keys, but not e.g. AltGr.
-
                                              • TQt::MODIFIER_MASK - is a mask of Shift, Ctrl, Alt and Meta.
-
                                              • TQt::UNICODE_ACCEL - the accelerator is specified as a Unicode code
-point, not as a TQt Key.
-
                                              
-
                                              TQt::Orientation
                                              
-
-
                                               This type is used to signify an object's orientation.
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::Horizontal
-
                                              • TQt::Vertical
-
                                               Orientation is used with TQScrollBar for example.
-
-
                                              TQt::PaintUnit
                                              
-
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::PixelUnit
-
                                              • TQt::LoMetricUnit - obsolete
-
                                              • TQt::HiMetricUnit - obsolete
-
                                              • TQt::LoEnglishUnit - obsolete
-
                                              • TQt::HiEnglishUnit - obsolete
-
                                              • TQt::TwipsUnit - obsolete
-
                                              
-
                                              TQt::PenCapStyle
                                              
-
-
                                               This enum type defines the pen cap styles supported by TQt, i.e.
-the line end caps that can be drawn using TQPainter.
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::FlatCap - a square line end that does not cover the end
-point of the line.
-
                                              • TQt::SquareCap - a square line end that covers the end point and
-extends beyond it with half the line width.
-
                                              • TQt::RoundCap - a rounded line end.
-
                                              • TQt::MPenCapStyle - mask of the pen cap styles.
-
                                               
                                              Pen Cap Styles
                                               
-
                                              TQt::PenJoinStyle
                                              
-
-
                                               This enum type defines the pen join styles supported by TQt, i.e.
-which joins between two connected lines can be drawn using
-TQPainter.
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::MiterJoin - The outer edges of the lines are extended to
-meet at an angle, and this area is filled.
-
                                              • TQt::BevelJoin - The triangular notch between the two lines is filled.
-
                                              • TQt::RoundJoin - A circular arc between the two lines is filled.
-
                                              • TQt::MPenJoinStyle - mask of the pen join styles.
-
                                               
                                              Pen Join Styles
                                               
-
                                              TQt::PenStyle
                                              
-
-
                                               This enum type defines the pen styles that can be drawn using
-TQPainter. The styles are
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::NoPen - no line at all. For example, TQPainter::drawRect()
-fills but does not draw any boundary line.
-
                                              • TQt::SolidLine - a simple line.
-
                                              • TQt::DashLine - dashes separated by a few pixels.
-
                                              • TQt::DotLine - dots separated by a few pixels.
-
                                              • TQt::DashDotLine - alternate dots and dashes.
-
                                              • TQt::DashDotDotLine - one dash, two dots, one dash, two dots.
-
                                              • TQt::MPenStyle - mask of the pen styles.
-
                                               
                                              Pen Styles
                                               
-
                                              TQt::RasterOp
                                              
-
-
                                               This enum type is used to describe the way things are written to
-the paint device. Each bit of the src (what you write)
-interacts with the corresponding bit of the dst pixel.
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::CopyROP - dst = src
-
                                              • TQt::OrROP - dst = src OR dst
-
                                              • TQt::XorROP - dst = src XOR dst
-
                                              • TQt::NotAndROP - dst = (NOT src) AND dst
-
                                              • TQt::EraseROP - an alias for NotAndROP
-
                                              • TQt::NotCopyROP - dst = NOT src
-
                                              • TQt::NotOrROP - dst = (NOT src) OR dst
-
                                              • TQt::NotXorROP - dst = (NOT src) XOR dst
-
                                              • TQt::AndROP - dst = src AND dst
-
                                              • TQt::NotEraseROP - an alias for AndROP
-
                                              • TQt::NotROP - dst = NOT dst
-
                                              • TQt::ClearROP - dst = 0
-
                                              • TQt::SetROP - dst = 1
-
                                              • TQt::NopROP - dst = dst
-
                                              • TQt::AndNotROP - dst = src AND (NOT dst)
-
                                              • TQt::OrNotROP - dst = src OR (NOT dst)
-
                                              • TQt::NandROP - dst = NOT (src AND dst)
-
                                              • TQt::NorROP - dst = NOT (src OR dst)
-
                                               By far the most useful ones are CopyROP and XorROP.
-
                                               On TQt/Embedded, only CopyROP, XorROP, and NotROP are supported.
-
-
                                              TQt::SequenceMatch
                                              
-
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::NoMatch - Sequences have nothing in common
-
                                              • TQt::PartialMatch - Sequences match partially, but are not complete
-
                                              • TQt::Identical - Sequences do not differ
-
                                              
-
                                              TQt::SortOrder
                                              
-
-
                                               This enum describes how the items in a widget are sorted.
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::Ascending - The items are sorted ascending e.g. starts with
-'AAA' ends with 'ZZZ' in Latin-1 locales
-
                                              • TQt::Descending - The items are sorted descending e.g. starts with
-'ZZZ' ends with 'AAA' in Latin-1 locales
-
                                              
-
                                              TQt::StringComparisonMode
                                              
-
-
                                               This enum type is used to set the string comparison mode when
-searching for an item. It is used by TQListBox, TQListView and
-TQIconView, for example. We'll refer to the string being searched
-as the 'target' string.
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::CaseSensitive - The strings must match case sensitively.
-
                                              • TQt::ExactMatch - The target and search strings must match exactly.
-
                                              • TQt::BeginsWith - The target string begins with the search string.
-
                                              • TQt::EndsWith - The target string ends with the search string.
-
                                              • TQt::Contains - The target string contains the search string.
-
                                               If you OR these flags together (excluding CaseSensitive), the
-search criteria be applied in the following order: ExactMatch,
-BeginsWith, EndsWith, Contains.
-
                                               Matching is case-insensitive unless CaseSensitive is set. CaseSensitive can be OR-ed with any combination of the other
-flags.
-
                                               
-
                                              TQt::TextFlags
                                              
-
-
                                               This enum type is used to define some modifier flags. Some of
-these flags only make sense in the context of printing:
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::SingleLine - Treats all whitespace as spaces and prints just
-one line.
-
                                              • TQt::DontClip - If it's impossible to stay within the given bounds,
-it prints outside.
-
                                              • TQt::ExpandTabs - Makes the U+0009 (ASCII tab) character move to
-the next tab stop.
-
                                              • TQt::ShowPrefix - Displays the string "&P" as P
-(see TQButton for an example). For an ampersand, use "&&".
-
                                              • TQt::WordBreak - Breaks lines at appropriate points, e.g. at word
-boundaries.
-
                                              • TQt::BreakAnywhere - Breaks lines anywhere, even within words.
-
                                              • TQt::NoAccel - Same as ShowPrefix but doesn't draw the underlines.
-
                                               You can use as many modifier flags as you want, except that SingleLine and WordBreak cannot be combined.
-
                                               Flags that are inappropriate for a given use (e.g. ShowPrefix to
-TQGridLayout::addWidget()) are generally ignored.
-
                                               
-
                                              TQt::TextFormat
                                              
-
-
                                               This enum is used in widgets that can display both plain text and
-rich text, e.g. TQLabel. It is used for deciding whether a text
-string should be interpreted as one or the other. This is normally
-done by passing one of the enum values to a setTextFormat()
-function.
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::PlainText - The text string is interpreted as a plain text
-string.
-
                                              • TQt::RichText - The text string is interpreted as a rich text
-string using the current TQStyleSheet::defaultSheet().
-
                                              • TQt::AutoText - The text string is interpreted as for RichText
-if TQStyleSheet::mightBeRichText() returns TRUE, otherwise as
-PlainText.
-
                                              • TQt::LogText - A special, limited text format which is only used
-by TQTextEdit in an optimized mode.
-
                                              
-
                                              TQt::TimeSpec
                                              
-
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::LocalTime - Locale dependent time (Timezones and Daylight Savings Time)
-
                                              • TQt::UTC - Coordinated Universal Time, replaces Greenwich Time
-
                                              
-
                                              TQt::UIEffect
                                              
-
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::UI_General
-
                                              • TQt::UI_AnimateMenu
-
                                              • TQt::UI_FadeMenu
-
                                              • TQt::UI_AnimateCombo
-
                                              • TQt::UI_AnimateTooltip
-
                                              • TQt::UI_FadeTooltip
-
                                              • TQt::UI_AnimateToolBox - Reserved
-
                                              
-
                                              TQt::WidgetFlags
                                              
-
-
                                               
-
                                               This enum type is used to specify various window-system properties
-for the widget. They are fairly unusual but necessary in a few
-cases. Some of these flags depend on whether the underlying window
-manager supports them. (See the toplevel example for an explanation and example of their
-use.)
-
                                               The main types are
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::WType_TopLevel - indicates that this widget is a top-level
-widget, usually with a window-system frame and so on.
-
                                              • TQt::WType_Dialog - indicates that this widget is a top-level
-window that should be decorated as a dialog (i.e. typically no
-maximize or minimize buttons in the title bar). If you want to use
-it as a modal dialog it should be launched from another window, or
-have a parent and this flag should be combined with WShowModal.
-If you make it modal, the dialog will prevent other top-level
-windows in the application from getting any input. WType_Dialog
-implies WType_TopLevel. We refer to a top-level window that has
-a parent as a secondary window. (See also WGroupLeader.)
-
                                              • TQt::WType_Popup - indicates that this widget is a popup
-top-level window, i.e. that it is modal, but has a window system
-frame appropriate for popup menus. WType_Popup implies
-WType_TopLevel.
-
                                              • TQt::WType_Desktop - indicates that this widget is the desktop.
-See also WPaintDesktop below. WType_Desktop implies WType_TopLevel.
-
                                               There are also a number of flags which you can use to customize
-the appearance of top-level windows. These have no effect on other
-windows:
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::WStyle_Customize - indicates that the WStyle_* flags
-should be used to build the window instead of the default flags.
-
                                              • TQt::WStyle_NormalBorder - gives the window a normal border.
-This cannot be combined with WStyle_DialogBorder or WStyle_NoBorder.
-
                                              • TQt::WStyle_DialogBorder - gives the window a thin dialog border.
-This cannot be combined with WStyle_NormalBorder or WStyle_NoBorder.
-
                                              • TQt::WStyle_NoBorder - produces a borderless window. Note that
-the user cannot move or resize a borderless window via the window
-system. This cannot be combined with WStyle_NormalBorder or WStyle_DialogBorder. On Windows, the flag works fine. On X11, the
-result of the flag is dependent on the window manager and its
-ability to understand MOTIF and/or NETWM hints: most existing
-modern window managers can handle this. With WX11BypassWM, you
-can bypass the window manager completely. This results in a
-borderless window that is not managed at all (i.e. no keyboard
-input unless you call setActiveWindow() manually).
-
                                              • TQt::WStyle_NoBorderEx - this value is obsolete. It has the same
-effect as using WStyle_NoBorder.
-
                                              • TQt::WStyle_Title - gives the window a title bar.
-
                                              • TQt::WStyle_SysMenu - adds a window system menu.
-
                                              • TQt::WStyle_Minimize - adds a minimize button. Note that on
-Windows this has to be combined with WStyle_SysMenu for it to
-work.
-
                                              • TQt::WStyle_Maximize - adds a maximize button. Note that on
-Windows this has to be combined with WStyle_SysMenu for it to work.
-
                                              • TQt::WStyle_MinMax - is equal to WStyle_Minimize|WStyle_Maximize. Note that on Windows this has to
-be combined with WStyle_SysMenu to work.
-
                                              • TQt::WStyle_ContextHelp - adds a context help button to dialogs.
-
                                              • TQt::WStyle_Tool - makes the window a tool window. A tool window
-is often a small window with a smaller than usual title bar and
-decoration, typically used for collections of tool buttons. It
-there is a parent, the tool window will always be kept on top of
-it. If there isn't a parent, you may consider passing WStyle_StaysOnTop as well. If the window system supports it, a
-tool window can be decorated with a somewhat lighter frame. It can
-also be combined with WStyle_NoBorder.
-
                                              • TQt::WStyle_StaysOnTop - informs the window system that the
-window should stay on top of all other windows. Note that on some
-window managers on X11 you also have to pass WX11BypassWM for
-this flag to work correctly.
-
                                              • TQt::WStyle_Dialog - indicates that the window is a logical
-subwindow of its parent (i.e. a dialog). The window will not get
-its own taskbar entry and will be kept on top of its parent by the
-window system. Usually it will also be minimized when the parent
-is minimized. If not customized, the window is decorated with a
-slightly simpler title bar. This is the flag TQDialog uses.
-
                                              • TQt::WStyle_Splash - indicates that the window is a splash screen.
-On X11, we try to follow NETWM standard for a splash screen window if the
-window manager supports is otherwise it is equivalent to WX11BypassWM. On
-other platforms, it is equivalent to WStyle_NoBorder | WMacNoSheet |
-WStyle_Tool | WWinOwnDC
-
                                               Modifier flags:
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::WDestructiveClose - makes TQt delete this widget when the
-widget has accepted closeEvent(), or when the widget tried to
-ignore closeEvent() but could not.
-
                                              • TQt::WPaintDesktop - gives this widget paint events for the
-desktop.
-
                                              • TQt::WPaintUnclipped - makes all painters operating on this
-widget unclipped. Children of this widget or other widgets in
-front of it do not clip the area the painter can paint on.
-
                                              • TQt::WPaintClever - indicates that TQt should not try to
-optimize repainting for the widget, but instead pass on window
-system repaint events directly. (This tends to produce more events
-and smaller repaint regions.)
-
                                              • TQt::WMouseNoMask - indicates that even if the widget has a mask,
-it wants mouse events for its entire rectangle.
-
                                              • TQt::WStaticContents - indicates that the widget contents are
-north-west aligned and static. On resize, such a widget will
-receive paint events only for the newly visible part of itself.
-
                                              • TQt::WNoAutoErase - indicates that the widget paints all its
-pixels. Updating, resizing, scrolling and focus changes should
-therefore not erase the widget. This allows smart-repainting to
-avoid flicker.
-
                                              • TQt::WResizeNoErase - this value is obsolete; use WNoAutoErase instead.
-
                                              • TQt::WRepaintNoErase - this value is obsolete; use WNoAutoErase instead.
-
                                              • TQt::WGroupLeader - makes this window a group leader. A group
-leader should not have a parent (i.e. it should be a top-level
-window). Any decendant windows (direct or indirect) of a group
-leader are in its group; other windows are not. If you show a
-secondary window from the group (i.e. show a window whose top-most
-parent is a group leader), that window will be modal with respect
-to the other windows in the group, but modeless with respect to
-windows in other groups.
-
                                               Miscellaneous flags
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::WShowModal - see WType_Dialog
-
                                               Internal flags.
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::WNoMousePropagation
-
                                              • TQt::WStaticContents
-
                                              • TQt::WStyle_Reserved
-
                                              • TQt::WSubWindow
-
                                              • TQt::WType_Modal
-
                                              • TQt::WWinOwnDC
-
                                              • TQt::WX11BypassWM
-
                                              • TQt::WMacNoSheet
-
                                              • TQt::WMacDrawer
-
                                              • TQt::WStyle_Mask
-
                                              • TQt::WType_Mask
-
                                               
-
                                              TQt::WidgetState
                                              
-
-
                                               Internal flags.
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::WState_Created
-
                                              • TQt::WState_Disabled
-
                                              • TQt::WState_Visible
-
                                              • TQt::WState_ForceHide
-
                                              • TQt::WState_OwnCursor
-
                                              • TQt::WState_MouseTracking
-
                                              • TQt::WState_CompressKeys
-
                                              • TQt::WState_BlockUpdates
-
                                              • TQt::WState_InPaintEvent
-
                                              • TQt::WState_Reparented
-
                                              • TQt::WState_ConfigPending
-
                                              • TQt::WState_Resized
-
                                              • TQt::WState_AutoMask
-
                                              • TQt::WState_Polished
-
                                              • TQt::WState_DND
-
                                              • TQt::WState_Reserved0 - internal
-
                                              • TQt::WState_CreatedHidden
-
                                              • TQt::WState_Maximized
-
                                              • TQt::WState_Minimized
-
                                              • TQt::WState_ForceDisabled
-
                                              • TQt::WState_Exposed
-
                                              • TQt::WState_HasMouse
-
                                              • TQt::WState_CreatedHidden
-
                                              • TQt::WState_OwnSizePolicy
-
                                              • TQt::WState_FullScreen
-
                                              
-
                                              TQt::WindowState
                                              
-
-
                                               
-
                                               This enum type is used to specify the current state of a top-level
-window.
-
                                               The states are
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::WindowNoState - The window has no state set (in normal state).
-
                                              • TQt::WindowMinimized - The window is minimized (i.e. iconified).
-
                                              • TQt::WindowMaximized - The window is maximized with a frame around it.
-
                                              • TQt::WindowFullScreen - The window fills the entire screen without any frame around it.
-
                                              • TQt::WindowActive - The window is the active window, i.e. it has keyboard focus.
-
                                               
-
                                              TQt::WindowsVersion
                                              
-
-
                                                
-
                                              • TQt::WV_32s - Windows 3.1 with Win 32s
-
                                              • TQt::WV_95 - Windows 95
-
                                              • TQt::WV_98 - Windows 98
-
                                              • TQt::WV_Me - Windows Me
-
                                              • TQt::WV_DOS_based
-
                                              • TQt::WV_NT - Windows NT
-
                                              • TQt::WV_2000 - Windows 2000
-
                                              • TQt::WV_XP - Windows XP
-
                                              • TQt::WV_2003 - Windows Server 2003
-
                                              • TQt::WV_NT_based
-
                                              • TQt::WV_VISTA - Windows Vista
-
                                              • TQt::WV_CE - Windows CE
-
                                              • TQt::WV_CENET - Windows CE .NET
-
                                              • TQt::WV_CE_based
-
                                              
-
-
                                              
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                              
-
-
                                              Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                              TQt 3.3.8
                                              
-
                                              
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qtab-members.html b/doc/html/qtab-members.html
index cdba6490c..764639824 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtab-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtab-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qtab.html b/doc/html/qtab.html
index eee12fbb5..e62ad097a 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtab.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtab.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                              The TQTab class provides the structures in a TQTabBar.
 More...
-
                                              #include <qtabbar.h>
-
                                              Inherits TQt.
+
                                              #include <ntqtabbar.h>
+
                                              Inherits TQt.
 
                                              List of all member functions.
 
                                              Public Members
                                              
 
                                                
@@ -56,21 +56,21 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                                Detailed Description
                                                
 
 
-The TQTab class provides the structures in a TQTabBar.
+The TQTab class provides the structures in a TQTabBar.
 
                                                 
 
                                                 This class is used for custom TQTabBar tab headings.
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQTabBar and Advanced Widgets.
+
                                                 
                                                See also TQTabBar and Advanced Widgets.
 
 
                                                Member Function Documentation
                                                
 
                                                TQTab::TQTab ()
 
                                                
 Constructs an empty tab. All fields are set to empty.
 
-
                                                TQTab::TQTab ( const TQString & text )
+
                                                TQTab::TQTab ( const TQString & text )
 
                                                
 Constructs a tab with the text text.
 
-
                                                TQTab::TQTab ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text = TQString::null )
+
                                                TQTab::TQTab ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text = TQString::null )
 
                                                
 Constructs a tab with an icon and the text, text.
 
@@ -78,10 +78,10 @@ Constructs a tab with an icon and the text, text.
 
 Destroys the tab and frees up all allocated resources.
 
-
                                                TQIconSet * TQTab::iconSet () const
+
                                                TQIconSet * TQTab::iconSet () const
 
                                                
 
-
                                                 Return the TQIconSet of the TQTab.
+
                                                 Return the TQIconSet of the TQTab.
 
 
                                                int TQTab::identifier () const
 
                                                
@@ -93,17 +93,17 @@ Destroys the tab and frees up all allocated resources.
 
 
                                                 Returns TRUE if the TQTab is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
 
-
                                                TQRect TQTab::rect () const
+
                                                TQRect TQTab::rect () const
 
                                                
 
-
                                                 Return the TQRect for the TQTab.
+
                                                 Return the TQRect for the TQTab.
 
 
                                                void TQTab::setEnabled ( bool enable )
 
                                                
 
 
                                                 If enable is TRUE enable the TQTab, otherwise disable it.
 
-
                                                void TQTab::setIconSet ( const TQIconSet & icon )
+
                                                void TQTab::setIconSet ( const TQIconSet & icon )
 
                                                
 Sets the tab's iconset to icon
 
@@ -111,18 +111,18 @@ Sets the tab's iconset to icon
 
 
 
                                                 Set the identifier for the TQTab to i. Each TQTab's identifier
-within a TQTabBar must be unique.
+within a TQTabBar must be unique.
 
-
                                                void TQTab::setRect ( const TQRect & rect )
+
                                                void TQTab::setRect ( const TQRect & rect )
 
                                                
 
-
                                                 Set the TQTab TQRect to rect.
+
                                                 Set the TQTab TQRect to rect.
 
-
                                                void TQTab::setText ( const TQString & text )
+
                                                void TQTab::setText ( const TQString & text )
 
                                                
 Sets the text of the tab to text.
 
-
                                                TQString TQTab::text () const
+
                                                TQString TQTab::text () const
 
                                                
 
 
                                                 Returns the text of the TQTab label.
diff --git a/doc/html/qtabbar-h.html b/doc/html/qtabbar-h.html
index af470c8b1..2d924c61f 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtabbar-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtabbar-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qtabbar.h Include File
+ntqtabbar.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                TQTabBar Class Reference
                                                
-
-
                                                The TQTabBar class provides a tab bar, e.g. for use in tabbed dialogs.
-More...
-
                                                #include <qtabbar.h>
-
                                                Inherits TQWidget.
-
                                                List of all member functions.
-
                                                Public Members
                                                
-
-
                                                Public Slots
                                                
-
-
                                                Signals
                                                
-
-
                                                Properties
                                                
-
                                                  
-
                                                • int count - the number of tabs in the tab bar  (read only)
                                                  • 
-
                                                • int currentTab - the id of the tab bar's visible tab
                                                  • 
-
                                                • int keyboardFocusTab - the id of the tab that has the keyboard focus  (read only)
                                                  • 
-
                                                • Shape shape - the shape of the tabs in the tab bar
                                                  • 
-
                                                
-
                                                Protected Members
                                                
-
                                                  
-
                                                • virtual void paint ( TQPainter * p, TQTab * t, bool selected ) const
                                                  • 
-
                                                • virtual void paintLabel ( TQPainter * p, const TQRect & br, TQTab * t, bool has_focus ) const
                                                  • 
-
                                                • virtual void paintEvent ( TQPaintEvent * e )
                                                  • 
-
                                                • TQPtrList<TQTab> * tabList ()
                                                  • 
-
                                                
-
                                                Detailed Description
                                                
-
-
-The TQTabBar class provides a tab bar, e.g. for use in tabbed dialogs.
-
                                                 
-
                                                 TQTabBar is straightforward to use; it draws the tabs using one of
-the predefined shapes, and emits a
-signal when a tab is selected. It can be subclassed to tailor the
-look and feel. TQt also provides a ready-made TQTabWidget and a
-TQTabDialog.
-
                                                 The choice of tab shape is a matter of taste, although tab dialogs
-(for preferences and similar) invariably use RoundedAbove;
-nobody uses TriangularAbove. Tab controls in windows other than
-dialogs almost always use either RoundedBelow or TriangularBelow. Many spreadsheets and other tab controls in which
-all the pages are essentially similar use TriangularBelow,
-whereas RoundedBelow is used mostly when the pages are
-different (e.g. a multi-page tool palette).
-
                                                 The most important part of TQTabBar's API is the selected() signal.
-This is emitted whenever the selected page changes (even at
-startup, when the selected page changes from 'none'). There is
-also a slot, setCurrentTab(), which can be used to select a page
-programmatically.
-
                                                 TQTabBar creates automatic accelerator keys in the manner of
-TQButton; e.g. if a tab's label is "&Graphics", Alt+G becomes an
-accelerator key for switching to that tab.
-
                                                 The following virtual functions may need to be reimplemented:
-
                                                  
-
                                                •  paint() paints a single tab. paintEvent() calls paint() for
-each tab so that any overlap will look right.
-
                                                •  addTab() creates a new tab and adds it to the bar.
-
                                                •  selectTab() decides which tab, if any, the user selects with the mouse.
-
                                                
-
                                                 The index of the current tab is returned by currentTab(). The tab
-with a particular index is returned by tabAt(), the tab with a
-particular id is returned by tab(). The index of a tab is returned
-by indexOf(). The current tab can be set by index or tab pointer
-using one of the setCurrentTab() functions.
-
                                                  
-
                                                See also Advanced Widgets.
-
-
                                                Member Type Documentation
                                                
-
                                                TQTabBar::Shape
                                                
-
-
                                                 This enum type lists the built-in shapes supported by TQTabBar:
-
                                                  
-
                                                • TQTabBar::RoundedAbove - the normal rounded look above the pages
-
                                                • TQTabBar::RoundedBelow - the normal rounded look below the pages
-
                                                • TQTabBar::TriangularAbove - triangular tabs above the pages (very
-unusual; included for completeness)
-
                                                • TQTabBar::TriangularBelow - triangular tabs similar to those used in
-the Excel spreadsheet, for example
-
                                                
-
                                                Member Function Documentation
                                                
-
                                                TQTabBar::TQTabBar ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                
-Constructs a new, empty tab bar; the parent and name
-arguments are passed on to the TQWidget constructor.
-
-
                                                TQTabBar::~TQTabBar ()
-
                                                
-Destroys the tab control, freeing memory used.
-
-
                                                int TQTabBar::addTab ( TQTab * newTab ) [virtual]
-
                                                
-Adds the tab, newTab, to the tab control.
-
                                                 Sets newTab's id to a new id and places the tab just to the
-right of the existing tabs. If the tab's label contains an
-ampersand, the letter following the ampersand is used as an
-accelerator for the tab, e.g. if the label is "Bro&wse" then
-Alt+W becomes an accelerator which will move the focus to this
-tab. Returns the id.
-
                                                 
                                                See also insertTab().
-
-
                                                int TQTabBar::count () const
-
                                                Returns the number of tabs in the tab bar.
-See the "count" property for details.
-
                                                int TQTabBar::currentTab () const
-
                                                Returns the id of the tab bar's visible tab.
-See the "currentTab" property for details.
-
                                                int TQTabBar::indexOf ( int id ) const
-
                                                
-Returns the position index of the tab with id id or -1 if no
-tab has this id.
-
                                                 
                                                See also tabAt().
-
-
                                                int TQTabBar::insertTab ( TQTab * newTab, int index = -1 ) [virtual]
-
                                                
-Inserts the tab, newTab, into the tab control.
-
                                                 If index is not specified, the tab is simply appended.
-Otherwise it's inserted at the specified position.
-
                                                 Sets newTab's id to a new id. If the tab's label contains an
-ampersand, the letter following the ampersand is used as an
-accelerator for the tab, e.g. if the label is "Bro&wse" then
-Alt+W becomes an accelerator which will move the focus to this
-tab. Returns the id.
-
                                                 
                                                See also addTab().
-
-
                                                bool TQTabBar::isTabEnabled ( int id ) const
-
                                                
-Returns TRUE if the tab with id id exists and is enabled;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setTabEnabled().
-
-
                                                int TQTabBar::keyboardFocusTab () const
-
                                                Returns the id of the tab that has the keyboard focus.
-See the "keyboardFocusTab" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTabBar::layoutChanged () [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 TQTabBar emits the signal whenever the layout of the tab bar has
-been recalculated, for example when the contents of a tab change.
-
-
                                                void TQTabBar::layoutTabs () [virtual]
-
                                                
-Lays out all existing tabs according to their label and their
-iconset.
-
-
                                                void TQTabBar::paint ( TQPainter * p, TQTab * t, bool selected ) const [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-Paints the tab t using painter p. If and only if selected
-is TRUE, t is drawn currently selected.
-
                                                 This virtual function may be reimplemented to change the look of
-TQTabBar. If you decide to reimplement it, you may also need to
-reimplement sizeHint().
-
-
                                                void TQTabBar::paintEvent ( TQPaintEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-Repaints the tab row. All the painting is done by paint();
-paintEvent() only decides which tabs need painting and in what
-order. The event is passed in e.
-
                                                 
                                                See also paint().
-
-
                                                Reimplemented from TQWidget.
-
                                                void TQTabBar::paintLabel ( TQPainter * p, const TQRect & br, TQTab * t, bool has_focus ) const [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-Paints the label of tab t centered in rectangle br using
-painter p. A focus indication is drawn if has_focus is TRUE.
-
-
                                                void TQTabBar::removeTab ( TQTab * t ) [virtual]
-
                                                
-Removes tab t from the tab control, and deletes the tab.
-
-
                                                void TQTabBar::removeToolTip ( int index )
-
                                                
-Removes the tool tip for the tab at index position index.
-
-
                                                TQTab * TQTabBar::selectTab ( const TQPoint & p ) const [virtual]
-
                                                
-This virtual function is called by the mouse event handlers to
-determine which tab is pressed. The default implementation returns
-a pointer to the tab whose bounding rectangle contains p, if
-exactly one tab's bounding rectangle contains p. Otherwise it
-returns 0.
-
                                                 
                                                See also mousePressEvent() and mouseReleaseEvent().
-
-
                                                void TQTabBar::selected ( int id ) [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 TQTabBar emits this signal whenever any tab is selected, whether by
-the program or by the user. The argument id is the id of the
-tab as returned by addTab().
-
                                                 show() is guaranteed to emit this signal; you can display your
-page in a slot connected to this signal.
-
-
                                                void TQTabBar::setCurrentTab ( int ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                Sets the id of the tab bar's visible tab.
-See the "currentTab" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTabBar::setCurrentTab ( TQTab * tab ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                 Raises tab and emits the selected() signal unless the tab was
-already current.
-
                                                 
                                                See also currentTab and selected().
-
-
                                                void TQTabBar::setShape ( Shape ) [virtual]
-
                                                Sets the shape of the tabs in the tab bar.
-See the "shape" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTabBar::setTabEnabled ( int id, bool enabled ) [virtual]
-
                                                
-Enables tab id if enabled is TRUE or disables it if enabled is FALSE. If id is currently selected,
-setTabEnabled(FALSE) makes another tab selected.
-
                                                 setTabEnabled() updates the display if this causes a change in id's status.
-
                                                 
                                                See also update() and isTabEnabled().
-
-
                                                void TQTabBar::setToolTip ( int index, const TQString & tip )
-
                                                
-Sets the tool tip for the tab at index position index to tip.
-
-
                                                Shape TQTabBar::shape () const
-
                                                Returns the shape of the tabs in the tab bar.
-See the "shape" property for details.
-
                                                TQTab * TQTabBar::tab ( int id ) const
-
                                                
-Returns the tab with id id or 0 if there is no such tab.
-
                                                 
                                                See also count.
-
-
                                                TQTab * TQTabBar::tabAt ( int index ) const
-
                                                
-Returns the tab at position index.
-
                                                 
                                                See also indexOf().
-
-
                                                TQPtrList<TQTab> * TQTabBar::tabList () [protected]
-
                                                
-The list of TQTab objects in the tab bar.
-
                                                 This list is unlikely to be in the order that the TQTab elements
-appear visually. One way of iterating over the tabs is like this:
-
                                                -    for ( uint i = 0; i < myTabBar->count(); ++i ) {
-        nextTab = myTabBar->tabAt( i );
-        // do something with nextTab
-    }
-    
                                                
- 
-
-
                                                TQString TQTabBar::toolTip ( int index ) const
-
                                                
-Returns the tool tip for the tab at index position index.
-
-
                                                Property Documentation
                                                
-
                                                int count
                                                
-
                                                This property holds the number of tabs in the tab bar.
-
                                                Get this property's value with count().
-
                                                See also tab().
-
-
                                                int currentTab
                                                
-
                                                This property holds the id of the tab bar's visible tab.
-
                                                If no tab page is currently visible, the property's value is -1.
-Even if the property's value is not -1, you cannot assume that the
-user can see the relevant page, or that the tab is enabled. When
-you need to display something the value of this property
-represents the best page to display.
-
                                                 When this property is set to id, it will raise the tab with the
-id id and emit the selected() signal.
-
                                                 
                                                See also selected() and isTabEnabled().
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setCurrentTab() and get this property's value with currentTab().
-
                                                int keyboardFocusTab
                                                
-
                                                This property holds the id of the tab that has the keyboard focus.
-
                                                This property contains the id of the tab that has the keyboard
-focus or -1 if the tab bar does not have the keyboard focus.
-
-
                                                Get this property's value with keyboardFocusTab().
-
                                                Shape shape
                                                
-
                                                This property holds the shape of the tabs in the tab bar.
-
                                                The value of this property is one of the following: RoundedAbove (default), RoundedBelow, TriangularAbove or TriangularBelow.
-
                                                 
                                                See also Shape.
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setShape() and get this property's value with shape().
-
-
                                                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                
-
-
                                                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                TQt 3.3.8
                                                
-
                                                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qtabdialog-h.html b/doc/html/qtabdialog-h.html
index fbf4f4890..8648dd970 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtabdialog-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtabdialog-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qtabdialog.h Include File
+ntqtabdialog.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                TQTabDialog Class Reference
                                                
-
-
                                                The TQTabDialog class provides a stack of tabbed widgets.
-More...
-
                                                #include <qtabdialog.h>
-
                                                Inherits TQDialog.
-
                                                List of all member functions.
-
                                                Public Members
                                                
-
-
                                                Signals
                                                
-
-
                                                Protected Members
                                                
-
-
                                                Detailed Description
                                                
-
-
-
                                                 The TQTabDialog class provides a stack of tabbed widgets.
-
                                                 
-
-
                                                 A tabbed dialog is one in which several "tab pages" are available.
-By clicking on a tab page's tab or by pressing the indicated
-Alt+letter key combination, the user can select which tab page
-they want to use.
-
                                                 TQTabDialog provides a tab bar consisting of single row of tabs at
-the top; each tab has an associated widget which is that tab's
-tab page. In addition, TQTabDialog provides an OK button and the
-following optional buttons: Apply, Cancel, Defaults and Help.
-
                                                 The normal way to use TQTabDialog is to do the following in the
-constructor:
-
                                                  
-
                                                1.  Create a TQTabDialog.
-
                                                2.  Create a TQWidget for each of the pages in the tab dialog, insert
-children into it, set up geometry management for it, and use
-addTab() (or insertTab()) to set up a tab and keyboard accelerator
-for it.
-
                                                3.  Set up the buttons for the tab dialog using setOkButton(),
-setApplyButton(), setDefaultsButton(), setCancelButton() and
-setHelpButton().
-
                                                4.  Connect to the signals and slots.
-
                                                
-
                                                 If you don't call addTab() the page you have created will not be
-visible. Don't confuse the object name you supply to the
-TQWidget constructor and the tab label you supply to addTab();
-addTab() takes user-visible name that appears on the widget's tab
-and may identify an accelerator, whereas the widget name is used
-primarily for debugging.
-
                                                 Almost all applications have to connect the applyButtonPressed()
-signal to something. applyButtonPressed() is emitted when either OK
-or Apply is clicked, and your slot must copy the dialog's state into
-the application.
-
                                                 There are also several other signals which may be useful:
-
                                                  
-
                                                •  cancelButtonPressed() is emitted when the user clicks Cancel.
-
                                                •  defaultButtonPressed() is emitted when the user clicks Defaults;
-the slot it is connected to should reset the state of the dialog to
-the application defaults.
-
                                                •  helpButtonPressed() is emitted when the user clicks Help.
-
                                                •  aboutToShow() is emitted at the start of show(); if there is any
-chance that the state of the application may change between the
-creation of the tab dialog and the time show() is called, you must
-connect this signal to a slot that resets the state of the dialog.
-
                                                •  currentChanged() is emitted when the user selects a page.
-
                                                
-
                                                 Each tab is either enabled or disabled at any given time (see
-setTabEnabled()). If a tab is enabled the tab text is drawn in
-black and the user can select that tab. If it is disabled the tab
-is drawn in a different way and the user cannot select that tab.
-Note that even if a tab is disabled, the page can still be visible;
-for example, if all of the tabs happen to be disabled.
-
                                                 You can change a tab's label and iconset using changeTab(). A tab
-page can be removed with removePage() and shown with showPage(). The
-current page is given by currentPage().
-
                                                 TQTabDialog does not support tabs on the sides or bottom, nor can
-you set or retrieve the visible page. If you need more functionality
-than TQTabDialog provides, consider creating a TQDialog and using a
-TQTabBar with TQTabWidgets.
-
                                                 Most of the functionality in TQTabDialog is provided by a TQTabWidget.
-
                                                  
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQDialog and Dialog Classes.
-
-
                                                Member Function Documentation
                                                
-
                                                TQTabDialog::TQTabDialog ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )
-
                                                
-Constructs a TQTabDialog with only an OK button.
-The parent, name, modal and widget flag, f, arguments
-are passed on to the TQDialog constructor.
-
-
                                                TQTabDialog::~TQTabDialog ()
-
                                                
-Destroys the tab dialog.
-
-
                                                void TQTabDialog::aboutToShow () [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted by show() when it is time to set the state of
-the dialog's contents. The dialog should reflect the current state
-of the application when it appears; if there is any possibility that
-the state of the application may change between the time you call
-TQTabDialog::TQTabDialog() and TQTabDialog::show(), you should set the
-dialog's state in a slot and connect this signal to it.
-
                                                 This applies mainly to TQTabDialog objects that are kept around
-hidden, rather than being created, shown, and deleted afterwards.
-
                                                 
                                                See also applyButtonPressed(), show(), and cancelButtonPressed().
-
-
                                                void TQTabDialog::addTab ( TQWidget * child, const TQString & label )
-
                                                
-Adds another tab and page to the tab view.
-
                                                 The new page is child; the tab's label is label.
-Note the difference between the widget name (which you supply to
-widget constructors and to setTabEnabled(), for example) and the tab
-label. The name is internal to the program and invariant, whereas
-the label is shown on-screen and may vary according to language and
-other factors.
-
                                                 If the tab's label contains an ampersand, the letter following
-the ampersand is used as an accelerator for the tab, e.g. if the
-label is "Bro&wse" then Alt+W becomes an accelerator which will
-move the focus to this tab.
-
                                                 If you call addTab() after show() the screen will flicker and the
-user may be confused.
-
                                                 
                                                See also insertTab().
-
-
                                                void TQTabDialog::addTab ( TQWidget * child, const TQIconSet & iconset, const TQString & label )
-
                                                 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                 This version of the function shows the iconset as well as the label on the tab of child.
-
-
                                                void TQTabDialog::addTab ( TQWidget * child, TQTab * tab )
-
                                                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                 This is a lower-level method for adding tabs, similar to the other
-addTab() method. It is useful if you are using setTabBar() to set a
-TQTabBar subclass with an overridden TQTabBar::paint() function for a
-subclass of TQTab.
-
                                                 The child is the widget to be placed on the new tab page. The tab is the tab to display on the tab page -- normally this shows a
-label or an icon that identifies the tab page.
-
                                                 
-
                                                void TQTabDialog::applyButtonPressed () [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted when either the Apply or OK button is clicked.
-
                                                 It should be connected to a slot (or several slots) that change the
-application's state according to the state of the dialog.
-
                                                 
                                                See also cancelButtonPressed(), defaultButtonPressed(), and setApplyButton().
-
-
                                                void TQTabDialog::cancelButtonPressed () [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted when the Cancel button is clicked. It is
-automatically connected to TQDialog::reject(), which will hide the
-dialog.
-
                                                 The Cancel button should not change the application's state at all,
-so you should generally not need to connect it to any slot.
-
                                                 
                                                See also applyButtonPressed(), defaultButtonPressed(), and setCancelButton().
-
-
                                                void TQTabDialog::changeTab ( TQWidget * w, const TQIconSet & iconset, const TQString & label )
-
                                                
-Changes tab page w's iconset to iconset and label to label.
-
                                                 
-
                                                void TQTabDialog::changeTab ( TQWidget * w, const TQString & label )
-
                                                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                 Defines a new label for the tab of page w
-
-
                                                void TQTabDialog::currentChanged ( TQWidget * ) [signal]
-
                                                 
-
                                                 This signal is emitted whenever the current page changes.
-
                                                 
                                                See also currentPage(), showPage(), and tabLabel().
-
-
                                                TQWidget * TQTabDialog::currentPage () const
-
                                                  Returns a pointer to the page currently being displayed by the
-tab dialog. The tab dialog does its best to make sure that this value
-is never 0 (but if you try hard enough, it can be).
-
-
                                                void TQTabDialog::defaultButtonPressed () [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted when the Defaults button is pressed. It
-should reset the dialog (but not the application) to the "factory
-defaults".
-
                                                 The application's state should not be changed until the user clicks
-Apply or OK.
-
                                                 
                                                See also applyButtonPressed(), cancelButtonPressed(), and setDefaultButton().
-
-
                                                bool TQTabDialog::hasApplyButton () const
-
                                                
-Returns TRUE if the tab dialog has an Apply button; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setApplyButton(), applyButtonPressed(), hasCancelButton(), and hasDefaultButton().
-
-
                                                bool TQTabDialog::hasCancelButton () const
-
                                                
-Returns TRUE if the tab dialog has a Cancel button; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setCancelButton(), cancelButtonPressed(), hasApplyButton(), and hasDefaultButton().
-
-
                                                bool TQTabDialog::hasDefaultButton () const
-
                                                
-Returns TRUE if the tab dialog has a Defaults button; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setDefaultButton(), defaultButtonPressed(), hasApplyButton(), and hasCancelButton().
-
-
                                                bool TQTabDialog::hasHelpButton () const
-
                                                
-Returns TRUE if the tab dialog has a Help button; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setHelpButton(), helpButtonPressed(), hasApplyButton(), and hasCancelButton().
-
-
                                                bool TQTabDialog::hasOkButton () const
-
                                                
-Returns TRUE if the tab dialog has an OK button; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setOkButton(), hasApplyButton(), hasCancelButton(), and hasDefaultButton().
-
-
                                                void TQTabDialog::helpButtonPressed () [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted when the Help button is pressed. It
-could be used to present information about how to use the dialog.
-
                                                 
                                                See also applyButtonPressed(), cancelButtonPressed(), and setHelpButton().
-
-
                                                void TQTabDialog::insertTab ( TQWidget * child, const TQString & label, int index = -1 )
-
                                                
-Inserts another tab and page to the tab view.
-
                                                 The new page is child; the tab's label is label.
-Note the difference between the widget name (which you supply to
-widget constructors and to setTabEnabled(), for example) and the tab
-label. The name is internal to the program and invariant, whereas
-the label is shown on-screen and may vary according to language and
-other factors.
-
                                                 If the tab's label contains an ampersand, the letter following
-the ampersand is used as an accelerator for the tab, e.g. if the
-label is "Bro&wse" then Alt+W becomes an accelerator which will
-move the focus to this tab.
-
                                                 If index is not specified, the tab is simply added. Otherwise
-it is inserted at the specified position.
-
                                                 If you call insertTab() after show(), the screen will flicker and the
-user may be confused.
-
                                                 
                                                See also addTab().
-
-
                                                void TQTabDialog::insertTab ( TQWidget * child, const TQIconSet & iconset, const TQString & label, int index = -1 )
-
                                                 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                 This version of the function shows the iconset as well as the label on the tab of child.
-
-
                                                void TQTabDialog::insertTab ( TQWidget * child, TQTab * tab, int index = -1 )
-
                                                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                 This is a lower-level method for inserting tabs, similar to the other
-insertTab() method. It is useful if you are using setTabBar() to set a
-TQTabBar subclass with an overridden TQTabBar::paint() function for a
-subclass of TQTab.
-
                                                 The child is the widget to be placed on the new tab page. The tab is the tab to display on the tab page -- normally this shows a
-label or an icon that identifies the tab page. The index is the
-position where this tab page should be inserted.
-
                                                 
-
                                                bool TQTabDialog::isTabEnabled ( TQWidget * w ) const
-
                                                
-Returns TRUE if the page w is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setTabEnabled() and TQWidget::enabled.
-
-
                                                bool TQTabDialog::isTabEnabled ( const char * name ) const
-
                                                 This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                                 Returns TRUE if the page with object name name is enabled and
-FALSE if it is disabled.
-
                                                 If name is 0 or not the name of any of the pages, isTabEnabled()
-returns FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setTabEnabled() and TQWidget::enabled.
-
-
                                                void TQTabDialog::removePage ( TQWidget * w )
-
                                                 Removes page w from this stack of widgets. Does not
-delete w.
-
                                                See also showPage(), TQTabWidget::removePage(), and TQWidgetStack::removeWidget().
-
-
                                                void TQTabDialog::selected ( const TQString & ) [signal]
-
                                                
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                                 This signal is emitted whenever a tab is selected (raised),
-including during the first show().
-
                                                 
                                                See also raise().
-
-
                                                void TQTabDialog::setApplyButton ( const TQString & text )
-
                                                
-Adds an Apply button to the dialog. The button's text is set to text.
-
                                                 The Apply button should apply the current settings in the dialog box
-to the application while keeping the dialog visible.
-
                                                 When Apply is clicked, the applyButtonPressed() signal is emitted.
-
                                                 If text is a
-null string,
-no button is shown.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setCancelButton(), setDefaultButton(), and applyButtonPressed().
-
-
                                                void TQTabDialog::setApplyButton ()
-
                                                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                 Adds an Apply button to the dialog. The button's text is set to
-a localizable "Apply".
-
-
                                                void TQTabDialog::setCancelButton ( const TQString & text )
-
                                                
-Adds a Cancel button to the dialog. The button's text is set to text.
-
                                                 The cancel button should always return the application to the state
-it was in before the tab view popped up, or if the user has clicked
-Apply, back to the state immediately after the last Apply.
-
                                                 When Cancel is clicked, the cancelButtonPressed() signal is emitted.
-The dialog is closed at the same time.
-
                                                 If text is a
-null string,
-no button is shown.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setApplyButton(), setDefaultButton(), and cancelButtonPressed().
-
-
                                                void TQTabDialog::setCancelButton ()
-
                                                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                 Adds a Cancel button to the dialog. The button's text is set to
-a localizable "Cancel".
-
-
                                                void TQTabDialog::setDefaultButton ( const TQString & text )
-
                                                
-Adds a Defaults button to the dialog. The button's text is set to text.
-
                                                 The Defaults button should set the dialog (but not the application)
-back to the application defaults.
-
                                                 When Defaults is clicked, the defaultButtonPressed() signal is emitted.
-
                                                 If text is a
-null string,
-no button is shown.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setApplyButton(), setCancelButton(), and defaultButtonPressed().
-
-
                                                void TQTabDialog::setDefaultButton ()
-
                                                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                 Adds a Defaults button to the dialog. The button's text is set to
-a localizable "Defaults".
-
-
                                                void TQTabDialog::setFont ( const TQFont & font ) [virtual]
-
                                                
-Sets the font for the tabs to font.
-
                                                 If the widget is visible, the display is updated with the new font
-immediately. There may be some geometry changes, depending on the
-size of the old and new fonts.
-
-
                                                Reimplemented from TQWidget.
-
                                                void TQTabDialog::setHelpButton ( const TQString & text )
-
                                                
-Adds a Help button to the dialog. The button's text is set to text.
-
                                                 When Help is clicked, the helpButtonPressed() signal is emitted.
-
                                                 If text is a
-null string,
-no button is shown.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setApplyButton(), setCancelButton(), and helpButtonPressed().
-
-
                                                void TQTabDialog::setHelpButton ()
-
                                                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                 Adds a Help button to the dialog. The button's text is set to
-a localizable "Help".
-
-
                                                void TQTabDialog::setOkButton ( const TQString & text )
-
                                                
-Adds an OK button to the dialog and sets the button's text to text.
-
                                                 When the OK button is clicked, the applyButtonPressed() signal is emitted,
-and the current settings in the dialog box should be applied to
-the application. The dialog then closes.
-
                                                 If text is a
-null string,
-no button is shown.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setCancelButton(), setDefaultButton(), and applyButtonPressed().
-
-
                                                void TQTabDialog::setOkButton ()
-
                                                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                 Adds an OK button to the dialog. The button's text is set to
-a localizable "OK".
-
-
                                                void TQTabDialog::setTabBar ( TQTabBar * tb ) [protected]
-
                                                
-Replaces the TQTabBar heading the dialog by the given tab bar, tb.
-Note that this must be called before any tabs have been added,
-or the behavior is undefined.
-
                                                See also tabBar().
-
-
                                                void TQTabDialog::setTabEnabled ( TQWidget * w, bool enable )
-
                                                
-If enable is TRUE the page w is enabled; otherwise w is
-disabled. The page's tab is redrawn appropriately.
-
                                                 TQTabWidget uses TQWidget::setEnabled() internally, rather than keeping a
-separate flag.
-
                                                 Note that even a disabled tab and tab page may be visible. If the
-page is already visible TQTabWidget will not hide it; if all the
-pages are disabled TQTabWidget will show one of them.
-
                                                 
                                                See also isTabEnabled() and TQWidget::enabled.
-
-
                                                void TQTabDialog::setTabEnabled ( const char * name, bool enable )
-
                                                This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                                 Finds the page with object name name, enables/disables it
-according to the value of enable and redraws the page's tab
-appropriately.
-
                                                 TQTabDialog uses TQWidget::setEnabled() internally, rather than keeping a
-separate flag.
-
                                                 Note that even a disabled tab/page may be visible. If the page is
-already visible TQTabDialog will not hide it; if all the pages
-are disabled TQTabDialog will show one of them.
-
                                                 The object name is used (rather than the tab label) because the tab
-text may not be invariant in multi-language applications.
-
                                                 
                                                See also isTabEnabled() and TQWidget::enabled.
-
-
                                                void TQTabDialog::showPage ( TQWidget * w )
-
                                                  Ensures that widget w is shown. This is mainly useful for accelerators.
-
                                                 Warning: If used carelessly, this function can easily surprise or
-confuse the user.
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQTabBar::currentTab.
-
-
                                                TQTabBar * TQTabDialog::tabBar () const [protected]
-
                                                
-Returns the currently set TQTabBar.
-
                                                See also setTabBar().
-
-
                                                TQString TQTabDialog::tabLabel ( TQWidget * w )
-
                                                  Returns the text in the tab for page w.
-
-
-
                                                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                
-
-
                                                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                TQt 3.3.8
                                                
-
                                                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qtable-h.html b/doc/html/qtable-h.html
index 6af768072..d7ec9342e 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtable-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtable-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qtable.h Include File
+ntqtable.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                TQTable Class Reference
                                                [table module]
                                                
-
-
                                                The TQTable class provides a flexible editable table widget.
-More...
-
                                                #include <qtable.h>
-
                                                Inherits TQScrollView.
-
                                                Inherited by TQDataTable.
-
                                                List of all member functions.
-
                                                Public Members
                                                
-
-
                                                Public Slots
                                                
-
-
                                                Signals
                                                
-
-
                                                Properties
                                                
-
                                                  
-
                                                • bool columnMovingEnabled - whether columns can be moved by the user
                                                  • 
-
                                                • FocusStyle focusStyle - how the current (focus) cell is drawn
                                                  • 
-
                                                • int numCols - the number of columns in the table
                                                  • 
-
                                                • int numRows - the number of rows in the table
                                                  • 
-
                                                • int numSelections - the number of selections  (read only)
                                                  • 
-
                                                • bool readOnly - whether the table is read-only
                                                  • 
-
                                                • bool rowMovingEnabled - whether rows can be moved by the user
                                                  • 
-
                                                • SelectionMode selectionMode - the current selection mode
                                                  • 
-
                                                • bool showGrid - whether the table's grid is displayed
                                                  • 
-
                                                • bool sorting - whether a click on the header of a column sorts that column
                                                  • 
-
                                                
-
                                                Protected Members
                                                
-
-
                                                Protected Slots
                                                
-
-
                                                Detailed Description
                                                
-
-
-The TQTable class provides a flexible editable table widget.
-
-
                                                 
-
-
-
                                                 TQTable is easy to use, although it does have a large API because
-of the comprehensive functionality that it provides. TQTable
-includes functions for manipulating headers, rows and columns,
-cells and selections. TQTable also provides in-place editing and
-drag and drop, as well as a useful set of
-signals. TQTable efficiently supports very
-large tables, for example, tables one million by one million cells
-are perfectly possible. TQTable is economical with memory, using
-none for unused cells.
-
                                                 
                                                -    TQTable *table = new TQTable( 100, 250, this );
-    table->setPixmap( 3, 2, pix );
-    table->setText( 3, 2, "A pixmap" );
-    
                                                
- 
-
                                                 The first line constructs the table specifying its size in rows
-and columns. We then insert a pixmap and some text into the same cell, with the pixmap appearing to the
-left of the text. TQTable cells can be populated with
-TQTableItems, TQComboTableItems or by TQCheckTableItems.
-By default a vertical header appears at the left of the table
-showing row numbers and a horizontal header appears at the top of
-the table showing column numbers. (The numbers displayed start at
-1, although row and column numbers within TQTable begin at 0.)
-
                                                 If you want to use mouse tracking call setMouseTracking( TRUE ) on
-the viewport; (see TQScrollView).
-
                                                 
                                                Table Items
                                                 
-
                                                 
-
                                                 Headers
-
                                                
-
                                                 TQTable supports a header column, e.g. to display row numbers, and
-a header row, e.g to display column titles. To set row or column
-labels use TQHeader::setLabel() on the pointers returned by
-verticalHeader() and horizontalHeader() respectively. The vertical
-header is displayed within the table's left margin whose width is
-set with setLeftMargin(). The horizontal header is displayed
-within the table's top margin whose height is set with
-setTopMargin(). The table's grid can be switched off with
-setShowGrid(). If you want to hide a horizontal header call
-hide(), and call setTopMargin( 0 ) so that the area the header
-would have occupied is reduced to zero size.
-
                                                 Header labels are indexed via their section numbers. Note that the
-default behavior of TQHeader regarding section numbers is overriden
-for TQTable. See the explanation below in the Rows and Columns
-section in the discussion of moving columns and rows.
-
                                                 
-
                                                 Rows and Columns
-
                                                
-
                                                 Row and column sizes are set with setRowHeight() and
-setColumnWidth(). If you want a row high enough to show the
-tallest item in its entirety, use adjustRow(). Similarly, to make
-a column wide enough to show the widest item use adjustColumn().
-If you want the row height and column width to adjust
-automatically as the height and width of the table changes use
-setRowStretchable() and setColumnStretchable().
-
                                                 Rows and columns can be hidden and shown with hideRow(),
-hideColumn(), showRow() and showColumn(). New rows and columns are
-inserted using insertRows() and insertColumns(). Additional rows
-and columns are added at the  bottom (rows) or right (columns) if
-you set setNumRows() or setNumCols() to be larger than numRows()
-or numCols(). Existing rows and columns are removed with
-removeRow() and removeColumn(). Multiple rows and columns can be
-removed with removeRows() and removeColumns().
-
                                                 Rows and columns can be set to be moveable using
-rowMovingEnabled() and columnMovingEnabled(). The user can drag
-them to reorder them holding down the Ctrl key and dragging the
-mouse. For performance reasons, the default behavior of TQHeader
-section numbers is overridden by TQTable. Currently in TQTable, when
-a row or column is dragged and reordered, the section number is
-also changed to its new position. Therefore, there is no
-difference between the section and the index fields in TQHeader.
-The TQTable TQHeader classes do not provide a mechanism for indexing
-independently of the user interface ordering.
-
                                                 The table can be sorted using sortColumn(). Users can sort a
-column by clicking its header if setSorting() is set to TRUE. Rows
-can be swapped with swapRows(), columns with swapColumns() and
-cells with swapCells().
-
                                                 For editable tables (see setReadOnly()) you can set the read-only
-property of individual rows and columns with setRowReadOnly() and
-setColumnReadOnly(). (Whether a cell is editable or read-only
-depends on these settings and the cell's TQTableItem::EditType.)
-
                                                 The row and column which have the focus are returned by
-currentRow() and currentColumn() respectively.
-
                                                 Although many TQTable functions operate in terms of rows and
-columns the indexOf() function returns a single integer
-identifying a particular cell.
-
                                                 
-
                                                 Cells
-
                                                
-
                                                 All of a TQTable's cells are empty when the table is constructed.
-
                                                 There are two approaches to populating the table's cells. The
-first and simplest approach is to use TQTableItems or TQTableItem
-subclasses. The second approach doesn't use TQTableItems at all
-which is useful for very large sparse tables but requires you to
-reimplement a number of functions. We'll look at each approach in
-turn.
-
                                                 To put a string in a cell use setText(). This function will create
-a new TQTableItem for the cell if one doesn't already exist, and
-displays the text in it. By default the table item's widget will
-be a TQLineEdit. A pixmap may be put in a cell with setPixmap(),
-which also creates a table item if required. A cell may contain both a pixmap and text; the pixmap is displayed to the left of the
-text. Another approach is to construct a TQTableItem or TQTableItem
-subclass, set its properties, then insert it into a cell with
-setItem().
-
                                                 If you want cells which contain comboboxes use the TQComboTableItem
-class. Similarly if you require cells containing checkboxes use
-the TQCheckTableItem class. These table items look and behave just
-like the combobox or checkbox widgets but consume far less memory.
-
                                                 
-
-
                                                        for ( int j = 0; j < numRows; ++j )
-            table.setItem( j, 1, new TQCheckTableItem( &table, "Check me" ) );
-
                                                In the example above we create a column of TQCheckTableItems and
-insert them into the table using setItem().
-
                                                 TQTable takes ownership of its TQTableItems and will delete them
-when the table itself is destroyed. You can take ownership of a
-table item using takeItem() which you use to move a cell's
-contents from one cell to another, either within the same table,
-or from one table to another. (See also, swapCells()).
-
                                                 In-place editing of the text in TQTableItems, and the values in
-TQComboTableItems and TQCheckTableItems works automatically. Cells
-may be editable or read-only, see TQTableItem::EditType. If you
-want fine control over editing see beginEdit() and endEdit().
-
                                                 The contents of a cell can be retrieved as a TQTableItem using
-item(), or as a string with text() or as a pixmap (if there is
-one) with pixmap(). A cell's bounding rectangle is given by
-cellGeometry(). Use updateCell() to repaint a cell, for example to
-clear away a cell's visual representation after it has been
-deleted with clearCell(). The table can be forced to scroll to
-show a particular cell with ensureCellVisible(). The isSelected()
-function indicates if a cell is selected.
-
                                                 It is possible to use your own widget as a cell's widget using
-setCellWidget(), but subclassing TQTableItem might be a simpler
-approach. The cell's widget (if there is one) can be removed with
-clearCellWidget().
-
                                                 
-
                                                 Large tables
-
                                                
-
                                                 For large, sparse, tables using TQTableItems or other widgets is
-inefficient. The solution is to draw the cell as it should
-appear and to create and destroy cell editors on demand.
-
                                                 This approach requires that you reimplement various functions.
-Reimplement paintCell() to display your data, and createEditor()
-and setCellContentFromEditor() to support in-place editing. It
-is very important to reimplement resizeData() to have no
-functionality, to prevent TQTable from attempting to create a huge
-array. You will also need to reimplement item(), setItem(),
-takeItem(), clearCell(), and insertWidget(), cellWidget() and
-clearCellWidget(). In almost every circumstance (for sorting,
-removing and inserting columns and rows, etc.), you also need
-to reimplement swapRows(), swapCells() and swapColumns(), including
-header handling.
-
                                                 If you represent active cells with a dictionary of TQTableItems and
-TQWidgets, i.e. only store references to cells that are actually
-used, many of the functions can be implemented with a single line
-of code. (See the table/bigtable/main.cpp example.)
-
                                                 For more information on cells see the TQTableItem documenation.
-
                                                 
-
                                                 Selections
-
                                                
-
                                                 TQTable's support single selection, multi-selection (multiple
-cells) or no selection. The selection mode is set with
-setSelectionMode(). Use isSelected() to determine if a particular
-cell is selected, and isRowSelected() and isColumnSelected() to
-see if a row or column is selected.
-
                                                 TQTable's support many simultaneous selections. You can
-programmatically select cells with addSelection(). The number of
-selections is given by numSelections(). The current selection is
-returned by currentSelection(). You can remove a selection with
-removeSelection() and remove all selections with
-clearSelection(). Selections are TQTableSelection objects.
-
                                                 To easily add a new selection use selectCells(), selectRow() or
-selectColumn().
-
                                                 Alternatively, use addSelection() to add new selections using
-TQTableSelection objects. The advantage of using TQTableSelection
-objects is that you can call TQTableSelection::expandTo() to resize
-the selection and can query and compare them.
-
                                                 The number of selections is given by numSelections(). The current
-selection is returned by currentSelection(). You can remove a
-selection with removeSelection() and remove all selections with
-clearSelection().
-
                                                 
-
                                                 Signals
-
                                                
-
                                                 When the user clicks a cell the currentChanged() signal is
-emitted. You can also connect to the lower level clicked(),
-doubleClicked() and pressed() signals. If the user changes the
-selection the selectionChanged() signal is emitted; similarly if
-the user changes a cell's value the valueChanged() signal is
-emitted. If the user right-clicks (or presses the appropriate
-platform-specific key sequence) the contextMenuRequested() signal
-is emitted. If the user drops a drag and drop object the dropped()
-signal is emitted with the drop event.
-
                                                See also Advanced Widgets.
-
-
                                                Member Type Documentation
                                                
-
                                                TQTable::EditMode
                                                
-
-
                                                  
-
                                                • TQTable::NotEditing - No cell is currently being edited.
-
                                                • TQTable::Editing - A cell is currently being edited. The editor was
-initialised with the cell's contents.
-
                                                • TQTable::Replacing - A cell is currently being edited. The editor was
-not initialised with the cell's contents.
-
                                                
-
                                                TQTable::FocusStyle
                                                
-
-
                                                 Specifies how the current cell (focus cell) is drawn.
-
                                                  
-
                                                • TQTable::FollowStyle - The current cell is drawn according to the
-current style and the cell's background is also drawn selected, if
-the current cell is within a selection
-
                                                • TQTable::SpreadSheet - The current cell is drawn as in a spreadsheet.
-This means, it is signified by a black rectangle around the cell,
-and the background of the current cell is always drawn with the
-widget's base color - even when selected.
-
                                                 
-
                                                TQTable::SelectionMode
                                                
-
-
                                                  
-
                                                • TQTable::NoSelection - No cell can be selected by the user.
-
                                                • TQTable::Single - The user may only select a single range of cells.
-
                                                • TQTable::Multi - The user may select multiple ranges of cells.
-
                                                • TQTable::SingleRow - The user may select one row at once.
-
                                                • TQTable::MultiRow - The user may select multiple rows.
-
                                                
-
                                                Member Function Documentation
                                                
-
                                                TQTable::TQTable ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                
-Creates an empty table object called name as a child of parent.
-
                                                 Call setNumRows() and setNumCols() to set the table size before
-populating the table if you're using TQTableItems.
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQWidget::clearWFlags() and TQt::WidgetFlags.
-
-
                                                TQTable::TQTable ( int numRows, int numCols, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                
-Constructs an empty table called name with numRows rows and
-numCols columns. The table is a child of parent.
-
                                                 If you're using TQTableItems to populate the table's cells, you
-can create TQTableItem, TQComboTableItem and TQCheckTableItem items
-and insert them into the table using setItem(). (See the notes on large tables for an alternative to using TQTableItems.)
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQWidget::clearWFlags() and TQt::WidgetFlags.
-
-
                                                TQTable::~TQTable ()
-
                                                
-Releases all the resources used by the TQTable object,
-including all TQTableItems and their widgets.
-
-
                                                void TQTable::activateNextCell () [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-This function is called to activate the next cell if in-place
-editing was finished by pressing the Enter key.
-
                                                 The default behaviour is to move from top to bottom, i.e. move to
-the cell beneath the cell being edited. Reimplement this function
-if you want different behaviour, e.g. moving from left to right.
-
-
                                                int TQTable::addSelection ( const TQTableSelection & s ) [virtual]
-
                                                
-Adds a selection described by s to the table and returns its
-number or -1 if the selection is invalid.
-
                                                 Remember to call TQTableSelection::init() and
-TQTableSelection::expandTo() to make the selection valid (see also
-TQTableSelection::isActive(), or use the
-TQTableSelection(int,int,int,int) constructor).
-
                                                 
                                                See also numSelections, removeSelection(), and clearSelection().
-
-
                                                void TQTable::adjustColumn ( int col ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Resizes column col so that the column width is wide enough to
-display the widest item the column contains.
-
                                                 
                                                See also adjustRow().
-
-
                                                Example: regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
-
                                                Reimplemented in TQDataTable.
-
                                                void TQTable::adjustRow ( int row ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Resizes row row so that the row height is tall enough to
-display the tallest item the row contains.
-
                                                 
                                                See also adjustColumn().
-
-
                                                TQWidget * TQTable::beginEdit ( int row, int col, bool replace ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-This function is called to start in-place editing of the cell at
-row, col. Editing is achieved by creating an editor
-(createEditor() is called) and setting the cell's editor with
-setCellWidget() to the newly created editor. (After editing is
-complete endEdit() will be called to replace the cell's content
-with the editor's content.) If replace is TRUE the editor will
-start empty; otherwise it will be initialized with the cell's
-content (if any), i.e. the user will be modifying the original
-cell content.
-
                                                 
                                                See also endEdit().
-
-
                                                TQRect TQTable::cellGeometry ( int row, int col ) const [virtual]
-
                                                
-Returns the bounding rectangle of the cell at row, col in
-content coordinates.
-
-
                                                TQRect TQTable::cellRect ( int row, int col ) const [virtual]
-
                                                
-Returns the geometry of cell row, col in the cell's
-coordinate system. This is a convenience function useful in
-paintCell(). It is equivalent to TQRect( TQPoint(0,0), cellGeometry(
-row, col).size() );
-
                                                 
                                                See also cellGeometry().
-
-
                                                Example: chart/setdataform.cpp.
-
                                                TQWidget * TQTable::cellWidget ( int row, int col ) const [virtual]
-
                                                
-Returns the widget that has been set for the cell at row, col, or 0 if no widget has been set.
-
                                                 If you don't use TQTableItems you may need to reimplement this
-function: see the notes on large tables.
-
                                                 
                                                See also clearCellWidget() and setCellWidget().
-
-
                                                Example: chart/setdataform.cpp.
-
                                                void TQTable::clearCell ( int row, int col ) [virtual]
-
                                                
-Removes the TQTableItem at row, col.
-
                                                 If you don't use TQTableItems you may need to reimplement this
-function: see the notes on large tables.
-
-
                                                void TQTable::clearCellWidget ( int row, int col ) [virtual]
-
                                                
-Removes the widget (if there is one) set for the cell at row,
-col.
-
                                                 If you don't use TQTableItems you may need to reimplement this
-function: see the notes on large tables.
-
                                                 This function deletes the widget at row, col. Note that the
-widget is not deleted immediately; instead TQObject::deleteLater()
-is called on the widget to avoid problems with timing issues.
-
                                                 
                                                See also cellWidget() and setCellWidget().
-
-
                                                void TQTable::clearSelection ( bool repaint = TRUE ) [slot]
-
                                                
-Clears all selections and repaints the appropriate regions if repaint is TRUE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also removeSelection().
-
-
                                                void TQTable::clicked ( int row, int col, int button, const TQPoint & mousePos ) [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted when mouse button button is clicked. The
-cell where the event took place is at row, col, and the
-mouse's position is in mousePos.
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQt::ButtonState.
-
-
                                                Example: chart/setdataform.cpp.
-
                                                int TQTable::columnAt ( int x ) const [virtual]
-
                                                
-Returns the number of the column at position x. x must be
-given in content coordinates.
-
                                                 
                                                See also columnPos() and rowAt().
-
-
                                                void TQTable::columnClicked ( int col ) [virtual protected slot]
-
                                                
-This function is called when the column col has been clicked.
-The default implementation sorts this column if sorting() is TRUE.
-
-
                                                void TQTable::columnIndexChanged ( int section, int fromIndex, int toIndex ) [virtual protected slot]
-
                                                
-This function is called when column order is to be changed, i.e.
-when the user moved the column header section from fromIndex
-to toIndex.
-
                                                 If you want to change the column order programmatically, call
-swapRows() or swapColumns();
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQHeader::indexChange() and rowIndexChanged().
-
-
                                                bool TQTable::columnMovingEnabled () const
-
                                                Returns TRUE if columns can be moved by the user; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "columnMovingEnabled" property for details.
-
                                                int TQTable::columnPos ( int col ) const [virtual]
-
                                                
-Returns the x-coordinate of the column col in content
-coordinates.
-
                                                 
                                                See also columnAt() and rowPos().
-
-
                                                int TQTable::columnWidth ( int col ) const [virtual]
-
                                                
-Returns the width of column col.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setColumnWidth() and rowHeight().
-
-
                                                void TQTable::columnWidthChanged ( int col ) [virtual protected slot]
-
                                                
-This function should be called whenever the column width of col
-has been changed. It updates the geometry of any affected columns
-and repaints the table to reflect the changes it has made.
-
-
                                                void TQTable::contentsDragEnterEvent ( TQDragEnterEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-This event handler is called whenever a TQTable object receives a
-TQDragEnterEvent e, i.e. when the user pressed the mouse
-button to drag something.
-
                                                 The focus is moved to the cell where the TQDragEnterEvent occurred.
-
-
                                                Reimplemented from TQScrollView.
-
                                                void TQTable::contentsDragLeaveEvent ( TQDragLeaveEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-This event handler is called when a drag activity leaves this
-TQTable object with event e.
-
-
                                                Reimplemented from TQScrollView.
-
                                                void TQTable::contentsDragMoveEvent ( TQDragMoveEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-This event handler is called whenever a TQTable object receives a
-TQDragMoveEvent e, i.e. when the user actually drags the
-mouse.
-
                                                 The focus is moved to the cell where the TQDragMoveEvent occurred.
-
-
                                                Reimplemented from TQScrollView.
-
                                                void TQTable::contentsDropEvent ( TQDropEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-This event handler is called when the user ends a drag and drop by
-dropping something onto this TQTable and thus triggers the drop
-event, e.
-
-
                                                Reimplemented from TQScrollView.
-
                                                void TQTable::contextMenuRequested ( int row, int col, const TQPoint & pos ) [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted when the user invokes a context menu with
-the right mouse button (or with a system-specific keypress). The
-cell where the event took place is at row, col. pos is
-the position where the context menu will appear in the global
-coordinate system. This signal is always emitted, even if the
-contents of the cell are disabled.
-
-
                                                TQWidget * TQTable::createEditor ( int row, int col, bool initFromCell ) const [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-This function returns the widget which should be used as an editor
-for the contents of the cell at row, col.
-
                                                 If initFromCell is TRUE, the editor is used to edit the current
-contents of the cell (so the editor widget should be initialized
-with this content). If initFromCell is FALSE, the content of
-the cell is replaced with the new content which the user entered
-into the widget created by this function.
-
                                                 The default functionality is as follows: if initFromCell is
-TRUE or the cell has a TQTableItem and the table item's
-TQTableItem::isReplaceable() is FALSE then the cell is asked to
-create an appropriate editor (using TQTableItem::createEditor()).
-Otherwise a TQLineEdit is used as the editor.
-
                                                 If you want to create your own editor for certain cells, implement
-a custom TQTableItem subclass and reimplement
-TQTableItem::createEditor().
-
                                                 If you are not using TQTableItems and you don't want to use a
-TQLineEdit as the default editor, subclass TQTable and reimplement
-this function with code like this:
-
                                                -    TQTableItem *i = item( row, col );
-    if ( initFromCell || ( i && !i->isReplaceable() ) )
-        // If we had a TQTableItem ask the base class to create the editor
-        return TQTable::createEditor( row, col, initFromCell );
-    else
-        return ...(create your own editor)
-    
                                                
- 
-Ownership of the editor widget is transferred to the caller.
-
                                                 If you reimplement this function return 0 for read-only cells. You
-will need to reimplement setCellContentFromEditor() to retrieve
-the data the user entered.
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQTableItem::createEditor().
-
-
                                                int TQTable::currEditCol () const [protected]
-
                                                
-Returns the current edited column
-
-
                                                int TQTable::currEditRow () const [protected]
-
                                                
-Returns the current edited row
-
-
                                                void TQTable::currentChanged ( int row, int col ) [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted when the current cell has changed to row, col.
-
-
                                                Example: chart/setdataform.cpp.
-
                                                int TQTable::currentColumn () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the current column.
-
                                                 
                                                See also currentRow().
-
-
                                                Example: chart/setdataform.cpp.
-
                                                int TQTable::currentRow () const
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the current row.
-
                                                 
                                                See also currentColumn().
-
-
                                                Example: chart/setdataform.cpp.
-
                                                int TQTable::currentSelection () const [virtual]
-
                                                
-Returns the number of the current selection or -1 if there is no
-current selection.
-
                                                 
                                                See also numSelections.
-
-
                                                void TQTable::doubleClicked ( int row, int col, int button, const TQPoint & mousePos ) [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted when mouse button button is
-double-clicked. The cell where the event took place is at row,
-col, and the mouse's position is in mousePos.
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQt::ButtonState.
-
-
                                                bool TQTable::dragEnabled () const [slot]
-
                                                
-If this function returns TRUE, the table supports dragging.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setDragEnabled().
-
-
                                                TQDragObject * TQTable::dragObject () [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-If the user presses the mouse on a selected cell, starts moving
-(i.e. dragging), and dragEnabled() is TRUE, this function is
-called to obtain a drag object. A drag using this object begins
-immediately unless dragObject() returns 0.
-
                                                 By default this function returns 0. You might reimplement it and
-create a TQDragObject depending on the selected items.
-
                                                 
                                                See also dropped().
-
-
                                                void TQTable::drawContents ( TQPainter * p, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-Draws the table contents on the painter p. This function is
-optimized so that it only draws the cells inside the cw pixels
-wide and ch pixels high clipping rectangle at position cx,
-cy.
-
                                                 Additionally, drawContents() highlights the current cell.
-
-
                                                Reimplemented from TQScrollView.
-
                                                void TQTable::dropped ( TQDropEvent * e ) [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted when a drop event occurred on the table.
-
                                                 e contains information about the drop.
-
-
                                                void TQTable::editCell ( int row, int col, bool replace = FALSE ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Starts editing the cell at row, col.
-
                                                 If replace is TRUE the content of this cell will be replaced by
-the content of the editor when editing is finished, i.e. the user
-will be entering new data; otherwise the current content of the
-cell (if any) will be modified in the editor.
-
                                                 
                                                See also beginEdit().
-
-
                                                EditMode TQTable::editMode () const [protected]
-
                                                
-Returns the current edit mode
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQTable::EditMode.
-
-
                                                void TQTable::endEdit ( int row, int col, bool accept, bool replace ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-This function is called when in-place editing of the cell at row, col is requested to stop.
-
                                                 If the cell is not being edited or accept is FALSE the function
-returns and the cell's contents are left unchanged.
-
                                                 If accept is TRUE the content of the editor must be transferred
-to the relevant cell. If replace is TRUE the current content of
-this cell should be replaced by the content of the editor (this
-means removing the current TQTableItem of the cell and creating a
-new one for the cell). Otherwise (if possible) the content of the
-editor should just be set to the existing TQTableItem of this cell.
-
                                                 setCellContentFromEditor() is called to replace the contents of
-the cell with the contents of the cell's editor.
-
                                                 Finally clearCellWidget() is called to remove the editor widget.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setCellContentFromEditor() and beginEdit().
-
-
                                                void TQTable::ensureCellVisible ( int row, int col )
-
                                                
-Scrolls the table until the cell at row, col becomes
-visible.
-
-
                                                FocusStyle TQTable::focusStyle () const
-
                                                Returns how the current (focus) cell is drawn.
-See the "focusStyle" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTable::hideColumn ( int col ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Hides column col.
-
                                                 
                                                See also showColumn() and hideRow().
-
-
                                                void TQTable::hideRow ( int row ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Hides row row.
-
                                                 
                                                See also showRow() and hideColumn().
-
-
                                                TQHeader * TQTable::horizontalHeader () const
-
                                                
-Returns the table's top TQHeader.
-
                                                 This header contains the column labels.
-
                                                 To modify a column label use TQHeader::setLabel(), e.g.
-
-
-
                                                        horizontalHeader()->setLabel( 0, tr( "File" ) );
-
                                                
-
                                                 
                                                See also verticalHeader(), setTopMargin(), and TQHeader.
-
-
                                                Examples: chart/setdataform.cpp, helpsystem/mainwindow.cpp, regexptester/regexptester.cpp, and table/small-table-demo/main.cpp.
-
                                                int TQTable::indexOf ( int row, int col ) const [protected]
-
                                                
-Returns a single integer which identifies a particular row and col by mapping the 2D table to a 1D array.
-
                                                 This is useful, for example, if you have a sparse table and want to
-use a TQIntDict to map integers to the cells that are used.
-
-
                                                void TQTable::insertColumns ( int col, int count = 1 ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Inserts count empty columns at column col.  Also clears the selection(s).
-
                                                 
                                                See also insertRows() and removeColumn().
-
-
                                                void TQTable::insertRows ( int row, int count = 1 ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Inserts count empty rows at row row. Also clears the selection(s).
-
                                                 
                                                See also insertColumns() and removeRow().
-
-
                                                void TQTable::insertWidget ( int row, int col, TQWidget * w ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-Inserts widget w at row, col into the internal
-data structure. See the documentation of setCellWidget() for
-further details.
-
                                                 If you don't use TQTableItems you may need to reimplement this
-function: see the notes on large tables.
-
-
                                                bool TQTable::isColumnHidden ( int col ) const [slot]
-
                                                
-Returns TRUE if column col is hidden; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also hideColumn() and isRowHidden().
-
-
                                                bool TQTable::isColumnReadOnly ( int col ) const
-
                                                
-Returns TRUE if column col is read-only; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                                 Whether a cell in this column is editable or read-only depends on
-the cell's EditType, and this setting: see TQTableItem::EditType.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setColumnReadOnly() and isRowReadOnly().
-
-
                                                bool TQTable::isColumnSelected ( int col, bool full = FALSE ) const
-
                                                
-Returns TRUE if column col is selected; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                 If full is FALSE (the default), 'column is selected' means that
-at least one cell in the column is selected. If full is TRUE,
-then 'column is selected' means every cell in the column is
-selected.
-
                                                 
                                                See also isRowSelected() and isSelected().
-
-
                                                bool TQTable::isColumnStretchable ( int col ) const [slot]
-
                                                
-Returns TRUE if column col is stretchable; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setColumnStretchable() and isRowStretchable().
-
-
                                                bool TQTable::isEditing () const [protected]
-
                                                
-Returns TRUE if the EditMode is Editing or Replacing;
-otherwise (i.e. the EditMode is NotEditing) returns FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQTable::EditMode.
-
-
                                                bool TQTable::isReadOnly () const
-
                                                Returns TRUE if the table is read-only; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "readOnly" property for details.
-
                                                bool TQTable::isRowHidden ( int row ) const [slot]
-
                                                
-Returns TRUE if row row is hidden; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also hideRow() and isColumnHidden().
-
-
                                                bool TQTable::isRowReadOnly ( int row ) const
-
                                                
-Returns TRUE if row row is read-only; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                 Whether a cell in this row is editable or read-only depends on the
-cell's EditType, and this
-setting: see TQTableItem::EditType.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setRowReadOnly() and isColumnReadOnly().
-
-
                                                bool TQTable::isRowSelected ( int row, bool full = FALSE ) const
-
                                                
-Returns TRUE if row row is selected; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                 If full is FALSE (the default), 'row is selected' means that at
-least one cell in the row is selected. If full is TRUE, then 'row
-is selected' means every cell in the row is selected.
-
                                                 
                                                See also isColumnSelected() and isSelected().
-
-
                                                bool TQTable::isRowStretchable ( int row ) const [slot]
-
                                                
-Returns TRUE if row row is stretchable; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setRowStretchable() and isColumnStretchable().
-
-
                                                bool TQTable::isSelected ( int row, int col ) const
-
                                                
-Returns TRUE if the cell at row, col is selected; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also isRowSelected() and isColumnSelected().
-
-
                                                TQTableItem * TQTable::item ( int row, int col ) const [virtual]
-
                                                
-Returns the TQTableItem representing the contents of the cell at row, col.
-
                                                 If row or col are out of range or no content has been set
-for this cell, item() returns 0.
-
                                                 If you don't use TQTableItems you may need to reimplement this
-function: see the notes on large tables.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setItem().
-
-
                                                Example: regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
-
                                                int TQTable::numCols () const [virtual]
-
                                                Returns the number of columns in the table.
-See the "numCols" property for details.
-
                                                Reimplemented in TQDataTable.
-
                                                int TQTable::numRows () const [virtual]
-
                                                Returns the number of rows in the table.
-See the "numRows" property for details.
-
                                                Reimplemented in TQDataTable.
-
                                                int TQTable::numSelections () const
-
                                                Returns the number of selections.
-See the "numSelections" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTable::paintCell ( TQPainter * p, int row, int col, const TQRect & cr, bool selected, const TQColorGroup & cg ) [virtual]
-
                                                
-Paints the cell at row, col on the painter p. The painter
-has already been translated to the cell's origin. cr describes
-the cell coordinates in the content coordinate system.
-
                                                 If selected is TRUE the cell is highlighted.
-
                                                 cg is the colorgroup which should be used to draw the cell
-content.
-
                                                 If you want to draw custom cell content, for example right-aligned
-text, you must either reimplement paintCell(), or subclass
-TQTableItem and reimplement TQTableItem::paint() to do the custom
-drawing.
-
                                                 If you're using a TQTableItem subclass, for example, to store a
-data structure, then reimplementing TQTableItem::paint() may be the
-best approach. For data you want to draw immediately, e.g. data
-retrieved from a database, it is probably best to reimplement
-paintCell(). Note that if you reimplement paintCell(), i.e. don't
-use TQTableItems, you must reimplement other functions: see the
-notes on large tables.
-
                                                 Note that the painter is not clipped by default in order to get
-maximum efficiency. If you want clipping, use code like this:
-
                                                 
                                                -    p->setClipRect( cellRect(row, col), TQPainter::CoordPainter );
-    //... your drawing code
-    p->setClipping( FALSE );
-    
                                                
- 
-
-
                                                void TQTable::paintCell ( TQPainter * p, int row, int col, const TQRect & cr, bool selected ) [virtual]
-
                                                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                 Use the other paintCell() function. This function is only included
-for backwards compatibilty.
-
-
                                                void TQTable::paintEmptyArea ( TQPainter * p, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-This function fills the cw pixels wide and ch pixels high
-rectangle starting at position cx, cy with the background
-color using the painter p.
-
                                                 paintEmptyArea() is invoked by drawContents() to erase or fill
-unused areas.
-
-
                                                void TQTable::paintFocus ( TQPainter * p, const TQRect & cr ) [virtual]
-
                                                
-Draws the focus rectangle of the current cell (see currentRow(),
-currentColumn()).
-
                                                 The painter p is already translated to the cell's origin, while
-cr specifies the cell's geometry in content coordinates.
-
-
                                                TQPixmap TQTable::pixmap ( int row, int col ) const [virtual]
-
                                                
-Returns the pixmap set for the cell at row, col, or a
-null-pixmap if the cell contains no pixmap.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setPixmap().
-
-
                                                Example: chart/setdataform.cpp.
-
                                                void TQTable::pressed ( int row, int col, int button, const TQPoint & mousePos ) [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted when mouse button button is pressed. The
-cell where the event took place is at row, col, and the
-mouse's position is in mousePos.
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQt::ButtonState.
-
-
                                                void TQTable::removeColumn ( int col ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Removes column col, and deletes all its cells including any
-table items and widgets the cells may contain. Also clears the
-selection(s).
-
                                                 
                                                See also removeColumns(), hideColumn(), insertColumns(), and removeRow().
-
-
                                                void TQTable::removeColumns ( const TQMemArray<int> & cols ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Removes the columns listed in the array cols, and deletes all
-their cells including any table items and widgets the cells may
-contain.
-
                                                 The array passed in must only contain valid columns (in the range
-from 0 to numCols() - 1) with no duplicates, and must be sorted in
-ascending order. Also clears the selection(s).
-
                                                 
                                                See also removeColumn(), insertColumns(), and removeRows().
-
-
                                                void TQTable::removeRow ( int row ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Removes row row, and deletes all its cells including any table
-items and widgets the cells may contain. Also clears the selection(s).
-
                                                 
                                                See also hideRow(), insertRows(), removeColumn(), and removeRows().
-
-
                                                void TQTable::removeRows ( const TQMemArray<int> & rows ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Removes the rows listed in the array rows, and deletes all their
-cells including any table items and widgets the cells may contain.
-
                                                 The array passed in must only contain valid rows (in the range
-from 0 to numRows() - 1) with no duplicates, and must be sorted in
-ascending order. Also clears the selection(s).
-
                                                 
                                                See also removeRow(), insertRows(), and removeColumns().
-
-
                                                void TQTable::removeSelection ( const TQTableSelection & s ) [virtual]
-
                                                
-If the table has a selection, s, this selection is removed from
-the table.
-
                                                 
                                                See also addSelection() and numSelections.
-
-
                                                void TQTable::removeSelection ( int num ) [virtual]
-
                                                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                 Removes selection number num from the table.
-
                                                 
                                                See also numSelections, addSelection(), and clearSelection().
-
-
                                                void TQTable::repaintSelections ()
-
                                                
-Repaints all selections
-
-
                                                void TQTable::resizeData ( int len ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-This is called when TQTable's internal array needs to be resized to
-len elements.
-
                                                 If you don't use TQTableItems you should reimplement this as an
-empty method to avoid wasting memory. See the notes on large tables for further details.
-
-
                                                int TQTable::rowAt ( int y ) const [virtual]
-
                                                
-Returns the number of the row at position y. y must be given
-in content coordinates.
-
                                                 
                                                See also rowPos() and columnAt().
-
-
                                                int TQTable::rowHeight ( int row ) const [virtual]
-
                                                
-Returns the height of row row.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setRowHeight() and columnWidth().
-
-
                                                Example: table/small-table-demo/main.cpp.
-
                                                void TQTable::rowHeightChanged ( int row ) [virtual protected slot]
-
                                                
-This function should be called whenever the row height of row
-has been changed. It updates the geometry of any affected rows and
-repaints the table to reflect the changes it has made.
-
-
                                                void TQTable::rowIndexChanged ( int section, int fromIndex, int toIndex ) [virtual protected slot]
-
                                                
-This function is called when the order of the rows is to be
-changed, i.e. the user moved the row header section section
-from fromIndex to toIndex.
-
                                                 If you want to change the order programmatically, call swapRows()
-or swapColumns();
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQHeader::indexChange() and columnIndexChanged().
-
-
                                                bool TQTable::rowMovingEnabled () const
-
                                                Returns TRUE if rows can be moved by the user; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "rowMovingEnabled" property for details.
-
                                                int TQTable::rowPos ( int row ) const [virtual]
-
                                                
-Returns the y-coordinate of the row row in content coordinates.
-
                                                 
                                                See also rowAt() and columnPos().
-
-
                                                void TQTable::selectCells ( int start_row, int start_col, int end_row, int end_col )
-
                                                 Selects the range starting at start_row and start_col and
-ending at end_row and end_col.
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQTableSelection.
-
-
                                                void TQTable::selectColumn ( int col )
-
                                                 Selects the column col.
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQTableSelection.
-
-
                                                void TQTable::selectRow ( int row )
-
                                                 Selects the row row.
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQTableSelection.
-
-
                                                TQTableSelection TQTable::selection ( int num ) const
-
                                                
-Returns selection number num, or an inactive TQTableSelection if num is out of range (see TQTableSelection::isActive()).
-
-
                                                void TQTable::selectionChanged () [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted whenever a selection changes.
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQTableSelection.
-
-
                                                SelectionMode TQTable::selectionMode () const
-
                                                Returns the current selection mode.
-See the "selectionMode" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTable::setCellContentFromEditor ( int row, int col ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-This function is called to replace the contents of the cell at row, col with the contents of the cell's editor.
-
                                                 If there already exists a TQTableItem for the cell,
-it calls TQTableItem::setContentFromEditor() on this TQTableItem.
-
                                                 If, for example, you want to create different TQTableItems
-depending on the contents of the editor, you might reimplement
-this function.
-
                                                 If you want to work without TQTableItems, you will need to
-reimplement this function to save the data the user entered into
-your data structure. (See the notes on large tables.)
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQTableItem::setContentFromEditor() and createEditor().
-
-
                                                void TQTable::setCellWidget ( int row, int col, TQWidget * e ) [virtual]
-
                                                
-Sets the widget e to the cell at row, col and takes care of
-placing and resizing the widget when the cell geometry changes.
-
                                                 By default widgets are inserted into a vector with numRows() *
-numCols() elements. In very large tables you will probably want to
-store the widgets in a data structure that consumes less memory (see
-the notes on large tables). To support the use of your own data
-structure this function calls insertWidget() to add the widget to
-the internal data structure. To use your own data structure
-reimplement insertWidget(), cellWidget() and clearCellWidget().
-
                                                 Cell widgets are created dynamically with the new operator. The
-cell widgets are destroyed automatically once the table is
-destroyed; the table takes ownership of the widget when using
-setCellWidget.
-
                                                 
-
                                                Example: chart/setdataform.cpp.
-
                                                void TQTable::setColumnLabels ( const TQStringList & labels ) [slot]
-
                                                 Sets the section labels of the horizontalHeader() to labels 
-
                                                void TQTable::setColumnMovingEnabled ( bool b ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                Sets whether columns can be moved by the user to b.
-See the "columnMovingEnabled" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTable::setColumnReadOnly ( int col, bool ro ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-If ro is TRUE, column col is set to be read-only; otherwise
-the column is set to be editable.
-
                                                 Whether a cell in this column is editable or read-only depends on
-the cell's EditType, and this setting:
-see TQTableItem::EditType.
-
                                                 
                                                See also isColumnReadOnly(), setRowReadOnly(), and readOnly.
-
-
                                                 
-
                                                Example: chart/setdataform.cpp.
-
                                                void TQTable::setColumnStretchable ( int col, bool stretch ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-If stretch is TRUE, column col is set to be stretchable;
-otherwise column col is set to be unstretchable.
-
                                                 If the table widget's width decreases or increases stretchable
-columns will grow narrower or wider to fit the space available as
-completely as possible. The user cannot manually resize stretchable
-columns.
-
                                                 
                                                See also isColumnStretchable(), setRowStretchable(), and adjustColumn().
-
-
                                                void TQTable::setColumnWidth ( int col, int w ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Resizes column col to be w pixels wide.
-
                                                 
                                                See also columnWidth() and setRowHeight().
-
-
                                                Example: chart/setdataform.cpp.
-
                                                Reimplemented in TQDataTable.
-
                                                void TQTable::setCurrentCell ( int row, int col ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Moves the focus to the cell at row, col.
-
                                                 
                                                See also currentRow() and currentColumn().
-
-
                                                void TQTable::setDragEnabled ( bool b ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-If b is TRUE, the table starts a drag (see dragObject()) when
-the user presses and moves the mouse on a selected cell.
-
-
                                                void TQTable::setEditMode ( EditMode mode, int row, int col ) [protected]
-
                                                
-Sets the current edit mode to mode, the current edit row to row and the current edit column to col.
-
                                                 
                                                See also EditMode.
-
-
                                                void TQTable::setFocusStyle ( FocusStyle fs ) [virtual]
-
                                                Sets how the current (focus) cell is drawn to fs.
-See the "focusStyle" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTable::setItem ( int row, int col, TQTableItem * item ) [virtual]
-
                                                
-Inserts the table item item into the table at row row,
-column col, and repaints the cell. If a table item already
-exists in this cell it is deleted and replaced with item. The
-table takes ownership of the table item.
-
                                                 If you don't use TQTableItems you may need to reimplement this
-function: see the notes on large tables.
-
                                                 
                                                See also item() and takeItem().
-
-
                                                Examples: helpsystem/mainwindow.cpp and table/small-table-demo/main.cpp.
-
                                                void TQTable::setLeftMargin ( int m ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Sets the left margin to be m pixels wide.
-
                                                 The verticalHeader(), which displays row labels, occupies this
-margin.
-
                                                 In an Arabic or Hebrew localization, the verticalHeader() will
-appear on the right side of the table, and this call will set the
-right margin.
-
                                                 
                                                See also leftMargin(), setTopMargin(), and verticalHeader().
-
-
                                                Example: regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
-
                                                void TQTable::setNumCols ( int r ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                Sets the number of columns in the table to r.
-See the "numCols" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTable::setNumRows ( int r ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                Sets the number of rows in the table to r.
-See the "numRows" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTable::setPixmap ( int row, int col, const TQPixmap & pix ) [virtual]
-
                                                
-Sets the pixmap in the cell at row, col to pix.
-
                                                 If the cell does not contain a table item a TQTableItem is created
-with an EditType of OnTyping,
-otherwise the existing table item's pixmap (if any) is replaced
-with pix.
-
                                                 Note that TQComboTableItems and TQCheckTableItems don't show
-pixmaps.
-
                                                 
                                                See also pixmap(), setText(), setItem(), and TQTableItem::setPixmap().
-
-
                                                Examples: chart/setdataform.cpp and table/small-table-demo/main.cpp.
-
                                                void TQTable::setReadOnly ( bool b ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                Sets whether the table is read-only to b.
-See the "readOnly" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTable::setRowHeight ( int row, int h ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Resizes row row to be h pixels high.
-
                                                 
                                                See also rowHeight() and setColumnWidth().
-
-
                                                void TQTable::setRowLabels ( const TQStringList & labels ) [slot]
-
                                                 Sets the section labels of the verticalHeader() to labels 
-
                                                void TQTable::setRowMovingEnabled ( bool b ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                Sets whether rows can be moved by the user to b.
-See the "rowMovingEnabled" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTable::setRowReadOnly ( int row, bool ro ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-If ro is TRUE, row row is set to be read-only; otherwise the
-row is set to be editable.
-
                                                 Whether a cell in this row is editable or read-only depends on the
-cell's EditType, and this setting:
-see TQTableItem::EditType.
-
                                                 
                                                See also isRowReadOnly(), setColumnReadOnly(), and readOnly.
-
-
                                                void TQTable::setRowStretchable ( int row, bool stretch ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-If stretch is TRUE, row row is set to be stretchable;
-otherwise row row is set to be unstretchable.
-
                                                 If the table widget's height decreases or increases stretchable
-rows will grow shorter or taller to fit the space available as
-completely as possible. The user cannot manually resize
-stretchable rows.
-
                                                 
                                                See also isRowStretchable() and setColumnStretchable().
-
-
                                                void TQTable::setSelectionMode ( SelectionMode mode ) [virtual]
-
                                                Sets the current selection mode to mode.
-See the "selectionMode" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTable::setShowGrid ( bool b ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                Sets whether the table's grid is displayed to b.
-See the "showGrid" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTable::setSorting ( bool b ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                Sets whether a click on the header of a column sorts that column to b.
-See the "sorting" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTable::setText ( int row, int col, const TQString & text ) [virtual]
-
                                                
-Sets the text in the cell at row, col to text.
-
                                                 If the cell does not contain a table item a TQTableItem is created
-with an EditType of OnTyping,
-otherwise the existing table item's text (if any) is replaced with
-text.
-
                                                 
                                                See also text(), setPixmap(), setItem(), and TQTableItem::setText().
-
-
                                                Examples: chart/setdataform.cpp, helpsystem/mainwindow.cpp, regexptester/regexptester.cpp, and table/small-table-demo/main.cpp.
-
                                                void TQTable::setTopMargin ( int m ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Sets the top margin to be m pixels high.
-
                                                 The horizontalHeader(), which displays column labels, occupies
-this margin.
-
                                                 
                                                See also topMargin() and setLeftMargin().
-
-
                                                Example: regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
-
                                                void TQTable::showColumn ( int col ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Shows column col.
-
                                                 
                                                See also hideColumn() and showRow().
-
-
                                                bool TQTable::showGrid () const
-
                                                Returns TRUE if the table's grid is displayed; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "showGrid" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTable::showRow ( int row ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Shows row row.
-
                                                 
                                                See also hideRow() and showColumn().
-
-
                                                void TQTable::sortColumn ( int col, bool ascending = TRUE, bool wholeRows = FALSE ) [virtual]
-
                                                
-Sorts column col. If ascending is TRUE the sort is in
-ascending order, otherwise the sort is in descending order.
-
                                                 If wholeRows is TRUE, entire rows are sorted using swapRows();
-otherwise only cells in the column are sorted using swapCells().
-
                                                 Note that if you are not using TQTableItems you will need to
-reimplement swapRows() and swapCells(). (See the notes on large tables.)
-
                                                 
                                                See also swapRows().
-
-
                                                Example: table/statistics/statistics.cpp.
-
                                                Reimplemented in TQDataTable.
-
                                                bool TQTable::sorting () const
-
                                                Returns TRUE if a click on the header of a column sorts that column; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "sorting" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTable::startDrag () [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-Starts a drag.
-
                                                 Usually you don't need to call or reimplement this function yourself.
-
                                                 
                                                See also dragObject().
-
-
                                                void TQTable::swapCells ( int row1, int col1, int row2, int col2 ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Swaps the contents of the cell at row1, col1 with the
-contents of the cell at row2, col2.
-
                                                 This function is also called when the table is sorted.
-
                                                 If you don't use TQTableItems and want your users to be able to
-swap cells, you will need to reimplement this function. (See the
-notes on large tables.)
-
                                                 
                                                See also swapColumns() and swapRows().
-
-
                                                void TQTable::swapColumns ( int col1, int col2, bool swapHeader = FALSE ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Swaps the data in col1 with col2.
-
                                                 This function is used to swap the positions of two columns. It is
-called when the user changes the order of columns (see
-setColumnMovingEnabled(), and when columns are sorted.
-
                                                 If you don't use TQTableItems and want your users to be able to
-swap columns you will need to reimplement this function. (See the
-notes on large tables.)
-
                                                 If swapHeader is TRUE, the columns' header contents is also
-swapped.
-
                                                 
                                                See also swapCells().
-
-
                                                void TQTable::swapRows ( int row1, int row2, bool swapHeader = FALSE ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Swaps the data in row1 and row2.
-
                                                 This function is used to swap the positions of two rows. It is
-called when the user changes the order of rows (see
-setRowMovingEnabled()), and when rows are sorted.
-
                                                 If you don't use TQTableItems and want your users to be able to
-swap rows, e.g. for sorting, you will need to reimplement this
-function. (See the notes on large tables.)
-
                                                 If swapHeader is TRUE, the rows' header contents is also
-swapped.
-
                                                 This function will not update the TQTable, you will have to do
-this manually, e.g. by calling updateContents().
-
                                                 
                                                See also swapColumns() and swapCells().
-
-
                                                void TQTable::takeItem ( TQTableItem * i ) [virtual]
-
                                                
-Takes the table item i out of the table. This function does not delete the table item. You must either delete the table item
-yourself or put it into a table (using setItem()) which will then
-take ownership of it.
-
                                                 Use this function if you want to move an item from one cell in a
-table to another, or to move an item from one table to another,
-reinserting the item with setItem().
-
                                                 If you want to exchange two cells use swapCells().
-
-
                                                TQString TQTable::text ( int row, int col ) const [virtual]
-
                                                
-Returns the text in the cell at row, col, or TQString::null
-if the relevant item does not exist or has no text.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setText() and setPixmap().
-
-
                                                Example: chart/setdataform.cpp.
-
                                                Reimplemented in TQDataTable.
-
                                                void TQTable::updateCell ( int row, int col )
-
                                                
-Repaints the cell at row, col.
-
-
                                                void TQTable::updateHeaderStates ()
-
                                                
-This functions updates all the header states to be in sync with
-the current selections. This should be called after
-programatically changing, adding or removing selections, so that
-the headers are updated.
-
-
                                                void TQTable::valueChanged ( int row, int col ) [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted when the user changed the value in the cell
-at row, col.
-
-
                                                Example: chart/setdataform.cpp.
-
                                                TQHeader * TQTable::verticalHeader () const
-
                                                
-Returns the table's vertical TQHeader.
-
                                                 This header contains the row labels.
-
                                                 
                                                See also horizontalHeader(), setLeftMargin(), and TQHeader.
-
-
                                                Examples: helpsystem/mainwindow.cpp and regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
-
                                                Property Documentation
                                                
-
                                                bool columnMovingEnabled
                                                
-
                                                This property holds whether columns can be moved by the user.
-
                                                The default is FALSE. Columns are moved by dragging whilst holding
-down the Ctrl key.
-
                                                 Warning: If TQTable is used to move header sections as a result of user
-interaction, the mapping between header indexes and section exposed by
-TQHeader will not reflect the order of the headers in the table; i.e.,
-TQTable does not call TQHeader::moveSection() to move sections but handles
-move operations internally.
-
                                                 
                                                See also rowMovingEnabled.
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setColumnMovingEnabled() and get this property's value with columnMovingEnabled().
-
                                                FocusStyle focusStyle
                                                
-
                                                This property holds how the current (focus) cell is drawn.
-
                                                The default style is SpreadSheet.
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQTable::FocusStyle.
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setFocusStyle() and get this property's value with focusStyle().
-
                                                int numCols
                                                
-
                                                This property holds the number of columns in the table.
-
                                                Set this property's value with setNumCols() and get this property's value with numCols().
-
                                                See also numRows.
-
-
                                                int numRows
                                                
-
                                                This property holds the number of rows in the table.
-
                                                Set this property's value with setNumRows() and get this property's value with numRows().
-
                                                See also numCols.
-
-
                                                int numSelections
                                                
-
                                                This property holds the number of selections.
-
                                                Get this property's value with numSelections().
-
                                                See also currentSelection().
-
-
                                                bool readOnly
                                                
-
                                                This property holds whether the table is read-only.
-
                                                Whether a cell in the table is editable or read-only depends on
-the cell's EditType, and this setting:
-see TQTableItem::EditType.
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQWidget::enabled, setColumnReadOnly(), and setRowReadOnly().
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setReadOnly() and get this property's value with isReadOnly().
-
                                                bool rowMovingEnabled
                                                
-
                                                This property holds whether rows can be moved by the user.
-
                                                The default is FALSE. Rows are moved by dragging whilst holding
-down the Ctrl key.
-
                                                 Warning: If TQTable is used to move header sections as a result of user
-interaction, the mapping between header indexes and section exposed by
-TQHeader will not reflect the order of the headers in the table; i.e.,
-TQTable does not call TQHeader::moveSection() to move sections but handles
-move operations internally.
-
                                                 
                                                See also columnMovingEnabled.
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setRowMovingEnabled() and get this property's value with rowMovingEnabled().
-
                                                SelectionMode selectionMode
                                                
-
                                                This property holds the current selection mode.
-
                                                The default mode is Multi which allows the user to select
-multiple ranges of cells.
-
                                                 
                                                See also SelectionMode and selectionMode.
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setSelectionMode() and get this property's value with selectionMode().
-
                                                bool showGrid
                                                
-
                                                This property holds whether the table's grid is displayed.
-
                                                The grid is shown by default.
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setShowGrid() and get this property's value with showGrid().
-
                                                bool sorting
                                                
-
                                                This property holds whether a click on the header of a column sorts that column.
-
                                                Set this property's value with setSorting() and get this property's value with sorting().
-
                                                See also sortColumn().
-
-
-
                                                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                
-
-
                                                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                TQt 3.3.8
                                                
-
                                                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qtableitem-members.html b/doc/html/qtableitem-members.html
index 233e70255..d7a79f17c 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtableitem-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtableitem-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qtableitem.html b/doc/html/qtableitem.html
index 17764576d..bab321940 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtableitem.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtableitem.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                                The TQTableItem class provides the cell content for TQTable cells.
 More...
-
                                                #include <qtable.h>
-
                                                Inherits TQt.
+
                                                #include <ntqtable.h>
+
                                                Inherits TQt.
 
                                                Inherited by TQComboTableItem and TQCheckTableItem.
 
                                                List of all member functions.
 
                                                Public Members
                                                
@@ -74,19 +74,19 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                                Detailed Description
                                                
 
 
-The TQTableItem class provides the cell content for TQTable cells.
+The TQTableItem class provides the cell content for TQTable cells.
 
 
                                                 
 
 
                                                 For many applications TQTableItems are ideal for presenting and
 editing the contents of TQTable cells. In situations where you need
 to create very large tables you may prefer an alternative approach
-to using TQTableItems: see the notes on large tables.
+to using TQTableItems: see the notes on large tables.
 
                                                 A TQTableItem contains a cell's data, by default, a string and a
 pixmap. The table item also holds the cell's display size and how
 the data should be aligned. The table item specifies the cell's
 EditType and the editor used for in-place editing (by default a
-TQLineEdit). If you want checkboxes use TQCheckTableItem, and if
+TQLineEdit). If you want checkboxes use TQCheckTableItem, and if
 you want comboboxes use TQComboTableItem. The EditType (set
 in the constructor) determines whether the cell's contents may be
 edited.
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ respectively. For text you can use setWordWrap().
 
                                                 When sorting table items the key() function is used; by default
 this returns the table item's text(). Reimplement key() to
 customize how your table items will sort.
-
                                                 Table items are inserted into a table using TQTable::setItem(). If
+
                                                 Table items are inserted into a table using TQTable::setItem(). If
 you insert an item into a cell that already contains a table item
 the original item will be deleted.
 
                                                 Example:
@@ -110,15 +110,15 @@ the original item will be deleted.
     
                                              
  
 
                                               You can move a table item from one cell to another, in the same or
-a different table, using TQTable::takeItem() and TQTable::setItem()
-but see also TQTable::swapCells().
+a different table, using TQTable::takeItem() and TQTable::setItem()
+but see also TQTable::swapCells().
 
                                               Table items can be deleted with delete in the standard way; the
 table and cell will be updated accordingly.
 
                                               Note, that if you have a table item that is not currently in a table
 then anything you do to that item other than insert it into a table
 will result in undefined behaviour.
 
                                               Reimplement createEditor() and setContentFromEditor() if you want
-to use your own widget instead of a TQLineEdit for editing cell
+to use your own widget instead of a TQLineEdit for editing cell
 contents. Reimplement paint() if you want to display custom
 content.
 
                                               It is important to ensure that your custom widget can accept the
@@ -126,20 +126,20 @@ content.
 table as normal. Therefore, if the widget returned by createEditor()
 does not itself accept the keyboard focus, it is necessary to
 nominate a child widget to do so on its behalf. For example, a
-TQHBox with two child TQLineEdit widgets may use one of them to
+TQHBox with two child TQLineEdit widgets may use one of them to
 accept the keyboard focus:
 
                                               
                                                   TQWidget* MyTableItem::createEditor() const
     {
-        TQHBox* hbox = new TQHBox( table()->viewport() );
-        hbox->setFocusProxy(new TQLineEdit( hbox ));
-        new TQLineEdit( hbox );
+        TQHBox* hbox = new TQHBox( table()->viewport() );
+        hbox->setFocusProxy(new TQLineEdit( hbox ));
+        new TQLineEdit( hbox );
         return hbox;
     }
     
                                              
  
 
                                               By default, table items may be replaced by new TQTableItems
-during the lifetime of a TQTable. Therefore, if you create your
+during the lifetime of a TQTable. Therefore, if you create your
 own subclass of TQTableItem, and you want to ensure that
 this does not happen, you must call setReplaceable(FALSE)
 in the constructor of your subclass.
@@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ should be displayed.
 
                                            • TQTableItem::Always - 
 The cell always looks editable.
 
                                             Using this EditType ensures that the editor created with
-createEditor() (by default a TQLineEdit) is always visible. This
+createEditor() (by default a TQLineEdit) is always visible. This
 has implications for the alignment of the content: the default
 editor aligns everything (even numbers) to the left whilst
 numerical values in the cell are by default aligned to the right.
@@ -167,19 +167,19 @@ reimplement createEditor() for these items.
 
                                             The OnTyping edit type is the default when TQTableItem objects
-are created by the convenience functions TQTable::setText() and
-TQTable::setPixmap().
+are created by the convenience functions TQTable::setText() and
+TQTable::setPixmap().
 
                                              
 
                                            • TQTableItem::Never - The cell is not editable.
-
                                             The cell is actually editable only if TQTable::isRowReadOnly() is
-FALSE for its row, TQTable::isColumnReadOnly() is FALSE for its
-column, and TQTable::isReadOnly() is FALSE.
+
                                           The cell is actually editable only if TQTable::isRowReadOnly() is
+FALSE for its row, TQTable::isColumnReadOnly() is FALSE for its
+column, and TQTable::isReadOnly() is FALSE.
 
                                           TQComboTableItems have an isEditable() property. This property is
 used to indicate whether the user may enter their own text or are
 restricted to choosing one of the choices in the list.
@@ -187,34 +187,34 @@ TQComboTableItems may be interacted with only if they are editable
 in accordance with their EditType as described above.
 
                                           
 
                                          Member Function Documentation
                                          
-
                                          TQTableItem::TQTableItem ( TQTable * table, EditType et )
+
                                          TQTableItem::TQTableItem ( TQTable * table, EditType et )
 
                                          
 Creates a table item that is a child of table table with no
 text. The item has the EditType et.
-
                                           The table item will use a TQLineEdit for its editor, will not
+
                                           The table item will use a TQLineEdit for its editor, will not
 word-wrap and will occupy a single cell. Insert the table item
-into a table with TQTable::setItem().
+into a table with TQTable::setItem().
 
                                           The table takes ownership of the table item, so a table item
 should not be inserted into more than one table at a time.
 
-
                                          TQTableItem::TQTableItem ( TQTable * table, EditType et, const TQString & text )
+
                                          TQTableItem::TQTableItem ( TQTable * table, EditType et, const TQString & text )
 
                                          
 Creates a table item that is a child of table table with text
 text. The item has the EditType et.
-
                                           The table item will use a TQLineEdit for its editor, will not
+
                                           The table item will use a TQLineEdit for its editor, will not
 word-wrap and will occupy a single cell. Insert the table item
-into a table with TQTable::setItem().
+into a table with TQTable::setItem().
 
                                           The table takes ownership of the table item, so a table item
 should not be inserted into more than one table at a time.
 
-
                                          TQTableItem::TQTableItem ( TQTable * table, EditType et, const TQString & text, const TQPixmap & p )
+
                                          TQTableItem::TQTableItem ( TQTable * table, EditType et, const TQString & text, const TQPixmap & p )
 
                                          
 Creates a table item that is a child of table table with text
 text and pixmap p. The item has the EditType et.
 
                                           The table item will display the pixmap to the left of the text. It
-will use a TQLineEdit for editing the text, will not word-wrap and
+will use a TQLineEdit for editing the text, will not word-wrap and
 will occupy a single cell. Insert the table item into a table with
-TQTable::setItem().
+TQTable::setItem().
 
                                           The table takes ownership of the table item, so a table item
 should not be inserted in more than one table at a time.
 
@@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ occupied.
 The alignment function returns how the text contents of the cell
 are aligned when drawn. The default implementation aligns numbers
 to the right and any other text to the left.
-
                                           
                                          See also TQt::AlignmentFlags.
+
                                           
                                          See also TQt::AlignmentFlags.
 
 
                                          int TQTableItem::col () const
 
                                          
@@ -246,14 +246,14 @@ column.
 Returns the column span of the table item, usually 1.
 
                                           
                                          See also setSpan() and rowSpan().
 
-
                                          TQWidget * TQTableItem::createEditor () const [virtual]
+
                                          TQWidget * TQTableItem::createEditor () const [virtual]
 
                                          
 This virtual function creates an editor which the user can
 interact with to edit the cell's contents. The default
-implementation creates a TQLineEdit.
+implementation creates a TQLineEdit.
 
                                           If the function returns 0, the cell is read-only.
 
                                           The returned widget should preferably be invisible, ideally with
-TQTable::viewport() as parent.
+TQTable::viewport() as parent.
 
                                           If you reimplement this function you'll almost certainly need to
 reimplement setContentFromEditor(), and may need to reimplement
 sizeHint().
@@ -262,15 +262,15 @@ reimplement setContentFromEditor(), and may
 
                                              TQWidget *ComboItem::createEditor() const
     {
         // create an editor - a combobox in our case
-        ( (ComboItem*)this )->cb = new TQComboBox( table()->viewport() );
-        TQObject::connect( cb, SIGNAL( activated( int ) ), table(), SLOT( doValueChanged() ) );
+        ( (ComboItem*)this )->cb = new TQComboBox( table()->viewport() );
+        TQObject::connect( cb, SIGNAL( activated( int ) ), table(), SLOT( doValueChanged() ) );
         cb->insertItem( "Yes" );
         cb->insertItem( "No" );
         // and initialize it
         cb->setCurrentItem( text() == "No" ? 1 : 0 );
         return cb;
 
                                          
-
                                           
                                          See also TQTable::createEditor(), setContentFromEditor(), TQTable::viewport(), and setReplaceable().
+
                                           
                                          See also TQTable::createEditor(), setContentFromEditor(), TQTable::viewport(), and setReplaceable().
 
 
                                          Example: table/statistics/statistics.cpp.
 
                                          EditType TQTableItem::editType () const
@@ -294,14 +294,14 @@ have their contents replaced by another table item.
 whether the user is able to change the contents of a cell.)
 
                                           
                                          See also setReplaceable() and EditType.
 
-
                                          TQString TQTableItem::key () const [virtual]
+
                                          TQString TQTableItem::key () const [virtual]
 
                                          
 This virtual function returns the key that should be used for
 sorting. The default implementation returns the text() of the
 relevant item.
-
                                           
                                          See also TQTable::sorting.
+
                                           
                                          See also TQTable::sorting.
 
-
                                          void TQTableItem::paint ( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg, const TQRect & cr, bool selected ) [virtual]
+
                                          void TQTableItem::paint ( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg, const TQRect & cr, bool selected ) [virtual]
 
                                          
 This virtual function is used to paint the contents of an item
 using the painter p in the rectangular area cr using the
@@ -322,7 +322,7 @@ maximum efficiency. If you want clipping, use
  
 
                                           
 
                                          Example: table/statistics/statistics.cpp.
-
                                          TQPixmap TQTableItem::pixmap () const [virtual]
+
                                          TQPixmap TQTableItem::pixmap () const [virtual]
 
                                          
 Returns the table item's pixmap or a null pixmap if no pixmap has
 been set.
@@ -360,25 +360,25 @@ left-most column and retains the width of the multi-cell table
 item.
 
                                           
                                          See also col(), setRow(), and colSpan().
 
-
                                          void TQTableItem::setContentFromEditor ( TQWidget * w ) [virtual]
+
                                          void TQTableItem::setContentFromEditor ( TQWidget * w ) [virtual]
 
                                          
 Whenever the content of a cell has been edited by the editor w,
-TQTable calls this virtual function to copy the new values into the
+TQTable calls this virtual function to copy the new values into the
 TQTableItem.
 
                                           If you reimplement createEditor() and return something that is not
-a TQLineEdit you will need to reimplement this function.
+a TQLineEdit you will need to reimplement this function.
 
                                           
 
-
                                              void ComboItem::setContentFromEditor( TQWidget *w )
+
                                              void ComboItem::setContentFromEditor( TQWidget *w )
     {
         // the user changed the value of the combobox, so synchronize the
         // value of the item (its text), with the value of the combobox
-        if ( w->inherits( "TQComboBox" ) )
+        if ( w->inherits( "TQComboBox" ) )
             setText( ( (TQComboBox*)w )->currentText() );
         else
             TQTableItem::setContentFromEditor( w );
 
                                          
-
                                           
                                          See also TQTable::setCellContentFromEditor().
+
                                           
                                          See also TQTable::setCellContentFromEditor().
 
 
                                          Example: table/statistics/statistics.cpp.
 
                                          void TQTableItem::setEnabled ( bool b ) [virtual]
@@ -388,15 +388,15 @@ table item is disabled.
 
                                           A disabled item doesn't respond to user interaction.
 
                                           
                                          See also isEnabled().
 
-
                                          void TQTableItem::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & p ) [virtual]
+
                                          void TQTableItem::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & p ) [virtual]
 
                                          
 Sets pixmap p to be this item's pixmap.
 
                                           Note that setPixmap() does not update the cell the table item
-belongs to. Use TQTable::updateCell() to repaint the cell's
+belongs to. Use TQTable::updateCell() to repaint the cell's
 contents.
 
                                           For TQComboTableItems and TQCheckTableItems this function
 has no visible effect.
-
                                           
                                          See also TQTable::setPixmap(), pixmap(), and setText().
+
                                           
                                          See also TQTable::setPixmap(), pixmap(), and setText().
 
 
                                          void TQTableItem::setReplaceable ( bool b ) [virtual]
 
                                          
@@ -423,7 +423,7 @@ Changes the extent of the TQTableItem so that it spans multiple
 cells covering rs rows and cs columns. The top left cell is
 the original cell.
 
                                           Warning: This function only works if the item has already been
-inserted into the table using e.g. TQTable::setItem(). This
+inserted into the table using e.g. TQTable::setItem(). This
 function also checks to make sure if rs and cs are within
 the bounds of the table and returns without changing the span if
 they are not. In addition swapping, inserting or removing rows and
@@ -431,13 +431,13 @@ columns that cross TQTableItems spanning more than one cell is not
 supported.
 
                                           
                                          See also rowSpan() and colSpan().
 
-
                                          void TQTableItem::setText ( const TQString & str ) [virtual]
+
                                          void TQTableItem::setText ( const TQString & str ) [virtual]
 
                                          
 Changes the table item's text to str.
 
                                           Note that setText() does not update the cell the table item
-belongs to. Use TQTable::updateCell() to repaint the cell's
+belongs to. Use TQTable::updateCell() to repaint the cell's
 contents.
-
                                           
                                          See also TQTable::setText(), text(), setPixmap(), and TQTable::updateCell().
+
                                           
                                          See also TQTable::setText(), text(), setPixmap(), and TQTable::updateCell().
 
 
                                          Example: table/statistics/statistics.cpp.
 
                                          void TQTableItem::setWordWrap ( bool b ) [virtual]
@@ -445,31 +445,31 @@ contents.
 If b is TRUE, the cell's text will be wrapped over multiple
 lines, when necessary, to fit the width of the cell; otherwise the
 text will be written as a single line.
-
                                           
                                          See also wordWrap(), TQTable::adjustColumn(), and TQTable::setColumnStretchable().
+
                                           
                                          See also wordWrap(), TQTable::adjustColumn(), and TQTable::setColumnStretchable().
 
-
                                          TQSize TQTableItem::sizeHint () const [virtual]
+
                                          TQSize TQTableItem::sizeHint () const [virtual]
 
                                          
 This virtual function returns the size a cell needs to show its
 entire content.
 
                                           If you subclass TQTableItem you will often need to reimplement this
 function.
 
-
                                          TQTable * TQTableItem::table () const
+
                                          TQTable * TQTableItem::table () const
 
                                          
 
-
                                           Returns the TQTable the table item belongs to.
-
                                           
                                          See also TQTable::setItem() and TQTableItem().
+
                                           Returns the TQTable the table item belongs to.
+
                                           
                                          See also TQTable::setItem() and TQTableItem().
 
-
                                          TQString TQTableItem::text () const [virtual]
+
                                          TQString TQTableItem::text () const [virtual]
 
                                          
-Returns the text of the table item or TQString::null if there is no
+Returns the text of the table item or TQString::null if there is no
 text.
 
                                           To ensure that the current value of the editor is returned,
 setContentFromEditor() is called:
 
                                            
 
                                          1.  if the editMode() is Always, or
 
                                          2.  if editMode() is not Always but the editor of the cell is
-active and the editor is not a TQLineEdit.
+active and the editor is not a TQLineEdit.
 
                                          
 
                                           This means that text() returns the original text value of the item
 if the editor is a line edit, until the user commits an edit (e.g.
diff --git a/doc/html/qtableselection-members.html b/doc/html/qtableselection-members.html
index de4816b5c..d30b7ca68 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtableselection-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtableselection-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qtableselection.html b/doc/html/qtableselection.html
index d6a92fe80..613f4c522 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtableselection.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtableselection.html
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                          The TQTableSelection class provides access to a selected area in a
 TQTable.
 More...
-
                                          #include <qtable.h>
+
                                          #include <ntqtable.h>
 
                                          List of all member functions.
 
                                          Public Members
                                          
 
                                            
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ TQTable.
 
 
 The TQTableSelection class provides access to a selected area in a
-TQTable.
+TQTable.
 
 
                                             
 
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ cells.
 rectangle's four edges. All four are part of the selection.
 
                                             A newly created TQTableSelection is inactive -- isActive() returns
 FALSE. You must use init() and expandTo() to activate it.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQTable, TQTable::addSelection(), TQTable::selection(), TQTable::selectCells(), TQTable::selectRow(), TQTable::selectColumn(), and Advanced Widgets.
+
                                             
                                            See also TQTable, TQTable::addSelection(), TQTable::selection(), TQTable::selectCells(), TQTable::selectRow(), TQTable::selectColumn(), and Advanced Widgets.
 
 
                                            Member Function Documentation
                                            
 
                                            TQTableSelection::TQTableSelection ()
diff --git a/doc/html/qtabletevent-members.html b/doc/html/qtabletevent-members.html
index 3ef4b4ef9..80a2ef574 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtabletevent-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtabletevent-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -45,8 +45,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                          • isAccepted()
 
                                          • pos()
 
                                          • pressure()
-
                                          • spontaneous()
-
                                          • type()
+
                                          • spontaneous()
+
                                          • type()
 
                                          • uniqueId()
 
                                          • x()
 
                                          • xTilt()
diff --git a/doc/html/qtabletevent.html b/doc/html/qtabletevent.html
index 2eff7b1ba..4c58e0904 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtabletevent.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtabletevent.html
@@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                            The TQTabletEvent class contains parameters that describe a Tablet
 event.
 More...
-
                                            #include <qevent.h>
-
                                            Inherits TQEvent.
+
                                            #include <ntqevent.h>
+
                                            Inherits TQEvent.
 
                                            List of all member functions.
 
                                            Public Members
                                            
 
                                              
@@ -76,9 +76,9 @@ type of device being used with device() (see TQTabletEvent::accept() if you handle the tablet event; otherwise
 it will be sent to the parent widget.
-
                                               The TQWidget::setEnabled() function can be used to enable or
+
                                               The TQWidget::setEnabled() function can be used to enable or
 disable mouse and keyboard events for a widget.
-
                                               The event handler TQWidget::tabletEvent() receives all three types of tablet
+
                                               The event handler TQWidget::tabletEvent() receives all three types of tablet
 events.  TQt will first send a tabletEvent and then, if it is not accepted,
 it will send a mouse event.  This allows applications that don't utilize
 tablets to use a tablet like a mouse while also enabling those who want to
@@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ a transparent circle with cross-hairs).
 
                                            • TQTabletEvent::Eraser - An Eraser (the broad end of the pen).
 
                                            
 
                                            Member Function Documentation
                                            
-
                                            TQTabletEvent::TQTabletEvent ( Type t, const TQPoint & pos, const TQPoint & globalPos, int device, int pressure, int xTilt, int yTilt, const TQPair<int, int> & uId )
+
                                            TQTabletEvent::TQTabletEvent ( Type t, const TQPoint & pos, const TQPoint & globalPos, int device, int pressure, int xTilt, int yTilt, const TQPair<int, int> & uId )
 
                                            
 
 Construct a tablet event of type t.  The position of when the event occurred is given
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ event id.
 tablet device driver, instead of from the windowing system.
 
                                             
                                            See also pos(), globalPos(), device(), pressure(), xTilt(), and yTilt().
 
-
                                            TQTabletEvent::TQTabletEvent ( const TQPoint & pos, const TQPoint & globalPos, int device, int pressure, int xTilt, int yTilt, const TQPair<int, int> & uId )
+
                                            TQTabletEvent::TQTabletEvent ( const TQPoint & pos, const TQPoint & globalPos, int device, int pressure, int xTilt, int yTilt, const TQPair<int, int> & uId )
 
                                            
 This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 
                                             
@@ -140,13 +140,13 @@ parent widget.
 want one end of the pen to do something different than the other.
 
                                             
                                            See also TabletDevice.
 
-
                                            const TQPoint & TQTabletEvent::globalPos () const
+
                                            const TQPoint & TQTabletEvent::globalPos () const
 
                                            
 
 
                                             Returns the global position of the device at the time of the event. This is important on asynchronous windows systems like X11;
 whenever you move your widgets around in response to mouse events,
 globalPos() can differ significantly from the current position
-TQCursor::pos().
+TQCursor::pos().
 
                                             
                                            See also globalX() and globalY().
 
 
                                            int TQTabletEvent::globalX () const
@@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ parent widget.
 
                                             Returns TRUE if the receiver of the event handles the tablet
 event; otherwise returns FALSE.
 
-
                                            const TQPoint & TQTabletEvent::pos () const
+
                                            const TQPoint & TQTabletEvent::pos () const
 
                                            
 
 
                                             Returns the position of the device, relative to the widget that
@@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ a value from 0 (no pressure) to 255 (maximum pressure). The
 pressure is always scaled to be within this range no matter how
 many pressure levels the underlying hardware supports.
 
-
                                            TQPair<int, int> TQTabletEvent::uniqueId ()
+
                                            TQPair<int, int> TQTabletEvent::uniqueId ()
 
                                            
 
 
                                             Returns a unique ID for the current device. It is possible to
diff --git a/doc/html/qtabwidget-h.html b/doc/html/qtabwidget-h.html
index c2a0988f3..dfe756c64 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtabwidget-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtabwidget-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qtabwidget.h Include File
+ntqtabwidget.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                            
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                            TQTabWidget Class Reference
                                            
-
-
                                            The TQTabWidget class provides a stack of tabbed widgets.
-More...
-
                                            #include <qtabwidget.h>
-
                                            Inherits TQWidget.
-
                                            List of all member functions.
-
                                            Public Members
                                            
-
                                              
-
                                            • TQTabWidget ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual void addTab ( TQWidget * child, const TQString & label )
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual void addTab ( TQWidget * child, const TQIconSet & iconset, const TQString & label )
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual void addTab ( TQWidget * child, TQTab * tab )
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual void insertTab ( TQWidget * child, const TQString & label, int index = -1 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual void insertTab ( TQWidget * child, const TQIconSet & iconset, const TQString & label, int index = -1 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual void insertTab ( TQWidget * child, TQTab * tab, int index = -1 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void changeTab ( TQWidget * w, const TQString & label )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void changeTab ( TQWidget * w, const TQIconSet & iconset, const TQString & label )
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool isTabEnabled ( TQWidget * w ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setTabEnabled ( TQWidget * w, bool enable )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setCornerWidget ( TQWidget * w, TQt::Corner corner = TQt::TopRight )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQWidget * cornerWidget ( TQt::Corner corner = TQt::TopRight ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQString tabLabel ( TQWidget * w ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setTabLabel ( TQWidget * w, const TQString & l )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQIconSet tabIconSet ( TQWidget * w ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setTabIconSet ( TQWidget * w, const TQIconSet & iconset )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void removeTabToolTip ( TQWidget * w )
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setTabToolTip ( TQWidget * w, const TQString & tip )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQString tabToolTip ( TQWidget * w ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQWidget * currentPage () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQWidget * page ( int index ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQString label ( int index ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • int currentPageIndex () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • int indexOf ( TQWidget * w ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • enum TabPosition { Top, Bottom }
                                              • 
-
                                            • TabPosition tabPosition () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setTabPosition ( TabPosition )
                                              • 
-
                                            • enum TabShape { Rounded, Triangular }
                                              • 
-
                                            • TabShape tabShape () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setTabShape ( TabShape s )
                                              • 
-
                                            • int margin () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • void setMargin ( int )
                                              • 
-
                                            • int count () const
                                              • 
-
                                            
-
                                            Public Slots
                                            
-
-
                                            Signals
                                            
-
-
                                            Properties
                                            
-
                                              
-
                                            • bool autoMask - whether the tab widget is automatically masked  (read only)
                                              • 
-
                                            • int count - the number of tabs in the tab bar  (read only)
                                              • 
-
                                            • int currentPage - the index position of the current tab page
                                              • 
-
                                            • int margin - the margin in this tab widget
                                              • 
-
                                            • TabPosition tabPosition - the position of the tabs in this tab widget
                                              • 
-
                                            • TabShape tabShape - the shape of the tabs in this tab widget
                                              • 
-
                                            
-
                                            Protected Members
                                            
-
-
                                            Detailed Description
                                            
-
-
-The TQTabWidget class provides a stack of tabbed widgets.
-
                                             
-
-
-
                                             A tab widget provides a tab bar of tabs and a `page area' below
-(or above, see TabPosition) the tabs. Each tab is associated
-with a different widget (called a `page'). Only the current tab's
-page is shown in the page area; all the other tabs' pages are
-hidden. The user can show a different page by clicking on its tab
-or by pressing its Alt+letter accelerator if it has one.
-
                                             The normal way to use TQTabWidget is to do the following in the
-constructor:
-
                                              
-
                                            1.  Create a TQTabWidget.
-
                                            2.  Create a TQWidget for each of the pages in the tab dialog,
-insert children into it, set up geometry management for it and use
-addTab() (or insertTab()) to set up a tab and keyboard accelerator
-for it.
-
                                            3.  Connect to the signals and slots.
-
                                            
-
                                             The position of the tabs is set with setTabPosition(), their shape
-with setTabShape(), and their margin with setMargin().
-
                                             If you don't call addTab() and the TQTabWidget is already visible,
-then the page you have created will not be visible. Don't
-confuse the object name you supply to the TQWidget constructor and
-the tab label you supply to addTab(). addTab() takes a name which
-indicates an accelerator and is meaningful and descriptive to the
-user, whereas the widget name is used primarily for debugging.
-
                                             The signal currentChanged() is emitted when the user selects a
-page.
-
                                             The current page is available as an index position with
-currentPageIndex() or as a wiget pointer with currentPage(). You
-can retrieve a pointer to a page with a given index using page(),
-and can find the index position of a page with indexOf(). Use
-setCurrentPage() to show a particular page by index, or showPage()
-to show a page by widget pointer.
-
                                             You can change a tab's label and iconset using changeTab() or
-setTabLabel() and setTabIconSet(). A tab page can be removed with
-removePage().
-
                                             Each tab is either enabled or disabled at any given time (see
-setTabEnabled()). If a tab is enabled, the tab text is drawn
-normally and the user can select that tab. If it is disabled, the
-tab is drawn in a different way and the user cannot select that
-tab. Note that even if a tab is disabled, the page can still be
-visible, for example if all of the tabs happen to be disabled.
-
                                             Although tab widgets can be a very good way to split up a complex
-dialog, it's also very easy to get into a mess. See TQTabDialog for
-some design hints. An alternative is to use a TQWidgetStack for
-which you provide some means of navigating between pages, for
-example, a TQToolBar or a TQListBox.
-
                                             Most of the functionality in TQTabWidget is provided by a TQTabBar
-(at the top, providing the tabs) and a TQWidgetStack (most of the
-area, organizing the individual pages).
-
                                              
-
                                             
                                            See also TQTabDialog, TQToolBox, Advanced Widgets, and Organizers.
-
-
                                            Member Type Documentation
                                            
-
                                            TQTabWidget::TabPosition
                                            
-
-
                                             This enum type defines where TQTabWidget draws the tab row:
-
                                              
-
                                            • TQTabWidget::Top - above the pages
-
                                            • TQTabWidget::Bottom - below the pages
-
                                            
-
                                            TQTabWidget::TabShape
                                            
-
-
                                             This enum type defines the shape of the tabs:
-
                                              
-
                                            • TQTabWidget::Rounded - rounded look (normal)
-
                                            • TQTabWidget::Triangular - triangular look (very unusual, included for completeness)
-
                                            
-
                                            Member Function Documentation
                                            
-
                                            TQTabWidget::TQTabWidget ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
-
                                            
-Constructs a tabbed widget called name with parent parent,
-and widget flags f.
-
-
                                            void TQTabWidget::addTab ( TQWidget * child, const TQString & label ) [virtual]
-
                                            
-Adds another tab and page to the tab view.
-
                                             The new page is child; the tab's label is label. Note the
-difference between the widget name (which you supply to widget
-constructors and to setTabEnabled(), for example) and the tab
-label. The name is internal to the program and invariant, whereas
-the label is shown on-screen and may vary according to language
-and other factors.
-
                                             If the tab's label contains an ampersand, the letter following
-the ampersand is used as an accelerator for the tab, e.g. if the
-label is "Bro&wse" then Alt+W becomes an accelerator which will
-move the focus to this tab.
-
                                             If you call addTab() after show() the screen will flicker and the
-user may be confused.
-
                                             Adding the same child twice will have undefined behavior.
-
                                             
                                            See also insertTab().
-
-
                                            Examples: addressbook/centralwidget.cpp and themes/themes.cpp.
-
                                            void TQTabWidget::addTab ( TQWidget * child, const TQIconSet & iconset, const TQString & label ) [virtual]
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Adds another tab and page to the tab view.
-
                                             This function is the same as addTab(), but with an additional iconset.
-
-
                                            void TQTabWidget::addTab ( TQWidget * child, TQTab * tab ) [virtual]
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             This is a low-level function for adding tabs. It is useful if you
-are using setTabBar() to set a TQTabBar subclass with an overridden
-TQTabBar::paint() function for a subclass of TQTab. The child is
-the new page and tab is the tab to put the child on.
-
-
                                            void TQTabWidget::changeTab ( TQWidget * w, const TQString & label )
-
                                            
-Defines a new label for page w's tab.
-
-
                                            void TQTabWidget::changeTab ( TQWidget * w, const TQIconSet & iconset, const TQString & label )
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Defines a new iconset and a new label for page w's tab.
-
-
                                            TQWidget * TQTabWidget::cornerWidget ( TQt::Corner corner = TQt::TopRight ) const
-
                                            
-Returns the widget shown in the corner of the tab widget or 0.
-
-
                                            int TQTabWidget::count () const
-
                                            Returns the number of tabs in the tab bar.
-See the "count" property for details.
-
                                            void TQTabWidget::currentChanged ( TQWidget * ) [signal]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             This signal is emitted whenever the current page changes. The
-parameter is the new current page.
-
                                             
                                            See also currentPage(), showPage(), and tabLabel().
-
-
                                            TQWidget * TQTabWidget::currentPage () const
-
                                            
-Returns a pointer to the page currently being displayed by the tab
-dialog. The tab dialog does its best to make sure that this value
-is never 0 (but if you try hard enough, it can be).
-
-
                                            int TQTabWidget::currentPageIndex () const
-
                                            Returns the index position of the current tab page.
-See the "currentPage" property for details.
-
                                            int TQTabWidget::indexOf ( TQWidget * w ) const
-
                                            
-Returns the index position of page w, or -1 if the widget
-cannot be found.
-
-
                                            void TQTabWidget::insertTab ( TQWidget * child, const TQString & label, int index = -1 ) [virtual]
-
                                            
-Inserts another tab and page to the tab view.
-
                                             The new page is child; the tab's label is label. Note the
-difference between the widget name (which you supply to widget
-constructors and to setTabEnabled(), for example) and the tab
-label. The name is internal to the program and invariant, whereas
-the label is shown on-screen and may vary according to language
-and other factors.
-
                                             If the tab's label contains an ampersand, the letter following
-the ampersand is used as an accelerator for the tab, e.g. if the
-label is "Bro&wse" then Alt+W becomes an accelerator which will
-move the focus to this tab.
-
                                             If index is not specified, the tab is simply appended.
-Otherwise it is inserted at the specified position.
-
                                             If you call insertTab() after show(), the screen will flicker and
-the user may be confused.
-
                                             
                                            See also addTab().
-
-
                                            void TQTabWidget::insertTab ( TQWidget * child, const TQIconSet & iconset, const TQString & label, int index = -1 ) [virtual]
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             Inserts another tab and page to the tab view.
-
                                             This function is the same as insertTab(), but with an additional
-iconset.
-
-
                                            void TQTabWidget::insertTab ( TQWidget * child, TQTab * tab, int index = -1 ) [virtual]
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             This is a lower-level method for inserting tabs, similar to the
-other insertTab() method. It is useful if you are using
-setTabBar() to set a TQTabBar subclass with an overridden
-TQTabBar::paint() function for a subclass of TQTab. The child is
-the new page, tab is the tab to put the child on and index is the position in the tab bar that this page should occupy.
-
-
                                            bool TQTabWidget::isTabEnabled ( TQWidget * w ) const
-
                                            
-Returns TRUE if the page w is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                             
                                            See also setTabEnabled() and TQWidget::enabled.
-
-
                                            TQString TQTabWidget::label ( int index ) const
-
                                            
-Returns the label of the tab at index position index or
-TQString::null if the index is out of range.
-
-
                                            int TQTabWidget::margin () const
-
                                            Returns the margin in this tab widget.
-See the "margin" property for details.
-
                                            TQWidget * TQTabWidget::page ( int index ) const
-
                                            
-Returns the tab page at index position index or 0 if the index is out of range.
-
-
                                            void TQTabWidget::removePage ( TQWidget * w ) [virtual slot]
-
                                            
-Removes page w from this stack of widgets. Does not delete w.
-
                                             
                                            See also addTab(), showPage(), and TQWidgetStack::removeWidget().
-
-
                                            void TQTabWidget::removeTabToolTip ( TQWidget * w )
-
                                            
-Removes the tab tool tip for page w. If the page does not have
-a tip, nothing happens.
-
                                             
                                            See also setTabToolTip() and tabToolTip().
-
-
                                            void TQTabWidget::setCornerWidget ( TQWidget * w, TQt::Corner corner = TQt::TopRight )
-
                                            
-Sets widget w to be the shown in the specified corner of the
-tab widget.
-
                                             Only the horizontal element of the corner will be used.
-
                                             
                                            See also cornerWidget() and tabPosition.
-
-
                                            void TQTabWidget::setCurrentPage ( int ) [slot]
-
                                            Sets the index position of the current tab page.
-See the "currentPage" property for details.
-
                                            void TQTabWidget::setMargin ( int )
-
                                            Sets the margin in this tab widget.
-See the "margin" property for details.
-
                                            void TQTabWidget::setTabBar ( TQTabBar * tb ) [protected]
-
                                            
-Replaces the dialog's TQTabBar heading with the tab bar tb. Note
-that this must be called before any tabs have been added, or
-the behavior is undefined.
-
                                             
                                            See also tabBar().
-
-
                                            void TQTabWidget::setTabEnabled ( TQWidget * w, bool enable )
-
                                            
-If enable is TRUE, page w is enabled; otherwise page w is
-disabled. The page's tab is redrawn appropriately.
-
                                             TQTabWidget uses TQWidget::setEnabled() internally, rather than
-keeping a separate flag.
-
                                             Note that even a disabled tab/page may be visible. If the page is
-visible already, TQTabWidget will not hide it; if all the pages are
-disabled, TQTabWidget will show one of them.
-
                                             
                                            See also isTabEnabled() and TQWidget::enabled.
-
-
                                            void TQTabWidget::setTabIconSet ( TQWidget * w, const TQIconSet & iconset )
-
                                            
-Sets the iconset for page w to iconset.
-
-
                                            void TQTabWidget::setTabLabel ( TQWidget * w, const TQString & l )
-
                                            
-Sets the tab label for page w to l
-
-
                                            void TQTabWidget::setTabPosition ( TabPosition )
-
                                            Sets the position of the tabs in this tab widget.
-See the "tabPosition" property for details.
-
                                            void TQTabWidget::setTabShape ( TabShape s )
-
                                            Sets the shape of the tabs in this tab widget to s.
-See the "tabShape" property for details.
-
                                            void TQTabWidget::setTabToolTip ( TQWidget * w, const TQString & tip )
-
                                            
-Sets the tab tool tip for page w to tip.
-
                                             
                                            See also removeTabToolTip() and tabToolTip().
-
-
                                            void TQTabWidget::showPage ( TQWidget * w ) [virtual slot]
-
                                            
-Ensures that page w is shown. This is useful mainly for
-accelerators.
-
                                             Warning: Used carelessly, this function can easily surprise or
-confuse the user.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQTabBar::currentTab.
-
-
                                            TQTabBar * TQTabWidget::tabBar () const [protected]
-
                                            
-Returns the current TQTabBar.
-
                                             
                                            See also setTabBar().
-
-
                                            TQIconSet TQTabWidget::tabIconSet ( TQWidget * w ) const
-
                                            
-Returns the iconset of page w or a null iconset if w is not a tab page or does not have an
-iconset.
-
-
                                            TQString TQTabWidget::tabLabel ( TQWidget * w ) const
-
                                            
-Returns the label text for the tab on page w.
-
-
                                            TabPosition TQTabWidget::tabPosition () const
-
                                            Returns the position of the tabs in this tab widget.
-See the "tabPosition" property for details.
-
                                            TabShape TQTabWidget::tabShape () const
-
                                            Returns the shape of the tabs in this tab widget.
-See the "tabShape" property for details.
-
                                            TQString TQTabWidget::tabToolTip ( TQWidget * w ) const
-
                                            
-Returns the tab tool tip for page w or TQString::null if no tool
-tip has been set.
-
                                             
                                            See also setTabToolTip() and removeTabToolTip().
-
-
                                            Property Documentation
                                            
-
                                            bool autoMask
                                            
-
                                            This property holds whether the tab widget is automatically masked.
-
                                            See also TQWidget::autoMask.
-
-
                                            int count
                                            
-
                                            This property holds the number of tabs in the tab bar.
-
                                            
-
                                            Get this property's value with count().
-
                                            int currentPage
                                            
-
                                            This property holds the index position of the current tab page.
-
                                            Set this property's value with setCurrentPage() and get this property's value with currentPageIndex().
-
                                            See also TQTabBar::currentTab.
-
-
                                            int margin
                                            
-
                                            This property holds the margin in this tab widget.
-
                                            The margin is the distance between the innermost pixel of the
-frame and the outermost pixel of the pages.
-
-
                                            Set this property's value with setMargin() and get this property's value with margin().
-
                                            TabPosition tabPosition
                                            
-
                                            This property holds the position of the tabs in this tab widget.
-
                                            Possible values for this property are TQTabWidget::Top and TQTabWidget::Bottom.
-
                                             
                                            See also TabPosition.
-
-
                                            Set this property's value with setTabPosition() and get this property's value with tabPosition().
-
                                            TabShape tabShape
                                            
-
                                            This property holds the shape of the tabs in this tab widget.
-
                                            Possible values for this property are TQTabWidget::Rounded
-(default) or TQTabWidget::Triangular.
-
                                             
                                            See also TabShape.
-
-
                                            Set this property's value with setTabShape() and get this property's value with tabShape().
-
-
                                            
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                            
-
-
                                            Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                            TQt 3.3.8
                                            
-
                                            
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qtextbrowser-h.html b/doc/html/qtextbrowser-h.html
index acc5c9983..fca1cdf20 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtextbrowser-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtextbrowser-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qtextbrowser.h Include File
+ntqtextbrowser.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                            
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                            TQTextBrowser Class Reference
                                            
-
-
                                            The TQTextBrowser class provides a rich text browser with hypertext navigation.
-More...
-
                                            #include <qtextbrowser.h>
-
                                            Inherits TQTextEdit.
-
                                            List of all member functions.
-
                                            Public Members
                                            
-
                                              
-
                                            • TQTextBrowser ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQString source () const
                                              • 
-
                                            
-
                                            Public Slots
                                            
-
-
                                            Signals
                                            
-
-
                                            Properties
                                            
-
                                              
-
                                            • bool modified - whether the contents have been modified  (read only)
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool overwriteMode - this text browser's overwrite mode  (read only)
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool readOnly - whether the contents are read only  (read only)
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQString source - the name of the displayed document
                                              • 
-
                                            • int undoDepth - this text browser's undo depth  (read only)
                                              • 
-
                                            • bool undoRedoEnabled - whether undo and redo are enabled  (read only)
                                              • 
-
                                            
-
                                            Protected Members
                                            
-
-
                                            Detailed Description
                                            
-
-
-The TQTextBrowser class provides a rich text browser with hypertext navigation.
-
                                             
-
-
-
-
                                             This class extends TQTextEdit (in read-only mode), adding some
-navigation functionality so that users can follow links in
-hypertext documents. The contents of TQTextEdit is set with
-setText(), but TQTextBrowser has an additional function,
-setSource(), which makes it possible to set the text to a named
-document. The name is looked up in the text view's mime source
-factory. If a document name ends with an anchor (for example, "#anchor"), the text browser automatically scrolls to that position
-(using scrollToAnchor()). When the user clicks on a hyperlink, the
-browser will call setSource() itself, with the link's href
-value as argument. You can track the current source by connetion
-to the sourceChanged() signal.
-
                                             TQTextBrowser provides backward() and forward() slots which you can
-use to implement Back and Forward buttons. The home() slot sets
-the text to the very first document displayed. The linkClicked()
-signal is emitted when the user clicks a link.
-
                                             By using TQTextEdit::setMimeSourceFactory() you can provide your
-own subclass of TQMimeSourceFactory. This makes it possible to
-access data from anywhere, for example from a network or from a
-database. See TQMimeSourceFactory::data() for details.
-
                                             If you intend using the mime factory to read the data directly
-from the file system, you may have to specify the encoding for the
-file extension you are using. For example:
-
                                            -    mimeSourceFactory()->setExtensionType("qml", "text/utf8");
-    
                                            
- 
-This is to ensure that the factory is able to resolve the document
-names.
-
                                             TQTextBrowser interprets the tags it processes in accordance with
-the default style sheet. Change the style sheet with
-setStyleSheet(); see TQStyleSheet for details.
-
                                             If you want to provide your users with editable rich text use
-TQTextEdit. If you want a text browser without hypertext navigation
-use TQTextEdit, and use TQTextEdit::setReadOnly() to disable
-editing. If you just need to display a small piece of rich text
-use TQSimpleRichText or TQLabel.
-
                                              
-
                                            See also Advanced Widgets, Help System, and Text Related Classes.
-
-
                                            Member Function Documentation
                                            
-
                                            TQTextBrowser::TQTextBrowser ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                            
-Constructs an empty TQTextBrowser called name, with parent parent.
-
-
                                            void TQTextBrowser::anchorClicked ( const TQString & name, const TQString & link ) [signal]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             This signal is emitted when the user clicks an anchor. The link is
-the value of the href i.e. the name of the target document.  The name
-is the name of the anchor.
-
                                             
                                            See also linkClicked().
-
-
                                            void TQTextBrowser::backward () [virtual slot]
-
                                            
-Changes the document displayed to the previous document in the
-list of documents built by navigating links. Does nothing if there
-is no previous document.
-
                                             
                                            See also forward() and backwardAvailable().
-
-
                                            Example: helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp.
-
                                            void TQTextBrowser::backwardAvailable ( bool available ) [signal]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             This signal is emitted when the availability of backward()
-changes. available is FALSE when the user is at home();
-otherwise it is TRUE.
-
-
                                            Example: helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp.
-
                                            void TQTextBrowser::forward () [virtual slot]
-
                                            
-Changes the document displayed to the next document in the list of
-documents built by navigating links. Does nothing if there is no
-next document.
-
                                             
                                            See also backward() and forwardAvailable().
-
-
                                            Example: helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp.
-
                                            void TQTextBrowser::forwardAvailable ( bool available ) [signal]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             This signal is emitted when the availability of forward() changes.
-available is TRUE after the user navigates backward() and FALSE
-when the user navigates or goes forward().
-
-
                                            Example: helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp.
-
                                            void TQTextBrowser::highlighted ( const TQString & link ) [signal]
-
                                              
-
                                             This signal is emitted when the user has selected but not
-activated a link in the document. link is the value of the href i.e. the name of the target document.
-
-
                                            Example: helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp.
-
                                            void TQTextBrowser::home () [virtual slot]
-
                                            
-Changes the document displayed to be the first document the
-browser displayed.
-
-
                                            Example: helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp.
-
                                            void TQTextBrowser::keyPressEvent ( TQKeyEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                                            
-The event e is used to provide the following keyboard shortcuts:
-
                                            
-
                                             Keypress	    Action
-
                                             Alt+Left Arrow  backward()
-
                                             Alt+Right Arrow forward()
-
                                             Alt+Up Arrow    home()
-
                                            
-
-
                                            Reimplemented from TQTextEdit.
-
                                            void TQTextBrowser::linkClicked ( const TQString & link ) [signal]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             This signal is emitted when the user clicks a link. The link is
-the value of the href i.e. the name of the target document.
-
                                             The link will be the absolute location of the document, based
-on the value of the anchor's href tag and the current context of
-the document.
-
                                             
                                            See also anchorClicked() and context().
-
-
                                            void TQTextBrowser::reload () [virtual slot]
-
                                            
-Reloads the current set source.
-
-
                                            void TQTextBrowser::setSource ( const TQString & name ) [virtual slot]
-
                                            Sets the name of the displayed document to name.
-See the "source" property for details.
-
                                            TQString TQTextBrowser::source () const
-
                                            Returns the name of the displayed document.
-See the "source" property for details.
-
                                            void TQTextBrowser::sourceChanged ( const TQString & src ) [signal]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             This signal is emitted when the mime source has changed, src
-being the new source.
-
                                             Source changes happen both programmatically when calling
-setSource(), forward(), backword() or home() or when the user
-clicks on links or presses the equivalent key sequences.
-
-
                                            Example: helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp.
-
                                            Property Documentation
                                            
-
                                            bool modified
                                            
-
                                            This property holds whether the contents have been modified.
-
                                            
-
                                            bool overwriteMode
                                            
-
                                            This property holds this text browser's overwrite mode.
-
                                            
-
                                            bool readOnly
                                            
-
                                            This property holds whether the contents are read only.
-
                                            
-
                                            TQString source
                                            
-
                                            This property holds the name of the displayed document.
-
                                            This is a TQString::null if no document is displayed or if the
-source is unknown.
-
                                             Setting this property uses the mimeSourceFactory() to lookup the
-named document. It also checks for optional anchors and scrolls
-the document accordingly.
-
                                             If the first tag in the document is <qt type=detail>, the
-document is displayed as a popup rather than as new document in
-the browser window itself. Otherwise, the document is displayed
-normally in the text browser with the text set to the contents of
-the named document with setText().
-
                                             If you are using the filesystem access capabilities of the mime
-source factory, you must ensure that the factory knows about the
-encoding of specified files; otherwise no data will be available.
-The default factory handles a couple of common file extensions
-such as *.html and *.txt with reasonable defaults. See
-TQMimeSourceFactory::data() for details.
-
-
                                            Set this property's value with setSource() and get this property's value with source().
-
                                            int undoDepth
                                            
-
                                            This property holds this text browser's undo depth.
-
                                            
-
                                            bool undoRedoEnabled
                                            
-
                                            This property holds whether undo and redo are enabled.
-
                                            
-
                                            
-
                                            
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                            
-
-
                                            Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                            TQt 3.3.8
                                            
-
                                            
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qtextcodec-h.html b/doc/html/qtextcodec-h.html
index e1b47a096..9f3afed79 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtextcodec-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtextcodec-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qtextcodec.h Include File
+ntqtextcodec.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                            
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                            TQTextCodec Class Reference
                                            
-
-
                                            The TQTextCodec class provides conversion between text encodings.
-More...
-
                                            Almost all the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support. The exceptions are ~TQTextCodec(), setCodecForTr(), setCodecForCStrings(), and TQTextCodec().
-
                                            #include <qtextcodec.h>
-
                                            Inherited by TQBig5Codec, TQBig5hkscsCodec, TQEucJpCodec, TQEucKrCodec, TQGb18030Codec, TQJisCodec, TQHebrewCodec, TQSjisCodec, and TQTsciiCodec.
-
                                            List of all member functions.
-
                                            Public Members
                                            
-
                                              
-
                                            • virtual ~TQTextCodec ()
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual const char * name () const = 0
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual const char * mimeName () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual int mibEnum () const = 0
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual TQTextDecoder * makeDecoder () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual TQTextEncoder * makeEncoder () const
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual TQString toUnicode ( const char * chars, int len ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual TQCString fromUnicode ( const TQString & uc, int & lenInOut ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQCString fromUnicode ( const TQString & uc ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQString toUnicode ( const TQByteArray & a, int len ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQString toUnicode ( const TQByteArray & a ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQString toUnicode ( const TQCString & a, int len ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQString toUnicode ( const TQCString & a ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • TQString toUnicode ( const char * chars ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual bool canEncode ( TQChar ch ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual bool canEncode ( const TQString & s ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual int heuristicContentMatch ( const char * chars, int len ) const = 0
                                              • 
-
                                            • virtual int heuristicNameMatch ( const char * hint ) const
                                              • 
-
                                            
-
                                            Static Public Members
                                            
-
-
                                            Protected Members
                                            
-
-
                                            Static Protected Members
                                            
-
-
                                            Detailed Description
                                            
-
-
-The TQTextCodec class provides conversion between text encodings.
-
-
-
                                             TQt uses Unicode to store, draw and manipulate strings. In many
-situations you may wish to deal with data that uses a different
-encoding. For example, most Japanese documents are still stored in
-Shift-JIS or ISO2022, while Russian users often have their
-documents in KOI8-R or CP1251.
-
                                             TQt provides a set of TQTextCodec classes to help with converting
-non-Unicode formats to and from Unicode. You can also create your
-own codec classes (see later).
-
                                             The supported encodings are:
-
                                              
-
                                            •  Latin1
-
                                            •  Big5 -- Chinese
-
                                            •  Big5-HKSCS -- Chinese
-
                                            •  eucJP -- Japanese
-
                                            •  eucKR -- Korean
-
                                            •  GB2312 -- Chinese
-
                                            •  GBK -- Chinese
-
                                            •  GB18030 -- Chinese
-
                                            •  JIS7 -- Japanese
-
                                            •  Shift-JIS -- Japanese
-
                                            •  TSCII -- Tamil
-
                                            •  utf8 -- Unicode, 8-bit
-
                                            •  utf16 -- Unicode
-
                                            •  KOI8-R -- Russian
-
                                            •  KOI8-U -- Ukrainian
-
                                            •  ISO8859-1 -- Western
-
                                            •  ISO8859-2 -- Central European
-
                                            •  ISO8859-3 -- Central European
-
                                            •  ISO8859-4 -- Baltic
-
                                            •  ISO8859-5 -- Cyrillic
-
                                            •  ISO8859-6 -- Arabic
-
                                            •  ISO8859-7 -- Greek
-
                                            •  ISO8859-8 -- Hebrew, visually ordered
-
                                            •  ISO8859-8-i -- Hebrew, logically ordered
-
                                            •  ISO8859-9 -- Turkish
-
                                            •  ISO8859-10
-
                                            •  ISO8859-13
-
                                            •  ISO8859-14
-
                                            •  ISO8859-15 -- Western
-
                                            •  IBM 850
-
                                            •  IBM 866
-
                                            •  CP874
-
                                            •  CP1250 -- Central European
-
                                            •  CP1251 -- Cyrillic
-
                                            •  CP1252 -- Western
-
                                            •  CP1253 -- Greek
-
                                            •  CP1254 -- Turkish
-
                                            •  CP1255 -- Hebrew
-
                                            •  CP1256 -- Arabic
-
                                            •  CP1257 -- Baltic
-
                                            •  CP1258
-
                                            •  Apple Roman
-
                                            •  TIS-620 -- Thai
-
                                            
-
                                             TQTextCodecs can be used as follows to convert some locally encoded
-string to Unicode. Suppose you have some string encoded in Russian
-KOI8-R encoding, and want to convert it to Unicode. The simple way
-to do this is:
-
                                             
                                            -    TQCString locallyEncoded = "..."; // text to convert
-    TQTextCodec *codec = TQTextCodec::codecForName("KOI8-R"); // get the codec for KOI8-R
-    TQString unicodeString = codec->toUnicode( locallyEncoded );
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             After this, unicodeString holds the text converted to Unicode.
-Converting a string from Unicode to the local encoding is just as
-easy:
-
                                             
                                            -    TQString unicodeString = "..."; // any Unicode text
-    TQTextCodec *codec = TQTextCodec::codecForName("KOI8-R"); // get the codec for KOI8-R
-    TQCString locallyEncoded = codec->fromUnicode( unicodeString );
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             Some care must be taken when trying to convert the data in chunks,
-for example, when receiving it over a network. In such cases it is
-possible that a multi-byte character will be split over two
-chunks. At best this might result in the loss of a character and
-at worst cause the entire conversion to fail.
-
                                             The approach to use in these situations is to create a TQTextDecoder
-object for the codec and use this TQTextDecoder for the whole
-decoding process, as shown below:
-
                                             
                                            -    TQTextCodec *codec = TQTextCodec::codecForName( "Shift-JIS" );
-    TQTextDecoder *decoder = codec->makeDecoder();
-
-    TQString unicodeString;
-    while( receiving_data ) {
-        TQByteArray chunk = new_data;
-        unicodeString += decoder->toUnicode( chunk.data(), chunk.length() );
-    }
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             The TQTextDecoder object maintains state between chunks and therefore
-works correctly even if a multi-byte character is split between
-chunks.
-
                                             
-
                                             Creating your own Codec class
-
                                            
-
                                             Support for new text encodings can be added to TQt by creating
-TQTextCodec subclasses.
-
                                             Built-in codecs can be overridden by custom codecs since more
-recently created TQTextCodec objects take precedence over earlier
-ones.
-
                                             You may find it more convenient to make your codec class available
-as a plugin; see the plugin
-    documentation for more details.
-
                                             The abstract virtual functions describe the encoder to the
-system and the coder is used as required in the different
-text file formats supported by TQTextStream, and under X11, for the
-locale-specific character input and output.
-
                                             To add support for another 8-bit encoding to TQt, make a subclass
-of TQTextCodec and implement at least the following methods:
-
                                             
                                            -    const char* name() const
-    
                                            
- 
-Return the official name for the encoding.
-
                                             
                                            -    int mibEnum() const
-    
                                            
- 
-Return the MIB enum for the encoding if it is listed in the
-IANA character-sets encoding file.
-
                                             If the encoding is multi-byte then it will have "state"; that is,
-the interpretation of some bytes will be dependent on some preceding
-bytes. For such encodings, you must implement:
-
                                             
                                            -    TQTextDecoder* makeDecoder() const
-    
                                            
- 
-Return a TQTextDecoder that remembers incomplete multi-byte sequence
-prefixes or other required state.
-
                                             If the encoding does not require state, you should implement:
-
                                             
                                            -    TQString toUnicode(const char* chars, int len) const
-    
                                            
- 
-Converts len characters from chars to Unicode.
-
                                             The base TQTextCodec class has default implementations of the above
-two functions, but they are mutually recursive, so you must
-re-implement at least one of them, or both for improved efficiency.
-
                                             For conversion from Unicode to 8-bit encodings, it is rarely necessary
-to maintain state. However, two functions similar to the two above
-are used for encoding:
-
                                             
                                            -    TQTextEncoder* makeEncoder() const
-    
                                            
- 
-Return a TQTextEncoder.
-
                                             
                                            -    TQCString fromUnicode(const TQString& uc, int& lenInOut ) const
-    
                                            
- 
-Converts lenInOut characters (of type TQChar) from the start of
-the string uc, returning a TQCString result, and also returning
-the length of the result in
-lenInOut.
-
                                             Again, these are mutually recursive so only one needs to be implemented,
-or both if greater efficiency is possible.
-
                                             Finally, you must implement:
-
                                             
                                            -    int heuristicContentMatch(const char* chars, int len) const
-    
                                            
- 
-Gives a value indicating how likely it is that len characters
-from chars are in the encoding.
-
                                             A good model for this function is the
-TQWindowsLocalCodec::heuristicContentMatch function found in the TQt
-sources.
-
                                             A TQTextCodec subclass might have improved performance if you also
-re-implement:
-
                                             
                                            -    bool canEncode( TQChar ) const
-    
                                            
- 
-Test if a Unicode character can be encoded.
-
                                             
                                            -    bool canEncode( const TQString& ) const
-    
                                            
- 
-Test if a string of Unicode characters can be encoded.
-
                                             
                                            -    int heuristicNameMatch(const char* hint) const
-    
                                            
- 
-Test if a possibly non-standard name is referring to the codec.
-
                                             Codecs can also be created as plugins.
-
                                            See also Internationalization with TQt.
-
-
                                            Member Function Documentation
                                            
-
                                            TQTextCodec::TQTextCodec () [protected]
-
                                            Warning: This function is not reentrant.
                                            
-
-
-
                                             Constructs a TQTextCodec, and gives it the highest precedence. The
-TQTextCodec should always be constructed on the heap (i.e. with new). TQt takes ownership and will delete it when the application
-terminates.
-
-
                                            TQTextCodec::~TQTextCodec () [virtual]
-
                                            Warning: This function is not reentrant.
                                            
-
-
-
                                             Destroys the TQTextCodec. Note that you should not delete codecs
-yourself: once created they become TQt's responsibility.
-
-
                                            bool TQTextCodec::canEncode ( TQChar ch ) const [virtual]
-
                                            
-Returns TRUE if the Unicode character ch can be fully encoded
-with this codec; otherwise returns FALSE. The default
-implementation tests if the result of toUnicode(fromUnicode(ch))
-is the original ch. Subclasses may be able to improve the
-efficiency.
-
-
                                            bool TQTextCodec::canEncode ( const TQString & s ) const [virtual]
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             s contains the string being tested for encode-ability.
-
-
                                            TQTextCodec * TQTextCodec::codecForCStrings () [static]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the codec used by TQString to convert to and from const
-char* and TQCStrings. If this function returns 0 (the default),
-TQString assumes Latin-1.
-
                                             
                                            See also setCodecForCStrings().
-
-
                                            TQTextCodec * TQTextCodec::codecForContent ( const char * chars, int len ) [static]
-
                                            
-Searches all installed TQTextCodec objects, returning the one which
-most recognizes the given content. May return 0.
-
                                             Note that this is often a poor choice, since character encodings
-often use most of the available character sequences, and so only
-by linguistic analysis could a true match be made.
-
                                             chars contains the string to check, and len contains the
-number of characters in the string to use.
-
                                             
                                            See also heuristicContentMatch().
-
-
                                            Example: qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
-
                                            TQTextCodec * TQTextCodec::codecForIndex ( int i ) [static]
-
                                            
-Returns the TQTextCodec i positions from the most recently
-inserted codec, or 0 if there is no such TQTextCodec. Thus,
-codecForIndex(0) returns the most recently created TQTextCodec.
-
-
                                            Example: qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
-
                                            TQTextCodec * TQTextCodec::codecForLocale () [static]
-
                                             Returns a pointer to the codec most suitable for this locale. 
-
                                            Example: qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
-
                                            TQTextCodec * TQTextCodec::codecForMib ( int mib ) [static]
-
                                            
-Returns the TQTextCodec which matches the MIBenum mib.
-
-
                                            TQTextCodec * TQTextCodec::codecForName ( const char * name, int accuracy = 0 ) [static]
-
                                            
-Searches all installed TQTextCodec objects and returns the one
-which best matches name; the match is case-insensitive. Returns
-0 if no codec's heuristicNameMatch() reports a match better than
-accuracy, or if name is a null string.
-
                                             
                                            See also heuristicNameMatch().
-
-
                                            TQTextCodec * TQTextCodec::codecForTr () [static]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the codec used by TQObject::tr() on its argument. If this
-function returns 0 (the default), tr() assumes Latin-1.
-
                                             
                                            See also setCodecForTr().
-
-
                                            void TQTextCodec::deleteAllCodecs () [static]
-
                                            
-Deletes all the created codecs.
-
                                             Warning: Do not call this function.
-
                                             TQApplication calls this function just before exiting to delete
-any TQTextCodec objects that may be lying around. Since various
-other classes hold pointers to TQTextCodec objects, it is not safe
-to call this function earlier.
-
                                             If you are using the utility classes (like TQString) but not using
-TQApplication, calling this function at the very end of your
-application may be helpful for chasing down memory leaks by
-eliminating any TQTextCodec objects.
-
-
                                            TQCString TQTextCodec::fromUnicode ( const TQString & uc, int & lenInOut ) const [virtual]
-
                                            
-TQTextCodec subclasses must reimplement either this function or
-makeEncoder(). It converts the first lenInOut characters of uc from Unicode to the encoding of the subclass. If lenInOut is
-negative or too large, the length of uc is used instead.
-
                                             Converts lenInOut characters (not bytes) from uc, producing
-a TQCString. lenInOut will be set to the length of the result (in bytes).
-
                                             The default implementation makes an encoder with makeEncoder() and
-converts the input with that. Note that the default makeEncoder()
-implementation makes an encoder that simply calls this function,
-hence subclasses must reimplement one function or the other to
-avoid infinite recursion.
-
-
                                            Reimplemented in TQHebrewCodec.
-
                                            TQCString TQTextCodec::fromUnicode ( const TQString & uc ) const
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             uc is the unicode source string.
-
-
                                            int TQTextCodec::heuristicContentMatch ( const char * chars, int len ) const [pure virtual]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             TQTextCodec subclasses must reimplement this function. It examines
-the first len bytes of chars and returns a value indicating
-how likely it is that the string is a prefix of text encoded in
-the encoding of the subclass. A negative return value indicates
-that the text is detectably not in the encoding (e.g. it contains
-characters undefined in the encoding). A return value of 0
-indicates that the text should be decoded with this codec rather
-than as ASCII, but there is no particular evidence. The value
-should range up to len. Thus, most decoders will return -1, 0,
-or -len.
-
                                             The characters are not null terminated.
-
                                             
                                            See also codecForContent().
-
-
                                            int TQTextCodec::heuristicNameMatch ( const char * hint ) const [virtual]
-
                                            
-Returns a value indicating how likely it is that this decoder is
-appropriate for decoding some format that has the given name. The
-name is compared with the hint.
-
                                             A good match returns a positive number around the length of the
-string. A bad match is negative.
-
                                             The default implementation calls simpleHeuristicNameMatch() with
-the name of the codec.
-
-
                                            TQTextCodec * TQTextCodec::loadCharmap ( TQIODevice * iod ) [static]
-
                                            
-Reads a POSIX2 charmap definition from iod.
-The parser recognizes the following lines:
-
                                             
-  <code_set_name> name
                                            
-  <escape_char> character
                                            
-  % alias alias
                                            
-  CHARMAP
                                            
-  <token> /xhexbyte <Uunicode> ...
                                            
-  <token> /ddecbyte <Uunicode> ...
                                            
-  <token> /octbyte <Uunicode> ...
                                            
-  <token> /any/any... <Uunicode> ...
                                            
-  END CHARMAP
                                            
-                                            
-
                                             The resulting TQTextCodec is returned (and also added to the global
-list of codecs). The name() of the result is taken from the
-code_set_name.
-
                                             Note that a codec constructed in this way uses much more memory
-and is slower than a hand-written TQTextCodec subclass, since
-tables in code are kept in memory shared by all TQt applications.
-
                                             
                                            See also loadCharmapFile().
-
-
                                            Example: qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
-
                                            TQTextCodec * TQTextCodec::loadCharmapFile ( TQString filename ) [static]
-
                                            
-A convenience function for loadCharmap() that loads the charmap
-definition from the file filename.
-
-
                                            const char * TQTextCodec::locale () [static]
-
                                            
-Returns a string representing the current language and
-sublanguage, e.g. "pt" for Portuguese, or "pt_br" for Portuguese/Brazil.
-
-
                                            Example: i18n/main.cpp.
-
                                            TQTextDecoder * TQTextCodec::makeDecoder () const [virtual]
-
                                            
-Creates a TQTextDecoder which stores enough state to decode chunks
-of char* data to create chunks of Unicode data. The default
-implementation creates a stateless decoder, which is only
-sufficient for the simplest encodings where each byte corresponds
-to exactly one Unicode character.
-
                                             The caller is responsible for deleting the returned object.
-
-
                                            TQTextEncoder * TQTextCodec::makeEncoder () const [virtual]
-
                                            
-Creates a TQTextEncoder which stores enough state to encode chunks
-of Unicode data as char* data. The default implementation creates
-a stateless encoder, which is only sufficient for the simplest
-encodings where each Unicode character corresponds to exactly one
-character.
-
                                             The caller is responsible for deleting the returned object.
-
-
                                            int TQTextCodec::mibEnum () const [pure virtual]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Subclasses of TQTextCodec must reimplement this function. It
-returns the MIBenum (see the
-    IANA character-sets encoding file for more information).
-It is important that each TQTextCodec subclass returns the correct
-unique value for this function.
-
-
                                            Reimplemented in TQEucJpCodec.
-
                                            const char * TQTextCodec::mimeName () const [virtual]
-
                                            
-Returns the preferred mime name of the encoding as defined in the
-IANA character-sets encoding file.
-
-
                                            Reimplemented in TQEucJpCodec, TQEucKrCodec, TQJisCodec, TQHebrewCodec, and TQSjisCodec.
-
                                            const char * TQTextCodec::name () const [pure virtual]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             TQTextCodec subclasses must reimplement this function. It returns
-the name of the encoding supported by the subclass. When choosing
-a name for an encoding, consider these points:
-
                                              
-
                                            • 	On X11, heuristicNameMatch( const char * hint )
-is used to test if a the TQTextCodec
-can convert between Unicode and the encoding of a font
-with encoding hint, such as "iso8859-1" for Latin-1 fonts,
-"koi8-r" for Russian KOI8 fonts.
-The default algorithm of heuristicNameMatch() uses name().
-
                                            • 	Some applications may use this function to present
-encodings to the end user.
-
                                            
-
-
                                            Example: qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
-
                                            void TQTextCodec::setCodecForCStrings ( TQTextCodec * c ) [static]
-
                                            Warning: This function is not reentrant.
                                            
-
-
-
-
                                             Sets the codec used by TQString to convert to and from const char*
-and TQCStrings. If c is 0 (the default), TQString assumes Latin-1.
-
                                             Warning: Some codecs do not preserve the characters in the ascii
-range (0x00 to 0x7f).  For example, the Japanese Shift-JIS
-encoding maps the backslash character (0x5a) to the Yen character.
-This leads to unexpected results when using the backslash
-character to escape characters in strings used in e.g. regular
-expressions.  Use TQString::fromLatin1() to preserve characters in
-the ascii range when needed.
-
                                             
                                            See also codecForCStrings() and setCodecForTr().
-
-
                                            void TQTextCodec::setCodecForLocale ( TQTextCodec * c ) [static]
-
                                            
-Set the codec to c; this will be returned by codecForLocale().
-This might be needed for some applications that want to use their
-own mechanism for setting the locale.
-
                                             
                                            See also codecForLocale().
-
-
                                            void TQTextCodec::setCodecForTr ( TQTextCodec * c ) [static]
-
                                            Warning: This function is not reentrant.
                                            
-
-
-
-
                                             Sets the codec used by TQObject::tr() on its argument to c. If
-c is 0 (the default), tr() assumes Latin-1.
-
                                             If the literal quoted text in the program is not in the Latin-1
-encoding, this function can be used to set the appropriate
-encoding. For example, software developed by Korean programmers
-might use eucKR for all the text in the program, in which case the
-main() function might look like this:
-
                                             
                                            -    int main(int argc, char** argv)
-    {
-        TQApplication app(argc, argv);
-        ... install any additional codecs ...
-        TQTextCodec::setCodecForTr( TQTextCodec::codecForName("eucKR") );
-        ...
-    }
-    
                                            
- 
-
                                             Note that this is not the way to select the encoding that the user has chosen. For example, to convert an application containing
-literal English strings to Korean, all that is needed is for the
-English strings to be passed through tr() and for translation
-files to be loaded. For details of internationalization, see the
-TQt internationalization documentation.
-
                                             
                                            See also codecForTr() and setCodecForCStrings().
-
-
                                            int TQTextCodec::simpleHeuristicNameMatch ( const char * name, const char * hint ) [static protected]
-
                                            
-A simple utility function for heuristicNameMatch(): it does some
-very minor character-skipping so that almost-exact matches score
-high. name is the text we're matching and hint is used for
-the comparison.
-
-
                                            TQString TQTextCodec::toUnicode ( const char * chars, int len ) const [virtual]
-
                                            
-TQTextCodec subclasses must reimplement this function or
-makeDecoder(). It converts the first len characters of chars
-to Unicode.
-
                                             The default implementation makes a decoder with makeDecoder() and
-converts the input with that. Note that the default makeDecoder()
-implementation makes a decoder that simply calls
-this function, hence subclasses must reimplement one function or
-the other to avoid infinite recursion.
-
-
                                            TQString TQTextCodec::toUnicode ( const TQByteArray & a, int len ) const
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             a contains the source characters; len contains the number of
-characters in a to use.
-
-
                                            TQString TQTextCodec::toUnicode ( const TQByteArray & a ) const
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             a contains the source characters.
-
-
                                            TQString TQTextCodec::toUnicode ( const TQCString & a, int len ) const
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             a contains the source characters; len contains the number of
-characters in a to use.
-
-
                                            TQString TQTextCodec::toUnicode ( const TQCString & a ) const
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             a contains the source characters.
-
-
                                            TQString TQTextCodec::toUnicode ( const char * chars ) const
-
                                            
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                             chars contains the source characters.
-
-
-
                                            
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                            
-
-
                                            Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                            TQt 3.3.8
                                            
-
                                            
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qtextcodecplugin-h.html b/doc/html/qtextcodecplugin-h.html
index 89f6cd65d..65687851d 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtextcodecplugin-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtextcodecplugin-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qtextcodecplugin.h Include File
+ntqtextcodecplugin.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                            
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                            TQTextCodecPlugin Class Reference
                                            
-
-
                                            The TQTextCodecPlugin class provides an abstract base for custom TQTextCodec plugins.
-More...
-
                                            All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
                                            
-
                                            #include <qtextcodecplugin.h>
-
                                            List of all member functions.
-
                                            Public Members
                                            
-
-
                                            Detailed Description
                                            
-
-
-The TQTextCodecPlugin class provides an abstract base for custom TQTextCodec plugins.
-
-
-
                                             The text codec plugin is a simple plugin interface that makes it
-easy to create custom text codecs that can be loaded dynamically
-into applications.
-
                                             Writing a text codec plugin is achieved by subclassing this base
-class, reimplementing the pure virtual functions names(),
-createForName(), mibEnums() and createForMib(), and exporting the
-class with the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN macro. See the TQt Plugins documentation for details.
-
                                             See the IANA
-    character-sets encoding file for more information on mime
-names and mib enums.
-
                                            See also Plugins.
-
-
                                            Member Function Documentation
                                            
-
                                            TQTextCodecPlugin::TQTextCodecPlugin ()
-
                                            
-Constructs a text codec plugin. This is invoked automatically by
-the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN macro.
-
-
                                            TQTextCodecPlugin::~TQTextCodecPlugin ()
-
                                            
-Destroys the text codec plugin.
-
                                             You never have to call this explicitly. TQt destroys a plugin
-automatically when it is no longer used.
-
-
                                            TQTextCodec * TQTextCodecPlugin::createForMib ( int mib ) [pure virtual]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Creates a TQTextCodec object for the mib enum mib.
-
                                             (See the
-    IANA character-sets encoding file for more information)
-
                                             
                                            See also mibEnums().
-
-
                                            TQTextCodec * TQTextCodecPlugin::createForName ( const TQString & name ) [pure virtual]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Creates a TQTextCodec object for the codec called name.
-
                                             
                                            See also names().
-
-
                                            TQValueList<int> TQTextCodecPlugin::mibEnums () const [pure virtual]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the list of mib enums supported by this plugin.
-
                                             
                                            See also createForMib().
-
-
                                            TQStringList TQTextCodecPlugin::names () const [pure virtual]
-
                                            
-
-
                                             Returns the list of mime names supported by this plugin.
-
                                             
                                            See also createForName().
-
-
-
                                            
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                            
-
-
                                            Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                            TQt 3.3.8
                                            
-
                                            
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qtextdecoder-members.html b/doc/html/qtextdecoder-members.html
index 6e06f9f54..ac2e74208 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtextdecoder-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtextdecoder-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qtextdecoder.html b/doc/html/qtextdecoder.html
index 70ce4e8e9..edd340ccb 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtextdecoder.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtextdecoder.html
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                            The TQTextDecoder class provides a state-based decoder.
 More...
 
                                            All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
                                            
-
                                            #include <qtextcodec.h>
+
                                            #include <ntqtextcodec.h>
 
                                            List of all member functions.
 
                                            Public Members
                                            
 
                                              
@@ -49,14 +49,14 @@ The TQTextDecoder class provides a state-based decoder.
 
 
                                               The decoder converts a text format into Unicode, remembering any
 state that is required between calls.
-
                                               
                                              See also TQTextCodec::makeEncoder() and Internationalization with TQt.
+
                                               
                                              See also TQTextCodec::makeEncoder() and Internationalization with TQt.
 
 
                                              Member Function Documentation
                                              
 
                                              TQTextDecoder::~TQTextDecoder () [virtual]
 
                                              
 Destroys the decoder.
 
-
                                              TQString TQTextDecoder::toUnicode ( const char * chars, int len ) [pure virtual]
+
                                              TQString TQTextDecoder::toUnicode ( const char * chars, int len ) [pure virtual]
 
                                              
 
 
                                               Converts the first len bytes in chars to Unicode, returning
diff --git a/doc/html/qtextdrag-members.html b/doc/html/qtextdrag-members.html
index 8d283664e..6260f3406 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtextdrag-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtextdrag-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -37,65 +37,65 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                              
 
 
                                              
diff --git a/doc/html/qtextdrag.html b/doc/html/qtextdrag.html
index 0522993a6..88c071ccd 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtextdrag.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtextdrag.html
@@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                              The TQTextDrag class is a drag and drop object for
 transferring plain and Unicode text.
 More...
-
                                              #include <qdragobject.h>
-
                                              Inherits TQDragObject.
+
                                              #include <ntqdragobject.h>
+
                                              Inherits TQDragObject.
 
                                              List of all member functions.
 
                                              Public Members
                                              
 
                                                
@@ -57,21 +57,21 @@ transferring plain and Unicode text.
 
                                                 The TQTextDrag class is a drag and drop object for
 transferring plain and Unicode text.
 
                                                 
-
                                                 Plain text is passed in a TQString which may contain multiple lines
+
                                                 Plain text is passed in a TQString which may contain multiple lines
 (i.e. may contain newline characters). The drag target will receive
 the newlines according to the runtime environment, e.g. LF on Unix,
 and CRLF on Windows.
 
                                                 TQt provides no built-in mechanism for delivering only a single-line.
-
                                                 For more information about drag and drop, see the TQDragObject class
+
                                                 For more information about drag and drop, see the TQDragObject class
 and the drag and drop documentation.
 
                                                See also Drag And Drop Classes.
 
 
                                                Member Function Documentation
                                                
-
                                                TQTextDrag::TQTextDrag ( const TQString & text, TQWidget * dragSource = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
                                                TQTextDrag::TQTextDrag ( const TQString & text, TQWidget * dragSource = 0, const char * name = 0 )
 
                                                
 Constructs a text drag object and sets its data to text. dragSource must be the drag source; name is the object name.
 
-
                                                TQTextDrag::TQTextDrag ( TQWidget * dragSource = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
                                                TQTextDrag::TQTextDrag ( TQWidget * dragSource = 0, const char * name = 0 )
 
                                                
 Constructs a default text drag object. dragSource must be the
 drag source; name is the object name.
@@ -84,18 +84,18 @@ resources.
 
                                                bool TQTextDrag::canDecode ( const TQMimeSource * e ) [static]
 
                                                
 Returns TRUE if the information in e can be decoded into a
-TQString; otherwise returns FALSE.
+TQString; otherwise returns FALSE.
 
                                                 
                                                See also decode().
 
 
                                                Example: iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp.
-
                                                bool TQTextDrag::decode ( const TQMimeSource * e, TQString & str ) [static]
+
                                                bool TQTextDrag::decode ( const TQMimeSource * e, TQString & str ) [static]
 
                                                
 Attempts to decode the dropped information in e into str.
 Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
 
                                                 
                                                See also canDecode().
 
 
                                                Example: iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp.
-
                                                bool TQTextDrag::decode ( const TQMimeSource * e, TQString & str, TQCString & subtype ) [static]
+
                                                bool TQTextDrag::decode ( const TQMimeSource * e, TQString & str, TQCString & subtype ) [static]
 
                                                
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 
                                                 Attempts to decode the dropped information in e into str.
@@ -104,14 +104,14 @@ is null, any text subtype is accepted; otherwise only the
 specified subtype is accepted.
 
                                                 
                                                See also canDecode().
 
-
                                                void TQTextDrag::setSubtype ( const TQCString & st ) [virtual]
+
                                                void TQTextDrag::setSubtype ( const TQCString & st ) [virtual]
 
                                                
 Sets the MIME subtype of the text being dragged to st. The
 default subtype is "plain", so the default MIME type of the text
 is "text/plain". You might use this to declare that the text is
 "text/html" by calling setSubtype("html").
 
-
                                                void TQTextDrag::setText ( const TQString & text ) [virtual]
+
                                                void TQTextDrag::setText ( const TQString & text ) [virtual]
 
                                                
 Sets the text to be dragged to text. You will need to call this
 if you did not pass the text during construction.
diff --git a/doc/html/qtextedit-h.html b/doc/html/qtextedit-h.html
index 7c7a21e8e..858752178 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtextedit-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtextedit-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qtextedit.h Include File
+ntqtextedit.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                TQTextEdit Class Reference
                                                
-
-
                                                The TQTextEdit widget provides a powerful single-page rich text editor.
-More...
-
                                                #include <qtextedit.h>
-
                                                Inherits TQScrollView.
-
                                                Inherited by TQMultiLineEdit, TQTextBrowser, and TQTextView.
-
                                                List of all member functions.
-
                                                Public Members
                                                
-
-
                                                Public Slots
                                                
-
-
                                                Signals
                                                
-
-
                                                Properties
                                                
-
                                                  
-
                                                • AutoFormatting autoFormatting - the enabled set of auto formatting features
                                                  • 
-
                                                • TQString documentTitle - the title of the document parsed from the text  (read only)
                                                  • 
-
                                                • bool hasSelectedText - whether some text is selected in selection 0  (read only)
                                                  • 
-
                                                • int length - the number of characters in the text  (read only)
                                                  • 
-
                                                • bool linkUnderline - whether hypertext links will be underlined
                                                  • 
-
                                                • bool modified - whether the document has been modified by the user
                                                  • 
-
                                                • bool overwriteMode - the text edit's overwrite mode
                                                  • 
-
                                                • TQBrush paper - the background (paper) brush
                                                  • 
-
                                                • bool readOnly - whether the text edit is read-only
                                                  • 
-
                                                • TQString selectedText - the selected text (from selection 0) or an empty string if there is no currently selected text (in selection 0)  (read only)
                                                  • 
-
                                                • bool tabChangesFocus - whether TAB changes focus or is accepted as input
                                                  • 
-
                                                • int tabStopWidth - the tab stop width in pixels
                                                  • 
-
                                                • TQString text - the text edit's text
                                                  • 
-
                                                • TextFormat textFormat - the text format: rich text, plain text, log text or auto text
                                                  • 
-
                                                • int undoDepth - the depth of the undo history
                                                  • 
-
                                                • bool undoRedoEnabled - whether undo/redo is enabled
                                                  • 
-
                                                • WordWrap wordWrap - the word wrap mode
                                                  • 
-
                                                • int wrapColumnOrWidth - the position (in pixels or columns depending on the wrap mode) where text will be wrapped
                                                  • 
-
                                                • WrapPolicy wrapPolicy - the word wrap policy, at whitespace or anywhere
                                                  • 
-
                                                
-
                                                Protected Members
                                                
-
-
                                                Detailed Description
                                                
-
-
-The TQTextEdit widget provides a powerful single-page rich text editor.
-
                                                 
-
-
-
                                                 
-
                                                
-
-
-
                                                 
                                                 Introduction and Concepts
-
                                                
-
                                                 TQTextEdit is an advanced WYSIWYG viewer/editor supporting rich
-text formatting using HTML-style tags. It is optimized to handle
-large documents and to respond tquickly to user input.
-
                                                 TQTextEdit has four modes of operation:
-
                                                
-
                                                 Mode Command Notes
-
                                                 Plain Text Editor setTextFormat(PlainText)
-Set text with setText(); text() returns plain text. Text
-attributes (e.g. colors) can be set, but plain text is always
-returned.
-
                                                 Rich Text Editor setTextFormat(RichText)
-Set text with setText(); text() returns rich text. Rich
-text editing is fairly limited. You can't set margins or
-insert images for example (although you can read and
-correctly display files that have margins set and that
-include images). This mode is mostly useful for editing small
-amounts of rich text. 1.
-
                                                 Text Viewer setReadOnly(TRUE)
-Set text with setText() or append() (which has no undo
-history so is faster and uses less memory); text() returns
-plain or rich text depending on the textFormat(). This mode
-can correctly display a large subset of HTML tags.
-
                                                 Log Viewer setTextFormat(LogText)
-Append text using append(). The widget is set to be read
-only and rich text support is disabled although a few HTML
-tags (for color, bold, italic and underline) may be used.
-(See LogText mode for details.)
-
                                                
-
                                                 1.A more complete API that supports setting
-margins, images, etc., is planned for a later TQt release.
-
                                                 TQTextEdit can be used as a syntax highlighting editor when used in
-conjunction with TQSyntaxHighlighter.
-
                                                 We recommend that you always call setTextFormat() to set the mode
-you want to use. If you use AutoText then setText() and
-append() will try to determine whether the text they are given is
-plain text or rich text. If you use RichText then setText() and
-append() will assume that the text they are given is rich text.
-insert() simply inserts the text it is given.
-
                                                 TQTextEdit works on paragraphs and characters. A paragraph is a
-formatted string which is word-wrapped to fit into the width of
-the widget. By default when reading plain text, one newline
-signify a paragraph. A document consists of zero or more
-paragraphs, indexed from 0. Characters are indexed on a
-per-paragraph basis, also indexed from 0. The words in the
-paragraph are aligned in accordance with the paragraph's
-alignment(). Paragraphs are separated by hard line breaks. Each
-character within a paragraph has its own attributes, for example,
-font and color.
-
                                                 The text edit documentation uses the following concepts:
-
                                                  
-
                                                •  current format --
-this is the format at the current cursor position, and it
-is the format of the selected text if any.
-
                                                •  current paragraph -- the paragraph which contains the
-cursor.
-
                                                
-
                                                 TQTextEdit can display images (using TQMimeSourceFactory), lists and
-tables. If the text is too large to view within the text edit's
-viewport, scrollbars will appear. The text edit can load both
-plain text and HTML files (a subset of HTML 3.2 and 4). The
-rendering style and the set of valid tags are defined by a
-styleSheet(). Custom tags can be created and placed in a custom
-style sheet. Change the style sheet with setStyleSheet(); see
-TQStyleSheet for details. The images identified by image tags are
-displayed if they can be interpreted using the text edit's
-TQMimeSourceFactory; see setMimeSourceFactory().
-
                                                 If you want a text browser with more navigation use TQTextBrowser.
-If you just need to display a small piece of rich text use TQLabel
-or TQSimpleRichText.
-
                                                 If you create a new TQTextEdit, and want to allow the user to edit
-rich text, call setTextFormat(TQt::RichText) to ensure that the
-text is treated as rich text. (Rich text uses HTML tags to set
-text formatting attributes. See TQStyleSheet for information on the
-HTML tags that are supported.). If you don't call setTextFormat()
-explicitly the text edit will guess from the text itself whether
-it is rich text or plain text. This means that if the text looks
-like HTML or XML it will probably be interpreted as rich text, so
-you should call setTextFormat(TQt::PlainText) to preserve such
-text.
-
                                                 Note that we do not intend to add a full-featured web browser
-widget to TQt (because that would easily double TQt's size and only
-a few applications would benefit from it). The rich
-text support in TQt is designed to provide a fast, portable and
-efficient way to add reasonable online help facilities to
-applications, and to provide a basis for rich text editors.
-
                                                 
                                                 Using TQTextEdit as a Display Widget
-
                                                
-
                                                 TQTextEdit can display a large HTML subset, including tables and
-images.
-
                                                 The text is set or replaced using setText() which deletes any
-existing text and replaces it with the text passed in the
-setText() call. If you call setText() with legacy HTML (with
-setTextFormat(RichText) in force), and then call text(), the text
-that is returned may have different markup, but will render the
-same. Text can be inserted with insert(), paste(), pasteSubType()
-and append(). Text that is appended does not go into the undo
-history; this makes append() faster and consumes less memory. Text
-can also be cut(). The entire text is deleted with clear() and the
-selected text is deleted with removeSelectedText(). Selected
-(marked) text can also be deleted with del() (which will delete
-the character to the right of the cursor if no text is selected).
-
                                                 Loading and saving text is achieved using setText() and text(),
-for example:
-
                                                -    TQFile file( fileName ); // Read the text from a file
-    if ( file.open( IO_ReadOnly ) ) {
-        TQTextStream stream( &file );
-        textEdit->setText( stream.read() );
-    }
-
-    TQFile file( fileName ); // Write the text to a file
-    if ( file.open( IO_WriteOnly ) ) {
-        TQTextStream stream( &file );
-        stream << textEdit->text();
-        textEdit->setModified( FALSE );
-    }
-    
                                                
- 
-
                                                 By default the text edit wraps words at whitespace to fit within
-the text edit widget. The setWordWrap() function is used to
-specify the kind of word wrap you want, or NoWrap if you don't
-want any wrapping. Call setWordWrap() to set a fixed pixel width
-FixedPixelWidth, or character column (e.g. 80 column) FixedColumnWidth with the pixels or columns specified with
-setWrapColumnOrWidth(). If you use word wrap to the widget's width
-WidgetWidth, you can specify whether to break on whitespace or
-anywhere with setWrapPolicy().
-
                                                 The background color is set differently than other widgets, using
-setPaper(). You specify a brush style which could be a plain color
-or a complex pixmap.
-
                                                 Hypertext links are automatically underlined; this can be changed
-with setLinkUnderline(). The tab stop width is set with
-setTabStopWidth().
-
                                                 The zoomIn() and zoomOut() functions can be used to resize the
-text by increasing (decreasing for zoomOut()) the point size used.
-Images are not affected by the zoom functions.
-
                                                 The lines() function returns the number of lines in the text and
-paragraphs() returns the number of paragraphs. The number of lines
-within a particular paragraph is returned by linesOfParagraph().
-The length of the entire text in characters is returned by
-length().
-
                                                 You can scroll to an anchor in the text, e.g.
-<a name="anchor"> with scrollToAnchor(). The find() function
-can be used to find and select a given string within the text.
-
                                                 A read-only TQTextEdit provides the same functionality as the
-(obsolete) TQTextView. (TQTextView is still supplied for
-compatibility with old code.)
-
                                                 
                                                 Read-only key bindings
-
                                                
-
                                                 When TQTextEdit is used read-only the key-bindings are limited to
-navigation, and text may only be selected with the mouse:
-
                                                
-
                                                 Keypresses Action
-
                                                 UpArrow	Move one line up
-
                                                 DownArrow	Move one line down
-
                                                 LeftArrow	Move one character left
-
                                                 RightArrow	Move one character right
-
                                                 PageUp	Move one (viewport) page up
-
                                                 PageDown	Move one (viewport) page down
-
                                                 Home	Move to the beginning of the text
-
                                                 End		Move to the end of the text
-
                                                 Shift+Wheel
-Scroll the page horizontally (the Wheel is the mouse wheel)
-
                                                 Ctrl+Wheel	Zoom the text
-
                                                
-
                                                 The text edit may be able to provide some meta-information. For
-example, the documentTitle() function will return the text from
-within HTML <title> tags.
-
                                                 The text displayed in a text edit has a context. The context is
-a path which the text edit's TQMimeSourceFactory uses to resolve
-the locations of files and images. It is passed to the
-mimeSourceFactory() when quering data. (See TQTextEdit() and
-context().)
-
                                                 
-
                                                 Using TQTextEdit in LogText Mode
-
                                                
-
                                                 Setting the text format to LogText puts the widget in a special
-mode which is optimized for very large texts. Editing, word wrap,
-and rich text support are disabled in this mode (the widget is
-explicitly made read-only). This allows the text to be stored in a
-different, more memory efficient manner. However, a certain degree
-of text formatting is supported through the use of formatting tags.
-A tag is delimited by < and >. The characters <, >
-and & are escaped by using &lt;, &gt; and &amp;.
-A tag pair consists of a left and a right tag (or open/close tags).
-Left-tags mark the starting point for formatting, while right-tags
-mark the ending point. A right-tag always start with a / before
-the tag keyword. For example <b> and </b> are a tag pair.
-Tags can be nested, but they have to be closed in the same order as
-they are opened. For example, <b><u></u></b> is valid, while <b><u></b></u> will output an error message.
-
                                                 By using tags it is possible to change the color, bold, italic and
-underline settings for a piece of text. A color can be specified
-by using the HTML font tag <font color=colorname>. The color
-name can be one of the color names from the X11 color database, or
-a RGB hex value (e.g #00ff00). Example of valid color tags:
-<font color=red>, <font color="light blue">, <font color="#223344">. Bold, italic and underline settings can be
-specified by the tags <b>, <i> and <u>. Note that a
-tag does not necessarily have to be closed. A valid example:
-
                                                -    This is <font color=red>red</font> while <b>this</b> is <font color=blue>blue</font>.
-    <font color=green><font color=yellow>Yellow,</font> and <u>green</u>.
-    
                                                
- 
-
                                                 Stylesheets can also be used in LogText mode. To create and use a
-custom tag, you could do the following:
-
                                                -    TQTextEdit * log = new TQTextEdit( this );
-    log->setTextFormat( TQt::LogText );
-    TQStyleSheetItem * item = new TQStyleSheetItem( log->styleSheet(), "mytag" );
-    item->setColor( "red" );
-    item->setFontWeight( TQFont::Bold );
-    item->setFontUnderline( TRUE );
-    log->append( "This is a <mytag>custom tag</mytag>!" );
-    
                                                
- 
-Note that only the color, bold, underline and italic attributes of
-a TQStyleSheetItem is used in LogText mode.
-
                                                 Note that you can use setMaxLogLines() to limit the number of
-lines the widget can hold in LogText mode.
-
                                                 There are a few things that you need to be aware of when the
-widget is in this mode:
-
                                                  
-
                                                •  Functions that deal with rich text formatting and cursor
-movement will not work or return anything valid.
-
                                                •  Lines are equivalent to paragraphs.
-
                                                
-
                                                 
                                                 Using TQTextEdit as an Editor
-
                                                
-
                                                 All the information about using TQTextEdit as a display widget also
-applies here.
-
                                                 The current format's attributes are set with setItalic(),
-setBold(), setUnderline(), setFamily() (font family),
-setPointSize(), setColor() and setCurrentFont(). The current
-paragraph's alignment is set with setAlignment().
-
                                                 Use setSelection() to select text. The setSelectionAttributes()
-function is used to indicate how selected text should be
-displayed. Use hasSelectedText() to find out if any text is
-selected. The currently selected text's position is available
-using getSelection() and the selected text itself is returned by
-selectedText(). The selection can be copied to the clipboard with
-copy(), or cut to the clipboard with cut(). It can be deleted with
-removeSelectedText(). The entire text can be selected (or
-unselected) using selectAll(). TQTextEdit supports multiple
-selections. Most of the selection functions operate on the default
-selection, selection 0. If the user presses a non-selecting key,
-e.g. a cursor key without also holding down Shift, all selections
-are cleared.
-
                                                 Set and get the position of the cursor with setCursorPosition()
-and getCursorPosition() respectively. When the cursor is moved,
-the signals currentFontChanged(), currentColorChanged() and
-currentAlignmentChanged() are emitted to reflect the font, color
-and alignment at the new cursor position.
-
                                                 If the text changes, the textChanged() signal is emitted, and if
-the user inserts a new line by pressing Return or Enter,
-returnPressed() is emitted. The isModified() function will return
-TRUE if the text has been modified.
-
                                                 TQTextEdit provides command-based undo and redo. To set the depth
-of the command history use setUndoDepth() which defaults to 100
-steps. To undo or redo the last operation call undo() or redo().
-The signals undoAvailable() and redoAvailable() indicate whether
-the undo and redo operations can be executed.
-
                                                 The indent() function is used to reindent a paragraph. It is
-useful for code editors, for example in TQt Designer's code editor Ctrl+I invokes the indent()
-function.
-
                                                 
                                                 Editing key bindings
-
                                                
-
                                                 The list of key-bindings which are implemented for editing:
-
                                                
-
                                                 Keypresses Action
-
                                                 Backspace Delete the character to the left of the cursor
-
                                                 Delete Delete the character to the right of the cursor
-
                                                 Ctrl+A Move the cursor to the beginning of the line
-
                                                 Ctrl+B Move the cursor one character left
-
                                                 Ctrl+C Copy the marked text to the clipboard (also
-Ctrl+Insert under Windows)
-
                                                 Ctrl+D Delete the character to the right of the cursor
-
                                                 Ctrl+E Move the cursor to the end of the line
-
                                                 Ctrl+F Move the cursor one character right
-
                                                 Ctrl+H Delete the character to the left of the cursor
-
                                                 Ctrl+K Delete to end of line
-
                                                 Ctrl+N Move the cursor one line down
-
                                                 Ctrl+P Move the cursor one line up
-
                                                 Ctrl+V Paste the clipboard text into line edit
-(also Shift+Insert under Windows)
-
                                                 Ctrl+X Cut the marked text, copy to clipboard
-(also Shift+Delete under Windows)
-
                                                 Ctrl+Z Undo the last operation
-
                                                 Ctrl+Y Redo the last operation
-
                                                 LeftArrow	    Move the cursor one character left
-
                                                 Ctrl+LeftArrow  Move the cursor one word left
-
                                                 RightArrow	    Move the cursor one character right
-
                                                 Ctrl+RightArrow Move the cursor one word right
-
                                                 UpArrow	    Move the cursor one line up
-
                                                 Ctrl+UpArrow    Move the cursor one word up
-
                                                 DownArrow	    Move the cursor one line down
-
                                                 Ctrl+Down Arrow Move the cursor one word down
-
                                                 PageUp	    Move the cursor one page up
-
                                                 PageDown	    Move the cursor one page down
-
                                                 Home	    Move the cursor to the beginning of the line
-
                                                 Ctrl+Home	    Move the cursor to the beginning of the text
-
                                                 End		    Move the cursor to the end of the line
-
                                                 Ctrl+End	    Move the cursor to the end of the text
-
                                                 Shift+Wheel	    Scroll the page horizontally
-(the Wheel is the mouse wheel)
-
                                                 Ctrl+Wheel	    Zoom the text
-
                                                
-
                                                 To select (mark) text hold down the Shift key whilst pressing one
-of the movement keystrokes, for example, Shift+Right Arrow
-will select the character to the right, and Shift+Ctrl+Right Arrow will select the word to the right, etc.
-
                                                 By default the text edit widget operates in insert mode so all
-text that the user enters is inserted into the text edit and any
-text to the right of the cursor is moved out of the way. The mode
-can be changed to overwrite, where new text overwrites any text to
-the right of the cursor, using setOverwriteMode().
-
                                                See also Basic Widgets and Text Related Classes.
-
-
                                                Member Type Documentation
                                                
-
                                                TQTextEdit::AutoFormatting
                                                
-
-
                                                  
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::AutoNone - Do not perform any automatic formatting
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::AutoBulletList - Only automatically format bulletted lists
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::AutoAll - Apply all available autoformatting
-
                                                
-
                                                TQTextEdit::CursorAction
                                                
-
-
                                                 This enum is used by moveCursor() to specify in which direction
-the cursor should be moved:
-
                                                  
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::MoveBackward - Moves the cursor one character backward
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::MoveWordBackward - Moves the cursor one word backward
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::MoveForward - Moves the cursor one character forward
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::MoveWordForward - Moves the cursor one word forward
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::MoveUp - Moves the cursor up one line
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::MoveDown - Moves the cursor down one line
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::MoveLineStart - Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::MoveLineEnd - Moves the cursor to the end of the line
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::MoveHome - Moves the cursor to the beginning of the document
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::MoveEnd - Moves the cursor to the end of the document
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::MovePgUp - Moves the cursor one viewport page up
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::MovePgDown - Moves the cursor one viewport page down
-
                                                
-
                                                TQTextEdit::KeyboardAction
                                                
-
-
                                                 This enum is used by doKeyboardAction() to specify which action
-should be executed:
-
                                                  
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::ActionBackspace - Delete the character to the left of the
-cursor.
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::ActionDelete - Delete the character to the right of the
-cursor.
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::ActionReturn - Split the paragraph at the cursor position.
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::ActionKill - If the cursor is not at the end of the
-paragraph, delete the text from the cursor position until the end
-of the paragraph. If the cursor is at the end of the paragraph,
-delete the hard line break at the end of the paragraph: this will
-cause this paragraph to be joined with the following paragraph.
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::ActionWordBackspace - Delete the word to the left of the
-cursor position.
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::ActionWordDelete - Delete the word to the right of the
-cursor position
-
                                                 
-
                                                TQTextEdit::VerticalAlignment
                                                
-
-
                                                 This enum is used to set the vertical alignment of the text.
-
                                                  
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::AlignNormal - Normal alignment
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::AlignSuperScript - Superscript
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::AlignSubScript - Subscript
-
                                                
-
                                                TQTextEdit::WordWrap
                                                
-
-
                                                 This enum defines the TQTextEdit's word wrap modes.
-
                                                  
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::NoWrap - Do not wrap the text.
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::WidgetWidth - Wrap the text at the current width of the
-widget (this is the default). Wrapping is at whitespace by
-default; this can be changed with setWrapPolicy().
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::FixedPixelWidth - Wrap the text at a fixed number of pixels
-from the widget's left side. The number of pixels is set with
-wrapColumnOrWidth().
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::FixedColumnWidth - Wrap the text at a fixed number of
-character columns from the widget's left side. The number of
-characters is set with wrapColumnOrWidth(). This is useful if you
-need formatted text that can also be displayed gracefully on
-devices with monospaced fonts, for example a standard VT100
-terminal, where you might set wrapColumnOrWidth() to 80.
-
                                                 
                                                See also wordWrap and wordWrap.
-
-
                                                TQTextEdit::WrapPolicy
                                                
-
-
                                                 This enum defines where text can be wrapped in word wrap mode.
-
                                                  
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::AtWhiteSpace - Don't use this deprecated value (it is a
-synonym for AtWordBoundary which you should use instead).
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::Anywhere - Break anywhere, including within words.
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::AtWordBoundary - Break lines at word boundaries, e.g. spaces or
-newlines
-
                                                • TQTextEdit::AtWordOrDocumentBoundary - Break lines at whitespace, e.g.
-spaces or newlines if possible. Break it anywhere otherwise.
-
                                                 
                                                See also wrapPolicy.
-
-
                                                Member Function Documentation
                                                
-
                                                TQTextEdit::TQTextEdit ( const TQString & text, const TQString & context = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                
-Constructs a TQTextEdit called name, with parent parent. The
-text edit will display the text text using context context.
-
                                                 The context is a path which the text edit's TQMimeSourceFactory
-uses to resolve the locations of files and images. It is passed to
-the mimeSourceFactory() when quering data.
-
                                                 For example if the text contains an image tag,
-<img src="image.png">, and the context is "path/to/look/in", the
-TQMimeSourceFactory will try to load the image from
-"path/to/look/in/image.png". If the tag was
-<img src="/image.png">, the context will not be used (because
-TQMimeSourceFactory recognizes that we have used an absolute path)
-and will try to load "/image.png". The context is applied in exactly
-the same way to hrefs, for example,
-<a href="target.html">Target</a>, would resolve to
-"path/to/look/in/target.html".
-
-
                                                TQTextEdit::TQTextEdit ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                                
-Constructs an empty TQTextEdit called name, with parent parent.
-
-
                                                int TQTextEdit::alignment () const
-
                                                
-Returns the alignment of the current paragraph.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setAlignment().
-
-
                                                TQString TQTextEdit::anchorAt ( const TQPoint & pos, AnchorAttribute attr )
-
                                                
-If there is an anchor at position pos (in contents
-coordinates), the text for attribute attr is returned,
-otherwise TQString::null is returned.
-
-
                                                TQString TQTextEdit::anchorAt ( const TQPoint & pos )
-
                                                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                 If there is an anchor at position pos (in contents
-coordinates), its href is returned, otherwise TQString::null is
-returned.
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::append ( const TQString & text ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Appends a new paragraph with text to the end of the text edit. Note that
-the undo/redo history is cleared by this function, and no undo
-history is kept for appends which makes them faster than
-insert()s. If you want to append text which is added to the
-undo/redo history as well, use insertParagraph().
-
-
                                                Examples: network/clientserver/client/client.cpp, network/clientserver/server/server.cpp, network/httpd/httpd.cpp, and process/process.cpp.
-
                                                uint TQTextEdit::autoFormatting () const
-
                                                Returns the enabled set of auto formatting features.
-See the "autoFormatting" property for details.
-
                                                bool TQTextEdit::bold () const
-
                                                
-Returns TRUE if the current format is bold; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setBold().
-
-
                                                int TQTextEdit::charAt ( const TQPoint & pos, int * para ) const
-
                                                
-Returns the index of the character (relative to its paragraph) at
-position pos (in contents coordinates). If para is not 0,
-*para is set to the character's paragraph.
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::clear () [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Deletes all the text in the text edit.
-
                                                 
                                                See also cut(), removeSelectedText(), and text.
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::clearParagraphBackground ( int para ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Clears the background color of the paragraph para, so that the
-default color is used again.
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::clicked ( int para, int pos ) [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted when the mouse is clicked on the paragraph
-para at character position pos.
-
                                                 
                                                See also doubleClicked().
-
-
                                                TQColor TQTextEdit::color () const
-
                                                
-Returns the color of the current format.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setColor() and paper.
-
-
                                                TQString TQTextEdit::context () const
-
                                                
-Returns the context of the text edit. The context is a path which
-the text edit's TQMimeSourceFactory uses to resolve the locations
-of files and images.
-
                                                 
                                                See also text.
-
-
                                                Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, and qdir/qdir.cpp.
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::copy () [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Copies any selected text (from selection 0) to the clipboard.
-
                                                 
                                                See also hasSelectedText and copyAvailable().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::copyAvailable ( bool yes ) [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted when text is selected or de-selected in the
-text edit.
-
                                                 When text is selected this signal will be emitted with yes set
-to TRUE. If no text has been selected or if the selected text is
-de-selected this signal is emitted with yes set to FALSE.
-
                                                 If yes is TRUE then copy() can be used to copy the selection to
-the clipboard. If yes is FALSE then copy() does nothing.
-
                                                 
                                                See also selectionChanged().
-
-
                                                TQPopupMenu * TQTextEdit::createPopupMenu ( const TQPoint & pos ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-This function is called to create a right mouse button popup menu
-at the document position pos. If you want to create a custom
-popup menu, reimplement this function and return the created popup
-menu. Ownership of the popup menu is transferred to the caller.
-
                                                 Warning: The TQPopupMenu ID values 0-7 are reserved, and they map to the
-standard operations. When inserting items into your custom popup menu, be
-sure to specify ID values larger than 7.
-
-
                                                TQPopupMenu * TQTextEdit::createPopupMenu () [virtual protected]
-
                                                 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                 This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                                 This function is called to create a right mouse button popup menu.
-If you want to create a custom popup menu, reimplement this function
-and return the created popup menu. Ownership of the popup menu is
-transferred to the caller.
-
                                                 This function is only called if createPopupMenu( const TQPoint & )
-returns 0.
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::currentAlignmentChanged ( int a ) [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted if the alignment of the current paragraph
-has changed.
-
                                                 The new alignment is a.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setAlignment().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::currentColorChanged ( const TQColor & c ) [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted if the color of the current format has
-changed.
-
                                                 The new color is c.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setColor().
-
-
                                                TQFont TQTextEdit::currentFont () const
-
                                                
-Returns the font of the current format.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setCurrentFont(), setFamily(), and setPointSize().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::currentFontChanged ( const TQFont & f ) [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted if the font of the current format has
-changed.
-
                                                 The new font is f.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setCurrentFont().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::currentVerticalAlignmentChanged ( VerticalAlignment a ) [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted if the vertical alignment of the current
-format has changed.
-
                                                 The new vertical alignment is a.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setVerticalAlignment().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::cursorPositionChanged ( int para, int pos ) [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted if the position of the cursor has changed.
-para contains the paragraph index and pos contains the
-character position within the paragraph.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setCursorPosition().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::cut () [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Copies the selected text (from selection 0) to the clipboard and
-deletes it from the text edit.
-
                                                 If there is no selected text (in selection 0) nothing happens.
-
                                                 
                                                See also TQTextEdit::copy(), paste(), and pasteSubType().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::del () [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-If there is some selected text (in selection 0) it is deleted. If
-there is no selected text (in selection 0) the character to the
-right of the text cursor is deleted.
-
                                                 
                                                See also removeSelectedText() and cut().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::doKeyboardAction ( KeyboardAction action ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Executes keyboard action action. This is normally called by a
-key event handler.
-
-
                                                TQString TQTextEdit::documentTitle () const
-
                                                Returns the title of the document parsed from the text.
-See the "documentTitle" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::doubleClicked ( int para, int pos ) [signal]
-
                                                 
-
                                                 This signal is emitted when the mouse is double-clicked on the
-paragraph para at character position pos.
-
                                                 
                                                See also clicked().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::ensureCursorVisible () [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Ensures that the cursor is visible by scrolling the text edit if
-necessary.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setCursorPosition().
-
-
                                                TQString TQTextEdit::family () const
-
                                                
-Returns the font family of the current format.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setFamily(), setCurrentFont(), and setPointSize().
-
-
                                                bool TQTextEdit::find ( const TQString & expr, bool cs, bool wo, bool forward = TRUE, int * para = 0, int * index = 0 ) [virtual]
-
                                                
-Finds the next occurrence of the string, expr. Returns TRUE if
-expr was found; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                 If para and index are both 0 the search begins from the
-current cursor position. If para and index are both not 0,
-the search begins from the *index character position in the
-*para paragraph.
-
                                                 If cs is TRUE the search is case sensitive, otherwise it is
-case insensitive. If wo is TRUE the search looks for whole word
-matches only; otherwise it searches for any matching text. If forward is TRUE (the default) the search works forward from the
-starting position to the end of the text, otherwise it works
-backwards to the beginning of the text.
-
                                                 If expr is found the function returns TRUE. If index and para are not 0, the number of the paragraph in which the first
-character of the match was found is put into *para, and the
-index position of that character within the paragraph is put into
-*index.
-
                                                 If expr is not found the function returns FALSE. If index
-and para are not 0 and expr is not found, *index
-and *para are undefined.
-
                                                 Please note that this function will make the next occurrence of
-the string (if found) the current selection, and will thus
-modify the cursor position.
-
                                                 Using the para and index parameters will not work correctly
-in case the document contains tables.
-
-
                                                bool TQTextEdit::focusNextPrevChild ( bool n ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-Reimplemented to allow tabbing through links. If n is TRUE the
-tab moves the focus to the next child; if n is FALSE the tab
-moves the focus to the previous child. Returns TRUE if the focus
-was moved; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                TQFont TQTextEdit::font () const
-
                                                
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                                 Returns TQScrollView::font()
-
                                                 Warning: In previous versions this function returned the font of
-the current format. This lead to confusion. Please use
-currentFont() instead.
-
-
                                                Example: qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::getCursorPosition ( int * para, int * index ) const
-
                                                
-This function sets the *para and *index parameters to the
-current cursor position. para and index must not be 0.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setCursorPosition().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::getSelection ( int * paraFrom, int * indexFrom, int * paraTo, int * indexTo, int selNum = 0 ) const
-
                                                
-If there is a selection, *paraFrom is set to the number of the
-paragraph in which the selection begins and *paraTo is set to
-the number of the paragraph in which the selection ends. (They
-could be the same.) *indexFrom is set to the index at which the
-selection begins within *paraFrom, and *indexTo is set to
-the index at which the selection ends within *paraTo.
-
                                                 If there is no selection, *paraFrom, *indexFrom, *paraTo
-and *indexTo are all set to -1.
-
                                                 If paraFrom, indexFrom, paraTo or indexTo is 0 this
-function does nothing.
-
                                                 The selNum is the number of the selection (multiple selections
-are supported). It defaults to 0 (the default selection).
-
                                                 
                                                See also setSelection() and selectedText.
-
-
                                                bool TQTextEdit::hasSelectedText () const
-
                                                Returns TRUE if some text is selected in selection 0; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "hasSelectedText" property for details.
-
                                                int TQTextEdit::heightForWidth ( int w ) const [virtual]
-
                                                
-Returns how many pixels high the text edit needs to be to display
-all the text if the text edit is w pixels wide.
-
-
                                                Reimplemented from TQWidget.
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::insert ( const TQString & text, uint insertionFlags = CheckNewLines | RemoveSelected ) [slot]
-
                                                
-Inserts text at the current cursor position.
-
                                                 The insertionFlags define how the text is inserted. If RedoIndentation is set, the paragraph is re-indented. If CheckNewLines is set, newline characters in text result in hard
-line breaks (i.e. new paragraphs). If checkNewLine is not set,
-the behaviour of the editor is undefined if the text contains
-newlines. (It is not possible to change TQTextEdit's newline handling
-behavior, but you can use TQString::replace() to preprocess text
-before inserting it.) If RemoveSelected is set, any selected
-text (in selection 0) is removed before the text is inserted.
-
                                                 The default flags are CheckNewLines | RemoveSelected.
-
                                                 If the widget is in LogText mode this function will do nothing.
-
                                                 
                                                See also paste() and pasteSubType().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::insert ( const TQString & text, bool indent, bool checkNewLine = TRUE, bool removeSelected = TRUE ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                                 
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::insertAt ( const TQString & text, int para, int index ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Inserts text in the paragraph para at position index.
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::insertParagraph ( const TQString & text, int para ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Inserts text as a new paragraph at position para. If para
-is -1, the text is appended. Use append() if the append operation
-is performance critical.
-
-
                                                bool TQTextEdit::isModified () const
-
                                                Returns TRUE if the document has been modified by the user; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "modified" property for details.
-
                                                bool TQTextEdit::isOverwriteMode () const
-
                                                Returns the text edit's overwrite mode.
-See the "overwriteMode" property for details.
-
                                                bool TQTextEdit::isReadOnly () const
-
                                                Returns TRUE if the text edit is read-only; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "readOnly" property for details.
-
                                                bool TQTextEdit::isRedoAvailable () const
-
                                                
-Returns TRUE if redo is available; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                bool TQTextEdit::isUndoAvailable () const
-
                                                
-Returns TRUE if undo is available; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                bool TQTextEdit::isUndoRedoEnabled () const
-
                                                Returns TRUE if undo/redo is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "undoRedoEnabled" property for details.
-
                                                bool TQTextEdit::italic () const
-
                                                
-Returns TRUE if the current format is italic; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setItalic().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::keyPressEvent ( TQKeyEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                                                
-Processes the key event, e. By default key events are used to
-provide keyboard navigation and text editing.
-
-
                                                Reimplemented from TQWidget.
-
                                                Reimplemented in TQTextBrowser.
-
                                                int TQTextEdit::length () const
-
                                                Returns the number of characters in the text.
-See the "length" property for details.
-
                                                int TQTextEdit::lineOfChar ( int para, int index )
-
                                                
-Returns the line number of the line in paragraph para in which
-the character at position index appears. The index position is
-relative to the beginning of the paragraph. If there is no such
-paragraph or no such character at the index position (e.g. the
-index is out of range) -1 is returned.
-
-
                                                int TQTextEdit::lines () const
-
                                                
-Returns the number of lines in the text edit; this could be 0.
-
                                                 Warning: This function may be slow. Lines change all the time
-during word wrapping, so this function has to iterate over all the
-paragraphs and get the number of lines from each one individually.
-
-
                                                int TQTextEdit::linesOfParagraph ( int para ) const
-
                                                
-Returns the number of lines in paragraph para, or -1 if there
-is no paragraph with index para.
-
-
                                                bool TQTextEdit::linkUnderline () const
-
                                                Returns TRUE if hypertext links will be underlined; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "linkUnderline" property for details.
-
                                                int TQTextEdit::maxLogLines () [slot]
-
                                                
-Returns the maximum number of lines TQTextEdit can hold in LogText mode. By default the number of lines is unlimited, which
-is signified by a value of -1.
-
-
                                                TQMimeSourceFactory * TQTextEdit::mimeSourceFactory () const
-
                                                
-Returns the TQMimeSourceFactory which is being used by this text
-edit.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setMimeSourceFactory().
-
-
                                                Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, and qdir/qdir.cpp.
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::modificationChanged ( bool m ) [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted when the modification status of the
-document has changed. If m is TRUE, the document was modified,
-otherwise the modification state has been reset to unmodified.
-
                                                 
                                                See also modified.
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::moveCursor ( CursorAction action, bool select ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Moves the text cursor according to action. This is normally
-used by some key event handler. select specifies whether the
-text between the current cursor position and the new position
-should be selected.
-
-
                                                TQBrush TQTextEdit::paper () const
-
                                                Returns the background (paper) brush.
-See the "paper" property for details.
-
                                                int TQTextEdit::paragraphAt ( const TQPoint & pos ) const
-
                                                
-Returns the paragraph which is at position pos (in contents
-coordinates).
-
-
                                                TQColor TQTextEdit::paragraphBackgroundColor ( int para ) const
-
                                                
-Returns the background color of the paragraph para or an
-invalid color if para is out of range or the paragraph has no
-background set
-
-
                                                int TQTextEdit::paragraphLength ( int para ) const
-
                                                
-Returns the length of the paragraph para (i.e. the number of
-characters), or -1 if there is no paragraph with index para.
-
                                                 This function ignores newlines.
-
-
                                                TQRect TQTextEdit::paragraphRect ( int para ) const
-
                                                
-Returns the rectangle of the paragraph para in contents
-coordinates, or an invalid rectangle if para is out of range.
-
-
                                                int TQTextEdit::paragraphs () const
-
                                                
-Returns the number of paragraphs in the text; an empty textedit is always
-considered to have one paragraph, so 1 is returned in this case.
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::paste () [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Pastes the text from the clipboard into the text edit at the
-current cursor position. Only plain text is pasted.
-
                                                 If there is no text in the clipboard nothing happens.
-
                                                 
                                                See also pasteSubType(), cut(), and TQTextEdit::copy().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::pasteSubType ( const TQCString & subtype ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Pastes the text with format subtype from the clipboard into the
-text edit at the current cursor position. The subtype can be
-"plain" or "html".
-
                                                 If there is no text with format subtype in the clipboard
-nothing happens.
-
                                                 
                                                See also paste(), cut(), and TQTextEdit::copy().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::placeCursor ( const TQPoint & pos, TQTextCursor * c = 0 ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Places the cursor c at the character which is closest to position
-pos (in contents coordinates). If c is 0, the default text
-cursor is used.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setCursorPosition().
-
-
                                                int TQTextEdit::pointSize () const
-
                                                
-Returns the point size of the font of the current format.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setFamily(), setCurrentFont(), and setPointSize().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::redo () [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Redoes the last operation.
-
                                                 If there is no operation to redo, i.e. there is no redo step in
-the undo/redo history, nothing happens.
-
                                                 
                                                See also redoAvailable(), undo(), and undoDepth.
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::redoAvailable ( bool yes ) [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted when the availability of redo changes. If
-yes is TRUE, then redo() will work until redoAvailable( FALSE )
-is next emitted.
-
                                                 
                                                See also redo() and undoDepth.
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::removeParagraph ( int para ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Removes the paragraph para.
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::removeSelectedText ( int selNum = 0 ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Deletes the text of selection selNum (by default, the default
-selection, 0). If there is no selected text nothing happens.
-
                                                 
                                                See also selectedText and removeSelection().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::removeSelection ( int selNum = 0 ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Removes the selection selNum (by default 0). This does not
-remove the selected text.
-
                                                 
                                                See also removeSelectedText().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::repaintChanged () [protected]
-
                                                
-Repaints any paragraphs that have changed.
-
                                                 Although used extensively internally you shouldn't need to call
-this yourself.
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::returnPressed () [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted if the user pressed the Return or the Enter
-key.
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::scrollToAnchor ( const TQString & name ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Scrolls the text edit to make the text at the anchor called name visible, if it can be found in the document. If the anchor
-isn't found no scrolling will occur. An anchor is defined using
-the HTML anchor tag, e.g. <a name="target">.
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::scrollToBottom () [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Scrolls to the bottom of the document and does formatting if
-required.
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::selectAll ( bool select = TRUE ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-If select is TRUE (the default), all the text is selected as
-selection 0. If select is FALSE any selected text is
-unselected, i.e. the default selection (selection 0) is cleared.
-
                                                 
                                                See also selectedText.
-
-
                                                TQString TQTextEdit::selectedText () const
-
                                                Returns the selected text (from selection 0) or an empty string if there is no currently selected text (in selection 0).
-See the "selectedText" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::selectionChanged () [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted whenever the selection changes.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setSelection() and copyAvailable().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setAlignment ( int a ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Sets the alignment of the current paragraph to a. Valid
-alignments are TQt::AlignLeft, TQt::AlignRight,
-TQt::AlignJustify and TQt::AlignCenter (which centers
-horizontally).
-
-
                                                Reimplemented in TQMultiLineEdit.
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setAutoFormatting ( uint features )
-
                                                Sets the enabled set of auto formatting features to features.
-See the "autoFormatting" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setBold ( bool b ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-If b is TRUE sets the current format to bold; otherwise sets
-the current format to non-bold.
-
                                                 
                                                See also bold().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setColor ( const TQColor & c ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Sets the color of the current format, i.e. of the text, to c.
-
                                                 
                                                See also color() and paper.
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setCurrentFont ( const TQFont & f ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Sets the font of the current format to f.
-
                                                 If the widget is in LogText mode this function will do
-nothing. Use setFont() instead.
-
                                                 
                                                See also currentFont(), setPointSize(), and setFamily().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setCursorPosition ( int para, int index ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Sets the cursor to position index in paragraph para.
-
                                                 
                                                See also getCursorPosition().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setFamily ( const TQString & fontFamily ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Sets the font family of the current format to fontFamily.
-
                                                 
                                                See also family() and setCurrentFont().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setItalic ( bool b ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-If b is TRUE sets the current format to italic; otherwise sets
-the current format to non-italic.
-
                                                 
                                                See also italic().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setLinkUnderline ( bool ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                Sets whether hypertext links will be underlined.
-See the "linkUnderline" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setMaxLogLines ( int limit ) [slot]
-
                                                
-Sets the maximum number of lines a TQTextEdit can hold in LogText mode to limit. If limit is -1 (the default), this
-signifies an unlimited number of lines.
-
                                                 Warning: Never use formatting tags that span more than one line
-when the maximum log lines is set. When lines are removed from the
-top of the buffer it could result in an unbalanced tag pair, i.e.
-the left formatting tag is removed before the right one.
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setMimeSourceFactory ( TQMimeSourceFactory * factory ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Sets the text edit's mimesource factory to factory. See
-TQMimeSourceFactory for further details.
-
                                                 
                                                See also mimeSourceFactory().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setModified ( bool m ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                Sets whether the document has been modified by the user to m.
-See the "modified" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setOverwriteMode ( bool b ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                Sets the text edit's overwrite mode to b.
-See the "overwriteMode" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setPaper ( const TQBrush & pap ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                Sets the background (paper) brush to pap.
-See the "paper" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setParagraphBackgroundColor ( int para, const TQColor & bg ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Sets the background color of the paragraph para to bg.
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setPointSize ( int s ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Sets the point size of the current format to s.
-
                                                 Note that if s is zero or negative, the behaviour of this
-function is not defined.
-
                                                 
                                                See also pointSize(), setCurrentFont(), and setFamily().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setReadOnly ( bool b ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                Sets whether the text edit is read-only to b.
-See the "readOnly" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setSelection ( int paraFrom, int indexFrom, int paraTo, int indexTo, int selNum = 0 ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Sets a selection which starts at position indexFrom in
-paragraph paraFrom and ends at position indexTo in paragraph
-paraTo.
-
                                                 Any existing selections which have a different id (selNum) are
-left alone, but if an existing selection has the same id as selNum it is removed and replaced by this selection.
-
                                                 Uses the selection settings of selection selNum. If selNum
-is 0, this is the default selection.
-
                                                 The cursor is moved to the end of the selection if selNum is 0,
-otherwise the cursor position remains unchanged.
-
                                                 
                                                See also getSelection() and selectedText.
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setSelectionAttributes ( int selNum, const TQColor & back, bool invertText ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Sets the background color of selection number selNum to back
-and specifies whether the text of this selection should be
-inverted with invertText.
-
                                                 This only works for selNum > 0. The default selection (selNum == 0) gets its attributes from the text edit's
-colorGroup().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setStyleSheet ( TQStyleSheet * styleSheet ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Sets the stylesheet to use with this text edit to styleSheet.
-Changes will only take effect for new text added with setText() or
-append().
-
                                                 
                                                See also styleSheet().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setTabChangesFocus ( bool b ) [slot]
-
                                                Sets whether TAB changes focus or is accepted as input to b.
-See the "tabChangesFocus" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setTabStopWidth ( int ts ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                Sets the tab stop width in pixels to ts.
-See the "tabStopWidth" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setText ( const TQString & txt ) [slot]
-
                                                Sets the text edit's text to txt.
-See the "text" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setText ( const TQString & text, const TQString & context ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                 Changes the text of the text edit to the string text and the
-context to context. Any previous text is removed.
-
                                                 text may be interpreted either as plain text or as rich text,
-depending on the textFormat(). The default setting is AutoText,
-i.e. the text edit auto-detects the format from text.
-
                                                 For rich text the rendering style and available tags are defined
-by a styleSheet(); see TQStyleSheet for details.
-
                                                 The optional context is a path which the text edit's
-TQMimeSourceFactory uses to resolve the locations of files and
-images. (See TQTextEdit::TQTextEdit().) It is passed to the text
-edit's TQMimeSourceFactory when quering data.
-
                                                 Note that the undo/redo history is cleared by this function.
-
                                                 
                                                See also text and textFormat.
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setTextFormat ( TextFormat f ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                Sets the text format: rich text, plain text, log text or auto text to f.
-See the "textFormat" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setUnderline ( bool b ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-If b is TRUE sets the current format to underline; otherwise
-sets the current format to non-underline.
-
                                                 
                                                See also underline().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setUndoDepth ( int d ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                Sets the depth of the undo history to d.
-See the "undoDepth" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setUndoRedoEnabled ( bool b ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                Sets whether undo/redo is enabled to b.
-See the "undoRedoEnabled" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setVerticalAlignment ( VerticalAlignment a ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Sets the vertical alignment of the current format, i.e. of the
-text, to a.
-
                                                 
                                                See also color() and paper.
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setWordWrap ( WordWrap mode ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                Sets the word wrap mode to mode.
-See the "wordWrap" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setWrapColumnOrWidth ( int ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                Sets the position (in pixels or columns depending on the wrap mode) where text will be wrapped.
-See the "wrapColumnOrWidth" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::setWrapPolicy ( WrapPolicy policy ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                Sets the word wrap policy, at whitespace or anywhere to policy.
-See the "wrapPolicy" property for details.
-
                                                TQStyleSheet * TQTextEdit::styleSheet () const
-
                                                
-Returns the TQStyleSheet which is being used by this text edit.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setStyleSheet().
-
-
                                                Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, and mdi/application.cpp.
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::sync () [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-TQTextEdit is optimized for large amounts text. One of its
-optimizations is to format only the visible text, formatting the rest
-on demand, e.g. as the user scrolls, so you don't usually need to
-call this function.
-
                                                 In some situations you may want to force the whole text
-to be formatted. For example, if after calling setText(), you wanted
-to know the height of the document (using contentsHeight()), you
-would call this function first.
-
-
                                                TQSyntaxHighlighter * TQTextEdit::syntaxHighlighter () const
-
                                                
-Returns the TQSyntaxHighlighter set on this TQTextEdit. 0 is
-returned if no syntax highlighter is set.
-
-
                                                bool TQTextEdit::tabChangesFocus () const
-
                                                Returns TRUE if TAB changes focus or is accepted as input; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "tabChangesFocus" property for details.
-
                                                int TQTextEdit::tabStopWidth () const
-
                                                Returns the tab stop width in pixels.
-See the "tabStopWidth" property for details.
-
                                                TQString TQTextEdit::text () const
-
                                                Returns the text edit's text.
-See the "text" property for details.
-
                                                TQString TQTextEdit::text ( int para ) const
-
                                                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                 Returns the text of paragraph para.
-
                                                 If textFormat() is RichText the text will contain HTML
-formatting tags.
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::textChanged () [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted whenever the text in the text edit changes.
-
                                                 
                                                See also text and append().
-
-
                                                Examples: qwerty/qwerty.cpp and rot13/rot13.cpp.
-
                                                TQTextCursor * TQTextEdit::textCursor () const [protected]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 Returns the text edit's text cursor.
-
                                                 Warning: TQTextCursor is not in the public API, but in special
-circumstances you might wish to use it.
-
-
                                                TextFormat TQTextEdit::textFormat () const
-
                                                Returns the text format: rich text, plain text, log text or auto text.
-See the "textFormat" property for details.
-
                                                bool TQTextEdit::underline () const
-
                                                
-Returns TRUE if the current format is underlined; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                                 
                                                See also setUnderline().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::undo () [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Undoes the last operation.
-
                                                 If there is no operation to undo, i.e. there is no undo step in
-the undo/redo history, nothing happens.
-
                                                 
                                                See also undoAvailable(), redo(), and undoDepth.
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::undoAvailable ( bool yes ) [signal]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This signal is emitted when the availability of undo changes. If
-yes is TRUE, then undo() will work until undoAvailable( FALSE )
-is next emitted.
-
                                                 
                                                See also undo() and undoDepth.
-
-
                                                int TQTextEdit::undoDepth () const
-
                                                Returns the depth of the undo history.
-See the "undoDepth" property for details.
-
                                                WordWrap TQTextEdit::wordWrap () const
-
                                                Returns the word wrap mode.
-See the "wordWrap" property for details.
-
                                                int TQTextEdit::wrapColumnOrWidth () const
-
                                                Returns the position (in pixels or columns depending on the wrap mode) where text will be wrapped.
-See the "wrapColumnOrWidth" property for details.
-
                                                WrapPolicy TQTextEdit::wrapPolicy () const
-
                                                Returns the word wrap policy, at whitespace or anywhere.
-See the "wrapPolicy" property for details.
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::zoomIn ( int range ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Zooms in on the text by making the base font size range
-points larger and recalculating all font sizes to be the new size.
-This does not change the size of any images.
-
                                                 
                                                See also zoomOut().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::zoomIn () [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                 Zooms in on the text by making the base font size one point
-larger and recalculating all font sizes to be the new size. This
-does not change the size of any images.
-
                                                 
                                                See also zoomOut().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::zoomOut ( int range ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Zooms out on the text by making the base font size range points
-smaller and recalculating all font sizes to be the new size. This
-does not change the size of any images.
-
                                                 
                                                See also zoomIn().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::zoomOut () [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-
-
                                                 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                 Zooms out on the text by making the base font size one point
-smaller and recalculating all font sizes to be the new size. This
-does not change the size of any images.
-
                                                 
                                                See also zoomIn().
-
-
                                                void TQTextEdit::zoomTo ( int size ) [virtual slot]
-
                                                
-Zooms the text by making the base font size size points and
-recalculating all font sizes to be the new size. This does not
-change the size of any images.
-
-
                                                Property Documentation
                                                
-
                                                AutoFormatting autoFormatting
                                                
-
                                                This property holds the enabled set of auto formatting features.
-
                                                The value can be any combination of the values in the AutoFormatting enum.  The default is AutoAll. Choose AutoNone
-to disable all automatic formatting.
-
                                                 Currently, the only automatic formatting feature provided is AutoBulletList; future versions of TQt may offer more.
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setAutoFormatting() and get this property's value with autoFormatting().
-
                                                TQString documentTitle
                                                
-
                                                This property holds the title of the document parsed from the text.
-
                                                For PlainText the title will be an empty string. For RichText the title will be the text between the <title> tags,
-if present, otherwise an empty string.
-
-
                                                Get this property's value with documentTitle().
-
                                                bool hasSelectedText
                                                
-
                                                This property holds whether some text is selected in selection 0.
-
                                                
-
                                                Get this property's value with hasSelectedText().
-
                                                int length
                                                
-
                                                This property holds the number of characters in the text.
-
                                                
-
                                                Get this property's value with length().
-
                                                bool linkUnderline
                                                
-
                                                This property holds whether hypertext links will be underlined.
-
                                                If TRUE (the default) hypertext links will be displayed
-underlined. If FALSE links will not be displayed underlined.
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setLinkUnderline() and get this property's value with linkUnderline().
-
                                                bool modified
                                                
-
                                                This property holds whether the document has been modified by the user.
-
                                                
-
                                                Set this property's value with setModified() and get this property's value with isModified().
-
                                                bool overwriteMode
                                                
-
                                                This property holds the text edit's overwrite mode.
-
                                                If FALSE (the default) characters entered by the user are inserted
-with any characters to the right being moved out of the way. If
-TRUE, the editor is in overwrite mode, i.e. characters entered by
-the user overwrite any characters to the right of the cursor
-position.
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setOverwriteMode() and get this property's value with isOverwriteMode().
-
                                                TQBrush paper
                                                
-
                                                This property holds the background (paper) brush.
-
                                                The brush that is currently used to draw the background of the
-text edit. The initial setting is an empty brush.
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setPaper() and get this property's value with paper().
-
                                                bool readOnly
                                                
-
                                                This property holds whether the text edit is read-only.
-
                                                In a read-only text edit the user can only navigate through the
-text and select text; modifying the text is not possible.
-
                                                 This property's default is FALSE.
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setReadOnly() and get this property's value with isReadOnly().
-
                                                TQString selectedText
                                                
-
                                                This property holds the selected text (from selection 0) or an empty string if there is no currently selected text (in selection 0).
-
                                                The text is always returned as PlainText if the textFormat() is
-PlainText or AutoText, otherwise it is returned as HTML.
-
                                                 
                                                See also hasSelectedText.
-
-
                                                Get this property's value with selectedText().
-
                                                bool tabChangesFocus
                                                 
                                                This property holds whether TAB changes focus or is accepted as input.
-
                                                In some occasions text edits should not allow the user to input
-tabulators or change indentation using the TAB key, as this breaks
-the focus chain. The default is FALSE.
-
                                                 
-
                                                Set this property's value with setTabChangesFocus() and get this property's value with tabChangesFocus().
-
                                                int tabStopWidth
                                                
-
                                                This property holds the tab stop width in pixels.
-
                                                
-
                                                Set this property's value with setTabStopWidth() and get this property's value with tabStopWidth().
-
                                                TQString text
                                                
-
                                                This property holds the text edit's text.
-
                                                There is no default text.
-
                                                 On setting, any previous text is deleted.
-
                                                 The text may be interpreted either as plain text or as rich text,
-depending on the textFormat(). The default setting is AutoText,
-i.e. the text edit auto-detects the format of the text.
-
                                                 For richtext, calling text() on an editable TQTextEdit will cause
-the text to be regenerated from the textedit. This may mean that
-the TQString returned may not be exactly the same as the one that
-was set.
-
                                                 
                                                See also textFormat.
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setText() and get this property's value with text().
-
                                                TextFormat textFormat
                                                
-
                                                This property holds the text format: rich text, plain text, log text or auto text.
-
                                                The text format is one of the following:
-
                                                  
-
                                                •  PlainText - all characters, except newlines, are displayed
-verbatim, including spaces. Whenever a newline appears in the text
-the text edit inserts a hard line break and begins a new
-paragraph.
-
                                                •  RichText - rich text rendering. The available styles are
-defined in the default stylesheet TQStyleSheet::defaultSheet().
-
                                                •  LogText -  optimized mode for very large texts. Supports a very
-limited set of formatting tags (color, bold, underline and italic
-settings).
-
                                                •  AutoText - this is the default. The text edit autodetects which
-rendering style is best, PlainText or RichText. This is done
-by using the TQStyleSheet::mightBeRichText() function.
-
                                                
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setTextFormat() and get this property's value with textFormat().
-
                                                int undoDepth
                                                
-
                                                This property holds the depth of the undo history.
-
                                                The maximum number of steps in the undo/redo history. The default
-is 100.
-
                                                 
                                                See also undo() and redo().
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setUndoDepth() and get this property's value with undoDepth().
-
                                                bool undoRedoEnabled
                                                
-
                                                This property holds whether undo/redo is enabled.
-
                                                When changing this property, the undo/redo history is cleared.
-
                                                 The default is TRUE.
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setUndoRedoEnabled() and get this property's value with isUndoRedoEnabled().
-
                                                WordWrap wordWrap
                                                
-
                                                This property holds the word wrap mode.
-
                                                The default mode is WidgetWidth which causes words to be
-wrapped at the right edge of the text edit. Wrapping occurs at
-whitespace, keeping whole words intact. If you want wrapping to
-occur within words use setWrapPolicy(). If you set a wrap mode of
-FixedPixelWidth or FixedColumnWidth you should also call
-setWrapColumnOrWidth() with the width you want.
-
                                                 
                                                See also WordWrap, wrapColumnOrWidth, and wrapPolicy.
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setWordWrap() and get this property's value with wordWrap().
-
                                                int wrapColumnOrWidth
                                                
-
                                                This property holds the position (in pixels or columns depending on the wrap mode) where text will be wrapped.
-
                                                If the wrap mode is FixedPixelWidth, the value is the number of
-pixels from the left edge of the text edit at which text should be
-wrapped. If the wrap mode is FixedColumnWidth, the value is the
-column number (in character columns) from the left edge of the
-text edit at which text should be wrapped.
-
                                                 
                                                See also wordWrap.
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setWrapColumnOrWidth() and get this property's value with wrapColumnOrWidth().
-
                                                WrapPolicy wrapPolicy
                                                
-
                                                This property holds the word wrap policy, at whitespace or anywhere.
-
                                                Defines where text can be wrapped when word wrap mode is not NoWrap. The choices are AtWordBoundary (the default), Anywhere and AtWordOrDocumentBoundary
-
                                                 
                                                See also wordWrap.
-
-
                                                Set this property's value with setWrapPolicy() and get this property's value with wrapPolicy().
-
-
                                                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                
-
-
                                                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                TQt 3.3.8
                                                
-
                                                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qtextencoder-members.html b/doc/html/qtextencoder-members.html
index bed225957..dbe9c69f5 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtextencoder-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtextencoder-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qtextencoder.html b/doc/html/qtextencoder.html
index 1a6637364..2186aafb1 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtextencoder.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtextencoder.html
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                                The TQTextEncoder class provides a state-based encoder.
 More...
 
                                                All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
                                                
-
                                                #include <qtextcodec.h>
+
                                                #include <ntqtextcodec.h>
 
                                                List of all member functions.
 
                                                Public Members
                                                
 
                                                  
@@ -49,18 +49,18 @@ The TQTextEncoder class provides a state-based encoder.
 
 
                                                   The encoder converts Unicode into another format, remembering any
 state that is required between calls.
-
                                                   
                                                  See also TQTextCodec::makeEncoder() and Internationalization with TQt.
+
                                                   
                                                  See also TQTextCodec::makeEncoder() and Internationalization with TQt.
 
 
                                                  Member Function Documentation
                                                  
 
                                                  TQTextEncoder::~TQTextEncoder () [virtual]
 
                                                  
 Destroys the encoder.
 
-
                                                  TQCString TQTextEncoder::fromUnicode ( const TQString & uc, int & lenInOut ) [pure virtual]
+
                                                  TQCString TQTextEncoder::fromUnicode ( const TQString & uc, int & lenInOut ) [pure virtual]
 
                                                  
 
 
                                                   Converts lenInOut characters (not bytes) from uc, producing
-a TQCString. lenInOut will be set to the length of the result (in bytes).
+a TQCString. lenInOut will be set to the length of the result (in bytes).
 
                                                   The encoder is free to record state to use when subsequent calls
 are made to this function (for example, it might change modes with
 escape sequences if needed during the encoding of one string, then
diff --git a/doc/html/qtextistream-members.html b/doc/html/qtextistream-members.html
index 54c516270..e64909026 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtextistream-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtextistream-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -36,28 +36,28 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                                  
 
 
                                                  
diff --git a/doc/html/qtextistream.html b/doc/html/qtextistream.html
index efaba34ae..c157af1e2 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtextistream.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtextistream.html
@@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                                  The TQTextIStream class is a convenience class for input streams.
 More...
 
                                                  All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
                                                  
-
                                                  #include <qtextstream.h>
-
                                                  Inherits TQTextStream.
+
                                                  #include <ntqtextstream.h>
+
                                                  Inherits TQTextStream.
 
                                                  List of all member functions.
 
                                                  Public Members
                                                  
 
                                                    
@@ -51,11 +51,11 @@ The TQTextIStream class is a convenience class for input streams.
 
                                                     
 
 
                                                     This class provides a shorthand for creating simple input
-TQTextStreams without having to pass a mode argument to the
+TQTextStreams without having to pass a mode argument to the
 constructor.
 
                                                     This class makes it easy, for example, to write things like this:
 
                                                    -    TQString data = "123 456";
+    TQString data = "123 456";
     int a, b;
     TQTextIStream(&data) >> a >> b;
     
                                                    
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ constructor.
 
                                                     
                                                    See also TQTextOStream, Input/Output and Networking, and Text Related Classes.
 
 
                                                    Member Function Documentation
                                                    
-
                                                    TQTextIStream::TQTextIStream ( const TQString * s )
+
                                                    TQTextIStream::TQTextIStream ( const TQString * s )
 
                                                    
 
 
                                                     Constructs a stream to read from the string s.
diff --git a/doc/html/qtextostream-members.html b/doc/html/qtextostream-members.html
index bd11d90da..2dfa17d9f 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtextostream-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtextostream-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -36,28 +36,28 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                                    
 
 
                                                    
diff --git a/doc/html/qtextostream.html b/doc/html/qtextostream.html
index e56fcf4ee..e01b3afb3 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtextostream.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtextostream.html
@@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                                    The TQTextOStream class is a convenience class for output streams.
 More...
 
                                                    All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
                                                    
-
                                                    #include <qtextstream.h>
-
                                                    Inherits TQTextStream.
+
                                                    #include <ntqtextstream.h>
+
                                                    Inherits TQTextStream.
 
                                                    List of all member functions.
 
                                                    Public Members
                                                    
 
                                                      
@@ -51,18 +51,18 @@ The TQTextOStream class is a convenience class for output streams.
 
                                                       
 
 
                                                       This class provides a shorthand for creating simple output
-TQTextStreams without having to pass a mode argument to the
+TQTextStreams without having to pass a mode argument to the
 constructor.
 
                                                       This makes it easy for example, to write things like this:
 
                                                      -    TQString result;
+    TQString result;
     TQTextOStream(&result) << "pi = " << 3.14;
     
                                                      
  
 
                                                      See also Input/Output and Networking and Text Related Classes.
 
 
                                                      Member Function Documentation
                                                      
-
                                                      TQTextOStream::TQTextOStream ( TQString * s )
+
                                                      TQTextOStream::TQTextOStream ( TQString * s )
 
                                                      
 
 
                                                       Constructs a stream to write to string s.
diff --git a/doc/html/qtextstream-h.html b/doc/html/qtextstream-h.html
index 309eaabfa..342478c6e 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtextstream-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtextstream-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qtextstream.h Include File
+ntqtextstream.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                      
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                      TQTextStream Class Reference
                                                      
-
-
                                                      The TQTextStream class provides basic functions for reading
-and writing text using a TQIODevice.
-More...
-
                                                      All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
                                                      
-
                                                      #include <qtextstream.h>
-
                                                      Inherited by TQTextIStream and TQTextOStream.
-
                                                      List of all member functions.
-
                                                      Public Members
                                                      
-
-
                                                      Detailed Description
                                                      
-
-
-
-The TQTextStream class provides basic functions for reading
-and writing text using a TQIODevice.
-
                                                       
-
-
-
                                                       The text stream class has a functional interface that is very
-similar to that of the standard C++ iostream class.
-
                                                       TQt provides several global functions similar to the ones in iostream:
-
                                                      
-
                                                       Function Meaning
-
                                                       bin sets the TQTextStream to read/write binary numbers
-
                                                       oct sets the TQTextStream to read/write octal numbers
-
                                                       dec sets the TQTextStream to read/write decimal numbers
-
                                                       hex sets the TQTextStream to read/write hexadecimal numbers
-
                                                       endl forces a line break
-
                                                       flush forces the TQIODevice to flush any buffered data
-
                                                       ws eats any available whitespace (on input)
-
                                                       reset resets the TQTextStream to its default mode (see reset())
-
                                                       qSetW(int) sets the field width
-to the given argument
-
                                                       qSetFill(int) sets the fill character to the given argument
-
                                                       qSetPrecision(int) sets the precision to the given argument
-
                                                      
-
                                                       Warning: By default TQTextStream will automatically detect whether
-integers in the stream are in decimal, octal, hexadecimal or
-binary format when reading from the stream. In particular, a
-leading '0' signifies octal, i.e. the sequence "0100" will be
-interpreted as 64.
-
                                                       The TQTextStream class reads and writes text; it is not appropriate
-for dealing with binary data (but TQDataStream is).
-
                                                       By default, output of Unicode text (i.e. TQString) is done using
-the local 8-bit encoding. This can be changed using the
-setEncoding() method. For input, the TQTextStream will auto-detect
-standard Unicode "byte order marked" text files; otherwise the
-local 8-bit encoding is used.
-
                                                       The TQIODevice is set in the constructor, or later using
-setDevice(). If the end of the input is reached atEnd() returns
-TRUE. Data can be read into variables of the appropriate type
-using the operator>>() overloads, or read in its entirety into a
-single string using read(), or read a line at a time using
-readLine(). Whitespace can be skipped over using skipWhiteSpace().
-You can set flags for the stream using flags() or setf(). The
-stream also supports width(), precision() and fill(); use reset()
-to reset the defaults.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also TQDataStream, Input/Output and Networking, and Text Related Classes.
-
-
                                                      Member Type Documentation
                                                      
-
                                                      TQTextStream::Encoding
                                                      
-
-
                                                        
-
                                                      • TQTextStream::Locale
-
                                                      • TQTextStream::Latin1
-
                                                      • TQTextStream::Unicode
-
                                                      • TQTextStream::UnicodeNetworkOrder
-
                                                      • TQTextStream::UnicodeReverse
-
                                                      • TQTextStream::RawUnicode
-
                                                      • TQTextStream::UnicodeUTF8
-
                                                       See setEncoding() for an explanation of the encodings.
-
-
                                                      Member Function Documentation
                                                      
-
                                                      TQTextStream::TQTextStream ()
-
                                                      
-Constructs a data stream that has no IO device.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream::TQTextStream ( TQIODevice * iod )
-
                                                      
-Constructs a text stream that uses the IO device iod.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream::TQTextStream ( TQString * str, int filemode )
-
                                                      
-Constructs a text stream that operates on the Unicode TQString, str, through an internal device. The filemode argument is
-passed to the device's open() function; see TQIODevice::mode().
-
                                                       If you set an encoding or codec with setEncoding() or setCodec(),
-this setting is ignored for text streams that operate on TQString.
-
                                                       Example:
-
                                                      -    TQString str;
-    TQTextStream ts( &str, IO_WriteOnly );
-    ts << "pi = " << 3.14; // str == "pi = 3.14"
-    
                                                      
- 
-
                                                       Writing data to the text stream will modify the contents of the
-string. The string will be expanded when data is written beyond
-the end of the string. Note that the string will not be truncated:
-
                                                      -    TQString str = "pi = 3.14";
-    TQTextStream ts( &str, IO_WriteOnly );
-    ts <<  "2+2 = " << 2+2; // str == "2+2 = 414"
-    
                                                      
- 
-
                                                       Note that because TQString is Unicode, you should not use
-readRawBytes() or writeRawBytes() on such a stream.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream::TQTextStream ( TQString & str, int filemode )
-
                                                       This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                                       This constructor is equivalent to the constructor taking a TQString*
-parameter.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream::TQTextStream ( TQByteArray a, int mode )
-
                                                      
-Constructs a text stream that operates on the byte array, a,
-through an internal TQBuffer device. The mode argument is passed
-to the device's open() function; see TQIODevice::mode().
-
                                                       Example:
-
                                                      -    TQByteArray array;
-    TQTextStream ts( array, IO_WriteOnly );
-    ts << "pi = " << 3.14 << '\0'; // array == "pi = 3.14"
-    
                                                      
- 
-
                                                       Writing data to the text stream will modify the contents of the
-array. The array will be expanded when data is written beyond the
-end of the string.
-
                                                       Same example, using a TQBuffer:
-
                                                      -    TQByteArray array;
-    TQBuffer buf( array );
-    buf.open( IO_WriteOnly );
-    TQTextStream ts( &buf );
-    ts << "pi = " << 3.14 << '\0'; // array == "pi = 3.14"
-    buf.close();
-    
                                                      
- 
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream::TQTextStream ( FILE * fh, int mode )
-
                                                      
-Constructs a text stream that operates on an existing file handle
-fh through an internal TQFile device. The mode argument is
-passed to the device's open() function; see TQIODevice::mode().
-
                                                       Note that if you create a TQTextStream cout or another name that
-is also used for another variable of a different type, some
-linkers may confuse the two variables, which will often cause
-crashes.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream::~TQTextStream () [virtual]
-
                                                      
-Destroys the text stream.
-
                                                       The destructor does not affect the current IO device.
-
-
                                                      bool TQTextStream::atEnd () const
-
                                                      
-
-
                                                       Returns TRUE if the IO device has reached the end position (end of
-the stream or file) or if there is no IO device set; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also TQIODevice::atEnd().
-
-
                                                      Examples: addressbook/centralwidget.cpp and grapher/grapher.cpp.
-
                                                      TQTextCodec * TQTextStream::codec ()
-
                                                      
-Returns the codec actually used for this stream.
-
                                                       If Unicode is automatically detected in input, a codec with name() "ISO-10646-UCS-2" is returned.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also setCodec().
-
-
                                                      TQIODevice * TQTextStream::device () const
-
                                                      
-
-
                                                       Returns the IO device currently set.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also setDevice() and unsetDevice().
-
-
                                                      bool TQTextStream::eof () const
-
                                                      
-
                                                       This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                                       This function has been renamed to atEnd().
-
                                                       
                                                      See also TQIODevice::atEnd().
-
-
                                                      Example: chart/chartform_files.cpp.
-
                                                      int TQTextStream::fill () const
-
                                                      
-
-
                                                       Returns the fill character. The default value is ' ' (space).
-
-
                                                      int TQTextStream::fill ( int f )
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Sets the fill character to f. Returns the previous fill character.
-
-
                                                      int TQTextStream::flags () const
-
                                                      
-
-
                                                       Returns the current stream flags. The default value is 0.
-
                                                       
                                                      
-
                                                       Flag Meaning
-
                                                       skipws Not currently used; whitespace always skipped
-
                                                       left Numeric fields are left-aligned
-
                                                       right
-Not currently used (by default, numerics are right-aligned)
-
                                                       internal Puts any padding spaces between +/- and value
-
                                                       bin Output and input only in binary
-
                                                       oct Output and input only in octal
-
                                                       dec Output and input only in decimal
-
                                                       hex Output and input only in hexadecimal
-
                                                       showbase
-Annotates numeric outputs with 0b, 0, or 0x if in bin,
-oct, or hex format
-
                                                       showpoint Not currently used
-
                                                       uppercase Uses 0B and 0X rather than 0b and 0x
-
                                                       showpos Shows + for positive numeric values
-
                                                       scientific Uses scientific notation for floating point values
-
                                                       fixed Uses fixed-point notation for floating point values
-
                                                      
-
                                                       Note that unless bin, oct, dec, or hex is set, the
-input base is octal if the value starts with 0, hexadecimal if it
-starts with 0x, binary if it starts with 0b, and decimal
-otherwise.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also setf() and unsetf().
-
-
                                                      int TQTextStream::flags ( int f )
-
                                                      
-
-
                                                       This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Sets the stream flags to f. Returns the previous stream flags.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also setf() and unsetf().
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator<< ( TQChar c )
-
                                                      
-Writes character char to the stream and returns a reference to
-the stream.
-
                                                       The character c is assumed to be Latin1 encoded independent of
-the Encoding set for the TQTextStream.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator<< ( char c )
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Writes character c to the stream and returns a reference to the
-stream.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator<< ( signed short i )
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Writes a short integer i to the stream and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator<< ( unsigned short i )
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Writes an unsigned short integer i to the stream and
-returns a reference to the stream.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator<< ( signed int i )
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Writes an int i to the stream and returns a reference to the
-stream.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator<< ( unsigned int i )
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Writes an unsigned int i to the stream and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator<< ( signed long i )
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Writes a long int i to the stream and returns a reference
-to the stream.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator<< ( unsigned long i )
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Writes an unsigned long int i to the stream and
-returns a reference to the stream.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator<< ( float f )
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Writes a float f to the stream and returns a reference to
-the stream.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator<< ( double f )
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Writes a double f to the stream and returns a reference to
-the stream.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator<< ( const char * s )
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Writes a string to the stream and returns a reference to the
-stream.
-
                                                       The string s is assumed to be Latin1 encoded independent of the
-Encoding set for the TQTextStream.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator<< ( const TQString & s )
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Writes s to the stream and returns a reference to the stream.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator<< ( const TQCString & s )
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Writes s to the stream and returns a reference to the stream.
-
                                                       The string s is assumed to be Latin1 encoded independent of the
-Encoding set for the TQTextStream.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator<< ( void * ptr )
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Writes a pointer to the stream and returns a reference to the
-stream.
-
                                                       The ptr is output as an unsigned long hexadecimal integer.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator>> ( TQChar & c )
-
                                                      
-Reads a char c from the stream and returns a reference to the
-stream. Note that whitespace is not skipped.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator>> ( char & c )
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Reads a char c from the stream and returns a reference to the
-stream. Note that whitespace is skipped.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator>> ( signed short & i )
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Reads a signed short integer i from the stream and returns a
-reference to the stream. See flags() for an explanation of the
-expected input format.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator>> ( unsigned short & i )
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Reads an unsigned short integer i from the stream and
-returns a reference to the stream. See flags() for an explanation
-of the expected input format.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator>> ( signed int & i )
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Reads a signed int i from the stream and returns a reference
-to the stream. See flags() for an explanation of the expected
-input format.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator>> ( unsigned int & i )
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Reads an unsigned int i from the stream and returns a
-reference to the stream. See flags() for an explanation of the
-expected input format.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator>> ( signed long & i )
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Reads a signed long int i from the stream and returns a
-reference to the stream. See flags() for an explanation of the
-expected input format.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator>> ( unsigned long & i )
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Reads an unsigned long int i from the stream and returns a
-reference to the stream. See flags() for an explanation of the
-expected input format.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator>> ( float & f )
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Reads a float f from the stream and returns a reference to
-the stream. See flags() for an explanation of the expected input
-format.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator>> ( double & f )
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Reads a double f from the stream and returns a reference to
-the stream. See flags() for an explanation of the expected input
-format.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator>> ( char * s )
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Reads a "word" from the stream into s and returns a reference
-to the stream.
-
                                                       A word consists of characters for which isspace() returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator>> ( TQString & str )
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Reads a "word" from the stream into str and returns a reference
-to the stream.
-
                                                       A word consists of characters for which isspace() returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator>> ( TQCString & str )
-
                                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Reads a "word" from the stream into str and returns a reference
-to the stream.
-
                                                       A word consists of characters for which isspace() returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                      int TQTextStream::precision () const
-
                                                      
-
-
                                                       Returns the precision. The default value is 6.
-
-
                                                      int TQTextStream::precision ( int p )
-
                                                      
-
-
                                                       This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Sets the precision to p. Returns the previous precision setting.
-
-
                                                      TQString TQTextStream::read ()
-
                                                      
-Reads the entire stream from the current position, and returns a string
-containing the text.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also TQIODevice::readLine().
-
-
                                                      Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, qdir/qdir.cpp, and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
-
                                                      TQString TQTextStream::readLine ()
-
                                                      
-Reads a line from the stream and returns a string containing the
-text.
-
                                                       The returned string does not contain any trailing newline or
-carriage return. Note that this is different from
-TQIODevice::readLine(), which does not strip the newline at the end
-of the line.
-
                                                       On EOF you will get a TQString that is null. On reading an empty
-line the returned TQString is empty but not null.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also TQIODevice::readLine().
-
-
                                                      Examples: addressbook/centralwidget.cpp, chart/element.cpp, and network/clientserver/server/server.cpp.
-
                                                      TQTextStream & TQTextStream::readRawBytes ( char * s, uint len )
-
                                                      
-Reads len bytes from the stream into s and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
                                                       The buffer s must be preallocated.
-
                                                       Note that no encoding is done by this function.
-
                                                       Warning: The behavior of this function is undefined unless the
-stream's encoding is set to Unicode or Latin1.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also TQIODevice::readBlock().
-
-
                                                      void TQTextStream::reset ()
-
                                                      
-Resets the text stream.
-
                                                       
                                                        
-
                                                      •  All flags are set to 0.
-
                                                      •  The field width is set to 0.
-
                                                      •  The fill character is set to ' ' (Space).
-
                                                      •  The precision is set to 6.
-
                                                      
-
                                                       
                                                      See also setf(), width(), fill(), and precision().
-
-
                                                      void TQTextStream::setCodec ( TQTextCodec * codec )
-
                                                      
-Sets the codec for this stream to codec. Will not try to
-autodetect Unicode.
-
                                                       Note that this function should be called before any data is read
-to/written from the stream.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also setEncoding() and codec().
-
-
                                                      Example: qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
-
                                                      void TQTextStream::setDevice ( TQIODevice * iod )
-
                                                      
-Sets the IO device to iod.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also device() and unsetDevice().
-
-
                                                      void TQTextStream::setEncoding ( Encoding e )
-
                                                      
-Sets the encoding of this stream to e, where e is one of the
-following values:
-
                                                      
-
                                                       Encoding Meaning
-
                                                       Locale
-Uses local file format (Latin1 if locale is not set), but
-autodetecting Unicode(utf16) on input.
-
                                                       Unicode
-Uses Unicode(utf16) for input and output. Output will be
-written in the order most efficient for the current platform
-(i.e. the order used internally in TQString).
-
                                                       UnicodeUTF8
-Using Unicode(utf8) for input and output. If you use it for
-input it will autodetect utf16 and use it instead of utf8.
-
                                                       Latin1
-ISO-8859-1. Will not autodetect utf16.
-
                                                       UnicodeNetworkOrder
-Uses network order Unicode(utf16) for input and output.
-Useful when reading Unicode data that does not start with the
-byte order marker.
-
                                                       UnicodeReverse
-Uses reverse network order Unicode(utf16) for input and
-output. Useful when reading Unicode data that does not start
-with the byte order marker or when writing data that should be
-read by buggy Windows applications.
-
                                                       RawUnicode
-Like Unicode, but does not write the byte order marker nor
-does it auto-detect the byte order. Useful only when writing to
-non-persistent storage used by a single process.
-
                                                      
-
                                                       Locale and all Unicode encodings, except RawUnicode, will look
-at the first two bytes in an input stream to determine the byte
-order. The initial byte order marker will be stripped off before
-data is read.
-
                                                       Note that this function should be called before any data is read to
-or written from the stream.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also setCodec().
-
-
                                                      Examples: addressbook/centralwidget.cpp, network/httpd/httpd.cpp, and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
-
                                                      int TQTextStream::setf ( int bits )
-
                                                      
-
-
                                                       Sets the stream flag bits bits. Returns the previous stream
-flags.
-
                                                       Equivalent to flags( flags() | bits ).
-
                                                       
                                                      See also unsetf().
-
-
                                                      int TQTextStream::setf ( int bits, int mask )
-
                                                      
-
-
                                                       This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Sets the stream flag bits bits with a bit mask mask. Returns
-the previous stream flags.
-
                                                       Equivalent to flags( (flags() & ~mask) | (bits & mask) ).
-
                                                       
                                                      See also unsetf().
-
-
                                                      void TQTextStream::skipWhiteSpace ()
-
                                                      
-Positions the read pointer at the first non-whitespace character.
-
-
                                                      void TQTextStream::unsetDevice ()
-
                                                      
-Unsets the IO device. Equivalent to setDevice( 0 ).
-
                                                       
                                                      See also device() and setDevice().
-
-
                                                      int TQTextStream::unsetf ( int bits )
-
                                                      
-
-
                                                       Clears the stream flag bits bits. Returns the previous stream
-flags.
-
                                                       Equivalent to flags( flags() & ~mask ).
-
                                                       
                                                      See also setf().
-
-
                                                      int TQTextStream::width () const
-
                                                      
-
-
                                                       Returns the field width. The default value is 0.
-
-
                                                      int TQTextStream::width ( int w )
-
                                                      
-
-
                                                       This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Sets the field width to w. Returns the previous field width.
-
-
                                                      TQTextStream & TQTextStream::writeRawBytes ( const char * s, uint len )
-
                                                      
-Writes the len bytes from s to the stream and returns a
-reference to the stream.
-
                                                       Note that no encoding is done by this function.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also TQIODevice::writeBlock().
-
-
-
                                                      
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                      
-
-
                                                      Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                      TQt 3.3.8
                                                      
-
                                                      
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qtextview-h.html b/doc/html/qtextview-h.html
index 7ee64da40..b046c1dd4 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtextview-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtextview-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qtextview.h Include File
+ntqtextview.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                      
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                      TQTextView Class Reference
                                                      [obsolete]
                                                      
-
-
                                                      The TQTextView class provides a rich-text viewer.
-More...
-
                                                      #include <qtextview.h>
-
                                                      Inherits TQTextEdit.
-
                                                      List of all member functions.
-
                                                      Properties
                                                      
-
                                                        
-
                                                      • bool modified - whether the text view's contents have been modified  (read only)
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • bool overwriteMode - whether new text overwrites or pushes aside existing text  (read only)
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • bool readOnly - whether the text view's contents are read only  (read only)
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • int undoDepth - the number of undoable steps  (read only)
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • bool undoRedoEnabled - whether undo and redo are enabled  (read only)
                                                        • 
-
                                                      
-
                                                      Detailed Description
                                                      
- 
-The TQTextView class provides a rich-text viewer.
-
                                                       This class is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                                       This class wraps a read-only TQTextEdit.
-Use a TQTextEdit instead, and call setReadOnly(TRUE)
-to disable editing.
-
-
                                                      Property Documentation
                                                      
-
                                                      bool modified
                                                      
-
                                                      This property holds whether the text view's contents have been modified.
-
                                                      
-
                                                      bool overwriteMode
                                                      
-
                                                      This property holds whether new text overwrites or pushes aside existing text.
-
                                                      
-
                                                      bool readOnly
                                                      
-
                                                      This property holds whether the text view's contents are read only.
-
                                                      
-
                                                      int undoDepth
                                                      
-
                                                      This property holds the number of undoable steps.
-
                                                      
-
                                                      bool undoRedoEnabled
                                                      
-
                                                      This property holds whether undo and redo are enabled.
-
                                                      
-
                                                      
-
                                                      
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                      
-
-
                                                      Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                      TQt 3.3.8
                                                      
-
                                                      
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qthread-h.html b/doc/html/qthread-h.html
index adc8766bd..9500d699c 100644
--- a/doc/html/qthread-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qthread-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qthread.h Include File
+ntqthread.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                      
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                      TQThread Class Reference
                                                      
-
-
                                                      The TQThread class provides platform-independent threads.
-More...
-
                                                      All the functions in this class are thread-safe when TQt is built with thread support.
                                                      
-
                                                      #include <qthread.h>
-
                                                      Inherits TQt.
-
                                                      List of all member functions.
-
                                                      Public Members
                                                      
-
                                                        
-
                                                      • TQThread ( unsigned int stackSize = 0 )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • virtual ~TQThread ()
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • bool wait ( unsigned long time = ULONG_MAX )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • enum Priority { IdlePriority, LowestPriority, LowPriority, NormalPriority, HighPriority, HighestPriority, TimeCriticalPriority, InheritPriority }
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • void start ( Priority priority = InheritPriority )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • void terminate ()
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • bool finished () const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • bool running () const
                                                        • 
-
                                                      
-
                                                      Static Public Members
                                                      
-
                                                        
-
                                                      • TQt::HANDLE currentThread ()
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • void postEvent ( TQObject * receiver, TQEvent * event )  (obsolete)
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • void exit ()
                                                        • 
-
                                                      
-
                                                      Protected Members
                                                      
-
                                                        
-
                                                      • virtual void run () = 0
                                                        • 
-
                                                      
-
                                                      Static Protected Members
                                                      
-
                                                        
-
                                                      • void sleep ( unsigned long secs )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • void msleep ( unsigned long msecs )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      • void usleep ( unsigned long usecs )
                                                        • 
-
                                                      
-
                                                      Detailed Description
                                                      
-
-
-
-The TQThread class provides platform-independent threads.
-
                                                       
-
-
                                                       A TQThread represents a separate thread of control within the
-program; it shares data with all the other threads within the
-process but executes independently in the way that a separate
-program does on a multitasking operating system. Instead of
-starting in main(), TQThreads begin executing in run(). You inherit
-run() to include your code. For example:
-
                                                       
                                                      -    class MyThread : public TQThread {
-
-    public:
-
-        virtual void run();
-
-    };
-
-    void MyThread::run()
-    {
-        for( int count = 0; count < 20; count++ ) {
-            sleep( 1 );
-            qDebug( "Ping!" );
-        }
-    }
-
-    int main()
-    {
-        MyThread a;
-        MyThread b;
-        a.start();
-        b.start();
-        a.wait();
-        b.wait();
-    }
-    
                                                      
- 
-
                                                       This will start two threads, each of which writes Ping! 20 times
-to the screen and exits. The wait() calls at the end of main() are
-necessary because exiting main() ends the program, unceremoniously
-killing all other threads. Each MyThread stops executing when it
-reaches the end of MyThread::run(), just as an application does
-when it leaves main().
-
                                                       
                                                      See also Thread Support in TQt, Environment Classes, and Threading.
-
-
                                                      Member Type Documentation
                                                      
-
                                                      TQThread::Priority
                                                      
-
-
                                                       This enum type indicates how the operating system should schedule
-newly created threads.
-
                                                        
-
                                                      • TQThread::IdlePriority - scheduled only when no other threads are
-running.
-
                                                      • TQThread::LowestPriority - scheduled less often than LowPriority.
-
                                                      • TQThread::LowPriority - scheduled less often than NormalPriority.
-
                                                      • TQThread::NormalPriority - the default priority of the operating
-system.
-
                                                      • TQThread::HighPriority - scheduled more often than NormalPriority.
-
                                                      • TQThread::HighestPriority - scheduled more often then HighPriority.
-
                                                      • TQThread::TimeCriticalPriority - scheduled as often as possible.
-
                                                      • TQThread::InheritPriority - use the same priority as the creating
-thread.  This is the default.
-
                                                      
-
                                                      Member Function Documentation
                                                      
-
                                                      TQThread::TQThread ( unsigned int stackSize = 0 )
-
                                                      
-Constructs a new thread. The thread does not begin executing until
-start() is called.
-
                                                       If stackSize is greater than zero, the maximum stack size is
-set to stackSize bytes, otherwise the maximum stack size is
-automatically determined by the operating system.
-
                                                       Warning: Most operating systems place minimum and maximum limits
-on thread stack sizes. The thread will fail to start if the stack
-size is outside these limits.
-
-
                                                      TQThread::~TQThread () [virtual]
-
                                                      
-TQThread destructor.
-
                                                       Note that deleting a TQThread object will not stop the execution of
-the thread it represents. Deleting a running TQThread (i.e.
-finished() returns FALSE) will probably result in a program crash.
-You can wait() on a thread to make sure that it has finished.
-
-
                                                      TQt::HANDLE TQThread::currentThread () [static]
-
                                                      
-This returns the thread handle of the currently executing thread.
-
                                                       Warning: The handle returned by this function is used for internal
-purposes and should not be used in any application code. On
-Windows, the returned value is a pseudo handle for the current
-thread, and it cannot be used for numerical comparison.
-
-
                                                      void TQThread::exit () [static]
-
                                                      
-Ends the execution of the calling thread and wakes up any threads
-waiting for its termination.
-
-
                                                      bool TQThread::finished () const
-
                                                      
-Returns TRUE if the thread is finished; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                      void TQThread::msleep ( unsigned long msecs ) [static protected]
-
                                                      
-System independent sleep. This causes the current thread to sleep
-for msecs milliseconds
-
-
                                                      void TQThread::postEvent ( TQObject * receiver, TQEvent * event ) [static]
-
                                                       This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                                       Use TQApplication::postEvent() instead.
-
-
                                                      void TQThread::run () [pure virtual protected]
-
                                                      
-
-
                                                       This method is pure virtual, and must be implemented in derived
-classes in order to do useful work. Returning from this method
-will end the execution of the thread.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also wait().
-
-
                                                      bool TQThread::running () const
-
                                                      
-Returns TRUE if the thread is running; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                                      void TQThread::sleep ( unsigned long secs ) [static protected]
-
                                                      
-System independent sleep. This causes the current thread to sleep
-for secs seconds.
-
-
                                                      void TQThread::start ( Priority priority = InheritPriority )
-
                                                      
-Begins execution of the thread by calling run(), which should be
-reimplemented in a TQThread subclass to contain your code.  The
-operating system will schedule the thread according to the priority argument.
-
                                                       If you try to start a thread that is already running, this
-function will wait until the the thread has finished and then
-restart the thread.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also Priority.
-
-
                                                      void TQThread::terminate ()
-
                                                      
-This function terminates the execution of the thread. The thread
-may or may not be terminated immediately, depending on the
-operating system's scheduling policies. Use TQThread::wait()
-after terminate() for synchronous termination.
-
                                                       When the thread is terminated, all threads waiting for the
-the thread to finish will be woken up.
-
                                                       Warning: This function is dangerous, and its use is discouraged.
-The thread can be terminated at any point in its code path.  Threads
-can be terminated while modifying data.  There is no chance for
-the thread to cleanup after itself, unlock any held mutexes, etc.
-In short, use this function only if absolutely necessary.
-
-
                                                      void TQThread::usleep ( unsigned long usecs ) [static protected]
-
                                                      
-System independent sleep. This causes the current thread to sleep
-for usecs microseconds
-
-
                                                      bool TQThread::wait ( unsigned long time = ULONG_MAX )
-
                                                      
-A thread calling this function will block until either of these
-conditions is met:
-
                                                       
                                                        
-
                                                      •  The thread associated with this TQThread object has finished
-execution (i.e. when it returns from run()). This function
-will return TRUE if the thread has finished. It also returns
-TRUE if the thread has not been started yet.
-
                                                      •  time milliseconds has elapsed. If time is ULONG_MAX (the
-default), then the wait will never timeout (the thread must
-return from run()). This function will return FALSE if the
-wait timed out.
-
                                                      
-
                                                       This provides similar functionality to the POSIX pthread_join() function.
-
-
-
                                                      
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                      
-
-
                                                      Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                      TQt 3.3.8
                                                      
-
                                                      
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qthreadstorage-h.html b/doc/html/qthreadstorage-h.html
index f12b062ad..bb72f3452 100644
--- a/doc/html/qthreadstorage-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qthreadstorage-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qthreadstorage.h Include File
+ntqthreadstorage.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                                      
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                                      TQThreadStorage Class Reference
                                                      
-
-
                                                      The TQThreadStorage class provides per-thread data storage.
-More...
-
                                                      All the functions in this class are thread-safe when TQt is built with thread support.
                                                      
-
                                                      #include <qthreadstorage.h>
-
                                                      List of all member functions.
-
                                                      Public Members
                                                      
-
-
                                                      Detailed Description
                                                      
-
-
-The TQThreadStorage class provides per-thread data storage.
-
                                                       
-
-
-
                                                       TQThreadStorage is a template class that provides per-thread data
-storage.
-
                                                       Note that due to compiler limitations, TQThreadStorage can only store pointers.
-
                                                       The setLocalData() function stores a single thread-specific value
-for the calling thread. The data can be accessed later using the
-localData() functions. TQThreadStorage takes ownership of the
-data (which must be created on the heap with new) and deletes
-it when the thread exits (either normally or via termination).
-
                                                       The hasLocalData() function allows the programmer to determine if
-data has previously been set using the setLocalData() function.
-This is useful for lazy initializiation.
-
                                                       For example, the following code uses TQThreadStorage to store a
-single cache for each thread that calls the cacheObject() and
-removeFromCache() functions. The cache is automatically
-deleted when the calling thread exits (either normally or via
-termination).
-
                                                       
                                                      -    TQThreadStorage<TQCache<SomeClass> *> caches;
-
-    void cacheObject( const TQString &key, SomeClass *object )
-    {
-        if ( ! caches.hasLocalData() )
-            caches.setLocalData( new TQCache<SomeClass> );
-
-        caches.localData()->insert( key, object );
-    }
-
-    void removeFromCache( const TQString &key )
-    {
-        if ( ! caches.hasLocalData() )
-            return; // nothing to do
-
-        caches.localData()->remove( key );
-    }
-    
                                                      
- 
-
                                                       
                                                       Caveats
-
                                                      
-
                                                       
                                                        
-
                                                         
                                                      •  As noted above, TQThreadStorage can only store pointers due to
-compiler limitations. Support for value-based objects will be
-added when the majority of compilers are able to support partial
-template specialization.
-
                                                         
                                                      •  The destructor does not
-delete per-thread data. TQThreadStorage only deletes per-thread
-data when the thread exits or when setLocalData() is called
-multiple times.
-
                                                         
                                                      •  TQThreadStorage can only be used with threads started with
-TQThread. It cannot be used with threads started with
-platform-specific APIs.
-
                                                         
                                                      •  As a corollary to the above, platform-specific APIs cannot be
-used to exit or terminate a TQThread using TQThreadStorage. Doing so
-will cause all per-thread data to be leaked. See TQThread::exit()
-and TQThread::terminate().
-
                                                         
                                                      •  TQThreadStorage can be used to store data for the main()
-thread after TQApplication has been constructed. TQThreadStorage
-deletes all data set for the main() thread when TQApplication is
-destroyed, regardless of whether or not the main() thread has
-actually finished.
-
                                                         
                                                      •  The implementation of TQThreadStorage limits the total number of
-TQThreadStorage objects to 256. An unlimited number of threads
-can store per-thread data in each TQThreadStorage object.
-
                                                         
                                                      
-
                                                      See also Environment Classes and Threading.
-
-
                                                      Member Function Documentation
                                                      
-
                                                      TQThreadStorage::TQThreadStorage ()
-
                                                      
-
-
                                                       Constructs a new per-thread data storage object.
-
-
                                                      TQThreadStorage::~TQThreadStorage ()
-
                                                      
-
-
                                                       Destroys the per-thread data storage object.
-
                                                       Note: The per-thread data stored is not deleted. Any data left
-in TQThreadStorage is leaked. Make sure that all threads using
-TQThreadStorage have exited before deleting the TQThreadStorage.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also hasLocalData().
-
-
                                                      bool TQThreadStorage::hasLocalData () const
-
                                                      
-
-
                                                       Returns TRUE if the calling thread has non-zero data available;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also localData().
-
-
                                                      T & TQThreadStorage::localData ()
-
                                                      
-
-
                                                       Returns a reference to the data that was set by the calling
-thread.
-
                                                       Note: TQThreadStorage can only store pointers. This function
-returns a reference to the pointer that was set by the calling
-thread. The value of this reference is 0 if no data was set by
-the calling thread,
-
                                                       
                                                      See also hasLocalData().
-
-
                                                      T TQThreadStorage::localData () const
-
                                                      
-
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                                       Returns a copy of the data that was set by the calling thread.
-
                                                       Note: TQThreadStorage can only store pointers. This function
-returns a pointer to the data that was set by the calling thread.
-If no data was set by the calling thread, this function returns 0.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also hasLocalData().
-
-
                                                      void TQThreadStorage::setLocalData ( T data )
-
                                                      
-
-
                                                       Sets the local data for the calling thread to data. It can be
-accessed later using the localData() functions.
-
                                                       If data is 0, this function deletes the previous data (if
-any) and returns immediately.
-
                                                       If data is non-zero, TQThreadStorage takes ownership of the data and deletes it automatically either when the thread exits
-(either normally or via termination) or when setLocalData() is
-called again.
-
                                                       Note: TQThreadStorage can only store pointers. The data
-argument must be either a pointer to an object created on the heap
-(i.e. using new) or 0. You should not delete data
-yourself; TQThreadStorage takes ownership and will delete the data itself.
-
                                                       
                                                      See also localData() and hasLocalData().
-
-
-
                                                      
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                                      
-
-
                                                      Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                                      TQt 3.3.8
                                                      
-
                                                      
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qtime-members.html b/doc/html/qtime-members.html
index e63180389..1d646cbad 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtime-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtime-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qtime.html b/doc/html/qtime.html
index 856ba1da9..15f48a9af 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtime.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtime.html
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                                      The TQTime class provides clock time functions.
 More...
 
                                                      All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
                                                      
-
                                                      #include <qdatetime.h>
+
                                                      #include <ntqdatetime.h>
 
                                                      List of all member functions.
 
                                                      Public Members
                                                      
 
                                                        
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ functions. Correspondingly, the number of (milli)seconds between
 two times can be found using the secsTo() or msecsTo() functions.
 
                                                         TQTime can be used to measure a span of elapsed time using the
 start(), restart(), and elapsed() functions.
-
                                                         
                                                        See also TQDate, TQDateTime, and Time and Date.
+
                                                         
                                                        See also TQDate, TQDateTime, and Time and Date.
 
 
                                                        Member Function Documentation
                                                        
 
                                                        TQTime::TQTime ()
@@ -150,15 +150,15 @@ than the time of this object (or earlier if nsecs is negative).
     t = n.addSecs( -15*60*60 );         // t == 23:00:00
     
                                          
  
-
                                           
                                          See also addMSecs(), secsTo(), and TQDateTime::addSecs().
+
                                           
                                          See also addMSecs(), secsTo(), and TQDateTime::addSecs().
 
-
                                          TQTime TQTime::currentTime ( TQt::TimeSpec ts ) [static]
+
                                          TQTime TQTime::currentTime ( TQt::TimeSpec ts ) [static]
 
                                          
 Returns the current time as reported by the system clock, for the
 TimeSpec ts. The default TimeSpec is LocalTime.
 
                                           Note that the accuracy depends on the accuracy of the underlying
 operating system; not all systems provide 1-millisecond accuracy.
-
                                           
                                          See also TQt::TimeSpec.
+
                                           
                                          See also TQt::TimeSpec.
 
 
                                          Examples: aclock/aclock.cpp, dclock/dclock.cpp, t12/cannon.cpp, and tictac/tictac.cpp.
 
                                          TQTime TQTime::currentTime () [static]
@@ -182,11 +182,11 @@ undefined. This can happen when daylight savings time is turned on
 or off.
 
                                           
                                          See also start() and restart().
 
-
                                          TQTime TQTime::fromString ( const TQString & s, TQt::DateFormat f = TQt::TextDate ) [static]
+
                                          TQTime TQTime::fromString ( const TQString & s, TQt::DateFormat f = TQt::TextDate ) [static]
 
                                          
 Returns the representation s as a TQTime using the format f,
 or an invalid time if this is not possible.
-
                                           Warning: Note that TQt::LocalDate cannot be used here.
+
                                           Warning: Note that TQt::LocalDate cannot be used here.
 
 
                                          int TQTime::hour () const
 
                                          
@@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ Returns the number of seconds from this time to t (which is
 negative if t is earlier than this time).
 
                                           Because TQTime measures time within a day and there are 86400
 seconds in a day, the result is always between -86400 and 86400.
-
                                           
                                          See also addSecs() and TQDateTime::secsTo().
+
                                           
                                          See also addSecs() and TQDateTime::secsTo().
 
 
                                          Example: t12/cannon.cpp.
 
                                          bool TQTime::setHMS ( int h, int m, int s, int ms = 0 )
@@ -316,12 +316,12 @@ Sets this time to the current time. This is practical for timing:
     TQTime t;
     t.start();
     some_lengthy_task();
-    qDebug( "Time elapsed: %d ms", t.elapsed() );
+    qDebug( "Time elapsed: %d ms", t.elapsed() );
     
                                  
  
 
                                   
                                  See also restart(), elapsed(), and currentTime().
 
-
                                  TQString TQTime::toString ( const TQString & format ) const
+
                                  TQString TQTime::toString ( const TQString & format ) const
 
                                  
 Returns the time as a string. The format parameter determines
 the format of the result string.
@@ -350,31 +350,31 @@ the format of the result string.
  hh:mm:ss.zzz     14:13:09.042
  h:m:s ap	     2:13:9 pm
 
-
                                   If the time is an invalid time, then TQString::null will be returned.
-
                                   
                                  See also TQDate::toString() and TQDateTime::toString().
+
                                   If the time is an invalid time, then TQString::null will be returned.
+
                                   
                                  See also TQDate::toString() and TQDateTime::toString().
 
-
                                  TQString TQTime::toString ( TQt::DateFormat f = TQt::TextDate ) const
+
                                  TQString TQTime::toString ( TQt::DateFormat f = TQt::TextDate ) const
 
                                  
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 
                                   Returns the time as a string. Milliseconds are not included. The
 f parameter determines the format of the string.
-
                                   If f is TQt::TextDate, the string format is HH:MM:SS; e.g. 1
+
                                   If f is TQt::TextDate, the string format is HH:MM:SS; e.g. 1
 second before midnight would be "23:59:59".
-
                                   If f is TQt::ISODate, the string format corresponds to the
+
                                   If f is TQt::ISODate, the string format corresponds to the
 ISO 8601 extended specification for representations of dates,
 which is also HH:MM:SS.
 
                                   If f is TQt::LocalDate, the string format depends on the locale
 settings of the system.
-
                                   If the time is an invalid time, then TQString::null will be returned.
+
                                   If the time is an invalid time, then TQString::null will be returned.
 
 
                                  Related Functions
                                  
-
                                  TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQTime & t )
+
                                  TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQTime & t )
 
                                  
 
 
                                   Writes time t to the stream s.
 
                                   
                                  See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
 
-
                                  TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQTime & t )
+
                                  TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQTime & t )
 
                                  
 
 
                                   Reads a time from the stream s into t.
diff --git a/doc/html/qtimeedit-members.html b/doc/html/qtimeedit-members.html
index c1355f975..85ca19c89 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtimeedit-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtimeedit-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -37,314 +37,314 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                  
 
 
                                  
diff --git a/doc/html/qtimeedit.html b/doc/html/qtimeedit.html
index 169c9c472..b05af88ef 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtimeedit.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtimeedit.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                  The TQTimeEdit class provides a time editor.
 More...
-
                                  #include <qdatetimeedit.h>
+
                                  #include <ntqdatetimeedit.h>
 
                                  Inherits TQDateTimeEditBase.
 
                                  List of all member functions.
 
                                  Public Members
                                  
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ for the hour, minute and second. You can change the separator
 character using setSeparator(), by default the separator is read
 from the system's settings.
 
                                   
                                  Date Time Widgets
                                   
-
                                   
                                  See also TQTime, TQDateEdit, TQDateTimeEdit, Advanced Widgets, and Time and Date.
+
                                   
                                  See also TQTime, TQDateEdit, TQDateTimeEdit, Advanced Widgets, and Time and Date.
 
 
                                  Member Type Documentation
                                  
 
                                  TQTimeEdit::Display
                                  
@@ -123,11 +123,11 @@ from the system's settings.
 
                                 The values can be or'ed together to show any combination.
 
 
                                Member Function Documentation
                                
-
                                TQTimeEdit::TQTimeEdit ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
                                TQTimeEdit::TQTimeEdit ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
 
                                
 Constructs an empty time edit with parent parent and called name.
 
-
                                TQTimeEdit::TQTimeEdit ( const TQTime & time, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
                                TQTimeEdit::TQTimeEdit ( const TQTime & time, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
 
                                
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 
                                 Constructs a time edit with the initial time value, time,
@@ -149,13 +149,13 @@ See the "maxValue" property for detai
 
                                TQTime TQTimeEdit::minValue () const
 
                                Returns the minimum time value.
 See the "minValue" property for details.
-
                                TQString TQTimeEdit::sectionFormattedText ( int sec ) [virtual protected]
+
                                TQString TQTimeEdit::sectionFormattedText ( int sec ) [virtual protected]
 
                                
 Returns the formatted number for section sec. This will
 correspond to either the hour, minute or second section, depending
 on sec.
 
-
                                TQString TQTimeEdit::separator () const
+
                                TQString TQTimeEdit::separator () const
 
                                
 Returns the editor's separator.
 
@@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ Similarly, if max is invalid no maximum time is set.
 Sets the second to s, which must be a valid second, i.e. in the
 range 0..59.
 
-
                                void TQTimeEdit::setSeparator ( const TQString & s ) [virtual]
+
                                void TQTimeEdit::setSeparator ( const TQString & s ) [virtual]
 
                                
 Sets the separator to s. Note that currently only the first
 character of s is used.
diff --git a/doc/html/qtimer-h.html b/doc/html/qtimer-h.html
index 149bb2d52..aeb4271b1 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtimer-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtimer-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qtimer.h Include File
+ntqtimer.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                TQTimer Class Reference
                                
-
-
                                The TQTimer class provides timer signals and single-shot timers.
-More...
-
                                #include <qtimer.h>
-
                                Inherits TQObject.
-
                                List of all member functions.
-
                                Public Members
                                
-
-
                                Signals
                                
-
-
                                Static Public Members
                                
-
                                  
-
                                • void singleShot ( int msec, TQObject * receiver, const char * member )
                                  • 
-
                                
-
                                Detailed Description
                                
-
-
-The TQTimer class provides timer signals and single-shot timers.
-
                                 
-
-
-
                                 It uses timer events internally to
-provide a more versatile timer. TQTimer is very easy to use:
-create a TQTimer, call start() to start it and connect its
-timeout() to the appropriate slots. When the time is up it will
-emit the timeout() signal.
-
                                 Note that a TQTimer object is destroyed automatically when its
-parent object is destroyed.
-
                                 Example:
-
                                -        TQTimer *timer = new TQTimer( myObject );
-        connect( timer, SIGNAL(timeout()), myObject, SLOT(timerDone()) );
-        timer->start( 2000, TRUE ); // 2 seconds single-shot timer
-    
                                
- 
-
                                 You can also use the static singleShot() function to create a
-single shot timer.
-
                                 As a special case, a TQTimer with timeout 0 times out as soon as
-all the events in the window system's event queue have been
-processed.
-
                                 This can be used to do heavy work while providing a snappy
-user interface:
-
                                -        TQTimer *t = new TQTimer( myObject );
-        connect( t, SIGNAL(timeout()), SLOT(processOneThing()) );
-        t->start( 0, FALSE );
-    
                                
- 
-
                                 myObject->processOneThing() will be called repeatedly and should
-return tquickly (typically after processing one data item) so that
-TQt can deliver events to widgets and stop the timer as soon as it
-has done all its work. This is the traditional way of
-implementing heavy work in GUI applications; multi-threading is
-now becoming available on more and more platforms, and we expect
-that null events will eventually be replaced by threading.
-
                                 Note that TQTimer's accuracy depends on the underlying operating
-system and hardware. Most platforms support an accuracy of 20ms;
-some provide more. If TQt is unable to deliver the requested
-number of timer clicks, it will silently discard some.
-
                                 An alternative to using TQTimer is to call TQObject::startTimer()
-for your object and reimplement the TQObject::timerEvent() event
-handler in your class (which must, of course, inherit TQObject).
-The disadvantage is that timerEvent() does not support such
-high-level features as single-shot timers or signals.
-
                                 Some operating systems limit the number of timers that may be
-used; TQt tries to work around these limitations.
-
                                See also Event Classes and Time and Date.
-
-
                                Member Function Documentation
                                
-
                                TQTimer::TQTimer ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                
-Constructs a timer called name, with the parent parent.
-
                                 Note that the parent object's destructor will destroy this timer
-object.
-
-
                                TQTimer::~TQTimer ()
-
                                
-Destroys the timer.
-
-
                                void TQTimer::changeInterval ( int msec )
-
                                
-Changes the timeout interval to msec milliseconds.
-
                                 If the timer signal is pending, it will be stopped and restarted;
-otherwise it will be started.
-
                                 
                                See also start() and isActive().
-
-
                                bool TQTimer::isActive () const
-
                                
-
-
                                 Returns TRUE if the timer is running (pending); otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
-
                                Example: t11/cannon.cpp.
-
                                void TQTimer::singleShot ( int msec, TQObject * receiver, const char * member ) [static]
-
                                
-This static function calls a slot after a given time interval.
-
                                 It is very convenient to use this function because you do not need
-to bother with a timerEvent or
-to create a local TQTimer object.
-
                                 Example:
-
                                -        #include <qapplication.h>
-        #include <qtimer.h>
-
-        int main( int argc, char **argv )
-        {
-            TQApplication a( argc, argv );
-            TQTimer::singleShot( 10*60*1000, &a, SLOT(quit()) );
-                ... // create and show your widgets
-            return a.exec();
-        }
-    
                                
- 
-
                                 This sample program automatically terminates after 10 minutes (i.e.
-600000 milliseconds).
-
                                 The receiver is the receiving object and the member is the
-slot. The time interval is msec.
-
-
                                int TQTimer::start ( int msec, bool sshot = FALSE )
-
                                
-Starts the timer with a msec milliseconds timeout, and returns
-the ID of the timer, or zero when starting the timer failed.
-
                                 If sshot is TRUE, the timer will be activated only once;
-otherwise it will continue until it is stopped.
-
                                 Any pending timer will be stopped.
-
                                 
                                See also singleShot(), stop(), changeInterval(), and isActive().
-
-
                                Examples: aclock/aclock.cpp, dirview/dirview.cpp, distributor/distributor.ui.h, forever/forever.cpp, hello/hello.cpp, t11/cannon.cpp, and t13/cannon.cpp.
-
                                void TQTimer::stop ()
-
                                
-Stops the timer.
-
                                 
                                See also start().
-
-
                                Examples: dirview/dirview.cpp, t11/cannon.cpp, t12/cannon.cpp, and t13/cannon.cpp.
-
                                void TQTimer::timeout () [signal]
-
                                
-
-
                                 This signal is emitted when the timer is activated.
-
-
                                Examples: aclock/aclock.cpp, dirview/dirview.cpp, distributor/distributor.ui.h, forever/forever.cpp, hello/hello.cpp, and t11/cannon.cpp.
-
                                int TQTimer::timerId () const
-
                                
-
-
                                 Returns the ID of the timer if the timer is running; otherwise returns
--1.
-
-
-
                                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                
-
-
                                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                TQt 3.3.8
                                
-
                                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qtimerevent-members.html b/doc/html/qtimerevent-members.html
index 814e47dca..e9b66603b 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtimerevent-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtimerevent-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -36,9 +36,9 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
 
 
                                
diff --git a/doc/html/qtimerevent.html b/doc/html/qtimerevent.html
index b9d541d71..ebbdd73b4 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtimerevent.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtimerevent.html
@@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                The TQTimerEvent class contains parameters that describe a
 timer event.
 More...
-
                                #include <qevent.h>
-
                                Inherits TQEvent.
+
                                #include <ntqevent.h>
+
                                Inherits TQEvent.
 
                                List of all member functions.
 
                                Public Members
                                
 
                                  
@@ -50,11 +50,11 @@ timer event.
 
                                   
 
                                   Timer events are sent at regular intervals to objects that have
 started one or more timers. Each timer has a unique identifier. A
-timer is started with TQObject::startTimer().
-
                                   The TQTimer class provides a high-level programming interface that
+timer is started with TQObject::startTimer().
+
                                   The TQTimer class provides a high-level programming interface that
 uses signals instead of events. It also provides one-shot timers.
-
                                   The event handler TQObject::timerEvent() receives timer events.
-
                                   
                                  See also TQTimer, TQObject::timerEvent(), TQObject::startTimer(), TQObject::killTimer(), TQObject::killTimers(), and Event Classes.
+
                                   The event handler TQObject::timerEvent() receives timer events.
+
                                   
                                  See also TQTimer, TQObject::timerEvent(), TQObject::startTimer(), TQObject::killTimer(), TQObject::killTimers(), and Event Classes.
 
 
                                  Member Function Documentation
                                  
 
                                  TQTimerEvent::TQTimerEvent ( int timerId )
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ uses signals instead of events. It also provides one-shot timers.
 
                                  
 
 
                                   Returns the unique timer identifier, which is the same identifier
-as returned from TQObject::startTimer().
+as returned from TQObject::startTimer().
 
 
                                  Example: dclock/dclock.cpp.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qtl-qvaluelist-example.html b/doc/html/qtl-qvaluelist-example.html
index fa73c3044..bb0f2dd34 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtl-qvaluelist-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtl-qvaluelist-example.html
@@ -46,9 +46,9 @@ This tiny example shows a TQValueListIterator<
 **
 *****************************************************************************/
 
-#include <qvaluelist.h>
-#include <qstring.h>
-#include <qwindowdefs.h>
+#include <ntqvaluelist.h>
+#include <ntqstring.h>
+#include <ntqwindowdefs.h>
 #include <stdio.h>
 
 
@@ -56,10 +56,10 @@ class Employee
 {
 public:
     Employee(): s(0) {}
-    Employee( const TQString& name, int salary )
+    Employee( const TQString& name, int salary )
         : n(name), s(salary) {}
 
-    TQString name() const { return n; }
+    TQString name() const { return n; }
 
     int salary() const { return s; }
     void setSalary( int salary ) { s = salary; }
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ public:
     Q_DUMMY_COMPARISON_OPERATOR( Employee )
 
 private:
-    TQString n;
+    TQString n;
     int s;
 };
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qtl.html b/doc/html/qtl.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 8a2be8cb4..000000000
--- a/doc/html/qtl.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,57 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
-
-
-TQt Template Library Classes
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                  
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                  TQt Template Library Classes
                                  
-
- 
-
                                   The TQt Template Library (TQTL) is a set of templates that provide
-object containers. See the TQt Template
-Library.
-
                                   
-
                                  
-
                                  TQMapValue-based template class that provides a dictionary
-
                                  TQMapConstIteratorIterator for TQMap
-
                                  TQMapIteratorIterator for TQMap
-
                                  TQPairValue-based template class that provides a pair of elements
-
                                  TQValueListValue-based template class that provides lists
-
                                  TQValueListConstIteratorConst iterator for TQValueList
-
                                  TQValueListIteratorIterator for TQValueList
-
                                  TQValueStackValue-based template class that provides a stack
-
                                  TQValueVectorValue-based template class that provides a dynamic array
-
                                  
-
-
                                  
-
-
                                  Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                  TQt 3.3.8
                                  
-
                                  
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qtmac-as-native.html b/doc/html/qtmac-as-native.html
index bafba120d..e9d51f0aa 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtmac-as-native.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtmac-as-native.html
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ first class citizens, just like Cocoa, Java, and Carbon applications.
 it can interact with specific components of the Mac OS X experience:
 
                                   
                                    
 
                                  •  The global menubar
                                    
-
                                     TQt/Mac does this via the TQMenuBar abstraction. Mac users expect to
+
                                     TQt/Mac does this via the TQMenuBar abstraction. Mac users expect to
 have a menubar at the top of the screen and TQt/Mac honors this.
 
                                     Additionally, users expect certain conventions to be respected, for
 example the application menu should contain About, Preferences,
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ your audience.
 
                                     
                                  •  Dock
                                    
 
                                     Interaction with the dock is limited, but at the very least the icon
 should be able to be interacted with. This can be achieved with
-TQWidget::setIcon(). The setIcon() call can be made as often as
+TQWidget::setIcon(). The setIcon() call can be made as often as
 necessary, so can be used to provide a constantly updating pixmap
 that works as expected.
 
                                     
                                  •  Accessiblity
                                    
diff --git a/doc/html/qtoolbar-h.html b/doc/html/qtoolbar-h.html
index 2d7fbfc4f..c1c4af7bd 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtoolbar-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtoolbar-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qtoolbar.h Include File
+ntqtoolbar.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                    TQToolBar Class Reference
                                    
-
-
                                    The TQToolBar class provides a movable panel containing
-widgets such as tool buttons.
-More...
-
                                    #include <qtoolbar.h>
-
                                    Inherits TQDockWindow.
-
                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                    Public Members
                                    
-
                                      
-
                                    • TQToolBar ( const TQString & label, TQMainWindow *, ToolBarDock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE, const char * name = 0 )  (obsolete)
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQToolBar ( const TQString & label, TQMainWindow * mainWindow, TQWidget * parent, bool newLine = FALSE, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQToolBar ( TQMainWindow * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
                                      • 
-
                                    • void addSeparator ()
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQMainWindow * mainWindow () const
                                      • 
-
                                    • virtual void setStretchableWidget ( TQWidget * w )
                                      • 
-
                                    • virtual void setLabel ( const TQString & )
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQString label () const
                                      • 
-
                                    • virtual void clear ()
                                      • 
-
                                    
-
                                    Properties
                                    
-
                                      
-
                                    • TQString label - the toolbar's label
                                      • 
-
                                    
-
                                    Detailed Description
                                    
-
-
-The TQToolBar class provides a movable panel containing
-widgets such as tool buttons.
-
                                     
-
-
                                     A toolbar is a panel that contains a set of controls, usually
-represented by small icons. It's purpose is to provide tquick
-access to frequently used commands or options. Within a
-TQMainWindow the user can drag toolbars within and between the
-dock areas. Toolbars can also be dragged
-out of any dock area to float freely as top-level windows.
-
                                     TQToolBar is a specialization of TQDockWindow, and so provides all
-the functionality of a TQDockWindow.
-
                                     To use TQToolBar you simply create a TQToolBar as a child of a
-TQMainWindow, create a number of TQToolButton widgets (or other
-widgets) in left to right (or top to bottom) order and call
-addSeparator() when you want a separator. When a toolbar is
-floated the caption used is the label given in the constructor
-call. This can be changed with setLabel().
-
                                     
-
-
                                            TQToolBar * fileTools = new TQToolBar( this, "file operations" );
-        fileTools->setLabel( "File Operations" );
-        fileOpenAction->addTo( fileTools );
-        fileSaveAction->addTo( fileTools );
-
                                    
-
                                     This extract from the application/application.cpp example shows
-the creation of a new toolbar as a child of a TQMainWindow and
-adding two TQActions.
-
                                     You may use most widgets within a toolbar, with TQToolButton and
-TQComboBox being the most common.
-
                                     If you create a new widget on an already visible TQToolBar, this
-widget will automatically become visible without needing a show()
-call. (This differs from every other TQt widget container. We
-recommend calling show() anyway since we hope to fix this anomaly
-in a future release.)
-
                                     TQToolBars, like TQDockWindows, are located in TQDockAreas or
-float as top-level windows. TQMainWindow provides four TQDockAreas
-(top, left, right and bottom). When you create a new toolbar (as
-in the example above) as a child of a TQMainWindow the toolbar will
-be added to the top dock area. You can move it to another dock
-area (or float it) by calling TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow(). TQDock
-areas lay out their windows in Lines.
-
                                     If the main window is resized so that the area occupied by the
-toolbar is too small to show all its widgets a little arrow button
-(which looks like a right-pointing chevron, '»') will appear
-at the right or bottom of the toolbar depending on its
-orientation. Clicking this button pops up a menu that shows the
-'overflowing' items. TQToolButtons are represented in the menu using
-their textLabel property, other TQButton subclasses are represented
-using their text property, and TQComboBoxes are represented as submenus,
-with the caption text being used in the submenu item.
-
                                     Usually a toolbar will get precisely the space it needs. However,
-with setHorizontalStretchable(), setVerticalStretchable() or
-setStretchableWidget() you can tell the main window to expand the
-toolbar to fill all available space in the specified orientation.
-
                                     The toolbar arranges its buttons either horizontally or vertically
-(see orientation() for details). Generally, TQDockArea will set the
-orientation correctly for you, but you can set it yourself with
-setOrientation() and track any changes by connecting to the
-orientationChanged() signal.
-
                                     You can use the clear() method to remove all items from a toolbar.
-
                                     
                                    Toolbar (dock window)
                                     
                                     A floating TQToolbar (dock window)
-
                                    
-
                                     
                                    See also TQToolButton, TQMainWindow, Parts of Isys on Visual Design, GUI Design Handbook: Tool Bar, and Main Window and Related Classes.
-
-
                                    Member Function Documentation
                                    
-
                                    TQToolBar::TQToolBar ( const TQString & label, TQMainWindow *, ToolBarDock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                    
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                     
-
                                    TQToolBar::TQToolBar ( const TQString & label, TQMainWindow * mainWindow, TQWidget * parent, bool newLine = FALSE, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
-
                                    
-Constructs an empty horizontal toolbar.
-
                                     The toolbar is called name and is a child of parent and is
-managed by mainWindow. The label and newLine parameters
-are passed straight to TQMainWindow::addDockWindow(). name and
-the widget flags f are passed on to the TQDockWindow constructor.
-
                                     Use this constructor if you want to create torn-off (undocked,
-floating) toolbars or toolbars in the status
-    bar.
-
-
                                    TQToolBar::TQToolBar ( TQMainWindow * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                     Constructs an empty toolbar called name, with parent parent,
-in its parent's top dock area, without any label and without
-retquiring a newline.
-
-
                                    void TQToolBar::addSeparator ()
-
                                    
-Adds a separator to the right/bottom of the toolbar.
-
-
                                    Examples: chart/chartform.cpp, fileiconview/mainwindow.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp, and scribble/scribble.cpp.
-
                                    void TQToolBar::clear () [virtual]
-
                                    
-Deletes all the toolbar's child widgets.
-
-
                                    TQString TQToolBar::label () const
-
                                    Returns the toolbar's label.
-See the "label" property for details.
-
                                    TQMainWindow * TQToolBar::mainWindow () const
-
                                    
-Returns a pointer to the TQMainWindow which manages this toolbar.
-
-
                                    void TQToolBar::setLabel ( const TQString & ) [virtual]
-
                                    Sets the toolbar's label.
-See the "label" property for details.
-
                                    void TQToolBar::setStretchableWidget ( TQWidget * w ) [virtual]
-
                                    
-Sets the widget w to be expanded if this toolbar is requested
-to stretch.
-
                                     The request to stretch might occur because TQMainWindow
-right-justifies the dock area the toolbar is in, or because this
-toolbar's isVerticalStretchable() or isHorizontalStretchable() is
-set to TRUE.
-
                                     If you call this function and the toolbar is not yet stretchable,
-setStretchable() is called.
-
                                     
                                    See also TQMainWindow::rightJustification, setVerticalStretchable(), and setHorizontalStretchable().
-
-
                                    Examples: fileiconview/mainwindow.cpp and helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp.
-
                                    Property Documentation
                                    
-
                                    TQString label
                                    
-
                                    This property holds the toolbar's label.
-
                                    If the toolbar is floated the label becomes the toolbar window's
-caption. There is no default label text.
-
-
                                    Set this property's value with setLabel() and get this property's value with label().
-
-
                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                    
-
-
                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                    
-
                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qtoolbox-h.html b/doc/html/qtoolbox-h.html
index 88f5ecf49..b2957699c 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtoolbox-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtoolbox-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qtoolbox.h Include File
+ntqtoolbox.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                    TQToolBox Class Reference
                                    
-
-
                                    The TQToolBox class provides a column of tabbed widget
-items.
-More...
-
                                    #include <qtoolbox.h>
-
                                    Inherits TQFrame.
-
                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                    Public Members
                                    
-
                                      
-
                                    • TQToolBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
                                      • 
-
                                    • int addItem ( TQWidget * w, const TQString & label )
                                      • 
-
                                    • int addItem ( TQWidget * item, const TQIconSet & iconSet, const TQString & label )
                                      • 
-
                                    • int insertItem ( int index, TQWidget * item, const TQString & label )
                                      • 
-
                                    • int insertItem ( int index, TQWidget * item, const TQIconSet & iconSet, const TQString & label )
                                      • 
-
                                    • int removeItem ( TQWidget * item )
                                      • 
-
                                    • void setItemEnabled ( int index, bool enabled )
                                      • 
-
                                    • bool isItemEnabled ( int index ) const
                                      • 
-
                                    • void setItemLabel ( int index, const TQString & label )
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQString itemLabel ( int index ) const
                                      • 
-
                                    • void setItemIconSet ( int index, const TQIconSet & iconSet )
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQIconSet itemIconSet ( int index ) const
                                      • 
-
                                    • void setItemToolTip ( int index, const TQString & toolTip )
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQString itemToolTip ( int index ) const
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQWidget * currentItem () const
                                      • 
-
                                    • void setCurrentItem ( TQWidget * item )
                                      • 
-
                                    • int currentIndex () const
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQWidget * item ( int index ) const
                                      • 
-
                                    • int indexOf ( TQWidget * item ) const
                                      • 
-
                                    • int count () const
                                      • 
-
                                    
-
                                    Public Slots
                                    
-
-
                                    Signals
                                    
-
-
                                    Properties
                                    
-
                                      
-
                                    • int count - the number of items contained in the toolbox  (read only)
                                      • 
-
                                    • int currentIndex - the index of the current item, or -1 if the toolbox is empty
                                      • 
-
                                    
-
                                    Protected Members
                                    
-
-
                                    Detailed Description
                                    
-
-
-
                                     The TQToolBox class provides a column of tabbed widget
-items.
-
                                     
-
-
                                     A toolbox is a widget that displays a column of tabs one above the
-other, with the current item displayed below the current tab.
-Every tab has an index position within the column of tabs. A tab's
-item is a TQWidget.
-
                                     Each item has an itemLabel(), an optional icon, itemIconSet(), an
-optional itemToolTip(), and a widget. The
-item's attributes can be changed with setItemLabel(),
-setItemIconSet() and setItemToolTip().
-
                                     Items are added using addItem(), or inserted at particular
-positions using insertItem(). The total number of items is given
-by count(). Items can be deleted with delete, or removed from the
-toolbox with removeItem(). Combining removeItem() and insertItem()
-allows to move items to different positions.
-
                                     The current item widget is returned by currentItem() and set with
-setCurrentItem(). If you prefer you can work in terms of indexes
-using currentIndex(), setCurrentIndex(), indexOf() and item().
-
                                     The currentChanged() signal is emitted when the current item is
-changed.
-
                                     
                                    See also TQTabWidget and Advanced Widgets.
-
-
                                    Member Function Documentation
                                    
-
                                    TQToolBox::TQToolBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
-
                                    
-Constructs a toolbox called name with parent parent and flags f.
-
-
                                    int TQToolBox::addItem ( TQWidget * item, const TQIconSet & iconSet, const TQString & label )
-
                                    
-
-Adds the widget item in a new tab at bottom of the toolbox. The
-new tab's label is set to label, and the iconSet is
-displayed to the left of the label.  Returns the new tab's index.
-
-
                                    int TQToolBox::addItem ( TQWidget * w, const TQString & label )
-
                                    
-
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                     Adds the widget w in a new tab at bottom of the toolbox. The
-new tab's label is set to label. Returns the new tab's index.
-
-
                                    int TQToolBox::count () const
-
                                    Returns the number of items contained in the toolbox.
-See the "count" property for details.
-
                                    void TQToolBox::currentChanged ( int index ) [signal]
-
                                    
-
-
                                     This signal is emitted when the current item changed. The new
-current item's index is passed in index, or -1 if there is no
-current item.
-
-
                                    int TQToolBox::currentIndex () const
-
                                    Returns the index of the current item, or -1 if the toolbox is empty.
-See the "currentIndex" property for details.
-
                                    TQWidget * TQToolBox::currentItem () const
-
                                    
-Returns the toolbox's current item, or 0 if the toolbox is empty.
-
-
                                    int TQToolBox::indexOf ( TQWidget * item ) const
-
                                    
-Returns the index of item item, or -1 if the item does not
-exist.
-
-
                                    int TQToolBox::insertItem ( int index, TQWidget * item, const TQIconSet & iconSet, const TQString & label )
-
                                    
-Inserts the widget item at position index, or at the bottom
-of the toolbox if index is out of range. The new item's label
-is set to label, and the iconSet is displayed to the left of
-the label. Returns the new item's index.
-
-
                                    int TQToolBox::insertItem ( int index, TQWidget * item, const TQString & label )
-
                                    
-
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                     Inserts the widget item at position index, or at the bottom
-of the toolbox if index is out of range. The new item's label is
-set to label. Returns the new item's index.
-
-
                                    bool TQToolBox::isItemEnabled ( int index ) const
-
                                    
-Returns TRUE if the item at position index is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                    TQWidget * TQToolBox::item ( int index ) const
-
                                    
-Returns the item at position index, or 0 if there is no such
-item.
-
-
                                    TQIconSet TQToolBox::itemIconSet ( int index ) const
-
                                    
-Returns the icon of the item at position index, or a null
-icon if index is out of range.
-
-
                                    void TQToolBox::itemInserted ( int index ) [virtual protected]
-
                                    
-This virtual handler is called after a new item was added or
-inserted at position index.
-
-
                                    TQString TQToolBox::itemLabel ( int index ) const
-
                                    
-Returns the label of the item at position index, or a null string if
-index is out of range.
-
-
                                    void TQToolBox::itemRemoved ( int index ) [virtual protected]
-
                                    
-This virtual handler is called after an item was removed from
-position index.
-
-
                                    TQString TQToolBox::itemToolTip ( int index ) const
-
                                    
-Returns the tooltip of the item at position index, or a null
-string if index is out of range.
-
-
                                    int TQToolBox::removeItem ( TQWidget * item )
-
                                    
-Removes the widget item from the toolbox. Note that the widget
-is not deleted. Returns the removed widget's index, or -1 if
-the widget was not in this tool box.
-
-
                                    void TQToolBox::setCurrentIndex ( int index ) [slot]
-
                                    Sets the index of the current item, or -1 if the toolbox is empty to index.
-See the "currentIndex" property for details.
-
                                    void TQToolBox::setCurrentItem ( TQWidget * item )
-
                                    
-Sets the current item to be item.
-
-
                                    void TQToolBox::setItemEnabled ( int index, bool enabled )
-
                                    
-If enabled is TRUE then the item at position index is enabled; otherwise item
-index is disabled.
-
-
                                    void TQToolBox::setItemIconSet ( int index, const TQIconSet & iconSet )
-
                                    
-Sets the icon of the item at position index to iconSet.
-
-
                                    void TQToolBox::setItemLabel ( int index, const TQString & label )
-
                                    
-Sets the label of the item at position index to label.
-
-
                                    void TQToolBox::setItemToolTip ( int index, const TQString & toolTip )
-
                                    
-Sets the tooltip of the item at position index to toolTip.
-
-
                                    Property Documentation
                                    
-
                                    int count
                                    
-
                                    This property holds the number of items contained in the toolbox.
-
                                    
-
                                    Get this property's value with count().
-
                                    int currentIndex
                                    
-
                                    This property holds the index of the current item, or -1 if the toolbox is empty.
-
                                    Set this property's value with setCurrentIndex() and get this property's value with currentIndex().
-
                                    See also currentItem(), indexOf(), and item().
-
-
-
                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                    
-
-
                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                    
-
                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qtoolbutton-h.html b/doc/html/qtoolbutton-h.html
index 4dba9eaf8..09bc3ea49 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtoolbutton-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtoolbutton-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qtoolbutton.h Include File
+ntqtoolbutton.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                    TQToolButton Class Reference
                                    
-
-
                                    The TQToolButton class provides a tquick-access button to
-commands or options, usually used inside a TQToolBar.
-More...
-
                                    #include <qtoolbutton.h>
-
                                    Inherits TQButton.
-
                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                    Public Members
                                    
-
                                      
-
                                    • enum TextPosition { BesideIcon, BelowIcon, Right = BesideIcon, Under = BelowIcon }
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQToolButton ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQToolButton ( const TQIconSet & iconSet, const TQString & textLabel, const TQString & grouptext, TQObject * receiver, const char * slot, TQToolBar * parent, const char * name = 0 )
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQToolButton ( ArrowType type, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
                                      • 
-
                                    • ~TQToolButton ()
                                      • 
-
                                    • void setOnIconSet ( const TQIconSet & )  (obsolete)
                                      • 
-
                                    • void setOffIconSet ( const TQIconSet & )  (obsolete)
                                      • 
-
                                    • void setIconSet ( const TQIconSet & set, bool on )  (obsolete)
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQIconSet onIconSet () const  (obsolete)
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQIconSet offIconSet () const  (obsolete)
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQIconSet iconSet ( bool on ) const  (obsolete)
                                      • 
-
                                    • virtual void setIconSet ( const TQIconSet & )
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQIconSet iconSet () const
                                      • 
-
                                    • bool usesBigPixmap () const
                                      • 
-
                                    • bool usesTextLabel () const
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQString textLabel () const
                                      • 
-
                                    • void setPopup ( TQPopupMenu * popup )
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQPopupMenu * popup () const
                                      • 
-
                                    • void setPopupDelay ( int delay )
                                      • 
-
                                    • int popupDelay () const
                                      • 
-
                                    • void openPopup ()
                                      • 
-
                                    • void setAutoRaise ( bool enable )
                                      • 
-
                                    • bool autoRaise () const
                                      • 
-
                                    • TextPosition textPosition () const
                                      • 
-
                                    
-
                                    Public Slots
                                    
-
-
                                    Properties
                                    
-
                                      
-
                                    • bool autoRaise - whether auto-raising is enabled
                                      • 
-
                                    • BackgroundMode backgroundMode - the toolbutton's background mode  (read only)
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQIconSet iconSet - the icon set providing the icon shown on the button
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQIconSet offIconSet - the icon set that is used when the button is in an "off" state  (obsolete)
                                      • 
-
                                    • bool on - whether this tool button is on
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQIconSet onIconSet - the icon set that is used when the button is in an "on" state  (obsolete)
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQPixmap pixmap - the pixmap of the button  (read only)
                                      • 
-
                                    • int popupDelay - the time delay between pressing the button and the appearance of the associated popup menu in milliseconds
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQString textLabel - the label of this button
                                      • 
-
                                    • TextPosition textPosition - the position of the text label of this button
                                      • 
-
                                    • bool toggleButton - whether this tool button is a toggle button
                                      • 
-
                                    • bool usesBigPixmap - whether this toolbutton uses big pixmaps
                                      • 
-
                                    • bool usesTextLabel - whether the toolbutton displays a text label below the button pixmap
                                      • 
-
                                    
-
                                    Protected Members
                                    
-
-
                                    Detailed Description
                                    
-
-
-The TQToolButton class provides a tquick-access button to
-commands or options, usually used inside a TQToolBar.
-
                                     
-
-
                                     A tool button is a special button that provides tquick-access to
-specific commands or options. As opposed to a normal command
-button, a tool button usually doesn't show a text label, but shows
-an icon instead. Its classic usage is to select tools, for example
-the "pen" tool in a drawing program. This would be implemented
-with a TQToolButton as toggle button (see setToggleButton() ).
-
                                     TQToolButton supports auto-raising. In auto-raise mode, the button
-draws a 3D frame only when the mouse points at it. The feature is
-automatically turned on when a button is used inside a TQToolBar.
-Change it with setAutoRaise().
-
                                     A tool button's icon is set as TQIconSet. This makes it possible to
-specify different pixmaps for the disabled and active state. The
-disabled pixmap is used when the button's functionality is not
-available. The active pixmap is displayed when the button is
-auto-raised because the mouse pointer is hovering over it.
-
                                     The button's look and dimension is adjustable with
-setUsesBigPixmap() and setUsesTextLabel(). When used inside a
-TQToolBar in a TQMainWindow, the button automatically adjusts to
-TQMainWindow's settings (see TQMainWindow::setUsesTextLabel() and
-TQMainWindow::setUsesBigPixmaps()). The pixmap set on a TQToolButton
-will be set to 22x22 if it is bigger than this size. If
-usesBigPixmap() is TRUE, then the pixmap will be set to 32x32.
-
                                     A tool button can offer additional choices in a popup menu. The
-feature is sometimes used with the "Back" button in a web browser.
-After pressing and holding the button down for a while, a menu
-pops up showing a list of possible pages to jump to. With
-TQToolButton you can set a popup menu using setPopup(). The default
-delay is 600ms; you can adjust it with setPopupDelay().
-
                                     
                                    Toolbar with Toolbuttons \caption A floating
                                     TQToolbar with TQToolbuttons
-
                                     
                                    See also TQPushButton, TQToolBar, TQMainWindow, GUI Design Handbook: Push Button, and Basic Widgets.
-
-
                                    Member Type Documentation
                                    
-
                                    TQToolButton::TextPosition
                                    
-
-
                                     The position of the tool button's textLabel in relation to the
-tool button's icon.
-
                                      
-
                                    • TQToolButton::BesideIcon - The text appears beside the icon.
-
                                    • TQToolButton::BelowIcon - The text appears below the icon.
-
                                    
-
                                    Member Function Documentation
                                    
-
                                    TQToolButton::TQToolButton ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                    
-Constructs an empty tool button called name, with parent parent.
-
-
                                    TQToolButton::TQToolButton ( const TQIconSet & iconSet, const TQString & textLabel, const TQString & grouptext, TQObject * receiver, const char * slot, TQToolBar * parent, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                    
-Constructs a tool button called name, that is a child of parent (which must be a TQToolBar).
-
                                     The tool button will display iconSet, with its text label and
-tool tip set to textLabel and its status bar message set to grouptext. It will be connected to the slot in object receiver.
-
-
                                    TQToolButton::TQToolButton ( ArrowType type, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                    
-Constructs a tool button as an arrow button. The ArrowType type defines the arrow direction. Possible values are LeftArrow, RightArrow, UpArrow and DownArrow.
-
                                     An arrow button has auto-repeat turned on by default.
-
                                     The parent and name arguments are sent to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
-
                                    TQToolButton::~TQToolButton ()
-
                                    
-Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-
-
                                    bool TQToolButton::autoRaise () const
-
                                    Returns TRUE if auto-raising is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "autoRaise" property for details.
-
                                    TQIconSet TQToolButton::iconSet () const
-
                                    Returns the icon set providing the icon shown on the button.
-See the "iconSet" property for details.
-
                                    TQIconSet TQToolButton::iconSet ( bool on ) const
-
                                     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                     Since TQt 3.0, TQIconSet contains both the On and Off icons.
-
                                     For ease of porting, this function ignores the on parameter and
-returns the iconSet property. If you relied on the on
-parameter, you probably want to update your code to use the TQIconSet
-On/Off mechanism.
-
-
                                    TQIconSet TQToolButton::offIconSet () const
-
                                    Returns the icon set that is used when the button is in an "off" state.
-See the "offIconSet" property for details.
-
                                    TQIconSet TQToolButton::onIconSet () const
-
                                    Returns the icon set that is used when the button is in an "on" state.
-See the "onIconSet" property for details.
-
                                    void TQToolButton::openPopup ()
-
                                    
-Opens (pops up) the associated popup menu. If there is no such
-menu, this function does nothing. This function does not return
-until the popup menu has been closed by the user.
-
-
                                    TQPopupMenu * TQToolButton::popup () const
-
                                    
-Returns the associated popup menu, or 0 if no popup menu has been
-defined.
-
                                     
                                    See also setPopup().
-
-
                                    int TQToolButton::popupDelay () const
-
                                    Returns the time delay between pressing the button and the appearance of the associated popup menu in milliseconds.
-See the "popupDelay" property for details.
-
                                    void TQToolButton::setAutoRaise ( bool enable )
-
                                    Sets whether auto-raising is enabled to enable.
-See the "autoRaise" property for details.
-
                                    void TQToolButton::setIconSet ( const TQIconSet & ) [virtual]
-
                                    Sets the icon set providing the icon shown on the button.
-See the "iconSet" property for details.
-
                                    void TQToolButton::setIconSet ( const TQIconSet & set, bool on )
-
                                     This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                     Since TQt 3.0, TQIconSet contains both the On and Off icons.
-
                                     For ease of porting, this function ignores the on parameter and
-sets the iconSet property. If you relied on the on parameter,
-you probably want to update your code to use the TQIconSet On/Off
-mechanism.
-
                                     
                                    See also iconSet and TQIconSet::State.
-
-
                                    void TQToolButton::setOffIconSet ( const TQIconSet & )
-
                                    Sets the icon set that is used when the button is in an "off" state.
-See the "offIconSet" property for details.
-
                                    void TQToolButton::setOn ( bool enable ) [virtual slot]
-
                                    Sets whether this tool button is on to enable.
-See the "on" property for details.
-
                                    void TQToolButton::setOnIconSet ( const TQIconSet & )
-
                                    Sets the icon set that is used when the button is in an "on" state.
-See the "onIconSet" property for details.
-
                                    void TQToolButton::setPopup ( TQPopupMenu * popup )
-
                                    
-Associates the popup menu popup with this tool button.
-
                                     The popup will be shown each time the tool button has been pressed
-down for a certain amount of time. A typical application example
-is the "back" button in some web browsers's tool bars. If the user
-clicks it, the browser simply browses back to the previous page.
-If the user presses and holds the button down for a while, the
-tool button shows a menu containing the current history list.
-
                                     Ownership of the popup menu is not transferred to the tool button.
-
                                     
                                    See also popup().
-
-
                                    void TQToolButton::setPopupDelay ( int delay )
-
                                    Sets the time delay between pressing the button and the appearance of the associated popup menu in milliseconds to delay.
-See the "popupDelay" property for details.
-
                                    void TQToolButton::setTextLabel ( const TQString & ) [slot]
-
                                    Sets the label of this button.
-See the "textLabel" property for details.
-
                                    void TQToolButton::setTextLabel ( const TQString & newLabel, bool tipToo ) [virtual slot]
-
                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                     Sets the label of this button to newLabel and automatically
-sets it as a tool tip if tipToo is TRUE.
-
-
                                    void TQToolButton::setTextPosition ( TextPosition pos ) [slot]
-
                                    Sets the position of the text label of this button to pos.
-See the "textPosition" property for details.
-
                                    void TQToolButton::setToggleButton ( bool enable ) [virtual slot]
-
                                    Sets whether this tool button is a toggle button to enable.
-See the "toggleButton" property for details.
-
                                    void TQToolButton::setUsesBigPixmap ( bool enable ) [virtual slot]
-
                                    Sets whether this toolbutton uses big pixmaps to enable.
-See the "usesBigPixmap" property for details.
-
                                    void TQToolButton::setUsesTextLabel ( bool enable ) [virtual slot]
-
                                    Sets whether the toolbutton displays a text label below the button pixmap to enable.
-See the "usesTextLabel" property for details.
-
                                    TQString TQToolButton::textLabel () const
-
                                    Returns the label of this button.
-See the "textLabel" property for details.
-
                                    TextPosition TQToolButton::textPosition () const
-
                                    Returns the position of the text label of this button.
-See the "textPosition" property for details.
-
                                    void TQToolButton::toggle () [slot]
-
                                    
-Toggles the state of this tool button.
-
                                     This function has no effect on non-toggling
-    buttons.
-
                                     
                                    See also toggleButton and toggled().
-
-
                                    bool TQToolButton::uses3D () const [protected]
-
                                    
-Returns TRUE if this button should be drawn using raised edges;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                     
                                    See also drawButton().
-
-
                                    bool TQToolButton::usesBigPixmap () const
-
                                    Returns TRUE if this toolbutton uses big pixmaps; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "usesBigPixmap" property for details.
-
                                    bool TQToolButton::usesTextLabel () const
-
                                    Returns TRUE if the toolbutton displays a text label below the button pixmap; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "usesTextLabel" property for details.
-
                                    Property Documentation
                                    
-
                                    bool autoRaise
                                    
-
                                    This property holds whether auto-raising is enabled.
-
                                    The default is disabled (i.e. FALSE).
-
-
                                    Set this property's value with setAutoRaise() and get this property's value with autoRaise().
-
                                    BackgroundMode backgroundMode
                                    
-
                                    This property holds the toolbutton's background mode.
-
                                    Get this property with backgroundMode().
-
                                     
                                    See also TQWidget::backgroundMode.
-
-
                                    TQIconSet iconSet
                                    
-
                                    This property holds the icon set providing the icon shown on the button.
-
                                    Setting this property sets TQToolButton::pixmap to a null
-pixmap. There is no default iconset.
-
                                     
                                    See also pixmap, toggleButton, and on.
-
-
                                    Set this property's value with setIconSet() and get this property's value with iconSet().
-
                                    TQIconSet offIconSet
                                    
-
                                    This property holds the icon set that is used when the button is in an "off" state.
-
                                    This property is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                     Since TQt 3.0, TQIconSet contains both the On and Off icons. There is
-now an TQToolButton::iconSet property that replaces both TQToolButton::onIconSet and TQToolButton::offIconSet.
-
                                     For ease of porting, this property is a synonym for TQToolButton::iconSet. You probably want to go over your application
-code and use the TQIconSet On/Off mechanism.
-
                                     
                                    See also iconSet and TQIconSet::State.
-
-
                                    Set this property's value with setOffIconSet() and get this property's value with offIconSet().
-
                                    bool on
                                    
-
                                    This property holds whether this tool button is on.
-
                                    This property has no effect on non-toggling
-    buttons. The default is FALSE (i.e. off).
-
                                     
                                    See also toggleButton and toggle().
-
-
                                    Set this property's value with setOn().
-
                                    TQIconSet onIconSet
                                    
-
                                    This property holds the icon set that is used when the button is in an "on" state.
-
                                    This property is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                     Since TQt 3.0, TQIconSet contains both the On and Off icons. There is
-now an TQToolButton::iconSet property that replaces both TQToolButton::onIconSet and TQToolButton::offIconSet.
-
                                     For ease of porting, this property is a synonym for TQToolButton::iconSet. You probably want to go over your application
-code and use the TQIconSet On/Off mechanism.
-
                                     
                                    See also iconSet and TQIconSet::State.
-
-
                                    Set this property's value with setOnIconSet() and get this property's value with onIconSet().
-
                                    TQPixmap pixmap
                                     
                                    This property holds the pixmap of the button.
-
                                    The pixmap property has no meaning for tool buttons. Use the
-iconSet property instead.
-
-
                                    int popupDelay
                                    
-
                                    This property holds the time delay between pressing the button and the appearance of the associated popup menu in milliseconds.
-
                                    Usually this is around half a second. A value of 0 draws the down
-arrow button to the side of the button which can be used to open
-up the popup menu.
-
                                     
                                    See also setPopup().
-
-
                                    Set this property's value with setPopupDelay() and get this property's value with popupDelay().
-
                                    TQString textLabel
                                    
-
                                    This property holds the label of this button.
-
                                    Setting this property automatically sets the text as a tool tip
-too. There is no default text.
-
-
                                    Set this property's value with setTextLabel() and get this property's value with textLabel().
-
                                    TextPosition textPosition
                                    
-
                                    This property holds the position of the text label of this button.
-
                                    
-
                                    Set this property's value with setTextPosition() and get this property's value with textPosition().
-
                                    bool toggleButton
                                    
-
                                    This property holds whether this tool button is a toggle button.
-
                                    Toggle buttons have an on/off state similar to check boxes. A tool button is not a toggle button by
-default.
-
                                     
                                    See also on and toggle().
-
-
                                    Set this property's value with setToggleButton().
-
                                    bool usesBigPixmap
                                    
-
                                    This property holds whether this toolbutton uses big pixmaps.
-
                                    TQToolButton automatically connects this property to the relevant
-signal in the TQMainWindow in which it resides. We strongly
-recommend that you use TQMainWindow::setUsesBigPixmaps() instead.
-
                                     This property's default is TRUE.
-
                                     Warning: If you set some buttons (in a TQMainWindow) to have big
-pixmaps and others to have small pixmaps, TQMainWindow may not get
-the geometry right.
-
-
                                    Set this property's value with setUsesBigPixmap() and get this property's value with usesBigPixmap().
-
                                    bool usesTextLabel
                                    
-
                                    This property holds whether the toolbutton displays a text label below the button pixmap.
-
                                    The default is FALSE.
-
                                     TQToolButton automatically connects this slot to the relevant
-signal in the TQMainWindow in which is resides.
-
-
                                    Set this property's value with setUsesTextLabel() and get this property's value with usesTextLabel().
-
-
                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                    
-
-
                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                    
-
                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qtooltip-h.html b/doc/html/qtooltip-h.html
index 201e17ca2..e561611c4 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtooltip-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtooltip-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qtooltip.h Include File
+ntqtooltip.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                    
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                    TQToolTip Class Reference
                                    
-
-
                                    The TQToolTip class provides tool tips (balloon help) for
-any widget or rectangular part of a widget.
-More...
-
                                    #include <qtooltip.h>
-
                                    Inherits TQt.
-
                                    List of all member functions.
-
                                    Public Members
                                    
-
                                      
-
                                    • TQToolTip ( TQWidget * widget, TQToolTipGroup * group = 0 )
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQWidget * parentWidget () const
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQToolTipGroup * group () const
                                      • 
-
                                    
-
                                    Static Public Members
                                    
-
                                      
-
                                    • void add ( TQWidget * widget, const TQString & text )
                                      • 
-
                                    • void add ( TQWidget * widget, const TQString & text, TQToolTipGroup * group, const TQString & longText )
                                      • 
-
                                    • void remove ( TQWidget * widget )
                                      • 
-
                                    • void add ( TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & rect, const TQString & text )
                                      • 
-
                                    • void add ( TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & rect, const TQString & text, TQToolTipGroup * group, const TQString & groupText )
                                      • 
-
                                    • void remove ( TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & rect )
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQString textFor ( TQWidget * widget, const TQPoint & pos = TQPoint ( ) )
                                      • 
-
                                    • void hide ()
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQFont font ()
                                      • 
-
                                    • void setFont ( const TQFont & font )
                                      • 
-
                                    • TQPalette palette ()
                                      • 
-
                                    • void setPalette ( const TQPalette & palette )
                                      • 
-
                                    • void setEnabled ( bool enable )  (obsolete)
                                      • 
-
                                    • bool enabled ()  (obsolete)
                                      • 
-
                                    • void setGloballyEnabled ( bool enable )
                                      • 
-
                                    • bool isGloballyEnabled ()
                                      • 
-
                                    • void setWakeUpDelay ( int i )
                                      • 
-
                                    
-
                                    Protected Members
                                    
-
                                      
-
                                    • virtual void maybeTip ( const TQPoint & p ) = 0
                                      • 
-
                                    • void tip ( const TQRect & rect, const TQString & text )
                                      • 
-
                                    • void tip ( const TQRect & rect, const TQString & text, const TQString & groupText )
                                      • 
-
                                    • void tip ( const TQRect & rect, const TQString & text, const TQRect & geometry )
                                      • 
-
                                    • void tip ( const TQRect & rect, const TQString & text, const TQString & groupText, const TQRect & geometry )
                                      • 
-
                                    • void clear ()
                                      • 
-
                                    
-
                                    Detailed Description
                                    
-
-
-The TQToolTip class provides tool tips (balloon help) for
-any widget or rectangular part of a widget.
-
                                     
-
-
                                     The tip is a short, single line of text reminding the user of the
-widget's or rectangle's function. It is drawn immediately below
-the region in a distinctive black-on-yellow combination.
-
                                     The tip can be any Rich-Text formatted string.
-
                                     TQToolTipGroup provides a way for tool tips to display another text
-elsewhere (most often in a status bar).
-
                                     At any point in time, TQToolTip is either dormant or active. In
-dormant mode the tips are not shown and in active mode they are.
-The mode is global, not particular to any one widget.
-
                                     TQToolTip switches from dormant to active mode when the user hovers
-the mouse on a tip-etquipped region for a second or so and remains
-active until the user either clicks a mouse button, presses a key,
-lets the mouse hover for five seconds or moves the mouse outside
-all tip-etquipped regions for at least a second.
-
                                     The TQToolTip class can be used in three different ways:
-
                                      
-
                                    1.  Adding a tip to an entire widget.
-
                                    2.  Adding a tip to a fixed rectangle within a widget.
-
                                    3.  Adding a tip to a dynamic rectangle within a widget.
-
                                    
-
                                     To add a tip to a widget, call the static function
-TQToolTip::add() with the widget and tip as arguments:
-
                                     
                                    -        TQToolTip::add( quitButton, "Leave the application" );
-    
                                    
- 
-
                                     This is the simplest and most common use of TQToolTip. The tip
-will be deleted automatically when quitButton is deleted, but
-you can remove it yourself, too:
-
                                     
                                    -        TQToolTip::remove( quitButton );
-    
                                    
- 
-
                                     You can also display another text (typically in a status bar), courtesy of TQToolTipGroup. This example
-assumes that grp is a TQToolTipGroup * and is already
-connected to the appropriate status bar:
-
                                     
                                    -        TQToolTip::add( quitButton, "Leave the application", grp,
-                       "Leave the application, prompting to save if necessary" );
-        TQToolTip::add( closeButton, "Close this window", grp,
-                       "Close this window, prompting to save if necessary" );
-    
                                    
- 
-
                                     To add a tip to a fixed rectangle within a widget, call the static
-function TQToolTip::add() with the widget, rectangle and tip as
-arguments. (See the tooltip/tooltip.cpp example.) Again, you
-can supply a TQToolTipGroup * and another text if you want.
-
                                     Both of these are one-liners and cover the majority of cases. The
-third and most general way to use TQToolTip requires you to
-reimplement a pure virtual function to decide whether to pop up a
-tool tip. The tooltip/tooltip.cpp example demonstrates this
-too. This mode can be used to implement tips for text that can
-move as the user scrolls, for example.
-
                                     To use TQToolTip like this, you must subclass TQToolTip and
-reimplement maybeTip(). TQToolTip calls maybeTip() when a tip
-should pop up, and maybeTip() decides whether to show a tip.
-
                                     Tool tips can be globally disabled using
-TQToolTip::setGloballyEnabled() or disabled in groups with
-TQToolTipGroup::setEnabled().
-
                                     You can retrieve the text of a tooltip for a given position within
-a widget using textFor().
-
                                     The global tooltip font and palette can be set with the static
-setFont() and setPalette() functions respectively.
-
                                     
                                    See also TQStatusBar, TQWhatsThis, TQToolTipGroup, GUI Design Handbook: Tool Tip, and Help System.
-
-
                                    Member Function Documentation
                                    
-
                                    TQToolTip::TQToolTip ( TQWidget * widget, TQToolTipGroup * group = 0 )
-
                                    
-Constructs a tool tip object. This is only necessary if you need
-tool tips on regions that can move within the widget (most often
-because the widget's contents can scroll).
-
                                     widget is the widget you want to add dynamic tool tips to and
-group (optional) is the tool tip group they should belong to.
-
                                     Warning: TQToolTip is not a subclass of TQObject, so the instance of
-TQToolTip is not deleted when widget is deleted.
-
                                     Warning: If you delete the tool tip before you have deleted
-widget then you need to make sure you call remove() yourself from
-widget in your reimplemented TQToolTip destructor.
-
                                     
                                    -        MyToolTip::~MyToolTip()
-        {
-            remove( widget );
-        }
-    
                                    
- 
-
                                     
                                    See also maybeTip().
-
-
                                    void TQToolTip::add ( TQWidget * widget, const TQString & text ) [static]
-
                                    
-Adds a tool tip to widget. text is the text to be shown in
-the tool tip.
-
                                     This is the most common entry point to the TQToolTip class; it is
-suitable for adding tool tips to buttons, checkboxes, comboboxes
-and so on.
-
-
                                    Examples: helpsystem/mainwindow.cpp, qdir/qdir.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, and tooltip/tooltip.cpp.
-
                                    void TQToolTip::add ( TQWidget * widget, const TQString & text, TQToolTipGroup * group, const TQString & longText ) [static]
-
                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                     Adds a tool tip to widget and to tool tip group group.
-
                                     text is the text shown in the tool tip and longText is the
-text emitted from group.
-
                                     Normally, longText is shown in a status
-    bar or similar.
-
-
                                    void TQToolTip::add ( TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & rect, const TQString & text ) [static]
-
                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                     Adds a tool tip to a fixed rectangle, rect, within widget.
-text is the text shown in the tool tip.
-
-
                                    void TQToolTip::add ( TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & rect, const TQString & text, TQToolTipGroup * group, const TQString & groupText ) [static]
-
                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                     Adds a tool tip to an entire widget and to tool tip group group. The tooltip will disappear when the mouse leaves the rect.
-
                                     text is the text shown in the tool tip and groupText is the
-text emitted from group.
-
                                     Normally, groupText is shown in a status
-    bar or similar.
-
-
                                    void TQToolTip::clear () [protected]
-
                                    
-Immediately removes all tool tips for this tooltip's parent
-widget.
-
-
                                    bool TQToolTip::enabled () [static]
-
                                    
-
-
                                     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                     
-
                                    TQFont TQToolTip::font () [static]
-
                                    
-Returns the font common to all tool tips.
-
                                     
                                    See also setFont().
-
-
                                    TQToolTipGroup * TQToolTip::group () const
-
                                    
-
-
                                     Returns the tool tip group this TQToolTip is a member of or 0 if it
-isn't a member of any group.
-
                                     The tool tip group is the object responsible for maintaining
-contact between tool tips and a status
-    bar or something else which can show the longer help text.
-
                                     
                                    See also parentWidget() and TQToolTipGroup.
-
-
                                    void TQToolTip::hide () [static]
-
                                    
-Hides any tip that is currently being shown.
-
                                     Normally, there is no need to call this function; TQToolTip takes
-care of showing and hiding the tips as the user moves the mouse.
-
-
                                    bool TQToolTip::isGloballyEnabled () [static]
-
                                    
-Returns whether tool tips are enabled globally.
-
                                     
                                    See also setGloballyEnabled().
-
-
                                    void TQToolTip::maybeTip ( const TQPoint & p ) [pure virtual protected]
-
                                    
-
-
                                     This pure virtual function is half of the most versatile interface
-TQToolTip offers.
-
                                     It is called when there is a possibility that a tool tip should be
-shown and must decide whether there is a tool tip for the point p in the widget that this TQToolTip object relates to. If so,
-maybeTip() must call tip() with the rectangle the tip applies to,
-the tip's text and optionally the TQToolTipGroup details and the
-geometry in screen coordinates.
-
                                     p is given in that widget's local coordinates. Most maybeTip()
-implementations will be of the form:
-
                                     
                                    -        if ( <something> ) {
-            tip( <something>, <something> );
-        }
-    
                                    
- 
-
                                     The first argument to tip() (a rectangle) must encompass p,
-i.e. the tip must apply to the current mouse position; otherwise
-TQToolTip's operation is undefined.
-
                                     Note that the tip will disappear once the mouse moves outside the
-rectangle you give to tip(), and will not reappear if the mouse
-moves back in: maybeTip() is called again instead.
-
                                     
                                    See also tip().
-
-
                                    Examples: helpsystem/tooltip.cpp and tooltip/tooltip.cpp.
-
                                    TQPalette TQToolTip::palette () [static]
-
                                    
-Returns the palette common to all tool tips.
-
                                     
                                    See also setPalette().
-
-
                                    TQWidget * TQToolTip::parentWidget () const
-
                                    
-
-
                                     Returns the widget this TQToolTip applies to.
-
                                     The tool tip is destroyed automatically when the parent widget is
-destroyed.
-
                                     
                                    See also group().
-
-
                                    void TQToolTip::remove ( TQWidget * widget ) [static]
-
                                    
-Removes the tool tip from widget.
-
                                     If there is more than one tool tip on widget, only the one
-covering the entire widget is removed.
-
-
                                    void TQToolTip::remove ( TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & rect ) [static]
-
                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                     Removes any tool tip for rect from widget.
-
                                     If there is more than one tool tip on widget, only the one
-covering rectangle rect is removed.
-
-
                                    void TQToolTip::setEnabled ( bool enable ) [static]
-
                                    
-
-
                                     This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                     
-
                                    void TQToolTip::setFont ( const TQFont & font ) [static]
-
                                    
-Sets the font for all tool tips to font.
-
                                     
                                    See also font().
-
-
                                    void TQToolTip::setGloballyEnabled ( bool enable ) [static]
-
                                    
-If enable is TRUE sets all tool tips to be enabled (shown when
-needed); if enable is FALSE sets all tool tips to be disabled
-(never shown).
-
                                     By default, tool tips are enabled. Note that this function affects
-all tool tips in the entire application.
-
                                     
                                    See also TQToolTipGroup::enabled.
-
-
                                    void TQToolTip::setPalette ( const TQPalette & palette ) [static]
-
                                    
-Sets the palette for all tool tips to palette.
-
                                     
                                    See also palette().
-
-
                                    void TQToolTip::setWakeUpDelay ( int i ) [static]
-
                                    
-Sets the wakeup delay for all tooltips to i
-milliseconds.
-
-
                                    TQString TQToolTip::textFor ( TQWidget * widget, const TQPoint & pos = TQPoint ( ) ) [static]
-
                                    
-Returns the tool tip text for widget at position pos, or
-TQString::null if there is no tool tip for the given widget and
-position.
-
-
                                    void TQToolTip::tip ( const TQRect & rect, const TQString & text ) [protected]
-
                                    
-Immediately pops up a tip saying text and removes the tip once
-the cursor moves out of rectangle rect (which is given in the
-coordinate system of the widget this TQToolTip relates to).
-
                                     The tip will not reappear if the cursor moves back; your
-maybeTip() must reinstate it each time.
-
-
                                    void TQToolTip::tip ( const TQRect & rect, const TQString & text, const TQString & groupText ) [protected]
-
                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                     Immediately pops up a tip saying text and removes that tip once
-the cursor moves out of rectangle rect (which is given in the
-coordinate system of the widget this TQToolTip relates to). groupText is the text emitted from the group.
-
                                     The tip will not reappear if the cursor moves back; your
-maybeTip() must reinstate it each time.
-
-
                                    void TQToolTip::tip ( const TQRect & rect, const TQString & text, const TQRect & geometry ) [protected]
-
                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                     Immediately pops up a tip within the rectangle geometry, saying
-text and removes the tip once the cursor moves out of rectangle
-rect. Both rectangles are given in the coordinate system of the
-widget this TQToolTip relates to.
-
                                     The tip will not reappear if the cursor moves back; your
-maybeTip() must reinstate it each time.
-
                                     If the tip does not fit inside geometry, the tip expands.
-
-
                                    void TQToolTip::tip ( const TQRect & rect, const TQString & text, const TQString & groupText, const TQRect & geometry ) [protected]
-
                                    
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                     Immediately pops up a tip within the rectangle geometry, saying
-text and removes the tip once the cursor moves out of rectangle
-rect. groupText is the text emitted from the group. Both
-rectangles are given in the coordinate system of the widget this
-TQToolTip relates to.
-
                                     The tip will not reappear if the cursor moves back; your
-maybeTip() must reinstate it each time.
-
                                     If the tip does not fit inside geometry, the tip expands.
-
-
-
                                    
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                    
-
-
                                    Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                    TQt 3.3.8
                                    
-
                                    
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qtooltipgroup-members.html b/doc/html/qtooltipgroup-members.html
index 0e1dac2fe..c860fa645 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtooltipgroup-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtooltipgroup-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -37,54 +37,54 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
 
                                    
diff --git a/doc/html/qtooltipgroup.html b/doc/html/qtooltipgroup.html
index fb4e80b0a..8b83ff63d 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtooltipgroup.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtooltipgroup.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                    The TQToolTipGroup class collects tool tips into related groups.
 More...
-
                                    #include <qtooltip.h>
-
                                    Inherits TQObject.
+
                                    #include <ntqtooltip.h>
+
                                    Inherits TQObject.
 
                                    List of all member functions.
 
                                    Public Members
                                    
 
                                      
@@ -64,20 +64,20 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 The TQToolTipGroup class collects tool tips into related groups.
 
                                       
 
                                       Tool tips can display two texts: one in the tip and
-(optionally) one that is typically in a status
+(optionally) one that is typically in a status
     bar. TQToolTipGroup provides a way to link tool tips to
 this status bar.
 
                                       TQToolTipGroup has practically no API; it is only used as an
-argument to TQToolTip's member functions, for example like this:
+argument to TQToolTip's member functions, for example like this:
 
                                       
                                               TQToolTipGroup * grp = new TQToolTipGroup( this, "tool tip relay" );
-        connect( grp, SIGNAL(showTip(const TQString&)),
-                 myLabel, SLOT(setText(const TQString&)) );
-        connect( grp, SIGNAL(removeTip()),
+        connect( grp, SIGNAL(showTip(const TQString&)),
+                 myLabel, SLOT(setText(const TQString&)) );
+        connect( grp, SIGNAL(removeTip()),
                  myLabel, SLOT(clear()) );
-        TQToolTip::add( giraffeButton, "feed giraffe",
+        TQToolTip::add( giraffeButton, "feed giraffe",
                        grp, "Give the giraffe a meal" );
-        TQToolTip::add( gorillaButton, "feed gorilla",
+        TQToolTip::add( gorillaButton, "feed gorilla",
                        grp, "Give the gorilla a meal" );
     
                                      
  
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ gorilla a meal" while the relevant tool tips are being displayed.
 
                                      See also Help System.
 
 
                                      Member Function Documentation
                                      
-
                                      TQToolTipGroup::TQToolTipGroup ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
+
                                      TQToolTipGroup::TQToolTipGroup ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
 
                                      
 Constructs a tool tip group called name, with parent parent.
 
@@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ See the "delay" property for details
 
                                      void TQToolTipGroup::setEnabled ( bool ) [slot]
 
                                      Sets whether tool tips in the group are enabled.
 See the "enabled" property for details.
-
                                      void TQToolTipGroup::showTip ( const TQString & longText ) [signal]
+
                                      void TQToolTipGroup::showTip ( const TQString & longText ) [signal]
 
                                      
 
 
                                       This signal is emitted when one of the tool tips in the group is
diff --git a/doc/html/qtranslator-h.html b/doc/html/qtranslator-h.html
index 860537f24..b63510ba4 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtranslator-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtranslator-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qtranslator.h Include File
+ntqtranslator.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                      
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                      TQTranslator Class Reference
                                      
-
-
                                      The TQTranslator class provides internationalization support for text
-output.
-More...
-
                                      #include <qtranslator.h>
-
                                      Inherits TQObject.
-
                                      List of all member functions.
-
                                      Public Members
                                      
-
                                        
-
                                      • TQTranslator ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
                                        • 
-
                                      • ~TQTranslator ()
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQString find ( const char * context, const char * sourceText, const char * comment = 0 ) const  (obsolete)
                                        • 
-
                                      • virtual TQTranslatorMessage findMessage ( const char * context, const char * sourceText, const char * comment = 0 ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • bool load ( const TQString & filename, const TQString & directory = TQString::null, const TQString & search_delimiters = TQString::null, const TQString & suffix = TQString::null )
                                        • 
-
                                      • bool load ( const uchar * data, int len )
                                        • 
-
                                      • void clear ()
                                        • 
-
                                      • enum SaveMode { Everything, Stripped }
                                        • 
-
                                      • bool save ( const TQString & filename, SaveMode mode = Everything )
                                        • 
-
                                      • void insert ( const TQTranslatorMessage & message )
                                        • 
-
                                      • void insert ( const char * context, const char * sourceText, const TQString & translation )  (obsolete)
                                        • 
-
                                      • void remove ( const TQTranslatorMessage & message )
                                        • 
-
                                      • void remove ( const char * context, const char * sourceText )  (obsolete)
                                        • 
-
                                      • bool contains ( const char * context, const char * sourceText, const char * comment = 0 ) const
                                        • 
-
                                      • void squeeze ( SaveMode mode = Everything )
                                        • 
-
                                      • void unsqueeze ()
                                        • 
-
                                      • TQValueList<TQTranslatorMessage> messages () const
                                        • 
-
                                      • bool isEmpty () const
                                        • 
-
                                      
-
                                      Detailed Description
                                      
-
-
-
                                       The TQTranslator class provides internationalization support for text
-output.
-
                                       
-
-
-
                                       An object of this class contains a set of TQTranslatorMessage
-objects, each of which specifies a translation from a source
-language to a target language. TQTranslator provides functions to
-look up translations, add new ones, remove them, load and save
-them, etc.
-
                                       The most common use of TQTranslator is to: load a translator file
-created with TQt Linguist,
-install it using TQApplication::installTranslator(), and use it via
-TQObject::tr(). For example:
-
                                       
                                      -    int main( int argc, char ** argv )
-    {
-        TQApplication app( argc, argv );
-
-        TQTranslator translator( 0 );
-        translator.load( "french.qm", "." );
-        app.installTranslator( &translator );
-
-        MyWidget m;
-        app.setMainWidget( &m );
-        m.show();
-
-        return app.exec();
-    }
-    
                                      
- 
-Note that the translator must be created before the
-application's main window.
-
                                       Most applications will never need to do anything else with this
-class. The other functions provided by this class are useful for
-applications that work on translator files.
-
                                       We call a translation a "messsage". For this reason, translation
-files are sometimes referred to as "message files".
-
                                       It is possible to lookup a translation using findMessage() (as
-tr() and TQApplication::translate() do) and contains(), to insert a
-new translation messsage using insert(), and to remove one using
-remove().
-
                                       Translation tools often need more information than the bare source
-text and translation, for example, context information to help
-the translator. But end-user programs that are using translations
-usually only need lookup. To cater for these different needs,
-TQTranslator can use stripped translator files that use the minimum
-of memory and which support little more functionality than
-findMessage().
-
                                       Thus, load() may not load enough information to make anything more
-than findMessage() work. save() has an argument indicating
-whether to save just this minimum of information or to save
-everything.
-
                                       "Everything" means that for each translation item the following
-information is kept:
-
                                       
                                        
-
                                      •  The translated text - the return value from tr().
-
                                      •  The input key:
-
                                          
-
                                        •  The source text - usually the argument to tr().
-
                                        •  The context - usually the class name for the tr() caller.
-
                                        •  The comment - a comment that helps disambiguate different uses
-of the same text in the same context.
-
                                        
-
                                      
-
                                       The minimum for each item is just the information necessary for
-findMessage() to return the right text. This may include the
-source, context and comment, but usually it is just a hash value
-and the translated text.
-
                                       For example, the "Cancel" in a dialog might have "Anuluj" when the
-program runs in Polish (in this case the source text would be
-"Cancel"). The context would (normally) be the dialog's class
-name; there would normally be no comment, and the translated text
-would be "Anuluj".
-
                                       But it's not always so simple. The Spanish version of a printer
-dialog with settings for two-sided printing and binding would
-probably require both "Activado" and "Activada" as translations
-for "Enabled". In this case the source text would be "Enabled" in
-both cases, and the context would be the dialog's class name, but
-the two items would have disambiguating comments such as
-"two-sided printing" for one and "binding" for the other. The
-comment enables the translator to choose the appropriate gender
-for the Spanish version, and enables TQt to distinguish between
-translations.
-
                                       Note that when TQTranslator loads a stripped file, most functions
-do not work. The functions that do work with stripped files are
-explicitly documented as such.
-
                                       
                                      See also TQTranslatorMessage, TQApplication::installTranslator(), TQApplication::removeTranslator(), TQObject::tr(), TQApplication::translate(), Environment Classes, and Internationalization with TQt.
-
-
                                      Member Type Documentation
                                      
-
                                      TQTranslator::SaveMode
                                      
-
-
                                       This enum type defines how TQTranslator writes translation
-files. There are two modes:
-
                                        
-
                                      • TQTranslator::Everything - files are saved with all available information
-
                                      • TQTranslator::Stripped - files are saved with just enough information for
-end-user applications
-
                                       Note that when TQTranslator loads a stripped file, most functions do
-not work. The functions that do work with stripped files are
-explicitly documented as such.
-
-
                                      Member Function Documentation
                                      
-
                                      TQTranslator::TQTranslator ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                      
-Constructs an empty message file object that is not connected to
-any file. The object is called name with parent parent.
-
-
                                      TQTranslator::~TQTranslator ()
-
                                      
-Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-
-
                                      void TQTranslator::clear ()
-
                                      
-Empties this translator of all contents.
-
                                       This function works with stripped translator files.
-
-
                                      bool TQTranslator::contains ( const char * context, const char * sourceText, const char * comment = 0 ) const
-
                                      
-Returns TRUE if this message file contains a message with the key
-(context, sourceText, comment); otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                       This function works with stripped translator files.
-
                                       (This is is a one-liner that calls findMessage().)
-
-
                                      TQString TQTranslator::find ( const char * context, const char * sourceText, const char * comment = 0 ) const
-
                                      
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                       Please use findMessage() instead.
-
                                       Returns the translation for the key (context, sourceText,
-comment) or TQString::null if there is none in this translator.
-
-
                                      TQTranslatorMessage TQTranslator::findMessage ( const char * context, const char * sourceText, const char * comment = 0 ) const [virtual]
-
                                        Returns the TQTranslatorMessage for the key
-(context, sourceText, comment). If none is found,
-also tries (context, sourceText, "").
-
-
                                      void TQTranslator::insert ( const TQTranslatorMessage & message )
-
                                      
-Inserts message into this message file.
-
                                       This function does not work with stripped translator files. It
-may appear to, but that is not dependable.
-
                                       
                                      See also remove().
-
-
                                      void TQTranslator::insert ( const char * context, const char * sourceText, const TQString & translation )
-
                                      
-
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                       
-
                                      bool TQTranslator::isEmpty () const
-
                                      
-Returns TRUE if this translator is empty, otherwise returns FALSE.
-This function works with stripped and unstripped translation files.
-
-
                                      bool TQTranslator::load ( const TQString & filename, const TQString & directory = TQString::null, const TQString & search_delimiters = TQString::null, const TQString & suffix = TQString::null )
-
                                      
-Loads filename, which may be an absolute file name or relative
-to directory. The previous contents of this translator object
-is discarded. Returns TRUE if the file is loaded successfully;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                       If the full file name does not exist, other file names are tried
-in the following order:
-
                                       
                                        
-
                                      1.  File name with suffix appended (".qm" if the suffix is
-TQString::null).
-
                                      2.  File name with text after a character in search_delimiters
-stripped ("_." is the default for search_delimiters if it is
-TQString::null).
-
                                      3.  File name stripped and suffix appended.
-
                                      4.  File name stripped further, etc.
-
                                      
-
                                       For example, an application running in the fr_CA locale
-(French-speaking Canada) might call load("foo.fr_ca",
-"/opt/foolib"). load() would then try to open the first existing
-readable file from this list:
-
                                       
                                        
-
                                      1.  /opt/foolib/foo.fr_ca
-
                                      2.  /opt/foolib/foo.fr_ca.qm
-
                                      3.  /opt/foolib/foo.fr
-
                                      4.  /opt/foolib/foo.fr.qm
-
                                      5.  /opt/foolib/foo
-
                                      6.  /opt/foolib/foo.qm
-
                                      
-
                                       
                                      See also save().
-
-
                                      Example: i18n/main.cpp.
-
                                      bool TQTranslator::load ( const uchar * data, int len )
-
                                      
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       
-
                                       Loads the .qm file data data of length len into the
-translator. Returns TRUE if the data is loaded successfully;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                       The data is not copied. The caller must be able to guarantee that data
-will not be deleted or modified.
-
-
                                      TQValueList<TQTranslatorMessage> TQTranslator::messages () const
-
                                      
-Returns a list of the messages in the translator. This function is
-rather slow. Because it is seldom called, it's optimized for
-simplicity and small size, rather than speed.
-
                                       If you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate over a
-copy, e.g.
-
                                      -    TQValueList<TQTranslatorMessage> list = myTranslator.messages();
-    TQValueList<TQTranslatorMessage>::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    while ( it != list.end() ) {
-        process_message( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-  
                                      
- 
-
-
                                      void TQTranslator::remove ( const TQTranslatorMessage & message )
-
                                      
-Removes message from this translator.
-
                                       This function works with stripped translator files.
-
                                       
                                      See also insert().
-
-
                                      void TQTranslator::remove ( const char * context, const char * sourceText )
-
                                      
-
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                       This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                       Removes the translation associated to the key (context, sourceText,
-"") from this translator.
-
-
                                      bool TQTranslator::save ( const TQString & filename, SaveMode mode = Everything )
-
                                      
-Saves this message file to filename, overwriting the previous
-contents of filename. If mode is Everything (the
-default), all the information is preserved. If mode is Stripped, any information that is not necessary for findMessage()
-is stripped away.
-
                                       
                                      See also load().
-
-
                                      void TQTranslator::squeeze ( SaveMode mode = Everything )
-
                                      
-Converts this message file to the compact format used to store
-message files on disk.
-
                                       You should never need to call this directly; save() and other
-functions call it as necessary. mode is for internal use.
-
                                       
                                      See also save() and unsqueeze().
-
-
                                      void TQTranslator::unsqueeze ()
-
                                      
-Converts this message file into an easily modifiable data
-structure, less compact than the format used in the files.
-
                                       You should never need to call this function; it is called by
-insert() and friends as necessary.
-
                                       
                                      See also squeeze().
-
-
-
                                      
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                      
-
-
                                      Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                      TQt 3.3.8
                                      
-
                                      
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qtranslatormessage-members.html b/doc/html/qtranslatormessage-members.html
index 273a242bf..95cb56e3b 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtranslatormessage-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtranslatormessage-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qtranslatormessage.html b/doc/html/qtranslatormessage.html
index e1d0191f6..3a45733f4 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtranslatormessage.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtranslatormessage.html
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                      The TQTranslatorMessage class contains a translator message and its
 properties.
 More...
-
                                      #include <qtranslator.h>
+
                                      #include <ntqtranslator.h>
 
                                      List of all member functions.
 
                                      Public Members
                                      
 
                                        
@@ -70,13 +70,13 @@ properties.
 for translation tools such as TQt
     Linguist. It is provided simply to make the API complete
 and regular.
-
                                         For a TQTranslator object, a lookup key is a triple (context, source text, comment) that uniquely identifies a message. An
+
                                         For a TQTranslator object, a lookup key is a triple (context, source text, comment) that uniquely identifies a message. An
 extended key is a quadruple (hash, context, source text, comment), where hash is computed from the source text
 and the comment. Unless you plan to read and write messages
 yourself, you need not worry about the hash value.
 
                                         TQTranslatorMessage stores this triple or quadruple and the relevant
 translation if there is any.
-
                                         
                                        See also TQTranslator, Environment Classes, and Internationalization with TQt.
+
                                         
                                        See also TQTranslator, Environment Classes, and Internationalization with TQt.
 
 
                                        Member Type Documentation
                                        
 
                                        TQTranslatorMessage::Prefix
                                        
@@ -95,18 +95,18 @@ prefixes are
 
                                        TQTranslatorMessage::TQTranslatorMessage ()
 
                                        
 Constructs a translator message with the extended key (0, 0, 0, 0)
-and TQString::null as translation.
+and TQString::null as translation.
 
-
                                        TQTranslatorMessage::TQTranslatorMessage ( const char * context, const char * sourceText, const char * comment, const TQString & translation = TQString::null )
+
                                        TQTranslatorMessage::TQTranslatorMessage ( const char * context, const char * sourceText, const char * comment, const TQString & translation = TQString::null )
 
                                        
 Constructs an translator message with the extended key (h, context, sourceText, comment), where h is computed from
 sourceText and comment, and possibly with a translation.
 
-
                                        TQTranslatorMessage::TQTranslatorMessage ( TQDataStream & stream )
+
                                        TQTranslatorMessage::TQTranslatorMessage ( TQDataStream & stream )
 
                                        
 Constructs a translator message read from the stream. The
 resulting message may have any combination of content.
-
                                         
                                        See also TQTranslator::save().
+
                                         
                                        See also TQTranslator::save().
 
 
                                        TQTranslatorMessage::TQTranslatorMessage ( const TQTranslatorMessage & m )
 
                                        
@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Constructs a copy of translator message m.
 
 
 
                                         Returns the comment for this message (e.g. "File|Save").
-
                                         Warning: This may return 0 if the TQTranslator object is stripped
+
                                         Warning: This may return 0 if the TQTranslator object is stripped
 (compressed).
 
 
                                        Prefix TQTranslatorMessage::commonPrefix ( const TQTranslatorMessage & m ) const
@@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ message and to message m.
 
                                        
 
 
                                         Returns the context for this message (e.g. "MyDialog").
-
                                         Warning: This may return 0 if the TQTranslator object is stripped
+
                                         Warning: This may return 0 if the TQTranslator object is stripped
 (compressed).
 
 
                                        uint TQTranslatorMessage::hash () const
@@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ lexicographically after that of m; otherwise returns FALSE.
 lexicographically after that of m or if they are equal;
 otherwise returns FALSE.
 
-
                                        void TQTranslatorMessage::setTranslation ( const TQString & translation )
+
                                        void TQTranslatorMessage::setTranslation ( const TQString & translation )
 
                                        
 
 
                                         Sets the translation of the source text to translation.
@@ -196,16 +196,16 @@ otherwise returns FALSE.
 
 
 
                                         Returns the source text of this message (e.g. "&Save").
-
                                         Warning: This may return 0 if the TQTranslator object is stripped
+
                                         Warning: This may return 0 if the TQTranslator object is stripped
 (compressed).
 
-
                                        TQString TQTranslatorMessage::translation () const
+
                                        TQString TQTranslatorMessage::translation () const
 
                                        
 
 
                                         Returns the translation of the source text (e.g., "&Sauvegarder").
 
                                         
                                        See also setTranslation().
 
-
                                        void TQTranslatorMessage::write ( TQDataStream & stream, bool strip = FALSE, Prefix prefix = HashContextSourceTextComment ) const
+
                                        void TQTranslatorMessage::write ( TQDataStream & stream, bool strip = FALSE, Prefix prefix = HashContextSourceTextComment ) const
 
                                        
 Writes this translator message to the stream. If strip is
 FALSE (the default), all the information in the message is
diff --git a/doc/html/qtsciicodec-h.html b/doc/html/qtsciicodec-h.html
index a04e7730b..248ba431e 100644
--- a/doc/html/qtsciicodec-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qtsciicodec-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qtsciicodec.h Include File
+ntqtsciicodec.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                        
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                        TQTsciiCodec Class Reference
                                        
-
-
                                        The TQTsciiCodec class provides conversion to and from the Tamil TSCII encoding.
-More...
-
                                        All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
                                        
-
                                        #include <qtsciicodec.h>
-
                                        Inherits TQTextCodec.
-
                                        List of all member functions.
-
                                        Detailed Description
                                        
- 
-
-
-
                                         The TQTsciiCodec class provides conversion to and from the Tamil TSCII encoding.
-
                                         TSCII, formally the Tamil Standard Code Information Interchange
-specification, is a commonly used charset for Tamils. The
-official page for the standard is at
-http://www.tamil.net/tscii/
-
                                         This codec uses the mapping table found at
-http://www.geocities.com/Athens/5180/tsciiset.html.
-Tamil uses composed Unicode which might cause some
-problems if you are using Unicode fonts instead of TSCII fonts.
-
                                         Most of the code here  was written by Hans Petter Bieker
-and is included in TQt with the author's permission and the
-grateful thanks of the Trolltech team.
-Here is the copyright statement for the code as it was at the
-point of contribution. Trolltech's subsequent modifications
-are covered by the usual copyright for TQt.
-
                                         
-
                                         Copyright (C) 2000 Hans Petter Bieker. All rights reserved.
-
                                         Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-are met:
-
                                          
-
                                        1.  Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-
                                        2.  Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-
                                        
-
                                         THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSETQUENTIAL
-DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-SUCH DAMAGE.
-
                                        See also Internationalization with TQt.
-
-
-
                                        
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                        
-
-
                                        Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                        TQt 3.3.8
                                        
-
                                        
-
diff --git a/doc/html/quridrag-members.html b/doc/html/quridrag-members.html
index b44a2d7a6..662267aab 100644
--- a/doc/html/quridrag-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/quridrag-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -37,71 +37,71 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                          
 
                                        • TQUriDrag()
 
                                        • ~TQUriDrag()
-
                                        • blockSignals()
+
                                        • blockSignals()
 
                                        • canDecode()
-
                                        • checkConnectArgs()
-
                                        • child()
-
                                        • childEvent()
-
                                        • children()
-
                                        • className()
-
                                        • connect()
-
                                        • connectNotify()
-
                                        • customEvent()
+
                                        • checkConnectArgs()
+
                                        • child()
+
                                        • childEvent()
+
                                        • children()
+
                                        • className()
+
                                        • connect()
+
                                        • connectNotify()
+
                                        • customEvent()
 
                                        • decode()
 
                                        • decodeLocalFiles()
 
                                        • decodeToUnicodeUris()
-
                                        • deleteLater()
-
                                        • destroyed()
-
                                        • disconnect()
-
                                        • disconnectNotify()
-
                                        • drag()
-
                                        • dragCopy()
-
                                        • dragLink()
-
                                        • dragMove()
-
                                        • dumpObjectInfo()
-
                                        • dumpObjectTree()
+
                                        • deleteLater()
+
                                        • destroyed()
+
                                        • disconnect()
+
                                        • disconnectNotify()
+
                                        • drag()
+
                                        • dragCopy()
+
                                        • dragLink()
+
                                        • dragMove()
+
                                        • dumpObjectInfo()
+
                                        • dumpObjectTree()
 
                                        • encodedData()
-
                                        • event()
-
                                        • eventFilter()
+
                                        • event()
+
                                        • eventFilter()
 
                                        • format()
-
                                        • highPriority()
-
                                        • inherits()
-
                                        • insertChild()
-
                                        • installEventFilter()
-
                                        • isA()
-
                                        • isWidgetType()
-
                                        • killTimer()
-
                                        • killTimers()
+
                                        • highPriority()
+
                                        • inherits()
+
                                        • insertChild()
+
                                        • installEventFilter()
+
                                        • isA()
+
                                        • isWidgetType()
+
                                        • killTimer()
+
                                        • killTimers()
 
                                        • localFileToUri()
-
                                        • metaObject()
-
                                        • name()
-
                                        • normalizeSignalSlot()
-
                                        • objectTrees()
-
                                        • parent()
-
                                        • pixmap()
-
                                        • pixmapHotSpot()
-
                                        • property()
+
                                        • metaObject()
+
                                        • name()
+
                                        • normalizeSignalSlot()
+
                                        • objectTrees()
+
                                        • parent()
+
                                        • pixmap()
+
                                        • pixmapHotSpot()
+
                                        • property()
 
                                        • provides()
-
                                        • queryList()
-
                                        • removeChild()
-
                                        • removeEventFilter()
-
                                        • sender()
+
                                        • queryList()
+
                                        • removeChild()
+
                                        • removeEventFilter()
+
                                        • sender()
 
                                        • serialNumber()
 
                                        • setEncodedData()
 
                                        • setFileNames()
 
                                        • setFilenames()
-
                                        • setName()
-
                                        • setPixmap()
-
                                        • setProperty()
+
                                        • setName()
+
                                        • setPixmap()
+
                                        • setProperty()
 
                                        • setUnicodeUris()
 
                                        • setUris()
-
                                        • signalsBlocked()
-
                                        • source()
-
                                        • startTimer()
-
                                        • target()
-
                                        • timerEvent()
-
                                        • tr()
-
                                        • trUtf8()
+
                                        • signalsBlocked()
+
                                        • source()
+
                                        • startTimer()
+
                                        • target()
+
                                        • timerEvent()
+
                                        • tr()
+
                                        • trUtf8()
 
                                        • unicodeUriToUri()
 
                                        • uriToLocalFile()
 
                                        • uriToUnicodeUri()
diff --git a/doc/html/quridrag.html b/doc/html/quridrag.html
index 35967eae9..6fa3c47d2 100644
--- a/doc/html/quridrag.html
+++ b/doc/html/quridrag.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                          The TQUriDrag class provides a drag object for a list of URI references.
 More...
-
                                          #include <qdragobject.h>
+
                                          #include <ntqdragobject.h>
 
                                          Inherits TQStoredDrag.
 
                                          List of all member functions.
 
                                          Public Members
                                          
@@ -80,15 +80,15 @@ You can also decode URIs from a mimesource into a list with
 
                                          See also Drag And Drop Classes.
 
 
                                          Member Function Documentation
                                          
-
                                          TQUriDrag::TQUriDrag ( TQStrList uris, TQWidget * dragSource = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
                                          TQUriDrag::TQUriDrag ( TQStrList uris, TQWidget * dragSource = 0, const char * name = 0 )
 
                                          
 Constructs an object to drag the list of URIs in uris. The dragSource and name arguments are passed on to TQStoredDrag.
 Note that URIs are always in escaped UTF8 encoding.
 
-
                                          TQUriDrag::TQUriDrag ( TQWidget * dragSource = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
                                          TQUriDrag::TQUriDrag ( TQWidget * dragSource = 0, const char * name = 0 )
 
                                          
 Constructs an object to drag. You must call setUris() before you
-start the drag(). Passes dragSource and name to the
+start the drag(). Passes dragSource and name to the
 TQStoredDrag constructor.
 
 
                                          TQUriDrag::~TQUriDrag ()
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Destroys the object.
 Returns TRUE if decode() would be able to decode e; otherwise
 returns FALSE.
 
-
                                          bool TQUriDrag::decode ( const TQMimeSource * e, TQStrList & l ) [static]
+
                                          bool TQUriDrag::decode ( const TQMimeSource * e, TQStrList & l ) [static]
 
                                          
 Decodes URIs from e, placing the result in l (which is first
 cleared).
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ cleared).
 returns FALSE.
 
 
                                          Example: dirview/dirview.cpp.
-
                                          bool TQUriDrag::decodeLocalFiles ( const TQMimeSource * e, TQStringList & l ) [static]
+
                                          bool TQUriDrag::decodeLocalFiles ( const TQMimeSource * e, TQStringList & l ) [static]
 
                                          
 Decodes URIs from the mime source event e, converts them to
 local files if they refer to local files, and places them in l
@@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ local files if they refer to local files, and places them in l
 returns FALSE. The list will be empty if no URIs were local files.
 
 
                                          Example: fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp.
-
                                          bool TQUriDrag::decodeToUnicodeUris ( const TQMimeSource * e, TQStringList & l ) [static]
+
                                          bool TQUriDrag::decodeToUnicodeUris ( const TQMimeSource * e, TQStringList & l ) [static]
 
                                          
 Decodes URIs from the mime source event e, converts them to
 Unicode URIs (only useful for displaying to humans), placing them
@@ -125,41 +125,41 @@ in l (which is first cleared).
 
                                           Returns TRUE if contained a valid list of URIs; otherwise
 returns FALSE.
 
-
                                          TQCString TQUriDrag::localFileToUri ( const TQString & filename ) [static]
+
                                          TQCString TQUriDrag::localFileToUri ( const TQString & filename ) [static]
 
                                          
 Returns the URI equivalent to the absolute local file filename.
 
                                           
                                          See also uriToLocalFile().
 
-
                                          void TQUriDrag::setFileNames ( const TQStringList & fnames )
+
                                          void TQUriDrag::setFileNames ( const TQStringList & fnames )
 
                                          
 Sets the URIs to be the local-file URIs equivalent to fnames.
 
                                           
                                          See also localFileToUri() and setUris().
 
 
                                          Example: dirview/dirview.cpp.
-
                                          void TQUriDrag::setFilenames ( const TQStringList & fnames )
+
                                          void TQUriDrag::setFilenames ( const TQStringList & fnames )
 
                                          
 
 This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 
                                           Use setFileNames() instead (notice the N).
 
-
                                          void TQUriDrag::setUnicodeUris ( const TQStringList & uuris )
+
                                          void TQUriDrag::setUnicodeUris ( const TQStringList & uuris )
 
                                          
 Sets the URIs in uuris to be the Unicode URIs (only useful for
 displaying to humans).
 
                                           
                                          See also localFileToUri() and setUris().
 
-
                                          void TQUriDrag::setUris ( TQStrList uris ) [virtual]
+
                                          void TQUriDrag::setUris ( TQStrList uris ) [virtual]
 
                                          
 Changes the list of uris to be dragged.
 
                                           Note that URIs are always in escaped UTF8 encoding.
 
-
                                          TQCString TQUriDrag::unicodeUriToUri ( const TQString & uuri ) [static]
+
                                          TQCString TQUriDrag::unicodeUriToUri ( const TQString & uuri ) [static]
 
                                          
 Returns the URI equivalent of the Unicode URI given in uuri
 (only useful for displaying to humans).
 
                                           
                                          See also uriToLocalFile().
 
-
                                          TQString TQUriDrag::uriToLocalFile ( const char * uri ) [static]
+
                                          TQString TQUriDrag::uriToLocalFile ( const char * uri ) [static]
 
                                          
 Returns the name of a local file equivalent to uri or a null
 string if uri is not a local file.
@@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ string if uri is not a local file.
 
                                           
                                          See also localFileToUri().
 
 
                                          Example: dirview/dirview.cpp.
-
                                          TQString TQUriDrag::uriToUnicodeUri ( const char * uri ) [static]
+
                                          TQString TQUriDrag::uriToUnicodeUri ( const char * uri ) [static]
 
                                          
 Returns the Unicode URI (only useful for displaying to humans)
 equivalent of uri.
diff --git a/doc/html/qurl-h.html b/doc/html/qurl-h.html
index ff740ae60..100707f11 100644
--- a/doc/html/qurl-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qurl-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qurl.h Include File
+ntqurl.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                          
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                          TQUrl Class Reference
                                          [network module]
                                          
-
-
                                          The TQUrl class provides a URL parser and simplifies working with URLs.
-More...
-
                                          #include <qurl.h>
-
                                          Inherited by TQUrlOperator.
-
                                          List of all member functions.
-
                                          Public Members
                                          
-
-
                                          Static Public Members
                                          
-
-
                                          Protected Members
                                          
-
                                            
-
                                          • virtual void reset ()
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual bool parse ( const TQString & url )
                                            • 
-
                                          
-
                                          Detailed Description
                                          
-
-
-
                                           The TQUrl class provides a URL parser and simplifies working with URLs.
-
-
                                           
-
-
-
                                           
-
                                           The TQUrl class is provided for simple work with URLs. It can
-parse, decode, encode, etc.
-
                                           TQUrl works with the decoded path and encoded query in turn.
-
                                           Example:
-
                                           http://www.trolltech.com:80/cgi-bin/test%20me.pl?cmd=Hello%20you
-
                                           
                                          
-
                                           Function	    Returns
-
                                           protocol()   "http"
-
                                           host()	    "www.trolltech.com"
-
                                           port()	    80
-
                                           path()	    "/cgi-bin/test me.pl"
-
                                           fileName()   "test me.pl"
-
                                           query()	    "cmd=Hello%20you"
-
                                          
-
                                           Example:
-
                                           http://doc.trolltech.com/qdockarea.html#lines
-
                                           
                                          
-
                                           Function	    Returns
-
                                           protocol()   "http"
-
                                           host()	    "doc.trolltech.com"
-
                                           fileName()   "qdockarea.html"
-
                                           ref()	    "lines"
-
                                          
-
                                           The individual parts of a URL can be set with setProtocol(),
-setHost(), setPort(), setPath(), setFileName(), setRef() and
-setQuery(). A URL could contain, for example, an ftp address which
-requires a user name and password; these can be set with setUser()
-and setPassword().
-
                                           Because path is always encoded internally you must not use "%00"
-in the path, although this is okay (but not recommended) for the
-query.
-
                                           TQUrl is normally used like this:
-
                                           
                                          -    TQUrl url( "http://www.trolltech.com" );
-    // or
-    TQUrl url( "file:/home/myself/Mail", "Inbox" );
-    
                                          
- 
-
                                           You can then access and manipulate the various parts of the URL.
-
                                           To make it easy to work with TQUrls and TQStrings, TQUrl implements
-the necessary cast and assignment operators so you can do
-following:
-
                                           
                                          -    TQUrl url( "http://www.trolltech.com" );
-    TQString s = url;
-    // or
-    TQString s( "http://www.trolltech.com" );
-    TQUrl url( s );
-    
                                          
- 
-
                                           Use the static functions, encode() and decode() to encode or
-decode a URL in a string. (They operate on the string in-place.)
-The isRelativeUrl() static function returns TRUE if the given
-string is a relative URL.
-
                                           If you want to use a URL to work on a hierarchical structure (e.g.
-a local or remote filesystem), you might want to use the subclass
-TQUrlOperator.
-
                                           
                                          See also TQUrlOperator, Input/Output and Networking, and Miscellaneous Classes.
-
-
                                          Member Function Documentation
                                          
-
                                          TQUrl::TQUrl ()
-
                                          
-Constructs an empty URL that is invalid.
-
-
                                          TQUrl::TQUrl ( const TQString & url )
-
                                          
-Constructs a URL by parsing the string url.
-
                                           If you pass a string like "/home/qt", the "file" protocol is
-assumed.
-
-
                                          TQUrl::TQUrl ( const TQUrl & url )
-
                                          
-Copy constructor. Copies the data of url.
-
-
                                          TQUrl::TQUrl ( const TQUrl & url, const TQString & relUrl, bool checkSlash = FALSE )
-
                                          
-Constructs an URL taking url as the base (context) and
-relUrl as a relative URL to url. If relUrl is not relative,
-relUrl is taken as the new URL.
-
                                           For example, the path of
-
                                          -    TQUrl url( "ftp://ftp.trolltech.com/qt/source", "qt-2.1.0.tar.gz" );
-    
                                          
- 
-will be "/qt/srource/qt-2.1.0.tar.gz".
-
                                           On the other hand,
-
                                          -    TQUrl url( "ftp://ftp.trolltech.com/qt/source", "/usr/local" );
-    
                                          
- 
-will result in a new URL, "ftp://ftp.trolltech.com/usr/local",
-because "/usr/local" isn't relative.
-
                                           Similarly,
-
                                          -    TQUrl url( "ftp://ftp.trolltech.com/qt/source", "file:/usr/local" );
-    
                                          
- 
-will result in a new URL, with "/usr/local" as the path
-and "file" as the protocol.
-
                                           Normally it is expected that the path of url points to a
-directory, even if the path has no slash at the end. But if you
-want the constructor to handle the last part of the path as a file
-name if there is no slash at the end, and to let it be replaced by
-the file name of relUrl (if it contains one), set checkSlash
-to TRUE.
-
-
                                          TQUrl::~TQUrl () [virtual]
-
                                          
-Destructor.
-
-
                                          void TQUrl::addPath ( const TQString & pa ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-Adds the path pa to the path of the URL.
-
                                           
                                          See also setPath() and hasPath().
-
-
                                          bool TQUrl::cdUp () [virtual]
-
                                          
-Changes the directory to one directory up.
-
                                           
                                          See also setPath().
-
-
                                          void TQUrl::decode ( TQString & url ) [static]
-
                                          
-Decodes the url in-place into UTF-8.  For example
-
                                           
                                          -        TQString url = "http%3A//www%20trolltech%20com"
-        TQUrl::decode( url );
-        // url is now "http://www.trolltech.com"
-    
                                          
- 
-
                                           
                                          See also encode().
-
-
                                          TQString TQUrl::dirPath () const
-
                                          
-Returns the directory path of the URL. This is the part of the
-path of the URL without the fileName(). See the documentation of
-fileName() for a discussion of what is handled as file name and
-what is handled as directory path.
-
                                           
                                          See also setPath() and hasPath().
-
-
                                          Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                          void TQUrl::encode ( TQString & url ) [static]
-
                                          
-Encodes the url in-place into UTF-8.  For example
-
                                           
                                          -        TQString url = http://www.trolltech.com
-        TQUrl::encode( url );
-        // url is now "http%3A//www%20trolltech%20com"
-    
                                          
- 
-
                                           
                                          See also decode().
-
-
                                          Example: network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h.
-
                                          TQString TQUrl::encodedPathAndQuery ()
-
                                          
-Returns the encoded path and query.
-
                                           
                                          See also decode().
-
-
                                          TQString TQUrl::fileName () const
-
                                          
-Returns the file name of the URL. If the path of the URL doesn't
-have a slash at the end, the part between the last slash and the
-end of the path string is considered to be the file name. If the
-path has a slash at the end, an empty string is returned here.
-
                                           
                                          See also setFileName().
-
-
                                          Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                          bool TQUrl::hasHost () const
-
                                          
-Returns TRUE if the URL contains a hostname; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                           
                                          See also setHost().
-
-
                                          bool TQUrl::hasPassword () const
-
                                          
-Returns TRUE if the URL contains a password; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                           Warning: Passwords passed in URLs are normally insecure; this
-is due to the mechanism, not because of TQt.
-
                                           
                                          See also setPassword() and setUser().
-
-
                                          bool TQUrl::hasPath () const
-
                                          
-Returns TRUE if the URL contains a path; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                           
                                          See also path() and setPath().
-
-
                                          bool TQUrl::hasPort () const
-
                                          
-Returns TRUE if the URL contains a port; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                           
                                          See also setPort().
-
-
                                          bool TQUrl::hasRef () const
-
                                          
-Returns TRUE if the URL has a reference; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                           
                                          See also setRef().
-
-
                                          bool TQUrl::hasUser () const
-
                                          
-Returns TRUE if the URL contains a username; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                           
                                          See also setUser() and setPassword().
-
-
                                          TQString TQUrl::host () const
-
                                          
-Returns the hostname of the URL.
-
                                           
                                          See also setHost() and hasHost().
-
-
                                          Example: network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h.
-
                                          bool TQUrl::isLocalFile () const
-
                                          
-Returns TRUE if the URL is a local file; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                          Example: qdir/qdir.cpp.
-
                                          bool TQUrl::isRelativeUrl ( const TQString & url ) [static]
-
                                          
-Returns TRUE if url is relative; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                          bool TQUrl::isValid () const
-
                                          
-Returns TRUE if the URL is valid; otherwise returns FALSE. A URL
-is invalid if it cannot be parsed, for example.
-
-
                                          TQUrl::operator TQString () const
-
                                          
-Composes a string version of the URL and returns it.
-
                                           
                                          See also TQUrl::toString().
-
-
                                          TQUrl & TQUrl::operator= ( const TQUrl & url )
-
                                          
-Assigns the data of url to this class.
-
-
                                          TQUrl & TQUrl::operator= ( const TQString & url )
-
                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           Parses url and assigns the resulting data to this class.
-
                                           If you pass a string like "/home/qt" the "file" protocol will be
-assumed.
-
-
                                          bool TQUrl::operator== ( const TQUrl & url ) const
-
                                          
-Compares this URL with url and returns TRUE if they are equal;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                          bool TQUrl::operator== ( const TQString & url ) const
-
                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           Compares this URL with url. url is parsed first. Returns
-TRUE if url is equal to this url; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                          bool TQUrl::parse ( const TQString & url ) [virtual protected]
-
                                          
-Parses the url.
-
-
                                          TQString TQUrl::password () const
-
                                          
-Returns the password of the URL.
-
                                           Warning: Passwords passed in URLs are normally insecure; this
-is due to the mechanism, not because of TQt.
-
                                           
                                          See also setPassword() and setUser().
-
-
                                          TQString TQUrl::path ( bool correct = TRUE ) const
-
                                          
-Returns the path of the URL. If correct is TRUE, the path is
-cleaned (deals with too many or too few slashes, cleans things
-like "/../..", etc). Otherwise path() returns exactly the path
-that was parsed or set.
-
                                           
                                          See also setPath() and hasPath().
-
-
                                          Example: qdir/qdir.cpp.
-
                                          int TQUrl::port () const
-
                                          
-Returns the port of the URL or -1 if no port has been set.
-
                                           
                                          See also setPort().
-
-
                                          TQString TQUrl::protocol () const
-
                                          
-Returns the protocol of the URL. Typically, "file", "http", "ftp",
-etc.
-
                                           
                                          See also setProtocol().
-
-
                                          TQString TQUrl::query () const
-
                                          
-Returns the (encoded) query of the URL.
-
                                           
                                          See also setQuery() and decode().
-
-
                                          TQString TQUrl::ref () const
-
                                          
-Returns the (encoded) reference of the URL.
-
                                           
                                          See also setRef(), hasRef(), and decode().
-
-
                                          void TQUrl::reset () [virtual protected]
-
                                          
-Resets all parts of the URL to their default values and
-invalidates it.
-
-
                                          void TQUrl::setEncodedPathAndQuery ( const TQString & pathAndQuery ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-Parses pathAndQuery for a path and query and sets those values.
-The whole string must be encoded.
-
                                           
                                          See also encode().
-
-
                                          void TQUrl::setFileName ( const TQString & name ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-Sets the file name of the URL to name. If this URL contains a
-fileName(), the original file name is replaced by name.
-
                                           See the documentation of fileName() for a more detailed discussion
-of what is handled as file name and what is handled as a directory
-path.
-
                                           
                                          See also fileName().
-
-
                                          void TQUrl::setHost ( const TQString & host ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-Sets the hostname of the URL to host.
-
                                           
                                          See also host() and hasHost().
-
-
                                          void TQUrl::setPassword ( const TQString & pass ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-Sets the password of the URL to pass.
-
                                           Warning: Passwords passed in URLs are normally insecure; this
-is due to the mechanism, not because of TQt.
-
                                           
                                          See also password() and setUser().
-
-
                                          void TQUrl::setPath ( const TQString & path ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-Sets the path of the URL to path.
-
                                           
                                          See also path() and hasPath().
-
-
                                          void TQUrl::setPort ( int port ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-Sets the port of the URL to port.
-
                                           
                                          See also port().
-
-
                                          void TQUrl::setProtocol ( const TQString & protocol ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-Sets the protocol of the URL to protocol. Typically, "file",
-"http", "ftp", etc.
-
                                           
                                          See also protocol().
-
-
                                          void TQUrl::setQuery ( const TQString & txt ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-Sets the query of the URL to txt. txt must be encoded.
-
                                           
                                          See also query() and encode().
-
-
                                          void TQUrl::setRef ( const TQString & txt ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-Sets the reference of the URL to txt. txt must be encoded.
-
                                           
                                          See also ref(), hasRef(), and encode().
-
-
                                          void TQUrl::setUser ( const TQString & user ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-Sets the username of the URL to user.
-
                                           
                                          See also user() and setPassword().
-
-
                                          TQString TQUrl::toString ( bool encodedPath = FALSE, bool forcePrependProtocol = TRUE ) const [virtual]
-
                                          
-Composes a string version of the URL and returns it. If encodedPath is TRUE the path in the returned string is encoded. If
-forcePrependProtocol is TRUE and encodedPath looks like a
-local filename, the "file:/" protocol is also prepended.
-
                                           
                                          See also encode() and decode().
-
-
                                          TQString TQUrl::user () const
-
                                          
-Returns the username of the URL.
-
                                           
                                          See also setUser() and setPassword().
-
-
-
                                          
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                          
-
-
                                          Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                          TQt 3.3.8
                                          
-
                                          
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qurlinfo-h.html b/doc/html/qurlinfo-h.html
index 69422b433..c7d7032ca 100644
--- a/doc/html/qurlinfo-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qurlinfo-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qurlinfo.h Include File
+ntqurlinfo.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                          
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                          TQUrlInfo Class Reference
                                          
-
-
                                          The TQUrlInfo class stores information about URLs.
-More...
-
                                          #include <qurlinfo.h>
-
                                          List of all member functions.
-
                                          Public Members
                                          
-
                                            
-
                                          • enum PermissionSpec { ReadOwner = 00400, WriteOwner = 00200, ExeOwner = 00100, ReadGroup = 00040, WriteGroup = 00020, ExeGroup = 00010, ReadOther = 00004, WriteOther = 00002, ExeOther = 00001 }
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQUrlInfo ()
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQUrlInfo ( const TQUrlOperator & path, const TQString & file )
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQUrlInfo ( const TQUrlInfo & ui )
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQUrlInfo ( const TQString & name, int permissions, const TQString & owner, const TQString & group, uint size, const TQDateTime & lastModified, const TQDateTime & lastRead, bool isDir, bool isFile, bool isSymLink, bool isWritable, bool isReadable, bool isExecutable )
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQUrlInfo ( const TQUrl & url, int permissions, const TQString & owner, const TQString & group, uint size, const TQDateTime & lastModified, const TQDateTime & lastRead, bool isDir, bool isFile, bool isSymLink, bool isWritable, bool isReadable, bool isExecutable )
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQUrlInfo & operator= ( const TQUrlInfo & ui )
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual ~TQUrlInfo ()
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void setName ( const TQString & name )
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void setDir ( bool b )
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void setFile ( bool b )
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void setSymLink ( bool b )
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void setOwner ( const TQString & s )
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void setGroup ( const TQString & s )
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void setSize ( uint size )
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void setWritable ( bool b )
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void setReadable ( bool b )
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void setPermissions ( int p )
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void setLastModified ( const TQDateTime & dt )
                                            • 
-
                                          • bool isValid () const
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQString name () const
                                            • 
-
                                          • int permissions () const
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQString owner () const
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQString group () const
                                            • 
-
                                          • uint size () const
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQDateTime lastModified () const
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQDateTime lastRead () const
                                            • 
-
                                          • bool isDir () const
                                            • 
-
                                          • bool isFile () const
                                            • 
-
                                          • bool isSymLink () const
                                            • 
-
                                          • bool isWritable () const
                                            • 
-
                                          • bool isReadable () const
                                            • 
-
                                          • bool isExecutable () const
                                            • 
-
                                          • bool operator== ( const TQUrlInfo & i ) const
                                            • 
-
                                          
-
                                          Static Public Members
                                          
-
                                            
-
                                          • bool greaterThan ( const TQUrlInfo & i1, const TQUrlInfo & i2, int sortBy )
                                            • 
-
                                          • bool lessThan ( const TQUrlInfo & i1, const TQUrlInfo & i2, int sortBy )
                                            • 
-
                                          • bool equal ( const TQUrlInfo & i1, const TQUrlInfo & i2, int sortBy )
                                            • 
-
                                          
-
                                          Detailed Description
                                          
-
-
-The TQUrlInfo class stores information about URLs.
-
                                           
-
-
                                           This class is just a container for storing information about URLs,
-which is why all information must be passed in the constructor.
-
                                           Unless you're reimplementing a network protocol you're unlikely to
-create TQUrlInfo objects yourself, but you may receive TQUrlInfo
-objects from functions, e.g. TQUrlOperator::info().
-
                                           The information that can be retrieved includes name(),
-permissions(), owner(), group(), size(), lastModified(),
-lastRead(), isDir(), isFile(), isSymLink(), isWritable(),
-isReadable() and isExecutable().
-
                                          See also Input/Output and Networking and Miscellaneous Classes.
-
-
                                          Member Type Documentation
                                          
-
                                          TQUrlInfo::PermissionSpec
                                          
-
-
                                           This enum is used by the permissions() function to report the
-permissions of a file.
-
                                            
-
                                          • TQUrlInfo::ReadOwner - The file is readable by the owner of the file.
-
                                          • TQUrlInfo::WriteOwner - The file is writable by the owner of the file.
-
                                          • TQUrlInfo::ExeOwner - The file is executable by the owner of the file.
-
                                          • TQUrlInfo::ReadGroup - The file is readable by the group.
-
                                          • TQUrlInfo::WriteGroup - The file is writable by the group.
-
                                          • TQUrlInfo::ExeGroup - The file is executable by the group.
-
                                          • TQUrlInfo::ReadOther - The file is readable by anyone.
-
                                          • TQUrlInfo::WriteOther - The file is writable by anyone.
-
                                          • TQUrlInfo::ExeOther - The file is executable by anyone.
-
                                          
-
                                          Member Function Documentation
                                          
-
                                          TQUrlInfo::TQUrlInfo ()
-
                                          
-Constructs an invalid TQUrlInfo object with default values.
-
                                           
                                          See also isValid().
-
-
                                          TQUrlInfo::TQUrlInfo ( const TQUrlOperator & path, const TQString & file )
-
                                          
-Constructs a TQUrlInfo object with information about the file file in the path. It tries to find the information about the file in the TQUrlOperator path.
-
                                           If the information is not found, this constructor creates an
-invalid TQUrlInfo, i.e. isValid() returns FALSE. You should always
-check if the URL info is valid before relying on the return values
-of any getter functions.
-
                                           If file is empty, it defaults to the TQUrlOperator path, i.e.
-to the directory.
-
                                           
                                          See also isValid() and TQUrlOperator::info().
-
-
                                          TQUrlInfo::TQUrlInfo ( const TQUrlInfo & ui )
-
                                          
-Copy constructor, copies ui to this URL info object.
-
-
                                          TQUrlInfo::TQUrlInfo ( const TQString & name, int permissions, const TQString & owner, const TQString & group, uint size, const TQDateTime & lastModified, const TQDateTime & lastRead, bool isDir, bool isFile, bool isSymLink, bool isWritable, bool isReadable, bool isExecutable )
-
                                          
-Constructs a TQUrlInfo object by specifying all the URL's
-information.
-
                                           The information that is passed is the name, file permissions, owner and group and the file's size. Also
-passed is the lastModified date/time and the lastRead
-date/time. Flags are also passed, specifically, isDir, isFile, isSymLink, isWritable, isReadable and isExecutable.
-
-
                                          TQUrlInfo::TQUrlInfo ( const TQUrl & url, int permissions, const TQString & owner, const TQString & group, uint size, const TQDateTime & lastModified, const TQDateTime & lastRead, bool isDir, bool isFile, bool isSymLink, bool isWritable, bool isReadable, bool isExecutable )
-
                                          
-Constructs a TQUrlInfo object by specifying all the URL's
-information.
-
                                           The information that is passed is the url, file permissions, owner and group and the file's size. Also
-passed is the lastModified date/time and the lastRead
-date/time. Flags are also passed, specifically, isDir, isFile, isSymLink, isWritable, isReadable and isExecutable.
-
-
                                          TQUrlInfo::~TQUrlInfo () [virtual]
-
                                          
-Destroys the URL info object.
-
                                           The TQUrlOperator object to which this URL referred (if any) is not
-affected.
-
-
                                          bool TQUrlInfo::equal ( const TQUrlInfo & i1, const TQUrlInfo & i2, int sortBy ) [static]
-
                                          
-Returns TRUE if i1 equals to i2; otherwise returns FALSE.
-The objects are compared by the value, which is specified by sortBy. This must be one of TQDir::Name, TQDir::Time or TQDir::Size.
-
-
                                          bool TQUrlInfo::greaterThan ( const TQUrlInfo & i1, const TQUrlInfo & i2, int sortBy ) [static]
-
                                          
-Returns TRUE if i1 is greater than i2; otherwise returns
-FALSE. The objects are compared by the value, which is specified
-by sortBy. This must be one of TQDir::Name, TQDir::Time or
-TQDir::Size.
-
-
                                          TQString TQUrlInfo::group () const
-
                                          
-Returns the group of the URL.
-
                                           
                                          See also isValid().
-
-
                                          bool TQUrlInfo::isDir () const
-
                                          
-Returns TRUE if the URL is a directory; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                           
                                          See also isValid().
-
-
                                          Examples: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h and network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                          bool TQUrlInfo::isExecutable () const
-
                                          
-Returns TRUE if the URL is executable; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                           
                                          See also isValid().
-
-
                                          bool TQUrlInfo::isFile () const
-
                                          
-Returns TRUE if the URL is a file; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                           
                                          See also isValid().
-
-
                                          bool TQUrlInfo::isReadable () const
-
                                          
-Returns TRUE if the URL is readable; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                           
                                          See also isValid().
-
-
                                          bool TQUrlInfo::isSymLink () const
-
                                          
-Returns TRUE if the URL is a symbolic link; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                           
                                          See also isValid().
-
-
                                          bool TQUrlInfo::isValid () const
-
                                          
-Returns TRUE if the URL info is valid; otherwise returns FALSE.
-Valid means that the TQUrlInfo contains real information. For
-example, a call to TQUrlOperator::info() might return a an invalid
-TQUrlInfo, if no information about the requested entry is
-available.
-
                                           You should always check if the URL info is valid before relying on
-the values.
-
-
                                          bool TQUrlInfo::isWritable () const
-
                                          
-Returns TRUE if the URL is writable; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                           
                                          See also isValid().
-
-
                                          TQDateTime TQUrlInfo::lastModified () const
-
                                          
-Returns the last modification date of the URL.
-
                                           
                                          See also isValid().
-
-
                                          Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
-
                                          TQDateTime TQUrlInfo::lastRead () const
-
                                          
-Returns the date when the URL was last read.
-
                                           
                                          See also isValid().
-
-
                                          bool TQUrlInfo::lessThan ( const TQUrlInfo & i1, const TQUrlInfo & i2, int sortBy ) [static]
-
                                          
-Returns TRUE if i1 is less than i2; otherwise returns FALSE.
-The objects are compared by the value, which is specified by sortBy. This must be one of TQDir::Name, TQDir::Time or TQDir::Size.
-
-
                                          TQString TQUrlInfo::name () const
-
                                          
-Returns the file name of the URL.
-
                                           
                                          See also isValid().
-
-
                                          Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
-
                                          TQUrlInfo & TQUrlInfo::operator= ( const TQUrlInfo & ui )
-
                                          
-Assigns the values of ui to this TQUrlInfo object.
-
-
                                          bool TQUrlInfo::operator== ( const TQUrlInfo & i ) const
-
                                          
-Compares this TQUrlInfo with i and returns TRUE if they are
-equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                          TQString TQUrlInfo::owner () const
-
                                          
-Returns the owner of the URL.
-
                                           
                                          See also isValid().
-
-
                                          int TQUrlInfo::permissions () const
-
                                          
-Returns the permissions of the URL. You can use the PermissionSpec flags
-to test for certain permissions.
-
                                           
                                          See also isValid().
-
-
                                          void TQUrlInfo::setDir ( bool b ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-If b is TRUE then the URL is set to be a directory; if \b is
-FALSE then the URL is set not to be a directory (which normally
-means it is a file). (Note that a URL can refer to both a file and
-a directory even though most file systems do not support this.)
-
                                           If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function
-turns it into a valid one.
-
                                           
                                          See also isValid().
-
-
                                          Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                          void TQUrlInfo::setFile ( bool b ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-If b is TRUE then the URL is set to be a file; if \b is FALSE
-then the URL is set not to be a file (which normally means it is a
-directory). (Note that a URL can refer to both a file and a
-directory even though most file systems do not support this.)
-
                                           If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function
-turns it into a valid one.
-
                                           
                                          See also isValid().
-
-
                                          Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                          void TQUrlInfo::setGroup ( const TQString & s ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-Specifies that the owning group of the URL is called s.
-
                                           If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function
-turns it into a valid one.
-
                                           
                                          See also isValid().
-
-
                                          void TQUrlInfo::setLastModified ( const TQDateTime & dt ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-Specifies that the object the URL refers to was last modified at
-dt.
-
                                           If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function
-turns it into a valid one.
-
                                           
                                          See also isValid().
-
-
                                          void TQUrlInfo::setName ( const TQString & name ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-Sets the name of the URL to name. The name is the full text,
-for example, "http://doc.trolltech.com/qurlinfo.html".
-
                                           If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function
-turns it into a valid one.
-
                                           
                                          See also isValid().
-
-
                                          Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                          void TQUrlInfo::setOwner ( const TQString & s ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-Specifies that the owner of the URL is called s.
-
                                           If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function
-turns it into a valid one.
-
                                           
                                          See also isValid().
-
-
                                          void TQUrlInfo::setPermissions ( int p ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-Specifies that the URL has access permisions, p.
-
                                           If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function
-turns it into a valid one.
-
                                           
                                          See also isValid().
-
-
                                          void TQUrlInfo::setReadable ( bool b ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-Specifies that the URL is readable if b is TRUE and not
-readable if b is FALSE.
-
                                           If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function
-turns it into a valid one.
-
                                           
                                          See also isValid().
-
-
                                          Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                          void TQUrlInfo::setSize ( uint size ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-Specifies the size of the URL.
-
                                           If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function
-turns it into a valid one.
-
                                           
                                          See also isValid().
-
-
                                          void TQUrlInfo::setSymLink ( bool b ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-Specifies that the URL refers to a symbolic link if b is TRUE
-and that it does not if b is FALSE.
-
                                           If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function
-turns it into a valid one.
-
                                           
                                          See also isValid().
-
-
                                          Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                          void TQUrlInfo::setWritable ( bool b ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-Specifies that the URL is writable if b is TRUE and not
-writable if b is FALSE.
-
                                           If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function
-turns it into a valid one.
-
                                           
                                          See also isValid().
-
-
                                          Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-
                                          uint TQUrlInfo::size () const
-
                                          
-Returns the size of the URL.
-
                                           
                                          See also isValid().
-
-
                                          Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
-
-
                                          
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                          
-
-
                                          Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                          TQt 3.3.8
                                          
-
                                          
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qurloperator-h.html b/doc/html/qurloperator-h.html
index 533689f63..3a314be24 100644
--- a/doc/html/qurloperator-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qurloperator-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qurloperator.h Include File
+ntqurloperator.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                          
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                          TQUrlOperator Class Reference
                                          [network module]
                                          
-
-
                                          The TQUrlOperator class provides common operations on URLs.
-More...
-
                                          #include <qurloperator.h>
-
                                          Inherits TQObject and TQUrl.
-
                                          List of all member functions.
-
                                          Public Members
                                          
-
                                            
-
                                          • TQUrlOperator ()
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQUrlOperator ( const TQString & url )
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQUrlOperator ( const TQUrlOperator & url )
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQUrlOperator ( const TQUrlOperator & url, const TQString & relUrl, bool checkSlash = FALSE )
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual ~TQUrlOperator ()
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual const TQNetworkOperation * listChildren ()
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual const TQNetworkOperation * mkdir ( const TQString & dirname )
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual const TQNetworkOperation * remove ( const TQString & filename )
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual const TQNetworkOperation * rename ( const TQString & oldname, const TQString & newname )
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual const TQNetworkOperation * get ( const TQString & location = TQString::null )
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual const TQNetworkOperation * put ( const TQByteArray & data, const TQString & location = TQString::null )
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual TQPtrList<TQNetworkOperation> copy ( const TQString & from, const TQString & to, bool move = FALSE, bool toPath = TRUE )
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void copy ( const TQStringList & files, const TQString & dest, bool move = FALSE )
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual bool isDir ( bool * ok = 0 )
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void setNameFilter ( const TQString & nameFilter )
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQString nameFilter () const
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual TQUrlInfo info ( const TQString & entry ) const
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void stop ()
                                            • 
-
                                          
-
                                          Signals
                                          
-
                                            
-
                                          • void newChildren ( const TQValueList<TQUrlInfo> & i, TQNetworkOperation * op )
                                            • 
-
                                          • void finished ( TQNetworkOperation * op )
                                            • 
-
                                          • void start ( TQNetworkOperation * op )
                                            • 
-
                                          • void createdDirectory ( const TQUrlInfo & i, TQNetworkOperation * op )
                                            • 
-
                                          • void removed ( TQNetworkOperation * op )
                                            • 
-
                                          • void itemChanged ( TQNetworkOperation * op )
                                            • 
-
                                          • void data ( const TQByteArray & data, TQNetworkOperation * op )
                                            • 
-
                                          • void dataTransferProgress ( int bytesDone, int bytesTotal, TQNetworkOperation * op )
                                            • 
-
                                          • void startedNextCopy ( const TQPtrList<TQNetworkOperation> & lst )
                                            • 
-
                                          • void connectionStateChanged ( int state, const TQString & data )
                                            • 
-
                                          
-
                                          Protected Members
                                          
-
-
                                          Related Functions
                                          
-
-
                                          Detailed Description
                                          
-
-
-
                                           The TQUrlOperator class provides common operations on URLs.
-
-
                                           
-
-
-
                                           
-
                                           This class operates on hierarchical structures (such as
-filesystems) using URLs. Its API facilitates all the common
-operations:
-
                                          
-
                                           Operation	Function
-
                                           List files		listChildren()
-
                                           Make a directory	mkdir()
-
                                           Remove a file	remove()
-
                                           Rename a file	rename()
-
                                           Get a file		get()
-
                                           Put a file		put()
-
                                           Copy a file		copy()
-
                                          
-
                                           You can obtain additional information about the URL with isDir()
-and info(). If a directory is to be traversed using
-listChildren(), a name filter can be set with setNameFilter().
-
                                           A TQUrlOperator can be used like this, for example to download a
-file (and assuming that the FTP protocol is registered):
-
                                          -    TQUrlOperator *op = new TQUrlOperator();
-    op->copy( TQString("ftp://ftp.trolltech.com/qt/source/qt-2.1.0.tar.gz"),
-             "file:/tmp" );
-    
                                          
- 
-
                                           If you want to be notified about success/failure, progress, etc.,
-you can connect to TQUrlOperator's signals, e.g. to start(),
-newChildren(), createdDirectory(), removed(), data(),
-dataTransferProgress(), startedNextCopy(),
-connectionStateChanged(), finished(), etc. A network operation can
-be stopped with stop().
-
                                           The class uses the functionality of registered network protocols
-to perform these operations. Depending of the protocol of the URL,
-it uses an appropriate network protocol class for the operations.
-Each of the operation functions of TQUrlOperator creates a
-TQNetworkOperation object that describes the operation and puts it
-into the operation queue for the network protocol used. If no
-suitable protocol could be found (because no implementation of the
-necessary network protocol is registered), the URL operator emits
-errors. Not every protocol supports every operation, but error
-handling deals with this problem.
-
                                           To register the available network protocols, use the
-qInitNetworkProtocols() function. The protocols currently
-supported are:
-
                                          
-
                                           For more information about the TQt Network Architecture see the
-TQt Network Documentation.
-
                                           
                                          See also TQNetworkProtocol, TQNetworkOperation, Input/Output and Networking, and Miscellaneous Classes.
-
-
                                          Member Function Documentation
                                          
-
                                          TQUrlOperator::TQUrlOperator ()
-
                                          
-Constructs a TQUrlOperator with an empty (i.e. invalid) URL.
-
-
                                          TQUrlOperator::TQUrlOperator ( const TQString & url )
-
                                          
-Constructs a TQUrlOperator using url and parses this string.
-
                                           If you pass strings like "/home/qt" the "file" protocol is
-assumed.
-
-
                                          TQUrlOperator::TQUrlOperator ( const TQUrlOperator & url )
-
                                          
-Constructs a copy of url.
-
-
                                          TQUrlOperator::TQUrlOperator ( const TQUrlOperator & url, const TQString & relUrl, bool checkSlash = FALSE )
-
                                          
-Constructs a TQUrlOperator. The URL on which this TQUrlOperator
-operates is constructed out of the arguments url, relUrl and
-checkSlash: see the corresponding TQUrl constructor for an
-explanation of these arguments.
-
-
                                          TQUrlOperator::~TQUrlOperator () [virtual]
-
                                          
-Destructor.
-
-
                                          void TQUrlOperator::clearEntries () [virtual protected]
-
                                          
-Clears the cache of children.
-
-
                                          void TQUrlOperator::connectionStateChanged ( int state, const TQString & data ) [signal]
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This signal is emitted whenever the URL operator's connection
-state changes. state describes the new state, which is a
-TQNetworkProtocol::ConnectionState value.
-
                                           data is a string that describes the change of the connection.
-This can be used to display a message to the user.
-
-
                                          TQPtrList<TQNetworkOperation> TQUrlOperator::copy ( const TQString & from, const TQString & to, bool move = FALSE, bool toPath = TRUE ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-Copies the file from to to. If move is TRUE, the file is
-moved (copied and removed). from must point to a file and to
-must point to a directory (into which from is copied) unless toPath is set to FALSE. If toPath is set to FALSE then the to variable is assumed to be the absolute file path (destination
-file path + file name). The copying is done using the get() and
-put() operations. If you want to be notified about the progress of
-the operation, connect to the dataTransferProgress() signal. Bear
-in mind that the get() and put() operations emit this signal
-through the TQUrlOperator. The number of transferred bytes and the
-total bytes that you receive as arguments in this signal do not
-relate to the the whole copy operation; they relate first to the
-get() and then to the put() operation. Always check what type of
-operation the signal comes from; this is given in the signal's
-last argument.
-
                                           At the end, finished() (with success or failure) is emitted, so
-check the state of the network operation object to see whether or
-not the operation was successful.
-
                                           Because a move or copy operation consists of multiple operations
-(get(), put() and maybe remove()), this function doesn't return a
-single TQNetworkOperation, but rather a list of them. They are in
-the order: get(), put() and (if applicable) remove().
-
                                           
                                          See also get() and put().
-
-
                                          void TQUrlOperator::copy ( const TQStringList & files, const TQString & dest, bool move = FALSE ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           Copies the files to the directory dest. If move is TRUE
-the files are moved, not copied. dest must point to a
-directory.
-
                                           This function calls copy() for each entry in files in turn. You
-don't get a result from this function; each time a new copy
-begins, startedNextCopy() is emitted, with a list of
-TQNetworkOperations that describe the new copy operation.
-
-
                                          void TQUrlOperator::createdDirectory ( const TQUrlInfo & i, TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This signal is emitted when mkdir() succeeds and the directory has
-been created. i holds the information about the new directory.
-
                                           op is a pointer to the operation object, which contains all the
-information about the operation, including the state.
-op->arg(0) holds the new directory's name.
-
                                           
                                          See also TQNetworkOperation and TQNetworkProtocol.
-
-
                                          void TQUrlOperator::data ( const TQByteArray & data, TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This signal is emitted when new data has been received after calling
-get() or put().
-op is a pointer to the operation object which contains all
-the information about the operation, including the state.
-op->arg(0) holds the name of the file whose data is retrieved
-and op->rawArg(1) holds the (raw) data.
-
                                           
                                          See also TQNetworkOperation and TQNetworkProtocol.
-
-
                                          void TQUrlOperator::dataTransferProgress ( int bytesDone, int bytesTotal, TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This signal is emitted during data transfer (using put() or
-get()). bytesDone specifies how many bytes of bytesTotal have
-been transferred. More information about the operation is stored in
-op, a pointer to the network operation that is processed.
-bytesTotal may be -1, which means that the total number of bytes
-is not known.
-
                                           
                                          See also TQNetworkOperation and TQNetworkProtocol.
-
-
                                          void TQUrlOperator::deleteNetworkProtocol () [protected]
-
                                          
-Deletes the currently used network protocol.
-
-
                                          void TQUrlOperator::finished ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This signal is emitted when an operation of some sort finishes,
-whether with success or failure. op is a pointer to the
-operation object, which contains all the information, including
-the state, of the operation which has been finished. Check the
-state and error code of the operation object to see whether or not
-the operation was successful.
-
                                           
                                          See also TQNetworkOperation and TQNetworkProtocol.
-
-
                                          const TQNetworkOperation * TQUrlOperator::get ( const TQString & location = TQString::null ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-Tells the network protocol to get data from location or, if
-this is TQString::null, to get data from the location to which this
-URL points (see TQUrl::fileName() and TQUrl::encodedPathAndQuery()).
-What happens then depends on the network protocol. The data()
-signal is emitted when data comes in. Because it's unlikely that
-all data will come in at once, it is common for multiple data()
-signals to be emitted. The dataTransferProgress() signal is
-emitted while processing the operation. At the end, finished()
-(with success or failure) is emitted, so check the state of the
-network operation object to see whether or not the operation was
-successful.
-
                                           If location is TQString::null, the path of this TQUrlOperator
-should point to a file when you use this operation. If location
-is not empty, it can be a relative URL (a child of the path to
-which the TQUrlOperator points) or an absolute URL.
-
                                           For example, to get a web page you might do something like this:
-
                                           
                                          -    TQUrlOperator op( "http://www.whatever.org/cgi-bin/search.pl?cmd=Hello" );
-    op.get();
-    
                                          
- 
-
                                           For most other operations, the path of the TQUrlOperator must point
-to a directory. If you want to download a file you could do the
-following:
-
                                           
                                          -    TQUrlOperator op( "ftp://ftp.whatever.org/pub" );
-    // do some other stuff like op.listChildren() or op.mkdir( "new_dir" )
-    op.get( "a_file.txt" );
-    
                                          
- 
-
                                           This will get the data of ftp://ftp.whatever.org/pub/a_file.txt.
-
                                           Never do anything like this:
-
                                          -    TQUrlOperator op( "http://www.whatever.org/cgi-bin" );
-    op.get( "search.pl?cmd=Hello" ); // WRONG!
-    
                                          
- 
-
                                           If location is not empty and relative it must not contain any
-queries or references, just the name of a child. So if you need to
-specify a query or reference, do it as shown in the first example
-or specify the full URL (such as
-http://www.whatever.org/cgi-bin/search.pl?cmd=Hello) as location.
-
                                           
                                          See also copy().
-
-
                                          void TQUrlOperator::getNetworkProtocol () [protected]
-
                                          
-Finds a network protocol for the URL and deletes the old network protocol.
-
-
                                          TQUrlInfo TQUrlOperator::info ( const TQString & entry ) const [virtual]
-
                                          
-Returns the URL information for the child entry, or returns an
-empty TQUrlInfo object if there is no information available about
-entry. Information about entry is only available after a successfully
-finished listChildren() operation.
-
-
                                          bool TQUrlOperator::isDir ( bool * ok = 0 ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-Returns TRUE if the URL is a directory; otherwise returns FALSE.
-This may not always work correctly, if the protocol of the URL is
-something other than file (local filesystem). If you pass a bool
-pointer as the ok argument, *ok is set to TRUE if the result
-of this function is known to be correct, and to FALSE otherwise.
-
-
                                          void TQUrlOperator::itemChanged ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This signal is emitted whenever a file which is a child of the URL
-has been changed, for example by successfully calling rename().
-op is a pointer to the operation object which contains all the
-information about the operation, including the state.
-op->arg(0) holds the original file name and op->arg(1) holds
-the new file name (if it was changed).
-
                                           
                                          See also TQNetworkOperation and TQNetworkProtocol.
-
-
                                          const TQNetworkOperation * TQUrlOperator::listChildren () [virtual]
-
                                          
-Starts listing the children of this URL (e.g. the files in the
-directory). The start() signal is emitted before the first entry
-is listed and finished() is emitted after the last one. The
-newChildren() signal is emitted for each list of new entries. If
-an error occurs, the signal finished() is emitted, so be sure to
-check the state of the network operation pointer.
-
                                           Because the operation may not be executed immediately, a pointer
-to the TQNetworkOperation object created by this function is
-returned. This object contains all the data about the operation
-and is used to refer to this operation later (e.g. in the signals
-that are emitted by the TQUrlOperator). The return value can also
-be 0 if the operation object couldn't be created.
-
                                           The path of this TQUrlOperator must to point to a directory
-(because the children of this directory will be listed), not to a
-file.
-
-
                                          const TQNetworkOperation * TQUrlOperator::mkdir ( const TQString & dirname ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-Tries to create a directory (child) with the name dirname. If
-it is successful, a newChildren() signal with the new child is
-emitted, and the createdDirectory() signal with the information
-about the new child is also emitted. The finished() signal (with
-success or failure) is emitted after the operation has been
-processed, so check the state of the network operation object to
-see whether or not the operation was successful.
-
                                           Because the operation will not be executed immediately, a pointer
-to the TQNetworkOperation object created by this function is
-returned. This object contains all the data about the operation
-and is used to refer to this operation later (e.g. in the signals
-that are emitted by the TQUrlOperator). The return value can also
-be 0 if the operation object couldn't be created.
-
                                           The path of this TQUrlOperator must to point to a directory (not a
-file) because the new directory will be created in this path.
-
-
                                          TQString TQUrlOperator::nameFilter () const
-
                                          
-Returns the name filter of the URL.
-
                                           
                                          See also TQUrlOperator::setNameFilter() and TQDir::nameFilter().
-
-
                                          void TQUrlOperator::newChildren ( const TQValueList<TQUrlInfo> & i, TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This signal is emitted after listChildren() was called and new
-children (i.e. files) have been read from a list of files. i
-holds the information about the new files. op is a pointer
-to the operation object which contains all the information about
-the operation, including the state.
-
                                           
                                          See also TQNetworkOperation and TQNetworkProtocol.
-
-
                                          const TQNetworkOperation * TQUrlOperator::put ( const TQByteArray & data, const TQString & location = TQString::null ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-This function tells the network protocol to put data in location. If location is empty (TQString::null), it puts the data in the location to which the URL points. What happens depends
-on the network protocol. Depending on the network protocol, some
-data might come back after putting data, in which case the data()
-signal is emitted. The dataTransferProgress() signal is emitted
-during processing of the operation. At the end, finished() (with
-success or failure) is emitted, so check the state of the network
-operation object to see whether or not the operation was
-successful.
-
                                           If location is TQString::null, the path of this TQUrlOperator
-should point to a file when you use this operation. If location
-is not empty, it can be a relative (a child of the path to which
-the TQUrlOperator points) or an absolute URL.
-
                                           For putting some data to a file you can do the following:
-
                                           
                                          -    TQUrlOperator op( "ftp://ftp.whatever.com/home/me/filename.dat" );
-    op.put( data );
-    
                                          
- 
-
                                           For most other operations, the path of the TQUrlOperator must point
-to a directory. If you want to upload data to a file you could do
-the following:
-
                                           
                                          -    TQUrlOperator op( "ftp://ftp.whatever.com/home/me" );
-    // do some other stuff like op.listChildren() or op.mkdir( "new_dir" )
-    op.put( data, "filename.dat" );
-    
                                          
- 
-
                                           This will upload the data to ftp://ftp.whatever.com/home/me/filename.dat.
-
                                           
                                          See also copy().
-
-
                                          const TQNetworkOperation * TQUrlOperator::remove ( const TQString & filename ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-Tries to remove the file (child) filename. If it succeeds the
-removed() signal is emitted. finished() (with success or failure)
-is also emitted after the operation has been processed, so check
-the state of the network operation object to see whether or not
-the operation was successful.
-
                                           Because the operation will not be executed immediately, a pointer
-to the TQNetworkOperation object created by this function is
-returned. This object contains all the data about the operation
-and is used to refer to this operation later (e.g. in the signals
-that are emitted by the TQUrlOperator). The return value can also
-be 0 if the operation object couldn't be created.
-
                                           The path of this TQUrlOperator must point to a directory; because
-if filename is relative, it will try to remove it in this
-directory.
-
-
                                          void TQUrlOperator::removed ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This signal is emitted when remove() has been succesful and the
-file has been removed.
-
                                           op is a pointer to the operation object which contains all the
-information about the operation, including the state.
-op->arg(0) holds the name of the file that was removed.
-
                                           
                                          See also TQNetworkOperation and TQNetworkProtocol.
-
-
                                          const TQNetworkOperation * TQUrlOperator::rename ( const TQString & oldname, const TQString & newname ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-Tries to rename the file (child) called oldname to newname.
-If it succeeds, the itemChanged() signal is emitted. finished()
-(with success or failure) is also emitted after the operation has
-been processed, so check the state of the network operation object
-to see whether or not the operation was successful.
-
                                           Because the operation may not be executed immediately, a pointer
-to the TQNetworkOperation object created by this function is
-returned. This object contains all the data about the operation
-and is used to refer to this operation later (e.g. in the signals
-that are emitted by the TQUrlOperator). The return value can also
-be 0 if the operation object couldn't be created.
-
                                           This path of this TQUrlOperator must to point to a directory
-because oldname and newname are handled relative to this
-directory.
-
-
                                          void TQUrlOperator::setNameFilter ( const TQString & nameFilter ) [virtual]
-
                                          
-Sets the name filter of the URL to nameFilter.
-
                                           
                                          See also TQDir::setNameFilter().
-
-
                                          void TQUrlOperator::start ( TQNetworkOperation * op ) [signal]
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Some operations (such as listChildren()) emit this signal when
-they start processing the operation. op is a pointer to the
-operation object which contains all the information about the
-operation, including the state.
-
                                           
                                          See also TQNetworkOperation and TQNetworkProtocol.
-
-
                                          void TQUrlOperator::startedNextCopy ( const TQPtrList<TQNetworkOperation> & lst ) [signal]
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This signal is emitted if copy() starts a new copy operation. lst contains all TQNetworkOperations related to this copy
-operation.
-
                                           
                                          See also copy().
-
-
                                          void TQUrlOperator::stop () [virtual]
-
                                          
-Stops the current network operation and removes all this
-TQUrlOperator's waiting network operations.
-
-
                                          Related Functions
                                          
-
                                          void qInitNetworkProtocols ()
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This function registers the network protocols for FTP and HTTP.
-You must call this function before you use TQUrlOperator for
-these protocols.
-
                                           This function is declared in qnetwork.h.
-
-
-
                                          
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                          
-
-
                                          Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                          TQt 3.3.8
                                          
-
                                          
-
diff --git a/doc/html/quuid-h.html b/doc/html/quuid-h.html
index c23e5bf21..26fbb3424 100644
--- a/doc/html/quuid-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/quuid-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-quuid.h Include File
+ntquuid.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                          
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                          TQUuid Class Reference
                                          
-
-
                                          The TQUuid class defines a Universally Unique Identifier (UUID).
-More...
-
                                          All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
                                          
-
                                          #include <quuid.h>
-
                                          List of all member functions.
-
                                          Public Members
                                          
-
                                            
-
                                          • enum Variant { VarUnknown = -1, NCS = 0, DCE = 2, Microsoft = 6, Reserved = 7 }
                                            • 
-
                                          • enum Version { VerUnknown = -1, Time = 1, EmbeddedPOSIX = 2, Name = 3, Random = 4 }
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQUuid ()
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQUuid ( uint l, ushort w1, ushort w2, uchar b1, uchar b2, uchar b3, uchar b4, uchar b5, uchar b6, uchar b7, uchar b8 )
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQUuid ( const TQUuid & orig )
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQUuid ( const TQString & text )
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQString toString () const
                                            • 
-
                                          • operator TQString () const
                                            • 
-
                                          • bool isNull () const
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQUuid & operator= ( const TQUuid & uuid )
                                            • 
-
                                          • bool operator== ( const TQUuid & other ) const
                                            • 
-
                                          • bool operator!= ( const TQUuid & other ) const
                                            • 
-
                                          • bool operator< ( const TQUuid & other ) const
                                            • 
-
                                          • bool operator> ( const TQUuid & other ) const
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQUuid::Variant variant () const
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQUuid::Version version () const
                                            • 
-
                                          
-
                                          Static Public Members
                                          
-
-
                                          Related Functions
                                          
-
                                            
-
                                          • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQUuid & id )
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQUuid & id )
                                            • 
-
                                          
-
                                          Detailed Description
                                          
-
-
-The TQUuid class defines a Universally Unique Identifier (UUID).
-
                                           
-
                                           For objects or declarations that must be uniquely identified,
-UUIDs (also known as GUIDs) are widely used in order to assign a
-fixed and easy to compare value to the object or declaration. The
-128-bit value of a UUID is generated by an algorithm that
-guarantees that the value is unique.
-
                                           In TQt, UUIDs are wrapped by the TQUuid struct which provides
-convenience functions for handling UUIDs. Most platforms provide a
-tool to generate new UUIDs, for example, uuidgen and guidgen.
-
                                           UUIDs generated by TQUuid, are based on the Random version of the
-DCE (Distributed Computing Environment) standard.
-
                                           UUIDs can be constructed from numeric values or from strings, or
-using the static createUuid() function. They can be converted to a
-string with toString(). UUIDs have a variant() and a version(),
-and null UUIDs return TRUE from isNull().
-
-
                                          Member Type Documentation
                                          
-
                                          TQUuid::Variant
                                          
-
-
                                           This enum defines the variant of the UUID, which is the scheme
-which defines the layout of the 128-bits value.
-
                                            
-
                                          • TQUuid::VarUnknown - Variant is unknown
-
                                          • TQUuid::NCS - Reserved for NCS (Network Computing System) backward compatibility
-
                                          • TQUuid::DCE - Distributed Computing Environment, the scheme used by TQUuid
-
                                          • TQUuid::Microsoft - Reserved for Microsoft backward compatibility (GUID)
-
                                          • TQUuid::Reserved - Reserved for future definition
-
                                          
-
                                          TQUuid::Version
                                          
-
-
                                           This enum defines the version of the UUID.
-
                                            
-
                                          • TQUuid::VerUnknown - Version is unknown
-
                                          • TQUuid::Time - Time-based, by using timestamp, clock sequence, and
-MAC network card address (if available) for the node sections
-
                                          • TQUuid::EmbeddedPOSIX - DCE Security version, with embedded POSIX UUIDs
-
                                          • TQUuid::Name - Name-based, by using values from a name for all sections
-
                                          • TQUuid::Random - Random-based, by using random numbers for all sections
-
                                          
-
                                          Member Function Documentation
                                          
-
                                          TQUuid::TQUuid ()
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Creates the null UUID {00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000}.
-
-
                                          TQUuid::TQUuid ( uint l, ushort w1, ushort w2, uchar b1, uchar b2, uchar b3, uchar b4, uchar b5, uchar b6, uchar b7, uchar b8 )
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Creates a UUID with the value specified by the parameters, l,
-w1, w2, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7, b8.
-
                                           Example:
-
                                          -    // {67C8770B-44F1-410A-AB9A-F9B5446F13EE}
-    TQUuid IID_MyInterface( 0x67c8770b, 0x44f1, 0x410a, 0xab, 0x9a, 0xf9, 0xb5, 0x44, 0x6f, 0x13, 0xee )
-    
                                          
- 
-
-
                                          TQUuid::TQUuid ( const TQUuid & orig )
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Creates a copy of the TQUuid orig.
-
-
                                          TQUuid::TQUuid ( const TQString & text )
-
                                          
-Creates a TQUuid object from the string text. The function can
-only convert a string in the format
-{HHHHHHHH-HHHH-HHHH-HHHH-HHHHHHHHHHHH} (where 'H' stands for a hex
-digit). If the conversion fails a null UUID is created.
-
-
                                          TQUuid TQUuid::createUuid () [static]
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Returns a new UUID of DCE variant, and Random type. The
-UUIDs generated are based on the platform specific pseudo-random
-generator, which is usually not a cryptographic-quality random
-number generator. Therefore, a UUID is not guaranteed to be unique
-cross application instances.
-
                                           On Windows, the new UUID is extremely likely to be unique on the
-same or any other system, networked or not.
-
                                           
                                          See also variant() and version().
-
-
                                          bool TQUuid::isNull () const
-
                                          
-Returns TRUE if this is the null UUID
-{00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000}; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                          TQUuid::operator TQString () const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Returns the string representation of the uuid.
-
                                           
                                          See also toString().
-
-
                                          bool TQUuid::operator!= ( const TQUuid & other ) const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Returns TRUE if this TQUuid and the other TQUuid are different;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                          bool TQUuid::operator< ( const TQUuid & other ) const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Returns TRUE if this TQUuid is of the same variant,
-and lexicographically before the other TQUuid;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                           
                                          See also variant().
-
-
                                          TQUuid & TQUuid::operator= ( const TQUuid & uuid )
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Assigns the value of uuid to this TQUuid object.
-
-
                                          bool TQUuid::operator== ( const TQUuid & other ) const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Returns TRUE if this TQUuid and the other TQUuid are identical;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                          bool TQUuid::operator> ( const TQUuid & other ) const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Returns TRUE if this TQUuid is of the same variant,
-and lexicographically after the other TQUuid;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                           
                                          See also variant().
-
-
                                          TQString TQUuid::toString () const
-
                                          
-TQString TQUuid::toString() const
-
                                           Returns the string representation of the uuid.
-
-
                                          TQUuid::Variant TQUuid::variant () const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Returns the variant of the UUID.
-The null UUID is considered to be of an unknown variant.
-
                                           
                                          See also version().
-
-
                                          TQUuid::Version TQUuid::version () const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Returns the version of the UUID, if the UUID is of the DCE
-variant; otherwise returns VerUnknown.
-
                                           
                                          See also variant().
-
-
                                          Related Functions
                                          
-
                                          TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQUuid & id )
-
                                          
-
-Writes the uuid id to the datastream s.
-
-
                                          TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQUuid & id )
-
                                          
-
-Reads uuid from from the stream s into id.
-
-
-
                                          
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                          
-
-
                                          Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                          TQt 3.3.8
                                          
-
                                          
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qvalidator-h.html b/doc/html/qvalidator-h.html
index fae4ba707..5317cb3ad 100644
--- a/doc/html/qvalidator-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qvalidator-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qvalidator.h Include File
+ntqvalidator.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                          
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                          TQValidator Class Reference
                                          
-
-
                                          The TQValidator class provides validation of input text.
-More...
-
                                          #include <qvalidator.h>
-
                                          Inherits TQObject.
-
                                          Inherited by TQIntValidator, TQDoubleValidator, and TQRegExpValidator.
-
                                          List of all member functions.
-
                                          Public Members
                                          
-
                                            
-
                                          • TQValidator ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
                                            • 
-
                                          • ~TQValidator ()
                                            • 
-
                                          • enum State { Invalid, Intermediate, Valid = Intermediate, Acceptable }
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual State validate ( TQString & input, int & pos ) const = 0
                                            • 
-
                                          • virtual void fixup ( TQString & input ) const
                                            • 
-
                                          
-
                                          Detailed Description
                                          
-
-
-The TQValidator class provides validation of input text.
-
                                           
-
-
                                           The class itself is abstract. Two subclasses, TQIntValidator and
-TQDoubleValidator, provide basic numeric-range checking, and TQRegExpValidator provides general checking using a custom regular expression.
-
                                           If the built-in validators aren't sufficient, you can subclass
-TQValidator. The class has two virtual functions: validate() and
-fixup().
-
                                           validate() must be implemented by every subclass. It returns
-Invalid, Intermediate or Acceptable depending on whether
-its argument is valid (for the subclass's definition of valid).
-
                                           These three states require some explanation. An Invalid string
-is clearly invalid. Intermediate is less obvious: the
-concept of validity is slippery when the string is incomplete
-(still being edited). TQValidator defines Intermediate as the
-property of a string that is neither clearly invalid nor
-acceptable as a final result. Acceptable means that the string
-is acceptable as a final result. One might say that any string
-that is a plausible intermediate state during entry of an Acceptable string is Intermediate.
-
                                           Here are some examples:
-
                                           
                                            
-
                                             
                                          •  For a line edit that accepts integers from 0 to 999 inclusive,
-42 and 123 are Acceptable, the empty string and 1114 are Intermediate and asdf is Invalid.
-
                                             
                                          •  For an editable combobox that accepts URLs, any well-formed URL
-is Acceptable, "http://www.trolltech.com/," is Intermediate
-(it might be a cut and paste operation that accidentally took in a
-comma at the end), the empty string is Intermediate (the user
-might select and delete all of the text in preparation for entering
-a new URL), and "http:///./" is Invalid.
-
                                             
                                          •  For a spin box that accepts lengths, "11cm" and "1in" are Acceptable, "11" and the empty string are Intermediate and
-"http://www.trolltech.com" and "hour" are Invalid.
-
                                             
                                          
-
                                           fixup() is provided for validators that can repair some user
-errors. The default implementation does nothing. TQLineEdit, for
-example, will call fixup() if the user presses Enter (or Return)
-and the content is not currently valid. This allows the fixup()
-function the opportunity of performing some magic to make an Invalid string Acceptable.
-
                                           TQValidator is typically used with TQLineEdit, TQSpinBox and
-TQComboBox.
-
                                          See also Miscellaneous Classes.
-
-
                                          Member Type Documentation
                                          
-
                                          TQValidator::State
                                          
-
-
                                           This enum type defines the states in which a validated string can
-exist.
-
                                            
-
                                          • TQValidator::Invalid - the string is clearly invalid.
-
                                          • TQValidator::Intermediate - the string is a plausible intermediate value
-during editing.
-
                                          • TQValidator::Acceptable - the string is acceptable as a final result,
-i.e. it is valid.
-
                                          
-
                                          Member Function Documentation
                                          
-
                                          TQValidator::TQValidator ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                          
-Sets up the validator. The parent and name parameters are
-passed on to the TQObject constructor.
-
-
                                          TQValidator::~TQValidator ()
-
                                          
-Destroys the validator, freeing any storage and other resources
-used.
-
-
                                          void TQValidator::fixup ( TQString & input ) const [virtual]
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This function attempts to change input to be valid according to
-this validator's rules. It need not result in a valid string:
-callers of this function must re-test afterwards; the default does
-nothing.
-
                                           Reimplementations of this function can change input even if
-they do not produce a valid string. For example, an ISBN validator
-might want to delete every character except digits and "-", even
-if the result is still not a valid ISBN; a surname validator might
-want to remove whitespace from the start and end of the string,
-even if the resulting string is not in the list of accepted
-surnames.
-
-
                                          State TQValidator::validate ( TQString & input, int & pos ) const [pure virtual]
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This pure virtual function returns Invalid if input is
-invalid according to this validator's rules, Intermediate if it
-is likely that a little more editing will make the input
-acceptable (e.g. the user types '4' into a widget which accepts
-integers between 10 and 99) and Acceptable if the input is
-valid.
-
                                           The function can change input and pos (the cursor position)
-if it wants to.
-
-
                                          Reimplemented in TQIntValidator, TQDoubleValidator, and TQRegExpValidator.
-
-
                                          
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                          
-
-
                                          Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                          TQt 3.3.8
                                          
-
                                          
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qvaluelist-h.html b/doc/html/qvaluelist-h.html
index bed8835e3..a247846a4 100644
--- a/doc/html/qvaluelist-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qvaluelist-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qvaluelist.h Include File
+ntqvaluelist.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                          
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                          TQValueList Class Reference
                                          
-
-
                                          The TQValueList class is a value-based template class that
-provides lists.
-More...
-
                                          All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
                                          
-
                                          #include <qvaluelist.h>
-
                                          Inherited by TQCanvasItemList, TQStringList, and TQValueStack.
-
                                          List of all member functions.
-
                                          Public Members
                                          
-
-
                                          Related Functions
                                          
-
                                            
-
                                          • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQValueList<T> & l )
                                            • 
-
                                          • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQValueList<T> & l )
                                            • 
-
                                          
-
                                          Detailed Description
                                          
-
-
-The TQValueList class is a value-based template class that
-provides lists.
-
                                           
-
-
-
-
-
                                           TQValueList is a TQt implementation of an STL-like list container.
-It can be used in your application if the standard list is not
-available for your target platform(s). TQValueList is part of the
-TQt Template Library.
-
                                           TQValueList<T> defines a template instance to create a list of
-values that all have the class T. Note that TQValueList does not
-store pointers to the members of the list; it holds a copy of
-every member. This is why these kinds of classes are called "value
-based"; TQPtrList and TQDict are "pointer based".
-
                                           TQValueList contains and manages a collection of objects of type T
-and provides iterators that allow the contained objects to be
-addressed. TQValueList owns the contained items. For more relaxed
-ownership semantics, see TQPtrCollection and friends which are
-pointer-based containers.
-
                                           Some classes cannot be used within a TQValueList, for example, all
-classes derived from TQObject and thus all classes that implement
-widgets. Only values can be used in a TQValueList. To qualify as a
-value the class must provide:
-
                                            
-
                                          •  a copy constructor;
-
                                          •  an assignment operator;
-
                                          •  a default constructor, i.e. a constructor that does not take any arguments.
-
                                          
-
                                           Note that C++ defaults to field-by-field assignment operators and
-copy constructors if no explicit version is supplied. In many
-cases this is sufficient.
-
                                           In addition, some compilers (e.g. Sun CC) might require that the
-class provides an equality operator (operator==()).
-
                                           TQValueList's function naming is consistent with the other TQt
-classes (e.g. count(), isEmpty()). TQValueList also provides extra
-functions for compatibility with STL algorithms, such as size()
-and empty(). Programmers already familiar with the STL list may
-prefer to use the STL-compatible functions.
-
                                           Example:
-
                                          -    class Employee
-    {
-    public:
-        Employee(): sn(0) {}
-        Employee( const TQString& forename, const TQString& surname, int salary )
-            : fn(forename), sn(surname), sal(salary)
-        {}
-
-        TQString forename() const { return fn; }
-        TQString surname() const { return sn; }
-        int salary() const { return sal; }
-        void setSalary( int salary ) { sal = salary; }
-
-    private:
-        TQString fn;
-        TQString sn;
-        int sal;
-    };
-
-    typedef TQValueList<Employee> EmployeeList;
-    EmployeeList list;
-
-    list.append( Employee("John", "Doe", 50000) );
-    list.append( Employee("Jane", "Williams", 80000) );
-    list.append( Employee("Tom", "Jones", 60000) );
-
-    Employee mary( "Mary", "Hawthorne", 90000 );
-    list.append( mary );
-    mary.setSalary( 100000 );
-
-    EmployeeList::iterator it;
-    for ( it = list.begin(); it != list.end(); ++it )
-        cout << (*it).surname().latin1() << ", " <<
-                (*it).forename().latin1() << " earns " <<
-                (*it).salary() << endl;
-
-    // Output:
-    // Doe, John earns 50000
-    // Williams, Jane earns 80000
-    // Hawthorne, Mary earns 90000
-    // Jones, Tom earns 60000
-    
                                          
- 
-
                                           Notice that the latest changes to Mary's salary did not affect the
-value in the list because the list created a copy of Mary's entry.
-
                                           There are several ways to find items in the list. The begin() and
-end() functions return iterators to the beginning and end of the
-list. The advantage of getting an iterator is that you can move
-forward or backward from this position by
-incrementing/decrementing the iterator. The iterator returned by
-end() points to the item which is one past the last item in the
-container. The past-the-end iterator is still associated with the
-list it belongs to, however it is not dereferenceable;
-operator*() will not return a well-defined value. If the list is
-empty(), the iterator returned by begin() will equal the iterator
-returned by end().
-
                                           Another way to find an item in the list is by using the qFind() algorithm. For example:
-
                                           
                                          -    TQValueList<int> list;
-    ...
-    TQValueList<int>::iterator it = qFind( list.begin(), list.end(), 3 );
-    if ( it != list.end() )
-        // it points to the found item
-    
                                          
- 
-
                                           It is safe to have multiple iterators a the list at the same
-time. If some member of the list is removed, only iterators
-pointing to the removed member become invalid. Inserting into the
-list does not invalidate any iterator. For convenience, the
-function last() returns a reference to the last item in the list,
-and first() returns a reference to the the first item. If the
-list is empty(), both last() and first() have undefined behavior
-(your application will crash or do unpredictable things). Use
-last() and first() with caution, for example:
-
                                           
                                          -    TQValueList<int> list;
-    list.append( 1 );
-    list.append( 2 );
-    list.append( 3 );
-    ...
-    if ( !list.empty() ) {
-        // OK, modify the first item
-        int& i = list.first();
-        i = 18;
-    }
-    ...
-    TQValueList<double> dlist;
-    double d = dlist.last(); // undefined
-    
                                          
- 
-
                                           Because TQValueList is value-based there is no need to be careful
-about deleting items in the list. The list holds its own copies
-and will free them if the corresponding member or the list itself
-is deleted. You can force the list to free all of its items with
-clear().
-
                                           TQValueList is shared implicitly, which means it can be copied in
-constant time, i.e. O(1). If multiple TQValueList instances share
-the same data and one needs to modify its contents, this modifying
-instance makes a copy and modifies its private copy; therefore it
-does not affect the other instances; this takes O(n) time. This is
-often called "copy on write". If a TQValueList is being used in a
-multi-threaded program, you must protect all access to the list.
-See TQMutex.
-
                                           There are several ways to insert items into the list. The
-prepend() and append() functions insert items at the beginning and
-the end of the list respectively. The insert() function comes in
-several flavors and can be used to add one or more items at
-specific positions within the list.
-
                                           Items can also be removed from the list in several ways. There
-are several variants of the remove() function, which removes a
-specific item from the list. The remove() function will find and
-remove items according to a specific item value.
-
                                           Lists can also be sorted using the TQt Template
-    Library. For example with qHeapSort():
-
                                           Example:
-
                                          -    TQValueList<int> list;
-    list.append( 5 );
-    list.append( 8 );
-    list.append( 3 );
-    list.append( 4 );
-    qHeapSort( list );
-    
                                          
- 
-
                                           
                                          See also TQValueListIterator, TQt Template Library Classes, Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
-
-
                                          Member Type Documentation
                                          
-
                                          TQValueList::ConstIterator
                                          
-
-
                                           This iterator is an instantiation of TQValueListConstIterator for
-the same type as this TQValueList. In other words, if you
-instantiate TQValueList, ConstIterator is a
-TQValueListConstIterator. Several member function use it, such
-as TQValueList::begin(), which returns an iterator pointing to the
-first item in the list.
-
                                           Functionally, this is almost the same as Iterator. The only
-difference is you cannot use ConstIterator for non-const
-operations, and that the compiler can often generate better code
-if you use ConstIterator.
-
                                           
                                          See also TQValueListIterator and Iterator.
-
-
                                          TQValueList::Iterator
                                          
-
-
                                           This iterator is an instantiation of TQValueListIterator for the
-same type as this TQValueList. In other words, if you instantiate
-TQValueList, Iterator is a TQValueListIterator. Several
-member function use it, such as TQValueList::begin(), which returns
-an iterator pointing to the first item in the list.
-
                                           Functionally, this is almost the same as ConstIterator. The only
-difference is that you cannot use ConstIterator for non-const
-operations, and that the compiler can often generate better code
-if you use ConstIterator.
-
                                           
                                          See also TQValueListIterator and ConstIterator.
-
-
                                          TQValueList::const_iterator
                                           
-The list's const iterator type, TQValueListConstIterator. 
-
                                          TQValueList::const_pointer
                                           
-The const pointer to T type. 
-
                                          TQValueList::const_reference
                                           
-The const reference to T type. 
-
                                          TQValueList::iterator
                                           
-The list's iterator type, TQValueListIterator. 
-
                                          TQValueList::pointer
                                           
-The pointer to T type. 
-
                                          TQValueList::reference
                                           
-The reference to T type. 
-
                                          TQValueList::size_type
                                           
-An unsigned integral type, used to represent various sizes. 
-
                                          TQValueList::value_type
                                           
-The type of the object stored in the list, T. 
-
                                          Member Function Documentation
                                          
-
                                          TQValueList::TQValueList ()
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Constructs an empty list.
-
-
                                          TQValueList::TQValueList ( const TQValueList<T> & l )
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Constructs a copy of l.
-
                                           This operation takes O(1) time because TQValueList is implicitly shared.
-
                                           The first modification to a list will take O(n) time.
-
-
                                          TQValueList::TQValueList ( const std::list<T> & l )
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Contructs a copy of l.
-
                                           This constructor is provided for compatibility with STL
-containers.
-
-
                                          TQValueList::~TQValueList ()
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Destroys the list. References to the values in the list and all
-iterators of this list become invalidated. Note that it is
-impossible for an iterator to check whether or not it is valid:
-TQValueList is highly tuned for performance, not for error
-checking.
-
-
                                          iterator TQValueList::append ( const T & x )
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Inserts x at the end of the list.
-
                                           
                                          See also insert() and prepend().
-
-
                                          Examples: checklists/checklists.cpp and fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp.
-
                                          const_iterator TQValueList::at ( size_type i ) const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Returns an iterator pointing to the item at position i in the
-list, or an undefined value if the index is out of range.
-
                                           Warning: This function uses a linear search and can be extremely
-slow for large lists. TQValueList is not optimized for random item
-access. If you need random access use a different container, such
-as TQValueVector.
-
-
                                          iterator TQValueList::at ( size_type i )
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           Returns an iterator pointing to the item at position i in the
-list, or an undefined value if the index is out of range.
-
                                           
-
                                          reference TQValueList::back ()
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Returns a reference to the last item. If the list contains no last
-item (i.e. empty() returns TRUE), the return value is undefined.
-
                                           This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent
-to last().
-
                                           
                                          See also front().
-
-
                                          const_reference TQValueList::back () const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           
-
                                          const_iterator TQValueList::begin () const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Returns an iterator pointing to the first item in the list. This
-iterator equals end() if the list is empty.
-
                                           
                                          See also first(), end(), and constBegin().
-
-
                                          Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp, chart/canvasview.cpp, chart/element.cpp, checklists/checklists.cpp, sql/overview/insert/main.cpp, table/statistics/statistics.cpp, and themes/themes.cpp.
-
                                          iterator TQValueList::begin ()
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           Returns an iterator pointing to the first item in the list. This
-iterator equals end() if the list is empty.
-
                                           
                                          See also first() and end().
-
-
                                          void TQValueList::clear ()
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Removes all items from the list.
-
                                           
                                          See also remove().
-
-
                                          const_iterator TQValueList::constBegin () const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Returns an iterator pointing to the first item in the list. This
-iterator equals constEnd() if the list is empty.
-
                                           
                                          See also begin().
-
-
                                          const_iterator TQValueList::constEnd () const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Returns an iterator pointing past the last item in the list.
-This iterator equals constBegin() if the list is empty.
-
                                           
                                          See also end().
-
-
                                          size_type TQValueList::contains ( const T & x ) const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Returns the number of occurrences of the value x in the list.
-
-
                                          size_type TQValueList::count () const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Returns the number of items in the list.
-
                                           
                                          See also isEmpty().
-
-
                                          Examples: chart/element.cpp, fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp, and table/statistics/statistics.cpp.
-
                                          bool TQValueList::empty () const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Returns TRUE if the list contains no items; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                           
                                          See also size().
-
-
                                          iterator TQValueList::end ()
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Returns an iterator pointing past the last item in the list.
-This iterator equals begin() if the list is empty.
-
                                           
                                          See also last(), begin(), and constEnd().
-
-
                                          Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp, chart/canvasview.cpp, chart/element.cpp, checklists/checklists.cpp, sql/overview/insert/main.cpp, table/statistics/statistics.cpp, and themes/themes.cpp.
-
                                          const_iterator TQValueList::end () const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           Returns an iterator pointing past the last item in the list.
-This iterator equals begin() if the list is empty.
-
                                           
                                          See also last() and begin().
-
-
                                          iterator TQValueList::erase ( iterator it )
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Removes the item pointed to by it from the list. No iterators
-other than it or other iterators pointing at the same item as
-it are invalidated. Returns an iterator to the next item after
-it, or end() if there is no such item.
-
                                           This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent
-to remove().
-
-
                                          iterator TQValueList::erase ( iterator first, iterator last )
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           Deletes all items from first to last (not including last). No iterators are invalidated, except those pointing to the
-removed items themselves. Returns last.
-
-
                                          iterator TQValueList::find ( const T & x )
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Returns an iterator pointing to the first occurrence of x in
-the list.
-
                                           Returns end() is no item matched.
-
-
                                          const_iterator TQValueList::find ( const T & x ) const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           Returns an iterator pointing to the first occurrence of x in
-the list.
-
                                           Returns end() if no item matched.
-
-
                                          iterator TQValueList::find ( iterator it, const T & x )
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           Finds the first occurrence of x in the list starting at the
-position given by it.
-
                                           Returns end() if no item matched.
-
-
                                          const_iterator TQValueList::find ( const_iterator it, const T & x ) const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           Finds the first occurrence of x in the list starting at the
-position given by it.
-
                                           Returns end() if no item matched.
-
-
                                          int TQValueList::findIndex ( const T & x ) const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Returns the index of the first occurrence of the value x.
-Returns -1 if no item matched.
-
-
                                          T & TQValueList::first ()
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Returns a reference to the first item. If the list contains no
-first item (i.e. isEmpty() returns TRUE), the return value is
-undefined.
-
                                           
                                          See also last().
-
-
                                          Example: network/mail/smtp.cpp.
-
                                          const T & TQValueList::first () const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           
-
                                          const_iterator TQValueList::fromLast () const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Returns an iterator to the last item in the list, or end() if
-there is no last item.
-
                                           Use the end() function instead. For example:
-
                                           
                                          -    TQValueList<int> l;
-    ...
-    TQValueList<int>::iterator it = l.end();
-    --it;
-    if ( it != end() )
-        // ...
-    
                                          
- 
-
                                           
-
                                          iterator TQValueList::fromLast ()
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           Returns an iterator to the last item in the list, or end() if
-there is no last item.
-
                                           Use the end() function instead. For example:
-
                                           
                                          -    TQValueList<int> l;
-    ...
-    TQValueList<int>::iterator it = l.end();
-    --it;
-    if ( it != end() )
-        // ...
-    
                                          
- 
-
                                           
-
                                          reference TQValueList::front ()
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Returns a reference to the first item. If the list contains no
-first item (i.e. empty() returns TRUE), the return value is
-undefined.
-
                                           This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent
-to first().
-
                                           
                                          See also back().
-
-
                                          const_reference TQValueList::front () const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           
-
                                          iterator TQValueList::insert ( iterator it, const T & x )
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Inserts the value x in front of the item pointed to by the
-iterator, it.
-
                                           Returns an iterator pointing at the inserted item.
-
                                           
                                          See also append() and prepend().
-
-
                                          Example: themes/themes.cpp.
-
                                          void TQValueList::insert ( iterator pos, size_type n, const T & x )
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           Inserts n copies of x before position pos.
-
-
                                          bool TQValueList::isEmpty () const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Returns TRUE if the list contains no items; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                           
                                          See also count().
-
-
                                          Examples: fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp and network/mail/smtp.cpp.
-
                                          T & TQValueList::last ()
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Returns a reference to the last item. If the list contains no last
-item (i.e. empty() returns TRUE), the return value is undefined.
-
-
                                          const T & TQValueList::last () const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           
-
                                          bool TQValueList::operator!= ( const TQValueList<T> & l ) const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Compares both lists.
-
                                           Returns TRUE if this list and l are unequal; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
-
                                          TQValueList<T> TQValueList::operator+ ( const TQValueList<T> & l ) const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Creates a new list and fills it with the items of this list. Then
-the items of l are appended. Returns the new list.
-
-
                                          TQValueList<T> & TQValueList::operator+= ( const TQValueList<T> & l )
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Appends the items of l to this list. Returns a reference to
-this list.
-
-
                                          TQValueList<T> & TQValueList::operator+= ( const T & x )
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           Appends the value x to the list. Returns a reference to the
-list.
-
-
                                          TQValueList<T> & TQValueList::operator<< ( const T & x )
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Adds the value x to the end of the list.
-
                                           Returns a reference to the list.
-
-
                                          TQValueList<T> & TQValueList::operator= ( const TQValueList<T> & l )
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Assigns l to this list and returns a reference to this list.
-
                                           All iterators of the current list become invalidated by this
-operation. The cost of such an assignment is O(1) since TQValueList
-is implicitly shared.
-
-
                                          TQValueList<T> & TQValueList::operator= ( const std::list<T> & l )
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           Assigns the contents of l to the list.
-
                                           All iterators of the current list become invalidated by this
-operation.
-
-
                                          bool TQValueList::operator== ( const TQValueList<T> & l ) const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Compares both lists.
-
                                           Returns TRUE if this list and l are equal; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
-
                                          bool TQValueList::operator== ( const std::list<T> & l ) const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           Returns TRUE if this list and l are equal; otherwise returns
-FALSE.
-
                                           This operator is provided for compatibility with STL containers.
-
-
                                          const T & TQValueList::operator[] ( size_type i ) const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Returns a const reference to the item with index i in the list.
-It is up to you to check whether this item really exists. You can
-do that easily with the count() function. However this operator
-does not check whether i is in range and will deliver undefined
-results if it does not exist.
-
                                           Warning: This function uses a linear search and can be extremely
-slow for large lists. TQValueList is not optimized for random item
-access. If you need random access use a different container, such
-as TQValueVector.
-
-
                                          T & TQValueList::operator[] ( size_type i )
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           Returns a non-const reference to the item with index i.
-
-
                                          void TQValueList::pop_back ()
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Removes the last item. If there is no last item, this operation is
-undefined.
-
                                           This function is provided for STL compatibility.
-
-
                                          void TQValueList::pop_front ()
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Removes the first item. If there is no first item, this operation
-is undefined.
-
                                           This function is provided for STL compatibility.
-
-
                                          iterator TQValueList::prepend ( const T & x )
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Inserts x at the beginning of the list.
-
                                           
                                          See also insert() and append().
-
-
                                          void TQValueList::push_back ( const T & x )
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Inserts x at the end of the list.
-
                                           This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent
-to append().
-
-
                                          void TQValueList::push_front ( const T & x )
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Inserts x at the beginning of the list.
-
                                           This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent
-to prepend().
-
-
                                          Example: toplevel/options.ui.h.
-
                                          iterator TQValueList::remove ( iterator it )
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Removes the item pointed to by it from the list. No iterators
-other than it or other iterators pointing at the same item as
-it are invalidated. Returns an iterator to the next item after
-it, or end() if there is no such item.
-
                                           
                                          See also clear().
-
-
                                          uint TQValueList::remove ( const T & x )
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           Removes all items that have value x and returns the number of
-removed items.
-
-
                                          size_type TQValueList::size () const
-
                                          
-
-
                                           Returns the number of items in the list.
-
                                           This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent
-to count().
-
                                           
                                          See also empty().
-
-
                                          Related Functions
                                          
-
                                          TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQValueList<T> & l )
-
                                          
-
-
                                           This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                           
-
                                           Writes a list, l, to the stream s. The type T stored in the
-list must implement the streaming operator.
-
-
                                          TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQValueList<T> & l )
-
                                          
-
-
                                           
-
                                           Reads a list, l, from the stream s. The type T stored in the
-list must implement the streaming operator.
-
-
-
                                          
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                          
-
-
                                          Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                          TQt 3.3.8
                                          
-
                                          
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qvaluelistconstiterator-members.html b/doc/html/qvaluelistconstiterator-members.html
index d50c18c1b..64fa123a6 100644
--- a/doc/html/qvaluelistconstiterator-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qvaluelistconstiterator-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qvaluelistconstiterator.html b/doc/html/qvaluelistconstiterator.html
index d1f2739b3..bf42e5609 100644
--- a/doc/html/qvaluelistconstiterator.html
+++ b/doc/html/qvaluelistconstiterator.html
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 for TQValueList.
 More...
 
                                          All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
                                          
-
                                          #include <qvaluelist.h>
+
                                          #include <ntqvaluelist.h>
 
                                          List of all member functions.
 
                                          Public Members
                                          
 
                                            
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ for TQValueList.
 
 
 The TQValueListConstIterator class provides a const iterator
-for TQValueList.
+for TQValueList.
 
                                             
 
 
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ the list since that would break const semantics.
 
                                             You can create the appropriate const iterator type by using the const_iterator typedef provided by TQValueList.
 
                                             For more information on TQValueList iterators, see
 TQValueListIterator.
-
                                             
                                            See also TQValueListIterator, TQValueList, TQt Template Library Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
                                             
                                            See also TQValueListIterator, TQValueList, TQt Template Library Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
 
 
                                            Member Type Documentation
                                            
 
                                            TQValueListConstIterator::pointer
                                             
diff --git a/doc/html/qvaluelistiterator-members.html b/doc/html/qvaluelistiterator-members.html
index 01472b76b..766337c73 100644
--- a/doc/html/qvaluelistiterator-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qvaluelistiterator-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qvaluelistiterator.html b/doc/html/qvaluelistiterator.html
index e8e944b04..d6efa0a4e 100644
--- a/doc/html/qvaluelistiterator.html
+++ b/doc/html/qvaluelistiterator.html
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                            The TQValueListIterator class provides an iterator for TQValueList.
 More...
 
                                            All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
                                            
-
                                            #include <qvaluelist.h>
+
                                            #include <ntqvaluelist.h>
 
                                            List of all member functions.
 
                                            Public Members
                                            
 
                                              
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                              Detailed Description
                                              
 
 
-The TQValueListIterator class provides an iterator for TQValueList.
+The TQValueListIterator class provides an iterator for TQValueList.
 
                                               
 
 
@@ -86,13 +86,13 @@ iterator.
     // Jones, Tom earns 60000
     
                                
  
-
                                 TQValueList is highly optimized for performance and memory usage.
+
                                 TQValueList is highly optimized for performance and memory usage.
 This means that you must be careful: TQValueList does not know
 about all its iterators and the iterators don't know to which list
 they belong. This makes things very fast, but if you're not
 careful, you can get spectacular bugs. Always make sure iterators
 are valid before dereferencing them or using them as parameters to
-generic algorithms in the STL or the TQTL.
+generic algorithms in the STL or the TQTL.
 
                                 Using an invalid iterator is undefined (your application will
 probably crash). Many TQt functions return const value lists; to
 iterate over these you should make a copy and iterate over the
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ TQValueList in a const environment or if the reference or pointer
 to the list is itself const, then you must use the ConstIterator.
 Its semantics are the same as the Iterator, but it only returns
 const references.
-
                                 
                                See also TQValueList, TQValueListConstIterator, TQt Template Library Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
+
                                 
                                See also TQValueList, TQValueListConstIterator, TQt Template Library Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
 
 
                                Member Type Documentation
                                
 
                                TQValueListIterator::pointer
                                 
diff --git a/doc/html/qvaluestack-h.html b/doc/html/qvaluestack-h.html
index cbbdf765f..c3c7eb49f 100644
--- a/doc/html/qvaluestack-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qvaluestack-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qvaluestack.h Include File
+ntqvaluestack.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                TQValueStack Class Reference
                                
-
-
                                The TQValueStack class is a value-based template class that provides a stack.
-More...
-
                                All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
                                
-
                                #include <qvaluestack.h>
-
                                Inherits TQValueList<T>.
-
                                List of all member functions.
-
                                Public Members
                                
-
-
                                Detailed Description
                                
-
-
-The TQValueStack class is a value-based template class that provides a stack.
-
                                 
-
-
-
-
-
                                 Define a template instance TQValueStack<X> to create a stack of
-values that all have the class X. TQValueStack is part of the TQt Template Library.
-
                                 Note that TQValueStack does not store pointers to the members of
-the stack; it holds a copy of every member. That is why these
-kinds of classes are called "value based"; TQPtrStack, TQPtrList,
-TQDict, etc., are "pointer based".
-
                                 A stack is a last in, first out (LIFO) structure. Items are added
-to the top of the stack with push() and retrieved from the top
-with pop(). The top() function provides access to the topmost item
-without removing it.
-
                                 Example:
-
                                -        TQValueStack<int> stack;
-        stack.push( 1 );
-        stack.push( 2 );
-        stack.push( 3 );
-        while ( ! stack.isEmpty() )
-            cout << "Item: " << stack.pop() << endl;
-
-        // Output:
-        //      Item: 3
-        //      Item: 2
-        //      Item: 1
-    
                                
- 
-
                                 TQValueStack is a specialized TQValueList provided for convenience.
-All of TQValueList's functionality also applies to TQPtrStack, for
-example the facility to iterate over all elements using
-TQValueStack::Iterator. See TQValueListIterator for further
-details.
-
                                 Some classes cannot be used within a TQValueStack, for example
-everything derived from TQObject and thus all classes that
-implement widgets. Only values can be used in a TQValueStack. To
-qualify as a value, the class must provide
-
                                  
-
                                •  a copy constructor;
-
                                •  an assignment operator;
-
                                •  a default constructor, i.e. a constructor that does not take any arguments.
-
                                
-
                                 Note that C++ defaults to field-by-field assignment operators and
-copy constructors if no explicit version is supplied. In many
-cases this is sufficient.
-
                                See also TQt Template Library Classes, Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
-
-
                                Member Function Documentation
                                
-
                                TQValueStack::TQValueStack ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Constructs an empty stack.
-
-
                                TQValueStack::~TQValueStack ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Destroys the stack. References to the values in the stack and all
-iterators of this stack become invalidated. Because TQValueStack is
-highly tuned for performance, you won't see warnings if you use
-invalid iterators because it is impossible for an iterator to
-check whether or not it is valid.
-
-
                                T TQValueStack::pop ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Removes the top item from the stack and returns it.
-
                                 
                                See also top() and push().
-
-
                                void TQValueStack::push ( const T & d )
-
                                
-
-
                                 Adds element, d, to the top of the stack. Last in, first out.
-
                                 This function is equivalent to append().
-
                                 
                                See also pop() and top().
-
-
                                T & TQValueStack::top ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Returns a reference to the top item of the stack or the item
-referenced by end() if no such item exists. Note that you must not
-change the value the end() iterator points to.
-
                                 This function is equivalent to last().
-
                                 
                                See also pop(), push(), and TQValueList::fromLast().
-
-
                                const T & TQValueStack::top () const
-
                                
-
-
                                 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                 Returns a reference to the top item of the stack or the item
-referenced by end() if no such item exists.
-
                                 This function is equivalent to last().
-
                                 
                                See also pop(), push(), and TQValueList::fromLast().
-
-
-
                                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                
-
-
                                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                TQt 3.3.8
                                
-
                                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qvaluevector-h.html b/doc/html/qvaluevector-h.html
index a29165390..70d71c386 100644
--- a/doc/html/qvaluevector-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qvaluevector-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qvaluevector.h Include File
+ntqvaluevector.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                TQValueVector Class Reference
                                
-
-
                                The TQValueVector class is a value-based template class that provides a dynamic array.
-More...
-
                                All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread support.
                                
-
                                #include <qvaluevector.h>
-
                                List of all member functions.
-
                                Public Members
                                
-
-
                                Detailed Description
                                
-
-
-The TQValueVector class is a value-based template class that provides a dynamic array.
-
                                 
-
-
-
-
-
                                 TQValueVector is a TQt implementation of an STL-like vector
-container. It can be used in your application if the standard vector is not available for your target platforms. TQValueVector is
-part of the TQt Template Library.
-
                                 TQValueVector<T> defines a template instance to create a vector
-of values that all have the class T. TQValueVector does not store
-pointers to the members of the vector; it holds a copy of every
-member. TQValueVector is said to be value based; in contrast,
-TQPtrList and TQDict are pointer based.
-
                                 TQValueVector contains and manages a collection of objects of type
-T and provides random access iterators that allow the contained
-objects to be addressed. TQValueVector owns the contained
-elements. For more relaxed ownership semantics, see TQPtrCollection
-and friends, which are pointer-based containers.
-
                                 TQValueVector provides good performance if you append or remove
-elements from the end of the vector. If you insert or remove
-elements from anywhere but the end, performance is very bad. The
-reason for this is that elements must to be copied into new
-positions.
-
                                 Some classes cannot be used within a TQValueVector: for example,
-all classes derived from TQObject and thus all classes that
-implement widgets. Only values can be used in a TQValueVector. To
-qualify as a value the class must provide:
-
                                  
-
                                •  a copy constructor;
-
                                •  an assignment operator;
-
                                •  a default constructor, i.e., a constructor that does not take any arguments.
-
                                
-
                                 Note that C++ defaults to field-by-field assignment operators and
-copy constructors if no explicit version is supplied. In many
-cases this is sufficient.
-
                                 TQValueVector uses an STL-like syntax to manipulate and address the
-objects it contains. See this document for
-more information.
-
                                 Example:
-
                                -    #include <qvaluevector.h>
-    #include <qstring.h>
-    #include <stdio.h>
-
-    class Employee
-    {
-    public:
-        Employee(): s(0) {}
-        Employee( const TQString& name, int salary )
-            : n( name ), s( salary )
-        { }
-
-        TQString name()   const          { return n; }
-        int     salary() const          { return s; }
-        void    setSalary( int salary ) { s = salary; }
-    private:
-        TQString n;
-        int     s;
-    };
-
-    int main()
-    {
-        typedef TQValueVector<Employee> EmployeeVector;
-        EmployeeVector vec( 3 );  // vector of 3 Employees
-
-        vec[0] = Employee( "Bill", 50000 );
-        vec[1] = Employee( "Steve", 80000 );
-        vec[2] = Employee( "Ron", 60000 );
-
-        Employee joe( "Joe", 50000 );
-        vec.push_back( joe );  // vector expands to accommodate 4 Employees
-        joe.setSalary( 70000 );
-        
-        EmployeeVector::iterator it;
-        for( it = vec.begin(); it != vec.end(); ++it )
-            printf( "%s earns %d\n", (*it).name().latin1(), (*it).salary() );
-
-        return 0;
-    }
-    
                                
- 
-
                                 Program output:
-
                                -        Bill earns 50000
-        Steve earns 80000
-        Ron earns 60000
-        Joe earns 50000
-    
                                
- 
-
                                 As you can see, the most recent change to Joe's salary did not
-affect the value in the vector because the vector created a copy
-of Joe's entry.
-
                                 Many TQt functions return const value vectors; to iterate over
-these you should make a copy and iterate over the copy.
-
                                 There are several ways to find items in the vector. The begin()
-and end() functions return iterators to the beginning and end of
-the vector. The advantage of getting an iterator is that you can
-move forward or backward from this position by
-incrementing/decrementing the iterator. The iterator returned by
-end() points to the element which is one past the last element in
-the container. The past-the-end iterator is still associated with
-the vector it belongs to, however it is not dereferenceable;
-operator*() will not return a well-defined value. If the vector is
-empty(), the iterator returned by begin() will equal the iterator
-returned by end().
-
                                 The fastest way to access an element of a vector is by using
-operator[]. This function provides random access and will return
-a reference to the element located at the specified index. Thus,
-you can access every element directly, in constant time, providing
-you know the location of the element. It is undefined to access
-an element that does not exist (your application will probably
-crash). For example:
-
                                 
                                -    TQValueVector<int> vec1;  // an empty vector
-    vec1[10] = 4;  // WARNING: undefined, probably a crash
-
-    TQValueVector<TQString> vec2(25); // initialize with 25 elements
-    vec2[10] = "Dave";  // OK
-    
                                
- 
-
                                 Whenever inserting, removing or referencing elements in a vector,
-always make sure you are referring to valid positions. For
-example:
-
                                 
                                -    void func( TQValueVector<int>& vec )
-    {
-        if ( vec.size() > 10 ) {
-            vec[9] = 99; // OK
-        }
-    };
-    
                                
- 
-
                                 The iterators provided by vector are random access iterators,
-therefore you can use them with many generic algorithms, for
-example, algorithms provided by the STL or the TQTL. 
-
                                 Another way to find an element in the vector is by using the
-std::find() or qFind() algorithms.
-For example:
-
                                 
                                -    TQValueVector<int> vec;
-    ...
-    TQValueVector<int>::const_iterator it = qFind( vec.begin(), vec.end(), 3 );
-    if ( it != vector.end() )
-        // 'it' points to the found element
-    
                                
- 
-
                                 It is safe to have multiple iterators on the vector at the same
-time. Since TQValueVector manages memory dynamically, all iterators
-can become invalid if a memory reallocation occurs. For example,
-if some member of the vector is removed, iterators that point to
-the removed element and to all following elements become
-invalidated. Inserting into the middle of the vector will
-invalidate all iterators. For convenience, the function back()
-returns a reference to the last element in the vector, and front()
-returns a reference to the first element. If the vector is
-empty(), both back() and front() have undefined behavior (your
-application will crash or do unpredictable things). Use back() and
-front() with caution, for example:
-
                                 
                                -    TQValueVector<int> vec( 3 );
-    vec.push_back( 1 );
-    vec.push_back( 2 );
-    vec.push_back( 3 );
-    ...
-    if ( !vec.empty() ) {
-        // OK: modify the first element
-        int& i = vec.front();
-        i = 18;
-    }
-    ...
-    TQValueVector<double> dvec;
-    double d = dvec.back(); // undefined behavior
-    
                                
- 
-
                                 Because TQValueVector manages memory dynamically, it is recommended
-that you contruct a vector with an initial size. Inserting and
-removing elements happens fastest when:
-
                                  
-
                                •  Inserting or removing elements happens at the end() of the
-vector;
-
                                •  The vector does not need to allocate additional memory.
-
                                
-
                                 By creating a TQValueVector with a sufficiently large initial size,
-there will be less memory allocations. Do not use an initial size
-that is too big, since it will still take time to construct all
-the empty entries, and the extra space will be wasted if it is
-never used.
-
                                 Because TQValueVector is value-based there is no need to be careful
-about deleting elements in the vector. The vector holds its own
-copies and will free them if the corresponding member or the
-vector itself is deleted. You can force the vector to free all of
-its items with clear().
-
                                 TQValueVector is shared implicitly, which means it can be copied in
-constant time. If multiple TQValueVector instances share the same
-data and one needs to modify its contents, this modifying instance
-makes a copy and modifies its private copy; it thus does not
-affect the other instances. This is often called "copy on write".
-If a TQValueVector is being used in a multi-threaded program, you
-must protect all access to the vector. See TQMutex.
-
                                 There are several ways to insert elements into the vector. The
-push_back() function insert elements into the end of the vector,
-and is usually fastest. The insert() function can be used to add
-elements at specific positions within the vector.
-
                                 Items can be also be removed from the vector in several ways.
-There are several variants of the erase() function which removes a
-specific element, or range of elements, from the vector.
-
                                 Vectors can be also sorted with various STL algorithms , or it can
-be sorted using the TQt Template Library.
-For example with qHeapSort():
-
                                 Example:
-
                                -    TQValueVector<int> v( 4 );
-    v.push_back( 5 );
-    v.push_back( 8 );
-    v.push_back( 3 );
-    v.push_back( 4 );
-    qHeapSort( v );
-    
                                
- 
-
                                 TQValueVector stores its elements in contiguous memory. This means
-that you can use a TQValueVector in any situation that requires an
-array. 
-
                                See also TQt Template Library Classes, Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
-
-
                                Member Type Documentation
                                
-
                                TQValueVector::ConstIterator
                                 
-The vector's const iterator type. 
-
                                TQValueVector::Iterator
                                 
-The vector's iterator type. 
-
                                TQValueVector::ValueType
                                 
-The type of the object stored in the vector. 
-
                                TQValueVector::const_iterator
                                 
-The vector's const iterator type. 
-
                                TQValueVector::const_pointer
                                 
-The const pointer to T type. 
-
                                TQValueVector::const_reference
                                 
-The const reference to T type. 
-
                                TQValueVector::difference_type
                                 
-A signed integral type used to represent the distance between two iterators. 
-
                                TQValueVector::iterator
                                 
-The vector's iterator type. 
-
                                TQValueVector::pointer
                                 
-The pointer to T type. 
-
                                TQValueVector::reference
                                 
-The reference to T type. 
-
                                TQValueVector::size_type
                                 
-An unsigned integral type, used to represent various sizes. 
-
                                TQValueVector::value_type
                                 
-The type of the object stored in the vector. 
-
                                Member Function Documentation
                                
-
                                TQValueVector::TQValueVector ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Constructs an empty vector without any elements. To create a
-vector which reserves an initial amount of space for elements, use
-TQValueVector(size_type n). 
-
-
                                TQValueVector::TQValueVector ( const TQValueVector<T> & v )
-
                                
-
-
                                 Constructs a copy of v.
-
                                 This operation costs O(1) time because TQValueVector is implicitly shared.
-
                                 The first modification to the vector does takes O(n) time, because
-the elements must be copied.
-
-
                                TQValueVector::TQValueVector ( size_type n, const T & val = T ( ) )
-
                                
-
-
                                 Constructs a vector with an initial size of n elements. Each
-element is initialized with the value of val.
-
-
                                TQValueVector::TQValueVector ( std::vector<T> & v )
-
                                
-
-
                                 Constructs a copy of v.
-
-
                                TQValueVector::TQValueVector ( const std::vector<T> & v )
-
                                
-
-
                                 This operation costs O(n) time because v is copied.
-
-
                                TQValueVector::~TQValueVector ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Destroys the vector, destroying all elements and freeing the
-allocated memory. References to the values in the vector and all
-iterators of this vector become invalidated. Note that it is
-impossible for an iterator to check whether or not it is valid:
-TQValueVector is tuned for performance, not for error checking.
-
-
                                void TQValueVector::append ( const T & x )
-
                                
-
-
                                 Appends a copy of x to the end of the vector.
-
                                 
                                See also push_back() and insert().
-
-
                                reference TQValueVector::at ( size_type i, bool * ok = 0 )
-
                                
-
-
                                 Returns a reference to the element with index i. If ok is
-non-null, and the index i is out of range, *ok is set to
-FALSE and the returned reference is undefined. If the index i
-is within the range of the vector, and ok is non-null, *ok
-is set to TRUE and the returned reference is well defined.
-
-
                                const_reference TQValueVector::at ( size_type i, bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                                
-
-
                                 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                 Returns a const reference to the element with index i. If ok
-is non-null, and the index i is out of range, *ok is set to
-FALSE and the returned reference is undefined. If the index i
-is within the range of the vector, and ok is non-null, *ok
-is set to TRUE and the returned reference is well defined.
-
-
                                reference TQValueVector::back ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Returns a reference to the last element in the vector. If there is
-no last element, this function has undefined behavior. 
-
                                 
                                See also empty() and front().
-
-
                                const_reference TQValueVector::back () const
-
                                
-
-
                                 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                 Returns a const reference to the last element in the vector. If
-there is no last element, this function has undefined behavior. 
-
                                 
                                See also empty() and front().
-
-
                                iterator TQValueVector::begin ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Returns an iterator pointing to the beginning of the vector. If
-the vector is empty(), the returned iterator will equal end().
-
-
                                const_iterator TQValueVector::begin () const
-
                                
-
-
                                 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                 Returns a const iterator pointing to the beginning of the vector.
-If the vector is empty(), the returned iterator will equal end().
-
-
                                size_type TQValueVector::capacity () const
-
                                
-
-
                                 Returns the maximum number of elements that can be stored in the
-vector without forcing memory reallocation. If memory reallocation
-takes place, some or all iterators may become invalidated.
-
-
                                void TQValueVector::clear ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Removes all the elements from the vector.
-
-
                                const_iterator TQValueVector::constBegin () const
-
                                
-
-
                                 Returns a const iterator pointing to the beginning of the vector.
-If the vector is empty(), the returned iterator will equal end().
-
                                 
                                See also constEnd().
-
-
                                const_iterator TQValueVector::constEnd () const
-
                                
-
-
                                 Returns a const iterator pointing behind the last element of the
-vector.
-
                                 
                                See also constBegin().
-
-
                                size_type TQValueVector::count () const
-
                                
-
-
                                 Returns the number of items in the vector.
-
                                 
                                See also isEmpty().
-
-
                                bool TQValueVector::empty () const
-
                                
-
-
                                 Returns TRUE if the vector is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
-Equivalent to size()==0, only faster.
-
                                 This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent
-to isEmpty().
-
                                 
                                See also size().
-
-
                                iterator TQValueVector::end ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Returns an iterator pointing behind the last element of the
-vector.
-
-
                                const_iterator TQValueVector::end () const
-
                                
-
-
                                 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                 Returns a const iterator pointing behind the last element of the
-vector.
-
-
                                iterator TQValueVector::erase ( iterator pos )
-
                                
-
-
                                 Removes the element at position pos and returns the position of
-the next element.
-
-
                                iterator TQValueVector::erase ( iterator first, iterator last )
-
                                
-
-
                                 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                 Removes all elements from first up to but not including last
-and returns the position of the next element.
-
-
                                reference TQValueVector::first ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Returns a reference to the first item in the vector. If there is
-no first item, this function has undefined behavior.
-
                                 
                                See also empty() and last().
-
-
                                const_reference TQValueVector::first () const
-
                                
-
-
                                 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                 
-
                                reference TQValueVector::front ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Returns a reference to the first element in the vector. If there
-is no first element, this function has undefined behavior. 
-
                                 
                                See also empty() and back().
-
-
                                const_reference TQValueVector::front () const
-
                                
-
-
                                 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                 Returns a const reference to the first element in the vector. If
-there is no first element, this function has undefined behavior. 
-
                                 
                                See also empty() and back().
-
-
                                iterator TQValueVector::insert ( iterator pos, const T & x )
-
                                
-
-
                                 Inserts a copy of x at the position immediately before pos.
-
                                 
                                See also push_back().
-
-
                                iterator TQValueVector::insert ( iterator pos, size_type n, const T & x )
-
                                
-
-
                                 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                 Inserts n copies of x immediately before position x.
-
                                 
                                See also push_back().
-
-
                                bool TQValueVector::isEmpty () const
-
                                
-
-
                                 Returns TRUE if the vector is empty; returns FALSE otherwise.
-
                                 
                                See also count().
-
-
                                reference TQValueVector::last ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Returns a reference to the last item in the vector. If there is no
-last item, this function has undefined behavior.
-
                                 
                                See also empty() and first().
-
-
                                const_reference TQValueVector::last () const
-
                                
-
-
                                 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                 
-
                                TQValueVector<T> & TQValueVector::operator= ( const TQValueVector<T> & v )
-
                                
-
-
                                 Assigns v to this vector and returns a reference to this vector.
-
                                 All iterators of the current vector become invalidated by this
-operation. The cost of such an assignment is O(1) since
-TQValueVector is implicitly shared.
-
-
                                TQValueVector<T> & TQValueVector::operator= ( const std::vector<T> & v )
-
                                
-
-
                                 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                 Assigns v to this vector and returns a reference to this vector.
-
                                 All iterators of the current vector become invalidated by this
-operation. The cost of this assignment is O(n) since v is
-copied.
-
-
                                bool TQValueVector::operator== ( const TQValueVector<T> & x ) const
-
                                
-
-
                                 Returns TRUE if each element in this vector equals each
-corresponding element in x; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                bool TQValueVector::operator== ( const TQValueVector<T> & x )
-
                                
-
-
                                 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                 Returns TRUE if each element in this vector equals each
-corresponding element in x; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                reference TQValueVector::operator[] ( size_type i )
-
                                
-
-
                                 Returns a reference to the element at index i. If i is out
-of range, this function has undefined behavior.
-
                                 
                                See also at().
-
-
                                const_reference TQValueVector::operator[] ( size_type i ) const
-
                                
-
-
                                 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                 Returns a const reference to the element at index i. If i is
-out of range, this function has undefined behavior.
-
                                 
                                See also at().
-
-
                                void TQValueVector::pop_back ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Removes the last item from the vector.
-
                                 This function is provided for STL compatibility.
-
-
                                void TQValueVector::push_back ( const T & x )
-
                                
-
-
                                 Appends a copy of x to the end of the vector. This is the
-fastest way to add new elements.
-
                                 This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent
-to append().
-
                                 
                                See also insert().
-
-
                                void TQValueVector::reserve ( size_type n )
-
                                
-
-
                                 Increases the vector's capacity. If n is less than or equal to
-capacity(), nothing happens. Otherwise, additional memory is
-allocated so that capacity() will be increased to a value greater
-than or equal to n. All iterators will then become invalidated.
-Note that the vector's size() and the values of existing elements
-remain unchanged.
-
-
                                void TQValueVector::resize ( size_type n, const T & val = T ( ) )
-
                                
-
-
                                 Changes the size of the vector to n. If n is greater than
-the current size(), elements are added to the end and initialized
-with the value of val. If n is less than size(), elements
-are removed from the end. If n is equal to size() nothing
-happens.
-
-
                                size_type TQValueVector::size () const
-
                                
-
-
                                 Returns the number of elements in the vector.
-
                                 This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent
-to count().
-
                                 
                                See also empty().
-
-
-
                                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                
-
-
                                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                TQt 3.3.8
                                
-
                                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qvariant-h.html b/doc/html/qvariant-h.html
index 93f402b22..f25a6c9dd 100644
--- a/doc/html/qvariant-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qvariant-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qvariant.h Include File
+ntqvariant.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                TQVariant Class Reference
                                
-
-
                                The TQVariant class acts like a union for the most common TQt data types.
-More...
-
                                #include <qvariant.h>
-
                                List of all member functions.
-
                                Public Members
                                
-
-
                                Static Public Members
                                
-
-
                                Detailed Description
                                
-
-
-The TQVariant class acts like a union for the most common TQt data types.
-
                                 
-
-
-
                                 Because C++ forbids unions from including types that have
-non-default constructors or destructors, most interesting TQt
-classes cannot be used in unions. Without TQVariant, this would be
-a problem for TQObject::property() and for database work, etc.
-
                                 A TQVariant object holds a single value of a single type() at a
-time. (Some type()s are multi-valued, for example a string list.)
-You can find out what type, T, the variant holds, convert it to a
-different type using one of the asT() functions, e.g. asSize(),
-get its value using one of the toT() functions, e.g. toSize(), and
-check whether the type can be converted to a particular type using
-canCast().
-
                                 The methods named toT() (for any supported T, see the Type
-documentation for a list) are const. If you ask for the stored
-type, they return a copy of the stored object. If you ask for a
-type that can be generated from the stored type, toT() copies and
-converts and leaves the object itself unchanged. If you ask for a
-type that cannot be generated from the stored type, the result
-depends on the type (see the function documentation for details).
-
                                 Note that three data types supported by TQVariant are explicitly shared, namely TQImage, TQPointArray, and TQCString, and in these
-cases the toT() methods return a shallow copy. In almost all cases
-you must make a deep copy of the returned values before modifying
-them.
-
                                 The asT() functions are not const. They do conversion like the
-toT() methods, set the variant to hold the converted value, and
-return a reference to the new contents of the variant.
-
                                 Here is some example code to demonstrate the use of TQVariant:
-
                                 
                                -    TQDataStream out(...);
-    TQVariant v(123);          // The variant now contains an int
-    int x = v.toInt();        // x = 123
-    out << v;                 // Writes a type tag and an int to out
-    v = TQVariant("hello");    // The variant now contains a TQCString
-    v = TQVariant(tr("hello"));// The variant now contains a TQString
-    int y = v.toInt();        // y = 0 since v cannot be converted to an int
-    TQString s = v.toString(); // s = tr("hello")  (see TQObject::tr())
-    out << v;                 // Writes a type tag and a TQString to out
-    ...
-    TQDataStream in(...);      // (opening the previously written stream)
-    in >> v;                  // Reads an Int variant
-    int z = v.toInt();        // z = 123
-    qDebug("Type is %s",      // prints "Type is int"
-            v.typeName());
-    v.asInt() += 100;         // The variant now hold the value 223.
-    v = TQVariant( TQStringList() );
-    v.asStringList().append( "Hello" );
-    
                                
- 
-
                                 You can even store TQValueLists and
-TQMaps in a variant, so you can easily construct
-arbitrarily complex data structures of arbitrary types. This is
-very powerful and versatile, but may prove less memory and speed
-efficient than storing specific types in standard data structures.
-
                                 TQVariant also supports the notion of NULL values, where you have a
-defined type with no value set.
-
                                -    TQVariant x, y( TQString() ), z( TQString("") );
-    x.asInt();
-    // x.isNull() == TRUE, y.isNull() == TRUE, z.isNull() == FALSE
-    
                                
- 
-
                                 See the Collection Classes.
-
                                See also Miscellaneous Classes and Object Model.
-
-
                                Member Type Documentation
                                
-
                                TQVariant::Type
                                
-
-
                                 This enum type defines the types of variable that a TQVariant can
-contain.
-
                                 Note that TQt's definition of bool depends on the compiler.
-qglobal.h has the system-dependent definition of bool.
-
-
                                Member Function Documentation
                                
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ()
-
                                
-Constructs an invalid variant.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( bool val, int )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with a boolean value, val. The integer
-argument is a dummy, necessary for compatibility with some
-compilers.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( double val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with a floating point value, val.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( TQSizePolicy val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with a size policy value, val.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQVariant & p )
-
                                
-Constructs a copy of the variant, p, passed as the argument to
-this constructor. Usually this is a deep copy, but a shallow copy
-is made if the stored data type is explicitly shared, as e.g.
-TQImage is.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( TQDataStream & s )
-
                                
-Reads the variant from the data stream, s.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQString & val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with a string value, val.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQCString & val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with a C-string value, val.
-
                                 If you want to modify the TQCString after you've passed it to this
-constructor, we recommend passing a deep copy (see
-TQCString::copy()).
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( const char * val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with a C-string value of val if val
-is non-null. The variant creates a deep copy of val.
-
                                 If val is null, the resulting variant has type Invalid.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQStringList & val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with a string list value, val.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQFont & val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with a font value, val.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQPixmap & val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with a pixmap value, val.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQImage & val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with an image value, val.
-
                                 Because TQImage is explicitly shared, you may need to pass a deep copy to the variant using TQImage::copy(), e.g. if you intend
-changing the image you've passed later on.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQBrush & val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with a brush value, val.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQPoint & val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with a point value, val.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQRect & val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with a rect value, val.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQSize & val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with a size value, val.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQColor & val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with a color value, val.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQPalette & val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with a color palette value, val.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQColorGroup & val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with a color group value, val.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQIconSet & val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with an icon set value, val.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQPointArray & val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with a point array value, val.
-
                                 Because TQPointArray is explicitly shared, you may need to pass a
-deep copy to the variant using TQPointArray::copy(), e.g. if you
-intend changing the point array you've passed later on.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQRegion & val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with a region value, val.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQBitmap & val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with a bitmap value, val.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQCursor & val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with a cursor value, val.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQDate & val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with a date value, val.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQTime & val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with a time value, val.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQDateTime & val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with a date/time value, val.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQByteArray & val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with a bytearray value, val.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQBitArray & val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with a bitarray value, val.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQKeySequence & val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with a key sequence value, val.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQPen & val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with a pen value, val.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQValueList<TQVariant> & val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with a list value, val.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( const TQMap<TQString, TQVariant> & val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with a map of TQVariants, val.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( int val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with an integer value, val.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( uint val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with an unsigned integer value, val.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( Q_LLONG val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with a long long integer value, val.
-
-
                                TQVariant::TQVariant ( Q_ULLONG val )
-
                                
-Constructs a new variant with an unsigned long long integer value, val.
-
-
                                TQVariant::~TQVariant ()
-
                                
-Destroys the TQVariant and the contained object.
-
                                 Note that subclasses that reimplement clear() should reimplement
-the destructor to call clear(). This destructor calls clear(), but
-because it is the destructor, TQVariant::clear() is called rather
-than a subclass's clear().
-
-
                                TQBitArray & TQVariant::asBitArray ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQBitArray value. If that is
-not possible then the variant is set to an empty bitarray.
-
                                 Returns a reference to the stored bitarray.
-
                                 
                                See also toBitArray().
-
-
                                TQBitmap & TQVariant::asBitmap ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Tries to convert the variant to hold a bitmap value. If that is
-not possible the variant is set to a null bitmap.
-
                                 Returns a reference to the stored bitmap.
-
                                 
                                See also toBitmap().
-
-
                                bool & TQVariant::asBool ()
-
                                
-Returns the variant's value as bool reference.
-
-
                                TQBrush & TQVariant::asBrush ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Tries to convert the variant to hold a brush value. If that is not
-possible the variant is set to a default black brush.
-
                                 Returns a reference to the stored brush.
-
                                 
                                See also toBrush().
-
-
                                TQByteArray & TQVariant::asByteArray ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQByteArray value. If that
-is not possible then the variant is set to an empty bytearray.
-
                                 Returns a reference to the stored bytearray.
-
                                 
                                See also toByteArray().
-
-
                                TQCString & TQVariant::asCString ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Tries to convert the variant to hold a string value. If that is
-not possible the variant is set to an empty string.
-
                                 Returns a reference to the stored string.
-
                                 
                                See also toCString().
-
-
                                TQColor & TQVariant::asColor ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQColor value. If that is
-not possible the variant is set to an invalid color.
-
                                 Returns a reference to the stored color.
-
                                 
                                See also toColor() and TQColor::isValid().
-
-
                                TQColorGroup & TQVariant::asColorGroup ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQColorGroup value. If that
-is not possible the variant is set to a color group of all black
-colors.
-
                                 Returns a reference to the stored color group.
-
                                 
                                See also toColorGroup().
-
-
                                TQCursor & TQVariant::asCursor ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQCursor value. If that is
-not possible the variant is set to a default arrow cursor.
-
                                 Returns a reference to the stored cursor.
-
                                 
                                See also toCursor().
-
-
                                TQDate & TQVariant::asDate ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQDate value. If that is not
-possible then the variant is set to an invalid date.
-
                                 Returns a reference to the stored date.
-
                                 
                                See also toDate().
-
-
                                TQDateTime & TQVariant::asDateTime ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQDateTime value. If that is
-not possible then the variant is set to an invalid date/time.
-
                                 Returns a reference to the stored date/time.
-
                                 
                                See also toDateTime().
-
-
                                double & TQVariant::asDouble ()
-
                                
-Returns the variant's value as double reference.
-
-
                                TQFont & TQVariant::asFont ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQFont. If that is not
-possible the variant is set to the application's default font.
-
                                 Returns a reference to the stored font.
-
                                 
                                See also toFont().
-
-
                                TQIconSet & TQVariant::asIconSet ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQIconSet value. If that is
-not possible the variant is set to an empty iconset.
-
                                 Returns a reference to the stored iconset.
-
                                 
                                See also toIconSet().
-
-
                                TQImage & TQVariant::asImage ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Tries to convert the variant to hold an image value. If that is
-not possible the variant is set to a null image.
-
                                 Returns a reference to the stored image.
-
                                 
                                See also toImage().
-
-
                                int & TQVariant::asInt ()
-
                                
-Returns the variant's value as int reference.
-
-
                                TQKeySequence & TQVariant::asKeySequence ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQKeySequence value. If that
-is not possible then the variant is set to an empty key sequence.
-
                                 Returns a reference to the stored key sequence.
-
                                 
                                See also toKeySequence().
-
-
                                TQValueList<TQVariant> & TQVariant::asList ()
-
                                
-Returns the variant's value as variant list reference.
-
                                 Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
-over a copy, e.g.
-
                                -    TQValueList<TQVariant> list = myVariant.asList();
-    TQValueList<TQVariant>::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    while( it != list.end() ) {
-        myProcessing( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-    
                                
- 
-
-
                                Q_LLONG & TQVariant::asLongLong ()
-
                                
-Returns the variant's value as long long reference.
-
-
                                TQMap<TQString, TQVariant> & TQVariant::asMap ()
-
                                
-Returns the variant's value as variant map reference.
-
                                 Note that if you want to iterate over the map, you should iterate
-over a copy, e.g.
-
                                -    TQMap<TQString, TQVariant> map = myVariant.asMap();
-    TQMap<TQString, TQVariant>::Iterator it = map.begin();
-    while( it != map.end() ) {
-        myProcessing( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-    
                                
- 
-
-
                                TQPalette & TQVariant::asPalette ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQPalette value. If that is
-not possible the variant is set to a palette of black colors.
-
                                 Returns a reference to the stored palette.
-
                                 
                                See also toString().
-
-
                                TQPen & TQVariant::asPen ()
-
                                 
-
                                 Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQPen value. If that
-is not possible then the variant is set to an empty pen.
-
                                 Returns a reference to the stored pen.
-
                                 
                                See also toPen().
-
-
                                TQPixmap & TQVariant::asPixmap ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Tries to convert the variant to hold a pixmap value. If that is
-not possible the variant is set to a null pixmap.
-
                                 Returns a reference to the stored pixmap.
-
                                 
                                See also toPixmap().
-
-
                                TQPoint & TQVariant::asPoint ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Tries to convert the variant to hold a point value. If that is not
-possible the variant is set to a (0, 0) point.
-
                                 Returns a reference to the stored point.
-
                                 
                                See also toPoint().
-
-
                                TQPointArray & TQVariant::asPointArray ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQPointArray value. If that
-is not possible the variant is set to an empty point array.
-
                                 Returns a reference to the stored point array.
-
                                 
                                See also toPointArray().
-
-
                                TQRect & TQVariant::asRect ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Tries to convert the variant to hold a rectangle value. If that is
-not possible the variant is set to an empty rectangle.
-
                                 Returns a reference to the stored rectangle.
-
                                 
                                See also toRect().
-
-
                                TQRegion & TQVariant::asRegion ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQRegion value. If that is
-not possible the variant is set to a null region.
-
                                 Returns a reference to the stored region.
-
                                 
                                See also toRegion().
-
-
                                TQSize & TQVariant::asSize ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQSize value. If that is not
-possible the variant is set to an invalid size.
-
                                 Returns a reference to the stored size.
-
                                 
                                See also toSize() and TQSize::isValid().
-
-
                                TQSizePolicy & TQVariant::asSizePolicy ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQSizePolicy value. If that
-fails, the variant is set to an arbitrary (valid) size policy.
-
-
                                TQString & TQVariant::asString ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Tries to convert the variant to hold a string value. If that is
-not possible the variant is set to an empty string.
-
                                 Returns a reference to the stored string.
-
                                 
                                See also toString().
-
-
                                TQStringList & TQVariant::asStringList ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQStringList value. If that
-is not possible the variant is set to an empty string list.
-
                                 Returns a reference to the stored string list.
-
                                 Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should
-iterate over a copy, e.g.
-
                                -    TQStringList list = myVariant.asStringList();
-    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    while( it != list.end() ) {
-        myProcessing( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-    
                                
- 
-
                                 
                                See also toStringList().
-
-
                                TQTime & TQVariant::asTime ()
-
                                
-
-
                                 Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQTime value. If that is not
-possible then the variant is set to an invalid time.
-
                                 Returns a reference to the stored time.
-
                                 
                                See also toTime().
-
-
                                uint & TQVariant::asUInt ()
-
                                
-Returns the variant's value as unsigned int reference.
-
-
                                Q_ULLONG & TQVariant::asULongLong ()
-
                                
-Returns the variant's value as unsigned long long reference.
-
-
                                bool TQVariant::canCast ( Type t ) const
-
                                
-Returns TRUE if the variant's type can be cast to the requested
-type, t. Such casting is done automatically when calling the
-toInt(), toBool(), ... or asInt(), asBool(), ... methods.
-
                                 The following casts are done automatically:
-
                                
-
                                 Type Automatically Cast To
-
                                 Bool Double, Int, UInt, LongLong, ULongLong, String, CString, ByteArray
-
                                 Color String. CString. ByteArray
-
                                 Date String, CString, ByteArray, DateTime
-
                                 DateTime String, CString, ByteArray, Date, Time
-
                                 Double String, CString, ByteArray, Int, Bool, UInt, LongLong, ULongLong
-
                                 Font String, CString, ByteArray
-
                                 Int String, CString, ByteArray, Double, Bool, UInt, LongLong, ULongLong, KeySequence
-
                                 LongLong String, CString, ByteArray, Double, Bool, UInt, LongLong, ULongLong, KeySequence
-
                                 ULongLong String, CString, ByteArray, Double, Bool, UInt, LongLong, ULongLong, KeySequence
-
                                 List StringList (if the list contains only strings or
-something that can be cast to a string)
-
                                 String CString, ByteArray, CString, Int, UInt, Bool, Double, Date,
-Time, DateTime, KeySequence, Font, Color
-
                                 CString String, ByteArray, Int, UInt, Bool, Double, Date, ULongLong, LongLong
-
                                 ByteArray String, CString, Int, UInt, Bool, Double, Date, ULongLong, LongLong
-
                                 StringList List
-
                                 Time String
-
                                 Int String, CString, ByteArray, Double, Bool, UInt, LongLong, ULongLong, KeySequence
-
                                 KeySequence String, CString, ByteArray, Int, UInt, LongLong, ULongLong
-
                                
-
-
                                bool TQVariant::cast ( Type t )
-
                                
-Casts the variant to the requested type. If the cast cannot be
-done, the variant is set to the default value of the requested
-type (e.g. an empty string if the requested type t is
-TQVariant::String, an empty point array if the requested type t
-is TQVariant::PointArray, etc). Returns TRUE if the current type of
-the variant was successfully cast; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                                 
                                See also canCast().
-
-
                                void TQVariant::clear ()
-
                                
-Convert this variant to type Invalid and free up any resources
-used.
-
-
                                bool TQVariant::isNull () const
-
                                
-Returns TRUE if this is a NULL variant, FALSE otherwise.
-
-
                                bool TQVariant::isValid () const
-
                                
-
-
                                 Returns TRUE if the storage type of this variant is not
-TQVariant::Invalid; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                TQValueListConstIterator<TQVariant> TQVariant::listBegin () const
-
                                
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                 Returns an iterator to the first item in the list if the variant's
-type is appropriate; otherwise returns a null iterator.
-
-
                                TQValueListConstIterator<TQVariant> TQVariant::listEnd () const
-
                                
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                 Returns the end iterator for the list if the variant's type is
-appropriate; otherwise returns a null iterator.
-
-
                                TQMapConstIterator<TQString, TQVariant> TQVariant::mapBegin () const
-
                                
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                 Returns an iterator to the first item in the map, if the variant's
-type is appropriate; otherwise returns a null iterator.
-
-
                                TQMapConstIterator<TQString, TQVariant> TQVariant::mapEnd () const
-
                                
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                 Returns the end iterator for the map, if the variant's type is
-appropriate; otherwise returns a null iterator.
-
-
                                TQMapConstIterator<TQString, TQVariant> TQVariant::mapFind ( const TQString & key ) const
-
                                
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                 Returns an iterator to the item in the map with key as key, if
-the variant's type is appropriate and key is a valid key;
-otherwise returns a null iterator.
-
-
                                Type TQVariant::nameToType ( const char * name ) [static]
-
                                
-Converts the string representation of the storage type given in name, to its enum representation.
-
                                 If the string representation cannot be converted to any enum
-representation, the variant is set to Invalid.
-
-
                                bool TQVariant::operator!= ( const TQVariant & v ) const
-
                                
-Compares this TQVariant with v and returns TRUE if they are not
-equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                TQVariant & TQVariant::operator= ( const TQVariant & variant )
-
                                
-Assigns the value of the variant variant to this variant.
-
                                 This is a deep copy of the variant, but note that if the variant
-holds an explicitly shared type such as TQImage, a shallow copy is
-performed.
-
-
                                bool TQVariant::operator== ( const TQVariant & v ) const
-
                                
-Compares this TQVariant with v and returns TRUE if they are
-equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                                TQValueListConstIterator<TQString> TQVariant::stringListBegin () const
-
                                
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                 Returns an iterator to the first string in the list if the
-variant's type is StringList; otherwise returns a null iterator.
-
-
                                TQValueListConstIterator<TQString> TQVariant::stringListEnd () const
-
                                
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                                 Returns the end iterator for the list if the variant's type is
-StringList; otherwise returns a null iterator.
-
-
                                const TQBitArray TQVariant::toBitArray () const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as a TQBitArray if the variant has type()
-BitArray; otherwise returns an empty bitarray.
-
                                 
                                See also asBitArray().
-
-
                                const TQBitmap TQVariant::toBitmap () const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as a TQBitmap if the variant has type() Bitmap;
-otherwise returns a null TQBitmap.
-
                                 
                                See also asBitmap().
-
-
                                bool TQVariant::toBool () const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as a bool if the variant can be cast to Bool;
-otherWise returns FALSE.
-
                                 Returns TRUE if the variant has a numeric type and its value is
-non-zero, or if the variant has type String, ByteArray or CString
-and its lower-case content is not empty, "0" or "false"; otherwise
-returns FALSE.
-
                                 
                                See also asBool() and canCast().
-
-
                                const TQBrush TQVariant::toBrush () const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as a TQBrush if the variant has type() Brush;
-otherwise returns a default brush (with all black colors).
-
                                 
                                See also asBrush().
-
-
                                const TQByteArray TQVariant::toByteArray () const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as a TQByteArray if the variant can be cast to
-a ByteArray; otherwise returns an empty bytearray.
-
                                 
                                See also asByteArray() and canCast().
-
-
                                const TQCString TQVariant::toCString () const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as a TQCString if the variant can be cast to a
-CString; otherwise returns 0.
-
                                 
                                See also asCString() and canCast().
-
-
                                const TQColor TQVariant::toColor () const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as a TQColor if the variant can be cast to Color;
-otherwise returns an invalid color.
-
                                 
                                See also asColor() and canCast().
-
-
                                const TQColorGroup TQVariant::toColorGroup () const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as a TQColorGroup if the variant has type()
-ColorGroup; otherwise returns a completely black color group.
-
                                 
                                See also asColorGroup().
-
-
                                const TQCursor TQVariant::toCursor () const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as a TQCursor if the variant has type() Cursor;
-otherwise returns the default arrow cursor.
-
                                 
                                See also asCursor().
-
-
                                const TQDate TQVariant::toDate () const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as a TQDate if the variant can be cast to Date;
-otherwise returns an invalid date.
-
                                 Note that if the type() is String, CString or ByteArray an invalid
-date will be returned if the string cannot be parsed as a
-TQt::ISODate format date.
-
                                 
                                See also asDate() and canCast().
-
-
                                const TQDateTime TQVariant::toDateTime () const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as a TQDateTime if the variant can be cast to
-DateTime; otherwise returns an invalid TQDateTime.
-
                                 Note that if the type() is String, CString or ByteArray an invalid
-TQDateTime will be returned if the string cannot be parsed as a
-TQt::ISODate format date/time.
-
                                 
                                See also asDateTime().
-
-
                                double TQVariant::toDouble ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as a double if the variant can be cast to
-Double; otherwise returns 0.0.
-
                                 If ok is non-null: *ok is set to TRUE if the value could be
-converted to a double; otherwise *ok is set to FALSE.
-
                                 
                                See also asDouble() and canCast().
-
-
                                const TQFont TQVariant::toFont () const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as a TQFont if the variant can be cast to Font;
-otherwise returns the application's default font.
-
                                 
                                See also asFont() and canCast().
-
-
                                const TQIconSet TQVariant::toIconSet () const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as a TQIconSet if the variant has type()
-IconSet; otherwise returns an icon set of null pixmaps.
-
                                 
                                See also asIconSet().
-
-
                                const TQImage TQVariant::toImage () const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as a TQImage if the variant has type() Image;
-otherwise returns a null image.
-
                                 
                                See also asImage().
-
-
                                int TQVariant::toInt ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as an int if the variant can be cast to Int;
-otherwise returns 0.
-
                                 If ok is non-null: *ok is set to TRUE if the value could be
-converted to an int; otherwise *ok is set to FALSE.
-
                                 
                                See also asInt() and canCast().
-
-
                                const TQKeySequence TQVariant::toKeySequence () const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as a TQKeySequence if the variant can be cast
-to a KeySequence; otherwise returns an empty key sequence.
-
                                 
                                See also asKeySequence() and canCast().
-
-
                                const TQValueList<TQVariant> TQVariant::toList () const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as a TQValueList if the variant has
-type() List or StringList; otherwise returns an empty list.
-
                                 Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
-over a copy, e.g.
-
                                -    TQValueList<TQVariant> list = myVariant.toList();
-    TQValueList<TQVariant>::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    while( it != list.end() ) {
-        myProcessing( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-    
                                
- 
-
                                 
                                See also asList().
-
-
                                Q_LLONG TQVariant::toLongLong ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as a long long int if the variant can be cast
-to LongLong; otherwise returns 0.
-
                                 If ok is non-null: *ok is set to TRUE if the value could be
-converted to an int; otherwise *ok is set to FALSE.
-
                                 
                                See also asLongLong() and canCast().
-
-
                                const TQMap<TQString, TQVariant> TQVariant::toMap () const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as a TQMap if the variant has
-type() Map; otherwise returns an empty map.
-
                                 Note that if you want to iterate over the map, you should iterate
-over a copy, e.g.
-
                                -    TQMap<TQString, TQVariant> map = myVariant.toMap();
-    TQMap<TQString, TQVariant>::Iterator it = map.begin();
-    while( it != map.end() ) {
-        myProcessing( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-    
                                
- 
-
                                 
                                See also asMap().
-
-
                                const TQPalette TQVariant::toPalette () const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as a TQPalette if the variant has type()
-Palette; otherwise returns a completely black palette.
-
                                 
                                See also asPalette().
-
-
                                const TQPen TQVariant::toPen () const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as a TQPen if the variant has type()
-Pen; otherwise returns an empty TQPen.
-
                                 
                                See also asPen().
-
-
                                const TQPixmap TQVariant::toPixmap () const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as a TQPixmap if the variant has type() Pixmap;
-otherwise returns a null pixmap.
-
                                 
                                See also asPixmap().
-
-
                                const TQPoint TQVariant::toPoint () const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as a TQPoint if the variant has type() Point;
-otherwise returns a point (0, 0).
-
                                 
                                See also asPoint().
-
-
                                const TQPointArray TQVariant::toPointArray () const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as a TQPointArray if the variant has type()
-PointArray; otherwise returns an empty TQPointArray.
-
                                 
                                See also asPointArray().
-
-
                                const TQRect TQVariant::toRect () const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as a TQRect if the variant has type() Rect;
-otherwise returns an empty rectangle.
-
                                 
                                See also asRect().
-
-
                                const TQRegion TQVariant::toRegion () const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as a TQRegion if the variant has type() Region;
-otherwise returns an empty TQRegion.
-
                                 
                                See also asRegion().
-
-
                                const TQSize TQVariant::toSize () const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as a TQSize if the variant has type() Size;
-otherwise returns an invalid size.
-
                                 
                                See also asSize().
-
-
                                TQSizePolicy TQVariant::toSizePolicy () const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as a TQSizePolicy if the variant has type()
-SizePolicy; otherwise returns an undefined (but legal) size
-policy.
-
-
                                const TQString TQVariant::toString () const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as a TQString if the variant can be cast to
-String, otherwise returns TQString::null.
-
                                 
                                See also asString() and canCast().
-
-
                                const TQStringList TQVariant::toStringList () const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as a TQStringList if the variant has type()
-StringList or List of a type that can be converted to TQString;
-otherwise returns an empty list.
-
                                 Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
-over a copy, e.g.
-
                                -    TQStringList list = myVariant.toStringList();
-    TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    while( it != list.end() ) {
-        myProcessing( *it );
-        ++it;
-    }
-    
                                
- 
-
                                 
                                See also asStringList().
-
-
                                const TQTime TQVariant::toTime () const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as a TQTime if the variant can be cast to Time;
-otherwise returns an invalid date.
-
                                 Note that if the type() is String, CString or ByteArray an invalid
-time will be returned if the string cannot be parsed as a
-TQt::ISODate format time.
-
                                 
                                See also asTime().
-
-
                                uint TQVariant::toUInt ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as an unsigned int if the variant can be cast
-to UInt; otherwise returns 0.
-
                                 If ok is non-null: *ok is set to TRUE if the value could be
-converted to an unsigned int; otherwise *ok is set to FALSE.
-
                                 
                                See also asUInt() and canCast().
-
-
                                Q_ULLONG TQVariant::toULongLong ( bool * ok = 0 ) const
-
                                
-Returns the variant as as an unsigned long long int if the variant
-can be cast to ULongLong; otherwise returns 0.
-
                                 If ok is non-null: *ok is set to TRUE if the value could be
-converted to an int; otherwise *ok is set to FALSE.
-
                                 
                                See also asULongLong() and canCast().
-
-
                                Type TQVariant::type () const
-
                                
-
-
                                 Returns the storage type of the value stored in the variant.
-Usually it's best to test with canCast() whether the variant can
-deliver the data type you are interested in.
-
-
                                const char * TQVariant::typeName () const
-
                                
-Returns the name of the type stored in the variant. The returned
-strings describe the C++ datatype used to store the data: for
-example, "TQFont", "TQString", or "TQValueList". An Invalid
-variant returns 0.
-
-
                                const char * TQVariant::typeToName ( Type typ ) [static]
-
                                
-Converts the enum representation of the storage type, typ, to
-its string representation.
-
-
-
                                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                
-
-
                                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                TQt 3.3.8
                                
-
                                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qvbox-h.html b/doc/html/qvbox-h.html
index 9aae8df7c..63f5552d9 100644
--- a/doc/html/qvbox-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qvbox-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qvbox.h Include File
+ntqvbox.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                TQVBox Class Reference
                                
-
-
                                The TQVBox widget provides vertical geometry management of
-its child widgets.
-More...
-
                                #include <qvbox.h>
-
                                Inherits TQHBox.
-
                                List of all member functions.
-
                                Public Members
                                
-
                                  
-
                                • TQVBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
                                  • 
-
                                
-
                                Detailed Description
                                
-
-
-The TQVBox widget provides vertical geometry management of
-its child widgets.
-
                                 
-
-
-
                                 All its child widgets will be placed vertically and sized
-according to their sizeHint()s.
-
                                 
                                TQVBox
                                 
-
                                 
                                See also TQHBox, Widget Appearance and Style, Layout Management, and Organizers.
-
-
                                Member Function Documentation
                                
-
                                TQVBox::TQVBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
-
                                
-Constructs a vbox widget called name with parent parent and
-widget flags f.
-
-
-
                                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                
-
-
                                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                TQt 3.3.8
                                
-
                                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qvboxlayout-members.html b/doc/html/qvboxlayout-members.html
index 063fc26ff..a301fd910 100644
--- a/doc/html/qvboxlayout-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qvboxlayout-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -37,9 +37,9 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qvboxlayout.html b/doc/html/qvboxlayout.html
index 0db8acff7..904e061e3 100644
--- a/doc/html/qvboxlayout.html
+++ b/doc/html/qvboxlayout.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                                The TQVBoxLayout class lines up widgets vertically.
 More...
-
                                #include <qlayout.h>
+
                                #include <ntqlayout.h>
 
                                Inherits TQBoxLayout.
 
                                List of all member functions.
 
                                Public Members
                                
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
                                 
                                See also TQHBoxLayout, TQGridLayout, the Layout overview, Widget Appearance and Style, and Layout Management.
 
 
                                Member Function Documentation
                                
-
                                TQVBoxLayout::TQVBoxLayout ( TQWidget * parent, int margin = 0, int spacing = -1, const char * name = 0 )
+
                                TQVBoxLayout::TQVBoxLayout ( TQWidget * parent, int margin = 0, int spacing = -1, const char * name = 0 )
 
                                
 Constructs a new top-level vertical box called name, with
 parent parent.
@@ -72,13 +72,13 @@ widget and its managed children. The spacing is the default
 number of pixels between neighboring children. If spacing is -1
 the value of margin is used for spacing.
 
-
                                TQVBoxLayout::TQVBoxLayout ( TQLayout * parentLayout, int spacing = -1, const char * name = 0 )
+
                                TQVBoxLayout::TQVBoxLayout ( TQLayout * parentLayout, int spacing = -1, const char * name = 0 )
 
                                
 Constructs a new vertical box called name name and adds it to
 parentLayout.
 
                                 The spacing is the default number of pixels between neighboring
 children. If spacing is -1, this TQVBoxLayout will inherit its
-parent's spacing().
+parent's spacing().
 
 
                                TQVBoxLayout::TQVBoxLayout ( int spacing = -1, const char * name = 0 )
 
                                
@@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Constructs a new vertical box called name name. You must add
 it to another layout.
 
                                 The spacing is the default number of pixels between neighboring
 children. If spacing is -1, this TQVBoxLayout will inherit its
-parent's spacing().
+parent's spacing().
 
 
                                TQVBoxLayout::~TQVBoxLayout ()
 
                                
diff --git a/doc/html/qvbuttongroup-h.html b/doc/html/qvbuttongroup-h.html
index c2312bb1a..1ba6d29b3 100644
--- a/doc/html/qvbuttongroup-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qvbuttongroup-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qvbuttongroup.h Include File
+ntqvbuttongroup.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                TQVButtonGroup Class Reference
                                
-
-
                                The TQVButtonGroup widget organizes TQButton widgets in a
-vertical column.
-More...
-
                                #include <qvbuttongroup.h>
-
                                Inherits TQButtonGroup.
-
                                List of all member functions.
-
                                Public Members
                                
-
-
                                Detailed Description
                                
-
-
-The TQVButtonGroup widget organizes TQButton widgets in a
-vertical column.
-
                                 
-
-
-
                                 TQVButtonGroup is a convenience class that offers a thin layer on top
-of TQButtonGroup. Think of it as a TQVBox that offers a frame with a
-title and is specifically designed for buttons.
-
                                 
                                TQButtonGroup
                                 
-
                                 
                                See also TQHButtonGroup, Widget Appearance and Style, Layout Management, and Organizers.
-
-
                                Member Function Documentation
                                
-
                                TQVButtonGroup::TQVButtonGroup ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                
-Constructs a vertical button group with no title.
-
                                 The parent and name arguments are passed on to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
-
                                TQVButtonGroup::TQVButtonGroup ( const TQString & title, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                
-Constructs a vertical button group with the title title.
-
                                 The parent and name arguments are passed on to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
-
                                TQVButtonGroup::~TQVButtonGroup ()
-
                                
-Destroys the vertical button group, deleting its child widgets.
-
-
-
                                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                
-
-
                                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                TQt 3.3.8
                                
-
                                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qvector.html b/doc/html/qvector.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 3ad0f2e41..000000000
--- a/doc/html/qvector.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
-
-
-TQVector Class Reference (obsolete)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                TQVector Class Reference (obsolete)
                                
-
- 
-
                                 
                                -#include <qvector.h>
                                
- 
-
                                 The TQVector class has been renamed  TQPtrVector  in TQt 3.0.
-
-
-
                                
-
-
                                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                TQt 3.3.8
                                
-
                                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qvgroupbox-h.html b/doc/html/qvgroupbox-h.html
index a8135997c..5caf55271 100644
--- a/doc/html/qvgroupbox-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qvgroupbox-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qvgroupbox.h Include File
+ntqvgroupbox.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                TQVGroupBox Class Reference
                                
-
-
                                The TQVGroupBox widget organizes a group of widgets in a
-vertical column.
-More...
-
                                #include <qvgroupbox.h>
-
                                Inherits TQGroupBox.
-
                                List of all member functions.
-
                                Public Members
                                
-
                                  
-
                                • TQVGroupBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
                                  • 
-
                                • TQVGroupBox ( const TQString & title, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
                                  • 
-
                                • ~TQVGroupBox ()
                                  • 
-
                                
-
                                Detailed Description
                                
-
-
-The TQVGroupBox widget organizes a group of widgets in a
-vertical column.
-
                                 
-
-
-
                                 TQVGroupBox is a convenience class that offers a thin layer on top of
-TQGroupBox. Think of it as a TQVBox that offers a frame with a title.
-
                                 
                                Group Boxes
                                 
-
                                 
                                See also TQHGroupBox, Widget Appearance and Style, Layout Management, and Organizers.
-
-
                                Member Function Documentation
                                
-
                                TQVGroupBox::TQVGroupBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                
-Constructs a vertical group box with no title.
-
                                 The parent and name arguments are passed on to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
-
                                TQVGroupBox::TQVGroupBox ( const TQString & title, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                                
-Constructs a vertical group box with the title title.
-
                                 The parent and name arguments are passed on to the TQWidget
-constructor.
-
-
                                TQVGroupBox::~TQVGroupBox ()
-
                                
-Destroys the vertical group box, deleting its child widgets.
-
-
-
                                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                
-
-
                                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                TQt 3.3.8
                                
-
                                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qwaitcondition-h.html b/doc/html/qwaitcondition-h.html
index 759369fd7..e84a36242 100644
--- a/doc/html/qwaitcondition-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qwaitcondition-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qwaitcondition.h Include File
+ntqwaitcondition.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                                TQWaitCondition Class Reference
                                
-
-
                                The TQWaitCondition class allows waiting/waking for conditions between threads.
-More...
-
                                All the functions in this class are thread-safe when TQt is built with thread support.
                                
-
                                #include <qwaitcondition.h>
-
                                List of all member functions.
-
                                Public Members
                                
-
-
                                Detailed Description
                                
-
-
-
-The TQWaitCondition class allows waiting/waking for conditions between threads.
-
                                 
-
-
                                 TQWaitConditions allow a thread to tell other threads that some
-sort of condition has been met; one or many threads can block
-waiting for a TQWaitCondition to set a condition with wakeOne() or
-wakeAll(). Use wakeOne() to wake one randomly selected event or
-wakeAll() to wake them all. For example, say we have three tasks
-that should be performed every time the user presses a key; each
-task could be split into a thread, each of which would have a
-run() body like this:
-
                                 
                                -    TQWaitCondition key_pressed;
-
-    for (;;) {
-        key_pressed.wait(); // This is a TQWaitCondition global variable
-        // Key was pressed, do something interesting
-        do_something();
-    }
-    
                                
- 
-
                                 A fourth thread would read key presses and wake the other three
-threads up every time it receives one, like this:
-
                                 
                                -    TQWaitCondition key_pressed;
-
-    for (;;) {
-        getchar();
-        // Causes any thread in key_pressed.wait() to return from
-        // that method and continue processing
-        key_pressed.wakeAll();
-    }
-    
                                
- 
-
                                 Note that the order the three threads are woken up in is
-undefined, and that if some or all of the threads are still in
-do_something() when the key is pressed, they won't be woken up
-(since they're not waiting on the condition variable) and so the
-task will not be performed for that key press. This can be
-avoided by, for example, doing something like this:
-
                                 
                                -    TQMutex mymutex;
-    TQWaitCondition key_pressed;
-    int mycount=0;
-
-    // Worker thread code
-    for (;;) {
-        key_pressed.wait(); // This is a TQWaitCondition global variable
-        mymutex.lock();
-        mycount++;
-        mymutex.unlock();
-        do_something();
-        mymutex.lock();
-        mycount--;
-        mymutex.unlock();
-    }
-
-    // Key reading thread code
-    for (;;) {
-        getchar();
-        mymutex.lock();
-        // Sleep until there are no busy worker threads
-        while( mycount > 0 ) {
-            mymutex.unlock();
-            sleep( 1 );
-            mymutex.lock();
-        }
-        mymutex.unlock();
-        key_pressed.wakeAll();
-    }
-    
                                
- 
-
                                 The mutexes are necessary because the results of two threads
-attempting to change the value of the same variable simultaneously
-are unpredictable.
-
                                See also Environment Classes and Threading.
-
-
                                Member Function Documentation
                                
-
                                TQWaitCondition::TQWaitCondition ()
-
                                
-Constructs a new event signalling, i.e. wait condition, object.
-
-
                                TQWaitCondition::~TQWaitCondition () [virtual]
-
                                
-Deletes the event signalling, i.e. wait condition, object.
-
-
                                bool TQWaitCondition::wait ( unsigned long time = ULONG_MAX )
-
                                
-Wait on the thread event object. The thread calling this will
-block until either of these conditions is met:
-
                                  
-
                                •  Another thread signals it using wakeOne() or wakeAll(). This
-function will return TRUE in this case.
-
                                •  time milliseconds has elapsed. If time is ULONG_MAX (the
-default), then the wait will never timeout (the event must be
-signalled). This function will return FALSE if the wait timed
-out.
-
                                
-
                                 
                                See also wakeOne() and wakeAll().
-
-
                                bool TQWaitCondition::wait ( TQMutex * mutex, unsigned long time = ULONG_MAX )
-
                                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                                 Release the locked mutex and wait on the thread event object.
-The mutex must be initially locked by the calling thread. If mutex is not in a locked state, this function returns immediately.
-If mutex is a recursive mutex, this function returns
-immediately. The mutex will be unlocked, and the calling thread
-will block until either of these conditions is met:
-
                                  
-
                                •  Another thread signals it using wakeOne() or wakeAll(). This
-function will return TRUE in this case.
-
                                •  time milliseconds has elapsed. If time is ULONG_MAX (the
-default), then the wait will never timeout (the event must be
-signalled). This function will return FALSE if the wait timed
-out.
-
                                
-
                                 The mutex will be returned to the same locked state. This function
-is provided to allow the atomic transition from the locked state
-to the wait state.
-
                                 
                                See also wakeOne() and wakeAll().
-
-
                                void TQWaitCondition::wakeAll ()
-
                                
-This wakes all threads waiting on the TQWaitCondition. The order in
-which the threads are woken up depends on the operating system's
-scheduling policies, and cannot be controlled or predicted.
-
                                 
                                See also wakeOne().
-
-
                                void TQWaitCondition::wakeOne ()
-
                                
-This wakes one thread waiting on the TQWaitCondition. The thread
-that is woken up depends on the operating system's scheduling
-policies, and cannot be controlled or predicted.
-
                                 
                                See also wakeAll().
-
-
-
                                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                                
-
-
                                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                                TQt 3.3.8
                                
-
                                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qwerty-example.html b/doc/html/qwerty-example.html
index 8bd0b6e8f..1bc1688e3 100644
--- a/doc/html/qwerty-example.html
+++ b/doc/html/qwerty-example.html
@@ -48,19 +48,19 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 #ifndef TQWERTY_H
 #define TQWERTY_H
 
-#include <qwidget.h>
-#include <qmenubar.h>
-#include <qmultilineedit.h>
-#include <qprinter.h>
+#include <ntqwidget.h>
+#include <ntqmenubar.h>
+#include <ntqmultilineedit.h>
+#include <ntqprinter.h>
 
-class Editor : public TQWidget
+class Editor : public TQWidget
 {
     Q_OBJECT
 public:
-    Editor( TQWidget *parent=0, const char *name="qwerty" );
+    Editor( TQWidget *parent=0, const char *name="qwerty" );
    ~Editor();
 
-    void load( const TQString& fileName, int code=-1 );
+    void load( const TQString& fileName, int code=-1 );
 
 public slots:
     void newDoc();
@@ -81,15 +81,15 @@ private slots:
     void textChanged();
 
 private:
-    bool saveAs( const TQString& fileName, int code=-1 );
+    bool saveAs( const TQString& fileName, int code=-1 );
     void rebuildCodecList();
-    TQMenuBar       *m;
-    TQMultiLineEdit *e;
+    TQMenuBar       *m;
+    TQMultiLineEdit *e;
 #ifndef QT_NO_PRINTER
-    TQPrinter        printer;
+    TQPrinter        printer;
 #endif
-    TQPopupMenu     *save_as;
-    TQPopupMenu     *open_as;
+    TQPopupMenu     *save_as;
+    TQPopupMenu     *open_as;
     bool changed;
 };
 
@@ -109,18 +109,18 @@ private:
 *****************************************************************************/
 
 #include "qwerty.h"
-#include <qapplication.h>
-#include <qfile.h>
-#include <qfiledialog.h>
-#include <qpopupmenu.h>
-#include <qtextstream.h>
-#include <qpainter.h>
-#include <qmessagebox.h>
-#include <qpaintdevicemetrics.h>
-#include <qptrlist.h>
-#include <qfontdialog.h>
-
-#include <qtextcodec.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
+#include <ntqfile.h>
+#include <ntqfiledialog.h>
+#include <ntqpopupmenu.h>
+#include <ntqtextstream.h>
+#include <ntqpainter.h>
+#include <ntqmessagebox.h>
+#include <ntqpaintdevicemetrics.h>
+#include <ntqptrlist.h>
+#include <ntqfontdialog.h>
+
+#include <ntqtextcodec.h>
 
 const bool no_writing = FALSE;
 
@@ -129,49 +129,49 @@ static TQPtrList<TQTextCodec> *codecList = 0;
 enum { Uni = 0, MBug = 1, Lat1 = 2, Local = 3, Guess = 4, Codec = 5 };
 
 
-Editor::Editor( TQWidget * parent , const char * name )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name, WDestructiveClose )
+Editor::Editor( TQWidget * parent , const char * name )
+    : TQWidget( parent, name, WDestructiveClose )
 {
-    m = new TQMenuBar( this, "menu" );
-
-    TQPopupMenu * file = new TQPopupMenu();
-    Q_CHECK_PTR( file );
-    m->insertItem( "&File", file );
-
-    file->insertItem( "&New",   this, SLOT(newDoc()),   ALT+Key_N );
-    file->insertItem( "&Open...",  this, SLOT(load()),     ALT+Key_O );
-    file->insertItem( "&Save...",  this, SLOT(save()),     ALT+Key_S );
-    file->insertSeparator();
-    open_as = new TQPopupMenu();
-    file->insertItem( "Open &As",  open_as );
-    save_as = new TQPopupMenu();
-    file->insertItem( "Sa&ve As",  save_as );
-    file->insertItem( "Add &Encoding", this, SLOT(addEncoding()) );
+    m = new TQMenuBar( this, "menu" );
+
+    TQPopupMenu * file = new TQPopupMenu();
+    Q_CHECK_PTR( file );
+    m->insertItem( "&File", file );
+
+    file->insertItem( "&New",   this, SLOT(newDoc()),   ALT+Key_N );
+    file->insertItem( "&Open...",  this, SLOT(load()),     ALT+Key_O );
+    file->insertItem( "&Save...",  this, SLOT(save()),     ALT+Key_S );
+    file->insertSeparator();
+    open_as = new TQPopupMenu();
+    file->insertItem( "Open &As",  open_as );
+    save_as = new TQPopupMenu();
+    file->insertItem( "Sa&ve As",  save_as );
+    file->insertItem( "Add &Encoding", this, SLOT(addEncoding()) );
 #ifndef QT_NO_PRINTER
-    file->insertSeparator();
-    file->insertItem( "&Print...", this, SLOT(print()),    ALT+Key_P );
+    file->insertSeparator();
+    file->insertItem( "&Print...", this, SLOT(print()),    ALT+Key_P );
 #endif
-    file->insertSeparator();
-    file->insertItem( "&Close", this, SLOT(close()),ALT+Key_W );
-    file->insertItem( "&Quit",  qApp, SLOT(closeAllWindows()),     ALT+Key_Q );
+    file->insertSeparator();
+    file->insertItem( "&Close", this, SLOT(close()),ALT+Key_W );
+    file->insertItem( "&Quit",  qApp, SLOT(closeAllWindows()),     ALT+Key_Q );
 
-    connect( save_as, SIGNAL(activated(int)), this, SLOT(saveAsEncoding(int)) );
-    connect( open_as, SIGNAL(activated(int)), this, SLOT(openAsEncoding(int)) );
+    connect( save_as, SIGNAL(activated(int)), this, SLOT(saveAsEncoding(int)) );
+    connect( open_as, SIGNAL(activated(int)), this, SLOT(openAsEncoding(int)) );
     rebuildCodecList();
 
-    TQPopupMenu * edit = new TQPopupMenu();
-    Q_CHECK_PTR( edit );
-    m->insertItem( "&Edit", edit );
+    TQPopupMenu * edit = new TQPopupMenu();
+    Q_CHECK_PTR( edit );
+    m->insertItem( "&Edit", edit );
 
-    edit->insertItem( "To &Uppercase",   this, SLOT(toUpper()),   ALT+Key_U );
-    edit->insertItem( "To &Lowercase",   this, SLOT(toLower()),   ALT+Key_L );
+    edit->insertItem( "To &Uppercase",   this, SLOT(toUpper()),   ALT+Key_U );
+    edit->insertItem( "To &Lowercase",   this, SLOT(toLower()),   ALT+Key_L );
 #ifndef QT_NO_FONTDIALOG
-    edit->insertSeparator();
-    edit->insertItem( "&Select Font" ,   this, SLOT(font()),     ALT+Key_T );
+    edit->insertSeparator();
+    edit->insertItem( "&Select Font" ,   this, SLOT(font()),     ALT+Key_T );
 #endif
     changed = FALSE;
-    e = new TQMultiLineEdit( this, "editor" );
-    connect( e, SIGNAL( textChanged() ), this, SLOT( textChanged() ) );
+    e = new TQMultiLineEdit( this, "editor" );
+    connect( e, SIGNAL( textChanged() ), this, SLOT( textChanged() ) );
 
     // We use Unifont - if you have it installed you'll see all
     // Unicode character glyphs.
@@ -179,23 +179,23 @@ enum { Uni = 0, MBug = 1, Lat1 = 2, Local = 3, Guess = 4, Codec = 5 };
     // Unifont only comes in one pixel size, so we cannot let
     // it change pixel size as the display DPI changes.
     //
-    TQFont unifont("unifont",16,50); unifont.setPixelSize(16);
-    e->setFont( unifont );
+    TQFont unifont("unifont",16,50); unifont.setPixelSize(16);
+    e->setFont( unifont );
 
-    e->setFocus();
+    e->setFocus();
 }
 
 Editor::~Editor()
 {
 }
 
-void Editor::font()
+void Editor::font()
 {
 #ifndef QT_NO_FONTDIALOG
     bool ok;
-    TQFont f = TQFontDialog::getFont( &ok, e->font() );
+    TQFont f = TQFontDialog::getFont( &ok, e->font() );
     if ( ok ) {
-        e->setFont( f );
+        e->setFont( f );
     }
 #endif
 }
@@ -205,38 +205,38 @@ Editor::~Editor()
 void Editor::rebuildCodecList()
 {
     delete codecList;
-    codecList = new TQPtrList<TQTextCodec>;
-    TQTextCodec *codec;
+    codecList = new TQPtrList<TQTextCodec>;
+    TQTextCodec *codec;
     int i;
-    for (i = 0; (codec = TQTextCodec::codecForIndex(i)); i++)
-        codecList->append( codec );
-    int n = codecList->count();
+    for (i = 0; (codec = TQTextCodec::codecForIndex(i)); i++)
+        codecList->append( codec );
+    int n = codecList->count();
     for (int pm=0; pm<2; pm++) {
-        TQPopupMenu* menu = pm ? open_as : save_as;
-        menu->clear();
-        TQString local = "Local (";
-        local += TQTextCodec::codecForLocale()->name();
+        TQPopupMenu* menu = pm ? open_as : save_as;
+        menu->clear();
+        TQString local = "Local (";
+        local += TQTextCodec::codecForLocale()->name();
         local += ")";
-        menu->insertItem( local, Local );
-        menu->insertItem( "Unicode", Uni );
-        menu->insertItem( "Latin1", Lat1 );
-        menu->insertItem( "Microsoft Unicode", MBug );
+        menu->insertItem( local, Local );
+        menu->insertItem( "Unicode", Uni );
+        menu->insertItem( "Latin1", Lat1 );
+        menu->insertItem( "Microsoft Unicode", MBug );
         if ( pm )
-            menu->insertItem( "[guess]", Guess );
+            menu->insertItem( "[guess]", Guess );
         for ( i = 0; i < n; i++ )
-            menu->insertItem( codecList->at(i)->name(), Codec + i );
+            menu->insertItem( codecList->at(i)->name(), Codec + i );
     }
 }
 
 void Editor::newDoc()
 {
     Editor *ed = new Editor;
-    if ( qApp->desktop()->size().width() < 450
-         || qApp->desktop()->size().height() < 450 ) {
-        ed->showMaximized();
+    if ( qApp->desktop()->size().width() < 450
+         || qApp->desktop()->size().height() < 450 ) {
+        ed->showMaximized();
     } else {
-        ed->resize( 400, 400 );
-        ed->show();
+        ed->resize( 400, 400 );
+        ed->show();
     }
 }
 
@@ -244,47 +244,47 @@ void Editor::newDoc()
 void Editor::load()
 {
 #ifndef QT_NO_FILEDIALOG
-    TQString fn = TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName( TQString::null, TQString::null, this );
-    if ( !fn.isEmpty() )
+    TQString fn = TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName( TQString::null, TQString::null, this );
+    if ( !fn.isEmpty() )
         load( fn, -1 );
 #endif
 }
 
-void Editor::load( const TQString& fileName, int code )
+void Editor::load( const TQString& fileName, int code )
 {
-    TQFile f( fileName );
-    if ( !f.open( IO_ReadOnly ) )
+    TQFile f( fileName );
+    if ( !f.open( IO_ReadOnly ) )
         return;
 
-    e->setAutoUpdate( FALSE );
+    e->setAutoUpdate( FALSE );
 
-    TQTextStream t(&f);
+    TQTextStream t(&f);
     if ( code >= Codec )
-        t.setCodec( codecList->at(code-Codec) );
+        t.setCodec( codecList->at(code-Codec) );
     else if ( code == Uni )
-        t.setEncoding( TQTextStream::Unicode );
+        t.setEncoding( TQTextStream::Unicode );
     else if ( code == MBug )
-        t.setEncoding( TQTextStream::UnicodeReverse );
+        t.setEncoding( TQTextStream::UnicodeReverse );
     else if ( code == Lat1 )
-        t.setEncoding( TQTextStream::Latin1 );
+        t.setEncoding( TQTextStream::Latin1 );
     else if ( code == Guess ) {
-        TQFile f(fileName);
-        f.open(IO_ReadOnly);
+        TQFile f(fileName);
+        f.open(IO_ReadOnly);
         char buffer[256];
         int l = 256;
-        l=f.readBlock(buffer,l);
-        TQTextCodec* codec = TQTextCodec::codecForContent(buffer, l);
+        l=f.readBlock(buffer,l);
+        TQTextCodec* codec = TQTextCodec::codecForContent(buffer, l);
         if ( codec ) {
-            TQMessageBox::information(this,"Encoding",TQString("Codec: ")+codec->name());
-            t.setCodec( codec );
+            TQMessageBox::information(this,"Encoding",TQString("Codec: ")+codec->name());
+            t.setCodec( codec );
         }
     }
-    e->setText( t.read() );
-    f.close();
+    e->setText( t.read() );
+    f.close();
 
-    e->setAutoUpdate( TRUE );
-    e->repaint();
-    setCaption( fileName );
+    e->setAutoUpdate( TRUE );
+    e->repaint();
+    setCaption( fileName );
 
     changed = FALSE;
 }
@@ -293,8 +293,8 @@ void Editor::openAsEncoding( int code )
 {
 #ifndef QT_NO_FILEDIALOG
     //storing filename (proper save) is left as an exercise...
-    TQString fn = TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName( TQString::null, TQString::null, this );
-    if ( !fn.isEmpty() )
+    TQString fn = TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName( TQString::null, TQString::null, this );
+    if ( !fn.isEmpty() )
         (void) load( fn, code );
 #endif
 }
@@ -303,8 +303,8 @@ bool Editor::save()
 {
 #ifndef QT_NO_FILEDIALOG
     //storing filename (proper save) is left as an exercise...
-    TQString fn = TQFileDialog::getSaveFileName( TQString::null, TQString::null, this );
-    if ( !fn.isEmpty() )
+    TQString fn = TQFileDialog::getSaveFileName( TQString::null, TQString::null, this );
+    if ( !fn.isEmpty() )
         return saveAs( fn );
     return FALSE;
 #endif
@@ -314,8 +314,8 @@ void Editor::saveAsEncoding( int code )
 {
 #ifndef QT_NO_FILEDIALOG
     //storing filename (proper save) is left as an exercise...
-    TQString fn = TQFileDialog::getSaveFileName( TQString::null, TQString::null, this );
-    if ( !fn.isEmpty() )
+    TQString fn = TQFileDialog::getSaveFileName( TQString::null, TQString::null, this );
+    if ( !fn.isEmpty() )
         (void) saveAs( fn, code );
 #endif
 }
@@ -323,14 +323,14 @@ void Editor::saveAsEncoding( int code )
 void Editor::addEncoding()
 {
 #ifndef QT_NO_FILEDIALOG
-    TQString fn = TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName( TQString::null, "*.map", this );
-    if ( !fn.isEmpty() ) {
-        TQFile f(fn);
-        if (f.open(IO_ReadOnly)) {
-            if (TQTextCodec::loadCharmap(&f)) {
+    TQString fn = TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName( TQString::null, "*.map", this );
+    if ( !fn.isEmpty() ) {
+        TQFile f(fn);
+        if (f.open(IO_ReadOnly)) {
+            if (TQTextCodec::loadCharmap(&f)) {
                 rebuildCodecList();
             } else {
-                TQMessageBox::warning(0,"Charmap error",
+                TQMessageBox::warning(0,"Charmap error",
                     "The file did not contain a valid charmap.\n\n"
                     "A charmap file should look like this:\n"
                        "  <code_set_name> thename\n"
@@ -349,27 +349,27 @@ void Editor::addEncoding()
 }
 
 
-bool Editor::saveAs( const TQString& fileName, int code )
+bool Editor::saveAs( const TQString& fileName, int code )
 {
-    TQFile f( fileName );
-    if ( no_writing || !f.open( IO_WriteOnly ) ) {
-        TQMessageBox::warning(this,"I/O Error",
+    TQFile f( fileName );
+    if ( no_writing || !f.open( IO_WriteOnly ) ) {
+        TQMessageBox::warning(this,"I/O Error",
                     TQString("The file could not be opened.\n\n")
                         +fileName);
         return FALSE;
     }
-    TQTextStream t(&f);
+    TQTextStream t(&f);
     if ( code >= Codec )
-        t.setCodec( codecList->at(code-Codec) );
+        t.setCodec( codecList->at(code-Codec) );
     else if ( code == Uni )
-        t.setEncoding( TQTextStream::Unicode );
+        t.setEncoding( TQTextStream::Unicode );
     else if ( code == MBug )
-        t.setEncoding( TQTextStream::UnicodeReverse );
+        t.setEncoding( TQTextStream::UnicodeReverse );
     else if ( code == Lat1 )
-        t.setEncoding( TQTextStream::Latin1 );
-    t << e->text();
-    f.close();
-    setCaption( fileName );
+        t.setEncoding( TQTextStream::Latin1 );
+    t << e->text();
+    f.close();
+    setCaption( fileName );
     changed = FALSE;
     return TRUE;
 }
@@ -379,49 +379,49 @@ void Editor::print()
 #ifndef QT_NO_PRINTER
     if ( printer.setup(this) ) {                // opens printer dialog
         printer.setFullPage(TRUE);              // we'll set our own margins
-        TQPainter p;
-        p.begin( &printer );                    // paint on printer
-        p.setFont( e->font() );
-        TQFontMetrics fm = p.fontMetrics();
-        TQPaintDeviceMetrics metrics( &printer ); // need width/height
+        TQPainter p;
+        p.begin( &printer );                    // paint on printer
+        p.setFont( e->font() );
+        TQFontMetrics fm = p.fontMetrics();
+        TQPaintDeviceMetrics metrics( &printer ); // need width/height
                                                  // of printer surface
-        const int MARGIN = metrics.logicalDpiX() / 2; // half-inch margin
+        const int MARGIN = metrics.logicalDpiX() / 2; // half-inch margin
         int yPos        = MARGIN;               // y position for each line
 
-        for( int i = 0 ; i < e->numLines() ; i++ ) {
+        for( int i = 0 ; i < e->numLines() ; i++ ) {
             if ( printer.aborted() )
                 break;
-            if ( yPos + fm.lineSpacing() > metrics.height() - MARGIN ) {
+            if ( yPos + fm.lineSpacing() > metrics.height() - MARGIN ) {
                 // no more room on this page
                 if ( !printer.newPage() )          // start new page
                     break;                           // some error
                 yPos = MARGIN;                   // back to top of page
             }
-            p.drawText( MARGIN, yPos, metrics.width() - 2*MARGIN,
-                        fm.lineSpacing(), ExpandTabs, e->textLine( i ) );
-            yPos += fm.lineSpacing();
+            p.drawText( MARGIN, yPos, metrics.width() - 2*MARGIN,
+                        fm.lineSpacing(), ExpandTabs, e->textLine( i ) );
+            yPos += fm.lineSpacing();
         }
-        p.end();                                // send job to printer
+        p.end();                                // send job to printer
     }
 #endif
 }
 
-void Editor::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * )
+void Editor::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * )
 {
     if ( e && m )
-        e->setGeometry( 0, m->height(), width(), height() - m->height() );
+        e->setGeometry( 0, m->height(), width(), height() - m->height() );
 }
 
-void Editor::closeEvent( TQCloseEvent *event )
+void Editor::closeEvent( TQCloseEvent *event )
 {
     event->accept();
 
     if ( changed ) { // the text has been changed
-        switch ( TQMessageBox::warning( this, "Qwerty",
+        switch ( TQMessageBox::warning( this, "Qwerty",
                                         "Save changes to Document?",
-                                        tr("&Yes"),
-                                        tr("&No"),
-                                        tr("Cancel"),
+                                        tr("&Yes"),
+                                        tr("&No"),
+                                        tr("Cancel"),
                                         0, 2) ) {
         case 0: // yes
             if ( save() )
@@ -441,12 +441,12 @@ void Editor::resizeEvent( Editor::toUpper()
 {
-    e->setText(e->text().upper());
+    e->setText(e->text().upper());
 }
 
 void Editor::toLower()
 {
-    e->setText(e->text().lower());
+    e->setText(e->text().lower());
 }
 
 void Editor::textChanged()
@@ -467,33 +467,33 @@ void Editor::textChanged()
 **
 *****************************************************************************/
 
-#include <qapplication.h>
+#include <ntqapplication.h>
 #include "qwerty.h"
 
 
 int main( int argc, char **argv )
 {
-    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
+    TQApplication a( argc, argv );
 
 
-    bool isSmall =  qApp->desktop()->size().width() < 450
-                  || qApp->desktop()->size().height() < 450;
+    bool isSmall =  qApp->desktop()->size().width() < 450
+                  || qApp->desktop()->size().height() < 450;
 
     int i;
     for ( i= argc <= 1 ? 0 : 1; i<argc; i++ ) {
         Editor *e = new Editor;
-        e->setCaption("TQt Example - TQWERTY");
+        e->setCaption("TQt Example - TQWERTY");
         if ( i > 0 )
             e->load( argv[i] );
         if ( isSmall ) {
-            e->showMaximized();
+            e->showMaximized();
         } else {
-            e->resize( 400, 400 );
-            e->show();
+            e->resize( 400, 400 );
+            e->show();
         }
     }
-    a.connect( &a, SIGNAL(lastWindowClosed()), &a, SLOT(quit()) );
-    return a.exec();
+    a.connect( &a, SIGNAL(lastWindowClosed()), &a, SLOT(quit()) );
+    return a.exec();
 }
 
                
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qwhatsthis-h.html b/doc/html/qwhatsthis-h.html
index 9d132225b..81016f3d2 100644
--- a/doc/html/qwhatsthis-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qwhatsthis-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qwhatsthis.h Include File
+ntqwhatsthis.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                TQWhatsThis Class Reference
                
-
-
                The TQWhatsThis class provides a simple description of any
-widget, i.e. answering the question "What's this?".
-More...
-
                #include <qwhatsthis.h>
-
                Inherits TQt.
-
                List of all member functions.
-
                Public Members
                
-
-
                Static Public Members
                
-
                  
-
                • void setFont ( const TQFont & font )
                  • 
-
                • void add ( TQWidget * widget, const TQString & text )
                  • 
-
                • void remove ( TQWidget * widget )
                  • 
-
                • TQString textFor ( TQWidget * w, const TQPoint & pos = TQPoint ( ), bool includeParents = FALSE )
                  • 
-
                • TQToolButton * whatsThisButton ( TQWidget * parent )
                  • 
-
                • void enterWhatsThisMode ()
                  • 
-
                • bool inWhatsThisMode ()
                  • 
-
                • void leaveWhatsThisMode ( const TQString & text = TQString::null, const TQPoint & pos = TQCursor::pos ( ), TQWidget * w = 0 )
                  • 
-
                • void display ( const TQString & text, const TQPoint & pos = TQCursor::pos ( ), TQWidget * w = 0 )
                  • 
-
                
-
                Detailed Description
                
-
-
-The TQWhatsThis class provides a simple description of any
-widget, i.e. answering the question "What's this?".
-
                 
-
-
                 "What's this?" help is part of an application's online help system
-that provides users with information about functionality, usage,
-background etc., in various levels of detail from short tool tips
-to full text browsing help windows.
-
                 TQWhatsThis provides a single window with an explanatory text that
-pops up when the user asks "What's this?". The default way to do
-this is to focus the relevant widget and press Shift+F1. The help
-text appears immediately; it goes away as soon as the user does
-something else.
-
                 (Note that if there is an accelerator for Shift+F1, this mechanism
-will not work.)
-
                 To add "What's this?" text to a widget you simply call
-TQWhatsThis::add() for the widget. For example, to assign text to a
-menu item, call TQMenuData::setWhatsThis(); for a global
-accelerator key, call TQAccel::setWhatsThis() and If you're using
-actions, use TQAction::setWhatsThis().
-
                 The text can be either rich text or plain text. If you specify a
-rich text formatted string, it will be rendered using the default
-stylesheet. This makes it possible to embed images. See
-TQStyleSheet::defaultSheet() for details.
-
                 
-
-
                        const char * fileOpenText = "<p><img source=\"fileopen\"> "
-                         "Click this button to open a <em>new file</em>. <br>"
-                         "You can also select the <b>Open</b> command "
-                         "from the <b>File</b> menu.</p>";
-        TQMimeSourceFactory::defaultFactory()->setPixmap( "fileopen",
-                              fileOpenAction->iconSet().pixmap() );
-        fileOpenAction->setWhatsThis( fileOpenText );
-
                
-
                 An alternative way to enter "What's this?" mode is to use the
-ready-made tool bar tool button from
-TQWhatsThis::whatsThisButton(). By invoking this context help
-button (in the picture below the first one from the right) the
-user switches into "What's this?" mode. If they now click on a
-widget the appropriate help text is shown. The mode is left when
-help is given or when the user presses Esc.
-
                 
                 
-
                 If you are using TQMainWindow you can also use the
-TQMainWindow::whatsThis() slot to invoke the mode from a menu item.
-
                 For more control you can create a dedicated TQWhatsThis object for
-a special widget. By subclassing and reimplementing
-TQWhatsThis::text() it is possible to have different help texts,
-depending on the position of the mouse click. By reimplementing
-TQWhatsThis::clicked() it is possible to have hyperlinks inside the
-help texts.
-
                 If you wish to control the "What's this?" behavior of a widget
-manually see TQWidget::customWhatsThis().
-
                 The What's This object can be removed using TQWhatsThis::remove(),
-although this is rarely necessary because it is automatically
-removed when the widget is destroyed.
-
                 
                See also TQToolTip and Help System.
-
-
                Member Function Documentation
                
-
                TQWhatsThis::TQWhatsThis ( TQWidget * widget )
-
                
-Constructs a dynamic "What's this?" object for widget. The
-object is deleted when the widget is destroyed.
-
                 When the widget is queried by the user the text() function of this
-TQWhatsThis will be called to provide the appropriate text, rather
-than using the text assigned by add().
-
-
                TQWhatsThis::~TQWhatsThis () [virtual]
-
                
-Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-
-
                void TQWhatsThis::add ( TQWidget * widget, const TQString & text ) [static]
-
                
-Adds text as "What's this" help for widget. If the text is
-rich text formatted (i.e. it contains markup) it will be rendered
-with the default stylesheet TQStyleSheet::defaultSheet().
-
                 The text is destroyed if the widget is later destroyed, so it need
-not be explicitly removed.
-
                 
                See also remove().
-
-
                Examples: application/application.cpp, helpsystem/mainwindow.cpp, and mdi/application.cpp.
-
                bool TQWhatsThis::clicked ( const TQString & href ) [virtual]
-
                
-
-
                 This virtual function is called when the user clicks inside the
-"What's this?" window. href is the link the user clicked on, or
-TQString::null if there was no link.
-
                 If the function returns TRUE (the default), the "What's this?"
-window is closed, otherwise it remains visible.
-
                 The default implementation ignores href and returns TRUE.
-
-
                void TQWhatsThis::display ( const TQString & text, const TQPoint & pos = TQCursor::pos ( ), TQWidget * w = 0 ) [static]
-
                
-Display text in a help window at the global screen position pos.
-
                 If widget w is not 0 and has its own dedicated TQWhatsThis
-object, this object will receive clicked() messages when the user
-clicks on hyperlinks inside the help text.
-
                 
                See also TQWhatsThis::clicked().
-
-
                void TQWhatsThis::enterWhatsThisMode () [static]
-
                
-Enters "What's this?" mode and returns immediately.
-
                 TQt will install a special cursor and take over mouse input until
-the user clicks somewhere. It then shows any help available and
-ends "What's this?" mode. Finally, TQt removes the special cursor
-and help window and then restores ordinary event processing, at
-which point the left mouse button is no longer pressed.
-
                 The user can also use the Esc key to leave "What's this?" mode.
-
                 
                See also inWhatsThisMode() and leaveWhatsThisMode().
-
-
                bool TQWhatsThis::inWhatsThisMode () [static]
-
                
-Returns TRUE if the application is in "What's this?" mode;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                 
                See also enterWhatsThisMode() and leaveWhatsThisMode().
-
-
                void TQWhatsThis::leaveWhatsThisMode ( const TQString & text = TQString::null, const TQPoint & pos = TQCursor::pos ( ), TQWidget * w = 0 ) [static]
-
                
-Leaves "What's this?" question mode.
-
                 This function is used internally by widgets that support
-TQWidget::customWhatsThis(); applications do not usually call it.
-An example of such a widget is TQPopupMenu: menus still work
-normally in "What's this?" mode but also provide help texts for
-individual menu items.
-
                 If text is not TQString::null, a "What's this?" help window is
-displayed at the global screen position pos. If widget w is
-not 0 and has its own dedicated TQWhatsThis object, this object
-will receive clicked() messages when the user clicks on hyperlinks
-inside the help text.
-
                 
                See also inWhatsThisMode(), enterWhatsThisMode(), and TQWhatsThis::clicked().
-
-
                void TQWhatsThis::remove ( TQWidget * widget ) [static]
-
                
-Removes the "What's this?" help associated with the widget.
-This happens automatically if the widget is destroyed.
-
                 
                See also add().
-
-
                void TQWhatsThis::setFont ( const TQFont & font ) [static]
-
                
-Sets the font for all "What's this?" helps to font.
-
-
                TQString TQWhatsThis::text ( const TQPoint & ) [virtual]
-
                
-This virtual function returns the text for position p in the
-widget that this "What's this?" object documents. If there is no
-"What's this?" text for the position, TQString::null is returned.
-
                 The default implementation returns TQString::null.
-
-
                TQString TQWhatsThis::textFor ( TQWidget * w, const TQPoint & pos = TQPoint ( ), bool includeParents = FALSE ) [static]
-
                
-Returns the what's this text for widget w or TQString::null if
-there is no "What's this?" help for the widget. pos contains
-the mouse position; this is useful, for example, if you've
-subclassed to make the text that is displayed position dependent.
-
                 If includeParents is TRUE, parent widgets are taken into
-consideration as well when looking for what's this help text.
-
                 
                See also add().
-
-
                TQToolButton * TQWhatsThis::whatsThisButton ( TQWidget * parent ) [static]
-
                
-Creates a TQToolButton preconfigured to enter "What's this?" mode
-when clicked. You will often use this with a tool bar as parent:
-
                -        (void) TQWhatsThis::whatsThisButton( my_help_tool_bar );
-    
                
- 
-
-
                Example: helpsystem/mainwindow.cpp.
-
-
                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                
-
-
                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                TQt 3.3.8
                
-
                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qwheelevent-members.html b/doc/html/qwheelevent-members.html
index d283936f2..e89a7a10e 100644
--- a/doc/html/qwheelevent-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qwheelevent-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
@@ -45,9 +45,9 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
              • isAccepted()
 
              • orientation()
 
              • pos()
-
              • spontaneous()
+
              • spontaneous()
 
              • state()
-
              • type()
+
              • type()
 
              • x()
 
              • y()
 
              
diff --git a/doc/html/qwheelevent.html b/doc/html/qwheelevent.html
index c248926f3..f9f433435 100644
--- a/doc/html/qwheelevent.html
+++ b/doc/html/qwheelevent.html
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
              The TQWheelEvent class contains parameters that describe a wheel event.
 More...
-
              #include <qevent.h>
-
              Inherits TQEvent.
+
              #include <ntqevent.h>
+
              Inherits TQEvent.
 
              List of all member functions.
 
              Public Members
              
 
                
@@ -68,15 +68,15 @@ whether the receiver wants the event. You should call
 will be sent to the parent widget.
 
                 The TQWidget::setEnable() function can be used to enable or disable
 mouse and keyboard events for a widget.
-
                 The event handler TQWidget::wheelEvent() receives wheel events.
-
                 
                See also TQMouseEvent, TQWidget::grabMouse(), and Event Classes.
+
                 The event handler TQWidget::wheelEvent() receives wheel events.
+
                 
                See also TQMouseEvent, TQWidget::grabMouse(), and Event Classes.
 
 
                Member Function Documentation
                
-
                TQWheelEvent::TQWheelEvent ( const TQPoint & pos, int delta, int state, Orientation orient = Vertical )
+
                TQWheelEvent::TQWheelEvent ( const TQPoint & pos, int delta, int state, Orientation orient = Vertical )
 
                
 
 
                 Constructs a wheel event object.
-
                 The globalPos() is initialized to TQCursor::pos(), i.e. pos,
+
                 The globalPos() is initialized to TQCursor::pos(), i.e. pos,
 which is usually (but not always) right. Use the other constructor
 if you need to specify the global position explicitly. delta
 contains the rotation distance, state holds the keyboard
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ modifier flags at the time of the event and orient holds the
 wheel's orientation.
 
                 
                See also pos(), delta(), and state().
 
-
                TQWheelEvent::TQWheelEvent ( const TQPoint & pos, const TQPoint & globalPos, int delta, int state, Orientation orient = Vertical )
+
                TQWheelEvent::TQWheelEvent ( const TQPoint & pos, const TQPoint & globalPos, int delta, int state, Orientation orient = Vertical )
 
                
 
 
                 Constructs a wheel event object. The position when the event
@@ -118,13 +118,13 @@ including perhaps a freely rotating wheel with no notches. The
 expectation is that such a device would send more messages per
 rotation but with a smaller value in each message.
 
-
                const TQPoint & TQWheelEvent::globalPos () const
+
                const TQPoint & TQWheelEvent::globalPos () const
 
                
 
 
                 Returns the global position of the mouse pointer at the time of the event. This is important on asynchronous window systems
 such as X11; whenever you move your widgets around in response to
 mouse events, globalPos() can differ a lot from the current
-pointer position TQCursor::pos().
+pointer position TQCursor::pos().
 
                 
                See also globalX() and globalY().
 
 
                int TQWheelEvent::globalX () const
@@ -156,12 +156,12 @@ the parent widget. The accept flag is set by default.
 
                 Returns TRUE if the receiver of the event handles the wheel event;
 otherwise returns FALSE.
 
-
                Orientation TQWheelEvent::orientation () const
+
                Orientation TQWheelEvent::orientation () const
 
                
 
 
                 Returns the wheel's orientation.
 
-
                const TQPoint & TQWheelEvent::pos () const
+
                const TQPoint & TQWheelEvent::pos () const
 
                
 
 
                 Returns the position of the mouse pointer, relative to the widget
@@ -170,11 +170,11 @@ that received the event.
 events, use globalPos() instead of this function.
 
                 
                See also x(), y(), and globalPos().
 
-
                ButtonState TQWheelEvent::state () const
+
                ButtonState TQWheelEvent::state () const
 
                
 
 
                 Returns the keyboard modifier flags of the event.
-
                 The returned value is ShiftButton, ControlButton, and AltButton OR'ed together.
+
                 The returned value is ShiftButton, ControlButton, and AltButton OR'ed together.
 
 
                int TQWheelEvent::x () const
 
                
diff --git a/doc/html/qwidget-h.html b/doc/html/qwidget-h.html
index fbd466491..aaab7af30 100644
--- a/doc/html/qwidget-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qwidget-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qwidget.h Include File
+ntqwidget.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                TQWidget Class Reference
                
-
-
                The TQWidget class is the base class of all user interface objects.
-More...
-
                #include <qwidget.h>
-
                Inherits TQObject and TQPaintDevice.
-
                Inherited by TQAxWidget, TQButton, TQFrame, TQDialog, TQComboBox, TQDataBrowser, TQDataView, TQDateTimeEditBase, TQDateTimeEdit, TQDesktopWidget, TQDial, TQDockArea, TQGLWidget, TQHeader, TQMainWindow, TQMotifWidget, TQNPWidget, TQScrollBar, TQSizeGrip, TQSlider, TQSpinBox, TQSplashScreen, TQStatusBar, TQTabBar, TQTabWidget, TQWorkspace, and TQXtWidget.
-
                List of all member functions.
-
                Public Members
                
-
-
                Public Slots
                
-
-
                Static Public Members
                
-
-
                Properties
                
-
                  
-
                • bool acceptDrops - whether drop events are enabled for this widget
                  • 
-
                • bool autoMask - whether the auto mask feature is enabled for the widget
                  • 
-
                • TQBrush backgroundBrush - the widget's background brush  (read only)
                  • 
-
                • BackgroundMode backgroundMode - the color role used for painting the background of the widget
                  • 
-
                • BackgroundOrigin backgroundOrigin - the origin of the widget's background
                  • 
-
                • TQSize baseSize - the base size of the widget
                  • 
-
                • TQString caption - the window caption (title)
                  • 
-
                • TQRect childrenRect - the bounding rectangle of the widget's children  (read only)
                  • 
-
                • TQRegion childrenRegion - the combined region occupied by the widget's children  (read only)
                  • 
-
                • TQColorGroup colorGroup - the current color group of the widget palette  (read only)
                  • 
-
                • TQCursor cursor - the cursor shape for this widget
                  • 
-
                • bool customWhatsThis - whether the widget wants to handle What's This help manually  (read only)
                  • 
-
                • bool enabled - whether the widget is enabled
                  • 
-
                • bool focus - whether this widget (or its focus proxy) has the keyboard input focus  (read only)
                  • 
-
                • bool focusEnabled - whether the widget accepts keyboard focus  (read only)
                  • 
-
                • FocusPolicy focusPolicy - the way the widget accepts keyboard focus
                  • 
-
                • TQFont font - the font currently set for the widget
                  • 
-
                • TQRect frameGeometry - geometry of the widget relative to its parent including any window frame  (read only)
                  • 
-
                • TQSize frameSize - the size of the widget including any window frame  (read only)
                  • 
-
                • bool fullScreen - whether the widget is full screen  (read only)
                  • 
-
                • TQRect geometry - the geometry of the widget relative to its parent and excluding the window frame
                  • 
-
                • int height - the height of the widget excluding any window frame  (read only)
                  • 
-
                • bool hidden - whether the widget is explicitly hidden
                  • 
-
                • TQPixmap icon - the widget's icon
                  • 
-
                • TQString iconText - the widget's icon text
                  • 
-
                • bool inputMethodEnabled - enables or disables the use of input methods for this widget
                  • 
-
                • bool isActiveWindow - whether this widget is the active window  (read only)
                  • 
-
                • bool isDesktop - whether the widget is a desktop widget, i.e. represents the desktop  (read only)
                  • 
-
                • bool isDialog - whether the widget is a dialog widget  (read only)
                  • 
-
                • bool isModal - whether the widget is a modal widget  (read only)
                  • 
-
                • bool isPopup - whether the widget is a popup widget  (read only)
                  • 
-
                • bool isTopLevel - whether the widget is a top-level widget  (read only)
                  • 
-
                • bool maximized - whether this widget is maximized  (read only)
                  • 
-
                • int maximumHeight - the widget's maximum height
                  • 
-
                • TQSize maximumSize - the widget's maximum size
                  • 
-
                • int maximumWidth - the widget's maximum width
                  • 
-
                • TQRect microFocusHint - the currently set micro focus hint for this widget  (read only)
                  • 
-
                • bool minimized - whether this widget is minimized (iconified)  (read only)
                  • 
-
                • int minimumHeight - the widget's minimum height
                  • 
-
                • TQSize minimumSize - the widget's minimum size
                  • 
-
                • TQSize minimumSizeHint - the recommended minimum size for the widget  (read only)
                  • 
-
                • int minimumWidth - the widget's minimum width
                  • 
-
                • bool mouseTracking - whether mouse tracking is enabled for the widget
                  • 
-
                • bool ownCursor - whether the widget uses its own cursor  (read only)
                  • 
-
                • bool ownFont - whether the widget uses its own font  (read only)
                  • 
-
                • bool ownPalette - whether the widget uses its own palette  (read only)
                  • 
-
                • TQPalette palette - the widget's palette
                  • 
-
                • TQColor paletteBackgroundColor - the background color of the widget
                  • 
-
                • TQPixmap paletteBackgroundPixmap - the background pixmap of the widget
                  • 
-
                • TQColor paletteForegroundColor - the foreground color of the widget
                  • 
-
                • TQPoint pos - the position of the widget within its parent widget
                  • 
-
                • TQRect rect - the internal geometry of the widget excluding any window frame  (read only)
                  • 
-
                • bool shown - whether the widget is shown
                  • 
-
                • TQSize size - the size of the widget excluding any window frame
                  • 
-
                • TQSize sizeHint - the recommended size for the widget  (read only)
                  • 
-
                • TQSize sizeIncrement - the size increment of the widget
                  • 
-
                • TQSizePolicy sizePolicy - the default layout behavior of the widget
                  • 
-
                • bool underMouse - whether the widget is under the mouse cursor  (read only)
                  • 
-
                • bool updatesEnabled - whether updates are enabled
                  • 
-
                • bool visible - whether the widget is visible  (read only)
                  • 
-
                • TQRect visibleRect - the visible rectangle  (read only)  (obsolete)
                  • 
-
                • int width - the width of the widget excluding any window frame  (read only)
                  • 
-
                • double windowOpacity - the level of opacity for the window
                  • 
-
                • int x - the x coordinate of the widget relative to its parent including any window frame  (read only)
                  • 
-
                • int y - the y coordinate of the widget relative to its parent and including any window frame  (read only)
                  • 
-
                
-
                Protected Members
                
-
-
                Detailed Description
                
-
-
-The TQWidget class is the base class of all user interface objects.
-
                 
-
-
                 The widget is the atom of the user interface: it receives mouse,
-keyboard and other events from the window system, and paints a
-representation of itself on the screen. Every widget is
-rectangular, and they are sorted in a Z-order. A widget is
-clipped by its parent and by the widgets in front of it.
-
                 A widget that isn't embedded in a parent widget is called a
-top-level widget. Usually, top-level widgets are windows with a
-frame and a title bar (although it is also possible to create
-top-level widgets without such decoration if suitable widget flags
-are used). In TQt, TQMainWindow and the various subclasses of
-TQDialog are the most common top-level windows.
-
                 A widget without a parent widget is always a top-level widget.
-
                 Non-top-level widgets are child widgets. These are child windows
-in their parent widgets. You cannot usually distinguish a child
-widget from its parent visually. Most other widgets in TQt are
-useful only as child widgets. (It is possible to make, say, a
-button into a top-level widget, but most people prefer to put
-their buttons inside other widgets, e.g. TQDialog.)
-
                 If you want to use a TQWidget to hold child widgets you will
-probably want to add a layout to the parent TQWidget. (See Layouts.)
-
                 TQWidget has many member functions, but some of them have little
-direct functionality: for example, TQWidget has a font property,
-but never uses this itself. There are many subclasses which
-provide real functionality, such as TQPushButton, TQListBox and
-TQTabDialog, etc.
-
                 
                 Groups of functions:
-
                
-
                 
                
-
                 Context Functions
-
                 Window functions 
-show(),
-hide(),
-raise(),
-lower(),
-close().
-
                 Top level windows 
-caption(),
-setCaption(),
-icon(),
-setIcon(),
-iconText(),
-setIconText(),
-isActiveWindow(),
-setActiveWindow(),
-showMinimized().
-showMaximized(),
-showFullScreen(),
-showNormal().
-
                 Window contents 
-update(),
-repaint(),
-erase(),
-scroll(),
-updateMask().
-
                 Geometry 
-pos(),
-size(),
-rect(),
-x(),
-y(),
-width(),
-height(),
-sizePolicy(),
-setSizePolicy(),
-sizeHint(),
-updateGeometry(),
-layout(),
-move(),
-resize(),
-setGeometry(),
-frameGeometry(),
-geometry(),
-childrenRect(),
-adjustSize(),
-mapFromGlobal(),
-mapFromParent()
-mapToGlobal(),
-mapToParent(),
-maximumSize(),
-minimumSize(),
-sizeIncrement(),
-setMaximumSize(),
-setMinimumSize(),
-setSizeIncrement(),
-setBaseSize(),
-setFixedSize()
-
                 Mode 
-isVisible(),
-isVisibleTo(),
-isMinimized(),
-isDesktop(),
-isEnabled(),
-isEnabledTo(),
-isModal(),
-isPopup(),
-isTopLevel(),
-setEnabled(),
-hasMouseTracking(),
-setMouseTracking(),
-isUpdatesEnabled(),
-setUpdatesEnabled(),
-clipRegion().
-
                 Look and feel 
-style(),
-setStyle(),
-cursor(),
-setCursor()
-font(),
-setFont(),
-palette(),
-setPalette(),
-backgroundMode(),
-setBackgroundMode(),
-colorGroup(),
-fontMetrics(),
-fontInfo().
-
                 Keyboard focus
                functions                 		
-isFocusEnabled(),
-setFocusPolicy(),
-focusPolicy(),
-hasFocus(),
-setFocus(),
-clearFocus(),
-setTabOrder(),
-setFocusProxy().
-
                 Mouse and
                keyboard grabbing                 		
-grabMouse(),
-releaseMouse(),
-grabKeyboard(),
-releaseKeyboard(),
-mouseGrabber(),
-keyboardGrabber().
-
                 Event handlers 
-event(),
-mousePressEvent(),
-mouseReleaseEvent(),
-mouseDoubleClickEvent(),
-mouseMoveEvent(),
-keyPressEvent(),
-keyReleaseEvent(),
-focusInEvent(),
-focusOutEvent(),
-wheelEvent(),
-enterEvent(),
-leaveEvent(),
-paintEvent(),
-moveEvent(),
-resizeEvent(),
-closeEvent(),
-dragEnterEvent(),
-dragMoveEvent(),
-dragLeaveEvent(),
-dropEvent(),
-childEvent(),
-showEvent(),
-hideEvent(),
-customEvent().
-
                 Change handlers 
-enabledChange(),
-fontChange(),
-paletteChange(),
-styleChange(),
-windowActivationChange().
-
                 System functions 
-parentWidget(),
-topLevelWidget(),
-reparent(),
-polish(),
-winId(),
-find(),
-metric().
-
                 What's this help 
-customWhatsThis()
-
                 Internal kernel
                functions                 		
-focusNextPrevChild(),
-wmapper(),
-clearWFlags(),
-getWFlags(),
-setWFlags(),
-testWFlags().
-
                 
                
-
                 Every widget's constructor accepts two or three standard arguments:
-
                  
-
                1.  TQWidget *parent = 0 is the parent of the new widget.
-If it is 0 (the default), the new widget will be a top-level window.
-If not, it will be a child of parent, and be constrained by parent's geometry (unless you specify WType_TopLevel as
-widget flag).
-
                2.  const char *name = 0 is the widget name of the new
-widget. You can access it using name(). The widget name is little
-used by programmers but is quite useful with GUI builders such as
-TQt Designer (you can name a widget in TQt Designer, and
-connect() to it using the name in your code). The dumpObjectTree()
-debugging function also uses it.
-
                3.  WFlags f = 0 (where available) sets the widget flags; the
-default is suitable for almost all widgets, but to get, for
-example, a top-level widget without a window system frame, you
-must use special flags.
-
                
-
                 The tictac/tictac.cpp example program is good example of a simple
-widget. It contains a few event handlers (as all widgets must), a
-few custom routines that are specific to it (as all useful widgets
-do), and has a few children and connections. Everything it does
-is done in response to an event: this is by far the most common way
-to design GUI applications.
-
                 You will need to supply the content for your widgets yourself, but
-here is a brief run-down of the events, starting with the most common
-ones:
-
                 
                  
-
                   
                •  paintEvent() - called whenever the widget needs to be
-repainted. Every widget which displays output must implement it,
-and it is wise not to paint on the screen outside
-paintEvent().
-
                   
                •  resizeEvent() - called when the widget has been resized.
-
                   
                •  mousePressEvent() - called when a mouse button is pressed.
-There are six mouse-related events, but the mouse press and mouse
-release events are by far the most important. A widget receives
-mouse press events when the mouse is inside it, or when it has
-grabbed the mouse using grabMouse().
-
                   
                •  mouseReleaseEvent() - called when a mouse button is released.
-A widget receives mouse release events when it has received the
-corresponding mouse press event. This means that if the user
-presses the mouse inside your widget, then drags the mouse to
-somewhere else, then releases, your widget receives the release
-event. There is one exception: if a popup menu appears while the
-mouse button is held down, this popup immediately steals the mouse
-events.
-
                   
                •  mouseDoubleClickEvent() - not quite as obvious as it might seem.
-If the user double-clicks, the widget receives a mouse press event
-(perhaps a mouse move event or two if they don't hold the mouse
-quite steady), a mouse release event and finally this event. It is
-not possible to distinguish a click from a double click until you've
-seen whether the second click arrives. (This is one reason why most GUI
-books recommend that double clicks be an extension of single clicks,
-rather than trigger a different action.)
-
                   
                
-
                 If your widget only contains child widgets, you probably do not need to
-implement any event handlers. If you want to detect a mouse click in
-a child widget call the child's hasMouse() function inside the
-parent widget's mousePressEvent().
-
                 Widgets that accept keyboard input need to reimplement a few more
-event handlers:
-
                 
                  
-
                   
                •  keyPressEvent() - called whenever a key is pressed, and again
-when a key has been held down long enough for it to auto-repeat.
-Note that the Tab and Shift+Tab keys are only passed to the widget
-if they are not used by the focus-change mechanisms. To force those
-keys to be processed by your widget, you must reimplement
-TQWidget::event().
-
                   
                •  focusInEvent() - called when the widget gains keyboard focus
-(assuming you have called setFocusPolicy()). Well written widgets
-indicate that they own the keyboard focus in a clear but discreet
-way.
-
                   
                •  focusOutEvent() - called when the widget loses keyboard focus.
-
                   
                
-
                 Some widgets will also need to reimplement some of the less common
-event handlers:
-
                 
                  
-
                   
                •  mouseMoveEvent() - called whenever the mouse moves while a
-button is held down. This is useful for, for example, dragging. If
-you call setMouseTracking(TRUE), you get mouse move events even
-when no buttons are held down. (Note that applications which make
-use of mouse tracking are often not very useful on low-bandwidth X
-connections.) (See also the drag and drop
-information.)
-
                   
                •  keyReleaseEvent() - called whenever a key is released, and also
-while it is held down if the key is auto-repeating. In that case
-the widget receives a key release event and immediately a key press
-event for every repeat. Note that the Tab and Shift+Tab keys are
-only passed to the widget if they are not used by the focus-change
-mechanisms. To force those keys to be processed by your widget, you
-must reimplement TQWidget::event().
-
                   
                •  wheelEvent() -- called whenever the user turns the mouse wheel
-while the widget has the focus.
-
                   
                •  enterEvent() - called when the mouse enters the widget's screen
-space. (This excludes screen space owned by any children of the
-widget.)
-
                   
                •  leaveEvent() - called when the mouse leaves the widget's screen
-space.
-
                   
                •  moveEvent() - called when the widget has been moved relative to its
-parent.
-
                   
                •  closeEvent() - called when the user closes the widget (or when
-close() is called).
-
                   
                
-
                 There are also some rather obscure events. They are listed in
-qevent.h and you need to reimplement event() to handle them.
-The default implementation of event() handles Tab and Shift+Tab
-(to move the keyboard focus), and passes on most other events to
-one of the more specialized handlers above.
-
                 When implementing a widget, there are a few more things to
-consider.
-
                 
                  
-
                   
                •  In the constructor, be sure to set up your member variables
-early on, before there's any chance that you might receive an event.
-
                   
                •  It is almost always useful to reimplement sizeHint() and to set
-the correct size policy with setSizePolicy(), so users of your class
-can set up layout management more easily. A size policy lets you
-supply good defaults for the layout management handling, so that
-other widgets can contain and manage yours easily. sizeHint()
-indicates a "good" size for the widget.
-
                   
                •  If your widget is a top-level window, setCaption() and setIcon() set
-the title bar and icon respectively.
-
                   
                
-
                 
                See also TQEvent, TQPainter, TQGridLayout, TQBoxLayout, and Abstract Widget Classes.
-
-
                Member Type Documentation
                
-
                TQWidget::BackgroundOrigin
                
-
-
                 This enum defines the origin used to draw a widget's background
-pixmap.
-
                 The pixmap is drawn using the:
-
                  
-
                • TQWidget::WidgetOrigin - widget's coordinate system.
-
                • TQWidget::ParentOrigin - parent's coordinate system.
-
                • TQWidget::WindowOrigin - top-level window's coordinate system.
-
                • TQWidget::AncestorOrigin - same origin as the parent uses.
-
                
-
                TQWidget::FocusPolicy
                
-
-
                 This enum type defines the various policies a widget can have with
-respect to actquiring keyboard focus.
-
                  
-
                • TQWidget::TabFocus - the widget accepts focus by tabbing.
-
                • TQWidget::ClickFocus - the widget accepts focus by clicking.
-
                • TQWidget::StrongFocus - the widget accepts focus by both tabbing
-and clicking. On Mac OS X this will also
-be indicate that the widget accepts tab focus
-when in 'Text/List focus mode'.
-
                • TQWidget::WheelFocus - like StrongFocus plus the widget accepts
-focus by using the mouse wheel.
-
                • TQWidget::NoFocus - the widget does not accept focus.
-
                 
-
                Member Function Documentation
                
-
                explicit TQWidget::TQWidget ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )
-
                
-Constructs a widget which is a child of parent, with the name
-name and widget flags set to f.
-
                 If parent is 0, the new widget becomes a top-level window. If
-parent is another widget, this widget becomes a child window
-inside parent. The new widget is deleted when its parent is
-deleted.
-
                 The name is sent to the TQObject constructor.
-
                 The widget flags argument, f, is normally 0, but it can be set
-to customize the window frame of a top-level widget (i.e. parent must be 0). To customize the frame, set the WStyle_Customize flag OR'ed with any of the TQt::WidgetFlags.
-
                 If you add a child widget to an already visible widget you must
-explicitly show the child to make it visible.
-
                 Note that the X11 version of TQt may not be able to deliver all
-combinations of style flags on all systems. This is because on
-X11, TQt can only ask the window manager, and the window manager
-can override the application's settings. On Windows, TQt can set
-whatever flags you want.
-
                 Example:
-
                -    TQLabel *splashScreen = new TQLabel( 0, "mySplashScreen",
-                                WStyle_Customize | WStyle_Splash );
-    
                
- 
-
-
                TQWidget::~TQWidget ()
-
                
-Destroys the widget.
-
                 All this widget's children are deleted first. The application
-exits if this widget is the main widget.
-
-
                bool TQWidget::acceptDrops () const
-
                Returns TRUE if drop events are enabled for this widget; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "acceptDrops" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::adjustSize () [virtual slot]
-
                
-Adjusts the size of the widget to fit the contents.
-
                 Uses sizeHint() if valid (i.e if the size hint's width and height
-are >= 0), otherwise sets the size to the children rectangle (the
-union of all child widget geometries).
-
                 
                See also sizeHint and childrenRect.
-
-
                Example: xform/xform.cpp.
-
                Reimplemented in TQMessageBox.
-
                bool TQWidget::autoMask () const
-
                Returns TRUE if the auto mask feature is enabled for the widget; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "autoMask" property for details.
-
                const TQBrush & TQWidget::backgroundBrush () const
-
                Returns the widget's background brush.
-See the "backgroundBrush" property for details.
-
                const TQColor & TQWidget::backgroundColor () const
-
                This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-Use paletteBackgroundColor() or eraseColor() instead. 
-
                BackgroundMode TQWidget::backgroundMode () const
-
                Returns the color role used for painting the background of the widget.
-See the "backgroundMode" property for details.
-
                BackgroundOrigin TQWidget::backgroundOrigin () const
-
                Returns the origin of the widget's background.
-See the "backgroundOrigin" property for details.
-
                const TQPixmap * TQWidget::backgroundPixmap () const
-
                This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-Use paletteBackgroundPixmap()  or erasePixmap() instead. 
-
                Examples: themes/metal.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
-
                TQSize TQWidget::baseSize () const
-
                Returns the base size of the widget.
-See the "baseSize" property for details.
-
                TQString TQWidget::caption () const
-
                Returns the window caption (title).
-See the "caption" property for details.
-
                TQWidget * TQWidget::childAt ( int x, int y, bool includeThis = FALSE ) const
-
                
-Returns the visible child widget at pixel position (x, y) in
-the widget's own coordinate system.
-
                 If includeThis is TRUE, and there is no child visible at (x, y), the widget itself is returned.
-
-
                TQWidget * TQWidget::childAt ( const TQPoint & p, bool includeThis = FALSE ) const
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Returns the visible child widget at point p in the widget's own
-coordinate system.
-
                 If includeThis is TRUE, and there is no child visible at p,
-the widget itself is returned.
-
                 
-
                TQRect TQWidget::childrenRect () const
-
                Returns the bounding rectangle of the widget's children.
-See the "childrenRect" property for details.
-
                TQRegion TQWidget::childrenRegion () const
-
                Returns the combined region occupied by the widget's children.
-See the "childrenRegion" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::clearFocus () [slot]
-
                
-Takes keyboard input focus from the widget.
-
                 If the widget has active focus, a focus out
-    event is sent to this widget to tell it that it is about
-to lose the focus.
-
                 This widget must enable focus setting in order to get the keyboard
-input focus, i.e. it must call setFocusPolicy().
-
                 
                See also focus, setFocus(), focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), focusPolicy, and TQApplication::focusWidget().
-
-
                void TQWidget::clearMask ()
-
                
-Removes any mask set by setMask().
-
                 
                See also setMask().
-
-
                void TQWidget::clearWFlags ( WFlags f ) [protected]
-
                
-
-
                 Clears the widget flags f.
-
                 Widget flags are a combination of TQt::WidgetFlags.
-
                 
                See also testWFlags(), getWFlags(), and setWFlags().
-
-
                TQRegion TQWidget::clipRegion () const
-
                
-Returns the unobscured region where paint events can occur.
-
                 For visible widgets, this is an approximation of the area not
-covered by other widgets; otherwise, this is an empty region.
-
                 The repaint() function calls this function if necessary, so in
-general you do not need to call it.
-
                 
-
                bool TQWidget::close () [slot]
-
                
-
-
                 Closes this widget. Returns TRUE if the widget was closed;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                 First it sends the widget a TQCloseEvent. The widget is hidden if it accepts the close event. The default implementation of
-TQWidget::closeEvent() accepts the close event.
-
                 The TQApplication::lastWindowClosed() signal is emitted when the
-last visible top level widget is closed.
-
                 
-
                Examples: dialog/mainwindow.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, popup/popup.cpp, and toplevel/options.ui.h.
-
                bool TQWidget::close ( bool alsoDelete ) [virtual]
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Closes this widget. Returns TRUE if the widget was closed;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                 If alsoDelete is TRUE or the widget has the WDestructiveClose widget flag, the widget is also deleted. The
-widget can prevent itself from being closed by rejecting the
-TQCloseEvent it gets. A close events is delivered to the widget
-no matter if the widget is visible or not.
-
                 The TQApplication::lastWindowClosed() signal is emitted when the
-last visible top level widget is closed.
-
                 Note that closing the TQApplication::mainWidget() terminates the
-application.
-
                 
                See also closeEvent(), TQCloseEvent, hide(), TQApplication::quit(), TQApplication::setMainWidget(), and TQApplication::lastWindowClosed().
-
-
                void TQWidget::closeEvent ( TQCloseEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This event handler, for event e, can be reimplemented in a
-subclass to receive widget close events.
-
                 The default implementation calls e->accept(), which hides this
-widget. See the TQCloseEvent documentation for more details.
-
                 
                See also event(), hide(), close(), and TQCloseEvent.
-
-
                Examples: action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, chart/chartform.cpp, i18n/mywidget.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, popup/popup.cpp, and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
-
                const TQColorGroup & TQWidget::colorGroup () const
-
                Returns the current color group of the widget palette.
-See the "colorGroup" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::constPolish () const [slot]
-
                
-
-
                 Ensures that the widget is properly initialized by calling
-polish().
-
                 Call constPolish() from functions like sizeHint() that depends on
-the widget being initialized, and that may be called before
-show().
-
                 Warning: Do not call constPolish() on a widget from inside that
-widget's constructor.
-
                 
                See also polish().
-
-
                void TQWidget::contextMenuEvent ( TQContextMenuEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This event handler, for event e, can be reimplemented in a
-subclass to receive widget context menu events.
-
                 The default implementation calls e->ignore(), which rejects the
-context event. See the TQContextMenuEvent documentation for
-more details.
-
                 
                See also event() and TQContextMenuEvent.
-
-
                Example: menu/menu.cpp.
-
                void TQWidget::create ( WId window = 0, bool initializeWindow = TRUE, bool destroyOldWindow = TRUE ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-Creates a new widget window if window is 0, otherwise sets the
-widget's window to window.
-
                 Initializes the window (sets the geometry etc.) if initializeWindow is TRUE. If initializeWindow is FALSE, no
-initialization is performed. This parameter only makes sense if window is a valid window.
-
                 Destroys the old window if destroyOldWindow is TRUE. If destroyOldWindow is FALSE, you are responsible for destroying the
-window yourself (using platform native code).
-
                 The TQWidget constructor calls create(0,TRUE,TRUE) to create a
-window for this widget.
-
-
                const TQCursor & TQWidget::cursor () const
-
                Returns the cursor shape for this widget.
-See the "cursor" property for details.
-
                bool TQWidget::customWhatsThis () const [virtual]
-
                Returns TRUE if the widget wants to handle What's This help manually; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "customWhatsThis" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::destroy ( bool destroyWindow = TRUE, bool destroySubWindows = TRUE ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-Frees up window system resources. Destroys the widget window if destroyWindow is TRUE.
-
                 destroy() calls itself recursively for all the child widgets,
-passing destroySubWindows for the destroyWindow parameter.
-To have more control over destruction of subwidgets, destroy
-subwidgets selectively first.
-
                 This function is usually called from the TQWidget destructor.
-
-
                void TQWidget::dragEnterEvent ( TQDragEnterEvent * ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This event handler is called when a drag is in progress and the
-mouse enters this widget.
-
                 See the Drag-and-drop documentation for an
-overview of how to provide drag-and-drop in your application.
-
                 
                See also TQTextDrag, TQImageDrag, and TQDragEnterEvent.
-
-
                Example: iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp.
-
                void TQWidget::dragLeaveEvent ( TQDragLeaveEvent * ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This event handler is called when a drag is in progress and the
-mouse leaves this widget.
-
                 See the Drag-and-drop documentation for an
-overview of how to provide drag-and-drop in your application.
-
                 
                See also TQTextDrag, TQImageDrag, and TQDragLeaveEvent.
-
-
                void TQWidget::dragMoveEvent ( TQDragMoveEvent * ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This event handler is called when a drag is in progress and the
-mouse enters this widget, and whenever it moves within the widget.
-
                 See the Drag-and-drop documentation for an
-overview of how to provide drag-and-drop in your application.
-
                 
                See also TQTextDrag, TQImageDrag, and TQDragMoveEvent.
-
-
                void TQWidget::drawText ( int x, int y, const TQString & str )
-
                
-Draws the string str at position (x, y).
-
                 The y position is the base line position of the text. The text
-is drawn using the default font and the default foreground color.
-
                 This function is provided for convenience. You will generally get
-more flexible results and often higher speed by using a a painter instead.
-
                 
                See also font, foregroundColor(), and TQPainter::drawText().
-
-
                void TQWidget::drawText ( const TQPoint & pos, const TQString & str )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Draws the string str at position pos.
-
-
                void TQWidget::dropEvent ( TQDropEvent * ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This event handler is called when the drag is dropped on this
-widget.
-
                 See the Drag-and-drop documentation for an
-overview of how to provide drag-and-drop in your application.
-
                 
                See also TQTextDrag, TQImageDrag, and TQDropEvent.
-
-
                Example: iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp.
-
                void TQWidget::enabledChange ( bool oldEnabled ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-
-
                 This virtual function is called from setEnabled(). oldEnabled
-is the previous setting; you can get the new setting from
-isEnabled().
-
                 Reimplement this function if your widget needs to know when it
-becomes enabled or disabled. You will almost certainly need to
-update the widget using update().
-
                 The default implementation repaints the visible part of the
-widget.
-
                 
                See also enabled, enabled, repaint(), update(), and clipRegion().
-
-
                void TQWidget::enterEvent ( TQEvent * ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
-widget enter events.
-
                 An event is sent to the widget when the mouse cursor enters the
-widget.
-
                 
                See also leaveEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), and event().
-
-
                void TQWidget::erase ( int x, int y, int w, int h )
-
                
-Erases the specified area (x, y, w, h) in the widget without
-generating a paint event.
-
                 If w is negative, it is replaced with width() - x. If h
-is negative, it is replaced width height() - y.
-
                 Child widgets are not affected.
-
                 
                See also repaint().
-
-
                void TQWidget::erase ()
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 This version erases the entire widget.
-
-
                void TQWidget::erase ( const TQRect & r )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Erases the specified area r in the widget without generating a
-paint event.
-
-
                void TQWidget::erase ( const TQRegion & reg )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Erases the area defined by reg, without generating a paint event.
-
                 Child widgets are not affected.
-
-
                const TQColor & TQWidget::eraseColor () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the erase color of the widget.
-
                 
                See also setEraseColor(), setErasePixmap(), and backgroundColor().
-
-
                const TQPixmap * TQWidget::erasePixmap () const
-
                
-Returns the widget's erase pixmap.
-
                 
                See also setErasePixmap() and eraseColor().
-
-
                bool TQWidget::event ( TQEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This is the main event handler; it handles event e. You can
-reimplement this function in a subclass, but we recommend using
-one of the specialized event handlers instead.
-
                 The main event handler first passes an event through all event filters that have been
-installed. If none of the filters intercept the event, it calls
-one of the specialized event handlers.
-
                 Key press and release events are treated differently from other
-events. event() checks for Tab and Shift+Tab and tries to move the
-focus appropriately. If there is no widget to move the focus to
-(or the key press is not Tab or Shift+Tab), event() calls
-keyPressEvent().
-
                 This function returns TRUE if it is able to pass the event over to
-someone (i.e. someone wanted the event); otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                 
                See also closeEvent(), focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), enterEvent(), keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), leaveEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), mousePressEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), moveEvent(), paintEvent(), resizeEvent(), TQObject::event(), and TQObject::timerEvent().
-
-
                Reimplemented from TQObject.
-
                TQWidget * TQWidget::find ( WId id ) [static]
-
                
-Returns a pointer to the widget with window identifer/handle id.
-
                 The window identifier type depends on the underlying window
-system, see qwindowdefs.h for the actual definition. If there
-is no widget with this identifier, 0 is returned.
-
-
                TQFocusData * TQWidget::focusData () [protected]
-
                
-Returns the focus data for this widget's top-level widget.
-
                 Focus data always belongs to the top-level widget. The focus data
-list contains all the widgets in this top-level widget that can
-accept focus, in tab order. An iterator points to the current
-focus widget (focusWidget() returns a pointer to this widget).
-
                 This information is useful for implementing advanced versions of
-focusNextPrevChild().
-
-
                void TQWidget::focusInEvent ( TQFocusEvent * ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
-keyboard focus events (focus received) for the widget.
-
                 A widget normally must setFocusPolicy() to something other than
-NoFocus in order to receive focus events. (Note that the
-application programmer can call setFocus() on any widget, even
-those that do not normally accept focus.)
-
                 The default implementation updates the widget (except for toplevel
-widgets that do not specify a focusPolicy() ). It also calls
-setMicroFocusHint(), hinting any system-specific input tools about
-the focus of the user's attention.
-
                 
                See also focusOutEvent(), focusPolicy, keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), event(), and TQFocusEvent.
-
-
                bool TQWidget::focusNextPrevChild ( bool next ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-Finds a new widget to give the keyboard focus to, as appropriate
-for Tab and Shift+Tab, and returns TRUE if is can find a new
-widget and FALSE if it can't,
-
                 If next is TRUE, this function searches "forwards", if next
-is FALSE, it searches "backwards".
-
                 Sometimes, you will want to reimplement this function. For
-example, a web browser might reimplement it to move its "current
-active link" forwards or backwards, and call
-TQWidget::focusNextPrevChild() only when it reaches the last or
-first link on the "page".
-
                 Child widgets call focusNextPrevChild() on their parent widgets,
-but only the top-level widget decides where to redirect focus. By
-overriding this method for an object, you thus gain control of
-focus traversal for all child widgets.
-
                 Warning: TQScrollView uses it own logic for this function, which
-does the right thing in most cases. But if you are using a
-TQScrollView and want complete control of the focus chain you'll
-need to override TQScrollView::focusNextPrevChild() and your
-top-level widgets' focusNextPrevChild() functions.
-
                 
                See also focusData().
-
-
                void TQWidget::focusOutEvent ( TQFocusEvent * ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
-keyboard focus events (focus lost) for the widget.
-
                 A widget normally must setFocusPolicy() to something other than
-NoFocus in order to receive focus events. (Note that the
-application programmer can call setFocus() on any widget, even
-those that do not normally accept focus.)
-
                 The default implementation updates the widget (except for toplevel
-widgets that do not specify a focusPolicy() ). It also calls
-setMicroFocusHint(), hinting any system-specific input tools about
-the focus of the user's attention.
-
                 
                See also focusInEvent(), focusPolicy, keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), event(), and TQFocusEvent.
-
-
                Example: qmag/qmag.cpp.
-
                FocusPolicy TQWidget::focusPolicy () const
-
                Returns the way the widget accepts keyboard focus.
-See the "focusPolicy" property for details.
-
                TQWidget * TQWidget::focusProxy () const
-
                
-Returns the focus proxy, or 0 if there is no focus proxy.
-
                 
                See also setFocusProxy().
-
-
                TQWidget * TQWidget::focusWidget () const
-
                
-Returns the focus widget in this widget's window. This is not the
-same as TQApplication::focusWidget(), which returns the focus
-widget in the currently active window.
-
-
                TQFont TQWidget::font () const
-
                Returns the font currently set for the widget.
-See the "font" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::fontChange ( const TQFont & oldFont ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-
-
                 This virtual function is called from setFont(). oldFont is the
-previous font; you can get the new font from font().
-
                 Reimplement this function if your widget needs to know when its
-font changes. You will almost certainly need to update the widget
-using update().
-
                 The default implementation updates the widget including its
-geometry.
-
                 
                See also font, font, update(), and updateGeometry().
-
-
                TQFontInfo TQWidget::fontInfo () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the font info for the widget's current font.
-Equivalent to TQFontInto(widget->font()).
-
                 
                See also font, fontMetrics(), and font.
-
-
                TQFontMetrics TQWidget::fontMetrics () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the font metrics for the widget's current font.
-Equivalent to TQFontMetrics(widget->font()).
-
                 
                See also font, fontInfo(), and font.
-
-
                Examples: drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp and qmag/qmag.cpp.
-
                const TQColor & TQWidget::foregroundColor () const
-
                
-Same as paletteForegroundColor()
-
-
                TQRect TQWidget::frameGeometry () const
-
                Returns geometry of the widget relative to its parent including any window frame.
-See the "frameGeometry" property for details.
-
                TQSize TQWidget::frameSize () const
-
                Returns the size of the widget including any window frame.
-See the "frameSize" property for details.
-
                const TQRect & TQWidget::geometry () const
-
                Returns the geometry of the widget relative to its parent and excluding the window frame.
-See the "geometry" property for details.
-
                WFlags TQWidget::getWFlags () const [protected]
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the widget flags for this this widget.
-
                 Widget flags are a combination of TQt::WidgetFlags.
-
                 
                See also testWFlags(), setWFlags(), and clearWFlags().
-
-
                void TQWidget::grabKeyboard ()
-
                
-Grabs the keyboard input.
-
                 This widget reveives all keyboard events until releaseKeyboard()
-is called; other widgets get no keyboard events at all. Mouse
-events are not affected. Use grabMouse() if you want to grab that.
-
                 The focus widget is not affected, except that it doesn't receive
-any keyboard events. setFocus() moves the focus as usual, but the
-new focus widget receives keyboard events only after
-releaseKeyboard() is called.
-
                 If a different widget is currently grabbing keyboard input, that
-widget's grab is released first.
-
                 
                See also releaseKeyboard(), grabMouse(), releaseMouse(), and focusWidget().
-
-
                void TQWidget::grabMouse ()
-
                
-Grabs the mouse input.
-
                 This widget receives all mouse events until releaseMouse() is
-called; other widgets get no mouse events at all. Keyboard
-events are not affected. Use grabKeyboard() if you want to grab
-that.
-
                 Warning: Bugs in mouse-grabbing applications very often lock the
-terminal. Use this function with extreme caution, and consider
-using the -nograb command line option while debugging.
-
                 It is almost never necessary to grab the mouse when using TQt, as
-TQt grabs and releases it sensibly. In particular, TQt grabs the
-mouse when a mouse button is pressed and keeps it until the last
-button is released.
-
                 Note that only visible widgets can grab mouse input. If
-isVisible() returns FALSE for a widget, that widget cannot call
-grabMouse().
-
                 
                See also releaseMouse(), grabKeyboard(), releaseKeyboard(), grabKeyboard(), and focusWidget().
-
-
                void TQWidget::grabMouse ( const TQCursor & cursor )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Grabs the mouse input and changes the cursor shape.
-
                 The cursor will assume shape cursor (for as long as the mouse
-focus is grabbed) and this widget will be the only one to receive
-mouse events until releaseMouse() is called().
-
                 Warning: Grabbing the mouse might lock the terminal.
-
                 
                See also releaseMouse(), grabKeyboard(), releaseKeyboard(), and cursor.
-
-
                bool TQWidget::hasFocus () const
-
                Returns TRUE if this widget (or its focus proxy) has the keyboard input focus; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "focus" property for details.
-
                bool TQWidget::hasMouse () const
-
                Returns TRUE if the widget is under the mouse cursor; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "underMouse" property for details.
-
                bool TQWidget::hasMouseTracking () const
-
                Returns TRUE if mouse tracking is enabled for the widget; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "mouseTracking" property for details.
-
                int TQWidget::height () const
-
                Returns the height of the widget excluding any window frame.
-See the "height" property for details.
-
                int TQWidget::heightForWidth ( int w ) const [virtual]
-
                
-Returns the preferred height for this widget, given the width w. The default implementation returns 0, indicating that the
-preferred height does not depend on the width.
-
                 Warning: Does not look at the widget's layout.
-
-
                Reimplemented in TQMenuBar and TQTextEdit.
-
                void TQWidget::hide () [virtual slot]
-
                
-Hides the widget.
-
                 You almost never have to reimplement this function. If you need to
-do something after a widget is hidden, use hideEvent() instead.
-
                 
                See also hideEvent(), hidden, show(), showMinimized(), visible, and close().
-
-
                Examples: mdi/application.cpp, popup/popup.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, webbrowser/mainwindow.ui.h, and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                Reimplemented in TQMenuBar.
-
                void TQWidget::hideEvent ( TQHideEvent * ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
-widget hide events.
-
                 Hide events are sent to widgets immediately after they have been
-hidden.
-
                 
                See also event() and TQHideEvent.
-
-
                Reimplemented in TQScrollBar.
-
                const TQPixmap * TQWidget::icon () const
-
                Returns the widget's icon.
-See the "icon" property for details.
-
                TQString TQWidget::iconText () const
-
                Returns the widget's icon text.
-See the "iconText" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::iconify () [slot]
-
                 
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                 
-
                void TQWidget::imComposeEvent ( TQIMEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This event handler, for event e, can be reimplemented in a
-subclass to receive Input Method composition events. This handler
-is called when the user has entered some text using an Input Method.
-
                 The default implementation calls e->ignore(), which rejects the
-Input Method event. See the TQIMEvent documentation for more
-details.
-
                 
                See also event() and TQIMEvent.
-
-
                void TQWidget::imEndEvent ( TQIMEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This event handler, for event e, can be reimplemented in a
-subclass to receive Input Method composition events. This handler
-is called when the user has finished inputting text via an Input
-Method.
-
                 The default implementation calls e->ignore(), which rejects the
-Input Method event. See the TQIMEvent documentation for more
-details.
-
                 
                See also event() and TQIMEvent.
-
-
                void TQWidget::imStartEvent ( TQIMEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This event handler, for event e, can be reimplemented in a
-subclass to receive Input Method composition events. This handler
-is called when the user begins entering text using an Input Method.
-
                 The default implementation calls e->ignore(), which rejects the
-Input Method event. See the TQIMEvent documentation for more
-details.
-
                 
                See also event() and TQIMEvent.
-
-
                bool TQWidget::isActiveWindow () const
-
                Returns TRUE if this widget is the active window; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "isActiveWindow" property for details.
-
                bool TQWidget::isDesktop () const
-
                Returns TRUE if the widget is a desktop widget, i.e. represents the desktop; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "isDesktop" property for details.
-
                bool TQWidget::isDialog () const
-
                Returns TRUE if the widget is a dialog widget; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "isDialog" property for details.
-
                bool TQWidget::isEnabled () const
-
                Returns TRUE if the widget is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "enabled" property for details.
-
                bool TQWidget::isEnabledTo ( TQWidget * ancestor ) const
-
                
-Returns TRUE if this widget would become enabled if ancestor is
-enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                 This is the case if neither the widget itself nor every parent up
-to but excluding ancestor has been explicitly disabled.
-
                 isEnabledTo(0) is equivalent to isEnabled().
-
                 
                See also enabled and enabled.
-
-
                bool TQWidget::isEnabledToTLW () const
-
                
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                 This function is deprecated. It is equivalent to isEnabled()
-
-
                bool TQWidget::isFocusEnabled () const
-
                Returns TRUE if the widget accepts keyboard focus; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "focusEnabled" property for details.
-
                bool TQWidget::isFullScreen () const
-
                Returns TRUE if the widget is full screen; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "fullScreen" property for details.
-
                bool TQWidget::isHidden () const
-
                Returns TRUE if the widget is explicitly hidden; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "hidden" property for details.
-
                bool TQWidget::isInputMethodEnabled () const
-
                Returns enables or disables the use of input methods for this widget.
-See the "inputMethodEnabled" property for details.
-
                bool TQWidget::isMaximized () const
-
                Returns TRUE if this widget is maximized; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "maximized" property for details.
-
                bool TQWidget::isMinimized () const
-
                Returns TRUE if this widget is minimized (iconified); otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "minimized" property for details.
-
                bool TQWidget::isModal () const
-
                Returns TRUE if the widget is a modal widget; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "isModal" property for details.
-
                bool TQWidget::isPopup () const
-
                Returns TRUE if the widget is a popup widget; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "isPopup" property for details.
-
                bool TQWidget::isShown () const
-
                Returns TRUE if the widget is shown; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "shown" property for details.
-
                bool TQWidget::isTopLevel () const
-
                Returns TRUE if the widget is a top-level widget; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "isTopLevel" property for details.
-
                bool TQWidget::isUpdatesEnabled () const
-
                Returns TRUE if updates are enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "updatesEnabled" property for details.
-
                bool TQWidget::isVisible () const
-
                Returns TRUE if the widget is visible; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "visible" property for details.
-
                bool TQWidget::isVisibleTo ( TQWidget * ancestor ) const
-
                
-Returns TRUE if this widget would become visible if ancestor is
-shown; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                 The TRUE case occurs if neither the widget itself nor any parent
-up to but excluding ancestor has been explicitly hidden.
-
                 This function will still return TRUE if the widget is obscured by
-other windows on the screen, but could be physically visible if it
-or they were to be moved.
-
                 isVisibleTo(0) is identical to isVisible().
-
                 
                See also show(), hide(), and visible.
-
-
                bool TQWidget::isVisibleToTLW () const
-
                
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                 This function is deprecated. It is equivalent to isVisible()
-
-
                void TQWidget::keyPressEvent ( TQKeyEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This event handler, for event e, can be reimplemented in a
-subclass to receive key press events for the widget.
-
                 A widget must call setFocusPolicy() to accept focus initially and
-have focus in order to receive a key press event.
-
                 If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you
-explicitly ignore the event
-if you do not understand it, so that the widget's parent can
-interpret it; otherwise, the event will be implicitly accepted.
-Although top-level widgets are able to choose whether to accept
-or ignore unknown events because they have no parent widgets that
-could otherwise handle them, it is good practice to explicitly
-ignore events to make widgets as reusable as possible.
-
                 The default implementation closes popup widgets if the user
-presses Esc. Otherwise the event is ignored.
-
                 
                See also keyReleaseEvent(), TQKeyEvent::ignore(), focusPolicy, focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), event(), and TQKeyEvent.
-
-
                Example: picture/picture.cpp.
-
                Reimplemented in TQLineEdit and TQTextEdit.
-
                void TQWidget::keyReleaseEvent ( TQKeyEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This event handler, for event e, can be reimplemented in a
-subclass to receive key release events for the widget.
-
                 A widget must accept focus
-initially and have focus in order to
-receive a key release event.
-
                 If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you
-ignore() the release if you do not
-understand it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it.
-
                 The default implementation ignores the event.
-
                 
                See also keyPressEvent(), TQKeyEvent::ignore(), focusPolicy, focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), event(), and TQKeyEvent.
-
-
                TQWidget * TQWidget::keyboardGrabber () [static]
-
                
-Returns the widget that is currently grabbing the keyboard input.
-
                 If no widget in this application is currently grabbing the
-keyboard, 0 is returned.
-
                 
                See also grabMouse() and mouseGrabber().
-
-
                TQLayout * TQWidget::layout () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the layout engine that manages the geometry of this
-widget's children.
-
                 If the widget does not have a layout, layout() returns 0.
-
                 
                See also sizePolicy.
-
-
                Examples: chart/optionsform.cpp and fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp.
-
                void TQWidget::leaveEvent ( TQEvent * ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
-widget leave events.
-
                 A leave event is sent to the widget when the mouse cursor leaves
-the widget.
-
                 
                See also enterEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), and event().
-
-
                void TQWidget::lower () [slot]
-
                
-Lowers the widget to the bottom of the parent widget's stack.
-
                 After this call the widget will be visually behind (and therefore
-obscured by) any overlapping sibling widgets.
-
                 
                See also raise() and stackUnder().
-
-
                bool TQWidget::macEvent ( MSG * ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This special event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to
-receive native Macintosh events.
-
                 In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to stop the
-event being handled by TQt, return TRUE. If you return FALSE, this
-native event is passed back to TQt, which translates the event into
-a TQt event and sends it to the widget.
-
                 Warning: This function is not portable.
-
                 
                See also TQApplication::macEventFilter().
-
-
                TQPoint TQWidget::mapFrom ( TQWidget * parent, const TQPoint & pos ) const
-
                
-Translates the widget coordinate pos from the coordinate system
-of parent to this widget's coordinate system. The parent
-must not be 0 and must be a parent of the calling widget.
-
                 
                See also mapTo(), mapFromParent(), mapFromGlobal(), and underMouse.
-
-
                TQPoint TQWidget::mapFromGlobal ( const TQPoint & pos ) const
-
                
-Translates the global screen coordinate pos to widget
-coordinates.
-
                 
                See also mapToGlobal(), mapFrom(), and mapFromParent().
-
-
                TQPoint TQWidget::mapFromParent ( const TQPoint & pos ) const
-
                
-Translates the parent widget coordinate pos to widget
-coordinates.
-
                 Same as mapFromGlobal() if the widget has no parent.
-
                 
                See also mapToParent(), mapFrom(), mapFromGlobal(), and underMouse.
-
-
                TQPoint TQWidget::mapTo ( TQWidget * parent, const TQPoint & pos ) const
-
                
-Translates the widget coordinate pos to the coordinate system
-of parent. The parent must not be 0 and must be a parent
-of the calling widget.
-
                 
                See also mapFrom(), mapToParent(), mapToGlobal(), and underMouse.
-
-
                TQPoint TQWidget::mapToGlobal ( const TQPoint & pos ) const
-
                
-Translates the widget coordinate pos to global screen
-coordinates. For example, mapToGlobal(TQPoint(0,0)) would give
-the global coordinates of the top-left pixel of the widget.
-
                 
                See also mapFromGlobal(), mapTo(), and mapToParent().
-
-
                Example: scribble/scribble.cpp.
-
                TQPoint TQWidget::mapToParent ( const TQPoint & pos ) const
-
                
-Translates the widget coordinate pos to a coordinate in the
-parent widget.
-
                 Same as mapToGlobal() if the widget has no parent.
-
                 
                See also mapFromParent(), mapTo(), mapToGlobal(), and underMouse.
-
-
                int TQWidget::maximumHeight () const
-
                Returns the widget's maximum height.
-See the "maximumHeight" property for details.
-
                TQSize TQWidget::maximumSize () const
-
                Returns the widget's maximum size.
-See the "maximumSize" property for details.
-
                int TQWidget::maximumWidth () const
-
                Returns the widget's maximum width.
-See the "maximumWidth" property for details.
-
                int TQWidget::metric ( int m ) const [virtual protected]
-
                
-Internal implementation of the virtual TQPaintDevice::metric()
-function.
-
                 Use the TQPaintDeviceMetrics class instead.
-
                 m is the metric to get.
-
-
                TQRect TQWidget::microFocusHint () const
-
                Returns the currently set micro focus hint for this widget.
-See the "microFocusHint" property for details.
-
                int TQWidget::minimumHeight () const
-
                Returns the widget's minimum height.
-See the "minimumHeight" property for details.
-
                TQSize TQWidget::minimumSize () const
-
                Returns the widget's minimum size.
-See the "minimumSize" property for details.
-
                TQSize TQWidget::minimumSizeHint () const [virtual]
-
                Returns the recommended minimum size for the widget.
-See the "minimumSizeHint" property for details.
-
                Reimplemented in TQLineEdit.
-
                int TQWidget::minimumWidth () const
-
                Returns the widget's minimum width.
-See the "minimumWidth" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::mouseDoubleClickEvent ( TQMouseEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This event handler, for event e, can be reimplemented in a
-subclass to receive mouse double click events for the widget.
-
                 The default implementation generates a normal mouse press event.
-
                 Note that the widgets gets a mousePressEvent() and a
-mouseReleaseEvent() before the mouseDoubleClickEvent().
-
                 
                See also mousePressEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), event(), and TQMouseEvent.
-
-
                TQWidget * TQWidget::mouseGrabber () [static]
-
                
-Returns the widget that is currently grabbing the mouse input.
-
                 If no widget in this application is currently grabbing the mouse,
-0 is returned.
-
                 
                See also grabMouse() and keyboardGrabber().
-
-
                void TQWidget::mouseMoveEvent ( TQMouseEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This event handler, for event e, can be reimplemented in a
-subclass to receive mouse move events for the widget.
-
                 If mouse tracking is switched off, mouse move events only occur if
-a mouse button is pressed while the mouse is being moved. If mouse
-tracking is switched on, mouse move events occur even if no mouse
-button is pressed.
-
                 TQMouseEvent::pos() reports the position of the mouse cursor,
-relative to this widget. For press and release events, the
-position is usually the same as the position of the last mouse
-move event, but it might be different if the user's hand shakes.
-This is a feature of the underlying window system, not TQt.
-
                 
                See also mouseTracking, mousePressEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), event(), and TQMouseEvent.
-
-
                Examples: aclock/aclock.cpp, drawlines/connect.cpp, iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp, life/life.cpp, popup/popup.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, and scribble/scribble.cpp.
-
                Reimplemented in TQSizeGrip.
-
                void TQWidget::mousePressEvent ( TQMouseEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This event handler, for event e, can be reimplemented in a
-subclass to receive mouse press events for the widget.
-
                 If you create new widgets in the mousePressEvent() the
-mouseReleaseEvent() may not end up where you expect, depending on
-the underlying window system (or X11 window manager), the widgets'
-location and maybe more.
-
                 The default implementation implements the closing of popup widgets
-when you click outside the window. For other widget types it does
-nothing.
-
                 
                See also mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), event(), and TQMouseEvent.
-
-
                Examples: biff/biff.cpp, drawlines/connect.cpp, iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp, life/life.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, and tooltip/tooltip.cpp.
-
                Reimplemented in TQSizeGrip.
-
                void TQWidget::mouseReleaseEvent ( TQMouseEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This event handler, for event e, can be reimplemented in a
-subclass to receive mouse release events for the widget.
-
                 
                See also mouseDoubleClickEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), event(), and TQMouseEvent.
-
-
                Examples: drawlines/connect.cpp, hello/hello.cpp, popup/popup.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, and t14/cannon.cpp.
-
                void TQWidget::move ( const TQPoint & ) [slot]
-
                Sets the position of the widget within its parent widget.
-See the "pos" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::move ( int x, int y ) [virtual slot]
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 This corresponds to move( TQPoint(x, y) ).
-
-
                void TQWidget::moveEvent ( TQMoveEvent * ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
-widget move events. When the widget receives this event, it is
-already at the new position.
-
                 The old position is accessible through TQMoveEvent::oldPos().
-
                 
                See also resizeEvent(), event(), pos, and TQMoveEvent.
-
-
                bool TQWidget::ownCursor () const
-
                Returns TRUE if the widget uses its own cursor; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "ownCursor" property for details.
-
                bool TQWidget::ownFont () const
-
                Returns TRUE if the widget uses its own font; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "ownFont" property for details.
-
                bool TQWidget::ownPalette () const
-
                Returns TRUE if the widget uses its own palette; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "ownPalette" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::paintEvent ( TQPaintEvent * ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
-paint events.
-
                 A paint event is a request to repaint all or part of the widget.
-It can happen as a result of repaint() or update(), or because the
-widget was obscured and has now been uncovered, or for many other
-reasons.
-
                 Many widgets can simply repaint their entire surface when asked
-to, but some slow widgets need to optimize by painting only the
-requested region: TQPaintEvent::region(). This speed optimization
-does not change the result, as painting is clipped to that region
-during event processing. TQListView and TQCanvas do this, for
-example.
-
                 TQt also tries to speed up painting by merging multiple paint
-events into one. When update() is called several times or the
-window system sends several paint events, TQt merges these events
-into one event with a larger region (see TQRegion::unite()).
-repaint() does not permit this optimization, so we suggest using
-update() when possible.
-
                 When the paint event occurs, the update region has normally been
-erased, so that you're painting on the widget's background. There
-are a couple of exceptions and TQPaintEvent::erased() tells you
-whether the widget has been erased or not.
-
                 The background can be set using setBackgroundMode(),
-setPaletteBackgroundColor() or setBackgroundPixmap(). The
-documentation for setBackgroundMode() elaborates on the
-background; we recommend reading it.
-
                 
                See also event(), repaint(), update(), TQPainter, TQPixmap, and TQPaintEvent.
-
-
                Examples: drawlines/connect.cpp, forever/forever.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, splitter/splitter.cpp, t8/cannon.cpp, and t9/cannon.cpp.
-
                Reimplemented in TQButton, TQFrame, TQGLWidget, TQSizeGrip, TQStatusBar, and TQTabBar.
-
                const TQPalette & TQWidget::palette () const
-
                Returns the widget's palette.
-See the "palette" property for details.
-
                const TQColor & TQWidget::paletteBackgroundColor () const
-
                Returns the background color of the widget.
-See the "paletteBackgroundColor" property for details.
-
                const TQPixmap * TQWidget::paletteBackgroundPixmap () const
-
                Returns the background pixmap of the widget.
-See the "paletteBackgroundPixmap" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::paletteChange ( const TQPalette & oldPalette ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-
-
                 This virtual function is called from setPalette(). oldPalette
-is the previous palette; you can get the new palette from
-palette().
-
                 Reimplement this function if your widget needs to know when its
-palette changes.
-
                 
                See also palette and palette.
-
-
                const TQColor & TQWidget::paletteForegroundColor () const
-
                Returns the foreground color of the widget.
-See the "paletteForegroundColor" property for details.
-
                TQWidget * TQWidget::parentWidget ( bool sameWindow = FALSE ) const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the parent of this widget, or 0 if it does not have any
-parent widget. If sameWindow is TRUE and the widget is top
-level returns 0; otherwise returns the widget's parent.
-
-
                Example: mdi/application.cpp.
-
                void TQWidget::polish () [virtual slot]
-
                
-Delayed initialization of a widget.
-
                 This function will be called after a widget has been fully
-created and before it is shown the very first time.
-
                 Polishing is useful for final initialization which depends on
-having an instantiated widget. This is something a constructor
-cannot guarantee since the initialization of the subclasses might
-not be finished.
-
                 After this function, the widget has a proper font and palette and
-TQApplication::polish() has been called.
-
                 Remember to call TQWidget's implementation first when reimplementing this
-function to ensure that your program does not end up in infinite recursion.
-
                 
                See also constPolish() and TQApplication::polish().
-
-
                Example: menu/menu.cpp.
-
                TQPoint TQWidget::pos () const
-
                Returns the position of the widget within its parent widget.
-See the "pos" property for details.
-
                bool TQWidget::qwsEvent ( TQWSEvent * ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This special event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to
-receive native TQt/Embedded events.
-
                 In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to stop the
-event being handled by TQt, return TRUE. If you return FALSE, this
-native event is passed back to TQt, which translates the event into
-a TQt event and sends it to the widget.
-
                 Warning: This function is not portable.
-
                 
                See also TQApplication::qwsEventFilter().
-
-
                void TQWidget::raise () [slot]
-
                
-Raises this widget to the top of the parent widget's stack.
-
                 After this call the widget will be visually in front of any
-overlapping sibling widgets.
-
                 
                See also lower() and stackUnder().
-
-
                Example: showimg/showimg.cpp.
-
                void TQWidget::recreate ( TQWidget * parent, WFlags f, const TQPoint & p, bool showIt = FALSE )
-
                
-
-
                 This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                 This method is provided to aid porting from TQt 1.0 to 2.0. It has
-been renamed reparent() in TQt 2.0.
-
-
                TQRect TQWidget::rect () const
-
                Returns the internal geometry of the widget excluding any window frame.
-See the "rect" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::releaseKeyboard ()
-
                
-Releases the keyboard grab.
-
                 
                See also grabKeyboard(), grabMouse(), and releaseMouse().
-
-
                void TQWidget::releaseMouse ()
-
                
-Releases the mouse grab.
-
                 
                See also grabMouse(), grabKeyboard(), and releaseKeyboard().
-
-
                void TQWidget::repaint ( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool erase = TRUE ) [slot]
-
                
-Repaints the widget directly by calling paintEvent() immediately,
-unless updates are disabled or the widget is hidden.
-
                 If erase is TRUE, TQt erases the area (x, y, w, h) before the
-paintEvent() call.
-
                 If w is negative, it is replaced with width() - x, and if
-h is negative, it is replaced width height() - y.
-
                 We suggest only using repaint() if you need an immediate repaint,
-for example during animation. In almost all circumstances update()
-is better, as it permits TQt to optimize for speed and minimize
-flicker.
-
                 Warning: If you call repaint() in a function which may itself be
-called from paintEvent(), you may get infinite recursion. The
-update() function never causes recursion.
-
                 
                See also update(), paintEvent(), updatesEnabled, and erase().
-
-
                Example: qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
-
                void TQWidget::repaint () [slot]
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 This version erases and repaints the entire widget.
-
-
                void TQWidget::repaint ( bool erase ) [slot]
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 This version repaints the entire widget.
-
-
                void TQWidget::repaint ( const TQRect & r, bool erase = TRUE ) [slot]
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Repaints the widget directly by calling paintEvent() directly,
-unless updates are disabled or the widget is hidden.
-
                 Erases the widget region r if erase is TRUE.
-
-
                void TQWidget::repaint ( const TQRegion & reg, bool erase = TRUE ) [slot]
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Repaints the widget directly by calling paintEvent() directly,
-unless updates are disabled or the widget is hidden.
-
                 Erases the widget region reg if erase is TRUE.
-
                 Only use repaint if your widget needs to be repainted immediately,
-for example when doing some animation. In all other cases, use
-update(). Calling update() many times in a row will generate a
-single paint event.
-
                 Warning: If you call repaint() in a function which may itself be
-called from paintEvent(), you may get infinite recursion. The
-update() function never causes recursion.
-
                 
                See also update(), paintEvent(), updatesEnabled, and erase().
-
-
                void TQWidget::reparent ( TQWidget * parent, WFlags f, const TQPoint & p, bool showIt = FALSE ) [virtual]
-
                
-Reparents the widget. The widget gets a new parent, new widget
-flags (f, but as usual, use 0) at a new position in its new
-parent (p).
-
                 If showIt is TRUE, show() is called once the widget has been
-reparented.
-
                 If the new parent widget is in a different top-level widget, the
-reparented widget and its children are appended to the end of the
-tab chain of the new parent
-widget, in the same internal order as before. If one of the moved
-widgets had keyboard focus, reparent() calls clearFocus() for that
-widget.
-
                 If the new parent widget is in the same top-level widget as the
-old parent, reparent doesn't change the tab order or keyboard
-focus.
-
                 Warning: It is extremely unlikely that you will ever need this
-function. If you have a widget that changes its content
-dynamically, it is far easier to use TQWidgetStack or TQWizard.
-
                 
                See also getWFlags().
-
-
                Example: toplevel/options.ui.h.
-
                void TQWidget::reparent ( TQWidget * parent, const TQPoint & p, bool showIt = FALSE )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 A convenience version of reparent that does not take widget flags
-as argument.
-
                 Calls reparent(parent, getWFlags() & ~WType_Mask, p, showIt).
-
-
                void TQWidget::resetInputContext () [protected]
-
                
-This function is called when the user finishes input composition,
-e.g. changes focus to another widget, moves the cursor, etc.
-
-
                void TQWidget::resize ( const TQSize & ) [slot]
-
                Sets the size of the widget excluding any window frame.
-See the "size" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::resize ( int w, int h ) [virtual slot]
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 This corresponds to resize( TQSize(w, h) ).
-
-
                void TQWidget::resizeEvent ( TQResizeEvent * ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
-widget resize events. When resizeEvent() is called, the widget
-already has its new geometry. The old size is accessible through
-TQResizeEvent::oldSize().
-
                 The widget will be erased and receive a paint event immediately
-after processing the resize event. No drawing need be (or should
-be) done inside this handler.
-
                 Widgets that have been created with the WNoAutoErase flag
-will not be erased. Nevertheless, they will receive a paint event
-for their entire area afterwards. Again, no drawing needs to be
-done inside this handler.
-
                 The default implementation calls updateMask() if the widget has
-automatic masking enabled.
-
                 
                See also moveEvent(), event(), size, TQResizeEvent, and paintEvent().
-
-
                Examples: drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, tooltip/tooltip.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                Reimplemented in TQFrame and TQGLWidget.
-
                void TQWidget::scroll ( int dx, int dy )
-
                
-Scrolls the widget including its children dx pixels to the
-right and dy downwards. Both dx and dy may be negative.
-
                 After scrolling, scroll() sends a paint event for the the part
-that is read but not written. For example, when scrolling 10
-pixels rightwards, the leftmost ten pixels of the widget need
-repainting. The paint event may be delivered immediately or later,
-depending on some heuristics (note that you might have to force
-processing of paint events using TQApplication::sendPostedEvents()
-when using scroll() and move() in combination).
-
                 
                See also TQScrollView, erase(), and bitBlt().
-
-
                void TQWidget::scroll ( int dx, int dy, const TQRect & r )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 This version only scrolls r and does not move the children of
-the widget.
-
                 If r is empty or invalid, the result is undefined.
-
                 
                See also TQScrollView, erase(), and bitBlt().
-
-
                void TQWidget::setAcceptDrops ( bool on ) [virtual]
-
                Sets whether drop events are enabled for this widget to on.
-See the "acceptDrops" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::setActiveWindow () [virtual]
-
                
-Sets the top-level widget containing this widget to be the active
-window.
-
                 An active window is a visible top-level window that has the
-keyboard input focus.
-
                 This function performs the same operation as clicking the mouse on
-the title bar of a top-level window. On X11, the result depends on
-the Window Manager. If you want to ensure that the window is
-stacked on top as well you should also call raise(). Note that the
-window must be visible, otherwise setActiveWindow() has no effect.
-
                 On Windows, if you are calling this when the application is not
-currently the active one then it will not make it the active
-window.  It will flash the task bar entry blue to indicate that
-the window has done something. This is because Microsoft do not
-allow an application to interrupt what the user is currently doing
-in another application.
-
                 
                See also isActiveWindow, topLevelWidget(), and show().
-
-
                Reimplemented in TQXtWidget.
-
                void TQWidget::setAutoMask ( bool ) [virtual]
-
                Sets whether the auto mask feature is enabled for the widget.
-See the "autoMask" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::setBackgroundColor ( const TQColor & c ) [virtual]
-
                This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-Use setPaletteBackgroundColor() or setEraseColor() instead. 
-
                Examples: customlayout/main.cpp, desktop/desktop.cpp, hello/main.cpp, movies/main.cpp, and splitter/splitter.cpp.
-
                void TQWidget::setBackgroundMode ( BackgroundMode ) [virtual]
-
                Sets the color role used for painting the background of the widget.
-See the "backgroundMode" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::setBackgroundMode ( BackgroundMode m, BackgroundMode visual )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Sets the widget's own background mode to m and the visual
-background mode to visual. The visual background mode is used
-with the designable properties backgroundColor, foregroundColor and backgroundPixmap.
-
                 For complex controls, the logical background mode sometimes
-differs from a widget's own background mode. A spinbox for example
-has PaletteBackground as background mode (typically dark gray),
-while it's embedded lineedit control uses PaletteBase
-(typically white). Since the lineedit covers most of the visual
-area of a spinbox, it defines PaletteBase to be its visual
-background mode. Changing the backgroundColor property thus
-changes the lineedit control's background, which is exactly what
-the user expects in TQt Designer.
-
-
                void TQWidget::setBackgroundOrigin ( BackgroundOrigin ) [virtual]
-
                Sets the origin of the widget's background.
-See the "backgroundOrigin" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::setBackgroundPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pm ) [virtual]
-
                This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-Use setPaletteBackgroundPixmap() or setErasePixmap() instead. 
-
                Example: desktop/desktop.cpp.
-
                void TQWidget::setBaseSize ( const TQSize & )
-
                Sets the base size of the widget.
-See the "baseSize" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::setBaseSize ( int basew, int baseh )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 This corresponds to setBaseSize( TQSize(basew, baseh) ). Sets
-the widgets base size to width basew and height baseh.
-
-
                void TQWidget::setCaption ( const TQString & ) [virtual slot]
-
                Sets the window caption (title).
-See the "caption" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::setCursor ( const TQCursor & ) [virtual]
-
                Sets the cursor shape for this widget.
-See the "cursor" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::setDisabled ( bool disable ) [slot]
-
                
-Disables widget input events if disable is TRUE; otherwise
-enables input events.
-
                 See the enabled documentation for more information.
-
                 
                See also isEnabledTo(), TQKeyEvent, TQMouseEvent, and enabledChange().
-
-
                void TQWidget::setEnabled ( bool ) [virtual slot]
-
                Sets whether the widget is enabled.
-See the "enabled" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::setEraseColor ( const TQColor & color ) [virtual]
-
                
-Sets the erase color of the widget to color.
-
                 The erase color is the color the widget is to be cleared to before
-paintEvent() is called. If there is an erase pixmap (set using
-setErasePixmap()), then this property has an indeterminate value.
-
                 
                See also erasePixmap(), backgroundColor(), backgroundMode, and palette.
-
-
                void TQWidget::setErasePixmap ( const TQPixmap & pixmap ) [virtual]
-
                
-Sets the widget's erase pixmap to pixmap.
-
                 This pixmap is used to clear the widget before paintEvent() is
-called.
-
-
                void TQWidget::setFixedHeight ( int h )
-
                
-Sets both the minimum and maximum heights of the widget to h
-without changing the widths. Provided for convenience.
-
                 
                See also sizeHint, minimumSize, maximumSize, and setFixedSize().
-
-
                Examples: fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp, layout/layout.cpp, qdir/qdir.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-
                void TQWidget::setFixedSize ( const TQSize & s )
-
                
-Sets both the minimum and maximum sizes of the widget to s,
-thereby preventing it from ever growing or shrinking.
-
                 
                See also maximumSize and minimumSize.
-
-
                void TQWidget::setFixedSize ( int w, int h )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Sets the width of the widget to w and the height to h.
-
-
                void TQWidget::setFixedWidth ( int w )
-
                
-Sets both the minimum and maximum width of the widget to w
-without changing the heights. Provided for convenience.
-
                 
                See also sizeHint, minimumSize, maximumSize, and setFixedSize().
-
-
                Examples: progressbar/progressbar.cpp and qdir/qdir.cpp.
-
                void TQWidget::setFocus () [virtual slot]
-
                
-Gives the keyboard input focus to this widget (or its focus
-proxy) if this widget or one of its parents is the active window.
-
                 First, a focus out event is sent to the focus widget (if any) to
-tell it that it is about to lose the focus. Then a focus in event
-is sent to this widget to tell it that it just received the focus.
-(Nothing happens if the focus in and focus out widgets are the
-same.)
-
                 setFocus() gives focus to a widget regardless of its focus policy,
-but does not clear any keyboard grab (see grabKeyboard()).
-
                 Be aware that if the widget is hidden, it will not accept focus.
-
                 Warning: If you call setFocus() in a function which may itself be
-called from focusOutEvent() or focusInEvent(), you may get an
-infinite recursion.
-
                 
                See also focus, clearFocus(), focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), focusPolicy, TQApplication::focusWidget(), grabKeyboard(), and grabMouse().
-
-
                Examples: addressbook/centralwidget.cpp, lineedits/lineedits.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, popup/popup.cpp, rot13/rot13.cpp, t8/main.cpp, and wizard/wizard.cpp.
-
                void TQWidget::setFocusPolicy ( FocusPolicy ) [virtual]
-
                Sets the way the widget accepts keyboard focus.
-See the "focusPolicy" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::setFocusProxy ( TQWidget * w ) [virtual]
-
                
-Sets the widget's focus proxy to widget w. If w is 0, the
-function resets this widget to have no focus proxy.
-
                 Some widgets, such as TQComboBox, can "have focus", but create a
-child widget to actually handle the focus. TQComboBox, for example,
-creates a TQLineEdit which handles the focus.
-
                 setFocusProxy() sets the widget which will actually get focus when
-"this widget" gets it. If there is a focus proxy, focusPolicy(),
-setFocusPolicy(), setFocus() and hasFocus() all operate on the
-focus proxy.
-
                 
                See also focusProxy().
-
-
                void TQWidget::setFont ( const TQFont & ) [virtual]
-
                Sets the font currently set for the widget.
-See the "font" property for details.
-
                Reimplemented in TQComboBox, TQLabel, and TQTabDialog.
-
                void TQWidget::setFont ( const TQFont & f, bool )
-
                
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                 Use setFont(const TQFont& font) instead.
-
-
                void TQWidget::setGeometry ( const TQRect & ) [virtual slot]
-
                Sets the geometry of the widget relative to its parent and excluding the window frame.
-See the "geometry" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::setGeometry ( int x, int y, int w, int h ) [virtual slot]
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 This corresponds to setGeometry( TQRect(x, y, w, h) ).
-
-
                void TQWidget::setHidden ( bool hide ) [slot]
-
                Sets whether the widget is explicitly hidden to hide.
-See the "hidden" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::setIcon ( const TQPixmap & ) [virtual slot]
-
                Sets the widget's icon.
-See the "icon" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::setIconText ( const TQString & ) [virtual slot]
-
                Sets the widget's icon text.
-See the "iconText" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::setInputMethodEnabled ( bool b )
-
                Sets enables or disables the use of input methods for this widget to b.
-See the "inputMethodEnabled" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::setKeyCompression ( bool compress ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-Enables key event compression, if compress is TRUE, and
-disables it if compress is FALSE.
-
                 Key compression is off by default (except for TQLineEdit and
-TQTextEdit), so widgets receive one key press event for each key
-press (or more, since autorepeat is usually on). If you turn it on
-and your program doesn't keep up with key input, TQt may try to
-compress key events so that more than one character can be
-processed in each event.
-
                 For example, a word processor widget might receive 2, 3 or more
-characters in each TQKeyEvent::text(), if the layout recalculation
-takes too long for the CPU.
-
                 If a widget supports multiple character unicode input, it is
-always safe to turn the compression on.
-
                 TQt performs key event compression only for printable characters.
-Modifier keys, cursor movement keys, function keys and
-miscellaneous action keys (e.g. Escape, Enter, Backspace,
-PrintScreen) will stop key event compression, even if there are
-more compressible key events available.
-
                 Not all platforms support this compression, in which case turning
-it on will have no effect.
-
                 
                See also TQKeyEvent::text().
-
-
                void TQWidget::setMask ( const TQBitmap & bitmap ) [virtual]
-
                
-Causes only the pixels of the widget for which bitmap has a
-corresponding 1 bit to be visible. Use TQt::color0 to draw
-transparent regions and TQt::color1 to draw opaque regions of the
-bitmap.
-
                 If the region includes pixels outside the rect() of the widget,
-window system controls in that area may or may not be visible,
-depending on the platform.
-
                 Note that this effect can be slow if the region is particularly
-complex.
-
                 See examples/tux for an example of masking for transparency.
-
                 
                See also clearMask().
-
-
                void TQWidget::setMask ( const TQRegion & region ) [virtual]
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Causes only the parts of the widget which overlap region to be
-visible. If the region includes pixels outside the rect() of the
-widget, window system controls in that area may or may not be
-visible, depending on the platform.
-
                 Note that this effect can be slow if the region is particularly
-complex.
-
                 
                See also clearMask().
-
-
                void TQWidget::setMaximumHeight ( int maxh )
-
                Sets the widget's maximum height to maxh.
-See the "maximumHeight" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::setMaximumSize ( const TQSize & )
-
                Sets the widget's maximum size.
-See the "maximumSize" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::setMaximumSize ( int maxw, int maxh ) [virtual]
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 This function corresponds to setMaximumSize( TQSize(maxw, maxh) ). Sets the maximum width to maxw and the maximum height
-to maxh.
-
-
                void TQWidget::setMaximumWidth ( int maxw )
-
                Sets the widget's maximum width to maxw.
-See the "maximumWidth" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::setMicroFocusHint ( int x, int y, int width, int height, bool text = TRUE, TQFont * f = 0 ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-When a widget gets focus, it should call setMicroFocusHint() with
-some appropriate position and size, x, y, width and height. This has no visual effect, it just provides hints to
-any system-specific input handling tools.
-
                 The text argument should be TRUE if this is a position for text
-input.
-
                 In the Windows version of TQt, this method sets the system caret,
-which is used for user Accessibility focus handling.  If text
-is TRUE, it also sets the IME composition window in Far East Asian
-language input systems.
-
                 In the X11 version of TQt, if text is TRUE, this method sets the
-XIM "spot" point for complex language input handling.
-
                 The font f is a rendering hint to the currently active input method.
-If f is 0 the widget's font is used.
-
                 
                See also microFocusHint.
-
-
                void TQWidget::setMinimumHeight ( int minh )
-
                Sets the widget's minimum height to minh.
-See the "minimumHeight" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::setMinimumSize ( const TQSize & )
-
                Sets the widget's minimum size.
-See the "minimumSize" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::setMinimumSize ( int minw, int minh ) [virtual]
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 This function corresponds to setMinimumSize( TQSize(minw, minh) ).
-Sets the minimum width to minw and the minimum height to minh.
-
-
                void TQWidget::setMinimumWidth ( int minw )
-
                Sets the widget's minimum width to minw.
-See the "minimumWidth" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::setMouseTracking ( bool enable ) [virtual slot]
-
                Sets whether mouse tracking is enabled for the widget to enable.
-See the "mouseTracking" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::setPalette ( const TQPalette & ) [virtual]
-
                Sets the widget's palette.
-See the "palette" property for details.
-
                Reimplemented in TQComboBox, TQScrollBar, and TQSlider.
-
                void TQWidget::setPalette ( const TQPalette & p, bool )
-
                
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                 Use setPalette( const TQPalette& p ) instead.
-
-
                void TQWidget::setPaletteBackgroundColor ( const TQColor & ) [virtual]
-
                Sets the background color of the widget.
-See the "paletteBackgroundColor" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::setPaletteBackgroundPixmap ( const TQPixmap & ) [virtual]
-
                Sets the background pixmap of the widget.
-See the "paletteBackgroundPixmap" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::setPaletteForegroundColor ( const TQColor & )
-
                Sets the foreground color of the widget.
-See the "paletteForegroundColor" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::setShown ( bool show ) [slot]
-
                Sets whether the widget is shown to show.
-See the "shown" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::setSizeIncrement ( const TQSize & )
-
                Sets the size increment of the widget.
-See the "sizeIncrement" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::setSizeIncrement ( int w, int h ) [virtual]
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Sets the x (width) size increment to w and the y (height) size
-increment to h.
-
-
                void TQWidget::setSizePolicy ( TQSizePolicy ) [virtual]
-
                Sets the default layout behavior of the widget.
-See the "sizePolicy" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::setSizePolicy ( TQSizePolicy::SizeType hor, TQSizePolicy::SizeType ver, bool hfw = FALSE )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Sets the size policy of the widget to hor, ver and hfw
-(height for width).
-
                 
                See also TQSizePolicy::TQSizePolicy().
-
-
                void TQWidget::setStyle ( TQStyle * style )
-
                
-Sets the widget's GUI style to style. Ownership of the style
-object is not transferred.
-
                 If no style is set, the widget uses the application's style,
-TQApplication::style() instead.
-
                 Setting a widget's style has no effect on existing or future child
-widgets.
-
                 Warning: This function is particularly useful for demonstration
-purposes, where you want to show TQt's styling capabilities. Real
-applications should avoid it and use one consistent GUI style
-instead.
-
                 
                See also style(), TQStyle, TQApplication::style(), and TQApplication::setStyle().
-
-
                Examples: grapher/grapher.cpp and progressbar/progressbar.cpp.
-
                TQStyle * TQWidget::setStyle ( const TQString & style )
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Sets the widget's GUI style to style using the TQStyleFactory.
-
-
                void TQWidget::setTabOrder ( TQWidget * first, TQWidget * second ) [static]
-
                
-Moves the second widget around the ring of focus widgets so
-that keyboard focus moves from the first widget to the second widget when the Tab key is pressed.
-
                 Note that since the tab order of the second widget is changed,
-you should order a chain like this:
-
                 
                -        setTabOrder( a, b ); // a to b
-        setTabOrder( b, c ); // a to b to c
-        setTabOrder( c, d ); // a to b to c to d
-    
                
- 
-
                 not like this:
-
                 
                -        setTabOrder( c, d ); // c to d   WRONG
-        setTabOrder( a, b ); // a to b AND c to d
-        setTabOrder( b, c ); // a to b to c, but not c to d
-    
                
- 
-
                 If first or second has a focus proxy, setTabOrder()
-correctly substitutes the proxy.
-
                 
                See also focusPolicy and setFocusProxy().
-
-
                Example: customlayout/main.cpp.
-
                void TQWidget::setUpdatesEnabled ( bool enable ) [virtual slot]
-
                Sets whether updates are enabled to enable.
-See the "updatesEnabled" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::setWFlags ( WFlags f ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-
-
                 Sets the widget flags f.
-
                 Widget flags are a combination of TQt::WidgetFlags.
-
                 
                See also testWFlags(), getWFlags(), and clearWFlags().
-
-
                void TQWidget::setWindowOpacity ( double level )
-
                Sets the level of opacity for the window to level.
-See the "windowOpacity" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::setWindowState ( uint windowState )
-
                
-
-
                 Sets the window state to windowState. The window state is a OR'ed
-combination of TQt::WindowState: WindowMinimized, WindowMaximized, WindowFullScreen and WindowActive.
-
                 If the window is not visible (i.e. isVisible() returns FALSE), the
-window state will take effect when show() is called. For visible
-windows, the change is immediate. For example, to toggle between
-full-screen and mormal mode, use the following code:
-
                 
                -        w->setWindowState(w->windowState() ^ WindowFullScreen);
-  
                
- 
-
                 In order to restore and activate a minimized window (while
-preserving its maximized and/or full-screen state), use the following:
-
                 
                -        w->setWindowState(w->windowState() & ~WindowMinimized | WindowActive);
-  
                
- 
-
                 Note: On some window systems WindowActive is not immediate, and may be
-ignored in certain cases.
-
                 
                See also TQt::WindowState and windowState().
-
-
                void TQWidget::show () [virtual slot]
-
                
-Shows the widget and its child widgets.
-
                 If its size or position has changed, TQt guarantees that a widget
-gets move and resize events just before it is shown.
-
                 You almost never have to reimplement this function. If you need to
-change some settings before a widget is shown, use showEvent()
-instead. If you need to do some delayed initialization use
-polish().
-
                 
                See also showEvent(), hide(), showMinimized(), showMaximized(), showNormal(), visible, and polish().
-
-
                Examples: aclock/main.cpp, life/main.cpp, popup/popup.cpp, t1/main.cpp, t3/main.cpp, t4/main.cpp, and toplevel/options.ui.h.
-
                Reimplemented in TQDialog and TQMenuBar.
-
                void TQWidget::showEvent ( TQShowEvent * ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
-widget show events.
-
                 Non-spontaneous show events are sent to widgets immediately before
-they are shown. The spontaneous show events of top-level widgets
-are delivered afterwards.
-
                 
                See also event() and TQShowEvent.
-
-
                Example: qdir/qdir.cpp.
-
                void TQWidget::showFullScreen () [slot]
-
                
-Shows the widget in full-screen mode.
-
                 Calling this function only affects top-level widgets.
-
                 To return from full-screen mode, call showNormal().
-
                 Full-screen mode works fine under Windows, but has certain
-problems under X. These problems are due to limitations of the
-ICCCM protocol that specifies the communication between X11
-clients and the window manager. ICCCM simply does not understand
-the concept of non-decorated full-screen windows. Therefore, the
-best we can do is to request a borderless window and place and
-resize it to fill the entire screen. Depending on the window
-manager, this may or may not work. The borderless window is
-requested using MOTIF hints, which are at least partially
-supported by virtually all modern window managers.
-
                 An alternative would be to bypass the window manager entirely and
-create a window with the WX11BypassWM flag. This has other severe
-problems though, like totally broken keyboard focus and very
-strange effects on desktop changes or when the user raises other
-windows.
-
                 X11 window managers that follow modern post-ICCCM specifications
-support full-screen mode properly.
-
                 
                See also showNormal(), showMaximized(), show(), hide(), and visible.
-
-
                void TQWidget::showMaximized () [virtual slot]
-
                
-Shows the widget maximized.
-
                 Calling this function only affects top-level
-    widgets.
-
                 On X11, this function may not work properly with certain window
-managers. See the Window Geometry
-    documentation for an explanation.
-
                 
                See also setWindowState(), showNormal(), showMinimized(), show(), hide(), and visible.
-
-
                Examples: canvas/main.cpp, helpviewer/main.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, qwerty/main.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, and scribble/main.cpp.
-
                void TQWidget::showMinimized () [virtual slot]
-
                
-Shows the widget minimized, as an icon.
-
                 Calling this function only affects top-level
-    widgets.
-
                 
                See also showNormal(), showMaximized(), show(), hide(), visible, and minimized.
-
-
                void TQWidget::showNormal () [virtual slot]
-
                
-Restores the widget after it has been maximized or minimized.
-
                 Calling this function only affects top-level
-    widgets.
-
                 
                See also setWindowState(), showMinimized(), showMaximized(), show(), hide(), and visible.
-
-
                Example: mdi/application.cpp.
-
                TQSize TQWidget::size () const
-
                Returns the size of the widget excluding any window frame.
-See the "size" property for details.
-
                TQSize TQWidget::sizeHint () const [virtual]
-
                Returns the recommended size for the widget.
-See the "sizeHint" property for details.
-
                Reimplemented in TQSizeGrip.
-
                TQSize TQWidget::sizeIncrement () const
-
                Returns the size increment of the widget.
-See the "sizeIncrement" property for details.
-
                TQSizePolicy TQWidget::sizePolicy () const [virtual]
-
                Returns the default layout behavior of the widget.
-See the "sizePolicy" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::stackUnder ( TQWidget * w ) [slot]
-
                
-Places the widget under w in the parent widget's stack.
-
                 To make this work, the widget itself and w must be siblings.
-
                 
                See also raise() and lower().
-
-
                TQStyle & TQWidget::style () const
-
                
-Returns the GUI style for this widget
-
                 
                See also TQWidget::setStyle(), TQApplication::setStyle(), and TQApplication::style().
-
-
                void TQWidget::styleChange ( TQStyle & oldStyle ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This virtual function is called when the style of the widgets
-changes. oldStyle is the previous GUI style; you can get the
-new style from style().
-
                 Reimplement this function if your widget needs to know when its
-GUI style changes. You will almost certainly need to update the
-widget using update().
-
                 The default implementation updates the widget including its
-geometry.
-
                 
                See also TQApplication::setStyle(), style(), update(), and updateGeometry().
-
-
                void TQWidget::tabletEvent ( TQTabletEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This event handler, for event e, can be reimplemented in a
-subclass to receive tablet events for the widget.
-
                 If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you
-ignore() the event if you do not handle
-it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it.
-
                 The default implementation ignores the event.
-
                 
                See also TQTabletEvent::ignore(), TQTabletEvent::accept(), event(), and TQTabletEvent.
-
-
                WFlags TQWidget::testWFlags ( WFlags f ) const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the bitwise AND of the widget flags and f.
-
                 Widget flags are a combination of TQt::WidgetFlags.
-
                 If you want to test for the presence of multiple flags (or
-composite flags such as WStyle_Splash), test the
-return value for equality against the argument. For example:
-
                 
                -    int flags = WStyle_Tool | WStyle_NoBorder;
-    if ( testWFlags(flags) )
-        ... // WStyle_Tool or WStyle_NoBorder or both are set
-    if ( testWFlags(flags) == flags )
-        ... // both WStyle_Tool and WStyle_NoBorder are set
-    
                
- 
-
                 
                See also getWFlags(), setWFlags(), and clearWFlags().
-
-
                TQWidget * TQWidget::topLevelWidget () const
-
                
-Returns the top-level widget for this widget, i.e. the next
-ancestor widget that has (or could have) a window-system frame.
-
                 If the widget is a top-level, the widget itself is returned.
-
                 Typical usage is changing the window caption:
-
                 
                -        aWidget->topLevelWidget()->setCaption( "New Caption" );
-    
                
- 
-
                 
                See also isTopLevel.
-
-
                void TQWidget::unsetCursor () [virtual]
-
                Resets the cursor shape for this widget.
-See the "cursor" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::unsetFont ()
-
                Resets the font currently set for the widget.
-See the "font" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::unsetPalette ()
-
                Resets the widget's palette.
-See the "palette" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::update () [slot]
-
                
-Updates the widget unless updates are disabled or the widget is
-hidden.
-
                 This function does not cause an immediate repaint; instead it
-schedules a paint event for processing when TQt returns to the main
-event loop. This permits TQt to optimize for more speed and less
-flicker than a call to repaint() does.
-
                 Calling update() several times normally results in just one
-paintEvent() call.
-
                 TQt normally erases the widget's area before the paintEvent() call.
-If the WRepaintNoErase widget flag is set, the widget is
-responsible for painting all its pixels itself.
-
                 
                See also repaint(), paintEvent(), updatesEnabled, erase(), and setWFlags().
-
-
                Examples: desktop/desktop.cpp and scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
-
                void TQWidget::update ( int x, int y, int w, int h ) [slot]
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Updates a rectangle (x, y, w, h) inside the widget
-unless updates are disabled or the widget is hidden.
-
                 This function does not cause an immediate repaint; instead it
-schedules a paint event for processing when TQt returns to the main
-event loop. This permits TQt to optimize for more speed and less
-flicker and a call to repaint() does.
-
                 Calling update() several times normally results in just one
-paintEvent() call.
-
                 If w is negative, it is replaced with width() - x. If h
-is negative, it is replaced width height() - y.
-
                 TQt normally erases the specified area before the paintEvent()
-call. If the WRepaintNoErase widget flag is set, the widget is
-responsible for painting all its pixels itself.
-
                 
                See also repaint(), paintEvent(), updatesEnabled, and erase().
-
-
                void TQWidget::update ( const TQRect & r ) [slot]
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Updates a rectangle r inside the widget unless updates are
-disabled or the widget is hidden.
-
                 This function does not cause an immediate repaint; instead it
-schedules a paint event for processing when TQt returns to the main
-event loop. This permits TQt to optimize for more speed and less
-flicker and a call to repaint() does.
-
                 Calling update() several times normally results in just one
-paintEvent() call.
-
-
                void TQWidget::updateGeometry ()
-
                
-Notifies the layout system that this widget has changed and may
-need to change geometry.
-
                 Call this function if the sizeHint() or sizePolicy() have changed.
-
                 For explicitly hidden widgets, updateGeometry() is a no-op. The
-layout system will be notified as soon as the widget is shown.
-
-
                void TQWidget::updateMask () [virtual protected]
-
                
-This function can be reimplemented in a subclass to support
-transparent widgets. It should be called whenever a widget changes
-state in a way that means that the shape mask must be recalculated.
-
                 
                See also autoMask, setMask(), and clearMask().
-
-
                TQRect TQWidget::visibleRect () const
-
                Returns the visible rectangle.
-See the "visibleRect" property for details.
-
                void TQWidget::wheelEvent ( TQWheelEvent * e ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This event handler, for event e, can be reimplemented in a
-subclass to receive wheel events for the widget.
-
                 If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you
-ignore() the event if you do not handle
-it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it.
-
                 The default implementation ignores the event.
-
                 
                See also TQWheelEvent::ignore(), TQWheelEvent::accept(), event(), and TQWheelEvent.
-
-
                int TQWidget::width () const
-
                Returns the width of the widget excluding any window frame.
-See the "width" property for details.
-
                bool TQWidget::winEvent ( MSG * ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This special event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to
-receive native Windows events.
-
                 In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to stop the
-event being handled by TQt, return TRUE. If you return FALSE, this
-native event is passed back to TQt, which translates the event into
-a TQt event and sends it to the widget.
-
                 Warning: This function is not portable.
-
                 
                See also TQApplication::winEventFilter().
-
-
                WId TQWidget::winId () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the window system identifier of the widget.
-
                 Portable in principle, but if you use it you are probably about to
-do something non-portable. Be careful.
-
                 
                See also find().
-
-
                void TQWidget::windowActivationChange ( bool oldActive ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-
-
                 This virtual function is called for a widget when its window is
-activated or deactivated by the window system. oldActive is the
-previous state; you can get the new setting from isActiveWindow().
-
                 Reimplement this function if your widget needs to know when its
-window becomes activated or deactivated.
-
                 The default implementation updates the visible part of the widget
-if the inactive and the active colorgroup are different for colors
-other than the highlight and link colors.
-
                 
                See also setActiveWindow(), isActiveWindow, update(), and palette.
-
-
                double TQWidget::windowOpacity () const
-
                Returns the level of opacity for the window.
-See the "windowOpacity" property for details.
-
                uint TQWidget::windowState () const
-
                  Returns the current window state. The window state is a OR'ed
-combination of TQt::WindowState: WindowMinimized, WindowMaximized, WindowFullScreen and WindowActive.
-
                 
                See also TQt::WindowState and setWindowState().
-
-
                int TQWidget::x () const
-
                Returns the x coordinate of the widget relative to its parent including any window frame.
-See the "x" property for details.
-
                bool TQWidget::x11Event ( XEvent * ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This special event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to
-receive native X11 events.
-
                 In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to stop the
-event being handled by TQt, return TRUE. If you return FALSE, this
-native event is passed back to TQt, which translates the event into
-a TQt event and sends it to the widget.
-
                 Warning: This function is not portable.
-
                 
                See also TQApplication::x11EventFilter().
-
-
                Reimplemented in TQXtWidget.
-
                int TQWidget::y () const
-
                Returns the y coordinate of the widget relative to its parent and including any window frame.
-See the "y" property for details.
-
                Property Documentation
                
-
                bool acceptDrops
                
-
                This property holds whether drop events are enabled for this widget.
-
                Setting this property to TRUE announces to the system that this
-widget may be able to accept drop events.
-
                 If the widget is the desktop (TQWidget::isDesktop()), this may
-fail if another application is using the desktop; you can call
-acceptDrops() to test if this occurs.
-
                 Warning:
-Do not modify this property in a Drag&Drop event handler.
-
-
                Set this property's value with setAcceptDrops() and get this property's value with acceptDrops().
-
                bool autoMask
                
-
                This property holds whether the auto mask feature is enabled for the widget.
-
                Transparent widgets use a mask to define their visible region.
-TQWidget has some built-in support to make the task of
-recalculating the mask easier. When setting auto mask to TRUE,
-updateMask() will be called whenever the widget is resized or
-changes its focus state. Note that you must reimplement
-updateMask() (which should include a call to setMask()) or nothing
-will happen.
-
                 Note: when you re-implement resizeEvent(), focusInEvent() or
-focusOutEvent() in your custom widgets and still want to ensure
-that the auto mask calculation works, you should add:
-
                 
                -        if ( autoMask() )
-            updateMask();
-    
                
- 
-
                 at the end of your event handlers. This is true for all member
-functions that change the appearance of the widget in a way that
-requires a recalculation of the mask.
-
                 While being a technically appealing concept, masks have a big
-drawback: when using complex masks that cannot be expressed easily
-with relatively simple regions, they can be very slow on some
-window systems. The classic example is a transparent label. The
-complex shape of its contents makes it necessary to represent its
-mask by a bitmap, which consumes both memory and time. If all you
-want is to blend the background of several neighboring widgets
-together seamlessly, you will probably want to use
-setBackgroundOrigin() rather than a mask.
-
                 
                See also updateMask(), setMask(), clearMask(), and backgroundOrigin.
-
-
                Set this property's value with setAutoMask() and get this property's value with autoMask().
-
                TQBrush backgroundBrush
                
-
                This property holds the widget's background brush.
-
                The background brush depends on a widget's palette and its
-background mode.
-
                 
                See also backgroundColor(), backgroundPixmap(), eraseColor(), palette, and TQApplication::setPalette().
-
-
                Get this property's value with backgroundBrush().
-
                BackgroundMode backgroundMode
                
-
                This property holds the color role used for painting the background of the widget.
-
                setPaletteBackgroundColor() reads this property to determine which
-entry of the palette to set.
-
                 For most widgets the default suffices (PaletteBackground,
-typically gray), but some need to use PaletteBase (the
-background color for text output, typically white) or another
-role.
-
                 TQListBox, which is "sunken" and uses the base color to contrast
-with its environment, does this in its constructor:
-
                 
                -    setBackgroundMode( PaletteBase );
-    
                
- 
-
                 You will never need to set the background mode of a built-in
-widget in TQt, but you might consider setting it in your custom
-widgets, so that setPaletteBackgroundColor() works as expected.
-
                 Note that two of the BackgroundMode values make no sense for
-setBackgroundMode(), namely FixedPixmap and FixedColor. You
-must call setBackgroundPixmap() and setPaletteBackgroundColor()
-instead.
-
-
                Set this property's value with setBackgroundMode() and get this property's value with backgroundMode().
-
                BackgroundOrigin backgroundOrigin
                
-
                This property holds the origin of the widget's background.
-
                The origin is either WidgetOrigin (the default), ParentOrigin,
-WindowOrigin or AncestorOrigin.
-
                 This only makes a difference if the widget has a background
-pixmap, in which case positioning matters. Using WindowOrigin
-for several neighboring widgets makes the background blend
-together seamlessly. AncestorOrigin allows blending backgrounds
-seamlessly when an ancestor of the widget has an origin other than
-WindowOrigin.
-
                 
                See also backgroundPixmap() and backgroundMode.
-
-
                Set this property's value with setBackgroundOrigin() and get this property's value with backgroundOrigin().
-
                TQSize baseSize
                
-
                This property holds the base size of the widget.
-
                The base size is used to calculate a proper widget size if the
-widget defines sizeIncrement().
-
                 
                See also sizeIncrement.
-
-
                Set this property's value with setBaseSize() and get this property's value with baseSize().
-
                TQString caption
                
-
                This property holds the window caption (title).
-
                This property only makes sense for top-level widgets. If no
-caption has been set, the caption is TQString::null.
-
                 
                See also icon and iconText.
-
-
                Set this property's value with setCaption() and get this property's value with caption().
-
                TQRect childrenRect
                
-
                This property holds the bounding rectangle of the widget's children.
-
                Hidden children are excluded.
-
                 
                See also childrenRegion and geometry.
-
-
                Get this property's value with childrenRect().
-
                TQRegion childrenRegion
                
-
                This property holds the combined region occupied by the widget's children.
-
                Hidden children are excluded.
-
                 
                See also childrenRect and geometry.
-
-
                Get this property's value with childrenRegion().
-
                TQColorGroup colorGroup
                
-
                This property holds the current color group of the widget palette.
-
                The color group is determined by the state of the widget. A
-disabled widget has the TQPalette::disabled() color group, a widget
-with keyboard focus has the TQPalette::active() color group, and an
-inactive widget has the TQPalette::inactive() color group.
-
                 
                See also palette.
-
-
                Get this property's value with colorGroup().
-
                TQCursor cursor
                
-
                This property holds the cursor shape for this widget.
-
                The mouse cursor will assume this shape when it's over this
-widget. See the list of predefined cursor
-    objects for a range of useful shapes.
-
                 An editor widget might use an I-beam cursor:
-
                -        setCursor( IbeamCursor );
-    
                
- 
-
                 If no cursor has been set, or after a call to unsetCursor(), the
-parent's cursor is used. The function unsetCursor() has no effect
-on top-level widgets.
-
                 
                See also TQApplication::setOverrideCursor().
-
-
                Set this property's value with setCursor(), get this property's value with cursor(), and reset this property's value with unsetCursor().
-
                bool customWhatsThis
                
-
                This property holds whether the widget wants to handle What's This help manually.
-
                The default implementation of customWhatsThis() returns FALSE,
-which means the widget will not receive any events in Whats This
-mode.
-
                 The widget may leave What's This mode by calling
-TQWhatsThis::leaveWhatsThisMode(), with or without actually
-displaying any help text.
-
                 You can also reimplement customWhatsThis() if your widget is a
-"passive interactor" supposed to work under all circumstances.
-Simply don't call TQWhatsThis::leaveWhatsThisMode() in that case.
-
                 
                See also TQWhatsThis::inWhatsThisMode() and TQWhatsThis::leaveWhatsThisMode().
-
-
                Get this property's value with customWhatsThis().
-
                bool enabled
                
-
                This property holds whether the widget is enabled.
-
                An enabled widget receives keyboard and mouse events; a disabled
-widget does not. In fact, an enabled widget only receives keyboard
-events when it is in focus.
-
                 Some widgets display themselves differently when they are
-disabled. For example a button might draw its label grayed out. If
-your widget needs to know when it becomes enabled or disabled, you
-can reimplement the enabledChange() function.
-
                 Disabling a widget implicitly disables all its children. Enabling
-respectively enables all child widgets unless they have been
-explicitly disabled.
-
                 
                See also enabled, isEnabledTo(), TQKeyEvent, TQMouseEvent, and enabledChange().
-
-
                Set this property's value with setEnabled() and get this property's value with isEnabled().
-
                bool focus
                
-
                This property holds whether this widget (or its focus proxy) has the keyboard input focus.
-
                Effectively equivalent to qApp->focusWidget() == this.
-
                 
                See also setFocus(), clearFocus(), focusPolicy, and TQApplication::focusWidget().
-
-
                Get this property's value with hasFocus().
-
                bool focusEnabled
                
-
                This property holds whether the widget accepts keyboard focus.
-
                Keyboard focus is initially disabled (i.e. focusPolicy() ==
-TQWidget::NoFocus).
-
                 You must enable keyboard focus for a widget if it processes
-keyboard events. This is normally done from the widget's
-constructor. For instance, the TQLineEdit constructor calls
-setFocusPolicy(TQWidget::StrongFocus).
-
                 
                See also focusPolicy, focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), and enabled.
-
-
                Get this property's value with isFocusEnabled().
-
                FocusPolicy focusPolicy
                
-
                This property holds the way the widget accepts keyboard focus.
-
                The policy is TQWidget::TabFocus if the widget accepts keyboard
-focus by tabbing, TQWidget::ClickFocus if the widget accepts
-focus by clicking, TQWidget::StrongFocus if it accepts both, and
-TQWidget::NoFocus (the default) if it does not accept focus at
-all.
-
                 You must enable keyboard focus for a widget if it processes
-keyboard events. This is normally done from the widget's
-constructor. For instance, the TQLineEdit constructor calls
-setFocusPolicy(TQWidget::StrongFocus).
-
                 
                See also focusEnabled, focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), and enabled.
-
-
                Set this property's value with setFocusPolicy() and get this property's value with focusPolicy().
-
                TQFont font
                
-
                This property holds the font currently set for the widget.
-
                The fontInfo() function reports the actual font that is being used
-by the widget.
-
                 As long as no special font has been set, or after unsetFont() is
-called, this is either a special font for the widget class, the
-parent's font or (if this widget is a top level widget), the
-default application font.
-
                 This code fragment sets a 12 point helvetica bold font:
-
                -    TQFont f( "Helvetica", 12, TQFont::Bold );
-    setFont( f );
-    
                
- 
-
                 In addition to setting the font, setFont() informs all children
-about the change.
-
                 
                See also fontChange(), fontInfo(), fontMetrics(), and ownFont.
-
-
                Set this property's value with setFont(), get this property's value with font(), and reset this property's value with unsetFont().
-
                TQRect frameGeometry
                
-
                This property holds geometry of the widget relative to its parent including any window frame.
-
                See the Window Geometry documentation
-for an overview of geometry issues with top-level widgets.
-
                 
                See also geometry, x, y, and pos.
-
-
                Get this property's value with frameGeometry().
-
                TQSize frameSize
                
-
                This property holds the size of the widget including any window frame.
-
                
-
                Get this property's value with frameSize().
-
                bool fullScreen
                
-
                This property holds whether the widget is full screen.
-
                Get this property's value with isFullScreen().
-
                See also windowState(), minimized, and maximized.
-
-
                TQRect geometry
                
-
                This property holds the geometry of the widget relative to its parent and excluding the window frame.
-
                When changing the geometry, the widget, if visible, receives a
-move event (moveEvent()) and/or a resize event (resizeEvent())
-immediately. If the widget is not currently visible, it is
-guaranteed to receive appropriate events before it is shown.
-
                 The size component is adjusted if it lies outside the range
-defined by minimumSize() and maximumSize().
-
                 setGeometry() is virtual, and all other overloaded setGeometry()
-implementations in TQt call it.
-
                 Warning: Calling setGeometry() inside resizeEvent() or moveEvent()
-can lead to infinite recursion.
-
                 See the Window Geometry documentation
-for an overview of top-level widget geometry.
-
                 
                See also frameGeometry, rect, pos, size, moveEvent(), resizeEvent(), minimumSize, and maximumSize.
-
-
                Set this property's value with setGeometry() and get this property's value with geometry().
-
                int height
                
-
                This property holds the height of the widget excluding any window frame.
-
                See the Window Geometry documentation
-for an overview of top-level widget geometry.
-
                 
                See also geometry, width, and size.
-
-
                Get this property's value with height().
-
                bool hidden
                
-
                This property holds whether the widget is explicitly hidden.
-
                If FALSE, the widget is visible or would become visible if all its
-ancestors became visible.
-
                 
                See also hide(), show(), visible, isVisibleTo(), and shown.
-
-
                Set this property's value with setHidden() and get this property's value with isHidden().
-
                TQPixmap icon
                
-
                This property holds the widget's icon.
-
                This property only makes sense for top-level widgets. If no icon
-has been set, icon() returns 0.
-
                 
                See also iconText, caption, and Setting the Application Icon.
-
-
                Set this property's value with setIcon() and get this property's value with icon().
-
                TQString iconText
                
-
                This property holds the widget's icon text.
-
                This property only makes sense for top-level widgets. If no icon
-text has been set, this functions returns TQString::null.
-
                 
                See also icon and caption.
-
-
                Set this property's value with setIconText() and get this property's value with iconText().
-
                bool inputMethodEnabled
                
-
                This property holds enables or disables the use of input methods for this widget.
-
                Most Widgets (as eg. buttons) that do not handle text input should have
-the input method disabled if they have focus. This is the default.
-
                 If a widget handles text input it should set this property to TRUE.
-
-
                Set this property's value with setInputMethodEnabled() and get this property's value with isInputMethodEnabled().
-
                bool isActiveWindow
                
-
                This property holds whether this widget is the active window.
-
                The active window is the window that contains the widget
-that has keyboard focus.
-
                 When popup windows are visible, this property is TRUE for both the
-active window and for the popup.
-
                 
                See also setActiveWindow() and TQApplication::activeWindow().
-
-
                Get this property's value with isActiveWindow().
-
                bool isDesktop
                
-
                This property holds whether the widget is a desktop widget, i.e. represents the desktop.
-
                A desktop widget is also a top-level widget.
-
                 
                See also isTopLevel and TQApplication::desktop().
-
-
                Get this property's value with isDesktop().
-
                bool isDialog
                
-
                This property holds whether the widget is a dialog widget.
-
                A dialog widget is a secondary top-level widget, i.e. a top-level
-widget with a parent.
-
                 
                See also isTopLevel and TQDialog.
-
-
                Get this property's value with isDialog().
-
                bool isModal
                
-
                This property holds whether the widget is a modal widget.
-
                This property only makes sense for top-level widgets. A modal
-widget prevents widgets in all other top-level widgets from
-getting any input.
-
                 
                See also isTopLevel, isDialog, and TQDialog.
-
-
                Get this property's value with isModal().
-
                bool isPopup
                
-
                This property holds whether the widget is a popup widget.
-
                A popup widget is created by specifying the widget flag WType_Popup to the widget constructor. A popup widget is also a
-top-level widget.
-
                 
                See also isTopLevel.
-
-
                Get this property's value with isPopup().
-
                bool isTopLevel
                
-
                This property holds whether the widget is a top-level widget.
-
                A top-level widget is a widget which usually has a frame and a
-caption (title). Popup and desktop widgets are also top-level widgets.
-
                 A top-level widget can have a parent
-    widget. It will then be grouped with its parent and deleted
-when the parent is deleted, minimized when the parent is minimized
-etc. If supported by the window manager, it will also have a
-common taskbar entry with its parent.
-
                 TQDialog and TQMainWindow widgets are by default top-level, even if
-a parent widget is specified in the constructor. This behavior is
-specified by the WType_TopLevel widget flag.
-
                 
                See also topLevelWidget(), isDialog, isModal, isPopup, isDesktop, and parentWidget().
-
-
                Get this property's value with isTopLevel().
-
                bool maximized
                
-
                This property holds whether this widget is maximized.
-
                This property is only relevant for top-level widgets.
-
                 Note that due to limitations in some window-systems, this does not
-always report the expected results (e.g. if the user on X11
-maximizes the window via the window manager, TQt has no way of
-distinguishing this from any other resize). This is expected to
-improve as window manager protocols evolve.
-
                 
                See also windowState(), showMaximized(), visible, show(), hide(), showNormal(), and minimized.
-
-
                Get this property's value with isMaximized().
-
                int maximumHeight
                
-
                This property holds the widget's maximum height.
-
                This property corresponds to maximumSize().height().
-
                 
                See also maximumSize and maximumWidth.
-
-
                Set this property's value with setMaximumHeight() and get this property's value with maximumHeight().
-
                TQSize maximumSize
                
-
                This property holds the widget's maximum size.
-
                The widget cannot be resized to a larger size than the maximum
-widget size.
-
                 
                See also maximumWidth, maximumHeight, maximumSize, minimumSize, and sizeIncrement.
-
-
                Set this property's value with setMaximumSize() and get this property's value with maximumSize().
-
                int maximumWidth
                
-
                This property holds the widget's maximum width.
-
                This property corresponds to maximumSize().width().
-
                 
                See also maximumSize and maximumHeight.
-
-
                Set this property's value with setMaximumWidth() and get this property's value with maximumWidth().
-
                TQRect microFocusHint
                
-
                This property holds the currently set micro focus hint for this widget.
-
                See the documentation of setMicroFocusHint() for more information.
-
-
                Get this property's value with microFocusHint().
-
                bool minimized
                
-
                This property holds whether this widget is minimized (iconified).
-
                This property is only relevant for top-level widgets.
-
                 
                See also showMinimized(), visible, show(), hide(), showNormal(), and maximized.
-
-
                Get this property's value with isMinimized().
-
                int minimumHeight
                
-
                This property holds the widget's minimum height.
-
                This property corresponds to minimumSize().height().
-
                 
                See also minimumSize and minimumWidth.
-
-
                Set this property's value with setMinimumHeight() and get this property's value with minimumHeight().
-
                TQSize minimumSize
                
-
                This property holds the widget's minimum size.
-
                The widget cannot be resized to a smaller size than the minimum
-widget size. The widget's size is forced to the minimum size if
-the current size is smaller.
-
                 If you use a layout inside the widget, the minimum size will be
-set by the layout and not by setMinimumSize(), unless you set the
-layout's resize mode to TQLayout::FreeResize.
-
                 
                See also minimumWidth, minimumHeight, maximumSize, sizeIncrement, and TQLayout::resizeMode.
-
-
                Set this property's value with setMinimumSize() and get this property's value with minimumSize().
-
                TQSize minimumSizeHint
                
-
                This property holds the recommended minimum size for the widget.
-
                If the value of this property is an invalid size, no minimum size
-is recommended.
-
                 The default implementation of minimumSizeHint() returns an invalid
-size if there is no layout for this widget, and returns the
-layout's minimum size otherwise. Most built-in widgets reimplement
-minimumSizeHint().
-
                 TQLayout will never resize a widget to a size smaller than
-minimumSizeHint.
-
                 
                See also TQSize::isValid(), size, minimumSize, and sizePolicy.
-
-
                Get this property's value with minimumSizeHint().
-
                int minimumWidth
                
-
                This property holds the widget's minimum width.
-
                This property corresponds to minimumSize().width().
-
                 
                See also minimumSize and minimumHeight.
-
-
                Set this property's value with setMinimumWidth() and get this property's value with minimumWidth().
-
                bool mouseTracking
                
-
                This property holds whether mouse tracking is enabled for the widget.
-
                If mouse tracking is disabled (the default), the widget only
-receives mouse move events when at least one mouse button is
-pressed while the mouse is being moved.
-
                 If mouse tracking is enabled, the widget receives mouse move
-events even if no buttons are pressed.
-
                 
                See also mouseMoveEvent() and TQApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking().
-
-
                Set this property's value with setMouseTracking() and get this property's value with hasMouseTracking().
-
                bool ownCursor
                
-
                This property holds whether the widget uses its own cursor.
-
                If FALSE, the widget uses its parent widget's cursor.
-
                 
                See also cursor.
-
-
                Get this property's value with ownCursor().
-
                bool ownFont
                
-
                This property holds whether the widget uses its own font.
-
                If FALSE, the widget uses its parent widget's font.
-
                 
                See also font.
-
-
                Get this property's value with ownFont().
-
                bool ownPalette
                
-
                This property holds whether the widget uses its own palette.
-
                If FALSE, the widget uses its parent widget's palette.
-
                 
                See also palette.
-
-
                Get this property's value with ownPalette().
-
                TQPalette palette
                
-
                This property holds the widget's palette.
-
                As long as no special palette has been set, or after unsetPalette()
-has been called, this is either a special palette for the widget
-class, the parent's palette or (if this widget is a top level
-widget), the default application palette.
-
                 Instead of defining an entirely new palette, you can also use the
-paletteBackgroundColor,
-paletteBackgroundPixmap and
-paletteForegroundColor
-convenience properties to change a widget's
-background and foreground appearance only.
-
                 
                See also ownPalette, colorGroup, and TQApplication::palette().
-
-
                Set this property's value with setPalette(), get this property's value with palette(), and reset this property's value with unsetPalette().
-
                TQColor paletteBackgroundColor
                
-
                This property holds the background color of the widget.
-
                The palette background color is usually set implicitly by
-setBackgroundMode(), although it can also be set explicitly by
-setPaletteBackgroundColor(). setPaletteBackgroundColor() is a
-convenience function that creates and sets a modified TQPalette
-with setPalette(). The palette is modified according to the
-widget's background mode. For example, if the background mode is
-PaletteButton the color used for the palette's TQColorGroup::Button color entry is set.
-
                 If there is a background pixmap (set using
-setPaletteBackgroundPixmap()), then the return value of this
-function is indeterminate.
-
                 
                See also paletteBackgroundPixmap, paletteForegroundColor, palette, and colorGroup.
-
-
                Set this property's value with setPaletteBackgroundColor(), get this property's value with paletteBackgroundColor(), and reset this property's value with unsetPalette().
-
                TQPixmap paletteBackgroundPixmap
                
-
                This property holds the background pixmap of the widget.
-
                The palette background pixmap is usually set implicitly by
-setBackgroundMode(), although it can also be set explicitly by
-setPaletteBackgroundPixmap(). setPaletteBackgroundPixmap() is a
-convenience function that creates and sets a modified TQPalette
-with setPalette(). The palette is modified according to the
-widget's background mode. For example, if the background mode is
-PaletteButton the pixmap used for the palette's
-TQColorGroup::Button color entry is set.
-
                 If there is a plain background color (set using
-setPaletteBackgroundColor()), then this function returns 0.
-
                 
                See also paletteBackgroundColor, paletteForegroundColor, palette, and colorGroup.
-
-
                Set this property's value with setPaletteBackgroundPixmap(), get this property's value with paletteBackgroundPixmap(), and reset this property's value with unsetPalette().
-
                TQColor paletteForegroundColor
                
-
                This property holds the foreground color of the widget.
-
                setPaletteForegroundColor() is a convenience function that creates
-and sets a modified TQPalette with setPalette(). The palette is
-modified according to the widget's background mode. For
-example, if the background mode is PaletteButton the palette entry
-TQColorGroup::ButtonText is set to color.
-
                 
                See also palette, TQApplication::setPalette(), backgroundMode, foregroundColor(), backgroundMode, and setEraseColor().
-
-
                Set this property's value with setPaletteForegroundColor(), get this property's value with paletteForegroundColor(), and reset this property's value with unsetPalette().
-
                TQPoint pos
                
-
                This property holds the position of the widget within its parent widget.
-
                If the widget is a top-level widget, the position is that of the
-widget on the desktop, including its frame.
-
                 When changing the position, the widget, if visible, receives a
-move event (moveEvent()) immediately. If the widget is not
-currently visible, it is guaranteed to receive an event before it
-is shown.
-
                 move() is virtual, and all other overloaded move() implementations
-in TQt call it.
-
                 Warning: Calling move() or setGeometry() inside moveEvent() can
-lead to infinite recursion.
-
                 See the Window Geometry documentation
-for an overview of top-level widget geometry.
-
                 
                See also frameGeometry, size, x, and y.
-
-
                Set this property's value with move() and get this property's value with pos().
-
                TQRect rect
                
-
                This property holds the internal geometry of the widget excluding any window frame.
-
                The rect property equals TQRect(0, 0, width(), height()).
-
                 See the Window Geometry documentation
-for an overview of top-level widget geometry.
-
                 
                See also size.
-
-
                Get this property's value with rect().
-
                bool shown
                
-
                This property holds whether the widget is shown.
-
                If TRUE, the widget is visible or would become visible if all its
-ancestors became visible.
-
                 
                See also hide(), show(), visible, isVisibleTo(), and hidden.
-
-
                Set this property's value with setShown() and get this property's value with isShown().
-
                TQSize size
                
-
                This property holds the size of the widget excluding any window frame.
-
                When resizing, the widget, if visible, receives a resize event
-(resizeEvent()) immediately. If the widget is not currently
-visible, it is guaranteed to receive an event before it is shown.
-
                 The size is adjusted if it lies outside the range defined by
-minimumSize() and maximumSize(). Furthermore, the size is always
-at least TQSize(1, 1). For toplevel widgets, the minimum size
-might be larger, depending on the window manager.
-
                 If you want a top-level window to have a fixed size, call
-setResizeMode( TQLayout::FreeResize ) on its layout.
-
                 resize() is virtual, and all other overloaded resize()
-implementations in TQt call it.
-
                 Warning: Calling resize() or setGeometry() inside resizeEvent() can
-lead to infinite recursion.
-
                 
                See also pos, geometry, minimumSize, maximumSize, and resizeEvent().
-
-
                Set this property's value with resize() and get this property's value with size().
-
                TQSize sizeHint
                
-
                This property holds the recommended size for the widget.
-
                If the value of this property is an invalid size, no size is
-recommended.
-
                 The default implementation of sizeHint() returns an invalid size
-if there is no layout for this widget, and returns the layout's
-preferred size otherwise.
-
                 
                See also TQSize::isValid(), minimumSizeHint, sizePolicy, minimumSize, and updateGeometry().
-
-
                Get this property's value with sizeHint().
-
                TQSize sizeIncrement
                
-
                This property holds the size increment of the widget.
-
                When the user resizes the window, the size will move in steps of
-sizeIncrement().width() pixels horizontally and
-sizeIncrement.height() pixels vertically, with baseSize() as the
-basis. Preferred widget sizes are for non-negative integers i
-and j:
-
                -        width = baseSize().width() + i * sizeIncrement().width();
-        height = baseSize().height() + j * sizeIncrement().height();
-    
                
- 
-
                 Note that while you can set the size increment for all widgets, it
-only affects top-level widgets.
-
                 Warning: The size increment has no effect under Windows, and may
-be disregarded by the window manager on X.
-
                 
                See also size, minimumSize, and maximumSize.
-
-
                Set this property's value with setSizeIncrement() and get this property's value with sizeIncrement().
-
                TQSizePolicy sizePolicy
                
-
                This property holds the default layout behavior of the widget.
-
                If there is a TQLayout that manages this widget's children, the
-size policy specified by that layout is used. If there is no such
-TQLayout, the result of this function is used.
-
                 The default policy is Preferred/Preferred, which means that the
-widget can be freely resized, but prefers to be the size
-sizeHint() returns. Button-like widgets set the size policy to
-specify that they may stretch horizontally, but are fixed
-vertically. The same applies to lineedit controls (such as
-TQLineEdit, TQSpinBox or an editable TQComboBox) and other
-horizontally orientated widgets (such as TQProgressBar).
-TQToolButton's are normally square, so they allow growth in both
-directions. Widgets that support different directions (such as
-TQSlider, TQScrollBar or TQHeader) specify stretching in the
-respective direction only. Widgets that can provide scrollbars
-(usually subclasses of TQScrollView) tend to specify that they can
-use additional space, and that they can make do with less than
-sizeHint().
-
                 
                See also sizeHint, TQLayout, TQSizePolicy, and updateGeometry().
-
-
                Set this property's value with setSizePolicy() and get this property's value with sizePolicy().
-
                bool underMouse
                
-
                This property holds whether the widget is under the mouse cursor.
-
                This value is not updated properly during drag and drop
-operations.
-
                 
                See also TQEvent::Enter and TQEvent::Leave.
-
-
                Get this property's value with hasMouse().
-
                bool updatesEnabled
                
-
                This property holds whether updates are enabled.
-
                Calling update() and repaint() has no effect if updates are
-disabled. Paint events from the window system are processed
-normally even if updates are disabled.
-
                 setUpdatesEnabled() is normally used to disable updates for a
-short period of time, for instance to avoid screen flicker during
-large changes.
-
                 Example:
-
                -        setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE );
-        bigVisualChanges();
-        setUpdatesEnabled( TRUE );
-        repaint();
-    
                
- 
-
                 
                See also update(), repaint(), and paintEvent().
-
-
                Set this property's value with setUpdatesEnabled() and get this property's value with isUpdatesEnabled().
-
                bool visible
                
-
                This property holds whether the widget is visible.
-
                Calling show() sets the widget to visible status if all its parent
-widgets up to the top-level widget are visible. If an ancestor is
-not visible, the widget won't become visible until all its
-ancestors are shown.
-
                 Calling hide() hides a widget explicitly. An explicitly hidden
-widget will never become visible, even if all its ancestors become
-visible, unless you show it.
-
                 A widget receives show and hide events when its visibility status
-changes. Between a hide and a show event, there is no need to
-waste CPU cycles preparing or displaying information to the user.
-A video application, for example, might simply stop generating new
-frames.
-
                 A widget that happens to be obscured by other windows on the
-screen is considered to be visible. The same applies to iconified
-top-level widgets and windows that exist on another virtual
-desktop (on platforms that support this concept). A widget
-receives spontaneous show and hide events when its mapping status
-is changed by the window system, e.g. a spontaneous hide event
-when the user minimizes the window, and a spontaneous show event
-when the window is restored again.
-
                 
                See also show(), hide(), hidden, isVisibleTo(), minimized, showEvent(), and hideEvent().
-
-
                Get this property's value with isVisible().
-
                TQRect visibleRect
                
-
                This property holds the visible rectangle.
-
                This property is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                 No longer necessary, you can simply call repaint(). If you do not
-need the rectangle for repaint(), use clipRegion() instead.
-
-
                Get this property's value with visibleRect().
-
                int width
                
-
                This property holds the width of the widget excluding any window frame.
-
                See the Window Geometry documentation
-for an overview of top-level widget geometry.
-
                 
                See also geometry, height, and size.
-
-
                Get this property's value with width().
-
                double windowOpacity
                
-
                This property holds the level of opacity for the window.
-
                The valid range of opacity is from 1.0 (completely opaque) to
-0.0 (completely transparent).
-
                 By default the value of this property is 1.0.
-
                 This feature is only present on Mac OS X and Windows 2000 and up.
-
                 Warning: Changing this property from opaque to transparent might issue a
-paint event that needs to be processed before the window is displayed
-correctly. This affects mainly the use of TQPixmap::grabWindow(). Also note
-that semi-transparent windows update and resize significantely slower than
-opaque windows.
-
-
                Set this property's value with setWindowOpacity() and get this property's value with windowOpacity().
-
                int x
                 
                This property holds the x coordinate of the widget relative to its parent including any window frame.
-
                See the Window Geometry documentation
-for an overview of top-level widget geometry.
-
                 
                See also frameGeometry, y, and pos.
-
-
                Get this property's value with x().
-
                int y
                
-
                This property holds the y coordinate of the widget relative to its parent and including any window frame.
-
                See the Window Geometry documentation
-for an overview of top-level widget geometry.
-
                 
                See also frameGeometry, x, and pos.
-
-
                Get this property's value with y().
-
-
                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                
-
-
                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                TQt 3.3.8
                
-
                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qwidgetfactory-h.html b/doc/html/qwidgetfactory-h.html
index abda4c880..1c73e1243 100644
--- a/doc/html/qwidgetfactory-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qwidgetfactory-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qwidgetfactory.h Include File
+ntqwidgetfactory.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                TQWidgetFactory Class Reference
                
-
-
                The TQWidgetFactory class provides for the dynamic creation of widgets
-from TQt Designer .ui files.
-More...
-
                #include <qwidgetfactory.h>
-
                List of all member functions.
-
                Public Members
                
-
-
                Static Public Members
                
-
                  
-
                • TQWidget * create ( const TQString & uiFile, TQObject * connector = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
                  • 
-
                • TQWidget * create ( TQIODevice * dev, TQObject * connector = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
                  • 
-
                • void addWidgetFactory ( TQWidgetFactory * factory )
                  • 
-
                • void loadImages ( const TQString & dir )
                  • 
-
                • TQStringList widgets ()
                  • 
-
                • bool supportsWidget ( const TQString & widget )
                  • 
-
                
-
                Detailed Description
                
-
-
-
                 The TQWidgetFactory class provides for the dynamic creation of widgets
-from TQt Designer .ui files.
-
                 This class basically offers two things:
-
                 
                  
-
                   
                •  Dynamically creating widgets from TQt
-  Designer user interface description files.
-You can do this using the static function TQWidgetFactory::create().
-This function also performs signal and slot connections, tab
-ordering, etc., as defined in the .ui file, and returns the
-top-level widget in the .ui file. After creating the widget you can
-use TQObject::child() and TQObject::queryList() to access child
-widgets of this returned widget.
-
                   
                •  Adding additional widget factories to be able to create custom
-widgets. See createWidget() for details.
-
                   
                
-
                 This class is not included in the TQt library itself. To use it you
-must link against libtqui.so (Unix) or tqui.lib (Windows), which is
-built into INSTALL/lib if you built TQt Designer (INSTALL is
-the directory where TQt is installed ).
-
                 If you create a TQMainWindow using a TQWidgetFactory, be aware that
-it already has a central widget. Therefore, you need to delete this
-one before setting another one.
-
                 See the "Creating Dynamic Dialogs from .ui Files" section of the TQt Designer manual for an example. See
-also the TQWidgetPlugin class and the Plugins documentation.
-
-
                Member Function Documentation
                
-
                TQWidgetFactory::TQWidgetFactory ()
-
                 Constructs a TQWidgetFactory. 
-
                TQWidgetFactory::~TQWidgetFactory () [virtual]
-
                 
-Destructor.
-
-
                void TQWidgetFactory::addWidgetFactory ( TQWidgetFactory * factory ) [static]
-
                 Installs a widget factory factory, which normally contains
-additional widgets that can then be created using a TQWidgetFactory.
-See createWidget() for further details.
-
-
                TQWidget * TQWidgetFactory::create ( const TQString & uiFile, TQObject * connector = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) [static]
-
                
-
                 Loads the TQt Designer user interface description file uiFile
-and returns the top-level widget in that description. parent and
-name are passed to the constructor of the top-level widget.
-
                 This function also performs signal and slot connections, tab
-ordering, etc., as described in the .ui file. In TQt Designer it
-is possible to add custom slots to a form and connect to them. If
-you want these connections to be made, you must create a class
-derived from TQObject, which implements all these slots. Then pass an
-instance of the object as connector to this function. If you do
-this, the connections to the custom slots will be done using the connector as slot.
-
                 If something fails, 0 is returned.
-
                 The ownership of the returned widget is passed to the caller.
-
-
                TQWidget * TQWidgetFactory::create ( TQIODevice * dev, TQObject * connector = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) [static]
-
                  This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Loads the user interface description from device dev.
-
-
                TQWidget * TQWidgetFactory::createWidget ( const TQString & className, TQWidget * parent, const char * name ) const [virtual]
-
                
-Creates a widget of the type className passing parent and name to its constructor.
-
                 If className is a widget in the TQt library, it is directly
-created by this function. If the widget isn't in the TQt library,
-each of the installed widget plugins is asked, in turn, to create
-the widget. As soon as a plugin says it can create the widget it
-is asked to do so. It may occur that none of the plugins can
-create the widget, in which case each installed widget factory is
-asked to create the widget (see addWidgetFactory()). If the widget
-cannot be created by any of these means, 0 is returned.
-
                 If you have a custom widget, and want it to be created using the
-widget factory, there are two approaches you can use:
-
                 
                  
-
                   
                1.  Write a widget plugin. This allows you to use the widget in
-TQt Designer and in this TQWidgetFactory. See the widget plugin
-documentation for further details. (See the "Creating Custom
-Widgets with Plugins" section of the TQt
-    Designer manual for an example.
-
                   
                2.  Subclass TQWidgetFactory. Then reimplement this function to
-create and return an instance of your custom widget if className equals the name of your widget, otherwise return 0. Then
-at the beginning of your program where you want to use the widget
-factory to create widgets do a:
-
                  -    TQWidgetFactory::addWidgetFactory( new MyWidgetFactory );
-    
                  
- 
-where MyWidgetFactory is your TQWidgetFactory subclass.
-
                   
                
-
-
                void TQWidgetFactory::loadImages ( const TQString & dir ) [static]
-
                
-If you use a pixmap collection (which is the default for new
-projects) rather than saving the pixmaps within the .ui XML file,
-you must load the pixmap collection. TQWidgetFactory looks in the
-default TQMimeSourceFactory for the pixmaps. Either add it there
-manually, or call this function and specify the directory where
-the images can be found, as dir. This is normally the
-directory called images in the project's directory.
-
-
                bool TQWidgetFactory::supportsWidget ( const TQString & widget ) [static]
-
                 Returns TRUE if the widget factory can create the specified widget;
-otherwise returns FALSE. 
-
                TQStringList TQWidgetFactory::widgets () [static]
-
                 Returns the names of the widgets this factory can create. 
-
-
                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                
-
-
                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                TQt 3.3.8
                
-
                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qwidgetitem-members.html b/doc/html/qwidgetitem-members.html
index fb480ad91..750e38cb6 100644
--- a/doc/html/qwidgetitem-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qwidgetitem-members.html
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qwidgetitem.html b/doc/html/qwidgetitem.html
index 7d5572cc4..d3849ba78 100644
--- a/doc/html/qwidgetitem.html
+++ b/doc/html/qwidgetitem.html
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
                The TQWidgetItem class is a layout item that represents a widget.
 More...
-
                #include <qlayout.h>
+
                #include <ntqlayout.h>
 
                Inherits TQLayoutItem.
 
                List of all member functions.
 
                Public Members
                
@@ -54,15 +54,15 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 The TQWidgetItem class is a layout item that represents a widget.
 
                 This is used by custom layouts.
-
                 
                See also TQLayout, TQLayout::widget(), Widget Appearance and Style, and Layout Management.
+
                 
                See also TQLayout, TQLayout::widget(), Widget Appearance and Style, and Layout Management.
 
 
                Member Function Documentation
                
-
                TQWidgetItem::TQWidgetItem ( TQWidget * w )
+
                TQWidgetItem::TQWidgetItem ( TQWidget * w )
 
                
 
 
                 Creates an item containing widget w.
 
-
                TQSizePolicy::ExpandData TQWidgetItem::expanding () const [virtual]
+
                TQSizePolicy::ExpandData TQWidgetItem::expanding () const [virtual]
 
                
 Returns whether this item's widget can make use of more space than
 sizeHint(). A value of Vertical or Horizontal means that it wants
@@ -77,28 +77,28 @@ Returns TRUE if the widget has been hidden; otherwise returns
 FALSE.
 
 
                Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
-
                TQSize TQWidgetItem::maximumSize () const [virtual]
+
                TQSize TQWidgetItem::maximumSize () const [virtual]
 
                
 Returns the maximum size of this item.
 
 
                Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
-
                TQSize TQWidgetItem::minimumSize () const [virtual]
+
                TQSize TQWidgetItem::minimumSize () const [virtual]
 
                
 Returns the minimum size of this item.
 
 
                Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
-
                void TQWidgetItem::setGeometry ( const TQRect & r ) [virtual]
+
                void TQWidgetItem::setGeometry ( const TQRect & r ) [virtual]
 
                
 Sets the geometry of this item's widget to be contained within
 rect r, taking alignment and maximum size into account.
 
 
                Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
-
                TQSize TQWidgetItem::sizeHint () const [virtual]
+
                TQSize TQWidgetItem::sizeHint () const [virtual]
 
                
 Returns the preferred size of this item.
 
 
                Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
-
                TQWidget * TQWidgetItem::widget () [virtual]
+
                TQWidget * TQWidgetItem::widget () [virtual]
 
                
 Returns the widget managed by this item.
 
diff --git a/doc/html/qwidgetplugin-h.html b/doc/html/qwidgetplugin-h.html
index ee97f0ea3..3dd51ac47 100644
--- a/doc/html/qwidgetplugin-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qwidgetplugin-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qwidgetplugin.h Include File
+ntqwidgetplugin.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                TQWidgetPlugin Class Reference
                
-
-
                The TQWidgetPlugin class provides an abstract base for custom TQWidget plugins.
-More...
-
                #include <qwidgetplugin.h>
-
                List of all member functions.
-
                Public Members
                
-
                  
-
                • TQWidgetPlugin ()
                  • 
-
                • ~TQWidgetPlugin ()
                  • 
-
                • virtual TQStringList keys () const = 0
                  • 
-
                • virtual TQWidget * create ( const TQString & key, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) = 0
                  • 
-
                • virtual TQString group ( const TQString & key ) const
                  • 
-
                • virtual TQIconSet iconSet ( const TQString & key ) const
                  • 
-
                • virtual TQString includeFile ( const TQString & key ) const
                  • 
-
                • virtual TQString toolTip ( const TQString & key ) const
                  • 
-
                • virtual TQString whatsThis ( const TQString & key ) const
                  • 
-
                • virtual bool isContainer ( const TQString & key ) const
                  • 
-
                
-
                Detailed Description
                
-
-
-The TQWidgetPlugin class provides an abstract base for custom TQWidget plugins.
-
                 
-
                 The widget plugin is a simple plugin interface that makes it easy
-to create custom widgets that can be included in forms using TQt Designer and used by applications.
-
                 Writing a widget plugin is achieved by subclassing this base
-class, reimplementing the pure virtual functions keys(), create(),
-group(), iconSet(), includeFile(), toolTip(), whatsThis() and
-isContainer(), and exporting the class with the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN
-macro.
-
                 See the TQt Designer manual's,
-'Creating Custom Widgets' section in the 'Creating Custom Widgets'
-chapter, for a complete example of a TQWidgetPlugin.
-
                 See also the Plugins
-    documentation and the TQWidgetFactory class that is
-supplied with TQt Designer.
-
                See also Plugins.
-
-
                Member Function Documentation
                
-
                TQWidgetPlugin::TQWidgetPlugin ()
-
                
-Constructs a widget plugin. This is invoked automatically by the
-Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN macro.
-
-
                TQWidgetPlugin::~TQWidgetPlugin ()
-
                
-Destroys the widget plugin.
-
                 You never have to call this explicitly. TQt destroys a plugin
-automatically when it is no longer used.
-
-
                TQWidget * TQWidgetPlugin::create ( const TQString & key, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) [pure virtual]
-
                
-
-
                 Creates and returns a TQWidget object for the widget key key.
-The widget key is the class name of the required widget. The name and parent arguments are passed to the custom widget's
-constructor.
-
                 
                See also keys().
-
-
                TQString TQWidgetPlugin::group ( const TQString & key ) const [virtual]
-
                
-Returns the group (toolbar name) that the custom widget of class
-key should be part of when TQt Designer loads it.
-
                 The default implementation returns TQString::null.
-
-
                TQIconSet TQWidgetPlugin::iconSet ( const TQString & key ) const [virtual]
-
                
-Returns the iconset that TQt Designer should use to represent
-the custom widget of class key in the toolbar.
-
                 The default implementation returns an null iconset.
-
-
                TQString TQWidgetPlugin::includeFile ( const TQString & key ) const [virtual]
-
                
-Returns the name of the include file that TQt Designer and uic should use to include the custom widget of class key in
-generated code.
-
                 The default implementation returns TQString::null.
-
-
                bool TQWidgetPlugin::isContainer ( const TQString & key ) const [virtual]
-
                
-Returns TRUE if the custom widget of class key can contain
-other widgets, e.g. like TQFrame; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                 The default implementation returns FALSE.
-
-
                TQStringList TQWidgetPlugin::keys () const [pure virtual]
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the list of widget keys this plugin supports.
-
                 These keys must be the class names of the custom widgets that are
-implemented in the plugin.
-
                 
                See also create().
-
-
                TQString TQWidgetPlugin::toolTip ( const TQString & key ) const [virtual]
-
                
-Returns the text of the tooltip that TQt Designer should use
-for the custom widget of class key's toolbar button.
-
                 The default implementation returns TQString::null.
-
-
                TQString TQWidgetPlugin::whatsThis ( const TQString & key ) const [virtual]
-
                
-Returns the text of the whatsThis text that TQt Designer should
-use when the user requests whatsThis help for the custom widget of
-class key.
-
                 The default implementation returns TQString::null.
-
-
-
                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                
-
-
                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                TQt 3.3.8
                
-
                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qwidgetstack-h.html b/doc/html/qwidgetstack-h.html
index fae3e3efb..4aa124ca2 100644
--- a/doc/html/qwidgetstack-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qwidgetstack-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qwidgetstack.h Include File
+ntqwidgetstack.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                TQWidgetStack Class Reference
                
-
-
                The TQWidgetStack class provides a stack of widgets of which
-only the top widget is user-visible.
-More...
-
                #include <qwidgetstack.h>
-
                Inherits TQFrame.
-
                List of all member functions.
-
                Public Members
                
-
-
                Public Slots
                
-
-
                Signals
                
-
-
                Protected Members
                
-
-
                Detailed Description
                
-
-
-The TQWidgetStack class provides a stack of widgets of which
-only the top widget is user-visible.
-
                 
-
-
                 The application programmer can move any widget to the top of the
-stack at any time using raiseWidget(), and add or remove widgets
-using addWidget() and removeWidget(). It is not sufficient to pass
-the widget stack as parent to a widget which should be inserted into
-the widgetstack.
-
                 visibleWidget() is the get equivalent of raiseWidget(); it
-returns a pointer to the widget that is currently at the top of
-the stack.
-
                 TQWidgetStack also provides the ability to manipulate widgets
-through application-specified integer IDs. You can also translate
-from widget pointers to IDs using id() and from IDs to widget
-pointers using widget(). These numeric IDs are unique (per
-TQWidgetStack, not globally), but TQWidgetStack does not attach any
-additional meaning to them.
-
                 The default widget stack is frameless, but you can use the usual
-TQFrame functions (such as setFrameStyle()) to add a frame.
-
                 TQWidgetStack provides a signal, aboutToShow(), which is emitted
-just before a managed widget is shown.
-
                 
                See also TQTabDialog, TQTabBar, TQFrame, and Organizers.
-
-
                Member Function Documentation
                
-
                TQWidgetStack::TQWidgetStack ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                
-Constructs an empty widget stack.
-
                 The parent and name arguments are passed to the TQFrame
-constructor.
-
-
                TQWidgetStack::TQWidgetStack ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name, WFlags f )
-
                
-Constructs an empty widget stack.
-
                 The parent, name and f arguments are passed to the TQFrame
-constructor.
-
-
                TQWidgetStack::~TQWidgetStack ()
-
                
-Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-
-
                void TQWidgetStack::aboutToShow ( int ) [signal]
-
                
-
-
                 This signal is emitted just before a managed widget is shown if
-that managed widget has an ID != -1. The argument is the numeric
-ID of the widget.
-
                 If you call visibleWidget() in a slot connected to aboutToShow(),
-the widget it returns is the one that is currently visible, not
-the one that is about to be shown.
-
-
                void TQWidgetStack::aboutToShow ( TQWidget * ) [signal]
-
                
-
-
                 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 This signal is emitted just before a managed widget is shown. The
-argument is a pointer to the widget.
-
                 If you call visibleWidget() in a slot connected to aboutToShow(),
-the widget returned is the one that is currently visible, not the
-one that is about to be shown.
-
-
                int TQWidgetStack::addWidget ( TQWidget * w, int id = -1 )
-
                
-Adds widget w to this stack of widgets, with ID id.
-
                 If you pass an id >= 0 this ID is used. If you pass an id of
--1 (the default), the widgets will be numbered automatically. If
-you pass -2 a unique negative integer will be generated. No widget
-has an ID of -1. Returns the ID or -1 on failure (e.g. w is 0).
-
                 If you pass an id that is already used, then a unique negative
-integer will be generated to prevent two widgets having the same
-id.
-
                 If w already exists in the stack the widget will be removed first.
-
                 If w is not a child of this TQWidgetStack moves it using
-reparent().
-
-
                Example: xform/xform.cpp.
-
                int TQWidgetStack::id ( TQWidget * widget ) const
-
                
-Returns the ID of the widget. Returns -1 if widget is 0 or
-is not being managed by this widget stack.
-
                 
                See also widget() and addWidget().
-
-
                void TQWidgetStack::raiseWidget ( int id ) [slot]
-
                
-Raises the widget with ID id to the top of the widget stack.
-
                 
                See also visibleWidget().
-
-
                Example: xform/xform.cpp.
-
                void TQWidgetStack::raiseWidget ( TQWidget * w ) [slot]
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Raises widget w to the top of the widget stack.
-
-
                void TQWidgetStack::removeWidget ( TQWidget * w )
-
                
-Removes widget w from this stack of widgets. Does not delete w. If w is the currently visible widget, no other widget is
-substituted.
-
                 
                See also visibleWidget() and raiseWidget().
-
-
                void TQWidgetStack::setChildGeometries () [virtual protected]
-
                
-Fixes up the children's geometries.
-
-
                TQWidget * TQWidgetStack::visibleWidget () const
-
                
-Returns the currently visible widget (the one at the top of the
-stack), or 0 if nothing is currently being shown.
-
                 
                See also aboutToShow(), id(), and raiseWidget().
-
-
                TQWidget * TQWidgetStack::widget ( int id ) const
-
                
-Returns the widget with ID id. Returns 0 if this widget stack
-does not manage a widget with ID id.
-
                 
                See also id() and addWidget().
-
-
-
                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                
-
-
                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                TQt 3.3.8
                
-
                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qwindowdefs-h.html b/doc/html/qwindowdefs-h.html
index 950559623..658673a12 100644
--- a/doc/html/qwindowdefs-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qwindowdefs-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qwindowdefs.h Include File
+ntqwindowdefs.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                TQWindowsStyle Class Reference
                
-
-
                The TQWindowsStyle class provides a Microsoft Windows-like look and feel.
-More...
-
                #include <qwindowsstyle.h>
-
                Inherits TQCommonStyle.
-
                Inherited by TQMacStyle and TQPlatinumStyle.
-
                List of all member functions.
-
                Public Members
                
-
-
                Detailed Description
                
-
-
-The TQWindowsStyle class provides a Microsoft Windows-like look and feel.
-
                 
-
                 This style is TQt's default GUI style on Windows.
-
                See also Widget Appearance and Style.
-
-
                Member Function Documentation
                
-
                TQWindowsStyle::TQWindowsStyle ()
-
                
-Constructs a TQWindowsStyle
-
-
-
                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                
-
-
                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                TQt 3.3.8
                
-
                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qwindowsystem_qws-h.html b/doc/html/qwindowsystem_qws-h.html
index 83b18d557..4827b7068 100644
--- a/doc/html/qwindowsystem_qws-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qwindowsystem_qws-h.html
@@ -77,10 +77,10 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 #ifndef QT_H
 #include "qwssocket_qws.h"
-#include "qmap.h"
-#include "qdatetime.h"
-#include "qptrlist.h"
-#include "qimage.h"
+#include "ntqmap.h"
+#include "ntqdatetime.h"
+#include "ntqptrlist.h"
+#include "ntqimage.h"
 
 #include "qwsproperty_qws.h"
 #include "qwscommand_qws.h"
diff --git a/doc/html/qwizard-h.html b/doc/html/qwizard-h.html
index baf095fd5..32126b635 100644
--- a/doc/html/qwizard-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qwizard-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qwizard.h Include File
+ntqwizard.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                TQWizard Class Reference
                
-
-
                The TQWizard class provides a framework for wizard dialogs.
-More...
-
                #include <qwizard.h>
-
                Inherits TQDialog.
-
                List of all member functions.
-
                Public Members
                
-
                  
-
                • TQWizard ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )
                  • 
-
                • ~TQWizard ()
                  • 
-
                • virtual void addPage ( TQWidget * page, const TQString & title )
                  • 
-
                • virtual void insertPage ( TQWidget * page, const TQString & title, int index )
                  • 
-
                • virtual void removePage ( TQWidget * page )
                  • 
-
                • TQString title ( TQWidget * page ) const
                  • 
-
                • void setTitle ( TQWidget * page, const TQString & title )
                  • 
-
                • TQFont titleFont () const
                  • 
-
                • void setTitleFont ( const TQFont & )
                  • 
-
                • virtual void showPage ( TQWidget * page )
                  • 
-
                • TQWidget * currentPage () const
                  • 
-
                • TQWidget * page ( int index ) const
                  • 
-
                • int pageCount () const
                  • 
-
                • int indexOf ( TQWidget * page ) const
                  • 
-
                • virtual bool appropriate ( TQWidget * page ) const
                  • 
-
                • virtual void setAppropriate ( TQWidget * page, bool appropriate )
                  • 
-
                • TQPushButton * backButton () const
                  • 
-
                • TQPushButton * nextButton () const
                  • 
-
                • TQPushButton * finishButton () const
                  • 
-
                • TQPushButton * cancelButton () const
                  • 
-
                • TQPushButton * helpButton () const
                  • 
-
                
-
                Public Slots
                
-
                  
-
                • virtual void setBackEnabled ( TQWidget * page, bool enable )
                  • 
-
                • virtual void setNextEnabled ( TQWidget * page, bool enable )
                  • 
-
                • virtual void setFinishEnabled ( TQWidget * page, bool enable )
                  • 
-
                • virtual void setHelpEnabled ( TQWidget * page, bool enable )
                  • 
-
                • virtual void setFinish ( TQWidget *, bool )  (obsolete)
                  • 
-
                
-
                Signals
                
-
-
                Properties
                
-
                  
-
                • TQFont titleFont - the font used for page titles
                  • 
-
                
-
                Protected Members
                
-
-
                Protected Slots
                
-
                  
-
                • virtual void back ()
                  • 
-
                • virtual void next ()
                  • 
-
                • virtual void help ()
                  • 
-
                
-
                Detailed Description
                
-
-
-The TQWizard class provides a framework for wizard dialogs.
-
                 
-
-
-
-
                 A wizard is a special type of input dialog that consists of a
-sequence of dialog pages. A wizard's purpose is to walk the user
-through a process step by step. Wizards are useful for complex or
-infrequently occurring tasks that people may find difficult to
-learn or do.
-
                 TQWizard provides page titles and displays Next, Back, Finish,
-Cancel, and Help push buttons, as appropriate to the current
-position in the page sequence. These buttons can be
-enabled/disabled using setBackEnabled(), setNextEnabled(),
-setFinishEnabled() and setHelpEnabled().
-
                 Create and populate dialog pages that inherit from TQWidget and add
-them to the wizard using addPage(). Use insertPage() to add a
-dialog page at a certain position in the page sequence. Use
-removePage() to remove a page from the page sequence.
-
                 Use currentPage() to retrieve a pointer to the currently displayed
-page. page() returns a pointer to the page at a certain position
-in the page sequence.
-
                 Use pageCount() to retrieve the total number of pages in the page
-sequence. indexOf() will return the index of a page in the page
-sequence.
-
                 TQWizard provides functionality to mark pages as appropriate (or
-not) in the current context with setAppropriate(). The idea is
-that a page may be irrelevant and should be skipped depending on
-the data entered by the user on a preceding page.
-
                 It is generally considered good design to provide a greater number
-of simple pages with fewer choices rather than a smaller number of
-complex pages.
-
                 Example code is available here: wizard/wizard.cpp wizard/wizard.h
-
                 
                A TQWizard page
                 
                 A TQWizard page
-
                
-
                 
                See also Abstract Widget Classes, Dialog Classes, and Organizers.
-
-
                Member Function Documentation
                
-
                TQWizard::TQWizard ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )
-
                
-Constructs an empty wizard dialog. The parent, name, modal and f arguments are passed to the TQDialog constructor.
-
-
                TQWizard::~TQWizard ()
-
                
-Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources, including
-all pages and controllers.
-
-
                void TQWizard::addPage ( TQWidget * page, const TQString & title ) [virtual]
-
                
-Adds page to the end of the page sequence, with the title, title.
-
-
                bool TQWizard::appropriate ( TQWidget * page ) const [virtual]
-
                
-Called when the Next button is clicked; this virtual function
-returns TRUE if page is relevant for display in the current
-context; otherwise it is ignored by TQWizard and returns FALSE. The
-default implementation returns the value set using
-setAppropriate(). The ultimate default is TRUE.
-
                 Warning: The last page of the wizard will be displayed if no page
-is relevant in the current context.
-
-
                void TQWizard::back () [virtual protected slot]
-
                
-Called when the user clicks the Back button; this function shows
-the preceding relevant page in the sequence.
-
                 
                See also appropriate().
-
-
                TQPushButton * TQWizard::backButton () const
-
                
-Returns a pointer to the dialog's Back button
-
                 By default, this button is connected to the back() slot, which is
-virtual so you can reimplement it in a TQWizard subclass. Use
-setBackEnabled() to enable/disable this button.
-
-
                TQPushButton * TQWizard::cancelButton () const
-
                
-Returns a pointer to the dialog's Cancel button
-
                 By default, this button is connected to the TQDialog::reject()
-slot, which is virtual so you can reimplement it in a TQWizard
-subclass.
-
-
                TQWidget * TQWizard::currentPage () const
-
                
-Returns a pointer to the current page in the sequence. Although
-the wizard does its best to make sure that this value is never 0,
-it can be if you try hard enough.
-
-
                TQPushButton * TQWizard::finishButton () const
-
                
-Returns a pointer to the dialog's Finish button
-
                 By default, this button is connected to the TQDialog::accept()
-slot, which is virtual so you can reimplement it in a TQWizard
-subclass. Use setFinishEnabled() to enable/disable this button.
-
-
                void TQWizard::help () [virtual protected slot]
-
                
-Called when the user clicks the Help button, this function emits
-the helpClicked() signal.
-
-
                TQPushButton * TQWizard::helpButton () const
-
                
-Returns a pointer to the dialog's Help button
-
                 By default, this button is connected to the help() slot, which is
-virtual so you can reimplement it in a TQWizard subclass. Use
-setHelpEnabled() to enable/disable this button.
-
-
                void TQWizard::helpClicked () [signal]
-
                
-
-
                 This signal is emitted when the user clicks on the Help button.
-
-
                int TQWizard::indexOf ( TQWidget * page ) const
-
                
-Returns the position of page page. If the page is not part of
-the wizard -1 is returned.
-
-
                void TQWizard::insertPage ( TQWidget * page, const TQString & title, int index ) [virtual]
-
                
-Inserts page at position index into the page sequence, with
-title title. If index is -1, the page will be appended to
-the end of the wizard's page sequence.
-
-
                void TQWizard::layOutButtonRow ( TQHBoxLayout * layout ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This virtual function is responsible for adding the buttons below
-the bottom divider.
-
                 layout is the horizontal layout of the entire wizard.
-
-
                void TQWizard::layOutTitleRow ( TQHBoxLayout * layout, const TQString & title ) [virtual protected]
-
                
-This virtual function is responsible for laying out the title row.
-
                 layout is the horizontal layout for the wizard, and title is the title for this page. This function is called every
-time title changes.
-
-
                void TQWizard::next () [virtual protected slot]
-
                
-Called when the user clicks the Next button, this function shows
-the next relevant page in the sequence.
-
                 
                See also appropriate().
-
-
                TQPushButton * TQWizard::nextButton () const
-
                
-Returns a pointer to the dialog's Next button
-
                 By default, this button is connected to the next() slot, which is
-virtual so you can reimplement it in a TQWizard subclass. Use
-setNextEnabled() to enable/disable this button.
-
-
                TQWidget * TQWizard::page ( int index ) const
-
                
-Returns a pointer to the page at position index in the
-sequence, or 0 if index is out of range. The first page has
-index 0.
-
-
                int TQWizard::pageCount () const
-
                
-Returns the number of pages in the wizard.
-
-
                void TQWizard::removePage ( TQWidget * page ) [virtual]
-
                
-Removes page from the page sequence but does not delete the
-page. If page is currently being displayed, TQWizard will
-display the page that precedes it, or the first page if this was
-the first page.
-
-
                void TQWizard::selected ( const TQString & ) [signal]
-
                
-
-
                 This signal is emitted when the current page changes. The
-parameter contains the title of the selected page.
-
-
                void TQWizard::setAppropriate ( TQWidget * page, bool appropriate ) [virtual]
-
                
-If appropriate is TRUE then page page is considered relevant
-in the current context and should be displayed in the page
-sequence; otherwise page should not be displayed in the page
-sequence.
-
                 
                See also appropriate().
-
-
                void TQWizard::setBackEnabled ( TQWidget * page, bool enable ) [virtual slot]
-
                
-If enable is TRUE, page page has a Back button; otherwise page has no Back button. By default all pages have this button.
-
-
                void TQWizard::setFinish ( TQWidget *, bool ) [virtual slot]
-
                
-
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                 Use setFinishEnabled instead
-
-
                void TQWizard::setFinishEnabled ( TQWidget * page, bool enable ) [virtual slot]
-
                
-If enable is TRUE, page page has a Finish button; otherwise
-page has no Finish button. By default no page has this
-button.
-
-
                void TQWizard::setHelpEnabled ( TQWidget * page, bool enable ) [virtual slot]
-
                
-If enable is TRUE, page page has a Help button; otherwise page has no Help button. By default all pages have this button.
-
-
                void TQWizard::setNextEnabled ( TQWidget * page, bool enable ) [virtual slot]
-
                
-If enable is TRUE, page page has a Next button; otherwise
-the Next button on page is disabled. By default all pages have
-this button.
-
-
                void TQWizard::setTitle ( TQWidget * page, const TQString & title )
-
                
-Sets the title for page page to title.
-
-
                void TQWizard::setTitleFont ( const TQFont & )
-
                Sets the font used for page titles.
-See the "titleFont" property for details.
-
                void TQWizard::showPage ( TQWidget * page ) [virtual]
-
                
-Makes page the current page and emits the selected() signal.
-
                 This virtual function is called whenever a different page is to
-be shown, including the first time the TQWizard is shown.
-By reimplementing it (and calling TQWizard::showPage()),
-you can prepare each page prior to it being shown.
-
-
                Examples: distributor/distributor.ui.h and wizard/wizard.cpp.
-
                TQString TQWizard::title ( TQWidget * page ) const
-
                
-Returns the title of page page.
-
-
                TQFont TQWizard::titleFont () const
-
                Returns the font used for page titles.
-See the "titleFont" property for details.
-
                Property Documentation
                
-
                TQFont titleFont
                
-
                This property holds the font used for page titles.
-
                The default is TQApplication::font().
-
-
                Set this property's value with setTitleFont() and get this property's value with titleFont().
-
-
                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                
-
-
                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                TQt 3.3.8
                
-
                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qwmatrix-h.html b/doc/html/qwmatrix-h.html
index a625aa27a..e820552a0 100644
--- a/doc/html/qwmatrix-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qwmatrix-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qwmatrix.h Include File
+ntqwmatrix.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                TQWMatrix Class Reference
                
-
-
                The TQWMatrix class specifies 2D transformations of a
-coordinate system.
-More...
-
                #include <qwmatrix.h>
-
                List of all member functions.
-
                Public Members
                
-
                  
-
                • TQWMatrix ()
                  • 
-
                • TQWMatrix ( double m11, double m12, double m21, double m22, double dx, double dy )
                  • 
-
                • void setMatrix ( double m11, double m12, double m21, double m22, double dx, double dy )
                  • 
-
                • double m11 () const
                  • 
-
                • double m12 () const
                  • 
-
                • double m21 () const
                  • 
-
                • double m22 () const
                  • 
-
                • double dx () const
                  • 
-
                • double dy () const
                  • 
-
                • void map ( int x, int y, int * tx, int * ty ) const
                  • 
-
                • void map ( double x, double y, double * tx, double * ty ) const
                  • 
-
                • TQRect mapRect ( const TQRect & rect ) const
                  • 
-
                • TQPoint map ( const TQPoint & p ) const
                  • 
-
                • TQRect map ( const TQRect & r ) const  (obsolete)
                  • 
-
                • TQPointArray map ( const TQPointArray & a ) const
                  • 
-
                • TQRegion map ( const TQRegion & r ) const
                  • 
-
                • TQRegion mapToRegion ( const TQRect & rect ) const
                  • 
-
                • TQPointArray mapToPolygon ( const TQRect & rect ) const
                  • 
-
                • void reset ()
                  • 
-
                • bool isIdentity () const
                  • 
-
                • TQWMatrix & translate ( double dx, double dy )
                  • 
-
                • TQWMatrix & scale ( double sx, double sy )
                  • 
-
                • TQWMatrix & shear ( double sh, double sv )
                  • 
-
                • TQWMatrix & rotate ( double a )
                  • 
-
                • bool isInvertible () const
                  • 
-
                • double det () const
                  • 
-
                • TQWMatrix invert ( bool * invertible = 0 ) const
                  • 
-
                • bool operator== ( const TQWMatrix & m ) const
                  • 
-
                • bool operator!= ( const TQWMatrix & m ) const
                  • 
-
                • TQWMatrix & operator*= ( const TQWMatrix & m )
                  • 
-
                • enum TransformationMode { Points, Areas }
                  • 
-
                
-
                Static Public Members
                
-
-
                Related Functions
                
-
                  
-
                • TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQWMatrix & m )
                  • 
-
                • TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQWMatrix & m )
                  • 
-
                
-
                Detailed Description
                
-
-
-The TQWMatrix class specifies 2D transformations of a
-coordinate system.
-
                 
-
-
                 The standard coordinate system of a paint
-    device has the origin located at the top-left position. X
-values increase to the right; Y values increase downward.
-
                 This coordinate system is the default for the TQPainter, which
-renders graphics in a paint device. A user-defined coordinate
-system can be specified by setting a TQWMatrix for the painter.
-
                 Example:
-
                -        MyWidget::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
-        {
-            TQPainter p;                      // our painter
-            TQWMatrix m;                      // our transformation matrix
-            m.rotate( 22.5 );                // rotated coordinate system
-            p.begin( this );                 // start painting
-            p.setWorldMatrix( m );           // use rotated coordinate system
-            p.drawText( 30,20, "detator" );  // draw rotated text at 30,20
-            p.end();                         // painting done
-        }
-    
                
- 
-
                 A matrix specifies how to translate, scale, shear or rotate the
-graphics; the actual transformation is performed by the drawing
-routines in TQPainter and by TQPixmap::xForm().
-
                 The TQWMatrix class contains a 3x3 matrix of the form:
-
-
-
-
-
                m11m12 0 
                m21m22 0 
                dx dy  1 
                
-
                 A matrix transforms a point in the plane to another point:
-
                -        x' = m11*x + m21*y + dx
-        y' = m22*y + m12*x + dy
-    
                
- 
-
                 The point (x, y) is the original point, and (x', y') is the
-transformed point. (x', y') can be transformed back to (x, y) by performing the same operation on the inverted matrix.
-
                 The elements dx and dy specify horizontal and vertical
-translation. The elements m11 and m22 specify horizontal and
-vertical scaling. The elements m12 and m21 specify
-horizontal and vertical shearing.
-
                 The identity matrix has m11 and m22 set to 1; all others are
-set to 0. This matrix maps a point to itself.
-
                 Translation is the simplest transformation. Setting dx and dy will move the coordinate system dx units along the X axis
-and dy units along the Y axis.
-
                 Scaling can be done by setting m11 and m22. For example,
-setting m11 to 2 and m22 to 1.5 will double the height and
-increase the width by 50%.
-
                 Shearing is controlled by m12 and m21. Setting these
-elements to values different from zero will twist the coordinate
-system.
-
                 Rotation is achieved by carefully setting both the shearing
-factors and the scaling factors. The TQWMatrix also has a function
-that sets rotation directly.
-
                 TQWMatrix lets you combine transformations like this:
-
                -        TQWMatrix m;           // identity matrix
-        m.translate(10, -20); // first translate (10,-20)
-        m.rotate(25);         // then rotate 25 degrees
-        m.scale(1.2, 0.7);    // finally scale it
-    
                
- 
-
                 Here's the same example using basic matrix operations:
-
                -        double a    = pi/180 * 25;         // convert 25 to radians
-        double sina = sin(a);
-        double cosa = cos(a);
-        TQWMatrix m1(1, 0, 0, 1, 10, -20);  // translation matrix
-        TQWMatrix m2( cosa, sina,           // rotation matrix
-                    -sina, cosa, 0, 0 );
-        TQWMatrix m3(1.2, 0, 0, 0.7, 0, 0); // scaling matrix
-        TQWMatrix m;
-        m = m3 * m2 * m1;                  // combine all transformations
-    
                
- 
-
                 TQPainter has functions to translate, scale, shear and rotate the
-coordinate system without using a TQWMatrix. Although these
-functions are very convenient, it can be more efficient to build a
-TQWMatrix and call TQPainter::setWorldMatrix() if you want to perform
-more than a single transform operation.
-
                 
                See also TQPainter::setWorldMatrix(), TQPixmap::xForm(), Graphics Classes, and Image Processing Classes.
-
-
                Member Type Documentation
                
-
                TQWMatrix::TransformationMode
                
-
-
                 
-
                 TQWMatrix offers two transformation modes. Calculations can either
-be done in terms of points (Points mode, the default), or in
-terms of area (Area mode).
-
                 In Points mode the transformation is applied to the points that
-mark out the shape's bounding line. In Areas mode the
-transformation is applied in such a way that the area of the
-contained region is correctly transformed under the matrix.
-
                  
-
                • TQWMatrix::Points - transformations are applied to the shape's points.
-
                • TQWMatrix::Areas - transformations are applied (e.g. to the width and
-height) so that the area is transformed.
-
                 Example:
-
                 Suppose we have a rectangle,
-TQRect( 10, 20, 30, 40 ) and a transformation matrix
-TQWMatrix( 2, 0, 0, 2, 0, 0 ) to double the rectangle's size.
-
                 In Points mode, the matrix will transform the top-left (10,20) and
-the bottom-right (39,59) points producing a rectangle with its
-top-left point at (20,40) and its bottom-right point at (78,118),
-i.e. with a width of 59 and a height of 79.
-
                 In Areas mode, the matrix will transform the top-left point in
-the same way as in Points mode to (20/40), and double the width
-and height, so the bottom-right will become (69,99), i.e. a width
-of 60 and a height of 80.
-
                 Because integer arithmetic is used (for speed), rounding
-differences mean that the modes will produce slightly different
-results given the same shape and the same transformation,
-especially when scaling up. This also means that some operations
-are not commutative.
-
                 Under Points mode, matrix * ( region1 | region2 ) is not equal to
-matrix * region1 | matrix * region2. Under Area mode, matrix * (pointarray[i]) is not neccesarily equal to
-(matrix * pointarry)[i].
-
                 
                Comparison of Points and Areas TransformationModes
                 
-
                Member Function Documentation
                
-
                TQWMatrix::TQWMatrix ()
-
                
-Constructs an identity matrix. All elements are set to zero except
-m11 and m22 (scaling), which are set to 1.
-
-
                TQWMatrix::TQWMatrix ( double m11, double m12, double m21, double m22, double dx, double dy )
-
                
-Constructs a matrix with the elements, m11, m12, m21, m22, dx and dy.
-
-
                double TQWMatrix::det () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the matrix's determinant.
-
-
                double TQWMatrix::dx () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the horizontal translation.
-
-
                double TQWMatrix::dy () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the vertical translation.
-
-
                TQWMatrix TQWMatrix::invert ( bool * invertible = 0 ) const
-
                
-Returns the inverted matrix.
-
                 If the matrix is singular (not invertible), the identity matrix is
-returned.
-
                 If invertible is not 0: the value of *invertible is set
-to TRUE if the matrix is invertible; otherwise *invertible is
-set to FALSE.
-
                 
                See also isInvertible().
-
-
                Example: t14/cannon.cpp.
-
                bool TQWMatrix::isIdentity () const
-
                
-Returns TRUE if the matrix is the identity matrix; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                 
                See also reset().
-
-
                bool TQWMatrix::isInvertible () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns TRUE if the matrix is invertible; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
                 
                See also invert().
-
-
                double TQWMatrix::m11 () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the X scaling factor.
-
-
                double TQWMatrix::m12 () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the vertical shearing factor.
-
-
                double TQWMatrix::m21 () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the horizontal shearing factor.
-
-
                double TQWMatrix::m22 () const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the Y scaling factor.
-
-
                void TQWMatrix::map ( int x, int y, int * tx, int * ty ) const
-
                
-Transforms ( x, y ) to ( *tx, *ty ) using the formulae:
-
                 
                -        *tx = m11*x + m21*y + dx  (rounded to the nearest integer)
-        *ty = m22*y + m12*x + dy  (rounded to the nearest integer)
-    
                
- 
-
-
                Examples: t14/cannon.cpp and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                void TQWMatrix::map ( double x, double y, double * tx, double * ty ) const
-
                
-This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Transforms ( x, y ) to ( *tx, *ty ) using the
-following formulae:
-
                 
                -        *tx = m11*x + m21*y + dx
-        *ty = m22*y + m12*x + dy
-    
                
- 
-
-
                TQPoint TQWMatrix::map ( const TQPoint & p ) const
-
                
-
-
                 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Transforms p to using the formulae:
-
                 
                -        retx = m11*px + m21*py + dx  (rounded to the nearest integer)
-        rety = m22*py + m12*px + dy  (rounded to the nearest integer)
-    
                
- 
-
-
                TQRect TQWMatrix::map ( const TQRect & r ) const
-
                
-
-
                 This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                 Please use TQWMatrix::mapRect() instead.
-
                 Note that this method does return the bounding rectangle of the r, when
-shearing or rotations are used.
-
-
                TQPointArray TQWMatrix::map ( const TQPointArray & a ) const
-
                
-
-
                 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Returns the point array a transformed by calling map for each point.
-
-
                TQRegion TQWMatrix::map ( const TQRegion & r ) const
-
                
-
-
                 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 Transforms the region r.
-
                 Calling this method can be rather expensive, if rotations or
-shearing are used.
-
-
                TQRect TQWMatrix::mapRect ( const TQRect & rect ) const
-
                
-Returns the transformed rectangle rect.
-
                 The bounding rectangle is returned if rotation or shearing has
-been specified.
-
                 If you need to know the exact region rect maps to use operator*().
-
                 
                See also operator*().
-
-
                Example: xform/xform.cpp.
-
                TQPointArray TQWMatrix::mapToPolygon ( const TQRect & rect ) const
-
                
-Returns the transformed rectangle rect as a polygon.
-
                 Polygons and rectangles behave slightly differently
-when transformed (due to integer rounding), so
-matrix.map( TQPointArray( rect ) ) is not always the same as
-matrix.mapToPolygon( rect ).
-
-
                TQRegion TQWMatrix::mapToRegion ( const TQRect & rect ) const
-
                
-
-
                 Returns the transformed rectangle rect.
-
                 A rectangle which has been rotated or sheared may result in a
-non-rectangular region being returned.
-
                 Calling this method can be expensive, if rotations or shearing are
-used. If you just need to know the bounding rectangle of the
-returned region, use mapRect() which is a lot faster than this
-function.
-
                 
                See also TQWMatrix::mapRect().
-
-
                bool TQWMatrix::operator!= ( const TQWMatrix & m ) const
-
                
-Returns TRUE if this matrix is not equal to m; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                TQWMatrix & TQWMatrix::operator*= ( const TQWMatrix & m )
-
                
-Returns the result of multiplying this matrix by matrix m.
-
-
                bool TQWMatrix::operator== ( const TQWMatrix & m ) const
-
                
-Returns TRUE if this matrix is equal to m; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-
                void TQWMatrix::reset ()
-
                
-Resets the matrix to an identity matrix.
-
                 All elements are set to zero, except m11 and m22 (scaling)
-which are set to 1.
-
                 
                See also isIdentity().
-
-
                TQWMatrix & TQWMatrix::rotate ( double a )
-
                
-Rotates the coordinate system a degrees counterclockwise.
-
                 Returns a reference to the matrix.
-
                 
                See also translate(), scale(), and shear().
-
-
                Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp, desktop/desktop.cpp, drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, t14/cannon.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                TQWMatrix & TQWMatrix::scale ( double sx, double sy )
-
                
-Scales the coordinate system unit by sx horizontally and sy
-vertically.
-
                 Returns a reference to the matrix.
-
                 
                See also translate(), shear(), and rotate().
-
-
                Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp, fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp, movies/main.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                void TQWMatrix::setMatrix ( double m11, double m12, double m21, double m22, double dx, double dy )
-
                
-Sets the matrix elements to the specified values, m11, m12,
-m21, m22, dx and dy.
-
-
                void TQWMatrix::setTransformationMode ( TQWMatrix::TransformationMode m ) [static]
-
                
-Sets the transformation mode that TQWMatrix and painter
-transformations use to m.
-
                 
                See also TQWMatrix::TransformationMode.
-
-
                TQWMatrix & TQWMatrix::shear ( double sh, double sv )
-
                
-Shears the coordinate system by sh horizontally and sv
-vertically.
-
                 Returns a reference to the matrix.
-
                 
                See also translate(), scale(), and rotate().
-
-
                Examples: drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                TransformationMode TQWMatrix::transformationMode () [static]
-
                
-Returns the current transformation mode.
-
                 
                See also TQWMatrix::TransformationMode.
-
-
                TQWMatrix & TQWMatrix::translate ( double dx, double dy )
-
                
-Moves the coordinate system dx along the X-axis and dy along
-the Y-axis.
-
                 Returns a reference to the matrix.
-
                 
                See also scale(), shear(), and rotate().
-
-
                Examples: canvas/canvas.cpp, drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, t14/cannon.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
-
                Related Functions
                
-
                TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQWMatrix & m )
-
                
-
-
                 Writes the matrix m to the stream s and returns a reference
-to the stream.
-
                 
                See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
                TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQWMatrix & m )
-
                
-
-
                 Reads the matrix m from the stream s and returns a reference
-to the stream.
-
                 
                See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
-
-
-
                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                
-
-
                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                TQt 3.3.8
                
-
                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qworkspace-h.html b/doc/html/qworkspace-h.html
index d91abefc8..e66c4a252 100644
--- a/doc/html/qworkspace-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qworkspace-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qworkspace.h Include File
+ntqworkspace.h Include File
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
                
- 
-Home
- | 
-All Classes
- | 
-Main Classes
- | 
-Annotated
- | 
-Grouped Classes
- | 
-Functions
-
                TQWorkspace Class Reference
                [workspace module]
                
-
-
                The TQWorkspace widget provides a workspace window that can
-contain decorated windows, e.g. for MDI.
-More...
-
                #include <qworkspace.h>
-
                Inherits TQWidget.
-
                List of all member functions.
-
                Public Members
                
-
-
                Public Slots
                
-
-
                Signals
                
-
-
                Properties
                
-
-
                Detailed Description
                
-
-
-The TQWorkspace widget provides a workspace window that can
-contain decorated windows, e.g. for MDI.
-
                 
-
                 
-
-
-
                 MDI (multiple document interface) applications typically have one
-main window with a menu bar and toolbar, and a central widget that
-is a TQWorkspace. The workspace itself contains zero, one or more
-document windows, each of which is a widget.
-
                 The workspace itself is an ordinary TQt widget. It has a standard
-constructor that takes a parent widget and an object name. The
-parent window is usually a TQMainWindow, but it need not be.
-
                 Document windows (i.e. MDI windows) are also ordinary TQt widgets
-which have the workspace as their parent widget. When you call
-show(), hide(), showMaximized(), setCaption(), etc. on a document
-window, it is shown, hidden, etc. with a frame, caption, icon and
-icon text, just as you'd expect. You can provide widget flags
-which will be used for the layout of the decoration or the
-behaviour of the widget itself.
-
                 To change or retrieve the geometry of MDI windows you must operate
-on the MDI widget's parentWidget(). (The parentWidget() provides
-access to the decorated window in which the MDI window's widget is
-shown.)
-
                 A document window becomes active when it gets the keyboard focus.
-You can also activate a window in code using setFocus(). The user
-can activate a window by moving focus in the usual ways, for
-example by clicking a window or by pressing Tab. The workspace
-emits a signal windowActivated() when it detects the activation
-change, and the function activeWindow() always returns a pointer
-to the active document window.
-
                 The convenience function windowList() returns a list of all
-document windows. This is useful to create a popup menu
-"Windows" on the fly, for example.
-
                 TQWorkspace provides two built-in layout strategies for child
-windows: cascade() and tile(). Both are slots so you can easily
-connect menu entries to them.
-
                 If you want your users to be able to work with document windows
-larger than the actual workspace, set the scrollBarsEnabled
-property to TRUE.
-
                 If the top-level window contains a menu bar and a document window
-is maximised, TQWorkspace moves the document window's minimize,
-restore and close buttons from the document window's frame to the
-workspace window's menu bar. It then inserts a window operations
-menu at the far left of the menu bar.
-
                See also Main Window and Related Classes and Organizers.
-
-
                Member Type Documentation
                
-
                TQWorkspace::WindowOrder
                
-
-
                 Specifies the order in which windows are returned from windowList().
-
                  
-
                • TQWorkspace::CreationOrder - The windows are returned in the order of their creation
-
                • TQWorkspace::StackingOrder - The windows are returned in the order of their stacking
-
                
-
                Member Function Documentation
                
-
                TQWorkspace::TQWorkspace ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-
                
-Constructs a workspace with a parent and a name.
-
-
                TQWorkspace::~TQWorkspace ()
-
                  Destroys the workspace and frees any allocated resources. 
-
                void TQWorkspace::activateNextWindow () [slot]
-
                
-Activates the next window in the child window chain.
-
                 
                See also activatePrevWindow().
-
-
                void TQWorkspace::activatePrevWindow () [slot]
-
                
-Activates the previous window in the child window chain.
-
                 
                See also activateNextWindow().
-
-
                TQWidget * TQWorkspace::activeWindow () const
-
                
-Returns the active window, or 0 if no window is active.
-
-
                Example: mdi/application.cpp.
-
                void TQWorkspace::cascade () [slot]
-
                
-Arranges all the child windows in a cascade pattern.
-
                 
                See also tile().
-
-
                Example: mdi/application.cpp.
-
                void TQWorkspace::closeActiveWindow () [slot]
-
                
-Closes the child window that is currently active.
-
                 
                See also closeAllWindows().
-
-
                void TQWorkspace::closeAllWindows () [slot]
-
                
-Closes all child windows.
-
                 The windows are closed in random order. The operation stops if a
-window does not accept the close event.
-
                 
                See also closeActiveWindow().
-
-
                bool TQWorkspace::scrollBarsEnabled () const
-
                Returns TRUE if the workspace provides scrollbars; otherwise returns FALSE.
-See the "scrollBarsEnabled" property for details.
-
                void TQWorkspace::setScrollBarsEnabled ( bool enable )
-
                Sets whether the workspace provides scrollbars to enable.
-See the "scrollBarsEnabled" property for details.
-
                void TQWorkspace::tile () [slot]
-
                
-Arranges all child windows in a tile pattern.
-
                 
                See also cascade().
-
-
                Example: mdi/application.cpp.
-
                void TQWorkspace::windowActivated ( TQWidget * w ) [signal]
-
                
-
-
                 This signal is emitted when the window widget w becomes active.
-Note that w can be null, and that more than one signal may be
-emitted for a single activation event.
-
                 
                See also activeWindow() and windowList().
-
-
                TQWidgetList TQWorkspace::windowList ( WindowOrder order ) const
-
                
-Returns a list of all windows. If order is CreationOrder
-(the default) the windows are listed in the order in which they
-had been inserted into the workspace. If order is StackingOrder
-the windows are listed in their stacking order, with the topmost window
-being the last window in the list.
-
                 TQWidgetList is the same as TQPtrList.
-
                 
                See also TQPtrList.
-
-
                Example: mdi/application.cpp.
-
                TQWidgetList TQWorkspace::windowList () const
-
                
-This function is obsolete. It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-
                 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-
                 
-
                Property Documentation
                
-
                bool scrollBarsEnabled
                
-
                This property holds whether the workspace provides scrollbars.
-
                If this property is set to TRUE, it is possible to resize child
-windows over the right or the bottom edge out of the visible area
-of the workspace. The workspace shows scrollbars to make it
-possible for the user to access those windows. If this property is
-set to FALSE (the default), resizing windows out of the visible
-area of the workspace is not permitted.
-
-
                Set this property's value with setScrollBarsEnabled() and get this property's value with scrollBarsEnabled().
-
-
                
-This file is part of the TQt toolkit.
-Copyright © 1995-2007
-Trolltech. All Rights Reserved.
                
-
-
                Copyright © 2007
-TrolltechTrademarks
-
                TQt 3.3.8
                
-
                
-
diff --git a/doc/html/qwsdecoration.html b/doc/html/qwsdecoration.html
index d610ff285..793528952 100644
--- a/doc/html/qwsdecoration.html
+++ b/doc/html/qwsdecoration.html
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ appearance of the borders and buttons (the decoration) around the
 managed windows can be customized by creating your own class
 derived from TQWSDecoration and overriding a few methods.
 
                 This class is non-portable. It is available only in TQt/Embedded.
-
                 
                See also TQApplication::qwsSetDecoration() and TQt/Embedded.
+
                 
                See also TQApplication::qwsSetDecoration() and TQt/Embedded.
 
 
                Member Type Documentation
                
 
                TQWSDecoration::Region
                
@@ -97,13 +97,13 @@ moved by dragging.
 
 
                 Destroys a decorator.
 
-
                void TQWSDecoration::close ( TQWidget * widget ) [virtual]
+
                void TQWSDecoration::close ( TQWidget * widget ) [virtual]
 
                
 Called when the user clicks in the Close region.
 
                 widget is the widget to be closed.
 
                 The default behaviour is to close the widget.
 
-
                void TQWSDecoration::maximize ( TQWidget * widget ) [virtual]
+
                void TQWSDecoration::maximize ( TQWidget * widget ) [virtual]
 
                
 Called when the user clicks in the Maximize region.
 
                 widget is the widget to be maximized.
@@ -111,24 +111,24 @@ Called when the user clicks in the Maximize region.
 This method can be overridden e.g. to allow room for launch
 panels.
 
-
                TQPopupMenu * TQWSDecoration::menu ( const TQWidget *, const TQPoint & ) [virtual]
+
                TQPopupMenu * TQWSDecoration::menu ( const TQWidget *, const TQPoint & ) [virtual]
 
                
-Called to create a TQPopupMenu containing the valid menu operations.
+Called to create a TQPopupMenu containing the valid menu operations.
 
                 The default implementation adds all possible window operations.
 
-
                void TQWSDecoration::minimize ( TQWidget * widget ) [virtual]
+
                void TQWSDecoration::minimize ( TQWidget * widget ) [virtual]
 
                
 Called when the user clicks in the Minimize region.
 
                 widget is the widget to be minimized.
 
                 The default behaviour is to ignore this action.
 
-
                void TQWSDecoration::paint ( TQPainter * painter, const TQWidget * widget ) [pure virtual]
+
                void TQWSDecoration::paint ( TQPainter * painter, const TQWidget * widget ) [pure virtual]
 
                
 
 
                 Override to paint the border and title decoration around widget
 using painter.
 
-
                void TQWSDecoration::paintButton ( TQPainter * painter, const TQWidget * widget, Region type, int state ) [pure virtual]
+
                void TQWSDecoration::paintButton ( TQPainter * painter, const TQWidget * widget, Region type, int state ) [pure virtual]
 
                
 
 
                 Override to paint a button of type type using painter.
@@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ following OR-ed together:
 
              •  TQWSButton::On
 
              
 
-
              TQRegion TQWSDecoration::region ( const TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & rect, Region type = All ) [pure virtual]
+
              TQRegion TQWSDecoration::region ( const TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & rect, Region type = All ) [pure virtual]
 
              
 
 
               Returns the requested region type which will contain widget
diff --git a/doc/html/qwsdecoration_qws-h.html b/doc/html/qwsdecoration_qws-h.html
index 4f884ba6f..d8ba31521 100644
--- a/doc/html/qwsdecoration_qws-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qwsdecoration_qws-h.html
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 #define TQWSDECORATION_QWS_H
 
 #ifndef QT_H
-#include "qregion.h"
+#include "ntqregion.h"
 #endif // QT_H
 
 class TQPopupMenu;
diff --git a/doc/html/qwsinputmethod.html b/doc/html/qwsinputmethod.html
index 1295e8873..05edcba41 100644
--- a/doc/html/qwsinputmethod.html
+++ b/doc/html/qwsinputmethod.html
@@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ press.
 
 Implemented in subclasses to reset the state of the input method.
 
-
              void TQWSInputMethod::sendIMEvent ( TQWSServer::IMState state, const TQString & txt, int cpos, int selLen = 0 ) [protected]
+
              void TQWSInputMethod::sendIMEvent ( TQWSServer::IMState state, const TQString & txt, int cpos, int selLen = 0 ) [protected]
 
              
 
 
               Causes a TQIMEvent to be sent to the focus widget. state may be
@@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ is IMEnd). cpos is the current cursor position.
 the composition string (starting at cpos) that should be
 marked as selected by the input widget receiving the event.
 
-
              void TQWSInputMethod::setFont ( const TQFont & ) [virtual]
+
              void TQWSInputMethod::setFont ( const TQFont & ) [virtual]
 
              
 Implemented in subclasses to handle font changes in the focus
 widget.
diff --git a/doc/html/qwskeyboardhandler-members.html b/doc/html/qwskeyboardhandler-members.html
index 286f94bc6..47770cf64 100644
--- a/doc/html/qwskeyboardhandler-members.html
+++ b/doc/html/qwskeyboardhandler-members.html
@@ -37,49 +37,49 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 
 
 
              
diff --git a/doc/html/qwskeyboardhandler.html b/doc/html/qwskeyboardhandler.html
index 2fc066c41..e3b21204d 100644
--- a/doc/html/qwskeyboardhandler.html
+++ b/doc/html/qwskeyboardhandler.html
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; }
 for TQt/Embedded.
 More...
 
              #include <qkeyboard_qws.h>
-
              Inherits TQObject.
+
              Inherits TQObject.
 
              List of all member functions.
 
              Public Members
              
 
                
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ for TQt/Embedded.
 
                 The keyboard driver handles events from system devices and
 generates key events.
 
                 A TQWSKeyboardHandler will usually open some system device in its
-constructor, create a TQSocketNotifier on that opened device and
+constructor, create a TQSocketNotifier on that opened device and
 when it receives data, it will call processKeyEvent() to send the
 event to TQt/Embedded for relaying to clients.
 
                See also TQt/Embedded.
@@ -83,9 +83,9 @@ applications.
  unicode
 The Unicode value for the key, or 0xFFFF is none is appropriate.
  keycode
-The TQt keycode for the key (see TQt::Key for the list of codes).
+The TQt keycode for the key (see TQt::Key for the list of codes).
  modifiers
-The set of modifier keys (see TQt::Modifier).
+The set of modifier keys (see TQt::Modifier).
  isPress
 Whether this is a press or a release.
  autoRepeat
diff --git a/doc/html/qwsmousehandler.html b/doc/html/qwsmousehandler.html
index 916387bb8..6b4ad2171 100644
--- a/doc/html/qwsmousehandler.html
+++ b/doc/html/qwsmousehandler.html
@@ -53,13 +53,13 @@ The TQWSMouseHandler class is a mouse driver for TQt/Embedded.
 
                 The mouse driver handles events from system devices and generates
 mouse events.
 
                 A TQWSMouseHandler will usually open some system device in its
-constructor, create a TQSocketNotifier on that opened device and
+constructor, create a TQSocketNotifier on that opened device and
 when it receives data, it will call mouseChanged() to send the
 event to TQt/Embedded for relaying to clients.
 
                See also TQt/Embedded.
 
 
                Member Function Documentation
                
-
                TQWSMouseHandler::TQWSMouseHandler ( const TQString & driver = TQString::null, const TQString & device = TQString::null )
+
                TQWSMouseHandler::TQWSMouseHandler ( const TQString & driver = TQString::null, const TQString & device = TQString::null )
 
                
 Constructs a mouse handler. This becomes the primary mouse
 handler.
@@ -85,17 +85,17 @@ calibration screen). This version does nothing.
 
                 This method is reimplemented in the calibrated mouse handler to
 clear calibration information. This version does nothing.
 
-
                void TQWSMouseHandler::limitToScreen ( TQPoint & pt )
+
                void TQWSMouseHandler::limitToScreen ( TQPoint & pt )
 
                
 Ensures that the given point, pt is within the screen's
 boundaries, changing pt if necessary.
 
-
                void TQWSMouseHandler::mouseChanged ( const TQPoint & pos, int bstate )
+
                void TQWSMouseHandler::mouseChanged ( const TQPoint & pos, int bstate )
 
                
 When a mouse event occurs this function is called with the mouse's
 position in pos, and the state of its buttons in bstate.
 
-
                const TQPoint & TQWSMouseHandler::pos () const
+
                const TQPoint & TQWSMouseHandler::pos () const
 
                
 
 
                 Returns the mouse position.
diff --git a/doc/html/qwsserver.html b/doc/html/qwsserver.html
index b6d134a29..08a942568 100644
--- a/doc/html/qwsserver.html
+++ b/doc/html/qwsserver.html
@@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ The TQWSServer class provides server-specific functionality in TQt/Embedded.
 
                 When you run a TQt/Embedded application, it either runs as a server
 or connects to an existing server. If it runs as a server, some
 additional operations are provided by this class.
-
                 This class is instantiated by TQApplication for TQt/Embedded server
+
                 This class is instantiated by TQApplication for TQt/Embedded server
 processes. You should never construct this class yourself.
 
                 A pointer to the TQWSServer instance can be obtained via the global
 qwsServer variable.
@@ -135,10 +135,10 @@ server.
 
 
                 This specifies what sort of event has occurred to a top-level window:
 
                  
-
                • TQWSServer::Create - A new window has been created (TQWidget constructor).
+
                • TQWSServer::Create - A new window has been created (TQWidget constructor).
 
                • TQWSServer::Destroy - The window has been closed and deleted (TQWidget destructor).
-
                • TQWSServer::Hide - The window has been hidden with TQWidget::hide().
-
                • TQWSServer::Show - The window has been shown with TQWidget::show() or similar.
+
                • TQWSServer::Hide - The window has been hidden with TQWidget::hide().
+
                • TQWSServer::Show - The window has been shown with TQWidget::show() or similar.
 
                • TQWSServer::Raise - The window has been raised to the top of the desktop.
 
                • TQWSServer::Lower - The window has been lowered.
 
                • TQWSServer::Geometry - The window has changed size or position.
@@ -146,10 +146,10 @@ server.
 
                • TQWSServer::Name - The window has been named.
 
                
 
                Member Function Documentation
                
-
                TQWSServer::TQWSServer ( int flags = 0, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+
                TQWSServer::TQWSServer ( int flags = 0, TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
 
                
 Construct a TQWSServer object.
-
                 Warning: This class is instantiated by TQApplication for
+
                 Warning: This class is instantiated by TQApplication for
 TQt/Embedded server processes. You should never construct this
 class yourself.
 
                 The flags are used for keyboard and mouse setting. The server's
@@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ parent is parent and it is called name.
 
 Destruct TQWSServer
 
-
                const TQPtrList<TQWSWindow> & TQWSServer::clientWindows ()
+
                const TQPtrList<TQWSWindow> & TQWSServer::clientWindows ()
 
                
 
 
                 Returns the list of top-level windows. This list will change as
@@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ X11-style window properties.
 
 Returns the primary mouse handler.
 
-
                void TQWSServer::newChannel ( const TQString & channel ) [signal]
+
                void TQWSServer::newChannel ( const TQString & channel ) [signal]
 
                
 
 
                 This signal is emitted when the TQCopChannel channel is created.
@@ -223,12 +223,12 @@ Opens the mouse device(s).
 
 Refreshes the entire display.
 
-
                void TQWSServer::refresh ( TQRegion & r )
+
                void TQWSServer::refresh ( TQRegion & r )
 
                
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 
                 Refreshes the region r.
 
-
                void TQWSServer::removedChannel ( const TQString & channel ) [signal]
+
                void TQWSServer::removedChannel ( const TQString & channel ) [signal]
 
                
 
 
                 This signal is emitted immediately after the TQCopChannel channel is destroyed. Note that a channel is not destroyed until
@@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ if activate is FALSE the screensaver is deactivated.
 Returns TRUE if the screensaver is active (i.e. the screen is
 blanked); otherwise returns FALSE.
 
-
                void TQWSServer::sendIMEvent ( IMState state, const TQString & txt, int cpos, int selLen )
+
                void TQWSServer::sendIMEvent ( IMState state, const TQString & txt, int cpos, int selLen )
 
                
 This function sends an input method event to the server. The
 current state is passed in state and the current text in txt. The cursor's position in the text is given by cpos, and
@@ -277,12 +277,12 @@ defined. The default is platform-dependent.
 Set the mouse driver m to use if $TQWS_MOUSE_PROTO is not
 defined. The default is platform-dependent.
 
-
                void TQWSServer::setDesktopBackground ( const TQImage & img ) [static]
+
                void TQWSServer::setDesktopBackground ( const TQImage & img ) [static]
 
                
 Sets the image img to be used as the background in the absence
 of obscuring windows.
 
-
                void TQWSServer::setDesktopBackground ( const TQColor & c ) [static]
+
                void TQWSServer::setDesktopBackground ( const TQColor & c ) [static]
 
                
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 
                 Sets the color c to be used as the background in the absence of
@@ -302,11 +302,11 @@ corresponding removal.
 
 Sets the primary keyboard handler to kh.
 
-
                void TQWSServer::setMaxWindowRect ( const TQRect & r ) [static]
+
                void TQWSServer::setMaxWindowRect ( const TQRect & r ) [static]
 
                
 Sets the area of the screen which TQt/Embedded applications will
 consider to be the maximum area to use for windows to r.
-
                 
                See also TQWidget::showMaximized().
+
                 
                See also TQWidget::showMaximized().
 
 
                void TQWSServer::setScreenSaverInterval ( int ms ) [static]
 
                
@@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ Sets an array of timeouts for the screensaver to a list of ms
 milliseconds. A setting of zero turns off the screensaver. The
 array must be 0-terminated.
 
-
                TQWSWindow * TQWSServer::windowAt ( const TQPoint & pos )
+
                TQWSWindow * TQWSServer::windowAt ( const TQPoint & pos )
 
                
 Returns the window containing the point pos or 0 if there is no
 window under the point.
diff --git a/doc/html/qwswindow.html b/doc/html/qwswindow.html
index 4600a7d76..c6349f455 100644
--- a/doc/html/qwswindow.html
+++ b/doc/html/qwswindow.html
@@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ changed using raise(), lower(), 
 Destructor.
 
-
                TQRegion TQWSWindow::allocation () const
+
                TQRegion TQWSWindow::allocation () const
 
                
 
 
                 Returns the region that the window is allowed to draw onto,
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ including any window decorations but excluding regions covered by
 other windows.
 
                 
                See also requested().
 
-
                const TQString & TQWSWindow::caption () const
+
                const TQString & TQWSWindow::caption () const
 
                
 
 
                 Returns the window's caption.
@@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ or by the bounds of the screen; otherwise returns FALSE.
 
 Lowers the window below other windows.
 
-
                const TQString & TQWSWindow::name () const
+
                const TQString & TQWSWindow::name () const
 
                
 
 
                 Returns the window's name.
@@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Lowers the window below other windows.
 
 Raises the window above all other windows except "Stay on top" windows.
 
-
                TQRegion TQWSWindow::requested () const
+
                TQRegion TQWSWindow::requested () const
 
                
 
 
                 Returns the region that the window has requested to draw onto,
diff --git a/doc/html/qxml-h.html b/doc/html/qxml-h.html
index a3fccff68..b30a85f1e 100644
--- a/doc/html/qxml-h.html
+++ b/doc/html/qxml-h.html
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 
-
+
 
 
 
-qxml.h Include File
+ntqxml.h Include File